'v*imr  of 

?£3SSI 


NOTICE:  Return  or  renew  all  Library  Materials!  The  Minimum  Fee  for 
each  Lost  Book  is  $50.00. 

The  person  charging  this  material  is  responsible  for 
its  return  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  withdrawn 
on  or  before  the  Latest  Date  stamped  below. 

Theft,  mutilation,  and  underlining  of  books  are  reasons  for  discipli- 
nary action  and  may  result  in  dismissal  from  the  University. 

To  renew  call  Telephone  Center,  333-8400 

UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS  LIBRARY  AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 

JUN  0 2 1 

391 

MAY  0 1 

> 1991 

BUILDING 

USE  ONLY 

m 0 5 

m 

L161—  0-1096 

Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/lexiconmedicumor12hoop_0 


610.1 


VALUABLES  WORKS, 

Printed  by  J.  & J . Harper,  New-York,  and  for  sale  by  the  Booksellers  generally 
]/.  j~  in  the  United  States. 


THE  HISTORICAL  WORKS  of  the  Rev.  WIL- 
LIAM ROBERTSON,  D.D. ; comprising  his  HIS- 
TORY of  AMERICA  ; CHARLES  V. ; SCOTLAND, 
and  INDIA.  In  3 vols.  8vo.  Embellished  with  Plates. 
vSiereotyped.) 

Harper’s  edition  of  these  valuable  standard  works  is  far  superior,  in 
eterv  respect,  to  any  other  edition  ever  published  in  this  country  ; and 
is  to’ be  preferred  to  Jones’s  University  edition,  ?s  the.  type  is  larger, 
the  priming  and  paper  are  equally  good,  and  they  are  sold  for  less 
than  the  cash  price  of  that  condensed  edition.  Each  volume  is  a 
separate  history  in  itself ; and  may  be  purchased  separately,  or  bound 
uniformly  with  the  other  volumes  in  sets. 

GIBBON’S  HISTORY  of  the  DECLINE  and 
FALL  of  the  ROMAN  EMPIRE.  In  4 vols.  8vo. 
With  Plates. 

Harper’s  edition  of  Uibbon’s  History  is  stereotyped,  and  great  care 
has  been  taken  to  render  it  correct  and  perfect.  The  dates  originally 
introduced  by  the  Author  are  preserved  in  the  Tables  of. Contents 
prefixed  to  the  Volumes,  and  also  imbodied  in  the  text.  This  will 
render  the  present  edition  decidedly  preferable  to  the  English  edition 
in  four  volilmes,  as  in  the  latter  the  dates  and  Tables  of  Contents  are 
entirely  omitted. 

THE  HISTORY  OF  MODERN  EUROPE;  with  a 
View  of  the  Progress  of  Society,  from  the  Rise  of  the 
Modern  Kingdoms  to  the  Peace  of  Paris,  in  17G3.  By 
William  Russell,  LL.D. ; and  from  the  Peace  of  Paris, 
in  1763,  to  the  Treaty  of  Amiens,  in  1802.  By  William 
Jones,  Esq.  In  3 vols.  8vo.  With  Engravings.  (Ste- 
reotyped. Uniform  with  the  works  of  Robertson  and 
Gibbon.) 

HOOPER’S  MEDICAL  DICTIONARY.  From 
the  last  London  Edition.  With  additions,  by  Samuel 
Akerly,  M.D.  8vo.  (Stereotyped.) 

In  order  to  render  this  stereotype  edition  of  Hooper’s  Medical  Dic- 
tionary more  acceptable  to  the  medical  public  of  the  United  States, 
considerable  ad.ti'  ms  have  been  made,  particularly  on  Materia 
Medica,  Mineralogy  Botany,  Chymistry,  Biography,  Ac.  &c. 

GOOD’S  (Dr.  John  Mason)  STUDY  OF  MEDI- 
CINE. In  5 vols.  8vo.  A new  edition.  With  addi- 
tions by  Samuc.1  Cooper,  M.D. 

THE  BOOK  OF  NATURE;  being  a popular  Illus- 
t-ation  of  the  general  Laws  and  Phenomena  of  Crea- 
tion, in  its  Unorganized  and  Organized,  its  Corporeal 
and  Mental  Departments.  By  John  Mason  Good,  M.D. 
and  F.R.S.  In  one  vol.  8vo.  (Stereotyped.) 

“ — the  work  is  certainly  the  best  philosophical  digest  of  the  kind 
which  we  have  seen.” — London  Monthly  Review. 

COOPER’S  DICTIONARY  of  PRACTICAL  SUR- 
GERY. Revised  and  Enlarged.  In  2 vols.  8vo. 
(Stereotyped.) 

BROWN’S  DICTIONARY  OF  THE  HOLY 
BIBEE.  From  the  last  genuine  Edinburgh  edition. 
Containing  the  Author’s  last  additions -and  corrections, 
and  furtherenlarged  and  corrected  by  his  Sons;  with  a 
Life  of  the  Author  : and  an  Essay  on  the  Evidence  of 
Christianity.  Two  volumes  in  one,  8vo. 

A CONCORDANCE  to  the  HOLY  SCRIPTURES 
of  the  OLD  and  NF/W  TESTAMENTS  ; by  the  Rev. 
volm  Brown,  of  Haddington.  Printed  on  Diamond 
type,  in  the  32mo.  form.  (Stereotyped.) 

This  convenient  and  beautiful  lit’Ie  pocket  volume  contains,  ver- 
batim^'the  same  as  the  original  duodecimo  edition. 

ENGLISH  SYNONYMES,  with  copious  Illustra- 
tions and  Explanations,  drawn  from  the  best  writers. 
By  George  Crabb,  M.A.,  A new  Edition,  enlarged. 
8vo.  (Stereotyped.) 

DOMESTIC  DUTIES;  or  Instructions  to  Young 
Married  Ladies,  on  the  Management  of  their  House- 
hold, and  the  Regulation  of  their  Conduct  in  the 
various  relations  and  duties  of  Married  Life.  Bv  Mrs, 
William  Parkes.  Fifth  American  from  the  last 
London  Edition,  with  Notes  and  Alterations  adapted 
to  the  American  Reader.  12mo.  (Stereotyped.) 


SERMONS  ON  IMPORTANT  SUBJECTS,  by  the 
late  Rev.  and  pious  Samuel  Davies,  A.M.,  some  time 
President  of  the  College  of  New-Jersey.  To  which 
are  prefixed,  Memoirs  and  Character  of  the  Author : 
and  two  Sermons  on  occasion  of  his  Death,  by  the 
Rev.  Drs.  Gibbon  and  Finley.  Fourth  American 
Edition,  containing  all  the  Author’s  Sermons  over  pub- 
lished. In  3 vols.  8vo. 

ELEMENTS  OF  SURVEYING.  With  Copper- 
plate Engravings.  By  Charles  Davies,  Professor  of 
Mathematics,  U.  S.  Military  Academy.  8vo.  (The 
Tables  carefully  revised  and  stereotyped.) 

GIBSON’S  SURVEYING.  Improved  and  en- 
larged. By  James  Ryan,  Teacher  of  Mathematics, 
&c.  8vo. 

HISTORICAL  VIEW  of  the  LITERATURE  of 
the  SOUTH  OF  EUROPE.  By  M.  De  Sismondi. 
Translated  from  the  Original,  with  Notes.  By  Thomas 
Roscoe,  Esq.  In  2 vols.  8vo. 

THE  WORKS  of  the.  Rev.  JOHN  WESLEY,  A.M. 
With  his  LIFE.  Complete  in  10  vols.  8vo.  From  the 
last  London  Edition. 

WESLEY’S  MISCELLANEOUS  WORKS.  Con- 
taining his  Tracts,  Letters,  &c.  &c.  From  the  last 
London  Edition.  In  3 vols.  8vo. 

WESLEY’S  SERMONS  Containing  several  Ser- 
mons never  before  published  in  this  country.  In  3 vo- 
lumes. 8 vo. 

THE  HISTORY  of  the  JEWS,  from  the  earliest 
period  to  the  present  time.  By  Rev.  II.  H.  Milman. 
With  numerous  Maps  ami  Engravings.  In  3 vols. 
I8mo.  (Stereotyped.) 

THE  HISTORY  of  NAPOLEON  BUONAPARTE. 
With  numerous  Engravings.  In  2 vols.  18mo.  (Ste 
reotyped.) 

PELHAM ; or,  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A GEN- 
TLEMAN. A Novel.  In  2 vols.  12nio.  (By  the  Au- 
thor of  “ The  Disowned,”  and  “ Devereux.”)  From 
the  second  London  Edition.  (Stereotyped.) 

THE  DISOWNED.  By  the  Author  of  “ Pelham,” 
and  “ Devereux.”  A Novel.  In  2 vols.  (Stereotyped.) 

DEVEREUX.  A Novel.  In  2 vols.  12mo  By  the 
Author  of  “Pelham,”  and]  “ The  Disowned.”  (Ste- 
reotyped.) 

WAVERLEY;  or,  ’Tis  Sixty  Years  Since.  A 
Novel.  In  2 vols.  12ino.  Revised,  corrected,  and  en- 
larged, by  the  Author. 

***  Harper’s  stereotype  edition  of  Waverley  contains  upwards  of 
thirteen  thousand  words,  in  alterations  and  addi'ions,  not  in  any 
former  edition. 

LETTERS  FROM  THE  AEGEAN.  By  James 
Emerson,  Esq.  In  1 vol.  8vo. 

THE  LITERARY  REMAINS  OF  THE  LATE 
HENRY  NEELE,  Author  of  the  “ Romance  of  His- 
tory,” &c.  & c. — consisting  of  Lectures  on  English 
Poetry,  Tales,  and  other  Miscellaneous  Pieces  in  Prose 
and  Verse.  8vo. 

PRESENT  STATE  OF  CHRISTIANITY,  and  of 
the  Missionary  Establishments  for  its  ^Propagation,  in 
all  Parts  of  the  World.  Edited  by  Frederic  Scho- 
berl.  12mo. 

COMPLETE  WORKS  of  Dr.  SAMUEL  JOHN 
SON-  Comprising  the  Rambler — Idler — Rasselas — 
Lives  of  the  Poets — Letters — Poems — -Miscellanies, 
<fcc.  With  an  Essay  on  his  Life  and  Genius,  by  Arthur 
Murphy,  Esq.  In  3 vols.  8vo.  [In  Press.] 

VAN  HALEN’S  NARRATIVE  of  his  Imprison 
ment  in  the  Dungeons  of  the  Inquisition,  his  Escape, 
his  Journey  to  Madrid,  &c.  &c.  8vo. 


Dr  KrrrmNKR’s  COOK’S  ORACLE  and  HOUSE- 
KEEPER’S MANUAL.  Containing  Receip's  for 
Cookery,  and  Directions  for  Carving,  &c.  &c. : being 
the  Result  of  actual  Experiments  instituted  iti  the 
Kitchen  of  Wilmam  Kitciiinkr,  M.D.  Adapted  to 
the  American  Public,  by  a Medical  Gentleman.  l'2mo. 
f Stereotyped.) 


THE  REMINISCENCES  OF  THOMAS  DIBDIN. 
Author  of  tlie  11  Cabinet,”  &c.  &c.  2 vols.  in  1.  8vo 
THE  CONDITION  OF  GREECE,  in  1827  am 
By  J.  P.  Miller.  12mo. 

THE  RIVALS  OF  F.STE,  AND  OTHEP 
By  James  G.  Brooks  and  Mary  F.  Brooks 


Harper's  Stereotype  Edition , improved  and  enlarged. 


LEXICON  MEDICUM; 

OR 


ME DIC Ali  DICTIONARY; 


CONTAINING  AN  EXPLANATION  OF  THE  TERMS  IN 


ANATOMY, 
BOTANY, 
CHEMISTRY, 
MATERIA  MEDICA, 
MIDWIFERY, 


MINERALOGY, 
PHARMACY, 
PHYSIOLOGY, 
PRACTICE  OF  PHYSIC, 
SURGERY, 


AND  THE  VARIOUS  BRANCHES  OF 


NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY  CONNECTED  WITH  MEDICINE. 


SELECTED,  ARRANGED,  AND  COMPILED  FROM  THE  BEST  AUTHOR8. 


“ Nec  aranearum  sane  texus  ideo  melior,  quia  ex  se  fila  gignunt,  nec 
noster  vilior  quia  ex  alienis  libamus  ut  apes.” 

^ Just.  Lips.  Monit.  Polit.  Lib.  i.  cap.  1. 


By  ROBERT  HOOPER,  M.D.  F.L.S. 


THE  FOURTH  AMERICAN,  FROM  THE  LAST  LONDON  EDITION, 

WITH  ADDITIONS  FROM  AMERICAN  AUTHORS  ON  BOTANY,  CHEMISTRY,  MATERIA  MEDICA,  MINERALOGY,  &C 

By  SAMUEL  AKERLY,  M.D. 

FORMERLY  PHYSICIAN  TO  THE  NEW-YORK  CITY  DISPENSARY,  RESIDENT  PHYSICIAN  TO  THE  CITY  HOSPITAL, 
LATE  HOSPITAL  SURGEON  UNITED  STATES’  ARMY,  PHYSICIAN  TO  THE  NEW-YORK  INSTITUTION 
FOR  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  DEAF  AND  DUMB,  &C.  &C. 


IN  TWO  VOLUMES. 

YOL.  I. 


NEW-YORK : 

PRINTED  AND  PUBLISHED  BY  J.  & J.  HARPER. 

NO.  82  CLIFF-STREET, 

and  for  sale  by  the  principal  booksellers  throughout  the 

UNITED  STATES. 


1833 


SOUTHERN  DISTRICT  OF  NEW-YORK,  u. 

BE  iT  REMEMBERED,  That  on  the  15th  day  of  OcH  «r,  A.  D.  1S29,  in  the  fifty-fourth  year  of  the  independence  of  the 
United  States  of  America,  J.  & J.  HARPER,  of  the  said  district,  have  deposited  in  th»s  office  the  title  of  a book,  the  right 
whereof  they  claim  as  Proprietors,  in  the  words  following,  to  wit : 

“ Lexicon  Medicum  j or  Medical  Dictionary ; containing  an  explanation  of  the  terms  in  Anatomy,  Botany,  Chemistry,  Materia 
Medica,  Midwifery,  Mineralogy,  Pharmacy,  Physiology,  Practice  of  Physic,  Surgery,  and  the  various  branches  of  Natural  Philo- 
sophy connected  with  Medicine.  Selected,  arranged,  and  compiled  from  the  best  authors. 

‘ Nec  aranearum  sane  texus  ideo  melior,  quia  ex  se  fila  gignunt,  nec  noster  vilior  quia  ex  alienis  libamus  ut  apes.’ 

Just.  Lips.  Monit.  Polit.  Lib.  i.  cap.  i. 

By  Robert  Hooper,  M.D.  F.L.S.  The  fourth  American,  from  the  last  London  edition,  with  additions  from  American  authors  os 
Botany,  Chemistry,  Materia  Mcdica,  Mineralogy,  &c.  By  Samuel  Akerly,  M.D.,  formerly  physician  to  the  New-York  City 
Dispensary,  resident  physician  to  the  City  Hospital,  late  hospital  surgeon  United  States’  army,  physician  to  the  New-York  Institution 
for  the  Instruction  of  the  Deaf  and  Dumb,  &c.  &c.” 


In  conform  ity  to  the  Act  of  Congress  of  the  United  States,  entitled  “ An  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  Learning,  by  securing  the 
copies  of  maps,  charts,  and  I looks,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies,  during  the  time  therein  mentioned.”  And  also  to 
an  Aot,  entitle.!  “ An  Act,  supplementary  to  an  Act,  entitled  an  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  Learning,  by  securing  the  copies  of 
maps,  charts,  and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies,  during  the  times  therein  mentioned,  and  extending  the 
benefits  thereof  to  the  arts  of  designing,  engraving,  and  etching  historical  and  other  prints.” 

FREDERICK  I.  BETTS, 

Clerk  of  the  Southern  District  of  NeupYorb 


ADVERTISEMENT 


ro 

THE  FOURTH  AMERICAN  EDITION. 


In  order  to  render  the  Fourth  American  Edition  of  Hooper’s 
Medical  Dictionary  more  acceptable  to  the  Medical  public  of  the 
United  States,  considerable  additions  have  been  made,  selected 
from  American  authors,  particularly  on  Materia  Medica,  Mine- 
ralogy, &c.  &c.  For  these  additions  an  acknowledgment  is  due 
to  Dr.  James  Thacher,  for  the  extracts  we  have  made  from  his 
Medical  Biography,  to  Dr.  John  W.  Webster,  of  Boston,  for  the 
same  liberty  taken  with  his  Manuel  of  Chemistry,  and  to  Dr.  Jacob 
Bigelow,  for  the  use  of  his  Treatise  on  the  Materia  Medica. 
Copious  extracts  have  also  been  made  from  Professor  Cleaveland’s 
Mineralogy,  and  recourse  has  been  had  to  the  New-York  Medical 
Repository,  Burns’s  Mineralogical  Journal,  Eaton’s  Geoloev,  ana 
other  works,  for  the  purpose  of  introducing  new  and  interesting 
articles.  A number  of  obsolete  terms  have  been  omitted,  but  lest 
it  might  be  thought  by  some  to  injure  the  work  as  a standard  of 
modern  as  well  as  of  ancient  Medical  terms,  the  words  omitted  have 
been  inserted  in  the  form  of  an  Appendix. 


I » 


* 


. 


. 


- • 


V i 

j 

■ 


. 


' 


, ■ 


* : 


V 


• * 


PREFACE. 


In  the  present  edition  of  the  Medical  Dictionary,  the  principal 
additions  and  improvements  are  in  the  introduction  of  the 
terms  of  Botany  and  those  of  Mineralogy,  and  the  most  modern 
discoveries  in  Chemistry  and  Physiology.  The  work,  therefore,  will 
now  be  found  to  contain  an  account  of  every  article  connected 
with  the  study  of  medicine.  \ 

In  conducting  this  laborious  undertaking,  particular  attention  has 
been  given  to, 

1 The  accentuation,  in  order  that  the  proper  pronunciation  of 
the  words  may  be  obtained. 

!2.  The  derivation  of  the  terms,  and  the  declension  of  the  words 
in  common  use. 

3.  The  definitions,  which  are  from  the  most  approved  sources. 

4.  The  introduction  of  all  the  modern  discoveries  in  the  several 
branches  of  medical  science 

In  the  selection  and  arrangement  of  the  most  compendious,  the 
most  clear,  and  the  most  perfect  accoun  of  the  several  articles  of 
Anatomy,  Biography,  Botany,  Chemistry,  the  Materia  Medica, 
Midwifery,  Mineralogy,  Pathology,  Pharmacy,  and  Physiology;  the 
Compiler  has  again  to  acknowledge  his  obligations  to  Abernethy, 
Accum,  Aikin,  Albinus,  Bell,  Brande,  Bergius,  Blanchard,  Bums, 


Vlll 


PREFACE. 


Burserius,  Callisen,  Casselli,  Cooper,  Cruickshank,  Cullen,  Davy, 
Denman,  Duncan,  the  Editors  of  the  London  and  Edinburgh  Dis- 
pensaries, and  of  Rees’  Cyclopaedia,  and  Motherby’s  Medical  Dic- 
tionary, Fourcroy,  Good,  Haller,  Henry,  Hoffman,  Innis,  Latta, 
Larcy,  Lavoisier,  Lewis,  Linnaeus,  Majendie,  Meyer,  Murray, 
Nicholson,  Orfila,  Pott,  Richerand,  Richter,  Saunders,  Sauvage, 
Scarpa,  Smith,  Soemmering,  Swediaur,  Symonds,  Thomas,  Thomp- 
son, Turton,  Ure  (from  whose  condensed  and  comprehensive  work 
on  chemistry  large  extracts  have  been  made),  Vaughan,  Vossius. 
Willan,  Woodville,  &c.  &c. 

It  was  his  original  intention  to  give  to  each  writer  the  merit  of 
Jhe  particular  description  selected  from  his  work:  but  having  occa- 
sion to  consult,  frequently  to  abridge,  and  sometimes  to  alter,  various 
passages;  and  finding  it  difficult,  and  in  many  instances  impossible, 
to  discover  the  original  writer  of  several  articles;  and  convinced  at 
the  same  time  that  it  would  be  attended  with  no  particular  advan- 
tage, he  has  preferred  making  a general  acknowledgment  to  par- 
ticularizing the  labours  of  each  individual.  If  he  has  been  so  for- 
tunate as  to  have  compressed  within  the  narrow  limits  of  the  present 
publication  much  general  and  useful  information,  his  object  will  be 
fully  answered. 


A NEW 


MEDICAL*  DICTIONARY. 


ABB 

Al.  In  composition  this  letter,  the  a in  Greek  and 
• a in  Latin,  signifies  without : thus  aphonia , 
without  voice,  acaulis , without  stem,  aphyllus , with- 
out a leaf,  &c. 

2.  A.  aa.  (From  ava,  which  signifies  of  each.)  Ab- 
breviations of  ana , which  word  is  used  in  prescriptions 
after  the  mention  of  two  or  more  ingredients,  when  it 
implies,  that  the  quantity  mentioned  of  each  ingredi- 
ent should  be  taken;  thus,  R.  Potasses  nitratis — 
Sacchari  albi  aa  3 j.  Take  nitrate  of  potassa  and  white 
sugar,  of  each  one  drachm. 

A A' RON.  A physician  of  Alexandria,  author  of 
thirty  books  in  the  Syriac  tongue,  containing  the  whole 
practice  of  physic,  chiefly  collected  from  the  Greek 
writings,  and  supposed  to  have  been  written  before  A. 
D.  620.  He  first  mentioned,  and  described,  the  small- 
pox and  measles,  which  were  probably  brought  thither 
by  the  Arabians.  He  directed  the  vein  under  the 
tongue  to  be  opened  in  jaundice,  and  noticed  the  white 
colour  of  the  fieces  in  that  disease.  His  works  are  lost, 
except  some  fragments,  preserved  by  R hazes. 

AA'VORA.  The  fruit  of  a species  of  palm-tree 
which  grows  in  the  West  Indies  and  Africa.  It  is  of 
the  size  of  a hen’s  egg,  and  included  with  several  more 
in  a large  shell.  In  the  middle  of  the  fruit  there  is  a 
hard  nut,  about  the  size  of  a peach  stone,  which  con- 
tains a white  almond,  very  astringent,  and  useful 
against  a diarrhoea. 

Ajba'ctus.  Abigeatus.  Among  the  ancient  physi- 
cians, this  term  was  used  for  a miscarriage,  procured 
by  art,  or  force  of  medicines,  in  contradistinction  to 
abortus , which  meant  a natural  miscarriage. 

A'bacus.  (From  a Hebrew  word,  signifying  dust.) 
A table  for  preparations,  so  called  from  the  usage  of 
mathematicians  of  drawing  their  figures  upon  tables 
sprinkled  with  dust. 

Abax'sir.  Abasis.  Ivory  black  ; and  also  calcare- 
ous powder. 

ABALIENA'TIO.  Abalienation ; or  a decay  of 
the  body,  or  mind. 

ABALLENA'TUS.  1.  Corrupted. 

2.  A part  so  destroyed  as  to  require  immediate  ex- 
tirpation. 

3.  The  total  destruction  of  the  senses,  whether  ex- 
ternal or  internal,  by  disease. 

Abapti'sta.  (From  a,  priv.  and  /Jarrrw,  to  plunge.) 
Abaptiston.  1.  The  shoulders  of  the  old  trepan. 

2.  This  term  is  employed  by  Galen,  Fabricius  ab 
Aquapendente,  Scultetus,  and  others,  to  denote  the 
conical  saw  with  a circular  edge,  (otherwise  called 
modiolus,  or  terebra,)  which  was  formerly  used  by  sur- 
geons to  perforate  the  cranium. 

Abapti'ston.  See  Abaptista. 

Abarnahas.  A chemical  term  formerly  used  in  the 
transmutation  of  metals,  signifying  luna  plena,  magnes, 
or  magnesia. 

ABARTICULATION.  (From  ab,  and  articulus,  a 
joint.)  A species  of  articulation  which  has  evident 
motion.  See  Diarthrosis. 

Aba'sis.  See  Abaisir. 

ABBREVIATION.  The  principal  uses  of  medici- 
nal abbreviations  are  in  prescriptions,  in  which  they 
are  certain  marks,  or  half  words,  used  by  physicians 
for  despatch  and  conveniency  when  they  prescribe ; 
thus : — R readily  supplies  the  place  of  recipe — h.  s. 
that  of  hora  somni — n.  m.  that  of  nux  moschata — elect. 
that  of  electarium,  &c.;  and  in  general  all  the  names 
of  compound  medicines,  with  the  several  ingredients, 
are  frequently  wrote  only  up  to  their  first  or  second 
syllable,  or  sometimes  to  their  third  or  fourth,  to  make 
them  clear  and  expressive.  Thus  Croc.  Anglic,  stands 


ABD 

for  Crocus  Anglicanus — Conf.  Aromat.  for  Confectio 
Aromatica,  &c.  A point  being  always  placed  at  the 
end  of  such  syllable,  shows  the  word  to  be  incomplete. 

ABBREVIATUS.  Abbreviate;  shortened.  A term 
often  used  in  botany. 

ABDO  MEN.  ( Abdomen , inis.  n. ; from  abdo,  to 
hide ; because  it  hides  the  viscera.  It  is  also  derived 
from  abdere,  to  hide,  and  omentum , the  caul ; by  others 
omen  is  said  to  be  only  a termination,  as  from  lego , 
legumen , so  from  abdo , abdomen.)  The  belly.  The 
largest  cavity  in  the  bocjy,  bounded  superiorly  by  the 
diaphragm,  by  which  it  is  separated  from  the  chest ; 
interiorly  by  the  bones  of  the  pubes  and  ischium ; on 
each  side  by  various  muscles,  the  short  ribs  and  ossa 
ilii ; anteriorly  by  the  abdominal  muscles,  and  posteri- 
orly by  the  vertebrae  of  the  loins,  the  os  sacrum  and  os 
coccygis.  Internally  it  is  invested  by  a smooth  mem- 
brane, called  peritoneum,  and  externally  by  muscles 
and  common  integuments. 

In  the  cavity  of  the  belly  are  contained, 

Anteriorly  and  laterally, 

1.  The  epiploon.  2.  The  stomach.  3.  The  large 
and  small  intestines.  4.  The  mesentery.  5.  The  lac- 
teal vessels.  6.  The  pancreas.  7.  The  spleen.  8.  The 
liver  and  gall-bladder. 

Posteriorly,  without  the  peritoneum, 

1.  The  kidneys.  2.  The  supra-renal  glands.  3.  The 
ureters.  4.  The  receptacuium  chyli.  5.  The  descend- 
ing aorta.  6.  The  ascending  vena  cava. 

Pnfcriorly  in  the  pelvis,  and  without  the  peritoneum 

In  men,  1.  The  urinary  bladder.  2.  The  sperma- 
tic vessels.  3.  The  rectum. 

In  women,  besides  the  urinary  bladder  and  intesti 
num  rectum,  there  are, 

1.  The  uterus.  2.  The  four  ligaments  of  the  uterus. 
3.  The  two  ovaria.  4.  The  two  Fallopian  tubes. 
5.  The  vagina. 

The  fore  part  of  this  cavity,  as  has  been  mentioned, 
is  covered  with  muscles  and  common  integuments,  in 
the  middle  of  which  is  the  navel.  It  is  this  part  of  the 
body  which  is  properly  called  abdomen  ; it  is  distin- 
guished, by  anatomists,  into  regions.  See  Body. 

The  posterior  part  of  the  abdomen  is  called  the  loins, 
and  the  sides  the  flanks. 

ABDOMINALIS.  (From  abdomen,  the  belly.)  Ab- 
dominal ; pertaining  to  the  belly. 

Abdominal  hernia.  See  Hernia. 

Abdominal  muscles.  See  Muscles. 

Abdominal  regions.  See  Body. 

Abdominal  ring.  See  Annulus  Abdominis. 

ABDU'CENS.  See  Abducent. 

Abthicens  labiorum.  See  Levator  anguli  oris. 

ABDUCENT.  (Abducens ; from  ab,  from,  and  du- 
cere,  to  draw.)  The  name  of  some  muscles  which 
draw  parts  back  in  the  opposite  direction  to  others 
See  Abductor. 

Abducent  muscles.  See  Abductor. 

Abducent  nerves.  See  JVervi  abducentcs. 

ABDUC'TOR.  (From  abduco,  to  draw  away.'  Ab 
ducens.  A muscle,  the  office  of  which  is  to  pull  back 
or  draw  the  member  to  which  it  is  affixed  from  some 
other.  The  antagonist  is  called  adductor. 

Abductor  auricularis.  See  Posterior  auris. 

Abductor  auris.  See  Posterior  auris. 

Abductor  brevis  alter.  See  Abductor  polheis 
manus. 

Abductor  indicis  manus.  An  internal  interns 
seous  muscle  of  the  fore-finger,  situated  on  the  hand. 
Abductor  of  Douglas;  Semi-interosseous  indicis  of 
Winslow  ; Abductor  indicis  of  Cowper.  It  arises  from 
the  superior  part  of  the  metacarpal  bone,  and  the  os  tra 


ABE 


ABO 


pezium,  on  its  inside.,  by  a fleshy  beginning,  runs  to- 
wards the  metacarpal  bone  of  the  fore-finger,  adheres  to 
it,  and  is  connected  by  a broad  tendon  to  the  superior 
part  of  the  first  phalanx  of  the  fore-finger.  Sometimes 
it  arises  by  a double  tendon.  Its  use  is  to  draw  the 
fore-finger  from  the  rest,  towards  the  thumb,  and  to 
bend  it  somewhat  towards  the  palm. 

Abductor  indicis  pedis.  An  internal  interosseous 
muscle  of  the  fore-toe,  which  arises  tendinous  aud 
fleshy,  by  two  origins,  from  the  root  of  the  inside  of  the 
metatarsal  bone  of  the  fore-toe,  from  the  outside  of  the 
root  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe,  and  from 
the  os  cuneiforme  internum,  and  is  inserted  tendinous 
into  the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  fore- 
toe. Its  use  is  to  pull  the  fore-toe  inwards,  from  the 
rest  of  the  small  toes. 

Abductor  longus  pollicis  manus.  See  Extensor 
ossis  metacarpi  pollicis  manus. 

Abductor  medii  digiti  pedis.  An  interosseous 
muscle  of  the  foot,  which  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy, 
from  the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the 
middle  toe  internally,  and  is  inserted  tendinous  into 
the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  middle  toe. 
Its  use  is  to  pull  the  middle  toe  inwards. 

Abductor  minimi  digijt  manus.  A muscle  of  the 
little  finger,  situated  on  the  hand.  Carpo-phalangien 
du  petit  doigt  of  Dumas ; Extensor  tertii  intemodii 
minimi  digiti  of  Douglas;  Hypothenar  minor  of 
Winslow.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  pisiform  bone,  and 
from  that  part  of  the  ligamentum  carpi  annulare  next 
it,  and  is  inserted,  tendinous,  into  the  inner  side  of  the 
upper  end  of  the  first  bone  of  the  little  finger.  Its  use 
is  to  draw  the  little  finger  from  the  rest. 

Abductor  minimi  digiti  pedis.  A muscle  of  tile 
little  toe.  Calcaneo-phalangien  du  petit  doigt  of  Du- 
mas; Adductor  of  Douglas;  Parathenar  major  of 
Winslow,  by  whom  this  muscle  is  divided  into  two, 
Parathenar  major  and  metatarseus  ; Adductor  minimi 
digiti  of  Cowper.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy,  from 
the  semicircular  edge  of  a cavity  on  the  inferior  part  of 
the  protuberance  of  the  os  calcis,  and  from  the  rest  of 
the  metatarsai  bone  of  the  little  toe,  and  is  inserted 
into  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  little  toe  externally. 
Its  use  is  to  bend  the  little  toe,  aud  its  metatarsal  bone, 
downwards,  and  to  draw  the  little  toe  from  the  rest 

Abductor  oculi.  See  Rectus  externus  oculi. 

Abductor  pollicis  manus.  A muscle  of  the  thumb, 
situated-on  the  hand.  Scaphosus-phalangien  du  pouce 
of  Dumas;  Adductor  pollicis  manus,  and  Adductor 
brevis  alter  of  Albinus ; Adductor  thenar  Riolani  of 
Douglas  (the  adductor  brevis  alter  of  Albinus  is  the 
inner  portion  of  this  muscle) ; Adductor  pollicis  of 
Cowper.  It  arises  by  a broad  tendinous  and  fleshy  be- 
ginning, from  the  ligamentum  carpi  annulare,  and  from 
the  os  trapezium,  and  is  inserted  tendinous  into  the 
outer  side  of  the  root  of  the  first  bone  of  the  thumb.  Its 
use  is,  to  draw  the  thumb  from  the  fingers. 

Abductor  pollicis  pedis.  A muscle  of  the  great 
toe  situated  on  the  foot.  Calcaneo-phalangien  du  pouce 
of  Dumas ; Abductor  of  Douglas ; Thenar  of  Win- 
slow ; Abductor  pollicis  of  Cowper.  It  arises  fleshy, 
from  the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  protuberance  of  the 
os  calcis,  where  it  forms  the  heel,  and  tendinous  from 
the  same  bone,  where  it  joins  the  os  naviculare ; and 
is  inserted  tendinous  into  the  internal  sesamoid  bone 
and  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  great  toe.  Its  use  is 
to  pull  the  great  toe  from  the  rest. 

Abductor  tertii  digiti  pedis.  An  interosseous 
muscle  of  the  foot,  that  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy 
from  the  inside  and  the  inferior  part  of  the  root  of  the 
metatarsal  bone  of  the  third  toe ; and  is  inserted  ten- 
dinous into  the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the 
third  toe.  Its  use  is  to  pull  the  third  toe  inwards. 

Abebje'os.  (From  a,  neg.  and  fietiaios,  firm.)  Abe- 
bceus.  Weak,  infirm,  unsteady.  A term  made  use  of 
by  Hippocrates,  dc  Signis. 

Abebje'us.  See  Abebceos. 

ABELMO  SCHUS.  (An  Arabian  word.)  See  Hi- 
biscus Abelmoschus. 

Abelmosch.  See  Hibiscus  Abelmoschus. 

Abelmusk.  See  Hibiscus  Abelmoschus. 

ABERRA'TIO.  (From  ab  and  erro,  to  wander 
from.)  Formerly  applied  to  some  deviations  from 
what  was  natural,  as  a dislocation,  and  monstrosities. 

Abe'ssi.  (An  Arabian  term  which  means  fifth.) 
The  alvine  excrements. 

A'besum.  Quicklime. 


Abevacua  tio.  (From  ab,  dim,  and  evacuo,  to  pour 
out.)  A partial  or  incomplete  evacuation  of  the  pec- 
cant humours,  either  naturally  or  by  art. 

Abicum.  The  thyroid  cartilage. 

A BIES.  ( Abies , etis.  fem. ; from  abeo,  to  proceed, 
because  it  rises  to  a great  height;  or  from  amos,  a 
wild  pear,  the  fruit  of  which  its  cones  something  re- 
semble.) The  fir.  See  Pinus. 

Abies  Canadensis.  See  Pinus  Balsamea. 

Abigea'tus.  See  Abactus. 

ABIO'TOS.  (From  a,  neg.  and  jStoo),  to  live.) 
Deadly.  A name  given  to  liemlock,  from  its  deadly 
qualities.  See  Conium  maculatwm. 

ABLACTA'TIO.  (From  ab,  from,  and  lac,  milk.) 
Ablactation,  or  the  weaning  of  a child  from  the  breast. 

ABLATION.  ( Ablatio ; from  aufero,  to  take 

away.  1.  The  taking  away  from  the  body  whatever 
is  hurtful.  A term  that  is  seldom  used  but  in  its  gene- 
ral sense,  to  clothing,  diet,  exercise,  &c.  In  some  old 
writings,  it  expresses  the  intervals  between  two  fits  of 
a fever, 'or  the  time  of  remission. 

2.  Formerly  chemists  employed  this  term  to  signify 
the  removal  of  any  thing  that  is  either  finished  or  else 
no  longer  necessary  in  a process. 

ABLUE  NT.  (Abluens  ; from  abluo,  to  wash 
away.)  Abstergent.  Medicines  which  were  formerly 
supposed  to  purify  or  cleanse  the  blood. 

ABLUTION.  (Ablutio ; from  abluo,  to  wash  off.) 
1.  A washing  or  cleansing  either  of  the  body  or  the 
intestines. 

2.  In  chemistry  it  signifies  the  purifying  of  a body, 
by  repeated  affusions  of  a proper  liquor. 

Aboli'tio.  (From  aboleo,  to  destroy.)  The  sepa- 
ration or  destruction  of  diseased  parts. 

Aborsus.  A miscarriage. 

ABORTIENS.  Miscarrying. 

In  botany,  it  is  sometimes  used  synonymously  with 
sterilis,  sterile  or  barren. 

ABORTION.  ( Abortio ; from  aborior , to  be  sterile.) 
Aborsus;  Amblosis ; Diaphthora , Ectrosis ; Exam- 
bloma; Examblosis ; Apopallesis ; Apopalsis ; Apoph - 
thora.  Miscarriage,  or  the  expulsion  of  the  foetus  from 
the  uterus,  before  the  seventh  month,  after  which  it  is 
called  premature  labour.  It  most  commonly  occurs 
between  the  eighth  and  eleventh  weeks  of  pregnancy, 
but  may  happen  at  a later  period.  In  early  gestation,  the 
ovum  sometimes  comes  off  entire ; sometimes  the  foetus 
is  first  expelled,  and  the  placenta  afterwards.  It  is  pre- 
ceded by  floodings,  pains  in  the  back,  loins,  and  lower 
part  of  the  abdomen,  evacuation  of  the  water,  shiver- 
ings,  palpitation  of  the  heart,  nausea,  anxiety,  syncope, 
subsiding  of  the  breasts  and  belly,  pain  in  the  inside  of 
the  thighs,  opening  and  moisture  ol  the  os  tincae.  The 
principal  causes  of  miscarriage  are  blows  or  falls; 
great  exertion  or  fatigue ; sudden  frights  and  other  vio- 
lent emotions  of  the  mind : a diet  too  sparing  or  too 
nutritious ; the  abuse  of  spirituous  liquors ; other  dis- 
eases, particularly  fevers,  and  haemorrhages;  likewise 
excessive  bleeding,  profuse  diarrhoea  or  cholic,  parti- 
cularly from  accumulated  faeces ; immoderate  venery, 
&c.  The  spontaneous  vomiting  so  common  in  preg- 
nancy, rarely  occasions  this  accident : but  when  in- 
duced and  kept  up  by  drastic  medicines,  it  may  be  very 
likely  to  have  that  effect.  Abortion  often  happens 
witiiout  any  obvious  cause,  from  some  defect  in  the 
uterus,  or  in  the  foetus  itself,  which  we  cannot  satis- 
factorily explain.  Hence  it  will  take  place  repeatedly 
in  the  same  female  at  a particular  period  of  preg- 
nancy ; perhaps  in  some  measure  from  the  influence 
of  habit. 

The  treatment  of  abortion  must  vary  considerably 
according  to  the  constitution  of  the  patient,  and  the 
causes  giving  rise  to  it.  If  the  incipient  symptoms 
should  appear  in  a female  of  a plethoric  habit,  it  may 
be  proper  to  take  a moderate  quantity  of  blood  from 
the  arm,  then  clear  the  bowels  by  some  mild  cathartic, 
as  the  sulphas  magnesite  in  the  infusutn  rosae,  after- 
wards exhibiting  small  doses  of  nitrate  of  potash,  di- 
recting the  patient  to  remain  quiet  in  a recumbent  po- 
sition, kept  as  cool  as  possible,  with  q low  diet,  and 
the  antiphlogistic  regimen  in  other  respects.  Should 
there  be  much  flooding,  cloths  wetted  with  cold  water 
ought  to  be  applied  to  the  region  of  the  uterus,  or  even 
introduced  into  the  vagina,  to  obstruct  the  escape  of 
the  blood  mechanically.  YVhere  violent  forcing  pains 
attend,  opium  should  be  given  by  the  mouth,  or  in  the 
form  of  glyster,  after  premising  proper  evacuations. 


ABS 


ABS 


Bhould  these  means  not  avail  to  check  the  discharge  of 
the  forcing  pains,  and  particularly  if  the  water  be  eva- 
cuated, there  can  be  no  expectation  of  preventing  the 
miscarriage  ; and  where  there  is  reason  for  believing 
the  ftetus  dead,  from  the  breasts  having  previously 
subsided,  the  morning  sickness  gone  off',  the  motion 
stopped,  &c.  it  will  be  proper  rather  to  encourage  it  by 
manual  assistance. 

If  on  the  other  hand  females  of  a delicate  and  irri- 
table habit,  rather  deficient  in  blood,  be  subject  to  abor- 
tion, or  where  this  accident  is  threatened  by  profuse 
evacuations  and  other  debilitating  causes,  it  may  be 
more  probably  prevented  by  a diet  nutritious,  yet  easy 
of  digestion,  with  tonic  medicines,  and  the  use  of  the 
cold  bath,  attending  at  the  same  time  to  the  state  of 
the  bowels,  giving  opium  if  pain  attend,  and  carefully 
avoiding  the  several  exciting  causes. 

[When  a female  has  suffered  several  abortions,  it 
becomes  almost  impossible  to  prevent  a repetition  at 
the  same  period  of  gestation  in  a subsequent  preg- 
nancy. Nothing,  however,  will  be  so  successful  in 
preventing  a recurrence  of  a similar  misfortune,  as  in 
allowing  the  uterine  vessels  to  recover  their  tone ; for 
which  purpose  a sufficient  time  must  intervene  before 
the  next  conception,  otherwise  the  remedies  above  re- 
commended will  have  little  or  no  effect.  A.] 

ABORTIVE.  ( Abortivus ; from  aborior , to  be 

sterile.)  That  which  is  capable  of  occasioning  an  abor- 
tion, or  miscarriage,  in  pregnant  women.  It  is  now 
generally  believed,  that  the.  medicines  which  produce 
a miscarriage,  effect  it  by  their  violent  operation  on 
the  system,  and  not  by  any  specific  action  on  the  womb. 

[From  the  violent  operation  of  the  secale  cornutum , 
or  spurred  rye , upon  the  gravid  uterus,  it  has  been 
thought  that  it  would  act  at  any  period  of  gestation  as 
an  abortive ; but  the  experiments  and  trials  made  with 
it,  have  proved  it  to  be  inert,  having  no  specific  action 
upon  the  uterus,  except  in  time  of  labour.  A.] 

ABORTUS.  A miscarriage. 

Abra'sa.  (From  abrado , to  shave  off.)  Ulcers  at 
tended  with  abrasion. 

ABRASION.  {Abrasio ; from  abrado , to  tear  off) . 
This  word  is  generally  employed  to  signify  the  de- 
struction of  the  natural  mucus  of  any  part,  as  the  sto- 
mach, intestines,  urinary  bladder,  &c.  It  is  also  ap- 
plied to  any  part  slightly  torn  away  by  attrition,  as  the 
skin,  &c. 

A'brathan.  Corrupted  from  abrotanum,  southern- 
wood. See  Artemisia  abrotanum. 

A'brette.  See  Hibiscus  Abelmoschus. 

Abro'ma.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Bpwpa,  food  ; i.  e. 
not  fit  to  be ’eaten.)  A tree  of  New  South  Wales, 
which  yields  a gum. 

ABRO'TANU M.  (A 6poravov,  from  a,  neg.  and 
(3poros , mortal;  because  it  never  decays:  or  from 
afipos,  soft,  and  rovoj,  extension ; from  the  delicacy  of 
its  texture.)  Common  southernwood.  See  Artemisia. 

Abrotanum  mas.  See  Artemisia. 

ABROTONI'TES.  (From  abrotanum.)  A wine 
mentioned  by  Dioscorides,  impregnated  with  abro- 
tanum, or  southernwood,  in  the  proportion  of  about 
one  hundred  ounces  of  the  dried  leaves,  to  about  seven 
gallons  of  must. 

ABRUPTE'.  Abruptly.  Applied  to  pinnate  leaves 
which  terminate  without  an  odd  leaf  or  lobe folia 
abrupti  pinnata. 

Abscede  ntia.  (From  abscedo,  to  separate.)  De- 
cayed parts  of  the  body,  which,  in  a morbid  state,  are 
separated  from  the  sound. 

ABSCESS.  ( Abscessus ; from  abscedo , to  depart : 
because  parts,  which  were  before  contiguous,  become 
separated,  or  depart  from  each  other.)  Absccssio ; 
Imposthuma.  A collection  of  pus  in  the  cellular  mem- 
brane, or  in  the  viscera,  or  in  bones,  preceded  by  in- 
flammation. Abscesses  are  variously  denominated 
according  to  their  seat : as  empyema,  when  in  the  ca- 
vity of  the  pleura;  vomica, in  the  lungs;  panaris,  in 
any  of  the  fingers ; hypopyon,  in  the  anterior  chamber 
of  the  eye ; arthropuosis,  in  a joint ; lumbar  abscess,  &c. 

The  formation  of  an  abscess  is  the  result  of  inflam- 
mation terminating  in  suppuration.  This  is  known 
by  a throbbing  pain,  which  lessens  by  degrees,  as  well 
as  the  heat,  tension,  and  redness  of  the  inflamed  part ; 
and  if  the  pus  be  near  the  surface,  a cream-like  white- 
ness is  soon  perceived,  with  a prominence  about  the 
middle,  or  at  the  inferior  part,  theu  a fluctuation  may 
be  felt,  which  becomes  gradually  more  distinct,  till  at 


length  the  matter  mattes  its  way  externally.  When 
suppuration  occurs  to  a considerable  extent,  or  in  a 
part  of  importance  to  life,  there  are  usually  rigours,  or 
sudden  attacks  of  chilliness,  followed  by  flushes  of 
heat;  and  unless  the  matter  be  soon  discharged,  and 
the  abscess  healed,  hectic  fever  generally  comes  on. 
When  abscesses  form  in  the  cellular  membrane  in 
persons  of  a tolerably  good  constitution,  they  are  usu- 
ally circumscribed,  in  consequence  of  coagulable  lymph 
having  been  previously  effused,  and  having  obi  iterated 
the  communication  with  the  adjoining  cells ; but  in 
those  of  a weakly,  and  especially  a scrophulous  const! 
tution,  from  this  not  occurring,  the  pus  is  very  apt  to 
diffuse  itself,  like  the  water  in  anasarca.  Another  cir- 
cumstance, which  may  prevent  its  readily  reaching  the 
surface,  is  its  collecting  under  an  aponeurosis,  or  other 
part  of  dense  structure,  when  the  process  of  ulceration 
will  rather  extend  in  another  direction ; thus  pus  ac- 
cumulating in  the  loins,  may  descend  to  the  lower  part 
of  the  thigh. 

When  suppuration  occurs,  if  the  inflammation  have 
not  yet  subsided,  it  may  be  necessary  to  employ  means 
calculated  to  moderate  this,  in  order  to  limit  the  extent 
of  the  abscess:  but  evacuations  must  not  be  carried  too 
far,  or  there  will  not  be  power  in  the  system  to  heal  it 
afterwards.  If  the  disease  be  near  the  surface,  fo- 
mentations or  warm  emollient  poultices  should  be 
employed,  to  take  off  the  tension  of  the  skin,  and  pro- 
mote the  process  of  ulceration  in  that  direction.  As 
soon  as  fluctuation  is  obvious,  it  will  be  generally  pro- 
per to  make  an  opening,  lest  contiguous  parts  of  im 
portance should  be  injured;  and  often  at  an  earlier 
period,  where  the  matter  is  prevented  from  reaching 
the  surface  by  a fascia,  &c.,  but  it  is  sometimes  ad- 
visable to  wait  awhile,  especially  in  large  spontaneous 
abscesses,  where  the  constitution  is  much  debilitated, 
till  by  the  use  of  a nutritious  diet,  with  bark  and  other 
tonic  means,  this  can  be  somewhat  improved.  There 
are  different  modes  of  opening  abscesses.  1.  By  inci- 
sion or  puncture  ; this  is  generally  the  best,  as  being 
least  painful,  and  most  expeditious,  and  the  extent  of 
the  aperture  can  be  better  regulated.  2.  By  caustic ; this 
may  be  sometimes  preferable  when  suppuration  goes 
on  very  slowly  in  glandular  parts,  (especially  in  scro- 
phulous and  venereal  cases,)  lessening  the  subjacent 
tumour,  giving  free  vent  to  the  matter,  and  exciting 
more  healthy  action  in  the  sore;  but  it  sometimes 
causes  much  deformity,  it  can  hardly  reach  deep  seated 
abscesses,  and  the  delay  may  be  often  dangerous.  3. 
By  seton ; this  is  sometimes  advantageous  in  superfi- 
cial abscesses,  (where  suppuration  is  likely  to  con- 
tinue,) about  the  neck  and  face,  leaving  generally  but 
a small  scar ; likewise  when  near  joints,  or  other  im- 
portant parts  liable  to  be  injured  by  the  scalpel  or 
caustic.  See  Lumbar  Abscess,  and  Ulcer. 

ABSCES'SUS.  See  Abscess. 

ABSCISSION.  ( Abscissio ; from  ab , and  scindo , 
to  cut.)  1.  The  cutting  away  some  morbid,  or  other 
part,  by  an  edged  instrument.  The  abscision  of  the 
prepuce  makes  what  we  call  circumcision. 

2.  Abscission  is  sometimes  used  by  medical  writers  to 
denote  the  sudden  termination  of  a disease  in  death, 
before  it  arrives  at  its  decline. 

3.  Celsus  frequently  uses  the  term  abscissa  vox  to 
express  a loss  of  voice. 

Absinthites.  Absinthiac,  or  absinthiated.  Some- 
thing tinged  or  impregnated  with  the  virtues  of  absin- 
thium or  wormwood. 

ABSI'NTHIUM.  ( Absinthium , thii,  n.  a^ivQtov  t 
from  a,  neg.  and  ipivdog,  pleasant : so  called  from  the 
disagreeableness  of  the  taste.)  Wormwood.  See  Ar- 
temisia. 

Absinthium  commune.  Common  Wormwood. 
See  Artemisia  Absinthium. 

Absinthium  maritimum.  Sea  Wormwood.  See 

Artemisia  Maritima. 

Absinthium  ponticum.  Roman  Wormwood.  See 
Artemisia  Pontica. 

Absinthium  vulgare.  Common  Wormwood.  See 
Artemisia  Absinthium. 

ABSORBENS.  See  Absorbent. 

ABSORBENT.  ( Absorbens  ; from  absorbeo,  to  suck 
up.)  1.  The  small,  delicate,  transparent  vessels,  which 
take  up  substances  from  the  surface  of  the  body,  or 
from  any  cavity,  and  carry  it  to  the  blood,  are  termed 
absorbents  or  absorbing  vessels.  They  are  denomi- 
nated, according  to  the  liquids  which  they  convey 


aBV 

lacteala  and  lymphatics.  See  Lacteal  and  Lym-  . 
phatic. 

2 Those  medicines  are  so  termed,  which  have  no 
acrimony  in  themselves,  and  destroy  acidities  in  the 
stomach  and  bowels ; such  are  magnesia,  prepared 
chalk,  oyster-shells,  crabs’  claws,  &c. 

3.  Substances  are  also  so  called  by  chemists,  which 
have  the  faculty  of  withdrawing  moisture  from  the 
atmosphere. 

Absorbing  vessels.  See  Absorbent. 

ABSORPTION.  ( Absorptio ; from  absorbeo,  to 
suck  up.)  1.  A function  in  an  animated  body,  ar- 
ranged by  physiologists  under  the  head  of  natural  ac- 
tions. It  signifies  the  taking  up  of  substances  applied 
to  the  mouths  of  absorbing  vessels ; thus  the  nutritious 
part  of  the  food  is  absorbed  from  the  intestinal  canal 
by  the  lacteals ; thus  msrcury  is  taken  into  the  system 
by  the  lymphatics  of  the  skin,  &c.  The  principle  by 
which  this  function  takes  place,  is  a power  inherent  in 
the  mouths  of  the  absorbents,  a vis  insita , dependent 
on  the  degree  of  irritability  of  their  internal  membrane 
by  which  they  contract  and  propel  their  contents  for- 
wards. 

2.  By  this  term  chemists  understand  the  conversion 
of  a gaseous  fluid  into  a liquid  or  solid,  on  being  united 
with  some  other  substance.  It  differs  from  condensation 
in  this  being  the  effect  of  mechanical  pressure. 

f Absorption  by  plants. — In  1804,  Dr.  Foote  sent  to 
Dr.  Mitcliill  of  New-York,  a peach,  with  the  following 
account  of  it “ I present  you  with  a peach  by  the 
bearer.  You  will  readily  perceive  that  I could  not  be 
induced  to  this  from  any  thing  very  promising  in  its 
aspect,  the  richness  of  its  flavour,  or  the  singularity  of 
its  species.  On  tasting,  you  will  find  it  highly  charged 
with  muriate  of  soda  : and  when  I inform  you  that  it 
has  undergone  no  artificial  management,  but  possessed 
this  property  when  plucked  from  the  tree,  you  may 
find  some  difficulty  in  explaining  the  fact. 

“ This  peach  was  presented  to  me  by  Mr.  Solomon 
Brewer,  of  Westchester  Co.,  New-York,  my  former 
residence.  Mr.  B.  is  a respectable  man,  and  the  pre- 
sent clerk  of  the  town  in  which  he  lives.  The  history 
he  gives  me  of  this  natural  salt-peach  is,  that  it  grew 
in  his  neighbourhood,  on  a tree,  around  the  body  and 
roots  of  which  had  been  accidentally  poured  a quan- 
tity of  pork  or  beef-brine  ; that  its  fruit  ripens  in  the 
month  of  September  ; that  the  effect  of  the  brine  had 
been,  to  produce  a sickness  and  decay  in  the  tree  ; and 
that  at  this  time  (Sept.  1804)  it  presents  the  singular 
fact  of  a tree  hanging  tolerably  full  of  salt  peaches. 
He  was  unable  to  inform  me  of  the  precise  time  of  the 
occurrence,  but  that  it  was  the  fore-part  of  summer, 
and  after  the  fruit  had  obtained  its  shape  and  some 
size.  This  fact,  as  respects  the  vegetable  kingdom, 
is  in  my  mind  an  isolated  one. 

“ I have  felt  the  more  interest  in  noticing  this  fact, 
as  it  contributes  much  to  strengthen  and  confirm  the 
opinion  you  long  since  advanced,  that  certain  vegeta- 
bles, as  wheat,  partake  much  of  the  properties  of  the 
manure  which  is  used  as  their  aliment,  and  thence 
urge  with  much  propriety  the  importance  of  the  sub- 
ject to  agriculturists.” — See  Med.  Repos,  of  JYew  York, 
vol.  viii.  p.  209.  A.] 

ABSTEMIOUS.  ( Abstemius ; from  abs,  from,  and 
temetum , wine.)  Refraining  absolutely  from  all  use  of 
wine  ; but  the  term  is  applied  to  a temperate  mode  of 
living,  with  respect  to  food  generally. 

Abste'ntio.  Cffilius  Aurelianus  uses  this  word  to 
express  a suppression,  or  retention:  thus,  abstentio 
stercorum,  a retention  of  the  excrements,  which  he 
mentions  as  a symptom  very  frequent  in  a satyriasis. 
In  a sense  somewhat  different,  he  uses  the  word  ab- 
stcnta,  applying  it  to  the  pleura,  where  he  seems  to 
mean  that  the  humour  of  the  inflamed  pleura  is 
prevented,  by  the  adjacent  bones,  from  extending 
itself. 

ABSTERGENT.  ( Abstergens ; from  abstergo , to 
cleanse  away.)  Any  application  that  cleanses  or  clears 
away  foulness.  The  term  is  seldom  employed  by 
modern  writers. 

ABSTRACTION.  (From  abstraho , to  draw  away.) 
A term  employed  by  chemists  in  the  process  of  humia 
distillation,  to  signify  that  the  fluid  body  is  again  drawn 
off  from  the  solid,  which  it  had  dissolved. 

A'bsus.  The  Egyptian  lotus. 

Abvacua'tio.  (From  abvacuo,  to  empty.)  A mor- 
bid discharge ; a large  evacuation  of  any  fluid,  as  of 


ACA 

blood  from  a plethoric  person.  A term  used  by  some 
old  writers. 

ACA'CIA.  ( Acacia , ce.  f.  aicaiaa ; from  axa^w,  to 
sharpen.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  Folygamia;  Order,  Moncecia. 
The  Egyptian  thorn. 

Acacia  catechu.  This  plant  affords  a drug,  form- 
erly supposed  to  be  an  earthy  substance  brought  from 
Japan,  and  therefore  called  terra  Japonica , or  Japan 
earth ; afterwards  it  appeared  to  be  an  extract  prepared 
in  India,  it  was  supposed  till  lately,  from  the  juice  of 
the.  Mimosa  catechu,  by  boiling  the  wood  and  evapo- 
rating the  decoction  by  the  heat  of  the  sun.  But  the 
shrub  is  now  ascertained  to  be  an  acacia,  and  is  termed 
Acacia  catechu.  It  grows  in  great  abundance  in  the 
kingdom  of  Bahar,  and  catechu  comes  to  us  principally 
from  Bengal  and  Bombay.  It  has  received  the  follow- 
ing names:  Acachou;  Faufel;  Ccetchu;  Caschu;  Ca- 
techu; Cadtchu;  Cashow;  Caitchu;  Castjoe;  Gachu; 
Cate;  Kaatli.  The  natives  call  it  Cutt,  the  English 
who  reside  there  Cutch.  In  its  purest  state,  it  is  a dry 
pulverable  substance,  outwardly  of  a reddish  colour, 
internally  of  a shining  dark  brown,  tinged  with  a red- 
dish hue ; in  the  mouth  it  discovers  considerable  ad- 
stringency,  succeeded  by  a sweetish  mucilaginous  taste. 
It  may  be  advantageously  employed  for  most  purposes 
where  an  adstringent  is  indicated  ; and  is  particularly 
useful  in  alvine  fluxes,  where  astringents  are  required. 
Besides  this,  it  is  employed  also  in  uterine  profluvia, 
in  laxity  and  debility  of  the  viscera  in  general ; and  it  is 
an  excellent  topical  adstringent,  when  suffered  to  dis- 
solve leisurely  in  the  mouth,  for  laxities  and  ulcerations 
of  the  gums,  apththous  ulcers  in  the  mouth,  and  simi- 
lar affections.  This  extract  is  the  basis  of  several 
formulae  in  our  pharmacopoeias,  particularly  of  a tinc- 
ture : but  one  of  the  best  forms  under  which  it  can  be 
exhibited,  is  that  of  simple  infusion  in  warm  water  with 
a proportion  of  cinnamon,  for  by  this  means  it  is  at 
once  freed  of  its  impurities  and  improved  by  the  addi- 
tion of  the  aromatic. 

Fourcroy  says  that  catechu  is  prepared  from  the  seeds 
of  a kind  of  palm,  called  areca.  Sir  Humphrey  Davy 
has  analyzed  catechu,  and  from  his  examination  it  ap- 
pears, that  from  Bombay  is  of  uniform  texture,  red- 
brown  colour,  and  specific  gravity  1.39 : that  from  Ben- 
gal is  more  friable  and  less  consistent,  of  a chocolate 
colour  externally,  but  internally  chocolate  streaked  with 
red-brown,  and  specific  gravity  1.28.  The  catechu  from 
either  place  differs  little  in  its  properties.  Its  taste  is 
astringent,  leaving  behind  a sensation  of  sweetness.  It 
is  almost  wholly  soluble  in  water.  Two  hundred  grains 
of  picked  catechu  from  Bombay  afforded  109  grains  of 
tannin,  66  extractive  matter,  13  mucilage,  10  residuum, 
chiefly  sand  and  calcareous  earth.  The  same  quantity 
from  Bengal ; tannin  97  grains,  extractive  matter  73, 
mucilage  16,  residual  matter,  being  sand,  with  a small 
quantity  of  calcareous  and  aluminous  earths,  14.  Of 
the  latter,  the  darkest  parts  appeared  to  afford  most 
tannin,  the  lightest  most  extractive  matter.  The  Hin- 
doos prefer  the  lightest  coloured,  which  has  probably 
most  sweetness,  to  chew  with  the  betel-nut. 

Of  all  the  astringent  substances  w e know,  catechu 
appears  to  contain  the  largest  proportion  of  tannin; 
and  Mr.  Purkis  found,  that  one  pound  was  equivalent 
to  seven  or  eight  of  oak  bark  for  the  purpose  of  tanning 
ieather. 

[The  tinctura  Japonica  is  a powerful  and  useful 
astringent  in  looseness  of  the  bowels.  Many  persons 
take  this  preparation  when  they  are  not  aware  of  it, 
and  when  there  is  no  occasion.  It  is  used  to  colour 
fictitious  and  imitation  brandies  made  in  the  United 
States,  and  from  the  quantity  used,  these  liquors  al- 
ways produce  costiveness.  A.] 

Acacia  Germanica.  German  acacia. 

1.  The  name  of  the  German  black-thorn  or  sloe-tree, 
the  Prunus  spinosa  of  Linnams. 

2.  The  name  of  the  inspissated  juice  of  the  fruit,  as 
made  in  Germany ; which,  as  well  as  the  tree,  is  there 
called  also  Acacia  nostras.  It  is  now  fallen  into 
disuse. 

Acacia  Indica.  See  Tamarindus  Indica* 

Acacia  nostras.  See  Acacia  Germanica. 

Acacia  vera.  1.  The  systematic  name  of  the  tree 
which  affords  gum-arabic,  formerly  supposed  to  be  a 
Mimosa.  Acacia: — spinis  stipularibus  patcntibus , 
foliis  bipinnatis,  partialibus  eztimis  glandula  mter- 
stinctis , spicis  globosis  pedunculatis,  of  Wildenow 


ACA 


ACA 


The  Egyptian  Thorn.  This  tree  yields  the  true  Acacia 
Gum,  or  Gum-Arabic,  called  also  Gummi  acanthinum  ; 
Gummi  thebaicum;  Gummi  scorpionis ; Gum-lamac; 
Gummi  senega , or  semca , or  senegulense. 

Cairo  and  Alexandria  were  the  principal  marts  for 
gum-arabic,  till  the  Dutch  introduced  the  gum  from 
Senegal  into  Europe,  about  the  beginning  of  the  seven- 
teenth century,  and  this  source  now  supplies  the  greater 
part  of  the  vast  consumption  of  this  article.  The  tree 
which  yields  the  Senegal  gum,  grows  abundantly  on  the 
sands,  along  the  whole  of  the  Barbary  coast,  and  par- 
ticularly about  the  river  Senegal.  There  are  several 
species,  some  of  which  yield  a red  astringent  juice, 
but  others  afford  only  a pure,  nearly  colourless,  insipid 
gum,  which  is  the  great  article  of  commerce.  These 
trees  are  from  eighteen  to  twenty  feet  high,  with  thorny 
branches.  The  gum  makes  its  appearance  about  the 
middle  of  November,  when  the  soil  has  been  thoroughly 
saturated  with  periodical  rains.  The  gummy  juice  is 
seen  to  ooze  through  the  trunk  and  branches,  and,  in 
about  a fortnight,  it  hardens  into  roundish  drops,  of  a 
yellowish  white,  which  are  beautifully  brilliant  where 
they  are  broken  off,  and  entirely  so  when  field  in  the 
mouth  for  a short  time,  to  dissolve  the  outer  surface. 
No  clefts  are  made,  nor  any  artificial  means  used  by 
the  Moors,  to  solicit  the  flow  of  the  gum.  The  lumps 
of  gum-senegal  are  usually  about  the  size  of  partridge 
eggs,  and  the  harvest  continues  about  six  weeks.  This 
gum  is  a very  wholesome  and  nutritious  food ; thou- 
sands of  the  Moors  support  themselves  entirely  upon  it 
during  the  time  of  harvest.  About  six  ounces  is  suffi- 
cient to  support  a man  for  a day;  and  it  is,  besides, 
mixed  with  milk,  animal  broths,  and  other  victuals. 

The  gum-arabic,  or  that  which  comes  directly  from 
Egypt  and  the  Levant,  only  differs  from  the  gum-sene- 
gal  in  being  of  a lighter  colour,  and  in  smaller  lumps  ; 
and  it  is  also  somewhat  more  brittle.  In  other  respects, 
they  resemble  each  other  perfectly. 

Gum-arabic  is  neither  soluble  in  spirit  nor  in  oil ; 
but,  in  twice  its  quantity  of  water,  it  dissolves  into  a 
mucilaginous  fluid,  of  the  consistence  of  a thick  syrup, 
and  in  this  state  answers  many  useful  pharmaceutical 
purposes,  by  rendering  oily,  resinous,  and  pinguious 
substances  miscible  with  water.  The  glutinous  quality 
of  gum-arabic  renders  it  preferable  to  other  gums  and 
mucilages  as  a demulcent  in  coughs,  hoarsenesses,  and 
other  catarrhal  affections.  It  is  also  very  generally 
employed  in  ardor  urinae,  diarrhoeas,  and  calculous 
complaints. 

2.  The  name  Acacia  vera  has  also  been  used  to  de- 
note the  expressed  juice  of  the  immature  pods  of  the 
tree  termed  Acacia  veravel.  This  inspissated  juice  is 
brought  from  Egypt  in  roundish  masses,  wrapped  up 
in  thin  bladders.  It  is  considered  as  a mild  astringent 
medicine.  The  Egyptians  give  it,  in  spitting  of  blood, 
in  the  quantity  of  a drachm,  dissolved  in  any  conve- 
nient liquor,  and  repeat  this  dose  occasionally.  They 
likewise  employ  it  in  collyria,  for  strengthening  the 
eyes,  and  in  gargles,  for  quinsies.  It  is  now  seldom 
used  as  a medicine,  being  superseded  by  the  use  of 
catechu,  or  kino. 

Acacia  veravel.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Acacia  Zeylonica.  See  Hcematoxylon  Campechia- 
num. 

Acacia  gum.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Acacos.  The  thrush.  See  Aphtha. 

ACALYCINUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  calyx , a flower- 
cup.)  Without  a calyx. 

ACALYCIS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  calyx , a flower- 
cup.)  Without  a calyx  or  flower-cup.  Applied  to 
plants  which  have  no  calyx. 

Aca'matos.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Kay. vw,  to  grow 
weary.)  A perfect  rest  of  the  muscles,  or  that  dispo- 
sition of  a limb  which  is  equally  distinct  from  flexion 
and  extension. 

ACA'NTHA.  (AKavda;  from  aKi 7,  a point.) 

1.  A thorn ; or  any  thing  pointed. 

2.  Sometimes  applied  to  the  spina  dorsi. 

Acantha' bolus.  (From  a/cavfla,  a thorn;  and/foAAo, 

to  cast  out.)  An  instrument,  or  forceps,  for  taking  out 
or  removing  thorns,  or  whatever  may  stick  in  the  flesh. 
— Paulus  JEgineta. 

Aca'nthe.  The  name  of  the  artichoke  in  ancient 
authors. 

ACA'NTHINUM.  (From  aKavda,  a thorn.)  Gum- 
arabic  was  called  gummi  acanthinum , because  it  is 
produced  from  a thorny  tree.  See  Acacia  Vera. 


Acanticone.  See  Epidotc. 

ACA'NTIIULUS.  (From  aKavOa , a thorn.)  A 
surgical  instrument  to  draw  out  thorns  or  splinters,  or 
to  remove  any  extraneous  matter  from  wounds. 

ACA'NTHUS.  ( Acanthus , i.  m.  atcavdos ; from 
aKavda , a thorn ; so  named  from  being  rough  and 
prickly.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
ntean  system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Order,  Angiosper- 
mia.  Bear’s-breech. 

Acanthus  mollis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
bear’s-breech,  or  brank-ursine.  Acanthus: — foliis 
sinuatis  inermibus , of  Linnaeus.  Branca  ursina  of  the 
shops.  The  leaves  and  root  abound  with  a mucilage, 
which  is  readily  extracted  by  boiling  or  infusion.  The 
roots  are  the  most  mucilaginous.  Where  this  plant  is 
common,  it  is  employed  for  the  same  purposes  to  which 
althaea  and  other  vegetables  possessing  similar  qualities 
are  applied  among  us.  It  is  fallen  into  disuse.  The 
herb-women  too  often  sell  the  leaves  of  bear’s-foot,  and 
of  cow’s  parsnip,  for  the  bear’s-breech. 

Aca'pnon.  (From  a,  priv.  and  Kairvoy,  smoke.)  1. 
Common  wild  marjoram. 

2.  U nsmoked  honey. 

ACAROIS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants,  from 
New  South  Wales. 

Acarois  resinifera.  The  name  of  a tree  which 
affords  the  Botany  bay  gum.  See  Botany  bay. 

[Gum  Acaroides,  New  Holland  resin,  or  earthy 
gum-lac.  This  is  the  produce  of  the  tree  called  Aca- 
rois resinifera,  or  resin-bearing  Acarois.  The  tree 
grows  abundantly  in  New  Holland,  near  Botany  bay. 
The  substance  under  consideration  is  usually  found  in 
the  ground  near  the  trees  from  which  it  has  sponta- 
neously exuded.  From  some  resemblance  it  bears 
(though  by  no  means  a near  one)  to  the  article  called 
gum-lac , it  has  been  known  as  the  earthy  gum-lac. 
It  is  of  yellowish,  brownish,  or  yellowish  brown  colour, 
and  sometimes  contains  roots,  sticks,  and  other  foreign 
substances.  It  has  been  distinguished  in  commerce  by 
the  term  Botany  bay  resin.  They  refer  its  importa- 
tion into  England  to  the  year  1799.  An  account  of  its 
chemical  properties  was  published  by  Lichtenstein  in 
Crell’s  Journal,  and  afterwards  by  Dr.  Thompson,  in 
the  fourth  volume  of  his  Chemistry,  p.  138.  It  was 
known  to  the  early  navigator  Tasman,  and  was  brought 
to  New-York  and  presented  to  Dr.  Mitchill  many 
years  ago  by  some  of  our  navigators.  For  some  time 
past  it  has  been  regarded  in  Massachusetts  as  a pow- 
erful restorative,  or  an  invigorating  medicine  in  cases 
of  gastric  or  general  debility. 

Gum  Acaroides  is  insoluble  in  water : alcohol  or  dis- 
tilled spirits  is  its  proper  menstruum.  Even  in  pow- 
der its  use  is  improper,  as  it  is  not  acted  upon  by  the 
intestinal  or  alimentary  fluids.  It  is  therefore  neither 
administered  in  substance,  infusion,  or  decoction.  It  is 
mostly  prescribed  in  the  form  of  tincture : Tinctura 
gummi  acaroidis.  Tincture  of  New  Holland  resin. 

The  proper  rule  is  to  make  a saturated  tincture,  of 
which  a tea  spoon  full  may  be  given  once  in  three  or 
four  hours , according  to  the  circumstances,  in  milk, 
jelly,  or  syrup,  water  being  apt  to  decompose  it. 
From  Kite’s  essay  upon  this  production,  it  appears, 

1.  That  dyspepsia  has  been  exceedingly  relieved  by 
it,  and  even  wholly  removed. 

2.  That  it  is  an  excellent  restorative  in  the  debility 
consequent  upon  the  depletion  and  exhaustion  of  acute 
diseases. 

3.  It  is  said  to  have  done  good  in  hysteria 

4.  Cholera,  with  cramps  of  the  lower  extremities,  is 
reported  to  have  yielded  to  its  powers. 

5.  The  morbid  evacuations  and  commotions  of  diar- 
rhoea are  reported  to  have  yielded  to  its  virtue,  alter 
opium  had  failed. 

6.  Chronic  and  atonic  catarrhs  have  been  benefltted 
by  its  administration. 

7.  It  is  alleged  to  have  been  remarkably  serviceable 
in  incipient  dysentery,  as  well  as  in  that  of  long 
duration. 

8.  In  various  spasmodic  affections,  such  as  stitches 
in  the  sides,  cramp  of  the  stomach,  rheumatic  twinges, 
&c.,  it  has  often  afforded  relief  after  opiates  had  failed. 

It  must  be  observed,  however,  that  it  is  not  to  be 
prescribed  in  cases  of  high  action,  or  phlogistic  dia- 
thesis, nor  during  the  prevalence  of  inflammatory 
symptoms. 

From  tins  abstract  of  the  practice  with  this  remedy, 
no  doubt  can  be  entertained  of  its  value,  nor  of  the 

13 


ACE 


ACE 


propriety  of  considering  the  discovery  of  its  qualities, 
as  worthy  to  be  considered  among  the  happy  events 
attending  the  modern  Materia  Medica. — Mit  chill's  MS. 
Lectures.  A.] 

A'CARUS.  (From  aieapys,  small.)  The  tick.  An 
insect  which  breeds  in  the  skin.  A very  numerous 
genus  of  minute  insects  which  infest  the  skin  of  ani- 
mals, and  produce  various  complaints.  Those  which 
are  found  on  the  human  body  are 

1.  The  acarus  domesticus , or  domestic  tick. 

2.  The  acarus  scabiei,  or  itch  tick. 

3.  The  acarus  autumnalis , or  harvest-bug. 

ACATALE'PSIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  KaraXap&avw, 

to  apprehend.)  Uncertainty  in  the  prognosis  or  judg- 
ment of  diseases. 

ACA'TALIS.  (From  a,  neg.  and  %ar£W,  to  want.) 
The  juniper  tree : so  named  from  the  abundance  of  its 

ACATA'POSIS.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Karamvu ),  to 
swallow.)  Difficult  deglutition. 

Aca'statos.  (From  a , neg.  and  KaBiarypi,  to  deter- 
mine.) Inconstant. 

1.  Fevers  were  so  called  which  are  anomalous  in 
their  appearance  and  irregular  in  their  paroxysms. 

2.  Turbid  urine  without  sediment. 

ACAULIS.  (From  o,  priv.  and  caulis,  a stem.) 

Without  stem.  Plants  destitute  of  stem  are  called 
acaules,  stemless ; as  Cypripedium  acaule , and  Car- 
duus  acaulis.  This  term  must  not  be  too  rigidly  un- 
derstood. 

ACCELERA'TOR.  (From  accelero,  to  hasten  or 
propel.)  The  name  of  a muscle  of  the  penis. 

Accelerator  urinte.  A muscle  of  the  penis. 
Ejaculator  Seminis ; Bulbo-syndesmo-caverneux  of 
Dumas ; Bulbo-cavernosus  of  Winslow.  It  arises 
fleshy  from  the  sphincter  ani  and  membranous  part  of 
the  urethra,  and  tendinous  from  the  crus,  near  as  far 
forwards  as  the  beginning  of  the  corpus  cavernosum 
penis ; the  inferior  fibres  run  more  transversely,  and 
the  superior  descend  in  an  oblique  direction.  It  is  in- 
serted into  a line  in  the  middle  of  the  bulbous  part  of  the 
urethra,  where  each  joins  with  its  fellow ; by  which 
the  bulb  is  completely  closed.  The  use  of  these  mus- 
cles is  to  drive  the  urine  or  semen  forward,  and  by 
grasping  the  bulbous  part  of  the  urethra,  to  push  the 
blood  towards  its  corpus  cavernosum,  and  the  glans, 
by  which  they  are  distended. 

ACCESSION.  ( Accesio ; from  accedo,  to  approach.) 
The  commencement  of  a disease.  A term  mostly  ap- 
plied to  a fever  which  has  paroxysms  or  exacerbations : 
thus  the  accession  of  fever,  means  the  commencement 
or  approach  of  the  febrile  period. 

ACCESSO  RIUS.  (From  accedo , to  approach:  so 
called  from  the  course  it  takes.)  Connected  by  con- 
tact or  approach. 

Accessorius  lumbalis.  A muscle  of  the  loins. 
See  Sacro-lumbalis. 

Accessorius  nervus.  The  name  given  by  Willis 
to  two  nerves  which  ascend,  one  on  each  side,  from 
the  second,  fourth,  and  fifth  cervical  pairs  of  nerves, 
through  the  great  foramen  of  the  occipital  bone,  and 
pass  out  again  from  the  cranium  through  the  foramina 
lacera,  with  the  par  vagum,  to  be  distributed  on  the 
trapezius  muscle. 

ACCI'PITER.  (From  accipio , to  take.) 

1.  The  hawk ; so  named  from  its  rapacity. 

2.  A bandage  which  was  put  over  the  nose : so  called 
from  its  likeness  to  the  claw  of  a hawk,  or  from  the 
tightness  of  its  grasp. 

ACCIPITRI'NA.  (From  accipiter , the  hawk.)  The 
herb  hawk-weed : which  Pliny  says  was  so  called  be- 
cause hawks  are  used  to  scratch  it,  and  apply  the  juice 
to  their  eyes  to  prevent  blindness. 

ACCLI'VIS.  A muscle  of  the  belly,  so  named  from 
the  oblique  ascent  of  its  fibres.  See  Obliquus  intemus 
abdominis. 

Accouchement.  The  French  word  for  the  act  of 
delivery. 

Accoucheur.  The  French  for  a midwife. 

ACCRETIO.  (From  ad,  and  cresco,  to  increase.) 
Accretion. 

1.  Nutrition ; growth. 

2.  The  growing  together  of  parts  naturally  separate, 
as  the  fingers  or  toes. 

Accuba'tio.  (From  accumbo , to  recline.)  Child- 
bed ; reclining. 

Ace'dia.  (From  a,  priv.  and  icnSos , care.)  Careless- 

14 


ness,  neglect  in  the  application  of  medicines.  Hippo- 
crates sometimes  uses  this  word,  in  his  treatise  on  the 
glands,  to  signify  fatigue  or  trouble. 

ACE  PHALUS.  (Acephalus,  i.  m.  aKe<f>aXos;  from 
a,  priv.  and  KctpaXy,  a head.)  Without  a head.  A 
term  applied  to  a lusus  naturae,  or  monster,  born  with- 
out a head. 

[This  term  is  also  applied  by  modern  naturalists  to 
a certain  portion  of  the  gelatinous  or  soft  bodied  ani- 
mals, which  were  formerly  classed  among  the  Vermes 
of  Linnaeus.  They  are  now  termed  Acephalous  Mol- 
luscce , or  headless  molluscae,  having  no  distinct  part 
corresponding  to  the  head  of  other  animals.  A.] 

A'CER.  (Acer,  eris.  neut. ; from  acer,  sharp  : be- 
cause of  the  sharpness  of  its  juice.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class  Polyga- 
mia;  Order,  Monacia. 

Acer  campestre.  The  common  maple.  This  tree 
yields  a s weetish,  soft,  milky  sap,  which  contains  a salt 
with  basis  of  lime,  possessed,  according  to  Slierer,  of 
peculiar  properties.  It  is  white,  semitransparent,  not 
altered  by  the  air,  and  soluble  in  one  hundred  parts  of 
cold,  or  fifty  of  boiling  water. 

Acer  pseudoplatanus.  The  maple-tree,  falsely 
named  sycamore.  It  is  also  called  Platanus  traga. 
This  tree  is  common  in  England,  though  not  much  used 
rn  medicine.  The  juice,  if  drank  while  fresh,  is  said 
to  be  a good  antiscorbutic.  All  its  parts  contain  a sac- 
charine fluid  ; and  if  the  root  or  branches  be  wounded 
in  the  spring,  a large  quantity  of  liquor  is  discharged, 
which,  when  inspissated,  yields  a brown  sort  of  sugar 
and  syrup  like  molasses. 

Acer  saccharinum.  The  sugar  maple-tree.  Large 
quantities  of  sugar  are  obtained  from  this  tree  in  New- 
England  and  Canada,  which  is  much  used  in  France, 
where  it  is  commonly  known  by  the  name  of  Saccha- 
rum  Canadense  or  Saccharum  Acernum,  maple  sugar. 
It  has  been  supposed  that  all  Europe  might  be  supplied 
from  the  maple  of  America,  which  grows  in  great 
quantities  in  the  western  counties  of  all  the  middle 
States  of  the  American  Union.  It  is  as  tall  as  the  oak, 
and  from  two  to  three  feet  in  diameter ; puts  forth  a 
white  blossom  in  the  spring,  before  any  appearance  of 
leaves;  its  small  branches  afford  sustenance  for  cattle, 
and  its  ashes  afford  a large  quantity  of  excellent  pot- 
ash. Twenty  years  are  required  for  it  to  attain  its  full 
growth.  Tapping  does  not  injure  it ; but,  on  the  con- 
trary, it  affords  more  syrup,  and  of  a better  quality,  the 
oftener  it  is  tapped.  A single  tree  has  not  only  survived, 
but  flourished,  after  tapping,  for  forty  years.  Five  or 
six  pounds  of  sugar  are  usually  afforded  by  the  sap  of 
one  tree ; though  there  are  instances  of  the  quantity 
exceeding  twenty  pounds.  The  sugar  is  separated  from 
the  sap  either  by  freezing,  by  spontaneous  evaporation, 
or  by  boiling.  The  latter  method  is  the  most  used. 
Dr.  Rush  describes  the  process ; which  is  simple,  and 
practised  without  any  difficulty  by  the  farmers. 

From  frequent  trials  of  this  sugar,  it  does  not  appear 
to  be  in  any  respect  inferior  to  that  of  the  West  Indies. 
It  is  prepared  at  a time  of  the  year  when  neither  insect, 
nor  the  pollen  of  plants,  exists  to  vitiate  it,  as  is  the 
case  with  common  sugar.  From  calculations  grounded 
on  facts,  it  is  ascertained,  that  America  is  now  capa- 
ble of  producing  a surplus  of  one-eighth  more  than  its 
own  consumption. 

[The  Acer  Saccharinum,  or  sugar-maple  tree, 
abounds  in  the  state  of  New-York  and  many  other 
parts  of  the  United  States.  It  furnishes  a great  amount 
of  rough  sugar  in  the  interior  of  the  country  and  the 
new  settlements,  where  foreign  and  refined  sugars  are 
but  little  used.  Very  little  effort  has  heretofore  been 
made  to  introduce  it  into  market  as  an  article  of  com- 
merce. But  in  1828  several  hundred  barrels  of  this 
sugar,  from  the  Territory  of  Michigan,  reached  the 
city  of  New-York  by  way  of  the  great  Western  ca- 
nal. It  was  sold  at  auction  for  six  cents  per  pound ; 
and  when  refined  and  converted  iiUo  loaf  sugar,  it  af- 
forded a reasonable  profit  to  the  refiner.  A.l 

ACERATE.  Aceras.  A salt  formed  of  the  acid 
of  the  Acer  campestre  with  an  alkaline,  earthy,  or 
metallic  base. 

ACE'RATOS.  From  a,  neg.  and  Kcpao),  or  Kepav- 
vvpi,  to  mix.)  Unmixed ; uncorrupted.  This  term  is 
applied  sometimes  to  the  humours  of  the  body  by  Hip 
pocrates.  Paulus  ASgineta  mentions  a plaster  of  this 

name. 

ACERB.  (Acerbus ; from  acer,  sharp.)  A species 


H-  76  ^ 


■ — o 

\J  ' f ^ 

CALL  NO. 


f ! AS 


LOC. 


NO. 


O RUSH 
o SER.  REC.  RTG. 
o BOUND  BEFORE 
o NOT  BOUND  BEFORE 
o VOL.  IS  COMPT. 

CEASED  WITH 


MISSING  ITEMS: 


3ETN.  FOR  COMMERCIAL 
3INDING  _ 

O 


DTHER 


DATE-IN 


DATE-OUT 


o 


o 


RARE,  SCARCE,  — HANDLE  CAREFULLY 
O PAMPHLET 
O W/POCKET 
O LOOSELEAF 
O PAD  BINDS 
O REGULAR 
O PAD  FOR  LOC. 

O L.U.M. 

O INSERT 
O MAKE  POCKET 
O TREAT  LEATHER 
O C.C.  SHEETS 
O DISINFECT 


BOOK  REPAIRS 
O GLUE  HINGES 
O REHANG 
O POKE  IN 
O HALF  BACK 
O SAVE  SPINE 
O COMPLETE  BIND 

COLOR 

O SEW:  Tape,  cords 


O 


o 


PAPER  CONSERVATION  WORK 
O WASH  O DEACIDIFY 
O MEND:  PP,  SIGNATURES,  MAPS 
O MEND:  ARCHIVAL  TAPE,  HEAT  TISSUE, 
JAPANESE  PAPER 

O MOUNT:  CHARTEX,  PAPER,  CLOTH 
O ENCAPSULATE 

CONTAINERS 

O FOLDING  STORAGE  CONTAINER  A 
O FOLDING  STORAGE  CONTAINER  B 
O CLOTH  BOX 


GAMMON-1982 


ACE 


ACE 


of  taste  which  consists  in  a degree  of  acidity,  with  an 
addition'  of  roughness ; properties  common  to  many 
immature  fruits. 

Ace'rbitas,  Acerbness. 

ACERIC  ACID.  A peculiar  acid,  said  to  exist  in 
the  juice  of  the  common  maple,  Acer  campestre  of 
Linnaeus.  It  is  decomposed  by  heat,  like  the  other 
vegetable  acids. 

ACE'RIDES.  (From  a,  priv.  and  icepos,  wax.)  Soft 
plasters,  made  without  wax. 

ACEROSUS.  (From  acus , a needle.)  1.  Acerose  : 
having  the  shape  of  a needle.  Applied  to  leaves  Which 
are  so  shaped,  as  in  Pinus  sylvestris  and  Juniperus 
communis. 

2.  (From  acus , chaff.)  Chaffy:  applied  to  coarse 
bread,  &c. 

ACESCENT.  ( Acescens ; from  aceo , to  be  sour  or 
tart.)  Turning  sour  or  acid.  Substances  which  rea- 
dily run  into  the  acid  fermentation,  are  so  said  to  be , 
as  some  vegetable  and  animal  juices  and  infusions. 
The  suddenness  with  which  this  change  is  effected, 
during  a thunder-storm,  even  in  corked  bottles,  has 
not  been  accounted  for.  In  some  morbid  states  of  the 
stomach,  also,  it  proceeds  with  astonishing  rapidity. 

ACE'STA.  (From  aueopai,  to  cure.)  Distempers 
which  are  easily  cured. 

Ace'stis.  Borax. 

ACETA'BULUM.  ( Acetabulum , i.  n. ; from  ace - 
turn , vinegar : so  called  because  it  resembles  the  ace- 
tabulum, or  old  saucer  in  which  vinegar  was  held  for 
the  use  of  the  table.)  A name  given  by  Latin  writers 
to  the  cup-like  cavity  of  the  os  innominatum,  which 
receives  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone.  See  Innomina- 
tum os. 

ACETA'RIUM.  (From  acetum,  vinegar:  because 
it  is  mostly  made  with  vinegar.)  A sallad  or  pickle. 

ACE'TAS.  ( Acetas , tis  ; f.  from  acetum , vinegar.) 
An  acetate  A salt  formed  by  the  union  of  the  acetic 
acid,  with  a salifiable  base.  Those  used  in  medicine 
are  the  acetates  of  ammonia,  lead,  potassa,  and  zinc. 

Acetas  ammonia.  Acetate  of  ammonia.  See 
Ammonia  aceiatis  liquor. 

Acetas  plumbi.  Acetate  of  lead.  See  Plumbi 
acetas  and  Plumbi  acetatis  liquor. 

Acetas  potasse.  Acetate  of  potassa.  See  Potassa: 
acetas. 

Acetas  zinci.  A metallic  salt  composed  of  zinc 
and  acetic  acid.  It  is  used  by  some  as  an  astringent 
against  inflammation  of  the  eyes,  urethra,  and  vagina, 
diluted  in  the  same  proportion  as  the  sulphate  of  zinc. 

Acetate.  See  Acetas. 

Acetate  of  Ammonia.  See  Ammonia  acetatis 
liquor. 

Acetate  of  Potassa.  See  Potassa  acetas. 

Acetate  of  Zinc.  See  Acetas  zinci. 

Acetated  vegetable  A'lcali.  See  Potassa  acetas. 

Acetaled  volatile  Alcali.  See  Ammonia  acetatis 
liquor. 

ACETIC  ACID.  Acidum  aceticum.  The  same  acid 
y/hich,  in  a very  dilute  and  somewhat  impure  state, 
is  called  vinegar.  Acetic  acid  is  found  combined  with 
potassa  iu  the  juices-of  a great  many  plants ; particu- 
larly the  Sambucus  nigra , Phanix  dactilifera , Ga- 
lium verum , and  Rhus  typhinus.  “Sweat,  urine, 
and  even  fresh  milk,  contain  it.  It  is  frequently  ge- 
nerated in  the  stomachs  of  dyspeptic  patients.  Almost 
all  dry  vegetable  substances,  and  some  animal,  sub- 
jected in  close  vessels  to  a red  heat,  yield  it  copiously. 
It  is  the  result  likewise  of  a spontaneous  fermentation, 
to  which  liquid  vegetable  and  animal  matters  are 
liable:  Strong  acids,  as  the  sulphuric  and  nitric,  de- 
velope  the  acetic  by  their  action  on  vegetables.  It  was 
long  supposed,  on  the  authority  of  Boerhaave,  that  the 
fermentation  which  forms  vinegar  is  uniformly  pre- 
ceded by  the  vinous.  This  is  a mistake:  cabbages 
sour  in  water,  making  sour  crout ; starch,  in  starch- 
makers’  sour  waters ; and  dough  itself,  without  any 
previous  production  of  wine. 

“ The  varieties  of  acetic  acid  known  in  commerce 
are  four:  1.  Wine  vinegar.  2.  Malt  vinegar.  3.  Sugar 
vinegar.  4.  Wood  vinegar. 

“We  shall  describe  first  the  mode  of  making  these 
commercial  articles,  and  then  that  of  extracting  the 
absolute  acetic  acid  of  the  chemist,  either  from  these 
vinegais,  or  directly  front  chemical  compounds,  of 
which  it  is  a constituent. 

“ The  following  is  the  plan  of  making  vinegar  at 


present  practised  in  Paris.  The  wine  destined  for 
vinegar  is  mixed  in  a large  tun  with  a quantity  of 
wine  lees,  and  the  whole  being  transferred  into  cloth- 
sacks,  placed  within  a large  iron-bound  vat,  the  liquid 
matter  is  extruded  through  the  sacks  by  superincum- 
bent pressure.  What  passes  through  is  put  into  large 
casks,  set  upright,  having  a small  aperture  in  their 
top.  In  these  it  is  exposed  to  the  heat  of  the  sun  in 
summer,  or  to  that  of  a stove  in  winter.  Fermenta- 
tion supervenes  in  a few  days.  If  the  heat  should  then 
rise  too  high,  it  is  lowered  by  cool  air  and  the  addition 
of  fresh  wine.  In  the  skilful  regulation  of  the  fermen- 
tative temperature  consists  the  art  of  making  good 
wine  vinegar.  In  summer  the  process  is  generally 
completed  in  a fortnight : in  winter,  double  the  time  is 
requisite.  The  vinegar  is  then  run  off  into  barrels, 
which  contain  several  chips  of  birch-wood.  In  about 
a fortnight  it  is  found  to  be  clarified,  and  is  then  fit  for 
the  market.  It  must  be  kept  in  close  casks. 

“ The  manufacturers  at  Orleans  prefer  wine  of  a 
year  old  for  making  vinegar.  But  if  by  age  the  wine 
has  lost  its  extractive  matter,  it  does  not  readily  un- 
dergo the  acetous  fermentation.  In  this  case,  acetifi- 
cation,  as  the  French  term  tiie  process,  may  be  deter- 
mined by  adding  slips  of  vines,  bunches  of  grapes,  or 
green  woods. 

“ Almost  all  the  vinegar  of  the  north  of  France  being 
prepared  at  Orleans,  the  manufactory  of  that  place  has 
acquired  such  celebrity,  as  to  render  their  process 
worthy  of  a separate  consideration.  The  Orleans’ 
casks  contain  nearly  400  pints  of  wine.  Those  which 
have  been  already  used  are  preferred.  They  are 
placed  ;n  three  rows,  one  over  another,  and  in  the  top 
have  an  aperture  of  two  inches’  diameter,  kept  always 
open.  The  wine  for  acetification  is  kept  in  adjoining 
casks,  containing  beech  shavings,  to  which  the  lees 
adhere.  The  wine,  thus  clarified,  is  drawn  off  to 
make  vinegar.  One  hundred  pints  of  good  vinegar, 
boiling  hot,  are  first  poured  into  each  cask,  and  left 
there  for  eight  days.  Ten  pints  of  wine  are  mixed  in, 
every  eight  days,  till  the  vessels  are  full.  The  vinegai 
is  allowed  to  remain  in  this  state  fifteen  days  before  it 
is  exposed  to  sale. 

“ The  used  casks,  called  mothers , are  never  emptied 
more  than  half,  but  are  successively  filled  again,  to 
acetify  new  portions  of  wine.  In  order  to  judge  if  the 
mother  works,  the  vinegar-makers  plunge  a spatula 
into  the  liquid  ; and  according  to  the  quantity  of  froth 
which  the  spatula  shows,  they  add  more  or  less  wine. 
In  summer,  the  atmospheric  heat  is  sufficient.  In 
winter,  stoves  heated  to  about  75°  Fahr.  maintain  the 
requisite  temperature  in  the  manufactory. 

“ In  some  country  districts,  the  people  keep,  in  a 
place  where  the  temperature  is  mild  and  equable,  a 
vinegar  cask,  into  which  they  pour  such  wine  as  they 
wish  to  acetify ; and  it  is  always  preserved  full  by 
replacing  the  vinegar  drawn  off,  by  new  wine.  To 
establish  this  household  manufacture,  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  buy  at  first  a small  cask  of  good  vinegar. 

“ At  Gand,  a vinegar  from  beer  is  made,  in  which 
the  following  proportions  of  grain  are  found  to  be 
most  advantageous 

1880  Paris  lbs.  malted  barley. 

700  — wheat. 

500  — buckwheat. 

These  grains  are  ground,  mixed,  and  boiled,  along 

with  twenty-seven  casks  full  of  river  water,  for  three 
hours.  Eighteen  casks  of  good  beer  for  vinegar  are 
obtained.  By  a subsequent  decoction,  more  fermenta- 
ble liquid  is  extracted,  .which  is  mixed  with  the 
former.  The  whole  brewing  yields  3000  English  quarts. 

“ In  this  country,  vinegar  is  usually  made  from 
malt.  By  mashing  with  hot  water,  100  gallons  of  wort 
are  extracted  in  less  than  two  hours  from  1 boil  of 
malt.  When  the  liquor  has  fallen  to  the  temperature 
of  75°  Fahr.  4 gallons  of  the  barm  of  beer  are  added. 
After  thirty-six  hours  it  is  racked  off  into  casks,  which 
are  laid  on  their  sides,  and  exposed,  with  their  bung- 
holes  loosely  covered,  to  the  influence  of  the  sun  in 
summer  ; but  in  winter  they  are  arranged  in  a stove- 
room.  In  three  months  this  vinegar  is  ready  for  the 
manufacture  of  sugar  of  lead.  To  make  vinegar  for 
domestic  use,  however,  the  process  is  somewhat  dif- 
ferent. The  above  liquor  is  racked  off  into  casks 
placed  upright,  having  a false  cover,  pierced  with 
holes  fixed  at  about  a foot  from  their  bottom.  On  this 
a considerable  quantity  of  rape,  or  the  refuse  from  the 


ACE 

makers  of  British  wine,  or  otherwise  a quantity  of  low- 
priced  raisins,  is  laid.  The  liquor  is  turned  into  ano- 
ther barrel  every  twenty-four  hours,  in  which  time  it 
has  begun  to  grow  warm.  Sometimes,  indeed,  the 
vinegar  is  fully  fermented,  as  above,  without  the  rape, 
which  is  added  towards  the  end,  to  communicate 
flavour.  Two  large  casks  are  in  this  case  worked 
together,  as  is  described  long  ago  by  Boerhaave,  as 
follows : 

“ ‘ Take  two  large  wooden  vats  or  hogsheads ; and 
in  each  of  these,  place  a wooden  grate  or  hurdle,  at 
the  distance  of  a foot  from  the  bottom.  Set  the  vessel 
upright ; and  on  the  grate,  place  a moderately  close 
layer  of  green  twigs,  or  fresh,  cuttings  of  the  vine. 
Then  fill  up  the  vessel  with  the  footstalks  of  grapes, 
commonly  called  the  rape,  to  the  top  of  the  vessel, 
which  must  be  left  quite  open. 

“ ‘ Having  thus  prepared  the  two  vessels,  pour  into 
them  the  wine  to  be  converted  into  vinegar,  so  as  to 
fill  one  of  them  quite  up,  and  the  other  but  half-full. 
Leave  them  thus  for  twenty-four  hours,  and  then  fill 
up  the  half-filled  vessel  with  liquor  from  that  which  is 
quite  full,  and  which  will  now  in  its  turn  only  be  left 
half-full.  Four-and-twenty  hours  afterwards,  repeat 
the  same  operation ; and  thus  go  on,  keeping  the  ves- 
sels alternately  full  and  half-full  during  twenty-four 
hours,  till  the  vinegar  be  made.  On  the  second  or 
third  day,  there  will  arise  in  the  half-filled  vessel  a 
fermentative  motion,  accompanied  with  a sensible 
heat,  which  will  gradually  increase  from  day  to  day. 
On  the  contrary,  the  fermenting  motion  is  almost  im- 
perceptible in  the  full  vessel ; and  as  the  two  vessels 
are  alternately  full  and  half-full,  the  fermentation  is  by 
this  means  in  some  measure  interrupted,  and  is  only 
renewed  every  other  day  in  each  vessel. 

“ ‘ When  this  motion  appears  to  have  entirely 
ceased,  even  in  the  half-filled  vessel,  it  is  a sign  that 
the  fermentation  is  finished ; and  therefore  the  vinegar 
is  then  to  be  put  into  casks  close  stopped,  and  kept  in 
a cool  place. 

“ ‘ A greater  or  less  degree  of  warmth  accelerates  or 
checks  this,  as  well  as  the  spirituous  fermentation.  In 
France,  it  is  finished  in  about  fifteen  days,  during  the 
summer  ; but  if  the  heat  of  the  air  be  very  great,  and 
exceed  the  twenty-fifth  degree  of  Reaumur’s  thermo- 
meter (88  1-4°  Fahr.)  the  half-filled  vessel  must  be 
filled  up  every  twelve  hours ; because,  if  the  fermenta- 
tion be  not  so  checked  in  that  time,  it  will  become 
violent,  and  the  liquor  will  be  so  heated,  that  many  of 
the  spirituous  parts,  on  which  the  strength  of  the  vine- 
gar depends,  will  be  dissipated,  so  that  nothing  will 
remain  after  the  fermentation  but  a vapid  liquor,  sour 
indeed,  but  effete.  The  better  to  prevent  the  dissipa- 
tion of  the  spirituous  parts,  it  is  a proper  and  usual  pre- 
caution to  close  the  mouth  of  the  half-filled  vessel  in 
which  the  liquor  ferments,  with  a cover  made  of  oak 
wood.  As  to  the  full  vessel,  it  is  always  left  open, 
that  the  air  may  act  freely  on  the  liquor  it  contains  : 
for  it  is  not  liable  to  the  same  inconveniences,  because 
it  ferments  but  very  slowly.’ 

“ Good  vinegar  may  be  made  from  a weak  syrup, 
consisting  of  18  oz.  of  sugar  to  every  gallon  of  water. 
The  yeast  and  rape  are  to  be  here  used  as  above 
described.  Whenever  the  vinegar  (from  the  taste  and 
flavour)  is  considered  to  be  complete,  it  ought  to  be 
decanted  into  tight  barrels  or  bottles,  and  well  secured 
from  access  of  air.  A momentary  ebullition  before  it 
is  bottled  is  found  favourable  to  its  preservation.  In  a 
large  manufactory  of  malt  vinegar,  a considerable 
revenue  is  derived  from  the  Sale  of  yeast  to  the  bakers. 

“ Vinegar  obtained  by  the  preceding  methods  has 
more  or  less  of  a brown  colour,  and  a peculiar  but 
rather  grateful  smell.  By  distillation  in  glass  vessels 
the  colouring  matter,  which  resides  in  a mucilage,  is 
separated,  but  the  fragrant  odour  is  generally  replaced 
by  an  empyreumatic  one.  The  best  French  wine  vine- 
gars, and  also  some  from  malt,  contain  a little  alcohol, 
which  comes  over  early  with  the  watery  part,  and 
renders  the  first  product  of  distillation  scarcely  denser, 
sometimes  even  less  dense,  than  water.  It  is  accord- 
ingly rejected.  Towards  the  end  of  the  distillation 
the  empyreuma  increases.  Hence  only  the  interme- 
diate portions  are  retained  as  distilled  vinegar.  Its 
specific  gravity  varies  from  1.005  to  1.015,  while  that 
of  common  vinegar  of  equal  strength  varies  from  1.010 
to  1.025. 

“ A crude  vinegar  has  been  long  prepared  for  the 


ACE 

calico  printers,  by  subjecting  wood  in  iron  retorts  to  a 
strong  red  heat.” 

“ The  acetic  acid  of  the  chemist  may  be  prepared  in 
the  following  modes ; 1st.  Two  pans  of  ruseu  actuate 
of  potassa  with  one  of  the  strongest  oil  of  vitriol  yield, 
by  slow  distillation  from  a glass  retort  into  a refrige- 
rated receiver,  concentrated  acetic  acid.  A smali 
portion  of  sulphurous  acid,  which  contaminates  it, 
may  be  removed  by  re-distillation,  from  a little  acetate 
of  lead.  2d.  Or  four  parts  of  good  sugar  of  lead , with 
one  part  of  sulphuric  acid  treated  in  the  same  way, 
afford  a slightly  weaker  acetic  acid.  3d.  Gently  cal- 
cined sulphate  of  iron,  or  green  vitriol,  mixed  with 
sugar  of  lead  in  the  proportion  of  1 of  the  former  to 
2 1-2  of  the  latter,  and  carefully  distilled  from  a porce- 
lain retort  into  a cooled  receiver,  may  be  also  consi- 
dered a good  economical  process.  Or  without  distiila 
tion,  if  100  parts  of  well-dried  acetate  of  lime  be 
cautiously  added  to  00  parts  of  strong  sulphuric  acid, 
diluted  with  5 parts  of  water,  and  digested  for  24 
hours,  and  strained,  a good  acetic  acid,  sufficiently 
strong  for  every  ordinary  purpose,  will  be  obtained. 

“ The  distillation  of  acetate  of  copper,  or  of  lead 
per  se,  has  also  been  employed  for  obtaining  strong 
acid.  Here,  however,  the  product  is  mixed  with  a 
portion  of  the  fragrant  pyro-acetic  spirit,  which  it  is 
troublesome  to  get  rid  of.  Undoubtedly  the  best  pro- 
cess for  the  strong  acid  is  that  first  described,  and  the 
cheapest  the  second  or  third.  When  of  the  utmost 
possible  strength  its  sp.  gravity  is  1.0ti2.  At  the  tem- 
perature of  50°  F.  it  assumes  the  solid  form,  crystal- 
lizing in  oblong  rhomboidal  plates.  It  has  an  extremely 
pungent  odour,  affecting  the  nostrils  and  eyes  even 
painfully,  when  its  vapour  is  incautiously  snuffed  up. 
Its  taste  is  eminently  acid  and  acrid.  It  excoriates  and 
inflames  the  skin. 

“ The  purified  wood  vinegar,  which  is  used  for 
pickles  and  culinary  purposes,  has  commonly  a specific 
gravity  of  about  1.009 ; when  it  is  equivalent  in  acid 
strength  to  good  wine  or  malt  vinegar  of  1.014.  It 
contains  about  1-20  of  its  weight  of  absolute  acetic 
acid,  and  19-20  of  water.  But  the  vinegar  of  fermenta- 
tion=1.014  will  become  only  1.023  in  acetate,  from 
which,  if  0.005  be  subtracted  for  mucilage  or  extractive, 
the  remainder  will  agree  with  the  density  of  the 
acetate  from  wood.  A glass  hydrometer  of  Fahren- 
heit’s construction  is  used  for  finding  the  specific  gra- 
vities. It  consists  of  a globe  of  about  3 inches’  diameter, 
having  a little  ballast  ball  drawn  out  beneath,  and  a 
stem  above  of  about  3 inches  long,  containing  a slip  of 
paper  with  a transverse  line  in  the  middle,  and  sur- 
mounted with  a little  cup  for  receiving  weights  or 
poises.  The  experiments  on  which  this  instrument, 
called  an  Acetometer,  is  constructed,  have  been  detailed 
in  the  sixth  volume  of  the  Journal  of  Science.” 

“ An  acetic  acid  of  very  considerable  strength  may 
also  be  prepared  by  saturating  perfectly  dry  char 
coal  with  common  vinegar,  and  then  distilling.  The 
water  easily  comes  off,  and  is  separated  at  first ; but 
a stronger  heat  is  required  to  expel  the  acid.  Or 
by  exposing  vinegar  to  very  cold  air,  or  to  freezing 
mixtures,  its  water  separates  in  the  state  of  ice,  the 
interstices  of  which  are  occupied  by  a strong  acetic 
acid,  which  may  be  procured  by  draining.  The  acetic 
acid,  or  radical  vinegar  of  the  apotnecaries,  in  which 
they  dissolve  a little  camphor,  or  fragrant  essential  oil, 
has  a specific  gravity  of  about  1.070.  It  contains  fully 
1 part  of  water  to  2 of  the  crystallized  acid.  The 
pungent  smelling  salt  consists  of  sulphate  of  potash 
moistened  with  that  acid. 

“ Acetic  acid  acts  on  tin , iron,  zinc,  coppef,  and 
nickel  ; and  it  combines  readily  with  the  oxydes  of 
many  other  metals , by  mixing  a solution  of  their  sul- 
phates with  that  of  an  acetate  of  lead.” 

“ Acetic  acid  dissolves  resins,  gum-resins,  camphor, 
and  essential  oils." 

“ Acetic  acid  and  common  vinegar  are  sometimes 
fraudulently  mixed  with  sulphuric  acid  to  give  them 
strength.  This  adulteration  may  be  detected  by  the 
addition  of  a little  chalk,  short  of  their  saturation. 
With  pure  vinegar  the  calcareous  base  forms  a limpid 
solution,  but  with  sulphuric  acid  a vvhite  insoluble 
gypsum.  Muriate  of  barytes  is  a still  nicer  test.  Bri- 
tish fermented  vinegars  are  allowed  by  law  to  contain 
a little  sulphuric  acid,  but  the  quantity  is  frequently 
exceeded.  Copper  is  discovered  in  vinegars  by  super- 
saturating them  with  ammonia,  when  a fine  bluo 


ACE 


ACE 


colour  la  produced;  and  lead  by  sulphate  of  soda, 
liydrosulphurets,  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  and  gallic 
acid.  None  of  these  should  produce  any  change  on 
genuine  vinegar.”  See  Lead. 

“ Salts  consisting  of  the  several  bases,  united  in 
definite  proportions  to  acetic  acid,  are  called  acetates. 
They  are  characterized  by  the  pungent  smell  of  vine- 
gar, which  they  exhale  on  the  affusion  of  sulphuric 
acid  ; and  by  their  yielding  on  distillation  in  a mode- 
rate red  heat  a very  light,  odorous,  and  combustible 
liquid  called  pyro-acetate  (spirit)  ; which  see.  They 
are  all  soluble  in  water  ; many  of  them  so  much  so  as 
to  be  uncrystallizable.  About  30  different  acetates 
have  been  formed,  of  which  only  a very  few  have 
been  applied  to  the  uses  of  life. 

“ The  acetic  acid  unites  with  all  the  alkalies  and 
most  of  the  earths ; and  with  these  bases  it  forms 
compounds,  some  of  which  are  crystallizable,  and 
others  have  not  yet  been  reduced  to  a regularity  of 
figure  The  salts  it  forms  are  distinguished  by  their 
great  solubility ; their  decomposition  by  fire,  which 
carbonizes  them ; the  spontaneous  alteration  of  their 
solution  ; and  their  decomposition  by  a great  number 
of  acids,  which  extricate  from  them  the  acetic  acid  in 
a concentrated  state.  It  unites  likewise  with  most  of 
the  metallic  oxides. 

“ With  bhrytes  the  saline  mass  formed  by  the  acetic 
acid  does  not  crystallize ; but,  when  evaporated  to 
dryness,  it  deliquesces  by  exposure  to  air.  This  mass 
is  not  decomposed  by  acid  of  arsenic.  By  spontaneous 
evaporation,  however,  it  will  crystallize  in  fine  trans- 
parent prismatic  needles,  of  a bitterish  acid  taste, 
which  do  not  deliquesce  when  exposed  to  the  air,  but 
rather  effloresce. 

‘ With  potassa  this  acid  unites,  and  forms  a deli- 
quescent salt  scarcely  crystallizable,  called  formerly 
foliated  earth  of  tartar , and  regenerated  tartar.  The 
solution  of  this  salt,  even  in  closely  stopped  vessels,  is 
spontaneously  decomposed : itdeposites  athick,  mucous, 
flocculent  sediment,  at  first  gray,  and  at  length  black ; 
till  at  the  end  of  a few  months  nothing  remains  in  the 
liquor  but  carbonate  of  potassa,  rendered  impure  by  a 
little  coaly  oil. 

“ With  soda  it  forms  a crystallizable  salt,  which 
does  not  deliquesce.  This  salt  has  very  improperly 
been  called  mineral  foliated  earth.  According  to  the 
new  nomenclature,  it  is  acetate  of  soda. 

“ The  salt  formed  by  dissolving  chalk  or  other  calca- 
reous earth  in  distilled  vinegar,  formerly  called  salt 
of  chalk , or  fixed  vegetable  sal  ammoniac , and  by 
Bergman  calx  acetata , has  a sharp  bitter  taste,  appears 
in  the  form  of  crystals  resembling  somewhat  ears  of 
corn,  which  remain  dry  when  exposed  to  the  air, 
unless  the  acid  has  been  superabundant,  in  which  case 
they  deliquesce.” 

Of  the  acetate  of  strontian  little  is  known,  but  that 
it  has  a sweet  taste,  is  very  soluble,  and  is  easily 
decomposed  by  a strong  heat. 

“ The  salt  formed  by  uniting  vinegar  with  ammonia , 
called  by  the  various  names  of  spirit  of  Minder  eras, 
liquid  sal  ammoniac,  acetous  sal  ammoniac , and  by 
Bergman  alkali  volatile  acetatum,  is  generally  in  a 
liquid  state,  and  is  commonly  believed  not  to  be  crys- 
tallizable, as  in  distillation  it  passes  entirely  over  into 
the  receiver.  It  nevertheless  may  be  reduced  into  the 
form  of  small  needle-shaped  crystals,  when  this  liquor 
is  evaporated  to  the  consistence  of  a syrup.” 

“ With  magnesia  the  acetic  acid  unites,  and  after  a 
perfect  saturation,  forms  a viscid  saline  mass,  like  a 
solution  of  gum-arabic,  which  does  not  shoot  into 
crystals,  but  remains  deliquescent,  has  a taste  sweet- 
ish at  first,  and  afterwards  bitter,  and  is  soluble  in 
spirit  of  wine.  The  acid  of  this  saline  mass  may  be 
separated  by  distillation  without  addition. 

“ Glucine  is  readily  dissolved  by  acetic  acid.  This 
solution,  Vauquelin  informs  us,  does  not  crystallize ; 
but  is  reduced  by  evaporation  to  a gummy  substance, 
which  slowly  becomes  dry  and  brittle ; retaining  a 
kind  of  ductility  for  a long  time.  It  has  a saccharine 
and  pretty  strongly  astringent  taste,  in  which  that  of 
vinegar,  however,  is  distinguishable. 

“ Yttria  dissolves  readily  in  acetic  acid,  and  the  solu- 
tion yields  by  evaporation  crystals  of  acetate  of  yttria.” 

“• Alumine , obtained  by  boiling  alum  with  alkali,  and 
edulcorated  by  digesting  in  an  alkaline  lixivium,  is 
dissolved  by  distilled  vinegar  in  a very  inconsiderable 
quantity.” 


“ Acetate  of  zircone  may  be  formed  by  pouring 
acetic  acid  on  newly  precipitated  zircone.  It  has  an 
astringent  taste.” 

“ Vinegar  dissolves  the  true  gums,  and  partly  the 
gum-resins,  by  means  of  digestion. 

“ Boerhaave  observes,  that  vinegar  by  long  boiling 
dissolves  the  flesh,  cartilages,  bones,  and  ligaments  of 
animals,” — Ure's  Chemical  Dictionary. 

Moderately  rectified  pyrolignous  acid  has  been  re- 
commended for  the  preservation  of  animal  food  ; but 
the  empyreumatic  taint  it  communicates  to  bodies  im- 
mersed in  it,  is  not  quite  removed  by  their  subsequent 
ebullition  in  water.  See  Acid , Pyrolignous. 

The  utility  of  vinegar  as  a condiment  for  preserving 
and  seasoning  both  animal  and  vegetable  substances 
in  various  articles  of  food  is  very  generally  known.  It 
affords  an  agreeable  beverage,  when  combined  with 
water  in  the  proportion  of  a table-spoonful  of  the 
former  to  half  a pint  of  the  latter.  It  is  often  employed 
as  a medicine  in  inflammatory  and  putrid  diseases, 
when  more  active  remedies  cannot  be  procured.  Re- 
lief has  likewise  been  obtained  in  hypochondriacal  and 
hysteric  affections,  in  vomiting,  fainting,  and  hiccough, 
by  the  application  of  vinegar  to  the  mouth.  If  this 
fluid  be  poured  into  vessels  and  placed  over  the  gentle 
heat  of  a lamp  in  the  apartments  of  the  sick,  it  greatly 
contributes  to  disperse  foul  or  mephitic  vapours,  and 
consequently  to  purify  the  air.  Its  anticontagious 
powers  are  now  little  trusted  to,  but  its  odour  is  em- 
ployed to  relieve  nervous  headache,  fainting  fits,  or 
sickness  occasioned  by  crowded  rooms. 

As  an  external  application,  vinegar  proves  highly 
efficacious  when  joined  with  farinaceous  substances, 
and  applied  as  a cataplasm  to  sprained  joints  ; it  also 
forms  an  eligible  lotion  for  inflammations  of  the  sur- 
face, when  mixed  with  alcohol  and  water  in  about 
equal  proportions.  Applied  to  burns  and  scalds,  it  is 
said  to  be  highly  serviceable  whether  there  is  a loss  of 
substance  or  not,  and  to  quicken  the  exfoliation  of  ca- 
rious bone.  (Gloucester  Infirmary.)  Mixed  with  an 
infusion  of  sage,  or  with  water,  it  forms  a popular  and 
excellent  gargle  for  an  inflamed  throat,  also  for  an  in- 
jection to  moderate  the  fluor  albus.  Applied  cold  to 
the  nose  in  cases  of  htemorrhage,  also  to  the  loins  and 
abdomen  in  menorrhagia,  particularly  after  parturi- 
tion, it  is  said  to  be  very  serviceable.  An  imprudent 
use  of  vinegar  internally  is  not  without  considerable 
inconveniences.  Large  and  frequent  doses  injure  the 
stomach,  coagulate  the  chyle,  and  produce  not  only 
leanness,  but  an  atrophy.  When  taken  to  excess  by 
females,  to  reduce  a corpulent  habit,  tubercles  in  the 
lungs  and  a consumption  have  been  the  consequence. 

[“  When  any  of  the  vinous  liquors  are  exposed  to 
the  free  access  of  atmospheric  air,  at  a temperature  of 
80  to  85  degrees,  they  undergo  a second  fermentation, 
terminating  in  the  production  of  a sour  liquid,  called 
vinegar.  During  this  process  a portion  of  the  oxygen 
of  the  air  is  converted  into  carbonic  acid  ; hence,  un- 
like vinous  fermentation,  the  contact  of  the  atmos- 
phere is  necessary,  and  the  most  obvious  phenomenon 
is  the  removal  of  carbon  from  the  beer  or  wine.  Vi- 
negar is  usually  obtained  from  malt  liquor  or  cider, 
while  wine  is  employed  as  its  source  in  those  countries 
where  the  grape  is  abundantly  cultivated. — Webster's 
Manuel  of  Chemistry. 

Vinegar  for  ordinary  use  may  also  be  made  from 
sugar,  molasses,  raisins,  or  other  fruits,  or  from  the  re- 
fuse of  fruits,  as  follows : 

“ Take  the  skins  of  raisins  after  they  have  been 
used  in  making  wine,  and  pour  three  times  their  own 
quantity  of  water  upon  them ; stir  them  well  about, 
and  then  set  the  cask  in  a warm  place,  also  covered, 
and  the  liquor  in  a few  weeks’  time  will  become  a 
sound  vinegar,  which  drawn  off  from  its  sediments; 
put  into  another  cask,  and  well  bunged  down,  will 
be  a good  vinegar  for  the  table.” — Beastall's  Useful 
Guide.  A.] 

ACETIFK 1ATION  (Acctificatio  ; from  acetum , 
vinegar,  and  fio,  to  make.)  The  action  or  operation 
by  which  vinegar  is  made. 

ACETOMETER.  An  instrument  for  estimating 
the  strength  of  vinegars.  See  Acetic  Acid. 

ACETO'SA.  (From  accsco,  to  be  sour.)  Sorrel.  A 
genus  of  plants  in  some  systems  of  botany.  See  Bumex. 

ACETOSE'LLA.  (Frpin  acetosa,  sorrel : so  called 
from  the  acidity  of  its  leaves.)  Wood-sorrel.  Seo 
Oxalis  acetosella. 

17 


ACH 


ACETOUS.  (Acetosus  ; from  acetum,  vinegar.) 
Of  or  belonging  to  vinegar. 

Acetous  Acid.  See  Acetum. 

Acetous  Fermentation.  See  Fermentation. 

ACE'TUM.  ( Acetum , i.  n. ; from  acer , sour.)  Vi- 
negar. A sour  liquor  obtained  from  many  vegetable 
substances  dissolved  in  boiling  water,  and  from  fer- 
mented and  spirituous  liquors,  by  exposing  them  to 
lieat  and  contact  with  air ; under  which  circumstances 
they  undergo  the  acid  fermentation,  and  afford  the 
iiquor  called,  vinegar.  Common  vinegar  consists  of 
acetic  acid  combined  with  a large  portion  of  water,  and 
with  this  are  in  solution  portions  of  gluten,  mucilage, 
sugar,  and  extractive  matter,  from  which  it  derives  its 
colour,  and  frequently  some  of  the  vegetable  acids,  par- 
ticularly the  malic  and  the  tartaric.  See  Acetic  Acid. 

AcEtum  aromaticum.  Aromatic  vinegar.  A pre- 
paration of  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia,  thought  to 
be  an  improvement  of  what  has  been  named  thieves' 
vinegar. 

Take  of  the  dried  tops  of  rosemary,  the  dried  leaves 
of  sage,  of  each  four  ounces  ; dried  lavender  flowers, 
two  ounces ; cloves,  two  drachms ; distilled  vinegar, 
eight  pounds.  Macerate  for  seven  days,  and  strain  the 
expressed  juice  through-  paper.  Its  virtues  are  anti- 
septic, and  it  is  a useful  composition  to  smell  at  in 
crowded  courts  of  justice,  hospitals,  &.c.  where  the  air 
is  offensive. 

Acetum  colchici.  Vinegar  of  meadow-saffron. 
Take  of  fresh  meadow-saffron  root  sliced,  an  ounce ; 
acetic  acid,  a pint ; proof  spirit,  a fluid  ounce.  Mace- 
rate the  meadow-saffron  root  in  the  acid,  in  a covered 
glass  vessel,  for  three  days  ; then  press  out  the  liquor 
and  set  it  by,  that  the  feculencies  may  subside  ; lastly, 
add  the  spirit  to  the  clear  liquor.  The  dose  is  from 
3 ss  to  3 iss. 

Acetum  distillatum.  See  Acidum  aceticum  di- 
lutum. 

Acetum  scill.®.  Vinegar  of  squills.  Take  of 
squills  recently  dried,  one  pound ; dilute  acetic  acid, 
six  pints ; proof  spirit,  half  a pint.  Macerate  the 
squills  with  the  vinegar  in  a glass. vessel,  with  a gentle 
heat  for  twenty-four  hours ; then  express  the  liquor  and 
set  it  aside  until  the  feces  subside.  To  the  decanted 
liquor  add  the  spirit.  This  preparation  of  squills  is 
employed  as  an  attenuant,  expectorant,  and  diuretic. 
Dose,  xv.  to  lx.  drops. 

A'CHEIR.  (From  a,  neg.  and  %ap,  hand.)  With- 
out hands. 

Achi'colum.  By  this  word  Ctelius  Aurelianus, 
Acut.  lib.  iii.  cap.  17,  expresses  the  sudatorium  of  the  i 
ancient  baths,  which  was  a hot  room  where  they  used 
to  sweat. 

ACHILLE'A.  { Achillea , te,  f.  AxiXXeia : from 

Achilles,  who  is  said  to  have  made  his  tents  with  it, 
or  to  have  cured  Telephus  with  it.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnasan  system.  Class  Syn- 
genesia;  Order,  Polygamia  superjiua. 

2.  The  pharmaceutical  name,  of  the  milfoil.  See 
Achillea  millefolium. 

Achillea  aoeratum.  Maudlin,  or  maudlin  tansy. 
Balsamita  feemina  ; Eupatorium  Mcsues  This  plant, 
the  ageratum  of  the  shops,  is  described  by  Linmeus  as 
Achillea  : — foliis  lanceolatis , obtusis , acutoserratis. 
It  is  esteemed  in  some  countries  as  anthelminthic  aad 
alterative,  and  is  given  in  hepatic  obstructions.  It 
possesses  the  virtues  of  tansy. 

Achillea  millefolium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  yarrow,  or  milfoil.  Achillea ; Myriophyl- 
lon;  Chiliophyllon ; Lumbus  veneris ; Militaris  herba ; 
Strahotes ; Carpentaria;  Speculum  veneris.  The 
leaves  and  flowers  of  this  indigenous  plant,  Achillea — 
foliis  bipinnatis  nudis ; laciniis  linear ib us  dentatis ; 
caulibus  superne  sulcatis  of  Linnaeus,  have  an  agree- 
able, weak,  aromatic  smell,  and  a bitterish,  rough,  and 
somewhat  pungent  taste.  They  are  both  directed  for 
medicinal  use  in  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia ; in  the 
present  practice,  however,  they  are  almost  wholly  ne- 
glected. 

Achillea  ptarmica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sneeze- wort,  or  bastard  pellitory.  Pscudopyrethrum ; 
Pyrethrum  sylvestre  ; Draco  sylvestris  ; Tarchon  syl- 
vestris  ; Sternutameatoria ; Dracunculus  pralensis. 
The  flowers  and  roots  of  this  plant,  Achillea— foliis 
lanceolatis , acuminatis , argute  serratis , have  a hot 
biting  taste,  approaching  to  that  of  pyrethrum,  with 
which  they  also  agree  in  their  pharmaceutical  proper- 


ACH 

ties.  Their  principal  use  is  as  a masticatory  and  ster- 
nutatory. 

Achillea  foliis  pinnatis.  See  Genipi  verum. 

ACHI  LLES.  The  son  of  Peleus  and  Thetis,  one 
of  the  most  celebrated  Grecian  heroes.  A tendon  is 
named  after  him,  and  also  a plant  with  which  he  is 
said  to  have  cured  Telephus. 

Aciiillis  tendo.  The  tendon  of  the  gastrocnemii 
muscles.  So  called,  because,  as  fable  reports,  Thetis, 
the  mother  of  Achilles,  held  him  by  that  part  when  she 
dipped  him  in  the  river  Styx,  to  make  him  invulne- 
rable. Homer  describes  this  tenclon,  and  some  writers 
suppose  it  was  thus  named  by  the  ancients,  from  their 
custom  of  calling  every  thirlg  Achillean , that  had  any 
extraordinary  strength  or  virtue.  Others  say  it  was 
named  from  its  action  in  conducing  to  swiftness  of 
pace,  the  term  importing  so  much.  The  tendon  of 
Achilles  is  the  strong  and  powerful  tendon  of  the  heel 
which  is  formed  by  the  junction  of  the  gastrocnemius 
and  soleus  muscles,  and  which  extends  along  the  pos- 
terior part  of  the  tibia  from  the  calf  to  the  heel.  See 
Gastrocnemius  externus,  and  Gastrocnemius  intemus. 

When  this  tendon  is  unfortunately  cut  or  ruptured, 
as  it  may  be  in  consequence  of  a violent  exertion,  or 
spasm  of  the  muscles  of  which  it  is  a continuation,  the 
use  of  the  leg  is  immediately  lost,  and  unless  the  part 
be  afterwards  successfully  united,  the  patient  must  re- 
main a cripple  for  life.  When  the  tendon  has  been 
cut,  the  division  of  the  skin  allows  the  accident  to  be 
seen.  When  the  tendon  has  been  ruptured,  the  pa- 
tient hears  the  sound  like  that  of  the  smack  of  a whip, 
at  the  moment  of  the  occurrence.  In  whatever  way 
the  tendon  has  been  divided,  there  is  a sudden  inca- 
pacity, or  at  least  an  extreme  difficulty,  either  of  stand- 
ing or  walking.  Hence  the  patient  falls  down,  and 
cannot  get  up  again.  Besides  these  symptoms  there  is 
a very  palpable  depression  between  the  ends  of  the 
tendon ; which  depression  is  increased  when  the  foot  is 
bent,  and  diminished,, or  even  quite  removed  when  the 
foot  is  extended.  The  patient  can  spontaneously  bend 
his  foot,  none  of  the  flexor  muscles  being  interested. 
The  power  of  extending  the  foot  is  still  possible,  as  the 
peronei  muscles,  the  tibialis  posticus,  and  long  flexors, 
remain  perfect,  and  may  perform  this  motion.  The 
indications  are  to  bring  the  ends  of  the  divided  parts 
together,  and  to  keep  them  so,  until  they  have  become 
firmly  united.  The  first  object  is  easily  fulfilled  by 
putting  the  foot  in  a state  of  complete  extension  ; the 
second,  namely,  that  of  keeping  the  ends  of  the  ten 
don  in  contact,  is  more  difficult.  It  seems  unneces 
i sary  to  enumerate  the  various  plans  devised  to  ac 
complish  these  ends.  The  following  is  Desault’s  me 
thod:  After  the  ends  of  the  tendon  had  been  brough 
into  contact  by  moderate  flection  of  the  knee,  am 
complete  extension  of  the  foot,  he  used  to  fill  up  tin 
hollows  on  each  side  of  the  tendon  with  soft  lint  and 
compresses.  The  roller  applied  to  the  limb,  made  as 
much  pressure  on  these  compresses  as  on  the  tendon, 
and  hence  this  part  could  not  be  depressed  too  much 
against  the  adjacent  parts.  Desault  next  took  a com- 
press about  two  inches  broad,  and  long  enough  to  reach 
from  the  toes  to  the  middle  of  the  thigh,  and  placed  it 
under  the  foot,  over  the  back  of  the  leg  and  lower  part 
of  the  thigh.  He  then  began  to  apply  a few  circles  of 
a roller  round  the  end  of  the  foot,  so  as  to  fix  the  lower 
extremity  of  the  longitudinal  compress ; after  cover- 
ing the  whole  foot  with  the  roller,  he  used  to  make  the 
bandage  describe  the  figure,  of  8,  passing  it  under  the 
foot  and  across  the  place  where  the  tendon  was  rup- 
tured, and  the  method  was  finished  by  encircling  the 
limb  upward  with  the  roller  as  far  as  the  upper  end  of 
the  longitudinal  compress. 

A'CHLYS.  (A Xu?.)  Darkness;  cloudiness.  An 
obsolete  term,  generally  applied  to  a close,  foggy  air, 
or  a mist. 

1.  Hippocrates,  de  Morbis  Mulierum,  lib.  ii.  signifies 
by  this  word  air,  condensed  air  in  the  womb. 

2.  Galen  interprets  it  of  those,  who,  during  sickness, 
lose  that  lustre  and  loveliness  observed  about  the  pupil 
of  the  eye  in  health. 

3.  Others  express  it  by  an  ulcer  on  the  pupil  of  the 
eye,  or  the  scar  left  there  by  an  ulcer. 

4.  It  means  also  an  opacity  of  the  cornea;  the  sam« 
as  the  caligo  cornea  of  Dr.  Cullen. 

ACHME  LLA.  See  Spilanthus  acmella. 

A'CIIOLUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  x0^'  bile'  0*2 
ficient  in  bile. 


ACI 


ACI 


A'CHOR.  ( Achor , oris.  m.  a%wp,  qu.  avvwp  ; from 
axvrli  ^ran : according  to  Blanciiard  it  is  derived  from 
a,  priv.  and  space,  as  occupying  but  a small 

compass.)  Lactumen  ; Mas;  Scores;  Cerion;  Fa- 
vus  ; Crusta  lactea  of  authors.  The  scald-head  ; so 
called  from  the  branny  scales  thrown  off  it.  A dis- 
ease which  attacks  the  hairy  scalp  of  the  head,  for 
the  most  part,  of  young  children,  forming  soft  and  scaly 
eruptions.  Dr.  Willan,  in  his  description  of  different 
kinds  of  pustules,  defines  the  achor,  a pustule  of  inter- 
mediate size  between  the  phlyzacium  and  psydracium, 
which  contains  a straw-coloured  fluid,  having  the  ap- 
pearance and  nearly  the  consistence  of  strained  honey. 
It  appeared  most  frequently  about  the  head,  and  is 
succeeded  by  a dull  white  or  yellowish  scab.  Pustules 
of  this  kind,  when  so  large  as  nearly  to  equal  the  size 
of  phlyzacia,  are  termed  ceria  or  favi,  being  succeeded 
by  a yellow  semi-transparent,  and  sometimes  cellular, 
scab,  like  a honeycomb.  The  achor  differs  from  the 
favus  and  tinea  only  in  the  degree  of  virulence.  It  is 
called  favus  when  the  perforations  are  large ; and  tinea 
when  they  are  like  those  which  are  made  by  moths  in 
cloth ; but  generally  by  tinea  is  understood  a dry  scab  on 
the  hairy  scalp  of  children,  with  thick  scales  and  an 
offensive  smell.  When  this  disorder  affects  the  face, 
it  is  called  crusta  lactea  or  milk  scab.  Mr.  Bell,  in  his 
Treatise  on  Ulcers,  reduces  the  tinea  capitis  and  crusta 
lactea  to  some  species  of  herpes,  viz.  the  herpes  pus- 
tulosus,  differing  only  in  situation. 

ACHORISTOS.  Inseparable.  This  term  was  ap- 
plied by  the  ancients,  to  symptoms,  or  signs,  which  are 
inseparable  from  particular  things.  Thus,  softness  is 
inseparable  from  humidity ; hardness  from  fragility  ; 
and  a pungent  pain  in  the  side  is  an  inseparable  symp- 
tom of  a pleurisy. 

ACHRAS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Hexandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia.  The  sapota  plum-tree. 

Achras  sapota.  The  systematic  name  of  the  tree 
which  affords  the  oval-fruited  sapota,  seeds  of  which 
are  sometimes  given  in  the  form  of  emulsion  in  calcu- 
lous complaints.  It  is  a native  of  South  America,  and 
bears  a fruit  like  an  apple,  which  has,  when  ripe,  a 
luscious  taste,  resembling  that  of  the  marmalade  of 
quinces,  whence  it  is  called  natural  marmalade.  The 
bark  of  this,  and  the  Achras  mammosa  is  very  astrin- 
gent, and  is  used  medicinally  under  the  name  of  Cor- 
tex jamaicensis. 

ACHREI'ON.  Useless.  Applied  by  Hippocrates 
to  the  limbs  which,  through  weakness,  become  useless. 
ACHROI'A.  A paleness. 

A'CIIYRON.  A%upov.  This  properly  signifies 
bran,  or  chaff,  or  straw.  Hippocrates,  de  Morbis 
Mulierum,  most  probably  means  by  this  word,  bran. 
Achyron  also  signifies  a straw,  hair,  or  any  thing  that 
sticks  upon  a wall. 

A'CIA.  (From  aicy,  a point.)  A needle  with  thread 
in  it  for  chirurgical  operations. 

A'CICYS.  Weak,  infirm,  or  faint.  In  this  sense 
it  is  used  by  Hippocrates,  de  Morb.  lib.  iv. 

ACID.  ( Acidum , i.  n.)  1.  That  which  impresses 
upon  the  organs  of  taste  a sharp  or  sour  sensation.  The 
word  sour , which  is  usually  employed  to  denote  the 
simple  impression,  or  lively  and  sharp  sensation  pro- 
duced on  the  tongue  by  certain  bodies,  may  be  regarded 
as  synonymous  to  the  word  acid.  The  only  difference 
which  can  be  established  between  them,  is,  that  the 
one  denotes  a weak  sensation,  whereas  the  other  com- 
prehends all  the  degrees  of  force,  from  the  least  per- 
ceptible to  the  greatest  degree  of  causticity : thus  we 
say  that  verjuice,  gooseberries,  or  lemons,  are  sour ; 
but  we  use  the  word  acid  to  express  the  impression 
which  the  nitric,  sulphuric,  or  muriatic  acids  make 
upon  the  tongue. 

2.  Acids  are  an  important  class  of  chemical  com 
pounds.  In  the  generalization  of  facts  presented  by 
Lavoisier  and  the  associated  French  chemists,  it  was 
the  leading  doctrine  that  acids  resulted  from  the  union 
of  a peculiar  combustible  base  called  the  radical , with 
a common  principle  technically  called  oxygen,  or  the 
acidifi.tr.  This  general  position  was  founded  chiefly 
on  the  phenomena  exhibited  in  the  formation  and 
decomposition  of  sulphuric,  carbonic,  phosphoric,  and 
nitric  acids  ; and  was  extended  by  a plausible  analogy 
to  other  acids,  the  radicals  of  which  were  unknown. 

“ I have  already  shown,”  says  Lavoisier,  “ that 
phosphorus  is  changed  by  combustion  into  an  extremely 

B 2 


light,  white,  flaky  matter.  Its  properties  are  likewise 
entirely  altered  by  this  transformation ; from  being 
insoluble  in  water,  it  becomes  not  only  soluble,  but  so 
greedy  of  moisture  as  to  attract  the  humidity  of  the 
air  with  astonishing  rapidity.  By  this  means  it  is 
converted  into  a liquid,  considerably  more  dense,  and 
of  more  specific  gravity  than  water.  In  the  state  of 
phosphorus  before  combustion,  it  had  scarcely  any 
sensible  taste ; by  its  union  with  oxygen  it  acquires  an 
extremely  sharp  and  sour  taste  ; in  a word,  from  one 
of  the  class  of  combustible  bodies,  it  is  changed  into 
an  incombustible  substance,  and  becomes  one  of  those 
bodies  called  acids. 

44  This  property  of  a combustible  substance,  to  be 
converted  into  an  acid  by  the  addition  of  oxygen,  we 
shall  presently  find  belongs  to  a great  number  of  bodies. 
Wherefore  strict  logic  requires  that  we  should  adopt  a 
common  term  for  indicating  all  these  operations  which 
produce  analogous  results.  This  is  the  true  way  to 
simplify  the  study  of  science,  as  it  would  be  quite  im- 
possible to  bear  all  its  specific  details  in  the  memory 
if  they  were  not  classically  arranged.  For  this  reason 
we  shall  distinguish  the  conversion  of  phosphorus  into 
an  acid  by  its  union  with  oxygen,  and  in  general  every 
combination  of  oxygen  with  a combustible  substance, 
by  the  term  oxygenation ; from  this  I shall  adopt  the 
verb  to  oxygenate  ; and  of  consequence  shall  say,  that 
in  oxygenating  phosphorus,  we  convert  it  into  an  acid. 

“ Sulphur  also,  in  burning,  absorbs  oxygen  gas ; 
the  resulting  acid  is  considerably,  heavier  than  the 
sulphur  burnt ; its  weight  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the 
weights  of  the  sulphur  which  has  been  burnt,  and  of  the 
oxygen  absorbed  ; and,  lastly,  this  acid  is  weighty,  in- 
combustible, and  miscible  with  water  in  all  proportions. 

“ I might  multiply  these  experiments,  and  show,  by 
a numerous  succession  of  facts,  that  all  acids  are 
formed  by  the  combustion  of  certain  substances  ; but 
I am  prevented  from  doing  so  in  this  place  by  the  plan 
which  I have  laid  down,  of  proceeding  only  from  facts 
already  ascertained  to  such  as  are  unknown,  and  of 
drawing  my  examples  only  from  circumstances  already 
explained.  In  the  mean  time,  however,  the  examples 
above  cited  may  suffice  for  giving  a clear  and  accurate 
conception  of  the  manner  in  which  acids  are  formed. 
By  these  it  may  be  clearly  seen  that  oxygen  is  an  ele- 
ment common  to  them  all,  and  which  constitutes  or 
produces  their  acidity  ; and  that  they  differ  from  each 
other  according  to  the  several  natures  of  the  oxyge- 
nated or  acidified  substances.  We  must,  therefore,  in 
every  acid,  carefully  distinguish  between  the  acidifia- 
ble  has?,  which  de  Morveau  calls  the  radical,  and  4 the 
acidifying  principle  or  oxygen.’  ” Elements , p.  115. 

“ Although  we  have  not  yet  been  able  either  to  com- 
pose or  to  decompound  this  acid  of  sea  salt,  we  cannot 
have  the  smallest  doubt  that  it,  like  all  other  acids,  is 
composed  by  the  union  of  oxygen  with  an  acidifiable 
base.  We  have,  therefore,  called  this  unknown  sub- 
stance the  muriatic  base,  or  muriatic  radical.”  P.  122. 
5th  Edition. 

Berthollet  maintains,  that  Lavoisier  had  given  too 
much  latitude  to  the  idea  of  oxygen  being  the  universal 
acidifying  principle.  “In  fact,”  says  he,  “it  is  car- 
rying the  limits  of  analogy  too  far  to  infer,  that  all 
acidity,  even  that  of  the  muriatic,  fluoric,  and  boracic 
acids,  arises  from  oxygen,  because  it  gives  acidity  to 
a great  number  of  substances.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen, 
which  really  possesses  the  properties  of  an  acid, 
proves  directly  that  acidity  is  not  in  all  cases  owing  to 
oxygen.  There  is  no  better  foundation  for  concluding 
that  hydrogen  is  the  principle  of  alcalinity,  not  only  in 
the  alcaiies,  properly  so  called,  but  also  in  magnesia, 
lime,  strontian,  and  barytes,  because  ammonia  appears 
to  owe  its  alcalinity  to  hydrogen. 

44  These  considerations  prove  that  oxygen  may  be 
regarded  as  the  most  usual  principle  of  acidity,  but 
that  this  species  of  affinity  for  the  alcaiies  may  belong 
to  substances  which  do  not  contain  oxygen  ; that  we 
must  not,  therefore,  always  infer,  from  the  acidity  of 
a substance,  that  it  contains  oxygen,  although  this 
may  be  an  inducement  to  suspect  its  existence  in  it ; 
still  less  should  we  conclude,  because  a substance  con- 
tains oxygen,  that  it  must  have  acid  properties  ; on 
the  contrary,  the  acidity  of  an  oxygenated  substance 
shows  that  the  oxygen  has  only  experienced  an  incom- 
plete saturation  in  it,  since  its  properties  remain  pre- 
dominant.” 

This  generalization  of  the  French  chemists  concern- 


AC  I 


ACI 


ing  oxygen,  was  first  experimentally  combated  by  Sir 
Humphry  Davy,  in  a series  of  dissertations  published 
in  the  Philosophical  Transactions. 

“ His  first  train  of  experiments  was  instituted  with 
the  view  of  operating  by  voltaic  electricity  on  muriatic 
and  other  acids  freed  from  water.  Substances  which 
are  now  known  by  the  names  of  chlorides  of  phos- 
phorus and  tin,  but  which  he  then  supposed  to  contain 
dry  muriatic  acid,  led  him  to  imagine  that  intimately 
combined  water  was  the  real  acidifying  principle,  since 
acid  properties  were  immediately  developed  in  the 
above  substances  by  the  addition  of  that  fluid,  though 
previously  they  exhibited  no  acid  powers.  In  July, 
1810,  however,  he  advanced  those  celebrated  views 
concerning  acidification,  which,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
. best  judges,  display  an  unrivalled  power  of  scientific 
research.  The  conclusions  to  which  these  led  him, 
were  incompatible  with  the  general  hypothesis  of 
Lavoisier.  He  demonstrated  that  oxymuriatic  acid  is, 
as  far  as  our  knowledge  extends,  a simple  substance, 
which  may  be  classed  in  the  same  order  of  natural 
bodies  as  oxygen  gas,  being  determined  like  oxygen  to 
the  positive  surface  in  voltaic  combinations,  and  like 
oxygen  combining  with  inflammable  substances,  pro- 
ducing heat  and  light.  The  combinations  of  oxymu- 
riatic acid  with  inflammable  bodies  were  shown  to 
be  analogous  to  oxydes  and  acids  in  their  properties 
and  powers  of  combination,  but  to  differ  from  them  in 
being,  for  the  most  part,  decomposable  by  water ; and, 
finally,  that  oxymuriatic  acid  has  a stronger  attraction 
for  most  inflammable  bouies  than  oxygen.  His  pre- 
ceding decomposition  of  the  alcalies  and  earths  having 
evinced  the  absurdity  of  that  nomenclature  which 
gives  to  the  general  and  essential  constituent  of  alca- 
line  nature,  the  term  oxygen  or  acidifier ; his  new  dis- 
covery of  the  simplicity  of  oxymuriatic  acid,  showed 
the  theoretical  system  of  chemical  language  to  be 
equally  vicious  in  another  respect.  Hence  this  philo- 
sopher most  judiciously  discarded  the  appellation 
oxymuriatic  acid,  and  introduced  in  its  place  the  name 
chlorine,  which  merely  indicates  an  obvious  and  per- 
manent character  of  the  substance,  its  greenish  yellow 
colour.  The  more  recent  investigations  of  chemists  on 
fluoric,  hydriodic,  and  hydrocyanic  acids,  have  brought 
powerful  analogies  in  support  of  the  chloridic  theory, 
by  showing  that  hydrogen  alone  can  convert  certain 
undecompounded  bases  into  acids  well  characterized, 
without  the  aid  of  oxygen.” 

“ After  these  observations  on  t.re  nature  of  acidity, 
we  shall  now  state  the  general  properties  of  the  acids. 

“ 1.  The  taste  of  these  bodies  is  tor  the  most  part 
sour,  as  their  name  denotes;  and  in  the  stronger 
species  „t  is  acrid  and  corrosive. 

“ 2.  They  generally  combine  with  water  in  every 
proportion,  with  a condensation  of  volume  and  evolu- 
tion of  heat. 

“ 3.  With  a few  exceptions  they  are  volatilized  or 
decomposed  at  a moderate  heat. 

“ 4.  They  usually  change  the  purple  colours  of  vege- 
tables to  a bright  red. 

“ 5.  They  unite  in  definite  proportions  with  the 
alcalies,  earths,  and  metallic  oxydes,  and  form  the 
important  class  of  salts.  This  may  be  reckoned  their 
characteristic  and  indispensable  property.” 

“ Thenard  has  lately  succeeded  in  communicating  to 
many  acids  apparently  a surcharge  of  oxygen,  and 
thus  producing  a supposed  new  class  of  bodies,  the 
oxygenized  acids , which  are,  in  reality,  combinations 
of  the  ordinary  acids  with  oxygenized  water,  or  with 
the  deutoxide  of  hydrogen.” 

“ The  class  of  acids  has  been  distributed  into  three 
orders,  according  as  they  are  derived  from  the  mineral, 
the  vegetable,  or  the  animal  kingdom.  But  a more 
specific  distribution  is  now  requisite.  They  have 
also  been  arranged  into  those  which  have  a single,  and 
those  which  have  a compound  basis  or  radical.  This 
arrangement  is  not  only  vague,  but  liable  in  other 
respects  to  considerable  objections.  The  chief  advan- 
tage of  a classification  is  to  give  general  views  to 
beginners  in  the  study,  by  grouping  together  such  sub- 
stances as  have  analogous  properties  or  composition. 
These  objects  will  be  tolerably  well  attained  by  the 
following  divisions  and  subdivisions. 

“ 1st.  Acids  from  inorganic  nature,  or  which  are 
procurable  without  having  recourse  to  animal  or 
vegetable  products. 

“ 2d.  Acids  elaborated  by  means  of  organization. 


“The  first  group  is  subdivided  into  three  families: 
1st.  Oxygen  acids;  2d.  Hydrogen  acids;  3d.  Acids 
destitute  of  both  these  supposed  acidifiers. 

Family  1st. — Oxygen  acids. 

Section  1st,  Non-metallic. 


1.  Boracic. 

2.  Carbonic. 

3.  Chloric. 

4.  Perchloric'? 

5.  Chloro-Carbonic. 

6.  Nitrous. 

7.  Hvponitric. 

8.  Nitric. 

9.  Iodic. 

10.  Iodo-Sulphuric. 


11.  Hypophosphorus. 

12.  Phosphorus. 

13.  Phosphatic. 

14.  Phosphoric. 

15.  Hyposulphurous. 

16.  Sulphurous. 

17.  Hyposulphuric. 

18.  Sulphuric. 

19.  Cyanic  1 


Section  2d,  Oxygen  acids. — Metallic. 


1.  Arsenic. 

2.  Arsenious. 

3.  Antimonious 

4.  Antimonic. 

5.  Chromic. 


6.  Columbic. 

7.  Molybdic. 

8.  Molybdous. 

9.  Tungstic. 


Family  2d. — Hydrogen  acids. 

1.  Fluoric.  6.  Hydroprussic,  or 

2.  Hydriodic.  Hydro-cyanic. 

3.  Hydrochloric,  or  Muria-  7.  Hydrosulphurous. 

tic  8.  Hydrotellurous. 

4.  Ferroprussic.  9.  Sulphuroprussic. 

5.  Hydroselenic. 

Family  3d.— Acids  without  Oxygen  or  Hydrogen 

1.  Chloriodic.  3.  Fluoboric. 

2.  Chloroprussic,  or  4.  Fluosilicic. 

Chlorocyanic. 


Division  2d.— Acids  of  Organic  Origin. 
1.  Aceric.  24.  Meconic. 


2.  Acetic. 

3.  Amniotic. 

4.  Benzoic. 

6.  Boletic. 

6.  Butyric. 

7.  Camphoric. 

8.  Caseic. 

9.  Cevadic. 

10.  Cholesteric. 

11.  Citric. 

12.  Delphinic. 

13.  ICllagic  1 

14.  Formic. 

15.  Fungic. 

16.  Gallic. 

17.  Igasuric. 

18.  Kinic. 

19.  Laccic. 

20.  Lactic. 

21.  Lampic. 

22.  Lilhic,  or  Uric. 

23.  Malic. 


25.  Menispermic. 

26.  Margaric. 

27.  Melassic  7 

28.  Mellitic. 

29  Moroxylic 

30.  Mucic. 

31.  Nanceic? 

32.  Nitro-leucic. 

33.  Nitro-saccharic 

34.  OleiG. 

35.  Oxalic. 

36.  Purpuric. 

37.  Pyrolitlric. 

38.  Pyromalic. 

39.  Pyrotartaric. 

40.  Rosasic. 

41.  Saclactic. 

42.  Sebacic. 

43.  Suberic. 

44.  Succinic. 

45.  Sulphovinic  1 

46.  Tartaric. 


The  acids  of  the  last  division  are  all  decomposable 
at  a red  heat,  and  afford  generally  carbon,  hydrogen, 
oxygen,  and,  in  some  few  cases,  also  nitrogen.  The 
mellitic  is  found  like  amber  in  wood  coal,  and,  like  it, 
is  undoubtedly  of  organic  origin.” 

Acid , aceric.  See  Aceric  acid. 

Acid,  acetic.  See  Acetum. 

Acid , acetous.  See  Acetum. 

Acid , aerial.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

Acid , cetherial.  See  JEthers. 

Acid , aluminous.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acid,  amniotic.  See  Amniotic  acid. 

Acid,  animal.  See  Acid. 

Acid,  antimomc.  See  Antimony. 

Acid , antimonous.  See  Antimony. 

Acid  of  ants.  See  Formic  acid. 

Acid,  arsenical.  See  Arsenic. 

Acid , arsenious.  See  Arsenic. 

Acid,  benzoic.  See  Benzoic  acid. 

Acid,  boletic.  See  Boletic  acid. 

Acid,  boracic.  See  Boracic  acid. 

Acid,  camphoric.  See  Camphoric  acid. 

Acid,  carbonic.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

Acid , caseic.  See  Caseic  acid. 

Acid , cetic.  See  Cette  acid. 


ACI 


ACI 


AciS,  chloric  See  Chloric  acid. 

Acid,  chloriodic.  See  Chloriodic  acid. 

Acid , chlorous.  See  Chlorous  acid. 

Acid , chloro-carbonic.  See  Chloro-carbonous  acid 

Kid  Phosgene. 

Acid , chloro- cyanic.  See  Ohloro-cyanic  acid. 

Acid , chloro-prussic.  See  Chloro-cyanic  acid. 

Acid , chromic.  See  Chromic  acid. 

Acid , citric.  See  Citric  acid. 

Acid , columbic.  See  Columbic  acid. 

Acid , cyanic.  See  Prussic  acid. 

Acid , dephlogisticated  muriatic.  See  Chlorine. 

Acid , dulcified.  Now  called  iEther. 

Acid , ellegic.  See  Ellagic  acid. 

Acid , ferro-chyazic.  See  Ferro-chyazic  acid. 

Acid , ferro-prussic.  See  Ferro-prussic  acid. 

Acid , ferruretted-chyazic.  See  Ferro-prussic  acid. 
Acid,  fluoboric.  See  Fluoboric  acid. 

Acid,  fluoric.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

Acid,  fluoric,  silicated.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

Acid,  fluosilicic.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

Acid,  formic.  See  Formic  acid. 

Acid,  fungic.  See  Fungic  acid. 

Acid , gallic.  See  Gallic  acid. 

Acid,  hydriodic.  See  Hydriodic  acid. 

Acid,  hydrochloric.  See  Muriatic  acid.  m 
Acid,  hydrocyanic.  See  Prussic  acid. 

Acid,  hydrofluoric.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

Acid,  hydrophosphorous.  See  Phosphorous  acid. 
Acid,  hydrophtoric.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

Acid,  hydrosulphuric.  See  Sulphuretted  hydrogen. 
Acid,  hydrothionic.  See  Sulphuretted  hydrogen. 
Acid , hyponitrous.  See  Hyponitrous  acid. 

Acid,  hypophosphorous.  See  Hypophosphorous  acid. 
Acid , hypo  sulphuric.  See  Hypo  sulphuric  acid. 

Acid,  hyposulphurous.  See  Hypo  sulphurous  acid. 
Acid,  igasuric.  See  Igasuric  acid. 

Acid,  imperfect.  These  acids  are  so  called  in  the 
chemical  nomenclature,  which  are  not  fully  saturated 
with  oxygen.  Their  names  are  ended  in  Latin  by 
osum,  and  in  English  by  ous  : e.  g.  acidum  nitrosum, 
or  nitrous  acid. 

Acid , iodic.  See  Iodic  acid. 

Acid,  iodosulphuric.  See  lodosulphuric  acid. 

Acid,  kinic.  See  Kinic  acid. 

Acid,  krarneric.  See  Krameric  acid. 

Acid , laccic.  See  Laccic  acid. 

Acid,  lactic.  See  Lactic  acid. 

Acid,  lampic.  See  Lampic  acid. 

Acid,  lethic.  See  Lethic  acid. 

Acid,  malic.  See  Malic  acid. 

Acid , manganesic.  See  Manganesic  acid . 

Acid,  margaritic.  See  Margaritic  acid. 

Acid,  meconic.  See  Meconic  acid. 

Acid,  mellitic.  See  Mellitic  acid. 

Acid,  menispermic.  See  Mcnispermic  acid. 

Acid  of  milk.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Acid,  mineral.  Those  acids  which  are  found  to  ex- 
ist in  minerals,  as  the  sulphuric,  the  nitric,  &c.  See 
Acid. 

Acid,  molybdic.  See  Molybdic  acid. 

Acid , molybdous.  See  Molybdous  acid. 

Acid,  morozylic.  See  Moroxylic  acid. 

Acid,  mucic.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Acid,  mucous.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Acid , muriatic.  See  Muriatic  acid » 

Acid,  muriatic , dephlogisticated. 

Acid,  nanceic.  See  Nanceic  acid. 

Acid  of  nitre.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Acid,  nitric.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Acid , nitro-leucic.  See  Nitro-leucic  acid. 

Acid,  nitro-muriatic.  See  Nttro-muriatic  acid. 
Acid,  nitro- saccharine.  See  Nitro-saccharic  acid. 
Acid , nitro  sulphuric.  See  Nitro-sulphuric  acid. 
Acid,  nitrous.  See  Nitrous  acid. 

Acid,  CEnothionic.  See  (Enothionic  acid. 

Acid , oleic.  See  Oleic  acid. 

Acid,  oxalic.  See  Oxalic  acid. 

Acid,  oxiodic.  See  Iodic  acid. 

Acid,  oxychloric.  See  Perchloric  acid. 

Acid,  oxymuriatic.  See  Chlorine, 
dcid,  perchloric.  See  Perchloric  acid. 

Acid,  perfect.  An  acid  is  termed  perfect  in  the  che- 
mical nomenclature,  when  it  is  completely  saturated 
with  oxygen.  The  names  are  ended  in  Latin  by  icum, 
and  in  English  by  ic : e.  g.  acidum  nitricum , or  nitric 
acid. 


Acid,  perlate.  See  Perlate  acid. 

Acid , pernitrous.  See  Hyponitrous  acid. 

Acid,  phosphatic.  See  Phosphatic  acid. 

Acid,  phosphoric.  See  Phosphoric  acid. 

Acid , phosphorous.  See  Phosphorous  acid. 

Acid,  prussic.  See  Prussic  acid. 

Acid,  purpuric.  See  Purpuric  acid. 

Acid,  pyro-acetic.  See  Pyro-acetic  acid. 

Acid , pyrocitric.  See  Pyrocitric  acid. 

Acid,  pyroligneous.  See  Pyro-ligneous  ana . 

Acid,  pyromucous.  See  Pyro-mucic  acid. 

Acid,  pyrotartaroas.  See  Pyrotartaric  acid. 

Acid , rheumic.  See  Rlieumic  acid. 

Acid,  saccho-lactic.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Acid,  saclactic.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Acid,  sebacic.  See  Sebacic  acid. 

Acid,  selenic.  See  Selenic  acid. 

Ac  id,  silicated  fluoric. 

Acid,  sorbic.  See  Sorbic  acid. 

Acid,  stannic.  See  Stannic  acid. 

Acid , stibic.  See  Stibic  acid. 

Acid , stibious.  See  Stibious  acid. 

Acid,  suberic.  See  Suberic  acid. 

Acid,  succinic.  See  Succinic  acid. 

Acid  of  sugar.  See  Oxalic  acid. 

Acid,  sulpho-  cyanic.  See  Sulphuro-prussic  acid. 

Acid,  sulphovinous.  See  Sulphovinic  acid. 

Acid,  sulphureous.  See  Sulphureous  acid. 

Acid,  sulphuretted  chyazic.  See  Sulphuro-prussic 
acid. 

Acid,  sulphuric.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acid  of  tartar.  See  Tartaric  acid. 

Acid , tartaric.  See  Tartaric  acid. 

Acid , telluric.  See  Telluric  acid. 

Acid,  tungstic.  See  Tungstic  acid.  . 

Acid , uric.  See  Lithic  acid. 

Acid,  vegetable.  Those  which  are  found  in  the 
vegetable  kingdom,  as  the  citric,  malic,  acetic,  &c. 
See  Acid. 

Acid  of  vinegar.  See  Acetum. 

Acid  of  vinegar,  concentrated.  See  Acetum. 

Acid  of  vitriol.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acid,  vitriolic.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acid,  zumic.  See  Zumic  acid. 

ACIDIFIABLE.  Capable  of  being  converted  into  an 
acid  by  pn  acidifying  principle.  Substances  possessing 
this  property  are  called  radicals  and  acidifiable  bases. 

ACIDIFICATION.  ( Acidificatio ; from  acidum , an 
acid.)  The  formation  of  an  acid ; also  the  impreg- 
nation of  any  thing  with  acid  properties. 

ACIDIFYING.  See  Acid. 

ACIDIMETRY.  The  measurement  of  the  strength 
of  acids.  This  is  effected  by  saturating  a given  weight 
of  them  with  an  alkaline  base ; the  quantity  of  which 
requisite  for  the  purpose,  is  the  measure  of  their 
power. 

ACIDITY.  Aciditas.  Sourness. 

ACIDULOUS.  Acidula,  Latin ; acidule,  French. 
Sligntly  acid : applied  to  those  salts  in  which  the  base 
is  combined  with  such  an  excess  of  acid,  that  they 
manifestly  exhibit  acid  properties,  as  the  supertartrate 
and  the  supersulphate  of  potassa. 

Acidulous  waters.  Mineral  waters,  which  contain 
so  great  a quantity  of  carbonic  acid  gas,  as  to  render 
them  acidulous,  or  gently  tart  to  the  taste.  See  Mine- 
ral waters. 

ACIDULUS.  Acidulated.  Any  thing  blended  with 
an  acid  juice  in  order  to  give  it  a coolness  and  brisk 
ness. 

A'CIDUM.  ( Acidum , i.  n. ; from  aceo,  to  be  sour.; 
An  acid.  See  Acid. 

Acidum  aceticum.  See  Acidum  aceticum  dilutum. 

Acidum  aceticum  dilutum.  Dilute  acetic  acid. 
Take  of  vinegar,  a gallon. 

Distil  the  acetic  acid  in  a sand  bath,  from  a glass 
retort  into  a receiver  also  of  glass,  and  kept  cold ; 
throw  away  the  first  pint,  and  keep  for  use  the  six 
succeeding  pints,  which  are  distilled  over. 

In  this  distillation,  the  liquor  should  be  kept  mode- 
rately boiling,  and  the  heat  should  not  be  urged  too 
far,  otherwise  the  distilled  acid  will  have  an  empyreu- 
rnatic  smell  and  taste,  which  it  ought  not  to  possess. 
If  the  acid  be  prepared  correctly,  it  will  be  colourless, 
and  of  a grateful,  pungent,  peculiar  acid  taste.  One 
fluid  ounce  ought  to  dissolve  at  least  ten  grains  of  car- 
bonate of  lime,  or  white  marble.  This  liquor  is  the 
acetum  distillatum ; the  acidum  acetosum  of  the  Lon- 
I SI 


ACI 


don  Pharmacopoeia  of  1787,  and  the  acidum  aceticum 
of  that  of  1822,  and  the  acidum  aceticum  dilutum  of 
the  present.  The  compounds  of  the  acid  of  vinegar, 
directed  to  be  used  by  the  new  London  Pharmaco- 
poeia, are  acetum  colchici , acetum  scillce,  ceratum 
plumbi  acetatis , liquor  ammonia  acetatis , liquor 
plumbi  acetatis,  liquor  plumbi  acetatis  dilutis,ozymel, 
ozymel  s cilia,  potasse  acetas,  and  the  cataplasma 
s inapis. 

Acidum  aceticum  concentratum.  When  the 
acid  of  vinegar  is  greatly  concentrated,  that  is,  de- 
prived of  its  water,  it  is  called  concentrated  acid  of 
vinegar,  and  radical  vinegar. 

Distilled  vinegar  may  be  concentrated  by  freezing  : 
the  congelation  takes  place  at  a temperature  below  28 
degrees,  more  or  less,  according  to  its  strength ; and 
the  congealed  part  is  merely  ice,  leaving,  of  course,  a 
stronger  acid.  If  this  be  exposed  to  a very  intense 
cold,  it  shoots  into  crystals ; which,  being  separated, 
liquefy,  when  the  temperature  rises  , and  the  liquor  is 
limpid  as  water,  extremely  strong,  and  has  a highly 
pungent  acetous  odour.  This  is  the  pure  acid  of  the 
vinegar ; the  foreign  matter  remaining  in  the  uncon- 
gealed liquid. 

Other  methods  are  likewise  employed  to  obtain  the 
pure  and  concentrated  acid.  The  process  of  Westen- 
dorf,  which  has  been  often  followed,  is  to  saturate  soda 
with  distilled  vinegar  ; obtain  the  acetate  by  crystal- 
lization ; and  pour  upon  it,  in  a retort,  half  its  weight 
of  sulphuric  acid.  By  applying  heat,  the  acetic  acid 
is  distilled  over ; and,  should  there  be  any  reason  to 
suspect  the  presence  of  any  sulphuric  acid,  it  may  be 
distilled  a second  time,  from  a little  acetate  of  soda. 
According  to  Lowitz,  the  best  way  of  obtaining  this 
acid  pure,  is  to  mix  three  parts  of  the  acetate  of  soda 
with  eight  of  supersulphate  of  potassa ; both  salts  being 
perfectly  dry,  and  in  fine  powder,  and  to  distil  from 
this  mixture  in  a retort,  with  a gentle  heat. 

It  may  also  be  obtained  by  distilling  the  verdigris  of 
commerce,  with  a gentle  heat.  The  concentrated  arid 
procured  by  these  processes,  was  supposed  to  differ 
materially  from  the  acetous  acids  obtained  by  distil- 
ling vinegar  ; the  two  acids  were  regarded  as  differing 
in  their  degree  of  oxygenizement,  and  were  after- 
ward distinguished  by  the  names  of  acetous  and  ace- 
tic acids.  The  acid  distilled  from  verdigris  was  sup- 
posed to  derive  a quantity  of  oxygen  from  the  oxyde  of 
copper,  from  which  it  was  expelled.  The  experi- 
ments of  Adet  have,  however,  proved  the  two  acids  to 
be  identical ; the  acetous  acid,  therefore,  only  differs 
from  the  acetic  acid  in  containing  more  water,  render- 
ing it  a weaker  acid,  and  of  a less  active  nature. 
There  exists,  therefore,  only  one  of  acid  vinegar,  which 
is  the  acetic ; its  compounds  are  termed  acetates. 

Acidum  acetosum.  See  Acetum. 

Acidum  .sthereum.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acidum  aluminosum.  (So  called  because  it  exists 
in  alum.)  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acidum  arsenicum.  See  Arsenic. 

Acidum  benzoicum.  Benzoic  acid.  The  London 
Pharmacopoeia  directs  it  to  be  made  thus  : — Take  of 
gum  benzoin  a pound  and  a half : fresh  lime,  four 
ounces : water,  a gallon  and  a half:  muriatic  acid,  four 
fluid  ounces.  Rub  together  the  benzoin  and  lime; 
then  boil  them  in  a gallon  of  the  water,  for  half  an  hour, 
constantly  stirring  ; and,  when  it  is  cold,  pour  off  the 
liquor.  Boil  what  remains  a second  time,  in  four 
pints  of  water,  and  pour  off  the  liquor  as  before.  Mix 
the  liquors,  and  boil  down  to  half,  then  strain  through 
paper,  and  add  the  muriatic  acid  gradually,  until  it 
ceases  to  produce  a precipitate.  Lastly,  having  poured 
off  the  liquor,  dry  the  powder  in  a gentle  heat;  put  it 
into  a proper  vessel,  placed  in  a sand  bath ; and  by  a 
very  gentle  fire,  sublime  the  benzoic  acid.  In  this  pro- 
cess a solution  of  benzoate  of  lime  is  first  obtained; 
the  muriatic  acid  then,  abstracting  the  lime,  precipi- 
tates the  benzoic  acid,  which  is  crystallized  by  sub- 
limation. 

The  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia  forms  a benzoate  of 
soda,  precipitates  the  acid  by  sulphuric  acid,  and  after- 
ward crystallizes  it  by  solution  in  hot  water,  which 
dissolves  a larger  quantity  than  cold. 

Benzoic  acid  has  a strong,  pungent,  aromatic,  and 
peculiar  odour.  Its  crystals  are  ductile,  not  pulver- 
izable  ; it  sublimes  in  a moderate  heat,  forming  a 
white  irritating  smoke.  It  is  soluble  in  about  twenty- 
four  times  its  weight  of  boiling  water,  which,  as  it 


ACO 

cools,  precipitates  19-20ths  of  what  it  had  disfolved 
It  is  soluble  in  alcohol. 

Benzoic  acid  is  very  seldom  used  in  the  cure  of  dis- 
eases ; but  now  and  then  it  is  ordered  as  a stimulant 
against  convulsive  coughs  and  difficulty  of  breathing. 
The  dose  is  from  one  grain  to  five. 

Acidum  Boracicum.  See  Boracic  acid. 

Acidum  carbonicum.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

Acidum  catholicon.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acidum  citricum.  See  Citric  acid. 

Acidum  murlaticum.  See  Muriatic  acid. 

Acidum  muriaticum  oxygenatum.  See  Oxygen- 
ized muriatic  acid. 

Acidum  nitricum.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Acidum  nitricum  dilutum.  Take  of  nitric  acid  a 
fluid  ounce;  distilled  water  nine  fluid  ounces.  Mix  them. 

Acidum  nitrosum.  See  Nitrous  acid. 

Acidum  phosphoricum.  See  Phosphoric  acid 

Acidum  primigenium.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acidum  succinicum.  See  Succinic  acid. 

Acidum  sulphureum.  See  Sulphureous  acid. 

Acidum  sulphuricum.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acidum  sulphuricum  dilutum.  Acidum  vitrio- 
licum  dilutum.  Spiritus  vitrioli  tenuis.  Take  of 
sulphuric  acid  a fluid  ounce  and  a half;  distilled 
water,  /ourteen  fluid  ounces  and  a half.  Add  the 
water  gradually  to  the  acid. 

Acidum  tartaricum.  See  Tartaric  acid. 

Acidum  vitriolicum.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Acidum  vitriolicum  dilutum.  See  Acidum  sul- 
phuricum dilutum. 

A'cies.  Steel. 

ACINACIFORMIS.  (From  acinacesf  a Persian 
scimitar,  or  sabre,  and  forma , resemblance.)  Acina- 
ciform ; shaped  like  a sabre,  applied  to  leaves : as 
those  of  the  mysembryanthemum  acinaciforme. 

ACLNTE'SLA.  (From  auivyoia,  immobility.)  A loss 
of  motion  and  strength. 

ACLNIFORMIS.  (From  acinus,  a grape,  and 
forma , a resemblance.)  Aciniform.  A name  given 
by  the  ancients  to  some  parts  which  resembled  the 
colour  and  form  of  an  unripe  grape,  as  the  uvea  of  the 
eye,  which  was  called  tunica  acinosa,  and  the  choroid 
membrane  of  the  eye,  which  they  named  tunica 
acimforma. 

A'CINUS.  ( Acinus , i.  m. ; a grape.)  1.  In  ana- 
tomy, those  glands  which  grow  together  in  clusters  are 
called  by  some  acini  glandulosi. 

2.  In  botany,  a small  beriy,  which,  with  several 
others,  composes  the  fruit  of  the  mulberry,  black- 
berry, &c. 

Acinus  biliosus.  The  small  glandiform  bodies  of 
the  liver,  which  separate  the  bile  from  the  blood, 
were  formerly  called  acini  biliosi : they  are  now, 
however,  termed  penicilli.  See  -Liver. 

ACMA'STICOS.  A species  of  fever,  wherein  the 
heat  continues  of  the  same  tenor  to  the  end.  Actuarius. 

A'CME.  (From  aicpy,  a point.)  The  height  or  crisis. 
A term  applied  by  physicians  to  that  period  or  state  of 
a disease  in  which  it  is  at  its  height.  The  ancients  dis- 
tinguished diseases  into  four  stages  : 1.  The  Arche,  the 
beginning  or  first  attack.  2.  Anabasis,  the  growth. 
3.  Acme,  the  height.  4.  Par  acme,  or  the  decline  of  the 
disease. 

ACME'LLA.  See  Spilanthus. 

A'CNE.  aKvtj.  Acna.  A small  pimple,  or  hard 
tubercle  on  the  face.  Foesius  says,  that  it  is  a small 
pustule  or  pimple,  which  arises  usually  about  the 
time  that  the  body  is  in  full  vigour. 

Acne'stis.  (From  a,  priv.  and  icvam,  to  scratch.) 
That  part  of  the  spine  of  the  back,  which  reaches  from 
the  metaphrenon,  which  is  the  part  between  the  shoul- 
der-blades, to  the  loins.  This  part  seems  to  have  been 
originally  called  so  in  quadrupeds  only,  because  they 
cannot  reach  it  to  scratch. 

A'COE.  aicoi).  The  sense  of  hearing. 

ACOE'LIUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  uoiXia,  the  belly.) 
Without  belly.  It  is  applied  to  those  who  are  so 
wasted,  as  to  appear  as  if  they  had  no  belly.  Galen. 

ACOF'TUS.  Akoitos ■ An  epithet  for  honey,  men 
tioned  by  Pliny ; because  it  has  no  sediment,  winch  is 
called  koittj. 

ACO'IVION.  Akoviov.  A particular  form  of  me- 
dicine among  the  ancient  physicians,  made  of  powders 
levigated,  and  probably  like  collyria  for  the  disorders 

of  the  eyes. 

ACONITA.  (Aconita,  at,  f. ; from  aconitum,  a 


ACO 


ACR 


name  of  a plant.)  A poisonous  vegetable  principle, 
probably  alcaline,  recently  extracted  from  the  aconi- 
tum napellus,  or  wolf’s  bane,  by  Mons.  Brandes  The 
details  have  not  yet  reached  this  country. 

ACONITE.  See  Aconitum. 

ACONI'TUM.  {Aconitum.,  i.  m.)  Aconite.  1.  A 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system,  all  the  species 
of  which ‘have  powerful  effects  on  the  human  body. 
Class,  Polyandria  ; Order,  Trygynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common,  or 
blue,  wolf’s-bane.  See  Aconitum  napellus. 

Aconitum  anthora.  The  root  of  this  plant  Aconi- 
tum— floribus  pentagynus,  foliorum  laciniis  linearibus 
of  Linnaeus,  is  employed  medicinally.  Its  virtues  are 
similar  to  those  of  the  aconitum  napellus . 

Aconitum  napellus.  Monk’s  hood.  Aconite. 
Wolf’s-bane.  Camorum.  Canicida.  Cynoctanum. 
Actonitum foliorum  laciniis  linearibus , superne 
latioribus , linea  exaratis  of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  is 
cultivated  in  our  gardens  as  an  ornament,  but  is  spon- 
taneously produced  in  Germany,  and  some  other 
northern  parts  of  Europe.  Every  part  is  strongly  poi- 
sonous, but  the  root  is  unquestionably  the  most  pow- 
erful ; and,  when  first  chewed,  imparts  a slight  sensa- 
tion of  acrimony ; but  afterward,  an  insensibility  or 
stupor  at  the  apex  of  the  tongue,  and  a pungent  heat 
of  the  lips,  gums,  palate,  and  fauces  are  perceived, 
followed  with  a general  tremor  and  sensation  of  chilli- 
ness. The  juice  applied  to  a wound  seemed  to  affect 
the  whole  nervous  system ; even  by  keeping  it  long  in 
the  hand,  or  on  the  bosom,  we  are  told  unpleasant 
symptoms  have  been  produced.  The  fatal  symptoms 
brought  on  by  this  poison  are,  convulsions,  giddiness, 
insanity,  violent  purgings,  both  upwards  and  down- 
wards, faintings,  cold  sweats,  and  death  itself.  Dr. 
Stoerk  appears  to  be  the  first  who  gave  the  wolf’s-bane 
internally,  as  a medicine ; and  since  his  experiments 
were  published,  1762,  it  has  been  generally  and  suc- 
cessfully employed  in  Germany  and  the  northern  parts 
of  Europe,  particularly  as  a remedy  for  obstinate 
rheumatisms  ; and  many  cases  are  related  where  this 
disease  was  of  several  years’  duration,  and  had  with- 
stood the  efficacy  of  other  powerful  medicines,  as  mer- 
cury, opium,  antimony,  hemlock,  &c.  yet,  in  a short 
time,  was  entirely  cured  by  the  aconitum.  Instances 
are  also  given  us  of  its  good  effects  in  gout,  scrofulous 
swellings,  venereal  nodes,  amaurosis,  intermittent 
fevers,  paralysis,  ulceration,  and  scirrhus.  This  plant 
has  been  generally  prepared  as  an  extract  or  inspis- 
sated juice,  after  the  manner  directed  in  the  Pharma- 
copoeia : its  efficacy  is  much  diminished  on  being  long 
kept.  Like  all  virulent  medicines,  it  should  first  be 
administered  in  small  doses.  Stoerk  recommends  two 
grains  of  the  extract  to  be  rubbed  into  a powder,  with 
two  drachms  of  sugar,  and  to  begin  with  ten  grains  of 
this  powder,  two  or  three  times  a day.  We  find,  how- 
ever, that  the  extract  is  oftener  given  from  one  grain 
to  ten  for  a dose ; and  Stoll,  Scherekbecker,  and 
others,  increased  this  quantity  considerably.  Instead 
of  the  extract,  a tincture  has  been  made  of  the  dried 
leaves  macerated  in  six  times  their  weight  of  spirits  of 
wine,  and  forty  drops  given  for  a dose.  Some  writers 
say  that  the  napellus  is  not  poisonous  in  Sweden,  Po- 
land, &c. ; but  it  should  be  noted  that  the  species 
which  is  not  poisonous,  is  the  aconitum  lycoctonum  of 
Linnaeus. 

Acopa.  Dioscorides’s  name  for  the  buck-bean  or 
Menyanthes  trifoliata  of  Linnaeus. 

A'COPON.  (From  a,  priv.  and  kottos,  weariness.) 
It  signifies  originally  whatever  is  a remedy  against 
weariness,  and  is  used  in  this  sense  by  Hippocrates. 
Aph.  viii.  lib.  ii.  But  in  time,  the  word  was  applied 
to  certain  ointments.  According  to  Galen  and  Paulus 
jEgineta,  the  Acopa  pharmaca  are  remedies  for  indis- 
positions of  body  which  are  caused  by  long  or  vehe- 
ment motion. 

Acopos.  The  name  of  a plant  in  Pliny,  supposed 
to  be  the  buck-bean  or  Menyanthes  trifoliata  of 
Linnteus. 

A'COR.  ( Acor , oris , m. ; from  aceo  to  be  sour.) 
Acidity.  It  is  sometimes  used  to  express  that  sour- 
ness in  the  stomach  contracted  by  indigestion,  and 
from  whence  flatulencies  and  acid  belching  arise. 

Acor'dina.  Indian  tutty. 

ACO'RIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  Kope w,  to  satiate.) 
Insatiability.  In  Hippocrates,  it  means  good  appetite 
and  digestion. 


ACORN.  See  Quercus  robur. 

A'CORUS.  ( Acorus , i.  m. ; aKopov , from  Kopy,  the 
pupil ; because  it  was  esteemed  good  for  the  disorders 
of  the  eyes.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnfean  system.  Class,  Hexandria.  Order,  Digynia. 

Acorus  calamus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  is  also  called  Calamus  aromaticus  ; Aco- 
rus verus  ; Calamus  odoratus ; Calamus  vulgaris  ; 
Diring  a ; Jacerantatinga  ; Typha  aromatica ; Clava 
rugosa.  Sweet-flag,  or  acorus.  Acorus  ; Scapi  mu- 
crone  longissimo  foliaceo  of  Linnseus.  The  root  has 
been  long  employed  medicinally.  It  has  a moderately 
strong  aromatic  smell ; a warm,  pungent,  bitterish 
taste;  and  is  deemed  useful  as  a warm  stomachic. 
Powdered,  and  mixed  with  some  absorbent,  it  forms  a 
useful  and  pleasant  dentifrice. 

Acorus  palustris.  See  Iris  palustris. 

Acorus  verus.  See  Acorus  calamus. 

Acorus  vulgaris.  See  Iris  palustris. 

A'COS.  (A/co?,  from  aKtopai , to  heal.)  A remedy 
or  cure. 

ACO'SMIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Kocpos,  beautiful.) 
Baldness  ; ill-health  : irregularity,  particularly  of  the 
critical  days  of  fevers. 

Aco'ste.  (Frcm  atco^t],  barley.)  An  ancient  food 
made  of  barley. 

ACOTYLE'DON.  ( Acotyledon , onis , n.  from  a, 
priv.  and  kotvXtiSiov.  Without  a cotyledon  ; applied 
in  botany  to  a seed  or  plant  which  is  not  furnished 
with  a cotyledon  ; Semen  acotyledon.)  All  the  mosses 
are  plantce  acotyledones. 

ACOU'STIC.  ( Acousticus : from  a/couw,  to  hear.) 
1.  Belonging"to  the  ear  or  to  sound. 

2.  That  which  is  employed  with  a view  to  restore 
the  sense  of  hearing,  when  wanting  or  diminished. 
No  remedies  of  this  kind,  given  internally,  are  known 
to  produce  any  uniform  effect. 

Acoustic  nerve.  See  Portio  mollis. 

Acoustic  duct . See  Meatus  auditorius. 

Acr^t'palos.  See  Acraipala. 

Acrai'pala.  (AKpama\os.  From  a,  neg.  and  upai- 
iraXrh  surfeit.)  Remedies  for  the  effects  of  a debauch 

Acra'sia.  (From  a,  and  Kepaio,  to  mix.)  Un- 
healthmess ; intemperance. 

Acrati'a.  (From  a,  and  xparoj,  strength.)  Weak- 
ness or  intemperance. 

Ackati'sma.  (From  axparov,  unmixed  wine.  The 
derivation  of  this  word  is  the  same  as  Acrasia , be- 
cause the  wine  used  on  the  occasion  was  not  mixed 
with  water.)  A breakfast  among  the  old  Greeks, 
consisting  of  a morsel  of  bread,  soaked  in  pure  un- 
mixjsd  wine. 

Acrato'meli.  (From  aKparov , pure  wine ; and 
peXi,  honey.)  Wine  mixed  with  honey. 

A CRE.  (From  a/cpos,  extreme.)  The  extremity 
of  the  nose  or  any  other  part. 

A'CREA.  (From  a/cpo?,  extreme.)  Ac.roteria.  The 
extremities  ; the  legs,  arms,  nose,  and  ears. 

Acribei'a.  (From  aupiSyg,  accurate.)  An  exact 
and  accurate  description  and  diagnosis,  or  distinction, 
of  diseases. 

ACRID.  Acris.  A term  employed  in  medicine  to 
express  a taste,  the  characteristic  of  which  is  pungency 
joined  with  heat. 

ACRIMONY.  ( Acrimonia , from  acris , acrid.)  A 
quality  in  substances  by  which  they  irritate,  corrode, 
or  dissolve  others.  It  has  been  supposed  until  very 
lately,  there  were  acid  and  alkaline  acrimonies  in  the 
blood,  which  produced  certain  diseases  ; and  although 
the  humoral  pathology  is  nearly  and  improperly  ex- 
ploded, the  term  venereal  acrimony,  and  some  others, 
are  still  and  must  be  retained. 

A'CRIS.  1.  Acrid.  S ee  Acrid. 

2.  Any  fractured  extremity. 

Acri'sia.  (From  a,  priv.  and  spiva),  to  judge  or 
separate.)  A turbulent  state  of  a disease,  which  will 
scarcely  suffer  any  judgment  to  be  formed  thereof. 

A'critus.  (From  «,  neg.  and  /cptvw,  to  judge.)  A 
disease  without  a regular  crisis,  the  event  of  which  it 
is  hazardous  to  judge. 

ACROBY'STIA.  (From  a/cpo ?,  extreme,  and  /?uw, 
to  cover.)  The  prepuce  which  covers  the  extremity 
of  the  penis. 

ACROCHEIRE'SIS.  (From  a/cpo?,  extreme,  and 
XUP)  a hand.)  An  exercise  among  the  ancients.  Pro- 
bably a species  of  wrestling,  where  they  only  held  by 
the  hands. 

23 


ACT 


ACT 


ACROCHEI'RIS.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and  %ap, 
a hand.)  Gorraeus  says,  it  signifies  the  arm  from  the 
elbow  to  the  ends  of  the  fingers  ; %£ip  signifying  the 
arm,  from  the  scapula  to  the  fingers’  end. 

ACROCHO'RDON.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and 
XopSrj,  a string.)  Galen  describes  it  as  a round  ex- 
crescence on  the  skin,  with  a slender  base  ; and  that 
it  hath  its  name  because  of  its  situation  on  the  surface 
of  the  skin.  The  Greeks  call  that  excrescence  an 
achrochordon , where  something  hard  concretes  under 
the  skin,  which  is  rather  rough,  of  the  same  colour  as 
the  skin,  slender  at  the  base  and  broader  above. 
Their  size  rarely  exceeds  that  of  a bean. 

ACROCO'LIA.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and  kcoXov, 
a limb.)  These  are  the  extremities  of  animals  which 
are  used  in  food,  as  the  feet  of  calves,  swine,  sheep, 
oxen,  or  lambs,  and  of  the  broths  of  which  jellies  are 
frequently  made.  Castellus  from  Budajus  adds,  that 
the  internal  parts  of  animals  are  also  called  by  tins 
name. 

Achrole'nion.  Casteilus  says  it  is  the  same  as 
Olecranon. 

ACROMA'NIA.  (From  aicpos,  extreme,  and  pavia, 
madness. ) Total  or  incurable  madness. 

ACRCfMION.  (From  aKpov,  extremity,  and  wpos, 
the  shoulder.)  A process  of  the,  scapula  or  shoulder- 
blade.  See  Scapula. 

ACROMPHA'LIUM.  (A Kpou(J>aXov from  aicpos , 

extreme,  and  optyaXos,  the  navel.)  Acromphalon.  The 
tip  of  the  navel. 

ACRO'MPHALON.  See  Acromphalium. 

Acro'nia.  (From  aKpov , the  extremity.)  The  am- 
putation of  an  extremity,  as  a finger. 

ACRO'PATHOS.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and  zsa- 
0os , a disease.)  Acropathus.  It  signifies  literally  a 
disease  at  the  top  or  superior  part.  Hippocrates  in  his 
treatise  De  Superfcetatione,  applies  it  to  the  internal 
orifice  of  the  uterus ; and  in  Predict,  lib.  ii.  to  cancers 
which  appear  on  the  surface  of  the  body. 

ACRO  PATHUS.  See  Acropathos. 

A'CROPIS.  (From  ukoov,  the  extremity,  and  o^, 
the  voice.)  Imperfect  articulation,  from  a fault  in  the 
tongue. 

ACROPO'STHIA.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and 
tsoady,  the  prepuce.)  The  extremity  of  the  prepuce  ; 
or  that  part  which  is  cut  off  in  circumcision. 

ACRO'PSILON.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and  xpiXus, 
naked.)  The  extremity  of  the  denuded  glans  penis. 

ACRO'SPELOS.  (From  aKpos,  extreme,  and  ttcXos, 
black,  so  called  because  its  ears,  or  tops,  are  often  of  a 
blackish  colour.)  Acrospelus.  The  bromus  discordis, 
or  wild  oat  grass. 

ACRO'SPELUS.  See  Acrospelos. 

ACROTE'RIA.  (From  aKpos , extreme.)  The  ex- 
treme parts  of  the  body  ; as  the  hands,  feet,  nose,  ears, 
chin,  &c. 

ACROTERLA'SMUS.  (From  aKpos , summus.) 
The  amputation  of  an  extremity. 

Acrothy'mia.  See  Acrothyraion. 

ACROTHY'MION.  (From  aKpos , extreme,  and 
Svpoj,  thyme.)  Acrothymia.  Acrothymkuim.  A sort 
of  wart,  described  by  Celsus,  as  hard,  rough,  with  a 
narrow  basis,  and  broad  top  ; the  top  of  the  colour  of 
thyme ; it  easily  splits  and  bleeds. 

Acrothymium.  See  Acrothyraion. 

ACROTICUS.  (From  aKpos , summus ; whence 
aKpdrrjs,  r/ros  *,  summitas  ; cacumen.)  A disease  afi’ect 
ing  the  external  surface. 

Acrotica.  The  name  of  an  order  in  Good’s  No- 
sology. 

ACROTISMUS.  Acrotismus  ; (From  a.  priv.  and 
Kporos , pulsus , defect  of  pulse.)  Acrotism  or  pulse- 
lessness. A term  synonymous  with  asphyxia,  and  ap- 
plied to  a species  of  entasia  in  Good’s  Nosology. 

ACTiE'A.  (From  ayw,  to  break.)  Acte.  The  el- 
der-tree, so  called  from  its  being  easily  broken.  See 
Samhucus  nigra. 

A'CTINE.  The  herb  Bunias , or  Napus. 

ACTINOBOLI'SMUS.  (From  oktiv,  a ray,  and 
jSciAau),  to  cast  out.)  Diradiatio.  Irradiation.  It  is 
applied  to  the  spirits,  conveying  the  inclinations  of  the 
mind  to  the  body. 

ACTINOLITE.  The  name  of  a mineral  which  is 
found  in  primitive  districts. 

[“  This  mineral  possesses  all  the  essential  characters 
of  hornblende.  In  fact,  common  hornblende  and  ac- 
tynolite, separated  only  by  slight  differences,  when 


viewed  in  the  extremes,  do  in  other  cases  insensibly 
pass  into  each  other.  The  actynolite  has  usually  a 
greater  transparency,  a more  lively  green  colour, 
arising  from  the  chrome  which  it  contains,  and  differs 
also  in  the  result  of  fusion  by  the  blow-pipe. 

“ The  actynolite  occurs  in  prismatic  crystals  which 
are  commonly  long  and  incomplete,  sometimes 
extremely  minute  and  even  fibrous,  and  variously 
aggregated  into  masses  more  or  less  large.  Its  pre- 
vailing colour  is  green,  sometimes  pure  emerald 
green,  but  varying  from  a dark  or  leek  green  to  a pale 
green,  which  is  sometimes  shaded  with  gray,  yellow, 
or  brown.  Its  colours  are  liable  to  change  in  conse- 
quence of  decomposition.  It  scratches  grass,  but  its 
prisms  are  often  fery  brittle  in  a transverse  direction. 
Its  cross  fracture  is  often  a little  chonchoidal,  and 
more  shining  than  that  of  common  hornblende.  Its 
specific  gravity  is  about  3.30. 

“ It  melts  by  the  blow-pipe  into  a gray  or  yellowish- 
gray  enamel.  It  contains,  according  to  Langier,  of 

Silex 50.00 

Magnesia 19.25 

Lime 9.75 

Alumine  0.75 

Oxide  of  iron 11.00 

Oxide  of  chrome  5.00 

95.75 


Its  green  colour  is  derived  from  the  chrome,  but  is 
often  modified  by  the  large  quantity  of  iron  which  is 
present.  It  presents  the  following  varieties,  which 
pass  into  each  other : 1.  common  actynolite  • 2.  glassy ; 
3.  acicular  ; 4.  fibrous. 

“ Actynolite  is  found  in  primitive  rocks,  or  in  veins 
which  traverse  them  ; it  is  sometimes  in  metallic  beds. 
It  is  perhaps  most  common  in  minerals  which  contain 
magnesia.  Its  more  distinct  crystals  occur  in  talc, 
quartz,  and  limestone. 

“ It  is  found  in  various  parts  of  the  United  States. 
In  Maryland,  near  Baltimore,  all  its  varieties  occur 
in  granite  or  gneiss.  In  Pennsylvania,  at  Concord  in 
Chester  county,  in  large  masses  of  an  emerald-green 
colour.  In  Connecticut,  near  New-Haven,  in  serpen- 
tine ; its  structure  generally  radiated.  In  Maine,  at 
Brunswick,  all  its  varieties  occur,  sometimes  in  granite 
and  gneiss,  but  more  frequently  in  limestone.” — 
Cleaveland' s Mineralogy.  A.] 

ACTION.  {Actio,  nis.  f. ; from  ago,  to  act.)  I. 
The  operation  or  exertion  of  an  active  power. 

2.  Any  faculty,  power,  or  function.  The  actions  or 
functions  of  the  body  are  usually  divided  by  physiolo- 
gists into  vital,  natural,  or  animal.  1.  The  vital 
functions,  or  actions,  are  those  which  are  absolutely 
necessary  to  life,  and  without  which  animals  cannot 
exist;  as  the  action  of  the  heart,  lungs,  and  arteries. 
2.  The  natural  functions  are  those  which  are  instru- 
mental in  repairing  the  several  losses  which  the  body 
sustains : digestion,  and  the  formation  of  chyle,  &c. 
fall  under  this  head.  3.  The  animal  actions  are  those 
which  we  perform  at  will,  as  muscular  motion,  and  all 
the  voluntary  motions  of  the  body. 

Independently  of  these  properties,  each  part  may  be 
said  to  have  an  action  peculiar  to  itself— for  instance, 
tiie  liver,  by  virtue  of  a power  which  is  peculiar  to  it, 
forms  continually  a liquid  which  is  called  bile : the 
same  thing  takes  place  in  the  kidneys  with  regard  to  the 
urine.  The  voluntary  muscles,  in  certain  states,  be- 
come hard,  change  their  form,  and  contract.  These 
are,  however,  referrihle  to  vitality.  It  is  upon  these 
the  attention  of  the  physiologist  ought  to  be  particu- 
larly fixed.  Vital  action  depends  evidently  upon  nu- 
trition, and  reciprocally,  nutrition  is  influenced  by 
vital  action. — Thus,  an  organ  that  ceases  to  nourish, 
loses  at  the  same  time  its  faculty  of  acting ; conse- 
quently the  organs,  the  action  of  which  is  oftenest  re- 
peated, possess  a more  active  nutrition ; and,  on  the 
contrary,  those  that  act  least,  possess  a much  slower 
nutritive  motion. 

The  mechanism  of  vital  action  is  unknowm.  There 
passes  into  the  organ  that  acts  an  insensible  molecular 
motion,  which  is  as  little  susceptible  of  description  as 
the  nutritive  motion.  Every  vital  action,  however 
simple,  is  the  same  in  this  respect. 

ACTUAL.  This  word  is  applied  to  any  thing  en- 
dued with  a property  or  virtue  wluch  acts  by  an  im- 
mediate power  inherent  in  it:  it  is  the  reverse  of 
potential : thus,  a red-hot  iron  or  fire  is  called  an  actual 


ACU 


ADA 


cautery,  in  contradistinction  from  caustics,  which  are 
called  potential  cauteries.  Boiling  water  is  actually 
hot;  brandy,  producing  heat  in  the  body,  is  potentially 
hot,  though  of  itself  cold 

Actual  cautery.  The  red-hot  iron,  or  any  red-hot 
substance.  See  Actual. 

ACTUA'RIUS.  This  word  was  originally  a title  of 
dignity  given  to  physicians  at  the  court  of  Constanti- 
nople ; but  became  afterward  the  proper  name  of  a 
celebrated  Greek  physician,  John,  (the  son  of  Zachary, 
a Christian  writer,)  who  flourished  there  about  the 
12th  or  13th  century.  He  is  said  to  be  the  first  Greek 
author  who  has  treated  of  mild  cathartics,  as  manna, 
cassia,  &c.,  though  they  were  long  before  in  use  among 
the  Arabians.  He  appears  also  to  have  first  noticed 
distilled  waters.  His  works,  however,  are  chiefly 
compiled  from  his  predecessors. 

ACTUATION.  (From  ago,  to  act.)  That  change 
wrought  on  a medicine,  or  any  thing  taken  into  the 
body,  by  the  vital  heat,  which  is  necessary,  in  order  to 
make  it  act  and  have  its  effect. 

ACU'ITAS.  Acrimony. 

Acui'tio.  (From  acuo , to  sharpen.)  The  sharpen- 
ing an  acid  medicine  by  an  addition  of  something 
more  acid ; or,  in  general,  the  increasing  the  force  of 
any  medicine,  by  an  addition  of  something  that  hath 
the  same  sort  of  operation  in  a greater  degree. 

ACULEA'TUS.  (From  aculeus,  a prickle.)  Prickly; 
covered  with  sharp-pointed  bodies : applied  to  stems 
covered  with  sharp- pointed  bodies,  the  prickles  of  which 
separate  with  the  epidermis,  a3  in  Rosa  centifolia. 

ACU'LEUS.  (From  acus,  a needle;  from  am 7,  or 
uKiy;  cusp  is,  a point.)  A prickle  or  sharp  point.  A 
species  of  armature  with  which  the  stems,  branches, 
and  other  parts  of  several  plants  are  furnished ; as  in 
the  rose,  raspberry,  gooseberry.  The  part  on  which  it 
grows  is  said  to  be  aculeated,  thus : — 

Caulis  aculeatus  ; as  in  the  Rosa  canina. 

Folia  aculeata ; as  in  Solarium  marginatum. 

Calix  aculeatus  ; as  in  Solanum  aculeatum. 

Stipula  aculeata ; as  in  Rosa  cinnamomia. 

Legumen  aculeatum  ; as  in  Scorpiurus  muricata. 

From  the  direction  it  has  : — 

Aculeus  rectus,  not  curved ; as  in  Rliamnus  sjtina 
christi,  and  Rosa  eglanteria. 

Aculeus  incurvus,  curved  inward ; as  in  Mimosa 
cineraria. 

Aculeus  recurvus,  curved  downward ; as  in  Rubus 
fruticosus,  and  Rosa  rubiginosa. 

From  the  number  in  one  place : — 

Aculeus  solitarius  ; as  in  Rosa  canina. 

Aculeus  bifidus,  or  geminatus,  in  pairs  ; there  being 
two  joined  at  the  basis ; as  in  Rliamnus  spina  christi. 

Aculeus  trifidus,  three  in  one  ; as  in  Barbaris  vul- 
garis. 

A'culon.  (From  a,  neg.  and  kvXow,  to  roll  round ;) 
so  called  because  its  fruit  is  not  involved  in  a cup,  or 
sheath,  like  others. 

Aculos.  The  fruit  or  acorn  of  the  ilex. 

A'culos.  See  Aculon. 

ACU'MEN.  1.  A point. 

2.  The  extremity  of  a bone. 

ACUMINATUS.  (From  acuo,  to  point.)  Acumi- 
nate ; or  terminated  by  a point  somewhat  elongated. 
Applied  by  botanists  to  several  parts  of  plants.  An 
acuminate  leaf  is  seen  in  the  Syringa  vulgaris.  Acu- 
minate leaf-stalk  ; as  that  of  Saxifraga  stellar  is. 

ACUPUNCTU'RA.  (From  acus,  a needle,  and 
punctura,  a prick.)  Acupuncture.  A bleeding  per- 
formed by  making  many  small  punctures. 

[The  operation  of  making  small  punctures  in  certain 
parts  of  the  body  with  a needle,  for  the  purpose  of 
relieving  diseases,  is  practised  in  Siam,  Japan,  and 
other  oriental  countries,  for  the  cure  of  headaches, 
lethargies,  convulsions,  colics,  &c.  The  practice  of 
acupuncture  is  not  followed  in  England  nor  America. 
In  a modern  French  work  it  has  been  highly  com- 
mended ; but,  the  author  sets  so  rash  an  example,  and 
is  so  wild  in  his  expectations  of  what  may  be  done 
by  the  thrust  of  a needle,  that  the  tenor  of  his  observa- 
tions will  not  meet  with  many  approvers.  For  instance, 
in  one  case,  he  ventured  to  pierce  the  epigastric  region 
so  deeply,  that  the  coats  of  the  stomach  were  supposed 
to  have  been  perforated  : this  was  done  for  the  cure 
of  an  obstinate  cough,  and  is  alleged  to  have  effected 
a cure.  But  if  this  be  not  enough  to  excite  wonder, 
I am  sure  the  author’s  suggestion  to  run  a long  needle 


into  the  right  ventricle  of  the  heart,  in  cases  of 
asphyxia,  must  create  that  sensation. — See  Cooper's 
Surg.  Diet.  A.J 

A'curon.  (From  a,  neg.  and  mipco,  to  happen.)  A 
name  of  the  Alisma,  because  it  produces  no  effect  if 
taken  internally. 

ACUSPASTO'RIS.  A name  of  the  Scandix  an- 
thriscus,  the  shepherd’s  needle,  or  Venus’s  comb. 

ACUTANGULARIS.  Acutangulatus.  Acutan- 
gular : applied  to  parts  of  plants,  as  caulis  acutan- 
gularis. 

ACUTE'.  Sharply.  Applied  in  natural  history  to 
express  form  ; as  folium  acut  dentatum;  acutd  emar- 
ginatus,  which  means  sharply  dentate,  and  with  sharp 
divisions. 

ACUTENA'CULUM.  (From  acus,  a needle,  and 
tenaculum,  a handle.)  The  handle  for  a needle,  to 
make  it  penetrate  easy  when  stitching  a wound. 
Heister  call3  the  portaiguille  by  this  name. 

ACUTUS.  Sharp.  1.  Used  by  naturalists  to  de- 
signate form ; thus  acute-leaved ; as  in  rumex  acutus, 
&c. 

2.  In  pathology,  it  is  applied  to  a sharp  pungent 
pain  ; and  to  a disease  which  is  attended  with  violent 
symptoms,  terminates  in  a few  days,  and  is  attended 
with  danger.  It  is  opposed  to  a cltronic  disease, 
which  is  slow  in  its  progress,  and  not  so  generally 
dangerous. 

ACY'ISIS.  (From  a,  neg.  and  kvco,  to  conceive.) 
A defect  of  conception,  or  barrenness  in  women. 

A'cyrus.  (From  a,  priv.  and  icvpos,  authority ; so 
named  from  its  little  note  in  medicine.)  The  German 
leopard’s-bane.  See  Arnica  montana. 

ADyEMO'NIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  Saiptav,  a ge- 
nius of  fortune.)  See  Ademonia. 

Adam's  Apple.  See  Pomum  Adami. 

Adam’s  needle.  The  roots  of  this  plant,  Yucca 
gloriosa  of  Linnaeus,  are  thick  and  tuberous,  and  ate 
used  by  the  Indians  instead  of  bread ; being  first  re- 
duced into  a coarse  meal.  This,  howeyer,  is  only  in 
times  of  scarcity. 

ADAMANTINE  SPAR.  A stone  remarkable  for 
its  extreme  hardness,  which  comes  from  the  peninsula 
of  Hither  India,  and  also  from  China. 

[Its  colour  is  dark  brown,  and  its  internal  lustre 
usually  very  strong.  It  comes  from  China,  and  almost 
always  contains  grains  of  magnetic  oxide  of  iron.  A 
specimen  was  found  by  chemists  to  contain, 

a.  ln.v.i.m  tzn 


Alumine  86.50 

Silex 5.25 

Oxide  of  iron  6.50 


98.25 

The  corundum  appears  to  belong  to  primitive. rocks, 
and  particularly  to  granite,  into  the  composition  of 
which  it  sometimes  enters  ; hence  scales  of  mica  and 
particles  of  feldspar  sometimes  adhere  to  its  surface. 

In  the  United  States,  it  is  by  some  supposed  to  exist 
in  Maryland,  near  Baltimore ; and  in  Connecticut,  at 
Haddam,  in  the  same  granite,  which  contains  chryso- 
beryl,  &c.  Tt  may  be  employed,  like  emery,  in  polish- 
ing hard  substances. — Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

A'DAMAS.  (From  a neg.  and  Sapaor,  to  conquer ; 
as  not  being  easily  broken.)  The  adamant  or  diamond, 
the  most  precious  of  all  stones,  and  which  was  for- 
merly supposed  to  possess  extraordinary  cordial  virtues. 

Adami'ta,  or  Adamitum.  A hard  stone  in  the 
bladder. 

[ADAMS,  DR.  SAMUEL,  was  the  only  son  of 
Samuel  Adams,  late  governor  of  Massachusetts.  He 
was  born  at  Boston,  in  October,  1751.  His  prepa- 
ratory education  was  at  a Latin  school  in  his  native 
town.  He  entered  Harvard  University  at  the  age  of 
fourteen  years,  and  was  graduated  in  1770.  His  pro- 
fessional education  was  acquired  under  the  direction 
of  Dr.  Joseph  Warren,  and  he  practised  in  Boston. 
When  hostilities  commenced  with  Great  Britain,  in 
1775,  Dr.  Adams,  imbued  with  the  patriotic  spirit  of 
his  father,  engaged  as  surgeon  in  the  hospital  depart- 
ment of  the  United  States’  army.  Commencing  his 
public  services  at  Cambridge,  by  attending  the  soldiers 
who  were  wounded  at  Lexington  and  Bunker’s  Hill, 
he  afterward  removed  to  Danbury,  and  successively 
to  various  stations  in  several  of  the  states,  and  conti- 
nued in  the  service  during  the  revolutionary  war ; 
after  which  he  returned  to  his  native  town  with  a 
broken  constitution,  and  unable  to  recommence  his 

25 


ADD 


ADE 


professional  pursuits : he  died  on  the  17th  of  January, 
1788.  He  possessed  a substantial  mind,  social  feelings, 
and  a generous  heart ; and  his  greatest  pleasure  was 
to  do  good  to  his  fellow-men. — Tkachev's  Med.  Bio- 
graphy. A.] 

ADANSC^NIA.  (From  Jldanson  who  first  de- 
scribed the  ^Ethiopian  sour  gourd,  a species  of  this 
genus.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Po- 
lyandria ; Order,  Monadelphia.  Monkeys’  bread. 

Adansonia  digitata.  This  is  the  only  species  of 
the  genus  yet  discovered.  It  is  called  the  .Ethiopian 
sour  gourd  and  monkeys’  bread.  Baobab.  Bahobab. 
It  grows  mostly  on  the  west  coast  of  Africa,  from  the 
Niger  to  the  kingdom  of  Benin.  The  bark  is  called 
lalo : the  negroes  dry  it  in  the  shade ; then  powder 
and  keep  it  in  little  cotton  bags ; and  put  two  or  three 
pinches  into  their  food.  It  is  mucilaginous,  and  gene- 
rally promotes  perspiration.  The  mucilage  obtained 
from  this  bark  is  a powerful  remedy  against  the  epi- 
demic fevers  of  the  country  that  produces  these  trees  ; 
so  is  a decoction  of  the  dried  leaves.  The  fresh  fruit 
is  as  useful  as  the  leaves,  for  the  same  purposes. 

Ada'rces.  (From  a,  neg.  and  depicto,  to  see.)  A 
saltish  concretion  found  about  the  reeds  and  grass  in 
marshy  grounds  in  Galatia,  and  so  called  because  it 
hides  them.  It  is  used  to  clear  the  skin  with,  in  lepro- 
sies, tetters,  &c.  Dr.  Plott  gives  an  account  of  this 
production  in  his  Natural  History  of  Oxfordshire.  It 
was  formerly  in  repute  fot>  cleansing  the  skin  from 
freckles. 

Adarticulation.  See  Arthrodia. 

ADDEPHA'GIA.  (From  adr/v,  abundantly,  and 
day  to,  to  eat.)  Insatiability.  A voracious  appetite. 
See  Bulimia. 

ADDER.  See  Coluber  berus. 

ADDITAME'NTUM.  (From  addo,  to  add.)  An 
addition  to  any  part,  which,  though  not  always,  is 
sometimes  found.  A term  formerly  employed  as 
synonymous  with  epiphysis , but  now  only  applied  to 
two  portions  of  sutures  of  the  skull.  See  Lambdoidal 
and  Squamous  Sutures. 

Additamentum  coli.  See  Appendicula  cceci  ver- 
miformis. 

ADDUCENS.  (From  ad,  and  duco,  to  draw.)  The 
name  of  some  parts  which  draw  those  together  to 
which  they  are  connected. 

Adducens  oculi.  See  Rectus  intemus  oculi. 

ADDUCTOR.  (From  ad,  and  duco , to  draw.)  A 
drawer  or  contractor.  A name  given  to  several  mus- 
cles, the  office  of  which  is  to  bring  forwards  or  draw 
together  those  parts  of  the  body  to  which  they  are 
annexed. 

Adductor  brevis  femoris.  A muscle  of  the 
thigh,  which,  with  the  adductor  longus  and  magnus 
femoris,  forms  the  triceps  adductor  femoris.  Adduc- 
tor femoris  secundus  of  Douglas ; Triceps  secundus 
of  Winslow.  It  is  situated  on  the  posterior  part  of  the 
thigh,  arising  tendinous  from  the  os  pubis,  near  its 
joining  with  the  opposite  os  pubis  below,  and  behind 
the  adductor  longus  femoris,  and  is  inserted  tendinous 
and  fleshy,  into  the  inner  and  upper  part  of  the  linea 
aspera,  from  a little  below  the  trochanter  minor,  to 
the  beginning  of  the  insertion  of  the  adductor  longus 
femoris.  See  Triceps  adductor  femoris. 

Adductor  femoris  primus.  See  Adductor  longus 
femoris. 

Adductor  femoris  secundus.  See  Adductor 
brevis  femoris. 

Adductor  femoris  tertius.  See  Adductor  mag- 
nus femoris. 

Adductor  femoris  quartus.  See  Adductor  mag- 
nus femoris. 

Adductor  indicis  pedis.  An  external  interrosse- 
ous  muscle  of  the  fore-toe,  which  arises  tendinous  and 
fleshy  by  two  origins,  from  the  root  of  the  inside  of 
the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  lore-toe,  from  the  outside 
of  the  root  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe,  and 
from  the  os  cuneiforme  internum.  It  is  inserted,  ten- 
dinous, into  the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of 
the  fore-toe.  Its  use  is  to  pull  the  fore-toe  inwards 
from  the  rest  of  the  small  toes. 

Adductor  longus  femoris.  A muscle  situated 
on  the  posterior  part  of  the  thigh,  which,  with  the 
adductor  brevis,  and  magnus  femoris,  forms  the  tri- 
ceps adductor  femoris.  Adductor  femoris  primus  of 
Douglas.  Triceps  minus  of  Winslow.  It  arises  by  a 
pretty  strong  roundish  tendon,  from  the  upper  and 


interior  part  of  the  os  pubis,  andl  ligament  of  its  syn 
chondrosis,  on  the  inner  side  of  the  pectineus,  and  is 
inserted  along  the  middle  part  of  the  linea  aspera. 
Spe  Triceps  adductor  femoris. 

Adductor  magnus  femoris.  A muscle  which, 
with  the  adductor  brevis  femoris,  and  the  adductor 
longus  femoris , forms  the  Triceps  adductor  femoris  ; 
Adductor  femoris  tertius  et  quartus  of  Douglas.  Tri- 
ceps magnus  of  Winslow.  It  arises  from  the  symphy- 
sis pubis,  and  all  along  the  flat  edge  of  the  thyroid 
foramen,  from  whence  it  goes  to  be  inserted  into  the 
linea  aspera  throughout  its  whole  length.  See  Tri- 
ceps adductor  femoris. 

Adductor  minimi  digiti  pedis.  An  internal  inter- 
rosseous  muscle  of  the  foot.  It  arises,  tendinous  and 
fleshy,  from  the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  metatarsal 
bone  of  the  little  toe.  It  is  inserted,  tendinous,  into 
the  inside  of  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  Jittle  toe. 
Its  use  is  to  pull  the  little  toe  inwards. 

Adductor  oculi.  See  Rectus  internus  oculi. 

Adductor  pollicis.  See  Adductor  pollicis  manus. 

Adductor  tollicis  manus.  A muscle  of  the 
thumb,  situated  on  the  hand.  Adductor  pollicis  ; 
Adductor  ad  minimum  digitum.  It  arises,  fleshy,  from 
almost  the  whole  length  of  the  metacarpal  bone  that 
sustains  the  middle  finger ; from  thence  its  fibres  are 
collected  together.  It  is  inserted,  tendinous,  into  the 
inner  part  of  the  root  of  the  first  bone  of  the  thumb. 
Its  use  is  to  pull  the  thumb  towards  the  fingers. 

Adductor  polliqis  pedis.  A muscle  of  the  great 
toe,  situated  on  the  foot.  Antithenar  of  Winslow.  It 
arises,  by  a long,  thin  tendon,  from  the  os  calcis,  from 
the  os  cuboides,  from  the  os  cuneiforme  externum,  and 
from  the  root  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  second  toe. 
It  is  inserted  into  the  external  os  sesamoideum,  and 
root  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe.  Its  use  is 
to  bring  this  toe  nearer  to  the  rest. 

Adductor  prostate.  A name  given  by  Sanc- 
torini  to  a muscle,  which  he  also  calls  Levator  pros- 
tates, and  which  Winslow  calls  Prostaticus  superior. 
Albinus,  from  its  office,  had  very  properly  called  it 
Compressor  prostates. 

Adductor  tertii  digiti  pedis.  An  external 
interosseous  muscle  of  the  foot,  that  arises,  tendinous 
and  fleshy,  from  the  roots  of  the  metatarsal  bones  of 
the  third  and  little  toe.  It  is  inserted,  tendinous,  into 
the  outside  of  the  root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  third  toe 
Its  use  is  to  pull  the  third  toe  outward. 

ADE'LPHIA.  ('A-deXtpia,  a relation.)  Hippocrates 
calls  diseases  by  this  name  that  resemble  each  other. 

ADEMO  NIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  Saipuv,  a genius, 
or  divinity,  or  fortune.)  Adcemonia.  Hippocrates 
uses  this  word  for  uneasiness,  restlessness,  or  anxiety 
felt  in  acute  diseases,  and  some  hysteric  fits. 

A'DEN.  (Aden,  enis,  m. ; adrjv,  a gland.) 

1.  A gland.  See  Gland. 

2.  A bubo.  See  Bubo. 

Adende'ntes.  An  epithet  applied  to  ulcers  which 
eat  and  destroy  the  glands. 

ADE  NIFORMIS.  (From  aden , a gland,  and  forma, 
resemblance.)  Adeniform.  1.  Glandiform,  or  resem- 
bling a gland. 

2.  A term  sometimes  applied  to  the  prostate  glapfi. 

ADENO  GRAP1IY.  (Adenographia ; from  adr/v,  a 
gland,  and  ypa<Pu> , to  write.)  A treatise  on  the 
glands. 

ADENOI'DES.  (From  at lyv,  a gland,  and  eidos, 
resemblance.)  Glandiform  : resembling  a gland.  An 
epithet  applied  also  to  the  prostate  gland. 

ADENO'LOGY.  (Adenologia ; from  aSyv,  a gland, 
and  Xoyog,  a treatise.)  The  doctrine  of  the  glands. 

ADENOUS.  ( Adenosus , from  airjv,  a gland.) 
Gland-like. 

ADEPHA'GLA.  (From  aSyv,  abundantly,  and 
(payto,  to  eat.)  Insatiable  appetite.  See  Bulimia. 

ADEPS.  ( Adeps , ip  is,  m.  aud  f.)  Fat.  An  oily 
secretion  from  the  blood  into  the  cells  of  the  cellular 
membrane.  See  Fat. 

Adeps  anserinus.  Goose-grease. 

Adeps  pr teparata.  Prepared  lard.  Cut  the  lard 
into  small  pieces,  melt  it  over  a slow  fire,  and  press  it 
through  a linen  cloth. 

Adeps  suilla.  Hog’s  lard.  This  forms  the  basis 
of  many  ointments,  aud  is  used  extensively  for  culi- 
nary purposes. 

ADEPT.  (From  Adipiscor,  to  obtain.)  1.  A skilful 
alchymist.  Such  are  called  so  as  pretend  to  some 


ADI 


ADI 


extraordinary  skill  in  chemistry ; but  these  have  too 
often  proved'eitner  enthusiasts  or  impostors. 

2.  The  professors  of  the  Adepta  Philosophia,  that 
philosophy  the  end  of  which  is  the  transmutation 
of  metals,  and  a universal  remedy,  were  also  called 
Adepts. 

3.  So  Paracelsus  calls  that  which  treats  of  the  dis- 
eases that  are  contracted  by  celestial  operations,  or 
communicated  from  heaven. 

ADFLA'TUS.  A blast ; a kind  of  erysipelas,  or 
St.  Anthony’s  fire. 

ADHvESION.  ( Adliesio ; from  adhcero,  to  stick 
to.)  The  growing  together  of  parts- 

ADHvESIVE.  ( Adhcesivus ; from  adhccro , to  stick 
to.)  Having  the  property  of  sticking. 

Adhesive  inflammation.  That  species  of  inflam 
mation  which  terminates  by  an  adhesion  of  the 
inflamed  surfaces. 

Adhesive  plaster.  A plaster  made  of  common 
litharge  plaster  and  resin,  is  so  called  because  it  is  used 
for  its  adhesive  properties.  See  Emplastrum  resince. 

Adhato'da.  (A  Zeylanic  term,  signifying  expel- 
ling a dead  foetus.)  See  Justicia  adhatoda. 

Adiachy'tos.  (From  a,  neg.  and  <5ta%i>u),  to  diffuse, 
scatter,  or  be  profuse.)  Decent  in  point  of  dress.  Hip- 
pocrates thinks  the  dress  of  a fop  derogatory  from  the 
physician,  though  thereby  he  hide  his  ignorance,  and 
obtain  the  good  opinion  of  his  patients. 

ADIA'NTHUM.  ( Adiantum , i.  n.  aStav'Jov  ; from 
a,  neg.  and  titaivco,  to  grow  wet : so  called,  because  its 
leaves  are  not  easily  made  wet.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system  Class,  Cryptoga- 
mia;  Order,  Filices.  Maiden-hair. 

Adianthum  aureum  The  golden  maiden-hair. 
See  Polytrichum.  r 

Adianthum  capillus  veneris.  Maiden-hair. 
The  leaves  of  this  plant  are  somewhat  sweet  and  aus- 
tere to  the  palate,  and  possess  mucilaginous  qualities. 
A syrup,  the  syrop  de  capillaire  is  prepared  from  them, 
which  is  much  esteemed  in  France  against  catarrhs. 
Orange-flower  water,  and  a proportion  of  honey,  it  is 
said,  are  usually  added.  It  acts  chiefly  as  a demulcent, 
sheathing  the  inflamed  sides  of  the  glottis. 

Adianthum  pedatum.  Adianthum  canadense.  This 
plant  is  in  common  use  in  France  for  the  same  pur- 
poses as  the  common  adianthum  capillus  veneris  in 
this  country,  and  appears  to  be  far  superior  to  it. 

ADIAPHOROUS.  Adiaphorusl  A term  which 
implies  the  same  with  neutral ; and  is  particularly 
used  of  some  spirits  and  salts,  which  are  neither  of  an 
acid  nor  alcaline  nature. 

ADIAPNEU'STIA.  (From  the  privative  particle 
a,  and  Sicmvtai,  perspiro.)  A diminution  or  obstruc- 
tion of  natural  perspiration,  and  that  in  which  the 
ancients  chiefly  placed  the  cause  of  fevers. 

ADIARRHCE'A.  (From  a,  priv.  and  Siappem,  to 
flow  out  or  through.)  A suppression  of  the  necessary 
evacuations  from  the  bowels. 

ADIPOCI'RE.  ( Adipocera , ®.  f.  ; from  adeps , fat, 
and  cera , wax.)  A particular  spermaceti  or  fat-like 
substance  formed  by  the  spontaneous  conversion  of 
animal  matter,  under  certain  conditions.  This  con- 
version has  long  been  well  known,  and  is  said  to  have 
been  mentioned  in  the  works  of  Lord  Bacon.  “ On 
the  occasion  of  the  removal  of  a very  great  number  of 
human  bodies  from  the  ancient  burying-place  des 
Innocens  at  Paris,  facts  of  this  nature  were  observed  in 
the  most  striking  manner.  Fourcroy  may  be  called 
the  scientific  discoverer  of  this  peculiar  matter,  as  well 
as  the  saponaceous  ainmoniacal  substance  contained  in 
bodies  abandoned  to  spontaneous  destruction  in  large 
masses.  This  chemist  read  a memoir  on  the  subject 
in  the  year  1789  to  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences, 
from  which  the  general  contents  are  here  abstracted. 

“At  the  time  of  clearing  the  before-mentioned 
burying-place,  certain  philosophers  were  specially 
charged  to  direct  the  precautions  requisite  for  securing 
the  health  of  the  workmen.  A new  and  singular  ob- 
ject of  research  presented  itself,  which  had  been  neces- 
sarily unknown  to  preceding  chemists.  It  was  impos- 
sible to  foretell  what  might  be  the  contents  of  a soil 
overloaded  for  successive  ages  with  bodies  resigned  to 
the  putrefactive  process.  This  spot  di ffered  from  com- 
mon burying-grounds,  where  each  individual  object  is 
surrounded  by  a portion  of  the  soil.  It  was  the  bury- 
ing-ground  of  a large  district,  wherein  successive  gene- 
rations of  the  inhabitants  had  been  deposited  for  up- 


wards of  three  centuries.  It  could  not  be  foreseen 
that  the  entire  decomposition  might  be  retarded  for 
more  than  forty  years  ; neither  was  there  any  reason 
to  suspect  that  any  remarkable  difference  would  arise 
from  the  singularity  of  situation. 

“ The  remains  of  the  human  bodies  immersed  in  this 
mass  of  putrescence,  were  found  in  three  different 
states,  according  to  the  time  they  had  been  buried,  the 
place  they  occupied,  and  their  relative  situations  with 
regard  to  each  other.  The  most  ancient  were  simply 
portions  of  bones,  irregularly  dispersed  in  the  soil, 
which  had  been  frequently  disturbed.  A second  state, 
in  certain  bodies  which  had  always  been  insulated, 
exhibited  the  skin,  the  muscles,  the  tendons,  and  apo- 
neurosis, dry,  brittle,  hard,  more  or  less  gray,  and 
similar  to  what  are  called  mummies  in  certain  caverns 
where  this  change  has  been  observed,  as  in  the  cata- 
combs at  Rome,  and  the  vault  of  the  Cordeliers  at 
Toulouse. 

“The  third  and  most  singular  state  of  these  soft 
parts  was  observed  in  the  bodies  which  filled  the  com- 
mon graves  or  repositories.  By  this  appellation  are 
understood  cavities  of  thirty  feet  in  depth,  and  twenty 
on  each  side,  which  were  dug  in  the  burying-ground  of 
the  Innocents,  and  were  appropriated  to  contain  the 
bodies  of  the  poor ; which  were  placed  in  very  close 
rows,  each  in  its  proper  wooden  bier.  The  necessity 
for  disposing  a great  number,  obliged  the  men  charged 
with  this  employment  to  arrange  them  so  near  each 
other  that  these  cavities  might  be  considered  when 
filled,  as  an  entire  mass  of  human  bodies  separated 
only  by  two  planks  of  about  half  an  inch  thick.  Each 
cavity  contained  between  one  thousand  and  fifteen 
hundred.  When  one  common  grave  of  this  magnitude 
was  filled  a covering  of  about  one  foot  deep  of  earth 
was  laid  upon  it,  and  another  excavation  of  the  same 
sort  was  made  at  some  distance.  Each  grave  remained 
open  about  three  years,  which  was  the  time  required 
to  fill  it.  According  to  the  urgency  of  circumstances, 
the  graves  were  again  made  on  the  same  spot  after  an 
interval  of  time,  not  less  than  fifteen  years,  nor  more 
than  thirty.  Experience  had  taught  the  workmen, 
that  this  time  was  not  sufficient  for  the  entire  destruc- 
tion of  the  bodies,  and  had  shown  them  the  progress- 
ive changes  wlfich  form  the  object  of  Fourcroy’s  me- 
moir. 

“ The  first  of  these  large  graves,  opened  in  the  pre- 
sence of  this  chemist,  had  been  closed  for  fifteen  years. 
The  coffins  were  in  good  preservation,  but  a little  set- 
tled, and  the  wood  had  a yellow  tinge.  When  the 
covers  of  several  were  taken  off,  the  bodies  were  ob  • 
served  at  the  bottom,  leaving  a considerable  distance 
between  their  surface  and  the  cover,  and  flattened  as 
if  they  had  suffered  a strong  compression.  The  linen 
which  had  covered  them  was  slightly  adherent  to  the 
bodies  ; and  with  the  form  of  the  different  regions  ex- 
hibited on  removing  the  linen,  nothing  but  irregular 
masses  of  a soft  ductile  matter  of  a gray-white  colour. 
These  masses  environed  the  bones  on  all  sides,  which 
had  no  solidity,  but  broke  by  any  sudden  pressure. 
The  appearance  of  this  matter,  its  obvious  composition, 
and  its  softness,  resembled  common  white  cheese ; and 
the  resemblance  was  more  striking  from  the  print 
which  the  threads  of  the  linen  had  made  upon  its  sur- 
face. This  white  substance  yielded  to  the  touch,  and 
became  soft  when  rubbed  for  a time  between  the 
fingers. 

“ No  very  offensive  smell  was  emitted  from  these 
bodies.  The  novelty  and  singularity  of  the  spectacle, 
and  the  example  of  the  grave-diggers,  dispelled  every 
idea  either  of  disgust  or  apprehension.  These  men 
asserted  that  they  never  found  this  matter,  by  them 
called ~gras  (fat,)  in  bodies  interred  alone;  but  that 
the  accumulated  bodies  of  the  common  graves  only 
were  subject  to  this  change.  On  a very  attentive  ex- 
amination of  a number  of  bodies  passed  to  this  state, 
Fourcroy  remarked,  that  the  conversion  appeared  in 
different  stages  of  advancement,  so  that,  in  various 
bodies,  the  fibrous  texture  and  colour,  more  or  less 
red,  were  discernible  within  the  fatty  matter;  that  the 
masses  covering  the  bones  were  entirely  of  the  same 
nature,  offering  indistinctly  in  all  the  regions  a gray 
substance,  for  the  most  part  soft  and  ductile,  some- 
times dry,  always  easy  to  be  separated  in  porous  frag- 
ments, penetrated  with  cavities,  and  no  longer  exhi 
biting  any  traces  of  membranes,  muscles,  tendons, 
vessels,  or  nerves.  On  the  first  inspection  of  these 

07 


ADI 


ADI 


white  masses,  it  might  have  been  concluded  that  they 
were  simply  the  cellular  tissue,  the  compartments  and 
vesicles  of  which  they  very  well  represented. 

“ By  examining  this  substance  in  the  different  re- 
gions of  the  body,  it  was  found  that  the  skin  is  particu- 
larly disposed  to  this  remarkable  alteration.  It  was 
afterward  perceived  that  the  ligaments  and  tendons 
no  longer  existed,  or  at  least  had  lost  their  tenacity ; 
so  that  the  bones  were  entirely  unsupported,  and  left 
to  the  action  of  their  own  weight.  Whence  their  rela- 
tive places  were  preserved  in  a certain  degree  by  mere 
juxtaposition  ; the  least  effort  being  sufficient  to  sepa- 
rate them.  The  grave-diggers  availed  themselves  of 
this  circumstance  in  the  removal  of  the  bodies.  For 
they  rolled  them  up  from  head  to  feet,  and  by  that 
means  separated  from  each  other  the  extremities  of 
the  bones,  which  had  formerly  been  articulated.  In 
all  those  bodies  which  were  changed  into  the  fatty 
matter,  the  abdominal  cavity  had  disappeared.  The 
teguments  and  muscles  of  this  region  being  converted 
into  the  white  matter,  like  the  other  soft  parts,  had 
subsided  upon  the  vertebral  column,  and  were  so  flat- 
tened as  to  leave  no  place  for  the  viscera ; and  ac- 
cordingly there  was  scarcely  ever  any  trace  observed 
in  the  almost  obliterated  cavity.  This  observation 
was  for  a long  time  matter  of  astonishment  to  the  in- 
vestigators. In  vain  did  they  seek  in  the  greater  num- 
ber of  bodies,  the  place  and  substance  of  the  stomach, 
the  intestines,  the  bladder,  and  even  the  liver,  the 
spleen,  the  kidneys,  and  the  matrix  in  females.  All 
these  viscera  were  confounded  together,  and  for  the 
most  part  no  traces  of  them  were  left.  Sometimes 
only  certain  irregular  masses  were  found,  of  the  same 
nature  as  the  white  matter,  of  different  bulks,  from 
that  of  a nut  to  two  or  three  inches  in  diameter,  in  the 
regions  of  the  liver  or  of  the  spleen. 

“ The  thorax  likewise  offered  an  assemblage  of  facts 
no  less  singular  and  interesting.  The  external  part  of 
this  cavity  was  flattened  and  compressed  like  the  rest 
of  the  organs ; the  ribs,  spontaneously  luxated  in 
their  articulations  with  the  vertebra,  were  settled 
upon  the  dorsal  column ; their  arched  part  left  only  a 
small  space  on  each  side  between  them  and  the  ver- 
tebra. The  pleura,  the  mediastinum,  the  large  vessels, 
the  aspera  arteria,  and  even  the  lungs  and  the  heart, 
were  no  longer  distinguishable ; but  for  the  most  part 
had  entirely  disappeared,  and  in  their  place  nothing 
was  seen  but  some  parcels  of  the  fatty  substance.  In 
this  case,  the  matter  which  was  the  product  of  decom- 
position of  the  viscera  charged  with  blood  and  various 
humours,  differs  from  that  of  the  surface  of  the  body, 
and  the  long  bones,  in  the  red  or  brown  colour  pos- 
sessed by  the  former.  Sometimes  the  observers  found 
in  the  thorax  a mass  irregularly  rounded,  of  the  same 
nature  as  the  latter,  which  appeared  to  them  to  have 
arisen  from  the  fat  and  fibrous  substance  of  the  heart. 
They  supposed  that  this  mass,  not  constantly  found  in 
all  the  subjects,  owed  its  existence  to  a superabun- 
dance of  fat  in  this  viscus,  where  it  was  found.  For 
the  general  observation  presented  itself,  that,  in  similar 
circumstances,  the  fat  parts  undergo  this  conversion 
more  evidently  than  the  others,  and  afford  a larger 
•quantity  of  the  white  matter. 

“ The  external  region  in  females  exhibited  the  glan- 
dular and  adipose  mass  of  the  breast  converted  into  the 
fatty  matter,  very  white  and  very  homogeneous. 

“ The  head  was,  as  has  already  been  remarked,  en- 
vironed with  the  fatty  matter  ; the  face  was  no  longer 
distinguishable  in  the  greatest  number  of  subjects  ; the 
mouth,  disorganized,  exhibited  neither  tongue  nor  pa- 
late ; and  the  jaws,  luxated  and  more  or  less  displaced, 
were  environed  with  irregular  layers  of  the  white 
matter.  Some  pieces  of  the  same  matter  usually  oc- 
cupied the  place  of  the  parts  situated  in  the  mouth  ; 
the  cartilages  of  the  nose  participated  in  the  general 
alteration  of  the  skin ; the  orbits,  instead  of  eyes,  con- 
tained white  masses  ; the  ears  were  equally  disorgan- 
ized ; and  the  hairy  scalp,  having  undergone  a similar 
alteration  to  that  of  the  other  organs,  still  retained  the 
hair.  Fourcroy  remarks  incidentally,  that  the  hair 
appears  to  resist  every  alteration  much  longer  than 
any  other  part  of  the  body.  The  cranium  constantly 
contained  the  brain  contracted  in  bulk ; blackish  at  the 
surface,  and  absolutely  changed  like  the  other  organs. 
In  a great  number  of  subjects  which  were  examined, 
this  viscus  was  never  found  wanting,  and  it  was  al- 
ways iu  the  above-mentioned  state;  which  proves 
28 


that  the  substance  of  the  brain  is  greatly  disposed  to 
be  converted  into  the  fat  matter. 

“ Such  was  the  state  of  the  bodies  found  in  the  bu- 
rial-ground des  Innocens.  Its  modifications  were  also 
various.  Its  consistence  in  bodies  lately  changed,  that 
is  to  say,  from  three  to  five  years,  was  soft  and  very 
ductile,  containing  a great  quantity  of  water.  In  other 
subjects  converted  into  this  matter  for  a long  time,  such 
as  those  which  occupied  the  cavities  which  had  been 
closed  thirty  or  forty  years,  this  matter  is  drier,  more 
brittle,  and  in  denser  flakes.  In  several,  which  were 
deposited  in  dry  earth,  various  portions  of  the  fatty 
matter  had  become  semitransparent.  The  aspect,  the 
granulated  texture,  and  brittleness  of  this  dried  matter, 
bore  a considerable  resemblance  to  wax. 

“ The  period  of  the  formation  of  this  substance  had 
likewise  an  influence  on  its  properties.  In  general,  all 
that  which  had  been  formed  for  a long  time  was  white, 
uniform,  and  contained  no  foreign  substance,  or  fibrous 
remains  ; such,  in  particular,  was  that  afforded  by  the 
skin  of  the  extremities.  On  the  contrary,  in  bodies 
recently  changed,  the  fatty  matter  was  neither  so  uni- 
form nor  so  pure  as  in  the  former ; but  it  was  still 
found  to  .contain  portions  of  muscles,  tendons,  and 
ligaments,  the  texture  of  which,  though  already  altered 
and  changed  in  its  colour,  was  still  distinguishable. 
Accordingly,  as  the  conversion  was  more  or  less  ad- 
vanced, these  fibrous  remains  were  more  or  less  pene- 
trated with  the  fatty  matter,  interposed  as  it  were 
between  the  interstices  of  the  fibres.  This  observation 
shows,  that  it  is  not  merely  the  fat  which  is  thus 
changed,  as  was  natural  enough  to  think  at  first  sight. 
Other  facts  confirm  this  assertion.  The  skin,  as  has 
been  remarked,  becomes  easily  converted  into  very  pure 
white  matter,  as  does  likewise  the  brain,  neither  of 
which  has  been  considered  by  anatomists  to  be  fat.  It 
is  true,  nevertheless,  that  the  unctuous  .parts,  and 
bodies  charged  with  fat,  appear  more  easily  and  speed- 
ily to  pass  to  the  state  under  consideration.  This  was 
seen  in  the  marrow,  which  occupied  the  cavities  of  the 
longer  bones.  And  again,  it  is  not  to  be  supposed  but 
that  the  greater  part  of  these  bodies  had  been  ema- 
ciated by  the  illness  which  terminated  their  lives ; not- 
withstanding which,  they  were  all  absolutely  turned 
into  this  fatty  substance. 

“ An  experiment  made  by  Poulletier  de  la  Salle,  and 
Fourcroy  likewi  e,  evinced  that  a conversion  does  not 
take  place  in  the  fat  alone.  Poulletier  had  suspended 
in  his  laboratory  a small  piece  of  the  human  liver,  to 
observe  what  would  arise  to  it  by  the  contact  of  the 
air.  It  partly  putrefied,  without,  however,  emitting 
any  very  noisome  smell.  Larvae  of  the  dermestes  and 
bruchus  attacked  and  penetrated  it  in  various  direc- 
tions ; at  last  it  became  dry,  and  after  more  than  ten 
years’  suspension,  it  was  converted  into  a white  friable 
substance  resembling  dried  agaric,  which  might  have 
been  taken  for  an  earthy  substance.  In  this  state  it 
had  no  perceptible  smell.  Poulletier  was  desirous  of 
knowing  the  state  of  this  animal  matter,  and  experi- 
ment soon  convinced  him  and  Fourcroy  that  it  was  far 
from  being  in  the  state  of  an  earth.  It  melted  by  heat, 
and  exhaled  in  the  form  of  vapour,  which  had  the 
smell  of  a very  fetid  fat;  spirit  of  wine  separated  a 
concrescible  oil,  which  appeared  to  possess  all  the  pro- 
perties of  spermaceti.  Each  of  the  three  alcalies  con- 
verted it  into  soap ; and,  in  a word,  it  exhibited  all  the 
properties  of  the  fatty  matter  of  the  burial-ground  of 
the  Innocents  exposed  for  several  months  to  the  air. 
Here  then  was  a glandular  organ,  which  in  the  midst 
of  the  atmosphere  had  undergone  a change  similar  to 
that  of  the  bodies  in  the  burying-place ; and  this  fact 
sufficiently  shows,  that  an  animal  substance  which  is 
very  far  from  being  of  the  nature  of  grease,  may  be 
totally  converted  into  this  fatty  substance. 

“ Among  the  modifications  of  this  remarkable  sub- 
stance in  the  burying-ground  before-mentioned,  it  was 
observed  that  the  dry,  friable,  and  brittle  matter,  was 
most  commonly  found  near  the  surface  of  the  earth, 
and  the  soft,  ductile  matter  at  a greater  depth.  Four- 
croy remarks,  that  this  dry  matter  did  not  differ  from 
the  other  merely  in  containing  less  water,  but  likewise 
by  the  volatilization  of  one  of  its  principles.” 

The  grave-diggers  assert,  that  near  three  years  are 
required  to  convert  a body  into  this  fatty  substance. 
But  Dr.  Gibbes  of  Oxford  found,  that  lean  beef  secured 
in  a running  stream,  was  converted  into  this  fatty  matter 
at  the  end  of  a month.  He  judges  from  facts,  that  run- 


ADI 


ADI 


ning  water  is  most  favourable  to  this  process.  He  took  i 
three  lean  pieces  of  mutton,  and  poured  on  each  a quan- 
tity of  the  three  common  mineral  acids.  At  the  end  of 
three  days,  each  was  much  changed : that  in  the  nitric 
acid  was  very  soft,  and  converted  into  the  fatty  mat- 
ter ; that  in  the  muriatic  acid  was  not  in  that  time  so 
much  altered ; the  sulphuric  acid  had  turned  the  other 
black.  Lavoisier  thinks  that  this  process  may  hereafter 
prove  of  great  use  in  society.  It  is  not  easy  to  point 
out  what  animal  substance,  or  what  situation,  might 
be  the  best  adapted  for  an  undertaking  of  this  kind. 

The  result  of  Fourcroy’s  inquiries  into  the  ordinary 
changes  of  bodies  recently  deposited  in  the  earth,  was 
not  very  extensive.  The  grave-diggers  informed  him, 
that  those  bodies  interred  do  not  perceptibly  change  co- 
lour for  the  first  seven  or  eight  days ; that  the  putrid  pro- 
cess disengages  elastic  ft  uid,  which  inflates  the  abdomen, 
and  at  length  bursts  it ; that  this  event  instantly  causes 
vertigo,  faintness,  and  nausea  in  such  persons  as  un- 
fortunately are  within  a certain  distance  of  the  scene 
where  it  takes  place ; but  that  when  the  object  of  its 
action  is  nearer,  a sudden  privation  of  sense,  and  fre- 
quently death,  is  the  consequence.  These  men  are 
taught  by  experience,  that  no  immediate  danger  is  to 
be  feared  from  the  disgusting  business  they  are  engaged 
in,  excepting  at  this  period,  which  they  regard  with  the 
utmost  terror.  They  resisted  every  inducement  and 
persuasion  which  these  philosophers  made  use  of,  to 
prevail  on  them  to  assist  their  researches  into  the 
nature  of  this  active  and  pernicious  vapour.  Fourcroy 
takes  occasion  from  these  facts,  as  well  as  from  the 
pallid  and  unwholesome  appearance  of  the  grave- 
diggers, to  reprobate  burials  in  great  towns  or  their 
vicinity. 

Such  bodies  as  are  interred  alone,  in  the  midst  of  a 
great  quantity  of  humid  earth,  are  totally  destroyed 
by  passing  through  the  successive  degrees  of  the  ordi- 
nary putrefaction ; and  this  destruction  is  more  speedy, 
the  warmer  the  temperature.  But  if  these  insulated 
bodies  be  dry  and  emaciated ; if  the  place  of  deposition 
be  likewise  dry,  and  the  locality  and  other  circum- 
stances such,  that  the  earth,  so  far  from  receiving 
moisture  from  the  atmosphere,  becomes  still  more  ef- 
fectually parched  by  the  solar  rays ; — the  animal  juices 
are  volatilized  and  absorbed,  the  solids  contract  and 
harden,  and  a peculiar  species  of  mummy  is  produced. 
But  every  circumstance  is  very  different  in  the  com- 
mon burying-grounds.  Heaped  together  almost  in  con- 
tact, the  influence  of  external  bodies  affects  them 
scarcely  at  all,  and  they  become  abandoned  to  a pe- 
culiar disorganization,  which  destroys  their  texture, 
and  produces  the  new  and  most  permanent  state  of 
combination  here  described.  From  various  observa- 
tions, it  was  found,  that  this  fatty  matter  was  capable 
of  enduring  in  these  burying-places  for  thirty  or  forty 
years,  and  is  at  length  corroded  and  carried  off  by  the 
aqueous  putrid  humidity  which  there  abounds. 

Among  other  interesting  facts  afforded  by  the  chemi- 
cal examination  of  this  substance  are  the  following 
from  experiments  by  Fourcroy. 

1.  This  substance  is  fused  at  a less  degree  of  heat  than 
that  of  boiling  water,  and  may  be  purified  by  pressure 
through  a cloth,  which  disengages  a portion  of  fibrous 
and  bony  matter.  2.  The  process  of  destructive  dis- 
tillation by  a very  graduated  heat  was  begun,  but  not 
completed,  on  account  of  its  tediousness,  and  the  little 
promise  of  advantage  it  afforded.  The  products  which 
came  over  were  water  charged  with  volatile  alcali,  a 
fat  oil,  concrete  volatile  alcali,  and  no  elastic  fluid 
during  the  time  the  operation  was  continued.  3. 
Fragments  of  the  fatty  matter  exposed  to  the  air  during 
the  hot  and  dry  summer  of  1786  became  dry,  brittle, 
and  almost  pulverulent  at  the  surface.  On  a careful 
examination,  certain  portions  were  observed  to  be 
semitransparent,  and  more  brittle  than  the  rest.  These 
possessed  all  the  apparent  properties  of  wax,  and  did 
not  afford  volatile  alcali  by  distillation.  4.  With 
water  this  fatty  matter  exhibited  all  the  appearances 
of  soap,  and  afforded  a strong  lather.  The  dried  sub- 
stance did  not  form  the  saponaceous  combination  with 
the  same  facility  or  perfection  as  that  which  was  re- 
cent. About  two-thirds  of  this  dried  matter  separated 
from  the  water  by  cooling,  and  proved  to  be  the  semi- 
transparent substance  resembling  wax.  This  was 
taken  from  the  surface  of  the  soapy  liquor,  which 
being  then  passed  through  the  filter,  left  a white  soft 
shining  matter,  which  was  fusible  and  combustible. 


5.  Attempts  were  made  to  ascertain  the  quantity  of 
volatile  alcali  in  this  substance,  by  the  application  of 
lime,  and  of  the  fixed  alcalies,  but  without  success : for 
it  was  difficult  to  collect  and  appreciate  the  first  por- 
tions which  escaped,  and  likewise  to  disengage  the 
last  portions.  The  caustic  volatile  alcali,  with  the 
assistance  of  a gentle  heat,  dissolved  the  fatty  matter, 
and  the  solution  became  perfectly  clear  and  transpa- 
rent at  the  boiling  temperature  of  the  mixture,  which 
was  at  185°  F.  6.  Sulphuric  acid,  of  the  specific 
gravity  of  2.  0,  was  poured  upon  six  times  its  weight 
of  the  fatty  matter,  and  mixed  by  agitation.  Heat  was 
produced,  and  a gas  or  effluvium  of  the  most  insup- 
portable putrescence  was  emitted,  which  infected  the 
air  of  an  extensive  laboratory  for  several  days.  Four- 
croy says,  that  the  smell  cannot  be  described,  but  that 
it  is  one  of  the  most  horrid  and  repulsive  that  can  be 
imagined.  It  did  not,  however,  produce  any  indispo 
sition  either  in  himself  or  his  assistants.  By  dilution 
with  water,  and  the  ordinary  processes  of  evaporation 
and  cooling,  properly  repeated,  the  -sulphates  of  am- 
monia and  of  lime  were  obtained.  A substance  was 
separated  from  the  liquor,  which  appeared  to  be  the 
waxy  matter,  somewhat  altered  by  the  action  of  the 
acid.  7.  The  nitrous  and  muriatic  acids  were  also 
applied,  and  afforded  phenomena  worthy  of  remark, 
but  which  for  the  sake  of  conciseness  are  here  omit- 
ted. 8.  Alcohol  does  not  act  on  this  matter  at  the 
ordinary  temperature  of  the  air.  But  by  boiling  it 
dissolves  one-third  of  its  own  weight,  which  is  almost 
totally  separable  by  cooling  as  low  as  55°.  The  alco- 
hol, after  this  process,  affords  by  evaporation  a portion 
of  that  waxy  matter  which  is  separable  by  acids,  and 
is  therefore  the  only  portion  soluble  in  cold  alcohol. 
The  quantity  of  fatty  matter  operated  on  was  4 ounces, 
or  2304  grains,  of  which  the  boiling  spirit  took  up  the 
whole  except  26  grains,  which  proved  to  be  a mixture 
of  20  grains  of  ammoniacal  soap,  and  6 or  8 grains  of 
the  phosphates  of  soda  and  of  lime.  From  this  expe- 
riment, which  was  three  times  repeated  with  similar 
results,  it  appears  that  alcohol  is  well  suited  to  afford 
an  analysis  of  the  fatty  matter.  It  does  not  dissolve 
the  neutral  salts ; when  cold,  it  dissolves  that  portion 
of  concrete  animal  oil  from  which  the  volatile  alcali 
had  flown  off;  and  when  heated,  it  dissolves  the 
whole  of  the  truly  saponaceous  matter,  which  is  after- 
ward completely  separated  by  cooling.  And  accord- 
ingly it  was  found,  that  a thin  plate  of  the  fatty  mat- 
ter, which  had  lost  nearly  the  whole  of  its  volatile 
alcali,  by  exposure  to  the  air  for  three  years,  was 
almost  dissolved  by  the  cold  alcohol. 

The  concrete  oily  or  waxy  substance  obtained  in 
these  experiments  constitutes  the  leading  object  of 
research,  as  being  the  peculiar  substance  with  which 
the  other  well-known  matters  are  combined.  It  sepa- 
rates spontaneously  by  the  action  of  the  air,  as  well  as 
by  that  of  acids.  These  last  separate  it  in  a state  of 
greater  purity,  the  less  disposed  the  acid  may  be  to  ope- 
rate in  the  way  of  combustion.  It  is  requisite,  there- 
fore, for  this  purpose,  that  the  fatty  matter  should 
be  previously  diffused  in  12  times  its  weight  of  hot 
water ; and  the  muriatic  or  acetous  acid  is  preferable 
to  the  sulphuric  or  the  nitrous.  The  colour  of  the 
waxy  matter  is  grayish  ; and  though  exposure  to  the 
air,  and  also  the  action  of  the  oxygenated  muriatic  acid 
did  produce  an  apparent  whiteness,  it  nevertheless  dis- 
appeared by  subsequent  fusion.  No  method  was  dis- 
covered by  which  it  could  be  permanently  bleached. 

The  nature  of  this  wax  or  fat  is  different  from  that 
of  any  other  known  substance  of  the  like  kind.  When 
slowly  cooled  after  fusion,  its  texture  appears  crystal- 
line or  shivery,  like  spermaceti ; but  a speedy  cooling 
gives  it  a semitransparency  resembling  wax.  Upon 
the  whole,  nevertheless,  it  seems  to  approach  more 
nearly  to  the  former  than  to  the  latter  of  these  bodies. 
It  has  less  smell  than  spermaceti,  and  melts  at  127°  F.; 
Dr.  Bostock  says  92°.  Spermaceti  requires  6°  more  of 
heat  to  fuse  it,  (according  to  Dr.  Bostock  20°. ) The 
spermaceti  did  not  so  speedily  become  brittle  by  cooling 
as  the  adipocire.  One  ounce  of  alcohol  of  the  strength 
between  39  and  40  degrees  of  Baume’s  aerometer,  dis- 
solved when  boiling  hot  12  gros  of  this  substance,  but 
the  same  quantity  in  like  circumstances  dissolved  only 
30  or  36  grains  of  spermaceti.  The  separation  of  these 
matters  was  also  remarkably  different,  the  spermaceti 
being  more  speedily  deposited,  and  in  a much  more 
regular  and  crystalline  form.  Ammonia  dissolves 


ADI 


ADN 


with  singular  facility,  and  even  in  the  cold,  this  con- 
crete oil  separated  from  the  fatty  matter  ; and  by  heat 
it  forms  a transparent  solution,  which  is  a true  soap. 
But  no  excess  of  ammonia  can  produce  such  an  effect 
with  spermaceti. 

Fourcroy  concludes  his  memoir  with  some  specu- 
lations on  the  change  to  which  animal  substances  in 
peculiar  circumstances  are  subject.  In  the  modern 
chemistry,  soft  animal  matters  are  considered  as  a com- 
position of  the  oxydes  of  hydrogen  and  carbonated 
azote,  more  complicated  than  those  of  vegetable  mat- 
ters, and  therefore  more  incessantly  tending  to  altera- 
tion. If  then  the  carbon  be  conceived  to  unite  with 
the  oxygen,  either  of  the  water  which  is  present,  or  of 
the  other  animal  matters,  and  thus  escape  in  large  quan- 
tities in  the  form  of  carbonic  acid  gas,  we  shall  perceive 
tlie  reason  why  this  conversion  is  attended  with  so 
great  a loss  of  weight,  namely,  about  nine-tenths  of  the 
whole.  The  azote,  a principle  so  abundant  in  animal 
matters,  will  form  ammonia  by  combining  with  the 
hydrogen ; part  of  this  will  escape  in  tire  vaporous 
form,  and  the  rest  will  remain  fixed  in  the  fatty  mat- 
ter. The  residue  of  the  animal  matters  deprived  of  a 
great  part  of  their  carbon,  of  their  oxygen,  and  the 
whole  of  their  azote,  will  consist  of  a much  greater 
proportion  of  hydrogen,  together  with  carbon  and  a 
minute  quantity  of  oxygen.  This,  according  to  the 
theory  of  Fourcroy,  constitutes  the  waxy  matter,  or 
adipocire,  which,  in  combination  with  ammonia,  forms 
the  animal  soap,  into  which  the  dead  bodies  are  thus 
converted. 

Muscular  fibre,  macerated  in  dilute  nitric  acid,  and 
afterward  well  washed  in  warm  water,  affords  pure 
adipocire,  of  a light  yellow  colour,  nearly  of  the  con- 
sistence of  tallow,  of  a homogeneous  texture,  and  of 
course  free  from  ammonia.  This  is  the  mode  in  which 
it  is  now  commonly  procured  for  chemical  experiment. 

Ambergris  appears  to  contain  adipocire  in  large 
quantity,  rather  more  than  half  of  it  being  of  this  sub- 
stance. 

Adipocire  has  been  more  recently  examined  by 
Chevreul.  He  found  it  composed  of  a small  quantity 
of  ammonia,  potassa,  and  lime,  united  to  much  marga- 
rine, and  to  a very  little  of  another  fatty  matter  differ- 
ent from  that.  Weak  muriatic  acid  seizes  the  three 
alcaline  bases.  On  treating  the  residue  with  a solu- 
tion of  potassa,  the  margarine  is  precipitated  in  the 
form  of  a pearly  substance,  while  theother  fat  remains 
dissolved.  Fourcroy  being  of  opinion  that  the  fatty 
matter  of  animal  carcasses,  the  substance  of  biliary 
calculi,  and  spermaceti,  were  nearly  identical,  gave 
them  the  same  name  of  adipocire ; but  it  appears  from 
the  researches  of  Chevreul  that  these  substances  are 
very  different  from  each  other. 

In  the  Philosophical  Transactions  for  1813,  there  is  a 
very  interesting  paper  on  the  above  subject  by  Sir  E. 
Home  and  Mr.  Brande.  He  adduces  many  curious 
facts  to  prove  that  adipocire  is  formed  b>  an  incipient 
and  incomplete  putrefaction.  Mary  Howard,  aged  44, 
died  on  the  12th  May,  1790,  and  was  buried  in  a grave 
ten  feet  deep  at  the  east  end  of  Shoreditch  churchyard, 
ten  feet  to  the  east  of  the  great  common  sewer,  which 
runs  from  north  to  south,  and  has  always  a current  of 
water  in  it,  the  usual  level  of  which  is  eight  feet  below 
the  level  of  the  ground,  and  two  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  coffins  in  the  graves.  In  August,  1811,  the  body 
was-taken  up,  with  some  others  buried  near  it,  for  the 
purpose  of  building  a vault,  and  the  flesh  in  all  of  them 
was  converted  into  adipocire  or  spermaceti.  At  the 
full  and  new  moon  the  tide  raises  water  into  the 
graves,  which  at  other  times  are  dry.  To  explain  the 
extraordinary  quantities  of  fat  or  adipocire  formed  by 
animals  of  a certain  intestinal  construction,  Sir  E.  ob- 
serves, that  the  current  of  water  which  passes  through 
their  colon,  while  the  loculated  lateral  parts  are  full  of 
solid  matter,  places  the  solid  contents  in  somewhat 
sitnuar  circumstances  to  dead  bodies  in  the  banks  of  a 
common  sewer. 

The  circiunstance  of  ambergris,  which  contains  60 
per  cent,  of  fat,  being  found  in  immense  quantities  in 
the  lower  intestines  of  the  spermaceti  whales,  and 
never  higher  up  than  seven  feet  from  the  anus,  is  an 
undeniable  proof  of  fat  being  formed  in  the  intestines ; 
and  a r ambergris  is  only  met  with  in  whales  out  of 
health  It  is  most  probably  collected  there  from  the  ab- 
sorbents, under  the  influence  of  disease,  not  acting  so 
as  to  take  it  into  the  constitution.  In  the  human 
30 


colon,,  solid  masses  of  fat  are  sometimes  met  with  in  a 
diseased  state  of  that  canal.  A description  and  analysis 
by  Doctor  Ure  of  a mass  of  ambergris,  extracted  in 
Perthshire  from  the  rectum  of  a living  woman,  were 
published  in  a London  Medical  Journal  in  September, 
1817.  There  is  a case  communicated  by  Dr.  Babington, 
of  fat  formed  in  the  intestines  of  a girl  four  and  a half 
years  old,  and  passing  off  by  stool.  Mr.  Brande  found, 
on  the  suggestion  of  Sir  E.  Home,  that  muscle  digested 
in  bile,  is  convertible  into  fat,  at  the  temperature  of 
about  100°.  If  the  substance,  however,  pass  rapidly 
into  putrefaction,  no  fat  is  formed.  Fa;ces  voided  by  a 
gouty  gentleman  after  six  days’  constipation,  yielded, 
on  infusion  in  water,  a fatty  film.  This  process  of 
forming  lat  in  the  lower  intestines  by  means  of  bile, 
throws  considerable  light  upon  the  nourishment  de- 
rived from  clysters,  a fact  well  ascertained,  but  which 
could  not  be  explained.  It  also  accounts  for  the  wast- 
ing of  the  body,  which  so  invariably  attends  all  com- 
plaints of  the  lower  bowels.  It  accounts  too  for  all 
the  varieties  in  the  turns  of  the  colon,  which  we  meet 
with  in  so  great  a degree  in  different  animals.  This 
property  of  the  bile  explains  likewise  the  formation  of 
fatty  concretions  in  the  gall  bladder  so  commonly  met 
with,  and  which,  from  these  experiments,  appear  to  be 
produced  by  the  action  of  the  bile  on  the  mucus 
secreted  in  the  gall  bladder;  and  it  enables  us  to 
understand  how  want  of  the  gall  bladder  in  children, 
from  mal-formation,  is  attended  with  excessive  lean- 
ness, notwithstanding  a great  appetite,  and  leads  to  an 
early  death.  Fat  thus  appears  to  be  formed  in  the 
intestines,  and  from  thence  received  into  the  circu- 
lation, and  deposited  in  almost  every  part  of  the  body. 
And  as  there  appears  to  be  no  direct  channel  by  which 
any  superabundance  of  it  can  be  thrown  out  of  the 
body,  whenever  its  supply  exceeds  the  consumption, 
its  accumulation  becomes  a disease,  and  often  a very 
distressing  one. 

[In  the  New- York  Medical  Repository,  vol.  ii.  p. 
325,  is  related  the  case  of  a person  who  was  drowned, 
and  whose  body  was  converted  into  this  substance 
after  lying  in  the  mud  of  a river  for  a year.  We  have 
seen  a piece  of  meat  raised  out  of  a well  by' pumping, 
into  which  it  had  fallen,  and  where  it  was  completely 
changed  into  adipocire.  A barrel  of  meat,  which  had 
undergone  a change  and  become  adipocire,  was  raised 
from  the  British  frigate  Hussar,  sunk  near  Hell- Gate 
during  the  revolutionary  war,  where  it  had  remained 
in  eight  or  ten  fathoms  of  salt  water  near  fifty  years. 
A single  body  of  a female,  consisting  of  a solid  mass 
of  adipocire,  w^as  dug  up  in  dry  ground,  near  the  City 
Hall  in  New-York.  A box  of  candles,  taken  from  a 
sunken  wreck  on  the  coast  of  Brazil,  was  changed  in 
appearance  and  consistence,  and  had  become  a mass 
of  adipocire.  The  bones  of  a huge  cetaceous  animal 
were  dug  up  in  the  low  grounds  about  New-Orleans: 
when  they  were  exhibited  as  a show  in  New-York, 
in  1828,  adipocire  was  discovered  in  the  cells  of  the 
spongy  part  of  the  jaw-bone.  A.] 

ADPPOSE.  ( Adiposus ; from  adeps,  fat.)  Fatty  ; 
as  adipose  membrane,  &c. 

Adipose  membrane.  Membrana  adiposa.  The 
fat  collected  in  the  cells  of  the  cellular  membrane. 

ADI  PSA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Sirpa,  thirst.)  1.  So 
the  Greeks  called  medicines,  &c.  which  abate  thirst. 

2.  Hippocrates  applied  this  word  to  oxymel. 

ADI  PSIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Supa,  thirst.)  A 
want  of  thirst.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  locales , 
and  order  dysorcxice  of  Cullen’s  Nosology.  It  is 
mostly  symptomatic  of  some  disease  of  the  brain. 

ADI  PSOS.  So  called  because  it  allays  thirst.)  1. 
The  Egyptian  palm-tree,  the  fruit  of  which  is  said  to 
be  the  Myrobalans , which  quench  thirst. 

2.  Also  a name  for  liquorice. 

ADJUTO  RIUM.  (From  ad  and  juvo , to  help.) 
A name  of  the  humerus , from  its  usefulness  in  lifting 
up  the  fore-arm. 

ADJUVA  NTIA.  Whatever  assists  in  preventing 
or  curing  disease. 

Adnata  tunica.  Albuginea  oculi ; Tunica  albu- 
ginea oculi.  A membrane  of  the  eye  mostly  confound- 
ed with  the  conjunctiva.  It  is,  however,  thus  formed : 
five  of  the  muscles  which  move  the  eye,  take  their  ori- 
gin from  the  bottom  of  the  orbit,  and  the  sixth  arises 
from  the  edge  of  it ; they  are  all  inserted  by  a tendi- 
nous expansion,  into  the  anterior  part  of  the  tunica 
sclerotica , which  expansion  forms  the  adnata,  and 


ADV 


gives  the  whiteness  peculiar  to  the  fore-part  of  the 
eye.  It  lies  between  the  sclerotica  and  conjunctiva. 

ADNA'TUS.  (From  adncscor , to  grow  to.)  A 
term  applied  to  some  parts  which  appear  to  grow  to 
others:  as  tunica  adnata , stipules  adnata,  folium 
adnatum. 

ADOLESCE'NTIA.  See  Age. 

Ado'nion.  (From  A <5 am?,  the  youth  from  whose 
blood  it  was  feigned  to  have  sprung.)  Adonium.  See 
Artemisia  abrotanum. 

Adonium.  See  Adonion. 

ADO  PTER.  Tubus  ir.termedius.  A chemical 
vessel  with  two  necks,  used  to  combine  retorts  to  the 
cucurbits  or  matrasses  in  distillation,  with  retorts 
instead  of  receivers. 

A'dor.  A sort  of  corn,  called  also  spelta. 

A'dos.  Forge  water,  or  water  in  which  red-hot 
iron  is  extinguished. 

AD  PONDUS  OMNIUM.  The  weight  of  the  whole. 
These  words  are  inserted  in  pharmaceutical  prepara- 
tions, or  prescriptions,  when  the  last  ingredient  ought 
to  weigh  as  much  as  all  the  others  put  together. 

ADPRESSUS.  Approximated.  A term  in  botany, 
applied  to  branches  of  leaves  when  they  rise  in  a 
direction  nearly  parallel  to  the  stem,  and  are  closely 
applied  to  them,  as  in  the  branches  of  the  Genista 
tinctoria  and  leaves  of  the  Tlilaspi  campestris. 

Adra  Rhi'za.  Blancard  says  the  root  of  the  Aris- 
tolochia  is  thus  named. 

Adra'chne.  The  strawberry  bay-tree.  A species 
of  Arbutus. 

Adrara'gi.  An  Indian  name  for  our  garden-saffron. 

ADROBO'LON.  (From  aSpos,  large,  and  jSuXo?, 
a globe,  bole,  or  mass.)  Indian  bdellium,  which  is 
coarser  than  the  Arabian.  See  Bdellium. 

ADSCENDENS.  See  Ascendens. 

ADSTRICTION.  Costiveness.  < 

ADSTRINGENT.  See  Astringent. 

[ADULARIA.  This  is  the  most  perfect  variety  of 
feldspar,  and  bears  to  common  feldspar,  in  many 
respects,  the  relation  of  rock  crystal  to  common  quartz. 
Adularia  is  more  or  less  translucent,  and  sometimes 
transparent  and  limpid.  Its  colour  is  white,  either  a 
little  milky,  or  with  a tinge  of  green,  yellow,  or  red. 
But  it  is  chiefly  distinguished  by  presenting,  when  in 
certain  positions,  whitish  reflections,  which  are  often 
slightly  tinged  with  blue  or  green,  and  exhibit  a pearly 
or  silver  lustre.  These  reflections,  which  are  often 
confined  to  certain  spots,  proceed  in  most  cases  from 
the  interior  of  the  crystal. 

Adularia  is  sometimes  cut  into  plates  and  polished. 
The  fish's  eye , moonstone , and  argentine , of  lapidaries, 
come  chiefly  from  Persia,  Arabia,  and  Ceylon,  and 
belong  to  adularia,  as  do  also  the  water  opal  and 
girasole  of  the  Italians. — Cleavl.  Min. 

It  has  been  found  in  the  states  of  Maryland,  Penn- 
sylvania, New-York,  and  Massachusetts.  A.] 

ADUSTION.  Adustio.  1.  An  inflammation  about 
the  brain,'  and  its  membranes,  with  a hollowness  of 
the  eyes,  a pale  colour,  and  a dry  body ; obsolete. 

2.  In  surgery,  adustion  signifies  the  same  as  cauter- 
ization, and  means  the  application  of  any  substance 
to  the  animal  body,  which  acts  like  fire.  The  ancient 
surgeons,  especially  the  Arabians,  were  remarkably 
fond  of  having  recourse  to  adustion  in  local  diseases  ; 
but  the  use  of  actual  heat  is  very  rarely  admitted  by 
the  moderns. 

ADVENTITIOUS.  (Adventitius ; from  advenio, 
to  come  to.)  Any  thing  that  accidentally,  and  not  in 
the  common  course  of  natural  causes,  happens  to 
make  a part  of  another.  Something  accruing  or  befall- 
ing a person  or  thing  from  without.  It  is  used  in 
medicine  in  opposition  to  hereditary;  as  when  diseases 
may  be  transmitted  from  the  parent  and  also  acquired, 
as  is  the  case  with  gout  and  jcrofula.  They  are  some- 
times hereditary,  and  very  often  adventitious. 

ADVERSIFO'LIA.  (From  adversus , opposite,  and 
folium , a leaf.')  A plant  with  alternate  leaves. 

Adversifo;li*  plant.*.  1.  Plants  the  leaves  of 
which  stand  opposite  to  each  other  on  the  same  stem 
or  branch. 

2.  The  name  of  a class  in  Sauvages’  Metkodus  Fo- 
liorum.  Valerian,  teasel,  honey-suckle,  &c.  are 
examples. 

ADVERSUS.  Opposite.  Applied  in  natural  history 
to  parts  which  stand  opposite  to  each  other ; as  plantce 
adversifolice , the  leaves  standing  opposite  to  each 


/EGO 

other  on  the  same  stem,  as  in  valerian,  teasel,  honey- 
suckle, &c. 

ADYNA'MIA.  ( Adynamia , ce,  f. ; ASwapia,  from 
a,  priv.  and  Swapis,  power.)  A defect  of  vital  power. 

Adyna'mi*.  (The  plural  of  Adynamia.)  The 
second  order  of  the  class- neuroses  of  Cullen’s  Noso- 
logy ; it  comprehends  syncope , dyspepsia , hypochon- 
driasis, and  chlorosis. 

Ady'namon.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Svvapig,  strength.) 
Adynamum.  Among  ancient  physicians,  it  signified  a 
kind  of  weak  factitious  wine,  prepared  from  must, 
boiled  down  with  water ; to  be  given  to  patients  to 
whom  pure  or  genuine  wine  might  be  hurtful. 

Adynamum.  See  Adynamon. 

[A1DELITE.  A mineral  described  by  Kirwan,  con- 
taining, according  to  Bergman,  silex  from  62  to  69 
parts,  alumine  from  18  to  20,  lime  from  8 to  16,  water 
3 to  4. — Clean.  Min.  A.] 

/EDOI'A.  (From  aiSas,  modesty ; or  from  a,  neg. 
and  eiSeo),  to  see ; as  not  being  decent  to  the  sight.) 
The  pudenda,  or  parts  of  generation. 

iEDOPSO'PHIA.  (From  aiSoia,  pudenda;  and 
xpo'H a),  to  break  wind.)  A term  used  by  Sauvages 
and  Sagar,  to  signify  a flatus  from  the  bladder,  or 
from  the  womb,  making  its  escape  through  the  vagina. 

A3DOPTO  SIS.  (JEdoptosis ; from  aiSolov,  the 
groin ; pi.  aiSoia,  pudenda;  and  ir^ioais,  a falling 
down.)  Genital  prolapsi.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology. 

/EGAGRO  PILUS.  (From  aiyaypos,  a wild  goat, 
and  pila,  a ball.)  JEgagropila. 

1.  A ball  found  in  the  stomach  of  deer,  goats,  hogs, 
horned  cattle,  as  cows,  &c.  It  consists  of  hairs  which 
they  have  swallowed  from  licking  themselves.  They 
are  of  different  degrees  of  hardness,  but  have  no  medi- 
cinal virtues.  Some  rank  these  balls  among  the 
Bezoars.  Hieronymus  Velschius  wrote  a Realise  on 
the  virtues  of  this. 

2.  A species  of  conferva  found  in  Wallenfenmoor, 
from  its  resembling  these  concretions,  is  also  so  named. 

A3'GIAS.  A white  speck  on  the  pupil  of  the  eye, 
which  occasions  a dimness  of  sight. 

iEGI'DES.  Aglia.  A disorder  of  the  eyes  men- 
tioned .by  Hippocrates.  Foesius  thinks  the  disease 
consists  of  small  cicatrices  in  the  eye,  caused  by  an 
afflux  of  corrosive  humours  upon  the  part.  But  in 
one  passage  of  Hippocrates,  Foesius  says  it  signifies 
small  white  concretions  of  humours  which  stick  upon 
the  pupil,  and  obscure  the  sight. 

iEGI'DlON.  A collyrium  or  ointment  for  inflamma- 
tions and  defluxions  of  the  eyes. 

/E'GILOPS.  1.  The  same  as  JEgylops. 

2.  Wild  fescue  grass,  so  called  from  its  supposed 
virtue  in  curing  the  disorder  named  A2gyIops.  It  is  a 
species  of  Bromus  in  the  Linnaean  system. 

iEGINE'TA,  Paulus.  A celebrated  surgeon  of  the 
island  of  Angina,  from  Which  he  derived  his  name.  lie 
is  placed  by  Le  Clerc  in  the  fourth  century ; by  others 
in  the  seventh.  He  was  eminently  skilled  in  his  pro- 
fession, and  his  works  are  frequently  cited  by  Fabri- 
cius  ab  Aquapendente.  He  is  the  first  author  that 
notices  the  cathartic  quality  of  rhubarb.  He  begins 
his  book  with  the  description  of  the  diseases  of  women  ; 
and  is  said  to  be  the  first  that  deserves  the  appellation 
of  a man  midwife. 

AIqine'tia.  Malabrian  broom  rape.  A species  of 

Orobancha. 

A3'GIS.  A film  on  the  eye. 

ASGO'CERAS.  (From  ai\,  a goat,  and  nepas,  a 
horn  ; so  called,  because  the  pods  were  supposed  to 
resemble  the  horns  of  a goat.)  Fcenugreek.  See 
Trigmella  Fcenumgrcecum. 

ASGO'LETHRON.  (From  ai\,  a goat,  and  oXedpo ?, 
destruction  : so  named  from  the  opinion  of  its  being 
poisonous  to  goats.)  Tournefort  says  it  is  the  Cha- 
mcerododendron , now  the  Azelcea  pontica  of  Linnaeus. 

iEGO'NYCHON.  (From  ai\ , a goat,  and  ovv%,  a 
hoof:  because  of  the  hardness  of  the  seed.)  See 
Lithosperm.um  officinale. 

AEGOPO'DIUM.  ( JEgopodium , i.  n. ; from  ai\,  a 
goat,  and  tzovs,  a foot : from  its  supposed  resemblance 
to  a goat’s  foot.)  A genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Clas3,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia.  Goat- 
weed.  The  following  species  was  formerly  much 
esteemed. 

iEGOPomuM  podagraria.  Goatweed.  This  plant 
is  sedative,  and  was  formerly  applied  to  mitigafe  pains 


AER 


of  gout,  and  to  relieve  piles,  but  not  now  employed.  In 
its  earlier  state  it  is  tender  and  esculent. 

AEgoproso'pon.  (From  ai%,  a goat,  and  zspoawirov, 
a face  : so  called  because  goats  are  subject  to  defects 
in  the  eyes,  or  from  having  in  it  some  ingredients 
named  after  the  goat.)  A name  of  a lotion  for  the 
eyes,  when  inflamed. 

AE'GYLOPS.  (, Mgylops , op  is,  m. ; from  ai\,  a 
goat,  and  coi^,  an  eye.)  Anchilops.  A disease  so 
named  from  the  supposition  that  goats  .were  very  sub- 
ject to  it.  The  term  means  a sore  just  under  the  inner 
angle  of  the  eye.  The  best  modern  surgeons  seein  to 
consider  the  asgylops  only  as  a stage  of  the  fistula 
Iachrymalis.  Paulus AEgineta  calls  it  anchilops,  before 
it  bursts,  and  aegylops  after.  When  the  skin  covering 
the  lachrymal  sac  has  been  for  some  time  inflamed,  or 
subject  to  frequent  returning  inflammations,  it  most 
commonly  happens  that  ihe  puncta  lachrymalia  are 
affected  by  it ; and  the  fluid,  not  having  an  opportu- 
nity of  passing  off  by  them,  distends  the  inflamed  skin, 
so  that  at  last  it  becomes  sloughy,  and  bursts  exter- 
nally. This  is  that  state  of  the  disease  which  is  called 
perfect  aigylops,  or  aegylops. 

AEgy'ptia  muscata.  See  Hibiscus  abelmoschus. 
AEGYPTl'ACUM.  A name  given  to  different  un- 
guents of  the  detergent  or  corrosive  kind.  We  meet 
with  a black,  a red,  a white,  a simple,  a compound, 
and  a magistral  regyptiacum.  The  simple  aegyptiacum, 
which  is  that  usually  found  in  our  shops,  is  a composi- 
tion of  verdigris,  vinegar,  and  honey,  boiled  to  a con- 
sistence. It  is  usually  supposed  to  take  its  name  from 
its  dark  colour,  wherein  it  resembles  that  of  the  natives 
of  Egypt.  It  is  improperly  called  an  unguent,  as  there 
is  no  oil,  or  rather  fat  in  it. 

AEgy'ptium  pharmacum  ad  aures.  AStius  speaks 
of  this  as  excellent  for  deterging  foetid  ulcers  of  the 
ears,  which  he  says  it  cures,  though  the  patient  were 
born  with  them. 

AEIPATHEI'A.  (From  ati,  always,  and  z zuOos,  a 
disease.)  Diseases  of  long  duration. 

AENEA.  (From  as,  brass,  so  called  because  it  was 
formerly  made  of  brass.)  A catheter. 

AEO'NION.  The  common  house  leek.  See  Sem- 
pervivum  tectorum. 

AEO'RA.  (From  aiwpeio,  to  lift  up,  to  suspend  on 
high.)  Exercise  without  muscular  action  ; as  swing- 
ing. A species  of  exercise  used  by  the  ancients,  and 
of  which  Aetius  gives  the  following  account.  -Gesta- 
tion, while  it  exercises  the  body,  the  body  seems  to  be 
at  rest.  Of  this  motion  there  are  several  kinds.  First, 
swinging  in  a hammock,  which,  at  the  decline  of  a 
fever,  is  beneficial.  Secondly,  being  carried  in  a litter, 
in  which  the  patient  either  sits  or  lies  along.  It  is 
useful  when  the  gout,  stone,  or  such  other  disorder 
attends,  as  does  not  admit  of  violent  motions.  Thirdly, 
riding  in  a chariot,  which  is  of  service  in  most  chroni- 
cal disorders;  especially  before  the  more  violent  exer- 
cises can  be  admitted.  Fourthly,  sailing  in  a ship  or 
boat.  This  produces  various  effects,  according  to  the 
different  agitation  of  the  waters,  and,  in  many  tedious 
chronical  disorders,  is  efficacious  beyond  what  is  ob- 
served from  the  most  skilful  administration  of  drugs. 
These  are  instances  of  a passive  exercise. 

AEQUA'HS.  Equal.  Applied  by  botanists  to  dis- 
tinguish length;  as  filimenta,  cequalia ; pedunculi 
i equates , &c. 

AE'QUE.  Equally.  The  same  as  ana. 
AEQ.UTVALVIS.  JEquivalve.  A botanical  term, 
implying,  composed  of  equal  valves. 

A'ER.  ( Aer , eris , m. ; fromai?o.1  The  fluid  which 
surrounds  the  globe.  See  Air  and  Atmosphere. 

AE'ra.  Darnel,  or  lolium. 

JEratcd  alkaline  water.  An  alkaline  water  impreg- 
nated with  carbonic  acid. 

SERIAL.  Belonging  to  air. 

JErial  Acid.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

JErial  plants.  Those  plants  are  so  called  which, 
after  a certain  time,  do  not  require  that  their  roots 
should  be  fixed  to  any  spot  in  order  to  maintain  their 
life,  which  they  do  by  absorption  from  the  atmosphere. 
Such  are  a curious  tropical  tribe  of  plants  called  cacti, 
the  epidendrum,  flos  aeris,  and  the  ficus  australis. 
AERI'TIS.  The  Anagallis,  or  pimpernell. 
AEROLITE.  A meteoric  stone. 

AEROLO'GICE.  See  Aerology. 

AEROLO'GY.  (Acrologia,  ce,  f. ; from  arjp,  the 
air,  and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  Aerologice.  That  part 


iEST 

of  medicine  which  treats  of  the  nature  and  proper 

ties  of  air. 

Aero'meli.  Honey  dew;  also  a name  for  manna. 

AEROMETER.  An  instrument  for  making  the  ne- 
cessary corrections  in  pneumatic  experiments  to  ascer- 
tain the  mean  bulk  of  the  gases. 

AEROPHO  BIA.  Fear  of  air  or  wind. 

1.  Said  to  be  a symptom  of  phrenitis  and  hydro- 
phobia. 

2.  A name  of  Hydrophobia. 

AERO'PHOBUS.  (From  app,  air,  and  $060$,  fear.) 

According  to  Ccelius  Aurelianus,  some  phrenetic  pa- 
tients are  afraid  of  a lucid,  and  others  of  an  obscure 
air : and  these  he  calls  aerophobi. 

AERO  SIS.  The  aerial  vital  spirit  of  the  ancients. 

AEROSTATION.  JErostatio.  A name  commonly, 
but  not  very  correctly,  given  to  the  art  of  raising  heavy 
bodies  into  the  atmosphere,  by  buoyancy  of  heated  air, 
or  gases  of  small  specific  gravity,  enclosed  in  a bag, 
which  from  being  usually  of  a spherical  form,  is  called 
a balloon. 

AERO'SUS  LAPIS.  So  Pliny  calls  the  Lapis  cala- 
minaris,  upon  the  supposition  that  it  was  a copper  ore. 

AEruca.  Verdigris. 

AERU'GO.  (JErugo,  ginis , f.,  from  as,  copper.) 
1.  The  rust  of  any  metal,  particularly  of  copper. 

2.  Verdigris.  See  Verdigris. 

AErugo  jeris.  Rusts  of  copper  or  verdigris.  See 

Verdigris. 

AErugo  pr.epara'ta.  See  Verdigris. 

AES.  Brass. 

AESCULA'PIUS,  said  to  be  the  son  of  Apollo,  by 
the  nymph  Coronis,  bom  at  Epidaurus,  and  educated 
by  Chiron,  who  taught  him  to  cure  the  most  dangerous 
diseases,  and  even  raise  the  dead ; worshipped  by  the 
ancients  as  the  god  of  medicine.  His  history  is  so  in- 
volved in  fable,  that  it  is  useless  to  trace  it  minutely. 
His  two  sons,  Machaon  and  Podalirius,  who  ruled 
over  a small  city  in  Thessaly,  after  his  death  accom- 
panied the  Greeks  to  the  siege  of  Troy : but  Homer 
speaks  merely  of  their  skill  in  the  treatment  of  wounds ; 
and  divine  honours  were  not  paid  to  their  father  till  a 
latter  period.  In  the  temples  raised  to  him,  votive 
tablets  were  hung  up,  on  which  were  recorded  the  dis- 
eases cured,  as  they  imagined,  by  his  assistance. 

AE'SCULUS.  ( JEsculus , i,  m. ; from  esca,  food.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system 
Class,  Hcptandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  Horse- 
chesnut. 

AEsculus  hippo castanum.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  common  horse-chesnut  tree.  Castanea  equina , 
pavina.  JEscillus—foliolis  septenis  of  Linnaeus.  The 
fruit  of  this  tree,  when  dried  and  powdered,  is  recom- 
mended as  an  errhine.  The  bark  is  highly  esteemed 
on  the  continent  as  a febrifuge ; and  is,  by  some,  con- 
sidered as  being  superior  in  quality  to  the  Peruvian 
bark.  The  bark  intended  for  medical  use  is  to  be 
taken  from  those  branches  which  are  neither  very 
young  nor  very  old,  and  to  be  exhibited  under  similar 
forms  and  doses,  as  directed  with  respect  to  the  Peru- 
vian bark.  It  rarely  disagrees  with  the  stomach  ; but 
its  astringent  effects  generally  require  the  occasional 
administration  of  a laxative.  During  the  late  scarcity 
of  grain,  some  attempts  were  made  to  obtain  starch 
from  the  horse-chesnut,  and  not  without  success. 

AESTHE'TICA.  (From  aioOdvopai,  to  feel,  or  per- 
ceive.) Diseases  affecting  the  sensation.  The  name 
of  an  order  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  See  A 'o 
sology. 

AESTIV'ALIS.  (From  aestas,  summer.)  AEstival  ; 
belonging  to  summer.  Diseases  of  animals  and  plants 
which  appear  in  the  summer. 

AEstivales  plants.  Plants  which  flower  in  sum- 
mer. A division  according  to  the  seasons  of  the  year. 

AESTIVA'TIO.  AEstivation;  the  action  of  the 
summer,  or  its  influence  on  things. 

ASstphara.  Incineration,  or  burning  of  the  flesh, 
or  any  other  part  of  the  body. 

AESTUA'RIUM.  A stove  for  conveying  heat  to  all 
parts  of  the  body  at  once.  A kind  of  vapour  bath. 
Ambrose  Parti  calls  an  instrument  thus,  which  he  de- 
scribes for  conveying  heat  to  any  particular  part.  Pal- 
inarius,  De  Morbis  Contagiosis,  gives  a contrivance 
under  this  name,  for  sweating  the  whole  body. 

AEstua'tio.  The  boiling  up,  or  rather  the  ferment- 
ing of  liquors  when  mixed. 

AS' ST  US.  JEstus , us,  m. ; from  the  Hebrew  esh, 


J5TH 


AFF 


heat.  Heat ; applied  to  the  feeling  merely  of  heat,  and 
sometimes  to  that  of  inflammation  in  which  there  is 
heat  and  redness. 

/Estus  volaticus.  1.  Sudden  heat,  or  scorching, 
which  soon  goes  oft",  but  which  for  a time  reddens  the 

part. 

2.  According  to  Vogel,  synonymous  with  phlogosis. 

3.  Erythema  volaticum  of  Sauvages. 

/E  TAS.  See  Age. 

/E'THER.  (. JEther , eris,  m. ; from  aiOyp : a sup- 
posed fine  subtile  fluid.)  ./Ether.  A volatile  liquor, 
obtained  by  distillation,  from  a mixture  of  alcohol  and 
a concentrated  acid. 

The  medical  properties  of  aether,  when  taken  inter- 
nally, are  antispasmodic,  cordial,  and  stimulant. 
Against  nervous  and  typhoid  fever,  all  nervous  dis- 
eases, but  especially  tetanic  affections,  soporose  dis- 
eases from  debility,  asthma,  palsy,  spasmopic  colic, 
hysteria,  &c.  it  always  enjoys  some  share  of  reputa- 
tion. Regular  practitioners  seldom  give  so  much  as 
empirics,  who  sometimes  venture  upon  large  quanti- 
ties, with  incredible  benefit.  Applied  externally,  it  is 
of  service  in  the  headache,  toothache,  and  other  pain- 
ful affections.  Thus  employed,  it  is  capable  of  pro- 
ducing two  very  opposite  effects,  according  to  its  ma- 
nagement ; for,  if  it  be  prevented  from  evaporating, 
by  covering  the  place  to  which  it  is  applied  closely 
with  the  hand,  it  proves  a powerful  stimulant  and 
rubefacient,  and  excites  a sensation  of  burning  heat, 
as  is  the  case  with  solutions  of  camphor  in  alcohol,  or 
turpentine.  In  this  way  it  is  frequently  used  for  re- 
moving pains  in  the  head  or  teeth.  On  the  contrary, 
if  it  be  dropped  on  any  part  of  the  body,  exposed  freely 
to  the  air,  its  rapid  evaporation  produces  an  intense 
degree  of  cold ; and,  as  this  is  attended  with  a propor- 
tional diminution  of  bulk  in  the  part,  applied  in  this 
way,  it  has  frequently  contributed  to  the  reduction  of 
the  intestine,  in  cases  of  strangulated  hernia. 

/Ether  rectificatus.  JEther  vitriolicus.  Recti- 
fied aether.  Take  of  sulphuric  aether,  fourteen  fluid 
ounces.  Fused  potash,  half  an  ounce.  Distilled 
water,  eleven  fluid  ounces. 

First  dissolve  the  potash  in  two  ounces  of  the  water, 
and  add  thereto  the  aether,  shaking  them  well  together, 
until  they  are  mixed.  Next,  at  a temperature  of  about 
200  degrees,  distil  over  twelve  fluid  ounces  of  rectified 
aether,  from  a large  retort  into  a cooled  receiver.  Then 
shake  the  distilled  aether  well  with  nine  fluid  ounces  of 
water,  and  set  the  liquor  by,  so  that  the  water  may 
subside.  Lastly,  pour  off  the  supernatant  rectified 
aether,  and  keep  it  in  a well-stopped  bottle. 

Sulphuric  aether  is  impregnated  with  some  sulphu- 
reous acid,  as  is  evident  in  the  smell,  and  with  some 
aetherial  oil:  and  these  require  a second  process  to 
separate  them.  Potash  unites  to  the  acid,  and  re- 
quires to  be  added  in  a state  of  solution,  and  in  suffi- 
cient quantities,  for  the  purpose  of  neutralizing  it; 
and  it  also  forms  a soap  with  the  oil.  It  is  advantage- 
ous also  to  use  a less  quantity  of  water  than  exists  in 
the  ordinary  solution  of  potash;  and  therefore  the 
above  directions  are  adopted  in  the  last  London  Phar- 
macopeia. For  its  virtues,  see  JEther. 

/Ether  sulphuricus.  Naphtha  vitrioli ; JEther 
vitriolicus.  Sulphuric  aether.  Take  of  rectified  spirit, 
sidphuric  acid,  of  each,  by  weight,  a pound  and  a half. 
Pour  the  spirit  into  a glass  retort,  then  gradually  add 
to  it  the  acid,  shaking  it  after  each  addition,  and 
taking  care  that  their  temperature,  during  the  mixture, 
may  not  exceed  120  degrees.  Place  the  retort  very 
cautiously  into  a sand  bath,  previously  heated  to  200 
degrees,  so  that  the  liquor  may  boil  as  speedily  as  pos- 
sible, and  the  aether  may  pass  over  into  a tubulated 
receiver,  to  the  tubulure  of  which  another  receiver  is 
applied,  and  kept  cold  by  immersion  in  ice,  or  water. 
Continue  the  distillation  until  a heavier  part  also  begins 
to  pass  over,  and  appear  under  the  aether  in  the  bottom 
of  the  receiver.  To  the  liquor  which  remains  in  the 
retort,  pour  twelve  fluid  ounces  more  of  rectified  spirit, 
and  repeat  the  distillation  in  the  same  manner. 

It  is  mostly  employed  as  an  excitant,  nervine,  anti- 
spasmodic,  and  diuietic,  in  cases  of  spasms,  cardialgia, 
enteralgia,  fevers,  hysteria,  cephalalgia,  and  spasmodic 
asthma.  The  dose  is  from  min.  xx  to  3 ij.  Exter- 
nally, it  cures  toothache,  and  violent  pains  in  the  head. 
See  JEther. 

./Ether  vitriolicus.  See  JEther  sulphuricus  and 
JEther  rectificatus . 

C 


./Ethe'rea  herba.  The  plant  formerly  so  ealled  ia 
supposed  to  be  the  Eryngium. 

/Etherial  oil.  See  Oleum  JEtherium. 

/ETHlOPS.  A term  applied  formerly  to  several 
preparations,  because  of  a black  colour,  like  the  skin 
of  an  /Ethiopian. 

/Ethiops  antimonia'lis.  A preparation  of  anti 
mony  and  mercury,  once  in  high  repute,  and  still  em 
ployed  by  some  practitioners  in  cutaneous  diseases 
A few  grains  are  to  be  given  at  first,  and  the  quantity 
increased  as  the  stomach  can  bear  it. 

/Ethiops  martialis.  A preparation  of  iron,  for 
merly  in  repute,  but  now  neglected. 

JEthiops  mineral.  The  substance  heretofore  known 
by  this  name,  is  called  by  the  London  College,  Hy- 
drargyri  sulphuretum  nigrum. 

/ETHMOID.  See  Ethmoid. 

JEthmoid  Artery.  See  Ethmoid  Artery. 

JEthmoid  Bone.  See  Ethmoid  Bone. 

/E  THU'S  A.  ( JEthusa , f. ; from  aiOovaa , beg- 
garly.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  of  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

/Ethusa  meum.  The  systematic  name  of  the  meurn 
of  the  Pharmacopoeias.  Called  also  Meum  athaman- 
ticum  ; Meu ; Spignel ; Baldmoney.  The  root  of  this 
plant  is  recommended  as  a carminative,  stomachic, 
and  for  attenuating  viscid  humours,  and  appears  to  be 
nearly  of  the  same  nature  as  lovage,  differing  in  its 
smell,  being  rather  more  agreeable,  somewhat  like  that 
of  parsnips,  but  stronger,  and  being  in  its  taste  less 
sweet,  and  more  warm,  or  acrid. 

/ETIOLOGY.  ( JEtiologia , «e,  f. ; airio\oyia  : from 
aijia,  a cause,  and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine 
of  the  causes  of  diseases. 

/ET1TES.  Eagle  stone.  A stone  formed  of  oxyde 
of  iron,  containing  in  its  cavity  some  concretion  which 
rattles  on  shaking  the  stone.  Eagles  were  said  to 
carry  them  to  their  nest,  whence  their  name:  and  su- 
perstition formerly  ascribed  wonderful  virtues  to  them. 

[This  is  now  arranged  among  the  ores  of  iron  by 
the  name  of  the  nodular  argillaceous  oxide  of  iron. 
See  Clean.  Min.  A.] 

AE'TIUS.  A physician,  called  also  Amidenus , 
from  the  place  of  his  birth.  He  flourished  at  Alexan- 
dria, about  the  end  of  the  fifth  ceutury,  and  left  six- 
teen books,  divided  into  four  tetrabiblia , on  the  prac- 
tice of  physic  and  surgery,  principally  collected  from 
Galen  and  other  early  writers,  but  with  some  original 
observations.  He  appears  very  partial  to  the  use  of 
the  cautery,  both  actual  and  potential,  especially  in 
palsy;  which  plan  of  treatment  Mr.  Pott  revived  in 
paraphlegia  ; and  it  has  since  often  been  adopted  with 
success.  Aetius  is  the  earliest  writer  who  ascribed 
medical  efficacy  to  the  external  use  of  the  magnet,  par 
ticularly  in  gout  and  convulsions ; but  rather  on  the 
report  of  others,  than  as  what  he  had,  personally  ex- 
perienced. 

/Eto'cion.  JEtolium.  The  granum  cnidium.  See 
Daphne  mezereon. 

/Eto'nychum.  See  Lithospermum. 

AFFECTION.  ( Affectio , onis,  f.  This'is  expressed 
in  Greek  by  aadog  : hence  pathema,  passio.)  Any  ex 
isting  disorder  of  the  whole  body,  or  a part  of  it ; kp 
hysterics,  ieprosy,  &c.  Thus,  by  adding  a descriptive 
epithet’to  the  term  affection,  most  distempers  may  be 
expressed.  And  hence  we  say  febrile  affection,  cuta- 
neous affection,  &c.,  using  the  word  affection  synony- 
mously with  disease. 

AFFINITY.  ( Affinitas , atis,  f. ; a proximity  of 
relationship.)  The  term  affinity  is  used  indifferently 
with  attraction.  See  Attraction. 

Affinity  of  aggregation.  See  Attraction. 

Affinity,  appropriate.  See  Affinity , incermediate. 

Affinity  of  composition.  See  Attraction. 

Affinity,  compound.  When  three  or  more  bodes, 
on  account  of  their  mutual  affinity,  unite  and  form  one 
homogeneous  body,  then  the  affinity  is  termed  com 
pound  affinity  or  attraction : thus,  if  to  a solution  of 
sugar  and  water  be  added  spirits  of  wine,  these  three 
bodies  will  form  a homogeneous  liquid  by  compound 
affinity. 

Affinity,  divellent.  See  Affinity , quiescent. 

Affinity,  double.  Double  elective  attraction. 
When  two  bodies,  each  consisting  of  two  elementary 
parts,  come  into  contact,  and  are  decomposed,  so  that 
their  elements  become  reciprocally  united,  and  pro- 
duce two  new  compound  bodies,  the  decomposition  ia 


AFF 

then  termed  decomposition  by  double  affinity : thus,  if 
we  add  common  salt,  which  consists  of  muriatic  acid 
and  soda,  to  nitrate  of  silver,  which  is  composed  of  nitric 
acid  and  oxyde  of  silver,  these  two  bodies  will  be  decom- 
pounded ; for  the  nitric  acid  unites  with  the  soda,  and 
the  oxyde  of  silver  with  the  muriatic  acid,  and  thus 
may  be  obtained  two  new  bodies.  The  common  salt 
and  nitrate  of  silver  therefore  mutually  decompose 
each  other  by  what  is  called  double  affinity. 

Affinity,  intermediate.  Appropriate  affinity. 
Affinity  of  an  intermedium  is,  when  two  substances  of 
different  kinds,  that  show  to  one  another  no  component 
affinity,  do,  by  the  assistance  of  a third,  combine,  and 
unite  into  a homogeneous  whole : thus,  oil  and  water 
are  substances  of  different  kinds,  which,  by  means  of 
alcali,  combine  and  unite  into  a homogeneous  sub- 
stance : hence  the  theory  of  lixiviums,  of  washing,  &c. 
See  Attraction. 

Affinity,  quiescent.  Mr.  Kirwan  employs  the 
term  Quiescent  affinity  to  mark  that,  by  virtue  of 
which,  the  principle  of  each  compound,  decomposed 
by  double  affinity,  adhere  to  each  other ; and  Bivel- 
lent  affinity , to  distinguish  that  by  which  the  princi- 
ples of  one  body  unite  and  change  order  with  those 
of  the  other : thus,  sulphate  of  potash  is  not  com- 
pletely decomposed  by  the  nitric  acid  or  by  lime,  when 
either  of  these  principles  is  separately  presented  ; but 
if  the  nitric  acid  be  combined  with  lime,  this  nitrate  of 
lime  will  decompose  the  sulphate  of  potash.  In  this 
last  case,  the  affinity  of  the  sulphuric  acid  with  the  al- 
cali is  weakened  by  its  affinity  to  the  lime.  This  acid, 
therefore,  is  subject  to  two  affinities,  the  one  which 
retains  it  to  the  alcali,  called  quiescent,  and  the  other 
which  attracts  it  toward  the  lime,  called  divellent 
affinity. 

Affinity,  reciprocal.  When  a compound  of  two 
bodies  is  decomposed  by  a third,  the  separated  princi- 
ple being  in  its  turn  capable  of  decomposing  the  new 
combination : thus  ammonia  and  magnesia  will  sepa- 
rate each  other  from  muriatic  acid. 

Affinity,  simple.  Single  elective  attraction.  V 
a body,  consisting  of  two  component  parts,  be  decom- 
posed on  the  approach  of  a third,  which  has  a greater 
affinity  with  one  of  those  component  parts  than  they 
have  for  each  other,  then  the  decomposition  is  termed 
decomposition  by  simple  affinity : for  instance,  if 
pure  potash  be  added  to  a combination  of  nitric  acid 
and  lime,  the  union  which  existed  between  these  two 
bodies  will  cease,  because  the  potash  combines  with 
the  nitric  acid,  and  the  lime,  being  disengaged,  is  pre- 
cipitated. The  reason  is,  that  the  nitric  acid  has  a 
greater  affinity  for  the  pure  potash  than  for  the  lime, 
therefore  it  deserts  the  lime,  to  combine  with  the  pot- 
ash. When  two  bodies  only  enter  into  chemieal 
anion,  the  affinity,  which  was  the  cause  of  it,  is  also 
termed  simple  or  single  elective  attraction;  thus  the 
solution  of  sugar  and  water  is  produced  by  simple  affi- 
nity, because  there  are  but  two  bodies. 

AFFLA'TUS.  (From  ad  and  flare , to  blow.)  A 
vapour  or  blast.  A species  of  erysipelas,  which  at- 
tacks people  suddenly,  so  named  upon  the  erroneous 
supposition  that  it  was  produced  by  some  unwhole- 
some wind  blowing  on  the  part. 

AFFUSION.  (Affusio ; from  ad,  and  f undo , to 
pour  upon.)  Pouring  a liquor  upon  something.  The 
affusion  of  cold  water,  or  pouring  two  or  three  quarts 
on  the  patient’s  head  and  body,  is  sometimes  practised 
by  physicians,  but  lately  introduced  by  Dr.  Currie,  of 
Liverpool,  in  the  treatment  of  typhus  fever,  and  which 
appears  to  possess  a uniformity  of  success,  which  we 
look  for  in  vain  in  almost  any  other  branch  of  medical 
practice.  The  remedy  consists  merely  in  placing  the 
patient  in  a bathing-tub,  or  other  convenient  vessel, 
and  pouring  a pailful  of  cold  water  upon  his  body ; 
after  which  he  is  wiped  dry,  and  again  put  to  bed.  It 
should  be  noted, 

First,  That  it  is  the  low  contagious  fever  in  which 
the  cold  affusion  is  to  be  employed : the  first  symp- 
toms of  which  are  a dull  headache,  with  restlessness 
and  shivering ; pains  in  the  back,  and  all  over  the  body, 
the  tongue  foul,  with  great  prostration  of  strength ; the 
headache  becoming  more  acute,  the  heat  of  the  body,  by 
the  thermometer,  102°  to  105°,  or  more ; general  restless- 
ness, increasing  to  delirium,  particularly  in  the  night. 

Secondly , That  it  is  in  the  early  stage  of  the  disease 
we  must  employ  the  remedy ; and  generally  in  the  state 
of  the  greatest  heat  and  exacerbation. 


AGA 

Thirdly,  It  is  affusion,  not  immersion,  that  must  be 
employed. 

Since  the  first  publication  of  Dr.  Currie’s  work,  the 
practice  of  affusion  has  been  extended  throughout 
England  ; and  its  efficacy  has  been  established  in  some 
stages  of  the  disease,  from  which  the  author  had  origin 
ally  proscribed  the  practice  of  it.  One  of  the  caution- 
ary injunctions  which  had  been  given  for  the  affusion 
of  cold  water  in  fever,  was  never  to  employ  it  in  cases 
where  the  patient  had  a sense  of  chilliness  upon  him , 
even  if  the  thermometer,  applied  to  the  trunk  of  the 
body,  indicated  a preternatural  degree  of  heat.  In  his 
last  edition  of  Reports,  however,  Dr.  Currie  has  given 
the  particulars  of  a case  of  this  kind,  in  which  the  cold 
affusion  was  so  managed  as  to  produce  a successful 
event. 

In  fevers  arising  from , or  accompanied  by,  topical 
inflammation,  his  experience  does  not  justify  the  use  of 
cold  affusion  ; though,  in  a great  variety  of  these  cases, 
the  warm  affusion  may  be  used  with  advantage. 
“ And,”  says  he,  “ though  I have  used  the  cold  af- 
fusion in  some  instances,  so  late  as  tire  twelfth  or  four- 
teenth day  of  contagious  fever,  with  safety  and  suc- 
cess, yet  it  can  only  be  employed,  at  this  advanced 
period,  in  the  instances  in  which  the  heat  keeps  up 
steadily  above  the  natural  standard,  and  the.  respira- 
tion continues  free.  In  such  cases,  I have  seen  it  ap- 
pease agitation  and  restlessness,  dissipate  delirium, 
and,  as  it  were,  snatch  the  patient  from  impending  dis- 
solution. But  it  is  in  the  early  stages  of  fever  (let  me 
again  repeat)  that  it  ought  always  to  be  employed,  if 
possible ; anywhere,  without  any  regard  to  the  heat  of 
the  patient,  it  is  had  recourse  to  in  the  iast  stage  of 
fever,  after  every  other  remedy  has  failed,  and  the  case 
appears  desperate,  (of  which  I have  heard  several  in- 
stances,) can  it  appear  surprising  that  the  issue  should 
sometimes  be  unfavourable  ?” 

Numerous  mmmunications  from  various  practition- 
ers, in  the  W est  and  East  Indies,  in  Egypt  and  Ame- 
rica, also  show  the  efficacy  of  affusion  in  the  raging 
fevers  of  hot  countries. 

AFORA.  ( From  a,  priv.  and  fores,  a door.)  Having 
a door  or  valve : applied  to  plants,  the  seed  vessel  of 
which  is  not  furnished  with  a valvule. 

AFTER-BIRTH.  See  Placenta. 

A'ga  cretensium.  • The  small  Spanish  milk-thistle. 

AGALACTA'TIO.  See  Agalactia. 

AGALA'CTIA.  (A yaXaicJia;  from  a,  priv.  and 
yaXa,  milk.)  Agalaxis ; Agalactio  ; Agalactatio.  A 
defect  of  milk  in  childbirth. 

AGALA'CTOS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  ya\a,  milk.) 
An  epithet  given  to  women  who  have  no  milk  when 
they  lie  in. 

AGALA'XIS.  See  Agalactia. 

Agallochum.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Agallochum  verum.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Aga'lluge.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Agallugum.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

AGALMATOLITE  See  Figurestone. 

AGARIC.  See  Agaricus. 

Agaricoides.  (From  ayapiicos,  the  agaric,  and 
ciXos,  resemblance.)  A species  of  fungus  like  the 
agaric. 

AGA'RICUS.  Agaric.  The  name  of  a genus  o{ 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Cryptogamia, 
Order,  Fungi.  The  plants  of  this  genus  appear  to  ap- 
proach nearer  to  the  nature  of  animal  matter  than  any 
other  productions  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  as,  beside 
hydrogen,  oxygen,  and  carbon,  they  contain  a consi 
derable  portion  of  nitrogen,  and  yield  ammonia  by  dis- 
tillation. Prof.  Proust  has  likewise  discovered  in 
them  the  benzoic  acid,  and  phosphate  of  lime. 

The  mushrooms,  remarkable  for  the  quickness  of 
their  growth  and  decay,  as  well  as  for  the  feetor  attend- 
ing their  spontaneous  decomposition,  were  unaccount- 
ably neglected  by  analytical  chemists,  though  callable 
of  rewarding  their  trouble,  as  is  evinced  by  the  recent 
investigations  and  discoveries  of  Messrs.  Vauquel.  i 
and  Braconnot.  The  insoluble  fungous  portion  of  tie 
mushroom,  though  it  resembles  woody  fibre  in  sorrn 
respects,  yet  being  less  soluble  than  it  in  alcalies,  and 
yielding  a nutritive  food,  is  evidently  a peculiar  pro- 
duct, to  which  accordingly  the  name  of  fungin  lias 
been  given.  Two  new  vegetable  acids,  the  boletic  and 
fungic,  were  also  fruits  of  these  researches 

The  six  following  species  have  been  submitted  to 
chemical  analysis  ; the  results  are  affixed  to  each.  1 


AGA 


AGA 


Agaricus  campestris,  an  ordinary  article  of  foo  ana- 
lyzed by  Vauquelin,  gave  the  following  constituents: 
1.  Adipocire.  On  expressing  the  juice  of  the  agaric, 
and  subjecting  the  remainder  to  the  action  of  boiling 
aikohol,  a fatty  matter  is  extracted,  which  falls  down 
in  white  Makes  as  the  aikohol  cools.  It  has  a dirty 
white  colour  ; a fatty  feel,  like  spermaceti ; and,  ex- 
posed to  heat,  soon  melts,  and  then  exhales  the  odour  of 
grease.  2.  An  oily  matter.  3.  Vegetable  albumen. 
4.  The  sugar  of  mushrooms.  5.  An  animal  matter 
soluble  in  water  and  aikohol:  on  being  heated,  it 
evolves  the  odour  of  roasting  meat,  like  osmazome. 
6.  An  animal  matter  not  soluble  in  aikohol.  ?•  Fungin. 
8.  Acetate  of  potash. 

2.  Agaricus  volvaceus  afforded  Braconnot  fungin, 
gelatin,  vegetable  albumen,  much  phosphate  of  potash, 
some  acetate  of  potash,  sugar  of  mushrooms,  a brown 
oil,  adipocire,  wax,  a very  fugacious  deleterious  matter, 
uncombined  acid,  supposed  to  be  the  acetic,  benzoic 
acid,  muriate  of  potash,  and  a deal  of  water ; in  all 
14  ingredients. 

3.  Agaric  us  acris,  or  piperatus,  was  found  by  Bra- 
connot, after  a minute  analysis,  to  contain  nearly  the 
same  ingredients  as  the  preceding,  without  the  wax 
and  benzoic  acid,  but  with  more  adipocire. 

4.  Agnricus  stypticus.  From  twenty  parts  of  this 
Braconnot  obtained  of  resin  and  adipocire  1.8,  fungin 
Hi.7,  of  an  unknown  gelatinous  substance,  a pStasli 
salt,  and  a fugacious  acrid  principle,  1.5. 

5.  Agaricus  bulbosus,  was  examined  by  Vauquelin, 
who  found  the  following  constituents : an  animal  mat- 
ter insoluble  in  aikohol ; osmazome  ; a soft  fatty  matter 
of  a yellow  colour  and  acrid  taste  ; an  acid  salt,  (not  a 
phosphate.)  The  insoluble  substance  of  the  agaric 
yielded  an  acid  by  distillation. 

b.  Agaricus  theogolus.  In  this,  Vauquelin  found 
sugar  of  mushrooms  ; osmazome  ; a bitter  acrid  fatty 
matter;  an  animal  matter  not  soluble  in  aikohol;  a 
salt  containing  a vegetable  acid. 

Agaricus  albus.  See  Boletus  laricis. 

Agaricus  campestris.  There  are  several  species 
of  the  agaric,  which  go  by  the  term  mushroom ; as  the 
Agaricus  chantarellus , deliciosus , violaceus , &c. ; but 
that  which  is  eaten  in  this  country  is  the  Agaricus 
campestris  of  Linnaeus.  Similar  to  it  in  quality  is  the 
champignon,  or  Agaricus  pratensis.  Broiled  with 
salt  and  pepper,  or  stewed  with  cream  and  some  aro- 
matic, they  are  extremely  delicious,  and,  if  not  eaten 
to  excess,  salubrious.  Great  care  should  be  taken  to 
ascertain  that  they  are  the  true  fungus,  and  not  those 
of  a poisonous  nature.  Catchup  is  made  by  throwing 
salt  on  mushrooms,  which  causes  them  to  part  with 
their  juice. 

Agaricus  chantarellus.  A species  of  fungus, 
esteemed  a delicacy  by  the  French.  Broiled  with  salt 
-and  pepper,  it  has  much  the  flavour  of  a roasted  cockle. 

Agaricus  chirurgorum.  See  Boletus  igniarius. 

Agaricus  cinnamomeus.  Brown  mushroom.  This 
species  of  agaric  is  of  a pleasant  smell.  When  broiled, 
it  gives  a good  flavour. 

Agaricus  deliciosus.  This  fungus,  well  seasoned, 
and  then  broiled,  has  the  exact  flavour  of  a roasted 
muscle.  It  is  in  season  in  September. 

Agaricus  mineralis  A mineral;  the  mountain 
milk,  or  mountain  meal,  of  the  Germans.  It  is  one  of 
the  purest  of  the  native  carbonates  of  lime,  found 
chiefly  in  the  clefts  of  rocks,  and  at  the  bottom  of  some 
lakes,  in  a loose  or  semi-indurated  form.  It  has  been 
used  internally  in  htemorrhages,  strangury,  gravel, 
and  dysenteries  ; and  externally  as  an  application  to  I 
old  ulcers,  and  weak  and  watery  eyes. 

[It  is  composed  of  very  minute  particles,  feebly 
cohering,  fine  or  soft  to  the  touch,  and  soiling  the 
fingers.  Its  texture  is  spongy,  and  hence  it  usually 
swims  for  a moment  when  placed  on  water.  Its  colour 
is  white,  either  pure,  or  tinged  with  yellow,  &.c.  It  is 
a very  pure  carbonate  of  lime. 

Agaric  mineral  undoubtedly  proceeds  from  the  gra- 
dual disintegration  of  other  varieties  of  carbonate  of 
lime,  and  is  deposited  from  water  in  the  cavities  or 
fissures  of  other  calcareous  rocks. 

Var.  1.  Fossil  Farina.  This  variety  differs  but 
little  from  that  just  described,  and  has  probably  a 
similar  origin.  It  appears  in  thin,  white  crusts,  light 
as  cotton,  and  very  easily  reducible  to  powder.  These 
crusts  are  attached  to  the  lateral  or  lower  surfaces  of 
beds  of  shell,  limestone,  Sec. — Clean.  Min.  A.] 


Agaricus  muscarius.  Bug  agaric;  so  called  from 
its  known  virtue  in  destroying  bugs.  This  reddish 
fungus  is  the  Agaricus — stipitatus,  lamellis  dimidiatis 
solitarus , stipite  volvato,  apice  cbilatato , basi  ovato , of 
Linnaeus.  It  is  not  much  known  in  this  country. 
Haller  reiates  that  six  persons  of  Lithuania  perished 
at  one  time,  by  eating  this  kind  of  mushroom ; and 
that  in  others  it  has  caused  delirium.  The  following 
account  from  Orfila,  of  the  effects  of  this  species  in 
the  animal  economy,  is  interesting.  Several  French 
soldiers  ate,  at  two  leagues  from  Polosck,  in  Russia, 
mushrooms  of  the  above  kind.  Four  of  them,  of  a 
robust  constitution,  who  conceived  themselves  proof 
against  the  consequences  under  which  their  feebler 
companions  were  beginning  to  suffer,  refused  obsti- 
nately to  take  an  emetic.  In  the  evening,  the  following 
symptoms  appeared.  Anxiety,  sense  of  suffocation, 
ardent  thirst,  intense  griping  pains,  a small  and  irregu- 
lar pulse,  universal  cold  sweats,  changed  expression  of 
countenance,  violet  tint  of  the  nose  and  lips,  general 
trembling,  fuetid  stools.  These  symptoms  becoming 
worse,  they  were  carried  to  the  hospital.  Coldness 
and  livid  colour  of  the  limbs,  a dreadful  delirium,  and 
acute  pains,  accompanied  them  to  the  last  moment. 
One  of  them  sunk  a few  hours  after  his  admission  into 
the  hospital ; the  three  others  had  the  same  fate  in  the 
course  of  the  night.  On  opening  their  dead  bodies,  the 
stomach  and  intestines  displayed  large  spots  of  inflam- 
mation and  gangrene;  and  putrefaction  seemed  ad- 
vancing very  rapidly.  It  is  employed  externally  to 
strumous  phagedenic,  and  fistulous  ulcers,  as  an  escha- 
rotic. 

Agaricus  piperatus.  The  plant  thus  named  by 
Linnaeus,  is  the  pepper  mushroom  ; also  called  peppei 
agaric.  It  is  the  Fungus  piperatus  albus , lacteo-succo 
tuvgens  of  Ray.  Fungus  albus  acris.  When  freely 
taken,  fatal  consequences  are  related  by  several  writers 
to  have  been  the  result.  When  this  vegetable  has  even 
lost  its  acrid  juice  by  drying,  its  caustic  quality  still 
remains. 

Agaricus  pratensis.  The  champignon  of  Hud 
son’s  Flora  Anglica.  This  plant  has  but  little  smell, 
and  is  rather  dry,  yet  when  broiled  and  stewed,  com- 
municates a good  flavour. 

Agaricus  violaceus.  Violet' mushroom.  This 
fungus  requires  much  broiling,  but  when  sufficiently 
done  and  seasoned,  it  is  as  delicious  as  an  oyster. 
Hudson’s  bulbosus  is  only  a variety  of  this. 

AGATE.  A mineral  found  chiefly  in  Siberia  and 
Saxony,  which  consists  of  chalcedony  blended  with 
variable  proportions  of  jasper,  amethyst,  quartz,  opal, 
heliotrope,  and  carnelion. 

[This  name  is  usually  applied  to  an  aggregate  of 
certain  quartzy  or  siliceous  substances,  intimately 
combined,  possessing  a great  degree  of  hardness,  a 
compact  and  fine  texture,  agreeable  colours,  variously 
arranged  and  intermixed,  and  susceptible  of  a good 
polish.  The  minerals  which  most  frequently  enter 
into  the  composition  of  agates,  are  common  chalce- 
dony, carnelion,  and  jasper,  to  which  are  sometimes 
added  flint,  homstone,  common  quartz,  amethyst, 
heliotrope,  and  opal.  The  chalcedony , however,  is  the 
most  common  and  abundant  ingredient,  and  may  fre- 
quently be  considered  the  base  of  the  agate ; in  fact, 
some  agates  are  composed  entirely  of  chalcedony  dif 
ferently  coloured.  In  most  cases,  only  two  or  three  ol 
the  aforementioned  ingredients  occur  in  the  samt 
agate  ; but,  though  variously  intermixed,  each  ingre- 
dient usually  remains  perfectly  distinct. 

Agates  exhibit  the  colours  already  mentioned,  while 
describing  the  simple  minerals  which  compose  them. 
But  these  colours  are  often  so  arranged,  as  to  present 
the  resemblance  of  some  well-known  object.  Hence 
arises  much  of  the  beauty  of  agates  ; and  hence  also 
most  of  the  distinctive  names  they  have  received  in 
the  arts.  Of  these  a few  will  be  mentioned.  1.  Onyx 
agate.  2.  Eyed  agate.  3.  Dotted  agate.  4.  Moss 
agate.  5.  Dendritic  agate.  6.  Spotted  or  figured 
agate.  7.  Breccia  agate.  8.  Fortification  agate.  9. 
Ribband  agate,  Sec.  Clean.  Min.  A.] 

[Agatized  wood.  This  substance  appears  to  have 
been  produced  by  the  process  common  y called  the  pe 
trifaction  of  wood.  It  is  essentially  composed  of  sili- 
ceous earth,  which  it  is  highly  probable  has  been  gra- 
dually deposited,  as  the  vegetable  matter  was  decom- 
posed and  removed.  Both  its  form  and  texture  indi- 
cate its  origin.  Thus  it  presents  more  or  less  distinctly, 


AGG 


AGR 


the  form  of  the  trunk,  branches,  roots,  or  knots,  which 
once  belonged  to  the  vegetable.  The  surface  is  rough 
or  longitudinally  striated.  Its  texture  is  fibrous,  and 
the  fibres  often  intertwined  like  those  of  wood.  Its 
longitudinal  fracture  is  usually  fibrous  or  splintery,  and 
its  cross  fracture  imperfectly  concboidal,  with  little 
or  no  lustre. — Cleav.  Min. 

Agatized  wood  has  been  found  in  various  parts  of 
the  United  States.  We  have  seen  in  the  possession  of 
Dr.  Mitchill  some  remarkable  specimens  of  siliceous 
petrifactions  or  agatized  madrepores,  echini,  &c.  from 
the  West-Indian  islands.  A.] 

AGE.  J. Etas . The  ancients  reckoned  six  stages  of 
life. 

1.  Pueritia , childhood,  which  is  to  the  fifth  year 
»f  our  age.  . 

2.  Adolescentia , youth,  reckoned  to  the  eighteenth, 
>nd  youth  properly  so  called,  to  the  twenty-fifth  year. 

3.  Juventns,  reckoned  from  the  twenty-fifth  to  the 
thirty-fifth  year. 

4.  Virilis  <Etas , manhood,  from  the  thirty-fifth  to 
the  fiftieth  year. 

5.  Senectus , old  age , from  fifty  to  sixty. 

6.  Crepita  xtas , decrepit  age,  which  ends  in  death. 

AGENE'SIA.  (A ycvyaia ; from  a,  neg.  y twain,  or 

yivopai,  to  beget.)  Male  sterility,  or  impotency  in 
man.  A term  employed  by  Vogel  and  Good.  See 
Nosology. 

A'GEr.  ( Ager , gri.  m. ; from  aypos-)  The  com- 
mon earth  or  soil. 

Ager  nature.  The  womb. 

AGE'RATUM.  (Ayvpa'Jov ; from  a,  priv.  and  yy 
pas,  senectus  : never  old,  evergreen  ; because  its  flow- 
ers preserve  their  beauty  a long  time.)  See  Achillxa 
ageratum. 

AGEU'STIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  ytvopai,  gusto, 
to  taste.)  Agheustia;  Apogeustia ; Apogeusis.  A 
defect  or  loss  of  taste.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
locales , and  order  dyscesthesioe  of  Cullen.  The  causes 
are  fever  or  palsy,  whence  he  forms  two  species : the 
latter  he  calls  organic , arising  from  some  affection  in 
the  membrane  of  the  tongue,  by  which  relishing  things, 
or  those  which  have  some  taste,  are  prevented  from 
coming  into  contact  with  the  nerves  ; the  other  atonic , 
arising  without  any  affection  of  the  tongue. 

AGGLUTINA'NTIA.  Adhesive  medicines  which 
heal  by  causing  the  parts  to  stick  together. 

AGGLUTINA  TION.  ( Agglutinatio ; from  ad 

and  glutino,  to  glue  together.)  The  adhesive  union  or 
sticking  together  of  substances. 

Aggluti'tio.  Obstruction  in  the  cesophagus,  or  a 
difficulty  in  swallowing. 

AGGREGATE.  (Aggregates  ; from  aggrego,  to 
assemble  together.)  Aggregated  or  added  together. 
1.  When  bodies  of  the  same  kind  are  united,  the  only 
consequence  is,  that  one  larger  body  is  produced.  In 
this  case,  the  united  mass  is  called  an  aggregate,  and 
does  not  differ  in  its  chemical  properties  from  the  bo- 
dies from  which  it  was  originally  made.  Elementary 
writers  call  the  smallest  parts  into  which  an  aggregate 
can  be  divided  without  destroying  its  chemical  pro- 
perties, integrant  parts.  Thus  the  integrant  parts  of 
common  salt  are  the  smallest  parts  which  can  be  con- 
ceived to  remain  without  change ; and  beyond  these, 
any  further  subdivision  cannot  be  made  without  deve- 
loping the  component  parts,  namely,  the  alcali  and  the 
acid  ; which  are  still  further  resolvable  into  their  con- 
stituent principles. 

2.  A term  applied  to  glands,  flowers,  gems,  See.  An 
aggregate  flower  is  one  which  consists  of  a number  of 
smaller  flowers  or  fructifications,  collected  into  a head 
by  means  of  some  part  common  to  them  all.  In  this 
view  aggregate  flowers  are  opposed  to  simple  flowers 
which  have  a single  fructification,  complete  in  its 
parts,  nine  of  which  are  common  to  many  flowers. 

Aggregate  gem.  A term  applied  in  botany  when 
two,  three,  or  even  more  gems  appear  at  the  same 
time. 

Aggregate  glands.  (From  aggrego , to  assemble 
together.)  Glandulx  aggregates.  An  assemblage  of 
glands,  as  those  on  some  parts  of  the  internal  surface 
of  the  intestines. 

Aggregate  peduncle.  Clustered  flower  stalks, 
so  called  when  several  grow  together,  as  in  verbascum 
nigrum. 

Aggregation , affinity  of.  See  Attraction. 

Aggregation , attraction  of.  See  Attraction. 


AGGREGATUS.  See  Aggregate . 

AGHEU'STIA.  See  Ageustia. 

AGITATO'RIA.  Convulsive  diseases. 

AGLACTA'TIO.  Defect  of  milk. 

AGLA'XIS.  Defect  of  milk. 

Aglium.  1.  A shining  tubercle  or  pustule  on  the 
face. 

2.  A white  speck  on  the  eye.  See  JEgides. 

A'gnacal.  A tree,  which,  according  to  Ray,  grows 
about  the  isthmus  of  Darien,  and  resembles  a pear- 
tree,  the  fruit  of  which  is  a great  provocative  to  venery. 

Agna'ta.  See  Adnata  tunica. 

AGNI'NA.  (Agnina ; from  agnus,  a lamb.) 
AStius  calls  one  of  the  membranes  which  involve  the 
foetus  by  the  name  of  membrana  agnina , which  he 
derives  from  its  tenderness.  See  Amnios. 

AGNOI'A.  (From  a,  priv.  and  yiviooKot,  to  know.) 
Forgetfulness. 

A GNUS.  A lamb. 

Agnus  castus.  (Called  agnus,  from  the  down 
upon  its  surface,  which  resembles  that  upon  a lamb’s 
skin  ; and  castus,  because  the  chaste  matrons,  at  the 
feasts  of  Ceres,  strewed  them  upon  their  beds  and  lay 
upon  them.)  See  Vitex  agnus  castus. 

T Agnus  tartaricus.  This  is  a vegetable  produc- 
tion, and  belongs  to  the  ferns.  It  is  the  root  of  the 
Polyijpdium  Barometz,  belonging  to  the  class  Crypto- 
gamia,  and  order  Felices  of  Linnaeus.  The  root  of  this 
plant  is  covered  with  a sort  of  orange-coloured  wool 
among  the  radicals,  and  has  a peculiar  oblong  figure, 
which,  when  put  in  a proper  position,  has  a remote 
resemblance  to  a sheep.  When  pulled  up  by  the  roots, 
the  stipes  of  the  leaves,  except  four,  are  cut  away,  and 
those  left  behind  are  trimmed  to  resemble  legs,  and 
this  Chinese  juggle  has  had  great  sway  in  the  world, 
and  has  deceived  even  Dr.  Darwin,  who  has  figured 
and  noticed  it  in  his  Botanic  Garden  as  a plant  grow- 
ing in  the  form  of  an  animal. — Notes  from  MitckilVs 
Lectures.  A.] 

Agomphi'asis.  A looseness  of  the  teeth. 

A'gone.  (A yovy ; from  a,  neg.  and  yovos,  offspring . 
so  called  because  it  was  supposed  to  cause  barrenness.) 
Henbane.  See  Hyosciamus  niger. 

AGO'NIA.  Sterility,  impotence,  agony. 

Agoni'sticum.  (Ayiavigucov ; from  aywviow,  to 
struggle.)  A term  used  by  ancient  physicians  to  sig- 
nify water  extremely  cold,  which  was  directed  to  be 
given  in  large  quantities,  in  acute  erysipelatous  fevers, 
with  a view  of  overpowering  or  struggling  with  the 
febrile  heat  of  the  blood. 

A'GONOS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  yovos,  or  yovy,  an 
offspring.)  Barren.  Hippocrates  calls  those  women 
so  who  have  no  children,  though  they  might  have  if 
the  impediment  were  removed. 

AGRE  STIS.  1.  Pertaining  to  the  field ; the  trivial 
name  of  many  plants. 

2.  In  the  works  of  some  old  writers,  it  expresses  an 
ungovernable  malignity  in  a disease. 

A'GRI A.  1.  A name  of  the  Ilex  aquifolium,  or  com 
mon  hollv. 

2.  A malignant  pustule,  of  which  the  ancient  sur 
geons,  and  particularly  Celsus,  describe  two  sorts  ; one 
which  has  been  so  called,  is  small,  and  casts  a rough- 
ness or.  redness  over  the  skin,  slightly  corroding  it ; 
smooth  about  its  centre ; spreads  slowly  ; and  is  of  a 
round  figure.  The  second  ulcerates,  with  a violent 
redness  and  corrosion,  so  as  to  make  the  hair  fall  off* ; 
it  is  of  an  unequal  form,  and  turns  leprous. 

AGRIA'MPELOS.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and  apne- 
\os,  a vine.)  The  wild  vine,  or  white  bryony.  See 
Bryonia. 

AGRIEL^E'A.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and  c\aia,  the 
olive-tree.)  The  oleaster,  or  wild  olive. 

AGRI'FOLIUM.  (From  axis,  a prickle,  and  0vA- 
\6v,  a leaf.)  The  holly-tree.  Which  should  rather  be 
called  acifolium,  from  its  prickly  leaves. 

AGRIMO'NIA.  ( Agrimonia , as,  f. ; from  aypos,  a 
field,  and  povos,  alone : so  named  from  its  being  the 
chief  of  all  wild  herbs.)  Agrimony. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaan 
system.  Class,  Dodecandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopteial  name  of  the  common  agri- 
mony. See  Agrimonia  cupatoria. 

Agrimonia  eupatoria.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  agrimony.  Agrimonai  of  the  pharma- 
copoeias ; Agrimonia — foliis  caulinis  pinnatis,  folio  tit 
unJique  serratis,  omnibus  minutis  inter stinctis,  frve 


AGU 


AIR 


tibus  hispidis  of  Linnaeus.  It  is  common  in  fields  about 
hedges  and  shady  places,  flowering  in  June  and  July. 
It  has  been  principally  regarded  in  the  character  of  a 
mild  astringent  and  corroborant,  and  many  authors 
recommend  it  as  a deobstruent,  especially  in  hepatic 
and  other  visceral  obstructions.  Chomel  relates  two 
instances  of  its  successful  use  in  cases  where  the  liver 
was  much  enlarged  and  indurated.  It  has  been  used 
with  advantage  in  haemorrhagic  affections,  and  to  give 
tone  to  a lax  and  weak  state  of  the  solids.  In  cutane- 
ous disorders,  particularly  in  scabies,  we  have  been 
told  that  it  manifests  great  efficacy.  For  this  purpose 
it  was  given  infused  with  liquorice  in  the  form  of  tea ; 
but,  according  to  Alston,  it  should  be  always  exhibited 
in  the  state  of  powder.  It  is  best  used  while  fresh,  and 
the  tops,  before  the  flowers  are  formed,  possess  the 
most  virtue.  Cullen  observes  that  the  agrimony  has 
some  astringent  powers,  but  they  are  feeble  ; and  pays 
little  attention  to  what  has  been  said  in  its  favour. 

AGRIMONY.  See  Agrimonia. 

Agrimony  hemp.  See  Bidens  tripartita. 

AGRIOCA'RDAMUM.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and 
KapSapov , the  nasturtium.)  Sciatica  cresses,  or  wild 
garden  cress. 

AGRIOCA'STANUM.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and 
Kas-avov,  the  chestnut.)  Earth  of  pig-nut.  See  Bu- 
nium  bulbo-castanum. 

AGRIOCI'N ARA.  (From  aypiof,  wild,  and  Kivapa, 
artichoke.)  Wild  artichoke  ; not  so  good  as  the  culti- 
vated for  any  purpose.  See  Cinara  scolymus. 

AGRIOCOCCIME'LA.  (From  aypios , wild,  kokkus , 
a berry,  and  pyXea,  an  apple-tree.)  The  Prunas  spi- 
nosa  of  Linnaeus. 

AGRIOME'LA.  The  crab-apple. 

A'grion.  Agriophyllon.  The  peucedanum  silaus, 
or  hog's  fennel. 

AGRIOPASTINA'CA.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and 
pastinaca,  a carrot.)  Wild  carrot,  or  parsnip. 

AGRIOPHY  LLON.  See  Agrion. 

AGRIORI'GANUM.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and  opi- 
yavov,  marjoram.)  Wild  marjoram.  See  Origanum 
Xidgare. 

AGRIOSELI'NUM.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and  <7rXt- 
Vov,  parsley.)  Wild  parsley.  Lee  Bmyrnium  olusar 
trum. 

AGRIOSTA'RI.  (From  aypios,  wild,  and  j-aij, 
wheat.)  Field  corn,  a species  of  Triticuui. 

AGRIPA'LMA.  (From  aypios , wild,  and  a aXpa,  a 
palm-tree.)  Agripalma  gallis.  The  herb  mother- 
wort, or  wild-palm. 

Agripa'lma  gallis.  See  Agripalma. 

AGRI'PPiE.  Those  children  which  are  born  with 
their  feet  foremost  are  so. called,  because  that  was  said 
to  be  the  case  with  Agrippa  the  Roman,  who  was 
named  ab  agropartu , from  his  difficult  birth. 

A'GRIUM.  An  impure  sort  of  natron.  The  purer 
sort  was  called  halmyrhaga. 

AGROSTEMMA.  (Aypov  q-eppa,  the  garland  of 
the  field.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class  De- 
candria ; Order,  Pentagynia.  Cockle. 

Agrostemma  githago.  This  plant  has  been 
called  Nigellastrum  ; Pseudo  v.clanthium ; I/ychnis 
segetum  major  ; Githago;  NigeUa  officinarum  ; I.ych- 
noidcs  segetum.  Cockle.  It  has  no  particular  virtues, 
and  is  fallen  into  disuse. 

AGROSTIS.  (From  aypos,  a field.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Triandria ; Order,  Digynia. 
Bentgrass. 

AGRU'MINA.  Leeks ; wild  onions. 

AGRY'PNIA.  (From  a , priv.  and  v-ttvos,  sleep.) 
Watchfulness;  sleeplessness.  The  name  of  a genus 
in  Good’s  Nosology.  See  Nosology. 

AGR  YPNOCO'MA.  (From  aypvnvos,  without  sleep, 
and  Kiopa,  a lethargy.)  A lethargic  kind  of  watchful- 
ness, in  which  the  patient  is  stupidly  drowsy,  and  yet 
cannot  sleep. 

AGUE.  See  Febris  Intermittens . 

Ague  cake.  The  popular  name  for  a hard  tumour, 
most  probably  the  spleen  on  the  left  side  of  the  belly, 
lower  than  the  false  ribs  in  the  region  of  the  spleen, 
said  to  be  the  effect  of  intermittent  fevers.  However 
frequent  it  might  have  been  formerly,  it  is  now  very 
rare,  and  although  then  said  to  be  owing  tc  the  use  of 
bark,  it  is  now  less  frequent  since  the  bark  has  been 
generally  employed. 

Ague  drop.  A medicine  sold  for  the  cure  of  agues, 
composed  of  arsenite  of  potassa  in  solution  in  water. 


The  regular  substitute  for  the  quack  medicine  called 
the  tasteless  ague  drop,  which  lias  cured  thousands  of 
that  complaint,  is  the  liquor  arsenicalis,  or  Fowler’s 
arsenical  solution. 

Ague-free.  A name  given  by  some  to  sassafras,  on 
account  of  its  supposed  febrifuge  virtue. 

AGUSTINE.  (From  a,  priv.  and  yu^ia,  taste,  that 
is  tasteless.)  AugUstina.  A new  earth  discovered  in 
the  Saxon  beryl,  or  beryl  of  Georgien  Stadt,  (a  stone 
greatly  resembling  the  beryl  of  Siberia)  by  Professor 
Tromsdorfl’  of  Erfurth,  in  Germany,  to  which  he  has 
given  the  name  of  agustine,  on  account  of  the  pro- 
perty of  forming  salts  which  are  nearly  destitute  of 
taste.  This  earth  is  white  and  insipid  : when  moist- 
ened with  water,  it  is  somewhat  ductile,  but  is  not 
soluble  in  that  fluid.  Exposed  to  a violent  heat,  it  be- 
comes extremely  hard,  but  acquires  no  taste.  It  com- 
bines with  acids,  forming  salts  which  have  little  or  no 
taste.  It  does  not  combine  either  in  the  humid  or  dry 
way  with  alcalies,  or  with  their  carbonates.  It  retains 
carbonic  acid  but  feebly.  It  dissolves  in  acids  equally 
well  after  having  been  hardened  by  exposure  to  heat, 
as  when  newly  precipitated.  With  sulphuric  acid  it 
forms  a salt  which  is  insipid,  and  scarcely  soluble,  but 
an  excess  of  acid  renders  it  soluble,  and  capable  of 
crystallizing  in  stars.  With  an  excess  of  phosphoric 
acid  it  forms  a very  soluble  salt.  With  nitrous  acid  it 
forms  a salt  scarcely  soluble. 

Agutiguepoo'bi  braziliensis.  An  Indian  name 
of  the  arrow-root.  See  Maranta. 

[AIGUE  MARINE,  called  by  some  aqua  marina ; one 
of  the  precious  stones  which  has  been  found  in  various 
parts  of  the  United  States.  It  is  a name  sometimes 
employed  to  designate  the  beryl.  A.] 

AIMATEI'A.  A black  bilious  and  blood-like  dis- 
charge from  the  bowels. 

AIMORRHQE'A.  See  Hcemorrhagia. 

AIMO'RRHOIS.  See  Hoemorrhois. 

AIPATHEI'A.  (From  aei,  always,  and  zsaQos,  a 
disease.)  Diseases  of  long  continuance. 

Ai'pi.  Aipima  coxera.  Aipipoca.  Indian  words 
for  Cassada.  See  Jatroplia  manihot. 

AIR.  This  term  was,  till  lately,  used  as  the  generic 
name  for  such  invisible  and  exceedingly  rare  fluids  as 
possess  a very  high  degree  of  elasticity,  and  are  not 
condensible  into  the  liquid  state  by  any  degree  of  cold 
hitherto  produced  ; but  as  this  term  is  commonly  em- 
ployed to  signify  that  compound  of  aeriform  fluids 
which  constitutes  our  atmosphere,  it  has  been  deemed 
advisable  to  restrict  it  to  this  signification,  and  to  em- 
ploy as  the  generic  term  the  word  Gas,  for  the  different 
kinds  of  air,  except  what  relates  to  our  atmospheric 
compound. 

Air,  atmospheric.  “ The  immense  mass  of  perma- 
nently elastic  fluid  which  surrounds  the  globe  we  in 
habit,”  says  Dr.  Ure,  “ must  consist  of  a general 
assemblage  of  every  kind  of  air  which  can  be  formed 
by  the  various  bodies  that  compose  its  surface. 
Most  of  these,  however,  are  absorbed  by  water;  a 
number  of  them  are  decomposed  by  combination  with 
each  other;  and  some  of  them  are  seldom  disengaged 
in  considerable  quantities  by  the  processes  of  nature. 
Hence  it  is  that  the  lower  atmosphere  consists  chiefly 
of  oxygen  and  nitrogen,  together  with  moisture  and 
the  occasional  vapours  or  exhalations  of  bodies.  The 
upper  atmosphere  seems  to  be  composed  of  a large  pro- 
portion of  hydrogen,-  a fluid  of  so  much  less  specific 
gravity  than  any  other,  that  it  must  naturally  ascend 
to  the  highest  place,  where,  being  occasionally  set  on 
fire  by  electricity,  it  appears  to  be  the  cause  of  the 
aurora  borealis  and  fire-balls.  It  may  easily  be  un- 
derstood, that  this  will  only  happen  on  the  confines  of 
the  respective  masses  of  common  atmospherical  air, 
and  of  the  inflammable  air;  that- the  combustion  will 
extend  progressively,  though  rapidly,  in  flashings  from 
the  place  where  it  commences  ; and  that  when  by  any 
means  a stream  of  inflammable  air,  in  its  progress  to- 
ward the  upper  atmosphere,  is  set  on  fire  at  one  end, 
its  ignition  may  be  much  more  rapid  than  what  hap- 
pens higher  up,  where  oxygen  is  wanting,  and  at  Ihe 
same  time  more  definite  in  its  figure  and  progression, 
so  as  to  form  the  appearance  of  a fire-ball. 

That  the  air  of  the  atmosphere  is  so  transparent  as 
to  be  invisible  except  by  the  blue  colour  it  reflects 
when  in  very  large  masses,  as  is  seen  in  the  sky  or 
region  above  us,  or  in  viewing  extensive  landscapes, 
that  it  is  without  smell,  except  that  of  electricity, 

37 


AIR 


AIR 


which  it  sometimes  very  manifestly  exhibits ; altogether 
without  taste,  and  impalpable  ; not  condensible  by  any 
degree  of  cold  into  the  dense  fluid  state,  though  easily 
changing  its  dimensions  with  its  temperature ; that  it 
gravitates  and  is  highly  elastic  ; are  among  the  nume- 
rous observations  and  discoveries  which  do  honour  to 
the  sagacity  of  the  philosophers  of  the  seventeenth 
century.  They  likewise  knew  that  this  fluid  is  indis- 
pensably necessary  to  combustion,  but  no  one,  except 
the  great,  though  neglected,  John  Mayow,  appears  to 
have  formed  any  proper  notion  of  its  manner  of  act- 
ing in  that  process. 

The  air  of  the  atmosphere,  like  other  fluids,  appears 
to  be  capable  of  holding  bodies  in  solution.  It  takes 
up  water  in  considerable  quantities,  with  a diminution 
of  its  own  specific  gravity : from  which  circumstance, 
as  well  as  from  the  consideration  that  water  rises  very 
plentifully  in  the  vaporous  state  in  vocuo , it  seems  pro- 
bable, that  the  air  suspends  vapour,  not  so  much  by  a 
real  solution,  as  by  keeping  its  particles  asunder,  and 
preventing  their  condensation.  Water  likewise  dis- 
solves or  absorbs  air. 

Mere  heating  or  cooling  does  not  affect  the  chemical 
properties  of  atmospherical  air ; but  actual  combus- 
tion, or  any  process  of  the  same  nature,  combines  its 
oxygen,  and  leaves  its  nitrogen  separate.  Whenever 
a process  of  this  kind  is  carried  on  in  a vessel  contain- 
ing atmospherical  air,  which  is  enclosed  either  by  in- 
verting the  vessel  over  mercury,  or  by  stopping  its 
aperture  in  a proper  manner,  it  is  found  that  the  pro- 
cess ceases  after  a certain  time  ; and  that  the  remain- 
ing air  (if  a combustible  body  capable  of  solidifying  the 
oxygen,  such  as  phosphorus,  have  been  employed,)  has 
lost  about  a fifth  part  of  its  volume,  and  is  of  such  a 
nature  as  to  be  incapable  Of  maintaining  any  combus- 
tion for  a second  time,  or  of  supporting  the  life  of  ani- 
mals. From  these  experiments  it  is  clear,  that  one  of 
the  following  deductions  must  be  true  : — 1.  The  com- 
bustible body  has  emitted  some  principle,  which,  by 
combining  with  the  air,  has  rendered  it  unfit  for  the 
purpose  of  further  combustion ; or,  2.  It  has  absorbed 
part  of  the  air  which  was  fit  for  that  purpose,  and  has 
left  a residue  of  a different  nature  ; or,  3.  Both  events 
have  happened  ; namely,  that  the  pure  part  of  the  air 
has  been  absorbed,  and  a principal  has  been  emitted, 
which  has  changed  the  original  properties  of  the  re- 
mainder. 

The  facts  must  clear  up  these  theories.  The  first 
induction  cannot  be  true,  because  the  residual  air  is 
not  only  of  less  bulk,  but  of  less  specific  gravity,  than 
before.  The  air  cannot  therefore  have  received  so 
much  as  it  has  lost.  The  second  is  the  doctrine  of  the 
philosophers  who  deny  the  existence  of  phlogiston,  or 
a principle  of  inflammability ; and  the  third  must  be 
adopted  by  those  who  maintain  that  such  a principle 
escapes  from  bodies  during  combustion.  This  residue 
was  called  phlogisticated  air,  in  consequence  of  such 
an  opinion. 

In  the  opinion  that  inflammable  air  is  the  phlogiston, 
it  is  not  necessary  to  reject  the  second  inference  that 
the  air  has  been  no  otherwise  changed  than  by  the 
mere  subtraction  of  one  of  its  principles ; for  the  pure 
or  vital  part  of  the  air  may  unite  with  inflammable  air 
supposed  to  exist  in  a fixed  state  in  the  combustible 
body  ; and  if  the  product  of  this  union  still  continues 
fixed,  it  is  evident,  that  the  residue  of  the  air,  after 
combustion)  will  be  the  same  as  it  would  have  been  if 
the  vital  part  had  been  absorbed  by  any  other  fixed 
body.  Or,  if  the  vital  air  be  absorbed  while  inflam- 
mable air  or  phlogiston  is  disengaged,  and  unites 
with  the  agriform  residue,  his  residue  will  not  be 
heavier  than  before,  unless  the  inflammable  air  it  has 
gained  exceeds  in  weight  the  vital  air  it  has  lost ; and 
if  the  inflammable  air  falls  short  of  that  weight,  the 
residue  will  be  lighter. 

These  theories  it  was  necessary  to  mention ; but  it 
has  been  sufficiently  proved  by  various  experiments, 
that  combustible  bodies  take  oxygen  from  the  atmos- 
phere, and  leave  nitrogen  ; and  that  when  these  two 
fluids  are  again  mixed  in  due  proportions,  they  com- 
pose a mixture  not  differing  from  atmospherical  air. 

The  respiration  of  animals  produces  the  same  effect 
on  atmospherical  air  as  combustion  does,  and  their 
constant  heat  appears  to  be  an  effect  of  the  same 
nature.  When  an  animal  is  included  in  a limited 
quantity  of  atmospherical  air,  it  dies  as  sooq  as  the 
.oxygen  is  consumed ; and  no  other  air  will  maintain 


I animal  life  but  oxygen,  or  a mixture  which  contains 
it.  Pure  oxygen  maintains  the  life  of  animals  much 
longer  than  atmospherical  air,  bulk  for  bulk. 

It  is  to  be  particularly  observed,  however,  that,  in 
many  cases  of  combustion,  the  oxygen  of  the  air,  in 
combining  with  the  combustible  body,  produces  a 
compound,  not  solid,  or  liquid,  but  aeriform.  The  re- 
sidual air  will  therefore  be  a mixture  of  the  nitrogen 
of  the  atmosphere  with  the  consumed  oxygen,  con- 
verted into  another  gas.  Thus,  in  burning  charcoal, 
the  carbonic  acid  gas  generated,  mixes  with  the  resi- 
dual nitrogen,  and  makes  up  exactly,  when  the  effect 
of  heat  ceases,  the  bulk  of  the  original  air.  The 
breathing  of  animals,  in  like  manner,  changes  the  oxy- 
gen into  carbonie  acid  gas,  without  altering  the  atmos- 
pherical volume. 

There  are  many  provisions  in  nature  by  which  the 
proportion  of  oxygen  in  the  atmosphere,  which  is  con- 
tinually consumed  in  respiration  and  combustion,  is 
again  restored  to  that  fluid.  In  fact  there  appears,  as 
far  as  an  estimate  can  be  formed  of  the  great  and  ge- 
neral operations  of  nature,  to  be  at  least  as  great  an 
emission  of  oxygen  as  is  sufficient  to  keep  the  general 
mass  of  the  atmosphere  at  the  same  degree  of  purity. 
Thus,  in  volcanic  eruptions,  there  seems  to  be  at  least 
as  much  oxygen  emitted  or  extricated  by  fire  from  va- 
rious minerals,  as  is  sufficient  to  maintain  the  combus- 
tion, and  perhaps  even  to  meliorate  the  atmosphere. 
And  in  the  bodies  of  plants  and  animals,  which  appear 
in  a great  measure  to  derive  their  sustenance  and  aug- 
mentation from  the  atmosphere  and  its  contents,  it  is 
found  that  a large  proportion  of  nitrogen  exists.  Most 
plants  emit  oxygen  in  the  sunshine,  from  which  it  is 
highly  probable  that  they  imbibe  and  decompose  the  air 
of  the  atmosphere,  retaining  carbon,  and  emitting  the 
vital  part.  Lastly,  if  to  this  we  add  the  decomposition 
of  water,  there  will  be  numerous  occasions  in  which 
this  fluid  will  supply  us  with  disengaged  oxygen ; while, 
by  a very  rational  supposition,  its  hydrogen  may  be 
considered  as  having  entered  into  the  bodies  of  plants 
for  the  formation  of  oils,  sugars,  mucilages,  &c.,  from 
which  it  may  be  again  extricated. 

To  determine  the  respirability  or  purity  of  air,  it  is 
evident  that  recourse  must  be  had  to  its  comparative 
efficacy  in  maintaining  combustion,  or  some  other 
equivalent  process. 

From  the  latest  and  most  accurate  experiments,  the 
proportion  of  oxygen  in  atmospheric  air  is  by  measure 
about  21  per  cent. ; and  it  appears  to  be  very  neatly 
the  same,  whether  it  be  iu  this  country  or  on  the  coast 
of  Guinea,  on  low  plains  or  lofty  mountains,  or  even 
at  the  height  of  7250  yards  above  the  level  of  the  sea, 
as  ascertained  by  Gay  Lussac,  in  his  afirial  voyage  in 
September,  1805.  The  remainder  of  the  air  is  nitro- 
gen, with  a small  portion  of  aqueous  vapour,  amount- 
ing to  about  one  per  cent,  in  the  driest  weather,  and  a 
still  less  portion  of  carbonic  acid,  not  exceeding  a 
thousandth  part  of  the  whole. 

As  oxygen  and  nitrogen  differ  in  specific  gravity  in 
the  proportion  of  135  to  121,  according  to  Kirwan, 
and  of  139  to  120,  according  to  Davy,  it  has  been  pre- 
sumed, that  the  oxygen  would  be  more  abundant  in 
the  lower  regions,  and  the  nitrogen  in  the  higher,  if 
they  constituted  a mere  mechanical  mixture,  which 
appears  contrary  to  the  fact.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
has  been  urged,  that  they  cannot  be  in  the  state  of 
chemical  combination,  because  they  both  retain  their 
distinct  properties  unaltered,  and  no  change  of  tem- 
perature or  density  takes  place  on  their  union.  But 
perhaps  it  may  be  said,  that,  as  they  have  no  repug- 
nance to  mix  with  each  other,  as  oil  and  water  have, 
the  continual  agitation  to  which  the  atmosphere  is  ex- 
posed, may  be  sufficient  to  prevent  two  fluids,  differ- 
ing not  more  than  oxygen  and  nitrogen  in  gravity, 
from  separating  by  subsidence,  though  simply  mixed. 
On  the  contrary,  it  may  be  argued,  that  to  say  chemical 
combination  cannot  take  place  without  producing  new 
properties,  which  did  not  exist  before  in  the  compo- 
nent parts,  is  merely  begging  the  question  ; tor  though 
this  generally  appears  to  be  the  case,  and  often  in  a 
vejy  striking  manner,  yet  combination  does  not  al- 
ways produce  a change  of  properties,  as  appears  in 
M.  Biot’s  experiments  with  various  substances;  of 
which  we  may  instance  water,  the  refraction  of  which 
is  precisely  the  mean  of  that  of  the  oxygen  and  hydro- 
gen, which  are  indisputably  combined  in  it. 

To  get  rid  of  the  difficulty,  Mr.  Dalton  of  Manchester 


AIR 


AIZ 


framed  an  ingenious  hypothesis,  that  the  particles  of 
different  gases  neither  attract  nor  repel  each  other ; so 
that  one  gas  expands  by  the  repulsion  of  its  own  par- 
ticles, without  any  more  interruption  from  the  pre- 
sence of  another  gas,  than  if  it  were  in  a vacuum. 
This  would  account  for  the  state  of  atmospheric  air,  it 
is  true ; but  it  does  not  agree  with  certain  facts.  In 
the  case  of  the  carbonic  acid  gas  in  the  Grotto  del 
•Cano,  and  ever  the  surface  of  brewers’  vats,  why  does 
not  this  gas  expand  itself  freely  upward,  if  the  superin- 
cumbent gases  do  not  press  upon  it?  Mr.  Dalton 
'himself,  too,  instances  as  an  argument  for  his  hypo- 
thesis, that  oxygen  and  hydrogen  gases,  when  mixed 
by  agitation,  do  not  separate  on  standing.  But  why 
should  either  oxygen  or  hydrogen  require  agitation,  to 
diffuse  it  through  a vacuum,  in  which,  according  to  Mr. 
Dalton,  it  is  placed  ? 

The  theory  of  Berthollet  appears  consistent  with  all 
the  facts,  and  sufficient  to  account  for  the  phenome- 
non. If  two  bodies  be  capable  of  chemical  combina- 
tion, their  particles  must  have  a mutual  attraction  for 
each  other.  This  attraction,  however,  may  be  so  op- 
posed by  concomitant  circumstances,  that  it  may  be 
diminished  in  any  degree.  Thus  we  know,  that  the 
affinity  of  aggregation  may  occasion  a body  to  eombine 
slowly  with  a substance  for  which  it  has  a powerful 
affinity,  or  even  entirely  prevent  its  combining  with  it ; 
the  presence  of  a third  substance  may  equally  pre- 
vent the  combination ; and  so  may  the  absence  of  a 
certain  quantity  of  caloric.  But  in  all  these  cases  the 
attraction  of  the  particles  must  subsist,  though  diminisn- 
ed  or  counteracted  by  opposing  circumstances.  Now 
we  know  that  oxygen  and  nitrogen  are  capable  of 
combination;  their  particles,  therefore,  must  attract 
each  other ; but  in  the  circumstances  in  which  they 
are  placed  in  our  atmosphere,  that  attraction  is  pre- 
vented from  exerting  itself,  to  such  a degree  as  to  form 
them  into  a chemical  compound,  though  it  operates 
with  sufficient  force  to  prevent  their  separating  by  their 
difference  of  specific  gravity.  Thus  the  state  of  the 
atmosphere  is  accounted  for,  and  every  difficulty  obvi- 
ated, without  any  new  hypothesis. 

The  exact  specific  gravity  of  atmospherical  air, 
compared  to  that  of  water,  is  a very  nice  and  impor- 
tant problem.  By  reducing  to  60°  Fahr.  and  to  30 
inches  of  the  barometer,  the  results  obtained  with  great 
care  by  Biot  and  Arago,  the  specific  gravity  of  atmos- 
pherical air,  appears  to  be  0.001220,  water  being  re- 
presented by  1.000000.  This  relation  expressed  frac- 
tionally is  1-820,  or  water  is  820  times  denser  than  at- 
mospherical air.  Mr.  Rice,  in  the  77th  and  78th  num- 
bers of  the  Annals  of  Philosophy,  deduces  from  Sir 
George  Shuckburgh’s  experiments  0.00120855  for  the 
specific  gravity  of  air.  This  number  gives  water  to 
air  as  827.437  to  1.  If  with  Mr.  Rice  we  take  the  cubic 
inch  of  water=252.525  gr.,  then  100  cubic  inches  of 
air  by  Biot’s  experiments  will  weigh  30.808  grains,  and 
by  Mr.  Rice's  estimate  30.519.  He  considers  with  Dr. 
Prout  the  atmosphere  to  be  a compound  of  4 volumes 
of  nitrogen,  and  1 of  oxygen ; the  specific  gravity  of 
the  first  being  to  that  of  the  second  as  1.1111  to  0.9722. 
Hence 

0.8  vol.  nitr.  sp.gr 0.001166=0.000933 

0.2  oxy 0.001340=0.000268 


0.001201 

The  numbers  are  transposed  in  the  Annals  of  Phi- 
losophy by  some  mistake. 

Biot  and  Arago  found  the  specific  gravity  of  oxygen 

to  be  1.10359 

and  that  of  nitrogen 0.96913 

air  being  reckoned,  1.00000 

Or  compared  to  water  as  unity, — 

Nitrogen  i3  0.001182338 

Oxygen,  0.001346379 

And  0.8  nitrogen =0.00094587 

0.2  oxygen  =0.00026927 


0.00121514 

And  0.79  nitrogen =0.000934 

0.21  oxygen  =0.000283 


0.001217 

A number  which  approaches  very  nearly  to  the  result 
Of  experiment.  Many  analogies,  it  must  be  confessed, 
favour  Dr.  Prout’s  proportion^;  but  the  greater  num- 


ber of  experiments  on  the  composition  and  density  of 
the  atmosphere  agree  with  Biot’s  results.  Nothing 
can  decide  these  fundamental  chemical  proportions, 
except  a new,  elaborate,  and  most  minutely  accurate 
series  of  experiments.  We  shall  then  know  whether 
the  atmosphere  contains  in  volume  20  or  21  per  cent, 
of  oxygen.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

Air , alcaline.  See  Ammonia. 

Air , azotic.  See  Nitrogen. 

Air,  fixed.  See  Carbonic,  acid. 

Air,  fluoric.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

Air,  hepatic.  See  Hydrogen  sulphuretted. 

Air,  heavy  inflammable.  See  Carburetted  hydrogen. 

Air , inflammable.  See  Hydrogen. 

Air,  marine.  See  Muriatic  acid. 

Air,  nitrous.  See  Nitrous. 

Air,  phlogisticated.  See  Nitrogen. 

Air,  phosphoric.  See  Hydrogen  phosphuretted. 

Air,  sulphureous.  See  Sulphureous  acid. 

Air,  vital.  See  Oxygen. 

AISTHETE'RIUM.  (From  aiaOavoyai,  to  perceive.) 
The  sensorium  commune,  or  common  sensory,  or  seat, 
or  origin  of  sensation. 

A IX  LA  CHAPE'LLE.  Called  Aken  by  the  Ger- 
mans. A town  in  the  south  of  France,  where  there  is 
a sulphureous  water,  Therm®  Aquis-granensis,  the 
most  striking  feature  of  which,  and  what  is  almost 
peculiar  to  it,  is  the  unusual  quantity  of  sulphur  it  con- 
tains: the  whole,  however,  is  so  far  united  to  a gase- 
ous basis,  as  to  be  entirely  volatilized  by  heat ; so  that 
none  is  left  in  the  residuum  after  evaporation.  In  co- 
lour it  is  pellucid,  in  smeil  sulphureous,  and  in  taste 
saline,  bitterish,  and  rather  alcaline.  The  temperature 
of  these  waters  varies  considerably,  according  to  the 
distance  from  the  source  and  the  spring  itself.  In  the 
well  of  the  hottest  bath,  it  is,  according  to  Lucas,  136°, 
Monet,  146° ; at  the  fountain  where  it  is  drank,  it  is 
112°  This  thermal  water  is  much  resorted  to  on  the 
Continent  for  a variety  of  complaints.  It  is  found 
essentially  serviceable  in  the  numerous  symptoms  of 
disorders  in  the  stomach  and  biliary  organs,  that  follow 
a life  of  high  indulgence  in  the  luxuries  of  the  table ; 
in  nephritic  cases,  which  produce  pain  in  the  loins, 
and  thick  mucous  urine  with  difficult  micturition.  As 
the  heating  qualities  of  this  water  are  as  decided  as  in 
any  of  the  mineral  springs,  it  should  be  avoided  in 
cases  of  a general  inflammatory  tendency,  in  hectic 
fever  and  ulceration  of  the  lungs ; and  in  a disposition 
to  active  htemorrhagy.  As  a hot  bath,  this  water  is 
even  more  valuable  and  more  extensively  employed 
than  as  an  internal  remedy.  The  baths  of  Aix  la  Cha- 
pelle  may  be  said  to  be  more  particularly  medicated 
than  any  other  that  we  are  acquainted  with.  They 
possess  both  temperature  of  any  degree  that  can  be 
borne;  and  a strong  impregnation  with  sulphur  in  its 
most  active  forms  ; and  a quantity  of  alcali,  which  is 
sufficient  to  give  it  a very  soft  soapy  feel,  and  to  ren- 
der it  more  detergent  than  common  water.  From  these 
circumstances,  these  baths  will  be  found  of  particular 
service  in  stiffness  and  rigidity  of  the  joints  and  liga- 
ments, which  is  left  by  the  inflammation  of  gout  and 
rheumatism,  and  in  the  debility  of  palsy,  where  the 
highest  degree  of  heat  which  the  skin  can  bear  is  re- 
quired. The  sulphureous  ingredient  renders  it  highly 
active  in  almost  every  cutaneous  eruption,  and  in  ge- 
neral in  every  foulness  of  the  skin  ; and  here  the  inter- 
nal use  of  the  water  should  attend  that  of  the  bath 
These  waters  are  also  much  employed  in  the  distress- 
ing debility  which  follows  a long  course  of  mercury 
and  excessive  salivation.  Aken  water  is  one  of  the 
few  natural  springs  that  are  hot  enough  to  be  employed 
as  a vapour  bath,  without  the  addition  of  artificial 
heat.  It  is  employed  in  cases  in  which  the  hot  bath 
is  used ; and  is  found  to  be  a remarkably  powerful 
auxiliary  in  curing  some  of  the  worst  species  of  cuta- 
neous disorders.  With  regard  to  the  dose  of  this  wa- 
ter to  be  begun  with,  or  the  degree  of  heat  to  lathe  in, 
it  is  in  all  cases  best  to  begin  with  small  quantities  and 
low  degrees  of  heat,  and  gradually  increase  them, 
agreeably  to  the  effects  aqd  constitution  of  the  patient. 
The  usual  time  of  the  year  for  drinking  these  waters 
is  from  the  beginning  of  May  to  the  middle  of  June,  or 
from  the  middle  of  August  to  the  latter  end  of  Sep 
tember. 

Aizo'on.  (From  aei,  always,  and  to  live.)  Aizo- 
um.  1.  An  evergreen  aquatic  plant,  like  the  aloe,  said 
to  possess  antiscorbutic  virtues. 


89 


ALA 


2.  The  house  leek.  See  Sempervivum  tectorum. 
Aizoum.  See  Aizoon. 

Aja'va.  An  ancient  name  of  a seed  used  in  the  East 
as  a remedy  for  the  colic. 

AJUGA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  gvyov,  a yoke.)  1. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  creeping  bugloss. 
See  Ajuga  pyramidalis. 

Ajuga  pyramidalis.  Consolida  media.  Bugula. 
Upright  bugloss.  Middle  consound.  This  plant,  Aju- 

£a — caule  tetragovo  foliis  radicalibus  maximis , of 
innaeus,  possesses  subadstringent  and  bitter  qualities : 
and  has  been  recommended  in  phthisis , aphtha,  and 
cynanche. 

[AKANTICONE.  The  nanje  of  a mineral  synony- 
mous with  the  epidote  of  Haiiy,  pistazit  of  Werner, 
glassy  actynolite  of  Kirwan,  &c.  A.] 

A'KENSIDE,  Mark.  An  English  physician,  born 
at  Newcastle-upon-Tyne,  in  1721 ; but  more  distin- 
guished as  a poet,  especially  for  his  “ Pleasures 
of  the  Imagination.”  After  studying  at  Edinburgh, 
and  graduating  at  Leyden,  he  settled  in  practice  ; but 
though  appointed  physician  to  the  queen,  as  well 
as  to  St.  Thomas’s  Hospital,  he  is  said  not  to  have 
been  very  successful.  He  died  of  a putrid  fever,  in 
his  49th  year.  He  has  left  a Dissertation  on  Dysentery 
in  Latin,  admired  for  its  elegance  ; and  several  small 
Tracts  in  the  Philosophical  and  London  Medical 
Transactions. 

AL.  The  Arabian  article,  which  signifies  the ; it  is 
applied  to  a word  by  way  of  eminence,  as  the  Greek  o 
is.  The  Easterns  express  the  superlative  by  adding 
God  thereto,  as  the  mountain  of  God , for  the  hignest 
mountain ; and  it  is  probable  that  Al  relates  to  the 
word  Alla,  God : so  Alchemy,  may  be  the  chemistry  of 
God,  or  the  most  exalted  perfection  of  chemical 
science. 

A'LA.  1.  The  wing  of  a bird. 

2.  The  arm- pit,  so  called  because  it  answers  to  the 
pit  under  the  wing  of  a bird. 

3.  An  accidental  part  of  the  seed  of  a plant ; consist- 
ing of  a membraneous  prolongation  from  the  side  of  the 
seed,  and  distinguished  by  the  number  into 

Semina  monoterygia : one-winged,  as  in  Bignonia. 
Dipterygia : two-winged,  as  in  Betula. 

Tripterygia : three-winged. 

Tetrapterygia : four-winged. 

Polypterigia : many-winged,  or  Molendinacea : 

windmill-winged,  for  so  the  many-winged  seeds  of 
some  umbelliferous  plants  are  termed. 

4.  The  two  lateral  or  side  petals  of  a papilionaceous 
or  butterfly-shaped  flower. 

Ala  auris.  The  upper  part  of  the  external  ear. 
Ala  interna  minor.  See  Kymphat. 

Ala  nasi.  1.  The  cartilage  of  the  nose  which 
forms  the  outer  part  of  the  nostrils. 

2.  The  sides  of  the  nose  are  called  ala:  nasi. 

Ala  vespertilionis.  That  part  of  the  ligament 
of  the  womb,  which  lies  between  the  tubes  and  the 
ovarium  ; so  called  from  its  resemblance  to  the  wing 
of  a bat. 

ALABASTER.  Among  the  stones  which  are  known 
by  the  napie  of  marble,  and  have  been  distinguished 
by  a considerable  variety  of  denominations  by  statua- 
ries and  others,  whose  attention  is  more  directed  to 
their  external  character  and  appearance  than  their 
component  parts,  alabasters  are  those  which  have  a 
greater  or  less  degree  of  imperfect  transparency,  a gra- 
nular texture,  are  softer,  take  a duller  polish  than 
marble,  and  are  usually  of  a white  colour.  Some 
stones,  however,  of  a veined  and  coloured  appearance, 
nave  been  considered  as  alabasters,  from  their  possess- 
ing the  first-mentioned  criterion  ; and  some  transpa- 
rent and  yellow  sparry  stones  have  also  received  this 
appellation. 

[Alabaster  is  a variety  of  compact  gypsum.  It  is 
found  in  compact  masses  of  a fine  grain,  whose  frac- 
ture is  even,  or  splintery,  and  nearly  or  quite  dull,  or 
sometimes  a little  foliated.  It  is  nearly  opaque,  and 
Us  colours  are  commonly  white  or  gray,  sometimes 
shaded  with  yellow,  red,  See.  or  variously  mingled. 
Its  specific  gravity  is  sometimes  only  1.87.  It  is  some- 
times in  concretions. 

Compact  gypsum,  and  some  varieties  of  granular 
gypsum,  are  employed  in  sculpture  and  architecture, 
undei  the  name  of  alabaster.  The  same  name  is  also 
given  to  certain  varieties  of  carbonate  of  lime.  It  may 

40 


ALB 

be  well  to  employ  the  term  gypseous  and  calcareous 

alabaster. — Clean  Min. 

The  cabinet  of  the  New-York  Lyceum  of  Natural 
History  contains  some  very  fine  specimens  of  gypseous 
alabaster,  from  various  parts  of  the  United  States.  A.] 

ALiEFO  RMlS.  (Alaformis ; from  Ala,  a wing, 
and  format,  resemblance.)  Wing-like.  Any  thing  like 
a Ving. 

Alai'a  phthi'sis.  (From  a\aio$,  blind,  and  i pdiaig, 
a wasting.)  A consumption  from  a flux  of  humours 
from  the  head. 

[ALALITE.  A rare  mineral,  consisting  principally 
of  silex,  magnesia,  and  lime,  found  in  the  form  of  pris- 
matic crystals,  otherwise  called  diopside.  A.] 

Alandahla.  The  Arabian  for  bitter.  The  bitter 
apple.  See  Cucumis  colocynthis. 

Alanfu'ta.  An  Arabian  name  of  a vein  between 
the  chin  and  lower  lip,  which  was  formerly  opened  to 
prevent  foetid  breath. 

A l Ain  a ossa.  The  wing-like  processes  of  the  sphe- 
noid bone. 

ALARIS.  {Alaris  ; from  ala,  awing.)  Formed 
like,  or  belonging  to  a wing. 

Alaris  externus.  Musculus  alaris  externus.  A 
name  of  the  external  pterygoid  muscle  ; so  called  be- 
cause it  takes  its  rise  from  the  wing-like  process  of  the 
sphenoid  bone. 

Alaris  vena.  The  innermost  of  the  three  veins  in 
the  bend  of  the  arm. 

Alate'rnus.  A species  of  rhamnus. 

ALA  TUS.  (From  ala,  a wing.)  Winged.  ] Ap- 
plied to  steins  and  leaf-stalks,  when  the  edges  or  Rngfos 
are  longitudinally  expanded  into  leaf-like  borders;  as 
in  JEnopordium  acantkiuni ; Lathyrus  latifoliu  , SfC. 
and  the  leaf-stalk  of  the  orange  tribe,  citrus,  &.c 

2.  One  who  has  prominent  scapula;  like  tin  <vings 
of  birds. 

Albagras  nigra.  So  Avicenna  names  tin  Lepra 
ichthyosis , or  Lepra  G'rcecorum. 

ALBAME'NTUM.  (From  albus,  white.,  The 
white  of  an  egg. 

Alba'num.  Urinous  salt. 

Alba'tio.  (From  albus,  white.)  Albificati  The 
calcination  or  whitening  of  metals. 

A'LBICANS.  (From  albico , to  grow  whiti  ) In- 
clining to  white.  Whitish. 

Albica'ntia  co'rpora.  Corpora  albicanlia  WiL- 
lisii.  Two  small  round  bodies  or  projections  f.  /m  the 
base  of  the  brain,  of  a white  colour. 

ALBIN.  A mineral  found  in  Bohemia;  su  called 
from  its  white  colour. 

Albi'num.  See  Gnaphalium  dioicum. 

ALBI'NUS  Bernard  Siegfred,  son  of  a physician, 
and  professor  at  Leyden  of  the  same  name,  v*  as  born 
near  the  end  of  the  17th  century,  and  prosecuted  his 
studies  with  so  much  zeal  and  success,  that  he  was 
appointed,  on  the  recommendation  of  Boerhaave,  pro- 
fessor of  anatomy  and  surgery,  when  only  20  years 
old.  This  office  he  filled  for  half  a century,  and  ac- 
quired a greater  reputation  than  any  of  his  predeces- 
sors. He  has  left  several  valuable  anatomical  works; 
and  particularly  very  accurate  descriptions,  and  plates 
of  the  muscles  and  bones,  which  are  still  highly 
esteemed. 

A'LBORA.  A sort  of  itch ; or  rather  of  leprosy. 
Paracelsus  says,  it  is  a complication  of  the  morphew, 
serpigo,  and  leprosy.  When  cicatrices  appear  in  the 
face  like  the  serpigo,  and  then  turn  to  small  blisters  of 
the  nature  of  the  morphew,  it  is  the  albora.  It  termi- 
nates without  ulceration,  but  by  foetid  evacuations  in 
the  mouth  and  nostrils ; it  is  also  seated  in  the  root  of 
the  tongue. 

ALBUCA'SIS,  an  Arabian  physician  and  surgeon 
of  considerable  merit,  who  lived  about  the  beginning 
of  the  twelfth  century.  He  has  copied  much  from 
preceding  writers,  but  added  also  many  original  ob- 
servations ; and  his  works  may  be  still  perused  with 
pleasure.  He  insisted  on  the  necessity  of  a surgeon 
being  skilled  in  anatomy  to  enable  him  to  operate  with 
success,  as  well  as  acquainted  with  the  materia  me- 
dica,  that  he  may  apply  his  remedies  with  propriety. 
He  appears  to  have  extracted  polypi  from  the  nose,  and 
performed  the  operation  of  bronchotomy.  He  is  the 
first  who  left  distinct  descriptions  and  delineations  of 
the  instruments  used  in  surgery^  and  of  the  manner  of 
employing  them. 

ALB  UGI'NEA.  {Albuginia  ; from  albus,  white : so 


ALB 


called  on  account  of  its  white  colour.)  The  name  of  a 
membrane  of  the  eye  and  of  the  testicle. 

Albuginea  oouli.  See  Adnata  tunica. 

Albuginea  testis.  Tunica  albuginea  testis.  The 
innennost  coat  of  the  testicle.  A s.rong,  white,  and 
dense  membrane,  immediately  covering  the  body  or 
substance  of  the  testicle.  On  its  outer  surface  it  is 
smooth,  but  rough  and  uneven  on  the  inner.  See 
Testicle. 

ALBU'GO.  A white  opacity  of  the  cornea  of  the 
eye.  The  Greeks  named  it  leucoma;  the  Latins,  albugo , 
nebula , and  nubecula.  Some  ancient  writers  have 
called  it  pterygium , janua  oculi,  onyx , unguis , and 
tegides.  It  is  a variety  of  Cullen’s  Caligo  corneai. 

[Albugo,  (from  albus,  white.)  It  is  a white  opacity 
of  the  cornea,  not  of  a superficial  kind,  but  affecting 
the  very  substance  of  this  membrane.  A.] 

Album  balsamum.  The  balsam  of  copaiba.  See 
Copaiba. 

Album  GrjEcum.  The  white  dung  of  dogs.  It  was 
formerly  applied  as  a discutient,  to  the  inside  of  the 
throat,  in  quinsies,  being  first  mixed  with  honey  ; me- 
dicines of  this  kind  have  long  since  justly  sunk  into 
disuse. 

Album  olus.  See  Valeriana  locusta. 

A LB  U'  MEN.  Albumine.  1.  Coagulable  lymph. 
This  substance,  which  derives  its  name  from  the  Latin 
for  the  white  of  an  egg,  in  which  it  exists  abundantly, 
and  in  its  purest  natural  state,  is  one  of  the  chief  con- 
stituent principles  of  all  the  animal  solids.  Beside  the 
white  of  egg,  it  abounds  in  the  serum  of  blood,  the  vi- 
treous and  crystalline  humours  of  the  eye,  and  the  fluid 
of  dropsy.  Fourcroy  claims  to  himself  the  honour  of 
having  discovered  it  in  the  green  feculae  of  plants  in 
general,  particularly  in  those  of  the  cruciform  order,  in 
very  young  ones,  and  in  the  fresh  shoots  of  trees,  though 
Rouelle  appears  to  have  detected  it  there  long  before. 
Vauquelin  says  it  exists  also  in  the  mineral  water  of 
Ploinbieres. 

Seguin  has  found  it  in  remarkable  quantity  in  such 
vegetables  as  ferment  without  yest,  and  afford  a vinous 
liquor;  and  from  a series  of  experiments,  he  infers,  that 
albumen  is  the  true  principle  of  fermentation,  and  that 
its  action  is  more  powerful  in  proportion  to  its  solu- 
bility, three  different  degrees  of  which  he  found  it  to 
possess. 

The  chief  characteristic  of  albumen  is  its  coagula- 
bility by  the  action  of  heat.  If  the  white  of  an  egg  be 
exposed  to  a heat  of  about  134°  F.  white  fibres  begin  to 
appear  in  it,  and  at  160°  it  coagulates  into  a solid  mass 
In  a heat  not  exceeding  212  it  dries,  shrinks,  and  as- 
sumes the  appearance  of  horn.  It  is  soluble  in  cold 
water  before  it  has  been  coagulated,  but  not  after ; and 
when  diluted  with  a very  large  portion,  it  does  not 
coagulate  easily.  Pure  alcalies  dissolve  if,  even  after 
coagulation.  It  is  precipitated  by  muriate  of  mercury, 
nitro-muriate  of  tin,  acetate  of  lead,  nitrate  of  silver, 
muriate  of  gold;  infusion  of  galls  and  tannin.  The 
acids  and  metallic  oxydes  coagulate  albumen.  On  the 
addition  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  it  becomes 
black,  and  exhales  a nauseous  smell.  Strong  muriatic 
acid  gives  a violet  tinge  to  the  coagulum,  and  at  length 
becomes  saturated  with  ammonia.  Nitric  acid,  at  70° 
F.  disengages  from  it  abundance  of  azotic  gas ; and  if 
the  heat  be  increased,  prussic  acid  is  formed ; after 
which  carbonic  acid  and  carburetted  hydrogen  are  i 
evolved,  and  the  residue  consists  of  water  containing  a 
little  oxalic  acid,  and  covered  with  a lemon-coloured 
fat  oil.  If  dry  potassa  or  soda  be  triturated  with  albu- 
men, either  liquid  or  solid,  ammoniacal  gas  is  evolved, 
and  the  calcination  of  the  residuum  yields  an  aicaline 
prusslate. 

On  exposure  to  the  atmosphere  in  a moist  state,  albu  - 
men passes  at  once  to  the  state  of.  putrefaction. 

Solid  albumen  maybe  obtained  by  agitating  white  of 
egg  with  ten  or  twelve  times  its  weight  of  alcohol. 
This  seizes  the  water  which  held  the  albumen  in  solu- 
tion ; and  this  substance  is  precipitated  under  the  form 
of  white  flocks  or  filaments,  which  cohesive  attraction 
renders  insoluble,  and  which  consequently  may  be 
freely  washed  with  water.  Albumen  thus  obtained  is 
like  fibrine,  solid,  white,  insipid,  inodorous,  denser  than  | 
water,  and  without  action  or  vegetable  colours  It  j 
dissolves  in  potassa  and  soda  more  easily  than  fibrine ; 
but  in  acetic  acid  and  ammonia,  with  more  difficulty.  | 
When  these  two  animal  principles  are  separately  dis-  J 
solved  in  potassa,  muriatic  acid  added  to  the  albumi-  j 


ALB 

nous,  does  not  disturb  the  solution,  but  it  produces  a 
cloud  in  the  other. 

Fourcroy  and  several  other  chemists  have  ascribed 
the  characteristic  coagulation  of  albumen  by  heat  to  its 
oxygenation.  But  cohesive  attraction  is  the  real  cause 
of  the  phenomenon.  In  proportion  as  the  temperature 
rises,  the  particles  of  water  and  albumen  recede  from 
each  other,  their  affinity  diminishes,  and  then  the  albu- 
men precipitates.  However,  by  uniting  albumen  with 
a large  quantity  of  water,  we  diminish  its  coagulating 
property  to  such  a degree,  that  heat  renders  the  solution 
merely  opalescent.  A new-laid  egg  yields  a soft  coagu- 
lum by  boiling ; but  when,  by  keeping,  a portion  of  the 
water  has  transuded  so  as  to  leave  a void  space  within 
the  shell,  the  concentrated  albumen  affords  a firm  co- 
agulum. 

An  analogous  phenomenon  is  exhibited  by  acetate  of 
alumina,  a solution  of  which,  being  heated,  gives  a pre- 
cipitate in  flakes,  which  re-dissolve  as  the  caloric  which- 
separated  the  particles  of  acid  and  base  escapes,  or  as 
the  temperature  falls.  A solution  containing  1-10  of 
dry  albumen  forms  by  heat  a solid  coagulum ; but  when 
it  contains  only  1-15,  it  gives  a glary  liquid.  One-thou- 
sandth part,  however,  on  applying  heat,  occasions  opa- 
lescence. Putrid  white  of  egg,  and  the  pus  of  ulcers, 
have  a similar  smell.  According  to  Dr.  Bostock,  a 
drop  of  a saturated  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate  let 
fall  into  water  containing  1-2000  of  albumen,  occasions 
a milkiness  and  curdy  precipitate.  On  adding  a slight 
excess  of  the  mercurial  solution  to  the  albuminous 
liquid,  and  applying  heat,  the  precipitate  which  falls, 
being  dried,  contains  in  every  7 parts  5 of  albumen. 
Hence  that  salt  is  the  most  delicate  test  of  this  animal 
product.  The  yellow  pitchy  precipitate  occasioned  by 
tannin,  is  brittle  when  dried,  and  not  liable  to  putrefac- 
tion. But  tannin,  or  infusion  of  galls,  is  a much  nicer 
test  of  gelatin  than  of  albumen. 

The  cohesive  attraction  of  coagulated  albumen 
makes  it  resist  putrefaction.  In  this  state  it  may  be 
kept  for  weeks  under  water  without  suffering  change. 
By  long  digestion  in  weak  nitric  acid,  albumen  seems 
convertible  into  gi'atin.  By  the  analysis  of  Gay  Lussac 
and  Th4riard.  100  parts  of  albumen  are  formed  of  52.883 
carbon,  23.872  oxygen,  7.540  hydrogen,  15  705  nitrogen  ; 
or,  in  other  terms,  of  52.883  carbon,  27.127  oxygen  and 
hydrogen,  in  the  proportion  for  constituting  water, 
15.705  nitrogen,  and,  4.285  hydrogen  in  excess.  The 
negative  pole  of  a voltaic  pile  in  high  activity  coagu- 
lates albumen;  but  if  the  pile  be  feeble,  coagulation 
goes  on  only  at  the  positive  surface.  Albumen,  in  such 
a state  of  concentration  as  it  exists  in  serum  of  blood, 
can  dissolve  some  metallic  oxydes,  particularly  the  pro- 
toxide of  iron.  Orfila  has  found  white  of  egg  to  be  the 
best  antidote  to  the  poisonous  effects  of  corrosive  subli- 
mate on  the  human  stomach.  As  albumen  occasions 
precipitates  with  the  solutions  of  almost  every  metallic 
salt,  probably  it  may  act  beneficially  against  other  spe- 
cies of  miner al  poison. 

From  its  coagulability  albumen  is  of  great  use  in  cla- 
rifying liquids. 

It  is  likewise  remarkable  for  the  property  of  render- 
ing leather  supple,  for  which  purpose  a solution  of 
whites  of  eggs  in  water  is  used  by  leather-dressers.— >- 
Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

2.  In  botany,  the  term  albumen  is  applied  to  a fari- 
naceous, fleshy,  or  horny  substance,  which  makes  up 
the  chief  bulk  of  some  seeds,  as  grapes,  corn,  palms, 
lilies,  never  rising  out  of  the  ground,  nor  assuming  the 
office  of  leaves,  being  destined  solely  to  nourish  the  ger- 
minating embryo,  till  its  roots  perform  their  office.  In 
the  date  palm,  this  part  is  nearly  as  hard  as  stone,  in 
mirabilis  it  is  like  wheat-flour.  It  is  wanting  in  seve- 
ral tribes  of  plants,  as  those  with  compound  or  with 
cruciform  flowers,  and  the  cucumber  or  gourd  kind, 
according  to  Gardner.  Some  few  leguminous  plants 
have  it,  and  a great  number  of  others,  which,  like  them, 
have  cotyledons  besides.  We  are  not,  however,  to 
suppose,  that  so  important  an  organ  is  altogether  want- 
ing, even  in  the  above-mentioned  plants.  The  farina- 
ceous matter  destined  to  nourish  their  embryos,  is  un- 
questionably lodged  in  their  cotyledons,  the  sWeet  taste 
of  which,  as  they  begin  to  germinate,  often  evinces  its 
presence,  and  that  it  has  undergone  the  same  change  as 
in  barley.  The  albumen  of  the  nutmeg  is  remarkable 
for  its  eroded  variegated  appearance,  and  aromatic 
quality ; the  cotyledons  of  this  plant  are  very  small. — 
Smith. 


41 


ALE 


ALG 


Albumen  ovi.  Albugo  ovi ; Albumen  albor  ovi  ; 
Ovi  albus  liquor;  Ovi  candidum  albumentum ; Cla- 
ret a.  The  white  of  an  egg. 

ALBURNUM.  (From  albus , white.)  The  soft 
white  substance,  which,  in  trees,  is  found  between  the 
liber,  or  inner  bark,  and  the  wood.  In  process  of  time 
it  acquires  solidity,  becoming  itself  the  wood  While 
soft,  it  performs  a very  important  part  of  the  func- 
tions of  growth,  which  ceases  when  it  becomes 
hard.  A new  circle  of  alburnum  is  annually  formed 
over  the  old,  so  that  a transverse  section  of  the  trunk 
presents  a pretty  correct  register  of  the  tree’s  age, 
each  zone  marking  one  year.  From  its  colour  and 
comparative  softness,  it  has  been  called  by  some 
writers,  the  adeps  arborum.  The  alburnum  is  found 
in  largest  quantities  in  trees  that  are  vigorous.  In  an 
oak  six  inches  in  diameter,  this  substance  is  nearly 
equal  in  bulk  to  the  wood. 

A LBUS.  White.  This  term  is  applied  to  many 
parts,  from  their  white  colour ; as  linca  alba , lepra 
alba , macula  alba , Sec. 

A'LCAHEST.  An  Arabic  word  to  express  a uni- 
versal dissolvent,  which  was  pretended  to  by  Paracel- 
sus and  Van  Helmont.  Some  say  that  Paracelsus  first 
used  this  word,  and  that  it  is  derived  from  the  German 
words  al  and  geest , i.  e.  all  spirit:  and  that  Van  Hel- 
mont borrowed  the  word,  and  applied  it  to  his  inven- 
tion, which  he  called  the  universal  dissolvent. 

A'LCALI.  (Arabian.)  This  word  is  spelt  indif- 
ferently with  a c or  a k.  See  Alkali. 

ALCALIZATION.  The  impregnating  any  spritu- 
ous  fluid  with  an  alcali. 

ALCANNA.  (Indian  word.)  See  Anchusa. 

A lcaol.  The  solvent  for  the  preparation  of  the 
philosopher’s  stone. 

ALCARRAZES.  A species  of  porous  pottery 
made  in  Spain. 

ALCEA.  ( Alcea , a.  f. ; from  oXkt),  strength.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Monadelphia ; Order,  Polyandria.  Hollyhock. 

Alcea  ASgyptiaca  villosa.  See  Hibiscus  Abel- 
moschus. 

Alcea  Indica.  See  Hibiscus  Abclmoschus. 

Alcea  rosea.  Common  hollyhock.  The  flowers 
of  this  beautiful  tree  are  said  to  possess  adstringent 
and  mucilaginous  virtues.  They  are  seldom  used  me- 
dicinally. 

Alchemia.  See  Alchemy. 

ALCHEMI'LLA.  ( Alchemilla , <e.  f.  So  called  be- 
cause it  was  celebrated  by  the  old  alchemists.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linna;an 
system.  Class,  Tetrandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  La- 
dies’ mantle. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  plant  called  la- 
dies’ mantle.  Sea  Alchemilla  vulgaris. 

Alchemilla  vulgaris.  Ladies’  mantle.  This 
plant,  Alchemilla: — Fcliis  lobatis  of  Linnaeus,  was 
formerly  esteemed  as  an  adstringent  in  haemorrhages, 
fluor  albus,  &c.  given  internally.  It  is  fallen  into 
disuse. 

ALCHEMIST.  One  who  practises  the  mystical 
art  of  alchemy. 

A'LCHEMY.  Alchemia ; Alchimia ; Alkima.  That 
branch  of  chemistry  which  relates  to  the  transmuta- 
tion of  metals  into  gold ; — the  forming  a panacea  or 
universal  remedy, — an  alcahest,  or  universal  men- 
struum,— a universal  ferment,  and  many  other  lab- 
surdities. 

Alchimia.  See  Alchemy. 

ALCHIMILLA.  See  Alchemilla. 

A'lchitron.  1.  Oil  of  Juniper. 

2.  Also  the  name  of  a dentifrice  of  Messue. 

A'LCHYMY.  Alchemy. 

A'LCOHOL.  S eeAlkohol. 

ALCYO'NIUM.  It  is  difficult  to  say  what  the 
Greeks  called  by  this  name.  Dioscorides  speaks  of 
five  sorts  of  it.  It  is  a spongy  plant-like  substance, 
met  with  on  the  sea-shore,  of  different  shapes  and  co- 
lours. This  bastard  sponge  is  calcined  with  a little 
salt,  as  a dentifrice,  and  is  used  to  remove  spots  on 
the  skjn.. 

ALDER.  See  Betula  alnus. 

Alder,  berry-bearing.  See  Rhamnus  frangula. 

Alder  wine.  See  Betula  alnus. 

Aldrum.  See  Ahum. 

Aldum-  See  Alium. 

ALE.  Cerevisia:  Liquor  cereris  ; Vinum  hordea- 

42 


ceum.  A fermented  liquor  made  from  malt  and  hops, 
and  chiefly  distinguished  from  beer,  made  from  the 
same  ingredients,  by  the  quantity  of  hops  used  therein, 
which  is  greater  in  beer,  and  therefore  renders  the 
liquor  more  bitter,  and  fitter  for  keeping.  Ale,  when 
well  fermented,  is  a wholesome  beverage,  but  seems 
to  disagree  with  those  subject  to  asthma,  or  any  dis- 
order of  the  respiration,  or  irregularity  in  the  digestive 
organs.  The  old  dispensatories  enumerate  several 
medicated  ales,  such  as  cerevisia  ozydorica , for  the 
eyes  ; cerevisia  antiarthritica , against  the  gout ; ce- 
phalica , epileptica,  Sec.  See  Beer. 

ALEI'ON.  (AXrtov,  copious.)  Hippocrates  uses 
this  word  as  an  epithet  for  water. 

ALEI'PHA.  (From  aXutpo),  to  anoint.)  Any  me- 
dicated oil. 

ALELAI'ON.  (From  aXs,  bait,  and  thaiov , oil.) 
Oil  beat  up  with  salt,  to  apply  to  tumours.  Galen  fre 
quently  used  it. 

ALE'MA.  (From  a.  priv.  and  Xq/o?,  hunger.) 
Meat,  food,  or  any  thing  that  satisfies  the  appetite. 

ALE'MBIC.  fAlembicus.  Some  derive  it  from  the 
Arabian  particle  al , and  ap6i\  ; from  aySaiviu,  to  as- 
cend. Avicenna  declares  it  to  be  Arabian.)  Moors- 
head.  A chemical  utensil  made  of  glass,  metal,  oj 
earthenware,  and  adapted  to  receive  volatile  products 
from  retorts.  It  consists  of  a body  to  which  is  fitted  a 
conical  head,  and  out  of  this  head  descends  laterally  a 
beak  to  be  inserted  into  the  receiver. 

ALE'MBROTH.  (A  Chaldee  word,  importing  the 
key  of  art.)  1.  Some  explain  it  as  the  name  of  a salt, 
sal  mercurii , or  sal  philosophorum  V artis  ; others  say 
it.  is  named  dlembrot  and  sal  fusionis  or  sal  fizionis 
Alembroth  desiccatum  is  said  to  be  the  sal  tartari , 
hence  this  word  seems  to  signify  alkaline  salt,  which 
opens  the  bodies  of  metals  by  destroying  their  sulphurs, 
and  promoting  their  separation  from  the  ores.  From 
analogy,  it  is  supposed  to  have  the  same  effect  in  con- 
quering obstructions  and  attenuating  viscid  fluids  in 
the  human  body. 

2.  A peculiar  earth,  probably  containing  a fixed 
alkali,  found  in  the  island  of  Cyprus,  has  also  this  ap- 
pellation. 

3.  A solution  of  the  corrosive  sublimate,  to  which 
the  muriate  of  ammonia  has  been  added,  is  called  sal 
alembroth. 

Alefe'nsis.  A species  of  ash-tree,  which  produces 
manna. 

A'les.  (From  aXf,  salt.)  A compound  salt. 

Aleu'ron.  (From  aXaw,  to  grind.)  Meal. 

AL  EXANDERS  See  Smyrnium  olusatrum. 

Alexanders , round-leaved.  See  Smyrnium  perfo- 
liatum. 

ALEXA'NDRIA.  ( Alexandria .)  Alexandrina. 

The  bay-tree,  or  laurel,  of  Alexandria. 

Alexa'ndrium.  Emplastrum  viride.  A plaster 
described  by  Celsus,  made  with  wax,  alum,  Sec. 

ALEXICA'CUM.  (From  aXr^w,  to  drive  away, 
dnd  kokov,  evil.)  An  antidote  or  amulet,  to  resist 
poison. 

ALEXIPHA'RMIC.  (Alexipharmicum ; from  aXe\(o, 
to  expel,  and  QappaKOv,  a poison.)  Antipharmicum ; 
Caco-alexiteria.  A medicine  supposed  to  preserve  the 
body  against  the  power  of  poisons,  or  to  correct  or  ex- 
pel those  taken.  The  ancients  attributed  this  pro- 
perty to  some  vegetables  and  even  waters  distilled  from 
them.  The  term,  however,  is  now  very  seldom  used. 

ALEXIPYRE'TICUM.  (From  aX^w,  to  drive 
away,  and  zsvqeros,  fever.)  A febrifuge. 

ALEXIPY'RETOS.  Alexipyretum.  A remedy  for 
a fever. 

Ale'xir.  An  elixir. 

ALEXITE'RIUM.  ( Alexiterium , i.  n. ; from  aXH-w, 
to  expel,  and  mpem,  to  preserve.)  A preservative  me- 
dicine against  poison,  or  contagion. 

ALGA.  A sea-weed. 

Alga:.  1.  The  name  of  an  order  or  division  of  the 
class  Cryptogamia  in  the  Linnaean  system  of  plants. 
The  name  of  one  of  the  seven  families  or  natural 
tribes  into  which  the  whole  vegetable  kingdom  is  di- 
vided by  Linnaeus  in  his  Philosophia  Botanica.  He 
defines  them  plants,  the  roots,  leaves,  and  stems  of  which 
are  all  in  one.  Under  this  description  are  compre- 
hended all  the  sea-weeds  and  some  other  aquatic  plants. 

2.  In  the  sexual  system  of  plants  Alga  constitute 
the  third  order  of  the  class,  Cryptogamia.  From  their 
admitting  of  little  distinction  of  root,  leaf,  or  stem,  and 


ALI 


ALT 


Che  parts  of  their  flowers  being  equally  incapable  of 
description,  the  genera  are  distinguished  by  the  situ- 
ation of  what  is  supposed  to  be  the  flowers  or  seeds, 
or  by  the  resemblance  which  the  whole  plant  bears  to 
some  other  substance. 

The  parts  of  fructification  of  the  algae  are  in  caly- 
cules  of  which  there  are  three  varieties 

1.  Pelta , target ; a flat,  oblong  fruit,  seen  in  the  Li- 
chen caninus. 

2.  Scutella , the  saucer;  a round,  hollow,  or  flat 
fruit,  as  in  Lichen  stellaris. 

3.  Tuberculum , the  tubercle ; a hemispherical  fruit, 
observable  in  Lichen  geographicus. 

In  the  fuci,  the  parts  of  fructification  are  sometimes 
In  hollow  bladders ; and  in  some  of  the  ulvas,  it  is  dis- 
persed through  the  whole  substance  of  the  plant. 

A LGAROTH.  (So  called  from  Victorius  Alga- 
roth,  a physician  of  Verona,  and  its  inventor.)  Alga- 
rot ; Algaroth;  Mercurius  vitce ; Pulvis  Algarothi; 
Pulvis  angelicas ; Mercurius  mortis.  The  antimo- 
nial  part  of  the  butter  of  antimony,  separated  from 
some  of  its  acid  by  washing  it  in  water.  It  is  vio- 
lently emetic  in  doses  bf  two  or  three  grains,  and  is 
preferred  by  many  for  making  the  emetic  tartar. 

ALGE  DO.  (From  aAyos,  pain.)  A violent  pain 
about  the  anus,  perinaeum,  testes,  urethra,  and  blad- 
der, arising  from  the  sudden  stoppage  of  a virulent  go- 
norrhoea. A term  very  seldom  used. 

ALGE'MA.  (From  aAyew,  to  be  in  pain.)  Alge- 
modes ; Algematodes.  Uneasiness;  pain  of  any  kind. 

A LGOR.  A sudden  chillness  or  rigour. 

Algosarel.  The  Arabian  term  for  the  wild  carrot. 
See  Daucus  sylvestris. 

Alha'g4.  (Arabian.)  A species  of  Hcdysarum. 
The  leaves  are  hot  and  pungent,  the  flowers  pur- 
gative. 

Alha'ndala.  An  Arabian  name  for  the  colocynth, 
or  bitter  apple. 

Alha'sef.  (Arabian.)  Alhasaf.  A sort  of  foetid 
pustule,  called  also  Hydroa. 

A'lia  squilla  (From  aAtoj,  belonging  to  the  sea, 
and  eociAAa,  a shrimp.)  The  prawn.  A species  of 
the  genus  cancer. 

A'lica.  (From  alo,  to  nourish ) In  general  signi- 
fication, a grain,  a sort  of  food  admired  by  the  ancients. 
It  is  not  certain  whether  it  is  a grain  or  a preparation 
of  some  kind  thereof. 

Alicastrum.  (From  alica , as  siliquastrum  from 
siliqua.)  A kind  of  bread  mentioned  by  Celsus. 

A'lices.  (From  aAt^w,  to  sprinkle.)  Little  red 
spots  in  the  skin,  which  precede  the  eruption  of  pus- 
tules in  the  small-pox. 

Aliena'tio  mentis.  Estrangement  of  the  mind. 

A LIENA'TION.  ( Alienatio  ; from  alieno , to 
estrange.)  A term  applied  to  any  wandering  of  the 
mind. 

ALIEN A'TUS.  Alienated.  A leaf  is  so  termed 
when  the  first  leaves  give  way  to  others  totally  differ- 
ent from  them,  and  the  natural  habit  of  the  genus,  as 
is  the  case  in  many  of  the  mimosce  from  New  Holland. 

ALIFO  RMIS.  Abeform,  or  wing-like.  A name 
given  by  anatomists  and  naturalists  to  some  parts  from 
their  supposed  resemblance,  as  aliform  muscles,  &c. 
See  Aheformis. 

ALIMENT.  ( Alimentum  ; from  alo , to  nourish.) 
The  name  of  aliment  is  given  generally  to  every  sub- 
stance, which  being  subjected  to  the  action  of  the  or- 
gans of  digestion,  is  capable  by  itself  of  affording  nou- 
rishment. In  this  sense  an  aliment  is  extracted  neces- 
sarily from  vegetables  or  animals : for  only  those 
bodies  that  have  possessed  life  are  capable  of  serving 
usefully  in  the  nutrition  of  animals  during  a certain 
time.  This  manner  of  regarding  aliments  appears 
rather  too  confined.  Why  refuse  the  name  of  ali- 
ments to  substances  which,  in  reality,  cannot  of  them- 
selves afford  nourishment,  but  which  contribute  effica- 
ciously to  nutrition,  since  they  enter  into  the  compo- 
sition of  the  organs,  and  of  the  animal  fluids  ? Such 
are  the  muriate  of  soda,  the  oxyde  of  iron,  silicia,  and 
particularly  water,  which  is  found  in  such  abundance 
in  the  bodies  of  animals,  and  is  so  necessary  to  them. 
It  appears  preferable  to  consider  as  an  aliment  every 
substance  which  can  serve  in  nutrition  ; establishing, 
however,  the  important  distinction  between  substances 
which  can  nourish  of  themselves,  and  those  which  are 
useful  to  nutrition  only  in  concert  with  the  former. 

In  respect  to  their  nature,  aliments  are  different 


from  each  other,  by  the  proximate  principles  which 
predominate  in  their  composition.  They  may  be  dis- 
tinguished into  nine  classes : — 

1st,  Farinaceous  aliments:  wheat,  barley,  oats, 
rice,  rye,  maize,  potato,  sago,  salep,  peas,  haricots, 
lentils,  See. 

2d,  Mucilaginous  aliments : carrots,  salsafy,  tgoats- 
beard)  beet-root,  turnip,  asparagus,  cabbage,  lettuce, 
artichoke,  cardoons,  pbmpions,  melons,  &c. 

3d,  Sweet  aliments : the  different  sorts  of  sugar 
figs,  dates,  dried  grapes,  apricots,  &c. 

4th,  Acidulous  aliments : oranges,  gooseberries, 
cherries,  peaches,  strawberries,  raspberries,  mulberries, 
grapes,  prunes,  pears,  apples,  sorrel,  &c. 

5th,  Fatty  and  oily  aliments:  cocoa,  olives,  sweet 
almonds,  nuts,  walnuts,  the  animal  fats,  the  oils, 
butter,  Sec. 

6th,  Caseous  aliments : the  different  sorts  of  milk, 
cheese,  Sec. 

7th,  Gelatinous  aliments : the  tendons,  the  aponeu- 
rosis, the  chorion,  the  cellular  membrane,  young  ani- 
mals, Sec. 

8th,  Albuminous  aliments:  the  brain,  the  nerves, 
eggs,  Sec. 

9th,  Fibrinous  aliments:  the  flesh  and  the  blood  of 
different  animals. 

We  might  add  to  this  list  a great  number  of  sub- 
stances that  are  employed  as  medicines,  but  which 
doubtless  are  nutritive,  at  least  in  some  of  their  im- 
mediate principles ; such  are  manna,  tamarinds,  the 
pulp  of  cassia , the  extracts  and  saps  of  vegetables,  the 
animal  or  vegetable  decoctions. 

Among  aliments  there  are  few  employed  such  as 
nature  presents  them  ; they  are  generally  prepared, 
and  disposed  in  such  a manner  as  to  be  suitable  to  the 
action  of  the  digestive  organs.  The  preparations 
which  they  undergo  are  infinitely  various,  according 
to  thesortof  aliment,  the  people,  the  climates,  customs, 
the  degree  of  civilization : even  fashion  is  not  without 
its  influence  on  the  art  of  preparing  aliments. 

In  the  hand  of  the  skilful  cook,  alimentary  sub- 
stances almost  entirely  change  their  nature: — form, 
consistence,  odour,  taste,  colour,  composition,  &c., 
every  tiling  is  so  modified  that  it  is  impossible  for  the 
most  delicate  tastes  to  recognise  the  original  substance 
of  certain  dishes. 

The  useful  object  of  cookery  is  to  render  aliments 
agreeable  to  the  senses,  and  of  easy  digestion ; but  it 
rarely  stops  here  : frequently  with  people  advanced  in 
civilization  its  object  is  to  excite  delicate  palates,  or 
difficult  tastes,  or  to  please  vanity  Then,  far  from 
being  a useful  art,  it  becomes  a real  scourge,  which 
occasions  a great  number  of  diseases,  and  has  fre- 
quently brought  on  premature  death. 

We  understand  by  drink , a liquid  which,  being  in- 
troduced into  the  digestive  organs,  quenches  thirst, 
and  so  by  this  repairs  the  habitual  losses  of  our  fluid 
humours : the  drinks  ought  to  be  considered  as  real 
aliments. 

The  drinks  are  distinguished  by  their  chemical  com- 
position : — 

1st,  Water  of  different  sorts,  spring  water,  river  wa 
ter,  water  of  wells,  &c. 

2d,  The  juices  and  infusions  of  vegetables  and  ani- 
mals, juices  of  lemon,  of  gooseberries,  whey,  tea, 
coffee,  Sec. 

3d,  Fermented  liquors  : the  different  sorts  of  wine, 
beer,  cider,  perry,  &c. 

4th,  The  alcoholic  liquors : brandy,  alcohol,  ether, 
rum,  sack,  ratafia. 

ALIMENTARY.  Alimentarius.  Nourishing  or 
belonging  to  food. 

Alimentary  canal.  Canalis  alimentarius.  Ali- 
mentary duct.  A name  given  to  the  whole  of  those 
passages  which  the  food  passes  through  from  the 
mouth  to  the  anus.  This  duct  may  be  said  to  be  the 
true  characteristic  of  an  animal ; there  being  no  ani- 
mal without  it,  and  whatever  has  it,  being  properly 
ranged  under  the  class  of  animals.  Plants  receive  their 
nourishment  by  the  numerous  fibres  of  their  roots,  but 
have  no  common  receptacle  for  digesting  the  food  re 
ceived,  or  for  carrying  off  the  excrements.  But  in  all, 
even  the  lowest  degree  of  animal  life,  we  may  observe 
a stomach,  if  not  also  intestines,  even  where  we  cannot 
perceive  the  least  formation  of  any  organs  of  the 
senses,  unless  that  common  one  of  feeling,  as  in 
oysters. 


ALK 


ALK 

Alimentary  duct.  1.  The  alimentary  canal.  See 
Alimentary  canal. 

2.  The  thoracic  duct  is  sometimes  so  called.  See 
Thoracic  duct. 

Alimos.  Common  liquorice. 

A'limum.  A species  of  arum. 

Alipa'sma.  (From  a\u<pu),  to  anoint.)  An  oint- 
ment rubbed  upon  the  body  to  prevent  sweating. 

Alipow.  A species  of  turbith,  found  near  Mount 
Ceti,  in  Languedoc.  It  is  a powerful  purgative,  used 
instead  of  senna,  but  is  much  more  active. 

ALI'PTAl.  (From  aXa^w,  to  anoint.)  Those  who 
anointed  persons  after  bathing. 

Alisanders.  The  same  as  alexanders. 

ALI'SMA.  (Alisma ; from  aXj,  the  sea.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Hexandria ; Order,  Polygynia.  Water- plantain. 

Alisma  plantago  aquatica.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  water-plantain,  now  fallen  into  disuse. 

A' lit.  Alith.  Asafcetida. 

A'lkahat  glaube'ri.  An  alkaline  salt. 

A'lkahest.  An  imaginajy  universal  menstruum, 
or  solvent.  See  Alcahcst. 

A'lkahest  glaube'ri.  An  alkaline  salt. 

ALKALESCENT.  Alkalescens.  Any  substance 
in  which  alkaline  properties  are  beginning  to  be  deve- 
loped, or  to  predominate,  is  so  termed. 

A'LKALI.  ( Alcali , in  Arabic,  signifies  burnt;  or 
from  al  and  kali,  i.  e.  the  essence,  or  the  whole  of 
kali,  the  plant  from  which  it  was  originally  prepared, 
though  now  derived  from  plants  of  every  kind.  Alcali; 
alifi  ; alafor ; alafort ; calcadis. 

Alkalies  may  be  defined,  those  bodies  which  com- 
bine with  acids,  so  as  to  neutralize  or  impair  their  ac- 
tivity, and  produce  salts.  Acidity  and  alkalinity  are 
therefore  two  correlative  terms  of  one  species  of  com- 
bination. When  Lavoisier  introduced  oxygen  as  the 
acidifying  principle,  Morveau  proposed  hydrogen  as 
the  alkalifying  principle,  from  its  being  a constituent 
of  volatile  alcali  or  ammonia.  But  the  splendid  dis- 
covery by  Sir  H.  Davy,  of  the  metallic  basis  of  potassa 
and  soda,  and  of  their  conversion  into  alkalies,  by  com- 
bination with  oxygen,  has  banished  for  ever  that  hypo- 
thetical conceit.  It  is  the  mode  in  which  the  consti- 
tuents are  combined,  rather  than  the  nature  of  the 
constituents  themselves,  which  gives  rise  to  the  acid 
or  alkaline  condition.  Some  metals  combined  with 
oxygen  in  one  proportion,  produce  a body  possess- 
ed of  alkaline  properties ; in  another  proportion,  of 
acid  properties.  And  on  the  other  hand,  ammonia 
and  prussic  acid  prove  that  both  the  alkaline  and  acid 
conditions  can  exist  independent  of  oxygen.  These 
observations,  by  generalizing  our  notions  of  acids  and 
alkalies,  have  rendered  the  definitions  of  them  very 
imperfect.  The  difficulty  of  tracing  a limit  between 
the  acids  and  alkalies  is  still  increased,  when  we  find 
a body  sometimes  performing  the  functions  of  an  acid, 
sometimes  of  an  alkali.  Nor  can  we  diminish  this 
difficulty  by  having  recourse  to  the  beautiful  law  dis- 
rcovered  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  that  oxygen  and  acids  go  to 
the  positive  pole,  and  hydrogen  alkalies,  and  inflam- 
mable bases  to  the  negative  pole.  We  cannot  in  fact 
give  the  name  of  acid  to  all  the  bodies  which  go  to  the 
first  of  these  poles,  and  that  of  alkali  to  those  that  go 
to  the  second  ; and  if  we  wished  to  define  the  alkalies 
4jy  bringing  into  view  their  electric  energy,  it  would  be 
necessary  to  compare  them  with  the  electric  energy 
which  is  opposite  to  them.  Thus  we  are  always  re- 
duced to  define  alkalinity  by  the  property  which  it  has 
of  saturating  acidity,  because  alkalinity  and  acidity 
are  two  correlative  and  inseparable  terms.  M.  Gay 
Lussac  conceives  the  alkalinity  which  the  metallic 
oxides  enjoy,  to  be  the  result  of  two  opposite  properties, 
the  alkalifying  property  of  the  metal,  and  the  acidifying 
of  oxygen,  modified  both  by  the  combination  and  by 
the  proportions. 

The  alkalies  maybe  arranged  into  three  classes: 
1st,  Those  whigh  consist  of  a metallic  basis  combined 
with  oxygen.  These  are  three  in  number,  potassa, 
soda,  and  lithia.  2d,  That  which  contains  no  oxygen, 
viz.  ammonia.  3d,  Those  containing  oxygen,  hydro- 
gen, and  carbon.  In  this  class  wTe  have  aconita,  atro- 
pia,  brucia,  cicuta,  datura,  delphia,  hyosciama,  mor- 
phia, strychnia,  and  perhaps  some  other  truly  vegeta- 
ble alkalies.  The  order  of  vegetable  alkalies  may  be 
as  numerous  as  that  of  vegetable  acids.  The  earths, 
lime,  barytes,  and  strontites,  were  enrolled  among  the  I 


alkalies  by  Fourcroy,  but  they  have  been  kept  apart  by 
other  systematic  writers,  and  are  called  alkaline  earfi.s. 

Besides  neutralizing  acidity,  and  thereby  giving  birtli 
to  salts,  the  first  four  alkalies  having  the  following  pro- 
perties : — 

1st,  They  change  the  purple  colour  of  many  vegeta 
bles  to  a green,  the  reds  to  a purple,  and  the  yellows  to 
a brown.  If  the  purple  have  been  reddened  by  acid, 
alkalies  restore  the  purple. 

2d,  They  possess  this  power  on  vegetable  colours 
after  being  saturated  with  carbonic  acid,  by  which 
criterion  they  are  distinguishable  from  the  akaline 
earths. 

3d,  They  have  an  acrid  and  urinous  taste. 

4th,  They  are  powerful  solvents  or  corrosives  of 
animal  matter ; with  which,  as  well  as  with  oils  in 
general,  they  combine,  so  as  to  produce  neutrality. 

5th,  They  are  decomposed,  or  volatilized,  at  a strong 
red  heat. 

6th,  They  combine  with  water  in  every  proportion, 
and  also  largely  with  alcohol. 

7th,  They  continue  to  be  soluble  in  water  when  neu 
tralized  with  carbonic  acid  ; while  the  alkaline  earths 
thus  become  insoluble. 

It  is  needless  to  detail  at  length  Dr.  Murray’s  specu- 
lations on  alkalinity.  They  seem  to  flow  from  a par- 
tial view  of  chemical  phenomena.  According  to  him, 
either  oxygen  or  hydrogen  may  generate  alkalinity, 
but  the  combination  of  both  principles  is  necessary  tc 
give  this  condition  its  utmost  energy.  “Thus  the 
class  of  alkalies  will  exhibit  the  same  relations  as  the 
class  of  acids.  Some  are  compounds  of  a base  with 
oxygen  ; such  are  the  greater  number  of  the  metallic 
oxydes,  and  probably  of  the  earths.  Ammonia  is  a 
compound  of  a base  with  hydrogen.  Potassa,  soda, 
barytes,  strontites,  and  probably  lime,  are  compounds 
of  bases  with  .oxygen  and  hydrogen  ; and  these  last, 
like  the  analogous  order  among  the  acids,  possess  the 
highest  power.”  Now,  perfectly  dry  and  caustic  ba- 
rytes, lime,  and  strontites,  as  well  as  the  dry  potassa 
and  soda  obtained  by  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  are 
not  inferior  in  alkaline  power  to  the  same  bodies  after 
they  are  slacked  or  combined  with  water.  100  parts 
of  lime  destitute  of  hydrogen,  that  is,  pure  oxyde  of 
calcium,  neutralize  78  parts  of  carbonic  acid.  But  132 
parts  of  Dr.  Murray’s  strongest  lime,  that  is,  the  hy- 
drate, are  required  to  produce  the  same  alkaline  effect. 
If  we  ignite  nitrate  of  barytes,  we  obtain,  as  is  well 
known,  a perfectly  dry  barytes,  or  protoxide  of  bari- 
um ; but  if  we  ignite  crystallized  barytes,  we  obtain 
the  same  alkaline  earth  combined  with  a prime  equi- 
valent of  water.  These  two  different  states  of  barytes 
were  demonstrated  by  M.  Berthollet  in  an  excellent 
paper  published  in  the  2d  volume  of  the  Memoirs 
D’Arcueil,  so  far  back  as  1809.  “ The  first  barytes,” 
(that  from  crystallized  barytes)  says  he,  “ presents  all 
the  characters  of  a combination  ; it  is  engaged  with  a 
substance  which  diminishes  its  action  on  other  bodies, 
which  renders  it  more  fusible,  and  which  gives  it  by 
fusion  the  appearance  of  glass.  This  substance  is  no- 
thing else  but  water;  but  in  fact,  by  adding  a little 
water  to  the  second  barytes  (that  from  ignited  nitrate) 
and  by  urging  it  at  the  fire,  we  give  it  the  properties 
of  the  first.”  Page  47.  100  parts  of  barytes  void  of 
hydrogen,  or  dry  barytes,  neutralize  28  1-2  of  dry  car- 
bonic acid.  Whereas  111  2-3  parts  of  the  hydrate, 
or  what  Dr.  Murray  has  styled  the  most  energetic,  are 
required  to  produce  the  same  effect.  In  fact,  it  is  not 
hydrogen  which  combines  with  the  pure  barytic  earth, 
but  hydrogen  and  oxygen  in  the  state  of  water.  The 
proof  of  this  is,  that  when  carbonic  acid  and  that  hy- 
drate unite,  the  exact  quantity  of  water  is  disengaged. 
The  protoxide  of  barium,  or  pure  barytes,  has  never 
been  combined  with  hydrogen  by  any  chemist. — lire's 
Chem.  Diet. 

Alkali  causticum.  Caustic  alkali.  An  alkali  is 
so  called  when  deprived  of  the  carbonic  acid  it  usually 
contains,  for  it  then  becomes  more  caustic,  and  more 
violent  in  its  action. 

Alkali , caustic  volatile.  See  Ammonia- 

Alkali,  ) hlogisticated.  Prussian  alkali.  When  a 
fixed  alkali  is  ignited  with  bullock’s  blood,  or  other 
animal  subs  ances,  and  lixiviated,  it  is  found  to  be  in 
a great  measure  saturated  with  prussic  acid  : from  the 
theories  formerly  adopted  respecting  this  combination, 
it  was  called  phlogisticated  alkali. 

Alkali  fixum.  Fixed  alkali.  Those  alkalies  are 


ALK 


ALK 


so  called  that  emit  no  characteristic  smell,  and  cannot 
bevolatilizcd,  but  with  the  greatest  difficulty.  Two 
kinds  of  fixed  alkalies  have  only  hitherto  been  made 
known,  namely  potassa  and  soda.  See  Potassa  and 
Soda. 

Alkali , fossile.  See  Soda. 

Alkali , mineral.  See  Soda. 

Alkali , Prussian.  See  Alkali,  phlogisticated. 

Alkali , vegetable.  See  Potassa. 

Alkali , volatile.  See  Ammonia. 

ALKALl'NA.  Alkalines.  A class  of  substances 
described  by  Cullen  as  comprehending  the  substances 
otherwise  termed  antucida.  They  consist  of  alkalies, 
and  other  substances  which  neutralize  acids.  The 
principal  alkalines  in  use,  are  the  carbonates  and  sub- 
carbonates of  soda  and  potassa,  the  subcarbonate  of 
ammonia,  lime-water,  chalk,  magnesia  and  its  car- 
bonate. 

ALKALIZATION.  Alkalizatio.  The  impreg- 
nating any  thing  with  an  alkaline  salt,  as  spirit  of 
wine,  Sec. 

ALKALOMETER.  The  name  of  an  instrument 
for  determining  the  quantity  of  alkali  in  commercial 
potassa  and  soda. 

A'lkanet.  {Alkanah,  a reed,  Arabian.)  See  An- 
chusa  tinctoria. 

A lkanna.  SeeAnchusa. 

Alka'nna  ve'ra.  See  Lawsonia  inermis. 

ALKEKE  NGI.  (Arabian.)  The  winter- cherry. 
See  Physalis  alkekengi. 

ALKE'RMES.  A term  borrowed  from  the  Arabs, 
denoting  a celebrated  remedy,  of  the  form  and  consist- 
ence of  a confection,  whereof  the  kermes  is  the  basis. 
See  Kermes. 

Alkima.  See  Alchemy. 

A'LKOHOL.  (An  Arabian  word,  which  signifies 
antimony : so  called  from  the  usage  of  the  Eastern 
ladies  to  paint  their  eyebrows  with  antimony,  reduced 
to  a most  subtile  powder ; whence  it  at  last  came  to 
signify  any  thing  exalted  to  its  highest  perfection.) 
Alcohol  ; Alkol ; Spiritus  vinosus  rectificatus  ; Spi- 
ritus vini  rectificatus ; spiritus  vini  concentratus  ; 
Spiritus  vini  rectificatissimus. 

1.  This  term  is  applied  in  strictness  only  to  the  pure 
spirit  obtainable  by  distil'ation  and  subsequent  rectifi- 
cation from  all  liquids  that  have  undergone  vinous 
fermentation,  and  from  none  but  such  as  are  suscepti- 
ble of  it.  But  it  is  commonly  used  to  signify  this  spirit 
more  or  less  imperfectly  freed  from  water,  in  the  state 
in  which  it  is  usually  met  with  in  the  shops,  and  in 
which,  as  it  was  first  obtained  from  the  juice  of  the 
grape,  it  was  long  distinguished  by  the  name  of  spirit 
of  wine.  At  present  it  is  extracted  chiefly  from  grain 
or  molasses  in  Europe,  and  from  the  juice  of  the  sugar 
cane  in  the  West  Indies  ; and  in  the  diluted  state  in 
which  it  commonly  occurs  in  trade,  constitutes  the 
basis  of  the  several  spirituous  liquors  called  brandy, 
rum,  gin,  whiskey,  and  cordials,  however  variously 
denominated  or  disguised. 

As  we  are  not  able  to  compound  alkohol  imme- 
diately from  its  ultimate  constituents,  we  have  recourse 
to  the  process  of  fermentation,  by  which  its  principles 
are  first  extricated  from  the  substances  in  which -they 
were  combined,  and  then  united  into  a new  compound  ; 
to  distillation,  by  which  this  new  compound,  the  alko- 
hol, is  separated  in  a state  of  dilution  with  water,  and 
contaminated  with  essential  oil ; and  to  rectification, 
by  which  it  is  ultimately  freed  from  these. 

It  appears  to  be  essential  to  the  fermentation  of 
alkohol,  that  the  fermenting  fluid  should  contain  sac- 
charine matter,  which  is  indispensable  to  that  species 
of  fermentation  called  vinous.  In  France,  where  a 
great  deal  of  wine  is  made,  particularly  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  vintage,  that  is  too  weak  to  be  a 
sajeable  commodity,  it  is  a common  practice  to  subject 
this  wine  to  distillation,  in  order  to  draw  off  the  spirit ; 
and  as  the  essential  oil  that  rises  in  tins  process  is  of  a 
more  pleasant  flavour  than  that  of  malt  or  molasses, 
the  French  brandies  are  preferred  to  any  other;  though 
even  in  the  flavour  of  these  there  is  a difference,  ac- 
cording to  the  wine  from  which  they  are  produced.  In 
the  West  Indies  a spirit  is  obtained  from  the  juice  of 
the  sugar-cane,  which  is  highly  impregnated  with  its 
essential  oil,  and  well  known  by  the  name  of  rum. 
The  distillers  in  this  country  use  grain,  or  molasses, 
whence  they  distinguish  the  products  by  the  name  of 
malt  spirits , and.  molasses  spirits.  It  is  said  that  a 


very  good  spirit  may  be  extracted  from  the  hu3ks  of 
gooseberries  or  currants,  after  wine  has  been  made 
from  them. 

As  the  process  of  malting  developes  the  saccharine 
principle  of  grain,  it  would  appear  to  render  it  fitter  for 
the  purpose  ; though  it  is  the  common  practice  to  use 
about  three  parts  of  raw  grain  with  one  of  malt.  For 
this  two  reasons  may  be  assigned  : by  using  raw  grain, 
the  expense  of  malting  is  saved,  as  well  as  the  duty  on 
malt ; and  the  process  of  malting  requires  some  nicety 
of  attention,  since,  if  it  be  carried  too  far,  part  of  the 
saccharine  matter  is  lost,  and  if  it  be  stopped  too  soon, 
this  matter  will  not  be  wholly  developed.  Besides,  if 
the  malt  be  dried  too  quickly,  or  by  any  unequal  heat, 
tile  spirit  it  yields  will  be  less  in  quantity,  and  more 
unpleasant  in  flavour.  Another  object  of  economical 
consideration  is,  what  grain  will  afford  the  most  spirit 
in  proportion  to  its  price,  as  well  as  the  best  in  quality. 
Barley  appears  to  produce  le§s  spirit  than  wheat;  and 
if  three  parts  of  raw  wheat  be  mixed  with  one  of 
malted  barley,  the  produce  is  said  to  be  particularly 
fine.  This  is  the  practice  of  the  distillers  in  Holland 
for  producing  a spirit  of  the  finest  quality ; but  in  Eng- 
land they  are  expressly  prohibited  from  using  more 
than  one  part  of  wheat  to  two  of  other  grain.  Rye, 
however,  affords  still  more  spirit  than  wheat. 

Other  articles  have  been  employed,  though  not  ge- 
nerally, for  the  fabrication  of  spirit,  as  carrots  and 
potatoes ; and  we  are  lately  informed  by  Professor 
Proust,  that  from  the  fruit  of  the  carob  tree  he  has  ob- 
tained good  brandy  in  the  proportion  of  a pint  from 
five  pounds  of  the  dried  fruit. 

To  obtain  pure  alkohol,  different  processes  have 
been  recommended  ; but  the  purest  rectified  spirit  ob- 
tained as  above  described,  being  that  which  is  least 
contaminated  with  foreign  matter,  should  be  employed. 
Rouelle  recommends  to  draw  off  half  the  spirit  in  a 
water  bath ; to  rectify  this  twice  more,  drawing  off 
two-thirds  each  time ; to  add  water  to  this  alkohol, 
which  will  turn  it  milky  by  separating  the  essential 
oil  remaining  in  it ; to  distil  the  spirit  from  this  water ; 
and  finally  rectify  it  by  one  more  distillation. 

Baum6  sets  apart  the  first  running,  when  about  a 
fourth  is  come  over,  and  continues  the  distillation  till 
he  has  drawn  off  about  as  much  more,  or  till  the  liquor 
runs  off  milky.  The  last  running  he  puts  into  the 
still  again,  and  mixes  the  first  half  of  what  comes 
over  with  the  preceding  first  product.  This  process  is 
again  repeated,  and  all  the  first  products  being  mixed 
together,  are  distilled  afresh.  When  about  half  the 
liquor  is  come  over,  this  is  to  be  set  apart  as  pure 
alkohol. 

Alkohol  in  this  state,  however,  is  not  so  pure  as 
when,  to  use  the  language  of  the  old  chemists,  it  has 
been  dephlegmated , or  still  further  freed  from  w ater, 
by  means  of  some  alkaline  salt.  Boerhaave  recom- 
mended, for  this  purpose,  the  muriate  of  soda,  deprived 
of  its  water  of  crystallization  by  heat,  and  added  hot 
to  the  spirit.  But  the  subcarbonate  of  potassa  is  pre- 
ferable. About  a third  of  the  weight  of  the  alkohol 
should  be  added  to  it  in  a glass  vessel,  well  shaken, 
and  then  suffered  to  subside.  The  salt  will  be  moist- 
ened by  the  water  absorbed  from  the  alkohol;  which 
being  decanted,  more  of  the  salt  is  to  be  added,  and 
this  is  to  be  continued  till  the  salt  falls  dry  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  vessel.  The  alkohol  in  this  state  will  be 
reddened  by  a portion  of  the  pure  potassa,  which  it 
will  hold  in  solution,  from  which  it  must  be  freed  by 
distillation  in  a water  bath.  Dry  muriate  of  lime  may 
be  substituted  advantageously  for  the  alkali. 

As  alkohol  is  much  lighter  than  water,  its  specific 
gravity  is  adopted  as  the  test  of  its  purity.  Fourcroy 
considers  it  as  rectified  to  the  highest  point  when  its 
specific  gravity  is  829,  that  of  water  being  1000;  and 
perhaps  this  is  nearly  as  far  as  it  can  be  carried  by  the 
process  of  Rouelle  or  Baum£  simply.  Bories  found 
the  first  measure  that  came  over  from  twenty  of  spirit 
at  836  to  be  820,  at  the  temperature  of  71"  F.  Sir 
Charles  Blagden,  by  the  addition  of  alkali,  brought  it 
to  813,  at  60"  F.  Chaussier  professes  to  have  reduced 
it  to  798 ; but  he  gives  998.35  as  the  specific  gravity  of 
water.  Lowitz  asserts  that  he  has  obtained  it  at  791. 
by  adding  as  much  alkali  as  nearly  to  absorb  the  spirit; 
but  the  temperature  is  not  indicated.  In  the  shops,  it 
is  about  835  or  840 : according  to  the  London  College 
it  should  be  815. 

It  is  by  no  means  an  easy  undertaking  to  determine 

45 


ALK 


ALK 


the  strength  or  relative  value  of  spirits,  even  with  suf- 
ficient accuracy  for  commercial  purposes.  The  fol- 
lowing requisites  must  he  obtained  belore  this  can  be 
well  done : the  specific  gravity  of  a certain  number  of 
mixtures  of  alkohol  and  water  must  be  taken  so  near 
each  other,  as  that  the  intermediate  specific  gravities 
may  not  perceptibly  differ  from  those  deduced  from 
the  supposition  of  a mere  mixture  of  the  fluids ; the 
expansions  or  variations  of  specific  gravity  in  these 
mixtures  must  be  determined  at  different  temperatures; 
some  easy  method  must  be  contrived  of  determining 
the  presence  and  quantity  of  saccharine  or  oleaginous 
matter  which  the  spirit  may  hold  in  solution,  and  the 
effect  of  such  solution  on  the  specific  gravity ; and 
lastly,  the  specific  gravity  of  the  fluid  must  be  ascer- 
tained by  a proper  floating  instrument  with  a graduated 
stem  or  set  of  weights;  or,  which  may  be  more  con- 
venient, with  both. 

The  most  remarkable  characteristic  property  of  al- 
kohol, is  its  solubility  or  combination  in  all  proportions 
with  water ; a property  possessed  by  no  other  com- 
bustible substance,  except  the  acetic  spirit  obtained  by 
distilling  the  dry  acetates.  When  it  is  burned  in  a 
chimney  which  communicates  with  the  worm-pipe  of 
a distilling  apparatus,  the  product,  which  is  condensed, 
is  found  to  consist  of  water,  which  exceeds  the  spirit 
in  weight  about  one-eighth  part ; or  more  accurately, 
100  parts  of  alkohol,  by  combustion,  yield  136  of 
water.  If  alkohol  be  burned  in  closed  vessels  with 
vital  air,  the  product  is  found  to  be  water  and  car- 
bonic acid.  Whence  it  is  inferred  that  alkohol  con- 
sists of  hydrogen,  united  either  to  carbonic  acid,  or  its 
acidifiable  base ; and  that  the  oxygen  uniting  on  the 
one  part  with  the  hydrogen,  forms  water ; and  on  the 
other  with  the  base  of  the  carbonic  acid,  torms  that 
acid. 

The  most  exact  experiments  on  this  subject  are 
those  recently  made  by  De  Saussure.  The  alkohol  he 
used  had,  at  62.8°,  a specific  gravity  or  0.8302 ; and  by 
Richter’s  proportions,  it  consists  of  13.8  water,  and 
86.2  of  absolute  alkohol.  The  vapour  of  alkohol  was 
made  to  traverse  a narrow  porcelain  tube  ignited ; 
from  which  the  products  passed  along  a glass  tube 
about  six  feet  in  length,  refrigerated  by  ice.  A little 
charcoal  was  deposited  in  the  porcelain,  and  a trace  of 
oil  in  the  glass  tube.  The  resulting  gas  being  ana- 
lyzed in  an  exploding  eudiometer,  with  oxygen,  was 
found  to  resolve  itself  into  carbonic  acid  and  water. 
Three  volumes  of  oxygen  disappeared  for  every  two 
volumes  of  carbonic  acid  produced ; a proportion 
which  obtains  in  the  analysis  by  oxygenation  of  ole- 
fiant gas.  Now,  as  nothing  resulted  but  a combustible 
gas  of  this  peculiar  constitution,  and  condensed  water 
equal  to  1000-4064  of  the  original  weight  of  the  alkohol, 
we  may  conclude  that  vapour  of  water  and  olefiant 
gas  are  the  sole  constituents  of  alkohol.  Subtracting 
the  13.8  per  cent,  of  water  in  the  alkohol  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  experiment,  the  absolute  alcohol  of  Richter 
will  consist  of  13.7  hydrogen,  51.98  carbon,  and  34.32 
oxygen.  Hence  Gay  Lussac  infers,  that  alkohol,  in 
vapour,  is  composed  of  one  volume  olefiant  gas,  and 
one  volume  of  the  vapour  of  water,  condensed  by  che- 


mical affinity  into  one  volume. 

The  sp.  gr.  of  olefiant  gas  is 0.97804 

of  aqueous  vapour  is -0.62500 


Sum=l. 60304 
And  alkoholic  vapour  is=1.6133 
These  numbers  approach  nearly  to  those  which 
would  result  from  two  prime  equivalents  of  olefiant 
gas,  combined  with  one  of  water ; or  ultimately,  three 
of  hydrogen,  two  of  carbon,  and  one  of  oxygen. 

The  mutual  action  between  alkohol  and  acids  pro- 
duces a light,  volatile,  and  inflammable  substance, 
called  aether.  Pure  alkalies  unite  with  spirit  of  wine, 
and  form  alkaline  tinctures.  Few  of  the  neutral  salts 
unite  with  this  fluid,  except  such  as  contain  ammonia. 
The  carbonated  fixed  alkalies  are  not  soluble  in  it. 
From  the  strong  attraction  which  exists  between  alko- 
hol and  water,  it  unites  with  this  last  in  saline  solu- 
tions, and  in  most  cases  precipitates  the  salt.  This  is 
a pleasing  experiment,  which  never  fails  to  surprise 
those  who  are  unacquainted  with  chemical  eflects. 
If,  for  example,  a saturated  solution  of  nitre  in  water 
be  taken,  and  an  equal  quantity  of  strong  spirit  of  wine 
be  poured  upon  it,  the  mixture  will  constitute  a weaker 
spirit,  which  is  incapable  of  holding  the  nitre  in  solu- 


tion ; it  therefore  falls  to  the  bottom  instantly,  in  the 
form  of  minute  crystals. 

The  degree  of  solubility  of  many  neutral  salts  in 
alkohol  have  been  ascertained  by  experiments  made 
by  Macquer,  of  which  an  account  is  published  in  the 
Memoirs  of  the  Turin  Academy. 

All  deliquescent  salts  are  soluble  in  alkohol.  Alko- 
hol holding  the  strontitic  salts  in  solution,  gives  a flame 
of  a rich  purple.  The  cupreous  salts  and  boi  acic  acid 
give  a green  ; the  soluble  calcareous,  a reddish  ; the 
barytic,  a yellowish. 

The  alkohol  of  0.825  has  been  subjected  to  a eold  of 
—91°  without  congealing. 

When  potassium  and  sodium  are  put  in  contact  with 
the  strongest  alkohol,  hydrogen  is  evolved.  When 
chlorine  is  made  to  pass  through  alkohol  in  a Woolfe’s 
apparatus,  there  is  a mutual  action.  Water,  an  oily- 
looking  substance,  muriatic,  acid,  a little  carbonic  acid 
and  carbonaceous  matter,  are  the  products.  This  oily 
substance  does  not  redden  turnsole,  though  its  analysis 
by  heat  shows  it  to  contain  muriatic  acid.  It  is  white, 
denser  than  water,  has  a cooling  taste  analogous  to 
mint,  and  a peculiar,  but  not  eethereous  odour.  It  is 
very  soluble  in  alkohol,  but  scarcely  in  water.  The 
strongest  alkalies  hardly  operate  on  it. 

It  was  at  one  time  maintained,  that  alkohol  did  not 
exist  in  wines,  but  was  generated  and  evolved  by  the 
heat  of  distillation.  On  this  subject  Gay  Lussac  made 
some  decisive  experiments.  He  agitated  wine  with 
litharge  in  fine  powder,  till  the  liquid  became  as  limpid 
as  water,  and  then  saturated  it  with  subcarbonate  of 
potassa.  The  alkohol  immediately  separated  and 
floated  on  the  top.  He  distilled  another  portion  of 
wine  in  vacuo , at  59°  Fahr.,  a temperature  considera- 
bly below  that  of  fermentation.  Alkohol  came  over. 
Mr.  Brande  proved  the  same  position  by  saturating 
wine  with  subacetate  of  lead,  and  adding  potassa. 

Adein  and  Duportal  have  substituted  for  ihe  redis- 
tillations  used  in  converting  wine  or  beer  into  alkohol, 
a single  process  of  great  elegance.  From  the  capital 
of  the  still  a tube  is  led  into  a large  copper  recipient. 
This  is  joined  by  a second  tube  to  a second  recipient, 
and  so  on  through  a series  of  four  vessels,  arranged 
like  a Woolfe’s  apparatus.  The  last  vessel  communi- 
cates with  the  worm  of  the  first  refrigeratory.  This, 
the  body  of  the  still,  and  the  two  recipients  nearest  it, 
are  charged  with  the  wine  or  fermented  liquor.  When 
ebullition  takes  place  in  the  still,  the  vapour  issuing  from 
it  communicates  soon  the  boiling  temperature  to  the 
liq  uor  in  tb  e two  recipients.  From  these  the  volatilized 
alkohol  wifi  rise  and  pass  into  the  third  vessel,  which 
is  empty.  After  communicating  a certain  heat  to  it, 
a portion  of  the  finer  or  less  condensible  spirit  will 
pass  into  the  fourth,  and  thence,  in  a little,  into  the 
worm  of  the  first  refrigeratory.  The  wine  round  the 
worm  will  likewise  acquire  heat,  but  more  slowly. 
The  vapour  that  in  that  event  may  pass  uncondensed 
through  the  first  worm,  is  conducted  into  a second, 
surrounded  with  cold  water.  Whenever  the  still  is 
worked  off,  it  is  replenished  by  a stop-cock  from  the 
nearest  recipient,  which,  in  its  turn,  is  filled  from  the 
second,  and  the  second  froifi  the  first  worm  tub.  It  is 
evident,  from  this  arrangement,  that  by  keeping  the 
third  and  fourth  recipients  at  a certain  temperature, 
we  may  cause  alkohol,  of  any  degree  of  lightriess,  to 
form  directly  at  the  remote  extremity  .of  the  apparatus. 
The  utmost  economy  of  fuel  and  time  is  also  secured, 
and  a better  flavoured  spirit  is  obtained.  The  arnire 
gout  of  bad  spirit  can  scarcely  be  destroyed  by  infu- 
sion with  charcoal  and  redistillation.  In  this  mode  of 
operating,  the  taste  and  smell  are  excellent,  from  the 
first.  Several  stills  on  the  above  principle  have  been 
constructed  at  Glasgow  for  the  West  India  distillers, 
nd  have  been  found  extremely  advantageous.  The 
excise  laws  do  not  permit  their  employment  in  the 
home  trade. 

If  sulphur  in  sublimation  meet  with  the  vapour  of 
alkohol,  a very  small  portion  combines  with  it,  which 
communicates  a hydrosulphurous  smell  to  the  fluid. 
The  increased  surface  of  the  two  substances  appears 
to  favour  the  combination.  It  had  been  supposed,  that 
this  was  the  only  way  in  which  they  could  be  united ; 
but  Favre  lias  lately  asserted,  that  having  digested  two 
drachms  of  flowers  of  sulphur  in  an  ounce  of  alkohol,. 
over  a gentle  fire  not  sufficient  to  make  it  boil,  for 
twelve  hours,  he  obtained  a solution  that  gave  twenty- 
three  grains  of  precipitate.  A similar  mixture  left  to 


ALL 


ALL 


Bland  for  a month  in  a place  exposed  to  the  solar  rays, 
afforded  sixteen  grains  of  precipitate ; and  another  from 
which  the  light  was  excluded,  gave  thirteen  grains  If 
alkohol  be  boiled  with  one-fourth  of  its  weight  of  sul- 
phur for  an  hour,  and  filtered  hot,  a small  quantity  of 
minute  crystals  will  be  deposited  on  cooling;  and  the 
clear  fluid  will  assume  an  opaline  hue  on  being  diluted 
with  an  equal  quantity  of  water,  in  which  state  it  will 
pass  the  filter,  nor  will  any  sediment  be  deposited  for 
several  hours.  The  alkohol  used  in  the  last-mentioned 
experiment  did  not  exceed  840. 

Phosphorus  is  sparingly  soluble  in  alkohol,  but  in 
greater  quantity  by  heat  than  in  cold.  The  addition 
of  water  to  this  solution  affords  an  opaque  milky  fluid, 
which  becomes  clear  by  the  subsidence  of  the  phos- 
phorus 

Earths  seem  to  have  scarcely  any  action  upon  alko- 
hol. Quicklime,  however,  produces  some  alteration 
in  this  fluid,  by  changing  its  flavour,  and  rendering  it 
of  a yellow  colour.  A portion  is  probably  taken  up. 

Soap^  are  dissolved  with  great  facility  in  alkohol, 
with  which  they  combine  more  readily  than  with 
water.  None  of  the  metals,  oi  their  oxydes,  are  acted 
upon  by  this  fluid.  Resins,  essential  oils,  camphor, 
bitumen,  and  various  other  substances,  are  dissolved 
with  great  facility  in  alkohol,  from  which  they  may  be 
precipi  ated  by  the  addition  of  water.  From  its  pro- 
perty of  dissolving  resins,  it  becomes  the  menstruum  of 
some  varnishes. 

Camphor  is  not  only  extremely  soluble  in  alkohol, 
but  assists  the  solution  of  resins  in  it.  Fixed  oils,  when 
rendered  drying  by  metallic  oxydes,  are  soluble  in  it,  as 
well  as  when  combined  with  alkalies. 

Wax,  spermaceti,  biliary  calculi,  urea,  and  all  the 
animal  substances  of  a resinous  nature,  are  soluble  in 
alkohol;  but  it  curdles  milk,  coagulates  albumen,  and 
hardens  the  muscular  fibre  and  coagulum  of  the  blood. 

The  uses  of  alkohol  are  various.  As  a solvent  of 
resinous  substances  and  essential  oils,  it  is  employed 
both  in  pharmacy  and  by  the  perfumer.  When  diluted 
with  an  equal  quantity  of  water,  constituting  wnat  is 
called  proof  spirit,  it  is  used  for  extracting  tinctures 
from  vegetable  and  other  substances,  the  alkohol  dis- 
solving the  resinous  parts,  and  the  water  the  gummy. 
From  giving  a steady  heat  without  smoke  when  burnt 
in  a lamp,  it  was  formerly  much  employed  to  keep 
water  boiling  on  the  tea-table.  In  thermometers,  for 
measuring  great  degrees  of  cold,  it  is  preferable  to  mer- 
cury, as  we  cannot  bring  it  to  freeze.  It  is  in  common 
use  for  preserving  many  anatomical  preparations,  and 
certain  subjects  of  natural  history;  but  to  some  it  is 
injurious,  the  mollusca;  for  instance,  the  calcareous 
covering  of  which  it  in  time  corrodes.  It  is  of  consi- 
derable use,  too,  in  chemical  analysis,  as  appears  under 
the  different  articles  to  which  it  is  applicable . 

From  the  great  expansive  power  of  alkohol,  it  has 
been  made  a question,  whether  it  might  not  he  applied 
with  advantage  in  the  working  of  steam  engines. 
From  a series  of  experiments  made  by  Betancourt,  it 
appears,  that  the  steam  of  alkohol  has,  in  all  cases  of 
equal  temperature,  more  than  double  the  force  of  that 
of  water  ; and  that  the  steam  of  alkohol  at  174°  F.  is 
equal  to  that  of  water 212°;  thus  there  is  a considerable 
diminution  of  the  consumption  of  fuel,  and  where  this 
is  so  expensive  as  to  be  an  object  of  great  importance, 
by  contriving  the  machinery  so  as  to  prevent  the  alko- 
hol from  he ing  lost,  it  may  possibly  at  some  future  time 
be  used  with  advantage,  if  some  other  fluid  of  great 
expansive  power,  and  interior  price,  be  not  found  more 
economical. 

Alkohol  may  be  decomposed  by  transmission  through 
a red-hot  tube : it  is  also  decomposable  by  the  strong 
acids,  and  thus  affords  that  remarkable  product,  Ether, 
and  Oleum  Vini.—  [/re's  Chem.  Diet. 

2.  The  alkohol  of  the  London  Pharmacopoeia  is 
directed  to  be  made  thus- — Take  of  rectified  spirit,  a 
gallon  ; subcarbonate  of  potassa,  three  pounds.  Add  a 
pound  of  the  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  previously 
heated  to  300°,  to  the  spirit,  and  macerate  for  twenty- 
four  hours,  frequently  stirring  them  ; then  pour  off  the 
spirit,  and  add  to  it  the  rest  of  the  subcarbonate  of 
potassa  heated  to  the  same  degree  ; lastly,  with  the  aid 
of  a warm  bath,  let  the  alkohol  distil  over,  keep  it  in  a 
well-stopped  bottle.  The  specific  gravity  of  alkohol  is 
to^the  specific  gravity  of  distilled  water,  as  815  to 

ALLAGITE.  A carbosilicate  of  manganese. 


ALLANITE.  A mineral,  first  recognised  as  a dis- 
tinct species  by  Mr.  Allan  of  Edinburgh.  It  is  massive 
and  of  a brownish  black  colour. 

[Before  the  biowpipe  it  froths,  and  is  converted  into 
scoria.  In  nitric  acid  it  forms  a jelly.  It  contains 
silex  35.4,  lime  9.2,  oxide  of  cerium  33.9,  alurnine  4.1, 
oxide  of  iron  25.4,  volatile  matter  4.0.  It  is  found  in 
Greenland,  and  associated  with  mica  and  feldspar.  A.l 

Allantoi  des.  (From  aWas,  a hog’s  pudding,  ana 
uSog,  likeness:  because  in  some  brutal  animals  it  is 
long  and  thick.)  Membrana  allantoides.  A membrane 
of  the  fmtus,  peculiar  to  brutes,  which  contains  the 
urine  discharged  from  the  bladder. 

ALLELUI  A.  (Hebrew.  Praise  the  Lord.)  So 
named  from  its  many  virtues.  See  Oxalis  acetosella. 

ALL-GOOD.  See  Chenopodium  bonushenricus. 

ALL-HEAL.  See  Heraclium  and  Stachys. 

ALLIA  CEOUS.  ( Alliaceus ; from  allium , gariick.) 
Pertaining  to  gariick. 

ALLIA'RIA.  (From  allium,  gariick : from  its  smell 
resembling  gariick.)  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 

A LLIUM.  (Allium,  i.  n. ; from  oleo , to  smell ; be- 
cause it  stinks:  or  from  aXem,  to  avoid;  as  being 
unpleasant  to  most  people.)  Gariick. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys 
tern.  Class,  Hexandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  gariick.  See  Allium 
sativum. 

Allium  oepa.  Cep  a.  Allium ; — scapo  nudo  inferni 
ventricoso  longiore , foliis  teretibus , of  Linnaeus.  The 
Onion.  Dr.  Cullen  says,  onions  are  acrid  and  stimu- 
lating, and  possess  very  little  nutriment.  With  bilious 
constitutions  they  generally  produce  flatulency,  thirst, 
headache,  and  febrile  symptoms  : but  where  the  tem- 
perament is  phlegmatic,  they  are  of  infinite  service,  by 
stimulating  the  habit  and  promoting  the  natural  secre- 
tions, particularly  expectoration  and  urine.  They  are 
recommended  in  scorbutic  cases,  as  possessing  anti- 
scorbutic properties.  Externally,  onions  are  employed 
in  suppurating  poultices,  and  suppiession  of  urine  in 
children  is  said  to  be  relieved  by  applying  them,  roasted, 
to  the  pubes. 

Allium  porrum.  The  Leek  or  Porret.  Porrum. 
Every  part  of  this  plant,  but  more  particularly  the  root, 
abounds  with  a peculiar  odour.  The  expressed  juice 
possesses  diuretic  qualities,  and  is  given  in  the  cure  of 
dropsical  diseases,  and  calculous  complaints,  asthma, 
and  scurvy.  The  fresh  root  is  much  employed  for 
culinary  purposes. 

Allium  sativum.  Allium;  Theriaca  rusticorum , 
Gariick.  Allium : — caule  planifolio  bulbifero,  bulbo 
composito , staminibus  tricuspidatis , of  Linnaeus.  This 
species  of  Gariick,  according  to  Linnaeus,  grows  spon- 
taneously in  Sicily ; but,  as  it  is  much  employed  for 
culinary  and  medicinal  purposes,  it  has  been  long  very 
generally  cultivated  in  gardens.  Every  part  of  the 
plant,  but  more  especially  the  root,  has  a pungent  acri- 
monious taste,  and  a peculiarly  offensive  strong  smell. 
This  odour  is  extremely  penetrating  and  diffusive ; for, 
On  the  root  being  taken  into  the  stomach,  the  alliaceous 
scent  impregnates  the  whole  system,  and  is  discover 
able  in  the  various  excretions,  as  in  the  urine,  perspi- 
ration, milk,  &c.  Gariick  is  generally  allied  to  the 
onion,  from  which  it  seems  only  to  differ  in  being  more 
powerful  in  its  effects,  and  in  its  active  matter,  being  in 
a more  fixed  state.  By  stimulating  the  stomach,  they 
both  favour  digestion,  and,  as  a stimulus,  are  readily 
diffused  over  the  system.  They  may,  therefore,  be  con- 
sidered as  useful  condiments  with  the  food  of  phleg- 
matic people,  or  those  whose  circulation  is  languid,  and 
secretions  interrupted ; but  with  those  subject  to  inflam- 
matory complaiflts,  or  where  great  irritability  prevails, 
these  roots,  in  their  acrid  state,  may  prove  very  hurtful. 
The  medicinal  uses  of  gariick  are  various ; it  has  been 
long  in  estimation  as  an  expectorant  in  pituitous  asth- 
mas, and  other  pulmonary  affections,  unattended  with 
inflammation.  In  hot  bilious  constitutions,  therefore, 
gariick  is  improper:  for  it  frequently  produces  flatu- 
lence, headache,  thirst,  heat,  and  other  inflammatory 
symptoms.  A free  use  of  it  is  said  to  promote  the  piles 
in  habits  disposed  to  this  complaint.  Its  utility  as  a 
diuretic  in  dropsies  is  attested  by  unquestionable  au- 
thorities; and  its  febrifuge  power  has  not  only  been 
experienced  in  preventing  the  paroxysms  of  intermit- 
tents,  but  even  in  subduing  the  plague.  Bergius  says 
quartans  have  been  cured  by  it;  and  he  begins  by 
giving  one  bulb,  or  clove,  morning  and  evening,  adding 


ALL 


ALL 


every  day  one  more,  till  four  or  five  cloves  be  taken  at 
a dose : if  the  fever  then  vanishes,  the  dose  is  to  be 
diminished,  and  it  will  be  sufficient  to  take  one  or  two 
cloves,  twice  a day,  for  some  weeks.  Another  virtue  of 
garlick  is  that  of  an  anthelminthic.  It  has  likewise  been 
found  of  great  advantage  in  scorbutic  cases,  and  in  cal- 
culous disorders,  acting  in  these  not  only  as  a diuretic, 
but,  in  several  instances,  manifesting  a lithontriptic 
power.  That  the  juice  of  alliaceous  plants,  in  general, 
has  considerable  effects  upon  human  calculi,  is  to  be 
inferred  from  the  experiments  of  Lobb;  and  we  are 
abundantly  warranted  in  asserting  that  a decoction  of 
the  beards  of  leeks,  taken,  liberally,  and  its  use  per- 
severed in  for  a length  of  time,  has  been  found  remark- 
ably successful  in  calculous  and  gravelly  complaints. 
The  penetrating  and  diffusive  acrimony  of  garlick,  ren- 
ders its  external  application  useful  in  many  disorders, 
as  a rubefacient,  and  more  especially  as  applied  to  the 
soles  of  the  feet,  to  cause  a revulsion  from  the  head  or 
breast,  as  was  successfully  practised  and  recommended 
by  Sydenham.  As  soon  as  an  inflammation  appears, 
the  garlick  cataplasm  should  be  removed,  and  one  of 
bread  and  milk  be  applied,  to  obviate  excessive  pain. 
Garlick  has  also  been  variously  employed  externally, 
to  tumours  and  cutaneous  diseases:  and,  in  certain 
cases  of  deafness,  a clove,  or  small  bulb  of  this  root, 
wrapt  in  gauze  or  muslin,  and  introduced  into  the 
meatus  auditorius,  has  been  found  an  efficacious 
remedy.  Garlick  may  be  administered  in  different 
forms ; swallowing  the  clove  entire,  after  being  dipped 
in  oil,  is  recommended  as  most  effectual ; where  this 
cannot  be  done,  cutting  it  into  pieces  without  bruising 
it,  and  swallowing  these  may  be  found  to  answer 
equally  well,  producing  thereby  no  uneasiness  in  the 
fauces.  On  being  beaten  up  and  formed  into  pills,  the 
active  parts  of  this  medicine  soon  evaporate : this  Dr. 
Woodville,  in  his  Medical  Botany,  notices,  on  the 
authority  of  Cullen,  who  thinks  that  Lewis  has  fallen 
into  a gross  error,  in  supposing  dry  garlick  more  active 
than  fresh.  The  syrup  and  oxymel  of  garlick,  which 
formerly  had  a place  in  the  British  Pharmacopoeias,  are 
now  expunged.  The  cloves  of  garlick  are  by  some 
bruised,  and  applied  to  the  wrists,  to  cure  agues,  and 
to  the  bend  of  the  arm  to  cure  the  toothache : when 
held  in  the  hand,  they  are  said  to  relieve  hiccough ; 
when  beat  with  common  oil  into  a poultice,  they  re- 
solve sluggish  humours ; and,  if  laid  on  the  navels  of 
children,  they  are  supposed  to  destroy  worms  in  the 
intestines. 

Allium  victoriale.  Victorialis  long  a.  The  root, 
which  when  dried  loses  its  alliaceous  smell  and  taste, 
is  said  to  be  efficacious  in  allaying  the  abdominal 
spasms  of  gravid  females. 

ALLOCHROITE.  A massive  opaque  mineral  of  a 
grayish,  yellowish,  or  reddish  colour. 

[This  mineral  resembles  certain  varieties  of  the  gar- 
net in  some  of  its  physical  characters,  but  more  parti- 
cularly in  composition.  It  contains  silex  37.0,  lime 
30.0,  alumine  5.0,  oxide  of  iron  18.5,  oxide  of  manga- 
nese 6.25  ;=96.75.  Clean.  Min.  A.] 

ALLOEO'SIS.  (From  oAAoj,  another.)  Alteration 
in  the  state  of  a disease. 

Alloeo'tica.  (From  aAAoj,  another.)  Alteratives. 
Medicines  which  change  the  appearance  of  the  dis- 
ease. 

ALLOGNO'SIS.  (From  aAAos,  another,  and  yivui- 
to  know.)  Delirium  ; perversion  of  the  judgment ; 
incapability  of  distinguishing  persons. 

ALLOPHANE.  A mineral  of  a blue,  and  some- 
times a green  or  brown  colour. 

ALLO'PHASIS,  (From  <zAAoj,  another,  and 
to  speak.)  According  to  Hippocrates,  a delirium, 
where  the  patient  is  not  able  to  distinguish  one  tiling 
from  artother. 

ALLOTRIOPHA'GIA.  (From  aXXorpios,  foreign, 
and  <payu>,  to  eat.)  In  Vogel’s  Nosology,  it  signifies 
the  greedily  eating  unusual  things  for  food.  See  Pica. 

ALLOY.  Allay.  1.  Where'  any  precious  metal  is 
mixed  with  another  of  less  value,  the  assayers  call  the 
latter  the  alloy,  and  do  not  in  general  consider  it  in  any 
other  point  of  view  than  as  debasing  or  diminishing  the 
value  of  the  precious  metal. 

2.  Philosophical  chemists  have  availed  themselves  of 
this  term  to  distinguish  all  metallic  compounds  in  ge- 
neral. Thus  brass  is  called  an  alloy  of  copper  and 
zinc ; bell  metal  an  alloy  of  copper  and  tin. 

Every  alloy  is  distinguished  by  the  metal  which  pre- 
48 


dominates  in  its  composition,  or  which  gives  it  its  va- 
lue. Thus  English  jewellery  trinkets  are  ranked  under 
alloys  of  gold,  though  most  of  them  deserve  to  be 
placed  under  the  head  of  copper.  When  mercury  is 
one  of  the  component  metals,  the  alloy  is  called  amal- 
gam. Thus  we  have  an  amalgam  of  gold,  silver,  tin, 
(fee.  Since  there  are  about  thirty  different  permanent 
moials,  independent  of  those  evanescent  ones  that  con- 
stitute the  bases  of  the  alkalies  anc  sarths,  there  ought 
to  be  about  870  different  species  of  binary  alloy.  But 
only  132  species  have  been  hitherto  made  and  exa- 
mined. Some  metals  have  so  little  affinity  for  others, 
that  as  yet  no  compound  of  them  has  been  effected, 
whatever  pains  have  been  taken.  Most  of  these  ob- 
stacles to  alloying,  arise  from  the  difference  in  fusibility 
and  volatility.  Yet  a few  metals,  the  melting  point  of 
which  is  nearly  the  same,  refuse  to  unite.  It  is  obvi- 
ous that  two  bodies  will  not  combine,  unless  their  affi- 
nity or  reciprocal  attraction  be  stronger  than  the  cohe- 
sive attraction  of  their  individual  particles.  To  over- 
come this  cohesion  of  the  solid  bodies,  and  render  affi- 
nity predominant,  they  must  be  penetrated  by  caloric. 
If  oqg  be  very  difficult  of  fusion,  and  the  other  very 
volatile,  they  will  not  unite  unless  the  reciprocal 
attraction  be  exceedingly  strong.  But  if  their  degree 
of  fusibility  be  almost  the  same,  they  are  easily  placed 
in  the  circumstances  most  favourable  for  making  an 
alloy.  If  we  are  therefore  far  from  knowing  all  the 
binary  alloys  which  are  possible,  we  are  still  furthei 
removed  from  knowing  all  the  triple,  quadruple,  &c. 
which  may  exist.  It  must  be  confessed,  moreover, 
that  this  department  of  chemistry  has  been  imperfectly 
cultivated. 

Besides,  alloys  are  not,  as  far  as  we  know,  definitely 
regulated  like  oxydes  in  the  proportions  of  their  com- 
ponent parts.  100  parts  of  mercury  will  combine  with 
4 or  8 parts  of  oxygen,  to  form  two  distinct  oxydes,  the 
black  and  the  red  ; but  with  no  greater,  less,  or  inter- 
mediate proportions.  But  100  parts  of  mercury  will 
unite  with  1,  2,  3,  or  with  any  quantity  up  to  100  or 
1000,  of  tin  or  lead.  The  alloys  have  the  closest  rela- 
tions in  their  physical  properties  with  the  metals. 
They  are  all  solid  at  the  temperature  of  the  atmos- 
phere, except  some  amalgams  ; they  possess  metallic 
lustre,  even  when  reduced  to  a coarse  powder:  are 
completely  opaque,  and  more  or  less  dense,  according 
to  the  metals  which  compose  them  ; are  excellent  con- 
ductors of  electricity  ; crystallize  more  or  less  per- 
fectly ; some  are  brittle,  others  ductile  and  malleable ; 
some  have  a peculiar  odour  ; several  are  very  sono- 
rous and  elastic.  When  an  alloy  consists  of  metals 
differently  fusible,  it  is  usually  malleable  while  cold, 
hut  brittle  while  hot ; as  is  exemplified  in  brass. 

The  density  of  an  alloy  is  sometimes  greater,  some- 
times less  than  the  mean  density  of  its  components, 
showing  that,  at  the  instant  of  their  union,  a diminu- 
tion or  augmentation  of  volume  takes  place.  The  re- 
lation between  the  expansion  of  the  separate  metals 
and  that  of  their  alloys,  has  been  investigated  only  in 
a very  few  cases.  Alloys  containing  a volatile  metal 
are  decomposed,  in  whole  or  in  part,  at  a strong  heat. 
This  happens  with  those  of  arsenic,  mercury,  tellurium, 
and  zinc.  Those  that  consist  of  two  differently  fusible 
metals,  may  often  be  decomposed  by  exposing  them  to 
a temperature  capable  of  melting  only  one  of  them. 
This  operation  is  called  eliquation.  It  is  practised  on 
the  great  scale  to  extract  silver  from  copper.  The  ar- 
gentiferous copper  is  melted  with  3 1-2  times  its  weight 
of  lead ; and  the  triple  alloy  is  exposed  to  a sufficient 
heat.  The  lead  carries  off  the  silver  in  its  fusion,  and 
leaves  the  copper  under  the  form  of  a spongy  lump 
The  silver  is  afterward  recovered  from  the  lead  by 
another  operation. 

Some  alloys  oxydize  more  readily  by  heat  and  air, 
than  when  the  metals  are  separately  treated.  Thus  3 
of  lead  and  1 of  tin,  at  a dull  red,  burn  visibly,  and 
are  almost  instantly  oxydized.  Each  by  itself  in  the 
same  circumstances,  would  oxydize  slowly,  and  with- 
out the  disengagement  of  light. 

The  formation  of  an  alloy  must  be  regulated  by  the 
nature  of  the  particular  metals. 

Tlie  degree  of  affinity  between  metals  may  be  in  some 
measure  estimated  by  the  greater  or  less  facility  with 
which,  when  of  different  degrees  of  fusibility  or  vola- 
tility, they  unite,  or  with  which  they  can  atler  union 
be  separated  by  heat.  The  greater  or  less  tendency  to 
separate  into  diff  erent  proportional  alloys,  by  long-con- 


ALO 


ALO 


tinued  fusion,  may  also  give  some  information  on  this 
subject.  Mr.  Hatchett  remarked,  in  his  admirable 
researches  on  metallic  alloys,  that  gold  made  standard 
with  the  usual  precautions  by  silver;  copper,  lead,  anti- 
mony, &c.  and  then  cast  into  vertical  bars,  was  by  no 
means  a uniform  compound  ; but  that  the  top  of  the 
bar,  corresponding  to  the  metal  at  the  bottom  of  the 
crucible,  contained  the  larger  proportion  of  gold. 
Hence,  for  thorough  combination,  two  red-hot  cruci- 
bles should  be  employed  ; and  the  liquified  metals 
should  be  alternately  poured  from  the  one  into  the 
other.  And  to  prevent  unnecessary  oxydizement  by 
exposure  to  air,  the  crucibles  should  contain,  besides 
the  metal,  a mixture  of  common  salt  and  pounded 
charcoal.  The  melted  alloy  should  also  be  occasion- 
ally stirred  up  with  a rod  of  pottery. 

The  most  direct  evidence  of  a chemical  change  hav- 
ing taken  place  in  the  two  metals  by  combination,  is 
when  the  alloy  melts  at  a much  lower  temperature 
than  the  fusing  points  of  its  components.  Iron,  which 
is  nearly  infusible,  when  alloyed  with  gold  acquires 
almost  the  fusibility  of  this  metal.  Tin  and  lead  form 
solder,  an  alloy  more  fusible  than  either  of  its  compo- 
nents; but  the  triple  compound  of  tin,  lead,  and  bis- 
muth, is  most  remarkable  on  this  account.  The  ana- 
logy is  here  strong,  with  the  increase  of  solubility 
which  salts  acquire  by  mixture,  as  is  exemplified  in 
the  uncrystallizable  residue  of  saline  solutions,  or  mo-  | 
ther  waters,  as  they  are  called.  Sometimes  two  me- 
tals will  not  directly  unite,  which  yet,  by  the  interven- 
tion of  a third,  are  made  to  combine.  This  happens 
with  mercury  and  iron,  as  has  been  shown  by  Messrs. 
Aiken,  who  effected  this  difficult  amalgamation  by 
previously  uniting  the  iron  to  tin  or  zinc. 

The  tenacity  of  alloys  is  generally,  though  not 
always,  inferior  to  the  mean  of  the  separate  metals. 
One  part  of  lead  will  destroy  the  compactness  and 
tenacity  of  a thousand  of  gold.  Brass  made  with  a 
small  proportion  of  zinc,  is  more  ductile  than  copper 
itself ; but  when  one-third  of  zinc  enters  into  its  com- 
position, it  becomes  brittle. 

In  common  cases,  the  specific  gravity  affords  a good 
criterion  whereby  to  judge  of  the  proportion  in  an 
alloy,  consisting  of  two  metals  of  different  densities. — 
Ure. 

ALLSPICE.  See  Myrtes  Pimenta. 

ALLUVIAL.  That  which  is  deposited  in  valleys, 
or  in  plains,  from  neighbouring  mountains,  or  the  over- 
flowing of  rivers.  Gravel,  loam,  clay,  sand,  brown 
coal,  wood  coal,  bog  iron  ore,  and  calc  tuff,  compose 
the  alluvial  deposites. 

A'LMA.  The  first  motion  of  a foetus  to  free.itself 
from  its  confinement. 

2.  Water. — Rulandus. 

Almabri.  A stone  like  amber. 

Alma'nda  cathartica.  A plant  growing  on  the 
shores  of  Cayenne  and  Surinam,  used  by  the  inhabit- 
ants as  a remedy  for  the  colic ; supposed  to  be  ca- 
thartic. 

Alme'ne.  Rock  salt. 

ALMOND.  See  Amygdalus. 

Almond , bitter.  See  Amygdalus. 

Almond , sweet.  See  Amygdalus. 

Almond  paste.  This  cosmetic  for  softening  the  skin 
and  preventing  chops,  is  made  of  four  ounces  of 
blanched  bitter  almonds,  the  white  of  an  egg,  rose  wa- 
ter and  rectified  spirits,  equal  parts,  as  much  as  is  suf- 
ficient. 

Almonds  of  the  ears.  A popular  name  for  the  ton- 
sils, which  have  been  so  called  from  their  resemblance 
to  an  almond  in  shape.  See  Tonsils. 

Almonds  of  the  throat.  A vulgar  name  for  the  ton- 
sils. See  Tonsils. 

Alnabati.  In  Avicenna  and  Serapion,  this  word 
means  the  siliqua  dulcis , a gentle  laxative.  See  Ce- 
ratonia  siliqua. 

ALNUS.  (Alno,  Italian.)  The  alder.  The  phar- 
macopceial  name  of  two  plants,  sometimes  used  in  me- 
dicine, though  rarely  employed  in  the  present  practice. 

1.  Alnus  rotundifolia ; glutinosa ; viridis.  The 
common  alder-tree.  See  Retula  alnus. 

2.  Alnus  nigra.  The  black  or  berry-bearing  alder. 
See  Rhamnus  Frangula. 

A'LOE.  (Aloe,  es.  fr.  from  ahlah , a Hebrew  word, 
signifying  growing  near  the  sea.)  The  name  of  a ge- 
nus of  plants  of  the  Linnaean  system.  Class  Hexan- 
dria  t Order,  Monogynia.  The  Aloe. 

D 


Aloe  Caballina.  See  Alog  perfoliata. 

Aloe  Ouineensis.  See  Aloe  perfoliata. 

Aloe  perfoliata.  Aloe  Succotorina ; Aloe  Zoco- 
torina.  Succotorine  aloes  is  obtained  from  a variety 
of  the  Aloe  perfoliata  of  Linnaeus ; — -foliis  caulinis 
dentatis,  amplexicaulibus  vaginantibus1  floribus  co - 
rymbosis  cernuis,  pedunculatis  subcylmdricis.  It  is 
brought  over  wrapped  in  skins,  from  the  Island  of  So 
cotora,  in  the  Indian  Ocean  ; it  is  of  a bright  surface, 
and  in  some  degree  pellucid ; in  the  lump  of  a yellow- 
ish red  colour,  with  a purplish  cast ; when  reduced 
into  powder,  it  is  of  a golden  colour.  It  is  hard  and 
friable  in  very  cold  weather  ; but  in  summer  it  softens 
very  easily  between  the  fingers.  It  is  extremely  bitter, 
and  also  accompanied  with  an  aromatic  flavour,  but 
not  so  much  as  to  cover  its  disagreeable  taste.  Its 
scent  is  rather  agreeable,  being  somewhat  similar  to 
that  of  myrrh.  Of  late  this  sort  has  been  very  scarce, 
and  its  place  in  a great  measure  supplied  by  another 
variety,  brought  from  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  which 
is  said  to  be  obtained  from  the  Aloe  spicata  of  Lin- 
naeus, by  inspissating  the  expressed  juice  of  the  leaves, 
whence  it  is  termed  in  the  London  Pharmacopoeia 
Eztractum  aloes  spicata. 

The  Aloe  liepatica , vel  Barbadensis , the  common  or 
Barbadoes  or  hepatic  aloes,  was  thought  to  come  from 
a variety  of  the  Aloe  perfoliata  described  '.—floribus 
| pedunculatis , cernuis  corymbosis,  subcylindricis,  foliis 
spinosis,  covfertis , dentatis,  vaginantibus,planis , ma- 
culatis : but  Dr.  Smith  has  announced,  that  it  will  be 
shown  in  Sibthorp’s  Flora  Graeca,  to  be  from  a distinct 
species,  the  Aloe  vulgaris,  or  true  aXorj  of  Dioscorides ; 
and  it  is  therefore  termed  in  the  London  Pharmaco- 
poeia, Aloes  vulgaris  extractum.  The  best  is  brought 
from  Barbadoes  in  large  gourd-shells ; an  inferior  sort 
in  pots,  and  the  worst  in  casks.  It  is  darker  coloured 
than  the  Socotorine,  and  not  so  bright : it  is  also  drier 
and  more  compact,  though  sometimes  the  sort  in  casks 
is  soft  and  clammy.  To  the  taste  it  is  intensely  bitter 
and  nauseous,  being  almost  wholly  without  that  aro- 
ma which  is  observed  in  the  Socotorine.  To  the  smell 
it  is  strong  and  disagreeable. 

The  Aloe  caballina,  vel  Guineensis , or  horse-aloes, 
is  easily  distinguished  from  both  the  foregoing,  by  its 
strong  rank  smell ; in  other  respects  it  agrees  pretty 
much  with  the  hepatic,  and  is  now  not  unfrequently 
sold  in  its  place.  Sometimes  it  is  prepared  so  pure 
and  bright  as  scarcely  to  be  distinguishable  by  the  eye, 
even  from  the  Socotorine,  but  its  offensive  smell  be- 
trays it ; and  if  this  also  should  be  dissipated  by  art, 
its  wanting  the  aromatic  flavour  of  the  finer  aloes  will 
be  a sufficient  criterion.  This  aloe  is  not  admitted 
into  the  materia  medica,  and  is  employed  chiefly  by 
farriers. 

The  general  nature  of  these  three  kinds  is  nearly  the 
same.  Their  particular  differences  only  consist  in  the 
different  proportions  of  gum  to  their  resin,  and  in  their 
flavour.  The  smell  and  taste  reside  principally  in  the 
gum,  as  do  the  principal  virtues  of  the  aloes.  Twelve 
ounces  of  Barbadoes  aloes  yield  nearly  4 ounces  of 
resin,  and  8 of  gummy  extract.  The  same  quantity  of 
Socotorine  aloes  yields  3 ounces  of  resin  and  9 of  gum- 
my extract. 

Aloes  is  a well-known  stimulating  purgative,  a pro- 
perty which  it  possesses  not  only  when  taken  inter- 
nally, but  also  by  external  application.  The  cathartic 
quality  of  aloes  does  not  reside  in  the  resinous  part  of 
the  drug,  but  in  the  gum,  for  the  pure  resin  has  little 
or  no  purgative  power.  Its  medium  dose  is  from  5 to 
15  grains,  nor  does  a larger  quantity  operate  more  effec- 
tually. Its  operation  is  exerted  on  the  large  intestines ; 
principally  on  the  rectum.  In  small  doses  long  conti- 
nued, it  often  produces  much  heat  and  irritation,  par- 
ticularly about  the  anus,  from  which  it  sometimes  oc- 
casions a bloody  discharge ; therefore,  to  those  who 
were  subject  to  piles,  or  of  an  haunorrhagic  diathesis, 
or  even  in  a state  of  pregnancy,  its  exhibition  has  been 
productive  of  considerable  mischief ; but  on  the  con- 
trary, by  those  of  a phlegmatic  .constitution,  or  those 
suffering  from  uterine  obstructions  (for  the  stimulant 
action  of  aloes,  it  has  been  supposed,  may  be  extended 
to  the  uterus ; and  in  some  cases  of  dyspepsia,  palsy, 
gout,  and  worms,  aloes  may  be  employed  as  a laxative 
with  peculiar  advantage.  In  all  diseases  of  the  bilious 
tribe,  aloes  is  the  strongest  purge,  and  the  best  prepara- 
tions for  this  purpose  are  the  pilula  ex  aloe  cum  myrrha, 
the  tinctura  aloes,  or  the  extractum  colocynthidis 


ALO 


ALT 


eomposiium.  Its  efficacy  in  jaundice  is  very  consi- 
derable, as  it  proves  a succedaneum  to  the  bile,  of 
which  in  that  disease  there  is  a defective  supply  to  the 
intestine  either  in  quantity  or  quality.  Aloes  there- 
fore may  be  considered  as  injurious  where  inflamma- 
' tion  or  irritation  exists  in  the  bowels  or  neighbouring 
parts,  in  pregnancy,  or  in  habits  disposed  to  piles ; but 
highly  serviceable  in  all  hypochondriac  affections,  ca- 
chectic habits,  and  persons  labouring  under  oppression 
of  the  stomach  caused  by  irregularity.  Aromatics  cor- 
rect the  offensive  qualities  of  aloes  the  most  perfectly. 
The  canella  alba  answers  tolerably,  and  without  any 
inconvenience;  but  some  rather  prefer  the  essential 
oils  for  this  purpose.  Dr.  Cullen  says,  “ If  any  medi- 
cine be  entitled  to  the  appellation  of  a stomach  purge , 
it  is  certainly  aloes.  It  is  remarkable  with  regard  to 
it,  that  it  operates  almost  to  as  good  a purpose  in  a 
small  as  in  a large  dose  ; that  one  or  two  grains  will 
produce  one  considerable  dejection,  and  20  grains  will 
do  no  more,  except  it  be  that  in  the  last  dose  the  opera- 
tion will  be  attended  with  gripes,  &c.  Its  chief  use 
is  to  render  the  peristaltic  motion  regular,  and  it  is 
one  of  the  best  cures  in  habitual  costiveness.  There  is 
a difficulty  we  meet  with  in  the  exhibition  of  purga- 
tives, viz.  that  they  will  not  act  but  in  their  full  dose, 
and  will  not  produce  half  their  effect  if  given  in  half 
the  dose.  For  this  purpose  we  are  chiefly  confined  to 
aloes.  Neutral  salts  in  half  their  dose  will  not  have 
half  their  effect ; although  even  from  these,  by  large 
dilution,  we  may  obtain  this  property  ; but  besides 
them  and  our  present  medicine,  I know  no  other 
which  has  any  title  to  it  except  sulphur.  Aloes  some- 
times cannot  be  employed.  It  has  the  effect  of  stimu- 
lating the  rectum  more  than  other  purges,  and  with 
justice  has  been  accused  of  exciting  hemorrhoidal 
swellings,  that  we  ought  to  abstain  from  it  in  such 
cases,  except  when  we  want  to  promote  them.  Aloes 
has  the  effect  of  rarifying  the  blood  and  disposing  to 
hemorrhagy,  and  hence  it  is  not  recommended  in  ute- 
rine fluxes.  Fcetid  gums  are  of  the  same  nature  in 
producing  haemorrhagy,  and  perhaps  this  is  the  founda- 
tion of  their  emmenagogue  power.”  Aloes  is  admi- 
nistered either  simply  in  powders,  which  is  too  nause- 
ous, or  else  in  composition ; — 1.  With  purgatives,  as 
soap,  scammony,  colocynth,  or  rhubarb.  2.  With 
aromatics,  as  canella,  ginger,  or  essential  oils.  3. 
With  bitters,  as  gentian.  4-  With  emmenagogues,  as 
iron,  myrrh,  wine,  &c.  It  may  be  exhibited  in  pills  as 
the  most  convenient  form,  or  else  dissolved  in  wine,  or 
diluted  alkohol.  The  officinal  preparations  of  aloes 
are  the  following : — 

1.  Pilula?  AloSs. 

2.  Pilula  Alogs  Composita 

3.  Pilulae  Aloes  cum  Assafoetidd. 

4.  Pilula  Aloes  cum  Colocynthide. 

5.  Pilula  Aloes  cum  Myrrha. 

6 Tinctura  Aloes. 

7.  Tinctura  AloSs  AStherialis. 

8.  Tinctura  Aloes  et  Myrrha. 

9.  Vinum  Alo£s. 

JO.  Extractum  A logs. 

11.  Decoctum  AloSs  Compositum. 

12.  Pul  vis  Aloes  Compositus. 

13.  Pulvis  Aloes  cum  Canella. 

14.  Pulvis  Aloes  cum  Guaiaco. 

15.  Tinctura  AloSs  Composita. 

16.  Extractum  Colocynthidis  Compositum. 

17.  Tinctura  Benzoini  Composita. 

Aloe  Socotorina.  See  Aloe  perfoliata. 

Aloe  Zocotorina.  See  Aloe  perfoliata. 

Aloedx'ria.  (From  «A or/,  the  aloe.)  Compound 

purging  medicines : so  called  from  having  aloes  as  the 
chief  ingredient. 

Aloephangina.  Medicines  formed  by  a combina- 
tion of  aloes  and  aromatics. 

ALOES.  Fel  naturae.  The  inspissated  juice  of  the 
aloe  plant.  Aloes  is  distinguished  into  three  species, 
socotorine , hepatic , and  caballine ; of  which  the  two 
first  are  directed  for  officinal  use  in  our  pharmaco- 
poeias. See  AloP  perfoliata. 

Aloes  lignum.  See  Lignum  Aloes. 

ALOE'TIC.  A medicine  wherein  aloes  is  the  chief 
or  fundamental  ingredient. 

Alogotro'phia.  (From  aAo.yoj,  disproportionate, 
and  rpe0a>,  to  nourish.)  Unequal  nourishment,  as  in 
the  rickets. 

ALO  PECES.  (From  aXw rtf,  the  fox.)  The  psoce 
50 


muscles  are  so  called  by  Fallopius  and  Vesalius  be> 
cause  in  the  fox  they  are  particularly  strftng. 

ALOPECIA.  (From  aXunril,  a fox:  because  the 
fox  is  subject  to  a distemper  that  resembles  it ; or.  as 
some  say,  because  the  fox  s urine  will  occasion  bald 
ness.)  Baldness,  or  the  falling  off  of  the  hair.  A ge- 
nus of  disease  in  Sauvages’  Nosology. 

ALOPECUROIDEA.  (From  alopecurusy  the  fox- 
tail grass.)  Resembling  the  alopecurus.  The  name 
of  a division  of  grasses. 

Alo'sa.  (From  aAtcncw,  to  take:  because  it  is  ra- 
venous.) See  Clupea  alosa- 

Alosa'nthi.  (From  aXs,  salt,  and  avOos,  a flower.) 
Alosanthum.  Flowers  of  salt. 

A'losat.  Quicksilver. 

Alosohoc.  Quicksilver. 

A'LPHITA.  ( Alphita , the  plural  of  aXapirov,  the 
meal  of  barley  in  general ) By  Hippocrates  this  term 
is  applied  to  barley-meal  either  toasted  or  fried.  Ga- 
len says  that  tcpipva  is  coarse  meal,  aXivpov  is  fine 
meal,  and  aXcpira  is  a middling  sort. 

Alfhi'tidon.  Alphitedtcm.  It  is  when  a bone  is 
broken  into  small  fragments  like  alphite  or  bran. 

Alfho'nsin.  The  name  of  an  instrument  for  ex- 
tracting balls.  It  is  so  called  from  the  name  of  its  in- 
ventor, Alphonso  Ferrier,  a Neapolitan  physician.  It 
consists  of  three  branches,  which  separate  from  each 
other  by  their  elasticity,  but  are  capable  of  being  closed 
by  means  of  a tube  in  which  they  are  included. 

ALPHOSIS.  The  specific  name  of  a disease  in  the 
genus  Epichrosis  of  Good’s  Nosology. 

A'LPHUS.  (AX <f>os  ; from  aXtyaivto,  to  change  : be- 
cause it  changes  the  colour  of  the  skin.)  A species  of 
leprosy,  called  by  the  ancients  vitilago , and  which 
they  divided  into  alphas , melas,  and  leuce.  See  Lepra. 

A'lpini  balsamum.  Balm  of  Gilead. 

ALPI'NUS,  Prosper,  a Venetian,,  born  in  1553, 
celebrated  for  his  skill  in  medicine  and  botany.  After 
graduating  at  Padua,  he  went  to  Egypt,  and  during 
three  years  carefully  studied  the  plants  of  that  country, 
and  the  modes  of  treating  diseases  there  ; of  which 
he  afterward  published  a very  learned  account.  He 
has  left  also  some  other  less  important  works.  He 
was  appointed  physician  to  the  celebrated  Andrew 
Doria  ; and  subsequently  botanical  professor  at  Padua, 
which  office  he  retained  till  his  death  in  1616. 

A'LSINE.  ( Alsine , es.  f. ; from  aXoos,  a grove : so 
called  because  it  grows  in  great  abundance  in  woods 
and  shady  places.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Tri- 
gynia.  Chick  weed. 

Alsine  media.  Morsus  gallinae  ccntunculus.  The 
systematic  name  for  the  plant  called  duckweed,  which, 
if  boiled  tender,  may  be  eaten  like  spinach,  and  forms 
also  an  excellent  emollient  poultice. 

ALSTON,  Charles,  born  in  Scotland  in  1683,  was 
early  attached  to  the  study  of  botany,  and  distinguished 
himself  by  opposiug  the  sexual  system  of  Linnaeus. 
He  afterward  studied  under  Boerhaave  at  Leyden  ; 
then  returning  to  his  native  country,  was  materially 
instrumental,  in  conjunction  with  the  celebrated  Alex- 
ander Monro,  in  establishing  the  medical  school  at 
Edinburgh,  where  he  was  appointed  professor  of  bo- 
tany and  materia  medica.  He  died  in  17G0.  His 
“ Lectures  on  the  Materia  Medica,”  a posthumous 
work,  abound  in  curious  and  useful  facts,  which  will 
long  preserve  their  reputation. 

A'LTERATIVE.  {Alter  ans ; from  altero,  to 
change.)  Alterative  medicines  are  those  remedies 
which  are  given  with  a view  to  re-establish  the  healthy 
functions  of  the  animal  economy,  without  producing 
any  sensible  evacuation. 

Altern®  plants.  Alternate  leaved  plants.  The 
name  of  a class  of  plants  in  Sauvages’  Method  us 
foliorum. 

ALTERNANS.  Alternate ; placed  alternately.  A 
term  applied  by  botanists  to  leaves,  gems,  St c. 

ALTERNUS.  Alternate.  In  botany,  this  term  is 
applied  to  branches  and  leaves  when  they  stand  singly 
on  each  side,  in  such  a manner  that  between  every 
two  on  one  side  there  is  but  one  on  the  opposite 
side,  as  on  the  branches  of  the  Althaea  officinalis. 
Rhamnus  catharticus,  and  leaves  of  the  JUaloa  nx 
tundi folia. 

ALTHAEA.  ( Althaea , <r.  f. ; from  aX9tu>,  to  heal : 
so  called  from  its  supposed  qualities  in  healing.)  I 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  of  the  Linmean  system 


ALU 


ALU 

Class,  Monadelphia ; Order,  Polyandria.  Marsh- 
mallow. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  marsh-mallow. 
See  Althea  Officinalis. 

Althjea  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  marsh-mallow.  Malvaviscus  ; Aristalthcea.  Al- 
thaea : — foliis  simplicibus  tomentosis.  The  mucila- 
ginous matter  with  which  this  plant  abounds,  is  the 
medicinal  part  of  the  plant ; it  is  commonly  employed 
for  its  emollient  and  demulcent  qualities  in  tickling 
coughs,  hoarseness,  and  catarrhs,  in  dysentery,  and 
difficulty  and  heat  of  urine.  The  leaves  and  root  are 
generally  selected  for  use.  They  relax  the  passages  in 
nephritic  complaints,  in  which  last  case  a decoction  is 
the  best  preparation.  Two  or  three  ounces  of  the 
fresh  roots  may  be  boiled  in  a sufficient  quantity  of 
water  to  a quart,  to  which  one  ounce  of  gum-arabic 
may  be  added.  The  following  is  given  where  it  is  re- 
quired that  large  quantities  should  be  used.  An  ounce 
of  the  dried  roots  is  to  be  boiled  in  water,  enough  to 
leave  two  or  three  pints  to  be  poured  off  for  use : if 
more  of  the  root  be  used,  the  liquor  will  be  disagree- 
ably slimy.  If  sweetened,  by  adding  a little  more  of 
the  root  of  liquorice,  it  will  be  very  palatable.  The 
root  had  formerly  a place  in  many  of  the  compounds 
in  the  pharmacopoeias,  but  now  it  is  only  directed  in 
the  form  of  syrup. 

Althe'xis.  (From  aXdsiv,  to  cure,  or  heal.)  Hip- 
pocrates often  uses  this  word  to  signify  the  cure  of  a 
distemper. 

ALU DEL.  A hollow  sphere  of  stone,  glass,  or 
earthenware,  with  a short  neck  projecting  at  each 
end,  by  means  of  which  one  globe  might  be  set  upon 
the  other.  The  uppermost  has  no  opening  at  the  top. 
They  were  used  in  former  times  for  the  sublimation  of 
several  substances. 

ALUM.  See  Alumen. 

Alum  earth.  A massive  mineral  of  a blackisn 
brown  colour,  a dull  lustre,  an  earthy  and  somewhat 
slaty  fracture,  sectile  and  rather  soft,  oontainiug  char- 
coal silica,  alumina,  oxyde  of  iron,  sulphur,  sulphates 
of  lime,  potassa,  and  iron,  magnesia,  muriate  of  po- 
tassa,  and  water. 

Alum  slate.  A massive  mineral  of  a bluish  black 
colour,  or  slate  containing  alum. 

ALU  MEN.  (Alum,  an  Arabian  word.)  Assos ; 
Aiub  ; Aseb  ; Elanula ; Sulphas  alumina:  acidulus 
cum  potassa ; Super-sulphas  alumina:  et  potassa ; 
Argilla  vitriolata.  Alum.  This  important  salt  has 
been  the  object  of  innumerable  researches  both  with 
regard  to  its  fabrication  and  composition  It  is  pro- 
duced, but  in  a very  small  quantity,  in  the  native  state  ; 
and  this  is  mixed  with  heterogeneous  matters.  It 
effloresces  in  various  forms  upon  ores  during  calcina- 
tion, but  it  seldom  occurs  crystallized.  The  greater 
part  of  this  salt  is  factitious,  being  extracted  from  mi- 
nerals called  alum  ores,  such  as; 

1.  Sulphuretted  clay.  This  constitutes  the  purest 
of  all  aluminous  ores,  namely,  that  of  La  Tolfa,  near 
Civita  Vecchia,  in  Italy.  It  is  white,  compact,  and  as 
hard  as  indurated  clay,  whence  it  is  called  pctra  alumi- 
naris.  It  is  tasteless  and  mealy;  one  hundred  parts 
of  this  ore  contain  above  forty  of  sulphur  and  fifty  of 
clay,  a small  quantity  of  potassa,  and  a little  iron. 
Bergman  says  it  contains  forty-three  of  sulphur  in  one 
hundred,  thirty-five  of  clay,  and  twenty-two  of  siliceous 
earth.  This  ore  is  first  torrefied  to  acidify  the  sulphur, 
which  then  acts  on  the  clay,  and  forms  the  alum. 

2.  The  pyritaceousclay,  which  is  found  at  Schwem- 
sal,  in  Saxony,  at  the  depth  of  ten  or  twelve  feet.  It 
is  a black  and  hard,  but  brittle  substance,  consisting  of 
clay,  pyrites,  and  bitumen.  It  is  exposed  to  the  air 
for  two  years,  by  which  means  the  pyrites  are  decom- 
posed, and  the  alum  is  formed.  The  alum  ores  of 
Hesse  and  Liege  are  of  this  kind  ; but  they  are  first 
torrefied,  which  is  said  to  be  a disadvantageous 
method. 

3.  The  schistus  aluminaris  contains  a variable  pro- 
portion of  petroleum  and  pyrites  intimately  mixed  with 
it.  When  the  last  are  in  a very  large  quantity,  this 
ore  is  rejected  as  containing  too  much  iron.  Professor 
Bergman  very  properly  suggested,  that  by  adding  a 
proportion  of  clay,  this  ore  may  turn  out  advantage- 
ously for  producing  alum.  But  if  the  petrol  be  consi- 
derable, it  must  be  torrefied.  The  mines  of  Becket  in 
Normandy,  and  those  of  Whitby,  in  Yorkshire,  are 
of  this  species. 


4.  Volcanic  aluminous  ore.  Such  is  that  of  Salfa- 
terra  near  Naples.  It  is  in  the  form  of  a white  saline 
earth,  after  it  has  effloresced  in  the  air ; or  else  it  is  in 
a stony  form. 

5.  Bituminous  alum  ore  is  called  shale,  and  is  in  the 
form  of  a schistus,  impregnated  with  so  much  oily 
matter,  or  bitumen,  as  to  be  inflammable.  It  is  found 
in  Sweden,  and  also  in  the  coal  mines  at  Whitehaven, 
and  elsewhere. 

Chaptal  has  fabricated  alum  on  a large  scale  from 
its  component  parts.  For  this  purpose  he  constructed 
a chamber  91  feet  long,  48  wide,  and  31  high  in  the 
middie.  The  walls  are  of  common  masonry,  lined 
with  a pretty  thick  coating  of  plaster.  The  floor  is 
paved  with  bricks,  bedded  in  a mixture  of  raw  and 
burnt  clay  ; and  this  pavement  is  covered  with  ano- 
ther, the  joints  of  which  overlap  those  of  the  first,  and 
instead  of  mortar,  the  bricks  are  joined  with  a cement 
of  equal  parts  of  pitch,  turpentine,  and  wax,  which, 
after  having  been  boiled  till  it  ceases  to  swell,  is  used 
hot.  The  roof  is  of  wood,  but  the  beams  are  very 
close  together,  and  grooved  lengthwise,  the  interme- 
diate space  being  filled  up  by  planks  fitted  into  the 
grooves,  so  that  the  whole  is  put  together  without  a 
nail.  Lastly,  the  whole  of  the  inside  is  covered  with 
three  or  four  successive  coatings  of  the  cement  above- 
mentioned,  the  first  being  laid  on  as  hot  as  possible  ; 
and  the  outside  of  the  wooden  roof  was  varnished  in 
the  same  manner.  The  purest  and  whitest  clay  being 
made  into  a paste  with  water,  and  formed  into  balls 
half  a foot  in  diameter,  these  are  calcined  in  a fur- 
nace, broken  to  pieces,  and  a stratum  of  the  fragments 
laid  on  the  floor.  A due  proportion  of  sulphur  is  then 
ignited  in  the  chamber,  in  the, Same  manner  as  for  the 
fabrication  of  sulphuric  acid  ; and  the  fragments  of 
burnt  clay,  imbibing  this  as  it  forms,  begin  after  a few 
days  to  crack  and  open,  and  exhibit  an  efflorescence 
of  sulphate  of  alumina.  When  the  earth  has  com- 
pletely effloresced,  it  is  taken  out  of  the  chamber,  ex- 
posed for  some  time  in  an  open  shed,  that  it  may  be 
the  more  intimately  penetrated  by  the  acid,  and  is  then 
lixiviated  and  crystallized  in  the  usual  manner.  The 
cement  answers  the  purpose  of  read  on  this  occasion 
very  effectually,  and,  according  to  Chaptal,  costs  no 
more  than  lead  would  at  three  farthings  a pound. 

Curaudau  has  lately  recommended  a process  for 
making  alum  without  evaporation.  One  hundred 
parts  of  clay  and  five  of  muriate  of  soda  are  kneaded 
into  a paste  with  water,  and  formed  into  loaves. 
With  these  a reverberatory  furnace  is  filled,  and  a 
brisk  fire  is  kept  up  for  two  hours.  Being  powdered, 
and  put  into  a sound  cask,  one-fourth  of  their  weight 
of  sulphuric  acid  is  poured  over  them  by  degrees,  stir- 
ring the  mixture  well  at  each  addition.  As  soon  as 
the  muriatic  gas  is  dissipated,  a quantity  of  water 
equal  to  the  acid  is  added,  and  the  mixture  stirred  as 
before.  When  the  heat  is  abated,  a little  more  water 
is  poured  in ; and  this  is  repeated  till  eight  or  ten  times 
as  much  water  as  there  was  acid  is  added.  When 
the  whole  has  settled,  the  clear  liquor  is  drawn  off 
into  leaden  vessels,  and  a quantity  of  water  equal  to 
this  liquor  is  poured  on  the  sediment.  The  two  liquors 
being  mixed,  a solution  of  potassa  is  added  to  them, 
the  alkali  in  which  is  equal  to  one-fourth  of  the  weight 
of  the  sulphuric  acid.  Sulphate  of  potassa  may  ba 
used,  but  twice  as  much  of  this  as  of  the  alkali  is 
necessary.  After  a certain  time,  the  liquor,  by  cool- 
ing, attends  crystals  of  alum  equal  to  three  times  the 
weight  of  the  acid  used.  It  is  refined  by  dissolving  it 
in  the  smallest  possible  quantity  of  boiling  water. 
The  residue  may  be  washed  with  more  water,  to  be 
employed  in  lixiviating  a fresh  portion  of  the  ingre 
dients. 

Its  sp.  gravity  is  about  1.71.  It  reddens  the  vege- 
table blues.  It  is  soluble  in  16  parts  of  water  at  60°, 
and  in  3-4  of  its  weight  at  212(*.  It  effloresces  superfi- 
cially on  exposure  to  air,  but  the  interior  remains  long 
unchanged.  Its  water  of  crystallization  is  sufficient  at 
a gentle  heat  to  fuse  it.  If  the  heat  be  increased  it 
froths  up,  and  loses  fully  45  per  cent,  of  its  weight  in 
water.  The  spongy  residue  is  called  burnt  or  calcined 
alum , and  is  used  by  surgeons  as  a mild  escharotic. 
A violent  heat  separates  a great  portion  of  its  acid. 

Alum  was  thus  analyzed  by  Berzelius : 1st,  20  parts 
(grammes)  of  pure  alum  lost,  by  the  heat  of  a spirit 
lamp,  9 parts,  which  gives  45  per  cent,  of  water.  The 
dry  salt  was  dissolved  in  water,  and  its  acid  precipi- 


D2 


ALU 


ALU 


tated  by  muriate  of  barytes  ; the  sulphate  of  which, 
obtained  after  ignition,  weighed  20  parts ; indicating 
in  100  pans  34.3  of  dry  sulphuric  acid.  2 d,  Ten  parts 
of  alum  were  dissolved  in  water,  and  digested  with  an 
excess  of  ammonia.  Alumina,  well  washed  and 
burned,  equivalent  to  10.67  per  cent,  was  obtained.  In 
another  experiment,  10.86  per  cent,  resulted.  3d,  Ten 
parts  of  alum  dissolved  in  water,  were  digested  with 
carbonate  of  strontites,  till  the  earth  was  completely 
separated.  The  sulphate  of  potassa,  after  ignition, 
weighed  1.815,  corresponding  to  0.981  potassa,  or  in 
100  parts  to  9.81. 

Alum,  therefore,  consists  of 


Sulphuric  acid 34.33 

Alumina 10.86 

Potassa 9.81 

Water 45.00 

• 100.00 

or,  Sulphate  of  alumina 36.85 

Sulphate  of  potassa 18.15 

Water 45.00 


100.00 

The-nard’s  analysis,  Ann.  de  Chimie,  vol.  59,  or  Ni- 
cholson’s Journal,  vol.  18,  coincides  perfectly  with 
that  of  Berzelius  in  the  product  of  sulphate  of  barytes. 
From  400  parts  of  alum,  he  obtained  490  of  the  ignited 
barytic  salt ; but  the  alumina  was  in  greater  propor- 
tion, equal  to  12.54  per  cent,  and  the  sulphate  of  po- 
tassa less,  or  15.7  in  100  parts. 

Vauquelin,  in  his  last  analysis,  found  48.58  water; 
and  by  Thenard’s  statement  there  are  indicated 
34.23  dry  acid, 

7.14  potassa, 

12.54  alumina, 

46.09  water. 

100.00 

If  we  rectify  Yauquelin’s  erroneous  estimate  of  the 
sulphate  of  barytes,  his  analysis  will  also  coincide 
with  the  above.  Alum,  therefore,  differs  from  the 
simple  sulphate  of  alumina  previously  described, 
which  consisted  of  3 prime  equivalents  of  acid  and  2 
of  earth,  merely  by  its  assumption  of  a prime  of  sul- 
phate of  potassa.  It  is  probable  that  all  the  aluminous 
salts  have  a similar  constitution.  It  is  to  be  observed, 
moreover,  that  the  number  34.36  resulting  from  the 
theoretic  proportions,  is,  according  to  Gilbert’s  re- 
marks on  the  Essayof  Berzelius,  the  just  representation 
of  the  dry  acid  in  100  of  sulphate  of  barytes,  by  a cor- 
rected analysis,  which  makes  the  prime  of  barytes  9.57. 

Should  ammonia  be  suspected  in  alum,  it  may  be 
detected,  and  its  quantity  estimated,  by  mixing  quick- 
lime with  the  saline  solution,  and  exposing  the  mix- 
ture to  heat  in  a retort,  connected  with  a Woolfe’s 
apparatus.  The  water  of  ammonia  being  afterward 
saturated  with  an  acid,  and  evaporated  to  a dry  salt, 
will  indicate  the  quantity  of  pure  ammonia  in  the 
alum.  A variety  of  alum,  containing  both  potassa  and 
ammonia,  may  also  be  found.  This  will  occur  where 
urine  has  been  used,  as  well  as  muriate  of  potassa,  in 
its  fabrication.  If  any  of  these  bisulphates  of  allu- 
mina  and  potassa  be  acted  on  in  a watery  solution,  by 
gelatinous  alumina,  a neutral  triple  salt  is  formed, 
which  precipitates  in  a nearly  insoluble  state. 

When  alum  in  powder  is  mixed  with  flour  or  sugar, 
and  calcined,  it  forms  the  pyrophorus  of  Homberg. 

Mr.  Winter  first  mentioned,  that  another  variety  of 
alum  can  be  made  with  soda,  instead  of  potassa.  This 
salt,  which  crystallizes  in  octahedrons,  has  been  also 
made  with  pure  muriate  of  soda,  and  bisulphate  of 
alumina,  at  the  laboratory  of  Hurlett,  by  Mr.  W.  Wil- 
son. It  is  extremely  difficult  to  form,  and  effloresces 
like  the  sulphate  of  soda. 

On  the  subject  of  soda-alum,  Dr.  Ure  published  a 
short  paper  in  the  Journal  of  Science  for  July,  1822. 
The  form  and  taste  of  this  salt  are  exactly  the  same  as 
those  of  common  alum  ; but  it  is  less  hard,  being  easily 
crushed  between  the  fingers,  to  which  it  imparts  air 
appearance  of  moisture.  Its  specific  gravity  is  1.6. 
100  parts  of  water  at  60°  F.  dissolve  110  of  it ; forming 
a solution,  whose  sp.  gravity  is  1.296.  In  this  respect, 
potassa  alum  is  very  different.  For  100  parts  of  water 
dissolve  only  from  8 to  9 parts,  forming  a saturated  so- 
lution, the  specific  gravity  of  which  is  no  more  than 
1.0465.  Its  constituents  are,  by  Dr.  Ure’s  analysis, — 


[ Sulphuric  acid 34.00  4 primes,  33.96 

Alumina 10.75  3 — 10.82 

Soda 6.48  1 — 6.79 

Water 49.00  ' 25  — 48.43 

100.23  100.00 

Or  it  consists  of  3 primes  sulphate  of  alumina-}- 1 sul- 
phate of  soda.  To  each  of  the  former,  5 primes  of 
water  may  be  assigned,  and  to  the  latter  10,  as  in 
Glauber’s  salts. 

The  only  injurious  contamination  of  alum  is  sul- 
phate of  iron.  It  is  detected  by  ferro-prussiate  of 
potassa. 

Oxymuriate  of  alumina,  or  the  chloride,  has  been 
proposed  by  Mr.  Wilson  of  Dublin,  as  preferable  to 
solution  of  chlorine,  for  dischaiging  the  turkey-red  die. 

Alum  is  used  in  large  quantities  in  many  manufac- 
tories. When  added  to  tallow,  it  renders  it  harder. 
Printer’s  cushions,  and  the  blocks  used  in  the  calico 
manufactory,  are  rubbed  with  burnt  alum  to  remove 
any  greasiness,  which  might  prevent  the  ink  or  colour 
from  sticking.  Wood  sufficiently  soaked  in  a solution 
of  alum  does  not  easily  take  fire  ; and  the  same  is  true 
of  paper  impregnated  with  it,  which  is  fitter  to  keep 
gunpowder,  as  it  also  excludes  moisture.  Paper  im 
pregnated  with  alum  is  useful  in  whitening  silver,  and 
in  silvering  brass  without  heat.  Alum  mixed  in  milk 
helps  the  separation  of  its  butter.  If  added  in  a very 
small  quantity  to  tdrbid  water,  in  a few  minutes  it 
renders  it  perfectly  limpid,  without  any  bad  taste  or 
quality;  while  the  sulphuric  acid  imparts  to  it  a very 
sensible  acidity,  and  does  not  precipitate  as  soon,  or  so 
well,  the  opaque  earthy  mixtures  that  render  it  turbid. 
It  is  used  in  making  pyrophorus,  in  tanning,  and  in 
many  other  manufactories,  particularly  in  the  art  of 
dying,  in  which  it  is  of  the  greatest  and  most  impor- 
tant use,  by  cleansing  and  opening  the  pores  on  the 
surface  of  the  substance  to  be  died,  rendering  it  fit  for 
receiving  the  colouring  particles,  (by  which  the  alum 
is  generally  decomposed,)  and  at  the  same  time  making 
the  colour  fixed.  Crayons  generally  consist  of  the 
earth  of  alum,  powdered  and  tinged  for  the  purpose. — 
Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

In  medicine  it  is  employed  internally  as  a powerful 
astringent  in  cases  of  passive  haemorrhages  from  the 
womb,  intestines,  nose,  and  sometimes  lungs.  In 
bleedings  of  an  active  nature,  i.  e.  attended  with  fever, 
and  a plethoric  state  of  the  system,  it  is  highly  impro- 
per. Dr.  Percival  recommends  it  in  the  colica  picto- 
num  and  other  chronic  disorders  of  the  bowels,  at- 
tended with  obstinate  constipation.  (See  Percival’s 
Essays.)  The  dose  advised  in  these  cases  is  from  5 to 
20  grains,  to  be  repeated  every  four,  eight,  or  twelve 
hours.  When  duly  persisted  in,  this  remedy  proves 
gently  laxative,  and  mitigates  the  pain. 

Alum  is  also  powerfully  tonic,  and  is  given  with  this 
view  in  the  dose  of  10  grains  made  into  a bolus  three 
times  a day,  in  such  cases  as  require  powerful  tonic 
and  astringent  remedies.  Another  mode  of  adminis- 
tering it  is  in  the  form  of  whey  made  by  boiling  a 
drachm  of  powdered  alum  in  a pint  of  milk  for  a few 
minutes,  and  to  be  taken  in  the  quantity  of  a tea-cup 
full  three  times  a day.  Dr.  Cullen  thinks  it  ought  to 
be  employed  with  other  astringents  in  diarrhoeas.  In 
active  haemorrhages,  as  was  observed,  it  is  not  useful, 
though  a powerful  medicine  in  those  which  are  pas- 
sive. It  should  be  given  in  small  doses,  and  gradually 
increased.  It  has  been  tried  in  the  diabetes  without 
success ; though,  joined  with  nutmeg,  it  has  been  more 
successful  in  intermittents,  given  in  a large  dose,  an 
hour  or  a little  longer,  before  the  approach  of  the  pa- 
roxysm. In  gargles,  in  relaxation  of  the  uvula,  and 
other  swellings  of  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  f'auceB, 
divested  of  acute  inflammation,  it  has  been  used  with 
advantage. 

Externally,  alum  is  much  employed  by  surgeons  as 
a lotion  for  the  eyes,  and  is  said  to  be  preferable  to  sul- 
phate of  zinc  or  acetate  of  lead  in  the  ophthalmia 
membranarum.  From  two  to  five  grains  dissolved  in 
an  ounce  of  rose-water,  forms  a proper  collyrium.  It 
is  also  applied  as  a styptic  to  bleeding  vessels,  and  to 
ulcers,  where  there  is  too  copious  a secretion  of  pus. 
It  has  proved  successful  in  inflammation  of  the  eyes, 
in  the  form  of  cataplasm,  which  is  made  by  stirring 
or  shaking  a lump  of  alum  in  the  whites  of  two 
eggs,  till  they  form  a coagulum,  which  is  applied  to 
the  eye  between  two  pieces  of  thin  linen  rag.  Aluin 


ALV 


ALU 

is  also  employed  as  an  injection  in  cases  of  gleet  or 
fluor  albus. 

When  deprived  of  its  humidity,  by  placing  it  in  an 
earthen  pan  over  a gentle  fire,  it  is  termed  burnt  alum, 
alumen  exsiccatum , and  is  sometimes  employed  by  sur- 
geons to  destroy  fungous  flesh,  and  is  a principal  ingre- 
dient in  most  styptic  powders. 

Alum  is  also  applied  to  many  purposes  of  life ; in  this 
country,  bakers  mix  a quantity  with  the  bread,  to 
render  it  white ; this  mixture  makes  the  bread  better 
adapted  for  weak  and  relaxed  bowels ; but  in  opposite 
states  of  the  alimentary  canal,  this  practice  is  highly 
pernicious. 

The  officinal  preparations  of  alum  are : 

1.  Alumen  exsiccatum. 

2.  Solutio  sulphatis  cupri  ammoniati. 

3.  Liquor  aluminis  compositus. 

4.  Pulvis  sulphatis  aluminis  compositus. 

Alumen  catinum.  A name  of  potassa. 

Alumen  commune.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  crystallinum.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  exsiccatum.  Dried  Alum.  Expose  alum 

in  an  earthen  vessel  to  the  fire,  so  that  it  may  dissolve 
and  boil,  and  let  the  heat  be  continued  and  increased 
until  the  boiling  ceases.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  factitium.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  romanum.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  rubrum.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  rupeum.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  rutilum.  See  Alumen. 

Alumen  ustum.  See  Alumen. 

ALU  MINA.  Alumine.  Terra  Alumina.  Earth 
of  alum.  Pure  clay.  One  of  the  primitive  earths, 
which,  as  constituting  the  plastic  principle  of  all  clays, 
loams,  and  boles,  was  called  argil  or  the  argillaceous 
earth,  but  now,  as  being  obtained  in  greatest  purity 
from  alum,  is  styled  alumina.  It  was  deemed  elemen- 
tary matter  till  Sir  H.  Davy’s  celebrated  electro-che- 
mical researches  led  to  the  belief  of  its  being,  like 
barytes  and  lime,  a metallic  oxyde. 

The  purest  native  alumina  is  found  in  the  oriental 
gems,  the  sapphire  and  ruby.  They  consist  of  nothing 
but  this  earth,  and  a small  portion  of  colouring  matter. 
The  native  porcelain  clays  or  kaolins,  however  white 
and  soft,  can  never  be  regarded  as  pure  alumina. 
They  usually  contain  fully  half  their  weight  of  silica, 
and  frequently  other  earths.  To  obtain  pure  alumina 
we  dissolve  alum  in  20  times  its  weight  of  water,  and 
add  to  it  a little  of  the  solution  of  carbonate  of  soda,  to 
throw  down  any  iron  which  may  be  present.  We  then 
drop  the  supernatant  liquid  into  a quantity  of  the  water 
of  ammonia,  taking  care  not  to  add  so  much  of  the 
aluminous  solution  as  will  saturate  the  ammonia.  The 
volatile  alkali  unites  with  the  sulphuric  acid  of  the 
alum,  and  the  earthy  basis  of  the  latter  is  separated  in 
a white  spongy  precipitate.  This  must  be  thrown  on 
a filter,  washed,  or  edulcorated,  as  the  old  chemists 
expressed  it,  by  repeated  affusions  of  water,  and  then 
dried.  Or  if  an  alum,  made  with  ammonia  instead  of 
potassa,  as  is  the  case  with  some  French  alums,  can  be 
got,  simple  ignition  dissipates  its  acid  and  alkaline  con- 
stituents, leaving  pure  alumina. 

Alumina  prepared  by  the  first  process  is  white,  pul- 
verulent, soft  to  the  touch,  adheres  to  the  tongue,  forms 
a smooth  paste  without  grittiness  in  the  mouth,  insipid, 
inodorous,  produces  no -change  in  vegetable  colours, 
insoluble  in  water,  but  mixes  with  it  readily  in  every 
proportion,  and  retains  a small  quantity  with  consider- 
able force;  is  infusible  in  the  strongest  heat  of  a fur- 
nace, experiencing  merely  a condensation  of  volume 
dnd  consequent  hardness,  but  is  in  small  quantities 
melted  by  the  oxyhydrogen  blowpipe.  Its  specific 
gravity  is  2.000  in  the  state  of  powder,  but  by  ignition 
it  is  augmented. 

Every  analogy  leads  to  the  belief  that  alumina  con- 
tains a peculiar  metal,  which  may  be  called  aluminum. 
The  first  evidences  obtained  of  this  position  are  pre- 
sented in  Sir  H.  Davy’s  researches.  Iron  negatively 
electrified  by  a very  high  power  being  fused  in  contact 
with  pure  aljmina,  formed  a globule  whiter  than  pure 
iron  which  effervesced  slowly  in  water,  becoming 
covered  with  a white  powder.  The  solution  of  this  in 
muriatic  acid,  decomposed  by  an  alkali,  afforded  alu- 
mina and  oxyde  of  iron.  By  passing  potassium  in 
vapour  through  alumina  heated  to  whiteness,  the 
greatest  part  of  the  potassium  became  converted  into 
potassa,  which  formed  a coherent  mass  with  that  part 


of  the  alumina  not  decompounded  ; and  in  this  mass 
there  were  numerous  gray  particles,  having  the 
metallic  lustre,  and  which  became  white  when  heated 
in  the  air,  and  which  slowly  effervesced  in  water.  In 
a similar  experiment  made  by  the  same  illustrious  che- 
mist, a strong  red  heat  only  being  applied  to  the  alu- 
mina, a mass  was  obtained,  which  took  fire  sponta- 
neously by  exposure  to  air,  and  which  effervesced  vio- 
lently in  water.  This  mass  was  probably  an  alloy  of 
aluminum  and  potassium.  The  conversion  of  potas- 
sium into  its  deutoxyde,  dry  potassa,  by  alumina, 
proves  the  presence  of  oxygen  in  the  latter.  When 
regarded  as  an  oxyde,  Sir  H.  Davy  estimates  its  oxygen 
and  basis  to  be  to  one  another  as  15  to  33 ; or  as  10  to 
22.  The  prime  equivalent  of  alumina  would  thus 
appear  to  be  1.0-{-2.2=3.2.  But  Berzelius’s  analysis  of 
sulphate  of  alumina  seems  to  indicate  2.136  as  the 
quantity  of  the  earth  which  combines  with  five  of  the 
acid.  Hence  aluminum  will  come  to  be  represented  by 
2.136—1=1.136. 

Alumina  which  has  lost  its  plasticity  by  ignition, 
recovers  it  by  being  dissolved  in  an  acid  or  alkaline 
menstruum,  and  then  precipitated.  In  this  state  it  is 
called  a hydrate,  for  when  dried  in  a steam  heat  it 
retains  much  water ; and  therefore  resembles  in  com- 
position wavellite,  a beautiful  mineral,  consisting 
almost  entirely  of  alumina,  with  about  28  per  cent,  of 
water. 

Alumina  is  widely  diffused  in  nature.  It  is  a con- 
stituent of  every  soil,  and  of  almost  every  rock.  It  is 
the  basis  of  porcelain,  pottery,  bricks,  and  crucibles. 
Its  affinity  for  vegetable  colouring  matter,  is  made  use 
of  in  the  preparation  of  lakes,  and  in  the  arts  of  dying 
and  calico  printing.  Native  combinations  of  alumina, 
constitute  the  fullers’  earth,  ochres,  boles,  pipe- 
clays, &c. 

The  salts  of  alumina  have  the  following  general 
characters : 

1.  Most  of  them  are  very  soluble  in  water,  and  their 
solutions  have  a sweetish  acerb  taste. 

2.  Ammonia  throws  down  their  earthy  base,  even 
though  they  have  been  previously  acidulated  with 
muriatic  acid. 

3.  At  a strong  red  heat  they  give  out  a portion  of 
their  acid. 

4.  Phosphate  of  ammonia  gives  a white  precipitate. 

5.  Hydriodate  of  potassa  produces  a flocculent  pre- 
cipitate of  a white  colour,  passing  into  a permanent 
yellow. 

6.  They  are  not  affected  by  oxalate  of  ammonia, 
tartaric  acid,  ferroprussiate  of  potassa,  or  tincture  of 
galls : by  the  first  two  tests  they  are  distinguishable  from 
yttria ; and  by  thelast  two,  from  that  earth  and  glucina. 

7.  If  bisulphate  of  potassa  be  added  to  a solution  of 
an  aluminous  salt  moderately  concentrated,  octahedral 
crystals  of  alum  will  form. 

ALUMINITE.  A mineral  of  a snow  white  colour, 
dull,  opaque,  and  having  a fine  earthy  fracture.  It 
consists  of  sulphuric  acid,  alumina,  water,  silica,  lime, 
and  oxyde  of.iron. 

ALUMINOUS.  Pertaining  to  alum. 

Aluminous  waters.  Waters  impregnated  with  par- 
ticles of  alum. 

ALUMINUM.  See  Alumina. 

ALUSIA.  (From  aXvais,  a wandering.)  Alysis ; 
Illusion;  Hallucination.  A term  used  by  Good  to  a 
species  of  his  genus  Empathemata.  See  Nosology. 

ALVEAR'IUM.  (From  alveare,  a bee-hive.)  That 
part  of  the  meatus  auditorius  externus  is  so  called, 
which  contains  the  wax  of  the  ear. 

ALVE  OLUS.  (A  diminutive  of  alveus,  a cavity.) 
The  socket  of  a tooth. 

A'LVEUS.  ( Alveus , i.  m.,  a cavity.)  A cavity. 

Alveus  ampullescens.  That  part  of  the  duct  con- 
veying the  chyle  to  the  subclavian  vein,  which  swells 
out. 

Alveus  communis.  The  common  duct,  or  commu- 
nication of  the  ampullae  of  the  membranacepus  semi- 
circular canals  in  the  internal  ear,  is  so  termed  by 
Scarpa. 

ALVIDU'CA.  (From  alvus,  the  belly,  and  duco , to 
draw.)  Purging  medicines. 

ALVIFLUXUS.  (From  alvus , and  Jluo,  to  flow.) 
A diarrhoea,  or  purging. 

ALVUS.  (Alvus,  i.  f.  and  sometimes  m.  ab  allu- 
endo,  qua  sordes  alluuntur.)  The  belly,  stomach,  and 
entrails. 


53 


AMA 


AMB 


A'LYCE.  (From  aXvio,  to  be  anxious.)  That 
anxiety  which  attends  low  fevers. 

ALY'PIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Xvnr},  pain.)  With- 
out pain ; applied  to  a purgation  of  the  humours,  with- 
out pain. 

ALY'PIAS.  Alypum.  A species  of  turbith,  the 
globularia  alypum ; so  called  because  it  purges  with- 
out pain. 

ALYSIS.  See  Alusia. 

ALY'SMUS.  (From  aXvu,  to  be  restless.)  Rest- 
lessness. 

ALY'SSUM.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Xvtraa,  the  bite  of 
a mad  dog ; so  called  because  it  was  foolishly  thought 
to  be  a specific  in  the  cure  of  the  bite  of  a mad-dog.) 
Mad- wort.  See  Marrubiuvt  alyssum. 

Alyssum  Galeni.  See  Marrubium.  verticillatum. 

Alyssum  Plinii.  See  Galium  album. 

Alyssum  verticillatum.  The  Marrubium  verti- 
cillatum. 

A lzum.  Aldum;  Aldrum.  The  name  of  the  tree 
which  produces  gum  bdellium,  according  to  some 
ancient  authors. 

A'MA  (A pa,  together.)  A word  used  in  compo- 
sition. 

AMA  DINE.  A substance,  the  properties  of  which 
are  intermediate  between  those  of  starch  and  gum. 
See  Starch. 

AMADOU.  A variety  of  the  boletus  igniarius , 
found  on  old  ash  and  other  trees.  It  is  boiled  in  water 
to  extract  its  solubfe  parts,  then  dried  and  beat  with  a 
mallet  to  loosen  its  texture.  It  has  now  the  appear- 
ance of  very  spongy  doe-skin  leather.  It  is  lastly 
impregnated  with  a solution  of  nitre,  and  dried,  when 
it  is  called  spunk,  or  German  tinder;  a substance  much 
used  on  the  continent  for  lighting  fires,  either  from  the 
collision  of  flint  and  steel,  or  from  the  sudden  conden- 
sation of  air  in  the  atmospheric  pyrophorus. 

AMA'LGAM.  {Amalgam a ; from  apa  and  yapeiv, 
to  marry.)  A substance  produced  by  mixing  mercury 
with  a metal,  the  two  being  thereby  incorporated. 
See  Alloy. 

Amame'lis.  (From  apa,  and  prjXea,  an  apple.) 
The  bastard  medlar  of  Hippocrates. 

AMANI'T/E.  (From  a,  priv.  and  pavia , madness; 
so  called,  because  they  are  eatable  and  not  poisonous, 
like  some  others.)  A tribe  of  fungous  productions, 
called  mushrooms,  truffles,  and  morells,  and  by  the 
French,  champignons. 

Amara  dulcis.  See  Solarium  dulcamara. 

Ama'racus.  (From  a,  neg.  and  papaivw,  to  decay : 
because  it  keeps  its  virtues  a long  time.)  Marjoram. 

Amaranth , esculent.  See  Amaranthus  oleraceus. 

AMARA'NTHUS.  ( Amaranthus , i.  m. ; from  a, 
neg.  and  papaivw,  to  decay : because  the  flower,  when 
cut,  does  not  soon  decay.)  The  ndine  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Moncecia; 
Order,  Pentandria. 

Amaranthus  oleraceus.  Esculent  amaranth. 
The  leaves  of  this,  and  several  other  species,  are  eaten 
in  India  the  same  as  cabbage  is  here. 

AMA'RUS.  Bitter.  See  Bitter.  The  principal 
bitters  used  medicinally  are, 

1.  The  pure  bitters;  gentiana  lutea,  humulus  lu- 
pulus,  and  quassia  amara. 

2.  Styptic  bitters ; cinchona  officinalis,  croton  cas- 
carilla,  quassia  simarouba. 

3.  Aromatic  bitters  ; artemisia  absinthium,  anthe- 
mis  nobilis,  hyssopus,  &c. 

Amatoria  febuis.  (From  amo,  to  love.)  See 
Chlorosis. 

Amatoria  veneficia.  (From  amo , to  love,  and 
venejicium , witchcraft.)  Philters.  Love  powders. 

Amato'rius.  A term  given  to  a muscle  of  the  eye, 
by  which  that  organ  is  moved  in  oglipg.  See  Rectus 
'■ inferior  oculi. 

Amatzqui'ti.  An  Indian  term.  See  Arbutus  unedo. 

AMAURO'SIS.  ( Amauroses , is.  f.  A pavpmai; ; 
from  apavpou),  to  darken  or  obscure.)  Gutta  serena  ; 
Amblyopia.  A disease  of  the  eye  attended  with  a di- 
minution or  total  loss  of  sight,  without  any  visible  in- 
jury to  the  organ,  and  arising  from  a paraly  tic  affection 
of  the  retina  and  optic  nerve.  A genus  of  disease  in 
the  class  locales , and  order  dyscesthesice  of  Cullen.  It 
arises  generally  from  compression  of  the  optic  nerves ; 
amaurosis  compressions ; from  debility,  amaurosis 
atonica;  from  spasm,  amaurosis  spasmodica;  or  from 
poisons,  amaurosis  venenata. 


The  symptoms  of  amaurosis  are  noted  for  being  very 
irregular.  In  many  cases,  the  pupil  is  very  much  di- 
lated, immoveable,  and  of  its  natural  black  colour. 
Sometimes,  however,  in  the  most  complete  and  incura- 
ble cases,  the  pupil  is  of  its  natural  size,  and  the  iris 
capable  of  free  motion.  In  some  cases,  the  pupil  has 
a dull,  glassy,  or  horny  appearance.  Sometimes  its 
colour  is  greenish,  occasionally  whitish  and  opaque, 
so  as  to  be  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  an  incipient  cata- 
ract. Richter  mentions  a degree  of  strabismus,  as  the 
only  symptom,  except  the  loss  of  sight,  as  invariably 
attendan  on  amaurosis. 

The  bl  ndness  produced  by  amaurosis,  is  generally 
preceded  by  an  imaginary  appearance  of  numerous 
insects,  or  substances,  like  cobwebs,  interposing  them- 
selves between  objects  and  the  eye.  The  origin  of  a 
cataract  on  the  other  hand,  is  usually  attended  with 
a simple  cloudiness  of  vision. 

Violent  contusions  of  the  head,  apoplectic  fits,  flashes 
of  lightning,  frequent  exposure  to  the  rays  of  the  sun, 
severe  exercise,  strong  passions,  drunkenness,  and 
other  causes  of  paralytic  affections,  are  enumerated  as 
producing  this  complaint.  Sometimes  tumours  within 
the  cranium,  bony  projections,  &c.  have  been  found 
compressing  the  optic  nerves : but  in  many  instances 
no  morbid  appearance  couM  be  traced,  to  account  for 
the  blindness. 

The  disorder  is  generally  difficult  to  be  removed : but 
is  sometimes  much  benefited  by  general  and  local  sti- 
mulants, persevered  in  for  a considerable  time.  If 
there  are  marks  of  congestion  in  the  head,  local  bleed- 
ing, active  purging,  and  other  evacuations,  would  be 
proper  in  the  first  instance.  Blisters  and  issues  behind 
the  ear  or  neck  should  also  be  tried.  Richter  speaks 
of  much  success  from  the  use  of  medicines  acting  stea- 
dily on  the  bowels,  after  premising  an  emetic.  Mr. 
Ware  observes,  that  in  some  cases  the  pupil  is  con- 
tracted, indicating  probably,  internal  inflammation  ; 
and  then  the  internal  use  of  mercury,  especially  the 
oxymuriate,  will  be  most  beneficial.  Electricity  has 
been  sometimes  serviceable,  taking  the  aura  or  sparks, 
or  even  gentle  shocks  : but  galvanism  is  certainly  pre- 
ferable. Errhines  are  often  useful,  as  the  compound 
powder  of  asarabacca ; Mr.  Ware  particularly  recom- 
mends the  hydrargyrus  vitriolatus  of  the  former  Lon- 
don Pharinacopceia.  Stimulants  have  been  sometimes 
usefully  applied  to  the  eye  itself,  as  the  vapour  of  oil 
of  turpentine,  an  infusion  of  capsicum,  & c.  Where 
the  intention  of  a blister  is  to  stimulate,  it  is  best  ap- 
plied to  the  temple  on  the  affected  side. 

AMBER.  Succinum.  A beautiful  bituminous  sub- 
stance, which  takes  a good  polish,  and,  alter  a slight 
rubbing,  becomes  so  electric,  as  to  attract  straws  and 
small  bodies  ; it  was  called  yXctcrpov,  electrum,  by  the 
ancients,  and  hence  the  word  electricity.  “ Amber  is 
a hard,  brittle,  tasteless  substance,  sometimes  perfectly 
transparent,  but  mostly  semitransparent  or  opaque, 
and  of  a glossy  surface : it  is  found  of  all  colours,  but 
chiefly  yellow  or  orange,  and  often  contains  leaves  or 
insects  ; its  specific  gravity  is  from  1.065  to  1.100  ; its 
fracture  is  even,  smooth,  and  glossy ; it  is  capable  of  a 
fine  polish,  and  becomes  electric  by  friction ; when 
rubbed  or  heated,  it  gives  a peculiar  agreeable  smell, 
particularly  when  it  melts,  that  is  at  550°  of  Fahren- 
heit, but  it  then  loses  its  transparency : projected  on 
burning  coals,  it  burns  with  a whitish  flame,  and  a 
whitish-yellow  smoke,  but  gives  very  little  soot,  and 
leaves  brownish  ashes ; it  is  insoluble  in  water  and 
alcohol,  though  the  latter,  when  highly  rectified,  ex- 
tracts a reddish  colour  from  it;  but  it  is  soluble  in  the 
sulphuric  acid,  which  then  acquires  a reddish-purpli 
colour,  and  is  precipitable  from  it  by  water.  No  other 
acid  dissolves  it,  nor  is  it  soluble  in  essential  or  ex- 
pressed oils,  without  some  decomposition  and  long  di- 
gestion ; but  pure  alkali  dissolves  it.  By  distillation 
it  affords  a small  quantity  of  water,  with  a little  ace- 
tous acid,  an  oil,  and  a peculiar  acid.  The  oil  rises 
at  first  colourless : but,  as  the  heat  increases,  becomes 
brown,  thick,  and  empvreumatic.  The  oil  may  be 
rectified  by  successive  distillations,  or  it  may  be  ob- 
tained very  light  and  limpid  at  once,  if  it  be  put  into  a 
glass  alembic  with  water,  as  the  elder  Rouelle  directs, 
and  distilled  at  a heat  not  greater  than  212°  Fahr.  It 
requires  to  be  kept  in  stone  bottles,  however,  to  retain 
this  state ; for  in  glass  vessels  it  becomes  brown  by  the 
action  of  light. 

Amber  is  met  with  plentifully  in  regular  mines  in. 


AMB 


AMB 


\ 


some  parts  of  Prussia.  The  upper  surface  is  composed 
of  sand,  under  which  is  a stratum  of  loam,  and  under 
this  a bed  of  wood,  partly  entire,  but  chiefly  mouldered 
or  changed  into  a bituminous  substance.  Under  the 
wood  is  a stratum  of  sulphuric  or  rather  aluminous 
mineral,  in  which  the  amber  is  found.  Strong  sulphu- 
reous exhalations  are  often  perceived  in  the  pits. 

Detached  pieces  are  also  found  occasionally  on  the 
sea-coast  in  various  countries.  It  has  been  found  in 
gravel  beds  near  London.  In  the  Royal  Cabinet  at 
Berlin  there  is  a mass  of  lHlbs.  weight,  supposed  to  be 
the  largest  ever  found.  Jussieu  asserts,  that  the  deli- 
cate insects  in  amber,  which  prove  the  tranquillity  of 
its  formation,  are  not  European.  Haiiy  has  pointed 
out  the  following  distinctions  between  mellite  and  co- 
pal, the  bodies  which  most  closely  resemble  amber. 
Mellite  is  infusible  by  heat.  .A  bit  of  copal  heated  at 
the  end  of  a knife  takes  fire,  melting  into  drops,  which 
flatten  as  they  fall ; whereas  amber  burns  with  spit- 
ting and  frothing;  and  when  its  liquefied  particles 
drop,  they  rebound  from  the  plane  which  receives 
them.  The  origin  of  amber  is  at  present  involved  in 
perfect  obscurity,  though  the  rapid  progress  of  vegeta- 
ble chemistry  promises  soon  to  throw  light  on  it.  Va- 
rious frauds  are  practised  with  this  substance.  Neu- 
mann states  as  the  common  practices  of  workmen,  the 
two  following : The  one  consists  in  surrounding  the 
amber  with  sand  in  an  iron  pot,  and  cementing  it  with 
a gradual  fire  for  forty  hours,  some  small  pieces  placed 
near  the  sides  of  the  vessel  being  occasionally  taken 
out  for  judging  of  the  effect  of  the  operation  : the  se- 
cond method,  which  he  says  is  that  most  generally 
practised,  is  by  digesting  and  boiling  the  amber  about 
twenty  hours  with  rapeseed  oil,  by  which  it  is  rendered 
both  clear  and  hard. 

Werner  has  divided  it  into  two  sub-species,  the 
white  and  the  yellow  : but  there  is  little  advantage  in 
the  distinction.  Its  ultimate  constituents  are  the  same 
with  those  of  vegetable  bodies  in  general ; viz.  carbon, 
hydrogen,  and  oxygen. 

In  the  second  volume  of  the  Edinburgh  Philosophi- 
cal Journal,  Dr.  Brewster  has  given  an  account  of 
some  optical  properties  of  amber,  from  which  he  con- 
siders it  established  beyond  a doubt  that  amber  is  an 
indurated  vegetable  juiee ; and  that  the  traces  of  a 
regular  structure,  indicated  by  its  action  upon  polarized 
light,  are  not  the  effect  of  the  ordinary  laws  of  crystal- 
lization by  which  mellite  has  been  formed,  but  are  pro- 
duced by  the  same  causes  which  influence  the  mecha- 
nical condition  of  gum-arabic,  and  other  gums,  which 
are  known  to  be  formed  by  the  successive  deposition 
and  induration  of  vegetable  fluids.” — lire's  Ghem. 
Diet.  See  Oleum  Succini,  and  Succinic  Acid. 

[Amber  has  heretofore  been  chiefly  obtained  from 
the  shores  of  the  Baltic  in  Prussia.  It  has  how  ever 
been  found  in  other  countries. 

In  the  state  of  New-Jersey,  on  Crosswick’s  creek, 
four  miles  from  Trenton,  it  occurs  in  alluvial  soil.  The 
amber  is  both  yellow  and  whitish,  and  occurs  in  grains 
or  small  masses,  seldom  exceeding  an  inch  in  length. 
It  rests  on  lignite  or  carbonated  wood,  or  even  pene- 
trates it,  aud  is  sometimes  connected  with  pyrites. 
Tite  stratum  of  lignite,  which  contains  the  amber,  rests 
on  a coarse,  ferruginous  sand,  and  is  covered  by  a soft 
bluish  clay,  embracing  masses  of  pyrites.  Above  the 
clay  is  a bed  of  sand.  Amber  exists  also  near  Wood- 
bury, in  the  same  state,  in  large  plates  in  a bed  of  marl ; 
also  at  Camden,  opposite  Philadelphia,  where  a trans- 
parent specimen,  almost  white,  and  several  inches  in 
diameter,  has  been  found  in  a stratum  of  gravel. 

Most  naturalists  are  induced  to  believe  that  amber  is 
a resinous  juice,  which  once  proceeded  from  certain 
trees,  but  has  since  been  gradually  mineralized  in  the 
interior  of  the  earth.  It  occurs  in  masses,  whose 
weight  usually  varies  from  a fraction  of  an  ounce  to  a 
few  pounds ; and  its  largest  masses,  which  are  ex- 
tremely rare,  do  not  much  exceed  201bs. — Clean.  Min. 

The  largest  mass  perhaps  ever  seen,  was  recently 
found  between  Memel  and  Koningsberg,  measuring  14 
inches  in  length,  by  9 1-4  in  breadth,  and  weighing 
211be.— Month.  Mag.  Oct.  1811.  A.] 

AMBER  SEED.  See  Hibiscus  abelmoschus. 

AMBERGRIS,  (Ambragrisea,  ce..  f.)  A concrete, 
found  in  very  irregular  masses,  floating  on  the  sea 
near  the  Molucca  islands,  Madagascar,  Sumatra,  on 
the  coast  of  Coromandel,  Brazil,  America,  China,  and 
Japan.  It  has  also  been  taken  out  of  the  intestines  of 


the  Physeter  macrocephalus , the  spermaceti  whale 
As  it  has  not  been  found  in  any  whales  but  such  as 
are  dead  or  sick,  its  production  is  generally  supposed 
to  be  owing  to  disease,  though  some  have  a little  too 
peremptorily  affirmed  it  to  be  the  cause  of  the  morbid 
affection.  As  no  large  piece  has  ever  been  found 
without  a greater  oi  less  quantity  of  the  beaks  of  the 
Sepia,  octopodia , the  common  food  of  the  spermaceti 
whale,  interspersed  throughout  its  substance,  there 
can  be  little  doubt  of  its  originating  in  the  intestines  of 
the  whale;  for  if  it  were  occasionally  swallowed  by  it 
only,  and  then  caused  disease,  it  would  be  frequently 
found  without  these,  when  it  is  met  with  floating  or 
thrown  upon  the  shore. 

Ambergris  is  found  of  various  sizes,  generally  in 
small  fragments,  but  sometimes  so  large  as  to  weigh 
near  two  hundred  pounds.  When  taken  from  the 
whale  it  is  not  so  hard  as  it  becomes  afterward  on  ex 
posure  to  the  air.  Its  specific  gravity  ranges  from  780 
to  926.  If  good,  it  adheres  like  wax  to  the  edge  of  a 
knife  with  which  it  is  scraped,  retains  the  impression 
of  the  teeth  or  nails,  and  emits  a fat  odoriferous  liquid 
on  being  penetrated  with  a hot  needle.  It  is  generally 
brittle  ; but,  on  rubbing  it  with  the  nail,  it  becomes 
smooth  like  hard  soap.  Its  colour  is  either  white, 
black,  ash-coloured,  yellow,  or  blackish  ; or  it  is  va- 
riegated, namely,  gray  with  black  specks,  or  gray  with 
yellow  specks.  Its  smell  is  peculiar,  and  not  easy  to 
be  counterfeited.  At  144°  it  melts,  and  at  212°  is 
volatilized  in  the  form  of  a white  vapour.  But,  on  a 
red-hot  coal,  it  burns,  and  is  entirely  dissipated.  Wa 
ter  has  no  action  on  it ; acids,  except  nitric,  act  feebly 
on  it ; alkalies  combine  with  it,  and  form  a soap; 
tether  and  the  volatile  oils  dissolve  it ; so  do  the  fixed 
oils,  and  also  ammonia,  when  assisted  by  heat ; alko- 
hol  dissolves  a portion  of  it,  and  is  of  great  use  iu 
analyzing  it,  by  separating  its  constituent  parts.  Ac 
cording  to  Boillon  la  Grange,  who  has  given  the  latest 
analysis  of  it,  3820  parts  of  ambergris  consist  of  adipo- 
cire  2016  parts,  a resinous  substance  1167,  benzoic  acid 
425,  and  coal  212.  But  Bucholtz  could  find  no  benzoic 
acid  in  it.  Dr.  Ure  examined  two  different  specimens 
with  considerable  attention.  The  one  yielded  ben- 
zoic acid,  the  other,  equally  genuine  to  all  appearance, 
afforded  none. 

An  aikoholic  solution  of  ambergris,  added  in  minute 
quantity  to  lavender  water,  tooth  powder,  hair  pow- 
der, wash  balls,  &c.  communicates  its  peculiar  fra- 
grance. Its  retail  price  being  in  London  so  high  as  a 
guinea  per  oz.  leads  to  many  adulterations.  These 
consist  of  various  mixtures  of  benzoin,  labdanum, 
meal,  &c.  scented  with  musk.  The  greasy  appear- 
ance and  smell  which  heated  ambergris  exhibits,  afford 
good  criteria , joined  to  its  solubility  in  hot  aether  and 
alkohol. 

It  has  occasionally  been  employed  in  medicine,  but 
its  use  is  mostly  confined  to  the  perfumer.  Dr.  Swe- 
diaur  took  thirty  grains  of  it  without  perceiving  any 
sensible  effect.  A sailor,  who  took  half  an  ouuce  of 
it,  found  it  a good  purgative. — Ure’s  Ghem.  Diet. 

[Ambergris,  which  is  a concretion  from  the  intestines 
of  the  spermaceti  whale,  also  contains  a considerable 
portion  of  fatty  matter,  amounting  in  some  specimens 
to  60  per  cent.  It  is  only  found  in  the  unhealthy  ani- 
mal. Its  chief  constituent  is  a substance  very  analo- 
gous to  cholesterine,  and  to  which  Peltier  and  Caven- 
tou  have  given  the  name  of  ambreine.  By  digestion  in 
nitric  acid,  ambreine  is  converted  into  a peculiar  acid 
called  the  ambreic  acid.  Webster's  Manual  of  Ghem. 
Boston , 1828.  A.] 

The  medical  qualities  of  ambergris  are  stomachic, 
cordial,  and  antispasinodic.  It  is  very  seldom  used  in 
this  country, 

AMBLO  SIS.  (ApSAuxri?  ; from  apSAow,  to  cause 
abortion.)  A miscarriage. 

Amblo'tica.  (\p$X<jiTiKa ; from  ap8\ou>,  to  cause 
abortion.)  Medicines  which  were  supposed  to  occa- 
sion abortiop. 

AMBLYGONITE.  A greenish-coloured  mineral 
tha.*  occurs  in  granite,  along  with  green  topaz  and 
tourmaline,  near  Pinig,  in  Saxony.  It  seems  to  be  a 
species  of  spodumine. 

AMBLYO  PIA,  ( Amblyopia , ce.  f. ; from  apfiAoj, 
dull,  aud  coxp , the  eye.)  Amblyosmus ; Amblytes. 
Hippocrates  means  by  this  word,  dimness  of  sight  to 
which  old  people  are  subject.  Paulus  Actuarius,  and 
the  best  modern  writers,  seem  to  think  that  amblyopia 

55 


AME 


AME 

means  the  same  thing  as  the  incomplete  amaurosis. 
See  Amaurosis. 

Amblyo'smus.  See  Amblyopia. 

Amblytes.  See  Amblyopia. 

A'mbo.  An  Indian  name  of  the  mango. 

A'mbon.  (From  apSaivw,  to  ascend.)  Celsus  uses 
this  term  to  signify  the  margin  or  tip  of  the  sockets  in 
which  the  heads  of  the  large  bones  are  lodged. 

A'mbone.  The  same  as  ambe. 

A'MBRA.  Amber.  Also  an  aromatic  gum. 

Ambra  cineracea.  Ambergris  and  gray  amber. 

Ambra  grisea.  Ambergris. 

A'mbram.  Amber. 

AMBREINE.  See  Ambergris. 

Ambreic  acid.  See  Ambergris.  A.] 

Ambre'tte.  See  Hibiscus  abelmoschus. 

Ambulati'va.  (From  arnbulo,  to  walk.)  A species 
of  herpes ; so  called  because  it  walks  or  creeps,  as  it 
were,  about  the  body. 

AMBU'STIO.  ( Ambustio , onis.  f. ; from  amburo, 
to  burn.)  See.  Burn. 

AMBUSTUM.  A bum  or  scald. 

Ame'lla.  The  same  as  achmella. 

AMENORRHQEA.  ( Amenorrheea , <r.  f. ; from  a , 
priv.  pyv,  a month,  and  pew,  to  flow.)  A partial 
or  total  obstruction  of  the  menses  in  women  from  other 
causes  than  pregnancy  and  old  age.  The  menses 
should  be  regular  as  to  quantity  and  quality  ; and  that 
this  discharge  should  observe  the  monthly  period,  is 
essential  to  health.  When  it  is  obstructed,  nature 
makes  her  efforts  to  obtain  for  it  some  other  outlet. 
When  these  efforts  of  nature  fail,  the  consequence 
may  be,  pyrexia,  pulmonic  diseases,  spasmodic  affec- 
tions, hysteria,  epilepsia,  mania,  apoplexia,  chlorosis, 
according  to  the  general  habit  and  disposition  of  the 
patient.  Dr.  Culleh  places  this  genus  in  the  class 
locales , and  order  epischeses.  His  species  are,  1. 
Emansio  mensium ; that  is,  when  the  menses  do  not 
appear  so  early  as  is  usually  expected.  See  Chlorosis. 
2.  Suppressio  mensium , when,  after  the  menses  ap- 
pearing and  continuing  as  usual  for  some  time,  they 
cease  without  pregnancy  occurring.  3.  Amenorrheea 
difficilis,  vel  Menorrhagia  dijfcilis,  when  this  flux  is 
too  small  in  quantity,  and  attended  with  great 
pain,  &c. 

The  causes  of  a suppression  of  the  menses  appear 
mostly  to  operate  by  inducing  a constriction  of  the  ex- 
treme vessels ; such  as  cold,  fear,  and  other  depressing 
passions,  an  indolent  life,  the  abuse  of  acids,  &c.  It 
is  sometimes  symptomatic  of  other  diseases,  in  which 
considerable  debility  occurs,  as  phthisis  pulmonalis. 
When  the  discharge  has  been  some  time  interrupted, 
particularly  in  persons  previously  healthy,  haemor- 
rhages  will  often  happen  from  other  outlets,  the  nose, 
stomach,  lungs,  &c.  even  in  some  instances  a periodi- 
cal discharge  of  blood  from  an  ulcer  has  occurred. 
The  patient  generally  becomes  obstinately  costive, 
often  dyspeptic  ; colicky  pains,  and  various  hysterical 
symptoms  likewise  are  apt  to  attend.  The  means  of 
chief  efficacy  in  restoring  the  uterine  function  are  those 
calculated  to  relax  spasm,  assisted  sometimes  by  such 
as  increase  arterial  action,  particularly  in  protracted 
cases.  The  former  will  be  employed  with  most  pro- 
bability of  success,  when  symptoms  of  a menstrual 
effort  appear.  They  are,  especially  the  hip-bath,  fo- 
mentations to  the  hypogastrium,  sitting  over  a vessel 
of  hot  water,  so  that  the  vapour  may  be  applied  to  the 
pudenda ; with  antispasmodic  medicines,  as  the  com- 
ound galbanum  pill,  castor,  &c.  but  especially  opium, 
f the  patient  be  plethoric,  venaesection  should  be  pre- 
mised. In  cases  of  long  standing,  the  object  will  be  to 
bring  about  a determination  of  blood  to  the  uterus. 
This  may  be  accomplished  by  emmenagogues,  of  which 
savine  and  cantharis  are  most  to  be  relied  upon  ; 
though  the  latter  would  be  improper,  if  haematuria  had 
occurred.  Certain  cathartics  are  also  very  useful,  par- 
ticularly aloes,  which  appear  to  operate  especially  on 
the  rectum,  and  thus  sympathetically  influence  the 
uterus.  Electric  shocks  passed  through  the  hypogas- 
tric region,  may  likewise  contribute  to  the  cure. 

In  cases  of  scanty  and  painful  menstruation,  the 
means  pointed  out  above  as  calculated  to  take  off  con- 
striction of  ti>e  uterine  vessels,  should  be  resorted  to; 
especially  the  hip-bath,  and  the  free  use  of  opium. 

Amentace®  PLANTiE.  Amentaceous  plants.  A di- 
vision of  plants  in  natural  arrangements  of  bota- 
nists. 

56 


AMENT A'CETJS.  Having  an  amentum  or  catkin, 
as  the  willow,  birch,  beech,  poplar,  &c. 

AME'NTIA.  ( Amentia , ce.  f. ; from  a,  priv.  and 
mens,  the  mind.)  Imbecility  of  intellect,  by  which  the 
relations  of  things  are  either  not  perceived,  or  not 
recollected.  A disease  in  the  class  neuroses , and  order 
vesanice  of  Cullen.  When  it  originates  at  birth,  it  is 
called  amentia  congenita , natural  stupidity ; when  from 
the  infirmities  of  age,  amentia  senilis , dotage  or  child- 
ishness ; and  when  from  some  accidental  cause,  amentia 
acquisita. 

AME'NTUM.  (Derived  from  its  fancied  resem- 
blance to  a caUs-tail,  and  by  Festus,  from  the  Greek 
appa,  a bond  or  thong.)  Julus ; Nucamentum;  Ca- 
tulus.  Catkin.  A species  of  inflorescence,  considered 
by  some  as  a species  of  calyx.  It  is  a simple  peduncle 
covered  with  numerous  ahaffy  scales,  under  which  are 
the  flowers  or  parts  of  fructification.  The  distinctions 
of  catkins  are  into, 

1.  Cylindrical : as  in  Corylus  avellana  ; Beta  alba ; 
Alnus. 

2.  Globose  as  in  Fagus  sylvatica  ; Platanus  orien- 
talis  ; Urtica  pilulifera. 

3.  Ovate  : as  in  the  Female  Pinus  sylvestris. 

4.  Filiform : seen  in  Fagus  pumila  and  Castanea 
pumila. 

5.  Attenuate,  slender  towards  the  end : as  in  Fagus 
castanea. 

6.  Thick  : in  Juglans  regia. 

7.  Imbrecate , scaly : as  in  Juniperus  communis,  and 
Salix  fusca. 

8.  Paleaceous , chaffy : as  in  Pinus  sylvestris. 

9.  j Yaked : the  scales  being  so  small  or  wanting,  that 
the  parts  of  fructification  appear  naked,  as  in  Excoc- 
caria. 

American  balsam.  See  Myroxylum  Peruiferum.  . 

[American  centaury.  This  is  the  Ghironia  angu~ 
laris  of  Linnaeus.  It  is  a native  of  damp,  rich  soils, 
in  the  middle  and  southern  parts  of  the  United  States, 
where  it  is  commonly  known  by  the  name  of  centaury. 
Every  part  of  the  plant  is  a pure,  strong  bitter,  and 
communicates  its  qualities  to  both  water  and  alkohol. 
It  appears  to  be  a remedy  in  considerable  use  at  the 
south  for  intermittent  fever.  On  the  stomach  it  exerts 
an  invigorating  influence,  and  promotes  appetite  and 
digestion.  It  may  be  given  in  powder,  in  doses  of  ten 
or  twenty  grains,  or  in  infusion,  which  is  the  more 
common  mode. — Bigelow's  Sequel,  &c.  A.] 

[American  columbo.  This  is  the  Frasera  Walteri 
of  Michaux.  It  is  a tall,  rank,  perennial  plant,  grow- 
ing spontaneously  in  the  southern  and  western  parts 
of  the  United  States.  It  is  the  Swertia  frazera  of 
Smith,  in  Rees’s  Cyclopedia.  The  root,  which  is  large 
and  fleshy,  has  a considerable  degree  of  bitterness,  and 
when  cut  in  slices  and  dried,  has  some  resemblance  to 
the  imported  columbo.  Owing  to  its  comparative 
cheapness,  it  has  been  substituted  in  druggists’  shops 
for  columbo,  to  which  it  is  incomparably  inferior  in 
bitterness.  It  is  however  an  article  of  considerable 
tonic  powers,  and,  when  fresh,  is  said  to  be  emetic  and 
cathartic. — Big.  Seq.  A.] 

[American  hellebore.  Veratrum  viride.  The 
plant  bearing  this  name  grows  on  wet  meadows,  and 
on  the  banks  of  brooks  throughout  the  United  States. 
It  sends  up  a tuft  of  large  plaited  leaves  early  in  the 
spring,  and  in  June  produces  a panicle  of  green  flowers. 
It  is  often  designated  by  the  name  o (poke-root,  though 
a very  different  plant  from  the  Phytolacca. 

Its  properties  resemble  those  of  the  Veratrum  Album 
of  Europe,  to  which  plant  it  is  so  closely  allied  in  ap- 
pearance, that  many  botanists  have  considered  them 
the  same  species.  The  root  has  a bitter  taste,  accom- 
panied with  acrimony,  and  leaves  a permanent  im- 
pression on  the  mouth  and  fauces.  It  abounds  with  a 
resinous  juice,  which  adheres  closely  to  a knife  with 
which  it  has  been  cut.  This  is  taken  up  by  alkohol, 
and  precipitated  by  water.  The  decoction  has  an  in- 
tensely bitter  taste,  probably  owing  to  an  extractive 
principle.  The  distilled  water  has  a slightly  un- 
pleasant taste,  without  bitterness  or  pungency.  Ve- 
ratrine  probably  exists  in  this  root. 

Like  the  white  Hellebore,  it  is  an  acrid  emetic,  and 
a powerful  stimulant,  followed  by  sedative  effects. 
From  the  sum  of  my  observations  respecting  it,  I am 
satisfied  that  the  root,  when  not  impaired  by  long 
keeping  or  exposure,  is,  in  sufficient  doses,  a strong 
emetic,  commencing  its  operation  tardily,  but  conti- 


AMM 


AMM 


nuing  it  in  many  instances  for  a long  time ; in  large  | 
doses  affecting  the  functions  of  the  brain  and  nervous 
system,  in  a powerful  manner,  producing  giddiness, 
impaired  vision,  prostration  of  strength,  and  diminu- 
tion of  the  vital  powers. 

From  three  to  six  grains  in  powder  will  commonly 
occasion  vomiting,  the  activity  being  in  some  degree 
proportionate  to  the  freshness  of  the  article.  Dr.  W are 
found,  that  doses  somewhat  larger  did  not  act  with 
undue  violence,  in  the  case  of  some  alms-house  pa- 
tients. A wine,  prepared  like  that  of  white  hellebore, 
has  produced  relief  in  gout  and  rheumatism,  in  doses 
of  less  than  a fluid  drachm.— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[American  Senna.  Cassia  Marilandica.  This  is  a 
tall  plant,  with  yellow  flowers,  growing  in  most  parts 
of  the  United  States.  Its  botanical  affinity  to  the 
Cassia  Senna,  probably  first  led  to  a suspicion  of  its 
cathartic  powers.  Its  leaves  abound  with  resin,  and 
have  also  some  extractive  and  volatile  matter.  An 
ounce  of  the  dried  leaves,  infused  in  water,  proves 
cathartic,  and  the  plant,  being  easy  of  acquisition,  is 
not  unfrequently  used  for  this  purpose  by  country 
practitioners. — Big.  Seq.  A.] 

America'num  tuberosum.  The  potatoe.  See 
Solanum  toberosum. 

Amethy'sta  pharmaca.  (From  a,  neg.  and  peOv, 
wine.)  Medicines  which  were  said  either  to  prevent 
or  remove  the  effects  of  wine. — Galen. 

AMETHY'STUS.  (From  a,  neg.  and  pedvcrKw,  to  be 
inebriated : so  called,  because  in  former  times,  accord- 
ing to  Plutarch,  it  was  thought  to  prevent  drunkenness. 
— Ruland.  in  Lex.  Chem.)  The  amethyst.  “ A gem 
of  a violet  colour,  and  great  brilliancy,  said  to  be  as 
hard  as  the  ruby  or  sapphire,  from  which  it  only  differs 
in  colour.  This  is  called  the  oriental  amethyst,  and  is 
very  rare.  When  it  inclines  to  the  purple  or  rosy 
colour,  it  is  more  esteemed  than  when  it  is  nearer  to 
the  blue.  These  amethysts  have  the  same  figure, 
hardness,  specific  gravity,  and  other  qualities,  as  the 
best  sapphires  or  rubies,  and  come  from  the  same 
places,  particularly  from  Persia,  Arabia,  Armenia,  and 
the  West  Indies.  The  occidental  amethysts  are  merely 
coloured  crystals  or  quartz.” 

AMIANTHUS.  See  Asbestos. 

Ami'culum.  A little  short  cloak.  It  is  the  same  as 
the  amnios,  but  anciently  meant  a covering  for  the 
pubes  of  boys,  when  they  exercised  in  the  gymnasium. 
— Rhodius. 

AMIDINE.  A substance  produced,  according  to 
Saussure,  when  we  abandon  the  paste  of  starch  to 
itself,  at  the  ordinary  temperature,  with  or  without  the 
contact  of  air. 

A'midum.  See  Amylum. 

Aminje'um.  A wine  produced  in  Amintea,  formerly 
a province  of  Italy ; called  also  Salernum.  Also  a 
strong  wine  vinegar.  Galen  mentions  Amineeum  Nea- 
politanum , and  Amineeum  Siculum. 

A'MMI.  ( Ammium , i.  n.  A g/tt;  from  appos,  sand, 
from  its  likeness  to  little  gravel-stones.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnean  system. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  herb  bishop’s 
weed,  of  which  there  are  two  sorts.  See  Sison  ammi 
and  ammi  majus. 

Ammi  majus.  The  systematic  name  for  the  ammi 
vulgare  of  the  shops.  The  seeds  of  this'plant,  Ammi — 
foliis  inferioribus  pinnatis,  lanceolatis  serrat.is  ; snpe- 
rioribus , multijidis , linearibus , of  Linnaeus ; are  less 
powerful  than  those  of  the  Sison  ammi , but  were 
exhibited  with  the  same  views. 

Ammi  ve'rum.  See  Sison  Ammi. 

Ammi  vulgare.  See  Ammi  majus. 

Ammion.  Ammium.  Cinnabar. 

Ammocho'sia.  (From  appos,  sand,  and  %£w,  to 
pour.)  A remedy  for  drying  the  body  by  sprinkling  it 
with  hot  sand.—  Oribasius. 

AMMO  NIA.  ( Ammonia , <c.  f ; so  called  because  it 
is  obtained  from  sal  ammoniac,  which  received  its 
name  from  being  dug  out  of  the  earth  near  the  temple 
of  Jupiter  Ammon.)  Ammonia  gas.  The  substance 
so  called  is  an  a€riform  or  alkaline  air.  “ There  is  a 
saline  body,  formerly  brought  from  Egypt,  where  it 
was  separated  from  soot  by  sublimation,  but  which  is 
now  made  abundantly  in  Europe,  called  sal  ammo- 
niac. From  this  salt  pure  ammonia  can  be  readily 
obtained  by  the  following  process.  Mix  unslacked 
quicklime  with  its  own  weight  of  sal  ammoniac,  each 
in  fine  powder,  and  introduce  them  into  a glass  retort. 


Join  to  the  beak  of  the  retort,  by  a collar  of  caout- 
chouc, (a  neck  of  an  Indian  rubber  bottle  answers 
well,)  a glass  tube  about  18  inches  long,  containing 
pieces  of  ignited  muriate  of  lime.  This  tube  should 
lie  in  a horizontal  position,  and  its  free  end,  previously 
bent  obliquely  by  the  blowpipe,'  should  dip  into  dry 
mercury  in  a pneumatic  trough.  A slip  of  porous 
paper,  as  an  additional  precaution,  may  be  tied  round 
the  tube,  and  kept  moist  with  aether.  If  a gentle  heat 
from  apharcoal  chaffer  or  lamp  be  now  applied  to  the 
bottom  of  the  retort,  a gaseous  body  will  bubble  up 
through  the  mercury.  Fill  a little  glass  tube,  sealed  at 
one  end,  with  the  gas,  and  transfer  it,  closely  stopped 
at  the  other  end,  into  a basin  containing  water.  If  the 
water  rise  instantly  and  fill  the  whole  tube,  the  gas  is 
pure,  and  may  be  received  for  examination. 

Ammonia  is  a transparent,  colourless,  and  conse- 
quently invisible  gas,  possessed  of  elasticity,  and  the 
other  mechanical  properties  of  the  atmospherical  air. 
Its  specific  gravity  is  an  important  datum  in  chemical 
researches,  and  has  been  rather  differently  stated. 
Now  as  no  aeriform  body  is  more  easily  obtained  in  a 
pure  state  than  ammonia,  this  diversity,  among  accu- 
rate experimentalists,  shows  the  nicety  of  this  statical 
operation.  Biot  and  Arago  make  it  — 0.59669  by  ex- 
periment, and  by  calculation  from  its  elementary 
gases,  they  make  it  = 0.59438.  Kir  wan  says  that  100 
cubic  inches  weigh  18.16  gr.  at  30  inches  of  bar.  and 
61°  F.,  which  compared  to  air  reckoned  30.519,  gives 
0.59540.  Sir  H.  Davy  determines  its  density  to  be 
= 0.590,  with  which  estimate  the  theoretic  calculations 
of  Dr.  Prout,  in  the  sixth  volume  of  the  Annals  of  Phi- 
losophy, agree. 

This  gas  has  an  exceedingly  pungent  smell,  well 
known  by  the  old  name  of  spirits  of  hartshorn.  An 
animal  plunged  into  it  speedily  dies.  It  extinguishes 
combustion,  but  being  itself  to  a certain  degree  com- 
bustible, the  flame  of  a taper  immersed  in  it  is  enlarged 
before  going  out.  It  has  a very  acrid  taste.  Water 
condenses  it  very  rapidly. 

Water  is  capable  of  dissolving  easily  about  one-third 
of  its  weight  of  ammoniacal  gas,  or  460  times  its  bulk. 
Hence,  when  placed  in  contact  with  a tube  filled  with 
this  gas,  water  rushes  into  it  with  explosive  velocity. 

Ammoniacal  gas,  perfectly  dry,  when  mixed  with 
oxygen,  explodes  with  the  electric  spark,  and  is  con- 
verted into  water  and  nitrogen,  as  has  been  shown  in 
an  ingenious  paper  by  Dr.  Henry.  But  the  simplest, 
and  perhaps  most  accurate  mode  of  resoiving  ammo- 
nia into  its  elementary  constituents,  is  that  first  prac- 
tised by  Berthollet,  the  celebrated  discoverer  of  its 
composition.  This  consists  in  making  the  pure  gas 
traverse  very  slowly  an  ignited  porcelain  tube  of  a 
small  diameter. 

The  alkaline  nature  of  ammonia  is  demonstrated, 
not  only  by  its  neutralizing  acidity,  and  changing  the 
vegetable  reds  to  purple  or  green,  but  also  by  its  being 
attracted  to  the  negative  pole  of  a voltaic  arrangement. 
When  a pretty  strong  electric  power  is  applied  to 
ammonia  in  its  liquid  or  solid  combinations,  simple 
decomposition  is  effected  ; but  in  contact  with  mercury, 
very  mysterious  phenomena  occur.  If  a globule  of 
mercury  be  surrounded  with  a little  water  of  ammo- 
nia, or  placed  in  a little  cavity  in  a piece  of  sal  ammo- 
niac, and  then  subjected  to  the  voltaic  power  by  two 
wires,  the  negativ^  touching  the  mercury,  and  the 
positive  the  ammoniacal  compound,  the  globule  is 
instantly  covered  with  a circulating  film,  a white 
smoke  rises  from  it,  and  its  volume  enlarges,  while  it 
shoots  out  ramifications  of  a semi-solid  consistence 
over  the  salt.  The  amalgam  has  the  consistence  of 
soft  butter,  and  may  be  cut  with  a knife.  Whenever 
the  electrization  is  suspended,  the  crab-like  fibres 
retract  towards  the  central  mass,  which  soon,  by  the 
constant  formation  of  white  saline  films,  resumes  its 
pristine  globular  shape  and  size.  The  enlargement  of 
volume  seems  to  amount  occasionally  to  ten  times  that 
of  the  mercury-,  when  a small  globule  is  employed. 
Sir  H.  Davy,  Berzelius,  and  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard, 
have  studied  this  singular  phenohienon  with  great 
care.  They  produced  the  very  same  substance  by 
putting  an  amalgam  of  mercury  and  potassium  into  the 
moistened  cupel  of  sal  ammoniac.  It  becomes  five  or 
six  times  larger,  assumes  the  consistence  of  butter, 
while  it  retains  its  metallic  lustre. 

What  takes  place  in  these  experiments?  In  the 
. second  case,  the  substance  ®f  metallic  aspect  which  we 

57 


AaVTM 


AMM 


obtain  is  an  amtnoniacal  hydruret  of  mercury  and  po- 
tassium. There  is  formed,  besides,  muriate  of  potassa.  I 
Consequently  a portion  of  the  potassium  of  the  amal- 
gam decomposes  the  water,  becomes  potassa,  which  | 
itself  decomposes  the  muriate  of  ammonia.  Thence  I 
result  hydrogen  and  ammonia,  which,  in  the  nascent 
state,  unite  to  the  undecomposed  amalgam.  In  the 
first  experiment,  the  substance  which,  as  in  the 
second,  presents  the  metallic  aspect,  is  only  an  ammo- 
uiacal  hydruret  of  mercury ; its  formation  is  accom- 
panied by  the  perceptible  evolution  of  a certain  quan- 
tity of  chlorine  at  the  positive  pole.  It  is  obvious, 
therefore,  that  the  salt  is  decomposed  by  the  electricity. 
The  hydrogen  of  the  muriatic  acid,  and  the  ammonia, 
both  combiue  with  the  mercury. 

Ammonia  is  not  affected  by  a cherry-red  heat. 
According  to  Guyton  de  Morveau,  it  becomes  a liquid 
at  about  40° — 0°,  or  at  0°  the  freezing  point  of  mer- 
cury ; but  it  is  uncertain  whether  the  appearances  he 
observed  may  not  have  been  owing  to  hygrometric 
water,  as  happens  with  chlorine  gas.  The  ammo- 
niacal  liquid  loses  its  pungent  smell  as  its  temperature 
sinks,  till  at — 50°  it  gelatinizes,  if  suddenly  cooled ; but 
if  slowly  cooled  it  crystallizes. 

Oxygen,  by  means  of  electricity,  or  a mere  red  heat, 
resolves  ammonia  into  water  and  nitrogen.  When 
there  is  a considerable  excess  of  oxygen,  it  acidifies  a 
portion  of  the  nitrogen  into  nitrous  acid,  whence 
many  fallacies  in  analysis  have  arisen.  Chlorine  and 
ammonia  exercise  so  powerful  an  action  on  each  other, 
that  when  mixed  suddenly,  a sheet  of  white  flame  per- 
vades them.  The  simplest  way  of  making  this  fine 
experiment,  is  to  invert  a matress,  with  a wide  mouth 
and  conical  neck,  over  another  with  a taper  neck,  con- 
taining a mixture  of  sal  ammoniac  and  lime,  heated  by 
a lamp.  As  soon  as  the  upper  vessel  seems  to  be  full 
of  ammonia,  by  the  overflow  of  the  pung%nt  gas,  it  is 
to  be  cautiously  lifted  up,  and  inserted,  in  a perpen- 
dicular direction,  into  a wide-mouthed  glass  decanter 
or  flask,  filled  with  chlorine.  On  seizing  the  two  ves- 
sels thus  joined  with  the  two  hands  covered  with 
gloves,  and  suddenly  inverting  them,  like  a sand-glass, 
the  heavy  chlorine  and  light  ammonia,  rushing  in 
opposite  directions,  unite,  with  the  evolution  of  flame. 
As  one  volume  of  ammonia  contains,  in  a condensed 
state,  one  and  a half  of  hydrogen,  which  requires  for 
its  saturation  just  one  and  a half  of  chlorine,  this  quan- 
tity should  resolve  the  mixture  into  muriatic  acid  and 
nitrogen,  and  thereby  give  a ready  analysis  of  the  alka- 
line gas.  If  the  proportion  of  chlorine  be  less,  sal 
ammoniac  and  nitrogen  are  the  results.  The  same 
thing  happens  on  mixing  the  aqueous  solutions  of 
ammonia  and  chlorine.  But  if  large  bubbles  of  chlo- 
rine be  let  up  in  ammoniacal  water  of  moderate 
strength,  luminous  streaks  are  seen  in  the  dark  to  per- 
vade the  liquid,  and  the  same  reciprocal  change  of  the 
ingredients  is  effected. 

Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard  state,  that  when  3 parts  of 
ammoniacal  gas  and  1 of  chlorine  are  mixed  together, 
they  condense  into  sal  ammoniac,  and  azote,  equal  to 
1-10  the  whole  volume,  is  given  out. 

Iodine  has  an  analogous  action  on  ammonia ; 
seizing  a portion  of  its  Ijydrogen  to  form  hydriodic  acid, 
whence  hydriodate  of  ammonia  results ; while  another 
portion  of  iodine  unites  with  the  liberated  nitrogen  to 
form  the  explosive  pulverulent  iodine. 

Cyanogen  and  ammoniacal  gas  begin  to  act  upon 
each  other  whenever  they  come  into  contact,  but  some 
hours  are  requisite  to  render  the  effect  complete.  They 
unite  in  the  proportion  nearly  of  1 to  1 1-2,  forming  a 
compound  which  gives  a dark  orange-brown  colour  to 
water,  but  dissolves  in  only  a very  small  quantity  of 
water.  The  solution  does  not  produce  prussimi  blue 
with  the  salts  of  iron. 

By  transmitting  ammoniacal  gas  through  charcoal 
ignited  in  a tube,  prussic  or  hydrocyanic  acid  is  formed. 

The  action  of  the  alkaline  metals  on  gaseous  ammo- 
nia, is  very  curious.  When  potassium  is  fused  in  that 
gas,  a very  fusible  olive-green  substance,  consisting  of 
potassium,  nitrogen,  and  ammonia  is  formed ; and  a 
volume  of  hydrogen  remains  exactly  equal  to  what 
would  result  from  the  action  on  water  of  the  quantity 
of  potassium  employed.  Hence,  according  to  Thenard, 
the  ammonia  is  divided  into  two  portions.  One  is 
decomposed,  so  that  its  nitrogen  combines  with  the 
potassium,  and  its  hydrogen  remains  free,  while  the 
other  is  absorbed  in  whole  or  in  part  by  the  nitroguret 


of  potassium.  Sodium  acts  in  the  same  manner.  The 
I olive  substance  is  opaque,  and  it  is  only  when  in  plates 
of  extreme  thinness  that  it  appears  semitransparent ; it 
I has  nothing  of  the  metallic  appearance ; it  is  heavier 
I than  water ; and,  on  minute  inspection,  seems  imper- 
fectly crystallized.  When  it  is  exposed  to  a heat  pro- 
gressively increased,  it  melts,  disengages  ammonia,  and 
hydrogen,  and  nitrogen,  in  tlie  proportions  constituting 
ammonia ; then  it  becomes  solid,  still  preserving  its 
green  colour,  and  is  converted  into  a nitroguret  of 
potassium  or  sodium.  Exposed  to  the  air  at  the  ordi 
nary  temperature,  it  attracts  only  its  humidity,  but  not 
its'oxygen,  and  is  slowly  transformed  into  ammoniacal 
gas,  and  potassa  or  soda.  It  burns  vividly  when  pro- 
jected into  a hot  crucible,  or  when  heated  in  a vessel 
containing  oxygen.  Water  and  acids  produce  also 
sudden  decomposition,  with  the  extrication  of  heat. 
Alkalies  or  alkaline  salts  are  produced.  Alkohol  like 
wise  decomposes  it  with  similar  results.  The  pre- 
ceding  description  of  the  compound  of  ammonia  with 
potassium,  as  prepared  by  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard, 
was  controverted  by  Sir  H.  Davy. 

The  experiments  of  this  accurate  chemist  led  to  the 
conclusion,  that  the  presence  of  moisture  had  modified 
their  results.  In  proportion  as  more  precautions  are 
taken  to  keep  every  thing  absolutely  dry,  so  in  propor- 
tion is  less  ammonia  regenerated.  He  seldom  obtained 
as  much  as  1-10  of  the  quantity  absorbed;  and  he 
never  could  procure  hydrogen  and  nitrogen  in  the  pro- 
portions constituting  ammonia;  there  was  always  an 
excess  of  nitrogen.  The  following  experiment  was 
conducted  wilh  the  utmost  nicety.  3 1-2  gr.  of  potas- 
sium were  heated  in  12  cubic  inches  of  ammoniacal 
gas ; 7.5  were  absorbed,  and  3.2  of  hydrogen  evolved. 
On  distilling  the  olive-ccloured  solid  in  a lube  of  plati- 
na,  9 cubical  inches  of  gas  were  given  off,  and  half  a 
cubical  inch  remained  in  the  tube  and  adapters.  Of 
the  nine  cubical  inches,  one-fifth  of  a cubical  inch  only 
was  ammonia ; 10  measuies  of  the  permanent  gas 
mixed  with  7.5  of  oxygen,  and  acted  upon  by  the 
electrical  spark,  left  a residuum  of  7.5.  He  infers  that 
the  results  of  the  analysis  of  ammonia,  by  electricity 
and  potassium,  are  the  same. 

On  the  whole  we  may  legitimately  infer,  that  there 
is  something  yet  unexplained  in  these  phenomena. 
The  potassium  separates  from  ammonia  as  much  hy- 
drogen, as  an  equal  weight  of  it  would  from  water. 
If  two  volumes  of  hydrogen  be  thus  detached  from  the 
alkaline  gas,  the  remaining  volume,'  with  the  volume 
of  nitrogen,  will  be  left  to  combine  with  the  potassium, 
forming  a triple  compound,  somewhat  analogous  to 
the  cyanides,  a compound  capable  of  condensing  am 
monia. 

When  ammoniacal  gas  is  transmitted  over  ignited 
wires  of  iron,  copper,  platina,  &c.  it  is  decomposed 
completely,  and  though  the  metals  are  not  increased  in 
weight,  they  have  become  extremely  brittle.  Iron,  at 
the  same  temperature,  decomposes  the  ammonia,  with 
double  the  rapidity  that  platinum  does.  At  a high 
temperature,  the  protoxyde  of  nitrogen  decomposes 
ammonia. 

Of  the  ordinary  metals,  zinc  is  the  only  one  which 
liquid  ammonia  oxydizes  and  then  dissolves.  But  it 
acts  on  many  of  the  metallic  oxydes.  At  a high  tem- 
perature the  gas  deoxydizes  all  those  which  are  re- 
ducible by  hydrogen.  The  oxydes  soluble  in  liquid 
ammonia,  are  the  oxyde  of  zinc ; the  protoxyde  and 
peroxyde  of  copper  ; the  oxyde  of  silver ; the  third  and 
fourth  oxydes  of  antimony  ; the  oxyde  of  tellurium  ; 
the  protoxides  of  nickel,  cobalt,  and  iron,  the  peroxyde 
of  tin,  mercury,  gold,  and  platinum.  The  first  five 
are  very  soluble,  the  rest  less  so.  These  combinations 
can  be  obtained  by  evaporation,  in  the  dry  state,  only 
with  copper,  antimony,  mercury,  gold,  platinum,  and 
silver  ; the  four  last  of  which  are  very  remarkable  for 
their  detonating  property.  See  the  particular  metals. 

All  the  acids  are  susceptible  of  combining  writh  am- 
monia, and  they  almost  all  form  with  it  neutral  com- 
pounds. Gay  Lussac  made  the  important  discovery, 
that  whenever  the  acid  is  gaseous,  its  combination 
with  ammoniacal  gas  takes  place  in  a simple  ratio  of 
determinate  volumes,  whether  a neutral  or  a subsalt 
be  formed. 

Ammoniacal  salts  have  the  following  general  cha- 
racters : — 

1st,  When  treated  with  a caustic  fixed  alkali  or 
earth,  they  exhale  the  peculiar  smell  of  ammouia. 


AMM 

2d,  They  are  generally  soluble  in- water,  and  crys- 
tallizable. 

3d,  They  are  all  decomposed  at  a moderate  red 
ne'at ; and  if  the  acid  be  fixed,  as  the  phosphoric  or 
boracic,  the  ammonia  comes  away  pure. 

4th,  When  they  are  dropped  into  a solution  of  mu- 
riate of  platina,  a yellow  precipitate  falls.” — Ure's 
C/iem.  Diet. 

The  preparations  of  .ammonia  in  use  are, 

1.  Liquor  ammoniae.  See  Ammonia  liquor. 

tZ.  The  sub-carbonate  of  ammonia.  See  Ammonia 
subcarbonas,  and  ammonia  subcarbonatis  liquor. 

3.  The  acetate  of  ammonia.  See  Ammonia  acetatis 
liquor. 

4.  The  muriate  of  ammonia.  See  Sal  ammoniac. 

5.  Ferrum  ammoniatum. 

6.  Several  tinctures  and  spirits,  holding  ammonia  in 
solution. 

Ammonia , argentate  of.  Fulminating  silver. 

Ammonia  acetata.  See  Liquor  ammonia  acetatis. 

Ammonia  muriata.  See  Sal  ammoniac. 

Ammonia  prjeparata.  See  Ammonia  subcarbonas. 

Ammoniac,  sal.  See  Sal  Ammoniac. 

AMMONI'ACUM.  (A ppoviaKov  ] so  called  from 
Ammonia , whence  it  was  brought.)  Gum-ammoniac. 
A concrete  gummy  resinous  juice,  composed  of  little 
lumps,  or  tears,  of  a strong  and  somewhat  ungrateful 
smell,  and  nauseous  taste,  followed  by  a bitterness. 
There  has,  hitherto,  been  no  information  had  concern- 
ing the  plant  which  affords  this  drug  ; but  Wildenow 
considers  it  to  be  the  Heracleum  gummiferum,  having 
raised  that  plant  from  the  seeds,  which  are  sometimes 
found  in  the  drug.  It  is  imported  here  from  Turkey, 
and  from  the  East  Indies.  It  consists,  according  to 
Braconnot,  of  70  resin,  18.4  gum.  4.4  glutinous  matter, 
6 water,  and  1.2  loss  in  100  parts.  Gum  ammoniacum 
is  principally  employed  as  an  expectorant,  and  is  fre- 
quently prescribed  in  asthma  and  chronic  catarrh.  Its 
dose  is  from  10  to  30  grains.  It  is  given  in  the  form  of 
pill  or  diffused  in  water,  and  is  frequently  combined 
with  squill,  or  tartarized  antimony.  In  large  doses  it 
proves  purgative.  Externally,  it  is  applied  as  a discu- 
tient,  under  the  form  of  plaster,  to  white  swellings  of 
the  knee,  and  to  indolent  tumours.  The  officinal  pre- 
parations are  ammoniacum  purificatum.  Emplastrum 
ammoniaci ; Empl.  ammoniaci  cum  hydrargyro ; Mis- 
tura  ammoniaci. 

Ammoni*  acetatis  liquor.  A solution  of  ace- 
tate of  ammonia;  formerly  called  Aqua  ammonia  ace- 
tata. Take  of  sub-carbonateof  ammonia,  two  ounces ; 
dilute  acetic  acid,  four  pints.  Add  the  acid  to  the  salt, 
until  bubbles  of  gas  shall  no  longer  arise,  and  mix. 
The  effervescence  is  occasioned  by  the  escape  of  car- 
bonic acid  gas,  which  the  acetic  acid  expels,  and  neu- 
tralizes the  ammonia. 

If  the  acid  rather  predominate,  the  solution  is  more 
grateful  to  the  taste  ; and  provided  that  acid  be  cor- 
rectly prepared,  the  proportions  here  given  will  be 
found  sufficient ; where  the  acid  cannot  be  depended 
on,  it  will  be  right  to  be  regulated  rather  by  the  cessa- 
tion of  effervescence  than  by  quantity. 

This  preparation  was  formerly  known  in  the  shops 
under  the  name  of  spirit  of  Minderems.  When  assist- 
ed by  a warm  regimen,  it  proves  an  excellent  and  pow- 
erful sudorific  ; and,  as  it  operates  without  quickening 
the  circulation,  or  increasing  the  heat  of  the  body,  it  is 
admissible  in  febrile  and  inflammatory  diseases,  in 
which  the  use  of  stimulating  sudorifics  are  attended 
with  danger.  Its  action  may  likewise  be  determined 
to  the  kidneys,  by  walking  about  in  the  cool  air.  The 
common  dose  is  half  an  ounce,  either  by  itself,  or 
along  with  other  medicines,  adapted  to  the  same  in- 
tention. 

Ammoni.e  carbonas.  See  Ammonia  subcarbonas. 

Ammonite  liquor.  Liquor  of  Ammonia.  Take  of 
muriate  of  ammonia  eight  ounces ; lime  newly  pre- 
pared, six  ounces ; water,  four  pints.  Pour  on  the  lime 
a pint  of  the  water,  then  cover  the  vessel,  and  set  them 
by  for  an  hour ; then  add  the  muriate  of  ammonia, 
and  the  remaining  water  previously  made  boiling  hot, 
and  cover  the  vessel  again  ; strain  the  liquor  when  it 
has  cooled  ; then  distil  from  it  twelve  fluid  ounces  of 
the  solution  of  ammonia  into  a receiver  cooled  to  the 
temperature  of  50°.  The  specific  gravity  of  this  solu- 
tion should  be  to  that  of  distilled  water,  as  4.960  to 
1000. 

Lime  is  capable  of  decomposing  muriate  of  ammo- 


AMN 

nia  at  a temperature  much  below  that  of  boiling  wa- 
ter; so  that  when  the  materials  are  mixed,  a solution 
of  ammonia  and  of  muriate  of  lime  is  obtained.  This 
being  submitted  to  distillation,  the  ammonia  passes 
over  with  a certain  portion  of  the  water,  leaving  be- 
hind the  muriate  of  lime  dissolved  iu  the  rest.  The 
proportion  of  water  directed  seems,  however,  unneces- 
sarily great,  which  obliges  the  operator  to  employ  larger 
vessels  than  would  otherwise  suffice.  But  the  process 
now  directed  is  certainly  much  easier,  more  economi- 
cal, and  more  uniform  in  its  results,  than  that  of 
former  pharmacopoeias. 

This  preparation  is  colourless  and  transparent  with 
a strong  peculiar  smell ; it  parts  with  the  ammonia  in 
the  form  of  gas,  if  heated  to  130  degrees,  and  requires 
to  be  kept,  with  a cautious  exclusion  of  atmospherical 
air,  with  the  carbonic  acid  of  which  it  readily  unites : 
on  this  latter  account,  the  propriety  of  keeping  it  in 
small  !>ottles  instead  of  a large  one,- has  been  sug- 
gested. 

This  is  the  aqua  ammonia  pur  a of  the  shops,  and 
the  alcali  volatile  ca-isticum. 

Water  of  ammonia  is  very  rarely  given  internally, 
although  it  may  be  used  in  doses  of  ten  or  twenty  drops, 
largely  diluted,  as  a powerful  stimulant  in  asphyxia 
and  similar  diseases.  Externally  it  is  applied  to  the 
skin  as  a rubefacient,  and  in  the  form  of  gas  to  the 
nostrils,  and  to  the  eyes  as  a stimulant:  in  cases  of 
torpor,  paralysis,  rheumatism,  syncope,  hysteria,  and 
chronic  ophthalmia. 

Ammoni-e  murias.  See  Sal  ammoniaca. 

Ammoni-e  nitras.  Alcali  volatile  nitratum ; Sal 
ammoniacus  nitrosus ; Ammonia  nitrata.  A salt 
composed  of  the  nitric  acid  and  ammonia,  the  virtues 
of  which  are  internally  diuretic  and  deobstruent,  and 
externally  resolvent  and  sialogogue. 

Ammonle  subcarbonas.  Subcarbonate  of  ammo- 
nia. This  preparation  was  formerly  called  ammonia 
praparata , and  sal  volatilis  salis  ammoniaci , and  sal 
volatilis.  It  is  made  thus  : — Take  of  muriate  of  am- 
monia, a pound : of  prepared  chalk,  dried,  a pound 
and  a half.  Reduce  them  separately  to  powder ; 
then  mix  them  together,  and  sublime  in  a heat  gra- 
dually raised,  till  the  retort  becomes  red.  In  this  pre- 
paration a double  decomposition  takes  place,  the  car- 
bonic acid  of  the  chalk  uniting  with  the  ammonia,  and 
forming  subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  which  is  volatilized 
while  muriate  of  lime  remains  in  the  vessel. 

This  salt  possesses  nervine  and  stimulating  powers, 
and  is  highly  beneficial  in  the  dose  of  from  two  to 
eight  grains,  in  nervous  affections,  debilities,  flatulency, 
and  acidity  from  dyspepsia. 

Ammonia  subcarbonatis  liquor.  Liquor  am- 
monia carbonatis.  Solution  of  subcarbonate  of  am- 
monia. Take  of  subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  four 
ounces  ; distilled  water  a pint.  Dissolve  the  subcar- 
bonate of  ammonia  in  the  water,  and  filter  the  solution 
through  paper.  This  preparation  possesses  the  pro- 
perties of  ammonia  in  its  action  on  the  human  body. 
See  Ammonia  subcarbonas. 

Ammonicated  copper , liquor  of.  See  Cupri  ammo- 
niati  liquor. 

Ammo'nion.  (From  appoj, sand.)  Adtius  uses  this 
term  to  denote  a collyrium  of  great  virtue  in  many 
diseases  of  the  eye,  which  was  said  to  remove  sand  or 
gravel  from  the  eyes. 

AMMONI  TES.  Petrifactions,  which  have  like- 
wise been  distinguished  by  the  name  of  cornua  ammo- 
nis , and  are  called  snake-stones  by  the  vulgar,  consist 
chiefly  of  lime-stone.  They  are  found  of  all  sizes, 
from  the  breadth  of  half  an  inch  to  more  than  two  feet 
in  diameter ; some  of  them  rounded,  others  greatly 
compressed,  and  lodged  in  different  strata  of  stones 
and  clays.  They  appear  to  owe  their  origin  to  shells 
of  the  nautilus  kind. 

AMMO'NIIJM.  Berzelius  first  gave  this  name  to  a 
supposed  metal  which  with  oxygen  he  conceives  to 
form  the  alkali  called  ammonia.  It  is  now  generally 
used  by  all  chemists.  See  Ammonia. 

AMNE'SIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  pvrjcts,  memory.) 
Amnestia.  Forgetfulness ; mostly  a symptomatic 
affection. 

Amne'stia.  See  Amnesia. 

A MNIOS.  (From  apvoj,  a lamb,  or  lamb’s  skin.) 
Amnion.  The  soft  internal  membrane  which  sur- 
rounds the  foetus.  It  is  very  thjn  and  pellucid  in  the 
early  stage  of  pregnancy,  but  acquires  considerable 

59 


AMP 


thickness  and  strength  in  the  latter  months.  The  am- 
nios contains  a thin  watery  fluid,  in  which  the  foetus 
is  suspended.  See  Liquor  amnii. 

AMNIOTIC.  (Amnioticus ; from  amnios  ; so  called 
because  it  is  obtained  from  the  membrane  of  that 
name.)  Of  or  belonging  to  the  amnios. 

Amniotio  acid.  Acidum  amnioticum.  A peculiar 
acid  found  in  the  liquor  of  the  amnios  of  the  cow.  It 
exists  in  the  form  of  a white  pulverulent  powder.  It 
is  slightly  acid  to  the  taste,  but  sensibly  reddens  vege- 
table blues.  It  is  with  difficulty  soluble  in  cold,  but 
readily  soluble  in  boiling  water,  and  in  alkohol. 
When  exposed  to  a strong  heat,  it  exhales  an  odour  of 
ammonia  and  of  prussic  acid.  Assisted  by.  heat,  it  de- 
composes carbonate  of  potassa,  soda,  and  ammonia. 
It  produces  no  change  in  the  solutions  of  silver,  lead, 
or  mercury,  in  nitric  acid.  Amniotic  acid  may  be  ob- 
tained by  evaporating  the  liquor  of  the  amnios  of  the 
cow  to  a fourth  part,  and  suffering  it  to  cool ; crystals 
of  amniotic  acid  will  be  obtained  in  considerable  quan- 
tity. Whether  this  acid  exists  in  the  liquor  of  the  am- 
nios of  other  animals,  is  not  yet  known. 

AMO'MUM.  ( Amomum , i.  n. ; from  an  Arabian 
word,  signifying  a pigeon,  the  foot  of  which  it  was 
thought  to  resemble.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linneean  system.  Class  Monanaria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Amomum  cardamomum.  The  former  systematic 
name  for  the  cardamomum  minus.  See  Elettaria 
cardamomum. 

Amomum  granum  paradisi.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  which  affords  the  grains  of  paradise.  Car- 
damomum majus;  Meleguetta ; Maniguetta ; Carda- 
momum piperatium.  Grains  of  paradise,  or  the 
greater  cardamom  seeds,  are  contained  in  a large 
brown,  somewhat  triangular  flask,  the  thickness  of 
one’s  thumb,  and  pyramidal.  The  seeds  are  angular, 
and  of  a reddish  brown  colour,  smaller  than  pepper, 
and  resemble  very  much  the  seeds  of  the  cardamomum 
minus.  They  are  extremely  hot,  and  similar  in  virtue 
to  pepper. 

Amomum  verum.  True  stone  parsley.  The  fruit  is 
about  the  size  of  a grape,  of  a strong  and  grateful  aro- 
matic taste,  and  penetrating  smell.  The  seeds  have 
Jieen  given  as  a carminative. 

Amomum  zingiber.  The  former  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  which  affords  ginger.  See  Zingiber  offici- 
nale. 

Amo'rge.  See  Amurca. 

AMPELITE.  The  aluminous  ampelite,  is  the  alum 
-slate ; and  the  graphic,  the  graphic  slate. 

AMPELOSA'GRIA.  (From  apneXos,  a vine,  and 
. aypios , wild.)  See  Bryonia  alba. 

AMPHEMERI'NA.  S ee  Amphemerinos. 

AMPHEMERI'NOS.  (Fom  ap<pi,  about  and  rjpcpa, 
a day.)  Amphemerina.  A fever  of  one  day’s  du- 
ration. 

AMPHIARTHRO'SIS.  Apcpiapdpuxng;  from  aptpi, 
both,  and  apQpwms,  an  articulation:  so  called  from 
its  partaking  both  of  diarthrosis  and  synarthrosis.)  A 
mixed  species  of  connexion  of  bones,  which  admits  of 
. an  obscure  morion,  as  is  observed  in  the  metacarpal 
and  metatarsal  bones,  and  the  vertebra. 

AMPHIBIUM.  (From  apQi,  ambo,  and  /?toj,  vita.) 
An  amphibious  animal,  or  one  that  lives  both  on  land 
and  in  the  water.  The  amphibious  animals,  according 
to  Linnaeus,  are  a class,  the  heart  of  which  is  fur- 
nished with  one  ventricle  and  one  auricle,  in  which 
respiration  is  in  a considerable  degree  voluntary. 

AMPHIBLESTROI'DES.  (From  ap>pi6Xc^pov,  a 
net,  and  eiSos , a resemblance.)  Reteform  or  net-like ; 
a term  which  has  been  applied  to  the  retina. 

Amphibole.  Some  species  of  action Mte  and  horn- 
blende have  this  name. 

[This  is  the  name  given  by  Hauy,  to  a mineral,  the 
synonyms  of  which  are : — 

Tremolith  of  Werner, 

La  Tremolithe  of  Brocliant, 

Grammatite  of  Brogniart, 

Tremolitd  of  Cleaveland.  A .] 

Amphibolites.  Trap  rocks  are  so  called  in  geo- 
logy, the  basis  of  which  is  hornblende. 

AMPHIBRA'NCIIIA.  (From  aptfu,  about,  and 
Ppavxia,  the  jaws.)  The  fauces  or  parts  about  the 
tonsils,  according  to  Hippocrates  and  Foesius. 

Amphicau'stis.  (From  ap(pi,  about,  and  icav^is, 
ripe  corn.)  1.  A sort  of  wild  barley. 

(30 


AMY 

2.  Eustachius  says,  it  was  also  to  express  the  pri- 
vate parts  of  a woman. 

AMPHIDEON.  (From  apQt,  on  both  sides,  and 
Sana,  to  divide.)  Amphidceum ; Amphidium.  The  os 
tine®,  or  mouth  of  the  womb,  which  opens  both  ways, 
was  so  ca^ed  by  the  ancients. 

AMPHiDIARTHRO  felS.  The  same  as  Amphiar - 
throsis. 

Amphigene.  A name  of  Vesuvian. 

[This  name  is  given  by  Hauy  to  that  crystalline  sub- 
stance, frequently  found  among  volcanic  productions, 
and  which  other  mineralogists  have  called  Leu- 
cite.  A.] 

AMPHIMERI'NA.  (From  apepi,  about,  and  ypepa, 
a day.)  A fever  of  one  day’s  continuance. 

AMFHIME'TRION.  (From  ap<pi,  about,  and  py- 
rpa,  the  womb.)  Amphimetrium.  The  parts  about 
the  womb.  Hippocrates. 

A'mphiplex.  (From  apd>i , about,  and  ZuXcktu),  to 
connect.)  According  to  Rufus  Ephesius,  the  part 
situated  between  the  scrotum  and  anus,  and  which  is 
connected  with  the  thighs. 

Amphipneuma.  (From  apipi,  about,  and  zsvevpa , 
breath.)  A difficulty  of  breathing. — Hippocrates. 

AMPHI'POLIS.  (from  ap6i , about,  and  zcoXcto,  to 
attend.)  Amphipolus.  One  who  attends  the  bed  of  a 
sick  person,  and  administers  to  him. — Hippocrates. 

Amphismi'la.  (From  ap<bt,  on  both  sides,  and 
< rpiXy , an  incision-knife.)  A dissecting  knife,  with  an 
edge  on  both  sides.  Galen. 

AMPLECTENS.  Embracing,  clasping. 

AMPLEXIOAULIS.  (From  amplector , to  sur- 
round, and  caulis,  a stem.)  Embracing  or  clasping 
the  stem.  Folium  amplexicaule  is  a leaf,  the  base  of 
which  surrounds  the  stem,  as  in  Papaver  somniferum 
and  Carduus  marianus ; and  the  Senesio  hirsutus , has 
a leafstalk  which  embraces  the  stem  as  its  base. 

AMPU'LLA.  {ApdoXXa ; from  ava6aXXa>t  to  swell 
out.)  A bottle. 

1.  All  bellied  vessels  are  so  called  in  chemistry,  as 
bolt-heads,  receivers,  cucurbits,  &c. 

2.  In  anatomy  this  term  is  applied  by  Scarpa  to  the 
dilated  portions  of  the  membranaceods  semicircular 
canals,  just  within  the  vestibulum  of  the  ear. 

3.  In  botany;  it  is  a small  membranaceous  bag 
attached  to  the  roots  and  the  emersed  leaves  of  some 
aquatic  plants,  rendering  them  buoyant. — Thompson. 

AMPULLE'SCENS.  (From  ampulla , a bottle.) 
The  most  tumid  part  of  the  thoracic  duct  is  called  al- 
veus amputlcscens. 

AMPUTA'TIO.  (Froift  amputo,  to  cut  off.)  Ectome. 
Amputation ; a surgical  operation,  which  consists  in 
the  removal  of  a limb  or  viscus : thus  we  say,  a leg, 
a finger,  the  penis,  &c.  when  cut  off,  are  amputated  ; 
but  when  speaking  of  a tumour  or  excrescence,  it  is 
said  to  be  removed,  or  dissected  out. 

AMULE'TUM.  (From  appa , a bond ; because  it 
was  tied  round  the  person’s  neck;  or  rather  from 
apvvo),  to  defend.)  An  amulet,  or  charm  ; by  wearing 
which  the  person  was  supposed  to  be  defended  from 
the  admission  of  all  evil . in  particular,  an  antidote 
against  the  plague. 

Amu'rca.  (From  ttpcpyw,  to  press  out.)  Amorgc. 
1.  A small  herb,  whose  expressed  juice  is  used  in 
dying. 

2.  The  sediment  of  the  olive,  after  the  oil  has  been 
pressed  from  it ; recommended  by  Hippocrates  and 
Galen  as  an  application  to  ulcers. 

Amu'tica.  (From  apvr'] w,  to  scratch.)  Medicines 
that,  by  vellicating  or  scratching,  as  it  were,  the  bron 
chia,  stimulate  it  to  the  discharge  of  whatever  is  to 
be  thrown  off  the  lungs. 

A'myche.  (From  apvaao),  to  scratch.) 

1.  A superficial  laceration  or  exulceration  of  the 
skin  : a slight  wound. — Hippocrates. 

2.  Scarification. — Galen. 

AMY  GDALA.  ( Amygdala , ce.  f. ; ApvySaXy ; from 
apvaa to,  to  lancinate:  so  called,  because  atter  the 
green  husk  is  removed  from  the  fruit,  there  appear 
upon  the  shell  certain  fissures,  as  it  were  lace- 
rations.) 

1.  The  fruit  called  the  almond.  See  Amygdalis 

communis. 

2.  The  tonsil  glands  of  the  throat  are  sometimes 
termed,  from  their  resemblance,  Amygdala. 

Amygdala  amara.  The  bitter  almond.  SeeAmyg- 
dalus  communis. 


AMY 

Amygdala  dulcis.  The  sweet  almond.  S ee-Amyg- 
dalus  communis. 

Amygdala  oleum.  See  Amygdalus  communis. 

AMYGDALOID.  {Amygdaloides ; from  amygda- 
lus , an  almond,  and  eidos,  resemblance.)  Almond-like. 

1.  A name  given  to  some  parts  of  the  body  and  to 
parts  of  vegetables  'and  minerals,  which  resemble 
almonds. 

2.  A compound  mineral  consisting  of  spheroidal  par- 
ticles or  vesicles  of  iithomarge,  green  earth,  calc  spar, 
steatite  imbedded  in  a basis  of  fine-grained  green- 
stone or  wacke,  containing  sometimes,  also,  crystals  of 
hornblende. 

[Amygdaloid  is  a compound  rock,  composed  of  a 
basis,  in  which  are  imbedded  various  simple  minerals. 
But  these  imbedded  minerals  are  not  crystals  and 
grains,  apparently  of  cotemporaneous  origin  with  the 
basis  itself,  as  in  the  case  of  porphyry.  On  the  con- 
trary, their  form,  though  sometimes  irregular,  is  usually 
spheroidal  or  oval,  like  that  of  an  almond ; and  hence 
the  name  of  this  rock,  (from  Amygdala , an  almond.) 
— Clean.  Min.  A.] 

AMY'GDALUS.  ( Amygdalus , i.  m. ; from  amyg- 
dala, the  derivation  of  which  look  to.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaeah  system.  Class  Ico- 
sandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  The  almond-tree. 

Amygdalus  communis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  affords  the  common  almond.  Amyg- 
dalus— foliis  serratis  infimis  glandulosis,  Jloribus  scs- 
s ili bus, geminis  of  Linnaeus. 

The  almond  is  a native  of  Barbary.  The  same  tree 
produces  either  bitter  or  sweet.  Sweet  almonds  are 
more  in  use  as  food  than  medicine ; but  they  are  said 
to  be  difficult  of  digestion,  unless  extremely  well  com- 
minuted. Their  medicinal  qualities  depend  upon  the 
oil  which  they  contain  in  the  farinaceous  matter,  and 
which  they  afford  on  expression,  nearly  in  the  propor- 
tion of  half  their  weight.  It  is  very  similar  to  olive 
oil;  perhaps  rather  purer,  and  is  used  for  the  same 
purposes.  The  oil  thus  obtained  is  more  agreeable  to 
the  palate  than  most  of  the  other  expressed  oils,  and  is 
therefore  preferred  for  internal  use,  being  generally 
employed  with  a view  to  obtund  acrid  juices,  and  to 
soften  and  relax  the  solids,  in  tickling  coughs,  hoarse- 
ness, costiveness,  nephritic  pains,  &.c.  Externally,  it 
is  applied  against  tension  and  rigidity  of  particular 
parts.  The  milky  solutions  of  almonds  in  watery 
liquors,  usually  called  emulsions,  possess,  in  a certain 
degree,  the  emollient  qualities  of  the  oil,  and  have  this 
advantage  over  pure  oil,  that  they  may  be  given  in 
acute  or  inflammatory  disorders,  without  danger  of  the 
•11  effects  which  the  oil  might  sometimes  produce  by 
turning  rancid.  The  officinal  preparations  of  almonds 
are  the  expressed  oil,  the  confection,  and  the  emulsion  ; 
to  the  latter,  the  additien  of  gum-arabic  is  sometimes 
directed,  which  renders  it  a still  more  useful  demul- 
cent in  catarrhal  affections,  stranguries,  &,c. 

Bitter  almonds  yield  a large  quantity  of  oil,  per- 
fectly similar  to  that  obtained  from  sweet  almonds,  but 
the  matter  remaining  after  the  expression  of  the  oil,  is 
more  powerfully  bitter  than  the  almond  in  its  entire 
state.  Great  part  of  the  bitter  matter  dissolves  by  the 
assistance  of  heat,  both  in  water  and  rectified  spirit ; 
and  a part  arises  also  with  both  menstrua  in  distilla- 
tion. Bitter  almonds  have  been  long  known  to  be 
poisonous  to  various  brute  animals  ; and  some  authors 
have  alleged  that  they  are  also  deleterious  to  the  human 
species ; but  the  facts  recorded  upon  this  point  appear 
to  want  further  proof.  However,  as  the  noxious 
quality  seems  to  reside  in  that  matter  which  gives  it 
the  bitterness  and  flavour,  it  is  very  probable,  that 
when  this  is  separated  by  distillation,  and  taken  in  a 
sufficiently  concentrated  state,  it  may  prove  a poison 
to  man,  as  is  the  case  with  the  common  laurel,  to 
which  it  appears  extremely  analogous.  Bergius  tells 
us,  that  bitter  almonds,  in  the  form  of  emulsion,  cured 
obstinate  intermittents,  after  the  batjt  had  failed.  A 
simple  water  is  distilled  from  bitter  almonds,  after  the 
oil  is  pressed  out,  which  possesses  the  same  qualities, 
and  in  the  same  degree,  as  that  drawn  from  cherry- 
stones. These  afforded,  formerly,  the  now-exploded 
aqua  cerasorum  nigroruni , or  black  cherry-water. 

Amygdalus  pkrsica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  peach-tree.  The  fruit  is  known  to  be  grateful 
and  wholesome,  seldom  disagreeing  with  the  stomach, 
unless  this  organ  is  not  in  a healthy  state,  or  the  fruit 
has  been  eaten  to  excess,  when  effects  similar  to  those 


ANA 

of  the  other  dulco-acid  summer  fruits  may  be  pro- 
duced. The  flowers,  including  the  calyx  as  well  aa 
the  corolla,  are  the  parts  of  the  persica  used  for  medi- 
cinal purposes.  These  have  an  agreeable  but  weak 
smell,  and  a bitterish  taste.  Boulduc  observes,  “ that 
when  distilled,  without  addition,  by  the  heat  of  a 
water-bath,  they  yield  one-sixth  their  weight,  or  more, 
of  a whitish  liquid,  which  communicates  to  a consi- 
derable quantity  of  other  liquids  a flavour  like  that  of 
the  kernels  of  fiuits.  These  flowers  have  a cathartic 
effect,  and  especially  to  children,  have  been  success- 
fully given  in  the  character  of  a vermifuge  ; for  this 
purpose,  an  infusion  of  a drachm  of  flowers  dried,  or 
half  an  ounce  in  their  recent  state,  is  the  requisite  dose. 
The  leaves  of  the  peach  are  also  found  to  possess  an- 
thelmintic power,  and  from  a great  number  of  experi- 
ments appear  to  have  been  given  with  invariable  suc- 
cess both  to  children  and  adults.  However,  as  the 
leaves  and  flowers  of  this  plant  manifest,  in  some  de- 
gree, the  quality  of  those  of  the  laurocerasus,  they 
ought  to  be  used  with  caution.” 

A'myla.  (From  amylum , starch.)  This  term  has 
been  applied  to  some  chemical  ftecula,  or  highly  pul- 
verized residuum.  Obsolete. 

Amy'leon.  Amylion.  Starch.  ’ 

A MYLUM.  {Amylum,  i.  n.  Apt iXov from  a, 
priv.  and  yv\r),  a mill ; because  it  was  formerly  made 
from  wheat,  without  the  assistance  of  a mill.)  Amy - 
lean;  Amylion.  See  Starch. 

AMYRIS.*  (From  a,  intensive,  and  pupov,  oint- 
ment, or  balm  ; so  called  from  its  use,  or  smell.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system. 
Class,  Octandria;  Order,  Monogynia , of  which  two 
species  are  used  in  medicine. 

Amyris  elemifera.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  from  which  it  is  supposed  we  obtain  the  resin 
called  gum-elemi.  The  plant  is  described  by  Linnaeus : 
Amyris  : — foliis  ternis  quinato  pinnatisque  subtus  to- 
mentosis.  Elemi  is  brought  here  from  the  Spanish 
West  Indies  : it  is  most  esteemed  when  softish,  some- 
what transparent,  of  a pale  whitish  colour,  inclining  a 
little  to  green,  and  of  a strong,  though  not  unpleasant 
smell.  It  is  only  used  in  ointments  and  plasters,  and  is 
a powerful  digestive. 

Amyris  gileadensis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  from  which  the  opobalsamum  is  obtained.  It  has 
been  called  by  a variety  of  names,  as  Balsamum  gcnu- 
inum  antiquorum;  Balsamelceon ; JKgyptiacum  balsa- 
mum;  Balsamum  Asiaticum  ; Balsamum  Judaicum , 
Balsamum  Syriacum  ; Balsamum  e Mecca  ; Balsamum 
Alpini;  Oleum  balsami ; Carpobalsamum;  Xylobal- 
samum.  Balsam,  or  balm  of  Gilead ; Balsam  of  Mecca. 
A resinous  juice,  obtained  by  making  incisions  into  the 
bark  of  the  Amyris : — foliis  tcrnatis  integcrrimis, 
pcdunculis  unifloris  lateralibus  of  Linnteus.  This  tree 
grows  spontaneously,  particularly  near  to  Mecca,  on 
the  Asiatic  side  of  the  Red  Sea.  The  juice  of  the  fruit 
is  termed  carpobalsamum  in  the  pharmacopoeias,  and 
that  of  the  wood  and  branches  xylobalsamum.  The 
best  sort  is  a spontaneous  exudation  from  the  tree,  and 
is  held  in  so  high  estimation  by  the  Turks,  that  it  is 
rarely,  if  ever,  to  be  met  with  genuine  among  us.  The 
medicinal  virtues  of  the  genuine  balsam  of  Gilead,  have 
been  highly  rated,  undoubtedly  with  much  exaggera- 
tion. The  common  balsam  of  Mecca  is  scarcely  used  ; 
but  its  qualities  seem  to  be  very  similar  to  those  of  the 
balsam  of  Tolu,  with  perhaps  more  acrimony.  The 
dose  is  from  15  to  50  drops. 

A'myum.  (From  a , priv.  and  pt>j,  muscle.)  A limb 
so  emaciated  that  the  muscles  scarcely  appear. 

ANA.  In  medical  prescriptions  it  means  “ of 
each.”  See  A. 

Ana'basis.  (From  avaSatv w,  to  ascend.) 

1.  An  ascension,  augmentation,  or  increase  of  a dis- 
ease, or  paroxysm.  It  is  usually  meant  of  fevers. — 
Galen. 

2.  A species  of  the  equisetum,  or  horse-tail  plant. 

Anaba'tica.  (From  avaSaivu),  to  ascend.)  An 

epithet  formerly  applied  to  a continual  fever,  when  it 
increases  in  malignity. 

ANABE'XIS.  (From  avaSyrru),  to  cough  up.)  An 
expectoration  of  matter  by  coughing. 

ANABLE'PSIS.  (From  ava  and  fiXcrru),  to  see 
again.)  The  recovery  of  sight  after  it  has  been  lost. 

Anablysis.  (From  ava  and  /?Au§w,  to  gush  out 
again.)  Ebullition  or  effervescence. 

Ana'bole.  (From  avaSaX Aw,  to  cast  up.)  The 


ANiE 

discharge  of  any  thing  by  vomit ; also  dilatation,  or 
extension. — Galen. 

Anabrochk'sis.  (From  ava  and  (ipoxco),  to  reab- 
sorb.) The  reabsorption  of  matter. 

Anabrochi'smos.  (From  avaSpoxrw,  to  reabsorb.) 
Anabrochismus.  The  taking  up  and  removing  the  hair 
on  the  eyelids,  when  they  become  troublesome. — 
Galen , JEgineta,  and  others. 

ANABRO'SIS.  (From  avaPpooicu),  to  devour.)  A 
corrosion  of  the  solid  parts,  by  sharp  and  biting 
humours. — Galen. 

ANACA'RDIUM.  (From  ava,  without,  and  KapSia, 
a heart.)  Without  heart;  because  the  pulp  of  the 
fruit,  instead  of  having  the  seed  enclosed,  as  is  usually 
the  case,  has  the  nut  growing  out  of  the  end  of  it.  The 
name  of  a geuus  of  plants.  Class,  Enneandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Anacardium  occidentals.  The  cashewnut.  The 
oil  of  this  nut  is  an  active  caustic,  and  employed  as 
such  in  its  native  country : but  neither  it,  nor  any  part 
of  the  fruit,  is  used  medicinally  in  this  country.  It  is 
a useful  marking  ink,  as  any  thing  written  on  linen  or 
cotton  with  it,  is  of  a brown  colour,  which  gradually 
grows  blacker,  and  is  very  durable. 

Anacardium  orientals.  The  Malacca  bean.  See 
Avicennia  tomentosa. 

ANACATHA'RSIS.  (From  ava,  and  Kadaipopai, 
to  purge  up.)  An  expectoration  of  pus,  or  a purgation 
by  spitting,  contra-distinguished  from  catharsis,  or 
evacuation  downwards.  In  this  sense  the  word  is 
used  by  Hippocrates  and  Galen.  Blanchard  denotes, 
by  this  word,  medicines  wliich  operate  upwards,  as 
vomiting,  &c. 

ANACATHA'RTIC.  (Anacatharticus ; from  ava- 
Kadaipoyai,  to  purge  upwards.)  Promoting  expecto- 
ration, or  vomiting. 

Ana'chron.  Mineral  alkali. 

ANA'CLASIS.  (From  avaKXaw,  to  bend  back.)  A 
reflection  or  recurvature  of  any  of  the  members,  accord- 
ing to  Hippocrates. 

ANA'CLISIS.  (From  avaxXevw,  to  recline.)  A 
couch,  or  sick-bed. — Hippocrates. 

Anaco'che.  (From  ava/cwx^i  to  retard.)  Delay 
in  the  administration  of  medicines ; also  slowness  in 
the  progress  of  a disease. — Hippocrates. 

ANACCELIA'SMUS.  (From  ava,  and  KoiXia,  the 
bowels.)  A gentle  purge,  which  was  sometimes  used 
to  relieve  the  lungs. 

Anacolle'ma.  (From  ava,  and  rcoXXaw,  to  glue 
together.)  A collyrium  made  of  agglutinant  sub- 
stances, and  stuck  on  the  forehead. — Galen. 

Anaconcholi'smos.  (Fromavaxoy%oXtg<D,tosound 
as  a shell.)  A gargarism : so  called,  because  the  noise 
made  in  the  throat  is  like  the  sound  of  a shell. — Galen. 

ANACTE'SIS.  (From  avaicraopai,  to  recover.) 
Restoration  of  strength;  recovery  from  sickness.— 
Hippocrates. 

ANACUPHI'SMA.  (From  avaKovfyil or,  to  lift  up.) 
A kind  of  exercise  mentioned  by  Hippocrates,  which 
consists  in  lifting  the  body  up  and  down,  like  our 
weigh  jolt,  and  dumb  bells. 

Anacvce'sis.  (From  avaicvicaio,  to  mix.)  The 
mixture  of  substances,  or  medicines,  by  pouring  one 
upon  another. 

ANACY'CLEON.  (From  avaKvicXoa),  to  wander 
about.)  Anacycleus.  A mountebank,  or  wandering 
quack. 

ANACYRI'OSIS.  (From  ava,  and  tcvpog,  autho- 
rity.) By  this  word,  Hippocrates  means  that  gravity 
and  authority  which  physicians  should  preserve  among 
sick  people  and  their  attendants. 

ANADIPLO'SIS.  (From  ava5nr\ou>,  to  redupli- 
cate.) A reduplication  or  frequent  return  of  a parox- 
ysm, or  disease. — Galen. 

Ana'dosis.  (From  avio,  upwards,  and  SiSupt,  to 
give.)  1.  A vomit. 

2.  The  distribution  of  aliment  all  over  the  body. 

3.  Digestion. 

Ana'drome.  (From  avw,  upwards,  and  Spepu),  to 
run.)  A pain  which  runs  from  the  lower  extremities 
to  the  upper  parts  of  the  body. — Hippocrates. 

Anje'dks.  (From  a,  priv.  and  ai8w,  a shame.) 
Shameless.  Hippocrates  uses  this  word  metaphori- 
cally for  without  restraint;  and  applies  it  to  water 
rushing  into  the  aspera  arteria. 

ANAESTHE  SIA.  ( Antesthesia , <z.  f.  kvaioBiiaia  \ 
from  a,  priv.  and  aiadavopai,  to  feel.)  Loss  of  the  j 


ANA 

sense  of  touch.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Locales , and  order  Dyscesthesia  of  Cullen. 

ANAGALLIS.  (From  avaycXaa),  to  laugh;  be- 
cause, by  curing  .the  spleen,  it  disposes  persons  to  be 
cheerful.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in-  the 
Linnsean  system. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name'  of  the  an.aga.lli » 

arvensis. 

Anagallis  arvensis.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
Anagallis — foliis  indivisis,  caule  procumbente  of  Lin- 
naeus. A small  and  delicately  formed  plant,  which 
does  not  appear  to  possess  any  particular  properties. 

Anagargali'ctum.  (From  ava,  and  yapyapscov,  the 
throat.)  A gargarism,  or  wash  for  the  throat. 

Anagargari'stcm.  A gargle. 

ANAGLY'PHE.  (From  avayXvcfxn,  to  engrave.; 
A part  of  the  fourth  ventricle  of  the  brain  was  formerly 
thus  called,  from  its  resemblance  to  a pen,  or  style. 

ANAGNO’SIS.  (From  avayivuoKw,  to  know.; 
The  persuasion,  or  certainty,  by  which  medical  men 
judge  of  a disease  from  its  symptoms. — Hippocrates. 

ANA'GRAPHE.  (From  avaypa<f> a>,  to  write.)  A 
prescription  or  receipt. 

ANALCINE.  Cubic  zeolite.  A mineral  found  in 
granite,  gneiss,  trap  rocks,  and  lavas,  at  Calton  Hill, 
Edinburgh,  in  Bohemia,  and  Ferroe  islands.  From  its 
becoming  feebly  electrical  by  heat,  it  has  got  this  name. 
[Derived  from  AvuXai?.  Weak.] 

Anale'ntia.  A fictitious  term  used  by  Paracelsus 
for  epilepsy. 

ANALE'PSIA.  (From  ava,  and  XaySavu),  to  take 
again.)  A species  of  epilepsy,  which  proceeds  from  a 
disorder  of  the  stomach,  and  with  which  the  patient  is 
apt  to  be  seized  veiy  often  and  suddenly. 

ANALE'PSIS.  (From  avaXapBavw,  to  restore.)  A 
recovery  of  strength  after  sickness. 

ANALE'PTIC.  (Analcpticus ; from  avaXapSavin, 
to  recruit  or  recover.)  That  which  recovers  tire 
strength  which  has  been  lost  by  sickness. 

ANALO'SIS.  (From  avaXioxw,  to  consume,)  A 
consumption,  or  wasting. 

AN  A 'LYSIS.  (AvaXwij ; from  avaXvu),  to  resolve.) 
The  resolution  by  chemistry,  of  any  matter  into  its 
primary  and  constituent  parts.  The  processes  and  ex- 
periments which  chemists  have  recourse  to,  are  ex- 
tremely numerous  and  diversified,  yet  they  may  be 
reduced  to  two  species,  which  comprehend  the  whole 
art  of  chemistry.  The  first  is,  analysis,  or  decompo- 
sition; the  second,  synthesis , or  composition.  In 
analysis,  the  parts  of  which  bodies  are  composed,  are 
separated  from  each  other  : thus,  if  we  reduce  cinna- 
bar, which  is  composed  of  sulphur  and  mercury,  and 
exhibit  these  two  bodies  in  a separate  state,  we  say 
we  have  decomposed  or  analyzed  cinnabar.  But  if, 
on  the  contrary,  several  bodies  be  mixed  together,  and 
a new  substance  be  produced,  the  process  is  then  term- 
ed chemical  composition,  or  synthesis:  thus,  if  by 
fusion  and  sublimation,  we  combine  mercury  with 
sulphur,  and  produce  cinnabar,  the  operation  is  termed 
chemical  composition,  or  composition  by  synthesis. 
Chemical  analysis  consists  of  a great  variety  of  opera- 
tions. In  these  operations  the  most  extensive  know- 
ledge of  such  properties  of  bodies  as  are  already  dis- 
covered must  be  applied,  in  order  to  produce  simplicity 
of  effect,  and  certainty  in  the  results.  Chemical  ana- 
lysis can  hardly  be  executed  with  success,  by  one  who 
is  not  in  possession  of  a considerable  number  of  simple 
substances  in  a state  of  great  purity,  many  of  which, 
from  their  effects,  are  called  reagents.  The  word  ana- 
lysis is  often  applied  by  chemists  to  denote  that  series 
of  operations,  by  which  the  component  parts  of  bodies 
are  determined,  whether  they  be  merely  separated,  or 
exhibited  apart  from  each  other ; or  whether  these 
distinctive  properties  be  exhibited  by  causing  them  to 
enter  into  new  combinations,  without  the  perceptible 
intervention  of  a separate  state ; and,  in  the  chemical 
examination  of  bodies,  analysis  or  separation  can 
scarcely  ever  be  effected,  without  synthesis  taking 
place  at  the  same  time. 

AN  AMNE'SIS.  (From  avapipvyoicu,  to  remember.) 
Remembrance,  or  recollection  of  what  has  been  done. 

— Galen.  ■ 

ANAMNESTIC.  (From  the  same.)  A remedy 
for  bad  memory,  or  whatever  strengthens  the  memory. 

ANA'NAS.  The  egg-shaped  pineapple.  Bee  Bra- 

melia  Ananas. 

Ana'nce.  (From  avay/cajw,  to  compel.)  Neces- 


ANA 


ANA 

sity.  It  is  applied  to  any  desperate  operation Hip- 
pocrates. 

Anaphalanti'asis.  (From  avaQaXavros,  bald.)  A 
thinness  of  hair  upon  the  eyebrows. — G omens. 

Ana  phora.  (From  avaepepu),  to'  bring  up.)  It  is 
applied  to  a person  who  spits  blood. — Gorrceus. 

ANAPHORYXIS.  (From  avaQopvceu , to  grind 
down.)  The  reducing  of  any  thing  to  dust,  or  a very 
fine  powder. 

ANAPHRODI'SIA.  ( Anaphrodisia , <b.  f. ; from  a, 
priv.  and  acppo&ioia,  the  feast  of  Venus.)  Impotence. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Dy- 
sorexiee  of  Cullen.  It  either  arises  from  paralysis,  ana- 
phrodisia paralytica  ; or  from  gonorrhoea,  anaphrodi- 
sia  gonorrhoica. 

Anaphro'meli.  (From  a,  neg.  a<ppos,  froth,  and 
peXi,  honey.)  Clarified  honey. 

ANAPL  A'SIS.  (From  avanXaacno,  to  restore  again.) 
A restoration  of  flesh  where  it  has  been  lost ; also  the 
reuniting  a fractured  bone. — Hippocrates. 

ANAPLERO'SIS.  (From  avanXypou),  to  fill  again.) 
The  restitution  or  filling  up  of  wasted  parts. — Galen. 

Anaplero'tica.  (From  the  same.)  Medicines  re- 
newing flesh : incarnatives,  or  such  medicines  as  fill 
up  a wound  so  as  to  restore  it  to  its  original  shape.— 
Galen. 

Anaplku’sis.  (From  avairXcvu),  to  float  upon.) 
The  rotting  of  a bone,  so  that  it  drops  off,  and  lies  upon 
the  flesh.  Exfoliation,  or  separation  of  a bone. — Hip- 
pocrates, JEginet.a , Sec. 

ANAPNEU'SIS.  (From  avanvevo),  to  respire.)  Res- 
piration. 

ANA'PNOE.  Respiration. 

ANAPTO'SIS.  (From  avamir'Jo),  to  fall  back.)  A 
relapse. 

Ana'ptysis.  The  same  as  Anacatharsis. 

Anarrhegni'mia.  (From  ava,  and  prjyvvpi,  to 
break  again.)  Anarrliezis.  A fracture ; the  fresh 
opening  of  a wolind. 

ANARKHCE'A.  (From  ava , upwards,  and  pew,  to 
flow.)  A flu.\  of  humours  from  below  upwards. — 
Schneider  de  Catarrho. 

Anarrho  pia.  (From  ava , upwards,  and  peirw,  to 
creep.)  A flux  of  humours,  from  below  upwards. — 
Hippocrates. 

A'NAS.  {Anas,  tis.  f. ; from  vein,  to  swim,  a 
nando.)  A genus  of  birds  in  the  Linna;an  system. 

Anas  cygnus.  The  swan.  The  flesh  of  the  young 
swan  or  cygnet  is  tender,  and  a great  delicacy. 

Anas  do.mestica.  The  tame  duck.  The  flesh  of 
this  bird  is  difficult  of  digestion,  and  requires  that 
warm  and  stimulating  condiments  be  taken  with  it  to 
enable  the  stomach  to  digest  it. 

ANASA  RCA.  ( Anasarca , ce.  f. ; from  ava,  through, 
and  aapl,  flesh.)  Sarcites.  A species  of  dropsy  from 
a serous  humour,  spread  between  the  skin  and  flesh, 
or  rather  a general  accumulation  of  lymph  in  the  cel- 
lular system.  Dr.  Cullen  ranks  this  genus  of  disease 
in  the  class  Cachexies,  and  the  order  lntmiescentiae. 
He  enumerates  the  following  species,  viz.  1.  Ana- 
sarca serosa  : as  when  the  due  discharge  of  serum  is 
suppressed,  Sec.  2.  Anasarca  oppilata  : as  when  the 
blood-vessels  are  considerably  pressed,  which  happens 
to  many  pregnant  women,  Sec.  3.  Anasarca  exanthe- 
matica:  this  happens  after  ulcers,  various  eruptive 
disorders,  and  particularly  after  the  erysipelas.  4. 
Anasarca  anaemia  happens  when  the  blood  is  rendered 
extremely  poor  from  considerable  losses  of  it.  5.  Ana- 
sarca debilium:  as  when  feebleness  is  induced  by  long 
illness,  &c. 

This  species  of  dropsy  shows  itself  at  first  with  a 
swelling  of  the  feet  and  ancles  towards  the  evening, 
which,  for  a time,  disappears  again  in  the  morning. 
The  tumefaction  is  soft  and  inelastic,  and  when  pressed 
upon  by  the  finger,  retains  its  mark  for  some  time,  the 
skin  becoming  much  paler  than  usual.  By  degrees  the 
swelling  ascends  upwards,  and  occupies  the  trunk  of 
the  body ; and  at  last,  even  the  face  and  eyelids  appear 
full  and  bloated  ; the  breathing  then  becomes  difficult, 
the  urine  is  small  in  quantity,  high  coloured,  and  de- 
posites  a reddish  sediment ; the  belly  is  costive,  the 
perspiration  much  obstructed,  the  countenance  yellow, 
and  a considerable  degree  of  thirst,  With  emaciation 
of  the  whole  body,  prevails.  To  these  symptoms  suc- 
ceed torpor,  heaviness,  a troublesome  cough,  and  a 
slow  fever.  In  some  cases  the  water  oozes  out, 
through  the  pores  of  the  cuticle  ; in  others,  being  too 


gross  to  pass  by  these,  it  raises  the  cuticle  in  small 
blisters;  and  sometimes  the  skin,  not  allowing  the 
water  to  escape  through  it,  is  compressed  and  hard- 
ened, and  is  at  the  same  time  so  much  distended  as  to 
give  the  tumour  a considerable  degree  of  firmness. 
For  the  causes  of  this  disease,  see  Hydrops. 

In  those  who  have  died  of  anasarca,  the  whole  of 
the  cellular  membrane  has  been  distended  with  a fluid, 
mostly  of  a serous  character.  Various  organic  dis- 
eases have  occurred  ; and  the  blood  is  said  to  be  altered 
in  consistence,  according  to  the  degree  of  the  disease. 
In  general  a cure  can  be  more  readily  effected  when  it 
arises  from  topical  or  general  debility,  than  when  occa- 
sioned by  visceral  obstruction  ; and  in  recent  cases, 
than  in  those  of  long  continuance.  The  skin  becoming 
somewhat  moist,  with  a diminution  of  thirst,  and  in- 
creased flow  of  urine,  are  very  favourable.  In  some 
few  cases  the  disease  goes  oft’  by  a spontaneous  crisis 
by  vomiting,  purging,  &c.  The  indications  of  treat- 
ment in  anasarca  are,  1.  To  evacuate  the  fluid  already 
collected.  2.  To  prevent  its  returning  again.  The 
first  object  may  be  attained  mechanically  by  an  opera- 
tion ; or  by  the  use  of  those  means,  which  increase  the 
action  of  the  absorbents  : the  second  by  removing  any 
exciting  causes,  which  may  still  continue  to  operate  ; 
and  at  the  same  time  endeavouring  to  invigorate  the 
system.  Where  the  quantity  of  fluid  collected  is  such 
as  to  disturb  the  more  important  functions,  the 
best  mode  of  relieving  the  patient  is  to  make  a few 
small  incisions  with  a lancet,  not  too  near  each  other, 
through  the  integuments  on  the  fore  and  upper  part  of 
each  thigh ; the  discharge  may  be  assisted  by  pressure, 
and  when  a sufficient  quantity  has  been  evacuated,  it 
is  better  to  heal  them  by  the  first  intention.  In  the  use 
of  issues  or  blisters,  there  is  some  risk  of  inducing  gan- 
grene, especially  if  applied  to  the  legs : and  the  same 
has  happened  from  scarifications  with  the  cupping  in- 
strument. Absorption  may  be  promoted  by  friction, 
and  bandaging  the  parts,  which  will  at  the  same  time 
obviate  farther  effusion  ; but  most  powerfully  by  the 
use  of  different  evacuating  remedies,  especially  those 
which  occasion  a sudden  considerable  discharge  ot 
fluids.  Emetics  have  been  often  employed  with  ad- 
vantage ; but  it  is  necessary  to  guard  against  weaken- 
ing the  stomach  by  the  frequent  repetition  of  those 
which  produce  much  nausea;  and  perhaps  the  benefit 
results  not  so  much  from  the  evacuation  produced  by 
the  mouth,  as  from  their  promoting  other  excretions  ; 
antimonials  in  particular  inducing  perspiration,  and 
squill  increasing  the  flow  of  urine,  &c. ; for  which  pur- 
pose they  may  be  more  safely  given  in  smaller  doses : 
fh  very  torpid  habits,  mustard  may  claim  the  prefer 
ence.  Cathartics  are  of  much  greater  and  more  gene- 
ral utility  ; where  .the  bowels  are  not  particularly  irri- 
table, the  more  drastic  purgatives  should  be  employed 
and  repeated  as  often  as  the  strength  will  allow ; giv- 
ing, for  example,  every  second  or  third  morning,  jalap, 
scammony,  colocynth,  or  gamboge,  joined  with  calo 
mel  or  the  supertartrate  of  potassa  and  some  aromatic, 
to  obviate  their  griping.  Elaterium  is  perhaps  the 
most  powerful,  generally  vomiting  as  well  as  purging 
the  patient,  but  precarious  in  its  strength  and  there- 
fore better  given  in  divided  doses,  till  a sufficient  effect 
is  produced.  Diuretics  are  universally  proper,  and 
may  be  given  in  the  intervals,  where  purgatives  can 
be  borne,  otherwise  constantly  persevered  in  ; but  un- 
fortunately the  effects  of  most  of  them  tire  uncertain. 
Saline  substances  in  general  appear  to  stimulate  the 
kidneys,  whether  acid,  alkaline,  or  neutral ; but  the 
acetate,  and  supertartrate  of  potassa,  are  chiefly  re- 
sorted to  in  dropsy.  Dr.  Ferriar,  of  Manchester,  has 
made  an  important  remark  of  the  latter  salt,  that  its 
diuretic  power  is  much  promoted  by  a previous  opera 
tion  on  the  bowels,  which  encourages  the  more  liberal 
use  of  it ; indeed,  if  much  relied  upon,  a drachm  or  two 
should  be  given  three  times  or  oftener  in  the  day.  It  is 
obviously,  therefore,  best  adapted  to  those  cases,  in 
which  the  strength  is  not  greatly  impaired  ; and  the 
same  holds  with  the  nauseating  diuretics,  squill,  col- 
chicum,  and  tobacco.  The  latter  has  been  strongly 
recommended  by  Dr.  Fowler  of  York,  in  the  form  of 
tincture  ; the  colchicum,  as  an  oxymel  by  some  Ger- 
man physicians  ; but  the  squill  is  most  in  use,  though 
certainly  very  precarious  if  given  alone.  In  languid 
and  debilitated  habits,  we  prefer  the  more  stimulant 
diuretics,  as  juniper,  horseradish,  mustard,  garlic,  the 
I spiritus  aetheris  nitrici,  &c. ; even  turpentine,  or  the 

63 


ANA 


ANC 


tinctura  cantharidis,  may  be  proper,  where  milder  | 
means  have  failed.  Digitalis  is  often  a very  powerful 
remedy,  from  the  utility  of  which  in  inflammatory  dis- 
eases we  might  expect  it  to  answer  best  in  persons  of 
great  natural  strength,  and  not  much  exhausted  by  the 
disorder ; but  Dr.  Withering  expressly  states  that  its 
diuretic  effects  appear  most  certainly  and  beneficially, 
where  the  pulse  is  feeble  or  intermitting,  the  counte- 
nance pale,  the  skin  cold,  and  the  tumours  readily  pit- 
ting on  pressure ; which  has  been  since  confirmed  by 
other  practitioners  : it  should  be  begun  with  in  small 
doses  two  or  three  times  a day,  and  progressively  in- 
creased till  the  desired  operation  on  the  kidneys  ensues, 
unless  alarming  symptoms  appear  in  the  mean  time. 
Opium  and  some  other  narcotics  have  been  occasion- 
ally useful  as  diuretics  in  dropsy,  but  should  be  only 
regarded  as  adjuvants,  from  their  uncertain  effects. 
In  the  use  of  diuretics,  a very  important  rule  is,  not  to 
restrict  the  patient  from  drinking  freely.  This  was 
formerly  thought  necessary  on  theoretical  grounds; 
whereby  the  thirst  was  aggravated  to  a distressing  de- 
gree, and  the  operation  of  remedies  often  prevented, 
especially  on  the  kidneys.  Sir  Francis  Milman  first 
taught  the  impropriety  of  this  practice,  which  is  now 
generally  abandoned  ; at  least  so  long  as  the  flow  of 
urine  is  increased  in  proportion  to  the  drink  taken,  it 
is  considered  proper  to  indulge  the  patient  with  it. 
Another  evacuation,  which  it  is  very  desirable  to  pro- 
mote in  anasarca,  is  that  by  the  skin,  but  this  is  with 
difficulty  accomplished : nauseating  emetics  are  the 
most  powerful  means,  but  transient  in  their  effect,  and 
their  frequent  use  cannot  be  borne.  If  a gentle  dia- 
phoresis can  be  excited,  it  is  as  much  as  we  could  ex- 
pect ; and  perhaps  on  the  whole  most  beneficial  to  the 
patient.  For  this  purpose  the  compound  powder  of 
ipecacuanha,  saline  substances,  and  antimonials  in 
small  doses,  assisted  by  tepid  drink,  and  warmth  ap- 
plied to  the  surface,  may  be  had  recourse  to.  Some- 
times much  relief  is  obtained  by  promoting  perspira- 
tion locally  by  means  of  the  vapour-bath.  Mercury 
has  been  much  employed  in  dropsy,  and  certainly  ap- 
pears often  materially  to  promote  the  operation  of 
other  evacuants,  particularly  squill  and  digitalis  ; but 
its  chief  utility  is  where  there  are  obstructions  of  the 
viscera,  especially  the  liver,  of  which,  however,  ascites 
is  usually  the  first  result : its  power  of  increasing  ab- 
sorption hardly  appears,  unless  it  is  carried  so  far  as  to 
affect  the  mouth,  when  it  is  apt  to  weaken  the  system 
so  much  as  greatly  to  limit  its  use.  The  other  indica- 
tion of  invigorating  the  constitution,  and  particularly 
the  exhalant  arteries,  may  be  accomplished  by  tonic 
medicines,  as  the  several  vegetable  bitters,  clialybeat£s 
in  those  who  are  remarkably  pale,  and,  if  there  be  a 
languid  circulation,  stimulants  may  be  joined  with 
them : a similar  modification  will  be  proper  in  the  diet, 
which  should  be  always  as  nutritious  as  the  patient 
can  well  digest ; directing  also  in  torpid  habits  pungent 
articles,  as  garlic,  onions,  mustard,  horseradish,  &c.  to 
be  freely  taken,  which  will  be  farther  useful  by  pro- 
moting the  urine.  Rhenish  wine,  or  punch  made  with 
hoilands  and  supertartrate  of  potassa,  may  be  allowed 
for  the  drink.  Regular  exercise,  such  as  the  patient 
can  bear,  (the  limbs  being  properly  supported,  espe- 
cially by  a well-contrived  laced  stocking)  ought  to  be 
enjoined,  or  diligent  friction  of  the  skin,  particularly 
of  the  affected  parts,  employed  when  the  tumefaction 
is  usually  least,  namely,  in  the  morning.  The  cold 
bath,  duly  regulated,  may  also,  when  the  patient  is 
convalescent,  materially  contribute  to  obviate  a 
relapse. 

ANASPA'SIS.  (From  ava , and  (mam,  to  draw  to- 
gether.) Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  signify  a con- 
traction of  the  stomach. 

Ana'ssytos.  (From  ava,  upwards,  and  oevopai,  to 
agitate.)  Anassytus.  Driven  forcibly  upwards.  Hip- 
pocrates applies  this  epithet  to  air  rushing  violently 
upwards,  as  in  hysteric  fits. 

Anasta'ltica.  (From  ava^eWm,  to  contract.) 
Styptic  or  refrigerating  medicines. 

ANA'STASIS.  (From  ava^npi,  to  cause  to  rise.) 

1.  A recovery  from  sickness ; a restoration  of  health. 

2.  It  likewise  signifies  a migration  of  humours,  when 
expelled  from  one  place  and  obliged  to  remove  to  ano- 
ther.— Hippocrates. 

ANASTOMO  SIS.  (From  ava,  through,  and  <gopa, 
a mouth.  1 The  communication  of  vessels  with  one 
another. 

64 


| ANASTOMO'TIC  (Anastomoticus ; from  ava, 

through,  and  $ -opa,  the  mouth.)  That  which  opens 
the  pores  and  mouths  of  the  vessels,  as  cathartics,  di- 
uretics, deobstruents,  and  sudorifics. 

ANATASE.  A mineral  found  only  in  D^uphiny 
and  Norway. 

[This  name  is  given  by  Haiiy  and  Brogniart,  to  the 
octahedral  oxide  of  Titanium,  which  has  been  found  in 
various  parts  of  the  United  States,  in  the  forms  of 
The  oxide  of  titanium, 

The  ferruginous  oxide, 

The  silico  calcareous  oxide. 

See  Bruce’s  Mineralogical  Journal,  in  which  nume- 
rous specimens  are  figured  and  described  by  him.  A.] 

Ana'tes.  (From  rates , the  buttocks.)  A disease 
of  the  anus.  Festus,  &c. 

ANATO'MIA.  See  Anatomy. 

ANA'TOMY.  (A vqropia,  or  avaropy,  Anatomia, 
as.  f.  and  Anatome,  es ; from  ava,  and  repvo),  to  cut 
up.)  Androtomy.  The  dissection  or  dividing  of  or- 
ganized substances  to  expose  the  structure,  situation, 
and  uses  of  parts.  Anatomy  is  divided  into  that  of 
animals  strictly  so  called,  also,  denominated  zootomy, 
and  that  of  vegetables  or  pliytotomy. 

The  anatomy  of  brute  animals  and  vegetables  is 
comprised  under  the  term  comparative  anatomy,  be- 
cause their  dissection  was  instituted  to  illustrate  or 
compare  by  analogy  their  structure  and  functions  with 
those  of  the  human  body. 

Anatomy,  comparative.  Zootomy.  The  dissec- 
tion of  brutes,  fishes,  polypi,  plants,  &c.  to  illustrate, 
or^compare  them  with  the  structure  and  functions  of 
the  human  body. 

ANATRE'SIS.  (From  ava,  and  nrpam,  to  perfo- 
rate.) A perforation  like  that  which  is  made  upon 
the  skull  by  trepanning. 

ANATRI'HE  (From  avarpiSm,  to  rub.)  Friction 
all  over  the  body. 

Anatri'psis.  Friction  all  over  the  body. — Mos- 
chion  de  Morb.  Jllnlieb.  and  Galen. 

Ana'tron.  (Arabian.)  The  name  of  a lake  in 
Egypt,  where  it  was  produced.  See  Soda. 

Ana'trope.  (From  avarpe ttw,  to  subvert.)  Ana- 
trophe ; Anatropha.  A relaxation  or  subversion  of 
the  stomach, 'with  loss  of  appetite  and  nausea.  Vo- 
miting; indigestion. — Galen. 

Ana'trum.  Soda. 

ANAU'DIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  avSrj,  the  speech.) 
Dumbness ; privation  of  voice  ; catalepsy — Hip- 
pocrates. 

Ana'xyris.  (From  ava\vpis,  the  sole.)  The  herb 
sorrel ; so  called  because  its  leaf  is  shaped  like  the  sole 
of  the  shoe. 

ANCEPS.  ( Anceps , ipitis.  adjective.)  Two-edged  ; 
that  is,  compressed,  having  the  edges  sharp  like  a two- 
edged  sword  ; applied  to  stems  and  leaves  of  plants,  as 
in  the  Sisyrinchium  striatum,  Iris  grammea , and 
leaves  of  the  Typha  latifolia. 

A'NCHA.  (Arabian,  to  press  upon,  as  being  the 
support  of  the  body.)  The  thigh. — Avicenna,  Fo- 
restius,  &c. 

A'NCHILOPS.  (From  a/xh  near,  and  the 
eye.)  A disease  in  the  inward  corner  of  the  eye.  See 
JEgilops. 

ANCHORA'LIS.  (From  ayxwv,  the  elbow.)  The 
projecting  part  of  the  elbow.on  which  we  iean,  called 
generally  the  olecranon.  See  Ulna. 

Anchoralis  processus.  The  olecranon, a process 
of  the  ulna. 

ANCHOVY.  See  Clupea  encrasicolus. 

Anchovy  Pear.  See  Grias  caulifiora. 

ANCIllJ'SA.  (Anchusa,  <e.  f.  ; from  ayxtiv,  to 
strangle  : from  its  supposed  constringent  quality  ; or, 
as  others  say,  because  it  strangles  serpents.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  name  in  some  pharmacopoeias  for  the  alka- 
net  root  and  bugloss.  See  Anchusa  officinalis,  and 
Anchusa  tinctoria. 

Anchusa  officinalis.  The  officinal  bugloss.  In 
some  pharmacopoeias  it  is  called  Buglossa ; Buglos- 
sum angustifolium  majus ; Buglossum  vulgar e ma- 
jus;  Buglossum  sylvestre  ; Buglossum  sativum.  An- 
chusa—foliis  lanceolatis  strigosis,  spicis  secundis 
imbricatis,  calycibus  quinque  partitis,  of  Linnaeus; 
it  was  formerly  esteemed  as  a cordial  in  melancho- 
lic and  hypochondriacal  diseases.  It  is  seldom  used 


AND 


ANC 

tn  modern  practice,  and  then  only  as  an  aperient  and 
refrigerant. 

Anchusa  tinctorxa.  The  systematic  name  for  the. 
anchusa  or  alkanna  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  This 
plant  grows  wild  in  France,  but  is  cultivated  in  our 
gardens.  The  root  is  externally  of  a deep  purple  co- 
lour. To  oil,  wax,  turpentine,  and  alkohol,  it  imparts 
a beautiful  deep  red  colour,  for  which  purpose  it  is 
used.  Its  medicinal  properties  are  scarcely  percep- 
tible. 

A'nchyle.  See  Ancyle. 

ANCHYLOMERI'SMA.  (From  ayxvXopai,  to 
bend.)  Sagar  uses  this  term  to  express  a concretion, 
or  growing  together  of  the  soft  parts. 

ANCHYLO'SIS.  (From  ayxvXopai,  to  bend.)  A 
stiff  joint.  It  is  divided  into  the  true  and  spurious,  ac- 
cording as  the  motion  is  entirely  or  but  partly  lost. 
This  state  may  arise  from  various  causes,  as  tumefac- 
tion of  the  ends  of  the  bones,  caries,  fracture,  disloca- 
tion, &.c.  also  dropsy  of  the  joint,  fleshy  excrescences, 
aneurisms,  and  other  tumours.  It  may  also  be  owing 
to  the  morbid  contraction  of  the  flexor  muscles,  in- 
duced by  the  limb  being  long  kept  in  a particular  posi- 
tion, as  a relief  to  pain,  after  burns,  mechanical  inju- 
ries, &c.  The  rickets,  white  swellings,  gout,  rheuma- 
tism, palsy,  from  lead  particularly,  and  some  other 
disorders,  often  lay  the  foundation  for  anchylosis  : and 
the  joints  are  very  apt  to  become  stiff  in  advanced  life. 
Where  the  joint  is  perfectly  immoveable,  little  can  be 
done  for  the 'patient;  but  in  the  spurious  form  of  the 
complaint,  we  must  first  endeavour  to  remove  any 
cause  mechanically  obstructing  the  motion  of  the  joint, 
and  then  to  get  rid  of  the  morbid  contraction  of  the 
muscles.  If  inflammation  exist,  this  must  be  first  sub- 
dued by  proper  means.  Where  extraneous  matters 
have  been  deposited,  the  absorbents  must  be  excited  to 
remove  them : and  where  the  parts  are  preternaturally 
rigid,  emollient  applications  will  be  serviceable.  Fo- 
mentations, gentle  friction  of  the  joint  and  of  the 
muscles,  which  appear  rigid,  with  the  camphor  lina- 
ment,  &c.  continued  for  half  an  hour  or  more  two  or 
three  times  a day ; and  frequent  attempts  to  move  the 
joint  to  a greater  extent,  especially  by  the  patient  ex- 
erting the  proper  muscles,  not  with  violence,  but 
steadily  for  some  time,  are  the  most  successful  means : 
but  no  rapid  improvement  is  to  be  expected  in  general. 
Sometimes,  in  obstinate  cases,  rubbing  the  part  with 
warm  brine  occasionally,  or  applying  stimulant  plas- 
ters of  ammoniacum,  &c.  may  expedite  the  cure; 
and  in  some  instances,  particularly  as  following  rheu- 
matism, pumping  cold  water  on  the  part  every  morning 
has  proved  remarkably  beneficial.  Where  there  is  a 
great  tendency  to  contraction  of  the  muscles,  it  will  be 
useful  to  obviate  this  by  some  mechanical  contrivance. 
It  is  proper  to  bear  in  mind,  where,  from  the  nature  of 
the  case,  complete  anchylosis  cannot  be  prevented, 
that  the  patient  may  be  much  less  inconvenienced  by 
its  being  made  to  occur  in  a particular  position ; that 
is  in  the  upper  extremities  generally  a bent,  but  in  the 
hip  or  knee  an  extended  one. 

A'nci.  A term  formerly  applied  to  those  who  have 
a distorted  elbow. 

A'ncinar.  Borax. 

ANCIPITIUS.  (From  Anceps .)  Two-edged:  ap- 
plied to  a leaf  which  is  compressed  and  sharp  at  both 
edges,  as  that  of  the  Typha  latifblia. 

Ancirome'le.  See  Ancylomcle. 

A'NCON.  (From  aytca^opai,  to  embrace;  airorov 
ayKeiodai  trepm  o^cw  to  o^eov  : because  the  bones  meet- 
ing and  there  uniting,  are  folded  one  into  another.) 
The  elbow. 

ANCONE'US.  (From  ayxwv,  the  elbow.)  A small 
triangular  muscle,  situated  on  the  back  part  of  the  el- 
bow. Anconeus  minor  of  Winslow  ; Anconeus  vel 
cubilalis  Riolani  of  Douglas.  It  arises  from  the  ridge, 
and  from  the  external  condyle  of  the  humerus,  by  a 
thick,  strong,  and  short  tendon : from  this  it  becomes 
fleshy,  and,  after  running  about  three  inches  obliquely 
backward,  it  is  inserted  by  its  oblique  fleshy  fibres  into 
the  back  part  or  ridge  of  the  ulna.  Its  use  is  to  extend 
the  fore-arm. 

Anconeus  externus.  See  Triceps  extensor  cubiti. 

Anconeus  internijs.  See  Triceps  extensor  cubiti. 

Anconeus  major.  See  Triceps  extensor  cubiti. 

Anconeus  minor.  See  Anconeus. 

ANCONOID.  ( Anconoideus  ; from  ayiaov,  the  el- 
bow.) Belonging  to  the  elbow. 


Anconoid  process.  See  Ulna. 

A'NCTER.  (AyKTyp,  a bond,  or  button.)  A fibula 
or  button,  by  which  the  lips  of  wounds  are  held  to- 
gether.— Gorrceus. 

ANCTERIA'SMUS.  (From  ayurnp,  a button.)  The 
operation  of  closing  the  lips  of  wounds  together  by 
loops,  or  buttons. — Galen. 

Ancu'bitus.  A disease  of  the  eyes  with  a sensation 
as  if  sand  were  in  them. — Joh.  Anglic.  Ros.  Ang. 

A'NCYLE.  (From  ayicvXos,  crooked.)  Anchyle. 
A species  of  contraction,  called  a stiff  joint. — Galen 

Ancylion.  See  Ancyloglossum. 

ANC  YLOBLE'PH  ARON.  ( Ancyloblepharum , i.  n ; 
from  ay/cvXy,  a hook,  and  t SXecpapov,  an  eyelid.)  A 
disease  of  the  eye,  by  which  the  eylids  are  closed  to- 
gether.— Ae  Hus. 

ANCYLOGLO'SSUM.  (Ancyloglossum,  i.  n.;  from 
ayicvXr),  a hook,  and  yXuaaa,  the  tongue.)  Ancylion 
of  ASgineta.  Tongue-tied.  A contraction  of  the  frte- 
nulurn  of  the  tongue. 

ANCYLOME'LE.  (From  ayicvXos,  crooked,  and 
pr/Xy,  a probe.)  Ancyromele : Anciromele.  A crooked 
probe,  or  a probe  with  a hook,  with  which  surgeons 
search  wounds. — Galen , & c. 

ANCYLO'SIS.  See  Anchylosis. 

Ancylo'tomus.  (From  ay/cuA?/,  a hook,  and  Tepvo), 
to  cut.)  A crooked  chirurgical  knife,  or  bistoury.  A 
knife  for  loosening  tire  tongue,  not  now  used. 

A'ncyra.  (A yKvpa,  an  anchor.)  A chirurgical 

hook.  Epicharmus  uses  this  word  for  the  membrum 
virile,  according  to  Gorrasus. 

ANCYROI'DES.  ( Ancyroides  processus;  from 

ayKvpa,  an  anchor,  and  a<5oj,  a likeness.)  A procsss 
of  the  scapula  was  so  called,  from  its  likeness  to  the 
beak  of  an  anchor.  The  coracoid  process  of  the  sca- 
pula. See  Scapula. 

Ancyrome'le.  See  Ancylomele. 

ANDALUSITE.  A massive  mineral,  of  a flesh,  and 
sometimes  rose-red  colour,  belonging  to  primitive  coun- 
tries, and  first  found  in  Andalusia  in  Spain. 

[It  has  been  found  also  in  the  United  States.  The 
hardness  of  this  mineral  is  nearly  equal  to  that  of  co- 
rundum. Its  specific  gravity  is  3.16.  Its  structure  is 
more  or  less  distinctly  crystalline.  Jt  is  perfectly  infu- 
sible by  the  blow-pipe.  It  contains  alumine  52,  silex 
38,  potash  8,  iron  2. 

It  differs  from  feldspar  by  its  greater  hardness  and 
its  infusibility;  and  from  corundum,  by  its  structure 
and  less  specific  gravity.  Some  mineralogists,  how- 
ever, are  inclined  to  believe  this  mineral  to  be  feldspar 
intimately  mixed  with  corundum ; and  hence  its  hard- 
ness.— Clean.  Min.  A.] 

Anderson's  pills.  These  consist  of  Barbadoes  aloes, 
with  a proportion  of  jalap,  and  oil  of  aniseed. 

[ANDERSON,  ALEXANDER,  M.D.  Dr.  Ander- 
son, of  the  city  of  New-York,  received  his  degree  of 
Doctor  in  Medicine  from  the  Medical  faculty  of  Co- 
lumbia College.  He  afterward  turned  his  attention 
to  the  subject  of  engraving  in  wood,  and  finally  aban- 
doned his  profession  of  a physician  for  the  employ- 
ment of  an  engraver,  tin  which  he  now  stands  pre- 
eminent, being  a self-taught  artist.  His  wood  en- 
gravings are  excellent,  and  many  of  them  equal 
copperplate.  He  has  made  this  art  subservient  to  his 
first  profession,  by  engravings  illustrating  the  intes- 
tines, blood-vessels,. &c.,  as  well  as  subjects  of  botany 
and  natural  history.  He  is  a modest,  unassuming 
man,  and  is  now  (1829)  in  the  height  of  his  reputation 
and  usefulness.  A.] 

[ANDERSON,  JAMES,  M.D.  Having  successfully 
terminated  his  academical  pursuits  at  an  early  age, 
Dr.  Anderson  commenced  the  study  of  medicine  under 
the  direction  of  his  father,  a very  respectable  physi- 
cian from  Scotland.  He  attended  a course  of  lectures, 
by  Professors  Shippen  and  Morgan,  in  the  school  of 
Philadelphia,  then  in  its  infancy  ; and  next  sailed  for 
Edinburgh,  at  that  time  the  focus  of  medical  literature. 
Circumstances,  which  it  is  unnecessary  to  mention, 
not  permitting  him  to  remain  long  enough  to  obtain  a 
degree,  he  returned  to  this  country  with  an  ample  cer- 
tificate, signed  by  his  preceptors,  Cullen,  the  elder 
Munro,  and  the  whole  board  of  professors.  Immedi- 
ately on  his  return,  he  commenced  the  practice  of 
physic  in  conjunction  with  his  father.  Deeply  versed 
in  general,  and  particularly  in  medical  science,  and 
devoted  almost  beyond  example  to  the  performance  of 
his  professional  duties,  he  soon  obtained  a reputation, 


ANE 


ANE 


unenjoyed  by  any  of  his  competitors.  For  a period 
of  upwards  of  thirty  years,  he  retained  a practice  of 
an  extent  certainly  without  a parallel  in  this  section 
of  the  country.  Advancing  rapidly  toward  his  six- 
tieth year,  and  feeling  the  infirmities  consequent  on  a 
life  so  laborious,  he  retired  to  his  seat  near  Chester- 
town.  In  this  situation,  however,  he  was  not  allowed 
thd  repose  which  he  anticipated.  Though  the  native 
vigour  of  his  constitution  was  broken  down  by  the  in- 
vasion of  disease,  and  by  those  accidents  to  which  his 
course  of  life  subjected  him,  he  attended  almost  to 
the  close  of  it,  to  the  calls  of  his  patients.  He  died 
December  8th,  1820,  at  his  seat  in  the  vicinity  of  Ches- 
tertown,  Maryland,  in  the  69th  year  of  liis  age. — 
Thacker's  Med . Biog.  A.] 

Andi'ra.  A tree  of  Brazil,  the  fruit  of  which  is 
bitter  and  astringent,  and  used  as  a vermifuge. 

AN  DRAN ATO'MIA.  (From  avyp,  a man,  and 
rcpvin,  to  cut.)  Andranatome.  The  dissection  of  the 
human  body,  particularly  of  the  male. — M.  Aur.  Se- 
verinus, Z ootome  Democrit.  ■ 

Andrapodocape'lus.  (From  avSponoSgif,  a slave, 
and  Kanr]\os,  a dealer.)  A crimp.  Galen  calls  by  this 
name  the  person  whose  office  it  was  to  anoint  and 
slightly  to  wipe  the  body,  to  cleanse  the  skin  from  foul- 
ness. 

ANDREOLITE.  A species  of  crop-stone. 

ANDRQCCETE'SIS.  (From  avep , a man,  and  koi- 
t£w,  to  cohabit  with.)  1.  The  venereal  act. 

2.  The  infamous  act  of  sodomy. — Moschion,  &c. 

ANDROGYNUS.  (From  avep,  a man,  and  yvvy, 
a woman.)  1.  An  hermaphrodite. 

2.  An  effeminate  person. — Hippocrates. 

3.  A plant  is  said  to  he  androgenous,  which  produces 
both  male  and  female  flowers  from  the  same  root,  as 
the  walnut,  beech,  horn-beam,  nettle,  &c. 

ANDRO  MACHUS,  of  Crete,  was  physician  to  the 
emperor  Nero.  He  invented  a composition,  supposed 
to  be  an  antidote  against  poison,  called  after  him, 
Tlieriaca  Andromaclii , which  he  dedicated  to  that  em- 
peror in  a copy  of  Greek  verses  still  preserved.  This 
complicated  preparation  long  retained  its  reputation, 
but  is  now  deservedly  abandoned. 

Andro'nion.  Andronium.  A kind  of  plaster  used 
by  Algineta  for  carbuncles,  invented  by  Andron. 

ANDROPOGON.  (From  avr/p,  a man,  and  luoyuiv, 
a beard.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
113‘an  system.  Class,  Polygamia : Order,  Moncecia. 

Andropogon  nardus.  The  systematic  name  of 
Indian  nard  or  spikenard.  Spica  nardi ; Spica  Indi- 
ca.  The  root  of  this  plant  is  an  ingredient  in  the 
mithridate  and  theriaca ; it  is  moderately  warm  and 
pungent,  accompanied  with  a flavour  not  disagreeable, 
it  is  said  to  be  used  by  the  Orientals  as  a spice. 

Andropogon  schjenanthus.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  camel-hay,  or  Sweet-rush.  Juncus  odoratus  ; 
Fcenum  camelorum ; Juncus  aromaticus.  The  dried 
plant  is  imported  into  this  country  from  Turkey  and 
Arabia.  It  has  an  agreeable  smell,  and  a warm,  bit- 
terish, not  unpleasant  taste.  It  was  formerly  em- 
ployed as  a stomachic  and  deobstruent. 

ANDRO'TOMIA.  Androtome.  Human  dissection, 
particularly  of  the  male. 

ANDRY,  Nicholas,  a physician,  born  at  Lyons  in 
1658.  He  was  made  professor  of  medicine  at  Paris  in 
1701,  and  lived  to  the  age  of  84.  Besides  a Treatise  on 
Worms,  and  other  minor  publications,  and  contribu- 
tions in  the  Medical  and  Philosophical  Journals,  he 
was  author  of  a work,  still  esteemed,  called  “ Ortho- 
pedie,”  or  the  art  of  preventing  and  removing  defor- 
mities in  children ; which  he  proposed  to  effect  by 
regimen,  exercise,  and  various  mechanical  contri- 
vances. 

Ane'bium.  (From  avaSuino,  to  ascend.)  The 
herb  alkanet,  so  called  lrom  its  quick  growth.  See 
Anchusa. 

ANELE'SIS.  (From  amXoa,  to  roll  up.)  Aneile- 
ma . An  involution  of  the  guts,  such  as  is  caused  by 
flatulence  and  gripes.  —Hippocrates. 

ANE  MIA.  (From  avepos,  wind.)  Flatulence. 

ANE'MONF,.  (From  avepos,  wind  ; so  named,  be- 
cause it  does  not  open  its  flowers  till  blown  upon  by 
tiie  wind.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
utean  system.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order,  Polyginia. 
The  wind  flower. 

Anemone  hkpatica.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
Jicpatica  nobilis  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Herba  trini 


tatis.  Hepatica,  or  herb  trinity.  This  plant  possesses 
mildly  adsiringent  and  corroborant  virtues,  with  which 
. intentions  infusions  of  it  have  been  drunk  as  tea,  or 
the  powder  of  the  dry  leaves  given  to  the  quantity  of 
halt  a spoonful  at  a time. 

Anemone  nemorosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
ranunculus  albus  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  The  bruised 
leaves  and  flowers  are  said  to  cure  tinea  capitis  ap- 
plied to  the  part.  The  inhabitants  of  Kamskatka,  it 
is  believed,  poison  their  arrows  with  the  root  of  this 
plant. 

Anemone  pratensis.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  Pulsatilla  nigricans  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  This 
plant,  Anemone — pedunculo  involucrato,  petalis  apice 
refiexis , foliis  bipinnatis,  of  Linnaeus,  has  been  re- 
ceived into  the  Edinburgh  pharmacopoeia  upon  the 
authority  of  Baron  Stoerck,  who  recommended  it  as 
an  effectual  remedy  for  most  of  the  chronic  diseases 
affecting  the  eye,  particularly  amaurosis,  cataract,  and 
opacity  of  the  cornea,  proceeding  from  various  causes. 
He  likewise  found  it  of  great  service  in  venereal 
nodes,  nocturnal  pains,  ulcers,  caries,  indurated  glands, 
suppressed  menses,  serpiginous  eruptions,  melancholy, 
and  palsy.  The  plant,  in  its  recent  state,  has  scarcely 
any  smell ; but  its  taste  is  extremely  acrid,  and,  when 
chewed,  it  corrodes  the  tongue  and  fauces. 

ANENCE'PHALUS.  (From  a.  priv.  and  £yx£0aXof, 
the  brain.)  A monster  without  brains.  Foolish. — 
Oalen  de  Hippocratc. 

A'nkos.  A loss  of  voice  and  reason. 

ANEPITHY'MIA.  (From  a.  priv.  and  en idvpta, 
desire.)  Loss  of  appetite. 

A'NESIS.  (From  avirjpi,  to  relax.)  A remission, 
or  relaxation,  of  a disease,  or  symptom.  Aetius,  &.c. 

Ane'sum.  See  Anisum. 

ANETHUM  {Anethum, i.  n.  AveOov  ; from  avcv, 
afar,  and  -Sew,  to  run : so  called  because  its  roots  run 
out  a great  way.)- 

L The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  dill. 
See  Ancthum  graveolcns. 

Anethum  FtENicuLUM.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  fceniculum  of  the  shops.  Sweet  fennel,  Ancthum — 
fructibus  ovatis  of  Linnaeus.  The  seeds  and  roots  of 
this  indigenous  plant  are  directed  by  the  colleges  of 
London  and  Edinburgh.  The  seeds  have  an  aromatic 
smell,  and  a warm  sweetish  taste,  and  contain  a large 
proportion  of  essential  oil.  They  are  stomachic  and 
carminative.  The  root  has  a sweet  taste,  but  very 
little  aromatic  warmth,  and  is  said  to  be  pectoral  and 
diuretic. 

Anethum  graveolens.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Anethum  of  the  shops.  Ancthum— fructibus  com- 
pressis , of  Linnams. — Bill.  Anet.  This  plant  is  a 
native  of  Spain,  but  cultivated  in  several  parts  of 
England.  The  seeds  are  directed  for  use  by  the  Lon- 
don and  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeias : they  have  a mo- 
derately warm,  pungent  taste,  and  an  aromatic,  but 
sickly  smell.  There  is  an  essential  oil,  and  a distilled 
water  prepared  from  them,  which  are  given  in  flatu- 
lent colics  and  dyspepsia.  They  are  also  said  to  pro- 
mote the  secretion  of  milk. 

ANE'TICA.  ( Aneticus  ; from  aviypai,  to  relax.) 
Medicines  which  assuage  pain,  according  to  Andr 
Tiraquell. 

Anetus.  (From  avirj/ju,  remilto.)  A name  given 
by  Good,  in  his  Study  of  Medicine,  to  a genus  of  dis- 
eases which  embraces  intermittent  fevers.  See  JVb- 

sology. 

ANEURI'SMA.  ( Ancurisma , matis,  neut.  Avcv- 
pvapa ; from  avevpv vw,  to  dilate.)  An  aneurism ; a 
preternatural  tumour  formed  by  the  dilatation  of  an 
artery.  A genus  of  disease  ranked  by  Cullen  in  the 
class  locales,  and  order  Tumores.  There  are  three 
species  of  aneurism : 1.  The  true  aneurism,  aneurisma 
verum , which  is  known  by  the  presence  of  a pulsating 
tumour.  The  artery  either  seems  only  enlarged  at  a 
small  part  of  its  tract,  and  the  tumour  has  a deter, 
minate  border,  or  it  seems  dilated  for  a considerable 
length,  in  which  circumstance  the  swelling  is  oblong, 
and  loses  itself  60  gradually  in  the  surrounding  parts, 
that  its  margin  cannot  be  exactly  ascertained.  The 
first,  which  is  the  most  common,  is  termed  circum- 
scribed true  aneurism ; the  last,  the  diffused  true  aneu- 
rism. The  symptoms  of  the  circumscribed  true  aneu- 
rism, take  place  as  follows:  the  first  thing  the  patient 


ANE 


ANE 


perceives  is  an  extraordinary  throbbing  in  some  par- 
ticular situation,  and,  on  paying  a little  more  attention, 
he  discovers  there  a small  pulsating  tumour,  which 
entirely  disappears  when  compressed,  but  returns  again 
as  soon  as  tiie  pressure  is  removed.  It  is  commonly 
unattended  with  pain  or  change  in  the  colour  of  the 
skin.  When  once  the  tumour  has  originated,  it  con- 
tinually grows  larger,  and  at  length  attains  a very  con- 
siderable size.  In  proportion  as  it  becomes  larger,  its 
pulsation  becomes  weaker,  and,  indeed,  it  is  almost 
quite  lost,  when  the  disease  has  acquired  much  mag- 
nitude. The  diminution  of  the  pulsation  has  been 
ascribed  to  the  coats  of  the  artery,  losing  their  dilatable 
and  elastic  quality,  in  proportion  as  they  are  distended 
and  indurated ; and,  consequently,  the  aneurismal  sac 
being  no  longer  capable  of  an  alternate  diastole  and 
systole  from  the  action  of  the  heart.  The  fact  is  also 
imputed  to  the  coagulated  blood,  deposited  on  the  inner 
surface  of  the  sac,  particularly  in  large  aneurisms,  in 
which  some  of  the  blood  is  always  interrupted  in  its 
motion.  In  true  aneurisms,  however,  the  blood  does 
not  coagulate  so  soon,  nor  so  often,  as  in  false  ones. 
Whenever  such  coagulated  blood  lodges  in  the  sac, 
pressure  can  only  produce  a partial  disappearance  of 
the  swelling.  In  proportion  as  the  aneurismal  sac 
grows  larger,  the  communication  into  the  artery 
beyond  the  tumours  is  lessened.  Hence,  in  this  state, 
the  pulse  below  the  swelling  becomes  weak  and  small, 
and  tlie  limb  frequently  cold  and  cedematous.  On  dis- 
section, the  lower  continuation  of  the  artery  is  found 
preternaturally  small,  and  contracted.  The  pressure 
of  the  tumour  on  the  adjacent  parts  also  produces  a 
variety  of  symptoms,  ulcerations,  caries,  &c.  Some- 
times an  accidental  contusion,  or  concussion,  may 
detach  a piece  of  coagulum  from  the  inner  surface  of 
the  cyst,  and  the  circulation  through  the  sack  be  ob- 
structed by  it.  The  coagulum  may  possibly  be  im- 
pelled quite  into  the  artery  below,  so  as  to  induce 
important  changes.  The  danger  of  an  aneurism 
arrives  when  it  is  on  the  point  of  bursting,  by  which 
occurrence  the  patient  usually  bleeds  to  death;  and 
this  sometimes  happens  in  a few  seconds.  Ths  fatal 
event  may  generally  be  foreseen,  as  the  part  about  to 
give  way  becomes  particularly  tense,  elevated,  thin, 
soft,  and  of  a dark  purple  colour.  2.  The  false  or 
spurious  aneurism , aneurisma  spurium,  is  always 
owing  to  an  aperture  in  the  artery,  from  which  the 
blood  gushes  into  the  cellular  substance.  It  may  arise 
from  an  artery  being  lacerated  in  violent  exertions; 
but  the  most  common  occasional  cause  is  a wound. 
This  is  particularly  apt  to  occur  at  the  bend  of  the  arm, 
where  the  artery  is  exposed  to  be  injured  in  attempting 
to  bleed.  When  this  happens,  as  soon  as  the  puncture 
has  been  made,  the  blood  gushes  out  with  unusual 
force,  of  a bright  scarlet  colour  and  in  an  irregular 
stream,  corresponding  to  the  pulsation  of  the  artery. 
It  flows  out,  however,  in  an  even  and  less  rapid  stream 
when  pressure  is  employed  higher  up  than  the  wound. 
These  last  are  the  most  decisive  marks  of  the  artery 
being  opened;  for  blood  often  flows  from  a vein  with 
great  rapidity,  and  in  a broken  current,  when  the 
vessel  is  very  turgid  and  situated  immediately  over  the 
artery,  which  imparts  its  motion  to  it.  The  surgeon 
endeavours  precipitately  to  stop  the  hiemorrhage  by 
pressure;  and  he  commonly  occasions  a diffused  false 
aneurism.  The  external  wound  in  the  skin  is  closed, 
so  that  the  blood  cannot  escape  from  it ; but  insinuates 
itself  into  the  cellular  substance.  The  swelling  thus 
produced  is  uneven,  often  knotty,  and  extends  upwards 
and  downwards,  along  the  tract  of  the  vessel.  The 
skin  is  also  usually  of  a dark  purple  colour.  Its  size 
increases  as  long  as  the  internal  haemorrhage  continues, 
and,  if  this  should  proceed  above  a certain  pitch,  mor- 
tification of  the  limb  ensues.  3.  The  varicose  aneu- 
rism, aneurisma  varicosum : this  was  first  described  by 
Dr.  W.  Hunter.  It  happens  when  the  brachial  artery 
is  punctured  in  opening  a vein : the  blood  then  rushes 
into  the  vein,  which  becomes  varicose.  Aneurisms 
may  happen  in  any  part  of  the  body,  except  the  latter 
species,  which  can  only  take  place  where  a vein  runs 
over  an  artery.  When  an  artery  has  been  punctured, 
the  tourniquet  should  be  applied,  so  as  to  stop  the  flow 
of  blood  by  compressing  the  vessel  above;  then  the 
most  likely  plan  of  obviating  the  production  of  spurious 
aneurism  appears  to  be  applying  a firm  compress 
immediately  over  the  wound,  and  securing  it  by  a 
bandage,  or  in  any  other  way,  so  a3  effectually  to  close 

J2  2 


the  orifice,  yet  not  prevent  the  circulation  through 
other  vessels  : afterward  keeping  the  limb  as  quiet  as 
possible,  enjoining  the  antiphlogistic  regimen,  and 
examining  daily  that  no  extravasation  has  happened, 
which  would  require  the  compress  being  fixed  more 
securely,  previously  applying  the  tourniquet,  and 
pressing  the  effused  blood  as  much  as  possible  into  the 
vessel.  If  there  should  be  much  coldness  or  swelling 
of  the  limb  below,  it  will  be  proper  to.rub  it  frequently 
with  some  spirituous  or  other  stimulant  embrocation. 
It  is  only  by  trial  that  it  can  be  certainly  determined 
when  the  wound  is  closed ; but  always  better  not  to 
discontinue  the  pressure  prematurely.  The  same  plan 
may  answer,  when  the  disease  has  already  come  on, 
if  the  blood  can  be  entirely,  or  even  mostly,  pressed 
into  the  artery  again;  at  any  rate,  by  determining  the 
circulation  on  collateral  branches,  it  will  give  greater 
chance  of  success  to  a subsequent  operation.  There  is 
another  mode,  stated  to  have  sometimes  succeeded, 
even  when  there  was  much  coagulated  blood ; namely, 
making  strong  pressure  over  the  whole  limb,  by  a 
bandage  applied  uniformly,  and  moistened  to  make  it 
sit  closer,  as  well  as  to  obviate  inflammation ; but  this 
does  not  appear  so  good  a plan,  at  least  in  slighter 
cases.  If  however  the  tumour  be  very  large,  ai^d 
threatens  to  burst,  or  continues  spreading,  the  opera- 
tion should  not  be  delayed.  The  tourniquet  being 
applied,  a free  incision  is  to  be  made  into  the  tumour, 
the  extravasated  blood  removed,  and.  the  artery  tied 
both  above  and  below  the  wound,  as  near  to  it  as  may 
be  safe ; and  if  any  branch  be  given  off  between,  this 
must  be  also  secured.  It  is  better  not  to  make  the 
ligatures  tighter,  than  may  be  necessary  to  stop  the 
flow  of  blood  ; and  to  avoid  including  any  nerve  if  pos- 
sible. Sometimes,  where  extensive  suppuration  or 
caries  has  occurred,  or  gangrene  is  to  be  apprehended, 
amputation  will  be  necessary;  but  this  must  not  be 
prematurely  resolved  upon,  for  often  after  several 
weeks  the  pulse  has  returned  in  the  limb  below.  In 
the  true  aneurism,  when  small  and  recent,  cold  and 
astringent  applications  are  sometimes  useful ; or 
making  pressure  on  the  tumour,  or  on  the  artery  above, 
may  succeed  ; otherwise  an  operation  becomes  neces- 
sary to  save  the  patient’s  life;  though  unfortunately  it 
oftener  fails  in  this  than  in  the  spurious  kind  ; gangrene 
ensuing,  or  haemorrhage ; this  chiefly  arises  from  the 
arteries  being  often  extensively  diseased,  so  that  they 
are  more  likely  to  give  way,  and  there  is  less  vital 
power  in  the  limb.  A great  improvement  has  been 
made  in  the  mode  of  operating  in  these  cases  by  Mr. 
John  Hunter,  and  other  modern  surgeons,  namely, 
instead  of  proceeding  as  already  explained  in  the  spu- 
rious aneurism,  securing  the  artery  some  way  above, 
and  leaving  the  rest  in  a great  measure  to  the  powers 
of  nature.  It  has  been  now  proved  by  many  instances, 
that  when  the  current  of  the  blood  is  thus  interrupted, 
the  tumour  will  cease  to  enlarge,  and  often  be  con- 
siderably diminished  by  absorption.  There  is  reason 
for  believing  too,  that  the  cures  effected  spontaneously, 
or  by  pressure,  have  been  usually  owing  to  the  trunk 
above,  being  obliterated.  There  are  many  obvious 
advantages  in  this  mode  of  proceeding;  it  is  more  easy, 
sooner  performed,  and  disorders  the  system  less,  par- 
ticularly as  you  avoid  having  a large  unhealthy  sore  to 
be  healed  ; besides  there  is  less  probability  of  the  vessel 
being  diseased  at  some  distance  from  the  tumour.  In 
the  popliteal  aneurism,  for  example,  the  artery  may  be 
secured  rather  below  the  middle  of  the  thigh,  where  it  is 
easily  come  at.  The  tour  niquet  therefore  being  applied, 
and  the  vessel  exposed,  a strong  ligature  is  to  be  passed 
round  it;  or,  which  is  perhaps  preferable,  two  ligatures 
a little  distant,  subsequently  cutting  through  the  artery 
between  them,  when  the  two  portions  contract  among 
the  surrounding  flesh.  It  is  proper  to  avoid  including 
the  nerve  or  vein,  but  not  unnecessarily  detach  the 
vessel  from  its  attachments.  For  greater  security  one 
end  of  each  ligature,  after  being  tied,  may  be  passed 
through  the  intercepted  portion  of  artery,  that  they 
may  not  be  forced  off.  Then  the  wound  is  to  be  closed 
by  adhesive  plaster,  merely  leaving  the  ends  of  the 
ligatures  hanging  out,  which  will  after  some  time  come 
away.  However  it  must  be  remembered  that  haemor- 
rhage is  liable  to  occur,  when  this  happens,  even  three 
or  four  weeks  after  the  operation ; so  that  proper  pre- 
cautions are  required,  to  check  it  as  soon  as  possible  ; 
likewise  the  system  should  be  lowered  previously,  and 
kept  so  during  the  cure.  When  a true  aneurism 

67 


ANG 


changes  into  the  spurious  form,  whichis  known  by  the 
tumour  spreading,  becoming  harder,  and  with  a less 
distinct  pulsation,  the  operation  becomes  immediately 
necessary.  When  an  aneurism  is  out  of  the  reach  of 
an  operation,  life  may  be  prolonged  by  occasional 
bleeding,  a spare  diet,  &c.;  and  when  the  tumour 
becomes  apparent  externally,  carefully  guarding  it 
from  injury.  In  the  varicose  aneurism  an  operation 
will  be  very  seldom  if  ever  required,  the  growth  of  the 
tumour  being  limited. 

Aneurisma  spurium.  See  Aneurisma. 

Aneurisma  varicosum.  See  Aneumsma. 

Aneurjsma  verum.  See  Aneurisma. 

ANE'XIS.  (From  av£%w,  to  project.)  A swelling, 
or  protuberance. 

ANGEIOLO'GY.  ( Angeiologia , a.  f. ; from ayyctov, 
a vessel,  and  Xoyoj,  a discourse.)  A dissertation,  or 
reasoning,  upon  the  vessels  of  the  body. 

ANGEIOTI'SMUS.  (From  ayytiov,  a vessel,  and 
rrpvo),  to  cut.)  An  angeiotomist,  or  skilful  dissector  of 
the  vessels. 

ANGEIO'TOMY.  (Angeiotomia ; from  ayyetov,  a 
vessel,  and  repvu),  to  cut.)  The  dissection  of  the  blood- 
vessels of  an  animal  body ; also  the  opening  of  a vein, 
or  an  artery. 

ANGE  LICA.  (So  called  from  its  supposed  angelic 
virtues.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 
Angelica. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  garden  angelica. 
See  Angelica  archangelica. 

Angelica  archangelica.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  angelica  of  the  shops.  Milzadella  Angelica — 
foliorum  impari  lohato  of  Linnaeus.  A plant,  a native 
of  Lapland,  but  cultivated  in  our  gardens.  The  roots 
of  angelica  have  a fragrant,  agreeable  smell,  and  a 
bitterish,  pungent  taste.  The  stalk,  leaves,  and  seeds, 
which  are  also  directed  in  the  pharmacopoeias,  possess 
the  same  qualities,  though  in  an  inferior  degree.  Their 
virtues  are  aromatic  and  carminative.  A sweatmeat 
is  made,  by  the  confectioners,  of  this  root,  which  is 
extremely  agreeable  to  the  stomach,  and  is  surpassed 
only  by  that  of  ginger. 

Angelica , garden.  See  Angelica  archangelica. 

Angelica  pilula.  Anderson’s  Scots  pill. 

Angelica  sativa.  See  Angelica  sylvestris. 

Angelica  sylvestris.  Angelica  sativa.  Wild 
angelica.  Angelica — foliis  aqualibus  ovato-lanceo- 
latis  serratis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  species  of  angelica 
possesses  similar  properties  to  the  garden  species,  but 
in  a much  inferior  degree.  It  is  only  used  when  the 
latter  cannot  be  obtained.  The  seeds,  powdered  and 
put  in  the  hair,  kill  lice. 

Angelica,  wild.  See  Angelica  sylvestris. 

ANGELICUS.  (From  angel  us,  an  angel.)  Some 
plants,  &x.  are  so  called,  from  their  supposed  superior 
virtues. 

Angelicus  pulvis.  Submuriate  of  mercury. 

ANGELINA.  Angelina  zanoni  acostce.  A tree  of 
vast  size,  sometimes  above  sixteen  feet  thick,  growing 
in  rocky  and  sandy  places  in  Malabar  in  the  East 
Indies.  It  bears  ripe  fruit  in  December.  The  dried 
leaves  heated  are  said  to  alleviate  pain  and  stiffness  of 
the  joints,  and  dismiss  swelling  of  the  testes  caused  by 
external  violence ; and  are  also  said  to  be  useful  in  the 
cure  of  venereal  complaints. 

Angelin.®  cortex.  The  name  of  the  tree  from 
which  the  Cortex  Angelinas  is  procured.  It  is  a native 
of  Grenada.  This  bark  has  been  recommended  as  an 
anthelmintic  for  children. 

Angeloca'cos.  The  purging  Indian  plum.  See 
Myrobalanus. 

A'ngi.  (From  angor,  anguish;  because  of  their  pain.) 
Buboes  in  the  groin. — Fallopius  de  Morbo  Gallico. 

ANGIGLO'SSUS.  (From  ayKvXrj , a hook,  and 
yXwao-a,  the  tongue.)  A person  who  stammers. 

ANGI'NA.  ( Angina , ce.  f. , from  ayx(*,»  to  strangle ; 
because  it  is  often  attended  with  a sense  of  strangu- 
lation.) A sore’ throat.  See  Cynanche. 

Angina  uni.  A name  used  by  some  of  the  later 
Greeks  writers  to  express  what  the  more  ancient  writers 
of  this  nation  called  linozostres , and  the  Latins  epili- 
num . which  is  the  cuscuta  or  dodder,  growing  on  the 
linum  or  flax,  as  that  on  the  thyme  was  called  epithy- 
mum.  See  Ouscuta. 

Angina  maligna.  Malignant  or  putrid  sore  throat. 
See  Cynanche  maligna. 


ANG 

Angina  parotidea.  The  mumps.  See  Cynanch 6 

parotidea. 

Angina  pectoris.  Syncope  ang  nosa  of  Dr.  Parry. 
An  acute  constrictory  pain  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
sternum,  inclining  rather  to  the  left  side,  and  extending 
up  into  the  left  arm,  accompanied  with  great  anxiety 
Violent  palpitations  of  the  heart,  laborious  breathings, 
and  a sense  of  suffocation,  are  the  characteristic  symp- 
toms of  this  disease.  It  is  found  to  attack  men  much 
more  frequently  than  women,  particularly  those  who 
have  short  necks,  who  are  inclinable  to  corpulency, 
and  who,  at  the  same  time,  lead  an  inactive  and  seden- 
tary life.  Although  it  is  sometimes  met  with  in  per- 
sons under  the  age  of  twenty,  still  it  more  frequently 
occurs  in  those  who  are  between  forty  and  fifty.  In 
slight  cases,  and  in  the  first  stage  of  the  disorder,  the 
fit  comes  on  by  going  up  hill,  up  stairs,  or  by  walking 
at  a quick  pace  after  a hearty  meal ; but  as  the  disease 
advances,  or  becomes  more  violent,  the  paroxysms  are 
apt  to  be  excited  by  certain  passions  of  the  mind  ; by 
slow  walking,  by  riding  on  horseback,  or  in  a carriage ; 
or  by  sneezing,  coughing,  speaking,  or  straining  at 
stool.  In  some  cases,  they  attack  the  patient  from  two 
to  four  in  the  morning,  or  whilst  sitting  or  standing, 
without  any  previous  exertion  or  obvious  cause.  On 
a sudden,  he  is  seized  with  an  acute  pain  in  the 
breast,  or  rather  at  the  extremity  of  the  sternum,  in- 
clining to  the  left  side,  and  extending  up  into  the  arm, 
as  far  as  the  insertion  of  the  deltoid  muscle,  accom- 
panied by  a sense  of  suffocation,  great  anxiety,  and  an 
idea  that  its  continuance  or  increase,  would  certainly 
be  fatal.  In  the  first  stage  of  the  disease,  the  uneasy 
sensation  at  the  end  of  the  sternum,  with  the  other  un- 
pleasant symptoms,  which  seemed  to  threaten  a sus- 
pension of  life  by  a perseverance  in  exertion,  usually 
go  off  upon  the  person’s  standing  still,  or  turning  from 
the  wind ; but,  in  a more  advanced  stage,  they  do  not 
so  readily  recede,  and  the  paroxysms  are  much  more 
violent.  During  the  fit,  the  pulse  sinks,  in  a greater 
or  less  degree,  and  becomes  irregular  ; the  face  and 
extremities  are  pale,  and  bathed  in  a cold  sweat,  and, 
for  a while,  the  patient  is  perhaps  deprived  of  the 
powers  of  sense  and  voluntary  motion.  The  disease 
having  recurred  more  or  less  frequently  during  the 
space  of  some  years,  a violent  attack  at  last  puts  a 
sudden  period  to  his  existence.  Angina  pectoris  is 
attended  with  a considerable  degree  of  danger  ; and  it 
usually  happens  that  the  person  is  carried  off  suddenly. 
It  mostly  depends  upon  an  ossification  of  the  coronary 
arteries,  and  then  we  can  never  expect  to  effect  a radi 
cal  cure.  During  the  paroxysms,  considerable  relief  is 
to  be  obtained  from  fomentations,  and  administering 
powerful  .antispasmodics,  such  as  opium  and  aether 
combined  together.  The  application  of  a blister  to  the 
breast  is  likewise  attended  sometimes  with  a good 
effect.  As  the  painful  sensation  at  the  extremity  of 
the  sternum  often  admits  of  a temporary  relief,  from 
an  evacuation  of  wind  by  the  mouth,  it  may  be  proper 
to  give  frequent  doses  of  carminatives,  such  as  pepper 
mint,  carraway,  or  cinnamon  water.  Where  these 
fail  in  the  desired  effect,  a few  drops  of  ol.  anisi,  on  a 
little  sugar,  may  be  substituted. 

With  the  view  of  preventing  the  recurrence  of  the 
disorder,  the  patient  should  carefully  guard  against 
passion,  or  other  emotions  of  the  mind : he  should  use 
a light,  generous  diet,  avoiding  every  thing  of  a heat- 
ing nature ; and  he  should  take  care  never  to  overload 
the  stomach,  or  to  use  any  kind  of  exercise  immedi- 
ately after  eating.  Besides  these  precautions,  he 
should  endeavour  to  counteract  obesity,  which  has 
been  considered  as  a predisposing  cause  ; and  this  is  to 
be  eflected  most  safely  by  a vegetable  diet,  moderate 
exercise  at  proper  times,  early  rising,  and  keeping  the 
body  perfectly  open.  It  has  been  observed  that  angina 
pectoris  is  a disease  always  attended  with  considera- 
ble danger,  and,  in  most  instances,  has  proved  fatal 
under  every  mode  of  treatment.  We  are  given,  how 
ever,  to  understand,  by  Dr.  Macbride,  tlxat  of  late, 
several  cases  of  it  have  been  treated  with  great  suc- 
cess, and  the  disease  radically  removed,  by  inserting  a 
large  issue  on  each  thigh.  These,  therefore,  should 
never  be  neglected.  In  one  case,  with  a view  of  cor- 
recting, or  draining  off  the  irritating  fluid,  lie  ordered, 
instead  of  issues,  a mixture  of  lime  water  with  a little 
of  the  spirituous  juniperi  comp.,  and  an  alterative  pro- 
portion of  Huxham’s  antimoniaf  wine,  together  with  a 
plain,  light,  perspirable  diet.  From  this  course  tbe 


ANI 


ANI 


patient  was  soon  apparently  mended ; but  it  was  not 
until  after  the  insertion  of  a large  issue  in  each  thigh, 
that  he  was  restored  to  perfect  health. 

Angini  tonsillaris.  See  Gynanche  tonsillaris. 

Angina  trachealis.  See  Gynanche  trachealis. 

ANGIOCARPI.  The  name  given  by  Persoon  to  a 
division  of  funguses  which  bear  their  seeds  internally. 
They  are  either  hard  or  membranous,  tough  and 
leathery. 

ANGIOLO'GY  (Angiologia  ; from  ayyciov,  a 
vessel,  and  Xoyos,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the 
vessels  of  the  human  body. 

ANGIOSPERMIA.  (From  ayyos,  a vessel,  and 
tnteppa,  a seed.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
tlie  class  Didynamia  of  the  sexual  system  of  Lin- 
naeus, the  seeds  of  which  are  lodged  in  a pericarpium 
or  seed-  vessel. 

Angiosperm®  herb®.  Those  plants,  the  seeds  of 
which  are  enclosed  in  a covering  or  vessel. 

A'NGLICUS.  (From  Anglia , England.)  The 
sweating  sickness,  which  was  so  endemic  and  fatal  in 
England,  was  called  Sudor  Anglicanus.  See  Sudor 
Anglicus. 

Ango'lam.  A very  tall  tree  of  Malabar,  possessing 
vermifuge  powers. 

Ango'ne.  (From  ayxo),  to  strangle.)  A nervous 
sort  of  quinsy,  or  hysteric  suffocation,  where  the 
fauces  are  contracted  and  stopped  up  without  inflam- 
mation. 

A'NGOR.  ( Angor , oris.  m. : from  Ango.)  Agony 
or  intense  bodily  pain. — Galen. 

A'NGOS.  (Ayyos,  a vessel.)  A vessel.  A col- 
lection of  humours. 

ANGULATUS.  Angled. — A term  used  to  desig- 
nate stem,  leaves,  petioles,  &c.  which  present  several 
acute  angles  in  their  circumference.  There  are  seve- 
ral varieties  of  angular  stems. 

1.  Triangulatus,  three-angled ; as  in  Cactus  trian- 
gularis. 

2.  Quadrangulatus,  four-angled ; as  in  Cactus 
tetragonus. 

3.  Quinqueangulalus , five-angled ; as  in  Cactus 
pentagonus. 

4.  Hexangulatus,  six-angled ; as  in  Cactus  hexa- 
gonus. 

5.  Multiangulatus , many-angled;  as  in  Cactus 
cereus. 

6.  Obtusangularis,  obtuse-angled;  as  in  Sprofula- 
ria  nodosa. 

7.  Acutangulatus , acute-angled ; as  in  Scrofularia 
aquatica. 

8.  Caulis  triqueter,  three-sided,  but  with  flat  sides  ; 
as  in  Hedysarum  triquetrum , Viola  mirabilis,  Carex 
acuta. 

ft.  Caulis  tetaquetrus , quadrangular  with  flat  sides ; 
as  in  Hypericum  quadr angular e,  Mentha  officinalis. 

For  angular  leaves,  See  Leaf,  Petiole , &c. 

ANGULOSUS.  Angular. 

Angustu'r®  cortex.  A bark  imported  from  An- 
gustura.  See  Cusparia. 

ANHELA'TION.  (Anhelatio ; from  anhelo,  to 
breathe  with  difficulty.)  Anhclitus.  Shortness  of 
breathing. 

ANHYDRITE.  Anhydrous  gypsum.  There  are. 
six  varieties  of  this  mineral  su  hate  of  lime.  1.  The 
compact. — 2.  The  granular.  3.  The  fibrous.  4.  The 
radiated.  5.  The  sparry  or  cube  spar.  6.  The  silici- 
ferous  or  vulpinite. 

Anhydros.  A name  given  by  the  ancient  Greeks, 
to  express  one  of  those  kinds  of  Strychna  or  night- 
shades, which,  when  taken  internally,  caused  madness. 

ANHYDROUS.  (From  a,  neg.  and  vSop,  water. 
Without  water. 

Anice'ton.  (From  a,  priv.  and  vua 7,  victory.)  A 
name  of  a plaster  invented  by  Crito,  and  so  called  be- 
cause it  was  thought  an  infallible  or  invincible  remedy 
for  achores,  or  scald-head.  It  was  composed  of  litharge, 
alum,  and  turpentine,  and  is  described  by  Galen. 

Anil.  The  name  of  the  Indigo  plant. 

A'NIMA.  A soul:  whether  rational,  sensitive,  or 
vegetative.  The  word  is  pure  Latin,  formed  of  ave- 
pos,  breath.  It  is  sometimes  used  by  physicians  to  de- 
note the  principle  of  life  in  the  body,  in  which  sense 
Willis  calls  the  blood  anima  brutalis.  By  chemists  it 
was  used  figuratively  for  the  volatile  principle  in  bo- 
dies, whereby  they  were  capable  of  being  raised  by  the 
fire ; and  by  the  old  writers  on  botany,  materia  me- 


dica,  and  pharmacy,  it  was  frequently  employed  to 
denote  its  great  efficacy  : hence  anima , hepates,  aloes , 
rliabarbari , &c. 

Anima  aloes.  Refined  aloes. 

Anima  articulorum.  A name  of  tht  Hermodac- 
tyles.  See  Hcrmodactylus. 

Anima  hepatis.  Sal  martis. 

Anima  pulmonum.  The  soul  of  the  lungs.  A name 
given  to  saffron,  on  account  of  its  use  in  asthmas. 
Anima  rhabarbari.  The  best  rhubarb. 

Anima  saturni.  A preparation  of  lead. 

Anima  veneris.  A preparation  of  copper. 
ANIMAL.  An  organized  body  endowed  with  life 
and  voluntary  motion.  The  elements  which  enter  into 
the  composition  of  the  bodies  of  animals  are  solid, 
liquid,  gaseous,  and  inconfinable. 

Solid  Elements.  Phosphorus,  sulphur,  carbon,  iron, 
manganese,  potassium,  lime,  soda,  magnesia,  silica, 
and  alumina. 

Liquid  Elements.  Muriatic  acid  ; water,  which  in 
this  case  may  be  considered  as  an  element,  enters  into 
the  organization,  and  constitutes  three-fourths  of  the 
bodies  of  animals. 

Gaseous  Elements.  Oxygen,  hydrogen,  azote. 
Inconfiwable  Elements.  Caloric,  light,  electric,  and 
magnetic  fluids. 

These  diverse  elements,  united  with  each  other, 
three  and  three,  four  and  four,  &c.  according  to  laws 
still  unexplained,  form  what  we  name  the  proximate 
principles  of  animals. 

Proximate  Materials , or  Principles.  These  are  di- 
vided into  azotized,  and  non-azotized. 

The  azotized  principles  are  : albumen,  fibrin,  gela 
tin,  mucus,  cheese-curd  principle,  urea,  uric  acid, 
osraazome,  colouring  matter  of  the  blood. 

The  non-azotized  principles  are : the  acetic,  benzoic, 
lactic,  formic,  oxalic,  rosacic,  acids;  sugar  of  milk, 
sugar  of  diabetic  urine,  picromel,  yellow  colouring 
matter  of  bile,  and  of  other  liquids  or  solids  which  be- 
come yellow  accidentally,  the  blistering  principle  of 
cantharides,  spermaceti,  biliary  calculus,  the  odorife- 
rous principles  of  ambergris,  musk,  castor,  civet,  &c. 
which  are  scarcely  known,  except  for  their  faculty  of 
acting  on  the  organ  of  smell. 

Animal  fats  are  not  immediate,  simple,  proximate 
principles.  It  is  proved  that  human  fat,  that  of  the 
pig,  of  the  sheep,  &c.  are  principally  formed  by  two 
fatty  bodies,  stearin , and  elain,  which  present  very 
different  characters  that  may  be  easily  separated. 

Neither  is  the  butter  of  the  cow  a simple  body ; it 
contains  acetic  acid,  a yellow  colouring  principle,  an 
odorous  principle,  which  is  very  manifest  in  ferment- 
ed cheese. 

We  must  not  reckon  among  these  substances,  adi- 
pocire,  a matter  which  is  seen  in  bodies  long  buried  in 
the  earth  ; it  is  composed  of  margarine , of  a fluid  acid 
fat,  of  an  orange  colouring  principle,  and  of  a peculiar 
odorous  substance.  Nor  must  this  substance  be  con- 
founded with  spermaceti,  and  the  biliary  calculus, 
which  are  themselves  very  different  from  each  other. 
It  does  not  contain  a single  principle  analogous  to 
them. 

Organic  Elements.  The  materials  or  principles 
above  mentioned  combine  among  themselves,  and 
from  their  combination  arise  the  organic  elements, 
which  are  solid  or  liquid.  The  laws  or  forces  that  go- 
vern these  combinations  are  entirely  unknown. 

Organic  Solids.  The  solids  have  sometimes  the 
form  of  canals,  sometimes  that  of  large  or  small  plates, 
at  other  times  they  assume  that  of  membranes.  In 
man  the  total  weight  of  solids  is  generally  eight  or 
nine  times  less  than  that  of  liquids.  This  proportion 
is  nevertheless  variable  according  to  many  circum- 
stances. 

The  ancients  believed  that  all  the  organic  solids 
might  be  reduced  by  ultimate  analysis  to  simple  fibres, 
which  they  supposed  were  formed  of  earth,  oil,  and 
iron.  Haller,  who  admitted  this  idea  of  the  ancients, 
owns  that  this  fibre  is  visible  only  to  the  eye  of  the 
mind.  Invisibilis  est  ea  Jibra  sola  ; mentis  aeie  dis- 
tmguimus.  This  is  just  the  same  as  if  he  had  said 
that  it  does  not  exist  at  all,  whicii  nobody  at  present 
doubts. 

Tiie  ancients  also  admitted  secondary  fibres,  which 
they  supposed  to  be  formed  by  particular  modifica- 
tions of  the  simple  fibre.  Thence,  the  nervous,  mus 
cular,  parenchymatous,  osseous  fibre. 

63 


ANN 


ANO 


Chaussier  has  lately  proposed  to  admit  four  sorts  of 
fibres,  which  he  calls  luminary , nerval , muscular , and 
albuginous. 

Science  was  nearly  in  this  state  when  Pinel  con- 
ceived the  idea  of  distinguishing  the  organic  solids,  not 
by  fibres,  but  by  tissues  or  systems.  Bichat  applied  it 
to  all  the  solid  parts  of  the  bodies  of  animals:  the 
classification  of  BicMt  has  been  perfected  by  Dupuy- 
tren  and  Richerand. 


Classification  of  the  Tissues. 


1.  Cellular  — 
< 

. Arterial. 

2.  Vascular  < 

Venous. 

; Lymphatic. 

3.  Nervous  • 

4.  Osseous  .. 

\ Cerebral. 

| Ganglaic. 

( 

' Fibrous. 

5.  Fibrous 

Fibro- cartilaginous. 
Dermoid. 

6.  Muscular  j 

i Voluntary. 
Involuntary. 

7.  Erectile  — 

8.  Mucous ... 

9.  Serous  — 

10.  Horny  or  i 

Hairy. 

Epidemic  f 

1 Epidermoid. 

11.  Parenchymatous,  Glandular. 

These  systems,  associated  with  each  other  and  with 
the  fluids,  compose  the  organs  or  instruments  of  life. 
When  many  organs  tend  by  their  action  toward  a 
common  end,  we  name  them,  collectively  considered, 
an  apparatus.  The  number  of  apparatus,  and  their 
disposition,  constitute  the  differences  of  animals. — 
Magendie. 

Animal  actions.  Jlctiones  animates.  Those  ac- 
tions, or  functions,  are  so  termed,  which  are  performed 
through  the  means  of  the  mind.  To  this  class  be- 
long the  external  and  internal  senses,  the  voluntary 
action  of  muscles,  voice,  speech,  watching,  and  sleep. 
See  Action. 

Animal  Heat.  See  Heat , animal. 

Animal  (Economy.  See  (Economy , animal. 

Animal  Oil.  Oleum  animate.  Oleum  animate  Dip- 
polii.  An  empyreumatic  oil,  obtained  from  the  bones 
of  animals,  recommended  as  an  anodyne  and  anti- 
spasmodic. 

A'nime  gummi.  The  substance  which  bears  this 
name  in  the  shops  is  a resin.  See  Hymencea  courbaril. 

A'nlmi  deliquium.  (From  animus , the  mind,  and 
delinquo,  to  leave.)  Fainting.  See  Sijncope. 

A'NIMUS.  This  word  is  to  be  distinguished  from 
anima;  which  generally  expresses  the  faculty  of  rea- 
soning, and  animus,  the  being  in  which  that  faculty 
resides. 

Anin'ga.  A root  which  grows  in  the  Antilles 
islands,  and  is  used  by  sugar-bakers  for  refining  their 
sugar. 

ANISCA'LPTOR.  (From  anus,  the  breech,  and 
scalpo , to  scratch.)  The  latissimus  dorsi  is  so  called, 
because  it  is  the  muscle  chiefly  instrumental  in  per- 
forming this  office. — Bartholin. 

Anisotachys.  (From  aviaos,  unequal,  and 
quick.)  A quick  and  unequal  pulse.—  Gorreeus. 

ANI'SUM.  (From  a.  neg.  and  iaos , equal.)  See 
Pimpinella  anisum. 

Anisum  sinense.  See  Illicium  anisatum. 

Anisum  stellatcm.  See  Illicium. 

Anisum  vulgare.  See  Pimpinella  anisum. 

ANNEAL.  We  know  too  little  of  the  arrangement 
of  particles  to  determine  what  it  is  that  constitutes  or 
produces  brittleness  in  any  substance.  In  a conside- 
rable number  of  instances  of  bodies  which  are  capable 
of  undergoing  ignition,  it  is  found  that  sudden  cooling 
renders  them  hard  and  brittle.  This  is  a real  inconve- 
nience in  glass,  and  also  in  steel,  when  this  metalic 
substance  is  required  to  be  soft  and  flexible.  The  in- 
conveniences are  avoided  by  cooling  them  very  gradu- 
ally, and  this  process  is  called  annealing.  Glass  vessels, 
or  other  articles,  are  carried  into  an  oven  or  apartment 
near  the  great  furnace,  called  the  leer,  where  they  are 
permitted  to  cool,  in  a greater  or  less  time,  according 
to  their  thickness  and  bulk.  The  annealing  of  steel, 
or  other  metallic  bodies,  consists  simply  in  ■ heating 
them  and  suffering  them  to  cool  again,  either  upon  the 


hearth  of  the  furnace,  or  in  any  other  situation  wheff 
the  heat  is  moderate,  or  at  least  the  temperature  is  no» 

very  cold. 

Annoto.  See  Bixa  orleana. 

ANNUAL.  ( Annuus , yearly.)  A term  applied  in 
botany  to  plants  and  roots,  which  are  produced  from 
the  seed,  grow  to  their  full  extent,  and  die  in  one  year 
or  season,  as  Papaver  somniferum , Helianthus  annuus , 
Hordeum  triticum,  &c. 

Annue'ntes.  (From  annuo,  to  nod.)  Some  mus- 
cles of  the  head  were  formerly  so  called,  because  they 
perform  the  office  of  nodding,  or  bending  the  head 
downwards. — Cowper,  &c. 

ANNULAR.  ( Annularis ; from  Annulus , a ring, 
because  it  is  ring-like,  or  the  ring  is  worn  on  it,  or  it 
surrounds  any  thing  like  a ring ; thus,  annular  bone,  &c. 

Annular  bone.  Circulus  osseus.  A ring-like  bone, 
placed  before  the  cavity  of  the  tympanum  in  the  foetus. 

Annular  cartilage.  See  Trachcca. 

ANNULA'RIS.  Annularis  digitus.  The  ring- 
finger.  The  one  between  the  little  and  middle  fingers. 

Annularis  processus.  See  Pons  varolii. 

A'NNULUS.  ( Annulus , i.  m.,  a ring.)  A ring.  In 
botany  applied  to  the  slender  membrane  surrounding 
the  stem  of  the  fungi. 

Annulus  abdominis.  The  abdominal  ring.  An 
oblong  separation  of  tendinous  fibres,  called  an  open- 
ing, in  each  groin,  through  which  the  spermatic  chord 
in  men,  and  the  round  ligament  of  the  uterus  in  wo- 
men, pass.  It  is  through  this  part  that  the  abdominal 
viscera  fall  in  that  species  of  hernia,  which  is  called 
bubonocele.  See  Obliquus  externus  abdominis. 

A'NO.  (Avo),  upwards ; in  opposition  to  Karo,  down- 
wards.) Upwards. 

ANOCATHA'RTIC.  (From  avo,  upwards,  and 
Kadaipm,  to  purge.)  Emetic,  or  that  which  purges  up- 
wards. 

ANOCHEI'LON.  (From  avo,  upwards,  and  xu\os, 
the  lip.)  The  upper  lip. 

Ano'dia.  (From  a,  neg.  and  ofios,  the  way.)  Hip- 
pocrates uses  this  word  for  inaccuracy  and  irregularity 
in  the  description  and  treatment  of  a disease. 

ANO'DYNA.  See  Anodyne. 

ANODYNE.  (Anodynus ; from  a,  priv.  and  utbuyn,  1 
pain.)  Those  medicines  are  termed  Anodynes , which 
ease  pain  and  procure  sleep.  They  are  divided  into 
three  sorts  ; paregorics,  or  such  as  assuage  pain ; hyp- 
notics, or  such  as  relieve  by  procuring  sleep ; and  nar- 
cotics, or  such  as  ease  the  patient  by  stupifying  him. 

Ano'dynum  martiale.  Ferrum  ammoniatum  pre- 
cipitated from  water  by  potassa. 

Ano'dynum  minerale.  Sal  prunella. 

ANOMALOUS.  (From  a-  priv.  and  vopos,  a law.) 
This  term  is  often  applied  to  those  diseases,  the  symp- 
toms of  which  do  not  appear  with  that  regularity 
which  is  generally  observed  in  diseases.  A disease  is 
also  said  to  be  anomalous,  when  the  symptoms  are  so 
varied  as  not  to  bring  it  under  the  description  of  any 
known  affection. 

ANO'MPHALOS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  op(J>a\os,  the 
navel.)  Anomphalus.  Without  a navel. 

ANO'NYMUS.  ( Anonymus , from  a,  priv.  and  ovo- 
pa,  name.)  Nameless;  some  eminences  of  the  brain 
are  called  columvce  anonymee ; and  it  was  formerly 
applied  to  one  of  the  cricoid  muscles. 

ANO’RCHIDES.  (From  a,  priv.  and  op%(?,  the 
testicle.)  Children  are  so  termed  which  come  into  the 
world  without  testicles.  This  is  a very  common  oc- 
currence. The  testicles  of  many  male  infants  at  the 
time  of  birth  are  within  the  abdomen.  The  time  of 
their  descent  is  very  uncertain,  and  instances  have 
occurred  where  they  have  not  reached  the  scrotum  at 
the  age  of.ten  or  fifteen. 

ANORE  XIA.  ( Anorexia , ce,  f. ; from  a,  priv.  and 
ope^ij,  appetite.)  A want  of  appetite,  without  loath- 
ing of  food.  Cullen  ranks  this  genus  of  disease  in  the 
class  Locales,  and  order  Dysorexice.  He  believes  it  to 
be  generally  symptomatic,  but  enumerates  two  species, 
viz.  tile  Anorexia  humoralis,  and  the  Anorexia  atonica. 
See  Dyspepsia. 

ANO  SMIA.  ( Anosmia , <b , f. ; from  a,  neg.  and  o$w, 
to  smell.)  A loss  of  the  sense  of  smelling.  This  genus 
of  disease  is  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the  order  J.ocales, 
and  order  Dyscesthaesice.  When  it  arises  from  a dis- 
ease of  the  Schneiderian  membrane,  it  is  termed  Anos- 
mia organica ; and  when*  from  no  manifest  cause 
Anosmia  atonica. 


ANT 


ANT 


A'NSER.  ( Anser , eris.  m. ; a goose  or  gander.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  birds. 

Anser  dome'sticcs.  The  tame  goose.  The  flesh 
of  this  bird  is  somewhat  similar  to  that  of  the  duck, 
and  requires  the  assistance  of  spirituous  and  stimu- 
lating substances,  to  enable  the  stomach  to  digest  it. 
Both  are  very  improper  for  weak  stomachs. 

ANSERI'NA.  (From  anser,  a goose;  so  called  be- 
cause geese  eat  it.)  See  Potentilla  anserina. 

ANT.  See  Formica  rufa. 

Ant,  acid  of.  See  Formic  acid. 

ANTACID.  ( Antacidus ; from  avji,  against,  and 
acidus,  acid.)  That  which  destroys  acidity.  The  ac- 
tion of  antacids  in  the  human  stomach,  is  purely  che- 
mical, as  they  merely  combine  with  the  acid  present, 
and  neutralize  it.  They  are  only  palliatives,  the  gene- 
ration of  acidity  being  to  be  prevented  by  restoring  the 
tone  of  the  stomach  and  its  vessels.  Dyspepsia  and 
diarrhoea  are  the  diseases  in  which  they  are  employed. 
The  principal  antacids  in  use  are  the  alkalies ; e.  g. 
Liquoris  potasste,  gutt.  xv.  or  from  5 to  15  gr.  of  sub- 
carbonate of  potassa,  or  soda  dissolved  in  water.  The 
solution  of  soda  called  double  soda-water,  or  that  of 
potassa  supersaturated  with  carbonic  acid,  is  more 
frequently  used,  as  being  more  pleasant.  Ammonia 
has  been  recommended  as  preferable  to  every  other 
antacid,  from  10  to  20  drops  of  the  liquor  ammoniae  in 
a cupful  of  water.  The  liquor  calcis,  or  lime  water,  is 
likewise  used  to  correct  acidity,  two  or  three  ounces 
being  taken  occasionally.  Creta  praeparata  alone,  or 
with  the  addition  of  a small  quantity  of  any  aromatic 
— chelae  cancrorum  praeparatae ; magnesia  also  and  its 
carbonate,  are  used  for  the  same  purpose. 

ANTAGONIST,  {Antagonistus,  counteracting.)  A 
term  applied  to  those  muscles  which  have  opposite 
functions.  Such  are  the  flexor  and  extensor  of  any 
limb,  the  one  of  which  contracts  it,  the  other  stretches 
it  out ; and  also  the  abductors  and  adductors.  Soli- 
tary muscles  are  those  without  any  antagonist,  as  the 
heart,  &c. 

ANTA  LGIC.  ( Antalgicus ; from  av'Ji,  against, 
and  aXyos,  pain.)  That  which  relieves  pain. 

ANTA'LKALINE.  (Antalkalinus ; from  av'Ji, 
against,  and  alkali , an  alcali.)  That  which  possesses 
the  power  of  neutralizing  alkalies.  All  the  acids  are 
of  this  class. 

ANTAPHRODISl'AC.  Antaphrodisiacus  ; from 
uv'Jl,  against,  and  AQpoSi'Jr),  Venus.  Antiveiiereal,  or 
whatever  extinguishes  amorous  desires. 

Antaphrodi'tic.  The  same. 

Antapo'dosis.  (From  av'jairodidmiju,  to  recipro- 
cate.) A vicissitude,  or  return  of  the  paroxysm  of 
fevers. — Hippocrates.  Called  by  Galen  eipidosis. 

Antarthri'tic.  See  Antiarthritic. 

Antasthma'tic.  See  Antiasthmatic. 

Antatro'phic.  See  Antiatrophic. 

Anteche'sis.  (From  av'Jexoyai , to  resist.)  A vi- 
olent stoppage  in  the  bowels,  which  resists  all  dfforts 
to  remove  it. — Hippocrates. 

Antela'bium.  (From  ante , before,  and  labium , a 
lip.)  The  extremity  of  the  lip. 

Ante'mbasis.  (From  avn , mutually,  and  epSaivto, 
to  enter.)  A coalescence,  or  union  of  bone. — Galen. 

Anteme'tic.  See  Antiemetic. 

Antenea'smus.  (From  avn,  against,  and  reivcapos, 
implacable.)  That  species  of  madness  in  which  the 
patient  endeavours  to  destroy  himself. 

Antephia'ltic.  See  Antiphialtic. 

Antepile'ptic.  See  Antiepileptic. 

ANTE'RIOR.  Before.  A term  applied  to  what 
may  be  situated  before  another  of  the  same  kind,  as  a 
muscle,  a projection,  eminence,  lobe,  artery,  &c. 

Anterior  auris.  Musculus  anterior  auris.  One 
of  the  common  muscles  of  the  ear,  situated  before  the 
external  ear.  It  arises  thin  and  membranous,  near  the 
posterior  part  of  the  zygoma , and  is  inserted  into  a 
small  eminence  on  the  back  of  the  helix,  opposite  to  the 
concha,  which  it  draws  a little  forwards  and  upwards. 

Anterior  intercostal.  Nervus  inter  costalis  an- 
terior. Splanchnic  nerve.  A branch  of  the  great  in- 
tercostal that  is  given  off  in  the  thorax. 

Anterior  mallei.  See  Laxator  tympani. 

ANTHE'LIX.  See  Antihelix. 

Anthe'lmia.  (From  avn , against,  and  e\pivs,  a 
worm  ; so  called,  because  it  was  thought  of  great  vir- 
tue in  expelling  worms.)  See  Spigclia  anthe'lmia , and 
Marilandica. 


ANTHELMINTIC.  ( Anthelminticus  ; from  avn , 

against,  and  eXpivs,  a worm.)  Whatever  procures  the 
evacuation  of  worms  from  the  stomach  and  intestines. 
The  greater  number  of  anthelmintics  act  mechani- 
cally, dislodging  the  worms,  by  the  sharpness  or  rough- 
ness of  their  particles,  or  by  their  cathartic  operation. 
Some  seem  to  have  no  other  qualities  than  those  of 
powerful  bitters  by  which  they  either  prove  noxious  to 
these  animals,  or  remove  that  debility  of  the  digestive 
organs,  by  which  the  food  is  not  properly  assimilated, 
or  the  secreted  fluids  poured  into  the  intestines  are  not 
properly  prepared  ; circumstances  from  which  it  has 
been  supposed  the  generation  of  worms  may  arise. 
The  principal  medicines  belonging  to  this  class,  are, 
mercury,  gamboge,  Geoffnea  inermis,  tanacetum,  po- 
lypodium filix  mas,  spigelia  marilandica,  artemisia 
santonica,  olea  Europsea,  stannum  pulverisatum,  ferri 
iimaturte,  and  dolichos  pruriens ; which  see  under  their 
respective  heads. 

A' N THEMIS.  ( Anthemis , midis,  foem. ; from  av- 
Oeu),  floreo  ; because  it  bears  an  abundance  of  flowers.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linncean 
system.  Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  su- 
perflua. 

2.  The  name  in  the  London  Pharmacopoeia  for  cha- 
momile. See  Anthemis  nobilis. 

Anthemis  cotula.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  called  Cotula  feeiida  ■ Chamcemelum  fatidum , in 
the  pharmacopoeias.  Mayweed.  Stinking  chamo- 
mile. This  plant,  Anthemis: — receptaculis  conicis 
paleis  setaceis , seminibus  nudis , of  Linnteus,  has  a 
very  disagreeable  smell ; the  leaves,  a strong,  acrid, 
bitterish  taste ; the  flowers,  however,  are  almost  insi- 
pid. It  is  said  to  have  been  useful  in  hysterical  affec- 
tions, but  is  very  seldom  employed. 

Anthemis  nobilis.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
Chamcemelum;  Chamcemelum  nubile;  Chamomilla  ro- 
mana;  Euanthemon  of  Galen.  Anthemis  of  the  last 
London  pharmacopoeia.  Common  chamomile.  Anthe- 
mis— foliis  pinnato-compositis  linearibus  acutis  sub- 
villosis , of  Linnaeus.  Both  the  leaves  and  flowers  of 
this  indigenous  plant  have  a strong  though  not  un- 
grateful smell,  and  a very  bitter,  nauseous  taste  ; but 
the  latter  are  the  bitterer,  and  considerably  more  aro- 
matic. They  possess  tonic  and  stomachic  qualities, 
and  are  much  employed  to  restore  tone  to  the  stomach 
and  intestines,  and  as  a pleasant  and  cheap  bitter. 
They  have  been  long  successfully  used  for  the  cure  of 
intermittents,  as  well  as  of  fevers  of  thedrregular  ner- 
vous kind,  accompanied  with  visceral  obstructions. 
The  flowers  have  beep  found  useful  in  hysterical  af- 
fections, flatulent  or  spasmodic  colics,  and  dysentery; 
but,  from  their  laxative  quality,  Dr.  Cullen  tells  us 
they  proved  hurtful  in  diarrhoeas.  A simple  infusion 
is  frequently  taken  to  excite  vomiting,  or  tor  promoting 
the  operation  of  emetics.  Externally  they  are  used  in 
the  decoctum  pro  fomento , and  are  an  ingredient  in 
the  decoctum  malvce  compositum. 

Anthemis  pyrethrom.  The  plant  from  which  we 
obtain  the  pyrethrum  of  the  pharmacopoeias ; Aste- 
rantium ; Buphthalmum  crcticum;  Beilis  montana 
putescens  acris ; Dentaria ; Herba  salivaris ; Pcs 
Alexandrinus.  Spanish  Chamomile ; pellitory  of 
Spain.  Anthemis  : — caulibus  simplicibus  unijloris 
decumbent  thus — foliis  pinnato-multifidis,  of  Linmeus. 
This  root,  though  cultivated  in  this  country,  is  gene- 
rally imported  from  Spain.  Its  taste  is  hot  and  acrid, 
its  acrimony  residing  in  a resinous  principle.  The 
ancient  Romans,  it  is  said,  employed  the  root  of  this 
plant  as  a pickle.  In  its  receiit  state,  it  is  not  so  pun- 
gent as  tfrhen  dried,  and  yet,  if  applied  to  the  skin,  it 
produces  inflammation.  Its  qualities  are  stimulant; 
but  it  is  never  used,  except  as  a masticatory,  for  re- 
lieving toothaches,  rheumatic  affections  of  the  face, 
and  paralysis  of  the  tongue,  in  which  it  affords  relief 
by  stimulating  the  excretory  ducts  of  the  salival  glands, 

ANTHERA.  (From  avOos,  a flower.) 

1.  A compound  medicine  used  by  the  ancients  ; so 
called  from  its  florid  colour. — Galen-  JEgincta. 

2.  The  male  part  of  the  fructification  of  plants : — so 
called  by  Linna:us,  by  way  of  eminence.  The  male 
genital  organ  of  plants  consists  of  three  parts,  the  fila- 
ment, anther,  and  pollen.  The  anthera  is  the  little 
head  or  extremity  which  rests  on  the  filament. 

Different  terms  are  applied  to  the  anthers  from  their 
figure: 

1.  Oblong ; as  in  TAUum  candidum. 

• 51 


ANT 


ANT 


2.  Globose ; as  in  Mereurialis  annua. 

3.  Semilunar;  as  in  Frag  aria  vesca. 

4.  Angular;  as  in  Tulip  a gesneriana. 

5.  Linear  ; as  in  the  grasses  and  Protea. 

6.  Didymous ; as  in  Digitalis  purpurea. 

7.  Arrow-shaped ; as  in  Crocus  sativus. 

8 Bifid , parted  half  way  down  in  two ; as  in  the 
grasses  and  Erica. 

9.  Shield-like , or  peltate , of  a round  shape ; as  in 
Taxus  baccata. 

10.  Dentate , with  a tooth-like  margin ; as  in  Taxus 
baccata. 

11.  Hairy  ; as  in  Lamium  album. 

12.  Bicom , with  two  divisions  like  horns;  as  in 
Arbutus  uva  ursi  and  Vaccinium  myrtillus. 

13.  Cristate , having  cartilaginous  points. 

14.  Crucial ; as  in  Mellitis. 

15.  Double  or  twin-like ; as  in  Callisia  and  Hura. 

16.  Rostrate  ; as  in  Osbeckia. 

17.  Subulate,  or  awl-shaped;  as  in  the  genus  Ro- 
ella. 

18.  Cordate  ; as  in  Cupraria. 

19.  Reniform,  kidney-shaped ; as  in  Tradescantia 
and  Ginora. 

20.  Trigonal,  or  three-cornered  ; as  in  the  Rose. 

21.  Tetragonal,  or  four-cornered,  as  in  Cannabis 
and  Dictamnus. 

From  their  situation : 

22.  Erect , with  its  base  upon  the  apex  of  the  fila- 
ment ; as  in  Tulipa  gesneriana. 

23.  Incumbent,  lying  horizontally  upon  the  filament, 
as  in  Amaryllis  formossima. 

24.  Versatile,  when  the  incumbent  anther  adheres 
so  loosely  to  the  filament,  that  the  least  agitation  of 
the  plant  puts  it  in  motion  ; as  in  Sccale  ccreale. 

25.  Lateral,  adhering  laterally  to  the  filament ; as 
in  Dianther  a. 

26.  Sessile,  the  filament  almost  wanting;  as  in 
Aristolochia  clematitis. 

27.  Free,  not  united  to  any  other  anther. 

28.  Connate,  united  together ; as  in  Viola  odorata. 
ANTHODIUM.  A species  of  calyx,  which  contains 

many  flowers  being  common  to  them  all. 

Jt  is  distinguished  from  its  structure  into, 

1.  Monophyllous,  consisting  of  one  leaflet  perfect  at 
its  base,  but  cut  at  its  limb  or  margin ; as  in  Trago- 
pogon. 

2.  Polyphyllous,  consisting  of  several  leaflets ;'  as  in 
Carduus  and  Centaurea. 

3.  Simple,  consisting  of  one  series  of  leaflets ; as  in. 
Cacalia  porophyllum. 

4.  Equal,  when  all  the  leaves  of  the  Anthodium 
simplex  are  of  the  same  length,  as  in  Ethulia. 

5.  Imbrecate  or  squamose,  as  in  Centaurea  cyanus. 

6.  Squarrose,  the  leaflets  bent  backward  at  their 
extremities. 

7.  Scabrous,  rough,  consisting  of  dry  leaflets  ; as  in 
Centaurea  glastifolia  and  jacea. 

8.  Spinous,  the  leaflets  having  thorns ; as  in  Cynaa 
scolymus  and  Centaurea  sonchifolia. 

9.  Turbinate ; as  in  Tarconanthus  camphoratus. 

10.  Globose ; as  in  Centaurea  calcitrapa. 

11.  Hemispherical,  round  below  and  flat  above ; as 
in  Anthemis  and  Chrysocoma. 

12.  Cylindrical , long  and  round ; as  with  Eupato- 
rium. 

13.  Calcyculate , the  basis  surrounded  by  another 
small  leafy  anthodium  ; as  in  Leontodon  taraxacum, 
Senecio , and  Crepis. 

ANTHOPHYLLITE.  A massive  mineral,  of  a 
brown  colour,  found  at  Konigsberg,  in  Norway. 

[This  substance  has  been  observed  only  in  amor- 
phous masses,  whose  longitudinal  fracture  is  foliated, 
or  radiated,  and  whose  cross  fracture  is  uneven.  The 
lustre  of  the  most  perfect  laminae  is  somewhat  metallic. 
Its  natural  joints,  of  which  two  are  much  more  perfect 
than  the  others,  are  parallel  to  the  faces  of  a rectan- 
gular four-sided  prism.  It  is  rather  difficult  to  break, 
and  strongly  scratches  fluate  of  lime,  but  produces 
little  or  no  effect  on  glass.  It  is  feebly  translucent  at 
the  edges,  and  its  colour  is  brown,  tinged  with  violet. 
Its  powder  is  whitish,  and  rough  to  the  touch.  Its 
specific  gravity  varies  from  3.11,  to  3.29.  Before  the 
blow-pipe  it  is  infusible.  It  contains  silex  62.66,  alu- 
mine  13.33,  magnesia  4.0,  lime  3.33,  oxide  of  iron  12.00, 
manganese  3.25,  water  1.43.  It  is  softer,  lighter,  and 
has  less  lustre,  than  Labrador  stone.— Oleav.  Min.  A.] 


ANTHOPHY'LLUS.  (From  av6os,  a flower,  and 
vXhov,  a leaf;  so  called  from  the  fragance  of  the 
owers  and  the  beauty  of  the  leaves.)  The  clove  is 
so  termed  when  it  has  been  suffered  to  grow  to  matu- 
rity.— Bauhin. 

ANTHOPHY'LLUS.  (From  avOos,  a flower,  and 
<pi\e a),  to  love.)  A florist. 

A'NTHORA.  (Quasi  antithora.  AvriQopa ; from 
avm,  against,  and  §opa,  monkshood : so  called, 
because  it  is  said  to  counteract  the  effects  of  the  thorn 
or  monkshood.)  A species  of  Wolfsbane.  See  Aco- 
nitum  anthora. 

A'nthos  flores.  The  flowers  of  the  rosmarinus 
are  so  termed  in  some  pharmacopoeias.  See  Rosma- 
rinus officinalis. 

ANTHRA'CIA.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases 
in  Good’s  Nosology.  See  JVosology. 

2.  A name  of  the  carbuncle.  See  Anthrax. 

ANTHRACITE.  Blind  coal,  Kilkenny  coal,  or 
glance  coal.  There  are  three  varieties,  conchoidal, 
slaty,  and  columnar. 

[When  pulverized  and  heated,  it  becomes  red,  and 
slowly  consumes  with  a very  light  lambent  flame, 
without  smoke,  and  when  pure  emits  no  sulphureous 
or  bituminous  odour  ; it  leaves  a variable  proportion 
of  reddish  ashes.  Slaty  glance  coal  consists  of  car- 
bon, with  from  3 to  30  per  cent,  of  earth  and  iron. 
This  mineral  occurs  in  imbedded  masses,  beds,  or 
veins,  in  primitive,  transition,  and  floetz  rocks.  It  is 
found  in  gneiss,  in  micaceous;  shistus,  in  mineral  veins, 
with  calcareous  spar,  native  silver,  mineral  pitch,  and 
red  iron  ore ; and  has  been  discovered  by  Jameson  in 
the  independent  coal  formation  in  the  Isle  of  Arran. — 
Phillips's  Min. 

The  coal  of  Rhode-Island  is  mingled  with  quartz, 
and  occasionally  with  fibrous  asbestos  ; yet  it  has  but 
little  hydrogen,  and  less  bitumen.  It  is  overlaid  by 
coarse  shale,  containing  numerous  and  strong  impres- 
sions of  ferns. 

In  Pennsylvania  there  are  two  great  coal  formations; 
one  situated  S.  E.  of  the  mountains,  and  the  other  N. 
W.  The  former  is  the  Anthracite  or  glance  coal,  ex- 
tending almost  from  Delaware  along  the  head  waters 
of  the  Lehigh  and  Schuylkill,  and  to  Wilkesbarre  on 
the  Susquehannah,  and  along  the  Juniata. — Mitchill's 
Motes  to  Phil.  Min. 

This  formation  of  Anthracite  has  been  traced  for 
ninety  or  a hundred  miles  in  the  state  of  Pennsylvania, 
and  mines  have  been  opened  in  many  places  on  the 
branches  of  the  Susquehannah,  Schuylkill,  and  Dela- 
ware rivers,  and  some  of  them  bordering  on  the  states 
of  New-Jersey  and  New-York.  Li  many  places  it  is 
near  the  surface,  and  appears  to  be  inexhaustible.  It 
i3  now  extensively  used  as  fuel,  and  its  consumption  is 
increasing.  A.] 

Anthraco'sis  octjli.  A red,  livid,  burning,  sloughy, 
very  painful  tumour,  occurring  on  the  eyelids. — JEgi- 

neta. 

ANTHRAX.  ( Anthrax , acis.  m. ; from  avdpal , a 
burning  coal.)  Anthracia;  Anthrocosia ; Anthro- 
coma;  Carbunculus ; Carbo ; Rubinus  versus  ; Codi- 
sella;  Granatrislum ; Pruna;  Persicus  ignus  of 
Avicenna.  A hard  and  circumscribed  inflammatory 
tubercle  like  a boil,  which  sometimes  forms  on  the 
cheek,  neck,  or  back,  and  in  a few  days  becomes 
highly  gangrenous.  It  then  discharges  an  extremely 
foetid  sanies  from  under  the  black  core,  which,  like  a 
burning  coal,  continues  destroying  the  surrounding 
parts  It  is  supposed  to  arise  from  a peculiar  miasma, 
is  most  common  in  warm  climates,  and  often  attends 
the  plague. 

ANTHROPOGRA'PHY.  (Anthropographia ; from 
avdmonos,  a man,  and  ypa^w,  to  write.)  Description 
of  the  structure  of  man. 

ANTHROPOLO'GY.  (Anthpopologia ; from 
avdpwiros,  a man,  and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  de- 
scription of  man. 

ANTHYPNO'TIC.  ( Anthypnoticus  ; from  av'Ji, 
against,  and  vrr vog,  sleep.)  That  which  prevents 
sleep  or  drowsiness. 

ANTH YPOCHONDRI' AC.  (Anthypocliondriacus  ; 
from  av'Ji,  against,  and  v iloxovSpia,  the  hypochondria.) 
That  which  is  adapted  to  cure  low-spiritedness  or  dis- 
orders of  the  hypochondria. 

ANTIIYSTE'RIC.  (Anthystericus ; from  av'Ji, 
against,  and  vs -epa,  the  womb.)  That  which  relievea 
the  hysteric  passion 


ANT 


A'NTI.  (Av7 t,  against.)  There  are  many  names 
compounded  with  this  word,  as  Antiasthmatic  ; Anti- 
hysteric ; Antidys enteric , &c. ; which  signify  medi- 
cines against  the  asthma,  hysterics,  dysentery,  &c. 

Antia'gra.  (From  av'Jias,  a tonsil,  and  ay  pa,  a 
prey.)  Antiagri.  A tumour  of  the  tonsils. — Ulpian , 
Roland , &c. 

ANTIARTHRI'TIC.  ( Antiarthriticus  ; from 
av 'Ji,  against,  and  apdpijis,  the  gout.)  Antiarthritic. 
Against  the  gout. 

ANTIASTHMATIC.  > Antiasthmaticus';  from 
av’Ji,  against,  and  aoOpa,  an  tsthma.)  Antasthmatic. 
Against  the  asthma. 

ANTIATROPHIC.  (Antiitrophicus  ; from  av'Ji, 
against,  and  a^podna,  an  atrophy.)  Against  an  atro- 
phy or  wasting  away. 

ANTICACHE'CTIC  {Anticachecticus ; from 
av'Ji,  against,  and  Kaxt\ia,  a cachexy.)  Medicines 
against  a cachexy,  or  bad  hal  .it  of  body. 

ANTICA'RDIUM.  (Front  av'Ji,  against,  or  oppo- 
site, and  KapSia,  the  heart. ) T1  te  hollow  at  the  bottom  of 
the  breast,  commonly  called  icrobiculus  cordis,  or  the 
pit  of  the  stomach. 

ANTICATARRHA'L.  Anticatarr kalis  ; from 
av'Ji,  against,  and  Ka'Jappu.  a catarrh.)  That  which 
relieves  a catarrh. 

ANTIC AUSO'TIC.  (Fiom  av'Ji,  against,  and 

Kavoos,  a burning  fever.)  Remedies  against  burning 
fevers.  We  read,  in  Corp.  Puarm.  of  Junken,  of  a 
syrupus  anticausoticus. 

A'nticheir.  (From  av'Ji,  against,  and  %tip,  the 
hand.)  The  thumb.— Galen. 

Anticne'mion.  (From  avn,  against,  or  opposite, 
and  Kvrjpij,  the  calf  of  the  leg.)  That  part  of  the  tibia 
which  is  bare  of  flesh,  and  opposite  the  calf  of  the  leg. 
The  shin-bone. — Oalen. 

ANTICO'LIC.  (From  avn,  against,  and  kwXiktj, 
the  colic.)  Remedies  against  the  colic. 

Antidia'stole.  (From  avn,  against,  and  Sia^eWio, 
to  distinguish.)  An  exact  and  accurate  distinction  of 
one  disease,  or  symptom,  from  another. 

ANTIDI  NIC.  (From  avn,  against,  and  Sivos,  cir- 
cumgyration.) Medicines  against  a vertigo,  or  giddi- 
ness.— Blanchard. 

ANTIDOT ARIUM.  ( Antidotarium , i.  n. ; from 
avndoros , an  antidote.)  A term  used  by  former 
writers  for  what  we  now  call  a dispensatory  ; a place 
where  antidotes  are  prescribed  and  prepared.  There 
are  antidotaries  extant  of  several  authors,  as  those  of 
JVicholaus,  Mesue , Myrepsus,  &c. 

ANTI'DOTUS.  From  avn,  against,  and  SiSwpi, 
to  give.)  1.  An  antidote. 

2.  A preservative  against  sickness. 

3.  A remedy. — Oalen. 

ANTIDYSENTE'RIC.  {Antidys enter icus ; from 
avn,  against,  and  ivcevrepia,  a flux.)  Medicines 
against  a dysentery. 

ANTIEMETIC.  {Antiemeticus ; from  avn,  against, 
and  epeio,  to  vomit.)  Antemetic.  That  which  pre- 
vents or  stops  vomiting. 

ANTIEPHIALTIC.  {Antiephialticus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  eQiaXrris,  the  nightmare.)  Antephialtic. 
Against  the  nightmare. 

ANTIEPILEPTIC  {Antiepilepticus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  eirtA^tj,  the  epilepsy.)  Antepileptic. 
Against  epilepsy. 

ANTIFEBRI  LE.  {Antifebrilis;  from  avn,  against, 
and  febris , a fever.)  A febrifuge,  a remedy  against 
fever. 

ANTIHE'CTIC.  {Antihecticus ; from  avn,  against, 
and  (ktikos,  a hectic  fever.)  A remedy  against  a hec- 
tic fever. 

Antihe'cticum  poterii.  Antimonium  diaphore- 
ticum  Joviale.  A medicine  invented  by  Poterius, 
formerly  extolled  as  effectual  in  hectic  fevers,  but 
now  disregarded.  It  is  an  oxyde  of  tin  and  chaly- 
beated  regulus  of  antimony,  in  consequence  of  their 
deflagration  with  nitre. 

ANTIHE'LIX.  ( Antihelix , lids,  m.;  from  avn, 
against,  and  eXi\,  the  helix.)  The  inner  circle  of  the 
external  ear,  so  called  from  its  opposition  to  the  outer 
circuit,  called  the  helix. 

ANTIHELMINTIC.  See  Anthelmintic. 

ANTIHYSTER'IC.  {Antihystericus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  vs -epuca,  hysterics.)  Medicines  which 
prevent  or  relieve  hysterics. 

Antile'psis.  (From  avnXapSavw,  to  take  hold  of.) 


ANT 

The  securing  of  bandages  or  ligatures  from  slipping. 

— Hippocrates. 

ANTILO  BIUM.  (From  avn,  opposite,  and  A 0605, 
the  bottom  of  the  ear.)  The  tragus  or  that  part  of 
the  ear  which  is  opposite  the  lobe. 

ANTILOI'MIC.  (Antiloimicus ; from  avn,  against, 
and  Xoipos,  the  plague.)  Remedies  or  preventives 
against  the  plague. 

ANTl'LOPUS.  The  antelope.  An  African  beast 
resembling  a deer,  the  hoofs  and  horns  of  which  were 
formerly  given  in  hysteric  and  epilectic  cases. 

ANTILY'SSUS.  (From  avn,  against,  and  A vacra* 
the  bite  of  a mad  dog.)  A medicine  or  remedy  against 
the  bite  of  a mad  dog. 

ANTIMONIA'L.  {Antimonialis ; from  antimo- 
nium, antimony.)  An  antimonial  or  composition  in 
which  antimony  is  a chief  ingredient.  A preparation 
of  antimony. 

Antimonial  powder.  See  Antimonialis  pulvis. 

Antimonia'lis  pulvis.  Antimonial  powder.  Take 
of  sulphuret.  of  antimony,  powdered,  a pound  ; harts- 
horn shavings,  two  pounds.  Mix  and  throw  them 
into  a broad  iron  pot  heated  to  a white  heat,  and  stir 
the  mixture  constantly  until  it  acquires  an  ash  colour. 
Having  taken  it  out,  reduce  it  to  powder,  and  put  it 
into  a coated  crucible,  upon  which  another  inverted 
crucible,  having  a small  hole  in  its  bottom,  is  to*  be 
luted.  Then  raise  the  fire  by  degrees  to  a white  heat, 
and  keep  it  so  for  two  hours.  Reduce  the  residuary 
mass  to  a very  fine  powder.  The  dose  is  from  five  to 
ten  grains.  It  is  in  high  esteem  as  a febrifuge,  sudo- 
rific, and  antispasmodic.  The  diseases  in  which  it  is 
mostly  exhibited  are,  most  species  of  asthenic  and 
exanthematous  fevers,  acute  rheumatism,  gout,  dis- 
eases arising  from  obstructed  perspiration,  dysuria, 
nervous  affections,  and  spasms. 

This  preparation  was  introduced  into  the  former 
London  pharmacopoeia  as  a substitute  for  a medicine 
of  extensive  celebrity,  Dr.  James’s  powder;  to  which, 
however,  the  present  form  more  nearly  assimilates  in 
its  dose,  and  it  is  more  manageable  in  its  adminis- 
tration, by  the  reduction  of  the  proportion  of  antimony 
to  one-half. 

Antimonic  acid.  See  Antimony. 

Antimonious  acid.  See  Antimony. 

Antimonii  oxydum.  Oxyde  of  Antimony.  This 
preparation  is  now  directed  to  be  made  by  dissolving 
an  ounce  of  tartarized  antimony,  and  two  drams  of 
subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  separately  in  distilled 
water,  mixing  the  solutions  and  boiling,  till  the  oxyde 
of  antimony  is  precipitated,  which  is  to  be  washed 
with  water,  and  dried.  This  must  not  be  confounded 
with  the  old  calcined  or  diaphoretic  antimony,  being 
a much  more  active  preparation.  See  Antimony. 

In  its  effects,  it  will  be  found  to  agree  pretty  much 
with  the  antimonium  tartarizatum ; but  it  is  very 
little  employed. 

Antimonii  sulphuretum  pr.ecipitatum.  Sulphur 
antimonii  pracipitatum.  Precipitated  sulphuret  of 
antimony.  This  preparation  of  antimony  appears  to 
have  rendered  that  called  kermes  mineral  nneces- 
sary.  It  is  made  thus: — Take  of  sulphuret  of  anti- 
mony, in  powder,  two  pounds ; — of  the  solution  of 
potassa,  four  pints: — of  distillial  water,  three  pints. 

Mix ; and  boil  the  mixture  over  a stow  fire  for  three 
hours,  stirring  it  well,  and  occasionally  adding  distil- 
led water,  so  that  the  same  measure  may  be  preserved. 
Strain  the  solution  quickly  through  a double  linen 
cloth,  and  while  it  is  yet  hot,  drop  in  gradually,  as 
much  sulphuric  acid  as  may  be  required  to  precipitate 
the  powder;  then  wash  away  the  sulphate  of  potassa 
by  hot  water;  dry  the  precipitated  sulphuret  of  anti- 
mony, and  reduce  it  to  powder.  In  this  process  part 
of  the  water  is  decomposed,  and  its  oxygen  unites 
partly  with  the  antimony ; the  oxyde  of  antimony,  as 
well  as  the  potassa,  combines  with  sulphur  and  hydro- 
gen, forming  hydrosulphuret  of  antimony  and  hydro- 
guretted  sulphuret  of  potassa  : if  the  solution  be  allow- 
ed to  cool,  the  former  of  these  partly  precipitates,  con- 
stituting the  kermes  mineral ; but  the  addition  of  the 
sulphuric  acid  throws  down  tne  whole  of  it  at  once, 
mixed  with  some  sulphur,  furnished  with  the  decom- 
position of  the  hydroguretted  sulphuret  of  potassa. 

As  an  alterative  and. sudorific,  it  is  in  high  estima- 
tion, and  given  in  diseases  of  the  skin  and  glands; 
and,  joined  with  calomel,  it  is  one  of  the  most  power 
ful  and  penetrating  alteratives  we  are  in  possession  of 


ANT 


ANT 


Antimonii  tartarizati  vinum.  Wine  of  tartar- 
ized  antimony.  Take  of  tartarized  antimony,  one 
pcruple;  boiling  distilled  water,  eight  fluid  ounces; 
rectified  spirit,  two  fluid  ounces.  Dissolve  the  tartar- 
ized antimony  in  the  boiling  distilled  water,  and  add 
the  spirit  to  the  filtered  liquor.  Four  fluid  drachms  of 
this  contain  one  gram  of  tartarized  antimony. 

ANTIMON1TE.  A salt  formed  by  the  combina- 
tion of  the  antimonous  acid  with  alkaline  and  other 
bases.  See  Antimony. 

ANTIMO'NIUM.  See  Antimony 

Antimonium  calcinatcm.  An  oxyde  of  antimony. 

Antimonium  diaphoreticum.  An  old  name  for 
an  oxyde  of  antimony. 

Antimonium  tartarizatum.  Tartarus  emeticus  ; 
Tartarum  emeticum ; Tartarus  antimonialus ; Tar- 
tris  antimonii  cum  potassa;  Tartarum  stibiatum. 
Tartar  emetic.  It  is  obtained  by  boiling  the  fusible 
oxyde  of  antimony  with  supertartrate  of  potassa,  the 
excess  of  tartaric  acid  dissolves  the  oxyde,  and  a triple 
salt  is  obtained  by  crystallization.  The  London  Phar- 
macopoeia directs  thus  Take  of  glass  of  antimony 
finely  legivated,  supertartrate  of  potassa  in  powder,  of 
each  a pound ; boiling  distilled  water  a gallon ; mix 
the  glass  of  antimony  and  the  supertartrate  of  potassa 
well  together,  and  then  add  them  by  degrees  to  the 
distilled  water,  which  is  to  be  kept  boiling  and  con- 
stantly stirred;  boil  the  whole  for  a quarter  of  an 
hour,  and  then  set  it  by.  Filter  it  when  cold,  and 
evaporate  the  filtered  liquor  so  that  crystals  may  form 
in  it.  A solution  of  this  salt  in  dilute  wine  is  ordered 
in  the  Pharmacopoeia.  See  Antimonii  tartarizati 
vinum. 

Tartar  emetic  is  the  most  useful  of  all  the  antimo- 
nial  preparations.  Its  action  is  not  dependent  on  the 
state  of  the  stomach,  and,  being  soluble  in'  water,  its 
dose  is  easily  managed,  while  it  also  acts  more  speed- 
ily. In  doses  of  from  one  to  three,  four,  or  five  grains, 
it  generally  acts  powerfully  as  an  emetic,  and  is  em- 
ployed whenever  we  wish  to  obtain  the  effects  which 
result  from  full  vomiting.  As  patients  are  differently 
affected  by  this  medicine,  the  safest  mode  of  exhibiting 
it  is:  Ijk.  Antimonii  tartar azati,  gr.  iii.  Aqua  distil- 
lates, 5 iv.  Misce  et  cola.  Dosis  5 ss.  omni  horse  quad- 
rante,  donee  supervenerit  vomitus. 

For  children,  emetic  tartar  is  not  so  safe  for  an 
emetic  as  ipecacuanha  powder : when  great  debility 
of  the  system  is  present,  even  a small  dose  has  been 
known  to  prove  fatal.  Sometimes  it  proves  cathartic. 
In  smaller  doses  it  excites  nausea,  and  proves  a pow- 
erful diaphoretic  and  expectorant.  As  an  emetic  it  is 
chiefly  given  in  the  beginning  of  fevers  and  febrile 
diseases ; when  great  debility  is  present,  and  in  the 
advanced  stages  of  typhoid  fever,  its  use  is  improper, 
and  even  sometimes  fatal.  As  a diaphoretic,  it  is 
given  in  small  doses,  of  from  an  eighth  to  a quarter  of 
a grain ; and  as  an  expectorant,  in  doses  still  smaller. 
Emetic  tartar,  in  small  doses,  combined  with  calomel, 
has  been  found  a powerful  yet  safe  alterative  in  ob- 
stinate eruptions  of  the  skin.  IjL.  Antimonii  tartari- 
zati, gr  iv.  Hydrargyri  submuriatis , gr.  xvi.  Con- 
fectionis  roses  gallics , q.  s.  Divide  in  pil.  xxiv. 
Capiat  i.  mane  nocteque  ex  thea  sassafras. 

In  the  form  of  powder,  or  dissolved  in  water,  it  is 
applied  by  a pencil  to  warts  and  obstinate  ulcers : it  is 
also  given  in  the  form  cf  clyster,  with  a view  to  pro- 
duce irritation  in  soporose  diseases,  apoplexy,  ileus, 
and  strangulated  hernia.  The  powder  mixed  with 
any  fluid,  and  rubbed  on  thescorbiculus  cordis,  excites 
vomiting.  Another  property  which  tartar  emetic  has, 
when  rubbed  on  the  skin,  is  that  of  producing  a crop 
of  pustules  very  like  to  the  small-pox,  and  with  this 
view  it  is  used  against  rheumatic  pains,  white,  and 
other  obstinate  swellings.  The  best  antidote  against 
the  bad  effects  of  too  large  a quantity  of  this  and  other 
antimonial  preparations,  is  a decoction  of  the  bark  of 
cinchona;  in  defect  of  which,  tea  and  other  astrin- 
gents may  be  used.  In  a larger  dose,  this  salt  is  capa- 
ble of  acting  as  a violent  poison.  The  best  antidotes 
are  demulcent  drinks,  infusions  of  bark,  tea,  and  sul- 
phuretted hydrogen  water,  which  instantly  converts 
the  energetic  salt  into  a relatively  mild  sulpliuret: 
anodynes  are  useful  afterward. 

Antimonium  vitrifactum.  Glass  of  antimony. 
An  oxyde  of  antimony,  with  a little  sulphuret. 

ANTIMONY.  ( Antimonium , i.  u.  Avu yoviov. 

The  origin  of  this  word  is  very  obscure.  The  most 
74 


received  etymology  is,  from  avm,  against,  and  yovos, 
a monk;  because  Valentine,  by  an  injudicious  ad- 
ministration of  it,  poisoned  his  brother  monks.!  Sti- 
bium. A metal  found  native,  but  very  rarely ; it  has, 
in  that  state,  a metallic  lustre,  and  is  found  in  masses 
of  different  shapes ; its  colour  is  white,  between  those 
of  tin  and  silver.  It  generally  contains  a small  por- 
tion of  arsenic.  It  is  likewise  met  with  in  the  state  of 
an  oxyde,  antimonial  ochre.  The  most  abundant  ore 
of  it  is  that  in  which  it  is  combined  with  sulphur,  the 
gray  ore  of  antimony,  or  sulphuret  of  antimony. 
The  colour  of  this  ore  is  bluish,  or  steel-gray,  of  a me- 
tallic lustre,  and  is  often  extremely  beautifully  varie- 
gated. Its  texture  is  either  compact,  foliated,  or 
striated.  The  striated  is  found  both  crystallized, 
massive,  and  disseminated : there  are  many  varieties 
of  this  ore. 

Properties  of  Antimony. — Antimony  is  a metal  of 
a grayish  white,  having  a slight  bluish  shade,  and 
very  brilliant.  Its  texture  is  lamellated,  and  exhibits 
plates  crossing  each  other  in  every  direction.  Its  sur- 
face is  covered  with  herbarisations  and  foliage.  Its 
specific  gravity  is  6.702.  It  is  sufficiently  hard  to 
scratch  all  the  soft  metals.  It  is  very  brittle,  easily 
broken,  and  pulverizable.  It  fuses  at  810°  Fahr.  It 
can  be  volatilized,  and  burns  by  a strong  heat.  When 
perfectly  fused,  and  suffered  to  cool  gradually,  it  crys- 
tallizes in  octahedra.  It  unites  with  sulphur  and 
phosphorus.  It  decomposes  water  strongly  at  a red 
heat.  It  is  soluble  in  alkaline  sulphurets.  Sulphuric 
acid,  boiled  upon  antimony,  is  feebly  decomposed 
Nitric  acid  dissolves  it  in  the  cold.  Muriatic  acid 
scarcely  acts  upon  it.  The  oxygenated  muriatic  acid 
gas  inflames  it,  and  the  liquid  acid  dissolves  it  with 
facility.  Arsenic  acid  dissolves  it  by  heat  with  diffi- 
culty. It  unites,  by  fusion,  with  gold,  and  renders  it 
pale  and  brittle.  Platina,  silver,  lead,  bismuth,  nickel, 
copper,  arsenic,  iron,  cobalt,  tin,  and  zinc,  unite  with 
antimony  by  fusion,  and  form  with  it  compounds, 
more  or  less  brittle.  Mercury  does  not  alloy  with  it 
easily  unless  very  pure.  We  are  little  acquainted 
with  the  action  of  alkalies  upon  it.  Nitrate  of  potassa 
is  decomposed  by  it.  It  fulminates  by  percussion 
with  oxygenated  muriate  of  potassa.  Antimony  forms 
three,  probably  four,  distinct  combinations  with 
oxygen : 

1.  The  protoxyde,  a blackish  gray  powder  obtained 
from  a mixture  of  powder  of  antimony  and  water  at 
the  positive  pole  of  a voltaic  circuit. 

2.  The  deutoxyde,  obtained  by  digesting  the  metal 
in  powder,  in  muriatic  acid,  and  pouring  the  solution 
in  water  of  potassa.  Wash  and  dry  the  precipitate. 
It  is  a powder  of  a dirty  white  colour  which  melts  in 
a moderate  red  heat,  and  crystallizes  as  it  cools. 

3.  The  tritoxyde , or  antimonious  acid,  which  as 
immediately  produced  by  the  combustion  of  the  metal, 
called  formerly,  from  its  fine  white  colour,  the  argen- 
tine flowers  of  antimony.  It  forms  the  salts  called 
antimonites  with  the  different  bases. 

4.  The  peroxyde,  or  antimonic  acid.  This  is  formed 
when  the  metal  in  powder  is  ignited  along  with  six 
times  its  weight  of  nitre  in  a silver  crucible.  The 
excess  of  potassa  and  nitre  being  afterward  sepa- 
rated by  hot  water,  the  antimoniate  of  potassa  is  then 
to  be  decomposed  by  muriatic  acid,  when  the  insolu- 
ble antimonic  acid  of  a straw  colour  will  be  obtained. 

Methods  of  obtaining  antimony.  1.  To  obtain  anti- 
mony, heat  32  parts  of  filings  of  iron  to  redness,  and 
project  on  them,  by  degrees,  100  parts  of  antimony; 
when  the  whole  is  in  fusion,  throw  on  it,  by  degrees, 
20  parts  of  nitrate  of  potassa,  and  after  a few  minutes 
quiet  fusion,  pour  it  into  an  iron  melting  cone,  pre 
viously  heated  and  greased. 

2.  It  may  also  be  obtained  by  melting  eight  parts  of 
the  ore  mixed  with  six  of  nitrate  of  potassa,  and  three 
of  supertartrate  of  potassa,  gradually  projected  into  a 
red-hot  crucible,  and  fused. 

To  obtain  perfectly  pure  antimony,  Margraaf  melted 
some  pounds  of  the  sulphuret  in  a luted  crucible,  and 
thus  scorified  any  metals  it  might  contain.  Of  the 
antimony  thus  purified,  which  lay  at  the  bottom,  he 
took  sixteen  ounces,  which  he  oxydized  cautiously 
first  with  a slow,  and  afterward  with  a strong  heat, 
until  it  ceased  to  smell  of  sulphur,  and  acquired  a 
grayish-white  colour.  Of  this  gray  powder  he  took  four 
ounces,  mixed  them  with  six  dracluns  of  supertartrate 
of  potassa,  and  three  of  charcoal,  and  kept  them  in 


ANT 


ANT 


fhsion  in  a well-covered  and  luted  crucible,  for  one 
nour,  and  thus  obtained  a metallic  button  that  weighed 
one  ounce,  seven  drachms,  and  twenty  grains. 

The  metal,  thus  obtained,  he  mixed  with  half  its 
weight  of  desiccated  subcarbonate  of  soda,  and  cover- 
ed the  mixture  with  the  same  quantity  of  the  subcar- 
bonate. He  then  melted  it  in  a well-covered  and 
luted  crucible,  in  a very  strong  heat,  for  half  an  hour, 
and  thus  obtained  a button  which  weighed  one  ounce, 
six  drachms,  and  seven  grains,  much  whiter  and  more 
beautiful  than  the  former.  This  he  again  treated  with 
one  and  a half  ounce  of  subcarbonate  of  soda,  and 
obtained  a button,  weighing  one  ounce,  five  drachms, 
and  six  grains.  This  button  was  still  purer  than  the 
foregoing.  Repeating  these  fusions  with  equal  weights 
of  subcarbonate  of  soda  three  times  more,  and  an 
hour  and  a half  each  time,  he  at  last  obtained  a button 
so  pure  as  to  amalgamate  with  mercury  with  ease, 
very  hard,  and  in  some  degree  malleable  ; the  scoriie 
formed  in  the  last  fusion  were  transparent,  which 
indicated  that  they  contained  no  sulphur,  and  hence  it 
is  the  obstinate  adherence  of  the  sulphur  that  renders 
the  purification  of  this  metal  so  difficult. 

“Chlorine  gas  and  antimony  combine  with  combus- 
tion, and  a bichloride  results.  This  was  formerly  pre- 
pared by  distilling  a mixture  of  two  parts  of  corrosive 
sublimate  with  one  of  antimony.  The  substance 
which  came  over  having  a fatty  consistence,  was 
called  butter  of  antimony.  It  is  frequently  crystal- 
lized in  four-sided  prisms.  It  is  fusible  and  volatile 
at  a moderate  heat;  and  is  resolved  by  water  alone 
into  the  white  oxyde  and  muriatic  acid.  Being  a 
bichloride,  it  is  eminently  corrosive,  like  the  bichlo- 
ride of  mercury,  from  which  it  is  formed.  It  consists 
of  45.7  chlorine  -f-  54-3  antimony,  according  to  Dr. 
John  Davy’s  analysis,  when  the  composition  of  the 
sulphuret  is  corrected  by  its  recent  exact  analysis  by 
Berzelius.  But  11  antimony  -f-  2 primes  chlorine 
= 9.0,  give  the  proportion  per  cent,  of  44.1  55.5 ; 

a good  coincidence,  if  we  consider  the  circuitous  pro- 
cess by  which  Dr.  Davy’s  analysis  was  performed. 
Three  parts  of  corrosive  sublimate,  and  one  of  metal- 
lic antimony,  are  the  equivalent  proportions  for 
making  butter  of  antimony. 

Iodine  and  antimony  combine  by  the  aid  of  heat 
into  a solid  iodine , of  a dark  red  colour. 

The  phosphuret  of  this  metal  is  obtained  by  fusing 
it  with  solid  phosphoric  acid.  It  is  a white  semicrys- 
talline substance.  The  sulphuret  of  antimony  exists 
abundantly  in  nature.  It  consists,  according  to  Berze- 
lius, of  100  antimony  + 37.25  sulphur.  The  propor- 
tion given  by  the  equivalent  ratio  is  100  + 36.5.  The 
only  important  alloys  of  antimony  are  those  of  lead 
and  tin ; the  former  constitutes  type-metal,  and  con- 
tains about  one-sixteenth  of  antimony;  the  latter 
alloy  i3  employed  for  making  the  plates  on  which  mu- 
sic is  engraved. 

The  salts  of  antimony  are  of  two  different  orders  ; 
in  the  first,  the  deutoxyde  acts  the  part  of  a salifiable 
base ; in  the  second,  the  tritoxide  and  peroxide  act  the 
part  of  acids,  neutralizing  the  alkaline  and  other  bases, 
to  constitute  the  antimonites  and  antimoniates. 

The  only  distinct  combination  of  the  first  order  enti- 
tled to  our  attention,  is  the  triple  salt  called  tartrate  of 
potassa  and  antimony , or  tartar  emetic,  and  which,  by 
Gay  Lussac’s  new  views,  would  be  styled  cream-tar- 
trate of  antimony.  This  constitutes  a valuable  and 
powerful  medicine,  and  therefore  the  mode  of  pre- 
paring it  should  be  correctly  and  clearly  defined.  As 
the  dull  white  deutoxyde  of  antimony  is  the  true  basis 
of  this  compound  salt,  and  as  that  oxyde  readily  passes 
by  mismanagement  into  the  tritoxide  or  antimonious 
acid,  which  is  altogether  unfit  for  the  purpose,  ade- 
quate pains  should  be  taken  to  guard  against  so  capital 
an  error.  In  the  British  pharmacopoeias,  the  glass  of 
antimony  is  now  directed  as  the  basis  of  tartar  emetic. 
More  complex  and  precarious  formulae  were  formerly 
introduced.  The  new  edition  of  the  Pharmacop£e 
Frangaise  has  given  a recipe,  which  appears,  with  a 
slight  change  of  proportions,  to  be  unexceptionable. 
Take  of  the  sulphuretted  vitreous  oxide  of  antimony, 
levigated  and  acidulous  tartrate  of  potassa,  equal 
parts.  From  a powder,  which  is  to  be  put  into  an 
earthen  or  silver  vessel,  with  a sufficient  quantity  of 
pure  water.  Boil  the  mixture  for  half  an  hour,  adding 
boiling  water  from  time  to  time ; filter  the  hot  liquor, 
and  evaporate  to  dryness  in  a porcelain  capsule  ; dis- 


solve in  boiling  water  the  result  of  the  evaporation, 
evaporate  till  the  solution  acquires  the  spec.  grav. 
1.161,  and  then  let  it  repose,  that  crystals  be  obtained, 
which,  by  this  process,  will  be  pure.  By  another 
recipe,  copied,  with  some  alteration,  from  Mr.  Phil- 
lips’s prescription,  into  the  appendix  of  the  French 
Pharmacopoeia,  a subsulphate  of  antimony  is  formed 
first  of  all,  by  digesting  two  parts  of  sulphuret  of  anti- 
mony in  a moderate  heat,  with  three  parts  of  oil  of 
vitriol.  This  insoluble  subsulphate  being  well  washed, 
is  then  digested  in  a quantity  of  boiling  water,  with  its 
own  weight  of  cream  of  tartar,  and  evaporated  at  the 
density  1.161,  after  which  it  is  filtered  hot.  On  cool- 
ing, crystals  of  the  triple  tartrate  are  obtained.  One 
might  imagine,  that  there  is  a chance  of  obtaining  by 
this  process  a mixture  of  sulphate  of  potassa,  and  per- 
haps of  a triple  sulfate  of  antimony,  along  with  the 
tartar  emetic.  Probably  this  does  not  happen,  for  it 
is  said  to  yield  crystals,  very  pure,  very  white,  and 
without  any  mixture  whatever. 

Pure  tartar  emetic  is  in  colourless  and  transparent 
tetrahedrons  or  octohedrons.  It  reddens  litmus.  Its 
taste  is  nauseous  and  caustic.  Exposed  to  the  air,  it 
effloresces  slowly.  Boiling  water  dissolves  half  its 
weight,  and  cold  water  a fifteenth  part.  Sulphuric, 
nitric,  and  muriatic  acids,  when  poured  into  a solution 
of  this  salt,  precipitate  its  cream  of  tartar;  and  soda, 
potassa,  ammonia,  or  their  carbonates,  throw  down 
its  oxyde  of  antimony.  Barytes,  strontites,  and  lime 
waters  occasion  not  only  a precipitate  of  oxyde  of  an- 
timony, like  the  alkalies,  but  also  insoluble  tartrates  of 
these  earths.  That  produced  by  the  alkaline  hydro- 
sulphurets  is  wholly  formed  of  kermes ; while  that 
caused  by  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  contains  both  kermes 
and  cream  of  tartar.  The  decoctions  of  several  varie- 
ties of  cinchona,  and  of  several  bitter  and  astringent 
plants,  equally  decompose  tartar  emetic ; and  the  pre- 
cipitate then  always  consists  of  the  oxyde  of  antimony, 
combined  with  the  vegetable  matter  and  cream  of 
tartar.  Physicians  ought,  therefore,  to  beware  of  such 
incompatible  mixtures.  When  tartar  emetic  is  ex- 
posed to  a red  heat,  it  first  blackens,  like  all  organic 
compounds,  and  afterward  leaves  a residuum  of  me- 
tallic antimony  and  subcarbonate  of  potassa.  From 
this  circumstance,  and  the  deep  brownish  red  precipi- 
tate, by  hydrosulphurets,  this  antimonial  combination 
may  readily  be  recognised.  The  precipitate  may 
further  be  dried  on  a philter,  and  ignited  with  black 
flux,  when  a globule  of  metallic  antimony  will  be  ob- 
tained. Infusion  of  galls  is  an  active  precipitant  of 
tartar  emetic. 

The  composition  of  this  salt,  according  to  M.  The- 
nard,  is  35.4  acid,  39.6  oxyde,  16.7  potassa,  and  8.2 
water.  The  presence  of  the  latter  ingredient  is  obvi- 
ous, from  the  undisputed  phenomenon  of  efflorescence. 
If  we  adopt  the  new  views  of  M.  Gay  Lussac,  this  salt 
may  be  a compound  of  a prime  equivalent  of  tartar  = 
23.825,  with  a prime  equivalent  of  deutoxide  of  anti- 
mony = 13.  On  this  hypothesis,  we  would  have  the 
following  proportions : 

2 primes  qcid,  = 16.75  45.4 

1 prime  potassa,  = 5.95  16.2 

1 prime  water,  = 1.125  3.1 

4 oxyde  of  antimony,  = 13.00  35.3 

36.825  100.0 

But  very  little  confidence  can  be  reposed  in  such 
atomical  representations. 

The  deutoxyde  seems  to  have  the  property  of  com- 
bining with  sulphur  in  various  proportions.  To  this 
species  of  compound  must  be  referred  the  liver  of  an- 
timony, glass  of  antimony,  and  crocus  metallorum  of 
the  ancient  apothecaries.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen 
forms,  with  the  deutoxide  of  antimony,  a compound 
which  possessed  at  one  time  great  celebrity  in  medi- 
cine, and  of  which  a modification  has  lately  been  in- 
troduced into  the  art  of  calico  printing.  By  dropping 
hydrosulphuret  of  potassa,  or  of  ammonia,  into  the 
cream  tartrate,  or  into  mild  muriate  of  antimony,  the 
hydrosulphuric  of  the  metallic  oxyde  precipitates  of  a 
beautiful  deep  orange  colour.  This  is  kermes  mineral. 
Cluzel’s  process  for  obtaining  a fine  kermes,  light, 
velvety,  and  of  a deep  purple-brown,  is  the  following: 
one  part  of  pulverized  sulphuret  of  antimony,  22  1-2 
parts  of  crystallized  subcarbonate  of  soda,  and  200 
parts  of  water,  are  to  be  boiled  together  in  an  iron  pot. 
Filter  the  hot  liquor  into  warm  earthen  pans,  and 

75 


ANT 


ANT 


allow  them  to  cool  very  slowly.  At  the  end  of  24  I 
hours,  the  kermes  is  deposited.  Throw  it  on  a filter, 
wash  it  with  water  which  had  been  boiled  and  then 
cooled  out  of  contact  with  air.  Dry  the  kermes  at  a 
temperature  of  85°,  and  preserve  in  corked  phials. 
Whatever  may  be  the  process  employed,  by  boiling 
the  liquor,  after  cooling  and  filtration,  on  new  sulphuret 
of  antimony,  or  upon  that  which  was  left  in  the  former 
operation,  this  new  liquid  will  deposite,  on  cooling,  a 
new  quantity  of  kermes.  Besides  the  hydrosulphuret- 
ted  oxyde  of  antimony,  there  is  formed  a sulphuretted 
hydrosulphuret  of  potassa  or  soda.  Consequently  the 
alkali  seizes  a portion  of  the  sulphur  from  the  antimo- 
nial  sulphuret,  water  is  decomposed;  and,  while  a 
a portion  of  its  hydrogen  unites  to  the  alkaline  sul- 
phuret, its  oxygen,  and  the  other  portion  of  its  hydro- 
gen, combine  with  the  sulphuretted  antimony.  It 
seems,  that  the  resulting  kermes  remains  dissolved  in 
the  sulphuretted  hydrosulphuret  of  potassa  or  soda  ; 
but  as  it  is  less  soluble  in  the  cold  than  the  hot,  it  is 
partially  precipitated  by  refrigeration.  If  we  pour  into 
the  supernatant  liquid,  after  the  kermes  is  deposited 
and  removed,  any  acid,  as  the  dilute  nitric,  sulphuric, 
or  muriatic,  we  decompose  the  sulphuretted  hydrosul- 
phuret of  potassa  or  soda.  The  alkaline  base  being 
laid  hold  of,  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  and  sulphur  to 
which  they  were  united  are  set  at  liberty  ; the  sulphur 
and  kermes  fall  together,  combine  with  it,  and  form 
an  orange-coloured  compound,  called  the  golden  sul- 
phuret of  antimony.  It  is  a hydroguretted  sulphuret 
of  antimony.  Hence,  when  it  is  digested  with  warm 
muriatic  acid,  a large  residuum  of  sulphur  is  obtained, 
amounting  sometimes  to  12  per  cent.  Kermes  is  com- 
posed, by  Thenard,  of  20.3  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  4.15 
sulphur,  72.76  oxyde  of  antimony,  2.79  water  and  loss; 
and  the  golden  sulphuret  consists  of  17.87  sulphuretted 
hydrogen,  68.3  oxyde  of  antimony,  and  12  sulphur. 

By  evaporating  the  supernatant  kermes  liquid,  and 
cooling,  crystals  form,  which  have  been  lately  em- 
ployed by  the  calico  printer  to  give  a topical  orange. 
These  crystals  are  dissolved  in  water,  and  the  solution, 
being  thickened  with  paste  or  gum,  is  applied  to  cloth 
in  the  usual  way.  When  the  cloth  is  dried,  it  is 
passed  through  a dilute  acid,  when  the  orange  precipi- 
tate is  deposited  and  fixed  on  the  vegetable  fibres. 

An  empirical  antimonial  medicine,  called  James’s 
powder,  has  been  much  used  in  this  country.  The 
inventor  called  it  his  fever  powder,  and  was  so  suc- 
cessful in  his  practice  with  it,  that  it  obtained  very 
great  reputation,  which  it  still  in  some  measure  retains. 
Probably,  the  success  of  Dr.  James  was  in  a great 
measure  owing  to  his  free  use  of  the  bark,  which  he 
always  gave  as  largely  as  the  stomach  would  bear,  as 
soon  as  he  had  completely  evacuated  the  prime  vias 
by  the  use  of  his  antimonial  preparation,  with  which  at 
first  he  used  to  combine  some  mercurial.  His  speci- 
fication, lodged  in  chancery,  is  as  follows : “ Take 
antimony,  calcine  it  with  a continued  protracted  heat, 
in  a flat,  unglazed,  earthen  vessel,  adding  to  it  from 
time  to  time  a sufficient  quantity  of  any  animal  oil 
and  salt,  well  dephlegmated , then  bml  it  in  melted 
nitre  for  a considerable  time,  and  separate  the  powder 
from  the  nitre  by  dissolving  it  in  water.”  The  real 
recipe  has  been  studiously  concealed,  and  a false  one 
published  in  its  stead.  Different  formulae  have  been 
offered  for  imitating  it.  That  of  Dr.  Pearson  furnishes 
a mere  mixture  of  an  oxyde  of  antimony,  with  phos- 
phate of  lime.  The  real  powder  of  James,  according 
to  this  chemist,  consists  of  57  oxyde  of  antimony,  with 
43  phosphate  of  lime.  It  seems  highly  probable  that 
superphosphate  of  lime  would  act  on  oxyde  of  anti- 
mony in  a way  somewhat  similar  to  cream  of  tartar, 
and  produce  a more  chemical  combination  than  what 
can  be  derived  from  a precarious  ustuiation,  and  cal- 
cination of  hartshorn  shavings  and  sulphuret  of  anti- 
mony, in  ordinary  hands.  The  antimonial  medicines 
are  powerful  deobstruents,  promoting  particularly  the 
cuticular  discharge.  The  union  of  this  metallic  oxyde 
with  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  ought  undoubtedly  to 
favour  its  medicinal  agency  in  chronic  diseases  of  the 
6kin.  The  kermes  deserves  more  credit  than  it  has 
hitherto  received  from  British  physicians. 

The  compounds,  formed  by  the  antimonious  and 
antimonic  acids  with  the  bases,  have  not  been  applied 
to  any  use.  Muriate  of  barytes  may  be  employed  as  a 
test  tor  tartar  emetic.  It  will  show,  by  a precipitate 
insoluble  in  nitric  acid,  if  sulphate  of  potassa  be  pre- 


sent. If  the  crystals  be  regularly  formed,  more  tartar 

need  not  be  suspected.” — Ure's  C/iem.  Diet. 

The  preparations  of  antimony  formerly  in  use  were 
very  many  : those  now  directed  to  be  kept  are ; — 

1.  Sulphuretum  antimonii. 

2.  Oxydurn  antimonii. 

3.  Sulphuretum  antimonii  prcecipitatum. 

4.  Antimonium  tariarizatum. 

5.  Vinum  antimonii  tartarizati. 

6.  Pulvis  antimonialis. 

ANTI' MORIS.  (From  avn , against,  and  popos, 
death,  or  disease.)  A medicine  to  prolong  life. 

ANTINEPHRI'TIC.  (Ant/nephriticus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  vc^ptn?,  a disease  of  the  kidneys.)  A 
remedy  against  disorders  of  the  kidneys. 

ANTIODONTALGIC.  ( Antiodontalgicus ; from 

avn , against,  and  ohovrahyia,  the  toothache.)  Against 
the  toothache. 

ANTIODONTA'LGICUS.  An  insect  described  by 
Germi  in  a small  work  published  at  Florence  1794,  so 
called  from  its  property  of  allaying  the  toothache.  It 
is  a kind  of  curculio  found  on  a species  of  thistle,  Car- 
duus  spinosissimus.  If  twelve  or  fifteen  of  these  in- 
sects, in  the  state  of  larva,  or  when  come  to  perfection, 
be  bruised  and  rubbed  slowly  between  the  fore-finger 
and  thumb  until  they  have  lost  their  moisture,  and  if 
the  painful  tooth,  where  it  is  hollow,  be  touched  with 
that  finger,  the  pain  ceases  sometimes  instantaneously. 
A piece  of  shamoy  leather  will  answer  the  same  pur- 
pose with  the  finger.  If  the  guins  are  inflamed,  the 
remedy  is  of  no  avail.  Other  insects  possess  the  pro- 
perty of  curing  the  toothache  ; such  as  the  Scarabeus 
ferrugineus  of  Fabricius;  the  Coccinella  septempunc- 
tata,  or  lady-bird;  the  Chrysomela  populi , and  the 
Chrysomela  sanguinolenta.  This  property  belongs  to 
several  kinds  of  t he  Coleoptera. 

ANTIPARALY'TIC.  {Antiparalyticus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  napoXvais,  the  palsy.)  Against  the 
palsy. 

ANTIPATHY.  ( Antipathia , ce.  f.  AvnitaOyi,  from 
avrnraOeu),  to  have  a natural  repugnance  or  dislike  ; 
from  avn , against,  and  raQos,  an  affection.)  1.  An 
aversion  to  particular  objects. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  some  classifi- 
cations. 

ANTIPERISTA'LTIC.  ( Antiperistalticus  ; from 
avn,  against,  and  nepi^eWu),  to  contract.)  Whatsoe- 
ver obstructs  the  peristaltic  motion  of  the  intestines. 

Antiperi'statis.  (tf’rom  avn,  against,  and  irepi^t)- 
pt,  to  press.)  A compression  on  all  sides.  Theo- 
phrastus de  igne. 

ANTIPHA'RMIC.  ( Antipharmicus ; from  avn, 

against,  and  (pappaxov , a poison.)  The  same  as  alexi- 
pharmic.  Remedies  or  preservatives  against  poison. — 

Dioscorides. 

ANTIPIILOGI'STIC.  (Antiphlogisticus ; fromav- 
n,  against,  anddXeyu),  to  burn.)  A term  applied  to  those 
medicines,  plans  of  diet,  and  other  circumstances, 
which  tend  to  oppose  inflammation,  or  which,  in  other 
words,  weaken  the  system  by  diminishing  the  activity 
of  the  vital  power. 

ANTIPHTHI  SIC.  (Antiphthisicus ; from  avn, 

against,  and  <J>6ims,  consumption.)  Against  a con- 
sumption. 

Anti’phthora.  (From  avn,  against,  and  <j>0opa, 
corruption.)  A species  of  wolfsbane  which  resists  cor- 
ruption. See  Aconitum  anthora. 

ANTIPHY'SIC.  ( Antiphysicus ; from  avn,  against, 
and  <pvaau),  to  blow.)  A carminative  or  remedy 
against  wind. 

ANTIPLET’RI'TIC.  ( Antipleuriticus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  7rXa >pms,  pleurisy.)  Against  a pleurisy. 

ANTIPODA'GRIC.  (Antipodagricus ; from  avn, 
against,  and  nobaypa,  the  gout.)  That  which  relieves 
or  removes  the  gout. 

Antipraxia.  (From  avn  against,  and  vpaaou),  to 
work.)  A contrariety  of  functions  and  temperaments 
in  divers  parts.  Contrariety  of  symptoms. 

ANTIPYRE'TIC.  (Antipyrcticus ; from  avn , 
against,  and  tt vperog,  fever.)  Against  a fever. 

Antiquartana'ria.  (From  avn,  against,  and 
quartana , a quartan  fever.)  Remedies  against  quar 
tan  agues. 

Antiqua'rticum.  The  same  as  Antiquartanaria. 
ANTIRRHI'NUM.  (A vno^tvov;  from  avn  against, 
and  f>u,  the  nose : so  called  because  it  represents  tire 
nose  of  a calf.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 


ANT 


ANT 

Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Order,  Angio- 
spermia. 

Antirrhinum  elatine.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  we  call  flue'!*-.!,  or  female  speedwell.  Ela- 
tine of  the  shops.  The  leaves  of  this  plant  have  a 
roughish  bitter  taste,  but  no  smell.  It  was  formerly 
much  used  against  scurvy  and  old  ulcerations,  but  now 
wholly  forgotten. 

Antirrhinum  linaria.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  linaria  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Osyris ; Urina 
ria ; Antirrhinum— foliis  lanceolatis  linearibus  con- 
fertis,  caule  erecto,  spicis  terminalibus  sessilibus,flo- 
ribus  imbricatis  of  Linnaeus.  Common  toad-flax.  A 
perennial  indigenous  plant,  common  in  barren  pas- 
tures, hedges,  and  the  sides  of  roads,  flowering  from 
July  to  September.  The  leaves  have  a bitterish  and 
somewhat  saline  taste,  and  when  rubbed  between  the 
fingers,  have  a faint  smell,  resembling  that  ot  elder. 
They  are  said  to  be  diuretic  and  cathartic,  and  in  both 
characters  to  act  powerfully,  especially  in  the  first ; 
hence  the  name  urinaria.  They  have  been  recom- 
mended in  dropsies  and  other  disorders  requiring  pow- 
erful evacuations.  The  linaria  has  also  been  used  as  a 
resolvent  in  jaundice,  and  such  diseases  as  were  sup- 
posed to  arise  from  visceral  obstructions.  But  the 
plant  has  been  chiefly  valued  for  its  effects  when  ex- 
ternally applied,  especially  in  hfemorrhoidal  affections, 
for  which  both  the  leaves  and  flowers  iiave  been  em- 
ployed in  various  forms  of  ointment,  fomentation,  and 
poultice.  Dr.  Wolph  first  invented  an  ointment  of 
this  plant  for  the  piles.  The  Landgrave  of  Hesse,  to 
whom  he  was  physician,  constantly  interrogated  him, 
to  discover  its  composition;  but  Wolph  obstinately 
refused,  till  the  prince  promised  to  give  him  a fat  ox 
annually  for  the  discovery:  hence,  to  the  following 
verse,  which  was  made  to  distinguish  the  linaria 
from  the  escula,  viz. 

“ Escula  lactescit,  sine  lacte  linaria  crescit .”  The 
hereditary  Marshal  of  Hesse  added, 

“ Escula  nil  nobis , sed  dat  linaria  taurum .” 

ANTISCO'LIC.  ( Antiscolicus ; from  aim,  against, 
and  a worm.)  Remedies  against  worms. 

See  Anthelmintic. 

ANTISCORBUTIC.  (Antiscorbuticus,  from  avn, 
against,  and  scorbutus , the  scurvy.)  Medicines  which 
cure  the  scurvy. 

ANTISEPTIC.  (Antis  epticus,  from  avn , against, 
and  crrjiru),  to  putrefy.)  Whatever  possesses  a power 
of  preventing  animal  substances  from  passing  into  a 
state  of  putrefaction,  and  of  obviating  putrefaction 
when  already  begun.  This  class  of  medicines  com- 
prehends four  orders : 

1.  Tonic  antiseptics;  as  cinchona,  cusparia,  cha- 
mcemelum,  &c.  which  are  suited  for  every  condition 
of  body,  and  are,  in  general,  preferable  to  other  anti- 
septics, for  those  with  relaxed  habits. 

2.  Refrigerating  antiseptics ; as  acids,  which  are 
principally  adapted  for  the  young,  vigorous,  and  ple- 
thoric. 

3.  Stimulating  antiseptics ; as  wine  and  alkohol, 
best  adapted  for  the  old  and  debilitated. 

4.  Antispasmodic  antiseptics ; as  camphor  and  asa- 
foetida,  which  are  to  be  selected  for  irritable  and  hys- 
terical habits. 

[“  The  presence  of  air,  though  not  necessary  to  pu- 
trefaction, materially  accelerates  it,  and  those  gases 
which  contain  no  oxygen,  are  very  efficient  in  check- 
ing or  altogether  preventing  the  process.  Carbonic 
acid  also  remarkably  retards  putrefaction;  and  if 
boiled  meat  be  carefully  confined  in  vessels  containing 
that  gas,  it  remains  for  a very  long  time  unchanged,  as 
seen  in  Mr.  Appert’s  method  of  preserving  meat.” 

“There  are  several  substances  which,  by  forming 
new  combinations  with  animal  matter,  retard  or  pre- 
vent putrefaction  ; such  as  chlorine,  and  many  of  the 
saline  and  metallic  compounds ; sugar,  alkohol,  volatile 
oils,  acetic  acids,  and  many  other  vegetable  substances, 
also  stand  in  the  list  of  antiputrefactives,  though  their 
mode  of  operating  is  by  no  means  understood.” — 
Webster's  Man.  of  Chem. 

The  alkaline  earths  and  salts  are  antiseptics,  and  act 
Dy  absorbing  the  acids  formed  in  the  process  of  putre- 
faction. Carbon  or  charcoal  of  wood  is  one  of  the 
most  powerful  antiseptics.  It  will  restore  tainted 
meat,  and  purify  offensive  water.  Casks  are  now 
charred  to  contain  water  on  long  sea  voyages,  and  it 
will  continue  pure  and  sweet  in  these  for  a long  time. 


Charcoal  in  powder  is  successfully  used  in  the  euro 
of  looseness  of  the  bowels,  and  it  has  been  known  to 
cure  intermittent  fevers.  A.] 

Anti'spasis.  (From  avn,  against,  and  cnatn,  to 
draw.)  A revulsion.  The  turning  the  course  of  the 
humours,  while  they  are  actually  in  motion. — Oalen. 

ANTISPASMODIC.  (Antispasmodicus ; from  avn. 
against,  and  airaapoi,  a spasm.)  Possessing  the  power 
of  allaying,  or  removing,  inordinate  motions  in  the 
system,  particularly  those  involuntary  contractions 
which  take  place  in  muscles,  naturally  subject  to  the 
command  of  the  will.  Spasm  may  arise  from  various 
causes.  One  of  the  most  frequent  is  a strong  irritation, 
continually  applied;  such  as  dentition,  or  worms.  In 
these  cases,  narcotics  prove  useful,  by  diminishing 
irritability  and  sensibility.  Sometimes  spasm  arises 
from  mere  debility;  and  the  obvious  means  of  re- 
moving this  is  by  the  use  of  tonics.  Both  narcotics 
and  tonics,  therefore,  are  occasionally  useful  as  anti- 
spasmodics,  such  as  opium,  camphor,  and  aether,  in 
the  one  class,  and  zinc,  mercury,  and  Peruvian  bark, 
in  the  other.  But  there  are,  farther,  several  other 
substances,  which  cannot  be  with  propriety  referred 
to  either  of  these  classes ; and  to  these,  the  title  of  an- 
tispasmodics  is  more  exclusively  appropriated.  The 
principal  antispasmodics,  properly  so  called,  are  mos- 
chus,  castoreum,  oleum  animale  empyreuinaticum, 
petroleum,  ammonia,  asafeetida,  sagapenum,  galba- 
num,  valeriana,  crocus,  melaleuca  leucadendron. 
The  narcotics,  used  as  antispasmodics,  are  aether, 
opium,  camphor.  The  tonics,  used  as  antispasmodics, 
are  cuprum,  zincum,  hydrargyrum,  cinchona. 

ANTI'THENAR.  (From  avn,  against,  and  Sevap, 
the  palm  of  the  hand  or  foot.)  A muscle  of  the  foot. 
See  Adductor  pollicis  pedis. 

ANTITRA'GICUS.  Antitragus.  One  of  the 
proper  muscles  of  the  ear,  the  use  of  which  is  to  turn 
up  the  tip  of  the  antitragus  a little  outwards,  and  to 
depress  the  extremity  of  the  antihelix  towards  it. 

ANTITRAGUS.  ( Antitragus , i.  m.  from  avn,  and 
rpayos,  the  tragus.)  An  eminence  of  the  outer  ear, 
opposite  to  the  tragus. 


ANTIVENE’REAL.  (From  avn,  against,  and 
venereus , venereal.)  Against  the  venereal  disease. 

ANTO'NII  SANCTI  IGNIS.  (So  called  because 
St.  Anthony  was  supposed  to  cure  it  miraculously. 
In  the  Roman  missal,  St.  Anthony  is  implored  as  being 
the  preserver  from  all  sorts  of  fire.)  St.  Anthony’s 
fire.  See  Erysipelas. 

Antofhy'llon.  (From  avn,  against,  and  (J>vXX ov 
a leaf ; so  called  because  its  leaves  are  opposite.)  The 
male  caryopliyllus. 

A NTRUM.  ( Antrum , i.  n.  a den  or  cave.)  1 A 
cavity  which  has  a small  opening  into  it. 

2.  The  cochlea  of  the  ear. 

Antrum  buccinosum.  The  cochlea  of  the  ear 

Antrum  gen.e.  See  Antrum  of  Highmore. 

Antrum  higiimorianum.  See  Antrum  of  High- 
more. 

Antrum  of  highmore.  (From  the  name  of  an 
anatomist,  who  gave  the  first  accurate  description  of 
it.)  Antrum  Highmorianum ; Antrum  genae  ; Sinus 
maxillaris  pituitarius ; Antrum  maxilla  superioris. 
Maxillary  sinus.  A large  cavity  in  the  middle  of  each 
superior  maxillary  bone,  between  the  eye  and  the  roof 
of  the  mouth,  lined  by  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
nose.  See  Maxillare  superius,  os. 

One  or  both  antra  are  liable  to  several  morbid  affec- 
tions. Sometimes  their  membranous  lining  inflames 
and  secretes  pus.  At  other  times,  in  consequence  of 
inflammation,  or  other  causes,  various  excrescences 
and  fungi  are  produced  in  them.  Their  bony  parietes 
are  occasionally  affected  with  exostosis,  or  caries. 
Extraneous  bodies  may  be  lodged  on  them,  and  it  is 
even  asserted  that  insects  may  be  generated  in  them, 
and  cause,  for  many  years,  afflicting  pains.  Abscesses 
in  the  antrum  are  by  far  the  most  common.  Violent 
blows  on  the  cheek,  inflammatory  affections  of  the 
adjacent  parts,  and  especially  of  the  pituitary  mem- 
brane lining  the  nostrils,  exposure  to  cold  and  damp 
and,  above  all  things,  bad  teeth,  may  induce  inflam- 
mation and  suppuration  in  the  antrum.  The  first 
symptom  is  a pain,  at  first  imagined  to  be  a tooth- 
ache, particularly  if  there  should  be  a carious  tooth  at 
this  part  of  the  jaw.  This  pain,  however,  extends 
more  into  the  nose  than  that  usually  does  which  arises 
from  a decayed  tooth ; it  also  affects,  more  or  less,  the 


ANU 


ANY 


eye,  the  orbit,  and  the  situation  of  the  frontal  sinuses. 
But  even  such  symptoms  are  insufficient  to  character- 
ize the  disease,  the  natuie  of  which  is  not  unequivo- 
cally evinced,  till  a much  later  period.  The  complaint 
is,  in  general,  of  much  longer  duration  than  one  en- 
tirely dependent  on  a caries  of  the  tooth,  and  its  vio- 
lence increases  more  and  more,  until  at  hast  a hard 
tumour  becomes  perceptible  below  the  cheek-bone. 
The  swelling  by  degrees  extends  over  the  whole  cheek ; 
but  it  afterward  rises  to  a point,  and  forms  a very  cir- 
cumscribed hardness,  which  may  be  felt  above  the 
back  grinders.  This  symptom  is  accompanied  by  red- 
ness, and  sometimes  by  inflammation  and  suppuration 
of  the  external  parts.  It  is  not  uncommon  also,  for 
the  outward  abscess  to  communicate  with  that  within 
the  antrum.  The  circumscribed  elevation  of  the 
tumour,  however,  does  not  occur  in  all  cases.  There 
are  instances  in  which  the  matter  makes  its  way  to- 
wards the  palate,  causing  the  bones  of  the  part  to 
swell,  and  at  length  rendering  them  carious,  unless 
timely  assistance  be  given.  There  are  other  cases, 
in  which  the  matter  escapes  between  1 he  fangs  and 
sockets  of  the  teeth.  Lastly,  there  are  other  examples, 
in  which  matter,  formed  in  the  antrum,  makes  its 
exit  at  the  nostril  of  the  same  sidt  when  the  patient 
is  lying  with  his  head  on  the  opposite  one,  in  a low 
position.  If  this  mode  of  evacuation  should  be  fre- 
quently repeated,  it  prevents  the  tumour  both  from 
pointing  externally,  and  bursting,  as  it  would  do  if  the 
purulent  matter  could  find  no  other  vent.  This  eva- 
cuation of  the  pus  from  the  nostril  is  not  very  com- 
mon. The  method  of  cure  consists  in  extracting  one 
of  the  dentes  molares  from  the  affected  side ; and  then 
perforating  through  the  socket  into  the  bony  cavity. 

A mild  injection  may  afterward  be  employed  to 
cleanse  the  sinus  occasionally. 

Antrum  maxilla.  See  Antrum  of  Highmore. 

Antrum  maxillare.  See  Antrum  of  Highmore. 

Antrum  pylori.  A concavity  of  the  stomach  ap- 
proaching the  pylorus. 

Anty'lion.  (From  Antyllus , its  inventor.)  An 
astringent  application,  recommended  by  Paulus  iEgi- 
neta. 

A'NUS.  (Anus,  i.  masc.  quasi  onus ; as  carrying 
the  burden  of  the  bowels.) 

1.  The  fundament ; the  lower  extremity  of  the  great 
intestine,  named  the  rectum,  is  so  called  ; and  its  office 
is  to  form  an  outlet  for  the  faeces.  The  anus  is  fur- 
nished wiih  muscles  which  are  peculiar  to  it,  viz.  the 
sphincter , which  forms  a broad  circular  band  of  fibres, 
and  keeps  it  habitually  closed,  and  the  levatores  ani , 
which  serve  to  dilate  and  draw  it  up  to  its  natural 
situation,  after  the  expulsion  of  the  faeces.  It  is  also 
surrounded,  as  well  as  the  whole  of  the  neighbouring 
intestine,  with  muscular  fibres,  and  a very  loose  sort 
of  cellular  substance.  Tire  anus  is  subject  to  various 
diseases,  especially  piles,  ulceration,  abscesses,  ex- 
crescences, prolapsus ; and  imperforation  in  new-born 
infants. 

2.  The  term  anus  is  also  applied  to  a small  opening 
of  the  third  ventricle  of  the  brain,  wliicn  leads  into 
the  fourth. 

[ Fissure  of  the  anus.  In  the  New- York  Medical 
and  Physical  Journal,  a very  interesting  case  of  this 
malady  is  related  by  the  patient  himself.  He  was  suc- 
cessfully operated  upon  by  Professor  Alexander  II.  Ste- 
vens, M.D.,  of  the  College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons 
of  New-York.  The  fissure  was  on  one  side,  and  the 
incision  was  made  directly  upon  it  and  through  the 
sphincter.  The  relief  from  the  most  agonizing  pain 
was  immediate  and  permanent.  We  find  a note  on  the 
subject  of  this  disease  in  the  Philadelphia  edition  of 
Cooper's  First  Lines  of  the  Practice  of  Surgery,  which 
we  quote. 

“ Baron  Boyer  has  recently  called  the  attention  of  i 
Surgeons  to  what  he  has  denominated  fissure  of  the 
anus.  Though  this  disease  w as  noticed  by  AStius,  it 
passed  unobserved  by  modern  surgeons  until  the  time 
of  Sabatier,  who  imperfectly  described  it.  Baron 
Boyer  has  met  with  many  cases  of  it,  and  it  is  now 
understood  by  all  the  surgeons  of  Paris,  w here  it  is  said 
to  be  not  uncommon.  It  has  been  generally  confounded 
with  ulcerated  piles,  blind  fistula,  or  other  diseases  of 
the  rectum.  The  symptoms  it  occasions  have  been 
considered  inexplicable  by  the  surgeon,  though  exceed- 
ingly distressing  to  the  patient.  Fissure  of  the  anus  is 
an  oblong  ulceration  of  the  extremity  of  the  rectum, 


just  where  the  mucous  membrane  joins  the  skin.  The 
ulceration  is  generally  a little  above  the  anus,  so  that 
it  is  not  easily  discovered,  unless  the  sides  of  the  rec- 
tum are  drawn  outwards,  and  the  gut  partially  everted. 
Moreover,  the  fissure  is  superficial,  and  presents 
nothing  striking  to  the  eye,  and  is,  therefore,  more 
likely  to  pass  unobserved.  The  mucous  membrane  is 
more  red  than  natural  at  the  edges  of  the  ulcerated 
portion,  which  is  entirely  absorbed;  but  there  is 
nothing  unnatural  to  be  felt  witn  the  fingers,  except 
a very  remarkable  constriction,  which  accompanies,  or 
rather  precedes,  this  disease.  It  would  appear,  that 
this  constriction  is,  indeed,  the  cause  of  the  malady, 
which  results  from  the  efforts  to  expel  hardened  feces 
through  the  contracted  passage.  The  introduction  of 
the  finger  causes  exquisite  pain.” 

“The  first  symptom  of  the  disease,  is  pain  felt  in 
evacuating  the  rectum,  greatly  aggravated  by  costive- 
ness, and  rendered  most  excruciating  by  the  hardness 
of  the  feces.  Hence  the  sufferer  is  led  to  use  injections 
and  mild  laxative  medicines.  In  the  commencement, 
the  pain  subsides  at  the  expiration  of  about  half  an 
hour ; in  its  progress,  the  paroxysms  lengthen  to  several 
hours’  duration,  and  the  patients  writhe  in  agony,  not 
knowing  what  position  to  put  themselves  in.  They 
suffer  least  in  bed,  and  remain  there  several  days  with- 
out leaving  it.  The  pain  has  accessions  without  any 
known  cause,  and  often  ceases  in  the  same  manner.” 

“ The  pain  appears  to  be  owing  to  a retention  of 
excrementitiuus  matter  near  the  extremity  of  the  rec- 
tum, the  expulsion  of  which  is  prevented  by  the  con- 
striction of  the  sphincter  ani.  The  faeces  are,  some- 
times, streaked  with  a line  of  blood,  especially  if  they 
be  hard;  but  this  is  not  always  the  case:  sometimes 
there  is  a discharge  per  anum  of  a white  liquid  matter, 
in  small  quantities ; this  is  what  would  be  expected 
from  an  inflamed  or  ulcerated  mucous  membrane,  but 
occasionally  the  ulceration  extends  to  the  muscular 
coat  of  the  intestine.” 

“ These  symptoms  vary  in  different  patients.  In 
delicate  and  nervous  women,  a variety  of  remote  symp- 
toms occur,  and  often  conceal  the  origin  of  the  primary 
complaint,  which  is  mistaken  for  cancer  of  the  rectum, 
ulceration  of  the  womb,  &c.” 

“ In  this  disease  there  are  two  distinct  occurrences: 
viz.  constriction  of  the  anus,  and  ulceration  or  fissure. 
The  former  is  the  cause  of  the  latter.  Ulceration  with- 
out constriction,  as  we  every  day  see  in  fistula  in  ano, 
does  not  occasion  so  severe  pain  as  is  felt  in  this  com- 
plaint. With  respect  to  the  treatment  of  this  com- 
plaint, if  it  be  slight,  it  will  sometimes  yield  to  laxative 
medicines  and  the  application  of  leeches  to  the  peri- 
liaeum.  But  these  means  are  not  generally  sufficient. 
It  is  then  necessary  to  divide  with  the  Knife  the  whole 
of  the  sphincter  ani,  and  that  if  possible,  immediately 
at  the  seat  of  the  fissure.  The  incision  should  be  at 
least  one-third  of  an  inch  deep,  especially  near  the 
verge  of  the  anus,  and  an  inch  long.  After  the  ope- 
ration, or  at  any  rate,  before  cicatrization  begins,  a 
tent  is  to  be  introduced  and  kept  in  the  rectum,  with- 
out which  the  operation  would  be  unsuccessful 
When  the  fissure  is  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  anus,  as 
the  sphincter  could  not  be  safely  divided  in  that  direc- 
tion, it  is  best  to  cut  towards  the  coccyx.  After  the 
cure  the  rectum  is  found  more  ample  than  before.”  A.] 

Anus,  artificial.  An  accidental  opening  in  the 
parietes  of  the  abdomen,  to  which  opening  some  part  of 
the  intestinal  canal  leads,  and  through  which  the  feces 
are  either  wholly  or  in  part  discharged.  When  stran- 
gulated hernia  occurs,  in  which  the  intestine  is  simply 
pinched,  and  this  event  is  unknown ; when  it  has  not 
been  relieved  by  the  usual  means ; or  when  the  ne- 
cessary operation  has  not  been  practised  in  time ; the 
protruded  part  becomes  gangrenous, . and  the  feces 
escape.  But  if  the  patient  should  be  at  last  operated 
upon,  his  feces  are  discharged  through  the  wound,  and 
the  intestines  are  more  easily  emptied.  In  both  cases, 
the  excrement  continues  to  be  discharged  from  the  ar- 
tificial opening.  In  this  way  an  artificial  anus  is 
formed,  through  which  the  excrement  is  evacuated 
during  life/ 

Any'pRion.  (From  a,  priv.  and  ti^wp,  water;  so 
called,  because  they  who  eat  of  it  become  thirsty.)  A 
species  of  night-shade,  according  to  Blancard. 

Anypeu'thynus.  (From  a,  neg.  and  vrcuOvvof, 
blameable.)  Hippocrates,  in  his  Precepts,  uses  this 
word  to  signify  an  accidental  event,  which  cannot  be 


APH 


A PH 

charged  on  the  physician,  and  for  which  he  is  not  ac- 
countable. 

AO  RTA.  (. Aorta , ce.  f.;  from  arjp,  air,  and  rypea), 
to  keep:  so  called  because  the  ancients  supposed  that 
only  air  was  contained  in  it.)  The  great  artery  of 
tlie  body,  which  arises  from  the  left  ventricle  of  the 
heart,  forms  a curvature  in  the  chest,  and  descends 
into  the  abdomen.  See  Artery. 

Apalachi'ne  gallis.  (From  airaXaKW,  to  repel ; 
because  it  is  supposed  to  repel  infection.)  See  Ilex 
cassine. 

APARI'NE.  (From  pivr ?,  a file ; because  its  bark  is 
rough,  and  rasps  like  a file.)  Goose-grass.  See  Ga- 
lium aparine. 

Aparthro'sis.  (From  aito  and  a pOpov,  a joint.) 
Articulation. 

APATITE.  A phosphate  of  lime  mineral,  of  a 
white  wine,  yellow,  green  and  red  colour,  found  in 
primitive  rocks  in  Cornwall  and  Devonshire. 

[There  are  several  varieties  of  the  phosphate  of 
lime.  The  first  variety  (apatite)  yielded  klaproth, 
lime  55.00,  phosphoric  acid,  45.00. 

Its  solubility  in  acids,  and  inferior  hardness,  may 
serve  to  distinguish  it  from  the  chrysoberil,  tourmaline, 
topaz,  chrysolite,  beryl,  emerald,  and  some  Varieties  of 
quartz;  all  of  which  it  more  or  less  resembles,  espe- 
cially the  emerald,  beryl , and  chrysolite.  From  car- 
bonate of  lime  it  differs  by  its  greater  hardness,  and 
want  of  effervescence  in  acids ; and  it  does  not,  like  the 
fiuate  of  lime,  when  its  powder  is  thrown  into  warm 
sulphuric  acid,  yield  a gas  capable  of  corroding  glass, 
unless  from  the  accidental  presence  of  a small  quantity 
of  that  salt.  The  variety  of  phosphate  of  lime,  called 
apatite,  usually  in  crystals,  sometimes  presents  a 
low  six-sided  prism,  the  primitive  form. 

The  same  gangure,  which  contains  the  crystals,  often 
embraces  grains  or  small  granular  masses,  having  a 
crystalline  structure,  but  nearly  or  quite  destitute  of  a 
regular  form.  The  apatite  occurs  in  veins,  or  is  dis- 
seminated in  granite,  gneiss,  or  other  primitive  rocks. 
It  is  associated  with  quartz,  feldspar,  fiuate  of  lime, 
garnets,  the  oxydes  of  iron,  tin,  &c. 

Apatite  has  been  found  in  Maryland,  Pennsylvania, 
and  New- York;  also  in  the  States  of  Connecticut  and 
Maine.— Cl.  Min.  A.] 

APE'LLA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  pellis , skin.)  Short- 
ness of  the  prepuce.  Galen  gives  this  name  to  all 
whose  prepuce,  either  through  disease,  section,  or 
otherwise,  will  not  cover  the  gians. 

APE'PSIA.  (Apcpsia,  ce  f.  Amipta;  from  a,  priv. 
and  iteittu),  to  digest.)  Indigestion.  See  Dyspepsia. 

Ape'riens  palpebrarum  rectus.  See  Levator 
palpebrce  superioris. 

APERIENT.  ( Aperiens ; from  aperio , to  open.) 

1.  That  which  gently  opens  the  bowels. 

2.  Applied  also  to  muscles,  the  office  of  which  is  to 
open  parts  ; as  the  levator  palpebrai  superioris,  which 
is  called,  in  some  anatomical  works,  aperiens  palpebne. 

Aperi'staton.  See  Aperistatus. 

Aperi'status.  (From  a , neg.  and  irepi^jpi,  to  sur- 
round.) Aperistaton.  An  epithet  used  by  Galen,  of 
an  ulcer  which  is  not  dangerous,  nor  surrounded  by 
inflammation. 

Ape'rtor  ocuLt.  See  Levator  palpcbrce  superioris. 

APETA  liUS.  (From  a , priv.  antj  petalum,  a petal.) 
Without  a petal  or  corol. 

Apetalve  plant.e.  Plants  without  petals.  The 
name  of  a division  of  plants  in  most  systems  of  botany. 

Apeutiiy'smenus.  (From  aizo  and  evdvs,  straight.) 
A name  formerly  given  to  the  intestinum  rectum,  or 
straight  gut. 

A PEX.  1.  The  extremity  of  a part ; as  the  apex  of 
the  tongue,  apex  of  the  nose,  &c. 

2.  The  extremity  of  a leaf,  apexfolii. 

3.  The  anthera  of  a flower  of  Tournefort,  Rivinus, 
and  Ray. 

Aphani'smus.  (From  afyavi^o),  to  remove  from  the 
sight.)  The  removal,  or  gradual  decay,  of  a disorder. 

APHANITE.  The  name  given  by  Haiiy  to  a rock 
apparently  homogeneous,  but  really  compound,  in 
which  amphibole  is  the  predominant  principle. 

APHA2RESIS.  (From  adiatprw,  to  remove.)  This 
term  was  formerly  much  useef  in  the  schools  of  surgery, 
to  signify  that  part  of  the  art  which  consists  in  taking 
off  any  diseased  or  preternatural  part  of  the  body. 

APHELXIA.  ( Aphelxiu , a:,  f. ; from  a<pe\KO), 

abstraho  to  separate  or  abstract.)  Revery.  A genus 


of  diseases  in  Good’s  classification  constituted  by 
absence  or  abstraction  of  mind.  See  Nosology. 

Aphefse'ma.  (From  am,  and  to  boil.)  A 

decoction. 

A'phesis.  (From  acpiypt,  to  remit.)  The  remis- 
sion or  termination  of  a disorder. 

Aphiste'sis.  (From  acpi^yixt,  to  draw  from.)  An 
abscess. 

Aphlogistic  lamp.  One  which  burns  without  flame. 

A'phodos.  (From  atro,  and  ooos , departure.)  Ex- 
crement. The  dejection  of  the  body. 

APHO'NIA.  (A<£a ma;  from  a,  priv.  and  <pwvi 7,  thu 
voice.)  A suppression  of  the  voice,  without  either 
syncope  or  coma.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Locales , and  order  Dyscinesice , of  Cullen. 

1.  When  it  takes  place  from  a tumour  of  the  fauces, 
or  about  the  glottis,  it  is  termed  aphonia  gutturalis. 

2.  When  from  a disease  of  the  trachea,  aphonia 
trachealis. 

3.  And  when  from  a paralysis,  or  want  of  nervous 
energy,  aphonia  atonica. 

APHORIA.  ( Aphoria , ce.  f. ; from  a,  negative,  and 
0£pw,  fero,  paris.)  Barrenness.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  diseases  in  Good's  new  classification.  See  Noso- 
logy. 

A'PHORISM.  ( Aphorismus ; from  a<f>opi^ w,  to  dis- 
tinguish.) A maxim,  or  principle,  comprehended  in  a 
short  sentence. 

APIIRITE.  Earth  foam.  A carbonate  of  lime 
usually  found  in  calcareous  veins  at  Gera  in  Misnia  and 
Thuringia. 

[APHRIZITE.  A variety  of  schorl,  sometimes  in 
nine-sided  prisms,  terminated  at  one  extremity  by  three 
faces,  and  at  the  other  by  six,  of  which  three  are 
larger  than  the  others,  and  stand  on  those  three  lateral 
edges  of  the  prism,  each  of  which  contain?  an  angle 
of  120°.—  Cl.  .Min.  A.J 

APHRODl'SIA.  ( From  A<b poSlttj,  Venus.)  An 
immoderate  desire  of  venery. 

APHRODISIAC.  (Aphrodisiacus ; from  atppoScoia, 
venery.)  That  which  excites  a desire  for  venery. 

Aphrodisia'sticon.  (From  pippos,  froth.)  A troch 
so  called  by  Galen,  because  it  was  given  in  dysenteries, 
where  the  stools  were  frothy. 

Aphrodi'sius  morbus.  (From  A (ppoSirri,  Venus.) 
The  venereal  disease. 

APHTHA.  ( Aphtha , ce.  f.  A <f>Qai from  airrw,  to 
inflame.)  The  thrush.  Frog,  or  sore  mouth.  Aphtha 
lactucimen  of  Sauvages.  Ulcera  serpentia  oris,  or 
spreading  ulcers  in  the  mouth,  of  Celsus.  Pustula 
oris.  Alcola.  Vesiculce  gingivarum.  Acacos.  Aphtha 
infantum.  A disease  ranked , by  Cullen  in  the  class 
Pyrexice,  order  Exanthemata.  Children  are  very  sub- 
ject to  it.  It  appears  in  small,  white  ulcers  upon  the 
tongue,  gums,  and  around  the  mouth  and  palate, 
resembling  small  particles  of  curdled  milk.  When  the 
disease  is  mild,  it  is  confined  to  these  parts  ; but  when 
it  is  violent  and  of  long  standing,  it  is  apt  to  extend 
through  the  whole  course  of  the  alimentary  canal,  from 
the  mouth  down  to  the  anus ; and  so  to  excite  severe 
purgings,  flatulencies;  and  other  disagreeable  symp- 
toms. The  disease  when  recent  and  confined  to  the 
mouth,  may  in  general  be  easily  removed ; but  when 
of  long  standing,  and  extending  down  to  the  stomach 
and  intestines,  it  very  frequently  proves  fatal. 

The  thrush  sometimes  occurs  as  a chronic  disease, 
both  in  warm  climates  and  in  tltose  northern  countries 
where  the  cold  is  combined  with  a considerable 
degree  of  moisture,  or  where  the  soil  is  of  a very 
marshy  nature.  It  may,  in  some  cases,  be  considered 
as  an  idiopathic  affection ; but  it  is  more  usually  symp- 
tomatic. It  shows  itself,  at  first,  by  an  uueasy  sen- 
sation, or  burning  heat  in  the  stomach,  which  comes  on 
by  slow  degrees,  and  increases  gradually  in  violence. 
After  some  time,  small  pimples,  of  about  the  size  of  a 
pin’s  head,  show  themselves  on  the  tip  and  edges  of  the 
tongue;  and  these,  at  length,  spread  over  the  whole 
inside  of  the  mouth,  and  occasion  such  a tenderness 
and  rawness,  that  the  patient  cannot  take  any  food  of 
a solid  nature  ; neither  can  he  receive  any  vinous  or 
spirituous  liquor  into  his  mouth,  without  great  pun- 
gency and  pain  being  excited ; little  febrile  heat  attends 
but  there  is  a dry  skin,  pale  countenance,  small  pulse, 
and  cold  extremities.  These  symptoms  will  probably 
continue  for  some  weeks,  the  general  health  being 
sometimes  better  and  sometimes  worse,  and  then  the 
patient  will  be  attacked  with  acrid  eructations  or 

7U 


API 


APO 


severe  purgings,  which  greatly  exhaust  his  strength, 
and  produce  considerable  emaciation  of  the  whole 
body.  After  a little  time,  these  symptoms  cease,  and 
he  again  enjoys  better  health  ; but,  sooner  or  later,  the 
acrid  matter  shows  itself  once  more  in  the  mouth,  with 
greater  virulence  than  before,  and  makes  frequent 
translations  to  the  stomach  and  intestines,  and  so  from 
these  to  the  mouth  again,  until,  at  last,  the  patient  is 
reduced  to  a perfect  skeleton.  Elderly  people,  and 
persons  with  a shattered  constitution,  are  most  liable 
to  its  attacks.  The  treatment  of  the  thrush  in  children 
Is  generally  to  be  begun  with  the  exhibition  of  a gentle 
emetic : then  clear  the  bowels,  if  confined,  by  rhubarb 
and  magnesia,  castor  oil,  or  other  mild  aperients ; or 
sometimes  in  gross,  torpid  habits  by  a dose  of  calomel. 
In  general  the  prevalence  of  acid  in  the  primae  vise 
appears  to  lead  to  the  complaint;  whence  antacid 
remedies  prove  beneficial  in  its  progress:  when  the 
patient  is  costive,  giving  the  preference  to  magnesia  ; 
when  relaxed,  to  chalk,  which  may  be  sometimes 
joined  with  aromatics,  the  mild  vegetable  astringents, 
or  even  a little  opium,  if  the  diarrhoea  be  urgent! 
Where  the  child  is  very  weak,  and  the  aphthae  of  a 
dark  colour,  the  decoction  of  bark  or  other  tonics  must 
be  had  recourse  to.  The  separation  of  the  sloughs  and 
healing  of  the  ulcers  may  be  promoted  by  washing  the 
mouth  occasionally  with  the  honey  of  borax,  diluted 
with  two  or  three  parts  of  rose  water ; or  where  they 
are  of  a dark  colour,  by  the  decoction  of  bark,  acidu- 
lated with  sulphuric  acid.  The  diet  should  be  light 
and  nutritious,  especially  where  there  is  much  debility. 
As  the  complaint  is  subsiding,  particular  attention  is 
required  to  obviate  the  bowels  becoming  confined.  In 
the  chronic  aphthae  affecting  grown  persons,  pretty 
much  the  same  plan  of  treatment  is  to  be  pursued : 
besides  which,  the  compound  powder  of  ipecacuanha 
and  other  ’diaphoretics,  assisted  by  the  occasional  use 
of  the  warm  bath,  wearing  flannel  next  the  skin,  par- 
ticularly in  a damp  cold  climate,  &c.  appear  to  be 
beneficial. 

APHYLLUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  0uAA ov,  a leaf.) 
Leafless.'  A term  applied  to  parts  of  plants  which  are 
so  conditioned  when  similar  parts  of  other  plants  have 
leaves.  Thus  a stem  is  said  to  be  aphyllous  when  it  is 
altogether  void  of  leaves.  Linnasus  uses  the  term 
nudus.  Examples  are  found  in  Cuscuta  Europcea , 
dodder ; Asphodelus  fistula  sus,  &c. 

Aphyllje  plant.®.  Aphyllous  plants,  or  plants 
without  leaves.  Some  plants  being  entirely  devoid  of 
leaves,  are  naturally  arranged  under  one  head,  to 
which  this  name  is  given. 

A'PIS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  insects  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  The  bee. 

Apis  mellifica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
honey-bee.  It  was  formerly  dried  and  powdered,  and 
thus  given  internally  as  a diuretic.  It  is  to  the  industry 
of  this  little  animal  that  we  are  indebted  for  honey  and 
wax.  See  Mel  and  Cera.  The  venom  of  the  bee, 
according  to  Fontana,  bears  a close  resemblance  to 
that  of  the  viper.  It  is  contained  in  a small  vesicle, 
and  has  a hot  acrid  taste  like  that  of  the  scorpion. 

A'PIUM.  ( Apium , i.  n. ; from  yitios,  Dorice , amos, 
mild : or  from  apes , bees  ; because  they  are  fond  of  it.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Pentandria  ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  herb  smallage. 
See  Apium  graveolens. 

Apium  oraveolens.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
apium  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Apium— foliolis  cau- 
linis , cunciformibus,  umbellis,  sessilibus , of  Linnams. 
Smallage  The  root,  seeds,  and  fresh  plant,  are  ape- 
rient and  carminative. 

Apium  hortlnse.  See  Apium  petroselinum. 

Apium  petroselinum  The  systematic  name  for 
the  petroselinum  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Petroselinum 
vulgare.  Apium  hortense.  Common  parsley.  Apium 
— foliis  caulinis  lincaribus , involucellis  minutis , of 
Linnaeus.  Both  the  roots  and  seeds  of  this  plant  were 
formerly  directed  by  the  London  College  for  medicinal 
use,  and  the  root  is  still  retained  in  the  Edinburgh 
Pharmacopoeia:  the  former  have  a sweetish  taste, 
accompanied  with  a slight  warmth  or  flavour,  some- 
what resembling  that  of  carrot;  the  latter  are  in  taste 
warmer  and  more  aromatic  than  any  other  part  of  the 
plant,  and  manifest  considerable  bitterness.  Tile  roots 
are  said  to  be  aperient  and  diuretic,  and  have  been 
employed  in  nephritic  pains  and  obstructions  of  urine. 


The  seeds  possess  aromatic  and  carminative  powers, 

but  are  seldom  prescribed. 

[APLOME  of  Hauy,  Brochant,  Brogniart.  This 
very  rare  mineral  has  been  observed  only  in  dodecae- 
drons  with  rhombic  faces,  marked  by  stria;,  parallel  to 
the  shorter  diagonals.  This  dodecaedron  is  supposed  to 
be  derived  from  a cube  by  one  of  the  most  simple  laws 
of  decrement : viz.  that  of  a single  range  of  particles 
parallel  to  all  the  edges  of  a cube.  Hence  its  name 
from  the  Greek  AirAooj,  simple. 

The  Aplome  gives  fire  with  steel,  and  feebly  scratches 
quartz.  Its  specific  gravity  is  3.44.  Its  fracture  in 
some  parts  is  uneven  and  nearly  dull ; While  in  others 
it  is  shining  and  slightly  conchoidal.  Its  colour  is 
usually  a deep  brown,  sometimes  yellowish  green. 
It  is  usually  opaque,  but  the  small  crystals  often  trans- 
mit an  orange-coloured  light. 

It  is  fusible  by  the  blow-pipe  into  a blackish  glass.  It 
is  composed  of  silex,  40.0,  alumine  20.0,  lime  14.5, 
oxyde  of  iron  14.5,  manganese  2.0,  ferruginous  silex 
2.0 ; = 93.00. 

It  differs  from  the  garnet  in  the  direction  of  its  striae 
and  its  inferior  specific  gravity.  It  has  been  found  in 
Siberia  and  Saxony. — Cl.  Min.  A.] 

APLONiE.  A deep  orange-brown  mineral,  mostly 
considered  to  be  a variety  of  the  garnet. 

APNEU'STIA.  (From  a , and  itvcw,  to  breathe.) 
A defect  or  difficulty  of  respiration,  such  as  happens  in 
a cold,  &c.  Foesius. 

Apniea'.  The  same. — Galen. 

Apocapni'smus.  (From  ano,  and  Kairvogi  smoke.) 
A fumigation. 

Apocalha'rsis.  (From  am,  and  Kadatpu),  to  purge.) 
An  evacuation  of  humours.  A discharge  downwards, 
and  sometimes  applied,  with  little  discrimination,  to 
vomiting. 

Apocaulize'sis.  (From  anoKavXliw,  to  break  trans- 
versely.) A transverse  fracture. — Hippocrates. 

APOCENO'SIS.  (From  am,  and  ksvoui,  to  evacu- 
ate.) 1.  A flow  or  evacuation  of  any  humour. 

2.  The  name  of  an  order  in  the  class  Locales  of 
Cullen,  which  embraces  diseases  characterized  by  a 
superabundant  flux  of  blood,  or  other  fluid,  without 
pyrexia. 

Apo'cope.  (From  am,  and  kotttu),  to  cut  from.) 
Abscission,  or  the  removal  of  a part  by  cutting  it  off-. 

Apo'crisis.  (From  am,  and  xpivw,  to  secrete 
from.)  A secretion  of  superabundant  humours. — 

Hippocrates. 

Apocru'sticon.  See  Apocmstinum. 

Apocru'stinum.  (From  airoicpovw,  to  repel.)  Apo 
crusticon.  An  astringent  or  repellent  medicine.— 
Galen. 

Apocye'sis.  (From  am,  and  kvio,  to  bring  forth.) 
Parturition,  or  the  bringing  forth  of  a child. — Galen. 

Apodacry'tica.  (From  am,  and  daicpv,  a tear) 
Medicines  which,  by  exciting  tears,  remove  super- 
fluous humours  from  the  eyes,  as  onions  &c. — Pliny. 

Apogeu'sis.  See  Ageustia 

Apogeu'stia.  See  Ageustia. 

Apoginome'sis.  (From  amyivopai,  to  be  absent.) 
The  remission  or  absence  of  a disease. — Hippocrates. 

Apoglauco'sis.  (From  am,  and  yXaricos,  sky- 
coloured  ; so  called  because  of  its  bluish  appearance.) 
See  Glaucoma. 

Apo'gonum.  (J’rom  am,  and  ytvopai,  to  beget.)  A 
living  foetus  in  the  womb. — Hippocrates. 

Apolep'sis.  (From  am,  and  A ay6avo),  to  take 
from.)  An  interception,  suppression,  or  retention  of 
urine,  or  any  other  natural  evacuation. — Hippo- 
crates. 

Apolino'sis.  (From  am,  and  A ivov,  flax.)  The 
method  of  curing  a fistula,  according  to  ASgineta,  by 
the  application  of  raw  flax. 

Apo' lysis.  (From  am,  and  Avw,  to  release.)  The 
solution  or  termination  of  a disease.  The  removal  of 
a bandage. — Erotianus. 

APOMA'GMA.  (From  am,  and  parrw,  to  cleanse 
from.)  Any  thing  used  to  cleanse  and  wipe  away 
filth  from  sores,  as  sponge,  Sec. — Hippocrates. 

Apomathe'ma.  (From  am,  neg.  and  pavdavu,  to 
learn.)  Hippocrates  expresses,  by  this  term,  a forget 
fulness  of  all  that  has  been  learnt. 

Apo'meli.  (From  ano,  from,  and  pc\i,  honey.)  A* 
oxymcl,or  decoction,  made  with  honey. 

APONEURO  SIS  (From  urn,  and  vcvpui , a nerve ; 
from  an  erroneous  supposition  of  the  ancients,  that  it 


APO 


APO 


was  formed  by  the  expansion  of  a nerve.)  A tendi- 
nous expansion.  See  Muscle. 

Al’O'NIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  ttovos , pain.)  Free- 
dom from  pain. 

Aponitro'sis.  (From  am),  and  virpov,  nitre.)  The 
sprinkling  an  ulcer  over  with  nitre. 

Apopalle'sis.  (From  anoizaWu),  to  throw  off 
hastily.)  An  abortion,  or  premature  expulsion  of  a 
foetus. — Hippocrates. 

Apopalsis.  See  Apopallesis. 

Apopeda'sis.  (From  goto , and  nydau),  to  jump 
from.)  A luxation. 

APOPHLEGMA'SrA.  (From  goto,  and  'pXeypa, 
phlegm.)  A discharge  of  phlegm  or  mucus. 

APOPHLEGMA'TIC.  (Apophlegmaticus ; from 
airo,  and  (pXcypa,  phlegm.)  Apophlegmatizantia ; 
Apophlegmatizonta.  1.  Medicines  which  excite  the 
secretion  of  mucus  from  the  mouth  and  nose. 

2.  Masticatories. 

3.  Errhines. 

Apophlegmatizantia.  See  Apophlegmatic. 

Apophlegmatizonta.  See  Apophlegmatic. 

Apophra'xis.  (From  goto,  and  (j>paaou>,  to  interrupt.) 
A suppression  of  the  menstrual  discharge. 

Apophtha'rma.  (From  got o,  and  <pQupu),  to  cor- 
rupt.) A medicine  to  procure  abortion. 

Apophthe'gma.  (From  anocpdeYYopai,  to  speak 
eloquently.)  A short  maxim,  or  axiom  ; a rule. 

Apo'phthora.  (From  airoipOeipu),  to  be  abortive.) 
An  abortion. 

Apophy'ades.  The  ramifications  of  the  veins  and 
arteries. — Hippocrates. 

Apo'phyas.  (From  goto^uw,  to  proceed  from.) 
Any  thing  which  grows  or  adheres  to  another,  as  a 
wart  to  the  finger. 

APOPHYLLITE.  Ichthyophthalmite.  Fish-eye 
stone.  A mineral  composed  of  silex,  potassa,  and 
water,  found  in  the  iron  mine  of  Utoe,  in  Sweden. 

[This  mineral  occurs  in  laminated  masses,  or  in 
regular  crystals,  having  a strong,  and  peculiar  external 
lustre,  which  is  intermediate  between  vitreous  and 
pearly.  When  exposed  to  the  fltime  of  a lamp  it  exfo- 
liates. Before  the  blow-pipe  it  melts  with  some  diffi- 
culty into  a white  enamel.  Its  fragments,  placed  in 
cold  nitric  acid,  are  gradually  converted  into  a whitish, 
flaky  substance.  Its  powder  forms  a jelly  in  nitric ’or 
muriatic  acid.  It  contains  silex  51,  lime  28,  potash  4, 
water  17.  It  is  lighter  and  harder  than  sulphate  of 
barytes,  but  much  less  hard  than  adularia,  both  of 
which  it  may  resemble. — Cl.  Min.  A.J 

APO'PHYSIS.  (From  airotivu),  to  proceed  from.) 
1.  In  anatom'y.  Appendix ; Probole  ; Ecphysis ; Pro- 
cessus ; Productio;  Projectura;  Protuber  anti  a.  A 
process,  projection,  or  protuberance  of  a bone  beyond 
a plain  surface ; as  the  nasal  apophysis  of  the  frontal 
bone,  &c. 

2.  In  botany,  this  word  is  applied  to  a fleshy  tuber- 
cle under  the  basis  of  the  capsule  or  dry  fruit  adher- 
ing to  the  frondose  mosses. 

Apople'cta  vena.  A name  formerly  applied  to  the 
internal  jugular  vein;  so  called  because  in  apoplexies 
it  appears  full  and  turgid. — Bartholin. 

APOPLE'CTIC.  (From  anonXylia,  an  apoplexy.) 
Belonging  to  an  apoplexy. 

APOPLE'XY.  ( Apoplexy , ce.  f. ; from  goto,  and 
nXyeou),  to  strike  or  knock  down;  because  persons, 
when  seized  with  this  disease,  fall  down  suddenly.) 
A sudden  abolition,  in  some  degree,  of  the  powers  of 
sense  and  motion,  the  patient  lying  in  a sleep-like 
state ; the  action  of  the  heart  remaining,  as  well  as 
the  respiration,  often  with  a stertorous  noise.  Cullen 
arranges  it  in  the  class  JYeuroses,  and  order  Cornata  : 

1.  When  it  takes  place  from  a congestion  of  blood, 
it  is  termed  Apoplexia  sanguinea. 

2.  When  there  is  an  abundance  of  serum,  as  in  per- 
sons of  a cold  phlegmatic  temperament,  Apoplexia 
serosa. 

3.  If  it  arise  from  water  in  the  ventricles  of  the 
brain,  it  is  called  Apoplexia  hydrocephalica.  See  Hy- 
drocephalus. 

4.  If  from  a wound,  Apoplexia  traumatica. 

5.  If  from  poisons,  Apoplexia  venenata. 

6.  If  from  the  action  of  suffocating  exhalations, 
Apoplexia  suffocata. 

7.  If  from  passions  of  the  mind,  Apoplexia  mentalis. 

8.  And  when  it  is  joined  with  catalepsy,  Apoplexia 
cataleptica. 

F 


Apoplexy  makes  its  attack  chiefly  at  an  advanced 
period  of  life ; and  most  usually  on  those  who  are  of  a 
corpulent  habit,  with  a short  neck,  and  large  head ; 
and  who  lead  an  inactive  life,  make  use  of  a full  diet, 
or  drink  to  excess.  The  immediate  cause  of  apoplexy, 
is  a compression  of  the  brain,  produced  either  by  an 
accumulation  of  blood  in  the  vessels  of  the  head,  and 
distending  them  to  such  a degree,  as  to  compress  the 
medullary  portion  of  the  brain;  or  by  an  effusion  of 
blood  from  the  red  vessels,  or  of  serum  from  the  exha- 
lants  ; which  fluids  are  accumulated  in  such  a quan- 
tity as  to  occasion  compression.  These  states,  of 
overdislension  and  of  effusion,  may  be  brought  on  by 
whatever  increases  the  afflux,  and  impetus  of  the 
blood  in  the  arteries  of  the  head ; such  as  violent  fits 
of  passion,  great  exertionsof  muscular  strength,  severe 
exercise,  excess  in  venery,  stooping  down  lor  any 
length  of  time,  wearing  any  thing  too  tight  about  the 
neck,  overloading  the  stomach,  long  exposure  to  ex 
cessive  cold,  or  a vertical  sun,  the  sudden  suppression 
of  any  long-accustomed  evacuation,  the  application  of 
the  fumes  of  certain  narcotic  and  metallic  substances, 
such  as  opium,  alkohol,  charcoal,  mercury,  &c.  and 
by  blows,  wounds,  and  other  external  injuries:  in 
short,  apoplexy  may  be  produced  by  whatever  deter- 
mines too  great  a flow  of  blood  to  the  brain,  or  pre 
vents  its  free  return.from  that  organ. 

The  young,  and  those  of  a full  plethoric  habit,  are 
most  liable  to  attacks  of  the  sanguineous  apoplexy ; 
and  those  of  a phlegmatic  constitution,  or  who  are 
much  advanced  in  life,  to  the  serous.  Apoplexy  is 
sometimes  preceded  by  headache^  giddiness,  dimness 
of  sight,  loss  of  memory,  faltering  of  the  tongue  in 
speaking,  numbness  in  the  extremities,  drowsiness, 
stupor,  and  nightmare,  all  denoting  an  affection 
of  the  brain;  but  it  more  usually  happens  that, 
without  much  previous  indisposition,  the  person  falls 
down  suddenly,  the  countenance  becomes  florid,  the 
face  appears  swelled  and  puffed  up,  the  vessels  of  the 
head,  particularly  of  the  neck  and  temples,  seem  tur 
gid  and  distended  with  blood  ; the  eyes  are  prominent 
and  fixed,  the  breathing  is  difficult  and  performed  with 
a snorting  noise,  and  the  pulse  is  strong  and  full. 
Although  the  whole  body  is  affected  with  the  loss  of 
sense  and  motion,  it  nevertheless  takes  place  often 
more  upon  one  side  than  the  other,  which  is  called 
hemiplegia,  and  in  this  case,  the  side  least  affected 
with  palsy  is  somewhat  convulsed. 

In  forming  an  opinion  as  to  the  event,  we  must  be 
guided  by  the  violence  of  the  symptoms.  If  the  fit  is 
of  long  duration,  the  respiration  laborious  and  sterto- 
rous, and  the  person  much  advanced  in  years,  the  dis- 
ease, in  all  probability,  will  terminate  fatally.  In 
some  cases,  it  goes  off’ entirely;  but  it  more  frequently 
leaves  a state  of  mental  imbecility  behind  it,  or  termi- 
nates in  a hemiplegia,  or  in  death.  Even  when  an 
attack  is  recovered  from,  it  most  frequently  returns 
again,  after  a short  period  of  time,  and  in  the  end 
proves  fatal.  In  dissections  of  apoplexy,  blood  is  often 
found  effused  on  the  surface  and  in  the  cavities  of  the 
brain ; and  in  other  instances,  a turgidity  and  disten- 
tion of  the  blood-vessels  are  to  be  observed.  In  some 
cases,  tumours  have  been  found  attached  to  different 
parts  of  the  substance  of  the  brain,  and  in  others,  no 
traces  of  any  real  affection  of  it  could  be  observed. 

On  an  attack  of  sanguineous  apoplexy,  all  compres- 
sion should  be  removed  from  the  neck,  the  patient  iaid 
with  his  head  a good  deal  raised,  and  a free  admission 
of  cool  air  allowed.  Then  blood  should  be  taken 
freely  from  the  arm  or  the  temporal  artery,  or  the  jugu- 
lar vein;  which  it  may  be  sometimes  necessary  to 
repeat,  if  the  symptoms  continue,  and  the  patient  is 
still  plethoric ; or  if  blood  can  less  be  spared,  cupping 
or  leeches  may  lessen  the  congestion  in  the  brain. 
The  next  object  should  be  thoroughly  to  evacuate  the 
bowels  by  some  active  purgative,  as  calomel  joined 
with  jalap,  or  with  extract  of  colocynth,  or  followed 
by  infusion  of  senna  and  some  neutral  salt,  with  a lit- 
tle tartarized  antimony  or  tincture  of  jalap  repeated 
every  two  hours  till  it  operates ; or  a draught  of  tinc- 
ture of  senna  and  wine  of  aloes,  where  the  bowels  are 
very  torpid,  may  answer  the  purpose.  Stimulant 
clysters  will  also  be  proper,  particularly  if  the  patient 
cannot  swallow,  as  common  salt  and  syrup  of  buck- 
thorn, with  a proper  quantity  of  gruel;  infusion  of 
senna  or  infusion  of  colocynth ; or  a turpentine  clyster 
in  elderly  torpid  habits.  Cold  should  then  be  applied 


APO 


APO 


assiduously  to  the  scalp,  the  hair  being  previously 
shaved,  and  a blister  to  the  back  of  the  neck;  and 
diaphoretic  medicines  may  be  exhibited,  avoiding, 
however,  those  which  contain  opium.  Sinapisms  to  the 
feet  may  also  be  useful,  particularly  if  these  are  cold. 
If  under  these  means,  the  sensibility  does  not  gradually 
return,  some  of  the  gentle  diffusible  stimulants  will  be 
proper,  as  ammonia,  mustard,  aether,  camphor,  &c. : 
and  at  this  period,  a blister  to  the  scalp  may  come  in 
aid.  By  some  practitioners  emetics  are  recommended, 
but  their  use  is  hazardous,  especially  if  sufficient 
evacuations  be  not  premised : and  the  same  may  be 
observed  of  sternutatories.  In  the  serous  form  of  the 
disease,  general  bleeding  is  inadmissible,  and  even 
the  local  abstraction  of  blood  should  be  very  spa- 
ringly made ; the  bowels  should  be  kept  open,  espe- 
cially by  aloetic  or  mercurial  formulae,  but  not  pro- 
curing profuse  discharges;  and  the  other  secretions 
maintained,  especially  by  the  use  of  the  diffusible 
stimulants  already  mentioned;  blisters  to  the  head, 
and  errhines  may  be  here  also  useful.  When  apo- 
plectic symptoms  have  been  occasioned  by  opium,  or 
other  narcotics,  the  timely  discharge  of  this  by  an 
active  emetic  will  be  the  most  important  measure ; 
but  in  a plethoric  habit,  bleeding  should  be  premised; 
subsequently  various  stimulants  may  be  employed,  as 
ammonia,  vinegar,  &c.  endeavouring  to  procure  a 
determination  to  the  surface,  and  rousing  the  patient 
from  his  torpid  state.  The  prevention  of  the  san- 
guineous form  of  the  disease  will  be  best  attempted 
by  abstemiousness,  regular  moderate  exercise,  and 
keeping  up  the  evacuations ; an  issue  or  seton  may 
also  be  useful ; but  under  urgent  circumstances,  bleed-  i 
ing,  especially  topical,  must  be  resorted  to.  In  leuco-  ‘ 
phlegmatic  habits,  a more  nutritious  diet  will  be 
proper. 

APOPNI'XIS.  (From  ammiyo),  to  suffocate.)  A 
suffocation. — Mcschion. 

APOPSOPHE'SIS.  (From  a:ro,  and  i potpEio,  to  emit 
wind.)  The  emission  of  wind  by  the  anus  or  uterus, 
according  to  Hippocrates. 

APOPSY'CHIA.  (From  uiro,  from,  and  rpvxv,  the 
mind.)  The  highest  degree  of  deliquium,  or  fainting, 
according  to  Galen. 

APO'PTOSIS.  (From  amniirru),  to  fall  down.)  A 
prolapsus,  or  falling  dovyi  of  any  part  through  relaxa- 
tion.— Erotian . 

Aporb'xis.  (From  am,  and  opty a>,  to  stretch  out.) 
A play  with  balls,  in  the  gymnastic  exercises. 

Apo'ria.  (From  a,  priv.  and  mpos,  a duct.)  Rest- 
lessness, uneasiness,  occasioned  by  the  interruption  of 
perspiration,  or  any  stoppage  of  the  natural  secretions. 

Aporrhi'psis.  (From  amp'piirru),  to  cast  off.) 
Hippocrates  used  this  word  to  signify  that  kind  of 
insanity  where  the  patient  tears  off  his  clothes,  and 
casts  them  from  him. 

Aposceparni'smus.  (From  am,  from,  and  aKeirap- 
rt$w,  to  strike  with  a hatchet.)  Deasciatio.  A spe- 
cies of  fracture,  when  part  of  a bone  is  chipped  off. — 
Gorrceus. 

Aposcha'sis.  (From  am,  and  axagu),  to  scarify.) 
Aposchasmus.  A scarification.  Venesection. — Hip- 
pocrates. , 

[APOSEPEDINE.  The  products  of  the  fermenta- 
tion of  cheese  have  been  examined  by  M.  Bracconnot, 
who  has  shown  that  the  substance,  called  by  Proust 
caseous  oxide , has  no  claim  to  such  a title,  and  pro- 
poses to  call  it  Jiposepedine,  from  am,  and  errjnedoiv, 
(result  of  putrefaction).  To  obtain  this  substance, 
the  curd  of  skim-milk,  spontaneously  coagulated,  is  to 
be  mixed  with  water,  and  exposed  in  an  open  vessel 
until  the  putrefaction  has  fully  obtained  its  height. 
By  filtration,  a liquor  is  obtained  which,  on  being  con- 
centrated by  evaporation,  yields  a product  of  a very 
foetid  odour,  owing  apparently  to  the  presence  of  an 
oily  substance.  Towards  the  close  of  the  evaporation, 
vapours  of  acetic  acid  pass  over,  and  a liquid  of  the 
consistence  of  syrup  remains;  which,  on  cooling,  con- 
cretes into  a granulated,  reddish  mass  like  honey,  and 
of  a saline  bitter  taste.  Treated  by  alkohol,  it  is  sepa- 
rated into  a soluble  and  insoluble  portion.  The  latter 
is  the  Jiposepedine  of  M.  Bracconnot ; the  former  is 
the  caseate  of  ammonia  of  Proust — Webster's  Man. 
Cfiem.  A.] 

Aposi'tia.  (From  am,  from,  and  euros,  food.) 
Apositios.  A loathing  of  food. — Galen. 

Apospa'sma.  (From  amarrao),  to  tear  off.)  A vio- 


lent, irregular  fracture  of  a tendon,  ligament,  - 

Galen. 

ArosPHACELi'sis.  (From  am,  and  <ttbaut\os,  a 
mortification.)  Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  denote 
a mortification  of  the  flesh  in  wounds,  or  fractures, 
caused  by  too  tight  a bandage. 

APO'STASIS.  (From  am,  and  impi,  to  recede 
from.)  1.  An  abscess,  or  collection  of  matter. 

2.  The  coming  away  of  a fragment  of  bone  by  frac- 
ture. 

3.  When  a distemper  passes  away  by  some  outlet, 
Hippocrates  calls  it  an  apostasis  by  excretion. 

4.  When  the  morbific  matter,  by  its  own  weight, 
falls  and  settles  on  any  part,  an  apostasis  by  settle- 
ment. 

5.  When  one  disease  turns  to  another,  an  apostasis 

by  metastasis. 

APOSTA'XIS.  (From  a-o^a^o),  to  distil  from.) 
Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  express  the  defluxion  or 
distillation  of  any  humour,  or  fluid : as  blood  from  the 
nose. 

APOSTELUS.  An  apostle.  An  ointment  and 
other  things  were  formerly  so  designated  from  some 
famous  inventer  ; as  unguentum  apostelorum,  because 
it  has  twelve  ingredients  in  it. 

APOSTEMA.  ( Apostema , atis.  n.;  from  a^t^ppi, 
to  recede.)  The  term  given  by  the  ancients  to  ab- 
scesses in  general.  See  Abscess. 

APOSTEMA'TIAI.  Those  who,  from  an  inward 
abscess,  void  pus  downward,  are  thus  called  by 
Areteeus. 

Aposteri'gma.  (From  ano^piym,  fulcio.)  Galen 
uses  this  word  to  denote  a rest  of  a diseased  part,  a 
cushion. 

Apo'strophe.  (From  am,  and  $ 'P£0&>,  to  turn 
from.)  Thus  Paulus  ASgineta  expresses  an  aversion 
for  food. 

APOSYRINGE'SIS.  (From  am,  and  <rvpiy%,  a 
fistula.)  The  degeneracy  of  a sore  into  a fistula. — 
Hippocrates. 

APOSY'RMA.  (From  am,  and  avpio,  to  rub  off.) 
An  abrasion  or  disqaamation  of  the  bones  or  skin. — 
Hippocrates. 

APOTANEUSIS.  (From  am,  and  reivio,  to  ex- 
tend.) An  extension,  or  elongation,  of  any  member 
or  substance. 

Apotelme'sis.  (From  am,  and  rihpa,  a bog.)  An 
expurgation  of  filth,  or  fjeces. 

APOTHE'CA.  (AmOrfxri ; from  anondrjpi,  to  re- 
posit.)  A shop,  or  vessel,  where  medicines  are  sold, 
or  deposited. 

APOTHECA'RY.  ( Apothecarius ; from  a~o,  and 
Tidrjpi,  pono,  to  put:  so  called  from  his  employ  being 
to  prepare,  and  keep  in  readiness,  the  various  articles 
in  the  Materia  Medica,  and  to  compound  them  for  the 
physician’s  use ; or  from  anoOriKij,  a shop.)  In  every 
European  country,  except  Great  Britain,  the  apothe- 
cary is  the  same  as  we  name  in  England  the  druggist 
and  chemist. 

APOTHERAPEI'A.  (From  am,  and  Stpancvo),  to 
cure.)  A perfect  cure,  according  to  Hippocrates. 

Apotherapeu-'tica.  (From  ano&eoamvu>,  to  heal.) 
Therapeutics.  That  part  of  medicine  which  teaches 
the  art  of  curing  disorders. 

Apothe'rmum.  (From  am,  and  3-eppy,  heat.)  An 
acrimonious  pickle,  with  mustard,  vinegar,  and  oil. — 
Galen. 

APO'THESIS.  (From  am,  and  ndrjpi,  to  replace.) 
The  reduction  of  a dislocated  bone,  according  to  Hip- 
pocrates. 

APOTHLI’MMA.  (From  am,  and  3\i6<o,  to  press 
from.)  The  dregs  or  expressed  juice  of  a plant. 

Apothrau'sis.  (From  am,  and  Spavio,  to  break.) 
The  taking  away  the  splinters  of  a broken  bone. 

Apo'tocus.  (From  am,  and  tiktio,  to  bring  forth.) 
Abortive  ; premature. — Hippocrates. 

Apotre'psis.  (From  am,  and  rpemo,  to  turn  from.) 
A resolution  or  reversion  of  a suppiu  ating  tumour. 

ApotroPje'a.  (From  amrpemo,  to  avert.)  An 
amulet,  or  charm,  to  avert  diseases. — Foesius. 

A'POZEM.  ( Apozema . From  am,  and  £cu,  to 
boil.)  A decoction. 

Apozeu'xis.  (From  am,  and  gcvywpi,  to  sepa- 
rate.) The  separation  or  removal  of  morbid  parts.— 

Hippocrates. 

Apo'zymos  (From  am,  and  <ppri,  ferment ) Fer- 
mented. 


APP 


APPARATUS.  (From  apparco , to  appear,  or  be 
ready  at  band.)  This  term  is  applied  to  the  instru- 
ments and  the  preparation  and  arrangement  of  every 
thing  necessary  in  the  performance  of  any  operation, 
medical,  surgical,  or  chemical. 

Apparatus  altus.  See  Lithotomy. 

Apparatus  major.  See  Lithotomy. 

Apparatus  minor.  See  Lithotomy. 

Apparatus,  pneumatic.  The  discovery  of  aeri- 
form fluids  has,  in  modern  chemistry,  occasioned  the 
necessity  of  some  peculiar  instruments,  by  means  of 
which  those  substances  may,  in  distillations,  solutions, 
or  other  operations,  be  caught,  collected,  and  properly 
managed.  The  proper  instruments  for  this  are  styled 
the  pneumatic  apparatus.  Any  kind  of  air  is  specifi- 
cally lighter  then  any  liquid ; and,  therefore,  if  not 
decomposed  by  it,  rises  through  it  in  bubbles.  On  this 
principle  rests  the  essential  part  of  the  apparatus, 
adapted  to  such  operations.  Its  principal  part  is  the 
pneumatic  trough,  which  is  a kind  of  reservoir  for  the 
liquid,  through  which  the  gas  is  conveyed  and  caused 
to  rise,  and  is  filled  either  with  water  or  with  quick- 
silver. Some  inches  below  its  brim  a horizontal  shelf 
is  fastened,  in  dimension  about  half  or  the  third  part 
of  the  tro  .gh,  and  in  the  water-trough  this  is  provided 
on  its  foremost  edge  with  a row  of  holes,  into  which, 
from  underneath,  short-necked  funnels  are  fixed.  The 
trough  is  filled  with  water  sufficient  to  cover  the  shelf, 
to  support  the  receivers,  which  being  previously  filled 
with  water  are  placed  invertedly,  their  open  end 
turned  down  upon  the  above-mentioned  holes,  through 
which  afterward  the  gases,  conveyed  there  and  di- 
rected by  means  of  the  funnels,  rise  in  the  form  of  air 
bubbles. 

In  some  cases  the  trough  must  be  filled  with  quick- 
silver, because  water  absorbs  or  decomposes  some 
kinds  of  air.  The  price  and  specific  gravity  of  that 
metal  make  it  necessary  to  give  to  thep  quicksilver 
trough  smaller  dimensions.  It  is  either  cut  in  marble, 
or  made  of  wood  well  joined.  The  late  Karsto  has 
contrived  an  apparatus,  which,  to  the  advantage  of 
saving  room,  adds  that  of  great  conveniency. 

To  disengage  gases,  retorts  of  glass,  either  common 
or  tubulated,  are  employed,  and  placed  in  a sand-bath, 
or  heated  by  a lamp.  Earthen,  or  coated  glass  retorts, 
are  put  in  the  naked  fire.  If  necessary,  they  are 
joined  with  a metallic  or  glass  conveying  pipe. 
When,  besides  the  aeriform,  other  fluids  are  to  be  col- 
lected, the  middle  or  intermediate  bottle  finds  ito  use  ; 
and  to  prevent,  after  cooling,  the  rising  of  the  water 
from  the  trough  into  the  disengaging  vessel,  the  tube 
of  safety  is  employed.  For  the  extrication  of  gases 
taking  place  in  solutions,  for  which  no  external  heat  is 
required,  the  bottle  called  disengaging  bottle,  or  proof, 
may  be  used.  For  receivers,  to  collect  disengaged 
airs,  various  cylinders  of  glass  are  used,  whether  gra- 
duated or  not,  either  closed  at  one  end  or  open  at  both ; 
and  in  this  last  case,  they  are  made  air-tight  by  a stop- 
per fitted  by  grinding.  Besides  these,  glass  bells  and 
eonunon  bottles  are  employed. 

To  combine  with  water,  in  a commodious  way, 
some  gases  that  are  only  gradually  and  slowly  ab- 
sorbed by  it,  the  glass  apparatus  of  Parker  is  ser- 
viceable. 

APPENDI'CULA.  A little  appendage. 

Appendicula  c®ci  vkrmiformis.  A vermicular 
process,  about  four  inches  in  length,  and  the  size  of  a 
goose-quill,  which  hangs  to  the  intestinum  caeum  of 
the  human  body. 

Apepndicul®  eppiloic®.  Appendices  coliadiposcB. 
The  small  appendices  of  the  colon  and  rectum,  winch 
are  filled  with  adipose  substance.  See  Omentum. 

APPENDICULATUS.  Applied  to  leaves,  leaf- 
stalks, &cc.  that  are  furnished  with  an  additional  organ 
for  some  particular  purpose  not  essential  to  it ; as  the 
Dionesa  muscipulu , the  leaves  of  which  terminate 
each  in  a pair  of  toothed  irritable  lobes,  that  close 
over  and  imprison  insects;  as  also  the  leaf  of  the  JVe- 
pentha  distillatorea , which  bears  a covered  pitcher  full 
of  water ; the  leaves  of  our  Utriculum , which  have 
numerous  bladders  attached  to  them  which  seem  to 
6ecrete  air  and  float  them  ; and  the  petiolus  of  the 
Dipsacus  pilosus , which  has  little  leaves  at  its  base. 

APPENDIX.  1.  An  appendage;  that  which  be- 
longeth  to  any  thing. 

2.  See  Apophysis. 

APPLE.  See  Pyrus 

F 2 


AQy 

Apple , acid  of.  See  Malic  acid. 

Apple , pine.  See  Bromelia  ananus. 

Apple , thorn.  See  Datura  stramonium. 

Appropriate  affinity.  See  Affinity  intermediate. 

APRICOT.  See  Prunus  armeniaca. 

APYRE'XIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  irvpelia,  a fever.) 
Apyrexia.  Without  fever. — The  intermission  of  fever- 
ish heat. 

APYRI'NUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  irvpyv,  nucleus , a 
kernel.)  Without  a kernel. 

Apyrin®  plant®.  Plants  without  kernels.  The 
name  in  Gerard’s  arrangement  of  a class  of  plants. 

APYROUS.  Bodies  which  sustain  the  action  of  a 
strong  heat  for  a considerable  time,  without  change  ot 
figure  or  other  properties,  have  been  called  apyrous ; 
but  the  word  is  now  very  seldom  used.  It  is  synony 
mous  with  refractory. 

A QUA.  See  Water. 

Aqu®  aeris  fixi.  Water  impregnated  with  fixed 
air.  This  is  liquid  carbonic  acid,  or  water  impreg- 
nated with  carbonic  acid.  It  sparkles  in  the  glass,  has 
a pleasant  acidulous  taste,  and  forms  an  excellent  be- 
verage. It  diminishes  thirst,  lessens  the  morbid  heat 
of  the  body,  and  acts  as  a powerful  diuretic.  It  is 
also  an  excellent  remedy  in  increasing  irritability  of 
the  stomach,  as  in  advanced  pregnancy,  and  it  is  one 
of  the  best  anti-emetics  which  we  possess. 

Aqua  aluminis  composita.  Compound  solution 
of  alum,  formerly  called  aqua  aluminosa  bateana. 
See  Liquor  aluminis  compositus. 

Aqua  ammoni®  acetat®.  See  Ammonia  acetatis 
liquor. 

Aqua  ammoni®  pur®.  See  Ammonia. 

Aqua  aneti.  See  Anethum graveolens. 

Aqua  calcis.  See  Calcis  liquor. 

Aqua  carui.  See  Carum  carui. 

Aqua  cinnamomi.  See  Laurus  cinnamomum. 

Aqua  ccelestis.  A preparation  of  copper. 

Aqua  cupri  ammoniati.  See  Cupri  ammoniati 
liquor. 

Aqua  cupri  vitriolati  composita.  This  pre- 
paration of  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia  is  used 
externally,  to  stop  haemorrhages  of  the  nose,  and  otner 
parts.  It  is  made  thus : R Cupri  vitriolati , Aluminis , 
sing.  | ss.  Aquae  purae , § iv.  Acidi  vitriolici , 3 ij. 
Boil  the  salts  in  water  until  they  are  dissolved ; then 
filter  the  liquor  and  add  the  acid. 

Aqua  distillata.  Distilled  water.  This  is  made 
by  distilling  water  in  clean  vessels,  until  about  two- 
thirds  have  come  over.  In  nature,  no  water  is  found 
perfectly  pure.  Spring  or  river  water  always  contains 
a portion  of  saline  matter,  principally  sulphate  ot 
lime ; and,  from  this  impregnation,  is  unfit  for  a num 
ber  of  pharmaceutic  preparations.  By  distillation,  a 
perfectly  pure  water  is  obtained.  The  London  Col- 
lege directs  ten  gallons  of  common  water  ; of  which, 
first  distil  four  pints,  which  are  to  be  thrown  away; 
then  distil  four  gallons.  This  distilled  water  is  to  be 
kept  in  glass  vessels.  See  Water. 

Aqua  fieniculi.  See  Anethum  fceniculum. 

Aqua  fortis.  This  name  is  given  to  a weak  and 
impure  nitric  acid,  commonly  used  in  the  arts.  It  is 
distinguished  by  the  terms  double  and  single , the  single 
being  only  half  the  strength  of  the  other.  The  artists 
who  use  these  acids  call  the  more  concentrated  acid, 
which  is  much  stronger  even  than  the  double  aqua 
fortis,  spirit  of  nitre.  This  distinction  appears  to  be 
of  some  utility,  and  is  therefore  not  improperly  re- 
tained by  chemical  writers.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Aqua  kali  pr®parati.  See  Potasses  subcarbona - 
tis  liquor. 

Aqua  kali  puri.  See  Potasses  liquor. 

Aqua  lithargyri  acetati.  See  Plumbi  acetatis 
liquor. 

Aqua  lithargyri  acetati  composita.  See 
Plumbi  acetatis  liquor  dilutus. 

Aqua  marine.  See  Beryl. 

Aqua  menth®  piperit®.  See  Mentha  piperita . 

Aqua  menth®  sativ®.  See  Mentha  viridis. 

Aqua  menth®  viridis.  See  Mentha  viridis 

Aqua  de  napoli.  See  Aquetta. 

Aqua  piment®.  See  Myrtus  pimenta. 

Aqua  pulegii.  See  Mentha  Pulegium. 

Aqua  regia.  Aqua  regalis.  This  acid,  which  is 
a mixture  of  the  nitric  and  muriatic  acids,  lately  called 
nitro-muriatic,  and  now  chlorine,  was  formerly  called 
aqua  regalis,  because  it  was,  at  that  time,  the  only 


ARx» 


AC*U 

acid  that  was  known  to  be  able  to  dissolve  gold.  See 
Chlorine. 

Aqua  ros*.  See  Rosa centifolia. 

Aqua  styptica.  A name  formerly  given  to  a com- 
bination of  powerful  astringents,  viz.  sulphate  of  cop- 
per, sulphate  of  alum,  and  sulphuric  acid.  It  has 
been  applied  topically  to  check  haemorrhage,  and, 
largely  diluted  with  water,  as  a wash  in  purulent  oph- 
thalmia. See  Aqua  cupri  vitriolati  composita. 

Aqua  Toffania.  See  Aquetta. 

Aqua  vite.  Ardent  spirit  of  the  first  distillation 
has  been  distinguished  in  commerce  by  this  name. 

Aqua  zinci  vitriolati  cum  camphora.  Aqua 
vitriolica  campkorata.  This  is  made  by  dissolving 
half  an  ounce  of  sulphate  of  zinc  in  a quart  of  boiling 
water,  adding  half  an  ounce  of  camphorated  spirit, 
and  filtering.  This,  when  properly  diluted,  is  a use- 
ful collyrium  for  inflammations  of  the  eyes,  in  which 
there  is  a weakness  of  the  parts.  Externally,  it  is  ap- 
plied by  surgeon^  to  scorbutic  and  phagedenic  ulcera- 
tions. 

Aque  distillate.  Distilled  waters.  These  are 
made  by  introducing  vegetables,  as  mint,  penny  royal, 
&c.  into  a still  with  water  ; and  drawing  off  as  much 
as  is  found  to  possess  the  properties  of  the  plants.  The 
London  College  orders  the  waters  to  be  distilled  from 
dried  herbs,  because  fresh  are  not  ready  at  all  times  of 
the  year.  Whenever  the  fresh  are  used,  the  weights 
are  to  be  increased.  But  whether  the  fresh  or  dried 
herbs  are  employed,  the  operator  may  vary  the  weight 
according  to  the  season  in  which  they  have  been  pro- 
duced and  collected.  Herbs  and  seeds,  kept  beyond  the 
space  of  a year,  are  improper  for  the  distillation  of 
waters.  To  every  gallon  of  these  waters,  five  ounces, 
by  measure,  of  proof  spirit  are  to  be  added. 

Aque  minerales.  See  Mineral  waters. 

Aqua  stillatitie  simplices.  Simple  distilled 
waters. 

Aque  stillatitie  spirituose.  Spirituous  dis- 
tilled waters,  now  called  only  spiritus ; as  spiritus 
pulegii. 

AQUEDUCT.  Aquceductus ; a canal  or  duct,  so 
named  because  it  was  supposed  to  carry  a watery 
fluid. 

Aqueduct  of  fallopius.  A canal  in  the  petrous 
portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  first  accurately  described 
by  Fallopius. 

Aquatic  nut.  See  Trapa  natans. 

Aquatics  plants.  Aquatic  plants,  or  such  as 
grow  in  or  near  water.  A natural  order  of  plants. 

AQUATIC  US.  (From  aqua,  water.)  Aquatic ; 
or  belonging  to  the  water. 

AQUEOUS.  (Aquosus,  watery.)  Of  the  nature  of, 
or  resembling  water. 

Aqueous' humour.  Humor  Aquosus.  The  very 
limpid  watery  fluid,  which  fills  both  chambers  of  the 
eye.  See  Eye. 

AQUE'TTA.  The  name  of  a liquid  poison,  made 
use  of  by  the  Roman  women,  under  the  Pontificate  of 
A lexander  VII.  It  was  prepared  and  sold  in  drops,  by 
Tophariia,  or  Toffania,  an  infamous  woman  who  re- 
sided at  Palermo,  and  afterward  at  Naples.  From  her, 
these  drops  obtained  the  name  of  Aqua  Toffania, 
Aqua  della  Toffana  ; and  also  Aqua  di  Napoli.  This 
poison  is  said  by  some  to  be  a composition  of  arsenic, 
and  by  others  of  opium  and  cantharides. 

AQUIFO'LIUM.  (From  acus,  a needle,  end  folium, 
a leaf ; so  called  on  account  of  its  prickly  leaf.)  See 
Ilex  aquifolium. 

A'QUILA.  (Arro?,  the  eagle.)  1.  A species  of  the 
extensive  genus  Falco  of  ornithologists. 

2.  Aquila,  among  the  ancients,  had  many  other  epi- 
thets joined  with  it,  as  rubra,  salutifera,  volans,  &c. 

3.  A chemical  name  formerly  used  for  sal-ammoniac, 
mercurius  prtecipitatus,  arsenic,  sulphur,  and  the  phi- 
losopher’s stone. 

Aquila  alba.  One  of  the  names  given  to  calomel 
by  the  ancients.  See  Hydrargyri  submurias. 

Aquila  alba  philosophorum.  Aqua  alba  gany- 
modis.  Sublimated  sal-ammoniac. 

Aquila  c<elestis.  A panacea,  or  cure  for  all  dis- 
eases ; a preparation  of  mercury. 

Aquila  veneris.  A preparation  of  the  an- 
cients, made  with  verdigris  and  sublimed  sal-ammo- 
niac. 

Aquila  lignum.  Eagle-wood.  It  is  generally  sold 
for  the  agallochum.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

84 


Aquile  vene.  Branches  of  the  jugular  veins, 
which  are  particularly  prominent  in  the  eagle. 

AQUILEGIA.  (From  aqua , water,  and  lego , to 
gather ; so  called  from  the  shape  of  its  leaves,  which 
retain  water.)  The  herb  columbine. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Polyandria;  Order , Pehtagynia. 

2.  The  name  in  the  pharmacopoeias,  for  the  colum- 
bine.  See  Aquilegia  vulgaris. 

Aquilegia  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
columbine.  The  seeds,  flowers,  and  the  whole  plant, 
have  been  used  medicinally,  the  first  in  exanthematous 
diseases,  the  latter  chiefly  as  an  antiscorbutic.  Though 
retained  in  several  foreign  pharmacopoeias,  their  uti- 
lity seems  to  be  not  allowed  in  this  country. 

Aquili'na.  (From  Aquila , an  eagle ; so  called  from 
the  resemblance  of  its  leaves  to  eagle’s  wings.)  The 
trivial  name  of  a species  of  pteris.  See  Pteris. 

AQUU'LA.  (Diminutive  of  aqua.)  A small  quan- 
tity of  very  fine  and  limpid  water.  This  term  is  ap- 
plied to  the  pellucid  water,  which  distends  the  capsule 
of  the  crystalline  lens,  and  the  lens  itself.  Paulus 
yEgineta  uses  it  to  denote  a tumour  consisting  of  a 
fatty  substance  under  the  skin  of  the  eyelid. 

Arabic  gum.  See  Acacice  gummi. 

A'racalan.  An  amulet. 

A'raca  mira.  (Indian.)  A shrub  growing  in  the 
Brazils,  the  roots  of  which  are  diuretic  and  antidy- 
senteric. 

ARA'CHNE.  (From  arag,  Hebrew,  to  weave ; or 
from  apaxvth  a spider.)  The  spider. 

ARACHNOID.  {Arachnoidcs ; from  apa%v^,  a 
spider,  and  eiSos,  likeness ; so  named  from  its  resem- 
blance to  a spider’s  web.)  Web-like. 

Arachnoid  membrane.  Membrana  arachnoidcs. 
1.  A thin  membrane  of  the  brain,  without  vessels  and 
nerves,  situated  between  the  dura  and  pia  mater,  and 
surrounding  the  cerebrum,  cerebellum,  medulla  ob- 
longata, and  medulla  spinalis. 

2.  The  term  is  also  applied  by  some  writers  to  the 
tunic  of  the  crystalline  lens  and  vitreous  humour  of 
the  eye. 

ARACK.  (Indian.)  An  Indian  spirituous  liquor, 
prepared  in  many  ways,  often  from  rice  ; sometimes 
from  sugar,  fermented  with  the  juice  of  .cocoa-nuts; 
frequently  from  toddy,  the  juice  of  which  flows  from 
the  cocoa-nut  tree  by  incision,  and  from  other  sub- 
stances. 

A'rados.  (From  apaSew,  to  be  turbulent.)  Hippo- 
crates uses  this  term*  to  signify  a commotion  in  thf 
stomach,  occasioned  by  the  fermentation  of  its  contents 

Areotica.  (From  apaiow , to  rarefy.)  Things 
which  rarefy  the  fluids  of  the  body. 

ARA'LIA.  (From  ara,  a bank  in  the  sea  ; so  called 
because  it  grows  upon  the  banks  near  the  sea.)  The 
name  of  a ’genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Pentagynia.  The  berry- 
bearing angelica.  Of  the  several  species  of  this  tree, 
the  roots  of  the  nudicaulis,  or  naked-stalked,  were 
brought  over  from  North  America,  where  it  grows,  and 
sold  here  for  sarsaparilla. 

Ara'nea.  (From  apaio,  to  knit  together.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  insects. 

2.  The  spider. 

ARA'NTIUS,  Ju'lius  Caesar,  a celebrated  anato- 
mist and  physician,  born  at  Bologna,  about  the  year 
1530.  After  studying  under  Vesalius,  and  others,  he 
graduated  and  became  professor  there,  and  died  in 
1589.  In  his  first  work,  “ On  the  Human  Foetus,”  he 
described  the  foramen  ovale,  and  ductus  arteriosus, 
and  corrected  several  errors  in  the  anatomy  of  the 
gravid  uterus,  which  had  been  generally  derived  from 
the  examination  of  brutes.  He  afterward  showed  that 
the  blood,  after  birth,  could  only  pass  from  the  right  to 
the  left  side  by  the  heart  through  the  vessels  of  the 
lungs,  thus  preparing  for  the  discovery  of  the  circu- 
lation of  Harvey.  A Treatise  on  Tumours,  and  a 
Commentary  on  part  of  Hippocrates,  were  also  writ- 
ten by  him. 

ARA'TRUM.  The  plough.  A plant  has  this  for  a 
trivial  name,  because  its  roots  are  found  to  hinder  the 
plough  : hence  remora  aratn ■ See  Ononis  spinosa. 

ARBOR.  A tree.  1.  In  botany,  a plant,  consisting 
of  one  trunk  which  rises  to  a great  height,  is  very 
durable,  woody,  and  divided  at  its  top  into  branches 
which  do  not  perish  in  the  winter  ; as  the  oak,  elm, 
ash,  &c. 


ARC 


ARE 


2.  In  anatomy,  it  is  applied  to  parts  which  ramify 
like  a tree , as  the  Arbor  vita  of  the  cerebellum. 

3.  In  chemistry,  applied  to  crystallizations  which  ra- 
mify like  branches. 

Arbor  dians:.  See  Silver. 

Arbor  vit.®.  The  tree  of  life. 

1.  The  cortical  substance  of  the  cerebellum  is  so 
disposed,  that,  when  cut  transversely,  it  appears  rami- 
fied like  a tree,  from  which  circumstance  it  is  termed 
arbor  vita. 

2.  The  name  of  a tree  formerly  in  high  estimation  in 
medicine.  See  Thuya  occidentalis. 

Arbores.  One  of  the  natural  divisions  or  families 
of  plants.  Trees  consist  of  a single  and  durable  woody 
trunk,  bearing  branches,  which  do  not  perish  in  the 
winter,  as  Tilia , Fraxinus , Pyrus , &c. 

ARBUST1VA.  (From  arbustum , a copse  of  shrubs 
or  trees.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Lin- 
nteus’s  natural  method. 

ARBUTHNOT,  John,  a physician,  born  in  Scotland 
soon  after  the  restoration,  celebrated  for  his  wit  and 
learning.  He  graduated  at  A berdeen,  and  settling  in 
this  metropolis,  had  the  good  fortune  to  be  at  Epsom, 
when  Prince  George  of  Denmark  was  taken  ill  there ; 
whom,  having  restored  to  health,  he  was  appointed 
physician  to  Qtueen  Anne,  but  never  got  into  very  ex- 
tensive practice.  His  chief  medical  publications  were 
“ On  the  Choice  of  Aliments,”  and  “ On  the  Effects  of 
Air  upon  Human  Bodies.”  He  died  in  1735. 

A'RBUTUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Decandria;  Order,  Mo- 
no gynia. 

Arbutus,  trailing.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

Arbutus  unedo.  Amatzquitl ; Unedo  papyracea. 
A decoction  of  the  bark  of  the  root  of  this  plant  is  re- 
commended in  fevers. 

Arbutus  uva  ursi  The  systematic  name  for  the 
officinal  trailing  Arbutus ; Bear’s  berry  ; Bear’s  whor- 
tle-berry  ; Bear’s  whorts ; or  Bear’s  bilberries  ; called 
also  Vaccaria.  Arbutus — caulibus  procumbentibus , 
foliis  integerrimis , of  Linnaeus.  This  plant,  though 
employed  by  the  ancients  in  several  diseases,  requiring 
adstringent  medicines,  had  almost  entirely  fallen  into 
disuse  until  the  middle  of  the  present  century,  when  it 
first  drew  the  attention  of  physicians,  as  a useful  re- 
medy in  calculous  and  nephritic  complaints,  which 
diseases  it  appears  to  relieve  by  its  adstringent  qualities. 

A'rca  arcanorum.  The  mercury  of  the  philo- 
sophers. 

Arca  cordis.  The  pericardium. 

ARCA'NUM.  A secret.  A medicine,  the  prepara- 
tion or  efficacy  of  which  is  kept  from  the  world,  to 
enhance  its  value.  With  the  chemists,  it  is  a thing 
secret  and  incorporeal ; it  can  only  be  known  by  ex- 
perience, for  it  is  the  virtue  of  every  thing,  which  ope- 
rates a thousand  times  more  than  the  thing  itself. 

Arcanum  cathoucum.  Bezoar,  plantain,  and 
colchicum. 

Arcanum  duplex.  Arcanum  duplicatum.  A 
name  formerly  given  to  the  combination  of  potassa 
and  sulphuric  acid,  more  commonly  called  vitriolated 
tartar,  and  now  sulphate  of  potassa. 

Arcanum  tartari.  The  acetate  of  potassa. 

Arce'rthos.  Juniper. 

ARCHAS'US.  1.  The  universal  archteus,  or  prin- 
ciple of  Van  Helmont,  was  the  active  principle  of  the 
material  world.  See  Vis  vita. 

2.  Good  health. 

A'rche.  (From  apx»7,  the  beginning.)  The  earliest 
stage  of  a disease. 

Arche'nda.  (Arabian.)  A powder  made  of  the 
leaves  of  the  ligustrum,  to  check  the  foetid  odour  of 
the  feet. 

Archeo'stis.  White  briony. 

[ARCHER,  JOHN,  M.  D.  of  the  state  of  Maryland, 
a celebrated  practitioner  of  medicine.  Many  con- 
tributions of  his,  on  various  subjects  of  medical 
science,  are  to  be  found  in  the  New- York  Medical 
Repository.  He  was  the  first  who  introduced  the 
Seneca  snake-root  (polygala  senega)  as  a remedy  in 
Croup.  He  died  in  1814.  A.] 

Archil.  See  Lichen  rocella. 

[There  are  several  lichens  which  abound  in  colour- 
ing matter ; of  these  the  most  remarkable  is  the  lichen 
rocella , which  grows  in  the  south  of  France,  and  in 
the  Canary  Islands;  and  which  affords  the  beautiful, 
but  perishable  blue,  called  litmus,  archil,  or  turnsole- 


The  moss  is  dried,  powdered,  mixed  with  pearlash 
and  urine,  and  allowed  to  ferment,  during  which  it 
becomes  red  and  then  blue ; in  this  state  it  is  mixed 
with  carbonate  of  potassa  and  chalk,  and  dried.  It  is 
used  for  dying  silk  and  ribands ; and  by  the  chemists 
as  a most  delicate  test  of  acids,  which  it  indicates  by 
passing  from  blue  to  red ; the  blue  colour  is  restored  by 
alkalies,  which  do  not  render  it  green.  Cudbear  ap- 
pears to  be  a similar  preparation  of  the  lichen  tar- 
tar eus.—  Webster's  Man.  Chem.  A.] 

Archilla.  See  Lichen  rocella. 

Archi'tholos.  (From  apx> h the  chief,  and  ^oXoj, 
a chamber.)  The  sudatorium,  or  principal  room  of 
the  ancient  baths. 

ARCHOPTO  MA.  (From  apxos,  the  anus,  and  ttitt- 
t(o,  to  fall  down.)  A bearing  down  of  the  rectum,  or 
prolapsus  ani. 

A'rchos.  (From  apxos > an  arch.)  The  anus ; so 
called  from  its  shape. 

ARCTA'TIO.  (From  arcto,  to  make  narrow.) 
Arctitudo.  Narrowness. 

1.  A constipation  of  the  intestines,  from  inflam- 
mation. 

2.  A preternatural  straitness  of  the  pudendum  mu- 
liebre. 

A'RCTIUM.  (From  apuros,  a bear;  so  called  from 
its  roughness.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaan  system.  Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polyga- 
mia  aqualis.  The  burdock. 

Arctium  lappa.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
herb  clot-bur,  or  burdock.  Bardana ; Arctium  ; Bri- 
tannica ; llaphis.  The  plant  so  called  in  the  pharma- 
copoeias, is  the  Arctium— foliis  cordatis , inermibus, 
petiolatis,  of  Linnsus.  It  grows  wild  in  uncultivated 
grounds.  The  seeds  have  a bitterish  subacrid  taste  : 
they  are  recommended  as  very  efficacious  diuretics, 
given  either  in  the  form  of  emulsion,  or  in  powder,  to 
the  quantity  of  a drachm.  The  roots  taste  sweetish, 
with  a slight  austerity  and  bitterness:  they  are  es- 
teemed aperient,  diuretic,  and  sudorific ; and  are  said 
to  act  without  irritation,  so  as  to  be  safely  ventured 
upon  in  acute  disorders.  Decoctions  of  them  have 
been  used  in  rheumatic,  gouty,  venereal,  and  other 
disorders  ; and  are  preferred  by  some  to  those  of  sar- 
saparilla. Two  ounces  of  the  roots  are  to  be  boiled  in 
three  pints  of  water,  to  a quart;  to  this,  two  drachms 
of  sulphate  of  potassa  have  been  usually  added.  Of 
this  decoction,  a pint  should  be  taken  every  day  in 
scorbutic  and  rheumatic  cases,  and  when  intended  as 
a diuretic,  in  a shorter  period. 

ARCTIZITE.  The  foliated  species  of  scapolite. 
See  Scapolite. 

ARCTU'RA.  (From  arcto , to  straiten.)  An  in- 
flammation of  the  finger,  or  toe,  from  a curvature  of  the 
nail. — Linnaus. 

ARCUA'LTA.  (From  arcus , a bow.)  Arcualis. 
The  sutura  coronalis  is  so  named,  from  its  bow-like 
shape ; and,  for  the-same  reason,  the  bones  of  the  sin- 
ciput are  called  arcualia  ossa. — Bartholin. 

ARCUA'TIO.-  (From  arcus , a bow.)  A gibbosity 
of  the  fore-parts,  with  a curvation  of  the  sternum,  of 
the  tibia,  or  dorsal  vertebrae. — Avicenna. 

A'rculjE.  (A  dim.  of  arca , a chest.)  The  orbits 
or  sockets  of  the  eyes. 

A'RDAS.  (From  ap5va>,  to  defile.)  Filth,  excre- 
ment, or  refuse. — Hippocrates. 

ARDENT.  ( Ardens ; from  ardeo , to  burn.)  Burn- 
ing hot.  Applied  to  fevers,  alkohol,  &c. 

ARDOR.  {Ardor,  oris.  m. ; from  ardeo,  to  burn.) 
A burning  heat. 

Ardor  febrilis.  Feverish  heat. 

Ardor  urin;e.  Scalding  of  the  urine,  or  a sense 
of  heat  in  the  urethra. 

Ardor  ventriculi.  Heartburn. 

A'REA.  1.  An  empty  space. 

2.  That  kind  of  baldness  where  the  crown  of  the 
head  is  left  naked,  like  the  tonsure  of  a monk. 

ARE'CA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  of  the 
class  Palma. 

Areca  indica.  An  inferior  kind  of  nutmeg. 

Are'gon.  (From  aprjyo),  to  help  ; so  called  from  its 
valuable  qualities.)  A resolvent  ointment. 

Arema'ros.  Cinnabar. 

ARE  NA.  Sand,  or  gravel. 

Arena'mel.  (From  arena,  sand ; so  called  because 
it  was  said  to  be  procured  from  sandy  places.)  Arena- 
men.  Bole-armenic. 


85 


ARG 


ARI 


ARENA'TIO.  (From  arena , sand.)  Saburation, 
or  the  sprinkling  of  hot  sand  upon  the  bodies  of  pa- 
tients.— Baccius  de  Tkermis. 

[Arendalite.  The  same  as  Arendate;  both  of 
which  are  synonymous  with  Epidote.  A.] 

Arendate.  See  Epidote. 

Are'ntes.  (From  areo,  to  dry  up.)  A sort  of  an- 
cient cupping-glasses,  used  without  scarifying. 

AREOLA.  (A  diminutive  of  area,  a void  space.) 
A small  red  or  brown  circle,  which  surrounds  the  nip- 
ples of  females.  During  and  after  pregnancy,  it  be- 
comes considerably  larger. 

Areometer.  See  Hydrometer. 

AretjENOi'des.  See  Arytaenoides. 

AliETvE'US,  of  Cappadocia ; a physician,  who 
practised  at  Rome,  but  at  what  period  is  uncertain, 
thougli  the  most  probable  opinion  places  him  between 
the  reigns  of  Vespasian  and  Adrian.  Eight  books  of 
his  remain  “ On  the  Causes,  Signs,  and  Method  of 
treating  acute  and  chronic  Diseases,”  written  in  the 
Greek  language,  and  admired  for  their  pure  style,  and 
luminous  descriptions,  as  well  as  the  judicious  prac- 
tice generally  recommended.  He  was  partial  to  the 
use  of  hellebore  and  other  drastic  medicines ; and  ap- 
pears to  have  been  among  the  first  to  recommend 
cautharides  for  blistering  the  skin. 

A RETE.  (Ape 777,  virtue.)  Hippocrates  uses  this 
word  to  mean  corporeal  or  mental  vigour. 

Are'us.  A pessary,  invented  by  Jigineta. 

A'RGAL.  Argol.  Crude  tartar,  in  the  state  in 
which  it  is  taken  from  the  inside  of  wine-vessels,  is 
known  in  the  shops  by  this  name. 

Arqasy'llis.  (From  apyog,  a serpent ; which  it  is 
said  to  resemble.)  The  plant  which  was  supposed  to 
produce  gum-ammoniac.  See  Heracleum  gummi- 
ferum. 

A'rgema.  (From  apyog,  white.)  Argemon.  A 
small  white  ulcer  of  the  globe  of  the  ey e.—Erotianus. 
Oaten,  &rc. 

Argentate  of  ammonia.  Fulminating  silver. 

[This  mineral  has  a laminated  or  rather  slaty  struc- 
ture. Its  laminse  or  layers,  often  curved  or  undulated, 
are  seldom  perfectly  parallel;  but  their  surface  has 
almost  always  a pearly  lustre,  somewhat  shining. 
According  to  Bournon,  these  laminae  are  composed  of 
minute  rhombs,  whose  summits  are  so  deeply  trun- 
cated perpendicularly  to  the  axis,  that  only  a very  thin 
portion  of  the  rhomb  remains.  Indeed  this  mineral 
sometimes  presents  the  primitive  rhomb.  It  is  trans- 
lucent, at  least  at  the  edges ; and  its  colour  is  white, 
snaued  with  gray,  green,  or  red.  It  is  easily  broken ; 
and  its  spec.  grav.  is  2.64. 

It  is  nearly  a pure  carbonate  of  lime,  often  contain- 
ing a little  oxide  of  iron  or  manganese.  Hence  at 
a red  heat  it  often  becomes  reddish  brown.— Cl. 
Min.  A.] 

Argenti  nitras.  Argentum  nitratum  ; Causti- 
tum  lunare.  Nitrate  of  silver.  Take  of  silver  an 
ounce ; nitric  acid,  a fluid  ounce  ; distilled  water,  two 
fluid  ounces.  Mix  the  nitric  acid  and  water,  and  dis- 
solve the  silver  therein  on  a sand  bath  ; then  increase 
the  heat  gradually  that  the  nitrate  of  silver  may  be 
dried.  Melt  the  salt  in  a crucible  over  a slow  fire 
until  the  water  being  evaporated,  it  shall  cease  to 
boil ; then  pour  it  quickly  into  moulds  of  convenient 
shape.  Its  virtues  are  corrosive  and  astringent.  In- 
ternally it  is  exhibited  in  very  small  quantities,  in  epi- 
lepsy, chorea,  and  other  nervous  affections,  and  exter- 
nally it  is  employed  to  destroy  fungous  excrescences, 
callous  ulcers,  fistulas,  &c.  In  the  latter  disease,  it  is 
used  as  an  injection ; from  two  grains  to  three  being 
dissolved  in  an  ounce  of  distilled  water. 

ARGE'NTUM.  ( Argentum , i.  m. ; from  apyog, 

white,  because  it  is  of  a white  colour.)  Silver.  See 
Silver. 

Argentum  fusum.  Crude  mercury. 

Argentum  mobile.  Crude  mercury. 

Argentum  nitratum.  See  Argenti  nitras. 

Argentum  vivum.  See  Mercury. 

A'rges.  (From  apyog,  white.)  A serpent,  with  a 
whitish  skin,  deemed  by  Hippocrates  exceedingly 
venomous. 

ARGILLA.  ( Argilla , <e.  f. ; from  apyog,  white.) 
Argil.  White  clay.  See  Alumina. 

Argilla  vitriolata.  Alum. 

ARGILLACEOUS.  Of  or  belonging  to  argilla,  or 
aluminous  earth.  See  Alumina. 

80 


Argillaceous  earth.  See  Alumina. 

Argillaceous  schistus.  See  Clay-slate. 

ARGILLITE.  See  Clay-slate. 

[ARGILOLITE.  This  mineral  often  strongly  re- 
sembles certain  varieties  of  compact  limestone,  or  cal- 
careous marl.  Its  texture  is  sometimes  porous,  and 
sometimes  compact,  or  even  slaty.  Its  fracture  is  dull 
and  earthy,  sometimes  splintery  or  conchoidal.  In 
hardness,  also,  it  differs  little  from  indurated  marl,  or 
the  softer  varieties  of  compact  limestone,  and  is  some 
times  nearly  friable.  Its  particles  are  sufficiently  hard 
to  scratch  iron,  although  its  masses  may  be  cut  by  a 
knife. 

It  adheres  but  slightly  to  the  tongue,  and  yields  an 
argillaceous  odour  when  moistened.  In  water  it  gra- 
dually crumbles,  but  never  forms  a ductile  paste.  It 
is  opaque ; and  its  colour  is  gray,  often  tinged  with 
yellow  or  blue;  also  rose,  or  pale  red,  brown,  or 
brownish  red,  and  sometimes  greenish.  It  very  often 
presents  white,  brown,  or  greenish  spots,  nearly  round, 
and  is  sometimes  striped. 

It  hardens  by  exposure  to  heat,  but  is  generally  in- 
fusible by  the  blow-pipe : some  varieties  melt  at  their 
surf ace.  It  does  not  effervesce  with  acids,  by  which  it 
is  distinguished  from  those  minerals  which  it  most  re- 
sembles. 

Clay  stone  seems  to  approach  very  near  to  jasper,  or 
petrosilex,  in  a state  of  decomposition,  and  sometimes 
to  tripoli. — Cl.  Min.  A.] 

Argyri'tis.  (From  apyvpog,  silver.)  Litharge,  or 
spume  of  silver.  A kind  of  earth  was  formerly  so 
named,  which  is  taken  from  silver  mines,  and  is  be- 
spangled with  many  particles  of  silver. 

ARGYRO'COME.  (From  apyvpog,  silver,  and 
Kopij,  hair.)  A species  of  gnaphalium  or  cudweed 
was  so  named  from  its  white  silvery  floscules. 

Argyroli'banos.  The  white  olibanum. 

Argyro'phora.  An  antidote,  in  the  composition 
of  which  there  is  silver. 

ARGYROTROPHE'MA.  (From  apyog,  white,  and 
rpotpypa,  food.)  A white  cooling  food,  made  with 
milk.  Milk  diet. — Oalen. 

Arheumati'stos.  (From  a , neg.  and  bevpan^oj 
to  be  afflicted  with  rheums.)  Not  being  afflicted  with 
gouty  rheums. 

ARICY'MON.  (From  apt  and  kv u>,  to  be  quickly 
impregnated.)  A woman  who  conceives  quickly  aim 
often. 

ARILLUS.  (From  arire,  to  be  dry  or  parched.) 
The  seed-coat  or  tunic  of  the  permanent  husk  that 
invests  a seed,  which  drying  falls  off  spontaneously. 
It  is  a peculiar  membrane,  thick,  and  loosely  sur- 
rounds the  seed. 

The  varieties  of  arilli  are, 

1.  The  succulent , pulpy ; like  a berry  in  Evonymus 
europeus  and  Lcetia. 

2.  Cartilaginous ; in  Coffea  Arabica. 

3.  Dimidiate,  half  round ; as  in  Tazus  baccata. 

4.  Lacerate,  cut-like ; as  in  the  mace  of  the  Myris - 
tica  moschata. 

5.  Reticulate,  net-like,  surrounding  the  seed  like  a 
net ; as  in  the  Orchis  tribe. 

6.  Tricuspid ; as  in  Malva  coromandiliana. 

7.  Hirsute,  hairy ; as  in  Geranium  incanum. 

8.  Villous ; in  Geranium  dissectum. 

ARISTA.  (From  areo,  to  dry.)  The  awn  ; a 
sharp  beard,  or  point,  -or  bristle-like  filament,  which 
proceeds  from  the  husk  or  glume  of  grasses.  Its  dis- 
tinctions are  into,  m 

1.  Naked,  without  villi ; as  in  St  ip  a arguens  and 
juncea. 

2.  Plumose,  having  white  villi ; as  in  Stipapennata. 

3.  Straight,  as  in  Bromus  secalinus , and  mollis. 

4.  Geniculate,  having  a knee-like  bend;  as  with 
Avena  saliva. 

5.  Recurved,  bent  back ; as  in  Holcus  lanatus,  and 

Agrostis  canina. 

6.  Tortile,  twisted  like  a rope;  as  in  AgrostiS 
rubra,  and  Aira  montana. 

7.  Terminal , fixed  to  the  apex  of  the  husk ; it  is  so 

in  Agrostis  miliacea. 

8.  Dorsal,  fixed  to  the  back  or  outward  part  of  the 
husk  ; as  in  Agrostis  canina ; Bromus ; Alopecuris. 

9.  Uncinate,  hooked ; as  in  Panicum  hirtellum. 

ARISTA  LTHA2' A.  (From  api?og,  best,  and  uA&uo, 

the  althaea.)  The  common  marsh-mallow.  See  Air 
t/uea  ojfcinalis. 


ARK 


ARN 


ARISTATUS.  (From  arista , the  awn.)  Avvned. 
Applied  to  leaves,  leaf-stalks,  &c.  when  terminated 
by  a long  rigid  spine,  which  in  a leaf  does  not  appear 
as  a contraction.  In  Galium  aristatum , the  leaf-stalk 
is  awned. 

ARISTOLO'CHIA.  ( Aristolochia , oe.  f. ; from 

apiaros,  good,  and  Ao^ta  or  Aoxaa,  parturition ; so 
called  because  it  was  supposed  to  be  of  sovereign  use 
in  disorders  incident  to  child-birth.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Gynandna;  Order,  Hexandria. 

2.  The  pliarmacopceial  name  of  the  long-rooted 
birthwort  See  A ristolochia  longa. 

Aristolochia  anguicida.  Snake-killing  birth- 
wort.  Aristolochia — foliis  cordatis , acuminatis  ; 
caule  volubili , fructicoso  ; pedunculis  solitariis ; sti- 
pulis  cordatis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  juice  of  the  root  of 
this  plant  has  the  property  of  so  stupifying  serpents, 
that  they  may  be  handled  with  impunity.  One  or 
two  drops  are  sufficient ; and  if  more  be  dropped  into 
the  mouth,  they  become  convulsed.  So  ungrateful  is 
the  smell  of  the  root  to  those  reptiles,  that  it  is  said 
they  immediately  turn  from  it.  The  juice  is  also 
esteemed  as  a preventive  against  the  effects  usually 
produced  by  the  bite  of  venomous  serpents. 

Aristolochia  clematitis.  Aristolochia  tenuis. 
The  systematic  name  of  the  Aristolochia  vulgaris  of 
some  pharmacopoeias.  An  extract  is  ordered  by  the 
Wirtemberg  Pharmacopoeia,  and  the  plant  is  retained 
in  that  of  Edinburgh.  It  is  esteemed  as  possessing 
" anti  podagric  virtues. 

Aristolochia  fabacea.  See  Fumaria  bulbosa. 

Aristolochia  longa.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  aristolochia  of  our  pharmacopoeias.  Aristolochia 
—foliis  cordatis , petiolatis,  integerrimis , obtusius- 
culis ; caule  infirmo , fioribus  solitariis.  The  root  of 
this  plant  only  is  in  use ; it  possesses  a somewhat 
aromatic  smell,  and  a warm  bitterish  taste,  accompa- 
nied with  a slight  degree  of  pungency.  The  virtues 
ascribed  to  this  root  by  the  ancients  were  very  con- 
siderable ; and  it  was  frequently  employed  in  various 
diseases,  but  particularly  in  promoting  the  discharge 
of  the  lochia;  hence  its  name.  It  is  now  very  rarely 
used,  except  in  gouty  affections,  as  an  aromatic  sti- 
mulant. 

Aristolochia  rotunda.  The  root  of  this  species 
of  birthwort,  Aristolochia — -foliis  cordatis , subsessi- 
libus,  obtusis ; caule  infirmo;  fioribus  solitariis , of 
Linnaeus ; is  used  indiscriminately  with  that  of  the 
aristolochia  longa.  See  Aristolochia  longa. 

Aristolochia  serpentaria.  The  systematic 
name  for  the  Serpentaria  virginiana  of  the  pharma- 
copoeias. Aristolochia;  Colubrina  virginiana;  Vi- 
perina ; Viperina  virginiana ; Pestilochia  ; Con- 
trayerva  virginiana.  Virginian  snake-root.  The 
plant  which  affords  this  root  is  the  Aristolochia — 
foliis  cordato  oblongis  planis  ; caulibus  infirmis 
flezuosis  teretibus ; fioribus  solitariis.  Caulus  geni- 
culata  valde  nodosa.  Flores  ad  radicem  of  Linnaeus. 
Snake-root  has  an  aromatic  smell,  approaching  to 
that  of  valerian,  but  more  agreeable;  and  a warm, 
bitterish,  pungent  taste.  It  was  first  recommended 
as  a medicine  of  extraordinary  power,  in  counteract- 
ing the  poisonous  effects  of  the  bites  of  serpents ; this, 
however,  is  now  wholly  disregarded : but  as  it  pos- 
sesses tonic  and  antiseptic  virtues,  and  is  generally 
admitted  as  a powerful  stimulant  and  diaphoretic,  it 
is  employed,  in  the  present  day,  in  some  fevers  where 
these  effects  are  required.  A tinctura  is  directed  both 
by  the  London  and  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeias. 

Aristolochia  tenuis.  See  Aristolochia  clematitis. 

Aristolochia  trilobata.  Three-lobed  birthwort 
The  root,  and  every  part  of  this  plant,  Aristolochia — 
foliis  trilobis , caule  volubili,  fioribus  maximis  of  Lin- 
naeus, is  diuretic,  and  is  employed  in  America  against 
the  bite  of  serpents. 

Aristolochia  vulgaris.  See  Aristolochia  cle- 
matitis. 

Aristophanei'on.  (From  Aristophanes,  its  in- 
ventor.) The  name  of  an  ancient  emollient  plaster, 
composed  of  wax,  or  pitch.— Gorrceus. 

[ARKTIZIT.  This  mineral  is  otherwise  called 
Wernerite,  after  the  celebrated  German  mineralogist 
Werner. 

The  Wernerite,  a rare  mineral,  occurs  in  eight-sided 
prisms,  terminated  by  four-sided  summits,  whose  faces 
form,  with  the  alternate  lateral  planes  on  which  they , 


stand,  an  angle  of  about  121°.  Or  it  may  be  called  a four 
sided  prism,  truncated  on  its  lateral  edges.  The  primi- 
tive form  appears  to  be  a quadrangular  prism,  with 
square  bases.  It  also  occurs  in  irregular  grains. 

The  Wernerite  strikes  fire  with  steel,  but  is  scratched 
by  feldspar.  Its  fracture  is  both  imperfectly  foliated 
and  uneven,  with  a moderate  lustre,  a little  pearly  or 
resinous.  Its  specific  gravity  is  3.60. 

It  is  usually  more  or  less  translucent ; and  its  colour 
is  greenish  gray,  or  olive  green,  and  sometimes  white. 
The  surface  of  the  crystals  sometimes  has  the  lustre 
and  aspect  of  an  enamel. 

Before  the  blow-pipe,  it  froths  and  melts  into  an 
opaque,  white  enamel.  A mean  of  two  analyses,  by 
John,  gives  silex  45.5,  alumine  33.5,  lime  13.22,  oxide 
of  iron  5.75,  oxide  of  manganese  1.47 =£>9.44. 

Its  mode  of  fusion  by  the  blow-pipe,  and  its  imper 
fectly  foliated  structure,  may  serve  to  distinguish  it 
from  most  minerals  which  it  resembles. 

This  mineral  is  sometimes  in  tabular  masses,  but 
most  commonly  in  crystals  which  are  easily  recog- 
nised. The  general  form  of  these  crystals,  (certain 
small  faces  being  neglected,)  is  a very  oblique  rhomb, 
or  rather  four-sided  prism,  so  flattened  that  some  of 
its  edges  become  thin  and  sharp,  like  the  edge  of  an 
axe.  The  primitive  form  is  a four-sided  prism,  the 
bases  of  which  are  parallelograms,  with  angles  of 
101°  30',  and  78°  30'.  The  integrant  particles  are 
oblique,  triangular  prisms.  M.  II any  has  described 
five  secondary  forms. — Cl.  Min.  A.] 

ARMA.  ( Arma , orum.  pi.  n.  Arms.)  In  botany, 
applied  to  a species  of  armature  or  offensive  weapons. 
They  are  one  of  the  seven  kinds  of  fulcra,  or  props  of 
plants  enumerated  by  Linnaeus  in  his  Delincatio 
plantce.  They  are  pungent  points  in  some  part  of  a 
plant.  In  the  present  day,  arma  is  used  as  a generic 
term  embracing  the  aculeus , furca,  spina , and  sti~ 
mulus. 

ARMATU'RA.  1.  See  Arma. 

2.  The  amnios  or  internal  membrane  which  sur- 
rounds the  foetus. 

ARMATURE.  See  Arma. 

A'rme.  (From  apo>,  to  adapt.)  1.  A junction  of 
the  lips  of  wounds. 

2.  The  joining  of  the  sutures  of  the  head. 

[ARMINLAN  STONE.  Quartzy  or  calcareous 
substances,  penetrated  by  the  azure  carbonate  of  cop- 
per, have  been  called  by  this  name,  the  copper  giving 
a most  beautiful  blue  colour.  A.] 

Armi'lla.  (Diminutive  of  armus,  the  arm.)  The 
round  ligament  which  confines  the  tendons  of  the 
carpus. 

ARMORA'CIA.  (From  Armorica,  the  country 
whence  it  was  brought.)  See  Cochlearia  Armoracia. 

ARMSTRONG,  John,  a Scotch  physician,  born  in 
1709,  who,  after  graduating  at  Edinburgh,  settled  in 
London,  but  met  with  little  success,  having  distin- 
guished himself  less  in  his  profession  than  as  a poet, 
particularly  by  his  “Essay  on  the  Art  of  Preserving 
Health,”  in  blank  verse.  He  afterward  attended  the 
army  in  Germany,  which  brought  him  more  into 
notice  as  a physician.  He  attained  the  age  of  seventy, 
and  died  in  pretty  good  circumstances.  His  profes- 
sional publications  are  not  of  much  note ; the  princi- 
pal one  is  entitled  “ Medical  Essays.”  He  is  supposed, 
however,  to  have  contributed  materially  to  a useful 
Treatise  on  the  Diseases  of  Children,  published  by  his 
brother  George,  who,  after  practising  many  years  as 
an  apothecary,  obtained  a diploma  in  medicine. 

A'RNICA.  ( Arnica , or.  f.  A pviKrj ; from  apj,  a 

lamb;  because  of  the  likeness  of  the  leaf  of  this 
plant  to  the  coat  of  the  lamb.)  Arnica.  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  superfiua. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  Mountain  arnica. 
See  Arnica  montana. 

Arnica  Montana.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
arnica  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Arnica  foliis  oratis 
integris ; caul  'mis  geminis  oppositis,  of  Linnams. 
Doronicum  Germanicum.  Acyrus.  The  flowers  of 
this  plant  are  very  generally  employed  on  the  Conti- 
nent. Of  the  advantages  derived  from  their  use,  in 
paralytic  and  other  affections,  depending  upon  a want 
of  nervous  energy,  there  are  several  proofs  ; and  their 
extraordinary  virtues,  as  a febrifuge  and  antiseptic, 
have  been  highly  extolled  by  Dr.  Collin,  of  Vienna. 
Much  caution  is  necessary  in  regulating  the  dose,  as 


ARS 


ARS 


it  is  a medicine  very  apt  to  produce  vomiting,  and 
much  uneasiness  of  the  stomach.  See  Arnica. 

Arnica  suedensis.  See  Inula  dysenterica. 

Arno'tto.  A Spanish  name  for  a shrub.  See 
Bixa  orleana. 

ARO'MA.  {Aroma,  matis , neut.  ; from  api,  in- 
tensely, and  o£u>,  to  smell.)  Spirilis  rector.  The 
odorous  principle  of  plants,  and  other  substances, 
which  have  their  characteristic  smell.  This  is  called 
by  the  moderns,  aroma.  Water  charged  with  aroma, 
;s  called  the  distilled  water  of  the  substance  made  use 
of:  thus  lavender  and  peppermint  waters  are  water 
impregnated  with  the  aroma  of  the  lavender  and 
peppermint. 

Aromata.  {Apwpara,  sweet  spices,  herbs,  Sec.) 
Aromatics. 

AROMA'TIC.  {Aromaticus ; from  apwpa,  an 
odour.)  A term  applied  to  a grateful  spicy  scent, 
and  an  agreeable  pungent  taste,  as  cinnamon  bark, 
cardamoms,  &c. 

Aromatic  vinegar.  See  Acetum  aromaticum. 

Aromatic.®  plant®.  Odoriferous  or  strong  and 
agreeable  smelling  plants.  The  name  of  a class  of 
plants  in  some  natural  arrangements. 

Aroma'ticus  cortex.  A name  for  canella  alba. 
Cortex  winter  tnus. 

AROMATuPO'LA.  (From  apwpa,  an  odour,  and 
jtwXeio,  to  sell.)  A druggist ; a vender  of  drugs  and 
spiceries. 

ARQ,UEBUSA'DE.  (A  French  word,  implying 
good  for  a gun-shot  wound.)  Aqua  sclopetaria ; 
Aqua  vulneraria ; Aqua  catapultarum.  The  name 
of  a spirituous  water,  distilled  from  a farrago  of  aro- 
matic plants. 

ARRA  CK.  A spirituous  liquor  distilled  from  rice, 
and  drunk,  in  the  rice  countries,  as  brandy  is  in  this 
island.  Its  effects  on  the  animal  economy  are  the 
same. 

ARRAGONITE.  A mineral  of  a greenish  and 
pearly  gray  colour,  found  at  Arragon  in  Spain,  Eng- 
land, and  Scotland. 

[Although  this  mineral  is  composed  chiefly  of  lime 
and  carbonic  acid,  yet  there  is  reason  to  believe,  that 
other  ingredients  are  essential  to  its  true  composition. 
It  differs  from  pure  carbonate  of  lime  in  hardness, 
specific  gravity,  and  crystalline  structure. 

In  nitric  acid  it  dissolves  with  effervescence.  The 
analysis  of  no  mineral  has  ever  so  much  exercised 
the  talents,  exhausted  the  resources,  and  disappointed 
the  expectations  of  the  most  distinguished  chemists  of 
Europe,  as  that  of  arragonite.  Vauquelin  and  Four- 
croy  obtained  lime  58.5,  carbonic  acid  41.5 ; and  the 
analysis  of  Biot  and  Thenard,  conducted  with  much 
ingenuity,  scarcely  differs  from  this,  except  in  giving 
a little  water.  With  these,  both  Chevenix  and  Kla- 
proth agree,  in  finding  the  arragonite  to  contain  lime 
and  carbonic  acid  in  nearly  the  same  proportions  as  in 
the  common  carbonate  of  lime.  Kirwan  in  his  mine- 
ralogy, published  in  1794,  conjectured  that  the  arra- 
gonite might  contain  strontian;  and  very  recently 
Professor  Stromeyer  of  Gottingen  has  discovered  in 
this  mineral  between  three  and  four  per  cent,  of  the 
carbonate  of  strontian.  This  discovery  will  very  pro- 
bably lead  to  a solution  of  the  preceding  difficulty; 
but  it  is  important  that  the  analysis  should  be  repeated 
by  different  chemists. — Cl.  Min.  A.] 

A'rraphus.  (From  a,  priv.  and  paQrj,  a suture.) 
Without  suture.  It  is  applied  to  the  cranium  when 
naturally  without  sutures. 

Arrangement  of  Minerals.  See  Minerals,  arrange- 
ment of. 

ARRHAS'A.  (From  a,  neg.  and  pew,  to  flow.)  The 
suppression  of  any  natural  flux,  as  the  menses,  See. 

ARRHIZUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  piX,a,  a root: 
without  root.)  Applied  to  paraatical  plants,  which 
have  no  roots,  but  adhere  and  imbibe  their  nourish- 
ment by  ainastomosing  of  the  vessels ; as  Viscum  al- 
bum, and  Loranthus  europeus. 

ARROWHEAD.  The  Sagittaria  sagittifolia  of 
Linnaeus.  The  roots  of  this  plant  are  said  to  be  escu- 
lent, but  it  must  be  in  times  of  very  great  scarcity. 

Arrow-root.  See  Maranta. 

Arrow-shaped.  See  Leaf.  . 

ARSE'NIATE.  {Arsenias,  atis.  m. ; from  arseni- 
cum , arsenic.)  A salt  formed  by  a combination  of 
arsenic  acid  with  salifiable  bases;  as  arseniate  of  am- 
monia, which  is  produced  by  the  union  of  ammonia 
with  arsenic  acid.  The  only  one  used  in  medicine  is 
88 


the  superarseniate  of  potassa,  which  is  in  solution  in 
the  liquor  arsenicalis.  See  Arsenicalis  liquor. 

A'RSENIC.  {Arsenicum,  i.  n. ; from  the  Arabic 
term  Arsanek , or  from  apar/v,  for  appqv,  mas  cuius ; 
from  its  strong  and  deadly  powers.)  The  name  of  a 
metal  scattered,  in  great  abundance,  over  the  minera, 
kingdom.  It  is  found  in  black,  heavy  masses  of  little 
brilliancy,  called  native  arsenic  or  testaceous  arsenic. 
This  exists  in  different  parts  of  Germany.  Mineral- 
ized by  sulphur,  it  forms  sulphurized  arsenic.  This 
mineral  is  met  with  in  Italy,  about  Mount  Vesuvius. 
There  are  two  varieties  of  this  ore,  which  differ  froip 
each  other  in  colour,  occasioned  by  the  different  pro- 
portions of  their  component  parts.  The  one  is  called 
yellow  sulphurized  arsenic , or  orpiment ; the  other,  red 
sulphurized  arsenic , or  realgar , or  ruby  arsenic ; both 
are  met  with  in  Hungary  and  different  parts  of  Ger- 
many. The  colour  of  the  first  ore  is  a lemon-yellow, 
inclining  sometimes  to  a green  ; the  colour  of  the  latter 
is  a ruby-red ; it  is  more  transparent  than  the  former, 
and  found  in  compact  and  solid  masses,  sometimes 
crystallized  in  bright  needles.  Arsenic  united  to  oxy- 
gen, constitutes  the  ore  called  native  oxyde  of  arsenic. 
This  ore  is  scarce ; it  is  generally  found  of  an  earthy 
appearance,  or  as  an  efflorescence,  coating  native,  or 
metallic  arsenic;  its  colour  is  a whitish  gray;  it  is 
rarely  met  with  crystallized.  Arsenic  exists  likewise 
alloyed  with  cobalt,  antimony,  tin,  copper,  lead,  and 
various  other  metals. 

Method  of  obtaining  Arsenic.  In  order  to  obtain 
metallic  arsenic,  mix  two  parts  of  the  white  oxyde  of 
arsenic  of  commerce,  with  one  of  black  flux  (obtained 
by  detonating  one  part  of  nitrate  of  potassa  with  two 
of  supertartrate  of  potassa),  and  put  the  mixture  into 
a crucible,  or  melting  pot.  Invert  over  this  anothei 
crucible,  lute  the  two  together  with  a little  clay  and 
sand,  and  apply  gradually  a red  heatWo  the  lower  one. 
The  oxyde  of  arsenic  will  be  reduced,  and  be  found 
lining  the  upper  crucible  in  small  crystals  of  a metal- 
lic brilliancy. 

The  charcoal  of  the  black  flux  takes  in  this  process 
the  oxygen  from  the  white  oxyde,  and  forms  carbonic 
acid  gas ; which  flies  off  during  the  process,  and  the 
oxyde  becomes  reduced  to  the  metallic  state.  This  re- 
duction of  the  oxyde  is  greatly  facilitated  by  the  alkali 
of  the  flux. 

Remark. — In  order  to  obtain  arsenic  in  a state  of 
absolute  purity,  the  metal  thus  obtained  must  be  re- 
duced to  a powder,  dissolved  by  heat  in  nitro-muriatic 
acid,  and  then  precipitated  by  immersing  into  the  so 
lution  a plate  of  zinc.  The  arsenic  is  thus  precipitated 
in  a fine  powder,  and  may  be  reduced  to  a mass,  by 
exposing  it  in  a covered  crucible  to  a moderate  heat. 

“It  is  among  the  most  combustible  of  the  metals, 
burns  with  a blue  flame,  and  garlic  smell,  and  sublimes 
in  the  state  of  arsenious  acid. 

Concentrated  sulphuric  acid  does  not  attack  arsenic 
when  cold;  but  if  it  be  boiled  upon  this  metal,  sul- 
phurous acid  gas  is  emitted,  a small  quantity  of  sul- 
phur sublimes,  and  the  arsenic  is  reduced  to  an  oxyde. 

Nitrous  acid  readily  attacks  arsenic,  and  converts  it 
into  arsenious  acid,  or,  if  much  be  employed,  into  ar- 
senic acid. 

Boiling  muriatic  acid  dissolves  arsenic,  but  affects  it 
very  little  when  cold.  This  solution  affords  precipi- 
tates upon  the  addition  of  alkalies.  The  addition  of 
a little  nitric  acid  expedites  the  solution;  and  this  so 
lution,  first  heated  and  condensed  in  a close  vessel,  is 
wholly  sublimed  into  a thick  liquid,  formerly  termed 
butter  of  arsenic.  Thrown  in  powder  into  chlorine 
gas,  it  burns  with  a bright  white  flame,  and  is  con- 
verted into  a chloride. 

None  of  the  earths  or  alkalies  act  upon  it,  unless  it 
be  boiled  a long  while  in  fine  powder,  in  a large  pro- 
portion of  alkaline  solution. 

Nitrates  detonate  with  arsenic,  convert  it  into  ar- 
senic acid,  and  this,  combining  with  the  base  of  the 
nitrate,  forms  an  arseniate,  that  remains  at  the  bottom 
of  the  vessel. 

Muriates  have  no  action  upon  it;  but  if  three  parts 
of  chlorate  of  potassa  be  mixed  with  one  part  of  ar- 
senic in  fine  powder,  which  must  be  done  with  great 
precaution,  and  a very  light  hand,  a very  small  quan- 
tity of  this  mixture  placed  on  an  anvil,  and  struck 
with  a hammer,  will  explode  with  flame  and  a con- 
siderable report ; if  touched  with  fire,  it  will  burn  with 
considerable  rapidity;  and  if  thrown  into  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid,  at  the  instant  of  contact  a flame  rises 


ARS 


ARS 


Into  the  air  like  a flash  of  lightning,  which  is  so  bright 
as  to  dazzle  the  eye. 

Arsenic  readily  combines  with  sulphur  by  fusion 
and  sublimation,  and  forms  a yellow  compound  called 
orpiment , or  a red  called  realgar.  The  nature  of  these, 
and  their  difference,  are  not  accurately  known ; but 
Fourcroy  considers  the  first  as  a combination  of  sul- 
phur with  the  oxyde,  and  the  second  as  a combination 
of  sulphur  with  the  metal  itself,  as  he  found  the  red 
sulphuret  converted  into  the  yellow  by  the  action  of 
acids. 

Arsenic  is  soluble  in  fat  oils  in  a boiling  heat ; the 
solution  is  black,  and  has  the  consistence  of  an  oint- 
ment when  cold.  Most  metals  unite  with  arsenic; 
which  exists  in  the  metallic  state  in  such  alloys  as 
possess  the  metallic  brilliancy. 

Iodine  and  arsenic  unite,  forming  an  rodide,  of  a 
dark,  purple-red  colour,  possessing  the  properties  of 
an  acid.  It  is  soluble  in  water,  and  its  solution  forms 
a soluble  compound  with  potassa. 

Arsenic  combines  with  hydrogen  into  a very  noxious 
compound,  called  arsenuretted  hydrogen  gas.  To  pre- 
pare it,  fuse  in  a covered  crucible  3 parts  of  granu- 
lated tin,  and  1 of  metallic  arsenic  in  powder ; and 
submit  this  alloy,  broken  in  pieces,  to  the  action  of 
muriatic  acid  in  a glass  retort.  On  applying  a mode- 
rate heat,  the  arsenuretted  hydrogen  comes  over,  and 
may  be  received  in  a mercurial  or  water  pneumatic 
trough.  Protomuriate  of  tin  remains  in  the  retort. 

A prime  equivalent  of  hydrogen  is  to  one  of  arsenic 
as  1 to  76 ; and  2 consequently  as  1 to  38.  Gelilen  fell 
a victim  to  his  researches  on  this  gas ; and  therefore 
the  new  experiments  requisite  to  elucidate  its  consti- 
tution must  be  conducted  with  circumspection.  It 
extinguishes  flame,  and  instantly  destroys  animal  life. 
Water  has  no  effect  upon  it.  Front  the  experiments 
of  Sir  H.  Davy,  and  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  there 
appears  to  be  a solid  compound  of  hydrogen  and  ar- 
senic, or  a hydruret.  It  is  formed  by  acting  with  the 
negative  pole  of  a voltaic  battery  on  arsenic  plunged 
in  water.  It  is  reddish  brown,  without  lustre,  taste, 
and  smell.  It  is  not  decomposed  at  a heat  approaching 
to  cherry-red ; but  at  this  temperature  it  absorbs  oxy- 
gen ; while  water  and  arsenious  acid  are  formed,  with 
the  evoluton  of  heat  and  light.  The  proportion  of  the 
two  constituents  is  not  known. 

Arsenic  is  used  in  a variety  of  arts.  It  enters  into 
metallic  combinations,  wherein  a white  colour  is  re- 
quired. Glass  manufacturers  use  it;  but  its  effect  in 
the  composition  of  glass  does  not  seem  to  be  clearly 
explained.  Orpiment  and  realgar  are  used  as  pig- 
ments.” 

Arsenic  and  its  various  preparations  are  the  most 
active  of  all  poisons.  That  which  is  mostly  taken,  is 
the  white  oxyde,  or  arsenious  acid.  See  Arsenious  acid. 

[Arsenical  pyrites,  or  arsenical  iron,  is  found  in  the 
Highlands  of  New-York,  on  the  west  side  of  the  Hud- 
son. In  the  town  of  Warwick,  in  Orange  county, 
of  this  state,  there  is  a huge  vein  of  it  in  a moun- 
tain range,  sufficient,  as  is  said  by  a traveller,  to  poison 
the  whole  world.  A.] 

ARSENIC  ACID.  Acidum  arsenicum;  Acidum 
arsenicale.  “We  are  indebted  to  the  illustrious 
Scheele  for  the  discovery  of  this  acid,  though  Macquer 
had  before  noticed  its  combinations.  It  may  be  ob- 
tained by  various  methods.  If  six  parts  of  nitric  acid 
be  poured  on  one  of  the  concrete  arsenious  acids,  or 
white  arsenic  of  the  shops,  in  the  pneumato-chemical 
apparatus,  and  heat  be  applied,  nitrous  gas  will  bo 
evolved,  and  a white  concrete  substance,  differing  in 
its  properties  from  the  arsenious  acid,  will  remain  in 
the  retort.  This  is  the  arsenic  acid.  It  may  equally 
be  procured  by  means  of  aqueous  chlorine,  or  by  heat- 
ing concentrated  nitric  acid  with  twice  its  weight  of 
the  solution  of  the  arsenious  acid  in  muriatic  acid. 
The  concrete  acid  should  be  exposed  to  a dull  red  heat 
for  a few  minutes.  In  either  case  an  acid  is  obtained, 
that  does  not  crystallize,  but  attracts  the  moisture  of 
the  air,  has  a sharp,  caustic  taste,  reddens  blue  vege- 
table colours,  is  fixed  in  the  fire,  and  of  the  specific 
gravity  ot  3 391. 

If  the  arsenic  acid  be  exposed  to  a red  heat  in  a glass 
retort,  it  melts  and  becomes  transparent,  but  assumes 
a milky  hue  on  cooling.  If  the  heat  be  increased,  so 
tnat  the  retort  begins  to  melt,  the  acid  boils,  and 
sublimes  into  the  neck  of  the  retort.  If  a covered 
crucible  be  used  instead  of  the  glass  retort,  and  a vio- 


I lent  heat  applied,  the  acid  boils  strongly,  and  in  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  begins  to  emit  fumes.  These,  on 
being  received  in  a glass  bell,  are  found  to  be  arsenious 
acid;  and  a small  quantity  of  a transparent  glass, 
difficult  to  fuse,  will  be  found  lining  the  sides  of  the 
crucible.  This  is  arseniate  of  alumina. 

Combustible  substances  decompose  this  acid.  If 
two  parts  of  arsenic  acid  be  mixed  with  about  one  of 
charcoal,  the  mixture  introduced  into  a glass  retort, 
coated,  and  a matrass  adapted  to  it ; and  the  retort 
then  gradually  heated  in  a reverberatory  furnace,  till 
the  bottom  is  red;  the  mass  will  be  inflamed  violently, 
and  the  acid  reduced,  and  rise  to  the  neck  of  the 
retort  in  the  metallic  state,  mixed  with  a little  oxyde 
and  charcoal  powder.  A few  drops  of  water,  devoid 
of  acidity,  will  be  found  in  the  receiver. 

With  sulphur  the  phenomena  are  different.  If  a 
mixture  of  six  parts  of  arsenic  acid,  and  one  of  pow 
dered  sulphur,  be  digested  together,  no  change  will 
take  place : but  on  evaporating  to  dryness,  and  distil- 
ling in  a glass  retort,  fitted  with  a receiver,  a violent 
combination  will  ensue,  as  soon  as  the  mixture  is  suf- 
ficiently heated  to  melt  the  sulphur.  The  whole  mass 
rises  almost  at  once,  forming  a red  sublimate,  and  sul- 
phurous acid  passes  over  into  the  receiver. 

If  pure  arsenic  acid  be  diluted  with  a small  quan- 
tity of  water,  and  hydrogen  gas,  as  it  is  evolved  by 
the  action  of  sulphuric  acid  on  iron,  be  received  into 
this  transparent  solution,  the  liquor  grows  turbid,  and 
a blackish  precipitate  is  formed,  which,  being  well 
washed  with  distilled  water,  exhibits  all  the  pheno- 
mena of  arsenic.  Sometimes,  too,  a blackish-gray 
oxyde  of  arsenic  is  found  in  this  process. 

If  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  be  employed  instead 
of  simple  hydrogen  gas,  water  and  a sulphuret  of  ar- 
senic are  obtained. 

With  phosphorus,  phosphoric  acid  is  obtained,  and  a 
phosphuret  of  arsenic,  which  sublimes. 

The  arsenic  acid  is  much  more  soluble  than  the  ar- 
senious. According  to  Lagrange,  two  parts  of  water 
are  sufficient  for  this  purpose.  It  cannot  be  crystal- 
lized by  any  means ; but,  on  evaporation,  assumes  a 
thick  honey-like  consistence. 

No  acid  has  any  action  upon  it:  if  some  of  them 
dissolve  it  by  means  of  the  water  that  renders  them 
fluid,  they  do  not  produce  any  alteration  in  it.  The 
boracic  and  phosphoric  are  vitrifiabie  with  it  by  means 
of  heat,  but  without  any  material  alteration  in  their 
natures.  If  phosphorus  acid  be  heated  upon  it  for 
some  time,  it  saturates  itself  with  oxygen,  and  be- 
comes phosphoric  acid. 

The  arsenic  acid  combines  with  the  earthy  and  alka- 
line bases,  and  forms  salts  very  different  from  those 
furnished  by  the  arsenious  acid. 

All  these  arseniates  are  decomposable  by  charcoal, 
which  separates  arsenic  from  them  by  means  of  heat. 

All  its  salts,  with  the  exception  of  those  of  potassa, 
soda,  and  ammonia,  are  insoluble  in  water;  but  exceps 
arseniate  of  bismuth,  and  one  or  two  more,  very  solu- 
ble in  an  excess  of  arsenic  acid.  Hence,  after  barytes 
or  oxyde  of  lead  has  been  precipitated  by  this  acid, 
its  farther  addition  re-dissolves  the  precipitate.  This 
is  a useful  criterion  of  the  acid,  joined  to  its  reduction 
to  the  metallic  state  by  charcoal,  and  the  other  cha- 
racters already  detailed.  Sulphuric  acid  decomposes 
the  arseniates  ut  a low  temperature,  but  the  sulphates 
are  decomposed  by  arsenic  acid  at  a red  heat,  owing 
to  the  greater  fixity  of  the  latter.  Phosphoric,  nitric, 
muriatic,  and  fluoric  acids,  dissolve,  and  probably 
convert  into  subsalts  all  the  arseniates.  The  whole  of 
them,  as  well  as  arsenic  acid  itself  when  decomposed 
at  a red  heat  by  charcoal,  yield  the  characteristic  gar- 
lic smell  of  the  metallic  vapour.  Nitrate  of  silver 
gives  a pulverulent  brick-coloured  precipitate,  with 
arsenic  acid.  The  acid  itself  does  not  distuib  the 
transparency  of  a solution  of  sulphate  of  copper ; but 
a neutral  arseniate  gives  with  it  a bluish  gregj  pre- 
cipitate; with  sulphate  of  cobalt,  a dirty  red;  and 
with  sulphate  of  nickel,  an  apple-green  precipitate. 
These  precipitates  redissolve,  on  adding  a small  quan- 
tity of  the  acid  which  previously  held  them  in  solution. 
Orfila  says,  that  arsenic  acid  gives,  with  acetate  of 
copper,  a bluish-white  precipitate,  but  that  it  exercises 
I no  action  either  on  the  muriate  or  acetate  of  cobalt; 

I but  with  the  ammonio-muriate,  it  gives  a rose-coloured 
I precipitate.  Arsenic  acid  ought  to  be  accounted  a 
more  violent  poison  than  even  the  arsenious. 

• 89 


ARS 


ARS 


The  arseniate  of  barytes  is  insoluble,  uncrystalliza- 
ble,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  its  acid,  and  decomposable 
by  sulphuric  acid,  which  precipitates  a sulphate  of 
barytes. 

The  bin-arseniate  of  potassa  is  made  on  the  great 
scale  in  Saxony,  by  fusing  together  equal  parts  of  nitre 
and  arsenious  acid ; dissolving  the  melted  mass,  and 
crystallizing  the  salt. 

Of  the  arseniate  of  strontian  nothing  is  known,  but 
no  doubt  it  resembles  that  of  barytes. 

With  lime-water  this  acid  forms  a precipitate  of 
arseniate  of  lime , soluble  in  an  excess  of  its  base,  or  in 
an  excess  of  its  acid, though  insoluble  alone.  The  aci- 
dulous arseniate  of  lime  affords  on  evaporation  little 
crystals,  decomposable  by  sulphuric  acid.  The  same 
salt  may  be  formed  by  adding  carbonate  of  lime  to  the 
solution  of  arsenic  acid.  This  acid  does  not  decom- 
pose the  nitrate  or  muriate  of  lime : but  the  saturated 
alkaline  arseniates  decompose  them  by  double  affinity, 
precipitating  the  insoluble  calcareous  arseniate. 

If  arsenic  acid  be  saturated  with  magnesia , a thick 
substance  is  formed  near  the  point  of  saturation.  This 
arseniate  of  magnesia  is  soluble  in  an  excess  of  acid ; 
and  on  being  evaporated  takes  the  form  of  a jelly,  with- 
out crystallizing.  Neither  the  sulphate,  nitrate,  nor 
muriate  of  magnesia  is  decomposed  by  arsenic  acid, 
though  they  are  by  the  saturated  alkaline  arseniates. 

Arsenic  acid,  saturated  with  potassa,  does  not  easily 
crystallize.  This  arseniate , being  evaporated  to  dry- 
ness, attracts  the  humidity  of  the  air,  and  turns  the 
syrup  of  violets  green,  without  altering  ihe  solution  of 
litmus.  It  fuses  into  a white  glass,  and  with  a strong 
fire  is  converted  into  an  acidule,  part  of  the  alkali  be- 
ing abstracted  by  the  silex  and  alumina  of  the  crucible. 
If  exposed  to  a red  heat  with  charcoal  in  close  vessels, 
it  swells  up  very  much,  and  arsenic  is  sublimed.  It  is 
decomposed  by  sulphuric  acid  ; but  in  the  humid  way 
the  decomposition  is  not  obvious,  as  the  arsenic  acid 
remains  in  solution.  On  evaporation,  however,  this 
acid  and  sulphate  of  potassa  are  obtained. 

If  arsenic  acid  be  added  to  the  preceding  salt,  till  it 
ceases  to  have  any  effect  on  the  syrup  of  violets,  it  will 
redden  the  solution  of  litmus  ; and  in  this  state  it 
affords  very  regular  and  very  transparent  crystals,  of 
the  figure  of  quadrangular  prisms,  terminated  by  two 
tetrarldral  pyramids,  the  angles  of  which  answer  to 
those  of  the  prisms.  These  crystals  are  the  arsenical 
neutral  salt  of  Macquer.  As  this  salt  differs  from  the 
preceding  arseniate  by  its  crystallizability,  its  redden- 
ing solution  of  litmus,  its  not  decomposing  the  calcare- 
ous and  magnesian  salts  like  it,  arid  its  capability  of 
absorbing  an  additional  portion  of  potassa,  so  as  to 
become  neutral,  it  ought  to  be  distinguished  from  it  by 
the  term  of  acidulous  arseniate  of  potassa. 

With  soda  in  sufficient  quantity  to  saturate  it,  arse- 
nic acid  forms  a salt  crystallizable  like  the  acidulous 
arseniate  of  potassa.  To  form  the  neutral  arseniate, 
carbonate  of  soda  should  be  added  to  the  acid,  till  the 
mixture  be  decidedly  alkaline.  This  salt  crystallizes 
from  the  concentrated  solution.  It  is  much  more  so- 
luble in  hot  than  in  cold  water.  Pelletier  says,  that 
the  crystals  are  hexaedral  prisms,  terminated  by  planes 
perpendicular  to  their  axis.  This  neutral  arseniate  of 
soda,  however,  while  it  differs  completely  from  that  of 
potassa  in  this  respect,  and  in  becoming  deliquescent 
instead  of  crystallizable  on  the  addition  of  a surplus 
portion  of  arsenic  acid,  resembles  the  arseniate  of  po- 
tassa in  its  decomposition  by  charcoal,  by  acids,  and 
by  the  earths. 

Combined  with  ammonia,  arsenic  acid  forms  a salt 
affording  rhomboidal  crystals  analogous  to  those  of  the 
nitrate  of  soda. 

The  arseniate  of, soda  and  ammonia  is  formed  by 
mixing  the  two  separate  arseniates ; and  the  compound 
salt  gives  crystals  with  brilliant  faces.  If  we  redis- 
solve the  crystals,  and  then  recrystallize,  we  should 
add  a little  ammonia,  otherwise  the  salt  will  be  acidu- 
lous from  the  escape  of  some  ammonia. 

Arsenic  acid  saturated  with  alumina  forms  a thick 
solution,  which,  being  evaporated  to  dryness,  yields 
a salt  insoluble  in  water,  and  decomposable  by  the 
sulphuric,  nitric,  and  muriatic  acids,  as  well  as  by  all 
the  other  earthy  and  alkaline  bases.  The  arsenic  acid 
readily  dissolves  the  alumina  of  the  crucibles  in  which 
it  is  reduced  to  a state  of  fusion;  and  thus  it  attacks 
silex  also,  on  which  it  has  no  effect  in  the  humid  way. 

By  the  assistance  of  a strong  fire,  as  Fourcroy 


asserts,  arsenic  acid  decomposes  the  alkaline  and 
earthy  sulphates,  even  that  of  barytes ; the  sulphuric 
acid  flying  off  in  vapour,  and  the  arseniate  remaining 
in  the  retort.  It  acts  in  the  same  manner  on  the  ni- 
trate, from  which  it  expels  the  pure  acid.  It  likewise 
decomposes  the  muriates  at  a high  temperature,  the 
murialic  acid  being  evolved  in  the  form  of  gas,  and  the 
arsenic  acid  combining  vvitii  their  bases,  which  it  sa- 
turates ; while  the  arsenious  acid  is  too  volatile  to 
have  this  effect.  It  acts  in  the  same  manner  on  the 
fluates,  and  still  more  easily  on  the  carbonates,  with 
which,  by  the  assistance  of  heat,  it  excites  a brisk 
effervescence.  Lagrange,  however,  denies  that  it  acts 
on  any  of  the  neutral  salts,  except  the  sulphate  of  po- 
tassa and  soda,  the  nitrate  of  potassa,  and  the  muriates 
of  soda  and  ammonia,  .and  this  by  means  of  heat.  It 
does  not  act  on  the  phosphates,  but  precipitates  the 
boracic  acids  from  solutions  of  borates  when  heated. 

Arsenic  acid  does  not  act  on  gold  or  platina ; neither 
does  it  on  mercury  or  silver,  without  the  aid  of  a strong 
heat ; but  it  oxydizes  copper,  iron,  lead,  tin,  zinc,  bis- 
muth, antimony,  cobalt,  nickel,  manganese,  and  ar- 
senic. 

This  acid  is  not  used  in  the  arts,  at  least  directly, 
though  indirectly  it  forms  a part  of  some  compositions 
used  in  dying.  It  is  likewise  one  of  the  mineralizing 
acids  combined  by  nature  with  some  of  the  metallic 
oxydes.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

Arsenic , oxyde  of.  See  Arsenious  acid. 

Arsenic,  white.  See  Arsenious  acid. 

Arse'nical  caustic.  A species  of  caustic  said  to 
possess  useful  properties,  independent  of  those  of  de- 
stroying morbid  parts  to  which  it  is  applied.  It  is 
composed  of  two  parts  of  levigated  antimony  to  one  of 
white  arsenic.  This  is  the  caustic  so  extensively  em- 
ployed under  the  name  of  arsenical  caustic,  by  the  laie 
Mr  Justamond,  in  his  treatment  of  cancers. 

[Arsenic  is  a powerful,  a dangerous,  and  yet  a 
valuable  caustic.  Small  tumours,  excrescences,  warts, 
&.C.,  may  be  easily  and  safely  removed  by  it.  Alone, 
it  gives  much  pain  ; and  in  large  quantities,  and  ap- 
plied to  an  extensive  surface,  is  extremely  dangerous. 
Its  painful  action  may  be  modified  and  more  safely 
applied  by  mixing  one  part  of  white  arsenic  with 
one  of  powdered  opium,  and  two  of  lapis  calami- 
naris.  A.] 

Arsenica'lis  liquor.  Arsenical  solution.  Take 
of  sublimed  oxyde  of  arsenic,  in  very  fine  powder,  sub- 
carbonate of  potassa  from  tartar,  of  each  64  grains  ; 
distilled  water  a pint.  Boil  them  together  in  a glass 
vessel,  until  the  arsenic  be  entirely  dissolved.  When 
the  solution  is  cold,  add  compound  spirit  of  lavender, 
four  fluid  drachms.  Then  add  as  much  distilled 
water  as  may  exactly  fill  a pint  measure.  This  pre- 
paration accords  with  the  formula  of  Dr.  Fowler,  of 
Stafford,  who  first  introduced  it  in  imitation  of  a cele- 
brated popular  remedy  for  intermittents,  sold  under  the 
name  of  the  tasteless  ague-drop.  Thecompound  spirit 
of  lavender  is  only  intended  to  give  some  colour  and 
taste,  without  which  it  would  be  more  liable  to  mis- 
takes. Where  the  dose  is  small,  and  the  effects  so 
powerful,  the  most  minute  attention  to  its  proportion 
and  preparation  becomes  necessary.  Each  ounce 
contains  four  grains  of  the  oxyde,  and  each  drachm 
half  a grain ; but  it  will  rarely  be  proper  to  go  beyond 
one-sixteenth  of  a grain  as  a dose. 

Arsenical  solution.  See  Arsenicalis  liquor. 

Arsenici  oxydum  preeparatum.  See  Arsenici  oxy. 
dum  sublimatum. 

Arsenicum  album.  Arsenici  oxydum  sublimatum ; 
Arsenici  oxydum  prwparatum.  Reduce  white  arsenic 
into  powder,  then  put  it  into  a crucible  and  expose  it 
to  the  fire,  so  as  to  sublime  it  into  another  crucible  in- 
verted over  the  former.  This  is  intended  to  render 
the  arsenic  more  pure. 

Arsenicum  album.  White  arsenic.  See  Arsenious 
acid. 

Arsenicum  crystallinum.  See  Arsenious  acid. 

ARSE  NIOUS  ACID.  White  arsenic.  Oxyde  of 
arsenic.  Arsenicum  crystallinum , risigallum,  aquala , 
arfar,  aquila , zamick,  artaneck.  Rat's  bane.  The 
earliest  chemists  were  embarrassed  in  the  determina- 
) tion  of  the  nature  of  the  poisonous  white  substance 
known  in  commerce  by  the  naiye  of  white  arsenic 
“ Fourcroy  was  the  first  who  distinguished  by  this 
| name  the  white  arsenic  of  the  shops,  which  Scheele 
[ had  proved  to  be  a compound  of  the  metal  arsenic  with 


ARS 


ARS 


oxygen,  and  which  the  authors  of  the  new  chemical 
nomenclature  had  consequently  termed  oxyde  of  arse- 
nic. As,  however,  it  manifestly  exhibits  the  proper- 
ties of  an  acid,  it  has  a fair  claim  to  the  title ; for 
many  oxydes  and  acids  are  similar  in  this,  that  both 
consist  of  a base  united  with  oxygen,  and  the  only  dif- 
ference between  them  is,  that  the  compound  in  which 
the  acid  properties  are  manifest  is  termed  an  acid,  and 
that  in  which  they  are  not  is  called  an  oxyde. 

This  acid,  which  is  one  of  the  most  virulent  poisons 
known,  frequently  occurs  in  a native  state,  if  not  very 
abundantly ; and  it  is  obtained  in  roasting  several 
ores,  particularly  those  of  cobalt.  In  the  chimneys  of 
the  furnaces  where  this  operation  is  conducted,  it  ge- 
nerally condenses  in  thick  semitransparent  masses ; 
though  sometimes  it  assumes  the  form  of  a powder,  or 
of  little  needles,  in  which  state  it  was  formerly  called 
flowers  of  arsenic. 

The  arsenious  acid  reddens  the  most  sensible  blue 
vegetable  colours,  though  it  turns  the  syrup  of  violets 
green  On  exposure  to  the  air  it  becomes  opaque,  and 
covered  with  a slight  efflorescence.  Thrown  on  incan- 
descent coals,  it  evaporates  in  white  fumes,  with  a 
strong  smell  of  garlic.  In  close  vessels  it  is  volati- 
lized ; and,  if  the  heat  be  strong,  vitrified.  The  re- 
sult of  this  vitrification  is  a transparent  glass,  capable 
of  crystallizing  in  tetraedra,  the  angles  of  which  arc 
truncated.  It  is  easily  altered  by  hydrogen  and  car- 
bon, which  deprive  it  of  its  oxygen  at  a red  heat,  and 
reduce  the  metal,  the  one  forming  water,  the  other  car- 
bonic acid  with  the  oxygen  taken  from  it ; as  it  is  by 
phosphorus,  and  by  sulphur,  which  are  in  part  con- 
verted into  acids  by  its  oxygen,  and  in  part  form  an 
arsenical  phosphuret  or  sulphuret  with  the  arsenic  re- 
duced to  the  metallic  state.  Hence  Margraaf  and  Pel- 
letier, who  particularly  examined  the  phosphurefs  of 
metals,  assert  they  might  be  formed  with  arsenious 
acid.  Its  specific  gravity  is  3.7. 

It  is  soluble  in  thirteen  times  its  weight  of  boiling 
water,  but  requires  eighty  times  its  weight  of  cold. 
The  solution  crystallizes,  and  the  acid  assumes  the 
form  of  legular  tetraedrons,  according  toFourcroy; 
but,  according  to  Lagrange,  of  octaedrons,  and  these 
frequently  varying  in  figure  by  different  laws  of  decre- 
ment. It  crystallizes  much  better  by  slow  evaporation 
than  by  simple  cooling. 

The  solution  is  very  acrid,  reddens  blue  colours, 
unites  with  the  earthy  bases,  and  decomposes  the  alka- 
line sulphurets.  Arsenious  acid  is  also  soluble  in  oils, 
spirits,  and  alkohol ; the  last  taking  up  from  1 to  2 per 
cent.  It  is  composed  of  9.5  of  metal  = 3 oxygen ; and 
its  prime  equivalent  is  therefore  12.5.  Dr.  Wollaston 
first  observed,  that  when  a mixture  of  it  with  quick- 
lime is  heated  in  a glass  tube,  at  a certain  temperature, 
ignition  suddenly  pervades  the  mass,  and  metallic  arse- 
nic sublimes.  As  arseniate  of  lime  is  found  at  the 
bottom  of  the  tube,  we  perceive  that  a portion  of  the 
arsenious  acid  is  robbed  of  its  oxygen,  to  complete  the 
acidification  of  the  rest. 

There  are  even  some  metals,  which  act  upon  the  so- 
lution, and  have  a tendency  to  decompose  the  acid  so 
as  to  form  a blackish  precipitate,  in  which  the  arsenic 
is  very  slightly  oxydized. 

The  action  of  the  other  acids  upon  the  arsenious  is 
very  different  from  that  which  they  exert  on  the  metal 
arsenic.  By  boiling,  sulphuric  acid  dissolves  a small 
portion  of  it,  which, is  precipitated  as  the  solution 
cools.  The  nitric  acid  does  not  dissolve  it,  but  by  the 
help  of  heat  converts  it  into  arsenic  acid.  Neither  the 
phosphoric  nor  the  carbonic  acid  acts  upon  it ; yet  it 
enters  into  a vitreous  combination  with  the  phosphoric 
and  boracic  acids.  The  muriatic  acid  dissolves  it  by 
means  of  heat,  and  forms  with  it  a volatile  compound, 
which  water  precipitates ; and  aqueous  chlorine  aci- 
difies it  completely,  so  as  to  convert  it  into  arsenic 
acid. 

The  arsenious  acid  combines  with  the  earthy  and 
alkaline  bases,  forming  Jtrsenites.  The  earthy  arse- 
niates  possess  little  solubility ; and  hence  the  solutions 
of  barytes,  strontian,  and  lime,  form  precipitates  with 
that  of  arsenious  acid. 

This  acid  enters  into  another  kind  of  combination 
with  the  earths,  that  formed  by  vitrification.  Though 
a part  of  this  volatile  acid  sublimes  before  the  glass 
enters  into  fusion,  part  remains  fixed  in  the  vitrified 
substance,  to  which  it  imparts  transparency,  a homo- 
geneous density,  and  considerable  gravity.  The  arse- 


nical glasses  appear  to  contain  a kind  of  triple  salt, 
since  the  salt  and  alkalies  enter  into  an  intimate  com- 
bination at  the  instant  ol'  fusion,  and  remain  afterward 
perfectly  mixed.  All  of  them  have  the  inconvenience 
of  quickly  growing  dull  by  exposure  to  the  air. 

With  the  fixed  alkalies  the  arsenious  acid  forms 
thick  arsenites,  which  do  not  crystallize  ; which  are 
decomposable  by  fire,  the  arsenious  acid  being  volati- 
lized by  the  heat ; and  from  which  all  the  other  acids 
precipitate  this  in  powder.  These  saline  compounds 
were  formerly  termed  livers,  because  they  were  sup- 
posed to  be  analogous  to  the  combinations  of  sulphur 
with  the  alkalies. 

With  ammonia  it  forms  a salt  capable  of  crystalliza- 
tion. If  this  be  heated  a little,  the  ammonia  is  decom- 
posed, the  nitrogen  is  evolved,  while  the  hydrogen, 
uniting  with  part  of  the  oxygen  of  the  acid,  forms 
water. 

Neither  the  earthy  nor  alkaline  arsenites  have  yet 
been  much  examined;  what  is  known  of  them  being 
only  sufficient  to  distinguish  them  from  the  arseniates. 

The  arsenious  acid  is  used  in  numerous  instances  in 
the  arts,  under  the  name  of  white  arsenic , or  of  arse- 
nic simply.  In  many  cases  it  is  reduced,  and  acts  in 
its  metallic  state. 

Many  attempts  have  been  made  to  Introduce  it  into 
medicine  ; but  as  it  is  known  to  be  one  of  the  most 
violent  poisons,  it  is  probable  that  the  fear  of  its  bad 
effects  may  deprive  society  of  the  advantages  it  might 
afford  in  this  way.  An  arseniate  of  potassa  was  ex- 
tensively used  by  the  late  Dr.  Fowler,  of  York,  who 
published  a treatise  on  it,  in  intermittent  and  remittent 
fevers.  He  likewise  assured  the  writer,  that  he  had 
found  it  extremely  efficacious  in  periodical  headache, 
and  as  a tonic  in  nervous  and  other  disorders ; and 
that  he  never  saw  the  least  ill  effect  from  its  use,  due 
precaution  being  employed  in  preparing  and  adminis- 
tering it.  Externally  it  has  been  employed  as  a caustic 
to  extirpate  cancer,  combined  with  sulphur,  with  bole, 
with  antimony,  and  with  the  leaves  of  crowfoot ; but 
it  always  gives  great  pain,  and  is  not  unattended  with 
danger.  Febvre’s  remedy  was  water  one  pint,  extract 
of  hemlock  5j-  Goulard’s  extract  5 iij-  tincture  of 
opium  3 j.  arsenious  acid  gr.  x.  With  this  the  cancer 
was  wetted  morning  and  evening ; and  at  the  same 
time  a small  quantity  of  a weak  solution  was  adminis- 
tered internally.  A still  milder  application  of  this 
kind  has  been  made  from  a solution  of  one  grain  in  a 
quart  of  water,  formed  into  a poultice  with  crumb  of 
bread. 

It  has  been  more  lately  used  as  an  alterative  with 
advantage  in  chronic  rheumatism.  The  symptoms 
which  show  the  system  to  be  arsenified  are  thickeess, 
redness,  and  stiffness  of  the  palpebrce , soreness  of  the 
gums,  ptyalism,  itching  over  the  surface  of  the  body, 
restlessness,  cough,  pain  at  stomach,  and  headache. 
When  the  latter  symptoms  supeivene,  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  medicine  ought  to  be  immediately  sus- 
pended. It  has  also  been  recommended  against  chin- 
cough;  and  has  been  used  in  considerable  doses  with 
success,  to  counteract  the  poison  of  venomous  ser- 
pents. 

Since  it  acts  on  the  animal  economy  as  a deadly 
poison  in  quantities  so  minute  as  to  be  insensible  to 
the  taste  when  diffused  in  water  or  other  vehicles,  it 
has  been  often  given  with  criminal  intentions  and 
fatal  effects.  It  becomes  therefore  a matter  of  the 
utmost  importance  to  present  a systematic  view  of 
the  phenomena  characteristic  of  the  poison,  its  opera 
tion,  and  consequences. 

It  is  a dense  substance,  subsiding  speedily  after  agi 
tation  in  water.  Dr.  Ure  found  its  sp.  gr.  to  vary 
from  3.728  to  3.730,  which  is  a little  higher  than  the 
number  given  above:  72  parts  dissolve  in  1000  of 
boiling  water,  of  which  30  remain* in  it,  after  it  cools. 
Cold  water  dissolves,  however,  only  3-1000  or  1-10  of 
the  preceding  quantity.  This  water  makes  the  syrup 
of  violets  green,  and  reddens  litmus  paper.  Lime 
water  gives  a fine  white  precipitale  with  it  of  arsenite 
of  lime,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  the  arsenious  solution; 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas,  and  hydrosulphurettcd 
water,  precipitate  a golden  yellow  sulphuret  of  ar- 
senic. By  this  means,  1-100000  of  arsenious  acid  may 
be  detected  in  water.  This  sulphuret  dried  on  a filter, 
and  heated  in  a glass  tube  with  a bit  of  caustic  po- 
tassa, is  decomposed  in  a few  minutes,  and  converted 
into  sulphuret  of  potassa,  which  remains  at  the  bot 


ARS 


ARS 


tom,  and  metallic  arsenic  of  a bright  steel  lustre, 
which  sublimes,  coating  the  sides  of  the  tube.  The 
hydrosulphuretsof  alkalies  do  not  affect  the  arsenious 
solution,  unless  a drop  or  two  of  nitric  or  muriatic 
acid  be  poured  in,  when  the  characteristic  golden  yel- 
*>w  precipitate  falls.  Nitrate  of  silver  is  decomposed 
»y  the  arsenious  acid,  and  a very  peculiar  yellow 
arsenite  of  silver  precipitates ; which,  however,  is  apt 
to  be  redissolved  by  nitric  acid,  and  therefore  a very 
minute  addition  of  ammonia  is  requisite.  Even  this, 
however,  also,  if  in  much  excess,  redissolves  the  silver 
precipitate. 

As  the  nitrate  of  silver  is  justly  regarded  as  one  of 
the  best  precipitant  tests  of  arsenic,  the  mode  of  using 
it  has  been  a subject  of  much  discussion.  This  excel- 
lent test  was  first  proposed  by  Mr.  Hume  of  Long 
Acre,  in  May  1809.  Phil.  Mag.  xxxiii.  401.  The  pre- 
sence of  muriate  of  soda  indeed,  in  the  arsenical  solu- 
tion, obstructs,  to  a certain  degree,  the  operation  of 
this  reagent  But  that  salt  is  almost  always  present  in 
the  primes  vite,  and  is  a usual  ingredient  in  soups,  and 
other  vehicles  of  the  poison.  If,  after  the  water  of 
ammonia  has  been  added,  (by  plunging  the  end  of  a 
glass  rod  dipped  in  it  into  the  supposed  poisonous 
liquid,)  we  dip  another  rod  into  a solution  of  pure 
nitrate  of  silver,  and  transfer  it  into  the  arsenious  solu- 
tion, either  a fine  yellow  cloud  will  be  formed,  or  at 
first  merely  a white  curdy  precipitate.  But  at  the 
second  or  third  immersion  of  the  nitrate  rod,  a central 
spot  of  yellow  will  be  perceived  surrounded  with  the 
white  muriate  of  silver.  At  the  next  immersion,  this 
yellow  cloud  on  the  surface  will  become  very  conspi- 
cuous. Sulphate  of  soda  does  not  interfere  in  the 
least  with  the  silver  test. 

The  ammoniaco-sulphate,  or  rather  ammoniaco- 
acetate  of  copper,  added  in  a somewhat  dilute  state  to 
an  arsenious  solution,  gives  a fine  grass-green  and  a 
very  characteristic  precipitate.  This  green  arseniate 
of  copper,  well  washed,  being  acted  on  by  an  excess 
of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  water,  changes  its  colour, 
and  becomes  of  a brownish-red.  Ferro-prussiate  of 
potassa  changes  it  into  a blood-red.  Nitrate  of  silver 
converts  it  into  the  yellow  arsenite  of  silver. 

Lastly,  if  the  precipitate  be  dried  on  a filter,  and 
placed  on  a bit  of  burning  coal,  it  will  diffuse  a garlic 
odour.  The  cupreous  test  will  detect  1-110000  of  the 
weight  of  the  arsenic  in  water. 

The  Voltaic  battery,  made  to  act  by  two  wires  on  a 
little  arsenious  solution  placed  on  a bit  of  window- 
glass,  developes  metallic  arsenic  at  the  negative  pole, 
and  if  this  wire  be  copper,  it  will  be  whitened  like 
tombac. 

We  may  here  remark,  however,  that  the  most  ele 
gant  mode  of  using  all  these  precipitation  reagents  is 
upon  a plane  of  glass;  a mode  practised  by  Dr.  Wol 
laston  in  general  chemical  research,  to  an  extent,  and 
with  a success,  which  would  be  incredible  in  other 
hands  than  his.  Concentrate  by  heat  in  a capsule 
the  suspected  poisonous  solution,  having  previously 
filtered  it  if  necessary.  Indeed,  if  it  be  very  much 
disguised  with  animal  or  vegetable  matters,  it  is  better 
first  of  all  to  evaporate  to  dryness,  and  by  a few  drops 
of  nitric  acid  to  dissipate  the  organic  products.  The 
clear  liquid  being  now  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  bit 
of  glass,  lines  are  to  be  drawn  out  from  it  in  different 
directions.  To  one  of  these  a particle  of  weak  ammo- 
niacal  water  being  applied,  the  weak  nitrate  of  silver 
may  then  be  brushed  over  it  with  a hair  pencil.  By 
placing  the  glass  in  different  lights,  either  over  white 
paper  or  obliquely  before  the  eye,  the  slightest  change 
of  tint  will  be  perceived.  The  ammoniaco-acetate 
should  be  applied  to  another  filament  of  the  drop,  deut- 
acetate  of  iron  to  a third,  weak  ammoniaco-acetate  of 
cobalt  to  a fourth,  sulphuretted  water  to  a fifth,  lime 
water  to  a sixth,  a drop  of  violet-syrup  to  a seventh, 
and  the  two  galvanic  wires  at  the  opposite  edges  of  the 
whole.  Thus  with  one  single  drop  of  solution  many 
exact  experiments  may  be  made. 

But  the  chief,  the  decisive  trial  or  cxperimentum 
trusts  remains,  which  is  to  take  a little  of  the  dry 
matter,  mix  it  with  a 6mall  pinch  of  dry  black  flux, 
put  it  into  a narrow  glass  tube  sealed  at  one  end,  and 
after  cleansing  its  sides  with  a feather,  urge  its  bottom 
with  a blow-pipe  till  it  be  distioctly  red-hot  for  a 
minute.  Then  garlic  fumes  will  be  smelt,  and  the 
steel-lustred  coating  of  metallic  arsenic  will  be  seen 
in  the  tube  about  one-fourth  of  an  inch  above  its  bot- 
£« 


tom.  Cut  the  tube  across  at  that  point  by  means  ol  s 
fine  file,  detach  the  scale  of  arsenic  with  the  point  of  a 
penknife ; put  a fragment  of  it  into  the  bottom  of  a 
small  wine-glass  along  with  a few  drops  of  ammoni- 
aco-acetate of  copper,  and  triturate  them  well  toge- 
ther for  a few  minutes  with  a round-headed  glass  rod. 
The  mazarine  blue  colour  will  soon  be  transmuted 
into  a lively  grass-green,  while  the  metallic  scale  will 
vanish.  Thus  we  distinguish  perfectly  between  a par- 
ticle of  metallic  arsenic  and  one  of  animalized  char- 
coal. Another  particle  of  the  scale  may  be  placed  be- 
tween two  smooth  and  bright  surfaces  of  copper,  with 
a touch  of  fine  oil ; and  while  they  are  firmly  pressed 
together,  exposed  to  a red-heat.  The  tombac  alloy 
will  appear  as  a white  stain.  A third  particle  may  be 
placed  on  a bit  of  heated  metal,  and  held  a little  under 
the  nostrils,  when  the  garlic  odour  will  be  recognised. 
No  danger  can  be  apprehended,  as  the  fragment  need 
not  exceed  the  tenth  of  a grain. 

It  is  to  be  observed,  that  one  or  two  of  the  precipi- 
tation tests  may  be  equivocal  from  admixtures  of  vari- 
ous substances.  Thus  tincture  of  ginger  gives  with 
the  cupreous  reagent  a green  precipitate; — and  the 
writer  of  this  article  was  at  first  led  to  suspect  from 
that  appearance,  that  an  empirical  tincture,  put  into 
his  hands  -for  examination,  did  contain  arsenic.  But 
a careful  analysis  satisfied  him  of  its  genuineness. 
Tea  covers  arsenic  from  the  cupreous  test.  Such 
poisoned  tea  becomes,  by  its  addition,  of  an  obscure 
olive  or  violet  red,  but  yields  scarcely  any  precipitate. 
Sulphuretted  hydrogen,  however,  throws  down  a fine 
yellow  sulphuret  of  arsenic. 

The  true  way  of  obviating  all  these  sources  of  falla- 
cy, is  to  evaporate  carefully  to  dryness,  and  expose  the 
residue  to  heat  in  a glass  tube.  The  arsenic  sublimes, 
and  may  be  afterward  operated  on  without  ambi- 
guity. M.  Orfila  has  gone  into  ample  details  on  the 
modifications  produced  by  wine,  coffee,  tea,  broth,  &c. 
on  arsenical  tests,  of  which  a good  tabular  abstract  is 
given  in  Mr.  Thomson’s  London  Dispensatory.  But  it 
is  evident  that  the  differences  in  these  menstrua,  as 
also  in  beers,  are  so  great  as  to  render  precipitations 
and  changes  of  colour  by  reagents  very  unsatisfactory 
witnesses,  in  a case  of  life  and  death.  Hence  the  me- 
thod of  evaporation  above  described  should  never  be 
neglected.  Should  the  arsenic  be  combined  with  oil, 
the  mixture  ought  to  be  boiled  with  water,  and  the  oil 
then  separated  by  the  capillary  action  of  wick-threads. 
If  with  resinous  substances,  these  may  be  removed  by 
oil  of  turpentine,  not  by  alkohol,  (as  directed  by  Dr. 
Black,)  which  is  a good  solvent  of  arsenious  acid.  It 
may  moreover  be  observed,  that  both  tea  and  coffee 
should  be  freed  from  their  tannin  by  gelatin,  which 
does  not  act  on  the  arsenic,  previous  to  the  use  of  re- 
agent for  the  poison.  When  one  part  of  the  arsenious 
acid  in  watery  solution  is  added  to  ten  parts  of  milk, 
the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  present  in  the  latter,  occa- 
sions the  white  colour  to  pass  into  a canary  yellow; 
the  cupreous  test  gives  it  a slight  green  tint,  and  the 
nitrate  of  silver  produces  no  visible  change,  though 
even  more  arsenic  be  added  ; but  the  hydrosulphurets 
throw  down  a golden  yellow,  with  the  aid  of  a few 
drops  of  an  acid.  The  liquid  contained  in  the  stomach 
of  a rabbit  poisoned  with  a solution  of  three  grains  of 
arsenious  acid,  afforded  a white  precipitate  with  ni- 
trate of  silver,  grayish-white  with  lime  water,  green 
with  the  ammoniaco-sulphate,  and  deep  yellow  with 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  water. 

The  preceding  copious  description  of  the  habitudes 
of  arsenious  acid  in  different  circumstances,  is  equally 
applicable  to  the  soluble  arsenites.  Their  poisonous 
operation,  as  well  as  that  of  the  arsenic  acid,  has  been 
satisfactorily  referred  by  Mr.  Brodie  to  the  suspension 
of  the  functions  of  the  heart  and  brain,  occasioned  by 
the  absorption  of  these  substances  into  the  circulation, 
and  their  constant  determination  to  the  nervous  sys- 
tem and  the  alimentary  canal.  This  proposition  was 
established  by  numerous  experiments  on  rabbits  and 
dogs.  Wounds  were  inflicted,  and  arsenic  being  ap- 
plied to  them,  it  was  found  that  in  a short  time  death 
supervened  with  the  same  symptoms  of  inflammation 
of  the  stotnach  and  bowels,  as  if  the  poison  had  been 
swallowed. 

He  divides  the  morbid  affections  into  three  classes : 
1st,  Those  depending  on  the  nervous  system,  as  palsy 
at  first  of  the  posterior  extremities,  and  then  of  the 
rest  of  the  body,  convulsions,  dilutttfion  of  thu  pupils 


ARS 


ARS 


and  general  insensibility:  2 d.  Those  which  indicate 
disturbance  in  the  organs  of  circulation ; for  example, 
the  feeble,  slow,  and  intermitting  pulse,  weak  con 
tractions  of  the  heart  immediately  after  death,  and  the 
impossibility  of  prolonging  them,  as  may  be  done  in 
sudden  deaths  from  other  causes,  by  artificial  respira- 
tion : 3d,  Lastly,  those  which  depend  on  lesion  of  the 
alimentary  canal,  as  the  pains  of  the  abdomen,  nau- 
seas, and  vomitings,  in  those  animals  which  were  suf- 
fered to  vomit.  At  one  time  it  is  the  nervous  system 
that  is  most  remarkably  affected,  and  at  another  the 
organs  of  circulation.  Hence  inflammation  of  the 
stomach  and  intestines,  ought  not  to  be  considered  as 
the  immediate  cause  of  death,  by  the  greater  number  of 
cases  of  poisoning  by  arsenic.  However,  should  an 
animal  not  sink  under  the  first  violence  of  the  poison, 
if  the  inflammation  has  had  time  to  be  developed, 
there  is  no  doubt  that  it  may  destroy  life.  Mr.  Earl 
states,  that  a woman  who  had  taken  arsenic  resisted 
the  alarming  symptoms  which  at  first  appeared,  but 
died  on  the  fourth  day.  On  opening  her  body  the  mu- 
cous membrane  of  the  stomach  and  intestines  was 
ulcerated  to  a great  extent.  Authentic  cases  of  poison 
are  recorded,  where  no  trace  of  inflammation  was 
perceptible  in  the  primes  vice. 

The  effects  of  arsenic  have  been  graphically  repre- 
sented by  Dr.  Black  : ‘ The  symptoms  produced  by  a 
dangerous  dose  of  arsenic  begin  to  appear  in  a quarter 
by  an  hour,  or  not  much  longer,  after  it  is  taken.  First 
sickness,  and  great  distress  at  stomach,  soon  followed 
by  thirst,  and  burning  heat  in  the  bowels.  Then  come 
on  violent  vomiting  and  severe  colic  pains,  and  exces- 
sive and  painful  purging.  This  brings  on  faintings, 
with  cold  sweats,  and  other  signs  of  great  debility. 
To  this  succeed  painful  cramps,  and  contractions  of 
the  legs  and  thighs,  and  extreme  weakness,  and  death.’ 
Similar  results  have  followed  the  incautious  sprink- 
ling of  schirrous  ulcers  with  powdered  arsenic,  or  the 
application  of  arsenical  pastes.  The  following  more 
minute  specification  of  symptoms  is  given  by  Orfila : 
‘An  austere  taste  in  the  mouth;  frequent  ptyalism  ; 
continual  spitting;  constriction  of  the  pharynx  and 
oesophagus  ; teeth  set  on  edge ; hiccups ; nausea ; 
vomiting  of  brown  or  bloody  matter;  anxiety;  fre- 
quent fainting  fits ; burning  heat  at  the  precordia  ; in- 
flammation of  the  lips,  tongue,  palate,  throat,  stomach ; 
acute  pain  of  stomach,  rendering  the  mildest  drinks 
intolerable ; black  stools  of  an  indescribable  feetor ; 
pulse  frequent,  oppressed,  and  irregular,  sometimes 
slow  and  unequal ; palpitation  of  the  heart;  syncope; 
unextinguishable  thirst;  burning  sensation  over  the 
whole  body,  resembling  a consuming  fire ; at  times  an 
icy  coldness ; difficult  respiration  ; cold  sweats ; scanty 
urine,  of  a red  or  bloody  appearance ; altered  expres- 
sion of  countenance ; a livid  circle  round  the  eyelids ; 
swelling  and  itching  of  the  whole  body,  which  be- 
comes covered  with  livid  spots,  or  with  a miliary 
eruption  ; prostration  of  strength ; loss  of  feeling,  espe- 
cially in  the  feet  and  hands;  delirium,  convulsions, 
sometimes  accompanied  with  an  insupportable  pria- 
pism ; loss  of  the  hair ; separation  of  the  epidermis ; 
horrible  convulsions;  and  death.’ 

It  is  uncommon  to  observe  all  these  frightful  symp- 
toms combined  in  one  individual ; sometimes  they  are 
altogether  wanting,  as  is  shown  by  the  following  case, 
related  by  M.  Chaussier: — A robust  man  of  middle 
age  swallowed  arsenious  acid  in  large  fragments,  and 
died  without  experiencing  other  symptoms  than  slight 
syncopes.  On  opening  his  stomach,  it  was  found  to 
contain  the  arsenious  acid  in  the  very  same  state  in 
which  he  had  swallowed  it.  There  was  no  appear- 
ance whatever  of  erosion  or  inflammation  in  the  intes- 
tinal canal.  Etmuller  mentions  a young  girl’s  being 
poisoned  by  arsenic,  and  whose  stomach  and  bowels 
were  sound  to  all  appearance,  though  the  arsenic  was 
found  in  them.  In  general,  however,  inflammation 
does  extend  along  the  whole  canal,  from  the  mouth  to 
the  rectum.  The  stomach  and  duodenum  present 
frequently  gangrenous  points,  eschars,  perforations  of 
all  their  coats ; the  villous  coat  in  particular,  by  this 
and  all  other  corrosive  poisons,  is  commonly  detached, 
as  if  it  were  scraped  off  or  reduced  into  a paste  of  a 
reddish-brown  colour.  From  these  considerations  we 
may  conclude,  that  from  the  existence  or  non-existence 
of  intestinal  lesions,  from  the  extent  or  seat  of  the 
symptoms  alone,  the  physician  should  not  venture  to 
pronounce  definitively  cn  the  fact  of  poisoning. 


The  result  of  Mr.  Brodie’s  experiments  on  brutes 
teaches,  that  the  inflammations  of  the  intestines  and 
stomach  are  more  severe  when  the  poison  has  been 
applied  to  an  external  wound,  than  when  it  has  been 
thrown  into  the  stomach  itself. 

The  best  remedies  against  this  poison  in  the  sto- 
mach, are  copious  draughts  of  bland  liquids  of  a muci 
laginous  consistence,  to  inviscate  the  powder,  so  as 
to  procure  its  complete  ejection  by  vomiting.  Sul- 
phuretted hydrogen  condensed  in  water,  is  the  only 
direct  antidote  to  its  virulence ; Orfila  having  found, 
that  when  dogs  were  made  to  swallow  that  liquid, 
after  getting  a poisonous  dose  of  arsenic,  they  reco- 
vered, though  their  oesophagus  was  tied  to  prevent 
vomiting ; but  wljen  the  same  dose  of  poison  was 
administered  in  the  same  circumstances,  without  the 
sulphuretted  water,  that  it  proved  fatal. 

When  the  viscera  are  to  be  subjected  after  death  to 
chemical  investigation,  a ligature  ought  to  be  thrown 
round  the  oesophagus  and  the  beginning  of  the  colon, 
and  the  intermediate  stomach  and  intestines  removed. 
Their  liquid  contents  should  be  emptied  into  a basin ; 
and  thereafter  a portion  of  hot  water  introduced  into 
the  stomach,  and  worked  thoroughly  up  and  down  this 
viscus,  as  well  as  the  intestines. 

After  filtration,  a portion  of  the  liquid  should  be 
concentrated  by  evaporation  in  a porcelain  capsule, 
and  then  submitted  to  the  proper  reagents  above  de- 
scribed. We  may  also  endeavour  to  extract  from  the 
stomach  by  digestion  in  boiling  water,  with  a little 
ammonia,  the  arsenical  impregnation,  which  has 
been  sometimes  known  to  adhere  in  minute  particles 
with  wonderful  obstinacy.  This  precaution  ought, 
therefore,  to  be  attended  to.  The  heat  will  dissipate 
the  excess  of  ammonia  in  the  above  operation ; 
whereas,  by  adding  potassa  or  soda,  as  prescribed  by 
the  German  chemists,  we  introduce  animal  matter  in 
alkaline  solution,  which  complicates  the  investigation. 

The  matters  rejected  from  the  patient’s  bowels  before 
death,  should  not  be  neglected.  These,  generally 
speaking,  are  best  treated  by  cautious  evaporations  to 
dryness;  but  we  must  beware  of  heating  the  resi- 
duum to  400°,  since  at  that  temperature,  and  perhaps 
a little  under  it,  the  arsenious  acid  itself  sublimes. 

Vinegar,  hydroguretted  alkaline  sulpharets,  and 
oils,  are  of  no  use  as  counterpoisons.  Indeed,  when 
the  arsenic  exists  in  substance  in  the  stomach,  even 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  water  is  of  no  avail,  however 
effectually  it  neutralize  an  arsenious  solution.  Syrups, 
linseed  tea,  decoction  of  mallows,  or  tragacanth,  and 
warm  milk,  should  be  administered  as  copiously  as 
possible,  and  vomiting  provoked  by  tickling  the  fauces 
with  a feather.  Clysters  of  a similar  nature  may  be 
also  employed.  Many  persons  have  escaped  death  by 
having  taken  the  poison  mixed  with  rich  soups ; and 
it  is  well  known,  that  when  it  is  prescribed  as  a medi- 
cine, it  acts  most  beneficially  when  given  soon  after  a 
meal.  These  facts  have  led  to  the  prescription  of 
butter  and  oils ; the  use  of  which  is,  however,  not 
adviseable,  as  they  screen  the  arsenical  particles  from 
more  proper  menstrua,  and  even  appear  to  aggravate 
its  virulence.  Morgagni,  in  his  great  work  on  the  seats 
and  causes  of  disease,  states,  that  at  an  Italian  feast 
the  dessert  was  purposely  sprinkled  over  with  arsenic 
instead  of  flour.  Those  of  the  guests  who  had  previ- 
ously ate  and  drank  little,  speedily  perished ; those  who 
had  their  stomachs  well  filled,  were  saved  by  vomiting. 
He  also  mentions  the  case  of  three  children  who  ate  a 
vegetable  soup  poisoned  with  arsenic.  One  of  them 
who  took  only  two  spoonfuls,  had  no  vomiting,  and 
died  ; the  other  two,  who  had  eaten  the  rest,  vomited, 
and  got  well.  Should  the  poisoned  patient  be  inca- 
pable of  vomiting,  a tube  of  caoutchouc,  capable  of 
being  attached  to  a syringe,  may  be  had  recourse  to. 
The  tube  first  serves  to  introduce  the  drink,  and  to 
withdraw  it  after  a few  instants. 

The  following  tests  of  arsenic  and  corrosive  subli- 
mate have  been  lately  proposed  by  Brugnatelli:  Take 
the  starch  of  wheat  boiled  in  water  until  it  is  of  a 
proper  consistence,  and  recently  prepared  ; to  this  add 
a sufficient  quantity  of  iodine  to  make  it  of  a blue 
colour ; it  is  afterward  to  be  diluted  with  pure  watei 
until  it  becomes  of  a beautiful  azure.  If  to  this,  some 
drops  of  a watery  solution  of  arsenic  be  added,  the 
colour  changes  to  a reddish  hue,  and  finally  vanishes. 
The  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate  poured  into  iodine 
and  starch,  produces  almost  the  same  change  as 


/ 


ART  ART 


arsenic ; but  if  to  the  fluid  acted  on  by  the  arsenic  we  add 
some  drops  of  sulphuric  acid,  the  original  blue  colour 
is  restored  with  more  than  its  original  brilliancy,  while 
it  does  not  restore  the  colour  to  the  corrosive  sublimate 
mixture. — lire’s  C hem.  Diet. 

ARTEMISIA.  (From  a queen  of  that  name,  who 
first  used  it;  or  from  hprepis,  Diana;  because  it  was 
formerly  used  in  the  diseases  of  women,  over  whom 
she  presided.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnacan  system.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Poly- 
gamia  superftua- 

Arteuisia  abrotanum.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  Abrotanum  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Abrotanum 
mas;  Adonion;  Adonium;  Abralhan.  Common 
southernwood.  Artemisia — foliis  setaceis  ramosissi- 
mis  of  Linnajus.  A plant  possessed  of  a strong,  and, 
to  most  people,  an  agreeable  smell ; a pungent,  bitter, 
and  somewhat  nauseous  taste.  It  is  supposed  to  sti- 
mulate the  whole  system,  but  more  particularly  the 
uterus.  It  is  very  rarely  used  unless  by  way  of  fomen- 
tation, with  which  intention  the  leaves  are  directed. 

Artemisia  absinthium.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  Absinthium  vulgare  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Com- 
mon wormwood.  Falsely  called  in  our  markets 
Absinthium  Romanum,  or  Roman  wormwood.  Absin- 
thium Ponticum  of  Dioscorides  and  Pliny,  according  to 
Murray.  Artemisia — foliis  compositis  multifidis  flori- 
bus  subglobosis  penduhs ; receptaculo  villoso  of  Lin- 
neeus.  This  plant  is  a native  of  Britain,  and  grows 
about  rubbish,  rocks,  and  sides  of  roads.  The  leaves 
of  wormwood  have  a strong  disagreeable  smell : their 
taste  is  nauseous,  and  so  intensely  bitter  as  to  be  pro- 
verbial. The  flowers  are  more  aromatic  and  less  bitter 
than  the  leaves,  and  the  roots  discover  an  aromatic 
warmth,  without  bitterness.  This  species  of  worm- 
wood may  be  considered  the  principal  of  the  herba- 
ceous bitters.  Its  virtue,  (in  the  words  of  Bergius,) 
is  autiputredinosa,  antacida,  anthelmintica,  resolvens, 
tonica,  spasmodica.  And  although  it  is  now  chiefly 
employed  with  a view  to  the  two  last-mentioned  quali- 
ties, yet  we  are  told  of  its  good  effects  in  a great  variety 
of  diseases,  as  intermittent  fevers,  hypochondriasis, 
obstructions  of  the  liver  and  spleen,  gout,  calculi, 
scurvy,  dropsy,  worms,  &c.  Cullen  thinks  it  is  pos- 
sessed of  a narcotic  power,  and  that  there  is  in  every 
bitter,  when  largely  employed,  a power  of  destroying 
the  sensibility  and  irritability  of  the  nervous  system. 

Externally,  wormwood  is  used  in  discutient  and 
antiseptic  fomentations.  This  plant  may  be  taken  in 
powder,  but  it  is  more  commonly  preferred  in  infusion. 
The  Edinburgh  Pharmacopeia  directs  a tincture  of  the 
flowers,  which  is,  in  the  opinion  pf  Dr.  Cullen,  a light 
and  agreeable  bitter,  and,  at  the  same  time,  a strong 
impregnation  of  the  wormwood. 

Artemisia  chinensis.  Mugwort  of  China.  Moza 
Japonica;  Musi  a patlree.  A soft  lanuginous  sub- 
stance, called  Moza,  is  prepared  in  Japan,  from  the 
young  leaves  of  this  species  of  mugwort,  by  beating 
them  when  thoroughly  dried,  and  rubbing  them 
between  the  hands,  till  only  the  fine  fibres  are  left. 
Moxa  is  celebrated  in  the  eastern  countries  for  pre- 
venting and  curing  many  disorders,  by  being  burnt  on 
the  skin ; a little  cone  of  it  laid  upon  the  part,  previ- 
ously moistened,  and  set  on  fire  on  the  top,  bums  down 
with  a temperate  and  glowing  heat,  and  produces  a 
dark-coloured  spot,  the  ulceration  of  which  is  promoted 
by  putting  a little  garlic,  and  the  ulcer  is  either  healed 
up  when  the  eschar  separates,  or  kept  running  for  a 
length  of  time,  as  different  circumstances  may  require. 

Artemisia  glacialis.  Mountain  wormwood. 
This  is  found  on  Alpine  situations,  and  has  similar 
virtues  to  common  wormwood. 

Artemisia  judaica.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
Santonicum  of  the  pharmacopoeias,  according  to  some 
botanists.  See  Artemisia  santoniea. 

Artemisia  maritima.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  Absinthium  maritimum  of  the  pharmacopoeias. 
Sea  wormwood.  Falsely  called  in  our  markets,  Ro- 
man wormwood.  Artemisia — foliis  multipartitis, 

tsmentosis  ; racemis  cemuis  ; flosculis  feemineis  temis 
of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  grows  plentifully  about  the 
sea-shore,  and  in  salt  marshes.  The  specific  differ- 
ences between  it  and  thg  common  wormwood,  arte- 
misin absinthium , are  very  evident.  Its  taste  and 
am  ell  are  considerably  less  unpleasant  than  those  of  the 
common  worimvood.  and  even  the  essential  oil,  which 
contains  the  whole  of  its  flavour  concentrated,  is  some- 

(U 


what  less  ungrateful,  and  the 'watery  extract  some  i 
what  less  bitter  than  those  of  the  common  wormwood. 
Hence  it  is  preferred,  in  those  cases  where  the  Artemi- 
sia absinthium  is  supposed  to  be  too  unpleasant  for  the 
stomach.  A conserve  of  the  tops  of  this  plant  was 
directed  by  the  London  pharmacopceia. 

Artemisia  pontica.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
Absinthium  ponticum,  or  Roman  wormwood,  not  now 
used  medicinally. 

Artemisia  rupestris.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  Genipi  album  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Artemisia — 
foliis  pmnalis ; caulibus  adscendentibus ; jloribus 
globosis,  cermuis;  receptaculo  papposo.  It  has  a 
grateful  smell,  and  is  used  in  some  countries  in  the 
cure  of  intermittents  and  obstructed  catamenia. 

Artemisia  santonica.  Absinthium  santonicum 
Alexandrinum ; Sementina;  Absinthium  seriphium 
lEgyptium  ; Scheba  Arabum  ; Zedoarice  semen  ; Xan- 
tohna  ; Lumbricorum  semina ; Cina ; Semen  contra ; 
Semen  sanctum;  Artemisia  Judaica.  The  Tartarian 
southernwood  or  wormseed.  Artemisia— foliis  cauli- 
nis  linearibus , pinnato-multifidis ; ramis  indivisis , 
spicis  secundis  rejlezis  ; floribus  quinquefloris  of  Lin- 
naeus. The  seeds  are  small,  light,  and  oval,  composed 
of  a number  of  thin  membraneous  coats  of  a yellowish- 
green  colour,  with  a cast  of  brown,  easily  friable,  upon 
being  rubbed  between  the  fingers,  into  a fine  chafly 
kind  of  substance.  They  are  brought  from  the  Levant ; 
have  a moderately  strong  and  not  agreeable  smell, 
somewhat  of  the  wormwood  kind,  and  a very  bitter 
subacrid  taste.  Their  virtues  are  extracted  both  by 
watery  and  spirituous  menstrua.  They  are  esteemed 
to  be  stomachic,  emmenagogue,  and  anthelmintic ; but 
it  is  especially  for  the  last-mentioned  powers  that  they 
are  now  administered,  and  from  their  efficacy  in  this 
way  they  have  obtained  the  name  of  wormseed.  To 
adults  the  dose  in  substance  is  from  one  to  two 
drachms,  twice  a day.  . Lewis  thinks  that  the  spiritu- 
ous extract  is  the  most  eligible  preparation  of  the  san- 
tonicum, for  the  purposes  of  an  anthelmintic. 

Artemisia  vulgaris.  Mugwort.  This  plant,  Ar- 
temisia—foliis  pinnatifidis , planis,  incisis,  subtus 
tomentosis  ; racemis  simplicibus,  recurvatis  ; floribus 
radio  quinquefloro  of  Linnaeus,  is  slightly  bitter,  and, 
although  in  high  esteem  in  former  days,  is  now  almost 
wholly  forgotten. 

Artemo'nium.  (From  Artemon , its  inventor.)  A 
collvrium,  or  wash  for  the  eyes. 

ARTERIA.  ( Arteria , <e.  f.;  from  aijp,  air,  and 
■Hipeu),  to  keep ; so  called  because  the  ancients  believed 
they  contained  air  only.)  See  Artery. 

Arteri'aca.  (From  aprypia,  an  artery.)  Medi- 
cines formerly  used  against  disorders  of  the  aspera 
arteria,  or  trachea. 

Arte  rue  adipose:.  The  arteries  which  secrete  the 
fat  about  the  kidneys  are  so  called.  They  are  branches 
of  the  capsula  and  diaphragmatic,  renal,  and  spermatic 
arteries. 

Arterije  venosje.  The  four  pulmonary  veins  were 
so  called  by  the  ancients. 

Arterio'sus  ductus.  See  Ductus  arteriosus. 

ARTERIO'TOMY.  ( Arteriotomia,  a.  f.;  from  ao- 
Tijoia,  an  artery,  and  rEfivw,  to  cut.)  The  opening  of 
an  artery.  This  operation  is  frequently  performed  on 
the  temporal  artery. 

A RTERY.  Arteria.  A membraneous  pulsating 
canal,  that  arises  from  the  heart  and  gradually  be- 
comes less  as  it  proceeds  from  it.  Arteries  are  com- 
posed of  three  membranes ; a common,  or  external ; a 
muscular;  and  an  internal  one,  which  is  very  smooth. 
They  are  only  two  in  number,  the  pulmonary  artery, 
and  the  aorta,  and  these  originate  from  the  heart ; the 
pulmonary  artery  from  the  right  ventricle,  and  the 
aorta  from  the  left:  the  other  arteries  are  all  branches 
of  the  aorta.  Their  termination  is  either  in  the  veins, 
or  in  capillary  exhaling  vessels,  or  they  anastomose 
with  one  another.  It  is  by  their  means  that  tin;  blood 
is  carried  from  the  heart  to  every  part  of  the  body,  for 
nutrition,  preservation  of  life,  generation  of  heat,  and 
the  secretion  of  the  different  fluids.  The  action  of  the 
arteries,  called  the  pulse,  corresponds  with  that  of  the 
heart,  and  is  qgected  by  the  contraction  of  their  mus- 
cular, and  great  elasticity  of  their  outermost  coat. 

A table  of  the  Arteries* 

All  the  arteries  originate  from  the  pulmonary  artery 
and  the  aorta. 


ART 


ART 


The  pulmonary  artery  emerges  from  the  right  ven- 
tricle of  the  heart,  soon  divides  into  a right  and  left 
branch,  which  are  distributed  by  innumerable  ramifi- 
cations through  the  lungs. 

The  aorta  arises  from  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart, 
and  supplies  every  part  of  the  body  with  blood,  in  the 
following  order. 

a.  It  forms  an  arch. 

b.  It  then  descends  along  the  spine ; and, 

c.  It  divides  into  the  two  Macs. 

a.  The  arch  of  the  aorta  gives  off  three  branches. 

1.  The  arteria  innominata , which  divides  into  the 
right  carotid  and  right  subclavian. 

2 The  left  carotid. 

2.  The  left  subclavian. 

I The  carotids  are  divided  into  external  and  in- 
ternal. 

The  external  carotids  give  off 

1.  The  thyroid , 

2.  The  lingual , 

3.  The  labial , 

4.  The  inf  trior  pharyngeal, 

5.  The  occipital , 

6.  The  posterior  auris , 

7.  The  internal  maxillary , from  which  the  spinous 
artery  of  the  dura  mater , the  lower  maxillary , and 
several  branches  about  the  palate  and  orbit  arise, 

8.  The  temporal. 

The  internal  carotid  affords, 

1.  The  ophthalmic , 

2.  The  middle  cerebral , 

3.  The  communicans , which  inosculates  with  the  ver- 
tebral. 

II.  The  subclavians  give  off  the  following  branches. 

1.  The  internal  mammary , from  which  the  thymic , 
comes  phrenici , pericardiac , and  phrenico-pericar- 
diac  arteries  arise, 

2.  The  inferior  thyroid , which  gives  off  the  tracheal , 
ascending  thyroid , and  transversalis  humeri , 

3.  The  vertebral , which  proceeds  within  the  vertebrae, 
and  forms  within  the  cranium  the  basilary  artery , 
from  which  the  anterior  cerebelli , the  posterior  ce- 
rebri, and  many  branches  about  the  brain , are  given 
off, 

4.  The  cervicalis  profunda , 

5.  The  cervicalis  superficialis , 

6.  The  superior  intercostal , 

7.  The  suprascapular. 

As  soon  as  the  subclavian  arrives  at  the  arm-pit,  it 
is  called  the  axillary  artery ; and  when  the  latter 
reaches  the  arm,  it  is  called  the  brachial. 

The  axillary  artery  gives  oflj 

1.  Four  mammary  arteries , 

2.  The  sub-scapular, 

3.  The  posterior  circumflex, 

4.  The  anterior  circumflex , which  ramify  about  the 

shoulder-joint. 

The  brachial  artery  gives  off, 

1.  Many  lateral  branches , 

2.  The  profunda  humeri  superior , 

3.  The  profunda  humeri  inferior, 

4.  The  great  anastomosing  artery,  which  ramifies 

about  the  elbow-joint. 

The  brachial  artery  then  divides,  about  the  bend  of 
the  arm,  into  the  ulnar  and  radial  arteries,  which  are 
ramified  to  the  ends  of  the  fingers. 

The  ulnar  artery  gives  off, 

1.  Several  recurrent  branches, 

2.  The  common  interosseal,  of  which  the  dorsal  ulnar, 

the  palmaris  prof  unda,  the  palmary  arch , and  the 
digitals , are  branches. 

The  radial  artery  gives  off, 

1.  The  radial  recurrent, 

2.  The  superficialis  voice,  and  then  divides  into  the 

palmaristprofunda,  and  the  digitals. 

b.  The  descending  aorta  gives  off, 

In  the  breast, 

1.  The  bronchial , 

2.  The  cesophageal, 

3.  The  intercostals, 

4.  The  inferior  diaphragmatic. 

Within  the  abdomen, 

1.  The  cceliac,  which  divides  into  three  branches  : 

1.  The  hepatic,  from  which  are  given  off,  before  it 
reaches  the  liver, 

a-  The  duodeno-gastric,  which  sends  off  the  right 
g astro-epiploic  and  the  pancreatico-duodenal, 


ft.  The  pylorica  superior  hepatica  ; 

2.  The  coronaria  ventriculi, 

3.  The  splenic,  which  emits  the  great  and  small 
pancreatics,  the  posterior  gastric,  the  left  gastro- 
epiploic, and  the  vasa  brevia  ; 

2.  The  superior  mesenteric, 

3.  The  emulgents, 

4.  The  spermatics, 

5.  The  inferior  mesenteric, 

6.  The  lumbar  arteries, 

7.  The  middle  sacral. 

c.  The  aorta  then,  bifurcates  into  the  iliacs,  each 
of  which  divide  into  external  and  internal- 
The  internal  iliac,  called  also  hypogastric,  gives  off, 

1.  The  lateral  sacrals , 

2.  The  gluteal,  . 

3.  The  ischiatic, 

4.  The  pudica,  from  which  the  external  hcemorrhoidal, 

the  perineal , and  the  arteries  penis  arise, 

5.  The  obturatory. 

The  external  iliac  gives  off,  in  the  groin, 

1.  The  epigastric, 

2.  The  circumflexia  iliaca  ; 

It  then  passes  under  Poupart’s  ligament,  and  is 
called  the  femoral  artery ; and  sends  off, 

1.  The  profunda, 

2.  The  ramus  anastomoticus  magnus,  which  runs 

about  the  knee  joint ; 

Having  reached  the  ham,  where  it  gives  off  some 
small  branches,  it  is  termed  the  popliteal.  It  then  di- 
vides into  the  anterior  and  posterior  tibial. 

The  tibialis  antica  gives  off, 

1.  The  recurrent, 

2.  The  internal  malleolar, 

3.  The  external  malleolar, 

4.  The  tarsal, 

5.  The  metatarsal , 

6.  The  dorsalis  externa  halicis. 

The  posterior  tibial  sends  off, 

1.  The  nutritia  tibice, 

2.  Many  small  branches , 

3.  The  internal  plantar, 

4.  The  external  plantar,  from  which  an  arch  ifl 

formed,  that  gives  off  the  digitals  of  the  toes. 
ARTHANITA.  (From  apros,  bread  ; because  it  is 
the  food  of  swine.)  The  herb  sow-bread.  See  Cy- 
clamen Europeum. 

Arthre'mbolus.  (From  apOpov,  a joint,  and  cp- 
SaXXin,  to  impel.)  An  instrument  for  reducing  luxated 
bones. 

ARTHRI'TIC.  (Arthriticus ; from  apQpins,  the 
gout.)  Pertaining  to  the  gout. 

Arthritica  herba.  The  JEgopodium podagraria. 
and  several  other  plants,  were  so  called. 

ARTHRI  TIS.  ( Arthritis , tidis,  feem.  ; from  ap- 
Opov,  a joint : because  it  is  commonly  confined  to  the 
joints.)  The  gout.  Dr.  Cullen,  in  his  Nosology,  gives 
it  the  name  of  podagra,  because  he  considers  the  foot 
to  be  the  seat  of  idiophatic  gout.  It  is  arranged  in  the 
class  Pyrexia,  and  order  phlegmasia-,  and  is  divided 
into  four  species,  the  regular,  atonic,  retrocedent,  and 
misplaced.  See  Podagra. 

ARTHROCA'CE.  (From  apdpov,  a joint,  and  Kauy, 
a disease.)  An  ulcer  of  the  cavity  of  the  bone. 

ARTHRO  DIA.  ( Arthrodia , ce.  f. ; from  apdpow,  to 
articulate.)  A species  of  diarthrosis,  or  moveable  con- 
nexion of  bones,  in  which  the  head  of  one  bone  is  re- 
ceived into  the  superficial  cavity  of  another,  so  as  to 
admit  of  motion  in  every  direction,  as  the  head  of  the 
humerus  with  the  glenoid  cavity  of  the  scapula. 

ARTHRODY'NIA.  ( Arthrodynia , as.  f. ; from  ap, 
6pov,  a joint,  and  oSvvrj,  pain.)  Pain  in  a joint.  It  is 
one  of  the  terminations  of  acute  rheumatism.  See 
Rheum  atismus. 

ARTHROPUO'SIS.  ( Arthropuosis , is.  f. ; from 
apOpov,  a joint,  and  irvov,  pus.)  Arthropyosis.  A 
collection  of  pus  in  a joint.  It  is  however  frequently 
applied  to  other  affections.  See  Lumbar  abscess. 

ARTHROSIA.  ( Arthrosice  ; from  apOpow,  to  arti- 
culate : whence  arthrosis,  arthrites.)  _ The  name  of  a 
genus  of  disease  in  Good’s  new  classification,  which 
embraces  rheumatism,  gout,  and  white  swelling.  See 
Nosology  k 

ARTHRO'SIS.  (From  apdpow,  to  articulate,  or 
join  together.)  Articulation. 

ARTICHOKE.  See  Cinara  scolymus. 

Artichoke , French.  See  Cinara  scolymus.  ^ 


ARU 


ASA 


Artichoke , Jerusalem . See  Helianthus  tubernsus. 

ARTICULA'R.  (Articularis ; from  articulus,  a 
toint.)  Belonging  to  a joint. 

Articularis  morbus.  A name  given  to  a disease 
which  more  immediately  infests  the  articuli,  or  joints. 
The  morbus  articularis  is  synonymous  with  the  Greek 
word  arthritis,  and  our  gout. 

Articularis  vena.  A branch  of  the  basilic  vein  is 
so  called  because  it  passes  uuder  the  joint  of  the 
shoulder. 

ARTICULATION.  ( Articulatio  ; from  articulus., 
a joint.)  The  skeleton  is  composed  of  a great  number 
of  bones,  which  are  all  so  admirably  constructed,  and 
with  so  much  affinity  to  each  other,  that  the  extremity 
of  every  bone  is  perfectly  adjusted  to  the  end  of  the 
bone  with  which  it  is  connected  : and  this  connexion 
is  termed  their  articulation  Anatomists  distinguish 
three  kinds  of  articulation ; the  first  they  name  Diar- 
throsis ; the  second,  Synarthrosis ; and  the  third, 
Amphiarthrosis ; which  see,  under  their  respective 
heads 

ARTICULA'TUS.  Articulate;  jointed.  A term 
applied  to  roots,  stems,  leaves,  &c.,  when  they  are  ap- 
parently formed  of  distinct  pieces  united  as  if  one 
piece  grew  out  of  another,  so  as  to  form  a jointed,  but 
connected  whole : in  the  Radix  articulata,  radicals 
shoot  out  from  each  joint,  as  in  the  Oxalis  acetocella , 
wood  sorrel.  The  Caulis  articulata  is  exemplified  in 
the  Cactus  flagelliformis  and  Lathyrus  sylvestris ; 
the  Cactus  opuntia  and  Cactus  ficus  indica  have  arti- 
culate leaves.  The  Oxalis  acetosella  articulate  leaf- 
stalks. 

ARTICULUS.  (From  artus,  a joint;  from  apdpov.) 
1.  A joint.  See  Articulation. 

2.  Botanists  apply  this  term  to  that  part  of  the  stalk 
of  grasses  which  is  intercepted,  or  lies  between  two 
knots , and  also  to  the  knot  itself. 

Arti'scus.  (From  apros,  bread.)  A troch;  so 
called  because  it  is  made  like  a little  loaf. 

Arto'creas.  (From  apros,  bread,  and  up  sag,  flesh.) 
A nourishing  food,  made  of  bread  and  various  meats, 
boiled  together. — Galen. 

Arto'gala.  (From  apros , bread,  and  yaXa,  milk.) 
A cooling  food  made  of  bread  and  milk.  A poultice. 

Arto'meli.  (From  apros,  bread,  and  pc\i,  honey.) 
A cataplasm  made  of  bread  and  honey. — Galen. 

A'RUM.  ( Arum , i.  n. ; from  the  Hebrew  word  ja- 
ron , which  signifies  a dart ; so  named  because  its 
leaves  are  shaped  like  a dart ; or  apa,  injury.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnajan  system. 
Class,  Gynandria  ; Order,  Polyandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  arum. 
See  Arum  maculatum. 

Arum  dracunculus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  called,  in  English,  dragon’s  wort,  and  many- 
leaved arum ; Dracunculus  polyphyllus ; Colubrina 
dracontia;  Serpentaria  gallorum;  Erva  de  Sancta 
Maria  ; Gigarus  serpentaria ; Arum  polyphyllum. 
The  roots  and  leaves  of  this  plant  are  extremely  acri- 
monious, more  so  than  the  Arum  maculatum , with 
which  it  agrees  in  medicinal  virtues. 

Arum  maculatum.  The  systematic  name  for 
common  arum,  or  wake-robin ; the  arum  of  the  phar- 
macopoeias. Arum — acaule;  foliis  hastatis , inte- 

ger rim  is  ; spadice  clavato  of  Linnaeus.  Common 
arum  or  wake-robin.  The  root  is  the  medicinal  part 
of  this  plant,  which,  when  recent,  is  very  acrimo- 
nious ; and,  upon  being  chewed,  excites  an  intolerable 
sensation  of  burning  and  prickling  in  the  tongue, 
which  continues  for  several  hours.  When  cut  in 
slices  and  applied  to  the  skin,  it  has  been  known  to 
produce  blisters.  This  acrimony,  however,  is  gradu- 
ally lost  by  drying,  and  may  be  so  far  dissipated  by 
the  application  of  heat,  as  to  leave  the  root  a bland  fa- 
rinaceous aliment.  In  this  state  it  has  been  made  into 
a wholesome  bread.  It  has  also  been  prepared  as 
starch.  Its  medicinal  quality,  therefore,  resides  wholly 
in  the  active  volatile  matter,  and  consequently,  the 
powdeied  root  must  lose  much  of  its  power,  on  being 
long  kept.  Arum  is  certainly  a powerful  stimulant, 
and,  by  promoting  the  secretions,  may  be  advantage- 
ously employed  in  cachectic  and  chlorotic  cases  in 
rheumatic  affections,  and  in  various  other  complaints 
of  phlegmatic  and  torpid  constitutions ; but  more  es- 
pecially in  a weakened  or  relaxed  state  of  the  sto- 
mach, occasioned  by  the  prevalence  of  viscid  mucus. 
If  this  root  is  given  in  powder,  great  care  should  be 


taken  that  it  be  young  and  newly  dried,  when  it  may 
be  used  in  the  dose  of  a scruple,  or  more,  twice  a day ; 
but  in  rheumatisms,  and  other  disorders  requiring  the 
full  etfect  of  this  medicine,  the  root  should  be  given  in 
a recent  state  ; and,  to  cover  the  insupportable  pun- 
gency it  discovers  on  the  tongue,  Dr.  Lewis  advises  us 
to  administer  it  in  the  form  of  emulsion,  with  gum-ara- 
bic and  spermaceti,  increasing  the  dose  from  ten  grains 
to  upwards  of  a scruple,  three  or  four  times  a day.  In 
this  way,  it  generally  occasioned  a sensation  of  slight 
warmth  about  the  stomach,  and  afterward,  in  the  re- 
moter parts,  manifestly  promoted  perspiration,  and 
frequently  produced  a plentiful  sweat.  Several  obsti- 
nate rheumatic  pains  were  removed  by  this  medicine. 

The  root  answers  quite  as  well  as  garlic  for  cataplasms, 
to  be  applied  on  the  feet  in  deliriums.  The  London 
College,  in  their  Pharmacopoeia,  1788,  ordered  a con- 
serve, in  the  proportion  of  half  a pound  of  the  fresh 
root  to  a pound  and  a half  of  double  refined  sugar,  beat 
together  in  a mortar,  which  appears  to  be  one  of  the 
best  forms  of  exhibiting  arum,  as  its  virtues  are  de- 
stroyed by  drying,  and  are  not  extracted  by  any  men- 
struum. It  may  be  given  to  adults  in  doses  of  a 
draclnn.. 

ARUNDINACEUS.  (From  arundo,  a reed.)  Arun- 
dinaceous  or  reed-like. 

Arundinace*  plant*.  Arundinaceous  plants. 

A name  given  to  a class  of  plants  by  Ray,  from  their 
appearance. 

ARUNDO.  ( Arundo t inis , f. ; supposed  to  be  de- 
rived from  areo,  because  it  soon  becomes  dry.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class  Triandria”,  Order,  Digynia. 

Arundo  bambos.  The  bamboo  plant.  The  young 
shoots  of  this  plant  are  prepared  by  the  natives  of  both 
Indies  with  vinegar,  garlic,  pepper,  &c.  into  excellent 
pickles,  which  promote  the  appetite  and  assist  di- 
gestion. A substance  called  Tabasheer  or  Tabachir, 
which  is  a concretion  of  the  liquor  in  the  cavities  of 
the  cane,  and  extracted  at  certain  seasons,  is  much 
esteemed  as  a medicine  by  the  orientalists. 

Arundo  saccharifera.  The  name  of  the  sugar- 
cane. See  Saccharum  officinale. 

ARYTiE'NO.  Belonging  to  the  arytaenoid  carti- 
lage. Some  muscles  are  so  named  because  they  are  ; 
connected  with  this  cartilage : they  have  also  the  ter 
minal  name  of  the  part  they  go  to ; as  cerytceno-epi 
glottideus. 

Aryt*no-epiglottideus.  A muscle  of  the  epi 
glottis  Aryfteno-Epiglottici  of  Winslow.  It  is  com- 
posed of  a number  of  fibres  running  between  the  aryte- 
noid cartilage  and  epiglottis.  It  pulls  the  side  of  the 
epiglottis  towards  the  external  opening  of  the  glottis, 
and  when  both  act,  they  pull  it  close  upon  the 
glottis. 

ARYTADNOI'D.  ( Arytcenoideus  and  Arytcenoides  ; 
from  apujaiva,  a funnel,  and  eiSos,  shape.)  The  name 
of  some  parts,  from  their  being  funnel-shapped. 

Arytaenoid  cartilage.  Cartilago  aryteenoidea. 

The  name  of  two  cartilages  of  the  larynx.  See  La- 
rynx. 

ARYTADNOTDE'US.  Applied  to  some  muscles, 

vessels,  nerves,  &c. 

Arytaenoideus  major.  See  Arytcenoideus  trans- 

versus. 

Aryt*noideus  minor.  See  Arytcenoideus  obli. 

quus. 

Aryt*noideus  obliquus.  A muscle  of  the  glottis 
Arytcenoideus  minor  of  Douglas.  It  arises  from  the 
base  of  one  arytaenoid  cartilage,  and  croising  its  fel- 
low, is  inserted  near  the  tip  of  the  other  aryuenoid  car- 
tilage. This  muscle  is  occasionally  wanting;  but 
when  present,  and  both  muscles  act,  their  use  is  to 
pull  the  arytaenoid  cartilages  towards  eaah  other. 

Aryt*noideus  transvkrsus.  An  azygos  or  sin- 
gle muscle  of  the  glottis.  Arytcenoideus  major  of 
Douglas.  It  arises  from  the  side  of  one  arytaenoid  car- 
tilage from  near  its  articulation  with  the  cricoid  to 
near  its  tip.  The  fibres  run  across,  and  are  inserted  in 
the  same  manner  into  the  other  arytaenoid  cartilage. 

Its  use  is  to  shut  the  glottis,  by  bringing  the  two  aryta;- 
noid  cartilages,  with  their  ligaments,  nearer  to  each 
other. 

ASAFCE'TIDA.  ( Asafcetida , ce , f. ; from  the  He 
brew  word  asa , to  heal.)  See  Ferula. 

Asa'phatum.  (From  a,  neg.  and  oafyys,  clear,  so 
called  by  reason  of  their  minuteness. l An  intercuta 


ASC 


ASB 

neous  disorder,  generated  in  the  pores,  like  worms 

with  black  heads. 

Asa'phia.  (From  a,  neg.  and  tracpris,  clear.)  A 
d<  t cl  in  utterance  or  pronunciation 

ASA  RABACCA.  See  Ms  arum  Europceum. 

A'SARUM.  ( Asarurn , i.  n. ; from  a,  neg.  and  cai- 
pw,  to  adorn ; because  it  was  not  admitted  into  the 
ancient  coronal  wreaths.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Dodeca.nd.ria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  asarabacca. 
See  Asarum  Europceum. 

Asarum  europ.eum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
asarabacca  of  the  shops.  Nardus  montana ; Nardus 
rustica;  As  arum — foliis  reniformibus , obtusis , binis 
of  Linn$uSi  This  plant  is  a native  of  England,  but 
not  very  common.  Its  leaves  are  extremely  acrid,  and 
are  occasionally  used,  when  powdered,  as  a sternuta- 
tory. For  this  purpose,  the  leaves,  as  being  less  acrid 
than  tlie  roots,  are  preferred,  and  in  moderate  doses, 
not  exceeding  a few  grains,  snuffed  up  the  nose,  for 
several  evenings,  produce  a pretty  large  watery  dis- 
charge, which  continues  for  several  days  together,  by 
which  headache,  toothache,  ophthalmia,  and  some 
paralytic  and  soporific  complaints  have  been  effectu- 
ally relieved. 

Prior  to  the  introduction  of  ipecacuanha,  the  leaves 
and  root  of  this  plant  were  frequently  employed  on 
account  of  their  emetic  power:  the  dose  of  the  dried 
leaves  was  20  grains  ; of  the  dried  roots  10  grains.  As 
they  were  occasionally  violent  in  their  operation,  they 
have  fallen  into  disuse. 

Asarum  hypocistis.  A parasitical  plant  which 
grows  in  warm  climates,  from  the  roots  of  the  Cistus. 
The  juice,  succus  hypocistidis,  is  a mild  astringent,  of 
no  particular  smell  nor  flavour.  It  has  fallen  into 
disuse. 

ASBESTOS.  Asbestos.  A mineral  of  which  there 
are  five  varieties,  all  more  or  less  flexible  and  fibrous. 

1.  Amianthus  occurs  in  very  long,  fine,  flexible,  elastic 
fibres,  of  a white,  greenish,  or  reddish  colour.  It  is 
somewhat  unctuous  to  the  touch,  has  a silky  or  pearly 
lustre,  and  is  slightly  translucent.  Sectile  ; tough  ; 
sp.  grav.  from  1 to  2.3. 

The  ancients  manufactured  cloth  out  of  the  fibres 
of  asbestos,  for  the  purpose,  it  is  said,  of  wrapping  up 
the  bodies  of  the  dead,  when  exposed  on  the  funeral 
pile.  Several  moderns  have  likewise  succeeded  in 
making  this  cloth,  the  chief  artifice  of  which  seems  to 
consist  in  the  admixture  of  flax  and  a liberal  use  of 
oil;  both  which  substances  are  afterward  consumed 
by  exposing  the  cloth  for  a certain  time  to  a red  heat. 
Although  the  cloth  of  asbestos,  when  soiled,  is  restored 
to  its  primitive  whiteness  by  heating  in  the  fire,  it  is 
found,  nevertheless,  by  several  authentic  experiments, 
that  its  weight  diminishes  by  such  treatment.  The 
fibres  of  asbestos,  exposed  to  the  violent  heat  of  the 
blow-pipe,  exhibit  slight  indications  cf  fusion  ; though 
the  parts,  instead  of  running  together,  moulder  away, 
and  part  fall  down,  while  the  rest  seem  to  disappear 
before  the  current  of  air.  Ignition  impairs  the  flexibi- 
lity of  asbestos  in  a slight  degree. 

2.  Common  asbestos  occurs  in  masses  of  fibres  of  a 
dull  greenish  colour,  and  of  a somewhat  pearly  lustre. 
Fragments  splintery.  It  is  scarcely  flexible,  and  greatly 
denser  than  amianthus.  It  is  more  abundant  than 
amianthus,  and  is  found  usually  in  serpentine,  as  at 
Portsoy,  the  Isle  of  Anglesea,  and  the  Lizard  in  Corn- 
wall. It  was  found  in  the  limestone  of  Glentilt,  by 
Dr.  M‘Culloch,  in  a pasty  state,  but  it  soon  hardened 
by  exposure  to  air. 

3.  Mountain  Leather  consists  not  of  parallel  fibres 
like  the  preceding,  but  interwoven  and  interlaced  so  as 
to  become  tough.  When  in  very  thin  pieces  it  is  cailed 
mountain  paper.  Its  colour  is  yellowish-white,  and  its 
touch  meagre.  It  is  found  at  Wanlockhead,  in  La- 
narkshire. Its  specific  gravity  is  uncertain. 

4.  Mountain  Cork , or  Elastic  Asbestos , is,  like  the 

E receding,  of  an  interlaced  fibrous  texture ; is  opaque, 
as  a meagre  feel  and  appearance,  not  unlike  common 
cork,  and  like  it,  too,  is  somewhat  elastic.  It  swims 
on  water.  Its  colours  are  white,  gray,  and  yellowish- 
brown  ; receives  an  impression  from  the  nail;  very 
tough ; cracks  when  handled,  and  melts  with  difficulty 
before  the  blow-pipe. 

5.  Mountain  IVood,  or  Ligniform  asbestos,  is  usually 

inactive,  of  a brown  colour,  aiid  having  the  aspect  of 


wood.  Internal  lustre  glimmering  Soft,  scctfle,  and 
tough  ; opaque ; feels  meagre ; fusible  into  a black 
slag.  Sp.  grav.  2.0.  It  is  found  in  the  Tyrol ; Dau- 
phiny  ; and  in  Scotland,  at  Glentilt,  Portsoy,  and  Kil- 
drumle. 

Ascaloni'tes.  A species  of  onion. 

ASCA'RIDES.  The  plural  of  ascatis. 

ASCARIS.  ( Ascaris , idis  ; from  aoKtw,  to  move 
about ; so  called  from  its  continued  troublesome  mo- 
tion.) The  name  of  a genus  of  intestinal  worms. 
There  are  several  species  of  this  genus.  Those  which 
belong  to  the  human  body  are : — 

1.  Ascaris  vermicularis,  the  thread  or  maw  worm, 
which  is  very  small  and  slender,  not  exceeding  hall  an 
inch  in  length  ; it  inhabits  the  rectum. 

2.  Ascaris  bumbricoides,  the  long  and  round  worm, 
which  is  a foot  in  length,  and  about  the  breadth  of  a 
goose-quill. 

ASCE'NDENS.  (From  ad  and  scando , to  ascend.) 
Adscendens.  Ascending.  Applied  to  muscles,  leaves, 
stalks,  &c.  from  their  direction  ; as  musculus  obliquus 
ascendens , folium  ascendens , cauliy  ascendens , the 
leaves  of  the  geranium  vitifolium  and  stems  of  the 
hedysarum  onobrychis , &c. 

Ascendens  obliquus.  See  Obliquus  internus  ab- 
dominus. 

A'scia.  An  axe  or  chisel.  A simple  bandage  ; so 
called  from  its  shape  in  position. — Galen. 

ASCIDIATUS.  (From  ascidium ,)  Ascidiate  or 
pitcherform : a term  applied  to  a leaf  and  other  parts 
of  plants  which  are  so  formed ; .the  folium  ascidiatum 
is  seen  in  the  Nepenthes  Distillatoria}  and  in  Sa- 
racenia. 

ASCIDIUM.  (From  aaiaSiov,  a small  bottle.) 
The  pitcher.  A term  introduced  by  Willdenow  into 
botany  to  express  a hollow  foliaceous  appendage,  re- 
sembling a small  pitcher.  It  is  of  rare  occurrence, 
but  has  been  found  as  a caulinar)  foliar , and  a pedun- 
cular or  floral  appendage. 

1.  The  caulinar  belongs  to  the  Austalasian  plant  Ce- 
phalotus  follicularis. 

2.  The  foliar  is  peculiar  to  the  genus  Nepenthes. 

3.  The  peduncular  on  the  Surubea  quianensis. 

ASCI'TES.  ( Ascites , ce.  m. ; from  acicoi , a sack, 

or  bottle ; so  called  from  its  bottle-like  protuberancy.) 
Dropsy  of  the  belly.  A tense,  but  scarcely  elastic, 
swelling  of  the  abdomen  from  accumulation  of  water. 
Cullen  ranks  this  genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Ca- 
chexia, and  order,  Intumescentice.  He  enumerates 
two  species ; 

1.  Ascites  abdominalis,  when  the  water  is  in  the 
cavity  of  the  peritoneum,  which  is  known  by  the 
equal  swelling  of  the  parietes  of  the  abdomen. 

2.  Ascites  saccatus , or  encysted  dropsy,  in  which 
the  water  is  encysted,  as  in  the  ovarium:  the  fluctua- 
tion is  here  less  evident,  and  the  swelling  is  at  first 
partial. 

Ascites  is  often  preceded  by  loss  of  appetite,  slug 
gishness,  dryness  of  the  skin,  oppression  at  the  chest, 
cough,  diminution  of  the  natural  discharge  of  mine, 
and  costiveness.  Shortly  after  the  appearance  of 
these  symptoms,  a protuberance  is  perceived  in  the 
hypugastrium,  which  extends  gradually,  and  keeps  on 
increasing,  until  the  whole- abdomen  becomes  at  length 
uniformly  swelled  and  tense.  The  distension  and 
sense  of  weight,  although  considerable,  vary  some- 
what according  to  the  posture  of  the  body,  the  weight 
being  felt  the  most  on  that  side  on  which  the  patient 
lies,  while,  at  the  same  time,  the  distention  becomes 
somewhat  less  on  the  opposite  side.  In  general,  the 
practitioner  may  be  sensible  of  the  fluctuation  of  the 
water,  by  applying  his  left  hand  on  one  side  of  the 
abdomen,  and  then  striking  on  the  other  side  with  his 
right.  In  some  cases,  it  will  be  obvious  to  the  ear. 
As  the  collection  of  water  becomes  more  considerable, 
the  difficulty  of  breathing  is  much  increased,  the 
countenance  exhibits  a pale  and  bloated  appearance, 
an  immoderate  thirst,  the  skin  is  dry  and  parched,  and 
the  urine  is  very  scanty,  thick,  high  coloured,  and 
deposits  a lateritious  sediment.  With  respect  to  the 
pulse,  it  is  variable,  being  sometimes  considerably 
quickened,  and,  at  other  times,  slower  than  natural. 
The  principal  difficulty,  which  prevails  in  ascites,  is 
the  being  able  to  distinguish,  with  certainty,  when  the 
water  is  in  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen,  or  when  it  is  in 
the  different  states  of  encysted  dropsy.  To  form  a 
just  judgment,  we  should  attend  to  the  following  cir- 


ASC 


ASP 


cumstances: — When  the  preceding  symptoms  gave 
suspicion  of  a general  hydropic  diathesis ; when,  at 
the  same  time,  some  degree  of  dropsy  appears  in  other 
parts  of  the  body ; and  when,  from  its  first  appearance, 
the  swelling  has  been  equally  diffused  over  the  whole 
belly,  we  may  generally  presume  that  the  water  is  in 
the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  But  when  an  ascites  has 
not  been  preceded  by  any  remarkable  cachectic  state 
of  the  system,  and  when,  at  its  beginning,  the  tumour 
and  tension  had  appeared  in  one  part  of  the  belly  more 
than  another,  there  is  reason  to  suspect  an  encysted 
dropsy.  Even  when  the  tension  and  tumour  of  the 
belly  have  become  general,  yet,  if  the  system  or  the 
body  in  general  appear  to  be  little  affected ; if  the  pa- 
tient’s strength  be  little  impaired  ; if  the  appetite  con- 
tinue pretty  entire,  and  the  natural  sleep  be  little  inter- 
rupted ; if  the  menses  in  females  continue  to  flow  as 
usual : if  there  be  yet  no  anasarca,  or,  though  it  may 
have  already  taken  place,  if  it  be  still  confined  to  the 
lower  extremities,  and  there  be  no  leucophlegmatic 
paleness  or  sallow  colour  in  the  countenance ; if  there 
be  no  fever,  nor  so  much  thirst  and  scarcity  of  urine 
as  occur  in  a more  general  affection  : then  according 
as  more  of  these  different  circumstances  take  place, 
there  will  be  the  stronger  grounds  for  supposing  the 
ascites  to  be  of  the  encysted  kind.  The  encysted  form 
of  the  disease  scarcely  admits  of  a perfect  cure,  though 
its  progress  to  a fatal  termination  is  generally  very 
slow  ; and  the  peritonteal  dropsy  is  mostly  very  obsti- 
nate, depending  usually  on  organic  disease  in  the  liver, 
or  other  abdominal  viscera.  The  plan  of  treatment 
agrees  very  much  with  that  of  •anasarca ; which  see. 
The  operation  of  paracentesis  should  only  be  per- 
formed where  the  distension  is  very  great,'  and  the  re- 
spiration or  other  important  functions  impeded  ; and 
it  will  often  be  better  not  to  draw  off  the  whole  of  the 
fluid  at  once ; great  care  must  be  taken,  too,  to  keep 
up  sufficient  pressure  by  a broad  bandage  over  the  ab- 
domen ; for  even  fatal  syncope  has  arisen  from  the  ne- 
glect of  this.  The  contraction  of  the  muscles  will  be 
promoted  by  friction.  Cathartics  are  found  more  de- 
cidedly beneficial  than  in  anasarca,  where  the  bowels 
will  bear  their  liberal  use.  Diuretics  too,  are  of  great 
importance  in  the  treatment ; and,  among  other  means 
of  increasing  the  flow  of  urine,  long-continued  gentle 
friction  of  the  abdomen  with  oil  has  been  sometimes 
very  successful,  probably  by  promoting  absorption  in 
the  first  instance  ; the  only  use  of  the  oil  seems  to  be 
that  the  friction  is  thereby  better  borne.  In  cases 
where  visceral  obstructions  have  led  to  the  effusion, 
these  must  be  removed,  before  a cure  can  be  accom- 
plished : and  for  this  purpose  mercury  is  the  remedy 
most  to  be  depended  upon,  besides  that  in  combina- 
tion with  squill,  or  digitalis,  it  will  often  prove  power- 
fully diuretic.  Tonic  medicines,  a nutritious  diet,  and, 
if  the  complaint  appears  giving  way,  such  exercise  as 
the  patient  can  take,  without  fatigue,  with  other  means 
of  improving  the  general  health,  ought  not  to  be  ne- 
glected. 

ASCLEPI'ADES,  a celebrated  physician,  bom  at 
Prusa,  in  Bithynia,  who  flourished  somewhat  before 
the  time  of  Pompey.  He  originally  taught  rhetoric, 
but  not  meeting  with  success,  applied  himself  to  the 
study  of  medicine,  in  which  he  soon  became  famous 
from  the  novelty  of  his  theory  and  practice.  He  sup- 
poses disease  to  arise  from  the  motion  of  the  particles 
of  the  blood  and  other  fluids  being  obstructed  by  the 
straitness  of  the  vessels,  whence  pain,  fever,  Sec.  en- 
sued. He  deprecated  the  use  of  violent  remedies,  as 
emetics  and  purgatives,  but  frequently  employed  clys- 
ters, when  costiveness  attended.  In  fevers,  he  chiefly 
relied  on  a complete  abstinence  from  food  or  drink  for 
three  days  or  more ; but  when  their  violence  abated, 
allowed  animal  food  and  wine.  In  pleurisies,  and 
other  complaints  attended  with  violent  pain,  he  pre- 
scribed bleeding;  but  in  those  of  a chronic  nature, 
depended  principally  on  abstinence,  exercise,  baths, 
and  frictions.  None  of  his  works  remain  at  present. 

He  is  said  to  have  pledged  his  reputation  on  the  pre- 
servation of  his  own  health,  which  he  retained  to  a 
great  age,  and  died  at  length  from  a fall. 

ASCLE'PIAS.  (From  Asclepias , adis.  f.;  so  named  - 
after  its  discoverer;  or  from  JEsculapius,  the  god  of 
medicine.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Digynia. 

Asclepias  syriaca.  Syrian  dog’s  bane.  This  plant 
is  particularly  noisonous  to  dogs,  and  also  to  the  hu- 


man species.  Boiling  appears  to  destroy  the  poison  in 
the  young  shoots,  which  are  then  said  to  be  esculen^. 
and  flavoured  like  asparagus. 

Asclepias  vincetoxicum.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  vincetoxicum  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Ilermi- 
dinaria;  Asclepias.  Swallew-wort ; Tame  jxfison. 
The  root  of  this  plant  smells,  when  fresh,  somewhat 
of  valerian ; chewed,  it  imparts  at  first  a considerable 
sweetness,  which  is  soon  succeeded  by  an  unpleasant 
spbacrid  bitterness.  It  is  given  in  some  countries  in 
the  cure  of  glandular  obstructions. 

Asole'pios.  (From  Asclepias , its  inventor.)  A 
dried  smegna  and  collyrium  described  by  Galen. 

Asco'ma.  (From  aoicos,  a bottle.)  The  eminence 
of  the  pubes  at  the  years  of  maturity,  so  called  from 
its  shape. 

ASCYROIDEAl.  A name  given  by  Scoipoli  to  a 
class  of  plants  which  resemble  the  Ascyrum , St. 
Peter’s  worth. 

A'sef.  A pustule  like  a millet  seed. 

A'segon.  Asegen ; Asogen.  Dragon’s  blood.  See 
Calamus  rotang. 

ASE'LLIUS,  Gaspar,  of  Cremona,  bom  about  the 
year  1580,  taught  anatomy  at  Paris  with  great  reputa- 
tion. In  1622,  he  discovered  the  lacteals  in  a dog 
opened  soon  after  a meal,  and  noticed  their  valves,  but 
supposed  they  wer.t  to  the  liver.  These  vessels,  he 
candidly  observes,  had  been  mentioned  by  some  of  the 
earliest  medical  writers,  but  not  described,  nor  their 
function  stated ; and  not  being  noticed  by  any  modern 
anatomist  previously,  the  discovery  is  properly  attri- 
buted to  him.  His  death  took  place  four  years  after, 
subsequent  to  which  his  dissertation  on  the  subject 
was  published  by  his  friends. 

ASH.  See  Fraxinus  excelsior. 

[Ashes.  The  residuum,  after  the  incineration  of 
wood.  It  is  also  applied  to  the  alkali  extracted  by 
lixiviation,  under  the  names  of  Pot-ash,  and  Pearl-ash, 
both  of  which  are  included  in  the  mercantile  title 
Ashes.  A.] 

Asiaticum  balsamum.  Balm  of  Gilead. 

A'SINUS.  The  ass.  A species  of  the  genus  Eguus. 
Its  milk  is  preferred  to  cow’s  and  other  kinds  of  milk, 
in  phthisical  cases,  and  where  the  stomach  is  weak ; 
as  containing  less  oleaginous  particles,  and  being  more 
easily  converted  into  chyle.  See  Milk,  Asses. 
Asini'num  lac.  Asses’  milk. 

Asi'ti.  (From  a,  neg.  and  airos,  food.)  Asitia. 
Those  are  so  called  who  take  no  food,  for  want  of 
appetite. 

A'sjogam.  (Indian.)  A tree  growing  in  Malabar 
and  the  East  Indies,  the  juice  of  which  is  used  against 
the  colic. 

Aso'des.  (Frem  a6u>,  to  nauseate.)  A nausea  or 
loathing,  or  a fever  with  much  sense  of  heat  and  nau- 
sea.— Aretceus. 

Aspadia'lis.  A suppression  of  urine  from  an  im- 
perforated urethra. 

Aspalathom:.  See  Lignum  aToes. 

ASPALATHUS.  (From  a,  and  an  aw,  because  the 
thorns  were  not  easily  drawn  out  of  the  wounds 
they  made.)  ’ The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Lin  naan  system.  Class,  Diadelphia  ; Order,  Decan- 
dria. 

Aspalathus  canariensis.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  rose-wood  tree,  or  lignum  rhodium  of  the  an- 
cients. An  essential  oil  is  obtained  from  the  roots, 
which  is  used  principally  as  a perfume ; but  is  an  ex- 
cellent cordial  and  carminative  given  internally.  The 
best  preparation  is  a tincture,  made  by  macerating  four 
ounces  of  the  wood  in  a pint  of  rectified  spirit. 

ASPARAGIN.  White  transparent  crystals,  of  a pecu- 
liar vegetable  principle,  which  spontaneously  form  in 
asparagus  juice  which  has  been  evaporated  to  the  con- 
sistence of  syrup.  They  are  in  the  form  of  rhomboida! 
prisms,  hard  and  brittle,  having  a cool  and  slightly  nau- 
seous taste.  They  dissolve  in  hot tvater,  but  sparingly 
in  cold  water,  and  not  at  all  in  alkohol.  On  being  heat- 
ed, they  swell  and  emit  penetrating  vapours,  which 
affect  the  eyes  and  nose  like  wood-smoke.  Their  solu- 
tion does  not  change  vegetable  blues ; nor  is  it  affected 
by  hydrosulphuret  of  potassa,  oxalate  of  ammonia,  ace- 
tate of  lead,  or  infusion  of  galls.  Lime  disengages  am- 
monia  from  it;  though  none  is  evolved  by  triturating  it 
with  potassa.  The  asparagus  juice  should  be  first 
heated  to  coagulate  the  albumen,  then  filtered  and  left 
to  spontaneous  evaporation  for  15  or  20  days.  Along 


ASP 


ASP 


Ipvith  the  asparagin  crystals,  others  in  needles  of  little 
consistency  appear,  analogous  to  mannite , from  which 
the  first  can  be  easily  picked  out. — Vau.qu.tlin  and 
Robiquet.  Annales  de  C/umie , vol.  lv.  and  Nichol- 
son's Journal , 15. 

ASPA  RAGUS.  (, Asparagus , i.  m.  AGirapayoS)  a 
young  shoot  before  it  unfolds  its  leaves.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Hexandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  Asparagus. 

2.  The  pharmacopiEial  name  of  the  sparage.  See 
Asparagus  ojjicinalis. 

Asparagus  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  aspaiagus,  the  root  of  which  has  been  esteemed  as 
a diuretic.  It  is  mostly  employed  as  a food,  but  it 
contains  very  little  nourishment.  A peculiar  vegeta- 
ble piincipte,  called  aspaiagin,  has  been  found  in  this 
piant.  See  Asparagin. 

[ASPARAGUS  STONE.  This  is  one  of  the  va- 
rieties of  the  phosphate  of  lime.  Vauquelin  found  it 
to  contain  lime  54.28,  phosphoric  acid  45.72 ; by  which 
analysis  it  appears  to  differ  but  little  from  Apatite, 
the  other  variety,  which  see.  A.] 

Aspa'sia.  (From  a,  for  apa,  together,  and  <nraw , to 
draw.)  A constrictive  medicine  for  the  pudendum 
muliebrc.  Capivac . 

ASPER.  Rough.  Applied  to  parts  which  are 
rough,  as  linea  aspera,  &c. 

In  the  language  of  botany,  scaler  and  asper  are 
used  synonymously. 

Asper  caulis.  Caulis  scaber.  Scabrous  stem ; is 
when  it  is  thickly  covered  with  papilla}  which  are  not 
visible,  but  can  be  felt  when  running  the  finger  along 
•t ; as  in  Galium  aperine , Lithospermurn  arvense , 
Centaurea  nigra , &c. 

Aspera  arteria.  (So  called  from  the  inequality 
of  its  cartilages.)  See  Trachea. 

ASPERIFOLLE.  (From  asper , rough.)  Rough- 
leaved p ants.  The  name  of  a class  and  of  an  order 
of  plants  given  by  Boerhaave,  Ray,  Linnaeus,  &c. 

ASPE'RULA.  (A  diminutive  of  asper , the  seeds 
being  rough.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnsean  system.  Class,  Tetrandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

Asperula  odorata.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
officinal  matrisylva.  Woodruff.  It  is  a low  umbelli- 
ferous plant,  growing  wild  in  woods  and  copses,  and 
flowering  in  May.  It  hath  an  agreeable  odour,  which 
is  much  improved  by  moderate  drying  ; the  taste  is  a 
little  austere.  It  impa;  ts  its  flavour  to  vinous  liquors  ; 
and  is  commended  as  a cordial  and  deobstruent 
remedy. 

Asphalti'tis.  1.  A kind  of  trefoil. 

2.  The  last  vertebra  of  the  loins. 

ASPHALTUM.  Asphaltus.  This  substance,  like- 
wise celled  Bitumen  Judaicum , or  Jews’  Pitch,  is  a 
smooth,  hard,  brittle,  black  or  brown  substance,  which 
breaks  with  a polish,  melts  easily  when  iieated,  and 
when  pure  burns  without  leaving  any  ashes.  It  is 
found  in  a soft  or  liquid  state  on  the  surface  of  the 
Dead  sea,  but  by  age  grows*dry  and  hard.  The  same 
kind  of  bitumen  is  likewise  found  in  the  earth  in  other 
parts  of  the  world  ; in  China  ; America,  particularly 
in  the  island  of  Trinidad  ; and  some  parts  of  Europe, 
as  the  Carpathian  hills,  France,  Neufchatel,  &c. 

Accoiding  to  Neumann,  the  asphaltum  of  the  shops 
is  a very  different  compound  from  the  native  bitumen ; 
and  varies,  of  course,  in  its  properties,  according  to 
the  nature  of  the  ingredients  made  use  of  in  forming 
it.  On  this  account,  and  probably  from  other  reasons, 
the  use  of  asphaltum,  as  an  article  of  the  materia 
medica,  is  totally  laid  aside. 

The  Egyptians  used  asphaltum  in  embalming,  under 
the  name  of  mumia  mineralis,  for  which  it  is  well 
adapted.  It  was  used  for  mortar  at  Babylon. 

[Tins  bitumen  is  dry  and  solid,  and  usually  very 
brittle,  but  often  too  hard  to  receive  an  impression 
from  the  finger  nail.  In  some  varieties  its  fracture  is 
more  or  less  conchoidal,  and  shining  with  a resinous 
lustre ; in  others,  it  is  earthy,  or  uneven,  or  nearly 
dull.  The  earthy  variety  is  less  hard  than  the  others, 
and  seems  to  be  intermediate  between  Maltha  and 
the  harder  kinds  of  Asphaltum. — Cl.  Min. 

The  ancient  bricks  of  Babylon,  several  of  which  I 
have  had  the  best  opportunities  to  examine,  have  a 
portion  of  bitumen  adhering  to  them.  This  is  black, 
and  emits,  by  burning,  a somewhat  aromatic  vapour. 
It  appears  to  have  lost  none  of  its  peculiar  qualities, 

G2 


during  the  term  of  3000  or  4000  years,  since  it  Was 
first  incorporated  as  a cement,  in  the  walls  and  towers 
constructed  by  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  Shinaar. 
The  specimens  I possess  of  modern  bitumen  from 
Bost  ah,  or  its  vicinity,  are  substantially  the  same  with 
that  used  of  old. 

Asphaltum  of  St.  Antonio,  at  the  western  extremity 
of  Cuba,  is  compact,  deep  black,  and  capable  of  sup- 
potting  a flame  when  heated  and  set  on  fire.  That 
from  Trinidad  island  is  not  so  pure ; but  is  stated  to 
be  much  more  abundant.  Specimens  from  St.  Ste- 
phens, near  the  Alabama  river,  were  sent  me  by  Mr. 
Magoffin. — Mitchill's  Notes  to  Philips's  Min.  A.] 

ASPHO'DELUS.  ( Asphodelus , i.  m.  from  aam s,  a 
serpent,  and  SeiXos,  fearful ; because  it  destroys  the 
venom  of  serpents : or  from  anodeXos,  ashes,  because 
it  was  formerly  sown  upon  the  graves  of  the  dead.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Limuean  sys 
tern,  ©lass,  Hexandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  daffodil.  See 
Asphodelus  ramosus. 

Asphodelus  ramosus.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  officinal,  or  branched  asphodel.  Asphodelus : — 
caulenudo ; foliis  enciformibus , carinatis , Icevibus , of 
Linnaeus.  The  plant  was  formerly  supposed  to  be  elfi 
cacious  in  the  cure  of  sordid  ulcers.  It  is  now  wholly 
laid  aside. 

ASPHY'XIA.  ( Asphyxia , ce.  f. ; from  a,  priv.  and 
<r0u£is,  a pulse.)  The  state  of  the  body,  during  life,  in 
which  the  pulsation  of  the  heart  and  arteries  cannot 
be  perceived.  There  are  several  species  of  asphyxia 
enumerated  by  different  authors.  See  Syncope. 

Aspidi'scus.  (From  aff7rij,  a buckler.)  The  sphincter 
muscle  of  the  anus  was  formerly  so  called  from  its 
shape. — Ccelius  Aureliamis. 

[ASPINWALL,  William,  M.  D.  was  born  in 
Brookline,  Mass.,  on  the  23d  of  May,  (old  style,)  1743. 
His  ancestors  emigrated  from  England  about  the  year 
1030.  He  was  fitted  for  College  by  the  Rev.  Amos 
Adams,  minister  of  Roxbury,  and  was  graduated  at 
Harvard  University,  in  1704.  It  was  the  personal 
interest  which  he  took  in  the  revolutionary  contest, 
acting  upon  a mind  deeply  imbued  with  a sense  of 
his  country’s  wrongs,  that  gave  strength  and  tone  to 
his  sentiments  in  after  life.  Dr.  Aspinwall’s  language 
on  political  subjects  was  bold  and  strong,  his  creed 
being  that  of  a democratic  republican.  In  the  unhappy 
scenes  of  party  excitement,  he  unwaveringly  adhered 
to  what  he  deemed  original  and  fundamental  princi- 
ples ; but  he  aimed  to  preserve  a good  conscience,  and 
to  do  justice  to  the  honest  opinions,  the  pure  motives, 
and  undoubted  integrity  of  his  opponents.  He  was 
not  a political  persecutor ; and,  when  he  was  in  the 
councils  of  the  State,  resolutely  declined  acting  with 
his  coadjutors,  who  were  disposed  to  drive  from  office 
incumbents,  whose  only  fault  was  what  they  deemed 
political  heresy. 

After  the  death  of  the  eminent  and  distinguished 
Dr.  Zabdiel  Boylston,  the  first  inoculator  of  small-pox 
in  America,  Dr.  Aspinwall  established  himself  in  that 
undertaking,  and  erected  hospitals  for  that  purpose  in 
Brookline.  Perhaps  no  practitioner  in  the  United 
States  ever  inoculated  so  many  persons,  or  acquired 
such  skill  and  celebrity  in  treating  this  malignant 
disease,  as  Dr.  Aspinwall.  Besides  his  practice  in 
this  disorder  when  it  generally  spread,  he  was  allowed, 
after  the  year  1788,  to  keep  a hospital  open  at  ail 
times,  to  which  great  numbers  resorted,  and  from 
which  they  returned  with  warm  expressions  of  satis- 
faction. He  continued  in  the  successful  treatment  of 
this  disease,  till  the  general  introduction  of  vaccine 
inoculation.  He  had  made  ample  accommodation 
for  enlarged  practice,  and  established  what  might 
have  been  justly  deemed  a sure  foundation  for  pros- 
perity, when  vaccine  inoculation  was  first  introduced. 
He  well  knew  that  if  vaccination  possessed  the  virtues 
ascribed  to  it,  his  schemes  of  fortune  and  usefulness 
arising  from  inoculation  at  his  hospital,  were  ruined  ; 
that  he  should  be  involved  in  loss,  and  his  anticipa- 
tions of  fortune  would  be  blasted.  But  as  an  honest 
man  and  faithful  physician,  he  deemed  it  his  duty  to 
inquire  into  the  efficacy  of  the  novel  substitute.  With 
the  utmost  alacrity,  therefore,  he  gave  the  experiment 
a fair  trial,  promptly  acknowledged  its  efficacy,  and 
relinquished  l:is  own  establishment.  The  forgoing 
is  corroborated  by  the  following  statement,  recently 
made  by  Dr.  Waterhouse,  in  the  Medical  Intelligencer 


ASP 


AST 


“ The  late  Dr.  Aspinwall,  a man  of  great  sagacity, 
and  uncommonly  well  grounded  in  the  principles  of 
bis  profession,  gave  evidence  of  it  on  the  first  sight  of 
a vaccine  pustule.  I had  invited  all  the  elder  physi- 
cians of  Boston,  and  tho  vicinity  of  Cambridge,  to  see 
the  first  vaccine  pustules  ever  raised  in  the  new 
world.  They  gave  them  the  ordinary  inspection  on 
the  skin ; all  but  Dr.  Aspimvall,  whose  attention  was 
rivetted  on  the  pustule,  its  areola,  and  efflorescence. 
Tie  came  a second  time,  and  viewed  the  inoculated 
part  in  every  light,  and  reviewed  it,  and  seemed  loath 
to  leave  the  sight  of  it.  He  seemed  wrapped  in  seri- 
ous thought,  and  said  repeatedly — 4 This  pustule  is  so 
like  small-pox,  and  yet  it  is  not  small-pox,  that  should 
it,  on  scabbing,  take  out  a portion  of  the  true  skin,  so 
as  to  leave  an  indelible  mark  or  pit  behind,  I shall  be 
ready  to  conclude  that  it  is  a mild  species  of  small- 
pox, hitherto  unknown  here.’  He  had  been  in  the 
habit  of  examining  the  small-pox  pimple  and  pustule 
through  glasses,  to  know  if  it  4 had  taken;'  and  he 
remarked,  that  they  were  peculiar,  unique,  and  unlike 
any  other  eruption  he  ever  saw ; but  that  this  kine- 
ock  came  the  nearest  to  it.  Some  time  after,  I gave 
im  a portion  of  the  virus  to  make  his  own  experi- 
ments, and  observe  the  progress  of  its  inoculation, 
and  coincidence  of  the  constitutional  symptoms ; when 
he  observed,  that  its  progress,  febrile  affection,  and  ! 
mode  of  scabbing,  were  very  like  small-pox,  and  so  of 
the  indelible  mark  left  on  the  arm ; yet,  throughout 
the  whole  visible  affection,  different.  To  crown  the 
whole  of  his  honourable  conduct,  he  some  time  after 
took  all  those  of  my  family  whom  I had  vaccinated, 
into  his  small-pox  hospital,  the  only  licensed  one  in 
the  state,  and  there  tested  them  to  his  satisfaction, 
and  one  to  the  very  verge  of  rigid  experiment : and 
then  he  said  to  me  and  others—*  This  new  inoculation 
of  yours  is  no  sham.  As  a man  of  humanity , I rejoice 
in  it ; although  it  will  take  from  me  a handsome 
annual  income.1  His  conduct  throughout  was  so 
strongly  marked  with  superior  intelligence,  generosity, 
and  honour,  as  to  excite  my  esteem  and  respect;  and 
I accordingly  dedicate  this  effusion  of  gratitude  to  the 
memory  of  the  Hon.  William  Aspinwall,  M.  D. ; a 
gentleman  respectable  in  public  life  as  a counsellor, 
and  an' honour  to  his  profession  as  a physician.” — 
Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

ASPLE'NIUM.  ( Asplenium , ii.  n.;  from  a,  priv. 
an\r)v,  the  spleen ; because  it  was  supposed  to  remove 
disorders  of  the  spleen.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaan  system.  Class,  Cryptogamia ; 
Order,  Filices. 

Asplenium  ceterach.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  herb  spleenwort.  Miltwaste.  Scolopendria  vera  ; 
Dorodilla.  This  small  bushy  plant,  Asplenium— fron- 
dibus pinnatifidis , lobis  alternis  confluentibus  obtusis 
of  Linnaeus,  grows  upon  old  walls  and  rocks.  It  has 
an  herbaceous,  mucilaginous,  roughish  taste,  and  is 
recommended  as  a pectoral.  In  Spain  it  is  given, 
with  great  success,  in  nephritic  and  calculous  diseases. 

Asplenium  ruta  muraria.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  ruta  muraria  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  It  is 
supposed  by  some  to  possess  specific  virtues  in  the  cure 
of  ulcers  of  the  lungs,  and  is  exhibited  in  the  form  of 
decoction. 

Asplenium  scolopendrium.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  scolopendrium  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Philli- 
tis ; Lingua  cervina.  Harts-tongue.  This  indige- 
nous plant,  Asplenium — frondibus  simplicibus,  cor  data 
lingulatis , integerrimis ; stipitibus  hirsutis  of  Lin- 
nteus  : grows  on  most  shady  banks,  walls,  &c.  It  has 
a slightly  astringent  and  mucilaginous  sweetish  taste. 
When  fresh  and  rubbed,  it  imparts  a disagreeable 
smell.  Harts-tongue,  which  is  one  of  the  five  capillary 
herbs,  was  formerly  much  used  to  strengthen  the  vis- 
cera, restrain  haemorrhages  and  alvine  fluxes,  and  to 
open  obstructions  of  the  liver  and  spleen,  and  for  the 
general  purposes  of  demulcents  and  pectorals. 

Asplenium  trichomanes.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  trichomanes  of  the  pharmacQpceias.  Common 
maiden-hair  or  spleenwort.  Asplenium— frondibus 
pinnatis,  pinnis  subrotundis,  crenatis  of  Linmeus. 
This  plant  is  admitted  into  the  Edinburgh  Pharmaco- 
poeia: the  leaves  have  a muci.aginous,  sweetish,  sub- 
astringent taste,  without  any  particular  flavour:  they 
are  esteemed  useful  in  disorders  of  the  breast,  being 
supposed  to  promote  the  expectoration  of  tough 
phlegm,  and  to  open  obstructions  of  the  viscera. 


ASS.  See  Asinus 

Ass's  milk.  See  A sinus. 

As  saba.  A shrub  found  on  the  coast  of  Guinea,  urt. 
leaves  of  which  are  supposed  to  disperse  buboes. 

ASSAFCE'TIDA.  See  Ferula  assafxtida. 

ASSARABA'CCA.  See  Asarum  Europeum. 

Assa'rium.  A Roman  measure  of  twelve  ounces. 

Assarthro'sis.  Articulation. 

ASSAY.  Essay.  This  operation  consists  in  de- 
termining the  quantity  of  valuable  or  precious  metal 
contained  in  any  mineral  or  metallic  mixture,  by  ana- 
lyzing a small  part  thereof.  The  practical  difference 
between  the  analysis  and  the  assay  of  an  ore,  con- 
sists in  this:  The  analysis,  if  properly  made,  deter 
mines  the  nature  and  quantities  of  all  the  parts  of  the 
compound ; whereas  the  object  of  the  assay  consists  in 
ascertaining  how  much  of  the  particular  metal  in 
question  may  be  contained  in  a certain  determinate 
quantity  of  the  material  under  examination.  Thus, 
in  the  assay  of  gold  or  silver,  the  baser  metals  are  con- 
sidered as  of  no  value  or  consequence  ; and  the  prob- 
lem to  be  resolved  is  simply,  how  much  of  each  is 
contained  in  the  ingot  or  piece  of  metal  intended  to  be 
assayed. 

ASSIMULA'TION.  ( Assimilatio , from  ad,  and 
similis , to  make  like  to.)  The  conversion  of  the  food 
1 into  nutriment. 

Assiste'ntes.  (From  ad,  and  sisto,  to  stand  near.) 
A name  of  the  prostate  glands,  so  called  because 
they  lie  near  the  bladder. 

ARSO'DES.  (From  aoaopai,  to  nauseate,  or  from 
assare,  to  burn.)  Asodes.  A continual  fever,  attended 
with  a loathing  of  food. 

A'STACUS.  ( Astacus , i.  m. ; from  a,  neg.  and 
g-a^w,  to  distil ; so  called  from  the  hardness  and  dryness 
of  its  shell.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  sheli-fish. 

Astacus  fluviatilis.  The  officinal  crevis,  or 
cray-fish.  See  Cancer  astacus. 

Astacus  marinus.  The  lobster.  See  Cancer  gam- 
marus. 

A'stapsis.  (From  c-atpis,  uva  passa.)  A raisin. 

Astera'ntium.  (From  apjp,  a star.)  The  pelli 
tory;  so  called  from  its  star-like  form.  See  Anthcmis 
pyrethrum. 

Astericum.  (From  the  star-like  appearance  of  the 
flowers.)  The  pellitory.  See  Anthemis  pyrethrum. 

ASTHE'NIA.  (From  a,  priv.  and  oBevos,  strength.) 
Extreme  debility.  The  asthenic  diseases  form  one 
great  branch  of  the  Brunonian  arrangement. 

ASTHENOLOGY.  ( Asthenologia , as.  f. ; from  a, 
priv.  and  adevoi,  strength,  and  Aoyoj-,  a treatise.)  The 
doctrine  of  diseases  arising  from  debility.  The  disci- 
ples of  the  Brunonian  school,  as  they  denominate 
themselves,  maintain  peculiar  opinions  on  this  subject. 

ASTHMA.  (Asthma,  matis,  neut.:  from  aaOpagw, 
To  breathe  with  difficulty.)  Difficult  respiration, 
returning  at  intervals,  with  a sense  of  stricture 
across  the  breast,  and  in  the  lungs;  a wheezing, 
hard  cough,  at  first,  but  more  free  towards  the  close  of 
each  paroxysm,  with  a discharge  of  mucus,  followed 
by  a remission.  It  is  ranked  by  Cullen  in  the  class 
JVeurosis,  and  order  Spasmi.  There  are,  according  to 
him,  three  species  of  asthma: — 

1.  Asthma  spontaneum , when  without  any  manifest 
cause. 

2.  Asthma  plethoricum,  when  it  arises  from  plethora. 

3.  Asthma  exanthematicum , originating  from  the  re 
pulsion  of  some  acrid  humour. 

Asthma  rarely  appears  before  the  age  of  puberty, 
and  seems  to  attack  men  more  frequently  than  women, 
particularly  those  of  a full  habit,  in  whom  it  neve, 
fails,  by  frequent  repetition,  to  occasion  some  degree 
of  emaciation.  In  some  instances,  it  arises  from  an 
hereditary  predisposition,  and  in  many  others,  it  seems 
to  depend  upon  a particular  constitution  of  the  lungs. 
Dyspepsia  alw  ays  prevails,  and  appears  to  be  a very 
prominent  feature  in  the  predisposition.  Its  attacks 
are  most  frequent  during  the  heats  of  summer,  in  the 
dog  daj-s,  and  in  general  commence  about  midnight. 
On  the  evening  preceding  an  attack  of  asthma,  the 
spirits  are  often  much  affected,  and  the  person  expe- 
riences a sense  of  fulness  about  the  stomach,  with  las 
situde,  drow'siuess,  and  a pain  in  the  head.  On  the 
approach  of  the  succeeding  evening,  he  perceives  a 
sense  of  tightness  and  stricture  across  the  breast,  and 
a sense  of  straitness  in  the  lungs,  impeding  respiration. 
The  difficulty  of  breathing  continuing  to  increase  for 


AST 


AST 


some  length  of  time,  both  inspiration  and  expiration 
are  performed  slowly,  and  with  a wheezing  noise ; the 
speech  becomes  difficult  and  uneasy,  a propensity  to 
coughing  succeeds,  and  the  patient  can  no  longer  re- 
main in  a horizontal  position,  being  as  it  were  threat- 
ened with  immediate  suffocation.  These  symptoms 
Usually  continue  till  towards  the  approach  of  morn- 
ing, and  then  a remission  commonly  takes  place ; the 
breathing  becomes  less  laborious  and  more  full,  and 
the  person  speaks  and  coughs  with  greater  ease.  If 
the  cough  is  attended  with  an  expectoration  of  mucus, 
he  experiences  much  relief,  and  soon  falls  asleep. 
When  he  awakes  in  the  morning,  he  still  feels  some 
degree  of  tightness  across  his  breast,  although  his 
bieathing  is  probably  more  free  and  easy,  and  he  can- 
not bear  the  least  motion,  without  rendering  this  more 
difficult  and  uneasy ; neither  can  he  continue  in  bed, 
unless  his  head  and  shoulders  are  raised  to  a consider- 
able height.  Towards  evening,  he  again  becomes 
drowsy,  is  much  troubled  with  flatulency  in  the  sto- 
mach, and  perceives  a return  of  the  difficulty  of 
breathing,  which  continues  to  increase  gradually,  till 
it  becomes  as  violent  as  on  the  night  before.  After 
some  nights  passed  in  this  way,  the  fits  at  length  mo- 
derate, and  suffer  more  considerable  remissions,  par- 
ticularly vchen  they  are  attended  by  a copious  expec- 
toration in  the  mornings,  and  this  continues  from  time 
to  time  throughout  the  day;  and  the  disease  going  off 
at  last,  the  patient  enjoys  his  usual  rest  by  night,  with- 
out further  disturbance.  The  pulse  is  not  necessarily  j 
affected  in  this  disease,  though  often  quickened  by  the 
difficulty  of  breathing ; and  sometimes  slight  pyrexia 
attends.  In  plethoric  habits,  the  countenance  is 
flushed  and  turgid  during  the  fit ; but  in  others  rather 
pale  and  shrunk : in  the  former,  too,  some  difficulty  of 
breathing  and  wheezing  usually  remain  in  the  interval; 
in  others  the  recovery  is  more  complete.  On  this  is 
founded  the  common  distinction  of  asthma  into  the 
humid,  pituitous,  or  catarrhal,  and  the  dry,  spasmodic, 
or  nervous  forms.  The  exciting  causes  are  various : — 
accumulation  of  blood,  or  viscid  mucus  in  the  lungs, 
noxious  vapours,  a cold  and  foggy  atmosphere,  or  a 
close  hot  air,  the  repulsion  of  eruptions,  or  other  me- 
tastatic diseases,  flatulence,  accumulated  faeces,  vio- 
lent passions,  organic  diseases  in  the  thoracic  viscera, 
&.c.  Sometimes  the  fits  return  at  pretty  regular 
periods;  and  it  is  generally  difficult  to  obviate  future 
attacks,  when  it  has  once  occurred : but  it  often  con- 
tinues to  recur  for  many  years,  and  seldom  proves 
fatal,  except  as  inducing  hydrothorax,  phthisis,  &c. 
The  treatment  must  vary  according  to  the  form  of  the 
disease.  In  young  persons  of  a plethoric  habit,  with 
great  dyspnoea,  a flushed  countenance,  accelerated 
pulse,  &c.  the  abstraction  of  blood  will  be  found  to 
afford  marked  relief;  "but  under  opposite  circum- 
stances, it  might  be  highly  injurious,  and  we  should 
always  avoid  repeating  it  unnecessarily.  In  ambigu- 
ous cases,  cupping  may  be  preferred,  or  leeches  to  the 
chest,  with  blisters.  Mild  cathartics  should  also  be 
employed ; or  where  costiveness  appears  to  induce  the 
fits,  those  of  a more  active  nature.  Nauseating  emetics 
are  of  considerable  service,  especially  where  the  pa- 
tient is  distressed  with  viscid  mucus,  not  only  by  pro- 
moting perspiration  and  expectoration,  but  also  by 
their  antispasmodic  power,  the  return  of  a paroxysm 
may  often  be  prevented  by  their  timely  use.  Squill 
combined  with  ipecacuanha  is  one  of  the  best  forms. 
Where  the  disease  is  of  the  purely  spasmodic  charac- 
ter, opium  will  be  found  the  most  powerful  palliative 
remedy,  especially  if  combined  with  aether,  though  it 
unfortunately  loses  some  of  its  power  by  repetition; 
the  foetid  gum  resins  are  also  useful,  particularly  where 
the  bowels  are  torpid  ; and  other  antispasinodics  may 
be  occasionally  employed.  The  practice  of  smoking, 
or  chewing  tobacco,  has  sometimes  appeared  extremely 
beneficial ; and  a cup  of  strong  coffee  has  often  afforded 
speedy  relief.  Means  should  also  be  employed  for 
strengthening  the  system ; and  where  there  appears  a 
tendency  to  serous  effusion,  digitalis  may  be  very  useful. 
But  by  far  the  most  important  part  of  the  treatment 
consists  in  obviating  or  removing  the  several  exciting 
causes,  whether  operating  on  the  lungs  immediately, 
or  through  the  medium  of  the  prima;  via;,  &c.  Indi- 
vidual experience  can  alone  ascertain  what  state  of  the 
atmosphere  as  to  temperature,  dryness,  purity,  &c. 
shall  be  most  beneficial  to  asthmatics,  though  a good 
deal  depends  on  habit  in  this  respect:  but  a due  regu- 


lation of  this,  as  well  as  of  the  diet,  and  other  parts  of 
regimen,  will  usually  afford  more  permanent  relief 
than  any  medicines  we  can  employ. 

A'STITES.  (From  ad , and  sto,  to  stand  near.) 
A name  given  by  the  ancients  to  the  prostate  glands, 
because  they  are  situated  near  the  bladder. 

ASTRA  GALUS.  ( Astragalus , i.  m. ; A j'payaXdf, 
a cockle,  or  die  ; because  it  is  shaped  like  the  die  used 
in  ancient  games.)  1.  The  ankle-bone ; a bone  of  the 
tarsus , upon  which  the  tibia  moves.  Also  called  the 
sling-bone,  or  first  bone  of  the  foot.  Ballistce  os ; aris- 
trios ; talus;  quatrio ; tetroros ; cavicula;  cavilla  ; 
diabebos ; peza.  It  is  placed  posteriorly  and  superiorly 
in  the  tarsus,  and  is  formed  of  two  parts,  one  large, 
which  is  called  its  body,  the  other  small,  like  a pro- 
cess. The  part  where  these  two  unite  is  termed  the 
neck. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean 
system.  .Class,  Diadelpliia ; Order,  Dccandria. 

Astragalus  excapus.  Stemless  milk-vetch.  The 
root  of  this  plant,  Astragalus  acaulis  excapus  ; — legu- 
minibus  lunatis ; foliis  villosis  of  Linnaeus,  is  said  to 
cure  confirmed  syphilis,  especially  when  in  the  form 
of  nodes  and  nocturnal  pains. 

Astragalus  tragacantha.  The  former  system- 
atic name  for  the  plant  which  affords  the  gum  traga- 
canth.  See  Astragalus  verus. 

Astragalus  verus.  Goat’s  thorn.  Milk-vetch. 
Spina  bird;  Astragalus  tragacantha ; Astragalus 
aculeatus.  We  are  indebted  to  a French  traveller,  of 
the  name  of  Olivier,  for  the  discovery  that  the  gum 
tragacanth  of  commerce,  is  the  produce  of  a species  of 
astragalus  not  before  known.  He  describes  it  under  the 
name  of  astragalus  verus , being  different  both  from  A. 
tragacantha  of  Linnaeus,  and  from  the  A.  gummifera 
of  Labillardiere.'  It  grows  in  the  North  of  Persia. 
Gum-tragacanth,  or  gum  dragant,  or  dragon,  (which 
is  forced  from  this  plant  by  the  intensity  of  the  solar 
rays,  is  concreted  into  irregular  lumps  or  vermicular 
pieces,  bent  into  a variety  of  shapes,  and  larger  or 
smaller  proportions,  according  to  the  size  of  the  wound 
' from  which  it  issues,)  is  brought  chiefly  from  Turkey, 
in  irregular  lumps,  or  long  vermicular  pieces  bent  into 
a variety  of  shapes : the  best  sort  is  white,  semi-trans- 
parent, dry,  yet  somewhat  soft  to  the  touch. 

Gum-tragacanth  differs  from  all  the  other  known 
gums,  in  giving  a thick  consistence  to  a much  larger 
quantity  of  water;  and  in  being  much  more  difficultly 
soluble,  or  rather  dissolving  only  imperfectly.  Put 
into  water,  it  slowly  imbibes  a great  quantity  of  the 
liquid,  swells  into  a large  volume,  and  forms  a soft 
but  not  fluid  mucilage ; if  more  water  be  added,  a 
fluid  solution  may  be  obtained  by  agitation  but  the 
liquor  looks  turbid  and  wheyish,  and  on  standing,  the 
mucilage  subsides,  the  limpid  water  on  the  surface 
retaining  little  of  the  gum.  Nor  does  the  admixture 
of  the  preceding  more  soluble  gums  promote  its  union 
with  the  water,  or  render  its  dissolution  more  durable : 
when  gum-tragacanth  and  gum-arabic  are  dissolved 
together  in  water,  the  tragacanth  separates  from  the 
mixture  more  speedily  than  when  dissolved  by  itself. 

Tragacanth  is  usually  preferred  to  the  other  gums 
for  making  up  troches,  and  other  like  purposes,  and 
is  supposed  likewise  to  be  the  most  effectual  as  a medi- 
cine; but  on  account  of  its  imperfect  solubility,  is 
unfit  for  liquid  forms.  It  is  commonly  given  in  pow- 
der, with  the  addition  of  other  materials  of  similar 
intention ; thus,  to  one  part  of  gum-tragacanth  are 
added  one  of  gum-arabic,  one  of  starch,  and  six  of 
sugar. 

According  to  Bucholtz,  gum-tragacanth  is  composed 
of  57  parts  of  a matter  similar  to  gum-arabic,  and  43 
parts  of  a peculiar  substance,  capable  of  swelling  in 
cold  water  without  dissolving,  and  assuming  the  ap- 
pearance of  a thick  jelly.  It  is  soluble  in  boiling 
water,  and  then  forms  a mucilaginous  solution. 

The  demulcent  qualities  of  this  gum  are  to  be  con- 
sidered as  similar  to  those  of  gum-arabic.  It  is  seldom 
given  alone,  but  frequently  in  combination  with  more 
powerful  medicines,  especially  in  the  form  of  troches, 
for  which  it  is  peculiarly  well  adapted:  it  gives  name 
to  an  officinal  compound  powder,  and  was  an  ingre 
dient  in  the  compound  powder  of  cerusse. 

ASTRA'NTIA.  (from  aarpov,  astrum , a star  ; so 
called  from  the  star-like  shape  of  its  flowers.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Limuean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Dyginia. 

101 


A H 


ATM 


Hbtrantia  major.  Astrantia  vulgaris. 

■>. istrantia  nigra.  The  herb  sunicle  master-wort. 
A rustic  purge  in  the  time  of  Gerard. 

A'strapk.  (From  a^panjat,  to  corruscate.)  Light- 
ning. Galen  reckons'  it  among  the  remote  causes  of 
epilepsy. 

ASTRI'CTUS.  (From  astnngo,  to  bind.)  When 
applied  to  the  belly,  it  signifies  costiveness;  thus, 
alvus  astricta. 

ASTRI  NGENT.  {Astringens ; from  astringo,  to 
constringe.)  Adstringent.  That  which,  when  applied 
to  the  body,  renders  the  solids  denser  and  firmer,  by 
contracting  their  fibres,  independently  of  their  living, 
or  muscular  power.  Astringents  thus  serve  to  dimi- 
nish excessive  discharges ; and  by  causing  greater 
compression  of  the  nervous  tibrilke,  may  lessen  morbid 
sensibility  or  irritability.  Hence  they  may  tend  indi 
rectiy  to  restore  the  strength,  when  impaired  by  these 
causes.  The  chief  articles  of  this  class  are  the  acids, 
alum,  lime-water,  chalk,  certain  preparations  of  cop- 
per, zinc,  iron,  and  lead ; the  gahic  acid,  which  is 
commonly  found  united  with  the  true  astringent  prin- 
ciple, was  long  mistaken  for  it.  Seguin  first  distin- 
guished them,  and,  from  the  use  of  this  principle  in 
tanning  skins,  has  given  it  the  name  of  tannin.  Then- 
characteristic  differences  are,  the  gallic  acid  forms  a 
mack  precipitate  with  iron ; the  astringent  principle 
forms  an  insoluble  compound  with  albumen. 

ASTRONO'MY.  {Astronomia ; from  a?pov,  a star, 
and  vopos,  a law.)  The  knowledge  of  the  heavenly 
bodies.  Hippocrates  ranks  this  and  astrology  among 
the  necessary  studies  of  a physician. 

ASTRUC,  John,  a learned  physician,  born  in 
France,  1684.  He  studied  and  took  his  degrees  at 
Montpelier,  and  became  afterward  a professor  there. 
In  1729,  he  was  appointed  physician  to  the  king  of 
Poland,  but  soon  returned  to  his  native  country,  was 
made  consulting  physician  to  the  French  king,  and 
professor  of  medicine  at  Paris,  where  he  attained 
great  celebrity.  He  was  author  of  numerous  medical 
and  philosophical  works,  but  especially  one  “on  Ve- 
nereal Diseases,”  which  deservedly  became  extremely 
popular,  and  was  translated  into  various  modern  lan- 
guages. He  lived  to  the  advanced  age  of  82. 

ATA'XIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  raaatx),  to  order.) 
Want  of  regularity  in  the  symptoms  of  a disease,  or 
of  the  functions  of  an  animal  body. 

ATE'CNIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  tucto,  to  bring 
forth.)  Venereal  im potency : inability  to  procreate 
children. 

ATHAMANTA.  ( Athamanta , ce.  foem  ; so  named 
from  Athamas  in  Thessaly.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; 
Order,  Digynia. 

Athamanta  cretensis.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  daucus  creticus  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Myrrhus 
annua.  Candy  carrot.  The  seeds  of  this  plant, 
Athamanta— foliolis  linear ibus  planis,hirs.utis ; pcta- 
lis  bipartitis ; seminibus  oblongis  hirsutis,  of  Lin- 
naeus, are  brought  from  the  isle  of  Candy  : they  have 
an  aromatic  smell,  and  a slightly-biting  taste  ; and 
are  occasionally  employed  as  carminatives,  and 
diuretics  in  diseases  of  the  primes  viae  and  urinary 
passages. 

Athamanta  oreoselinum.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  officinal  orc&selinum.  Black  mountain  parsley. 
The  root  and  seed  of  this  plant,  Athamanta— foliolis 
divaricatis  of  Linnaeus,  as  well  as  the  whole  herb, 
were  formerly  used  medicinally  Though  formerly 
in  so  high  estimation  as  to  obtain  the  epithet  of  poly- 
chresta , this  plant  is  seldom  used  in  the  practice  of 
the  present  day.  An  extract  and  tincture  prepared 
from  the  root  were  said  to  be  attendant,  aperient, 
deobstruent,  and  lithontriptic.  The  oil  obtained  by 
distillation  from  the  seed  was  esteemed  to  allay  the 
toothache ; and  the  whole  was  recommended  as  an 
antiscorbutic  and  corroborant. 

ATH  AMANTICUM.  See  JEthusa  mcum. 

ATHANA'SIA.  (From  u,  priv.  and  Savaros, 
death;  so  called  because  its  flowers  do  not  wither 
easily.)  1.  The  immortal  plant.  A name  given  to 
tansy;  because  when  stuffed  up  the  nose  of  a dead 
corpse,  it  is  said  to  prevent  putrefaction.  See  Tana- 
cetum  vulgare. 

2.  It  means  also  immortality. 

3.  The  name  of  an  antidote  of  Galen,  and  another 
of  Oribasius. 

m 


4.  It  is  the  name  also  of  a collyrium  described  by 
Aedus,  and  of  many  other  compositions. 

A thara.  (From  adrjp,  corn.)  A panada,  or  pap 
for  children,  made  of  bruised  corn. 

ATHERG  MA.  ( Atheroma , atis,  n.  A drjpoya,  pulse, 
pap.)  An  encysted  tumour  that  contains  a soft  sub- 
stance of  the  consistence  of  a poultice. 

ATHRIX.  (A-$pt|,  debilis , weak.) 

1.  Weakness. 

2.  (From  a,  priv.  and  0pi£,  a pair.)  Baldness. 

ATHY'MIA.  (From  a,  neg.  and  Svpos,  courage.) 

1.  Pusillanimity. 

2.  Despondency  or  melancholy. 

ATLAS.  {Atlas,  antis,  m. ; from  Ar^aw,  to  sus- 
tain, because  it  sustains  the  head  ; or  from  the  fable 
of  Atlas,  who  was  supposed  to  support  the  world 
upon  his  shoulders.)  The  name  of  the  first  vertebia 
This  vertebra  differs  very  much  from  tire  others.  See 
Vertebra.  It  has  no  spinous  process  which  would 
prevent  the  neck  from  being  bent  backwards,  but  in 
its  place  it  has  a small  eminence.  The  great  foramen 
of  this  is  much  larger  than  that  of  any  other  vertebra 
Its  body,  which  is  small  and  thin,  is,  nevertheless,  firm 
and  hard.  It  is  somewhat  like  a ring,  and  is  distin- 
guished into  its  great  arch , which  serves  in  the  place 
of  its  body,  and  its  small  posterior  arch.  The  atlas  is 
joined  superiorly  to  the  head  Dy  ginglymus  ; and  inte- 
riorly, to  the  second  cervical  vertebra,  by  means  of 
the  inferior  oblique  processes,  and  the  odontoid  process 
by  trocboides. 

ATMOMETER.  The  name  of  an  instrument  to 
measure  the  quantity  of  exhalation  from  a humid  sur- 
face in  a given  time. 

ATMOSPHERE.  {Atmosphera,  ce.  f. ; from  arpos, 
vapour,  and  atfaipa,  a globe.)  The  elastic  invisible 
fluid  which  surrounds  the  earth  to  an  unknown  height, 
and  encloses  it  on  all  sides.  Neither  the  properties 
nor  the  composition  of  the  atmosphere,  seem  to  have 
occupied  much  the  attention  of  the  ancients.  Aris- 
totle considered  it  as  one  of  the  four  elements,  situated 
between  the  regions  of  water  and  fire , and  mingled 
with  two  exhalations,  the  dry  and  the  moist;  the  rtrsi 
of  which  occasioned  thunder,  lightning,  and  wind ; 
while  the  second  produced  rain,  snow,  and  hail. 

The  opinions  of  the  ancients  were  vague  conjectures, 
until  the  matter  was  explained  by  the  sagacity  ot 
Hales,  and  of  those  philosophers  who  followed  his 
career. 

Boyle  proved  beyond  a doubt,  that  the  atmosphere 
contained  two  distinct  substances : — 

1.  An  elastic  fluid  distinguished  by  the  name  of  air. 

2.  Water  in  a state  of  vapour. 

Besides  these  two  bodies,  it  was  supposed  that  the 
atmosphere  contained  a great  variety  of  other  sub- 
stances which  were  continually  mixing  with  it  from 
the  earth,  and  which  often  altered  its  properties,  and 
rendered  it  noxious  or  fatal.  Since  the  discovery  of 
carbonic  acid  gas  by  Dr.  Black,  it  has  been  ascertained 
that  this  elastic  fluid  always  constitutes  a part  of  the 
atmosphere. 

The  constituent  parts  of  the  atmosphere,  therefore, 

are : — 

1.  Air.  2.  Water.  3.  Carbonic  acid  gas.  4.  Un- 
known bodies. 

1.  For  the  properties,  composition,  and  account  of 
the  first,  see  Air. 

2.  Water. — That  the  atmosphere  contains  water, 
has  been  always  known.  The  rain  and  dew  which 
so  often  precipitate  from  it,  the  clouds  and  fogs  with 
which  it  is  often  obscured,  and  which  deposite  moisture 
on  all  bodies  exposed  to  them,  have  demonstrated  its 
existence  in  every  age.  Even  when  the  atmosphere 
is  perfectly  transparent,  water  may  be  extracted  from 
it  in  abundance  by  certain  substances.  Thus,  if  con- 
centrated sulphuric  acid  be  exposed  to  air,  it  gradually 
attracts  so  much  moisture,  that  its  weight  is  increased 
more  than  three  times : it  is  converted  into  diluted 
acid,  from  which  the  water  may  be  separated  by  dis- 
tillation. Substances  which  have  the  property  of  ab- 
stracting water  from  the  atmosphere,  have  received 
the  epithet  of  hygroscopic,  because  they  point  out  the 
presence  of  that  water.  Sulphuric  acid,  the  fixed 
alkalies,  muriate  of  lime,  nitrate  of  lime,  and,  in  gene- 
ral, all  deliquescent  salts,  possess  this  property.  The 
greater  number  of  animal  and  vegetable  bodies  like- 
wise possess  it.  Many  of  them  take  water  from  moist  air, 
but  give  it  out  again  to  the  air  when  dry.  These  bodies 


ATM 


ATM 


augment  in  bulk  when  they  receive  moisture,  and  [ 
diminish  again  when  they  part  with  it.  Hence  some  i 
of  them  have  been  employed  as  hygrometers , or  mea- 
sures of  the  quantity  of  moisture  contained  in  the  air 
around  them.  This  they  do  by  means  of  the  increase 
or  diminution  of  their  length,  occasioned  by  the  addi- 
tion or  abstraction  of  moisture.  This  change  of  length 
is  precisely  marked  by  means  of  an  index.  The  most 
ingenious  and  accurate  hygrometers  are  those  of  Saus- 
sure  and  Deluc.  In  the  first,  the  substance  employed 
to  mark  the  moisture  is  a human  hair,  which  by  its 
contractions  and  dilatations  is  made  to  turn  round  an 
index.  In  the  second,  instead  of  a hair,  a very  fine 
thin  slip  of  whalebone  is  employed.  The  scale  is 
divided  into  100°.  The  beginning  of  the  scale  indi- 
cates extreme  dryness,  the  end  of  it  indicates  extreme 
moisture.  It  is  graduated  by  placing  it  first  in  air 
made  as  dry  as  possible  by  means  of  salts,  and  after- 
ward in  air  saturated  with  moisture.  This  gives  the 
extremes  of  the  scale,  and  the  interval  between  them 
is  divided  into  100  equal  parts. 

The  water,  which  constitutes  a component  part  of 
the  atmosphere,  appears  to  be  in  the  state  of  vapour, 
and  chemically  combined  with  air  in  the  same  manner 
as  one  gas  is  combined  with  another.  As  the  quantity 
of  the  water  contained  in  the  atmosphere  varies  con- 
siderably, it  is  impossible  to  ascertain  its  amount  with 
any  degree  of  accuracy. 

3.  Carbonic  acid  gas. — The  existence  of  carbonic 
gas  as  a constituent  part  of  the  atmosphere,  was  ob- 
served by  Dr.  Black  immediately  after  he  had  ascer- 
tained the  nature  of  that  peculiar  fluid.  If  we  expose 
a pure  alkali  or  alkaline  earth  to  the  atmosphere,  it  is 
gradually  converted  into  a carbonate  by  the  absorption 
of  carbonic  acid  gas.  This  fact,  which  had 'been  long 
known,  rendered  the  inference  that  carbonic  acid  gas  j 
existed  in  the  atmosphere  unavoidable,  as  soon  as  the 
difference  between  a pure  alkali  and  its  carbonate  had 
been  ascertained  to  depend  upon  that  acid.  Not  only 
alkalies  and  alkaline  earths  absorb  carbonic.acid  when 
exposed  to  the  air,  but  several  of  the  metallic  oxydes 
also. 

Carbonic  acid  gas  not  only  forms  a constituent  part 
of  the  atiyosphere  near  the  surface  of  the  earth,  but 
at  the  greatest  heights  which  the  industry  of  man  has 
been  able  to  penetrate.  Saussure  found  it  at  the  top 
of  Mount  Blanc,  the  highest  point  of  the  old  continent ; 
a point  covered  with  eternal  smw,  and  not  exposed 
to  the  influence  of  vegetables  or  animals.  Lime-water, 
diluted  with  its  own  weight  of  distilled  water,  formed 
a pellicle  on  its  surface  after  an  hour  and  three-quarters 
exposure  to  the  open  air  on  that  mountain;  and  slips 
of  paper  moistened  with  pure  potash,  acquired  the 
property  of  effervescing  with  acids  after  being  exposed 
an  hour  and  a half  in  the  same  place.  This  was  at  a 
height  no  less  than  15,668  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
sea.  Humboldt  has  more  lately  ascertained  the  exist- 
ence of  this  gas  in  air,  brought  by  Mr.  Garnerin  from 
a height  not  less  than  4280  feet  above  the  surface  of 
the  earth,  to  which  height  he  had  risen  in  an  air-bal- 
loon. This  fact  is  a sufficient  proof  that  the  presence 
of  carbonic  acid  in  air  does  not  depend  upon  the  vici- 
nity of  the  earth. 

Now,  as  carbonic  acid  gas  is  considerably  heavier 
than  air,  it  could  not  rise  to  great  heights  in  the  atmo- 
sphere unless  it  entered  into  combination  tfuth  the  air. 
We  are  warranted,  therefore,  to  conclude,  that  car- 
bonic acid  is  not  merely  mechanically  mixed,  but  that 
\t  is  chemically  combined  with  the  other  constituent 
pads  of  the  atmosphere.  It  is  to  the  affinity  which 
exists  between  carbonic  acid  and  air  that  we  are  to 
ascribe  the  rapidity  with  which  it  disperses  itself 
through  the  atmosphere,  notwithstanding  its  great 
specific  gravity.  Fontana  mixed  20,000  cubic  inches 
of  ca  bonic  acid  gas  with  the  air  of  a close  room,  and 
yet  half  an  hour  after  he  could  not  discover  the  traces 
of  carbonic  acid  in  that  air.  Water  impregnated  with 
cai  bonic  acid,  when  exposed  to  the  air,  very  soon  ioses 
the  whole  of  the  combined  gas.  And  when  a phial 
full  of  ca1  bonic  acid  gas  is  left  uncorked,  the  gas,  as 
Bergman  first  ascertained,  very  soon  disappears,  and 
the  phial  is  found  filled  with  common  air. 

The  difficulty  of  separating  this  eas  from  air,  has 
hitherto  prevented  the  possibility  of  determining  with 
accuracy  the  relative  quantity  of  it  in  a given  bulk  of 
air ; but  from  the  experiments  which  have  been  made, 
we  may  conclude  with  some  degree,  of  confidence,  that  - 


| it  is  not  very  different  from  0.01.  From  the  experl- 
| ments  of  Humboldt,  it  appears  to  vary  from  0.005  to 

0.01.  This  variation  will  by  no  means  appear  impro- 
bable, if  we  consider  that  immense  quantities  of  car- 
bonic acid  gas  must  be  constantly  mixing  with  the 
atmosphere,  as  it  is  formed  by  the  respiration  of  ani- 
mals, by  combustion,  and  several  other  processes 
which  are  going  on  continually.  The  quantity,  indeed, 
which  is  daily  formed  by  these  processes  is  so  great, 
that  at  first  sight  it  appears  astonishing  that  it  does  not 
increase  rapidly.  The  consequence  of  such  an  increase 
would  be  fatal,  as  air  containing  0.1  of  carbonic  acid 
extinguishes  light,  and  is  destructive  to  animals.  But 
there  is  reason  to  conclude,  that  this  gas  is  decomposed 
by  vegetables  as  rapidly  as  it  forms. 

4.  Bodies  found  in  the  atmosphere. — From  what  has 
been  advanced,  it  appears  that  the  atmosphere  con- 
sists chiefly  of  three  distinct  elastic  fluids  united 
together  by  chemical  affinity  ; namely,  air,  vapour,  and 
carbonic  acid  gas;  differing  in  their  proportions  at 
different  times  and  in  different  places;  the  average 
proportion  of  each  is, 

98.6  air 

1,0  carbonic  acid 

0.4  water 

100.0 

But' besides  these  bodies,  which  may  beconsidered  as 
the  constituent  parts  of  the  atmosphere,  the  existence 
of  several  other  bodies  has  been  suspected  in  it.  It  is  not 
meant  in  this  place  to  include  among  those  bodies 
electric  math  r,  or  the  substance  of  clouds  and  fogs, 
and  those  other  bodies  which  are  considered  as  the 
active  agents  in  the  phenomena  of  meteorology,  but 
j merely  those  foreign  bodies  which  have  been  occa- 
sionally found  or  suspected  in  air.  Concerning  these 
bodies,  however,  very  little  satisfactory  is  known  at 
present,  as  we  are  not  in  the  possession  of  instruments 
sufficiently  delicate  to  ascertain  their  presence.  We 
can  indeed  detect  several  of  them  actually  mixing  with 
air,  but  what  becomes  of  them  afterward  we  are 
unable  to  say. 

1.  Hydrogen  gas  is  said  to  have  been  found  in  air 
situated  near  the  crater  of  volcanoes,  and  it  is  very 
possible  that  it  may  exist  always  in  a very  small  propor- 
tion in  the  atmosphere , but  this  cannot  be  ascertained 
till  some  method  of  detecting  the  presence  of  hydrogen 
combined  with  a great  proportion  of  air  be  discovered. 

2.  Oarburetted  hydrogen  gas  is  often  emitted  by 
marshes  in  considerable  quantities  during  hot  weather. 
But  its  presence  has  never  been  detected  in  air;  so 
that  in  all  probability  it  is  again  decomposed  by  some 
unknown  process. 

3.  Oxygen  gas  is  emitted  abundantly  by  plants  during 
the  day.  There  is  some  reason  to  conclude  that  this  is 
in  consequence  of  the  property  which  plants  have  of 
absorbing  and  decomposing  carbonic  acid  gas.  Now 
as  this  carbonic  acid  gas  is  formed  at  the  expense  of 
the  oxygen  of  the  atmosphere,  as  this  oxygen  is  again 
restored  to  the  air  by  the  decomposition  of  the  acid, 
and  as  the  nature  of  atmospheric  air  remains  unaltered, 
it  is  clear  that  there  must  be  an  equilibrium  between 
these  two  processes ; that  is  to  say,  all  the  carbonic 
acid  formed  by  combustion  must  be  again  decomposed, 
and  all  the  oxygen  abstracted  must  be  again  restored. 
The  oxygen  gas  which  is  thus  continually  returning  to 
the  air,  by  combining  with  it,  makes  its  component 
parts  always  to  continue  in  the  same  ratio. 

4.  The  smoke  and  other  bodies  which  are  continually 
carried  into  the  air  by  evaporation,  &c.  are  probably 
soon  deposited  again,  and  cannot  therefore  be  con- 
sidered with  propriety  as  forming  part  of  the  atmo- 
sphere. 

5.  There  is  another  set  of  bodies,  which  are  occa- 
sionally combined  with  air,  and  which,  on  account  of 
the  powerful  action  which  they  produce  on  the  human 
body,  have  attracted  a great  deal  of  attention.  These 
are  known  by  the  name  of  contagions. 

That  there  is  a difference  between  the  atmosphere  in 
different  places,  as  far  as  respects  its  effects  upon  the 
human  body,  has  been  considered  as  an  established 
point  in  all  ages.  Hence  some  places  have  been  cele- 
brated as  healthy,  and  others  avoided  as  pernicious,  to 
the  human  constitution.  It  is  well  known  that  in  pits 
and  mines  the  air  is  often  in  such  a state  as  to  suffo- 
cate almost  instantaneously  those  who  attempt  to 


ATO 


ATO 


breathe  it.  Some  places  are  frequented  by  peculiar 
diseases.  It  is  known  that  those  who  are  much  in  the 
apartments  of.  persons  ill  of  certain  maladies,  are 
extremely  apt  to  catch  the  infection;  and  in  prisons 
and  other  places,  where  crowds  of  people  are  confined 
together,  when  diseases  once  commence  they  are  wont 
to  make  dreadful  havoc.  In  all  these  cases,  it  has 
been  supposed  that  a certain  noxious  matter  is  dis- 
solved by  the  air,  and  that  it  is  the  action  of  this 
matter  which  produces  the  mischief. 

This  noxious  matter  is,  in  many  cases,  readily  dis- 
tinguished by  the  peculiarly  disagreeable  smell  which 
it  communicates  to  the  air.  No  doubt  this  matted 
differs  according  to  the  diseases  which  it  communi- 
cates, and  the  substance  from  which  it  has  originated. 
Morveau  lately  attempted  to  ascertain  its  nature ; but 
he  soon  found  the  chemical  tests  hitherto  discovered 
altogether  insufficient  for  that  purpose.  He  has  put  it 
beyond  a doubt,  however,  that  this  contagious  matter 
is  of  a compound  nature,  and  that  it  is  destroyed  alto- 
gether by  certain  agents.  He  exposed  infected  air  to 
the  action  of  various  bodies,  and  he  judged  of  the  re- 
sult bj-  the  effect  which  these  bodies  had  in  destroying 
the  foetid  smell  of  the  air.  The  following  is  the  result 
of  his  experiments : 

L Odorous  bodies,  such  as  benzoin,  aromatic  plants, 
&• c.  have  no  effect  whatever.  2.  Neither  have  the 
solutions  of  myrrh,  benzoin,  &c.  in  alkohol,  though 
agitated  in  infected  air.  3.  Pyroligneous  acid  is 
equally  inert.  4.  Gunpowder,  when  fired  in  infected 
air,  displaces  a portion  of  it  ; but  what  remains,  still 
retains  its  foetid  odour.  5.  Sulphuric  acid  has  no 
effect ; sulphurous  acid  weakens  the  odour,  but  does 
not  destroy  it.  Distilled  vinegar  diminishes  the  odour, 
but  its  action  is  slow  and  incomplete.  7.  Strong  acetic 
acid  acts  instantly,  and  destroys  the  foetid  odour  of  in- 
fected air  completely.  8.  The  fumes  of  nitric  acid, 
first  employed  by  Dr.  Carmichael  Smith,  are  equally 
efficacious.  9.  Muriatic  acid  gas,  first  pointed  out  as 
a proper  agent  by  Morveau  himself,  is  equally  inef- 
fectual. 10.  But  the  most  powerful  agent  is  oxymu- 
riatic  acid  gas,  first  proposed  by  Mr.  Cruickshanks,  and 
now  employed  with  the  greatest  success  in  the  British 
navy  and  military  hospitals. 

Thus  there  arc  four  substances  which  have  the 
property  of  destroying  contagious  matter,  and  of  puri- 
fying the  air ; but  acetic  acid  cannot  easily  be  obtained 
in  sufficient  quantity,  and  in  a state  of  sufficient  con- 
centration to  be  employed  with  advantage.  Nitric  acid 
is  attended  with  inconvenience,  because  it  is  almost 
always  contaminated  with  nitrous  gas.  Muriatic  acid 
and  oxymuriatic  acid  are  not  attended  with  these 
inconveniences ; the  last  deserves  the  preference,  be- 
cause it  acts  with  greater  energy  and  rapidity.  All 
that  is  necessary  is  to  mix  together  two  parts  of  salt 
with  one  part  of  the  black  oxyde  of  manganese,  to 
place  the  mixture  in  an  open  vessel  in  the  infected 
chamber,  and  to  pour  upon  it  two  parts  of  sulphuric 
acid.  The  fumes  of  oxymuriatic  acid  are  immediately 
exhaled,  fill  the  chamber,  and  destroy  the  contagion. 

Ato'chia.  (From  a,  neg.  and  ro/cos,  offspring ; from 
tlktu),  to  bring  forth.)  1.  Inability  to  bring  forth  chil- 
dren. 2.  Difficult  labour. 

ATOMIC  THEORY.  In  the  chemical  combina- 
tion of  bodies  with  each  other,  it  is  observed  that  some 
unite  in  all  proportions ; others  in  all  proportions  as  far 
as  a certain  point,  beyond  which  combination  no 
longer  takes  place ; there  are  also  many  examples,  in 
which  bodies  unite  in  one  proportion  only,  and  others 
in  several  proportions;  and  these  proportions  are  defi- 
nite, and  in  the  intermediate  ones  no  combination 
ensues.  And  it  is  remarkable,  that  when  one  body 
enters  into  combination  with  another,  in  several  dif- 
ferent proportions,  the  numbers  indicating  the  greater 
proportions  are  exact  simple  multiples  of  that  denoting 
the  smallest  proportion.  In  other  words,  if  the  smallest 
portion  in  which  B combines  with  A,  be  denoted  by 
10,  A may  combine  with  twice  10  of  B,  or  with  three 
times  10,  and  soon;  but  with  no  intermediate  quan- 
tities. Examples  of  this  kind  have  of  late  so  much 
increased  in  number,  that  the  law  of  simple  multiples 
bids  fair  to  become  universal  with  respect  at  least  to 
chemical  compounds,  the  proportions  of  which  are 
definite.  Mr  Dalton  has  founded  what  may  be  termed 
the  atomic  theory  of  the  chemical  constitution  of 
bodies.  Till  this  theory  was  proposed,  we  had  no 
adequate  explanation  of  the  uniformity  of  the  propor- 


tions of  chemical  compounds ; or  of  the  nature  of  the 
cause  which  renders  combination  in  other  proportions 
impossible.  The  following  is  a brief  illustration  of  the 
theory  : Though  we  appear,  when  we  effect  the  che- 
mical union  of  bodies,  to  operate  on  masses,  yet  it  is 
consistent  with  the  most  rational  view  of  the  consti- 
tution of  bodies,  to  believe,  that  it  is  only  between  their 
ultimate  particles,  or  atoms,  that  combination  takes 
place.  By  the  term  atoms,  it  has  been  already  stated, 
we  are  to  understand  the  smallest  parts  of  which 
bodies  are  composed.  An  atom,  therefore,  must  be 
mechanically  indivisible,  and  of  course  a fraction  of  an 
atom  cannot  exist,  and  is  a contradiction  in  terms. 
Whether  the  atoms  of  different  bodies  be  of  the  same 
size,  or  of  different  sizes,  we  have  no  sufficient  evi- 
dence. The  probability  is,  that  the  atoms  of  different 
bodies  are  of  unequal  sizes;  but  it  cannot  be  deter- 
mined whether  their  sizes  bear  any  regular  proportion 
to  their  relative  weights.  We  are  equally  ignorant  of 
their  shape  ; but  it  is  probable,  though  not  essential  to 
the  theory,  that  they  are  spherical.  This,  however, 
requires  a little  qualification.  The  atoms  of  all  bodies, 
probably  consist  of  a solid  corpuscle,  forming  a nucleus, 
and  of  an  atmosphere  of  heat,  by  which  that  corpuscle 
is  surrounded,  for  absolute  contact  is  never  supposed  to 
take  place  between  the  atoms  of  bodies.  The  figure  of 
a single  atom  may  therefore  be  supposed  to  be  sphe- 
rical. But  in  cotnpound  atoms,  consisting  of  a single 
central  atom  surrounded  by  other  atoms  of  a different 
kind,  it  is  obvious  that  the  figure  (contemplating  the 
solid  corpuscles  only)  cannot  be  spherical ; yet  if  we 
include  the  atmosphere  of  heat,  the  figure  of  a com- 
pound atom  may  be  spherical,  or  some  shape  approach- 
ing to  a sphere.  Taking  for  granted  that  combination 
takes  place  between  the  atoms  of  bodies  only,  Mr. 
Dalton  has  deduced  from  the  relative  weights  in  which 
bodies  unite,  the  relative  weights  of  their  ultimate  par- 
ticles or  atoinsk  When  only  one  combination  of  any 
two  elementary  bodies  exists,  he  assumes,  unless  the 
contrary  can  be  proved,  that  its  elements  are  united 
atom  to  atom  ; single  combinations  of  this  sort  he  calls 
binary.  But  if  several  compounds  can  be  obtained 
from  the  same  elements,  they  combine,  he  supposes,  in 
proportions  expressed  by  some  simple  multiple  of  the 
number  of  atoms.  The  following  table  exhibits  a view 
of  these  combinations: 

1 Atom  of  A-)-l  atom  of  B=1  atom  of  C,  binary. 

1 Atom  of  A+2  atoms  of  B=1  atom  of  D,  ternary. 

2 Atoms  of  A+l  atom  of  B^l  atom  of  E,  ternary. 

1 Atom  of  A+3  atoms  of  B=1  atom  of  F,  quaternar 

3 Atoms  of  A-|-l  atom  of  B=1  atom  of  G,  quaternary. 

A different  classification  of  atoms  has  been  proposed 
by  Berzelius,  viz.  into  1.  Elementary  atoms.  2.  Com- 
pound atoms.  The  compound  atoms  he  divides  again 
into  three  different  species ; namely ; 1st,  Atoms  formed 
of  only  two  elementary  substances,  united  or  compound 
atoms  of  the  first  order.  2dly,  Atoms  composed  of 
more  than  two  elementary  substances,  and  these,  as 
they  are  only  found  in  organic  bodies,  or  bodies 
obtained  by  the  destruction  of  organic  matter,  he  calls 
organic  atoms.  3dly,  Atoms  formed  by  the  union  of 
two  or  more  compound  atoms ; as,  for  example,  the 
salts.  These  he  calls  compound  atoms  of  the  second 
order.  If  elementary  atoms  of  different  kinds  were  of 
the  same  size,  the  greatest  number  of  atoms  of  it  that 
could  be  combined  with  an  atomol  B would  be  12;  for 
this  is  the  greatest  number  of  spherical  bodies  that  can 
be  arranged  in  contact  with  a sphere  of  the  same 
diameter.  But  this  equality  of  size,  though  adopted  by 
Berzelius,  is  not  necessary  to  the  hypothesis  of  Mr. 
Dalton,  and  is,  indeed,  supposed  by  him  not  to  exist. 

As  an  illustration  of  the  mode  in  which  the  weight 
of  the  atoms  of  bodies  is  determined,  let  us  suppose 
that  any  two  elementary  substances,  A and  B,  form  a 
binary  compound,  and  that  they  have  been  proved  ex 
perimentally  to  unite  in  the  proportion  by  weight,  of 
five  to  the  former,  to  four  of  the  latter,  then  since 
(according  to  the  hypothesis)  they  unite  particle  to 
particle,  those  numbers  will  express  the  relative  weight 
of  their  atoms.  But  besides  combining  atom  to  atom 
singly,  1 atom  of  A may  combine  with  2 of  B,  or  with 
3,  4,  &c.  or  one  atom  of  B may  combine  with  2 of  A, 
or  with  3,  4,  &c.  When  such  a series  of  compounds 
exists,  the  relative  proportion  of  their  elements  ought 
necessarily  on  analysis  to  be  proved  to  be  5 of  A to  4 


ATO 


ATO 


of  B,  or  5 to  (4+4=)  8 or  5 to  (4+4+4=)  12,  &c.,  or 
contrariwise,  4 of  B to  5 of  A,  or  4 to  (5+5=)  10  or  4 to 
(5+5+5=)  15.  Between  these  there  ought  to  be  no 
intermediate  compounds,  and  the  existence  of  any  such 
(as  5 of  A to  6 of  B,  or  4 of  B to  7£  of  A)  would,  if 
clearly  established,  militate  against  the  hypothesis. 
To  verify  these  numbers,  it  may  be  proper  to  examine 
the  combinations  of  A and  B with  some  third  sub- 
stance, for  example,  with  C.  Let  us  suppose  that  A 
and  C form  a binary  compound,  in  which  analysis 
discovers  5 parts  of  A,  and  3 of  C.  Then  if  C and 
B are  also  capable  of  forming  a binary  compound,  the 
relative  proportion  of  its  elements  ought  to  be  4 of  B to 
3 of  C,  for  these  numbers  denote  the  relative  weights 
of  their  atoms.  Now  this  is  precisely  the  method  by 
which  Mr.  Dalton  has  deduced  the  relative  weights  of 
oxygen,  hydrogen,  and  nitrogen,  the  first  two  from  the 
known  composition  of  water,  and  the  last  two  from 
the  proportion  of  the  elements  of  ammonia.  Extend- 
ing the  comparison  to  a variety  of  other  bodies,  he  has 
obtained  a scale  of  the  relative  weights  of  their  atoms, 
fn  several  instances  additional  evidence  is  acquired  of 
the  accuracy  of  the  weight  assigned  to  an  element,  by 
our  obtaining  the  same  number  from  an  investigation 
of  several  of  its  compounds.  For  example, 

1.  In  water,  the  hydrogen  is  to  the  oxygen  as  1 to  8. 

2.  In  olefiant  gas,  the  hydrogen  is  to  the  carbon  as 
C to  8. 

3.  In  carbonic  acid,  the  oxygen  is  to  the  carbon  as 
8 to  6. 

Whether,  therefore,  we  determine  the  weight  of  the 
atom  of  carbon  from  the  proportion  in  which  it  com- 
bines with  hydrogen,  or  with  oxygen,  we  arive  at  the 
same  number  6,  an  agreement  which,  as  it  occurs  in 
various  other  instances,  can  scarcely  be  an  accidental 
coincidence.  In  similar  manner,  8 is  deducible,  as 
representing  the  atom  of  oxygen,  both  from  the  combi- 
nation of  that  base  with  hydrogen,  and  with  carbon, 
and  1 is  referred  to  be  the  relative  weight  of  the  atom 
of  hydrogen,  from  the  two  principal  compounds  into 
which  it  enters.  In  selecting  the  body  which  should 
be  assumed  as  unity,  Mr.  Dalton  has  been  induced  to 
fix  on  hydrogen,  because  it  is  that  body  which  unites 
with-others  in  the  smallest  proportion.  Thus  in  water, 
we  have  1 of  hydrogen,  by  weight,  to  8 of  oxygen  ; in 
ammonia,  1 of  hydrogen  to  14  of  nitrogen ; in  carbu- 
retted  hydrogen,  1 of  hydrogen  to  6 of  carbon  ; and  in 
sulphuretted  hydrogen,  1 of  hydrogen  to  16  of  sulphur. 
Taking  for  granted  that  all  these  bodies  are  binary 
compounds,  we  have  the  following  scale  of  numbers 
expressive  of  the  relative  weights  of  the  atoms  of  their 


elements : 

Hydrogen 1 

Oxygen 8 

Nitrogen 14 

Carbon 6 

Sulphur 16 


Drs.  Wollaston  and  Thomas,  and  Professor  Berze- 
lius, on  the  other  hand,  have  assumed  oxygen  as  the 
decimal  unit,  (the  first  making  it  10,  the  second  1,  and 
the  third  100,)  chiefly  with  a view  to  facilitate  the  esti- 
mation of  its  numerous  compounds  with  other  bodies. 
This  perhaps  is  to  be  regretted,  even  though  the 
change  may  be  in  some  respects  eligible,  because  it  is 
extremely  desirable  that  chemical  writers  should  em- 
ploy a universal  standard  of  comparison  for  the 
weights  of  the  atoms  of  bodies.  It  is  easy,  however, 
to  reduce  the  number  to  Mr.  Dalton’s  by  the  rule  of 
proportion.  Thus,  as  8,  Mr.  Dalton’s  number  for  oxy- 
gen, corrected  by  the  latest  experiments,  is  to  1,  his 
number  for  hydrogen,  so  is  10,  Dr.  Wallaston’s  number 
for  oxygen,  1.25  the  number  for  hydrogen.  Sir  II.  Davy 
has  assumed  with  Mr.  Dalton,  the  atom  of  hydro- 
gen as  unity  ; but  that  philosopher  and  Berzelius  also 
have  modified  the  theory,  by  taking  for  granted  that 
water  is  a compound  of  one  proportion  (atom)  of  oxy- 
gen and  two  proportions  (atoms)  of  hydrogen.  This 
is  founded  on  the  fact  that  two  measures  of  hydrogen 
gas  and  one  of  oxygen  gas  are  necessary  to  form  water ; 
and  on  the  supposition  that  equal  measures  of  differ- 
ent gases  contain  equal  numbers  of  atoms.  And  as  in 
water  the  hydrogen  is  to  the  oxygen  by  weight  as  1 to 
8,  two  atoms  or  volumes  of  hydrogen  must,  on  this  hy- 
pothesis, weigh  1,  and  1 atom  or  volume  of  hydrogen 
8;  or  if  we  denote  a single  atom  of  hydrogen  by  1,  we 
must  express  an  atom  of  oxygen  by  16.  It  is  objec- 
tionable, however,  to  this  modification  of  the  atomic 


theory,  that  it  contradicts  a fundamental  proposition 
of  Mr.  Dalton,  the  consistency  of  which  with  mecha- 
nical principles  he  has  fully  shown  ; namely,  that  that 
compound  of  any  two  elements  which  is  with  most 
difficulty  decomposed,  must  be  presumed,  unless  the 
contrary  can  be  proved,  to  be  a binary  one.  It  is  easy 
to  determine,  in  the  manner  already  explained,  the  re- 
lative weights  of  the  atoms  of  two  elementary  bodies 
which  unite  only  in  one  proportion ; but  when  one 
body  unites  in  different  proportions  with  another,  it  is 
necessary  in  order  to  ascertain  the  weight  of  its  atom, 
that  we  should  know  the  smallest  proportion  in  which 
the  former  combines  with  the  latter.  Thus  if  we  have 
a body  A,  100  parts  of  which  by  weight  combine  with 
not  less  than  32  of  oxygen,  the  relative  weight  of  its 
atom  will  be  to  that  of  oxygen  as  100  to  32;  or  reducing 
these  numbers  to  their  lowest  terms,  as  25  to  8 ; and 
the  number  25  will  therefore  express  the  relative  weight 
of  the  atom  of  A.  But  if,  in  the  progress  of  science, 
it  should  be  found  that  100  parts  of  A are  capable  of 
uniting  with  16  parts  of  oxygen,  then  the  relative 
weight  of  the  atom  of  A must  be  doubled ; for  as  100 
is  to  16,  so  is  50  to  8.  This  example  will  serve  to  ex- 
plain the  changes  that  have  been  sometimes  made  in 
assigning  the  weights  of  the  atoms  of  certain  bodies, 
changes  which  it  must  be  observed  always  consist 
either  in  a multiplication  or  division  of  the  original 
weight  by  some  simple  number.  There  are,  it  must  be 
acknowledged,  a few  cases  in  which  one  body  com 
bines  with  another  in  different  proportions ; and  yet 
the  greater  proportions  are  not  multiples  of  the  less  by 
any  entire  number.  For  example,  we  have  two  ox- 
ydes  of  iron,  the  first  of  which  consists  of  100  iron  and 
about  30  oxygen  ; the  second  of  100  iron  and  about  45 
oxygen.  But  the  numbers  30  and  45  are  to  each  other 
as  1 to  1A.  It  will,  however,  render  these  numbers  1 
and  1£  consistent  with  the  law  of  simple  multiples  ; if 
we  multiply  each  of  them  by  2,  it  will  change  them  to 
2 and  3 ; and  if  we  suppose  that  there  is  an  oxyde  of 
iron,  though  it  has  not  yet  been  obtained  experiment- 
ally, consisting  of  100  iron  and  15  oxygen;  for  the 
multiplication  of  this  last  number  by  2 and  3 will  then 
give  us  the  known  oxydes  of  iron.  In  some  cases 
where  we  have  the  apparent  anomaly  of  one  atom  of 
one  substance  united  with  1£  of  another,  it  has  been 
proposed  by  Dr.  Thomson  to  remove  the  difficulty  by 
multiplying  both  numbers  by  2,  and  by  assuming  that 
in  such  compounds  we  have  two  atoms  of  the  one 
combined  with  3 atoms  of  the  other.  Such  combina- 
tions, it  is  true,  are  exceptions  to  a law  deduted  by 
Berzelius,  that  in  all  inorganic  compounds  one  of  the 
constituents  is  in  the  state  of  a single  atom ; but  they 
are  in  no  respect  inconsistent,  with  the  views  of  Mr. 
Dalton,  and  are  indeed  expressly  admitted  by  him  to 
be  compatible  with  this  hypothesis,  as  well  as  con- 
firmed by  experience.  Thus,  it  will  appear  in  the 
sequel,  that  some  of  the  compounds  of  oxygen  with 
nitrogen  are  constituted  in  this  way.  Several  objec- 
tions have  been  proposed  to  the  theory  of  Mr.  Dalton  ; 
of  these  it  is  only  necessary  to  notice  the  most  impor- 
tant. It  has  been  contended  that  we  have  no  evidence 
when  one  combination  only  of  two  elements  exists, 
that  it  must  be  a binary  one,  and  that  we  might  equally 
well  suppose  it  to  be  a compound  of  2 atoms  of  the 
one  body  with  one  atom  of  the  other.  In  answer  to 
this  objection,  we  may  urge  the  probability,  that  when 
two  elementary  bodies  A and  B unite,  the  most  ener- 
getic combination  will  be  that  in  which  one  atom  of  A 
is  combined  with  one  atom  of  B ; for  an  additional 
atom  of  B will  introduce  a new  force,  diminishing  the 
attraction  of  these  elements  for  each  other,  namely, 
the  mutual  repulsion  of  the  atoms  of  B;  and  this  re- 
pulsion will  be  greater  in  proportion  as  we  increase 
the  number  of  the  atoms  of  B.  2dly,  It  has  been  said, 
that  when  more  than  one  compound  of  two  elements 
exists,  we  have  no  proof  which  of  them  is  the  binary 
compound,  and  which  the  ternary.  For  example,  that 
we  might  suppose  carbonic  acid  to  be  a compound  o 1 
an  atom  of  charcoal,  and  an  atom  of  oxygen  ; and  car- 
bonic oxyde  of  an  atom  of  oxygen,  with  two  atoms  of 
charcoal.  To  this  objection,  however,  it  is  a satisfac- 
tory answer  that  such  a constitution  of  carbonic  acid 
and  carbonic  oxyde  would  be  directly  contradictory  of 
a law  of  chemical  combination  ; namely,  that  it  is 
attended,  in  most  cases,  with  an  increase  of  specific 
gravity.  It.  would  be  absurd,  jtherefore,  to  suppose 
carbonic  acid,  which  is  the  heavier  body,  to  be  only 

105 


ATR 


ATR 


once  compounded,  and  carbonic  oxyde,  which  is  the  f 
lighter,  to  be  twice  compounded.  Moreover,  it  is  uni- 
versally observed,  that  of  chemical  compounds,  the 
most  simple  are  the  most  difficult  to  be  decomposed ; 
and  this  being  the  case  with  carbonic  oxyde,  we  may 
naturally  suppose  it  to  be  more  simple  than  carbonic 
acid.  3dly,  It  has  been  remarked,  that  instead  of  sup- 
posing water  to  consist  of  an  atom  of  oxygen  united 
with  an  atom  of  hydrogen,  and  that  the  atom  of  the 
former  is  7£  times  heavier  than  that  of  the  latter,  we 
might  with  equal  probability  conclude,  that  in  water 
we  have  7£  times  more  atoms  in  number  of  oxy- 
gen than  of  hydrogen.  But  this,  if  admitted,  would 
involve  the  absurdity  that  in  a mixture  of  hydrogen 
and  oxygen  gases  so  contrived  that  the  ultimate  atoms 
of  each  should  be  equal  in  number,  7 atoms  of  oxygen 
would  desert  all  the  proximate  atoms  of  hydrogen  in 
order  to  unite  with  one  at  a distance,  for  which  they 
must  have  naturally  a less  affinity. 

ATONIC.  Atohicus.  Having  a diminution  of 
strength. 

A'TONY.  ( Atonia , from  a , neg.  and  ruvu), 

to  extend.)  Weakness,  or  a defect  of  muscular 
power. 

ATRABI'LIS.  ( Atrabilis , from  atra,  black,  and 
bills,  bile.)  1.  Black  bile. 

2.  Melancholy. 

AtrabiliaRjE  capsule.  (From  atra , black,  and 
bilis .)  See  Renal  glands. 

ATRACHE  LUS.  (From  a,  priv.  and  rpaxnx°Si 
the  neck.)  Short-necked. 

Atrage'ne.  See  Clematis  vitalba. 

Atra'sia.  (From  a,  neg.  and  rnpam,  to  perforate.) 
Atresia.  1.  Imperforate. 

2.  A disease  where  the  natural  openings,  as  the  anus 
or  vagina,  have  not  their  usual  oritice. 

Atreta'rum.  (From  a,  neg.  and  rpaw,  to  perfo- 
rate.) A suppression  of  urine  from  the  menses  being 
retained  in  the  vagina. 

A'TRICES.  (From  a,  priv.  and  $pi\,  hair.)  Small 
tubercles  about  the  anus  upon  which  hairs  will  not 
grow. — Vaselius. 

A'trici.  Small  sinuses  in  the  rectum,  which 
do  not  reach  so  far  up  as  to  perforate  into  its 
cavity. 

A TRIPLEX.  ( Atriplex , icis.  f. ; said  to  be  named 
from  its  dark  colour,  vyhence  it  was  called  Atrum 
olus.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean 
system.  Class,  Polygamia ; Order,  MoniEcia. 

Atriplex  fcetida.  See  Chenopodium  vulvaria. 
Atriplex  hortensxs.  See  Atriplex  sat.iva. 
Atriplex  sativa.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
atriplex  hortensis  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Orache, 
the  herb  and  seed  of  this  plant,  Atriplex — caule  erecto 
herbaceo,  foliis  triangular ibus,  ot  Linnaeus,  have  been 
exhibited  medicinally  as  antiscorbutics,  but  the  prac- 
tice of  the  present  day  appears  to  have  totally  rejected 
them. 

ATROPA.  ( Atropa , ce.  f. , from  Arponos,  the  god- 
dess of  destiny : so  called  from  its  fatal  effects.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Atropa  belladonna.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  belladonna  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Solatium  melo- 
nocerasus ; Solatium  lethale.  Deadly  nightshade  or 
dvvale.  Atropa — caule  herbaceo;  foliis  ooatis  intc- 
gris  of  Linnams.  This  plant  has  been  long  known 
as  a strong  poison  of  the  narcotic  kind,  and  the  berries 
have  furnished  many  instances  of  their  fatal  effects, 
particularly  upon  children  that  have  been  tempted  to 
eat  them.  The  activity  of  this  plant  depends  on  a 
principle  sui  generis  called  Atropia.  (See  Atropia  ) 
The  leaves  were  first  used  internally,  to  discuss  scir- 
rhous and  cancerous  tumours;  and  from  the  good 
effects  attending  their  use,  physicians  w'ere  induced  to 
employ  them  internally,  for  the  same  disorders  ; and 
there  are  a considerable  number  of  well-authentica:ed 
facts,  which  prove  them  a very  serviceable  and  im- 
portant remedy.  The  dose,  at  first,  should  be  small ; 
and  gradually  and  cautiously  increased.  Five  grains 
are  considered  a powerful  dose,  and  apt  to  promote 
dimness  of  sight,  vertigo.  &c. 

Atropa  mandragora.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  plant  which  atfords  the  radix  mandragora;  of  the 
pharmacopoeias.  Mandrake.  The  boiled  root  is  em- 
ployed in  the  form  of  poultice,  to  discuss  indolent  tu- 
mours. 

106 


ATROPHIA.  (Atrophia,  a f. ; from  a,  neg.  and 
, rpetpui,  to  nourish.)  Marasmus.  Atrophy.  Nervous 
1 consumption.  This  disease  is  marked  by  a gradual 
wasting  of  the  body,  unaccompanied  either  by  a diffi- 
culty of  breathing,  cough,  oi  any  evident  fever,  but 
usually  attended  with  a loss  of  appetite  and  impaired 
digestion.  It  is  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the  class  Ca- 
chexia, and  order  Marcores.  There  are  four  s|  ecies  : — 

1.  When  it  takes  place  from  loo  copious  evacuations, 
it  is  termed  atrophia  inanitorv.m;  and  tabes  nutri- 
cuni ; — sudatoria  ; — a sanguifluxu,  &c. 

2.  When  from  famine,  atrophia  famelicorum. 

3.  When  from  corrupted  nutriment,  atrophia  caea- 
chymica. 

4.  And  when  from  an  interruption  in  the  digestive 
organs,  atrophia  debilium. 

The  atrophy  of  children  is  called  paidatrophia.  The 
causes  which  commonly  give  rise  to  atrophy,  are  a 
poor  diet,  unwholesome  air,  excess  in  venery,  fluor 
albus,  severe  evacuations,  continuing  to  give  suck  too 
long,  a free  use  of  spirituous  liquors,  mental  uneasi- 
ness, and  worms  ; but  it  frequently  comes  on  without 
any  evident  cause.  Along  with  the  loss  of  appetite 
and  impaired  digestion,  there  is  a diminution  of 
strength,  the  face  is  pale  and  bloated,  the  natural  heat 
of  the  body  is  somewhat  diminished,  and  the  lower 
extremities  are  cedematous.  Atrophy,  arise  from 
whatever  cause  it  may,  is  usually  very  difficult  to 
cure,  and  not  unfrequently  terminates  in  dropsy. 
A'TROPHY.  See  Atrophia. 

ATROPIA.  A poisonous  vegetable  principle,  pro- 
bably alkaline,  recently  extracted  from  the  Atropa 
belladonna,  or  deadly  nightshade,  by  Braudes  He 
boiled  two  pounds  of  dried  leaves  of  atropa  belladonna 
in  a sufficient  quantity  of  water,  pressed  the  decoction 
out,  and  boiled  the  remaining  leaves  again  in  water 
The  decoctions  were  mixed,  and  some  sulphuric  acid 
was  added,  in  order  to  throw  down  the  albumen  and 
similar  bodies ; the  solution  is  thus  rendered  thinner, 
and  passes  more  readily  through  the  filter.  The  de- 
coction was  then  supersaturated  with  potassa,  by 
which  he  obtained  a precipitate  that,  when  washed 
with  pure  wa.f  and  dried,  weighed  89  grains.  It  con- 
sisted of  sniai.  crystals,  from  which  by  solution  in 
acids,  and  precipitation  by  alkalies,  the  new  alkaline 
substance,  atropia,  was  obtained  in  a stale  of  purity. 

The  external  appearance  of  atropia  varies  consi- 
derably, according  to  the  different  methods  by  wiiich 
it  is  obtained.  _ When  precipitated  from  the  decoction 
of  the  herb  by  solution  of  potassa,  it  appears  in  the 
form  of  very  small  short  crystals,  constituting  a sandy 
powder.  When  thrown  down  by  ammonia  from  an 
aqueous  solution  of  its  salts,  it  appears  in  flakes  like 
wax,  if  the  solution  is  much  diluted ; if  concentrated, 
it  is  gelatinous  like  precipitated  alumina  . when  ob 
tained  by  the  cooling  of  a hot  solution  in  alkohol,  it 
crystallizes  in  long,  acicular,  transparent,  brilliant  crys- 
tals, often  exceeding  one  inch  in  length,  which  are 
sometimes  feathery,  at  other  times  star-like  in  appear- 
ance, and  sometimes  they  are  single  crystals.  Atropia, 
however,  is  obtained  in  such  a crystalline  state  only 
when  rendered  perfectly  pure  by  repeated  solution  in 
muriatic  acid,  and  precipitation  by  ammonia.  When 
pure,  it  has  no  taste.  Cold  water  has  hardly  any  effect 
upon  dried  atropia,  but  it  dissolves  a small  quantity 
when  it  is  recently  precipitated ; and  boiling  water 
dissolves  still  more.  Cold  alkohol  dissolves  but  a mi- 
nute portion  of  atropia ; hut  when  boiling,  it  readily 
dissolves  it.  Ether  and  oil  of  turpentine,  even  when 
boiling,  have  little  effect  on  atropia. 

Sulphate  of  atropia  crystallizes  in  rhomboidal  tables 
and  prisms  with  square  bases.  It  is  soluble  in  four  or 
five  parts  of  cold  water.  It  seems  to  effloresce  in  the 
air,  when  freed  as  much  as  possible  from  adhering 
sulphuric  acid,  by  pressure  between  the  folds  of  blot- 
ting paper.  Its  composition  by  Brandes  seems  to  be, 


Atropia, 38  93 

Sulphuric  acid, 36.52 

Water,  24.55 


100  00 

This  analysis  would  make  the  prime  equivalent  of 
atropia  so  low  as  5 3,  oxygen  being  1.  Muriate  of 
atropia  appears  in  beautiful  white  brilliant  crystals, 
which  are  either  cubes  or  square  plates  similar  to  the 
muriate  of  daturia.  He  makes  the  composition  qf  this 
salt  to  be, 


ATT 


ATT 


Atropia, 39.19 

Muriatic  acid,  25.40 

Water,  35.41 


100.09 

This  analysis  was  so  conducted  as  to  be  entitled  to 
little  attention.  Nitric,  acetic,  and  oxalic  acids  dis- 
solve atropia,  and  form  acicular  salts,  all  soluble  in 
water  and  alkohol.  Mr.  Brandes  was  obliged  to  dis- 
continue his  experiments  on  the  properties  of  this 
alkau.  The  violent  headaches,  pains  in  the  back,  and 
giddiness,  with  frequent  nausea,  which  the  vapour  of 
atropia  occasioned  while  he  was  working  on  it.  had 
such  a bad  eS'ect  on  his  weak  health,  that  he  has  en- 
tirely abstained  from  any  further  experiments. 

lie  once  tasted  a small  quantity  of  sulphate  of  atro- 
pia. The  taste  was  not  bitter,  but  merely  saline  ; but 
there  soon  followed  violent  headache,  shaking  in  the 
limbs,  alternate  sensations  of  heat  and  cold,  oppression 
of  the  chest,  and  difficulty  in  breathing,  and  diminished 
circulation  of  the  blood.  The  violence  of  these  symp- 
toms ceased  in  half  an  hour.  Even  the  vapour  of  the 
diderent  salts  of  atropia  produces  giddiness.  When 
exposed  for  a long  time  to  the  vapours  of  a solution  of 
nitrate,  phosphate,  or  sulphate  of  atropia,  the  pupil 
of  the  eye  is  dilated.  This  happened  tiequently  to 
him,  and  when  he  tasted  the  salt  of  atropia,  it  occurred 
to  such  a degree,  that  it  remained  so  for  twelve  hours, 
and  the  different  degrees  of  light  had  no  influence. — 
Schweigger's  Journal , xxviii.-i. 

We  may  observe  on  the  above,  that  it  is  highly  im- 
probable ihat  atropia  should  have  a saturating  power, 
intermediate  between  potassa  and  soda. 

ATTENDANT.  (Jittenuani ; from  attenuo , to 
make  thin.)  An  attenuant  or  diluent  is  that  which 
.possesses  the  power  of  imparting  to  the  blood  a more 
thin  and  more  fluid  consistence  than  it  had,  previous 
to  its  exhibition  ; such  are,  water,  whey,  and  all  aque- 
ous fluids. 

ATTO'LLENS.  ( Attollens ; from  attollo , to  lift 
.up.  Lifting  up  : a term  applied  to  some  muscles,  the 
office  of  which  is  to  lift  up  the  parts  they  are  affixed  to. 

Attollens  aurem.  A common  muscle  of  the  ear. 
Attollens  auricula  of  Albinos  and  Douglas;  Superior 
auris  of  Winslow  ; and  Attollens  auriculam  of  Cow- 
per.  It  aiises  thin,  broad,  and  tendinous,  from  the 
tendon  of  the  occipito-frontalis,  from  which  it  is 
almost  inseparable,  where  it  covers  the  aponeurosis  of 
the  tern poiai  muscle:  and  is  inserted  into  the  upper 
part  of  the  ear,  opposite  to  the  antihelex.  Its  use  is 
to  diaw  the  ear  upwards,  and  to  make  the  parts  into 
which  it  is  inserted,  tense. 

Attollens  occuli.  One  of  the  muscles  which 
pulls  up  the  eye.— See  Rutus  superior  occuli. 

Atto'nitus  morbus.  (From  attono,  to  surprise; 
so  called  because  the  person  falls  down  suddenly.) 
Jlttonitus  stupor.  The  apoplexy  and  epilepsy. 

ATTRACTION.  (Attractio ; from  ottraho,  to 
attract.)  Affinity.  The  terms  attraction,  or  affinity, 
and  repulsion,  in  the  language  of  modern  philosophers, 
are  employed  merely  as  the  expression  of  the  general 
facts,  that  the  masses  or  particles  of  matter  have  a 
tendency  to  approach  arid  unite  to,  or  to  recede  from 
jone  another,  under  certain  circumstances.  The  term 
attraction  is  used  synonymously  with  affinity.  See 
Ajfinity. 

All  bodies  have  a tendency  or  power  to  attract  each 
other  more  or  less,  and  it  is  this  power  which  is  called 
attraction. 

Attraction  is  mutual  it  extends  to  indefinite  dis- 
tances. All  bodies  whatever,  as  well  as  their  compo- 
nent elementary  particles,  are  endued  with  it.  It  is 
not  annihila.ed,  at  bow  great  a distance  soever,  we 
suppose  them  to  be  placed  from  each  other;  neither 
does  it  disappear  though  they  be  arranged  ever  so  near 
each  other. 

The  nature  of  this  reciprocal  attraction,  or  at  least 
the  cause  which  produces  it,  is  altogether  unknown  to 
us.  Whether  it  be  inherent  in  all  matter,  or  whether 
it  be  the  consequence  of  some  other  agent,  are  ques- 
tions beyond  the  reach  of  human  understanding;  but 
its  existence  is  nevertheless  certain. 

“The  instances  of  attraction  which  are  exhibited  by 
the  phenomena  around  us,  are  exceedingly  numerous, 
and  continually  present  themselves  to  ou.  observation. 
The  effect  of  gravity,  which  causes  the  weight  of  ho- 
odies, is  so  universal,  that  we  can  scarcely  form  an  idea 


now  the  universe  could  subsist  without  it.  Other 
attractions,  such  as  those  of  magnetism  and  electricity, 
.are  likewise  observable;  and  every  experiment  in 
chemistry  tends  to  show,  that  bodies  are  composed  of 
various  principles  or  substances,  which  adhere  to  each 
other  with  various  degrees  of  force,  and  may  be  sepa 
rated  by  known  methods.  It  is  a question  amt  ng  phi 
losophers,  whether  all  the  attractions  which  obtain  be 
tween  bodies  be  referrible  to  one  general  caus.  modi- 
fied by  circumstances,  or  whether  various  original  and 
distinct  causes  act  upon  the  particles  of  bodies  at  one 
and  the  same  time.  The  philosophers,  at  the  negin 
ning  of  the  present  century,  were  disposed  to  consider 
the  several  attractions  as  essentially  different,  because 
the  laws  of  their  action  differ  from  each  other ; but  the 
moderns  appear  disposed  to  generalize  this  subject,  and 
to  consider  all  the  attractions  which  exist  between  bo- 
dies, or  at  least  those  which  are  pe.manent,  as  de,  end 
ing  upon  one  and  the  same  cause,  whatevei  i.  may  be, 
which  regulates  at  once  the  motions  of  the  immense 
bodies  that  circulate  through  the  celestial  spaces,  and 
those  minute  particles  that  aie  transferred  fiom  one 
combination  to  another  in  the  operations  of  chemistry. 
The  earlier  philosophers  observed,  for  example,  that 
the  attraction  of  gravitation  acts  upon  bodies  with  a 
force  which  is  inversely  as  the  squares  of  the  distances ; 
and  from  mathematical  deduction  they  have  inferred, 
that  the  law  of  attraction  between  the  particles  them- 
selves follows  the  same  ra.io  ; but  when  meir  observa- 
tions were  applied  to  bodies  very  near  each  other,  or 
in  contact,  an  adhesion  took  place,  which  is  found  to 
be  much  greater  than  could  be  deduced  from  that  law 
applied  to  the  centres  of  gravity.  Hence  they  con- 
cluded, that  the  cohesive  attraction  is  governed  by  a 
much  higher  ratio,  and  probably  the  cubes  of  the  dis- 
tances. The  moderns,  on  the  contrary,  have  remark- 
ed, that  these  deductions  are  too  general,  because,  for 
the  most  part,  drawn  from  the  consideration  of  spheri- 
cal bodies,  which  admit  of  no  contact  but  such  as  is 
indefinitely  small,  and  exert  the  same  powers  on  each 
other,  whichever  side  may  be  obverted.  They  remark, 
likewise,  that  the  consequence  depending  on  the  sum 
of  the  attractions  in  bodies  not  spherical,  and  at  mi- 
nute distances  from  each  other,  will  not  follow  the 
inverted  ratio  of  the  square  of  the  distance  taken  from 
any  point  assumed  as  the  centre  of  gravity,  admitting 
the  particles  to  be  governed  by  that  law  ; but  that  it 
will  greatly  differ,  according  to  the  sides  of  the  solid 
which  are  presented  to  each  other,  and  their  respective 
distances ; insomuch  that  the  attractions  of  certain 
particles  indefinitely  near  each  other  will  be  indefi- 
nitely increased,  though  the  ratio  of  the  powers  acting 
upon  the  remoter  particles  may  continue  nearly  the 
same 

That  the  parts  ot  bodies  do  attract  each  other,  is 
evident  from  that  adhesion  which  produces  solidity', 
and  requires  a certain  force  to  overcome  it.  For  the 
sake  of  perspicuity,  the  various  effects  of  attraction 
have  been  considered  as  different  kinds  of  affinity  or 
powers.  Thai  power  which  physical  writers  call  the 
attraction  of  cohesion,  is  generally  called  the  attraction 
°f  aggregation  by  chemists.  Aggregation  is  consi- 
dered as  the  adhesion  of  parts  of  the  same  kind.  Thus 
a number  of  pieces  of  brimstone,  united  by  fusion, 
form  an  aggregate,  the  paits  of  which  ruay  be  sepa- 
rated again  by  mechanical  means.  7 hese  parts  have 
been  called  inte<  rant  pars,  that  is  to  say,  the  mi- 
nutest parts  into  which  a body  can  be  divided,  either 
ready  or  by  th-:  imagination,  so  as  not  to  change  its 
nature,  are  called  integrant  parts  Thus,  if  sulphur 
and  an  alkali  Le  combined  together,  and  form  liver  of 
sulphur,  we  may  conceive  the  mass  to  be  divided  and 
subdivided  to  an  exireme  degree,  until  at  length  the 
mass  consists  of  merely  a particle  of  brimstone  and  a 
particle  of  alkali.  This  then  is  an  integi  ant  part ; and 
if  it  be  divided  further,  the  effect  which  chemists  call 
decomposition  will  take  place;  and  the  particles,  con- 
sisting no  longer  of  liver  of  sulphur,  but  of  sulphur 
alone,  and  of  alkali  alone,  will  be  what  chemists  call 
component  parts  or  principles. 

The  union  of  bodies  in  a gross  way  is  called  mix- 
ture. Thus  sand  and  alkali  may  be  mixed  together. 
But  when  the  very  minute  parts  of  a body  unite  with 
those  of  another  so  intimately  as  to  form  a body  which 
has  properties  different  from  those  of  either  of  them, 
the  union  is  called  combination  or  composition.  Thus, 
it  sand  and  an  alkali  be  exposed  to  a strong  heat! 

107 


ATT 


ATT 

the  minute  parts  of  the  mixture  combine  and  form 
glass. 

If  two  solid  bodies,  disposed  to  combine  together,  be 
brought  into  contact  with  each  other,  uhe  particles 
which  touch  will  combine,  and  form  a compound; 
and  if  the  temperature  at  which  this  new  compound 
assumes  the  fluid  form  be  higher  than  the  temperature 
of  the  experiment,  the  process  will  go  no  farther,  be- 
cause this  new  compound,  being  interposed  between 
the  two  bodies,  will  prevent  their  farther  access  to 
each  other ; but  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  freezing  point 
of  the  compound  be  lower  than  this  temperature,  lique- 
faction will  ensue;  and  the  fluid  particles  being  at 
liberty  to  arrange  themselves  according  to  the  law  of 
their  attractions,  the  process  will  go  on,  and  the  whole 
mass  will  gradually  be  converted  into  a new  com- 
pound, in  the  fluid  state.  An  instance  of  this  may  be 
exhibited  by  mixing  common  salt  and  perfectly  dry 
pounded  ice  together.  The  crystals  of  the  sait  alone 
will  not  liquefy  unless  very  much  heated ; the  crystals 
of  the  water,  that  is  to  say,  the  ice,  will  not  liquefy 
unless  heated  as  high  as  thirty-two  degrees  of  Fahren- 
heit ; and  we  have,  of  course,  supposed  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  experiment  to  be  lower  than  this,  because 
our  water  is  in  the  solid  state.  Now  it  is  a well- 
known  fact,  that  brine,  or  the  saturated  solution  of 
sea-salt  in  water,  cannot  be  frozen  unless  it  be  cooled 
thirty-eight  degrees  lower  than  the  freezing  point  of 
pure  water.  It  follows  then,  that  if  the  temperature 
of  the  experiment  be  higher  than  this,  the  first  combi- 
nations of  salt  and  ice  will  produce  a fluid  brine,  and 
the  combination  will  proceed  until  the  temperature  of 
the  mass  has  gradually  sunk  as  low  as  the  freezing 
point  of  brine  ; after  which  it  would  cease  if  it  were 
not  that  surrounding  bodies  continually  tend  to  raise 
the  temperature.  And  accordingly  it  is  found  by  ex- 
periment, that  if  the  ice  and  the  salt  be  previously 
cooled  below  the  temperature  of  freezing  brine,  the 
combination  and  liquefaction  will  not  take  place. 

The  instances  in  which  solid  bodies  thus  combine 
together  not  being  very  numerous,  and  the  fluidity 
which  ensues  immediately  after  the  commencement  of 
this  kind  of  experiment,  have  induced  several  che- 
mists to  consider  fluidity  in  one  or  both  of  the  bodies 
applied  to  each  other,  to  be  a necessary  circumstance, 
in  order  that  they  may  produce  chemical  action  upon 
each  order.  Corpora  non  agunt  nisi  sint  fiuida. 

If  one  of  two  bodies  applied  to  each  other  be  fluid 
at  the  temperature  of  the  experiment,  its  parts  will 
successively  unite  with  the  parts  of  the  solid,  which 
will  by  that  means  be  suspended  in  the  fluid,  and  dis- 
appear. Such  a fluid  is  called  a solvent  or  menstruum. ; 
and  the  solid  body  i«  said  to  be  dissolved. 

Some  substances  unite  together  in  all  proportions. 
In  this  Way  the  acids  unite  with  water.  But  there  are 
likewise  many  substances  which  cannot  be  dissolved 
in  a fluid,  at  a settled  temperature,  in  any  quantity  be- 
yond a certain  portion.  Thus,  water  will  dissolve  only 
about  one-third  of  its  weight  of  common  salt;  and  if 
more  salt  be  added,  it  will  remain  solid.  A fluid  which 
holds  in  solution  as  much  of  any  substance  as  it  can 
dissolve,  is  said  to  be  saturated  with  it.  But  saturation 
with  one  substance  is  so  far  from  preventing  a fluid 
from  dissolving  another  body,  that  it  very  frequently 
happens,  that  the  solvent  power  of  the  compound  ex- 
ceeds that  of  the  original  fluid  itself  Chemists  like- 
wise use  the  word  saturation  in  another  sense ; in 
which  it  denotes  such  a union  of  two  bodies  as  pro- 
duces a compound  th  : most  remote  in  its  properties 
from  the  properties  of  the  component  parts  themselves. 
In  combinations  where  one  of  the  principles  predomi- 
nate, the  one  is  said  to  be  supersaturated,  and  the  other 
principle  is  said  to  be  subsaturated. 

Heat  in  general  increases  the  solvent  power  of  fluids, 
probably  by  preventing  part  of  the  dissolved  substance 
from  congealing  or  assuming  the  solid  form. 

Itorten  happens,  that  bodies  which  have  no  tendency 
to  unite  are  made  to  combine  together  by  means  of  a 
third,  which  is  then  called  the  medium.  Thus  water 
and  fat  oils  are  made  to  unite  by  the  medium  of  an 
alkali,  in  the  combination  called  soap.  Some  writers, 
who  seem  desirous  of  multiplying  terms,  call  this 
tendency  to  unite  the  affinity  of  intermedium.  This 
case  has  likewise  been  called  disposing  affinity;  but 
Berthollet  more  prpperly  styles  it  'reciprocal  affinity. 
He  likewise  distinguishes  affinity  into  elementary , 
when  it  is  between  the  elementary  parts  of  bodies : 
108 


and  resulting , when  it  is  a compound  only,  and  would 
not  take  place  with  the  elements  of  that  compound. 

It  very  frequently  happens,  on  the  contrary,  that  the 
tendency  of  two  bodies  to  unite,  or  remain  in  com- 
bination together,  is  weakened  or  destroyed  by  the  ad- 
dition of  a third.  Thus  alkohol  unites  with  water  in 
such  a manner  as  to  separate  most  salts  from  it.  A 
striking  instance  of  this  is  seen  in  a saturated  or  strong 
solution  of  nitre  in  water.  If  to  this  there  be  added 
an  equal  measure  of  alkohol,  the  greater  part  of  the 
nitre  instantly  falls  down.  Thus  magnesia  is  sepa- 
rated from  a solution  of  Epsom  salt,  by  the  addition  of 
an  alkali,  which  combines  with  the  sulphuric  acid,  and 
separates  the  earth.  The  principle  which  falls  down 
is  said  to  be  precipitated , and  in  many  instances  is 
called  a precipitate.  Some  modern  chemists  use  the 
term  precipitation  in  a more  extended,  and  rather 
forced  sense ; for  they  apply  it  to  all  substances  thus 
separated.  In  this  enunciation,  therefore,  they  would 
say,  that  potassa  precipitates  soda  from  a solution  of 
common  salt,  though  no  visible  separation  or  precipi- 
tation takes  place ; for  the  soda,  when  disengaged  from 
its  acid,  is  still  suspended  in  the  water  by  reason  of 
its  solubility. 

From  a great  number  of  facts  of  this  nature,  it  is 
clearly  ascertained,  not  as  a probable  hypothesis,  but 
as  simple  matter  of  fact,  that  some  bodies  have  a 
stronger  tendency  to  unite  than  others ; and  that  the 
union  of  any  substance  with  another  will  exclude,  or 
separate,  a third  substance,  which  might  have  been 
previously  united  with  one  of  them ; excepting  only  in 
those  cases  wherein  the  new  compound  has  a tendency 
to  unite  with  that  third  substance,  and  form  a triple 
compound.  This  preference  of  uniting,  which  a given 
substance  is  found  to  exhibit  with  regard  to  other 
bodies,  is  by  an  easy  metaphor  called  elective  attrac- 
tion, and  is  subject  to  a variety  of  cases,  according  to 
the  number  and  the  powers  of  the  principles  which 
are  respectively  presented  to  each  other.  The  cases 
which  have  been  most  frequently  observed  by  chemists, 
are  those  called  simple  elective  attractions,  and 
double  elective  attractions. 

When  a simple  substance  is  presented  or  applied  to 
another  substance  compounded  of  two  principles,  and 
unites  with  one  of  these  two  principles  so  as  to  sepa- 
rate or  exclude  the  other,  this  effect  is  said  to  be  pro- 
duced by  simple  elective  attraction. 

It  may  be  doubted  whether  any  of  our  operations 
have  been  carried  to  this  degree  of  simplicity.  All 
the  chemical  principles  we  are  acquainted  with  are 
simple  only  with  respect  to  our  power  of  decomposing 
them;  and  the  daily  discoveries  of  our  contemporaries 
tend  to  decompose  those  substances,  which  chemists  a 
few  years  ago  considered  as  simple.  Without  insist- 
ing, however,  upon  this  difficulty,  we  may  observe, 
that  water  is  concerned  in  all  the  operations  which  are 
called  humid,  and  beyond  a doubt  modifies  all  the 
effects  of  such  bodies  as  are  suspended  in  it ; and  the 
variations  of  temperature,  whether  arising  from  an 
actual  igneous  fluid,  or  from  a mere  modification  of 
the  parts  of  bodies,  also  tend  greatly  to  disturb  the 
effects  of  elective  attraction.  These  causes  render  it 
difficult  to  point  out  an  example  of  simple  elective 
attraction,  which  may  in  strictness  be  reckoned  as 
such. 

Double  elective  attraction  takes  place  when  two 
bodies,  each  consisting  of  two  principles,  are  pre- 
sented to  each  other,  and  mutually  exchange  a prin 
ciple  of  each ; by  which  means-  two  new  bodies,  or 
compounds,  are  produced  of  a different  nature  from 
the  original  compounds. 

Under  the  same  limitations  as  were  pointed  out  in 
speaking  of  simple  elective  attraction,  we  may  offer 
instances  of  double  elective  attraction.  Let  oxyde  of 
mercury  be  dissolved  to  saturatio,*.  in  the  nitric  acid, 
the  water  will  then  contain  nitrate  of  mercury.  Again, 
let  potassa  be  dissolved  to  saturation  in  the  sulphuric 
acid,  and  the  result  will  be  a solution  of  sulphate  ot 
potassa.  If  mercury  were  added  to  the  latter  solution, 
it  would  indeed  tend  to  unite  with  the  acid,  but,  would 
produce  no  decomposition ; because  the  elective  attrac 
tion  of  the  acid  to  the  alkali  is  the  strongest.  So  like- 
wise, if  the  nitric  acid  alone  be  added  to  it,  its  tend- 
ency to  unite  with  the  alkali,  strong  as  it  is,  will  not 
effect  any  change,  because  the  alkali  is  already  in 
combination  with  a stronger  acid.  But  if  the  nitrate 
of  mercury  be  added  to  the  solution  of  sulphate  of  po- 


ATT 


ATT 


tassa,  a change  of  principles  will  take  place ; the  sul- 
phuric acid  will  quit  the  alkali,  and  unite  with  the 
mercury,  while  the  nitric  acid  combines  with  the 
alkali;  and  these  two  new  salts,  namely,  nitrate  of 
potassa,  and  sulphate  of  mercury,  may  be  obtained 
separately  by  crystallization.  The  most  remarkable 
circumstance  in  this  process,  is  that  the  joint  effects  of 
the  attractions  of  the  sulphuric  acid  to  mercury,  and 
the  nitric  acid  to  alkali,  prove  to  be  stronger  than  the 
sum  of  the  attractions  between  the  sulphuric  acid  and 
the  alkali,  and  between  the  nitrous  acid  and  the  mer- 
cu  y ; for  if  the  sum  of  these  two  last  had  not  been 
weaker,  the  original  combinations  would  not  have 
been  broken. 

Mr.  Kit  wan,  who  first,  in  the  year  1782,  considered 
this  subject  with  that  attention  it  deserves,  called  the 
affinities  which  tend  to  preserve  the  original  combina- 
tions, the  quiescent  affinities.  He  distinguished  the 
affinities  or  attractions  which  tend  to  produce  a change 
of  principles,  by  the  name  of  the  divellent  affinities. 

Some  eminent  chemists  are  disposed  to  consider  as 
effects  of  double  affinities,  those  changes  of  principles 
only  which  would  not  have  taken  place  without  the 
assistance  of  a fourth  principle.  Thus,  the  mutual 
decomposition  of  sulphate  of  soda  and  nitrate  of  po- 
tassa, in  which  the  alkalies  are  changed,  and  sulphate 
of  potassa  and  nitrate  of  soda  are  produced,  is  not 
considered  by  them  as  an  instance  of  double  decom- 
position ; because  the  nitre  would  have  been  decom- 
posed by  simple  elective  attraction,  upon  the  addition 
of  the  acid  only. 

There  are  various  circumstances  which  modify  the 
effects  of  elective  attraction,  and  have  from  time  to 
time  misled  chemists  in  their  deductions.  The  chief 
of  these  is  the  temperature,  which,  acting  differently 
upon  the  several  parts  of  compounded  bodies,  seldom 
fails  to  alter,  and  frequently  reverses  the  effects  of  the 
affinities.  Thus,  if  alkohol  be  added  to  a solution  of 
nitrate  of  potassa,  it  unites  with  the  water,  and  pre- 
cipitates the  salt  at  a common  temperature.  But  if  the 
temperature  tie  raised,  the  alkohol  rises  on  account  of 
iis  volatility,  and  the  salt  is  again  dissolved.  Thus 
again,  if  sulphuric  acid  be  added,  in  a common  tem- 
perature, to  a combination  of  phosphoric  acid  and 
lime,  it  will  decompose  the  salt,  and  disengage  the 
phosphoric  acid;  but  if  this  same  mixture  of  .these 
p inciples  be  exposed  to  a considerable  heat,  the  sul- 
phuric acid  will  have  its  attraction  to  the  lime  so  much 
diminished,  that  it  will  rise,  and  give  place  again  to 
he  phosphoric,  which  will  combine  with  the  lime. 
Again,  mercury  kept  in  a degree  of  heat  very  nearly 
equal  to  volatilizing  it  will  absoi  b oxygen,  and  become 
converted  into  the  red  exyde  formerly  called  precipi- 
tate per  se;  but  if  the  heat  be  augmented  still  more, 
the  oxygen  will  assume  the  elastic  state,  and  fly  off, 
leaving  the  mercury  in  its  original  state.  Numberless 
instances  of  the  like  nature  continually  present  them- 
selves to  the  observation  of  chemists,  which  are  suffi- 
cient to  establish  the  conclusion,  that  the  elective 
attractions  are  not  constant  but  at  one  and  the  same 
temperature. 

Many  philosophers  are  of  opinion,  that  the  variations 
produced  by  change  of  temperature  arise  from  the 
elec.rve  attraction  of  the  matter  of  heat  itself.  But 
the  e are  no  decisive  experiments  either  in  confirma- 
tion or  refutation  of  this  hypothesis. 

If  we  except  the  operation  of  heat,  which  really 
produces  a change  in  the  elective  atti  actions,  we  shall 
find,  that  most  of  the  other  difficulties  attending  this 
subject  arise  from  the  imperfect  state  of  chemical 
science.  If  to  a compound  of  two  principles  a thiid 
lie  added,  the  effect  of  this  must  necessarily  be  different 
according  to  its  quality,  and  likewise  according  to  the 
state  of  saturation  of  the  two  principles  of  the  com- 
pounded body,  If  the  third  principle  which  is  added 
be  in  excess,  it  may  dissolve  and  suspend  the  compound 
which  may  be  newly  formed,  and  likewise  that  which 
might  have  been  precipitated.  The  metallic  solutions, 
decomposed  by  the  addition  of  an  alkali,  afford  no 
precipitate  in  various  oases  when  the  alkali  is  in  ex- 
cess; because  this  excess  dissolves  the  precipitate, 
whi  h would  else  have  fallen  down.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  one  of  the  two  principles  of  the  compound  body 
he  in  excess,  the  addition  of  a third  substance  may 
combine  with  that  excess,  and  leave  a neutral  sub- 
stance, exhibiting  very  different  properties  from  the 
former.  Thus,  if  cream  of  tartar,  winch  is  a salt  of 


difficult  solubility,  consisting  of  potassa  united  to  an 
excess  of  the  acid  of  tartar,  be  dissolved  in  water,  and 
chalk  be  added,  the  excess  unites  with  part  of  the 
lime  of  the  chalk,  and  forms  a scarcely  soluble  salt; 
and  the  neutral  compound,  which  remains  after  the 
privation  of  this  excess  of  acid,  is  a very  soluble  salt, 
greatly  differing  in  taste  and  properties  from  the  cieam 
of  tartar.  The  metals  and  the  acids  likewise  afford 
various  phenomena,  according  to  their  degree  of  oxy 
dation.  A determinate  oxydation  is  in  genes  al  neces 
sary  for  the  solution  of  metals  in  acids;  and  the  acids 
themselves  act  very  differently,  accordingly  as  they  are 
more  or  less  acidified.  Thus,  the  nitious  acid  gives 
place  to  acids  which  are  weaker  than  the  nitiic  acid  ; 
the  sulphurous  acid  gives  place  to  acids  greatly  infe  lor 
in  attractive  power  or  affinity  to  the  sulphuric  aci  1 
The  deception  arising  fiotn  effects  of  this  nature  is  in 
a great  measure  produced  by  the  want  of  discrimina- 
tion on  the  part  of  chemical  philosophers-;  it  being 
evident  that  the  properties  of  any  compound  substance 
depend  as  much  upon  the  proportion  of  its  ingredients, 
as  upon  their  respective  natme. 

The  presence  and  quantity  of  water  is  probably  of 
more  consequence  than  is  yet  supposed.  Thus,  bis- 
muth is  dissolved  in  nitrous  acid,  but  falls  when  the 
water  is  much  in  quantity. . 

The  power  of  double  elective  attractions,  too,  is 
distu.  bed  by  this  circumstance  : If  muriate  of  lime  be 
added  to  a solution  of  carbonate  of  soda,  they  a e 
both  decomposed,  and  tjhe  results  are  muriate  of  soda 
and  carbonate  of  lime.  But  if  lime  and  muriate  of 
soda  be  mixed  with  just  water  sufficient  to  make  them 
into  a paste,  and  this  be  exposed  to  the  action  of  car- 
bonic acid  gas,  a saline  efflorescence,  consisting  of 
ca  bon  ate  of  soda,  will  be  formed  on  the  surface,  and 
the  bottom  of  the  vessel  will  be  occupied  by  muriate 
of  lime  in  a state  of  deliquescence. 

Berthollet  made  a great  number.of  experiments,  from 
which  he  deduced  the  following  law: — that  in  elective 
attractions  the  power  exe. ted  is  not  in  the  ratio  of  the 
affinity  simple,  but  in  a ratio  compounded  of  the 
force  of  affinity  and  the  quantity  of  the  agent;  so  that 
quantity  may  compensate  for  weaker  affinity.  Thus 
an  acid  which  has  a weaker  affinity  than  another  for 
a given  base,  if  it  be  employed  in  a certain  quantity, 
is  capable  of  taking  part  of  that  base  from  the  acid 
which  has  a stronger  affinity  for  it;  so  that  the  base 
will  be  divided  between  them  in  the  compound  ratio 
of  their  affinity  and  quantity.  This  division  of  one 
substance  between  two  others,  for  which  it  has  differ- 
ent affinities,  always  takes  place,  according  to  him, 
when  three  such  are  present,  under  circumstances  in 
which  they  can  mutually  act  on  each  other.  And 
hence  it  rs,  that  the  force  of  affinity  acts  most  power- 
fully when  two  substances  first  come  into  contact,  and 
continues  to  decrease  in  power  as  either  approaches 
the  point  of  saturation.  For  the  same  reason  it  is  so 
difficult  to  separate  the  last  portions  of  any  substance 
adhering  to  another.  Hence,  if  the  doctrine  laid  down 
by  M.  Berthollet  be  true,  to  its  utmost  extent,  it  must 
be  impossible  ever  to  free  a compound  completely  from 
any  one  of  its  constituent  parts  by  the  agency  of 
elective  attraction;  so  that  all  our  best  established 
analyses  are  more  or  less  inaccurate. 

The  solubility  or  insolubility  of  principles,  at  the 
temperature  of  any  experiment,  has  likewise  tended  to 
mislead  chemists,  who  have  deduced  consequences 
from  the  first  effects  of  their  experiments.  It  is  evh 
dent,  that  many  separations  may  ensue  without  pre- 
cipitation; because  this  circumstance  does  not  take 
place  unless  the  separated  principle  be  insoluble,  01 
nearly  so.  The  soda  cannot  be  precipitated  from  a 
solution  of  sulphate  of  soda,  by  the  addition  of  potassa, 
because  of  its  great  solubility ; but,  on  the  contrary, 
the  new  compound  itself,  or  sulphate  of  potassa,  which 
is  much  less  soluble,  may  fall  down,  if  there  be  not 
enough  of  water  present  to  suspend  it.  No  certain 
knowledge  can  therefore  be  derived  from  the  appear 
ance  or  the  want  of  precipitation,  unless  the  products 
be  carefully  examined.  In  some  instances  all  the 
products  remain  suspended  ; and  in  others,  they  all  fall 
down,  as  may  be  instanced  in  the  decomposition  of 
sulphate  of  iron  by  lime.  Here  the  acid  unites  with 
the  lime,  and  forms  sulphate  of  lime,  which  is  scarcely 
at  all  soluble  ; and  the  still  less  soluble  oxyde  of  iron, 
which  was  disengaged,  falls  down  along  with  it. 

Many  instances  present  themselves,  in  which  decom 

100 


aur 


AUT 


position  does  not  take  place,  but  a sort  of  equilibrium 
of  affinity  is  perceived.  Thus,  soda,  added  to  the 
supertartrate  of  potassa,  forms  a triple  salt  by  com- 
bining with  its  excess  of  acid.  So  Irk  wise  ammonia 
combines  with  a portion  of  the  acid  of  muriate  of 
mercury,  and  forms  the  triple  compound  formerly  dis- 
tinguished by  the  barbarous  name  of  “sal  alembroth.” 

Attraction,  double  elective.  See  Affinity , double. 

Aua'nte.  (From  avaivo),  to  dry.)  A dry  disease, 
proceeding  from  a fermentation  in  the  stomach,  de- 
scribed by  Hippocrates  de  Morbis. 

Aua'pse.  The  same. 

Au'chen.  (From  an%£a),  to  be  proud.)  The  neck, 
which  in  the  posture  of  pride,  is  made  stiff  and  erect. 

AUDITORY.  {Auditor ius ; from  audio , to  hear.) 
Belonging  to  the  organ  of  hearing;  as  auditory  nerve, 
passage,  &c. 

Auditory  nerve.  See  Portio  mollis. 

Auditory  passage.  See  Ear , and  Meatus  auditor), us 
internus. 

AUGITE.  Pyroxene  of  Haiiy.  A green,  brown,  or 
black  mineral,  found  crystallized,  and  in  grains  in  vol- 
canic rocks  in  basaltes.  It  consists  of  silica,  lime, 
oxyde  of  iron,  magnesia,  alumina,  and  manganese. 

[It  occurs  in  crystals,  amorphous,  in  rounded  frag- 
ments, or  in  grains.  The  Augite  has  a foliated  struc- 
ture in  two  directions,  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the 
primitive  form.  It  is  harder  than  hornblende  or 
olivine,  scratches  glass,  and  gives  sparks  with  steel. 
Its  specific  gravity  varies  from  3.10  to  3.47. 

It  is  fused  with  difficulty  by  the  blow-pipe;  but  in 
small  fragments  melts  into  an  enamel,  which,  in  the 
coloured  varieties,  is  black.  Its  greater  hardness,  the 
results  of  mechanical  division,  and  its  difficult  fusi- 
bility, will  in  general  be  sufficient  to  distinguish  it 
from  hornblende,  which  it  often  resembles.  It  cannot 
easily  be  confounded  with  schorl.  It  has  two  varie- 
ties. 1.  Common  Augite.  2.  Coccolite. — Cl.  Min.  A.] 

Augu'stum.  An  epithet  formerly  given  to  several 
compound  medicines. 

Auli'scos.  (From  aoXos,  a pipe.)  A catheter,  or 
clyster-pipe. 

AU'LOS.  (AvXoff,  a pipe.)  A catheter,  cauula,  or 
clyster-pipe. 

AU  RA.  {Aura,  ce.  f. ; from  aio,  to  breathe.)  Any 
subtile  vapour  or  exhaltation. 

Aura  epileptica.  A sensation  which  is  felt  by 
epileptic  patients,  as  if  a blast  of  eold  air  ascended  from 
the  lower  parts  towards  the  heart  and  head. 

Aura  seminis.  The  extremely  subtile  and  vivify- 
ing portion  of  the  semen  virile,  that  ascends  through 
the  Fallopian  tubes,  to  impregnate  the  ovum  in  the 
ovarium. 

Aura  vitalxs.  So  Van  Helmont  calls  the  vital 
heat. 

AURA'NTIUM.  ( Aurantium , i.  n. ; so  called,  ab 
aureo  colore,  from  its  golden  colour,  or  from  Arantium , 
a town  of  Achaia.)  Theorange.  Set  Citrus  aurantium. 

Aurantium  curassavente.  The  Curassoa,  or 
Curassao  apple,  or  orange.  The  fruit  so  called  seems 
to  be  the  immature  oranges,  that  by  some  accident 
have  been  checked  in  their  growth.  They  are  a grate- 
ful aromatic  bitter,  of  a flavour  very  different  from  that 
of  the  peel  of  the  ripe  fruit,  and  without  any  acid; 
what  little  tartness  they  have  when  fresh,  is  lost  in 
drying.  Infused  in  wine,  or  brandy,  they  afford  a good 
Ditter  for  the  stomach.  They  are  used  to  promote  the 
discharge  in  issues,  whence  their  name  of  issue  peas, 
and  to  give  the  flavour  of  hops  to  beer. 

Aurantii  BACCiE.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Aurantii  cortex.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Aurichalcum.  Brass. 

AURI'CULA.  ( Auricula , ce.  f.  dim.  of  aur  is,  the 
ear.)  1.  An  auricle  or  little  ear. 

2.  The  external  ear,  upon  which  are  several  emi- 
nences and  depressions ; as  the  helix , antihe'iz , tragus , 
antitragus,  conchce  auriculce , scapha,  and  lobulus.  See 
Ear. 

3.  Applied  to  some  parts  which  resemble  a little  ear, 
as  the  auricles  of  the  heart. 

4.  In  botany,  applied  to  parts  of  plants,  which  re- 
semble an  ear  in  figure,  as  Auricula  judee,  and  Auricula 
muris,  <$-c. 

Auricula  jUDfi.  See  Petna  auricula. 

Auricula  muris.  See  Hieradum. 

Auricula  cordis.  The  auricles  of  the  heart.  See 
Heart. 

110 


AURICULA'RIS.  {Auricularis , from  auris,  the 
ear.)  Pertaining  to  the  ear. 

Auricularis  digitus.  The  little  finger;  so  called 
because  people  generally  put  it  into  the  ear,  when  the 
hearing  is  obstructed. 

AURICUL  ATUS.  Auricled.  A leaf  is  said  to  be  so, 
when  furnished  at  its  base  with  a pair  of  leaflets,  pro- 
perly distinct,  but  occasionally  liable  to  be  joined  to  it, 
as  in  Citrus  aurantium. 

Auriga.  {A  uriga,  a wagoner.)  A bandage  for  the 
sides  is  so  called  because  it  is  made  like  the  traces  of  a 
w agon-horse. — G alcn. 

AURI'GO.  {Ab  aureo  colore;  from  its  yellow 
colour.)  The  jaundice.  See  Icterus 

AURIPI'GMENTUM.  (From  aurum,  gold,  and 
pigmentum,  paint ; so  called  from  its  colour  and  its  use 
to  painters.)  Yellow  orpiment.  See  Arsenic. 

AU  RIS.  {Auris,  is.  f. ; from  aura,  air,  as  being  the 
medium  of  hearing.)  The  ear,  or  organ  of  hearing 
See  Ear. 

AURISCA'LPIUM.  (From  auris,  the  ear,  and 
scalpo,  to  scrape.)  An  instrument  for  cleansing  the  ear- 

Auru'go  The  jaundice.  See  Auriga. 

AU  RUM.  1.  Gold. 

2.  This  term  was  applied  to  many  substances  by 
alchemists  and  chemists,  which  resembled  gold  in 
colour  or  virtues. 

Aurum  eulminans.  The  precipitate  formed  by 
putting  ammonia  into  a solution  of  gold. 

Aurum  graphicum.  An  ore  of  gold. 

Aurum  horizontale.  Oil  of  cinnamon  and  sugars 

Aurum  leprosum.  Antimony. 

Aurum  musivum.  Mosaic  gold.  “A  combination 
of  tin  and  sulphur,  which  is  thus  made;  Melt  twelve 
ounces  of  tin,  and  add  to  it  three  ounces  of  mercury ; 
trituiate  this  amalgam  with  seven  ounces  of  sulphur, 
and  three  of  muriate  of  ammonia.  Put  the  powder 
into  a mattress,  bedded  rather  deep  in  sand,  and  keep 
it  for  several  hours  in  a gentle  heat;  which  is  aiter- 
ward  to  be  raised,  and  continued  for  several  hours 
longer.  If  the  heat  have  been  moderate,  and  not  con- 
tinued too  long,  the  golden-coloured  scaly  porous  mass, 
called  aurum  musivum,  will  be  found  at  the  bottom  of 
the  vessel ; but  if  it  have  been  too  strong,  the  aurum 
musivum  fuses  to  a black  mass  of  a striated  texture. 
This  process  is  thus  explained:  as  the  heat  increases, 
the  tin,  by  stronger  affinity,  seizes  and  combines  with 
the  muriatic  acid  of  the  muriate  of  ammonia;  while 
the  alkali  of  that  salt,  combining  with  a portion  of  the 
sulphur,  flies  off  in  the  form  of  a sulphuret.  The  com- 
bination of  tin  and  muriatic  acid  sublimes;  and  is 
found  adhering  to  the  sides  of  the  mattress.  The  mer 
cury,  which  served  to  divide  the  tin,  combines  with 
part  of  the  sulphur,  and  forms  cinnabar,  which  al.-fr 
sublimes,  and  the  remaining  sulphur,  with  the  re- 
maining tin,  forms  the  aurum  musivum  which  occu- 
pies the  lower  part  of  the  vessel.  It  must  be  admitted, 
however,  that  this  explanation  does  not  indicate  the 
reasons  why  such  an  indirect  and  complicated  process 
should  be  required  to  form  a simple  combination  of  tin 
and  sulphur. 

Aurum  musivum  has  no  taste,  though  some  speci- 
mens exbibit  a sulphureous  smell.  It  is  not  soluble  in 
water,  acids,  or  alkaline  solutions.  But  in  the  dty 
way  it  lorms  a yellow  sulphuret,  soluble  in  water.  It 
deflagrates  with  nitre.  Bergman  mentions  a native 
aurum  musivum  from  Siberia,  containing  tin,  sulphur, 
and  a small  proportion  of  copper. 

This  substance  is  used  as  a pigment  for  giving  a 
golden  colour  to  small  statue  or  plaster  figures.  It  is 
likewise  said  to  be  mixed  with  melted  glass  to  imi- 
tate lapis  lazulii. 

Aurum  potabile.  Gold  dissolved  and  mixed  with 
oil  of  rosemary,  to  be  drunk. 

Authe'meron.  (From  auroj,  the  same,  and  yuepa, 
a day  ) A medicine  which  gives  relief,  or  is  to  be  ad 
ministered  the  same  day. 

AUTOCRATE'IA.  The  healing  power  of  nature 

— Hippocrates. 

[ AUTOM  ALITE.  This  mineral  substance  is  other- 
wise called  Gahnite.  It  is  always  crystallized  in 
small,  but  very  regular  octaedrons,  which  are  some- 
times double,  like  those  of  spinelle.  Its  colour  is  deep 
green,  or  greenish  black,  and  its  fragments  are  trans- 
lucent. It  scratches  quartz,  and  has  an  uneven  or 
conchoidal  fracture.  Its  specific  gravity  varies  from 
4.26  to  4.69.  It  is  not  a conductor  of  electricity. 


AVE 


AXI 


Before  the  blow-pipe  it  is  infusible ; but  with  borax, 
According  to  Eckeberg,  it  gives  a green  glass,  while 
hot,  which  becomes  colourless  when  cold.  ) t contains 
Alumine  60.,  oxide  of  zinc  24.25,  oxide  of  iron  9.25, 
silex,  4.75=98.25.  According  to  Vauquelin,  Alumine 

42.,  oxide  of  zinc  28.,  oxide  of  iron  5.,  silex  4.,  sulphur 

17.,  insoluble  residue  4.  It  has  been  found  at  a mine 
of  Fahlun,  in  Sweden,  in  a rock  abounding  in  talc. 
—Cl.  Min.  A.] 

AUTO'PSIA.  (From  auroj,  himself,  and  ott'Jopai, 
to  see.)  Ocular  evidence. 

Auto'pyros.  (From  avroj,  itself,  and  zsvpos, 
wheat.)  Bread  made  with  the  meal  of  wheat,  from 
which  the  bran  has  not  been  removed.— Galen. 

AUXILIARY.  Assisting.  This  term  is  applied  to 
the  means  which  co-operate  in  curing  diseases,  and  to 
parts  which  assist  others  in  performing  certain  func- 
tions. The  pyramidales  were  called  auxiliary 
muscles. 

AVANTURINE.  A variety  of  quartz  rock  con- 
taining mica  spangles.  It  is  found  in  Spain  and  Scot- 
land. 

AVELLA'NA.  (From  Abella , or  Avella,  a town  in 
Campania,  where  they  grow.)  The  specific  name  of 
the  hazel-nut.  See  Corylus  avellana. 

Avellana  cathartica.  A purgative  seed  or  nut, 
from  Barbadoes,  the  produce  of  the  Jatropha  curcas. 
See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Avellana  mexicana.  Cocoa  and  chocolate  nut. 

Avellana  purgatrix.  Garden  spurge. 

A VENA.  (Avcna,  <e.  f. ; from  avco,  to  covet;  be- 
cause cattle  are  so  fond  of  it.)  The  oat.  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linneean  system. 
Class,  Triandria;  Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  oat. 

Avena  sativa.  The  systematic  name  for  the  arena 
of  the  pharmacopoeias.  It  is  the  seed  which  is  com- 
monly used,  and  called  the  oat.  There  are  two  kinds 
of  oats  : the  black  and  the  white.  They  have  similar 
virtues,  but  the  black  are  chiefly  sown  for  horses. 
They  are  less  farinaceous,  and  less  nourishing,  titan 
rice,  or  wheat ; yet  afford  sufficient  nourishment,  of 
easy  digestion,  to  such  as  feed  constantly  on  them  In 
Scotland,  and  some  of  the  northern  counties  of  Eng- 
land, oats  form  the  chief  bread  of  the  inhabitants. 
They  are  much  used  in  Germany  ; but,  in  Norway, 
oat  bread  is  a luxury  among  the  common  people. 
Gruels,  made  with  the  flour,  or  meal,  called  oatmeal, 
digest  easily,  have  a soft  mucilaginous  quality,  by 
which  they  obtund  acrimony,  and  are  used  for  com- 
mon drink  and  food  in  fevers,  inflammatory  disorders, 
coughs,  hoarseness,  roughness,  and  exulceration  of  the 
fauces;  and  water  grueis  answer  all  the  purposes  of 
Hippocrates’s  ptisan.  Externally,  poultices,  with  oat- 
meal, vinegar,  and  a very  little  oil,  are  good  for  sprains 
and  bruises.  Stimulant  poultices,  with  the  grounds 
of  strong  beer,  mixed  up  with  oatmeal,  are  made  for 
tumours,  &c.  of  a gangrenous  tendency. 

Avenacv.  A Molucca  tree,  of  a caustic  quality. 

AVENS.  (Avens,  entis  ; from  aves,  to  desire.)  1. 
The  specific  name  of  a species  of  dipsosis  in  Good’s 
Nosoloey : immoderate  thirst. 

2.  The  name  of  a plant.  See  Oeum. 

AVENIUS.  Veinless.  Without  a vein.  A term 
applied  hy  botanists  to  a leaf  which  is  without  what 
they  call  a vein ; as  in  Clusia  alba. 

AVENZOAR.  A native  of  Seville,  in  Spain,  who 
flourished  about  the  beginning  of  the  twelfth  century ; 
he  was  made  physician  to  the  king,  and  is  said,  but  on 
imperfect  evidence,  to  have  attained  the  uncommon 
age  of  135.  He  prepared  his  own  medicines,  and  prac- 
tised surgery,  as  well  as  physic.  His  principal  work 
was  a compendium  of  the  practice  of  medicine,  called, 
“ Al-Theiser,”  containing  some  diseases  not  elsewhere 
described,  and  numerous  cases  candidly  related.  He 
was  called  the  Experimenter,  from  his  careful  investi- 
gation of  the  powers  of  medicines  by  actual  trial. 

AVERROES.  An  eminent  philosopher  and  physi- 
cian, born  about  the  middle  of  the  12th  century,  at 
Corduba,in  Spain.  He  studied  medicine  under  Aven- 
zoar,  but  does  not  appear  to  have  been  much  engaged 
in  the  practice  of  it,  his  life  exhibiting  the  most  extra- 
ordinary vicissitudes  of  honours  bestowed  upon  him 
as  a magistrate,  and  persecutions,  which  he  under- 
went for  religion.  He  appears  to  have  first  observed, 
that  the  small-pox  occurs  but  once  in  the  same  person 
His  principal  medical  work  called  the  “ Universal,”  is 


1 a compendium  of  physic,  mostly  collected  from  other 
authors.  He  died  about  the  year  1206. 

AVICENNA.  A celebrated  philosopher  and  phy- 
sician, born  in  Chorasan,  in  the  year  980.  He  studied 
at  Bagdat,  obtained  a degree,  and  began  to  practise  at 
18 : and  he  soon  attained  great  wealth  and  honour  in 
the  court  of  the  caliph.  But  during  the  latter  part  of 
his  life,  residing  at  Ispahan,  after  several  years  spent 
in  travelling,  he  impaired  his  constitution  by  intemper- 
ance, and  died  of  a dysentery  in  his  58th  year.  His 
chief  work  on  medicine,  called  ft  Canon  Medicinae,” 
though  mostly  borrowed  from  the  Greek  or  other  pre- 
ceding writers,  and  in  a very  diffuse  style,  acquired 
great  reputation,  and  was  taught  in  the  European 
colleges  till  near  the  middle  of  lire  17th  century. 

AVICE'NNIA.  (Named  after  the  celebrated  phy 
sician  of  that  name.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Order, 
Angiospermia. 

Avicennta  tomentosa.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  Avicennia — foliis  cordato  ovatis , subtus  tomentosis , 
of  Linnaeus,  which  aflords  the  Malacca  bean,  or  Ana- 
cardium  orientate  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  The  fruit, 
or  nut,  so  called,  is  of  a shining  black  colour,  heart- 
shaped,  compressed,  and  about  the  size  of  the  thumb- 
nail. It  is  now  deservedly  forgot  in  this  country. 

Avigato  pear.  See  Laurus  persea. 

Awl-shaped.  See  Leaf. 

AWN.  See  Arista. 

AXE-STONE.  A species  of  nephrite,  and  a sub- 
species of  jade,  from  which  it  differs  in  not  being  of  so 
light  a green,  and  in  having  a somewhat  slaty  texture. 

[The  fracture  of  this  mineral  is  more  or  less  splintery 
and  glimmering.  The  structure  of  large  specimens  is 
a little  slaty.  Its  hardness  is  less  than  that  of  nephrite ; 
it  is  more  easily  broken,  and  often  falls  into  tabular 
fragments.  It  is  usually  translucent,  sometimes  at 
the  edges  only.  Its  colour  varies  from  a dark  or  leek 
green,  to  grass  and  olive  green,  or  even  greenish  gray. 
It  occurs  amorphous,  sometimes  in  rolled  fragments. 

It  is  less  easily  fusible  than  nephrite  or  Saussurite, 
and  melts  with  efferverscence  into  a black  enamel. 
It  often  appears  to  be  nearly  allied  to  serpentine. 
This  mineral  has  been  found  chiefly  in  South  America, 

, New  Zealand,  and  the  islands  of  the  South  sea.  It 
receives  a tolerable  polish ; and  is  employed  by  the 
natives  of  the  aforesaid  islands  for  making  hatchets , 
and  other  instruments ; and  hence  its  name. — Clean. 
Min.  A.] 

AXI'LLA.  ( Axilla , ce.  f.  Atzil,  Heb.  Scaliger 
deduces  it  from  ago ,.  to  act ; in  this  manner,  ago , axo 
axa,  axula , axilla.)  1.  In  anatomy,  the  cavity  under 
the  upper  part  of  the  arm,  called  the  arm-pit. 

2.  In  botany,' the  angle  formed  by  the  branch  and 
stem  of  a plant,  or  by  the  leaf  with  either. 

AXILLARIS.  (From  axilla , the  arm-pit.)  Axillary. 
I.  Of,  or  belonging  to  the  axilla , or  arm- pit. 

2.  In  botany,  leaves,  Sec.  are  said  to  be  axillary  which 
proceed  from  the  angles  formed  : by  the  stem  and 
branch. 

AXILLARIS.  See  Axillary. 

Axillaris  gemma.  Axillary  gem.  The  gem  which 
comes  out  of  the  axilla  of  a plant.  It  is  this  which 
bears  the  fruit. 

AXILLARY.  ( Axillaris ; from  axilla,  the  arm- 
pit.)  Of  or  belonging  to  the  axilla,  or  arm-pit. 

Axillary  arteries.  Arterice  axillares.  The  ax 
illary  arteries  are  continuations  of  the  subclavians, 
and  give  off,  each  of  them,  in  the  axilla,  four  mam- 
mary arteries,  the  subscapular,  and  the  posterior  and 
anterior  circumflex  arteries,  which  ramify  about  the 
joint. 

Axillary  nerves.  Nervis  axillares.  Articular 
nerve.  A branch  of  the  brachial  plexus,  and  some- 
times of  the  radial  nerve.  It  runs  outwards  and  back- 
wards, around  the  neck  of  the  humerus,  and  is  lost  in 
the  muscles  of  the  scapula. 

Axillary  veins.  Vence  axillares.  The  axillary 
veins  receive  the  blood  from  the  veins  of  the  arm,  and 
evacuate  it  into  the  subclavian  vein. 

AX1NITE.  Thumerstone.  A massive  or  crystal- 
lized mineral,  the  crystals  of  which  resemble  an  axe 
in  the  form  and  sharpness  of  their  edges.  It  is  found 
in  beds  at  Thum,  in  Saxony,  and  in  Cornwall. 

[This  mineral  is  sometimes  in  tabular  masses,  but 
most  commonly  in  crystals,  which  are  easily  recog- 
nised. The  general  form  of  these  crystals  is  a very 

111 


AZO 


AZY 


oblique  romb,  or  rather  four-sided  prism,  so  flattened, 
that  some  of  its  edges  become  thin  and  sharp,  like  the 
edge  of  an  axe.  The  primitive  form  is  a tour-sided 
prism,  whose  bases  are  parallelograms  with  angles  of 
101°  30'  and  78°  30  . The  integrant  particles  are  oblique 
triangular  prisms.  M.  Haiiy  has  described  live  second- 
ary forms. 

Before  the  blow-pipe  it  easily  melts  with  ebullition, 
into  a dark  gray  enamel,  which  with  borax  becomes 
olive  green.  It  contains,  according  to  Vauquelin,  silex 
44,  alumiue  18,  lime  19,  iron  14,  manganese  4, =99. 

Axinite  is  a rare  mineral.  It  is  found  in  primitive 
rocks,  more  particularly  in  fissures  or  veins  which 
traverse  them.  In  Dauphiny,  it  is  associated  with 
quartz,  feldspar,  epidote,  and  asbestus.  In  the  Pyre- 
nees with  quartz  and  limestone.  In  Norway,  near 
Arendal,  with  feldspar  and  epidote;  and  near  Kous- 
herg  it  exists  in  limestone  with  mica,  quartz,  &c.  It 
occurs  in  lamellar  masses  near  Thum  in  Saxony, 
whence  the  name  Thumerstone. — CL  Min.  A.] 

AXIS.  (From  a go,  to  act.)  The  second  vertebra 
See  Lentatus. 

AXU'NGIA.  (Axungia,  a.  f. ; from  axis,  an  axle- 
tree,  and  unguo , to  anoint.)  Hog’s  lard. 

Axungia  cprata.  Purified  hog’s  lard. 

Axungia  de  mum mia.  Marrow'. 

A zac.  (Arabian.)  Gum  ammoniac. 

Azagor.  Verdigris. 

AZALEA.  (From  agaAroj,  dry,  from  its  growing* 
in  a dry  soil.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linmeau  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

Azal.ea  pontica.  The  Pontic  azalea. 

Azamar.  Native  cinnabar.  Vermilion. 

Az*.d.  A fine  kind  of  camphire. 

AZO'l  Z.  (From  a,  priv.  and  gsw,  to  live  ; because 
it  is  unfit  fot  respiration.)  Azot.  See  Nitrogen. 


Azotane.  The  chloride  of  azote. 

Azote , chloride  of.  See  Nitrogen. 

Azote , deutozyde  of.  See  Nitrogen 

Azote , gaseous  oxyde  of.  See  Nitrogen. , 

Azote , iodide  of.  See  Nitrogen. 

Azote , protoxyde  of.  See  Nitrogen. 

A'zoth.  An  imaginary  universal  remedy. 

A'zub.  Alum. 

Azurestone.  See  Lapis  lazuli. 

Azure  spar,  prismatic.  See  Azurite 

AZURITE.  Prismatic  azure  spar.  Lazulite  of 
Werner.  A mineral  of  a fine  blue  colour,  composed 
of  alumina,  magnesia,  silica,  oxyde  of  iron,  and  lime. 
It  occurs  in  Vorau,  in  Stiiia,  and  the  bishopric  of 
Salzburg. 

Azc  ricm.  Quicksilver,  sulphur,  and  sal-ammoniac. 

A'zyges.  (From  a,  priv.  and  <,vyos,  a yoke.)  The 
os  sphenoides  was  so  called,  because  it  has  no  fellow. 

A ZYGOS.  (From  a.  priv.  and  goyos,  a yoke  ; be- 
cause it  has  no  fellow.)  Several  single  muscles,  veins, 
bones,  &c.  are  so  called. 

Azygos  processus.  A process  of  the  os  sphenoides. 

Azygos  uvul.*:.  A muscle  of  the  uvula.  Palato- 
staphilinus  of  Douglas.  Staphilinus , or  Episiaphi- 

linus  of  Winslow.  It  arises  at  one  extremity  of  the 
suture  which  joins  the  palate  bones,  runs  down  the 
whole  length  of  the  velum  and  uvula,  resembling  an 
earth-worm,  and  adhering  to  the  tendons  of  the  cir- 
cumflexi.  It  is  inserted  into  the  tip  of  the  uvula.  Its 
use  is  to  raise  the  uvula  upwards  and  forwards,  and 
to  shorten  it.  . 

Azygos  vena.  Azygos  vein.  Vena  sine  pari. 
This  vein  is  situated  in  the  right  cavity  of  the  thorax, 
upon  the  dorsal  vertebrae.  It  receives  the  blood  from 
the  vertebral,  intercostal,  bronchial,  pericardiac,  and 
diaphragmatic  veins,  and  evacuates  it  into  the  vena 
cava  superior. 


B. 


X9  ABUZICA’RIUS.  (BaSougocaoios ; 'rom /3a6a%u), 
-*-*10  speak  inarticulately.)  The  incubtR?,  or  night- 
mare : so  called,  because,  in  it,  the  person  is  apt  to  make 
an  inarticulate  or  confused  noise. 

B A CCA.  ( Bacca , ae.  f.,  a berry.)  A pulpy  peri- 
carpium,  or  seed-vessel,  enclosing  several  naked  seeds, 
connected  by  a slender  membrane,  and  dispersed 
through  the  pulp.  It  is  distinguished  by  its  figure  into, 

1.  Bacca  rotunda , round;  as  in  Ribes  rubrum,  the 
currant,  and  Grossularia , the  gooseberry. 

2.  Bacca  oblonga,  oblong ; as  in  Barbaria  vulgaris , 
common  barberry. 

3.  Bacca  tticocca,  double,  as  in  Jasminum. 

4.  Bacca  recutita,  circumcised  like  the  prominent 
glans  penis,  without  the  prepuce;  as  in  Taxus 
baccata. 

From  the  substances  it  is  denominated, 

1.  Bacca  succosa , juicy ; as  in  Ribes  rubrum. 

2.  Bacca  corticosa , covered  w ith  a hard  bark  ; as  in 
Garcinia  mangostana. 

3.  Bacca  exsicca , dry  ; as  in  Hedera  helix. 

From  the  number  of  loculaments  into, 

1.  Bacca  unilocularis,  w’ith  one  ; as  in  the  Actaa 
and  Cactus. 

2.  Bacca  bilocularis , with  two ; as  in  Lonicera. 

3.  Bacca  trilocularis , with  three ; as  in  Asparagus 
and  Ruscus. 

4.  Bacca  quadrilocularis , with  four ; as  Cards  qua- 
drifolia. 

5V  Bacca  quinquelocularis , with  five ; as  in  Me- 
lastoma. 

6.  Bacca  multilocularis , with  many;  as  in 
Nymphoea.  i 

From  the  number  of  the  seeds  into, 

1.  Bacca  monosperma,  with  one  only  ; as  in  Daphne, 
Viscnm,  and  Viburnum. 

2.  Bacca  disperma,  with  two  seeds;  as  Barbarea 
vulgaris,  and  Coffea  arabica. 

3.  Bacca  trisperma,  with  three ; as  in  gambucus, 
and  J unipens. 

112 


4.  Bacca  quadrisperma,  With  four;  as  in  Ligus 
trum , and  Ilex. 

5.  Bacca  polysperma,  with  many  seeds ; as  in  Ar- 
butus unedo,  Ribes , and  Gardenia. 

The  Bacca  is  also  distinguished  into  simple  and 
compound , when  it  is  composed  of  several  berries, 
which  are  called  acini;  as  in  Rubus  fruticosus. 

Bacca  bermudensis.  The  Bermuda  berry.  See 
Sapindus  saponaria. 

Bacca  joiperi.  The  juniper  berry.  S eeJunipe- 

rus  communis. 

Bacca  lauri.  The  laurel  berry.  See  Laurus 

nobilis. 

Bacca  monspeliensis.  See  Inula  dysenterica. 

Bacca  norlandiga.  The  shrubby  strawberry. 
See  Rubus  arcticus.  . 

Bacca  fiscatoria.  So  named  because  fish  are 
caught  with  them.  See  Menispermum  cocculus. 

Bacca'lia.  (From  baccharum  copia,  because  it 
abounds  in  berries.)  The  bay,  or  laurel-tree.  See 
Laurus  nobilis. 

BA'CCHARIS.  (From  bacchus,  wine;  from  its 
fragrance  resembling  that  liquor.)  See  Inula  dysen- 
teric a. 

BACCIFERUS.  (From  bacca,  a berry,  and  fero , 
to  bear.)  Berry  bearing. 

Bacciffr.e  plaxt./e.  Plants  are  so  called  which 
have  a berry  or  pulpy  pericarpium. 

BA  CCHIA.  (From  bacchus,  wine ; because  it  ge- 
nerally proceeds  from  hard  drinking  and  intemper- 
ance) A name  given  by  Linneus  to  the  pimpled 
face,  which  results  from  free  living. 

BACCILLUM.  A little  berry. 

BACCIUS,  Andrew',  a native  of  Ancona,  practised 
medicine  at  Rome  towards  the  end  of  the  I6th  century, 
and  became  physician  to  Pope  Sixtus  V.  He  appears 
to  have  had  sreat  industry  and  learning  from  his  nu- 
merous publicaiions;  of  which  the  chief,  “DeTher- 
mis,”  gives  an  extensive  examination  of  natural 
waters. 


BAl 


BAf 


Ba’cculi.  1.  Is  used,  by  some  writers,  for  a parti- 
tular  kind  of  lozenges,  shaped  into  little  short  rolls. 

2.  Hildanus  likewise  uses  it  for  an  instrument  in 
surgery. 

Backer's  Pills.  Pilules  tonicce  Bacheri.  A cele- 
brated medicine  in  France,  employed  for  the  cure  of 
dropsies.  Their  principal  ingredient  is  the  extract  of 
melampodium,  or  black  hellebore. 

Ba'coba.  The  Banana. 

BACTISHUA,  George,  was  a celebrated  physician 
of  Chorasan,  distinguished  also  for  his  literary  attain- 
ments. He  was  successful  in  curing  the  reigning  ca- 
liph of  a complaint  of  the  stomach,  which  brought  him 
into  great  honour;  he  translated  several  of  the  ancient 
medical  authors  into  the  Arabian  language;  and 
many  of  his  observations  are  recorded  by  Rhazes  and 
other  succeeding  physicians.  His  son,  Gabriel , was 
in  equal  estimation  with  the  famous  Haroun  A1  Ras- 
chid,  whom  he  cured  of  apoplexy  by  blood-letting,  in 
opposition  to  the  opinion  of  the  other  physicians. 

Badia'ga.  A kind  of  sponge  usually  sold  in  Russia, 
the  powder  of  which  is  said  to  take  away  the  livid 
marks  of  blows  and  bruises  within  a few  hours.  It  is 
only  described  by  Bauxbaum,  and  its  nature  is  not 
properly  understood. 

Badian  semen.  The  seed  of  a tree  which  grows  in 
China,  and  smells  like  aniseed.  The  Chinese,  and 
Dutch,  in  imitation  of  them,  sometimes  use  the  badian 
to  give  their  tea  an  aromatic  taste. 

Badi'za  aqua.  See  Bath  waters. 

Badranum  semen.  Indian  aniseed. 

Badu'cca.  The  Indian  name  for  a species  of  cap- 
paris. 

Ba'dzcher.  An  antidote. 

B^'os.  Batof.  In  Hippocrates  it  means  few;  but 
in  P.  ABgineta,  it  is  an  epithet  for  a poultice. 

BAGLIVI,  George,  born  at  Ragusa  in  1668,  after 
graduating  at  Padua,  and  improving  himself  greatly  by 
travelling  throughout  Italy,  was  made  professor  of 
medicine  and  anatomy  at  Rome.  In  1696,  he  pub- 
lished an  excellent  work  on  the  practice  of  physic, 
condemning  the  exclusive  attachment  to  theory,  and 
earnestly  recommending  the  Hippocratic  method  of 
observation ; which,  he  maintained,  assisted  by  the 
modern  improvements  in  anatomy  and  physiology, 
would  tend  greatly  to  the  advancement  of  medicine. 
He  has  left  also  several  other  tracts,  though  he  died  at 
the  early  age  of  thirty-eight. 

BAGNIGGE  WELLS.  A saline  mineral  spring, 
near  Clerkenwell,  in  London,  resembling  the  Epsom 
water.  In  most  constitutions,  three  half-pints  is  con- 
sidered a full  dose  for  purging. 

BA'GNIO.  (From  bagno , Italian.)  A bathing  or 
sweating-house. 

Ba'hei  coyolli.  Ray  takes  it  to  be  the  Areca , or 
Fanfel. 

Ba'hel  schulli.  An  Indian  tree.  See  Genista 
spinosa  indica. 

Bahobal.  See  Adansonia. 

Baikalite.  The  asbestiform  species  of  tremolite. 

[It  is  a variety  of  tremolite  which  Kirwan  named 
Baikalite,  because  it  was  first  found  near  lake  Baikal 
in  Siberia,  in  foliated  limestone. — In  Chinese  Tartary 
it  occurs  in  dolomite. 

It  is  found  in  groups  of  acicular  prisms,  sometimes 
very  long,  and  sometimes  radiating  from  a centre.  Its 
colour  is  greenish,  often  with  a shade  of  yellow;  and 
its  lustre  sometimes  silky.  According  to  Kirwan,  its 
spec.  grav.  is  only  2.20,  and  it  melts  into  a dark  green 
glass.  It  contains  silex  44,  lime  20,  magnesia  30,  oxyde 
of  iron  6. — See  Cl.  Min.  A.] 

BAILLIE,  Matthew,  born  in  Scotland,  in  the  year 
1760.  His  mother  was  sister  of  the  two  celebrated 
Hunters,  Dr.  William  and  Mr.  John ; his  father,  a cler- 
gyman. In  the  early  part  of  his  education  he  enjoyed 
great  advantages.  After  studying  at  Glasgow,  where 
his  father  was  Professor  of  Divinity,  he  was  sent  to 
one  of  the  exhibitions  of  that  university  at  Baliol  Col- 
lege, Oxford,  where  he  took  his  degrees  in  physic,  by 
which  he  became  a Fellow  of  the  College  of  Physi- 
cians in  London,  and  was  soon  after  elected  Fellow  of 
the  Royal  Society.  At  an  early  period  he  came  to 
London  and  was  an  inmate  with  his  uncle,  Dr.  Wil- 
liam Hunter,  at  that  time  lecturine  to  a numerous 
class  of  pupils,  and  who  had  the  superintendence  of  his 
education.  After  demonstrating  in  the  dissecting 
room  with  the  celebrated  and  learned  Mr.  Cruick- 

H 


shanks,  he  became,  on  the  death  of  his  uncle,  joint 
lecturer  with  him,  and  continued  to  lecture  until  1799 

Dr.  Baillie’s  practice  as  a physician  was  for  several 
years  extremely  small,  and  he  often  compi-ained  of  the 
little  he  had  to  do ; indeed,  at  one  time,  he  thought  of 
leaving  the  metropolis.  In  the  year  1787,  he  was 
elected  physician  to  St.  George’s  Hospital ; and  he 
now  began  to  find  his  practice  increase.  About  this 
period  he  married. 

Dr.  Denman,  the  celebrated  accoucheur  of  the  day, 
had  two  daughters ; Mr.  Croft,  afterward  Sir  Richard, 
married  one,  Dr.  Baillie,  the  other.  The  confidence 
which  the  two  first  obtained  in  the  higher  circles  of 
society,  was  great  and  extensive ; and  they  lost  no  op- 
portunity of  requiring  the  opinion  and  attendance  of 
their  relation.  Dr.  Baillie’s  pupils  had  now  gone 
yearly  to  every  part  of  England,  and  the  Indies,  and 
were  not  merely  enforcing  the  principles  and  doctrines 
of  their  master,  whose  lectures  they  had  heard  deli- 
vered with  such  lucid  order,  and  clearness  of  ex- 
pression. as  to  convey  information  in  the  most  simple 
and  intelligible  manner;  but  were  sending  their  pa- 
tients from  the  most  distant  parts  to  profit  by  his  advice 
and  experience.  Two  other  circumstances  soon  oc- 
curred, which  at  once  placed  Dr.  Baillie  in  a practice 
before  unheard  of.  His  uncle’s,  and  his  own  great 
friend,  Dr.  Pitcairn,  who  was  in  great  practice,  was, 
from  ill  health,  obliged  to  leave  England  for  a more 
temperate  climate,  and  he  previously  introduced  him 
to  all  his  patients;  and  Dr.  Warren,  who  had  enjoyed 
the  greater  part  of  the  practice  of  the  nobility,  was 
suddenly  cut  off.  There  was  no  practitioner  left 
whose  opportunities  had  fitted  him  to  take  the  lead, 
and  thus  a field  was  opened  for  aspiring  genius,  abi- 
lity, skill,  and  perseverance,  which  Dr.  Baillie  soon 
occupied,  and  from  which  he  reaped  an  abundant  har 
vest  for  more  than  twenty  years. 

Before  he  discontinued  his  lectures  in  1799,  he  pub- 
lished an  octavo  volume,  on  Morbid  Anatomy,  in 
which  is  compressed  more  accurate  and  more  useful 
information  than  is  to  be  found  in  the  elaborate  works 
of  Bonetus,  Morgagni,  and  Lieutaud.  This  was  fol- 
lowed by  a large  work,  consisting  of  a series  of  splen- 
did engravings  to  illustrate  Morbid  Anatomy.  He  also 
gave  a description  of  the  gravid  uterus,  and  many  im- 
portant contributions  to  the  transactions  and  medical 
collections  of  the  time. 

Dr.  Baillie  presented  his  collection  of  specimens  of 
morbid  parts  to  the  college  of  physicians,  with  a sum 
of  money  to  be  expended  in  keeping  them  in  order. 

The  professional  and  moral  character  of  this  great 
physician  cannot  be  too  highly  appreciated.  To  his 
brethren,  among  whom  he  might,  from  his  extensive 
and  peculiar  practice,  have  exercised  a high  and  re- 
served deportment,  he  was  humble,  attentive,  commu- 
nicative, and  kind;  antb  he  never  permitted  the 
caprice  of  a patient  or  friends  to  interfere  with  the 
conduct  of,  or  injure  a practitioner,  when  unjustly 
censured. 

In  the  exercise  of  his  practice,  he  displayed  a discri- 
minating and  profound  knowledge;  happy  in  the  con- 
ception of  the  cause  of  symptoms,  he  distinguished 
diseases  from  those  with  which  they  might  have  been 
confounded,  and  pointed  out  their  probable  progress 
and  termination  ; and  in  delivering  his  opinion,  he 
expressed  himself  with  clearness,  decision,  and  candour. 

His  moral  character  was  adorned  by  the  strictest 
virtues,  and  amplest  charities.  He  died  in  the  year 
1823,  in  the  sixty-third  year  of  his  age,  from  a gradual 
decay  of  the  powers  of  nature,  continuing  to  practise 
until  about  a year  before  his  death,  leaving  a wife,  a 
son,  a daughter,  and  a sister,  Miss  Joanna  Baillie,  who 
has  acquired  a degree  of  eminence  surpassed  by  none 
of  her  sex  in  any  age.  A few  of  his  private  pro- 
fessional friends  have  directed  a simple  tablet  and 
bust  from  the  chisel  of  Chantry,  to  be  placed  in  West 
minster  Abbey,  to  perpetuate  his  high  and  honourable 
professional  character,  and  his  many  private  virtues. 

BAILLOU,  Guillaume  be,  commonly  called  Bal- 
lonius , was  born  in  1538  at  Paris,  where  he  graduated, 
and  attained  considerable  eminence.  He  was  very 
active  in  the  contest  for  precedence  between  the  phy- 
sicians and  surgeons,  which  was  at  length  decided  in 
favour  of  the  former.  His  writings  are  numerous, 
though  not  now  much  esteemed ; but  he  appears  to 
have  been  the  first,  who  properly  discriminated  be- 
tween gout  and  rheumatism. 

Ill 


BAL 


BAL 


Ba'ea.  The  plaintam-tree. 

BALjE'NA.  (BaXaiva ; from  (iaWto,  to  cast,  from 
its  power  in  casting  up  water.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  animals.  Class,  Mammalia  ; Order,  Cete. 

[Bal.ena  mysticetus.  The  systematic  and  Lin- 
ntean  name  for  the  common  or  right  whale,  which  is 
pursued  in  the  icy  and  Greenland  seas,  on  the  coast  of 
Brazil,  and  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  supplying,  when  taken, 
blubber  and  whalebone.  The  blubber  is  the  fat  cut 
from  the  body  of  the  whale,  and  being  afterward 
tried,  produces  common  whale  or  lamp  oil.  The 
whalebone  is  a horny  substance  projecting  from  the 
jaws,  and  does  not  partake  of  the  nature  of  bone.  The 
ends  are  split  into  numerous  fibres,  and  the  animal 
uses  them  as  a filtering  machine.  The  right-whale 
lives  upon  the  small  worms  and  mollustous  animals 
which  abound  in  the  ocean.  When  it  feeds,  it  opens 
the  mouth,  and  swims  forward,  and  when  it  has  col- 
lected a large  quantity  of  these  vermes,  the  mouth  is 
closed,  and  the  water  is  forced  through  the  fibrous  ends 
of  the  whalebone,  while  the  smali  animals  are  re- 
tained within  and  swallowed. — See  Scoresby's  North. 
fVhale  Fishery.  A.] 

Baljena  macrocephala.  The  systematic  name  of 
a species  of  whale. 

[This  is  the  cacholet  or  large-headed  whale,  the  true 
spermaceti-whale,  principally  taken  in  the  Pacific 
ocean.  It  is  called  macrocephalus,  from  yak-pos,  large, 
and  KscpaXrj,  the  head,  because  the  head  constitutes 
two-thirds  of  the  animal.  The  blubber  or  fat  is  strip- 
ped off  this  as  it  is  from  the  right-whale,  and  affords 
abundant  oil.  There  is  however  a cavity  in  the  skull 
of  the  marcrocephalus  containing  a large  quantity  of 
pure  oil  called  head-matter,  which  affords  the  best  of 
spermaceti.  In  the  natural  state  it  is  so  liquid  that  it 
can  be  dipped  out  with  a bucket.  A.] 

Balais  ruby.  See  Spinelle. 

BALANCE.  “The  beginning  and  end  of  every 
exact  chemical  process  consists  in  weighing.  With 
imperfect  instruments  this  operation  will  be  tedious 
and  inaccurate ; but  with  a good  balance,  the  result 
will  be  satisfactory ; and  much  time,  which  is  so  pre- 
cious in  experimental  researches,  will  be  saved. 

The  balance  is  a lever,  the  axis  of  motion  of  which 
is  formed  with  an  edge  like  that  of  a knife ; and  the 
two  dishes  at  its  extremities  are  hung  upon  edges  of 
the  same  kind.  These  edges  are  first  made  sharp, 
and  then  rounded  with  a fine  hone,  or  a piece  of  buff 
leather.  The  excellence  of  the  instrument  depends, 
in  a great  measure,  on  the  regular  form  of  this  rounded 
part.  When  the  lever  is  considered  as  a mere  line, 
the  two  outer  edges  are  called  points  of  suspension, 
and  the  inner  the  fulcrum.  The  points  of  suspension 
are  supposed  to  be  at  equal  distances  from  the  fulcrum, 
and  to  be  pressed  with  equal  weights  when  loaded. 

1.  If  the  fulcrum  be  plaoed  in  the  centre  of  gravity 
of  the  beam,  and  the  three  edges  lie  all  in  the  same 
right  line,  the  balance  will  have  no  tendency  to  one 
position  more  than  another,  but  will  rest  in  any  posi- 
tion it  may  be  placed  in,  whether  the  scales  be  on  or 
off,  empty  or  loaded. 

2.  If  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  beam,  when  level, 
be  immediately  above  the  fulcrum,  it  will  overset  by 
the  smallest  action ; that  is,  the  end  which  is  lowest 
will  descend  : and  it  will  do  this  with  more  swiftness, 
the  higher  the  centre  of  gravity,  and  the  less  the -points 
of  suspension  are  loaded. 

3.  But  if  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  beam  be  imme- 
diately below  the  fulcrum,  the  beam  will  not  rest  in 
any  position  but  when  level ; and,  if  disturbed  from  this 
position,  and  then  left  at  liberty,  it  will  vibrate,  and 
at  last  come  to  rest  on  the  level.  Its  vibrations  will 
be  quicker,  and  its  horizontal  tendency  stronger,  the 
lower  the  centre  of  gravity,  and  the  less  the  weights 
upon  the  points  of  suspension. 

4.  If  the  fulcrum  be  below  the  line  joining  the 
points  of  suspension,  and  these  be  loaded,  the  beam 
will  overset,  unless  prevented  by  the  weight  of  the 
beam  tendteg  to  produce  a horizontal  position.  In 
this  last  case,  small  weights  will  equilibrate  ; a certain 
exact  weight  will  rest  in  any  position  of  the  beam  ; 
and  all  greater  weights  will  cause  the  beam  to  overset. 
Many  scales  are  often  made  this  way,  and  will  over- 
set with  any  considerable  load. 

5.  If  the  fulcrum  be  above  the  line  joining  the  points 
of  suspension,  the  beam  will  come  to  the  horizontal 
position,  unless  prevented  by  its  own  weight.  If  the 

114 


centre  of  gravity  of  the  beam  be  nearly  in  the  fulcrum, 
all  the  vibrations  of  the  loaded  beam  will  be  made  in 
times  nearly  equal,  unless  the  weights  be  very  small, 
when  they  will  be  slower.  The  vibrations  of  balances 
are  quicker,  and  the  horizontal  tendency  stronger,  the 
higher  the  fulcrum. 

6.  If  the  arms  of  a balance  be  unequal,  the  weights 
in  equipoise  will  be  unequal  in  the  same  proportion. 
It  is  a severe  check  upon  a workman  to  keep  the  arms 
equal,  while  he  is  making  the  other  adjustments  in  a 
strong  and  inflexible  beam. 

7.  The  equality  of  the  arms  of  a balance  is  of  use, 
in  scientific  pursuits,  chiefly  in  making  weights  by 
bisection.  A balance  with  unequal  arms  will  weigh 
as  accurately  as  another  of  the  same  workmanship 
with  equal  arms,  provided  the  standard  weight  itself 
be  first  counterpoised,  then  taken  out  of  the  scale,  and 
the  thing  to  be  weighed  be  put  into  the  scale,  and  ad- 
justed against  the  counterpoise ; or  when  proportional 
quantities  only  are  considered,  as  in  chemical  and  in 
other  philosophical  experiments,  the  bodies  and  pro- 
ducts under  examination  may  be  weighed  against  the 
weights,  taking  care  always  to  put  the  weights  into 
the  same  scale.  For  then,  though  the  bodies  may  not 
be  really  equal  to  the  weights,  yet  their  proportions 
among  each  other  may  be  the  same  as  if  they  had  been 
accurately  so. 

8.  But  though  the  quality  of  the  arms  may  be  well 
dispensed  with,  yet  it  is  indispensably  necessary  that 
their  relative  lengths,  whatever  they  may  be,  should 
continue  invariable.  For  this  purpose,  it  is  necessary, 
either  that  the  three  edges  be  all  truly  parallel,  or  that 
the  points  of  suspension  and  support  should  lie  always 
in  the  same  part  of  the  edge.  This  last  requisite  is 
the  most  easily  obtained. 

The  balances  made  in  London  are  usually  construct- 
ed in  such  a manner,  that  the  bearing  parts  form 
notches  in  the  other  parts  of  the  edges;  so  that  the 
scales  being  set  to  vibrate,  all  the  parts  naturally  fail 
into  the  same  bearing.  The  balances  made  in  the 
country  have  the  fulcrum  edge  straight,  and  confined 
to  one  constant  bearing  by  two  side  plates.  But  the 
points  of  suspension  are  referred  to  notches  in  the 
edges,  like  the  London  balances.  The  balances  here 
mentioned,  which  come  from  the  country,  are  enclosed 
in  ar  small  iron  japanned  box ; and  are  to  be  met  with 
at  Birmingham  and  Sheffield  ware-houses,  though  less 
frequently  than  some  years  ago ; because  a pocket 
contrivance  for  weighing  guineas  and  half-guineas  has 
got  possession  of  the  market.  They  are,  in  general, 
well  made  and  adjustedrturn  with  the  twentieth  of 
a grain  when  empty,  and  w’ill  sensibly  show  the  tenth 
of  a grain,  with  an  ounce  in  each  scale.  Their  pricr 
is  from  five  shillings  to  half  a guinea ; but  those  which 
are  under  seven  shillings,  have  not  their  edges  haid 
ened,  and  consequently  are  not  durable.  This  may 
be  ascertained  by  the  purchaser,  by  passing  the  point 
of  a penknife  across  the  small  piece  which  goes  through 
one  of  the  end  boxes : if  it  make  any  mark  or  impres- 
sion, the  part  is  soft. 

9.  If  a beam  be  adjusted  so  as  to  have  no  tendency 
to  any  one  position,  and  the  scales  be  equally  loaded , 
then,  if  a small  weight  be  added  in  one  of  the  scales, 
that  balance  will  turn,  and  the  points  of  suspension 
will  move  with  an  accelerated  motion,  similar  to  that 
of  falling  bodies,  but  as  much  slower,  in  proportion, 
very  nearly,  as  the  added  weight  is  less  than  the  whole 
weight  borne  by  the  fulcrum. 

10.  The  stronger  the  tendency  to  a horizontal  posi- 
tion in  any  balance,  or  the  quicker  its  vibrations,  the 
greater  additional  weight  will  be  required  to  cause 
it  to  turn,  or  incline  to  any  given  angle.  No  balance, 
therefore,  can  turn  so  quick  as  the  motion  deduced. 
Such  a balance  as  is  there  described,  if  it  were  to  turn 
with  the  ten-thousandth  part  of  the  weight,  w'ould 
move  at  quickest  ten  thousand  times  slower  than  fall- 
ing bodies  ; that  is,  the  dish  containing  the  weight, 
instead  of  falling  through  sixteen  feet  in  a second  of 
time,  would  fall  through  only  two  hundred  parts  of  an 
inch,  and  it  would  require  four  seconds  to  move  through 
one-third  part  of  an  inch  ; consequently  all  accurate 
weighing  must  be  slow.  If  the  indices  of  two  balances 
be  of  equal  lengths,  that  index  which  is  connected 
with  the  shorter  balance  will  move  proportionally 
quicker  than  the  other.  Long  beams  are  the  most  in 
request,  because  they  arc  thought  to  have  less  friction : 
this  is  doubtful,  but  the  quicker  angular  motion, 


BAL 


BAL 


greater  strength,  and  less  weight  o-f  a short  balance, 
are  certainly  advantages. 

11.  Very  delicate  balances  are  not  only  useful  in 
nice  experiments,  but  are  likewise  much  more  expe- 
ditious than  others  in  common  weighing.  If  a pair  of 
scales  with  a certain  load  be  barely  sensible  to  one- 
tenth  of  a grain,  it  will  require  a considerable  time  to 
ascertain  the  weight  to  that  degree  of  accuracy,  because 
the  turn  must  be  observed  several  times  over,  and  is 
very  small.  But  if  no  greater  accuracy  were  required, 
and  scales  were  used  Which  would  turn  with  the 
hundredth  of  a grain,  a tenth  of  a grain,  more  or  less, 
would  make  so  great  a difference  in  the  turn,  that  it 
would  be  seen  immediately. 

12.  If  a balance  be  found  to  turn  with  a certain 
addition,  and  is  not  moved  by  any  smaller  weight,  a 
greater  sensibility  may  be  given  to  that  balance,  by 
producing  a tremulous  motion  in  its  parts.  Thus,  if 
the  edge  of  a blunt  saw,  a file,  or  other  similar  instru- 
ment, be  drawn  along  any  part  of  the  case  or  support 
of  a balance,  it  will  produce  a jarring,  which  will 
diminish  the  friction  on  the  moving  parts  so  much, 
that  the  turn  will  be  evident  with  one-third  or  one- 
fourth  of  the  addition  that  would  else  have  been  re- 
quired. In  this  way,  a beam  which  would  barely 
turn  by  the  addition  of  one-tenth  of  a grain,  will  turn 
with  one-thirtieth  or  fortieth  of  a grain. 

13.  A balance,  the  horizontal  tendency  of  which 
depends  only  on  its  own  weight,  will  turn  with  the 
same  addition,  whatever  may  be  the  load  ; except  so 
far  as  a greater  load  will  produce  a greater  friction. 

14.  But  a balance,  the  horizontal  tendency  of  which 
depends  only  on  the  elevation  of  the  fulcrum,  will  be 
less  sensible  the  greater  the  load;  and  the  addition 
requisite  to  produce  an  equal  turn  will  be  in  propor- 
tion to  the  load  itself. 

15.  In  order  to  regulate  the  horizontal  tendency  in 
some  beams,  the  fulcrum  is  placed  below  the  points 
of  suspension,  and  a sliding  weight  is  put  upon  the 
cock  or  index,  by  means  of  which  the  centre  of  gravity 
may  be  raised  or  depressed.  This  is  a useful  con- 
trivance. 

16.  Weights  are  made  by  a subdivision  of  a standard 
weight.  If  the  weight  be  continually  halved,  it  will 
produce  the  common  pile,  which  is  the  smallest  num- 
ber for  weighing  between  its  extremes,  without  placing 
any  weight  in  the  scale  with  the  body  under  examina- 
tion. Granulated  lead  is  a very  convenient  substance 
to  be  used  in  this  operation  of  halving,  which,  how- 
ever, is  very  tedious.  The  readiest  way  to  subdivide 
small  weights,  consists  in  weighing  a certain  quantity 
of  small  wire,  and  afterward  cutting  it  into  such  parts, 
by  measure,  as  are  desired  ; or  the  wire  may  be  wrap- 
ped close  round  two  pins,  and  then  cut  asunder  with 
a knife.  By  this  means  it  will  be  divided  into  a great 
number  of  equal  lengths,  or  small  rings.  The  wire 
ought  to  be  so  thin,  as  that  one  of  these  rings  may 
barely  produce  a sensible  effect  on  the  beam.  If  any 
quantity  (as,  for  example,  a grain)  of  these  rings  be 
weighed,  and  the  number  then  reckoned,  the  grain 
may  be  subdivided  in  any  proportion,  by  dividing  that 
number,  and  making  the  weights  equal  to  as  many  of 
the  rings  as  the  quotient  of  the  division  denotes.  Then, 
if  750  of  the  rings  amounted  to  a grain,  and  it  were 
required  to  divide  the  grain  decimally,  downwards, 
9-iOtlis  would  be  equal  to  675  rings,  8-lOths  would  be 
equal  to  600  rings,  7-10ths  to  525  rings,  &c.  Small 
weights  may  ue  made  of  thin  leaf  brass.  Jewellers’ 
foil  is  a good  material  for  weights  below  l-10th  of  a 
grain,  as  low  as  to  1 100th  of  a grain ; and  all  lower 
quantities  may  be  either  estimated  by  the  position  of 
the  index,  or  shown  by  actually  counting  the  rings  of 
wire,  the  value  of  which  has  been  determined. 

17.  In  philosophical  experiments,  it  will  be  found 
very  convenient  to  admit  no  more  than  one  dimension 
of  weight.  The  grain  is  of  that  magnitude  as  to  de- 
serve the  preference.  With  regard  to  the  number  of 
weights  the  chemists  ought  to  be  provided  with,  wri- 
ters have  differed  according  to  their  habits  and  views. 
Mathematicians  have  computed  the  least  possible 
number,  with  which  all  weights  within  certain  limits 
might  be  ascertained ; but  their  determination  is  of 
little  use.  Because,  with  so  small  a number,  it  must 
often  happen,  that  the  scales  will  be  heavily  loaded 
with  weights  on  each  side,  put  in  with  a view  only  to 
determine  the  difference  between  them.  It  is  not  the 
least  possible  number  of  weights  which  it  is  necessary 


an  operator  should  buy  to  effect  his  purpose,  that  we 
ought  to  inquire  after,  but  the  most  convenient  number 
for  ascertaining  his  inquiries  with  accuracy  and  expo 
dition.  The  error  of  adjustment  is  the  least  possible, 
when  only  one  weight  is  in  the  scale ; that  is,  a single 
weight  of  five  grains  is  twice  as  likely  to  be  true,  as 
two  weights,  one  of  three,  and  the  other  of  two 
grains,  put  into  the  dish  to  supply  the  place  of  the  sin- 
gle five ; because  each  of  these  last  has  its  own  proba- 
bility of  error  in  adjustment.  But  since  it  is  as  incon- 
sistent with  convenience  to  provide  a single  weight,  as 
it  would  be  to  have  a single  character  for  every  num- 
ber ; and  as  we  have  nine  characters,  which  we  use  in 
rotation,  to  express  higher  values  according  to  their 
position,  it  will  be  found  very  serviceable  to  make  the 
set  of  weights  correspond  with  our  numerical  system. 
This  directs  us  to  the  set  of  weights  as  follows : 1000 
grains,  900  g.  800  g.  700  g.  600  g.  500  g.  400  g.  300.  200  g. 
100  g.  90  g.  80  g.  70  g.  60  g.  50  g.  40  g.  30  g.  20  g.  10  g. 
9 g.  8 g.  7 g.  6 g.  5 g.  4 g.  3 g.  2 g.  1 g.  9-10  g.  8-10  g. 
7-10  g.  6-10  g.  5-10  g.  4-10  g,  3-10  g.  2-10  g.  1-10  g. 
9-100  g.  8-100  g.  7-100  g.  6-100  g.  5-100  g.  4-100  g. 
3-100  g.  2-100  g.  1-100  g.  With  these  the  philosopher 
will  always  have  the  same  number  of  weights  in  his 
scales  as  there  are  figures  in  the  number  expressing 
the  weights  in  grains.  Thus  742.5  grains  will  be 
weighed  by  the  Weights  700, 40,2,  and  5-10ths.” — Ure's 
Chemical  Dictionary. 

Balani'num  oleum.  Oil  of  the  ben-nut. 

Balanoca'stanum.  (From  (SaXavog , a nut,  and 
Ka^avov , a chesnut ; so  called  from  its  tuberous  root.) 
The  earth-nut.  See  Bunium  bulbocastanum. 

BA  LANDS.  (From  (iaXX w,  to  cast;  because  it 
sheds  its  fruit  upon  the  ground.)  Balanus.  1.  An 
acorn. 

2.  The  oak-  tree.  See  Quercus  robur. 

3.  Theophrastus  uses  it  sometimes  to  express  any 
glandiferous  tree. 

4.  From  the  similitude  of  form,  this  word  is  used  to 
express  suppositories  and  pessaries,  0a\avos  signify- 
ing a nut. 

5.  A name  of  the  glans  penis. 

Balas  ruby.  See  Spinelle. 

BALAU'STIUM.  (From  (3a\ios , various,  and  auto, 
to  dry;  so  called  from  the  variety  of  its  colours,  and 
its  becoming  soon  dry ; or  from  j3\a^avo),  to  germi- 
nate.) Balaustia.  A large  rose-like  flower,  of  a red 
colour,  the  produce  of  the  plant  from  which  we  obtain 
the  granate.  See  Punica  pranatum. 

BALBU'TIES.  (From  /5a(>agw,  t?  stammer;  or  from 
balbel,  Heb.  to  stammer.)  A defect  of  speech  ; pro- 
perly, that  sort  of  stammering  where  the  patient  some- 
times hesitates,  and  immediately  after,  speaks  preci- 
pitately. It  is  the  Pscllismus  balbutiens  of  Cullen. 

Baldmoney.  See  JElhusa  meum. 

Baldwin's  phosphorus.  Ignited  nitrate  of  lime. 

BALISMUS.  (BaXXiapog ; from  (SaXXi^o),  tripudio, 
pedibus  plando .)  The  specific  name  of  a disease  in 
Good’s  genus  Synclonus  for  shaking  palsy.  See  Chorea 
and  Tremor. 

BALI' ST  A.  (From  /3«AAw,  to  cast.)  The  astragu 
lus,  a bone  of  the  foot,  was  formerly  called  os  balishE, 
because  the  ancients  used  to  cast  it  from  their  slings. 

BALLOO'N.  ( Ballon , or  baton,  French.)  1.  A 
large  glass  receiver  in  the  form  of  a hollow  globe. 
For  certain  chemical  operations  balloons  are  made 
with  two  necks,  placed  opposite  to  each  other ; one  to 
receive  the  neck  of  a retort,  and  the  other  to  enter  the 
neck  of  a second  balloon : this  apparatus  is  caiied  enfi- 
laded balloons.  Their  use  is  to  increase  the  whole 
space  of  the  receiver,  because  any  number  of  these 
may  be  adjusted  to  each  other.  The  only  one  of  these 
vessels  which  is  generally  used,  is  a small  oblong  bal- 
loon with  two  neeks,  which  is  to  be  luted  to  the  retort, 
and  to  tlje  receiver,  or  great  balloon ; it  serves  to  re- 
move this  receiver  from  the  body  of  the  furnace,  and 
to  hinder  it  from  being  too  much  heated. 

2.  A spherical  bag  filled  with  a gas  of  a small  spe- 
cific gravity,  or  with  heated  air,  by  the  buoyancy  of 
which  it  is  raised  into  the  atmosphere. 

BALLO'TE.  (From  /3«AAw,  to  send  forth,  and  ovs 
ojtos  the  ear ; because  it  sends  forth  flowers  like  ears.) 
Ballota.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Didynamia ; Order,  Gymnospermia. 

Ballote  nigra.  Stinking  horehonnd.  A nettle- 
like  plant,  used,  when  boiled,  by  the  country  people 
against  scurvy  and  cutaneous  eruptions. 


BAL 


BAL 


BALM.  See  Melissa. 

Balm,  of  Gilead.  See  Dracocephalum. 

Balm  of  Mecca.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balm , Turkey.  See  Dracocephalum. 

BA'LNEUM.  ( Balneum , ei.  n.  (iaXavuov , a bath.) 
A bath,  or  bathing-house.  See  Bath. 

Balneum  animals.  The  wrapping  any  part  of  an 
animal  just  killed,  round  the  body,  or  a limb. 

Balneum  ares,*.  A sand-bath  for  chemical  pur- 
poses. See  Bath. 

Balneum  calidum.  A hot-bath.  See  Bath. 

Balneum  frigidum.  A cold-bath.  See  Bath. 

Balneum  marijE.  Balneum  marts.  A warm-wa- 
ter bath.  See  Bath. 

Balneum  medicatum.  A bath  impregnated  with 
drugs. 

Balneum  siccum.  Balneum  cinereum.  A dry 
bath,  either  with  ashes,  sand,  or  iron  filings. 

Balneum  sulphureum.  A sulphurous  bath. 

Balneum  tepidum;  A tepid  bath.  See  Bath. 

Balneum  vaporis.  A vapour  bath. 

BA'LSAM.  (.Balsamum  ; from  baal  samen , He- 
brew.) The  term  balsam  was  anciently  applied  to 
any  strong-scented,  natural  vegetable  resin  of  about  the 
fluidity  of  treacle,  inflammable,  not  miscible  with 
water,  without  addition,  and  supposed  to  be  possessed 
of  many  medical  virtues.  All  the  turpentines,  the  Peru- 
vian balsam,  copaiba  balsam,  &o.  are  examples  of 
natural  balsams.  Besides,  many  medicines  com- 
pounded of  various  resins,  or  oils,  and  brought  to  this 
consistence,  obtained  the  name  of  balsam.  Latterly, 
however,  chemists  have  restricted  this  term  to  vegeta- 
ble juices,  either  liquid,  or  which  spontaneously  be- 
come concrete,  consisting  of  a substance  of  a resinous 
nature,  combined  with  benzoic  acid,  or  which  are 
capable  of  affording  benzoic  acid,  by  being  heated 
alone,  or  with  water.  They  are  insoluble  in  water, 
but  readily  dissolve  in  alkohol  and  cether.  The  liquid 
balsams  are  copaiva,  opo-balsam,  Peru,  styrax,  Tolu ; 
the  concrete  are  benzoin,  dragon’s  blood,  and  storax.' 

Balsam  apple,  male.  The  fruit  of  the  elaterium. 
See  Momordica  elaterium. 

Balsam,  artificial.  Compound  medicines  are  thus 
termed  which  are  made  of  a balsamic  consistence  and 
fragrance.  They  are  generally  composed  of  expressed 
or  ethereal  oils,  resins,  and  other  solid  bodies,  which 
give  them  the  consistence  of  butter.  The  basis,  or 
body  of  them,  is  expressed  oil  of  nutmeg,  and  fre- 
quently wax,  butter,  &c.  They  are  usually  tinged 
with  cinnabar  and  saffron. 

Balsam  of  Canada.  See  Pinus  Balsamea. 

Balsam,  Canary.  See  Dracocephalum. 

Balsam  of  Copaiba.  See  Copaifera  officinalis. 

Balsam,  natural.  A resin  which  has  not  yet 
assumed  the  concrete  form,  but  still  continues  in  a 
fluid  state,  is  so  called,  as  common  turpentine,  balsa- 
mum  copaiva,  peruvianum,  tolutanum,  &c. 

Balsam,  Peruvian.  See  Myroxylon  Peruiferum. 

Balsam  of  sulphur.  See  Balsamum  sulphuris. 

Balsam  of  Tolu.  See  Toluifera  balsamum. 

Balsam,  Turkey.  See  Dracocephalum. 

BALSAMA'TIO.  (From  balsamum , a balsam.) 
The  embalming  of  dead  bodies. 

Balsa'mea.  (From  balsamum,  balsam.)  The  balm 
of  Gilead  fir ; so  called  from  its  odour.  See  Pinus 
balsamea. 

Balsamel^'on.  (From  balsamum,  balsam,  and 
tXaiov,  oil.)  Balm  of  Gilead,  or  true  balsamum  Ju- 
daicum. 

Ba'lsami  oleum.  Balm  of  Gilead. 

BALSA'MIC.  ( Bals arnica , sc.  medicamenta ; from 
BaXaapov,  balsam.)  A term  generally  applied  to  sub- 
stances of  a smooth  and  oily  consistence,  which  pos- 
sess emollient,  sweet,  and  generally  aromatic  qualities. 
Hoffman  calls  those  medicines  by  this  name,  which 
are  hot  and  acrid,  and  also  the  natural  balsams,  stimu- 
lating gums,  &c.  by  which  the  vital  heat  is  increased. 
Dr.  Cullen  speaks  of  them  under  the  joint  title  of  bal- 
samica  et  resinosa,  considering  that  turpentine  is  the 
basis  of  all  balsams. 

B ALSAMl'FERA.  (From  balsamum , balsam,  and 
fero,  to  bear.)  Balsam  berry. 

Balsamifera  braziliensis.  The  copaiba  tree. 
See  Copaifera  officinalis. 

Balsamifera  indicana.  Peruvian  balsam  tree. 
See  Myroxyloi.  peruiferum. 

Balsamita  fceminea.  See  Achillea  ageratum. 

116  * 


Balsamita  lutea.  See  Polygonum  per sicaria. 

Balsamita  major.  See  Tanacetum  balsamita. 

Balsamita  mas.  See  Tanacetum  balsamita. 

Balsamita  minor.  Sweet  maudlin. 

B A'LSAMUM.  (From  baal  samen,  the  Hebrew  fo? 
the  prince  of  oils.)  A Balsam.  See  Balsam. 

Balsamum  jegyptiacum.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balsamum  alpinum.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balsamum  americanum.  See  Myroxylon  perui- 
ferum. 

Balsamum  anodynum.  A preparation  made  from 
tacamahacca,  distilled  with  turpentine  and  soap  lini- 
ment ; and  tincture  of  opium,  but  there  were  a great 
number  of  balsams  sold  under  this  name  formerly. 

Balsamum  arcjei.  A preparation  composed  of 
gum-elemi  and  suet. 

Balsamum  asiaticum.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balsamum  braziliense.  See  Pinus  balsamea. 

Balsamum  canadense.  See  Pinus  balsamea. 

Balsamum  cephalicum.  A distillation  from  oils, 
nutmegs,  cloves,  amber,  &c. 

Balsamum  commendatoris.  A composition  of 
storax,  benzoe,  myrrh,  aloes. 

Balsamum  copaibje.  See  Copaifera  officinalis. 

Balsamum  embryonum.  A preparation  of  aniseed, 
fallen  into  disuse. 

Balsamum  genuinum  antiquorum.  See  Amyris 

gileadensis. 

Balsamum  gileadense.  See  Amyris jrileadensis. 

Balsamum  guaiacinum.  Balsam  of  Peru  and 
spirits  of  wine. 

Balsamum  guidonis.  The  same  as  balsamum 
anodynum. 

Balsamum  hungaricum.  A balsam  prepared  from 
a coniferous  tree  on  the  Carpathian  mountains. 

Balsamum  judaicum.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balsamum  lucatelu.  (Lucatelli ; so  called  from 
its  inventor  Lucatellus.)  A preparation  made  of  oil, 
turpentine,  wax,  and  red  saunders;  now  disused: 
formerly  exhibited  in  coughs  of  long  standing. 

Balsamum  mas.  The  herb  costmary.  See  Tana- 
cetum balsamita. 

Balsamum  e Mecca.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balsamum  mexicanum.  See  'Myroxylon  perui- 
ferum. 

Balsamum  novum.  A new  balsam  from  a red  fruit 
in  the  West  Indies. 

Balsamum  odoriferum.  A preparation  of  oil, 
wax,  and  any  essential  oil. 

Balsamum  persicum.  A balsam  composed  of 
storax,  benzoe,  myrrh,  and  aloes. 

Balsamum  peruvianum.  See  Myroxylon  perui- 
ferum. 

Balsamum  rackasira.  This  balsam,  which  is  in 
odorous  when  cold,  but  of  a smell  approaching  to  that 
of  Tolu  balsam  when  heated,  is  brought  from  India  in 
gourd-sbells.  It  is  slightly  bitter  to  the  taste,  and  ad- 
heres to  the  teeth,  on  chewing.  It  is  supposed  to  be 
one  of  the  factitious  balsams,  and  is  scarcely  ever  pre- 
scribed in  this  country. 

Balsamum  samech.  A factitious  balsam,  com- 
posed of  tartar,  and  spirits  of  wine. 

Balsamum  saponaceum.  A name  given  to  the 
preparation  very  similar  to  the  compound  soap  lini- 
ment. 

Balsamum  saturni.  The  remedy  so  named  is 
prepared  by  dissolving  the  acetate  of  lead  in  oil  of 
turpentine,  by  digesting  the  mixture  till  it  acquires  a 
red  colour.  This  is  found  to  be  a good  remedy  for 
cleansing  foul  ulcers ; but  it  is  not  acknowledged  in 
our  dispensatories. 

Balsamum  styracis  benzoini.  See  Styrax  bemoin 

Balsamum  succzni.  Oil  of  amber. 

Balsamum  sulphuris.  A solution  of  sulphur  in  oil. 

Balsamum  sulphuris  anisatum.  Terebinthinated 
balsam  of  sulphur,  and  oil  of  aniseed. 

Balsamum  sulphuris  barbadense.  Sulphur  boiled 
with  Barbadoes  tar. 

Balsamum  sulphuris  crassum.  Thick  balsam  of 
sulphur. 

Balsamum  sulphuris  simplex.  Sulphur  boiled 
with  oil. 

Balsamum  sulphuris  terebinthinatum.  This 
is  made  by  digesting  the  sulphur  with  oil  of  turpentine; 
it  is  now  confined  to  veterinary  medicine. 

Balsamum  syriacUM.  See  Amyris  gileadensis.  . 

Balsamum  tolutanum.  See  Toluifra  balsamum 


BAR 


BAR 


Balsamum  traumaticum.  Vulnerary  balsam. 
A form  of  medicine  intended  to  supply  the  place  of 
the  tincture  commonly  called  Friar’s  balsam,  so 
famous  for  curing  old  ulcers.  The  London  College 
have  named  it  Tinctura  Benzoini  composita. 

Balsamum  universale.  The  unguentum  saturni- 
num  of  old  pharmacopoeias.  See  Ceratum  plumbi 
composition. 

Balsamum  verum.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

Balsamum  viride.  Linseed-oil,  turpentine,  and 
verdigris  mixed  together. 

Balsamum  vit.e  hoffmanni.  Beaume  de  vie.  An 
artificial  balsam,  so  named  from  its  inventor,  and  com- 
posed of  a great  variety  of  the  warmest  and  most 
grateful  essential  oils,  such  as  nutmegs,  cloves,  laven- 
der, &c.,  with  balsam  of  Peru,  dissolved  in  highly 
rectified  spirit  of  wine ; but  it  is  now  greatly  abridged 
in  the  number  of  ingredients,  and  but  little  used. 

Balzoi'num.  The  gum-benjamin. 

BAMBA'LIO.  (From  j8a/«/8atvw,  to  speak  inarticu- 
lately.) A person  who  stammers,  or  lisps. 

Bambo'o.  (An  Indian  root.)  See  Arundo  bambos. 

Ba'mia  moschata.  See  Hibiscus. 

Bamier.  The  name  of  a plant  common  in  Egypt, 
the  husk  of  which  they  dress  with  meat,  and,  from  its 
agreeable  flavour,  make  great  use  of  it  in  their  ragouts. 

Ban  a'rbor.  The  coffee-tree. 

Bana'na.  An  Indian  word.  See  Musa  sapientum. 

Bananei'ra.  See  Banana. 

Ba'ncia.  The  wild  parsnip. 

BANDAGE.  Deligatio.  Fascia.  An  apparatus 
consisting  of  one  or  several  pieces  of  linen,  or  flannel, 
and  intended  for  covering  or  surrounding  parts  of  the 
body  for  surgical  purposes.  Bandages  are  either  sim- 
ple or  compound.  The  chief  of  the  simple  are  the 
circular,  the  spiral,  the  uniting,  the  retaining,  the  ex- 
pellent,  and  the  creeping.  The  compound  bandages 
used  in  surgery,  are  the  T bandage,  the  suspensory  one, 
the  capistrum,  the  eighteen-tail  bandage,  and  others, 
to  be  met  with  in  surgical  treatises. 

Bandu'ra.  A plant  which  grows  in  Ceylon,  the 
root  of  which  is  said  to  be  astringent. 

Bangu'e.  Bange.  A species  of  opiate  in  great  use 
throughout  the  East,  for  its  intoxicating  qualities.  It 
is  the  leaf  of  a kind  of  wild  hemp,  growing  in  the 
countries  of  the  Levant,  and  made  into  powder,  pills, 
or  conserves. 

Ba'nica.  The  wild  parsnip. 

Bani'las.  See  Epidendrum  vanilla. 

Bani'lia.  See  Epidendrum  vanilla. 

Bao  bab.  See  Adansonia  digitata. 

Ba'ptica  coccus.  Kermes  berries. 

BAPTISTE'RIUM.  (From  , to  immerge.) 

A bath,  or  repository  of  water,  to  wash  the  body. 

Bapti'strum.  (From  Banjo),  to  dye.)  A species 
of  wild  mustard,  so  called  from  its  reddish  colour. 

BARBA.  (From  barbarus , because  wild  nations 
are  usually  unshaven.)  1.  The  beard  of  man. 

2.  In  botany  a species  of  pubescence,  or  down,  with 
which  the  surface  of  some  plants  are  covered  some- 
times in  patches ; as  in  the  leaves  of  the  Mesembryan- 
themum  barbatum. 

3.  Some  vegetables  have  the  specific  name  of  barba, 
the  ramifications  of  which  are  bushy,  like  a beard,  as 
Barba,  jovts,  Sc. c. 

Barba  aronis.  See  Arum  maculalum. 

Barba  caprje.  See  Spirea  ulmaria. 

Barba  hirci.  See  Tragopogon. 

Barba  jovis.  Jupiter’s  beard.  This  name  is  given 
to  several  plants,  as  the  silver  bush  ; the  Sempervivum 
majus ; and  of  a species  of  anthyllis. 

BARBADOES.  The  name  of  an  island  in  the 
West,  from  which  we  obtain  a mineral  tar,  and  seve- 
ral medicinal  plants. 

Barbadoes  cherry.  See  Malphigia  glabra. 

Barbadoes  nut.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Barbadoes  tar.  See  Petroleum  barbadense , the  use 
of  which  in  medicine  is  limited  to  its  external  appli- 
cation, at  times,  in  paralytic  cases. 

Barba'rea.  (From  St.  Barbary,  who  is  said  to 
have  found  its  virtues.)  See  Erysimum  barbarca. 

Barbaro'ss.e  pilula.  Barbarossa’s  pill.  An  an- 
cient composition  of  quicksilver,  rhubarb,  diagridium, 
musk,  amber,  &c.  It  was  the  first  internal  mercurial 
medicine  which  obtained  any  real  credit. 

Ba'rbarum.  The  name  of  a plaster  in  Scribonius 
Largus. 


Barbatina.  A Persian  vermifuge  seed. 

BARBA'TUS.  (From  barba,  a beard.)  Bearded: 
applied  to  a leaf  which  has  a hairy  or  beard-like  pu- 
bescence ; as  Mesembryanthemum  barbatum , and  Spar 
nanthe  paniculala. 

BA  RBEL  Barbo.  An  oblong  fish,  resembling 
the  pike,  the  eating  of  the  roe  of  which  often  brings 
on  the  cholera. 

BARBERRY.  See  Berberis. 

BARBEYRAC,  Charles.  A French  physician  of 
the  17th  century,  who  graduated  and  settled  at  Mont- 
pelier, where  he  acquired  great  celebrity.  He  died  in 
1699,  at  the  age  of  about  70,  having  published  little, 
except  a good  account  of  the  diseases  of  the  chest  and 
stomach  in  females.  Mr.  Locke,  who  became  intimate 
with  him  abroad,  considered  him  very  similar  in  his 
manners  and  opinions  to  Sydenham.  His  practice  is 
said  to  have  been  distinguished  for  simplicity  and 
energy. 

Barbo'ta.  The  barbut.  A small  river-fish.  It  is 
remarkable  for  the  size  of  its  liver,  which  is  esteemed 
the  most  delicate  part  of  it. 

[BARD,  Dr.  John.  Dr.  Bard  was  of  French  descent. 
His  ancestors  preferring  their  faith  to  their  country, 
became  exiles  under  the  provisions  of  the  revocation 
of  the  edict  of  Nantes.  Dr.  Bard  first  settled  in  his 
profession  in  Philadelphia,  but  after  practising  in  that 
city  about  five  or  six  years,  he  was  induced  to  remove 
to  New- York  in  the  year  1746.  By  the  urbanity  of  his 
manners,  his  professional  talents,  and  the  charms  of 
his  conversation,  which  was  enlivened  by  an  uncom- 
mon flow  of  cheerfulness,  enriched  by  sound  sense, 
and  adorned  by  a large  fund  of  anecdote,  he  so  effec- 
tually recommended  himself  to  the  notice  and  friend- 
ship of  the  most  respectable  families,  that  he  was 
almost  immediately  introduced  into  a valuable  scene 
of  business,  and  very  soon  arrived  at  the  first  rank  of 
professional  eminence,  which  he  retained  through  a 
long  life  of  more  than  fourscore  years.  He  died  in 
March,  1799,  leaving  a son  who  afterward  eclipsed  his 
father  in  his  professional  career. — See  Thach.  Med. 
Biog.  A.] 

[BARD,  Samuel,  M.D.  LL.D.  was  the  son  of 
Dr.  John  Bard,  and  was  born  in  Philadelphia,  April  1, 
1742.  He  acquired  his  classical  education  at  Kings, 
now  Columbia  College,  in  the  city  of  New-York.  He 
spent  five  years  abroad,  and  acquired  his  medical  edu- 
cation principally  in  Edinburgh,  where  he  received  his 
degree  of  Doctor  in  Medicine  in  May,  1765.  He  com- 
menced practice  in  New-York,  but  the  events  of  the 
revolution  prevented  his  success  until  the  close  of  the 
war  in  1783,  after  which  he  rose  in  professional  emi- 
nence until  he  retired  from  practice  in  1798.  After  his 
return  from  Europe,  he  was  instrumental  in  establish 
ing  the  medical  faculty  which  was  annexed  to  Colum 
bia  College,  his  alma  mater,  and  he  was  appointed  the 
first  professor  of  the  practice  of  physic.  The  esta- 
blishment of  the  New-York  hospital  was  effected 
principally  by  his  exertions,  and  he  was  for  many 
years  one  of  the  physicians  to  the  institution.  He 
was  author  of  several  medical  essays,  but  the  princi- 
pal work  of  his  is  a system  of  midwifery,  published 
after  he  retired  from  practice.  Princeton  College  in 
New  Jersey  conferred  upon  him  the  degree  of  (LL.D.) 
Doctor  of  Laws,  on  account  of  the  high  reputation  of 
his  professional  skill,  learning,  and  abilities.— See 
Thach.  Med.  Biog ■ A.] 

BARDA'NA.  (From  bardus,  foolish ; because  silly 
people  are  apt  to  throw  them  on  the  garments  of  pas- 
sengers, having  the  property  of  sticking  to  whatever 
they  touch.)  Burdock.  See  Arctium  lappa. 

BARE'GE.  The  small  village  of  Barege,  celebrated 
for  its  thermal  waters,  is  situated  on  the  French  side 
of  the  Pyrenees,  about  half  way  between  the  Mediter- 
ranean and  the  Bay  of  Biscay.  The  hot  springs  are 
four  in  number.  They  have  all  the  same  component 
parts,  but  differ  somewhat  in  their  temperature,  and 
in  the  quantity  of  sulphur,  the  hottest  being  most 
strongly  penetrated  with  this  active  ingredient.  The 
coolest  of  these  waters  raises  Fahrenheit’s  thermome- 
ter to  73  deg. ; the  hottest  to  120  deg.  Barege  waters 
are  remarkable  for  a very  smooth,  soapy  feel ; they 
render  the  skin  very  supple  and  pliable,  and  dissolve 
perfectly  well  soap  and  animal  lymph;  and  are  re- 
sorted to  as  a bath  in  resolving  tumours  of  various 
kinds,  rigidities,  and  contractions  of  the  tendons,  stiff- 
ness of  the  joints,  left  by  rheumatic  and  gouty  com- 


BAR 


BAR 


plaints,  and  are  highly  serviceable  in  cutaneous  erup- 
tions. Internally  taken,  this  water  gives  considerable 
relief  in  disorders  of  the  stomach,  especially  attended 
with  acidity  and  heart-burn,  in  obstinate  colics,  jaun- 
dice, and  in  gravel,  and  other  affections  of  the  urinary 
organs. 

Bari'glia.  See  Barilla. 

BARl'LLA.  Barillor ; Bariglia  The  term  given 
in  commerce  to  the  impure  soda  imported  from  Spain 
and  the  Levant.  It  is  made  by  burning  to  ashes  dif- 
ferent plants  that  grow  on  the  sea-shore,  chiefly  of  tiie 
genus  salsola,  and  is  brought  to  us  in  hard  porous 
masses,  of  a speckled  brown  colour.  Kelp,  which  is 
made  in  this  country  by  burning  sea-weeds,  and  is 
called  British  barilla , is  much  more  impure. 

[Barilla  is  much  used  in  the  arts  on  account  of  the 
soda  it  contains. 

“ Carbonate  of  soda  is  chiefly  obtained  by  the  com- 
bustion of  marine  plants,  the  ashes  of  which  afford, 
by  lixiviation,  the  impure  alkali  called  soda.  Two 
Kinds  of  rough  soda  occur  in  the  market ; barilla  and 
kelp ; besides  which  some  native  carbonate  of  soda  is 
also  imported.  Barilla  is  the  semifused  ashes  of  the 
salsola  soda)  which  is  largely  cultivated  upon  the 
Mediterranean  shores  of  Spain,  in  the  vicinity  of 
Alicant.  Kelp  consists  of  the  ashes  of  sea-weeds 
which  are  collected  upon  the  sea  coast  and  burned  in 
kilns,  or  merely  in  excavations  made  in  the  ground 
and  surrounded  by  stones.  It  seldom  contains  more 
than  five  per  cent,  of  carbonated  alkali,  and  about 
34  tons  of  sea- weed  are  required  to  produce  one  ton 
of  kelp.  The  best  produce  is  from  the  hardest  fad , 
such  as  the  serratus,  digitatus , nodosus , and  vesicu- 
losus.  The  rough  alkali  is  contaminated  by  common 
salt,  and  impurities,  from  which  it  may  be  separated 
by  solution  in  a small  portion  of  water,  filtrating  the 
solution,  and  evaporating  it  at  a low  heat ; the  com- 
mon salt  may  be  skimmed  off  as  its  crystals  form  upon 
the  surface.” — See  Webster's  Man.  of  Chem.  A.] 

BARIUM.  (From  barytes , from  which  it  is  ob- 
tained.) The  metallic  basis  of  the  earth  barytes,  so 
named  by  Sir  Humphrey  Davy,  who  discovered  it. 

“ Take  pure  barytes,  make  it  into  a paste  with  water, 
and  put  this  on  a plate  of  platinum.  Make  a cavity  in 
the  middle  of  the  barytes,  into  which  a globule  of 
mercury  is  to  be  placed.  Touch  the  globule  with  the 
negative  wire,  and  the  platinum  with  the  positive 
wire,  of  a voltaic  battery  of  about  100  pairs  of  plates 
in  good  action.  In  a short  time  an  amalgam  will  be 
formed,  consisting  of  mercury  and  barium.  This 
amalgam  must  be  introduced  into  a little  bent  tube, 
made  of  glass  free  from  lead,  sealed  at  one  end,  which 
being  filled  with  the  vapour  of  naphtha,  is  then  to  be 
hermetically  sealed  at  the  other  end.  Heat  must  be 
applied  to  the  recurved  end  of  the  tube,  where  the 
amalgam  lies.  The  mercury  will  distil  over,  while  the 
barium  will  remain. 

This  metal  is  of  a dark  gray  colour,  with  a lustre 
inferior  to  that  of  cast  iron.  It  is  fusible  at  a red  heat. 
Its  density  is  superior  to  that  of  sulphuric  acid ; for 
though  surrounded  with  globules  of  gas,  it  sinks  imme- 
diately in  that  liquid.  When  exposed  to  air,  it  in- 
stantly becomes  covered  with  a crust  of  barytes ; and 
when  gently  heated  in  air,  burns  with  a deep  red 
light.  It  effervesces  violently  in  water,  converting  this 
liquid  into  a solution  of  barytes.” 

BARK.  A term  very  frequently  employed  to  sig- 
nify, by  way  of  eminence,  Peruvian  bark.  See  Cin- 
chona. 

Bark , Carriboean.  See  Cinchona  Carribcea. 

Barky  Jamaica.  See  Cinchona  Carribcea. 

Barky  Peruvian.  See  Cinchona. 

Barky  red.  See  Cinchona  oblongiforia. 

Barky  yellow.  See  Cinchona  cordifolia. 

BARLEY.  See  Hordeum. 

Barley , caustic.  See  Cevadilla. 

Barley y pearl.  See  Hordeum. 

BARM.  See  Fermentum  cerevisia:. 

BARNET.  A town  near  London,  where  there  is  a 
mineral  water ; of  a purging  kind,  of  a similar  quality 
to  that  of  Epsom,  and  about  half  its  strength. 

[BAROLITE.  The  name  given  by  Kirwan  to  the 
carbonate  of  barytes.  A.] 

BARO'METER.  (From  Bjpoj,  weight,  and  perpov, 
measure.)  An  instrument  to  determine  the  weight  of 
the  air ; it  is  commonly  called  a weather-glass. 
Barolyte.  A carbonate  of  barytes 
118 


Baro'nes.  Small  worms ; called  also  Nepones. 

BA'ROS.  (Bapoj.)  Gravity.  1.  Hippocrates  use3 
this  word  to  express  by  it,  an  uneasy  weight  in  any 
part. 

2.  It  is  also  the  Indian  name  for  a species  of  cam- 
phire,  which  is  distilled  from  the  roots  of  the  true  cin- 
namon-tree. 

[BAROSELENITE.  Kirwan’s  name  for  the  sul 
phate  of  barytes.  A.] 

Barras.  Galipot.  The  resinous  incrustation  on 
the  wounds  made  in  fir-trees. 

Barren  Flower.  See  Flos. 

BA  RRENNESS.  See  Sterility. 

BA'RTHOLINE,  Thomas,  was  born  at  Copen- 
hagen in  1616.  After  studying  in  various  parts  of 
Europe,  particularly  Padua,  and  graduating  at  Basil, 
he  became  professor  of  anatomy  in  his  native  city;  in 
which  office  he  greatly  distinguished  himself,  as  well 
as  in  many  other  branches  of  learning.  He  was  the 
first  who  described  the  lymphatics  with  accuracy; 
though  some  of  these  vessels,  as  well  as  the  lacteals 
and  thoracic  duct,  had  been  before  discovered  by 
other  anatomists.  Besides  many  learned  works 
which  he  published,  several  others  were  unfortunately 
destroyed  by  fire  in  1670  ; and  he  particularly  regretted 
a dissertation  on  the  ancient  practice  of  midwifery,  of 
which  an  outline  was  afterward  published  by  his  son 
Caspar.  Of  those  which  remain,  the  most  esteemed 
are,  his  epistolary  correspondence  with  the  most  cele- 
brated of  his  cotemporaries:  his  collection  of  cases 
where  foetuses  have  been  discharged  by  preternatural 
outlets ; and  the  “ Medical  and  Philosophical  Transac- 
tions  of  Copenhagen,”  enriched  by  the  communications 
of  many  correspondents.  This  last  work  was  in  four 
volumes,  published  within  the  ten  years  preceding  his 
death,  which  happened  1680 ; and  a fifth  was  after- 
ward added  by  his  son. 

Bartholinia'nje  glandule.  See  Sublingual 
glands. 

[BARTLETT,  Josiah,  M.  D.  Dr.  Bartlett  wasbora 
in  Amesbury  in  Massachusetts  in  1729,  and  after  ac- 
quiring his  profession  commenced  practice  in  the  town 
of  Kingston  in  New-Hampshire,  where  he  had 
acquired  considerable  reputation  before  the  com- 
mencement of  the  American  revolution,  in  which  he 
took  an  active  and  decided  part  in  favour  of  his 
country.  “ From  his  integrity  and  decision  of  charac 
ter,  Dr.  Bartlett  was  soon  designated  as  a magistrate, 
and  sustained  various  offices  from  the  lowest  to  the 
highest.  In  1775  he  was  chosen  a delegate  to  the  con- 
tinental congress.  He  attended  in  that  honourable 
assembly,  and  when  the  vote  for  American  Indepen- 
dence was  taken,  Dr.  Bartlett’s  name  was  first  called, 
as  representing  the  most  easterly  province,  and  he 
boldly  answered  in  the  affirmative.”  After  the  revo- 
lution he  was  elected  governor  of  the  state  of  New- 
Hampshire  under  the  new  form  of  government. 

“ His  mind  was  quick  and  penetrating,  his  memory 
tenacious,  his  judgment  sound  and  prospective ; his 
natural  temper  was  open,  humane,  and  compassionate. 
In  all  his  dealings  he  was  scrupulously  just,  and  faith- 
ful in  the  performance  of  all  his  engagements.  These 
shining  talents  accompanied  with  distinguished  pro- 
bity, early  in  life  recommended  him  to  the  esteem  and 
confidence  of  his  fellow-citizens.  But  few  persons,  by 
their  own  merit,  without  the  influence  of  family  or 
party  connexions,  have  risen  from  one  degree  of 
honour  to  another  as  he  did  ; and  fewer  still  have  been 
the  instances  in  which  a succession  of  honourable  and 
important  offices,  have  been  held  by  any  man  with  less 
envy,  or  executed  with  more  general  approbation.”-^ 
See  Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

[BARTON,  Benjamin  Smith,  M.  D.  Dr.  Barton 
was  born  at  Lancaster  in  Pennsylvania  in  1766.  In 
1736  he  went  to  Great  Britain,  and  prosecuted  his 
medical  studies  at  Edinburgh  and  London.  He  after- 
ward visited  Gottingen,  and  there  obtained  the  degree 
of  doctor  in  medicine.  On  returning  to  Philadelphia, 
in  1789,  he  established  himself  as  a physician  in  that 
city,  and  his  superior  talents  and  education  soon  pro- 
cured him  competent  employment.  He  was  that  year 
appointed  Professor  of  Natural  History  and  Botany  in 
the  College  of  Philadelphia,  and  continued  in  theoifice 
on  the  incorporation  of  the  college  with  the  university, 
in  1791.  He  was  appointed  Professor  of  Materia  Me- 
dica  on  the  resignation  of  Dr.  Griffiths,  and  on  the 
death  of  Dr.  Rush,  succeeded  him  in  the  department 


BAR 


BAR 

of  the  Theory  and  Practice  of  Medicine.  He  died  in 
December,  1815. 

He  published,  “ Elements  of  Zoology  and  Botany,” 

“ Elements  of  Botany,  or  Outlines  of  the  Natural  His- 
tory of  Vegetables,”  u Collections  for  an  Essay  towards 
a Materia  Medica  of  the  United  States besides  nu- 
merous essays  and  communications  contributed  to  the 
“ Medical  and  Physical  Journal.” — See  Thacker's 
Med.  Bio  a-.  A.] 

BARYCOI'A.  (From  /?apaj,  heavy,  and  a/couw,  to 
hear.)  Deafness,  or  difficulty  of  hearing. 

Baryoco'ccalon.  (From  papvs,  heavy,  and  kokkci- 
Xoj,  a nut ; because  it  gives  a deep  sound.)  A name 
for  the  stramonium. 

BA  R YPHO'NIA.  (From  /?apv?,  dull,  and  (pwvy, 
the  voice.)  A difficulty  of  speaking. 

BARYTE.  See  Heavy  spar. 

BARY'TES.  (From  /Japuj,  heavy;  so  called  be- 
cause it  is  very  ponderous.)  Cauk;  Calk;  Terra 
ponderosa;  Baryta,.  Ponderous  earth;  Heavy  earth. 
United  with  the  sulphuric  acid,  it  forms  the  mineral 
called  sulphate  of  barytes , or  baroselenite.  When 
united  to  carbonic  acid,  it  is  called  aerated  barytes , or 
carbonate  of  barytes.  See  Heavy  spar. 

Barytes,  is  a compound  of  barium  and  oxygen.  Oxy- 
gen combines  with  two  portions  of  barium,  forming,  1. 
Bdrytes.  2.  Deutoxyde  of  barium. 

1.  Barytes , or  protoxyde  of  barium , “ is  best  obtained 
by  igniting,  in  a covered  crucible,  the  pure  crystallized 
nitrate  of  barytes.  It  is  procured  in  the  state  of 
hydrate,  by  adding  caustic  potassa  or  soda  to  a solu- 
tion of  the  muriate  of  nitrate.  And  barytes,  slightly 
coloured  with  charcoal,  may  be  obtained  by  strongly 
igniting  the  carbonate  and  charcoal  mixed  together  in 
tine  powder.  Barytes  obtained  from  the  ignited 
nitrate  is  of  a whitish-gray  colour ; more  caustic  than 
strontites,  or  perhaps  even  lime.  It  renders  t he  syrup 
of  violets  green,  and  the  infusion  of  tumeric  red.  Its 
specific  gravity  by  Fourcroy  is  4.  When  water  in 
small  quantity  is  poured  on  the  dry  earth,  it  slakes  like 
quicklime,  but  perhaps  with  evolution  of  more  heat. 
When  swallowed  it  acts  as  a violent  poison.  It  is 
destitute  of  smell. 

When  pure  barytes  is  exposed,  in  a porcelain  tube, 
at  a heat  verging  on  ignition,  to  a stream  of  dry  oxy- 
gen gas,  it  absorbs  thte  gas  rapidly,  and  passes  to  the 
state  of  deutoxyde  of  barium.  But  when  it  is  calcined 
in  contact  with  atmospheric  air,  we  obtain  at  first  this 
deutoxyde  and  carbonate  of  barytes;  the  former  of 
which  passes  very  slowly  into  the  latter,  by  absorption  I 
of  carbonic  acid  from  the  atmosphere. 

2.  The  deutoxyde  of  barium,  is  of  a greenish-gray 
colour,  it  is  caustic,  renders  the  syrup  of  violets  green, 
ind  is  not  decomposable  by  heat  or  light.  The  voltaic 
oile  reduces  it.  Exposed  at  a moderate  heat  to  car- 
bonic acid,  it  absorbs  it,  emitting  oxygen,  and  becoming 
carbonate  of  barytes.  The  deutoxyde  is  probably 
decomposed  by  sulphuretted  hydrogen  at  ordinary 
temperatures.  Aided  by  heat,  almost  all  combustible 
bodies,  as  well  as  many  metals,  decompose  it.  The 
action  of  hydrogen  is  accompanied  with  remarkahle 
phenomena. 

Water  at  50°  F.  dissolves  one-twentieth  of  its  weight 
of  barytes,  and  at  212°  about  one  half  of  its  weight. 
It  is  colourless,  acrid,  and  caustic.  It  acts  powerfully 
on  the  vegetable  purples  and  yellows.  Exposed  to  the 
air,  it  attracts  carbonic  acid,  and  the  dissolved  barytes 
is  converted  into  carbonate,  which  falis  down  in  inso- 
luble crusts. 

Sulphur  combines  with  barytes,  when  they  are  mixed 
together,  and  heated  in  a crucible.  The  same  com- 
pound is  more  economically  obtained  by  igniting  a 
mixture  of  sulphate  of  barytes  and  charcoal  in  fine 
powder.  This  sulphuret  is  of  a reddish  yellow  colour, 
and  when  dry  without  smell.  When  this  substance  is 
put  into  hot  water,  a powerful  action  is  manifested. 
The  water  is  decomposed,  and  two  new  products  are 
formed,  namely,  hydrosulphuret,  and  hydroguretted 
sulphurct  of  barytes.  The  first  crystallizes  as  the 
liquid  cools,  the  second  remains  dissolved.  The  hydro- 
sulphuret is  a compound  of  9.75  of  barytes  with  2.125 
sulphuretted  hydrogen.  Its  crystals  should  be  quick/y 
separated  by  filtration,  and  dried  by  pressure  between 
the  folds  of  porous  paper.  They  are  white  scales, 
have  a silky  lustre,  are  soluble  in  water,  and  yield  a 
solution  having  a greenish  tinge.  Its  taste  is  acrid, 
sulphureous,  and  when  mixed  with  the  hydroguretted 


sulphuret,  eminently  corrosive.  It  rapidly  attracts 
oxygen  from  the  atmosphere,  and  is  converted  into  the 
sulphate  of  barytes.  The  hydroguretted  sulphuret  is  a 
compound  of  9.75  barytes  with  4.125  bisulphuretted 
hydrogen:  but  contaminated  with  sulphite  and  hypo 
sulphite  in  unknown  proportions.  The  dry  sulphuret 
consists  probably  of  2 sulphur  + 9.75  barytes.  The 
readiest  way  of  obtaining  barytes  water  is  to  boil  the 
solution  of  the  sulphuret  with  deutoxyde  of  copper, 
which  seizes  the  sulphur,  while  the  hydrogen  flies  off, 
and  the  barytes  remains  dissolved. 

Phosphuret  of  barytes  may  be  easily  formed  by  ex- 
posing the  constituents  together  to  heat  in  a glass  tube. 
Their  reciprocal  action  is  so  intense  as  to  cause  igni- 
tion. Like  phosphuret  of  lime,  it  decomposes  water, 
and  causes  the  disengagement  of  phosphuretted  hydro- 
gen gas,  which  spontaneously  inflames  with  contact 
of  air.  When  sulphur  is  made  to  act  on  the  deutoxyde 
of  barytes,  sulphuric  acid  is  formed,  which  unites  to  a 
portion  of  the  earth  into  a sulphate. 

The  salts  of  barytes  are  white,  and  more  or  less 
transparent.  All  the  soluble  sulphates  cause  in  the 
soluble  salts  of  barytes  a precipitate  insoluble  in  nitric 
acid.  They  are  all  poisonous  except  the  sulphate ; and 
hence  the  proper  counter-poison  is  dilute  sulphuric 
acid  for  the  carbonate,  and  sulphate  of  soda  for  the 
soluble  salts  of  barytes.” 

Pure  barytes  has  a much  stronger  affinity  than  any 
other  body  for  sulphuric  acid;  it  turns  blue  tincture 
of  cabbage  green.  It  is  entirely  infusible  by  heat  alone, 
but  melts  when  mixed  with  various  earths.  Its  spe- 
cific gravity  is  4.000.  It  changes  quickiy  in  the  air, 
swells,  becomes  soft,  and  falis  into  a white  powder, 
with  the  acquisition  of  about  one-fifth  of  its  weight. 
This  slaking  is  much  more  active  and  speedy  than  that 
of  lime.  It  combines  with  phosphorus,  which  com- 
pound decomposes  water  rapidly.  It  unites  to  sulphur 
by  the  dry  and  humid  way.  It  has  a powerful  attrac- 
tion for  water,  which  it  absorbs  with  a hissing  noise, 
and  consolidates  it  strongly.  It  is  soluble  in  twenty 
times  its  weight  of  cold,  and  twice  its  weight  of  boiling 
water.  Its  crystals  are  long  four-sided  prisms  of  a 
satin-like  appearance.  It  is  a deadly  poison  to  ani- 
mals. 

Other  Methods  of  obtaining  Barytes. — 1.  Take  na- 
tive carbonate  of  barytes;  reduce  it  to  a fine  powder, 
and  dissolve  it  in  a sufficient  quantity  of  diluted  nitric 
acid;  evaporate  this  solution  till  a pellicle  appears,  and 
then  suffer  it  to  crystallize  in  a shallow  basin.  The 
I salt  obtained  is  nitrate  of  barytes ; expose  this  nitrate 
of  barytes  to  the  action  of  heat  in  a china-cup,  or  silver 
crucible,  and  keep  it  in  a dull  red  heat  for  at  least  one 
hour ; then  suffer  the  vessel  to  cool,  and  transfer  the 
greenish  solid  contents,  which  are  pure  barytes,  into  a 
well-stopped  bottle.  When  dissolved  in  a small  quan- 
tity of  distilled  water,  and  evaporated,  it  may  be  ob- 
tained in  a beautiful  crystalline  form. 

In  this  process  the  nitric  acid,  added  to  the  native 
carbonate  of  barytes,  unites  to  the  barytes,  and  expels 
the  carbonic  acid,  and  forms  nitrate  of  barytes ; on 
exposing  this  nitrate  to  heat,  it  parts  with  its  nitric 
acid,  which  becomes  decomposed  into  its  constituents, 
leaving  the  barytes  behind. 

2.  Pure  barytes  may  likewise  be  obtained  from  its 
sulphate.  For  this  purpose,  boil  powdered  sulphate 
of  barytes  in  a solution  of  twice  or  three  times  its 
weight  of  carbonate  of  potassa,  in  a Florence  flask,  for 
about  two  hours;  filter  the  solution,  and  expose 
what  remains  on  the  filter  to  the  action  of  a violent 
heat. 

In  this  case,  the  sulphuric  acid  of  the  barytes  unites 
to  the  potassa,  and  the  carbonic  acid  of  the  latter 
joins  to  the  barytes  ; hence  sulphate  of  potassa  and 
carbonate  of  barytes  are  obtained.  The  former  is  in 
solution,  and  passes  through  the  filter ; the  latter  is 
insoluble,  and  remains  behind.  From  this  artificial 
carbonate  of  barytes,  the  carbonic  acid  is  driven  off 
by  heat. 

Baryta  murias.  Terra  ponderosa  salita.  The 
muriate  cf  barytes  is  a very  acrid  and  poisonous  pre- 
paration. In  small  doses  it  proves  sudorific,  diuretic, 
deobstruent,  and  alterative ; in  an  over-dose,  emetic, 
and  violently  purgative.  The  late  Dr.  Crawford  found 
it  very  serviceable  in  all  diseases  connected  with  scro- 
fula ; and  the  Germans  have  employed  it  with  great 
success  in  some  diseases  of  the  skin  and  viscera,  and 
obstinate  ulcers.  The  dose  of  the  saturated  solution  iu 


BAS 


BAS 


distilled  water,  is  from  five  to  fifteen  drops  for  children, 
and  from  fifteen  to  twenty  for  adults. 

Basaal.  (Indian.)  The  name  of  an  Indian  tree. 
A decoction  of  its  leaves,  with  ginger,  hi  water,  is 
used  as  a gargle  in  disorders  of  the  fauces.  The  ker- 
nels of  the  fruit  kill  worms. — Ray's  Hist. 

BASA'LTES.  (In  the  ADthiopic  tongue,  this  word 
means  iron , which  is  the  colour  of  the  stone.)  A 
heavy  and  hard  kind  of  stone,  found  standing  up  in 
the  form  of  regular  angular  columns,  composed  of  a 
number  of  joints,  one  placed  upon  and  nicely  fitted  to 
another  as  if  formed  by  the  hands  of  a skilful  archi- 
tect. It  is  found  in  beds  and  veins  in  granite  and  mica 
slate,  the  old  red  sandstone,  limestone,  and  coal  for- 
mations. It  is  distributed  over  the  whole  world  ; but 
nowhere  is  it  met  with  in  greater  variety  than  in 
Scotland.  The  German  basalt  is  supposed  to  be  a wa- 
tery deposite ; and  that  of  France  to  be  of  volcanic  origin. 

The  most  remarkable  is  the  columnar  basaltes, 
which  forms  immense  masses,  composed  of  columns 
thirty,  forty,  or  more  feet  in  height,  and  of  enormous 
thickness.  Nay,  those  at  Fairhead  are  two  hundred 
and  fifty  feet  high.  These  constitute  some  of  the  most 
astonishing  scenes  in  nature,  for  the  immensity  and 
regularity  of  their  parts.  The  coast  of  A ntrim  in  Ire- 
land, for  the  space  of  three  miles  in  length,  exhibits  a 
very  magnificent  variety  of  columnar  cliffs : and.  the 
Giant’s  Causeway  consists  of  a point  of  that  coast 
formed  of  similar  columns,  and  projecting  into  the  sea 
upon  a descent  for  several  hundred  feet.  These 
columns  are,  for  the  most  part,  hexagonal,  and  fit  very 
accurately  together  ; but  most  frequently  not  adherent 
to  each  other,  though  water  cannot  penetrate  between 
them.  And  the  basaltic  appearances  on  the  Hebrides 
Islands  on  the  coast  of  Scotland,  as  described  by  Sir 
Joseph  Banks,  who  visited  them  in  1772,  are  upon  a 
scale  very  striking  for  their  vastness  and  variety. 

[Basaltes  belongs  to  a class  of  rocks  now  called 
superincumbent.  They  are  always  found  in  a vertical 
position,  resting  upon  other  strata  of  rocks  which  are 
horizontal.  Some  of  the  most  remarkable  of  these 
are  the  Pallisado  rocks , extending  forty  miles  or  more 
along  the  Hudson  river,  on  its  west  bank,  partly  in 
New-Jersey  and  partly  in  the  state  of  New-York. 
There  are  other  ridges  of  the  same  formation  in  other 
parts  of  New-Jersey,  all  resting  upon  sandstone.  On  the 
south  shore  of  Lake  Superior,  the  basaltic  rocks,  as 
they  have  been  described  by  travellers,  particularly  by 
Mr.  Schoolcraft,  have  a grand  and  imposing  appear- 
ance. There  is  a ridge  of  this  kind  of  rock  extending 
a number  of  miles  north  from  New-Haven,  in  the  state 
of  Connecticut.  A singular  formation  of  basaltic 
rocks  is  found  in  North  Carolina,  constituting  a wall 
many  miles  in  extent,  which  has  given  rise  to  much 
controversy  ; but  Dr.  Woodhouse,  of  Philadelphia,  set- 
tled the  question,  as  to  the  true  nature  of  this  for- 
mation. 

“ Basalt  (says  professor  Eaton)  is  a hornblende  rock, 
not  primitive,  probably  of  volcanic  origin.  Subdivi- 
sions— Amygdaloid , when  amorphous,  of  a compact 
texture,  but  containing  cellules,  empty  or  filled. 
Greenstone  trap , when  of  a columnar  structure,  or  in 
angular  blocks,  often  coarse-grained.  Variety — Toad- 
stone,  when  the  amygdaloid  has  a warty  appearance, 
and  resembles  slag.”  A.] 

Basaltic  hornblende.  See  Hornblende. 

BASANITE.  See  Flinty  slate. 

Basani'tes.  (From  6aoavt£(o,  to  find  out.)  A stone 
said,  by  Pliny,  to  contain  a bloody  juice,  and  useful  in 
diseases  of  the  liver:  also  a stone  upon  which,  by 
some,  the  purity  of  gold  was  formerly  said  to  be  tried, 
and  of  which  medical  mortars  were  made. 

BASE.  See  Basis. 

Base , acidifiable.  See  Acid. 

Base , acidifying.  See  Acid. 

Basia'tio.  (From  basio,  to  kiss  ■ Venereal  con- 
nexion between  the  sexes. 

Basia'tor.  See  Orbicularis  oris 

BASIL.  See  Ocimum  basilicum. 

BASILA'RIS.  See  Basilary. 

Basilaris  arteria.  Basilary  artery.  An  artery  of 
the  brain ; so  called,  because  it  lies  upon  the  basilary 
prscess  of  the  occipital  bone.  It  is  formed  by  the  junc- 
tion of  the  two  vertebral  arteries  within  the  skull,  and 
runs  forwards  to  the  sella  turcica  along  the  pons  varo- 
lii,  which  it  supplies,  as  well  as  the  adjacent  parts,  with 
fclood 


Basilaris  forcessus.  See  Occipital  bone. 

Basilaris  apophysis.  See  Occipital  bone. 

BASILA'RY.  ( Basilaris  ; from  (JaoiXevs,  a king.) 
Several  parts  of  the  body,  bones,  arteries,  veins,  pro- 
cesses, &c.  were  so  named  by  the  ancients,  from  their 
situation  being  connected  with  or  leading  to  the  liver 
or  brain,  which  they  considered  as  the  seat  of  the  soul 
or  royalty. 

Basi  lica  mediana.  See  Basilica  vena. 

Basilica  nux.  The  walnut. 

Basilica  vena.  The  large  vein  that  runs  in  the  in- 
ternal part  of  the  arm,  and  evacuates  its  blood  into  the 
axillary  veirT.  The  branch  which  crosses,  at  the  head 
of  the  arm,  to  join  this  vein,  is  called  the  basilic 
median.  They  may  either  of  them  be  opened  in  the 
operation  of  bloodletting. 

Basilicon.  See  Basilicum  unguentum. 

BASI'LICUM.  (From  paciXiKos,  royal ; so  called 
from  its  great  virtues.)  See  Ocimum  basilicum. 

Basilicum  unguentum.  Unguentum  basilicum 
Jlavum.  An  ointment  popularly  so  called  from  its 
having  the  ocimum  basilicum  in  its  composition.  It 
came  afterward  to  be  composed  of  wax,  resin,  «&c. 
and  is  now  called  ceratum  resince. 

BASILICUS.  (From  (iaoiXevs , a king.  See  Basi- 
lary.) Basilic. 

Basilicus  pulvis.  The  royal  powder.  A prepara- 
tion formerly  composed  of  calomel,  rhubarb,  and  jalap. 
Many  compositions  were,  by  the  ancients,  so  called, 
from  their  supposed  pre-eminence. 

Basili'dion.  An  itchy  ointment  was  formerly  so 
called  by  Galen. 

Ba'silis.  A name  formerly  given  to  collyriums  of 
supposed  virtues,  by  Galen. 

BASILI'SCUS.  (From  (iaaiXcvs,  a king.)  I.  The 
basilisk,  or  cockatrice,  a poisonous  serpent ; so  called 
from  a white  spot  upon  its  head,  which  resembles  a 
crown. 

2.  The  philosopher’s  stone. 

3.  Corrosive  sublimate. 

BASIO.  Some  muscles  so  have  the  first  part  of 
their  names,  because  they  originate  from  the  basilary 
process  of  the  occipital  bone. 

Basio-cerato-chondro-glossus.  See  Hyoglossus. 

Basio-glossum.  See  Hyoglossus. 

Basio-pkaryng/EUS.  See  Constrictor  pharyngis 
medius. 

BA'SIS.  (From  (Jaiv or,  to  go : the  support  of  any 
thing,  upon  which  it  stands  or  goes.)  Base.  1.  This 
word  is  frequently  applied  anatomically  to  the  body  of 
any  part,  or  to  that  part  from  which  the  other  parts 
appear,  as  it  were,  to  proceed,  or  .by  which  they  are 
supporteu. 

2.  In  pharmacy  it  signifies  the  principal  ingredient. 

3.  In  chemistry,  usually  applied  to  alkalies,  earths, 
and  metallic  oxydes,  in  their  relations  to  the  acids  and 
salts.  It  is  sometimes  also  applied  to  the  particular 
constituents  of  an  acid  or  oxyde,  on  the  supposition 
that  the  substance  combined  with  the  oxygen,  &c.  is 
the  basis  of  the  compound  to  which  it  owes  its  parti- 
cular qualities.  This  notion  seems  unphilosophical, 
as  these  qualities  depend  as  much  on  the  state  of  com- 
bination as  on  the  nature  of  the  constituent. 

Basi  colica.  The  name  of  a medicine  in  Scribo- 
nius  Largus,  compounded  of  aromatics  and  honey. 

BASSORINE.  This  substance  is  extracted  from 
the  gum  resins  which  contain  it,  by  treating  them  suc- 
cessively with  water,  alkohol,  and  iether.  Bassorine 
being  insoluble  in  these  liquids,  remains  mixed  merely 
with  the  woody  particles,  from  which  it  is  easy  to 
separate  it,  by  repeated  washings  and  decantations : 
because  one  of  its  characteristic  properties  is  to  swell 
extremely  in  the  water  and  to  become  very  buoyant. 
This  substance  swells  up  in  cold  as  well  as  in  boiling 
water,  without  any  of  its  parts  dissolving.  It  is  solu- 
ble however  almost  completely  by  the  aid  of  heat,  in 
water  sharpened  with  nitric  or  muriatic  acid.  If 
after  concentrating  with  a gentle  heat  the  nitric  solu- 
tion, we  add  highly  rectified  alkohol,  there  results  a 
white  precipitate,  flocculent  and  bulky,  which,  washed 
with  much  alkohol  and  dried,  does  not  form,  at  the 
utmost,  the  tenth  of  the  quantity  of  bassorine  em- 
ployed, and  which  presents  all  the  properties  of  eum- 
arabic.  Vavquelin , Bulletin  de  Pharmacir,  iii  56. 

BASTARD.  A term  often  employed  in  medicine, 
and  botany,  to  designate  a disease  or  plant  which  has 
the  appearance  of,  but  is  not  in  reality  what  it  resent 


120 


hies : The  name  of  that  which  it  similates  is  generally 
attached  to  it,  as  bastard  peripneumony,  bastard  pel- 
litory,  &c. 

Bastard  pellitory.  See  Achilla  a ptarmica. 

Bastard  pleurisy.  See  Peripneumonia  notha. 

Bata'tas.  (So  the  natives  of  Peru  call  the  root  of 
a convolvulus  falso.  The  potato,  which  is  a native 
of  that  country.  See  Solanum  tuberosum , and  Con- 
volvulus batatas. 

[The  Solanum  tuberosum  is  the  common  potato, 
from  which  all  the  edible  varieties  are  derived  The 
Convolvulus  batatas  is  the  Carolina  or  sweet  potato 
of  the  United  States.  A.] 

Batatas  peregrina.  The  purging  potato. 

BATH.  BaAavstov  Balneum.  A bath. 

1.  A convenient  receptacle  of  water,  for  persons  to 
wash  or  plunge  in,  either  for  health  or  pleasure.  These 
are  distinguished  into  hot  and  cold ; and  are  either 
natural  or  artificial.  The  natural  hot  baths  are  formed 
>f  the  water  of  hot  springs,  of  which  there  are  many 
in  different  parts  of  the  world ; especially  in  those 
countries  where  there  are,  or  have  evidently  been, 
volcanoes.  The  artificial  hot  baths  consist  either  of 
water,  or  of  some  other  fluid,  made  hot  by  art.  The 
cold  bath  consists  of  water,  either  fresh  or  salt,  in  its 
natural  degree  of  heat ; or  it  may  be  made  colder  by 
art,  as  by  a mixture  of  nitre,  sal-ammoniac,  &c.  The 
chief  hot  baths  in  our  country  are  those  of  Bath  and 
Bristol,  and  those  of  Buxton  and  Matlock ; which  lat- 
ter, however,  are  rather  warm,  or  tepid,  than  hot.  The 
use  of  baths  is  found  to  be  beneficial  in  diseases  of 
the  head,  as  palsies,  &c.;  in  cuticular  diseases,  as 
leprosies,  &c. ; obstructions  and  constipations  of  the 
bowels,  the  scurvy,  and  stone  ; and  in  many  diseases 
of  women  and  children.  The  cold  hath,  though  popu- 
larly esteemed  one  of  the  most  innocent  remedies  yet 
discovered,  is  not,  however,  to  be  adopted  indiscrimi- 
nately. On  the  contrary,  it  is  liable  to  do  considerable 
mischief  in  some  cases  of  diseased  viscera,  and  is  not, 
in  any  case,  proper  to  be  used  during  the  existence  of 
costiveness.  As  a preventive  remedy  for  the  young, 
and  as  a general  bracer  for  persons  of  a relaxed  fibre, 
especially  of  the  female  sex,  it  often  proves  highly 
advantageous ; and,  in  general,  the  popular  idea  is 
A correct  one,  that  the  glow  which  succeeds  the  use  of 
cold  or  temperate  bath,  is  a test  of  their  utility ; while, 
on  the  other  hand,  their  producing  chilliness , head- 
ache, &c.  is  a proof  of  their  being  pernicious. 

1.  The  Cold  Bath.  The  diseases  and  morbid  symp- 
toms, for  which  the  cold  bath,  under  one  form  or 
another,  may  be  applied  with  advantage,  are  very 
numerous ; and  some  of  them  deserve  particular  atten- 
tion. One  of  the  most  important  of  its  uses  is  in  ar- 
dent fever;  and,  under  proper  management,  it  forms  a 
highly  valuable  remedy  in  this  dangerous  disorder.  It 
is  highly  important,  however,  to  attend  to  the  precau- 
tions which  the  use  of  this  vigorous  remedial  process 
requires.  “Affusion  with  cold  water,”  Dr.  Currie  ob- 
serves, “ may  be  used  whenever  the  heat  of  the  body 
is  steadily  above  the  natural  standard,  when  there  is 
no  sense  of  chilliness,  and  especially  when  there  is  no 
general  nor  profuse  perspiration.  If  used  during  the 
cold  stage  of  a fever,  even  though  the  heat  be  higher 
than  natural,  it  brings  on  interruption  of  respiration,  a 
fluttering,  weak,  and  extremely  quick  pulse,  and  cer- 
tainly might  be  carried  so  far  as  to  extinguish  anima- 
tion entirely,”  The  most  salutary  consequence  which 
follows  the  proper  use  of  this  powerful  remedy,  is  the 
production  of  free  and  general  perspiration.  It  is  this 
circumstance  that  appears  to  give  so  much  advantage 
to  a general  affusion  of  cold  water  in  fevers,  in  prefer- 
ence to  any  partial  application.  The  cold  bath  is  bet- 
ter known,  especially  in  this  country,  as  a general  tonic 
remedy  in  various  chronic  diseases.  The  general  cir- 
cumstances of  disorder  for  which  cold  bathing  appears 
to  be  of  service,  according  to  Dr.  Saunders,  are  a lan- 
gour  and  weakness  of  circulation,  accompanied  with 
profuse  sweating  and  fatigue,  on  very  moderate  exer- 
tion ; tremors  in  the  limbs,  and  many  of  those  symp- 
toms usually  called  nervous;  where  the  moving  pow- 
ers are  weak,  and  the  mind  listless  and  indolent;  but, 
at  the  same  time,  where  no  permanent  morbid  ob- 
struction, or  visceral  disease,  is  present.  Such  a state 
of  body  is  often  the  consequence  of  a long  and  debili- 
tating sickness,  or  of  a sedentary  life,  without  using 
the  exercise  requisite  to  keep  up  the  activity  of  the 
■bodily  powers.  In  all  these  cases,  the  great  object  to 


be  fulfilled,  is  to  produce  a considerable  reaction,  from 
the  shock  of  cold  water,  at  the  expense  of  as  little 
heat  as  possible  ; and  when  cold  bathing  does  barm, 
it  is  precisely  where  the  powers  of  the  body  are  too 
languid  to  bring  on  reaction,  and  the  chilling  effects 
remain  unopposed.  When  the  patient  feels  the  shock 
of  immersion  very  severely,  and,  from  experience  of 
its  pain,  has  acquired  an  insuperable  dread  of  this 
application ; when  he  has  felt  little  or  no  friendly  glow 
to  succeed  the  first  shock,  but  on  coming  out  of  the 
bath  remains  cold,  shivering,  sick  at  the  stomach,  op- 
pressed with  headache,  languid,  drowsy,  and  listless, 
and  averse  to  food  and  exercise  during  the  whole  of 
the  day,  we  may  be  sure  that  the  bath  has  been  too 
cold,  the  shock  too  severe,  and  no  reaction  produced  at 
all  adequate  to  the  impression  on  the  surface  of  the 
body. 

There  is  a kind  of  slow,  irregular  fever,  or  rather 
febricula,  in  which  Dr.  Saunders  has  often  found  the 
cold  bath  of  singular  service.  This  disorder  princi- 
pally affects  persons  naturally  of  a sound  constitution, 
but  who  lead  a sedentary  life,  and  at  the  same  time 
are  employed  in  some  occupation  which  6trongly  en- 
gages their  attention,  requires  much  exertion  of 
thought,  and  excites  a degree  of  anxiety.  Such  persons 
have  constantly  a pulse  rather  quicker  than  natural, 
hot  hands,  restless  nights,  and  an  impaired  appetite, 
but  without  any  considerable  derangement  in  the  di- 
gestive organs.  This  disorder  will  continue  for  a long 
time  in  an  irregular  way,  never  entirely  preventing 
their  ordinary  occupation,  but  rendering  it  more  than 
usually  anxious  and  fatiguing,  and  often  preparing  the 
way  for  confirmed  hypochondriasis.  Persons  in  this 
situation  are  remarkably  relieved  by  the  cold  bath, 
and,  for  the  most  part,  bear  it  well ; and  its  use  shsuld 
also,  if  possible,  be  aided  by  that  relaxation  from  busi- 
ness, and  that  diversion  of  the  mind  from  its  ordinary 
train  of  thinking,  which  are  obtained  by  attending  a 
watering  place.  The  Doctor  also  found  cold  bathing 
hurtful  in  chlorosis,  and  observes,  that  it  is  seldom  ad- 
visable in  those  cases  of  disease  in  the  stomach  which 
are  brought  on  by  high  living,  and  constitute  what  may 
be  termed  the  true  dyspepsia. 

The  topical  application  of  cold  water,  or  of  a cold 
saturnine  lotion,  in  cases  of  local  inflammation,  has 
become  an  established  practice ; the  efficacy  of  which 
is  daily  experienced.  Burns  of  every  description  will 
bear  a most  liberal  use  of  cold  water,  or  even  of  ice : 
and  this  may  be  applied  to  a very  extensive  inflamed 
surface,  without  even  producing  the  ordinary  effects 
of  general  chilling,  which  would  be  brought  on  from 
the  same  application  to  a sound  and  healthy  skin. 
Another  very  distressing  symptom,  remarkably  relieved 
by  cold  water,  topically  applied,  is  that  intolerable 
itching  in  the  vagina,  which  women  sometimes  expe- 
rience, entirely  unconnected  with  any  general  cause, 
and  w'hich  appears  to  be  a kind  of  herpes  confined  to 
that  part.  Cold  water  has  also  been  used  topically  in 
the  various  cases  of  strains,  bruises,  and  similar  inju- 
ries, in  tentinous  and  ligamentous  parts,  with  success , 
also  in  rigidity  of  muscles,  that  have  been  long  kept  at 
rest,  in  order  to  favour  the  union  of  bone,  where  there 
appears  to  have  been  no  organic  injury,  but  only  a de- 
ficiency of  nervous  energy,  and  in  mobility  of  parts,  or' 
at  most,  only  slight  adhesions,  which  would  give  way 
to  regular  exercise  of  the  weakened  limb.  Another 
very  striking  instance  of  the  powerful  effects  of  topical 
cold,  in  stimulating  a part  to  action,  is  shown  in  the 
use  of  cold,  or  even  iced  water,  to  the  vagina  of  per- 
turient  women,  during  the  dangerous  haemorrhages 
that  take  place  from  the  uterus,  on  the  partial  separa- 
tion of  the  placenta. 

2.  The  Shower  Bath.  A species  of  cold  bath.  A 
modern  invention,  in  which  the  water  falls  through 
numerous  apertures  on  the  body.  A proper  apparatus 
for  this  purpose  is  to  be  obtained  at  the  shops.  The 
use  of  the  shower  bath  applies,  in  every  case,  to  the 
same  purposes  as  the  cold  bath,  and  is  often  attended 
with  particular  advantages.  1.  From  the  sudden  con- 
tact.of  the  water,  which,  in  the  common  cold  bath,  is 
only  momentary,  but  which,  in  the  shower  bath,  may 
be  prolonged,  repeated,  and  modified,  at  pleasure; 
and,  secondly,  from  the  head  and  breast,  which  are 
exposed  to  some  inconvenience  and  danger  in  the 
common  bath,  being  here  effectually  secured,  by  re- 
ceiving the  first  shock  of  the  water. 

3.  The  Tepid  Bath  The  range  of  temperature, 

121 


BAT 


BAT 


from  the  lowest  degree  of  the  hot  bath  to  the  highest 
of  the  cold  bath,  forms  what  may  be  termed  the  tepid. 
In  general,  the  heat  of  water  which  we  should  term 
tepid,  is  about  90  deg.  In  a medicinal  point  of  view, 
it  produces  the  greatest  effect  in  ardent  fever,  where 
the  temperature  is  little  above  that  of  health,  but  the 
powers  of  the  body  weak,  not  able  to  bear  the  vigor- 
ous application  of  cold  immersion.  In  cutaneous  dis- 
eases, a tepid  bath  is  often  quite  sufficient  to  produce 
a salutary  relaxation,  and  perspirability  of  the  skin. 

4.  The  Hot  Bath.  From  93  to  9<i  deg.  of  Fahrenheit, 
the  hot  bath  has  a peculiar  tendency  to  bring  on  a 
State  of  repose,  to  alleviate  any  local  irritation,  and 
thereby  induce  sleep.  It  is,  upon  the  whole,  a safer 
remedy  than  the  cold  bath,  and  more  peculiarly  appli- 
cable to  very  weak  and  irritable  constitutions,  whom 
the  shock  produced  by  cold  immersion  would  over- 
power, and  who  have  not  sufficient  vigour  of  circulation 
for  an  adequate  reaction.  In  cases  of  topical  inflam- 
mation, connected  with  a phlogistic  state  of  body, 
preceded  by  rigour  and  general  fever,  and  where  the 
local  formation  of  matter  is  the  solution  of  the  general 
inflammatory  symptoms,  experience  directs  us  to  the 
use  of  the  warm  relaxing  applications,  rather  than 
those  which,  by  exciting  a general  reaction,  would  in- 
crease the  local  complaint.  This  object  is  particularly 
to  be  consulted  when  the  part  affected  is  one  that  is 
essential  to  life.  Hence  it  is  that  in  fever,  where  there 
is  a great  determination  to  the  lungs,  and  the  respi- 
ration appears  to  be  locally  affected,  independently  of 
the  oppression  produced  by  mere  febrile  increase  of 
circulation,  practitioners  have  avoided  the  external 
use  of  cold,  in  order'  to  promote  the  solution  of  the 
fever;  and  have  trusted  to  the  general  antiphlogistic 
treatment,  along  with  the  topically  relaxing  applica- 
tion of  warm  vapour,  inhaled  by  the  lungs.  Warm 
bathing  appears  to  be  peculiarly  well  calculated  to  re- 
lieve those  complaints  that  seem  to  depend  on  an  irre- 
gular or  diminished  action  of  any  part  of  the  aliment- 
ary canal;  and  the  state  of  the  skin,  produced  by 
immersion  in  warm  water,  seems  highly  favourable  to 
the  healthy  action  of  the  stomach  and  bowels.  Ano- 
ther very  important  use  of  the  warm  bath,  is  in  her- 
petic eruptions,  by  relaxing  the  skin,  and  rendering  it 
more  pervious,  and  preparing  it  admirably  for  receiv- 
ing the  stimulant  hpplications  of  tar  ointment,  mercu- 
rials, and  the  like,  that  are  intended  to  restore  it  to  a 
healthy  state.  The  constitutions  of  children  seem 
more  extensively  relieved  by  the  warm  bath  than  those 
of  adults;  and  this  remedy  seems  more  generally  ap- 
plicable to  acute  fevers  in  them  than  in  persons  of  a 
more  advanced  qge.  Where  the  warm  bath  produces 
its  salutary  operation,  it  is  almost  always  followed  by 
an  easy  and  profound  sleep.  Dr.  Saunders  strongly 
recommends  the  use  of  the  tepid  bath,  or  even  one  of 
a higher  temperature,  in  the  true  menorrhagia  of  fe- 
males. In  paralytic  affections  of  particular  parts,  the 
powerful  stimulus  of  heated  water  is  generally  allowed ; 
and  in  these  cases,  the  effect  may  be  assisted  by  any 
thing  which  will  increase  the  stimulating  properties 
of  the  water;  as,  for  instance,  by  the  addition  of  salt. 
In  these  cases,  much  benefit  may  be  expected  from  the 
use  of  warm  sea-baths.  The  application  of  the  warm 
bath  topically,  as  in  pediluvia,  or  fomentations  to  the 
feet,  often  produces  the  most  powerful  effects  in  qui- 
eting irritations  in  fever,  and  bringing  on  a sound  and 
refreshing  repose.  The  cases  in  which  the  warm  bath 
is  likely  to  be  attended  with  danger,  are  particularly 
those  where  there  exists  a strong  tendency  to  a deter- 
mination of  blood  to  the  head;  and  apoplexy  has 
sometimes  been  thus  brought  on.  The  lowest  temper- 
ature will  be  required  for  cutaneous  complaints,  and 
to  bring  on  relaxation  in  the  skin,  during  febrile  irrita- 
tion; the  warmer  will  be  necessary  in  paralysis : more 
heat  should  be  employed  on  a deep-seated  part  than 
one  that  is  superficial. 

5.  The  Vapour  Bath.  The  vapour  bath,  called  also 
Balneum  laconicum , though  not  much  employed  in 
England,  forms  a valuable  remedy  in  a variety  of 
cases.  In  most  of  the  hot  natural  waters  on  the  Con- 
tinent, the  vapour  bath  forms  a regular  part  of  the 
bathing  apparatus,  and  is  there  highly  valued.  In  no 
country,  however,  is  this  application  carried  to  so 
great  an  extent  as  in  Russia,  where  it  forms  the  prin- 
cipal and  almost  daily  luxury  of  all  the  people,  in  every 
rank  ; and  it  is  employed  as  a sovereign  remedy  for  a 
great  variety  of  disorders.  The  Hon.  Mr.  Basil  Coch- 

122 


rane  has  lately  published  a Treatise  on  the  Vapour 
Bath,  from  which,  it  appears,  he  has  brought  the  ap- 
paratus to  such  perfection,  that  he  can  apply  it  to  all 
degrees  of  temperature,  partially  or  generally,  by 
shower,  or  by  steam,  with  a great  force  or  a small  one ; 
according  to  the  particular  circumstances  under  which 
patients  are  so  variously  placed,  who  require  such 
assistance.  See  Cochrane  on  Vapour  Baths.  Con- 
nected with  this  article,  is  the  air-pump  vapour  bath, 
a species  of  vapour  bath,  or  machine,  to  which  the  in- 
ventor has  given  this  name.  This  apparatus  has  been 
found  efficacious  in  removing  paroxysms  of  the  gout 
and  preventing  their  recurrence  ; in  acute  and  chronic 
rheumatism,  palsy,  cutaneous  diseases,  ulcers,  &c. 
It  has  also  been  proposed  in  chilblains,  leprosy,  yaws, 
tetanus,  amenorrhea,  and  dropsy. 

[The  vapour  bath  has  been  introduced  and  success- 
fully applied  in  many  cutaneous  and  other  diseases,  in 
the  city  of  New-York.  This  bath  may  be  either  aque- 
ous or  spirituous.  Its  immediate  effect  is  to  produce 
relaxation  of  the  skin  and  copious  perspiration.  It 
may  be  made  a medicated  bath  by  passing  the  steam 
or  vapour  through  a quantity  of  herbs,  before  it  is  ap- 
plied to  the  body  of  the  person  requiring  it.  A.] 

U.  Those  applications  are  called  dry  baths , which 
are  made  of  ashes,  salt,  sand,  &c.  The  ancients  had 
many  ways  of  exciting  a sweat,  by  means  of  a dry 
heat , as  by  tire  use  of  hot  sand,  stove  rooms,  or  arti- 
ficial bagnios ; and  even  from  certain  natural  hot 
steams  of  the  earth,  received  under  a proper-arch,  or 
hot-house,  as  we  learn  from  Celsus.  They  had  also 
another  kind  of  bath  by  insolation,  wliere  the  body 
was  exposed  to  the  sun  for  some  time,  in  order  to  draw 
forth  the  superfluous  moisture  from  the  inward  parts ; 
and  to  this  day  it  is  a practice,  in  some  nations,  to 
cover  the  body  over  with  horse-dung,  especially  in 
painful  chronic  diseases.  In  New-England,  they  make 
a kind  of  stove  of  turf,  wherein  the  sick  are  shut  up 
to  bathe,  or  sweat.  It  was  probably  from  a knowledge 
of  this  practice,  and  of  the  exploded  doctrines  of  Cei- 
sus,  that  the  noted  empiric  Dr.  Graham  drew  his 
notions  of  the  salutary  edects  of  what  he  called  earth 
bathing;  a practice  which,  in  the  way  he  used  it, 
consigned  some  of  his  patients  to  a perpetual  mansion 
under  the  ground.  The  like  name  of  dry  bath,  is 
sometimes  also  given  to  another  kind  of  bath,  made 
of  kindled  coals,  or  burning  spirit  of  wine.  The 
patient  being  placed  in  a convenient  close  chair,  for 
the  reception  of  the  fume,  which  rises  and  provokes 
sweat  in  a plentiful  manner  ; care  being  taken  to  keep 
the  head  out,  and  to  secure  respiration.  This  bath 
has  been  said  to  be  very  effectual  in  removing  old  ob- 
stinate pains  in  the  limbs. 

III.  Medicated  baths  are  such  as  are  saturated  with 
various  mineral,  vegetable,  or  sometimes  animal  sub- 
stances. Thus  we  have  sulphur  and  iron  baths,  aro- 
matic and  milk  baths.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that 
such  ingredients,  if  duly  mixed,  and  a proper  tempera- 
ture given  to  the  water,  inay,  in  certain  complaints, 
be  productive  of  effects  highly  beneficial.  Water,  im- 
pregnated with  sulphate  of  iron,  will  abound  with  the 
bracing  particles  of  that  metal,  and  may  be  useful  for 
strengthening  the  part  to  which  it  is  applied,  re-invi- 
gorating debilitated  limbs,  stopping  various  kinds  of 
bleeding,  restoring  the  menstrual  and  hremorrhoidal 
discharges  when  obstructed,  and,  in  short,  as  a substi- 
tute for  the  natural  iron  bath.  There  are  various 
other  medicated  baths,  such  as  those  prepared  with 
alum,  and  quick-lime,  sal-ammoniac,  &c.  by  boiling 
them  together,  or  separately,  in  pure  rain  water.  These 
have  long  been  reputed  as  eminently  serviceable  in 
paralytic,  and  all  other  diseases  arising  from  nervous 
and  muscular  debility. 

IV.  A term  in  chemistry,  when  the  vessels  in  which 
bodies  are  exposed  to  the  action  of  heat,  are  not  placed 
in  immediate  contact  with  the  fire,  hut  receive  the 
required  degree  of  heat  by  another  intermediate  body, 
such  apparatus  is  termed  a bath.  These  have  been 
variously  named,  as  dry,  vapour,  tec.  Modern  chemists 
distinguish  three  kinds : 

1.  Balneum  arciue , or  the  sand  bath.  This  consists 
merely  of  an  open  iron,  or  baked  clay  sand-pot,  whose 
bottom  is  mostly  convex,  and  exposed  to  the  lurnacc. 
Finely  sifted  sea-sand  is  put  into  this,  and  the  vessel 
containing  the  substance  to  be  heated,  tec.  in  the  sand 
bath,  immersed  in  tLe  middle. 

2.  Balneum  marice , or  tire  water  bath.  This  is  ver» 


BAT 


BAT 


ample,  and  requires  no  particular  apparatus.  The 
object  is  to  place  the  vessel  containing  the  substance 
to  be  heated,  in  another,  containing  water  ; which 
last  must  be  of  such  a nature  as  to  be  fitted  for  the 
application  of  fire,  as  a common  still,  or  kettle. 

3.  The  vapour  bath.  When  any  substance  is  heated 
by  the  steam,  or  vapour,  of  boiling  water,  chemists 
say  it  is  done  by  means  of  a vapour  bath. 

Bath  waters.  B athoniae  aquce ; Solis  aquae;  Badi- 
guee  aqua.  Bath  is  the  name  of  a city  in  Gloucester- 
shire, that  has  been  celebrated,  for  a long  series  of 
years,  for  its  numerous  hot  springs,  which  are  of  a 
higher  temperature  than  any  in  this  kingdom,  (from 
112°  to  116°,)  and,  indeed,  are  the  only  natural  waters 
which  we  possess  that  are  at  all  hot  to  the  touch ; all 
the  other  thermal  waters  being  of  a heat  below  the 
animal  temperature,  and  only  deserving  that  appella- 
tion from  being  invariably  warmer  than  the  general 
average  of  the  heat  of  common  springs.  By  the  erec- 
tion of  elegant  baths,  these  waters  are  particularly 
adapted  to  the  benefit  of  invalids,  who  find  here  a 
variety  of  establishments,  contributing  equally  to 
health,  convenience,  and  amusement.  There  are 
three  principal  springs  in  the  city  of  Bath,  namely, 
those  called  the  King's  Bath,  the  Cross  Bath , and  the 
Hot  Bath ; all  within  a short  distance  of  each  other, 
and  emptying  themselves  into  the  river  Avon,  after 
having  passed  through  the  several  baths.  Their  sup- 
ply is  so  copious,  that  all  the  large  reservoirs  used  for 
bathing  are  filled  every  evening  with  fre$h  water  from 
their  respective  fountains.  In  their  sensible  and  medi- 
cinal properties,  there  is  but  a slight  difference.  Ac- 
cording to  Dr.  Falconer,  the  former  are — 1.  That  the 
water,  when  newly  drawn,  appears  clear  and  colour- 
less, remains  perfectly  inactive,  without  bubbles,  or 
any  sign  of  briskness,  or  effervescence.  2.  After  being 
exposed  to  the  open  air  for  some  hours,  it  becomes 
rather  turbid,  by  the  separation  of  a pale  yellow,  ochery 
precipitate,  which  gradually  subsides.  3.  No  odour 
is  perceptible  from  a glass  of  the  fresh  water,  but  a 
slight  pungency  to  the  taste  from  a large  mass  of  it, 
when  fresh  drawn : which,  however,  is  neither  foetid 
nor  sulphureous.  4.  When  hot  from  the  pump,  it 
affects  the  mouth  with  a strong  chalybeate  impression, 
without  being  of  a saline  or  pungent  taste.  And, 
fifthly,  on  glowing  cord,  the  chalybeate  taste  is  entirely 
lost,  leaving  only  a very  slight  sensation  on  the  tongue, 
by  which  it  can  scarcely  be  distinguished  from  com- 
mon hard  spring-water.  The  temperature  of  the 
King’s  Bath  water,  which  is  usually  preferred  for 
drinking,  is,  when  fresh  drawn  in  the  glass,  above 
116° ; that  of  the  Cross  Bath,  112°.  But,  after  flow- 
ing into  the  spacious  bathing  vessels,  it  is  generally 
from  100°  to  J06°  in  the  hotter  baths,  and  from  92°  to 
94°  in  the  Cross  Bath ; a temperature  which  remains 
nearly  stationary,  and  is  greater  than  that  of  any  other 
natural  spring  in  Britain.  A small  quantity  of  gas  is 
also  disengaged  from  these  waters,  which  Dr.  Priestley 
first  discovered  to  contain  no  more  than  one-twentieth 
part  of  its  bulk  of  fixed  air,  or  carbonic  acid.  The 
chemical  properties  of  the  Bath  waters,  according  to 
the  most  accurate  analyzers,  Doctors  Lucas,  Falconer, 
and  Gibbs,  contain  so  small  a proportion  of  iron,  as 
to  amount  only  to  one-twentieth  or  one-thirty-eighth 
of  a grain  in  the  pint ; and,  according  to  Dr.  Gibbs, 
fifteen  grains  and  a quarter  of  siliceous  earth  in  the 
gallon.  Dr.  Saunders  estimates  a gallon  of  the  King’s 
Bath  water  to  contain  about  eight  cubic  inches  of  car- 
bonic acid,  and  a similar  quantity  of  air,  nearly  azotic, 
about  eighty  grains  of  solid  ingredients,  one-half  of 
which  probably  consists  of  sulphate  and  muriate  of 
soda,  fifteen  grains  and  a half  of  siliceous  earth,  and 
the  remainder  is  selenite,  carbonate  of  lime,  and  so 
small  a portion  of  oxyde  of  iron  as  to  be  scarcely  cal- 
culable. Hence  he  concludes,  that  the  King’s  Bath 
water  is  the  strongest  chalybeate  ; next  in  order,  the 
Hot  Bath  water ; and,  lastly,  that  of  the  Cross  Bath, 
which  contains  the  smallest  proportions  of  chalybeate, 
gaseous  and  saline,  but  considerably  more  of  the 
earthy  particles ; while  its  water,  in  the  pump,  is  also 
two  degrees  lower  than  that  of  the  others.  It  is  like- 
wise now  ascertained,  that  these  springs  do  not  exhibit 
the  slightest  traces  of  sulphur,  though  it  was  formerly 
believed,  and  erroneously  supported,  on  the  authority 
of  Dr.  Charleton,  that  the  subtile  aromatic  vapour  in 
the  Bath  waters,  was  a sulphureous  principle  entirely 
-similar  to  common  biimstone. 


With  regard  to  the  effect  of  the  Bath  waters  on  the 
human  system,  independent  of  their  specific  properties, 
as  a medicinal  remedy  not  to  be  imitated  completely 
by  any  chemical  process,  Dr.  Saunders  attributes 
much  of  their  salubrious  influence  to  the  natural 
degreemf  warmth  peculiar  to  these  springs,  which,  for 
ages,  have  preserved  an  admirable  degree  of  uniformity 
of  temperature.  He  thinks  too,  that  one  of  their  most 
important  uses  is  that  of  an  external  application,  yet 
supposes  that,  in  this  respect,  they  differ  little  from 
common  water,  when  heated  to  the  same  temperature, 
and  applied  under  similar  circumstances. 

According  to  Dr.  Falconer,  the  Bath  water,  when 
drunk  fresh  from  the  spring,  generally  raises,  or  rathe$ 
accelerates  the  pulse,  increases  the  heat,  and  promoted 
the  different  secretions.  These  symptoms  in  most 
cases,  become  perceptible  soon  after  drinking  it,  and 
will  sometimes  continue  for  a considerable  time.  It 
is,  however,  remarkable,  that  they  are  only  produced 
in  invalids.  Hence  we  may  conclude,  that  these 
waters  not  only  possess  heating  properties,  but  their 
internal  use  is  likewise  attended  with  a peculiar  stimu- 
lus, acting  more  immediately  on  the  nerves. 

One  of  the  most  salutary  effects  of  the  Bath  water, 
consists  in  its  action  on  the  urinary  organs,  even  when 
taken  in  moderate  doses.  Its  operation  on  the  bowels 
varies  in  different  individuals,  like  that  of  all  other 
waters,  which  do  not  contain  any  cathartic  salt ; but, 
in  general,  it  is  productive  of  costiveness : an  effect 
resulting  from  the  want  of  an  active  stimulus  to  the 
intestines,  and  probably  also  from  the  determination 
this  water  occasions  to  the  skin,  more  than  from  any 
astringency  which  it  may  possess ; for,  if  perspiration 
be  suddenly  checked  during  the  use  of  it,  a diarrhoea 
is  sometimes  the  consequence.  Hence  it  appears  that 
its  stimulant  powers  are  primarily,  and  more  particu- 
larly exerted  in  the  stomach,  where  it  produces  a 
variety  of  symptoms,  sometimes  slight  and  transient, 
but,  occasionally,  so  considerable  and  permanent,  as 
to  require  it  to  be  discontinued.  In  those  individuals 
with  whom  it  is  likely  to  agree,  and  prove  beneficial, 
the  Bath  waters  excite,  at  first,  an  agreeable  glowing 
sensation  in  the  stomach,  which  is  speedily  followed 
by  an  increase  both  of  appetite  aud  spirits,  as  well  as 
a quick  secretion  of  urine.  In  others,  when  the  use 
of  them  is  attended  with  headache,  thirst,  and  constant 
dryness  of  the  tongue,  heaviness,  loathing  of  the  sto- 
mach, and  sickness;  or  if  they  are  not  evacuated, 
either  by  urine  or  an  increased  perspiration,  it  may 
be  justly  inferred  that  their  further  continuance  is  im- 
proper. 

The  diseases  for  which  these  celebrated  waters  are 
resorted  to,  are  very  numerous,  and  are  some  of  the 
most  important  and  difficult  to  cure  of  all  that  come 
under  medical  treatment.  In  most  of  them,  the  bath 
is  used  along  with  the  waters,  as  an  internal  medicine. 
The  general  indications,  of  the  propriety  of  using  this 
medicinal  water,  are  in  those  cases  where  a gentle, 
gradual,  and  permanent  stimulus,  is  required.  Bath 
water  may  certainly  be  considered  as  a chalybeate,  in 
which  the  iron  is  very  small  in  quantity,  but  in  a highly 
active  form;  and  the  degree  of  temperature  is  in  itself 
a stimulus,  often  of  considerable  powers.  These  cir- 
cumstances again  point  out  the  necessity  of  certain 
cautions,  which,  from  a view  of  the  mere  quantity  of 
foreign  contents,  might  be  thought  superfluous.  Al- 
though, in  estimating  the  powers  of  this  medicine, 
allowance  must  be  made  for  local  prejudice  in  its 
favour,  there  can  be  no  doubt  but  that  its  employment 
is  hazardous,  and  might  often  do  considerable  mischief, 
in  various  cases  of  active  inflammation,  especially  in 
irritable  habits,  where  there  exists  a strong  tendency 
to  hectic  fever ; and  even  in  the  less  inflammatory 
state  of  diseased  and  suppurating  viscera;  and,  in 
general,  wherever  a quick  pulse  and  dry  tongue  indi- 
cate a degree  of  general  fever.  The  cases,  therefore, 
to  which  this  water  are  peculiarly  suited,  are  mostly 
of  the  chronic -kind  ; and  by  a steady  perseverance  in 
this  remedy,  very  obstinate  disorders  have  given  way. 
The  following,  Dr.  Saunders,  in  his  Treatise  on  Mine- 
ral Waters,  considers  as  the  principal,  viz.  1.  Chlorosis, 
a disease  which,  at  all  times,  is  much  relieved  by 
steel,  and  will  bear  it,  even  where  there  is  a consider- 
able degree  of  feverish  irritation,  receives  particular 
benefit  from  the  bathwater;  and  its  use,  as  a warm 
bath,  excellently  contributes  to  remove  that  languor  of 
circulation,  and  obstruction  of  the  natural  evacuations, 

123 


BAT 


Which  constitute  the  leading  features  of  this  common 
and  troublesome  disorder.  2.  The  complicated  dis- 
eases, which  are  often  brought  on  by  a long  residence 
in  hot  climates,  affecting  the  secretion  of  bile,  the 
functions  of  the  stomach,  and  alimentary  canal,  and 
which  generally  produce  organic  derangement  in  some 
part  of  the  hepatic  system,  often  receive  much  benefit 
from  the  bath  water,  if  used  at  a time  when  suppu- 
rative inflammation  is  not  actually  present.  3.  An- 
other and  less  active  disease  of  the  biliary  organs,  the 
jaundice,  which  arises  from  a simple  obstruction  cf 
the  gall-ducts,  is  still  oftener  removed  by  both  the  in- 
ternal and  external  use  of  these  waters.  4.  In  rheu- 
matic complaints,  the  power  of  this  water,  as  Dr. 
Charleton  well  observes,  is  chiefly  confined  to  that 
species  of  rheumatism  which  is  unattended  with  in- 
flammation, or  in  which  the  patient’s  pains  are  not 
increased  by  the  warmth  of  his  bed  A great  number 
of  the  patients  that  resort  to  Bath,  especially  those  that 
are  admitted  into  the  hospital,  are  affected  with  rheu- 
matism in  all  its  stages  ; and  it  appears,  from  the  most 
respectable  testimony,  that  a large  proportion  of  them 
receive  a permanent  cure.  (See  Falconer  on  Bath 
Water  in  Rheumatic  Cases.)  5.  In  gout,  the  greatest 
benefit  is  derived  from  this  water,  in  those  cases  where 
it  produces  anomalous  affections  of  the  head,  stomach, 
and  bowels;  and  it  is  here  a principal  advantage  to  be 
able  to  bring,  by  warmth,  that  active  local  inflamma- 
tion in  any  limb,  which  relieves  all  the  other  trouble- 
some and  dangerous  symptoms.  Hence  it  is  that  Bath 
water  is  commonly  said  to  produce  the  gout ; by 
which  is  only  meant  that,  where  persons  have  a gouty 
affection,  shifting  from  place  to  place,  and  thereby 
much  disordering  the  system,  the  internal  and  external 
use  of  the  hath  water  will  soon  bring  on  a general  in- 
crease of  action,  indicated  by  a flushing  in  the  face, 
fulness  in  the  circulating  vessels,  and  relief  of  the 
dyspeptic  symptoms;  and  the  whole  disorder  will  ter- 
minate in  a regular  fit  of  the  gout  in  the  extremities, 
which  is  the  crisis  always  to  be  wished  for.  6.  The 
colica  pictonum,  and  the  paralysis  or  ioss  of  nervous 
power  in  particular  limbs,  which  is  one  of  its  most  se- 
rious consequences,  is  found  to  be  peculiarly  relieved 
by  the  use  of  the  Bath  waters,  more  especially  when 
applied  externally,  either  generally,  or  upon  the  part 
affected. 

The  quantity  of  water  taken  daily,  during  a full 
course,  and  by  adults,  is  recommended  by  Dr.  Falconer, 
not  to  exceed  a pint  and  a half,  or  two  pints ; and  in 
chlorosis,  with  irritable  habits,  not  more  than  one  pint 
is  employed  ; and  when  the  bath  is  made  use  of,  it  is 
generally  two  or  three  times  a week,  in  the  morning. 
The  Bath  waters  require  a considerable  time  to  be  per- 
severed in,  before  a full  and  fair  trial  can  be  made. 
Chronic  rheumatism,  habitual  gout,  dyspepsia,  from  a 
long  course  of  high  and  intemperate  living,  and  the 
like,  are  disorders  not  to  be  removed  by  a short  course 
of  any  mineral  water,  and  many  of  those  who  have 
once  received  benefit  at.  the  fountains,  find  it  necessary 
to  make  an  annual  visit  to  them,  to  repair  the  waste 
>n  health  during  the  preceding  year. 

Bath,  cauteres.  A sulphureous  bath  near  Barege, 
which  raises  the  mercury  in  Fahrenheit’s  thermometer 
to  1310. 

Bath,  St.  Saviour’s.  A sulphureous  and  alkaline 
bath,  in  the  valley  adjoining  Barege,  the  latter  of 
which  raises  Fahrenheit’s  thermometer  as  high  as 
131°.  It  is  much  resorted  to  from  the  South  of  France, 
and  used  chiefly  externally,  as  a simple  thermal  water. 

Bath , cold.  See  Bath. 

Bath , hyt.  See  Bath. 

Bath , tepid.  See  Bath. 

Bath , vapour.  See  Bath. 

Ba'thmis.  (From  /faivw,  to  enter.)  Bathmus. 
The  seat,  or  base ; the  cavity  of  a bone,  with  the  pro- 
tuberance of  another,  particularly  those  at  the  articu- 
lation of  the  humerus  and  ulna,  according  to  Hippo- 
crates and  Galen. 

Batho'nijE  aquje.  See  Bath  waters. 

Ba'thron.  (From  /fatvw,  to  enter.)  Bathrum. 
The  same  as  bathmis;  also  an  instrument  used  in  the 
extension  of  fractured  limbs,  called  scamnum. — Hip- 
pocrates. It  is  described  by  Oribasius  and  Scultetus. 

Ba  tia.  A retort.  Obsolete. 

Bati’  non-moron.  (From  /faros,  a bramble,  and 
popov , a raspberry.)  The  raspberry. 

Batra'chium.  (From  (3arpaxos,  a frog;  so  called 
124 


BAY 

from  its  likeness  to  a frog.)  The  herb  crow’s  foot,  or 
ranunculus. 

BA'TRACIIUS.  (From  (Sarpaxos,  a frog ; so  called 
because  they  who  are  infected  with  it  croak  like  a 
frog.)  An  inflammatory  tumour  under  the  tongue. 

See  Ranula. 

[Batrachian.  Batrachian  animals.  A term  used  in 
natural  history,  intended  to  include  all  animals  of  the 
frog,  toad,  or  lizard  kind.  A.] 

Battari'smus.  (From  Barros,  a Cyreneean  prince 
who  stammered.)  Stammering  ; a defect  in  pronun- 
ciation. See  Psellismus. 

Batta'ta  virginiana.  See  Batatas,  and  Convol- 
vulus batatas. 

Batta'ta  peregrina.  The  cathartic  potato;  per- 
haps a species  of  ipomwa.  If  about  two  ounces  of 
them  are  eaten  at  bed-time,  they  greatly  move  the 
belly  the  next  morning. 

BATTIE,  William,  was  born  in  Devonshire,  in 
1704.  He  graduated  at  Cambridge,  and  after  prac- 
tising some  years  successfully  at  Uxbridge,  settled  in 
London,  and  became  a fellow  of  the  College  of  Phy- 
sicians, as  well  as  of  the  Royal  Society.  The  insuf- 
ficiency of  Bethlehem  hospital  to  receive  all  the  indi- 
gent objects  labouring  under  insanity  in  this  metropolis, 
naturally  led  to  the  establishment  of  another  similar 
institution  ; and  Dr.  Battie  having  been  very  active  in 
promoting  the  subscription  for  that  purpose,  he  was 
appointed  physician  to  the  new  institution,  which  was 
called  St.  Luke’s  Hospital,  then  situated  on  the  north 
side  of  Moorfields.  In  1757  he  published  a treatise  on 
madness;  and  a few  years  after,  having  exposed  be- 
fore the  House  of  Commons  the  abuses  often  com- 
mitted in  private  mad  houses,  they  became  the  subject 
of  legislative  interference,  and  were  at  length  piaced 
under  the  control  of  the  College  of  Physicians,  and 
the  magistrates  in  the  country.  He  died  at  the 
age  of  72. 

BAUHTN,  John,  was  born  at  Lyons,  in  1541.  Being 
greatly  attached  to  botany,  he  accompanied  the  cele 
brated  Gesner  in  his  travels  through  several  countries 
of  Europe,  and  collected  abundant  materials  for  his 
principal  work,  the  “Historia  Plantarum,”  which  con- 
tributed greatly  to  the  improvement  of  his  favourite 
science.  He  was,  at  the  age  of  32,  appointed  phy- 
sician to  the  duke  of  Wirtemberg,  and  died  in  1613. 
A Treatise  on  Mineral  Waters,  and  some  other  pub- 
lications by  him  also  remain. 

BAUHIN,  Gaspard,  was  brother  to  the  preceding, 
but  younger  by  20  years.  He  graduated  at  Basle,  after 
studying  at  several  universities,  and  was  chosen  Greek 
professor  at  the  early  age  of  22 : afterward  professor 
of  anatomy  and  botany  ; then  of  medicine,  with  other 
distinguished  honours,  which  he  retained  till  his  death 
in  1624.  Besides  the  plants  collected  by  himself,  he 
received  material  assistance  from  his  pupils  and 
friends,  and  was  .enabled  to  add  considerably  to  the 
knowledge  of  botany ; on  which  subject,  as  well  as 
anatomy,  he  has  left  numerous  publications.  Among 
other  anatomical  improvements,  he  claims  the  disco- 
very of  the  valve  of  the  colon.  His  “ Pinax”  contains 
the  names  of  six  thousand  plants  mentioned  by  the 
ancients,  tolerably  well  arranged ; and  being  continu- 
ally referred  to  by  Linnaeus,  must  long  retain  its  value. 

B AULMONEY.  See  JBthusa  meurn. 

BAUME,  Anthony,  an  apothecary,  born  at  Senlis, 
in  1728.  He  distinguished  himself  at  an  early  age  by 
his  skill  in  chemistry  and  pharmacy  : and  was  atter- 
ward  admitted  a member  of  the  Royal  Academy  of 
Sciences  of  Paris.  He  also  gave  lectures  on  chemistry 
for  several  years  with  great  credit.  Among  other 
works,  he  published  “ Elements  of  Pharmacy,”  and 
a “ Manual  of  Chemistry,”  which  met  with  consider- 
able approbation ; also  a d tailed  account  of  the  dif- 
ferent kinds  of  soil,  and  the  method  of  improving  them 
for  the  purposes  of  agriculture. 

Baxa'na.  (Indian ) Rabuxit.  A poisonous  tree 
growing  near  Ormuz. 

BAY.  A name  of  several  articles ; as  bay-cherry, 
bay-leaf,  bay-salt,  &c. 

Bay-cherry.  See  Prunus  Lauro-cerasus. 

Bay-leaves.  See  Laurus. 

Bay-leaved  Passion-flower.  See  Passiflora  lauri- 
folin. 

Bay-salt.  A very  pure  salt,  prepared  from  sea 
water  by  spontaneous  evaporation. 

[BAYLEY,  Dr.  Richard,  a celebrated  surgeon  and 


BEC 


BEE 


Eractitioner  in  the  city  of  New- York.  Dr.  Bayley  was 
orn  at  Fairfield,  Connecticut,  in  the  year  1745.  His 
father  was  of  English,  and  his  mother  of  French,  de- 
scent. After  returning  from  London,  where  he  studied 
anatomy  under  Dr.  John  Hunter,  he  commenced  prac- 
tice in  connexion  with  Dr.  Charleton  of  New-York, 
with  whom  he  had  previously  studied.  At  that  lime  the 
croup  (cynanche  trachealis)  was  confounded  with  the 
angina  maligna,  or  putrid  sore  throat,  and  both  treated 
with  stimulants.  Dr.  Bayley  was  the  first  to  point  out 
the  difference,  and  demonstrate  that  the  croup  was  an 
inflammatory  disease,  and  required  a different  treat- 
ment. 

“In  the  year  1782,  he  successfully  removed  the  arm 
from  its  glenoid  cavity  by  the  operation  at  the  shoulder 
joint;  an  operation  at  which  Dr.  Wright  Post,  then  a 
student,  assisted ; and  which,  as  far  as  it  has  been  in 
our  power  to  examine,  is  the  first  instance  of  its  being 
practised  in  the  United  States.”  His  surgical  skill  was 
often  displayed  in  operations  upon  the  eye.  With  Dr. 
Bard  and  others,  he  was  one  of  the  earliest  promoters 
of  the  New  York  City  Dispensary.  In  1797,  he  pub- 
lished his  work  on  yellow  fever,  in  which  he  advocates 
the  opinion  of  its  local  origin  and  noncontagiousness. 
He  afterward,  white  health  officer  of  the  port  of  New- 
York,  published  a series  of  letters  on  the  same  subject, 
addressed  to  the  New-York  common  council,  or  cor- 
poration of  the  city.  He  died  in  August,  1801,  “ leaving 
behind  him  a high  character  as  a clinically  instructed 
physician,  an  excellent  and  bold  operator,  a prompt 
practitioner,  of  rapid  diagnosis,  and  unhesitating  de- 
cision.”— See  Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.J 
Bde'lla.  (From  /?<5aAAw,  to  suck.)  Bdellerum. 
A horse-leech. 

BDE  LLIUM.  (From  bedallah,  Arab.)  Adrabolon  ; 
Madeleon ; Bolchon;  Balchus.  Called  by  the  Ara- 
bians, Mokcl.  A gum  resin,  like  very  impure  myrrh. 
The  best  bdellium  is  of  a yellowish-brown,  or  dark- 
brown  colour,  according  to  its  age ; unctuous  to  the 
touch,  brittle,  but  soon  softening,  and  growing  tough 
between  the  fingers;  in  some  degree  transparent,  not 
unlike  myrrh ; of  a bitterish  taste,  and  a moderately 
strong  smell.  It  does  not  easily  take  flame,  and,  when 
set  on  fire,  soon  goes  out.  In  burning,  it  sputters  a 
little,  owing  to  its  aqueous  humidity.  Its  sp.  grav.  is 
1.371.  Alkohol  dissolves  about  three-fifths  of  bdellium, 
leaving  a mixture  of  gum  and  cerasin.  Its  constitu- 
ents, according  to  Pelletier,  are  59  resin,  9.2  gum,  30.6 
cerasin,  1.2  volatile  oil  and  loss.  It  is  one  of  the  weak- 
est of  the  deobstruent  gums.  It  was  sometimes  used 
as  a pectoral  and  an  emmenagogue.  Applied  exter- 
nally, it  is  stimulant,  and  promotes  suppuration.  It  is 
never  met  with  in  the  shops  of  this  country. 

BEAK.  See  Rostrum. 

BEAN.  See  Vicia  faba. 

Bean , French.  See  Phaseolus  vulgaris. 

Bean , Kidney.  See  Phaseolus  vulgaris. 

Bean , Malacca.  See  Avicennia  tomeutosa. 

Bean  of  Carthagena.  See  Bejuio. 

Bean , St.  Ignatius.  See  Ignatia  amara. 

BEAR.  Ursa.  The  name  of  a well-known  ani- 
mal. Several  things  are  designated  after  it,  or  a part 
of  it. 

Bear's  berry.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

Bear's  bilberry.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

Bear's  breech.  See  Acanthus. 

Bear's  foot.  See  Helleborus  fatidus. 

Bear's  whortleberry.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

Bear's  whorts.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

BEARD.  1.  The  hair  growing  on  the  chin  and  ad- 
jacent parts  of  the  face,  in  adults  of  the  male  sex. 

2.  In  botany.  See  Barba ; Arista. 

Be' cox.  A fine  kind  of  resin  from  the  turpentine 
and  mastich  trees  of  Greece  and  Syria,  formerly  held 
in  great  repute. 

BF.CCABU'NGA.  (From  bachbungen,  water-herb. 
German,  because  it  grows  in  rivulets.)  See  Veronica 
beccabunga. 

Be'cha.  See  Bechica. 

BE'CHICA.  (Bechicus;  from  (3rft,  a cough.)  Be- 
chita.  Medicines  to  relieve  a cough.  An  obsolete 
term.  The  trochisci  bechici  albi  consist  of  starch  and 
liquorice,  with  a small  proportion  of  Florentine  orris 
root  made  into  lozenges,  with  mucilage  of  gum  traga- 
carith.  They  are  a soft  pleasant  demulcent.  The 
trochisci  bechici  nigri  consist  chiefly  of  the  juice  of 
liquorice,  with  sugar  and  gum  tragacanth. 


Be'chion.  (From  (iy  £,  a cough;  so  called  from  its 
supposed  virtues  in  relieving  coughs.)  See  Tusilago 
farfara. 

Becui'ra  nux.  A large  nut  growing  in  Brazil,  from 
which  a balsam  is  drawn  that  is  held  in  estimation  in 
rheumatisms. 

Bede'guar.  (Arabian.)  Bedeguar.  The  Car- 
duus  lacteus  syriacus  is  so  called,  and  also  the  Rosa 
canina. 

Bkdengian.  The  name  of  the  love-apples  in  Avi- 
cenna. 

BEDSTRAW.  See  Galium  aparine. 

BEE.  See  Apis  mellifica. 

BEECH.  See  Fagus. 

BEER.  The  wine  of  grain  made  from  malt  and 
hops  in  the  following  manner.  The  grain  is  steeped 
for  two  or  three  days  in  water,  until  it  swells,  becomes 
somewhat  tender,  and  tinges  the  water  of  a bright  red- 
dish brown  colour.  The  water  being  then  drained 
away,  the  barley  is  spread  about  two  feet  thick  upon 
a floor,  where  it  heats  spontaneously,  and  begins  to 
grow,  by  first  shooting  out  the  radical.  In  this  state 
the  germination  is  slopped  by  spreading  it  thinner,  and 
turning  it  over  for  two  days;  after  which  it  is  again 
made  into  a heap,  and  suffered  to  become  sensibly  hot, 
which  usually  happens  in  little  more  than  a day. 
Lastly,  it  is  conveyed  to  the  kiln,  where,  by  a gradual 
and  low  heat,  it  is  rendered  dry  and  crisp.  This  is 
malt ; and  its  qualities  differ  according  as  it  is  more  or 
less  soaked,  drained,  germinated,  dried,  and  baked. 
In  this,  as  in  other  manufactories,  the  intelligent  opera- 
tors often  make  a mystery  of  their  processes  from 
views  of  profit;  and  others  pretend  to  peculiar  secrets 
who  really  possess  none. 

Indian  corn,  and  probably  all  large  grain,  requires 
to  be  suffered  to  grow  into  the  blade,  as  well  as  root, 
before  it  is  fit  to  be  made  into  malt.  For  this  purpose 
it  is  buried  about  two  or  three  inches  deep  in  the 
ground,  and  covered  with  loose  earth ; and  in  ten  or 
twelve  days  it  springs  up.  In  this  state  it  is  taken  up 
and  washed,  or  fanned,  to  clear  it  from  its  dirt ; and 
then  dried  in  the  kiln  for  use. 

Barley,  by  being  converted  into  malt,  becomes  one- 
fifth  lighter,  or  20  per  cent  ; 12  of  which  are  owing  to 
kiln-drying,  1.5  are  carried  oft'  by  the  steep-water,  3 
dissipated  on  the  floor,  3 loss  in  cleaning  the  roots,  and 
0.5  waste  or  loss. 

The  degree  of  heat  to  which  the  malt  is  exposed  in 
this  process,  gradually  changes  its  colour  from  very 
pale  to  actual  blackness,  as  it  simply  dries  it,  or  con- 
verts it  to  charcoal. 

The  colour  of  the  milt  not  only  affects  the  colour  of 
the  liquor  brewed  from  it;  but,  in  consequence  of  the 
chemical  operation,  of  the  heat  applied,  on  the  princi- 
ples that  are  developed  in  tin.  grain  during  the  process 
of  malting,  materially  alters  the  quality  of  the  beer, 
especially  with  regard  to  the  properties  of  becoming  fit 
for  drinking  and  growing  fine. 

Beer  is  made  from  malt  previously  ground,  or  cut  to 
pieces  by  a mill.  This  is  placed  in  a tun,  or  tub  with 
a false  bottom : hot  water  is  poured  upon  it,  and  the 
whole  stirred  about  with  a proper  instrument.  The 
temperature  of  the  water  in  this  operation,  called 
mashing,  must  not  be  equal  to  boiling ; for,  in  that 
case,  the  malt  would  be  converted  into  a paste,  from 
which  the  impregnated  water  could  not  be  separated. 
This  is  called  setting.  After  the  infusion  has  remained 
for  some  time  upon  the  malt,  it  is  drawn  off,  and  is 
then  distinguished  by  the  name  of  Sweet  Wort.  By 
one  or  more  subsequ  nt  infusions  of  water,  a quantity 
of  weaker  wort  is  made,  which  is  either  added  to  the 
foregoing,  or  kept  apart,  according  to  the  intention  of 
the  operator.  The  wort  is  then  boiled  with  hops, 
which  gives  it  an  aromatic  bitter  taste,  arid  is  supposed 
to  render  it  less  liable  to  be  spoiled  in  keeping ; after 
which  it  is  cooled  in  shallow  vessels,  and  suffeied  to 
ferment,  with  the  addition  of  a proper  quantity  of 
yest.  The  fermented  liquor  is  beer;  and  differs 
greatly  in  its  quality,  according  to  the  nature  of  the 
grain,  the  malting,  the  mashing,  the  quantity  and  kind 
of  the  hops  and  the  yest,  the  purity  or  admixtures  of 
the  water  made  use  of,  the  temperature  and  vicissi- 
tudes of  the  weather,  &c. 

Beside  the  various  qualities  of  malt  liquors  of  a 
similar  kind,  there  are  certain  leading  features  by 
which  they  are  distinguished,  and  classed  under  differ 
ent  names,  and  to  produce  which,  different  modes  J 

125 


BEE 


BEL 


management  must  be  pursued.  The  principal  distinc- 
tions are  into  beer,  properly  so  called  ; ale  ; table,  or 
small  beer ; and  porter,  which  is  commonly  termed 
beer  in  London.  Beer  is  a strong,  fine,  and  thin 
liquor;  the  greater  part  of  the  mucilage  having  been 
separated  by  boiling  the  wort  longer  than  for  ale,  and 
carrying  the  fermentation  farther,  so  as  to  convert  the 
saccharine  matter  into  alkohol.  Ale  is  of  a more  sy- 
rupy consistence,  and  sweeter  taste ; more  of  the  mu- 
cilage being  retained  in  it,  and  the  fermentation  not 
having  been  carried  so  far  as  to  decompose  all  the 
sugar.  Small  beer,  as  its  name  implies,  is  a weaker 
liquor ; and  is  made,  either  by  adding  a large  portion 
of  water  to  the  malt,  or  by  mashing  with  a fresh  quan- 
tity of  water  what  is  left  after  the  beer  or  ale  wort  is 
drawn  off.  Porter  was  probably  made  originally 
from  very  high  dried  malt ; but  it  is  said,  that  its  pecu- 
liar flavour  cannot  be  imparted  by  malt  and  hops  alone. 

Mr.  Brande  obtained  the  following  quantities  of 
alkohol  from  100  parts  of  different  species  of  beers. 
Burton  ale,  8.83;  Edinburgh  ale,  6.2;  Dorchester  ale, 
5.56 ; the  average  being  = 6.87.  Brown  stout,  6.8 ; 
London  porter  (average)  4.2;  London  small  beer  (ave- 
rage) 1.28. 

As  long  ago  as  the  reign  of  Queen  Anne,  brewers 
were  forbid  to  mix  sugar,  honey,  Guinea  pepper,  essen- 
tia bina,  cocculus  ind'icus,  or  any  other  unwholesome 
ingredient,  in  beer,  under  a certain  penalty ; from 
which  we  may  infer,  that  such  at  least  was  the  prac- 
tice of  some ; and  writers,  who  profess  to  discuss  the 
secrets  of  the  trade,  mention  most  of  these,  and  some 
other  articles,  as  essentially  necessary.  The  .essentia 
bina  is  sugar  boiled  down  to  a dark  colour,  and  empy- 
reumatic  flavour.  Broom  tops,  wormwood,  and  other 
bitter  plants,  were  formerly  used  to  render  beer  fit  for 
keeping,  before  hops  were  introduced  into  this  coun- 
try ; but  are  now  prohibited  to  be  used  in  beer  made 
for  sale. 

By  the  present  law  of  this  country,  nothing  is  allow- 
ed to  enter  into  the  composition  of  beer,  except  malt 
and  hops.  Quassia  and  wormwood  are  often  fraudu- 
lently introduced  ; both  of  which  are  easily  discovera- 
ble by  their  nauseous  bitter  taste.  They  form  a beer 
which  does  not  preserve  so  well  as  hop  beer.  Sulphate 
of  iron,  alum,  and  salt,  are  often  added  by  the  publi- 
cans, under  the  name  of  beer  heading , to  impart  a I 
frothing  property  to  beer,  when  it  is  poured  out  of  one 
vessel  into  another.  Molasses  and  extract  of  gentian 
root  are  added  with  the  same  view.  Capsicum^  grains 
of  paradise,  ginger  root,  coriander  seed,  and  orange 
peel,  are  also  employed  to  give  pungency  and  flavour 
to  weak  or  bad  beer.  The  following  is  a list  of  some 
of  the  unlawful  substances  seized  at  different  brew 
eries,  and  brewers’  druggists’  laboratories,  in  London, 
as  copied  from  the  minutes  of  the  committee  of  the 
house  of  commons.  Cocculus  indicus  multum,  (an 
extract  of  the  coccujus)  colouring,  honey,  hartshorn 
shavings,  Spanish  juice,  orange  powder,  ginger,  grains 
of  paradise,  quassia,  liquorice,  caraway  seeds,  cop- 
peras, capsicum,  mixed  drugs.  Sulphuric  acid  is  very 
frequently  added  to  brivgbeer  forward , or  make  it  hard, 
giving  new  beer  instantly  the  taste  of  what  is  18 
months  old.  According  to  Mr.  Accum,  the  present 
entire  beer  of  the  London  brewer  is  composed  of  all 
the  waste  and  spoiled  beer  of  the  publicans,  the  bot- 
toms of  buts,  the  leavings  of  the  pots,  the  drippings  of 
the  machines  for  drawing  the  beer,  the  remnants  of 
beer  that  lay  in  the  leaden  pipes  of  the  brewery,  with 
a portion  of  brown  stout,  bottling  beer,  and  mild  beer. 
He  says  that  opium,  tobacco,  nux  vomica,  and  extract 
of  poppies,  have  been  likewise  used  to  adulterate  beer. 
By  evaporating  a portion  of  beer  to  dryness,  and  ignit- 
ing the  residuum  with  chlorate  of  potassa,  the  iron  of 
the  copperas  will  be  procured  in  an  insoluble  oxyde. 
Muriate  of  barytes  will  throw  down  an  abundant  pre- 
cipitate from  beer  contaminated  with  sulphuric  acid 
or  copperas;  which  precipitate  may  be  collected, 
dried,  and  ignited  It  will  be  insoluble  in  nitric  acid. 

Beer  appears  to  have  been  of  ancient  use,  as  Tacitus 
mentions  it  among  the  Germans,  and  has  been  usually 
supposed  to  have  been  peculiar  to  the  northern  na- 
tions ; but  the  ancient  Egyptians,  whose  country  was 
not  adapted  to  the  culture  of  the  grape,  had  also  con- 
trived this  substitute  for  wine ; and  Mr.  Park  has 
found  the  art  of  making  malt,  and  brewing  from  it 
very  good  beer,  among  the  negroes  in  the  interior  parts 
of  Africa.  See  Wheat. 

126 


Bees'  wax.  See  Cera. 

BEET.  See  Beta. 

Beet , red.  See  Beta. 

Beet,  white.  A variety  of  red  beet.  The  juice  and 
powder  of  the  root  are  said  to  be  good  to  excite  sneez- 
ing, and  will  bring  away  a considerable  quantity  of 
mucus. 

Be  gma.  (From  (3t}eo(o,  to  cough.)  A cough ; also 
expectorated  mucus,  according  to  Hippocrates. 

BEHEN.  The  Arabian  for  finger. 

Behen  album.  (From  behen,  a finger,  Arabian.) 
See  Centaurea  behen. 

Behen  officinarum.  See  Cucubalus  behen. 

Behen  rubrum.  See  Statice  Limonium. 

Beide  lsar.  Beidellopar.  A species  of  Asclepias, 
used  in  Africa  as  a remedy  for  fevers  and  the  bites  of 
serpents.  The  caustic  juice  which  issues  from  the 
roots  when  wounded,  is  used  by  the  negroes  to  destroy 
venereal  and  similar  swellings. 

Beju'io.  Habilla  de  Carthagend.  Bean  of  Car- 
thagena.  A kind  of  bean  in  South  America,  famed 
for  being  an  effectual  antidote  against  the  poison  of 
all  serpents,  if  a small  quantity  is  eaten  immediately. 
This  bean  is  the  peculiar  product  of  the  jurisdiction 
of  Carthagena. 

Bela- aye.  (An  Indian  word.)  See  Nerium  anti- 

dys  enteric-urn . 

BELEMNOI'DES.  (From  ($e\spvov , a dart,  and 
uSos,  form;  so  named  from  their  dart-like  shape.) 
Belonoides ; Beloidos.  The  styloid  process  of  the 
temporal  bone,  and  the  lower  end  of  the  ulna,  were 
formerly  so  called. 

Bele'son.  (An  Indian  word.)  Belilia.  See  Mus- 

senda  frondosa. 

BELL  METAL.  A mixture  of  tin  and  copper. 

BELLADO'NNA.  (From  bella  donna , Italian,  a 
handsome  lady ; so  called  because  the  ladies  of  Italy 
use  it,  to  take  away  the  too  florid  colour  of  their  faces 
See  Atropa  belladonna. 

Be'i.legu.  See  Myrobalanus  bellirica. 

Bellere'gi.  See  Myrobalamis  bellirica. 

Belle' Rica:.  See  Myrobalanus  bellirica. 

Bellidioi'des.  (From  belles , a daisy,  and  si6o$ , 
form.)  See  Chrysanthemum. 

BELLI'NI,  Laurence,  an  ingenious  physician,  born 
| at  Florence  in  1643.  He  was  greatly  attached  to  the 
mathematics,  of  which  he  was  made  professor  at  Pisa, 
when  only  twenty  years  of  age.  He  was  soon  after 
appointed  professor  of  anatomy,  which  office  he  filled 
with  credit  for  nearly  thirty  years.  He  was  one  of 
the  chief  supporters  of  the  mathematical  theory  of 
medicine,  which  attempted  to  explain  the  functions  of 
the  body,  the  causes  of  diseases,  and  the  operations  of 
medicines  on  mechanical  principles : and  having  im- 
prudently regulated  his  practice  accordingly,  he  was 
generally  unsuccessful,  and  lost  the  confidence  of  the 
public,  as  well  as  of  Cosmo  HI.  of  Florence,  who  had 
appointed  him  his  physician.  In  his  anatomical  re- 
searches he  was  more  successful,  having  first  accu- 
rately described  the  nervous  papilla;  of  the  tongue,  and 
discovered  them  to  be  the  organ  of  taste ; and  also 
having  made  better  known  the  structure  of  the  kid- 
ney. He  was  author  of  several  other  publications, 
! and  died  in  1704. 

BE'LLIS.  ( A ' bello  color from  its  fair  colour.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Sy agenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  superjlua.  The 
daisy. 

Ballis  major.  See  Chrysanthemum. 

Bellis  minor.  See  Beilis  perennis. 

Bellis  ferennis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  daisy.  Bellis;  Bellis  minor;  Bellis  pe^en 
nis — scapo  mido , of  Linnteus,  or  bruisewort,  was  for- 
merly directed  in  the  pharmacopoeias  by  this  name. 
Although  the  leaves  and  flowers  are  rather  acrid,  and 
are  said  to  cure  several  species  of  wounds,  they  are 
never  employed  by  modem  surgeons. 

Bello'culus.  (From  bellus , fair,  and  oculus , the 
eye.)  A precious  stone,  resembling  the  eye,  and  for 
merlv  supposed  to  be  useful  in  its  disorders. 

Be'llon.  The  Coiica  pictonum. 

BELLONA'RIA.  (From  Bellona,  the  goddess  of 
war.)  An  herb  which,  if  eaten,  makes  people  mad,  and 
act  outrageously,  like  the  votaries  of  Bellona. 

BF.LLOSTE,  Augustin,  a surgeon,  born  at  Paris 
in  1654.  After  practising  several  years  there,  and  as 
an  army  surgeon,  he  was  invited  to  attend  the  mother 


BEN 


BEN 


of  the  Queen  of  Sardinia,  and  continued  at  Turin  till 
his  death  in  1730.  He  was  inventor  of  a mercurial 
pill,  called  by  his  name,  by  which  he  is  said  to  have 
acquired  a great  fortune.  The  work  by  which  he  is 
principally  known,  is  called  the  “ Hospital  Surgeon,” 
which  passed  through  numerous  editions,  and  was 
translated  into  most  of  the  European  languages.— 
Among  other  useful  observations,  he  recommended 
piercing  carious  bones,  to  promote  exfoliation,  which 
indeed  Celsus  had  advised  before  ; and  he  blamed  the 
custom  of  frequently  changing  the  dressings  of  wounds, 
as  retarding  the  cure. 

Belmu'schus.  A name  of  the  Abelmoschus.  See 
Hibischus  abelmoschus. 

Be'lnileg.  See  Myrobalanus  Bellirica. 

Belo'ere.  (Indian.)  An  evergreen  plant  of  Ame- 
rica, the  seeds  of  which  purge  moderately,  but  the 
leaves  roughly. 

Belonoi'des.  See  Belemnoides. 

Belu'lcum.  (From  /3eAos,  a dart,  and  eXxw,  to 
draw  out.)  A surgeon’s  instrument  for  extracting 
thorns,  or  darts. 

Belzo'e.  See  Styrax  benzoin. 

Belzoi'num.  See  Styrax  Benzoin. 

Bem-ta'mara.  The  laba  rEgyptiaca. 

BEN.  An  Arabian  word  formerly  very  much  used, 
/see  Guilandma  moringa. 

Ben  magnum.  Monardus  calls  a species  of  esula,  or 
garden  spuige,  by  this  name,  which  purges  and  vomits 
violently. 

Ben  tamara.  The  Egyptian  bean. 

BE  NEDICT.  Benedictus.  A specific  name  pre- 
fixed to  many  compositions  and  herbs  on  account  of 
their  supposed  good  qualities ; as  Benedicta  herba, 
Benedicta  aqua , &C. 

Benedicta  aqua.  Many  compound  waters  have 
been  so  called,  especially  lime-water,  and  a water  dis- 
tilled from  Serpyllum.  In  Schroeder,  it  is  the  name 
for  an  emetic. 

Benedicta  herba.  See  Gcum  urbanum. 

Benedicta  laxativa.  A compound  of  turbeth, 
scammony,  and  spurges,  with  some  warm  aromatics. 

Benedictum  laxativum.  Rhubarb,  and  sometimes 
the  lenitive  electuary. 

Benedictum  lignum.  Guaiacum. 

Benedictum  vinum.  Antimonial  wine. 

BENEDICTUS.  (From  benedico , to  bless.)  See 
Benedict. 

Benedictus  carduus.  See  Ccntaurea  benedicta. 

Benedictus  lapis.  A name  for  the  philosopher’s 
stone. 

BENEOLE'NTIA.  (From  bene,  well,  and  oleo,  to 
smell.)  Sweet-scented  medicines. 

Beng.  A name  given  by  the  Mahomedans  to  the 
leaves  of  hemp,  formed  into  pills,  or  conserve.  They 
possess  exhilarating  and  intoxicating  powers. 

Bengal  quince.  See  Erateva  marmelos. 

Benua'l/e  radix.  (From  Bengal , its  native  place.) 
See  Cassuinuniar. 

Benga'lle  Indorum.  (From  Bengal , its  native 
place.)  See  Cassumuniar. 

Be'ngi  eiri.  A species  of  evergreen.  Indian  ri- 
einus , vv  hich  grows  in  Malabar. 

RENIT.  See  Ge um  urbanum. 

Beni'vi  arbor.  See  Styrax  benzoin. 

BENJAMIN.  See  Styrax  benzoin. 

Benjamin  flowers.  See  Benzoic  acid. 

[Benne  seed.  Among  the  negroes,  in  Georgia,  a 
plant  is  cultivated«whicli  appears  to  be  a species  of 
sesamum.  They  call  it  benne,  which  is  probably  its 
African  name.  The  seeds  are  of  a brownish-white, 
and  about  the  size  of  flaxseed,  abounding  in  oil. 

Several  barrels  of  benne  seeds  were  shipped  by  John 
Milledge,  from  Savannah  to  New-York,  in  1807,  con- 
signed to  Gol.  Few.  By  direction  of  this  latter  gentle- 
man, they  were  pressed,  and  have  been  found  to  yield 
plenty  of  oil ; three  gallons,  at  least,  to  a bushel.  The 
benne  plant  is  an  annual,  and  may  hereafter  become 
of  some  importance  to  this  country.  One  difficulty  in 
its  cultivation,  since  ascertained,  arises  from  the  faci- 
lity with  which  the  plant  sheds  its  seeds  before  the 
whole  are  mature. — See  Med.  Repos,  vol.  ii.  A.] 

[Benne  oil.  This  vegetable  oil  is  clear,  mild,  and 
well-flavoured,  and  excellent  for  salads.  Its  qualities 
are  so  good  and  wholesome  that  it  may  be  employed 
in  lieu  of  the  oil  of  olives,  both  in  medicine  and  diet. 
Instead  of  importing  this  article  from  the  south  of  Eu- 


rope, the  Americans  may  prepare  the  oil  of  sesamum 
from  their  own  fields.  The  grains  are  of  a tender 
structure,  and  maybe  crushed  under  the  screw  without 
previous  grinding.  In  addition  to  all  which  circum- 
stances it  may  be  added,  that  the  oil  separates  freely 
by  cold  expression ; and  it  may  hence  be  hoped  that 
our  tables  will,  in  process  of  time,  be  furnished  with 
plentiful  supplies  of  this  sweet  and  nutritious  sub- 
stance.—See  Med.  Repos,  vol.  ii,  p.  88. 

The  sesamum  orientale  is  cultivated  in  Asia,  Africa, 
and  the  West  Indies,  principally  on  account  of  its  oil. 
Its  seeds  were  used  by  the  ancient  Egyptians  for  food, 
and  are  still  employed  by  the  negroes  and  Asiatics  for 
this  purpose.  The  plant  is  now  cultivated  in  the 
southern  parts  of  the  United  States.  The  seeds  afford 
a copious  quantity  of  oil,  amounting,  according  to 
some  authors,  to  nearly  one  half  of  their  weight.  This 
oil  is  bland,  sweet,  and  is  said  to  keep  some  years 
without  turning  <ancid.  It  is  applicable  to  the  same 
purposes  as  olive  oil,  and  in  sufficient  doses  proves 
purgative  on  the  same  principle  as  other  animal  and 
vegetable  fixed  oils.” — See  Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

BENZO'AS.  Abenzoate.  A salt  formed  by  the 
union  of  benzoic  acid  with  salifiable  bases  ; as  benzo- 
ate of  alumine,  &c. 

BENZO’E.  See  Styrax  benzoin. 

Benzoe  amygdaloides.  See  Styrax  benzoin. 

Benzoes  flores.  See  Benzoic  acid. 

BENZOIC  ACID.  See  Acidum  benzoicum.  “This 
acid  was  first  described  in  1608,  by  Blaise  de  Vigenere, 
in  his  Treatise  on  Fire  and  Salt,  and  has  been  gene- 
rally known  since  by  the  name  of  flowers  of  benjamin 
or  benzoin,  because  it  was  obtained  by  sublimation 
from  the  resin  of  this  name.  As  it  is  still  most  com- 
monly procured  from  this  substance,  it  has  preserved 
the  epithet  of  benzoic,  though  known  to  be  a peculiar 
acid,  obtainable  not  from  benzoin  alone,  but  from  dif- 
ferent vegetable  balsams,  venello,  cinnamon,  amber- 
gris, the  urine  of  children,  frequently  that  of  adults, 
and  always,  according  to  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin, 
though  Giese  denies  this,  from  that  of.quadrupeds  liv- 
ing on  grass  ami  hay,  particularly  the  camel,  the  horse, 
and  the  cow.  There  is  reason  to  conjecture  that  many 
vegetables,  and  among  them  some  of  the  grasses,  con- 
tain it,  and  that  it  passes  from  them  into  the  urine. 
Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin  found  it  combined  with  po- 
tassa  and  lime  in  the  liquor  of  dunghills,  as  well  as  in 
the  urine  of  the  quadrupeds  above-mentioned  ; and 
they  strongly  suspect  it  to  exist  in  the  Anthoxanthum 
odoratum , or  sweet-scented  vernal-grass,  from  which 
hay  principally  derives  its  fragrant  smell.  Giese, 
however,  could  find  none  either  in  this  grass  or  in  oats. 

The  usual  method  of  obtaining  it  affords  a very  ele- 
gant and  pleasing  example  of  the  chemical  process  of 
| sublimation.  For  this  purpose  a thin  stratum  of  pow- 
dered benzoin  is  spread  over  the  bottom  of  a glazed 
earthen  pot,  to  which  a tall  conical  paper  covering  is 
fitted  : gentle  heat  is  then  to  be  applied  to  the  bottom 
of  the  pot,  which  fuses  the  benzoin,  and  fills  the  apart- 
ment with  a fragrant  smell,  arising  from  a portion  of 
essential  oil  and  acid  of  benzoin,  which  are  dissipated 
intp  the  air,  at  the  same  time  the  acid  itself  rises  very 
suddenly  in  the  paper  head,  which  may  be  occasion- 
ally Inspected  at  the  top,  though  with  some  little 
care,  because  the  fumes  will  excite  coughing.  This 
saline  sublimate  is  condensed  in  the  form  of  long 
needles,  or  straight  filaments  of  a white  colour,  cross- 
ing each  other  in  all  directions.  When  the  acid  ceases 
to  rise,  the  cover  may  be  changed,  a new  one  applied, 
and  the  heat  raised  : more  flowers  of  a yellowish  co- 
iour  will  then  rise,  which  will  require  a second  sub- 
limation to  deprive  them  of  the  empyreumatic  oil  they 
contain. 

The  sublimation  of  the  acid  of  benzoin  may  be  con- 
veniently performed  by  substituting  an  inverted  earth- 
en pan  instead  of  the  paper  cone.  In  this  case  the 
two  pans  should  be  made  to  fit,  by  grinding  on  a stone 
with  sand,  and  they  must  be  luted  together  with  paper 
dipped  in  paste.  This  method  seems  preferable  to  the 
other,  where  the  presence  of  the  operator  is  required 
elsewhere ; but  the  paper  head  can  be  more  easily  in- 
spected and  changed.  The  heat  applied  must  be 
gentle,  and  the  vessels  ought  not  to  be  separated  till 
they  have  become  cool. 

The  quantity  of  acid  obtained  in  these  methods 
differs  according  to  the  management,  and  probably 
also  from  difference  of  purity,  and  in  other  respects,  of 

127 


BEN 


BEN 


the  resin  itself.  It  usually  amounts  to  no  more  than 
about  one-eighth  part  of  the  whole  weight.  Indeed 
Scheele  says,  not  more  than  a tenth  or  twelfth.  The 
whole  acid  of  benzoin  is  obtained  with  greater  cer- 
tainty in  the  humid  process  of  Scheele : this  consists  in 
boiling  the  powdered  balsam  with  lime  water,  and 
afterward  separating  the  lime  by  the  addition  of  mu- 
riatic acid.  Twelve  ounces  of  water  are  to  be  poured 
upon  four  ounces  of  slaked  lime ; and,  after  the  ebulli- 
tion is  over,  eight  pounds,  or  ninety-six  ounces,  more 
of  water  are  to  be  added  ; a pound  of  finely-powdered 
benzoin  being  then  put  into  a tin  vessel,  six  ounces  of 
the  lime  water  are  to  be  added,  and  mixed  well  with 
the  powder ; and  afterward  the  rest  of  the  lime  water 
in  the  same  gradual  manner,  because  the  benzoin 
would  coagulate  into  a mass,  if  the  whole  were  added 
at  once.  This  mixture  must  be  gently  boiled  for  half 
an  hour  with  constant  agitation,  and  afterward  suf- 
fered to  cool  and  subside  during  an  hour.  The  super- 
natant liquor  must.be  decanted,  and  the  residuum 
boiled  with  eight  pounds  more  of  lime  water;  after 
which  the  sam  process  is  to  be  once  more  repeated : 
the  remaining  powder  must  be  edulcorated  on  the 
filter  by  affusions  of  hot  water.  Lastly,  all  the  de- 
coctions, being  mixed  together,  must  be  evaporated 
to  two  pounds,  and  strained  into  a glass  vessel.  This 
fluid  consists  of ‘the  acid  of  benzoin  cofiibined  with 
lime.  After  it  is  become  cold,  a quantity  of  muriatic 
acid  must  be  added,  with  constant  stirring,  until  the 
fluid  tastes  a little  sourish.  Duirng  this  time  the  last- 
mentioned  acid  tinites  with  the  lime,  and  forms  a so- 
luble salt,  winch  remains  suspended,  while  the  less 
soluble  acid  of  benzoin  being  disengaged,  fails  to  the 
bottom  in  powder.  By  repeated  affusions  of  cold 
water  upon  the  filter,  it  may  be  deprived  of  the  muriate 
of  lime  and  muriatic  acid  with  which  it  may  happen 
to  be  mixed.  If  it  be  required  to  have  a shining 
appearance,  it  may  be  dissolved  in  a small  quantity  of 
boiling  water,  from  which  it  will  separate  in  silky 
filaments  by  cooling.  By  this  process  the  benzoic  acid 
may  be  procured  from  other  substances,  in  which  it 
exists. 

Mr.  Hatch*  W has  shown,  that,  by  digesting  benzoin 
in  hot  sulphuric  acid,  very  beautiful  crystals  are 
sublimed.  This  is  perhaps  the  best  process  for  ex- 
tracting the  acid.  If  we  concentrate  the  urine  of 
horses  or  cows,  and  pour  muriatic  acid  into  it,  a copi- 
ous precipitate  of  benzoic  acid  takes  place.  This  is 
the  cheapest  source  of  it.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

As  ari  economical  mode  of  obtaining  this  acid,  Four- 
croy  recommends  the  extraction  of  it  from  the  water 
that  drains  from  dunghills,  cowhouses,  and  stables,  by 
means  of  the  muriatic  acid,  which  decomposes  the 
benzoate  of  lime  contained  in  them,  and  separates  the 
benzoic  acid,  as  in  Scheele’s  process.  He  confesses 
the  smell  of  the  acid  thus  obtained  differs  a little  from 
that  of  the  acid  extracted  from  benzoin ; but  this,  he 
says,  may  be  remedied,  by  dissolving  the  acid  in  boiling 
waier,  filtering  the  solution,  letting  it  cool,  and  thus 
suffering  the  acid  to  crystallize,  and  repeating  this  ope- 
ration a second  time. 

The  acid  of  benzoin  is  so  inflammable,  that  it  burns 
with  a clear  yellow  flame  without  the  assistance  of  a 
wick.  The  sublimed  flowers  in  their  purest  state,  as 
white  as  ordinary  writing  paper,  were  fused  into  a 
clear  transparent  yellowish  fluid,  at  the  two  hundred- 
and-thirtieth  degree  of  Fahrenheit’s  thermometer,  and 
at  the  same  time  began  to  rise  in  sublimation.  It  is 
probable  that  a heat  solnewhat  greater  than  this  may 
be  required  to  separate  it  from  the  resin.  It  is  strongly 
disposed  to  take  the  crystalline  form  in  cooling.  The 
concentrated  sulphuric  and  nitric  acids  dissolve  this 
concrete  acid,  and  it  is  again  teparated  without  altera- 
tion, by  adding  water.  Othei  acids  dissolve  it  by  the 
assistance  of  heat,  from  whicl  it  separates  by  cooling, 
unchanged.  It  is  plentifully  soluble  in  ardent  spirit, 
from  which  it  may  likewise  be  separated  by  diluting 
the  spirit  with  water.  It  readily  dissolves  in  oils,  and 
in  melted  tallow.  If  it  be  added  in  a small  proportion 
to  this  list  fluid,  part  of  the  tallow  congeals  before  the 
rest,  in  the  form  of  wAite' opaque  clouds.  If  the  quan- 
tity of  acid  be  more  considerable,  it  separates  in  part 
by  cooling,  in  the  form  of  needles  or  feathers.  It  did 
not  communicate  any  considerable  degree  of  hardness 
to  the  tallow,  which  was  the  object  of  this  experiment. 
When  the  tallow  was  heated  nearly  to  ebullition,  it 
emitted  fumes  which  affected  the  respiration,  like  those 
138 


of  the  acid  of  benzoin,  but  did  not  possess  the  peculiar 
and  agreeable  smell  of  that  substance,  being  probably 
the  sebacic  acid.  A stratum  of  this  tallow,  about  one- 
twentieth  of  an  inch  thick,  was  fused  upon  a plate  of 
brass,  together  with  other  fat  substances,  with  a view 
to  determine  its  relative  disposition  to  acquire  and 
retain  the  solid  state.  After  it  had  cooled,  it  was  left 
upon  the  plate,  and,  in  the  course  of  some  weeks,  it 
gradually  became  tinged  throughout  of  a bluish-green 
colour.  If  this  circumstance  be  not  supposed  to  have 
arisen  from  a solution  of  the  copper  during  the  fusion, 
it  seems  a remarkable  instance  of  the  mutual  action  of 
two  bodies  in  tne  solid  state,  contrary  to  that  axiom  of 
chemistry  which  affirms,  that  bodies  do  not  act  on  each 
other,  unless  one  or  more  of  them  be  in  the  fluid  state. 
Tallow  itself,  howevet,  has  the  same  effect. 

Pure  benzoic  acid  is  in  the  form  of  a light  powder, 
evidently  crystallized  in  fine  needles,  the  figure  of 
which  is  difficult  to  be  determined  from  their  small- 
ness. It  has  a white  and  shining  appearance;  but 
when  contaminated  by  a portion  of  volatile  oil,  is 
yellow  or  brownish.  It  is  not  brittle,  as  might  be  ex- 
pected from  its  appearance,  but  has  rather  a kind  of 
ductility  and  elasticity,  and,  on  rubbing  in  a mortar, 
becomes  a sort  of  paste.  Its  taste  is  acrid,  hot,  acidu-* 
lous,  and  bitter.  It  reddens  the  infusion  of  litmus,  but 
not  syrup  of  violets.  It  has  a peculiar  aromatic  smell, 
but  not  strong  unless  heated.  This,  however,  appears 
not  to  belong  to  the  acid  ; for  Mr.  Giese  informs  us,  that 
on  dissolving  the  benzoic  acid  in  as  little  alkohol  as 
possible,  filtering  the  solution,  and  precipitating  by 
water,  the  acid  will,  be  obtained  pure,  and  void  of 
smell,  the  odorous  oil  remaining  dissolved  in  the  spirit. 
Its  specific  gravity  is  0.667.  It  is  not  perceptibly  altered 
by  the  air,  and  has  been  kept  in  an  open  vessel  twenty 
years  without  losing  any  of  its  weight.  None  of  ihe 
combustible  substances  have  any  effect  on  it;  but  it 
may  be  refined  by  mixing  it  with  charcoal  powder  and 
subiiming,  being  thus  rendered  much  whiter  and 
better  crystallized.  It  is  not  very  soluble  in  water. 
Wenzel  and  Lichtenstein  say  four  hundred  parts  of 
cold  water  dissolve  but  one,  though  the  same  quantity 
of  boiling  water  dissolves  twenty  parts,  nineteen  of 
.which  separate  on  cooling. 

The  benzoic  acid  unites  without  much  difficulty 
with  the  earthy  and  alkaline  bases.  These  com- 
pounds are  called  benzoates. 

The  benzoate  of  barytes  is  soluble,  crystallizes  tole- 
rably well,  is  not  affected  by  exposure  to.  the  air,  but  is 
decomposable  by  fire,  and  by  the  stronger  acids.  That 
of  lime  is  very  soluble  in  water,  though  much  less  in 
cold  than  in  hot,  and  crystallizes  on  cooling.  It  is  in 
like  manner  decomposable  by  the  acids  and  by  barytes. 
The  benzoate  of  magnesia  is  soluble,  crystallizahle,  a 
little  deliquescent,  and  more  decomposable  than  the 
former.  That  of  ulumina  is  very  soluble,  crystallizes 
in  dendrites,  is  deliquescent,  has  an  acerb  and  bitter 
taste,  and  is  decomposable  by  fire,  and  even  by  most  of 
the  vegetable  acids.  The  benzoate  of  potass  a crystal- 
lizes on  cooing  in  little  compacted  needles.  All  the  acids 
decompose  it,  and  the  solution  of  barytes  and  lime  form 
with  it  a piecipitate.  The  benzoate  of  soda  is  very 
crystallizable,  very  soluble,  and  not  deliquescent  like 
that  of  potassa,  but  it  is  decomposable  by  the  same 
means.  It  is  sometimes  found  native  in  the  urine  of 
graminivorous  quadrupeds,  but  by  no  means  so  abun- 
dantly as  that  of  lime.  The  benzoate  of  ammonia  is 
volatile,  and  decomposable  by  all  the  acids  and  all  the 
bases.  The  solutions  of  all  the  benzoates,  when  dry- 
ing on  the  sides  of  a vessel  wetted  with  them,  form 
dendritical  crystallizations. 

Trommsdorf  found  in  his  experiments,  that  benzoic 
acid  united  readily  with  metallic  ozydes. 

The  benzoates  are  all  decomposable  by  heat,  which, 
when  it  is  slowly  applied,  first  separates  a portion  of 
the  acid  in  a vapour,  that  condenses  in  crystals.  The 
soluble  benzoates  are  decomposed  by  the  powerful 
acids,  which  separate  their  acid  in  a crystalline  form. 

The  benzoic  acid  is  occasionally  used  in  medicine, 
but  not  so  much  as  formerly ; and  enters  into  the  com- 
position of  the  camphorated  tincture  of  opium  of  the 
London  college,  heretofore  called  paregoric  elixir. 

BENZOI'FERA.  See  Styraz  benzoin. 

BENZOKNUM.  (From  the  Arabic  term  benzoah.) 
See  Styraz  benzoin. 

Benzoini  magistbrium.  Magistery,  or  precipitate 
of  gum-benjamin. 


BER 


BET 


Bknzoini  oleum.  Oil  of  benjamin. 

BERBERIA.  (Origin  uncertain.)  Berberi.  The 
name  of  a species  of  disease  in  the  genus  Synclonus  of 
Good’s  Nosology  See  Beriberia. 

BE'RBERIS.  {Berber^  wild  Arab,  used  by  Aver- 
rhoes,  and  officinal  writers.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Hexandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  The 
barbery,  or  pepperidge  bush. 

2.  The  phai  macopceial  name  for  the  barberry.  See 
Berberis  vulgaris. 

Berberis  gelatin  a.  Barberry  jelly.  Barberries 
boiled  in  sugar. 

Berberis  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
barberry  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Oxycantha  Galeni; 
Spina  acida;  Crespinus.  This  tree,  Berberis  ; pedun- 
culis  racemosis , spinus  triplicibus,  of  Linnams,  is  a 
native  of  England.  The  fruit,  or  berries,  which  are 
gratefully  acid,  and  moderately  astringent,  are  said  to 
be  of  great  use  in  biliary  fluxes,  and  in  all  cases  where 
heat,  acrimony,  and  putridity  of  the  humours  prevail. 
The  filaments  of  this  shrub  possess  a remarkable  de- 
gree of  irritability ; for  on  being  touched  near  thd  base 
w ith  the  point  of  a pin,  a sudden  contraction  is  pro- 
duced, which  may  be  repeated  several  times. 

BERENGA'RIUS,  James,  born  about  the  end  of  the 
15th  century  at  Carpi,  in  Modena,  whence  he  is  often 
called  Carpus.  He  was  one  of  the  restorers  of  ana- 
tomy, of  which  he  was  professor,  first  at  Padua,  after- 
ward at  Bologna,  which  he  was  in  a few  years 
obliged  to  quit,  being  accused  of  having  opened  the 
bodies  of  two  Spaniards  alive.  By  his  numerous  dis-  j 
sections,  he  corrected  many  previous  errors  concerning 
the  structure  of  the  human  body,  and  paved  the  way 
for  his  successor  Vesalius.  He  was  among  the  first  to 
use  mercurial  frictions  in  syphilis,  whereby  he  acquired 
a large  fortune,  which  he  left  to  the  Duke  of  Ferrara, 
into  whose  territory  he  retired,  at  his  death  in  1527. 
His  principal  works  are  an  enlarged  Commentary  on 
Mundinus,  and  a Treatise  on  Fracture  of  the  Cranium. 
Bereni  secum.  See  Artemisia  vulgaris. 

Bereni'ce.  (The  city  from  whence  it  was  formerly 
brought.)  Amber. 

Bereni' cium.  (From  0£pw,  to  bring,  and  viktj  vic- 
tory.) A term  applied  by  the  old  Greek  writers  to 
nitre,  from  its  supposed  power  in  healing  wounds. 

BERGAMO'TE.  A species  of  citron.  See  Citrus 
vudica. 

8ERGMANITE.  A massive  mineral  of  a greenish, 
grayish-white,  or  reddish  colour,  which  fuses  into  a 
transparent  glass,  or  a semitransparent  enamel.  It  is 
found  in  Frederickswam,  in  Norway,  in  quartz  and  in 
felspar. 

[This  mineral  has  not  yet  been  satisfactorily  ana- 
lyzed. Its  masses  are  composed  of  fibres,  or  little 
needles,  confusedly  grouped,  and  often  so  closely  ap- 
plied to  each  other,  that  the  texture  becomes  nearly 
compact.  Some  of  the  needles  have  a foliated  shining 
fracture.  Its  colour  is  a deep  gray.  Its  sharp  frag- 
ments scratch  glass,  and  even  quartz  in  a slight  degree. 
Its  spec.  grav.  is  2.30.  When  moistened  by  the  breath, 
it  yields  an  argillaceous  odour.  A fragment  exposed 
to  the  flame  of  a candle,  or  placed  on  a hot  coal,  be- 
comes white  and  friable.  It  melts  by  the  blow-pipe 
into  a white  translucent  glass.-jrSee  Cleav.  Min.  A.] 
BERIBE'RI.  (An  Hindostan  word  signifying  a 
sheep.)  Beriberia.  A species  of  palsy,  common  in 
some  parts  of  the  East  Indies,  according  to  Bontius. 
In  this  disease,  the  patients  lift  up  their  legs  very  much 
in  the  same«manner  as  is  usual  with  sheep.  Bontius 
adds,  that  this  palsy  is  a kind  of  trembling,  in  which 
there  is  deprivation  of  the  motion  and  sensation  of  the 
hands  and  feet,  and  sometimes  of  the  body. 

BERKENHOUT,  John,  born  at  Leeds,  about  the 
year  1730.  His  medical  studies  were  commenced  late 
in  fife,  having  graduated  at  Leyden  only  in  1765 ; nor 
did  he  long  continue  the  practice  of  medicine.  His 
“Pharmacopoeia  Medica,”  however,  was  very  much 
approved,  and  has  since  passed  through  many  edi- 
tions ; his  other  medical  publications  are  of  little  im- 
portance. He  died  in  1791. 

Bermudas  berry.  See  Sapindus  saponaria. 

BERRY.  See  Bacca. 

Bers.  Formerly  the  name  of  an  exhilarating 
electuary. 

Be'rula.  An  old  name  for  brooklime. 

Be'rula  callica.  Upright  water  parsnip. 

I 


BERYL.  Aquamarine.  A precious  mineral, 
harder  than  the  emerald,  of  a green,  or  greenish-yellow 
colour,  found  in  Siberia,  France,  Saxony,  Brasil, 
Scotland,  and  Ireland. 

Bessa'nen.  (An  Arabian  word.)  A redness  of  the 
external  parts,  resembling  that  which  precedes  the 
leprosy ; it  occupies  the  face  and  extremities. — Avi- 
cenna. 

Be'sto.  A name  in  Oribasius  for  a species  of 
saxifrage. 

BE'TA  (So  called  from  the  river  Bostis , in  Spain, 
where  it  grows  naturally ; or,  according  to  Blanchard, 
from  the  Greek  letter  (Srjra,  which  it  is  said  to  resem- 
ble when  turgid  with  seed.)  The  beet. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Digynia.  The 
beet. 

2.  The  pharmacoposial  name  of  the  common  beet. 

See  Beta  vulgaris. 

Beta  hybrida.  The  plant  which  affords  the  root 
of  scarcity.  Mangel  wurzel  of  the  Germans ; a large 
root.  It  contains  much  of  the  saccharine  principle, 
and  is  very  nourishing.  Applied  externally  it  is  useful 
in  cleaning  foul  ulcers  ; and  is  a better  application 
than  the.  carrot. 

Beta  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
beet  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Beta  :—fioribus  conges- 
ts of  Linnreua.  The  root  of  this  plant  is  frequently 
eaten  by  the  French ; it  may  be  considered  as  nutri- 
tious and  antiscorbutic,  and  forms  a very  elegant  pickle 
with  vinegar.  The  root  and  leaves,  although  for- 
merly employed  as  laxatives  and  emollients,  are  now 
forgotten.  A considerable  quantity  of  sugar  may  be 
obtained  from  the  root  of  the  beet.  It  is  likewise  said, 
that  if  beet  roots  be  dried  in  the  same  manner  as  malt, 
after  the  greater  part  of  their  juice  is  pressed  out  very 
good  beer  may  be  made  from  them.  It  is  occasionally 
used  to  improve  the  colour  of  claret. 

Betele.  Bethle ; Betle;  Betelle.  An  oriental 
plant,  like  the  tail  of  a lizard.  It  is  chewed  by  the  In- 
dians, and  makes  the  teeth  black  ; is  cordial  and  exhi- 
larating, and  in  very  general  use  throughout  the  east. 
It  is  supposed  to  be  the  long  pepper. 

BETONICA.  (Corrupted  from  Vettonica , which 
is  derived  from  the  Vectones , an  ancient  people  of 
Spain.)  Betony. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
nasan  system.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Gymnos- 
permia. 

2.  The  pliarmacopoeial  name  of  the  wood  betony. 

See  Betonica  officinalis. 

Betonica  aquatica.  See  Scrophularia  aquatica. 

Betonica  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  betony  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Betonica  purpurea  j 
Betonica  vulgaris  ; Cestrum;  Vetonica  cordi ; Beto- 
nica— spica  interrupt  a.)  corollarum  labii  lacinia  inter- 
media emarginata  of  Linnaeus.  The  leaves  and  tops 
of  this  plant  have  an  agreeable,  but  weak  smell;  and 
to  the  taste  they  discover  a slight  warmth,  accompa- 
nied with  some  degree  of  adstringency  and  bitterness. 
The  powder  of  the  leaves  of  betony,  snuffed  up  the 
nose,  provokes  sneezing;  and  hence  it  is  sometimes 
made  an  ingredient  in  sternutatory  powders.  Its 
leaves  are  sometimes  smoked  like  tobacco.  The  roots 
differ  greatly,  in  their  quality,  from  the  other  parts ; 
their  taste  is  very  bitter  and  nauseous ; taken  in  a 
small  dose,  they  vomit  and  purge  violently,  and  are 
supposed  to  have  somewhat  in  common  with  the  roots 
of  hellebore.  Like  many  other  plants,  formerly  in 
high  medical  estimation,  betony  is  now  almost  entirely 
neglected.  Antonius  Musa,  physician  to  the  emperor 
Augustus,  filled  a whole  volume  with  enumerating  its 
virtues,  stating  it  as  a remedy  for  no  less  than  forty- 
seven  disorders;  and  hence  in  Italy  the  proverbial 
compliment,  You  have  more  virtues  than  betony. 

Betonica  pauli.  A species  of  veronica. 

Betonica  vulgaris.  See  Betonica  officinalis. 

BETONY.  See  Betonica. 

Betony , water.  See  Scrophularia  aquatica 

BETULA.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Monacia ; Order,  Tetrandria. 
Alder  and  birch. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  white  birch. 
See  Betula  alba. 

Betula  alba.  The  systematic  name  of  the  betula 
of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Bctpla  :—foliis  ovafis,  acn- 
minatis,  serratis , of  Linnceus.  The  juice,  leqves,  and 


BE  Z 


BIG 


bark  have  been  employed  medicinally.  If  the  tree  be 
bored  early  in  the  spring,  there  issues,  by  degrees,  a 
large  quantity  of  limpid,  watery,  sweetish  juice;  it  is 
said  that  one  tree  will  afford  from  one  to  two  gallons  a 
day.  This  juice  is  esteemed  as  an  antiscorbutic,  de- 
obstruent,  and  diuretic.  When  well  fermented,  and 
having  a proper  addition  of  raisins  in  its  composition, 
it  is  frequently  a rich  and  strong  liquor ; it  keeps  better 
than  many  of  the  other  made- wines,  often  for  a num- 
ber- of  years,  and  was  formerly  supposed  to  possess 
many  medical  virtues ; but  these  experience  does  not 
seem  to  sanction ; and  the  virtues  of  the  alder,  like 
those  of  many  other  simples  formerly  prized,  have 
sunk  into  oblivion.  The  leaves  and  bark  were  used 
externally  as  resolvents,  detergents,  and  antiseptics. 

Betula  alnus.  The  systematic  name  for  the  alnus 
of  the  pharmacopoeias.  The  common  alder. 

BEX.  (From  (irjvou , to  cough.)  A cough.  Dr. 
Good,  in  his  Nosology,  has  applied  this  term  to  a genus 
of  diseases,  which  embraces  three  species,  bex  humida , 
sicca , convulsiva. 

Bexagui'llo.  A name  given  to  the  white  ipecacu- 
anha, which  the  Spaniards  bring  from  Peru,  as  the 
Portuguese  do  the  brown  from  Brazil. 

Bexu'go.  The  root  of  the  JEmatitis  peruviana  of 
Caspar  Bauhin ; one  drachm  of  which  is  sufficient  for 
a purge. 

Be'zahan.  The  fossHe  bezoar. 

Beze'tta  ccerulea.  See  Croton  tinctorium 

BE  ZOAR.  (From  pa-zahar , Persian,  a destroyer 
of  poison.)  Lapis  bezoardicus.  Bezoard.  A pre- 
ternatural or  morbid  concretion  formed  in  the  bodies 
of  land-animals.  Several  of  these  kinds  of  substances 
were  formerly  celebrated  for  their  medicinal  virtues, 
and  distinguished  by  the  names  of  the  countries  from 
whence  they  came,  or  the  animal  ih  which  they  were 
found.  There  are  eight  kinds,  according  to  Fourcroy, 
Vauquelin,  and  Berthollet. 

1.  Superphosphate  of  lime,  which  forms  concretions 
in  the  intestines  of  many  mammalia. 

2.  Phosphate  of  magnesia,  semitransparent  and  yel- 
lowish, and  of  sp.grav.  2.160. 

3.  Phosphate  of  ammonia  and  magnesia.  A con- 
cretion of  a gray  or  brown  colour,  composed  of  radia- 
tions from  a centre.  It  is  found  in  the  intestines  of 
herbiverous  animals,  the  elephant,  horse,  &c. 

4.  Biliary,  colour  reddish-brown,  found  frequently  in 
the  intestines  and  gall-bladder  of  oxen,  and  used  by 
painters  for  an  orange-yellow  pigment.  It  is  inspis- 
sated bile. 

5.  Resinous.  The  oriental  bezoars,  procured  from 
unknown  animals,  belong  to  this  class  of  concretions. 
They  consist  of  concentric  layers,  are  fusible,  combus- 
tible, smooth,  soft,  and  finely  polished.  They  are 
composed  of  bile  and  resin. 

6.  Fungous,  consisting  of  pieces  of  the  Boletus  igni- 
arius , swallowed  by  the  animal. 

7.  Hairy. 

8.  Ligniform.  Three  bezoars  sent  to  Bonaparte  by 
the  king  of  Persia,  were  found  by  Berthollet  to  be  no- 
thing but  woody  fibre  agglomerated. 

Bezoars  were  formerly  considered  as  very  powerful 
alexipharmics,  so  much  so,  indeed,  that  other  medi- 
cines, possessed,  or  supposed  to  be  possessed,  of  alexi- 
pharmic  powers,  were  called  bezoardics;  and  so  effi- 
cacious were  they  once  thought,  that  they  were  bought 
for  ten  times  their  weight  in  gold.  These  virtues, 
however,  are  in  the  present  day  justly  denied  them,  as 
they  produce  no  other  effects  than  those  common  to 
the  saline  particles  which  they  contain,  and  which  may 
be  given  to  greater  advantage  from  other  sources.  A 
composition  of  bezoar  with  absorbent  powders,  has 
been  much  in  repute,  as  a popular  remedy  for  disor- 
ders in  children,  by  the  name  of  Gascoigne’s  powder 
and  Gascoigne’s  ball ; but  the  real  bezoar  was  rarely, 
if  ever,  used  for  these,  its  price  offering  such  a tempta- 
tion to  counterfeit  it.  Some  have  employed  for  this 
purpose,  a resinous  composition,  capable  of  melting  in 
the  fire,  and  soluble  in  alkohol ; but  Newmann  sup- 
posed that  those  nearest  resembling  it,  were  made  of 
gypsum,  chalk,'  or  some  other  earth,  to  which  the 
proper  colour  was  imparted  by  some  vegetable  juice. 

* We  understand,  however,  that  tobacco-pipe  clay, 
tinged  with  ox-gall,  is  commonly  employed,  at  least 
for  the  Gascoigne’s  powder ; this  giving  a yellow  tint 
to  paper,  rubbed  with  chalk,  and  a green  to  paper  rub- 
bed over  with  quick-lime ; which  are  considered  as 
130 


proofs  of  genuine  bezoar,  and  which  a vegetable  juice 
would  not  effect. 

Bezoar  bovinum.  Bezoar  of  the  ox. 

Bezoar  germanicum.  The  bezoar  from  the  alpine 

goat. 

Bezoar  hvstricis.  Lapis  porcinus  ; Lapis  ma 
lacensis ; Petro  del  porco.  The  bezoar  of  the  Indian 
porcupine;  said  to  be  found  in  the  gall-bladder  of  an 
Indian  porcupine,  particularly  in  the  province  of  Ma- 
lacca. This  concrete  differs  from  others:  it  has  an 
intensely  bitter  taste  ; and  on  being  steeped  in  water, 
for  a very  little  time,  impregnates  the  fluid  with  its 
bitterness,  and  with  aperient,  stomachic,  and,  as  it  is 
supposed,  with  alexipharmic  virtues.  How  far  it  dif 
fers  in  virtue  from  the  similar  concretions  found  in 
the  gall- bladder  of  the  ox,  and  other  animals,  does  not 
appear. 

Bezoar  microcosmicum.  The  calculus  found  in 
the  human  bladder. 

Bezoar  occidentale.  Occidental  bezoar.  This 
concretion  is  said  to  be  found  in  the  stomach  of  an  ani- 
mal of  the  stag  or  goat  kind,  a native  of  Peru,  &c.  It 
is  of  a larger  size  than  the  oriental  bezoar,  and  some- 
times as  large  as  a hen's  egg ; its  surface  is  rough,  and 
the  colour  green,  grayish,  or  brown. 

Bezoar  orientale.  Lapis  bezoar  orientalise 
Oriental  bezoar  stone.  This  concretion  is  said  to  be 
found  in  the  pylorus,  or  fourth  stomach  of  an  animal 
of  the  goat  kind,  which  inhabits  the  mountains  of 
Persia.  It  is  generally  about  the  size  of  a kidney 
bean,  of  a roundish  or  oblong  figure,  smooth,  and  of  a 
shining  olive  or  dark  greenish  colour. 

Bezoar  porcinum.  See  Bezoar  hystricis. 

Bezoar  simile.  The  bezoar  from  the  monkey. 

Bezoardica  radix.  See  Dorstenia. 

Bezoardicum  joviale.  Bezoar  with  tin.  It  dif- 
fered very  little  from  the  Antihecticum  Poterii. 

Bezoardicum  lunale.  A preparation  of  antimony 
and  silver. 

Bezoardicum  martiale.  A preparation  of  iron 
and  antimony. 

Bezoardicum  minerale.  A preparation  of  anti- 
mony, made  by  adding  nitrous  acid  to  butter  of  anti- 
mony. 

Bezoardicum  saturnr  A preparation  of  anti- 
mony and  lead. 

Bezo'ardicus  lapis.  See  Bezoar. 

Bezoardicus  pulvis.  The  powder  of  the  oriental 
bezoar. 

Bezoarticum  minerale.  A calx  of  antimony. 

BI.  (From  bis , twice.)  In  composition  signifies 
twice  or  double,  and  is  frequently  attached  to  other 
words  in  anatomy,  chemistry,  and  botany ; as  biceps , 
having  two  heads;  bicuspides , two  points, or  fangs; 
bilocular , with  two  cells ; bivalve , with  two  valves,  &.c. 

Bijeon.  Wine  made  from  sun-raisins,  fermented 
in  sea  water. 

Bibine'lla.  See  Pimpinella. 

BIBITO'RIUS.  ( Bibitorius , from  bibo,  to  drink, 
because  by  drawing  the  eye  inwards  towards  the  nose, 
it  causes  those  who  drink  to  look  into  the  cup.)  See 
Rectus  internus  oculi. 

BIBULUS.  Bibulous;  attracting  moisture ; charta 
bibula,  blotting  paper. 

BICAPSULARIS.  Having  two  capsules.  Pericar* 
pium  bicapsulare.  See  Capsula. 

BI'CEPS.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  caput , a head.) 
Two  heads.  Applied  to  muscles  from  their  having 
two  distinct  origins  or  heads. 

Biceps  brachii.  See  Biceps  flexor  cubiti* 

Biceps  cruris.  See  Biceps  flexor  cruris. 

Biceps  cubiti.  See  Biceps  flexor  cubiti. 

Biceps  externus.  See  Triceps  extensor  cubiti. 

Biceps  flexor  cruris.  Biceps  cruris  of  Albinus. 
Biceps  of  Winslow,  Douglas,  and  Cowper  ; and  Ischio- 
femoroperonien  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  leg,  situ 
ated  on  the  hind  part  of  the  thigh.  It  arises  by  two 
distinct  heads  ; the  first,  called  longus , arises  in  com- 
mon with  the  semitendinosus,  from  the  upper  and 
posterior  part  of  the  tuberosity  of  the  os  ischium. 
The  second,  called  brevis,  arises  from  the  linea  aspera, 
a little  below  the  termination  of  the  glutaeus  maximus, 
by  a fleshy  acute  beginning,  which  soon  grows  broader, 
as  it  descends  to  join  with  the  first  head,  a little  al>ove 
the  external  condyle  of  the  os  femoris.  It  is  inserted, 
by  a strong  tendon,  into  the  upper  part  of  the  head  of 
the  fibula.  Its  use  is  to  bend  the  leg.  This  muscle 


BIF 


BIL 


forms  what  is  called  the  outer  hamstring ; and,  between 
it  and  the  inner,  the  nervous  popliteus,  arteria  and 
vena  poplitea,  are  situated. 

Biceps  flexor  cubiti.  Biceps  brachii  of  Albinus. 
'Cor aco-radi alts,  seu  biceps  of  Winslow.  Biceps  in- 
tertills of  Douglas.  Biceps  internus  humeri  of  Cow- 
per.  Scapulo  coracoradial  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of 
the  forearm,  situated  on  the  forepart  of  the  os  humeri. 
It  arises  by  two  heads.  The  first  and  outermost, 
called  longus,  begins  tendinous  from  the  upper  edge 
of  the  glenoid  cavity  of  the  scapula,  passes  over  the 
head  of  the  os  humeri  within  the  joint,  and  in  its 
descent  without  the  joint,  is  enclosed  in  a groove  near 
the  head  of  the  os  humeri,  by  a membraneous  liga- 
ment that  proceeds  from  the  capsular  ligament  and 
adjacent  tendons.  The  second,  or  innermost  head, 
called  brevis , arises,  tendinous  and  fleshy,  from  the 
• coracoid  process  of  the  scapula,  in  common  with  the 
coracobrachialis  muscle.  A little  below  the  middle  of 
the  forepart  of  the  os  humeri,  these  heads  unite.  It  is 
inserted  by  a strong  roundish  tendon  into  the  tubercle 
on  the  upper  end  of  the  radius  internally.  Its  use  is 
to  turn  the  hand  supine,  and  to  bend  the  forearm.  At 
the  bending  of  the  elbow,  where  it  begins  to  grow  ten- 
dinous, it  sends  off  an  aponeurosis,  which  covers  all 
the  muscles  on  the  inside  of  the  forearm,  and  joins 
with  another  tendinous  membrane,  which  is  sent  otf 
from  the  triceps  extensor  cubiti,  and  covers  all  the 
muscles  on  the  outside  of  the  forearm,  and  a number 
of  the  fibres,  from  opposite  sides,  decussate  each  other. 
It  serves  to  strengthen  the  muscles,  by  keeping  them 
from  swelling  too  much  outwardly  when  in  action, 
and  a number  of  their  fleshy  fibres  take  their  origin 
ftom  it. 

Biceps  internus.  See  Biceps  flexor  cubiti. 

BicHi'ctfi®.  An  epithet  of  certain  pectorals,  or 
■rather  troches,  described  by  Rhazes,  which  were  made 
'of  liquorice,  &c. 

Bi'chos.  A Portuguese  name  for  the  worms  that 
get  under  the  toe  of  the  people  in  the  Indies,  which 
•are  destroyed  by  the  oil  of  cashew  nut. 

Bici.  The  Indian  name  of  an  intoxicating  liquor, 
‘made  from  Turkey  wheat  in  South  America.  See 
wheat , Turkey* 

BI'CORNIS.  (From  bis , twice,  and  cornu , a horn.) 

1.  An  epithet  sometimes  applied  to  the  os  hyoides, 
Which  has  two  processes,  or  horns. 

2.  In  former  times,  to  muscles  that  had  two  termi- 
nations. 

3.  A name  given  to  those  plants,  the  anther®  of 
Which  have  the  appearance  of  two  horns. 

Bicornes  plant®.  The  name  of  an  order  of 
plants  in  the  natural  method  of  Linnaeus  and  Gerard. 

BICUSPIDATUS.  Having  two  points.  See  Bi- 
'ouspis. 

BICU'SPIS.  (From  bis , twice,  and  cuspis,  a spear.) 
1.  The  name  of  those  teeth  which  have  double  points, 
•or  fangs.  See  Teeth. 

2.  Applied  to  leaves  which  terminate  by  two  points ; 
folia  bicuspida , or  bicuspidata. 

BI'DENS.  (From  bis , twice,  and  dens,  a tooth  ; so 
'called  from  its  being  deeply  serrated,  or  indented.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linn®an  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  cequalis. 

Bidens  tripartita.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
hemp  agrimony,  formerly  used  as  a hitter  and  aperient, 
:but  not  in  the  practice  of  the  present  day. 

BIDLOO,  Godfrey,  a celebrated  anatomist,  born  at 
Amsterdam,  in  1649.  After  practising  several  years  as 
a surgeon,  he  was  appointed  physician  to  William  III., 
and  in  1694,  made  professor  of  anatomy  and  surgery 
•at  Leyden.  He  published  105  very  splendid,  though 
rather  inaccurate  anatomical  tables,  with  explana- 
tions ; and  several  minor  works.  His  nephew,  JVicho- 
2 as,  was  physician  to  the  Czar  Peter  I. 

BIENNIS.  Biennial.  A biennial  plant  is  one,  as 
the  term  imports,  of  two  year’s  duration.  Of  this 
tribe  there  are  numerous  plants,  which  being  raised 
one  year  from  the  seed,  generally  attain  perfection  the 
same  year,  or  within  about  twelve  months,  shooting 
Tip  stalks,  producing  flowers,  and  perfecting  seeds  in 
the  following  spring  or  summer,  and  soon  after  com- 
monly perish. 

Bifariam.  In  two  parts. 

BIFER.  (From  bis , twice,  and  fero,  to  bear.)  A 
plant  is  so  called,  which  bears  twice  in  the  year,  in 
■spring  and  autumn,  as  is  common  between  tlie  tropics. 


BIFIDUS.  Forked.  Divided  into  two ; as  a bifid 
seed-vessel  in  Adoxa  moschatellina , petala  bifida  in  the 
Silene  nocturna  and  Alyssum  incanurn. 

BIFLORUS.  Bearing  two  flowers;  as pedunculus 
bifiorus. 

BIFORTUM.  Applied  to  a leaf  which  points  two 
ways. 

BIFORUS.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  forus,  a door.) 
Two-doored,  or  bivalved.  A class  of  plants  is  so  de- 
nominated in  some  natural  arrangements,  constituted 
by  those  which  have  a pericarp,  or  seed-vessel,  fur- 
nished with  two  valves. 

BIFURCATE.  ( Bifurcus ; from  bis,  twice,  and 
furca,  a fork.)  A vessel,  or  nerve,  stem,  root,  & c.  is 
said  to  bifurcate  when  it  divides  into  two  branches  ; 
thus  the  bifurcation  of  the  aorta,  &c. 

BIFURCATIO.  Bifurcation. 

BIFURCATUS.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  furca,  a 
fork.)  Forked.  See  Bifurcate  and  Dichotomus. 

BIGA'STERt  ( Bigaster : from  bis , twice,  and 

ya^r/p,  a belly.)  A name  given  to  muscles  which  have 
two  bellies. 

BIGEMINATUS.  (From  bis,  and  gemini , twins.) 
Twice  paired.  Biconjugatus.  A leaf  is  so  called 
when  near  the  apex  of  the  common  petiole  there  is  a 
single  pair  of  secondary  petioles,  each  of  which  sup- 
port a pair  of  opposite  leaflets ; as  in  Mimosa  un- 
guis cati. 

BIII'ERNIUS.  (From  bis,  double,  and  hernia,  a 
disease  so  called.)  Having  a double  hernia  or  one  on 
each  side. 

Bihydroguret  of  carbon.  See  Carburetled  hydrogen. 

BIJUGUS.  A winged  leaf  is  termed  folium  biju- 
gum,  which  bears  two  pairs  of  leaflets. 

BILABIATUS.  Two-lipped.  Often  used  in  bo- 
tany ; as .pericarpium  bilabiatum ; corolla  bilabeata , Sec. 

BILACINIATUS.  Applied  to  a leaf  Folium  bila- 
ciniatum;  when  cut  into  two  segments. 

Bila'den.  A name  of  iron. 

BILAMELLATUS.  Composed  of  two  lamina. 

Bilberry  bean.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

BILDSTEIN.  See  Figurestone. 

BILE.  ( Bilis . N®vius  derives  it  from  bis,  twice, 
and  lis,  contention ; as  being  supposed  to  be  the  cause 
of  anger  and  dispute.)  The  gall.  A bitter  fluid,  se- 
creted in  the  glandular  substance  of  the  liver;  in  part 
flowing  into  the  intestines,  and  in  part  regurgitating 
into  the  gall-bladder.  The  secretory  organs  of  this 
fluid  are  the  penioilli  of  the  liver,  which  terminate  in 
very  minute  canals,  called  biliary  ducts.  The  biliary 
ducts  pour  their  bile  into  the  ductus  hepaticus , which 
conveys  it  into  the  ductus  communis  choledochus , from 
whence  it  is  in  part  carried  into  the  duodenum.  The 
other  part  of  the  bile  regurgitates  through  the  cystic 
duct  into  the  gall-bladder:  for  hepatic  bile,  except  du- 
ring digestion,  cannot  flow  into  the  duodenum,  which 
contracts  when  empty;  hence  it  necessarily  regurgi- 
tates into  the  gall-bladder.  The  branches  of  the  vena 
portce  contribute  most  to  the  secretion  of  bile ; its  pe- 
culiar blood,  returning  from  the  abdominal  viscera,  is 
supposed  to  be,  in  some  respects,  different  from  other 
venal  blood,  and  to  answer  exactly  to  the  nature  of 
bile.  It  is  not  yet  ascertained  clearly  whether  the 
florid  blood  in  the  hepatic  artery,  merely  nourishes  the 
liver,  or  whether,  at  the  same  time,  it  contributes  a 
certain  principle,  necessary  for  the  formation  of  bile. 
It  has  been  supposed,  by  physiologists,  that  cystic  bile 
was  secreted  by  the  arterial  vessels  of  the  gall-bladder ; 
but  the  fallacy  of  this  opinion  is  proved  by  making  a 
ligature  on  the  cystic  duct  of  a living  animal.  From 
what  has  been  said,  it  appears  that  there  are,  as  it 
were,  two  kinds  of  bile  in  the  human  body: — 

1.  Hepatic  bile , which  flows  from  the  liver  into  the 
duodenum : this  is  thin,  of  a faint  yellow  colour,  in- 
odorous, and  very  slightly  bitter,  otherwise  the  liver 
of  animals  would  not  be  eatable. 

2.  Cystic  bile,  which  regurgitates  from  the  hepatic 
duct  into  the  gall-bladder,  and  there,  from  stagnating, 
becomes  thicker,  the  aqueous  part  being  absoibed  by 
lymphatic  vessels,  and  more  acrid  from  concentration 
Healthy  bile  is  of  a yellow,  green  colour;  of  a plastic 
consistence,  like  thin  oil,  and  when  very  much  agitated, 
it  froths  like  soap  and  water:  its  smell  is  fatuous, 
somewhat  like  musk,  especially  the  putrefying  or  eva- 
porating bile  of  animals  : its  taste  is  bitter. 

The  primary  uses  of  this  fluid,  so  important  to  the 
animal  economy,  are : 


131 


B1L 


DIP 


1.  To  separate  the  chyle  from  the  chyme : thus  chyle 
is  never  observed  in  the  duodenum  before  the  chyme 
has  been  mixed  with  the  bile  : and  thus  it  is  that  oil 
is  extricated  from  linen  by  the  bile  oLanimals. 

2.  By  its  acridity  it  excites  the  peristaltic  motion  of 
the  intestines ; hence  the  bowels  are  so  inactive  in 
people  with  jaundice. 

3.  It  imparts  a yellow  colour  to  the  excrements : 
thus  we  observe  the  white  colour  of  the  faeces  in  jaun- 
dice, in  which  disease  the  flow  of  bile  into  the  duode- 
num is  entirely  prevented. 

4.  It  prevents  the  abundance  of  mucus  and  acidity 
in  the  primae  viae ; hence  acid,  pituitous,  and  vermin- 
ous saburra  are  common  from  deficient  or  inert  bile. 

The  chemical  analysis  of  bile  has  been  principally 
illustrated  by  Mons.  Thenard.  “ Ox  bile  is  usually 
of  a greenish-yellow  colour,  rarely  of  a deep  green. 
By  its  colour  it  changes  the  blue  of  turnsole  and  violet 
to  a reddish-yeljow.  At  once  very  bitter,  and  slightly 
sweet,  its  taste  is  scarcely  supportable.  Its  smell, 
though  feeble,  is  easy  to  recognise,  and  approaches 
somewhat  to  the  nauseous  odour  of  certain  fatty  mat- 
ters, when  they  are  heated.  Its  specific  gravity  varies 
very  little.  It  is  about  1.026  at  43°  F.  It  is  some- 
times limpid,  and  at  others  disturbed  with  a yellow 
matter,  from  which  it  may  be  easily  separated  by 
water : its  consistence  varies  from  that  of  a thin  muci- 
lage, to  viscidity.”  Cadet  regarded  it  as  a kind  of 
soap.  This  opinion  was  firsf  refuted  by  Thenard. 
According  to  this  able  chemist,  800  parts  of  ox  bile 
are  composed  of  700  water,  15  resinous  matters,  60 
picromel,  about  4 of  a yellow  matter,  4 of  soda,  2 
phosphate  of  soda,  3.5  muriates  of  soda  and  potassa, 
0.8  sulphate  of  soda,  1.2  phosphate  of  lime,  and  a 
trace  of  oxide  of  iron.  When  distilled  to  dryness,  it 
leaves  from  l-8th  to  l-9th  of  solid  matter,  which,  urged 
with  a higher  heat,  is  resolved  into  the  usual  igneous 
products  of  animal  analysis;  only  with. more  oil  and 
less.carbonate  of  ammonia. 

Exposed  for  some  time  in  an  open  vessel,  the  bile 
gradually  corrupts,  and  lets  fall  a small  quantity  of  a 
yellowish  matter ; . then  its  mucilage  decomposes. 
Thus  the  putrefactive  process  is  very  inactive,  and  the 
odour  it  exhales  is  not  insupportable,  but  in  some 
cases  has  been  thought  to  resemble  that  of  musk. 
Water  and  alkohol  combine  in  all  proportions  with 
bile.  When  a very  little  acid  is  poured  into  bile,  it 
becomes  slightly  turbid,  and  reddens  litmus : when 
more  is  added,  the  precipitate  augments,  particularly 
if  sulphuric  acid  be  employed.  It  is  formed  of  a yel- 
low animal  matter,  with  very  little  resin.  Potassa 
and  soda  increase  the  thinness  and  transparency  of 
bile.  Acetate  of  lead  precipitates  the  yellow  matter, 
and  the  sulphuric  and  phosphoric  acids  of  the  bile. 
The  solution  of  the  subacetate  precipitates  not  only 
these  bodies,  but  also  the  picromel  and  the  muriatic 
acid,  all  combined  with  the  oxide  of  lead.  The  acetic 
acid  remains  in  the  liquid  united  to  the  soda.  The 
greater  number  of  fatty  substances  are  capable  of 
being  dissolved  by  bile.  This  property,  which  made  it 
be  considered  a soap,  is  owing  to  the  soda,  and  to  the 
triple  compound  of  soda,  resin,  and  picromel.  Scourers 
sometimes  prefer  it  to  soap,  for  cleansing  woollen. 
The  bile  of  the  calf,  the  dog,  and  the  sheep,  are  similar 
to  that  of  the  ox.  The  bile  of  the  sow  contains  no 
picromel.  It  is  merely  a soda-resinous  soap.  Human 
bile  is  peculiar.  It  varies  in  colour,  sometimes  being 
green,  generally  yellowish-brown,  occasionally  almost 
colourless.  Its  taste  is  not  very  bitter.  In  the  gall- 
bladder it  is  seldom  limpid,  containing  often,  like  that 
of  the  ox,  a certain  quantity  of  yellow  matter  in  sus- 
pension. At  times  this  is  in  such  quantity,  as  to  ren- 
der the  bile  somewhat  grumous.  Filtered  and  boiled, 
it  becomes  very  turbid,  and  diffuses  the  odour  of  white 
of  egg.  When  evaporated  to  dryness,  there  results  a 
brown  extract,  equal  in  weight  to  1-llth  of  the  bile. 
By  calcination  we  obtain  the  same  salts  as  from  ox  bile. 

All  the  acids  decompose  human  bile,  and  occasion 
an  abundant  precipitate  of  albumen  and  resin,  which 
are  easily  separable  by  alkohol.  One  part  of  nitric 
acid,  sp.  grav.  1.210,  saturates  100  of  bile.  On  pouring 
into  it  a solution  of  sugar  of  lead,  it  is  changed  into  a 
liquid  of  a light-yellow  colour,  in  which  no  picromel 
can  be  found,  and  which  contains  only  acetate  of 
soda  and  some  traces  of  animal  matter.  Human  bile 
appears  hence  to  be  formed,  by  Thenard,  in  1100 
parts ; of  1000  water ; from  2 to  10  yellow  insoluble 


matter;  42  albumen;  41  resin;  5.6  soda;  and  45 
phosphates  of  soda  of  lime,  sulphate  of  soda,  muriate 
of  soda,  and  oxide  of  iron.  But  by  Berzelius,  its  con- 
stituents are  in  1000  parts : 908.4  water ; 80  picromel ; 
3 albumen ; 4.1  soda ; 0.1  phosphate  of  lime ; 3.4 
common  salt ; and  1 phosphate  of  soda,  with  some 
phosphate  of  lime. 

BILGUER,  John  Ulrick,  was  born  at  Coire,  in. 
Swisserland.  He  practised  surgery  at  Beilin  with 
such  reputation,  that  he  was  appointed,  by  the  great 
Frederick,  Surgeon-General  to  the  Prussian  army. 
It  was  then  the  general  practice  to  amputate  in  bad 
compound  fractures ; and  being  struck  with  the  small 
proportion  of  those  who  recovered  after  the  operation, 
he  was  led  to  try  more  lenient  methods  ; from  which 
meeting  with  much  better  success,  he  published  as  a 
thesis,  on  graduating  at  Halle,  in  1761,  a pretty  general 
condemnation  of  amputation.  This  work  attracted 
much  notice  throughout  Europe,  and  materially  check- 
ed the  unnecessary  use  of  the  knife.  In  his  “ Instruc- 
tions for  Hospital  Surgeons,”  which  appeared  soon 
after,  he  insisted  farther  on  the  same  subject;  and 
where  amputation  was  unavoidable,  he  advised  leav- 
ing a portion  of  the  integuments,  which  is  now  gene- 
rally adopted. 

BI  LIARY.  ( Biliaris ; from  bilis,  the  bile.)  Of 
or  belonging  to  the  bile. 

Biliary  duct.  Ductus  biliosus.  The  very  vas- 
cular glandules , which  compose  almost  the  whole 
substance  of  the  liver,  terminate  in  very  small  canals, 
called  biliary  ducts , which  at  length  form  one  trunk, 
the  ductus  hepaticus.  Their  use  is  to  convey  the  bile, 
secreted  by  the  liver,  into  the  hepatic  duct ; this  uniting 
with  a duct  from  the  gall-bladder,  forms  one  common 
canal,  called  the  ductus  communis  choledochus , which 
conveys  the  bile  into  the  intestinal  canal. 

Bili'mbi.  (Indian.)  See  Malus  Jndica. 

BI'LIOUS.  ( Biliosus , from  bilis,  bile.)  A term 
very  generally  made  use  of,  to  express  diseases  which 
arise  from  too  copious  a secretion  of  bile : thus  bilious 
colic,  bilious  diarrhoea,  bilious  fever,  &c. 

BI'LIS.  See  Bile. 

Bilis  atra.  Black  bile.  The  supposed  cause 
among  the  ancients  of  melancholy. 

Bilis  cystica.  Bilis  fellea.  Cystic  bile.  The  bile 
when  in  the  gall-bladder  is  so  called  to  distinguish  it 
from  that  which  is  found  in  the  liver.  See  Bile. 

Bilis  hepatica.  Hepatic  bile.  Bile  that  has  not 
entered  the  gall-bladder.  See  Bile. 

BI'LOBUS.  (From  bis,  double,  and  lobus,  the  end 
of  the  ear.)  Having  two  lobes,  resembling  the  tips  of 
ears ; applied  to  a leaf,  folium  bilobum,  when  it  is 
dbeply  divided  into  rounded  segments,  as  the  petals  of 
the  Geranium  pyrenaicum  and  striatum  which  are 
biiobed. 

BILOCULARIS  (From  bis , twice,  and  loculus , a 
little  cell.)  Two-celled ; applied  to  a capsule  which 
has  two  cells. 

Biloculares.  Is  the  name  of  a natural  order  of 
plants. 

BIME'STRIS.  (From  bis , twice,  and  mensis, 
month.)  Two  months  old. 

BINATUS.  Binus.  Binate.  A term  applied  to 
compound  leaves,  when  consisting  of  a pair  of  leaflet* 
only,  on  one  footstalk  as  in  the  great  everlasting  pea. 
and  other  species  of  lathyrus. 

BINDWEED.  See  Convolvulus  septum. 

BINERVIUS.  Two-nerved.  Having  two  ribs  oi 
nerves  very  apparent.  Hence,  folium  binerium. 

Binga'lle.  See  Casumuniar. 

Bino'culus.  (From  binus,  double,  and  oculus,  the 
eye.)  A bandage  for  securing  the  dressings  on  both  eyes. 

Bi'nsica.  A disordered  mind. — Helmont. 

Binsica  mors.  The  binsical,  or  that  death  which 
follows  a disordered  mind. 

BINUS.  (From  bis,  twice.)  Two  by  two;  by 
couplets;  applied  to  leaves  when  there  are  only  twc 
upon  a plant,  folia  bina;  as  in  Convallaria  majalis,  &c 

Bioly'chnium.  (From  (3iog,  life,  and  A vxviov,  o 
lamp.)  Vital  heat : also  the  name  of  an  officinal 
nostrum. 

Bi'ote.  (From  /?to s,  life.)  Life.  Also  light  food. 

BIOTH  A'NATI.  (From  (iia,  violence,  or  fiiog,  life, 
and  ^ava'Jos,  death.)  Those  who  die  a violent  death, 
or  suddenly,  as  if  there  were  no  space  between  life 
and  death. 

BIPARTITUS.  Bipartite.  Deeply  divided  almost 


BIS 


BIS 


the  basis ; as  calyx  bipartitus ; folium  bipartitum  ; 
perianthium  lipartitum ; and  pctala  bipartita. 

Bipkmu'lla.  See  Pimpinella. 

Bipene'lla.  See  Pimpinella. 

BIPIN  AT  IFIDUS.  Doubly  pinnatifid;  as  in  the 
long  rough-headed  poppy,  Papaver  anemone.  See 
Pinnatijidus. 

BIPINNATIFIDUS.  Doubly  pinnatifid;  applied 
to  a leaf.  See  Leaf. 

BIPINNATUS.  Doubly  pinnate.  A compound 
leaf  is  so  termed  when  the  secondary  petioles  are 
arranged  in  pairs  on  the  common  petiole,  and  each 
secondary  petiole  is  pinnate. 

Bi'ra.  Malt  liquor  or  beer. 

Bira'o.  Stone  Parsley. 

BIRCH.  See  Betula. 

BIRDLIME.  The  best  birdlime  is  made  of  the 
middle  bark  of  the  holly,  boiled  seven  or  eight  hours 
in  water,  till  it  is  soft  and  tender ; then  laid  in  heaps 
in  pits  in  the  ground  and  covered  with  stones,  the 
water  being  previously  drained  from  it ; and  in  this 
state  left  for  two  or  three  weeks  to  ferment,  till  it  is 
reduced  to  a kind  of  mucilage.  This  being  taken  from 
the  pit  is  pounded  in  a mortar  to  a paste,  washed  in 
river  water,  and  kneaded,  till  it  is  freed  from  extrane- 
ous matters.  In  this  state  it  is  left  four  or  five  days  in 
earthen  vessels,  to  ferment  and  purify  itself,  when  it  is 
fit  for  use. 

It  may  likewise  be  obtained  from  the  misletoe,  the 
Viburnum  lantana,  young  shoots  of  elder,  and  other 
vegetable  substances. 

It  is  sometimes  adulterated  with  turpentine,  oil,  vine- 
gar, and  other  matters. 

Good  birdlime  is  of  a greenish  colour,  and  sour  fla- 
vour ; gluey,  stringy,  and  tenacious  ; and  in  smell  re- 
sembling linseed  oil.  By  exposure  to  the  air  it  becomes 
dry  and  brittle,  so  that  it  may  be  powdered  ; but  its 
viscidity  is  restored  by  wetting  it.  It  reddens  tincture 
of  litmus.  Exposed  to  a gentle  heat  it  liquefies  slightly, 
swells  in  bubbles,  becomes  grumous,  emits  a smell  re- 
sembling that  of  animal  oils,  grows  brown,  but  reco- 
vers its  properties  on  cooling,  if  not  heated  too  much. 
With  a greater  heat  it  burns,  giving  out  a brisk  flame 
and  much  smoke.  The  residuum  contains  sulphate 
and  muriate  of  potassa,  carbonate  of  lime  and  alu- 
mina, with  a small  portion  of  iron. 

BIRDSTONGUE.  A name  given  to  the  seeds  of 
the  Flaxinus  excelsior  of  Linnteus. 

Bi'rsen.  (Hebrew  for  an  aperture.)  A deep  ulcer, 
or  imposthume  in  the  breast. 

BIRTHWORT.  See  Aristolochia. 

Birthwort , climbing.  See  Aristolochia  clematitis. 

Birthwort,  long-rooted.  See  Aristolochia  longa. 

Birthwort , snake-hilling.  See  Aristolochia  an- 

guicida. 

Birthwort,  three-lobcd  See  Arislolcchia  trilob ata. 

BISCO'CTUS.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  coquo , to 
boil.)  Twice  dressed.  It  is  chiefly  applied  to  bread 
much  baked,  as  biscuit. 

Biscute'lla.  Mustard. 

Bise'rmas.  A name  formerly  given  to  clary,  or 
garden  clary. 

BISHOP’S  WEED.  See  Ammi. 

BISILl'NGUA.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  lingua , a 
longue  ; so  called  from  its  appearance  of  being  double- 
tongued  ; that  is,  of  having  upon  each  leaf  a less  leaf.) 
The  Alexandrian  laurel. 

Bisma'lva.  From  vismalva,  quasi  viscam  malva , 
from  its  superior  viscidity.  The  water,  or  marsh- 
mallow. 

BI'SMUTH.  ( Bismuthum , from  Bismut,  Germ.) 
A metal  which  is  found  in  the  earth  in  very  few  dif- 
ferent states,  more  generally  native  or  in  the  metallic 
state.  Native  bismuth  is  met  with  in  solid  masses, 
and  also  in  small  particles  dispersed  in  and  frequently 
deposited  on  different  stones,  at  Schreeberg,  in  Saxony, 
Sweden,  Sec.  Sometimes  it  is  crystallized  in  four 
sided  tables,  or  indistinct  cubes.  It  exists  combined 
with  oxygen  m the  oxide  of  bismuth  ( bismuth  hochre ,) 
found  in  small  particles,  dispersed,  of  a bluish  or  yel- 
lowish-gray colour,  needle-shaped  and  capillary;  some- 
times laminated,  forming  small  cells.  It  is  also,  though 
more  seldom,  united  to  sulphur  and  iron  in  the  form  of 
a sulphuret  in  the  martial  sulphuretted  bismuth  ore. 
This  ore  has  a yellowish-gray  appearance,  resembling 
somewhat  the  martial  pyrites.  And  it  is  sometimes 
combined  with  arsenic. 


Bismuth  is  a metal  of  a yellowish  or  reddish-white 
colour,  little  subject  tfe  change  in  the  air.  It  is  some- 
what harder  than  lead,  and  is  scarcely,  if  at  all  malle- 
able ; being  easily  broken,  and  even  reduced  to  pow- 
der, by  the  hammer.  The  internal  face,  or  place  of 
fracture,  exhibits  large  shining  plates,  disposed  in  a 
variety  of  positions ; thin  pieces  are  considerably  sono- 
rous. At  a temperature  of  480°  Fahrenheit,  it  melts, 
and  its  surface  becomes  covered  with  a greenish-gray 
or  brown  oxide.  A stronger  heat  ignites  it,  and  causes 
it  to  burn  with  a small  blue  flame  ; at  the  same  time 
that  a yellowish  oxide,  known  by  the  name  of  flowers 
of  bismuth,  is  driven  up.  The  oxide  appears  to  rise  in 
consequence  of  the  combustion ; for  it  is  very  fixed, 
and  runs  into  a greenish  glass  when  exposed  to  heat 
alone. 

Bismuth  urged  by  a strong  heat  in  a close  vessel, 
sublimes  entire,  and  crystallizes' very  distinctly  when 
gradually  cooled. 

The  sulphuric  acid  has  a slight  action  upon  bismuth, 
when  it  is  concentrated  and  boiling.  Sulphur  <4U%  acid 
gas  is  exhaled,  and  part  of  the  bismuth  is  converted 
into  a white  oxide.  A small  portion  combines  with 
the  sulphuric  acid,  and  affords  a deliquescent  salt  in 
the  form  of  small  needles. 

The  nitric  acid  dissolves  bismuth  with  the  greatest 
rapidity  and  violence ; at  the  same  time  that  much 
heat  is  extricated,  and  a large  quantity  of  nitric  oxide 
escapes.  The  solution,  when  saturated,  affords  crys- 
tals as  it  cools ; the  salt  detonates  weakly,  and  leaves 
a yellow  oxide  behind,  which  effloresces  in  the  air. 
Upon  dissolving  this  salt  in  water,  it  renders  that  fluid 
of  a milky  white,  and  lets  fall  an  oxide  of  the  same 
colour. 

The  nitric  solution  of  bismuth  exhibits  the  same  pro- 
perty when  diluted  with  water,  most  of  the  metal 
falling  down  in  the  form  of  a white  oxide,  called  ma- 
gistery  of  bismuth.  This  precipitation*  of  the  nitric 
solution,  by  the  addition  of  water,  is  the  criterion  by 
which  bismuth-is  distinguished  from  most  other  metals. 
The  magistery  or  oxide  is  a very  white  and  subtile 
powder;  when  prepared  by  the  addition  of  a*large 
quantity  of  water,  it  is  used  as  a paint  for  the  com- 
plexion, and  is  thought  gradually  to  impair  the  skin. 
The  liberal  use  of  any  paint  for  the  skin  seems  indeed 
likely  to  do  this ; but  there  is  reason  to  suspect,  from 
the  resemblance  between  the  general  properties  of  lead 
and  bismuth,  that  the  oxide  of  tiiis  metal  may  be 
attended  with  effects  similar  to  those  which  the  oxides 
of  lead  are  known  to  produce.  If  a small  portion  of 
muriatic  acid  be  mixed  with  the  nitric,  and  the  preci- 
pitated oxide  be  washed  with  but  a small  quantity  of 
cold  water,  it  will  appear  in  minute  scales  of  a pearly 
lustre,  consisting  the  pearl  powder  of  perfumers. 
These  paints  are  liable  to  be  turned  black  by  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen  gas. 

The  muriatic'acid  does  not  readily  act  upon  bismuth. 

When  bismuth  is  exposed  to  chlorine  gas  it  takes 
fire,  and  is  converted  into  a chloride,  which,  formerly 
prepared  by  heating  the  metal  with  corrosive  subli- 
mate, was  called  butter  of  bismuth.  The  chloride  is 
of  a grayish-white  colour,  a granular  texture,  and  is 
opaque.  It  is  fixed  at  a red  heat.  When  iodine  and 
bismuth  are  heated  together,  they  readily  form  an 
iodide  of  an  orange  yellow  colour,  insoluble  in  water, 
but  easily  dissolved  in  potassa  ley. 

Alkalis  likewise  precipitate  its  oxide  ; but  not  of  so 
beautiful  a white  colour  as  that  afforded  by  the  affu- 
sion of  pure  water. 

The  gallic  acid  precipitates  bismuth  of  a greenisli- 
yellow,  as  ferroprussiate  of  potassa  does  of  a yellow- 
ish colour. 

There  appears  to  be  two  sulphurets,  the  first  a com- 
pound of  100  bismuth  to  22.34  sulphur ; the  second  of 
100  to  46.5  : the  second  is  a bisulphuret. 

The  metal  unites  with  most  metallic  substances,  and 
renders  them  in  general  more  fusible.  When  calcined 
with  the  imperfect  metals,  its  glass  dissolves  them,  and 
produces  the  same  effect  as  lead  in  cupillation ; in 
which  process  it  is  even  said  to  be  preferable  to  lead. 

Bismuth  is  used  in  the  composition  of  pewter,  in  the 
fabrication  of  printers’  types,  and  in  various  other  me- 
tallic mixtures.  With  an  equal  weight  of  lead,  it 
forms  a brilliant  white  alloy,  much  harder  than  lead, 
and  more  malleable  than  bismuth,  though  not  ductile  • 
and  if  the  proportion  of  lead  be  increased,  it  is  ren 
dered  still  more  malleable.  Eight  parts  of  bismuth 


BIS 


BIT 


five  of'lead,  and  three  of  tin,  constitute  the  fusible 
metal,  sometimes  called  Newton’s,  from  its  discoverer, 
which  melts  at  the  heat  of  boiling  water,  and  may  be 
fused  over  a candle  in  a piece  of  stiff  paper  without 
burning  the  paper.  One  part  of  bismuth,  with  five  of 
lead,  and  three  of  tin,  forms  plumbers’  solder.  It  forms 
the  basis  of  a sympathetic  ink.  The  oxide  of  bis- 
muth precipitated  by  potassa  from  nitric  acid,  has 
been  recommended  in  spasmodic  disorders  of  the 
stomach,  and  gi  ven  in  doses  of  four  grains,  four  times 
a day.  A writer  in  the  Jena  Journal  says  he  has 
known  the  dose  carried  gradually. to  one  scruple  with- 
out injury. 

Bismuth  is  easily  separable,  in  the  dry  way,  from  its 
ores,  on  account  of  its  great  fusibility.  It  is  usual,  in 
the  processes  at  large,  to  throw  the  bismuth  ore  into  a 
fire  of  wood;  beneath  which  a hole  is  made  in  the 
ground  to  receive  the  metal,  and  defend  it  from  oxi- 
dation. The  same  process  may  be  imitated  in  the 
small  way,  in  the  examination  of  the  ores  of  this  metal ; 
nothing  more  being  necessary,  than  to  expose  it  to  a 
moderate  heat  in  a crucible,  with  a quantity  of  re- 
ducing flux ; taking  care,  at  the  same  time,  to  perform 
the  operation  as  speedily  as  possible,  that  the  bismuth 
may  be  neither  oxidized  nor  volatilized. 

[“In  the  United  States,  native  bismuth  has  been 
found-  in  Connecticut.  The  officinal  preparation  of 
this  metal  is  the  subnitrate.  As  a small  portion  of 
nitric  acid  remains  combined  with  the  oxide  of  bis- 
muth in  its  preparation,  it  is  properly  called  a-  subni- 
trate. The  precipitation  which  takes  place  from  the 
nitric  solution,  by  adding  mere  water,  is  a criterion  by 
which  bismuth  is  distinguished  from  most  other  me- 
tals. Subnitrate  of  bismuth  is  a fine,  soft  powder,  of  a 
pearly  white  colour,  and  nearly  destitute  of  taste  and 
smell.  It  changes  to  a dark  "colour  on  the  contact  of 
sulphuretted  or  carburetted  hydrogen. 

Under  the  name  of  magistery  of  bismuth,  this  sub- 
stance was  formerly  regarded  as  noxious  to  the  human 
system.  But  during  the  last  forty  years  it  has  been 
brought  into  the  practice  of  medicine,  and  found  to  be 
a salutary  tonic  to  the  stomach  and  organs  of  diges- 
tion. Its  use  commenced  in  Geneva,  and  it  has  since 
had  the  testimony  of  some  of  the  most  distinguished 
physicians  in  France  and  England  in  its  favour..  It 
has  also  in  this  country  generally  satisfied  the  expecta- 
tions formed  of  it.  In  dyspeptic  complaints,  especially 
in  patients  of  a nervous  temperament,  it  is  found  a 
very  useful  palliative,  and  sometimes  does  much  to- 
ward promoting  a cure.  It  is  an  important  medicine 
in  the  case  of  persons  habitually  subject  to  cramp  of 
the  stomach,  and  does  more  to  fortify  that  organ  against 
the  returns  of  the  disease  than  perhaps  any  of  the  to- 
nics in  common  use.  In  habitual  vomiting  or  nausea, 
both  from  a primary  affection  of  the  stomach, .and  from 
sympathy  with  other  parts*  it  frequently  gives  great 
relief.  Its  tonic  effect  appears  not  to  be  confined  to 
the  stomach,  since  it  is  found  to  do  good  in  different 
spasmodic  affections,  such  as  palpitations  and  chorea. 
Recently,  it  has  been  announced  to  cure  intermittents. 

A drachm  of  the  bismuth,  with  an  equal  quantity  of 
liquorice  powder,  divided  into  twelve  papers,  three  of 
which  are  to  be  taken  during  the  day,  will  commonly 
be  sufficient  to  display  the  activity  of  the  medicine. 
Large  quantities  taken  at  once  are  unsafe.” — Big. 
Mat.  Med.  A.] 

BISMU'THUM.  (From  bismut , German.)  See 
bismuth. 

BISSET,  Charles,  was  born  about  the  year  1716. 
After  studying  at  Edinburgh,  and  practising  some 
years  as  an  hospital-surgeon  in  Jamaica,  he  entered 
the  army;  but  soon  after  settled  in  Yorkshire,  and  in 
1755,  published  a Treatise  on  the  Scurvy.  But  his 
most  celebrated  work  is  an  “ Essay  on  the  Medical 
Constitution  of  Great  Britain,”  in  1762.  He  obtained 
three  years  after  a diploma  from  St.  Andrew’s,  and 
reached  his  73th  year. 

BISTORT.  See  Bistorta. 

BISTO'RTA.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  torqueo,  to 
bend ; so  called  from  the  contortions  of  its  roots.) 
Bistort.  See  Polygonum  bistorta. 

BISTOURY.  ( Bistoire , French.)  Any  small  knife 
for  surgical  purposes. 

BISTRE.  A brown  pigment,  consisting  of  the  finer 
parts  of  wood  soot,  separated  from  the  grosser  by 
washing.  The  soot  of  the  beech  is  said  to  make  the 
best. 


BISULPHATE.  A sulphate  with,  an  additional! 

quantity  of  sulphuric  acid. 

BIT  NOBEN.  Salt  of  bitumen.  A white  saline 
substance  has  lately  been  imported  from  India  by  this 
name,  which  is  not  a natural  production,  but  a Hindoo; 
preparation  of  great  antiquity.  It  is  called  in  the 
country,  bit  noben , padanoon,  and  soucherloon,  and 
popularly  khala  mimuc , or  black  salt.  Mr.  Henderson, 
of  Bengal,,  conjectures  it  to  be  the  sab  asphaltites  and 
sal  sodomenus  of  Pliny  and  Galen.  This  salt  is  far 
more  extensively  used  in  Hindostan  than  any  other 
medicine  whatever.  The  Hindoos  use  it  to  improve 
their  appetite  and  digestion.  They  consider  it  as  a- 
specific  for  obstructions  of  the  liver  and;  spleen  ; and  it 
is  in  high  estimation  with  them  in  paralytic  disorders, 
particularly  those  that  affect  the  organs  of  speech,, 
cutaneous  affections,  worms,  old  rheumatisms,  and. 
indeed  all  chronic  disorders  of  man  and  beast. 

BITERNATUS.  Twice-ternale.  Applied  to  com- 
pound leaves,  when  the  common  footstalk  supports- 
three  secondary  petioles  on  its  apex,  and  each  of  these 
support  three  leaflets;  as  in  JEgopodiunu 

Bithi'nici  kmplastrum.  A plaster  for  the  spleen.. 

Bi'thinos.  A Galenical  plaster. 

BITTER.  Amarus. 

BITTER  APPLE.  See  Cucumis  Colocynthis. 

BITTERN.  The  mother  water  which  remains 
after  the  crystallization  of  common  salt  in  sea-water, t 
or  the  water  of  salt  springs.  It  abounds  with  sulphate 
and  muriate  of  magnesia,  to  which  its  bitterness  is 
owing. 

BITTERSPAR.  Rhombspar.  A mineral  of  a 
grayish  or  yellowish  colour,  and,  somewhat  pearly 
lustre,  usually  found  embedded  in  serpentine,  chlorite, 
or  steatite,  and  found  in  the  Tyrol,  SaJsburg,  Dau- 
phiny,  Scotland,  and  the  Isle  of  Man. 

BITU'MEN.  (Ilflvpa,  ni'Jvs,  pine;  because  it 
flows  from  the  pine-tree ; or,  qvAd  vi  tumeat  i terra , 
from  its  bursting  forth  from  the  earth.)  This  term  in- 
cludes a considerable  range  of  inflammable  mineral 
substances,  burning  with  flame  in  the  open  air.  They 
are  of  different  consistency,  from  a thin  fluid  to  a. 
solid ; but  the  solids  are  for  the  most  part  liquefiable 
at  a moderate  heat.  The  fluid  are, 

1.  Naphtha ; a fine,  white,  thin,  fragrant,  colourless,, 
oil,  which  issues  out  of  white,  yellow,  or  black  clays 
in  Persia  and  Media,  This  is  highly  inflammable, 
and  is  decomposed  by  distillation.  It  dissolves  resins,, 
and  the  essential  oils  of  thyme  and  lavender ; but  is 
not  itself  soluble  either  in  alkohol  or  asther.  It  is  the 
lightest  of  all  the  dense  fluids,  its  specific  gravity  being 
0.708.  See  Naphtha. 

2.  Petroleum,  which  is  a yellow,  reddish,  brown, 
greenish,  or  blackish  oil,  found  dropping  from  rocks, 
or  issuing  from  the  earth,  in  the  dutchy  of  Modena,  and. 
in  various  other  parts  of  Europe  and  Asia.  This  like- 
wise is  insoluble  in  alkohol,  and  seems  to  consist  of 
naphtha,  thickened  by  exposure  to  the  atmosphere.  It 
contains  a portion  of  the  succinic  acid.  Sec  Pe- 
troleum. 

3.  Barbadoes  tar,  which  is  a viscid,  brown,  or  black; 
inflammable  substance,  insoluble  in  alkohol,  and  con- 
taining the  succinic  acid.  This  appears  to  be  the  mi- 
neral oil  in  its  third  stato  of  alteration. 

The  solid  are,  L.  Asphaltum,  mineral  pitch,  ofi 
which  there  are  three  varieties;  the  cohesive;  the 
semi-compact,  maltha;  the  compact,  or  asphaltum. 
These  are  smooth,  more  or  less  hard  or  brittle,  inflam- 
mable substances,  which  melt  easily,  and  burn  with- 
out leaving  any  or  but  little  ashes,  if  they  be  pure; 
They  are  slightly  and  partially  acted  on  by  alkohol; 
and  aether.  See  Asphaltum. 

2.  Mineral  tallow,  which  is-  a white  substance  off 
the  consistence  of  tallow,  and  as  greasy,  although, 
more  brittle.  It  was  found  in  the  sea  on  the  coasts  of 
Finland,  in  the  year  1736;  and  is  also  met  with  in* 
some  rocky  parts  of  Persia.  It  is  near  one-fifth  lighter 
than  tallow  ; bumawith  a blue  flame,  and  a smell  of 
grease,  leaving  a black  viscid  matter  behind,  which  is 
more  difficultly  consumed. 

3.  Elastic  bitumen,  or  mineral  caoutchouc,  of  which 
there  are  two  varieties.  Besides  these,  there  are  other 
bituminous  substances,  as  jet  and  amber,  which  ap- 
proach the  harder  bitumens  in  their  nature;  and  all1 
the  varieties  of  pit  coal,  and  the  bituminous  schistus, 
or  shale,  which  contain  more  or  less  of  bitumon  in- 

* their  composition.. 


134 


BLA 


BLA 


Bitumen  barbadense.  See  Petroleum  barbadense. 

Bitumen  judaicum.  Asphaltus.  Jews’  pitch.  A 
solid,  light,  bituminous  substance ; of  a dusky  colour  on 
the  outside,  and  a deep  shining  black  within ; of  very 
little  taste,  and  scarcely  any  smell,  unless  heated; 
when  it  emits  a strong  pitchy  one.  It  is  said  to  be 
found  plentifully  in  the  earth  in  several  parts  of 
Egypt,  and  floating  on  the  surface  of  the  Dead  sea. 
It  is  now  wholly  expunged  from  the  catalogue  of  offi- 
cinals  of  this  country ; but  was  formerly  esteemed  as 
a discutient,  sudorific,  and  emraenagogue. 

Bitumen  liquidum.  See  Petroleum. 

BITUMINOUS.  Of  the  nature  of  bitumen. 

[Bituminous  coal.  In  the  United  States,  coal  has 
been  explored  in  several  districts,  and  undoubtedly  ex- 
ists in  great  abundance.  In  Virginia,  near  Richmond, 
is  a deposite  of  coal  about  20  miles  in  length,  and  ten 
miles  in  breadth;  it  is  accompanied  by  a whitish  sand- 
stone and  shale,  with  vegetable  impressions,  as  is  usual 
in  the  independent  coal  formation,  which  here  lies  over, 
and  is  surrounded  by,  primitive  rocks.  In  Pennsylvania, 
coal  is  found  on  the  west  branch  of  the  Susquehanna!) ; 
in  various  places  west  of  that  branch ; also  on  the  Ju- 
niata, and  on  the  waters  of  the  Alleghany  and  Monon- 
gahela.  Indeed,  according  to  Mr.  Maclure,  the  inde- 
pendent coal  formation  extends  from  the  head  waters 
■of  the  Ohio,  with  some  interruptions,  to  the  waters  of 
the  Tombigbee  river,  in  Alabama. — See  Cl.  Min.  A.l 

Bituminous  limestone.  Found  near  Bristol,  and 
in  Galway,  in  Ireland.  The  Dalmatian  is  so  charged 
with  bitumen,  that  it  may  be  cut  like  soap,  and  is  used 
for  building  houses.  When  the  walls  are  reared,  fire 
is  applied  to  them,  and  they  burn  white. 

BIVALVIS.  Two-valved.  Applied  to  the  valves 
of  the  absorbents  in  anatomy,  and  in  botany  to  cap- 
sules.— Capsula  bivalvis. 

BIVASCULARIS.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  vascu- 
lum , a little  vessel.)  Having  two  cells. 

BIVE  NTER.  (From  bis,  twice,  and  venter,  a 
belly.)  A muscle  is  so  termed,  which  has  two  bellies. 

Biventer  cervicis.  A muscle  of  the  lower  jaw. 

Biventer  maxillje  inferioris.  See  Digaslricus. 

BI'XA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Polyandria.  Order,  Monogynia. 

Bixa  orellana.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
plant  affording  the  terra  orellana  or  anUotto  of  the 
shops  and  pharmacopoeias.  The  substance  so  called 
is  a ceraceous  mass  obtained  from  the  pellicles  of  the 
seeds,  fci  Jamaica  and  other  warm  climates,  it  is  con- 
sidered as  a useful  remedy  in  dysentery,  possessing 
adstringent  and  stomachic  qualities;  but  here  it  is 
only  used  to  colour  cheese,  and  some  other  articles. 

Bla'cci®.  The  measles. — Rliazes. 

BL  A'CKBERRY.  The  fruit  of  the  common  bram- 
bles.— See  Rubus  fruticosus. 

[In  the  United  States,  there  are  two  species  of  the 
blackberry,  the  fruit  of  which  is  eaten,  and  the  roots 
used  as  astringents.  They  are  the  Rubus  trivialis , or 
Dewberry,  or  running  blackberry,  and  the  Rubus  vii- 
losus , or  standing  blackberry. 

“ The  bark  of  the  root  of  the  dewberry , or  low 
blackberry,  a common  native  briar,  is  highly  astrin- 
gent, possessing  both  tannin  and  gallic  acid  in  large 
quantity.  It  is  a popular  remedy  in  cholera  infantum, 
to  which  disease  it  appears  well  suited  after  liberal 
evacuations  have  been  made.  In  the  secondary  stages 
of  dysentery,  and  in  diarrhoea,  after  the  removal  of 
offending  causes  from  the  alimentary  canal,  it  has 
been  resorted  to  with  success  in  controlling  the  dis- 
charges, and  giving  tone  to  the  bowels.  It  is  usually 
exhibited  in  strong  decoction. 

The  Rubus  villosus  is  commonly  distinguished  from 
the  preceding  by  the  name  of  high,  or  tall  blackberry. 
The  properties  of  the  two  are  the  same.” — See  Big. 
Mat.  Med. 

A jelly  made  of  the  fruit  is  an  excellent  domestic 
remedy  for  young  children  in  cholera  infantum,  after 
proper  evacuations.  A.1 

BLACK  CHALK.  A mineral  of  a bluish  black 
colour,  and  slaty  texture,  which  soils  the  fingers.  It 
is  found  in  primitive  mountains,  and  occurs  in  Caer- 
narvonshire, and  the  island  of  Isla. 

[Black  drop.  “ The  formula  for  this  preparation 
in  the  Pharmacopoeia,  is  essentially  the  same  with  the 
one  made  public  by  Dr.  Armstrong,  and  which,  under 
the  name  of  Black  Drop , has  been  known  and  prized 
in  England  for  a century  and  upwards.  As  the  recipe 


wants  the  usual  precision  of  pharmaceutical  formula!, 
it  may  be  proper  to  secure  a tolerable  uniformity  of 
strength,  by  boiling  the  first  ingredients  no  longer  than 
is  necessary  to  blend  them  together,  and  by  afterward 
exposing  them  in  a warm  place,  until  about  one-fourth 
of  their  original  volume  is  evaporated.  The  compound 
directed  in  the  Pharmacopoeia  should  afford  about  two 
pints  of  strained  liquor.  As  the  filtration  of  so  viscid 
a liquor  is  difficult,  it  maybe  strained  without  pressure 
through  a double  linen  bag. 

The  black  drop  is  a fermented  aromatic  vinegar  of 
opium.  Its  taste,  when  properly  prepared,  is  bitter  and 
acid,  the  saccharine  principle  being  changed  by  the 
fermentation.  Its  consistence  is  moderately  viscid. 

Acetous  solutions  of  opium  have  been  in  use  since 
the  days  of  Van  Helmont,  and  even  earlier.  Our  me- 
dical chemists  of  the  present  day  consider  that  the 
peculiarities  which  attend  the  operation  of  these  pre- 
parations depend  upon  the  formation  of  an  acetate  of 
morphia.  The  black  drop  has  sustained  its  popularity 
for  a great  length  of  time  on  account  of  its  favourable 
operation.  According  to  Dr.  Armstrong,  it  often  stays 
in  the  stomach  when  other  preparations  will  not,  and 
it  also  affects  the  head  less  than  laudanum.  Dr.  Paris 
and  other  medical  writers  give  their  testimony  to  its 
usefulness. 

About  ten  or  twelve  minims  form  a dose.  Notwith- 
standing the  advantages  ascribed  to  this  preparation,  it 
is  not  always  uniform  in  its  strength,  or  in  the  amount 
of  sediment  it  deposites.  It  is  probable  that  a better 
vinegar  of  opium  might  be  prepared.” — Big.  Mat. 
Med.  A.l 

BLACK  JACK.  Blende,  or  mock  lead ; an  ore 
of  zinc. 

BLACK  LEAD.  See  Plumbago. 

BLACKMORE,  Sir  Richard,  was  born  in  Wilt 
shire  about  the  year  1650.  After  studying  at  Oxford, 
he  took  his  degree  in  medicine  at  Padua,  then  settled 
in  London,  and  met  with  considerable  success,  inso- 
much that  he  wa3  appointed  physician  to  William  III. 
and  retained  the  same  office  under  Queen  Anne.  He 
then  published  several  long  and  dull  epic  poems,  which 
appear  to  have  materially  lessened  his  reputation  ; so 
that  his  opposition  to  the  inoculation  for  small-pox  had 
very  little  weight.  He  wrote  also  several  medical 
tracts,  which  are  little  known  at  present. 

BLACK  WADD.  One  of  the  ores  of  manganese. 

[Black  vomit.  This  is  one  of  the  fatal  symptoms 
of  yellow  fever,  it  being  a very  rare  case  for  a patient 
to  recover  after  its  occurrence. 

“ A memoir  on  the  analysis  of  black  vomit,  by  Dr. 
Cathral,  was  read  before  the  American  Philosophical 
Society  at  Philadelphia,  on  the  20th  June,  1800.  The 
experienced  and  intrepid  author  has  given  a description 
of  the  black  vomit,  has  analyzed  the  fluids  ejected  a 
few  hours  before  the  commencement  of  black  vomiting 
itself,  to  which  he  has  added  experiments  to  ascertain 
the  effects  of  black  vomit  on  the  living  system  of  man 
and  other  animals,  and  a synopsis  of  the  opinions  of 
authors  concerning  its  formation  and  qualities.  The 
experiments  show  that  this  singular  morbid  excretion 
contains  an  acid,  which  is  neither  carbonic , phospho- 
ric, nor  sulphuric ; and,  what  our  readers  will  hardly 
expect,  that  the  black  vomit  may  be  smelled,  tasted, 
and  swallowed , without  inducing  yellow  fever,  or  even 
any  sickness  at  all — so  little  infection  or  contagion  does 
it  seem  to  contain.  He  concludes  it  to  be  an  altered 
secretion  from  the  liver.” — Mew- York  Med.  Repos 
vol.  iv.  p.  75. 

“ Dr.  May,  of  Philadelphia,  dropped  the  matter  of 
black  vomit  into  his  eyes,  and  never  experienced  in- 
convenience or  sickness.” — Med.  Rep.  vol.  v.  p.  131. 

“ Dr.  Ffirth  of  Salem,  in  New-Jersey,  has  published 
a Dissertation  on  Malignant  Fever,  with  an  attempt  to 
prove  that  it  is  not  contagious.  In  this  he  relates  a 
number  of  experiments  which  he  has  made  upon  the 
matter  of  black  vomit,  as  discharged  by  persons  labour- 
ing under  that  disease.  He  inoculated  himself  in  the 
left  fore-arm  with  black  vomit  just  discharged  from  a 
moribund  patient ; a slight  inflammation  ensued, 
which  subsided  in  three  days,  and  the  wound  readily 
healed,  and  without  the  formation  of  pus.  To  avoid 
cavil  and  deception,  he  repeated  these  experiments 
above  twenty  times  on  various  parts  of  his  body,  with 
the  black  matter  collected  in  Philadelphia  during  the 
seasons  of  1802  and  1803.  He  put  it  into  his  eye,  with- 
out experiencing  more  inconvenience  than  coid  water 

135 


BLE 


BL1 


produces.  He  exposed  himself  to  the  exhalations  of 
it  while  acted  upon  by  heat  in  an  iron  skillet,  and  ex- 
perienced no  unpleasant  sensation.  He  swallowed 
the  thick  extractive  matter  which  remained  after  eva- 
poration, in  the  form  of  pills,  without  incommoding 
his  stomach.  He  even  went  so  far  as  to  mix  half  an 
ounce  of  fresh  black  vomit  with  an  ounce  and  a half 
of  water,  and  to  drink  it.  It  produced  no  more  effect 
tipon  his  stomach  than  so  much  water.  He  increased 
the  dose  to  two  ounces,  and  finally  swallowed  the 
black  vomit  in  like  quantity  without  any  dilution  at 
all,  and  without  sustaining  the  least  injury.  He  ino- 
culated himself  with  saliva  and  serum,  with  as  little 
inconvenience!  !”■ — Med.  Rep.  vol.  viii.  p.  70.  A.] 

BLADDER.  See  Urinary  bladder , and  Gall- 
bladder. 

Bladder , inflamed.  See  Cystitis. 

BLADE-BONE.  See  Scapula. 

BLAS'SITAS.  (From  blcesus.)  A defect  in  speech, 
called  stammering. 

Blje'sus.  (From  j3\air7a),  to  injure.)  A stam- 
merer. 

Bla'nca.  ( Blanc , French.)  A purging  mixture; 
so  called  because  it  was  supposed  to  evacuate  the 
white  phlegmatic  humours.  Also  white  lead. 

BLANCARD,  Stephen,  was  born  at  Leyden,  and 
raduated  at  Franeker,  in  1678.  He  settled  at  Amster- 
am,  and  published  many  anatomical  and  medical 
works ; Especially  one  on  morbid  anatomy,  contain- 
ing 200  cases,  and  a “ Lexicon  Medicum,”  which 
passed  through  numerous  editions. 

Bla'sa.  (Indian.)  A tree,  the  fruit  of  which  the 
Indians  powder,  and  use  to  destroy  worms. 

BLASIUS,  Gerarb,  son  of  a physician  at  Amster- 
dam, from  whom  he  derived  a great  predilection  for 
comparative  anatomy.  After  graduating  at  Leyden 
about  the  year  1646,  he  returned  to  his  native  city,  and 
acquired  so  much  reputation,  that  he  was  made  pro- 
fessor of  medicine  in  1660,  and  soon  after  physician  to 
the  hospital.  Besides  publishing  new  editions  of  seve- 
ral useful  works,  with  notes  comprehending  subse- 
quent improvements,  he  was  author  of  various  original 
ones,  especially  relating  to  comparative  and  morbid 
anatomy.  He  claimed  the  discovery  of  the  ductus 
salivaris,  asserting  he  had  pointed  it  out  to  Steno  ; to 
whom  it  has  been  commonly  ascribed. 

Blaste'ma.  (From  /?Aaj-<mt),  to  germinate.)  A 
bud  or  shoot.  Hippocrates  uses  it  to  signify  a cutane- 
ous pimple  like  a bud. 

Bla'stum  mosylitum.  Cassia  bark  kept  with  the 
wood. 

Bla'tta.  (From  (3\arro),  rt.o  hurt.)  A sort  of 
beetle,  or  bookworm  ; so  called  from  its  injuring  books 
or  clothes ; the  kermes  insect. 

[Blatta  is  the  generic  name  given  by  Linnaeus  to  the 
cock-roach,  which  infests  houses,  and  preys  upon  pro- 
visions, and  not  upon  clothes.  A.] 

Blatta'ria  lutea.  (From  blatta;  so  called,  be- 
cause, according  to  Pliny,  it  engenders  the  blatta.) 
The  Verbascum  blattaria,  or  herb  yellow  moth- 
mullein. 

BLEACHING.  The  chemical  art  by  which  the 
various  articles  used  for  clothing  are  deprived  of  their 
natural  dark  colour,  and  rendered  white. 

Bleaching  powder.  The  chloride  of  lime. 

Ble'chon.  (From  /?Aj 7%ao/iat,  to  bleat ; so  called 
according  to  Pliny,  because  if  sheep  taste  it  they  bleat.) 
The  herb,  wild  penny-royal.  See  Mentha  pulegium. 

BLEEDING.  See  Blood-letting  and  Hcemorrhagc. 

BLE'MA.  (From  Ga\ A<g,  to  inflict.)  A wound. 

BLE'NDE.  A species  of  zinc  ore,  formed  of  zinc 
in  combination  with  sulphur,  forming  a sulphuret  of 
zinc. 

BLE'NNA.  BAcwa.  Blena.  Mucus,  a thick  ex- 
crementitious  humour. 

BLENNORRHA'GIA.  (From  /?A tvva,  mucus,  and 
jkw,  to  flow.)  The  discharge  of  mucus  from  the 
urethra. 

BLENNORRIICE'A.  (From  /3A evva,  mucus,  and 
prw,  to  flow.)  1.  A gleet;  Gonorrhaa  mucosa.  A 
discharge  of  mucus  from  the  urethra,  arising  from 
weakness. 

2 The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Noso- 
logy, embracing  three  species,  Blennorrhcea  simplex, 
luodes,  and  chronica. 

BLE'PIIARA.  ( Quasi  (i\ eirovs  <f>apos , as  being  the 
cover  and  defence  of  the  sight.)  The  eyelids. 

136 


Blepha'rides.  (From  jSAs^apov.)  The  hair  upon 
the  eyelids ; also  the  part  of  the  eyelids  where  the  hair 
grows. 

BLEPHAROPHTHA'LMIA.  (From  ($\c<f>apov,  the 
eyelid,  and  ocf>6a\pia,  a disease  of  the  eye.)  An  in- 
flammation of  the  eyelid. 

BLEPHAROPTO'SIS.  (From  /3A eQapov,  the  eye- 
lid, and  from  vsnr]o),  to  fall.)  A prolapse,  or 

falling  down  of  the  upper  eyelid,  so  as  to  cover  the 
cornea.  See  Ptosis. 

BLEPHARO'TIS.  (From  (i\t<papov , the  eyelid.) 
An  inflammation  of  the  eyelids. 

Blepharo'xysis.  (From  (i\e<t>apov , the  eyelid,  and 
^£w,  to  scrape  off.)  1.  The  cleansing  of  the  eyelids. 

2.  Inflammation  of  the  eyelids. 

Blepharoxy'ston.  (From  (ihetyapov , the  eyelid, 
and  ^£w,  to  scrape  off)  A brush  for  the  eyes.  An  in- 
strument for  cleansing  or  scraping  off  foul  substances 
from  the  eyelids.  k 

BLESSED.  Bcnedictus.  Applied  to  remedies  and 
plants  from  their  supposed  virtues.  See  Benediclus. 

Blessed  Thistle.  See  Centaurea  benedicta. 

Blestri'smus.  (From  /3aAAw,  to  throw  about.) 
Phrenitic  restlessness. 

Ble'ta.  A word  used  by  Paracelsus  to  signify 
white,  and  applied  to  urine  when  it  is  milky,  and  pro- 
ceeds from  a disease  of  the  kidneys. 

Ble'ti.  ( Bletus , from  /JaAAw,  to  strike.)  Those 
seized  with  dyspnoea  or  suffocation. 

BLISTER.  Vesicatorium ; Epispasticum.  1.  The 
name  of  a topical  application,  Emplastrum  vesicato- 
rium, which  when  put  on  the  skin  raises  the  cuticle  in 
the  form  of  a vesicle,  filled  with  a serous  fluid.  Vari- 
ous substances  produce  this  effect  on  the  skin  ; but  the 
powder  of  the  cantharis,  or  blistering  fly,  is  what  ope- 
rates with  most  certainty  and  expedition,  and  is  now 
invariably  made  use  of  for  the  purpose. 

It  is  a principle  sufficiently  established  with  regard 
to  the  living  system,  that  where  a morbid  action  exists, 
it  may  often  be  removed  by  inducing  an  action  of  a 
different  kind  in  the  same  or  neighbouring  part.  On 
this  principle  is  explained  the  utility  of  blisters  in  local 
inflammation  and  spasmodic  action,  and  it  regulates 
their  application  in  pneumonia,  gastritis,  hepatitis, 
phrenitis,  angina,  rheumatism,  colic,  and  spasmodic 
affections  of  the  stomach ; diseases  in  which  they  are 
employed  with  the  most  marked  advantage.  A simi- 
lar principle  exists  with  respect  to  pain ; excising  one 
pain  often  relieves  another.  Hence  blisters  often  give 
relief  in  toothache,  and  some  other  painful  affections. 
Lastly,  blisters,  by  their  operation,  communicate  a 
stimulus  to  the  whole  system,  and  raise  the  vigour  of 
the  circulation.  Hence,  in  part,  their  utility  in  fevers 
of  the  typhoid  kind,  though  in  such  cases  they  are  used 
with  still  more  advantage  to  obviate  or  remove  local 
inflammation. 

When  it  is  not  wished  to  maintain  a discharge  from 
the  blistered  part,  it  is  sufficient  to  make  a puncture  in 
the  cuticle  to  let  out  the  fluid ; but  when  the  case  re- 
quires keeping  up  a secretion  of  pus,  the  surgeon  must 
remove  the  whole  of  the  detached  cuticle  with  a pair 
of  scissors,  and  dress  the  excoriated  surface  in  a par- 
ticular manner.  Practitioners  used  formerly  to  mix 
powder  of  cantharides  with  an  ointment,  and  dress  the 
part  with  this  composition.  But  such  a dressing  not 
unfrequently  occasioned  very  painful  affections  of  the 
bladder,  a scalding  sensation  in  making  of  W’ater,  and 
very  afflicting  stranguries.  The  treatment  of  such 
complaints  consists  in  removing  every  particle  of  the 
fly  from  the  blistered  part,  making  the  patient  drink 
abundantly  of  mucilaginous  drinks,  giving  emulsions 
and  some  doses  of  camphor. 

These  objections  to  the  employment  of  salves  con- 
taining the  lytta,/or  dressing  blistered  surfaces,  led  to 
the  use  of  mezereon,  euphorbium,  stlid  other  irritating 
substances,  which,  when  incorporated  with  ointment, 
form  very  proper  compositions  for  keeping  blisters  open, 
which  they  do  without  the  inconvenience  of  irritating 
the  bladder,  like  the  blistering  fly.  The  favourite  ap- 
plication, however,  for  keeping  open  blisters,  is  the 
savine  cerate,  which  was  brought  into  notice  by  Mr. 
Crowther  in  his  book  on  white  swellings.  (See  Ce- 
ratum  Sabivce.)  On  the  use  of  the  savine  cerate,  im- 
mediately after  the  cuticle  raised  by  the  blister  is  re- 
moved, says  Mr.  Crowther,  it  should  be  observed  that 
experience  has  proved  the  advantage  of  using  the  ap 
plication  lowered  by  a half  or  two-thirds  of  tha 


BLO 


BLO 


unguentum  cerse.  An  attention  to  this  direction  wiir 
produce  less  irritation  and  more  discharge,  than  if  the 
savine  cerate  were  used  in  its  full  strength.  Mr. 
Crovvther  says  also,  that  he  has  found  fomenting  the 
part  with  flannel,  wrung  out  of  warm  water,  a more 
easy  and  preferable  way  of  keeping  the  blistered  sur- 
face clean,  and  fit  for  the  impression  of  the  ointment, 
than  scraping  the  part,  as  has  been  directed  by  others. 
An  occasional  dressing  of  unguentum  resinae  flavae, 
he  has  found  a very  useful  application  for  rendering 
the  sore  free  from  an  appearance  of  slough,  or  rather 
dense  lymph,  which  has  sometimes  been  so  firm  in  its 
texture  as  to  be  separated  by  the  probe,  with  as  much 
readiness  as  the  cuticle  is  detached  after  blistering. 
As  the  discharge  diminishes,  the  strength  of  the  savine 
dressing  should  be  proportionably  increased.  The  ce- 
ratum  sabinae  must  be  used  in  a stronger,  or  weaker 
degree,  in  proportion  to  the  excitement  produced  on 
the  patient’s  skin. 

2.  Tiie  name  of  a vesicle  on  the  skin,  whether 
formed  by  a blistering  application,  or  arising  from  any 
other  cause. 

BLISTER-FLY.  See  Cantharis. 

Bli'tum  fcetidum.  See  Chenopodium  vulvaria. 

BLONDEL,  James  Augustus,  was  born  in  Eng- 
land of  a French  family,  and  admitted  licentiate  of  the 
College  of  Physicians  about  1720.  He  chiefly  distin- 
guished himself  by  controverting,  in  a very  able  man- 
ner, the  opinion  then  generally  received,  that  marks 
could  be  imprinted  on  the  foetus  by  the  imagination  of 
the  mother,  and  he  has  the  merit  of  contributing  very 
largely  to  the  removal  of  this  prejudice,  which  had 
prevailed  for  ages,  and  often  produced  much  mischief. 

BLOOD.  Sanguis.  A red  homogeneous  fluid,  of 
a saltish  taste,  and  somewhat  urinous  smell,  and  glu- 
tinous consistence,  which  circulates  in  the  cavities  of 
the  heart,  arteries,  and  veins.  The  quantity  is  esti- 
mated to  be  about  twenty-eight  pounds  in  an  adult;  of 
this,  four  parts  are  contained  in  the  veins,  and  a fifth 
in  the  arteries.  The  colour  of  the  blood  is  red ; in  the 
arteries  it  is  of  a florid  hue,  in  the  veins  darker ; ex- 
cept only  the  pulmonary  vessels  in  which  the  colour  is 
reversed.  The  blood  is  the  most  important  fluid  of  our 
body.  Some  physicians  and  anatomists  have  con- 
sidered it  as  alive,  and  have  formed  many  ingeni  us 
hypotheses  in  support  of  its  vitality.  The  temperature 
of  this  fluid  is  of  considerable  importance,  and  appears 
to  depend  upon  the  circulation  and  respiration.  The 
blood  of  man,  quadrupeds,  and  birds  is  hotter  than  the 
medium  they  inhabit;  hence  they  are  termed  animals 
of  warm  blood;  while  in  fishes  and  reptiles,  animals 
with  cold  blood , it  is  nearly  of  the  temperature  of  the 
medium  they  inhabit.  The  blood  possesses  remarkable 
physical  properties.  Its  colour  is  of  a dark  red,  it  is 
less  deep  in  certain  cases,  and  perhaps  even  scarlet. 
Its  odour  is  insipid,  and  sui  generis ; its  taste  is  also 
peculiar;  however,  it  is  known  to  contain  salts,  and 
principally  the  muriate  of  soda.  Its  specific  gravity  is 
a little  more  than  that  of  water.  Ilaller  found  its 
medium  as  1.0527 : 1.0000.  Its  capacity  for  caloric  may 
be  expressed  by  934,  that  of  arterial  blood  being  92i. 
Its  mean  temperature  is  31  degrees  of  Reaumur,  = 
102  F. 

Venous  blood,  being  extracted  from  its  proper  vessels, 
and  left  to  itself,  in  a short  time  forms  a soft  mass ; 
this  mass  separates  spontaneously  into  two  parts,  the 
one  liquid,  yellowish,  transparent,  called  serum : the 
other  soft,  almost  solid,  of  a deep  brown  red,  entirely 
opaque:  this  is  the  cruor,  or  clot.  This  occupies  the 
bottom  of  the  vessel;  the  serum  is  placed  above. 
Sometimes  a thin  layer  forms  at  the  top  of  the  serum, 
which  is  soft  and  reddish,  and  to  which  has  been  very 
improperly  given  the  name  of  rind,  buff,  or  crust  of 
the  blood. 

This  spontaneous  separation  of  the  elements  of  the 
blood  does  not  take  place  quickly,  except  when  it  is  in 
repose.  If  it  is  agitated  it  remains  liquid,  and  pre- 
serves its  homogeneity  much  longer. 

If  the  venous  blood  is  placed  in  contact  with  the 
atmosphere,  or  with  oxygen  gas,  it  takes  a vermilion 
red  colour;  with  ammonia  it  becomes  cherry  red; 
with  azote  a deeper  brown  red,  &c.  In  changing 
colour  it  absorbs  a considerable  quantity  of  these  dif- 
ferent gases ; it  exhales  a considerable  quantity  of  car- 
bonic acid,  when  kept  some  time  under  a bell  upon 
mercury. 

Tlie  serum  sometimes  presents  a whitish  tint,  as  if 


milky,  which  has  made  it  be  supposed  that  it  contained 
chyle : it  appears  to  be  a fatty  matter  which  gives  it 
this  appearance. 

The  cruor,  or  clot  of  the  blood  is  essentially  formed 
of  fibrin,  and  colouring  matter. 

The  fibrin,  separated  from  the  colouring  matter,  Is 
whitish,  insipid,  and  inodorous;  heavier  than  water, 
without  action  upon  vegetable  colours,  elastic  when 
humid,  it  becomes  brittle  by  being  dried. 

In  distillation  it  gives  out  a great  deal  of  carbonate 
of  ammonia,  and  a vast  quantity  of  carbon,  the  ashes 
of  which  contain  much  phosphate  of  lime,  a little 
phosphate  of  magnesia,  carbonate  of  lime,  and  car- 
bonate of  soda.  A hundred  parts  of  fibrin  are  com- 
posed of, 


Carbon 

Oxygen 

Hydrogen  .... 
Azote 

19.G85 

. . . . 7.021 

Total.... 

....  100.000 

The  colouring  matter  is  soluble  in  water  and  in  the 
serum  of  the  blood.  Examined  with  the  microscope 
in  solution  with  these  liquids,  it  appears  like  most 
fluids  of  the  animal  economy,  formed  of  small  glo- 
bules ; dried  and  calcined  in  contact  with  the  air,  it 
melts  and  swells  up,  bums  with  flame,  and  yields  a 
coal  that  is  difficultly  reduced  to  ashes. 

It  is  of  importance  to  remark,  that  in  none  of  the 
parts  of  the  blood  are  any  gelatine  or  phosphate  of 
iron  found,  as  was  at  first  supposed. 

The  respective  relations  in  quantity  of  the  serum  to 
the  coagulum,  and  those  of  the  colouring  matter  to  the 
fibrin,  have  not  yet  been  carefully  examined.  It  is  to 
be  presumed,  as  we  shall  see  afterward,  that  they  are 
variable  according  to  an  infinity  of  circumstances. 

The  coagulation  of  the  blood  has  been,  by  turns, 
attributed  to  refrigeration,  to  the  contact  of  the  air,  to 
the  state  of  repose,  &c. ; but  J.  Hunter  and  Hewson 
have  demonstrated  by  experiments,  that  this  phenome- 
non cannot  be  attributed  to  any  of  these  causes. 
Hewson  took  fresh  blood,  and  froze  it,  by  exposing  it 
to  a low  temperature.  He  afterward  thawed  it : the 
blood  appeared  fluid  at  first,  and  shortly  afterward  it 
coagulated  as  usual.  An  experiment  of  the  same  kind 
was  made  by  J.  Hunter,  with  a similar  result.  Thus, 
blood  does  not  coagulate  because  it  is  cooled.  It  even 
appears  that  a temperature  a little  elevated  is  favour- 
able to  its  coagulation.  We  also  know  by  experience 
that  the  blood  thickens  when  it  is  deprived  of  the  con- 
tact of  the  air,  and  agitated ; its  coagulation  is,  how- 
ever, generally  favoured  by  repose  and  the  contact  of 
the  air. 

The  elements  of  venous  blood,  such  as  we  have 
noticed,  are  known  by  its  analysis ; but  as  all  the  mat- 
ters absorbed  from  the  intestinal  canal,  the  serous 
membranes,  the  cellular  tissue,  &c.,  are  immediately 
mixed  with  the  venous  blood,  the  composition  of  this 
liquid  must  vary  in  proportion  to  the  matter  absorbed. 
There  will  be  found  in  it,  in  different  circmstances, 
alkohol,  aether,  camphor,  and  salts,  which  it  does  not 
usually  contain,  &. c.,  when  these  substances  have  been 
submitted  to  absorption  in  any  part  of  the  body 

When,  by  the  aid  of  a strong  lens,  or  a microscope, 
we  observe  the  transparent  parts  of  cold-blooded  ani- 
mals, we  see  in  the  blood-vessels  an  immense  multi- 
tude of  small,  rounded  molecules,  which  swim  in  the 
serum,  and  roll  upon  each  other,  while  they  flow 
through  the  arteries  and  the  veins 

Similar  observations  have  never  been  made  upon 
the  hot-blooded  animals ; the  membranes  and  sides  of 
the  vessels  being  opaque.  But  as,  in  separating  a 
drop  of  blood  in  water,  rounded  particles  are  often 
seen  with  the  microscope,  the  existence  of  globules 
lias  been  admitted  for  the  blood  of  animals,  and  con- 
sequently for  that  of  man. 

Authors  have  related  marvellous  things  of  these 
globules.  According  to  Leuwenhoeck , a thousand  mil- 
lions of  those  globules  are  not  larger  than  a grain  of 
sand.  Haller,  in  speaking  of  cold-blooded  animals, 
for  he  never  could  see  those  of  hot-blooded  animals, 
says,  that  they  are  to  an  inch  as  one  inch  is  to  five 
thousand.  Some  will  have  them  of  the  same  form 
and  diameter  in  all  animals : others,  on  the  contrary, 
assert,  that  they  have  a particular  form  and  size  for 
each  animal ; some  declare  that  they  are  spherical 
and  solid,  others  that  they  are  flattened,  and  pierced 


BLO 


BLO 


with  a small  hole  in  the  centre ; lastly,  many  believe 
that  a globule  is  a species  of  small  bladder,  which  con- 
tains a certain  number  of  smaller  globules. 

Probably  many  errors  of  imagination  and  optical 
illusions,  have  slid  into  these  different  opinions.  Dr. 
Magendie  made  a great  number  of  microscopic  expe- 
riments, in  order  to  satisfy  himself  in  this  respect. 

He  has  never  seen,  in  the  blood  of  man  diluted  in 
water,  any  thing  but  particles  of  colouring  matter, 
generally  rounded,  of  different  sizes,  which,  according 
as  they  are  placed  exactly  or  not  in  the  focus  of  the 
microscope,  appear  sometimes  spherical,  sometimes 
flat,  and,  at  other  times,  of  the  figure  of  a disc,  pierced 
in  the  centre.  All  these  appearances,  he  says,  can 
be  produced  at  pleasure,  by  varying  the  position  of 
the  particles  relatively  to  the  instrument,  and  he 
believes  that  bubbles  of  air  have  often  been  described 
and  drawn  for  globules  of  blood  ; at  least,  nothing  has 
more  resemblance  to  certain  figures  of  Hewson,  than 
very  small  bubbles  of  air  that  are  produced  by  slightly 
agitating  the  liquid  submitted  to  the  microscope. 

The  latest  and  most  accurate  chemical  analysis  of 
blood  is  as  follows : 

The  specific  gravity  of  the  serum  is  about  1.020, 
while  that  of  blood  itself  is  1.058.  It  changes  syrup 
of  violets  to  a green,  from  its  containing  free  soda. 
At  156°  serum  coagulates,  and  resembles  boiled  white 
of  egg.  When  this  coagulated  albumen  is  squeezed, 
a muddy  fluid  exudes,  which  has  been  called  the  sero- 
sity.  According  to  Berzelius,  1000  parts  of  the  serum 
of  bulloek’s  blood  consist  of  905  water,  79.99  albumen, 
6.175  lactate  of  soda  and  extractive  matter,  2.565  mu- 
riates of  soda  and  potassa,  1.52  soda  and  animal  mat- 
ter, and  4.75  loss.  1000  parts  of  serum  of  human 
blood  consist,  by  the  same  chemist,  of  905  water,  80 
albumen,  6 muriates  of  potassa  and  soda,  4 lactate  of 
soda  with  animal  matter,  and  4.1  of  soda,  and  phos- 
phate of  soda  with  animal  matter.  There  is  no  gelatin 
In  serum. 

The  cruor  has  a specific  gravity  of  about  1.245.  By 
making  a stream  of  water  flow  upon  it  till  the  water 
runs  off  colourless,  it  is  separated  into  insoluble  fibrin, 
and  the  soluble  colouring  matter.  A little  albumen 
has  also  been  found  in  cruor.  The  proportions  of  the 
former  two  are,  64  colouring  matter,  and  36  fibrin  in 
100.  To  obtain  the  colouring  matter  pure,  we  mix 
the  cruor  with  4 parts  of  oil  of  vitriol  previously  diluted 
with  8 parts  of  water,  and  expose  the  mixture  to  a 
heat  of  about  160°  for  5 or  6 hours.  Filter  the  liquid 
while  hot,  and  wash  the  residue  with  a few  ounces 
of  hot  water.  Evaporate  the  liquid  to  one-half,  and 
add  ammonia,  till  the  acid  be  almost,  but  not  entirely 
saturated.  The  colouring  matter  falls.  Decant  the 
supernatant  liquid,  filter  and  wash  the  residuum  from 
the  whole  of  the  sulphate  of  ammonia.  When  it  is 
well  drained,  remove  it  with  a platina  blade,  and  dry 
it  in  a capsule. 

When  solid,  it  appears  of  a black  colour,  but  becomes 
wine-red  by  diffusion  through  water,  in  which,  how- 
ever, it  is  not  soluble.  It  has  neither  taste  nor  smell. 
Alkohol  and  tether  convert  it  into  an  unpleasant  smell- 
ing kind  of  adipocire.  It  is  soluble  both  in  alkalies 
and  acids.  It  approaches  to  fibrin  in  its  constitution, 
and  contains  iron  in  a peculiar  state,  £ of  a per  cent, 
of  the  oxide  of  which  may  be  extracted  from  it  by  cal- 
cination. The  incinerated  colouring  matter  weighs 
l-80th  of  the  whole;  and  these  ashes  consist  of  50 
oxide  of  iron,  7.5  subphosphate  of  iron,  6 phosphate 
of  lime,  with  traces  of  magnesia,  20  pure  lime,  16.5 
carbonic  acid  and  loss ; or  the  two  latter  ingredients 
may  be  reckoned  32  carbonate  of  lime.  Berzelius 
imagines  that  none  of  these  bodies  existed  in  the  colour- 
ing matter,  but  only  their  bases,  iron,  phosphorus, 
calcium,  carbon,  &c. ; and  that  they  were  formed 
during  the  incinevation.  From  the  albumen  of  blood, 
the  same  proportion  of  ashes  may  be  obtained,  but  no 
iron. 

The  importance  of  the  blood  is  very  considerable ; 
it  distends  the  cavities  of  the  heart  and.  blood  vessels, 
and  prevents  them  from  collapsing ; it  stimulates  to 
contraction  the  cavities  of  the  heart  and  vessels,  by 
which  means  the  circulation  of  the  blood  is  performed ; 
it  generates  within  itself  animal  heat,  which  it  propa- 
gates throughout  the  body;  it  nourishes  the  whole 
body ; and,  lastly,  it  is  that  source  from  which  every 
secretion  of  the  body  is  separated.. 

[In  the  winter  of  i824-5,  Dr.  Mitchill,  then  Professor 
133 


of  Materia  Medica  in  the  College  of  Physicians  and 
Surgeons  of  New-York,  read  the  following  letter  to  his 
class,  while  speaking  on  the  operation  of  remedies,  and 
their  effects  upon  the  blood. 

Dr.  Akerly  to  Dr.  Samuel  L.  Mitchill , Professor , <$-c. 

Dear  Sir. — While  speaking  on  the  operation  of  re- 
medies, it  reminds  me  of  an  occurrence  which  took 
place  in  1819,  connected  with  this  subject.  A man 
called  on  me  in  the  summer  of  that  year,  stating  that 
he  had  fallen  in  the  street  in  a fit,  from  which  having 
recovered  he  requested  to  be  bled  to  relieve  his  head,  as 
from  the  distress  there  he  was  apprehensive  of  another. 
Mr.  Knapp  having  just  commenced  the  study  of  medi- 
cine with  me,  I desired  him  to  take  a stick  and  stir  the 
blood  to  collect  the  fibrin,  and  to  show  him  that  the 
blood  would  not  coagulate  after  being  deprived  of  it. 
His  attention  as  soon  as  he  began  to  stir  the  blood  was 
attracted  by  the  strong  smell  of  spirituous  liquor 
arising  from  it.  We  both  satisfied  ourselves  that  the 
alkoholic  odour  actually  arose  from  the  blood,  and 
that  it  was  more  perceptible  when  agitated,  than  when 
undisturbed.  I immediately  went  out  and  made  in- 
quiries at  a neighbouring  store  of  the  character  and 
habits  of  the  man,  and  ascertained  that  he  was  a great 
lover  of  ardent  spirits,  and  daily  drank  a quart  or  more 
by  small  glasses.  This  appeared  to  me  a case  in  which 
the  fluid  taken  into  the  stomach  reached  the  blood 
vessels  without  change,  and  as  it  may  throw  some  light 
on  the  operation  of  remedies  upon  the  human  consti- 
tution, I communicate  the  fact  for  your  considera- 
tion. A.] 

Blood , dragon's.  See  Calamus  rotang. 

Blood , spitting  of.  See  Haemoptysis. 

Blood,  vomiting  of.  See  Hcematemesis. 

BLOOD-LETTING.  Under  this  term  is  compre- 
hended every  artificial  discharge  of  blood  made  with 
a view  to  cure  or  prevent  a disease.  Blood-letting  is 
divided  into  general  and  topical.  As  examples  of  the 
former,  venaesection  and  arteriotomy  may  be  men- 
tioned ; and  of  the  latter,  the  application  of  leeches , 
cupping-glasses , and  scarification. 

[Blood-root.  “ This  is  an  indigenous  article,  derived 
from  the  Sanguinaria  Canadensis , one  of  our  earliest 
flowering  plants,  common  in  woods  in  various  parts  of 
the  United  States. 

The  root  is  brownish  externally ; but,  when  broken, 
emits  a bright  vermilion  or  orange-coloured  juice. 
This  root  has  a bitter  taste,  leaving  a sense  of  acrimony 
in  the  throat  when  swallowed.  Besides  fibrous  matter, 
it  contains  resin,  faecula,  bitter  extractive,  and  an  acrid 
principle. 

The  medicinal  properties  of  blood-root  are  those  of 
an  acrid  narcotic.  When  taken  in  a large  dose,  it 
irritates  the  fauces,  leaving  a disagreeable  sensation  in 
the  throat  for  some  time  after  it  is  swallowed.  It 
occasions  heartburn,  nausea,  fainting,  and  frequently 
vertigo,  and  diminished  vision.  It  also  vomits ; but  in 
this  operation  it  is  less  certain  than  many  other  emetics 
in  common  use.  When  given  in  smaller  doses,  such 
as  produce  nausea  without  vomiting,  and  repeated  at 
frequent  intervals,  it  lessens  the  frequency  of  the  pulse 
in  a manner  somewhat  analagous  to  the  operation  of 
digitals.  This,  however,  is  a secondary  effect,  since,  in 
its  primary  operation,  it  seems  to  .accelerate  the  circu- 
lation. In  still  smalle*  doses,  such  as  do  not  disturb 
the  stomach,  it  has  required  some  reputation  as  a tonic. 
It  has  been  given  in  phthisis,  both  as  a preventive  in 
the  early  symptoms  and  as  a palliative  in  the  con- 
firmed disease ; also  in  catarrh,  typhoid  pneumonia, 
dyspepsia  and  various  other  complaints;  in  which, 
however,  its  use  should  not  exclude  the  employment  of 
more  active  means.  It  should  be  dried  a short  time 
before  it  is  to  be  used,  as  the  virtues  are  much  impaired 
by  age. 

From  ten  to  twenty  grains  ordinarily  produce  vomit- 
ing. Many  country  physicians  prefer  an  infusion 
made  with  a drachm  of  the  powder  to  a gill  of  water, 
of  which  a table-spoonful  may  be  repeated  till  the 
effect  of  the  medicine  is  obtained.  As  a tonic,  the 
tincture  is  more  frequently  used.” — See  Big.  Mai 
Med.  A.] 

Blood-stone.  See  Haematites , and  Calcedony. 

Bloody  fiur.  See  Dysenteria. 

BLOWPIPE.  A very  simple  and  useful  instrument 
That  used  by  the  anatomist  is  made  of  silver  or  brass, 


BOD 


BOD 


©f  the  size  of  a common  probe,  or  larger,  to  inflate 
vessels  and  other  parts. 

The  chemical  blowpipe  is  made  of  brass,  is  of  about 
one-eighth  of  an  inch  diameter  at  one  end,  and  the 
other  tapering  to  a much  less  size,  with  a very  small 
perforation  for  the  wind  to  escape.  The  smaller  end 
is  beveled  ou  one  side. 

[BLUE  IRON  EARTH.  This  is  the  earthy  phos- 
phate of  iron  of  some  mineralogists.  “The  original 
colour  of  this  variety  is  generally  grayish,  yellowish,  or 
greenish  white,  or  with  a very  slight  tinge  of  blue  ; but  by 
exposure  to  the  air  it  absorbs  oxygen,  becomes  indigo 
blue  of  different  shades,  sometimes  pale.  It  is  some- 
times in  small  masses,  considerably  compact  and  solid, 
but  more'  frequently  it  is  friable,  or  even  loose,  and 
soils  the  fingers.  It  is  often  a mere  coat. 

Before  the  blowpipe  it  becomes  reddish-brown,  and 
then  melts  into  a magnetic,  blackish  globule.  In  oil  it 
usually  acquires  a shade  of  brown.  A specimen  yielded 
klaproth  iron  slightly  oxidated  47.5,  phosphoric  acid 
32.0,  water  20.0;  = 99.5.  But  the  proportion  of  acid 
appears  to  be  extremely  variable  in  different  specimens. 

This  mineral  is  sometimes  employed  with  advantage 
as  a pigment.  It  has  been  found  in  Maine  and  Massa- 
chusetts, but  principally  in  New-Jersey.  It  generally 
accompanies  bog  ore,  or  certain  argillaceous  deposites. 
It  is  sometimes  in  masses  weighing  301bs.  or  more, 
with  a texture  more  or  les3  compact  and  solid.  When 
first  obtained  it  is  yellowish  white ; but  by  exposure  to 
the  air,  it  assumes  a fine  blue  colour.  In  some  in- 
stances it  appears  to  contain  very  little  phosphoric 
acid.— See  Cl.  Min.  A.} 

BLUE,  PRUSSIAN.  A combination  of  oxide  of 
iron  with  the  ferro-prussic  acid. 

BLUE,  SAXON.  Made  by  digesting  sulphuric  acid 
and  water,  on  powdered  indigo. 

BO' A.  (From  /3ovj,  an  ox.)  1.  A pustulous  erup- 
tion like  the  small-pox,  so  called  because  it  was  cured, 
according  to  Pliny,  by  anointing  it  with  hot  ox-dung. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  serpents. 

Boche'tum.  Decoctum  secundarium.  A decoction 
of  the  woods  prepared  by  a second  boiling  with  fresh 
water. 

Bo'chu.  A subliming  vessel. 

Bo'chium.  A swelling  of  the  bronchial  glands. 

BODY.  Whatever  is  capable  of  acting  on  our  senses 
may  be  so  denominated. 

Bodies  in  Natural  Philosophy  are  divided  into  Pon- 
derable and  Imponderable. 

The  first  are  those  which  may  act  upon  several  of 
our  senses,  and  of  which  the  existence  is  sufficiently 
established ; of  this  kind  are  solids,  fluids,  and  gases. 
The  second  are  those  which,  in  general,  only  act  on 
one  of  our  senses,  the  existence  of  which  is  by  no 


means  demonstrated,  and  which,  perhaps,  are  only 
forces,  or  a modification  of  other  bodies ; such  are 
caloric,  light,  the  electric  and  magnetic  fluids. 

Ponderable  bodies  are  endowed  with  common  or 
general  properties,  and  likewise  with  particular  or 
secondary  properties. 

The  general  properties  of  bodies  are, — extent,  divi- 
sibility, impenetrability,  mobility.  A ponderable  body, 
of  whatever  kind,  always  presents  these  four  pro- 
perties combined.  Secondary  properties  are  variously 
distributed  among  different  bodies  ; as  hardness,  poro- 
sity, elasticity,  fluidity,  &c.  They  constitute,  by  their 
combination  with  the  general  properties,  the  condition 
or  state  of  bodies.  It  is  by  gaining  or  losing  some  of 
these  secondary  properties  that  bodies  change  their 
state : for  instance,  water  may  appear  under  the  form 
of  ice,  of  a fluid,  or  of  vapour,  although  it  is  always- 
the  same  body.  To  present  itself  successively  under 
these  three  forms,  nothing  more  is  necessary  than  the 
addition  or  abstraction  of  some  of  its  secondary  qua- 
lities. 

Bodies  are  simple , or  compound. 

Simple  bodies  are  rarely  met  with  in  nature ; they 
are  almost  always  the  product  of  art,  and  we  even, 
name  them  simple,  only  because  art  has  not  arrived 
at  their  decomposition.  At  present,  the  bodies  regarded 
as  simple  are  the  following: — Oxygen,  chlorine,  iodine, 
fluorine,  sulphur,  hydrogen,  boracium,  carbon,  phos- 
phorus, azote,  silicium,  zirconium,  aluminum,  yttrium, 
glucinum,  magnesium,  calcium,  strontium,  barium, 
sodium,  potassium,  manganese,  zinc,  iron,  tin,  arsenic, 
molybdenum,  chromium,  tungsten,  columbium,  anti- 
mony, uranium,  cerium,  cobalt,  titanium,  bismuth, 
copper,  tellurium,  nickel,  lead,  mercury,  osmium,  sil  ver, 
rhodium,  palladium,  gold,  platinum,  iridium,  selenium, 
lithium,  thorenum,  wood,  anium,  cadmium. 

Compound  bodies  occur  every  where;  they  form 
the  mass  of  the  globe,  and  that  of  all  the  beings  which 
are  seen  on  its  surface.  Certain  bodies  have  a con- 
stant composition ; that  is  to  say,  a composition  that 
never  is  changed,  at  least  from  accidental  circum- 
stances : there  are,  on  the  contrary,  bodies,  the  compo 
sition  of  which  is  changed  at  every  instant. 

This  diversity  of  bodies  is  extremely  important ; it 
divides  them  naturally  into  two  classes;  bodies,  the 
composition  of  which  is  constant,  are  named  brute, 
or  gross,  inert,  inorganic ; but  those,  the  elements  of 
which  continually  vary,  are  called  living,  organized 
bodies. 

Brute  and  organized  bodies  differ  from  each  other 
in  respect,  1st,  of  form ; 2d,  of  composition ; 3d,  of  the 
laws  which  regulate  their  changes  of  state.  The 
following  table  presents  the  differences  which  are  best 
marked. 


TABLE  I. 


DIFFERENCES  BETWEEN  INORGANIC  AND  LIVING  BODIES. 


Inorganic 

Bodies. 


Inorganic 

Bodies. 


1.  Form. 

\ Angular  form.  I Living 

{ Indeterminate  Volume.  | Bodies. 

2.  Composition 

' Sometimes  simple. 

Seldom  of  more  than  3 elements. 

Constant. 

- Each  part  capable  of  existing,  inde- 
pendent of  the  others. 

Capable  of  being  decomposed  and  re- 
. composed. 


Living 

Bodies. 


I Rounded  form. 

( Determinate  Volume. 


Never  simple. 

At  least  4 elements,  often  8 or  10. 
Variable. 

Each  part  more  or  less  depending  on> 
the  whole. 

Capable  of  decomposition,  but  totally  ’ 
incapable  of  recomposition. 


3.  Regulating  Laws. 

Inorganic  ( Entirely  subject  to  attraction,  and  che- 1 Living  ( In  part  subject  to  attraction  and  che- 

Bodies.  \ mical  affinity.  Bodiei.  } T mical  afl™lly- 

| ( In  part  subject  to  a power  unknown. 

Living  bodies  are  divided  into  two  classes,  one  of  which  comprehends  Vegetables , the  other  Animals. 

TABLE  II. 


DIFFERENCES  BETWEEN  VEGETABLES  AND  ANIMALS. 


Vegetables , 

Are  fixed  to  the  ground. 

Have  carbon  for  the  principal  base  of  their  composition. 
Composed  of  four  or  five  elements. 

Find  and  assume  in  their  vicinity  their  nourishment  in 
a state  of  preparation. 

Are-  nourished  by  tubes  opening  externally. 


Animats , 

Move  on  the  surface  of  the  ground. 

Have  azot  for  the  base  of  their  composition. 

Often  composed  of  eight  or  ten  elements. 

Must  act  on  their  aliments,  in  order  to  render  them  fin 
for  nourishment. 

Are  nourished  by  an  internal  canal. 


139 


BOE 


BOE 


In  Anatomy.  The  human  body  is  divided  by  ana- 
tomists into  the  trunk  and  extremities : i.  e.  the  head, 
and  inferior  and  superior  extremities,  each  of  which 
have  certain  regions  before  any  part  is  removed,  by 
which  the  physician  is  enabled  to  direct  the  applica- 
tion of  blisters  and  the  like,  and  the  situation  of  dis- 
eases is  better  described. 

The  head  is  distinguished  into  the  hairy  part  and  the 
face.  The  former  has  five  regions,  viz.  the  crown  of 
the  head  or  vertex , the  fore-part  of  the  head  or  sinci- 
put, the  hind-part  or  occiput , and  the  sides,  partes  la- 
terales  capitis.  In  the  latter  are  distinguished,  the 
region  of  the  forehead,  frons  ; temples,  or  tempora  ; 
the  nose,  or  nasus ; the  eyes,  or  oculi;  the  mouth,  or 
os  ; the  cheeks,  bucccB  ; the  chin,  or  mentum;  and  the 
ears,  or  aures. 

The  trunk  is  distinguished  into  three  principal  parts, 
the  neck,  thorax,  and  abdomen.  The  neck  is  divided 
into  the  anterior  region  or  pars  antica,  in  which,  in 
men,  is  an  eminence  called pomum  Adami  ; the  poste- 
rior region  is  called  nucha  colli;  and  the  lateral  re- 
gions, partes  laterales  colli. 

The  thorax  is  distinguished  into  the  anterior  region, 
in  which  are  the  sternum  and  mamma , and  at  the 
inferior  part  of  which  is  a pit  or  hollow  called  scrobi- 
culus  cordis ; a posterior  region,  called  dorsum  ; and 
the  sides,  or  latera  thoracis. 

The  abdomen  is  distinguished  into  an  anterior  re- 
gion, properly  the  abdomen;  a posterior  region,  called 
the  loins,  or  lumbi ; and  lateral  regions  or  flanks,  called 
latera  abdominis.  The  anterior  region  of  the  abdo- 
men being  very  extensive,  is  subdivided  into  the  epi- 
gastric, hypochondriac , umbilical , and  hypogastric 
regions,  which  are  described  under  their  respective 
names.  Immediately  below  the  abdomen  is  the  mons 
veneris , and  at  its  sides  the  groins  or  inguina.  The 
space  between  the  organs  of  generation  and  the  anus , 
or  fundament,  is  called  the  perinceum. 

The  superior  extremity  is  distinguished  into  the 
shoulder,  summitas  humeri , under  which  is  the  arm-pit, 
called  axilla  or  fovea  axillaris  ; the  brachium,  or  arm ; 
the  antibrachium , or  fore-arm,  in  which  anteriorly  is 
the  bend  of  the  arm,  where  the  veins  are  generally 
opened,  called  jlexura  antibrachii ; and  posteriorly  the 
elbow,  called  angulus  cubiti ; and  the  hand,  in  which 
are  the  carpus  or  wrist,  the  back  or  dorsum  manHs , 
and  the  palm  or  vola. 

The  inferior  extremity  is  divided  into,  1.  the  region 
of  the  femur,  in  which  is  distinguished  the  coxa  or 
regio-ischiadica,  forming  the  outer  and  superior  part ; 
2.°the  leg,  in  which  are  the  knee  or  genu,  the  bend  or 
cavum  poplitis,  and  the  calf  or  sura  • 3.  the  foot,  in 
which  are  the  outer  and  inner  ankle,  or  malleolus  ex- 
ternus  and  interims , the  back  or  dorsum,  and  the  sole 
or  planta. 

Body,  combustible.  This  term  is  given  by  che- 
mists to  all  substances  which,  on  account  of  their  affi- 
nity for  oxygen,  are  capable  of  burning. 

Body,  gaseous.  See  Oas. 

Body,  inflammable.  Chemists  give  this  name  to 
such  bodies  as  burn  with  facility,  and  flame  in  an  in- 
creased temperature,  although,  strictly  speaking,  all 
combustible  bodies  are  inflammable  bodies ; such  are 
the  diamond,  sulphur,  bitumens,  &c. 

Body,  phosphorescent.  Bodies  which  produce 
light,  though  their  temperature  be  not  increased. 

Bo'e.  (From  fioaw,  to  exclaim.)  Clamour,  or 
moaning  made  by  a sick  person. 

BOERHAAVE,  Herman,  was  born  at  Voorhout, 
in  Holland,  December  31,  1668.  His  father,  the  pastor 
of  the  village,  having  nine  children,  educated  them 
himself,  and  intending  Herman  for  the  church,  was 
careful  to  ground  him  well  in  the  learned  languages ; 
in  which  he  made  such  rapid  progress,  that  he  was 
sent  at  14  to  Leyden.  His  father  dying  soon  after  in 
slender  circumstances,  he  was  fortunately  supported 
by  the  burgomaster,  Daniel  Van  Alphin ; which  Boer- 
haave  ever  remembered  with  gratitude.  Among  other 
studies,  he  was  very  partial  to  the  mathematics,  and 
improved  so  much,  as  to  be  able  to  give  private  in- 
structions in  them,  whereby  he  partly  maintained 
himself.  In  1690,  he  took  his  degree  in  philosophy, 
and  in  an  inaugural  thesis  refuted  the  errors  of  the 
materialists.  But  he  soon  after  turned  his  mind 
to  the  study  of  medicine,  and  attended  dissections 
under  Nuck;  he  greatly  preferred  Hippocrates  among 
the  ancient,  and  Sydenham  among  the  modern  physi- 


cians. He  was  made  doctor  of  medicine  atHarderwyck, 
in  1693 ; and  in  his  dissertation  on  that  occasion,  ih 
sisted  on  the  utility  of  observing  the  excretions  in 
disease,  especially  the  urine.  He  was  then  engaged  in 
forming  a new  theory  of  medicine,  by  a judicious  se- 
lection from  all  that  had  been  before  advanced ; which 
was  so  well  arranged,  and  so  ably  supported  by  him, 
that  it  became  generally  adopted,  and  prevailed 
throughout  Europe  for  more  than  half  a century.  He 
also  gave  lectures  on  chemistry,  with  considerable  re- 
putation, about  the  same  period.  The  university  of 
Leyden  therefore  appointed  him,  in  1701,  professor  of 
the  theory  of  medicine ; when  he  read  an  oration  re- 
commending the  study  of  Hippocrates  ; and>  as  he  de- 
clined some  very  advantageous  offers  from  other  parts, 
they  afterward  augmented  his  salary.  About  this 
time,  he  published  another  Latin  oration,  “ On  the 
Use  of  mechanical  Reasoning  in  Medicine,”  which 
contributed  to  extend  his  fame.  In  1709,  he  was  ap- 
pointed professor  of  botany,  to  which  study  he  was 
ever  after  eminently  attached.  On  that  occasion,  he 
produced  another  oration,  maintaining  that  medicine 
would  be  best  improved  by  observation,  and  by  sim- 
plicity in  prescriptions.  His  “ Aphorisms,”  had  ap- 
peared the  year  before,  giving  a brief  account  of  the 
history  and  cure  of  diseases,  a work  universally  ad- 
mired ; to  which  his  pupil  Van  Swieten  afterward  at- 
tached a very  ample  commentary.  About  the  same 
time  he  published  his  “ Institutes,”  treating  of  physi- 
ology. These  two  works,  with  successive  improve- 
ments, passed  through  numerous  editions,  and  were 
translated  into  every  European,  nay,  even  into  the 
Arabic  language.  In  the  year  after,  he  printed  a 
catalogue  of  the  plants  in  the  university  garden.  In 
1714,  he  was  made  rector  of  the  university,  and  at 
the  end  of  the  year  for  which  he  held  the  office,  de- 
livered a discourse  “ On  attaining  Certainty  in  Phy- 
sics.” About  this  period  he  was  made  professor  of 
the  practice  of  medicine,  and  in  1718,  of  chemistry 
also.  His  .lectures  on  these  subjects,  and  on  botany, 
were  delivered  with  such  clearness  and  precision,  that 
students  thronged  from  every  part  to  hear  him  ; inso- 
much that  Leyden  could  scarcely  afford  accommoda- 
tions for  them.  He  was  also  often  consulted  in  diffi- 
cult cases  by  physicians  even  in  distant  parts  of  the 
world.  When  appointed  to  the  chemical  chair,  he  had 
published  a short  work  on  that  subject,  but  some  of 
his  pupils  having  printed  his  lectures  without  authority, 
and  very  incorrectly,  he  was  led  to  prepare  them  for 
the  press  in  1732.  In  his  conversation,  Boerhaave  was 
generally  familiar,  in  his  demeanour  grave,  but  dis- 
posed to  occasional  pleasantry : he  was  distinguished 
for  piety,  and  on  Ms  moral  character,  his  disciple 
Haller  has  passed  a very  high  eulogium.  Having  ac- 
quired considerable  wealth  by  his  exertions,  and  being 
plain  in  his  dress,  as  well  as  abstemious  in  his  diet, 
he  was  by  some  accused  of  parsimony : but  he  spared 
no  reasonable  expense  in  procuring  rare  books,  and 
foreign  plants.  Being  of  a vigorous  constitution,  and 
accustomed  to  much  exercise  abroad,  he  met  with  little 
interruption  from  illness ; but  in  1729,  having  become 
corpulent,  and  incapable  of  riding,  his  health  began  to 
suffer,  and  he  was  induced  to  resign  his  botanical  and 
chemical  appointments.  In  an  oration  then  delivered, 
he  recounted  the  chief  events  of  his  life,  expressing 
himself  grateful  for  the  patronage  which  he  had  re- 
ceived from  individuals;  as  well  as  to  his  own  pro- 
fession, for  the  little  opposition  shown  to  his  opinions. 
It  perhaps  never  happened,  that  so  great  a revolution 
in  science  was  so  readily  brought  about.  The  great 
reputation  acquired  by  his  extensive  abilities,  and  the 
moderation  of  his  character,  particularly  averse  from 
contention,  no  doubt  contributed  materially  to  this 
result.  In  the  year  following,  he  was  again  made  rec- 
tor of  the  university  of  Leyden ; and  also  elected  a 
fellow  of  the  Royal  Society  in  London,  having  been 
previously  admitted  to  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences 
in  Paris.  The  remainder  of  his  life  was  chiefly  occu- 
pied in  revising  his  own  numerous  productions,  in 
publishing  more  correct  editions  of  several  esteemed 
authors,  and  in  domestic  recreations  at  his  seat  near 
Leyden,  with  his  wife  and  daughter.  Toward  the  end 
of  1737,  he  was  attacked  with  symptoms  of  disease  in 
the  chest,  which  terminated  his  existence  in  the  Sep- 
tember following  His  fellow-citizens  erected  an  ele- 
gant monument  to  his  memory. 

Boethe'ma.  (From  Poydcui,  to  assist.)  A remedy 


BON 


BOL 

Boethkma'tica.  (From  Poydeo),  to  assist.)  Fa- 
vourable symptoms. 

BOG-BEAN.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

Bo'gia  gummi.  Gamboge. 

BOHEA.  See  Thea. 

BOHN,  John,  was  bom  at  Leipsic,  in  1640 ; and 
after  studying  in  many  parts  of  Europe,  graduated 
there,  and  was  made  successively  professor  of  anato- 
my, and  of  therapeutics,  public  physician  to  the  city, 
&c.  Among  numerous  publications,  he  chiefly  distin- 
guished himself  by  his  “ Circulus  anatomico  physio- 
logicus,”  and  a treatise  “ De  officio  medici  clinico  et 
forensi,”  which  latter  particularly  has  great  merit. 
He  also  well  explained  the  judgment  to  be  formed  con- 
cerning wounds ; and  recommended  purging  with 
calomel  in  the  beginning  of  small-pox.  He  died  in  1718. 

Bois  de  coissi.  See  Quassia. 

Bolar  earths.  See  Bole. 

BOLE,  (/3u»Xoj,  a mass,)  in  chemistry,  is  a massive 
mineral,  having  a perfectly  conchoidal  fracture,  a 
glimmering  internal  lustre,  and  a shining  streak,  its 
colours  are  yellow-red,  and  brownish- black,  when  it 
is  called  mountain  soap.  It  is  translucent  or  opaque. 
Soft,  so  as  to  be  easily  cut,  and  to  yield  to  the  nail.  It 
adheres  to  the  tongue,  has  a greasy  feel,  and  falls  to 
pieces  in  water.  Sp.  grav.  1.4  to  2.  It  may  be  po- 
lished. If  it  be  immersed  in  water  after  it  is  dried,  it 
falls  asunder  with  a crackling  noise.  It  occurs  in 
wacke  and  basalt,  in  Silesia,  Hessia,  and  Sienna  in 
Italy,  and  also  in  the  cliffs  of  the  Giant’s  Causeway, 
Ireland.  The  black  variety  is  found  in  the  trap  rocks 
of  the  isle  of  Sky.  Several  compounds  were  formerly 
used  in  medicine,  particularly  the  Armenian  and 
French;  and  in  old  pharmacopoeias  mention  is  made 
of  red  boles  from  Armenia,  Lemnos,  Strigonium,  Por- 
tugal, Tuscany,  and  Livonia ; yellow  boles  from  Ar- 
menia, Tockay,  Silesia,  Bohemia,  and  Blois ; white 
boles  from  Armenia,  Lemnos,  Nocera,  Eretria,  La- 
mos,  Chio,  Malta,  Tuscany,  and  Goltberg.  Several 
of  these  earths  have  been  commonly  made  into  little 
cakes  or  flat  masses,  and  stamped  with  certain  im- 
pressions ; from  which  circumstance  they  received  the 
name  of  terree  sagillatae , or  sealed  earths. 

Bole,  Armenian.  Bolus  Armenice.  Bole  arme- 
nic.  A pale  but  bright  red-coloured  earth,  which  is 
occasionally  mixed  with  honey,  and  applied  to  child- 
ren’s mouths  when  afflicted  with  aphthae.  It  forms, 
like  all  argillaceous  earths,  a good  tooth-powder,  when 
mixed  with  some  aromatic. 

BOLETIC  ACID.  Acidum  boleticum.  An  acid 
extracted  from  the  expressed  juice  of  the  Boletus 
Dseudo-igniarius,  by  M.  Braconnot.  The  juice  con- 
centrated to  a syrup  by  a very  gentle  heat,  was  acted 
on  by  strong  alkohol.  What  remained  was  dissolved 
in  water  When  nitrate  of  lead  was  dropped  into  this 
solution,  a white  precipitate  fell,  which,  after  being 
well  washed  with  water,  was  decomposed  by  a cur- 
rent of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  Two  different 
acids  were  found  in  the  liquid  after  filtration  and  eva- 
poration. One  in  permanent  crystals  was  boletic 
acid ; the  other  was  a small  proportion  of  phosphoric 
acid.  The  former  was  purified  by  a solution  in  alko- 
hol, and  subsequent  evaporation. 

It  consists  of  irregular  four-sided  prisms,  of  a white 
colour,  and  permanent  in  the  air.  Its  taste  resembles 
cream  of  tartar  ; at  the  temperature  of  68°  it  dissolves 
in  180  times  its  weight  of  water,  and  in  45  of  alkohol. 
Vegetable  blues  are  reddened  by  it.  Red  oxide  of  iron, 
and  the  oxides  of  silver  and  mercury,  are  precipitated 
by  it  from  their  solutions  in  nitric  acid  ; but  lime  and 
barytes  waters  are  not  affected.  It  sublimes  when 
heated,  in  white  vapours,  and  is  condensed  in  a white 
powder. — Ann.  de  Chimie , lxxx. 

BOLE'TUS.  (From  0wXo?,  a mass,  or  PuAirys, 
from  its  globular  form.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnean  systerm  Class,  Crypto  garni  a ; 
Order,  Fungi.  Boletus ; Spunk. 

Boletus  cervi.  The  mushroom. 

Boletus  igniarius.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
agaricus  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  Agaricus  chirur go- 
rum  ; Agaricus  quercus  ; Fungus  igniarius.  Agaric 
of  the  oak;  Touchwood  boletus;  Female  agaric. 
This  fungus  Boletus : — acaulis  pulvinatus  lev  is,  poris 
tenuissimis  of  Linnams,  has  been  much  used  by  sur- 
geons as  an  external  styptic.  Though  still  employed 
on  the  continent,  the  surgeons  in  this  country  have  not. 
much  confidence  in  it 


Boletus  laricis.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
officinal  agaricus  albus , which  is  met  with  on  old 
larch  trees,  in  different  parts  of  Europe.  Several  pre- 
parations, as  troches,  an  extract,  and  pills,  are  ordered 
to  be  made  with  it  in  foreign  pharmacopoeias,  which 
are  administered  against  phthisical  complaints. 

Boletus  pini  laricis.  A species  of  agaric  which 
grows  on  the  larch. 

Boletus  suaveolens.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  fungus  salicis  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  This  spe- 
cies of  fungus,  Boletus — acaulis  superne  Icevis , salici-  , 
bus , of  Linnaeus,  and  the  Boletus  albus  of  Hudson, 
when  fresh,  has  a suburihous  smell,  and  at  first  an 
acid  taste,  followed  by  a bitter.  It  is  seldom  used  at 
present,  but  was  formerly  given  in  phthisical  com- 
plaints. 

Boli'smus.  A voracious  appetite,  according  to 
Avicenna  ; but  most  probably  meant  for  bulimus. 

BOLOGNIAN  STONE.  A mixture  of  mucilage 
and  powdered  sulphate  of  barytes. 

[Bolognian  phosphorus.  When  native  sulphate 
of  baryta  is  heated  it  decrepitates,  and  at  a high  tern 
perature,  fuses  into  an  opaque  white  enamel : it  was 
employed  in  the  manafacture  of  Jasper  ware  by  the 
late  Mr.  Wedgewood.  When  heated  to  redness,  it 
acquires  the  property  of  phosphorescence.  This  was 
first  ascertained  by  Vincenzo  Cascarioli,  of  Bologna, 
whence  the  term  Bologna  phosphorus  is  applied  to  it. 
This  kind  of  phosphorus,  after  being  exposed  for  a few 
minutes  to  the  sun’s  rays,  shines  in  the  dark  sufficiently 
to  render  visible  the  dial  of  a watch.  This  prosperty  is 
lost  by  repeated  uses,  in  consequence  of  the  oxygena- 
tion of  the  sulphur : but  it  may  be  restored  by  a second 
calcination.— See  Webster's  Man.  of  Chem.  A.] 

BO'LUS.  (BwXof,  a bole,  or  bolus.)  Any  medi- 
cine, rolled  round,  that  is  larger  than  an  ordinary  sized 
pea,  and  yet  not  too  large  to  be  swallowed. 

Bolus  armena.  See  Bole , Armenian. 

Bolus  armena  alba.  The  white  Armenian  bole. 

Bolus  armoniac.  See  Bole , Armenian. 

Bolus  blessensis.  Bole  of  Blois.  See  Bole. 

Bolus  gallica.  French  bole.  A pale  red-coloured 
bolar  earth,  variegated  with  irregular  specks  and  veins 
of  white  and  yellow.  It  is  occasionally  administered 
as  an  absorbent  and  antacid. 

BOMBAX.  See  Gossypium. 

BOMBIATE.  Bombias.  A salt  formed  by  the 
union  of  the  bombic  acid  with  salifiable  bases  ; thus, 
bombiate  of  alumine , &c. 

BO'MBIC  ACID.  Acidum  bombicum.  Acid  of  the 
silkworm.  Silkworms  contain,  especially  when  in 
the  state  of  chrysalis,  an  acid  liquor  in  a reservoir 
placed  near  the  anus.  It  is  obtained  by  expressing 
their  juice  in  a cloth,  and  precipitating  the  mucilage 
by  spirit  of  wine,  and  likewise  by  infusing  the  chrysa- 
lides in  that  liquor.  This  acid  is  very  penetrating,  of 
a yellow  amber  colour,  but  its  nature  and  combinations 
are  not  yet  well  known. 

BO'MBUS.  Bop6os • 1-  A resounding  noise,  or 

ringing  of  the  ears. 

2.  A sonorous  expulsion  of  flatus  from  the  intestines. 

3.  Dr.  Good  gives  this  name  to  that  variety  of  ima- 
ginary sound,  parapsis  illusoria , which  is  character- 
ized by  a dull,  heavy,  intermitting  sound. 

Bon  arbor.  A name  given  to  the  coffee-tree. 

Bo'na.  Boona.  The  phaseolus,  or  kidney-beans. 

[BOND,  Thomas,  M.D.  This  celebrated  physician 
and  surgeon  was  a native  of  Maryland,  and  studied  his 
profession  there  under  Dr.  Hamilton,  a very  learned 
practitioner.  Afterward  he  travelled  in  Europe  and 
spent  a considerable  time  in  Paris,  where  .he  attended 
the  practice  of  the  Hdtel  Dieu.  He  began  the  practice 
of  medicine  in  Philadelphia  about  the  year  1734,  and 
soon  attracted  the  public  attention.  He  was  the 
founder  of  the  Coliege  and  Academy,  and  one  of  the 
most  activp  managers  of  the  Pennsylvania  Hospital,  at 
its  commencement.  He  was  a contributor  to  some  of 
the  Medical  Journals  of  Great  Britain  before  the 
establishment  of  one  in  this  country.  In  1782  he  de- 
livered the  annual  address  before  the  American  Philo- 
sophical Society.  The  subject  was,  “ The  rank  and 
dignity  of  man  in  the  scale  of  being,  and  the  con- 
veniences and  advantages  he  derives  from  the  Arts  and 
Sciences,  and  the  prognostic  of  the  unceasing  grandeur 
and  glory  of  America,  founded  on  the  nature  of  its  cli- 
mate.” He  was  for  half  a century  in  the  first  practice 
in  Philadelphia,  and  remarkable  for  attention  to  the 


BON 


BON 


under  his  care,  and  hig  sound  judgment.  He 
died  in  the  year  1784,  aged  72.— See  Thach.  Med. 
Biog.  A.] 

Bo'nduch  indorum.  See  Guilandina. 

BONE.  Os.  Bones  are  hard,  dry,  and  insensible 
parts  of  the  body,  of  a whitish  colour,  and  composed 
of  a spongy,  compact,  or  recticular  substance.  They 
vary  much  in  their  appearances,  some  being  long  and 
hollow,  others  flat  and  compact,  &c.  The  greater 
number  of  bones  have  several  processes  and  cavities, 
which  are  distinguished  from  their  figure,  situation, 
use,  &.c.  Thus,  processes  extended  from  the  end  of  a 
bone,  if  smooth  and  round,  are  called  heads ; and  con- 
dyles, when  flattened  either  above  or  laterally.  That 
part  which  is  beneath  the  head,  and  which  exceeds 
the  rest  of  the  bone  in  smallness  and  levity,  is  called 
the  neck.  Rough,  unequal  processes  are  called  tube- 
rosities, or  tubercles : but  the  longer  and  more  acute, 
spinous,  or  styloid  processes,  from  their  resemblance 
to  a thorn.  Thin  broad  processes,  with  sharp  extre- 
mities, are  known  by  the  name  of  eristic,  or  sharp 
edges.  Other  processes  are  distinguished  by  their 
form,  and  called  alar , or  ptergoid;  mamillary , or 
mastoid;  dentiform,  or  odontoid,  &c.  Others,  from 
their  situation,  are  called  superior,  inferior,  exterior, 
and  interior.  Some  have  their  name  from  their  di- 
rection; as  oblique , straight , transverse,  &c. ; and 
some  from  their  use,  as  trochanters,  rotators , &c. 
Farrows,  depressions , and  cavities,  are  destined  either 
for  the  reception  of  contiguous  bones,  to  form  an  arti- 
culation with  them,  when  they  are  called  articular 
cavities , which  are  sometimes  deeper,  sometimes  shal- 
lower ; or  they  receive  hard  parts,  but  do  not  consti- 
tute a joint  with  them.  Cavities  serve  also  for  the 
transmission  and  attachment  of  soft  parts.  Various 
names  are  given  to  them,  according  to  the  magnitude 
and  figure  of  bones.  If  they  be  broad  and  large  at  the 
beginning,  and  not  deep,  but  contracted  at  their  ends, 
they  are  called  fovece,  or  pits.  Furrows  are  open 
canals,  extending  longitudinally  in  the  surface  of 
bones.  A hollow,  circular  tube,  for  the  most  part  of 
the  same  diameter  from  beginning  to  end,  and  more  or 
less  crooked  or  straight,  long  or  short,  is  named  a canal. 
Foramina  are  tire  apertures  of  canals,  or  they  are 
formed  of  the  excavated  margins  of  two  bones,  placed 
against  each  other.  If  such  be  the  form  of  the  margin 
of  a bone,  as  if  a portion  were  taken  out  of  it,  it  is 
called  a notch. 

With  respect  to  the  formation  of  bone,  there  have 
been  various  opinions.  Physiologists  of  the  present 
day  assert,  that  it  is  from  a specific  action  of  small 
arteries,  by  which  ossific  matter  is  separated  from  the 
blood,  and  deposited  where  it  is  required.  The  first 
thing  observable  in  the  embryo,  where  bone  is  to  be 
formed,  is  a transparent  jelly,  which  becomes  gradu- 
ally firmer,  and  is  formed  into  cartilage.  The  carti- 
lage gradually  increases  to  a certain  size,  and  when 
the  process  of  ossification  commences,  vanishes  as  it 
advances.  Cartilages,  previous  to  the  ossific  action, 
are  solid,  and  without  any  cavity  ; but  when  the  ossific 
action  of  the  arteries  is  about  to  commence,  the  ab- 
sorbents become  very  active,  and  form  a small  cavity 
in  which  the  bony  matter  is  deposited  ; bone  continues 
to  be  separated,  and  the  absorbents  model  the  mass 
into  its  required  shape.  The  process  of  ossification  is 
extremely  rapid  in  utero:  it  advances  slowly  after 
birth,  and  is  not  completed  in  the  human  body  till  about 
the  twentieth  year.  Ossification  in  the  flat  bones,  as 
those  of  the  skull,  always  begin  from  central  points, 
and  the  radiated  fibres  meet  the  radii  of  other  ossifying 
points,  or  the  edges  of  the  adjoining  bone.  In  long 
bones,  as  those  of  the  arm  and  leg,  the  clavical,  meta- 
carpal, and  metatarsal  bones,  a central  ring  is  formed 
in  the  body  of  the  bone,  the  head  and  extremities  being 
cartilage,  in  the  centre  of  which  ossification  afterward 
begins.  The  central  ring  of  the  body  shoots  its  bony 
fibres  towards  the  head  and  extremities,  which  extend 
towards  the  body  of  the  bone.  The  head  and  extre- 
mities at  length  come  so  close  to  the  body  as  to  be 
merel y separated  by  a cartilage,  which  becomes  gra- 
dually thinner  until  the  twentieth  year.  Thick  and 
round  bones,  as  those  of  the  tarsus,  carpus,  sternum, 
and  patella,  are,  at  first,  all  cartilage : ossification  be- 
gins in  th^  centre  of  each.  When  the  bones  are  de- 
prived of  their  soft  parts,  and  are  hung  together  in 
their  natural  situation,  by  means  of  wire,  the  whole  is 
termed  an  artificial  skeleton ; but  when  they  are  kept 
142 


(Frontal. 

| Parietal. 

Bones  of  the  cranium  I Occipital . 
or  skuM m ’ 


Bones  of  the  fate- 


| together  by  means  of  their  ligaments,  it  is  called  a 
1 natural  skeleton. — The  uses  of  the  bones  are  various, 
and  are  to  be  found  in  the  account  of  each  bone ; it  is, 
therefore,  only  necessary  to  observe,  in  this  place,  that 
they  give  shape  to  the  body,  contain  and  delend  the 
vital  viscera,  and  alford  an  attachment  to  all  the 
muscles. 

A Table  of  the  Bones* 

JVb. 

1 

2 

1 

Temporal 2 

Ethmoid . . 1 

Sphenoid-...-... l 

Superior  maxil 2 

Jugal 2 

Nasal 2 

Lachrymal...........  2 

Palatine... 2 

Inferior  spongy. ......  2 

Vomer 1 

Inferior1  maxil 1 

l Incisores 8 

Dentes  or  teeth ......<  Cuspidati 4 

( Molares 20 

Bone  of  the  tongue — Hyoides  os 1 

Bones  of  the  Mr,  \ “US \ 

within  the  temporal  j Stapes  ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;  2 

bones I Orbiculareos 2 


. I Cervical  7 

s f Vertebrae < Dorsal  12 

£,\  (Lumbar  5 

S ) Sacrum 1 

g ( Coccygis  os 1 

**«*«•« i si 

The  pelvis Innominata  ossa  2 


Zi 


The  shoulder. 


\ Clavicle.. 
' l Scapula... 

The  arm Humeri  os 

The  fore-arm....  I Ulna...*.. 


Carpus  or  wrist 


( Radius 2 

( Naviculare  os 2 

Lunare  os 2 

I Cuneiforme  os 2 

' Orbiculare  os 2 


Metacarpus • 
L Phalanges . . 
The  thigh 

The  leg.......*. 


1 Trapezium  os 2 

I Trapezoides  os 2 

J Magnum  os 2 

t Uiiciforme  os 2 


28 

..Femur 2 

C Patella 2 

< Tibia 2 

( Fibula 2 

(Calcaneus............  2 

1 Astragalus............  2 

u ( Tarsus  or  instep  ■{  Cuboidesos 2 

§ I Naviculare  os 2 

(.  Cuneiformia  ossa 6 

js  1 Metatarsus .. 10 

^ [Phalanges 28 

Sesamoid  bones  of  the  thumb  and  great  toe,  > s 
occasionally  found j ° 

Total  248 

Calcined  human  bones,  according  to  Berzelius,  are 
composed,  in  100  parts,  of  81.9  phosphate  of  lime,  3 
fluate  of  lime,  10  lime.  1.1  phosphate  of  magnesia,  2 
soda,  and  2 carbonic  acid.  100  parts  of  bones  by  cal- 
cination are  reduced  to  63.  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin 
found  the  following  to  be  the  composition  of  100  parts 
of  ox  bones  : 51  solid  gelatin,  37.7  phosphate  of  lime,  10 
carbonate  of  lime,  and  1.3  phosphate  of  magnesia ; but 
Berzelius  gives  the  following  as  their  constituents: 
33.3  cartilage,  55.35  phosphate  of  lime,  3 fluate  of  lime, 
3.85  carbonate  of  lime,  2.05  phosphate  of  magnesia,  and 
2.45  soda,  with  a little  common  salt. 

About  l-30th  of  phosphate  of  magnesia  was  obtained 
from  the  calcined  bones  of  fowls,  by  Fourcroy  and 


BON 


BOR 


Vauquelin.  When  the  enamel  of  teeth,  rasped  down, 
is  dissolved  in  muriatic  acid,  it  leaves  no  albumen,  like 
the  other  bones.  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin  stare  its 
components  to  be,  27.1  gelatin  and  water,  72.9  phos- 
phate ol'  lime.  Messrs.  Hatchett  and  Fepys  rate  its 
composition  at  78  phosphate  of  lime,  6 carbonate  of 
lime,  and  16  water  and  loss.  Berzelius,  on  the  other 
hand,  found  only  2 per  cent,  of  combustible  matter  in 
teeth.  The  teeth  of  adults,  by  Mr.  Pepys,  consist  of 
64  phosphate  of  lime,  6 carbonate  of  lime,  20  cartilage, 
and  10  water  or  loss.  The  fossil  bones  of  Gibraltar 
are  composed  of  phosphate  of  lime  and  carbonate,  like 
burnt  bones.  Much  difference  of  opinion  exists  with 
regard  to  the  existence  of  fluoric  acid  in  the  teeth  of 
animals;  some  of  the  most  eminent  chemists  taking 
opposite  sides  of  the  question.  It  appears  that  bones 
buried  for  many  centuries  still  retain  their  albumen, 
with  very  little  diminution  of  its  quantity. 

Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin  discovered  phosphate  of 
magnesia  in  all  the  bones  they  examined,  except 
human  bones.  The  bones  of  the  horse  and  sheep 
afford  about  l-36th  of  phosphate  of  magnesia ; those  of 
fish  nearly  the  same  quantity  as  those  of  the  ox.  They 
account  for  this  by  observing,  that  phosphate  of  mag- 
nesia is  found  in  the  urine  of  man,  but  not  in  that  of 
animals,  though  both  equally  take  in  a portion  of  mag- 
nesia with  their  food. 

The  experiments  of  Mr.  Hatchett  show,  that  the 
membranous  or  cartilaginous  substance,  which  retains 
the  earthy  salts  within  its  interstices,  and  appears  to 
determine  the  shape  of  the  bone,  is  albumen.  Mr. 
Hatchett  observes,  that  the  enamel  of  tooth  is  analo- 
gous to  the  porcellaneous  shells,  while  mother  of  pearl 
approaches  in  its  nature  to  true  bone. 

A curious  phenomenon  with  respect  to  bones  is  the 
circumstance  of  their  acquiring  a red  tinge,  when  mad- 
der is  given  to  animals  with  their  food.  The  bones  of 
young  pigeons  will  thus  be  tinged  of  a rose  colour  in 
twenty-four  hours,  and  of  a deep  scarlet  in  three  days ; 
but  the  bones  of  adult  animals  will  be  a fortnight  in 
acquiring  a rose  colour.  The  bones  most  remote  from 
the  heart  are  the  longest  in  acquiring  this  tinge.  Mr. 
Gibson  informs  us,  that  extract  of  logwood  too,  incon- 
siderable quantity,  will  tinge  the  bones  of  young 
pigeons  purple.  On  desisting  from  the  use  of  this  food, 
however,  the  colouring  matter  is  again  taken  up  into 
the  circulation,  and  carried  off,  the  bones  regaining 
their  natural  hue  in  a short  time.  It  was  said  by  Du 
Hamel,  that  the  bones  would  become  coloured  and 
colourless  in  concentric  layers,  if  an  animal  were  fed 
alternately  one  week  with  madder,  and  one  week 
without ; and  hence  he  inferred,  that  the  bones  were 
formed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  woody  parts  of 
trees.  But  he  was  mistaken  in  the  fact ; and  indeed 
had  it  been  true,  with  the  inference  he  naturally  draws 
from  it,  the  bones  of  animals  must  have  been  out  of  all 
proportion  larger  than  they  are  at  present. 

Bones  are  of  extensive  use  in  the  arts.  In  their 
natural  state,  or  dyed  of  various  colours,  they  are 
made  into  handles  of  knives  and  forks,  and  numerous 
articles  of  turnery.  We  have  already  noticed  the 
manufacture  of  volatile  alkali  from  bones,  the  coql  of 
which  forms  bone-black;  or,  if  they  be  afterward  cal- 
cined to  whiteness  in  the  open  air,  they  constitute  the 
bone  ashes  of  which  cupels  are  made,  and  which, 
finely  levigated,  are  used  for  cleaning  articles  of  paste, 
and  some  other  trinkets,  by  the  name  of  burnt  harts- 
horn. The  shavings  of  hartshorn,  which  is  a species 
of  bone,  afford  an  elegant  jelly;  and  the  shavings  of 
other  bones,  of  which  those  of  the  calf  are  the  best,  are 
often  employed  in  their  stead. 

On  this  principle,  Mr.  Proust  has  recommended  an 
economical  use  of  bones,  particularly  with  a view  to 
improve  the  subsistence  of  the  soldier.  He  first  chops 
them  into  small  pieces,  throws  them  into  a kettle  of 
boiling  water,  and  lets  them  boil  about  a quarter  of  an 
hour.  W hen  this  has  stood  till  it  is  cold,  a quantity  of 
fat,  excellent  for  culinary  purposes  when  fresh,  and  at 
any  time  fit  for  making  candles,  may  be  taken  off  the 
liquor.  This,  in  some  instances,  amounted  to  an 
eighth,  and  in  others  even  to  a fourth,  of  the  weight  Of 
the  bones.  After  this  the  bones  may  be  ground,  and 
boiled  in  eight  or  ten  times  their  weight  of  water,  of 
which  that  already  used  may  form  a part,  till  about 
half  is  wasted,  when  a very  nutritious  jelly  will  be 
obtained.  The  boiler  should  not  be  of  copper,  as  this 
metal  is  easily  dissolved  by  the  jelly;  and  the  cover 


should  fit  very  tight,  so  that  the  heat  may  be  greater 
than  that  of  boiling  water,  but  not  equal  to  that  of 
Papin’s  digester,  which  would  give  it  an  empyreuma. 
The  bones  of  meat  that  have  been  boiled  are  nearly  as 
productive  as  fresh  bones ; but  Dr.  Young  found  those 
of  meat  that  had  been  roasted  afforded  no  jelly,  at  least 
by  simmering,  or  gentle  boiling. 

Bones , growth  of.  See  Osteogeny. 

BONEBINDER.  See  Osteocolla. 

[Boneset.  Thoroughwort.  Eupatorium  perfolia- 
tum.  This  is  an  indigenous  vegetable,  growing  in  wet 
meadows  throughout  the  United  States.  The  whole 
plant  is  medicinal,  but  the  leaves  and  flowers  are  most 
active.  See  Eupatorium  perfoliatum.  A.] 

BONET,  Theophilus,  was  born  at  Geneva  in  1620, 
and  graduated  at  Bologna.  He  had  considerable  prac- 
tice, and  was  extremely  zealous  in  the  pursuit  of  mor- 
bid anatomy,  as  well  as  in  extracting  valuable  obser- 
vations from  authors.  His  hearing  becoming  impaired, 
he  devoted  the  latter  part  of  his  life  to  the  arrangement 
of  the  materials  which  he  had  prepared.  His  princi- 
pal work,  entitled  “ Sepulchretum,”  published  1679, 
was  highly  approved  : and  laid  the  foundation  of  Mor- 
gagni’s excellent  treatise,  “De  Sedibus  et  Causis  Mor- 
borum.”  Another  publication  of  his,  “ Mercurius  com- 
pilatitius,”  is  an  index  of  medical  literature  to  the  time 
of  its  appearance,  1682.  His  death  occurred  seven 
years  after. 

Bononie'nsis  lapis.  The  Bononian  stone.  Called 
also  phosphorus  bononiensis,  phosphorus  kircheri , the 
light  carrier,  or  Bononian  phosphorus.  As  a medicine, 
the  stone  is  caustic  and  emetic. 

BONTIUS,  James,  was  born  at  Leyden,  where  he 
studied  medicine,  and  then  went  to  practice  in  India. 
After  his  return,  he  wrote  several  valuable  works  on 
the  diseases  and  practice  of  that  country,  as  well  as  on 
Its  natural  productions,  animal  and  vegetable.  The 
most  esteemed  is  entitled  “ De  Medicina  Indoruin,” 
and  appeared  in  1642. 

BO'NUS.  Good.  A term  applied  to  plants,  and 
remedies  from  their  supposed  efficacy. 

Bonus  henricus.  ( Henricus ; so  called,  because 
its  virtues  were  detected  by  some  one  whose  name 
was  Henry.)  See  Chenopodium  bonus  Henricus. 

BONY.  Osseus.  Of,  or  belonging  to,  or  resembling 
bone. 

BORACIC  ACID.  Acidum  boracicum.  Sedative 
salt  of  Homberg.  Acid  of  Borax.  Boracine  acid. 
“The  salt  composed  of  this  acid  and  soda  had  long 
been  used  both  in  medicine  and  the  arts  under  the 
name  of  borax,  when  Homberg  first  obtained  the  acid 
separate  in  1702,  by  distilling  a mixture  of  borax  and 
sulphate  of  iron.  He  supposed,  however,  that  it  was 
a product  of  the  latter ; and  gave  it  the  name  of  vola- 
tile narcotic  salt  of  vitriol , or  sedative  salt.  Lemery 
the  younger,  soon  after  discovered  that  it  could  be  ob- 
tained from  borax  equally  by  means  of  the  nitric  or 
muriatic  acid ; Geoffroy  detected  soda  in  borax  : and 
at  length  Baron  proved,  by  a number  of  experiments, 
that  borax  is  a compound  of  soda  and  a peculiar  acid. 
Cadet  has  disputed  this ; but  he  has  merely  shown, 
that  the  borax  of  the  shops  is  frequently  contaminated 
with  copper  ; and  Struve  and  Exchaquet  have  endea- 
voured to  prove  that  the  boracic  and  phosphoric  acids 
are  the  same  ; yet  their  experiments  only  show,  that 
they  resemble  each  other  in  certain  respects,  not  in  all. 

To  procure  the  acid,  dissolve  borax  in  hot  water, 
and  filter  the  solution,  then  add  sulphuric  acid  by  little 
and  little,  till  the  liquid  has  a sensibly  acid  taste.  Lay 
it  aside  to  cool,  and  a great  number  of  small  shining 
laminated  crystals  will  form.  These  are  the  boracic 
acid.  They  are  to  be  washed  with  cold  water,  and 
drained  upon  brown  paper. 

Boracic  acid  thus  procured  is  in  the  form  of  thin 
irregular  hexagonal  scales,  of  a silvery  whiteness, 
having  some  resemblance  to  spermaceti,  and  the  same 
kind  of  greasy  feel.  It  has  a sourish  taste  at  first,  then 
makes  a bitterish  cooling  impression,  and  at  last  leaves 
an  agreeable  sweetness.  Pressed  between  the  teeth, 
it  is  not  brittle  but  ductile.  It  has  no  smell;  but, 
when  sulphuric  acid  is  poured  on  it,  a transient  odour 
of  musk  is  produced.  Its  specific  gravity  in  the  form 
of  scales  is  1.479  ; after  it  has  been  fused,  1.803.  It  is 
not  altered  by  light.  Exposed  to  the  fire  it  swells  up, 
from  losing  its  water  of  crystallization,  arid  in  this 
state  is  called  calcined  boracic  acid.  It  melts  a little 
before  it  is  red-hot,  without  perceptibly  losing  any 


BOR 


BOR 


water,  but  it  does  not  flow  freely  till  it  is  red,  and  then 
less  than  the  borate  of  soda.  After  this  fusion  it  is 
a hard  transparent  glass,  becoming  a little  opaque  on 
exposure  to  the  air,  without  abstracting  moisture  from 
it,  and  unaltered  in  its  properties,  for  on  being  dis- 
solved in  boiling  water  it  crystallizes  as  before.  This 
glass  is  used  in  the  composition  of  false  gems. 

Boiling  water  scarcely  dissolves  one-fiftieth  part, 
and  cold  water  much  less.  When  this  solution  is  dis- 
tilled in  close  vessels,  part  of  the  acid  rises  with  the 
water,  and  crystallizes  in  the  receiver.  It  is  more  solu- 
ble in  alkohol,  and  alkohol  containing  it  burns  with  a 
green  flame,  as  does  paper  dipped  in  a solution  of 
boracic  acid. 

Neither  oxygen  gas,  nor  the  simple  combustibles, 
nor  the  common  metals,  produce  any  change  upon 
boracic  acid,  as  far  as  is  at  present  known.  If 
mixed  with  finely  powdered  charcoal,  it  is  neverthe- 
less capable  of  vitrification ; and  with  soot  it  melts  into 
a black  bitumen-like  mass,  which  however  is  soluble 
in  water,  and  cannot  easily  be  burned  to  ashes,  but  sub- 
limes in  part.  With  the  assistance  of  a distilling  heat 
it  dissolves  in  oils,  especially  mineral  oils ; and  with 
these  it  yields  fluid  and  solid  products,  which  impart 
a green  colour  to  spirit  of  wine.  When  rubbed  with 
phosphorus  it  does  not  prevent  its  inflammation,  but 
an  earthy  yellow  matter  is  left  behind.  It  is  hardly 
capable  of  oxiding  or  dissolving  any  of  the  metals  ex- 
cept iron  and  zinc,  and  perhaps  copper ; but  it  com- 
bines with  most  of  the  metallic  oxides,  as  it  does  with 
the  alkalies,  and  probably  with  all  the  earths,  though 
the  greater  part  of  its  combinations  have  hitherto 
been  little  examined.  It  is  of  peat  use  in  analyzing 
stones  that  contain  a fixed  alkali. 

Crystallized  boracic  acid  is  a compound  of  57  parts 
of  acid  and  43  of  water.  The  honour  of  discovering 
the  radical  of  boracic  acid,  is  divided  between  Sir  H. 
Davy  and  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard.  The  first,  on 
applying  his  powerful  voltaic  battery  to  it,  obtained  a 
chocolate-coloured  body  in  small  quantity;  but  the  two 
latter  chemists,  by  acting  on  it  with  potassium  in 
equal  quantities,  at  a low  red-heat,  formed  boron  and 
sub-borate  of  potass.  For  a small  experiment,  a glass 
tube  will  serve,  but  on  a greater  scale  a copper  tube  is 
to  be  preferred.  The  potassium  and  boracic  acid,  per- 
fectly dry,  should  be  intimately  mixed  before  exposing 
them  to  heat.  On  withdrawing  the  tube  from  the  fire, 
allowing  it  to  cool,  and  removing  the  cork  which 
loosely  closed  its  mouth,  we  then  pour  successive  por- 
tions of  water  into  it,  till  we  detach  or  dissolve  the 
whole  matter.  The  water  ought  to  be  heated  each 
time.  The  whole  collected  liquids  are  allowed  to  set- 
tle ; when,  after  washing  the  precipitate  till  the  liquid 
ceases  to  affect  syrup  of  violets,  we  dry  the  boron  in  a 
capsule,  and  then  put  it  into  a phial  out  of  contact  of 
air.  Boron  is  solid,  tasteless,  inodorous,  and  of  a 
greenish-brown  oolour.  Its  specific  gravity  is  some- 
what greater  than  water.  The  prime  equivalent  of 
boracic  acid  has  been  inferred  from  the  borate  of  am- 
monia, to  be  about  2.7  or  2.8;  oxygen  being  10;  and 
it  probably  consists  of  2.0  of  oxygen  + 0.8  of  boron. 
But  by  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  the  proportions 
would  be  2 of  boron  to  1 of  oxygen. 

The  boracic  acid  has  a more  powerful  attraction  for 
lime  than  for  any  other  of  the  bases,  though  it  does  not 
readily  form  borate  of  lime  by  adding  a solution  of  it 
to  lime  water,  or  decomposing  by  lime  water  the  solu- 
ble alkaline  borates.  In  either  case  an  insipid  white 
powder,  nearly  insoluble,  which  is  the  borate  of  lime, 
is,  however,  precipitated.  The  borate  of  barytes  is 
likewise  an  insoluble,  tasteless,  white  powder. 

Bergman  has  observed,  that  magnesia,  thrown  by 
little  and  little  into  a solution  of  boracic  acid,  dissolved 
slowly,  and  the  liquor  on  evaporation  afforded  granu- 
lated crystals,  without  any  regular  form : that  these 
crystals  were  fusible  in  the  fire  without  being  decom- 
posed ; but  that  alkohol  was  sufficient  to  separate  the 
boracic  acid  from  the  magnesia.  If,  however,  some 
of  the  soluble  magnesian  salts  be  decomposed  by  alka- 
line borates  in  a state  of  solution,  an  insipid  and  inso- 
luble borate  of  magnesia  is  thrown  down.  It  is  pro- 
bable, therefore,  that  Bergman’s  salt  was  a borate  of 
magnesia  dissolved  in  an  excess  of  boracic  acid  ; 
which  acid  being  taken  up  by  the  alkohol,  the  true 
borate  of  magnesia  was  precipitated,  in  a white  pow- 
der, and  mistaken  by  him  for  magnesia. 

One  of  the  best  known  combinations  of  this  acid  is 
144 


the  native  magnesio-calcareous  borate  of  Kalkbcrg, 
near  Lunenburg;  the  wurfelstein  of  the  Germans, 
cubic  quartz  of  various  mineralogists,  and  boracite  of 
Kirwan. 

The  borate  of  potassa  is  but  little  known,  though  it 
is  said  to  be  capable  of  supplying  the  place  of  that  of 
soda  in  the  arts;  but  more  direct  experiments  are 
required  to  establish  this  effect.  Like  that,  it  is  capa- 
ble of  existing  in  two  states,  neutral  and  with  excess 
of  base,  but  it  is  not  so  crystallizable,  and  assumes  the 
form  of  parallelobipeds. 

With  soda  the  boracic  acid  forms  two  different  salts. 
One,  in  which  the  alkali  is  more  than  triple  the  quan- 
tity necessary  to  saturate  the  acid,  is  of  considerable 
use  in  the  arts,  and  has  long  been  known  by  the  name 
of  borax  ; under  which  its  history  and  an  account  of 
its  properties  will  be  given.  The  other  is  a neutral 
salt,  not  changing  the  syrup  of  violets  green  like  the 
borate  with  excess  of  base;  differing  from  it  in  taste 
and  solubility ; crystallizing  neither  so  readily,  nor  in 
the  same  manner  ; not  efflorescent  like  it ; but,  like  it, 
fusible  into  a glass,  and  capable  of  being  employed 
for  the  same  purposes.  This  salt  may  be  formed  by 
saturating  the  superabundant  soda  in  borax  with  some 
other  acid,  and  then  separating  the  two  salts ; but  it  is 
obviously  more  eligible  to  saturate  the  excess  of  soda 
with  an  additional  portion  of  the  boracic  acid  itself. 

Borate  of  ammonia  forms  in  small  rhomboidal  crys- 
tals, easily  decomposed  by  fire ; or  in  scales,  of  a pun- 
gent urinous  taste,  which  lose  the  crystalline  form, 
and  grow  brown  on  exposure  to  the  air. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  combine  the  boracic  acid  with 
alumina , at  least  in  the  direct  way. 

The  boracic  acid  unites  with  silex  by  fusion,  and 
forms  with  it  a solid  and  permanent  vitreous  com- 
pound. This  borate  of  silex,  however,  is  neither  sa- 
pid, nor  soluble,  nor  perceptibly  alterable  in  the  air; 
and  cannot  be  formed  w ithout  the  assistance  of  a vio- 
lent heat.  In  the  same  manner,  triple  compounds  may 
be  formed  with  silex  and  borates  already  saturated 
with  other  bases. 

The  boracic  acid  has  been  found  in  a disengaged 
state  in  several  lakes  of  hot  mineral  waters  near  Monte 
Rotondo,  Berchiaio,  and  Castellonuovo,  in  Tuscany, 
in  the  proportion  of  nearly  nine  grains  in  a hundred  of 
water,  by  Hoeffer.  Mascagni  also  found  it  adhering 
to  scliistus,  on  the  borders  of  lakes,  of  an  obscure 
white,  yellow,  or  greenish  colour,  and  crystallized  in 
the  form  of  needles.  He  has  likewise  found  it  in 
combination  with  ammonia. 

BORACITE.  Borate  of  magnesia.  A crystallized 
mineral  found  in  gypsum  in  the  Kalberg,  in  Bruns- 
wick, and  at  Segeberg,  in  Holland.  It  is  translucent, 
and  of  a shining  greasy  lustre,  yellowish,  grayish,  or 
of  a greenish- white  colour.  Vauquelin’s  Analysis 
gives  33.4  boracic  acid,  and  16.6  magnesia. 

BO’RAGE.  See  Borago. 

BORA'GO.  (Formerly  written  Corago  ; from  cor , 
the  heart,  and  ago,  to  affect ; because  it  was  supposed 
to  comfort  the  heart  and  spirits.)  Borage.  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  officinal  borage. 
See  Borago  officinalis. 

Borago  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
borage  of  the  shops.  Corrago;  Buglossum  verum; 
Buglossum  latifolium ; Borago  hortensis.  The  leaves 
and  flowers  of  this  plant,  Borago — foliis  omnibus 
alternis,  calycibus  patentibus  of  Linnaeus,  are  esteemed 
in  some  countries  as  refrigerant  and  cordial.  A syrup 
is  prepared  from  the  leaves  in  France,  and  used  in 
pleurisies  and  inflammatory  fevers.  Their  principal 
use  in  this  island  is  in  that  grateful  summer  beverage, 
known  by  the  name  of  cool  tankard. 

BO  RAS.  See  Borate. 

Boras  sodje.  Borate  of  soda.  See  Borax. 

BO  RATE.  Boras.  A salt  formed  of  boracic  acid 
with  an  carthv,  alkaline,  or  metallic  base ; as  borate 
of  soda,  &c. 

BO'RAX.  (Borah,  Arabian.)  Boras  soda;  Sub- 
boras  soda.  The  obsolete  synonyms  are,  Chrysocolla  : 
Capistrum  avri ; Ancinar ; Borax-lrion  ; Acestis 
an  near  ; Antincar  ; Tincal ; Amphitane  ; Baurach  ; 
Nitrum  factitium ; Sautema,  and  Nitrum  nativum. 
“ It  does  not  appear  that  borax  ivas  known  to  the 
ancients;  their  chrysocolla  being  a very  different  sub- 
stance, composed  of  the  rust  of  copper,  "triturated  w ith 


ROT 


BOT 

urine.  The  word  borax  occurs  for  the  first  time  in 
the  works  of  Geber. 

Borax  is  found  in  the  East,  and  likewise  in  South 
America. 

The  purification  of  borax  by  the  Venetians  and  the 
Hollanders,  was,  for  a long  time,  kept  secret.  Chaptal 
finds,  after  trying  all  the  processes  in  the  large  way, 
that  the  simplest  method  consists  in  boiling  the  borax 
strongly,  and  for  a long  time,  with  water.  This  solu- 
tion being  filtered,  alfords  by  evaporation  crystals, 
which  are  somewhat  toul,  but  may  be  purified  by  re- 
peating the  operation. 

Purified  borax  is  white,  transparent,  rather  greasy 
in  its  fracture,  affecting  the  form  of  si*-sided  prisms, 
terminating  ill  three-sided  or  six-sided  pyramids.  Its 
taste  is  styptic ; it  converts  syrup  of  violets  to  a green ; 
and  when  exposed  to  heat,  it  swells  up,  boils,  loses  its 
water  of  crystallization,  and  becomes  converted  into 
a porous,  white,  opaque  mass,  commonly  called  Cal- 
cined Borax.  A stronger  heat  brings  it  into  a state 
of  quiet  fusion  ; but  the  glassy  substance  thus  afforded, 
which  is  transparent,  and  of  a greenish  yellow  colour, 
is  soluble  in  water,  and  effloresces  in  the  air.  It  requires 
about  eighteen  times  its  weight  of  water  to  dissolve  it 
at  the  temperature  of  sixty  degrees  of  Fahrenheit ; but 
water  at  the  boiling  heat  dissolves  three  times  this 
quantity.  Its  component  parts,  according  to  Kirwan, 
are,  boracic  acid  34,  soda  17,  water  47. 

Borax  is  rarely  used  internally  in  modern  practice  ; 
and,  according  to  Murray,  it  does  not  appear  to  possess 
any  activity,  although  it  is  supposed  by  some  to  be,  in 
doses  of  half  a drachm  or  two  scruples,  diuretic  and 
emmenagogue.  It  is  occasionally  given  in  cardialgia 
as  an  antacid.  Its  solution  is  in  common  use  as  a 
cooling  gargle,  and  to  detach  mucus,'  &c.  from  the 
mouth  in  putrid  fever ; and  mixed  with  an  equal  quan- 
tity of  sugar,  it  is  used  in  the  form  of  powder  to  remove 
the  aphthous  crust  from  the  tongue  in  children.  The 
salts  formed  by  the  union  of  the  acid  of  borax  with 
different  bases  are  called  borates. 

BORBORY'GMUS.  (From  (3op6opv§ u>,  to  make  a 
noise.)  The  rumbling  noise  occasioned  by  flatus  in 
the  intestines.  It  frequently  precedes  hysterical  affec- 
tions. Dr.  Good  gives  this  name  to  that  variety  of  his 
Liviotis  flatus,  which  is  known  by  frequent  rumbling 
of  the  bowels. 

BORJDEU,  Theophilus  de,  a French  physician, 
born  in  1722.  He  graduated  at  Montpelier,  and  was 
soon  after  appointed  inspector  of  the  mineral  waters 
at  Bareges,  and  professor  of  anatomy.  Subsequently, 
he  went  to  Paris,  and  was  admitted  to  the  faculty 
there  in  1754.  He  died  of  apoplexy  in  his  55th  year. 
His  most  esteemed  work  is  on  the  cellular  membrane  ; 
his  distinctions  of  the  pulse  appear  too  nice  for  prac- 
tical utility. 

BORELLI,  John  Alphonsus,  was  born  at  Castel- 
nuovo,  in  1608.  He  first  taught  the  mathematics  in 
Sicily,  then  as  professor  at  Pisa  ; and  being  soon  after 
admitted  to  the  celebrated  academy  del  Cimento,  he 
formed  the  design  of  explaining  the  functions  of  ani- 
mal bodies,  on  mathematical  principles.  For  this  pur- 
pose he  applied  himself  diligently  to  dissection.  His 
grand  work,  “ De  Motu  Animalium,”  was  published 
after  his  death,  which  happened  in  1679,  at  the  expense 
of  Christina,  queen  of  Sweden.  The  imposing  appear- 
ance of  his  opinions  gained  them  many  converts  at 
first,  but  they  have  been  found  very  defective  on  ma- 
turer  examination.  He  was  author  of  many  other 
publications  on  different  subjects. 

BORON.  The  combustible  basis  of  boracic  acid. 
See  Boracic  acid. 

Boro'zail.  An  Ethiopian  word  for  an  epidemic 
disease,  in  appearance  similar  to  the  lues  venerea. 

Borra'go.  See  Borago. 

Bo'rri.  (Indian.)  Borri-borri.  Boberri.  The 
Indian  name  for  turmeric ; also  an  ointment  used 
there,  in  which  the  roots  of  turmeric  are  a chief  in- 
gredient. 

Bota'le  foramen.  A name  formerly  applied  to 
the  foramen  ovale  of  the  heart. 

BOTALLUS,  Leonard,  an  eminent  physician  of 
Piedmont,  flourished  about  the  middle  of  the  16th  cen- 
tury. He  graduated  at  Padua ; and  attained  con- 
siderable reputation,  as  well  in  surgery  as  in  medicine ; 
having  the  honour  of  attending  two  of  the  French 
kings,  and  the  Prince  of  Orange  ; the  latter  of  whom 
he  cured  of  a wound,  in  which  the  carotid  artery  had 


been  injured.  He  published  a treatise  on  gun-shot 
wounds,  which  long  remained  in  high  estimation.  But 
that  which  chiefly  gained  him  celebrity,  was  a work 
on  bleeding,  general  and  local,  which  he  recommended 
to  be  freely  practised  in  a great  variety  of  diseases, 
both  acute  and  chronic.  His  opinions  were  adopted 
by  many,  and  carried  to  an  extravagant  length,  par 
ticularly  in  France  ; but  more  enlarged  experience  has 
tended  greatly  to  lessen  their  prevalence. 

BoTA'NtcoN.  (From  (loravy,  an  herb.)  A plaster 
made  of  herbs,  and  described  by  Paulus  A3gineta. 

BOTANIST.  Botanicus.  One  who  understands 
the  nature,  history,  and  distinction  of  vegetables,  on 
settled  and  certain  principles,  and  can  call  every  plant 
by  a distinct,  proper,  and  intelligible  name. 

BO  TANY.  ( Botariica . BoJaviKy;  from  (iojavt], 
an  herb  or  grass,  which  is  derived  from  (Sow , or  (Sookoj , 
to  feed,  because  grass  is  the  chief  food  of  the  animals 
which  are  most  useful  to  man.)  That  branch  of 
natural  history  which  relates  to  the  vegetable  kingdom, 
the  second  of  the  three  grand  assemblages  into  which 
ail  terrestrial  objects  are  divided.  It  is  a science  not 
confined  to  the  description  and  classification  of  plants, 
as  has  often  been  represented,  but  it  comprehends 
many  other  important  particulars.  Its  various  objects 
may  be  conveniently  arranged  under  the  following 
general  heads : — 

1.  The  terminology , or  description  and  nomenclature 
of  the  several  parts  of  a plant,  which  are  externally 
visible^ 

If  all  natural  objects  were  simple  in  their  form,  it 
would  not  be  easy  to  distinguish  one  from  another, 
nor  would  it  be  possible  to  describe  them  so  as  to  give 
a clear  and  precise  idea  of  them.  Hence  a boundless 
variety,  connected  with  general  resemblances,  is  wisely 
and  benevolently  made  their  universal  character. 
Every  plant  is  composed  of  several  parts,  which  differ 
from  each  other  in  their  outward  appearance,  and 
which  cannot  fail  to  strike  the  most  careless  spectator. 
Many  of  them  also  are  themselves  compound,  and  are 
obviously  capable  of  being  divided  into  subordinate 
parts. 

2.  The  classification  or  arrangement.  A knowledge 
of  the  different  parts  of  a plant  must  necessarily  be 
gained  before  it  is  described.  But  amidst  the  nume- 
rous vegetable  productions  of  even  a single  country, 
this  of  itself  would  avail  but  little.  To  give  a peculiar 
name  to  every  individual  would  be  a labour  which  no 
invention  or  diligence  can  perform ; and,  if  performed, 
would  produce  a burden  which  no  memory  can  sustain. 
It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  pursue  resemblances  and 
differences  through  a number  of  gradations,  and  to 
found  on  them  primary  and  subordinate  divisions, 
either  ascending  from  particulars  to  generals,  or  de- 
scending from  generals  to  particulars.  The  former  is 
the  method  in  which  science  of  every  kind  is  slowly 
formed  and  extended ; the  latter  that  in  which  it  is 
most  easily  taught.  The  number  of  stages  through 
which  these  subdivisions  should  be  carried  is  either 
not  pointed  out  by  nature,  or  enough  of  nature  is  not 
known  to  fix  them  with  precision.  They  differ,  there- 
fore, in  different  systems  ; and,  unfortunately,  corres- 
ponding ones  have  not  always  been  called  by  the  same 
names. 

3.  The  synonymes  of  plants,  or  the  names  by  Which 
they  are  distinguished  in  the  writings  of  professed 
botanists  and  others,  from  the  earliest  times  to  the 
present. 

4.  The  sensible  qualities  of  plants,  or  the  different 
manner  in  which  they  severally  affect  the  organs  of 
sight,  smell,  taste,  and  touch. 

5.  The  anatomy  of  plants , or  description  of  the 
different  visible  parts  of  which  their  substance  is 
composed. 

6.  The  physiology  of  plants.  A plant,  like  an  ani- 
mal, is  a very  compound,  organized,  living  being,  in 
which  various  operations,  both  chemical  and  mecha- 
nical, are  continually  carrying  on,  from  its  first  pro- 
duction to  its  final  dissolution.  It  springs  from  a seed 
fertilized  by  the  pollen  of  its  parent  plant.  It  takes  in 
foreign  substances  by  its  inhaling  and  absorbent  vessels. 
It  elaborates  and  assimilates  to  its  own  substance 
those  parts  of  them  that  are  nutritious,  and  throws  off 
the  rest.  It  secretes  a variety  of  fluids  by  the  means 
of  glands,  and  other  unknown  organs.  It  gives  that 
motion  to  its  sap  on  which  a continuance  of  its  life 
depends. 


145 


L'OT 


BOU 


7.  The  purposes  to  which  different  plants  are  applied , 
cither  as  articles  of  food,  ingredients  in  the  composi- 
tion of  medicine,  or  materials  and  instruments  in  the 
useful  and  elegant  arts  ; the  soil  and  situation  in  which 
they  are  generally  found,  and  which  are  most  favour- 
able to  their  growth,  the  time  of  year  in  which  they 
open  their  flowers,  and  ripen  their  fruit,  with  many 
othei  incidental  particulars,  are  properly  within  the 
province  of  the  botanist.  But  as  a botanist  he  is  con- 
cerned with  nothing  more  than  the  simple  facts.  The 
first  methods  of  cultivating  such  as  are  raised  in  con- 
siderable quantities  for  the  special  use  or  amusement  of 
man ; the  theory  of  iheir  nutritious  or  medicinal  pro- 
perties ; and  the  manner  in  which  they  are  to  be  pre- 
pared, so  as  to  etfect  the  intended  purposes ; are  the 
province  either  of  the  gardener,  farmer,  physician, 
chemist,  or  the  artist. 

8.  The  history  of  botany. 

BOTANY  BAY.  An  English  settlement  in  New 
Holland,  so  called  because  it  afforded  the  botanist 
numerous  plants.  A yellow  resin  goes  by  the  name 
of  Botany  Bay  gum,  which  exudes  spontaneously  from 
the  trunk  of  the  tree  called  Acarois  resinifera , and 
also  from  the  wounded  bark.  All  the  information 
that  has  been  hitherto  collected  respecting  the  history 
of  the  yellow  gum  is  the  following : — The  plant  that 
produces  it  is  low  and  small,  with  long  grassy  leaves ; 
but  the  fructification  of  it  shoots  out  in  a singular 
manner  from  the  centre  of  the  leaves,  on  a single 
straight  stem,  to  the  height  of  twelve  or  fourteen  feet. 
Of  this  stem,  which  is  strong  and  light,  like  some  of 
the  reed  class,  the  natives  usually  make  their  spears. 
The  resin  is  generally  dug  up  out  of  the  soil  under  the 
tree,  not  collected  from  it,  and  may,  perhaps,  be  that 
which  Tasman  calls  “ gum  lac  of  the  ground.”  Mr. 
Boles,  surgeon  of  the  Lady  Penrhyn,  gives  a somewhat 
different  account;  and  as  this  gentleman  appears  to 
have  paid  considerable  attention  to  the  subject,  his 
account  may  certainly  be  relied  upon.  After  describ- 
ing the  tree  in  precisely  the  same  manner  as  above, 
he  observes,  that  at  the  top  of  the  trunk  of  the  tree, 
long  grassy  leaves  grow  in  great  abundance.  The 
gum  is  found  under  these  leaves  in  considerable  quan- 
tities : it  commonly  exudes  in  round  tears,  or  drops, 
from  the  size  of  a large  pea  to  that  of  a marble,  and 
sometimes  much  larger.  These  are,  by  the  heat  of 
the  sun,  frequently  so  much  softened,  that  they  fall  on 
the  ground,  and  in  this  soft  state  adhere  to  whatever 
they  fall  upon : hence  the  gum  is  frequently  found 
mixed  with  dirt,  wood,  the  bark  of  the  tree,  and  vari- 
ous other  substances  ; so  that  one  lump  has  been  seen 
composed  of  many  small  pure  pieces  of  various  sizes, 
united  together,  which  weighed  nearly  half  a hundred- 
weight. It  is  produced  in  such  abundance,  that  one 
man  may  collect  thirty  or  forty  pounds  in  the  space  of 
a few  hours.  The  convicts  have  another  method  of 
collecting  it ; they  dig  round  the  tree,  and  break  off 
pieces  of  the  roots,  which  always  have  some,  and  fre- 
quently considerable  quantities  of  the  gum  in  them. 
This  gum  appears  nearly,  but  not  entirely,  the  same 
as  that  which  exudes  from  the  trunk  of  the  tree ; the 
former  is  often  mixed  with  a strong-smelling  resinous 
substance  of  a black  nature,  and  is  so  interwoven  in 
the  wood  itself,  that  it  is  with  difficulty  separated. 
The  latter  appears  a pure,  unmi  xed,  resinous  substance. 

Several  experiments  have  been  made,  principally 
with  the  view  of  determining  what  menstruum  would 
dissolve  the  gum  the  most  readi'y,  and  in  the  greatest 
quantity,  from  which  it  appears  alkohol  and  aether 
dissolve  the  most. 

Theaiseases  in  which  this  resin  is  administered  are 
those  of  the  prims  vis,  and  principally  such  as  arise 
from  spasm,  a debility,  a loss  of  tone,  or  a diminished 
action  in  the  muscular  fibres  of  the  stomach  and  bow- 
els, such  as  loss  of  appetite,  sickness,  vomiting,  flatu- 
lency, heart-burn,  pains  in  the  stomach,  &c.  when 
they  were  really  idiopathic  complaints,  and  not  de- 
pendent upon  any  disease  in  the  stomach,  or  affections 
of  other  parts  of  the  body  communicated  to  the  sto- 
mach. In  debilities  and  relaxations  of  the  bowels, 
and  the  symptoms  from  thence  arising,  such  as  purg- 
ing and  flatulency,  it  has  been  found  of  good  effect.  In 
certain  cases  of  diarrhoea,  however,  (and  it  seemed 
those  in  which  an  unusual  degree  of  irritability  pre- 
vailed) it  did  not  answer  so  well,  unless  given  in  small 
doses,  and  combined  with  opiates,  when  the  patient 
seemed  to  gain  greater  advantage  than  when  opiates 
146 


only  were  had  recourse  to.  In  cases  of  amenonhoea, 
depending  on  (what  most  of  those  cases  do  depend 
upon)  a sluggishness,  a debility,  and  flaccidity  of  the 
system,  this  medicine,  when  assisted  by  proper  exer- 
cise and  diet,  has,  by  removing  the  symptoms  of  dys- 
pepsia, and  by  restoring  the  tone  and  action  of  the 
muscular  fibres,  been  found  very  serviceable.  Thir 
medicine  does  not,  in  the  dose  of  about  half  a drachm 
appear  to  possess  any  remarkably  sensible  operation 
It  neither  vomits,  purges,  nor  binds  the  belly,  nor  doer 
it  materially  increase  the  secretion  of  urine  or  perspira- 
tion. It  has,  indeed,  sometimes  been  said  to  purge 
and  at  others  to  occasion  sweating  ; but  they  are  not 
constant  effects,  and,  when  they  do  occur,  it  general!} 
depends  on  some  accidental  circumstance.  It  should 
seem  to  possess,  in  a very  extensive  degree,  the  pro- 
perty of  allaying  morbid  irritability,  and  of  restoring 
tone,  strength,  and  action,  to  the  debilitated  and  relax- 
ed fibre.  When  the  gum  itself  is  given,  it  should 
always  be  the  pure  unmixed  part;  if  given  in  the  form 
of  a draught,  it  should  be  mixed  in  water  with  muci 
lage  of  gum-arabic ; if  made  into  pills,  a small  portion 
of  Castile  soap  maybe  employed;  it  was  found  the 
lixiv.  sapon.  dissolved  it  entirely.  It  is  commonly, 
however,  made  into  a tincture  by  mixing  equal  part* 
of  the  gum  and  rectified  spirit ; one  drachm  of  this 
tincture,  (containing  half  a drachm  of  the  pure  gum) 
made  into  a draught  with  water  and  syrup,  by  the 
assistance  of  fifteen  grains  of  gum-arabic  in  mucilage 
forms  an  elegant  medicine,  and  at  the  same  time  very 
palatable..  It  soon  solidifies  by  the  sun,  into  pieces  of 
a yeilowT  colour  of  various  sizes.  It  pulverizes  easily 
without  caking  ; nor  does  it  adhere  to  the  teeth  when 
chewed.  It  has  a slightly  sweet  astringent  taste.  It 
melts  at  a moderate  heat.  When  kindled,  it  emits  a 
white  fragrant  smoke.  It  is  insoluble  in  water,  but 
imparts  to  it  the  flavour  of  storax.  Out  of  nine  parts, 
six  are  soluble  in  water,  and  astringent  to  the  taste ; 
and  two  parts  are  woody  fibre. 

, Bo  thrion.  (From  /3o0ptov,  a little  pit.)  Botrium 
1.  file  socket  for  the  tooth. 

2.  An  ulceration  of  the  cornea. 

Botri'tis.  (From  /Corpus,  a bunch  of  grapes.)  Bo- 
tryites.  A sort  of  burnt  cadmia,  collected  in  the  top 
of  the  furnace,  and  resembling  a bundli  of  grapes. 

BOTRYOLITE.  A brittle  and  moderately  hard 
mineral,  which  occurs  in  mamillary  concretions  of  a 
pearly  or  grayish-white  colour,  composed  of  silica,  bo- 
racic  acid,  lime,  oxide  of  iron  and  water.  It  come* 
from  Norway. 

BOTRYS.  (Bo7pt>f,  a cluster  of  grapes:  so  called 
because  its  seeds  hang  down  like  a bunch  of  grapesv 
The  oak  of  Jerusalem. 

Botrys  mexicana.  See  Chenopodium  ambro 
sioides. 

Botrys  vulgaris.  See  Chenopodium  botrys. 

Bouba'lios.  See  Momordica  Elaterium,  and  Pu 
dendum  muliebre. 

Bou'bon.  See  Bubo. 

BOUGI'E.  (French  for  wax  candle.)  Candelr 
cerea ; Candela  medicata ; Catheteres  of  Swediaur 
Cerei  mcdicati  of  Le  Dran ; Cereolus  Ghirurgorum 
A term  applied  by  surgeons  to  a long,  slender  instru 
ment,  that  is  introduced  through  the  urethra  into  th« 
bladder.  Bougies  made  of  the  elastic  gum  are  prefeta 
ble  to  those  made  of  wax.  The  caustic  bougie  differ! 
from  the  ordinary  one  in  having  a thin  roll  of  caustit 
in  its  middle,  which  destroys  the  stricture,  or  any  par* 
it  comes  in  contact  with.  Those  made  of  catgut  arc 
very  seldom  used,  but  are  deserving  of  the  attention 
of  the  surgeon.  Bougies  are  chiefly  used  to  overcome 
strictures  in  the  urethra,  and  the  introduction  of  them 
requires  a good  deal  of  address  and  caution.  They 
should  not  be  kept  in  the  urethra  so  long  at  one  time 
as  to  excite  much  pain  or  irritation.  Before  their  use 
is  discontinued,  they  should,  if  practicable,  be  carried 
the  length  of  the  bladder,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  ex- 
tent of  the  strictures,  taking  care  that  this  be  performed 
not  at  once,  but  in  a gradual  manner,  and  after  repeat 
ed  trials,  for  much  injury  might  arise  from  any  hasty 
or  violent  efforts  to  remove  the  resistance  that  mu* 
present  itself.  There  are  bougies  also  for  the  oesopha- 
gus and  rectum. 

BOU'LIMUS.  (From  /3ov,  greatly,  and  Xrpoj,  hun- 
ger ; or  from  (5ov\opai , to  desire.)  A canine  or  vora- 
cious appetite. 

BOURNONITE.  An  anlimonial  sulphuretof  lead.. 


BOY 


BOY 


Bovey  coal.  Of  a brownish-black  colour  and  lamel- 
lar texture,  formed  of  wood,  penetrated  with  petro- 
leum or  bitumen,  and  found  in  England,  France, 
Italy,  &c. 

Bovi'lljE.  (From  60s,  an  ox,  because  cattle  were 
supposed  subject  to  it.)  The  measles. 

Bovi  na  fames.  The  same  as  bulimia. 

Bovi'sta.  See  Lycoperdon. 

[BOWEN,  Pardon,  M.D.  This  accomplished  phy- 
sician and  excellent  man  was  born  in  Providence, 
Rhode  Island,  22d  of  March,  in  the  year  1757. 

The  incidents  of  Dr.  Bowen’s  early  life,  we  have  been 
unable  to  collect  with  sufficient  accuracy  to  warrant  us 
in  committing  them  to  the  pages  of  an  authentic  memoir. 

During  the  prevalence  of  the  yellow  fever  in  Provi- 
dence, when  dejection  and  dismay  sat  upon  many  a 
brow,  and  the  sense  of  personal  danger  threatened  to 
absorb  the  sympathies  of  our  common  nature,  and 
death  mocked  at  the  expedients  of  human  science  to 
avert  his  blow,  Dr.  Bowen  shrunk  not  from  the  perils 
in  his  way.  More  than  once  was  his  life  endangered 
by  an  attack  of  that  fearful  malady,  but  God  preserved 
him  from  thus  becoming  a victim  to  his  noble  intre- 
pidity in  the  service  of  humanity. 

Dr.  Bowen  confined  his  attention  to  no  particular 
department  of  his  profession,  but  aimed  at  excellence 
in  all.  For  his  skill  in  operative  surgery  he  was  highly 
respected,  and  during  many  years  most  of  the  surgical 
operations,  in  and  around  Providence,  were  performed 
by  him.  In  medical  surgery  he  was  thought  extremely 
judicious;  and  his  uncommon  science,  experience,  and 
success  in  obstetrics,  left  him  without  a superior  in  that 
difficult  branch  of  his  profession. 

Dr.  Bowen  contributed  occasionally  to  the  medical 
journals  of  the  day;  and  in  the  fourth  volume  of 
Hosack  and  Francis’s  Medical  and  Philosophical  Re- 
gister may  be  found  an  elaborate  account  from  his  pen 
of  the  yellow  fever,  as  it  prevailed  in  Providence  in  the 
year  1805.  He  died  in  October  1836,  aged  69  years. 
His  life,  in  all  its  stages,  was  a beautiful  exhibition  of 
the  virtues,  and  at  its  close,  an  example  of  Christian 
holiness. — SeeThach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

BOX-TREE.  SeeBuzus. 

BOYLE’S  FUMING  LIQUOR.  The  hydroguret- 
ted  sulphuret  of  ammonia. 

[BO  YLSTON,  Dr.  Zabdiel,  was  born  in  Massachu- 
setts in  1680,  and  was  the  eldest  son  of  an  English  phy- 
sician of  the  same  name,  one  of  the  early  settlers  of 
that  province  under  the  British  government.  Dr. 
Boylston  is  represented  as  a skilful  physician,  bold, 
persevering,  courageous  and  benevolent.  “ In  the  year 
1721  the  small  pox  appeared  in  Boston,  and  pursued  its 
usual  desolating  career,  carrying  with  it  the  utmost 
terror  and  confusion.  On  this  alarming  occasion  Dr. 
Cotton  Mather,  the  learned  and  distinguished  divine, 
communicated  to  Dr.  Boylston  a publication  in  the 
Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society,  announcing  the 
discovery  of  a new  method  of  mitigating  the  virulence 
of  this  fatal  disease.  Dr.  Boylston  was  forcibly  im- 
pressed with  the  benefit  of  the  discovery,  and  accord- 
ingly after  deliberating  on  the  most  safe  and  expeditious 
mode  of  thus  artificially  introducing  the  disease  into 
the  system,  he  communicated  to  the  medical  gentlemen 
in  Boston  the  plan  he  proposed  to  adopt,  and  the 
source  whence  he  derived  the  first  hints  of  the  ope- 
ration, desiring  their  concurrence  in  the  undertaking.” 
In  this  measure  he  was  opposed  by  the  physicians  and 
clergy,  some  of  whom  denounced  him  from  the  pulpit; 
and  the  inhabitants  became  enraged,  and  were  ex- 
cited to  commit  atrocious  acts  of  outrage  on  the  per- 
son of  Dr.  Boylston,  extending  their  rancour  even  to 
his  family. 

“Undismayed,  however,  by  all  this  violence,  and 
unsupported  by  the  friendship  of  any  but  Dr.  Mather, 
he  commenced,  on  the  27th  June  1721,  while  the  small- 
pox was  in  its  most  destructive  progress  through  the 
town,  this  untried  experiment  of  inoculation  on  his 
own  son,  a child  of  thirteen  years  of  age,  and  two 
blacks  in  his  family,  one  of  thirty-six,  and  the  other  of 
two  years  of  age,  and  on  all  with  complete  success. 
This  rekindled  the  fury  of  the  populace,  and  induced 
the  authorities  of  the  town  to  summon  hirr  before 
them  to  answer  for  his  practice.  He  underwent  re- 
peated examinations ; and  although  he  invited  all  the 
practitioners  in  Boston  to  visit  his  patients  and  judge 
for  themselves,  he  received  only  insults  and  threats  in 
reply  The  facts  we  have  thought  worthy  of  notice, 


a3  remarkable  in  themselves,  and  as  in  some  degree 
characteristic  of  the  excitable  spirit  of  the  times.  In 
thus  encountering  obloquy  and  reproach,  however,  Dr. 
Boylston  but  experienced  the  fortune  of  most  of  those 
who  have  attempted  to  innovate  on  long  established 
usages,  or  to  take  the  lead  in  the  career  of  public  im- 
provement. The  small-pox  ceased  its  ravages  in  May 
1722;  and  during  its  prevalence  Dr.  Boylston  con- 
tinued the  practice  of  inoculation  to  all  who  could  be 
induced  to  submit  to  it.  He  inoculated  with  his  own 
hand  two  hundred  and  forty-seven  of  both  sexes  from 
nine  months  to  sixty-seven  yearsf  of  age  in  Boston  and 
in  the  neighbouring  towns;  thirty-nine  were  inocu- 
lated by  other  physicians,  after  the  tumult  had  in  some 
measure  subsided,  making  in  the  whole  two  hundred 
and  eighty-six,  of  whom  only  six  died;  and  of  these, 
three  were  supposed  to  have  taken  the  disease  the  na- 
tural way,  some  days  previous  to  their  being  inocu- 
lated ; three  of  those  who  died  were  his  oldest  patients. 
It  appears,  by  the  account  published  by  the  select  men, 
that  during  the  same  period  five  thousand  seven  hun- 
dred and  fifty-nine  had  taken  the  natural  small-pox, 
eight  hundred  and  forty-four  of  whom  fell  victims  to 
the  disease,  being  more  than  one  in  six.  In  the  vicinity 
of  Boston  it  had  been  still  more  malignant  and  fatal. 
The  utility  of  the  practice  was  now  established  with- 
out dispute ; and  its  success  encouraged  it3  more  gene- 
ral practice  in  England,  in  which  country  it  had  been 
tried  upon  but  few  persons,  most  of  whom  were  con- 
demned convicts  and  charity  children.  The  daughter 
of  Lady  Mary  W.  Montague  was  inoculated  in  Lon- 
don, in  April  1721,  being  the  first  instance  in  Euiope, 
and  the  convicts  were  made  the  subjects  of  the  experi- 
ment in  August  of  the  same  year.  i)r.  Boylston  there- 
fore is  justly  entitled  to  the  honour  of  being  the  first 
inoculator  in  America ; and  this,  even  before  the  single 
instance  of  the  experiment  in  Europe  had  come  to  his 
knowledge. 

Dr.  Boylston,  during  his  unjust  persecution,  held  a 
correspondence  with  Sir  Hans  Sloane,  of  London,  the 
court  physician ; who,  being  apprised  of  his  very  emi- 
nent services  in  first  introducing  inoculation  into 
America,  honoured  him  with  an  invitation  to  visit 
London.  He  accordingly  embarked  for  that  city,  and 
on  his  arrival  was  greeted  with  the  most  cordial  affec- 
tion and  respect.  He  was  elected  a member  of  the 
Royal  Society,  the  first  American,  we  believe,  ever 
admitted  to  that  honour.  He  was  moreover  honoured 
by  being  introduced  to  the  royal  family,  and  received 
tlie  most  flattering  attentions  and  friendship  of  some 
of  the  most  distinguished  characters  of  the  nation. 
After  his  return  to  his  native  country,  Dr.  Boylston 
continued  at  the  head  of  his  profession,  and  engaged  in 
literary  pursuits,  making  many  ingenious  and  useful 
communications  to  the  Royal  Society,  and  correspond- 
ing with  his  numerous  friends,  among  whom  he  used 
to  mention  with  great  respect  and  affection  the  Rev. 
Dr.  Watts,  who  appears  by  his  letters  to  have  been  a 
warm  advocate  for  inoculation. 

Dr.  Boylston  possessed  a strong  and  reflecting  mind 
and  acute  discernment.  His  character  through  life 
was  one  of  unimpeached  integrity.  He  was  charitable 
in  his  opinions  of  others,  patient  under  the  severest 
persecution,  and  forgiving  of  his  bitterest  enemies. 
These  qualities,  added  to  the  natural  ease  and  suavity 
of  his  manners,  which  had  been  improved  by  inter- 
course with  the  world,  caused  his  society  to  be  much 
sought,  and  to  his  family  and  his  friends  rendered  him 
a most  interesting  and  instructive  companion.  His 
health  was  often  interrupted  by  severe  attacks  of 
asthma,  to  which  he  was  subject  for  the  last  forty 
years  of  his  life.  He  met  death  with  calmness  and 
perfect  resignation  in  the  eighty-seventh  year  of  his 
age,  saying  to  his  friends,  1 my  work  in  this  world  is 
done,  and  my  hopes  of  futurity  are  brightening.’  He 
was  buried  in  the  family  tomb  at  Brooklyn,  on  which  is 
inscribed  the  following  appropriate  and  just  language; 
‘ Sacred  to  the  memory  of  Dr.  Zabdiel  Boylston,  Esq., 
physician  and  F.R.S.,  who  first  introduced  the  prac- 
tice of  inoculation  into  America.  Through  a life  of 
extensive  benevolence,  he  was  always  faithful  to 
his  word,  just  in  his  dealings,  affable  in  his  man- 
ners ; and  after  a long  sickness,  in  which  he  was  ex- 
emplary for  his  patience  and  resignation  to  his  Maker, 
he  quitted  this  mortal  life  in  a just  expectation  of  a 
happy  immortality,  March  1st,  1766.’  His  wife  died  a 
few  years  before  him.” — See  Tkach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 


BRA 


BRA 


Brachk'rium.  (From  brachiale,  a bracelet.)  A 
truss  or  bandage  for  hernia ; a term  used  by  the  bar- 
barous Latin  writers. 

BRACHLE'US.  Brachial;  belonging  to  the  arm. 

Brachijeus  externus.  See  Triceps  extensor 
cubiti. 

BrachijEUS  internus.  See  Brachialus  internus. 

Brachi.eus  musculus.  See  Brachialis  internus. 

BRACHIAL.  Brachialis.  Of  or  belonging  to  the 

arm. 

Brachial  artery.  Arteria  brachialis.  The  bra- 
chial artery  is  the  continuation  of  the  axillary  artery, 
which,  as  it  passes  behind  the  tendon  of  the  pectoralis 
major,  receives  the  name  of  brachial.  It  runs  down 
on  the  inside  of  the  arm,  over  the  musculus  coraco- 
brachialis,  and  anconaeus  internus,  and  along  the 
inner  edge  of  the  biceps,  behind  the  -vena  basilica, 
giving  out  smali  branches  as  it  goes  along.  Below  the 
bend  of  the  arm  it  divides  into  the  cubitalis  and  radia- 
lis.  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  the  brachial  artery  is 
divided  from  its  origin  into  two  large  branches,  which 
run  down  on  the  arm,  and  afterward  on  the  fore-arm, 
where  they  are  called  cubitalis  and  radialis. 

Brachia'le.  The  word  means  a bracelet ; but  the 
ancient  anatomical  writers  apply  this  term  to  the  car- 
pus, the  part  on  which  the  bracelet  was  worn. 

BRACHIA'LIS.  See  Brachial. 

Brachialis  externus.  See  Triceps  extensor 
cubiti. 

Brachialis  internus.  Brachieeus  of  Winslow. 
Brachiceus  internus  of  Cowper ; and  Humero-cubital 
of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  fore-arm,  situated  on  the 
fore-part  of  the  os  humeri.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the 
middle  of  the  os  humeri,  at  each  side  of  the  insertion 
of  the  deltoid  muscle,  covering  all  the  inferior  and 
fore-part  of  this  bone,  runs  over  the  joint,  and  adheres 
firmly  to  the  ligament ; is  inserted,  by  a strong  short 
tendon,  into  the  coronoid  process  of  the  ulna.  Its  use 
is  to  bend  the  fore  arm,  and  to  prevent  the  capsular 
ligament  of  the  joint  from  being  pinched. 

BRACHIA7.TJS.  Brachiate.  Applied  to  branches, 
panicles,  &c.  spread  in  four  directions,  crossing  each 
othei  alternately  in  pairs  ; a common  mode  of  growth 
in  the  branches  of  shrubs  that  have  opposite  leaves,  as 
the  lilac,  syringa,  <fcc. 

Bra'chii  os.  See  Humeri  os. 

Brachio-cubital  ligament.  Ligamentum  brachio- 
cubitale.  The  expansion  of  the  lateral  ligament, 
which  is  fixed  in  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os  humeri, 
runs  over  the  capsular,  to  which  it  closely  adheres, 
and  is  inserted  like  radii  on  the  side  of  the  great  sig- 
moid cavity  of  the  ulna  ; it  is  covered  on  the  inside  by 
several  tendons,  which  adhere  closely  to  it,  and  seem 
to  strengthen  it  very  considerably. 

Brachio-radial  ligament.  Tig  amentum  brachio- 
radiale.  The  expansion  of  the  lateral  ligament,  which 
runs  over  the  external  condyle  of  the  os  humeri,  is  in- 
serted round  the  coronary  ligament  from  thence  all 
the  way  down  to  the  neck  of  the  radius,  and  also  in 
the  neighbouring  parts  of  the  ulna.  Through  all  this 
passage  it  covers  the  capsular  ligament,  and  is  covered 
by  several  tendons  adhering  closely  to  both. 

BRA'CHIUM.  (Bp«%tov,  the  arm.)  The  arm, 
from  the  shoulder  to  the  wrist. 

Brachium  movens  quartus.  See  Latissimus 
dorsi. 

Brachu'na.  According  to  Avicenna,  a species  of 
furor  uterinus. 

Brachychro'nius.  (From  /3paxvs , short,  and 
j^povoj,  time.)  A disease  which  continues  but  a short 
time. 

Brachypnce'a.  (From  fipaxvs,  short,  and  zsveu>,  to 
breathe.)  Shortness  and  difficulty  of  breathing. 

Bra'chys.  (From  j3paxu?)  short.)  A muscle  of 
the  scapula. 

BRACTEA.  ( Bractea , a thin  leaf  or  plate  of  me- 
tal.) A floral  leaf.  One  of  the  seven  fulcra  or  props 
of  plants,  according  to  Linnaeus.  A bractea  is  a little 
leaf-like  appendage  to  some  flowers,  lying  under  or 
interspersed  in  the  flower,  but  generally  different  in 
colour  from  the  true  leaves  of  the  plant. 

1.  It  is  green  in  some;  as  in  Ocymum  basilicum 
majus. 

2.  Coloured  in  others ; as  in  Salvia  liorminum , &c. 

3.  In  some  it  is  caducous,  falling  off  before  the 

flowers. 

4.  In  others  in  remains ; as  in  Tibia  europwa. 

148 


Coma  bracteata  is,  when  the  flower-stem  is  termi- 
nated with  a number  of  very  large  bracteac,  resem 
bling  a bush  of  hair. 

BRACTEATiE.  (From  bractea,  here  meaning  a 
corolla.)  The  name  of  a class  of  Boerhaave’s  method 
of  plants,  consisting  of  herbaceous  vegetables,  which 
have  petals,  and  the  seeds  of  which  are  furnished  with 
a single  lobe  or  cotyledon. 

BRACTEATUS.  (From  bractea,  a floral  leaf.) 
Having  a floral  leaf ; as  pedunculus  bracteatus. 

BRACTEIFORMIS  Resembling  a bractea  or 
floral  leaf. 

Bradype'psia.  (From  (3paSvs , slow,  and  zstir'Jui,  to 
concoct.)  Weak  digestion. 

Bra'ggat.  A name  formerly  applied  to  a ptisan  of 
honpy  and  water. 

BRAIN.  See  Cerebrum 

Brain , little.  See  Cerebellum. 

BRAN.  Furfur.  The  husks  or  shells  of  wheat, 
which  remain  in  the  bolting  machine.  It  contains  a 
portion  of  the  farinaceous  matter,  and  is  said  to  have 
a laxative  quality.  Decoctions  of  bran,  sweetened 
with  sugar,  are  used  by  the  common  people,  and  some- 
times with  success,  against  coughs,  hoarseness,  &c. 

BRA'NCA.  ( Branca , the  Spanish  for  a foot,  or 
branch.)  A term  applied  to  some  herbs,  which  are 
supposed  to  resemble  a particular  foot;  as  branca 
leonis , lion’s  foot ; branca  ursina,  bear’s  foot. 

Branca  leonina.  See  Alchemilla. 

Branca  leonis.  See  Alchemilla. 

Branca  ursina.  See  Acanthus  and  Heracleum 

Bra'ncHj®.  (From to  make  moist.)  Branchi. 
Swelled  tonsils,  or  glandulous  tumours,  of  the  fauces, 
which  secrete  saliva. 

Bra'nchus.  (From  jSpcxWj, to  moisten.'!  A defluxion 
of  humours  from  the  fauces. 

BRANDY.  Spiritus  Oallicus.  A colourless, 
slightly  opaque,  and  milky  fluid,  of  a hot  and  pene- 
trating taste,  and  a strong  and  agreeable  smell,  ob- 
tained by  distilling  from  wine.  It  consists  of  water, 
ardent  spirit,  and  a small  portion  of  oil,  which  renders 
it  milky  at  first,  and,  after  a certain  time,  colours  it 
yellow.  It  is  the  fluid  from  which  rectified  or  ardent 
spirit  is  obtained.  Its  peculiar  flavour  depends  on  the 
nature  of  the  volatile  principles,  or  essential  oil,  which 
come  over  along  with  it  in  the  distillation,  and  like- 
wise, in  some  measure,  upon  the  management  of  the 
fire,  the  wood  of  the  cask  in  which  it  is  kept,  &.c.  It 
is  said,  that  our  rectifiers  imitate  the  flavour  of  brandy, 
by  adding  a small  proportion  of  nitrous  ajther  to  the 
spirit  of  malt,  or  molasses.  The  utility  of  brandy  is 
very  considerable,  but,  from  its  pleasant  taste  and  exhi- 
larating property,  it  is  two  often  taken  to  excess.  It 
gives  energy  to  the  animal  functions ; it  is  a powerful 
tonic,  cordial,  and  antispasmodic  ; and  its  utility  with 
camphire,  in  gangrenous  affections,  is  very  great. 

BRANKS.  The  name  in  Scotland  for  the  mumps. 
See  Cynanche  parotideea. 

BRANKURSINE.  See  Acanthus. 

Brasi'lia.  Brazilwood. 

Brasiliense  lignum.  See  Haematoxylum  campe - 
chianum. 

Brasiliensis  radix.  The  ipecacuanha  root  is 
sometimes  so  called. 

Bra'sium.  (From  (3pa<jcru),  to  boil.)  Malt,  or  ger- 
minated barley. 

Bra  sma.  (From  (ipaatro >,  to  boil.)  The  unripe 
black  pepper.  Fermentation. 

Bra'smos.  The  same. 

BRASS.  JEs.  A combination  of  copper  and  zinc. 

Brassade'lla  Brassatella.  The  Ophioglossum , 
or  herb,  adder’s  tongue. 

BRA'SSICA.  (Varro  says,  quasi  prccsica ; from 
prceseco,  to  cut  off ; because  it  is  cut  from  the  stalk  for 
use  : or  from  zspaaia,  a bed  in  a garden  where  they  are 
cultivated,  or  from  (jpacrou),  to  devour,  because  it  is 
eagerly  eaten  by  cattle.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Tetr adynamia ; 
Order,  Siliquosa.  Crambo.  Cabbage.  Colewort. 

Brassica  alba.  The  w-hite  cabbage. 

Brassica  apiana.  Jagged  or  crimpled  colewort 

Brassica  canina.  Mercurialis  syloestris.  See 
Mercurialis  annua. 

Brassica  capitata.  Cabbage.  There  are  several 
varieties  of  cabbage,  all  of  which  are  generally  hard 
of  digestion,  producing  flatulencies,  and  afford  very  lit- 
tle nourishment.  These  inconveniences  are  not  exp® 


BRE 


rienced  by  those  whose  stomachs  are  strong  and  accus- 
tomed to  them.  Few  vegetables  run  into  a state  of 
putrefaction  so  quickly  as  cabbages ; they  ought,  there- 
fore, always  to  be  used  immediately  after  cutting.  In 
Holland  and  Germany  there  is  a method  of  preserving 
them,  by  cutting  them  into  pieces,  and  sprinkling  salt 
and  some  aromatic  herbs  among  them ; this  mass  is 
put  into  a tub,  where  it  is  pressed  close,  and  left  to  fer- 
ment, when  it  is  called  sour  crout,  or  sauer  kraut. 
These,  and  all  pickles  of  cabbage,  are  considered  as 
wholesome  and  antiscorbutic,  from  the  vinegar  and 
spices  they  contain. 

Brassica  congylodes.  Turnip  cabbage. 

Brassica  cumana.  Red  colewort. 

Brassica  eruca.  Brassica  erucastrum.  Eruca 
sylvestns.  The  systematic  name  for  the  plant  which 
affords  the  semen  eruca;.  Garden  rocket.  Roman 
rocket.  Rocket  gentle.  Brassica— foliis  lyartis , 

caule  hirsuto  siliquis  glabris , of  Linnceus.  The  seeds 
of  this  plant,  and  of  the  wild  rocket,  have  an  acrid 
taste,  and  are  eaten  by'the  Italians  in  their  pickles,  &c. 
They  are  said  to  be  good  aperients  and  antiscorbutics, 
but  are  esteemed  by  the  above-mentioned  people  for 
their  supposed  aphrodisiac  qualities. 

Brassica  erucastrum.  See  Brassica  eruca. 

Brassica  Florida.  The  cauliflower. 

Brassica  gonylicodes.  The  turnip  cabbage. 

Brassica  lacuturria.  Brassica  lacuturris.  The 
Savoy  plant. 

Brassica  marina.  See  Convolvulus  soldanella. 

Brassica  napus.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
plant  from  which  the  semen  napi  is  obtained.  Napus 
sylvcstris.  Bunias.  Wild  navew,  or  rape.  The 
seeds  yield,  upon  expression,  a large  quantity  of  oil 
called  rape  oil,  which  is  sometimes  ordered  in  stimu- 
lating liniments. 

Brassica  oleracea.  The  systematic  name  for 
the  brassica  capitata  of  the  shops.  See  Brassica 
capitata. 

Brassica  rapa.  The  systematic  name  for  the  plant 
whose  root  is  called  turnip.  Rapum..  Rapus.  Napus. 
Napus  dulcis.  The  turnip.  Turnips  are  accounted  a 
salubrious  food,  demulcent,  detergent,  somewhat  laxa- 
tive and  diuretic,  but  liable,  in  weak  stomachs,  to  pro- 
duce flatulencies,  and  prove  difficult  of  digestion.  The 
liquor  pressed  out  of  them,  after  boiling,  is  sometimes 
taken  medicinally  in  coughs  and  disorders  of  the 
breast.  The  seeds  are  occasionally  taken  as  diuretics  ; 
they  have  no  smell,  but  a mild  acrid  taste. 

Brassica  rubra.  Red  cabbage.  A very  excellent 
test  both  for  acids  and  alkalies  in  which  it  is  superior 
to  litmus,  being  naturally  blue,  turning  green  with 
alkalies,  and  red  with  acids. 

Brassica  sabauaa.  The  Savoy  plant. 

Brassica  sativa.  The  common  garden  cabbage. 

Brasside'llica  ars.  A way  of  curing  wounds, 
mentioned  by  Paracelsus,  by  applying  the  herb  Brassi- 
della  to  them. 

Bra'thu.  B padv.  An  old  name  for  savine. 

BRAZIL  WOOD.  See  Ccesalpina  crista. 

[“Brazil  wood  is  the  produce  of  the  Ccesalpina 
crista , growing  in  Brazil,  in  the  Isle  of  France, 
Japan,  and  other  countries.  The  wood  is  hard  and 
heavy;  and  though  pale  when  recent,  it  acquires  a 
deep  red  colour  by  exposure.  Digested  in  water,  it 
affords  a fine  red  infusion,  of  a sweetish  flavour;  the 
residue,  which  appears  nearly  black,  imparts  much  of 
its  colour  to  alkaline  liquors.  With  alkohol  it  gives  a 
deep  red  tincture:  alkalies  and  soap  convert  its  red 
colour  to  a fine  purple;  hence,  paper  tinged  with 
Brazil  wood  is  sometimes  used  as  a test  for  alkalies ; 
acids  render  it  yellow:  alutn  produces  a fine  crimson 
lake,  with  infusion  of  Brazil  wood : muriate  of  tin 
forms  with  it  a crimson  precipitate,  bordering  on  pur- 
ple : the  salts  of  iron  give  a dingy  purple  colour.  Sul- 
phuretted hydrogen  destroys  the  colour  of  infusion  of 
Brazil  wood,  but  it  reappears  on  expelling  the  gas.” — 
See  Webster's  Man.  of  Chem.  A.] 

BREAD.  Fanis.  “Farinaceous  vegetables  are 
converted  into  meal  by  trituration,  or  grinding  in  a 
mill;  and  when  the  husk  or  bran  has  been  separated 
by  sifting  or  bolting,  the  powder  is  called  flour.  This 
is  composed  of  a small  quantity  of  mucilaginous  sac- 
charine matter,  soluble  in  cold  water ; much  starch, 
which  is  scarcely  soluble  in  cold  water,  but  combines 
with  that  fluid  by  heat ; and  an  adhesive  gray  sub- 
stance insoluble  in  water,  alkohol,  oil,  or  aether,  and 


BRE 

resembling  an  animal  substance  in  many  of  its  pro- 
perties. 

When  flour  is  kneaded  together  with  water,  it  forms 
a tough  paste,  containing  these  principles  very  little 
altered,  and  not  easily  digested  by  the  stomach.  The 
action  of  heat  produces  a considerable  change  in  the 
gluten,  and  probably  in  the  starch,  rendering  the  com- 
pound more  easy  to  masticate,  as  well  as  to  digest. 
Hence  the  first  approaches  towards  the  making  of 
bread  consisted  in  parching  the  corn,  either  for  imme- 
diate use  as  food,  or  juevious  to  its  trituration  into 
meal;  or  else  in  baking  the  flour  into  unleavened 
bread,  or  boiling  it  into  masses  more  or  less  consistent ; 
of  all  which  we  have  sufficient  indications  in  the  histo- 
ries of  the  earlier  nations,  as  well  as  in  the  various  prac- 
tices of  the  moderns.  It  appears  likewise  from  the 
Scriptures,  that  the  practice  of  making  leavened  bread 
is  of  very  considerable  antiquity ; but  the  additions  of 
vest,  or  the  vinous  ferment,  now  so  generally  used, 
seems  to  be  of  modern  date. 

Unleavened  bread  in  the  form  of  small  cakes,  or  bis- 
cuit, is  made  for  the  use  of  shipping  in  large  quanti- 
ties; but  most  of  the  bread  used  on  shore  is  made  to 
undergo,  previous  to  baking,  a kind  of  fermentation, 
which  appears  to  be  of  the  same  nature  as  the  fer- 
mentation of  saccharine  substances;  but  is  checked 
and  modified  by  so  many  circumstances,  as  to  render 
it  not  a little  difficult  to  speak  with  certainty  and  pre- 
cision respecting  it. 

When  dough  or  paste  is  left  to  undergo  a sponta- 
neous decomposition  in  an  open  vessel,  the  various 
parts  of  the  mass  are  differently  affected,  according  to 
the  humidity,  the  thickness  or  thinness  of  the  part, 
the  vicinity  or  remoteness  of  fire,  and  other  circum- 
stances less  easily  investigated.  The  saccharine  part 
is  disposed  to  become  converted  into  alkohol,  the  mu- 
cilage has  a tendency  to  become  sour  and  mouldy, 
while  the  gluten  in  all  probability  verges  towards  the 
putrid  state.  An  entire  change  in  the  chemical  attrac- 
tions of  the  several  component  parts  must  then  take 
place  in  a progressive  manner,  not  altogether  the  same 
in  the  internal  and  more  humid  parts  as  in  the  exter- 
nal parts,  which  not  only  become  dry  by  simple  evapo- 
ration, but  are  acted  upon  by  the  surrounding  air. 
The  outside  may  therefore  become  mouldy  or  putrid, 
while  the  inner  part  may  be  only  advanced  to  an  acid 
state.  Occasional  admixture  of  the  mass  would  of 
course  not  only  produce  some  change  in  the  rapidity  of 
this  alteration,  but  likewise  render  it  more  uniform 
throughout  the  whole.  The  effect  of  this  commencing 
fermentation  is  found  to  be,  that  the  mass  is  rendered 
more  digestible  and  light ; by  which  last  expression  it 
is  understood,  that  it  is  rendered  much  more  porous  by 
the  disengagement  of  elastic  fluid,  that  separates  its 
parts  from  each  other,  and  greatly  increases  its  bulk. 
The  operation  of  baking  puts  a stop  to  this  process, 
by  evaporating  great  part  of  the  moisture  which  is 
requisite  to  favour  the  chemical  attraction,  and  pro- 
bably also  by  still  farther  changing  the  nature  of  the 
component  parts.  It  is  then  bread. 

Bread  made  according  to  the  preceding  method  will 
not  possess  the  uniformity  which  is  requisite,  because 
some  parts  may  be  mouldy,  while  others  are  not  yet 
sufficiently  changed  from  the  state  of  dough.  The 
same  means  are  used  in  this  case  as  have  been  found 
effectual  in  promoting  the  uniform  fermentation  of 
large  masses.  This  consists  in  the  use  of  a leaven  or 
ferment,  which  is  a small  portion  of  some  matter  of 
the  same  kind,  but  in  a more  advanced  stage  of  the 
fermentation.  After  the  leaven  has  been  well  incor- 
porated by  kneading  into  fresh  dough,  it  not  only  brings 
on  the  fermentation  with  greater  speed,  but  causes  it 
to  take  place  in  the  whole  of  the  mass  at  the  same 
time ; and  as  soon  as  the  dough  has  by  this  means  ac- 
quired a due  increase  of  bulk  from  the  carbonic  acid, 
which  endeavours  to  escape,  it  is  judged  to  be  suffi- 
ciently fermented,  and  ready  for  the  oven. 

The  fermentation  by  means  of  leaven  or  sour  dough 
is  thought  to  be  of  the  acetous  kind,  because  it  is  ge- 
nerally so  managed,  that  the  bread  has  a sour  flavour 
and  taste.  But  it  has  been  ascertained  that  this  acidity 
proceeds  from  true  vinegar.  Bread  raised  by  leaven 
is  usually  made  of  a mixture  of  wheat  and  rye,  not 
very  accurately  cleared  of  the  bran.  It  is  distinguished 
by  the  name  of  rye-bread ; and  the  mixture  of  these 
two  kinds  of  grain  is  called  bread-corn,  or  meslin,  in 
many  parts  of  the  kingdom,  where  it  is  raised  on  one 

149 


ERE 


BRE 


ana  tne  same  piece  of  ground,  and  passes  through  all 
the  processes  of  reaping,  threshing,  grinding,  &c.  in 
this  mixed  state. 

Yest  or  barm  is  used  as  the  ferment  for  the  finer 
kinds  of  bread.  This  is  the  mucilaginous  froth  which 
rises  to  the  surface  of  beer  in  its  first  stage  of  ferment- 
ation. When  it  is  mixed  with  dough,  it  produces  a 
much  more  speedy  and  effectual  fermentation  than 
that  obtained  by  leaven,  and  the  bread  is  accordingly 
much  lighter,  and  scarcely  ever  sour.  The  fermenta- 
tion by  yest  seems  to  be  almost  certainly  of  the  vinous 
or  spirituous  kind. 

Bread  is  much  more  uniformly  miscible  with  water 
than  dough ; and  on  this  circumstance  its  good  quali- 
ties most  probably  do  in  a great  measure  depend. 

A very  great  number  of  processes  are  used  by  cooks, 
confectioners,  and  others,  to  make  cake*,  puddings, 
and  other  kinds  of  bread,  in  which  different  qualifies 
are  required.  Some  c.akes  are  rendered  brittle,  or  as 
it  is  called  short , by  an  admixture  of  sugar  or  of  starch. 
Another  kind  of  brittleness  is  given  by  the  addition  of 
butter  or  fat.  White  of  egg,  gum-water,  isinglass, 
and  other  adhesive  substances,  are  used,  when  it  is 
intended  that  the  effect  of  fermentation  shall  expand 
the  dough  into  an  exceedingly  porous  mass.  Dr.  Per- 
cival  has  recommended  the  addition  of  salep,  or  the 
nutritious  powder  of  the  orchis  root.  He  says,  that 
an  ounce  of  salep,  dissolved  in  a quart  of  water,  and 
mixed  with  two  pounds  of  flour,  two  ounces  of  yest, 
and  eighty  grains  of  salt,  produced  a remarkably  good 
loaf,  weighing  three  pounds  two  ounces  ; while  a loaf 
made  of  an  equal  quantity  of  the  other,  ingredients, 
without  the  salep,  weighed  but  two  pounds  and  twelve 
ounces.  If  the  salep  be  in  too  large  quantity,  how- 
ever, its  peculiar  taste  will  be  distinguishable  in  the 
bread.  The  farina  of  potatoes;  likewise,  mixed  with 
wheaten  flour,  makes  very  good  bread.  The  reflecting 
chemist  will  receive  considerable  information  on  this 
subject  from  an  attentive  inspection  of  the  receipts  to 
be  met  with  in  treatises  of  cooking  and  confectionary. 

Mr.  Accum,  in  his  late  Treatise  on  Culinary  Poisons, 
states,  that  the  inferior  kind  of  flour  which  the  Lon- 
don bakers  generally  use  for  making  loaves,  requires 
the  addition  of  alum  to  give  them  the  white  appear- 
ance of  bread  made  from  fine  flour.  ‘ The  baker’s 
flour  is  very  often  made  of  the  worst  kinds  of  damaged 
foreign  wheat,  and  other  cereal  grains  mixed  with 
them  in  grinding  the  wheat  into  flour.  In  this  capital, 
no  fewer  than  six  distinct  kinds  of  wheaten  flour  are 
brought  into  the  market.  They  are  called  fine  flour, 
seconds,  middlings,  fine  middlings,  coarse  middlings, 
and  twenty-penny  flour.  Common  garden  beans  and 
pease  are  also  frequently  ground  up  among  the  Lon- 
don bread  flour. 

‘ The  smallest  quantity  of  alum  that  can  be  employed 
with  effect  to  produce  a white,  light,  and  porous  bread 
from  an  inferior  kind  of  flour,  I have  my  own  baker’s 
authority  to  state,  is  from  three  to  four  ounces  to  a 
sack  of  flour  weighing  240  pounds.’ 

1 The  following  account  of  making  a sack  of  five 
bushels  of  flour  into  bread,  is  taken  from  Dr.  P.  Mark- 
ham’s Considerations  on  the  Ingredients  used  in  the 
Adulteration  of  Flour  and  Bread,  p.  21. 

Five  bushels  flour, 

Eight  ounces  of  alum, 

Four  lbs.  salt, 

Half  a gallon  of  yest,  mixed  with  about 
Three  gallons  of  water. 

‘Another  substance  employed  bv  fraudulent  bakers 
is  subcarbonate  of  ammonia.  With  this  salt  they 
realize  the  important  consideration  of  producing  light 
and  porous  bread  from  spoiled,  or  what  is  technically 
called  sour  flour.  Tnis  salt,  which  becomes  wholly 
converted  into  a gaseous  substance  during  the  ope- 
ration of  baking,  causes  the  dough  to  swell  up  into 
air-bubbles,  which  carry  before  them  the  stiff  dough, 
and  thus  it  renders  the  dough  porous  ; the  salt  itself 
is  at  the  same  time  totally  volatilized  during  the  ope- 
ration of  baking.’ — 1 Potatoes  are  likewise  largely, 
and,  perhaps,  constantly  used  by  fraudulent  bakers, 
as  a cheap  ingredient  to  enhance  their  profit.’ — ‘ There 
are  instances  of  convictions  on  record,  of  bakers  hav- 
ing used  gypsum,  chalk,  and  pipe-clav,  in  the  manu- 
facture of  bread.’ 

Mr.  E.  Davy,  Prof,  of  Chemistry  at  the  Cork  Insti- 
tution, has  made  experiments,  showing  that  from 
. twenty  to  forty  grains  of  common  carbonate  of  mag- 
150 


nesia,well  mixed  with  a pound  of  the  worst  new  at- 
conda  flour,  materially  improved  the  quality  of  the 
bread  baked  with  it. 

The  habitual  and  daily  introduction  of  a portion  of 
alum  into  the  human  stomach,  however  small,  must 
be  prejudicial  to  the  exercise  of  its  functions,  and  par- 
ticularly in  persons  of  a bilious  and  costive  habit. 
And,  besides,  as  the  best  sweet  flour  never  stands  in 
need  of  alum,  the  presence  of  this  salt  indicates  an  in- 
ferior and  highly  acescent  food ; which  cannot  fail  to 
aggravate  dyspepsia,  and  which  may  generate  a cal 
culous  diathesis  in  the  urinary  organs.  Every  precau- 
tion of  science  and  law  ought,  therefore,  to  be  em- 
ployed to  detect  and  stop  such  deleterious  adulterations. 
Bread  may  be  analyzed  for  alum  by  crumbling  it 
down  when  somewhat  stale  in  distilled  water,  squeez- 
ing the  pasty  mass  through  a piece  of  cloth,  and  then 
passing  the  liquid  through  a paper  filter.  A limpid 
infusion  will  thus  be  obtained.  It  is  difficult  to  pro- 
cure it  clear  if  we  use  new  bread  or  hot  water.  A di- 
lute solution  of  muriate  of  barytds  dropped  into  the  fil- 
tered infusion,  will  indicate  by  a white  cloud,  more  or 
less  heavy,  the  presence  and  quantity  of  alum.  I find 
that  genuine  bread  gives  no  precipitate  by  this  treat- 
ment. The  earthy  adulterations  are  easily  discovered 
by  incinerating  the  bread  at  a red  heat  in  a shallow 
earthen  vessel,  and  treating  the  residuary  ashes  with 
a little  nitrate  of  ammonia.  The  earths  themselves 
will  then  remain,  characterized  by  their  whiteness  and 
insolubility. 

The  latest  chemical  treatise  on  the  art  of  making 
bread,  except  the  account  given  by  Mr.  Accum  in  his 
work  on  the  Adulterations  of  Food , is  the  article 
Baking,  in  the  Supplement  to  the  Encyclopa;dia  Bri- 
tannica. 

Under  Process  of  Baking , we  have  the  following 
statement:  ‘An  ounce  of  alum  is  then  dissolved  over 
the  fire  in  a tin  pot,  and  the  solution  poured  into  a 
large  tub,  called  by  the  bakers  the  seasoning- tub.  Four 
pounds  and  a half  of  salt  are  likewise  put  into  the 
tub,  and  a pailful  of  hot  w ater.’  Note  on  this  pas- 
sage.— ‘ In  London,  where  the  goodness  of  bread  is 
estimated  entirely  by  its  whiteness,  it  is  usual  with 
those  bakers  who  employ  flour  of  an  inferior  quality, 
to  add  as  much  alum  as  common  salt  to  the  dough. 
Or,  in  other  words,  the  quantity  of  salt  added  is  dimi- 
nished one-half,  and  the  deficiency  supplied  by  an 
equal  weight  of  alum.  This  improves  the  look  of  the 
bread  very  much,  rendering  it  much  whiter  and 
firmer.’  ” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

BREAD-FRUIT.  The  tree  which  affords  this, 
grows  in  all  the  Ladrone  islands  in  the  South  sea,  in 
Otaheite,  and  now  in  the  West  Indies.  The  bread- 
fruit grows  upon  a tree  the  size  of  a middling  oak.  The 
fruit  is  about  the  size  of  a child’s  head,  and  the  sur- 
face is  reticulated,  not  much  unlike  the  surface  of  a 
truffle.  It  is  covered  with  a thin  skin,  and  has  a core 
about  the  size  of  a small  knife.  The  eatable  pari  is 
between  th  ■ skin  and  the  core:  it  is  as  white  as 
snow,  and  somewhat  of  the  consistence  of  new  bread. 
It  must  be  toasted  before  it  is  eaten,  being  first  divided 
into  three  or  four  parts.  Its  taste  is  insipid,  with  a 
slight  sweetness,  nearly  like  that  of  wheaten  bread 
and  artichoke  together.  This  fruit  is  the  constant 
food  of  the  inhabitants  all  the  year,  it  being  in  season 
eight  months. 

Bread-nut.  See  Brosimwtn  alicastrum. 

BREAST.  Mamma.  The  two  globular  projec- 
tions, composed  of  common  integuments,  adipose  sub- 
stance, and  lacteal  glands  and  vessels,  and  adhering 
to  the  anterior  and  lateral  regions  of  the  thorax  of 
females.  On  the  middle  of  each  breast  is  a projecting 
portion,  termed  the  papilla , or  nipple , in  which  the 
excretory  ducts  of  the  glands  terminate,  and  around 
which  is  a coloured  orb,  or  disc,  called  the  areola. 
The  use  of  the  breasts  is  to  suckle  new-born  infants. 

BREAST  BONE.  See  Sternum. 

BRECCIA.  An  Italian  term,  frequently  used  by 
our  mineralogical  writers  to  denote  such  compound 
stones  as  are  composed  of  agglutinated  fragments  of 
considerable  size.  When  the  agglutinated  parts  are 
rounded,  the  stone  is  called  pudding-stone.  Breccias 
are  denominated  according  to  the  nature  of  their  com- 
ponent parts.  Thus  wc  have  calcareous  breccias,  or 
ma'bles;  and  siliceous  breccias,  which  are  still  more 
minutely  classed,  according  to  their  varieties. 

BRE  GMA.  (From  6pex* j to  moisten ; formerly  so 


BRI 


BRO 


called,  because,  in  infants,  and  sometimes  even  in 
adults,  they  are  tender  and  moist.)  An  old  name  for 
the  parietal  bones. 

BRE  VIS.  Short.  Applied  to  distinguish  parts  dif- 
fering only  in  length,  and  to  some  parts,  the  termina- 
tion of  which  is  not  far  from  their  origin ; as  brevia 
vasa,  the  branches  of  the  splenic  vein. 

Brky'nia.  (An  American  plant  named  in  honour  of 
Dr.  Brennius.)  A species  of  capparis. 

BRIAR.  See  Rosa. 

Bri'cdmum.  A name  which  the  Gauls  gave  to  the 
herb  artemisia. 

BRIMSTONE.  See  Sulphur. 

BRISTLE.  See  Seta. 

BRISTOL  HOT-WELL.  Bristoliensis  aqua.  A 
pure,  thermal  or  warm,  slightly  acidulated,  mineral 
spring,  situated  about  a mile  below  Bristol.  The  fresh 
water  is  inodorous,  perfectly  limpid  and  sparkling,  and 
sends  forth  numerous  air-bubbles  when  poured  into  a 
glass.  It  is  very  agreeable  to  the  palate,  but  without 
having  any  very  decided  taste,  at  least  none  that  can 
be  distinguished  by  a common  observer.  Its  specific 
gravity  is  only  1.00077,  which  approaches  so  near  to 
that  of  distilled  water,  that  this  circumstance  alone 
would  show  that  it  contained  but  a very  small  admix- 
ture of  foreign  ingredients.  The  temperature  of  these 
waters,  taking  the  average  of  the  most  accurate  ob- 
servations, may  be  reckoned  at  74  deg. ; and  this  does 
not  very  sensibly  vary  during  winter  or  summer. 
Bristol  water  contains  both  solid  and  gaseous  matter, 
and  the  distinction  between  the  two  requires  to  be 
attended  to,  as  it  is  owing  to  the  very  small  quantity 
of  solid  matter  that  it  deserves  the  character  of  a very 
tine  natural  spring;  and  to  an  ex^es^in  gaseous  con- 
tents that  it  seems  to  be  principally  indebted  for  its 
medical  properties,  whatever  they  may  be,  independent 
of  those  of  mere  water,  with  an  increase  of  tempera- 
ture. From  the  different  investigations  of  chemists,  it 
appears  that  the  principal  component  parts  of  the  Hot- 
Well  water  are,  a large  proportion  of  carbonic  acid 
gas,  or  fixed  air,  and  a certain  portion  of  magnesia  and 
lime,  in  various  combinations,  with  the  muriatic, 
vitriolic,  and  carbonic  acids.  The  general  inference 
is,  that  it  is  considerably  pure  for  a natural  fountain, 
as  it  contains  no  other  solid  matter  than  is  found  in 
almost  all  common  spring  water,  and  in  less  quantity. 

On  account  of  these  ingredients,  especially  the  car- 
bonic acid  gas,  the  Hot-Well  water  is  efficacious  in 
promoting  salutary  discharges,  in  green-sickness,  as 
well  as  in  the  blind  haemorrhoids.  It  may  be  taken 
with  advantage  in  obstructions,  and  weakness  of  the 
bowels,  arising  from  habitual  costiveness;  and,  from 
the  purity  of  its  aqueous  part,  it  has  justly  been  con- 
sidered as  a specific  in  diabetes,  rendering  the  urinary 
organs  more  fitted  to  receive  benefit  from  those  medi- 
cines which  are  generally  prescribed,  and  sometimes 
successful. 

But  the  high  reputation  which  this  spring  has  ac- 
quired, is  chiefly  in  the  cure  of  pulmonary  consumption. 
From  the  number  of  unsuccessful  cases  among  those 
who  frequent  this  place,  many  have  denied  any  pecu- 
liar efficacy  in  this  spring,  superior  to  that  of  common 
water.  It  is  not  easy  to  determine  how  much  may  be 
owing  to  the  favourable  situation  and  mild,  temperate 
climate  which  Bristol  enjoys ; but  it  cannot  be  doubted 
that  the  Hot-Well  water,  though  by  no  means  a cure 
for  consumption,  alleviates  some  of  the  most  harassing 
symptoms  of  this  formidable  disease.  It  is  particu- 
larly efficacious  in  moderating  the  thirst,  the  dry,  burn- 
ing heat  of  the  hands  and  feet,  the  partial  night  sweats, 
and  the  symptoms  that  are  peculiarly  hectical;  and 
thus,  in  the  earlier  stages  of  phthisis,  it  may  materially 
contribute  to  a complete  re-establishment  of  health  ; 
and  even  in  the  latter  periods,  mitigate  the  disease 
when  the  cure  is  doubtful,  if  not  hopeless. 

The  sensible  effects  of  this  water,  when  drunk 
warm  and  fresh  from  the  spring,  arc  a gentle  glow  of 
the  stomach,  succeeded  sometimes  by  a slight  and  tran- 
sient degree  of  headach  and  giddiness.  By  a con- 
tinued use,  in  most  cases  it  is  diuretic,  keeps  the  skin 
moist  and  perspirable,  and  improves  the  appetite  and 
health.  Its  effects  on  the  bowels  are  variable.  On  the 
whole,  a tendency  to  costiveness  seems  to  be  the  more 
general  consequence  of  a long  course  of  this  medicinal 
spring,  and  therefore  the  use  of  a mild  aperient  is  re- 
quisite. These  effects,  however,  are  applicable  only 
to  invalids;  for  healthy  persons  who  taste  the  water  at 


the  fountain,  seldom  discover  any  thing  in  it  but  a 
degree  of  warmth,  which  distinguishes  it  from  the 
common  element. 

The  season  for  the  Hot-Well  is  generally  from  the 
middle  of  May  to  October:  but  as  the  medicinal  pro- 
perties of  the  water  continue  the  same  throughout  the 
year,  the  summer  months  are  preferred  merely  on 
account  of  the  concomitant  benefits  of  air  and  exercise. 

It  should  be  mentioned,  that  another  spring,  nearly 
resembling  the  Hot-Well,  has  been  discovered  at 
Clifton,  which  is  situated  on  the  summit  of  the  same 
hill,  from  the  bottom  of  which  the  Hot- Well  issues. 
The  water  of  Sion-Spring,  as  it  is  called,  is  one  or  two 
degrees  colder  than  the  Hot-Well ; but  in  other  respeets 
it  sufficiently  resembles  it  to  be  employed  for  all  similar 
purposes. 

Britannica  kerba.  See  Rumex  hydrolap athurn, 
and  Arctium  lappa. 

BRIT A'NNICUS.  British.  Applied  to  plants  which 
grow  in  this  country,  and  to  some  remedies. 

BRITISH  GUM.  When  starch  is  exposed  to  a tem- 
perature between  600°  and  700°  it  swells,  and  exhales 
a peculiar  smell;  it  becomes  of  a brown  colour,  and 
in  that  state  is  employed  by  calfco-printers.  It  is  so- 
luble in  cold  water,  and  does  not  form  a blue  compound 
with  iodine.  Vauquelin  found  it  to  differ  from  gum  in 
affording  oxalic  instead  of  mucous  acid,  when  treated 
with  nitric  acid. — Braude’s  Manuel , iii.  34. 

British  Oil.  A variety  of  the  black  species  of  pe- 
troleum, to  which  this  name  has  been  given  as  an 
empirical  remedy. 

BROCATELLO.  A calcareous  stone  or  marble, 
composed  of  fragments  of  four  colours,  white,  gray, 
yellow,  and  red. 

BRO  CCOLI.  Brassica  Italica.  As  an  article  of 
diet,  this  may  be  considered  as  more  delicious  than 
cauliflower  and  cabbage.  Sound  stomachs  digest 
broccoli  without  any  inconvenience  ; but  in  dyspeptic 
stomachs,  even  when  combined  with  pepper,  &c.  it 
always  produces  flatulency,  and  nauseous  eructations. 

Brociios.  (Bpo%oj,  a snare.)  A bandage. 

Bro'chthus.  (From  /?£>£%w,  to  pour.)  The  throat; 
also  a small  kind  of  drinking- vessel. 

Bro'ciius.  B poKos-  One  with  a prominent  upper- 
lip,  or  one  with  a full  mouth  and  prominent  teeth. 

BROCKLESBY,  Richard,  was  born  in  Somerset- 
shire, though  of  an  Irish  family,  in  1722.  After  study- 
ing at  Edinburgh,  he  graduated  at  Leyden ; then  set- 
tled in  London,  but  did  not  advance  very  rapidly  in 
practice.  About  1757,  he  was  appointed  physician  to 
the  army  in  Germany,  and  on  his  return  after  six 
years,  published  the  result  of  his  experience,  in  a work 
entitled  “Economical  and  Medical  Observations.” 
His  success  now  became  more  decided,  and  being  pru- 
dent in  his  affairs,  and  without  a family,  he  realized 
a considerable  fortune.  He  proved  himself  however 
sufficiently  liberal  by  presenting  1000Z.  to  Mr.  Edmund 
Burke,  who  had  been  his  school-fellow  ; and  by  offer- 
ing an  annuity  of  100Z.  to  Dr.  Johnson,  to  enable  him 
to  travel,  which  was  not  however  accepted.  He  was 
author  of  several  other  works,  and  died  in  1797. 

Bro'dium.  A term  in  pharmacy,  signifying  the 
same  with  jus  culum,  broth,  or  the  liquor  in  which  any 
thing  Is  boiled.  Thus,  we  sometimes  read  of  brodium 
salis , or  a decoction  of  salt. 

BRO'MA.  (From-  /Jpwo-xo),  to  eat.)  Food  of  any 
kind  that  is  masticated,  and  not  drank. 

Broma-thron.  (From  jgpwcrxw,  to  eat.)  Mushrooms. 

BROMATOLOGY.  (Bromatologia ; from  (jpmpa, 
food,  and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  A discourse  or  treatise 
on  food. 

BROME'LIA.  (So  named  in  honour 'of  Olaus 
Bromel,  a Swede,  author  of  Lupologia , &c.  in  1687.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Hexandriu. 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Bromelia  ananas.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  pine-app^  Bromelia ; — foliis 
ciliato  spinosis , mucronatis , spica  comosa.of  Lirmceus 
It  is  used  principally  as  a delicacy  for  the  table,  and  is 
also  given  with  advantage  as  a refrigerant  in  fevers. 

Bromelia  kakatas.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  from  which  we  obtain  the  fruit  called  penguin, 
which  is  given  in  the  Spanish  West  Indies  to  cool  and 
quench  thirst  in  fevers,  dysenteries,  &c.  It  grows  in  a 
cluster,  there  being  several  of  the  size  of  one’s  finger  to- 
gether. Each  portion  is  clothed  with  husk  containing  a 
white  pulpy  substance,  which  is  the  eatable  part ; and  if 


BRO 


BRO 


it  be  not  perfectly  ripe,  its  flavour  resembles  that  of  the 
pine-apple.  The  juice  of  the  ripe  fruit  is  very  austere, 
and  is  made  use  of  to  acidulate  punch.  The  inhabit- 
ants of  the  West  Indies  make  a wine  of  the  penguin, 
which  is  very  intoxicating,  and  has  a good  flavour. 

BROMFIELD,  William,  was  born  in  London, 
1712 ; and  attained  considerable  reputation  as  a sur- 
geon. At  the  age  of  twenty-nine  he  began  to  give 
anatomical  lectures,  which  were  very  well  attended. 
About  three  years  after,  in  conjunction  with  the  Rev. 
Mr.  Madan,  he  formed  the  plan  of  the  Lock  Hospital ; 
and  so  ably  enforced  the  advantages  of  such  an  insti- 
tution, that  a sufficient  fund  was  raised  for  erecting  the 
present  building ; and  it  has  been  since  maintained  by 
voluntary  contributions.  He  was  appointed  surgeon, 
and  held  that  office  for  many  years : he  was  also  sur- 
geon to  St.  George’s  Hospital,  and  to  Her  Majesty's 
household.  He  wrote  many  works;  the  most  con- 
siderable was  entitled  “ Chirurgical  Cases  and  Ob- 
servations,” in  1773,  but  reckoned  not  to  answer  the 
expectations  entertained  of  him.  He  attained  his 
eightieth  year. 

[BROMINE.  In  1826,  M.  Balard  of  Montpelier  dis- 
covered in  sea-water  a new  substance,  to  which  he 
gave  the  name  muride ; but  it  has  since  been  changed 
to  bromine,  a word  derived  from  the  Greek  fiewyos 
(graveolentia)  signifying  a strong  or  rank  odour. . 

Bromine  exists  in  sea-water  in  the  form  of  hydro- 
bromic  acid.  It  is  present,  however,  in  very  small 
quantity;  and  even  the  uncrystallizable  residue  called 
bittern , left  after  the  muriate  of  soda  has  been  "sepa- 
rated from  sea-water  by  evaporation,  contains  but  little 
of  it.  On  adding  chlorine  to  this  liquid,  an  orange 
yellow  tint  appears ; and  on  heating  the  solution  to  the 
boiling  point,  the  red  vapours  of  bromine  are  expelled, 
which  may  be  condensed  by  a freezing  mixture.  A 
better  process  is  to  transmit  a current  of  chlorine  gas 
through  the  bittern,  and  then  to  agitate  a portion  of 
sether  with  the  liquid.  The  aether  dissolves  the  whole 
of  the  bromine,  from  which  it  receives  a beautiful 
hyacinth  red  tint,  and  on  standing,  rises  to  the  surface. 
When  the  ethereal  solution  is  agitated  with  caustic 
potassa,  its  colour  entirely  disappears,  and  on  evapo- 
ration, cubic  crystals  of  the  hydro-bromate  of  potassa 
are  deposited.  On  mixing  these  crystals,  reduced  to 
powder,  with  pure  peroxide  of  manganese,  and  adding 
sulphuric  acid  diluted  with  its  volume  of  water,  the 
bromine  is  disengaged  in  a gaseous  state.  A small 
receiver,  nearly  filled  with  water,  is  attached  to  the 
retort,  the  beak  of  which  and  the  receiver  are  kept 
cool  by  a frigorific  mixture.  The  bromine  condenses 
in  the  beak,  runs  into  the  receiver,  and  falls  to  the 
bottom  on  account  of  its  great  specific  gravity.  It  is 
slightly  soluble,  but  the  water  in  its  immediate  vicinity 
soon  becomes  saturated.  The  water  is  decanted,  and 
the  remainder  distilled  with  chloride  of  calcium,  by 
which  the  bromine  is  obtained  in  a liquid  state. 

M.  Balard  has  also  detected  bromine  in  marine 
plants  which  grow  on  the  shores  of  the  Mediterranean, 
and  has  procured  it  from  the  ashes  of  the  sea  weeds, 
that  furnish  iodine.  He  has  likewise  found  it  in  the 
ashes  of  some  animals,  especially  in  those  of  the  jan- 
thina  violacea,  one  of  the  testaceous  mollusca. 

Bromine  at  common  temperature  is  a liquid,  the 
colour  of  which  is  blackish  red,  when  viewed  in  mass 
and  by  reflected  light,  but. appears  hyacinth  red  when 
a thin  stratum  is  interposed  between  the  light  and  the 
observer.  Its  odour,  which  somewhat  resembles  that 
of  chlorine,  is  very  disagreeable  ; and  its  taste  power- 
ful. It  acts  with  energy  on  organic  matters,  such  as 
wood  or  cork,  and  corrodes  the  animal  texture ; but 
if  applied  to  the  skin  for  a short  time  only,  it  commu- 
nicates a yellow  stain  less  intense  than  that  from 
iodine,  and  which  soon  disappears.  It  is  highly  de- 
structive to  animals  : one  drop  of  it  placed  on  the  beak 
of  a bird  proves  fatal. — Webster's  Man.  of  Chem.  A.] 

[Bromic  acid.  B^nnine  unites  with  oxygen  and 
forms  Bromic  acid , which  may  be  obtained  in  a sepa- 
rate state  by  decomposing  a dilute  solution  of  the  bro- 
mate  of  baryta  with  sulphuric  acid.  From  the  analy- 
sis of  the  bromate  of  potassa,  it  appears  to  consist  of 
1 atom  of  bromine  -[-5  atoms  oxygen. 

The  bromates  are  analogous  to  the  chlorates  and 
iodates.  Thus  the  bromate  of  potassa  is  converted 
by  heat  into  the  bromuret  of  potassium,  with  disen- 1 
gagement  of  pure  oxygen,  deflagrates  when  thrown 
,on  burning  coals,  and  forms  with  sulphur  a mixture  I 
152 


which  detonates  by  percussion.  The  acid  of  the  bro- 
mates is  decomposed  by  hydro-bromic  and  muriatic 
acids. — JVebst.  Man.  of  Chem.  A.] 

Bro'mion.  (From  /Spot/ioj,  the  oat.)  The  name  of 
a plaster,  made  with  oaten  flour,  mentioned  by  Paulu3 
ASgineta. 

BRO'MUS.  (From  jSpw^a,  food.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tri- 
andria ; Order,  Digynia.  Brome-grass. 

Bromus  sterilis.  (From  fipwaKu),  to  eat.)  The 
wild  oat. 

BRO'NCHIA.  (Bronchia,  orum..  neut.  plur. ; from 
Ppoyxos , the  throat.)  See  Trachea. 

BRONCHIAL.  (Bronchi  a Us  ; from  bronchia .) 

Appertaining  to  the  windpipe,  or  bronchia;  as  bron- 
chial gland,  artery,  &c. 

BRONCHIA'LIS.  See  Bronchial. 

Bronchiales  arteri.e.  Bronchial  arteries. — 
Branches  of  the  aorta  given  off  in  the  chest. 

Bronchiales  glandule.  Bronchial  glands. — 
Large  blackish  glands,  situated  about  the  bronchia 
and  trachea. 

BKONCHOCE  LE.  (From  Ppoyxos,  the  windpipe, 
and  a tumour.)  Botium;  Hernia  gutturis  ; 

Guttur  tumidum;  Tracheloyhyma ; Gossurn ; Eze- 
chebronclios ; Gongrona ; Hernia  bronchialis  ; Tra- 
cheocele. Derbyshire  neck.  This  disease  is  marked 
by  a tumour  on  the  fore-part  of  the  neck,  and  seated 
between  the  trachea  and  skin.  In  general,  it  has  been 
supposed  principally  to  occupy  the  thyroid  gland.  We 
are  given  to  understand  that  it  is  a very  common  dis- 
order in  Derbyshire ; but  its  occurrence  is  by  no  means 
frequent  in  oth«r  parts  of  Great  Britain,  or  in  Ire'and. 
Among  the  inhabitJlhts  of  the  Alps,  and  other  moun- 
tainous countries  bordering  thereon,  it  is  a disease  very 
often  met  with,  and  is  there  known  by  the  name  of 
goitre.  The  cause  which  gives  rise  to  it,  is  by  no 
means  certain,  and  the  observations  of  different  writers 
are  of  very  little  practical  utility.  Dr.  Saunders  con- 
troverts the  general  idea  of  the  bronchocele  being  pro- 
duced by  the  use  of  snow  water.  The  swelling  is  at 
first  without  pain,  or  any  evident  fluctuation  ; when 
the  disease  is  of  long  standing,  and  the  swelling  con- 
siderable, we  find  it  in  general  a very  difficult  matter 
to  effect  a cure  by  medicine,  or  any  external  applica- 
tion ; and  it  might  be  unsafe  to  attempt  its  removal 
with  a knife,  on  account  of  the  enlarged  state  of  its 
arteries,  and  its  vicinity  to  the  carotids;  but  »n  an 
early  stage  of  the  disease,  by  the  aid  of  medi  fine,  a 
cure  may  be  effected. 

Although  some  relief  has  been  obtained  at  times,  and 
the  disease  probably  somewhat  retarded  by  external 
applications,  such  as  blisters,  discutient  embrocations, 
and  saponaceous  and  mercurial  plasters,  still  a com- 
plete cure  has  seldom  been  effected  without  an  in'  :x- 
nal  use  of  medicine  ; and  that  which  has  always  proved 
the  most  efficacious,  is  burnt  sponge.  The  form  under 
which  this  is  most  usually  exhibited,  is  that  of  a lo- 
zenge. R.  spongiae  ustte  3 ss.  mucilag.  Arab  fcum.  q. 
s.  fiat  trochiscus.  When  the  tumour  appears  about 
the  age  of  puberty,  and  before  its  structure  has  been 
too  morbidly  deranged,  a pill  consisting  of  a grain  or 
two  of  calomel,  must  be  given  for  three  successive 
nights ; and,  on  the  fourth  morning,  a saline  purge. 
Every  night  afterward,  for  three  weeks,  one  of  the 
troches  should,  when  the  patient  is  in  bed,  be  put  un- 
der the  tongue,  suffered  to  dissolve  gradually,  and  the 
solution  swallowed.  The  disgust  at  first  arising  from 
this  remedy  soon  wears  off.  The  pills  and  the  purge 
are  to  be  repeated  at  the  end  of  three  weeks,  and  the 
troches  had  recourse  to  as  before  ; and  tnis  plan  is  to 
be  pursued  till  the  tumour  is  entirely  dispersed.  Some 
recommend  the  burnt  sponge  to  be  administered  in 
larger  doses.  Sulphuretted  potassa  dissolved  in  water, 
in  the  proportion  of  30  grains  to  a quart  daily,  is  a 
remedy  which  has  been  employed  by  Dr  Richter  with 
success,  in  some  cases,  where  calcined  sponge  failed. 
The  sodas  subcarbonas  being  the  basis  of  burnt  sponge, 
is  now  frequently  employed  instead  of  it,  and,  indeed, 
it  is  a more  active  medicine. 

[Bronchocele  is  sgid  to  have  been  cured  by  iodine; 
for  which  see  that  article.  A.] 

BRO'NCHOS.  (Bpoyx°5)  the  windpipe.)  A ca- 
tarrh ; a suppression  of  the  voice  from  a catarrh. 

BRONCHO’TOMY.  [Bronchotomia ; from  (3poy- 
XOj,  the  windpipe,  and  reyvu),  to  cut)  Tracheotomy ; 
Laryngotomy.  This  is  an  operation  in  which  an 


BRO 


BRO 


opening  is  made  into  the  larynx,  or  trachea,  either  for 
the  purpose  of  making  a passage  for  the  air  into  and 
out  of  the  lungs,  when  any  disease  prevents  the  pa- 
tient from  breathing  through  the  mouth  and  nostrils, 
or  of  extracting  foreign  bodies,  which  have  accident- 
ally fallen  into  the  trachea  ; or,  lastly,  in  order  to  be 
able  to  inflate  the  lungs,  in  cases  of  sudden  suffoca- 
tion, drowning,  &c.  Its  practicableness,  and  little 
danger,  are  founded  on  the  facility  with  which  certain 
wounds  of  the  windpipe,  even  of  the  most  complicated 
kind,  have  been  healed,  without  leaving  any  ill  effects 
whatever,  and  on  the  nature  of  the  parts  cut,  which 
are  not  furnished  with  any  vessel  of  consequence. 

BRO  NCHUS.  (From  /Jpexw,  to  pour.)  The  an- 
cients believed  that  the  solids  were  conveyed  into  the 
stomach  by  the  oesophagus,  and  the  fluids  by  the  bron- 
chia; whence  its  name.  1.  The  windpipe. 

2.  A defluxion  from  the  fauces.  See  Catarrhus. 

BRONZE.  A mixed  metal  consisting  chiefly  of 
copper,  with  a small  portion  of  tin,  and  sometimes 
other  metals. 

BRONZITE.  A massive  metal-like  mineral,  fre- 
quently resembling  bronze,  found  in  large  masses  in 
beds  of  serpentine  in  Upper  Stiria,  and  in  Perthshire. 

BROOKLIME.  See  Veronicabeccabunga. 

[BROOKS,  John,  M.D.  LL.D.  The  honourable 
John  Brooks  was  born  in  Medford,  Massachusetts,  in 
the  year  1752.  His  father,  Captain  Caleb  Brooks, 
was  a respectable  independent  farmer,  and  the  son 
spent  his  earliest  years  in  the  usual  occupations  of  a 
farm.  He  received  no  education  preparatory  to  his 
professional  studies,  but  that  of  the  town  school ; at 
which,  however,  he  was  able  to  acquire  sufficient  of 
the  learned  languages  to  qualify  him  for  the  profession 
of  medicine.  At  the  age  of  fourteen,  he  was  placed 
under  the  tuition  of  Dr.  Simon  Tufts,  of  Medford,  by 
a written  indenture  as  an  apprentice  for  seven  years  ; 
this  being  the  usual  custom  of  that  day. 

Having  finished  his  studies,  he  chose  the  neighbour- 
ing town  of  Reading  as  his  residence,  and  commenced 
his  practice  there.  But  by  this  time,  the  storm  of  the 
revolutionary  war  was  gathering;  and,  as  its  distant 
thunders  rolled  towards  our  shores,  the  hearts  of  the 
gallant  youth  of  our  country  responded  to  the  sound, 
and  prepaiations  for  the  field  superceded  the  minor 
concerns  of  life. 

Dr.  Brooks  accordingly  entered  into  the  military 
service  of  his  country.  As  a Captain,  he  first  exhi- 
bited his  bravery  in  his  attack  upon  the  British  at 
Lexington,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Boston.  He  shortly 
after  received  the  commission  of  Major  in  the  Conti- 
nental army , as  it  was  then  called.  In  1777,  he  was 
promoted  to  the  rank  of  Colonel,  and  was  a very  effi- 
cient officer  in  the  battles  of  Saratoga,  which  resulted 
in  the  capture  of  Burgoyne.  In  the  battle  of  Mon- 
mouth, in  New-Jersey,  he  was  acting  Adjutant-Gene- 
ral, and  on  this,  as  on  all  occasions,  conducted  with 
great  coolness  and  bravery,  through  the  whole  of  the 
revolutionary  war. 

After  the  war,  he  recommenced  the  practice  of 
physic,  and  continued  for  many  years  in  high  estima- 
tion as  a practitioner.  It  is  said  of  him,  that,  “Asa! 
physician,  he  ranked  in  the  first  class  of  practitioners. 
He  possessed  in  an  eminent  degree  those  qualities 
which  were  calculated  to  render  him  the  most  useful 
in  his  professional  labours,  and  the  delight  of  those  to 
whom  he  administered  relief.  His  manners  were  dig- 
nified, courteous,  and  benign.  He  was  kind,  patient, 
and  attentive.  His  kind  offices  were  peculiarly  ac- 
ceptable from  the  felicitous  manner  in  which  he  per- 
formed them.  His  mind  was  well  furnished  with 
scientific  and  practical  knowledge.  He  was  accurate 
in  his  investigations,  and  clear  in  his  discernment. 
He  therefore  rarely  failed  in  forming  a true  diagnosis. 
If  he  were  not  so  bold  and  daring  as  some,  in  the 
administration  of  remedies,  it  was  because  his  judg- 
ment and  good  sense  led  him  to  prefer  erring  on  the 
side  of  prudence,  rather' than  on  that  of  rashness.  He 
watched  the  operations  of  nature,  and  never  inter- 
fered unless  it  was  obvious  he  could  aid  and  support 
her.  He  was  truly  the  * Hierophant  of  Nature,’  study- 
ing her  mysteries,  and  obeying  her  oracles.” 

Dr.  Brooks  became  so  great  a favourite  of  his  coun- 
trymen, that  he  was  finally  elected  Governor  of  the 
state  of  Massachusetts.  Dr.  Thacher  says  of  him  : — 

“ Having  faithfully  and  ably  discharged  the  duties 
of  chief  magistrate  for  seven  successive  years,  he 


expressed  his  determination  to  retire  from  the  cares 
and  anxieties  of  public  life.  How  great  were  the 
public  regrets,  and  how  gladly  would  a large  majority 
of  his  fellow-citizens  have  retained  his  valuable  ser- 
vices ; but  they  forbore  urging  him  to  any  farther 
sacrifices  for  the  good  of  his  country.  He  retired  to 
private  life  with  dignity,  and  with  the  love  and  bless- 
ings of  a grateful  people.”  He  died  in  March,  1825,  in 
the  73d  year  of  his  age. — See  Tkach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

BROOM.  See  Spartium  scoparium. 

BROSIMUM.  (From  (Spuiaipos , eatable.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
Class,  Diaicia;  Order,  Monandria. 

Brosimum  alicastrum  The  specific  name  of  the 
tree,  which  affords  the  bread-nut. 

BROWN,  John,  born  in  the  county  of  Berwick,  in 
1735.  He  made  very  rapid  progress  in  his  youth  in  the 
learned  languages,  and  at  the  age  of  twenty  went  to 
Edinburgh  to  study  theology ; but  before  he  could  be 
ordained,  became  attached  to  free  living  and  free 
thinking.  About  175D,  having  translated  the  inaugu- 
ral thesis  of  a medical  candidate  into  Latin,  and  the 
performance  being  highly  applauded,  he  was  led  to  the 
study  of  medicine.  The  professors  at  Edinburgh 
allowed  him  to  attend  their  lectures  gratuitously ; and 
he  maintained  himself  by  instructing  the  students  in 
Latin,  and  composing  or  translating  their  dissertations. 
Dr.  Cullen  particularly  encouraged  him,  notwithstand- 
ing his  irregularities,  employing  him  as  tutor  to  his 
sons,  and  allowing  him  to  repeat  and  enlarge  upon  his 
lectures  in  the  evening,  to  those  pupils  who  chose  to 
attend.  In  1765  he  married,  and  his  house  was  soon 
filled  with  boarders;  but  his  imprudence  brought  on 
bankruptcy  within  four  years  after.  About  this  period 
he  was  an  unsuccessful  candidate  for  one  of  the  me- 
dical chairs ; and  attributing  his  failure  to  Dr.  Cullen, 
became  his  declared  enemy.  This  probably  deter- 
mined him  to  form  his  new  system  of  medicine,  after- 
ward published  under  the  title  of  “ Elementa  Medi- 
cinse  in  which  certainly  much  genius  is  displayed, 
but  little  acquaintance  with  practice,  or  with  what 
had  been  written  before  on  the  subject.  His  chief  ob- 
ject seems  to  have  been  to  reduce  the  medical  art  to 
the  utmost  simplicity : whence  he  arranged  all  dis- 
eases under  the  t\Vo  divisions  of  sthenic  and  asthenic, 
and  maintained  that  all  agents  operate  on  the  body  as 
stimuli ; so  that  we  had  only  to  increase  or  diminish 
the  force  of  these  according  to  circumstances.  At  the 
head  of  his  stimulant  remedies,  he  places  wine,  brandy, 
and  opium,  in  the  recommendation  of  which  he  is 
very  liberal ; and  especially  betrays  his  partiality  to 
them  by  asserting,  contrary  to  universal  experience, 
that  he  found  them  in  his  own  person  the  best  pre- 
servatives against  the  gout.  He  is  said  to  have  pre- 
pared himself  for  his  lectures  by  a large  dose  of  lau- 
danum in  whiskey  ;'  and  thus  roused  himself  to  a de- 
gree of  enthusiasm  bordering  on  frenzy.  After  com- 
pleting his  work,  he  procured  a degree  from  St.  An- 
drew’s, and  commenced  public  teacher.  The  novelty 
and  imposing  simplicity  of  his  doctrines  procured  him 
at  first  a pretty  numerous  class : but  being  irregular  in 
his  attendance,  and  his  habits  of  intemperance  in- 
creasing, they  fell  off  by  degrees:  and  he  was  at  length 
so  embarrassed,  as  to  be  obliged  to  quit  Edinburgh  in 
1786.  He  then  settled  in  London,  but  met  with  little 
success,  and  in  about  two  years  after  died.  His  opi- 
nions at  first  found  many  supporters,  as  well  in  this  as 
in  other  countries  ; but  they  appear  now  nearly  fallen 
into  deserved  oblivion. 

BROWN  SPAR.  Pearl  spar.  Sideroculcite.  A 
white,  red,  or  brown,  or  black  spar;  harder  than  the 
calcareous,  but  yields  to  the  knife. 

BROWNE,  Sir  Thomas,  was  born  in  Cheapside, 
1605.  After  studying  and  practising  for  a short  time 
at  Oxford,  he  spent  about  three  years  in  travelling,  gra- 
duating at  length  at  Leyden.  He  then  came  to  Lon- 
don, and  published  his  “ Religio  Medici ;”  which  ex- 
cited great  attention  as  a work  of  genius,  though  ble- 
mished by  a few  of  the  popular  superstitions  then  pre- 
vailing. He  soon  after  settled  at  Norwich,  and  got 
into  very  good  practice  ; and  was  admitted  an  honor- 
ary member  of  the  London  College  of  physicians.  In 
1646  appeared  his  most  popular  work  “On  Vulgar 
Errors,”  which  added  greatly  to  his  fame  ; though  he 
injudiciously  ranked  the  Copernican  system  among 
them ; he  was  knighted  by  Charles  II. ; and  died  at 
the  termination  of  his  77th  year.  His  son  Edward 

153 


BRU 


BUB 


was  also  a physician,  and  attained  considerable  emi- 
nence, having  had  the  honour  of  attending  Charles  II. 
and  William  III.,  and  being  for  three  years  president 
of  the  college. 

[BRUCE,  Archibald,  M.D.  A native  of  New- 
York,  born  in  1777,  during  the  revolutionary  war. 
He  studied  physic  under  Dr.  Hosack,  visited  Europe, 
and  graduated  at  Edinburgh  in  the  year  1800.  During 
a tour  ol' two  years  in  France,  Switzerland,  and  Italy, 
Dr.  Bruce  collected  a mineralogical  cabinet  of  great 
value  and  extent.  Upon  his  return  to  England,  he 
married  in  London,  and  came  out  to  New-York  in 
the  summer  of  1803,  to  enter  upon  the  duties  of  a 
practitioner  of  medicine.  In  1807,  he  was  appointed 
professor  of  Materia  Medica  and  Mineralogy,  in  the 
College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons  of  New-York. 
In  1810,  he  commenced  the  editorship  of  a Journal  of 
American  Mineralogy,  after  the  manner  of  the  well 
known  work  issued  by  the  School  of  Mines,  at  Paris. 

It  met  with  becoming  success,  and  had  many  valuable 
contributors  to  its  pages ; but  owing  to  various  causes, 
was  never  carried  beyond  the  completion  of  the  first 
volume.  The  Mineralogical  Journal  contributed  ma- 
terially to  extend  the  fame  of  Dr.  Bruce,  as  well  as  his 
discovery  of  the  hydrate  of  magnesia,  at  Hoboken. 
He  died  in  February,  1818,  in  the  41st  year  of  his  age. 
— See  Tkach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

BRU  CEA.  (So  named  by  Sir  Joseph  Banks,  in 
honour  of  Mr.  Bruce,  the  traveller  in  Abyssinia,  who 
first  brought  the  seeds  thence  into  England.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
Class,  Dioecia : Order,  Tetrandria. 

Brucea  antidysenterica.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  from  which  it  was  erroneously  supposed 
we  obtained  the  Angustura  bark.  See  Cusparia. 

Bruc.ea  ferruginea.  This  plant  was  also  sup- 
posed to  afford  the  Angustura  bark. 

BRUCIA.  Brucine.  A new  vegetable  alkali,  lately 
extracted  from  the  bark  of  the  false  Angustura,  or 
Brucia  antidysenterica , by  Pelletier  and  Caventou. 
After  being  treated  with  sulphuric  aether,  to  get  rid  of 
a fatty  matter,  it  was  subjected  to  the  action  of  alko- 
hol.  The  dry  residuum,  from  the  evaporated  alko- 
holic  solution,  was  treated  with  Goulard’s  extract,  or 
solution  of  acetate  of  lead,  to  throw  down  the  colour- 
ing matter,  and  the  excess  of  lead  was  separated  by  a 
current  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen.  The  nearly  colour- 
less alkaline  liquid  was  saturated  with  oxalic  acid,  and 
evaporated  to  dryness.  The  saline  mass  being  freed 
from  its  remaining  colouring  particles  by  absolute 
alkohol,  was  then  decomposed  by  lime  or  magnesia, 
when  the  bruciawas  disengaged.  It  was  dissolved  in 
boiling  alkohol,  and  obtained  in  crystals,  by  the  slow 
evaporation  of  the  liquid.  These  crystals,  when  ob- 
tained by  very  slow  evaporation,  are  oblique  prisms, 
the  bases  of  which  are  parallelograms.  When  depo- 
sited from  a saturated  solution  in  boiling  water,  by 
cooling,  it  is  in  bulky  plates,  somewhat  similar  to  bo- 
racic  acid  in  appearance.  It  is  soluble  in  500  times  its 
weight  of  boiling  water,  and  in  850  of  cold.  Its  solu- 
bility is  much  increased  by  the  colouring  matter  of  the 
bark. 

Its  taste  is  exceedingly  bitter,  acrid,  and  durable  in 
the  mouth.  When  administered  in  doses  of  a few 
grains,  it  is  poisonous,  acting  on  animals  like  strych- 
nia, but  much  less  violently.  It  is  not  affected  by  the 
air.  The  dry  crystals  fuse  at  a temperature  a little 
above  that  of  boiling  water,  and  assume  the  appear- 
ance of  wax.  At  a strong  heat  it  is  resolved  into  car- 
bon, hydrogen,  and  oxygen ; without  any  trace  of 
azote.  It  combines  with  the  acids,  and  forms  both 
neutral  and  super-salts. 

Brucine.  See  Brucia. 

BRU1SEWORT.  See  Saponaria. 

BRUMALIS.  (From  Bruma , winter.)  Hyemalis. 
Belonging  to  winter. 

Brumalles  plant.®.  Plants  which  flower  in  our 
winter,  common  about  the  cape. 

Brune'lla.  See  Prunella. 

BRUNNER,  John  Conrad,  was  born  in  Switzerland 
in  1G53.  He  obtained  his  degree  in  medicine  at  Stras- 
burg  \f  hen  only  nineteen.  He  afterward  spent  several 
years  in  improving  himself  at  different  universities, 
particularly  at  Paris;  where  he  made  many  experi- 
ments on  the  pancreas,  and  found  that  it  might  be  re- 
moved from  a dog  with  impunity.  On  his  return  he 
was  made  professor  of  medicine  at  Heidelburg;  and 
154 


gained  great  reputation,  so  as  to  be  consulted  by  most 
of  the  princes  of  Germany.  He  discovered  the  mucous 
glands  in  the  duodenum ; and  was  author  of  several 
inconsiderable  works.  He  died  in  1727. 

Brunner's  glands.  Brunneri  glandulm.  Peyer’s 
glands.  The  muciparous  glands,  situated  between  the 
villous  and  cellular  coat  of  the  intestinal  canal;  so 
named  after  Brunner,  who  discovered  them. 

BRUNSWICK  GREEN.  An  aminoniaco-muriate 
of  copper. 

BRUNTKUP  FERZ.  Purple  copper  ore. 

Bru'nus.  An  erysipelatous  eruption. 

Bru'scus.  See  Ruscus. 

Brut'a.  An  Arabian  word  which  means  instinct, 
and  is  also  applied  to  Savine. 

Bru'tia.  An  epithet  for  the  most  resinous  kind  of 
pitch,  and  therefore  used  to  make  the  Oleum  Picinum. 
The  Pix  Brucia  was  so  called  from  Brutia,  a country 
in  the  extreme  parts  of  Italy,  where  it  was  produced. 
Bruti'no.  Turpentine. 

Bru'tobon.  The  name  of  an  ointment  used  by  the 
Greeks. 

Brutua.  See  Cissampelos  Pareira. 

Bruxane'li.  (Indian.)  A tall  tree  in  Malabar,  the 
bark  of  which  is  diuretic. 

Bry'gmus.  (From  j8pu%o),  to  make  a noise.)  A 
peculiar  kind  of  noise,  such  as  is  made  by  gnashing  or 
grating  the  teeth ; or,  according  to  some,  a certain  kind 
of  convulsion  affecting  the  lower  jaw,  and  striking  the 
teeth  together,  most  frequently  observed  in  such  chil 
dren  as  have  worms. 

BRYO'NIA.  (From  fipvui,  to  abound,  from  its 
abundance.)  Bryony.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linmean  system.  Class,  Diceciu;  Order, 
Syngenesia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  white  bryony. 
See  Bryonia  alba. 

Bryonia  alba.  The  systematic  name  of  the  white 
bryony  plant.  Vitis  alba  sylvestris ; Jlgrostis  ; An- 
pelo  sagria;  Arclicostris ; Echetrosis  of  Hippocrates. 
Bryonia  aspera  ; Cedrostis ; Chelidonium;  Eabrusca ; 
Melothrum;  Ophrostaphylon ; Psilothrum.  Bryonia 
— foliis  palmatis  utrinque  calloso-scabris  of  Linnaeus. 
This  plant  is  very  common  in  woods  and  hedges.  The 
root  has  a very  nauseous  biting  taste,  and  disagreeable 
smell.  Bergius  states  the  virtues  of  this  root  to  be  pur- 
gative, hydragogue,  emmenagogue,  and  diuretic ; the 
fresh  root  emetic.  This  powerful  and  irritating 
cathartic,  though  now  seldom  prescribed  by  physicians, 
is  said  to  be  of  great  efficacy  in  evacuating  serous 
humours,  and  has  been  chiefly  employed  in  hydropical 
cases.  Instances  of  its  good  effects  in  other  chronic 
diseases  are  also  mentioned ; as  asthma,  mania,  and 
epilepsy.  In  small  doses,  it  is  reported  to  operate  as  a 
diuretic,  and  to  be  resolvent  and  deobstruent.  In 
powder,  from  3j.  to  a drachm,  it  proves  strongly  pur- 
gative, and  the  juice,  which  issues  spontaneously,  in 
doses  of  a spoonful  or  more,  has  similar  effects,  but  is 
more  gentle  in  its  operation.  An  extract  prepared  by 
water,  acts  more  mildly,  and  with  greater  safety,  than 
the  root  in  substance,  given  from  half  a drachm  to  a 
drachm.  It  is  said  to  prove  a gentle  purgative,  and 
likewise  to  operate  powerfully  by  urine.  Of  the  ex- 
pressed juice,  a spoonful  acts  violently  both  upwards 
and  downwards;  but  cream  of  tartar  is  said  to  takeoff 
its  virulence.  Externally,  the  fresh  root  has  been 
employed  in  cataplasms,  as  are  solvent  anddiscutient : 
also  in  ischiadic  and  other  rheumatic  affections. 

Bryonia  mechoachana  nigricans.  A name  given 
to  the  jalap  root. 

Bryonia  nigra.  See  Tamus  communis 
Bryonia  teruviana.  Jalap. 

BRY'ONY.  See  Bryonia  nigra. 

Bryony , black.  See  Tamus. 

Bryony , white.  See  Bryonia  alba. 

Bry'thion.  Bpvdiov.  A malagma;  so  called  and 
described  by  Paulus  ASgineta. 

Bry'ton.  (From  / 3pvu i,  to  pour  out.)  A kind  of  ale, 
or  wine,  made  of  barley. 

Bubasteco'rdium.  (From  bubastus  and  cor,  the 
heart.)  A name  formerly  given  to  artemisia,  or  mug- 
wort. 

BU'BO.  (From  Pov6u>v,  the  groin ; because  they 
most  frequently  happen  in  that  part.)  Modern  sur- 
geons mean,  by  this  term,  a swelling  of  the  lymphatic 
glands,  particularly  of  those  of  the  groin  and  axilla. 
The  disease  may  arise  from  the  mere  irritation  of  some 


BUC 


BUG 


local  disorder,  when  it  is  called  sympathetic  bubo;  from 
the  absorption  of  some  irritating  matter,  such  as  the 
venereal  poison ; or  from  constitutional  causes,  as  in 
the  pestilential  bubo,  and  scrophulous  swellings,  of  the 
inguinal  and  axillary  gland. 

BU'BON.  (From  /3ov6ojv,  the  groin,  or  a tumour  to 
which  that  part  is  liable,  and  which  it  was  supposed  to 
cure.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; Order,  Digynia. 

Bubon  galbanum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  officinal  galbanum.  Mbetad  ; 
Chalbane ; Oesor.  The  plant  is  also  named  Ferula 
Afmcana;  Oreoselinum  Jifricanum  ; Anisum  frutico- 
sum  galbaniferum ; Anisum  Africanum  fruticescens  ; 
Ayborzat.  The  lovage-leaved  bubon.  Bubon  ;—foliis 
rhombeis  dentatis  striatis  glabris , umbellis  paucis,  of 
Linnaeus.  Galbanum  is  the  gummi-resinous  juice, 
obtained  partly  by  its  spontaneous  exudation  from  the 
joints  of  the  stem,  but  more  generally,  and  in  greater 
abundance,  by  making  an  incision  in  the  stalk,  a few 
inches  above  the  root,  from  which  it  immediately 
issues,  and  soon  becomes  sufficiently  concrete  to  be 
gathered.  It  is  imported  into  England  from  Turkey, 
and  the  East  Indies,  in  large,  softish,  ductile,  pale- 
coloured  masses,  which,  by  age,  acquire  a brownish- 
yellow  appearance;  these  are  intermixed  with  distinct 
whitish  tears,  that  are  the  most  pure  part  of  the  mass. 
Galbanum  has  a strong  unpleasant  smell,  and  a warm, 
bitterish,  acrid  taste.  Like  the  other  gummy  resins,  it 
unites  with  water,  by  trituration  into  a milky  liquor, 
but  does  not  perfectly  dissolve,  as  some  have  reported, 
in  water,  vinegar,  or  wine.  Rectified*spirit  takes  up 
much  more  than  either  of  these  menstrua,  but  not  the 
whole ; the  tincture  is  of  a bright  golden  colour.  A 
mixture  of  two  parts  of  rectified  spirit,  and  one  of 
water,  dissolves  all  but  the  impurities,  which  are  com- 
monly in  considerable  quantity.  In  distillation  with 
water,  the  oil  separates  and  rises  to  the  surface,  in 
colour  yellowish,  in  quantity  one-twentieth  of  the 
weight  of  the  galbanum.  Galbanum,  medicinally  con- 
sidered, may  be  said  to  hold  a middle  rank  between 
assafoetida  and  ammoniacum  ; but  its  fcetidness  is  very 
inconsiderable,  especially  when  compared  with  the 
former:  it  is  therefore  accounted  less  antispasmodic, 
nor  are  its  expectorant  qualities  equal  to  those  of  the 
latter:  it  however  is  esteemed  more  efficacious  than 
either  in  hysterical  disorders.  Externally,  it  is  often 
applied,  by  surgeons,  to  expedite  the  suppuration  of 
inflammatory  and  indolent  tumours,  and,  by  physicians, 
as  a warm  stimulating  plaster.  It  is  an  ingredient  in 
the  pilulce  galbani  composite , the  emplastrum  g abb  am 
compositum  of  the  London  Pharmacopoeia,  and  in  the 
emplastrum  gummo sum  of  the  Edinburgh. 

Bubon  macedonicum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  semen  petroselini  Macedonici 
of  the  shops.  Apium  petrceum ; Petrapium.  Mace- 
donian parsley.  This  plant  is  similar  in  quality  to  the 
common  parsley,  but  weaker  and  less  grateful.  The 
seeds  enter  the  celebrated  compounds  mithridate  and 
theriaca. 

Bubo'nium.  (From  /?ov6wv,  the  groin.)  A name  of 
the  golden  slarwort;  so  called  because  it  was  supposed 
to  be  efficacious  in  diseases  of  the  groin. 

BUBONOCE  LE.  (From  j8oi>6’wv,  the  groin,  and 
Krj\y,  a tumour.)  Hernia  inguinalis.  Inguinal  her- 
nia, or  rupture  of  the  groin.  A species  of  hernia,  in 
which  the  bowels  protrude,  at  the  abdominal  ring. 
See  Hernia  inguinalis. 

BU'CCA.  (Hebrew.)  The  cheek.  The  hollow 
inner  part  of  the  cheek,  that  is  inflated  by  the  act  of 
blowing. 

Buccacra'ton.  (From  forcca,  or  buccella , and  npaw, 
to  mix.)  A morsel  of  bread  sopped  in  wine,  which 
served  in  old  times  for  a breakfast. 

BU'CCAL.  (From  bucca,  the  cheek.)  Belonging 
to  the  cheek 

Buccinales  glandule.  The  small  glands  of  the 
mouth,  under  the  cheek  which  assist  in  secreting 
saliva  into  that  cavity. 

Bu'ccea.  (From  buccu , the  cheek ; as  much  as  can 
be  contained  at  one  time  within  the  cheeks.)  1.  A 
mouthful ; a morsel. 

2.  A polypus  of  the  nose. 

Buccela'ton.  (From  buccella,  a morsel.)  A purg- 
ing medicine,  made  up  in  the  form  of  a loaf  ; consisting 
of  scainmony,  &c.  put  into  fermented  flour,  and  then 
baked  in  an  oven. 


Bucce'lla.  Paracelsus  calls  the  polypus  in  the  nose 
by  this  name,  because  he  supposes  it  to  be  a portion  of 
flesh  parting  from  the  bucca,  and  insinuating  itself  into 
the  nose. 

Buccella'tio.  (From  bucellatus , cut  into  small 
pieces.)  Baccellatio.  A method  of  stopping  an 
haemorrhage,  by  applying  small  pieces  of  lint  to  the  vein, 
or  artery. 

BUCCINA'TOR.  (From  fiovicavov,  a trumpet;  so 
named  from  its  use  in  forcing  the  breath  to  sound  the 
trumpet.)  Retractor  anguli  oris  of  Albinus,  and 
alveolo-maxillaire  of  Dumas.  The  trumpeter’s  mus- 
cle. The  buccinator  was  long  thought  to  be  a muscle 
of  the  lower  jaw,  arising  from  the  upper  alveoli,  and 
inserted  into  the  lower  alveoli,  to  pull  the  jaw  up- 
wards; but  its  origin  and  insertion,  and  the  direction  of 
its  fibres,  are  quite  the  reverse  of  this.  For  this  large 
flat  muscle,  which  forms  in  a manner  the  walls  of  the 
cheek,  arises  chiefly  from  the  coronoid  process  of  the 
lower  jaw-bone,  and  partly  also  from  the  end  of  the 
alveoli,  or  socket  process  of  the  upper-jaw,  close  by  the 
pterygoid  process  of  the  sphenoid  bone : it  goes  forward, 
with  directfibres,  to  be  implanted  into  the  corner  of  the 
mouth;  it  is  thin  and  flat,  covers  in  the  mouth,  and 
forms  the  walls  of  the  cheek,  and  is  perforated  in  the 
middle  of  the  cheek  by  the  duct  of  the  parotid  gland. 
These  are  its  principal  uses: — it  flattens  the  cheek,  and 
so  assists  in  swallowing  liquids ; it  turns,  or  helps  to 
turn,  the  morsel  in  the  mouth  while  chewing,  and  pre- 
vents it  from  getting  without  the  line  of  the  teeth  ; in 
blowing  wind  instruments,  it  both  receives  and  expels 
the  wind ; it  dilates  like  a bag,  so  as  to  receive  the 
wind  in  the  cheeks;  and  it  contracts  upon  the  wind,  so 
as  to  expel  the  wind,  and  to  swell  the  note.  In  blow- 
ing the  strong  wind-instruments,  we  cannot  blow  from 
the  lungs,  for  it  distresses  the  breathing,  we  reserve  the 
air  in  the  mouth,  which  we  keep  continually  full ; and 
from  this  circumstance,  as  mentioned  above,  it  is 
named  buccinator,  from  blowing  the^trumpet. 

Bu'ccula.  (Diminutive  of  bucca , the  cheek.)  The 
fleshy  part  under  the  chin. 

Encephalon,  red-fruited.  See  Trophis  Americana. 

Bu'ceras.  (From  (3ov$,  an  ox,  and  Kcpas , a horn; 
so  called  from  the  horn-like  appearance  of  its  seed.) 
Buceros.  See  Trigonella  Fcenumgreecum. 

BUCHAN,  William,  was  born  at  Ancram,  in 
1729.  After  studying  at  Edinburgh,  he  settled  in  Shef- 
field, and  was  soon  appointed  physician  to  the  Found- 
ling Hospital  at  Ackworth:  but  that  establishment 
being  afterward  given  up,  he  went  to  practise  at  Edin- 
burgh, where  he  remained  several  years.  During  that 
period  he  composed  his  celebrated  work,  called  “ Do- 
mestic Medicine,”  on  the  plan  of  Tissot’s  “ Avis  aux 
Peuples ;”  which  has  been  very  extensively  circulated, 
translated  into  other  languages,  and  obtained  the  au- 
thor a gold  medal,  with  a commendatory  letter,  from 
the  Empress  of  Russia.  It  has  been  objected,  that 
such  publications  tend  to  degrade  and  injure  the  me- 
dical profession;  but  it  does  not  appear,  that  those 
who  are  properly  qualified  can  suffer  permanently 
thereby.  There  seems  more  foundation  for  the  opinion, 
that  imaginary  diseases  will  be  multiplied,  and  patients 
sometimes  fall  victims  to  their  complaints,  being 
treated  by  those  who  do  not  properly  understand 
them.  Dr.  Buchan  afterward  practised  in  London, 
and  published  some  other  works ; and  died  in  1805 

BUCK-BEAN.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

BUCK-THORN.  See  Rhamnus  catkarticus . 

BUCK-WHEAT.  See  Polygonum  fagopyrum. 

Buck-wheat , eastern.  See  Polygonum  divaricatum. 

BUCNEMIA.  {Bucnemia;  from  6ov,  a Greek  aug- 
ment, and  Kvrjyrj,  the  leg.)  A name  in  Good’s  Noso- 
logy for  a genus  of  disease  characterized  by  a tense, 
diffuse,  inflammatory  swelling  of  the  lower  extremity ; 
usually  commencing  at  the  inguinal  glands,  and  ex- 
tending in  the  course  of  the  lymphatics,  it  embraces 
two  species;  1.  Bucnemia  sparganosis,  the  puerperal 
tumid  leg. 

2.  Bucnemia  tropica , the  tumid  leg  of  hot  climates. 

Bucra'nion.  (From  (5ovs,  an  ox,  and  /cpaviov,  the 
head ; so  called  from  its  supposed  resemblance  to  a 
calf’s  snout.)  The  Snap-dragon  plant.  See  Antir 
rkinum. 

Bu'cton.  The  hymen,  according  to  Piraius. 

Buga'ntia.  Chilblains. 

BUGLE.  See  Prunella. 

[Bugle  weed.  This  plant  ia  the  Ly copus  Vir~ 

155 


BUL 


BUN 


finica.  It  has  of  late  been  popular  as  a remedy  in 
bleeding  from  the  lungs,  taken  freely  in  the  form  of 
decoction.  It  is  not,  however,  introduced  as  a medi- 
cinal plant  into  the  American  Pharmacopoeia,  nor  in 
Bigelow’s  Materia  Medica.  Physicians  in  general 
place  little  confidence  in  its  efficacy.  A.] 

BUGLOSS.  See  Anchusa  officinalis. 

Buglo'ssa.  See  Anchusa  officinalis. 

BUGLOSSUM.  (Buglossum,  i.  n. ; from  f3ovs,  an 
ox,  and  yXcotraa,  a tongue : so  called  from  the  shape 
and  roughness  of  its  leaf.)  See  Anchusa  officinalis. 

Bugjlossum  angustifolium.  See  Anchusa  offici- 
nalis. 

Buglossum  majus.  See  Anchusa  officinalis. 

Buglossum  sativum.  See  Anchusa  officinalis. 

Buglossum  sylvestre.  The  stone  bugloss. 

Bu  gula.  (A  diminutive  of  buglossa .)  See  Ajuga 
pyramidalis. 

[BUHRSTONE.  Millstone.  “ The  exterior  aspect 
of  this  mineral  is  somewhat  peculiar.  It  occurs  in 
amorphous  masses,  partly  compact,  but  always  con- 
taining a greater  or  less  number  of  irregular  cavities. 
Sometimes  the  mass  is  comparatively  compact,  and 
the  cavities  small  and  less  frequent,  but  they  always 
exist  even  in  specimens  of  a moderate  size.  These 
cavities  are  sometimes  crossed  by  siliceous  threads  or 
membranes,  much  resembling  the  interior  structure  of 
certain  bones;  and  are  sometimes  lined  by  siliceous 
incrustations,  or  crystals  of  quartz. 

Its  fracture  is  nearly  even,  sometimes  dull,  and 
sometimes  smooth,  like  that  of  flint.  Its  colour  is 
gray  or  whitish,  sometimes  with  a tinge  of  blue,  and 
sometimes  yellowish  or  reddish.  Near  Paris,  the 
Buhrstone  occurs  in  beds,  unusually  horizontal,  and 
seldom  more  than  9 or  10  feet  thick.  It  contains  no 
organic  remains.  Its  cavities  are  often  crossed  by 
threads,  and  filled  with  argillaceous  marl  or  sand; 
but  are  very  seldom  lined  by  crystals  of  quartz. 

In  Georgia,  (United  States,)  the  Buhrstone  is  found 
near  the  boundary  of  South  Carolina,  about  40  miles 
from  the  sea.  It  is  said  to  cover  shell  limestone. 
Some  of  its  cavities  are  those  of  shells  in  a siliceous 
date,  andlined  by  siliceous  incrustations,  or  crystals 
of  quartz.  Others  are  traversed  by  minute  threads, 
or  contain  a friable  substance  somewhat  argillaceous. 
Its  hardness  and  cavities,  when  not  too  numerous, 
render  it  peculiarly  useful  for  making  millstones. 
Hence  also  it  is  sometimes  known  by  the  name  of 
Millstone.” — See  Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

BULBIFERUS.  fFrom  bulbus,  and  fero , to  bear.) 
Bulb-bearing.  Having  one  or  more  bulbs;  applied  to 
*tem».  Caulis  bulbiferus. 

BULBOCASTANUM.  (From  \ 3oX6os,  a bulb,  and 
tas -avitv,  a chesnut:  so  called  from  its  bulbous  ap- 
pearance.) See  Bunium  bulbocastanam. 

BULBOCAVERNO'SUS.  (So  called  from  its  ori- 
gin and  insertion.)  See  Accelerator  urince. 

Bu'lbonacii.  See  Lunaria  rediviva. 

BULBOSUS.  (From  bulba , a bulb.)  Bulbous: 
applied  in  anatomy  to  soft  parts  which  are  naturally 
enlarged,  as  the  bulbous  part  of  the  urethra.  In  bota- 
ny, to  roots  which  have  a bulb;  as  tulip,  onion,  lily,&c. 

Bulbos.e.  (From  bulbus.)  The  name  of  a class 
of  Coes  alp  inus's  systematic  method,  consisting  of 
heioaceous  vegetables,  which  have  a bulbous  root,  and 
a pericarpium,  divided  into  three  cells;  also,  the  name 
of  one  of  the  natural  orders  of  plants. 

BULBULUS.  A litte  bulb. 

BUL  BUS.  (BoXSos,  a bulb,  or  somewhat  rounded 
root.)  A globular,  or  pyriform  coated  body,  solid,  or 
formed  of  fleshy  scales  or  layers,  constituting  the 
lower  part  of  some  plants,  and  giving  off  radicals  from 
the  circumference  of  the  flattened  basis.'  A bulb  dif- 
fers from  a tuber , which  is  a farinaceous  root,  and 
sends  off  radicles  in  every  direction. 

Bulbs  are  divided  into, 

1.  The  solid,  which  consists  of  a solid  fleshy  nutri- 
tious substance  ; as  in  Crocus  sativus,  Colchicuin  au- 
tumnale,  Tulipa  gesneriana. 

‘2.  The  scaly,  which  consists  of  fleshy  conceutrical 
scales  attached  to  a radical  plate ; as  in  Allium  cepa. 

3.  The  squamose,  consisting  of  concave,  overlapping 
scales ; as  in  Lilium  candidum,  and  J .ilium  bulbiferum. 

4.  The  compounded,  consisting  of  several  lesser 
bulbs,  lying  close  to  each  other : as  in  Allium  salitum. 

The  bulbs  of  the  orchis  tribe  differ  from  the  common 
-bulbs  in  not  sending  off  radicles  from  the  lower  part, 
156 


but  from  between  the  stem  and  basis.  These  are  dis- 
tinguished into, 

5.  The  testiculate,  having  two  bulbs  of  a round-ob- 
long form  ; as  in  Orchis  morio,  and  Orchis  mascula. 

6.  Palmate,  a compressed  bulb,  hand-like,  divided 
below  into  finger-like  lobes ; as  in  Orchis  maculata. 

Bulbus  esculentus.  Such  bulbous  roots  as  are 
commonly  eaten  are  so  called. 

Bulbus  vomitorius.  See  Hyacinthus  muscari. 

BULGE-WATER-TREE.  The  Geoffroya  jamai- 
ccnsis. 

BULI'MIA.  (From  /3ov,  a particle  of  excess,  and 
Xi/xos,  hunger.)  Bulimiasis ; Boulimos ; Bulimus ; 
Bolismos  of  Avicenna.  Fames  canina;  Appetitus 
caninus ; Phagcdoena;  Adephagia;  Bupeina;  Cyno- 
rexia.  Insatiable  hunger,  or  canine  appetite. 

Dr.  Cullen  places  this  genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Locales , and  order  Dysorexioe ; and  distinguishes 
three  species.  1.  Bulimia  helluonum ; in  which  there 
is  no  other  disorder  of  the  stomach,  than  an  excessive 
craving  of  food.  2.  Bulimia  syncopalis ; in  which 
there  is  a frequent  desire  of  food,  and  the  sense  of 
hunger  is.  preceded  by  swooning.  3.  Bulimia  emetica , 
also  cynorexia ; in  which  an  extraordinary  appetite 
for  food  is  followed  by  vomiting.  The  real  causes  of 
this  disease  are,  perhaps,  not  properly  understood.  In 
some  cases,  it  has  been  supposed  to  proceed  from  an 
acid  in  the  stomach,  and  in  others,  from  a superabun- 
dance of  acid  in  the  gastric  juice,  and  from  indigested 
sordes,  or  worms.  Some  consider  it  as  depending 
more  frequently  on  monstrosity  than  disease.  An  ex- 
traordinary and  well  attested  case  of  this  disease,  is 
related  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Medical  and  Phy- 
sical Journal,  of  a French  prisoner,  who,  in  one  day, 
consumed  of  raw  cow’s  udder  4 lbs.,  raw  beef  10  lbs., 
candles  2 lbs. ; total,  16  lbs. ; besides  5 bottles  of  porter. 

Bulimia  adephagia.  A voracious  appetite. 

Bulimia  canina.  A voracious  appetite,  with  sub- 
sequent vomiting. 

Bulimia  cardialgica.  A voracious  appetite,  with 
heartburn. 

Bulimia  convulsorum.  A voracious  appetite, 
which  attends  some  convulsive  diseases. 

Bulimia  emetica.  A voracious  appetite,  with  vo- 
miting. 

Bulimia  esurigio.  Gluttony. 

Bulimia  helluonum.  Gluttony. 

Bulimia  syncopalis.  A voracious  appetite,  with 
fainting  from  hunger. 

Bulimia  verminosa.  A voracious  appetite  from 
worms. 

BULIMI'ASIS.  See  Bulimia. 

BU'LIMUS.  See  Bulimia. 

BULI  THUM.  (From  j3ou,  an  ox,  and  Xidos,  a 
stone.)  A bezoar,  or  stone  found  in  the  kidneys,  or 
gall,  or  urinary  bladder,  of  an  ox,  or  cow. 

BU'LLA.  A bubble.  A clear  vesicle,  which  arises 
from  burns,  or  scalds  ; or  other  causes. 

[This  word  is  also  applied  by  Linnaeus  to  a genus 
of  univalve  shells.  A.] 

BU'LLACE.  The  English  name  of  the  fruit  of  the 
Prunus  insitia  of  Linnaeus,  which  grows  wild  in  our 
hedges.  There  are  two  varieties  of  hullace,  the  red 
and  the  white,  which  are  used  with  the  same  inten- 
tion as  the  common  damsons. 

BULLATUS.  (From  bulla,  a bubble,  or  blister.) 
Blistery.  Applied  to  a leaf  which  has  its  veins  so 
tight,  that  the  intermediate  space  appears  blistered. 
This  appearance  is  frequent  in  the  garden  cabbage. 

Bullo  sa  febris.  An  epithet  applied  to  the  vesi- 
cular fever,  because  the  skin  is  covered  with  little  ve^ 
sides,  or  blisters.  See  Pemphigus. 

Buni'tes  vinum.  (From  bunium,  wild  parsley.) 
Wine  made  of  bunium  and  must. 

BU  NIUM.  (From  (3ovvos , a little  hill ; so  called 
from  the  tuberosity  of  its  root.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan  system.  Class,  Pen- 
tandria;  Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  name  of  the  wild  parsley. 

Bunium  bulbocastanum.  The  systematic  name 
of  a plant,  the  root  of  which  is  called  the  pig-nut. 
Agmocastanum ; Nvculaterrestris  ; Bulbocastaveum ; 
Bulbocastanum  majus  et  minus.  Earth-nut;  Hawk- 
nut  ; Kipper-nut ; and  Pig-nut.  The  root  is  as  large 
as  a nutmeg;  hard,  tuberous,  and  whitish ; which  is 
eaten  raw,  or  roasted.  It  is  sweetish  to  the  taste, 
nourishing,  and  supposed  to  be  of  use  against  strangury 


BUR 


BUR 


and  bloody  urine.  The  roots,  which  are  frequently 
ploughed  up  by  the  peasants  of  Burgundy,  and  called 
by  them  arnolta;  and  those  found  in  Scotland,  and 
called  arnots , are  most  probably  the  roots  of  this  spe- 
cies of  buniuin.  They  are  roasted,  and  thus  acquire 
the  flavour  of  chesnuts. 

Bu'nius.  A species  of  turnip. 

BU'PEINA.  (From  j 3ov,  a particle  of  magnitude, 
and  tzziva,  hunger.)  A voracious  appetite. 

BU'PHAGOS.  (From  (3ov,  a particle  of  excess,  and 
Qayu),  to  eat.)  The  name  of  an  antidote  which  created 
a voracious  appetite  in  Marcellus  Empericus. 

BUPHTHALMUM.  (From  0ouj,  an  ox,  an  o<p6a\- 
poj,  an  eye;  so  called  from  its  flowers,  which  are  sup- 
posed to  resemble  an  eye.)  The  herb,  ox-eye  daisy. 
See  Qhrysanthevium  leucanthemum. 

Buphthalmum  creticum.  Pellitory  of  Spain.  See 
Anthemis  pyrethrum. 

Buphthalmum  germanicum.  The  common  ox-eye 
daisy. 

Buphthalmum  majus.  Great,  or  ox-eye  daisy. 
See  Chrysanthemum  leucanthemum. 

BUPHTHALMUS.  (From  (jovs,  an  ox,  and 
ocpOaXposi  an  eye;  so  named  from  its  large  appear- 
ance like  an  ox’s  eye.) 

1.  Houseleek.  , 

2.  Diseased  enlargement  of  the  eye. 

BUBLEU'RUM.  (From  fiov,  large,  and  zsXevpov,  a 

rib;  so  named  from  its  having  large  rib-like  filaments 
upon  its  leaves.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order, 
Polygamia  superftua. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  herb  hare’s  ear. 
See  Bupleurum  rotundi folium. 

Bupleurum  rotundi  folium.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  called  perfoliata,  in  some  pharmacopoeias. 
Bupleuron;  Bupleuroides.  Round-leaved  hare’s  ear, 
or  thorow  wax.  This  piant  was  formerly  celebrated 
for  curing  ruptures,  mixed  into  a poultice  with  wine 
and  oatmeal. 

BU  RDOCK.  See  Arctium  lappa. 

BU'RGUNDY  PITCH.  See  Pinus  abies. 

Bu'ris.  According  to  Avicenna,  a scirrhous  hernia, 
or  hard  abscess. 

BURN.  Ambustio.  A burn,  or  scald,  is  a lesion  of 
the  animal  body,  occasioned  by  the  application  of  heat, 
but  the  latter  term  is  applicable  only  where  this  is  con- 
veyed through  the  medium  of  some  fluid.  The  con- 
sequences are  more  or  less  serious  according  to  the 
extent  of  the  injury,  or  the  particular  part  affected : 
sometimes  even  proving  fatal,  particularly  in  irritable 
constitutions.  The  life  of  the  part  may  be  at  once 
destroyed  by  these  accidents,  or  mortification  speedily 
follow  the  violent  inflammation  excited ; but  when 
slighter,  it  usually  produces  an  effusion  of  serum  un- 
der the  cuticle,  like  a blister.  When  the  injury  is  ex- 
tensive, considerable  fever  is  apt  to  supervene,  some- 
times a comatose  state ; and  a remarkable  difficulty  of 
breathing  often  precedes  death.  In  the  treatment  of 
these  accidents,  two  very  different  methods  have  been 
pursued.  The  more  ancient  plan  consists  in  antiphlo- 
gistic means,  giving  cooling  purgatives,  &c.  and  even 
taking  blood,  where  the  irritation  is  great;  employing 
at  the  same  time  cold  applications,  and  where  the  skin 
is  destroyed,  emollient  dressings;  opium  was  also 
recommended  to  relieve  the  pain,  notwithstanding 
stupor  might  attend. 

Mr.  Cleghorn,  a brewer  at  Edinburgh,  was  very  suc- 
cessful in  these  cases  by  a treatment  materially  differ- 
ent; first  bathing  the  part  with  vinegar,  usually  a little 
warmed,  till  the  pain  abated  ; then,  if  there  were  any 
destruction  of  the  parts,  applying  poultices,  and  finely 
powdered  chalk  immediately  on  the  sore,  to  absorb  the 
discharge : in  the  meantime  allowing  the  patient  to  live 
pretty  well,  and  abstaining  from  active  purgatives,  &c. 
More  recently,  a surgeon  at  Newcastle,  of  the  name 
of  Kentish,  has  deviated  still  more  from  the  ancient 
practice  ; applying  first  oil  of  turpentine,  alkohol,  &c. 
heated  as  much  as  the  sound  parts  could  bear,  and 
gradually  lessening  the  stimulus ; in  the  mean  time 
supporting  the  patient  by  a cordial  diet,  tether,  &c. 
and  giving  opium  largely  to  lessen  the  irritation.  Now, 
the  cases  chiefly  under  his  care  were  of  persons 
scorched  very  extensively  by  the  explosion  of-  car- 
buretted  hydrogen  in  mines  ; and  probably  where  the 
injury  is  over  a large  part  of  the  surface,  or  where  the 
constitution  is  weakly,  it  may  be  hazardous  to  pursue 


the  antiphlogistic  plan,  or  to  use  cold  applications, 
which,  while  intended  to  keep  down  action,  are  wear- 
ing out  the  power  of  the  part.  If  any  extraneous  sub- 
stance be  forced  into  the  burnt  part,  it  should  be  of 
course  removed : and  sometimes  where  a limb  is  irre- 
coverably injured,  amputation  may  be  necessary. 

Bu'rnea.  Pitch. 

Burnet  saxifrage.  See  Pimpinella. 

Burning.  Brenning.  An  ancient  medical  term, 
denoting  an  infectious  disease,  got  in  the  stews  by  con- 
versing with  lewd  women,  and  supposed  to  be  the 
same  with  what  we  now  call  the  venereal  disease. 

Burnt  hartshorn.  See  Cornu  ustum. 

Burnt  sponge.  See  Spongia  usta. 

Bu'rrhi  spiritus  matricalis.  Burrhus’s  spirit, 
for  disorders  of  the  womb.  A compound  of  myrrh, 
olibanum,  amber,  and  spirit  of  wine. 

BU'RSA.  From  fivpoa , a bag.)  A bag.  1.  The 
scrotum. 

2.  An  herb  called  Thlaspi  bur  see  pastor  is , from  the  re- 
semblance of  its  seminal  follicles  to  a triangular  purse. 

Bursa  mucosa.  A mucous  bag,  composed  of  pro- 
per membranes,  containing  a kind  of  mucous  fat, 
formed  by  the  exhaling  arteries  of  the  internal  coat. 
The  bursae  mucosae  are  of  different  sizes  and  firmness, 
and  are  connected  by  the  cellular  membrane  with  arti- 
cular cavities,  tendons,  ligaments,  or  the  periosteum. 
Their  use  is  to  secrete  and  contain  a substance  to  lu- 
bricate tendons,  muscles,  and  bones,  in  order  to  render 
their  motions  easy. 

A Table  of  all  the  Bursae  Mucosas. 

In  the  Head. 

1.  A bursa  of  the  superior  oblique  muscle  of  the 
eye,  situated  behind  its  trochlea  in  the  orbit. 

2.  The  bursa  of  the  digastricus , situated  in  the  in- 
ternal surface  of  its  tendon. 

3.  A bursa  of  the  circumjlexus , or  tensor  palati, 
situated  between  the  hook-like  process  of  the  sphenoid 
bone  and  the  tendon  of  that  muscle. 

4.  A bursa  of  the  sterno-hyoideus  muscle , situated 
between  the  os  hyoides  and  larynx. 

About  the  Shoulder-joint. 

1.  7 'he  external  acromial , situated  under  the  acro- 
mion, between  tne  coracoid  process,  deltoid  muscle, 
and  capsular  ligament. 

2.  The  internal  acromial , situated  above  the  tendon 
of  the  infra-spinatus  and  teres  major:  it  often  com- 
municates with  the  former. 

3.  The  coracoid  bursa , situated  near  the  root  of  the 
coracoid  process ; it  is  sometimes  double  and  some- 
times triple. 

4.  The  clavicula  bursa,  found  where  the  clavicle 
touches  the  coracoid  process. 

5.  The  subclavian  bursa,  between  the  tendon  of  the 
subclavius  muscle  and  the  first  rib. 

6.  The  cor aco- brachial,  placed  between  the  common 
origin  of  this  muscle  and  the  biceps,  and  the  capsular 
ligament. 

7.  The  bursa  of  the  pectoralis  major,  situated  under 
the  head  of  the  humerus,  between  the  internal  surface 
of  the  tendon  of  that  muscle,  and  another  bursa  placed 
on  tne  long  head  of  the  biceps. 

8.  An  external  bursa  of  the  teres  major , under  the 
head  of  the  os  humeri,  between  it  and  the  tendon  of 
the  teres  major. 

9.  An  internal  bursa  of  the  teres  major,  found 
within  the  muscle  where  the  fibres  of  its  tendons 
diverge. 

10.  A bursa  of  the  latissimus  dorsi,  between  the 
tendon  of  this  muscle  and  the  os  humeri. 

11.  The  humero-bicipitdl  bursa,  in  the  vagina  of  the 
tendon  of  the  biceps. 

There  are  other  bursse  mucosae  about  the  humerus, 
but  their  situation  is  uncertain. 

Near  the  Elbow-joint. 

1.  The  radio-bicipital  is  situated  between  the  tendon 
of  the  biceps,  brachialis,  and  anterior  tubercle  of  the 
radius. 

2.  The  cubito-radial  between  the  tendon  of  the  bi- 
ceps, supinator  brevis,  and  the  ligament  common  to 
the  radius  and  ulna. 

3.  The  anconeal  bursa,  between  the  olecranon  and 
tendon  of  the  anconous  muscle. 


157 


BUR 


BUT 


4.  The  capitulo-radial  bursa , between  the  tendon 
common  to  the  extensor  carpi  radialis  brevis,  and  ex- 
tensor communis  digitorum,  and  round  head  of  the 
radius.  There  are  occasionally  other  bursae  ; but  as 
their  situation  varies,  they  are  omitted. 

About  the  inferior  part  of  the  Fore-arm  and  Hand. 

On  the  inside  of  the  Wrist  and  Hand. 

1.  A very  large  bursa,  for  the  tendon  of  the  flexor 
pollicis  longus. 

2.  Four  short  bursae  on  the  forepart  of  the  tendons 
of  the  flexor  sublimis. 

3.  A large  bursa  behind  the  tendon  of  the  flexor 
pollicis  longus,  between  it  and  the  forepart  of  the  ra- 
dius, capsular  ligament  of  the  wrist  and  os  trapezium. 

4.  A large  bursa  behind  the  tendons  of  the  flexor 
digitorum  profundus,  and  on  the  forepart  of  the  end  of 
the  radius,  and  forepart  of  the  capsular  ligament  of 
the  wrist.  In  some  subjects  it  communicates  with  the 
former. 

5.  An  oblong  bursa  between  the  tendon  of  the  flexor 
carpi  radialis  and  os  trapezium. 

6.  A very  small  bursa  between  the  tendon  of  the 
flexor  carpi  ulnaris  and  os  pisiforme. 

On  the  back  part  of  the  Wrist  and  Hand. 

7.  A bursa  between  the  tendon  of  the  abductor  pol- 
licis longus  and  the  radius. 

8.  A large  bursa  between  the  two  extensores  carpi 
radiales. 

9.  Another  below  it,  common  to  the  extensores  carpi 
radiales. 

10.  A bursa , at  the  insertion  of  the  tendon  of  the 
extensor  carpi  radialis. 

11.  An  oblong  bursa , for  the  tendon  of  the  extensor 
pollicis  longus,  and  which  communicates  with  9. 

12.  A bursa,  for  the  tendon  of  the  extensor  pollicis 
longus.  between  it  and  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the 
thumb. 

13.  A bursa  between  the  tendons  of  the  extensor  of 
the  fore,  middle,  and  ring  fingers. 

14.  A bursa  for  the  extensors  of  the  little  finger. 

15.  A bursa  between  the  tendon  of  the  extensor 
carpi  ulnaris  and  ligament  of  the  wrist. 

There  are  also  burs®  mucosae  between  the  musculi 
lumbricales  and  interossei. 

Near  the  Hip-joint. 

On  the  forepart  of  the  joint. 

1.  The  ileo-puberal,  situated  between  the  iliacus  in- 
ternus,  psoas  magnus,  and  the  capsular  ligament  of  tho 
head  of  the  femur. 

2.  The  pectineal , between  the  tendon  of  the  peoti- 
neus  and  the  thigh-bone. 

3.  A small  bursa  of  the  gluteus  mediu  muscle,  situ- 
ated between  it  and  the  great  trochanter,  before  the 
insertion  of  the  pyriformis. 

4.  A bursa  of  the  gluteus  minimus  muscle  between 
its  tendon  and  the  great  trochanter. 

5.  The  gluteo-fascial,  between  the  gluteu  maximus 
and  vastus  externus. ' 

On  the  posterior  part  of  the  Hip-joint. 

6.  The  tubero-ischiatic  bursa,  situated  between  the 
obturator  interims  muscle,  the  posterior . spine  of  the 
ischium,  and  its  tuberosity. 

7.  The  obturatory  bursa,  which  is  oblong  and  found 
between  the  obturator  internu  and  gemini  muscles, 
and  the  capsular  ligament. 

8.  A bursa  of  the  semi-membranosu  under  its  origin 
and  the  long  head  of  the  biceps  femoris. 

9.  The  glcutco  trochanter al  bursa,  situated  between 
the  tendon  of  the  psoas  muscle  and  the  root  of  the 
great  trochanter. 

10.  Two  glutco- femoral  bursts,  situated  between  the 
tendon  of  the  gluteus  maximus  and  os  femoris. 

11.  A bursa  of  the  quadratus  femoris,  situated  be- 
tween it  and  the  little  trochanter. 

12.  The  iliac  bursa,  situated  between  the  tendon  of 
the  iliacus  interrius  and  the  little  trochanter. 

Near  the  Knec;joint. 

1.  The  supra-genual,  which  adheres  to  the  tendons 
of  the  vastus  and  cruralis  and  the  forepart  of  the 
thigh-bone. 

158 


2.  The  infra- genual  bursa,  situated  under  the  liga 
ment  of  the  patella,  and  often  communicating  with  the 
above. 

3.  The  anterior  genual,  placed  between  the  tendon 
of  the  sartorius,  gracilis,  and  semitendinosus,  and  the 
internal  and  lateral  ligament  of  the  knee. 

4.  The  posterior  genual,  which  is  sometimes  double, 
and  is  situated  between  the  tendons  of  the  semi-mem- 
branosus,  the  internal  head  of  the  gastrocnemius,  the 
capsular  ligament,  and  internal  condyle. 

5.  The  popliteal , conspicuous  between  the  tendon 
of  that  muscle,  the  external  condyle  of  the  femur,  the 
semilunar  cartilage,  and  external  condyle  of  the  tibia. 

6.  The  bursa  of  the  biceps  cruris , between  the  ex- 
ternal part  of  the  tendon,  the  biceps  cruris,  and  the 
external  lateral  ligament  of  the  knee. 

In  the  Foot. 

On  the  back,  side,  and  hind  part  of  the  Foot. 

1.  A bursa  of  the  tibialis  anticus,  between  its  ten 
don,  the  lower  part  of  the  tibia,  and  capsular  ligament 
of  the  ankle. 

2.  A bursa  between  the  tendon  of  the  extensor  pol- 
licis pedis  longus,  the  tibia,  and  capsular  ligament  of 
the  ankle. 

3.  A bursa  of  the  extensor  digitorum  communis, 
between  its  tendons,  the  tibia,  and  ligament  of  the 
ankle. 

4.  A large  bursa,  common  to  the  tendons  of  the  pe- 
ronei  muscles. 

5.  A bursa  of  the  peroneus  brevis , proper  to  its 
tendon. 

6.  The  calcaneal  bursa,  between  the  tendo  Achillis 
and  os  calcis. 

In  the  Sole  of  the  Foot. 

1.  A bursa  for  the  tendon  of  the  peroneus  longus. 

2.  A bursa  common  to  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  pol- 
licis pedis  longus,  and  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  digito- 
rum pedis  communis  iongus  profundus. 

3.  A bursa  of  the  tibialis  posticus,  between  its  ten- 
don, the  tibia,  and  astragalus. 

4.  Five  bursae  for  the  flexor  tendons , which  begin  a 
little  above  the  first  joint  of  each  toe,  and  extend  to 
the  root  of  the  third  phalanx,  or  insertion  of  the 
tendons. 

BURSA'LIS.  From  its  resemblance  to  a bursa,  or 
purse.  See  Obturator  externus  et  intemus. 

BURSA'LOGY.  ( Bursalogia ; from  /3vpaa,  a bagr 
and  \oyos,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  burs® 
mucosae. 

BtJSELI'NUM.  (From  @ov,  great,  and  aeXivov, 
parsley.)  A large  species  of  parsley. 

Bu'ssii  spiritcs  bezoardiccs.  The  bezoardic 
spirit  of  Bussius,  an  eminent  physician  at  Dresden 
A distillation  of  ivorv,  sal-ammoniac,  amber,  &c. 

BUTCHERSBROOM.  See  Ruscus. 

Bu'tiga.  Small  red  pimples  on  the  face.  Called 
also  gutta  rosacea. 

Bu  tino.  Turpentine. 

Bu'tomon.  See  Iris  pseudacorus. 

BUTTER.  ( Butyrum ; from  j 3ovs,  a cow,  and  re- 
pos, coagulum,  or  cream.)  “The  oily,  inflammable 
part  of  milk,  which  is  prepared  in  many  countries  as 
an  article  of  food.  The  common  mode  of  preserving 
it  is  by  the  addition  of  salt,  which  will  keep  it  good  a 
considerable  time,  if  in  sufficient  quantity.  Mr.  Eaton 
informs  us,  in  his  Survey  of  the  Turkish  Empire,  that 
most  of  the  butter  used  at  Constantinople  is  brought 
from  the  Crimea  and  Kirban,  and  that  it  is  kept  sweet 
by  melting  it  while  fresh  over  a very  slow  fire,  and 
removing  the  scum  as  it  rises.  He  adds,  that  by  melt- 
ing butter  in  the  Tartarian  manner,  and  then  salting 
it  in  ours,  he  kept  it  good  and  tine-tasted  for  two  years ; 
and  that  this  melting,  if  carefully  done,  injures  neither 
the  taste  nor  colour.  Thenard,  too,  recommends  the 
Tartarian  method.  He  directs  the  melting  to  be  done 
on  a water-bath,  or  at  a heat  not  exceeding  180°  F. ; 
and  'to  be  continued  until  all  the  caseous  matter  has 
subsided  to  the  bottom,  and  the  butter  is  transparent. 
It  is  then  to  be  decanted,  or  strained  through  a cloth, 
and  cooled  in  a mixture  of  pounded  ice  and  salt,  or  at 
least  in  cold  sprin"  water,  otherwise  it  will  become 
lumpy  by,crystallizing,  and  likewise  not  resist  the  ac- 
tion of  the  air  so  well.  Kept  in  a close  vessel,  and  in 
a cool  place,  it  will  thus  remain,  six  months  or  more. 


BUX 


BYZ 


nearly  as  good  as  at  first,  particularly  after  the  top  is 
taken  off.  If  beaten  up  with  one-sixth  of  its  weight 
of  the  cheesy  matter  when  used,  it  will  in  some  de- 
gree resemble  fresh  butter  in  appearance.  The  taste 
of  rancid  butter,  he  adds,  may  be  much  corrected  by 
melting  and  cooling  in  this  manner. 

Dr.  Anderson  has  recommended  another  mode  of 
curing  butter,  which  is  as  follows : Take  one  part  of 
sugar,  one  of  nitre,  and  two  of  the  best  Spanish  great 
salt,  and  rub  them  together  into  a fine  powder.  This 
composition  is  to  be  mixed  thoroughly  with  the  butter, 
as  soon  as  it  is  completely  freed  from  the  milk,  in  the 
proportion  of  one  ounce  to  sixteen;  and  the  butter 
thus  prepared  is  to  be  pressed  tight  into  the  vessel  pre- 
pared for  it,  so  as  to  leave  no  vacuities.  This  butter 
does  not  taste  well  till  it  has  stood  at  least  a fortnight ; 
it  then  has  a rich  marrow  flavour,  that  no  other  but- 
ter ever  acquires  ; and  with  proper  care  may  be  kept 
for  years  in  this  climate,  or  carried  to  the  East  Indies, 
if  packed  so  as  not  to  melt. 

In  the  interior  parts  of  Africa,  Mr.  Pa*k  informs  us, 
there  is  a tree  much  resembling  the  American  oak, 
producing  a nut  in  appearance  somewhat  like  an 
olive.  The  kernel  of  this  nut,  by  boiling  in  water, 
affords  a kind  of  butter,  whioh  is  whiter,  firmer,  and 
of  a richer  flavour,  than  any  he  ever  tasted  made  from 
cow’s  milk,  and  will  keep  without  salt  the  whole  year. 
The  natives  call  it  shea  toulou , or  tree  butter.  Large 
quantities  of  it  are  made  every  season.” 

Fresh  butter  is  nourishing  and  relaxing,  but  it  rea- 
dily becomes  sour,  and,  in  general,  agrees  with  few 
stomachs.  Rancid  butter  is  one  of  the  most  unwhole- 
some and  indigestible  of  all  foods. 

Butter  of  antimony.  See  Murias  antimonii. 

Butter  of  cacao.  An  oily  concrete  white  matter, 
of  a firmer  consistence  than  suet,  obtained  from  the 
cacao  nut,  of  which  chocolate  is  made.  The  method 
of  separating  it  consists  in  bruising  the  cacao  and  boil- 
ing it  in  water.  The  greater  part  of  the  superabun- 
dant and  uncoinbined  oil  contained  in  the  nut  is  by  this 
means  liquefied,  and  rises  to  the  surface,  where  it 
swims,  and  is  left  to  congeal,  that  it  may  be  the  more 
easily  taken  ofl'.  It  is  generally  mixed  with  small 
pieces  ot  the  nut,  from  which  it  may  be  purified,  by 
keeping  it  in  fusion  without  water  in  a pretty  deep 
vessel,  until  the  several  matters  have  arranged  them- 
selves according  to  their  specific  gravities.  By  this 
treatment  it  becomes  very  pure  and  white. 

Butter  of  cacao  is  without  smell,  and  has  a very 
mild  taste,  when  fresh;  and  in  all  its  general  proper- 
ties and  habitudes  it  resembles  fat  oils,  among  which 
it  must  therefore  be  classed.  It  is  used  as  an  ingredi- 
ent in  pomatums. 

BUTTER-BUR.  See  Tussilago  petasites. 

BUTTER-FLOWER.  See  Ranunculus. 

Butter-milk.  The  thin  and  sour  milk  which  is 
separated  from  the  cream  by  churning  it  into  butter. 

BUTTERWORT.  See  1‘inguicula. 

[Button  snake-root.  See  Eryngium  aquati- 
cu~n.  A.] 

Butua.  See  Cissampelos  pariera. 

BUTYRIC  ACID.  We  owe  the  discovery  of  this 
acid  to  M.  Chevreul.  Butter,  he  says,  is  composed  of 
two  fat  bodies,  analogous  to  those  of  hog’s  lard,  of  a 
colouring  principle,  and  a remarkably  odorous  one,  to 
which  it  owes  the  properties  that  distinguish  it  from 
the  fats,  properly  so  called.  This  principle,  which  he 
has  called  butyric  acid,  forms  well  characterized  salts 
with  barytes,  strontian,  lime,  the  oxides  of  copper, 
lead,  <Stc. ; 100  parts  of  it  neutralize  a quantity  of  base 
which  contains  about  10  of  oxygen.  M.  Chevreul  has 
not  explained  his  method  of  separating  this  acid  from 
the  other  constituents  of  butter.  See  Journ.  de  Phar- 
macies iii  HO. 

BUT  Y’ RUM.  See  Butter. 

Butyrum  antimonii.  See  Murias  antimonii. 

BUXTON.  A village  in  Derbyshire  in  which  there 
are  warm  mineral  springs.  Buxtonicnscs  a.quce. 
They  have  been  long  celebrated  for  their  medicinal 
properties.  With  respect  to  sensible  properties,  the 
Buxton  water  cannot  be  distinguished  from  common 
spring  water,  when  heated  to  the  same  temperature. 
Its  temperature,  in  the  gentleman’s  bath,  is  invariably 
82°.  The  principal  peculiarity  in  the  appearance  of 
this  spring,  is  a large  quantity  of  elastic  vapour,  that 


rises  and  forms  bubbles,  which  pass  through  the  water, 
and  break  as  soon  as  they  reach  the  surface.  The  air 
of  these  bubbles  was  ascertained,  by  Dr.  Pearson,  to 
consist  of  azotic  gas,  mixed  with  a small  proportion  of 
atmospheric  air.  Buxton  water  is  frequently  employ- 
ed both  internally  and  externally:  one  of  which  me- 
thods often  proves  beneficial  when  the  other  would  be 
injurious  : but,  as  a bath  alone,  its  virtues  may  not  be 
superior  to  those  of  tepid  common  water.  As  the 
temperature  of  82°  is  several  degrees  below  that  of 
the  human  body,  a slight  shock  of  cold  is  felt  on  the 
first  immersion  into  the  bath  ; but  this  is  almost  im- 
mediately succeeded  by  a pleasing  glow  over  the  whole 
system.  It  is  therefore  proper  for  very  delicate  and 
irritable  habits.  -The  cases  which  derive  most  benefit 
from  the  external  use  of  Buxton  waters,  are  those  in 
which  a loss  of  action,  and  sometimes  of  sensation, 
affects  particular  limbs,  in  consequence  of  long-conti- 
nued or  violent  inflammation,  or  external  injury. 
Hence  the  chronic  rheumatism  succeeding  the  acute, 
and  where  the  inflammation  has  been  seated  in  parti- 
cular limbs,  is  often  wonderfully  relieved  by  this  bath. 
The  internal  use  of  the  water  has  been  found  to  be  of 
considerable  service  in  symptoms  of  defective  diges- 
tion and  derangement  of  the  alimentary  organs.  A 
judicious  use  of  this  simple  remedy  v$Il  often  relieve 
the  heartburn,  flatulency,  arid  sickness ; it  will  in- 
crease the  appetite,  animate  the  spirits,  and  improve 
the  health.  At  first,  however,  it  sometimes  occasions 
a diarrhoea,  which  is  rather  salutary  than  detrimental ; 
but  costiveness  is  a more  usual  effect,  especially  in 
sluggish  habits.  It  also  affords  great  relief  when  taken 
internally,  in  painful  disorders  of  the  bladders  and  kid 
neys ; and  has  likewise  been  recommended  in  cases 
of  gout;  but  when  taken  for  these  complaints,  the  ad- 
dition of  some  aromatic  tincture  is  recommended.  In 
all  cases  of  active  inflammation,  the  use  of  these  wa- 
ters should  be  carefully  avoided,  on  account  of  their 
supposed  heating  properties.  A full  course  consists  of 
two  glasses,  each  containing  one-third  of  a pint,  before 
breakfast ; which  quantity  should  be  repeated  between 
breakfast  and  dinner.  In  chronic  cases,  a long  resi- 
dence on  the  spot  is  requisite  to  insure  the  desired  effect. 

BUXUS.  (From  zs vxagu),  to  become  hard.)  The 
box-tree.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Monad  a ; Order,  Triandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  box.  See  Buxus 
sempervirens. 

Buxus  sempervirens.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  buxus  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  The  leaves  possess 
a very  strong,  nauseous,  bitter  taste,  and  aperient  vir- 
tues. They  are  occasionally  exhibited,  in  foim  of  de- 
coction, among  the  lower  orders  of  people,  in  cases  of 
dropsy,  and  asthma,  and  worms.  As  much  as  will  lie 
upon  a shilling,  of  the  common  dwarf  box,  dried  and 
powdered,  may  be  given  at  bed-time,  every  night,  to 
an  infant. 

By'arus.  A plexus  of  blood  vessels  in  the  brain. 

Byng.  A Chinese  name  for  green  tea. 

Byre'thrum  ( Beretta , Ital.  or  barette,  Fr.  a cap.) 
Byrethrus.  An  odoriferous  cap,  filled  with  cephalic 
drugs,  for  the  head. 

By'rsa.  (Bvptra,  leather.)  A leather  skin,  to 
spread  plasters  upon. 

Bysau'chen.  (From  0v w,  to  hide,  and  avxyv,  the 
neck.)  Morbid  stiffness  of  the  neck. 

B YSSOLITE.  A massive  mineral  of  an  olive  green 
colour,  found  at  the  foot  of  Mount  Blanc  and  neat 
Oisans  in  gneiss. 

By'ssus.  (Hebrew.)  1.  A woolly  kind  of  moss. 

2.  The  Pudendum  muliebre. 

3.  A kind  of  fine  linen. 

[4.  The  fine  silky  threads  by  which  the  Mytilu 
and  Pinna , both  bivalve  shells,  fasten  themselves,  ait»* 
thereby  remain  attached  to  logs  or  stones  in  the  water. 

The  Pinna  affords  the  most  and  finest  quantity  of 
this  byssus ; and,  in  the  Mediterranean,  it  has  been 
collected  and  spun  into  silk,  of  which  various  orna- 
mental articles  have  been  made.  A.] 

By'thos.  (Buffo?,  deep.)  An  epithet  used  by  Hip- 
pocrates for  the  bottom  of  the  stomach. 

By'zkn.  (From  fivu >,  to  rush  together.)  In  a heap ; 
throngingly.  Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  express 
the  hurry  in  which  the  menses  flow  in  an  excessive 
discharge. 


159 


CAC 


c 


CAD 


J^ABALI'STICA  ARS.  (It  is  derived  from  tlie 
^ Hebrew  word  signifying  to  receive  by  tradition.) 
Cabala;  Cabala ; Kab ala.  The  cabalistic  art.  A 
term  that  hatli  been  anciently  used,  in  a very  myste- 
rious sense,  among  divines  ; and  since,  some  enthusi- 
astic philosophers  and  chemists  transplanted  it  into 
medicine,  importing  by  it  somewhat  magical ; but  such 
unmeaning  terms  are  now  justly  rejected. 

Cabal' Stic  art.  See  Cabulistica  ars. 

CABALLINE.  ( Caballinus  ; from  naBaWos , a 

horse.)  Of,  or  belonging  to,  a horse ; applied  to  the 
coarsest  aloes,  because  it  is  so  drastic  as  to  be  fit  only 
for  horses. 

Caballine  aloes.  See  Aloe. 

CABBAGE.  See  Jirassica. 

Cabbage  tree.  See  Geoffrey  a jamaicensis. 

Cacago'ga.  (From  nanny,  excrement,  and  ayoi,  to 
expel.)  1.  Cathartics. 

2.  Ointments  which,  being  rubbed  on  the  funda- 
ment, procure  stools. — Paulas  JEgineta. 

Caca'lia.  (From  nanov,  bad,  and  Xiav,  exceedingly ; 
because  it  is  Mischievous  to  the  soil  on  which  it 
grows.)  Cacamum.  The  herb  wild  chervil,  or  wild 
carraways. 

Ca'camum.  See  Cacalia. 

CA'CAO.  See  Theobroma  cacao. 

Cacapho'nia.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  (pwvri,  the 
voice.)  Defective  articulation. 

Cacato'ria.  (From  caco,  to  go  to  stool.)  An  epi- 
thet given  by  Sylvius  to  a kind  of  intermittent  fever, 
attended  with  copious  stools. 

Caccio'nde.  A pill  recommended  by  Baglivi 
against  dysenteries ; its  basis  is  catechu. 

CACHE'XJA.  (From  a canos,  bad,  andf^tf,  a habit.) 
A bad  habit  of  body,  known  by  a depraved  or  vitiated 
state  of  the  solids  and  fluids. 

CACHE'XLE.  (The  plural  of  cachexia .)  A class 
of  diseases  in  Cullen’s  Nosology,  embracing  three 
orders;  viz.  Marcorcs , Intumescentice , and  Impetigines. 

CACHINNA'TIO.  (From  cachinno,  to  iaujjjh 
aloud.)  A tendency  to  immoderate  laughter,  as  ill 
some  hysteric  and  maniacal  affections. 

Ca'chlex.  A little  stone,  or  pebble.  Galen  says, 
that  the  cachleces,  heated  in  the  fire  and  quenched  in 
whey,  become  astringents,  and  useful  in  dysenteries. 

CACHOLONG.  A variety  of  quartz. 

Cacho're.  A name  of  catechu. 

CA'CIIRYS.  (Kaxpuj:  which  is  used  in  various 
senses.)  1.  Galen  says,  it  sometimes  means  parched 
barley. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

Cachrys  odontalgica.  A plant,  the  root  of  which 
may  be  substituted  for  that  of  the  pyrethrum  against 
toothache. 

Cachu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

CACHU'NDE.  A medicine  highly  celebrated 
among  the  Chinese  and  Indians,  made  of  several  aro- 
matic ingredients,  perfumes,  medicinal  earths,  and 
precious  stones.  They  make  the  whole  into  a stiff 
paste,  and  form  out  of  it  several  figures,  according  to 
their  fancy,  which  are  dried  for  use.  These  are  prin- 
cipally used  in  the  East  Indies,  but  are  sometimes 
brought  over  to  Portugal.  In  China,  the  principal 
persons  usually  carry  a small  piece  in  their  mouths, 
which  is  a continued  cordial,  and  gives  their  breath  a 
very  sweet  smell.  It  is  highly  esteemed  as  a medicine 
in  nervous  complaints ; and  it  is  reckoned  a prolonger 
of  life  and  a provocative  to  venery ; the  two  great 
intentions  of  most  of  the  medicines  used  in  the  East. 

Cachy'mia.  K anvpia.  An  imperfect  metal,  or  an 
Immature  metalline  ore,  according  to  Paracelsus. 

Cacoalexite'rium.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  aXe\i- 
'lypeu),  to  preserve.)  An  antidote  to  poison  or  agaiust 
infectious  diseases. 

CACOCHO'LIA.  (From  Kanos,  and  xoby,  bile.) 
A vitiated  or  unhealthy  condition  of  the  bile. 

CACOCH  Y'LIA.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  the 
chyle.)  Indigestion,  or  depraved  chylification. 

CACOCHY'MIA.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  xvpoj, 
juice,  or  humour.)  A diseased  or  depraved  state  ot 
the  humours. 

JGO 


CACOCNE'MUS.  . (From  Kanos , bad,  and  kvtjutj, 
the  leg.)  Having  a natural  defect  in  the  tibia.  ’ 

C ACOCORE'MA.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  nopcw,  to 
purge,  or  cleanse.)  A medicine  which  purges  off  the 
vitiated  humours. 

CACODAD  MON.  (From  Kanos,  bad,  and  Saiputv,  a 
spirit.)  An  evil  spirit,  or  genius,  w hich  was  supposed 
to  preside  over  the  bodies  of  men,  and  afflict  them 
with  certain  disorders.  The  nightmare. 

C ACO'DIA.  (From  Kanos,  bad,  and  wgw,  to  smell.) 
A defect  in  the  sense  of  smelling. 

CACOE'THES.  (From  nanos,  ill,  and  r/dos,  a word 
which,  when  applied  to  diseases,  signifies  a quality,  or 
a disposition.)  Hippocrates  applied  this  word  to  ma- 
lignant and  difficult  distempers.  Galen,  and  some 
others,  express  by  it  an  incurable  ulcer,  that  is  ren- 
dere.d  so  through  the  acrimony  of  the  humours  flowing 
to  it.  Linnaeus  and  Vogel  use  this  term  much  in  the 
same  sense  with  Galen,  and  describe  the  ulcer  as  su- 
perficial, spreading,  weeping,  and  with  callous  edges. 

CACOPA'THIA.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  zzaOof, 
affection.)  An  ill  affection  of  the  body,  or  part. 

CACOPHO'NIA.  (From  nanos,  fc>a.d,  and  (fxjvrj,  the 
voice.)  1.  A defect  in  the  organs  of  speech. 

2.  A bad  pronunciation. 

Cacopra'gia.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  TZparJo},  to 
perform.)  Diseased  viscera. 

Cacorry'thmus.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  pvQpos, 
order.)  A disordered  pulse. 

CACO'SIS.  (From  nanos,  bad.)  A bad  disposition 
of  body. 

CACOSI'TLA.  (From  nanos,  and  ai'Jiov,  food.) 
An  aversion  to  food,  or  nausea. 

CACOSPHY'XIA.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  otpv^is, 
puise.)  A disorder  of  the  pulse. 

CACOSTO'MACHUS.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and 
S -opaXos,  the  stomach.)  A bad  or  disordered  stomach ; 
applied  also  to  food  which  the  stomach  rejects. 

CACO'STOMUS.  (From  nanos,  bad,  and  $ -opa,  a 
mouth.)  Having  a bad  formed,  or  disordered  mouth. 

CACOTHY'MIA.  (From  nanos,  ill,  and  Svpos,  the 
mind.)  Any  vicious  disposition  of  the  mind;  or  a 
diseased  mind. 

CACOTRO'PHIA.  (From  nanos,  ill,  and  rpo<f>rj, 
nutriment.)  1.  A vitiated  nourishment. 

2.  A wasting  of  the  body,  from  want  of  nutrition. 

CA'CTUS.  (From  nanros,  the  Greek  name  of  a 
plant  described  by  Theoplirasta.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Ico- 
sandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  The  melon-thistle,  or 
prickly-pear. 

Cactus  opuntia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
opuntia  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  The  prickly  leaves 
of  this  plant  abound  with  a mucilaginous  matter, 
which  is  esteemed  in  its  native  countries  an  emollient, 
in  the  form  of  poultice. 

CACU'BALUS.  (From  nanos,  evil,  and  (iaWut, 
to  cast  out ; so  named  because  it  was  thought  to  be 
efficacious  in  expelling  poisons.)  See  Cucubalus  bac- 
ciforum. 

Ca'cule.  The  Arabian  for  cardamoms. 

CACU'MEN.  (Cacumen,  minis,  neut.)  The  top  or 
point. 

CADA'VER.  ( Cadaver , veris.  neut. , from  cado,  to 
fall:  because  the  body,  when  deprived  of  life,  falls  to 
the  ground.)  A carcass,  or  body  deprived  of  life. 

CA'DMIA.  (Hebrew.)  The  lapis  calaminaris. 

See  Zinc. 

CADMii  metallica.  -A  name  given,  by  the  Ger 
mans,  to  cobalt. 

CADMIUM.  “ A new  metal,  first  discovered  by  M. 
Stromeyer,  in  the  autumn  of  1817,  in  some  carbonate 
of  zinc  which  he  was  examining  in  Hanover.  It  has 
been  since  found  in  the  Derbyshire  silicates  of  zinc. 

The  following  is  Dr.  Wollaston’s  process  for  pro- 
curing cadmium.  From  the  solution  of  the  salt  of 
zinc  supposed  to  contain  cadmium,  precipitate  all  the 
other  metallic  impurities  by  iron  ; filter  and  immerse  a 
cylinder  of  zinc  into  the  clear  solution.  If  cadmium 
be  present,  it  will  be  thrown  down  in  the  metallic  state, 
and  when  redissolved  in  muriatic  acid,  will  exhibit  its 
peculiar  character  on  the  application  of  the  proper  teste. 


cmc 


CAF 


M.  Stromeyer’s  process  consists  in  dissolving  the 
substance  which  contains  cadmium  in  sulphuric  acid, 
and  passing  through  the  acidulous  solution  a current 
of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  He  washes  this  pre- 
cipitate, dissolves  it  in  concentrated  muriatic  acid,  and 
expels  the  excess  of  acid  by  evaporation.  The  residue 
is  then  dissolved  in  water,  and  precipitated  by  car- 
bonate of  ammonia,  of  which  an  excess  is  added,  to 
redissolve  the  zinc  and  the  copper  that  may  have  been 
precipitated  by  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  The 
carbonate  of  cadmium  being  well  washed,  is  heated, 
to  drive  off  the  carbonic  acid,  and  the  remaining  oxide 
is  reduced  by  mixing  it  with  lamp-black,  and  exposing 
it  to  a moderate  red  heat  in  a glass  or  earthen  retort. 

The  colour  of  cadmium  is  a fine  white,  with  a slight 
shade  of  bluish-gray,  approaching  much  to  that  of 
tin ; which  metal  it  resembles  in  lustre  and  suscepti- 
bility of  polish.  Its  texture  is  compact,  and  its  frac- 
ture hackly.  It  crystallizes  easily  in  octohedrons,  and 
presents  on  its  surface,  when  cooling,  the  appearance 
of  leaves  of  fern.  It  is  flexible,  and  yields  readily  to 
the  knife.  It  is  harder  and  more  tenacious  than  tin  ; 
and,  like  it,  stains  paper,  or  the  fingers.  It  is  ductile 
and  malleable,  but  when  long  hammered,  it  scales  off 
in  different  places.  Its  sp.  grav.  before  hammering, 
is  8.6040 ; and  when  hammered,  it  is  8.6944.  It  melts, 
and  is  volatilized  under  a red  heat.  Its  vapour,  which 
has  no  smell,  may  be  condensed  in  drops  like  mercury, 
which,  on  congealing,  present  distinct  traces  of  crys- 
tallization. 

Cadmium  is  as  little  altered  by  exposure  to  the  air 
as  tin.  When  heated  in  the  open  air,  it  burns  like 
that  metal,  passing  into  a smoke,  which  falls  and 
forms  a very  fixed  oxide,  of  a brownish-yellow  colour. 
Nitric  acid  readily  dissolves  it  cold;  dilute  sulphuric, 
muriatic,  and  even  acetic  acids,  act  feebly  on  it  with 
the  disengagement  of  hydrogen.  The  solutions  are 
colourless,  and  are  not  precipitated  by  water. 

Cadmium  forms  a single  oxide,  in  which  100  parts 
of  the  metal  are  combined  with  14.352  of  oxygen. 
The  prime  equivalent  of  cadmium  deduced  from  this 
compound  seems  to  be  very  nearly  7,  and  that  of  the 
oxide  8.  This  oxide  varies  in  its  appearance  accord- 
ing to  circumstances,  from  a brownish-yellow  to  a 
dark  brown,  and  even  a blackish  colour.  With  char- 
coal it  is  reduced  with  rapidity  below  a red  heat.  It 
gives  a transparent  colourless  glass  bead  with  borax. 
It  is  insoluble  in  water,  but  in  some  circumstances  forms 
a white  hydrate,  which  speedily  attracts  carbonic  acid 
from  the  air,  and  gives  out  its  water  when  exposed  to 
heat.” — Ure's  Client.  Diet. 

CADOGAN,  William,  graduated  at  Oxford  in 
1755.  Five  years  before,  he  had  published  a small 
treatise  on  the  management  of  children,  which  was 
very  much  approved.  In  1764,  his  “ Dissertation  on 
the  Gout  and  all  Chronic  Diseases”  appeared,  which 
attracted  considerable  attention,  being  written  in  a 
popular  style.  He  referred  the  gout  principally  to 
indolence,  vexation,  and  intemperance;  and  his  plan 
of  treatment  is  generally  judicious.  He  was  a fellow 
of  the  London  College  of  Physicians,  and  died  in  1797, 
at  an  advanced  age. 

Cadtchu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

CADU'CA.  (From  cado , to  fall  down.)  See  De- 
cidua. 

Caduci.  The  name  of  a class  in  Linnaeus’s  Metho- 
dus  calycina. 

CADU'CUS.  (From  cado , to  fall.)  1.  In  Botany , 
The  falling  off  before  the  unfolding  of  the  flower 
or  leaf;  as  the  perianthium  of  Papaver,  the  stipulce 
of  Prunus  avium.  This  term  is  expressive  of  the 
shortest  period  of  duration,  and  has  different  accepta- 
tions, according  to  the  different  parts  of  the  plant  to 
which  it  is  applied.  A calyx  is  said  to  be  caducous, 
which  drops  at  the  first  opening  of  the  petals,  or  even 
before,  as  in  the  poppy.  Petals  are  caducous,  which 
are  scarcely  unfolded  before  they  fall  off,  as  in  Thalic- 
trum;  and  such  leaves  as  fall  off  before  the  end  of 
summer,  have  obtained  this  denomination.  See  De- 
ciduus  and  Parasiticus. 

2.  The  epilepsy  or  falling  sickness  is  called  morbus 
caducus. 

CA2  CITAS.  (From  ceecus,  blind.)  Blindness. 
See  Calitro  and  Amaurosis. 

CiE'CUM.  (From  ctecus,  blind  : so  called  from  its 
toeing  perforated  at  one  end  only.)  The  caecum,  or 
blind  gut.  The  first  portion  of  the  large  intestines, 


laced  in  the  right  iliac  region,  about  four  fingers* 

readth  in  length  It  is  in  this  intestine  that  the  ileum 
terminates  by  a valve,  called  the  valve  of  the  cascum. 
The  appendicula  cceci  vermiformis  is  also  attached  to 
it.  See  Intestines. 

CLE'LIUS,  Aureliands,  is  supposed  to  have  been 
born  at  Sicca,  in  Africa,  and  is  referred  by  Le  Clerc 
to  the  fifteenth  century,  from  the  harshness  of  l)i3 
style.  He  has  left  a Latin  translation  of  the  writings 
of  Soranus,  with  additional  observations,  partly  col- 
lected from  others,  partly  from  his  own  experience. 
The  work  is  in  eight  books,  three  on  acute,  the  rest 
on  chronic  disorders.  He  treats  of  several  diseases 
not  mentioned  by  any  earlier  writers,  and  has  some 
observations  in  surgery  peculiar  to  himself;  he  appears, 
too,  generally  correct  in  his  remarks  on  the  opinions 
of  others. 

Cje'ros.  Kaipoj.  Hippocrates,  by  this  word,  means 
the  opportunity  or  moment  in  which  whatever  is  to 
be  effected  should  be  done. 

CA5SALPINA.  (Named  in  honour  of  Caesalpinus, 
chief  physician  to  Pope  Clement  VIII.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class, 
Decandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Cjesalpina  crista.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  that  affords  the  Brazil  wood.  It  is  of  the  growth 
of  the  Brazils  in  South  America,  and  also  of  the  Isle 
of  France,  Japan,  and  elsewhere.  It  is  chiefly  used 
as  a red  dye.  See  Brazil  wood. 

CA5SALPTNUS,  Andrew,  was  born  in  Tuscany, 
in  1519.  He  graduated  at  Pisa,  and  became  professor 
in  anatomy  and  medicine  there ; and  was  afterward 
made  physician  to  Pope  Clement  VIII.  He  died  in 
1603.  His  works  are  numerous,  and  evince  much 
genius  and  learning.  In  1571,  he  published  a work, 
defending  the  philosophy  of  Aristotle  against  the  doc- 
trines of  Galen,  from  some  passages  in  which  he 
appears  to  have  appioached  very  near  to  a knowledge 
of  the  cfrculation  of  the  blood  ; having  explained  the 
use  of  the  valves  of  the  heart,  and  pointed  out  the 
course  which  these  compelled  the  blood  to  take  on 
both  sides  during  the  contraction  and  dilatation  of  that 
organ.  In  a treatise  “ De  Plantis,”  he  justly  compared 
the  seeds  to  the  eggs  of  animals;  and  formed  an 
arrangement  of  them  according  to  the  parts  of  fructifi- 
cation. On  medical  subjects  also  he  offered  many 
judicious  remarks. 

CA2SARES.  Ccesones.  Children  who  are  brought 
into  the  world  as  Julius  Ctesar  is  said  to  have  been. 
See  Caesarian  operation. 

CAESARIAN  OPERATION.  (So  called  because 
Julius  Caesar  is  said  to  have  been  extracted  in  this 
manner.)  Hysterotomia.  Mystcrotomatocia.  The 
operation  for  extracting  the  foetus  from  the  uterus,  by 
dividing  the  integuments  of  the  abdomen  and  the 
uterus. 

There  are  three  cases  in  which  this  operation  may 
be  necess&ry.— 1.  When  the  foetus  is  perceived  to  be 
alive,  and  the  mother  dies,  either  in  labour  or  in  the 
last  two  months.  2.  When  the  foetus  is  dead,  but 
cannot  be  delivered  in  the  usual  way,  from  the  de- 
formity of  the  mother,  or  the  disproportionate  size  of 
the  child.  3.  When  both  the  mother  and  the  child 
are  living,  but  delivery  cannot  take  place,  from  the 
same  causes  as  in  the  second  instance.  Both  the 
mother  and  the  child,  if  accounts  can  be  credited,  have 
often  lived  after  the  Caesarian  operation,  and  the 
mother  even  borne  children  afterward.  Heister  gives 
a relation  of  such  success,  in  his  Institutes  of  Surgery  ; 
and  there  are  some  others.  In  England,  the  Caesarian 
operation  has  almost  always  failed.  Mr.  James  Bar- 
low,  of  Chorley,  Lancashire,  succeeded,  however,  in 
taking  a foetus  out  of  the  uterus  by  this  bold  proceed- 
ing, and  the  .mother  was  perfectly  restored  to  health 

C^'tchu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

Cap;  Cdfa;  Caff  a.  Names  given  by  the  Arabians 
to  camphire. 

CAFFEIN.  The  name  of  a bitter  principle  pro- 
cured from  coffee  by  Chenevix,  by  adding  muriate  of 
tin  to  an  infusion  of  unroasted  coffee.  From  this  lie 
obtained  a precipitate,  which  he  washed  and  decom- 
posed by  sulphuretted  hydrogen.  The  supernatant 
liquid  contained  this  principle,  which  occasioned  a 
green  precipitate  in  concentrated  solutions  of  iron. 
When  the  liquid  wtis  evaporated  to  dryness,  it  wis 
yellow  and  transparent,  like  horn.  It  did  not  attract 
moisture  from  the  air,  but  was  soluble  in  water  apd 

161 


CAL 


CAL 


alkohol.  The  solution  had  a pleasant  bitter  taste,  and 
assumed  with  alkalies  a garnet-red  colour.  It  is 
almost  as  delicate  a test  of  iron  as  infusion  of  galls  is ; 
yet  gelantine  occasions  no  precipitate  with  it. 

[“  Calfein  is  a new  principle,  which,  was  discovered 
in  coflee  by  Robiquet.  It  is  white,  volatile,  and  crys- 
tallizable ; and  is  particularly  distinguished  by  the 
large  quantity  of  nitrogen  which  it  contains,  being 
greater  than  that  in  almost  any  other  vegetable.  Ac- 
cording to  Dumas  and  Pelletier,  it  consists  of  27  14 
oxygen,  4.81  hydrogen,  46.51  carbon,  and  21.54  nitro- 
gen.— Webster's  Man.  of  Chem.  A.] 

Caga'strum.  A barbarous  term  used  by  Paracelsus, 
to  express  the  morbific  matter  which  generates  diseases. 

Caitchu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

CAIUS,  John,  was  born  at  Norwich, in  1510.  After 
studying  at  Cambridge,  and  in  different  parts  of  Italy, 
and  distinguishing  himself  by  his  interpretations  of 
Hippocrates,  Gaien,  and  other  ancient  authors,  he 
graduated  at  Bologna.  In  1544,  he  returned  to  this 
country,  and  for  some  time  read  lectures  in  anatomy 
to  the  corporation  of  surgeons  in  London.  He  after- 
ward practised  at  Shrewsbury,  having  been  admitted 
a fellow  of  tiie  College  of  Physicians  ; and  published 
a popular  account  of  the  memorable  sweating  sickness, 
which  prevailed  in  1551,  subsequently  reprinted,  much 
improved,  in  Latin.  He  was  made  physician  to  Ed- 
ward VI.,  to  Mary,  and  to  Elizabeth.  On  the  death 
of  Linacre,  he  was  chosen  President  of  the  College  of 
Physicians,  and  during  the  seven  years  lor  which  he 
held  that  office,  performed  many  important  services. 
He  was  also  a signal  benefactor  to  Gonvil  Hall,  where 
lie  studied  at  Cambridge,  having  obtained  -permission 
to  erect  it  into  a college,  considerably  enlarging  the 
building,  and"  assigning  provision  for  three  fellows  and 
twenty  scholars.  He  was  chosen  master  on  the  com- 
pletion of  the  improvements,  and  retained  that  office 
till  near  the  period  of  his  death,  which  happened  in 
1573.  He  published  a dissertation  “ De  Canibus  Bri- 
tannicis,”  which  Mr.  Pennant  has  entirely  followed 
in  his  British  Zoology  and  some  other  learned  works 
besides  these  already  mentioned. 

Ca'jan.  See  Phascolus  crcticus. 

Ca'jeput  oil.  See  Melaleuca. 

Cala'ba.  See  Catopkyllum  inophyllum. 

CALAGUA'LtE  radix.  Calaguclce  radix.  The  root 
so  called  is  knotty,  and  somewhat  like  that  of  the 
polypody  tribe.  It  has  been  exhibited  internally  at 
Rome,  with  success,  in  dropsy ; and  it  is  said  to  be 
efficacious  in  pleurisy,  contusions,  abscesses,  &c.  It 
■was  first  used  in  America,  where  it  is  obtained  ; and 
Italian  physicians  have  since  written  concerning  it, 
in  terms  of  approbation. 

Calama'corus.  Indian  reed. 

CALAMAGRO'STIS.  (From  KaXapog , a reed,  and 
aypu)s-ts,  a sort  of  grass.)  Reed  grass.  Gramen  Arun- 
dinacum.  The  Arundo  calamagrostis  of  Linnaeus ; 
the  root  of  which  is  said  to  be  diuretic  and  emmena- 
gogue. 

CALAMARIiE.  (From  calamus , a reed.)  The 
name  of  an  order  of  Linnaeus’s  fragments  of  a natural 
method,  which  embraces  the  reed-plants. 

Cala'mbac.  An  Indian  name  for  agallochum.  See 
Lignum  Aloes. 

Calame'don.  (From  KaXayos,  a reed.)  A sort  of 
fracture  which  runs  along  the  bone,  in  a straight  line, 
like  a reed,  but  is  lunated  in  the  extremity. 

CA'LAMINA.  Sec  Calamine. 

Calamina  pr separata.  Prepared  calamine.  Burn 
the  calamine,  and  reduce  it  to  powder ; then  let  it  be 
brought  into  the  state  of  a very  fine  powder,  in  the 
same  manner  that  chalk  is  directed  to  be  prepared. 
See  Calamine. 

\ CA'LAMINE.  ( Calamina ; from  calamus , a reed  : 
so  called  from  its  reed-like  appearance.)  Cadmia; 
Cathmia ; Cadmia  lapifLosa  arosa ; Cadmia  fossilis  ; 
Calamina;  Lapis  calaminaris.  A native  carbonate 
qf  zinc.  A mineral,  containing  oxide  of  zinc  and 
carbonic  acid,  united  with  a portion  of  iron,  and  some- 
times other  substances.  It  is  very  heavy,  moderately 
hard  and  brittle,  of  a gray,  yellowish,  red,  or  blackish 
brown ; found  in  quarries  of  considerable  extent,  in 
several  parts  of  Europe,  and  particularly  in  this  coun- 
try,  in  Derbyshire,  Gloucestershire,  Nottinghamshire, 
and  Somersetshire;  as  also  in  Wales.  The  calamine 
of  England  is  by  the  best  judges,  allowed  to  be  su- 
perior in  quality  to  that  of  most  other  countries.  It  Bel- 
162 


dom  lies  very  deep,  being  chiefly  found  in  clayey 
grounds  near  the  surface.  In  some  places  it  is  mixed 
with  lead  ores.  This  mineral  is  an  article  in  the  ma- 
teria medica  ; but,  before  it  comes  to  the  shops,  it  is 
usually  roasted,  or  calcined,  to  separate  some  arseni- 
cal or  sulphureous  particles  which,  in  its  crude  state, 
it  is  supposed  to  contain,  and  in  order  to  render  it 
more  easily  reducible  into  a fine  powder.  In  this 
state,  it  is  employed  in  collyria,  for  weak  eyes,  for 
promoting  the  cicatrization  of  ulcers,  and  healing  ex- 
coriations of  the  skin.  It  is  the  basis  of  an  officinal 
cerate,  called  Ceratum  caiaininaj  by  the  London  Col- 
lege, formerly  called  ceratum  lapidis  caliminaris,  cera- 
tum epuloticurn ; and  ceratum  carbonatis  zinci  impuri 
by  the  Edinburgh  College.  These  compositions  form 
the  cerate  which  Turner  strongly  recommends  for 
bedling  ulcerations  and  excoriations,  and  which  have 
been  popularly  distinguished  by  his  name.  The  col- 
lyria in  which  the  prepared  calamine  has  been  em- 
ployed, have  consisted  simply  oitbat  substance  added 
to  rose-water,  or  elder-flower  water. 

CALAM1NT.  See  Melissa  calaminlha. 

Calamint , mountain.  Sec  Melissa  grandiflora. 

CALAMINTHA.  (From  jcaAoc,  beautiful,  or  *•«- 
Xapos,  a reed,  and  pivdi j,  mint.)  Common  calamint. 
See  Melissa. 

Calamintha  anglica.  See  Melissa  nepeta. 

Calamintha  humilior.  The  ground-ivy.  See 
Glecoma  hederacea. 

Calamintha  magna  flore.  See  Melissa  grandi- 
flora. 

Calamintha  Montana.  See  Melissa  Calamintha. 

CA'LAMUS.  (From  Kalam , an  Arabian  word.) 
1.  A general  name  denoting  the  stalk  of  any  plant. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Cias6,  Hexandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Calamus  aromaticus.  See  Acorns  calamus. 

[Calamus.  Sweet  flag-root.  Accrus  calamus,  or 
calamus  aromaticus.  “TheAcorus  calamus  is  found 
in  Europe,  Asia,  and  North  America.  With  us  it 
grows  in  wet  meadows,  commonly  in  beds  or  bunches. 
The  root  has  a strong  aromatic  odour,  and  a bitter 
spicy  taste.  Its  properties  depend  upon  a volatile  oil, 
and  a bitter  matter  soluble  in  water.  Medicinally  con- 
sidered, it  is  stimulant,  heating  and  tonic ; and  is  given 
in  flatulent  colic,  cramp  of  the  stomach,  &c.,  in  the 
dose  of  a scruple  and  upwards.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.  j 

Calamus  aromaticus  asiaticus.  See  Acorus  ca- 
lamus. 

Calamus  odoratus.  The  sweet-scented  rush. 

See  Acorus  calamus. 

Calamus  rotang.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  from  which  we  obtain  the  Dragon’s  blood.  Cin- 
nabaris  groecorum;  Draconthcema ; Asegen  ; Asegon. 
Dragon’s  blood.  The  red  resinous  juice  which  is  ob- 
tained by  wounding  the  bark  of  the  Calamus  rotang; — 
caudice  densissime  aculcata,  aculeis  erectis , spadice 
crccto.  The  Petrocarpus  draco  and  Draccena  draco 
also  afford  this  resin.  It  is  chiefly  obtained  from  the 
Molucca  islands,  Java,  and  other  parts  of  the  East 
Indies.  It  is  generally  much  adulterated,  and  varied 
in  goodness  and  purity.  The  best  kind  is  of  a dark 
red  colour,  which,  when  powdered,  changes  to  crim- 
son : it  is  insoluble  in  water,  but  soluble  in  a great 
measure  in  alkohol;  it  readily  melts  and  catches 
flame,  has  no  smell,  but  to  the  taste  discovers  some  de- 
gree of  warmth  and  pungency.  The  ancient  Greeks 
were  well  acquainted  with  the  adstringent  power  of 
this  drug ; in  which  character  it  has  since  oeen  much 
employed  in  haemorrhages,  and  in  alvine  fluxes.  At 
present,  however,  it  is  not  used  internally,  being  super- 
seded by  more  certain  and  effectual  remedies  of  this 
numerous  class. 

Calamus  scriptorius.  A furrow  or  kind  of  canal 
at  the  bottom  of  the  fourth  ventricle  of  the  brain,  so 
called  from  its  resemblance  to  a writing  pen. 

Calamus  vulgaris.  See  Acorus  calamus. 

CALATHIANA.  (From  uaXados,  a twig  basket; 
so  called  from  the  shape  of  its  flowers.)  The  herb 
marsh-gentian.  See  Gentiana  pneumonantke. 

Calbi'anum.  The  name  of  a plaster  in  Myrepsus. 

Calca'dinum.  Vitriol. 

Calca'dis.  An  Arabian  name  for  white  vitriol  and 
alkali. 

CALCA'NEUM.  (From  calx , the  heel.)  Calcar 
pterna ; Os  calcis.  The  largest  bone  of  the  tarsus, 

. which  forms  the  heel.  It  is  eiiuated  posteriorly  under 


CAL 


CAL 


the  astragalus,  is  very  regular,  and  divided  into  a body 
and  processes.  It  has  a large  tuberosity  or  knob,  pro- 
jecting behind  to  form  the  heel.  A sinuous  cavity , 
as  its  fore-part,  which,  in  the  fresh  subject,  is  filled 
with  fat,  and  gives  origin  to  several  ligaments.  Two 
prominences ydX  the  inner  and  fore-part  of  the  bone, 
with  a pit  between  them,  for  the  articulation  of  the 
under  and  fore-part  of  the  astragalus.  A depression , 
in  the  external  surface  of  the  bone  near  its  fore-part, 
where  the  tendon  of  the  peronaeus  longus  runs.  A 
large  cavity , at  the  inner  side  of  the  bone,  for  lodging 
the  long  flexors  of  the  toes,  together  with  the  vessels 
and  nerves  of  the  sole.  There  are  two  prominences , at 
the  under  and  back  part  of  this  bone,  that  give  origin 
to  the  apoueurosis,  and  several  muscles  of  the  sole. 
The  anterior  surface  of  the  os  calcis  is  concave,  for  its 
articulation  with  the  os  cuboides.  and  it  is  articulated 
to  the  astragalus  by  ligaments. 

Calcan'thum.  (From  xa^KOi>  brass,  and  avOog , a 
flower;  i.  e.  flowers  of  brass.)  Calcanthos.  Cop- 
peras ; Vitriol. 

CALCAR.  [Calcar,  or  is.  n.  From  calx,  the  heel ; 
also  from  caleo,  to  heat.)  1.  The  heel-bone. 

2.  The  furnace  of  a laboratory. 

3.  A spur.  In  botany,  applied  to  a part  of  the  ringent 
and  personate  corolla  of  plants.  It  is  a tube  forming 
an  obtuse  or  acute  sac,  at  the  side  of  the  receptacle. 
It  is  of  rare  occurrence. 

CALCARATUS.  Spurred ; applied  to  the  corols 
and  neclaries  of  plants ; as  Calcarata  corolla,  Necta- 
rium  calcar atam ; as  in  Aquilegia  and  Antirrhinum 
linaria. 

CALCAREOUS.  (Calcarius;  from  calx,  lime.) 
That  which  partakes  somewhat  of  the  nature  and 
qualities  of  calx. 

Calcareous  earth.  See  Calx  and  Lime. 

Calcareous  spar.  Crystallized  carbonate  of  lime, 
which  occurs  in  more  than  600  different  forms.  It  is 
found  in  veins  in  all  rocks  from  granite  to  alluvial 
strata.  The  rarest  a«d  most  beautiful  crystals  are 
found  in  Derbyshire,  but  it  exists  in  every  part  of  the 
world. 

Calca'ris  flos.  The  larkspur. 

CALCA’RIUS.  See  Calcareous. 

Calcarius  lapis.  Limestone. 

Ca'lcatar.  A name  of  vitriol. 

Calcatri'ppa.  See  Ajuga  pyramidalis. 

CALCEDONY.  A mineral,  so  called  from  Calce- 
don,  in  Asia  Minor,  where  it  was  found  in  ancient 
times.  There  are  several  sub-species,  common  calce- 
dony,  heliotrope,  crysoprase,  plasma,  onyx,  sand,  and 
sardonyx. 

Common  calcedony  occurs  of  various  colours ; it  is 
regarded  as  pure  silica  with  a little  water.  Very  fine 
stalactical  specimens  have  been  found  in  Cornwall 
and  Scotland. 

Ca'lceum  equinum.  (From  calceus,  a shoe,  and 
equus,  a horse  ; so  called  from  the  figure  of  its  leaf.) 
The  herb  colt’s-foot.  See  Tussilagofarfara. 

Calciiantrum.  Pliny’s  name  for  copperas. 

Calchi'theos.  (From  xaA%tov,  purple.)  Verdigris. 

CALCI'FRAGA.  (From  calx,  a stone,  and  frango, 
to  .break ; so  named  from  its  supposed  property  of 
breaking  the  human  calculus.)  Breakstone.  In  Scri- 
bonius  Largus,  it  means,  the  herb  spleenwort,  or  sco- 
lopendrium ; others  mean  byitth e Pimpinella  saxi- 
frarra  of  Linnaeus. 

CALCINA'TION.  Oxidation.  The  fixed  resi- 
dues of  such  matters  as  have  undergone  combustion 
are  called  cinders,  in  common  language,  and  calces, 
but  now  more  commonly  oxides,  by  chemists;  and 
the  operation,  when  considered  with  regard  to  these 
residues,  is  termed  calcination.  In  this  general  way, 
it  has  likewise  been  applied  to  bodies  not  really  combus- 
tible, but  only  deprived  of  some  of  their  principles  by 
heat.  Thus  we  hear  of  the  calcination  of  chalk,  to 
convert  it  into  lime  by  driving  off  its  caibonic  acid  and 
water;  of  gypsum,  or  plaster-stone,  of  alum,  of  borax, 
and  other  saline  bodies,  by  which  they  are  deprived 
of  their  water  of  crystallization  ; of  bones  which  lose 
their  volatile  parts  by  this  treatment,  and  of  various 
other  bodies. 

CALCINA'TUS.  Calcined. 

Calcinatum  majus.  Whatever  is  dulcified  by  the 
chemical  art,  which  was  not  so  by  nature ; such  as 
dulcified  mercury,  lead,  and  the  like  substances,  which 
are  very  speedily  consolidated. 

L 2 


Calcinatum  majus  poterii.  Mercury  dissqjved  la 
aqua  fortis,  and  precipitated  with  salt  water.  Poterius 
used  it  in  the  cure  of  ulcers. 

Calcinatum  minus.  Any  thing  which  is  sweet  by 
nature,  and  speedily  cures,  as  sugar,  manna,  tama- 
rinds, &c. 

Calcino'nia.  See  Calcena. 

Ca'lcis  aqua.  See  Calcis  liquor. 

Ca'lcis  liquor.  Solution  of  lime,  formerly  called 
aqua  calcis.  Lime-water.  Take  of  lime,  half  a 
pound ; boiling  distillecf  water,  twelve  pints.  Pour 
the  water  upon  the  lime,  and  stir  them  together  ; next 
cover  the  vessel  immediately,  and  let  it  stand  for  three 
hours;  then  keep  the  solution  upon  the  remaining 
lime  in  stopped  glass  bottles,  and  pour  off"  the  clear 
liquor  when  it  is  wanted  for  use. 

Lime  is  soluble  in  about  450  times  its  weight  of 
water,  or  little  more  than  one  grain  in  one  fluid  ounce. 
It  is  given  internally,  in  doses  of  two  ounces  and  up- 
wards, in  cardialgia,  spasms,  diarrhoea,  &c.  and  in 
proportionate  doses  in  convulsions  of  children,  arising 
from  acidity,  or  ulcerated  intestines,  intermittent  fe- 
vers, &cc.  Externally  it  is  applied  to  burns  and 
ulcers. 

Calcis  mtjrias.  Calx  solila;  Sat  ammoniacus 
fixus.  Muriate  of  lime.  Take  of  the  salt  remaining 
after  the  sublimation  of  subcarbonate  of  ammonia  two 
pounds,  water  a pint;  mix  and  filter  through  paper. 
Evaporate  the  salt  to  dryness ; and  preserve  it  in  a 
closely- stopped  vessel.  This  preparation  is  exhibited 
with  the  same  views  as  the  muriate  of  barytes.  It 
possesses  deobstruent,  diuretic,  and  cathartic  virtues, 
and  is  much  used  by  the  celebrated  Fourcroy  against 
scrophula,  and  other  analogous  diseases.  Six,  twelve, 
and  twenty  grains,  are  given  to  children,  three  limes  a 
day,  and  a drachm  to  adults. 

Calcis  muriatis  liquor.  Take  of  muriate  of 
lime  two  ounces,  distilled  water  three  fluid  ounces; 
dissolve  the  salt  in  the  water,  and  filter  it  through 
paper. 

Ca'lcts  os.  See  Calcaneum. 

Calcis  vivi  flores.  The  pellicle  on  the  surface 
of  lime  water. 

CALCITRA'PA.  (An  old  botanical  term  of  simi 
lar  meaning  to  tribulus,  compounded  of  calco , to  tread 
or  kick,  and  rpenu),  to  turn,  because  the  caltrops  are 
continually  kicked  over,  if  they  fail  of  their  intended 
mischief.  See  Trapa.)  See  Centavrca  calcitrapa. 

Calcitrapa  officinalis.  See  Centaur c a solsti - 
tiales. 

CALCIUM.  The  metallic  basis  of  lime.  Sir  H. 
Davy,  the  discoverer  of  this  metal,  procured  it  by  the 
process  which  he  used  for  obtaining  barium.  It  was 
in  such  small  quantities,  that  little  could  be  said  con- 
cerning its  nature.  It  appeared  brighter  and  whiter 
than  either  barium  or  strontium;  and  burned  when 
gently  heated,  producing  di  y lime. 

There  is  only  one  known  combination  of  calcium 
and  oxygen,  which  is  the  important  substance  called 
lime.  The  nature  of  this  substance  is  proved  by  the 
phenomena  of  the  combustion  of  calcium ; the  metal 
changing  into  the  earth  with  the  absorption  of  oxygen 
gas.  When  the  amalgam  of  calcium  is  thrown  into 
water,  hydrogen  gas  is  disengaged,  and  the  water  be- 
comes a solution  of  lime.  From  the  quantity  of  hy- 
drogen evolved,  compared  with  the  quantity  of  lime 
formed  in  experiments  of  this  kind,  M.  Berzelius  en- 
deavoured to  ascertain  the  proportion  of  oxygen  in 
lime.  The  nature  of  lime  may  also  be  proved  by  ana- 
lysis. When  potassium  in  vapour  is  sent  through  the 
earth  ignited  to  whiteness,  the  potassium  was  found 
by  Sir  H.  Davy  to  become  -potassa,-  while  a dark  gray 
substance  of  metallic  splendour,  which  is  calcium, 
either  wholly  or  partially  deprived  of  oxygen,  is  founiF 
imbedded  in  the  potassa ; for  it  eflervesces  violently^ 
and  forms  a solution  of  lime  by  tire  action  of  water.  , 

CALCSINTER.  Stalactitical  carbonate  of  lime, 
which  is  continually  forming  by  the  infiltration  of  car- 
bonated lime  water  through  the  crevices  of  the  roofs 
of  caverns.  The  irregular  masses  on  the  bottoms  of 
caves  have  been  called  stalagmites. 

CALCTUFF.  An  alluvial  formation  of  carbonate 
of  lime,  probably  deposited  from  calcareous  springs  of 
a yellowish  dull  gray  colour,  containing  impressions 
of  vegetable  matter. 

CALCULI'FRAGUS.  (From  calculus , a stone, 
and  frango , to  break.)  Stone- breaker,  having  the 

163 


CAL 


CAL 


power  to  break  stone  in  the  human  body.  1.  A syno- 
nym of  lithoutriptic.  See  Lithontriptic.  J 

2.  The  scolopendrium,  and  pimpernel.  See  Calci- 
fraga- 

CA'LCULUS.  (Diminutive  of  calx , a lime-stone. 
Calculus  humanus  ; Beioar  microcosmicum.  Gravel ; 
Stone.  In  English  we  understand  by  gravel,  small 
sand-like  concretions,  or  stones,  which  pass  from  the 
Kidneys  through  the  ureters  in  a fevv  days ; and  by 
stone , a calculous  concretion  in  the  kidneys,  or  blad- 
der, of  too  large  a size  to  pass,  without  great  diffi- 
culty. Similar  concretions  are  found  occasionally  in 
other  cavities  or  passages.  When  a disposition  to 
form  minute  calculi  or  gravel  exists,  we  often  find 
nephritic  paroxysms,  as  they  are  called,  (see  Nephri- 
tis) which  consist  of  pain  in  the  back,  shooting  down 
through  the  pelvis  to  the  thighs ; sometimes  a numb- 
ness in  one  leg,  and  a retraction  of  either  testicle  in 
men,  symptoms  arising  from  the  irritation  of  a stone 
passing  through  the  ureters,  as  these  cross  the  sperma- 
tic cord,  on  the  nerves  passing  to  the  lower  extremities. 
These  pains,  often  violent,  are  terminated  by  the  pain- 
ful discharge  of  small  stones  through  the  urethra,  apd 
the  patient  is  for  a time  easy.  What,  however,  is 
meant  by  the  stone  is  a more  serious  and  violent  dis- 
ease. It  is  singular  that  these  discharges  of  small  gra- 
vel do  not  usually  terminate  in  stone.  Many  have  ex- 
perienced them  during  a long  life,  without  any  more 
serious  inconvenience : while  the  latter  is  a disease 
chiefly  of  the  young,  and  depending  on  circumstances 
not  easily  explained.  If  the  stone  attacks  persons 
more  advanced  in  age,  it  is  often  the  consequence  of 
paroxysms  of  gout,  long  protracted,  and  terminating 
imperfectly. 

When  once  a stone  has  acquired  a moderate  size, 
it  usually  occasions  the  following  symptoms fre- 
quent inclination  to  make  water,  excessive  pain  in 
voiding  it  drop  by  drop,  and  sometimes  a sudden  stop- 
page of  it,  if  discharged  in  a stream ; after  making  wa- 
ter, great  torture  in  the  glans  penis,  which  lasts  one, 
two,  or  three  minutes ; and,  in  most  constitutions,  the 
violent  straining  makes  the  rectum  contract  and  expel 
its  excrements ; or,  if  it  be  empty,  occasions  a tenes- 
mus, which  is  sometimes  accompanied  with  a prolap- 
sus ani.  The  urine  is  often  tinctured  with  blood,  from 
a rupture  of  the  vessels,  and  sometimes  pure  blood 
itself  is  discharged.  Sometimes  the  urine  is  very  clear, 
but  frequently  there  are  great  quantities  of  slimy  sedi- 
ment deposited  at  the  bottom  of  it,  which  is  only  a 
preternatural  separation  of  the  mucilage  of  the  bladder, 
but  has  often  been  mistaken  for  pus.  The  stone  is  a 
disease  to  which  both  sexes  and  all  ages  are  liable ; 
and  calculi  have  even  been  found  in  the  bladders  of 
very  young  children,  nay,  of  infants  only  six  months  old. 

Women  seem  less  subject  to  this  complaint  than 
men,  either  owing  to  constitutional  causes,  or  to  the 
capaciousness,  shortness,  and  straightness  of  their  ure- 
thra, allowing  the  calculi  to  be  discharged  while  small, 
together  with  the  urine. 

The  Seat  and  Physical  Properties  of  Urinary  Calculi. 

Calculi  are  found  in  different  parts  of  the  urinaiy 
system,  in  the  pelvis  of  the  kidney,  in  the  ureters,  in 
the  bladder  and  urethra ; but  as  they,  for  the  most 
part,  originate  in  the  kidney,  the  calculi  renales  make 
the  nucleus  of  the  greatest  number  of  urinary  stones. 
The  calculi  renales  differ  greatly  with  respect  to  their 
external  qualities ; for  the  most  part,  however,  they 
consist  of  small,  concrete,  roundish,  smooth,  glossy, 
and  crystalline  bodies,  of  a red-yellow  colour,  like  that 
of  wood,  and  so  hard  as  to  admit  of  polishing.  On 
account  of  their  minuteness,  they  easily  pass  through 
the  urinary  passages  in  form  of  gravel,  which  being 
sometimes  of  a rough  surface,  cause  several  com- 
plaints on  their  passage.  But  in  some  instances  they 
are  of  too  great  a size  to  be  able  to  pass  along  the  ure- 
ters ; in  which  case  they  increase  in  the  kidneys,  some- 
times to  a great  size.  Calculi  renales  of  this  kind  are 
generally  of  a brown,  dark  red,  or  black  colour,  and 
surrounded  with  several  strata  of  coagulated  blood  and 
pus  ; they  have  also  been  observed  of  a yellow,  red- 
dish, and  lighter  colour;  and  some  consisting  of  a 
homogeneous  stony  mass,  but  white  or  gray  calculi 
renales  are  very  rarely  to  be  met  with.  Among  the 
great  number  that  were  examined,  one  or  two  only 
were  found  of  a gray  or  blackish  colour,  and  of  a com- 
position similar  to  those  which  generally  bear  the  name 
of  mulberry-like  stones. 

164 


The  stones  in  the  ureters , which,  on  passing  into  the 
, ureters,  are  prevented  by  their  size  from  descending 
into  the  bladder,  frequently  increase  very  much:  they, 
however,  rarely  occur;  their  colour  is  white,  and 
they  consist  of  phosphate  of  lime. 

The  stones  in  the  bladder  are  the  most  frequent 
urinary  concrements  that  have  been  principally  exa- 
mined ; they  draw  their  first  origin  from  the  kidneys, 
whence  they  descend  into  the  bladder,  where  they  in- 
crease ; or  they  immediately  originate  and  increase  in 
the  bladder  ; or  they  arise  from  a foreign  body  that  by 
chance  has  got  into  the  bladder,  which  not  unfre- 
quently  happens,  particularly  in  the  female  sex.  Con- 
cretions of  this  kind  differ  greatly  in  their  respective 
physical  qualities  and  external  form,  which,  however, 
is  generally  spherical,  oval,  or  compressed  on  both 
sides ; and  sometimes,  when  there  are  several  stones 
in  the  bladder,  they  have  a polyhedrous  or  cubical 
form ; their  extremities  are  frequently  pointed  or 
roundish,  but  they  are  very  seldom  found  cylindrical, 
and  more  rarely  with  cylindrical  ends. 

There  is  a great  variety  in  the  size  of  the  calculi, 
and  likewise  in  their  colour,  which  is  materially  dif- 
ferent, according  to  their  respective  nature  and  com- 
position. They  occur,  1.  of  a yellowish  colour,  ap- 
proaching nearly  to  red,  or  brown;  such  stones  consist 
of  lithic  acid.  2.  Gray,  or  more  or  less  white ; these 
stones  always  contain  phosphates  of  earths.  3.  Dark 
gray,  or  blackish;  stones  of  this  colour  have  oxalates 
of  earths.  Many  stones  show  brown  or  gray  spots,  on 
a yellow  or  white  ground,  generally  raised  on  the  sur- 
face, and  consisting  of  oxalate'of  lime,  which  is  en- 
closed in  lithic  acid,  when  the  ground  colour  of  the 
stone  is  of  a wood  colour,  or  in  phosphate  of  lime, 
when  it  is  white.  These  spots  are,  in  general,  only 
to  be  observed  in  the  middle  of  the  stone,  or  at  one  of 
its  extremities. 

All  that  is  here  stated,  is  the  result  of  observations 
on  more  tiffin  GOO  calculi ; and  different  other  colours, 
that  are  said  to  have  been  observed,  either  arise  from 
heterogeneous  substances,  or  are  merely  variations  of 
the  above  colours.  Their  surface  is  smooth  and  po- 
lished in  some ; in  others,  only  smooth ; and  in  others 
uneven,  and  covered  with  rough  or  smooth  corpuscles, 
which  are  always  of  a yellow  colour ; in  some,  the 
surface  is  partly  smooth  and  partly  rough.  The  white 
ones  are  frequently  even  and  smooth,  half  transparent, 
and  covered  with  shining  crystals,  that  generally  indi- 
cate phosphate  of  ammonia,  with  magnesia ; or  they 
are  faint,  and  consist  of  minute  grains ; or  rough,  in 
which  case  they  consist  of  phosphate  of  lime.  The 
brown  and  dark  gray  stones  are,  from  their  simi- 
larity to  mulberries,  called  mulberry-stones,  and  being 
frequently  very  rugged,  they  cause  the  most  pain 
of  all. 

On  examining  the  specific  weight  of  urinary  calculi 
in  more  than  500  specimens,  it  was  found  to  be,  in  the 
lightest,  as  1213.1000,  in  the  heaviest,  as  1976.1000. 
Their  smell  is  partly  strong,  like  urine  or  ammonia, 
partly  insipid,  and  terreous ; especially  the  white 
ones,  which  are  like  sawed  ivory,  or  rasped  bone. 

The  internal  texture  of  calculi  is  but  seldom  guessed 
from  their  external  appearance,  particularly  when 
they  exceed  the  size  of  a pigeon's  egg.  On  breaking 
them,  they  generally  separate  into  two  or  three  strata, 
more  or  less  thick  and  even,  which  prove  that  they 
are  formed  by  different  precipitations,  at  different 
times.  In  the  middle,  a nucleus  is  generally  seen,  of 
the  same  mass  as  the  rest.  When  the  place  they  are 
broken  at  is  finely  streaked,  and  of  a yellow  or  reddish 
colour,  the  lithic  acid  predominates;  but  when  they 
are  half  transparent,  luminous  like  spar,  they  have 
ammoniacal  phosphate  of  magnesia  in  them,  and 
phosphate  of  lime,  and  then  they  are  brittle  and  fria- 
ble ; but  when  they  are  so  hard  as  to  resist  the  instru- 
ment, of  a smooth  surface,  and  a smell  like  ivory, 
they  contain  oxalate  of  lime.  It  frequently  happens, 
that  the  exterior  stratum  consists  of  white  phosphate 
of  earth,  while  the  nucleus  is  yellow  lithic  acid,  or 
oxalate  of  lime,  covered  sometimes  with  a yellow 
stratum  of  lithic  acid,  in  which  case  the  nucleus  ap- 
pears radiant ; but  when  it  consists  of  lithic  acid,  and 
is  covered  with  white  phosphate  of  earth,  it  is  round 
ish,  oval,  and  somewhat  crooked.  These  concretions 
have  very  seldom  three  strata ; namely,  on  the  outside 
a phosphate,  towards  the  inside  lithic  acid,  and  quite 
; withinside  an  oxalate  of  lime ; but  still  rarer  these 


CAL 

substances  occur  in  more  strata,  or  in  another  order,  as 
before-mentioned. 

Stones  of  the  urethra  are  seldom  generated  in  the 
urethra  itself ; however,  there  are  instances  of  their 
having  been  formed  in  the  fossa  navicularis,  by  means 
of  foreign  bodies  that  have  got  into  the  urethra.  We 
also  very  frequently  observe  stony  concrements  depo- 
sited between  the  glans  and  prepuce.  All  the  concre- 
tions produced  in  the  inside  and  outside  the  urethra 
consist  of  phosphate  of  earths,  which  are  easily  pre- 
cipitated from  the  urine.  There  are  likewise  stones 
in  the  urethra  which  have  come  out  of  the  bladder, 
having  been  produced  there,  or  in  the  kidneys ; and 
they  generally  possess  the  properties  of  stones  of  the 
kidneys. 

The  different  constituents  of  Urinary  Calculi. 

“ If  we  except  Scheele’s  original  observation  con- 
cerning the  uric  or  lithic  acid,  all  the  discoveries  re- 
lating to  urinary  concretions  are  due  to  Dr.  Wollaston; 
discoveries  so  curious  and  important,  as  alone  are  suf- 
ficient to  entitle  him  to  the  admiration  and  gratitude 
of  mankind.  They  have  been  fully  verified  by  the 
subsequent  researches  of  Fourcroy,  Vauquelin,  and 
Brande,  Drs.  Henry,  Marcet,  and  Prout.  Dr.  Marcet, 
in  his  late  valuable  essay  on  the  chemical  history  and 
medical  treatment  of  calculous  disorders,  arranges  the 
concretions  into  nine  species. 

1.  The  lithic  acid  calculus. 

2.  The  ammonia-magnesian  phosphate  calculus. 

3.  The  bone  earth  calculus,  or  phosphate  of  lime. 

4.  The  fusible  calculus,  a mixture  of  the  2d  and  3d 
species. 

5.  The  mulberry  calculus,  or  oxalate  of  lime. 

6.  The  cystic  calculus;  cystic  oxide  of  Dr.  Wol- 
laston. 

7.  The  alternating  calculus,  composed  of  alternate 
layers  of  different  species. 

8.  The  compound  calculus,  whose  ingredients  are  so 
intimately  mixed,  as  to  be  separable  only  by  chemical 
analysis. 

9.  Calculus  from  the  prostate  gland,  which,  by  Dr. 
Wollaston’s  researches,  is  proved  to  be  phosphate  of 
lime,  not  distinctly  stratified,  and  tinged  by  the  secre- 
tion of  the  prostate  gland. 

To  the  above  Dr.  Marcet  has  added  two  new  sub- 
species. The  first  seems  to  have  some  resemblance  to 
the  cystic  oxide,  but  it  possesses  also  some  marks  of 
distinction.  It  forms  a bright  lemon  yellow  residuum 
on  evaporating  its  nitric  acid  solution,  and  is  com- 
posed of  laminte.  But  the  cystic  oxide  is  not  laminated, 
and  it  leaves  a white  residuum  from  the  nitric  acid 
solution.  Though  they  are  both  soluble  in  acids  as 
well  as  alkalies,  yet  the  oxide  is  more  so  in  acids  than 
the  new  calculus,  which  has  been  called  by  Dr.  Marcet, 
from  its  yellow  residuum,  zanthic  oxide.  Dr.  Marcet’s 
other  new  calculus  was  found  to  possess  the  properties 
of  the  fibrin  of  the  blood,  of  which  it  seems  to  be  a 
deposite.  He  terms  it  fibrinous  calculus, 
i Species  1.  Uric  acid  calculi.  Dr.  Henry  says,  in  his 
instructive  paper  on  urinary  and  other  morbid  con- 
cretions, read  before  the  Medical  Society  of  London, 
March  2,  1819,  that  it  has  never  yet  occurred  to  him  to 
examine  calculi  composed  of  this  acid  in  a state  of  abso- 
lute purity.  They  contain  about  9-10ths  of  the  pure 
acid,  along  with  urea,  and  an  animal  matter  which  is 
not  gelatin,  but  of  an  albuminous  nature.  This  must 
not,  however,  be  regarded  as  a cement.  The  calculus 
is  aggregated  by  the  cohesive  attraction  of  the  lithic 
acid  itself.  The  colour  of  lithic  acid  calculi  is  yellow- 
ish or  reddish-brown,  resembling  the  appearance  of 
wood.  They  have  commonly  a smooth,  polished  sur- 
face, a lamellar  or  radiated  structure,  and  consist  of 
fine  particles  well  compacted.  Their  specific  gravity 
varies  from  1.3  to  1.8.  They  dissolve  in  alkaline 
ilixivia,  without  evolving  an  amrponiacal  odour,  and 
exhale  the  smell  of  horn  before  the  blowpipe.  The 
relative  frequency  of  lithic  acid  calculi  will  be  seen 
from  the  following  statement.  Of  150  examined  by 
Mr.  Brande,  16  were  composed  wholly  of  this  acid, 
and  almost  all  contained  more  or  less  of  it.  Fourcroy 
and  Vauquelin  found  it  in  tlie  greater  number  of  500 
which  they  analyzed.  All  those  examined  by  Scheele 
consisted  of  it  alone ; and  300  analyzed  by  Dr.  Pearson, 
contained  it  in  greater  or  smaller  proportion.  Accord- 
ing to  Dr.  Henry’s  experience,  it  constitutes  10  urinary 
concretions  out  of  26,  exclusive  of  the  alternating  caf- 
culi.  And  Mr.  Brande  lately  states,  that  out  of  58 


CAL 

cases  of  kidney  calculi,  51  were  lithic  acid,  6 oxalic 
and  1 cystic. 

Species  2.  Ammonia-magnesian  phosphate.  This 
calculus  is  white  like  chalk,  is  friable  between  the 
fingers,  is  often  covered  with  dog-tooth  crystals,  and 
contains«  semi-crystalline  layers.  It  is'  insoluble  in 
alkalies,  but  soluble  in  nitric,  muriatic,  and  acetic 
acids.  According  to  Dr.  Henry,  the  earthy  phosphates, 
comprehending  the  2d  and  3d  species,  were  to  the 
whole  number  of  concretions,  in  the  ratio  of  10  to  85. 
Mr.  Brande  justly  observes,  in  the  16th  number  of  his 
Journal,  that  the  urine  has  at  all  times  a tendency  t© 
deposite  the  triple  phosphate  upon  any  body  over 
which  it  passes.  Hence  drains  by  which  urine  is  car- 
ried off,  are  often  incrusted  with  its  regular  crystals ; 
and  in  cases  where  extraneous  bodies  have  got  into  the 
bladder,  they  have  often  in  a very  short  time  become 
considerably  enlarged  by  deposition  of  the  same  sub- 
stance. When  this  calculus,  or  those  incrusted  with 
its  semi-crystalline  particles,  are  strongly  heated  before 
the  blowpipe,  ammonia  is  evolved,  and  an  imperfect 
fusion  takes  place.  When  a little  of  the  calcareous 
phosphate  is  present,  however,  the  concretion  readily 
fuses.  Calculi  composed  entirely  of  the  ammonia- 
magnesian  phosphate  are  very  rare.  Mr.  Brande  has 
seen  only  two.  They  were  crystallized  upon  the  sur- 
face, and  their  fracture  was  somewhat  foliated.  In 
its  pure  state,  it  is  even  rare  as  an  incrustation.  The 
powder  of  the  ammonia-phosphate  calculus  has  a 
brilliant  white  colour,  a faint  sweetish  taste,  and  is 
somewhat  soluble  in  water.  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin 
suppose  the  above  deposites  to  result  from  incipient 
putrefaction  of  urine  in  the  bladder.  It  is  certain  that 
the  triple  phosphate  is  copiously  precipitated  from 
urine  in  such  circumstances  out  of  the  body. 

Species  3.  The  bone  earth  calculus.  Its  surface,  ac- 
cording to  Dr.  Wollaston,  is  generally  pale  brown, 
smooth,  and  when  sawed  through  it  appears  of  a lami- 
nated texture,  easily  separable  into  concentric  crusts. 
Sometimes,  also,  each  lamina  is  striated  in  a direction 
perpendicular  to  the  surface,  as  from  an  assemblage  of 
crystalline  needles.  It  is  difficult  to  fuse  this  calculus 
by  the  blowpipe,  but  it  dissolves  readily  in  dilute  mu 
riatic  acid,  from  which  it  is  precipitable  by  ammonia. 
This  species,  as  described  by  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin, 
was  white,  without  lustre,  friable,  staining  the  hands, 
paper,  and  cloth.  It  had  much  of  a chalky  appear- 
ance, and  broke  under  the  forceps,  and  was  intimately 
mixed  with  a gelatinous  matter,  which  is  left  in  a 
membraneous  form,  when  the  earthy  salt  is  withdrawn 
by  dilute  muriatic  acid.  Dr.  Henry  says,  that  he  has 
never  been  able  to  recognise  a calculus  of  pure  phos- 
phate of  lime  in  any  of  the  collections  which  he  has 
examined ; nor  did  he  ever  find  the  preceding  species  in 
a pure  state,  though  a calculus  in  Mr.  White’s  collec- 
tion contained  more  than  90  per  cent,  of  ammonia- 
magnesian  phosphate. 

Species  4.  The  fusible  calculus.  This  is  a very  friable 
concretion,  of  a white  colour,  resembling  chalk  in  ap- 
pdarance  and  texture  ; it  often  breaks  into  layers,  and 
exhibits  a glittering  appearance  internally,  from  inter- 
mixture of  the  crystals  of  triple  phosphate.  Sp.  grav. 
from  1.14  to  1.47.  Soluble  in  dilute  muriatic  and  nitric 
acids,  but  not  in  alkaline  lixivia.  The  nucleus  is  ge- 
nerally lithic  acid.  In  4 instances  only  out  of  187.  did 
Dr.  Henry  find  the  calculus  composed  throughout  of 
the  earthy  phosphates.  The  analysis  of  fusible  calcu- 
lus is  easily  performed  by  distilled  vinegar,  which  at  a 
gentle  heat  dissolves  the  ammonia-magnesian  phos- 
phate, but  not  the  phosphate  of  lime ; the  latter  may 
be  taken  up  by  dilute  muriatic  acid.  The  lithic  acid 
present  will  remain,  and  may  be  recognised  by  its  so- 
lubility in  the  water  of  pure  potassa  or  soda.  Or  the 
lithic  acid  may,  in  the  first  instance,  be  removed  by 
the  alkali,  which  expels  the  ammonia,  and  leaves  the 
phosphate  of  magnesia  and  lime. 

Species  5.  The  mulberry  calculus.  Its  surface  is 
rough  and  tuberculated  ; colour  deep  reddish-brown. 
Sometimes  it  is  pale  brown,  of  a crystalline  texture, 
and  covered  with  flat  octahedral  crystals.  This  cal- 
culus has  commonly  the  density  and  hardness  of  ivory, 
a sp.  grav.  from  1.4  to  1.98,  and  exhales  the  odour  of 
semen  when  sawed.  A moderate  red  heat  converts  it 
into  carbonate  of  lime.  It  does  not  dissolve  in  alka- 
line lixivia,  but  slowly  and  with  difficulty  in  acids. 
When  the  oxalate  of  lime  is  voided  directly  after 
leaving  the  kidney,  it  is  of  a grayish-brown  colour. 


CAL 


CAL 


composed  of  small  cohering  spherules,  sometimes 
with  a polished  surface  resembling  hempseed.  They 
are  easily  recognised  by  their  insolubility  in  muriatic 
acid,  and  their  swelling  up  and  passing  into  pure  lime 
before  the  blowpipe.  Mulberry  calculi  contain  always 
an  admixture  of  other  substances  besides  oxalate  of 
lime.  These  are,  uric  acid,  phosphate  of  lime,  and 
animal  matter  in  dark  flocculi.  The  colouring  matter 
of  these  calculi  is  probably  effused  blood.  Dr.  Henry 
rates  the  frequency  of  this  species  at  1 in  17  of  the 
whole  which  he  has  compared ; and  out  of  187  calculi, 
he  found  that  17  were  formed  round  nuclei  of  oxalate 
of  lime. 

Species  6.  The  cystic-oxide  calculus.  It  resem- 
bles a little  the  triple  phosphate,  or  more  exactly  mag- 
nesian limestone.  It  is  somewhat  tough  when  cut,  and 

as  a peculiar  greasy  lustre.  Its  usual  colour  is  pale 
brown,  bordering  on  straw  yellow ; and  its  texture  is 
irregularly  crystalline.  It  unites  in  solution  with 
acids  and  alkalies,  crystallizing  with  both.  Alkohol 
precipitates  it  with  nitric  acid.  It  does  not  become 
red  with  nitric  acid ; and  it  has  no  effect  upon  vegetable 
blues.  Neither  water,  alkohol,  nor  ether  dissolves  it. 
It  is  decomposed  by  heat  into  carbonate  of  ammonia 
and  oil,  leaving  a minute  residuum  of  phosphate  of 
lime.  This  concretion  is  of  very  rare  occurrence. 
Dr.  Henry  states  its  frequency  to  the  whole  as  10  to 
885.  In  two  which  he  examined,  the  nucleus  was  the 
same  substance  with  the  rest  of  the  concretion ; and 
in  a third,  the  nucleus  of  a uric  acid  calculus  was  a 
small  spherule  of  cystic  oxide.  Hence,  as  Dr.  Marcet 
has  remarked,  this  oxide  appears  to  be  in  reality  the 
production  of  the  kidneys,  and  not,  as  its  name  would 
import,  to  be  generated  in  the  bladder.  It  might  be 
called  with  propriety  renal  oxide,  if  its  eminent  dis- 
coverer should  think  fit. 

Species  7.  The  alternating  calculus.  The  surface 
of  this  calculus  is  usually  white  like  chalk,  and  fria- 
ble or  semicrystalline,  according  as  the  exterior  coat  is 
the  calcareous  or  ammonia-magnesian  phosphate. 
They  are  frequently  of  a large  size,  and  contain  a nu- 
cleus of  lithic  acid.  Sometimes  the  two  phosphates 
form  alternate  layers  round  the  nucleus.  The  above 
are  the  most  common  alternating  calculi;  next  are 
those  of  oxalate  of  lime  with  phosphates ; then  oxa- 
late of  lime  with  lithic  acid;  and  lastly,  those  in  which 
the  three  substances  alternate.  The  alternating,  taken 
all  together,  occur  in  10  oat  of  25,  in  Dr.  Henry’s  list; 
lithic»acid  with  phosphates,  as  16  to  48 ; the  oxalate  of 
lime  w'ith  phosphates,  as  10  to  116;  the  oxalate  of 
lime  with  lithic  acid,  as  10  to  170;  the  oxalate  of  lime 
with  lithic  acid  and  phosphates,  as  10  to  265. 

Species  8.  The  compound  calculus.  This  consists 
of  a mixture  of  lithic  acid  with  the  phosphates  in 
variable  proportions,  and  is  consequently  variable  in 
its  appearance.  Sometimes  the  alternating  layers  are 
so  thin  as  to  be  undistinguishable  by  the  eye,  when 
their  nature  can  be  determined  only  by  chemical 
analysis.  This  species,  in  Dr.  Henry’s  list,  forms  10 
in  235.  About  l-40th  of  the  calculi  examined  by 
Fourcroy  and  Vauqueiin  were  compound. 

Species  9 has  been  already  described. 

In  almost  all  calculi,  a central  nucleus  may  be  dis- 
covered, sufficiently  small  to  have  descended  through 
the  ureters  into  the  bladder.  The  disease  of  stone  is 
to  be  considered,  therefore,  essentially  and  originally 
as  belonging  to  the  kidneys.  Its  increase  in  the  blad- 
der may  be  occasioned,  either  by  exposure  to  urine 
that  contains  an  excess  of  the  same  ingredient  as  that 
composing  the  nucleus,  in  which  case  it  will  be  uni- 
formly constituted  throughout ; or  if  the  morbid  nu- 
cleus deposite  should  cease,  the  concretion  will  then 
acquire  a coating  of  the  earthy  phosphates.  It  becomes, 
therefore,  highly  important  to  ascertain  the  nature  of 
the  most  predominate  nucleus.  Out  of  187  calculi 
examined  by  Dr.  Henry,  17  were  formed  round  nuclei 
of  oxalate  of  lime  ; 3 round  nuclei  of  cystic  oxide ; 4 
round  nuclei  of  the  earthy  phosphates ; 2 round  extra- 
neous substances;  and  in  3 the  nucleus  was  replaced 
by  a small  cavity,  occasioned,  probably,  by  the  shrink- 
ing of  some  .animal  matter,  round  which  the  ingre- 
dients of  the  calculi  (fusible)  had  been  deposited.  Ilau 
has  shown  by  experiment,  that  pus  may  form  the 
nucleus  of  a urinary  concretion.  The  remaining  158 
calculi  of  Dr.  Henry’s  list,  had  central  nuclei  composed 
chiefly  of  lithic  acid.  It  appears  also,  that  in  a very 
great  majority  of  the  cases  referred  to  by  him,  the  dis- 
166 


position  to  secrete  an  excess  of  lithic  acid  has  been  tfta 
essential  cause  of  the  origin  of  stone.  Hence  it  be- 
comes a matter  of  great  importance  to  inquire,  what 
are  the  circumstances  which  contribute  to  its  excessive 
production,  and  to  ascertain  by  what  plan  of  diet  and 
medicine  this  morbid  action  of  the  kidney  may  best 
be  obviated  or  removed.  A calculus  in  Mr.  White’s 
collection  had  for  its  nucleus  a fragment  of  a bougie, 
that  had  slipped  into  the  bladder.  It  belonged  to  the 
fusible  species,  consisting  of, 

20  phosphate  of  lime, 

60  ammonia-magnesian  phosphate, 

10  lithic  acid, 

10  animal  matter. 

100 

In  some  instances,  though  these  are  comparatively 
very  few,  a morbid  secretion  of  the  earthy  phosphates 
in  excess,  is  the  cause  of  the  formation  of  stone.  Dr. 
Henry  relates  the  case  of  a gentleman,  who,  during 
paroxysms  of  gravel,  preceded  by  severe  sickness  and 
vomiting,  voided  urine  as  opaque  as  milk,  which  depo- 
sited a great  quantity  of  ah  impalpable  powder,  con- 
sisting of  the  calcareous  and  triple  phosphate  in  nearly 
equal  proportions.  The  weight  of  the  body  was  rapidly 
reduced  from  188  to  100  pounds,  apparently  by  the  ab- 
straction of  the  earth  of  his  bones;  for  there  was  no 
emaciation  of  the  muscles  corresponding  to  the  above 
diminution. 

The  first  rational  views  on  the  treatment  of  calcu- 
lous disorders,  were  given  by  Dr.  Wollaston.  These 
have  been  followed  up  lately  by  some  very  judicious 
observations  of  Mr.  Brande,  in  the  12th,  15th,  and  16th 
numbers  of  his  Journal ; and  also  by  Dr.  Marcet,  in 
his  excellent  treatise  already  referred  to.  Of  the  many 
substances  contained  in  human  urine,  there  are  rarely 
more  than  three  which  constitute  gravel ; viz.  calca- 
reous phosphate,  ammonia-magnesian  phosphate,  and 
lithic  acid.  The  former  two  form  a white  sediment ; 
the  latter,  a red  or  brown.  The  urine  is  always  an 
acidulous  secretion.  Since  by  this  excess  of  acid,  the 
earthy  salts,  or  white  matter,  are  held  in  solution, 
whatever  disorder  of  the  system,  or  impropriety  of 
food  and  medicine,  diminishes  that  acid  excess,  fa- 
vours the  formation  of  the  white  deposite.  The  in- 
ternal use  of  acids  was  shown  by  Dr.  Wollaston  to  be 
the  appropriate  remedy  in  this  case. 

White  gravel  is  frequently  symptomatic  of  disor- 
dered digestion,  arising  from  excess  in  eating  or  drink- 
ing ; and  it  is  often  produced  by  too  farinaceous  a diet. 
It  is  also  occasioned  by  the  indiscreet  use  of  magnesia, 
soda  water,  or  alkaline  medicines  in  general.  Medical 
practitioners,  as  well  as  their  patients,  ignorant  of 
chemistry,  have  often  committed  fatal  mistakes,  by 
considering  the  white  gravel,  passed  on  the  admini- 
stration of  alkaline  medicines,  as  the  dissolution  of 
the  calculus  itself ; and  have  hence  pushed  a practice, 
which  has  rapidly  increased  the  size  of  tlie^  stone. 
Magnesia,  in  many  cases,  acts  more  injuriously  than 
alkali,  in  precipitating  insoluble  phosphate  from  the 
urine.  The  acids  of  urine,  which,  by  their  excess, 
hold  the  earths  in  solution,  are  the  phosphoric,  lithic, 
and  carbonic.  Mr.  Brande  has  uniformly  obtained  the 
latter  acid,  by  placing  urine  under  an  exhausted  re- 
ceiver; and  he  has  formed  carbonate  of  barytes,  by 
dropping  barytes  water  into  urine  recently  voided. 

The  appearance  of  white  sand  does  not  seem  de- 
serving of  much  attention,  where  it  is  merely  occa- 
sional, following  indigestion  brought  on  by  an  acci- 
dental excess.  B«t  if  it  invariably  follows  meals,  and 
if  it  be  observed  in  the  urine,  not  as  a mere  deposite, 
but  at  the  time  the  last  drops  are  voided,  it  becomes  a 
matter  of  importance,  as  the  forerunner  of  other  and 
serious  forms  of  the  disorder.  It  has  been  sometimes 
viewed  as  the  effect  of  irritable  bladder,  where  it  w as 
in  reality  the  cause.  Acids  are  the  proper  remedy, 
and  unless  some  peculiar  tonic  effect  be  sought  for  in 
sulphuric  acid,  the  vegetable  acids  ought  to  be  prefer- 
red. Tartar,  or  its  acid,  may  be  prescribed  with  ad- 
vantage, but  the  best  medicine  is  citric  acid,  in  daily 
doses  front  5 to  30  grains.  Persons  returning  from 
warm  climates,  with  dyspeptic  and  hepatic  disorders, 
often  void  this  white  gravel,  for  which  they  have  re- 
course to  empyrical  solvents,  for  the  most  part  alka 
line,  and  are  deeply  injured.  They  ought  to  adopt  an 
acidulous  diet,  abstaining  from  soda  water,  alkalies, 
malt  liquor,  madeira,  and  port ; to  eat  salads,  with  acid 


CAL 


CAL 


fruits  ; and  if  habit  requires  it,  a glass  of  cider,  cham- 
pagne, or  claret,  but  the  less  of  these  fermented  liquors 
the  better.  An  effervescing  draught  is  often  very  bene- 
ficial, made  by  dissolving  3U  grains  of  bicarbonate  of 
potassa,  and  20  of  citric  acid,  in  separate  teacups  of 
water,  mixing  the  solution  in  a large  tumbler,  and 
drinking  the  whole  during  the  effervescence.  This  dose 
may  be  repeated  3 or  4 times  a-day.  The  carbonic 
acid  of  the  above  medicine  enters  the  circulation,  and 
passing  off  by  the  bladder,  is  useful  in  retaining,  par- 
ticularly, the  triple  phosphate  in  solution,  as  was  first 
pointed  out  by  Dr.  Wollaston.  The  bowels  should  be 
kept  regular  by  medicine  and  moderate  exercise.  The 
febrile  affections  of  children  are  frequently  attended 
by  an  apparently  formidable  deposite  of  white  sand  in 
the  urine.  A dose  of  calomel  will  generally  carry  off 
both  the  fever  and  the  sand.  Air,  exercise,  bark,  bit- 
ters, mineral  tonics,  are  in  like  manner  often  success- 
ful in  removing  the  urinary  complaints  of  grown-up 
persons. 

In  considering  the  red  gravel,  it  is  necessary  to  dis- 
tinguish between  those  cases  in  which  the  sand  is 
actually  voided,  and  those  in  which  it  is  deposited, 
after  some  hours,  from  originally  limpid  urine.  In 
the  first,  the  sabulous  appearance  is  an  alarming  indi- 
cation of  a tendency  to  form  calculi ; in  the  second,  it 
is  often  merely  a fleeting  symptom  of  indigestion. 
Should  it  frequently  recur,  howoyer,  it  is  not  to  be  dis- 
regarded. 

Bicarbonate  of  potassa  or  soda  is  the  proper  remedy 
for  the  red  sand,  or  lithic  acid  deposite.  The  alkali 
may  often  he  beneficially  combined  with  opium.  Am- 
monia, or  its  crystallised  carbonate,  may  be  resorted 
to  with  advantage,  where  symptoms  of  indigestion  are 
brought  on  by  the  other  alkalies  ; and  particularly  in 
red  gravel  connected  with  gout,  in  which  the  joints  and 
kidneys  are  affected  by  turns.  Where  potassa  and 
soda  have  been  so  long  employed  as  to  disagree  with 
the  stomach,  to  create  nausea,  flatulency,  a sense  of 
weight,  pain,  and  other  symptoms  of  indigestion,  mag- 
nesia may  be  prescribed  with  the  best  effects.  The 
tendency  which  it  has  to  accumulate  in  dangerous 
quantities  in  the  intestines,  and  to  form  a white  sedi- 
ment in  urine,  calls  on  the  practitioner  to  look  mi- 
nutely after  its  administration.  It  should  be  occasion- 
ally alternated  with  other  laxative  medicines.  Mag- 
nesia dissolved  in  carbonic  acid,  as  Mr.  Scheweppe 
used  to  prepare  it  many  years  ago,  by  the  direction  of 
Mr.  Braude,  is  an  elegant  form  of  exhibiting  this 
remedy. 

Care  must  be  had  not  to  push  the  alkaline  medicines 
too  far,  lest  they  give  rise  to  the  deposition  of  earthy 
phosphates  in  the  urine. 

Cases  occur  in  which  the  sabulous  deposile  consists 
of  a mixture  of  lithic  acid  with  the  phosphates.  The 
sediment  of  urine  in  inflammatory  disorders  is  some- 
times of  this  nature ; and  of  those  persons  who  habitu- 
ally indulge  in  excess  of  wine;  as  also  of  those  who, 
labouring  under  hepatic  affections,  secrete  much  albu- 
men in  their  urine.  Purges,  tonics,  and  nitric  acid, 
which  is  the  solvent  of  both  the  above  sabulous  mat- 
ters, are  the  appropriate  remedies.  The  best  diet  for 
patients  labouring  under  the  lithic  deposite,  is  a vege- 
table. Dr.  Wollaston’s  flue  observation,  that  the  ex- 
crement of  birds  fed  solely  upon  animal  matter,  is  in  a 
great  measure  lithic  acid,  and  the  curious  fact  since 
ascertained,  that  the  excrement  of  the  boa  constrictor, 
fed  also  entirely  on  animals,  is  pure  lithic  acid,  concur 
in  gj  ving  force  to  the  above  dietetic  prescription.  A 
week’s  abstinence  from  animal  loq^fias  been  known 
to  relieve  a fit  of  lithic  acid  gravel,  vyhere  the  alkalies 
were  of  little  avail.  But  we  must  not  carry  the  vege- 
table system  so  far  as  to  produce  flatulency  and  indi- 
gestion. 

Such  are  the  principal  circumstances  connected 
with  the  disease  of  gravel  in  its  incipient  or  sabulous 
state.  The  calculi  formed  in  the  kidneys  are,  as  we 
have  said  above,  either  lithic,  oxalic,  or  cystic;  and 
very  rarely  indeed  of  the  phosphate  species.  An 
aqueous  regimen,  moderate  exercise  on  horseback, 
when  not  accompanied  with  much  irritation,  cold 
bathing,  and  mild  aperients,  along  with  the  appropriate 
ch  mical  medicines,  must  be  prescribed  in  kidney 
cases.  These  are  particularly  requisite  immediately 
after  acute  pain  in  the  region  of  the  ureter,  and  in- 
flammatory symptoms  have  led  to  the  belief  that,  a 
nucleus  has  descended  ipto  the  bladder.  Purges, ^diu- 


retics, and  diluents,  ought  to  be  liberally  enjoined. 
A large  quantity  of  mucus  streaked  with  blood,  or  of 
a purulent  aspect,  and  haemorrhagy,  are  frequent 
symptoms  of  the  passage  of  the  stone  into  the  bladder. 

When  a stone  has  once  lodged  in  the  bladder,  and 
increased  there  to  such  a size  as  no  longer  to  be  capa- 
ble of  passing  through  the  urethra,  it  is  generally 
allowed  by  all  who  have  candidly  considered  the  sub- 
ject, and  who  are  qualified  by  experience  to  be  judges, 
that  the  stone  can  never  again  be  dissolved;  and 
although  it  is  possible  that  it  may  become  so  loosened 
in  its  texture  as  to  he  voided  piecemeal,  or  gradually 
to  crumble  away,  the  event  is  so  rare  as  to  be  bareiy 
probable. 

By  examining  collections  of  calculi  we  learn,  that 
in  by  far  the  greater  number  of  cases,  a nucleus  of 
lithic  acid  is  enveloped  in  a crust  of  the  phosphates. 
Our  endeavours  must  therefore  be  directed  towards 
reducing  the  excess  of  hthic  acid  in  the  urine  to  its 
natural  standard  ; or,  on  the  other  hand,  to  lessen  the 
tendency  to  the  deposition  of  the  phosphates.  The 
urine  must  be  submitted  to  chemical  examination,  and 
a suitable  course  of  diet  and  medicines  prescribed. 
But  the  chemical  remedies  must  be  regulated  nicely, 
so  as  to  hit  the  happy  equilibrium,  in  which  no  deposite 
will  be  formed.  Here  is  a powerful  call  on  the  physi- 
cians and  surgeons  to  make  themselves  thoroughly 
versant  in  chemical  science ; for  they  will  otherwise 
commit  the  most  dangerous  blunders  in  calculous 
complaints. 

‘ The  idea  of  dissolving  a calculus  of  uric  acid  in 
the  bladder,  by  the  internal  use  of  the  caustic  alkalies,’ 
says  Mr.  Brande,  ‘ appears  too  absurd  to  merit  serious 
refutation.’  In  respect  to  the  phosphates,  it  seems 
possible,  by  keeping  up  an  unusual  acidity  in  the 
urine,  so  far  to  soften  a crust  of  the  calculus,  as  to 
make  it  crumble  down,  or  admit  of  being  abraded  by 
the  sound ; but  this  is  the  utmost  that  can  be  looked 
for  ; and  the  lithic  nucleus  will  still  remain.  1 These 
considerations,’  adds  Mr.  Brande,  ‘independent  of 
more  urgent  reasons,  show  the  futility  of  attempting 
the  solution  of  a stone  of  the  bladder  by  the  injection 
of  acid  and  alkaline  solutions.  In  respect  to  the  alka- 
lies, if  sufficiently  strong  to  act  upon  the  uric  crust  of 
the  calculus,  they  would  certainly  injure  the  coats  of 
the  bladder;  they  would  otherwise  become  inactive 
by  combination  with  the  acids  of  the  urine,  and  they 
would  form  a dangerous  precipitate  from  the  same 
cause.’ — ‘ It  therefore  appears  to  me,  that  Fourcroy 
and  others,  who  have  advised  the  plan  of  injection, 
have  thought  little  of  all  these  obstacles  to  success, 
and  have  regarded  the  bladder  as  a lifeless  receptacle, 
into  which,  as  into  an  India  rubber  bottle,  almost  any 
solvent  might  be  injected  with  impunity.’ — Journal 
of  Science , vol.  viii.  p.  216. 

It  does  not  appear  that  the  peculiarities  of  water  in 
different  districts,  have  any  influence  upon  the  pro- 
duction of  calculous  disorders.  Dr.  Wollaston’s  dis- 
covery of  the  analogy  between  urinary  and  gouty  con- 
cretions has  led  to  the  trial  in  gravel  of  the  vinum  col- 
c/iici,  the  specific  for  gout.  By  a note  to  Mr.  Brande’s 
dissertation  we  learn,  that  benefit  has  been  derived 
from  it  in  a case  of  red  gravel. 

Dr.  Henry  confirms  the  above  precepts  in  the  follow- 
ing decided  language.  ‘ These  cases,  and  others  of 
the  same  kind,  which  I think  it  unnecessary  to  men- 
tion, tend  to  discourage  all  attempts  to  dissolve  a stone 
supposed  to  consist  of  uric  acid,  after  it  has  attained 
considerable  size  in  the  bladder ; all  that  can  be  effected 
under  such  circumstances  by  alkaline  medicines  ap- 
pears, as  Mr.  Brande  has  remarked,  to  be  the  preci- 
pitating upon  it  a coating  of  the  earthy  phosphates 
from  the  urine,  a sort  of  concretion  which,  as  has 
been  observed  by  various  practical  writers,  increases 
much  more  rapidly  than  that  consisting  of  uric  acid 
only.  The  same  unfavourable  inference  may  he 
drawn  also  from  the  dissections  of  those  persons  in 
whom  a stone  was  supposed  to  be  dissolved  by  alka- 
line medicines ; for  in  these  instances  it  has  been 
found  either  encysted,  or  placed  out  of  the  reach  of 
the  sound  by  an  enlargement  of  the  prostate  gland.’ 

The  urinary  calculus  of  a dog,  examined  by  Dr. 
Pearson,  was  found  to  consist  principally  of  the  phos- 
phates of  lime  and  ammonia,  with  animal  matter. 
Several  taken  from  horses,  were  of  a similar  composi- 
tion. One  of  a rabbit  consisted  chiefly  of  carbonate 
offline  and  animal  matter,  with  perhaps  a little  phos 


CAL  ' 


CAL 


phoric  acid.  A quantity  of  sabulous  matter,  neither 
crystallized  nor  concrete,  is  sometimes  found  in  the 
bladder  of  the  horse : in  one  instance  there  were  nearly 
45  pounds.  These  appear  to  consist  of  carbonate  of 
lime  and  animal  matter.  A calculus  of  a cat  gave 
Fourcroy  three  parts  of  carbonate,  and  one  of  the 
phosphate  of  lime.  That  of  a pig,  according  to  Ber- 
tholiet,  was  phosphate  of  lime. 

The  renal  calculus  in  man  appears  to  be  of  the  same 
nature  as  the  urinary.  In  that  of  the  horse,  Fourcroy 
found  3 parts  of  carbonate,  and  one  of  phosphate  of 
lime.  Dr.  Pearson,  in  one  instance,  carbonate  of  lime, 
and  animal  matter ; in  two  others,  phosphates  of  lime 
and  ammonia,  with  animal  matter. 

Arthritic  calculi,  or  those  formed  in  the  joints  of 
gouty  persons,  were  once  supposed  to  be  carbonate  of 
lime,  whence  they  were  called  chalkstones;  afterward 
it  was  supposed  that  they  were  phosphate  of  lime  ; but 
Dr.  Wollaston  has  shown  that  they  are  lithate  of  soda. 
The  calculi  found  sometimes  in  the  pineal,  prostate, 
salivary,  and  bronchial  glands,  in  the  pancreas,  in  the 
corpora  cavernosa  penis,  and  between  the  muscles,  as 
well  as  the  tartar,  as  it  is  called,  that  incrusts  the 
teeth,  appear  to  be  phosphate  of  lime.  Dr.  Crompton, 
however,  examined  a calculus  taken  from  the  lungs 
of  a deceased  soldier,  which  consisted  of  lime  45,  car- 
bonic acid  37,  albumen  and  water  18.  It  was  very 
hard,  irregularly  spheroidal,  and  measured  about 
inches  in-  circumference. 

It  has  been  observed,  that  the  lithic  acid,  which 
constitutes  the  chief  part  of  most  human  urinary  cal- 
culi, and  abounds  in  the  arthritic,  has  been  found  in 
no  phytivorous  animal ; and  hence  has  been  deduced 
a practical  inference,  that  abstinence  from  animal  food 
would  prevent  their  formation.  But  we  are  inclined 
to  think  this  conclusion  too  hasty.  The  cat  is  carni- 
vorous; but  it  appeared  above,  that  the  calculus  of 
that  animal  is  equally  destitute  of  iithic  acid.  If,  there- 
fore, we  would  form  any  deduction  with  respect  to 
regimen,  wre  must  look  for  something  used  by  man, 
exclusively  of  all  other  animals  ; and  this  is  obviously 
found  in  fermented  liquors,  but  apparently  in  nothing 
else : and  this  practical  inference  is  sanctioned  by  the 
most  respectable  medical  authorities. 

The  following  valuable  criteria  of  the  different 
kinds  of  urinary  calculi,  have  been  given  by  M.  Ber- 
zelius in  his  treatise  on  the  use  of  the  blowpipe : 

‘1.  We  may  recognise  calculi  formed  of  uric  acid , 
from  their  being  carbonized  and  smoking  with  an  ani- 
mal odour,  when  heated  by  themselves  on  charcoal  or 
platinum-foil.  They  dwindle  away  at  the  blowpipe 
flame.  Towards  the  end,  they  burn  with  an  increase 
of  light;  and  leave  a small  quantity  of  very  white 
alkaline  ashes. 

‘ To  distinguish  these  concretions  from  otlier  sub- 
stances, which  ccmport  themselves  in  the  above  man- 
ner, we  must  try  a portion  of  the  calculus  by  the  humid 
way.  Thus  a tenth  of  a grain  of  this  calculus  being 
put  on  a thin  plate  of  glass  or  platinum,  along  with  a 
drop  of  nitric  acid,  we  must  heat  it  at  the  flame  of  the 
lamp.  The  uric  acid  dissolves  with  effervescence. 
The  matter,  w hen  dried  with  precaution  to  prevent  it 
from  charring,  is  obtained  in  a fine  red  colour.  If  the 
calculus  contains  but  little  uric  acid,  the  substance 
sometimes  blackens  by  this  process.  We  must  then 
take  a new  portion  of  the  concretion,  and  after  having 
dissolved  it  in  nitric  acid,  remove  it  from  the  heat : 
the  solution,  when  nearly  dry,  is  to  be  allowed  to  cool 
and  become  dry.  We  then  expose  it,  sticking  to  its 
support,  to  the  wrarm  vapour  of  caustic  ammonia. 
(From  water  of  ammonia  heated  in  a tea-spoon.)  This 
ammoniacal  vapour  developes  a beautiful  red  colour  in 
it  We  may  alsp  moisten  the  dried  matter  w ith  a little 
weak  water  of  ammonia. 

‘ If  the  concretions  are  a mixture  of  uric  acid  and 
earthy  phosphate,  they  carbonize  and  consume  like 
the  above,  but  their  residuum  is  more  bulky  ; it  is  not 
alkaline,  nor  soluble  in  water.  They  exhibit  with 
nitric  acid  and  ammonia,  the  fine  red  colour  of  uric 
acid.  Their  ashes  contain  phosphate  of  lime,  or  of 
lime  and  magnesia. 

‘ 2.  The  calculi  of  urate  of  soda  are  hardly  met  with 
except  in  the  concretions  round  the  articulations  of 
gouty  patients.  When  heated  alone  upon  charcoal, 
they  blacken,  exhaling  an  empyreumatic  animal  odour ; 
they  are  with  difficulty  reduced  into  ashes,  which  are 
strongly  alkaline,  and  are  capable  of  vitrifying  silica. 


When  there  are  earthy  salts  (phosphates)  in  these 
concretions,  they  afford  a whitish  or  opaque  gray  glass. 

‘ 3.  The  calculi  of  urate  of  ammonia  comport  them- 
selves at  the  blowpipe  like  those  of  uric  acid.  A drop 
of  caustic  potassa  makes  them  exhale,  at  a moderate 
heat,  much  ammonia.  We  must  not  confound  this 
odour  with  the  slight  ammoniaco-lixivial  smell,  which 
[>otassa  disengages  from  the  greater  part  of  animal 
substances.  Urate  of  soda  is  likewise  found  in  these 
calculi. 

‘ 4.  Calculi  of  phosphate  of  lime.  They  blacken, 
with  the  exhalation  of  an  empyreumatic  animal  odour, 
without  melting  of  themselves  at  the  blowpipe,  but 
whiten  into  an  evident  calcareous  phosphate.  With 
soda  they  swell  up  without  vitrifying.  Dissolved  in 
boracic  acid,  and  fused  along  with  a little  iron,  they 
yield  a bead  of  phosphuret  of  iron. 

l5.  Calculi  of  ammoniaco-magnesian  phosphate , 
heated  alone  on  a plate  of  platinum,  exhale  the  empy 
reumatic  animal  odour,  at  the  same  time  blackening, 
swelling  up,  and  becoming  finally  grayish  white.  A 
kind  of  grayish-white  enamel  is  in  this  manner  ob- 
tained. With  borax  they  melt  into  a glass,  which  is 
transparent,  or  which  becomes  of  a milky-white  on 
cooling  Soda  in  small  quantity  causes  them  to  fuse 
into  a frothy  white  slag;  a larger  quantity  of  soda 
makes  them  infusible.  They  yield,  with  iron  and  bo- 
racic acid,  a bead  of  phosphuret  of  iron  ; with  nitrate 
of  cobalt,  a glass  of  a deep  red  or  brown.  If  salts  of 
lime  exist  in  these  concretions,  the  mixture  of  them 
is  less  fusible. 

‘ 6.  Calculi  of  oxalate  of  lime , exposed  to  the  blow- 
pipe, exhale  at  first  the  urinous  smell ; they  become 
first  of  a dull  colour  at  the  flame,  and  afterward  their 
colour  brightens.  What  remains  after  h moderate 
ignition,  effervesces  with  nitric  acid.  After  a smart 
jet  of  the  flame,  there  remains  quicklime  on  the  char- 
coal, which  reacts  like  an  alkali  on  the  colour  of  lit- 
mus, wild  mallow  flower,  or  cabbage,  and  slakes  wTith 
water.  But  this  does  not  happen  when  the  residuum 
consists  of  calcareous  phosphate. 

‘ 7.  The  siliceous  calculus , heated  alone,  leaves  sub- 
coriaceous  or  infusible  ashes.  Treated  with  a little 
soda,  these  dissolve  with  effervescence,  but  slowly, 
leaving  a bead  of  glass  of  a gray  colour,  or  of  little 
transparency. 

‘ 8.  Lastly,  the  cystic  oxyde  calculi  afford  nearly  the 
same  results  as  uric  acid  at  the  blowpipe.  Thev  rea- 
dily take  fire,  burning  with  a bluish  green  flame,  with- 
out melting,  with  the  disengagement  of  a lively  and 
very  peculiar  acid  odour,  which  has  some  affinity  to 
that  of  cyanogen.  Their  ashes,  w’bich  are  not  alka- 
line, redissolve  by  a jet  of  the  flame,  into  a grayish- 
white  mass.  They  do  not  yield  a red  colour  in  their 
treatment  with  nitric  acid,  like  the  uric  acid  concre- 
tions.’ ” 

The  Causes  of  the  Generation  of  Urinary  Calculi. 

To  inquire  into  the  causes  by  which  urinary’  con- 
cretions are  produced,  is  both  interesting  and  useful, 
however  attended  w’ith  the  greatest  difficulties.  The 
writings  of  medical  authors  are  full  of  conjectures  and 
hypotheses  with  regard  to  this  subject,  on  which  no- 
thing could  be  ascertained  before  we  had  acquired  an 
accurate  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  urinary  concre- 
tions. It  is  owing  to  this  circumstance  that  the  most 
enlightened  physicians  acquiesced  in  ascribing  the  im- 
mediate cause  of  them  to  a superabundance  of  terre- 
ous  matter  in  the  urine ; and  Boerhaave,  as  well  as, 
particularly,  Van  Swieten,  imagined  that  the  urine 
of  all  men  contained  calculous  matter  in  the  natural 
state,  and  that,  for  the  generation  of  stones,  a nucleus 
was  only  required,  to  attract  it.  That  this  may  be  the 
case,  in  some  instances,  is  proved  by  frequent  experi- 
ence ; but  stones  produced  by  foreign  bodies,  that  have 
accidentally  got  into  the  urethra  or  bladder,  are 
always  white,  and  composed  of  phosphates  of  earths, 
and  seldom  or  never  covered  with  lithic  acid,  a sub- 
stance which  is  observed  to  form  the  stones  that  most 
frequently  occur;  but  even  in  these  the  nucleus  con- 
sists of  a substance  formed  in  the  body  itself,  as  a par- 
ticle descended  from  the  kidneys,  &c.  which  must, 
therefore,  have  necessarily  driginated  in  a peculiar  in- 
ternal cause.  A superabundance  of  uric  acid  in  stony 
patients,  and  its  more  copious  generation  than  in  a 
sound  state,  though  it  seems  to  be  one  of  the  principal 
and  most  certain  causes,  is  by  no  means  satisfactory, 
l as  it  only  explains  the  precipitation  of  stony  matt er 


CAL 


from  the  urine,  but  not  why  it  unites  in  strata.  A 
coagulating  substance  is  required  for  separating, 
attracting,  and,  as  it  were,  agglutinating  the  condensi- 
ble particles  that  are  precipitated.  This  substance  is 
undoubtedly  the  animal  matter  which  we  have  con- 
stantly found  in  all  calculous  masses,  and  which  seems 
to  constitute  the  basiS’of  stones,  like  the  membraneous 
gelatina  that  of  bones.  It  is  known  that  the  urine  of 
calculous  patients  is  generally  muddy,  ductile,  in 
threads,  slimy,  and  as  if  mixed  with  albumen,  which 
quality  it  obtains  at  the  moment  when  the  ammonia 
is  disengaged,  or  on  the  addition  of  potassa  that  sepa- 
rates it  from  the  acid  in  which  it  was  dissolved  ; and 
in  all  cases  of  superabundance  of  lLthic  acid  the  urine 
contains  a great  quantity  of  that  animal  matter,  which 
promotes  the  precipitation  of  it,  and  attracts,  and 
unites  the  particles  thus  separated.  Hence  it  appears, 
that  every  thing  capable  of  increasing  the  quantity  of 
that  pituitous  gluten  in  the  urine,  may  be  considered 
as  the  remote  cause  of  the  formation  of  calculi.  And 
the  old  ideas  on  pituitous  temperaments,  or  supera- 
bundant pituita,  & c.  which  were  thought  to  dispose 
people  to  a calculus,  seem  to  be  connected  with  the 
late  discoveries  on  the  nature  of  urinary  stones. 
Though  the  animal  matter  appears  to  be  different  in 
different  calculi,  yet  it  is  certain,  that  every  calculous 
substance  contains  an  animal  gluten,  from  which  its 
concrete  and  solid  state  arises;  whence  we  may  fairly 
state  the  superabundance  of  that  substance  as  the  chief 
and  principal  cause  of  the  formation  of  calculi. 

There  are,  however,  other  causes  which  seem  to 
have  a particular  influence  on  the  nature  of  urinary 
stones,  and  the  strata  in  which  they  are  formed ; but 
it  is  extremely  difficult  to  penetrate  and  to  explain 
them.  We  are,  for  instance,  entirely  ignorant  of  the 
manner  in  which  urinary  stones  are  formed  from  the 
oxalate  of  lime ; though,  from  their  occurring  more 
frequently  in  children  than  in  adults,  we  might  be  en- 
titled to  ascribe  them  to  a disposition  to  acor,  a cause 
considered  by  Boerhaave  as  the  general  source  of  a 
great  number  of  diseases  incident  to  the  infantile  age. 
This  opinion  seems  to  be  proved  by  the  ideas  of  Bon- 
homme,  physician  at  Avignon,  on  the  oxalic  or  saccha- 
ric acid,  as  the  cause  of  mollities  ossium  in  the  rickets ; 
by  this  acid  being  discovered  in  a species  of  saliva  by 
Brugnatelli ; and,  lastly,  by  an  observation  of  Turgais, 
who  found  this  acid  in  the  urine  of  a child  diseased 
with  worms.  We  but  rarely  observe  saccharic  acid 
in  the  human  body,  which  appears  to  be  mostly  ad- 
ventitious, and  by  which  the  animal  matter  is  rendered 
coagulable,  and  deposited,  #r  precipitated,  with  the 
oxalate  of  lime ; or  the  oxalic  acid  decomposes  the 
phosphate  of  lime,  and  forms  an  insoluble  combina- 
tion, incapable  of  being  any  longer  kept  dissolved  in  the 
urine.  It  is,  however,  extremely  difficult  to  determine 
how  far  the  constitution  of  the  body  is  connected  with 
that  particular  disposition  in  the  urine,  of  precipi- 
tating sometimes  phosphate  of  lime  mixed  with  oxalate 
of  lime,  sometimes  phosphate  of  ammoniacal  magne- 
sia, either  by  itself  or  mixed  with  lithic  acid,  &c.  &c. 
Who  can  explain  the  reason  why,  of  COO  stones,  there 
were  only  two  in  which  siliceous  earth  could  be  traced  ? 
Still  more  difficult  is  it  to  explain  the  causes  why  the 
above  substances  precipitate  either  at  once  or  in  differ- 
ent strata;  but  it  may  suffice  to  have  shown  how 
many  observations  and  experiments  are  required,  and 
what  accurate  attention  and  perseverance  are  neces- 
sary, in  order  to  throw  light  on  so  difficult  a subject. 

The  means  to  be  employed  in  calculous  complaints 
must  vary  according  to  circumstances.  Permanent 
relief  can  be  obtained  only  by  the  removal  of  the  mor- 
bid concretion  : and  where  this  is  of  too  large  a size  to 
be  passed  by  the  natural  outlet,  the  operation  of  litho- 
tomy becomes  necessary.  Various  remedies  indeed 
have  been  proposed  as  capable  of  dissolving  urinary 
calculi ; and  some  of  them  are  certainly  useful  in  pal- 
liating the  symptoms,  and  perhaps  preventing  the 
formation  of  fresh  calculous  matter:  but  experience 
has  not  sanctioned  their  efficacy  as  actual  lithontrip- 
tics ; and  by  delaying  the  operation,  we  not  only  incur 
the  risk  of  organic  disease  being  produced,  but  the  con- 
cretion may  also  become  friable  externally,  so  as  to  be 
with  more  difficulty  removed.  Sometimes,  however, 
the  advanced  age  of  the  patient,  the  complication  with 
organic  disease,  or  the  exhausted  state  of  the  system, 
may  render  an  operation  inexpedient ; or  he  may  not 
be  willing  to  submit  to  it ; we  shall  then  And  some  ad- 


* CAL 

vantage  from  the  use  of  chemical  remedies,  according 
to  the  morbid  quality  of  the  urine ; that  is  generally 
from  alkaline  or  earthy  preparations,  where  a red  de~ 
posite  appears,  and  from  acids  where  there  is  a white 
sediment.  Tonic  medicines  may  also  be  useful,  and 
some  of  the  mild  astringents,  especially  uva  ursi,  and 
occasional  narcotics,  where  violent  pain  attends : 
sometimes  an  inflammatory  tendency  may  require 
fomentations,  the  local  abstraction  of  blood,  and  other 
antiphlogistic  measures.  The  most  likely  plan  of  effect- 
ing a solution  of  the  calculus  must  certainly  be  that 
proposed  by  Fourcroy,  namely,  injet^ng  . suitable 
liquids  into  the  bladder.  The  most  common  calculi, 
containing  uric  acid,  are  readily  soluble  in  a solution 
of  potassa,  or  sodafweak  enough  to  be  held  in  the 
mouth,  or  even  swallowed  without  inconvenience ; 
those  which  consist  of  phosphoric  acid  neutralized  by 
lime,  or  other  base,  the  next  in  frequency,  dissolve  in 
nitric  or  muriatic  acid  of  no  greater  strength  ; the  most 
rare  variety,  made  up  mostly  of  oxalate  of  lime,  may 
be  dissolved,  but  very  slowly,  in  nitric  acid,  or  solu- 
tions of  the  fixed  alkaline  carbonates,  weak  enough 
not  to  irritate  the  bladder.  However,  it  is  not  easy  to 
ascertain  which  of  these  solvents  is  proper  in  a parti- 
cular case,  for  most  calculi  are  not  uniform  through- 
out, owing  probably  to  the  urine  having  varied  during 
their  formation,  so  that  the  examination  of  this  secre- 
tion will  not  certainly  indicate  the  injection  required. 
The  plan  recommended,  therefore,  is,  the  bladder 
having  been  evacuated,  and  washed  out  with  tepid 
water,  to  inject  first  the  alkaline  solution,  heated  to 
the  temperature  of  the  body,  and  direct  it  to  be  retain- 
ed for  half  an  hour,  or  longer,  if  the  person  can  bear 
it;  then,  to  the  liquor  voided  and  filtered,  add  a little 
muriatic  acid,  which  will  cause  a white  precipitate,  if 
there  be  any  uric  acid  dissolved ; and  so  long  as  this 
happens,  the  same  injection  should  be  used,  otherwise 
diluted  muriatic  acid  is  to  be  thrown  in,  and  ammonia 
added  to  it  when  discharged  ; whereby  phosphate  of 
lime,  if  there  be  any,  is  precipitated  : and  when  nei- 
ther of  these  succeeds,  diluted  nitric  acid  is  to  be  tried ; 
in  each  case  varying  the  injection  from  time  to  time, 
as  that  previously  used  loses  its  efficacy.  However, 
there  appears  one  source  of  error  in  this  method; 
namely,  that  the  urine  secreted,  while  the  liquid  is 
retained,  may  give  rise  to  a precipitate,  though  none 
of  the  calculus  may  have  been  dissolved ; it  would 
therefore  be  proper  to  examine  the  urine  previously,  as 
well  as  occasionally  during  the  use  of  injections,  and, 
if  necessary,  correct  its  quality  by  the  exhibition  of 
proper  internal  medicines.  See  Lithontriptics  and 
Lithotomy. 

Calculus  biliaris.  See  Gall-stone. 

CALDA'RIUM.  (From  caZeo,  to  make  hot.)  A 
vessel  in  the  baths  of  the  ancients,  to  hold  hot  water. 

CALEFA'CIENT.  ( Calefaciens ; from  calidus, 
warm,  and  facio , to  make.)  A medicine,  or  other 
substance,  which  excites  a degree  of  warmth  in  the 
parts  to  which  it  is  applied : as  piper , spiritus  vini , 
&c.  They  belong  to  the  class  of  stimulants. 

CALE'NDULA.  ( Quad,  singulis  calendis , i.  e. 
mensibusy  florescat ; so  called  because  it  flowers  every 
month.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
ntean  system.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Poly  garni  a 
necessaria. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  single  marigold. 
See  Calendula  officinalis. 

Calendula  alpxna.  The  mountain  arnica.  See 
Arnica  montana. 

Calendula  arvensis.  The  wild  marigold.  See 
Caltha  palustris. 

Calendula  officinalis.  The  garden  marigold 
Calendula  sativa;  Chrysanthemum;  Sponsa  sotis ; 
Caltha  vulgaris.  The  flowers  and  leaves  of  this 
plant,  Calendula : — seminibus  cymbiformibus , muri- 
catis , incurvatis  omnibus , of  Linnaeus,  have  been  ex- 
hibited medicinally:  the  former,  as  aperients  in  ute- 
rine obstructions  and  icteric  disorders,  and  as  diapho- 
retics in  exanthematous  fevers ; the  latter,  as  gentle 
aperients,  and  to  promote  the  secretions  in  general. 

Calendula  palustris.  Common  single  marsh- 
marigold.  See  Caltha  palustris. 

CA  LENTURE.  A febrile  delirium,  said  to  be  pe- 
culiar to  sailors,  wherein  they  imagine  the  sea  to  be 
green  fields,  and  will  throw  themselves  into  it  if  not 
restrained.  Bonetus,  Dr.  Oliver,  and  Dr.  Stubbs,  give 
an  account  of  it.  • 

l*i9 


CAL 


CAL 


Cale'sium.  The  Indian  name  of  a tree  which 
grows  in  Malabar,  the  bark  of  which  made  into  an 
ointment  with  butter,  cures  convulsions  from  wounds, 
and  heals  ulcers.  The  juice  of  the  bark  cures  the 
aphthae,  and,  taken  inwardly,  the  dysentery. — Ray. 

Calf's  snout.  See  Antirrhinum. 

Ca  li.  (Arabian.)  The  same  as  kali. 

Calicha'pa.  The  white-thorn. 

CA'LIDUS.  In  medical  language,  it  is  commonly 
used  for  animal  heat,  or  the  vis  vitae  • thus,  calidum 
animule  innatum.  , 

Calid.®  ju.ant^e.  (From  calor,  neat.)  Plants 
that  are  natives  of  warm  climates. 

Calie'ta.  (From  KaXiys,  a nest,  which  it  some- 
what resembles.)  Calliette.  A fungus  growing  on 
the  juniper-tree. 

CALI'GO.  ( Caligo , ginis.  fern.)  A disease  of  the 
eye,  known  by  diminished  or  destroyed  sight ; and  by 
the  interposition  of  a dark  body  between  the  object 
and  the  retina.  It  is  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the  class 
Locales , and  order  dysesthesia.  The  species  of  ca- 
ligo are  distinguished  according  to  the  situation  of 
the  interposed  body : thus  caligo  lends,  caligo  coma , 
caligo  pupilla , caligo  humorum , and  caligo  palpe- 
brarum. 

Caliha'cha.  The  cassia-lignea,  or  cassia-tree  of 
Malabar. 

Cali'mia.  The  lapis  calaminaris. 

CA'LIX.  ( Calix , ids.  in. ; from  KoXvitJoi,  to  cover.) 
See  Calyx. 

Call.'e'um.  (From  KaXXuvw,  to  adorn.)  Callceon. 
The  gills  of  a cock,  which  Galen  says,  is  food  not  to 
be  praised  or  condemned. 

Calle'na.  A kind  of  saltpetre. 

Ca'lli.  Nodes  in  the  gout. — Galen. 

Ca'llia.  (From  KaXos,  beautiful.)  A name  of  the 
chamomile. 

Calliblk'phara.  (From  KaXos,  good,  and  fiXecpa- 
pov,  the  eyelid.)  Medicines,  or  compositions,  appro- 
priated to  the  eyelids. 

CALLICO'CCA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnfean  system.  Class,  Pentandria , Order, 
Monogynia.  

Callicocca  ipecacuanha.  The  plant  from  which 
ipecacuan  root  is  obtained  was  long  unknown ; it  was 
said  by  some  writers  to  be  the  Psychotria  emetica  ■ 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia;  by  others,  the 
Viola  ipecacuanha , a syngenesious  plant  of  the  order 
Monogynia.  It  is  now  ascertained  to  be  neither,  but 
a small  plant  called  Callicocca  ipecacuanha.  There 
are  three  sorts  of  ipecacuan  to  be  met  with  in  our 
shops,  viz.  the  ash-coloured  or  gray,  the  brown,  and 
the  white. 

The  ash-coloured  is  brought  from  Peru,  and  is  a small 
wrinkled  root,  bent  and  contorted  into  a great  variety 
of  figures,  brought  over  in  short  pieces,  full  of  wrinkles, 
and  deep  circular  fissures,  down  to  a small  white 
woody  fibre  that  runs  in  the  middle  of  each  piece : 
the  cortical  part  is  compact,  brittle,  looks  smooth  and 
resinous  upon  breaking : it  has  very  little  smell ; the 
taste  is  bitterish  and  subacrid,  covering  the  tongue,  as 
it  were,  with  a kind  of  mucilage. 

The  brown  is  small,  somewhat  more  wrinkled  than 
the  foregoing;  of  a brown  or  blackish  colour  without, 
and  white  within;  this  is  brought  from  Brazil. 

The  white  sort  is  woody,  and  has  no  wrinkles,  nor 
any  perceptible  bitterness  in  taste.  The  first,  the  ash- 
coloured  or  gray  ipecacuan,  is  that  usually  preferred 
for  medicinal  use.  The  brown  has  been  sometimes 
observed,  even  in  a small  dose,  to  produce  violent 
effects.  The  white,  though  taken  in  a large  one,  has 
scarcely  any  effect  at  all.  Experience  has  proved  that 
this  medicine  is  the  safest  emetic  with  which  we  are 
acquainted,  having  this  peculiar  advantage,  that,  if  it 
does  not  operate  by  vomit,  it  readily  passes  off  by  the 
other  emunctories.  Ipecacuan  was  first  introduced  as 
an  infallible  remedy  against  dysenteries,  and  other  in- 
veterate fluxes,  as  diarrhoea,  menorrhagia,  leucorrhoea, 
See.  and  also  in  disorders  proceeding  from  obstructions 
of  long  standing;  nor  has  it  lost  much  of  its  reputation 
by  time : its  utility  in  these  cases  is  thought  to  de- 
pend upon  its  restoring  perspiration.  It  has  also  been 
successfully  employed  in  spasmodic  asthma,  catarrhal 
and  consumptive  cases.  Nevertheless,  its  chief  use  is 
as  a vomit,  and  in  small  doses,  joined  with  opium,  as  a 
diaphoretic.  The  officinal  preparations  are  the pulvis 
ipecacuanha  compositus,  and  the  vmum  ipecacuanha, 
■tin 


Calli  creas.  (From  KaXos,  good,  and  Kpcas,  meat ; 
so  named  from  its  delicacy  as  food.)  Sweet-bread. 
See  Pancreas. 

Calli'gonum.  (From  KaXos,  beautiful,  and  yovo, 
a knot,  or  joint;  so  named  from  its  being  handsomely 
jointed,  like  a cane.)  The  polygonum,  or  knot-grass. 

Callioma'rchus.  The  Gaullio  name,  in  Marcellus 
Empiricus,  of  colt’s-foot. 

Ca'llion.  A kind  of  night-shade 

Calliphy'llum.  From  KaXXos,  beauty,  and  rpvX- 
Xov,  a leaf.)  See  Adianthum. 

Callistru'thia.  (From  KaXos,  good,  and  $ -pvOos,  a 
sparrow ; because  it  was  said  to  fatten  sparrows.)  A 
fig  mentioned  by  Pliny,  of  a good  taste. 

CALLITRI'CHE.  (From  k aXXos,  beauty,  and 
$pt£,  hair ; so  named  because  it  has  the  appearance  of 
long,  beautiful  hair ; or,  according  to  Littleton,  be 
cause  it  nourishes  the  hair,  and  makes  it  beautiful.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linncean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Monandria;  Order,  Digyhia.  Water 
star  wort.  Water  chickweed. 

2.  The  herb  maidenhair.  See  Adianthum. 

CALLO'NE.  (From  KaXos,  fair.)  Hippocrates 
used  this  word,  to  signify  that  decency  and  gravity 
of  character  and  deportment  which  it  is  necessary  that 
all  medical  men  should  be  possessed  of. 

CALLO'SITAS.  Callosity,  or  preternatural  hard- 
ness. 

CALLOSITY.  Caltositas.  Hardness. 

CALLOSUS.  Hard.  Applied  in  surgery  to  parts 
which  are  morbidly  hard ; and,  in  botany,  to  seeds 
which  are  hard  ; as  those  of  the  Citrus  medica. 

CA'LLOUS.  Callosus.  Hardened  or  indurated; 
as  the  callous  edges  of  ulcers. 

CA'LLUS.  ( Callus , i.  m. ; and  Callum,  i.  n.)  1. 
The  bony  matter  deposited  between  the  divided  ends 
of  broken  bones,  about  the  fourteenth  day  after  the 
fracture.  It  is  in  reality  nothing  more  than  the  new 
ossific  substance  formed  by  a process  of  nature,  very 
similar  to  the  grou'th  of  any  other  part  of  the  body. 

2.  A preternatural  hardness,  or  induration,  of  any 
fleshy  part. 

3.  This  term  is  applied  in  Good’s  Nosology  to  that 
species  of  eephyma,  which  is  characterized  by  callous 
extuberant  thickening  of  the  cuticle ; insensible  to  the 
touch. 

Caloca'tancs.  (From  KaXos,  beautiful,  and  Ka'ja- 
vov,  a cup  ; so  called  from  the  beauty  of  its  flower  and 
shape.)  The  wild  poppy.  See  Papaver  rhaas. 

. CALO'MELAS.  (From  KaXos,  good,  and  peXas , 
black ; from  its  virtues  and  colour.)  1.  The  prepa- 
ration called  ASthiops  mineral,  or  hydrargyrus  cum 
sulphure,  was  formerly  so  named. 

2.  The  chloride  of  mercury.  See  Hydrargyri  sub- 
murias. 

CALO'RIC.  ( Caloricum ; from  calor , heat.) 

Heat;  Igneous  fluid. 

Heat  and  cold  are  perceptions  of  which  we  acquire 
the  ideas  from  the  senses;  they  indicate  only  a certain 
state  in  which  we  find  ourselves,  independent  of  an> 
exterior  object.  But  as  these  sensations  are  for  the 
most  part  produced  by  bodies  around  us,  we  consider 
them  as  causes,  and  judging  by  appearances,  we  apply 
the  terms  hot,  or  cold , to  the  substances  themselves ; 
calling  those  bodies  hot , which  produce  in  us  the  sen- 
sation of  heat,  and  those  cold , which  communicate  the 
contrary  sensation. 

This  ambiguity,  though  of  little  consequence  in  the 
common  affairs  of  human  life,  has  led  unavoidably  to 
confusion  and  perplexity  in  philosophical  discussions. 
It  was  to  prevent  this,  that  the  framers  of  the  new 
nomenclature  adopted  the  word  caloric , which  denotes 
that  which  produces  the  sensation  of  heat. 

Theories  of  Heat. 

Two  opinions  have  long  divided  the  philosophical 
world  concerning  the  nature  of  heat. 

1.  The  one  is  ; that  the  cause  which  produces  the 
sensation  of  heat,  is  a real,  or  distinct  substance,  uni- 
versally pervading  nature,  penetrating  the  particles  or 
pores  of  all  bodies,  with  more  or  less  facility,  and  in 
different  quantities. 

This  substance,  if  applied  to  our  system  in  a greater 
proportion  than  it  already  contains,  warms  it,  as  we 
call  it,  or  produces  the  sensation  of  heat ; and  hence  it 
has  been  called  caloric  or  calorific. 

2.  The  other  theory  concerning  heat  is ; that  the 
cause  which  produces  that  sensation  is  not  a separate 


CAL 


or  self-existing  substance ; but  that  it  is  merely  like 
gravity,  a property  of  matter ; and  that  it  consists  in  a 
specific  or  peculiar  motion,  or  vibration  of  the  particles 
of  bodies. 

The  arguments  in  favour  of  the  first  theory  have 
been  principally  deduced  from  the  evolution  and 
absorption  of  heat  during  chemical  combinations ; 
those  of  the  latter  are  chiefly  founded  on  the  produc- 
tion of  heat  by  friction  For  it  has  been  observed,  that 
whatever  is  capable  of  producing  motion  in  the  par- 
ticles of  any  mass  of  matter,  excites  heat.  Count 
Rumford  and  Professor  Davy  have  paid  uncommon 
attention  to  this  fact,  and  proved,  that  heat  continues 
to  be  evolved  from  a body  subjected  to  friction,  so  long 
as  it  is  applied,  and  the  texture  or  form  of  the  body 
not  altered. 

All  the  effects  of  heat,  according  to  this  theory,  de- 
pend therefore  entirely  upon  the  vibratory  motion  of 
the  particles  of  bodies.  According  as  this  is  more  or 
less  intense,  a higher  or  lower  temperature  is  produced ; 
and  as  it  predominates  over,  is  nearly  equal  or  inferior 
to  the  attraction  of  cohesion,  bodies  exist  in  the  gase- 
ous, fluid,  or  solid  state. 

Different  bodies  are  susceptible  of  it  in  different  de- 
grees, and  receive  and  communicate  it  with  difl'erent 
celerity.  From  the  generation,  communication,  and 
attraction  of  this  repulsive  motion,  under  these  laws, 
all  the  phenomena  ascribed  to  heat  are  explicable. 

Each  of  these  theories  has  been  supported  by  the 
most  able  philosophers,  and  given  occasion  to  the  most 
important  disputes  in  which  chemists  have  been  en- 
gaged: which  has  contributed  in  a very  particular 
manner  to  the  advancement  of  the  science.  The  ob- 
scurity of  the  subject,  however,  is  such,  that  both 
parties  have  been  able  to  advance  most  plausible 
arguments. 

Setting  aside  all  inquiries  concerning  the  merits  of 
these  different  doctrines,  we  shall  confine  ourselves  to 
the  general  effects  which  heat  produces  on  different 
bodies.  For  the  phenomena  which  heat  presents,  and 
their  relation  to  each  other,  may  be  investigated,  with 
sufficient  precision,  though  the  materiality,  or  imma- 
teriality of  it,  may  remain  unknown  to  us. 

Nature  of  Heat. 

Those  who  consider  heat  as  matter,  assert  that  caloric 
exists  in  two  states,  namely,  in  combination, or  at-liberty. 

In  the  first  state  it  is  not  sensible  to  our  organs,  nor 
indicated  by  the  thermometer;  it  forms  a constituent 
part  of  the  body ; but  it  may  be  brought  back  to  the 
state  of  sensible  heat.  In  this  state  it  affects  animals 
with  the  sensation  of  heat.  It  therefore  has  been 
called  sensible  or  free  heat,  or  fire ; and  is  synonymous 
with  uncombined  caloric,  thermometrical  caloric,  ca- 
loric of  temperature,  interposed  caloric,  &c.  expressions 
now  pretty  generally  superseded. 

From  the  diversity  of  opinions  among  chemists  re- 
specting the  nature  of  caloric,  several  other  expres- 
sions have  been  introduced,  which  it  is  proper  to 
notice.  For  instance,  by  specific  heat  is  understood, 
the  relatitive  quantities  of  caloric  contained  in  equal 
weights  of  different  bodies  at  the  same,  temperature. 
Latent  heat  is  the  expression  used  to  denote  that  quan- 
tity of  caloric  which  a body  absorbs  when  changing 
its  form.  It  is,  however,  more  properly  called  caloric 
of  fluidity.  The  disposition,  or  property,  by  which 
different  bodies  contain  certain  quantities  of  caloric, 
at  any  temperature,  is  termed  their  capacity  for  heat. 
By  the  expression  of  absolute  heat , is  understood  the 
whole  quantity  of  caloric  which  any  body  contains. 

Methods  of  exciting  and  collecting  Heat. 

Of  the  different  methods  of  exciting  heat,  the  fol- 
lowing are  the  most  usual : 

I.  Percussion  or  Collision.  This  method  of  pro- 
ducing heat  is  the  simplest,  and  therefore  it  is  gene- 
rally made  use  of  in  the  common  purposes  of  life  for 
obtaining  fire. 

When  a piece  of  hardened  steel  is  struck  with  a 
flint,  some  particles  of  the  metal  are  scraped  away 
from  the  mass,  and  so  violent  is  the  heat  which  fol- 
lows the  stroke,  that  it  melts  and  vitrifies  them.  If 
the  fragments  of  steel  are  caught  upon  paper,  and 
viewed  with  a microscope,  most  of  them  will  be  found 
perfect  spherules,  and  very  highly  polished.  Their 
sphericity  demonstrates  that  they  have  been  in  a fluid 
state,  and  the  polish  upon  their  surface,  shows  them 
to  be  vitrified. 

JVo  heat,  however  has  been  observed  to  follow  the 


CAS* 

percussion  of  liquids,  nor  of  the  softer  kind  of  bodia* 
which  yield  to  a slight  impulse. 

2.  Friction.  Heat  may  likewise  be  excited  by  mere 
friction.  This  practice  is  still  retained  in  some  parts 
of  the  world.  The  natives  of  New  Holland  are  said 
to  produce  fire  in  this  manner,  with  great  facility,  and 
spread  it  in  a wonderful  manner.  For  that  purpose, 
they  take  two  pieces  of  dry  wood;  one  is  a stick, 
about  eight  or  nine  inches  long,  and  the  other  piece  is 
flat ; the  stick  they  bring  to  an  obtuse  point  at  one  end, 
and  pressing  it  upon  the  other  piece,  they  turn  it  very 
nimbly,  by  holding  it  between  both  hands,  as  we  do  a 
chocolate-mill,  often  shifting  their  hands  up,  and  then 
moving  down  upon  it,  in  order  to  increase  the  pressure 
as  much  as  possible.  By  this  method  they  get  fire  in 
a few  minutes,  and  from  the  smallest  spark  they 
increase  it  with  great  speed  and  dexterity. 

If  the  irons  at  the  axis  of  a coach-wheel  are  applied 
to  each  other,  without  the  interposition  of  some  unc- 
tuous matter  to  keep  them  from  immediate  contact, 
they  wili  become  so  hot  when  the  carriage  runs  swiftly 
along,  as  to  set  the  wood, on  fire  ; and  the  lore-wheels, 
being  smallest,  and  making  most  revolutions  in  a given 
time,  will  be  most  in  danger. 

The  same  will  happen  to  mill-work,  or  to  any  other 
machinery. 

It  is  no  uncommon  practice  in  this  country,  for 
blacksmiths  to  use  a plate  of  iron  as  an  extemporane- 
ous substitute  for  a tinder-box;  for  it  may  be  ham- 
mered on  an  anvil  till  it  becomes  red-hot,  and  will  fire 
a brimstone  match.  A strong  man  who  strikes  quick, 
and  keeps  turning  the  i/on  so  that  both  sides  may  be 
equally  exposed  to  the  force  oF  the  hammer,  will  per 
form  this  in  less  time  than  would  be  expected. 

If,  in  the  coldest  season,  one  dense  iron  plate  be  laid 
on  another,  and  pressed  together  by  a weight,  and  then 
rubbed  upon  each  other  by  reciprocal  motions,  they 
will  gradually  grow  so  hot  as,  in  a short  time,  to  emit 
sparks,  and  at  last  become  ignited. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  substances  should  be  very 
hard ; a cord  rubbed  backwards  and  forwards  swiftly 
against  a post  or  a tree  wiil  take  fire. 

Count  Rumford  and  Professor  Pictet  have  made 
some  very  ingenious  and  valuable  experiments  con- 
cerning the  heat  evolved  by  friction. 

3.  Chemical  diction.  To  this  belongs  the  heat  pro- 
duced by  combustion.  There  are,  besides  this,  many 
chemical  processes  wherein  rapid  chemical  action 
takes  place,  accompanied  with  a developement  of  heat, 
or  fire,  and  flame. 

4.  Solar  heat.  It  is  well  known  that  the  solar  rays, 
when  collected  by  a mirror,  or  lens,  into  a focus,  pro- 
duce the  most  astonishing  effects. 

Dr.  Herschel  has  discovered  that  there  are  rays 
emitted  from  the  sun,  which  have  not  the  power  ol 
illuminating  or  producing  vision:  and  that  these  are 
the  rays  which  produce  the  heat  of  the  solar  light. 

Consequently,  heat  is  emitted  from  the  sun  in  rays, 
but  these  rays  are  not  the  same  with  the  rays  ol  light. 

5.  The  Electric  Spark,  and  Galvanism.  The  effects 
of  electricity  are  two  well  known  in  this  point  of 
view  to  need  any  description. 

Galvanism  has  of  late  become  a powerful  instrument 
for  the  purpose  of  exciting  heat.  Not  only  easily  in- 
flammable substances,  such  as  phosphorus,  sulphur, 
&c.  have  been  fired,  but  likewise,  gold,  silver,  copper, 
tin,  and  the  rest  of  the  metals,  have  been  burnt  by 
means  of  galvanism.  •. 

General  Effects  of  Heat. 

The  first  and  most  obvious  effect  which  heat  pro- 
duces on  bodies,  is  its  expansive  property.  Experience 
has  taught  us  that*,  at  all  times,  when  bodies  become 
hot,  they  increase  in  bulk.  Tlte  bodies  experience  a 
dilatation  which  is  greater  in  proportion  to  the  accu- 
mulation of  coloric,  or  in  other  words,  to  the  intensity 
of  the  heat.  This  is  a general  law,  which  holds  good 
as  long  as  the  bodies  have  suffered  no  change  either  in 
their  combination  or  in  the  quantity  of  their  chemical 
principles. 

This  power,  which  heat  possesses,  consists,  there  • 
fore,  in  a constant  tendency  to  separate  the  particles 
of  bodies.  Hence  philosophers  consider  heat  as  the 
repulsive  power  which  acts  upon  all  bodies  whatever, 
and  which  is  in  constant  opposition  to  the  power  of 
attraction. 

The  phenomena  which  result  from  these  mutual  ac- 
tions, seem,  as  it  were,  the  secret  springs  of  nature. 

171 


CAL 


CAL 


Heat,  however,  does  not  expand  all  bodies  equally, 
and  we  are  still  ignorant  of  the  laws  which  it  follows. 

1.  Expansion  of  Fluid  Bodies.  Take  a glass  globe, 
with  a long  slender  neck  (called  a bold  heat) ; fill  it  up 
to  the  neck  with  water,  ardent  spirit,  or  any  other  fluid 
which  may  be  coloured  with  red  or  black  ink,  in  or- 
der to  be  more  visible,  and  then  immerse  the  globe  of 
the  instrument  in  a vessel  of  hot  water ; the  included 
fluid  will  instantly  begin  to  mount  into  the  neck.  If 
it  be  taken  out  of  the  water  and  brought  near  the  fire, 
it  will  ascend  more  and  more,  in  proportion  as  it  be- 
comes heated  ; but,  upon  removing  it  from  the  source 
of  heat,  it  will  sink  again : a clear  proof  that  caloric 
dilates  it,  so  as  to  make  it  occupy  more  space  when 
hot  than  when  cold.  These  experiments  may,  there- 
fore, serve -as  a demonstration  that  heat  expands  fluid 
bodies. 

2.  Expansion  of  Aeriform  Bodies.  Take  a bladder 
partly  filled  with  air,  the  neck  of  which  is  closely  tied, 
so  as  to  prevent  the  enclosed  air  from  escaping,  and 
let  it  be  held  near  a fire.  The  air  will  soon  begin  to 
occupy  more  space,  and  the  bladder  will  become  gra- 
dually distended  ; on  continuing  the  expansion  of  the 
air,  by  increasing  the  heat,  the  bladder  will  burst  with 
a loud  report. 

3.  Expansion  of  Solid  Bodies.  If  we  take  a bar  of 
iron,  six  inches  long,  and  put  it  into  a fire  till  it  becomes 
red-hot ; and  then  measure  it  in  this  state  accurately, 
it  will  be  found  l-20th  of  an  inch  longer  than, it  was 
before ; that  is,  about  120th  part  of  the  whole.  ' That 
the  metal  is  proportionally  expanded  in  breadth,  will 
be  seen  by  trying  to  pass  it  thsough  an  aperture  which 
is  fitted  exactly  when  cold,  but  which  will  not  admit  it 
when  red-hot.  The  bar  is,  therefore,  ihcreased  in 
length  and  diameter. 

To  discover  the  minutest  changes  of  expansion  by 
heat,  and  the  relative  proportions  thereof,  instruments 
have  been  contrived,  called  Pyrometers , the  sensi- 
bility of  which  is  so  delicate  as  to6how  an  expansion 
of  1-100, 000th  of  an  inch. 

It  is  owing  to  this  expansion  of  metals,  that  the  mo- 
tion of  time-pieces  is  rendered  erroneous;  but  the 
ingenuity  of  artists  has  discovered  methods  of  ob- 
viating this  inaccuracy,  by  employing  the  greater 
expansion  of  one  metal,  to  counteract  the  expansion 
of  another;  this  is  effected  in  what  is  called  the  grid- 
iron pendulum.  Upon  the  same  principle,  a particular 
construction  of  watches  has  been  contrived. 

The  expansion  of  metals  is  likewise  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal reasons  that  clocks  and  watches  vary  in  winter 
and  summer,  when  worn  in  the  pocket,  or  exposed  to 
the  open  air,  or  when  carried  into  a hotter  or  a colder 
climate.  For  the  number  of  the  vibrations  of  the 
pendulum  is  always  in  the  sub-duplicate  ratio  of  its 
length,  and  as  the  length  is  changed  by  heat  and  cold, 
the  times  of  vibration  will  be  also  changed.  The 
quantity  of  alteration,  when  considered  in  a single 
vibration,  is  exceedingly  small,  but  when  they  are 
often  repeated,  it  will  be  very  sensible.  An  alteration 
of  one-thousandth  part  in  the  time  of  a single  vibra- 
tion of  a pendulum  which  beats  seconds,  will  make  a 
change  of  eighty-six  whole  vibrations  in  twenty-four 
hours. 

As  different  metals  expand  differently  with  the  same 
degree  of  heat;  those  musical  instruments,  whose 
parts  are  to  maintain  a constant  true  proportion, 
should  never  be  strung  w’ith  different  metals.  It  is  on 
this  account  that  hSrpsichords,  &c.  are  out  of  tune  by 
a change  of  temperature. 

Bodies  which  are  brittle,  or  which  want  flexibility, 
crack  or  break,  if  suddenly  heated.  _ This  likewise  de- 
pends upon  the  expansive  force  of  heat,  stretching  the 
surface  to  which  it  is  'applied,  w'hile  the  other  parts, 
not  being  equally  heated,  do  not  expand  in  the  same 
ratio,  and  are  therefore  torn  asunder  or  break.  Hence 
thin  vessels  stand  heat  better  than  thick  ones.  The 
same  holds,  when  they  are  suddenly  cooled. 

Measurement  of  Heat. 

Upon  the  expansive  property  of  heat,  which  we 
have  considered  before,  is  founded  its  artificial  mea- 
surement. Various  means  have  been  employed  to  as- 
sist the  imperfection  of  our  sensations  in  judging  of  the 
different  degrees  of  heat;  for  our  feelings,  unaided, 
afford  but  very  inaccurate  information  concerning  this 
matter;  they  indicate  the  presence  of  heat,  only  when 
the  bodies  presented  to  them  are  hotter  than  the  actual 
temperature  of  our  organs  of  feeling.  When  these 


bodies  are  precisely  of  the  same  temperature  with  our 
body,  which  we  make  the  standard  of  comparison,  we 
then  are  not  sensible  of  the  presence  of  heat  in  them. 
When  their  temperature  is  less  than  that  of  our  bo- 
dies, their  contact  gives  us  what  i6  called  the  sensa- 
tion of  cold. 

The  effects  of  heat  upon  material  bodies  in  general, 
which  are  easily  visible  to  us,  afford  more  precise  and 
determinate  indications  of  the  intensity,  than  can  be 
derived  from  our  feelings  alone.  The  ingenuity  of  the 
philosopher  and  artist  has  therefore  furnished  us  with 
instruments  of  measuring  the  relative  heat  or  tempera- 
ture of  bodies.  These  instruments  are  called  Thermo- 
meters and  Pyrometei-s.  By  these,  all  degrees  are 
measurable,  from  the  slightest  to  that  of  the  most  in- 
tense heat.  See  Thermometer  and  Pyrometer. 

Exceptions  to  the  Expansion  by  Heat. 

Philosophers  have  noticed  a few  exceptions  to  the 
law  of  heat  expanding  bodies.  For  instance ; water, 
when  cooled  down  within  about  7°  of  the  freezing 
point,  instead  of  contracting  on  the  farther  deprivation 
of  heat,  actually  expands. 

Another  seeming  exception  is  manifested  in  alumine, 
or  clay ; others  occur  in  the  case  of  cast-iron,  and  a 
few  other  metals.  Alumine  contracts  on  being  heated, 
and  cast-iron,  bismuth,  &c.  when  fully  fused,  are  more 
dense  than  when  solid ; for,  as  soon  as  they  become 
so,  they  decrease  in  density,  they  expand  in  the  act  of 
cooling,  and  hence  the  sharpness  of  figures  upon  iron 
which  has  been  cast  in  moulds,  compared  to  that  of 
many  other  metals. 

Some  philosophers  have  persuaded  themselves  that 
these  exceptions  are  only  apparent , but  not  really  true. 
They  say,  when  water  freezes,  it  assumes  a crystalline 
form,  the  crystals  cross  each  other  and  cause  nume- 
rous vacuities,  and  thus  the  ice  occupies  more  space 
The  same  is  the  case  with  fused  iron,  bismuth,  and 
antimony.  The  contraction  of  clay  is  considered 
owing  to  the  loss  of  water,  of  which  it  loses  a part  at 
every  increased  degree  of  temperature  hitherto  tried  ; 
there  is,  therefore,  a loss  of  matter;  and  a reduction 
of  volume  must  follow : but  others  assert,  that  this 
only  happens  to  a certain  extent. 

Mr.  Tillocb  has  published  a brief  examination  of 
the  received  doctrines  respecting  heat  and  caloric,  in 
which  these  truths  are  more  fully  considered,  together 
with  many  other  interesting  facts  relative  to  the  re- 
ceived notions  of  heat. 

Equal  Distribution  of  Heat. 

If  a number  of  bodies  of  different  temperatures  are 
placed  in  contact  with  each  other,  they  will  all  at  a 
certain  time  acquire  a temperature,  which  is  interme- 
diate ; the  caloric  of  the  hottest  body  will  diffuse  itself 
among  those  which  are  heated  in  a less  degree,  till 
they  have  all  acquired  a certain  mean  temperature. 
Thus,  if  a bar  of  iron,  w’hich  has  been  made  red-hot, 
be  kept  in  the  open  air,  it  does  not  retain  the  heat 
which  it  had  received,  but  becomes  gradually  colder 
and  colder,  till  it  arrives  at  the  temperature  of  the  bo 
dies  in  its  neighbourhood.  On  the  other  hand,  if  we 
cool  dotvn  the  iron  bar  by  keeping  it  for  some  time  co- 
vered with  snow,  and  then  carry  it  into  a warm  room, 
it  does  not  retain  its  low  temperature,  but  becomes 
gradually  hotter,  till  it  acquires  the  temperature  of  the 
room,  it  is  therefore  obvious,  that  in  the  one  instance 
the  temperature  is  lowered,  and  in  the  other  it  is 
raised. 

These  changes  of  temperature  occupy  a longer  or  a 
shorter  time,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  body,  but 
they  always  take  place  at  last.  This  law  itself  is,  in 
deed,  familiar  to  every  one : when  we  wish  to  heat  a 
body,  we  carry  it  towards  the  fire : when  we  wish  to 
cool  it,  we  surround  it  by  cold  bodies. 

Propagation  of  Heat. 

We  have  seen,  that  when  bodies  of  higher  tempera- 
ture than  others  are  brought  into  contact  with  each 
other,  the  heat  is  propagated  from  the  first  to  the  se- 
cond, or  the  colder  body  deprives  the  warmer  of  its 
excess  of  heat.  We  shall  now  see  that  some  bodies 
do  so  much  more  quickly  than  others.  Through  some 
bodies  caloric  passes  with  undiminished  velocity, 
through  others  its  passage  is  prodigiously  retarded. 

This  disposition  of  bodies,  of  admitting,  under  equal 
circumstances,  the  refrigeration  of  a heated  body 
within  a shorter  or  a longer  time,  is  called  the  power 
of  conducting  heat;  and  a body  is  said  to  be  a better 
i or  worse  conductor  of  heat,  as  it  allows  llie  retriger*- 


CAL 


CAL 


tion  to  go  on  quicker  or  slower.  Those  bodies,  there- 
fore, which  possess  the  property  of  lotting  heat  pass 
with  facility,  are  called  good,  conductors,  those  through 
which  it  passes  with  difficulty  are  called  bad  conduct- 
ors, and  those  through  which  it  is  supposed  not  to  pass 
at  all,  are  called  non-conductors ; thus  we  say,  in  com- 
mon language,  some  bodies  are  warm , or  capable  of 
preserving  warmth,  and  from  this  arises  the  great  dif- 
ference in  the  sensation  excited  by  different  bodies, 
when  applied  at  the  same  temperature  to  our  organs 
of  feeling.  Hence,  if  we  immerse  our  hand  in  mer- 
cury, we  feel  a greater  sensation  of  cold  than  when  we 
immerse  it  in  water,  and  a piece  of  metal  appears  to 
be  much  colder  fhan  a piece  of  wood,  though  their 
temperatures,  when  examined  by  means  of  the  thermo- 
meter, are  precisely  the  same. 

It  is  probable  that  all  solids  conduct  heat  in  some 
degree,  though  they  differ  very  much  in  their  conduct- 
ing power.  Metals  are  the  best  conductors  of  heat ; 
but  the  conducting  powers  of  these  substances  are  by 
no  means  equal.  Stones  seem  to  be  the  next  best  con- 
ductors. Glass  conducts  heat  very  slowly ; wood  and 
charcoal  still  slower ; and  feathers^  silk,  wool,  and 
hair,  are  still  worse  conductors  than  any  of  the  sub- 
stances yet  mentioned. 

The  best  conductors  of  electricity  and  galvanism  are 
also  the  best  conductors  of  heat. 

Experiment. — Take  a number  of  straight  wires,  of 
equal  diameters  and  lengths,  but  of  different  metals  ; 
for  instance,  gold,  silver,  copper,  iron,  See. ; cover 
each  of  them  with  a thin  coat  of  wax,  or  tallow,  and 
plunge  their  extremities-  into  water,  kept  boiling,  or 
into  melted  lead.  The  melting  of  the  coat  of  wax  will 
show  that  caloric  is  more  quickly  transmitted  through 
some  metals  than  others. 

It  is  on  this  account  also,  that  the  end  of  a glass  rod 
may  be  kept  red-hot  for  a long  time,  or  even  melted, 
without  any  inconvenience  to  the  hand  which  holds 
the  other  extremity;  though  a similar  metallic  rod, 
heated  in  the  same  manner,  would  very  soon  become 
too  hot  to  be  held. 

Liquid  and  Aeriform  Bodies  convey  Heat  by  an  actual 
Change  in  the  Situation  of  their  Particles. 

Count  Rumford  was  the  first  who  proved  that  fluids 
in  general,  and  adriform  bodies,  convey  heat  on  a dif- 
ferent principle  from  that  observed  in  the  solids.  This 
opinion  is  pretty  generally  admitted,  though  various 
ingenious  experiments  have  been  made,  by  different 
philosophers,  to  prove  the  contrary.  In  water,  for  in- 
stance, the  count  has  proved  that  caloric  is  propagated 
principally  in  consequence  of  the  motion  which  is  oc- 
casioned in  the  particles  of  that  fluid. 

All  fluids  are  considered  by  him,  strictly  speaking, 
in  a similar  respect  as  non-conductors  of  caloric. 
They  can  receive  it,  indeed,  from  other  substances, 
and  can  give  it  to  other  substances,  but  no  particle  can 
either  receive  it  from  or  give  it  to  another  particle  of 
the  same  kind.  Before  a fluid,  therefore,  can  be  heat- 
ed or  cooled,  every  particle  must  go  individually  to  the 
substance  from  which  it  receives  or  to  which  it  gives 
out  caloric.  Heat  being,  therefore,  only  propagated 
in  fluids,  in  consequence  of  the  internal  motion  of 
their  particles,  which  transport  the  heat;  the  more 
rapid  these  motions  are,  the  more  rapid  is  the  commu- 
nication of  heat.  The  cause  of  these  motions  is  the 
change  in  the  specific  gravity  of  the  fluid,  occasioned 
by  the  change  of  temperature,  and  the  rapidity  is  in 
proportion  to  the  change  of  the  specific  gravity  of  the 
liquid  by  any  given  change  of  temperature.  The  fol- 
lowing experiment  may  serve  to  illustrate  this  theory: 

Take  a thin  glass  tube,  eight  or  ten  inches  long,  and 
about  an  inch  in  diameter.  Pour  into  the  bottom 
part,  for  about  the  depth  of  one  inch,  a little  water  co- 
loured with  Brazil-wood,  or  litmus,  and  then  fill  up 
the  tube  with  common  water,  extremely  gently,  so  as 
to  keep  the  two  strata  quile  distinct  from  each  other. 
Having  done  this,  heat  the  bottom  part  of  the  tube  over 
a lamp ; the  coloured  infusion  will  then  ascend,  and 
gradually  tinge  the  whole  fluid ; on  the  contrary,  if  the 
heat  be  applied  above,  the  water  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  tube  may  be  made  to  boil,  but  the  colouring  matter 
will  remain  at  the  bottom  undisturbed.  The  heat  can- 
not act  downwards  to  make  it  ascend. 

By  thus  being  able  to  make  the  upper  part  of  a fluid 
boil  without  heating  the  bottom  part,  water  may  be 
kept  boiling  for  a considerable  time  in  a glass  tube 
over  ice,  without  melting  it 


Other  experiments,  illustrating  the  same  principle, 
may  be  found  in  count  Rumford’s  excellent  essaysi, 
especially  in  Essay  the  7th  ; 1797. 

To  this  indefatigable  philosopher  we  are  wholly  in- 
debted for  the  above  facts : he  was  the  first  who  taught 
us  that  air  and  water  were  nearly  non-conductor? 
The  results  of  his  experiments,  which  are  contained  in 
the  above  essay,  are  highly  interesting;  they  also 
show  that  the  conducting  power  of  fluids  is  impaired 
by  the  admixture  of  fibrous  and  glutinous  matter. 

Count  Rumford  proved  that  ice  melted  more  than 
80  times  slower,  when  boiling  hot  water  stood  on  its 
surface,  than  when  the  ice  was  placed  to  swim  on  the 
surface  of  the  hot  water.  Other  experiments  showed 
that  water,  only  eight  degrees  of  Fahrenheit  above  the 
freezing  point,  or  at  the  temperature  of  forty  degrees, 
melts  as  much  ice,  in  any  given  time,  as  an  equal  vo- 
lume of  that  fluid  at  any  higher  temperaturef-provided 
the  water  stands  on  the  surface  of  the  ice.  Water,  at 
the  temperature  of  41°,  is  found  to  melt  more  ice, 
when  standing  on  its  surface,  than  boiling  water.  It 
appears,  however,  that  liquids  are  not,  as  he  supposes, 
complete  non-conductors  of  caloric ; because,  if  heat 
be  applied  at  top,  it  is  capable  of  making  its  way 
downwards,  through  water,  for  example,  though  very 
imperfectly  and  slowly. 

It  becomes  farther  evident,  from  the  Count’s  inge- 
nious experiments,  that  of  the  different  substances 
used  In  clothing,  hares’  fur  and  eider-down  are  the 
warmest ; next  to  these,  beavers’  fur,  raw  silk,  sheep’s 
wool,  cotton  wool,  and  lastly,  lint,  or  the  scrapings  of 
fine  linen.  In  fur,  the  air  interposed  among  its  parti- 
cles is  so  engaged  as  not  to  be  driven  away  by  the 
heat  communicated  thereto  by  the  animal  body;  not 
being  easily  displaced,  it  becomes  a barrier  to  defend 
the  animal  body  from  the  external  cold.  Hence  it  is 
obvious  that  those  skins  are  warmest  which  have  the 
finest,  longest,  and  thickest  fur ; and  that  the  furs  of 
the  beaver,  otter,  and  other  like  quadrupeds,  which 
live  much  in  the  water,  and  the  feathers  of  water-fowl, 
are  capable  of  confining  the  heat  of  those  animals  in 
winter,  notwithstanding  the  coldness  of  the  water 
which  they  frequent.  Bears,  and  various  other  ani- 
mals, inhabitants  of  cold  climates,  which  do  not  often 
take  the  water,  have  their  fur  much  thicker  on  their 
backs  than  on  their  bellies. 

The  snow  which  covers  the  surface  of  the  earth  in 
winter,  in  high  latitudes,  is  doubtless  designed  as  a 
garment  to  defend  it  against  the  piercing  winds  from 
the  polar  regions,  which  prevail  during  the  cold  season. 

Without  dwelling  farther  upon  the  philosophy  of 
this  truth,  we  must  briefly  remark  that  the  happy 
application  of  this  law,  satisfactorily  elucidates  some 
of  the  most  interesting  facts  of  the  economy  of  nature. 

Theory  of  Caloric  of  ' Fluidity , or  Latent  Heat. 

There  are  some  bodies  which,  when  submitted  to 
the  action  of  caloric,  dilate  to  such  a degree,  and  the 
power  of  aggregation  subsisting  among  their  particles 
is  so  much  destroyed  and  removed  to  such  a distance 
by  the  interposition  of  caloric,  that  they  slide  over 
each  other  in  every  direction,  and  therefore  appear  in 
a fluid  state.  This  phenomenon  is  called  fusion. 
Bodies  thus  rendered  fluid  by  means  of  caloric,  are 
said  to  be  fused,  or  melted;  and  those  that  are  subject 
to  it,  are  called  fusible. 

The  greater  number  of  solid  bodies  may,  by  the 
application  of  heat,  be  converted* into  fluids.  Thus 
metals  may  be  fused  ; sulphur,  resin,  phosphorus,  may 
be  melted ; ice  may  be  converted  into  water,  &c. 

Those  bodies  which  cannot  be  rendered  fluid  by  any 
degree  of  heat  hitherto  known,  are  called  infusible. 

If  the  effects  of  heat,  under  certain  circumstances, 
be  carried  still  farther  than  is  necessary  to  render 
bodies  fluid,  vaporization  begins;  the  bodies  then 
become  converted  into  the  vaporous  or  gaseous  state. 
Vaporization,  however,  does  not  always  require  a 
previous  fusion.  Some  bodies  are  capable  of  being 
converted  into  the  vaporous  state,  without  previously 
becoming  fluid,  and  others  cannot  be  volatilized  at 
any  temperature  hitherto  known : the  latter  are  termed 
fixed. 

Fluidity  is,  therefore,  by  no  means  essential  to  any 
species  of  matter,  but  always  depends  on  the  presence 
of  a quantity  of  caloric.  Solidity  is  the  natural  state 
of  all  bodies,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  every 
fluid  is  capable  of  being  rendered  solid  by  a due  reduc- 
tion of  temperature ; and  every  solid  may  be  fused  by 


CAL 


CAL 


the  agency  of  caloric,  if  the  latter  does  not  decompose 
them  at  a temperature  inferior  to  that  which  would 
be  necessary  for  their  fusion. 

Caloric  of  Fluidity. 

Dr.  Black  was  the  first  who  proved  that,  whenever 
caloric  combines  with  a solid  body,  the  body  becomes 
heated  only,  until  it  is  rendered  fluid  : and  that,  while 
it  is  acquiring  the  fluid  state,  its  temperature  remains 
stationary,  though  caloric  is  continued  to  be  added  to 
it.  The  same  is  the  case  when  fluids  are  converted 
into  the  aeriform  or  vaporous  state. 

From  these  facts,  the  laws  of  latent  heat  have  been 
inferred.  The  theory  may  be  illustrated  by  means  of 
the  following  experiments : 

If  a lump  of  ice,  at  a low  temperature,  suppose  at 
22°,  be  brought  into  a warm  room,  it  will  become  gra- 
dually less  cold,  as  may  be  discovered  by  means  of 
the  thermometer.  After  a very  short  time,  it  will 
reach  the  temperature  of  32°  (the  freezing  point) ; 
but  there  it  stops.  The  ice  then  begins  to  melt ; but 
the  process  goes  on  very  slowly.  During  the  whole 
of  that  time  its  temperature  continues  at  32°  ; and  as 
it  is  constantly  surrounded  by  warm  air,  we  have 
reason  to  believe  that  caloric  is  constantly  entering 
into  it ; yet  it  does  not  become  hotter  till  it  is  changed 
into  water.  Ice,  therefore,  is  converted  into  water  by 
a quantity  of  caloric  uniting  with  it. 

It  has  been  found  by  calculation,  that  ice  in  melting 
absorbs  140°  of  caloric,  the  temperature  of  the  water 
produced  still  remaining  at  32°. 

This  fact  may  be  proved  in  a direct  manner. 

Take  one  pound  of  ice,  at  32°,  reduced  to  a coarse 
powder;  put  it  into  a wooden  bowl,  and  pour  over  it 
one  pound  of  water,  heated  to  172° ; all  the  ice  will 
become  melted,  and  the  temperature  of  the  whole 
fluid,  if  examined  by  a thermometer,  will  be  32° ; 140° 
of  caloric  are  therefore  lost,  and  it  is  this  quantity 
which  was  requisite  to  convert  the  ice  into  water. 
This  experiment  succeeds  better,  if,  instead  of  ice, 
fresh-fallen  snow  be  employed. 

This  caloric  has  been  called  latent  caloric , because 
its  presence  is  not  measurable  by  the  thermometer : 
also  more  properly  caloric  of  fluidity. 

Dr.  Black  has  also  ascertained  by  experiment,  that 
the  fluidity  of  melted  wax,  tallow,  spermaceti,  metals, 
&c.  is  owing  to  the  same  cause ; and  Landriani  proved, 
that  this  is  the  case  with  sulphur,  alum,  nitrate  of 
potassa,  &x. 

We  consider  it  therefore  as  a general  law,  that 
whenever  a solid  is  converted  into  a fluid,  it  combines 
with  caloric,  and  that  is  the  cause  of  fluidity. 
Conversion  of  Solids  and  Fluids  into  the  Aeriform  or 
Gaseous  State. 

We  have  seen  before,  that,  in  order  to  render  solids 
fluid,  a certain  quantity  of  caloric  is  necessary,  which 
combines  with  the  body,  and  therefore  cannot  be  mea- 
sured by  the  thermometer ; we  shall  now  endeavour 
to  prove  that  the  same  holds  good  in  respect  to  the 
conversion  of  solids  or  fluids  into  the  vaporous  or 
gaseous  state. 

Take  a small  quantity  of  carbonate  of  ammonia, 
introduce  it  into  a retort,  the  neck  of  which  is  directed 
under  a cylinder  filled  with  mercury,  and  inverted  in 
a basin  of  the  same  fluid.  On  applying  heat  to  the 
body  of  the  retort,  the  carbonate  of  ammonia  will  be 
volatilized,  it  will  expel  the  mercury  out  of  the  cylinder, 
and  become  an  invisible  gas,  and  would  remain  so,  if 
its  temperature  was  not  lowered. 

The  same  is  the  case  with  benzoic  acid,  camphire, 
and  various  other  substances. 

All  fluids  may,  by  the  application  of  heat,  be  con- 
verted into  an  afiriforin  elastic  state. 

When  we  consider  water  in  a boiling  state,  we  find 
that  this  fluid,  when  examined  by  the  thermometer,  is 
not  hotter  after  boiling  several  hours,  than  when  it 
began  to  boil,  though  to  maintain  it  boiling  a brisk  fire 
must  necessarily  be  kept  up.  What  then,  we  may 
ask,  becomes  of  the  wasted  caloric  I It  is  not  percep- 
tible in  the  water,  nor  is  it  manifested  by  the  steam ; 
for  the  steam,  if  not  compressed,  upon  examination,  is 
found  not  t(  be  hotter  than  boiling  water.  The  caloric 
is  therefore  absorbed  by  the  steam,  and  although  what 
is  so  absorbed,  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  conver- 
sion of  water  into  the  form  of  steam ; it  does  not 
increase  its  temperature,  and  is  therefore  net  appre- 
ciable by  the  thermometer. 

The  conclusion  is  farther  strengthened  by  the  heat 
174 


given  out  by  steam  on  its  being  condensed  by  cold. 
This  is  particularly  manifested  in  the  condensation  of 
this  fluid  in  the  process  of  distilling,  where,  upon 
examining  the  refrigeratory,  it  will  be  found  that  a 
much  greater  quantity  of  caloric  is  communicated  to 
it,  than  could  possibly  have  been  transmitted  by  the 
caloric  which  was  sensibly  acting  before  the  conden- 
sation. This  may  be  easily  ascertained  by  observing 
the  quantity  of  caloric  communicated  to  the  water  in 
the  refrigeratory  of  a still,  by  any  given  quantity  of 
liquid  that  passes  over. 

1.  The  boiling  point,  or  the  temperature  at  which 
the  conversion  of  fluids  into  gases  takes  place,  is  dif- 
ferent in  different  fluids,  but  constant  in  each,  provided 
the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  be  the  same. 

Put  any  quantity  of  sulphuric  affber  into  a Florence 
flask,  suspend  a thermometer  in  itj  and  hold  the  flask 
over  an  Argand’s  lamp,  the  Eether  will  immediately 
begin  to  boil,  and  the  thermometer  will  indicate  98° 
if  the  affher  has  been  highly  rectified. 

If  highly  rectified  ardent  spirit  is  heated  in  a similar 
manner,  the  thermometer  will  rise  to  176°,  and  there 
remain  stationary. 

If  water  is  substituted,  it  will  rise  to  212°. 

If  strong  nitrous  acid  of  commerce  be  made  use  of, 
it  will  be  found  to  boil  at  248°  ; sulphuric  acid  and 
linseed-oil  at  600°  ; mercury  at  656°,  &c. 

2.  The  boiling  point  of  fluids  is  raised  by  pressure. 

Mr.  Watt  heated  water  under  a strong  pressure  to 

400°.  Yet  still',  when  the  pressure  was  removed,  only 
part  of  the  water  was  converted  into  vapour,  and  the 
temperature  of  this  vapour,  as  well  as  that  of  the  re- 
maining fluid,  was  no  more  than  212°.  There  was, 
therefore,  188°  of  caloric  suddenly  lost.  This  caloric 
was  carried  off-  by  the  steam.  Now  as  only  about 
one-fifth  of  the  water  was  converted  into  steam,  that 
steam  must  contain  not  only  its  own  188°,  but  also  the 
188°  lost  by  each  of  the  other  four  parts ; that  is  to 
say,  it  must  contain  188°x5,  or  about  940°.  Steam, 
therefore,  is  water  combined  with  at  least  940°  of 
caloric,  the  presence  of  which  is  not  indicated  by  the 
thermometer. 

3.  When  pressure  is  removed  from  the  surface  of 
bodies,  their  conversion  into  the  gaseous  state  is  greatly 
facilitated,  or  their  boiling  point  is  lowered. 

In  proof  of  this  the  following  experiments  may  serve : 

Let  a small  bottle  be  filled  with  highly  rectified  sul- 
phuric aether,  and  a piece  of  wetted  bladder  be  tied 
over  its  orifice  around  its  neck.  Transfer  it  under  the 
receiver  of  an  air-pump,  and  take  away  the  super- 
incumbent pressure  of  the  air  in  the  receiver.  When 
the  exhaustion  is  complete,  pierce  the  bladder  by 
means  of  a pointed  sliding  wire,  passing  through  a 
collar  of  leather  which  covers  the  upper  opening  of 
the  receiver.  Having  done  this,  the  aether  will  in- 
stantly begin  to  boil,  and  become  converted  into  an- 
invisible  gaseous  fluid. 

Take  a small  retort  or  Florence  flask,  fill  it  one  half 
or  less  with  water,  and  make  it  boil  over  a lamp ; 
when  kept  briskly  boiling  for  about  five  minutes,  cork 
the  mouth  of  the  retort  as  expeditiously  as  possible, 
and  remove  it  from  the  lamp. 

The  water,  on  being  removed  from  the  source  of 
heat,  will  keep  boiling  for  a few  minutes,  and  when 
the  ebullition  begins  to  slacken,  it  may  be  renewed  by 
dipping  the  retort  into  cold  water,  or  pouring  cold 
water  upon  it. 

The  water,  during  boiling,  becomes  converted  into 
vapour ; this  vapour  expels  the  air  of  the  vessel,  and 
occupies  its  place ; on  diminishing  the  heat,  it  con- 
denses ; when  the  retort  is  stopped,  a partial  vacuum 
is  formed ; the  pressure  becomes  diminished,  and  a 
less  degree  of  heat  is  sufficient  to  cause  an  ebullition. 

For  the  same  reason,  water  may  be  made  to  boil 
under  the  exhausted  receiver  at  94°  Fahr.,  or  even  at 
a lower  degree ; alkohol  at  56° ; and  tether  at  — 20°. 

On  the  conversion  of  fluids  into  gases  is  founded  the 
following  experiment,  by  which  water  is  frozen  by 
means  of  sulphuric  aether. 

Take  a thin  glass  tube  four  or  five  inches  long  and 
about  two  or  three-eighths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and 
a two-ounce  bottle  furnished  with  a capillary  tube 
fitted  to  its  neck.  In  order  to  make  ice,  pour  a littb* 
water  into  the  tube,  taking  care  not  to  wet  the  out- 
side, nor  to  leave  it  moist.  Having  done  this,  let  a 
stream  of  sulphuric  aether  fall  through  the  capillary 
tube  upon  “that  part  of  it  containing  the  water,  which 


CAL 


CAL 


by  this  means  will  be  converted  into  ice  in  a few  mi- 
nutes, and  this  it  will  do  even  near  a fire,  or  in  the 
midst  of  summer. 

If  the  glass  tube,  containing  the  water,  be  exposed 
to  the  brisk  thorough  air,  or  free  draught  of  an  open 
window,  a large  quantity  of  water  may  be  frozen  in  a 
shorter  time  ; and  if  a thin  spire  of  wire  be  introduced 
previous  to  the  congelation  of  the  water,  the  ice  will 
adhere  to  it,  and  may  thus  be  drawn  out  conve- 
niently. 

A person  might  be  easily  frozen  to  death  during 
very  warm  weather,  by  merely  pouring  upon  his  body 
for  some  time  sulphuric  affher,  and  keeping  him  ex- 
posed to  a thorough  draught  of  air. 

Artificial  Refrigeration. 

The  cooling  or  refrigeration  of  rooms  in  the  summer 
season  by  sprinkling  them  with  water,  is  on  the  prin- 
ciple of  evaporation. 

The  method  of  making  ice  artificially  in  the  East 
Indies  dependsxm  the  same  principle.  The  ice-makers 
at  Benares  dig  pits  in  large  open  plains,  the  bottom  of 
which  they  strew  with  sugar-canes  or  dried  stems  of 
maize  br  Indian-corn.  Upon  this  bed  they  place  a 
number  of  unglazed  pans,  made  of  so  porous  an  earth 
that  the  water  penetrates  through  their  whole  sub- 
stance. These  pans  are  filled  toward  evening  in  the 
winter  season  with  water  that  has  boiled,  and  left  in 
that  situation  till  morning,  when  more  or  less  ice  is 
found  in  them,  according  to  the  temperature  and  other 
qualities  of  the  air ; there  being  more  formed  in  dry 
and  warm  weather,  than  in  that  which  is  cloudy, 
though  it  may  be  colder  to  the  human  body. 

Every  thing  in  this  process  is  calculated  to  produce 
cold  by  evaporation ; the  beds  on  which  the  pans  are 
placed,  suffer  the  air  to  have  a free  passage  to  their 
bottoms ; and  the  pans  constantly  oozing  oubwater  to 
their  external  surface,  are  cooled  by  the  evaporation 
of  it. 

In  Spain,  they  use  a kind  of  -earthen  jars,  called 
buxaros,  which  are  only  half-baked,  the  earth  of  which 
is  so  porous,  that  the  outside  is  kept  moist  by  the 
water  which  filters  through  it,  and  though  placed  in 
the  sun,  the  water  in  the  jar  becomes  as  cold  as  ice. 

It  is  a common  practice  in  China  to  cool  wine  or 
other  liquors  by  wrapping  the  bottle  in  a wet  cloth, 
and  hanging  it  up  in  the  sun.  The  water  in  the  cloth 
becomes  converted  into  vapour,  and  thus  cold  is  pro- 
duced. 

The  blacks  in  Senegambia  have  a similar  method 
of  cooling  water  by  filling  tanned  leather  bags  with  it, 
which  they  hang  up  in  the  sun  ; the  water  oozes,  more 
or  less  through  the  leather  so  as  to  keep  the  outer  sur- 
face wet,  which  by  its  quick  and  continued  evapo- 
ration cools  the  water  remarkably. 

The  winds  on  the  borders  of  the  Persian  gulf  are 
often  so  scorching,  that  travellers  are  sudden^  suffo- 
cated unless  they  cover  their  heads  with  a wet  cloth ; 
if  this  be  too  wet,  they  immediately  feel  an  intolerable 
cold,  which  would  prove  fatal  if  the  moisture  was  not 
speedily  dissipated  by  the  heat. 

Condensation  of  Vapour. 

If  a cold  vessel  is  brought  into  a warm  room,  parti- 
cularly where  many  people  are  assembled,  the  outside 
of  it  will  soon  become  covered  with  a sort  of  dew. 

Before  some  changes  of  weather,  the  stone  pave- 
ments, the  walls  of  a house,  the  balustrades  of  stair- 
cases, and  other  solid  objects,  feel  clammy  and  damp. 

In  frosty  nights,  when  the  air  abroad  is  colder  than 
the  air  within,  the  dampness  of  this  air,  for  the  same 
reason,  settles  on  the  glass  panes  of  the  windows,  and 
is  there  frozen  into  curious  and  beautiful  figures. 

Thus  fogs  and  dews  take  place,  and  in  the  higher 
regions  clouds  are  formed  from  the  condensed  vapour. 
The  still  greater  condensation  produces  mists  and  rain. 

Capacxty  of  Bodies  for  containing  Heat. 

The  pr  operty  which  different  bodies  possess,  of  con- 
taining at  the  same  temperature,  and  in  equal  quan- 
tities, either  of  mass  or  bulk,  unequal  quantities  of 
heat,  is  called  their  capacity  for  heat.  The  capacities 
of  bodies  for  heat  are  therefore  considered  as  great  or 
small  in  proportion  as  their  temperatures  are  either 
raised  by  the  addition,  or  diminished  by  the  depriva- 
tion, of  equal  quantities'  of  heat,  in  a less  or  greater 
degree. 

In  homogeneous  bodies,  the  quantities  of  caloric 
which  they  contain  are  in  the  ratio  of  their  tempera- 
ture and  mass : when,  therefore,  equal  quantities  of 


water,  of  oil,  or  of  mercury,  of  unequal  temperature®^ 
are  mingled  together,  the  temperature  of  the  whole 
will  be  the  arithmetical  mean  between  the  tempera- 
tures of  the  two  quantities  that  had  been  mixed  to- 
gether. It  is  a self-evident  truth  that  this  should  be 
the  case,  for  the  particles  of  different  portions  of  the 
same  substance  being  alike,  their  effects  must  be  equal. 
For  instance : 

Mix  a pound  of  water  ht  172°  with  a pound  at  32°, 
half  the  excess  of  heat  in  hot  water  will  quit  it  to  go 
over  into  the  colder  portion  ; thus  the  hot  water  will 
be  cooled  70°,  and  the  cold  will  receive  70°  of  tem- 
perature ; therefore  172 — 70,  or  32  + 70  = 102,  will 
give  the  heat  of  the  mixture.  To  attain  the  arithme- 
tical mean  very  exactly,  several  precautions,  however, 
are  necessary. 

When  heterogeneous  bodies  of  different  tempera- 
tures are  mixed  together,  the  temperature  produced  is 
never  the  arithmetical  mean  of  the  two  original  tem- 
peratures. 

In  order  to  ascertain  the  comparative  quantities  of 
heat  of  different  bodies,  equal  weights  of  them  are 
mingled  together;  the  experiments  for  tins  purpose 
being  in  general  more  easily  executed  than  those  by 
which  they  are  compared  from  equal  bulks. 

Thus,  if  one  pound  of  mercury  heated  to410°Fahr., 
be  added  to  one  pound  of  water  of  44°,  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  blended  fluids  will  not  be  changed  to  77°, 
as  it  would  be  if  the  surplus  of  heat  were  divided 
among  those  fluids  in  the  proportion  of  their  quantities. 
It  will  be  found,  on  examination,  to  be  only  47°. 

On  the  contrary,  if  the  pound  of  mercury  be  heated 
to  44°,  and  the  water  to  110°,  then,  on  stirring  them 
together,  the  common  temperature  will  be  107°. 

Hence,  if  the  quicksilver  loses  by  thi3  distribution 
63°  of  caloric,  an  equal  weight  of  water  gains  only  3° 
from  this  loss  of  63°  of  heat.  And,  on  the  contrary,  if 
the  water  loses  3°,  the  mercury  gains  63°. 

When,  instead  of  comparing  the  quantities  of  caloric 
which  equal  weights  of  different  bodies  contain,  we 
compare  the  quantities  contained  in  equal  volumes , we 
still  find  that  an  obvious  difference  takes  place.  Thus 
it  is  found  by  experiment,  that  the  quantity  of  caloric 
necessary  to  raise  the  temperature  of  a given  volume 
of  water  any  number  of  degrees,  is,  to  that  necessary 
to  raise  an  equal  volume  of  mercury,  the  same  number 
of  degrees  as  2 to  1.  This  is,  therefore,  the  proportion 
between  the  comparative  quantities  of  caloric  which 
these  two  bodies  contain,  estimated  by  their  volumes  ; 
and  similar  differences  exist  with  respect  to  every  other 
kind  of  matter. 

From  the  nature  of  the  experiments  by  which  the 
quantities  of  caloric  which  bodies  contain  are  ascer- 
tained, it  is  evident  that  we  discover  merely  the  com- 
parative, not  the  absolute  quantities.  Hence  water 
has  been  chosen  as  a standard,  to  which  other  bodies 
may  be  referred ; its  capacity  is  stated  as  the  arbitrary 
term  of  1000,  and  with  this  the  capacities  of  other 
bodies  are  compared. 

It  need  not  be  told  that  pa/ ns  have  been  taken  to 
estimate  on  these  experiments  that  portion  of  heat 
which  diffuses  itself  into  the  air,  or  into  the  vessels 
where  the  mercury  and  water  are  blended  together. 
As  however  such  valuations  cannot  be  made  with 
complete  accuracy,  the  numbers  stated  above  are  only 
an  approximation  to  truth. 

Radiation  of  Caloric. 

Caloric  is  thrown  off  or  radiates  from  heated  bodien 
in  right  lines,  and  moves  through  space  with  incon- 
ceivable velocity.  It  is  retarded  in  its  passage  by  at- 
mospheric air,  by  colourless  fluids,  glass,  and  othor 
transparent  bodies. 

If  a glass  mirror  be  placed  before  a fire,  the  mirror 
transmits  the  rays  of  light,  but  not  the  rays  of  heat. 

If  a plate  of  glass,  talc,  or  a glass  vessel  filled  with 
water,  be  suddenly  interposed  between  the  fire  and  the 
eye,  the  rays  of  light  pass  through  it,  but  the  rays  of 
caloric  are  considerably  retarded  in  its  passage ; for  no 
heat  is  perceived  until  the  interposed  substance  is  sa- 
turated with  heat,  or  has  reached  its  maximum.  It 
then  ceases  to  intercept  the  rays  of  caloric,  and  allows 
them  to  pass  as  freely  as  the  rays  of  light. 

It  has  been  lately  shown  by  Dr.  Herschel,  that  the 
rays  of  caloric  are  refrangible,  but  less  so  than  the  rays 
of  light;  and  the  same  philosopher  has  also  proved  by 
experimehl,  that  it  is  not  only  the  rays  of  caloric  emit- 
ted by  the  sun,  which  are  refrangible,  but  likewise, 

175 


CAL 


CAL 


the  rays  emitted  by  common  fires,  by  candles,  by  heat- 
ed iron,  and  even  by  hot  water. 

Whether  the  rays  of  caloric  are  differently  refracted, 
in  different  mediums,  has  not  yet  been  ascertained. 
We  are  certain,  however,  that  they  are  refracted  by 
all  transparent  bodies  which  have  been  employed  as 
burning  glasses. 

The  rays  of  caloric  are  also  reflected  by  polished 
surfaces  in  the  same  manner  as  the  rays  of  light. 

This  was  long  ago  noticed  by  Lambert,  Saussure, 
Scheele,  Pictet,  and  lately  by  Dr.  Herschel. 

Professor  Pictet  placed  two  concave  metallic  mirrors 
opposite  to  each  other,  at  the  distance  of  about  twelve 
feet.  Wherxa  hot  body,  an  iron  bullet  for  instance, 
was  placed  m the  focus  of  the  one,  and  a mercurial 
thermometer  in  that  of  the  other,  a substance  radiated 
from  the  bullet ; it  passed  with  incalculable  velocity 
through  the  air,  it  was  reflected  from  the  mirrors,  it  be- 
came concentrated,  and  influenced  the  thermometer 
placed  in  the  focus,  according  to  the  degree  of  its  con- 
centration. 

An  iron  ball  two  inches  in  diameter,  heated  so  that 
it  was  not  luminous  in  the  dark,  raised  the  thermome- 
ter not  less  than  ten  and  a half  degrees  of  Reaumur’s 
scale,  in  six  minutes. 

A lighted  candle  occasioned  a rise  in  the  thermome- 
ter nearly  the  same. 

A Florence  flask  containing  two  ounces  and  three 
drachms  of  boiling  water,  raised  Fahrenheit’s  ther- 
mometer three  degrees.  He  blackened  the  bulb  of  his 
thermometer,  and  found. that  it  was  more  speedily  in- 
fluenced by  the  radiation  than  before,  and  that  it  rose 
to  a greater  height. 

M.  Pictet  discovered  another  very  singular  fact; 
namely,  the  apparent  radiation  of  cold.  When,  in- 
stead of  a heated  body,  a Florence  flask  fulbof  ice  or 
snow  is  placed  in  the  focus  of  one  of  the  mirrors,  the 
thermometer  placed  in  the  focus  of  the  other  imme- 
diately descends,  and  ascends  again  whenever  the 
cold  body  is  removed. 

This  phenomenon  may  be  explained  on  the  suppo- 
sition, that  from  every  body  at  every  temperature 
caloric  radiates,  but  in  less  quantity  as  the  tempera- 
ture is  low ; so  that  in  the  above  experiment,  the  ther- 
mometer gives  out  more  caloric  by  radiation,  than  it 
receives  from  the  body  in  the  opposite  focus,  and 
therefore  its  temperature  is  lowered.  Or,  as  Pictet  has 
supposed,  when  a number  of  bodies  near  to  each  other 
have  the  same  temperature,  there  is  no  radiation  of 
caloric,  because  in  all  of  them  it  exists  in  a state  of 
equal  tension ; but  as  soon  as\i  body  at  an  inferior 
tompcrature  is  introduced,  the  balance  of  tension  is 
broken,  and  caloric  begins  to  radiate  from  all  of  them, 
till  the  temperature  of  that  body  is  raised  to  an  equality 
with  theirs.  In  the  above  experiment,  therefore,  the 
placing  the  snow  or  ice  in  the  focus  of  the  mirror 
causes  the  radiation  of  caloric  from  the  thermometer, 
and  hence  the  diminution  of  temperature  which  it 
suffers. 

These  experiments  have  been  since  repeated  by  Dr. 
Young  and  Professor  Davy,  at  the  theatre  of  the  Royal 
Institution.  These  gentlemen  inflamed  phosphorus 
by  reflected  caloric ; and  proved  that  the  heat  thus 
excited,  was  very  sensible  to  the  organs  of  feeling. 

It  is  therefore  evident,  that  caloric  is  thrown  off 
from  bodies  in  rays,  which  are  invisible,  or  incapable 
of  exciting  vision,  but  which  are  capable  of  exciting 
heat. 


These  invisible  rays  of  caloric  are  propagated  in 
right  lines,  with  extreme  velocity ; and  are  capable  of 
the  laws  of  reflection  and  refraction. 

The  heating  agency  however  is  different  in  the  dif- 
ferent coloured  rays  of  the  prismatic  spectrum.  Ac- 
cording to  Dr.  Herschel’s  experiments,  it  follows  in- 
versely the  order  of  the  refrangibility  of  the  rays  of 
light.  The  least  refrangible,  possessing  it  in  the 
greatest  degree. 

Sir  Henry  Englefield  has  lately  made  a series  of  ex- 
periments on  the  same  subject,  from  which  we  learn, 
that  a thermometer  having  its  ball  blackened,  rose 
when  placed  in  the  blue  ray  of  the  prismatic  spectrum 
in  3'  from  55°to  56°;  in  the  green, in 3'  from  54°  to  58°; 
in  the  yellow , in  3'  froifi  56°  to  62°  ; in  the  full  red , in 
2 1-2'  from  56°  to  72° ; in  the  confines  of  the  red , in 
2 1-2’  from  58°  to  73  1-2°;  and  quite  out  of  the  visible 
light , in  2 1-2'  from  61°  to  79°. 

Between  each  of  the  observations, *the  thermometer 
was  placed  in  the  shade  so  long  as  to  sink  it  below  the 
heat  to  which  it  had  risen  in  the  preceding  observa- 
tion ; of  course,  its  rise  above  that  point  could  only  be 
the  effect  of  the  ray  to  which  it  was  exposed.  It  was 
continued  in  the  focus  long  after  it  had  ceased  to  rise ; 
therefore  the  heats  given  are  the  greatest  effects  of  the 
several  rays  on  the  thermometer  in  each  observation. 
A thermometer  placed  constantly  in  the  shade  near 
the  apparatus,  was  found  scarcely  to  vary  during  the 
experiments. 

Sir  Henry  made  other  experiments  with  thermome- 
ters with  naked  balls,  and  with  others  whose  balls 
were  painted  white,  for  which  we  refer  the  reader  to 
the  interesting  paper  of  the  Baronet,  from  which  the 
above  experiments  are  transcribed. 

Production  of  Artificial  Cold , by  means  of  Frigorific 
Mixtures. 

A number  of  experiments  have  been  lately  made  by 
different  philosophers,  especially  by  Pepys,  Walker, 
and  Lowitz,  in  order  to  produce  artificial  cold.  And 
as  these  methods  are  often  employed  in  chemistry, 
with  a view  to  expose  bodies  to  the  influence  of  very 
low  temperatures,  we  shall  enumerate  in  a tabular 
form  the  different  substances  which  may  be  made  use 
of  for  that  purpose,  and  the  degrees  of  cold  which 
they  are  capable  of  producing. 

To  produce  the  effects  stated  in  the  table,  the  salts 
must  be  reduced  to  powder,  and  contain  their  full 
quantity  of  water  of  crystallization.  The  vessel  in 
which  the  freezing  mixture  is  made,  should  be  very 
thin,  and  just  large  enough  to  hold  it,  and  the  mate- 
rials shou’d  be  mixed  together  as  expeditiously  as  pos- 
sible, taking  care  to  stir  the  mixture  at  the  same  time 
with  a rod  of  glass  or  wood. 

In  order  to  obtain  the  full  effect,  the  materials  ought 
to  be  first  cooled  to  the  temperature  marked  in  the 
table,  by  introducing  them  into  some  of  the  other  fri- 
gorific mixtures,  and  then  mingling  them  together  in  a 
similar  mixture.  If,  for  instance,  we  wish  to  produce 
— 46°,  the  snow  and  diluted  nitric  acid  ought  to  be 
cooled  down  to  0°,  by  putting  the  vessel  which  con- 
tains each  of  them  into  the  fifth  freezing  mixture  in 
the  above  table,  before  they  are  mingled  together.  If 
a more  intense  cold  be  required,  the  materials  to  pro- 
duce it  are  to  be  brought  to  the  proper  temperature  by 
being  previously  placed  in  the  second  freezing  mixture 

This  process  is  to  be  continued  till  the  required  de- 
gree of  cold  has  been  procured. 


176 


CAt 


CAL 


A TABLE  OP  FREEZING  MIXTURES. 


Mixtures. 

Thermometer  sinks 

Muriate  of  ammonia ••  • 5 parts 

Water 16 

From  50°  to  10°. 

Muriate  of  ammonia 5 parts 

Nitrate  of  potassa 5 

Sulphate  of  soda 8 

Water 16 

From  50°  to  4°. 

Sulphate  of  soda 3 parts 

Diluted  nitric  acid 2 

From  50°  to  — 3°. 

S ul  phate  of  soda . . . . 8 parts 

Muriatic  acid 5 

From  50°  to  0°. 

Snow 1 part 

Muriate  of  soda 1 

From  32°  to  0°. 

Snow,  or  pounded  ice 2 parts 

Muriate  of  soda 1 part 

From  0°  to  — 5°. 

Snow,  or  pounded  ice 12  parts 

Muriate  of  soda 5 

Muriate  of  ammonia  and  nitrate  of  po- 
tassa 5 

From  —50  to  —18°. 

Snow,  or  pounded  ice 12  parts 

Muriate  of  soda 5 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 5 

From  — 18°  to  — 25°. 

Snow 3 parts 

Diluted  nitric  acid 2 

From  0°  to  — 46°. 

Muriate  of  lime 3 parts 

Snow 2 

From  32°  _5oo. 

Potassa 4 parts 

Snow 3 

From  32°  to  — 51°. 

Snow 8 parts 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid 3 

Diluted  nitric  acid  .... 3 

From  — 10O  to  —56° 

Snow 1 part 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid 1 

From  20°  to — 60°. 

Muriate  of  lime 2 parts 

Snow 1 

From  0°  to  — 66°. 

Muriate  of  lime 3 parts 

Snow 1 

From  — 40°  to  — 73°. 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid 10  parts 

Snow 8 

From  — 68°  to  — 91°. 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 1 part 

Water 1 

From  50°  to  4°. 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 1 part 

Carbonate  of  soda 1 

Water 1 

From  500  to— 7°. 

Sulphate  of  soda 6 parts 

Muriate  of  ammonia 4 

Nitrate  of  potassa 2 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4 

From  500  t0  —10°. 

Sulphate  of  soda 6 parts 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 5 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4 

From  50°  to  — 14°. 

Phosphate  of  soda 9 parts 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4 

From  50°  to — 12°. 

Phosphate  of  soda 9 parts 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 6 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4 

From  50°  to  — 21°. 

Sulphate  of  soda 5 parts 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid 4 

From  500  to  3°. 

CALORI'METER.  An  instrument  by  which  the 
wnole  quantity  of  absolute  heat  existing  in  a body  in 
cnemical  union  can  be  ascertained. 

CALP.  An  argillo-fcrruginous  limestone. 

CA'LTHA.  (KaAOa,  corrupted  from  %aXxa,  yel- 
low; from  whence,  says  Vossius,  come  calthula,  cal- 
dula,  caledula , calendula.)  The  marigold.  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Polyandria;  Order,  Polygynia. 

<2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  herb  wild  mari- 
gold, so  called  from  its  colour. 


Caltha  arvensis.  Calendula  arvensis;  Caltha 
vulgaris.  The  Wild  marigold  is  sometimes  preferred 
to  the  garden  marigold.  Its  juice  is  given,  from  one 
to  four  ounces,  in  jaundice  and  cachexia;  and  the 
leaves  are  commended  as  a salad  for  children  afflicted 
with  scrofulous  humours. 

Caltha  palustris.  Populago.  Common  single 
marsh  marigold.  It  is  said  to  be  caustic  and  deleteri- 
ous : but  this  may  be  questioned.  The  young  buds  of 
this  plant  make,  when  properly  pickled,  very  good  sub- 
stitutes for  capers. 


M 


177 


CAL 


CAM 


Caltha  vulgaris.  See  Caltha  arvensis. 

Ca'lthula.  The  caltha  is  so  called. 

CALTROPS.  See  Trapa  natans. 

CALU'MB  A.  The  name  now  adopted  by  the  Lon- 
don college  of  physicians  for  the  root  of  the  Cocculus 
palmatus  of  De  Candolles,  in  his  Systema  natures. 
It  was  formerly  called  Colombo;  Calomba;  and  Co- 
lamb a.  This  root  is  imported  from  Colomba,  in. Cey- 
lon, in  circular,  brown  knobs,  wrinkled  on  their  outer 
surface,  yellowish  within,  and  consisting  of  cortical, 
woody,  and  medullary  laminae.  Its  smell  is  aromatic  ; 
its  taste  pungent,  and  very  bitter.  From  Dr.  Percival’s 
experiments  on  the  root,  it  appears  that  rectified  spirit 
of  wine  extracts  its  virtues  in  the  greatest  perfection. 
The  watery  infusion  is  more  perishable  than  that  of 
other  bitters.  An  ounce  of  the  powdered  root,  half  an 
ounce  of  orange-peel,  two  ounces  of  brandy,  and  four 
teen  ounces  of  water,  macerated  twelve  h urs  without 
heat,  and  then  filtered  through  paper,  a .ford  a suffi- 
ciently strong  and  tolerably  pleasant  infusion.  The 
extract  made  first  by  spirit  and  then  with  water,  and 
reduced  by  evaporation  to  a pillular  consistence,  is 
found  to  be  equal,  if  not  superior  in  efficacy,  to  the 
powder.  As  an  antiseptic,  Calumba  root  is  inferior  to 
the  bark;  but,  as  a corrector  of  putrid  bile,  it  is  much 
superior  to  the  bark ; whence  also  it  is  probable,  that 
it  would  be  of  service  in  the  West-India  yellow  fever. 
It  also  restrains  alimentary  fermentation,  without  im- 
pairing digestion ; in  which  property  it  resembles  mus- 
tard. It  does  not  appear  to  have  the  least  heating 
quality,  and  therefore  may  be  used  in  phthisis  pul- 
monalis,  and  in  hectic  cases,  to  strengthen  digestion. 
It  occasions  no  disturbance,  and  agrees  very  well  with 
a milk  diet,  as  it  abates  flatulence,  and  is  Indisposed 
to  acidity.  The  London,  Edinburgh,  and  Dublin  col- 
leges, direct  a tincture  of  Calumba  root.  The  dose  of 
the  powdered  root  is  as  far  as  half  a drachm,  which, 
in  urgent  cases,  may  be  repeated  every  third  or  fourth 
hour. 

[Calumbo.  See  American  Columbo.  A.] 

CA'LVA.  (From  calvus , bald.)  The  scalp  or  up- 
per part  of  the  cranium  or  top  of  the  head ; so  called 
because  it  often  grows  bald  first. 

CALVA'RIA.  (From  calvus,  bald.)  The  upper 
part  or  the  cranium  which  becomes  soon  bald.  It 
comprehends  all  above  the  orbits,  temples,  ears,  and 
occipital  eminence. 

CALVI'TIES.  (From  calvus,  bald.)  Calvitium. 
Baldness  ; want  or  loss  of  hair,  particularly  upon  the 
sinciput. 

This  name  is  applied  by  Dr.  Good  to  a species  of  his 
' trichosis  athrix,  or  baldness. 

CALX.  {Calx,  cis.  foem ; from  kalah,  to  burn.  Ara- 
bian.) 1.  Chalk.  Limestone. 

2.  Lime.  Calx  viva.  The  .London  College  directs 
it  to  be  prepared  thus : — Take  of  limestone  one  pound  : 
break  it  into  small  pieces,  and  heat  it  in  a crucible,  in 
a strong  fire,  for  an  hour,  or  until  the  carbonic  acid  is 
entirely  driven  off,  so  that  on  the  addition  of  acetic 
acid,  no  bubbles  of  gas  shall  be  extricated.  Lime  may 
be  made  by  the  same  process  from  oyster-shells  previ- 
ously washed  in  boiling  water,  and  cleared  from  ex- 
traneous matters.  See  Lime . 

Calx  antimonii.  See  Antimonii  oxydum. 

Calx  cum  kali  puro.  See  Potassa  cum  calce. 

Calx  hydrargyri  alba.  See  Hydrargyrum  proe- 
cipitatum  album. 

Calx  metallic.  A metal  which  has  undergone 
the  process  of  calcination,  or  combustion,  or  any  other 
equivalent  operation. 

Calx  viva.  See  Calx. 

Calycanthemje.  (From  calyx , the  flower-cup,  and 
avOos,  the  flower.)  The  name  of  an  order  in  Lin- 
naeus’s fragments  of  a natural  method,  consisting  of 
plants,  which,  among  other  characteristics,  have  the 
corolla  and  stamina  inserted  into  the  calyx. 

CALYCIFLORA2.  (From  calyx,  andjfos,  a flower.) 
The  name  of  an  order  in  Linnaeus’s  fragments  of  a 
natural  method,  consisting  of  plants  which  have  the 
stamina  inserted  into  the  Calyx. 

CALYCINUS.  (From  calyx , the  flower-cup.)  Ca- 
lycinalis.  Belonging  to  the  calyx  of  a flower ; applied 
to  the  nectary,  nectarium  calycinum,  it  being  a pro- 
duction of  the  calyx ; as  in  Tropceolum  majus , the  gar- 
den nasturtium. 

CALYCULATUS.  (From  caly cuius,  a small  calyx.) 
Calyculnte.  Applied  to  aperiant/uum  when  there  are 
178 


less  ones,  like  scales,  about  its  base ; as  in  Dianthus 
caryophyllus.  Semina  calyculata  are  those  which  are 
enclosed  in  a hard  bone-like  calyx,  as  those  of  the 
Coix  lachryma , or  Job’s  tears. 

CALYCULUS.  (Diminutive  of  calyx.)  A little 
calyx.  A botanical  term  for 

I.  The  membranaceous  margin  surrounding  the  apex 
of  a seed. 

The  varieties  are, 

1.  Calyculus  integer , the  margin  perfect  not  incised; 
as  in  Tanacetum  vulgare , and  Dipsacus  laciniatus. 

2.  Calyculus  paly aceus,  with  chaffy  scales;  as  in 
Helianthus  annuus. 

3.  Calyculus  aristatus,  having  two  or  three  awns  at 
the  top ; as  in  Tagetcs  patula , and  Bidens  tripartita. 

4.  Calyculus  rostratus,  the  style  of  the  germ  remain, 
ing ; as  in  Sinapis,  and  Scandix  cerefolium. 

5.  Calyculus  cornutas,  horned,  the  rostrum  bent;  a3 
in  JYigella  damascena. 

6.  Calyculus  cristatus,  a dentate,  or  incised  mem- 
brane on  the  top  of  the  seed ; as  in  Hedysarum  crista 
galli. 

II.  A little  calyx  exterior  to  anotfier  proper  one. 

Caly  pter.  (From  koXvixtu},  to  hide.)  A carneous 
excrescence  covering  the  hemorrhoidal  vein. 

CALYPTRA.  (From  KaXvnru),  to  cover.)  I.  The 
veil,  or  covering  of  mosses.  A kind  of  membraneous 
hood  placed,  on  their  capsule  or  fructification,  like  au 
extinguisher  on  a candle,  well  seen  in  Bryum  ccespito- 
sum.  Linnaeus  considered  it  as  a calyx,  but  other 
botanists,  especially  Schreber  and  Smith,  reckon  it  to 
be  a sort  of  corolla.  It  is  either, 

1.  Acuminate , pointed ; as  in  Minium  and  Bryum. 

2.  Caducous,  falling  off  yearly;  as  in  Bauxbaumia. 

3.  Conical ; as  in  most  mosses. 

4.  Smooth;  as  in  Hypnum. 

5.  Lcevis,  without  any  inequalities;  as  in  Splanck- 
num. 

6.  Oblong ; as  in  Minium. 

7.  Villous ; as  in  Poly  trichum. 

8.  Complete , surrounding  the  whole  of  the  top  of  the 
capsule. 

9.  Dimidiate , covering  only  half  the  capsule ; as  in 

Bryum  androgynum. 

10.  JQentale,  toothed  in  the  margin ; as  in  Eucalypta 
ciliata. 

In  many  genera  it  is  wanting. 

11.  The  name  in  Tournefort,  and  writings  of  former 
botanists,  for  the  proper  exterior  covering  or  coat  of 
the  seed,  which  falls  off  spontaneously. 

CALYPTRATUS.  (From  calyptra,  the  veil,  or 
covering  of  mosses.)  Calyptrate:  having  a covering 
like  the  calyptra  of  mosses. 

CALYX.  {Calyx,  ids.  f. ; xaXu^;  from  KaXvnrio, 
to  cover.)  Calix.  I.  The  flower-cup,  or,  more  cor 
rectly,  the  external  covering  of  the  flower,  for  the 
most  part  green,  and  surrounding  the  corolla,  or  gaudy 
part. 

There  are  five  genera  of  calyces,  or  flower- cups. 

1.  Perianthiuity  2.  Jnvolucrum. 

3.  Amentum.  4.  Spatha. 

5.  Oluma.  6.  Perichcetium 

7.  Volva. 

II.  The  membrane  which  covers  the  papillae  in  the 
pelvis  of  the  human  kidney. 

CA'MARA.  (From  Kapapa,  a vault.)  Camarium. 
1.  The  fornix  of  the  brain. 

2.  The  vaulted  part  of  the  auricle  of  the  heart. 

Cama'rium.  (From  Kapapa,  a vault.)  A vault. 
See  Camara. 

CAMARO'MA.  (From  Kapapa,  a vault.)  Cama- 
rosis ; Camuratio.  A fracture  of  the  skull,  iq  the 
shape  of  an  arch  or  vault. 

Cambirea.  So  Paracelsus  calls  the  venereal  bubo. 

CA'MBIUM.  The  gelatinous  substance,  or  matter 
of  organization  which  Du  Hamel  and  Mirbel  suppose 
produces  the  young  bark,  and  new  wood  of  plants. 

Cambium.  (From  cambio , to  exchange.)  The  nu- 
tritious humour  which  is  changed  into  the  materials 
of  which  the  body  is  composed.  < 

Cambo  dia.  See  Stalagmitis. 

CAMBOGIA.  (From  the  province  of  Cambaya,  in 
the  East  Indies;)  Cambodja  and  Cambogia;  Cambo- 
dia; Cambogium ; Oambogia;  Oambogium.  See  Sta- 
lagmitis. 

Cambogia  gutta.  See  Stalagmitis. 

CAMBO  GIUM.  See  Cambogia  and  Stalagmitis. 


CAM 


CAM 


Cambro-britannica.  See  Rubus  Cham  amor  us. 

Cambu'ca.  Cambuta  membrata.  So  Paracelsus 
calls  the  venereal  cancer.  By  some  it  is  described  as  a 
bubo,  an  ulcer,  an  abscess  on  the  pudenda ; also  a boil 
in  the  groin. 

Ca'mbui.  The  wild  American  myrtle  of  Piso  and 
Margrave,  which  is  said  to  be  astringent. 

Camel's  hay.  See  Andropogon  Schamanthus. 

CAMELEON  MINERAL.  When  pure  potassa 
and  black  oxide  of  manganese  are  fused  together  in  a 
crucible,  a compound  is  formed,  whose  solution  in  wa- 
ter, at  first  green,  passes  spontaneously  through  the 
whole  series  of  coloured  rays  to  the  red.  From  this 
latter  tint,  the  solution  may  be  made  to  retrograde  in 
* colour  to  the  original  green,  by  the  addition  of  potassa ; 
or  it  may  be  rendered  altogether  colourless,  by  adding 
either  sulphureous  acid  or  chlorine  to  the  solution,  in 
which  case  there  may  or  may  not  be  a precipitate,  ac- 
cording to  circumstances. 

CA'MERA.  A chamber  or  cavity.  The  chambers 
of  the  eye  are  termed  camera. 

Camera'tio.  See  Camaroma. 

Games.  Cambt.  Silver. 

Cami'nga.  See  Canella  alba. 

Ca'minus.  A furnace  and  its  chimney.  In  Kulan- 
dus  it  signifies  a bell. 

Cami'sia  fcetus.  (From  the  Arabic  term  kamisah, 
an  under  garment.)  The  shirt  of  the  foetus.  See  Chorion. 

Camomile.  See  Chamomile. 

Camomi'lla.  Corrupted  from  chamcemetum. 

CA'MMORUM.  (Kappopov,  quia  homines , uauep 
yopo),  perimat ; because  if  eaten,  it  brings  men  to  a 
miserable  end.)  A species  of  monkshood.  See  Aco- 
nitum  napellus. 

CAMPA'NA.  A bell.  In  chemistry,  a receptacle 
like  a bell,  for  making  sulphuric  acid ; thus  the  oleum 
sulphuris  per  campanum. 

CAMPANACEiE.  Bell-shaped  flowers.  The  name 
of  an  order  of  Linnaeus's  natural  method. 

CAMPANIFORMIS.  Campanaceus ; Campanula- 
tus.  Bell-shaped ; applied  to  the  corolla  and  nectaries 
of  plants. 

CAMPA'NULA.  (From  campana , a bell;  named 
from  its  shape.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia.  The  Bell-flower. 

Campanula  tracheleum.  Cervicaria.  The  Great 
Throat-wort : by  some  recommended  against  inflam- 
matory affections  of  the  throat  and  mouth. 

CAMPAN'ULATUS.  (From  Campanula , a little 
bell.)  Bell-shaped : applied  to  the  corolla  and  nectary 
of  plants,  as  in  Campanula.  See  Corolla  and  JYecta- 
rium. 

Ca'mph.  (From  Kapitru),  to  bend.)  A flexure  or 
bending.  It  is  also  used  for  the  ham,  and  a joint,  or 
articulation. 

Camp eachy wood.  See  Heematoxylon  Campecliianum. 

Campechense,  lignum.  See  Heematoxylon  Cam- 
pechianum , or  Logwood. 

CAMPER,  Peter,  was  born  at  Leyden  in  1722, 
where  he  studied  under  Boerhaave,  and  took  his  de- 
gree in  medicine.  He  then  travelled  for  some  years, 
and  was  afterward  appointed  a professor  successively 
at  Franeker,  Amsterdam,  and  Groningen.  He  was 
subsequently  occupied  in  prosecuting  his  favourite  stu- 
dies, in  visiting  various  parts  of  Europe,  by  the  differ- 
ent societies  of  which  he  Was  honourably  distinguish- 
ed, and  in  performing  many  public  duties  in  his  own 
country,  being  at  length  chosen  one  of  the  council  of 
state.  He  died  in  1789  of  a pleurisy.  He  published 
some  improvements  in  midwifery  and  surgery,  but 
anatomy  appears  to  have  been  his  favourite  pursuit. 
He  finished  two  parts  of  a work  of  considerable  mag- 
nitude and  importance,  in  which  the  healthy  and 
morbid  structure  of  the  arm,  and  of  the  pelvis,  are 
exhibited  in  very  accurate  plates,  from  drawings  made 
by  himself : which  he  appears  to  have  purposed  ex- 
tending to  the  other  parts  of  the  body.  There  are  also 
some  posthumous  works  of  Camper  possessing  great 
merit,  partly  on  subjects  of  natural  history,  partly 
evincing  the  connexion  between  anatomy  and  paint- 
ing; in  which  latter  judicious  rules  are  laid  down  for 
exhibiting  the  diversity  of  features  in  persons  of  vari- 
ous countries  and  ages,  and  representing  the  different 
emotions  of  the  mind  in  the  countenance  ; also  for  de- 
lineating the  general  forms  of  other  animals,  which  he 
shows  to  be  modified  according  to  their  economy. 


CAMPESTRIS.  Of  or  belonging  to  the  field  ; 
plied  as  a trivial  name  to  many  plants,  which  are  com- 
mon in  the  fields. 

CAMPHIRE.  See  Laurus  camphora. 

Camphor.  See  Laurus  camphora. 

CA'MPHORA.  ( Camphura . Arabian.  The  an- 
cients meant  by  camphor  what  now  is  called  asphal- 
tuin,  or  Jews’  pitch ; Katpovpa.-)  See  Laurus  camphora. 

Ca'mphoR.e  flores.  The  subtle  substance  which 
first  ascends  in  subliming  camphor.  It  is  nothing  more 
than  the  camphor. 

Camphor  flores  composiTi.  Camphor  sublimed 
with  benzoin. 

CA'MPHORAS.  A camphorate.  A salt  formed  by 
the  union  of  the  camphoric  acid  with  a salifiable  base ; 
thus,  camphorate  of  alumine,  camphorate  of  ammonia , 
&c. 

CAMPIIORA'SMA.  (From  camphora ; so  called 
from  its  camphor-like  smell.)  Turkey  balsam.  See 
Dracocephalum. 

CAMPHORA'TA.  See  Camphorosma. 

Camf'sora'tum  oleum.  See  Linimentum  camphora. 

CAMPHORIC  ACID.  Acidum  camphoricum.  Ait 
acid  with  peculiar  properties  is  obtained,  by  distilling 
nitric  acid  eight  times  following  from  camphor*  and 
the  following  is  the  account  Bouillon  Lagrange  gives 
of  its  preparation  and  properties. 

One  part  of  camphor  being  introduced  into  a glass 
retort,  lour  parts  of  nitric  acid  of  the  strength  of  36  de- 
grees are  to  be  poured  on  it,  a receiver  adapted  to  the 
retort,  and  all  the  joints  well  luted.  The  retort  is  then 
to  be  placed  on  a sand-heat,  and  gradually  heated. 
During  the  process  a considerable  quantity  of  nitrous 
gas,  and  of  carbonic  acid  gas,  is  evolved ; and  part  of 
the  camphor  is  volatilized,  while  another  part  seizes 
the  oxygen  of  the  nitric  acid.  When  no  more  vapours 
are  extricated,  the  vessels  are  to  be  separated,  and  the 
sublimed  camphor  added  to  the  acid  that  remains  in 
the  retort.  A like  quantity  of  nitric  acid  is  again  to 
be  poured  on  this,  and  the  distillation  repeated.  This 
operation  must  be  reiterated  till  the  camphor  is  com- 
pletely acidified.  Twenty  parts  of  nitric  acid  at  36  are 
sufficient  to  acidify  one  of  camphor. 

When  the  whole  of  the  camphor  is  acidified,  it  crys- 
tallizes in  the  remaining  liquor.  The  whole  is  then  to 
be  poured  out  upon  a filter,  and  washed  with  distilled 
water,  to  carry  off  the  nitric  acid  it  may  have  retained. 
The  most  certain  indication  of  the  acidification  of  the 
camphor  is  its  crystallizing  on  the  cooling  of  the  liquor 
remaining  in  the  retort.  To  purify  this  acid  it  must  be 
dissolved  in  hot  distilled  water,  and  the  solution,  after 
being  filtered,  evaporated  nearly  to  half,  or  till  a slight 
pellicle  forms ; when  the  camphoric  acid  will  be  ob- 
tained in  crystals  on  cooling. 

The  camphoric  acid  has  a slightly  acid,  bitter  taste,- 
and  reddens  infusion  of  litmus. 

It  crystallizes ; and  the  crystals  upon  the  whole  re- 
semble those  of  muriate  of  ammonia.  It  effloresces  on 
exposure  to  the  atmosphere ; is  not  very  soluble  in  cold' 
water ; when  placed  on  burning  coals,  it  gives  out  a 
thick  aromatic  smoke,  and  is  entirely  dissipated  ; and 
with  a>  gentle  heat  melts,  and  is  sublimed.  The  mine- 
ral acids  dissolve  it  entirely.  It  decomposes  the  sul- 
phate and  muriate  of  iron.  The  fixed  and  volatile  oils 
dissolve  it.  It  is  likewise  soluble  in  alkohol,  and  is  not 
precipitated  from  it  by  water  ; a property  that  distin- 
guishes it  from  the  benzoic  acid.  It  unites  easily  with 
the  earths  and  alkalies,  and  forms  camphoratis. 

To  prepare  the  camphorates  of  lime , magnesia , and 
alumina , these  earths  must  be  diffused  in  water,  and 
crystallized  camphoric  acid  added.  The  mixture  mus: 
then  be  boiled,  filtered  while  hot,  and  the  solution  con- 
centrated by  evaporation. 

The  camphorate  of  barytes  is  prepared  by  dissolving 
the  pure  earth  in  water,  and  then  adding  crystallized 
camphoric  acid. 

Those  of  potassa,  soda,  and  ammonia,  should  bo  pre- 
pared with  their  carbonates  dissolved  in  water ; these 
solutions  are  to  be  saturated  with  crystallized  campho 
ric  acid,  heated,  filtered,  evaporated,  and  cooled;  by 
which  means  the  camphorates  will  be  obtained. 

If  the  camphoric  acid  be  very  pure,  they  have  no 
smell ; if  it  be  not,  they  have  always  a slight  smell  of 
camphor. 

The  camphorates  of  alumina  and  barytes  leave  a lit- 
tle acidity  on  the  tongue ; the  rest  have  a slightly  bit- 
terish taste. 


179 


CAN 


CAN 


They  are  all  decomposed  by  heat ; the  acid  being 
separated  and  sublimed,  and  the  base  remaining  pure  ; 
that  of  ammonia  excepted,  which  is  entirely  vola- 
tilized. 

If  they  be  exposed  to  the  blowpipe,  the  acid  burns 
with  a blue  flame : that  of  ammonia  gives  first  a blue 
flame ; but  toward  the  end  it  becomes  red. 

The  camphorates  of  lime  and  magnesia  are  little  so- 
luble, the  others  dissolve  more  easily. 

The  mineral  acids  decompose  them  all.  The  alka- 
lies and  earths  act  in  the  order  of  their  affinity  for  the 
camphoric  acid  ; which  is,  lime,  potassa,  soda,  barytes, 
ammonia,  alumina,  magnesia. 

Several  metallic  solutions,  and  several  neutral  salts, 
decompose  the  camphorates ; such  as  the  nitrate  of 
barytes,  most  of  the  calcareous  salts,  &c. 

The  camphorates  of  lime,  magnesia,  and  barytes, 
part  with  their  acid  to  alkohol. — Lagrange's  Manuel 
d'un  Cours  de  Chimie. 

CAMPHORO'SMA.  (From  camphora , and  oapy, 
smell ; so  called  from  its  smelling  of  camphire.)  The 
camphor-smelling  plant. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  plants  in  the  Limuean 
system.  Class,  Tetrandna , Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  camphorata. 
See  Camphurosma  Monspeliensis. 

Camphorosma  Monspeliensis.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  plant  called  camphorata  in  the  pharma- 
copoeias. Chamcepeuce — Camphorata  hirsuta — Cam- 
phorosma Monspeliaca.  Stinking  ground-pine.  This 
plant,  Camphorosma— foliis  hirsutis  line  ambus,  of  Lin- 
naeus, took  its  name  from  its  smell  resembling  so 
strongly  that  of  camphor  : it  has  been  exhibited  inter- 
nally, in  form  of  decoction,  in  dropsical  and  asthmatic 
complaints,  and  by  some  is  esteemed  in  fomentations 
against  pain.  It  is  rarely,  if  ever,  used  in  modern 
practice. 

Ca'mpter.  (From  napir]o),  to  bend.)  An  inflexion 
or  incurvation. 

Ca'mpulum.  (From  Ka/urrw,  to  twist  about.)  A 
distortion  of  the  eyelids  or  other  parts. 

CAMPYLO'TIS.  (From  Kapitvho;,  bent.)  A pre- 
ternatural incurvation,  or  recurvation  of  a part;  also 
a distortion  of  the  eyelids. 

CA'MPYLUM.  See  Campylotis. 

Ca'nabil.  A sort  of  modicinal  earth. 

Canabi'na  aquatica.  See  Bidens. 

Ca'nabis  Indica.  See  Bangue  and  Cannabis. 

Canabis  peregrina.  See  Cannabis. 

Ca'nada  balsam.  See  Pinus  balsamea. 

Canada  maidenhair . See  Adianthum  pcdatum. 

CANADE'NSIS.  (Brought  from  Canada .)  Cana- 
dian. A name  of  a balsam.  Sec  Pinus  balsamea. 

CANALICULATUS.  Channelled;  having  a long 
furrow ; applied  to  leaves,  pods,  &c.  See  Leaf  and 
Legumen. 

CANALI'CULUS.  (Diminutive  of  canalis , a chan- 
nel.) A little  canal.  See  Canalis  arteriosus. 

CANA'LIS.  (From  %avof,  an  aperture,  or  rather 
from  canna , a reed.)  A canal. 

1.  Specifically  applied  to  many  parts  of  the  body ; as 
canalis  nasalis,  &c. 

2.  The  hollow  of  the  spine. 

3.  A hollow  round  instrument  like  a reed,  for  em- 
oracing  and  holding  a broken  limb. 

Canalis  arteriosus.  Canaliculus  arteriosus ; Ca- 
nalis botalii.  A blood-vessel  peculiar  to  the  foetus, 
disappearing  after  birth ; through  which  the  blood  pass- 
es from  the  pulmonary  artery  into  the  aorta. 

Canalis  nasalis.  A canal  going  from  the  internal 
eanthus  of  the  eye  downwards  into  the  nose ; it  is 
situated  in  the  superior  maxillary  bone,  and  is  lined 
with  the  pituitary  membrane,  continued  from  the 
nose. 

Canali9  petitianus.  A triangular  cavity,  natu- 
rally containing  a moisture  between  the  two  lamime 
of  the  hyaloid  membrane  of  the  eye,  in  the  anterior 
part,  formed  by  the  separation  of  the  anterior  lamina 
from  the  posterior.  It  is  named  after  its  discoverer, 
M.  Petit. 

Canalis  semicircularis.  Semicircular  canal. 
There  are  three  in  each  ear  placed  in  the  posterior 
part  of  the  labyrinth.  They  open  by  five  orifices  into 
*he  vestibulum.  See  Ear. 

Canalis  svmispetros.  The  half  bony  canal  of  the 
ear. 

Canalis  venosus.  A canal  peculiar  to  the  foetus, 
180 


disappearing  after  birth,  that  conveys  the  matemai 
blood  from  the  porta  of  the  liver  to  the  ascending  vena 
cava. 

Cana'ry  balm.  See  Dracocephalum. 

Ca'ncavmum  GrjECORUm.  See  Hymencea  courbaril. 

CANCELLATUS.  Having  the  reticulated  appear- 
ance of  the  cancelli  of  bones. 

CANCE'LLI.  Lattice-work;  applied  to  the  reti- 
cular substance  in  bones. 

CANCE'LLUS.  (From  cancer,  a crab.)  A species 
of  cray-fi^h,  called  Bernard  the  hermit  and  the  wrong 
heir;  the  Cancer  cancellus  of  Linnaeus;  supposed  to 
cure  rheumatism,  if  rubbed  on  the  part. 

CA'NCER.  1.  The  common  name  of  the  crab-fish. 
See  Cancer  Astacus. 

2.  The  name  of  a disease,  from  xapKivos , a crab;  so 
called  by  the  ancients,  because  it  exhibited  large  blue 
veins  like  crab’s  claws:  likewise  called  Carcinoma, 
Carcinos,  by  the  Greeks,  Lupus  by  the  Romans,  be- 
cause it  eats  away  the  flesh  like  a wolf.  Dr.  Cullen 
places  this  genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and 
order  Tumores.  He  defines  it  a painful  scirrhous 
tumour,  terminating  in  a fatal  ulcer.  Any  part  of  the 
body  may  be  the  seat  of  cancer,  though  the  glands  are 
most  subject  to  it.  It  is  distinguished  according  to  its 
stages,  into  occult  and  open;  by  the  former  is  mean! 
its  scirrhous  state,  which  is  a hard  tumour  that  some- 
times remains  in  a quiet  state  for  many  years.  When 
the  cancerous  action  commences  in  it,  it  is  attended 
with  frequent  shooting  pains : the  skin  that  covers  it 
becomes  discoloured,  and  ulceration  sooner  or  later 
takes  place:  when  the  disease  is  denominated  open 
cancer.  Mr.  Pearson  says,  “When  a malignant  scir- 
rhus  or  a watery  excrescence  hath  proceeded  to  a 
period  of  ulceration,  attended  with  a constant  sense  of 
ardent  and  occasionally  shooting  pains,  is  irregular  in 
its  figure,  and  presents  an  unequal  surface;  if  it  dis- 
charges sordid,  sanious,  or  foetid  matter  ; if  the  edges 
of  the  sore  be  thick,  indurated,  and  often  exquisitely 
painful,  sometimes  inverted,  at  other  times  retorted, 
and  exhibit  a serrated  appearance ; and  should  the 
ulcer  in  its  progress  be  frequently  attended  with  hae- 
morrhage, in  consequence  of  the  erosion  of  blood-ves- 
sels; there  will  be  little  hazard  of  mistake  in  calling  it 
a cancerous  ulcer.”  In  men,  a cancer  most  frequently 
seizes  the  tongue,  mouth,  or  penis ; in  women,  the 
breasts  or  the  uterus,  particularly  about  the  cessation 
of  their  periodical  discharges;  and  in  children,  the 
eyes.  The  following  description  of  Scirrhus  and  Can- 
cer, from  the  above  writer,  will  serve  to  elucidate  the 
subject.  A hard  unequal  tumour  that  is  indolent,  and 
without  any  discoloration  in  the  skin,  is  called  a scir- 
rhus ; but  when  an  itching  is  perceived  in  it,  which  is 
followed  by  a pricking,  shooting,  or  lancinating  pain, 
and  a change  of  colour  in  the  skin,  it  is  usually  deno- 
minated a cancer.  It  generally  is  small  in  the  begin- 
ning, and  increases  gradually ; but.  though  the  skin 
changes  to  a red  or  livid  appearance,  and  the  state  of 
the  tumour  from  an  indolent  to  a painful  one,  it  is 
sometimes  very  difficult  to  say  when  the  scirrhus  really 
becomes  a cancer,  the  progress  being  quick  or  slow  ac- 
cording to  concurring  causes.  When  the  tumour  is 
attended  with  a peculiar  kind  of  burning,  shooting 
pains,  and  the  skin  hath  acquired  the  dusky  purple  or 
livid  hue,  it  may  then  be  deemed  the  malignant  scir 
rhus  or  confirmed  cancer.  When  thus  far  advanced  in 
women’s  breasts,  the  tumour  sometimes  increases 
speedily  to  a great  size,  having  a knotty  unequal  sur- 
face, more  glands  becoming  obstructed,  the  nipple 
sinks  in,  turgid  veins  are  conspicuous,  ramifying 
around,  and  resembling  a crab’s  claws.  These  are 
the  characteristics  of  an  occult  cancer  on  the  externa? 
parts ; and  we  may  suspect  the  existence  of  one  inter- 
nally, when  such  pain  and  heat  as  has  be^n  described, 
succeed  in  parts  where  the  patient  hath  before  been 
sensible  of  a weight  and  pressure,  attended  with  ob- 
tuse pain.  A cancerous  tumour  never  melts  down  in 
suppuration  like  an  inflammatory  one ; but  when  it 
is  ready  to  break  open,  especially  in  the  breast,  it  ge- 
nerally becomes  prominent  in  some  minute  point,  at- 
tended with  an  increase  of  the  peculiar  kind  of  burn- 
ing, shooting  pain,  felt  before  at  intervals,  in  a less  de- 
gree and  deeper  in  the  body  of  the  gland.  In  the  pro- 
minent. part  of  the  tumour,  in  this  state,  a corroding 
ichor  sometimes  transudes  through  the  skin,  soon 
forming  an  ulcer:  at  other  times  a considerable  quan- 
tity of  a thin  lymphatic  fluid  tinged  with  blood  from 


CAN 


-CAN 


eroded  vessels  is  found  on  it.  Ulcers  of  the  cancerous 
nature  discharge  a thin,  foetid,  acrid  sanies,  which 
corrodes  the  parts,  having  thick,  dark-coloured  re- 
torted lips ; and  fungous  excrescences  frequently  rise 
from  these  ulcers,  notwithstanding  the  corrpsiveness 
of  the  discharge.  In  this  state  they  are  often  attended 
with  excruciating,  pungent,  lancinating,  burning  pains, 
and  sometimes  with  bleeding. 

Though  a scirrhus  may  truly  be  deemed  a cancer, 
as  soon  as  pain  is  perceived  in  it,  yet  every  painful 
tumour  is  not  a cancer ; nor  is  it  always  easy  to  say 
whether  a cancer  is  the  disorder  or  not.  Irregular  hard 
lumps  may  be  perceived  in  the  breast ; but  on  ex- 
amining the  other  breast,  where  no  uneasiness  is  per- 
ceived, the  same  kind  of  tumours  are  sometimes  found, 
which  renders  the  diagnostic  uncertain.  Yet  in  every 
case  after  the  cessation  of  the  catamenia,  hard,  un- 
equal tumours  in  the  breast  are  suspicious ; nor,  though 
without  pain,  are  they  to  be  supposed  indolent  or  in- 
noxious. 

In  the  treatment  of  this  disease,  our  chief  reliance 
must  be  on  extirpating  the  part  affected.  Some  have 
attempted  to  dispel  the  scirrhous  tumour  by  leeches 
and  various  discutient  applications,  to  destroy  it  by 
caustics,  or  to  check  its  progress  by  narcotics;  but 
without  material  success.  Certainly  before  the  disease 
is  confirmed,  should  any  inflammatory  tendency  ap- 
pear, antiphlogistic  means  may  be  employed  with  pro- 
priety; but  afterward  the  operation  should  not.be  de- 
layed : nay,  where  the  nature  of  the  tumour  is  doubt- 
ful, it  will  be  better  to  remove  it,  than  incur  the  risk  of 
this  dreadful  disease.  Some  surgeons,  indeed,  have 
contested  the  utility  of  the  operation  ; and  no  doubt 
the  disease  will  sometimes  appear  again ; from  consti- 
tutional tendency,  or  from  the  whole  not  having  been 
removed  : but  the  balance  of  evidence  is  in  favour  of 
the  operation  being  successful,  if  performed  early,  and 
to  an  adequate  extent.  The  plan  of  destroying  the 
part  by  caustic  is  much  more  tedious,  painful,  and  un- 
certain. When  the  disease  has  arisen  from  some  acci- 
dent, not  spontaneously,  when  the  patient  is  otherwise 
healthy,  when  no  symptoms  of  malignancy  in  the  can- 
cer have  appeared,  and  the  adjacent  glands  and  absor- 
bents seem  unaffected,  we  have  stronger  expectation  of 
success : but  unless  all  the  morbid  parts  can  be  removed 
without  the  risk  of  dividing  important  nerves  or  arte- 
ries, it  should  scarcely  be  attempted.  In  operating  it 
is  advisable,  1.  To  make  the  external  wound  suffici- 
ently large,  and  nearly  in  the  direction  of  the  subjacent 
muscular  fibres.  2.  To  save  skin  enough  to  cover  it, 
unless  diseased.  3.  To  tie  every  vessel  which  might 
endanger  subsequent  haemorrhage.  4.  To  keep  the 
lips  of  the  wound  in  contact,  not  interposing  any  dress- 
ing, &c.  5.  To  preserve  the  parts  in  an  easy  and  steady 
position  for  some  days,  before  they  are  inspected. 
6.  To  use  only  mild  and  cooling  applications  during  the 
cure.  Supposing,  however,  the  patient  will  not  con- 
sent to  an  operation,  or  circumstances  render  it  inad- 
missible, the  uterus,  for  example,  being  affected,  in- 
ternal remedies  may  somewhat  retard  its  progress,  or 
alleviate  the  sufferings  of  the  patient;  those,  which 
have  appeared  most  beneficial,  are,  1.  Arsenic,  in  very 
small  doses  long  continued.  2.  Conium,  in  doses  pro- 
gressively increased  to  a considerable  extent.  3.  Opium. 

4.  Belladonna.  5.  Solanum.  6.  Ferrum  ammonia- 
turn.  7.  Hydrargyri  oxymurias.  8.  The  juice  of  the 
galium  aparine.  When  the  part  is  external,  topical 
applications  may  be  useful  to  alleviate  pain,  cleanse 
the  sore,  or  correct  the  feetor;  especially,  1.  Fresh- 
bruised  hemlock  leaves.  2.  Scraped  young  carrots. 
3.  The  fermenting  poultice.  4.  Finely  levigated  chalk. 

5.  Powdered  charcoal.  6.  Carbonic  acid  gas,  intro- 
troduced  into  a bladder  confined  round  the  part.  7.  A 
watery  solution  of  opium.  8.  Liquid  tar,  or  tar- 
water.  But  none  of  these  means  can  be  relied  upon 
for  effecting  a cure. 

3.  See  Carcinus. 

Cancer  astacus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
crab-fish,  from  which  the  claws  are  selected  for  medi- 
cal use.  Crab’s  claws  and  crab’s  eyes,  as  they  are 
called,  which  are  concretions  found  in  the  stomach, 
are  of  a calcareous  quality,  and  possess  antacid  virtues. 
They  are  exhibited  with  their  compounds  in  pyrosis, 
diarrhoea,  and  infantile  convulsions  from  acidity. 

Cancer  cancellus.  See  Cancellus. 

Cancer  gammarus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lobster 


* ' 

Cancer  munditorium.  A peculiar  ulceration  oi 
the  scrotum  of  chimney-sweepers. 

Ca'nchrys.  Parched  barley. — Galen. 

Cancre'na.  Paracelsus  uses  this  word  instead  of 
gangnena. 

Cancro'rum  chelte.  Crab’s  claws.  See  Carbonas 
calcis , and  Cancer  astacus. 

Cancrorum  oculi.  See  Carbonas  calcis , and  Can- 
cer astacus. 

CA'NCRUM.  (From  cancer , a spreading  ulcer.) 
The  canker. 

Cancrum  oris.  Canker  of  the  mouth;  a fretted 
ulceration  of  the  gums. 

CANDE'LA.  (From  candeo , to  shine.)  A candle. 

Candela  fumalis.  A candle  made  of  odoriferous 
powders  and  resinous  matters,  to  purify  the  air  and  ex 
cite  the  spirits. 

Candela  regia.  See  Verbascum. 

Candela'ria.  (From  candela , a candle ; so  called 
from  the  resemblance  of  its  stalks  to  a candle.)  Mul- 
lein. See  Verbascum. 

Candy  carrot.  See  Jlthamanta  cretensis. 

Cane 'la.  Sometimes  used  by  the  ancients  for  cin- 
namon, or  rather  cassia. 

CANE'LLA.  ( Canella , diminutive  of  canna , a 
reed  ; so  named  because  the  pieces  of  bark  are  rolled 
up  in  the  form  of  a reed.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Dodecandria; 
Order,  Monogynia.  The  canella-tree. 

Canella  alba.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the 
laurel-leaved  canella.  See  Wint.eria  aromatica. 

Canella  cdbana.  See  Canella  alba. 

Canella  MALABARiCiE  cortex.  See  Laurus  cas- 
sia. 

Canelli'fera  malabarica.  See  Laurus  cassia. 

Caneon.  ( rom  navvy , because  it  was  made  of  split 
cane.)  A sort  of  tube  or  instrument,  mentioned  by 
Hippocrates,  for  conveying  the  fumes  of  antihysteric 
drugs  into  the  womb. 

Ca'nic.e.  (From  canis,  a dog,  so  called  by  the  an 
cients,  because  it  was  food  for  dogs.)  Coarse  meal. 
Hence  panis  caniceus  means  very  coarse  bread. 

CANICI'DA.  (From  canis , a dog,  and  ccedo , to  kill , 
so  called  because  dogs  are  destroyed  by  eating  it.) 
Dog’s  bane.  See  Jlconitum. 

CANICI'DIUM.  (From  canis,  a dog,  and  caido,  to 
kill.)  The  anatomical  dissection  of  living  dogs;  for 
the  purpose  of  illustrating  the  physiology  of  parts. 

Canina  lingua.  See  Cynoglossum. 

Canina  malus.  The  mandragora. 

Canina  rabies.  See  Hydrophobia. 

CANINE.  Whatever  partakes  of,  or  has  any  rela- 
tion to,  the  nature  of  a dog. 

Canine  appetite.  See  Bulimia. 

Canine  madness.  See  Hydrophobia. 

Canine  teeth.  Dentes  canini;  Cynodontes  ; Cue 
pidati  of  Mr.  John  Hunter  ; because  they  have  the  two 
sides  of  their  edge  sloped  off  to  a point,  and  this  point 
is  very  sharp  or  cuspidated ; columellares  of  Varo  and 
Pliny.  The  four  eye-teeth  are  so  called  from  their  re- 
semblance to  those  of  the  dog.  See  Teeth. 

CANI'NUS.  (From  canis,  a dog.)  1.  a tooth  is  so 
called,  because  it  resembles  that  of  a dog.  See  Teeth. 

2.  The  name  of  a muscle,  because  it  is  near  the  ca 
nine  tooth.  See  Levator  anguli  oris. 

3.  A disease  to  which  dogs  are  subject  is  called  Rar 
bies  canina.  See  Hydrophobia. 

Caninus  sentis.  See  Rosa  canina. 

Caniru'bus.  (From  canis , and  rubus , a bramble.) 
See  Rosa  canina. 

CA'NIS.  1.  A dog.  The  white  dung  of  this  ani- 
mal, called  album  gr cecum,  was  formerly  in  esteem,  but 
now  disused. 

2.  The  fraenum  of  the  penis. 

Canus  interfector.  Indian  barley.  See  Vera- 
trum  sabadilla. 

Canis  ponticus.  See  Castor. 

CANNA.  (Hebrew.)  1.  A reed  or  hollow  cane. 

2.  The  fibula,  from  its  resemblance  to  a reed. 

Canna  fistula.  See  Cassia  fistula. 

Canna  indica.  See  Sagittaria  alexipharmica. 

Canna  major.  The  tibia. 

Canna  minor  cruris.  The  fibula. 

Cannabi'na.  (From  canna,  a reed,  named  from  Us 
reed-like  stalk.)  So  Tournefort  named  his  datisca. 

CA'NNABIS.  (From  navva,  a reed.  KavvaSoi  are 
foul  springs,  wherein  hemp,  &c.  grow  naturally.  Or 

181 


CAN 


CAO 


from  kanaba , from  kanah,  to  mow.  Arabian.)  Hemp. 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Dicecia;  Order,  Pentandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopaeial  name  of  the  hemp-plant.  See 
Cannabis  sativa. 

Cannabis  sativa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
hemp-plant.  It  has  a rank  smell  of  a narcotic  kind. 
The  effluvia  from  the  fresh  herb  are  said  to  affect  the 
eyes  and  head,  and  that  the  water  in  which  it  has  been 
long  steeped  is  a sudden  poison.  Hemp-seeds,  when 
fresh,  afford  a considerable  quantity  of  oil.  Decoc- 
tions and  emulsions  of  them  have  been  recommended 
against  coughs,  ardor  urinse,  &c.  Their  use,  in  gene- 
ral, depends  on  their  emollient  and  demulcent  quali- 
ties. The  leaves  of  an  oriental  hemp,  called  bang  or 
bangue , and  by  the  Egyptians  assis,  are  said  to  be 
used  in  eastern  countries,  as  a narcotic  and  aphrodi- 
siac. See  Bangue. 

CA'NNULA.  (Diminutive  of canna , a reed.)  The 
name  of  a surgical  instrument.  See  Canula. 

CA'NON.  K avuiv.  A rule  or  canon,  by  which 
medicines  are  compounded. 

Cano'nial.  Kavoviai.  Hippocrates  in  his  book  De 
ASre,  &c.  calls  those  persons  thus,  who  have  straight, 
and  not  prominent  bellies.  He  would  intimate  that 
they  are  disposed,  as  it  were,  by  a straight  rule. 

Cano'picon.  (From  Kavwirov,  the  flower  of  the 
elder.)  1.  A sort  of  spurge,  so  named  from  its  resem- 
blance. 

2.  A collyrium,  of  which  the  chief  ingredient  was 
elder  flowers. 

Canopi'te.  The  name  of  a collyrium  mentioned  by 
Oelsus. 

Cano'pum.  Kavurrov.  The  flower  or  bark  of  the 
elder-tree,  in  Paulus  A2gineta. 

Canta'brica.  See  Convolvulus. 

Canta'brum.  (From  kanta,  Hebrew.)  In  Coelius 
Aurelianus  it  signifies  bran. 

Ca'ntacon.  Garden  saffron. 

Ca'ntara.  The  plant  which  bears  the  St.  Ignatius’s 
bean.  See  Ignaria  amara. 

CANTERBURY.  The  name  in  history  of  a much 
celebrated  town  in  Kent,  in  which  there  is  a mineral 
water,  Cantuariensis  aqua,  strongly  impregnated  with 
iron,  sulphur,  and  carbonic  acid  gas ; it  is  recommend- 
ed in  disorders  of  the  stomach,  in  gouty  complaints, 
jaundice,  diseases  of  the  skin,  and  chlorosis. 

Ca'nthari  figulini.  Earthen  cucurbits. 

CA'NTHARIS.  ( Cantharis , pi.  cantharides : from 
uavdapos , a beetle,  to  which  tribe  it  belongs.)  Musca 
Hispanica;  Lytta  vesicatoria ; The  blistering  fly; 
Spanish  fly.  These  flies  have  a green  shining  gold 
body,  and  are  common  in  Spain,  Italy,  France,  and 
Germany.  The  largest  come  from  Italy,  but  the 
Spanish  cantharides  are  generally  preferred.  The 
importance  of  these  flies,  by  their  stimulant,  corrosive, 
and  epispastic  qualities,  in  the  practice  of  physic  and 
surgery,  is  very  considerable ; indeed,  so  much  so,  as 
to  induce  many  to  consider  them  as  the  most  powerful 
medicine  in  the  materia  medica.  When  applied  on 
the  skin,  in  the  form  of  a plaster,  it  soon  raises  a blis- 
ter full  of  serous  matter,  and  thus  relieves  inflamma- 
tory diseases,  as  phrenitis,  pleuritis,  hepatitis,  phleg- 
mon, bubo,  myositis,  arthritis,  <fcc.  The  tincture  of 
these  flies  is  also  of  great  utility  in  several  cutaneous 
diseases,  rheumatic  affections,  sciatic  pains,  &c.  but 
ought  to  be  used  with  much  caution.  See  Blister , and 
Tinctura  cantharidis.  This  insect  is  two-thirds  of  an 
inch  in  length,  one-fourth  in  breadth,  oblong,  and  of  a 
gold  shining  colour,  with  soft  elytera  or  wing  sheaths, 
marked  with  three  longitudinal  raised  stripes,  and 
covering  brown  membraneous  wings.  An  insect  of  a 
square  form,  with  black  feet,  but  possessed  of  no  vesi- 
cating property,  is  sometimes  mixed  with  the  cantha- 
rides. They  have  a heavy  disagreeable  odour,  and 
acrid  taste. 

If  the  inspissated  walery  decoction  of  these  insects 
be  treated  with  pure  alkohol,  a solution  of  a resinous 
matter  is  obtained,  which  being  separated  by  gentle 
evaporation  to  dryness,  and  submitted  for  some  time 
to  the  action  of  sulphuric  aether,  forms  a yellow  solu- 
tion. By  spontaneous  evaporation,  crystalline  plates 
are  deposited,  which  may  be  freed  from  some  adhering 
colouring  matter  by  alkohol.  Their  appearance  is  like 
spermaceti.  They  are  soluble  in  boiling  alkohol,  but 
precipitate  as  it  cools.  They  do  not  dissolve  in  water. 

182 


According  to  Robiquet,  who  first  discovered  them, 
these  plates  form  the  true  blistering  principle.  They 
might  be  called  Vesicatoria.  Besides  the  above  pecu- 
liar body,  cantharides  contain,  according  to  Robiquet, 
a green  .bland  oil,  insoluble  in  water,  soluble  in  alko- 
hol ; a black  matter,  soluble  in  water,  insoluble  in  al- 
kohol, without  blistering  properties ; a yellow  viscid 
matter,  mild,  soluble  in  water  and  alkohol;  the  crys- 
talline plates ; a fatty  bland  matter;  phosphates  of 
lime  and  magnesia;  a little  acetic  acid,  and  much 
lithic  or  uric  acid.  The  blistering  fly  taken  into  the 
stomach  in  doses  of  a few  grains,  acts  as  a poison,  oc- 
casioning horrible  satyriasis,  delirium,  convulsions, 
and  death.  Some  frightful  cases  are  related  by  Orfila, 
vol.  i.  part  second.  Oils,  milk,  syrups,  frictions  on  the 
spine,  with  volatile  liniment  and  laudanum,  and 
draughts  containing  musk,  opium,  and  camphorated 
emulsion,  are  the  best  antidotes. 

[4t  Cantharides  Vittatje.  Potato  flies.  The  Can- 
tharis vittata  of  Olivier,  called  Lytta  vittata  by  Fabri 
cius,  inhabits  the’United  States  and  South  America. 
It  is'also  given  by  Pallas  among  his  insects  of  Siberia. 
It  feeds  on  different  plants,  but  chiefly  on  the  potato 
vine,  and  is  easily  caught  in  the  morning  and  towards 
night.  It  agrees  with  the  Spanish  fly  in  its  generic 
character,  but  is  a smaller  insect,  having  its  elytra  or 
wing  cases  black  with  a yellow  stripe  and  margin,  its 
head  reddish  yellow,  and  its  abdomen  and  legs  black. 
This  fly  is  found  by  abundant  experience  to  possess 
all  the  vesicating  powers  of  the  European  cantharis, 
and  to  exert  the  same  effect,  when  internally  admi- 
nistered, upon  the  bladder  and  urethra.  The  potato 
fly  might  well  supersede  the  Spanish,  were  it  not  that 
its  visits  in  different  years  vary  greatly  as  to  certainty 
and  numbers.  It  is  probable  that  many  insects  of  the 
coleopterous  class  possess  vesicating  powers.  Re- 
cently a fly  possessing  this  quality  was  sent  from  the 
country  to  a physician  in  Boston.  It  proved  to  be  the 
meloe  proscarabeus  of  Linnaeus.  The  discovery  of 
the  epispastic  property  in  any  native  insept,  is  an  ob- 
ject of  interest.  But  that  such  insects  may  become 
extensively  useful,  they  must  be  abundant  and  easy  of 
collection.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Ca'nthum.  Sugar-candy. 

CA'NTHUS.  (Kav0of,  the  tire  or  iron  binding  of  a 
cart-wheel.  Dr.  Turton,  in  his  glossary,  supposes  from 
its  etymology,  that  it  originally  signified  the  circular 
extremity  of  the  eyelid.)  The  angle  or  corner  of  the 
eye,  where  the  upper  and  under  eyelids  meet.  That 
next  the  nose  is  termed  the  internal  or  greater  cantlius ; 
and  the  other,  the  external  or  less  canthus. 

Cantion.  Sugar. 

CA'NULA.  (Diminutive  of  canna,  a reed.)  Can 
jiula.  A small  tube.  The  term  is  genelally  applied 
to  a tube  adapted  to  a sharp  instrument,  with  which 
it  is  thrust  into  a cavity  or  tumour,  containing  a fluid  ; 
the  perforation  being  made,  the  sharp  instrument  is 
withdrawn,  and  the  canula  left,  in  order  that  the  fluid 
may  pass  through  it. 

Canusa.  Crystal. 

CAOUTCHOU'C.  The  substance  so  called  is  ob- 
tained from  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  exists  also  in 
the  mineral. 

1.  The  first,  known  by  the  names  Indian  rubber, 
Elastic  gum,  Cayenne  resin,  Cautchuc,  and  Caout- 
chouc, is  prepared  principally  from  the  juice  of  the 
Siphonia  elastica  ; — foliis  ternatis  ellipticis  integerri- 
mis  subtis  canis  longc  petiolatis,  (Suppl.  Plant.)  and 
also  from  the  Jatropha  elastica  and  Unccola  elastica. 
The  manner  of  obtaining  this  juice  is  by  making  in- 
cisions through  the  bark  of  the  lower  part  of  the  trunk 
of  the  tree,  from  which  the  fluid  resin  issues  in  great 
abundance,  appearing  of  a milky  whiteness  as  it  flows 
into  the  vessel  placed  to  receive  it,  and  into  which  it 
is  conducted  by  means  of  a tuhe  or  leaf  fixed  in  the 
incision,  and  supported  with  clay.  On  exposure  to 
the  air,  this  milky  juice  gradually  inspissates  into  a 
soft,  reddish,  elastic,  resin.  It  is  formed  by  the  In- 
dians in  South  America  into  various  figures,  but  is 
commonly  brought  to  Europe  in  that  of  pear-shaped 
bottles,  which  are  said  to  be  formed  by  spreading  the 
juice  of  the  Siphonia  over  a proper  mould  of  clay;  as 
soon  as  one  layer  is  dry,  another  is  added,  until  the 
bottle  be  of  the  thickness  desired.  It  is  then  exposed 
to  a thick  dense  smoke,  or  to  a fire,  until  it  becomes  so 
dry  as  not  to  stick  to  the  fingers,  \vhen,  by  means  of 


CAO 


CAP 


certain  instruments  of  iron,  or  wood,  it  is  ornamented 
on  the  outside  with  various  figures.  This  being  done, 
it  remains  only  to  pick  out  the  mould,  which  is  easily 
effected  by  softening  it  with  water. 

' “ The  elasticity  of  this  substance  is  its  mos  t remark- 
able property:  when  warmed,  as  by  immersion  in  hot 
water*slips  of  it  may  be  drawn  out  to  seven  or  eight 
times  their  original  length,  and  will  return  to  their  for- 
mer dimensions  nearly.  Cold  renders  it  stiff  and  rigid, 
but  warmth  restores  its  original  elasticity.  Exposed 
to  the  fire  it  softens,  swells  up,  and  burns  with  a bright 
flame.  In  Cayenne  it  is  used  to  give  light  as  a candle. 
Its  solvents  are  aether,  volatile  oils,  and  petroleum. 
The  aether,  however,  requires  to  be  washed  with  wa- 
ter repeatedly,  and  in  this  state  it  dissolves  it  com- 
pletely. Pelletier  recommends  to  boil  the  caoutchouc 
in  water  for  an  hour;  then  to  cut  it  into  slender 
threads;  to  boil  it  again  about  an  hour;  and  then  to 
put  it  into  rectified  sulphuric  aether  in  a vessel  close 
stopped.  In  this  way  he  says  it  will  be  totally  dis- 
solved in  a few  days,  without  heat,  except  the  impuri- 
ties, which  will  fall  to  the  bottom  if  aether  enough  be 
employed.  Berniard  says,  the  nitrous  aether  dissolves 
it  better  than  the  sulphuric.  If  this  solution  be  spread 
on  any  substance,  the  aether  evaporates  very  quickly, 
and  leaves  a coating  of  caoutchouc  unaltered  in  its  pro- 
perties. Naphtha,  or  petroleum,  rectified  into  a co- 
lourless liquid,  dissolves  it,  and  likewise  leaves  it  un- 
changed by  evaporation.  Oil  of  turpentine  softens  it, 
and  forms  a pasty  mass,  that  may  be  spread  as  a var- 
nish, but  is  very  long  in  drying.  A solution  of  caout- 
chouc in  rive  times  its  weight  of  oil  of  turpentine,  and 
this  solution  dissolved  in  eight  times  its  weight  of  dry 
ing  linseed  oil  by  boiling,  is  said  to  form  the  varnish  of 
air-balloons.  Alkalies  act  upon  it  so  as  in  time  to  de- 
stroy its  elasticity.  Sulphuric  acid  is  decomposed  by 
it ; sulphurous  acid  being  evolved,  and  the  caoutchouc 
converted  into  charcoal.  Nitric  acid  acts  upon  it  with 
heat;  nitrous  gas  being  given  out,  and  oxalic  acid 
crystallizing  from  the  residuum.  On  distillation  it 
gives  out  ammonia,  and  carburetted  hydrogen. 

Caoutchouc  may  be  formed  into  various  articles 
without  undergoing  the  process  of  solution.  If  it  be 
cut  into  a uniform  slip  of  a proper  thickness,  and  wound 
spirally  round  a glass  or  metal  rod,  so  that  the  edges 
shall  be  in  close  contact,  and  in  this  state  be  boiled 
for  some  time,  the  edges  will  adhere  so  as  to  form  a 
tube.  Pieces  of  it  may  be  readily  joined  by  touching 
the  edges  with  the  solution  in  aether ; but  this  is  not 
absolutely  necessary,  for,  if  they  be  merely  softened 
by  heat,  and  then  pressed  together,  they  will  unite 
very  firmly. 

If  linseed  oil  be  rendered  very  drying  by  digesting  it 
upon  an  oxide  of  lead,  and  afterward  applied  with  a 
small  brush  on  any  surface,  and  dried  by  the  sun  or 
in  the  smoke,  it  will  afford  a pellicle  of  considerable 
firmness,  transparent,  burning  like  caoutchouc,  and 
wonderfully  elastic.  A pound  of  this  oil,  spread  upon 
a.  stone,  and  exposed  to  the  air  for  six  or  seven  months, 
acquired  almost  all  the  properties  of  caoutchouc;  it 
was  used  to  make  catheters  and  bougies,  to  varnish 
balloons,  and  for  other  purposes. 

Of  the  mineral  caoutchouc  there  are  several  varie- 
ties:— 1.  Of  a blackish-brown,  inclining  to  olive,  soft, 
exceedingly  compressible,  unctuous,  with  a slightly 
aromatic  smell.  It  burns  with  a bright  flame,  leaving 
a black  oily  residuum,  which  does  not  become  dry. 
2.  Black,  dry,  and  cracked  on  the  surface,  but,  when 
cut  into,  of  a yellowish-white.  A fluid  resembling 
pyrolignic  acid  exudes  from  it  when  recently  cut.  It 
is  pellucid  on  the  edges,  and  nearly  of  a hyacinthine 
red  colour.  3.  Similar  to  the  preceding,  but  of  a some- 
what firmer  texture,  and  ligneous  appearance,  from 
having  acquired  consistency  in  repeated  layers.  4. 
Resembling  the  first  variety,  but  of  a darker  colour, 
and  adhering  to  gray  calcareous  spar,  with  some  grains 
of  galtena.  5.  Of  a liver-brown  colour,  having  the 
aspect  of  the  vegetable  caoutchouc,  but  passing  by 
gradual  transition  into  a brittle  bitumen,  of  vitreous 
lustre,  and  a yellowish  colour.  6.  Dull  reddish-brown, 
of  a spongy  or  cork-like  texture,  containing  blackish- 
gray  nuclei  of  impure  caoutchouc.  Many  more  varieties 
are  enumerated. 

One  specimen  of  this  caoutchouc  has  been  found  in 
a petrified  marine  shell  enclosed  in  a rock,  and  another 
enclosed  in  a crystallized  fluor  spar. 

. The  mineral  caoutchouc  resists  the  action  of  solvents 


still  more  than  the  vegetable.  The  rectified  oil  of 
petroleum  affects  it  most,  particularly  when  by  partial 
burning  it  is  resolved  into  a pitchy  viscous  substance. 
A hundred  grains  of  a specimen  analyzei  in  the  dry 
way  by  Klaproth,  afforded  carburetted  hydrogen  gas 
38  cubic  inches,  carbonic  acid  gas  4,  bituminous  oil  73 
grains,  acidulous  phlegm  1.5,  charcoal  6.25,  lime  2, 
silex  1.5,  oxide  of  iron  .75,  sulphate  of  lime  .5,  alu- 
mina .25. 

CAPA1BA.  See  Copaifera  officinalis. 

CAPAIVA.  See  Copaifera  officinalis. 

Capeli'na.  (From  capeline,  French,  a woman’s 
hat,  or  bandage.)  A double-headed  roller,  put  round 
the  head. 

Cape  ' lla.  A cupel  or  test.  Also  a name  for  a goat. 

CAPER.  See  Capparis. 

Caper-bush.  See  Capparis. 

Ca'petus.  (Kane'Jos,  per  apheeresin , pro  ona-Ktjos ; 
from  cKan'joi,  to  dig.)  Hippocrates  means  by  this 
word  a foramen,  which  is  impervious,  and  needs  the 
use  of  a chirurgical  instrument  to  make  an  opening ; 
as  the  anus  of  some  new-born  infants. 

Ca'phora.  (Arabian.)  Camphire. 

Ca'phura  baros  indorum.  A name  for  camphire. 

Caphurji;  oleum.  An  aromatic  oil  distilled  from 
the  root  of  the  cinnamon-tree. 

CAPILLACEUS.  Capillary. 

CAPILLARIS.  See  Capillary. 

Capillares  plants.  Capillary,  or  hair-shaped 
plants. 

Capillaris  vermiculus.  See  Crinones  and  Dra- 
cunculus. 

CAPI'LLARY.  ( Capillaris ; from  capillus,  a little 
hair : so  called  from  the  resemblance  to  hair  or  fine 
thread.)  1.  Capillary  vessels.  The  very  small  rami- 
fications of  the  arteries,  which  terminate  upon  the 
external  surface  of  the  body,  or  on  the  surface  of  inter- 
nal cavities,  are  called  capillary. 

2.  Capillary  attraction.  See  Attraction. 

3.  Applied  to  parts  of  plants,  which  are,  or  resemble, 
hairs  : thus,  a capillary  root  is  one  which  consists  of 
many  very  fine  fibres,  as  that  of  Festuca  ovina , and 
most  grasses. 

Capilla'tio.  (From  capillus , a hair.)  A capillary 
fracture  of  the  cranium. 

CAPI'LLUS.  (Quasi  capitis  pilus , the  hair  of 
the  head.)  The  hair.  Small,  cylindrical,  transparent, 
insensible,  and  elastic  filaments,  which  arise  from  the 
skin,  and  are  fastened  in  it  by  means  of  small  roots. 
The  human  hair  is  composed  of  a spongy,  cellular 
texture,  containing  a coloured  liquid,  and  a proper 
covering.  Hair  is  divided  into  two  kinds ; long,  which 
arises  on  the  scalp,  cheek,  chin,  breasts  of  men,  the 
anterior  parts  of  the  arms  and  legs,  the  arm-pits,  groins, 
and  pelvis:  and  short,  which  is  softer  than  the  long, 
and  is  present  over  the  whole  body,  except  only  the. 
palm  of  the  hand  and  sole  of  the  foot.  The  hair  origi 
nates  in  the  adipose  membrane  from  an  oblong  mem 
braneous  bulb,  which  has  vessels  peculiar  to  it.  The 
hair  is  distinguished  by  different  names  in  certain 
parts  ; as,  capillus,  on  the  top  of  the  head  : crinis,  on 
the  back  of  the  head ; circrinnus,  on  the  temples ; 
cilium,  on  the  eyelids ; supercilium , on  the  eyebrows  ; 
vibrissa,  in  the  nostrils  ; barba , on  the  chin ; pappus, 
on  the  middle  of  the  chin ; mystax , on  the  upper  lip ; 
pilus,  on  the  body. 

From  numerous  experiments  Vauquelin  infers,  that 
black  hair  is  formed  of  nine  different  substances, 
namely : — 

1.  An  animal  matter,  which  constitutes  the  greater 
part.  2.  A white  concrete  oil,  in  small  quantity.  3. 
Another  oil  of  a grayish-green  colour,  more  abundant 
than  the  former.  4.  Iron,  the  state  of  which  in  the 
hair  is  uncertain.  5.  A few  particles  of  oxide  of  man 
ganese.  6.  Phosphate  of  lime.  7.  Carbonate  of  lime, 
in  very  small  quantity.  8.  Silex,  in  a conspicuous 
quantity.  9.  Lastly,  a considerable  quautity  of  sul- 
phur. 

The  same  experiments  show,  that  red  hair  differs 
from  black  only  in  containing  a red  oil  instead  of  a 
blackish-green  oil , and  that  white  hair  differs  from 
both  these  only  in  the  oil  being  nearly  colourless,  and 
in  containing  phosphate  of  magnesia,  which  is  not 
found  in  them. 

Capillus  veneris.  See  Adianthum. 

Capillus  veneris  canadensis.  See  Adianthunl 
. canadense. 


383 


CAP 


CAP 


Capiple'nium.  (From  caput,  the  head,  and  plenus, 
full ; a barbarous  word : bui  Baglivi  uses  it  to  signify 
that  continual  heaviness  or  disorder  in  the  head,  which 
the  Greeks  call  Kapijfiapia.)  A catarrh. 

Capistra'tio.  (From  capistrum,  a bridle : so  called 
because  the  praepuce  is  restrained  as  it  were  with  a 
bridle.)  See  Phimosis. 

CAPI'STRUM.  (From  caput , the  head.) 

1.  A bandage  for  the  head  is  so  cal'ed. 

2.  In  Vogel’s  Nosology  it  is  the  same  as  Trismus. 

CA'PITAL.  Capitalis.  1.  Belonging  to  the  caput, 

or  head. 

2.  The  head  or  upper  part  of  an  alembic. 

Capita'lia.  (From  caput,  the  head.)  Medicines 
which  relieve  pains  of  the  head. 

CAPITATUS.  (From  caput,  the  head.)  Headed. 
See  Capitulum. 

CAPITE'LLUM.  The  head  or  seed  vessels,  fre- 
quently applied  to  mosses,  &c. 

CAPITILU'VIUM.  (From  caput,  the  head,  and 
lavo , to  wash.)  A lotion  for  the  head. 

Ca'pitis  obliquus  inferior  et  major.  See  Obli- 
quus  inferior  capitis. 

Capitis  par  tertium  fallopii.  See  Trachelo- 
mastoideus. 

Capitis  posticus.  See  Rectus  capitis  posticus 
major. 

Capitis  rectus.  See  Rectus  capitis  posticus  minor . 

CAPI'TULUM.  (Diminutive  of  caput,  the  head.) 

1.  A small  head. 

2.  A protuberance  of  a bone,  received  into  the  con- 
cavity of  another  bone. 

3.  An  alembic. 

In  botany,  the  term  for  a species  of  inflorescence, 
called  a head  or  tuft,  formed  of  many  flowers,  in  a 
globular  form,  upon  a common  peduncle. 

From  the  insertion  of  the  flowers,  it  is  called, 

1.  Pedunculated ; as  in  Astragalus  syriacus , and 
Eryngium  maritimum. 

2.  Sessile ; as  in  Trifolium  tomentosum. 

3.  Terminal;  as  in  Monarda  fistulosa. 

4.  Axillary  ; as  in  Oomphrena  sessilis. 

From  the  figure,  it  is  said  to  be, 

1.  Globose ; as  in  Gomphrena  globosa. 

2.  Subrotund ; as  in  Trifolium  pratense. 

3.  Conic ; as  in  Trifolium,  montanum. 

4.  Dimidiate , flat  on  one  side,  round  on  the  other ; 
as  in  Trifolium  lupinaster. 

From  its  covering, 

1.  Naked ; as  in  Illecebrum  polygonoides. 

2.  Foliose ; as  in  Plantago  indico. 

A capitulum  that  is  very  small,  and  is  mostly  in  the 
axilla,  is  called  Glomerulus. 

CAPI'VI.  See  Copaifera  officinalis. 

CAPNELAS'UM.  (From  Kairvos , smoke,  and  c\aiov, 
oil ; so  named  from  its  smoky  exhalations  when  ex- 
posed to  heat.)  In  Galen’s  works  it  means  a resin. 

Ca'pnias.  (From  Kairvos,  a smoke.)  1.  A jasper 
of  a smoky  colour. 

2.  A vine  which  bears  white  and  part  black  grapes. 

Capni'ston.  (From  Kairvos,  smoke.)  A prepara- 
tion of  spice  and  oil,  made  by  kindling  the  spices,  and 
fumigating  the  oil. 

Capni'tis.  (From  Kairvos,  smoke;  so  called  from 
its  smoky  colour.)  Tutty. 

CAPNOI'DES.  (From  Kairvos,  fumitory,  and  udos, 
likeness.)  Resembling  fumitory. 

CA'PNOS.  (Kairvos,  smoke ; so  called,  says  Blanch- 
ard, because  its  juice,  if  applied  to  the  eyes,  produces 
the  same  effect  and  sensations  as  smoke.)  Capnus. 
The  herb  fumitory.  See  Fumaria. 

CAPNUS.  % See  Capnos. 

Ca'ppa.  ( A capite,  from  the  head : so  called  from 
its  supposed  resemblance.)  The  herb  monkshood. 
See  Aconitum. 

CA'PPARIS.  (From  cabar , Arab,  or  zsapa  to 
Kairiravciv  apav,  from  its  curing  madness  and  melan- 


choly.) The  caper  plant. 
1.  Th 


^he  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnrean 
system.  Class,  Polyandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  caper  plant. 
See  Capparis  spinosa. 

Capparis  spinosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
caper  plant.  Capparis : — pendunculis  solitariis  uni- 
floris,stipulis  spinosis,foliis  annuis,capsulis  ovalibus 
of  Linnaeus.  The  buds,  or  unexpanded  flowers  of  this 
plant  are  in  common  use  as  a pickle,  which  is  said  to 
184 


possess  antiscorbutic  virtues.  The  bark  of  the  root 
was  formerly  in  high  esteem  as  a deobstruent. 

CAPREOLA'RIS.  (From  capreolus,  a tendril.) 
Capreolatus.  Resembling  in  its  contortions,  or  other 
appearance,  the  tendrils  of  a vine;  applied  to  the 
spermatic  vessels. 

CAPREOLA  TUS.  See  Capreolaris. 

CAPRE'OLUS.  (Dim.  of  caprea,  a tendril.  Dr. 
Turton  suggests  its  derivation  from  caper,  a goat,  the 
horn  of  which  its  contortions  somewhat  resemble.) 
1.  The  helix  or  circle  of  the  ear,  from  its  tendril-like 
contortion. 

2.  A Tendril.  See  Cirrus. 

Caprico'rnus.  Lead. 

CAPRIFICATION.  (Caprificatio ; from  capri feus, 
a wild  fig.)  The  very  singular  husbandry,  or  manage- 
ment of  fig-trees. 

CAPRIFI'CUS.  (From  caper,  a goat,  and  ficus,  a 
fig ; because  they  are  a chief  food  of  goats.)  The  wild 
fig-tree.  See  Ficus. 

Caprimulgus.  A species  of  bird,  the  goat-sucker, 
to  which  belong  the  night-hawk  and  the  whip- 
poor-will. 

Capri'zans.  Galen  and  others  used  this  word  to 
express  an  inequality  in  the  pulse,  when  it  leaps,  and, 
as  it  were,  dances  in  uncertain  strokes  and  periods. 

Capse'lla.  (Diminutive  of  capsa,  a chest,  from 
its  resemblance.)  A name  in  Marcellus  Empiricus  for 
viper’s  bugloss ; the  Echium  Italicum,  of  Linnaeus. 

CA'PSICUM.  (From  Kairjoi,  to  bite;  on  account 
of  its  effect  on  the  mouth.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  capsicum.  See 
Capsicum  annuum. 

Capsicum  annuum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  from  which  we  obtain  Cayenne  pepper.  Gui- 
nea pepper.  Piper  indicum;  Lada  chilli;  Capo  Mo- 
lago ; Solanum  ureas ; Siliquastrum  Plinii ; Piper 
Brazilianum ; Piper  Guineense ; Piper  Calecuticum  ; 
Piper  Hispanicum ; Piper  Lusitanicum.  Cayenne 
pepper.  This  species  of  pepper  is  obtained  from  the 
Capsicum ; caule  herbaceo,  pedunculus  solitariis  of 
Linnaeus.  What  is  generally  used  under  the  name  of 
Cayenne  pepper,  however,  is  an  indiscriminate  mix- 
ture of  the  powder  of  the  dried  pods  of  many  species 
of  capsicum,  but  especially  of  thecapsicum  minimum, 
or  bird  pepper,  which  is  the  hottest  of  all.  These  pep- 
pers have  been  chiefly  used  as  condiments.  They  pre- 
vent flatulence  from  vegetable  food,  and  give  warmth 
to  the  stomach,  possessing  all  the  virtues  of  the  oriental 
spices,  without  producing  those  complaints  of  the  head 
which  the  latter  are  ap^  to  occasion.  An  abuse  of 
them,  however,  gives  rise  to  visceral  obstructions, 
especially  of  the  liver.  In  the  practice  of  medicine, 
there  can  be  little  doubt  that  they  furnish  us  with  one 
of  the  purest  and  strongest  stimulants  which  can  be 
introduced  into  the  stomach,  and  may  be  very  useful 
in  some  paralytic  and  gouty  cases.  Dr.  Adair,  who 
first  introduced  them  into  practice,  found  them  useful 
in  the  cachexia  Africana,  which  he  considers  as  a 
most  frequent  and  fatal  predisposition  to  disease 
among  the  slaves.  Dr.  Wright  says,  that  in  dropsical 
and  other  complaints  where  chalybeates  are  indicated, 
a minute  portion  of  powdered  capsicum  forms  an  ex- 
cellent addition,  and  recommends  its  use  in  lethargic 
affections.  This  pepper  has  also  been  successfully 
employed  in  a species  of  cynanche  maligna,  which 
proved  very  fatal  in  the  West  Indies,  resisting  the  use 
of  Peruvian  bark,  wine,  and  other  remedies  com- 
monly employed.  In  tropical  fevers,  coma  and  deli- 
rium are  common  attendants ; and,  in  such  cases,  ca- 
taplasms of  capsicum  have  a speedy  and  happy  effect. 
They  redden  the  parts,  but  seldom  blister  unless  when 
kept  on  too  long.  In  ophthalmia  from  relaxation,  the 
diluted  juice  of  capsicum  is  found  to  be  a valuable 
remedy.  Dr.  Adair  gave  six  or  eight  grains  for  a dose, 
made  into  pills ; or  else  he  prepared  a tincture  by  di- 
gesting half  an  ounce  of  the  pepper  in  a pound  of  al- 
koliol,  the  dose  of  which  w’as  one  or  two  drachms, 
diluted  with  a sufficient  quantity  of  water.  A tinctura 
capsici  is  now  for  the  first  time  introduced  into  the 
London  pharmacopoeia. 

[“  This  article  is  well  known  for  its  excessively  pun- 
gent and  biting  acrimony,  exceeding  that  of  any  other 
article  used  with  food.  The  principle  on  which  its 
pungency  depends  is  soluble  In  both  water  and  alko- 


CAP 


CAR 


hoi,  and  is  not  dissipated  by  boiling.  Its  solutions  are 
disturbed  by  various  reagents,  which,  however,  are  of 
no  consequence  in  practical  use.  It  is  found  to  con- 
tain cinchonin,  resin,  mucilage,  and  an  acrid  principle 
said  to  be  alkaline.  It  is  sometimes  adulterated  with 
red-lead  to  increase  its  weight. 

Capsicum  is  a warm,  powerful  stimulant,  promoting 
digestion,  and  obviating  flatulence.  Its  abuse,  how- 
ever, produces  visceral  obstructions,  and  an  inflamma- 
tory disposition  in  the  system.  It  is  never  of  service 
to  the  healthy.  In  disease  it  is  administered  to  stimu- 
late the  stomach  when  in  a torpid  state,  and  to  excite 
the  nerves  of  the  paralytic  and  lethargic.  In  the 
West  Indies  it  has  been  employed  both  externally  and 
internally  in  ulcerated  sore  throat.  It  is  applied  as  a 
gargle  in  this  disease,  and  in  paralysis  of  the  tongue. 
Its  chief  use,  however,  is  as  a rubefacient  to  the  skin, 
upon  which  it  acts  with  great  power.  The  dose  inter- 
nally is  from  five  to  ten  grains.  The  rubefacient 
cataplasm  is  made  of  meal  and  vinegar  heated,  and  its 
surface  covered  with  pulverized  capsicum.”— Big. 
Mat.  Med.  A.] 

CA'PSULA.  (Diminutive  of  capsa , a chest  or 
case.)  A capsule.  1.  A membraneous  production 
enclosing  a part  of  the  body  like  a bag  ; as  the  capsu- 
lar ligaments,  the  capsule  of  the  crystalline  lens,  &c. 

2.  In  botany,  a dry,  woody,  coriaceous,  or  membra- 
neous pericarpium,  or  seed-vessel,  generally  splitting 
into  several  valves. 

The  parts  of  a capsule,  are, 

1.  The  valves,  or  external  shell,  into  which  the  cap- 
sule splits. 

2.  The  sutures,  or  the  external  surface  in  which  the 
valves  are  joined. 

3.  The  dissepimenta,  or  partitions  by  which  the  cap- 
sule is  divided  into  several  cells. 

4.  The  loculamenta , or  cells,  the  spaces  between  the 
partitions  and  valves. 

5.  The  columella,  or  central  column,  or  filament, 
which  unites  the  partitions,  and  to  which  the  seeds 
are  usually  attached. 

From  the  number  of  the  valves,  a capsule  is  said  to  be, 

1.  Bivalvcd ; as  in  Magnolia,  and  Capraria. 

2.  Three-valved ; as  in  Canna  indica. 

3.  Four-valved;  as  in  Datura  stramonium  and 
C Enothera  biennis. 

4.  Five-valved ; as  in  Illecebrum,  and  Coris. 

5.  Many oalved;  as  in  Hura  crepitans. 

6.  Operculate,  or  circumcised,  the  operculum  split- 
ting horizontally ; as  in  Hyosciamus  niger,  and  Le- 
cythis  ollaria. 

From  the  number  of  cells, 

1.  Unilocular , when  there  is  no  partition ; as  in 
Parnassia  palustris , and  Jlgrostema. 

2.  Bilocular , two-celled ; as  Hyosciamus  niger , and 
Datura  stramonium. 

3.  Trilocular,  three-celled ; as  in  JEsculus  hypocas- 
tanum,  and  Iris  germanica. 

4.  Quinquelocular,  five-celled  ; as  in  Hibiscus  syri- 
acus,  and  Azalea  procumbens. 

5.  Novemlocular,  nine-celled ; as  in  Punica  gra- 
natum. 

6.  Submultilocular , when  there  are  many  cells,  and 
the  partitions  do  not  reach  the  middle  of  the  capsule  ; 
as  in  Papaver  somniferum. 

From  the  appearance  of  the  external  surface,  a cap- 
sule is  called, 

1.  Glabrous  ; as  in  Papaver  somniferum. 

2.  Aculeate  ; as  in  Datura  stramonium. 

3.  Muricate ; as  in  Canna  indica. 

From  the  number  of  tubercles  on  the  external 
surface, 

1.  Capsula  dicocca,  or  didyma;  as  in  Spigelia. 

2.  C.  tricocca ; as  in  Euphorbia  lathyrus,  and  Cne- 
orum  tricoccum. 

3.  C.  tetracocca  ; as  in  Paururus  cernuus,  and  Evo- 
nymus  europeus. 

From  the  number  of  contiguous  capsules, 

1.  C.  simplex , if  solitary. 

2.  C.  duplex,  two  aggregated ; as  in  Pceonia  offi- 
cinalis. 

3.  C.  triplex ; as  in  Veratrum  album. 

4.  C.  quintuple x;  as  in  Aquilegia  vulgaris,  and 
Nigella. 

5.  C.  multiplex ; as  in  Sempervivum  tectorum. 

From  the  substance,  a capsule  is  called, 

1.  Membranaceous ; as  in  Datura  stramonium. 


2.  Corticated , the  external  fungous  membrane  re- 
ceding from  the  capsule ; as  in  Ricinus  communis. 

3.  Woody,  very  hard,  yet  splitting ; as  in  Hura  ere 
pitans. 

4.  Baccated,  when  the  seed  is  surrounded  by  a pulp  , 
as  Evonymus  europeus , and  Samyda. 

5.  Spurious,  if  the  calyx,  capsule-like,  surrounding 
the  seed,  splits ; as  in  Fagus  sylvatica. 

The  number  of  seeds  contained  in  the  capsule,  gives 
rise  to  the  following  distinctions. 

1.  Capsula  mcnosperma,  one-seeded ; as  in  Gom 
phrenia,  Herniaria , and  Salsola. 

2.  C.  disperma , two-seeded;  as  in  Hebenstratia , 
and  Buffonia. 

3.  C.  Trisperma , three-seeded ; as  in  Glaux,  and 
Hudsonia. 

4.  C.  polysperma,  many-seeded;  as  in  Papaver  som- 
niferum. 

Capsula  atrabilaris.  See  Renal  Glands. 
Capsula  renalis.  See  Renal  Glands. 

CA  PSULAR.  (Capsularis ; from  capsa,  a bag.) 
Surrounding  a part,  like  a bag : applied  to  a ligament 
which  surrounds  every  moveable  articulation,  and 
contains  the  synovia  like  a bag. 

CA  PSULE.  See  Capsula. 

Capsule  of  glisson.  Capsula  Glissonii.  Vagi- 
na portce  ; Vagina  Glissonii.  A strong  tunic,  formed 
of  cellular  texture,  which  accompanies  the  vena  portae, 
and  its  most  minute  ramifications,  throughout  the 
whole  liver. 

Ca'pulum.  (From  Kapirrw,  to  bend.)  A contor- 
tion of  the  eyelids,  or  other  parts. 

Ca'pur.  (Arabian.)  Camphire. 

CA  PUT.  ( Caput , itis.  neut. ; from  capio,  to  take ; 
because  from  it,  according  to  Varro,  the  senses  take 
their  origin.)  1.  The  head,  cranium,  or  skull.  It  is 
situated  above  or  upon  the  trunk,  and  united  to  the 
cervical  vertebrae.  It  is  distinguished  into  skull  and 
face.  On  the  skull  are  observed  vertex,  or  crown ; 
sinciput,  or  foreparts ; occiput,  or  hinder  part ; and 
the  temples.  The  parts  distinguished  on  the  face  are 
well  known ; as  the  forehead,  nose,  eyes,  &c.  The 
arteries  of  the  head  are  branches  of  the  carotids ; and 
the  veins  empty  themselves  into  the  jugulars.  See 
Skull  and  Face. 

2.  The  upper  extremity  of  a bone ; as  the  head  of  the 
humerus  or  femur. 

3.  The  origin  of  a muscle  ; as  the  long  head  of  the 
biceps. 

4.  A protuberance  like  the  head  of  any  thing ; as 
caput  gallinaginis. 

5.  The  beginning  of  a part ; as  caput  cceci. 

6.  The  remains  of  any  thing  after  its  destruction  by 
fire,  or  other  means  : hence  caput  mortuum,  or  ashes. 

Caput  gallinaginis.  Verumontanum.  A cuta- 
neous eminence  in  the  urethra  of  men,  before  the  neck 
of  the  bladder,  somewhat  like  the  head  of  a woodcock 
in  miniature,  around  which  the  seminal  ducts,  and  the 
ducts  of  the  prostate  gland,  open. 

Caput  mortuum.  A fanciful  term,  much  used  by 
the  old  chemists,  but  now  entirely  rejected.  It  de- 
noted the  fixed  residue  of  operations.  As  the  earlier 
chemists  did  not  examine  these,  they  did  not  find  any 
inconvenience  in  one  general  term  to  denote  them: 
but  the  most  slender  acquaintance  with  modern  che- 
mistry must  show,  that  it  is  utterly  impracticable  to 
denote,  by  one  general  term,  all  the  various  matters 
that  remain  fixed  in  certain  degrees  of  heat.  The  term 
is  obsolete,  but  spoken  of  fancifully. 

Caput  obstipum.  The  wry  neck.  Mostly  a spas- 
modic complaint. 

Caput  purgia.  (A  barbar  tus  word,  from  caput , the 
head,  and  purgo , to  purge.)  Medicines  which,  by 
causing  a defluxion  from  the  nose,  purge,  as  it  were, 
the  head,  as  some  errhines  do. 

Capyri'dion.  (From  Kanvpos , burnt.)  Capyrion. 

A medicated  cake,  much  baked. 

Capy'rion.  See  Capyridion. 

CA'RABUS.  A genus  of  insects  of  the  beetle  kind. 
Two  species,  the  chrysocephalus  and  ferrugineus, 
have  been  recommended  for  the  toothache.  They 
must  be  pressed  between  the  fingers,  and  then  rubbed 
on  the  gum  and  tooth  affected. 

Caroco’smos.  A name  of  the  sour  mare’s  milk, 
so  much  admired  by  the  Tartars. 

Caragua'ta.  The  aloe  of  Brazil. 

CARA'NNA.  (Spanish.)  Caragna.  Car  annas 


OAR 


CAR 


ff HQnmi.  Brcsilis.  A concrete  resinous  juice,  that 
exudes  from  a large  tree,  of  which  we  have  no  parti- 
cular account.  It  is  brought  from  New  Spain  and 
America,  in  little  masses,  rolled  up  in  leaves  of  flags ; 
externally  and  internally  it  is  of  a brownish  colour, 
variegated  with  irregular  white  streaks.  When  fresh, 
it  is  soft  and  tenacious ; but  becomes  dry  and  friable 
by  keeping.  Pure  caranna  has  an  agreeable  aromatic 
smell,  especially  when  heated,  and  a bitterish  slightly 
pungent  taste.  It  was  formerly  employed  as  an  in- 
gredient in  vulnerary  balsams,  strengthening,  discu- 
tient,  and  suppurating  plasters ; but  its  scarcity  has 
caused  it  to  be  forgotten. 

CARAWAY.  See  Carum. 

Ca'rbasus.  K ap6aa-o$.  Scribonius  Largus  uses 

this  word  for  lint. 

[“  Carbazotic  acid.  By  the  action  of  nitric  acid 
upon  indigo,  a substance  is  obtained  in  yellow  brilliant 
crystalline  plates,  which  exhibits  acid  properties,  and 
has  been  called  by  Dr.  Liebig,  carbazotic  acid , a name 
derived  from  its  composition,  which  is  as  follows : 


Carbon,  13.043  or  15  atoms. 

Azote,  16.167  or  3 

Oxygen,  ........... .48.790  or  15 


To  obtain  carbazotic  acid,  the  following  process  has 
beep  given  by  Dr.  Liebig : 

A portion  of  the  best  indigo  is  to  be  broken  into 
small  fragments,  and  moderately  heated  with  eight  or 
ten  times  its  weight  of  nitric  acid,  of  moderate 
strength.  It  will  dissolve,  evolving  nitrous  vapours 
and  swelling  up  in  the  vessel ; after  the  scum  has  fall- 
en, the  liquid  is  to  be  boiled,  and  nitric  acid  is  added 
as  long  as  any  red  vapours  are  disengaged.  When  the 
liquid  has  become  cold,  a large  quantity  of  semi-trans- 
parent yellow  crystals  will  be  formed,  and  if  the  ope- 
ration has  been  well  conducted,  no  artificial  tannin 
or  resin  will  be  obtained.  The  crystals  are  to  be 
washed  with  cold  water,  and  then  boiled  in  water 
sufficient  to  dissolve  them.  If  any  oily  drops  of  tannin 
form  on  the  surface  of  the  solution,  they  must  be  care- 
fully removed  by  touching  ihem  with  filtering  paper. 
Then  filtering  the  fluid,  and  allowing  it  to  cool,  yellow 
brilliant  crystalline  plates  will  be  obtained,  which  will 
not  lose  their  lustre  by  washing.  To  obtain  the  sub- 
stance perfectly  pure,  the  crystals  must  be  redissolved 
in  boiling  water,  and  neutralized  by  carbonate  of  po- 
tassa.  Upon  cooling,  a salt  of  potassa  will  crystallize, 
which  should  be  purified  by  repeated  crystallizations. 

When  the  substance  is  heated,  it  fuses,  and  is  volati- 
lized without  decomposition ; when  subjected  to  a 
strong  heat,  it  inflames  without  explosion,  its  vapours 
burning  with  a yellow  flame,  and  a carbonaceous  resi- 
due remaining.  It  is  but  little  soluble  in  cold  water, 
but  much  more  so  in  boiling  water ; the  solution  has  a 
bright  yellow  colour,  reddens  litmus,  has  an  extremely 
bitter  taste,  and  acts  like  a strong  acid  on  metallic 
oxides,  dissolving  them,  and  forming  peculiar  crystal- 
lizable  salts.  Ether  and  alkohol  dissolve  it  readily. 

Carbazotic  acid  combines  with  bases,  and  forms 
salts  called  carbaiotates .”  (Of  which  the  following 
have  been  determined :) 

Carbazotate  of  Potassa,  crystallizes  in  long,  yellow, 
semi-transparent,  and  very  brilliant  needles ; it  dis- 
solves in  260  parts  of  water  at  59°  Fah.  Strong  acids 
decompose  it.  When  a little  is  gradually  heated  in  a 
glass  tube,  it  first  fuses,  and  then  suddenly  explodes, 
breaking  the  tube  to  atoms;  traces  of  charcoal  are 
observed  on  the  fragments.  The  slight  solubility  of  this 
salt  supplies  an  easy  method  of  testing  and  separating 
potassa  in  a fluid.  Even  the  potassa  in  tincture  of 
litmus  may  be  discovered  by  it ; on  the  addition  of  a 
few  drops  of  carbazotic  acid  dissolved  in  alkohol,  to 
infusion  of  litmus,  crystals  of  the  salt  gradually  sepa- 
rate. The  salt  contains  no  water  of  crystallization. 
Its  composition  is  potassa  16.21,  acid  83.79. 

Carbazotate  of  Soda  crystallizes  in  fine  silky  yellow 
needles,  having  the  general  properties  of  the  salt  of 
potassa,  but  soluble  in  from  20  to  24  parts  of  water  at 
59°  F. 

Carbazotate  of  Ammonia  forms  very  long,  flattened, 
brilliant,  yellow  crystals,  very  soluble  in  water. 
Heated  carefully  in  a glass  tube,  it  fuses,  and  is  vola- 
tilized without  decomposition;  heated  suddenly,  it 
inflames  without  explosion,  and  leaves  much  carbo- 
naceous residue. 

Carbazotate  of  Baryta,  obtained  by  heating  carbo- 
nate of  baryta,  and  carbazotic  acid  with  water,  crys- , 
180 


tallizes  in  quadrangular  prisms  of  a deep  colour,  and 
dissolves  easily  in  water.  When  heated  it  fuses,  and 
is  decomposed  with  very  powerful  explosion,  pro- 
ducing a vivid  yellow  flame : 100  parts  lose  at  212°  F. 
125  parts  of  water ; 100  parts  of  the  anhydrous  salt 
contain  75.72  acid,  and  24.28  baryta. 

Carbazotate  of  Lime  obtained  like  the  salt  of  baryta, 
forms  flattened,  quadrangular  prisms,  very  soluble  in 
water,  and  detonating  like  the  salt  of  potassa. 

Carbazotate  of  Magnesia  forms  very  long  indistinct 
needles,  of  a clear  yellow  colour,  is  very  soluble  and 
detones  violently. 

Carbazotate  of  Copper , prepared  by  decomposing 
sulphate  of  copper  by  carbazotate  of  baryta:  it  crys- 
tallizes with  difficulty,  the  crystals  being  of  a fine 
green  colour : it  is  deliquescent ; when  heated  it  is 
decomposed  without  explosion. 

Carbazotate  of  Silver.  Carbazotic  acid  readily  dis- 
solves oxide  of  silver,  when  heated  with  it  and  water ; 
and  the  solution,  gradually  evaporated,  yields  starry 
groups  of  fine  acicular  crystals  of  the  colour  and  lus- 
tre of  gold ; the  salt  dissolves  readily  in  water ; when 
heated  to  a certain  degree  ; it  does  not  detonate,  but 
fuses  like  gunpowder. 

Proto-carbazotate  of  Mercury,  obtained  in  small 
yellow  triangular  crystals,  by  mixing  boiling  solutions 
of  the  carbazotate  of  potassa  or  soda,  and  proto- 
nitrate of  mercury.  It  requires  more  than  1200  parts 
of  water  for  its  solution  ; it  consists  of  53.79  acid,  and 
46.21  protoxide  of  mercury  per  cent. 

Carbazotate  of  Lead  may  be  formed  by  decom- 
posing a salt  of  lead  by  carbazotate  of  potassa  or  soda: 
it  is  a yellow  powder,  but  slightly  soluble,  and  deto- 
nating by  heat. 

All  these  salts  detonate  much  more  powerfully  when 
heated  in  close  vessels,  than  when  heated  in  the  air 
and  what  is  remarkable,  those  bases  yielding  oxygen 
most  readily  are  those  which  explode  with  least 
force.”— From  Webster,  as  taken  from  Ann.  de  Chim 
xxv.  72,  and  Quart.  Jour.  N.  S.  iii.  A.] 

C A'RBO.  ( Charbah,  Hebrew,  burnt  or  dried.)  Coal. 

1.  In  medicine  and  chemistry,  it  is  comtnoiily  un- 
derstood to  mean  charcoal,  and  receives  its  name  from 
its  mode  of  preparation,  which  is  by  burning  pieces 
of  light  wood  into  a dry,  black  coal. 

2.  A carbuncle.  See  Anthrax. 

Carbo  ligna.  Charcoal.  As  an  external  appli- 
cation, powdered  charcoal  has  been  recommended  in 
the  cure  of  gangrene,  from  external  causes,  and  all 
descriptions  of  foetid  ulcers.  Meat  which  has  acquired 
a mawkish  or  even  putrid  smell,  is  found  to  be  ren- 
dered perfectly  sweet,  by  rubbing  it  with  powdered 
charcoal.  It  is  also  used  as  tooth-powder. 

CA'RBON.  (From  carbo , coal.)  Chemists  apply 
this  term  to  the  diamond,  and  what  is  commonly  called 
charcoal.  The  diamond  is  the  purest  form  of  it. 

1.  When  vegetable  matter,  particularly  the  more 
solid,  as  wood,  is  exposed  to  heat  in  close  vessels,  the 
volatile  parts  fly  off,  and  leave  behind  a black  porous 
substance,  which  is  charcoal.  If  this  be  suffered  to 
undergo  combustion  in  contact  with  oxygen,  or  with 
atmospheric  air,  much  the  greater  part  of  it  will  com- 
bine with  the  oxygen,  and  escape  in  the  form  of  gas ; 
leaving  about  a two-hundredth  part,  which  consists 
chiefly  of  different  saline  and  metallic  substances. 
This  pure  inflammable  part  of  the  charcoal  is  what  is 
commonly  called  carbon ; and  if  the  gas  be  received 
into  proper  vessels,  the  carbon  will  be  found  to  have 
Been  converted  by  the  oxygen  into  an  acid,  called  the 
carbonic.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

From  the  circumstance,  that  inflammable  sub- 
stances refract  light  in  a ratio  greater  than  that  of  their 
densities,  Newton  inferred,  that  the  diamond  was  in 
flammable.  The  quantity  of  the  inflammable  part  of 
charcoal,  requisite  to  form  a hundred  parts  of  carbonic 
acid,  was  calculated  by  Lavoisier  to  be  twenty-eight 
parts.  From  a careful  experiment  of  Mr.  Tennant, 
27.6  parts  of  diamond,  and  72.4  of  oxygen,  formed  100 
of  carbonic  acid ; and  hence  he  inferred  the  identity 
of  diamond  and  the  inflammable  part  of  charcoal. 

Well-burned  charcoal  is  a conductor  of  electricity, 
though  wood  simply  deprived  of  its  moisture  by  baking 
is  a non-conductor  ; but  it  is  a very  bad  conductor  of 
caloric,  a property  of  considerable  use  on  many  occa- 
sions, as  in  lining  crucibles. 

It  is  insoluble  in  water,  and  hence  the  utility  of 
charring  the  surface  of  wood  exposed  to  thqt  liquid,  ia 


CAR 


CAR 


order  to  preserve  it,  a circumstance  not  unknown  to 
the  ancients.  This  preparation  of  timber  has  been 
proposed  as  an  effectual  preventive  of  what  is  com- 
monly called  the  dry  rot.  It  has  an  attraction,  how- 
ever, for  a certain  portion  of  water,  which  it  retains 
very  forcibly.  Heated  red-hot,  or  nearly  so,  it  de- 
composes water;  forming  with  its  oxygen  carbonic 
acid,  or  carbonic  oxide,  according  to  the  quantity  pre- 
sent ; and  with  the  hydrogen  a gaseous  carburet,  call- 
ed carburetted  hydrogen,  or  heavy  inflammable  air. 

Charcoal  is  infusible  by  any  heat.  If  exposed  to  a 
very  high  temperature  in  close  vessels,  it  loses  little  or 
nothing  of  its  weight,  but  shrinks,  becomes  more  com- 
pact, and  acquires  a deeper  black  colour. 

Recently  prepared  charcoal  has  a remarkable  pro- 
perty of  absorbing  different  gases,  arid  condensing 
them  in  its  pores,  without  any  alteration  of  their  pro- 
perties or  its  own. 

Very  light  charcoal,  such  as  that  of  cork,  absorbs 
scarcely  any  air  ; while  the  pit-coal  of  Rastiberg,  sp. 
gr.  1.326,  absorbs  ten  times  and  a half  its  volume.  The 
absorption  was  always  completed  in  24  hours.  This 
curious  faculty,  which  is  common  to  all  porous  bodies, 
resembles  the  action  of  capillary  tubes  on  liquids. 
When  a piece  of  charcoal,  charged  with  one  gas,  is 
transferred  into  another,  it  absorbs  some  of  it,  and 
parts  with  a portion  of  that  first  condensed.  In  the 
experiments  of  Messrs.  Allen  and  Pepys,  charcoal  was 
found  to  imbibe  from  the  atmosphere  in  a day  about 
one-eighth  of  its  weight  in  water.  For  a general  view 
of  absorption,  see  Gas. 

When  oxygen  is  condensed  by  charcoal,  carbonic 
acid  is  observed  to  form  at  the  end  of  several  months. 
But  the  most  remarkable  property  displayed  by  char- 
coals impregnated  with  gas,  is  that  with  sulphuretted 
hydrogen  when  exposed  to  the  air  or  oxygen  gas.  The 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  speedily  destroyed,  and  water 
and  sulphur  result,  with  the  disengagement  of  consider- 
able heat.  Hydrogen  alone  has  no  such  effects.  When 
charcoal  was  exposed  by  Sir  Humphrey  Davy  to  intense 
ignition  in  vacuo,  and  in  condensed  azot,  by  means  of 
Mr.  Children’s  magnificent  voltaic  battery,  it  slowly 
volatilized,  and  gave  out  a little  hydrogen.  The  re- 
maining part  was  always  much  harder  than  before; 
and  in  one  case  so  hard  as  to  scratch  glass,  while  its 
lustre  was  increased.  This  fine  experiment  may  be  re- 
garded as  a near  approach  to  the  production  of  dia- 
mond. 

Charcoal  has  a powerful  affinity  for  oxygen ; whence 
its  use  in  disoxygenating  metallic  oxides,  and  restoring 
their  base  to  its  original  metallic  state,  or  reviving  the 
the  metal.  Thus  too  it  decomposes  several  of  the 
acids,  as  the  phosphoric  and  sulphuric,  from  which  it 
abstracts  their  oxygen,  and  leaves  the  phosphorus 
and  sulphur  free. 

Carbon  is  capable  of  combining  with  sulphur,  and 
with  hydrogen.  With  iron  it  forms  steel;  and  it 
unites  with  copper  into  a carburet,  as  observed  by  Dr. 
Priestley. 

A singular  and  important  property  of  charcoal  is 
that  of  destroying  the  smell,  colour,  and  taste  of  vari- 
ous substances  : for  the  first  accurate  experiments  on 
which  we  are  chiefly  indebted  to  Mr.  Lowitz,  of  Pe- 
tersburgh,  though  it  had  been  long  before  recommend- 
ed to  correct  the  foetor  of  foul  ulcers,  and  as  an  anti- 
septic. On  this  account  it  is  certainly  the  best  denti- 
frice. Water  that  has  become  putrid  by  long  keep- 
ing in  wooden  casks,  is  rendered  sweet  by  filtering 
through  charcoal  powder,  or  by  agitation  with  it; 
particularly  if  a few  drops  of  sulphuric  acid  be  added. 
Common  vinegar  boiled  with  charcoal  powder  be- 
comes perfectly  limpid.  Saline  solutions,  that  are 
tinged  yellow  or  brown,  are  rendered  colourless  in  the 
same  way,  so  as  to  afford  perfectly  white  crystals. 
The  impure  carbonate  of  ammonia  obtained  from 
bones,  is  deprived  both  of  its  colour  and  foetid  smell 
by  sublimation  with  an  equal  weight  of  charcoal 
powder.  Malt  spirit  is  freed  from  its  disagreeable  fla- 
vour by  distillation  from  charcoal ; but  if  too  much  be 
used,  part  of  the  spirit  is  decomposed.  Simple  mace- 
ration, for  eight  or  ten  days,  in  the  proportion  of  about 
l-150th  of  the  weight  of  the  spirit,  improves  the  fla- 
vour much.  It  is  necessary  that  the  charcoal  be 
well  burned,  brought  to  a red  heat  before  it  is  used, 
and  used  as  soon  as  may  be,  or  at  least  be  carefully 
excluded  from  the  air.  The  proper  proportion  too 
should  be  ascertained  by  experiment  on  a small  scale. 


The  charcoal  may  be  used  repeatedly,  by  exposing  it 
for  some  time  to  a red  heat  before  it  is  again  employed. 

Charcoal  is  used  on  particular  occasions  as  fuel,  on 
account  of  its  giving  a strong  and  sh  ady  heat  without 
smoke.  It  is  employed  to  convert  iron  into  steel  by 
cementation.  It  enters  into  the  composition  of  gun- 
powder. In  its  finer  states,  as  in  ivory-black,  lamp- 
black, &c.  it  forms  the  basis  of  black  paints,  Indian 
ink,  and  printers’  ink. 

The  purest  carbon  for  chemical  purposes  is  obtained 
by  strongly  igniting  lamp-black  in  a covered  crucible. 
This  yields,  like  the  diamond,  unmixed  carbonic  acid 
by  combustion  in  oxygen. 

Carbon  unites  with  all  the  common  simple  combus- 
tibles, and  with  azot,  forming  a series  of  most  impor- 
tant compounds.  With  sulphur  it  forms  a curious 
limpid  liquid,  called  carburet  of  sulphur,  or  sulphure/t 
of  carbon.  With  phosphorus  it  forms  a species  of 
compound,  whose  properties  are  imperfectly  ascer- 
tained. It  unites  with  hydrogen  in  two  definite  pro- 
portions, constituting  subcarburetted  and  carburetted' 
hydrogen  gases.  With  azot  it  forms  prussic  gas,  the 
cyanogen  of  Gay  Lussac.  Steel  and  plumbago  are 
two  different  compounds  of  carbon  with  iron.  In 
black  chalk  we  find  this  combustible  intimately  asso- 
ciated with  silica  and  alumina.  The  primitive  com- 
bining proportion,  or  prime  equivalent  of  carbon,  is 

0.75  on  the  oxygen  scale. 

2.  Carbon  mineral.  This  is  of  a gray  blackish  oo- 
lour.  It  is  charcoal  with  various  proportions  of  earth 
and  iron,  without  bitumen.  It  has  a silky  lustre,  and 
the  fibrous  texture  of  wood.  It  is  found  in  small 
quantities,  stratified  with  brown  coal,  slate  coal,  and 
pitch  coal. 

Carbon,  gaseous  oxide  of.  Gaseous  oxide  of  car- 
bon was  first  described  by  Dr.  Priestley,  who  mistook 
it  for  a hydrocarbonate.  With  the  true  nature  of  it, 
we  have  been  only  lately  acquainted.  It  was  first 
proved  to  be  a peculiar  gas,  by  Mr.  Cruikshank,  of 
Woolwich,  who  made  it  known  to  us  as  such,  in  April, 
1801,  through  the  medium  of  Nicholson’s  Journal  for 
that  month.  Several  additional  properties  of  this  gas 
were  soon  afterward  noticed  by  Desormes,  Clement, 
and  others.  Gaseous  oxide  of  carbon  forms  an  interme- 
diate substance  between  the  pure  hydrocarbonates  and 
carbonic  acid  gas  ; but  not  being  possessed  of  acid  pro- 
perties, Mr.  Cruikshank  called  it,  conformably  to  the 
rules  of  the  chemical  nomenclature,  gaseous  oxide  of 
carbon , for  it  consists  of  oxygen  and  carbon  rendered 
gaseous  by  caloric.  See  Carbonic  oxide. 

Carbonaceous  acid.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

CARBO'NAS.  { Carbonas , atis.  m. ; from  carbonic 
acid  being  one  of  its  constituents.)  A carbonate.  A 
salt  formed  by  the  union  of  carbonic  acid  with  a sali- 
fiable basis.  The  carbonates  employed  in  medicine 
are : 

1.  The  potassae  carbonas. 

2.  The  sodae  carbonas. 

3.  The  creta  praeparata,  and  the  testae  praeparatee, 
which  are  varieties  of  carbonate  of  lime. 

When  the  base  is  imperfectly  neutralized  by  the  car- 
bonic acid,  the  salt  is  termed  a subcarbonate;  of  which 
kind  are  employed  medicinally, 

1.  The  potass®  subcarbonas. 

2.  The  sod®  subcarbonas,  and  the  sod®  subcarbonas 
exsiccata. 

3.  The  ammoni®  subcarbonas,  and  the  liquor  am- 
moni®  subcarbonatis. 

4.  Tho  plumbi  subcarbonas. 

5.  The  ferri  subcarbonas. 

6.  The  magnesi®  subcarbonas. 

Carbonas  ammonia.  See  Ammonia  subcarbonas. 

Carbonas  calcis.  Carbonate  of  lime.  Several 
varieties  of  this  are  used  in  medicine:  the  purest  and 
best  are  the  creta  pr®parata,  test®  preparat®,  chel® 
cancrorum,  test®  ovorujn,  and  oculi  cancrorum. 

Carbonas  ferri.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

Carbonas  magnesia.  See  Magnesia;  subcarbonas 

Carbonas  plumbi.  See  Plumbi  subcarbonas. 

Carbonas  potass x..  See  Potassie  carbonas. 

Carbonas  sod.b.  See  Sodce  carbonas. 

CARBONATE.  See  Carbonas. 

Carbonate  of  barytes.  See  Heavy  spar. 

Carbonated  hydrogen  gas.  See  Carburetted  hydro- 
gen gas. 

CA'RBONIC  ACID.  Acidum  carbonicum.  Fixed 
air ; Caflxmaceous  acid ; Calcareous  acid ; Aerial 

187 


CAR 


CAR 


Reid-  “ This  acid,  being  a compound  of  carbon  and 
oxygen,  may  be  formed  by  burning  charcoal;  but  as  it 
exists  in  great  abundance  ready  formed,  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  have  recourse  to  this  expedient.  All  ihat  is 
necessary  is  to  pour  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  five 
or  six  times  its  weight  of  water,  on  common  chalk, 
which  is  a compound  of  carbonic  acid  and  lime.  An 
effervescence  ensues ; carbonic  acid  is  evolved  in  the 
state  of  gas,  and  may  be  received  in  the  usual  manner. 

Carbonic  acid  abounds  in  great  quantities  in  nature, 
and  appears  to  be  produced  in  a variety  of  circum 
stances.  It  composes  44-100th  of  the  weight  of  lime- 
stone, marble,  calcareous  spar,  and  other  natural  spe- 
cimens of  calcareous  earth,  from  which  it  may  be  ex- 
tricated, either  by  the  simple  application  of  heat,  or  by 
the  superior  affinity  of  some  other  acid;  most  acids 
having  a stronger  action  on  bodies  than  this.  This 
last  process  does  not  require  heat,  because  fixed  air  is 
strongly  disposed  to  assume  the  elastic  state.  Water, 
under  the  common  pressure  of  the  atmosphere,  and  at 
a low  temperature,  absorbs  somewhat  more  than  its 
bulk  of  fixed  air,  and  then  constitutes  a weak  acid.  If 
the  pressure  be  greater,  the  absorption  is  augmented. 
It  is  to  be  Observed,  likewise,  that  more  gas  than  water 
will  absorb  should  be  present.  Heated  water  absorbs 
less;  and  if  water  impregnated  with  this  acid  be 
exposed  on  a brisk  fire,  the  rapid  escape  of  the  aerial 
bubbles  affords  an  appearance  as  if  the  water  were  at 
the  point  of  boiling,  when  the  heat  is  not  greater  than 
the  hand  can  bear.  Congelation  separates  it  readily 
and  completely  from  water ; but  no  degree  of  cold  or 
pressure  has  yet  exhibited  this  acid  in  a dense  or  con- 
centrated state  of  fluidity. 

Carbonic  acid  gas  is  much  denser  than  common  air, 
and  for  this  reason  occupies  the  lower  parts  of  such 
mines  or  caverns  as  contain  materials  which  afford  it 
by  decomposition.  The  miners  call  it  choke  damp. 
The  Grotto  del  Cano,  in  the  kingdom  of  Naples,  has 
been  famous  for  ages  on  account  of  the  effects  of  a 
stratum  of  fixed  air  which  covers  its  bottom.  It  is  a 
cave  or  hole  in  the  side  of  a mountain,  near  the  lake 
Agnano,  measuring  not  more  than  eighteen  feet  from 
its  entrance  to  the  inner  extremity  ; where  if  a dog  or 
other  animal  that  holds  down  its  head  be  thrust,  it  is 
immediately  killed  by  inhaling  this  noxious  fluid. 

Carbonic  acid  gas  is  emitted  in  large  quantities  by 
bodies  in  the  state  of  the  vinous  fermentation,  and  on 
account  of  its  great  weight,  it  occupies  the  apparently 
empty  space  or  upper  part  of  the  vessels  in  which  the 
fermenting  process  is  going  on.  A variety  of  striking 
experiments  may  be  made  in  this  stratum  of  elastic 
fluid.  Lighted  paper,  or  a candle  dipped  into  it,  is 
immediately  extinguished  ; and  the  smoke  remaining 
in  the  carbonic  acid  gas  renders  its  surface  visible, 
which  may  be  thrown  into  waves  by  agitation  like 
water.  If  a dish  of  water  be  immersed  in  this  gas,  and 
briskly  agitated,  it  soon  becomes  impregnated,  and  ob- 
tains the  pungent  taste  of  Pyrmont  water.  In  conse- 
quence of  the  weight  of  the  carbonic  acid  gas,  it  may 
bo  lifted  out  in  a pitcher,  or  bottle,  which,  if  well 
corked,  may  be  used  to  convey  it  to  great  distances,  or 
it  may  be  drawn  out  of  a vessel  by  a cock  like  a liquid. 
The  effects  produced  by  pouring  this  invisible  fluid 
from  one  vessel  to  another,  have  a very  singular  ap- 
pearance: if  a candle  or  small  animal  be  placed  in  a 
deep  vessel,  the  former  becomes  extinct,  and  the  latter 
expires  in  a f§w  seconds,  after  the  carbonic  acid  gas  is 
poured  upon  them,  though  the  eye  is  incapable  of  dis- 
tinguishing any  thing  that  is  poured.  If,  however,  it  be 
poured  into  a vessel  full  of  air,  in  the  sunshine,  its 
density  being  so  much  greater  than  that  of  the  air, 
renders  it  slightly  visible  by  the  undulations  and  streaks 
it  forms  in  this  fluid,  as  it  descends  through  it. 

Carbonic  acid  reddens  infusion  of  litmus;  but  the 
redness  vanishes  by  exposure  to  the  air,  as  the  acid 
flies  off.  It  has  a peculiar  sharp  taste,  which  may  be 
perceived  over  vats  in  which  wine  or  beer  is  ferment- 
ing, as  also  in  sparkling  Champaign,  and  the  brisker 
kinds  of  cider.  Light  passing  through  it  is  refracted 
by  it,  but  does  not  effect  any  sensible  alteration  in  it, 
though  it  appears,  from  experiment,  that  it  favours  the 
separation  of  its  principles  by  other  substances.  It  will 
not  unite  with  an  overdose  of  oxygen,  of  which  it 
contains  72  parts  in  100,  the  other  28  being  pure  car- 
bon. It  not  only  destroys  life,  but  the  heart  and  muscle 
of  animals  killed  by  it  lose  all  their  irritability  so  as  to 
be  insensible  to  the  stimulus  of  galvanism. 


Carbonic  acid  is  dilated  by  heat,  but  not  otherwise 
altered  by  it.  It  is  not  acted  upon  by  oxygen,  or  any 
of  the  simple  combustibles.  Charcoal  absorbs  it,  but 
gives  it  out  again  unchanged,  at  ordinary  tempera- 
tures ; but  when  this  gaseous  acid  is  made  to  traverse 
charcoal  ignited  in  a tube,  it  is  converted  into  carbonic 
oxide.  Phosphorus  is  insoluble  in  carbonic  acid  gas  ; 
but,  as  already  observed,  is  capable  of  decomposing  it 
by  compound  affinity,  when  assisted  by  sufficient  heat ; 
and  Priestley  and  Cruikshank  have  shown  that  iron, 
zinc,  and  several  other  metals,  are  capable  of  producing 
the  same  effect.  If  carbonic  acid  be  mixed  with  sul- 
phuretted, phosphuretted,  or  carburetted  gas,  it  renders 
them  less  combustible,  or  destroys  their  combustibility 
entirely,  but  produces  no  other  sensible  change.  Such 
mixtures  occur  in  various  analyses,  and  particularly  in 
the  products  of  the  decomposition  of  vegetable  and 
animal  substances.  The  inflammable  air  of  marshes 
is  frequently  carburetted  hydrogen  intimately  mixed 
with  carbonic  acid  gas,  and  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
gas  obtained  from  mineral  waters  is  very  often  mixed 
with  it. 

Carbonic  acid  appears  from  various  experiments  of 
Ingenhuosz  to  be  of  considerable  utility  in  promoting 
vegetation.  It  is  probably  decomposed  by  the  organs 
of  plants,  its  base  furnishing  part  at  least  of  the  carbon 
that  is  so  abundant  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  its 
oxygen  contributing  to  replenish  the  atmosphere  with 
that  necessary  support  of  life,  which  is  continually 
diminished  by  the  respiration  of  animals  and  other 
causes. 

The  most  exact  experiments  on  the  neutral  carbon- 
ates concur  to  prove,  that  the  prime  equivalent  of 
carbonic  acid  is  2.75;  and  that  it  consists  of  one  prime 
of  carbon=0.75+2.0  oxygen. 

Water  absorbs  about  its  volume  of  this  acid  gas,  and 
thereby  acquires  a specific  gravity  of  1 0015.  On 
freezing  it,  the  gas  is  as  completely  expelled  as  by 
boiling.  By  artificial  pressure  with  forcing  pumps, 
water  may  be  made  to  absorb  two  or  three  times  its 
hulk  of  carbonic  acid.  When  there  is  also  added  a 
little  potassa  or  soda,  it  becomes  the  aerated,  or  carbo- 
nated alkaline  water , a pleasant  beverage,  and  a not 
inactive  remedy  in  several  complaints,  particularly 
dyspepsia,  hiccup,  and  disorders  of  the  kidneys.  Al- 
kohol  condenses  twice  its  volume  of  carbonic  acid. 
The  most  beautiful  analytical  experiment  with  car- 
bonic acid,  is  the  combustion  of  potassium  in  it,  the 
formation  of  potassa,  and  the  deposition  of  charcoal. 

In  point  of  affinity  for  the  earths  and  alkalies,  car- 
bonic acid  stands  apparently  low  in  the  scale.  Before 
its  true  nature  was  known,  its  compounds  with  them 
were  not  considered  as  salts,  but  as  the  earths  and 
alkalies  themselves,  only  distinguished  by  the  names 
of  mild , or  effervescent , from  their  qualities  of  effer- 
vescing with  acids,  and  wanting  causticity. 

The  carbonates  are  characterized  by  effervescing 
with  almost  all  the  acids,  even  the  acetic,  when  they 
evolve  their  gaseous  acid,  which,  passed  into  lime 
water  by  a tube,  deprives  it  of  its  taste,  and  converts 
it  into  chalk  and  pure  water. 

The  carbonate  of  barytes , found  native  in  Cumber- 
land, by  Dr.  Withering.  From  this  circumstance  it 
has  been  termed  Witherite.  It  has  been  likewise 
called  aerated  heavy  spar,  aerated  baroselenite,  aerated 
heavy  earth  or  barytes , barolite , Sec. 

Carbonate  of  strontian , found  native  in  Scotland, 
atStrontian  in  Argyllshire,  and  at  Leadhills. 

Carbonate  of  lime  exists  in  great  abundance  in  na- 
ture, variously  mixed  with  other  bodies,  under  the 
names  of  marble , chalk , limestone , stalactites,  & c.  in 
which  it  is  of  more  important  and  extensive  use  than 
any  other  of  the  salts,  except  perhaps  the  muriate  of 
soda. 

The  carbonate,  or  rather  sub-carbonate  of  potassa, 
was  long  known  by  the  name  of  vegetable  alkali.  It 
was  also  called  fixed  nitre,  salt  of  twrtar , salt  of 
wormwood , &c.  according  to  the  different  modes  in 
which  it  was  procured;  and  was  supposed  to  retain 
something  of  the  virtues  of  the  substance  from  which 
it  was  extracted.  This  error  has  been  sometime  ex- 
ploded, but  the  knowledge  of  its  true  nature  is  of  more 
recent  date. 

As  water  at  the  usual  temperature  of  the  air  dis- 
solves rather  more  than  its  weight  of  this  salt,  we  have 
thus  a ready  mode  of  detecting  its  adulterations  in 
general ; and'  as  it  is  often  of  consequence  to  know  how 


CAR 


CAR 


much  alkali  a particular  specimen  contains,  this  may 
be  ascertained  by  the  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid  it  will 
saturate.  This  salt  is  deliquescent.  It  consists  of  6 
potassa+2.75  carbonic  acid=8.75. 

The  bi-carbonate  of  potassa  crystallizes  in  square 
prisms,  the  apices  of  which  are  quadrangular  pyra- 
mids. It  has  a urinous  but  not  caustic  taste ; changes 
the  syrup  of  violets  green:  boiling  water  dissolves 
five-sixths  of  its  weight,  and  cold  water  one-fourth ; 
alkohol,  even  when  hot,  will  not  dissolve  more  than 
l-1200th.  Its  specific  gravity  is  2.012.  When  it  is 
very  pure  and  well  crystallized  it  effloresces  on  expo- 
sure to  a dry  atmosphere,  though  it  was  formerly  con- 
sidered as  deliquescent.  It  was  thought  that  the  com- 
mon salt  of  tartar  of  the  shops  was  a compound  of  this 
carbonate  and  pure  potassa ; the  latter  of  which,  being 
very  deliquescent,  attracts  the  moisture  of  the  air  till 
the  whole  is  dissolved.  From  its  smooth  feel,  and  the 
manner  in  which  it  was  prepared,  the  old  chemists 
called  this  solution  oil  of  tartar  per  deliquium. 

The  bi-carbonate  of  potassa  melts  with  a gentle 
heat,  loses  its  water  of  crystallization,  amounting  to 
9-100th,  and  gives  out  a portion  of  its  carbonic  acid ; 
though  no  degree  of  heat  will  expel  the  whole  of  the 
acid.  Thus,  as  the  carbonate  of  potassa  is  always 
prepared  by  incineration  of  vegetable  substances,  and 
lixiviation,  it  must  be  in  the  intermediate  state ; or 
that  of  a carbonate  with  excess  of  alkali : and  to  ob- 
tain the  true  carbonate  we  must  saturate  this  salt  with 
carbonic  acid,  which  is  best  done  by  passing  the  acid 
in  the  state  of  gas  through  a solution  of  the  salt  in 
twice  its  weight  of  water  ; or,  if  we  want  the  potassa 
pure,  we  must  have  recourse  to  lime,  to  separate  that 
portion  of  acid  which  fire  will  not  expel. 

The  bi-carbonate,  usually  called  super-carbonate  by 
the  apothecaries,  consists  of  2 primes  of  carbonic  acid 
=5.500,  1 of  potassa=6,  and  1 of  Water=1.125,  in  all 
12.625. 

The  carbonate  of  soda  has  likewise  been  long 
known,  and  distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  the 
name  of  mineral  alkali.  In  commerce  it  is  usually 
called  barilla,  or  soda ; in  which  state,  however,  it  al- 
ways contains  a mixture  of  earthy  bodies,  and  usually 
common  salt.  It  may  be  purified  by  dissolving  it  in  a 
small  portion  of  water,  filtering  the  solution,  evapo- 
rating at  a low  heat,  and  skimming  off  the  crystals  of 
muriate  of  soda  as  they  form  on  its  surface.  When 
these  cease  to  form,  the  solution  may  be  suffered  to 
cool,  and  the  carbonate  of  soda  will  crystallize. 

It  is  found  abundantly  in  nature.  In  Egypt,  where 
it  is  collected  from  the  surface  of  the  earth,  particu- 
larly after  the  desiccation  of  temporary  lakes,  it  has 
been  known  from  time  immemorial  by  the  name  of 
nitrum,  natron,  or  natrum.  A great  deal  is  prepared 
in  Spain  by  incinerating  the  maritime  plant  of  salsola  ; 
and  it  is  manufactured  in  this  country,  as  well  as  in 
France,  from  different  species  of  sea-weeds.  It  is 
likewise  found  in  mineral  water,  and  also  in  some 
animal  fluids. 

It  crystallizes  in  irregular  or  rhomboidal  decaedrons, 
formed  by  two  quadrangular  pyramids,  truncated  very 
near  their  bases.  Frequently  it  exhibits  only  rhomboi- 
dal laminae.  Its  specificgravity  is  1.35S1.  Its  taste  is 
urinous,  and  slightly  acrid,  without  being  caustic.  It 
changes  blue  vegetable  colours  to  a green.  It  is  solu- 
ble in  less  than  its  weight  of  boiling  water,  and  twice 
its  weight  of  cold.  It  is  one  of  the  most  efflorescent 
salts  known,,  falling  completely  to  powder  in  no  long 
time.  On  the  application  of  heat  it  is  soon  rendered 
floid  from  the  great  quantity  of  its  water  of  crystal- 
lization ; but  is  dried  by  a continuance  of  the  heat, 
and  then  melts.  It  is  somewhat  more  fusible  than  the 
carbonate  of  potassa,  promotes  the  fusion  of  earths  in 
a greater  degree,  and  forms  a glass  of  better  quality. 
Like  that,  it  is  very  tenacious  of  a certain  portion  of 
its  carbonic  acid.  It  consists  in  its  dry  state  of  4 soda, 
-(-2.75  acid,  =6.75. 

But  the  crystals  contain  10  prime  proportions  of 
water.  They  are  composed  of  22  soda,  +15.3  car- 
bonic acid,  +62.7  water  in  100  parts,  or  of  1 prime  of 
soda  =4.1  of  carbonic  acid  =2.75,  and  10  of  water 
= 11.25,  in  whole  18. 

The  bi-carbonate  of  soda  may  be  prepared  by  sa- 
turating the  solution  of  the  preceding  salt  with  car- 
bonic acid  gas,  and  then  evaporating  with  a very  gen- 
tle heat  to  dryness,  when  a white  irregular  saline 
mass  is  obtained.  The  salt  is  not  crystallizable.  Its 


constituents  are  4 soda,  +5.50  carb.  acid,  +1.125 
water,  =10.625  ; or  in  100  parts  37.4  soda,  +52  acid, 
+10.6  water. 

The  carbonate  of  magnesia,  in  a state  of  imperfect 
saturation  with  the  acid,  has  been  used  in  medicine 
for  some  time  under  the  simple  name  of  magnesia. 
It  is  prepared  by  precipitation  from  the  sulphate  of 
magnesia  by  means  of  carbonate  of  potassa.  Equal 
parts  of  sulphate  of  magnesia  and  carbonate  of  po- 
tassa, each  dissolved  in  its  own  weight  of  boiling 
water,  are  filtered  and  mixed  together  hot ; the  sulphate 
of  potassa  is  separated  by  copious  washing  with  wa- 
ter; and  the  carbonate  of  magnesia  is  then  left  to 
drain,  and  afterward  spread  thin  on  paper,  and  car- 
ried to  the  drying  stove.  When  once  dried  it  will  be 
in  friable  white  cakes,  or  a fine  powder. 

To  obtain  carbonate  of  magnesia  saturated  with 
acid,  a solution  of  sulphate  of  magnesia  may  be 
mixed  cold  with  a solution  of  carbonate  of  potassa ; 
and  at  the  expiration  of  a few  hours,  as  the  superflu- 
ous carbonic  acid  that  held  it  in  solution  flies  off,  the 
carbonate  of  magnesia  will  crystallize  in  very  regular 
transparent  prisms  of  six  equal  sides.  It  may  be 
equally  obtained  by  dissolving  magnesia  in  water  im- 
pregnated with  carbonic  acid,  and  exposing  the  solu- 
tion to  the  open  air. 

These  crystals  soon  lose  their  transparency,  and  be- 
come covered  with  a white  powder.  Exposed  to  the 
fire  in  a crucible,  they  decrepitate  slightly,  lose  their 
water  and  acid,  fall  to  powder,  and  are  reduced  to  one- 
fourth  of  the  original  weight.  When  the  common 
carbonate  is  calcined  in  the  grate,  it  appears  as  if 
boiling,  from  the  extrication  of  carbonic  acid ; a small 
portion  ascends  like  a vapour,  and  is  deposited  in  a 
white  powder  on  the  cold  bodies  with  which  it  comes 
into  contact ; and  in  a dark  place,  toward  the  end  of 
the  operation,  it  shines  with  a bluish  phosphoric  light. 
It  thus  loses  half  its  weight,  and  the  magnesia  is  left 
quite  pure. 

As  the  magnesia  of  the  shops  is  sometimes  adulte- 
rated with  chalk,  this  may  be  detected  by  the  addition 
of  a little  sulphuric  acid  diluted  with  eight  or  ten 
times  its  weight  of  water,  as  this  will  form  with  the 
magnesia  a very  soluble  salt,  while  the  sulphate  of 
lime  will  remain  undissolved.  Calcined  magnesia 
should  dissolve  in  this  dilute  acid  without  any  effer- 
vescence. 

The  crystallized  carbonate  dissolves  in  forty-eight 
times  its  weight  of  cold  water ; the  common  carbonate 
requires  at  least  ten  times  as  much,  and  first  forms  a 
paste  with  a small  quantity  of  the  fluid. 

The  carbonate  of  ammonia,  once  vulgarly  known  by 
the  name  of  volatile  sal  ammoniac,  and  abroad  by  that 
of  English  volatile  salt,  because  it  was  first  prepared 
in  this  country,  was  commonly  called  mild  volatile 
alkali,  before  its  true  nature  was  known. 

When  very  pure  it  is  in  a crystalline  form,  but  sel- 
dom very  regulai  Its  crystals  are  so  small,  that  it  is 
difficult  to  determine  their  figure.  The  taste  and  smell 
of  this  salt  are  the  same  with  those  of  pure  ammonia, 
but  much  weaker.  It  turns  the  colour  of  violets  green, 
and  that  of  tumeric  brown.  It  is  soluble  in  rather 
more  than  twice  its  weight  of  cold  water,  and  in  its 
own  weight  of  hot  water  ; but  a boiling  heat  volati- 
lizes it.  When  pure,  and  thoroughly  saturated,  it  is 
not  perceptibly  alterable  in  the  air ; but  when  it  has 
an  excess  of  ammonia,  it  softens  and  grows  moist.  It 
cannot  be  doubted,  however,  that  it  is  soluble  in  air ; 
for  if  left  in  an  open  vessel,  it  gradually  diminishes  in 
weight,  and  its  peculiar  smell  is  diffused  to  a certain 
distance.  Heat  readily  sublimes,  but  does  not  decom- 
pose it. 

It  has  been  prepared  by  the  destructive  distillation 
of  animal  substances,  and  some  others,  in  large  iron 
pots,  with  a fire  increased  by  degrees  to  a strong  red- 
heat,  the  aqueous  liquor  that  first  comes  over  being 
removed,  that  the  salt  might  not  be  dissolved  in  it 
Thus  we  had  the  salt  of  hartshorn,  salt  of  soot,  essen- 
tial salt  of  vipers , &c.  If  the  salt  were  dissolved  in 
the  water,  it  was  called  spirit  of  the  substance  from 
which  it  was  obtained.  Thus,  however,  it  was  much 
contaminated  by  a foetid  animal  oil,  from  which  it  re- 
quired to  be  subsequently  purified,  and  is  much  better 
fabricated  by  mixing  one  part  of  muriate  of  ammonia 
and  two  of  carbonate  of  lime,  both  as  dry  as  possible, 
and  subliming  in  an  earthen  retort. 

Sir  II.  Davy  has  shown  that  its  component  parts 

189 


CAR 


CAR 


vary,  according  to  the  manner  of  preparing  it.  The 
lower  the  temperature  at  which  it  is  formed,  the 
greater  the  proportion  of  acid  and  water.  Thus,  if 
formed  at  the  temperature  of  300°,  it  contains  more 
than  fifty  per  cent,  of  alkali ; if  at  60°,  not  more  than 
twenty  per  cent. 

There  are  three  or  four  definite  compounds  of  carbo- 
nic acid  and  ammonia. 

The  first  is  the  solid  sub-carbonate  of  the  shops.  It 
consists  of  55  carbonic  acid,  30  ammonia,  and  15  wa- 
ter ; or  probably  of  3 primes  carbonic  acid,  5 ammo- 
nia, and  2 water;  in  all  14.7  for  its  equivalent. 

2d,  Gay  Lussac  has  shown  that  when  100  volumes 
of  ammoniacal  gas  are  mixed  with  50  of  carbonic 
acid,  the  two  gases  precipitate  in  a solid  salt,  which 
must  consist  by  weight  of  56  1-3  acid  +43  2-3  alkali, 
being  in  the  ratio  of  a prime  equivalent  of  each. 

3d,  When  the  pungent  sub-carbonate  is  exposed  in 
powder  to  the  air,  it  becomes  scentless  by  the  evapo- 
ration of  a definite  portion  of  this  ammonia.  It  is  then 
a compound  of  about  55  or  56  carbonic  acid,  21.5  am- 
monia, and  22.5  water.  It  may  be  represented  by  2 
primes  of  acid,  1 of  ammonia,  and  2 of  water,  =9.875. 

Another  compound,  it  has  been  supposed,  may  be 
prepared  by  passing  carbonic  acid  through  a solution 
of  the  sub-carbonate  till  it  be  saturated.  This,  how- 
ever, may  be  supposed  to  yield  the  same  product  as 
the  last  salt.  Lussac  infers  the  neutral  carbonate  to 
consist  of  equal  volumes  of  the  two  gases,  though  they 
will  not  directly  combine  in  these  proportions.  This 
would  give  18.1  to  46.5 ; the  very  proportions  in  the 
scentless  salt.  For  46.5 : 18.1 : : 55  : 21.42. 

It  is  well  known  as  a stimulant  usually  put  into 
smelling-bottles,  frequently  with  the  addition  of  some 
odoriferous  oil. 

Fourcroy  has  found,  that  an  ammoniaco-magnesian 
carbonate  is  formed  on  some  occasions.  Thus,  if  car- 
bonate of  ammonia  be  decomposed  by  magnesia  in 
the  moist  way,  leaving  these  two  substances  in  con- 
tact with  each  other  in  a bottle  closely  stopped,  a com- 
plete decomposition  will  not  take  place,  but  a portion 
of  this  trisalt  will  be  formed.  The  same  will  take 
place  if  a solution  of  carbonate  of  magnesia  in  water, 
impregnated  with  carbonic  acid,  be  precipitated  by 
pure  ammonia  ; or  if  ammoniaco-magnesian  sulphate, 
nitrate,  or  muriate,  be  precipitated  by  carbonate  of 
potassa  or  of  soda. 

The  properties  of  this  triple  salt  are  not  much 
known,  but  it  crystallizes  differently  from  the  carbo- 
nate of  either  of  its  bases,  and  has  its  own  laws  of  so- 
lubility and  decomposition. 

The  carbonate  of  glucine  is  in  a white,  dull,  clotty 
powder,  never  dry,  but  greasy,  and  soft  to  the  feel,  it 
is  not  sweet,  like  the  other  salts  of  glucine,  but  insipid. 
It  is  very  light,  insoluble  in  water,  perfectly  unaltera- 
ble by  the  air,  but  very  readily  decomposed  by  fire.  A 
saturated  solution  of  carbonate  of  ammonia  takes  up 
a certain  portion  of  this  carbonate,  and  forms  with  it  a 
triple  salt. 

Carbonic  acid  does  not  appear  to  be  much  disposed 
to  unite  with  argillaceous  earth.  Most  clays,  how- 
ever, afford  a small  quantity  of  this  acid  by  heat.  The 
snowy  white  substance,  resembling  chalk,  and  known 
by  the  name  of  lac  lunce , is  found  to  consist  almost 
wholly  of  alumina,  saturated  with  carbonic  acid.  A 
saline  substance,  consisting  of  two  six-sided  pyramids, 
joined  at  one  common  base,  weighing  five  or  sLx  grains, 
and  of  a taste  somewhat  resembling  alum,  was  pro- 
duced by  leaving  an  ounce  phial  of  water  impregnated 
with  carbonic  acid,  and  a redundancy  of  alumina,  ex- 
posed to  spontaneous  evaporation  for  some  months. 

Vauquelin  has  found,  that  carbonate  of  zircone  may 
be  formed  by  evaporating  muriate  of  zircone,  redis- 
solving it  in  water,  and  precipitating  by  the  alkaline 
carbonate.  He  also  adds,  that  it  very  readily  com- 
bines, so  as  to  form  a triple  salt,  with  either  of  the 
three  alkaline  carbonates.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

This  gas  is  much  esteemed  in  the  cure  of  typhus 
fevers,  and  of  irritability  and  weakness  of  stomach, 
producing  vomiting.  Against  the  former  diseases  it  is 
given  by  administering  yest,  bottled  porter,  and  the 
like;  and  for  the  latter  it  is  disengaged  from  the  car- 
bonated alkali  by  lemon  juice,  in  a draught  given 
while  effervescing. 

CARBONIC  OXIDE.  Gaseous  oxide  of  carbon. 
11  A gaseous  compound  of  one  prime  equivalent  of  car- 
bon, and  one  of  oxygen,  consisting  by  weight  of  0.75 


of  the  former,  and  1.00  of  the  latter.  Hence  the  prime 
of  the  compound  is  1.75,  the  same  as  that  of  azote. 
This  gas  cannot  be  formed  by  the  chemist  by  the  direct 
combination  of  its  constituents;  for  at  the  tempera- 
ture requisite  for  effecting  a union,  the  carbon  attracts 
its  full  dose  of  oxygen  and  thus  generates  carbonic 
acid.  It  may  be  procured  by  exposing  charcoal  to  a 
long  continued  heat.  The  last  products  consist  chiefly 
of  carbonic  oxide. 

To  obtain  it  pure,  however,  our  only  plan  is  to  ab- 
stract one  proportion  of  oxygen  from  carbonic  acid, 
either  in  its  gaseous  state,  or  as  condensed  in  the  car- 
bonates. 

If  we  subject  to  a strong  heat,  in  a gun  barrel  or  re- 
tort, a mixture  of  any  dry  earthy  carbonate,  such  as 
chalk,  or  carbonate  of  strontites,  with  metallic  filings 
or  charcoal,  the  combined  acid  is  resolved  into  the 
gaseous  oxide  of  carbon.  The  most  convenient  mix- 
ture is  equal  parts  of  dried  chalk  and  iron,  or  zinc 
filings. 

The  specific  .gravity  of  this  gas  is  stated  by  Gay 
Lussac  and  Thenard,  from  theoretical  considerations, 
to  be  0.96782,  though  Mr.  Cruikshanks’s  experimental 
estimate  was  0.9569.  * 

This  gas  burns  with  a dark  blue  flame.  Sir  H. 
Davy  has  shown,  that  though  carbonic  oxide,  in  its 
combustion,  produces  less  heat  than  other  inflamma- 
ble gases,  it  may  be  kindled  at  a much  lower  tempera- 
ture. It  inflames  in  the  atmosphere,  when  brought 
into  contact  with  an  iron  wire  heated  to  dull  redness, 
whereas  carburetted  hydrogen  is  not  inflammable  by  a 
similar  wire,  unless  it  is  heated  to  whiteness,  so  as  to 
burn  with  sparks.  It  requires,  for  its  combustion,  half 
its  volume  of  oxygen  gas,  producing  one  volume  of 
carbonic  acid.  It  is  n<Jt  decomposable  by  any  of  the 
simple  combustibles,  except  potassium  and  sodium. 
When  potassium  is  heated  in  a portion  of  the  gas, 
potassa  is  formed  with  the  precipitation  of  charcoal, 
and  the  disengagement  of  heat  and  light.  Perhaps 
iron,  at  a high  temperature,  would  condense  the  oxy- 
gen and  carbon  by  its  strong  affinity  for  these  sub- 
stances. W ater  condenses  l-50th  of  its  bulk  of  the  gas. 
The  above  processes  are  those  usually  prescribed  in 
our  systematic  works,  for  procuring  the  oxide  of  car- 
bon. In  some  of  them,  a portion  of  carbonic  acid  is 
evolved,  which  may  be  withdrawn  by  washing  the 
gaseous  product  with  weak  solution  of  potassa,  or 
milk  of  lime.  We  avoid  the  chance  of  this  impurity 
by  extricating  the  gas  from  a mixture  of  dry  carbon- 
ate of  barytes  and  iron  filings,  or  of  oxide  of  zinc,  and 
previously  calcined  charcoal.  The  gaseous  product 
from  the  first  mixture,  is  pure  oxide  of  carbon.  Oxide 
of  iron,  and  pure  barytes,  remain  in  the  retort.  Car- 
bonic oxide,  when  respired,  is  fatal  to  animal  life. 
Sir  H.  Davy  took  three  inspirations  of  it,  mixed  with 
about  one-fourth  of  common  air , the  effect  was  a tem- 
porary loss  of  sensation,  which  was  succeeded  by  gid- 
diness, sickness,  acute  pains  in  different  parts  of  the 
body,  and  extreme  debility.  Some  days  elapsed  be- 
fore he  entirely  recovered.  Since  then,  Mr.  Witter  of 
Dublin  was  struck  down  in  an  apoplectic  condition, 
by  breathing  this  gas;  but  he  was  speedily  restored  by 
the  inhalation  of  oxygen.  See  an  interesting  accounf 
of  this  experiment,  by  Mr.  Witter,  in  the  Phil.  Mag. 
vol.  43. 

When  a mixture  of  it  and  chlorine  is  exposed  to 
sunshine,  a curious  compound,  discovered  by  Dr. 
John  Davy,  is  formed,  to  which  he  gave  the  name  of 
phosgene  gas.  It  has  been  called  chlorocarbonic  acid, 
though  chlorocarbonous  acid  seems  a more  appropriate 
name.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

CARBUNCLE.  1.  The  name  of  a gem  highly 
prized  by  the  ancients,  probably  the  alamandine,  a va 
riety  of  noble  garnet. 

2.  The  name  of  a disease.  See  Anthrax. 

CARBU'NCULUS.  (Diminutive  of  carbo,  a bum 
ing  coal.)  A carbuncle.  See  Anthrax. 

CARBURET.  Carburetum.  A combination  of 
charcoal  with  any  other  substance:  thus  carburetted 
hydrogen  is  hydrogen  holding  carbon  in  solution ; car 
buretted  iron  is  steel,  &c. 

Carburet  of  sulphur.  Sulphuret  of  carbon 
Alkohol  of  sulphur.  “ This  interesting  liquid  was  ori 
ginally  obtained  by  Lampadius  in  distilling  a mixture 
of  pulverized  pyrites  and  charcoal  in  an  earthen  re 
tort,  and  was  considered  by  him  as  a peculiar  com 
pound  of  sulphur  and  hydrogen.  But  Clement  and 


CAR 


CAR 


Desormes  first  ascertained  its  true  constitution  to  be 
carburetted  sulphur  ; and  they  invented  a process  of 
great  simplicity,  for  at  once  preparing  it,  and  proving 
its  nature.  Tliorougnly  calcined  charcoal  is  to  be  put 
into  a porcelain  tube,  that  traverses  a furnace  at  a 
slight  angle  of  inclination.  To  the  higher  end  of  the 
tube,  a retort  of  glass,  containing  sulphur,  is  luted ; 
and  to  the  lower  end  is  attached  an  adopter  tube, 
which  enters  into  a bottle  with  two  tubulures,  half  full 
of  water,  and  surrounded  with  very  cold  water  or  ice. 
From  the  other  aperture  of  the  bottle,  a bent  tube  pro- 
ceeds into  the  pneumatic  trough.  When  the  porcelain 
tube  is  brought  into  a state  of  ignition,  heat  is  applied 
to  the  sulphur,  which  subliming  into  the  tube,  com- 
bines with  the  charcoal,  forming  the  liquid  carburet. 

The  carburet  of  sulphur  dissolves  camphor.  It 
does  not  unite  with  water  ; but  very  readily  with  alko- 
hol  and  tether.  With  chloride  of  azot  it  forms  a non- 
detonating compound.  The  waters  of  potassa,  bary- 
tes, and  lime,  slowly  decompose  it,  with  the  evolution 
of  carbonic  acid  gas.  It  combines  with  ammonia  and 
lime,  forming  carbo-sulphurets.  The  carburet,  satu- 
rated with  ammoniacal  gas,  forms  a yellow  pulveru- 
lent substance,  which  sublimes  unaltered  in  close  ves- 
sels, but  is  so  deliquescent  that  it  cannot  be  passed 
from  one  vessel  to  another  without  absorbing  moisture. 
When  heated  in  that  state,  crystals  of  hydrosulphuret 
of  ammonia  form.  The  compound  with  lime  is  made 
by  heating  some  quicklime  in  a tube,  and  causing  the 
vapour  of  carburet  to  pass  through  it.  The  lime  be- 
comes incandescent  at  the  instant  of  combination. 

When  the  carburet  is  left  for  some  weeks  in  contact 
with  nitro-muriatic  acid,  it  is  converted  into  a sub- 
stance having  very  much  the  appearance  and  physical 
properties  of  camphor ; being  soluble  in  alkohol  and 
oil,  and  insoluble  in  water.  This  substance  is,  ac- 
cording to  Berzelius,  a triple  acid,  composed  of  two 
atoms  of  muriatic  acid,  one  atom  of  sulphurous  acid, 
and  one  atom  of  carbonic  acid.  He  calls  it,  muriatico- 
sulphurous-carbonic  acid. 

When  potassium  is  heated  in  the  vapour  of  the  car- 
buret, it  burns  with  a reddish  flame,  and  a black  film 
appears  on  the  surface.  On  admitting  water,  a green- 
ish solution  of  sulphuret  of  potassa  is  obtained,  con- 
taining a mixture  of  charcoal.  From  its  vapour  pass- 
ing through  ignited  muriate  of  silver,  without  occa- 
sioning any  reduction  of  the  metal,  it  is  demonstrated 
that  this  carburet  is  destitute  of  hydrogen. 

When  the  compound  of  potassa,  water,  and  carbu- 
ret of  sulphur,  is  added  to  metallic  solutions,  precipi- 
tates of  a peculiar  kind,  called  carbo-sulphurets,  are 
obtained. 

Carburet  of  sulphur  was  found  by  Dr.  Brewster  to 
exceed  all  fluid  bodies  in  refractive  power,  and  even 
the  solids,  flint-glass,  topaz,  and  tourmaline.  In  dis- 
persive power  it  exceeds  every  fluid  substance  except 
oil  of  cassia,  holJ'ng  an  intermediate  place  between 
phosphorus  and  balsam  of  Tolu.” — Ure. 

Carburetted  hydrogen  gas.  Carbonated  hydro- 
gen gas ; Heavy  inflammable  air;  Hydro-carbonate. 
Olefiant  gas.  Hydroguret  of  carbon.  “ Of  this  com- 
pound gas  we  have  two  species,  differing  in  the  pro- 
portions of  the  constituents.  The  first,  consisting  of 
1 prime  equivalent  of  each,  is  carburetted  hydrogen ; 
the  second,  of  1 prime  of  carbon,  and  2 of  hydrogen,  is 
subcarburetted  hydrogen. 

1.  Carburetted  hydrogen , the  percarburetted  of  the 
French  chemists,  is,  according  to  Mr.  Brande,  the  only 
definite  compound  of  these  two  elements.  To  prepare 
it,  we  mix,  in  a glass  retort,  1 part  of  alkohol  and  4 of 
sulphuric  acid,  and  expose  the  retort  to  a moderate 
heat.  The  gas  is  usually  received  over  water ; though 
De  Saussure  stales,  that  this  liquid  absorbs  more  than 
l-7th  of  its  volume  of  the  gas.  It  is  destructive  of  ani- 
mal life.  Its  specific  gravity  is  0.978,  according  to 
Saussure.  100  cubic  incnes  weigh  28.80  gr.  It  pos- 
sesses all  the  mechanical  properties  of  air.  It  is  invi- 
sible, and  void  of  taste  and  smell,  when  it  has  been 
washed  from  a little  adhereous  vapour.  The  effect  of 
heat  on  this  gas  is  curious.  When  passed  through  a 
porcelain  tube,  heated  to  a cherry-red,  it  lets  fall  a 
portion  of  charcoal,  and  nearly  doubles  its  volume.  At 
a higher  temperature  it  deposites  more  charcoal,  and 
augments  in  bulk  ; till  finally,  at  the  greatest  heat  to 
which  we  can  expose  it,  it  lets  fall  almost  the  wdiole  of 
Ks  carbon,  and  assumes  a volume  3£  times  greater  than 
it  had  at  first.  These  remarkable  results,  observed 


with  great  care,  have  induced  the  illustrious  Berthol  • 
let  to  conclude,  with  much  plausibility,  that  hydrogen 
and  carbon  combine  in  many  successive  proportions. 
The  transmission  of  a series  of  electric  sparks  through 
this  gas,  produces  a similar  effect  with  that  of  simple 
heat. 

Carburetted  hydrogen  burns  with  a splendid  white 
flame.  When  mixed  with  three  times  its  bulk  of  oxy- 
gen, and  kindled  by  a taper  or  the  electric  spark,  it  ex- 
plodes with  great  violence. 

When  this  gas  is  mixed  with  its  own  bulk  of  chlo- 
rine, the  gaseous  mixture  is  condensed  over  water  into 
a peculiar  oily -looking  compound.  Hence  this  carbu 
retted  hydrogen  was  called  by  its  discoverers,  the  as 
sociated  Dutch  chemists,  olefiant  gas.  Robiquet  and 
Colin  formed  this  liquid  in  considerable  quantities,  by 
making  two  currents  of  its  constituent  gases  meet  in  a 
glass  globe.  The  olefiant  gas  should  be  in  rather  larger 
quantity  than  the  chlorine,  otherwise  the  liquid  be- 
comes of  a green  colour,  and  acquires  acid  properties. 
When  it  is  washed  with  water,  and  distilled  off-  dry 
muriate  of  lime,  it  may  be  regarded  as  pure.  It  is  then 
a limpid  colourless  essence  of  a pleasant  flavour,  and 
a sharp,  sweet,  and  not  disagreeable  taste.  At  45°  its 
specific  gravity  is  2.2201.  Dr.  Thompson  calls  this 
fluid  chloric  (ether,  and  it  may  with  propriety,  Mr. 
Brande  thinks,  be  termed  hydro-chloride  of  carbon. 

Olefiant  gas  is  elegantly  analyzed  by  heating  sulphur 
in  it  over  mercury.  One  cubic  inch  of  it,  with  2 grains 
of  sulphur,  yields  2 cubic  inches  of  sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen, and  charcoal  is  deposited.  Now  we  know  that 
the  latter  gas  contains  just  its  own  volume  of  hydrogen. 

2.  Subcarburetted  hydrogen.  This  gas  is  supposed 
to  be  procured  in  a state  of  definite  composition,  from 
the  mud  or  stagnant  pools  or  ditches.  We  have  only 
to  fill  a wide-mouthed  goblet  with  water,  and  invert- 
ing it  in  the  ditch-water,  stir  the  bottom  with  a stick. 
Gas  rises  into  the  goblet. 

The  fire-damp  of  mines  is  a similar  gas  to  that  of 
ditches.  There  is  in  both  cases  an  admixture  of  car- 
bonic acid,  which  lime  or  potassa-water  will  remove. 
A proportion  of  air  is  also  present,  the  quantity  of 
which  can  be  ascertained  by  analysis.  By  igniting 
acetate  of  potassa  in  a gun-barrel,  an  analogous  species 
of  gas  is  obtained. 

Subcarburetted  hydrogen  is  destitute  of  colour,  taste, 
and  smell.  It  burns  with  a yellow  flame,  like  that  of 
a candle. 

As  the  gas  of  ditches  and  the  choke-damp  of  mines 
is  evidently  derived  from  the  action  of  water  on  de- 
caying vegetable  or  carbonaceous  matter,  we  can  un- 
derstand that  a similar  product  will  be  obtained  by 
passing  water  over  ignited  charcoal,  or  by  heating 
moistened  charcoal  or  vegetable  matter  in  retorts.  The 
gases  are  here,  however,  a somewhat  complex  mix- 
ture, as  well  as  what  we  obtain  by  igniting  pit  coal 
and  wood  in  iron  retorts.  The  combustion  of  subcar- 
buretted hydrogen  with  common  air  takes  place  only 
when  they  are  mixed  in  certain  proportions.  If  from 
6 to  12  parts  of  air  be  mixed  with  one  of  carburetted 
hydrogen,  we  have  explosive  mixtures.  Proportions 
beyond  these  limits  will  not  explode.  In  like  manner, 
from  1 to  2g  of  oxygen  must  be  mixed  with  one  of  the 
combustible  gas,  otherwise  we  have  no  explosion.  Sir 
H.  Davy  says,  that  this  gas  has  a disagreeable  empy- 
reumatic  smell,  and  that  water  absQros  I-30th  of  its 
volume  of  it.” — Ure. 

CA'RCARUS.  (From  Kanxaipu),  to  resound.)  Car- 
caros.  A fever  in  which  the  patient  has  a continual 
horror  and  trembling,  with  an  unceasing  sounding  in 
his  ears. 

Ca'rcax.  (Fibm  Kapa,  a head.)  A species  of  pop- 
py, with  a very  large  head. 

Ca'kcer.  A remedy,  according  to  Paracelsus,  for 
restraining  the  motions  of  body,  the  extravagant  and 
libidinous  conversation  in  some  disorders ; as  in  Chorea 
Sancti  Viti,  &c. 

Carche'sius.  (Kap%J7fftof.  The  openings  at  the 
top  of  a ship’s  mast  through  which  the  rope  passes.)  A 
name  of  some  bandages  noticed  by  Galen,  and  de- 
scribed by  Oribasius. 

GARCINO'MA.  ( Carcinoma , atis.  n.  From  icap- 
kivos,  a cancer.)  See  Cancer. 

CARCINUS.  (Kap/ctvoy,  a cancer.)  Carcinos  See 
Cancer. 

Cardama'ntica.  (From  KapSayov,  the  nasturtium  1 
A species  of  sciatica  cresses. 

191 


CAR 


CAR 


Cardamele'um.  A medicine  of  no  note,  mentioned 
by  Galen. 

CARDAMI'NE.  ( Cardamine  es.  f. ; from  KapSia , 
the  heart;  because  it  acts  as  a cordial  and  strengthened 
or  from  its  having  the  taste  of  cardamum,  that  is,  nas- 
turtium, or  cress.)  Cuckoo-flower.  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the 'Linnaean  system.  Class,  Te- 
tr adynamia ; Order,  Siliquosa. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  cuckoo-flower. 
See  Cardamine  pratensis- 

Cardamine  pratensis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  ladies’  smock,  or  cuckoo-flower,  called 
cardamine  in  the  pharmacopoeias.  Cardamantica ; 
Nasturtium;  aquaticum;  Culiftos;  Iberis  sophia; 
Cardamine  :—foliis  pinnatis,foliolis , radicalibus  sub- 
rutundis , caulinis  lanceolatis  of  Linnaeus.  The  flower 
has  a place  in  the  materia  medica,  upon  the  authority 
of  Sir  George  Baker,  who  has  published  five  cases,  two 
of  Chorea  Sancti  Viti,  one  of  spasmodic  asthma,  one  of 
hemiplegia,  and  a case  of  spasmodic  affections  of  the 
lower  limbs,  wherein  the  flores  cardamines  were  sup- 
posed to  have  been  successfully  used.  A variety  of 
virtues  have  been  given  to  this  plant,  but  it  does  not 
deserve  the  attention  of  practitioners. 

CARDAMO'MUM.  (From  KapSapov  and  apiopov: 
because  it  partakes  of  the  nature,  and  is  like  both  the 
cardamum  and  amomum.)  The  cardamom.  See 
Amomum , Elettaria , and  Illicium. 

Cardamomum  majus.  See  Amomum granum para- 
disi. 

Cardamomum  medium.  The  seeds  correspond,  in 
every  respect,  with  the  less,  except  in  being  twice  as 
long,  but  no  thicker  than  the  Cardamomum  minus. 

Cardamomum  minus.  See  Elettaria  cardamo- 
mum. 

Cardamomum  piperatum.  See  Amomum  granum 
paradisi. 

Cardamomum  siberiense.  See  Illicium  stella- 
tum. 

CA'RDAMUM.  (From  KapSia,  the  heart;  because 
it  comforts  and  strengthens  the  heart.)  The  carda- 
mum.  See  Amomum , Elettaria , and  Illicium. 

CA'RDIA.  (From  Keap , the  heart.)  1.  This  term 
was  applied  by  the  Greeks  to  the  heart. 

2.  The  superior  opening  of  the  stomach. 

CARDI'AC.  (Cardiacus ; from  KapSia,  the  heart.) 
A cordial.  See  Cordial. 

Cardiaca  confectio.  See  Confectio  aromatica. 

Cardiaca  herba.  So  named  from  the  supposed  re- 
lief it  gives  in  faintings  and  disorders  of  the  stomach. 
The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  plant  called  Mother- 
wort. See  Leonurus  cardiaca. 

Cardiaca  passio.  The  cardiac  passion.  Ancient 
writers  frequently  mention  a disorder  under  this  name, 
which  consists  of  that  oppression  and  distress  which 
often  accompanies  fainting. 

Cardiacus  morbus.  A name  by  which  the  an- 
cients called  the  typus  fever. 

CARDIA'LGIA.  (From  KapSia , the  cardia,  and 
aXyos,  pain.)  Pain  at  the  stomach.  The  heartburn. 
Dr.  Cullen  ranks  it  as  a symptom  of  dyspepsia.  Heart- 
burn is  an  uneasy  sensation  in  the  stomach,  with 
anxiety,  a heat  more  or  less  violent,  and  sometimes  at- 
tended with  oppression,  faintness,  an  inclination  to 
vomit,  or  a plentiful  discharge  of  clear  lymph,  like 
saliva.  This  pain  may  arise  from  various  and  differ- 
ent causes;  such  as  flatus;  from  sharp  humours,  either 
acid,  bilious,  or  rancid  ; from  worms  gnawing  and  vel- 
licating  the  coats  of  the  stomach ; from  acrid  and  pun- 
gent food , such  as  spices,  aromatics,  fee. ; as  also  from 
rheumatic  and  gouty  humours,  or  surfeits ; from  too 
free  a use  of  tea,  or  watery  fluids  relaxing  the  stomach, 
&c. ; from  the  natural  mucus  being  abraded,  particu- 
larly in  the  upper  orifice  of  the  stomach. 

Cardialgia  sputatoria.  See  Pyrosis. 

Cardime'lech.  (From  KapSia,  the  heart,  and  me- 
leck,  Heb.  a governor.)  A fictitious  term  in  Dolaeus’s 
Encyclopedia,  by  which  he  would  express  a particular 
active  principle  in  the  heart,  appointed  to  what  we 
call  the  vital  functions. 

Cardimo'na.  Pain  at  the  stomach. 

Cardinal  flowers.  See  Lobelia. 

Cardiname'ntum.  (From  cardo,  a hinge.)  An  ar- 
ticulation like  a hinge. 

CARDIO'GMUS.  (From  KapSiwaaio,  to  have  a pain 
in  the  stomach.)  1.  A distressing  pain  at  the  prtecor- 
dia  or  stomach. 

192 


2.  An  aneurism  in  or  near  the  heart,  which  occa- 
sions pain  in  the  praecordia. 

3.  A variety  of  the  Exangia  aneurisma  of  Good’s 
nosological  arrangement. 

CARDIO'NCHUS.  (From  KapSia,  the  heart,  and 
oyKog,  a tumour.)  An  aneurism  in  the  heart,  or  in  the 
aorta  near  the  heart. 

Cardiotro'tus.  (From  KapSia , the  heart,  and 
TirpwoKu),  to  wound.)  One  who  hath  a wound  in  his 
heart. 

CARDI'TIS.  (From  KapSia,  the  heart.)  Empres- 
ma  carditis  of  Good.  Inflammation  of  the  heart.  It 
is  a genus  of  disease  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the  class 
Pyrexia,  and  order  Phlegmasia.  It  is  known  by  py- 
rexia, pain  in  the  region  of  the  heart,  great  anxiety,  diffi- 
culty of  breathing,  cough,  irregular  pulse,  palpitation, 
and  fainting,  and  the  other  symptoms  of  inflammation. 

The  treatment  of  carditis  is,  in  a great  measure, 
similar  to  that  of  pneumonia.  It  is  necessary  to  take 
blood  freely,  as  well  generally  as  locally,  and  apply  a 
blister  near  the  part.  Purging  may  be  carried  to  a 
greater  extent  than  in  pneumonia ; and  the  use  of  di- 
gitalis is  more  important,  to  lessen  the  irritability  of 
the  heart.  It  is  equally  desirable  to  promote  diapho- 
resis, but  expectoration  is  not  so  much  to  be  looked 
for,  unless  indeed,  as  very  often  happens,  the  inflam- 
mation should  have  extended,  in  some  degree,  to  the 
kings. 

Cardite.  See  organic  relics. 

CA'RDO.  A hinge.  1.  The  articulation  called 

Ginglymus. 

2.  The  second  vertebra  of  the  neck. 

Cardo'nium.  Wine  medicated  with  herbs. — Para- 
celsus. 

Cardopa'tium.  The  low  carline  thistle.  Most  pro- 
bably the  Carlina  acaulis  of  Linnaeus,  said  to  be  dia- 
phoretic. 

CA'RDUUS.  ( A carere,  quasi  aptus  car  end  a lance , 
being  fit  to  tease  wool;  or  from  Kcipm,  to  abrade;  so 
named  from  its  roughness,  which  abrades  and  tears 
whatever  it  meets  with.)  The  thistle  or  teasel.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  aqualis. 
Carduus  acanthus.  The  bear’s  breech. 

Carduus  altilis.  The  artichoke. 

Carduus  arvensis.  The  way-thistle.  See  Serra- 
tula  arvensis. 

Carduus  benedictus.  See  Centaurea. 

Carduus  h-emorrhoidalis.  The  common  creep- 
ing way-thistle.  Serratula  arvensis  of  Linnaeus. 
Carduus  lacteus.  See  Carduus  marianus 
Carduus  marie:.  See  Carduus  marianus. 

Carduus  marianus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  Carduus  maria.  Common  milk-thistle,  or 
Lady’s  thistle.  Carduus : foliis  amplexicaulibus,  has  • 
tato-pinnatifidis,  spinosis ; calycibus  aphyllis ; spinis 
caliculatis , duplicato-spinosis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  seeds 
of  this  plant,  and  the  herb,  have  been  employed  medi- 
cinally. The  former  contain  a bitter  oil,  and  are  re- 
commended as  relaxants.  The  juice  of  the  latter  is 
said  to  be  salutary  in  dropsies,  in  the  dose  of  four 
ounces;  and,  according  to  Miller,  to  be  efficacious 
against  pungent  pains.  The  leaves  when  young  sur- 
pass, when  boiled,  the  finest  cabbage,  and  in  that  state 
are  diuretic. 

Carduus  sativus.  The  artichoke. 

Carduus  solstitialis.  The  Calcitrapa  officinalis 
of  Linnaeus. 

Carduus  tomentosus.  The  woolly  thistle.  See 

Onopordium  acanthium. 

CAREBA'RIA.  (From  Kapy,  the  head,  and  fiapos, 
weight.)  A painful  and  uneasy  heaviness  of  the  head. 

CARE'NUM.  (From  xapy,  the  head.)  Galen  uses 
this  word  for  the  head. 

Carenum  vinum.  Strong  wine. 

Careum.  (From  Caria,  the  country  whence  they 
were  brought.)  The  caraway. 

CA'REX.  ( Carex , ids-,  feem.  from  careo,  not  quia 
viribus  careat,  but  because,  from  its  roughness,  it  is  fit 
ad  carendum,  to  card,  tease,  or  pull  ) Sedge.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system 
Class,  Monacia;  Order,  Triandria. 

Carex  arenaria.  The  systematic  name  of  the  offi 
cinal  sarsaparilla  germanica,  which  grows  plentifully 
on  the  sea  coast.  The  root  has  been  found  serviceable 
in  some  mucal  affections  of  the  trachea,  in  rheumatic 
pains*  and  gouty  affections.  These  roots,  and  those  of 


CAR 


CAR 


the  carer  hirta , are  mixed  with  the  true  sarsaparilla, 
Which  they  much  resemble. 

C A'  RICA.  (From  Caria,  the  place  where  they 
were  cultivated.)  The  fig.  See  Ficus  carica. 

Carica  pataya.  Papavv-tree.  This  is  a native  of 
both  Indies,  and  the  Guinea  coast  of  Africa.  When 
the  roundish  fruit  are  nearly  ripe,  the  inhabitants  of 
India  boil  and  eat  them  with  their  meat,  as  we  do  tur- 
nips. They  have  somewhat  the  flavour  of  a pompion. 
Previous  to  boiling,  they  soak  them  for  some  time  in 
salt  and  water,  to  extract  the  corrosive  juice,  unless 
the  meat  they  are  to  be  boiled  with  should  be  very  salt 
and  old,  and  then  this  juice  being  in  them,  will  make 
them  as  tender  as  a chicken.  But  they  mostly  pickle  the 
long  fruit,  and  thus  they  make  no  bad  succedaneum  for 
mango.  The  buds  of  the  female  flowers  are  gathered, 
and  made  into  a sweetmeat ; and  the  inhabitants  are 
such  good  husbands  of  the  produce  of  this  tree,  that 
they  boil  the  shells  of  the  ripe  fruit  into  a repast,  and 
the  insides  are  eaten  with  sugar  in  the  manner  of  me- 
lons. Every  part  of  the  papaw-tree,  except  the  ripe 
fruit,  affords  a milky  juice,  which  is  used,  in  the  Isle 
of  France,  as  an  effectual  remedy  for  the  tape-worm. 
In  Europe,  however,  whither  it  has  been  sent  in  the 
concrete  slate,  it  has  not  answered,  perhaps  from  some 
change  it  had  undergone,  or  not  having  been  given  in 
a sufficient  dose. 

A very  remarkable  circumstance  regarding  the  pa- 
paw-tree,  is  the  extraction  from  its  juice  of  a matter 
exactly  resembling  the  flesh  or  fibre  of  animals,  and 
hence  called  vegetable  fibrin. 

Caricum.  (From  Caricus,  its  inventor.)  Carycum. 
An  ointment  for  cleansing  ulcers,  composed  of  helle- 
bore, lead,  and  cantharides. 

CA  RIES.  (From  carah , Chald.)  Oangrcna  Ca- 
ries of  Good.  Rottenness,  mortification  of  the  bones 
[Cooper  derives  caries  from  keipo),  to  abrade.  “It 
is  a disease  of  the  bones,  supposed  to  be  very  analo- 
gous to  ulceration  of  the  soft  parts ; and  this  compa- 
rison is  one  of  great  antiquity,  having  been  made  by 
Galen.  However,  by  the  generality  of  . the  ancients, 
caries  was  not  discriminated  from  necrosis. 

“ it  was  from  the  surgeons  of  the  eighteenth  century 
that  more  correct  opinions  were  derived  respecting 
caries.  Until  this  period,  writers  had  dene  little  more 
than  mentioning  the  complaint,  and  the  methods  of 
treating  it.  Some  new  light  was  thrown  upon  the 
subject  by  J.  L.  Petit,  in  his  remarks  upon  exostosis 
and  caries.  But,  as  he  only  spoke  of  the  disorder  as 
one  of  the  terminations  of  exostosis,  he  has  not  entered 
far  into  the  consideration  of  it.  The  best  observations 
on  caries  were  first  made  by  Dr.  A.  Monro,  primus. 
This  memoir  contains  the  earliest  correct  ideas  of  dry 
caries,  or  necrosis,  which  is  rightly  compared  to  mor- 
tification of  the  soft  parts,  and  named  gangrenous 
caries. 

“ The  bones,  like  other  parts  of  the  body,  are  com-  J 
posed  of  arteries,  veins,  absorbent  vessels,  nerves,  and  1 
a cellular  texture ; they  are  endued  with  vitality  ; they  j 
are  nourished,  they  grow,  waste,  are  repaired,  and 
undergo  various  mutations,  according  to  the  age  of  the 
individual ; and  they  are  subject  to  diseases  analogous 
to  those  of  the  soft  parts.  To  the  phosphate  of  lime, 
which  is  more  or  less  distributed  in  their  texture,  they 
owe  all  their  solidity  ; and,  perhaps,  it  is  to  the  same 
earthy  substance  that  the  difference  in  their  vital  pro- 
perties, and  in  their  diseases,  from  those  of  the  rest  of 
the  body,  is  to  be  referred.  In  fact,  this  particular  or- 
ganization, and  inferior  vitality  of  the  bones,  are  gene- 
rally supposed  to  account  for  the  small  number,  pecu- 
liar character,  and  general  slow  progress  of  their  dis- 
eases.”—^Cooper's  Surg.  Diet.  A.] 

Cari'ma.  The  cassada  bread. 

CARI'NA.  The  keel  of  a ship.  1.  A name  for- 
merly applied  to  the  hack  bone. 

2.  In  botany,  the  keel,  or  that  part  of  the  petals 
Which  compose  a papilionaceous  flower,  consisting  of 
two,  united  or  separate,  which  embrace  the  internal 
or  genital  organs.  See  Corolla. 

CARINATUS.  Keel-shaped  ; applied  to  leaves  and 
petals  when  the  back  is  longitudinally  prominent  like 
the  keel  of  a boat ; as  in  the  leaf  of  the  Allium  cari- 
natum , and  the  petals  of  the  Allium  ampellprasum 
Carum  carui. 

CARINTHINE.  A subspecies  of  mineral  augite 
(bund  in  Carinthia. 

CARIOUS.  When  a part  of  a bone  is  deprived  of 

N 


its  vitality,  it  is  said  to  be  carious,  dead,  hr  rotten: 
hence  carious  tooth,  <fcc. 

Ca'rium  terra.  Lime. 

Carivilla'ndi.  Sarsaparilla  root. 

CARLI'NA.  (From  Carolus , Charles  the  Great,  of 
Charlemagne ; because  it  was  believed  that  an  angel 
showed  it  to  him,  and  that,  by  the  use  of  it,  his  army 
was  preserved  from  the  plague.)  Carline  thistle.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system^ 
Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  cequalis.  The 
officinal  name  of  two  kinds  of  plants. 

Carlina  acaulis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
chamceleon  album.  Carlina;  Cardopatium.  Carline 
thistle.  Star  thistle.  Carlina — caule  unijloro , flore 
breviorc , of  Linnaeus.  The  root  of  this  plant  is  bitter, 
and  said  to  possess  diaphoretic  and  anthelmintic 
virtues."  It  is  also  extolled  by  foreign  physicians  in 
the  cure  of  acute,  malignant,  and  chronic  disorders, 
particularly  gravel  and  jaundice. 

Carlina  gummifera.  Carduus  pinea ; Ixine.  Pine 
thistle.  This  plant  is  the  Atractylis  gummifera  of 
Linnaeus.  The  root,  when  wounded,  yields  a milky, 
viscous  juice,  which  concretes  into  tenaceous  masses, 
at  first  whitish,  resembling  wax,  when  much  handled 
growing  black  ; it  is  said  to  be  chewed  with  the  same 
views  as  mastich. 

Carline  thistle.  See  Carlina  acaulis. 

Ca'rlo  sancto  radix.  St.  Charles’s  root,  so  called 
by  the  Spaniards,  on  account  of  its  great  virtues.  It  is 
found  in  Mechoachan,  a province  in  America.  Its 
bark  hath  an  aromatic  flavour,  with  a bitter  acrid 
taste.  The  root  itself  consists  of  slender  fibres.  The 
bark  is  sudorific,  and  strengthens  the  gums  and  sto- 
mach. 

CA'RMEN.  ( Carmen , inis.  neut.  A verse;  be- 
cause charms  usually  consisted  of  a verse.)  A charm ; 
an  amulet. 

Carmes.  (The  Carmelite  friars,  Fr.)  Carmelite 
water;  so  named  from  its  inventors;  composed  of 
baum,  lemon-peel,  &c. 

Carmina'ntia.  See  Carminative. 

CARMEN  ATIVE.  (C arminativus ; from  carmen , 
a verse,  or  charm  ; because  practitioners,  in  ancient 
times,  ascribed  their  operation  to  a charm  or  enchant- 
ment.) That  which  allays  pain  and  dispels  flatu- 
lencies of  the  pi  imac  vise.  The  principal  carminatives 
are  the  semina  cardamomi,  anisi  et  carui ; olea  essen- 
tialia  carui,  anisi  et  juniperi ; confectio  aromatica; 
pulvis  aromaticus;  tinctura  cardamomi ; tinctura  cin- 
namomi  composita;  zingiber;  stimulants;  tonics; 
bitters  ; and  astringents. 

CARMINE.  A red  pigment  prepared  from  cochi- 
neal. 

CARMINIUM.  The  name  given  by  the  French 
chemists  to  the  colouring  matter  of  cochineal.  See 
Coccus  cacti. 

Carnaba'dium.  Caraway-seed. 

CA'RNEA  COLUMNA.  A fleshy  pillar  or  column. 
The  name  of  some  fleshy  fasciculi  in  the  ventricles  of 
the  heart.  See  Heart. 

CARNELIAN.  A subspecies  of  calcedony. 
CARNICULA.  (Diminutive  of  caro , carnis, flesh.)' 
A small  fleshy  substance ; applied  to  the  substance 
which  surrounds  the  gums. 

CARNIFORMIS.  (From  caro , flesh,  and  forma , 
likeness.)  Having  the  appearance  of  flesh.  It  is  com- 
monly applied  to  an  abscess,  where  the  flesh  surround- 
ing the  orifice  is  hardened,  and  of  a firm  consistence. 

CARNOSUS.  Fleshy;  applied  to  loaves,  pods,  <fcc. 
of  a thick  pulpy  substance;  as  in  the  leaves  of  all 
those  plants  called  succulent,  especially  cedum  cras- 
sula , &c. 

CA'RO.  (Caro,  ectrnis.  foem.)  1.  Flesh.  The  red 
part  or  belly  of  a muscle. 

2.  The  pulp  of  fruit. 

Carolina.  See  Carlina. 

CAROMEL.  The  smell  exhaled  from  sugar  at  the 
Calcining  heat. 

Caro'pt.  The  Amomum  verum. 

Caro'ra.  A chemical  vessel  that  resembles  a 
urinal. 

Caro'sis.  See  Carus. 

CARO'TA.  See  Daucus. 

CAROTID.  (From  sapoin,  to  cause  to  sleep;  be- 
cause, if  tied  with  a ligature,  the  animal  becomes 
comatose,  and  has  the  appearance  of  being  asleep.) 
An  artery  of  the  neck.  See  Carotid  artery. 

199 


CAR 


CAR 


Carotid  artery.  Arteria  carotidea.  The  caro- 
tids are  Uvo  considerable  arteries  that  proceed,  one  on 
each  side  of  the  cervical  vertebra,  to  the  head,  to  sup- 
ply it  with  blood.  The  right  carotid  does  not  arise 
immediately  from  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  but  is  given 
off  from  the  arteria  innoininata.  The  left  arises  from 
the  arch  of  the  aorta.  Each  carotid  is  divided  into 
external  and  internal,  or  that  portion  without  and  that 
within  the  cranium.  The  external  gives  off  eight 
branches,  to  the  neck  and  face,  viz.  anteriorly , the  su- 
perior thyroideal,  the  sublingual,  the  inferior  maxil- 
lary, the  external  maxillary  ; posteriorly,  the  internal 
maxillary,  the  occipital,  the  external  auditory,  and  the 
temporal.  The  internal  carotid  or  cerebral  artery, 
gives  off  four  branches  within  the  cavity  of  the  crani- 
um; the  anterior  cerebral,  the  posterior,  the  central 
artery  of  the  optic  nerve,  and  the  internal  orbital. 

Caro'um.  The  caraway-seed. 

CA'RPASUS.  (So  named  zsapa  to  uapov  iroiyaai : 
because  it  makes  the  person  who  eats  it  appear  as  if 
he  was  asleep.)  An  herb,  the  juice  of  which  was  for- 
merly called  opocarpason , opocarpathon,  or  opocalpa- 
son;  according  to  Galen,  it  resembles  myrrh;  but  is 
esteemed  highly  poisonous. 

Carpa'thicum  balsamum.  See  Pinus  Cemhra. 

Carpentaria.  (From  carpentarius,  a carpenter  ; 
tfnd  so  named  from  its  virtues  in  healing  cuts  and 
wounds  made  by  a tool.)  A vulnerary  herb ; not  pro- 
perly known  what  it  is,  but  believed  to  be  the  common 
milfoil  or  yarrow,  the  Ackillcea  millifolium  of  Linnsus. 

CARPIIA'LEUS.  (From  *ap0w,  to  exsiccate.) 
Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  mean  dry , opposed  to 
moist. 

CARPHOLO'GIA.  (From  *ap0o?,  the  nap  of 
clothes,  and  A eyw,  to  pluck.)  Carpologia.  A deliri- 
ous picking  of  the  bed-clothes,  a symptom  of  great 
danger  in  diseases.  See  Floccilatio. 

CA'RPHUS.  (From  Kap<pr),  a straw.)  1.  In  Hip- 
pocrates it  signifies  a mote,  or  any  small  substance. 

2.  A pustule  of  the  smallest  kind. 

3.  The  herb  fenugreek. 

CA'RPIA.  (From  carpo,  to  pluck,  as  lint  is  made 
from  linen  cloth.)  Lint. 

Carpi'smus.  The  w rist. 

CARPOBA'LSAMUM.  (From  icapiros,  fruit,  and 
fiaXoapov,  balsam.)  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

CARPOLOGIA.  See  Carphologia. 

CARPOTICA.  (Caipolicus  ; from  Kapruxris,  frui- 
tio,  from  Kapnoos,  fructus.)  The  name  of  an  order  of 
diseases  in  the  class  Geneiica  of  Good’s  Nosology; 
diseases  afflicting  the  impregnation.  It  embraces  four 
genera.  1.  Paracyesis , morbid  pregnancy.  2.  Paro 
dyniu , morbid  labour.  3.  Eccyesis , extra  uterine  fce- 
taiion.  4.  Pseudocyesis,  spurious  pregnancy. 

CA'RPUS.  ( Kapnosi  the  wrist.)  The  wrist,  or 
carpus.  It  is  situated  between  the  forearm  and  hand. 
See  Bone. 

CARROT.  See  Daucus  carota. 

Carrot , candy.  See  Athamanta  Cretensis. 

Carrot  poultice.  See  Cataplasma  dauci. 

CA'RTHAMUS.  (From  KaOaipio,  to  purge.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmsan  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Polygamia  aqualis. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  saffron  flower. 
See  Carthamus  tinctorius. 

Carthamus  tinctorius.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  saffron  flower,  or  bastard  saffron,  called  also 
( nicus;  Crocus  saracenicus  ; Carthamum  officinarum  ; 
Curduus  sativus.  Carthamus-^foliis  ovatis,  integris, 
serrato-aculeatis  of  Linnaeus.  The  seeds,  freed  from 
their  shells,  have  been  celebrated  as  a gentle  cathartic, 
in  the  dose  of  one  or  two  drachms.  They  are  also 
supposed  to  be  diuretic  and  expectorant;  particularly 
useful  in  humoral  asthma,  and  similar  complaints. 
The  carthamus  lanatus  is  considered  in  France  as  a 
febrifuge  and  sudorific.  The  dried  flowers  are  fre- 
quently mixed  with  saffron,  to  adulterate  it.  The 
plant  is  cultivated  in  many  places  on  account  of  its 
flowers,  which  are  used  as  a dye. 

“In  some  of  the  deep  reddish,  yellow,  or  orange- 
coloured  flowers,  the  yellow  matter  seems  to  be  of  the 
same  kind  with  that  of  the  pure  yellow  flowers ; but 
the  red  to  be  of  a different  kind  from  the  pure  red 
ones.  Watery  menstrua  take  up  only  the  yellow',  and 
leave  the  red,  which  may  afterward  be  extracted  by 
alkohol,  or  by  a wreak  solution  of  alkali.  Such  par- 
ticularly are  the  saffron-coloured  flowers  of  carthamus. 


These,  after  the  yellow  matter  has  been  extracted  bv 
water,  are  said  to  give  a tincture  to  ley ; from  which, 
on  standing  at  rest  for  some  time,  a deep  red  fecula 
subsides  called  safflower,  and  from  the  countri</ 
whence  it  is  commonly  brought  to  us,  Spanish  red  an/ 
China  lake.  This  pigment  impregnates  alkohol  with 
a beautiful  red  tincture  ; but  communicates  no  colour 
to  water. 

Rouge  is  prepared  from  carthamus.  For  this  pur- 
pose the  red  colour  is  extracted  by  a solution  of  the 
subcarbonate  of  soda,  and  precipitated  by  lemon  juice 
previously  depurated  by  standing.  This  precipitate  is 
dried  on  earthen  plates,  mixed  with  talc,  or  French 
chalk,  reduced  to  a powder  by  means  of  the  leaves  of 
shave-grass,  triturated  with  it  till  they  are  both  very 
fine,  and  then  sifted.  The  fineness  of  the  powder  and 
proportion  of  the  precipitate  constitute  the  difference 
between  the  finer  and  cheaper  rouge.  It  is  likewise 
spread  very  thin  on  saucers,  and  sold  in  this  state  for 
dying. 

Carthamus  is  used  for  dying  silk  of  a poppy,  cherry, 
rose,  or  bright  orange-red.  After  the  yellow  matter 
is  extracted  as  above,  and  the  cakes  opened,  it  is  put 
into  a deal  trough,  and  sprinkled  at  different  times 
with  pearl  ashes,  or  rather  soda,  well  powdered  and 
sifted,  in  the  proportion  of  six  pounds  to  a hundred, 
mixing  the  alkali  well  as  it  is  put  in.  The  alkali 
should  be  saturated  with  carbonic  acid.  The  cartha- 
mus is  then  put  on  a cloth  in  a trough  with  a grated 
bottom,  placed  on  a larger  trough,  and  cold  water  poured 
on,  till  the  large  trough  is  filled.  And  this  is  repeated, 
with  the  addition  of  a little  more  alkali  toward  the 
end,  till  the  carthamus  is  exhausted  and  become  yellow. 
Lemon  juice  is  then  poured  into  the  bath,  till  it  is 
turned  of  a fine  cherry  colour,  and  after  it  is  well 
stirred,  the  silk  is  immersed  in  it.  The  silk  is  wrung, 
drained,  and  passed  through  fresh  baths,  washing  and 
drying  after  every  operation,  till  it  is'  of  a proper 
colour ; when  it  is  brightened  in  not  water,  and  lemon 
juice.  For  a poppy  or  fire  colour  a slight  annotto 
ground  is  first  given ; but  the  silk  should  not  be  alumcd. 
For  a pale  carnation  a little  soap  should  be  put  into 
the  bath.  All  these  baths  must  be  used  as  soon  as 
they  are  made ; and  cold,  because  heat  destroys  th« 
colour  of  the  red  feculte.” 

CARTHEUSER,  John  Frederick,  a professor  of 
medicine  at  Francfort,  on  the  Oder,  acquired  consider- 
able reputation  about  the  middle  of  the  last  century, 
by  several  luminous  works  on  botany  and  pharmacy; 
especially  his  “ Rudimenta  Materiae  Medicse  Rationa- 
lis,"  and  “ De  Genericis  quibusdam  Plantarum  Prin- 
cipiis.”  He  had  two  sons,  Frederick  Augustus  and 
William,  also  of  the  medical  profession,  and  authors 
of  some  less  important  works. 

Carthusia'nus.  (From  the  monks  of  that  order, 
who  first  invented  it.)  A name  of  the  precipitated 
sulphur  of  antimony. 

CARTILAGE.  See  Cartilago. 

CARTILAGINEUS.  Cartilaginous.  1.  Applied, 
in  anatomy,  to  parts  which  naturally,  or  from  disease, 
have  a cartilaginous  consistence. 

2.  In  botany,  to  leaves  which  have  a hard  or  horny 
leaf-edge,  as  in  several  species  of  saxifrage.  See  Leaf. 

CARTILA'GO.  ( Cartilago , inis.  fcem.  Quasi 

carnilago  ; from  caro , camis,  flesh.)  A white  elastic, 
glistening  substance,  growing  to  bones,  and  commonly 
called  gristle.  Cartilages  are  divided,  by  anatomists, 
into  obducent , which  cover  the  moveable  articulations 
of  bones;  imer-articular,  which  are  situated  between 
the  articulations,  and  uniting  cartilages,  which  unite 
one  bone  with  another.  Their  use  is  to  facilitate  the 
mot  ions  of  bones,  or  to  connect  them  together. 

The  chemical  analysis  of  cartilage  affords  one-third 
the  weight  of  the  bones,  when  the  calcareous  salts  are 
removed  by  digestion  in  dilute  muriatic  acid.  It  re- 
sembles coagulated  albumen.  Nitric  acid  converts  it 
into  gelatin.  With  alkalies  it  forms  an  animal  soap. 
Cartilage  is  the  primitive  paste,  into  which  the  calca- 
reous salts  are  deposited  in  the  young  animal.  In  the 
disease  rickets,  the  earthy  ma'ter  is  withdrawn  by 
morbid  absorption,  and  the  bones  return  into  the  state 
nearly  of  flexible  cartilage.  Hence  arise  the  distor 
tions  characteristic  of  this  disease. 

Cartilago  annularis.  See  Cartilago  ericoidea. 

Cartilago  arxt.enoidea.  See  Larynx. 

Cartilago  cricoidka.  The  cricoid  cartilage  be 
longs  to  the  larynx,  and  is  situated  between  the  thyroid 


CAR 


CAS 


and  arytenoid  cartilages  and  the  trachea;  it  consti- 
tutes, as  it  were,  the  basis  of  the  many  annular  carti- 
lages of  the  trachea. 

CaR.tila.go  ensiformis.  Cartilago  xiphoidea.  En- 
siform  cartilage.  A cartilage  shaped  somewhat  like 
a sword  or  dagger,  attached  to  the  lowermost  part  of 
the  sternum,  just  at  the  pit  of  the  stomach. 

Cartilago  scutiformis.  See  Thyroid  cartilage. 

Cartilago  thyroidea.  See  Thyroid  cartilage. 

Cartilago  xiphoidea.  See  Cartilago  ensiformis. 

CA'RUI.  (Qaruia.  Arabian.)  The  caraway.  See 
Carum. 

* CA'RUM.  (K apos;  so  named  from  Caria , a pro- 
vince of  Asia.)  The  Caraway.  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Limuean  system.  Class,  Pen- 
tandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  caraway  plant. 
Sec  Carum  carui. 

Carum  carui.  ‘The  systematic  name  for  the  plant, 
the  seeds  of  whichsare  called  caraways.  It  is  also 
called  Carvi ; Cuminum  pratense;  Carus ; Caruon. 
The  seeds  are  well  known  to  have  a pleasant  spicy 
smell,  and  a warm  aromatic  taste ; and,  on  this  ac- 
count, are  used  for  various  economical  purposes.  They 
are  esteemed  to  be  carminative,  cordial,  and  stomachic, 
and  recommended  in  dyspepsia,  flatulencies,  and  other 
symptoms  attending  hysterical  and  hypochondriacal 
disorders.  An  essential  oil  and  distilled  water  are 
directed  to  be  prepared  from  them  by  the  London 
College. 

CA'RUNCLE.  ( Caruncula ; diminutive  of  caro, 
flesh.)  Ecphynia  caruncula  of  Good.  A little  fleshy 
excrescence;  as  the  caruncula}  myrtiformes,  carun- 
culae  lachrymales,  &. c. 

CARUNCULA.  See  Caruncle. 

Caruncula  lachrymalis.  A long  conoidal  gland, 
red  externally,  situated  in  the  internal  canthus  of 
each  eye,  before  the  union  of  the  eyelids.  It  appears 
to  be  formed  of  numerous  sebaceous  glands,  from 
which  many  small  hairs  grow.  The  hardened  smegma 
observable  in  this  part  of  the  eye  in  the  morning,  is 
separated  by  this  caruncle. 

Caruncula  mamillares.  The  extremities  of  the 
tubes  in  the  nipple. 

Caruncula  myrtiformes.  When  the  hymen  has 
been  lacerated  by  attrition,  there  remain  in  its  place 
two,  three,  or  four  caruncles,  which  have  received  the 
name  of  myrtiform. 

Caruncul.f  papillares.  The  protuberances  within 
the  pelvis  of  the  kidney,  formed  by  the  papillous  sub- 
stance of  the  kidney. 

Ca'ruon.  See  Carum. 

CA'RUS.  (Kapoj;  from  xapa,  the  head,  as  being 
the  part  affected.)  Caros ; Carosis.  1.  Insensibility 
and  sleepiness,  as  in  apoplexy,  attended  with  quiet 
respiration. 

2.  A lethargy,  or  a profound  sleep,  without  fever. 

3.  Dr.  Good  gives  this  name  to  a genus  in  liis  Noso- 
logy, embracing  those  diseases  characterized  by  mus- 
cular immobility ; mental  or  corporeal  torpitude,  or 
both.  It  has  six  species ; Cams  asphyxia ; ccstasis  ; 
catalepsia ; lethargus ; apoplexia ; paralysis. 

4.  The  caraway  seed. 

Ca'rva.  The  cassia  lignea. 

Cary'don.  See  Caryedon. 

Carye'don.  (From  Kapva,  a nut.)  Carydon.  A 
sort  of  fracture,  where  the  bone  is  broken  into  small 
pieces,  like  the  shell  of  a cracked  nut. 

Caryocosti'num.  An  electuary;  so  named  from 
two  of  its  ingredients,  the  clove  and  costtis. 

CARYOPHYLLA'TA.  (From  KapvotpvWov , the 
caryophyllus ; so  named,  because  it  smells  like  the 
caryophyllus,  or  clove  July  flower.)  See  Oeum  ur- 
banurn. 

Caryophylloi'des  cortex.  See  Laurus  culilawan. 

CARYOPIIY'LLUM.  (K apvotpvWov,  from Kapvov, 
a nut,  and  cftvAXov,  a leaf ; so  named  because  it  was 
supposed  t q be  the  leaf  of  the  Indian  nut.)  The  clove. 
See  Eugenia  caryophyllata. 

Caryophyllum  aromaticum.  See  Eugenia  caryo- 
phyllata. 

Caryophillum  rubrum.  The  clove  pink.  See 
JDianthus  caryophyllus. 

CARYOPHY'LLUS.  The  clove-tree.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linncean  system.  Class, 
Polyandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  See  Eugenia  caro- 

■lhyllata. 

N 2 


Caryophyllus  aromatjcus  americancs.  See 
Myrtus  pimenta. 

Caryophyllus  hortensis.  See  Dianthus  caryo- 
phyllus. 

Caryophyllus  vulgaris.  See  Geum  urbanum. 

Caryo'tis.  (From  Kapvov,  a nut.)  Caryota.  Galon 
gives  this  name  to  a superior  sort  or  date,  of  the  shape 
of  a nut. 

CASCARI'LLA.  (Diminutive  of  cascara,  the 
bark,  or  shell.  Spanish.)  A name  given  originally 
to  small  specimens  of  cinchona  ; but  now  applied  to 
another  bark.  See  Croton  cascarilla. 

Cas'chu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

Cashew-nut.  See  Anacardium  occidentals. 

Cashow.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

CASEIC  ACID.  Acidum  caseicum.  The  name 
given  by  Proust  to  an  acid  formed  in  cheeses,  to  which 
he  ascribes  their  flavour. 

Ca'sia.  See  Cassia. 

Casmina'ris.  See  Cassumuniar. 

Ca'ssa.  (Arabian.)  The  breast. 

CASSA'DA.  See  Jatropha  manihot. 

Ca'ssamum.  The  fruit  of  the  balsam  ofGilead-tree, 
or  Amyrus  opobalsamum. 

Ca'ssava.  See  Jatropha  manihot. 

CASSEBOHM,  Frederic,  a professor  of  anatomy 
at  Halle  in  Saxony,  published,  in  1730,  a treatise  on  the 
difference  between  the  Foetus  and  Adult,  in  which  he 
notices  the  descent  of  the  testicle  from  the  abdomen ; 
and,  four  years  after,  a very  minute  and  exact  descrip- 
tion of  the  ear.  He  likewise  explained,  in  subsequent 
publications,  the  manner  of  dissecting  the  muscles  and 
the  viscera ; but  an  early  death  prevented  his  com- 
pleting his  design  of  elucidating  the  anatomy  of  the 
whole  body  in  the  same  way. 

CASSERIUS,  Julius,  was  born  of  humble  parents 
at  Placentia,  in  1545.  He  became  servant  to  Fabri- 
cius  at  Padua,  who,  observing  his  talent,  first  taught 
him  anatomy,  then  made  him  his  assistant,  and  finally 
coadjutor  in  the  professorship  in  1609.  He  pursued 
the  study  with  uncommon  zeal,  expending  almost  all 
his  profits  in  procuring  subjects,  and  in  having  draw- 
ings and  prints  made  of  the  parts,  which  he  discovered, 
or  traced  more  accurately  than  his  predecessors.  He 
employed  comparative  anatomy,  not  as  a substitute 
for,  but  only  as  a clue  to  that  of  the  human  subject. 
He  published  an  account  of  the  organs  of  voice  and 
hearing,  which  he  afterward  extended  to  the  other 
senses,  explaining  also  the  uses  of  these  parts.  Some 
years  after  his  death,  in  1616,  the  rest  of  his  plates, 
amounting  to  78,  with  the  explanations,  were  pub- 
lished with  the  works  of  Spigelius. 

CA'SSIA.  (From  the  Arabic  katsia , which  is  from 
katsa,  to  tear  off ; so  called  from  the  act  of  stripping 
the  bark  from  the  tree.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linncean  system.  Class,  Decandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Cassia  bark.  See  Laurus  cassia. 

Cassia  caryophyllata.  The  clove  bark  tree. 
See  Myrtus  caryophyllata. 

Cassia  fistula.  Cassia  nigra;  Cassia  fistularis  ; 
Alexandrina;  Chaiarxambar ; Canna ; Cassia  solu- 
tiva;  Tlai  Xiem.  The  purging  cassia.  This  tree, 
Cassia — foliis  quinquejugis  ovatis  acuminatis  gla- 
bris , petiolis  cglandulatis  of  Linnaeus,  is  a native  of 
both  Indies.  The  pods  of  the  East  India  cassia  are 
of  a less  diameter,  smoother,  and  afford  a blacker, 
sweeter,  and  more  grateful  pulp,  than  those  which  are 
brought  from  the  West  Indies.  Those  pods  which  are 
the  heaviest,  and  in  which  the  seeds  do  not  rattle  on 
being  shaken,  are  commonly  the  best,  and  contain  the 
most  pulp,  which  is  the  part  medicinally  employed, 
and  to  be  obtained  in  the  manner  described  in  the 
pharmacopoeias.  The  best  pulp  is  of  a bright  shining 
black  colour,  and  of  a sweet  tAste,  with  a slight  degree 
of  acidity.  It  has  been  long  used  as  a laxative  medi- 
cine, and  being  gentle  in  its  operation,  and  seldom  dis- 
turbing the  bowels,  is  well  adapted  to  children,  and  to 
delicate  or  pregnant  women.  Adults,  however,  find 
it  of  little  effect,  unless  taken  in  a very  large  dose,  as 
an  ounce  or  more ; and,  therefore,  to  them  this  pulp  is 
rarely  given,  but  usually  conjoined  with  some  of  the 
brisker  purgatives.  The  officinal  preparation  of  this 
drug  is  the  confectio  cassiae  ; it  is  also  an  ingredient  in 
the  confectio  senna*. 

Cassia  fistularis.  Sec  Cassia  fistula. 

Cassia  latinorum.  See  Osyris. 


195 


CAS 


CAT 


Cassia  u$t; ea.  See  JLaurus  cassia. 

Cassia  monspeliensium.  See  Osyns. 

Cassia  kigha.  See  Cassia  fistula. 

Cassia  poetica.  Poet’s  rosemary  ; a plant  which 
grows  in  the  south  of  Europe,  aucl  is  said  to  be  astrin- 
gent. See  Osyris. 

Cassia , purging.  See  Cassia  fistula. 

Cassia  senna.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
which  affords  senna.  Senna  alexandrina;  Senna 
italica.  Senna,  or  Egyptian  cassia.  Cassia— foliis 
sejugis  subovatis,  petiolis  cglandulatis  of  Linnaeus. 
The  leaves  of  senna,  which  are  imported  here  from 
Alexandria,  for  medicinal  use,  have  rather  a disagree- 
able smell,  and  a subacrid,  bitterish,  nauseous  taste. 
They  are  in  common  use  as  a purgative.  The  formulas 
given  of  the  senna  by  the  colleges,  are  in  infusion,  a 
compound  powder,  a tincture,  and  an  electuary.  See 
Inf  u sum  sennec1  &.C. 

Cassia  solutiva.  See.  Cassia  fistula. 

Cassia  Marylandica.  See  American  senna. 

Cassias  aramentum.  The  pulp  of  cassia. 

Cassia;  flores.  What  are  called  cassia  flowers 
in  the  shops,  are  the  flowers  of  the  true  cinnamon- 
tree,  Laurus  cinnamomum  of  Linnaeus.  They  possess 
aromatic  and  adstringent  virtues,  and  may  be  success- 
fully employed  in  decoctions,  &c.  in  all  cases  where 
cinnamon  is  recommended.  See  Laurus  cinnamo- 
mum. • 

Cassia;  pulpa.  See  Cassia  fistula. 

Cassius's  Precipitate.  The  purple  powder,  which 
forms  on  a plate  of  tin  immersed  in  a solution  of  gold. 
It  is  used  to  paint  in  enamel. 

Ca'ssob.  An  obsolete  term  for  kali. 

Cassoleta.  W arm  fumigations  described  by  Mar- 
cell us. 

Cassonada.  Sugar. 

CASSUMMU'NIAR.  (Of  uncertain  derivation  ; 
perhaps  Indian.)  Casamunar ; Casmina;  Risagon; 
Bengalc  Indorum.  The  root,  occasionally  exhibited 
under  one  of  these  names,  is  brought  from  the  East  ! 
Indies.  It  comes  over  in  irregular  slices  of  various 
forms,  some  cut  transversely,  others  longitudinally. 
The  cortical  part  is  marked  with  circles  of  a dusky 
brown  colour:  the  internal  part  is  paler,  and  une- 
qually yelloAv.  It  possesses  moderately  warm,  bitter, 
and  aromatic  qualities,  and  a smell  like  ginger.  It  is 
recommended  in  hysterical,  epilectic,  and  paralytic 
affections. 

CASTA'NEA.  (Kas-avov  ; from  Castana , a city  in 
Thessaly,  whence  they  were  brought.)  See  Fagus 
cast  an  c a. 

Castanea  equina.  The  horse-chesnut.  S eeJEscu- 
lus  hippo  cast  anum. 

CASTELLANUS,  Peter,  or  Du  Chatel,  was 
born  at  Grammont,  in  Flanders,  in  1583.  His  rapid 
improvement  in  the  Greek  language  procured  him  the 
professorship,  at  Lovain,  in  1609;  but  he  did  not  gra- 
duate in  medicine  till  nine  years  after.  At  the  same 
period,  he  published  the  lives  of  eminent  physicians 
in  Latin,  written  in  a concise  but  very  entertaining 
manner,  with  useful  references  to  the  original  authori- 
ties. He  died  in  1632. 

CASTELLUS,  Bartholomew,  an  Italian  physi- 
cian, who  practised  at  Messina  about  the  end  of  the 
16th  century.  He  was  author  of  two  works,  both  for 
a long  time  extremely  popular,  a Synopsis  of  Medi- 
cine, and  “ Lexicon  Medicum  Graeco-Lalinum,”  in 
which  great  learning  and  judgment  are  conspicuous. 

Castjoe.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

CASTLE-LEOD.  The  name  of  a place  in  Ross- 
shive,  in  Scotland,  where  there  is  a sulphureous  spring, 
celebrated  for  the  cure  of  cutaneous  diseases  and  foul 
ulcers. 

CASTOR.  ( Castor : from  Kagwp,  the  beaver, 
quasi  yaj-wp;  from  ya^r/p,  the  belly:  because  of  the 
largeness  of  its  belly ; or  « castravdo , because  he  was 
said  to  castrate  himself  in  order  to  escape  the  hunters.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  animals. 

2.  The  English  name  of  the  Castoreum  of  the  phar- 
macopoeias, a peculiar  concrete  substance  obtained 
from  the  Castor  fiber  of  Linnteus.  See  Castor  fiber. 

Castor  fiber.  The  systematic  name  of  the  bea- 
ver, an  amphibious  quadruped  inhabiting  some  parts 
of  Prussia,  Russia,  Germany,  Sec. ; but  the  greatest 
number  of  these  animals  is  met  with  in  Canada.  The 
name  of  castoreum^  or  castor,  is  given  to  two  bags, 
situated  in  the  inguinal  regions  of  the  beaver,  which 


contain  a very  odorous  substance,  soft,  and  almost 
fluid  when  recently  cut  from  the  animal,  but  which 
dries,  and  assumes  a resinous  consistence  in  process 
of  time.  The  best  comes  from  Russia.  It  is  of  a gray  - 
ish yellow,  or  light  brown  colour.  Itconsists  of  a muci- 
lage, a bitter  extract,  a resin,  an  essential  oil,  in  which 
the  peculiar  smell  appears  to  reside,  and  a flaky  crys- 
talline matter,  much  resembling  the  adipocire  of  bi  i- 
ary  calculi.  Castor  has  an  acrid,  bitter,  and  nauseous 
taste  ; its  smell  is  strong  and  aromatic,  yet  at  the  same 
time  foetid.  It  is  used  medicinally,  as  a powerful  an- 
tispasmodic  in  hysterica  and  hypochondriacal  affec- 
tions, and  in  convulsions,  in  doses  of  from  10  to  30 
grains.  It  has  also  been  successfully  administered 
in  epilepsy  and  tetanus.  It  is  occasionally  adulterated 
with  dried  blood,  gum-ammoniacum,  or  galhanum, 
mixed  with  a little  of  the  powder  of  castor,  and  some 
quantity  of  the  fat  of  the  beaver. 

Castor  oil.  See  Ricinus. 

Castor , Russian.  See  Castor  fiber. 

CASTOREUM.  See  Castor  fiber. 

Castori'um.  See  Castoreum. 

CASTRATION.  ( Castratio , onis.  f. ; from  castro , 
to  emasculate,  quia  castrando  vis  libidinis  extingui - 
tur.)  I.  A chirurgical  operation,  by  which  a testicle 
is  removed  from  the  body. 

2.  Botanists  apply  this  term  to  the  removal  of  the 
anthera  of  a flower,  and  to  a plant  naturally  wanting 
this  organ. 

CASTRE'NSIS.  (From  castra,  a camp.)  Belong*- 
ing  to  a camp:  applied  to  those  diseases  with  which 
soldiers,  encamped  in  marshy  places,. are  afflicted. 

CATA 'BASIS.  (From  Kana6aivu,  to  descend.) 
An  operation  downwards. 

CATABI  BAS1S.  (From  xara&Sagw,  to  cause  to 
descend.)  An  expulsion  of  the  humours  downwards. 

CATABLACEU'SIS.  (From  KaraShaKcv w,  to  be 
useless.)  Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  signify  care- 
lessness and  negligence  in  the  attendance  on  and  ad- 
! ministration  to  the  sick. 

Catable'ma.  (From  KaraSaWu),  to  throw  round.) 
The  outermost  fillet,  which  secures  the  rest  of  the 
bandages. 

CATABRONCHE'SIS.  (From  Ka^a,  and  /3poy%of, 
the  throat ; or  na'JaBpoyx^, 10  swallow.)  The  act 
of  swallowing. 

CATACAU'MA.  (From  Ka'JaKaiu,  to  burn.)  A 
burn  or  scald. 

CATACAU'SIS.  (From  xa7axaiw,  to  bum.)  1.  The 
act  of  combustion,  or  burning. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Dr.  Good’o 
Nosology  : general  combustibility  of  the  body.  It  has 
only  one  species,  Catacavsis  ebriosa. 

CATACECLI  MENUS.  (From  KalafiXivopai,  to 
iie  down.)  Keeping  the  bed,  from  the  violence  of  a 
disease. 

CATACECRA'MENUS.  (From  Ka'IaKcpavvo/u, 
to  reduce  to  small  particles.)  Broken  into  small 
pieces : applied  to  fractures. 

Catacera'stica.  (From  xaraxrpavvu/u,  to  mix 
together.)  Medicines  which  obtund  the  acrimony  of 
humours,  by  mixing  with  them  and  reducing  them. 

CATAGLIDE'SIS.  (From  Ka'Jax^iSau),  to  indulge 
in  delicacies.)  A gluttonous  indulgence  in  sloth  and 
delicacies,  to  the  generation  of  diseases. 

CATACHRISMA.  Anointment. 

CATACHRI'STON.  (From  KaJaxP^j to  anoint.) 
An  ointment. 

CATA'CLASIS.  (From  Ka'JaK\au>)  to  break,  or  dis- 
tort.) Distorted  eyelids. 

CA'TACLEIS.  (From  Ka'Ja,  beneath,  and  kXcis, 
the  clavicle.)  Catacleis.  The  subclavlcle,  or  first  rib, 
which  is  placed  immediately  under  the  clavicle. 

CATACLI'NES.  (From  KaJaicXivio,  to  lie  down.) 
One  who,  by  disease,  is  fixed  to  his  bed. 

CATA'CLISIS.  (From  xa7axX(vw,  to  lie  down.)  A 
lying  down.  Also  incurvation. 

CATACLY'SMA.  (From  Ka'JaxXvQfi),  to  wash.)  A 
clyster. 

CATACLY'SMUS.  (From  Ka'JaKXv^o),  to  wash.) 
1.  An  embrocation. 

2.  A dashing  of  water  upon  any  part. 

Catac  rb'mnos.  (From  Ka'Ja,  and  Kpppvos,  a preci- 
pice.) Hippocrates  means,  by  this  word,  a swoln  and 
inflamed  throat,  from  the  exuberance  of  the  parts. 

GATACRU'SIS.  (From  KaJaKpovo),  to  drive  back..) 
A revulsion  of  humours. 


CAT 


Catadotjle'sis.  (From  Ka'JaSov^oo),  to  enslave.) 
The  subduing  of  passions,  as  in  a phrensy,  or  fever. 

CATH2GIZESIS.  (From  Ka']aiyi^(o,  to  repel.)  A 
revdlsion  or  rushing  back  of  humours,  or  wind  in  the 
intestines. 

CAT^EONE'SIS,  (From  Ka'Jaiovtu,  to  irrigate.) 
Irrigation  by  a plentiful  affusion  of  liquor  on  some 
pan  of  the  body. 

CATA'GMA.  (From  Ka]a,  and  ayw,  to  break.)  A 
fracture.  Galen  says  a solution  of  the  bone  is  called 
catagma,  and  elcos  is  a solution  of  the  continuity  of 
the  flesh : that  when  it  happens  to  a cartilage,  it  lias 
no  name,  though  Hippocrates  calls  it  catagma. 

Catagma’tica.  (.From  Kalaypa,  a fracture.)  Ca- 
lagmatics.  Remedies  which  promote  the  formation  of 
callus. 

Catago'ge.  (From  Ka'JayopaL,  to  abide.)  The  seat 
or  region  of  a disease  or  part. 

Catagyio'sjs.  (From  Ka'Jayviom,  to  debilitate.) 
An  imbecility  and  enervation  of  the  strength  and 
limbs. 

CATALE'PSIS.  (From  KaJaXapSavu,  to  seize,  to 
hold.)  Cutoche;  Cato  elms ; Congelatio ; Detent  io ; 
Encatalepsis ; by  Hippocrates,  Aphonia;  by  Antigenes, 
Anaudia ; by  Caelius  Aurelianus,  Apprehension  Op- 
pressio ; Comprehensio ; Cams  catalepsia  of  Good; 
Apoplexia  cataleptica  of  Cullen.  Catalepsy.  A sudden 
suppression  of  motion  and  sensation,  the  body  remain- 
ing in  the  same  posture  that  it  was  in  when  seized. 

Dr.  Cullen  says,  he  has  never  seen  the  catalepsy  ex- 
cept when  counterfeited ; and  is  of  opinion,  that  many 
of  those  cases  related  by  other  authors,  have  also  been 
counterfeited.  It  is  said  to  come  on  suddenly,  being 
only  preceded  by  some  languor  of  body  and  mind,  and 
to  return  by  paroxysms.  The  patients  are  said  to  be 
for  some  minutes,  sometimes  (though  rarely)  for  some 
hours,  deprived  of  their  senses,  and  all  power  of 
voluntary  motion ; but  constantly  retaining  the  posi- 
tion in  which  they  were  first  seized,  whether  lying  or 
sitting;  and  if  the  limbs  be  put  into  any  other  posture 
during  the  lit,  they  will  keep  the  posture  in  which  they 
are  placed.  When  they  recover  from  the  paroxysm, 
they  remember  nothing  of  what  passed  during  the  time 
of  it,  but  are  like  persons  awakened  out  of  a sleep. 

Catalo'tica.  (From  KaJaXoaw,  to  grind  down.) 
Medicines  to  soften  and  make  smooth  the  rough  edges 
and  crust  of  cicatrices. 

CATA'LYSIS.  (KaraXuo-tf : from  KaraXvo),  to  dis- 
solve or  destroy.)  It  signifies  a palsy,  or  such  a reso- 
lution as  happens  before  the  death  of  the  patient ; also 
that  dissolution  which  constitutes  death. 

CATAMARA'SMUS.  (From  Kajapapaivo),  to  grow 
thin.)  1.  An  emaciation  of  the  body. 

2.  The  resolution  of  tumours. 

CATAMASSE'SIS.  (From  KaJapaaiTopai,  to  man- 
ducate.)  The  grinding  of  the  teeth,  and  biting  of  the 
tongue;  common  in  epilepsy. 

CATAME'NIA.  ( Catamenia , orurn , neut.  pleur. ; 
from  Kaja,  according  to,  and  pyv,  the  month.)  Menses. 
The  monthly  discharge  from  the  uterus  of  females,  be- 
tween the  ages  of  14  and  45.  Many  have  questioned 
whether  this  discharge  arose  from  a mere  rupture  of 
vessels,  or  whether  it  was  owing  to  a secretory  action 
There  can  be  little  doubt  of  the  truth  of  the  latter. 
The  secretory  organ  is  composed  of  the  arterial  ves- 
sels situated  in  the  fundus  of  the  uterus.  The  dissec- 
tion of  women,  who  have  died  during  the  time  of  their 
menstruating,  proves  this.  Sometimes,  though  very 
rarely,  women,  during  pregnancy,  menstruate  ; and 
when  this  happens,  the  discharge  takes  place  from  thc- 
arterial  vessels  of  the  vagina.  During  pregnancy  and 
lactation,  when  the  person  is  in  good  health,  the  cata- 
menia, for  the  most  part,  cease  to  flow.  The  quantity 
a female  menstruates  at  each  time  is  very  various  ; de- 
pending on  climate,  and  a variety  of  other  circum- 
stances. It  is  commonly  in  England  from  five  to  six 
ounces;  it  rarely  exceeds  eight.  Its  duration  is  from 
three  to  four,  and  sometimes,  though  rarely,  five  days 
With  respect  to  the  nature  of  the  discharge,  it  differs 
very  much  from  pure  blood  ; it  never  coagulates ; but 
is  sometimes  grumous,  and  membranes  like  the  decidua 
are  formed  in  difficult  menstruations:  in  some  women 
it  always  smells  rank  and  peculiar;  in  others  it  is  ino- 
dorous. The  use  of  this  monthly  secretion  is  said  to 
be  to  render  the  uterus  fit  for  the  conception  and  nutri- 
tion of  the  foetus ; therefore  girls  rarely  conceive  before 
the  catamenia  appear,  and  women  rarely  after  their 


CAT 

entire  cessation ; but  very  easily  soon  after  menstrua- 
tion. 

Catana'nce.  Succory. 

Cataniphthxs.  (From  Ka'Javm'Ju),  to  wash. 
Washed,  or  scoured.  Used  by  Hippocrates  of  a diar- 
rhoea washed  and  cleansed  by  boiled  milk. 

Catantle'ma.  (From  Ka7fflv7Aaw,  to  pour  upon.)  A 
lotion  by  infusion  of  water,  or  medicated  fluids. 

Catantle'sis.  A medicated  fluid. 

CATAPA'SMA.  (Eroin  /carairacro-w,  to  sprinkle., 
Catapastum ; Conspersio ; Epipaston ; Pasma;  Sym- 
pasma;  Aspersio ; Aspergo.  The  ancient  Greek  phy- 
sicians meant  by  this,  any  dry  medicine  reduced  to 
powder,  to  be  sprinkled  on  the  body.  Their  various 
forms  and  uses  may  be  seen  in  Paul  of  Egina,  lib.  vii. 
cap.  xiii. 

CATAPAU'SIS.  (From  Kajaizavw,  to  rest,  or  cease.) 
That  rest  or  cessation  from  pain  which  proceeds  from 
the  resolution  of  uneasy  tumours. 

CATAPE'LTES.  (From  Ka'Ja,  against,  and  aeXry, 
a shield.)  1.  This  word  means  a sling,  a gianado,  dr 
battery. 

2.  It  was  formerly  used  to  signify  the  medicine 
which  heals  the  wounds  and  bruises  made  by  such  an 
instrument. 

CATA'PHORA.  (From  Karacpepu),  to  make  sleepy.) 
A preternatural  propensity  to  sleep  ; a mild  apoplexy ; 
a species  of  Dr.  Good’s  Carus  Lethargus ; remissive 
lethargy. 

Cataphra'cta.  (Erom  xa7a0pa<r(rw,  to  fortify.)  A 
bandage  on' the  thorax. 

CATAPL  A'SMA.  ( Cataplasma , m.atis.  neut. ; from 
Ka'JaTrXaaau),  to  spread  like  a plaster.)  A poultice. 
The  following  are  among  the  most  useful: — 

Cataplasma  acetos.®.  Sorrel  poultice.  The  leaves 
are  to  be  beaten  in  a mortar  into  a pulp.  A good  appli- 
cation to  scorbutic  ulcers. 

Cataplasma  aeratum.  See  Cataplasma  fermenti. 

Cataplasma  aluminis.  This  application  was 
formerly  used  to  inflammation  of  the  eyes,  which  was 
kept  up  from  weakness  of  the  vessels ; it  is  now  seldom 
used,  a solution  of  alum  being  mostly  substituted. 

Cataplasma  conii.  Hemlock  poultice.  Rs.Conii 
foliorum  exsiccatorum  3j.  Aquae  fontanae,  Ibij.  To 
be  boiled  till  only  a pint  remains,  when  as  much  lin- 
seed-meal as  necessary  is  to  be  added.  This  is  an  ex- 
cellent application  to  many  cancerous  and  scrofulous 
ulcers,  and  other  malignant  ones ; frequently  producing 
great  diminution  of  the  pain  of  such  diseases,  and  im- 
proving their  appearance.  Justamond  preferred  the 
fresh  herb  bruised. 

Cataplasma  cumini.  Take  of  cumin  seeds,  one 
pound ; bay-berries,  the  leaves  of  water  germander 
dried,  Virginia  snake-root,  of  each  three  ounces;  cloves, 
one  ounce  ; with  honey  equal  to  thrice  the  weight  of  the 
powder  formed : of  these  make  a cataplasm.  It  was  for- 
merly called  Theriaca  Londinensis.  This  is  a warm  and 
stimulating  poultice,  and  was  formerly  much  used  as 
an  irritating  antiseptic  application  to  gangrenous 
ulcers,  and  the  like.  It  is  now  seldom  ordered. 

Cataplasma  dattci.  Carrot  poultice.  R.  Radicis 
dauei  rccentis,  Ibj.  Bruise  it  in  a mortar  into  a pulp. 
Some,  perhaps,  with  reason,  recommend  the  carrots  to 
be  first  boiled.  The  carrot  poultice  is  employed  as 
an  application  to  ulcerated  cancers,  scrofulous  sores 
of  an  irritable  kind,  and  various  inveterate  malignant 
ulcers. 

Cataplasma  fermenti.  Yest  cataplasm.  Take 
of  flour  a pound  ; yest  half  a pint.  Mix  and  expose 
to  a gentle  heat,  until  the  mixture  begins  to  rise.  This 
is  a celebrated  application  in  cases  of  sloughing  and 
mortification. 

Cataplasma  fuci.  This  is  prepared  by  bruising  a 
quantity  of  the  marine  plant,  commonly  called  sea- 
tang,  which  is  afterward  to  be  applied  by  way  of  a 
poultice.  Its  chief  use  is  in  cases  of  scrofula,  white 
swellings,  and  glandular  tumours  more  especially. 
When  this  vegetable  cannot  be  obtained  in  its  recent 
state,  a common  poultice  of  sea-water  and  oatmeal 
has  been  subtituted  by  the  late  Mr.  Hunter,  and  other 
surgeons  of  eminence. 

Cataplasma  lini.  Linseed  poultice.  R.  Farina 
lini,  Ibss.  Aqua;  ferventis,  Ibjss.  The  powder  is  to  be 
gradually  sprinkled  into  the  water,  while  they  are 
quickly  blended  together  w ith  a spoon.  This  is  the 
best  and  most  convenient  of  all  emollient  poultices  for 
common  cases,  and  has,  in  a great  measure,  super- 


CAT 


OAT 

Reded  the  bread  and  milk  one,  so  much  in  use  for- 
merly. 

Cataplasma  plumbi  acetatis.  R.  Liquoris  plumbi 
acetatis,  3j.  Aquie  distill.  Ibj.  Micae  panis,  q.  s. 
Misce.  Practitioners,  who  place  much  confidence  in 
the  virtues  of  lead,  often  use  this  poultice  in  cases  of 
inflammation. 

Cataplasma  sinapkos.  See  Cataplasma  sinapis. 

Cataplasma  sinapis.  Mustard  cataplasm.  Take 
of  mustard-seed,  linseed,  of  each  pow'dered  half  a 
pound;  boiling  vinegar,  as  much  as  is  sufficient. 
Mix  until  it  acquires  the  consistence  of  a cataplasm. 

CATAPLE'XIS.  (From  Kara,  and  zsyycau),  to 
strike.)  Any  sudden  stupefaction,  or  deprivation  of 
sensation,  in  any  of  the  members,  or  organs. 

Catafo'sis.  (From  Karainvu j,  to  swallow  down.) 
According  to  Aretteus,  it  signifies  the  instruments  of 
deglutition. 

Catapo'tium.  (KarancTiov;  from  Karamvco,  to 
swallow  down.)  A pill. 

CATAPSY'XIS.  (From  to  refrigerate.)  A 

coldness,  or  chillness,  without  shivering,  either  univer- 
sal, or  of  some  particular  part. 

CATAPTO'SIS.  (From  KarairnrTU),  to  fall  down.) 
A falling  down.  1.  Such  as  happens  in  apoplexy. 

2.  The  falling  down  of  a limb  from  palsy. 

CATAPU'TIA.  (From  Ka^anvOa),  to  have  an  ill 
savour ; or  from  the  Italian,  cacapuzza , which  has  the 
same  meaning;  so  named  from  its  foetid  smell.) 
Spurge. 

Cataputia  major.  See  Ricinus. 

Catapijtia  minor.  See  Euphorbia  Lathyris. 

CA'TARACTA.  (From  xarapaao u>,  to  confound  or 
disturb : because  the  sense  of  vision  is  confounded,  if 
not  destroyed.)  A cataract ; a disease  of  the  eye. 
Paropsis  cataracta  of  Good.  The  Caligo  lentis  of 
Cullen.  Hippocrates  calls  it  y\avicwpa.  Galen,  vro- 
%v pa.  The  Arabians,  gutta  opaca.  Celsus,  suffusio. 
It  is  a species  of  blindness,  arising  almost  always  from 
an  opacity  of  the  crystalline  lens,  or  its  capsule,  pre- 
venting the  rays  of  light  passing  to  the  optic  nerve. 
It  commonly  begins  with  a dimness  of  sight ; and  this 
generally  continues  a considerable  time  before  any 
opacity  can  be  observed  in  the  lens.  As  the  disease 
advances,  the  opacity  becomes  sensible,  and  the  patient 
imagines  there  are  particles  of  dust,  or  motes,  upon  the 
eye,  or  in  the  air,  which  are  called  muscce  volitantes. 
This  opacity  gradually  increases  till  the  person  either 
becomes  entirely  blind,  or  can  merely  distinguish  light 
from  darkness.  The  disease  commonly  comes  on 
rapidly,  though  sometimes  its  progress  is  slow  and 
gradual.  From  a transparent  state,  it  changes  to  a 
perfectly  white,  or  light  gray  colour.  In  some  very 
rare  instances,  a black  cataract  is  found.  The  con- 
sistence also  varies,  being  at  one  time  hard,  at  another 
entirely  dissolved.  When  the  opaque  lens  is  either 
more  indurated  than  in  the  natural  state,  or  retains  a 
tolerable  degree  of  firmness,  the  case  is  termed  a firm 
or  hard  cataract.  When  the  substance  of  the  lens 
seems  to  be  converted  into  a whitish  or  other  kind  of 
fluid,  lodged  in  the  capsule,  the  case  is  denominated  a 
milky  or  fluid  cataract.  When  the  substance  is  of  a 
middling  consistence,  neither  hard  nor  fluid,  but  about 
as  consistent  as  a thick  jelly,  or  curds,  the  case  is 
named  a soft  or  caseous  cataract.  When  the  anterior 
or  posterior  layer  of  the  crystalline  capsule  becomes 
opaque,  after  the  lens  itself  has  been  removed  from  this 
little  membraneous  sac,  by  a previous  operation,  the 
affection  is  named  a secondary  membraneous  cataract. 
There  are  many  other  distinctions  made  by  authors. 
Cataract  is  seldom  attended  with  pain;  sometimes, 
however,  every  exposure  to  light  creates  uneasiness, 
owing  probably  to  the  inflammation  at  the  bottom  of 
the  eye.  The  real  cause  of  cataract  is  not  yet  well 
understood.  Numbers  of  authors  consider  it  as  pro- 
ceeding from  a preternatural  contraction  of  the  vessels 
of  the  lens,  arising  from  some  external  violence, 
though  more  commonly  from  some  internal  and  occult 
cause.  The  cataracta  is  distinguished  from  gutta 
serena,  by  the  pupils  in  the  latter  being  never  affected 
with  light,  and  from  no  opacity  being  observed  in  the 
lens.  It  is  distinguished  from  hypopyon,  staphyloma, 
or  any  other  disease  in  the  forepart  of  the  eye,  by  the 
evident  marks  which  these  affections  produce,  as  well 
as  by  the  pain  attending  their  beginning.  But  it  is 
difficult  to  determine  when  the  opacity  is  in  the  lens, 
or  in  its  capsule.  If  the  retina  (which  is  an  expansion 
198 


of  the  optic  nerve  in  the  inside  of  the  eye)  be  not  dte 
eased,  vision  may,  in  most  cases,  be  restored,  by  either 
depressing  the  diseased  lens,  which  is  termed  couch- 
ing, or  extracting  it. 

CAT ARRHEU'MA.  (From  Ka7app£w,  to  flow 
from.)  A defluxion  of  humours  from  the  air-pas- 
sages. 

CATARRHE'XIS.  (From  Ka'Jappyyvvu),  to  burst 
out.)  A violent  and  copious  eruption  or  effusion  ; 
joined  with  Kot\ias,  it  is  a copious  evacuation  from 
the  belly,  and  sometimes  alone  it  is  of  the  same  signi- 
fication. Vogel  applies  it  to  a discharge  of  pure  blood 
from  the  intestines,  such  as  takes  place  in  dysentery. 

CATARRHCECUS.  (From  xa7app£io,  to  flow  from.) 
A disease  proceeding  from  a discharge  of  phlegm. 

CATA'RRHOPA.  (From  Ka'Jappso),  to  flow  down.) 
Tubercles  tending  downward ; or,  as  Galen  states, 
those  that  have  their  apex  on  a depending  part  have 
received  this  appellation. 

CATA'RRHOPOS.  (Karappoiros  vovcroj.)  A remis- 
sion of  the  disease,  or  its  decline,  opposed  to  the 
paroxysm. 

CATA  RRHUS.  (From  K.a'lapptw,  to  flow  down.) 
Coryza.  A catarrh.  An  increased  secretion  of  mu- 
cus from  the  membranes  of  the  nose,  fauces,  and 
bronchia,  with  fever,  and  attended  with  sneezing, 
cough,  thirst,  lassitude,  and  want  of  appetite.  It  is  a 
genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Pyrexia,  and  order  Pro- 
fluvia  of  Cullen.  There  are  two  species  of  catarrh 
viz.  catarrhus  a frigore,  which  is  very  eommon,  and 
is  called  a cold  in  the  head ; and  catarrhus  a contagio , 
the  influenza,  or  epidemic  catarrh,  which  sometimes 
seizes  a whole  city.  Catarrh  is  also  symptomatic  of 
several  other  diseases.  Hence  we  have  the  catarrhun 
rubeolosus ; tussis  variolosa , verminosa,  calculosa , 
phthisica , hysterica, a.  dentitione , gravidarum , metalli- 
colarum , & c. 

Catarrh  is  seldom  fatal,  except  in  scrofulous  habits, 
by  laying  the  foundation  of  phthisis ; or  where  it  is 
aggravated  by  improper  treatment,  or  repeated  expo- 
sure to  cold,  into  some  degree  of  peripneumony ; when 
there  is  hazard  of  the  patient,  particularly  if  advanced 
in  life,  being  suffocated  by  the  copious  effusion  of  vis- 
cid matter  into  the  air-passages.  The  epidemic  is 
generally,  but  not  invariably,  more  severe  than  the 
common  form  of  the  disease.  The  latter  is  usually 
left  to  subside  spontaneously,  which  will  commonly 
happen  in  a few  days,  by  observing  the  antiphlogistic 
regimen.  If  there  should  be  fixed  pain  of  the  chest, 
with  any  hardness  of  the  pulse,  a little  blood  may  be 
taken  from  the  arm,  or  topically,  followed  by  a blister : 
the  bowels  must  be  kept  regular,  and  diaphoretics  ex- 
hibited, with  demulcents  and  mild  opiates  to  quiet 
the  cough.  When  the  disease  hangs  about  the  patient 
in  a chronic  form,  gentle  tonics  and  expectorants  are 
required,  as  myrrh,  squill,  & c.  In  the  epidemic  catarrh 
more  active  evacuations  are  often  required,  the  lungs 
being  more  seriously  affected ; but  though  these  should 
be  promptly  employed,  they  must  not  be  carried  too 
far,  the  disease  being  apt  to  assume  the  typhoid  cha- 
racter in  its  progress ; and  as  the  chief  danger  appears 
to  be  of  suffocation  happening  from  the  cause  above- 
mentioned,  it  is  especially  important  to  promote  ex- 
pectoration, first  by  antimonials,  afterward  by  squill, 
the  inhalation  of  steam,  &c.  not  neglecting  to  support 
the  strength  of  the  patient  as  the  disease  advances. 

Catarrhus  a frigore.  The  common  defluxion 
from  the  head  from  cold. 

Catarrhus  a contagio.  The  influenza. 

Catarrhus  bellinsulanus.  Mumps.  See  Cy- 
nanche  parotidcea. 

Catarrhus  suffocativus.  The  croup.  See  Cy- 

nanche  Irdchealis. 

Catarrhus  vesicjE.  A discharge  of  mucus  from 
the  bladder. 

Catarrti'smus.  (From  Ka'Jap'Ji^o),  to  make  per- 
fect. According  to  Galen,  it  is  a translation  of  a bone 
from  a preternatural  to  its  natural  situation. 

CATASA'RCA.  (From  Ka]a  and  aapl,  flesh.)  See 

Anasarca. 

CATASBE'STIS.  (From  Ka'Ja  and  cScwvpi,  to 
extinguish.)  The  resolution  of  tumours  without  sup- 
puration. 

CATASCHA'SMUS.  (From  Kalaox^co,  to  sca- 
rify.) Scarification. 

CATASEI'SIS..  (From  naf/a,  and  acu a,  to  shake.) 

A concussion. 


CAT 


CAT 


CATASPA'SMA.  (From  Kalawao),  to  draw  back- 
wards.) A revulsion  or  retraction  of  humours,  orparts. 

CATASTA'GMOS.  (From  Kaja,  and  j-agw,  to  dis- 
til.) The  name  which  the  Greeks,  in  the  time  of 
Celsus,  had  for  distillation. 

CATASTA'LTICUS.  (From  KaraareXXoi,  to  re- 
strain, or  contract.)  Styptic,  astringent,  repressing. 

CATA'STASIS.  Karaaraais • The  constitution, 
state,  or  condition  of  any  thing. 

Cata'tasis.  (From  Kalarttvu),  to  extend.)  In 
Hippocrates  it  means  the  extension  of  a fractured 
limb,  or  a discolated  one,  in  order  to  replace  it.  Also 
the  actual  replacing  it  in  a proper  situation. 

CATA'XIS.  (From  Ka'Jayu),  to  break.)  A frac- 
ture. Also  a division  of  parts  by  an  instrument. 

Cate.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

CATECHO'MENUS.  (From  koTIexo),  to  resist.) 
Resisting  and  making  ineffectual  the  remedies  which 
have  been  applied  or  given. 

CA'TECHU.  (It  is  said,  that,  in  the  Japanese  lan- 
guage, kate  signifies  a tree,  and  cAm,  juice*)  See  Aca- 
sia  Catechu. 

CATEIA'DION.  (From  Kara,  and  aa,  a blade  of 
grass.)  An  instrument  mentioned  by  Aret®us,  having 
at  the  end  a blade  of  grass,  or  made  like  a blade  of 
grass,  which  was  thrust  into  the  nostrils  to  provoke  a 
hsemorrhage  when  the  head  ached. 

CATE'LLUS.  (Dim.  of  catulus,  a wfoelp.)  1.  A 
voung  whelp. 

2.  Also  a chemical  instrument  called  a cupel,  which 
was  formerly  in  the  shape  of  a dog’s  head. 

CATHrE'RESIS.  (From  Kadaipw,  to  take  away.) 
1.  The  subtraction  or  taking  away  any  part  or  thing 
from  the  body.  < 

2.  Sometimes  it  means  an  evacuation,  and  Hippo- 
crates uses  it  for  such. 

3.  A consumption  of  the  body,  as  happens  without 
manifest  evacuation. 

Cath^re'tica.  (From  Kadaipu),  to  take  away.) 
Medicines  which  consume  or  remove  superfluous  flesh. 

CATHA'RMA.  (From  Kadaipu),  to  remove.)  The 
excrements,  or  humours,  purged  off  from  the  body. 

Catha'rmus.  (From  Kadaipu j,  to  remove.)  1.  A 
purgation  of  the  excrements,  or  humours. 

2 A cure  by  incantation,  or  the  royal  touch. 

Catha'rsia'.  (From  Kadaipu),  to  purge.)  Medi- 
cines which  have  a purging  property. 

CATHA'RSIS.  (From  Kadaipu),  to  take  away.) 
Purgation  of  the  excrements,  or  humours,  either  me- 
dically or  naturally. 

CATHA'RTIC.  (Catharticus;  from  Kadaipio,  to 
purge.)  That  which,  taken  internally,  increases  the 
number  of  alvine  evacuations.  These  medicines  have 
received  many  appellations  : purgantia ; catocathar- 
tica ; catoretica ; catoteretica ; dejectoria  ; alviduca. 
The  different  articles  referred  to  this  class  are  divided 
into  five  orders. 

1.  Stimulating  cathartics , as  jalap,  aloes,  bitter  ap- 
ple, and  croton  oil,  which  are  well  calculated  to  dis- 
charge accumulations  of  serum,  and  are  mostly  select- 
ed for  indolent  and  phlegmatic  habits,  and  those  who 
are  hard  to  purge. 

2.  Refrigerating  cathartics , as  sulphate  of  soda, 
supertartrate  of  potassa,  &c.  These  are  better  adapt- 
ed for  plethoric  habits,  and  those  with  an  inflamma- 
tory diathesis. 

3.  Adstringent  cathartics , as  rhubarb  and  damask 
roses,  which  are  mostly  given  to  those  whose  bowels 
are  weak  and  irritable,  and  subject  to  diarrhoea. 

4.  Emollient  cathartics , as  manna,  malva,  castor  oil, 
and  olive  oil,  which  may  be  given  in  preference  to 
other  cathartics,  to  infants  and  the  very  aged. 

5.  J\Tarcotic  cathartics , as  tobacco,  hyoscyamus,  and 
digitalis.  This  order  is  never  given  but  to  the  very 
strong  and  indolent,  and  to  maniacal  patients,  as  their 
operation  is  very  powerful. 

Murray,  in  his  Materia  Medica,  considers  the  differ- 
ent cathartics  under  the  two  divisions  of  laxatives  and 
purgatives ; the  former  being  mild  in  their  operation, 
and  merely  evacuating  the  contents  of  the  intestines ; 
the  latter  being  more  powerful,  and  even  extending 
their  stimulant  operation  to  the  neighbouring  parts. 
The  following  he  enumerates  among  the  principal 
laxatives : — manna,  Cassia  fistula,  Tamarindus  indica, 
Ricinus  communis.  Sulphur,  Magnesia.  Under  the 
head  of  purgatives,  he  names  Cassia  senna,  Rheum 
pahnatum,  Convolvulus  jalapa,  Helleborus  niger,  Bryo- 


nia alba,  Cucumis  colocynthis,  Momordica  elaterium, 
Rhamnus  catharticus,  Aloe  perfoliata,  Convolvulus 
scammonia,  Gambjgia,  Submurias  hydrargyri,  Sul 
phas  magnesia,  Sulphas  sod®,  Sulphas  potass®,  Su- 
pertartras  potass®,  Tartras  potass®,  Tartras  potass® 
et  sod®,  Phosphas  sod®,  Murias  sod®,  Terebinthina 
veneta,  Nicotiana  tabacum. 

Cathartic  Glaubers  salt.  See  Soda  sulphas. 

Cathartic  Salt.  See  Sulphas  magnesia , and  Sul- 
phas soda. 

CATHARTINE.  A substance  of  a reddish  colour, 
a peculiar  smell,  and  a bitter  nauseous  taste,  soluble 
in  water  and  alkohol,  but  insoluble  in  ®ther  ; obtained 
by  Lassaigne  and  Fenuelte  from  the  leaves  of  senna. 

CATIIE'DRA.  (From  Kadegopai,  to  sit.)  The 
anus,  or  rather,  the  whole  of  the  buttock^,  as  being  the 
part  on  which  we  sit. 

Cathere'tica.  (From  Kadaipu),  to  remove.)  Cor- 
rosives. Applications  which,  by  corrosion,  remove 
superfluous  flesh. 

CA'THETER.  (Catheter,  teris.  m.  K adsrrjp;  from 
Kadirjpi,  to  thrust  into.)  A long  and  hollow  tube,  that 
is  introduced  by  surgeons  into  the  urinary  bladder,  to 
remove  the  urine,  when  the  person  is  unable  to  pass 
it.  Catheters  are  either  made  of  silver  or  of  the  elas- 
tic gum.  That  for  the  male  urethra  is  much  longer 
than  that  for  the  female,  and  so  curved,  if  made  of 
silver,  as  to  adapt  itself  to  the  urethra. 

CATHETERISMUS.  (From  Kaderrjp,  a catheter.) 
The  operation  of  introducing  the  catheter. 

CATHI'DRYSIS.  (From  KadiSpvio,  to  place  to- 
gether.) The  reduction  of  a fracture,  or  operation  of 
setting  a broken  bone. 

Ca'thma.  A name  for  litharge. 

Ca'thodos.  (From  Kara,  and  o<5oj.)  A descent  of 
humours. 

Catho'lceus.  (From  Kara,  and  o\keu>,  to  draw 
over.)  An  oblong  fillet,  made  to  draw  over  and  cover 
the  whole  bandage  of  the  head. 

CATHO'LICON.  (From  Kara,  and  oXikos,  uni- 
versal.) A universal  medicine : formerly  applied  to  a 
medicine,  that  was  supposed  to  purge  all  the  humours. 

[“  CATHRAL,  Isaac,  M.  D.,  was  a native  of  Phila- 
delphia, and  studied  medicine  under  the  direction  of 
the  late  Dr.  John  Redman,  the  preceptor  of  Rush  and 
VVistar.  After  acquiring  all  the  instruction  in  his  pro- 
fession, which  the  opportunities  of  Philadelphia  offer- 
ed, aided  by  a diligent  attention  on  his  part,  he  visited 
Europe,  and  attended  the  practice  of  the  London  hos- 
pitals. and  the  lectures  of  the  most  distinguished  pro- 
fessors in  that  city.  During  the  prevalence  of  the 
widely  destroying  epidemic  fevers  of  1793,  ’97,  ’98, 
and  ’99,  he  remained  in  the  city,  instead  of  seeking 
safety  by  flying,  and  was  a severe  sufferer  by  the  dis- 
ease of  the  first  of  those  years.  Previously  to  his  ill- 
ness, and  after  his  recovery,  besides  attending  to  prac- 
tice, he  lost  no  opportunity  of  investigating  every  phe- 
nomenon connected  with  that  pestilential  epidemic, 
which  could  in  any  manner  tend  to  illustrate  its  patho- 
logy, or  the  peculiarities  it  exhibited.  In  the  year 
1794,  he  published  his  remarks  thereon,  and  the  mode 
of  treatment  he  pursued.  In  conjunction  with  Dr. 
Physick,  he  dissected  the  bodies  of  some  subjects  of 
the  fever  of  1793,  in  order  to  discover  the  morbid  effects 
produced  by  it  on  the  system,  and  in  particular  refer- 
ence to  the  nature  of  that  singqlar  and  generally  fatal 
symptom,  the  dark-coloured  ejection  from  the  stomach, 
in  some  cases  of  the  disease.  The  result  of  their  joint 
labours  was  published  by  them,  with  their  individual 
signatures,  and  he  afterward  continued  his  dissections 
alone,  with  unabating  zeal,  whenever  opportunity 
offered,  during  the  subsequent  epidemics  and  occa- 
sional appearance  of  the  disease,  which  more  or  less, 
occurred  for  several  years,  until  he  obtained  all  the" 
light  which  he  thought  dissection  and  experiment  could 
throw  upon  its  production  and  nature.  In  the  year 
1800,  he  read  to  the  American  Philosophical  Society, 
of  which  he  had  been  elected  a member,  an  interesting 
paper  on  that  subject.  This  paper  affords  ample  evi- 
dence of  the  patient  and  accurate  manner  in  which  he 
investigated  that  hitherto  inexplicable  and  supposed 
pestilential  appearance,  and  of  his  fearless  zeal  in  the 
prosecution  of  medical  science.  It  is  inserted  in  the 
5th  vol.  of  the  Transactions  of  the  Society,  and  was 
also  published  in  pamphlet  form,  of  32  pages.  A full 
account  of  it  may  be  found  in  the  4th  volume  of  the 
New-York  Medical  Repository.  He  died  on  the22d 


CATJ 


CAU 

February,  1819,  in  the  56th  year  of  his  age,  by  a stroke 
of  the  apoplexy. 

“ Dr.  Catlirull  was  educated  in  the  religious  princi- 
ples of  the  Society  of  Friends,  and  naturally  possessed 
a grave  turn  of  mind,  and  a serious  deportment.  Re- 
tired in  his  habits,  he  was  sby  in  making  acquaint- 
ances, but  lirm  in  his  friendships,  and  a well-bred  gen- 
tleman in  his  manners.  In  the  important  and  endear- 
ing relations  of  a son,  husband,  and  father,  he  was 
truly  estimable.  As  a member  of  society,  he  set  an 
example  of  rigid  morality  and  inflexible  integrity,  attri- 
butes which  every  medical  man  ought  to  be  proud  to 
have  annexed  to  his  character,  however  distinguished 
his  literary  acquirements  may  be.” — Thacker's  Med. 
Biog.  A.l 

CATHYTNrA.  (From  Kara,  and  virvos,  sleep.)  A 
profound  but  unhealthy  sleep. 

Ca'tias.  (From  Kadiym,  to  place  in.)  An  incision 
knife,  formerly  used  for  opening  an  abscess  in  the 
uterus,  and  for  extracting  a dead  foetus. 

Oati'llus.  See  Catellus. 

Ca'tinum  alumen.  A name  given  to  potassa. 

CA'TINUS.  K aravov-  A crucible. 

CAT-KIN.  See  Amentum, 

CA'TMINT.  (So  called,  because  cats  are  very  fond 
of  it.)  See  JVcpeta. 

CATOCATHA'RTICA.  (From  xarw,  downward, 
and  KaQaip u>,  to  purge.)  Medicines  that  operate  by 
stool. 

Cato'che.  (From  xar£%w,  to  detain.)  See  Cata- 

lepsis. 

CATOCHEI'LUM.  (From  Karin,  beneath,  and 
XaXoj,  the  lip.)  The  lower  lip. 

CA'TOCtlUS.  (From  Karcxm,  to  detain.)  A 
spasmodic  disease  in  which  the  body  is  rigidly  held  in 
an  upright  posture. 

Catomi'smus.  (From  Karin,  below,  and  wpos,  the 
shoulder.)  By  this  word,  P.  iEgineta  expresses  a me- 
thod of  reducing  a luxated  shoulder,  by  raising  the 
patient  over  the  shoulder  of  a strong  man,  that  by  the 
weight  of  the  body,  the  dislocation  may  be  reduced. 

CATO'PSIS.  (From  Karonropai , to  see  clearly.) 
An  acute  and  quick  perception.  The  acuteness  of  the 
faculties  which  accompanies  the  latter  stages  of  con- 
sumption. 

Catopiiyllum  inophyllum.  Calaba.  The  Indian 
mastich-tree.  A native  of  America,  where  the  whole 
plant  is  considered  as  a resolvent  and  anodyne. 

Cato'fter.  (From  Kara , and  onropai,  to  see;  by 
metaphor,  a probe.)  An  instrument  called  a specu- 
lum ani. 

Catorchi'tes.  (From  Kara,  and  opxts > the  orchis.) 
A wine  in  which  the  orchis  root  has  been  infused, 

Catore'tica/  (From  kutu>,  downwards,  and  pau, 
to  flow.)  Catoteretica ; Catoterica.  Medicines  which 
purge  by  stool. 

Catotere'tica.  See  Catoretica. 

CATOTICA.  (Catoticus ; from  Karin , below; 
whence  Kartnrepos,  and  Karmraros,  inferior , and  infer- 
nus.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  the  class  Eccritica , in 
Good’s  Nosology  ; diseases  affecting  internal  surfaces ; 
defined,  pravity  of  the  fluids,  or  emunctories  that  open 
into  the  internal  surfaces  of  organs.  It  embraces  hy- 
dropsis,  emphysema , paruria , and  lithia. 

Cats-eye.  A mineral,  much  valued  as  a precious 
stone,  brought  from  Ceylon. 

Catulo'tica.  (From  Karov\oin,  to  cicatrize.)  Me- 
dicines that  cicatrize  wounds. 

Catutri'pali.  A name  of  the  Piper  longum. 

Catulus.  See  Amentum. 

CAU'CALIS.  (From  KavKiov,  a cup ; or  from  Sav- 
xaXij,  the  daucus.)  1.  The  name  of  a family,  or  genus 
of  plants.  Class  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

% Bastard  parsley  ; so  named  from  the  shape  of  its 
flower. 

3.  The  wild  carrot. 

CAUCALOI'DES.  (From  caucalis , and  uSog , a 
likeness , from  its  likeness  to  the  flower  of  the  cauca- 
lis.) Like  unto  the  caucalis.  The  patella  is  some- 
times so  called. 

CAU'DA.  (From  cado,  to  fall ; because  it  hangs 
or  falls  down  behind.)  A tail. 

1.  The  tail  of  animals. 

2.  A name  formerly  given  td  the  os  coccygis,  that 
being  in  tailed  animals  the  beginning  of  the  tail. 

3.  A fleshy  substance,  projecting  from  the  lips  of  the 
vagina,  and  resembling  a tail,  according  to  Aetius. 

200 


4.  Many  herbs  are  called  cauda,  with  the  affixed 
name  of  some  animal,  the  tail  of  which  the  herb  is 
supposed  to  be  like ; as  cauda  equina,  horse-tail ; cau- 
da  muris , mouse-tail ; and  in  many  other  instances. 

Cauda  equina.  1.  The  spinal  marrow,  at  its  ter- 
mination about  the  second  lumbar  vertebra,  gives  off  a 
large  number  of  nerves,  which,  when  unravelled,  re- 
semble the  horse’s  tail ; lienee  the  name.  See  Medulla 
spinalis. 

2.  See  Hippuris  vulgaris. 

Cauda  seminis.  The  tail,  or  elongated,  generally 
feathery  appendage  to  a seed,  formed  of  the  permanent 
style.  It  is  simple,  in  Geranium  zonale ; hairy,  in 
Clematis  and  Pulsatilla;  and  geniculate  in  Tormcn- 
tilla. 

Cauda'tio.  (From  cauda,  a tail.)  An  elongation 
of  the  clitoris. 

CAUDATUS.  (From  cauda , a tail.)  Tailed : ap- 
plied to  seeds  which  have  a tail-like^  appendage ; as 
those  of  the  Clematis  vitalba,  and  Anemone  sulphur ea. 

CAUDEX.  ( Caudex , ids.  m.)  The  body  of  the 
root  of  a plant.  See  Radix. 

CAUL.  1.  The  English  name  for  the  omentum. 
See  Omentum. 

2.  The  amnion,  which  is  sometimes  tom  by  the 
child’s  head,  passing  from  the  uterus,  and  comes  away 
with  it  wholly  separated  from  the  placenta. 

Caule'don.  (From  xauXoj,  a stalk.)  A transverse 
fracture,  when  the  bone  is  broken,  like  the  stump  of  a 
tree, 

CAU'LTFLOWER.  A species  of  brassica,  the 
flower  of  which  is  cut  before  the  fructification  ex- 
pands. The  observations  which  have  been  made 
concerning  cabbages  are  applicable  here.  Cauliflower 
is,  however,  a far  more  delicious  vegetable.  See 
’ Brassica  capitata. 

CAULINUS.  Cauljne.  Belonging  to  the  stem. 
Leaves  and  peduncles  are  so  called,  which  grow  on, 
or  come  immediately  from,  the  stem. 

CAU'LIS.  ( Canlis , is.  m.  KavXoj  ; from  kalab,  a 
Chaldean  word.)  The  stalk  or  stem  of  herbaceous 
plants.  The  characters  of  the  stalk  are,  that  it  is 
rarely  ligneous,  and  lives  but  one  or  two  years  in  the 
natural  state  of  the  plant. 

A plant  is  said  to  be 

Caulescent,  when  furnished  with  a stem. 

Acauline , when  without  a stem ; as  in  Caulina 
acaulis. 

From  its  duration , the  stem  is  distinguished  into, 

1.  Caulus  herb aceus,  which  perishes  every  year;  as 
Melissa  officinalis. 

2.  Caulis  suffrulicosus,  which  perishes  half  way 
down  every  year  ; as  Cheiranthus  ineanus. 

3.  Caulis  fruticosus , shrubby,  having  many  stems, 
which  do  not  perish  in  the  winter ; as  Melissa  fruti- 

cosa.  • 

4.  Caulis  arboreus;  as  the  trunk  of  trees. 

From  the  substance,  it  is  distinguished  into, 

5.  Caulis  fistulosus,  hollow  internally  ; as  in  Ano 
thum  graveolens,  and  Allium  fistulosum. 

6.  Caulis  loculamentosus,  hollow  and  divided  into 
cells  ; as  in  Angelica,  Archangelica,  and  Phellandruiu 
aquaticum. 

7.  Caulis  inanis,  or  medullosus,  empty  or  pithy;  as 
in  Sambucus  nigra. 

8.  Caulis  solidus,  solid ; as  in  Mentha  and  Melissa. 

9.  Caulis  ligneus,  w'oody ; as  Prunus  spiuosa. 

10.  Caulis  camosus,  fleshy  ; as  in  Sedum  arboreum, 
and  Stapelia  hirsuta. 

11.  Caulis  pulposus,  pulpy ; as  in  Mesembryanthe- 
mum  crystallinum. 

12.  Caulis  fibrosus,  separable  into  long  fibres ; aa 
Cocos  nucifera. 

13.  Caulis  succosus,  full  of  a juice ; as  in  the  Eu- 
phorbias, and  Chelidonium  majus. 

From  the  difference  of  the  surface,  the  caulis  is  said 
to  be 

14.  Glaber,  or  l avis,  smooth,  without  any  hairiness, 
or  roughness,  or  inequality  ; as  Lepedium  latifolium. 

15.  Scaber,  or  asper,  when  it  has  hard  inequalities ; 
as  in  Gaiium  aperine,  and  Lithospermum  arveuse. 

16.  Suberosus,  corky,  as  Passiflora  suberosa,  and 
Quercus  suber. 

17.  Rimosus,  cracky ; as  in  Ulmus  campestris. 

18.  Tuberculatus , with  rough  nobs;  as  in  Cissustu 
berculata. 

19.  Tunicatus , the  cuticle  pooling  off  spontaneously 


CAU 


CAU 

h»  large  portions ; as  in  Betula  alba,  and  some  of  the 
Spiraeas. 

20.  Slriatus , having  superficial  longitudinal  lines ; 
as  in  Chaerophyllum  sylvestre,  Aster  sibiricus,  and 
Daphne  mezereon. 

21.  Sulcatus,  furrowed,  fluted,  when  longitudinally 
indented  with  long  and  deep  hollows ; as  in  Celosia 
coccynea,  Selinum  carvifolia,  Pimpinella  sanguisarba, 
Doronicum  pardalianches. 

22.  Perfoliatus , perfoliate ; as  in  Bupleurum  perfo- 
liatum. 

The  figure  affords  the  following  distinctions: 

23.  Caulis  teres,  or  cylindricus,  round,  without  an- 
gles ; as  Sinapis  arvensis. 

24.  Semiteres,  half-rounded,  flat  on  one  side ; as  Hy- 
acinthus  orientalis,  Allium  descendens. 

25.  Caulis  compressus,  which  implies  that  two  sides 
of  the  stem  are  fiat,  and  approach  each  other ; as  in 
Boa  compressa,  Lathyrus  latifoljus,  Pancratium  decli- 
natum. 

26.  Caulis  anceps,  two-edged ; as  Iris  graminea,  Hy- 
pericum androsemum. 

27.  Caulis  angulatus , presenting  several  acute  an- 
gles in  its  circumference. 

a.  Triangulatus , three-cornered ; as  in  Cactus  tri- 
angularis. 

b.  Quadr angulatus,  four-cornered ; as  Cactus  tera- 
gonus. 

c.  Quinqueangulatus ; as  in  Cactus  pentagonus. 

d.  Sexangulatus,  six-cornered;  as  Cactus  hexa- 

gonus. 

e.  Multangnlatus,  many  cornered ; as  Cactus  cereus. 

28.  Caulis  obtus angulatus,  obtuse-angled;  as  in 
Scrophularia  nodosa. 

29.  Caulis  acutangulatus,  acute-angled ; as  in  Scro- 
phularia aquatica. 

30.  Caulis  triquetrus,  three-sided,  When  there  are 
three  flat  sides,  forming  acute  angles ; as  Hedysarum 
triquetrum,  Viola  mirabilis,  Carex  acuta. 

31.  Caulis  tetraquetrus , four-sided ; as  in  Hype- 
ricum quadrangulare,  Monarda  fistulosa,  Mentha  offi- 
cinalis. 

32.  Caulis  membranaceus,  leaf-like;  as  in  Cactus 
phyllanthus. 

33.  Caulis  alatus,  when  the  edges  or  angles  expand 
into  leaf-like  borders ; as  in  Onopordium  acanthium, 
and  Lathyrus  latifolius. 

34  Caulus  articulatvs,  jointed ; as  Cactus  flagelli- 
formis,  and  Lathyrus  sylvestris. 

35.  Caulis  nodosus,  knotty,  divided  at  intervals  by 
swellings ; as  in  Scandix  nodosa,  Geranium  nodosum. 

36.  Caulis  enodus,  without  knot. 

From  the  directions,  a stem  is  called 

37.  Rectus,  erect,  when  it  ascends  almost  perpendi- 
cularly ; as  the  firs,  Chenopodium  scoparium,  &c. 

38.  Strictus,  straight,  perfectly  perpendicular ; as 
Alcea  Rosea. 

39.  Obliquus,  oblique ; as  the  Solidago  Mexicana. 

40.  Jlscendens,  ascending,  when  its  lower  portion 
forms  a curve,  the  convexity  of  which  is  towards  the 
earth,  or  rests  upon  it,  and  the  summit  rises ; as  exem- 
plified in  many  grasses,  Trifolium  pratense,  Hedysa- 
rum onobryclns. 

41.  Descendens,  or  Declinalus,  the  reverse  of  the 
former,  forming  an  arch,  towards  the  ground ; as  in 
Pancratium  declinatum,  Ficus  carjca. 

42.  Nutans,  or  cemuus,  nodding,  when  bent  towards 
the  summit ; as  Polygonatum  multiflora. 

43.  Procumbens,  or  Prostatus , lying  on  the  earth ; 
as  Veronica  officinalis. 

44.  Decumbens,  rising  a little,  and  returning  to  the 
earth ; as  Thymus  serphyllum. 

45.  Repens,  creeping  and  sending  radicles  into  the 
ground ; as  Trifolium  repens,  Gnaphalium  repens. 

46.  Flexuosis,  zigzag;  as  in  Celestrus  buxifolius, 
and  solidago  flexicaulis. 

47.  Radicans,  sending  fibres  which  take  root  in  the 
earth ; as  Ficus  lndica. 

48.  Sarmentosus,  trailing,  or  sending  off  a runner, 
which  fixes  on  neighbouring  bodies ; as  the  Hedera 
helix. 

49  Stoloniferus,  sending  off  radicating  stolos;  as 
Agrostis  stolonifera,  and  Fragaria  vesca. 

50.  Scandens,  climbing,  furnished  with  tendrils;  as 
Solatium  dulcamara,  Cobcea  scandens. 

51.  Volubilis,  twining,  winding  itself  spirally  round 
any  other  plant  or  body. 


a.  Dextrorsum,  when  from  right  to  left;  as  Pliaseo- 
lus  multiflorus,  and  Convolvulus. 

b.  Sinistrorsum,  in  the  opposite  direction,  or  follow- 
ing the  apparent  motion  of  the  sun ; as  the  Lonicera 
pericleminum,  and  Humulus  lupulus. 

52.  Laxus , bent  by  the  lightest  wind;  as  Secale 
sereale,  and  J uncus  bufonius. 

53.  Rigidus,  breaking  when  lightly  bent;  as  Boer- 
haavia  scandens. 

When  clothed  with  any  kind  of  appendage,  the  stem 
is  designated  by  a term  expressive  of  this  ; thus, 

54.  Caulis  foliosus,  when  leafy ; as  Melissa  offici- 
nalis. 

55.  Caulus  aphyllus,  when  without  leaves;  as  As- 
phodelus  fistulosus. 

56.  Caulus  squamosus , scaly ; as  the  Orobranche 
major. 

57.  Caulis  stipulatus,  when  furnished  with  stipula; ; 
as  Cystus  helianthemum,  and  Geranium  terebinthina 
ceum. 

58.  Caulis  imbricatus , tiled  or  covered  with  little 
leaves  or  scales ; as  Crassula  imbricata,  Aloe  viscosa, 

59.  Caulus  vaginatus,  sheathed,  embraced  by  the 
base  of  a leaf  as  by  a sheath ; as  Canna  indica,  Arundo 
donax. 

60.  Caulis  bulbiferus,  bulb-bearing,  when  studded 
with  bulbs  in  the  axilla  of  the  leaves ; as  Lilium  bul- 
biferum. 

61.  Caulis  nudus,  naked,  without  leaf,  scale,  or  other 
covering ; as  Cuscuta  europea. 

From  its  mode  of  branching,  into 

62.  Caulis  simplex,  having  few  branches ; as  Cam- 
panula perfoliata,  Verbascum  thapsus. 

63.  Caulis  simplicissimus,  without  branches;  as 
Orobanche  americana  and  major,  Campanula  barbata. 

64.  Caulis  prolifer,  giving  off  branches  only  from 
the  tops  of  the  former  ; as  the  Dracena  draco. 

65.  Caulis  dichotomus , forked,  always  divided  into 
pairs;  as  in  Horanthus  europseus  and  Valeriana  lo- 
custa. 

66.  Caulis  ramosus , branched ; as  Rosmarinus  offi- 
cinalis. 

67.  Caulis  ramossissimus,  having  many  branches  ; 
as  Chenopodium  scoparia,  Ulmus,  Grossularia,  &c. 

68.  Caulis  paniculatus,  paniculate ; as  in  Crambe 
tataria. 

From  the  pubescence  and  armature,  or  defences,  into 

69.  Caulis  spinosus,  when  furnished  with  sharp 
spines;  as  Prunus  spinosa,  and  Mespilus  oxyacantha, 

70.  Caulis  aculeatus,  prickly,  when  covered  with 
sharp-pointed  bodies ; as  Rosa  centifolia  and  elegan- 
terea. 

71.  Caulis  cetaceus,  bristly,  when  the  armature  con- 
sists of  brushes  of  minute  bristles;  as  Cactus  flagelli- 
formis. 

72.  Caulis  ramentaceus,  ramentaceous ; as  in  Erica 
ramentacea. 

73.  Caulis  pilosus , hairy,  the  pubescence  consisting 
of  long  hairs;  as  Hieraccum  pilocella,  Salvia  pra- 
tensis. 

74.  Caulis  muricatus,  or  hispidus,  when  the  hairs 
are  stiff  or  bristly ; as  Borago  officinalis,  and  Echium 
vulgare. 

75.  Caulis  tomentosus,  downy,  soft  to  the  touch, 
like  down;  as  Verbascum  thapsus,  and  Geranium  ro- 
tundifolium. 

76.  Caulis  villosus,  shaggy ; as  Stachys  germanica, 
and  Veronica  villosa. 

77.  Caulis  lanatus,  woolly,  when  the  hairs  are  long 
and  matted  ; as  in  Stachys  lanata,  and  Ballota  lanata. 

78.  Caulis  serious,  silky,  when  the  hairs  are  shining 
and  silky. 

Instead  of  pubescence,  the  covering  is  in  some  in- 
stances either  a dry  powdery,  or  a moist,  excretion ; 
and  hence,  the  stem  is  denominated  either 

79.  Incanus,  or  pruinosus,  when  covered  with  a fine 
while  dust;  as  the  Artiplex  portulacoidis. 

80.  Farinosus , mealy ; as  the  Primula  farinosa. 

81.  Glaucus,  of  a sea-green  colour ; as  Ricinus  offi- 
cinalis. 

82.  Viscidus,  viscid,  covered  with  a resinous  exuda- 
tion; as  Siline  viscosa. 

83.  Glutinosus,  glutinous,  when  the  exudation  is 
adhesive  and  soluble  in  water;  as'  in  Primula  glu- 
tinosa. 

The  primary  division  of  a stem  is  into  lateral  stem - 
or  branches.  These  are  variously  denominated 

201 


CAU 


CEL 


From  their  situation , into 

84.  Opposite , when  one  branch  stands  on  the  oppo- 
site side  of  the  stem  to  another,  and  their  bases  are 
nearly  on  the  same  plane ; as  in  Mentha  arvensis. 

85.  Alternate , one  opposite  to  another,  alternately ; 
as  Althaea  officinalis. 

86.  Verticill  ated,  when  more  than  two  proceed 
from  a centre,  like  the  spokes  of  a wheel ; as  Pinus 
abies. 

87.  Scattered , when  given  off  from  the  stem  in  any 
indeterminate  manner. 

From  their  direction , the  branches,  or  rami,  are 
termed, 

88.  Patentes , spreading,  when  the  angle  formed  by 
the  branch  and  the  upper  part  of  the  stem  is  obtuse  •, 
as  in  Galium  mollugo,  and  Cestus  italicus. 

89.  Patentissimi , proceeding  at  a right  angle  from 
the  stem,  or  horizontally ; as  Ammania  ramosior,  and 
Asparagus  officinalis. 

90.  Brachiati,  brachiate,  spread  in  four  directions, 
crossing  each  other  alternately  in  pairs ; els  Syringa 
vulgaris,  and  Panisteria  brachiata. 

91.  JDcJlexi,  bending  downward  from  the  stem,  in  an 
arched  or  curved  direction ; as  Pinus  larix. 

92.  Reflexi,  hanging  almost  perpendicularly  from  the 
stem ; as  Salix  babylonica. 

93.  Retrojlezi,  turned  backward;  as  in  Solanum 
dulcamara. 

94.  Introjlexi,  bent  inward,  when  the  tops  bend  to- 
wards the  stem ; els  Populus  dilatata. 

95.  Fastigiati , when  the  tops  of  the  branches,  from 
whatever  part  of  the  stem  they  spring,  rise  nearly  to 
the  same  height;  as  Chrysanthemum  corymbosum, 
and  Dianthus  barbatus. 

96.  Vigati , weak  and  long ; as  Salix  viminalis. 

97.  Appressi,  approximated,  when  nearly  parallel 
and  close  to  the  stem  ; as  Genista  tinctoria. 

98.  Fulcrate , supported,  when  they  project  nearly 
horizontally,  and  give  out  root-like  shoots  from  the 
under  side,  which,  extending  until  they  reach  the 
ground,  take  root,  and  serve  as  props  to  the  branches ; 
as  in  the  banyan-tree,  or  Ficus  religiosus. 

Caulis  Florida.  Cauliflower. 

Caulo'des.  (From  KavXos,  a stem.)  The  white  or 
green  cabbage. 

Caulo'tom.  (From  KavXos,  a stem ; because  it 
grows  upon  a stalk.)  A name  given  to  the  beet. 

CAU'MA.  (K avpa,  heat;  from  Kano,  to  burn.)  The 
heat  of  the  body  in  a fever. 

2.  The  heat  of  the  atmosphere,  in  a fever. 

3.  The  name  given  by  Good  and  Young,  to  an  in- 
flammatory fever. 

Cau'nga.  A name  of  the  areca. 

CAU'SIS.  (From  Kano,  to  bum.)  A burn;  or 
rather,  the  act  of  combustion,  or  burning. 

CAUSO'DES.  (From  Kano,  to  burn.)  A term  ap- 
plied by  Celsus  to  a burning  fever. 

CAUSO'MA.  (From  Kano,  to  burn.)  An  ardent  or 
burning  heat  and  inflammation.  A term  used  by  Hip- 
pocrates. 

CAUSTIC.  See  Causticum. 

Caustic  alkali.  The  pure  alkalies  are  so  called. 
See  Alkali. 

Caustic  barley.  See  Cevadilla. 

Caustic  lunar.  See  Argenti  nitron. 

Caustic  volatile  alkali.  See  Ammonia. 

CAUSTICUM.  (From  Kano,  to  burn;  because  it 
always  produces  a burning  sensation.)  A caustic.  A 
substance  which  has  so  strong  a tendency  to  combine 
with  organized  substances,  as  to  destroy  their  texture. 
See  Escharotic. 

Causticum  americanum.  The  cevadilla.  See  Ve- 
ratrum  sabadilla. 

Causticum  antimoniale.  Muriate  of  antimony. 

Causticum  arsenicale.  See  Arsenical  caustic. 

Causticum  commune  fortius.  See  Potassa  cum 
calce. 

Causticum  lunare.  See  Argenti  nitras. 

CAU'SUS.  (From  Kano,  to  burn.)  A highly  ardent 
fever.  According  to  Hippocrates,  a fiery  heat,  insa- 
tiable thirst,  a rough  and  black  tongue,  complexion 
yellowish,  and  the  saliva  bilious,  are  its  pecular  cha- 
racteristics. Others  also  are  particular  in  describing 
it;  but,  whether  ancients  or  moderns,  from  what  they 
relate,  tins  fever  is  no  other  than  a continued  ardent 
fever  in  a bilious  constitution.  In  it  the  heat  of  the 
body  is  intense ; the  breath  is  particularly  fiery ; the 


extremities  are  cold ; the  pulse  is  frequent  and  small ; 
the  heat  is  more  violent  internally  than  externally, 
and  the  whole  soon  ends  in  recovery  or  death. 

CAUTERY.  (Cauterium,  from  Kano,  to  burn.) 
Cauteries  were  divided,  by  the  ancients,  into  actual 
and  potential ; but  the  term  is  now  given  only  to  the 
red-hot  iron,  or  actual  cautery.  This  was  formerly  the 
only  means  of  preventing  hcemorrhages  from  divided 
arteries,  till  the  invention  of  the  ligature.  It  was  also 
used  in  diseases,  with  the  same  view  as  we  employ  a 
blister.  Potential  cautery  was  the  name  by  which 
kali  purum,  or  potassa,  was  distinguished  in  former 
dispensatories.  Surgeons  of  the  present  day  under- 
stand, by  this  term,  any  caustic  application. 

CA'VA.  See  Cavus. 

CAVE'RNA.  (From  cavus,  hollow.)  A cavern. 
The  pudendum  muliebre. 

CAVIARE.  Caviarium.  A food  made  of  the  hard 
roes  of  sturgeon,  formed  into  a soft  mass,  or  into  cakes, 
and  much  esteemed  by  the  Russians. 

Cavi'cula.  (Diminutive  of  cavilla.)  See  Cavilla. 

Cavi'lla.  (From  cavus.)  The  ankle,  or  hollow 
of  the  foot. 

CA'VITY.  ( Cavitas , from  cavus,  hollow.)  1.  Any 
cavity,  or  hollowness. 

2.  The  auricle  of  the  heart  was  formerly  called 
cavitas  innominata,  the  hollow  without  a name. 

CAVUS.  Hollow.  1.  The  name  of  a vein,  vena  cava. 
See  Feins. 

2.  Applied  to  the  roots  of  plants;  as  that  of  the 

Fumaria  cava. 

Cawk.  A term  by  which  the  miners  distinguish  the 
opaque  specimens  of  sulphate  of  barytes. 

Cayenne  pepper.  See  Capsicum. 

Cazabi.  See  Jatropha. 

CEANO'THUS.  (From  KtavtoSos,  quia  kui  avwScv, 
because  it  pricks  at  the  extreme  part.)  A genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Ceanothus  americanus.  Celastrus ; Cclastus. 
Some  noted  Indians  depend  more  on  this  plant,  than 
on  the  lobelia,  for  the  cure  of  syphilis,  and  use  it  in 
the  same  manner  as  lobelia. 

Cea'sma.  (From  kcio,  to  split,  or  divide.)  Ceasmus 
A fissure,  or  fragment. 

Ce'ber.  (Arabian.)  The  Lignum  aloes.  Also  the 
capparis. 

Ceripi'ra.  (Indian.)  A tree  which  grows  in  Bra- 
zil, decoctions  of  the  bark  of  which  arc  used  in  baths 
and  fomentations,  to  relieve  pains  in  the  limbs,  and 
cutaneous  diseases. 

CE'DAR.  See  Pinus  cedrus. 

Ce'dma.  (From  KcSaio,  to  disperse.)  A defluxion, 
or  rheumatic  affection,  of  the  parts  about  the  hips. 

Ce'drinum  lignum.  See  Pinus  cedrus. 
jsCedri'tes.  (From  KtSpos,  the  cedar-tree.)  Wine 
in  which  the  resin  which  distils  from  the  cedar-tree 
has  been  steeped. 

CE'DRIUM.  1.  Cedar,  or  cedar-tree 

2.  Common  tar,  in  old  writings. 

Cedrome'la.  The  fruit  of  the  citron-tree. 

Cedrone'lla.  Turkey  baum. 

Cedro'stis.  (From  Kt5pos,  the  cedar-tree.)  A 
name  of  the  white  bryony,  which  smells  like  the  cedar. 
See  Bryonia  alba. 

CE'DRUS.  (From  Kcdron,  a valley  where  this 
tree  grows  abundantly.)  See  Pinus  cedrus. 

Cedrus  Americana.  The  arbor  vitae. 

Cedrus  baccifera.  The  savine. 

Cei'ria.  (From  KUp<o,  to  abrade.)  The  tape- 
worm; so  called  from  its  excoriating  and  abrading 
the  intestines. 

CE'LANDIXE.  See  Chelidonium  majus. 

Cela'strus.  (From  KtXa,  a dart,  which  it  repre- 
sents. See  Ceanothus  americanus. 

Celastus.  See  Ceanothus  americanus. 

CE'LE.  (From  k yXy.)  A tumour  caused  by  the 
protrusion  of  any  soft  part.  Hence  the  compound 
terms  hydrocele , bubonocele,  See. 

CE'LERY.  The  English  naune  for  a variety  of  the 
apiuin  graveolens. 

CELESTINE.  So  called  from  its  occasional  deli- 
cate blue  colour.  A native  sulphate  of  strontites.  See 
Heavy  spar. 

Ce'lis.  (From  Kano,  to  bum.)  A spot  or  blemish 
upon  the  skin,  particularly  that  which  is  occasioned 
by  a burn. 


CEN 


CEN 


Ce  lla  turcica.  See  Sella  turcica. 

CE'LLULA.  (Diminutive  of  cella,  a cell.)  A little 
cell,  or  cavity. 

Cellule  mastoid.e.  See  Temporal  bones. 

CE'LLULAR.  Cellularis.  Having  little  cells. 

Cellular  membrane.  Membrana  cellulosa : Tela 
cellulosa ; Panniculus  adiposus ; Membrana  adiposa , 
pinguedinosa  et  reticularis.  Cellular  tissue.  The 
cellular  tissue  of  the  body,  composed  of  laminae  and 
fibres  variously  joined  together,  which  is  the  connecting 
medium  of  every  part  of  the  body.  It  is  by  means 
of  the  communication  of  the  cells  of  this  membrane, 
that  the  butchers  blow  up  their  veal.  The  cellular 
membrane  is,  by  some  anatomists,  distinguished  into 
the  reticular  and  adipose  membrane.  The  former  is 
evidently  dispersed  throughout  the  whole  body,  except 
the  substance  of  the  brain.  It  makes  a bed  for  the 
other  solids  of  the  body,  covers  them  all,  and  unites 
them  one  to  another.  The  adipose  membrane  consists 
of  the  reticular  substance,  and  a particular  apparatus 
for  the  secretion  of  oil,  and  is  mostly  found  imme- 
diately under  the  skin  of  many  parts,  and  about  the 
kidneys. 

CELOTO'MIA.  (From  *07X77,  hernia,  and  rcpvu,  to 
cut.)  The  operation  for  hernia. 

Ce'lsa.  A term  of  Paracelsus,  to  signify  what  is 
called  the  live  blood  in  any  particular  part 

CE'LSUS,  Aurelius  Cornelius.  It  is  commonly 
supposed,  that  this  esteemed  ancient  author  was  a 
Roman  of  the  Cornelian  family,  born  towards  the  end 
of  the  reign  of  Augustus,  and  still  living  in  the  time  of 
Caligula.  But  these  points  are  not  established  upon 
certain  testimony,  and  it  is  even  disputed  whether  he 
practised  medicine;  though  his  perfect  acquaintance 
with  the  doctrines  of  his  predecessors,  his  accurate 
descriptions  of  diseases,  and  his  judicious  rules  of 
treatment,  appear  to  leave  little  room  for  doubt  on  that 
head.  At  any  rate,  his  eight  books,  “ De  Medicina,” 
have  gained  him  deserved  celebrity  in  modern  times, 
containing  a large  fund  of  valuable  information;  de- 
tailed in  remarkably  elegant  and  concise  language. 
In  surgery  particularly  he  has  been  greatly  admired, 
for  the  methods  of  practice  laid  down,  and  for  de- 
scribing several  operations  as  they  are  still  performed. 
There  have  been  numerous  editions  of  his  work,  and 
translations  of  it  into  the  several  modern  languages. 

CEMENT.  Chemists  call  by  this  name  whatever 
they  employ  to  unite  or  cement  things  together;  as 
lutes,  glues,  Holders  of  every  kind. 

CEMENTATION.  A chemical  process,  which 
consists  in  surrounding  a body  in  the  solid  state  with 
the  powder  of  some  other  bodies,  and  exposing  the 
whole  for  a time  in  a closed  vessel,  to  a degree  of 
heat  not  sufficient  to  fuse  the  contents.  Thus  iron  is 
converted  into  steel  by  cementation  with  charcoal; 
green  bottle  glass  is  converted  into  porcelain  by  ce- 
mentation with  sand,  &c. 

Ceme'nterium.  A crucible. 

Ce'nchramis.  (From  Keyxpos,  millet-)  A grain  or 
seed  of  the  fig. 

Ce'nchrius.  A species  of  herpes  that  resembles 
Keyxpos,  or  millet. 

CENEANGEI'A.  (From  kevos , einnty,  and  ayyos, 
a vessel.)  A deficiency  of  blood,  or  other  fluids  in  the 
vessels ; so  that  they  have  not  their  proper  quantity. 

Ceni'gdam.  Ceniplam;  Cenigotam ; Cenipolam. 

An  instrument  anciently  used  for  opening  the  head  in 
epilepsies. 

Ceniote'mium.  A purging  remedy,  formerly  of  use 
in  the  venereal  disease,  supposed  to  be  mercurial. 

CENO'SIS.  (From  kcvos,  empty.)  Evacuation. 

It  imports  a general  evacuation.  Catharsis  was  ap- 
plied to  the  evacuation  of  a particular  humour,  which 
offends  with  respect  to  quality. 

(JENOTICA.  (Cencticus ; from  kevws'i s,  cvacuatio , 
exinamtio,  emptiness.)  The  name  of  an  order  in  the 
class  Gcnetica  of  Good’s  Nosology:  diseases  affecting 
the  fluids,  and  embracing  paramenia , leucorrhixa , 
blcnorrhce a,  spermorrhiza,  and  galeclea. 

CENTAU'REA.  (So  called  from  Chiron , the  cen- 
taur, who  is  said  to  have  employed  one  of  its  species 
to  cure  himself  of  a wound  accidentally  received,  by 
letting  one  of  the  arrows  of  Hercules  fall  upon  his 
foot.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnrean 
system,  of  the  Order,  Pulygamia  frusianea;  Class, 
Syngenosia. 

Cektaurea  behen.  The  systematic  name  of  the 


I officinal  behen  album;  Jacea  orient.alis  patula;  Ra * 
phonticoides  lutea.  The  true  white  behen  of  the  an- 
cients. The  root  possesses  astringent  virtues. 

Centaurea  benedicta.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  blessed  or  holy  thistle,  Carduus  benedictus ; 
Cnicus  sylvestris ; Centaurea  benedicta — calycibus 
duplicato-spinosis  lanatis  involucratis,  foliis  semi- 
decurrentibus  denticulato-spinosis  of  Linnaeus.  This 
exotic  plant,  a native  of  Spain,  and  some  of  the 
Archipelago  islands,  obtained  the  name  of  Benedictus, 
from  its  being  supposed  to  possess  extraordinary 
medicinal  virtues.  In  loss  of  appetite,  where  the 
stomach  was  injured  by  irregularities,  its  good  effects 
have  been  frequently  experienced.  It  is  a powerful 
bitter  tonic  and  adstringent.  Bergius  considers  it  as 
antacid,  corroborant,  stomachic,  sudorific,  diuretic,  and 
eccoprotic.  Chamomile  flowers  are  now  generally 
substituted  for  the  Carduus  benedictus , and  are  thought 
to  be  of  at  least  equal  value. 

Centaurea  calcitrapa.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  star-thistle.  Star-knapweed.  Calci- 
trapa; Carduus  stellatus ; Jacea  ramosissima , stel- 
lata , rupina.  The  plant  thus  called  in  the  pharmaco- 
poeias, is  the  Centaurea — calycibus  subduplicato-spino- 
sis , sessilibus ; foliis  pinnatifidis,  linearibus  dentatis  ; 
caule  piloso , of  Linnaeus,  every  part  of  which  is  bitter. 
The  juice,  or  extract,  or  infusion,  is  said  to  cure 
intermittents  ; and  the  bark  of  the  root,  and  the  seeds, 
have  been  recommended  in  nephritic  disorders,  and  in 
suppression  of  Urine.  It  scarcely  differs,  in  its  effects, 
from  other  bitters,  and  is  now  little  used. 

Centaurea  centaurium.  Rhaponticum  vulgar e : 
Centaurium  magnum ; Centaurium  majus.  Greater 
centaury.  The  root  of  this  plant  was  formerly  used  as 
an  aperient  and  corroborant  in  alvine  fluxes.  It  is 
now  totally  discarded  from  the  Materia  Medica  of  this 
country. 

Centaurea  cyanus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
blue  bottle,  or  corn-flower  plant.  Cyani.  Cyanus. 
The  flowers  of  this  plant,  Centaurea — calycibus  serra - 
tis  : foliis  linearibus , integerrimis , infimis  dentatis , of 
Linnseus,  were  formerly  in  frequent  use ; but  their  an- 
tiphlogistic, antispasmodic,  cordial,  aperient,  diuretic, 
and  other  properties,  are  now,  with  great  propriety, 
forgotten. 

Centaurea  solstitialis.  Calcitrapa  officinalis; 
Carduus  stellatus  luteus ; Carduus  solstitialis ; Ja- 
cea stellata  ; Jacea  lutea  capite  spinoso  mivori ; Leu - 
canthe  veterum.  St.  Barnaby’s  thistle.  It  is  com- 
mended as  an  anticteric,  anticachectic,  and  lithontrip- 
tic,  but  is,  in  reality,  only  a weak  tonic. 

Centaurioi'des.  The  gratiola. 

CENTAU'RIUM.  (From  Kiv'Javoos,  a centaur : so 
called,  because  it  was  feigned  that  Chiron  cured  Her- 
cules’s foot,  which  he  had  wounded  with  a poisonous 
arrow,  with  it.)  Centaury.  See  Chironia  centaurium. 

Centaurium  magnum.  See  Centaurea  Centau- 
rium. « 

Centaurium  majus.  See  Centaurea  Centaurium. 

Centaurium  minus.  See  Chironia  centaurium. 

CENTAU'RY.  See  Chironia. 

Centimor'bia.  (From  centum,  a hundred,  and 
morbus,  a disease.)  The  Tysimachia  nummularia , 
or  moneywort,  was  so  named,  from  its  supposed  effi- 
cacy in  the  cure  of  a multitude  of  disorders. 

Ckntino'dia,  See  Centum  nodia. 

CENTI'PES.  (From  centum,  a hundred,  and  pcs, 
a foot.)  The  woodlouse,  so  named  from  the  multi- 
tude of  its  feet. 

Centra'tio.  (From  centrum,  a centre.)  The  con- 
centration and  affinity  of  certain  substances  to  each 
other.  Paracelsus  expresses  by  it  the  degenerating  of 
a saline  principle,  and  contracting  a corrosive  and 
exulcerating  quality.  Hence  Centrum  sails  is  said  to 
be  the  principle  anil  cause  of  ulcers. 

Ce'ntrium.  (From  kevteu,  to  prick.)  A plaster 
recommended  by  Galen  against  stitches  and  pains  in 
the  side. 

CF/NTRUM.  (From  kevteo),  to  point  or  prick.)  1. 
The  middle  point  of  a circle. 

2.  In  chemistry,  it  is  the  residence  or  foundation  of 
matter. 

3.  In  medicine,  it  is  the  point  in  which  its  virtue 
resides. 

4.  In  anatomy,  the  middle  point  of  some  parts  is  so 
named,  as  centrum  nerveum,  the  middle  or  tendinous 
par.  of  the  diaphragm 

203 


CER 


CER 

Centrum  nerveum.  The  centreof  the  diaphragm. 
See  Diaphragm. 

Centrum  ovale.  When  the  two  hemispheres  of 
the  brain  are  removed  on  a line  with  a level  of  the 
corpus  callosum , the  internal  medullary  part  presents 
a somewhat  oval  centre,  which  is  called  centrum  ovale. 
Vieussenius  supposed  all  the  medullary  fibres  met  at 
this  place. 

Centrum  tendinosum.  The  tendinous  centre  of 
the  diaphragm.  See  Diapragm. 

CENTUMNO'DIA.  (From  centum , a hundred,  and 
nodus , a knot ; so  called  from  its  many  knots  or  joints.) 
Centtnodia.  Common  knot-grass.  See  Polygonum 
aviculare. 

Centu'nculus.  Bastard  pimpernel. 

CE  PA.  (From  Kyiros,  a wool-card,  from  the  like- 
ness of  its  roots.)  The  onion.  See  Allium  cepa. 

Cep.e'a.  A species  of  onion. 

CEPHALrE'A.  (From  KE^aXrj,  the  head.)  1.  The 
flesh  of  the  head  which  covers  the  skull. 

2.  A headache.  Dr.  Good  makes  this  a genus  of 
disease  in  his  Order,  Systatica;  Class,  Neurotica.  It 
has  five  species,  Cephalcea  graverus,  intensa,  hemi cra- 
nia, pulsatilis , nauscosa: 

CEPHA'LALGIA.  (From  Kccpahy,  the  head,  and 
«Xyoj,  pain.)  Cephalcea.  The  headache.  It  is  symp- 
tomatic of  very  many  diseases,  but  is  rarely  an  original 
disease  itself.  When  mild,  it  is  called  cephalalgia ; 
when  inveterate,  cephalaea.  When  one  side  of  the 
head  only  is  affected,  it  takes  the  names  of  hemicrania, 
migrana , hemipagia , and  megrim ; in  one  of  the  tem- 
ples only,  crotaphos ; and  that  which  is  fixed  to  a 
point,  generally  in  the  crown  of  the  head,  is  distin- 
guished by  the  name  of  clavus. 

Cephala'rtica.  (From  KtcpaXy,  the  head,  and  «p- 
n-5< i),  to  make  pure.)  Medicines  which  purge  the 
head. 

CE'PHALE.  KecpaXr).  The  head. 

CEPHALIC.  (From  the  head.)  Pertaining 

to  the  head.  1.  A variety  of  external  and  internal 
medicines  are  so  called,  as  being  adapted  for  the  cure 
of  disorders  of  the  head.  Of  this  class  are  the  snufls, 
which  produce  a discharge  from  the  mucous  membrane 
of  the  nose,  &c. 

2.  Nerves,  arteries,  veins,  muscles,  & c.  are  so  called, 
which  are  situated  on  the  head. 

3.  The  name  of  a vein  of  the  arm,  which  it  was  sup- 
posed went  to  the  head. 

Cephalic  vein.  (Vena  cephaUca ; so  called  be- 
cause the  head  was  supposed  to  be  relieved  by  opening 
it.)  The  anterior  or  outermost  vein  of  the  arm,  that 
receives  the  cephalic  of  the  thumb. 

Cephalicus  pulvis.  A powder,  prepared  from  asa- 
rum. 

CEPHALI'TIS.  (From  KEtpaXy,  the  head.)  Inflam- 
mation of  the  head.  Empresma  cephalitis  of  Good. 
See  Phrenit.is. 

CEf*H  ALO.  This  term  is  joined  to  others  to  denote 
the  connexion  of  the  muscle,  artery,  nerve,  &c.  to  the 
head. 

CEPIIALONO'SUS.  (From  K£<paXrj,  the  head  and 
t 'oaos,  a disease.)  Any  disease  of  the  bead.  Applied 
to  the  febris  hungarica,  in  which  the  head  is  princi- 
pally affected. 

Cephalo-pharyngeus.  (From  KEtpaXy , the  head, 
and  (papvyh  the  throat.)  A muscle  of  the  pharynx. 
See  Constrictor  pharyngis  inferior. 

CEPHALOPONIA.  (From  iceipah 7,  the  head,  and 
xsovoi,  .pain.)  Headache. 

Cepi'ni.  Vinegar. 

Ckpula.  Large  myrobalans. 

CERA.  Wax.  Bees’  wax.  A solid  concrete  sub- 
stance, collected  from  vegetables  by  bees,  and  extracted 
from  their  combs  after  the  honey  is  got  out,  by  heating 
and  pressing  them. 

It  was  long  considered  as  a resin,  from  some  proper- 
ties common  to  it  with  resins.  Like  them  it  furnishes 
an  oil  and  an  acid  by  distillation,  and  is  soluble  in  all 
oils ; but  in  several  respects  it  differs  sensibly  from 
resins.  Like  these,  wax  has  not  a strong  aromatic 
taste  and  smell,  but  a very  weak  smell,  and  when  pure, 
no  taste.  With  the  heat  of  boiling  water,  no  princi- 
ples are  distilled  from  it ; whereas,  with  that  heat, 
some  essential  oil,  or  at  least  a spiritus  rector,  is  ob- 
tained from  every  resin.  Farther,  wax  is  less  soluble 
in  alkohol.  If  wax  be  distilled  with  a heat  greater 
than  that  of  boiling  water,  it  may  be  decomposed,  but 


not  so  easily  as  resin3  can.  By  this  distillation,  a 
small  quantity  0/  water  is  first  separated  from  the  wax, 
and  then  some  very  volatile  and  very  penetrating  acid, 
accompanied  with  a small  quantity  of  a very  fluid 
and  very  odoriferous  oil.  As  the  distillation  advances, 
the  acid  becomes  more  and  more  strong,  and  the  oil 
more  and  more  thick,  till  its  consistence  is  such  that  it 
becomes  solid  in  the  receiver,  and  is  then  called  butter 
of  wax.  When  the  distillation  is  finished,  nothing  re- 
mains but  a small  quantity  of  coal,  which  is  almost 
incombustible. 

Wax  cannot  be  kindled,  unless  it  is  previously  heat- 
ed and  reduced  into  vapours;  in  which  respect  it 
resembles  fat  oils.  The  oil  of  butter  of  wax  may,  by 
repeated  distillations,  be  .attenuated  and  rendered  more 
and  more  fluid,  because  some  portion  of  acid  is  there- 
by separated  from  these  substances;  which  effect  is 
similar  to  what  happens  in  the  distillation  ofotheroils 
and  oily  concretes  : but  this  remarkable  effect  attends 
the  repeated  distillation  of  oil  and  butter  of  wax,  that 
they  become  more  and  more  soluble  in  alkohol ; and 
that  they  never  acquire  greater  consistence  by  evapo- 
ration of  their  more  fluid  parts.  Boerhaave  kept  but- 
ter of  wax  in  a glass  vessel,  open,  or  carelessly  closed, 
during  twenty  years,  without  acquiring  a more  solid 
consistence.  It  may  be  remarked,  that  wax,  its  butter, 
and  its  oil,  differ  entirely  from  essential  oils  and  resins 
in  all  the  above-mentioned  properties,  and  that  in  all 
these  they  perfectly  resemble  sweet  oils.  Hence  Ma- 
quer  concludes,  that  wax  resembles  resins  only  in  be- 
ing an  oil  rendered  concrete  by  an  acid;  but  that  it 
differs  essentially  from  these  in  the  kind  of  the  oil, 
which  in  resins  is  of  the  nature  of  essential  oils,  while 
in  wax  and  in  other  analogous  oily  concretions  (as 
butter  of  milk,  butter  of  cocoa,  fat  of  animals,  sperma- 
ceti, and  myrtle-wax)  it  is  of  the  nature  of  mild  unc- 
tuous oils,  that  are  not  aromatic,  and  not  volatile,  and 
are  obtained  from  vegetables  by  expression.  It  seems 
probable,  that  the  acidifying  principle,  or  oxygen,  and 
not  an  actual  acid,  may  be  the  leading  cause  of  the 
solidity,  or  low  fusibility  of  wax. 

In  the  state  in  which  it  is  obtained  from  the  combs, 
it  is  called  yellow  wax,  cera  fiava;  and  this,  when 
new,  is  of  a lively  yellow  colour,  somewhat  tough, 
yet  easy  to  break  : by  age,  it  loses  its  fine  colour,  and 
becomes  harder  and  more  brittle.  Yellow  wax,  after 
being  reduced  into  thin  cakes,  and  bleached  by  a long 
exposure  to  the  sun  and  open  air,  is  again  melted,  and 
formed  into  round  cakes,  called  virgin  wax,  or  white 
wax,  ccra  alba.  The  chief  medicinal  use  of  wax,  is 
in  plasters,  unguents,  and  other  like  external  applica- 
tions, partly  for  giving  the  requisite  consistence  to 
other  ingredients,  and  partly  on  account  of  its  own 
emollient  quality. 

Cera  alba.  See  Cera. 

Cera  dicardo.  The  carduus  pinea. 

Cera  flava.  Yellow  wax.  See  Cera. 

[Cera  vegetabilis.  Vegetable  wax,  or  natural 
wax.  Wax  seems  to  abound  in  some  plants  more 
than  in  others,  and  is  easily  collected  from  them.  The 
bayberry  ( Myrica  cerifera)  abounds  on  the  sandy 
shores  of  the  United  States,  and  in  the  autumn  the  wax 
is  scraped  from  the  plants,  and,  when  melted  and  run 
into  cakes,  forms  a beautiful  green  vegetable  wax, 
which  is  made  into  wax  tapers,  or  sometimes  melted 
with  a portion  of  tallow,  and  made  into  candles,  which 
partake  of  the  green  colour  of  the  wax,  and  are  called 
bayberry  candles,  the  vegetable  cercgiving  hardness  and 
consistence  to  the  candles,  and  therefore  more  useful 
in  the  heat  of  summer.  We  recollect  seeing  a large 
specimen  of  white  vegetable  wax  in  the  possession  of 
Dr.  S.  L.  Mitchill,  received  by  him  from  South  Ame- 
rica, and  exhibited  to  his  class  when  he  lectured  on 
Materia  Medica,  in  the  College  of  Physicians  and  Sur- 
geons of  New-York.  On  inquiry,  since,  he  informs 
us,  that  he  never  could  ascertain  the  botanical  name 
of  the  plant,  though  it  was  said  to  be  a tree.  A.] 

Cer.e'j:.  (From  Kspas,  a horn.)  So  Rufus  Ephe- 
sius  calls  the  cornua  or  appendages  of  the  uterus. 

Cerani'tes.  (From  Kcpavvvpi,  to  temper  together.) 
A name  formerly  applied  to  a pastil,  or  trocli,  by 
Galen. 

Ce'ras.  (Kt-paj,  a horn.)  A wild  sort  of  parsnip 
is  so  named  from  its  shape. 

CE'RASA.  (Krpaaof,  the  cherry-tree  ; from  Ktpa- 
aov'Jt],  a town  in  Pontus,  whence  Lucullus  first  brought 
them  to  Rome : or  from  kijp,  the  heart ; from  the  fruit 


CER 


CER 

having  a resemblance  to  it  in  shape  and  colour.)  The 
cherry.  See  Prunus. 

Cerasa  nigra.  See  Prunus  avium. 

Cerasa  rubra.  See  Prunus  cerasus. 

Cerasiatum.  (From  cerasus , a cherry  ; so  called 
because  cherries  are  an  ingredient.)  A purging  medi- 
cine in  Libavius. 

CE'RASIN.  The  name  given  by  Dr.  John  of  Ber- 
lin, to  those  gummy  substances  which  swell  in  cold 
water,  but  do  not  readily  dissolve  in  it.  Cerasin  is 
soluble  in  boiling  water,  but  separates  in  a jelly  when 
the  water  cools.  Water,  acidulated  with  sulphuric, 
nitric,  or  muriatic  acid,  by  the  aid  of  a gentle  heat, 
forms  a permanent  solution  of  cerasin.  Gum  traga- 
canth  is  the  best  example  of  this  species  of  vegetable 
product. 

Cera'sius.  (From  cerasus,  a cherry.)  Crasios. 
The  name  of  two  ointments  in  Mesue. 

Cera  sma.  (From  Ktpavvvpi,  to  mix.)  A mixture 
of  cold  and  warm  water,  when  the  warm  is  poured 
into  the  cold. 

CERASUS.  The  cherry  and  cherry-tree.  See 
Prunus  cerasus. 

CE'RATE.  Ceratum.  A composition  of  wax,  oil, 
or  lard,  with  or  without  other  ingredients.  The 
obsolete  synonymes  are,  cerclceum , ceroma,  ceronium, 
cerotum , ceratomalagma.  Cerates  take  their  name 
from  the  wax  which  enters  into  their  composition,  and 
to  which  they  owe  their  consistence,  which  is  inter- 
mediate between  that  of  plasters  and  that  of  ointments ; 
though  no  very  definite  rule  for  this  consistence  is,  in 
fact,  either  given  or  observed. 

Cera'tia.  (From  iccpas > a horn,  which  its  fruit 
resembles.)  See  Ceratonia  siliqua. 

Ceratia  diphyllus.  See  Courbaril 

Cera'ticum.  See  Ceratonia  siliqua. 

CERA'TO.  (From  Kepas,  a horn.)  Some  muscles 
have  this  word  as  a part  of  their  names,  from  their 
shape. 

Cerato-glossus.  (From  iccpas,  a horn,  and  yX’aaaa, 
a tongue.)  A muscle,  so  named  from  its  shape  and 
insertion  into  the  tongue.  See  Hyoglossus. 

Cerato-hyoideus.  See  Stylo- hijoideus. 

Cerato  malagma.  A cerate. 

CERATOl'  DES.  (From  Kepa'Jos , the  genitive  of 
Kspasi  horn,  and  eido ?,  appearance.)  See  Cornea. 

CERATO'NIA.  (Krpurwvta  of  Galen  and  Paulus 
ASgineta ; so  cailed  from  its  horn-like  pod.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Polygamia  ; Order, 
Tricecia. 

Ceratonia  siliqua.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  sweet  pod.  Ceratium ; Ce- 
ratia ; Siliqua  dulcis.  The  pods  are  about  four  inches 
in  length,  and  as  thick  as  one’s  finger,  compressed  and 
unequal,  and  mostly  bent ; they  contain  a sweet  brown 
pulp,  which  is  given  in  the  form  of  decoction,  as  a 
pectoral  in  asthmatic  complaints  and  coughs. 

CERA'TUM.  {Ceratum ; i.  m. ; trom  cera , wax, 
because  its  principal  ingredient  is  wax.)  See  Cerate. 

Ceratum  album.  See  Ceratum  cetacei. 

Ceratum  calamine.  Ceratum  lapidis  calamina- 
ris ; Ceratum  epuloticum.  Calamine  cerate.  Take 
of  prepared  calamine,  yellow  wax,  of  each  half  a 
pound ; olive  oil,  a pint.  Mix  the  oil  with  the  melted 
wax  ; then  remove  it  from  the  fire,  and,  as  soon  as  it 
begins  to  thicken,  add  the  calamine,  and  stir  it  con- 
stantly until  the  mixture  becomes  cold  A composi- 
tion of  this  kind  was  first  introduced  under  the  name 
of  Turner’s  cerate.  It  is  well  calculated  to  promote 
the  cicatrization  of  ulcers. 

Ceratum  cantharidis.  Ceratum  Lyttce.  Cerate 
of  blistering  fly.  Take  of  spermaceti  cerate,  six 
drachms ; blistering  flies,  in  very  fine  powder,  a drachm. 
Having  softened  the  cerate  by  heat,  add  the  flies,  and 
mix  them  together. 

Ceratum  cetacei.  Cratum  spermutis  ceti.  Ce- 
ratum album.  Spermaceti  cerate.  Take  of  sperma- 
ceti, half  an  ounce  ; white  wax,  two  ounces ; olive 
oil,  4 fluid-ounces.  Add  the  oil  to  the  spermaceti  and 
wax,  previously  melted  together,  and  stir  them  until 
the  mixture  becomes  cold.  This  cerate  is  cooling  and 
emollient,  and  applied  to  excoriations,  &c. : it  may  be 
used  with  advantage  in  all  ulcers,  where  no  stimu- 
lating substance  can  be  applied,  being  extremely  mild 
and  unctuous. 

Ceratum  citrinum.  See  Ceratum  resince. 

Ceratum  conii.  Hemlock  cerate  ft  unguenti 


conii,  R>j.  Spermatis  ceti,  3 ij.  Cera;  alb®,  |iij.  Misce. 
One  of  the  formula;  of  St.  Bartholomew’s  hospital, 
occasionally  applied  to  cancerous,  scrofulous,  phage- 
denic, herpetic,  and  other  inveterate  sores. 

Ceratum  epuloticum.  See  Ceratum  calamina. 

Ceratum  lapidis  calaminaris.  See  Ceratum 
calamina!. 

Ceratum  lithargyri  acktati  compositum.  See 
Ceratum  plumbi  compositum. 

Ceratum  plumbi  acetatis.  Ungucntum  cerussce 
acetatce  Cerate  of  acetate  of  lead.  Take  of  acetate 
of  lead,  powdered,  two  drachms ; white  wax,  two 
ounces;  olive  oil,  half  a pint.  Dissolve  the  w'ax  in 
seven  fluid-ounces  of  oil ; then  gradually  add  thereto 
the  acetate  of  lead,  separately  rubbed  down  with  the 
remaining  oil,  and  stir  the  mixture  with  a wooden 
slice,  until  the  whole  has  united.  This  cerate  is  cool- 
ing and  desiccative. 

Ceratum  plumbi  compositum.  Ceratum  lithargyri 
acetati  compositum.  Compound  cerate  of  lead.  Take 
of  solution  of  acetate  of  lead,  two  fluid-ounces  .and  a 
half;  yellow  wax,  four  ounces;  olive  oil,  nine  fluid- 
ounces;  camphor,  half  a drachm.  Mix  the  wax  pre- 
viously melted,  with  eight  fluid-ounces  of  oil ; then 
remove  it  from  the  fire,  and,  when  it  begins  to  thicken, 
add  gradually  the  solution  of  acetate  of  lead,  and  con- 
stantly stir  the  mixture  with  a wooden  slice  until  it 
gets  cold.  Lastly,  mix  in  the  camphor,  previously 
dissolved  in  the  remainder  of  the  oil.  Its  virtues  arc 
cooling,  desiccative,  resolvent  against  chronic  rheuma- 
tism, &c.  &c. ; and  as  a proper  application  to  super- 
ficial ulcers,  which  are  inflamed. 

Ceratum  resins.  Ceratum  resince  Jlavce  ; Cera 
turn  citrinum.  Resin  cerate.  Take  of  yellow  resin, 
yellow  wax,  of  each  a pound ; olive  oil,  a pint.  Melt 
the  resin  and  wax  together,  over  a slow  fire  ; then  add 
the  oil,  and  strain  the  cerate,  while  hot,  through  a 
linen  cloth.  Digestive. 

Ceratum  sabin^e.  Savine  cerate.  Take  of  fresh 
leaves  of  savine,  bruised,  a pound ; yellow  wax,  half 
a pound;  prepared  lard,  two  pounds.  Having  melted- 
together  the  wax  and  lard,  boil  therein  the  savine 
leaves,  and  strain  through  a linen  cloth.  This  article 
is  of  late  introduction,  for  the  purpose  of  keeping  up 
a discharge  from  blistered  surfaces.  It  was  first  de 
scribed  by  Mr.  Crowther,  and  has  since  been  received 
into  extensive  use,  because  it  does  not  produce  the 
inconveniences  that  follow  the  constant  application 
of  the  common  blistering  cerate.  A thick  white  layer 
forms  daily  upon  the  part,  which  requires  to  be  re- 
moved, that  the  cerate  may  be  applied  immediately  to- 
the  surface  from  whiclvthe  discharge  is  to  be  made. 

Ceratum  saponis.  Soap  cerate.  Take  of  hard- 
soap,  eight  ounces : yellow  wax,  ten  ounces ; semi- 
vitreous  oxide  of  lead,  powdered,  a pound  ; olive  oil, 
a pint;  vinegar,  a gallon.  Boil  the  vinegar,  with  the 
oxide  of  lead,  over  a slow  fire,  constantly  stirring, 
until  the  union  is  complete ; then  add  the  soap,  and* 
boil  it  again  in  a similar  manner,  until  the  moisture  is 
entirely  evaporated  ; then  mix  in  the  wax,  previously 
melted  with  the  oil.  Resolvent ; against  scrofulous- 
tumours,  &c.  It  is  a convenient  application  in  frac- 
tures, and  may  be  used  as  an  external  dressing  for  ulcers.- 

Ceratum  simplex.  Ceratum.  Simple  cerate.- 
Take  of  olive  oil,  four  fluid-ounces ; yellow  wax,  four' 
ounces : having  melted  the  wax,  mix  the  oil  with  it. 

Ceratum  spermatis  ceti.  See  Ceratum  cetacei. 

Ce'rberus.  {KcpSepos  ; because,  like  the  dog  Cer- 
berus, it  has  three  heads,  or  principal  ingredients,  each' 
of  which  is  eminently  active.)  A fanciful  name  given- 
to  the  compound  powder  of  scammony. 

Cerchna'leum.  (From  Ktpx<n,  to  make  a noise.), 
A wheezing,  or  bubbling  noise,  made  by  the  trachea,, 
in  breathing. 

CE'RCHNOS.  (From  Kepx^i 10  wheeze.)  Cerch- 
nus.  Wheezing.  Dr.  Good  applies  it  to  a species  of 
his  genus  Rhonchus,  to  designate  a primary  evil  or 
disease ; rhonchus. cerchnus,  or  wheezing. 

CERCHNO'DES.  (From  /cepxw,  to  wheeze.) 
Ccrchodes.  One  who  labours  under  a dense  breathing,- 
accompanied  with  a wheezing  noise. 

CERCHO'DES.  See  Cerchnodes. 

Ce'rcis.  (Kcpicis  literally  means  the  spoke  of  a= 
wheel,  and  has  its  name  from  the  noise  which  wheels 
often  make  ; from  KpcKin,  to  shriek.)  The  radial  bone 
of  the  fore-arm  was  formerly  so  called  from  its  shape, 
like  a spoke  Also  a oeslle  from  its  shape. 

203 


CER 


CER 


CERCO'SIS.  (From  itepKos,  a tail.)  1.  A polypus 
of  the  uterus. 

2.  An  enlargement  of  the  clitoris. 

CE'REA.  (From  cera , wax.)  The  cerumen  au- 
rium,  or  wax  of  the  ear. 

CEREA'LLA.  (Solemn  feasts  to  the  goddess  Ceres.) 
All  sorts  of  corn,  of  which  bread  or  any  nutritious 
substance  is  made,  come  under  the  head  of  cerealia , 
which  term  is  applied  by  bromatologists  as  a genus. 

Cerebe'lla  urina.  Paracelsus  thus  distinguishes 
urine  which  is  whitish,  of  the  colour  of  the  brain,  and 
from  which  he  pretended  to  judge  of  some  of  its  dis- 
orders. 

OEREBE'LLUM.  (Diminutive  of  cerebrum.)  The 
little  brain.  A somewhat  round  viscus,  of  the  same 
use  as  the  brain;  composed,  like  the  brain,  of  a cor- 
tical and  medullary  substance,  divided  by  a septum 
into  a right  and  left  lobe,  and  situated  under  the  ten- 
torium, in  the  inferior  occipital  fossa? . In  the  cere- 
bellum are  to  be  observed  tne  crura  ccrebclli,  the 
fourth  ventricle,  the  vaivula  magna  cerebri , and  the 
protuberantice  vermiform.es. 

CE'REBRUM.  ( Quasi  cerebrum;  from  uapa , the 
head.)  The  brain.  A large  round  viscus,  divided 
superiorly  into  a right  and  left  hemisphere , and  infe- 
liorly  into  six  lobes , two  anterior,  two  middle,  and 
two  posterior ; situated  within  the  cranium,  and  sur- 
rounded by  Jthe  dura  and  pia  mater,  and  tunica  arach- 
noidcs.  It  is  composed  of  a cortical  substance , which 
is  external;  and  a medullary , which  is  internal.  It 
has  three  cavities , called  ventricles  ; two  anterior,  or 
lateral,  which  are  divided  from  each  other  by  the 
septum  lucidum , and  in  each  of  which  is  the  choroid 
plexus , formed  of  blood-vessels ; the  third  ventricle  is 
a space  between  the  thalami  nervorum  opticorum. 
The  principal  prominences  of  the  brain  are,  the  corpus 
callosum , a medullary  eminence,  conspicuous  upon 
laying  aside  the  hemispheres  of  the  brain  ; the  corpora 
striata , two  striated  protuberances,  one  in  the  anterior  j 
part  of  each  lateral  ventricle  ; the  thalami  nervorum 
opticorum , two  whitish  eminences  behind  the  former, 
which  terminate  in  the  optic  nerves;  the  corpora  quad- 
rigemina,  four  medullary  projections,  called  by  the 
ancients  nates  and  testes ; a little  cerebrine  tubercle 
lying  upon  the  nates,  called  the  pineal  gland ; and, 
lastly,  the  crura  cerebri , two  medullary  columns, 
which  proceed  from  the  basis  of  the  brain  to  the  me- 
dulla oblongata.  The  cerebral  arteries  are  branches 
of  the  carotid  and  vertebral  arteries.  The  veins  ter- 
minate in  sinuses,  which  return  their  blood  into 
the  internal  jugulars.  The  use  of  the  brain  is  to 
give  off  nine  pairs  of  nerves,  and  the  spinal  marrow, 
from  which  thirty-one  more  ^tairs  proceed,  through 
whose  means  the  various  senses  are  performed,  and 
muscular  motion  excited.  It  is  also  considered  as  the 
organ  of  the  intellectual  functions. 

Vauquelin’s  analysis  of  the  brain  is  in  100  parts;  80 
water,  4.53  white  fatty  matter,  0.7  reddish  fatty  matter, 

7 albumen,  1.12  osmazome,  1.5  phosphorus,  5.15  acids, 
salts,  and  sulphur. 

Cerebrum  elongatum.  The  medulla  oblongata, 
and  medulla  spinalis. 

CEREFO'LIUM.  A corruption  of  choerophyllum. 
See  Scandix  cerefolium. 

Cerefolium  hispanicum.  Sweet-cicely.  See  Scan- 
dix odorata. 

Cerefolium  svlvestre.  See  Chcerophyllum  syl- 
vestre. 

CERELrE'UM.  (From  Krjpos,  wax,  and  eXaiov,  oil.) 

A cerate,  or  liniment,  composed  of  wax  and  oil.  Also 
the  oil  of  tar. 

CEREOLUS.  A wax  bougie. 

CE'REUS  MEDICATUS.  See  Bougie. 
CEREVI'SIA.  (From  ceres , corn,  of  which  it  is 
made.)  Any  liquor  made  from  corn,  especially  ale  and 
strong  beer. 

Cerevisije  cataplasma.  Into  the  grounds  of  strong 
beer,  stir  as  much  oatmeal  as  will  make  it  of  a suitable 
consistence.  This  is  sometimes  employed  as  a stimu- 
lant and  an  antiseptic  to  mortified  parts. 

Cerevisije  fermentum.  See  Fermentum  Cere- 
visice. 

Ce'ria.  (From  cereus , soft,  pliant.)  The  flat 
worms  which  breed  in  the  intestines.  See  Teenia. 

CERIN.  1.  Subercerin.  A peculiar  substance 
which  precipitates  on  evaporation  from  alkohol,  which 
has  been  digested  on  cork. 

206 


2.  The  name  given  by  Dr.  John  to  the  part  of  com- 
mon wax  which  dissolves  in  alkohol. 

3.  The  name  of  a variety  of  the  mineral  allanite. 
Ce'rion.  (From  Krjpiov,  a honey-comb.)  An  erup- 
tive disorder  of  the  head.  See  Jlchor. 

CERITE.  The  siliciferous  oxide  of  cerium.  A rare 
mineral  of  a rose-red  colour,  found  only  in  the  cop- 
per mine  of  Bastnacs,  in  Sweden.  It  consists  of  silica, 
oxide  of  cerium,  and  oxide  of  iron,  lime,  and  carbonic 
acid. 

CERIUM.  The  name  of  the  metal,  the  oxide  of 
which  exists  in  the  mineral  cerite. 

To  obtain  the  oxide  of  the  new  metal,  the  cerite  is 
calcined,  pulverized,  and  dissolved  in  nitromuriatic 
acid.  The  filtered  solution  being  neutralized  with  pure 
potassa,  is  to  be  precipitated  by  tartrate  of  potassa ; 
and  the  precipitate,  well  washed,  and  afterwards  cal- 
cined, is  oxide  of  cerium. 

Cerium  is  susceptible  of  two  stages  of  oxidation ; in 
the  first  it  is  white,  and  this  by  calcination  becomes  of 
a fallow-red. 

The  white  oxide  exposed  to  the  blowpipe  soon  be- 
comes red,  but  does  not  melt,  or  even  agglutinate. 
With  a large  proportiorf  of  borax  it  fuses  into  a trans- 
parent globule. 

The  white  oxide  becomes  yellowish  in  the  open  air, 
but  never  so  red  as  by  calcination,  because  it  absorbs 
carbonic  acid,  which  prevents  its  saturating  itself  with 
oxygen,  and  retains  a portion  of  water,  which  dimi- 
nishes its  colour. 

Alkalies  do  not  act  on  it ; but  caustic  potassa  in  the 
dry  way,  takes  part  of  the  oxygen  from  the  red  oxide  so 
as  to  convert  it  into  the  white  without  altering  its  nature. 

The  protoxide  of  cerium  is  composed  by  Hisinger  of 
85.17  metal  + 14.83  oxygen,  and  the  peroxide  of  79.3 
metal  -j-  20.7.  The  protoxide  has  been  supposed  a 
binary  compound  of  cerium  5.75  -f-  oxygen  1,  and  the 
peroxide  a compound  of  5.75  ><  2 of  cerium  -f-  3 oxy 
gen.  An  alloy  of  this  metal  with  iron  was  obtained 
by  Vauquelin. 

The  salts  of  cerium  are  white  or  yellow-coloured, 
have  a sweet  taste,  yield  a white  precipitate  with  liy- 
drosulphuret  of  potassa,  but  none  with  sulpheretted 
hydrogen  ; a milk-white  precipitate,  soluble  in  nitric 
and  muriatic  acids,  with  ferroprussiate  of  potassa,  and 
oxalate  of  ammonia ; none  with  infusion  of  galls,  and 
a white  one  with  arseniate  of  potassa. 

CERO'MA.  (From  Krjpos,  wax.)  Ceronium.  Terms 
used  by  the  ancient  physicians  for  an  unguent,  or  ce- 
rate, though  originally  applied  to  a particular  compo- 
sition which  the  wrestlers  used  in  their  exercises. 

CEROPI'SSUS.  (From  Krjpos,  wax,  and  zstaca, 
pitch.)  A plaster  composed  of  pitch  and  wax. 
Cerotum.  K epoorov.  A cerate. 

[Cerulin.  “ By  the  action  of  sulphuric  acid  on  in- 
digo, tw'o  new  substances  are  obtained,  termed,  by  Mr. 
Crum,  Cerulin  and  Phenicin.  To  prepare  the  former, 
the  indigo  is  digested  in  the  acid,  the  mixture  is  dis- 
solved in  a large  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid,  and  the 
filtered  solution  is  precipitated  by  potassa.  The  pre- 
cipitate consists  of  cerulin , in  combination  with  the 
sulphate  of  potassa,  and  has  been  called  Ceruleo-sul- 
phate  of  potassa.  It  requires  about  120  parts  of  wa- 
ter for  its  solution,  and  forms  a very  deep  blue-colour- 
ed liquid.  In  its  property  of  forming  insoluble  com- 
pounds with  neutral  salts,  cerulin  is  analogous  to  tan. 
From  its  ultimate  analysis,  it  appears  to  consist  of  1 
atom  of  indigo  -j-  4 atoms  of  water.” — Webster's  Man. 
of  Chem.  A.] 

CERU'MEN.  ( Cerumen ; diminutive  of  cera,  wax.) 
Wax.  See  Cera. 

Cerumen  aurium.  Cerea ; Aurium  sordes ; Mar- 
morata  aurium  ; Cypsele ; Cypselis ; Fugile.  The 
waxy  secretion  of  the  ear,  situated  in  the  meatus  audi- 
torius  externus. 

[“Cerumen  auris.  A degree  of  deafness  is  fre- 
quently produced  by  the  lodgment  of  hard  dry  pellets 
of  this  substance  in  the  meatus  auditorius.  The  best 
plan,  in  such  cases,  is  to  syringe  the  ear  with  warm 
water,  which  should  be  injected  with  moderate  force. 

In  some  instances,  deafness  seems  to  depend  on  a de- 
fective secretion  of  the  cerumen,  and  a consequent  dry- 
ness of  the  meatus.  Here,  a drop  or  two  of  sweet  oil 
may  now  and  then  be  introduced  into  the  ear,  and 
■ fomentations  applied.” — Cooper's  Surg.  Diet.  A.] 

! CERU'SSA.  (Arabian.)  Ccrusse.  See  Plumbi  sub- 
[ carbunas. 


C1IA 


CHA 


Cerussa  acetata.  See  Plumbi  acetas. 

Ckrvi  spina.  See  Rkamnus  catharticus. 

CERVI  CAL.  ( Cernicalis  ; from  cervix , the  neck.) 
Belonging  to  the  neck  ; as  cervical  nerves,  cervical 
muscles,  &c. 

Cervical  artery.  Arteria  cervicalis.  A branch  of 
the  subclavian. 

Cervical  vertebral.  The  seven  uppermost  of  the  ver- 
tebra;, which  form  the  spine.  See  Vertebra. 

Cervica'ria.  (From  ceroic,  the  neck ; so  named 
because  it  was  supposed  to  be  efficacious  in  disorders- 
and  ailments  of  the  throat  and  neck.)  The  herb  throat- 
wort. 

CE'RVIX.  ( Cervix , vicis.  f. ; quasi  cerebri  via; 
as  being  the  channel  of  the  spinal  marrow.)  1.  The 
neck.  That  part  of  the  body  which  is  between  the 
head  and  shoulders. 

2.  Applied  also  to  organs,  or  parts  which  have  some 
extent,  to  distinguish  their  parts  ; as  the  cervix  uteri , 
neck  of  the  uterus;  cervix  vesica,  neck  of  the  bladder, 
1 eck  of  a bone,  &c. 

Ckspititi/E  plants.  (From  cespes , a sod,  or  turf.) 
The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  Sauvages’  Methodus 
Foliornm,  consisting  of  plants  which  have  only  radical 
leaves  ; as  primrose,  &c. 

CESPITOSUS.  (From  cespes , a sod,  or  turf.)  A 
plant  is  so  called  which  produces  many  stems  from  one 
root,  thereby  forming  a close  thick  carpet  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth. 

Cespitosje  paludes.  Turf-bogs. 

Cestri'tes.  (From  KE^pov,  betony.)  Wine  im- 
pregnated with  betony. 

CE'STRUM.  (From  tce^pa,  a dart ; so  called  from 
the  shape  of  its  flowers,  which  resemble  a dart ; or  be- 
cause it  was  used  to  extract  the  broken  ends  of  darts 
from  wounds.)  See  Betonica  officinalis. 

CETA'CEUM.  Spermaceti.  See  Physeter  macro- 
cephalus. 

CETERACH.  (Blanchard  says  this  word  is  cor- 
rupted from  Pteryga , zs'jrjpvl,  q.  v.  as  peteryga,  cete- 
ryga,  and  ceterach.)  J5ee  Asplenium  ceterach. 

CETIC  ACID.  Acidum  ceticum.  The  name  given 
by  Chevreuil  to  a supposed  peculiar  principle  of  sper- 
maceti, which  he  has  lately  found  to  be  the  substance 
he  has  called  margarine , combined  with  a fatty  matter. 

CETINE.  The  name  given  by  Chevreuil  to  sper- 
maceti. See  Fat. 

CEVADIC  ACID.  By  the  action  of  potassa  on  the 
fat  matter  of  the  cevadilla,  a plant  that  comes  from 
Senegal,  called  by  the  French  petite  orge , there  is  ob- 
tained in  the  same  way  as  the  deiphinic  acid,  an  acid 
which  is  called  the  cevadic. 

CEVADATE.  A salt  formed  by  the  combination 
of  the  cevadic  acid,  with  earthy,  alkaline,  and  metallic 
bases. 

Cevadilla.  (Dim.  of  ceveda , barley.  Spanish.) 
See  Veratrum  sabatilla. 

Ceyenne  pepper.  See  Capsicum. 

CEYLANITE.  The  name  of  the  mineral  called 
pleonaste,  by  Haiiy,  which  comes  from  Ceylon,  com- 
monly in  round  pieces,  but  occasionally  in  crystals.  It 
is  of  an  indigo  blue  colour,  and  splendent  internally. 

CHAB  ASITE.  The  name  of  a mineral  found  in  the 
quarry  of  Alteberg,  near  Oberstein,  in  crystals,  the  pri- 
mitive form  of  which  is  nearly  a cube,  it  is  white,  or 
with  a tinge  of  rose  colour,  and  sometimes  transparent. 

Chacari  LL/E  cortex.  See  Croton  Cascarilla. 

CHAIROFO'LIUM.  See  Scandix. 

CHiEROPHY'LLUM.  (Xatpo^uXXov ; from 
to  rejoice,  and  QvWov,  a leaf;  so  called  from  the  abun- 
dance of  its  leaves.)  Chervil.  1.  The  name  of  a ge- 
nus of  plants  in  the  Linna;an  system.  Class,  Pentan- 
dria;  Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  some  plants.  See 
Scandix,  and  Charophyllum  sylvestre. 

Ch/erophyllum  sylvestre.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  Cicutaria,  or  bastard  hemlock.  Charophyllum ; 
cattle  lavi  striato ; geniculis  tumidiusculis,  of  Lin- 
ikeus.  It  is  often  mistaken  for  the  true  hemlock.  It 
may  with  great  propriety  be  banished  from  the  list  of 
officinals,  as  it  possesses  no  remarkable  property. 

Chze'ta.  (From  x«w>  to  be  diffused.)  An  obsolete 
name  of  the  human  hair. 

CHALA'SIS.  (From  xaXaw,  to  relax.)  Relaxa- 
tion. 

Chala'stica.  (From  xaAaw,  to  relax.)  Medicines 
which  relax. 


CHALA'ZION.  (From  xaXa^a,  a hailstone.)  Cha- 
lam;  Chalazium ; Qranado.  An  indolent  moveable 
tubercle  on  the  margin  of  the  eyelid,  like  a hail-stone. 
A species  of  hordeolum.  It  is  that  well-known  affec- 
tion of  the  eye,  called  a stye,  or  stian.  It  is  white, 
hard,  and  encysted,  and  diflers  from  the  crithe,  another 
species,  only  in  being  moveable.  Writers  mention  a 
division  of  Chalazion  into  scirrhous,  cancerous,  cystic, 
and  earthy. 

Cha'lbane.  KaXSavrj.  Galbanum. 

Chalca'nthum.  (From  xaX/cof,  brass,  and  avQog , a 
flower.)  Vitriol ; or  rather,  vitriol  calcined  red.  The 
flowers  of  brass. 

Chalcei'on.  A species  of  pimpinella. 

Chalcoi'deum  os.  The  os  cuneiforme  of  the  tar 
sus.  See  Cuneiform  bone. 

Chaleitis.  See  Colcothar. 

Chali  cratum.  (From  xaXtj,  an  old  word  that  sig- 
nifies pure  wine,  and  KEpavvvpi,  to  mix.)  Wine  mixed 
with  water. 

Chali'nos.  Chalinus.  That  part  of  the  cheeks, 
which,  on  each  side,  is  contiguous  to  the  angles  of  the 
mouth. 

•'CHALK.  A very  common  species  of  calcareous 
earth,  or  carbonate  of  lime,  of  a white  colour.  See 
Greta. 

Chalk,  black.  Drawing  slate,  found  in  primitive 
mountains,  and  used  in  crayon  drawing,  whence  its 
name. 

Chalk,  red.  A clay  coloured  with  oxide  of  iron. 

CHALK-STONE.  A name  given  to  the  concretions 
in  the  hands  and  feet  of  people  violently  afflicted  with 
the  gout,  from  their  resembling  chalk,  though  chemi- 
cally different.  Dr.  Wollaston  first  demonstrated  their 
true  composition  to  be  uric  acid  combined  with  ammo- 
nia, and  thus  explained  the  mysterious  pathological 
relation  between  gout  and  gravel. 

Gouty  concretions  are  soft  and  friable.  They  are 
insoluble  in  cold,  but  slightly  in  boiling  water.  An 
acid  being  added  to  this  solution,  seizes  the  soda,  and 
the  uric  acid  is  deposited  in  small  crystals.  These  con- 
cretions dissolve  readily  in  water  of  potassa.  An  arti- 
ficial compound  may  be  made  by  triturating  uric  acid 
and  soda  with  warm  water,  which  exactly  resembles 
gouty  concretions  in  its  chemical  constitution. 

CHALY'BEATE.  (Chalybeatus  ; chalybs,  from 
iron,  or  steel.)  Of  orbelonging  to  iron.  A term  given 
to  any  medicine  into  which  iron  enters;  as  chalybeate 
mixture,  pills,  waters,  &c. 

Chalybeate  water.  Any  mineral  water  which 
abounds  with  iron  ; such  as  the  water  of  Tunbridge, 
Spa,  Prymont,  Cheltenham,  Scarborough,  and  Hartlel ; 
and  many  others. 

[Chalybeate  waters  are  so  numerous  in  the  United 
States  as  to  attract  little  or  no  attention  unless  con- 
nected with  some  peculiarity  of  circumstance,  besides 
the  mere  solution  of  iron.  The  Ballston  and  Saratoga 
waters,  of  New-York,  although  they  contain  iron,  are 
not  ranked  among  the  chaiybeates,  having  other  and 
more  powerful  ingredients  in  their  composition.  Of 
the  pure  chalybeate  waters,  containing  nothing  but 
iron  in  solution,  those  most  resorted  to  for  health  and 
pleasure  are  the  Stafford  Springs,  in  Connecticut,  and 
Orange  and  Schooley’s  Mountain  Springs  in  New- 
Jersey.  The  Stafford  Springs  are  at  the  foot  of  a sand- 
stone ridge,  (old  red  sand-stone  formation  of  Werner.) 
Orange  Springs  are  in  the  same  sand-stone  formation, 
in  the  beautiful  town  of  Orange,  in  New-Jersey,  about 
20  miles  from  New-York.  There  is  an  excellent  house 
of  entertainment  at  the  springs,  and  there  is  a salubri- 
ous and  well-cultivated  country  surrounding  it.  Ad- 
jacent to  the  springs  is  a considerable  elevation,  from 
which  an  extensive  prospect  is  obtained.  The  city 
and  bay  of  New-York  are  plainly  visible,  with  other 
and  more  distant  prospects.  The  water  of  the  springs 
is  strongly  impregnated,  is  not  very  palatable,  and  is 
only  drunk  by  invalids,  whose  physicians  recommend 
them. 

Schooley’s  Mountain  Spring  is  about  60  miles  from 
New-York,  and  about  the  same  distance  from  Phila- 
delphia, and  is  resorted  to  in  summer  by  the  inhabit- 
ants of  both  cities,  and  other  places.  It  is  on  the  side 
of  a mountain  nearly  1500  feet  above  tide  water.  The 
water  runs  in  a constant  stream  from  the  crack  of  a 
rock  by  the  side  of  the  road  leading  down  a ravine  of 
the  mountain,  which  from  its  elevation  is  cool  and  sa- 
lubrious. On  the  top  of  the  mountain  is  an  extensive 

207 


CfiA  CHA 


plain,  crossed  by  good  roads.  There  are  several  pub- 
lic houses  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  spring.  The 
water  is  a simple  chalybeate,  without  being  aerated. 
The  iron  is  deposited  in  an  ochreous  sediment  as  the 
water  passes  over  the  rock.  The  mountain  appears 
to  be  a vast  deposite  of  iron  ore,  much  of  which  is 
magnetic,  affecting  the  surveyor’s  compass.  Loose 
specimens  of  magnet  are  occasionally  picked  up  on  the 
mountain.  A.] 

Chalybis  rubigo  preparata.  See  Ferri  subcar- 
bonas. 

CHA'LYBS.  (From  Chalybes , a people  in  Pontus, 
who  dug  iron  out  of  the  earth.)  Acies.  Steel.  The 
best,  hardest,  finest,  and  the  closest-grained  forged  ■ 
iron.  As  a medicine,  steel  differs  not  from  iron.  See 
Iron. 

Chalybs  tartarizatus.  See  Ferrurn  tartariza- 
tum. 

Chameba'lanus.  (From  on  the  ground, 

and  (iaXavos,  a nut.)  VVood  pea;  Earth  nut. 

CHAM^EBU'XUS.  (From  on  the  ground, 

and  zcvlos,  the  box-tree.)  The  dwarf  box-tree. 

CHAM^ECE'DRUS.  (From  xa/icu,  on  the  ground, 
and  KeSpos,  the  cedar-tree.)  Chamwcedrys.  A species 
of  dwarf  abrotanum. 

CHAIVLECl'SSUS.  (From  %a/rai,  on  the  ground, 
and  Kiccos,  ivy.)  Ground-ivy. 

CHAMiECLE'MA.  (From  xa/m‘>  on  1116  ground,  '• 
and  icXypa,  ivy.)  The  ground-ivy. 

Chamecrista.  The  Cassia  chamaecrista  of  Lin- 
naeus, a decoction  of  which  drank  liberally  is  said  to 
be  serviceable  against  the  poison  of  the  night-shade. 

CHAMrE' DRY'S.  (From  xatiaii  on  ^,e  ground, 
and  <5pes,  the  oak ; so  called  from  its  leaves  resem- 
bling those  of  the  oak.)  See  Teucrium  chamadrys 
Chamedrys  frutescens.  A name  for  teucrium. 
Chamedrys  incana  maritima.  See  Teucrium 
marum. 

Chamedrys  palustris.  See  Teucrium  scordium. 
Chamedrys  spuria.  See  Veronica  officinalis. 
Chamedrys  sylvestris.  Wild  germander.  The 
Veronica  chamoedrys. 

Chamele'a.  (From  xaJ“a:»  on  the  ground,  and 
eXata,  the  olive-tree.)  See  Daphne  alpina. 

CHAMASLAEA'GNUS.  (From  %upai,  on  the 
ground,  and  eXaiayvos,  the  wild  olive.)  See  Myrica 
gale. 

CHAMiE'LEON.  (From  \apai,  on  the  ground, 
and  Xeiov,  a lion,  i.  e.  dwarf  lion.)  1.  The  chamaeleon, 
an  animal  supposed  to  be  able  to  change  his  colour  at 
pleasure. 

2.  The  name  of  many  thistles,  so  named  from  the 
variety  and  uncertainty  of  their  colours. 

Chameleon  album.  See  Carlina  acaulis. 
Chameleon  verum.  See  Cnicus. 
CHAM^ELEU'CE.  (From  xahtah  on  the  ground, 
and  Xcvktt,  the  herb  colt’s-foot.)  See  Tussilago  far- 
J'ara. 

Chameli'num.  (From  on  the  ground,  and 

Xivov,  flax.)  Purging  flax.  See  Linum  catharticum. 

CHAJVLEME'LUM.  (From  xa/mb  on  the  ground, 
and  pyXov,  an  apple;  because  it  grows  upon  the 
ground,  and  has  the  smell  of  an  apple.)  See  Anthemis 
■nobilis. 

Chamemelum  canariense.  The  Chrysanthemum 
frutescens  of  Linnaeus. 

Chamemelum  chrysanthemum.  The  Buptlial- 
mum  germanicum  of  Linnaeus. 

Chamemelum  fcetidum.  The  Anthemis  catula  of 
Linnaeus. 

Chamemelum  nobile.  See  Anthemis  nobilis. 
Chamemelum  vulgare.  See  Matricaria  chamo- 
milla. 

CHARLE'MORUS.  ( Xapaipopca ; from  xaHah  on 
the  ground,  and  popta,  the  mulberry-tree.)  See  Rubus 
chameemorus. 

CHAMASPEU'CE.  (From  %a/zai,  on  the  ground, 
and  ttsvktJ)  the  pine-tree.)  See  Camphorosma  Mons- 
pclicnsis. 

CHAIVLE'PITYS.  ( Chamapitys , yos.  f. ; from 

Xa/xat,  the  ground,  and  zstrvs,  the  pine-tree.)  See  Teu- 
crium chain  apitys. 

Chamepitys  moschata.  The  French  ground  pine. 
See  Teucrium  iva. 

CIIAMAD'PLION.  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 
Chamera'phanus.  (From  x^LVLali  on  the  ground, 
and  paefravos,  the  radish.)  1.  The  upper  part  of  the 


root  of  apium,  according  to  P.  ^Egineta.  The  smalt- 

age,  or  parsley. 

2.  The  dwarf  radish. 

Chame  riphes.  The  Cham  cer  ops  humilis,  or  dwarf 
palm.  The  fruit  called  wild  dates,  are  adstringent. 

Ciiamerodode'ndron.  (From  Yapat,  on  the  ground, 
and  pooooevopov,  the  rose  laurel.)  The  Azaleea pontica 
ot  Linnaeus. 

Chamerubus.  (From  %apat,  on  the  ground,  and 
rubus,  the  bramble.)  See  Rubus  chameemorus. 

Chamesfa'rtium.  (From  x«*<at,  on  the  ground, 
and  ernapnov,  Spanish  broom.)  See  Genista  tinctoria. 

CHAMBER.  Camara.  The  space  between  the 
capsule  of  the  crystalline  lens  and  the  corner  of  the 
eye.  is  divided  by  the  iris  into  two  spaces,  called  cham- 
bers; the  space  before  the  iris  is  termed  the  anterior 
chamber ; and  that  behind  it,  the  posterior.  They  are 
filled  with  an  aqueous  fluid. 

CHAMBERLEN,  Hugh,  a native  of  London,  about 
the  middle  of  the  17th  century.  He  succeeded  his 
father  as  a practitioner  in  midwifery,  and  had  also  two 
brothers  in  the  same  profession.  They  invented  among 
them  an  instrument,  the  obstetric  forceps,  which  greatly 
facilitated  delivery  in  many  cases,  and  often  saved  the 
child : but  to  him  alone,  as  most  distinguished,  the 
merit  has  been  usually  aseribed.  In  1683,  he  publish- 
ed a translation  of  Mauriceau’s  Observations,  which 
was  much  sought  after.  The  instrument  procured 
him  great  celebrity  in  this,  as  w’ell  as  other  countries ; 
and,  with  successive  improvements  by  Smellie,  &c. 
still  continues  to  be  esteemed  one  of  the  most  valuable 
adjuvants  in  the  obstetric  art.  The  period  of  his  death 
is  not  ascertained. 

[Chamitk.  See  organic  relics.  A.} 

CHAMOMILE.  See  Anthemis  nobilis. 

Chamomile , stinking.  See  Anthemis  cotuta. 

CHAMOMILLA.  From  xaPa*>  on  the  ground, 
and  prjXov , an  apple.)  See  Anthemis  nobilis. 

Chamomilla  nostras.  See  Matricaria  Chamo* 
milla. 

Chamomilla  romana.  See  Anthemis. 

CHAMPIGNION.  See  Agaricus  pratensis. 

CHA'NCRE.  (French.  From  Kapztvo cancer.) 
A sore  which  arises  from  the  direct  application  of  the 
venereal  poison  to  any  part  of  the  body.  Of  course  it 
mostly  occurs  on  the  genitals.  Such  venereal  sores  as 
break  out  from  a general  contamination  of  the  system, 
in  consequence  of  absorption,  never  have  the  term 
chancre  applied  to  them. 

Channelled  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

Chaoma'ntia  signa.  So  Paracelsus  calls  those 
prognostics  that  are  taken  from  observations  of  the 
air ; and  the  skill  of  doing  this,  he  calls  Chaemancia. 

Chao'sda.  Paracelsus  uses  this  word  as  an  epithet 
for  the  plague. 

CHAPMAN,  Edmund,  was  born  about  the  end  of 
the  17th  century;  and,  after  becoming  properly  in- 
structed  as  a surgeon  and  accoucheur,  settled  in  Lon- 
don, and  soon  distinguished  himself  by  his  success  in 
difficult  labours.  His  plan  consisted  chiefly  in  turning 
the  child,  and  delivering  by  the  feet  when  any  part  but 
the  head  presented ; also  in  often  availing  himself  of 
the  forceps  of  Chamberlen,  much  improved  by  him- 
self, and  of  which  he  had  the  merit  of  first  giving  an 
account  to  the  public  in  his  treatise  on  Midwifery,  in 
1732.  He  also  ably  defended  the  cause  of  the  men- 
mid wives  against  the  attack  of  Douglas,  in  a small 
work,  in  1737. 

Cha'rabe.  An  Arabian  name  for  amber. 

Cha'radra.  (From  xa9acm{ai  to  excavate.)  The 
bowels,  or  sink  of  the  body. 

Charamam.  The  purging  hazel-nut. 

Charantia.  See  Momordica  elaterium. 

CHARCOAL.  When  vegetable  substances  are  ex- 
posed to  a strong  heat  in  the  apparatus  for  distillation, 
the  fixed  residue  is  called  charcoal.  For  general  pur- 
poses, wood  is  converted  into  charcoal  by  building  it 
up  in  a pyramidal  form,  covering  the  pile  with  clay  or 
earth,  and  leaving  a few  Mr  holes,  which  are  closed 
as  soon  as  the  mass  is  well  lighted  ; and  by  this  means 
the  combustion  is  carried  on  in  an  imperfect  manner. 

In  charring  Wood  it  has  been  conjectured,  that  a 
portion  of  it  is  sometimes  converted  into  a pyrophorus, 
and  that  the  explosions  that  happen  in  jiowder-milla 
are  sometimes  owing  to  this. 

Charcoal  is  made  on  the  great  scale,  by  igniting 
wood  in  iron  cylinders.  When  the  resulting  charcoal 


CHA 


CHE 


{s  to  be  used  in  the  manufacture  of  gunpowder,  it  is 
essential  that  the  last  portion  of  vinegar  and  tar  be 
suffered  to  escape,  and  that  the  reabsorption  of  the 
crude  vapours  be  prevented,  by  cutting  off-  the  commu- 
nication between  the  interior  of  the  cylinders  and  the 
apparatus  for  condensing  the  pyrolignous  acid,  when- 
ever the  fire  is  withdrawn  from  the  furnace.  If  this 
precaution  be  not  observed,  the  gunpowder  made  with 
the  charcoal  would  be  of  inferior  quality. 

In  the  third  volume  of  Tilloch’s  magazine,  we  have 
some  valuable  facts  on  charcoal,  by  Mr.  Mushet.  He 
justly  observes,  that  the  produce  of  charcoal  in  the 
small  way,  differs  from  that  on  the  large  scale,  in 
which  the  quantity  of  char  depends  more  upon  the 
hardness  and  compactness  of  the  texture  of  wood,  and 
the  skill  of  the  workman  in  managing  the  pyramid 
of  fagots,  than  on  the  absolute  quantity  of  carbon  it 
contains. 

Clement  and  Desormes  say,  that  wood  contains  one- 
half  its  weight  of  charcoal.  Proust  says,  that  good  pit- 
coals  afford  70,  75,  of  80  per  cent,  of  charcoal  or  coke ; 
from  which  only  two  or  three  parts  in  the  hundred  of 
ashes  remain  after  combustion. — Tilloch's  Mag.  vol. 
viii. 

Charcoal  is  black,  sonorous,  and  brittle,  and  in  gene- 
ral retains  the  figure  of  the  vegetable  it  was  obtained 
from.  If,  however,  the  vegetable  consist  for  the  most 
part  of  water  or  other  fluids,  these  in  their  extrication 
will  destroy  the  connexion  of  the  more  fixed  parts.  In 
this  case  the  quantity  of  charcoal  is  much  less  than  in 
the  former.  The  charcoal  of  oily  or  bituminous  sub- 
stances is  of  a light  pulverulent  form,  and  rises  in 
soot.  Tins  charcoal  of  oils  is  called  lamp-black.  A 
very  fine  kind  is  obtained  from  burning  alkoliol.  See 
Carbon . 

Cha'rdone.  The  artichoke. 

Charistolo'chia.  (From  joy,  and  Ao%ta, 

the  lochia ; so  named  from  its  supposed  usefulness  to 
women  in  childbirth.)  The  plant  mogwort.  See  ^3r- 
temisia  vulgaris. 

CHARLTON,  Walter,  was  born  in  Somerset- 
shire, 1619.  After  graduating  at  Oxford,  where  he 
distinguished  himself  by  his  learning,  he  was  appoint- 
ed physician  to  Charles  I.,  and  admitted  a fellow  of 
the  Royal  College  of  Physicians,  in  London.  He  had 
afterward  the  honour  of  attending  Charles  II.,  and 
was  one  of  the  first  members  of  the  Royal  Society. 
He  was  author  of  several  publications,  on  medical  and 
other  subjects;  the  former  of  which  contained  little 
original  matter,  but  had  the  merit  of  spreading  the 
knowledge  of  the  many  improvements  made  about 
that  period,  particularly  in  anatomy  and  physiology; 
the  principal  of  them  are  his  “ Exercitationes  Patholo- 
gies,” and  his  “Natural  History  of  Nutrition,  Life, 
and  Voluntary  Motion.”  In  1689,  he  was  chosen  pre- 
sident of  the  College,  and  held  that  office  two  years 
He  afterward  retired  to  Jersey,  and  died  in  1707. 

Cha'rmk.  (From  %atpw,  to  rejoice.)  Charmis.  A 
cordial  mentioned  by  Galen. 

Cha'rpie.  The  French.  For  scraped  linen,  or  lint. 

CHA'RTA.  (Chaldean.)  1.  Paper. 

2.  The  amnios,  or  interior  foetal  membrane,  was 
called  the  charta  virgineu , from  its  likeness  to  a piece 
of  fine  paper. 

Cha'rtreux,  poudre  de.  (So  called  because  it 
was  said  to  have  been  invented  by  some  friars  of  the 
Carthusian  order.)  A name  of  the  kermes  mineral,  or 
hydrosulphuret  of  antimony. 

Cha'sme.  (From  xatvw,  to  gape.)  Chasmus.  Os- 
citation,  or  gaping. 

CHASTE  TREE.  See  Agnus  castus. 

Ciia'te.  The  Cucumus  agyptia. 

[“CHAUNCEY,  Charles,  M.D.  second  President 
of  Harvard  College,  was  born  in  England  in  1589.  He 
had  his  grammar  education  at  Westminster,  and  was 
at  the  school  when  the  gunpowder  plot  was  to  have 
taken  effect,  and  must  have  perished  if  the  parliament- 
house  had  been  blown  up.  At  the  university  of  Cam- 
bridge he  commenced  Bachelor  of  Divinity,  and  took 
the  degree  of  M.D.  Being  intimately  acquainted  with 
Archbishop  Usher,  one  of  the  finest  scholars  in  Eu- 
rope, he  had  more  than  common  advantages  to  expand 
his  mind,  and  make  improvements  in  literature.  A 
more  learned  man  than  Mr.  Chauncey  was  not  to  be 
found  among  the  fathers  of  Now-England.  He  had 
been  chosen  Hebrew  professor  at  Cambridge,  by  the 
heads  of  both  houses,  and  exchanged  this  branch  of 

O 


instruction  to  oblige  Dr.  Williams,  Vice-Chancellor  of 
Jhe  university.  He  was  well  skilled  in  many  oriental 
languages,  but  especially  the  Hebrew,  which  he  knew 
by  very  close  study,  and  by  conversing  with  a Jew, 
who  resided  in  the  same  house.  He  was  also  an 
accurate  Greek  scholar,  and  was  made  professor  of 
this  language  when  he  left  the  other  professorship. 
This  uncommon  scholar  became  a preacher,  and  was 
settled  at  Ware.  He  displeased  archbishop  Laud,  by 
opposing  the  book  of  sports,  and  reflecting  upon  the 
discipline  of  the  church,  which  caused  him  to  emigrate 
to  Plymouth,  in  Massachusetts,  in  1638. 

President  Chauncey  is  said  to  have  been  an  eminent 
physician ; but  we  are  not  informed  to  what  extent  he 
devoted  himself  to  the  practice.  He  left  six  sons,  all 
of  whom  were  educated  at  Harvard  college,  and  were 
preachers.  Some  of  them  were  learned  divines.  Dr. 
Mather  says  they  were  all  eminent  physicians,  as  their 
father  was  before  them.”— -Tliach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

C/iay.  See  Oldenlandia  umbellata. 

Chaya.  See  Oldenlandia  umbellata. 

CHEEK-BONE.  See  Jugale  os. 

CHEESE.  Caseus.  Thecoagulumof  milk.  When 
prepared  from  rich  milk,  and  well  made,  it  is  very 
nutritious  in  small  quantities;  but  mostly  indigestible 
when  hard  and  ill  prepared,  especially  to  weak  sto- 
machs. If  any  vegetable  or  mineral  acid  be  mixed 
with  milk,  the  cheese  separates,  and,  if  assisted  by 
heat,  coagulates  into  a mass.  The  quantity  of  cheese 
is  less  when  a mineral  acid  is  used.  Neutral  salts, 
and  likewise  all  earthy  and  metallic  salts,  separate  the 
cheese  from  the  whey.  Sugar  and  gum-arabic  pro- 
duce the  same  effect.  Caustic  alkalies  will  dissolve 
the  curd  by  the  assistance  of  a boiling  heat,  and  acids 
occasion  a precipitation  again.  Vegetable  acids  have 
very  little  solvent  power  upon  curd.  This  accounts 
for  a greater  quantity  of  curd  being  obtained  when  a 
vegetable  acid  is  used.  But  what  answers  best  is  ren- 
net, which  is  made  by  macerating  in  water  a piece  of 
the  last  stomach  of  a calf,  salted  and  dried  for  this 
purpose. 

Scheele  observed,  that  cheese  has  a considerable  ana- 
logy to  albumen,  which  it  resembles  in  being  coagula- 
ble  by  fire  and  acids,  soluble  in  ammonia,  and  afford- 
ing the  same  products  by  distillation  or  treatment  with 
nitric  acid.  There  are,  however,  certain  differences 
between  them.  Rouelle  observed,  likewise,  a striking 
analogy  between  cheese  and  the  gluten  of  wheat,  and 
that  found  in  the  feculte  of  green  vegetables.  By 
kneading  the  gluten  of  wheat  with  a little  salt  and  a 
small  portion  of  a solution  of  starch,  he  gave  it  the 
taste,  smell,  and  unctuosity  of  cheese ; so  that  after  it 
had  been  kept  a certain  time,  it  was  not  to  be  distin- 
guished from  the  celebrated  Rochefort  cheese,  of  which 
it  had  all  the  pungency.  This  caseous  substance  from 
gluten,  as  weli  as  the  cheese  of  milk,  appears  to  con- 
tain acetate  of  ammonia,  after  it  has  been  kept  long 
enough  to  have  undergone  the  requisite  fermentation, 
as  may  be  proved  by  examining  it  with  sulphuric  acid, 
and  with  pota^sa.  The  pungency  of  strong  cheese, 
too,  is  destroyed  by  alkohol. 

In  the  11th  volume  of  Tilloch’s  Magazine,  there  is  an 
excellent  account  of  the  mode  of  making  Cheshire 
cheese,  taken  from  the  Agricultural  Report  of  the 
county.  “If  the  milk,”  says  the  reporter,  “be  set 
together  very  warm,  the  curd  will  be  firm ; in  this  case, 
the  usual  mode  is  to  take  a common  case-knife,  and 
make  incisions  across  it,  to  the  full  depth  of  the  knife’s 
blade,  at  the  distance  of  about  one  inch ; and  again 
crossways  in  the  same  manner,  the  incisions  intersect- 
ing each  other  at  right  angles.  The  whey  rising 
through  these  incisions  is  of  a fine  pale-green  colour. 
The  cheese-maker  and  two  assistants  then  proceed  to 
break  the  curd  : this  is  performed  by  their  repeatedly 
putting  their  hands  down  into  the  tub ; the  cheese- 
maker,  with  the  skimming-dish  in  one  hand,  breaking 
every  part  of  it  as  they  catch  it,  raising  the  curd  from 
the  bottom,  and  still  breaking  it.  This  part  of  the  bu- 
siness is  continued  till  the  whole  is  broken  uniformly 
small ; it  generally  takes  up  about  forty  minutes,  and 
the  curd  is  then  left  covered  over  with  a cloth  for  about 
half  an  hour,  to  subside.  If  the  milk  has  been  set  cool 
together,  the  curd  will  be  much  more  tender,  the  whey 
will  not  be  so  green,  but  rather  of  a milky  appearance. 

CHEILOCA'CE.  (From  xrtXoj,  a lip,  and  kukov, 
an  evil.)  A swelling  of  the  lips,  or  canker  in  the 
mouth. 


209 


CHE 


CHE 

Cheime'lton.  (From  %£t/xa,  winter.)  A chilblain. 
See  Pernio. 

CHEIRA'NTHUS.  (From  %£:tp,  a hand,  and  avOos, 
a flower  ; so  named  from  the  likeness  of  its  blossoms 
to  the  fingers  of  the  hand.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linneean  system.  Class,  Tetradijnamia ; 
Order,  Siliquosa.  The  wall-flower. 

Cheiranthus  cheiri.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  wall-flower.  JLcucoium  luteum : Viola  lutea. 
Common  yellow  wall-flower.  The  flowers  of  this 
plant,  Cheiranthus ; foliis  lanceolatis,  acutis,  glabris  ; 
ramis  angulatis ; caule  fruticoso , of  Limiceus,  are 
recommended  as  possessing  nervine  and  deobstruent 
virtues.  They  have  a moderately  strong,  pleasant 
smell,  and  a nauseous,  bitter,  somewhat  pungent 
taste. 

[Cheiranthodendron.  A tree  growing  in  Mexico, 
so  called  from  the  appearance  of  the  flower  represent- 
ing the  human  hand  and  fingers.  (From  x£tp,  a hand, 
avdos,  a flower,  and  SevSpov,  a tree.)  It  is  a large  tree, 
bearing  a flower  resembling  a human  hand.  The  part 
producing  this  resemblance  is  the  pistillum,  which 
rises  above  the  calyx,  and  is  divided  into  five  parts, 
analogous  to  the  thumb  and  fingers.  The  resemblance 
is  very  striking,  but  the’digits  are  sharp  and  pointed, 
more  like  claws. "'We  have  seen  preserijpd  specimens 
of  the  flowers  in  very  good  order.  A.] 

• CIIEIRA'PSIA.  (From  x^Pi  the  hand,  and  anro- 
uai , to  touch.)  The  act  of  scratching ; particularly 
the  scratching  one  hand  with  another,  as  in  the  itch. 

CHEI'RI.  ( Cheiri , Arabian.)  See  Cheiranthus 

Cheiri. 

CHEIRIA'TER.  (From  %£tp,  the  hand,  and  ta^pos, 
a physician.)  A surgeon  whose  office  it  is  to  remove 
maladies  by  operations  of  the  hand. 

CHEIRI  SMA.  (From  %£ipi£owai,  to  labour  with 
the  hand.)  Handling.  Also  a manual  operation. 

CHEIRI'XIS.  (From  xElPllopai,  to  labour  with 
the  hand.)  The  art  of  surgery. 

CHEIRONO'MIA.  (From  %£jpovop£w,  to  exercise 
with  the  hands.)  An  exercise  mentioned  by  Hippo- 
crates, which  consisted  of  gesticulations  with  the 
hands,  like  our  dumb-bells. 

CHE  LA.  (X17X17,  forceps;  from  %£o>,  to  take.) 

1.  A forked  probe,  for  drawing  a polypus  out  of  the 
nose. 

2.  A fissure  in  the  feet,  or  other  places. 

3.  The  claw  of  crabs,  which  lays  hold  like  forceps. 

Chelae  cancrorum.  See  Cancer. 

Cheli'don.  The  bend  of  the  arm. 

CHELIDONIUM.  (From  xfXr^ojv,  the  swallow. 

It  is  so  named  from  an  opinion,  that  it  was  pointed  out 
as  useful  for  the  eyes  by  swallows,  who  are  said  to 
open  the  eyes  of  their  young  by  it ; or  because  it  blos- 
soms about  the  time  when  swallows  appear.)  Celan- 
dine. A genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Polyandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  There  is  only 
one  species  used  in  medicine,  and  that  rarely. 

Chelidonium  majus.  Papaver  corniculatum,  lu- 
teum; Curcum.  Tetterwort,  and  great  celandine. 
The  herb  and  root  of  this  plant,  Chelidonium — pedun- 
culis  umbellatus,  of  Linnaeus,  have  a faint,  unplea- 
sant smell,  and  a bitter,  acrid,  durable  taste,  which  is 
stronger  in  the  roots  than  the  leaves.  They  are  ape- 
rient and  diuretic,  and  recommended  in  icterus,  when 
not  accompanied  with  inflammatory  symptoms.  The 
chelidonium  should  be  administered  with  caution,  as  it 
is  liable  to  irritate  the  stomach  and  bowels.  Of  the 
dried  root,  from  3 ss  to  3j  is  a dose;  of  the  fresh 
root,  infused  in  water,  or  wine,  the  dose  may  be  about 
| ss.  The  decoction  of  the  fresh  root  is  used  iii  dropsy, 
cachexy,  and  cutaneous  complaints.  The  fresh  juice 
is  used  to  destroy  warts,  and  films  in  the  eyes ; but, 
for  the  latter  purpose,  it  is  diluted  with  milk. 

Chelidonium  minus.  The  pill-wort.  See  Ranun- 
culus ficaria. 

CHELO'NE.  Xehwvy.  1 • The  tortoise. 

2.  An  instrument  for  extending  a limb,  and  so  called 
because,  in  its  slow  motions,  it  represents  a tortoise. 
This  instrument  is  mentioned  in  Oribasius. 

Chelo'nion.  (From  x^wvjj,  the  tortoise  ; so  called 
from  its  resemblance  to  the  shell  of  a tortoise.)  A 
hump  or  gibbosity  in  the  back. 

CHELTENHAM.  The  name  of  a village,  now  be- 
come a large  and  populous  town,  in  Gloucestershire. 
It  is  celebrated  for  its  purging  waters,  the  reputation 
of  which  is  daily  increasing,  as  it  possesses  both  a sa- 


line and  chalybeate  principle.  When  first  drawn,  it  Is 
clear  and  colourless,  but  somewhat  brisk  ; has  a sa- 
line, bitterish,  chalybeate  taste.  It  does  not  keep,  nor 
bear  transporting  to  any  distance  ; the  chalybeate  part 
being  lost  by  precipitation  of  the  iron,  and  in  the  open 
air  it  even  turns  foetid.  The  salts,  however,  remain. 
Its  heat,  in  summer,  was  from  50°  to  55°  or  59°,  when 
the  medium  heat  of  the  atmosphere  was  nearly  15° 
higher.  On  evaporation,  it  is  found  to  contain  a cal- 
careous earth,  mixed  with  ochre  and  a purging  salt. 
A general  survey  of  the  component  parts  of  this  wa- 
ter, according  to  a variety  of  analyses,  shows  that  it  is 
decidedly  saline,  and  contains  much  more  salt  than 
most  mineral  waters.  By  far  the  greater  part  of  the 
salts  are  of  a purgative  kind,  and  therefore  an  action 
on  the  bowels  is  a constant  effect,  notwithstanding  the 
considerable  quantity  of  selenite  and  earthy  carbonates, 
which  may  be  supposed  to  have  a contrary  tendency. 
Cheltenham  water  is,  besides,  one  of  the  strongest  cha- 
lybeates  we  are  acquainted  with.  The  iron  is  sus- 
pended entirely  by  the  carbonic  acid,  of  which  gas  the- 
water  contains  about  an  eighth  of  its  bulk ; but,  from 
the  abundance  of  earthy  carbonates,  and  oxide  of  iron, 
not  much  of  it  is  uncombined.  It  has,  besides,  a 
slight  impregnation  of  sulphur,  but  so  little  as  to  be 
scarcely  appreciable,  except  by  very  delicate  tests. 
The  sensible  effects  produced  by  this  water,  are  gene- 
rally, on  first  taking  it,  a degree  of  drowsiness,  and 
sometimes  headache,  but  whiah  soon  go  off  spontane- 
ously, even  previous  to  the  operation  on  the  bowels. 
A moderate  dose  acts  powerfully,  and  speedily,  as  a 
cathartic,  without  occasioning  griping,  or  leaving  that 
faintness  and  languor  which  often  follow  the  action  of 
the  rougher  cathartics.  It  is  principally  on  this  ac- 
count, but  partly  too  from  the  salutary  operation  of 
the  chalybeate,  and  perhaps  the  carbonic  acid,  that  the 
Cheltenham  water  may  be,  in  most  cases,  persevered 
in,  for  a considerable  length  of  time,  uninterruptedly, 
without  producing  any  inconvenience  to  the  body;  and 
during  its  use,  the  appetite  will  be  improved,  the  di- 
gestive organs  strengthened,  and  the  whole  constitu- 
tion invigorated.  A dose  of  this  water,  too  small  to 
operate  directly  on  the  bowels,  will  generally  deter- 
mine pretty  powerfully  to  the  kidneys.  As  a purge, 
this  water  is  drank  from  one  to  three  pints ; in  general, 
from  naif  a pint  to  a quart  is  sufficient.  Half  a pint 
will  contain  half  a drachm  of  neutral  purging  salts, 
four  grains  of  earthy  carbonates,  and  selenite,  about 
one-third  of  a grain  of  oxide  of  iron ; together  with  an 
ounce  in  bulk  of  carbonic  acid  and  half  an  ounce  of 
common  air,  with  a little  sulphuretted  hydrogen. 
Cheltenham  water  is  used,  with  considerable  benefit, 
in  a number  of  diseases,  especially  of  the  chronic  kind, 
and  particularly  those  called  bilious : hence  it  has 
been  found  of  essential  service  in  the  cure  of  glandqlar 
obstructions,  and  especially  those  that  affect  the  liver, 
and  the  other  organs  connected  with  the  functions  of 
the  alimentary  canal.  Persons  who  have  injured  their 
biliary  organs,  by  a long  residence  in  hot  climates, 
and  who  are  suffering  under  the  symptoms,  either  of 
excess  of  bile  or  deficiency  of  bile,  and  an  irregularity 
in  its  secretion,  receive  remarkable  benefit  from  a 
course  of  this  water,  judiciously  exhibited.  Its  use 
may  be  here  continued,  even  during  a considerable 
degree  of  debility  ; and  from  the  great  determination 
to  the  bowels,  it  may  be  employed  with  advantage  to 
check  the  incipient  symptoms  of  dropsy,  and  general 
anasarca,  which  so  often  proceed  from  an  obstruction 
of  the  liver.  In  scrofulous  affections,  the  sea  lias  the 
decided  preference;  in  painful  affections  of  the  skin, 
called  scorbutic  eruptions,  which  make  their  appear- 
ance at  stated  intervals,  producing  a copious  discharge 
of  lymph,  and  an  abundant  desquamation,  in  common 
with  other  saline  purgative  springs,  this  is  found  to 
bring  relief ; but  it  requires  to  be  persevered  in  for  a 
considerable  time,  keeping  up  a constant  determina- 
tion to  the  bowels,  and  making  use  of  warm  bathing. 
The  season  for  drinking  the  Cheltenham  water  is 
during  the  whole  of  the  summer  months. 

CIIE'LYS.  (XrXus,  a shell.)  The  breast  is  so 
called,  as  resembling,  in  shape  and  office,  the  shell  of 
some  fishes. 

Chely'scion.  (From  x^vs,  the  breast.)  A dry, 
short  cough,  in  which  the  muscles  of  the  breast  are 
very  sore. 

Che'ma.  A measure  mentioned  by  the  Greek  phy- 
sicians, supposed  to  contain  two  small  spoonfuls. 


CHE 


CHE 


%. 

C'HErMlA.  See  Chemistry. 

CHE'MICAL.  Of  or  belonging  to  chemistry. 

CHEMISTRY.  (Xv/ua,  and  sometimes  xWlf- : 
Chamia,  from  charna,  to  burn,  Arab,  this  science  being 
the  examination  of  all  substances  by  fire.)  Chemia ; 
Chimin ; Chymia.  The  learned  are  not  yet  agreed  as 
to  the  most  proper  definition  of  chemistry.  Boerhaave 
seems  to  have  ranked  it  among  the  arts.  According  to 
Macquer,  it  is  a science,  the  object  of  which  is  to  dis- 
cover the  nature  and  properties  of  all  bodies  by  their 
analyses  and  combinations.  Dr.  Black  says,  it  is  a 
science  which  teaches,  by  experiments,  the  effects  of 
heat  and  mixture  on  bodies ; and  F ourcroy  defines  it 
a science  which  teaches  the  mutual  actions  of  all  na- 
tural bodies  on  each  other.  “Chemistry,”  says  Jac- 
quin,  “is  that  branch  of  natural  philosophy  which 
unfolds  the  nature  of  all  material  bodies,  determines 
the  number  and  properties  of  their  component  parts, 
and  teaches  us  how  those  parts  are  united,  and  by  what 
means  they  may  be  separated  and  recombined.”  Mr. 
lleron  defines  it,  “That  science  which  investigates 
and  explains  the  laws  of  that  attraction  which  takes 
place  between  the  minute  component  particles  of  na- 
tural bodies.”  Dr.  Ure’s  definition  is,  “the  science 
which  investigates  the  composition  of  material  sub- 
stances, and  the  permanent  changes  of  constitution 
which  their  mutual  actions  produce.”  The  objects  to 
which  the  attention  of  chemists  is  directed,  compre- 
hend the  whole  of  the  substances  that  compose  the 
globe. 

CHEMO'SIS.  (From  xcuV(ai  to  SaPe ; because  it 
gives  the  appearance  of  a gap,  or  aperture.)  Inflam- 
mation of  the  conjunctive  membrane  of  the  eye,  in 
which  the  white  of  the  eye  is  distended  with  blood, 
and  elevated  above  the  margin  of  the  transparent  cor- 
nea. In  Cullen’s  Nosology,  it  is  a variety  of  the 
ophthalmia  meinbranarum,  or  an  inflammation  of  the 
membranes  of  the  eye. 

Chenopodio-morus.  (From  chenopodium  and  mo- 
rus,  the  mulberry  ; so  called  because  it  is  a sort  of 
chenopodium,  with  leaves  like  a mulberry.)  The 
herb  mulberry-blight.  The  Blitum  capitatum  of  Lin- 
naeus. 

CHENOPO  DIUM.  (From  %»?v,  a goose,  and  zsov j, 
a foot ; so  called  from  its  supposed  resemblance  to  a 
goose’s  foot.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digy- 
nia.  The  herb  chenopody : goose’s  foot. 

Chenopodium  ambrosioides.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  Mexican  tea-plant.  Botrys  Mexicana; 
Botrys  ambrosioides  Mexicana;  Chenopodium  Mexi- 
canum;  Botrys  Americana.  Mexico  tea;  Spanish 
tea  and  Artemisian  botrys.  Chenopodium— foliis  lan- 
ceolatis  dentatis,  racemis  foliatis  simplicibus,  of  Lin- 
naeus. A decoction  of  this  plant  is  recommended  in 
paralytic  cases.  Formerly  the  infusion  was  drank  in- 
stead of  Chinese  tea. 

Chenopodium  anthelminticum.  The  seeds  of 
this  plant,  Chenopodium— foliis  ovato-oblongis  den- 
tatis, racemis  aphyllis,  of  Linnaeus,  though  in  great 
esteem  in  America,  for  the  cure  of  worms,  are  seldom 
exhibited  in  this  country.  They  are  powdered  and 
made  into  an  electuary,  with  any  proper  syrup,  or 
conserve. 

[“  The  Chenopodium  anthelminticum,  is  a native 
plant,  found  in  the  middle  and  southern  states,  usually 
known  by  the  names  of  wormseed  and  Jerusalem  oak. 
The  name  wormseed  is  applied  in  Europe  to  the  Ar- 
temisia santonica , a very  different  plant.  The  cheno- 
podium  is  accounted  a good  vermifuge,  especially  in 
the  lumbrici  of  children.  The  expressed  juice  of  the 
whole  plant  is  sometimes  given  in  the  dose  of  a table- 
spoonful to  a child  two  or  three  years  old.  More  fre- 
quently the  powdered  seeds  are  employed,  mixed  with 
treacle  or  syrup.  The  seeds  yield  a volatile  oil  on  dis- 
tillation, which  is  prescribed  in  doses  of  six  or  eight 
drops,  in  sugar  or  some  suitable  vehicle.” — Big.  Mat. 
Med.  A.] 

Chenopodium  bonus  IIenricus.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  English  mercury.  Bonus  Henricus ; Tota 
bona ; Lapathum  unctuosum ; Chenopodium  ; Cheno- 
podium— foliis  triangularis agittatis,  integerrimis, 
spicis  compositis  aphyllis  axillaribus,  of  Linnaeus. 
The  plant  to  which  these  names  are  given,  is  a ntnive 
of  this  country,  and  common  in  waste  grounds  from 
June  to  August.  It  differs  little  from  spinach  when 
cultivated  ; and  in  many  places  the  young  shoots  are 


eaten  in  spring  like  asparagus.  The  leaves  are  ac- 
counted emollient,  and  have  been  made  an  ingredient 
in  decoctions  for  clysters.  They  are  applied  by  the 
common  people  to  flesh  wounds  and  sores  under  the 
notion  of  drawing  and  healing. 

Chenopodium  botrys.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Jerusalem  oak.  Botrys  vulgaris;  Botrys;  Am- 
brosia; Artemisia  chenopodium;  Atriplex  odorata; 
Atriplex  suaveolens ; Chenopodium— foliis  oblongis 
sinuatis,  racemis  nudis  multifidis,  of  Linnaeus.  This 
plant  was  formerly  administered  in  form  of  decoction 
in  some  diseases  of  the  chest ; as  humoral  asthma, 
coughs,  and  catarrhs.  It  is  now  fallen  into  disuse. 

Chenopodium  fcetidum.  See  Chenopodium  vul- 
varia. 

Chenopodium  vulvaria.  The  systematic  name 
for  the  stinking  orach.  Atriplex  feetida ; Atriplex 
olida ; Vulvaria;  Garosmum:  Raphex;  Chenopodium 
fcetidum ; Blitum  fcetidum.  The  very  foetid  smell  of 
this  plant,  Chenopodium — foliis  integerrimis  rhombeo 
ovatis,Jloribus  conglomeratis  axillaribus , of  Linnaeus, 
induced  physicians  to  exhibit  it  in  hysterical  diseases. 
It  is  now  superseded  by  more  active  preparations* 
Messrs.  Chevalier  and  Lasseigne  have  detected  am- 
monia in  this  plant  in  an  uncombined  state,  which  is 
probably  the  vehicle  of  the  remarkably  nauseous  odour 
which  it  exhales,  strongly  resembling  that  of  putrid 
fish.  When  the  plant  is  bruised  with  water,  and  the 
liquor  expressed  and  afterward  distilled,  we  procure 
a fluid  which  contains  the  subcarbonate  of  ammonia, 
and  an  oily  matter,  which  gives  the  fluid  a milky  ap- 
pearance. If  the  expressed  juice  of  the  chenopodium 
be  evaporated  to  the  consistence  of  an  extract,  it  is 
found  to  be  alkaline;  there  seems  to  be  acetic  acid  in 
it.  • Its  basis  is  said  to  be  of  an  albuminous  nature.  It 
is  stated  also  to  contain  a small  quantity  of  the  sub- 
stance which  the  French  call  osmazome,  a little  of  an 
aromatic  resin,  and  a bitter  matter,  soluble  both  in 
alkohol  and  water,  as  well  as  several  saline  bodies. 

Che'ras.  (From  %£w,  to  pour  out.)  An  obsolete 
name  of  struma,  or  scrofula. 

Cherefo'lium.  See  Scandix  cerefolium. 

CHE'RMES.  (Arabian.)  A small  berry,  full  of 
insects  like  worms : the  juice  of  which  was  formerly 
made  into  a confection,  called  confectio  alkermes, 
which  has  been  long  disused.  The  worm  itself  was 
also  so  called. 

Ciiermes  mineralis.  Hydro-sulphuret  of  anti- 
mony. 

Cherni'bium.  Chernibion.  In  Hippocrates  it  sig- 
nifies a urinal. 

Chero'nia.  (From  Xeipmv,  the  Centaur.)  See 
Chironia  centaurium. 

CHERRY.  See  Cerasa  nigra,  and  Cerasa  rubra. 

Cherry  bay.  The  Lauro-cerasus. 

Cherry-laurel.  The  Lauro-cerasus. 

Cherry , winter.  The  Alkekengi. 

CHERVI'LLUM.  See  Scandix  cerefolium.' 

CHESELDEN,  William,  was  born  in  Leicester- 
shire, 1688.  After  serving  his  apprenticeship  to  a surj 
geon  at  Leicester,  he  came  to  study  at  St.  Thomas’s 
hospital,  to  which  he  afterward  became  surgeon.  He 
began  to  give  lectures  at  the  early  age  of  22,  and  about 
the  same  period  was  elected  Fellow  of  the  Royal  So- 
ciety. Two  years  after,  he  published  his  “ Anatomical 
Description  of  the  Human  Body,”  with  some  select 
cases  in  surgery,  which  passed  through  several  edi- 
tions ; in  one  of  which  he  detailed  his  success  in  the 
operation  of  lithotomy  by  the  lateral  method,  as  it  is 
termed,  which  he  found  not  so  liable  to  failure  as  the 
high  operation.  He  also  gave,  in  the  Philosophical 
Transactions,  an  interesting  account  of  a grown  per- 
son whom  he  restored  to  sight  after  being  blind  from 
infancy;  and  furnished  some  other  contributions  to 
the  same  work.  Besides  being  honourably  distin- 
guished by  some  of  the  French  societies,  he  was  ap- 
pointed principal  surgeon  to  Queen  Caroline,  to  whom 
he  dedicated  his  splendid  work  on  the  bones  in  1733. 
He  was  four  years  after  chosen  surgeon  to  Chelsea 
Hospital,  and  retired  from  public  practice,  and  lived  to 
the  age  of  64. 

CHESNUT.  See  JEsculus  and  Fagus. 

Chesnut , horse.  See  .JEsculus  Hippocastanum. 

Chesnut,  sweet.  See  Fagus  castanea. 

Cheu'sis.  (From  %ew,  to  pour  out.)  Liquation. 
Infusion. 

Ciieva'stre.  A double-headed  roller,  applied  by 

211 


CHI 


CHI 


its  middle  below  the  chin ; then  running  on  each  side,  ] 
it  is  crossed  on  the  top  of  the  head ; then  passing  to 
the  nape  of  the  neck,  is  there  crossed : it  then  passes 
under  the  chin,  where  crossing,  it  is  carried  to  the  top 
of  the  head,  &c.  until  it  is  all  taken  up. 

CHEYNE,  George,  was  born  in  Scotland,  1670. 
After  graduating  in  medicine,  he  came  to  London,  at 
the  age  of  30,  and  published  a Theory  of  Fevers,  and 
five  years  after  a work  on  Fluxions,  which  procured 
his  election  into  the  Royal  Society ; and  this  was  soon 
followed  by  his  “Philosophical  Principles  of  Natural 
Religion.”  Being  naturally  inclined  to  corpulency, 
and  indulging  in  free  living,  he  became,  when  only  of 
a middle  age,  perfectly  unwieldy,  with  other  marks  of 
an  impaired  constitution ; against  which,  finding  medi- 
cines of  little  avail,  he  determined  to  abstain  from  all 
fermented  liquors,  and  confine  himself  to  a milk  and 
vegetable  diet.  This  plan  speedily  relieved  the  most 
distressing  symptoms,  which  led  him  after  a while  to 
resume  his  luxuries ; but  finding  his  complaints  pre- 
sently returning,  he  resorted  again  to  the  abstemious 
plan  ; by  a steady  perseverance  in  which  lie  retained 
a tolerable  share  of  health  to  the  advanced  age  of  72. 
in  1722,  in  a treatise  on  the  gout,  &c.  he  first  incul- 
cated this  plan ; and  two  years  after  greatly  enlarge^ 
on  the  same  subject,  in  his  celebrated  “Essay  on 
Health  and  Long  Life.”.  His  “English  Malady,  or 
Treatise  on  Nervous  Diseases,”  which  he  regarded  as 
especially  prevalent  in  this  country,  a very  popular 
work,  published  1733,  contains  a candid  and  judicious 
narrative  of  his  own  case. 

CHEZANAN'CE.  (From  xegw,  to  go  to  stool,  and 
avayurj , necessity.)  1.  Any  thing  that  creates  a ne- 
cessity to  go  to  stool. 

2.  In  P.  yEgineta,  it  is  the  name  of  an  ointment, 
with  which  the  anus  is  to  be  rubbed  for  promoting 
stools. 

CHI' A.  (From  Xiog,  an  island  where  they  were 

formerly  propagated.)  1.  A sweet  fig  of  the  island 
of  Cyprus,  Chio,  or  Scin. 

2.  An  earth  from  the  island  of  Chio,  formerly  used 
in  fevers. 

3.  A species  of  turpentine.  See  Pistacia  terebin- 
thus. 

Chi'acus.  (From  Xiog,  the  island  of  Scio.)  An 
epithet  of  a collyrium,  the  chief  ingredient  of  which 
was  wine  of  Chios. 

Chi' adits.  In  Paracelsus  it  signifies  the  same  as 
furunculus. 

Chian  turpentine.  See  Pistacia  terebinthus. 

Chia'smus.  (From  to  form  like  the  letter 

X,  chi.)  The  name  of  a bandage,  the  shape  of  which 
is  like  the  Greek  letter  X,  chi. 

CIIIASTOLITE.  The  name  of  a mineral  found  in 
Britariy  and  Spain,  somewhat  like  steatite. 

Chia  stos.  The  name  of  a crucial  bandage  in 
Oribasius  ; so  called  from  its  resembling  the  letter  X, 
chi. 

Chia'strk.  The  name  of  a bandage  for  the  tempo- 
ral artery.  It  is  a double-headed  roller,  the  middle  of 
which  is  applied  to  the  side  of  the  head,  opposite  to 
that  in  which  the  artery  is  opened,  and,  when  brought 
round  to  the  part  affected,  it  is  crossed  upon  the  com- 
press that  is  laid  upon  the  wound,  and  then,  the  con- 
tinuation is  over  the  coronal  suture,  and  under  the 
chin ; then  crossing  on  the  compress,  the  course  is,  as 
at  the  first,  round  the  head,  &c.  till  the  whole  roller  is 
taken  up. 

Chi'bou.  A spurious  species  of  gum-elemi,  spoken 
of  by  the  faculty  of  Paris,  but  not  known  in  England. 

Chichi'na.  Contracted  from  China  China;.  See 
Cinchona. 

CHICKEN.  The  young  of  the  gallinaceous  order 
of  birds,  especially  of  the  domestic  fowl.  See  Pha- 
sianus  gallus. 

CHICKEN  POX.  See  Varicella. 

CHICKWEED.  See  Jilsinc  media. 

' CIIICOYNEAU,  Francis,  was  born  at  Montpelier 
in  1672,  the  second  son  of  a professor  there,  who  be- 
coming blind,  he  was  appointed  to  discharge  his  du- 
ties, after  taking  his  degrees  in  medicine.  Having  ac- 
quitted himself  very  creditably,  he  was  deputed  with 
other  physicians  to  Marseilles  in  1720,  to  devise  mea- 
sures for  arresting  the  progress  of  the  plague,  which 
in  the  end  almost  depopulated  that  city.  The  zeal 
which  he  evinced  on  that  occasion  was  rewarded  by 
u pension  ; and  on  the  death  of  his  father- in  law,  M. 

212 


Chirac,  in  1731,  he  was  appointed  to  succeed  him  aa 
first  physician  to  the  king ; and  received  also  other 
honours  previously  to  his  death  in  1752.  He  published 
in  1721,  in  conjunction  with  the  other  physicians,  an 
account  of  the.  plague  at  Marseilles,  in  which  the  opi- 
nion is  advanced,  that  the  disease  was  not  contagious : 
and  having  received  orders  from  the  king  to  collect  ali 
the  observations  that  had  been  made  concerning  that 
disease,  he  drew  up  an  enlarged  treatise  with  much 
candour,  and  containing  a number  of  useful  facts, 
which  was  made  public  in  1744. 

[Chigoe,  or  gigger.  A small  insect  so  called  in  the 
West  India  islands,  infesting  the  feet  of  those  who  go 
barefoot,  and  particularly  the  negroes.  It  is  a very 
minute  insect,  and,  when  magnified,  has  very  much  the 
appearance  of  a flea.  It  penetrates  the  skin  of  the 
feet  without  producing  pain,  and  there  forms  its  nidus. 
As  it  increases  in  growth  in  its  new  situation,  it  pro- 
duces little  swellings  and  intolerable  itching.  The  fe- 
male negroes  carefully  extract  them  with  a needle. 
When  they  are  not  extracted,  the  parent  deposites  its 
eggs,  and  as  these  hatch,  the  irritation  causes  increased 
swellings  and  ulceration,  which  sometimes  cause  the 
loss  of  limbs,  and  even  death  to  the  sufferers.  Poul- 
tices of  Indian  meal  are  the  only  applications  to 
heal  the  ulcerations  and  abscesses  caused  by  the  chi- 
goes. A.] 

CHILBLAIN.  See  Pernio. 

[“  CHILDS,  Timothy,  M.D.,  was  born  at  Deerfield, 
Massachusetts,  February,  1748.  He  was  entered  as  a 
member  of  Harvard  College  in  1764,  but  was  under 
the  necessity  of  taking  a dismission  at  the  close  of  his 
junior  year,  by  the  failure  of  the  funds  on  which  he 
had  relied  to  carry  him  through  the  regular  course  of 
that  seminary.  From  Cambridge  he  returned  to  Deer- 
field, where  he  studied  physic  and  surgery  with  Dr. 
Williams;  and  from  whence,  in  1771,  at  the  age  of 
twenty-three,  he  removed  to  practise  in  Pittsfield. 

An  ardent  and  decided  friend  of  civil  liberty,  he  took 
a deep  interest  in  those  great  political  questions  which 
at  that  period  were  agitated  between  Great  Britain  and 
her  American  colonies.  No  young  man,  perhaps,  was 
more  zealously  opposed  to  the  arbitrary  encroachment 
of  the  British  parliament  than  Dr.  Childs,  and  as  a 
proof  of  the  confidence  reposed  in  him  by  the  fathers 
of  the  town,  it  need  only  be  mentioned  that  in  1774, 
when  the  crisis  of  open  hostility  was  approaching,  he 
was  appointed  chairman  of  a committee  to  draw  a pe- 
tition to  his  Majesty’s  Justices  of  Common  Pleas  in 
the  county  of  Berkshire,  remonstrating  against  certain 
acts  of  parliament  which  had  just  been  promulgated, 
and  praying  them  to  stay  all  proceedings  till  those  un- 
just and* oppressive  acts  should  be  repealed. 

In  the  same  year,  (1774,)  Dr.  Childs  took  a commis- 
sion in  a company  of  minute-men,  which,  in  compli- 
ance with  a recommendation  from  the  convention  of 
the  New-England  states,  was  organized  in  that  town. 
When  the  news  of  the  battle  of  Lexington  in  1775 
was  received,  he  marched  with  his  company  to  Bos- 
ton, where  he  was  soon  after  appointed  a surgeon  of 
Colonel  Patterson’s  regiment.  From  Boston  he  went 
with  the  army  to  New- York,  and  from  thence  accom- 
panied the  expedition  to  Montreal.  In  1777  he  left 
tire  army,  and  resumed  his  practice  in  the  town  of 
Pittsfield,  and  continued  in  it  till  less  than  a week  be- 
fore his  death,  at  the  advanced  age  of  seventy-three. 

In  1792,  Dr.  Childs  was  elected  a representative  to 
the  General  Court,  and  for  several  years  received  the 
same  pledge  of  public  confidence.  He  also  held  a scat 
in  the  senate  for  a number  of  years,  by  the  suffrages 
of  the  county  in  which  he  lived  and  died.  But  it  was 
in  his  profession  he  was  most  highly  honoured  and 
extensively  useful.  He  was  early  elected  a member 
of  the  Massachusetts  Medical  Society,  and  held  the 
office  of  counsellor  of  that  society  to  the  time  of  his 
death.  In  the  year  1811,  the  University  of  Cambridge 
conferred  on  him  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Medicine. 
When  the  district  society,  composed  of  the  fellows  of 
the  state  society,  was  established  in  the  county  in 
which  he  lived,  he  was  appointed  censor,  and  elected 
to  the  office  of  president. 

As  a practitioner,  Dr.  Childs  stood  high  in  public  es- 
timation, both  at  home  and  abroad.  For  more  than 
thirty  years  he  was  the  only  physician  of  note  in  the 
town  ; and  this  single  fact  strongly  testifies  to  the  un- 
common estimation  in  which  he  was  held  by  those 
who  were  most  competent  to  judge  of  his  professional 


CIII 


CliL 


skill  and  success.  He  died  on  the  25th  Feb.  1821.  as 
he  lifred,  honoured,  respected,  and  lamented.”—  Th. 
Med.  Biog.  A.] 

Chi' li,  kalsamum  de.  Salmon  speaks,  but  with- 
out any  proof,  of  its  being  brought  from  Chili.  The  Bar- 
badoes  tar,  in  which  are  mixed  a few  drops  of  the  oil 
of  aniseed,  is  usually  sold  for  it. 

Chiliody'namon.  (From  xtAtot,  a thousand,  and 
ivvapis,  virtue.)  In  Dioscorides,  this  name  is  given 
on  account  of  its  many  virtues.  An  epithet  of  the 
herb  Polemonium.  Most  probably  the  wood  sage,  Teu- 
crium  scorodonia  of  Linnteus. 

Chiliophyllon.  (From  x*Xto£,  a thousand,  and 
ipvWov,  a leaf,  because  of  the  great  number  of  leaf- 
lets.) A name  of  the  milfoil.  See  Achillea  millefo- 
lium. 

Chi'lon.  XeiXiov-  An  inflamed  and  swelled  lip. 

Chilpela'gua.  A variety  of  capsicum. 

Chime'thlon.  A chilblain. 

Chi'mia.  See  Chemistry. 

Chimia'ter.  (From  %u/ua,  chemistry,  and  tarpos, 
a physician.)  A physician  who  makes  the  science  of 
chemistry  subservient  to  the  purposes  of  medicine. 

Chimo  lea  laxa.  Paracelsus  means,  by  this  word, 
the  sublimed  powder  which  is  separated  from  the 
flowers  of  saline  ores. 

CHI'NA.  (So  named  from  the  country  of  China, 
from  whence  it  was  brought.)  See  Smilax  China. 

China  chin.£.  A name  given  to  the  Peruvian 
bark. 

China  occidentalis.  China  spuria  nodosa;  Smi- 
lax pseudo- China ; Smilax  Indica  spinosa  ; American 
or  West-Indian  China.  This  root  is  chiefly  brought 
from  Jamaica,  in  large  round  pieces  full  of  knots.  In 
scrofulous  disorders,  it  has  been  preferred  to  the  ori- 
ental kind.  In  other  cases  it  is  of  similar  but  inferior 
virtue. 

China  supposita.  See  Senesio  pseudochina. 

Chinchi'na.  See  Cinchona. 

Chinchi'na  Caribjea.  See  Cinchona  Cariboea. 

Chinchina  de  Santa  Fe'.  There  are  several  spe- 
cies of  bark  sent  from  Santa  Fe ; but  neither  their 
particular  natures,  nor  the  trees  which  afford  them, 
are  yet  accurately  determined. 

Chinchina  Jxmaicensis.  See  Cinchona  Cariboea. 

Chinchina  rubra.  See  Cinchona  oblongifolia. 

Chinchina  de  St.  Lucia.  St.  Lucia  bark.  See 
Cinchona  floribunda. 

CHINCOUGH.  See  Pertussis. 

CHINE'NSIS.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Chinese  Smilax.  See  Smilax  China. 

Chio  turpentine.  See  Pistacia  terebinthus. 

Chi'oli.  In  Paracelsus  it  is  synonymous  wifti  fu- 
runculus. 

CHIRA'GRA.  (From  %£tp,  the  hand,  and  aypa,  a 
seizure.)  The  gout  in  the  joints  of  the  hand.  See 
Arthritis. 

CHIRO'NES.  (From  xnp,  the  hand.)  Small  pus- 
tules on  the  hands  and  feet,  enclosed  in  which  is  a 
troublesome  worm. 

CHIRONIA.  (From  Chiron , the  Centaur,  who 
discovered  its  use.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

2.  (From  xeiP>  tbe  hand.)  An  affection  of  the 
hand,  where  it  is  troubled  with  chirones. 

Chironia  Centaurium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  officinal  centaury.  Centaurium  minus  vulgare; 
Centaurium  p arvum ; Centaurium  minus ; Libadium ; 
Chironia — corollis  quinquefidis  infundibuliformibus , 
cault  dichotomo , pistillo  simplici , of  Linnaeus.  This 
plant  is  justly  esteemed  to  be  the  most  efficacious  bit- 
ter of  all  the  medicinal  plants  indigenous  to  this  coun- 
try. It  has  been  recommended,  by  Cullen,  as  a sub- 
stitute for  gentian,  and  by  several  is  thought  to  be  a 
more  useful  medicine.  The  tops  of  the  centaury  plant 
are  directed  for  use  by  the  colleges  of  London  and  Edin- 
burgh, and  are  most  commonly  given  in  infusion ; but 
they  may  also  be  taken  in  powder,  or  prepared  into 
an  extract. 

[Chironia  angularis.  S ee  American  centaury.  A.] 

Chiro'nium.  (From  Xeipoev,  the  Centaur,  who  is 
said  to  have  been  the  first  who  healed  them.)  A ma- 
lignant ulcer,  callous  on  its  edges,  and  difficult  to 
cure. 

CHIROTHE'CA.  (From  %ap,  the  hand,  and  tiOtj- 

tu,  to  put.)  A glove  of  the  scarfskin,  with  the  nails, 


which  is  brought  off  from  the  dead  subject,  after  the 
cuticle  is  loosened  by  putrefaction,  from  the  parts  un- 
der it. 

CHIR'URGIA.  (From  ^ap,  the  hand,  and  «p you, 
a work ; because  surgical  operations  are  performed  by 
the  hand.)  Chirurgery,  or  surgery. 

Chi  ton.  Xitov.  A coat,  or  membrane. 

[Chitonite.  See  Organic  relics.  A.] 

Chi'um.  (From  Xtoj,  the  island  where  it  was  pro- 
duced.) An  epithet  of  a wine  made  at  Bcio. 

Chlia'sma.  (From  xXtatvw,  to  make  warm.)  A 
warm  fomentation. 

CHLORA'SMA.  (From  xXwpo?,  green.)  See 
Chlorosis. 

CHLORATE.  A compound  of  chloric  acid  with  a 
salifiable  basis. 

CHLORIC  ACID.  Acidum  chloricum.  “ It  was 
first  eliminated  from  salts  containing  it  by  Gay  Lus- 
sac,  and  described  by  him  in  his  admirable  memoir  on 
iodine,  published  in  the  9ist  volume  of  the  Annales  do 
Chimie.  When  a current  of  chlorine  is  passed  for  some 
time  through  a solution  of  barytic  earth  in  warm  wa- 
ter, a substance  called  hyperoxy  muriate  of  barytes  by 
its  first  discoverer,  Chenevix,  is  formed,  as  weil  as 
some  common  muriate.  The  latter  is  separated,  by 
boiling  phosphate  of  silver  in  the  compound  solution. 
The  former  may  then  be  obtained  by  evaporation,  in 
fine  rhomboidal  prisms.  Into  a dilute  solution  of  this 
salt,  Gay  Lussac  poured  weak  sulphuric  acid.  Though 
he  added  only  a few  drops  of  acid,  not  nearly  enough 
to  saturate  the  barytes,  the  liquid  became  sensibly 
acid,  and  not  a bubble  of  oxygen  escaped.  By  conti- 
nuing to  add  sulphuric  acid  with  caution,  he  succeeded 
in  obtaining  an  acid  liquid  entirely  free  from  sulphuric 
acid  and  barytes,  and  not  precipitating  nitrate  of  sil- 
ver. It  was  chloric  acid  dissolved  in  water.  Its  clia 
racters  are  the  following. 

This  acid  has  no  sensible  smell.  Its  solution  in 
water  is  perfectly  colourless.  Its  taste  is  very  acid , 
and  it  reddens  litmus  without  destroying  the  colour 
It  produces  no  alteration  on  solution  of  indigo  in  sul 
phuric  acid.  Light  does  not  decompose  it.  It  may 
be  concentrated  by  a gentle  heat,  without  undergoing 
decomposition,  or  without  evaporating.  It  was  kept  a 
long  time  exposed  to  the  air  without  sensible  diminu- 
tion of  its  quantity.  When  concentrated,  it  has  some- 
thing of  an  oily  consistency.  When  exposed  to  heat, 
it  is  partly  decomposed  into  oxygen  and  chlorine,  and 
partly  volatilized  without  alteration.  Muriatic  acid 
decomposes  it  in  the  same  way,  at  the  common  tem- 
perature. Sulphurous  acid,  and  sulphuretted  hydro- 
gen, have  the  same  property  ; but  nitric  acid  produces 
no  change  upon  it.  Combined  with  ammonia,  it  forms 
a fulminating  salt,  formerly  described  by  M.  Chenevix. 
It  does  not  precipitate  any  metallic  solution.  It  readily 
dissolves  zinc,  disengaging  hydrogen;  but  it  acts 
slowly  on  mercury.  It  cannot  be  obtained  in  the 
gaseous  state.  It  is  composed  of  1 volume  chlorine  -f- 
2.5  oxygen,  or,  by  weight,  of  100  chlorine,  111.70  oxy- 
gen, if  we  consider  the  specific  gravity  of  chlorine  to 
be  2.4866. 

To  the  preceding  account  of  the  properties  of  chloric 
acid,  M.  Vauquelin  has  added  the  following.  Its 
taste  is  not  only  acid,  but  astringent,  and  its  odour, 
when  concentrated,  is  somewhat  pungent.  It  differs 
from  chlorine,  in  not  precipitating  gelatine.  When 
paper  stained  with  litmus  is  left  for  some  time  in  con- 
tact with  it,  the  colour  is  destroyed.  Mixed  with  mu- 
riatic acid,  water  is  formed,  and  both  acids  are  con- 
verted into  chlorine.  Sulphurous  acid  is  converted 
into  sulphuric,  by  taking  oxygen  from  the  chloric  acid, 
which  is  consequently  converted  into  chlorine. 

Chloric  acid  combines  with  the  bases,  and  forms  the 
chlorates , a set  of  salts  formerly  known  by  the  name 
of  the  hyperoxygenated.  muriates.  They  may  he 
formed  either  directly  by  saturating  the  alkali  or  earth 
with  the  chloric  acid,  or  by  the  old  process  of  trans- 
mitting chlorine  through  the  solutions  of  the  bases,  in 
Woolfe’s  bottles.  In  this  case  the  water  is  decom- 
posed. Its  oxygen  unites  to  one  portion  of  the  chlorine, 
forming  chloric  acid,  while  its  hydrogen  unites  to 
another  portion  of  chlorine,  forming  muriatic  acid  ; 
and  hence,  chlorates  and  muriates  must  be  contempo- 
raneously generated,  and  must  be  afterward  separated 
by  crystallization,  or  peculiar  methods. 

The  chlorate  of  potassa  or  hyper oxymuriate , has  been 
long  known,  and  may  be  procured  by  receiving  chlo- 

213 


CHL 


CHL 


vine,  as  it  is  formed,  into  a solution  of  potassa.  When 
the  solution  is  saturated,  it  may  be  evaporated  gently, 
and  the  first  cry  stals  produced  will  be  the  salt  desired, 
this  crystallizing  before  the  simple  muriate,  which  is 
produced  at  the  same  time  with  it.  Its  crystals  are  in 
shining  hexaedral  laminae,  or  rhomboidal  plates.  It  is 
soluble  in  17  parts  of  cold  water;  and,  but  very 
sparingly,  in  alkohol.  Its  taste  is  cooling,  and  rather 
unpleasant.  Its  specific  gravity  is  2.0.  16  parts  of 
water,  at  60°,  dissolve  one  of  it,  and  2£  of  boiling 
water.  The  purest  oxygen  is  extracted  from  this  salt, 
by  exposing  it  to  a gentle  red  heat.  One  hundred  grains 
yield  about  115  cubic  inches  of  gas.  It  consists  of  9.5 
chloric  acid+6  potassa=15.5,  which  is  the  prime  equi- 
valent of  the  salt. 

The  effects  of  this  salt  on  inflammable  bodies  are 
very  powerful.  Rub  two  grains  into  powder  in  a 
mortar,  add  a grain  of  sulphur,  mix  them  well  by  gentle 
trituration,  then  collect  the  powder  into  a heap,  and  I 
press  upon  it  suddenly  and  forcibly  with  the  pestle,  a 
loud  detonation  will  ensue.  If  the  mixture  be  wrapped 
in  strong  paper,  and  struck  with  a hammer,  the  report 
will  be  still  louder.  Five  grains  of  the  salt,  mixed  in 
the  same  manner  with  two  and  a half  of  charcoal, 
will  be  inflamed  by  strong  trituration,  especially  if  a 
grain  or  two  of  sulphur  be  added,  but  without  much 
noise.  If  a little  sugar  be  mixed  with  half  its  w eight 
of  the  chlorate,  and  a little  strong  sulphuric  acid  poured 
on  it,  a sudden  and  vehement  inflammation  will  ensue ; 
but  this  experiment  requires  caution,  as  well  as  the 
following.  To  one  grain  of  the  powdered  salt  in  a 
mortar,  add  half  a grain  of  phosphorus ; it  will  deto- 
nate, with  a loud  report,  on  the  gentlest  trituration. 
In  this  experiment  the  hand  should  be  defended  by  a 
glove,  and  great  care  should  be  taken  that  none  of  the 
phosphorus  get  into  the  eyes.  Phosphorus  may  be  in- 
flamed by  it  under  water,  putting  into  a wine-glass  one 
part  of  phosphorus  and  two  of  the  chlorate,  nearly 
filling  the  glass  with  water,  and  then  pouring  in, 
through  a glass  tube  reaching  to  the  bottom,  three  or 
four  parts  of  sulphuric  acid.  This  experiment,  too,  is 
very  hazardous  to  the  eyes.  If  olive  or  linseed  oil  be 
taken  instead  of  phosphorus,  it  may  be  inflamed  by 
similar  means  on  the  surface  of  the  wTater.  This  salt 
should  not  be  kept  mixed  with  sulphur,  or  perhaps  any 
inflammable  substance,  as  in  this  state  it  has  been 
known  to  detonate  spontaneously.  As  it  is  the  common 
effect  of  mixtures  of  this  salt  with  inflammable  sub- 
stances of  every  kind,  to  take  fire  on  being  projected 
into  the  stronger  acids,  Chenevix  tried  the  experiment 
with  it  mixed  with  diamond  powder  in  various  propor- 
tions, but  without  success. 

Chlorate  of  soda  may  be  prepared  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  preceding,  by  substituting  soda  for  potassa  ; 
but  it  is  not  easy  to  obtain  it  separate,  as  it  is  nearly 
as  soluble  as  the* muriate  of  soda,  requiring  only  3 parts 
of  cold  water.  Vauquelin  formed  it,  by  saturating 
chloric  acid  with  soda  ; 500  parts  of  the  dry  carbonate  | 
yielding  1100  parts  of  crystallized  chlorate.  It  consists  | 
of  4 soda,  9.5  acid=13.5,  which  is  its  prime  equivalent,  i 
It  crystallizes  in  square  plates,  produces  a sensation  of 
cold  in  the  mouth,  and  a saline  taste  ; is  slightly  deli-  I 
quescent,  and  in  its  other  properties  resembles  the  1 
chlorate  of  potassa. 

Barytes  appears  to  be  the  next  base  in  order  of 
affinity  for  this  acid.  The  best  method  of  forming  it 
is  to  pour  hot  water  on  a large  quantity  of  this  earth, 
and  to  pass  a current  of  chlorine  through  the  liquid 
kept  warm,  so  that  a fresh  portion  of  barytes  may  be 
taken  up  as  the  former  is  saturated.  This  salt  is  solu- 
ble in  about  four  parts  of  cold  water,  and  less  of  wTarm, 
and  crystallizes  like  the  simple  muriate.  It  may  be 
obtained,  however,  by  the  agency  of  double  affinity; 
for  phosphate  of  silver  boiled  in  the  solution  will  de- 
compose the  simple  muriate,  and  the  muriate  of  silver 
and  phosphate  of  barytes  being  insoluble,  will  both  fall 
down  and  leave  the  chlorate  in  solution  alone.  The 
phosphate  of  silver  employed  in  this  process  must  be 
perfectly  pure,  and  not  the  least  contaminated  with 
copper.’ 

The  c hi  or  ate  of  strontites  may  be  obtained  in  the 
same  manner.  It  is  deliquescent,  melts  immediately 
in  the  mouth,  and  produces  cold ; is  more  soluble  in 
alkohol  than  the  simple  muriate,  and  crystallizes  in 
needles. 

The  chlorate  of  lime,  obtained  in  a similar  way,  is 
extremely  deliquescent,  liquefies  at  a low  heat,  is  very 
214 


soluble  in  alkohol,  produces  much  cold  in  solution,  and 
has  a sharp  bitter  taste. 

Chlorate  of  ammonia  is  formed  by  double  affinity, 
the  carbonate  of  ammonia  decomposing  the  earthy 
salts  of  this  genus,  giving  up  its  carbonic  acid  to  their 
base,  and  combining  with  their  acid  into  chlorate  of 
ammonia,  which  may  be  obtained  by  evaporation.  It 
is  very  soluble  both  in  water  and  alkohol,  and  decom- 
posed by  a moderate  heat. 

The  chlorate  of  magnesia  much  resembles  that  of 
lime. 

To  obtain  chlorate  of  alumina,  Chenevix  put  some 
alumina,  precipitated  from  the  muriate,  and  well 
w ashed,  but  still  moist,  into  a Woolfe’s  apparatus,  and 
treated  it  as  the  other  earths.  The  alumina  shortly 
disappeared ; and  on  pouring  sulphuric  acid  into  the 
liquor,  a strong  smell  of  chloric  acid  was  perceivable  ; 
but  on  attempting  to  obtain  the  salt  pure  by  means  of 
phosphate  of  silver,  the  whole  was  decomposed,  and 
nothing  but  chlorate  of  silver  was  found  in  the  solu- 
tion.” 

CHLORIC  OXIDE.  Deutoxide  of  chlorine.  When 
sulphuric  acid  is  poured  upon  hyper-oxymuriate  of 
potassa  in  a wine-glass,  very  little  effervescence  takes 
place,  but  the  acid  gradually  acquires  an  orange  colour, 
and  a dense  yellow  vapour,  of  a peculiar  and  not  dis- 
agreeable smell,  floats  on  the  surface.  These  pheno- 
mena led  Sir  H.  Davy  to  believe,  that  the  substance 
extricated  from  the  salt  is  held  in  solution  by  the  acid. 
After  various  unsuccessful  attempts  to  obtain  this  sub- 
stance in  a separate  state,  he  at  last  succeeded  by  the 
following  method : About  60  grains  of  the  salt  are  tri- 
turated w'itli  a little  sulphuric  acid,  just  sufficient  to 
convert  them  into  a very  solid  paste.  This  is  put 
into  a retort,  which  is  heated  by  means  of  hot  w ater. 
The  water  must  never  be  allowed  to  become  boiling 
hot,  for  fear  of  explosion.  The  heat  drives  off  the  new 
gas,  which  may  be  received  over  mercury.  This  new 
gas  has  a much  more  intense  colour  than  euchlorine. 
It  does  not  act  on  mercury.  Water  absorbs  more  of 
it  than  euchlorine.  Its  taste  is  astringent.  It  destroys 
vegetable  blues  without  reddening  them.  When  phos- 
phorus is  introduced  into  it,  an  explosion  takes  place. 
When  heat  is  applied,  the  gas  explodes  with  more  vio- 
lence, and  producing  more  light  than  euchlorine. 
When  thus  exploded,  two  measures  of  it  are  converted 
into  nearly  three  measures,  which  consist  of  a mixture 
of  one  measure  chlorine,  and  two  measures  oxygen. 
Hence,  it  is  composed  of  one  atom  chlorine  and  four 
atoms  oxygen. 

Deutoxide  of  chlorine  has  a peculiar  aromatic  odour, 
unmixed  with  any  smell  of  chlorine.  A little  chlorine 
is  always  absorbed  by  the  mercury  during  the  explo- 
sion of  the  gas.  Hence  the  small  deficiency  of  the  re- 
sulting measure  is  accounted  for.  At  common  tem- 
peratures none  of  the  simple  combustibles  which  Sir 
H.  Davy  tried,  decomposed  the  gas,  except  phosphorus. 
The  taste  of  the  aqueous  solution  is  extremely  astrin- 
gent and  corroding,  leaving  for  a long  while  a very 
disagreeable  sensation.  The  action  of  liquid  nitric 
acid  on  the  chlorate  of  potassa  affords  the  same  gas, 
and  a much  larger  quantity  of  this  acid  may  be  safely 
employed  than  of  the  sulphuric.  But  as  the  gas  must 
be  procured  by  solution  of  the  salt,  it  is  always  mixed 
with  about  one-fifth  of  oxygen.” 

CHLORIDE.  A compound  of  chlorine  with  dif- 
ferent bodies. 

Chloride  of  azet.  See  Nitrogen. 

CHLO  RINE.  (So  called  from  %Xwpof,  green,  be- 
cause it  is  of  a green  colour.)  Oxygenated  muriatic 
acid.  “ The  introduction  of  this  term,  marks  an  era 
in  chemical  science.  It  originated  from  the  masterly 
researches  of  Sir  H.  Davy  on  the  oxymuriatic  acid  gas 
of  the  French  school ; a substance  w’hich,  after  resist- 
ing the  most  powerful  means  of  decomposition  which 
his  sagacity  could  invent,  or  his  ingenuity  apply,  he 
declared  to  be.  according  to  the  true  logic  of  chemistry, 
an  elementary  body,  and  not  a compound  of  muriatic 
acid  and  oxygen,  as  was  previously  imagined,  and  as 
its  name  seemed  to  denote.  He  accordingly  assigned 
to  it  the  term  chlorine,  descriptive  of  its  colour  ; a 
name  now  generally  used.  The  chloridic  theory  of 
combustion,  though  more  limited  in  its  applications 
to  the  chemical  phenomena  of  nature,  than  the  anti- 
phlogistic of  Lavoisier,  may  justly  be  regarded  as  of 
equal  importance  to  the  advancement  of  the  science  it- 
self. When  wc  now  survey  the  Transactions  of  the 


CHL 


CHL 


Royal  Society  for  1808, 1809, 1810,  and  1811,  we  feel 
overwhelmed  with  astonishment  at  the  unparalleled 
skill,  labour,  and  sagacity,  by  which  the  great  English 
chemist,  in  so  short  a space,  prodigiously  multiplied 
the  objects  and  resources  of  the  science,  while  he  pro- 
mulgated a new  code  of  laws,  flowing  from  views  of 
elementary  action,  equally  profound,  original,  and  sub- 
lime. The  importance  of  the  revolution  produced  by 
liis  researches  on  chlorine,  will  justify  us  in  presenting 
a detailed  account  of  the  steps  by  which  it  has  been 
effected.  How  entirely  the  glory  of  this  great  work 
belongs  to  Sir  H.  Davy,  notwithstanding  some  invidious 
attempts  in  this  country  to  tear  the  well-earned  laurel 
from  his  brow,  and  transfer  it  to  the  French  chemists, 
we  may  readily  judge  by  the  following  decisive  facts. 

The  second  part  of  the  Phil.  Trans,  for  1809,  con- 
tains researches  on  oxymuriatic  acid,  its  nature  and 
combinations,  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  from  which  the  follow- 
ing interesting  extracts  are  taken. 

‘In  the  Bakerian  lecture  for  1808,’  says  he,  ‘I  have 
given  an  account  of  the  action  of  potassium  upon 
muriatic  acid  gas,  by  which  more  than  one-third  of  its 
volumeof  hydrogen  is  produced;  and  I have  stated, 
that  muriatic  acid  can  in  no  instance  be  procured  from 
oxymuriatic  acid,  or  from  dry  muriates,  unless  water 
or  its  elements  be  present. 

# ‘ In  the  second  volume  of  the  Mdmoires  D’Arcueil, 
Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard  have  detailed  an  extensive 
series  of  facts,  upon  muriatic  acid,  and  oxymuriatic 
acid.  Some  of  their  experiments  are  similar  to  those 
I have  detailed  in  the  paper  just  referred  to ; others  are 
peculiarly  their  own,  and  of  a very  curious  kind; 
their  general  conclusion  is,  that  muriatic  acid  gas  con- 
tains about  one  quarter  of  its  weight  of  water ; and 
that  oxymuriatic  acid  is  not  decomposable  by  any  sub- 
stances but  hydrogen,  or  such  as  can  form  triple  com- 
binations with  it. 

‘ One  of  the  most  singular  facts  that  I have  observed 
on  this  subject,  and  which  I have  before  referred  to, 
is,  that  charcoal,  even  when  ignited  to  whiteness  in 
oxymuriatic  or  muriatic  acid  gases,  by  the  voltaic 
battery,  effects  no  change  in  them,  if  it  has  been  pre- 
viously freed  from  hydrogen,  by  intense  ignition  in 
vacuo. 

‘This  experiment,  which  I have  several  times  re- 
peated, led  me  to  doubt  of  the  existence  of  oxygen  in 
that  substance,  which  has  been  supposed  to  contain  it, 
above  all  others,  in  a loose  and  active  state;  and  to 
make  a more  rigorous  investigation,  than  had  hitherto 
been  attempted  for  its  detection.’ 

He  then  proceeds  to  interrogate  nature,  with  every 
artifice  of  experiment  and  reasoning,  till  he  finally  ex- 
torts a confession  of  the  true  constitution  of  this  mys- 
terious muriatic  essence.  The  above  paper,  and  his 
Bakerian  lecture,  read  before  the  Royal  Society  in 
Nov.  and  Dec.  1810,  and  published  in  the  first  part  of 
their  Transactions  for  1811,  present  the  whole  body  of 
evidence  for  the  undecompounded  nature  of  oxymu- 
riatic acid  gas,  thenceforward  styled  chlorine ; and 
they  will  be  studied  in  every  enlightened  age  and  coun- 
try, as  a just  and  splendid  pattern  of  inductive  Baco- 
nian logic.  These  views  were  slowly  and  reluctantly 
admitted  by  the  chemical  philosophers  of  Europe. 

In  1812,  Sir  H.  Davy  published  his  Elements  of 
Chemical  Philosophy,  containing  a systematic  account 
of  his  new  doctrines  concerning  the  combination  of 
simple  bodies.  Chlorine  is  there  placed  in  the  same 
rank  with  oxygen,  and  finally  removed  from  the  class 
of  acids.  In  1813,  Thenard  published  the  first  volume 
of  his  Trait 6 dc  Chimic  EUmentaire  Thdorique  et 
Pratique.  This  distinguished  chemist,  the  fellow- 
labourer  of  Gay  Lussac  in  those  able  researches  on  the 
alkalies  and  oxymuriatic  acid,  which  form  the  distin- 
guished rivalry  of  the  French  school,  to  the  brilliant 
career  of  Sir  H.  Davy,  states,  at  p.  584,  of  the  above 
volume,  the  composition  of  oxymuriatic  acid  as  fol- 
lows : 

‘ Composition.  The  oxygenated  muriatic  gas  contains 
the  half  of  its  volume  of  oxygen  gas,  not  including  that 
which  we  may  suppose  in  muriatic  acid.  It  thence  fol- 
lows, that  it  is  formed  of  1.9183  of  muriatic  acid,  and 
0.5517  of  oxygen  ; for  the  specific  gravity  of  oxygenated 
muriatic  gas  is  2.47,  and  that  of  oxygen  gas  1.1034.’ — 

1 Chenevix  first  determined  the  proportion  of  its  con- 
stituent principles.  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard  deter- 
mined it  more  exactly,  and  showed  that  we  could  not 
decompose  the  oxygenated  muriatic  gas,  but  by  putting 


it  in  contact  with  a body  capable  of  uniting  with  the 
two  elements  of  this  gas,  or  with  muriatic  acid.  They 
announced  at  the  same  time  that  they  could  explain  all 
the  phenomena  which  it  presents,  by  considering  it  as 
a simple  or  as  a compound  body.  However,  this  last 
opinion  appeared  more  probable  to  them.  Davy,  on 
the  contrary,  embraced  the  first,  admitted  itexclusively, 
and  sought  to  fortify  it  by  experiments  which  are 
peculiar  to  him.’  P.  585. 

In  the  second  volume  of  Thenard’s  work,  published 
in  1814,  he  explains  the  mutual  action  of  chlorine  and 
ammonia  gases,  solely  on  the  oxygenous  theory.  ‘ On 
peut  demontrer  par  ce  dernier  proc£d6,  que  le  gas 
muriatique  oxigen6,  doit  contenir  la  moitie  de  son 
volume  d’orig^ne,  uni  d 1’acide  muriatique.’  P.  147. — 
In  the  4th  volume,  which  appeared  in  1816,  we  find 
the  following  passages : '•Oxygenated  muriatic  gas. — 
Oxygenated  muriatic  gas,  in  combining  with  the 
metals,  gives  rise  to  the  neutral  muriates.  Now,  107.6 
of  oxide  of  silver,  contain  7.6  of  oxygen,  and  absorb 
26.4  of  muriatic  acid,  to  pass  to  the  state  of  neutral 
muriate.  Of  consequence,  348  of  this  last  acid  sup- 
posed dry,  and  100  of  oxygen,  form  this  gas.  But  the 
sp.  gr.  of  oxygen  is  1.1034,  and  that  of  oxygenated 
muriatic  gas  is  2.47  ; hence,  this  contains  the  half  of 
its  .volume  of  oxygen.’  P.  52. 

The  force  of  Sir  H.  Davy’s  demonstrations,  pressing 
for  six  years  on  the  public  mind  of  the  French  philo- 
sophers, now  begins  to  transpire  in  a note  to  the  above 
passage. — ‘We  reason  here,’  says  Thenard,  ‘obviously 
on  the  hypothesis,  which  consists  in  regarding  oxygen- 
ated muriatic  gas  as  a compound  body.’  This  pressure 
of  public  opinion  hecomes  conspicuous  at  the  end  of 
the  volume.  Among  the  additions,  we  have  the  follow 
ing  decisive  evidence  of  the  lingering  attachment  to 
the  old  theory  of  Lavoisier  and  Bertbollet. — ‘ A pretty 
considerable  number  of  persons  who  have  subscribed 
for  this  work,  desiring  a detailed  explanation  of  the 
phenomena  which  oxygenated  muriatic  gas  presents, 
on  the  supposition  that  this  gas  is  a simple  body,  we 
are  now  going  to  explain  these  phenomena,  on  this 
supposition,  by  considering  them  attentively.  The 
oxygenated  muriatic  gas  will  take  the  name  of  chlorine  ; 
its  combinations  with  phosphorus,  sulphur,  azot, 
metals,  will  be  called  chlorures ; the  muriatic  acid, 
which  results  from  equal  parts  in  volume  of  hydrogen 
and  oxygenated  muriatic  gases,  will  be  hydrochloric 
acid;  the  superoxygenated  muriatic  acid  will  be 
chlorous  acid;  and  the  hyperoxygenated  muriatic, 
chloric  acid;  the  first,  comparable  to  the  hydriodic 
acid,  and  the  last  to  the  iodic  acid.’  In  fact,  therefore, 
we  evidently  see,  that  so  far  from  the  chloridic  tiieory 
originating  iu  France,  as  has  been  more  than  insi- 
nuated, it  was  only  the  researches  on  iodine,  so  ad- 
mirably conducted  by  Gay  Lussac,  that,  by  their  auxi- 
liary attack  on  the  oxygen  hypothesis,  eventually 
opened  the  minds  of  its  adherents  to  the  evidence  long 
ago  advanced  by  Sir  H.  Davy.  It  will  be  peculiarly 
instructive,  to  give 'a  general  outline  of  that  evidence, 
which  has  been  mutilated  in  some  systematic  works 
on  chemistry,  or  frittered  away  into  fragments. 

Sir  H.  Davy  subjected  oxymuriatic  gas  to  the  action 
of  many  simple  combustibles,  as  well  as  metals,  and 
from  the  compounds  formed,  endeavoured  to  eliminate 
oxygen,  by  the  most  energetic  powers  of  affinity  and 
voltaic  electricity,  but  without  success,  as  the  follow- 
ing abstract  will  show. 

If  oxymuriatic  acid  gas  be  introduced  into  a vessel 
exhausted  of  air,  containing  tin,  and  the  tin  be  gently 
heated,  and  the  gas  in  sufficient  quantity,  the  tin  and 
the  gas  disappear,  and  a limpid  fluid,  precisely  the 
same  as  Libavius’s  liquor,  is  formed  : If  this  substance 
is  a combination  of  muriatic  acid  and  oxide  of  tin, 
oxide  of  tin  ought  to  be  separated  from  it  by  means  of 
ammonia.  He  admitted  ammoniacal  gas  over  mercury 
to  a small  quantity  of  the  liquor  of  Libavius;  it  was 
absorbed  with  great  heat,  and  no  gas  was  generated  ; 
a solid  result  was  obtained,  which  was  of  a dull  white 
colour;  some  of  it  was  heated,  to  ascertain  if  it  con- 
tained oxide  of  tin ; but  the  whole  volatilized,  pro- 
ducing dense  pungent  fumes. 

Another  experiment  of  the  same  kind,  made  with 
great  care,  and  in  which  the  ammonia  was  used  in 
great  excess,  proved  that  the  liquor  of  Libavius  cannot 
be  decompounded  by  ammonia;  but  that  it  forms  a 
new  combination  with  this  substance. 

He  made  a considerable  quantity  of  the  solid  com- 

215 


CHL 


pound  of  oxymuriatic  acid  and  phosphorus  by  com-  | 
bustion,  and  saturated  it  with  ammonia,  by  heating  it 
in  a proper  receiver  filled  with  ammoniacal  gas,  on 
which  it  acted  with  great  energy,  producing  much 
heat ; and  they  formed  a white  opaque  powder.  Sup- 
posing that  this  substance  was  composed  of  the  dry 
muriates  and  phosphates  of  ammonia ; as  muriate  of 
ammonia  is  very  volatile,  and  as  ammonia  is  driven 
off  from  phosphoric  acid  by  a heat  below  redness,  he 
conceived  that,  by  igniting  the  product  obtained,  he 
should  procure  phosphoric  acid;  he  therefore  intro- 
duced some  of  the  powder  into  a tube  of  green  glass, 
and  heated  it  to  redness,  out  of  the  contact  of  air,  by  a 
spirit  lamp;  but  found,  to  his  great  surprise,  that  it 
was  not  at  all  volatile,  nor  decomposable  at  this  degree 
of  heat,  and  that  it  gave  off  no  gaseous  matter. 

The  circumstance,  that  a substance  composed  prin- 
cipally of  oxymuriatic  acid,  and  ammonia,  should  re- 
sist decomposition  or  change  at  so  high  a temperature, 
induced  him  to  pay  particular  attention  to  the  proper- 
ties of  this  new  body. 

It  has  been  said,  and  taken  for  granted  by  many 
chemists,  that  when  oxymuriatic  acid  and  ammonia  act 
upon  each  other,  water  is  formed : he  several  times 
made  the  experiment,  and  was  convinced  that  this  is 
not  the  case. 

He  mixed  together  sulphurated  hydrogen  in  a high 
degree  of  purity,  and  oxymuriatic  acid  gas,  both  dried, 
in  equal  volumes.  In  this  instance  the  condensation 
was  not  l-40th. ; sulphur,  which  seemed  to  contain  a 
little  oxymuriatic  acid,  was  formed  on  the  sides  of  the 
vessel ; no  vapour  was  deposited,  and  the  residual  gas 
contained  about  19-20ths  of  muriatic  acid  gas,  and  the 
remainder  was  inflammable. 

When  oxymuriatic  acid  is  acted  upon  by  nearly  an 
equal  volume  of  hydrogen,  a combination  takes  place 
between  them,  and  muriatic  acid  gas  results.  When 
muriatic  acid  gas  is  acted  on  by  mercury,  or  any  other 
metal,  the  oxymuriatic  acid  is  attracted  from  the  hy- 
drogen by  the  stronger  affinity  of  the  metal,  and  an 
oxymuriate,  exactly  similar  to  that  formed  by  combus- 
tion, is  produced. 

The  action  of  water  upon  those  compounds  which 
have  been  usually  considered  as  muriates,  or  as  dry 
muriates,  but  which  are  properly  combinations  of  oxy- 
muriatic acid  with  inflammable  bases,  may  be  easily 
explained,  according  to  these  views  of  the  subject. 
When  water  is  added  in  certain  quantities  to  Liba- 
vius’s  liquor,  a solid  crystallized  mass  is  obtained, 
from  which  oxide  of  tin  and  muriate  of  ammonia  can 
be  procured  by  ammonia.  In  this  case,  oxygen  may 
be  conceived  to  be  supplied  to  th'e  tin,  and  hydrogen  to 
the  oxymuriatic  acid. 

The  compound  formed  by  burning  phosphorus  in 
oxymuriatic  acid,  is  in  a similar  relation  to  water.  If 
that  substance  be  added  to  it,  it  is  resolved  into  two 
powerful  acids ; oxygen,  it  may  be  supposed,  is  fur- 
nished to  the  phosphorus  to  form  phosphoric  acid,  hy- 
drogen to  the  oxymuriatic  acid  to  form  common  muri- 
atic acid  gas. 

He  caused  strong  explosions  from  an  electrical  jar  to 
pass  through  oxymuriatic  gas,  by  means  of  points  of 
platina,  for  several  hours  in  succession;  but  it  seemed 
not  to  undergo  the  slightest  change. 

He  electrized  the  oxymuriates  of  phosphorus  and 
sulphur  for  some  hours,  by  the  power  of  the  voltaic 
apparatus  of  1000  double  plates.  No  gas  separated, 
but  a minute  quantity  of  hydrogen,  which  he  was  in- 
clined to  attribute  to  the  presence  of  moisture  in  the 
apparatus  employed ; for  he  once  obtained  hydrogen 
from  Libavius’s  liquor  by  a similar  operation.  But 
he  ascertained  that  this  was  owing  to  the  decomposi- 
tion of  water  adhering  to  the  mercury : and  in  some 
late  experiments  made  with  2000  double  plates,  in 
which  the  discharge  was  from  platina  wires,  and  in 
which  the  mercury  used  for  confining  the  liquor  was 
carefully  boiled,  there  was  no  production  of  any  per- 
manent elastic  matter. 

Few  substances,  perhaps,  have  less  claim  to  be  con- 
sidered as  acid,  than  oxymuriatic  acid.  As  yet  we 
have  no  right  to  say  that  it  has  been  decompounded; 
and  as  its  tendency  of  combination  is  with  pure  in- 
flammable matters,  it  may  possibly  belong  to  the  same 
class  of  bodies  as  oxygen. 

May  it  not  in  fact  be  a peculiar  acidifying  and  dis- 
solving principle,  forming  compounds  with  combustible 
bodies,  analogous  to  acids  containing  oxygen  or  oxides, 
216 


CHL 

j in  their  properties  and  powers  of  combination;  bnt 
differing  from  them,  in  being  for  the  most  part  decom- 
posable by  water  1 On  this  idea,  muriatic  acid  may 
be  considered  as  having  hydrogen  for  Hs  basis,  and 
oxymuriatic  acid  for  its  acidifying  principle;  and  the 
phosphoric  sublimate  as  having  phosphorus  for  its 
basis,  and  oxymuriatic  acid  for  its  acidifying  matter  ; 
and  JLibavius’s  liquor,  and  the  compounds  of  arsenic 
with  oxymuriatic  acid,  may  be  regarded  as  analogous 
bodies.  The  combinations  of  oxymuriatic  acid  with 
lead,  silver,  mercury,  potassium,  and  sodium,  in  this 
view,  would  be  considered  as  a class  of  bodies  related 
more  to  oxides  than  acids,  in  their  powers  of  attraction. 
— Bak.  Leo.  1809. 

On  the  Combinations  of  the  Common  Metals  with 
Oxygen  and  Oxymuriatic  Gas. 

Sir  H.  used  in  all  cases  small  retorts  of  green  glass, 
containing  from  three  to  six  cubical  inches,  furnished 
with  stop-cocks.  The  metallic  substances  were  intro- 
duced, the  retort  exhausted  and  filled  with  the  gas  to 
be  acted  upon,  heat  was  applied  by  means  of  a spirit 
lamp,  and  after  cooling,  the  results  were  examined, 
and  the  residual  gas  analyzed. 

All  the  metals  that  he  tried,  except  silver,  lead, 
nickel,  cobalt,  and  gold,  when  heated,  burnt  in  the 
oxymuriatic  gas,  and  the  volatile  metals  with  flame 
Arsenic,  antimony,  tellurium,  and  zinc,  with  a white 
flame,  mercury  with  a red  flame.  Tin  became  ignited 
to  whiteness,  and  iron  and  copper  to  redness  ; tungsten 
and  manganese  to  dull  redness  ; platina  was  scarcely 
acted  upon  at  the  heat  of  fusion  of  the  glass. 

The  product  from  mercury  was  corrosive  sublimate. 
That  from  zinc  was  similar  in  colour  to  that  from 
antimony,  but  was  much  less  volatile. 

Silver  and  lead  produced  horn-silver  and  horn-lead ; 
and  bismuth,  butter  of  bismuth. 

In  acting  upon  metallic  oxides  by  oxymuriatic  gas,  he 
found  that  those  of  lead,  silver,  tin,  copper,  antimony, 
bismuth,  and  tellurium,  were  decomposed  in  a heat 
below  redness,  but  the  oxides  of  the  volatile  taetals 
more  readily  than  those  of  the  fixed  ones.  The  oxides 
of  cobalt  and  nickel  were  scarcely  acted  upon  at  a 
dull  red  heat.  The  red  oxide  of  iron  was  not  affected 
at  a strong  red  heat,  while  the  black  oxide  was  readily 
decomposed  at  a much  lower  temperature ; arsenical 
acid  underwent  no  change  at  the  greatest  heat  that 
could  be  given  it  in  the  glass  retort,  while  the  white 
oxide  readily  decomposed. 

In  cases  where  oxygen  was  given  off,  it  was  found 
exactly  the  same  in  quantity  as  that  which  had  been 
absorbed  by  the  metal.  Thus,  two  grains  of  red  oxide 
of  mercury  absorbed  9-10ths  of  a cubical  inch  of  oxy- 
muriatic gas,  and  afforded  0.45  of  oxygen.  Two  grains 
of  dark  olive  oxide  from  calomel  decomposed  by  po- 
tassa,  absorbed  about  94-lQ0ths  of  oxymuriatic  gas-, 
and  afforded  24-100ths  of  oxygen,  and  corrosive  sub 
limate  was  produced  in  both  cases. 

In  the  decomposition  of  the  white  oxide  of  zinc, 
oxygen  was  expelled  exactly  equal  to  half  the  volume 
of  the  oxymuriatic  acid  absorbed.  In  the  case  of  the 
decomposition  of  the  black  oxide  of  iron,  and  the 
white  oxide  of  arsenic,  the  changes  that  occurred  were 
of  a very  beautiful  kind  ; no  oxygen  was  given  off  in 
either  case,  but  butter  of  arsenic  and  arsenical  acid 
formed  in  one  instance,  and  the  ferruginous  sublimate 
and  red  oxide  of  iron  in  the  other. 

General  Conclusions  and  Observations,  illustrated 
by  Experiments. 

Oxymuriatic  gas  combines  with  inflammable  bodies, 
to  form  simple  binary  compounds ; and  in  these  cases, 
when  it  acts  upon  oxides,  it  either  produces  the  expul- 
sion of  their  oxygen,  or  causes  it  to  enter  into  new 
combinations. 

If  it  be  said  that  the  oxygen  arises  from  the  decom- 
position of  the  oxymuriatic  gas,  and  not  from  the 
oxides,  it  may  be  asked,  why  it  is  always  the  quantity 
contained  in  the  oxide  1 and  why  in  some  cases,  as 
those  of  the  peroxides  of  potassium  and  sodium,  it 
bears  no  relation  to  the  quantity  of  gas  ? 

If  there  existed  any  acid  matter  in  oxymuriatic  gas, 
combined  with  oxygen,  it  ought  to  be  exhibited  in  the 
fluid  compound  of  one  proportion  of  phosphorus,  and 
two  of  oxymuriatic  gas  ; for  this,  on  such  an  assump- 
tion, should  consist  of  muriatic  acid  (on  the  old  hypo- 
thesis, free  from  water)  and  phosphorous  acid  ; but  this 
substance  has  no  effect  on  litmus  paper,  and  does  not 
act  under  common  circumstances,  on  fixed  alkaline 


CHL 


CHL 


bases,  such  as  dry  lime  or  magnesia.  Oxymuriatic 
gas,  like  oxygen,  must  be  combined  in  large  quantity 
with  peculiar  inflammable  matter,  to  form  acid  matter. 
In  its  union  with  hydrogen,  it  instantly  reddens  the 
driest  litmus  paper,  though  a gaseous  body.  Contrary 
to  acids,  it  expels  oxygen  from  protoxides,  and  com- 
bines with  peroxides. 

When  potassium  is  burnt  in  oxymuriatic  gas,  a dry 
compound  is  obtained.  If  potassium  combined  with 
oxygen  is  employed,  the  whole  of  the  oxygen  is  ex- 
pelled, and  the  same  compound  formed.  It  is  contrary 
to  sound  logic  to  say,  that  this  exact  quantity  of  oxygen 
is  given  off  from  a body  not  known  to  be  compound, 
when  we  are  certain  of  its  existence  in  another ; and 
all  the  cases  are  parallel. 

Scheele  explained  the  bleaching  powers  of  the  oxy- 
muriatic gas,  by  supposing  that  it  destroyed  colours  by 
combining  with  phlogiston.  Berthollet  considered  it 
as  acting  by  supplying  oxygen.  He  made  an  experi- 
ment, which  seems  to  prove  that  the  pure  gas  is  in- 
capable of  altering  vegetable  colours,  and  that  its  opera- 
tion in  bleaching  depends  entirely  upon  its  property  of 
decomposing  water,  and  liberating  its  oxygen. 

He  filled  a glass  globe,  containing  dry  powdered  mu- 
riate of  lime,  with  oxymuriatic  gas.  He  introduced 
some  dry  paper  tinged  with  litmus  that  had  been  just 
heated,  into  another  globe  containing  dry  muriate  of 
lime : after  some  time  this  globe  was  exhausted,  and 
then  connected  with  the  globe  containing  the  oxymu- 
riatic  gas,  and  by  an  appropriate  set  of  stop-cocks,  the 
paper  was  exposed  to  the  action  of  the  gas.  No  change 
of  colour  took  place,  and  after  two  days  there  was 
scarcely  a perceptible  alteration. 

Some  similar  paper  dried,  introduced  into  gas  that 
had  not  been  exposed  to  muriate  of  lime,  was  instantly 
rendered  white. 

It  is  generally  stated  in  chemical  books,  that  oxymu- 
ri,atic  gas  is  capable  of  being  condensed  and  crystal- 
lized at  a low  temperature.  He  found  by  several  ex- 
periments that  this  is  not  the  case.  The  solution  of 
oxymuriatic  gas  in  water  freezes  more  readily  than 
pure  water,  but  the  pure  gas  dried  by  muriate  of  lime 
undergoes  no  change  whatever,  at  a temperature  of  40 
below  0°  of  Fahrenheit.  The  mistake  seems  to  have 
arisen  from  the  exposure  of  the  gas  to  cold  in  bottles 
containing  moisture. 

He  attempted  to  decompose  boracic  and  phosphoric 
acids  by  oxymuriatic  gas,  but  without  success;  from 
which  it  seems  probable,  that  the  attractions  of  bora- 
cium  and  phosphorus  for  oxygen  are  stronger  than  for 
oxymuriatic  gas.  And  from  the  experiments  already 
detailed,  iron  and  arsenic  are  analogous  in  this  re- 
spect, and  probably  some  other  metals. 

Potassium,  sodium,  calcium,  strontium,  barium, 
zinc,  mercury,  tin,  lead,  and  probably  silver,  antimony, 
nnd  gold,  seem  to  have  a stronger  attraction  for  oxy- 
muriatic gas  than  for  oxygen. 

‘ To  call  a body  which  is  not  known  to  contain  oxy- 
gen, and  which  cannot  contain  muriatic  acid,  oxymu- 
riatic  acid,  is  contrary  to  the  principles  of  that  nomen- 
clature in  which  it  is  adopted  ; and  an  alteration  of  it 
seems  necessary  to  assist  the  progress  of  discussion, 
and  to  diffuse  just  ideas  on  the  subject.  If  the  great  dis- 
coverer of  this  substance  had  signified  it  by  any  simple 
name,  it  would  have  been  proper  to  have  recurred  to 
it ; bat  dephlogisticated  marine  acid  is  a term  which 
can  hardly  be  adopted  in  the  present  advanced  era  of 
the  science. 

‘ After  consulting  someof  the  most  eminent  chemical 
philosophers  in  this  country,  it  has  been  judged  nrost 
proper  to  suggest  a name  founded  upon  one  of  its  ob- 
vious and  characteristic  properties — its  colour,  and  to 
call  it  chlorine  or  chloric  gas. 

‘ Should  it  hereafter  be  discovered  to  be  compound, 
and  even  to  contain  oxygen,  this  name  can  imply  no 
error,  and  cannot  necessarily  require  a change. 

‘ Most  of  the  salts  which  have  been  called  muriates, 
are  not  known  to  contain  any  muriatic  acid,  or  any 
oxygen.  Thus  Libavius’s  liquor,  though  converted 
into  a muriate  by  water,  contains  only  tin  and  oxyniu- 
riatic  gas,  and  horn-silver  seems  incapable  of  being 
converted  into  a true  muriate.’ — Bali.  Lee.  1811. 

We  shall  now  exhibit  a summary  view  of  the  pre- 
paration and  properties  of  chlorine. 

Mix  in  a mortar  3 parts  of  common  salt  and  1 of 
black  oxide  of  manganese.  Introduce  them  into  a glass 
retort,  and  add  2 parts  of  sulphuric  acid.  Gas  will 


issue,  which  must  be  collected  in  the  water-pneumatic 
trough.  A gentle  heat  will  favour  its  extrication.  In 
practice,  the  above  pasty-consistenced  mixture  is  apt 
to  boil  over  into  the  neck.  A mixture  of  liquid  mu- 
riatic acid  and  manganese  is  therefore  more  conve- 
nient for  the  production  of  chlorine.  A very  slight 
heat  is  adequate  to  its  expulsion  from  the  retort.  In- 
stead of  manganese,  red  oxide  of  mercury,  or  pure- 
coloured  oxide  of  lead,  may  be  employed. 

This  gas,  as  we  have  already  remarked,  is  of  a 
greenish  yellow-colour,  easily  recognised  by  daylight, 
but  scarcely  distinguishable  by  that  of  candles.  Its 
odour  and  taste  are  disagreeable,  strong,  and  so  cha- 
racteristic, that  it  is  impossible  to  mistake  it  for  any 
other  gas.  When  we  breathe  it,  even  much  diluted 
with  air,  it  occasions  a sense  of  strangulation*  constric- 
tion of  the  thorax , and  a copious  discharge  from  the 
nostrils.  If  respired  in  larger  quantity,  its  excites  vio- 
lent coughing,  with  spitting  of  blood,  and  would 
speedily  destroy  the  individual,  amid  violent  distress. 
Its  specific  gravity  is  2.4733.  This  is  better  inferred 
from  the  specific  gravities  of  hydrogen  and  muriatic 
acid  gases,  than  from  the  direct  weight  of  chlorine, 
from  the  impossibility  of  confining  it  over  mercury. 
On  volume  of  hydrogen,  added  to  one  of  chlorine, 
form  two  of  the  ucid  gas.  Hence,  if  from  twice  the 
specific  gravity  of  muriatic  gas=2.5427,  we  subtract 
that  of  hydrogen=0. 061)4,  the  difference  2.4733  is  the 
sp.  gr.  of  chlorine.  100  cubic  inches  at  mean  pressure 
and  temperature  weigh  75|  grains.  • See  Gas. 

In  its  perfectly  dry  state,  it  has  no  effect  on  dry  vege- 
table colours.  With  the  aid  of  a Jittle  moisture,  it 
bleaches  them  into  a yellowish-white.  Scheele  first 
remarked  this  bleaching  property;  Berthollet  applied 
it  to  the  art  of  bleaching  in  France ; and  from  him 
Mr.  Watt  introduced  its  use  into  Great  Britain. 

If  a lighted  wax  taper  be  immersed  rapidly  into  this 
gas,  it  consumes  very  fast,  with  a dull  reddish  flame, 
and  much  smoke.  The  taper  will  not  burn  at  the  sur- 
face of  the  gas.  Hence,  if  slowly  introduced,  it  is  apt 
to  be  extinguished.  The  alkaline  metals,  as  well  as 
copper,  tin,  arsenic,  zinc,  antimony,  in  fine  lamina;  or 
filings,  spontaneously  burn  in  chlorine.  Metallic 
chlorides  result.  Phosphorus  also  takes  fire  at  ordi- 
nary temperatures,  and  is  converted  into  a chloride. 
Sulphur  may  be  melted  in  the  gas  without  taking  fire. 
It  forms  a liquid  chloride,  of  a reddish  colour.  When 
dry,  it  is  not  altered  by  any  change  of  temperature. 
Enclosed  in  a phial  with  a little  moisture,  it  concretes 
into  crystalline  needles,  at  40°  Fahr. 

According  to  Tlienard,  water  condenses,  at  the  tem- 
perature of  68°  F.  and  at  29.92  barom.  1 1-2  times  its 
volume  of  chlorine,  and  forms  aqueous  chlorine,  for- 
merly called  liquid  oxymuriatic  acid.  This  combina- 
tion is  best  made  in  the  second  bottle  of  a Woolfe’s  ap- 
paratus, the  first  being  charged  with  a little  water,  to 
intercept  the  muriatic  acid  gas,  while  the  third  bottle 
may  contain  potassa-water  or  milk  of  lime,  to  con- 
dense the  superfluous  gas.  Thenard  says,  that  a kilo- 
gramme of  salt  is  sufficient  for  saturating  from  10  to 
12  litres  of  water.  These  measures  correspond  to 
2 1-3  lbs.  avoirdupois,  and  to  from  21  to  25  pints  Eng- 
lish. There  is  an  ingenious  apparatus  for  making 
aqueous  chlorine,  described  in  Berthollet’s  Elements 
of  Dying,  vol.  i. ; which,  however,  the  happy  substi- 
tution of  slacked  lime  for  water,  by  Mr.  Charles  Ten- 
nant, of  Glasgow,  has  superseded,  for  the  purposes  of 
manufacture.  It  congeals  t>y  cold  at  40°  Fahr.  and 
affords  crystallized  plates,  of  a deep  yellow,  contain- 
ing a less  proportion  of  water  than  the  liquid  combina- 
tion. Hence  when  chlorine  is  passed  into  water  at 
temperatures  under  40°,  the  liquid  finally  becomes  a 
concrete  mass,  which  at  a gentle  heat  liquefies  with 
effervescence,  from  the  escape  of  the  excess  of  chlorine. 
When  steam  and  chlorine  are  passed  together  through 
a red-hot  porcelain  tube,  they  are  converted  into  mu- 
riatic acid  and  oxygen.  A like  result  is  obtained  by 
exposing  aqueous  chlorine  to  the  solar  rays;  with  this 
difference,  that  a little  chloric  acid  is  formed.  Hence 
aqueous  chlorine  should  be  kept  in  a dark  place. 
Aqueous  chlorine  attacks  almost  all  the  metals  at  an 
ordinary  temperature,  forming  muriates  or  chlorides, 
and  heat  is  evolved.  It  has  the  smell,  taste,  and  co- 
lour of  chlorine ; and  acts,  like  it,  on  vegetable  and 
animal  colours.  Its  taste  is  somewhat  astringent,  but 
not  in  the  least  degree  acidulous. 

When  we  put  in  a perfectly  dark  place,  at  the  ordi- 

217 


CHL 


CHI* 

nary  temperature,  a mixture  of  chlorine  and  hydrogen 
it  experiences  no  kind  of  alteration,  even  in  the  space 
of  a great  many  days.  But  if,  at  the  same  low  tem- 
perature, we  expose  the  mixture  to  the  diffuse  light  of 
day,  by  degrees  the  two  gases  enter  into  chemical  com- 
bination, and  form  muriatic  acid  gas.  There  is  no 
change  in  the  volume  of  the  mixture,  but  the  change 
of  its  nature  may  be  proved,  by  its  rapid  absorbability 
by  water,  its  not  exploding  by  the  lighted  taper,  and 
the  disappearance  of  the  chlorine  hue.  To  produce 
the  complete  discoloration,  we  must  expose  the  mix- 
ture finally  for  a few  minutes  to  the  sunbeam.  If  ex- 
posed at  first  to  this  intensity  of  light,  it  explodes  with 
great  violence,  and  instantly  forms  muriatic  acid  gas. 
The  same  explosive  combination  is  produced  by  the 
electric  spark  and  the  lighted  taper.  Thenard  says,  a 
heat  of  392°  is  sufficient  to  cause  the  explosion.  The 
proper  proportion  is  an  equal  volume  of  each  gas. 
Chlorine  and  nitrogen  combine  into  a remarkable  de- 
tonating compound,  by  exposing  the  former  gas  to  a 
solution  of  an  ammoniacal  salt.  Chlorine  is  the  most 
powerful  agent  for  destroying  contagious  miasmata. 
The  disinfecting  phials  of  Morveau  evolve  this  gas.” 
— Ure. 

CHLORITE.  A mineral  usually  friable  or  very 
easy  to  pulvei  lze,  composed  of  a multitude  of  little 
spangles,  or  shining  small  grains,  falling  to  powder 
under  the  pressure  of  the  fingers.  There  are  four  sub- 
species. 

1.  Chlorite  earth.  In  green,  glimmering,  and  some- 
what pearly  scales,  with  a shining  green  streak. 

2.  Common  chlorite.  A massive  mineral  of  a black- 
ish-green colour,  a shining  lustre,  and  a foliated  frac- 
ture passing  into  earthy. 

3.  Chlorite  slate.  A massive,  blackish-green  mine- 
ral, with  a resinous  lustre,  and  curve  slaty  or  scaly- 
foliated  fracture. 

4.  Foliated  chlorite.  Colour  between  mountain  and 
blackish-green. 

CHLORIODATE.  A compound  of  the  chloriodic 
acid  with  a salifiable  basis. 

CHLORIODE  ACID.  Acidum  chloriodicum.  See 
Chloriodic  acid. 

CHLORIODIC  ACID.  Acidum  chloriodicum. 
Chloriode  acid.  Sir  H.  Davy  formed  it,  by  admitting 
chlorine  in  excess  to  known  quantities  of  iodine,  in 
vessels  exhausted  of  air,  and  repeatedly  heating  the 
sublimate.  Operating  in  this  way,  he  found  that  iodine 
absorbs  less  than  one-third  of  its  weight  of  chlorine. 

Chloriodic  acid  is  a very  volatile  substance,  formed 
by  the  sublimation  of  iodine  in  a great  excess  of  chlo- 
rine, is  of  a bright  yellow  colour;  when  fused  it  be- 
comes of  a deep  orange,  and  when  rendered  elastic,  it 
forms  a deep  orange-coloured  gas.  It  is  capable  of 
combining  with  much  iodine  when  they  are  heated 
together  ; its  colour  becomes,  in  consequence,  deeper, 
and  the  chloriodic  acid  and  the  iodine  rise  together  in 
the  elastic  state.  The  solution  of  the  chloriodic  acid 
in  water,  likewise  dissolves  large  quantities  of  iodine, 
so  that  it  is  possible  to  obtain  a fluid  containing  very 
different  proportions  of  iodine  and  chlorine. 

When  two  bodies  so  similar  in  their  characters,  and 
in  the  compounds  they  form,  as  iodine  and  chlorine,  act 
upon  substances  at  the  same  time,  it  is  difficult,  Sir  H. 
observes,  to  form  a judgment  of  the  different  parts  that 
they  play  in  the  new  chemical  arrangement  produced. 
It  appears  most  probable,  that  the  acid  property  of 
the  chloriodic  compound  depends  upon  the  combination 
of  the  two  bodies : and  its  action  upon  solutions  of 
the  alkalies  and  the  earths  may  be  easily  explained, 
when  it  is  considered  that  chlorine  has  a greater  ten- 
dency than  iodine  to  form  double  compounds  with  the 
metals,  and  that  iodine  has  a greater  tendency  than 
chlorine  to  form  triple  compounds  with  oxygen  and 
the  metals. 

A triple  compound  of  this  kind  with  sodium  may 
exist  in  sea  water,  and  would  be  separated  with  the 
first  crystals  that  are  formed  by  its  evaporation. 
Hence,  it  may  exist  in  common  salt.  Sir  H.  Davy 
ascertained,  by  feeding  birds  with  bread  soaked  with 
water,  holding  some  of  it  in  solution,  that  it  is  not 
poisonous  like  iodine  itself. — Urc's  Ch.  Diet. 

CHLORO-CARBONOUS  ACID.  “Theterm 
chloro-carbonic  which  has  been  given  to  this  compound 
is  incorrect,  leading  to  the  belief  of  its  being  a com- 
pound of  chlorine  and  acidified  charcoal,  instead  of 
being  a compound  of  chlorine  and  the  protoxide  of 


charcoal.  Chlorine  has  no  immediate  action  on  car- 
bonic oxide,  when  they  are  exposed  to  each  other  in 
common  daylight  over  mercury : not  even  when  the 
electric  spark  is  passed  through  them.  Experiments 
made  by  Dr.  John  Davy,  in  the  presence  of  his  brother 
Sir  H.  Davy,  prove  that  they  combine  rapidly  when 
exposed  to  the  direct  solar  beams,  and  one  volume  of 
each  is  condensed  into  one  volume  of  the  compound. 
The  resulting  gas  possesses  very  curious  properties, 
approaching  to  those  of  an  acid.  From  the  peculiar 
potency  of  the  sunbeam  in  effecting  this  combination, 
Dr.  Davy  called  it  phosgene  gas.  The  constituent 
gases,  dried  over  muriate  of  lime,  ought  to  be  intro- 
duced from  separate  reservoirs  into  an  exhausted 
globe,  perfectly  dry,  and  exposed  for  fifteen  minutes  to 
bright  sunshine,  or  for  twelve  hours  to  daylight.  The 
colour  of  the  chlorine  disappears,  and  on  opening  the 
stop-cock  belonging  to  the  globe  under  mercury  re- 
cently boiled,  an  absorption  of  one-half  the  gaseous 
volume  is  indicated.  The  resulting  gas  possesses  pro- 
perties perfectly  distinct  from  those  belonging  to  either 
carbonic  oxide  or  chlorine. 

It  does  not  fume  in  the  atmosphere.  Its  odour  is 
different  from  that  of  chlorine,  something  like  that 
which  might  be  imagined  to  result  from  the  smell  of 
chlorine  combined  with  that  of  ammonia.  It  is  in 
fact  more  intolerable  and  suffocating  than  chlorine  it- 
self, and  affects  the  eyes  in  a peculiar  manner,  pro- 
ducing a rapid  flow  of  tears,  and  occasioning  painful 
sensations. 

It  reddens  dry  litmus  paper;  and  condenses  four 
volumes  of  ammonia  into  a white  salt,  while  heat  is 
evolved.  This  ammoniacal  compound  is  neutral,  has 
no  odour,  but  a pungent  saline  taste;  is  deliquescent, 
decomposable  by  the  liquid  mineral  acids,  dissolves 
without  effervescing  in  vinegar,  and  sublimes  unal- 
tered in  muriatic,  carbonic,  and  sulphurous  acid 
gases.  Sulphuric  acid  resolves  itself  into  cai  Donic  and 
muriatic  acids,  in  the  proportion  of  two  in  volume  of 
the  latter,  and  one  of  the  former.  Tin,  zinc,  anti 
mony,  and  arsenic,  heated  in  chloro-carbonous  acid, 
abstract  the  chlorine,  and  leave  the  carbonic  oxide 
expanded  to  its  original  volume.  There  is  neither 
ignition  nor  explosion  takes  place,  though  the  action 
of  the  metals  is  rapid.  Potassium  acting  on  the  com- 
pound gas  produces  a solid  chloride  and  charcoal. 
White  oxide  of  zinc,  with  chloro-carbonous  acid, 
gives  a metallic  chloride,  and  carbonic  acid.  Neither 
sulphur,  phosphorus,  oxygen,  nor  hydrogen,  though 
aided  by  heat,  produce  any  change  on  the  acid  gas. 
But  oxygen  and  hydrogen  together,  in  due  propor- 
tions, explode  in  it ; or  mere  exposure  to  water  con- 
verts it  into  muriatic  and  carbonic  acid  gases. 

From  its  completely  neutralizing  ammonia,  which 
carbonic  acid  does  not;  from  its  separating  carbonic 
acid  from  the  subcarbonate  of  this  alkali,  while  itself 
is  not  separable  by  the  acid  gases  or  acetic  acid,  and 
its  reddening  vegetable  blues,  there  can  be  no  hesita- 
tion in  pronouncing  the  chloro-carbonous  compound  to 
be  an  acid.  Its  saturating  powers  indeed  surpass 
every  other  substance.  None  condenses  so  large  a 
proportion  of  ammonia. 

One  measure  of  alkohol  condenses  twelve  of  chloro- 
carbonous  gas  without  decomposing  it ; and  acquires 
the  peculiar  odour  and  power  of  aft'ecting  the  eyes. 

To  prepare  the  gas  in  a pure  state,  a good  air-pump 
is  required,  perfectly  tight  stop-cocks,  dry  gases,  and 
dry  vessels.  Its  specific  gravity  may  be  inferred  from 
the  specific  gravities  of  its  constituents,  of  which  it  is 
the  sum.  Hence  2.4733  + 0.9722  = 3.4455,  is  the 
specific  gravity  of  chloro-carbonous  gas ; and  100 
cubic  inches  weigh  105.15  grains.  It  appears  that 
when  hydrogen,  carbonic  oxide,  and  chlorine,  mixed  in 
equal  volumes,  are  exposed  to  light,  muriatic  and 
chloro-carbonous  acids  are  formed,  in  equal  propor- 
tions, indicating  an  equality  of  affinity. 

The  paper  in  the  Phil.  Trans,  for  1812,  from  which 
the  preceding  facts  are  taken,  does  honour  to  the  school 
of  Sir  II.  Davy.  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  as  well  as 
Dr.  Murray,  made  controversial  investigations  on  the 
subject  at  the  same  time,  but  without  success.  The- 
nard has,  however,  recognised  its  distinct  existence 
and  properties,  by  the  name  of  carbo-muriatic  acid,  in 
the  2d  volume  of  his  System,  published  in  1814,  where 
he  considers  it  as  a compound  of  muriatic  and  carbonic 
acids,  resulting  from  the  mutual  actions  of  the  oxygen- 
ated muriatic  acid  and  carbonic  oxide.” — Ure. 


CHL 


CHL 


CHLOROCYANIC  ACID.  Acidum  chloro-cyani- 
tum.  Chloroprussic  acid.  “ When  hydrocyanic  acid 
is  mixed  with  chlorine,  it  acquires  new  properties.  Its 
odour  is  much  increased.  It  no  longer  forms  prussian 
clue  with  solutions  of  .iron,  but  a green  precipitate, 
Which  becomes  blue  by  the  addition  of  sulphurous 
acid.  Hydrocyanic  acid,  thus  altered,  had  acquired 
the  name  of  oxyprussic , because  it  was  supposed  to 
have  acquired  oxygen.  Gay  Lussac  subjected  it  to  a 
minute  examination,  and  found  that  it  was  a com- 
pound of  equal  volumes  of  chlorine  and  cyanogen, 
whence  he  proposed  to  distinguish  it  by  the  name  of 
chlorocyanic  acid.  To  prepare  this  compound,  he 
passed  a current  of  chlorine  into  solution  of  hydrocya- 
nic acid,  till  it  destroyed  the  colour  of  sulphate  of  in- 
digo ; and  by  agitating  the  liquid  with  mercury,  he 
deprived  it  of  the  excess  of  chlorine.  By  distillation, 
afterward,  in  a moderate  heat,  an  elastic  fluid  is  dis- 
engaged, which  possesses  the  properties  formerly 
assigned  to  oxyprussic  acid.  This,  however,  is  not 
pure  chlorocyanic  acid,  but  a mixture  of  it  with  car- 
bonic acid,  in  proportions  which  vary  so  much  as  to 
make  it  difficult  to  determine  them. 

When  hydrocyanic  acid  is  supersaturated  with  chlo- 
rine, and  the  excess  of  this  last  is  removed  by  mercury, 
the  liquid  contains  chlorocyanic  and  muriatic  acids. 
Having  put  mercury  into  a glass  jar  until  it  was  3-4ths 
full,  he  filled  it  completely  with  that  acid  liquid,  and 
inverted  the  jar  in  a vessel  of  mercury.  On  exhaust- 
ing the  receiver  of  an  air-pump,  containing  this  vessel, 
the  mercury  sunk  in  the  jar,  in  consequence  of  the 
elastic  fluid  disengaged.  By  degrees,  the  liquid  itself 
was  entirely  expelled,  and  swam  on  the  mercury  on 
the  outside.  On  admitting  the  air,  the  liquid  could 
not  enter  the  tube,  but  only  the  mercury,  and  the 
whole  elastic  fluid  condensed,  except  a small  bubble. 
Hence  it  was  concluded,  that  chlorocyanic  acid  was 
not  a permanent  gas,  and  that,  in  order  to  remain, 
gaseous  under  the  pressure  of  the  air,  it  must  be  mix- 
ed with  another  gaseous  substance. 

The  mixture  of  chlorocyanic  and  carbonic  acids  has 
the  following  properties.  It  is  colourless.  Its  smell 
is  very  strong.  A very  small  quantity  of  it  irritates 
the  p'ituitory  membrane,  and  occasions  tears.  It  red- 
dens litmus,  is  not  inflammable,  and  does  not  detonate 
when  mixed  with  twice  its  bulk  of  oxygen  or  hydro- 
gen. Its  density,  determined  by  calculation,  is  2.111. 
Its  aqueous  solution  does  not  precipitate  nitrate  of 
silver  nor  barytes  water.  The  alkalies  absorb  it  ra- 
pidly, but  an  excess  of  them  is  necessary  to  destroy  its 
odour.  If  we  then  add  an  acid,  a strong  effervescence 
of  carbonic  acid  is  produced,  and  the  odour  of  chloro- 
cyanic acid  is  no  longer  perceived.  If  we  add  an  ex- 
cess of  lime  to  the  acid  solution,  ammonia  is  disen- 
gaged in  abundance.  To  obtain  the  green  preci- 
pitate from  solution  of  iron,  we  must  begin  by  mixing 
chlorocyanic  acid  with  that  solution.  We  then  add  a 
little  potassa,  and  at  last  a little  acid.  If  we  add  the 
alkali  before  the  iron,  we  obtain  no  green  precipitate. 

Chlorocyanic  acid  exhibits  with  potassium  almost 
the  same  phenomena  as  cyanogen.  The  inflammation 
is  equally  slow,  and  the  gas  diminishes  as  much  in 
volume.” — Ure. 

CHLOROPHANE.  A violet  fluor  spar,  found  in 
Siberia. 

CHLOROPHILE.  The  name  lately  given  by  Pel- 
letier and  Caventou  to  the  green  matter  of  the  leaves 
of  plants.  They  obtain  it  by  pressing,  and  then  wash- 
ing in  water,  the  substance  of  many  leaves,  and  after- 
ward treating  it  with  alkohol.  A matter  was  dis- 
solved, which,  when  separated  by  evaporation,  and 
purified  by  washing  in  hot  water,  appeared  as  a deep- 
green  resinous  substance.  It  dissolves  entirely  in  alko- 
hol, tether,  oils,  or  alkalies;  it  is  not  altered  by  expo- 
sure to  air ; it  is  softened  by  heat,  but  does  not  melt ; 
it  burns  with  flame,  and  leaves  a bulky  coal.  Hot 
water  slightly  dissolves  it.  Acetic  acid  is  the  only  acid 
that  dissolves  it  in  great  quantity.  If  an  earthy  or  me- 
tallic salt  be  mixed  with  the  alkoholic  solution,  and 
then  alkali  or  alkaline  subcarbonate  be  added,  the 
oxide  or  earth  is  thrown  down  in  combination  with 
much  of  the  green  substance,  forming  a lake.  These 
lakes  appear  moderately  permanent  when  exposed  to 
the  air.  It  is  supposed  to  be  a peculiar  proximate 
principle. 

CHLOROPRUSSIC  ACID.  See  Chlorocyanic  acid. 

CHLORO'SIS.  (From  xXwpoj,  green,  pale;  from 


%Xoa,  or  xhortiherla  virens  • and  hence  x^pacya  and 
X^copiaais,  viror,  pallor ; so  called  from  the  yellow- 
greenish  look  those  have  who  are  affected  with  it.) 
Febris  alba ; Febris  amatoria ; Icterus  albus  ; Chlo- 
rasma.  The  green-sickness.  A genus  of  disease  in 
the  class  Cachexia , and  order  Impetigines  of  Cullen. 
It  is  a disease  which  affects  young  females  who  labour 
under  a retention  or  suppression  of  the  menses.  Hea- 
viness, listlessness  to  motion,  fatigue  on  the  least  exer- 
cise, palpitations  of  the  heart,  pains  in  the  back,  loins, 
and  hips,  flatulency,  and  acidities  in  the  stomach  and 
bowels,  a preternatural  appetite  for  chalk,  lime,  and 
various  other  absorbents,  together  with  many  dyspep- 
tic symptoms,  usually  attend  on  this  disease.  As  it 
advances  in  its  progress,  the  face  becomes  pale,  or 
assumes  a yellowish  hue ; the  whole  body  is  flaccid, 
and  likewise  pale  ; the  feet  are  affected  with  cedema- 
tous  swellings ; the  breathing  is  much  hurried  by  any 
considerable  exertion  of  the  body  ; the  pulse  is  quick, 
but  small ; and  the  person  is  apt  to  be  affected  with 
many  of  the  symptoms  of  hysteria.  To  procure  a flow 
of  the  menses,  proves  in  some  cases  a very  difficult 
matter  ; and  where  the  disease  has  been  of  long  stand- 
ing, various  morbid  affections  of  the  viscera  are  often 
brought  on,  which  at  length  prove  fatal.  Dissections 
of  those  who  have  died  of  chlorosis,  have  usually 
shown  the  ovaria  to  be  in  a scirrhous,  or  dropsical 
state.  In  some  cases,  the  liver,  spleen,  and  mesenteric 
glands,  have.likewise  been  found  in  a diseased  state. 

The  cure  is  to  be  attempted  by  increasing  the  tone 
of  the  system,  and  exciting  the  action  of  the  uterine 
vessels.  The  first  may  be  effected  by  a generous  nu- 
tritive diet,  with  the  moderate  use  of  wine ; by  gentle 
and  daily  exercise,  particularly  on  horseback ; by 
agreeable  company,  to  amuse  and  quiet  the  mind ; and 
by  tonic  medicines,  especially  the  preparations  of  iron, 
joined  with  myrrh,  &c.  Bathing  will  likewise"  help 
much  to  strengthen  them,  if  the  temperature  of  the 
bath  be  made  gradually  lower,  as  the  patient  bears  it ; 
and  sometimes  drinking  the  mineral  chalybeate  wa- 
ters may  assist.  The  bowels  must  be  kept  regular,  and 
occasionally  a gentle  emetic  will  prepare  for  the  tonic 
plan.  The  other  object  of  stimulating  the  uterine  ves- 
sels may  be  attained  by  the  exercises  of  walking  and 
dancing ; by  frequent  friction  of  the  lower  extremities ; 
by  the  pediluvium,  hip-bath,  &c. ; by  electric  shocks, 
passed  through  the  region  of  the  uterus;  by  active 
purgatives,  especially  those  formula  containing  aloes, 
which  acts  particularly  on  the  rectum.  These  means 
may  be  resorted  to  with  more  probability  of  success, 
when  there  appear  efforts  of  the  system  to  produce  the 
discharge,  the  general  health  having  been  previously 
improved.  Various  remedies  have  been  dignified  with 
the  title  of  emmenagogues,  though  mostly  little  to  be 
depended  on,  as  madder,  &c.  In  obstinate  cases,  the 
tinctura  ly  ttae,  or  savine,  may  be  tried,  but  with  proper 
caution,  as  the  most  likely  to  avail. 

CHLOROUS  ACID.  Acidum  chlorosum.  See 
Chlorous  oxide. 

CHLOROUS  OXIDE.  Euchorine.  Protoxide  of 
chlorine.  “ To  prepare  it,  put  chlorate  of  potassa  into 
a small  retort,  and  pour  in  twice  as  much  muriatic 
acid  as  will  cover  it,  diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of 
water.  By  the  application  of  a gentle  heat,  the  gas  is 
evolved.  It  must  be  collected  over  mercury. 

Its  tint  is  much  more  lively,  and  more  yellow  than 
chlorine,  and  hence  its  discoverer  named  it  euchlorine. 
Its  smell  is  peculiar,  and  approaches  to  that  of  burnt 
sugar.  It  is  not  respirable.  It  is  soluble  in  water,  to 
which  it  gives  a lemon  colour.  Water  absorbs  8 or 
10  times  its  volume  of  this  gas.  Its  specific  gravity  is 
to  that  of  common  air.nearly  as  2.40  to  1 ; for  100  cubic 
inches  weigh,  according  to  Sir  H.  Davy,  between  74 
and  75  grains.  If  the  compound  gas  result  from  4 vo- 
lumes of  chlorine  + 2 of  oxygen,  weighing  12.1154, 
which  undergo  a condensation  of  one-sixth,  then  the 
specific  gravity  comes  out  2.423,  in  accordance  with 
Sir  H.  Davy’s  experiments.  He  found  that  50  mea- 
sures detonated  in  a glass  tube  over  pure  mercury,  lost 
their  brilliant  colour,  and  became  60  measures,  of 
which  40  were  chlorine  and  20  oxygen. 

This  gas  must  be  collected  and  examined  with  much 
prudence,  and  in  very  small  quantities.  A gentle  heat, 
even  that  of  the  hand,  will  cause  its  explosion,  with 
such  force  as  to  burst  thin  glass.  From  this  facility  of 
decomposition,  it  is  not  easy  to  ascertain  the  action  of 
combustible  bodies  upon  it.  None  of  the  metals  that 

219 


CKO 


CHO 


burn  in  chlorine  act  upon  this  gas  at  common  temper- 
atures ; but  when  the  oxygen  is  separated,  they  then 
inflame  in  the  clorine.  This  may  be  readily  exhibited, 
by  first  introducing  into  the  protoxide  a little  Dutch 
foil,  which  will  not  be  even  tarnished ; but  on  apply- 
ing a heated  glass  tube  to  the  gas  in  the  neck  of  the 
bottle,  decomposition  instantly  takes  place,  and  the 
foil  burns  with  brilliancy.  When  already  in  chemi- 
cal union,  therefore,  chlorine  has  a stronger  attraction 
for  oxygen  than  for  metals;  but  when  insulated,  its 
affinity  lor  the  latter  is  predominant.  Protoxide  of 
chlorine  has  no  action  on  mercury,  but  chlorine  is 
rapidly  condensed  by  this  metal  into  calomel.  Thus, 
the  two  gases  may  be  completely  separated.  When 
phosphorus  is  introduced  into  the  protoxide,  it  instantly 
burns,  as  it  would  do  in  a mixture  of  two  volumes  of 
chlorine  and  one  of  oxygen ; and  a chloride  and  acid 
of  phosphorus  result.  Lighted  taper  and  burning 
sulphur  likewise  instantly  decompose  it.  When  the 
protoxide,  freed  from  water,  is  made  to  act  on  dry  ve- 
getable colours,  it  gradually  destroys  them,  but  first 
gives  to  the  blues  a tint  ojf  red  ; from  which,  from  its 
absorbability  by  water,  and  the  strongly  acrid  taste  of 
the  solution  approaching  to  sour,  it  may  be  considered 
as  approximating  to  an  acid  in  its  nature.” — Ure. 

Chlorure  of  iodine.  The  chloriodic  acid. 

CHNUS.  (From  xvauw,  to  grind,  or  rasp.)  1.  Chaff ; 
Bran. 

2.  Fine  wool,  or  lint,  which  is,  as  it  were,  rasped 
from  lint. 

Cho'ana.  ( Xoava , a funnel ; from  x^i  t0  pour 
out.)  1.  A funnel. 

2.  The  infundibulum  of  the  kidney  and  brain. 

Cho'anus.  A furnace  made  like  a funnel,  for  melt- 
ing metals. 

CHO'COLATE.  (Dr.  Alston  says  this*  word  is 
compounded  of  two  Indian  words,  choco,  sound,  and 
atte , water  ; because  of  the  noise  made  in  its  prepara- 
tion.) An  article  of  diet  prepared  from  the  cacao-nut ; 
highly  nourishing,  particularly  when  boiled  with  milk 
and  eggs.  It  is  frequently  recommended  as  a restora- 
tive in  cases  of  emaciation  and  consumption.  See 
Theobroma  cacao. 

Chocolate  tree.  See  Theobroma  cacao. 

Chce'nicis.  (From  xotvtxtj,  the  nave  of  a wheel.) 
The  trepan  ; so  called  by  Galen  and  P.  iEgineta. 

Chce'rades.  (From  %otpos,  a swine.)  The  same 
as  scrofula. 

Chceradole'thron.  (From  %otpof,  a swine,  and 
oAefipoj,  destruction ; so  named  from  its  being  danger- 
ous if  eaten  by  hogs.)  Hogbane.  A name  in  Aelius 
for  the  Xanthium , or  louse-bur. 

CHOI'RAS.  (From  %otpof,  a swine ; so  called 
because  hogs  are  diseased  with  it.)  See  Scrofula. 

Choke  damp.  The  name  given  by  miners  to  a nox- 
ious air,  which  is  now  known  to  be  carbonic  acid  gas , 
found  in  mines,  wells,  and  mineral  springs.  See  Car- 
bonic acid. 

Cho'lades.  (From  %oX>7,  the  bile.)  Sothesmallei 
intestines  are  called,  because  they  contain  bile. 

CHOLiEUS.  (XoAatoj,  bilious.)  Biliary. 

Chola'go.  See  Cholas. 

CHOLAGO'GA-  (From  xoA>?)  hile,  and  ayo>,  t0 
evacuate.)  Cholegon.  By  cholagogues,  the  ancients 
meant  only  such  purging  medicines  as  expelled  the 
internal  faeces,  which  resembled  the  cystic  bile  in  their 
yellow  colour,  and  other  properties. 

Cho'las.  (From  %oAt7,  the  bile.)  Cholago.  All 
the  cavity  of  the  right  hypochondrium,  and  part  of  the 
neighbourhood,  is  so  called  because  it  contains  the 
liver  which  is  the  strainer  of  the  gall. 

CHO'LE.  Xo\rj.  The  bile. 

CHOLE'DOCHUS.  (From  %oX»7)  bile,  and  Sevopai, 
to  receive ; receiving  or  retaining  the  gall.)  The  re- 
ceptacle of  bile. 

Choledochus  ductus.  Ductus  communis  cholc- 
dochus.  The  common  biliary  duct,  which  conveys 
both  cystic  and  hepatic  bile  into  the  intestinum  duo- 
denum. 

Chole'gon.  See  Cholagoga. 

CHOLERA.  (Celsus  derives  it  from  x<Aj7>  and  paw, 
literally  a flow  of  bile,  and  Trallian,  from  %oAaf,  and 
paco,  intestinal  flux.)  Diarrhoea  cholerica ; Felliflua 
passio.  A genus  of  disease  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the 
class  Neuroses,  and  order  Spasmi.  It  is  a purging 
and  vomiting  of  bile,  with  anxiety,  painful  gripings, 
spasms  of  the  abdominal  muscles,  and  those  of  the 


calves  of  the  legs.  There  are  two  species  of  this 
genus : — 1.  Cholera  spontanea , which  happens,  in  hot 
seasons,  without  any  manifest  cause.  2.  Cholera 
accidcntalis,  which  occurs  after  the  use  of  food  that 
digests  slowly,  and  irritates.  In  warm  climates  it  is 
met  with  at  all  seasons  of  the  year,  and  its  occurrence 
is  very  frequent ; but  in  England,  and  other  cold  cli- 
mates, it  is  apt  to  be  most  prevalent  in  the  middle  of 
summer,  particularly  in  the  month  of  August ; and 
the  violence  of  the  disease  has  usually  been  observed 
to  be  greater  in  proportion  to  the  intenseness  of  the 
heat.  It  usually  comes  on  with  soreness,  pain,  disten- 
sion, and  flatulency  in  the  stomach  and  intestines, 
succeeded  quickly  by  a severe  and  frequent  vomiting, 
and  purging  of  bilious  matter,  heat,  thirst,  a hurried 
respiration,  and  frequent  but  weak  and  fluttering 
pulse.  When  the  disease  is  not  violent,  these  symp- 
toms, after  continuing  for  a day  or  two,  cease  gra- 
dually, leaving  the  patient  in  a debilitated  and  ex- 
hausted state ; but  where  the  disease  proceeds  with 
much  violence,  there  arises  great  depression  of  strength, 
with  cold  clammy  sweat's,  considerable  anxiety,  a hur- 
ried and  short  respiration,  and  hiccups,  with  a sinking, 
and  irregularity  of  the  pulse,  which  quickly  terminate 
in  death ; an  event  that  not  unfrequently  happens 
within  the  space  of  twenty-four  hours. 

The  appearances  generally  observed  on  dissection 
are,  a quantity  of  bilious  matter  in  the  primae  via; ; 
the  ducts  of  the  liver  relaxed  and  distended ; and  seve- 
ral of  the  viscera  have  been  found  displaced,  probably 
by  the  violent  vomiting.  In  the  early  period  of  the 
disease,  when  the  strength  is  not  much  exhausted,  the 
object  is  to  lessen  the  Irritation,  and  facilitate  the  dis- 
charge of  the  bile,  by  tepid  demulcent  liquids,  fre- 
quently exhibited.  It  will  likewise  be  useful  to  procure 
a determination  to  the  surface  by  fomentations  to  the 
abdomen,  the  pediluvium,  or  even  the  warm  bath. 
But  where  the  symptoms  are  urgent,  and  the  patient 
appears  rapidly  sinking  from  the  continued  vomiting, 
violent  pain,  &c.  it  is  necessary  to  give  opium  freely, 
but  in  a small  bulk ; from  one  to  three  grains,  or  even 
more,  in  a table  spoonful  of  linseed  infusion,  or  with 
an  effervescing  saline  draught;  which  must  be  repeated 
at  short  intervals,  every  hour  pefhaps,  till  relief  be  ob- 
tained. Sometimes,  where  the  stomach  could  not  be 
got  to  retain  the  opium,  it  has  answered  in  the  form 
of  clyster ; or  a liniment  containing  it  may  be  rubbed 
into  the  abdomen ; or  a blister,  applied  over  the 
stomach,  may  lessen  the  irritability  of  that  organ. 
Afterward  the  bile  may  be  allowed  to  evacuate  itself 
downwards;  or  mild  aperients,  or  clysters,  given,  if 
necessary,  to  promote  its  discharge.  When  the  urgent 
symptoms  are  relieved,  the  strength  must  he  restored 
by  gentle  tonics,  as  the  aromatic  bitters,  calumba,»and 
the  like,  with  a light  nutritious  diet:  strong  toast- and 
water  is  the  best  drink,  or  a little  burnt  brandy  may  be 
added  if  there  is  much  Iangour.  Exposure  to  cold 
must  be  carefully  avoided,  particularly  keeping  the 
abdomen  and  the  feet  warm ; and  great  attention  is 
necessary  to  regulate  the  bowels,  and  procure  a regular 
discharge  of  bile,  lest  a relapse  should  happen.  It  will 
also  be  proper  to  examine  the  state  of  the  abdomen, 
whether  pressure  give  pain  at  any  part,  because  in- 
flammation in  the  primoe  via;  is  very  liable  to  super- 
vene, often  in  an  insidious  manner;  should  that  be  the 
case,  leeches,  blistering  the  part,  and  other  suitable 
means,  must  be  promptly  resorted  to. 

CHOLE'RICA.  (From  xoAepa,  the  cholera.)  Me- 
dicines which  relieve  the  cholera. 

CHOLESTERIC  ACID.  “ When  the  fat  matter  of 
the  human  biliary  calculi  is  treated  with  ni:ric  acid, 
which  Chevreuil  proposed  to  call  cholesterine,  there  is 
formed  a peculiar  acid,  which  is  called  the  cholesteric. 
To  obtain  it,  the  cholesterine  is  heated  with  its  weight 
of  concentrated  nitric  acid,  by  which  it  is  speedily  at- 
tacked and  dissolved.  There  is  disengaged,  at  the  same 
time,  much  oxide  of  azot ; and  the  liquor,  on  cooling, 
and  especially  on  the  addition  of  water,  lets  fall  a yel- 
low matter,  which  is  the  cholesteric  acid  impure,  or 
impregnated  with  nitric  acid.  It  may  be  purified  by 
repeated  washings  in  boiling  water.  However,  after 
having  washed  it,  it  is  better  to  effect  its  fusion  in  the 
midst  of  hot  water ; to  add  to  it  a small  quantity  of 
carbonate  of  lead ; to  let  the  whole  boil  for  some  hours, 
decanting  and  renewing  the  water  from  time  to  time; 
then  to  put  the  remaining  dried  mass  in  contact  with 
alkohol,  and  to  evaporate  the  alkoholic  solution.  The 


CHO 


CHQ 

residuum  now  obtained  is  the  purest  possible  choleste- 
ric acid. 

This  acid  has  an  orange-yellow  colour  when  it  is  in 
mass ; but  it  appears  in  white  needles,  when  dissolved 
in  alkohol,  and  left  to  spontaneous  evaporation.  Its 
taste  is  very  feeble,  and  slightly  styptic ; its  taste  re- 
sembles that  of  butter ; and  its  specific  gravity  is  inter- 
mediate between  that  of  alkohol  and  water.  It  fuses 
at  58°  C.  and  is  not  decomposed  till  the  temperature  be 
raised  much  above  that  of  boiling  water.  It  then 
affords  oil,  water,  carbonic  acid,  and  carburetted  hy- 
drogen, but  no  trace  of  ammonia.  It  is  very  soluble  in 
alkohol,  sulphuric  and  acetic  aether,  in  the  volatile  oils 
of  lavender,  rosemary,  turpentine,  bergamot,  &c.  It 
is,  on  the  other  hand,  insoluble  in  the  fixed  oils  of  olives, 
sweet  almonds,  and  castor  oil.  It  is  equally  so  in  the 
vegetable  acids,  and  almost  entirely  insoluble  in  water, 
which  takes  up  merely  enough  to  make  it  redden  lit- 
mus. Both  in  the  cold,  and  with  heat,  nitric  aci<J  dis- 
sol  ves  without  altering  it.  Concentrated  sulphuric  acid 
acting  on  it  for  a considerable  time,  only  carbonizes  it. 

It  appears  that  the  cholesteric  acid  is  capable  of 
uniting  with  the  greater  part  of  the  salifiable  bases. 
All  the  resulting  salts  are  coloured,  some  yellow,  others 
orange,  and  others  red.  The  cholesterates  of  potassa, 
soda,  ammonia,  and  probably  of  morphia,  are  very 
soluble  and  deliquescent;  almost  all  the  others  are  in- 
soluble, or  nearly  so.  There  is  none  of  them  which 
cannot  be  decomposed  by  all  the  mineral  acids,  except 
the  carbonic,  and  by  the  greater  part  of  the  vegetable 
acids;  so  that  on  pouring  one  of  these  acids  into  a 
solution  of  the  cholesterate,  the  cholesteric  acid  is  in- 
stantly separated  in  flocks.  The  soluble  cholesterates 
form  precipitates  in  all  the  metallic  solutions,  whose 
base  has  the  property  of  forming  an  insoluble  or 
slightly  soluble  salt  with  cholesteric  acid. 

Pelletier  and  Caventou  found  the  cholesterate  of 
barytes  to  consist  of  100  of  acid,  and  56.259  base ; 
whence  the  prime  equivalent  of  the  former  appears  to 
be  about  17.35.  Yet  they  observed,  on  the  other  hand, 
that  on  treating  the  cholesterate  of  lead  with  sulphuric 
acid,  they  obtained  as  much  sulphate  of  lead  as  of 
cholesterate.  From  this  experiment,  the  equivalent  of 
the  dry  acid  would  seem  to  be  5 ; hence  we  may  ima- 
gine, that  when  the  cholesteric  acid  unites  to  the  oxide 
of  lead,  and  in  general  to  all  the  oxides  which  have  a 
slight  affinity  for  oxygen,  there  takes  place  something 
similar  to  what  happens  in  the  reaction  of  oxide  of 
lead  and  oxalic  acid.” — Journ.  de  Thar.  iii.  292. 

CIIOLESTERINE.  The  name  given  by  Chevreuil 
to  the  pearly  substance  of  human  biliary  calculi.  It 
consists  of  72  carbon,  6.66  oxygen,  and  21.33  hydrogen, 
by  Berard. 

CHOLICE'LE.  (From  xoX?7,  bile,  and  a 

tumour.)  A swelling  formed  by  the  bile  accumulated 
in  the  gall-bladder. 

CHOLOLITHUS.  (From  %oX?7,  bile,  and  Xt0oj,  a 
stone,  gall-stone.)  A name  of  a genus  of  disease  in 
the  Class,  Cocliaca ; Order,  Splanchnica , of  Good’s 
IS’osology,  characterized  by  pain  about  the  region  of 
the  liver,  catenating  with  pain  at  the  pit  of  the  stomach ; 
the  pulse  unchanged ; sickness ; dyspepsy ; inactivity ; 
bilious  concretion  in  the  gall  bladder,  or  bile  ducts.  It 
has  two  species,  Chololithus  quiescens , the  quiescent 
gall-stone,  and  C.  means , the  passing  of  gall-stones. 
CHOLOLITHICUS.  Of  or  belonging  to  gall-stone. 
Chodo'ma.  (From  %wXof,  lame,  or  maimed.)  I. 
A halting,  or  lameness  in  the  leg. 

2.  Galen  says  that,  in  Hippocrates,  it  signifies  any 
distortion  of  a limb. 

CliONDRO.  Some  muscles  have  this  word  forming 
a part  of  their  name,  because  they  are  connected  with 
a particular  cartilage. 

Chondroglo'ssus.  (From  xovdpov,  a cartilage,  and 
yXtoffdrj,  the  tongue.)  A muscle  so  named  from  its  in- 
sertion, which  is  in  the  basis  or  cartilaginous  part  of 
the  tongue.  See  Hyoglossus. 

CHONDRO'LOGY.  {Chondrologia ; from  %ov5poj, 
a cartilage,  and  Xoyoj,  a discourse.)  A discourse  on 
cartilages. 

CHONDRo-pnxRVNQiEus.  (From  %ov< 5poj,  a carti- 
lage, and  Qapvyl , the  upper  part  of  the  fauces.)  A 
muscle  so  named  because  it  rises  in  the  cartilaginous 
part  of  the  tongue,  and  is  inserted  in  the  pharynx. 
CHO'NDROS.  Xovdpos ■ 1.  A cartilage. 

-2.  A food  of  the  ancients,  the  same  as  alica. 

3.  Any  grumous  concretion. 


CHONDROSYNDE'SMUS.  (From  xovdpos,  a car- 
tilage, and  trvvdew,  to  tie  together.)  A cartilaginous 
ligament. 

Cho'ndrus.  A cartilage. 

Cho'ne.  X(j)vq.  The  infundibulum. 

Cho  ra.  Xwpa.  A region.  Galen,  in  his  book  De 
Usu  Partium,  expresses  by  it  particularly  the  cavities 
of  the  eyes ; but,  in  others  of  his  writings,  he  intimates 
by  it  any  void  space. 

CHO  RDA.  (From  x°pd* 7,  which  properly  signifies 
an  intestine,  or  gut,  of  which  a chord  may  be  made.) 
1.  A cord,  or  assemblage  of  fibres. 

2.  A tendon. 

3.  A painful  tension  of  the  penis  in  the  venerea 
disease. 

4.  Sometimes  the  intestines  are  called  chord®. 

Chorda  magna.  A name  of  the  tendo  Jichillis 

Chorda  tympani.  A branch  of  the  seventh  pair 

of  nerves.  The  portio  dura  of  the  seventh  pair  of 
nerves,  having  entered  the  tympanum,  sends  a small 
branch  to  the  stapes,  and  another  more  considerable 
one,  which  runs  across  the  tympanum  from  behind 
forwards,  passes  between  the  long  leg  of  the  incus  and 
the  handle  of  the  malleus,  then  goes  outiat  the  same 
place  where  the  tendon  of  the  anterior  muscle  of  the 
malleus  enters.  It  is  called  chorda  tympani,  because 
it  crosses  the  tympanum  as  a cord  crosses  the  bottom 
of  a drum.  Dr.  Monro  thinks,  that  the  chorda  tympani 
is  formed  by  the  second  branch  of  the  fifth  pair,  as 
well  as  by  the  p.ortio  dura  of  the  seventh. 

Chorda  tendi^ea.  The  tendinous  and  cord-like 
substances  which  connect  the  carnece  columnce  of  the 
ventricles  of  the  heart  to  the  auricular  valves. 

Chorda  Willisii.  The  small  fibres  which  cross  the 
sinuses  of  the  dura  mater.  They  are  so  termed,  be- 
cause Willis  first  described  them. 

Chorda'psus.  (From  %op<5>7,  a cord,  and  an'Jo),  to 
knit.)  A sort  of  painful  colic,  where  the  intestines 
appear  to  be  twisted  into  knots. 

CHORDEE'.  ( Chordd . French. ) A spasmodic 

contraction  of  the  penis,  that  sometimes  attends  go- 
norrhoea, and  is  often  followed  by  a haemorrhage. 

CHO  REA.  ( Xopeia ; from  vopos,  a chorus,  which 
of  old  accompanied  dancing.  It  is  called  St.  Vitus’s 
dance,  because  some  devotees  of  St.  Vitus  exercised 
themselves  so  long  in  dancing,  that  their  intellects  were 
disordered,  and  could  only  be  restored  by  dancing  again 
at  the  anniversary  of  St.  Vitus.)  Chorea  Sancti  Viti. 
Synclonus  chorea  of  Good.  St.  Vitus’s  dance.  Con- 
vulsive motions  of  the  limbs,  as  if  the  person  were 
dancing.  It  is  a genus  of  disease,  arranged  by  Cullen 
in  the  class  J\Teuroscs  ; and  order  Spasmi.  These  con- 
vulsive motions,  most  generally,  are  confined  to  one 
side,  and  affect  principally  the  arm  and  leg.  When 
any  motion  is  attempted  to  be  made,  various  fibres  of 
other  muscles  act  which  ought  not;  and  thus  a con- 
trary effect  is  produced  from  what  the  patient  intended. 
It  is  chiefly  incident  to  young  persons  of  both  sexes, 
and  makes  its  attack  between  the  age  of  ten  and  fifteen, 
occurring  but  seldom  after  that  of  puberty. 

By  some  practitioners  it  has  been  considered  rather 
as  a paralytic  affection  than  as  a convulsive  disorder, 
and  has  been  thought  to  arise  from  a relaxation  of  the 
muscles,  which,  being  unable  to  perform  their  func- 
tions in  moving  the  limbs,  shake  them  irregularly  by 
jerks.  Chorea  Sancti  Viti  is  occasioned  by  various 
irritations,  as  teething,  worms,  offensive  smells,  poi- 
sons, &c.  It  arises  likewise  in  consequence  of  violent 
affections  of  the  mind,  as  horror,  fear,  and  anger.  In 
many  cases  it  is  produced  by  general  weakness ; and, 
in  a few,  it  takes  place  from  sympathy,  at  seeing  the 
disease  in  others. 

The  fits  are  sometimes  preceded  by  a coldness  of  the 
feet  and  limbs,  or  a kind  of  tingling  sensation,  that 
ascends  like  cold  air  up  the  spine,  and  there  is  a flatu- 
lent pain  in  the  left  hypochondrium,  with  obstinate 
costiveness.  At  other  times,  the  accession  begins  with 
yawning,  stretching,  anxiety  about  the  heart,  palpita- 
tions, nausea,  difficulty  of  swallowing,  noise  in  the 
ears,  giddiness,  and  pains  in  the  head  and  teeth ; and 
then  come  on  the  convulsive  motions. 

These  discover  themselves  at  first  by  a kind  of  lame- 
ness, or  instability  of  one  of  the  legs,  which  the  person 
draws  after  him  in  an  odd  and  ridiculous  manner;  nor 
can  he  hold  the  arm  of  the  same  side  still  for  a mo- 
ment: for  if  he  lays  it  on  his  breast,  or  any  other  part 
of  his  body,  it  is  forced  quickly  from  thence  by  an  in- 


CHR 


CHR 


voluntary  motion.  If  he  is  desirous  of  drinking,  he 
uses  many  singular  gesticulations  before  he  can  carry 
the  cup  to  his  head,  and  it  is  forced  in  various  direc- 
tions, till  at  length  he  gets  it  to  his  mouth ; when  he 
pours  the  liquor  down  his  throat  in  great  haste,  as  if 
he  meant  to  afford  amusement  to  the  by-standers. 
Sometimes  various  attempts  at  running  and  leaping 
take  place ; and  at  others,  the  head  and  trunk  of  the 
body  are  affected  with  convulsive  motions.  In  many 
instances,  the  mind  is  affected  with  some  degree  of 
fatuity,  and  often  shows  the  same  causeless  emotions 
(such  as  weeping  and  laughing)  which  occur  in  hyste- 
ria. When  this  disease  arises  in  children,  it  usually 
ceases  about  the  age  of  puberty  ; and  in  adults,  is  often 
carried  off  by  a change  from  the  former  mode  of  living. 
Unless  it  passes  into  some  other  disease,  such  as  epi- 
lepsy, it  is  hardly  attended  with  danger. 

The  leading  indications  in  the  treatment  of  this  com- 
plaint are,  1.  To  obviate  the  several  exciting  causes ; 
2.  To  correct  any  faulty  state  of  the  constitution, 
which  may  appear  to  give  a predisposition ; 3.  To  use 
those  means  which  experience  has  shown  best  calcu- 
lated to  allay  irregular  muscular  action.  Among  the 
sources  of  irritation,  the  most  common  is  the  state  of 
the  bowels ; and  the  steady,  but  moderate,  use  of  active 
cathartics  has  often  a great  effect  upon  the  disease,  im- 
proving the  appetite  and  strength  at  the  same  time. 
Senna,  scammony,  jalap,  &c.  may  be  exhibited  ac- 
cording to  circumstances,  often  in  conjunction  with 
calomel,  particularly  where  the  liver  is  torpid.  The 
general  debility  usually  attending  indicates  the  em- 
ployment of  tonics,  as  the  cinchona,  chalybeates,  or 
sulphate  of  zinc,  which  is  particularly  useful ; and 
with  these,  cold  bathing,  not  too  long  continued,  may 
be  advantageously  conjoined;  also  requiring  the  pa- 
tient to  use  muscular  exertion,  as  much  as  they  can 
readily,  will  assist  materially  in  the  cure.  Sometimes 
in  violent  cases,  and  in  irritable  constitutions,  the  oc- 
casional exhibition  of  opium,  or  other  sedative,  may 
be  required,  taking  care,  however,  that  the  bowels  are 
not  confined  thereby.  Occasionally  too,  where  the 
above  means  are  not  successful,  the  more  powerful 
antispasmodics  may  be  tried,  as  aether,  camphor,  musk, 
&c.  Electricity  also  has  been  by  some  recommended. 

CHO  RION.  (From  to  escape ; because  it 

always  escapes  from  the  uterus  with  the  foetus.) 
Shaggy  chorion.  The  external  membrane  of  the  foetus 
in  utero. 

CHO'ROID.  ( Choroidea ; from  x°9L0Vi  the  qhorion, 
and  uSos,  resemblance.)  Resembling  the  chorion,  a 
membrane  of  the  foetal  ovum. 

Choroid  membrane.  Mcmbrana  choroides.  The 
second  tunic  of  the  eye,  lying  immediately  under  the 
sclerotica,  to  which  it  is  connected  by  vessels.  The 
true  knowledge  of  this  membrane  is  necessary  to  a 
perfect  idea  of  the  iris  and  uvea.  The  tunica  cho- 
roidea commences  at  the  optic  nerve,  and  passes  for- 
wards, with  the  sclerotic  coat,  to  the  beginning  of  the 
cornea  transparens,  where  it  adheres  very  firmly  to 
the  sclerotic  membrane,  by  means  of  a cellular  mem- 
brane, in  the  form  of  a white  fringe,  called  the  ciliary 
circle.  It  then  recedes  from  the  sclerotica  and  cornea 
and  ciliary  circle,  directly  downwards  and  inwards, 
forming  a round  disk,  which  is  variously  coloured; 
hence,  blue,  black  eyes,  &c.  This  coloured  portion, 
reflected  inwards,  is  termed  the  iris , and  its  posterior 
surface  is  termed  uvea.  The  choroid  membrane  is 
highly  vascular,  and  its  external  vessels  are  disposed 
like  stars,  and  termed  vasa  vorticosa.  The  internal 
surface  of  this  membrane  is  covered  with  a black  pig- 
ment, called  the  pigment  of  the  choroid  membrane. 

Choroid  plexus.  Plexus  choroideus.  A plexus 
of  blood-vessels,  situated  in  the  lateral  ventricles  of  the 
brain. 

Choroid  tunic.  See  Choroid  membrane. 

Chri'sis.  (From  xptw,  to  anoint.)  An  inunction, 
or  anointing  of  any  part. 

Christmas  rose.  See  Hcllcborus  niger. 

Chris'ttjm.  (From  %ptw,  to  anoint.)  An  unguent, 
or  ointment  of  any  kind. 

CHRO'MAS.  A chromate,  or  salt,  farmed  by  the 
union  of  chromic  acid  with  salifiable  bases ; as  chro- 
mate of  lead,  &c. 

[“  Chromate  of  iron , is  found  in  large  quantities,  at 
the  bare  hills,  near  Baltimore,  (Maryland.)  massive  and 
granular,  in  veins  and  masses  disseminated  through  a 
serpentine  rock.  Perhaps  in  no  part  of  the  world  has 
222 


so  much  been  discovered  at  one  place . it  furnishes  th« 
means  of  preparing  the  beautiful  paint  called  the  chro- 
mic yellow,  with  which  carriages  and  furniture  are 
now  painted  in  the  United  States.  Chromate  of  iron, 
in  octaedral  crystals,  very  small  and  magnetic,  is  found 
at  the  same  place,  and  has  nowhere  else  been  disco- 
vered, as  far  as  we  can  learn  from  the  writings  of 
mineralogists.  The  crystals  are  found  in  the  ra- 
vines, and  on  the^and  of  the  rivulets  of  the  bare- 
hills,  mixed  with  granular  chromate  of  iron.  The 
green  oxide  of  chrome  is  also  found  there,  colouring 
the  talc,  as  well  as  the  ruby  or  violet  coloured  ore." — 
Bruce's  Min.  Jour.  A.] 

Chromati'smus.  (From  xpcopa7r$w,  to  colour.) 
The  morbid  discoloration  of  any  of  the  secretions,  as 
of  the  urine,  or  blood. 

CHRO'MIC  ACID.  Acidum  chromicum.  “ This 
acid  was  extracted  from  the  red  lead  ore  of  Siberia, 
by  treating  this  ore  with  carbonate  of  potassa,  and 
separating  the  alkali  by  means  of  a more  powerful 
acid.  In  this  state  it  is  a red  or  orange-coloured  pow- 
der, of  a peculiar  rough  metallic  taste,  which  is  more 
sensible  in  it  than  in  any  other  metallic  acid.  If  this 
powder  be  exposed  to  the  action  of  light  and  heat,  it 
loses  its  acidity,  and  is  converted  into  green  oxide  of 
chrome,  giving  out  pure  oxygen  gas.  The  chromic 
acid  is  the  first  that  has  been  found  to  deoxygenate 
itself  easily  by  the  action  of  heat,  and  afford  oxygen 
gas  by  this  simple  operation.  It  appears  that  several 
of  its  properties  are  owing  to  the  weak  adhesion  of  a 
part  at  least  of  its  oxygen.  The  green  oxide  of  chrome 
cannot  be  brought  back  to  the  state  of  an  acid,  unless 
its  oxygen  be  restored  by  treating  it  with  some  other 
acid. 

The  chromic  acid  is  soluble  in  water , and  crystallizes, 
by  cooling  and  evaporation,  in  kmgish  prisms  of  a ruby 
red.  Its  taste  is  acrid  and  styptic.  Its  specific  gravity 
is  not  exactly  known ; but  it  always  exceeds  that  of 
water.  It  powerfully  reddens  the  tincture  of  turnsole. 

Its  action  on  combustible  substances  is  little  known 
If  it  be  strongly  heated  with  charcoal,  it  grows  black, 
and  passes  to  the  metallic  state  without  melting 

Of  the  acids , the  action  of  the  muriatic  on  it  the 
most  remarkable.  If  this  be  distilled  with  the  chromic 
acid,  by  a gentle  heat,  it  is  readily  converted  into  chlo- 
rine. It  likewise  imparts  to  it  by  mixture  the  property 
of  dissolving  gold ; in  which  the  chromic  resembles 
the  nitric  acid.  This  is  owing  to  the  weak  adhesion 
of  its  oxygen,  and  it  is  the  only  one  of  the  metallic 
acids  that  possesses  this  property. 

The  extraction  of  chromic  acid  from  the  French  ore, 
is  performed  by  igniting  it  with  its  own  weight  of  nitre 
in  a crucible.  The  residue  is  lixiviated  with  water, 
which  being  then  filtered,  contains  the  chromate  of 
potassa.  On  pouring  into  this  a little  nitric  acid  and 
muriate  of  barytes,  an  instantaneous  precipitate  of  the 
chromate  of  barytes  takes  place.  After  having  pro- 
cured a certain  quantity  of  this  salt,  it  must  be  put  in 
its  moist  state  into  a capsule,  and  dissolved  in  the 
smallest  possible  quantity  of  weak  nitric  acid.  The 
barytes  is  to  be  then  precipitated  by  very  dilute  sul- 
phuric acid,  taking  care  not  to  add  an  excess  of  it. 
When  the  liquid  is  found  by  trial  to  contain  neither 
sulphuric  acid  nor  barytes,  it  must  be  filtered.  It  now 
consists  of  water,  with  nitric  and  chromic  acids.  The 
whole  is  to  be  evaporated  to  dryness,  conducting  the 
heat  at  the  end  so  as  not  to  endanger  the  decomposi- 
tion of  the  chromic  acid,  which  will  remain,  in  the 
capsule  under  the  form  of  a reddish  matter.  It  must 
be  kept  in  a glass  phial  well  corked. 

Chromic  acid,  heated  with  a powerful  acid,  becomes 
chromic  oxide;  while  the  latter,  heated  with  the  hy- 
drate of  an  alkali,  becomes  chromic  acid.  As  the 
solution  of  the  oxide  is  green,  and  that  of  the  acid 
yellow,  these  transmutations  become  very  remarkable 
to  the  eye.  From  Berzelius’s  experiments  on  the 
combinations  of  the  chromic  acid  with  barytes,  and 
oxide  of  lead,  its  prime  equivalent  seems  to  be  6.5; 
consisting  of  3.5  chromium,  and  3.0  oxygen. 

It  readily  unites  with  alkalies,  and  is  the  only  acid 
that  has  the  property  of  colouring  its  salts,  whence  the 
name  of  chromic  has  been  given  it.  If  two  parts  of 
the  red  lead  ore  of  Siberia  in  fine  potvder  be  boiled 
with  one  of  an  alkali  saturated  with  carbonic  acid, 
in  forty  parts  of  water,  a caibonate  of  lead  will  be 
precipitated,  and  the  chromate  remain  dissolved.  The 
solutions  are  of  a lemon  colour,  and  afford  crystals 


CHIt 


CHY 


of  a somewhat  deeper  hue.  Those  of  chromate  of 
ammonia  are  in  yellow  laminae,  having  the  metallic 
lustre  of  gold. 

The  chromate  of  barytes  is  very  little  soluble,  and 
that  of  lime  still  less.  They  are  both  of  a pale  yel- 
low, and  when  heated  give  out  oxygen  gas,  as  do  the 
alkaline  chromates. 

If  the  chromic  acid  be  mixed  with  filings  of  tin  and 
the  muriatic  acid,  it  becomes  at  first  yellowish-brown, 
and  afterward  assumes. a bluish-green  colour,  which 
preserves  the  same  shade  after  desiccation.  iEther 
alone  gives  it  the  same  dark  colour.  With  a solu- 
tion of  nitrate  of  mercury,  it  gives  a precipitate  of  a 
dark  cinnabar  colour.  With  a solution  of  nitrate  of 
silver,  it  gives  a precipitate,  which,  the  moment  it  is 
formed,  appears  of  a beautiful  carmine  colour,  but 
becomes  purple  by  exposure  to  the  light.  This  com- 
bination, exposed  to  the  heat  of  the  blow-pipe,  melts 
before  the  charcoal  is  inflamed,  and  assumes  a black- 
ish and  metallic  appearance.  If  it  be  then  pulver- 
ized, the  powder  is  still  purple ; but  after  the  blue 
flame  of  the  lamp  is  brought  into  contact  with  this 
powder,  it  assumes  a green  colour,  and  the  silver 
appears  in  globules  disseminated  through  its  sub- 
stance. 

With  nitrate  of  copper  it  gives  a chesnut-red  preci- 
pitate. With  the  solution  of  sulphate  of  zinc,  muri- 
ate of  bismuth,  muriate  of  antimony,  nitrate  of  nickel, 
and  muriate  of  platina,  it  produces  yellowish  precipi- 
tates, when  the  solutions  do  not  contain  an  excess  of 
acid.  With  muriate  of  gold  it  produces  a greenish 
precipitate. 

When  melted  with  borax,  or  class,  or  acid  of  phos- 
phorus, it  communicates  to  it  a beautiful  emerald- 
green  colour. 

If  paper  be  impregnated  with  it,  and  exposed  to 
the  sun  a few  days,  it  acquires  a green  colour,  which 
remains  permanent  in  the  dark. 

A slip  of  iron,  or  tin,  put  into  its  solution,  imparts 
to  it  the  same  colour. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  tannin  produces  a floccu- 
lent  precipitate  of  a brown  fawn  colour. 

Sulphuric  acid,  when  cold,  produces  no  effect  on  it; 
but  when  warm  it  makes  it  assume  a bluish-green 
colour.” — lire's  Diet. 

CHROMIUM.  ( Chromium , it.  n. ; from  %pa)/za,  co- 
lour : because  it  is  remarkable  for  giving  colour  to  its 
combinations.)  The  name  of  a metal  which  may  be 
extracted  either  from  the  native  chromate  of  lead  or 
of  iron.  The  latter  being  cheapest  and  most  abun- 
dant, is  usually  employed. 

The  brown  chromate  of  iron  is  not  acted  upon  by 
nitric  acid,  but  most  readily  by  nitrate  of  potassa, 
with  the  aid  of  a red  heat.  A chromate  of  potassa, 
soluble  in  water,  is  thus  formed.  The  iron  oxide 
thrown  out  of  combination  may  be  removed  from  the 
residual  part  of  the  ore  by  a short  digestion  in  dilute 
muriatic  acid.  A second  fusion  with  4:  of  nitre,  will 
give  rise  to  a new  portion  of  chromate  of  potassa. 
Having  decomposed  the  whole  of  the  ore,  we  saturate 
the  alkaline  excess  with  nitric  acid,  evaporate  and 
crystallize.  The  pure  crystals,  dissolved  in  water,  are 
to  be  added  to  a solution  of  neutral  nitrate  of  mer- 
cury ; whence,  by  complex  affinity,  red  chromate  of 
mercury  precipitates.  Moderate  ignition  expels  the 
mercury  from  the  chromate,  and  the  remaining  chro- 
mic acid  may  be  reduced  to  the  metallic  state,  by 
being  exposed  in  contact  of  the  charcoal  from  sugar, 
to  a violent  heat. 

Chromium  thus  procured,  is  a porous  mass  of  ag- 
glutinated grains.  It  is  very  brittle,  and  of  a grayish- 
white,  intermediate  between  tin  and  steel.  It  is  some- 
times obtained  in  needleform  crystals,  which  cross 
each  other  in  all  directions.  Its  sp.  gravity  is  5.9.  It 
is  susceptible  of  a feeble  magnetism.  It  resists  all 
the  acids  except  nitromuriatic,  which,  at  a boiling 
heat,  oxidizes  it  and  forms  a muriate.  Tlienard  de- 
scribes only  one  oxide  of  chromium;  but  there  are 
probably  two,  besides  the  acid  already  described. 

1.  The  protoxide  is  green,  infusible,  indecomposable 
by  heat,  reducible  by  voltaic  electricity,  and  not  acted 
on  by  oxygen  or  air.  When  heated  to  dull  redness 
with  the  half  of  its  weight  of  potassium  or  sodium, 
it  forms  a brown  matter,  which,  cooled  and  exposed 
to  the  air,  burns  with  flame,  and  is  transformed  into 
chromate  of  potassa  or  soda,  of  a canary-yellow  co- 
lour. It  is  this  oxide  which  is  obtained  by  calcining 


the  chromate  of  mercury  in  a small  earthen  retort  for 
about  | of  an  hour.  The  beak  of  the  retort  is  to  be 
surrounded  with  a tube  of  wet  linen,  and  plunged 
into  water,  to  facilitate  the  condensation  of  the  mer- 
cury. The  oxide,  newly  precipitated  from  acids,  has 
a dark-green  colour,  and  is  easily  redissolved  ; but 
exposure  to  a dull-red  heat  ignites  it,  and  renders  it 
denser,  insoluble,  and  of  a light-green  colour.  This 
change  arises  solely  from  the  closer  aggregation  of 
the  particles,  for  the  weight  is  not  altered. 

2.  The  deutoxide  is  procured  by  exposing  the  pro- 
tonitrate to  heat,  till  the  fumes  of  nitrous  gas  cease 
to  issue.  A brilliant  brown  powder,  insoluble  in 
acids,  and  scarcely  soluble  in  alkalies,  remains.  Mu- 
riatic acid  digested  on  it  exhales  chlorine,  showing 
the  increased  proportion  of  oxygen  in  this  oxide. 

3.  The  tritoxide  has  been  already  described  among 
the  acids.  It  may  be  directly  procured  by  adding  nitrate 
of  lead  to  the  above  nitrochromate  of  potassa,  and  di- 
gesting the  beautiful  orange  precipitate  of  chromate 
of  lead  with  moderately  strong  muriatic  acid,  till  its 
power  of  action  be  exhausted.  The  fluid  produced 
is  to  be  passed  through  a filter,  and  a little  oxide  of 
silver  very  gradually  added,  till  the  whole  solution 
becomes  of  a deep  red  tint.  This  liquor,  by  slow  eva- 
poration, deposites  small  ruby-red  crystals,  which  are 
the  hydrated  chromic  acid.  The  prime  equivalent  of 
chromic  acid  deduced  from  the  chromates  of  barytes 
and  lead  by  Berzelius,  is  6.544,  if  we  suppose  them  to 
be  neutral  salts.  According  to  this  chemist,  the  acid 
contains  double  the  oxygen  that  the  green  oxide  does. 
But  if  those  chromates  be  regarded  as  subsalts,  then 
the  acid  prime  would  be  13.088,  consisting  of  6 oxy- 
gen = 7.088  metal ; while  the  protoxide  would  consist 
of  3 oxyxen  + 7.088  metal ; and  the  deutoxide  of  an 
intermediate  proportion. 

CHRO'NIC.  (Chronicus ; from  xpovoj,  time.)  A 
term  applied  to  diseases  which  are  of  long  continu- 
ance, and  mostly  without  fever.  It  is  used  in  oppo- 
sition to  the  term  acute.  See  Acute. 

CHRU'PSIA.  (From  xpoa,  colour,  and  oip if,  sight.) 
Visus  coloratus.  A disease  of  the  eyes,  in  which  the 
person  perceives  objects  of  a different  colour  from  their 
natural  one. 

CH R Y S A'NTHEMUM.  (From  ^pvtros,  gold,  and 
avdepov,  a flower.)  1.  The  name  ot  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Syngenesia  ; .Order, 
Polygamia.  Sun-flower,  or  marigold. 

2.  Many  herbs  are  so  called,  the  flowers  of  which  are 
of  a bright  yellow  colour. 

Chrysanthemum  leucanthemum.  The  system- 
atic name  of  the  great  ox-eye  daisy.  Maudlin-wort 
Bellis-major ; Bupkthalmum  majus ; Leucanthemum 
vulgar e;  Bcllidioides ; Consolida  media ; Oculus  bo- 
vis.  The  Chrysanthemum;— foliis  amplexicaulibut . 
oblongis , supernl  serralis , inferni  dentatis,  of  Lin- 
naius.  The  flowers  and  herb  were  formerly  esteemed 
in  asthmatic  and  phthisical  diseases,  but  have  now 
deservedly  fallen  into  disuse. 

Chry'se.  (From  xPva°Si  gold-)  The  name  of  a 
yellow  plaster. 

Chysele'ctrum.  (From  %pixroj,  gold,  and  yheK'Jpov, 
amber.)  Amber  of  a golden  yellow  colour. 

Chrysi'ppea.  (From  Chrysippzis,  its  discoverer.) 
An  herb  enumerated  by  Pliny. 

Chrysi'tis.  (From  xpc<ro?,  gold.)  1.  Litharge. 

2.  The  yellow  foam  of  lead. 

3.  The  herb  yarrow,  from  the  golden  colour  of  its 
flower. 

CHRYSOBA'LANUS.  (From  xpurroj,  gold,  and 
Bahavos , a nut ; so  named  because  of  its  colour, 
which,  before  it  is  dried,  is  yellow.)  The  nutmeg. 

CHRYSOBERYL.  Cymophane  of  Haiiy.  A mi- 
neral of  an  asparagus  green  colour  and  vitreous  lus- 
tre, found  in  the  Brazil,  and  Ceylon. 

[Chrysoberyl  is  found  in  the  United  States,  and  is 
sometimes  employed  in  jewelry.  In  the  township  of 
Haddam,  on  the  Connecticut  river,  and  in  the  State  of 
Connecticut,  it  occurs  in  granite  in  six-sided  prisms 
and  six-sided  tables ; its  colour  varies  from  greenish 
yellow  to  yellowish  green.  A.] 

CIIRYSOCO'LLA.  (From  xpiaxoj,  gold,  and  KoWtj , 
cement.)  Gold  solder ; Borax. 

CHYSO'COMA.  (From  xpueroj,  gold,  and  Kopy, 
hair;  so  called  from  its  golden,  hair-like  appearance.) 
The  herb  milfoil,  or  yarrow.  See  Achillea  millefo- 
lium. 


223 


CHY 


C'ttY 


Chrysogo'nia.  (From  %pucro?,  gold,  and  yivoiiai, 
to  become.)  A tincture  of  gold. 

Chrysola'chanon.  (From  xpvcos,  gold,  and  Xa- 
Xavov,  a pot-herb  ; so  named  from  its  having  a yellow 
leaf.)  The  herb  orach  ; a species  of  atriplex. 

CHRYSOLITE.  Peridot  of  Hauy.  Topaz  of  the 
ancients,  while  our  topaz  is  their  chrysolite.  The  hard- 
est of  all  gems  of  a pistachio-green  colour.  It  comes 
from  Egvpt  and  Bohemia. 

CHRYSOSPLE'NIUM.  (From  xpixroj,  gold,  and 
aanXtviov,  spleenwort.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnasan  system.  Class,  Dccandria ; 
Order,  Digynia.  Golden  saxifrage.  , 

CflRYSOPRASE.  A variety  of  calcedony. 

Chrysu'lcus.  (From  xpixroj,  gold,  and  cXku),  to 
take  away.)  The  aqua  regia  which  has  the  property 
of  dissolving  gold. 

[CHURCH,  Dr.  Benjamin,  was  graduated  at  How- 
ard College  in  1754.  He  established  himself  as  a phy- 
sician in  the  town  of  Boston,  where  he  rose  to  very 
considerable  eminence  in  his  profession.  As  a skilful 
and  dexterous  operator  in  surgery,  he  was  inferior  to 
no  one  of  his  contemporaries  in  New-England;  and 
as  a physician,  he  was  in  a career  of  distinguished  re- 
putation. He  possessed  a brilliant  genius,  a lively 
poetic  fancy,  and  was  an  excellent  writer.  For  several 
years  preceding  the  American  revolution,  he  was  a 
conspicuous  character,  and  had  great  influence  among 
the  leading  whigs  and  patriots  of  the  day.  When  the 
war  commenced  in  1775,  his  character  was  so  high 
that  he  was  appointed  physician-general  to  the  army. 

But  while  he  was  performing  the  duties  assigned  him, 
circumstances  occurred  which  led  to  a suspicion  that 
he  held  a treacherous  correspondence  with  the  enemy. 
Certain  letters  in  cipher  were  intercepted,  which  he 
had  written  to  a relation  in  Boston.  He  was  imme- 
diately arrested,  imprisoned,  and  tried  before  a mili- 
tary tribunal  appointed  to  investigate  his  conduct,  and 
was  pronounced  guilty  of  a criminal  correspondence 
with  the  enemy.  It  appears  that  the  only  evidence 
by  which  he  was  convicted,  rested  on  an  intercepted 
letter  directed  to  a friend  in  Boston.  This  letter  was 
written  in  cipher,  and  when  it  was  deciphered  and 
examined,  its  contents  seemed  in  a considerable  de- 
gree to  justify  the  plea  which  he  had  made,  that  it  was 
designed  as  an  innocent  stratagem  to  deceive  and  draw 
from  the  enemy  some  information  for  the  benefit  of 
the  public.  Dr.  C.  was,  at  the  same  time,  a member  of 
(he  House  of  Representatives,  from  which  he  would 
have  been  expelled  had  he  not  resigned  his  seat.  He 
was,  however,  arraigned  before  the  House,  subjected 
to  a rigid  examination,  and  his  letter  was  read  by  him- 
self by  paragraphs,  and  commented  upon,  and  explain- 
ed. His  defence  before  the  House  may  be  considered 
as  a specimen  of  brilliant  talents  and  great  ingenuity. 
“Confirmed,”  said  he,  in  assured  innocence,  “I  stand 
prepared  for  your  keenest  searchings.  The  warmest 
bosom  here  does  not  flame  with  a brighter  zeal  for  the 
security,  happiness,  land  liberties  of  America,  than 
mine.”  So  high  was  party  zeal,  and  such  the  jealousy 
and  prejudice  of  the  day,  that  a torrent  of  indignation 
was  ever  at  hand  to  sweep  from  the  land  every  guilty 
or  suspected  character.  In  the  instance  of  Dr.  C.,  there 
were  not  a few  among  the  most  respectable  and  intel- 
ligent of  the  community,  who  expressed  strong  doubts 
of  a criminal  design  in  his  conduct.  It  was,  however, 
liis  hard  fate  to  pine  in  prison  until  the  following  year, 
when  he  obtained  permission  to  depart  for  the  West 
Indies.  The  vessel  in  which  he  sailed  was  supposed 
to  have  foundered  at  sea,  as  no  tidings  respecting  her 
were  ever  obtained.  A.] 

CHUSITE.  A yellowish-green  translucent  mineral, 
found  by  Saussure  in  the  cavities  of  porphyries,  in 
the  environs  of  Limboin". 

CHYAZIC  ACID.  See  Prussic  acid. 

Chyla'ria.  (From  %uXo?,  chyle.)  A discharge  of 
a whitish  mucous  urine,  of  the  colour  and  consistence 
of  chyle. 

CHYLE.  Chylus.  The  milk-like  liquor  observed 
some  hours  after£  eating,  in  the  lacteal  vessels  of  the 
tnesentery,  and  in  the  thoracic  duct.  It  is  separated 
by  digestion  from  the  chyme,  and  is  that  fluid  sub- 
stance from  which  the  blood  is  formed.  See  Digestion. 

“ The  chyle  may  be  studied  under  two  different 
forms : 

1st,  When  it  is  mixed  with  chyme  in  the  small  in- 
testine. 

2-2.4 


2d,  Under  the  liquid  form,  circulating  in  the  chyli- 
ferous  vessels,  and  the  thoracic  duct. 

No  person  having  particularly  engaged  in  the  exa 
mination  of -the  chyle  during  its  stay  in  the  small  intes 
tine,  our  knowledge  on  this  point  is  little.  The  liquid 
chyle  contained  in  the  chyliferous  vessels  has  been  ex- 
amined with  great  care. 

In  order  to  procure  it,  the  best  manner  consists  in 
giving  food  to  an  animal,  and,  when  the  digestion-is 
supposed  to  be  in  full  activity,  to  strangle  it,  or  to  cut 
the  spinal  marrow  behind  the  occipital  bone.  The 
whole  length  of  the  breast  is  cut  open  ; the  hand  is 
thrust  in  so  as  to  pass  a ligature  which  embraces  the 
aorta,  the  oesophagus,  and  the  thoracic  duct,  the  near- 
est to  the  neck  possible ; the  ribs  of  the  left  side  are 
then  twisted  or  broken,  and  the  thoracic  duct  is  seen, 
closely  adhering  to  the  oesophagus.  The  upper  part  is 
detached,  and  carefully  wiped,  to  absorb  the  blood ; it 
is  cut,  and  the  chyle  flows  into  the  vessel  intended  to 
receive  it. 

The  ancients  were  acquainted  with  the  existence  of 
the  chyle,  but  their  ideas  of  it  were  very  inexact;  ft 
was  observed  anew  at  the  beginning  of  the  seventeenth 
century ; and  being,  in  certain  conditions,  of  an 
opaque  white,  it  was  compared  to  milk : the  vessels 
that  contain  it  were  even  named  lacteal  vessels,  a very 
improper  expression,  since  there  is  very  little  other 
similarity  between  chyle  and  milk  except  the  colour. 

It  is  only  in  modern  times,  and  by  the  labours  of 
Dupuytren,  Vauquelin,  Emmert,  and  Marcet,  that  po- 
sitive notions  concerning  the  chyle  have  been  ac- 
quired. 

We  shall  give  the  observations  of  these  learned 
men,  with  the  addition  of  our  own. 

If  the  animal  from  which  the  chyle  is  extracted  has 
eaten  animal  or  vegetable  substances  of  a fatty  nature, 
the  liquid  drawn  from  the  thoracic  duct  is  of  a milky 
white,  a little  heavier  than  distilled  water,  of  a strong 
spermatic  odour,  of  a salt  taste,  slightly  adhering  to 
the  tongue,  and  sensibly  alkaline. 

Chyle,  very  soon  after  it  has  passed  out  of  the  vessel 
that  contained  it,  becomes  firm,  and  almost  solid : after 
some  time,  it  separates  into  three  parts ; the  one  solid 
that  remains  at  the  bottom,  another  liquid  at  the  top, 
and  a third  that  forms  a very  thin  layer  at  the  surface 
of  the  liquids.  The  chyle,  at  the  same  time,  assumes 
a vivid  rose  colour. 

When  the  chyle  proceeds  from  food  that  contains  no 
fat  substance,  it  presents  the  same  sort  of  properties, 
but  instead  of  being  opaque  white,  it  is  opaline,  and 
almost  transparent ; the  layer  which  forms  at  the  top 
i3  less  marked  than  in  the  former  sort  of  chyle. 

Chyle  never  takes  the  hue  of  the  colouring  sub- 
stances mixed  in  the  food,  as  many  authors  have  pre- 
tended. 

Animals  that  were  made  to  eat  indigo,  saffron,  and 
madder,  furnished  a chyle,  the  colour  of  which  had  no 
relation  to  that  of  the  substances. 

Of  the  three  substances  into  which  the  chyle  sepa- 
rates when  abandoned  to  itself,  that  of  the  surface,  of 
an  opaque  white  colour,  is  a fatty  body  ; the  solid  part 
is  formed  of  fibrin  and  a little  colouring  matter ; the 
liquid  is  like  the  serum  of  the  blood. 

The  proportion  of  these  three  parts  is  variable  ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  food.  There  are  species 
of  chvle,  such  as  that  the  sugar,  which  contain  very 
little  fibrin ; others,  such  as  that  of  flesh,  contain  more. 
The  same  thing  happens  with  the  fat  matter,  which  is 
very  abundant  when  the  food  contains  grease  or  oil, 
while  there  is  scarcely  any  seen  when  the  food  is 
nearly  deprived  of  fatty  bodies. 

The  absorption  of  the  chyle  has  been  attributed  to 
the  capillarity  of  the  lacteal  radicles,  to  the  com- 
pression of  the  chyle  by  the  sides  of  the  small  intes- 
tine, &c.  Latterly,  it  has  been  pretended  that  it  takes 
place  by  virtue  of  the  proper  sensibility  of  the  absorb- 
ing mouths,  andof  the  insensible  organic  contractility 
that  they  are  s imposed  to  possess.  It  first  enters  the 
threads  of  the  lacteal  vessels,  it  then  traverses  the  me- 
senteric glands,  it  arrives  at  the  thoracic  duct,  and  at 
last  enters  the  subclavian  vein. 

The  causes  that  determine  its  motion  are  the  con- 
tractility proper  to  the  chyliferous  vessels,  the  un- 
known cause  of  its  absorption,  the  pressure  of  the  ab- 
dominal musdles,  particularly  in  the  motions  of  respi- 
ration,  and,  perliaps,  the  pulsation  of  the  arteries  of 
the  abdomen. 


CHY 


It'  we  wish  to  have  a correct  idea  of  the  velocity 
with  which  the  chyle  flows  into  the  thoracic  duct,  we 
must  open  this  canal  in  a living  animal,  at  the  place 
where  it  opens  into  the  subclavian  vein.  We  find  that 
this  rapidity  is  not  very  great,  and  that  it  increases 
every  time  that  the  animal  compresses  the  viscera  of 
the  abdomen,  by  the  abdominal  muscles ; a similar 
effect  is  produced  by  compressing  the  belly  with  the 
hand. 

However,  the  rapidity  of  the  circulation  of  the  chyle 
appears  to  me  to  be  in  proportion  to  the  quantity 
formed  in  the  small  intestine ; this  last  is  in  proportion 
to  the  quantity  of  the  chyme : so  that  if  the  food  is  in 
great  abundance,  and  of  easy  digestion,  the  chyle  will 
flow  quickly;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  food  is  in  small 
quantity,  or,  which  is  the  same  thing,  if  it  is  of  diffi- 
cult digestion,  as  less  chyle  will  be  formed,  so  its  pro- 
gress will  be  more  slow. 

It  would  be  difficult  to  appreciate  the  quantity  of 
chyle  that  would  be  formed  during  a given  digestion, 
though  it  ought  to  be  considerable.  In  a dog  of  ordi- 
nary size,  that  had  eiten  animal  food  at  discretion,  an 
incision  into  the  thoracic  duct  of  the  neck  (the  dog 
being  alive)  gave  about  half  an  dunce  of  liquid  in  five 
minutes,  and  the  running  was  not  suspended  during 
the  whole  continuance  of  the  formation  of  the  chyle, 
that  is,  during  several  hours. 

It  is  not  known  whether  there  is  any  variation  ;in 
the  rapidity  of  the  motion  of  the  chyle  during  the  same 
digestion ; but,  supposing  it  uniform,  there  would  enter 
six.ounces  of  chyle  per  hour  into  the  venous  system. 
We  may  presume  that  the  proportion  of  chyle  is  more 
considerable  in  man,  whose  chyliferous  organs  are 
more  voluminous,  and  in  whom  the  digestion  is,  in  ge- 
neral, more  rapid  than  in  the  dog.” — Magendie's  Phy- 
siology. 

The  chyle  is  mixed  with  the  albuminous  and  gela- 
tinous lymph  in  the  thoracic  duct,  which  receives 
them  from  the  lymphatics. 

The  uses  of  the  chyle  are,  1.  To  supply  the  matter 
from  which  the  blood  and  other  fluids  of  our  body  are 
prepared  ; from  which  fluids  the  solid  parts  are  form- 
ed. 2.  By  its  acescent  nature,  it  somewhat  restrains 
the  putrescent  tendency  of  the  blood : hence  the  dread- 
ful putridity  of  the  humours  from  starving;  and  thus 
milk  is  an  excellent  remedy  against  scurvy.  3.  By  its 
very  copious  aqueous  latex,  it  prevents  the  thickening 
of  the  fluids,  and  thus  renders  them  fit  for  the  various 
secretions.  4.  The  chyle  secreted  in  the  breasts  of 
puerperal  women,  under  the  name  of  milk,  forms  the 
most  excellent  nutriment  of  all  aliments  for  new-born 
infants. 

CHYLIFICA'TION.  (Chylificatio ; from  chylus , 
and  fio,  to  become.)  ChyliJ actio.  The  process  car- 
ried on  in  the  small  intestines,  and  principally  in  the 
duodenum,  by  which  the  chyle  is  separated  from  the 
chyme. 

Ciiyli'sma.  (From  xuAoy,  juice.)  An  expressed 
juice. 

CHYLOPOIE'TIC.  (Chylopoieticus ; from  %uA os, 
chyle,  and  zsoitio,  to  make.)  Chylopoietic.  Any  thing 
connected  with  the  formation  of  chyle ; thus  chylopoi- 
etic viscera,  chylopoietic  vessels,  &c. 

CHYLO'SIS.  (From  %vAos,  juice.)  Chylification, 
or  the  changing  the  food  into  chyle. 

Chylostagma.  (From  %vAos,  juice,  and  s-a^tv,  to 
distil.)  The  distillation  or  expression  of  any  juice,  or 
humid  part  from  the  rest. 

Chy  lostagma  diapiioreticum.  A name  given  by 
Mindererus  to  a distillation  of  Venice  treacle  and  mith- 
ridate. 

CHYLUS.  (XuAos,  succus , from  %vw,  juice.)  See 
Chyle. 

CHYME.  (Chymus ; from  xvpoj,  which  signifies 
humour  or  juice.)  The  ingested  mass  of  food  that 
passes  from  the  stomach  into  the  duodenum,  and  from 
which  the  chyle  is  prepared  in  the  small  intestines  by 
the  admixture  of  the  bile,  &c.  See  Digestion 

CHY'MIA.  Chemistry. 

CHYMIA'TER.  A chemical  physician. 

CHYMIA'TRIA.  (From  xvpta,  chemistry,  and 
taopai,  to  heal.)  The  art  of  curing  diseases  by  the  ap- 
plication of  chemistry  to  the  uses  of  medicine. 

Chymo'sis.  See  Chemosis. 

Chy'nlkn  radix.  A cylindrical  root,  of  the  thick- 
ness of  a goose-quill,  brought  from  China.  It  has  a 
bitterish  taste,  and  imparts  a yellow  tinge  to  the  saliva. 


CIC 

The  Chinese  hold  it  in  great  estimation  as  a stomachic, 
infused  in  wine. 

Chy'sis.  (From  %uw,  to  pour  out.)  Fusion,  or  the 
reduction  of  solid  bodies  into  fluid  by  heat. 

Chy'tlon.  (From  %uw,  to  pour  out.)  An  anoint- 
ing with  oil  and  water. 

CIBA'LIS.  (From  cibus,  food.)  Of  or  belonging 
to  food. 

Cibalis  fistula.  An  obsolete  term  for  the  oeso- 
phagus 

CIBA'TIO.  (From  cibus,  food.)  The  taking  of 
food. 

Ci'bur.  An  obsolete  term  for  sulphur. 

CICATRISANT.  (Cicatrisans  ; from  cicatrico,  to 
skin  over.)  Such  applications  as  dispose  wounds  and 
ulcers  to  dry  up  and  heal,  and  to  be  covered  with  a 
skin. 

CICA'TRIX.  (From  cicatrico , to  heal  up  or  skin 
over.)  A seam  or  scar  upon  the  skin,  after  the  healing 
of  a sore  or  ulcer. 

Cicely , sweet.  See  Scandix  odorata. 

CI  CER.  (A  plant  so  called.  The  Cicerones  had 
their  name  from  this  pulse,  as  the  Pisones  had  from 
the  pisum  or  pea,  and  the  Lentuli  from  the  lens  or 
lentil.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
nacan  system.  Class,  Diadelphia;  Order,  Decandria. 
The  vetch. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  cich 
or  ciches. 

Cicer  arietinum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cicer  plant.  Erebinthus ; Cicer— foliis  serratis,  of 
Linnaeus.  The  seeds  have  been  employed  medicinally, 
but  are  now  fallen  into  disuse.  In  some  places  they 
are  toasted,  and  used  as  coffee ; and  in  others,  ground 
into  a flour  for  bread.  The  colour  of  the  arillus  of 
the  seed  is  sometimes  white,  red,  or  black;  hence  the 
distinction  into  cicer  album , vubrum , and  nigrum. 

Ci'cera.  (From  cicer , the  vetch.)  A small  pill  of 
the  size  of  a vetch. 

Cicera  tartari.  Small  pills  composed  of  turpen- 
tine and  cream  of  tartar,  of  the  size  of  a vetch. 

CICHORIUM.  (Originally,  according  to  Pliny,  an 
Egyptian  name,  and  adopted  by  the  Greeks.  It  is 
written  sometimes  Kixopuov:  whence  Horace  has 
cichorece , levesqus  malvcc  : sometimes  Ki%opiov  or  Kt- 
X<»piov.  It  is  supposed  by  some  to  have  this  name, 
zuapa  to  5ia  rwv  %u>pi wv  kuiv , from  its  creeping  through 
the  fields.  Others  derive  it  from  xi%r w,  invenio ; on 
account  of  its  being  so  readily  found,  or  so  common.) 
Succory.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnajan  system.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Polyga - 
mia  cequalis. 

2.  The  pharmacoposial  name  of  the  wild  cichory. 
See  Cichorium  intybus. 

Cichorium  endivia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
endive.  Endivia;  Endiva;  Cichorium; — jloribus 
solitariis , pendunculatis , foliis  integris ; crenatis , of 
Linmeus,  is  an  extremeiy  wholesome  salad,  possessing 
bitter  and  anodyne  qualities. 

Cichorium  intybus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
wild  succory.  Cichorium ; Cichoreum;  Cichorium 
sylvestre  vel  officinarum , Cichorium  ; — Jloribus  gemir 
nis,  sessilibus ; foliis  runcinatis,  of  Linmeus.  It  be- 
longs to  the  same  family  with  the  garden  endive,  and 
by  some  botanists  has  been  supposed  to  be  the  same 
plant  in  its  uncultivated  state ; but  the  endive  com- 
monly. used  as  salad  is  an  annual,  or  at  most  a bien- 
nial plant,  and  its  parent  is  now  known  to  be  the  ci- 
chorium endivia.  Wild  succory  or  cichory,  abounds 
with  a milky  juice,  of  a penetrating  bitterish  taste,  and 
of  no  remarkable  smell,  or  particular  flavour : the  roots 
are  more  bitter  than  the  leaves  or  stalks,  and  these 
much  more  so  than  the  flowers.  By.  culture  in  gar- 
dens, and  by  blanching,  it  loses  its  bitterness,  and  may 
be  eaten  early  in  the  spring  in  salads.  The  roots,  if 
gathered  before  the  stem  shoots  up,  are  also  eatable, 
and  when  dried  may  be  made  into  bread.  The  jroots 
and  leaves  of  this  plant  are  stated  by  Lewis  to  be  very 
useful  aperients,  acting  mildly  and  without  irritation, 
tending  rather  to  abate  than  to  increase  heat,  and  which 
may  therefore  be  given  with  safety  in  hectic  and  in- 
flammatory cases.  Taken  freely,  they  keep  the  belly 
open,  or  produce  a gentle  diarrhoea;  and  when  thus 
continued  for  some  time,  they  have  often  proved  salu- 
tary in  the  beginning  obstructions  of  the  viscera,  in 
jaundices,  cachexies,  hypochondriacal  and  otherchroni- 
cal  disorders.  A decoction  of  this  herb,  with  others 


CIM 


cm 


of  the  like  kiud,  in  whey,  and  rendered  purgative  by  a 
suitable  addition  of  polychrest  salt,  was  found  a use- 
ful remedy  in  cases  of  biliary  calculi,  and  promises  ad-  | 
vantage  in  many  complaints  requiring  what  have  been  | 
termed  attenuants  and  resolvents.  The  virtues  of 
succory,  like  those  of  dandelion,  reside  in  its  milky 
juice;  and  we  are  warranted,  says  Dr.  Woodville,  in 
asserting,  that  the  expressed  juice  of  both  these  plants, 
taken  in  large  doses  frequently  repeated,  has  been 
found  an  efficacious  remedy  in  phthisis  pulmonaiis,  as 
well  as  the  various  other  affections  above  mentioned. 
The  milky  juice  may  be  extracted  by  boiling  in  water, 
or  by  pressure.  The  wild  and  the  garden  sorts  are 
used  indifferently.  If  the  root  is  cut  into  small  pieces, 
dried,  and  roasted,  it  resembles  coffee,  and  is  sometimes 
a good  substitute  for  it. 

CI'CHORY.  See  Cichorium  intybus. 

Cichory , wild.  See  Cichorium  intybus. 

Cicinde'la.  (A  dint,  of  candela  : i.  e.  a little  can- 
dle; so  called  from  its  light.)  The  glowworm.  By 
some  thought  to  be  anodyne,  lithontriptic,  though  pro- 
bably neither.  Not  used  in  the  present  day. 

Cici'num  oleum.  (From  kuci,  the  ricinus.)  An  oil, 
obtained  by  boiling  the  bruised  seeds  of  the  Jatropha 
curcas  of  Linnseus.  It  is  somewhat  similar  in  its  pro- 
perties to  castor  oil. 

Ci'cla.  A name  for  the  white  beet. 

CICU'TA.  {Quasi  ctecuta,  blind;  because  it  de- 
stroys the  sight  of  those  who  use  it.  Cicuta  signifies 
also  the  internode,  or  space  between  two  joints  of  a 
reed ; or  the  hollow  stem  of  any  plant  which  the  shep- 
herds used  for  making  their  rural  pipes.  Est  mihi 
disparibus  septem  conjuncta  cicutis  jistula.  Virgil.) 
Hemlock.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linna;an  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Di- 
gynia. 

2.  The  name,  in  most  pharmacopoeias,  of  the  com- 
mon hemlock.  See  Coniurn. 

Cicuta  aquatica.  See  Cicuta  virosa. 

Cicuta  virosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  Cicuta 
aquatica  ; Cicutaria  virosa  ; Sium  majus  alterum  an- 
gustifulium ; bium.  erucce  folio;  long-leaved  water 
hemlock  and  cow-bane.  This  plant,  Cicuta — umbellis 
oppositifoliis ; petiolis  margin atis  obtusis,  of  Lin- 
najus,  is  seldom  employed  medicinally  in  the  present 
day.  It  is  an  active  poison,  and  often  eaten  by  mis- 
take for  the  wild  smallage,  the  Apium  graveolens,  of 
Linnaeus;  when  it  produces  tremors,  vertigo,  a v iolent 
burning  at  the  stomach,  epilepsy,  convulsions,  spasms 
of  the  jaw,  a flowing  of  biood  from  the  ears,  tumefac- 
tion of  the  abdomen,  and  death. 

CICUTA  RIA.  (From  cicuta , hemlock.)  Bastard 
hemlock.  See  Chcerophyllum  sylvestre. 

Cicutaria  aquatica.  See  Phellandrium  aqua- 
ticum. 

Cicutaria  virosa.  See  Cicuta  virosa. 
CIDO'NIUM.  See  Pyrus  cydonia. 

CILIA.  (The  plural  of  cilium.)  A species  of  pu- 
bescence of  plants  which  consists  of  hairs  on  the  mar- 
gin of  a leaf  or  petal,  giving  it  a fringed  appearance. 

CI'LIAR.  {Ciliaris;  from  cilium,  the  eyelid.)  Be- 
longing to  the  eyelid. 

Ciliar  ligament.  Eigamenlum  ciliare.  The  cir- 
cular portion  that  divides  the  chroid  membrane  from 
the  iris,  and  which  adheres  to  the  sclerotic  membrane. 

It  appears  like  a white  circular  ring.  See  Choroid 
membrane. 

Ciliare  ligamentum.  See  Choroid  membrane. 
Ciliaris  musculus.  That  part  of  the  musculus 
orbicularis  palpebrarum  which  lies  nearest  the  cilia, 
considered  by  Riolan  as  a distinct  muscle. 

CILIATUS.  Bordered,  fringed : applied  to  leaves, 
corolla,  petals,  &c. : hence  folium  ciliatum , anthodium 
ciliatum , and  petala  ciliata.  See  Lea/,  Corolla,  An- 
thodium, Petaium. 

CI'LIUM.  (From  cilleo , to  move  about.)  The  eye- 
lid or  eyelash.  See  also  Cilia. 

Ciliary  frocesses.  The  white  folds  at  the  mar- 
gin of  the  uvea  in  the  eye,  covered  with  a black  mat- 
ter, which  proceed  from  the  uvea  to  the  crystalline 
lens,  upon  which  they  lie. 

Ci'llo.  (From  cilium , the  eyelid.)  One  who  is 
affected  with  a spasm  or  trembling  of  the  eyelids. 

CILLO  SIS.  (From  cilium , the  eyelid.)  A spas- 
modic. trembling  of  the  eyelids. 
dimeter  shaped.  See  Leaf. 

CIM  EX.  (From  nupai , to  inhabit;  so  called  be- 


| cause  they  infest  houses.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
insects  in  the  Linnsean  system.  The  wall-louse  or 
bug. 

Cimex  domesticus.  Six  or  seven  are  given  in- 
wardly to  cure  the  ague,  just  before  the  fits  come  on, 

I and  have  the  same  efl'ect  with  every  thing  nauseous 
and  disgusting. 

[Cimicifuga.  Black  snake  root.  This  is  the  root 
of  Acteea  racemosa  of  Wildenow,  an  American  plant. 
According  to  the  late  Dr.  Barton,  a decoction  of  it 
forms  a useful  astringent  gargle  in  sore  throats,  and 
also  cures  psora.  We  are  told  that  the  Indians  made 
great  use  of  it  in  rheumatism ; also  as  an  agent  ad  par- 
turn  accelerandum.  Dr.  Tully  acquaints  me,  that  he 
has  found  it  diaphoretic,  diuretic,  and  moderately  tonic, 
forming  a useful  auxiliary  in  the  treatment  of  acute 
and  chronic  rheumatism,  and  of  dropsy ; likewise 
operating  very  beneficially  in  hysteria.  It  is  usually 
given  in  the  form  of  decoction. — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Cimo'lia  alba.  (From  Kt/xwXos,  Cimolus,  an  island 
in  the  Cretau  sea,  where  it  is  procured.)  See  Cimolite. 

Cimolia  purpurescens.  Fullers-earth. 

CIMOLITE.  Cimolian  earth.  The  Cimolia  of 
Pliny.  Au  earth  -af  a grayish  white  colour,  which 
consists  of  silex,  alumina,  oxide  of  iron,  and  water. 

Ci'na  cin*.  See  Cinchona. 

Ci'n.e  semen.  See  Artemisia  santonica. 

CI'NARA.  (From  Kiveu >,  to  move;  quasi movet  ad 
venerem  vel  urinam.)  Artichoke.  I.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Liana; an  system.  Class,  Syn- 
genesia;  Order,  Polygamia  cequalis. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  for  the  common  arti- 
choke. See  Cinara  scolymus. 

Cinara  scolymus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
artichoke,  called  in  the  pharmacopoeias  Alcocalum; 
Agriocinara;  Articocalus  ; Arlischocas  Icevis  ; Costus 
nigra;  Carduus  sativus  non  spinosus ; Cinara  hor- 
iensis ; Scolymus  sativus ; Carduus  domesticus  capita 
major e ; Carduus  altilis.  The  Cinara— foliis  sub- 
spinosis pinnatis  inaivisique , calycinis  squamis  ovatis, 
of  Linnaeus.  A native  of  the  southern  parts  ot  Eu- 
rope, but  cultivated  here  for  culinary  purposes.  The 
leaves  dre  bitter,  and  afford,  by  expression,  a considera- 
ble quantity  of  juice,  which,  when  strained,  and  mixed 
with  au  equal  quantity  of  white  wine,  has  been  given 
successfully  in  dropsies,  in  the  dose  of  3 or  4 table- 
spoonfuls night  and  morning,  but  it  is  very  uncertain 
in  the  operation. 

CINCHO  NA.  (Geoffroy  states  that  the  use  of  this 
bark  was  first  learned  from  the  following  circum- 
stance:— Some  cinchona  trees  being  thrown  by  the 
winds  into  a pool  of  water,  lay  there  till  the  water 
became  so  bitter,  that  every  body  refused  to  drink  it. 

! However,  one  of  the  neighbouring  inhabitants  being 

I seized  with  a violent  paroxysm  of  fever,  and  finding 
no  other  water  to  quench  his  thirst,  was  forced  to 
drink  of  this,  by  which  he  was  perfectly  cured.  He 
afterward  related  the  circumstance  to  others,  and  pre 
| vailed  upon  some  of  his  friends,  who  were  ill  of  fevers, 

| to  make  use  of  the  same  remedy,  with  whom  it  proved 
j equally  successful.  The  use  of  this  excellent  remedy, 
however,  was  very  little  known  till  about  the  year 
1638,  when  a signal  cure  having  been  performed  by  it 
on  the  Spanish  viceroy’s  lady,  the  Countess  del  Cin- 
, chon,  at  Lima,  it  came  into  general  use,  and  hence  it 
was  distinguished  by  the  appellation  of  cortex  cinchona, 

I and  pulvis  comitissee , or  the  Countess’s  powder.  On 
j the  recovery  of  the  Countess,  she  distributed  a large 
quantity  of  the  bark  to  the  Jesuits,  in  whose  hands 
it  acquired  still  greater  reputation,  and  by  them  it  was 
] first  introduced  into  Europe,  and  thence  called  cortex, 
or  pulvis  jesuiticus , pulvis  patrum  ; and  also  Cardi- 
nal del  Lugo’s  powder,  because  that  charitable  prelate 
bought  a large  quantity  of  it  at  great  expense  tor  the 
use  of  the  religious  poor  at  Rome.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pen 
tandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  Cinchona,  or  Peruvian 
- bark-tree. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  several  kinds  of 
barks;  called  also  Cortex.  Cortex  china;  China;  Chin- 
china;  Kina  kina,  Kinkina ; Quina  quina.  Quinqui- 
na; the  trees  affording  which,  grow  wild  in  the  hilly 
| parts  of  Peru  ; the  bark  is  stripped  from  the  branches, 
j trunk,  and  root,  and  dried.  Three  kinds  of  it  are  now 
in  use. 

i 1.  Cortex  cinchonas  cordifolite. — The  plant  which 
. affords  this  species  is  the  Cinchona  cordifoha,  of  Zea ; 


CIN 


CIN 


the  Cinchona  officinalis,  of  Linnaeus;  the  Cinchona 
macrocarpa , of  Wildenow.  Heart-leaved  cinchona. 
The  bark  of  this  tree  is  called  yellow  bark , because  it 
approaches  more  to  that  colour  than  either  of  the  others 
does.  It  is  in  flat  pieces,  not  convoluted  like  the  pale, 
nor  dark-coloured  like  the  red  ; externally  smooth,  in- 
ternally of  a light  cinnaunon  colour,  friable  and  fibrous, 
has  no  peculiar  odour  different  from  the  others,  but  a 
taste  incomparably  more  bitter,  with  some  degree  of 
astringency. 

2.  Cortex  cinchona  lancifolioe. — This  species  is  ob- 
tained from  the  Cinchona  lancifolia  of  Zea.  Lance- 
leaved cinchona.  This  is  the  quilled  bark , which 
comes  in  small  quilled  twigs,  breaking  close  and 
smooth,  friable  between  the  teeth,  covered  with  a 
rough  coat  of  a brownish  colour,  internally  smooth, 
and  of  a light  brown ; its  taste  is  bitter,  and  slightly 
astringent ; flavour  slightly  aromatic,  with  some  degree 
of  mustiness. 

3.  Cortex  cinchona  oblongifolia. — This  kind  is  pro- 
cured from  Cinchona  oblongifolia  of  Zea.  Oblong- 
leaved cinchona.  This  is  the  red  b ar k : it  is  in  large 
thick  pieces,  externally  covered  with  a brown  rugged 
coat,  internally  more  smooth  and  compact,  but  fibrous, 
of  a dark  red  colour ; taste  and  smell  similar  to  that 
of  the  cinchona  lancifolia  cortex , but  the  taste  rather 
stronger. 

From  the  general  analysis  of  bark,  it  appears  to 
consist,  besides  the  woody  matter  which  composes  the 
greater  part  of  it,  of  gum,  resin,  gallic  acid,  of  very 
small  portions  of  tannin  and  essential  oil,  and  of 
several  salts  having  principally  lime  for  their  basis. 
Seguin  also  supposed  the  existence  of  gelatin  in  it,  but 
without  sufficient  proof.  Cold  water  infused  on  pale 
bark  for  some  hours,  acquires  a bitter  taste,  with  some 
share  of  its  odour;  when  assisted  by  a moderate  heat, 
the  water  takes  up  more  of  the  active  matter  ; by  de- 
coction, a fluid,  deep  coloured,  of  a bitter  styptic  taste, 
is  obtained,  which,  when  cold,  deposites  a precipitate 
of  resinous  matter  and  gallic  acid.  By  long  decoction, 
the  virtues  of  the  bark  are  nearly  destroyed,  owing  to 
the  oxygenation  of  its  active  matter.  Magnesia  en- 
ables water  to  dissolve  a larger  portion  of  the  princi- 
ples of  bark,  as  does  lime,  though  in  an  inferior  degree. 
Alkohol  is  the  most  powerful  solvent  of  its  active 
matter.  Brandy  and  other  spirits  and  wines,  afford 
also  strong  solutions,  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of 
alkohol  they  contain.  A saturated  solution  of  ammo- 
nia is  also  a powerful  solvent;  vinegar  is  less  so  even 
than  water.  By  distillation,  water  is  slightly  impreg- 
nated with  the  flavour  of  bark  ; it  is  doubtful  whether 
any  essential  oil  can  be  obtained. 

The  action  of  menstrua  on  the  red  bark  is  nearly 
the  same,  the  solutions  only  being  considerably 
stronger,  or  containing  a larger  quantity  of  resinous 
matter,  and  of  the  astringent  principle. 

The  analysis  of  the  yellow  bark  shows  that  its 
active  principles  are  more  concentrated  than  in  either 
of  the  others,  affording  to  water,  alkohol,  &c.  tinc- 
tures, much  stronger  both  in  bitterness  and  astrin- 
gency, especially  in  the  former  principle. 

Vauquelin  made  infusions  of  all  the  varieties  of  cin 
chona  he  could  procure,  using  the  same  quantities  of 
the  barks  and  water,  and  leaving  the  powders  infused 
for  the  same  time.  He  observed,  1.  That  certain  in- 
fusions were  precipitated  abundantly  by  infusion  of 
galls,  by  solution  of  glue  and  tartar  emetic.  2.  That 
some  were  precipitated  by  glue,  but  not  by  the  two 
other  reagents  ; and,  3.  That  others  were,  on  the  con- 
trary, by  nutgalls,  and  tartar,  emetic,  without  being  af- 
fected by  glue.  4.  And  that  there  were  some  which 
yielded  no  precipitate  by  nutgalls,  tannin,  or  emetic 
tartar.  'The  cinchonas  that  furnished  the  first  infusion 
were  of  excellent  quality  ; those  that  afforded  the 
fourth  were  not  febrifuge;  while  those  that  gave  the 
second  and  third  were  febrifuge,  but  in  a smaller  degree 
than  the  first.  Besides  mucilage,  kinate  of  lime,  and 
woody  fibre,  he  obtained  in  his  analyses  a resinous 
substance,  which  appears  not  to  be  identic  in  all  the 
species  of  bark.  It  is  very  bitter,  very  soluble  in 
alkohol,  in  acids, and  alkalies;  scarcely  soluble  in  cold 
water,  but  more  soluble  in  hot.  It  is  this  body  which 
gives  to  infusions  of  cinchona  the  property  of  yielding 
precipitates  by  emetic  tartar,  galls,  gelatin;  and  in  it 
the  febrifuge  virtue  seems  to  reside.  It  is  this  sub- 
stance in  part  which  falls  down  on  cooling  decoctions 
of  cinchona,  and  from  concentrated  infusions.  A table 

P 2 


of  precipitations  by  glue,  tannin,  and  tartar  emetic, 
from  infusions  of  different  barks,  has  been  given  by 
Vauquelin. 

Pelletier  and  Caventou  analyzed  the  Cinchona  con- 
daminaa , gray  bark,  and  found  it  composed  of,  1.  cin- 
chonina,  united  to  kinic  acid  ; 2.  green  fatty  matter; 
3.  red  colouring  matter,  slightly  soluble  ; 4.  tannin ; 
5.  yellow  colouring  matter ; 6.  kinite  of  lime ; 7.  gum ; 
8.  starch  ; 9.  lignine. 

The  red  bark  has  been  considered  as  superior  to  the 
pale,  the  yellow  is  represented,  apparently  with  jus- 
tice, as  being  more  active  than  either  of  the  others. 

The  effects  of  Peruvian  bark  are  those  of  a power- 
ful and  permanent  tonic,  so  slow  in  its  operation,  that 
its  stimulating  property  is  scarcely  perceptible  by  any 
alteration  in  tiie  state  of  the  pulse,  or  of  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  body.  In  a large  dose,  it  occasions  nausea 
and  headache  ; in  some  habits  it  operates  as  a laxative : 
in  others  it  occasions  costiveness.  It  is  one  of  those 
medicines,  the  efficacy  of  which,  in  removing  disease, 
is  much  greater  than  could  be  expected,  & priori,  from 
its  effects  on  the  system  in  a healthy  state. 

Intermittent  fever  is  the  disease,  for  the  cure  of 
which  bark  was  introduced  into  practice,  and  there  is 
still  no  remedy  which  equals  it  in  power.  The  dis- 
putes respecting  the  mode  of  administering  it  are  now 
settled.  It  is  given  as  early  as  possible,  after  clearing 
the  stomach  and  bowels,  in  the  dose  of  from  one  scru- 
ple to  a drachm  every  second  or  third  hour,  during  the 
interval  of  the  paroxysm  ; and  it  may  even  be  given 
during  the  hot  fit,  but  it  is  then  more  apt  to  excite 
nausea. 

In  remittent  fever  it  is  given  with  equal  freedom, 
even  though  the  remission  of  the  fever  may  be  ob- 
scure. 

In  some  forms  of  continued  fever  which  are  con- 
nected with  debility,  as  in  typhus,  cynanche  maligna, 
confluent  small-pox,  &c,  it  13  regarded  as  one  of  the 
most  valuable  remedies.  It  may  be  prejudicial,  how- 
ever, in  those  diseases  where  the  brain  or  its  mem- 
branes are  inflamed,  or  where  there  is  much  irritation, 
marked  by  subsultus  tendinum,  and  convulsive  mo- 
tions of  the  extremities;  and  in  pure  typhus  it  appears 
to  be  less  useful  in  the  beginning  of  the  disease  than  m 
the  convalescent  stage. 

Even  in  fevers  of  an  opposite  type,  where  there  are 
marks  of  inflammatory  action,  particularly  in  acute 
rheumatism,  bark  has  been  found  useful  after  blood- 
letting. In  erysipelas,  in  grangrene,  in  extensive  sup- 
puration, and  venereal  ulceration,  the  freeuse  of  bark 
is  of  the  greatest  advantage. 

In  the  various  forms  of  passive  hremorrhagy,  in 
many  other  diseases  of  chronic  debility,  dyspepsia, 
hypochondriasis,  paralysis,  rickets,  scrofula,  dropsy, 
and  in  a variety  of  spasmodic  affections,  epilepsy, 
chorea,  and  hysteria,  it  is  administered  as  a powerful 
and  permanent  tonic,  either  alone,  or  combined  with 
other  remedies  suited  to  the  particular  case. 

The  officinal  preparations  of  bark  are  an  infusion, 
decoction,  an  extract,  a resinous  extract,  a simple  tinc- 
ture, an  ammoniated  and  a compound  tincture.  The 
usual  dose  is  half  a drachm  of  the  powder.  The  only 
inconvenience  of  a larger  dose  is  its  sitting  uneasy  on 
the  stomach.  It  may  therefore,  if  necessary,  be  fre- 
quently repeated,  and  in  urgent  cases  may  be  taken  to 
the  extent  of  an  ounce,  or  even  two  ounces,  in  twenty- 
four  hours. 

The  powder  is  more  effectual  than  any  of  the  pre- 
parations ; it  is  given  in  wine,  in  any  spirituous  liquor ; 
or,  if  it  excite  nausea,  combined  with  an  aromatic. 
The  cold  infusion  is  the  least  powerful,  but  most  grate- 
ful ; the  decoction  contains  much  more  of  the  active 
matter  of  the  bark,  and  is  the  preparation  generally 
used  when  the  powder  is  rejected;  its  dose  is  from 
two  to  four  ounces.  The  spirituous  tincture,  though 
containing  still  more  of  the  bark,  cannot  be  extensively 
used  on  account  of  the  menstruum,  but  is  principally 
employed,  occasionally,  and  in  small  doses  of  two  or 
three  drachms,  as  a stomachic.  The  extract  is  a pre- 
paration of  considerable  power,  when  properly  pre- 
pared, and  is  adapted  to  those  cases  where  the  remedy 
requires  to  be  continued  for  some  time.  It  is  then 
given  in  the  form  of  pill,  in  doses  of  from  five  to  fif- 
teen grains. 

Bark  is  likewise  sometimes  given  in  the  form  of 
enema ; one  scruple  of  the  extract,  or  two  drachms  of 
the  powder,  being  diffused  in  four  ounces  of  starch 

227 


CIN 


CIN 


mucilage.  The  decoction  is  also  sometimes  applied 
as  a fomentation  to  ulcers. 

Cinchona  carib/ea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Caribbean  bark- tree.  It  grows  in  Jamaica,  where  it  is 
called  the  sea-side  beech.  According  to  Dr.  Wright, 
the  bark  of  this  tree  is  not  less  efficacious  than  that  of 
the  cinchona  of  Peru,  for  which  it  will  prove  a useful 
substitute ; but  by  the  experiments  of  Dr.  Skeete,  it 
appears  to  have  less  astringent  power. 

Cinchona  condaminiea.  See  Cinchona  and  Cin- 
chonina. 

Cinchona  cordifoi.ia.  See  Cinchona. 

Cinchona  flava.  See  Cinchona. 

Cinchona  floribunda.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  affords  the  Saint  Luc  bark.  Cin- 
chona—Jlo  rib  us  paniculatis  glabris , capsulis  tur- 
binatis  laivibus,  foliis  ellipticis  acuminatis  glabris , 
of  Linnaius.  It  has  an  adstringent,  bitter  taste, 
somewhat  like  gentian.  It  is  recommended  in  in- 
termittents,  putrid-  dysentery,  and  dyspepsia ; it 
should  always  be  joined  with  some  aromatic.  Dr. 
Withering  considers  this  bark  as  greatly  inferior  to 
that  of  the  other  species  of  this  genus.  In  its  recent 
state  it  is  considerably  emetic  and  cathartic,  properties 
which  in  some  degree  it  retains  on  being  dried ; so  that 
the  stomach  does  not  bear  this  bark  in  large  doses,  and 
in  small  ones  its  effects  are  not  such  as  to  give  it  any 
peculiar  recommendation. 

Cinchona  lancifolia.  See  Cinchona. 

Cinchona  oblongifolia.  See  Cinchona. 

Cinchona  officinalis.  The  name  of  the  officinal 
Peruvian  bark.  See  Cinchona. 

Cinchona  rubra.  See  Cinchona. 

CInchona  Sancta  Fe'.  Several  species  of  cinchona 
have  been  lately  discovered  at  Sancta  F£,  yielding 
barks  both  of  the  pale  and  red  kind;  and  which,  from 
their  sensible  qualities,  are  likely  upon  trial  to  become 
equally  useful  with  those  produced  in  the  kingdom  of 
Peru. 

Cinchonia.  See  Cinclionina. 

CINCHONINA.  Cinchonia;  Quinia;  Quinina. 
Cinchonine  or  Quinine  is  the  salifiable  base,  or  vege- 
table alkali,  discovered  in  the  Cinchona  condamincea, 
by  Pelletier  and  Caventou.  The  person,  however, 
who  first  recognised  its  existence,  though  he  did  not 
ascertain  its  alkaline  nature,  or  study  its  combinations 
with  acids,  was  Gornis  of  Lisbon. 

The  following  process  for  extracting  cinchonina  is 
that  of  Henry,  the  younger,  which  the  above  chemists 
approve.  A kilogramme  of  bark  reduced  *nto  a fine 
powder,  is  to  be  acted  on  twice  with  heat,  by  a dilute 
sulphuric  acid,  consisting  of  50  or  60  grammes,  diluted 
with  8 kilogrammes  of  water  for  each  time.  The  fil- 
tered decoctions  are  very  bitter,  have  a reddish  colour, 
which  assumes  on  cooling  a yellowish  tint.  To  dis- 
colour (blanch)  these  liquors,  and  saturate  the  acid, 
either  pulverized  quicklime  or  magnesia  may  be  em- 
ployed. The  liquors,  entirely  deprived  of  colour,  are 
to  be  passed  through  a cloth,  and  the  precipitate  which 
forms  is  to  be  washed  with  a small  quantity  of  water, 
to  separate  the  excess  of  lime  (if  this  earth  has  been 
used).  The  deposite  on  the  cloth,  well  drained  and 
almost  completely  deprived  of  moisture  for  twelve 
hours,  after  having  been  put  three  successive  times  to 
digest  in  alkohol  of  36°  (0.837),  will  furnish,  by  dis- 
tilling of  the  liquid  alkohol,  a brown  viscid  matter,  be- 
coming brittle  on  cooling.  It  is  to  be  acted  on  with 
water  sharpened  with  sulphuric  acid,  and  the  refri- 
gerated liquor  will  afford  about  thirty  grammes  of 
white  crystals,  entirely  soluble  in  alkohol,  scarcely  so- 
luble in  cold  water,  but  more  in  boiling  water,  particu- 
larly if  this  be  slightly  acidulated.  They  consist  of 
pure  sulphate  of  cinchonina.  They  ought  to  be  bril- 
liant, crystallized  in  parailelopipeds,  very  hard,  and  of 
a glassy-white.  It  should  burn  without  leaving  any 
residuum.  Other  processes  have  been  given,  of  which 
a full  account  will  be  found  in  the  12th  volume  of  the 
Journal  of  Science,  p.  325.  From  a solution  of  the 
above  salt,  the  cinchonina  may  be  easily  obtained  by 
the  addition  of  any  alkali.  The  cinchonina  falls  down, 
and  may  be  afterward  dissolved  in  alkohol,  and  crys- 
tallized by  evaporation.  Its  form  is  a rhoinboidal 
prism,  of  108°  and  72°,  terminated  by  a bevehpent. 
It  has  but  little  taste,  requiring  7000  parts  of  water  for 
Its  solution  ; but  when  dissolved  in  alkohol,  or  an  acid, 
it  has  the  bitter  taste  of  bark.  When  heated  it  does 
not  fuse  before  decomposition.  It  consists  of  oxygen, 
*28 


hydrogen,  and  carbon,  the  latter  being  predominant. 
It  dissolves  in  only  very  small  quantities  in  the  oils. 


and  in  sulphuric  ether. 

1 The  sulphate  is  composed  of  cinchonina 100 

Sdlphuric  acid  ]3 

whence  the  prime  equivalent  would  appear  to  bt 
38.5.  The  muriate  is  more  soluble.  It  consists  of 

Cinchonina 100 

Muriatic  acid 7.9 


The  nitrate  is  uncrystallizable.  Gallic,  oxalic,  and 
tartaric  acids,  form  neutral  salts  with  cinchonina, 
which  are  soluble  only  with  excess  of  acid.  Hence  in- 
fusion of  nut-galls  gives,  with  a decoction  of  good 
cinchona,  an  abundant  precipitate  of  galiate  of  cin- 
chonina. 

Robiquet  gives  as  the  composition  of  a subsulphate 
of  cinchonina  of  the  first  crystallization, 


Sulphuric  acid 11.3 

Cinchonina  79.0 


The  alkaline  base  found  in  yellow  barks  is  called 
Quinina.  It  is  extracted  in  exactly  the  same  way. 
Red  bark  contains  a mixture  of  these  two  alkalies. 
The  febrifuge  virtue  of  the  sulphates  is  considered  to 
be  very  great. 

Cinci'nnus.  The  hair  on  the  temples. 

CINCLE'SIS.  (From  /ctyxXi^w,  to  move.)  Cm- 
clismus.  An  involuntary  nictitation  or  winking 
Vogel. 

CINERA'RIUM  (From  cinis , ashes.)  The  ash- 
hole  of  a chemical  instrument. 

CI'NERES.  (Plural  of  cinis , ashes.)  'Ashes. 

Cineres  clavellata.  See  Potassa  impura. 

Cineres  russici.  See  Potassa  impura. 

CIN ERI'TIO  17 rf.  ( Cineritius  ; from  cinis,  ashes.) 
Of  the  colour  of  ashes.  A name  applied  to  the  corti- 
cal substance  of  the  brain,  from  its  resemblance  to  an 
ash-colour. 

CLNERI'TIUM.  (From  cinis , ashes.)  A cupel  or 
test ; so  named  from  its  being  commonly  made  of  the 
ashes  of  vegetables  or  bones. 

Cine'rulam.  A name  for  spodium. 

CINETICA.  ( YLivrfjiKos , having  the  power  of  mo- 
tion.) The  name  of  an  order  in  the  class  Neuroses  of 
Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases  affecting  the  muscles,  and 
embracing  Entasia,  Clonus,  and  Synclonus. 

Cine'tus.  The  diaphragm. 

Cingula'ria.  (From  cingulum , a girdle;  because 
it  grows  in  that  shape.)  The  lycopodium. 

CI'NGULUM.  (From  cingo , to  bind.)  A girdle  or 
belt  about  the  loins. 

Cingulum  mercuriale.  A mercurial  girdle,  called 
also  cingulum  sapientioe , and  sivgulum  stultitice.  It 
was  an  invention  of  Rulandus’s  • different  directions 
are  given  for  making  it,  but  the  following  is  one  of  the 
neatest : — “ Take  three  drachms  of  quicksilver ; shake 
it  with  two  ounces  of  lemon-juice  until  the  globules  dis- 
appear ; then  separate  the  juice,  and  mix  with  the  ex- 
tinguished quicksilver,  half  the  white  of  an  egg ; gum- 
dragon,  finely  powdered,  a scruple;  and  spread  the 
whole  on  a belt  of  flannel.” 

Cingulum  Sancti  Johannis.  A name  of  the  arte- 
misia. 

Cinifica'tum.  A name  for  calcinatum. 

CINIS.  (Cinis,  eris.  m.,  in  the  plural  cineres.") 
The  ash  which  remains  after  burning  any  thing. 

CI'NNABAR.  (Cinnabaris,  ris.  f.  Pliny  says  the 
Indians  call  by  this  name  a mixture  of  the  blood  of  the 
dragon  and  elephant,  and  also  many  substances  which 
resemble  it  in  colour,  particularly  the  minium  ; but  it 
now  denotes  the  red  sulphuret  of  mercury.) 

1.  An  ore  of  mercury,  consisting  of  that  mineral 
united  to  sulphur.  A native  sulphuret  of  mercury 
See  Hydrargyri  sulphuretum  rubrum. 

2.  An  artificial  compound  of  mercury  and  sulphur, 
called  factitious  cinnabar,  red  sulphuret  of  mercury, 
and  vermilion.  See  Hydrargyri  sulphuretum  rubrum. 

Cinnabaris  factitia.  Factitious  cinnabar.  See 
Hydrargyri  sulphuretum  rubrum. 

Cinnabaris  grjecorum.  The  sanguis  draconis  and 
cinnabar. 

Cinnabaris  nativa.  Native  cinnabar.  See  Hy- 
drargyri sulphuretum  rubrum. 

CINNAMOMUM.  (From  kinamon,  Arabian.) 
Cinnamon.  See  Laurus  cinnamomum. 

CINNAMON.  1.  The  name  of  a tree.  See  Laurus 
cinnamomum. 

2.  The  name  of  a stone,  which  is  a rare  mineral 


CIR 


CIR 


found  in  the  sand  of  rivers  in  Ceylon,  of  a blood  and 
hyacinth  red,  passing  into  orange  yellow. 

CINQUEFOIL.  See  Potentilla  reptans. 

Cx'on.  (Ktwv,  a column  ; from  /ctw,  to  go.) 

1.  The  uvula  was  formerly  so  named  from  its  pyra- 
midal shape. 

2.  An  enlargement  of  the  uvula. 

Cio'nis.  (From  koov,  the  uvula.)  An  enlargement 
and  painful  swelling  of  the  uvula. 

CIPOLIN.  A marble  from  Rome  and  Autun. 

CIRCLE' A.  (From  Circe , the  enchantress : so 
named  from  the  opinion  that  it  was  used  by  Circe  in 
her  enchanted  preparations.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linna:an  system.  Class,  Diandrid; 
Order,  Monogynia.  Enchanter’s  nightshade. 

2.  The  name  in  some  pharmacopoeias  for  the  Circcea 
lutetiana , which  is  now  fallen  wholly  into  disuse. 

CIRCOCE'LE.  (KipaoKriXy',  from  xrpcroj,  varix , 
or  a dilatation  of  a vein,  and  KyXrj,  a tumour.)  Vari- 
cocele. A morbid  or  varicose  distention  and  enlarge- 
ment of  the  spermatic  veins ; it  is  frequently  mistaken 
for  a descent  of  a small  portion  of  omentum.  The 
uneasiness  which  it  occasions  is  a kind  of  pain  in  the 
back,  generally  relieved  by  suspension  of  the  scrotum  ; 
and  whether  considered  on  account  of  the  pain,  or  on 
account  of  the  wasting  of  the  testicle,  which  now  and 
then  follows,  it  may  truly  be  called  a disease.  It  has 
been  resembled  to  a collection  of  earth-worms.  It 
is  most  frequently  confined  to  that  part  of  the  sper- 
matic process,  which  is  below  the  opening  in  the 
abdominal  tendon ; and  the  vessels  generally  become 
rather  larger  as  they  approach  the  testes.  There  is 
one  sure  method  of  distinguishing  between  a circocele 
and  omental  hernia;  place  the  patient  in  a hori- 
zontal posture,  and  empty  the  swelling  by  pressure 
upon  the  scrotum ; then  put  the  fingers  firmly  upon  the 
upper  part  of  the  abdominal  ring,  and  desire  the  pa- 
tient to  rise ; if  it  is  a hernia,  the  tumour  cannot  re- 
appear, as  long  as  the  pressure  is  continued  at  the 
ring  ; but  if  a circocele,  the  swelling  returns  with  in- 
creased size,  on  account  of  the  return  of  blood  into  the 
abdomen  being  prevented  by  the  pressure. 

Ci'rcos.  (From  k>.?kos,  a circle.)  A ring.  It  is 
sometimes  used  for  the  sphincter  musble  which  is 
round  like  a ring. 

CIRCULA'TION.  ( Circulatio ; from  circulo , to 
compass  about.)  Circulatio  sanguinis.  Circulation 
of  the  blood.  A vital  action  performed  by  the  heart  in 
the  following  manner : the  blood  is  returned  by  the  de- 
scending and  ascending  venae  cavae  into  the  right  auri- 
cle of  the  heart,  which,  when  distended,  contracts,  and 
sends  its  blood  into  the  right  ventricle;  from  the  right 
ventricle  it  is  propelled  through  the  pulmonary  artery 
to  circulate  through,  and  undergo  a change  in  the 
lungs,  being  prevented  from  returning  into  the  right 
auricle  by  the  closing  of  the  valves,  which  are  situated 
there  for  that  purpose.  Having  undergone  this  change 
in  the  lungs,  it  is  brought  to  the  left  auricle  of  the  heart 
by  the  four  pulmonary  veins,  and  from  thence  it  is 
evacuated  into  the  left  ventricle.  The  left  ventricle, 
when  distended,  contracts,  and  throws  the  blood 
through  the  aorta  to  every  part  of  the  body,  to  be  re- 
turned by  the  veins  into  the  two  v6n®  cavee.  It  is  pre- 
vented from  passing  back  from  the  left  ventricle  into 
the  auricle  by  a valvular  apparatus ; and  the  pul- 
monary artery  and  aorta  at  their  origin  are  also  fur- 
nished with  similar  organs,  to  prevent  its  returning 
into  the  ventricles.  This  is  a brief  outline  of  the  cir- 
culation,the  particulars  of  which  we  shall  now  describe. 

“ The  best  informed  physiologists  avow  that  the  cir- 
culation of  the  venous  blood  is  still  very  little  under- 
stood. We  shall  describe  here  only  its  most  apparent 
phenomena,  leaving  the  most  delicate  questions  until 
we  treat  of  the  relation  of  the  flowing  of  thefdood  in 
tne  veins,  with  that  In  the  arteries.  We  will  then 
speak  of  the  cause  that  determines  the  entrance  of 
blood  into  the  venous  radicles. 

To  have  a general,  but  just  idea  of  the  course  of  the 
blood  in  the  veins,  we  must  consider  that  the  sum  of 
the  small  veins  forms  a cavity  much  larger  than  that 
of  the  larger  but  less  numerous  veins,  into  which  they 
pass  ; that  these  bear  the  same  relation  to  the  trunks 
in  which  they  terminate:  consequently,  the  blood 
which  flows  in  the  veins  from  branches  towards  the 
trunks,  passes  always  from  a larger  to  a smaller  cavity; 
now,  the  following  principle  of  hydro-dynamics  may 
here  be  perfectly  applied : 


When  a liquid  flows  in  a tube  which  it  fills  com- 
pletely, the  quantity  of  this  liquid  which  traverses  the 
different  sections  of  the  tube  in  a given  time  ought  to 
be  every  where  the  same : consequently  when  the  tube 
increases , the  velocity  diminishes ; when  the  tube  di- 
minishes, the  velocity  increases  in  rapidity. 

Experience  confirms  this  principle,  and  its  just  ap- 
plication to  the  current  of  venous  blood.  If  a very 
small  vein  is  cut,  the  blood  flows  from  it  very  slowly; 
it  flows  quicker  from  a larger  vein,  and  it  flows  with 
considerable  rapidity  from  an  open  venous  trunk. 

Generally  there  are  several  veins  to  transport  the 
blood  that  has  traversed  an  organ  towards  the  larger 
trunks.  On  account  of  their  anastomoses,  the  corn- 
pressure  or  ligature  of  one  or  several  of  these  veins 
does  not  prevent  or  diminish  the  quantity  of  blood  that 
returns  to  the  heart ; it  merely  acquires  a greater  rapi- 
dity in  the  veins  which  remain  free. 

This  happens  when  a ligature  is  placed  on  the  arm 
for  the  purpose  of  bleeding.  In  the  ordinary  state,  the 
blood,  which  is  carried  to  the  fore-arm  and  the  hand, 
returns  to  the  heart  by  four  deep  veins,  and  at  least  as 
many  superficial  ones ; but  as  soon  as  the  ligature  is 
tightened,  the  blood  passes  no  longer  by  the  subcuta- 
neous veins,  and  it  traverses  with  difficulty  those  which 
are  deeper  seated.  If  one  of  the  veins  is  then  opened 
at  the  bend  of  the  arm,  it  passes  out  in  form  of  a con- 
tinued jet,  -which  continues  as  long  as  the  ligature  re- 
mains firm,  and  stops  as  soon  as  it  is  removed. 

Except  in  particular  cases,  the  veins  are  not  much 
distended  by  the  blood;  however,  those  in  which  it 
moves  with  the  greatest  rapidity  are  much  more  so: 
the  small  veins  are  scarcely  distended  at  all.  For  a 
reason  very  easy  to  be  understood,  all  the  circum- 
stances that  accelerate,  the  rapidity  of  the  blood  in  a 
vein,  produce  also  an  augmentation  in  the  distention 
of  the  vessel. 

The  introduction  of  blood  into  the  veins  taking 
place  in  a continued  manner,  every  cause  which 
arrests  its  course  produces  distention  of  the  vein,  and 
the  stagnation  of  a greater  or  less  quantity  of  blood  in 
its  cavity,  below  the  obstacle. 

The  sides  of  the  veins  seem  to  have  but  a small 
influence  upon  the  motion  of  the  blood ; they  easily 
give  way  when  the  quantity  augments,  and  return  to 
their  usual  form  when  it  diminishes;  but  their  con- 
traction is  limited ; it  is  not  sufficiently  strong  to  expel 
the  blood  completely  from  the  vein,  and  therefore  those 
of  dead  bodies  always  contain  some. 

A great  number  of  veins,  such  as  those  of  the  bones, 
of  the  sinuses  of  the  dura  mater , of  the  testicles,  of  the 
liver,  See.,  the  sides  of  which  adhere  to  an  inflexible 
canal,  can  have  evidently  no  influence  upon  the  mo- 
tion of  the  blood  that  flows  in  their  cavity. 

However,  it  is  to  the  elasticity  of  the  sides  of  the 
veins,  and  not  to  a contraction,  similar  to  that  of  the 
muscles  that  we  must  attribute  the  faculty  which  they 
possess  of  diminishing  the  size  when  the  column  of 
blood  diminishes : this  diminution  is  also  much  more 
marked  in  those  that  have  the  thickest  sides,  such  as 
the  superficial  veins. 

If  the  veins  have  themselves  very  little  influence 
upon  the  motion  of  the  blood,  many  other  necessary 
causes  exert  a very  evident  effect.  Every  continued 
or  alternate  pressure  upon  a vein,  when  strong  enough 
to  flatten  it,  may  prevent  the  passage  of  the  blood;  if 
it  is  not  so  strong,  it  will  oppose  the  dilatation  of  the 
vein  by  the  blood,  and  consequently  favour  its  motion. 
The  constant  pressure  which  the  skin  of  the  members 
exert  upon  the  veins  that  are  below  it,  renders  the 
flow  of  the  blood  more  easy  and  rapid  in  these  vessels. 
We  cannot  doubt  this,  for  all  the  circumstances  that 
diminish  the  contractility  of  the  tissue  of  the  skin,  are 
sooner  or  later  followed  by  a considerable  dilatation  of 
the  veins,  and  in  certain  cases  by  varix ; we  know 
also  that  mechanical  compression,  exerted  by  a proper 
bandage,  reduces  tlfe  veins  again  to  their  ordinary  di- 
mensions, and  also  regulates  the  motion  of  the  blood 
within  them. 

In  the  abdomen,  the  veins  are  subject  to  the  alternate 
pressure  of  the  diaphragm,  and  of  the  abdominal 
muscles,  and  this  cause  is  equally  favourable  to  the 
flow  of  the  venous  blood  in  this  part. 

The  veins  of  the  brain  support  also  a considerable 
pressure,  which  must  produce  the  same  result. 

Whenever  the  blood  runs  in  the  direction  of  its 
weight  it  flows  with  greater  facility ; the  contrary  takes 

229 


cir 


cm 

place  when  it  flows  against  the  direction  of  its 
gravity. 

W e must  not  neglect  to  notice  the  relations  of  these 
accessory  causes  with  the  disposition  of  the  veins. 
Where  they  are  very  marked,  the  veins  present  no 
valves,  and  their  sides  are  very  thin,  as  is  seen  in  the 
abdomen,  the  chest,  the  cavity  of  the  skull,  &c. ; 
where  these  have  less  influence,  the  veins  present 
valves,  and  have  thicker  sides ; lastly,  where  they  are 
very  weak,  as  in  the  subcutaneous  veins,  the  valves 
are  numerous,  and  the  sides  have  a considerable  thick- 
ness. 

We  must  take  care,  however,  not  to  confound  among 
the  circumstances  favourable  to  the  motion  of  the 
blood  in  the  veins,  causes  which  act  in  another  manner. 

For  example,  it  is  generally  known  that  the  con- 
traction of  the  muscles  of  the  fore-arm  and  the  hand 
during  bleeding,  accelerate  the  motion  of  the  blood 
which  passes  through  the  opening  of  the  vein ; phy- 
siologists say  that  the  contraction  of  the  muscles  com- 
presses the  deep  veins,  and  expels  the  blood  from  them, 
which  then  passes  into  the  superficial  veins.  Were  it 
thus,  the  acceleration  would  be  only  instantaneous, 
or  at  least  of  short  duration,  while  it  generally  con- 
tinues as  long  as  the  contraction.  We  shall  see,  farther 
on,  how  this  phenomenon  ought  to  be  explained. 

When  the  feet  are  plunged  some  time  in  hot  water, 
the  subcutaneous  veins  swell,  which  is  generally  attri- 
buted to  the  rarefaction  of  the  blood ; though  the  true 
cause  is  the  augmentation  of  the  quantity  of  blood  in 
the  feet,  but  particularly  at  the  skin,  an  augmentation 
which  ought  naturally  to  accelerate  the  motion  of  the 
blood  in  the  veins,  since  they  are  in  a given  time  tra- 
versed by  a greater  quantity  of  blood. 

After  what  has  preceded,  we  can  easily  suppose  that 
the  venous  blood  must  be  frequently  stopped  or  hindered 
in  its  course,  either  by  the  veins  suffering  too  strong  a 
pressure  in  the  different  positions  of  the  body,  or  by 
other  bodies  pressing  upon  it,  &c. : hence  the  necessity 
of  the  numerous  anastomoses  that  exist  not  only  in  the 
small  veins,  but  among  the  large,  and  even  among  the 
largest  trunks.  By  these  frequent  communications, 
one  or  several  of  the  veins  being  compressed  in  such  a 
way,  that  they  cannot  permit  the  passage  of  the  blood, 
this  fluid  turns  and  arrives  at  the  heart  by  other  di- 
rections : — one  of  the  uses  of  the  azygos  vein  appears 
to  be  to  establish  an  easy  communication  between  the 
superior  and  inferior  vena  cava.  Its  principal  utility, 
however,  seems  to  consist  in  its  being  the  common  ter- 
mination of  most  of  the  intercostal  veins. 

There  is  no  obscurity  in  the  action  of  the  valves  of 
the  veins;  they  are  real  valves,  which  prevent  the  re- 
turn of  the  blood  towards  the  venous  radicles,  and 
which  do  this  so  much  better  in  proportion  as  they  are 
large,  that  is  to  say,  more  suitably  disposed  to  stop 
entirely  the  cavity  of  the  vein. 

The  friction  of  the  blood  against  the  sides  of  the 
veins  ; its  adhesion  to  these  same  sides,  and  the  want 
of  fluidity,  must  modify  the  motion  of  the  blood  in  the 
veins,  and  tend  to  retard  it ; but  in  the  present  state  of 
physiology  and  hydrodynamics,  it  is  impossible  to  as- 
sign the  precise  effect  of  each  of  these  particular 
causes. 

We  ought  to  perceive,  by  what  has  been  said  upon 
the  motion  of  the  venous  blood,  that  it  must  undergo 
great  modifications,  according  to  an  infinity  of  circum- 
stances. 

At  any  rate,  the  venous  blood  of  every  part  of  the 
body  arrives  at  the  right  auricle  of  the  heart  by  the 
trunks  that  we  have  already  named ; viz.  two  very 
large,  the  venae  cavae,  and  one  very  small,  the  coro- 
nary vein. 

The  blood  probably  flow's  in  each  of  these  veins  with 
different  rapidity:  what  is  certain,  is,  that  the  three 
columns  of  liquid  make  an  effort  to  pass  into  the 
auricle,  and  that  the  effort  must  be  considerable.  If  it 
is  contracted,  this  effort  has  no  effect : but,  as  soon  as 
it  dilates,  the  blood  enters  its  cavity,  fills  it  completely, 
and  even  distends  the  sides  a little ; it  would  imme- 
diately enter  the  ventricle,  if  it  did  not  contract  itself 
at  this  instant.  The  blood  then  confines  itself  to  filling 
up  exactly  the  cavity  of  the  auricle ; but  this  very  soon 
contracts,  compresses  the  blood,  which  escapes  into 
the  place  where  there  is  least  compression.  Now  it 
has  only  two  issues : 1st,  by  the  vena  cava ; 2dly,  by 
the  opening  which  conducts  into  the  ventricle.  The 
columns  of  blood  which  are  coming  to  the  auricle  pre-  J 
230 


sent  a certain  resistance  to  its  passage  into  the  cavs  or 
coronary  veins.  On  the  contrary,  it  finds  every  facility 
to  enter  the  ventricle,  since  the  latter  dilates  itself  with 
force,  tends  to  produce  a vacuum,  and  consequently 
draws  on  the  blood  instead  of  repulsing  it. 

However,  all  the  blood  that  passes  out  of  the  auricle 
does  not  enter  the  ventricle ; it  has  been  long  observed 
that,  at  each  contraction  of  the  auricle,  a certain 
quantity  of  blood  flows  back  into  the  superior  and  in- 
ferior venae  cavae ; the  undulation  produced  by  this 
cause  is  sometimes  felt  as  far  as  the  external  iliac 
veins,  and  into  the  jugulars;  it  has  a sensible  influence, 
as  we  will  see,  upon  the  flowing  of  the  blood  in  several 
organs,  and  particularly  in  the  brain. 

The  quantity  of  blood  which  flow's  back  in  this 
manner,  varies  according  to  the  facility  with  which 
this  liquid  enters  the  ventricle.  If  at  the  instant  of  its 
dilatation,  the  ventricle  still  contains  much  blood, 
which  has  not  passed  into  the  pulmonary  artery,  it  can 
only  receive  a small  quantity  of  that  of  the  auricle, 
and  then  the  reflux  will  be  of  greater  extent. 

This  happens  when  the  flowing  of  the  blood  in  the 
pulmonary  artery  is  retarded,  either  by  obstacles  in  the 
lungs,  or  by  the  w ant  of  sufficient  force  in  the  ven- 
tricle. This  reflux,  of  which  we  speak,  is  the  cause 
of  the  beating  which  is  seen  in  the  veins  of  certain 
sick  persons,  and  which  bears  the  name  of  venous 
pulse.  Nothing  similar  can  take  place  in  the  coronary 
vein,  for  its  opening  is  furnished  with  a valve,  which 
shuts  on  the  instant  of  the  contraction  of  the  au- 
ricle. 

The  instant  in  which  the  auricle  ceases  to  contract, 
the  ventricle  enters  into  contraction,  the  blood  it  con- 
tains is  strongly  pressed,  and  tends  to  escape  in  every 
direction : it  would  return  so  much  more  easily  into 
the  auricle,  that,  as  we  have  already  frequently  said, 
it  dilates  just  a U this  instant;  but  the  tricuspid  valve 
which  shuts  the  auriculo-ventricular  opening  prevents 
this  reflux.  Being  raised  by  the  liquid  introduced  be- 
low it,  and  which  tends  to  pass  into  the  auricle,  it  gives 
way  until  it  has  become  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of 
the  ventricle ; its  three  divisions  then  shut  almost  com- 
pletely the  opening,  and  as  the  tendons  of  the  columnce 
camece  do  not  permit  them  to  go  farther,  the  valve 
resists  the  effort  of  the  blood,  and  thus  prevents  it  from 
passing  into  the  auricle. 

It  is  not  the  same  with  the  blood,  which,  during  the 
dilatation  of  the  ventricle,  corresponded  to  the  auricu- 
lar surface  of  the  valve;  it  is  evident  that  in  the  mo- 
tion of  the  ventricle  it  is  carried  forward  into  the  auri- 
cle, where  it  mixes  with  that  which  comes  from  the 
vence  cav<s  and  coronary  veins. 

Not  being  able  to  overcome  the  resistance  of  the  tri- 
cuspid valve,  the  blood  of  the  ventricle  has  no  other 
issue  than  the  pulmonary  artery,  into  which  it  enters 
by  raising  the  three  sigmoid  valves  that  supported  the 
column  of  blood  contained  in  the  artery  during  the  di- 
latation of  the  ventricle. 

Suppose  the  artery  lull  of  blood,  and  left  to  itself,  the 
liquid  will  be  pressed  in  the  whole  extent  of  the  ves- 
sel, by  the  sides  which  tehd  to  contract  upon  the  ca- 
vity ; the  blood,  being  thus  pressed,  will  endeavour  to 
escape  in  every  direction ; now  it  has  only  two  ways 
to  pass,  by  the  cardiac  orifice,  and  by  the  numerous 
small  vessels  that  terminate  the  artery  in  the  tissue  ot 
the  lungs. 

The  orifice  of  the  pulmonary  artery  in  tire  heart  be- 
ing very  large,  the  blood  would  easily  pass  into  the 
ventricle,  if  there  were  not  a particular  apparatus  at 
this  orifice,  intended  to  prevent  this;  the  three  sigmoid 
valves.  Being  pressed  against  the  sides  of  the  artery, 
at  the  instant  that  the  ventricle  sends  a wave  of  blood 
that  way,  these  folds  become  perpendicular  to  its  axis ; 
as  soon  jfs  the  blood  tends  to  flow  back  into  the  ventri- 
cle, they  place  themselves  so  as  to  shut  up  the  cavity 
of  this  vessel  completely. 

On  account  of  the  bag-like  form  of  the  sigmoid 
valves,  they  are  swelled  by  the  blood  that  enters  into 
their  cavity,  and  their  margin  tends  to  assume  a circu- 
lar figure.  Now,  three  circular  portions,  placed  upon 
each  other,  necessarily  leave  a space  between  them. 

When  the  valves,  therefore,  of  the  pulmonary  artery 
are  lowered  by  the  blood,  there  ought  to  remain  an 
opening  by  which  this  liquid  may  flow  back  into  the 
ventricle. 

If  each  valve  were  alone,  it  would  undoubtedly  take 
a semicircular  form ; but  there  are  three  of  them; 


CIR 


being  pressed  by  the  blood,  they  lie  all  close  together : 
and,  as  they  cannot  extend  as  far  as  their  fibres  permit 
them,  they  press  upon  each  other,  on  account  of  the 
small  space  in  which  they  are  contained,  and  which 
does  not  permit  their  extending  themselves.  The 
valves  then  assume  the  figure  of  three  triangles,  whose 
summit  is  in  the  centre  of  the  artery,  and  the  sides  are 
in  juxta  position , so  as  completely  to  intercept  the  ca- 
vity of  the  artery.  Perhaps  the  knots,  or  buttons , 
which  are  upon  the  summit  of  some  of  the  triangles, 
are  intended  to  shut  more  perfectly  the  centre  of  the 
artery. 

Finding  no  passage  into  the  ventricle,  the  blood  will 
pass  into  the  radicles  of  the  pulmonary  veins,  with 
which  the  small  arteries  that  terminate  the  pulmonary 
artery  form  a continuation,  and  this  passage  will  con- 
tinue as  long  as  the  sides  of  the  artery  press  the  con- 
tained blood  with  sufficient  force ; and,  except  in  the 
trunk  and  the  principal  branches,  this  effect  continues 
until  the  whole  of  the  blood  is  expelled. 

We  might  suppose  the  smallness  of  the  vessels  that 
terminate  the  pulmonary  artery  an  obstacle  to  the  flow- 
ing of  the  blood : that  might  be,  if  they  were  not  nu- 
merous, or  if  the  capacity  of  the  whole  were  less,  or 
even  equal  to  that  of  the  trunk  ; but  as  they  are  innu- 
merable, and  their  capacity  is  much  greater  than  that 
of  the  trunk,  there  is  no  difficulty  in  the  motion.  It  is 
true  that  the  distention  or  subsidence  of  the  lungs  ren- 
ders this  passage  more  or  less  easy. 

In  order  that  this  flowing  may  take  place  with  faci- 
lity, the  force  of  contraction  of  the  different  divisions 
of  the  artery  ought  to  be  every  where  in  relation  to 
their  size ; if,  on  the  contrary,  that  of  the  small  were 
greater  than  that  of  the  large,  as  soon  as  the  first  had 
expelled  the  blood  by  which  they  were  filled,  they 
would  not  be  sufficiently  distended  by  the  blood 
coming  from  the  second,  and  the  flowing  of  the  blood 
would  be  retarded:  now,  what  takes  place  is  quite  the 
conirary  of  this  supposition.  If  the  pulmonary  artery 
of  a living  animal  were  tied  immediately  above  the 
heart,  almost  all  the  blood  contained  in  the  artery  at 
the  instant  of  the  ligature,  would  pass  quickly  into  the 
pulmonary  veins,  and  arrive  at  the  heart. 

This  is  what  happens  when  the  blood  contained  in 
the  pulmonary  artery  is  exposed  to  the  single  action  of 
this  vessel;  but  in  the  common  state,  at  each  con- 
traction of  the  right  ventricle,  a certain  quantity  of 
blood  is  thrown  with  force  into  the  artery;  the  valves 
are  immediately  raised ; the  artery,  and  almost  all  its 
divisions,  ate  so  much  more  distended,  in  proportion 
as  the  heart  is  more  forcibly  contracted,  and  as  the 
quantity  of  blood  injected  into  the  artery  is  greater. 
The  ventricle  dilates  immediately  after  its  contraction, 
and  at  this  instant  the  sides  of  the  artery  contract  also ; 
the  sigmoid  valves  descend  and  shut  the  pulmonary 
artery,  until  they  are  raised  by  a new  contraction  of 
the  ventricle. 

Such  is  the  second  cause  of  the  motion  of  the  blood 
in  fhe  artery  that  goes  towards  the  lungs : we  see  it  is 
intermittent;  let  us  endeavour  to  appreciate  its  effects : 
for  which  purpose,  let  us  consider  the  most  apparent 
phenomena  ol’  the  flow  of  the  blood  in  the  pulmonary 
artery. 

It  has  been  just  observed,  that  in  the  instant  the 
ventricle  injects  the  blood  into  the  artery,  the  trunk, 
and  all  the  divisions  of  a certain  size,  undeigo  an  evi- 
dent dilfttation.  This  phenomenon  is  called  the  pulsa- 
tion of  the  artery.  The  pulsation  is  very  sensible  near 
the  heart ; it  becomes  feeble  in  proportion  to  its  dis- 
tance from  it ; when  the  artery,  by  being  divided,  has 
become  very  small,  it  ceases. 

Another  phenomenon,  which  is  only  the  conse- 
quence of  the  precedihg,  is  observed  when  the  artery 
is  opened. 

If  it  be  near  the  heart,  and  in  a place  where  the 
beating  is  sensible,  the  blood  spouts  out  by  jerks;  if 
the  opening  be  made  far  from  the  heart,  and  in  a small 
division,  the  jet  is  continued  and  uniform  ; lastly,  if 
one  of  the  very  small  vessels  that  terminate  the  artery 
be  opened,  the  blood  flows,  but  without  forming  any 
jet : it  flows  uniformly  in  a sheet. 

We  see  at  first,  in  these  phenomena,  a new  applica- 
tion of  the  principle  of  hydro-dynamics,  as  already 
mentioned,  with  regard  to  the  influence  of  the  size  of 
the  tube  upon  the  liquid  that  flows  in  it:  the  greater 
the  tube  is,  the  rapidity  is  the  less.  This  capacity  of 
tue  vessel  increasing  according  as  it  advances  towards 


CIR 

the  lungs,  the  quickness  of  the  blood  necessarily  di- 
minishes. 

With  regard  to  the  pulsation  of  the  artery,  and  the 
jet  of  blood  that  escapes  from  it  when  it  is  open,  we  see 
plainly  that  these  two  effects  depend  on  the  contraction 
of  the  right  ventricle,  and  the  introduction  of  a certain 
quantity  of  blood  into  the  artery,  which  takes  place  by 
this  means  while  flowing  through  the  small  vessels 
that  terminate  the  artery,  and  that  give  commence- 
ment to  the  pulmonary  veins;  the  venous  blood 
changes  its  nature  by  the  effect  of  the  contact  of  the 
air ; it  acquires  the  qualities  of  arterial  blood : it  is  this 
change  in  the  properties  of  the  blood  which  essentially 
constitutes  respiration. 

At  the  instant  in  which  the  venous  blood  traverses 
the  small  vessels  of  the  pulmonary  lobules,  it  assumes 
a scarlet  colour ; its  odour  becomes  stronger,  and  its 
taste  more  distinct,  its  temperature  rises  about  a de- 
gree ; a part  of  its  serum  disappears  in  the  form  of  va- 
pour in  the  tissue  of  the  lobules,  and  mixes  with  the 
air.  Its  tendency  to  coagulate  augments  considerably, 
which  is  expressed  by  saying  that  its  plasticity  be- 
comes stronger,  its  specific  gravity  diminishes,  as  well 
as  its  capacity  for  caloric.  The  venous  blood,  having 
acquired  these  characters,  now  becomes  arterial  blood, 
and  enters  the  radicles  of  the  pulmonary  veins,  which 
have  their  origin,  like  the  veins  properly  so  called,  in 
the  tissue  of  the  lungs ; that  is,  they  form  at  first  an 
infinite  number  of  radicles,  which  appear  to  be  the  con- 
tinuation of  the  pulmonary  artery.  These  radicles 
unite  to  form  thicker  roots,  which  become  stjll  thicker. 
Lastly,  they  all  terminate  in  four  vessels,  which  open, 
after  a short  passage,  into  the  left  auricle.  The  pul- 
monary veins  are  different  from  the  other  veins,  in 
their  not  anastomosing  after  they  have  acquired  a 
certain  thickness ; a similar  disposition  has  been  seen 
in  the  divisions  of  the  artery  which  is  distributed  to 
the  lungs. 

The  pulmonary  veins  have  no  valves,  and  their 
structure  is  similar  to  that  of  the  other  veins ; their 
middle  membrane  is,  however,  a little  thicker,  and  it 
appears  to  possess  more  elasticity.  The  blood  passes 
into  the  radicles  of  the  pulmonary  veins,  and  very  soon 
reaches  the  trunk  of  these  veins : in  this  passage  it 
presents  a gradually  accelerated  motion,  in  proportion 
as  it  passes  from  the  small  veins  into  the  larger: 
finally,  it  does  not  at  all  flow  by  jerks,  and  it  appears 
nearly  equally  rapid  in  the  four  pulmonary  veins. 
From  the  pulmonary  veins  the  left  auricle  receives 
the  blood. 

The  mechanism  by  which  the  blood  traverses  the 
left  auricle  and  ventricle  is  the  same  as  that  by  which 
the  venous  blood  traverses  the  right  cavities. 

When  the  left  auricle  dilates,  the  blood  of  the  four 
pulmonary  veins  enters  and  fills  it ; when  it  contracts, 
part  of  the  blood  passes  into  the  ventricle,  and  part 
flows  back  into  the  pulmonary  veins  ; when  the  ven- 
tricle dilates,  it  receives  the  blood  which  comes  from 
the  auricle,  and  a small  quantity  of  that  of  the  aorta; 
when  it  contracts,  the  mitral  valve  is  raised,  it  shuts 
the  auriculo-vcntricular  opening,  and  the  blood,  not 
being  able  to  return  into  the  auricle,  it  enters  into  the 
aorta  by  raising  the  three  sigmoid  valves,  which  were 
shut  during  the  dilatation  of  the  ventricle. 

It  is  necessary  to  remark,  however,  that  the  fleshy 
columns  having  no  existence  in  the  auricle,  their  influ- 
ence cannot  exist  as  in  the  right,  and  the  arterial  ven- 
tricle being  much  thicker  than  the  venous,  it  com- 
presses the  blood  with  a much  greater  force  than  the 
right,  which  was  indispensable  on  account  of  the  dis- 
tance to  which  it  has  to  send  this  liquid. 

Course  of  the  blood  in  the  aorta,  and  its  divisions.— 
Notwithstanding  the  differences  which  exist  between 
this  and  the  pulmonary  artery,  the  phenomena  of  the 
motion  of  the  blood  are  nearly  the  same  in  both  : thus 
a ligature  being  applied  upon  this  vessel,  near  the 
heart,  in  a living  animal,  it  contracts  in  its  whole 
length,  and,  except  a small  quantity  that  remains  in  the 
principal  arteries,  the  blood  passes  immediately  into 
llie  veins. 

Some  authors  doubt  the  fact  of  the  contraction  of 
the  arteries ; the  following  experiment  may  be  made 
to  convince  them : uncover  the  carotid  artery  of  a 
living  animal  the  length  of  several  inches ; take  the 
transverse  dimension  of  the  vessel  with  compasses,  tie 
it  at  two  different  points  at  the  same  time,  and  you 
may  then  have  any  length  whatever  of  artery  full  of 


era 


era 


blood;  make  a small  opening  in  the  sides  of  th^s  por- 
tion of  the  artery,  you  will  immediately  see  almost  the 
whole  of  the  blood  pass  out,  and  it  will  even  spout  to 
a certain  distance.  Then  measure  the  breadth  with 
the  compasses,  and  there  will  be  no  doubt  of  the  artery 
being  much  contracted,  if  the  rapid  expulsion  of  the 
blood  has  not  already  convinced  you.  This  experi- 
ment also  proves  that  the  force  with  which  the  artery 
contracts  is  sufficient  to  expel  the  blood  that  it  con- 
tains. 

Passage  of  the  blood  of  the  arteries  into  the  veins. — 
When,  in  the  dead  body,  an  injection  is  thrown  into 
an  artery,  it  immediately  returns  by  the  corresponding 
vein : the  same  thing  takes  place,  and  with  still  more 
facility,  if  the  injection  is  thrown  into  the  artery  of  a 
living  animal.  In  cold-blooded  animals,  the  blood  can 
be  seen,  by  the  aid  of  a microscope,  passing  from  the 
arteries  into  the  veins.  The  communication  between 
these  vessels  is  then  direct,  and  very  easy ; it  is  natural 
to  suppose  that  the  heart,  after  having  forced  the  blood 
to  the  last  arterial  twigs,  continues  to  make  it  move 
into  the  venous  radicles,  and  even  into  the  veins. 
Harvey,  and  a great  number  of  celebrated  anatomists, 
thought  so.  Lately,  Bich&t  has  been  strongly  against 
this  doctrine : he  has  limited  the  influence  of  the  blood : 
he  pretends  that  it  ceases  entirely  in  the  place  where 
the  arterial  is  changed  into  venous  blood,  that  is,  in 
the  numerous  small  vessels  that  terminate  the  arte- 
ries and  commence  the  veins.  In  this  place,  according 
to  him,,  the  action  of  the  small  vessels  alone  is  the 
cause  of  the  motion  of  the  blood. 

Remarks  on  the  Movements  of  the  Heart. — A.  The 
right  auricle  and  ventricle,  and  the  left  auricle  and 
ventricle,  the  action  of  which  we  have  studied  sepa- 
rately, in  reality  form  only  one  organ,  which  is  the 
heart. 

The  auricles  contract  and  dilate  together;  the  same 
thing  takes  place  with  the  ventricles,  whose  move- 
ments are  simultaneous. 

When  the  contraction  of  the  heart  is  spoken  of, 
that  of  the  ventricle  is  understood.  Their  contraction 
is  called  systole , their  dilatation  diastole. 

B.  Every  time  that  the  ventricles  contract,  the 
whole  of  the  heart  is  rapidly  carried  forward,  and  the 
point  of  this  organ  strikes  the  left  lateral  side  of  the 
chest,  opposite  the  internal  of  the  sixth  and  seventh 
true  ribs. 

C.  The  number  of  the  pulsations  of  the  heart  is 
considerable ; it  is  generally  greater  in  proportion  as 
the  person  is  younger. 

At  birth  it  is  from  130  to  140  in  a minute. 

At  one  year 120  to  130. 

At  two  years 100  to  110. 

At  three  years. ...  90  to  100. 

At  seven  years... . 85  to  90. 

At  fourteen  years  80  to  85. 

At  adult  age 75  to  80. 

At  first  old  age — 65  to  .75. 

At  confirmed  old  age  60  to  65. 

But  these  numbers  vary  according  to  an  infinity  of 
circumstances,  sex,  temperament,  individual  disposi- 
tion, &c. 

The  affections  of  the  mind  have  a great  influence 
upon  the  rapidity  of  the  contractions  of  the  heart; 
every  one  knows  that  even  a slight  emotion  immedi- 
ately modifies  the  contractions,  and  generally  accele- 
rates them.  In  this  respect  great  changes  take  place 
also  by  diseases. 

D.  Many  researches  have  been  made  to  determine 
with  what  force  the  ventricles  contract.  In  order  to 
appreciate  that  of  the  left  ventricle,  an  experiment 
has  been  made,  which  consists  in  crossing  the  legs, 
and  placing  upon  one  knee  the  ham  of  the  other  leg, 
with  a weight  of  55  pounds  appended  to  the  extremity 
of  the  foot.  This  considerable  weight,  though  placed 
at  the  extremity  of  such  a long  lever,  is  raised  at 
each  contraction  of  the  ventricle,  on  account  of  the 
tendency  to  straighten  the  accidental  curvature  of  the 
popliteal  artery,  when  the  legs  are  crossed  in  this 
manner. 

This  experiment  shows  that  the  force  of  contraction 
of  the  heart  is  very  great ; but  it  cannot  give  the  exact 
value  of  it.  Mechanical  physiologists  have  made 
great  efforts  to  express  it  in  numbers.  Borelli  compares 
the  force  which  keeps  up  the  circulation  to  that  which 
would  be  necessary  to  raise  180,000  pounds ; Hales 
believes  it  to  be  51  pounds  5 ounces ; and  Keil  reduces 


it  to  from  15  to  8 ounces.  Where  shall  we  find  the 
truth  in  these  contradictions  1 

It  seems  impossible  to  know  exactly  the  force  de- 
veloped by  the  heart  in  its  contraction ; it  very  pro- 
bably varies  according  to  numerous  causes,  such  as 
age,  the  volume  of  the  organ,  the  size  of  the  indivi- 
dual, the  particular  disposition,  the  quantity  of 
blood,  the  state  of  the  nervous  system,  the  action  of 
the  organs,  the  state  of  health  or  of  sickness,  &c. 

All  that  has  been  said  of  the  force  of  the  heart  re 
lates  only  to  its  contraction,  its  dilatation  having  been 
considered  as  a passive  state,  a sort  of  repose  of  the 
fibres ; however,  when  the  ventricles  dilate,  it  is  with 
a very  great  force,  for  example,  capable  of  raising  a 
weight  of  twenty  pounds,  as  may  be  observed  in  ani- 
mals recently  dead.  When  the  heart  of  a living  ani 
mal  is  taken  hold  of  by  the  hand,  however  small  it  may 
be,  it  is  impossible  by  any  effort  to  prevent  the  dilata- 
tion of  the  ventricles.  The  dilatation  of  the  heart,  then, 
cannot  be  considered  as  a state  of  inaction  or  repose. 

E.  The  heart  moves  from  the  first  days  of  existence 
of  the  embryo  to  the  instant  of  death  by  decrepitude. 

Why  does  it  move  ? This  question  has  been  ask 
ed  by  ancient  and  modern  philosophers  and  physi- 
ologists. The  wherefore  of  phenomena  is  not  easy 
to  be  given  in  physiology;  almost  always  what  is 
taken  for  such  is  only  in  other  terms  the  expression 
of  the  phenomena ; but  it  is  remarkable  how  easily 
we  deceive  ourselves  in  this  respect;  one  of  the 
strongest  proofs  of  it  is  afforded  by  the  different  expla- 
nations of  the  motion  of  the  heart. 

The  ancients  said  that  there  was  a pulsific  virtue  in 
the  heart,  a concentrated  fire,  that  gave  motion  to  this 
organ.  Descartes  imagined  that  an  explosion  as  sud- 
den as  that  of  gunpowder  took  place  in  the  heart 
The  motion  of  the  heart  was  afterward  attributed  to 
the  animal  spirits , to  the  nervous  fluid , to  the  soul, 
to  the  process  of  the  nervous  system,  to  the  archea : 
Haller  considers  it  as  an  effect  of  irritability.  Lately, 
Legallois  has  endeavoured  to  prove,  by  experiments, 
that  thPprinciple  or  cause  of  the  motion  of  the  heart 
has  its  seat  in  the  spinal  marrow. 

Remarks  upon  the  circular  Motion  of  the  Blood,  or 
the  Circulation. — We  now  know  all  the  links  of  the 
circular  chain  that  the  sanguiferous  system  repre- 
sents ; we  know  how  the  blood  is  carried  from  the 
lungs  toward  all  the  other  parts  of  the  body,  and  how 
it  returns  from  these  parts  to  the  heart.  Let  us  ex- 
amine these  phenomena  in  a general  manner,  in  order 
to  show  the  most  important. 

A.  The  quantity  of  blood  contained  in  the  system  is 
very  considerable.  It  has  been  estimated  by  several 
authors  at  from  24  to  30  pounds.  This  value  cannot 
be  at  all  exact,  for  the  quantity  of  blood  varies  accord- 
ing to  numerous  causes. 

The  relation  of  the  mass  of  the  arterial  with  that  of 
the  venous  blood,  is  somewhat  better  known.  This 
last,  contained  in  vessels  larger  than  that  of  the  arte- 
ries, is  necessarily  in  greater  quantity,  though  we  can- 
not say  exactly  how  much  greater  its  mass  is  than  that 
of  the  arterial  blood. 

B.  The  circulatory  path  of  the  blood  being  continu- 
ous, and  the  capacity  of  the  canal  variable,  the  rapidity 
of  this  fluid  must  be  variable  also ; for  the  same  quan- 
tity must  pass  through  all  the  points  in  a given  time: 
observation  confirms  this.  The  rapidity  is  great  in 
the  trunk,  and  the  principal  divisions  of  the  pulmonary 
arlerv  and  aorta : it  diminishes  much  in  the  secondary 
divisions ; it  diminishes  still  more  at  the  instant  of  the 
passage  from  the  arteries  into  the  veins ; it  continues 
to  augment  in  proportion  as  the  blood  passes  from  the 
roots  of  the  veins  into  larger  roots,  and  lastly  into  the 
large  veins  ; but  the  rapidity  is  never  so  great  in  the 
venae  cavte  as  in  the  aorta.  In  the  trunks  and  the 
principal  arterial  divisions,  the  course  of  the  blood 
is  not  only  continued  under  the  influence  of  the  con- 
traction of  the  arteries,  but,  besides,  it  flows  in  jerks 
by  the  effect  of  the  contraction  of  the  ventricles.  This 
jerking  manifests  itself  in  the  arteries  by  a simple  di 
latation  in  those  that  are  straight,  and  by  a dilatation 
and  tendency  to  straighten  in  those  which  are  flexuous. 

The  pulse  is  formed  by  the  first  of  these  phenomena, 
to  which  the  second  is  sometimes  joined.  It  is  not 
easy  to  study,  in  man  or  in  the  animals,  except  where 
the  arteries  are  laid  close  upon  a bone,  because  they 
do  not  then  retire  from  under  the  finger  when  it  is 
placed  upon  them,  as  happens  to  arteries  in  soft  parts. 


CIR 


CIR 


In  general,  the  pulse  makes  known  the  principal 
modification  of  the  contraction  of  the  left  ventricle,  its 
quickness,  its  intensity,  its  weakness,  its  regularity,  its 
irregularity.  The  quantity  of  the  blood  is  also  known 
by  the  pulse.  If  it  is  great,  the  artery  is  round,  thick, 
and  resisting.  If  the  blood  is  in  small  quantity,  the 
artery  is  small  and  easily  flattened.  Certain  disposi- 
tions in  the  arteries  have  an  influence  also  upon  the 
pulse,  and  may  render  it  different  in  the  principal 
arteries. 

C.  The  beating  of  the  arteries  is  necessarily  felt  in 
the  organs  which  are  next  them,  and  so  much  more 
in  proportion  as  the  arteries  are  more  voluminous,  and 
as  the  organs  give  way  with  less  facility.  The  jerk 
which  they  undergo  is  generally  considered  as  favour- 
able to  their  action,  though  no  positive  proof  of  it 
exists. 

In  this  respect  none  of  the  organs  ought  to  be  more 
affected  than  the  brain.  The  four  cerebral  arteries 
unite  in  circles  at  the  base  of  the  skull,  and  raise  the 
brain  at  each  contraction  of  the  ventricle,  as  it  is  easy 
to  be  convinced  of  by  laying  bare  the  brain  of  an  ani- 
mal, or  by  observing  this  organ  in  wounds  of  the 
head.  Probably,  the  numerous  angular  bendings  of 
the  internal  carotid  arteries,  and  of  the  vertebrals  be- 
fore their  entrance  into  the  skull,  are  useful  for  mode- 
rating this  shaking;  these  bendings  must  also  neces- 
sarily retard  the  course  of  the  blood  in  these  vessels. 

When  the  arteries  penetrate  in  a voluminous  state 
into  the  parenchyma  of  the  organs,  as  the  liver,  the 
kidneys,  &c.,  the  organ  must  also  receive  a jerk  at 
each  contraction  of  the  heart.  The  organs  into  which 
the  vessels  enter,  after  being  divided  and  subdivided, 
can  suffer  nothing  similar. 

D.  From  the  lungs  to  the  left  auricle  the  blood  is  of 
the  same  nature ; however,  it  sometimes  happens  that 
it  is  not  the  same  in  the  four  pulmonary  veins.  For 
instance,  if  the  lungs  are  so  changed  that  the  air  can- 
not penetrate  into  the  lobules,  the  blood  which  tra- 
verses them  will  not  be  changed  from  venous  to  arterial 
blood;  it  will  arrive  at  the  heart  without  having  un- 
dergone this  change ; but  in  its  passage  through  the 
left  cavities  it  will  be  intimately  mixed  with  that  of 
the.  lungs  opposite.  The  blood  is  necessarily  homoge- 
neous from  the  left  ventricle  to  the  last  divisions  of  the 
aorta  ; but,  being  arrived  at  these  small  divisions,  its 
elements  separate  ; at  least  there  exists  a great  num- 
ber of  parts,  such  as  the  serous  membranes,  the  cellu- 
lar tissue,  the  tendons,  the  aponeuroses,  the  fibrous 
membranes,  &c.,  into  which  the  red  part  of  the  blood 
is  never  seen  to  penetrate,  and  the  capillaries  of  which 
contain  only  serum. 

This  separation  of  the  elements  of  the  blood  takes 
place  only  in  a state  of  health  ; when  the  parts  that  I 
have  mentioned  become  diseased,  it  often  happens 
that  their  small  vessels  contain  blood,  possessed  of  all 
its  characteristic  properties. 

There  have  been  endeavours  to  explain  this  particu- 
lar analysis  of  the  blood  by  the  small  vessels.  Boer- 
haave,  who  admitted  several  sorts  of  globules  of  dif- 
ferent sizes  in  the  blood,  said,  that  globules  of  a certain 
largeness  could  only  pass  into  vessels  of  an  appropri- 
ate size : we  have  seen  that  globules,  such  as  they  were 
admitted  by  Boerhaave.  do  not  exist. 

Bichat  believed  that  there  existed  in  the  small  ves- 
sels a particular  sensibility,  by  which  they  admitted 
only  the  part  of  the  blood  suitable  to  them.  We  have 
already  frequently  contested  ideas  of  this  kind ; nei- 
ther can  they  be  admitted  here ; for  the  most  irritating 
liqrtids,  introduced  into  the  arteries,  pass  immediately 
into  the  veins,  without  any  opposition  to  their  passage 
by  the  capillaries. 

E.  The  elements  of  the  blood  separate  in  traversing 
the  small  vessels ; sometimes  the  serum  escapes,  and 
spreads  upon  the  surface  of  the  membrane : sometimes 
the  fatty  matter  is  deposited  in  cells ; here  the  mucus, 
there  the  fibrine ; elsewhere  are  the  foreign  substances, 
which  were  accidentally  mixed  with  the  arterial  blood. 
In  losing  these  different  elements,  the  blood  assumes 
the  qualities  of  venous  blood.  At  the  same  time  that 
the  arterial  blood  supplies  these  losses,  the  small  veins 
absorb  the  substances  with  which  they  are  in  contact. 
In  the  intestinal  canal,  for  example,  they  absorb  the 
drinks;  on  the  other  hand,  the  lymphatic  trunks  pour 
the  lymph  and  the  chyle  into  the  venous  system;  it  is 
certain,  then,  that  the  venous  blood  cannot  be  homo- 
geneous, and  that  its  composition  must  be  variable  in 


the  different  veins;  but,  having  reached  the  heart,  by 
the  motions  of  the  right  auricle  and  ventricle,  and  the 
disposition  of  the  fleshy  columns,  the  elements  all  mix 
together,  and  when  they  are  completely  mixed,  they 
pass  into  the  pulmonary  artery. 

F.  A general  law  of  the  economy  is,  that  no  organ 
continues'  to  act  without  receiving  arterial  blood ; 
from  this  results,  that  all  the  other  functions  are  de- 
pendent on  the  circulation  ; but  the  circulation,  in  its 
turn,  cannot  continue  without  the  respiration  by 
which  the  arterial  blood  is  formed,  and  without  the 
action  of  the  nervous  system,  which  has  a great  influ- 
ence upon  the  rapidity  of  the  flowing  of  the  blood,  and 
upon  its  distribution  in  the  organs.  Indeed,  under  tile 
action  of  the  nervous  system,  the  motions  of  the  heart, 
and  consequently  the  general  quickness  of  the  course 
of  the  blood,  are  quickened  or  retarded.  Thus,  when 
the  organs  act  voluntarily  or  involuntarily,  we  learn 
from  observation,  that  they  receive  a greater  quantity 
of  blood  without  the  motion  of  the  general  circulation 
being  accelerated  on  that  account ; and  if  their  action 
predominates,  the  arteries  which  are  directed  there, 
increase  considerably.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  action 
diminishes,  or  ceases  entirely,  the  arteries  become 
smaller,  and  permit  only  a small  quantity  to  reach  the 
organ.  These  phenomena  are  manifest  in  the  mus- 
cles: the  circulation  becomes  more  rapid  in  them 
when  they  contract ; if  they  are  often  contracted,  the 
volume  of  their  arteries  increases;  if  they  are  para- 
lyzed, the  arteries  become  very  small,  and  the  pulse  is 
scarcely  felt. 

The  circulation,  then,  may  be  influenced  by  the 
nervous  system  in  three  ways : 1st,  By  modifying  the 
motions  of  the  heart;  2dly,  By  modifying  the  capilla- 
ries of  the  organs,  so  as  to  accelerate  the  flowing  of  the 
blood  in  them  ; 3dly,  By  producing  the  same  effects  in 
the  lungs,  that  is,  by  rendering  the  course  of  the  blood 
more  or  less  easy  through  this  organ. 

The  acceleration  of  the  motions  of  the  heart  be- 
comes sensible  to  us  by  the  manner  in  which  the  point 
of  the  organ  strikes  the  walls  of  the  chest.  The  diffi- 
culty of  the  capillary  circulation  is  discovered  by  a 
feeling  of  numbness  and  a particular  prickling ; and 
when  the  pulmonary  circulation  is  difficult,  we  are  in- 
formed of  it  by  an  oppression  or  sense  of  suffocation, 
more  or  less  strong. 

Probably  the  distribution  of  the  filaments  of  the 
great  sympathetic  on  the  sides  of  the  arteries,  has 
some  important  use ; but  this  use  is  entirely  unknown’; 
we  have  received  no  light  on  the  point  by  any  ex- 
periment.”— Magendie's  Elements  of  Physiology. 

Circula'tor.  (From  circulo , to  compass  about.) 
A wandering  practiser  in  medicine.  A quack;  a 
mountebank. 

Circulato'rium.  (From  circulo , to  move  round.) 
A chemical  digesting  vessel  in  which  the  fluid  per- 
forms a circulatory  motion. 

CI'RCULUS.  (Dim.  of  circus,  a circle.)  1.  A cir- 
cle or  ring. 

2.  Any  part  of  the  body  which  is  round  or  annular, 
as  circulus  oculi. 

3.  A round  chemical  instrument  sometimes  called 
abbreviatorium  by  the  old  chemists. 

Circulus  arteriosus  iridis.  The  artery  which 
runs  round  the  iris  and  forms  a circle,  is  so  termed. 

Circulus  quadruplex.  A bandage. 

Circumcaula'lis.  A name  of  the  adnata  of  the 
eye. 

CIRCUMCI'SION.  ( Circumcisio , from  circumculo, 
to  cut  about.)  The  cutting  off  the  prepuce  from  the 
glans  penis  ; an  ancient  custom,  still  practised  among 
the  Jews,  and  rendered  necessary  by  the  heat  of  the 
climate  in  which  it  was  first  practised,  to  prevent  col- 
lections and  a vitiated  state  of  the  sebaceous  secretion 
from  the  odoriferous  glands  of  the  part. 

CIRCUMFLE'XUS.  (Circumfiexus,  sc.  musculus.) 
A muscle  of  the  palate.  Tensor  palat.i  of  Innes.  Cir- 
cumflexus  palati  mollis  of  Albinus.  Sphcno-salpingo- 
st.aphilinus,  scu  staphilinus  externus  of  Winslow. 
Musculus  tubes  novas  of  Valsalva.  Palato-salpingeus 
of  Douglas.  Ptcrigo-staphylinus  of  Cowper,  and  Pe- 
tros alpingo  staphilin  of  Dumas.  It  arises  from  the 
spinous  process  of  the  sphenoid  bone,  behind  the  fora- 
men ovale,  which  transmits  the  third  branch  of  the 
fifth  pair  of  nerves,  and  from  the  Eustachian  tube,  not 
far  from  its  osseous  part ; it  then  runs  down  along  the 
pterygoideus  interims,  passes  over  the  hook  of  the 

233 


CIS 


C1T 


internal  plate  of  the  pterygoid  process  by  a round  ten- 
don, which  soon  spreads  into  a broad  membrane.  It 
is  inserted  into  the  velum  pendulum  palati,  and  the 
semilunar  edge  of  the  os  palati,  and  extends  as  far  as 
the  suture  which  joins  the  two  bones.  Generally 
some  of  its  posterior  fibres  join  with  the  constrictor 
pharyngis  superior,  and  paluto-pharyngaeus.  Its  use 
is  to  stretch  the  velum,  to  draw  it  downwards,  and  to 
the  side  towards  the  hook.  It  hath  little  effect  upon 
the  tube,  being  chiefly  connected  to  its  osseous  part. 

CIRCUMGYRA'TIO.  (From  circumgyro,  to  turn 
round.)  Circumgyration,  or  the  turning  a limb  round 
in  its  socket. 

Circumli'tio.  (From  circumlino , to  anoint  all 
over.)  A medicine  used  as  a general  unction  or  lini- 
ment to  the  part. 

CIRCUMOSSA'LIS.  (From  circum,  about,  and  os, 
a bone.)  Surrounding  a bone  as  the  periosteum  does ; 
or  surrounded  by  a bone. 

CIRCUMSCISUS.  Circumcised.  Applied  to  a 
membranous  capsule,  separating  into  two  parts  by  a 
complete  circular  fissure. 

CI  RCUS.  (K ipKos ; from  carka , a Chaldean  word, 
to  surround.)  1.  A circle  or  ring. 

2.  A circular  bandage. 

Cirne'sis.  (From  Kipvao),  to  mix.)  A union  of 
separate  things. 

CIRRUS.  (From  Kepas,  a horn,  because  it  has  the 
appearance  of  a horn  ) Cirrhus.  A clasper  or  ten- 
dril. One  of  the  fulcra  or  props  of  plants.  A long, 
cylindrical,  sleiider,  spiral  body,  issuing  from  various 
parts  of  plants. 

From  their  origin,  Cirri  are  distinguished  into, 

1.  Foliar,  when  they  are  a continuation  of  the  mid- 
rib df  a simple  leaf ; as  in  Fumaria  claoiculata,  Mi- 
mosa scandens,  and  Gloriosa  superba. 

2.  Petiolar,  when  terminating  the  common  petiole 
of  a compound  leaf ; as  in  Pisum  sativum.  This  is 
sometimes  distinguished  by  the  number  of  leaflets 
which  grow  under  it:  hence  cirri  diphylli,  tetraphylli, 
and  polypliylli. 

3.  Peduncular , when  they  proceed  from  the  pedun- 
cle ; as  in  Vitis  vinifera. 

4.  Axillary , which  arise  from  the  stem  or  branches 
in  the  axilla?  of  the  leaves ; as  in  Passiflora  incarnata. 

5.  Subaiillary,  when  they  originate  below  the  leaf. 

6.  Lateral,  when  at  the  side  of  it ; as  in  Bryonia. 

From  the  division  of  its  apex,  a Cirrus  is, 

1.  Simple,  consisting  of  one  undivided  piece ; as  in 
Momordica  balsaminea,  Passiflora  quadrangular  is, 
and  Bryonia  dioica. 

2.  Compound,  consisting  of  a stalk  variously  branch- 
ed or  divided. 

3.  Bifid,  when  it  has  two  divisions;  as  in  Vitis  vi- 
nifera,  Lathyrus  palustris,  Ervum  tetraspermum,  &c. 

4.  Trifid,  when  there  are  three;  as  in  Bignonia 
unguis,  and  Lathyrus  hirsutus. 

5.  Multifid , or  branched,  when  the  divisions  are 
more  numerous ; as  in  Lathyrus  latifolius,  and  Cobea 
scandens. 

From  its  convolution  into, 

1.  Convolute,  when  all  the  gyrations  are  regular  in 
the  same  direction  ; as  in  Hedera  quinquefolia. 

2.  Revolute , winding  itself  irregularly,  sometimes  on 
one  side,  sometimes  on  the  other;  as  in  Passiflora  in- 
carnata. 

CIRROSUS.  Having  a cirrus  or  tendril.  Applied 
to  a leaf  tipped  with  a tendril ; as  in  Gloriosa  and 
Hagellaria,  two  Indian  plants. 

Ci'rsiusi  arvense.  (From  Kipoos,  a vein,  or  swell- 
ing of  a vein,  which  this  herb  was  supposed  to  heal.) 
The  common  way  thistle,  or  Serratula  arvensis  of 
Linnams. 

Cirsoce'le.  See  Circocele. 

CIRSOI'DES.  (From  Kipcros,  a varix,  and  uSos, 
likeness.)  Resembling  a varix  : an  epithet  applied  by 
Rufus  Ephesius  to  the  upper  part  of  the  brain. 

CI'RSOS.  (Krpffoj ; from  kiooou),  to  dilate.)  A 
preternatural  distention  of  any  part  of  a vein.  See 
Varix. 

Ci'ssa.  (From  Kiooa,  a gluttonous  bird.)  A de- 
praved appetite,  proceeding  from  previous  gluttony 
and  voracity. 

CISSA'MPELOS.  (From  kiooos,  ivy,  and  apnckos, 
the  vine.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
nffian  system.  Class,  Dicecia  ; Order,  Monadelphia. 
The  wild  vine  with  leaves  like  ivy. 

234 


Cissampelos  pareira.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Pareira  brava;  Pareyra;  Ambutua;  Butua ; 
Overo  butua.  The  root  of  this  plant,  Cissampelos — 
foliis  peltatis  cordatis  emarginatis,  of  Linnaeus  ; a 
native  of  South  America  and  the  West  Indies,  has  no 
remarkable  smell,  but  to  .the  taste  it  manifests  a nota- 
ble sweetness  of  the  liquorice  kind,  together  with  a 
considerable  bitterness,  and  a slight  roughness  covered 
by  the  sweet  matter.  The  facts  adduced  on  the  utility 
of  the  radix  pareira  brava  in  nephritic  and  calculous 
complaints,  are  principally  by  foreigners,  and  no  re 
markable  instances  of  its  efficacy  are  recorded  by  Eng- 
lish practitioners. 

Cissa'rus.  See  Cistus  Creticus. 

Cissi'num.  (From  kiooos,  ivy.)  The  name  of  a 
plaster  mentioned  by  ADgineta. 

Cl  ST  A.  (From  Keipai,  to  lie.)  A cyst. 

CISTE'RNA.  (From  cista,  a cyst.)  The  fourth 
ventricle  of  the  brain  is  so  called  from  its  cavity ; also 
the  lacteal  vessels  in  the  breasts  of  women. 

Ci'sthorus.  See  Cistus  Creticus. 

CISTIC.  See  Cystic. 

Cistic  oxide.  See.  Calculus. 

CI'STUS.  (Kiooos,  the  derivation  of  which  is  un- 
certain ; perhaps  from  kis,  Heb.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Poly- 
andria  ; Order,  Monogynia.  The  Cistus. 

Cistus  creticus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  from  which  the  ladanum  of  the  shops  is  obtained, 
called  also  Cistus  ladanifera,  Cisthorus;  Cissarus ; 
Dorycinium.  Cistus — arborescens  exlipulatus , foliis 
spatulato-ovatis  petiolatis  enerviis  scabris  calycinis 
lanceolatis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  resinous  juice  called 
ladanum  exudes  upon  the  leaves  of  this  plant  in  Can- 
dia,  where  the  inhabitants  collect  it  by  lightly  rubbing 
the  leaves  with  leather,  and  afterward  scraping  it  off', 
and  forming  it  into  irregular  masses  for  exportation 
Three  sorts  of  ladanum  have  been  described  by  au- 
thors, but  only  two  are  to  be  met  with  in  the  shops. 
The  best,  which  is  very  rare,  is  in  dark-coloured  masses, 
of  the  consistence  of  a soft  plaster,  and  growing  still 
softer  on  being  handled;  the  other  is  in  long  rolls,  coil- 
ed up,  much  harder  than  the  preceding,  and  net  so  dark. 
The  first  has  commonly  a small,  and  the  last  a large 
admixture  of  fine  sand,  without  which  they  cannot  be 
collected  pure,  independently  of  designed  abuses : the 
dust  blown  on  the  plant  by  winds,  from  the  loose  sands 
among  which  it  grows,  being  retained  by  the  tenacious 
juice.  The  soft  kind  has  an  agrteable  smell,  and 
a lightly  pungent  bitterish  taste:  the  hard  is  much 
weaker.  Ladanum  was  formerly  much  employed  in- 
ternally as  a pectoral  and  adstringent  in  catarrhal  af- 
fections, dysenteries,  and  several  other  diseases;  at 
present,  however,  it  is  wholly  confined  to  external  use, 
and  is  an  ingredient  in  the  stomachic  plaster,  emplas- 
trum  ladani. 

Cistus  humilis.  A name  most  probably  of  the 
Lichen  caninus  of  Linnaeus. 

Cistus  ladanifera.  See  Cistus  creticus 

Cistus  ledon.  See  Ledum  palustre. 

C1TES1US  (Citois),  Francis,  of  Poitiers,  in 
France,  who,  after  graduating  at  Montpelier  in  1596, 
and  practising  a few  years  in  his  native  city,  went  to 
Paris,  and  acquired  great  celebrity,  being  made  physi- 
cian to  Cardinal  Richelieu.  He  published  a treatise 
on  the  Colica  Fictonum,  which  was  much  esteemed, 
noticing  its  termination  in  paralysis  of  the  extremities. 
He  also  gave  an  account  of  a girl  who  had  fasted  for 
three  years ; in  which  case  he  appears  to  have  been 
imposed  upon.  In  another  publication  he  advocates 
repeated  bleeding,  as  well  as  purging,  in  small-pox, 
and  other  fevers  of  an  inflammatory  type.  He  died  in 
1652,  at  the  advanced  age  of  80. 

Ci'tharus.  (From  Kidapa,  a harp.)  The  breast  is 
sometimes  so  named  from  its  shape. 

CITRA'GO.  (From  citi-us , a citron;  so  called  from 
its  citron-like  smell.)  'Citraria.  Baum.  See  Me- 
lissa. 

CI'TRAS.  ( Citras , atis.  feem.:  from  citrus,  the 
lemon.)  A citrate.  A salt  formed  by  the  union  of  the 
citric  acid,  or  acid  of  lemons,  with  the  salifiable  bases; 
as  citrate  of  ammonia,  citrate  of  potassa. 

CITRATE.  See  Citras. 

Ci'trka.  See  Citrus  rnedica. 

CI'TREUM.  (From  citrus.)  The  citron-tree.  See 
Citrus  rnedica. 

CI'TRIC  ACID.  Acidum citricum.  “The  juice  of 


CIT 


CIT 


lemons,  or  limes,  has  all  the  characters  of  an  acid  of 
considerable  strength ; but  on  account  of  the  mucila- 
ginous matter  with  which  it  is  mixed,  it  is  very  soon 
altered  by  spontaneous  decomposition.  Various 
methods  have  been  contrived  to  prevent  this  effect 
from  taking  place,  in  order  that  this  wholesome  and 
agreeable  acid  might  be  preserved  for  use  in  long  voy- 
ages, or  other  domestic  occasions.  The  juice  may  be 
kept  in  bottles  under  a thin  stratum  of  oil,  which  in- 
deed prevents,  or  greatly  retards,  its  total  decomposi- 
tion ; though  the  original  fresh  taste  soon  gives  place 
to  one  which  is  much  less  grateful.  In  the  East  In- 
dies it  is  evaporated  to’the  consistence  of  a thick  ex- 
tract. If  this  operation  be  carefully  performed  by  a 
very  gentle  heat,  it  is  found  to  be  very  effectual.  When 
the  juice  is  thus  heated,  the  mucilage  thickens,  and 
separates  in  the  form  of  flocks,  part  of  which  subside, 
and  part  rise  to  the  surface:  these  must  be  taken  out. 
The  vapours  which  arise  are  not  acid.  If  the  evapo- 
ration be  not  carried  so  far  as  to  deprive  the  liquid  of 
its  fluidity,  it  may  be  l&ng  preserved  in  well  closed 
bottles ; in  which,  after  some  weeks  standing,  a far- 
ther portion  of  mucilage  is  separated,  without  any  per- 
ceptible change  in  the  acid. 

Of  all  the  methods  of  preserving  lemon-juice,  that 
of  concentrating  it  by  frost  appears  to  be  the  best, 
though  in  the  warmer  climates  it  cannot  conveniently 
be  practised.  Lemon-juice,  exposed  to  the  air  in  a 
temperature  between  50°  and  60°,  deposites  in  a few 
hours  a white  semi-transparent  mucilaginous  matter, 
which, leaves  the  fluid,  after  decantation  and  filtration, 
much  Jess  alterable  than  before.  This  mucilage  is  not 
of  a gummy  nature,  but  resembles  the  gluten  of  wheat 
in  its  properties:  it  is  not  soluble  in  water  when  dried. 
More  mucilage  is  separated  from  lemon-juice  by  stand- 
ing in  closed  vessels.  If  this  depurated  lemon-juice 
be  exposed  to  a degree  of  cold  of  about  seven  or  eight 
degrees  below  the  freezing  point,  the  aqueous  part  will 
freeze,  .and  the  ice  may  be  taken  away  as  it  forms ; 
and  if  the  process  be  continued  until  the  ice  begins  to 
exhibit  signs  of  acidity,  the  remaining  acid  will  be 
found  to  be  reduced  to  about  one-eighth  of  its  original 
quantity,  at  the  same  time  that  its  acidity  will  be  eight 
times  as  intense,  as  is  proved  by  its  requiring  eight 
times  the  quantity  of  alkali  to  saturate  an  equal  por- 
tion of  it.  This  concentrated  acid  may  be  kept  for 
use,  or,  if  preferred,  it  may  be  made  into  a dry  lemon- 
ade, by  adding  six  times  its  weight  of  fine  loaf  sugar 
in  powder. 

The  above  processes  may  be  used  when  the  acid  of 
lemons  is  wanted  for  domestic  purposes,  because  they 
leave  it  in  possession  of  the  oils,  or  other  principles, 
on  which  its  flavour  peculiarly  depends ; but  in  chemi- 
cal researches,  where  the  acid  itself  is  required  to  be 
had  in  the  utmost  purity,  a more  elaborate  process 
must  be  used.  Boiling  lemon-juice  is  to  be  saturated 
with  powdered  chalk,  the  weight  of  which  is  to  be 
noted,  and  the  powder  must  be  stirred  up  from  the  bot- 
tom, or  the  vessel  shaken  from  time  to  time.  The 
neutral  saline  compound  is  scarcely  more.  soluble  in 
water  than  selenite ; it  therefore  falls  to  the  bottom, 
while  the  mucilage  remains  suspended  in  the  watery 
fluid,  which  must  be  decanted  off;  the  remaining  pre- 
cipitate must  then  be  washed  with  warm  water  until 
it  comes  off  clear.  To  the  powder  thus  edulcorated, 
a quantity  of  sulphuric  acid,  equal  the  chalk  in  weight, 
and  diluted  with  ten  parts  of  water,  must  be  added, 
and  the  mixture  boiled  a few  minutes.  The  sulphuric 
acid  combines  with  the  earth,  and  forms  sulphate  of 
lime,  which  remains  behind  when  the  cold  liquor  is 
filtered,  while  the  disengaged  acid  of  lemons  remains 
dissolved  in  the  fluid.  This  last  must  be  evaporated 
to  the  consistence  of  a thin  syrup,  which  yields  the 
pure  citric  acid  in  little  needle -like  crystals.  It  is  ne- 
cessary that  the  sulphuric  acid  should  be  rather  in  ex- 
cess, because  the  presence  t»f  a small  quantity  of  lime 
will  prevent  the  crystallization.  This  excess  is  allow- 
ed for  above. 

Its  taste  is  extremely  sharp,  so  as  to  appear  caustic. 
It  is  among  the  vegetable  acids  the  one  which  most 
powerfully  resists  decomposition  by  fire. 

In  a dry  and  warm  air  it  seems  to  effloresce;  but  it 
absorbs  moisture  when  the  air  is  damp,  and  at  length 
loses  its  crystalline  form.  A hundred  parts  of  this  acid 
are  soluble  in  seventy-five  of  water  at  60°.  Though 
it  is  less  alterable  than  most  other  solutions  of  vegeta- 
ble acids,  it  will  undergo  decomposition  when  long  kept. 


It  is  not  altered  by  any  combustible  substance  , char- 
coal alone  appears  to  be  capable  of  whitening  it.  The 
most  powerful  acids  decompose  it  less  easily  than  they 
do  other  vegetable  acids;  the  sulphuric  evidently  con- 
verts it  into  acetic  acid.  The  nitric  acid  likewise,  if 
employed  in  large  quantity,  and  heated  on  it  a long 
time,  converts  the  greater  part  of  it  into  acetic  acid, 
and  a small  portion  into  oxalic. 

The  citrate  of  lime  has  been  mentioned  already,  in 
treating  of  the  mode  of  purifying  the  acid. 

The  citrate  of  potassa  is  very  soluble  and  deli- 
quescent. 

The  citrate  of  soda  has  a dull  saline  taste ; dissolves 
in  less  than  twice  its  weight  of  water,  crystallizes  in 
six-sided  prisms  with  flat  summits;  effloresces  slightly, 
but  does  not  fall  to  powder;  boils  up,  swells,  and  is 
reduced  to  a coal  on  the  fire.  Lime  water  decomposes 
it,  but  does  not  render  the  solution  turbid,  notwithstand- 
ing the  little  solubility  of  citrate  of  lime. 

Citrate  of  ammonia  is  very  soluble ; does  not  crys- 
tallize unless  its  solution  be  greatly  concentrated ; and 
forms  elongated  prisms. 

Citrate  of  magnesia  does  not  crystallize.  When  ita 
solution  had  been  boiled  down,  and  it  had  stood  some 
days,  on  being  slightly  shaken  it.  fixed  in  one  white 
opaque  mass,  whicli  remained  soft,  separating  from 
the  sides  of  the  vessel,  contracting  its  dimensions,  and 
rising  in  the  middle  like  a kind  of  mushroom. 

All  the  citrates  are  decomposed  by  the  powerful 
acids,  which  do  not  form  a precipitate  with  them,  as 
with  the  oxalates  and  tartrates.  The  oxalic  and  tar- 
taric acids  decompose  them,  and  form  crystallized  or 
insoluble  precipitates  in  their  solutions.  All  afford 
traces  of  acetic  acid,  or  a product  of  the  same  nature, 
on  being  exposed  to  distillation : this  character  exists 
particularly  in  the  metallic  citrates.  Placed  on  burn- 
ing coals  they  melt,  swell  up,  emit  an  empyreumatic 
smell  of  acetic  acid,  and  leave  a light  coal.  All  of 
them,  if  dissolved  in  water,  and  left  to  stand  for  a time, 
undergo  decomposition,  deposite  a flocculent  mucus 
which  grows  black,  and  leaves  their  bases  combined 
with  carbonic  acid,  one  of  the  products  of  the  decom- 
position. Before  they  are  completely  decomposed, 
they  appear  to  pass  to  the  state  of  acetates. 

The  affinities  of  the  citric  acid  are  arranged  by  Vau- 
quelin  in  the  following  order : barytes,  lime,  potassa, 
soda,  strontian,  magnesia,  ammonia,  alumina.  Those 
for  zircone,  gluciue,  and  the  metallic  oxides,  are  not 
ascertained. 

The  citric  acid  is  found  in  many  fruits  united  with 
the  malic  acid. 

Citric  acid  being  more  costly  than  tartaric,  may  be 
occasionally  adulterated  with  it.  This  fraud  is  dis- 
covered, by  adding  slowly  to  the  acid  dissolved  in  wa- 
ter a solution  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  which  will 
give  a white  pulverulent  precipitate  of  tartar,  if  the 
citric  be  contaminated  with  the  tartaric  acid.  When 
one  part  of  citric  acid  is  dissolved  in  19  of  water,  the 
solution  may  be  used  as  a substitute  for  lemon-juice. 
If  before  solution  the  crystals  be  triturated  with  a little 
sugar  and  a . few  drops  of  the  oil  of  lemons,  the  re- 
semblance to  the  native  juice  will  be  complete.  It  is 
an  antidote  against  sea  scurvy ; but  the  admixture  of 
mucilage  and  other  vegetable  matter  in  the  recent  fruit 
of  the  lemon,  has  been  supposed  to  render  it  preferable 
to  the  pure  acid  of  the  chemist.”— ITre’s  Chem.  Diet. 

Citrina'tio.  Complete  digestion. 

CITRI'NULA.  (A  diminutive  of  citrus.)  A small 
citron  or  lemon. 

CITRON.  See  Citrus  medica. 

Citrul,  Sicilian.  See  Cucurbita  citrullus. 

CITRU'LLUS.  See  Cucurbita  citrullus. 

CI'TRUS.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Polyadelphia ; Order, 
Icosandria. 

2.  The  name  of  the  lemon.  See  Citrus  medica. 

Citrus  aurantium.  The  systematic  name  Of  the 
orange  tree  and  fruit.  Aurantium ; Aurantium  His- 
palense;  Aurantium  Chinensc ; Malus  aurantia  ma- 
jor; Malus  aurantia;  Aurantium  vulgare  ; Malus 
aurantia  vulgaris  ; Mala  aurea ; Chrysomelia ; Ne- 
rantia;  Martianum  pomum;  Poma  aurantia.  The 
China  and  Seville  orange  are  both  only  varieties  of  the 
same  species : Citrus : — petiolis  alatis , foliis  acumina 
tis , of  Linmeus.  The  latter  is  specified  in  our  phar- 
macopoeias ; and  the  flowers , leaves , yellow  rind , and 
juice , are  made  use  of  for  different  medical  purposes. 


CIT 


CLA 


The  flowers,  flares  naph'e , are  highly  odoriferous,  i 
and  are  used  as  a perfume ; they  are  bitter  to  the  taste;  ! 
they  give  their  taste  and  smell  both  to  water  and  to  | 
Bpirit,  but  most  perfectly  to  rectified  spirit  of  wine.  ( 
The  water  which  is  distilled  from  these  flowers,  is 
called  aqua  florum  naphce.  In  distillation,  they  yield 
a small  quantity  of  essential  oil,  which  is  called  oleum 
vel  essentia  neroli : they  are  brought  from  Italy  and 
France.  Orange  flowers  were,  at  one  time,  said  to  be 
a useful  remedy  in  convulsive  diseases;  but  expe- 
rience has  not  confirmed  the  virtues  attributed  to 
them. 

The  leaves  have  a bitterish  taste,  and  yield,  by  dis- 
tillation, an  essential  oil ; indeed,  by  rubbing  them 
between  the  fingers  and  the  thumb,  they  manifest  con- 
siderable fragrance.  They  have  been  applied  for  the 
same  purposes  as  the  flowers,  but  without  success. 

The  yellow  rind  of  the  fruit,  freed  from  the  white 
fungous  part,  Las  a grateful  aromatic  flavour,  and  a 
warm,  bitterish  taste.  Infused  in  boiling  water,  it 
gives  out  nearly  all  its  smell  and  taste':  cold  water 
extracts  the  bitter,  but  very  little  of  tiie  flavour.  In 
distillation,  a light,  fragrant,  essential  oil  rises,  without 
the  bitter.  Its  qualities  are  those  of  an  aromatic  and 
bitter.  It  has  been  employed  to  restore  the  tone  of  the 
stomach,  and  is  a very  common  addition  to  combina- 
tions of  bitters,  used  in  dyspepsia.  It  has  likewise 
been  given  in  intermittents,  in  doses  of  a drachm, 
twice  or  thrice  a day.  It  is  also  much  celebrated  as  a 
powerful  remedy,  in  menorrhagia,  and  immoderate 
uterine  evacuations. 

The  juice  of  Seville  oranges  is  a grateful  acid,  which, 
by  allaying  heat,  quenching  thirst,  promoting  various 
excretions,  and  diminishing  the  action  of  the  sangui- 
ferous system,  proves  extremely  useful  in  both  ardent 
and  putrid  fevers ; though  the  China  orange  juice,  as 
impregnated  with  a larger  proportion  of  sugar,  becomes 
more  agreeable,  and  may  betaken  in  larger  quantities. 
The  Seville  orange  juice  is  particularly  serviceable  as 
an  antiscorbutic,  and  alone  will  prevent  or  cure  scurvy 
in  the  most  apparently  desperate  circumstances.  In 
dyspepsia,  from  putrid  bile  in  the  stomach,  both  lemon 
and  orange  juice  are  highly  useful. 

Citrus  medica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lemon-tree.  JLimon;  JLiiiqonia  mala ; Malus  medica; 
Mains  limonia  acida ; Citrea  malus ; Citrus.  The 
tree  which  affords  the  lemon  is  the  Citrus  .-—petiolis 
linear ibus,  of  Linnaeus : a native  of  the  upper  part  of 
Asia,  but  cultivated  in  Spain,  Portugal,  and  France. 
The  juice,  which  is  much  more  acid  than  that  of  the 
orange,  possesses  similar  virtues.  It  is  always  pre- 
ferred where  a strong  vegetable  acid  is  required. 
Saturated  with  the  fixed  vegetable  alkali,  it  forms  the 
citrate  of  potassa,  which  is  in  frequent  extemporane- 
ous use  in  febrile  diseases,  and  by  promoting  the  secre- 
tions, especially  that  of  the  skin,  proves  of  considera- 
- ble  service  in  abating  the  violence  of  fever.  This 
medicine  is  also  often  employed  to  restrain  vomiting. 
As  an  antiscorbutic,  lemon  juice  has  been  often  taken 
on  board  ships  destined  for  long  voyages;  but  even 
when  well  depurated  of  its  mucilaginous  parts,  it  is 
found  to  spoil  by  long  keeping.  To  preserve  it  in 
purity  for  a considerable  length  of  time,  it  is  necessary 
that  it  should  be  brought  to  a highly  concentrated 
state,  and  for  this  purpose  it  has  been  recommended 
to  expose  the  juice  to  a degree  of  cold  sufficient  to  con- 
geal the  aqueous  and  mucilaginous  parts.  After  a 
crust  of  ice  is  formed,  the  juice  is  poured  into  another 
vessel ; and,  by  repeating  this  process  several  times, 
the  remaining  juice,  it  is  said,  has  been  concentrated 
to  eight  times  its  original  strength,  and  kept  without 
suffering  any  material  change  for  several  years. 
Whytt  found  the  juice  of  lemon  to  allay  hysterical 
palpitations  of  the  heart,  after  various  other  medicines 
had  been  experienced  ineffectual;  and  this  juice,  or 
that  of  oranges,  taken  to  the  quantity  of  four  or  six 
ounces  in  a day,  has  sometimes  been  found  a remedy 
in  the  jaundice.  The  exterior  rind  of  the  lemon  is  a 
very  grateful  aromatic  bitter,  not  so  hot  as  orange  peel, 
and  yielding  in  distillation  a less  quantity  of  oil, 
which  is  extremely  light,  almost  colourless,  and  gene- 
rally brought  from  the  southern  parts  of  Europe,  under 
the  name  of  Essence  of  Lemons.  The  lemon-peel, 
though  less  warm,  is  similar  in  its  qualities  to  that  ol 
the  orange,  and  is  employed  with  the  same  intentions. 
The  pharmacopceias  direct  a syrup  of  the  juice,  syru- 
pus  limonis.  and  the  peel  enters  into  some  vinous  and 
236 


aqueous  bitter  infusions ; it  is  also  ordered  to  be  can 
died ; and  the  essential  oil  is  an  ingredient  in  some 
formula. 

The  citron-tree  is  also  considered  as  belonging  to  the 
same  species,  the  Citrus  medica  of  Linnaeus.  Its  fruit 
is  called  Cedromela , which  is  larger  and  less  succulent 
than  the  lemon ; but  in  all  other  respects  the  citron 
and  lemon  trees  agree.  The  citron  juice,  when  sweet- 
ened with  sugar,  is  called  by  the  Italians  JJg»o  di 
cedro.  The  Citrus  mella  rosa  of  Lamarck,  is  ano- 
ther variety  of  the  Citrus  medica  of  Linnaeus.  It  wars 
produced,  at  first,  casually,  by  an  Italian’s  grafting  a 
citron  on  a stock  of  a bergamot  pear-tree ; whence  the 
fruit  produced  by  this  union  participated  both  of  the 
citron-tree  and  the  pear-tree.  The  essence  prepared 
from  this  fruit  is  called  essence  of  bergamote  and  es 
sentia  de  cedra. 

CTTTA.  A voracious  appetite. 

Citto'sis.  See  Chlorosis. 

CIVET-CAT.  See  Z ibethum. 

CIVE'TTA.  (From  sebel , Arabian.)  Zibethum. 
Civet;  an  unctuous  odoriferous  drug  used  by  per- 
fumers, collected  between  the  anus  and  the  organs  of 
generation  of  a fierce  carnivorous  quadruped  met  with 
in  China  and  the  East  and  West  Indies,  called  a civet- 
cat,  the  Viverra  Zibethum  of  Linnaeus,  but  bearing  a 
greater  resemblance  to  a fox  or  marten  than  a cat. 

Several  of  these  animals  have  been  brought  into 
Holland,  and  afford  a considerable  branch  of  com- 
merce, particularly  at  Amsterdam.  The  civet  is 
squeezed  out  in  summer  eveiy  other  day,  in  winter 
twice  a-week  : the  quantity  procured  at  once  is  from 
two  scruples  to  a drachm  or  more.  The  juice  thus 
collected  is  much  purer  and  finer  than  that  which  the 
animal  sheds  against  shrubs  or  stones  in  its  native 
climates. 

Good  civet  is  of  a clear  yellowish  or  brownish  co- 
lour, not  fluid  nor  hard,  but  about  the  consistence  of 
butter  or  honey,  and  uniform  throughout ; of  a very 
strong  smell;  quite  offensive  when  undiluted;  but 
agreeable  when  otily  a small  portion  of  civet  is  mixed 
with  a large  one  of  other  substances. 

Civet  unites  with  oils,  but  not  with  alkohol.  Its 
nature  is  therefore  not  resinous. 

CLAP.  See  Gonorrhoea. 

CL  A 'RET.  ( Claretum ; from  ciareo,  to  be  clear.) 
A French  wine,  that  may  be  given  with  great  advan- 
tage, as  atonic  and  antiseptic,  where  red  port  wine 
disagrees  with  the  patient ; and  in  typhoid  fevers  of 
children,  and  delicate  females,  it  is  far  preferable,  as  a 
Common  drink. 

CLARE1TUM.  1.  The  wine  called  claret.  See 
Claret. 

•2.  A wine  impregnated  with  spices  and  sugar,  called 
by  some  Vinum  Hippocraticum. 

3.  A Claretum  purgatorium , composed  of  a vinous 
infusion  of  glass  of  antimony  with  cinnamon  water 
and  sugar,  is  mentioned  by  Schrceder. 

CLARIFICA'TIO.  The  depuration  of  any  thing, 
or  process  of  freeing  a fluid  from  heterogeneous  mat- 
ter, or  feculencies. 

[“CLARK,  John.  The  name  of  John  Clark  has 
been,  for  a longer  succession  of  years  than  any  other 
in  our  country,  distinguished  in  the  ranks  of  medical 
practitioners.  Of  the  earliest  physician  of  that  name, 
who  probably  came  from  England  in  1631  or  1632,  and 
after  living  a few  years  in  Boston,  removed  to  Rhode 
Island,  where  he  died  April  20th,  1676,  filling  a long 
course  of  service  in  administering  to  the  religious  as 
well  as  natural  wants  of  his  neighbours.”  He  was 
succeeded  by  several  individuals  of  the  same  name, 
who  were  all  conspicuous  members  ctf  the  medical  pro- 
fession.— Thach.  Med.  JBiog.  A.] 

CLASS.  (Classis ; from  Ka\eu,  congrego,a.  class 
being  nothing  more  than  a multitude  assembled  apart.) 
The  name  of  a primary  division  of  bodies  in  natural 
history. 

CLARY.  See  Salvia. 

CLA'SIS.  (From  xXaw,  to  break.)  Clasma.  A 
fracture. 

CLAU'STRUM.  (From  claudo,  to  shut.)  Clei- 
thrum  gutturis.  Any  aperture  which  has  a power  of 
contracting  itself,  or  closing  its  orifice  by  any  means; 
as  the  passage  of  the  throat. 

Claustrum  virginitatis.  The  hymen. 

CLAUSE  RA.  (From  claudo,  to  shut.)  An  im- 
perforation  of  any  canal  or  cavity  in  the  body.  Thus 


clausura  uteri  is  a preternatural  imperforation  of  the 
uterus;  clausura  tubarum  Fallopiarum , a morbid  im- 
perforation  of  tbe  Fallopian  tubes,  mentioned  by 
Ruysch  as  one  cause  of  infecundity. 

Clava  rugosa.  See  Acorns  calamus. 

CLAY ARIA.  (From  clava,  a club.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants,  Class,  Crypto gamia Order, 
Fungi.  Club-shaped  fungus.  , 

Clavaria  corolloides.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  Fungus  corolloides  of  old  writers ; called  also 
crotelus.  It  was  once  used  as  a strengthener  and 
astringent. 

CLAVA'TIO.  (From  clava , a club.)  A sort  of 
articulation  without  motion,  where  the  parts  are,  as  it 
were,  driven  in  with  a hammer,  like  the  teeth  in  the 
sockets.  See  Gomp/iosis. 

CLAVATUS.  Clubbed.  Applied  to  parts  of 
plants,  as  the  stigma  of  the  Genipi. 

Clavellatus.  (From  clavus,  a wedge.  The  name 
cineres  clavellati  originated  from  the  little  wedges  or 
billets,  into  which  the  wood  was  cut  to  burn  for  po- 
tass a.)  See  Potassa  impura. 

CLA'VICLE.  ( Clavicula , diminutive  of  clavis  ; 
so  called  from  its  resemblance  to  an  ancient  key.)  Col- 
lar-bone. The  clavicle  is  placed  at  the  root  of  the 
nock,  and  at  the  upper  part  of  the  breast.  It  extends 
across,  from  the  tip  of  the  shoulder  to  the  upper  part  of 
the  sternum ; it  is  a round  bone,  a little  flattened  to- 
wards the  end,  which  joins  the  scapula  ; it  is  curved 
like  an  Italic  S,  having  one  curve  turned  out  towards 
the  breast:  it  is  useful  as  an  arch,  supporting  the 
shoulders,  preventing  them  from  falling  forwards  upon 
the  breast,  and  making  the  hands  strong  antagonists  to 
each  other ; which,  without  this  steadying,  they  could 
not  have  been. 

1.  The  thoracic  end,  that  next  the  sternum,  or  what 
may  be  called  the  inner  head  of  the  clavicle,  is  round 
and  flat,  or  button-like  ; and  it  is  received  into  a suita- 
ble hollow  on  the  upper  piece  of  the  sternum.  It  is 
not  only,  like  other  joints,  surrounded  by  a capsule  or 
purse ; it  is  further  provided  with  a small  moveable 
cartilage,  which,  like  a friction  wheel  in  machinery, 
saves  the  parts  and  facilitates  the  motions,  and  moves 
continually  as  the  clavicle  moves. 

2.  But  the  outward  end  of  the  clavicle  is  flattened, 
as  it  approaches  the  scapula,  and  the  edge  of  that  flat- 
ness is  turned  to  the  edge  of  the  flattened  acromion,  so 
that  they  touch  but  in  one  single  point.  This  outer 
end  of  the  clavicle,  and  the  corresponding  point  of  the 
acromion,  are  flattened  and  covered  with  a crust  of 
cartilage ; but  the  motion  here  is  very  slight  and  quitef, 
insensible;  they  are  tied  firmly  by  strong  ^ligaments ; 
and  we  may  consider  this  as  almost  a fixed*  point,  for 
there  is  little  motion  of  the  scapula  upon  the  clavicle ; 
but  there  is  much  motion  of  the  clavicle  upon  the 
breast,  for  the  clavicle  serves  as  a shaft,  or  axis,  firmly 
tied  to  the  scapula,  upon  which  the  scapula  moves  and 
turns,  being  connected  with  the  trunk  only  by  this 
single  point,  viz.  the  articulation  of  the  clavicle  with 
the  breast-bone. 

CLAVI'CULA.  See  Clavicle. 

CLAVl'CULUS.  See  Clavicle. 

CL  A' VIS.  (From  claudo,  to  shut.)  The  clavicle. 

CLA'VUS.  (A  nail.)  1.  A corn  called  clavus, 
from  its  resemblance  to  the  head  of  a nail ; Ecphyma 
clavus  of  Good.  A roundish,  horny,  cutdneous  exlu- 
berance,  with  a central  nucleus,  sensible  at  its  base; 
found  chiefly  on  the  toes,  from  the  pressure  of  tight 
shoes. 

2.  A painful  and  often  an  intermitting  affection  of 
the  head,  and  mostly  a severe  pulsating  pain  in  the 
forehead,  which  may  be  covered  by  one’s  thumb, 
giving  a sensation  like  as  if  a nail  were  driven  into  the 
part..  When  connected  with  hysterics,  it  is  called 
Clavus  hystericus. 

3.  An  artificial  palate. 

4.  Diseased  uterus. 

Clavus  hystericus.  See  Clavus. 

Clavus  oculorum.  A staphyloma,  or  tumour  on 
the  eyelids. 

CLAY.  Argilla.  Argillaceous  earth,  of  which 
there  are  many  kinds,  and  being  opaque  and  noncrys- 
tallized  bodies,  of  dull  fracture,  afford  no  good  princi- 
ple for  determining  their  species ; yet  as  they  are  ex- 
tensively distributed  iD  nature,  aiul  are  used  in  many 
arts,  they  deserve  particular  attention.  The  argilla- 
ceous minerals  are  all  sufficiently  soft  to  be  scratched 


by  iron;  they  have  a dull  or  even  earthy  fracture ; 
they  exhale,  when  breathed  on,  a peculiar  smell 
called  argillaceous.  The  clays  form  with  water  a 
plastic  paste,  possessing  considerable  tenacity,  which 
hardens  with  heat,  so  as  to  strike  fire  with  steel, 
Maries  and  chalks  also  soften  in  water,  but  their 
paste  is  not  tenaceous,  nor  does  it  acquire  a siliceous 
hardness  in  the  fire.  The  affinity  of  the  clays  for 
moisture  is  manifested  by  their  sticking  to  the  tongue, 
and  by  the  intense  heat  necessary  to  make  them  per 
fectly  dry.  The  odour  ascribed  to  clays  breathed 
upon,  is  due  to  the  oxide  of  iron  mixed  with  them. 
Absolutely  pure  clays  emit  no  smell. 

1.  Porcelain  earth,  the  kaolin  of  the  Chinese. — This 
mineral  is  friable,  meagre  to  the  touch,  arid,  when 
pure,  forms  with  difficulty  a paste  with  water. 

2.  Potter's  clay,  or  plastic  clay. — The  clays  of  this 
variety  are  compact,  smooth,  and  almost  unctuous  to 
the  touch,  and  may  be  polished  by  the  finger  when 
they  are  dry.  They  have  a great  affinity  to  water, 
form  a tenacious  paste,  and  adhere  strongly  to  the 
tongue. 

3.  Loam  — This  is  an  impure  potter’s  clay,  mixed 
with  mica  and  iron  ochre. 

4.  Variegated  clay. — Is  striped  or  spotted  with 
while,  red,  or  yellow  colours. 

5.  Slate  clay. — Colour,  gray  or  grayish-yellow. 

6.  Claystone. — Colour,  gray,  of  various  shades, 
sometimes  red,  and  spotted,  or  striped. 

7.  Adhesive  slate. — Colour,  light-greenish  gray. 

8.  Polishing  slate  of  Werner. — Colour,  cream-yel- 
low, in  alternate  stripes. 

9.  Common  clay  may  be  considered  to  be  the  same 
as  loam. 

Clay,  pure.  See  Alumina. 

Clay-slate.  Argillaceous  slate.  Argillite  of  Kir- 
wan.  A mineral  which  is  extensively  distributed, 
forming  a part  of  both  primitive  and  transition  moun- 
tains of  slate,  is  found  in  many  countries. 

[“CLAYTON,  Dr.  John,  an  eminent  botanist  and 
physician,  of  Virginia,  was  born  in  England  in  1(185, 
and  came  to  Virginia  in  1705,  and  resided  near  Wil- 
liamsburg. He  was  elected  a member  of  several  of  the 
firsf  literary  societies  of  Europe,  and  corresponded 
with  many  of  the  most  learned  naturalists  of  that  pe- 
riod. As  a practical  botanist,  he  was,  probably,  not 
inferior  to  any  one  of  the  age.  He  passed  a long  life 
in  exploring  and  describing  the  plants  of  his  country, 
and  is  supposed  to  have  enlarged  the  botanical  cata- 
logue as  much  as  any  man  who  ever  lived.  He  is  the 
author  of  “Flora  Virginica,”  a work  published  by 
Gronovius  at  Leyden,  Svo.  in  1739,  1743,  and  1762. 
He  published  in  the  philosophical  transactions  several 
communications,  treating  of  the  culture  of  the  differ- 
ent species  of  tobacco,  and  an  ample  account  of  the 
medicinal  plants  which  he  had  discovered  in  Virginia. 
He  also  left  behind  him  two  volumes  of  manuscript 
neatly  prepared  for  the  press,  and  a Hortus  Siccus  with 
marginal  notes  and  references  for  the  engraver  who 
should  prepare  the  plates  for  his  proposed  work.  He 
died  December  15th,  1773,  in  the  88th  year  of  his  age. 
During  the  year  preceding  his  decease,  such  was  the 
vigour  of  his  constitution,  even  at  this  advanced  pe- 
riod, and  such  was  his  zeal  in  botanical  researches, 
that  he  made  a botanical  tour  through  Orange  County ; 
and  it  is  believed  that  he  had  visited  most  of  the  set 
tied  parts  of  Virginia.  His  character  stands  very  high 
as  a man  of  integrity,  and  as  a good  citizen.” — Thach. 
Med.  Biog.  A.] 

[“  CLAYTON,  Dr.  Joshua,  was  Governor  of  the 
State  of  Delaware,  and  a member  of  the  United  States 
Senate ; he  died  in  1799.  He  was  highly  respectable 
in  the  medical  profession,  in  which  he  practised  for 
many  years. 

In  1792,  he  addressed  a friend  as  follows:  “During 
the  late  war,  the  Peruvian  bark  was  very  scarce  and 
dear.  I was  at  that  time  engaged  in  considerable 
practice,  and  was  under  the  necessity  of  seeking  a sub- 
stitute lor  the  Peruvian  bark.  I conceived  that  the 
poplar,  Liriodendron  tulipifera,  had  more  aromatic 
and  bitter  than  the  Peruvian,  and  less  astringency. 
To  correct  and  amend  those  qualities,  I added  to  it 
nearly  an  equal  quantity  of  the  bark  of  the  root  of 
dogwood,  cornus  florida,  and  half  the  quantity  of  the 
inside  bark  of  the  white-oak  tree.  This  remedy  I pre- 
scribed for  several  years,  in  every  case  in  which  1 
conceived  the  Peruvian  bark  necessary  or  proper,  with 

237 


CLE 


least  equal  if  not  superior  success.  I used  it  in  every 
species  of  intermittent,  gangrenes,  mortifications,  and 
in  short,  every  case  of  debility.” — Thach.  Med.Biog.  A.] 

CLEAVAGE.  This  term  is  applied  to  the  mecha- 
nical division  of  crystals,  by  showing  the  direction  in 
which  their  lamina  can  separate,  enables  us  to  deter- 
mine the  mutual  inclination  of  these  lamina : Wer- 
ner called  it  durchgang , but  he  attended  only  to  the 
number  of  directions  in  which  this  mechanical  divi- 
sion of  the  plates,  or  cleavage,  could  be  effected.  In 
the  interior  of  many  minerals,  the  direction  of  the 
cleavage  may  be  frequently  seen,  without  using  any 
mechanical  violence. 

CLEAVERS.  See  Galium  aparine. 

CLEGHORN,  George,  was  born  near  Edinburgh, 
in  1716,  and,  after  studying  in  that  city,  went  at  the 
age  of  twenty  to  Minorca,  as  a regimental  surgeon. 
During  the  thirteen  years  that  he  spent  there,  he  sedu- 
lously studied  the  natural  productions  of  the  island. 
In  1750,  coming  to  London,  he  published  his  “Treatise 
on  the  Diseases  of  Minorca,”  which  displays  great  ob- 
servation and  ability.  He  then  went  to  Dublin,  and 
gave  lectures  on  anatomy  with  such  success,  that  he 
was  soon  after  appointed  public  professor ; and,  in  1774, 
an  honorary  member  of  the  College  of  Physicians 
there.  He  died  in  1789. 

Clki'dion.  Clidion.  The  epithet  of  a pastil,  de- 
scribed by  Galen  and  Paulus  iF.gineta ; and  it  is  the 
name  also  of  an  epithem  described  by  Aetius. 

Cleido'ma.  (From  k\uSoo),  to  close.)  A pastil,  or 
troch.  Also  the  clavicle. 

CLEIDOMASTOIDE'US.  (From  K\eis,  the  clavi- 
cle, and  pas-oeidrjs,  the  mastoidprocess.)  See  Sterno- 
cleido-mastoideus. 

CLEISA'GRA.  (From  ic'Keis,  the  clavicle,  and  aypa, 
a prey.)  The  gout  in  the  articulation  of  the  clavicles. 

Clei'thron.  (From  /cAa<5w,  to  shut.)  See  Claus- 
trum. 

CLE'MATIS.  (From  /cXypa,  a tendril ; so  named 
from  its  climbing  up  trees,  or  any  thing  it  can  fasten 
upon  with  its  tendrils.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
In  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order, 
Polygynia. 

Clematis  recta.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
upright  virgin’s-bower.  Flammula  Jovis.  Clematis 
— foliis  pinnatis,  foliolis  ovato  lanceolatis  integerri- 
mis,  caule  credo,  Jloribus  pentapetalis  tetrapetalisque 
of  Linnaeus.  More  praises  have  been  bestowed  upon 
the  virtue  which  the  leaves  of  this  plant  are  said  to 
possess,  when  exhibited  internally,  as  antivenereal, 
by  foreign  physicians,  than  its  trials  in  this  country  can 
justify.  The  powdered  leaves  are  sometimes  applied 
externally  to  ulcers,  as  an  escharotic. 

Clematis  vitalba.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
traveller’s-joy.  Vitalba;  Atragene ; Viorna;  Cle- 
matis arthragene  of  Theophrastus.  This  plant  is  com- 
mon in  our  hedges,  and  is  the  Clematis — foliis  pinna- 
tius , foliolis  cordatis  scandentibus , of  Linnaeus.  Its 
leaves,  when  fresh,  produce  a warmth  on  the  tongue, 
and  if  the  chewing  is  continued,  blisters  arise.  The 
same  effect  follows  their  being  rubbed  on  the  skin. 
The  plant  has  been  administered  internally  to  cure 
lues  venerea,  scrofula,  and  rheumatism.  In  France, 
the  young  sprouts  are  eaten,  when  boiled,  as  hoptops 
are  in  this  country. 

Clemati'tis.  The  same  as  clematis. 

Cleo'nis  collyrium.  The  name  of  a collyrium 
described  by  Celsus. 

Cleonis  gluten.  An  astringent  formula  of  myrrh, 
frankincense,  and  white  of  egg  mixed  together. 

Cle  psydra.  (From  Kkenro),  to  conceal,  and  vSu p, 
water.)  Properly,  an  instrument  to  measure  time  by 
the  dropping  of  water  through  a hole,  from  one  vessel 
to  another ; but  it  is  used  to  express  a chemical  vessel, 
perforate*d  in  the  same  manner.  It  is  also  an  instru- 
ment mentioned  by  Paracelsus,  contrived  to  convey 
suffumieations  to  the  uterus  in  hysterical  cases. 

CLEYER,  Andrew,  was  born  at  Cassel,  in  the  be- 
ginning of  the  17lh  century.  After  studying  medicine, 
he  went  as  physician  to  Batavia,  where  he  resided 
many  years.  He  transmitted  several  interesting  com- 
munications to  the  Imperial  Academy,  of  which  he 
had  been  chosen  a member,  particularly  “ An  Account 
of  Hydatids  found  in  a Human  Stomach,”  and  “ Of 
the  Custom  of  the  Indians  of  taking  Opium also 
descriptions  and  drawings  of  the  plants  indigenous  in 
Java,  especially  the  moxa,  ginseng,  and  tea-plant.  He 


CLI 

likewise  published,  in  1680,  a curious  specimen  ol 
Chinese  medicine. 

Cli'banus.  (Quasi  tca\i6avos ; from  Ka\vir 7<s> 
conceal.)  A portable  furnace,  or  still,  in  which  the 
materials  to  be  wrought  on  are  shut  up. 

CLIFTON,  Francis,  after  studying  at  Oxford, 
came  to  London,  and  was  admitted  Fellow  of  the  Col- 
lege of  Physicians,  as  well  as  of  the  Royal  Society, 
about  the  year  1730.  Two  years  after,  he  published 
on  “ The  State  of  Physic,  ancient  and  modern,  with  a 
Plan  for  improving  it;”  in  which  a law  is  proposed, 
to  compel  practitioners  to  send  to  a public  institution 
descriptions  of  the  several  cases  which  come  under 
theirCare.  He  was  also  author  of  “ A plain  and  sure 
Way  of  practising  Physic  and  translated  some  parts 
of  Hippocrates  into  English,  with  notes. 

Clima'cter.  (From  xAqiagw,  to  proceed  gradually.) 
The  progression  of  the  life  of  man.  It  is  usually  di- 
vided into  periods  of  seven  years. 

Climacteric.  See  Septenary. 

CLIMATE.  The  prevailing  constitution  of  the  at- 
mosphere, relative  to  heat,  wind,  and  moisture,  pecu- 
liar to  any  region.  This  depends  chiefly  on  the  lati- 
tude of  the  place,  its  elevation  above  the  level  of  the 
sea,  and  its  insular  or  continental  position.  Springs 
which  issue  from  a considerable  depth,  and  caves 
about  50  feet  under  the  surface,  preserve  a uniform 
temperature  through  all  the  vicissitudes  of  the  season. 
This  is  the  mean  temperature  of  that  country. 

It  appears  very  probable,  that  the  climates  of  Euro- 
pean countries  were  more  severe  in  ancient  times  than 
they  are  at  present.  Cresar  says,  that  the  vine  could 
not  be  cultivated  in  Gaul,  on  account  of  its  winter- 
cold.  The  rein-deer,  now  found  only  in  the  zone  of 
Lapland,  was  then  an  inhabitant  of  the  Pyrenees. 
The  Tiber  was  frequently  frozen  over,  and  the  ground 
about  Rome  covered  with  snow  for  several  weeks  to- 
gether, which  almost  never  happens  in  our  times. 
The  Rhine  and  the  Danube,  in  the  reign  of  Augustus, 
were  generally  frozen  over  for  several  months  of  win- 
ter. The  barbarians,  who  overran  the  Roman  empire  a 
few  centuries  afterward,  transported  their  armies  and 
wagons  across  the  ice  of  these  rivers.  The  improve- 
ment that  is  continually  taking  place  in  the  climate  of 
America,  proves,  that  the  power  of  man  extends  to 
phenomena,  which,  from  the  magnitude  and  variety 
of  their  causes,  seemed  entirely  beyond  his  control. 
At  Guiana,  in  South  America,  within  five  degrees  of 
the  line,  the  inhabitants  living  amid  immense  forests,  a 
century  ago,  were  obliged  to  alleviate  the  severity  of 
the  cold  by  evening  fires.  Even  the  duration  of  the 
rainy  season  has  been  shortened  by  the  clearing  of  the 
country,  and  the  warmth  is  so  increased,  that  a fire 
now  would  be  deemed  an  annoyance.  It  thunders 
continually  in  the  woods,  rarely  in  the  cultivated 
parts. 

Drainage  of  the  ground,  and  removal  of  forests, 
however,  cannot  be  reckoned  among  the  sources  of 
the  increased  warmth  of  the  Italian  winters.  Chemi- 
cal writers  have  omitted  to  notice  an  astronomical 
cause  of  the  progressive  amelioration  of  the  climates 
of  the  northern  hemisphere.  In  consequence  of  the 
apogee  portion  of  the  terrestrial  orbit  being  contained 
between  our  vernal  and  autumnal  equinox,  our  sum- 
mer half  of  the  year,  or  the  interval  which  elapses 
between  the  sun’s  crossing  the  equator  in  spring,  and 
in  autumn,  is  about  seven  days  longer  than  our  winter 
half  year.  Hence  also,  one  reason  for  the  relative 
coldness  of  the  southern  hemisphere. 

[While  Dr.  Priestley  was  engaged,  during  the  month 
of  July,  1801,  in  making  experiments  with  a double 
convex  lens  upon  some  metallic  substances  atNorthum- 
berland,  in  Pennsylvania,  he  wrote  thus  to  Dr.  Mitchill : 
“ If  I have  a few  days  more  sunshine,  I shall  finish 
what  I am  about,  and  write  the  next  post.  Happily 
we  are  never  long  without  sunshine,  whereas  in  Eng- 
land I have  often  waited  months;  and  the  days  in 
which  I could  use  a burning  lens  have  not,  I am  con- 
fident, exceeded  one  fortnight  in  some  whole  years, 
and  I have  often  watched  every  gleam  the  year 
through.  I think  the  climate  of  this  country  greatly 
preferable  to  that  of  England.” — Med.  Repos.  A.] 

CLI'MAX.  (From  icXipag u>,  to  proceed.)  A name 
of  some  antidotes,  which,  in  regular  proportion,  in- 
creased or  diminished  the  ingredients  of  which  it  was 
composed,  e.  g.  &.  Cliamadryos  3j.U-  Centaurii  $jj 
Hyperici  3 j. 


CLO 


Cx\I 


Climbing  birthwort.  See  Aristolochia  clematitis. 

Climbing  stem.  See  Caulis. 

CLI'NICAL.  ( Clinicus ; from  kXivtj,  a bed.)  Any 
thing  concerning  a bed:  thus  clinical  lectures,  notes, 
a clinical  physician,  &c. ; which  mean  lectures  given 
at  the  bedside,  observations  taken  from  patients  when 
in  bed,  a physician  who  visits  his  patients  in  their 
bed,  &c. 

CLINKSTONE-  A stone  of  an  imperfectly  slaty 
nature,  which  rings  like  metal,  when  struck  with  a 
hammer. 

CLI'NOID.  (Clinoideus ; from  icXivrj,  a bed,  and 
siSos,  resemblance.)  Resembling  a bed.  The  four 
processes  surrounding  the  sella  turcica  of  the  sphenoid 
bone  are  so  called,  of  which  two  are  anterior,  and  two 
posterior. 

Clinomastoide'us.  A corruption  of  cleidomastai- 
deus.  See  Sterno  cleido-mastoideus. 

CLINOMETER.  An  instrument  for  measuring  the 
dip  of  mineral  strata. 

Cli'ssus.  A chemical  term  denoting  mineral  com- 
pound spirits ; but  antimony  is  considered  as  the  basis 
clyssi.  See  Clyssus. 

ClitorldIs  musculus.  See  Erector  clitoridis. 

CLI'TORIS.  (From  kXeiu j,  to  enclose,  or  hide ; be- 
cause it  is  hid  by  the  labia  pudendorum.)  Columella. 
A small  glandiform  body,  like  a penis  in  miniature, 
and,  like  it,  covered  with  a prepuce,  or  fore-skin.  It 
is  situated  above  the  nymphae,  and  before  the  opening 
of  the  urinary  passage  of  women.  Anatomy  has  dis- 
covered, that  the  clitoris  is  composed,  like  the  penis, 
of  a cavernous  substance,  and  of  a glans,  which  has 
no  perforation,  but  is  like  that  of  the  penis,  exquisitely 
sensible.  The  clitoris  is  the  principal  seat  of  plea- 
sure: during  coition  it  is  distended  with  blood,  and 
after  the  venereal  orgasm  it  becomes  flaccid  and  falls. 
Instances  have  occurred  where  the  clitoris  was  so  en- 
larged as  to  enable  the  female  to  have  venereal  com- 
merce with  others ; and,  in  Paris,  this  fact  was  made 
a public  exhibition  of  to  the  faculty.  Women  thus 
formed  appear  to  partake,  in  their  general  form,  less 
of  the  female  character,  and  are  termed  hermaphro- 
dites. The  clitoris  in  children  is  larger,  in  proportion, 
than  in  full-grown  women:  it  often  projects  beyond 
the  external  labia  at  birth. 

CLITORI  SMUS.  (From  tcXeilopts ; the  clitoris.) 
An  enlargement  of  the  clitoris. 

CLO'NIC.  (From  kXoveu >,  to  move  to  and  fro.)  See 
Convulsion. 

Clono'des.  (From  kXoveo),  to  agitate.)  A strong 
unequal  pulse. 

CLONUS.  (From  kXoveu >,  to  agitate.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  disease  in  the  Class,  JYeuroses ; Order, 
Lenetica , of  Good’s  Nosology.  Clonic  spasm,  com 
prising  six  species : Clonus  singultus , sternutation  pal- 
pitation nictitation  subsultus,  and  pandiculatio. 

[“CLOSSEY,  Samuel,  M.D.  was  an  Irish  physi- 
cian, of  very  respectable  attainments,  who  established 
himself  in  medical  practice  in  New-York.  He  had, 
previously  to  his  arrival  in  America,  attained  a high 
degree  of  eminence  in  the  medical  profession,  both  as 
a practitioner,  and  an  author  of  an  interesting  volume 
on  morbid  anatomy  ; this  was  entitled  “ Observations 
on  some  of  the  Diseases  of  the  Human  Body,  chiefly 
taken  from  the  Dissections  of  Morbid  Bodies  it  was 
published  in  London  in  1763.  He  was  for  a short 
time  chosen  to  the  anatomical  chair,  and  the  profes- 
sorship of  Natural  Philosophy  in  King’s  College,  now 
Columbia  College.  Upon  the  organization  of  the  first 
medical  school  in  New-York,  in  1768,  Dr.  Clossey  was 
chosen  the  professor  of  Anatomy,  and  directed  his  la- 
bours with  great  assiduity  to  the  establishment  of  that 
institution.  Political  difficulties  in  the  American  go- 
vernment, caused  him  to  return  to  his  own  country, 
where  he  died  a short  time  after  his  arrival.” — Tkach. 
Med.  Bioar.  A ] 

CLO V E.  See  Eugenia  caryophyllata. 

Clove-bark.  See  Myrtus  caryophyllata. 

Clove- gilliflower.  See  Dianthus  caryophyllus. 

Clove-pink.  See  Dianthus  caryophyllus. 

Cloven-leaf.  See  Leaf. 

CLOWES,  William,  an  eminent  English  surgeon 
of  the  16th  century,  received  his  education  under 
George  Keble,  whose  skill  he  strongly  commends.  Af- 
ter serving  for  some  time  professionally  in  the  navy, 
he  settled  in  London,  and  was  made  surgeon  to  Christ’s 
and  St.  Bartholomew’s  hospitals,  and  appears  to  have 


had  considerable  practice.  In  1586,  he  was  sent  to  the 
Low  Countries,  to  the  assistance  of  the  army  under 
the  Earl  of  Leicester ; and  on  his  return  was  appointed 
surgeon  to  the  Queen.  His  works  are  in  the  English 
language,  but  evince  much  learning,  as  well  as  skill  in 
his  profession.  The  first  which  he  published  was  on 
i the  lues  venerea,  in  1585;  in  which  he  notices  the  in- 
creasing frequency  of  that  disease,  and  states  that  in 
five  years  he  had  cured  above  a thousand  patients  la- 
bouring under  it  at  St.  Bartholomew’s  hospital.  But 
his  most  celebrated  publication  appeared  three  years 
after,  on  the  method  of  treating  wounds  of  various 
kinds,  the  result  of  extensive  experience,  sanctioned 
by  references  to  the  most  approved  writers.  He  ap- 
| pears  to  have  possessed  an  enlarged  understanding, 
and  was  very  severe  on  all  quacks  and  impostors ; and 
he  may  justly  be  reckoned  among  the  restorers  and  im- 
provers of  surgery  in  modern  times. 

CLUNE'SIA.  (From  clunes,  the  buttocks.)  An 
inflammation  of  the  buttocks. 

CLU'PEA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  fishes,  in  the 
Linnsean  system. 

Clupea  alosa.  The  Linnsean  name  for  the  shad 
or  chad,  the  flesh  of  which  is  by  some  commended  as 
a restorative. 

[Clupea  is  the  generic  name  for  the  herring  tribe, 
to  which  the  shad  belongs,  and  which  is  the  best  and 
largest  of  them  all.  It  is  one  of  the  most  excellent 
eatable  fish  that  frequents  the  waters  of  the  United 
States.  It  is  a migratory  fish  appearing  on  our  coast 
in  March  and  April,  and  disappearing  by  June.  It 
comes  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  in  its  course 
northwardly,  ascends  our  fresh  water  rivers  to  deposite 
its  spawn.  It  is  taken  in  immense  numbers  in  the 
Delaware,  the  Hudson,  and  the  Connecticut  rivers,  in 
April  and  May.  After  depositing  its  spawn  in  the 
upper  and  small  branches  of  these  fresh  streams,  the 
shad  returns  to  the  ocean,  so  altered  in  shape  and  size 
as  hardly  to  be  known  for  the  same  fish ; and  hence  it 
is  called  maugre  shad,  not  fit  to  eat,  and  not  suffered 
to  be  sold  in  the  New-York  markets.  A.] 

Clupea  encrasicolus.  The  anchovy,  a little  fish 
found  in  great  abundance  about  the  island  of  Gorgona, 
near  Leghorn.  It  is  prepared  for  sale,  by  salting  and 
pickling.  It  is  supposed  the  ancient  Greeks  and  Ro- 
mans prepared  a kind  of  garum  for  the  table  from  this 
fish.  Its  principal  use  is,  as  a sauce  for  seasoning. 

CLU'SIA.  (So  called  in  memory  of  Charles  CIu- 
sius,  an  eminent  botanist.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Polygamia; 
Order,  Moncecia.  Balsam-tree. 

CLUSTER.  See  Racemus. 

CLU'TIA.  (Named  after  Cluyt,  and  sometimes 
spelled  cluytia.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Dicecia ; Order,  Gynandria. 

Clutia  elutheria.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  is  by  some  supposed  to  afford  the  cascariila 
bark. 

Cluy'tia.  See  Clutia. 

CLY'DON.  KAv(5wv.  A fluctuation  and  flatulency 
in  the  stomach. 

CLYPEA'LIS.  (From  clypeus,  a shield.)  Formed 
like  a shield. 

CLY'SMUS.  (From  k Xvgw,  to  wash.)  Clysma. 
A glyster. 

Cly'ssus.  Clissus.  A term  anciently  used  by  the 
chemists  for  medicines  made  by  the  reunion  of  differ- 
ent principles,  as  oil,  salt,  and  spirit,  by  long  digestion  ; 
but  it  is  not  now  practised,  and  the  term  is  almost  lost. 

Clyssus  antimonii.  Clyssus  mineralis.  A weak 
acid  of  sulphur. 

Cly'ster.  ( Clysterium . From  kXv£<o,  to  cleanse.) 
A glyster.  See  Enema. 

Cne'mia.  (From  Kvrjpr),  the  tibia.)  Any  part  con- 
nected with  the  tibia. 

Cnemodactyl*'us.  (From  Kvrjprj,  the  tibia,  and 
SukJvXos,  a finger,  or  toe.)  A muscle,  the  origin  of 
which  is  in  the  tibia,  and  insertion  in  the  toes.  See 
Extensor  longus  digitorum  pedis. 

CNE'SIS.  (From  xvaw,  to  scratch.)  Cnismos.  A 
painful  itching. 

Cnioilve'on.  (From  kvikos,  cnicus,  and  sXaiov,  oil.) 
Oil  made  of  the  seeds  of  cnicus.  Its  virtues  are  the 
same  with  those  of  the  ricinus,  but  in  an  inferior  de- 
gree. 

CNI'CUS.  (From  xvaw,  to  scratch.)  The  plant 
used  by  Hippocrates  by  this  name,  is  supposed  to  be 

239 


COB 


COC 


the  carthamus ; but  modern  botanists  exclude  it  from 
the  species  of  this  plant. 

Cnicus  cernuus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
nodding  cnicus,  the  tender  stalks  of  which  are,  when 
boiled  and  peeled,  eaten  by  the  Siberians  as  a food. 

Cnicus  lanatus.  Chamcelim  verum.  The  distaff 
thistle.  Formerly  used  as  a depuration,  but  now  for- 
gotten. 

Cnicus  oleraceus.  Round-leaved  meadow  thistle. 
The  leaves  of  this  plant  are  boiled  in  the  northern 
parts  of  Europe,  and  eaten  as  we  do  cabbage. 

Cnicus  sylvestris.  See  Centaurea  benedieta. 

Cnidia  grana.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Cnidii  cocci.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Cnidii  grana.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Cnido'sis.  (From  kvi5t),  the  nettle.) 

1.  An  itching  sensation,  such  as  is  perceived  from 
the  nettle. 

2.  A dry  ophthalmy. 

Cnipo'tes.  An  itching. 

Cni'smos.  See  Cnesis. 

Cny'ma.  (From  jcvau,  to  scrape,  or  grate.)  In  Hip- 
pocrates it  signifies  a rasure,  puncture,  or  vellication : 
also  the  same  as  cnesis. 

Coadunat®.  (From  cuadunare,  to  join  or  gather 
together.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants,  in  Lin- 
meus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method. 

COA'GULABLE.  Possessing  the  property  of  co- 
agulation. See  Albumen. 

Coagulable  lymph.  See  Albumen. 

COAGULANT.  ( Coagulans ; from  coagulo , to  in- 
crassate,  or  curdle.)  Having  the  power  of  coagulating 
the  blood  or  juices  flowing  from  it. 

COAGULA'TION.  (Coagulatio ; from  con , and 
ago , to  drive  together.)  The  separation  of  the  coagu- 
lable particles,  contained  in  any  fluid,  from  the  more 
thin  and  not  coagulable  particles:  thus,  when  milk 
curdles,  the  coagulable  particles  form  the  curd ; and 
when  acids  are  thrown  into  any  fluid  containing  co- 
agulable particles,  they  form  what  is  called  a coagulum. 

COA'GULUM.  A term  applied  frequently  to  blood 
and  other  fluids,  when  they  assume  a jelly-like  con- 
sistency. 

Coagulum  aluminis.  This  is  made  by  beating  the 
white  of  eggs  with  a little  alum,  until  it  forms  a co- 
agulum. It  is  recommended  as  an  efficacious  applica- 
tion to  relaxations  of  the  conjunctive  membrane  of 
the  eye. 

COAK.  Charred  coal. 

[“  The  substance  called  coke  is  light,  spongy,  and 
of  a shining  steel-gray  colour.  It  burns  less  easily 
than  coal,  but  produces  a great  heat,  and  does  not  cake 
nor  smoke.  The  preparation  of  coke  may  be  con- 
ducted in  the  same  manner  as  that  of  charcoal  from 
wood.  By  this  process,  from  700  to  1100  lbs.  of  coke 
are  obtained  from  one  ton  of  coal;  but  the  volatile 
products,  consisting  of  bitumen,  or  coal-tar,,  and  am- 
monia, are  lost.  For  collecting  these,  a plan  has  been 
contrived  by  Lord  Dundonald,  and  successfully  exe- 
cuted. The  coke  is  prepared  in  ovens,  or  stoves, 
almost  close ; and  from  120  tons  of  coal  are  collected 
about  3£  tons  of  tar,  and  a quantity  of  ammoniacal 
salt.” — Clear.  Min. 

In  the  modern  process  of  making  gas  for  burning 
from  bituminous  coal,  the  profit  arises  principally  from 
preserving  the  coak  and  ammoniacal  liquor,  while  most 
of  the  tar  is  decomposed  and  converted  into  gas.  A.] 

COAL.  A combustible  mineral,  of  which  there  are 
many  species. 

Coalte'rn®  febres.  (From  con , and  alternus , 
alternate.)  Fevers  mentioned  by  Bellini,  which  he 
describes  as  two  fevers  affecting  the  same  patient,  and 
the  paroxysm  of  one  approaching  as  that  of  the  other 
subsides. 

COARCTA'TIO.  (From  coarcto , to  straighten.) 
The  contraction  or  diminution  of  any  thing.  For- 
merly applied  to  the  pulse:  it  meant  a lessening  in 
number. 

COARCTATUS.  Crowded.  A panicle  is  so  called, 
which  is  dense  or  crowded ; as  in  Phleum  paniculatum, 
the  inflorescence  of  which  looks,  at  first  sight,  like  a 
cylindrical  spike ; but  when  bent  to  either  side,  sepa- 
rates into  branched  lobes,  constituting  a real  panicle. 

Coarticula'tio.  (From  con , and  articulatio,  an 
articulation.)  That  sort  of  articulation  which  has 
manifest  motion. 

COBALT.  A brittle,  somewhat  soft,  but  difficultly 
240 


fusible  metal,  of  a reddish-gray  colour,  of  little  lustre, 
and  a sp.  gr.  of  8.6.  Its  melting  point  is  said  to  be  130° 
Wedgewood.  It  is  generally  associafed  in  its  ores  with 
nickel,  arsenic,  iron,  and  copper ; and  the  cobalt  of 
commerce  usually  contains  a proportion  of  these  me- 
tals. To  separate  them,  calcine  with  four  parts  of 
nitre,  and  wash  away,  with  hot  water,  the  soluble  ar- 
seniate  of  potassa.  Dissolve  the  residuum  in  dilute 
nitric  acid,  and  immerse  a plate  of  iron  in  the  solu- 
tion, to  precipitate  the  copper.  Filter  the  liquid  and 
evaporate  to  dryness.  Digest  the  mass  with  water  of 
ammonia,  which  will  dissolve  only  the  oxides  of  nickel 
and  cobalt.  Having  expelled  the  excess  of  alkali  by 
a gentle  heat  from  the  clear  ammoniacal  solution, 
add  cautiously  water  of  potassa,  which  will  precipi- 
tate the  oxide. of  nickel.  Filter  immediately,  ar;d  boil 
the  liquid,  which  will  throw  down  the  pure  oxide  of 
cobalt.  It  is  reduced  to  the  metallic  state  by  ignition 
in  contact  with  lamp-black  and  oil.  Laugier  treats 
the  above  ammoniacal  solution  with  oxalic  acid.  He 
then  redissolves  the  precipitated  oxalates  of  nickel  and 
cobalt  in  concentrated  water  of  ammonia,  and  exposes 
the  solution  to  the  air.  As  the  ammonia  exhales,  oxa- 
late of  nickel,  mixed  with  ammonia,  is  deposited. 
The  nickel  is  entirely  separated  from  the  liquid  by  re- 
peated crystallizations.  There  remains  a combination 
of  oxalate  of  cobalt  and  ammonia,  which  is  easily  re- 
duced by  charcoal  to  the  metallic  state.  The  small 
quantity  of  cobalt  remaining  in  the  precipitated  salt  of 
nickel,  is  separated  by  digestion  in  water  of  ammonia. 

Cobalt  is  susceptible  of  magnetism,  but  in  a lower 
degree  than  steel  and  nickel. 

Oxygen  combines  with  cobalt  in  two  proportions  ; 
forming  the  dark-blue  protoxide,  and  the  black  deutox- 
ide.  The  first  dissolves  in  acids  without  efferves- 
cence. It  is  procured  by  igniting  gently  in  a retort  the 
oxide  precipitated  by  potassa  from  the  nitric  solution. 
Prout  says,  the  first  oxide  consists  of  100  metal  + 19.8 
oxygen;  and  Rothoff  makes  the  composition  of  the 
deutoxide  100  + 36.77.  If  we  call  the  first  18.5,  and 
the  second  37 ; then  the  prime  equivalent  of  cobalt 
will  be  5.4 ; and  the  two  oxides  will  consist  of 


Protox.  | 

| Cobalt,  5.4 

100 

84.38 

| Oxygen,  1.0 

18.5 

15.62 

100.00 

Deutox.  | 

j Cobalt,  5.4 

100 

73 

| Oxygen,  2.0 

37 

27 

300 

The  precipitated  oxide  of  cobalt,  washed  and  gently 
heated  in  contact  with  air,  passes  into  the  state  of 
black  peroxide. 

When  cobalt  is  heated  in  chlorine,  it  takes  fire,  and 
forms  the  chloride.  The  iodide,  phosphuret,  and  sul- 
phuret  of  this  metal,  have  not  been  much  examined. 

The  salts  of  cobalt  are  interesting  from  the  remark- 
able changes  of  colour  which  they  can  exhibit. 

Their  solution  is  red  in  the  neutral  state,  but  green 
with  a slight  excess  of  acid ; the  alkalies  occasion  a 
blue-coloured  precipitate  from  the  salts  of  pure  co- 
balt, but  reddish-brown  when  arsenic  acid  is  present ; 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  produces  no  precipitate,  but  hy- 
drosulphurets  throw  down  a black  powder,  soluble  in 
excess  of  the  precipitant;  tincture  of  galls  gives  a 
yellowish-white  precipitate ; oxalic  acid  throws  down 
the  red  oxalate.  Zinc  does  not  precipitate  this  metal. 

COBALUS.  The  demon  of  mines,  which  obstruct 
ed  and  destroyed  the  miners. 

COBHAM.  The  name  of  a town  in  Surrey,  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  which  is  a weak  saline  purging 
water. 

Co'bra  de  capello.  (From  cobra , the  head,  or 
covering,  Spanish.  See  Crotalus  horridus. 

Cocao , butter  of.  See  Butter  of  Cocao. 

Cocao-nut.  Sfee  Cocos  nucifera. 

Cocca  cnidia.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Cocca'rium.  (From  kokkov,  a berry.)  A very 
small  pill. 

COCCINE’LLA.  (Diminutive  of  coccus,  a berry; 
from  its  resemblance  to  a berry.)  See  Coccus  cacti. 

Cocco-balsamum.  The  fruit  of  the  Amyris  gilea 

densis. 

Coccogni'dia.  See  Daphne  mezereum 


coc 


coc 


COCCOLITE.  A mineral  of  a green  colour,  of  va- 
rious shades,  found  with  granular  limestone',  garnet,  and 
magnetic  iron-stone,  in  Norway,  Sweden,  and  Spain. 

CO'CCOS.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

CO'CCULUS.  (Diminutive  of  xo/c/cof,  a berry.)  1. 
A little  berry. 

2.  The  name  given  by  De  Candolle,  in  his  Systema 
Jfaturie , to  a new  genus  of  plants. 

3.  Cocculus  indicus.  See  Menispermum  cocculus. 

4.  Cocculus  palmatus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant,  which  affords  the  calumba  root  of  the  phar- 
macopoeias. See  Calumba. 

Co'cculus  indz  aromatxcus.  Jamaica  pepper. 
See  Myrtus  pimenta. 

CO'CCUM.  A species  of  capsule,  but  separated 
from  it  by  Gaertner,  who  defines  it  to  be  a dry  seed-ves- 
sel, more  or  less  aggregate,  not  solitary,  the  sides  of 
which  are  elastic,  projecting  the  seeds  with  great  force ; 
as  in  the  Euphorbia. 

Coccum  baphicum.  A name  for  chermes. 

CO'CCUS.  The  name,  in  entomology,  for  a tribe  of 
insects. 

Coccus  cacti.  The  systematic  name  of  the  cochi- 
neal animal,  or  insect.  Coccinella  ; Coccinilla ; Ficus 
Indice gr ana;  Scarabceolus  hemisphcericus  ; Cochineli- 
fera  cochinilla ; Coccus  Americanus ; Cochinella ; 
Coccus  indicus  tinctorius.  Cochineal.  That  which 
is  used  is  the  female  insect  found  on,  and  collected  in 
South  America  from,  the  Opuntia,  or  Indian  fig-tree. 
It  possesses  stimulating  qualities,  and  is  ordered  by  the 
College  in  the  tinctura  cardamomi  composita , and  tinc- 
tura  cinchonas  composita ; but,  most  probably,  merely 
on  account  of  the  beautiful  red  colour  which  it  im- 
parts to  them. 

[The  cochineal  is  not  now  used  in  this  country  as  a 
medicine.  It  is  principally  employed  in  producing  a 
beautiful  scarlet  colour,  in  dying  calico,  colouring 
morocco  leather,  &c.  A.] 

COCCYGE'US.  ( Coccygcus  ; from  kokkv%  : because 
it  is  inserted  into  the  coccyx.)  A muscle  of  the  os  coc- 
cygis,  situated  within  the  pelvis.  Ischio-cocigien  of 
Dumas.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy,  from  the  spi- 
nous process  of  the  ischium,  and  covers  the  inside  of 
the  sacro-ischiatic  ligament ; from  this  narrow  begin- 
ning it  gradually  increases  to  form  a thin  fleshy  belly, 
interspersed  with  tendinous  fibres.  It  is  inserted  into 
the  extremity  of  the  os  sacrum,  and  nearly  the  whole 
length  of  the  os  cocqygis  laterally.  Its  use  is  to  support 
and  move  the  os  coccygis  forwards,  and  to  tie  it  more 
firmly  to  the  sacrum. 

CO'CCYGIS  OS.  (From  kokkv\,  the  cuckoo,  the 
bill  of  which  bird  it  is  said  to  represent.)  Cauda. 
Ossis  sacri  acumen.  Coccyx.  This  bone  is  a small 
appendage  to  the  point  of  the  sacrum,  terminating  this 
inverted  column  with  an  acute  point,  and  found  in 
very  different  conditions  in  the  several  stages  of  life. 
In  the  child,  it  is  merely  cartilage,  and  we  can  find  no 
point  of  bone : during  youth,  it  is  ossifying  into  dis- 
tinct bones,  which  continue  moveable  upon  each  other 
till  manhood : then  the  separate  bones  gradually  unite 
with  each  other,  so  as  to  form  one  conical  bone,  with 
bulgings  and  marks  of  the  pieces  of  which  it  was  ori- 
ginally composed ; but  still  the  last  bone  continues  to 
move  upon  the  joint  of  the  sacrum,  till,  in  advanced 
years,  it  is  at  last  firmly  united ; later  in  women  than 
in  men,  with  whom  it  is  often  fixed  at  twenty  or 
twenty-five.  It  is  not,  like  the  os  sacrum,  flat,  but  of 
a roundish  form,  convex  withqut,  and  concave  in- 
wards ; forming  with  the  sacrum  the  lowest  part  of  the 
pelvis  behind.  It  has  no  holes  like  the  sacrum  ; has 
no  communication  with  the  spinal  canal,  and  transmits 
no  nerves ; but  points  forwards  to  support  the  lower 
parts  of  the  rectum  ; thus  it  contracts  the  lower  open- 
ing of  the  pelvis,  so  as  to  support  effectually  the  rec- 
tum, bladder,  and  womb  ; and  yet  continues  so  move- 
able  in  women,  as  to  recede  in  time  of  labour,  allowing 
the  head  of  the  child  to  pass. 

CO'CCYX.  (Koxxuf,  the  cuckoo.)  See  Coccygis 
os.  Also  the  part  in  which  the  os  coccygis  is  placed. 

COCI1ENILIN.  Carminium.  The  name  of  the 
colouring  principle  of  cochineal. 

Co'chia.  (From  koxuu),  to  turn  or  make  round.) 
An  ancient  name  of  some  officinal  pills.  The  pill  of 
cochia  of  the  shops,  in  the  present  day,  is  the  compound 
eolocynth  pill. 

Co'cniNEAL.  See  Coccus  cacti. 

CO'CHLEA.  (From  icoxaty,  to  turn  round.)  A 

a 


cavity  of  the  internal  ear,  resembling  the  shell  of  a 
snail,  in  which  are  the  modiolus , or  nucleus , extending 
from  its  basis  to  the  apex,  the  scala  tympani,  scala  ves- 
tibuli,  and  spiral  lamina.  See  Ear. 

Cochlea  terrestris.  See  Limax. 

COCHLEA' RE.  (Crom  cochlea , a cockle,  the  shell 
of  which  its  bowl  represents.)  A spoon.  Cochleare 
amplum  or  magnum  is  a table-spoon,  calculated  to  hold 
half  a fluid  ounce;  cochleare  medium  is  a dessert  or 
pap  spoon,  supposed  to  hold  two  tea  spoonfuls  ; and 
cochleare  minimum,  a tea-spoon,  which  holds  about 
one  fluid  drachm. 

COCHLEA'RIA.  (From  cochleare,  a spoon ; so 
called  from  its  resemblance.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linniean  system.  Class,  Tetradyna- 
mia ; Order,  Siliculosa. 

Cochlearia  armoracia.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  horse-radish ; Raphanus  rusticanus  ; Armoracia  ; 
Raphanus  marinus ; Raphanus  sylvestris  ; Cochlea- 
ria—foliis  radicalibus  lanceolatis  crenatis  caulinis  hi- 
cisis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  loot  of  this  plant  has  long 
been  received  into  the  materia  medica,  and  is  also  well 
known  at  our  tables.  “ It  affects  the  organs  both  of 
taste  and  smell  with  a quick  penetrating  pungency ; 
nevertheless  it  contains  in  certain  vessels  a sweet  juice, 
which  sometimes  exudes  in  little  drops  upon  the  sur- 
face. Its  pungent  matter  is  of  a very  volatile  kind, 
being  totally  dissipated  in  drying,  and  carried  off  in 
evaporation,  or  distillation  by  water  ; as  the  pungency 
exhales,  the  sweet  matter  of  the  root  becomes  more 
sensible,  though  this  also  is,  in  a great  measure,  dissi- 
pated or  destroyed.  It  impregnates  both  water  and 
spirit,  by  infusion,  or  by  distillation,  very  richly  with 
its  active  matters.  In  distillation  with  water,  it  yields 
a small  quantity  of  essential  oil,  exceedingly  pene- 
trating and  pungent.” 

Dr.  Cullen  has  mentioned  every  thing  necessary  to 
be  known  respecting  the  medicinal  virtues  of  horse- 
radish, we  shall  therefore  transcribe  all  that  the  inge- 
nious professor  has  written  on  this  subject.  “ The  root 
of  this  plant  only  is  employed ; and  it  affords  one  of 
the  most  acrid  substances  of  this  order  ( Siliculosa ), 
and  therefore  proves  a powerful  stimulant,  whether 
externally  or  internally  employed.  Externally,  it 
readily  inflames  the  skin,  and  proves  a rubefacient 
that  may  be  employed  with  advantage  in  palsy  and 
rheumatism  ; and  if  its  application  be  Jong  continued, 
it  prodflees  blisters.  Taken  internally,  it  may  be  sc? 
managed  as  to  relieve  hoarseness,  by  acting  on  the 
fauces.  Received  into  the  stomach,  it  stimulates  this, 
and  promotes  digestion;  and  therefore  is  properly  em- 
ployed as  a condiment  with  our  animal  food.  If  it  bo 
infused  in  water,  and  a portion  of  this  infusion  be  taken 
with  a large  draught  of  warm  water,  it  readily  proves 
emetic,  and  may  either  be  employed  by  itself  to  excite 
vomiting,  or  to  assist  the  operation  of  other  emetics. 
Infused  in  water,  and  taken  into  the  stomach,  it  proves 
stimulant  to  the  nervous  system,  and  is  thereby  useful 
in  palsy,  and,  if  employed  in  large  quantity,  it  proves 
heating  to  the  whole  body ; and  thereby  it  proves  often 
useful  in  chronic  rheumatism,  whether  arising  from 
scurvy  or  other  causes.  Beigius  has  given  us  a parti- 
cular method  of  exhibiting  this  root,  which  is,  by  cut- 
ting it  down,  without  bruising,  into  small  pieces;  and 
these,  if  swallowed  without  chewing,  may  be  taken 
down  in  large  quantities,  to  that  of  a table-spoonful. 
And  the  author  alleges,  that,  in  this  way,  taken  in  the 
morning  for  a month  together,  this  root  has  been  ex- 
tremely useful  in  arthritic  cases ; which,  however,  I 
suppose  to  have  been  of  the  rheumatic  kind.  It  would 
seem,  in  this  manner  employed,  analogous  to  the  use 
of  unbruised  mustard-seed ; it  gives  out  in  the  stomach 
its  subtile  volatile  parts,  that  stimulate  considerably 
without  inflaming.  The  matter  of  horse-radish,  like 
the  same  matter  of  the  other  siliquose  plants  carried 
into  the  blood-vessels,  passes  readily  into  the  kidneys, 
and  proves  a powerful  diuretic,  and  is  therefore  useful 
in  dropsy;  and  we  need  not  say,  that,  in  this  manner, 
by  promoting  both  urine  and  perspiration,  it  has  been 
longknown  as  oneofthe  most  powerful  antiscorbutics.” 

Cochlearia  hortensis.  Lemon  scurvy-grass. 
Sde  Cochlearia  officinalis. 

Cochlearia  officinalis.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  lemon  scurvy-grass.  Cochlearia  hortensis; 
Cochlearia — foliis  radicalibus  cordato  subrolundis ; 
caulinis  oblongis  subsinuatis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  in- 
digenous plant  is  cultivated  in  gardens  for  its  medicinal 

241 


COG 


CCEL 


qualities.  Its  expressed  juice  has  been  long  considered 
as  the  most  effectual  of  the  scorbutic  plants. 

COCHLEATUS.  Spiral,  like  the  winding  of  a 
shell.  Applied  in  botany  to  leaves,  leguminous  seeds, 
&e. ; as  legumen  cochleatum,  seen  in  Mcdicago  poly- 
morpha , and  the  seeds  of  the  Hal's  via. 

Cocho'nk.  (From  A-o%aw,  to  turn  round.)  Galen 
explains  this  to  be  the  juncture  of  the  ischium,  near 
the  scat  or  breech ; whence,  says  he,  all  the  adjacent 
parts  about  the  seat  are  called  by  the  same  name. 
Hesycliius  says,  that  cochone  is  the  part  of  the  spine 
which  is  adjacent  to  the  os  sacrum. 

[“ COCHRAN,  John,  M.D.  This  gentleman  was 
born  in  1730,  in  Chester  county,  state  of  Pennsylvania. 
About  tne  time  he  finished  his  medical  studies,  the  war 
of  1755  commenced  in  America,  between  England  and 
France.  The  army  then  presented  to  the  mind  of  Dr. 
Cochran  a scene  of  usefulness  and  farther  improve- 
ment. As  there  were  not  any  great  hospitals  at  that 
time  in  the  provinces,  he  readily  perceived  that  the 
army  would  be  an  excellent  school  for  his  improve- 
ment, especially  in  surgery,  as  well  as  in  the  medical 
treatment  of  many  diseases.  He  soon  obtained  the 
appointment  of  Surgeon's  Mate  in  the  Hospital  De- 
partment; and  having  continued  with  the  northern 
army  during  the  whole  of  that  war,  enjoying  the 
friendship  and  advice  of  Dr.  Munro,  and  other  eminent 
surgeons  and  physicians,  he  quitted  the  service  with 
tile  character  of  an  able  and  experienced  practitioner. 

When  (twenty  years  after)  the  war  became  serious 
between  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States,  Dr. 
Cochran  was  too  zealous  a whig,  and  too  milch  at- 
tached to  the  interests  of  his  native  country,  te  remain 
an  idle  spectator.  Towards  the  last  of  the  year  1776, 
lie  offered  his  services  as  a volunteer  in  the  hospital 
department  General  Washington  afterward  recom- 
mended him  to  Congress.  lie  was  accordingly  ap- 
pointed, in  April,  1777,  Physician  and  Surgeon  Gene- 
ral in  the  middle  department.  In  the  month  of  Octo- 
ber, 1781,  Congress  was  pleased  to  give  him  the  ap- 
pointment of  Director  General  of  the  hospitals  of  the 
United  States ; an  appointment  that  was  the  more 
honourable  because  it  was  not  solicited  by  him.  A 
short  time  after  the  peace,  Dr.  Cochran  removed  with 
his  family  to  New- York,  where  he  attended  to  the 
duties  of  his  profession  until  the  adoption  of  the  new 
Constitution,  when  his  friend  President  Washington, 
retaining,  to  use  his  own  words,  “ a cheerful  recollec- 
tion of  his  past  services,”  nominated  him  to  the  office 
of  Commissioner  of  Loans  for  the  State  of  New-York. 
This  office  he  held  until  a paralytic  stroke  disabled  him 
in  some  measure  from  the  discharge  of  its  duties ; upon 
which  he  gave  in  his  resignation,  and  retired  to  Pala- 
tine, in  the  county  of  Montgomery,  where  he  termi- 
nated a long  and  useful  life,  on  the  6th  of  April,  1807, 
in  the  77th  year  of  his  age.” — Tkach.  Med.  Biug.  A.] 

COCK.  The  male  of  the  domestic  fowl.  See  P ha- 
si  anus  g alius. 

COCKBURN,  William,  was  born  in  the  latter  part 
of  the  17th  century.  After  being  some  years  physician 
to  the  navy,  he  settled  in  London ; and  soon  distin- 
guished himself  so  much,  that  he  was  admitted  into 
the  College,  as  well  as  the  Royal  Society,  and  made 
physician  to  King  William.  He  published  a “Trea- 
tise on  Sea  Diseases,”  which  was  often  reprinted,  and 
translated  into  French  and  German.  He  referred  the 
scurvy  principally  to  the  diet  of  seamen,  and  consider- 
ed fresh  provisions  as  the  chief  remedy  for  it.  He 
wrote  also  on  A 1 vine  Fluxes,  on  Gonorrhoea,  (which 
lie  contends  may  exist  independent  of  syphilis,)  and 
on  the  Human  CEconomy;  which  latter  publication 
was  much  noticed  at  the  time,  but  is  since  superseded 
by  more  accurate  treatises. 

CO'COS.  (So  called  from  the  Portuguese  coco , or 
coquen,  the  three  holes  at  the  end  of  the  cocoa-nut 
shell,  giving  it  the  lesemblance  of  a monkey’s  head.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system. 
Class,  Moncecia;  Order,  Hcxaudriq. 

Cocos  buty  rack  a.  The  systematic  name  of  th^ 
plant  which  affords  the  palm  oil ; Cocos — inermis , 
frundibus,  pevnatis  ; folivlis  simplicibus,  of  Linnaeus. 
The  oleum  pahnee  is  produced  chiefly  by  bruising  and 
dissolving  the  kernels  of  the  fruit  in  water,  without 
the  aid  of  heat,  by  which  the  oil  is  separated,  and 
rises  to  the  surface,  and  on  being  washed  two  or  three 
times,  is  rendered  tit  for  use.  When  brought  into  this 
country,  it  is  of  the  consistence  of  an  ointmeut,  and 
°42 


of  an  orange-yellow  colour,  with  little  taste,  and  rtf  a 
strong,  though  not  disagreeable  smell.  Its  use  is  con- 
fined to  external  applications  in  pains,  tumours,  and 
sprains ; but  it  appears  to  possess  very  little,  if  any, 
advantage  over  other  bland  oils. 

Cocos  nucifera.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant,  the  fruit  of  which  is  the  cocoa-nut.  Within  the 
nut  is  found  a kernel,  as  pleasant  as  an  almond,  and 
also  a large  quantity  of  liquor  resembling  milk,  which 
the  Indians  greedily  drink  before  the  fruit  is  ripe,  it 
being  then  pleasant,  but  when  the  nut  is  matured,  the 
liquor  becomes  sour.  Some  full-grown  nuts  will  con- 
tain a pint  or  more  of  this  milk,  the  frequent  drinking 
of  which  seems  to  have  no  bad  effects  upon  the  In- 
dians ; yet  Europeans  should  be  cautious  of  making 
too  free  with  it  at  first,  for  when  Lionel  Wafer  was  at 
a small  island  in  the  South  Sea,  where  the  tree  grew 
in  plenty,  some  of  his  men  were  so  delighted  with  it, 
that  at  parting  they  resolved  to  drink  their  fill,  which 
they  did  ; but  their  appetites  had  like  to  have  cost  them 
their  lives,  for  though  they  were  not  drunk,  yet  they 
were  so  chilled  and  benumbed,  that  they  could  not 
stand,  and  were  obliged  to  be  carried  aboard  by  those 
who  bad  more  prudence  than  themselves,  and  it  was 
many  dayS  hefore  they  recovered.  The  shells  of  these 
nuts  being  hard,  and  capable  of  receiving  a polish, 
they  are  often  cut  transversely,  when,  being  mounted 
on  stands,  and  having  their  edges  silvered,  or  gilt,  or 
otherwise  ornamented,  they  serve  the  purpose  of  drink- 
ing-cups. The  leaves  of  the  tree  are  used  for  thatch- 
ing, for  brooms,  baskets,  and  other  utensils ; and  of 
the  reticular  web,  growing  at  their  base,  the  Indian 
women  make  cauls  and  aprons. 

CO'CTION.  (Coctio ; from  coquo,  to  boil.)  Con- 
coction. 1.  The  digestion  of  the  food  in  the  stomach. 
See  Digestion. 

2.  A boiling  or  decoction.  See  Decoction. 

3.  It  was  formerly  used  in  a medical  sense,  signify- 
ing that  alteration,  whatever  it  be,  or  however  occa- 
sioned, which  is  made  in  the  crude  matter  of  a dis- 
temper, whereby  it  is  either  fitted  for  a discharge,  or 
rendered  harndess  to  the  body.  This  is  often  brought 
about  by  nature ; that  is,  by  the  vis  vita;,  or  the  dispo 
sition  or  natural  tendency  of  the  matter  itself,  or  else 
by  proper  remedies,  which  may  so  alter  its  bulk,  figure 
cohesion,  or  give  it  a particular  determination,  so  as 
to  prevent  any  farther  ill  effects,  or  drive  it  quite  out 
of  the  body.  And  that  time  of  a disease  wherein  this 
action  is  performing,  is  called  its  state  of  coction.  It 
is  now  fallen  into  disuse. 

Cocu'stu.  The  name  for  courbaril. 

Coda'ga  fala.  See  J\Terium  antidyscntcricum. 

Codecella.  A name  given  by  the  Italians  to  the 
carbuncle.  See  Anthrax. 

Cobock'le.  (From  Kindia,  a bulb,  and  KtjXt),  a tu- 
mour^ A bubo. 

CCECA'LIS.  (From  cacutn , the  blind  gut,  through 
which  it  runs.)  A vein,  being  a branch  from  the  con- 
cave side  of  the  vena  mesaraica. 

Cce'la.  (From  xotAoj,  hollow.)  Applied  to  depres- 
sion, or  hollow  parts  on  the  surface  of  the  body,  as  the 
hollow  pits  above,  and  sometimes  below  the  eyes;  the 
hollow  parts  at  the  bottom  o£  the  feet. 

CCE'LIA.  (From  koiXos , hollow.)  A cavity  in 
any  part  of  the  body  ; as  the  belly,  the  ivomb,  &c. 

CCE'LIAC.  ( Cccliacus , belonging  to  the  belly ; from 
KoiXia , the  belly.)  Appertaining  to  the  belly. 

Co£liac  artery.  Artcria  cccliaca.  The  first  branch 
given  off' from  the  aorta  in  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen. 
It  sends  branches  to  the  diaphragm,  stomach,  liver, 
pylorus,  duodenum,  omentum,  and  spleen. 

Cceliac  passion.  (From  KoiXia,  the  belly.)  Calico, 
chylosa ; Ccclica  lactea.  There  are  very  great  differ- 
ences among  physicians  concerning  the  nature  of  this 
disease.  Sauvages  says  it  is  a chronic  flux,  in  which 
the  aliment  is  discharged  half  digested.  Dr.  Cullen 
considers  it  as  a species  of  diarrhoea,  and  mentions  it 
in  his  third  and  fourth  species,  under  the  terms  mu- 
cosa, chylosa,  lactea;  making  the  purulenta  only 
symptomatic.  See  Diarrhoea.  It  is  attended  with 
great  pains  in  the  stomach,  resembling  the  pricking  of 
pins;  rumbling  and  flatus  in  the  intestines;  white 
stools,  because  deprived  of  bile ; while  the  patient  be- 
comes weak  and  lean. 

CGRLIACA.  ( Cccliacus ; from  tcoXaia , alvus  ven- 
ter.) Dr.  Good  selects  this  name  for  the  first  class  of 
diseases  in  his  Nosology;  diseases  of  the  digestive 


COI 


COF 

function.  It  contains  two  orders,  Enterica  and 
Splanchnica. 

Ccelo'ma.  (From  KotXoj,  hollow.)  An  ulcer  in  the 
tunica  cornea  of  the  eye. 

Ccelqsto'mia.  See  Coilostomia. 

CCENOLO'GIA.  (From  koivos,  common,  and  X<  yoj, 
discourse.)  A consultation,  or  common  consideration 
of  a disease,  by  two  or  more  physicians. 

Cceno'tes.  (From  koivos,  common.)  The  physi- 
cians of  the  methodic  sect  asserted  that  all  diseases 
arose  from  relaxation,  stricture,  or  a mixture  of  both. 
These  were  called  ccenotes , viz.  what  diseases  have  in 
common. 

Cceru'leus  lapis.  The  sulphate  of  copper.  See 
Capri  sulphas. 

CCE'TE.  (From  xeipai,  to  lie  down.)  A bed,  or 
touch,  for  a sick  person. 

CO'FFEA.  (From  kofuak , a mixing  together,  He- 
brew ; so  called  from  the  pleasant  potation  which  is 
made  from  its  berry : others  assert  that  the  true  name 
is  Caffe,  from  Caff  a a province  in  South  America, 
where  the  tree  grows  spontaneously  in  great  abun- 
dance.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
uaian  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 
The  cotfee-tree. 

Coffea  arabica.  The  plant  which  affords  coffee. 
Jasminum  Arabicam;  Choava.  Coffee  is  the  seed 
of  the  Coffea— floribus  quinquefidis , dispermis , of  Lin- 
naeus. 

The  coffee-tree  is  cultivated  in  Arabia,  Persia,  the 
East  Indies,  the  Isle  of  Bourbon,  and  several  parts  of 
America.  Good  Turkey  coffee  is  by  far  the  most  salu- 
tary of  all  liquors  drunk  at  meal-time.  It  possesses 
nervine  and  adstringent  qualities,  and  may  be  drunk 
with  advantage  at  all  times,  except  when  there  is  bile  in 
the  stomach.  It  is  said  to  be  a good  antidote  against 
an  over  dose  of  opium,  and  to  relieve  obstinate  spas- 
modic asthmas.  For  the  latter  purpose,  the  coffee 
ought  to  be  of  the  best  Mocco,  newly  burnt,  and  made 
very  strong,  immediately  after  grinding  it.  Sir  John 
Pringle  commonly  ordered  one  ouncefor  a dose ; which 
is  to  be  repeated  fresh,  after  the  interval  of  a quarter 
or  half  an  hour ; and  which  he  directed  to  be  taken 
without  milk  or  sugar. 

Besides  the  peculiar  bitter  principle,  which  is  de- 
scribed under  the  name  Caffein , coffee  contains  several 
other  vegetable  products.  According  to  Cadet,  64 
parts  of  raw  coffee  consists  of  8 gum,  1 resin,  1 ex- 
tractive and  bitter  principle,  3.5  gallic  acid,  0.14  albu- 
men, 43.5  fibrous  insoluble  matter,  and  6.86  loss.  Her- 
man found  in  1920  grains  of 

Levant  Coffee,  Mart.  Coffee, 


Resin 

74 

68 

Extractive 

320  

310 

Gum 

13ft 

144 

Fibrous  matter. . 

. 1335  

1386 

Loss 

61 

i‘2 

1920 

1920 

The  nature  of  the  volatile  fragment  principle  deve- 
loped in  coffee  by  roasting,  has  not  been  ascertained. 
The  Dutch  in  Surinam  improve  the  flavour  of  their 
coffee  by  suspending  bags  of  it,  for  two  years,  in  a 
dry  atmosphere.  They  never  use  new  coffee. 

If  coffee  be  drunk  warm  within  an  hour  after  din- 
ner, it  is  of  singular  use  to  those  who  have  headache, 
from  weakness  in  the  stomach,  contracted  by  seden- 
tary habits,  close  attention,  or  accidental  drukenness. 
It  is  of  service  when  the  digestion  is  weak  ; and  per- 
sons afflicted  with  the  sick  headache  are  much  bene- 
fited by  its  use,  in  some  instances,  though  this  effect  is 
by  no  means  uniform.  Cofiee  is  often  imitated  by 
roasting  rye  with  a few  almonds. 

[“  COFFIN,  Nathaniel,  XI.D.,  son  of  Dr.  N.  Coffin, 
one  of  the  most  eminent  physicians  in  the  state  of 
Maine.  The  first  ancestor  of  his  family  who  came  to 
this  country  was  Tristram  Coffin,  who  emigrated  from 
England  in  1642. 

Dr.  Nathaniel  Coffin  was  born  in*Portland,  on  the 
3d  of  May,  1744,  in  which  place  he  always  lived,  and 
where  he  closed  his  long  and  useful  life.  The  country 
at  the  time  of  his  birth,  for  may  miles  round  Casco 
bay,  including  the  site  of  Portland,  was  called  Fal- 
mouth ; afterward,  the  part  most  thickly  settled,  lying 
on  the  harbour,  was  incorporated  into  a separate  town 
by  the  name  of  Portland. 

He  completed  his  preparatory  medical  education 

a 2 


under  his  father;  but  the  limited  means  of  scientific 
improvement  then  existing  in  this  thinly  peopled  sec- 
tion of  the  country,  induced  the  son,  with  the  advice 
of  his  father,  to  embark  for  England  at  the  age  of 
eighteen.  He  there  prosecuted  his  studies  at  Guy’s  and 
St.  Thomas’s  hospitals,  under  the  distinguished  Hun- 
ter, Akenside,  M‘Kenzie,  and  others ; and  returned  to 
commence  the  practice  of  his  profession  at  the  early 
age  of  twenty-one. 

Possessing  a constitution  naturally  healthy  and  vi- 
gorous, and  a mind  resolute  and  intelligent,  there  was 
no  peril  which  he  was  not  prepared  to  encounter,  and 
no  adversity  which  he  could  not  endure;  and- he  has 
well  deserved  the  distinction  awarded  him  by  the 
public,  for  his  constant  and  unremitted  exertions  during 
a period  of  more  than  sixty  years. 

Dr.  Coffin  was  surrounded,  in  the  early  part  of  his 
career,  by  suffering  friends  and  patients , but  his  life 
was  closed  amid  the  blessings  of  freedom  and  inde- 
pendence. In  the  peaceful  evening  of  his  days,  all 
the  enjoyments  of  prosperity  and  affliction  clustered 
around  his  dwelling;  but  it  should  not  be  forgotten 
that  the  respectability  and  happiness  he,,  had  expe- 
rienced, were  the  well  earned  reward  of  the  virtues, 
the  talents,  and  the  faithfulness  of  former  years. 

In  his  manners,  he  was  a polished  specimen  of  the 
state  of  American  society  existing  before  the  Revolu- 
tion; he  was  one  of  the  most  graceful  gentlemen  of 
the  old  school,  and  his  deportment  was  marked  by  a 
uniform  and  captivating  urbanily.  He  died  on  the  18th 
of  October,  1826,  aged  82  years." — Thacker’s  Med. 
Biog.  A-j 

COGAN,  William,  wa3  born  in  Somersetshire, 
about  the  middle  of  the  16th  century.  He  studied, 
and  took  the  degree  of  bachelor  in  medicine,  at  Ox- 
ford ; soon  after  which  he  was  appointed  master  of  the 
school  at  Manchester,  where  he  also  practised  iu  his 
profession  till  his  death  in  1607.  He  published  a cu- 
rious book,  abounding  in  classical  quotations,  entitled 
“ The  Haven  of  Health,”  in  which  he  strongly  re- 
commends temperance  and  exercise.  There  is  added 
an  account  of  the  sweating  sickness;  ami  of  a re- 
markable disorder,  which  prevailed  at  Oxford  in  July 
and  August,  1575,  before  he  left  it,  by  whieh  he  states, 
that  in  thirty-seven  days  w there  died  510  persons,  ail 
men,  and  no  women.” 

COHE  SION.  (Cohcesio  ; from  cow,  and  fuereo,to 
stick  together.)  Vis  cohcesionis ; Vis  adheesionis  ; 
Vis  attraction is.  That  power  by  which  the  particles 
of  bodies  are  held  together.  See  Attraction. 

Cohoba'tion.  (A  term  invented  by  Paracelsus.) 
Cohobatio ; Coliobium ; Coiioph.  The  ancient  che- 
mists use  this  term  to  signify  the  distillation  of  a fluid 
poured  afresh  upon  a substance  of  the  same  kind  as 
that  upon  which  it  was  before  distilled,  and  repeat- 
ing this  operation  several  times  to  make  it  more  effi- 
cacious. 

Co'hol.  ( Cohol , Hebrew.)  Castellus  says  this 
word  is  used  in  Avicenna,  to  express  dry  collyria  for 
the  eyes,  m fine  powder. 

Coi'lima.  (From  /coiXta,  the  bowels.)  A sudden 
swelling  of  the  belly  from  wind. 

COILOSTO'MIA.  (From  /cotXo?,  hollow,  and  $-opa, 
the  mouth.)  Caelostomia.  A defect  of  speaking,  from 
the  palate,  or  through  the  nose,  the  voice  being  so  ob- 
scured as  to  sound  as  if  it  proceeded  from  a cavern. 

COINDICA'NTIA.  (From  con , and  indico , to  indi- 
cate.) Signs,  or  symptoms,  are  called  coindicant, 
when,  besides  the  usual  incidental  appearances,  there 
occur  others,  as  age,  habit,  season,  &c. 

Coi'ra.  A name  for  catechu. 

COITER,  Volciier,  was  born  at  Groningen  In  1534. 
After  studying  at  the  different  universities  in  Italy,  he 
attended  as  physician  to  the  French  army  during  one 
campaign,  that  he  might  have  more  opportunity  lor  in- 
vestigating human  anatomy.  He  then  settled  at  Nu- 
remberg, where  he  continued  till  In's  death  in  1576. 
He  made  considerable  improvements  in  anatomy  and 
surgery.  He  found  that  the  brain  had  a motion  com- 
municated to  it  by  the  arteries;  and  that  iu  some  ani- 
mals the  organ  might  be  removed  without  destroying 
life.  He  first  described  the  corpora  lutea  in  the  ova- 
ria  ; and  noticed  the  order  in  which  the  parts  of  the 
chick  are  evolved.  He  described  the  frontal  sinuses* 
and  tiie  organ  of  hearing,  more  accurately  than  any 
preceding  author.  He  pointed  out  two  muscles  whiclir 
depress  the  eyebrows,  and  two  which  perform  the 

213 


COL 


COL 


game  office  to  the  lips.  He  observed,  that  injuries  to 
the  brain  are  more  dangerous  when  the  dura  mater 
remains  entire ; and  therefore  he  boldly  divided  that 
membrane.  He  was  also  accustomed  to  pare  down 
fungi  arising  from  the  brain.  He  published  good 
plates  of  the  cartilages,  of  the  foetal  skeleton,  and  of 
those  of  various  animals,  &c. 

CO'ITUS.  (From  coco , to  go  together.)  The  con- 
junction of  the  male  and  female  in  the  act  of  pro- 
creation. 

[Coke.  See  Coak.  A.] 

COXA.  (From  kwXov,  a joint.)  The  joints. 

Colato'ria  lactea.  Astruc  says  they  were  for- 
merly called  glands,  and  are  situated  in  the  third  and 
internal  tunic  of  the  uterus,  and  that  they  are  vesiculo- 
vascular  bodies. 

COLATO'RIUM.  (From  colo,  to  strain.)  Astrainer 
of  any  kind. 

COLATU'RA.  (From  colo,  to  strain.)  A filtered 
or  strained  liquor. 

COL  BATCH,  John,  was  born  in  the  latter  part  of 
the  17th  century.  He  practised  in  London,  first  as  a 
surgeon  and  apothecary,  afterward  as  a physician,  and 
iiad  considerable  repute.  He  published  several  works : 
the  first  was.  “A  New  Light  of  Chirurgery,”  con- 
demning the  use  of  tents,  and  the  injection  of  acrid 
substances  into  wounds ; then  a treatise,  in  which 
most  diseases  are  ascribed  to  alkalescency,  and  acids 
strongly  recommended ; this,  in  a subsequent  publica- 
tion, he  applied  particularly  to  the  gout;  lastly,  he 
highly  extolled  the  misletoe,  as  a remedy  for  epilepsy 
and  other  nervous  diseases. 

COLCHESTER.  The  name  of  a seaport  on  the 
coast  of  Essex,  near  which  is  a mineral  water,  aqua 
Colceslrensis , which  is  of  the  bitter  purging  kind, 
similar  to  that  of  Epsom,  but  not  so  strong. 

COXCHICUM.  (From  Colchis,  a city  of  Armenia, 
where  this  plant  is  supposed  to  have  been  common.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Hexandria;  Order,  Trigynia.  Meadow- 
saffron. 

2.  The  pliarmacopceial  name  of  the  meadow-saffron. 
See  Colchicum  autumnale. 

Colchicum  AtiTUMNALE.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  meadow-saffron.  Colchicum— foliis  ■pla- 
ins lanccolatis  erectis,  of  LinnEeus.  A native  of 
England.  The  sensible  qualities  of  the  fresh  root  are 
very  various,  according  to  the  place  of  growth  and 
season  of  the  year.  In  autumn  it  is  almost  inert ; but 
in  the  beginning  of  summer,  highly  acrid : hence  some 
have  found  it  to  be  a corrosive  poison,  while  others 
have  eaten  it  in  considerable  quantity,  without  expe- 
riencing any  effect.  When  it  is  possessed  of  acrimony, 
this  is  of  the  same  nature  with  that  of  garlic,  and 
some  other  plants,  and  is  entirely  destroyed  by  drying. 
The  German  physicians  have  celebrated  its  virtues  as 
a diuretic,  in  hydrothorax  and  other  dropsies ; and,  in 
France,  it  continues  to  be  a favourite  remedy ; but  it 
is,  nevertheless,  in  this  country,  unsuccessful,  or  at 
best  a very  uncertain  remedy.  The  expressed  juice  is 
used,  in  Alsace,  to  destroy  vermin  in  the  heads  of 
children.  The  officinal  preparations  of  colchicum  are, 
syrupus  colchici  autumnalis,  Edin.  Pharm.  The  oxy- 
mel  colchici  of  the  former  London  pharmacopoeia  is 
now  omitted,  and  the  acetum  colchici  ordered  in  its 
room ; as  the  honey  may  easily  be  added  extempora- 
neously, if  it  be  thought  requisite.  The  active  ingre- 
dient of  this  plant  has  lately  been  ascertained  to  be  an 
alkali,  possessing  peculiar  properties.  See  Veratria. 

[“Colchicum  is  in  large  doses  a deleterious,  acrid 
narcotic ; in  small  ones,  a cathartic  and  diuretic  ; pos- 
sessing, likewise,  peculiar  properties  of  a sedative 
kind.  It  appears  to  have  been  known  to  the  ancients 
as  a poison,  and  during  the  last  century  it  has  been 
occasionally  employed  as  a medicine  in  dropsy,  asthma, 
and  some  other  chronic  diseases.  Recently  it  has  ex- 
cited much  notice,  especially  in  Great  Britain,  as  a 
remedy  in  gout,  and  a sedative  in  various  painful  and 
inflammatory  affections.  The  interest  excited  by  a 
secret  French  specific,  the  Eau  Medicinale,  which  was 
found  to  relieve  the  paroxysms  of  gout,  led  to  various 
imitations  and  substitutes  for  that  preparation.  Among 
these,  a various  tincture  of  colchicum  was  found  very 
nearly  to  resemble  the  foreign  compound,  both  in  its 
sensible  qualities  and  medicinal  effects.  Accordingly, 
the  Wine  of  Colchicum  became  a prevailing  medicine 
for  gout,  and  was  used  with  various  success  in  that 


disease  by  different  practitioners.  The  use  of  colchi- 
cum was  soon  extended  to  chronic  rheumatism,  and 
other  painful  affections,  and  at  length  it  was  applied, 
by  Mr.  Haden  and  others,  to  the  cure  of  acute  inflam- 
matory diseases,  and  the  treatment  of  cases  in  which 
blood-letting  is  commonly  employed.  Sufficient  evi- 
dence has  been  published  to  establish  the  fact,  that  this 
medicine,  when  possessed  of  its  full  activity,  may  be 
so  managed,  as  to  diminish  morbid  force  and  frequency 
of  the  pulse,  to  allay  pain  and  other  phenomena  of 
inflammation,  and  in  certain  cases  to  fulfil  the  object 
of  depletion  by  the  lancet.  The  Messrs.  Haden  inform 
us,  that  in  pure  inflammations,  if  it  he  given  every 
four  hours  until  it  produce  an  abundant  purgative 
effect,  the  pulse  will  become  nearly  natural,  from  being 
either  quick  and  hard,  or  slow  and  full ; that  in  many 
cases,  its  use  may  be  substituted  for  blood-letting,  at 
least  when  inflammation  does  not  exist  to  an  alarming 
degree  in  a vital  part ; and  that  the  patient  is  left  in  a 
state  favourable  to  more  rapid  recovery,  when  fever 
and  inflammation  have  been  removed  by  colchicum, 
than  when  the  same  end  has  been  effected  by  other 
means.  In  chronic  rheumatism,  it  is  said  rarely  to 
fail,  if  persevered  in  for  a time  sufficiently  long ; in 
habitual  discharges  of  blood  from  plethora,  it  has-been 
substituted  for  frequent  venesections ; and  after  acci- 
dents, it  is  said  to  have  the  power  of  averting  the 
severe  consequences  which  usually  follow  such  cases. 

In  Boston,  considerable  attention  has  been  bestowed 
upon  the  effects  of  colchicum  in  different  diseases.  The 
article  employed  has  been  the  bulb,  imported  in  a live 
state,  packed  in  sand,  and  dried  immediately  after  its 
arrival.  The  sprouting  of  the  flower-bud,  during 
transportation,  did  not  appear  to  lessen  its  activity. 
Administered  in  powder,  this  medicine  has  been  found, 
in  a variety  of  instances,  to  relieve  the  symptoms  of 
pulmonary  and  of  peritoneal  inflammation,  in  a man- 
ner not  easily  to  be  accounted  for,  except  by  the  reduc- 
tion of  the  inflammation.  Its  most  frequent  operation, 
I believe,  when  fairly  tried,  has  been  to  allay  pain,  re- 
duce the  pulse,  and  diminish  symptomatic  fever ; to 
move  the  bowels,  generally  within  twenty-four  hours, 
and  to  excite  nausea  and  great  disgust,  if  the  dose  be 
large.  It  has,  nevertheless,  sometimes  failed  to  pro- 
duce these  effects.  In  rheumatic  complaints,  its  suc- 
cess has  been  equivocal,  but,  on  the  whole,  rather 
favourable  to  its  reputation  than  otherwise. 

Colchicum  has,  of  late,  been  most  frequently  adminis- 
tered in  powder.  Five  grains  may  be  given,  three 
times  a day,  to  an  adult,  where  the  stomach  is  not 
particularly  delicate.  This  quantity  I have  found  to 
remain  on  the  stomach,  and  to  move  the  bowels,  com- 
monly on  the  second  day.  In  important  cases,  the 
dose  may  be  increased  to  eight  or  nine  grains,  if  nausea 
does  not  prevent.  In  chronic  cases,  the  dose  of  five 
or  six  grains  may  be  given,  according  to  Mr.  Hayden, 
once  a-day,  in  the  morning,  and  continued  for  weeks 
together.  This  writer  combined  with  it  small  quanti- 
ties of  sulphate  and  carbonate  of  potass,  and  gave  it  in 
a state  of  effervescence,  with  an  acid. 

It  is  prudent  to  begin  the  use  of  a new  parcel,  or 
specimen,  with  smaller  doses  than  those  above  speci- 
fied, and  gradually  to  increase  them,  since  the  root  is 
at  some  times  more  active  than  at  others.  The  varia- 
ble activity  of  the  medicine  is,  indeed,  a great  impedi- 
ment to  its  usefulness,  and  nothing  can  be  more  dis- 
cordant than  the  statements  of  writers  on  this  subject. 
Professor  Murray  has  cited  various  instances  in  which 
this  root  has  produced  distressing,  and  even  fatal 
effects;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  an  author  by  the 
name  of  Kratochville  asserts,  that  himself  and  others 
have  eaten  drachms  of  the  root,  both  in  spring  and 
fall,  with  impunity  ; and  Orfila  tells  us,  that  he  had 
repeatedly  given  several  bulbs  to  dogs,  in  the  month  of 
June,  without  causing  them  any  inconvenience.”— 
Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[Colchici  semina.  The  seeds  of  Colchicum. — 
These  have  been  proposed,  by  Dr.  Williams,  as  a sub- 
stitute for  the  bulb,  possessing  all  the  medicinal  advan- 
tages of  the  plant,  attended  with  greater  mildness  and 
uniformity  of  operation.  Several  practitioners  have 
agreed  in  their  accounts  of  the  efficacy  of  these  seeds, 
particularly  in  chronic  rheumatism.  Dr.  Williams 
uses  a wine,  made  by  infusing  two  ounces  of  the  seeds 
in  a pint  of  sherry.  From  one  to  three  drachms  are 
given,  once  or  twice  a-day,  in  aromatic  water.  He 
also  employs  a tincture,  made  with  the  same  proper- 


COL 


COL 


tions.  In  this  country,  colchicum  seeds  have  been 
used  with  some  benefit  in  rheumatic  complaints. 
They  apparently  possess  the  advantage  of  being  less 
liable  than  the  root  to  alter  by  age.  I have  found  two 
or  three  grains  of  the  powder  to  produce  vomiting  and 
purging  in  a mild  degree,  and  ten  grains  to  bring  on 
powerful  vomiting  and  purging,  with  vertigo  and  im- 
paired vision  during  twenty-four  hours.” — Big.  Mat. 
Med.  A.] 

Colchicum  illyricum.  The  plant  supposed  to 
afford  the  root  called  hermodactyl.  See  Hermodac- 
tylus. 

Colchicum  zeylanicum.  See  Zedoaria. 

COLCOTHAR.  Ghalcitis ; Colcothar  vitrioli.  The 
brown-red  oxide  of  iron,  which  remains  after  the  dis- 
tillation of  the  acid  from  sulphate  of  iron. 

Colcothar  vitrioli.  See  Colcothar. 

COLD.  1.  A privation  of  heat.  It  is  nothing  posi- 
tive, but  somewhat  of  the  negative  kind.  The  human 
body  contains  within  itself,  as  long  as  it  is  living,  a 
principle  of  warmth : if  any  other  body,  being  in  con- 
tact with  it,  abstracts  the  heat  with  unusual  rapidity, 
it  is  said  to  be  cold  ; but  if  it  carries  off  the  heat  more 
slowly  than  usual,  or  even  communicates  heat  to  our 
body,  it  is  said  to  be  hot. 

2.  A cold  is  a popular  name  also  for  a catarrh.  See 
Catarrhus. 

Cold  Affusion.  See  Affusion. 

[ “ COLDEN,  Cadwallader,  Esq.  This  truly 
worthy  and  eminent  character,  who  united  in  himself 
the  several  qualities  we  are  accustomed  to  admire  in 
the  physician,  naturalist,  and  philosopher,  was  the  son 
of  the  Rev.  Alexander  Colden,  of  Dunse,  in  Scotland, 
and  was  born  on  the  17th  day  of  February,  1688. 
After  he  had  laid  the  foundation  of  a liberal  education, 
under  the  immediate  inspection  of  his  father,  he  went 
to  the  University  of  Edinburgh,  where,  in  1705,  he 
completed  his  course  of  collegiate  studies.  He  now 
devoted  his  attention  to  medicine  and  mathematical 
science,  until  the  year  1708,  when,  being  allured  by 
the  fame  of  William  Penn’s  colony,  he  came  over  to 
this  country  about  two  years  after.  He  practised  phy- 
sic, with  no  small  share  of  reputation,  till  1715,  when 
he  returned  to  England.  While  in  London,  he  was 
introduced  to  that  eminent  philosopher,  Dr.  Edmund 
Halley,  who  formed  so  favourable  an  opinion  of  a 
paper  on  Animal  Secretion,  written  by  Dr.  Colden  in 
early  life,  that  he  read  it  before  the  Royal  Society,  the 
notice  of  which  learned  body  it  greatly  attracted.  At 
this  time  he  formed  an  acquaintance  with  some  of  the 
most  distinguished  literary  and  scientific  characters, 
with  whom  he  ever  after  maintained  a regular  corres- 
pondence. From  London  he  went  to  Scotland,  and 
married  a young  lady  of  a respectable  Scotch  family, 
by  the  name  of  Chrystie,  with  whom  he  returned  to 
America  in  1716. 

In  1718,  he  settled  in  the-  city  of  New-York;  but 
soon  after  relinquished  the  practice  of  physic,  and  be- 
came a public  character ; he  held,  in  succession,  the 
office  of  Surveyor  General  of  the  Province,  Master  in 
Chancery,  Member  of  the  Council,  and  Lieutenant  Go- 
vernor. Previous  to  his  acceptance  of  this  last  sta- 
tion, he  obtained  a patent  for  a tract  of  land,  designated 
by  the  name  of  Coldenham,  near  Newburgh,  to  which 
place  he  retired  with  his  family,  about  the  year  1755, 
and  spent  a great  part  of  his  life.  Here  he  appears  to 
have  been  occupied,  without  interruption,  in  the  pur- 
suit of  knowledge,  particularly  in  botanical  and  ma- 
thematical studies,  at  the  same  time  that  he  continued 
his  correspondence  with  learned  men  in  Europe  and 
America. 

In  1761,  he  was  appointed  Lieutenant  Governor  of 
New-York,  which  commission  he  held  until  the  time 
of  his  decease,  the  administration  of  the  government 
repeatedly  falling  on  him,  by  the  death  or  absence  of 
several  governors  in  chief.  His  political  character 
was  rendered  very  conspicuous  by  the  firmness  of  his 
conduct,  during  the  violent  commotions  which  pre- 
ceded the  Revolution.  His  administration  is  also  me- 
morable for  several  charters  of  incorpcration,  for  use- 
ful and  benevolent  purposes.  After  the  return  of  Go- 
vernor Tryon,  in  1775,  he  was  relieved  from  the  cares 
of  government.  He  then  retired  to  a seat  on  Long 
Island,  where  a recollection  of  his  former  studies,  and 
a few  select  friends,  ever  welcomed  by  a social  and 
hospitable  disposition,  cheered  him  in  his  last  days. 
He  died  in  the  89th  year  of  his  age,  on  the  memorable 


28th  of  September,  1776,  a few  hours  before  the  city  of 
New-York  was  in  flames,  retaining  his  senses  to  the 
last,  and  expiring  without  a groan. 

Dr.  Colden  began,  at  an  early  period  of  his  life,  to 
pay  great  attention  to  the  vegetable  productions  of 
America,  in  which  delightful  study  his  daughter  after- 
ward became  distinguished.  In  honour  of  Dr.  Col- 
den, Linnteus  named  a plant,  of  the  tetandrous  class, 
Coldenia.  This  plant.  Miss  Colden  had  first  de- 
scribed. He  was  attentive  to  the  physical  constitution 
of  the  country,  and  left  a long  course  of  diurnal  ob- 
servations on  the  thermometer,  barometer,  and  winds. 
He  also  wrote  a history  of  the  prevalent  diseases  of 
the  climate,  and,  if  he  was  not  the  first  to  recommend 
the  cooling  regimen  in  the  cure  of  fevers,  he  was  cer- 
tainly one  of  its  earliest  and  warmest  advocates ; and 
opposed,  with  great  earnestness,  the  prevailing  mode 
of  treatment  in  the  small  pox. 

In  the  years  1741  and ’42,  a fever,  which  occasioned 
great  mortality,  prevailed  in  the  .city  of  New-York, 
and  created  much  alarm.  He  communicated  his 
thoughts  to  the  public,  on  the  most  probable  method  of 
curing  the  calamity,  in  a small  treatise,  in  which  he 
enlarged  on  the  pernicious  effects  of  marshy  exhala- 
tions, moist  air,  damp  cellars,  filthy  stores,  and  dirty 
streets ; showed  how  much  these  nuisances  prevailed, 
in  many  parts  of  the  city,  and  pointed  out  the  remedies. 
The  corporation  of  the  city  presented  him  their  thanks, 
and  established  a plan  for  draining  and  clearing  out 
the  city,  which  was  attended  with  the  most  salutary 
effects.  He  published  a treatise  “ On  the  Cure  of 
Cancer.”  Another  essay  of  his,  “ On  the  Virtues  of 
the  Great  Water  Dock,”  introduced  him  to  an  ac- 
quaintance with  Linnaeus.  In  1753,  he  published 
some  observations  on  an  epidemical  sore  throat,  which 
appeared  in  Massachusetts,  in  1735,  and  had  spread 
over  a great  part  of  North  America.  These  observa- 
tions are  to  be  found  in  Cary’s  American  Museum. 

When  he  became  acquainted  with  Linnaeus’s  sys- 
tem of  botany,  he  applied  himself  with  new  delight  to 
thatstudy.  His  descriptions,  of  between  three  and  four 
hundred  American  plants,  were  printed  in  the  Acta 
Upsaliensia.  He  published  the  “History  of  the  Five 
Indian  Nations,”  in  2 vols.  12mo.  But  the  subject 
which  drew  Dr.  Colden,  at  one  period  of  his  life,  from 
every  other  pursuit,  was  what  he  first  published,  under 
the  title  of  “The  Cause  of  Gravitation,”  which  being 
much  enlarged,  was  republished  by  Dodsley,  in  1751, 
in  1 vol.  4to.,  entitled,  “ The  Principles  of  Action  in 
Matter,  &c.” 

Though  his  principal  attention,  after  the  year  1760, 
was  necessarily  directed  from  philosophical  to  political 
matters,  he  maintaind,  with  great  punctuality,  his 
literary  correspondence,  particularly  with  Linnaeus  of 
Upsal,  Gronovius  of  Leyden,  Drs.  Porterfield,  and 
Whytte  of  Edinburgh,  Dr.  Fothergill,  and  Mr.  Collin- 
son,  F.R.S.  of  London.  There  were  also  several 
communications  on  mathematical  and  astronomical 
subjects,  between  him  and  the  Earl  of  Macclesfield. 
With  most  of  the  eminent  men  of  our  own  country  he 
held  an  almost  uninterrupted  epistolary  correspond- 
ence. Among  them  we  may  mention  the  names  of 
Dr.  Garden,  Mr.  J.  Bartram,  Dr.  Douglass,  Dr.  John 
Bard,  Dr.  Samuel  Bard,  James  Alexander,  Esq.,  and 
Dr.  Franklin.  With  Dr.  Franklin,  in  particular,  he 
was  a constant  and  intimate  correspondent,  and  they 
regularly  communicated  to  each  other  their  philoso- 
phical and  physical  discoveries,  especially  on  electri- 
city. In  their  letters  are  to  be  observed  the  first 
dawnings  of  many  of  those  discoveries  which  Dr. 
Franklin  has  communicated  to  the  world,  and  which 
so  much  astonished  and  benefitted  mankind.  In  a 
letter  to  one  of  his  friends,  Dr.  Franklin  gives  an  ac- 
count of  the  organization  of  the  American  Philosophi- 
cal Society,  in  which  he  mentions  that  Dr.  Golden  first 
suggested  the  idea  and  plan  of  that  institution. 

The  numerous  manuscript  papers  left  by  Dr.  Colden 
at  the  time  of  his  death,  which  for  many  years  were 
supposed  to  have  been  lost,  have  been  lately  found, 
and  are  now  in  possession  of  his  grandson,  Cadwal- 
lader D.  Colden,  Esq.  They  are  chiefly  on  historical 
and  philosophical  subjects,  and  many  of  them  are  of 
the  greatest  value.  Among  these  are  Observations  on 
Smith’s  History  of  New-York,  in  a series  of  letters  to 
his  son,  Alexander  Colden : An  Introduction  to  the 
Study  of  Philosophy:  a correct  copy  of  his  Account 
of  the  Fever  which  prevailed  in  New-York  in  the 


COL 


COL 


years  1741-2.  This  production  may  be  found  in  Ho- 
sack  and  Francis’s  Register,  vol.  i.  An  Inquiry  into 
the  Principles  of  Vital  Motion  : A Translation  of  the 
Letters  of  Cicero,  with  an  Introduction  by  C.  Colden: 
Planter  Coldenkamice  in  provincia  J\'oveboracensi 
spontanea  crescentes , quas  ad  methodum  Binned  Sex- 
valent, anno  1742,  observanit  Cadwallader  Coldftn : A 
corrected  and  augmented  copy  of  his  Principles  of  Ac- 
tion in  Matter : A Treatise  on  Elecfticity,  &c.  Be- 
sides these,  there  is  a great  mass  of  correspondence  on 
medical,  philosophical,  and  literary  subjects,  with 
many  eminent  physicians  and  philosophers  in  Europe 
and  America.  These  letters  carry  his  correspondence 
back  to  the  year  1710,  and  bring  it  down,  almost  unin- 
terruptedly, till  the  time  of  his  death.  There  are,  too, 
a great  variety  of  papers  on  public  affairs,  which  must 
he  considered  as  documents  of  primary  importance,  as 
they  necessarily  contain  numerous  facts  which  throw 
light  on  the  history  of  this  State.  Dr.  Colden  was  un- 
questionably a man  of  various  and  extensive  learning, 
of  superior  talents,  of  the  most  indefatigable  industry, 
and,  indeed,  in  many  respects,  his  character  will  not 
suffer  by  a comparison  with  that  of  our  illustrious 
countryman,  Benjamin  Franklin. — Thacker's  Med. 
Biography.  A.] 

COLE,  William,  studied  at  Oxford,  and  took  his 
degree  there  in  1666.  After  practising  some  time  in 
Bristol,  he  came  to  London,  and  distinguished  himself 
by  several  publications  on  physiology  and  medicine, 
which,  however,  are  too  theoretical.  The  principal 
are  on  animal  secretion,  on  apoplexy,  on  the  cause  of 
fever,  on  insensible  perspiration,  &c.  He  published 
also  a case  of  epilepsy,  cured,  in  his  opinion,  by  the 
misletoe. 

Co'les.  (From  icav\os,  a stalk.)  Colts.  The 
penis. 

COLEWOET.  See  Brassica. 

CO'LICA.  (From  k'jAov , colon,  the  name  of  one 
of  the  intestines.)  The  colic.  The  appellation  of 
colic  is  commonly  given  to  all  pains  in  the  abdomen, 
almost  indiscriminately ; but,  from  the  different  causes 
and  circumstances  of  this  disorder,  it  is  differently  de- 
nominated. When  the  pain  is  accompanied  with  a 
vomiting  of  bile,  or  with  obstinate  costiveness,  it  is 
called  a bilious  colic;  if  flatus  causes  the  pain,  that  is, 
if  attended  with  temporary  disteption,  relieved  by  the 
discharge  of  wind,  it  takes  the  name  of  flatulent  or 
io indy  colic;  when  accompanied  with  heat  and  in- 
flammation, it  takes  the  name  of  inflammatory  colic, 
or  enteritis.  When  this  disease  arises  to  a violent 
height,  and  is.  attended  with  obstinate  costiveness,  and 
an  evacuation  of  faeces  by  the  mouth,  it  is  called  pas- 
sio  iliaca , or  iliac  passion. 

Dr.  Cullen  places  this  genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
neuroses,  and  order  spasmi ; and  defines  it  pain  of  the 
abdomen,  particularly  around  the  umbilicus,  attended 
with  vomiting  and  costiveness.  He  enumerates  seven 
species. 

J.  , Colica  spaemodica,  with  retraction  of  the  navel, 
and  spasm  of  the  muscles  of  the  belly. 

2.  Colica  pictonum.  This  is  called  from  the  place 
where  it  is  endemial,  the  Poietou,  the  Surinam,  the 
Devonshire  colic ; from  its  victims,  the  plumbers’  and 
the  painters’  colic;  from  its  symptoms,  the  dry  belly- 
ache, the  nervous  and  spasmodic  colic.  It  has  been 
attributed  to  the  poison  of  lead,  and  this  is  undoubt- 
edly the  cause,  when  it  occurs  to  glaziers,  painters, 
and  those  employed  in  lead  works  ; but.,  though  this  is 
one,  it  is  by  no  means  the  only  cause.  In  Devonshire, 
it  certainly  more  often  arises  from  the  early  cider, 
made  of  harsh,  unripe  fruit,  and  in  the  West  Indies 
from  new  rum.  The  characteristics  of  this  disease 
are,  obstinate  costiveness,  with  a vomiting  of  an  acrid 
or  porraceous  bile,  pains  about  the  region  of  the  navel, 
shooting  from  thence  to  each  side  with  excessive  vio- 
lence, strong  convulsive  spasms  in  the  intestines,  and  a 
tendency  to  a paralysis  of  the  extremities.  It  is  occa- 
sioned by  a long-continued  costiveness;  by  an  accu- 
mulation of  acrid  bile;  by  cold,  applied  either  to  the 
extremities  or  to  the  belly  itself;  by  a free  use  of  un- 
ripe fruits,  and  by  great  irregularity  in  the  mode  of 
living.  From  its  occurring  frequently  in  Devonshire, 
and  other  cider  countries,  it  has  been  supposed  to  arise 
from  an  impregnation  of  lead  received  into  the  sto- 
mach ; but  this  seems  to  be  a mistake,  as  it  is  a very 
prevalent  disease  in  the  West  Indies  likewise,  where 
nc  cider  is  made,  and  where  there  is  only  a very  small 


quantity  of  lead  in  the  mills  employed  to  extract  the 
juice  from  the  sugar-canes.  One  or  ether  of  the  causes 
just  enumerated,  may  justly  be  said  always  to  give  rise 
to  this  species  of  colic. 

The  disease  comes  on  gradually,  with  a pain  at  the 
pit  of  the  stomach,  extending  downwards  to  the  intes- 
tines, accompanied  with  eructations,  slight  sickness  at 
the  stomach,  thirst,  anxiety,  obstinate  costiveness,  and 
a quick  contracted  pulse.  After  a short  time,  the  pains 
increase  considerably  in  violence ; the  whole  region-of 
the  belly  is  highly  painful  to  the  touch  ; themuscles  of 
the  abdomen  are  contracted  into  hard  irregular  knots 
or  lumps ; the  intestines  themselves  exhibit  symptoms 
of  violent  spasm,  insomuch  that  a glyster  can  hardly 
be  injected,  from  the  powerful  contraction  of  the 
sphincter  ani ; and  there  is  constant  restlessness,  with 
a frequent  vomiting  of  an  acrid  or  porraceous  matter, 
but  more  particularly  after  taking  either  food  or  medi- 
cine. 

Upon  a -farther  increase  of  the  symptoms,  or  their 
not  being  quickly  alleviated,  the  spasms  become  more 
frequent,  as  well  as  violent ; the  costiveness  proves  in- 
vincible, and  an  inflammation  of  the  intestines  ensues, 
which  soon  destroys  the  patient  by  gangrene.  In  an 
advanced  stage  of  the  disease,  it  is  no  uncommon  oc- 
currence for  dysuria  to  take  place,  in  a very  high  de- 
gree. 

The  dry  bellyache  is  always  attended  with  some 
degree  of  danger;  but  which  is  ever  in  proportion  to 
the  violence  of  the  symptoms,  and  the  duration  of  the 
disease.  Even  when  it  does  not  prove  fatal,  it  is  too 
apt  to  terminate  in  palsy,  and  to  leave  behind  it  con- 
tractions of  the  hands  and  feet,  with  an  inability  in 
their  muscles  to  perform  their  office;  and  in  this  mise- 
rable state  of  existence,  the  patient  lingers  out  many 
wretched  years. 

Dissections  of  this  disease  usually  show  the  same 
morbid  appearances  as  in  common  colic,  only  in  a 
much  higher  degree ; namely,  irregular  contractions 
and  distentions  of  the  intestines,  often  with  marks  of 
inflammation. 

[Miners,  and  manufacturers  of  white-lead,  red-lead, 
plumbers,  pewterers,  shot-casters,  are  all  subject  to  the 
same  forms  of  disease  which  attack  painters.  In 
making  white-lead,  in  the  old  way,  the  most  danger- 
ous time  is  when  the  pots  are  uncovered,  and  during 
that  operation,  few  or  none  of  those  engaged  in  the 
corroding  house  escape  without  a severe  turn  of  the 
painters’  cholic.  In  making  red-lead,  the  persons  who 
attend  the  furnace  and  stir  the  metal,  never  escape  the 
operation  with  impunity,  being  attacked  w'ith  weak- 
ness, loss  of  appetite,  nervous  trembling,  or  cholic. 
White  and  red-lead  are  the  most  extensively  used,  and 
produce  the  mpst  mischief,  but  the  other  preparations 
of  lead  exert  a similar  injurious  effect  upon  the  human 
constitution. 

Dr.  James  Mann,  hospital-surgeon  in  the  U.  S.  army 
during  the  late  war,  has  related  the  ill  eflects  arising 
from  the  use  of  the  acetate  of  lead  as  an  astringent. 
When  the  dysentery  prevailed  in  the  northern  army 
on  the  frontiers  of  New-York  and  Canada,  it  was 
found  that  a few  grains  of  acetate  of  lead  was  effectual 
in  restraining  the  evacuations.  In  some  cases,  where 
it  was  necessary  to  continue  the  remedy,  the  disease 
was  allayed;  but  the  patients  afterward  died  with  tor- 
por or  paralysis  of  the  intestines,  or  other  fatal  ope- 
ration of  the  lead  as  a poison.  A.]  • 

3.  Colica  stercorea,  which  happens  from  obstinate 
and  long  continued  costiveness. 

4.  Colica  accidentalis,  called  also  cholera  sicca,  from 
acrid  undigested  matters. 

5.  Colica  meconialis,  in  infants,  from  a retention  of 
meconium. 

6.  Colica  callosa,  with  a sensation  of  a stricture  in 
some  part  of  the  colon,  and  frequently  of  previous 
flatulence,  gradually  passing  off ; the  habit  costive,  or 
faeces  liquid,  and  in  small  quantity. 

7.  Colica  calculosa , from  calculi  formed  in  the  in- 
testines, attended  with  a fixed  hardness  in  some  part 
of  the  abdomen.  It  is  distinguished  by  the  previous 
discharge  of  calculi. 

8.  Colica  flatulentia  may  be  added  to  these  species. 

It  is  distinguished  by  a sudden  fulness,  with  pain  and 
constipation,  relieved  by  a discharge  of  wind  from  the 
mouth,  or  anus. 

The  colic  is  distinguished*from  inflamma’ion  of  the 
intestines  by  the  pain  being  wringing,  and  not  of  a 


COL 


COL 


burning  kind;  by  the  spasmodic  contraction  of  the 
abdominal  muscles ; by  the  absence  or  trifling  degree 
of  fever;  by  the  state  of  the  pulse,  and  by  the  dimi- 
nution of  pain  upon  pressure,  which  increases  it  in 
enteritis. 

The  flatulent  and  inflammatory  colic  are  thus  dis- 
tinguished from  each  other : — In  the  flatulent  colic,  the 
pain  comes  on  by  fits,  flies  from  one  part  of  the  bowels 
to  another,  and  is  much  abated  by  a discharge  of  wind, 
either  upwards  or  downwards;  but  in  the  inflamma- 
tory colic  the  pain  remains  equable,  and  fixed  and  set- 
tled in  one  spot;  the  vomitings  are  severe,  and  fre- 
quently bilious;  the  belly  is  obstinately  bound,  and 
tiie  pulse  quick  and  feverish. 

The  colic  should  be  distinguished  from  a fit  of  the 
gravel ; stones  passing  through  the  ureters ; rheumatic 
pains  in  the  muscles  of  the  belly  ; a beginning  dysen- 
tery ; the  blind  piles ; and  from  a stone  passing  through 
the  gall-duct.  Gravel  in  the  kidneys  produces  often 
colic  pains,  not  easily  distinguishable ; but  when  stones 
pass  through  the  ureters,  the  testicle  on  that  side  is 
often  retracted,  the  leg  is  benumbed,  a pain  shoots 
down  the  inside  of  the  thigh;  symptoms  occasioned 
by  the  stone  passing  through  the  ureter  over  the  sper- 
matic chord,  or  the  sacro-sciatic  nerve.  Rheumatic 
pains  in  the  muscles  of  the  belly  rarely  affect  so  accu- 
rately the  umbilical  region,  but  dart  in  various  direc- 
tions, to  the  chest,  or  to  the  pelvis,  and  are  attended 
with  soreness,  not  confined  to  the  abdomen.  A be- 
ginning dysentery  differs  little  from  colic.  The  pain 
from  the  blind  piles  is  confined  to  the  rectum:  and  that 
from  a stone  in  the  gall-duct,  is  felt  in  the  pit  of  the 
stomach,  occasionally  shooting  through  the  body  to 
the  back. 

The  treatment  of  this  disease  must  vary  according 
to  its  form : but  the  leading  indications  are,  1.  To  ob- 
viate inflammation.  2.  To  relax  the  spasm,  and  re- 
lieve the  pain  attending.  3.  To  remove  local  irrita- 
tion, especially  by  evacuating  the  alvine  contents.  4. 
By  various  prophylactic  measures  to  guard  against  a 
relapse. 

1.  The  chief  danger  arising  from  inflammation  su- 
pervening, it  may  be  prudent  to  anticipate  this,  where 
the  habit  and  strength  will  allow,  by  taking  away  an 
adequate  quantity  of  blood  from  the  arm,  or  more 
generally  by  leeches  to  the  abdomen,  but  especially 
where  any  sign  of  inflammation  appears,  this  plan  be- 
comes necessary,  followed  by  a hot  bath,  or  fomenta- 
tions, a blister  to  the  abdomen,  &c.  as  detailed  under 
enteritis. 

2.  The  means  already  noticed  may  serve  to  relax 
spasm  also,  though  not  requisite  in  slight  cases,  besides 
the  various  antispasmodic  remedies,  as  afflier,  assafoe- 
tida,&c.,  likewise  aromatics,  or  spirituous  liquors,  will 
often  by  their  stimulus  on  the  stomach  afford  relief  in 
flatulent  colic,  though  their  use  is  sometimes  hurtful ; 
but  by  far  the  most  powerful  remedy  is  opium  in  ade- 
quate quantity,  which  is  best  regulated  in  severe  at- 
tacks, by  giving  divided  doses  at  short  intervals  till 
ease  is  obtained. 

3.  Local  irritation  may  sometimes  be  relieved  by 
chemical  remedies,  as  antacids,  particularly  magnesia. 
&c. ; but  for  the  most  part  the  evacuation  of  the  in- 
testines should  be  attempted,  when  the  pain  is  relieved. 
To  prepare  for  tiiis,  calomel  may  be  given  in  conjunc- 
tion with  the  opium,  and  when  the  patient  has  been 
some  time  at  ease,  this  may  be  followed  up  by  castor 
oil,  sulphate  of  magnesia,  or  other  mild  laxative,  re- 
peated till  the  desired  effect  he  produced ; or  where 
these  do  not  presently  operate,  some  more  active  ca- 
thartics, as  the  compound  extract  of  colocynth,  jalap, 
See.  should  be  tried.  If  the  stomach  he  irritable,  the 
effervescing  saline  draught  may  enable  it  to  retain 
them  ; and  clysters  will  often  assist  the  articles  taken 
by  the  mouth,  particularly  where  there  are  indurated 
farces.  In  very  obstinate  cases,  an  injection  of  tobacco 
smoke  has  often  succeeded  in  procuring  evacuations: 
also  putting  the  feet  for  some  time  in  cold  water,  or 
pouring  this  on  the  abdomen  and  lower  extremities. 
Sometimes  it  has  been  necessary  to,  remove  fcecal  ac- 
cumulations mechanically  per  anum. 

4.  The  great  liability  of  this  complaint  to  return 
renders  it  necessary  for  some  time  after  carefully  to 
regulate  the  diet,  to  attend  to  the  state  of  the  bowels, 
as  well  a3  of  the  liver,  to  avoid  the  several  causes, 
especially  cold,  maintaining  the  functions  of  the  skin 
by  suitable  clothing,  exercise,  &c.  In  the  colica  picto- 


num,  stimulant  aperients,  as  the  peruvian  balsam, 
mustard,  &c.  steadily  persisted  in,  will  mostly  effect  a 
•complete  cure;  and  mercury  has  been  by  some  highly 
extolled ; by  others,  astringents,  especially  alum,  though 
certainly  somewhat  objectionable,  as  liable  to  confine 
the  bowels. 

CoLifcA  accidentalis.  Colic  from  crudities  in  the 
bowels. 

Colica  arteria  sinistra.  The  lower  mesenteric 
artery. 

Colica  arteria  superior.  The  upper  mesenteric 
artery.  Jl 

Colica  biliosa.  Colic  from  excess  of  bile. 

Colioa  calculosa.  Colic  from  stony  matters  in 
the  intestines. 

Colica  callosa.  Colic  from  hardened  and  obsti- 
nate strictures. 

Colica  damnoniorum.  Colic  peculiar  to  Devon- 
shire. See  Colica. 

Colica  febricosa.  Colic  with  fever. 

Colica  flatulenta.  Colic  from  wind. 

Colica  gravidarum.  Colic  in  pregnant  women. 

Colica  hysterica.  Hysteric  colic. 

Colica  lactantium.  Colic  peculiar  to  nurses. 

Colica  lapsonica.  Colic  peculiar  to  Laplanders 

Colica  meconialis.  Colic  from  meconium  in  in- 
fants. 

Colica  mesenterica.  Colic  from  diseased  me- 
sentery. 

Colica  nervosa.  The  nervous  colie. 

Colica  pancreatica.  Colic  from  diseased  pan- 
creas. 

Colica  phlogistica.  Colic  with  inflammation. 

Colica  fictonum.  See  Colica. 

Colica  pituitosa.  The  spasmodic  colic. 

Colica  plethorica.  Tiie  inflammatory  colic. 

Colica  plumbariorum.  Tiie  colic  of  lead-workers. 

Colica  pulsatilis.  The  inflammatory  colic. 

Colica  saturnina.  The  Devonshire  colic.  See 
Colica. 

Colica  scirrhosa.  The  colic  from  scirrhous  tu- 
mours. 

Colica  spasmodica.  The  spasmodic  colic. 

Colica  stercorea.  Colic  from  retained  faeces. 

Colica  vena.  A branch  of  the  upper  mesenteric 
vein. 

Colica  vena  recta.  The  vein  of  the  colon. 

Colica  verminosa.  The  colic  from  worms. 

CO'LICE.  The  cqjic. 

COLIFO'RMIS.  (From  cola , a strainer,  and  forma , 
a likeness ; so  called  from  its  having  many  perfora 
tions,  like  a strainer.)  Calif orme  os.  A name  for 
merly  given  to  the  ethmoid  bone. 

Cot-i'PHiUM.  (From  kwAov,  a limb,  and  icpi, 
strongly.)  A kind  of  bread  given  to  wrestlers.  It  was 
made  of  flour  and  bran  together,  and  was  thought  to 
make  men  athletic. 

Co'i.is.  See  Coles. 

COLLA'PSUS.  (From  collabor , to  shrink  down.) 
A wasting  or  shrinking  of  the  body,  or  strength. 

Coilate'nna.  A specific  vulnerary. 

Collatera'les.  So  Spigelius  calls  the  erectorea 
penis,  from  their  collateral  order  of  fibres. 

Colle'tica.  (From  icoWa,  glue.)  Conglutinating 
medicines. 

Colli'cije.  (From  colligo , to  collect.)  The  union 
of  the  ducts,  which  convey  the  humours  of  the  eyes 
from  the  puncta  lachrymaha  to  the  cavity  of  the  nose. 

COLLI'CULUM.  (Diminutive  of  collis , a hill.) 
1.  A small  eminence. 

2.  The  nympha,  or  prominency,  without  the  vagina 
of  women. 

COLLIGA'MEN.  (From  colligo , to  tie  together.) 
A ligament. 

COLLINS,  Samuel,  was  bom  in  the  early  part  of 
the  17th  century.  After  studying  at  Cambridge  and 
Oxford,  he  went  to  the  Russian  court  as  physician,  and 
continued  there  nine  years.  On  his  return,  he  was 
made  Fellow  of  the  College  of  Physicians  in  London, 
lie  afterward  published  a History  of  the  Court  of  Rus- 
sia, and,  in  1685,  a system  of  anatomy,  treating  of  the 
body  of  man,  animals,  and  plants,  with  numerous 
plates.  The  comparative  anatomy,  to  which  Dr.  Ty- 
son greatly  contributed,  was  much  admired,  though 
now  superseded  by  other  publications. 

COLLICiUAME'NTUM.  (From  colliqpeo,  to  melt.) 
A term  first  made  use  of  by  Dr.  Harvey,  in  bis  applj,- 

247 


COL 


COL 

cation  of  it  to  the  first  rudiments  of  an  embryo,  in  ge- 
neration. 

COLLI' Q.UATIVE.  ( Colliquativus , from  colli - 

«ueo,  to  melt.)  Any  excessive  evacuation  is  so  called 
;hich  melts  down,  as  it  were,  the  strength  of  the 
body:  hence  colliquative  perspiration,  colliquative 
diarrhoea,  &c. 

COLLI'SIO.  (From  collido , to  beat  together.)  A 
contusion. 

Co'llix.  (From  ko\ov,  food.)  A troch,  or  lozenge. 
COLLOBO'MA.  (From  xoAAaw,  to  glue  together.) 
Colobroma.  1.  The  growing  together  of  the  eyelids. 
2.  The  want  of  any  member  of  the  body. 
COLLO'DES.  (From  xoAXa,  glue.)  Glutinous. 
CO'LLUM.  (From  xwAov,  a member,  as  being  one 
of  the  chief;  or  diminutive  of  columna , as  being  the 
pillar  and  support  of  the  head.)  The  Neck.  See 
Neck. 

COLLUTION.  Collutio.  The  washing  of  the 
mouth,  or  any  other  part. 

COLLUTO'RIUM.  (From  colluo , to  wash.)  A 
gargarism,  or  wash  for  the  mouth. 

COLLU'VIES.  (From  colluo , to  cleanse.)  Filth ; 
Excrement.  The  discharge  from  an  old  ulcer. 

CO'LLYRIS.  (KoAAvpif.  A little  round  cake ; so 
called  from  its  likeness  to  a cake.)  A bump,  or  knob, 
which  rises  after  a blow. 

COLLY'RIUM.  (From  ko> At>o>,  to  check,  and  povs, 
a defluxion;  because  it  stops  the  defluxion.)  A me- 
dicine was  formerly  so  called  which  was  applied  to 
check  any  discharge.  The  term  is  now  only  given  to 
fluid  applications  for  the  eyes,  or  eye-waters. 

[Collyria,  the  plural  of  Collyrium.  “ The  Colly- 
ria  of  the  Pharmacopoeia  are  metallic  lotions,  pre- 
pared of  such  strength  as  to  be  applicable  to  the  eyes 
in  many  cases  of  disease ; also  occasionally  to  mucous 
membranes  of  other  parts,  and  to  inflamed  or  exco- 
riated surfaces. 

Collyrium  plumbi  acetatis.  Collyrium  of  ace- 
tate of  lead.  This  is  of  use  as  a sedative  and  astrin- 
gent lotion  in  some  forms  of  chronic  ophthalmia.  It 
is  also  useful  as  a discutientin  erysipelatous  and  other 
superficial  inflammations.  It  is  sometimes  employed 
as  an  injection  in  gonorrhoea ; but  when  this  practice 
is  adopted,  a weaker  solution  is  preferable. 

Collyrium  plumbi  acetatis  et  opii.  Collyrium 
of  opium  and  acetate  of  lead.  This  resembles  the  pre- 
ceding, but  agrees  better  with  irritable  cases  of  chro- 
nic opthalmia.  % 

Collyrium  zinci  acetatis . Collyrium  of  acetate 
of  zinc.  A double  decomposition  takes  place  during  the 
preparation  of  this  article;  sulphate  of  lead  is  depo- 
sited, and  acetate  of  zinc  remains  dissolved.  It  is  a 
valuable  astringent  collyrium. 

Collyrium  zinci  sulphatis.  Collyrium  of  sulphate 
of  zinc.  This  is  one  of  the  best  astringent  lotions  for 
cases  of  ophthalmia,  which  requires  remedies  of  that 
class.  I have  observed  it  to  agree  particularly  well 
with  the  weak  eyes  of  nursing  women. — Big.  Mat. 
Med.  A.] 

Coloboma.  See  Colloboma. 

Colobo'mata.  In  Celsus  this  word  is  expressed  by 
curta.  Both  the  words  signify  a deficiency  in  some 
part  of  the  body,  particularly  the  ears,  lips,  or  alae  of 
the  nostrils. 

Coloca'sia.  (From  /coAov,  food,  and  to 

adorn;  so  called  from  its  use  as  a food,  and  the  cus- 
tom of  wearing  its  flowers  in  wreaths.)  The  faba 
iEgyptia.  See  Nymphcea  nelumbo. 

COLOCY'NTHIS.  (From  kioXov,  the  colon,  and 
Kivtu >,  to  move ; because  of  its  great  purging  powers.) 
Coloquinteda.  See  Cucumis  colocynthis. 

COLO  MBO.  See  Calumba. 

CO  LON.  {Colon,  i.  neut. ; KwAov,  quasi  koiXov  ; 
from  ycoiAoj,  hollow : so  called  from  its  capacity,  or 
from  its  generally  being  found  empty,  and  full  of  wind 
in  dissection.)  The  greater  portion  of  the  large  intes- 
tine is  so  called.  It  proceeds  towards  the  liver,  by  the 
name  of  the  ascending  portion  of  the  colon;  and 
having  reached  the  liver,  forms  a transverse  arch 
across  to  the  other  side.  The  colon  then  descends, 
forming  what  is  termed  its  sigmoid  flexure , into  the 
pelvis,  where  the  gut  is  called  rectum.  See  Intestine. 

COLOPHO'NIA.  (KoAo^wvta,  the  city  from  whence 
it  was  first  brought.)  Colophony.  1.  The  black  resin 
which  remains  in  the  retort,  after  distilling  the  com- 
mon resin  with  a strong  fire. 

243 


2.  Paracelsus  seems  to  mean  by  it  what  is  now  pre 
scribed  by  the  name  of  tcrebinthina  coda. 

3.  The  ancients,  and  particularly  Galen,  seemed  to 
understand  by  it  a soft  kind  of  mastich,  from  Chio, 
probably  the  same  as  our  Chio  turpentine. 

COLOPHONITE.  Resinous  garnet  of  Haiiy  and 
Jameson.  A mineral  of  a blackish  or  yellowish  brown, 
or  orange-red  colour,  and  a resino-adainantine  lustre, 
found  in  magnetic  ironstone,  in  Norway  and  in 
Ceylon. 

COLOQUINTIDA.  See  Cucumis  colocynthis. 

COLORATUS.  Coloured  : applied  to  leaves,  caly- 
ces, seeds,  &c.  to  express  any  colour  besides  green,  as 
in  Arum  bicolor  ; or  to  any  part  thereof  when  of  ano- 
ther colour  than  green,  as  in  Amaranthus  tricolor; 
and  to  a perianthium , when  not  of  a green  colour,  as 
that  of  the  Gomphrena  globosa : and  the  seeds  of  Chce- 
rophyllum  aureum. 

COLO  STRUM.  (From  koXov,  food,  or  /coAAwpat, 
to  agglutinate  ; so  called,  either  because  it  is  the  first 
food  of  the  young,  or  from  its  being  at  that  time  pecu- 
liarly glutinous.)  1.  The  first  milk  in  the  breasts 
after  delivery. 

2.  'An  emulsion  made  by  the  solution  ot  turpentine 
with  the  yelk  of  an  egg. 

COLOT,  Germain,  a French  surgeon  of  the  15th 
century,  appears  to  have  been  the  first  of  the  profes- 
sion who  practised  lithotomy,  that  operation  having 
been  previously  in  the  hands  of  itinerant  practitioners. 
He  acquired  great  celebrity  by  his  skill,  and  was  much 
in  favour  with  Lewis  IX.,  who  granted  him  a pension. 
Several  of  his  descendants,  in  succession,  enjoyed 
great  reputation  as  lithotomists. 

COLOT,  Francis,  the  last  of  them,  left  a treatise, 
published  in  1727,  describing  the  method  of  operating 
with  the  greater  apparatus,  the  invention  whereof  he 
ascribes  to  John  de  Romanis,  an  Italian  physician, 
about  two  centuries  before.  But  this  has  long  been 
superseded  by  the  less  apparatus,  which  Mr.  Sharp 
attributes  to  another  French  surgeon,  Mons.  Foubert. 

Colotoi'des.  (From  KcoXiortjs,  a lizard,  and  ados, 
likeness.)  Variegated  like  the  skin  of  a lizard.  Hip- 
pocrates applied  it  to  the  excrements. 

Coloured  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

COLPOCE'LE.  (From  koAtoj,  the  vagina,  and 
KrjXr;,  a tumour.)  A hernia  forced  into  the  vagina. 
See  Hernia  vaginalis. 

COLPOPTO'SIS.  (From  koXttos,  the  vagina,  and 
rotirro),  to  fall  down.)  A bearing  down  of  the  vagina. 
See  Hernia  vaginalis. 

COLT’S-FOOT.  See  Tussilago. 

CO'LUBER.  {Quod  colit  umbram,  because  it  de- 
lighteth  in  the  shade.)  A genus  of  animals  in  the 
Linnsean  arrangement,  of  which  there  are  many 
species. 

Coluber  berus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  vi- 
per, which  possesses  the  power  of  forming  a poisonous 
fluid  in  little  bags  hear  its  teeth.  The  flesh  is  perfectly 
innocent,  and  often  taken  by  the  common  people 
against  the  king’s  evil,  and  a variety  of  disorders  of 
the  skin.  Experience  evinces  it  to  be  an  inefficacious 
substance. 

Colubri'na  virginiana.  See  Aristolochia  ser- 
pent aria. 

Colubrinum  lignum.  {Colubrinus ; from  coluber ; 
so  called  from  the  snake-like  contortions  of  its  roots.) 
This  species  of  snake-wood  is  brought  from  America. 
It  is  solid,  ponderous,  acrid,  extremely  bitter,  and  in- 
odorous ; its  bark  is  of  a ferruginous  colour,  covered 
with  cineritious  spots. 

COLU'MBA.  See  Calumba. 

COLUMBIC  ACID.  Acidum  Columbicum.  “ The 
experiments  of  Hatchett  have  proved,  that  a peculiar 
mineral  from  Massachusetts,  deposited  in  the  British 
Museum,  consisted  of  one  part  of  oxide  of  iron,  and 
somewhat  more  than  three  parts  of  a white-coloured 
substance,  possessing  the  properties  of  an  acid.  Its 
basis  was  metallic.  Hence  he  named  this  Colum- 
biurn,  and  the  acid  the  Columbic.  Dr.  Wollaston,  by 
very  exact  analytical  comparisons,  proved,  that  the 
acid  of  Hatchett  was  the  oxide  of  the  metal  lately  dis- 
covered in  Sweden  by  Ekeberg,  in  the  mineral  yttro- 
tantalite,  and  thence  called  tantalum.  Dr.  Wollas- 
ton’s method  of  separating  the  acid  from  the  mineral  is 
peculiarly  elegant.  One  part  of  tantalite,  five  parts  of 
carbonate  of  potassa,  and  two  parts  of  borax,  are 
fused  together  in  a platina  crucible.  The  mass,  after 


COM 


COM 


being  softened  in  water,  is  acted  on  by  muriatic  acid. 
The  iron  and  manganese  dissolve,  while  the  columbic 
acid  remains  at  the  bottom.  It  is  in  the  form  of  a 
white  powder,  which  is  insoluble  in  nitric  and  sul- 
phuric acids,  but  partially  in  muriatic.  It  forms  with 
barytes  an  insoluble  salt,  of  which  the  proportions, 
according  to  Berzelius,  are  24.4  acid,  and  9.75  barytes. 
By  oxidizing  a portion  of  the  revived  tantalum  or  co- 
lumbium,  Berzelius  concludes  the  composition  of  the 
acid  to  be  109  metal,  and  5.485  oxygen.” 
COLUMBINE.  See  Jlquilcgia. 

COLU'MBIUM.  Hatchett  describes  the  ore,  from 
which  this  metal  is  obtained,  as  being  of  a dark  brown- 
ish gray  externally,  and  more  inclining  to  an  iron-gray 
internally ; the  longitudinal  fracture  he  found  lamel- 
lated,  and  the  cross  fracture  had  a fine  grain.  Its  lus- 
tre was  vitreous,  slightly  inclining,  in  some  parts,  to 
metallic ; moderately  hard,  and  very  brittle.  The  co- 
lour of  the  streak,  or  powder,  was  dark  chocolate- 
brown.  “ If  the  oxide  of  columbrum,  described  under 
Columbic  acid,  be  mixed  with  charcoal,  and  exposed 
to  a violent  heat  in  a charcoal  crucible,  the  metal  co- 
lumbium  will  be  obtained.  It  has  a dark  gray  colour ; 
and  when  newly  abraded,  the  lustre  nearly  of  iron. 
Its  sp.  gr.,  when  in  agglutinated  particles,  was  found 
by  Dr.  Wollaston  to  be  5.61.  These  metallic  grains 
scratch  glass,  and  are  easily  pulverized.  Neither  ni- 
tric, muriatic,  nor  nitro-muriatic  acid,  produces  any 
change  in  this  metal,  though  digested  on  it  for  several 
days.  It  has  been  alloyed  with  iron  and  tungsten.” 
[This  metal,  which  was  said  to  have  been  first  dis- 
covered in  a specimen  found  in  Massachusetts,  it  ap- 
pears (Med.  Repos,  vol.  viii.  p.  437,)  was  taken  from  a i 
spring  of  water  in  the  town  of  New-London,  in  Con- 
necticut, and  near  the  house  in  which  Governor  Win- 
throp  used  to  live,  about  three  miles  distant  from  the 
margin  of  the  salt  water  at  the  head  of  the  harbour. 

“ Within  a short  time  after  the  discovery  of  colum- 
bium  by  Mr.  Hackett  in  1801,  a metallic  substance  was 
also  discovered  in  Sweden,  by  Mr.  Ekeberg,  differing 
from  every  metal  then  known  to  him ; and  according- 
ly he  described  the  properties  by  which  it  might  be 
distinguished  from  those  which  it  most  nearly  resem- 
bled. But  although  the  Swedish  metal  has  retained 
the  name  of  Tantalum , given  to  it  by  Mr.  Ekeberg,  a 
reasonable  degree  of  doubt  has  been  entertained  by 
chemists,  whether  these  two  authors  had  not,  in  fact, 
described  the  same  substances ; and  it  has  been  regret- 
ted that  the  discoverers  themselves,  who  would  have 
been  most  able  to  remove  the  uncertainty,  had  not 
had  opportunities  of  comparing  their  respective  mine- 
rals, or  the  products  of  their  analyses.” — Min.  Jour. 

The  doubt,  however,  has  been  removed,  as  Dr.  Wol- 
laston had  obtained  portions  of  both  metals,  and  upon 
examination  and  analysis  has  determined,  that  Co- 
lumbium  and  Tantalum  are  one  and  the  same  me- 
tal. A.] 

Columbo'be.  See  Calumba. 

COLUME  LLA.  (Diminutive  of  columna , a co- 
lumn^ 1.  A column  or  little  pillar. 

2.  The  central  column,  or  filament,  which  unites 
the  partitions  of  the  capsule  of  plants.  The  seeds  are 
usually  attached  to  it.  See  also  Uvula  and  Clitoris. 

Columella' ris.  (From  columella , a little  column.) 

A name  of  the  dens  caninus. 

COLU'MNA.  A column,  or  pillar.  Many  parts 
of  the  body,  which  in  their  shape  or  Office  resemble 
columns,  are  so  named ; as  columns  carnese,  &c. 
Columna  carnea.  See  Heart. 

Columna  nasi.  The  lowest  and  fleshy  part  of  the 
nose,  which  forms  a part  of  the  septum. 

Columna  oris.  The  uvula. 

COLUMNIFERAE.  The  name  of  an  order  of 
plants  in  Linnasus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method, 
consisting  of  plants,  the  stamina  and  pistil  of  which 
have  the  appearance  of  a pillar  in  the  centre  of  the 
flower. 

COLUMNULA.  A little  column.  The  name  given 
by  botanists  to  the  filament  which  passes  through  the 
middle  of  the  capsule  of  frondose  mosses,  to  which 
the  seeds  are  connected  ; also  called  Sphrongidium. 

Colu'rium.  (Ilapa  to  KoWav  tov  pouv  : because  it 
prevents  a defluxion.)  A tent  to  thrust  into  a sore,  to 
prevent  a defluxion  of  humours. 

CO'MA.  (From  kcj,  or  kcw,  to  lie  down.) 

In  pathology,  a propensity  to  sleep.  This  word 
anciently  meant  any  total  suppression  of  the  powers 


of  sense;  but  now  it  means  a lethargic  drowsi- 
ness. 

In  botany,  1.  A fasciculus  of  leaves  on  the  top  of 
a stem  or  stipe.  It  is  said  to  be, 

a.  Foliose , when  formed  of  leaves;  as  in  Bromelia 
ananas. 

b.  Frondose , when  proceeding  from  the  frofld  at  the 
apex  of  the  stipe  ; as  in  Palms. 

c.  Bracteal , formed  of  floral  leaves ; as  in  Laven- 
dula<stmchas. 

2.  Goertner  applies  this  term  to  the  feathery  crown 
of  seeds  furnished  with  a capsule. 

Coma  somnolentum.  Is  when  the  patient  conti- 
nues in  a profound  sleep  ; and,  when  awakened,  im- 
mediately relapses,  without  being  able  to  keep  open 
his  eyes. 

Coma  vigil.  A disease  where  the  patients  are  con- 
tinually inclined  to  sleep,  but  cannot. 

CO'MATA.  (Comata,  the  plural  of  coma.)  An 
order  of  the  class  Neuroses  of  Cullen’s  Nosology,  em- 
bracing diseases  that  are  characterized  by  a diminu- 
tion of  the  powers  of  voluntary  motion,  with  sleep  or 
the  senses  impaired. 

COMATOSE.  Having  a strong  propensity  to  sleep. 
COMBINATION.  The  intimate  union  of  the  par- 
ticles of  different  substances  by  chemical  attraction, 
so  as  to  form  a compound  possessed  of  new  and  pecu- 
liar properties. 

COMBUSTIBLE.  Having  the  property  of  burning. 
See  Combustion. 

COMBU'STIO.  (From  comburo,  to  burn.)  A burn, 
or  scald.  See  Burn. 

COMBUSTION.  ( Combustio ; from  comburo , to 
burn.)  Burning.  Among  the  various  operations  of 
chemistry,  none  acts  a more  conspicuous  part  than 
combustion;  and  in  proportion  to  its  utility  in  the 
science,  the  necessity  of  thoroughly  investigating  its 
nature  and  mode  of  action,  becomes  more  obvious  to 
the  philosophical  chemist. 

Lavoisier' s Theory  of  Combustion.  . 
Lavoisier’s  theory  of  combustion  is  founded  upon 
the  absorption  of  oxygen  by  a combustible  body. 

Taking  this  for  granted,  it  follows  that  combustion 
is  only  the  play  of  affinity  between  oxygen,  the  matter 
of  heat,  and  a combustible  body. 

When  an  incombustible  body  (a  brick  for  instance) 
is  heated,  it  undergoes  no  change,  except  an  augmen- 
tation of  bulk  and  temperature ; and  when  left  to 
itself,  it  soon  regains  its  former  state.  But  when  a 
combustible  body  is  heated  to  a certain  degree,  in  the 
open  air,  it  becomes  on  a sudden  intensely  hot,  and  at 
last  emits  a copious  stream  of  caloric  and  light  to  the 
surrounding  bodies.  During  this  emission,  the  burn- 
ing body  gradually  wastes  away.  It  either  disappears 
entirely,  or  its  physical  properties  become  totally 
altered.  The  principal  change  it  suffers,  is  that  of 
being  no  longer  capable  of  combustion.  If  either  of 
these  phenomena,  namely,  the  emission  of  heat  and 
light,  and  the  waste  of  substance,  be  wanting,  we  do 
not  say  that  a body  is  undergoing  combustion,  or  that 
it  is  burning.  It  follows,  therefore,  that  every  theory 
of  combustion  ought  to  explain  the  following  facts : 

1.  Why  a burning  body  is  consumed,  and  its  indivi- 
dualily  destroyed. 

2.  Why,  during  the  progress  of  this  alteration,  heat 
and  light  are  emitted. 

For  the  elucidation  of  these  objects,  Lavoisier’s 
theory  has  laid  down  the  following  laws  : 

1.  Combustion  cannot  take  place  without  the  pre- 
sence of  oxygen,  and  is  more  rapid  in  proportion  to 
the  quantity  of  this  agent,  in  contact  with  the  inflamed 
body. 

2.  In  every  act  of  combustion,  the  oxygen  present  is 
consumed. 

3.  The  weight  of  the  products  of  every  body  after 
combustion,  corresponds  with  the  weight  of  the  body 
before  combustion,  plus  that  of  the  oxygen  con- 
sumed. 

4.  The  oxygen  absorbed  by  the  combustible  body 
maybe  recovered  from  the  compound  formed,  and  the 
weight  regained  will  be  equal  to  the  weight  which 
disappeared  during  the  combustion. 

5.  In  every  instance  of  combustion,  light  and  heat, 
or  fire,  are  liberated. 

6.  In  a limited  quantity  of  air,  only  a certain  quan- 
tity of  the  combustible  body  can  be  burnt. 

7.  The  air,  wherein  a body  has  been  burnt,  is  ren 

249 


COM 


COM 


dered  unfit  for  continuing  combustion,  or  supporting 
animal  life. 

Though  every  case  of  combustion  requires  that  light 
and  heat  should  be  evolved,  yet  this  process  proceeds 
very  differently  in  different  circumstances;  hence  the 
terms  ignition;  or  glowing  heat;  inflammation,  or  ac- 
cension  ; and  detonation , or  explosion. 

Ignition  takes  place  when  the  combustible  body  is 
not  in  an  aeriform  state. 

Charcoal,  pyrophorous,  &c.  furnish  instances  of 
this  kind. 

It  seems  as  if  the  phenomenon  of  glowing  was  pecu- 
liar to  those  bodies  which  require  a considerable 
quantity  of  caloric,  to  become  converted  into  the 
gaseous  state. 

The  disengagement  of  caloric  and  light  is  rendered 
more  evident  to  the  senses  in  the  act  of 

Inflammation , or  accension.  Here  the  combustible 
substances  are  more  easily  converted  into  an  elastic  or 
aeriform  state.  Flame,  therefore,  consists  of  the  in- 
flammable matter  iti  the  act  of  combustion  in  the 
gaseous  state.  When  all  circumstances  are  favourable 
to  the  complete  combustion  of  the  products,  the  flame 
is  perfect ; if  this  is  not  the  case,  part  of  the  com- 
bustible body,  capable  of  being  converted  into  the 
gaseous  state,  passes  through  the  luminous  flame  un- 
burnt,  and  exhibits  the  appearance  of  smoke.  Soot, 
therefore,  always  indicates  an  imperfect  combustion. 
Hence  a common  lamp  smokes,  an  Argand’s  lamp 
yields  no  smoke. 

This  degree  of  combustion  is  very  accurately  ex- 
emplified in  the 

Flame  of  candles. — When  a candle  is  first  lighted, 
which  must  be  done  by  the  application  of  actual  flame,  I 
a degree  of  heat  is  given  to  the  wick,  sufficient  to  de-  j 
stroy  the  affinity  of  its  constituent  parts  ; part  of  the 
tallow  is  instantly  melted,  yclatilized,  and  burnt.  As 
this  is  destroyed  by  combustion,  another  portion  melts, 
rises,  and  supplies  its  place,  and  undergoes  a like 
change.  In  this  way  combustion  is  maintained.  The 
tallow  is  liquefied  as  it  comes  into  the  vicinity  of  the 
flame,  and  is,  by  the  capillary  attraction  of  the  wick, 
drawn  up  to  supply  the  place  of  what  is  burnt;  the 
unmelted  tallow,  by  this  means,  forms  a kind  of  cup. 

The  congeries  of  capilary  tubes  which  form  the 
wick  is  black,  because  the  charcoal  of  the  cotton  be- 
comes predominant,  the  circumambient  air  is  de- 
fended by  the  flame  from  oxidising  it;  it  therefore  re- 
mains, for  a considerable  time,  in  its  natural  state; 
but  when  the  wick,  by  the  continual  consumption  of 
tallow,  becomes  too  long  to  support  itself  in  a perpen- 
dicular position,  its  upper  extremity  projects  nearly  out 
of  the  cone  of  the  flame,  and  there  forms  a support 
for  an  accumulation  of  soot,  which  is  produced  by  the 
imperfect  combustion.  A candle,  in  this  situation, 
affords  scarcely  one-tenth  of  the  light  it  can  otherwise 
give,  and  tallow  candles,  on  this  account,  require  con- 
tinual snuffing. 

But  if  the  candle  be  made  of  wax,  the  wick  does 
not  long  occupy  its  place  in  the  middle  of  the  flame  ; 
its  thinness  makes  it  bend  on  one  side,  when  its  length 
is  too  great  for  its  vertical  position  ; its  extremity 
comes  then  into  contact  with  the  air,  and  is  completely 
burnt,  or  decomposed,  except  so  much  ©f  it  as  is  de- 
fended by  the  continual  afflux  of  the  melted  wax. 
This  small  wick,  therefore,  performs  the  office  of 
snuffing  itself.  The  difficult  fusibility  of  wax  enables 
us  to  use  a thinner  wick  for  it  than  can  be  used  for 
tallow,  which  is  more  fusible.  But  wax  being  a sub- 
stance which  contains  much  more  oxygen  than  tallow 
or  oil,  the  light  it  affords  is  not  so  luminous. 

Detonation  is  an  instantaneous  combustion,  accom- 
panied with  a loud  report ; it  takes  place  in  general 
when  the  compounds  resulting  from  the  union  of  two 
or  more  bodies,  occupy  much  more  or  less  space  than 
the  substances  did  before  their  union  ; a great  impulse 
is  therefore  given  to  the  surrounding  air,  or  else  a 
vacuum  is  formed,  and  the  air  rushing  in  from  all 
sides  to  fill  it  up  is  the  cause  of  the  report. 

A mixture  of  oxygen  and  hydrogen  gases  detonates 
very  loud.  Gunpowder,  fulminating  gold,  silver,  and 
mercury  ; oxygenated  muriate  of  potassa;  and  various 
other  explosive  compounds,  are  capable  of  producing 
very  loud  detonations. 

With  respect  to  the  disengagement  of  light  and 
caloric. 

By  the  older  chemists,  it  was  universally  supposed 
250 


that  the  light  and  heat  emitted  during  combustion, 
proceeded  from  the  inflammable  body ; and  this  opi- 
nion would  indeed  appear  unquestionable,  while  the 
composition  of  the  atmosphere  was  imperfectly  known. 
The  burning  body  appeared  luminous  and  felt  hot, 
and  no  other  agent  was  supposed  to  be  concerned ; 
the  conclusion  that  the  light  and  heat  were  evolved 
from  the  burning  substance,  was,  therefore,  unavoid- 
able. But  when  the  nature  of  the  astmosphere  was 
ascertained,  and  when  it  became  evident  that  part  of 
the  air  was  absorbed  during  combustion,  the  former 
conclusion  fell  to  the  ground ; for  when  twobodies  exert 
a mutual  action  on  each  other,  it  becomes  d priori 
equally  probable  that  the  products  may  be  derived 
from  either  of  them;  consequently,  the  light  and  heat 
evolved  might  proceed  either  from  the  one  or  the 
other.  Whether  they  proceed  fom  the  atmosphere, 
or  from  the  combustible  body,  they  must  be  separated 
at  the  part  where  the  combination  takes  place  ; that  is, 
upon  the  surface  of  the  burning  body  itself ; and  con- 
sequently it  appeared  luminous  and  heated,  while  the 
air  being  invisible  escaped  observation. 

When  the  laws  of  heat  became  known,  at  least 
when  it  was  ascertained  that  bodies  contain  at  the 
same  temperature,  and  in  equal  quantities,  either  of 
mass  or  bulk,  unequal  quantities  of  heat,  the  conclu- 
sion became  probable,  that  the  caloric  evolved  in  com- 
bustion proceeded  rather  from  the  oxygen  gas  of  the 
atmosphere,  than  from  the  combustible  body;  since 
the  former  contains  a much  larger  quantity  than  the 
latter.  The  caloric  evolved  was  therefore  supposed 
to  be  derived  from  the  condensation  of  the  oxygen  gas 
in  the  new  combination  into  which  it  entered. 

Though  approaching  to  the  truth,  l his  explanation 
is  not  strictly  true.  It  is  not  merely  from  the  oxygen 
gas  being  condensed  that  the  caloric  is  evolved,  be- 
cause, in  many  cases  of  combustion,  the  product  still 
exists  in  the  gaseous  stale,  and  in  others,  the  quantity 
of  caloric  evolved  bears  no  proportion  to  the  degreeof 
condensation.  Philosophers  ascribed  this  to  a change 
of  capacity ; for,  in  different  bodies,  the  difference  in 
the  proportion  of  the  capacities  before  and  after  com- 
bustion, is  by  no  means  uniform ; and  hence  the  dif- 
ference in  the  quantities  of  caloric  extricated  in 
various  cases  of  combustion. 

This  being  premised,  it  remains  to  explain  the  origin 
of  the  light  emitted  during  combustion  ; for  although 
we  take  it  for  granted  that  the  caloric  is  evolved  from 
the  oxygen  gas,  we  cannot  infer  that  the  light  has  the 
same  origin. 

It  is  very  probable  that  light  is  a constituent  part  of 
inflammable  bodies ; for  it  is  frequently  evolved  in 
combinations  when  the  oxygen  is  merely  transferred 
from  one  inflammable  substance  to  another.  In  those 
cases  it  must  proceed  from  the  inflammable  body. 
The  accension  of  oils  by  the  affusion  of  acids,  the 
combustion  of  metals  in  the  same  way,  furnish  in 
stances  of  the  kind. 

It  seems,  therefore,  probable,  that  the  light  is  de- 
rived from  the  inflammable  substance ; and  that  the 
oxygen,  combining  with  the  bases  of  these  substances, 
diseugages  the  light. 

It  may  be  concluded  then,  that  li<rht  enters  into  the 
composition  of  all  combustible  bodies  ; but  as  we  are 
unable  to  separate  the  light,  so  as  to  obtain  these 
bodies  pure,  we  treat  of  them  as  simple  bodies. 

According  to  this  theory,  the  combustion  of  phos- 
phorous in  oxygen  gas,  is,  therefore,  the  effect  of  a 
double  affinity.  The  basis  of  the  oxygen  gas'unites 
with  the  phosphorus,  to  form  phosphoric  acid ; and 
the  light  disengaged  from  the  phosphorus,  together 
with  the  heat  of  the  oxygen  gas,  produces  the  vivid 
flame. 

The  quantity  of  light  emitted  by  different  bodies  is 
supposed  to  depend  on  the  quantity  contained  in  them, 
and  on  the  proportion  in  which  it  is  united  to  caloric. 

Such  is  the  theory  of  combustion  of  Lavoisier,  mo- 
dified by  Gren,  Leonardi,  and  Richter. 

Thomson's  Theory  of  Combustion. 

Though  the  preceding  theory  of  combustion  is  sim- 
ple and  beautiful,  it  appears,  from  what  we  are  now 
going  to  state,  to  be  by  no  means  completely  satis- 
factory. 

It  has  misled  chemists,  by  confining  the  term  com- 
bustion to  the  act  of  oxygena'ion,  and  considering 
that  all  bodies,  during  their  combustion,  combine  with 
oxygen,  without  at  the  same  time  recollecting  that  this 


COM 


latter  effect  inay  take  place  without  any  of  the  phe- 
nomena usually  attendant  on  combustion ; ami  that, 
though  certainly  all  combustion  presupposes  the  com- 
bination of  oxygen  with  a base,  yet  tins  combination 
may  be,  and  repeatedly  is,  effected  where  no  combus- 
tion can  possibly  take  place.  Nothing  can  be  more 
evident  than  the  difference  which,  in  numberless  in- 
stances, prevails  between  the  act  of  oxygenation  in 
bodies  and  that  of  combustion,  inasmuch  as  neither 
the  phenomena  attending  on,  nor  the  results  arising 
from  them,  are  the  same.  That  a distinction  there- 
fore should  be  made  between  these  processes  is  ob- 
vious ; and  it  is  on  this  account  that  Dr.  Thomson 
has  offered  a theory,  which  considers  this  subject  in 
a new  point  of  view,  and  which  bids  fair  to  enable 
us  to  estimate  the  phenomena  of  combustion  much 
better  than  has  hitherto  been  done. 

According  to  Dr.  Thomson’s  theory,  all  the  bodies 
concerned  in  combustion  are  either,  1.  Combustibles. 
— 2.  Supporters  of  combustion. — 3.  Incombustibles. 

1.  Combustible  bodies  are  those  substances  which 
are  said,  in  common  language,  to  burn.  During  the 
combustion,  they  appear  to  emit  light  and  heat,  and,  at 
the  same  time,  gradually  waste  away.  When  this 
change  has  reached  its  maximum , the  process  of  com- 
bustion is  at  an  end. 

The  class  of  combustibles  is  very  numerous  ; but 
all  the  bodies  belonging  to  it  may  be  subdivided  into 
three  sets,  namely : 

1.  Simple  combustibles.  2.  Compound  combus- 
tibles. 3.  Combustible  oxides,  &c. 

Simple  Combustibles. 

1.  Sulphur.  4.  Hydrogen  gas. 

2.  Phosphorus.  5.  Ail  the  metals. 

3.  Diamond,  or  Carbon.  6.  Boron. 

Compound  Combustibles. 

The  compound  combustibles  consist  of  compounds, 
formed  by  the  simple  combustibles  uniting  together, 
and  are  of  course  much  more  numerous  than  the  sim- 
ple combustibles.  They  may  be  arranged  under  the 
five  following  heads: 

1.  Sulphurets.  3.  Carburets. 

2.  Phosphurets.  4.  Alloys. 

5.  Sulphuretted,  phosphuretted,  and  carburetted 
hydrogen. 

The  combustible  oxides  are  either  simple,  having  a 
single  base,  or  compound,  having  more  thap  one  base. 
All  the  simple  combustible  oxides  are  by  combustion 
converted  into  acids. 

The  compound  combustible  oxides  are  by  far  the 
most  numerous. 

II.  The  supporters  of  combustion  are  bodies 
which  are  not  of  themselves,  strictly  speaking,  capa- 
ble of  undergoing  combustion,  but  which  are  abso- 
lutely necessary  for  the  process ; for  no  combustible 
body  can  burn  unless  some  one  or  other  of  them  be  pre- 
sent. Whenever  they  are  excluded,  combustion 
ceases.  All  the  supporters  of.  combustion  known  at 
present  are  oxygen,  chlorine,  iodine,  and  the  com- 
pounds which  these  form  with  each  other,  and  with 
azote.  . 

There  are  indeed  certain  substances  besides  these, 
which  possess  nearly  the  same  properties ; these  shall 
be  afterward  enumerated  under  the  title  of  partial 
supporters. 

III.  The  incombustible  bodies  are  neither  capable 
of  undergoing  combustion  themselves,  nor  of  support- 
ing the  combustion  of  those  bodies  that  are;  they  are 
therefore  not  immediately  connected  with  combustion  ; 
though  most  of  them  appear  to  be  the  results  of  that 
process.  Azot,  the  alkalies,  earths,  &c.  come  under 
this  division. 

Some  of  the  alkalies  and  earths  possess  certain  pro- 
perties in  common  with  combustibles,  and  are  capable 
of  exhibiting  phenomena  somewhat  analogous  to  com- 
bustion ; which  will  he  described  afterward  under 
the  title  of  semi-combustion. 

In  every  case  of  combustion,  there  must  therefore 
be  present  a combustible  body,  and  a supporter  of 
combustion.  During  combustion,  the  combustible  al- 
ways unites  with  the  supporter.  It  is  this  combina 
tion  which  occasions  the  apparent  waste  and  alteration 
of  the  combustible.  The  new  compound  thus  formed 
is  a product  of  combustion.  Every  product  of  com- 
bustion is  either,  1.  an  acid , or,  2.  an  oxide , &c.  It  is 
true,  indeed,  that  other  bodies  sometimes  make  their 
appearance  during  combustion,  but  these  will  be  found, 


COM 

upon  examination,  not  to  be  products,  nor  to  have  un- 
dergone combustion. 

Thud  one  of  the  two  characteristic  marks  which 
distinguish  combustion,  namely,  the  apparent  waste 
and  alteration  of  the  combustible  body , has  been  fully 
explained.  For  the  explanation  of  it  we  are  indebted 
to  Lavoisier,  as  stated  before. 

But  though  the  combination  of  the  combustible 
with  oxygen,  or  other  supporter,  be  a constant  part  of 
combustion,  yet  the  facility  with  which  combustibles 
burn  is  not  proportional  to  their  apparent  aliinity  for 
oxygen. 

Phosphorus,  for  instance,  burns  more  readily  than 
charcoal ; yet  charcoal  is  capable  of  abstracting  oxygen 
from  phosphorus,  and  of  course  has  a greater  athnity 
for  it.  Some  of  the  combustible  oxides  take  fire  more 
readily  than  some  of  the  simple  combustibles;  alkohoi, 
tether,  and  oils,  are  exceedingly  combustible,  whereas 
all  the  metals  require  very  high  temperature  when  the 
supporter  is  air. 

This  greater  combustibility  of  combustible  oxides  is 
probably  owing  to  the  weaker  affinity  by  which  their 
particles  are  united.  Henee  they  are  more  easily  se- 
parated than  homogeneous  particles,  and  of  course 
combine  more  readily  with  oxygen ; those  simple  com- 
bustibles which  melt  easily,  or  which  are  in  the  state 
of  lastic  fluids,  are  also  very  combustible,  because  the 
cohesion  between  their  particles  is  easily  overcome. 

It  is  owing  to  the  same  inferiority  in  the  cohesion  of 
heterogeneous  particles,  that  some  of  the  compound 
supporters  occasion  combustion  in  circumstances 
when  the  combustibles  would  not  be  acted  on  by 
simple  supporters. 

Thus  phosphorus  burns  in  air  at  the  common  tem- 
perature ; but  it  does  not  burn  in  oxygen  gas,  unless 
its  temperature  be  raised.  Thus  also  oils  burn  rapidly 
when  mixed  with  nitric  acid.  Nitrous  gas  and  nitrous 
oxide  constitute  exceptions  to  this  rule. 

None  of  the  products  of  combustion  are  combus- 
tible, according  to  the  definition  of  combustion  here 
given.  This  want  of  combustibility  is  not  owing  to 
their  being  saturated  with  oxygen;  for  several  of  them 
are  capable  of  combining  with  an  additional  dose  of  it. 
But,  during  this  combination,  no  caloric  or  light  is 
ever  emitted;  and  the  compound  formed  differs  essen- 
tially from  a product  of  combustion  ; for  by  this  addi- 
tional dose  of  oxygen,  the  product  is  converted  into  a 
supporter.  Hence  we  see  that  combustion  ought  not  to 
be  confounded  with  the  combination  of  a body  with 
oxygen , as  was  done  formerly- 

Combustion,  indeed,  cannot  take  place  without  the 
combination  of  oxygen  or  other  supporter  ; but  oxygen 
may  combine  with  bodies  in  different  proportions 
without  the  phenomena  of  combustion ; and  the  pro- 
duct obtained  by  combustion  is  capable  of  becoming 
converted  into  asupporterof  combustion;  for  instance, 
if  lead  be  melted,  and  kept  so  for  some  time,  it  be- 
comes covered  with  a gray  pellicle,  or  oxide  of  lead , a 
product  consisting  of  oxygen  and  lead ; but  if  this 
oxide  is  suffered  to  be'heated  longer,  it  absorbs  an  ad- 
ditional quantity  of  oxygen,  and  becomes  converted 
into  a yellow  powder,  called  yellow  oxide  of  lead.  If 
this  yellow  oxide  be  again  exposed  to  heat,  it  absorbs 
still  more  oxygen,  and  becomes  converted  into  red  oxide 
of  lead.  When  the  supporters  thus  formed  by  the 
combination  of  oxygen  witli  products,  are  made  to 
support  combustion,  they  do  not  lose  ali  their  oxygen, 
but  only  the  additional  dose  which  constituted  them 
supporters.  Of  course  they  are  again  reduced  to  {heir 
original  state  of  products  of  combustion.  Hente  it 
follows,  that  they  owe  their  properties  as  supporters, 
not  to  the  whole  of  the  oxygen  which  they  contain,  but 
to  the  additional  dose  which  constituted  them  sup- 
porters. We  may  therefore  call  them  partial  sup- 
porters; indicating  by  the  term,  thht  part  only  of  their 
oxygen  is  capable  of  supporting  combustion,  and  not 
the  whole. 

All  the  partial  supporters  with  which  we  are  ac- 
quainted, contain  a metallic  basis;  for  metallic  oxides 
are  the  only  products  at  present  known,  capable  of 
combining  with  an  additional  dose  of  oxygen.  It  is  a 
circumstance  highly  deserving  attention,  that  when 
metals  are  capable  of  combining  with  several  doses  of 
oxygen,  the  product,  or  oxide  formed  by  combustion,  is 
seldom  or  never  that  which  contains  a maximum  of 
oxygen. 

Thus  it  is  evident  that  several  of  the  products  of 

251 


COM 


COM 


combustion  are  capable  of  combining  with  oxygen. 

The  incombustibility  of  products , therefore , is  not  ow- 
ing to  their  want  of  affinity  for  oxygen,  but  to  some 
other  cause. 

No  product  of  combustion  is  capable  of  supporting 
combustion.  This  is  not  occasioned  by  any  want  of 
affinity  to  combustible  bodies;  for  several  of  them  are 
capable  of  combining  with  an  additional  dose  of  their 
basis.  But  by  this  combination,  they  lose  their  pro- 
perties as  products,  and  are  converted  into  combusti- 
bles. The  process,  therefore,  differs  essentially  from 
combustion.  Thus  phosphoric  acid,  a product  of 
combustion,  is  capable  of  combining  with  an  addi- 
tional dose  of  phosphorus,  and  forming  phosphorous 
acid,  a combustible  body.  When  this  last  acid  is 
heated  in  contact  with  a supporter,  it  undergoes  com- 
bustion ; but  it  is  only  the  additional  dose  of  the  com- 
bustible which  burns,  and  the  whole  is  converted  into 
phosphoric  acid.  Hence  we  see  that  it  is  not  the 
whole  basis  of  these  compounds  which  is  combus- 
tible, but  merely  the  additional  dose.  The  compounds, 
therefore,  formed  by  the  union  of  a product  and  com- 
bustible, may  be  termed  partial  combustibles ; indi- 
cating by  the  name,  that  a part  only  of  the  base  is 
capable  of  undergoing  combustion.  8ince  the  pro- 
ducts of  combustion  are  capable  of  combining  with 
oxygen,  but  never  exhibit  the  phenomena  of  combus- 
tion, except  when  they  are  in  the  state  of  partial 
combustibles,  combustible  bodies  must  contain  a sub- 
stance which  they  lose  in  burning,  and  to  which  they 
owe  their  combustibility ; for,  alter  they  have  lost  it, 
they  unite  to  oxygen  without  exhibiting  the  pheno- 
mena of  combustion. 

Though  the  products  of  combustion  are  not  capa- 
ble of  supporting  combustion,  they  not  unfrequently 
part  with  their  oxygen  just  as  supporters  do,  give  it 
out  to  combustibles,  and  convert  them  into  products; 
but  during  this  process,  qo  heat  or  light  is  ever 
evolved.  Water,  for  instance,  gives  out  its  oxygen 
to  iron,  and  converts  it  into  the  black  oxide,  a pro- 
duct. Thus  we  see  that  the  oxygen  of  products  is 
capable  of  converting  combustibles  into  products,  just 
as  the  oxygen  of  supporters;  but  during  the  combina- 
tion of  the  last  only,  are  heat  and  light  emitted.  The 
oxygen  of  supporters  then  contain  something  which 
the  oxygen  of  products  wants. 

Whenever  the  whole  of  the  oxygen  is  abstracted 
from  products,  the  combustibility  of  their  base  is  re- 
stored as  completely  as  before  combustion;  but  no 
substance  is  capable  of  abstracting  the  whole  of  the 
oxygen,  except  a combustible,  or  a partial  combustible. 
Water,  for  instance,  is  a product  of  combustion,  whose 
base  is  hydrogen.  To  restore  the  combustibility  of  the 
hydrogen,  we  have  only  to  mix  water  with  iron  or 
zinc  filings,  and  an  acid  ; the  metal  is  oxidized,  and 
the  hydrogen  gas  is  evolved  as  combustible  as  ever. 
But  no  substance,  except  a combustible,  is  capable  of 
separating  hydrogen  gas  from  water,  by  combining 
with  its  oxygen.  Thus  we  see  that  combustibles  are 
capable  of  restoring  the  combustibility  of  the  bases  of 
products ; but  they  themselves  lose  their  combustibility 
by  the  process,  and  are  converted  into  products.  Com- 
bustibility, therefore,  may  be  thrown  at  pleasure  from 
one  body  to  another. 

From  these  facts  it  is  obvious,  that  the  products  of 
combustion  may  be  formed  without  combustion  ; but 
in  these  cases  a new  combustible  is  always  evolved. 
The  process  is  merely  an  interchange  of  combusti 
bilitv ; for  the  combustible  is  converted  into  a product 
only  by  means  of  a product.  Both  the  oxygen  and 
the  base  of  the  product  having  undergone  combus- 
tion, have  lost  something  which  is  essential  to  combus 
tion.  The  process  is  merely  a double  decomposition. 
The  product  yields  its  oxygen  to  the  combustible,  while 
at  the  same  time  the  combustible  gives  out  something 
to  the  base  of  the  product;  the  combustibility  of  that 
base  then  is  restored  by  the  loss  of  its  oxygen,  and  by 
the  restoration  of  something  which  it  receives  from 
the  other  combustible  thus  converted  into  a product. 

There \s  indeed  anotlier  method  of  forming  the  pro- 
ducts of  combustion  without  actual  combustion  in 
certain  cases;  but  the  phenomena  are  much  more 
complicated.  This  method  is  to  expose  them  to  the 
action  of  some  of  the  supporters  dissolved  in  water; 
especially  nitric  acid.  Thus  most  of  the  metallic  ox- 
ides may  be  formed  without  combustion  by  the  action 
of  that  acid  on  the  metals.  Bat,  in  that  case,  a new 


supporter  is  always  evolved, namely,  nitrous  gas;  am 
monia,  a new  combustible,  is  also  usually  formed ; 
and,  not  unfrequently,  the  product  is  converted  into  a 
partial  supporter. 

No  supporter  can  be  produced  by  combustion,  or 
by  any  equivalent  process.  As  several  of  the  support- 
ers consist  of  oxygen  combined  with  a base,  it  follows 
as  a consequence,  that  oxygen  may  combine  with  a 
base  without  losing  that  ingredient,  which  occasions 
combustion.  The  act  of  combination  of  oxygen  with 
a base,  therefore,  is  by  no  means  the  same  with  com- 
bustion. If  we  take  a view  of  the  different  support- 
ers, we  shall  find  that  all  of  them  which  can  be  ob- 
tained artificially,  are  procured  either  from  other 
supporters,  or  by  the  agency  of  electricity. 

I.  Oxygen  gas  may  be  procured  from  nitric  acid, 
and  from  several  of  the  partial  supporters,  as  the 
black  oxide  of  manganese,  the  red  oxides  of  lead  and 
of  mercury.  The  action  of  heat  is  always  necessary ; 
but  the  process  is  very  different  from  combustion. 

II.  Air,  as  far  as  is  known  at  present,  cannot  be 
formed  artificially.  The  gas,  indeed,  which  comc9 
over  during  part  of  the  usual  distillation  of  nitrate  of 
potassa  and  sulphuric  acid,  to  obtain  nitric  acid,  re- 
sembles air  very  closely.  But  it  is  obtained  from  a 
supporter. 

III.  Nitrous  oxide  has  hitherto  been  only  pro- 
cured from  nitrous  gas  and  nitric  acid,  (in  nitrate  of 
ammonia,)  both  of  which  are  supporters. 

IV.  Nitrous  gas  can  only  be  procured  by  the  de- 
composition of  nitric  acid,  a supporter. 

V.  Oxymuriatic  acid,  or  Chlorine,  can  be  formed 
by  the  action  of  muriatic  acid  on  the  black  oxide  of 
manganese,  the  red  oxides  of  lead,  iron,  or  mercury ; 
all  of  which  are  partial  supporters. 

VI.  Nitric  acid  is  formed  spontaneously  upon  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  by  processes  with  which  we  are  but 
imperfectly  acquainted ; but  which  certainly  have  no 
resemblance  to  combustion.  Its  oxygen  is  probably 
furnished  by  the  air,  which  is  a supporter ; at  least,  it 
has  been  observed,  that  nitrogen  and  oxygen,  at  high 
temperatures,  are  capable  of  forming  nitric  acid. 

This  formation  of  nitric  acid  by  means  of  electri- 
city, has  been  considered  as  a combustion,  but  for 
what  reason  it  is  not  easy  to  say : the  substance  acted 
upon  is  not  a combustible  with  a supporter,  but  a sup- 
porter alone.  Electricity  is  so  far  from  being  equiva- 
lent to  combustion,, that  it  sometimes  acts  in  a manner 
diametrically  opposite;  unburning,  if  we  may  use  the 
expression,  a substance  which  has  already  undergone 
combustion,  and  converting  a product  into  a combus- 
tible and  a supporter.  Thus  it  decomposes  water, 
and  converts  it  into  oxygen  and  hydrogen  gas  ; there- 
fore it  must  be  capable  of  supplying  the  substances 
which  the  oxygen  and  combustible  lose  when  they 
combine  by  combustion,  and  form  a product. 

Several  of  the  supporters  and  partial  supporters  are 
capable  of  combining  with  combustibles,  without  un- 
dergoing decomposition,  or  exhibiting  the  phenomena 
of  combustion.  In  this  manner,  the  yellow  oxide  of 
gold  combines  with  ammonia;  the  red  oxide  of  mer- 
cury with  oxalic  acid ; and  oxymuriatic  acid  with  am- 
monia. Thus  also  nitrate  of  potassa  may  be  com- 
bined, or  at  least  intimately  mixed,  with  several  com- 
bustible bodies,  as  in  gunpowder,  fulminating  powder, 
&lc.  In  all  these  compounds,  the  oxygen  of  the  sup- 
porter and  the  combustible  retain  the  ingredients 
which  render  them  susceptible  of  combustion;  hence 
the  compound  is  still  combustible.  And  in  conse- 
quence of  the  intimate  combination  of  the  component 
parts,  the  least  alteration  is  apt  to  destroy  the  equili- 
brium which  subsists  between  them ; the  consequence 
is,  combustion  and  the  formation  of  a new  compound. 
Hence  these  compounds  burn  with  amazing  facility, 
not  only  when  heated,  but  when  triturated,  or  struck 
smartly  with  a hammer.  They  have  therefore  re- 
ceived the  name  of  detonating  or  fulminating  bodies 
Thus  we  have  fulminating  gold,  fulminating  mercury, 
fulminating  powder,  &c. 

Such  are  the  properties  of  the  combustibles,  the 
supporters,  and  the  products ; and  such  the  phenome- 
na which  they  exhibit  when  made  to  act  upon  eath 
other. 

If  we  compare  together  the  supporters  and  the  pro- 
ducts, we  shall  find  that  they  resemble  each  other  in 
many  respects.  Both  of  them  contain  oxygen,  or  other 
supporter, as  an  essential  constituent  part;  both  are 


COM 


COM 


eapable  of  converting  combustibles  into  products ; and 
several  of  both  combine  with  combustibles  and  with 
additional  doses  of  oxygen.  But  they  differ  from  each 
other  in  their  effects  on  combustibles.  The  former 
only  produce  combustion ; whereas  the  products  con- 
vert combustibles  into  products  without  combustion. 
Now,  as  the  ultimate  change  produced  upon  combus- 
tibles by  both  these  sets  of  bodies  is  the  same,  and  as 
the  substance  which  combines  with  the  combustibles 
is  in  both  cases  the  same,  oxygen,  for  instance,  we 
must  conclude  that  this  oxygen  in  the  supporters  con- 
tains something  which  the  oxygen  of  the  products 
wants,  something  which  separates  during  the  passage 
of  the  oxygen  from  the  product  to  the  combustible, 
and  occasions  the  combustion,  or  emission  of  fire, 
which  accompanies  this  passage.  The  oxygen  of 
supporters  then  contains  some  ingredient  whfch  the 
oxygen  of  products  wants.  Many  circumstances  con- 
cur to  render  it  probable  that  this  ingredient  is  caloric. 

The  combustibles  and  the  products  also  resemble 
each  other.  Both  of  them  contain  the  same  or  a 
similar  base  ; both  frequently  combine  with  combus- 
tibles, and  likewise  with  oxygen  ; but  they  differ  es- 
sentially in  the  phenomena  which  accompany  their 
combination  with  oxygen.  In  the  one  case,  fire  is 
emitted ; in  the  other,  not.  If  we  recollect  that  no 
substance  but  a combustible  is  capable  of  restoring 
combustibility  to  the  base  of  a product,  and  that  at  its 
doing  so  it  always  loses  its  own  combustibility  ; and  if 
we  recollect  farther,  that  the  base  of  a product  does  not 
exhibit  the  phenomena  of  combustion  even  when  it 
combines  with  oxygen,  we  cannot  avoid  concluding, 
that  all  combustibles  contain  an  ingredient  which  they 
lose  when  converted  into  products,  and  that  this  loss 
contributes  to  the  fire  which  makes  its  appearance 
during  the  conversion.  Many  circumstances  contri- 
bute to  render  it  probable  that  this  ingredient  is  light. 

If  we  suppose  that  the  oxygen  of  supporters  con- 
tains caloric  as  an  essential  ingredient,  and  that  light 
is  a component  part  of  all  combustibles,  the  phenome- 
na of  combustion  above  enumerated,  numerous  and 
intricate  as  they  are,  admit  of  an  easy  and  obvious  ex- 
planation. The  component  parts  of  the  oxygen  of 
supporters  are  two ; namely,  1.  a base,  2.  caloric.  The 
component  parts  of  combustibles  are  likewise  two; 
namely,  1.  a base,  2.  light.  During  combustion,  the 
base  of  the  oxygen  combines  with  the  base  of  the  com- 
bustible, and  forms  the  product;  while,  at  the  same 
time,  the  caloric  of  the  oxygen  combines  with  the  light 
of  the  combustible,  and  the  compound  flies  off  in  the  | 
form  of  fire.  Thus  combustion  is  a double  decompo- 
sition: the  oxygen  and  combustible  divide  themselves  ■ 
each  into  two  portions,  which  combine  in  pairs ; the 
one  compound  is  the  product , and  the  other  the  fire , 
which  escapes. 

Hence  the  reason  that  the  oxygen  of  products  is 
unfit  for  combustion.  It  wants  its  caloric.  Hence  the 
reason  that  combustion  does  not  take  place  when  oxy- 
gen combines  with  products,  or  with  the  base  of  sup- 
porters. These  bodies  contain  no  light.  The  caloric 
of  the  oxygen  of  course  is  not  separated,  and  no  fire 
appears.  And  this  oxygen  still  retaining  its  caloric,  is 
capable  of  producing  combustion  whenever  a body  is 
presented  which  contains  light,  and  whose  base  has  an 
affinity  for  oxygen.  Hence  also  the  reason  why  a com- 
bustible alone  can  restore  combustibility  to  the  base  of 
a product.  In  all  such  cases,  a double  decomposition 
takes  place.  The  oxygen  of  the  product  combines 
with  the  base  of  the  combustible,  while  the  light 
of  the  combustible  combines  with  the  base  of  the 
product. 

But  the  application  of  this  theory  to  all  the  different 
phenomena  described  above,  is  so  obvious,  that  it  is 
needless  to  give  any  more  examples.  Let  us  rather 
inquire,  with  the  author,  into  the  evidences  which-can 
be  brought  forward  in  its  support. 

As  caloric  and  light  are  always  emitted  during  com- 
bustion, it  follows  that  they  must  have  previously 
existed  in  the  combustible,  the  supporter,  or  in  both. 

That  thd  oxygen  of  the  supporters  contains  either 
one  or  both  of  these  substances,  follows  incontroverti- 
bly  from  a fact  already  mentioned,  namely,  that  the 
oxygen  of  products  will  not  support  combustion,  while 
that  of  supporters  will.  Hence  the  oxygen  of  sup- 
porters must  contain  something  which  the  oxygen  of 
the  products  wants,  and  this  something  must  be  caloric, 
or  light,  or  both. 


That  the  oxygen  of  some  of  the  supporters  at  least 
contains  caloric,  as  an  ingredient,  has  been  proved,  in 
a atisfactory  manner,  by  the  experiments  of  Craw- 
ford, Lavoisier,  and  La  Place.  Thus  the  temperature 
of  hot-blooded  animats  is  maintained  by  the  decompo- 
sition of  air.  Now,  if  the  oxygen  of  one  supporter 
contains  caloric,  the  same  ingredient  must  exist  in  the 
oxygen  of  every  supporter,  because  all  of  them  are 
obviously  in  the  same  state.  Hence  we  conclude  that 
the  oxygen  of  every  supporter  contains  caloric  as  an 
essential  ingredient. 

The  light  emitted  during  combustion  must  either 
proceed  from  the  combustible  or  the  supporter.  That 
it  proceeds  from  the  combustible,  must  appear  pretty 
obvious,  if  we  recollect  that  the  colour  of  the  light 
emitted  during  combustion  varies,  and  that  this  varia- 
tion usually  depends,  not  upon  the  supporter,  but  upon 
the  combustible.  Thus  charcoal  burns  with  a red 
flame,  sulphur  with  a blue  or  violet,  zinc  with  a green- 
ish white,  &c. 

The  formation  of  combustibles  in  plants,  obviously 
requires  the  presence  and  agency  of  light.  The  leaves 
of  plants  emit  oxygen  gas,  when  exposed  to  the  sun’s 
rays,  but  never  in  the  shade,  or  in  the  dark. 

Besides  vegetation,  we  are  acquainted  with  two 
other  methods  of  unburning  products,  or  of  converting 
them  iiuo  products  and  combustibles,  by  exposing  them, 
in  certain  circumstances,  to  the  agency  of  fire,  or  of 
electricity.  The  oxides  of  gold,  mercury,  &c.  when 
heated  to  redness,  are  decomposed,  oxygen  gas  is  emit- 
ted, and  the  pure  metal  remains  behind.  In  this  case, 
the  necessary  caloric  and  light  must  be  furnished  by 
the  fire ; a circumstance  which  explains  why  such  re- 
ductions always  require  a red  heat.  When  carbonic 
acid  is  made  to  pass  repeatedly  over  red-hot  charcoal, 
it  combines  with  a portion  of  charcoal,  and  is  con- 
verted into  gaseous  oxide  of  carbon.  If  this  gas  be  a 
combustible  oxide,  the  base  of  the  carbonic  acid  and 
its  oxygen  must  have  been  supplied  with  light  and 
caloric  from  the  fire;  but  if  it  be  a partial  combusti- 
ble, it  is  merely  a compound  of  carbonic  acid  and 
charcoal : which  of  the  two  it  is,  remains  still  to  be 
ascertained. 

Electricity  decomposes  water,  and  converts  it  into 
oxygen  gas  and  hydrogen  gas ; it  must,  therefore,  sup- 
ply the  heat  and  the  light  which  these  bodies  lost  when 
converted  into  a product. 

These  facts,  together  with  the  exact  correspondence 
of  the  theory  given  above  with  the  phenomena  of  com- 
bustion, render  it  so  probable,  that  Dr.  Thompson  has 
ventured  to  propose  it  as  an  additional  step  towards  a 
full  explanation  of  the  theory  of  combustion.  Every 
additional  experiment  has  served  to  confirm  it  more 
and  more.  It  even  throws  light  upon  the  curious  ex- 
periments of  the  accension  of  metals  with  sulphur, 
which  succeed  in  vacuo,  under  mercury,  in  nitrogen 
gas,  &c. 

Dr.  Thompson  has  noticed,  that  the  same  emission 
of  caloric  and  light,  or  o l'  fire,  takes  place  when  melted 
sulphur  is  made  to  combine  with  polassa,  or  with  lime, 
in  a crucible  or  glass  tube,  and  likewise  when  melted 
phosphorus  is  made  to  combine  with  lime  heated  to 
redness.  He  supposes  that,  in  all  probability,  barytes 
and  strontia  exhibit  the  same  phenomenon  when  com- 
bined with  melted  sulphur  or  phosphorus ; and  per- 
haps some  of  the  metals  when  combined  with  phos- 
phorus. 

The  phenomena  Dr.  Thompson  explains  thus: — The 
sulphur  and  phosphorus  are  in  the  melted  state,  and 
therefore  contain  caloric  as  an  ingredient;  the  alka- 
lies, earths,  and  metals  which  produce  the  phenomenon 
in  question,  contain  light  as  an  essential  ingredient. 
The  sulphur,  or  phosphorus,  combines  with  the  base  of 
the  metal,  earth,  or  alkali ; while  at  the  same  time, 
the  caloric , to  which  the  sulphur  or  phosphorus  owed 
its  fluidity,  combines  with  the  light  of  the  metal,  earth, 
or  alkali;  and  the  compound  flies  off  under  the  form 
of  fire. 

Thus  the  process  is  exactly  the  same  with  combus- 
tion, excepting  as  far  as  regards  the  product.  The 
melted  sulphur,  or  phosphorus,  acts  the  part  of  the 
supporter , while  the  metal,  earth,  or  alkali,  occupies 
the  place  of  the  combustible.  The  first  furnishes  calo- 
ric, the  second  light,  while  the  base  of  each  combines 
together.  Hence  we  see  that  the  base  of  sulphurets 
and  phosphurets  resembles  the  base  of  products  in 
being  destitute  of  light;  the  formation  of  these  bodies 

253 


COM 


COM 


exhibiting  the  separation  of  fire  like  combustion , but 
tl*e  product  differing  from  a product  of  combustion  in 
being  destitute  of  oxygen,  Dr.  Thompson  distinguishes 
the  process  by  the  title  of  semi-combustion;  indicating 
by  the  term,  that  it  possesses  one  half  of  the  charac- 
teristic marks  of  combustion,  but  is  destitute  of  the 
other  half. 

The  only  part  of  this  theory  which  requires  proof 
is,  that  light  is  a component  part  of  the  earths  and  al- 
kalies. But  as  potassa  and  lime  are  the  only  bodies 
of  that  nature,  which  we  are  certain  to  be  capable  of 
exhibiting  the  phenomena  of  semi-combustion,  the 
proofs  must  of  necessity  be  confined  to  them.  That 
lime  contains  light  as  a component  part,  has  been  long 
known.  Meyer  and  Pelletier  observed  long  ago,  that 
when  water  is  poured  upon  lime,  not  only  heat  but 
light  is  emitted.  Light  is  emitted  also  abundantly, 
when  sulphuric  acid  is  poured  upon  magnesia,  or  upon 
lime,  potassa,  or  soda,  freed  from  the  water  of  crys- 
tallization. In  all  thfese  cases,  a semi- combustion  takes 
place.  The  water  and  the  acid  being  solidified,  give 
out  caloric , while  the  lime  or  potassa  gives  out  light. 

That  lime,  during  its  burning,  combines  with  light, 
and  that  light  is  a component  part  of  lime,  is  demon- 
strated  by  the  following  experiment,  for  which  we  are 
indebted  to  Scheele. 

Fluor  spar  (fluate  of  lime)  has  the  property  oT  phos- 
phorescing strongly  when  heated,  but  the  experiment 
does  not  succeed  twice  with  the  same  specimen.  After 
it  has  been  once  heated  sufficiently,  no  subsequent 
heat  Will  cause  it  to  phosphoresce.  Now  phosphores- 
cence is  merely  the  emission  of  light;  light  of  course 
is  a component  part  of  fluor  spar,  and  heat  has  the 
property  of  separating  it.  But  the  phosphorescing 
quality  of  the  spar  may  be  again  recovered  to  it,  or, 
which  is  the  same  thing,  the  light  which  the  spar  had 
lost  may  be  restored  by  the  following  process : — 

Decompose  the  fluate  of  lime  by  sulphuric  acid,  and 
preserve  the  fluoric  acid  separate.  Boil  the  sulphate 
of  lime  thus  formed,  with  a sufficient  quantity  of  car- 
bonate of  soda;  a double  decomposition  takes  place; 
sulphate  of  soda  remains  in  solution,  and  carbonate  of 
lime  precipitates.  Ignite  this  precipitate  in  a crucible, 
till  it  is  reduced  to  lime,  and  combine  it  with  the  fluoric 
acid  to  which  it  was  formerly  united.  The  fluor  spar 
thus  regenerated,  phosphoresces  as  at  first.  Hence  the 
lime,  during  its  ignition,  must  have  combined  with 
’tight. 

That  potassa  contains  light,  may  be  proved  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  existence  of  that  body  in  lime. 
Now,  as  potassa  is  deprived  of  its  carbonic  acid  by 
lime,  the  Doctor  supposes  that  the  process  must  be  a 
double  decomposition ; namely,  that  the  base  of  the 
lime  combines  with  carbonic  acid,  while  its  light  com- 
bines with  the  potassa. 

These  remarks  on  seini-combustion  might  easily  be 
much  enlarged  upon:  for  it  is  obvious,  that  whenever 
a liquid  combines  with  a solid  containing  light,  and 
the  product  is  a solid  body,  something  analogous  to 
semi-combustion  must  take  place. 

COMEDO.  (From  comedo , a glutton.)  The  come- 
dones of  old  writers  are  a sort  of  worm  which  eats 
into  the  skin  and  devours  the  flesh. 

CO'MFREY.  See  Symphytum. 

Comi's di.  The  gum-arabic. 

Comi'ste.  The  epilepsy.  This  name  arose  from 
the  frequency  of  persons  being  seized  with  tills  disor- 
der, while  in  the  assemblies  called  Comilia. 

Comiti'ssa.  A countess.  Some  preparations  are 
distinguished  by  this  name;  as  Pulvis  Comitiss'ce  de 
Cantia , the  Countess  of  Kent’s  powder.  Also  the 
Cinchona  was  called  Pulvis  Comitissce. 

Commage’num.  (From  Commagene , a place  in  Syria, 
whence  it  was  brought.)  Syrian  ointment,  mentioned 
by  Galen. 

COMMANDUCA'TIO.  (From  commanduco,  to  eat.) 
The  act  of  mastication,  or  chewing. 

Comma'nsum.  (From  commando , to  eat.)  A mas- 
ticatory. A medicine  put  into  the  mouth  and  chewed, 
to  promote  a discharge  of  phlegm,  or  saliva. 

Commendato'rius.  (From  commendo,  to  recom- 
mend.) An  epithet  of  the  traumatic  balsam,  tinctura 
Remoes  composita , from  its  singular  virtues  and  Use- 
fulness. 

Co'mmi.  Gum.  When  alone  it  signifies  gum- 
arabic.  The  /coppt  \tvKov , mentioned  by  Hippocrates 
in  his  De  Morb.  Mulieb.,  is  gum-arabic. 

254 


COMMISSU'RA.  (From  committo,  to  join  toge- 
ther.) A suture,  juncture,  or  joint.  A term  applied 
in  anatomy  to  the  corners  of  the  lips,  where  they  meet 
together;  and  also  to  certain  parts  of  the  brain  which 
go  across  and  join  one  hemisphere  to  the  other. 

Commi$sura  anterior  cerebri.  The  white  nerve- 
like substance  which  crosses  the  anterior  part  of  the 
third  ventricle  of  the  brain,  immediately  above  the 
infundibulum,  and  between  the  anterior  crura  of  the 
fornix  ; uniting  one  hemisphere  of  the  brain  with  the 
other. 

CoMMISSURA  MAGNA  CEREBRI.  The  COrpUS  Callo- 
sum  of  the  brain  is  so  termed  by  some  writers. 

CoMMisshRA  posterior  cerebri.  A white  nerve- 
like  substance,  which  passes  from  one  hemisphere  of 
the  brain  across  to  the  other,  immediately  over  the 
opening  of  the  aqueduct  of  Sylvius,  in  the  posterior 
part  of’ the  third  ventricle  of  the  brain,  and  above  the 
corpora  quadrigemina. 

Commu'nicant.  (From  communico , t6  make  par- 
take.) A term  applied  by  Bellini,  to  fevers  of  two 
kinds  afflicting  the  same  person,  wherein  as  one  goes 
off’  the  other  immediately  succeeds- 

Compa'ges.  (From  compingo,  to  put  together.)  A 
suture,  or  joint.  A commissure. 

COMPA  RATIVE.  That  which  illustrates  by  com- 
paring with  the  human  body:  applied  to  anatomy  and 
physiology.  See  Anatomy. 

Compeba.  See  Piper  Cubeba. 

Complete  Flower.  See  Flos. 

Completion.  A term  used  by  the  ancient  writers 
in  various  acceptations ; but  latterly  it  signifies  only 
the  same  as  Plethora. 

COMPLE'XUS.  (From  complector,  to  comprise.) 
Complexus  Ks'eu  biventer  cervicis  of  Albinus.  Dorso 
trachelon  occipital  of  Dumas.  A muscle  situated  on 
the  back  part  of  the  neck,  that  draws  the  head  back- 
wards, and  to  one  side : and  when  both  act,  they  draw 
the  head  directly  backward.  It  arises  from  the  trans- 
verse processes  of  the  seven  superior  vertebra  of  the 
back,  and  four  inferior  of  the  neck,  by  as  many  dis- 
tinct tendinous  origins ; in  its  ascent,  it  receives  a 
fleshy  slip  from  the  spinous  process  of  the  first  verte- 
bra of  the  back:  from  these  different  origins  it  runs 
upwards,  and  is  every  where  intermixed  with  tendi- 
nous fibres.  It  is  inserted,  tendinous  and  fleshy,  into 
the  inferior  edge  of  the  protuberance  in  the  middle  of 
the  os  occipitis,  and  into  a part  of  the  curved  line  that 
runs  forwards  from  that  protuberance.  It  draws  the 
head  backwards. 

Complexus  minor.  See  Trachelo-masloideus. 

COMPOSITUS.  Compound.  The  result  or  effect 
of  a composition  of  different  things ; or  that  which 
arises  from  them.  It  stands  opposed  to  simple.  In 
botany,  applied  to  leaves  and  flowers.  See  Flos , and 
Folium. 

COMPOUND.  See  Compositus. 

Compound  affinity.  See  Attraction. 

COMPRESSION.  {Compressio ; from  comprimo , 
to  press  together.)  A diseased  state  of  the  body,  or  of 
a part,  the  effect  of  something  pressing  upon  it.  The 
term  is  generally  applied  to  the  brain.  Compression 
of  the  brain  should  be  distinguished  from  concussion 
and  inflammation.  When  the  brain  is  compressed 
either  by  bone,  extravasaled  blood,  or  any  other  fluid, 
there  is  a general  insensibility,  the  eyes  are  half  open, 
the  pupils  dilated  and  motionless,  even  when  a candle 
is  brought  near  the  eye ; the  retina  is  insensible  ; the 
limbs  relaxed ; the  breathing  stertorous ; the  pulse 
slow,  and,  according  to  Abernethy,  less  subject  to 
intermission  than  in  cases  of  concussion.  Nor  is  the 
patient  ever  sick,  when  the  pressure  on  the  brain,  and 
the  general  insensibility,  are  considerable ; for  the 
very  action  of  vomiting  betrays  an  irritability  in  the 
stomach  ami  oesophagus. 

COMPRE  SSOR.  ( Compressor ; from  comprimo,  to 
press  together.)  A name  applied  to  those  muscles 
which  press  together  the  parts  on  which  they  act. 

Compressor  naris.  Rinceus  vel  nasalis  of  Doug- 
las. Transversalis  vel  myrtiformis  of  Winslow.  Di- 
latores  alarum  nasi  of  Cowper ; and  Maxillo  narinal 
of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  nose,  that  compresses  the 
ala;  towards  the  septum  nasi,  particularly  when  we 
want  to  smell  acutely.  It  also  corrugates  the  nose,  and 
assists  in  expressing  certain  passions.  It  arises,  by  a 
narrow  beginning,  from  the  root  of  the  ala  nasi  exter- 
nally, and  spreads  into  a number  of  thin,  separata 


CON 


CON 


fibres,  which  run  up  along  the  cartilage  in  an  obliqhe 
maimer  towards  the  back  of  the  nose,  where  it  joins 
with  its  fellow,  and  is  inserted  into  the  narrow  ex- 
tremiiy  of  the  os  nasi,  and  nasal  process  of  the  supe- 
rior maxillary  bone. 

COMPRESSUS.  Compressed;  flattened  laterally; 
applied  to  leaves.  See  Leaf. 

COMPTONITE.  A new  mineral  first  brought  into 
this  country  by  Lord  Compton,  and  found  in  drusy 
cavities,  in  ejected  masses,  on  Mount  Vesuvius. 

Compu'nctio.  (From  compungo , to  prick.)  A punc- 
ture. 

CONA'RIUM.  (From  kmvos'.  so  named  from  its 
conical  shape.)  A cone.  See  Pineal  gland, 

Concau'sa.  (From  com,  with,  and  causa , a cause.) 
A cause  which  co-operates  with  another  in  the  pro- 
duction ol  a disease. 

CpNCAVliS.  Hollow;  depressed  in  the  middle. 
Applied  to  leaves,  petals,  &c.  depressed  in  their  cen- 
tre, owing,  as  it  were,  to  a tightness  in  some  part  of 
the  circumference ; as  in  Cyamus  nelumbo , and  the 
petals  of  the  Galanthus  niuulus. 

C©NCENTRA'TION.  {Concentratio ; from  con , 
and  centrum , a centre.)  The  volatilizing  of  part  of 
the  water  of  fluids,  in  order  to  improve  their  strength. 
The  matter  to  be  concentrated,  therefore,  must  be  of 
superior  fixity  to  water.  This  operation  is  performed 
on  some  acids,  particularly  the  sulphuritj  and  phos- 
phoric. It  is  also  employed  in  solutions  of  alkalies  and 
neutral  salts. 

CONCENTRIO.  Bulbus  concentricus.  A concen- 
tric bulb,  is  one  of  the  laminated  kind,  well  illustrated 
in  the  common  onion,  Allium  cepa. 

CONCEPT  ACULUM.  A former  name  for  what  is 
now  called  in  botany  feceptaculum. 

CONCE  PTION.  ( Conceptio ; from  concipio , to 
conceive.)  The  impregnation  of  the  ovulum  in  the 
female  ovarium,  by  the  subtile  prolific  aura  of  the 
semen  virile.  In  order  to  have  a fruitful  coition,  it  is 
necessary  that  the  semen  be  propelled  into  the  uterus, 
or  vagina,  so  that  its  fecundating  vapour  shali  be  con- 
veyed through  the  Fallopian  tube  to  the  ovarium  : it  is 
also  necessary  that  there  be  a certain  state  of  the  ova- 
rium of  the  female  in  order  to  impregnate  it ; which 
is,  that  the  ovum  shall  be  mature,  and  embraced  by 
the  fimbris  of  the  Fallopian  tube,  to  convey  that  vivi- 
fying principle  to  the  ovum.  See  Generation. 

CO'NCHA.  ( Concha , Koyx a liquid  measure 

among  the  Athenians.)  A term  applied  by  anatomists 
to  several  parts  of  the  body  ; as  the  hollow  of  the  ear, 
the  spongy  bones  of  the  nose,  &c. 

Concha  auricul/e.  See  Auricula. 

Concha  auris.  The  hollow  part  of  the  cartilage  of 
the  outer  ear. 

Concha  margaritifera.  The  shell  from  which 
pearls  are  obtained.  See  Margarita. 

Concha  narium.  The  turbinated  portion  of  the 
ethmoid  bone,  and  the  inferior  spongy  bones  of  the 
nose,  which  are  covered  by  the  Schneiderian  mem- 
brane, are  so  termed. 

CO'NCHUS.  (From  Koyxn-<  a shell  ; so  named  from 
their  likeness  to  a shell.)  The  cranium,  and  the  cavity 
of  the  eye. 

[CONCH OLITE.  See  Organic  relics.'] 

Conci'dkns.  (From  concido,  to  decay.)  1.  A 
decrease  of  bulk  in  the  whole  or  any  part  of  the 
body. 

2.  A diminution  of  a tumour. 

Concoagcla'tio.  (From  con , and  coagulo , to  co- 
agulate together.)  The  coagulation  or  crystallization 
of  different  salts,  first  dissolved  together  in  the  same 
fluid. 

CONCO'CTIO.  (From  concoquo,  to  digest.)  I.  Con- 
coction ; digestion.  This  term  \vas  formerly  very 
generally  used  to  express  that  operation  of  nature  upon 
nioibid  matter  which  renders  it  fit  to  be  separated 
from,  the  healthy  fluid. 

2.  The  alteration  which  the  food  undergoes  in  the 
priime  vise. 

Concrema'tio.  (From  con , and  cremo , to  burn  to- 
gether.) Calcination. 

CONCRE  TION.  {Conor etio  ; from  concresco,  to 
grow  together.) 

1.  The  condensation  of  any  fluid  substance  into 
a more  solid  consistence. 

2.  The  growing  together  of  parts  which,  in  a natu- 
ral state,  are  separate. 


' CONCU'RSUS.  (From  concurro,  to  meet  together. ) 
The  congeries  or  collection  of  symptoms  which,  con- 
stitute and  distinguish  the  particular  disease. 

CONCU  SSION.  (From  concutio,  to  shake  toge- 
ther.) Concussion  of  the  brain.  Various  alarming 
symptoms,  followed  sometimes  by  the  most  fatal  con- 
sequences, are  found  to  attend  great  violence  offered 
to  the  head;  and  upon  the  strictest  examination,  both 
of  the  living  and  the  dead,  neither  fissure,  fracture, 
nor  extravasation  of  any  kjnd  can  be  discovered.  The 
same  symptoms  and  the  same  events  are  met  with, 
when  the  head  lias  received  no  injury  at  all  ab  externo, 
but  has  only  been  violently  shaken ; nay,  when  only 
the  body,  or  general  frame,  has  seemed  to  have  sus- 
tained the  violence.  The  symptoms  attending  a con- 
cussion, are  generally  in  proportion  to  the  degree  of 
violence  which  the  brain  itself  has  sustained,  and 
which,  indeed,  is  cognizable  only  by  the  symptoms. 
If  the  concussion  be  very  great,  all  sense  and  power  of 
motion  are  immediately  abolished,  and  death  follows 
soon ; but  between  this  degree  and  that  slight  cpnfusion 
(or  stunning,  as  it  is  called,)  which  attends  most  vio- 
lences done  to  the  head,  there  are  many  shades.  The 
following  is  Abernethy’s  description  of  the  symptoms 
of  concussion,  which  he  is  of  opinion,  may  be  divided 
into  three  stages. 

The  first  is  that  state  of  insensibility  and  derange- 
ment of  the  bodily  powers  which  immediately  suc- 
ceeds the  accident.  While  it  lasts,  the  patient  scarcely 
feels  any  injury  that  may  be  inflicted  on  him.  His 
breathing  is  difficult,  but  in  general  without  stertor ; 
his  pulse  intermitting,  and  his  extremities  cold.  But 
such  a state  cannot  last  long ; it  goes  off  gradually, 
and  is  succeeded  by  another,  which  is  considered  as 
the  second  stage  of  concussion.  In  this,  the  pulse  and 
respiration  become  better,  and,  though  not  regularly 
performed,  are  sufficient  to  maintain  life,  and  to  diffuse 
warmth  over  tire  extreme  parts  of  the  body.  The 
feeling  of  the  patient  is  now  so  far  restored,  that  he  is 
sensible  of  his  skin  being  pinched  ; but  he  lies  stupid 
and  inattentive  to  slight  external  impressions.  As  the 
effects  of  concussion  diminish,  he  becomes  capable  of 
replying  to  questions  put  to  him  in  a loud  tone  of 
voice,  especially  when  they  refer  to  his  chief  suffering 
at  the  time,  as  pain  in  the  head,  &c.;  otherwise  he 
answers  incoherently,  and  as  if  his  attention  was 
occupied  by  something  else.  As  long  as  the  stupor 
remains,  the  inflammation  of  the  brain  seems  to  be 
moderate ; but  as  the  former  abates,  the  latter  seldom 
fails  to  increase  ; and  this  constitutes  the  third  stage, 
which  is  the  most  important  of  the  series  of  effects 
proceeding  from  a concussion. 

These  several  stages  vary  considerably  in  their  de- 
gree and  duration ; but  more  or  less  of  each  will  be 
found  to  take  place  in  every  instance  where  the  brain 
has  been  violently  shaken.  Whether  they  bear  any 
certain  proportion  to  each  other  or  not,  is  not  known  ; 
indeed,  this  will  depend  upon  such  a variety  of  circum- 
stances in  the  constitution,  the  injury,  and  the  after 
treatment,  that  it  must  be  difficult  to  determine. 

To  distinguish  between  an  extrav  asation  and  a con- 
cussion by  the  symptoms  only,  Mr.  Potts  says,  is  fre- 
quently a very  difficult  matter ; sometimes  an  impossi- 
ble one.  The  similarity  of  the  effects,  in  some  cases, 
and  the  very  small  space  of  time  which  may  intervene 
between  the  going  off  of  the  one  and  accession  of  the 
other,  render  this  a very  nice  exercise  of  the  judgment. 
The  first  stunning  or  deprivation  of  sense,  w'hether 
total  or  partial,  may  be  from  either,  and  no  man  can 
tell  from  which  ; but  when  these  first  symptoms  have 
been  removed,  or  have  spontaneously  disappeared,  if 
such  patient  is  again  oppressed  with  drowsiness,  or 
stupidity,  or  total  or  partial  loss  of  sense,  it  then  be- 
comes probable  that  the  first  complaints  were  from 
concussion,  and  that  the  latter  are  from  extravasation ; 
and  the  greater  the  distance  of  time  between  the  two, 
the  greater  is  the  probability  not  only  that  an  extrava- 
sation is  the  cause,  but  that  the  extravasation  is  of 
the  limpid  kind,  made  gradatim,  and  within  the 
brain. 

Whoever  seriously  reflects  on  the  nature  of  these 
two  causes  of  evil  within  the  cranium,  and  considers 
them  as  liable  to  frequent  combination  in  the  same 
subject,  and  at  the  same  time  considers  that,  in  many 
instances,  no  degree  of  information  can  be  obtained 
from  the  only  person  capable  of  giving  it,  (the  patient) 
will  immediately  be  sensible  how  very  difficult  a part 


CON 


a practitioner  has  to  act  in  many  of  these  cases,  and 
how  very  unjust  it  must  be  to  call  that  ignorance 
which  is  only  a just  diffidence  arising  from  the  obscu- 
rity of  the  subject,  and  the  impossibility  of  attaining 
materials  to  form  a clear  judgment. 

Abernethy  observes,  that  in  cases  of  simple  concus- 
sion, the  insensibility  is  not  so  great,  as  where  com- 
pression exists,  the  pupils  are  more  contracted,  the 
muscles  less  relaxed,  little  or  no  stertor  attends,  but 
the  pulse  is  very  intermitting,  and  in  slight  cases  there 
is  often  considerable  sickness. 

Very  different  modes  of  treating  these  accidents 
have  been  practised,  and  no  doubt  the  same  means 
should  not  be  pursued  indiscriminately.  Much  must 
depend  on  the  state  of  the  patient,  when  he  received 
the  injury,  the  degree  of  this,  the  time  which  has 
elapsed  since,  and  other  circumstances.  Abernethy 
considers,  that  in  the  first  stage  little  should  be  done ; 
that  the  stimulants  often  employed  may  be  even  inju- 
rious ; but  more  especially  so  in  the  second  stage,  in- 
creasing the  tendency  to  inflammation ; and  where 
this  has  come  on,  that  the  antiphlogistic  plan  must  be 
actively  pursued.  However,  a moderate  abstraction 
of  blood,  general  or  topical,  will  be  commonly  proper 
at  first,  where  the  habit  will  allow  it,  as  congestion 
may  be  suspected,  and  to  obviate  inflammation,  espe- 
cially where  the  person  was  intoxicated  at  the  time  of 
the  accident ; and  the  effect  of  this  measure  may  influ- 
ence the  subsequent  treatment.  If  the  pulse  rose  after 
it,  and  the  patient  became  more  sensible,  we  should  be 
led  to  pursue  the  evacuating  plan,  taking  perhaps 
more  blood,  exhibiting  active  cathartics,  as  the  bowels 
will  be  found  very  torpid,  applying  cold  lotions  to  the 
head,  &c.  These  means,  however,  will  be  especially 
called  for,  when  marks  of  inflammation  appear. 
Sometimes  brisk  emfetics  have  been  very  beneficial,  as 
sulphate  of  zinc,  <fcc. : they  are  particularly  recom- 
mended, where  the  person  was  under  the  influence  of 
anger ; or  the  stomach  full,  when  the  accident  hap- 
pened; but  they  are  liable  to  objection,  where  there 
are  marks  of  congestion,  or  increased  action  in  the 
vessels  of  the  head.  If  bleeding  should  lower  the 
pulse,  and  render  the  patient  worse,  evacuations  must 
not  be  pursued  ; it  may  be  better  generally  to  wait  the 
gradual  return  of  sensibility,  unless  the  torpor  be 
alarming,  like  a state  of  syncope : in  which  case,  or  if 
it  continue  very  long,  stimulants  appear  justified,  as 
ammonia,  or  others  of  transient  operation,  with  a blis- 
ter to  the  head,  to  restore  some  degree  of  sensibility. 
If,  in  the  sequel,  marks  of  irritation  appear,  as  spasms 
or  convulsions,  opium  joined  with  antimony,  or  in  the 
form  of  Dover’s  powder,  will  probably  be  useful,  the 
necessary  evacuations  being  premised,  and  the  warm 
bath.  In  all  cases  the  head  should  be  kept  quiet;  as 
the  patient  is  convalescent,  tonics,  and  the  shower- 
bath  may  be  employed  with  advantage;  and  it  will 
be  particularly  necessary  to  avoid  great  bodily  ex- 
ertion, stimulating  liquors,  &c.  Should  paralytic 
symptoms  remain,  stimulants,  general  or  local,  may 
be  required.  Where  alarming  symptoms  follow  an 
injury  to  the  head,  extravasation  may  be  suspected : 
and  the  operation  of  trepanning,  skilfully  performed, 
will  do  no  harm  to  the  patient,  but  may  materially 
relieve,  even  by  the  loss  of  blood  attending. 

CONDENSA  TION.  (Condensatio ; from condenso, 
to  make  thick.)  A thickening  of  any  fluid. 

CONDIME'NTUM.  (From  condio,  to  preserve,  or 
season.)  A condiment,  preserve,  or  sweetmeat. 

Condu'ctio.  (From  conduco,  to  draw  along.)  In 
Ccelius  Aurelianus,  it  is  a spasm,  or  convulsion,  draw- 
ing the  muscles  out  of  their  proper  positions. 

CONDUCTOR.  (From  conduco , to  lead,  or  guide.) 
A surgical  instrument,  the  use  of  which  is  to  direct  the 
knife  in  certain  operations.  It  is  more  commonly 
called  a director. 

CONDUPLICATUS.  Folded.  Applied  to  leaves, 
when  the  margins  are  clapped  flatly  together ; as  in 
Roseau  purpurea , and  the  bases  of  sword-shaped 
leaves.  See  Leaf. 

CO'NDYLE.  ( Condylus ; from  kovSv,  an  ancient 
cup,  shaped  like  a joint.)  A round  eminence  of  a 
bone  in  any  of  the  joints. 

CONDYLO  MA.  ( Condyloma , atis.  n.;  from  kov 
iv\os,  a tubercle,  or  knot.)  A soft,  wart-like  excres- 
cence, that  appears  about  the  anus  and  pudendum  of 
both  sexes.  There  are  several  species  of  condylo- 
mata,  which  have  received  names  from  their  appear- 
236 


CON 

ances ; as  ficus,  crysta,  thymus , from  their  resem 
blance  to  a fig,  &c. 

CONE.  See  StroMlus. 

Conei'on.  (From  wav,  to  turn  round.)  In  Hip- 
pocrates it  imports  hemlock.  It  is  said  to  be  thus 
named,  because  it  produces  a vertigo  in  those  who 
take  it  inwardly.  See  Conium. 

Cone'ssi  cortex.  See  Nerium  antidysenteri- 
cum. 

CONFE'CTION.  ( Confectio , oni$.  f. ; from  con- 
ficio,  to  make  up.)  A confection.  In  general,  it 
means  any  thing  made  up  with  sugar.  The  term,  in 
the  new  London  Pharmacopoeia,  includes  those  arti- 
cles which  were  formerly  called  electuaries  and  con- 
serves, between  which  there  do  not  appear  to  be  suffi- 
cient grounds  to  make  a distinction. 

[“  Confections  are  soft  solids,  in  the  composition  of 
which  sugar  forms  a principal  article.  The  term  in- 
cludes what  have  been  called  conserves , made  from 
recent  vegetable  substances,  beaten  with  sugar  as  a 
preservative ; and  electuaries , which  were  formed  of 
dry  powders,  &c.  brought  to  a proper  consistence 
with  syrup,  either  to  facilitate  their  deglutition,  or  to 
conceal  their  taste.” — Big.  Mat.  Med. 

The  Pharmacopoeia  of  the  United  States  has  the 
following  : — Confectio  aromatica , Confectio  aurantii 
corticis , Confectio  cassia , Confectio  rosa,  Confectio 
scammonia , Confectio  senna.  A.] 

Confectio  amygdalarum.  Confection  of  almonds. 
Take  of  sweet  almonds,  an  ounce ; Acacia  gum  pow- 
dered, a drachm  ; refined  sugar,  half  an  ounce.  The 
almonds  having  been  previously  macerated  in  water 
and  their  external  coat  removed,  beat  the  whole  to 
gether,  until  they  are  thoroughly  incorporated.  It  has 
been  objected  to  the  almond  mixture,  which  is  an  article 
of  very  general  use,  that  it  requires  considerable  time 
for  its  extemporaneous  preparation,  and  that  it  spoils, 
and  cannot  be  kept  when  it  is  made.  This  will  be 
obviated  by  the  present  form,  which  does  keep  for  a 
sufficient  length  of  time,  and  rubs  down  into  the  mix- 
ture immediately. 

Confectio  aromatica.  This  preparation  was  for- 
merly called  Confectio  cardiaca.  Confectio  Rcleigk- 
ana.  Take  of  cinnamon  bark,  nutmegs,  of  each  two 
ounces ; cloves,  an  ounce ; cardamom  seeds,  half  an 
ounce;  saffron  dried,  two  ounces;  prepared  shells,  six- 
teen ounces;  refined  sugar  powdered,  two  pounds; 
water,  a pint.  Reduce  the  dry  substances,  mixed  to- 
gether, to  very  fine  powder ; then  add  the  water  gra- 
dually, and  mix  the  whole,  until  it  is  incorporated. 
This  preparation  is  now  much  simplified  by  the  Lon- 
don college.  It  is  an  excellent  medicine,  possessing 
stimulant,  antispasmodic,  and  adstringent  virtues  ; and 
is  exhibited  with  these  views  to  children  and  adults, 
in  a vast  variety  of  diseases,  mixed  with  other  medi- 
cines. It  may  be  given  in  doses  of  10  gr.  to  a 
drachm. 

Confectio  aurantiorum.  Conserva  corticis  exte- 
rioris  aurantii  hispalensis.  Conserva  flavedinus  cor- 
ticum  aurantiorum.  Take  of  fresh  external  rind  of 
oranges,  separated  by  rasping,  a pound  ; refined  sugar, 
three  pounds.  Bruise  the  rind  with  a wooden  pestle, 
in  a stone  mortar ; then,  after  adding  the  sugar,  bruise 
it  again,  until  the  whole  is  thoroughly  incorporated. 
This  is  well  calculated  to  form  the  basis  of  a tonic  and 
stomachic  confection,  and  may  be  given  alone  in 
doses  of  from  two  to  five  drachms,  twice  or  three 
times  a day. 

Confectio  cardiaca.  See  Confectio  aromatica. 

Confectio  cassi.f.  Electuarium  cassia.  Electu- 
arium  e cassia.  Confection  of  cassia.  Take  of  fresh 
cassia  pulp,  half  a pound ; manna,  two  ounces ; tama- 
rind pulp,  an  ounce ; syrup  of  roses,  half  a pint. 
Bruise  the  manna  ; melt  it  in  the  syrup  by  a water- 
bath  ; then  mix  in  the  pulps,  and  evaporate  down  to  a 
proper  consistence.  This  is  a very  elegant,  pleasant, 
and  mild  aperient  for  the  feeble,  and  for  children. 
Dose  from  two  drachms  to  an  ounce. 

Confectio  opii.  Confectio  opiata.  Philonium. 
Londinense.  Philonium  Romanum.  Confection  of 
opium.  Take  of  hard  opium  powdered,  six  drachms; 
long  pepper,  an  ounce ; ginger  root,  two  ounces ; cara- 
way-seeds, three  ounces ; syrup,  a pint.  Rub  together 
the  opium  and  the  syrup  previously  heated ; then  add 
the  remaining  articles  reduced  to  powder,  and  mix. 
To  the  credit  of  modern  pharmacy,  this  is  the  only  one 
that  remains  of  all  those  complicated  and  confused 


CON 


preparations  called  mithridate,  theriaca,  &c. ; it  more 
nearly  approximates,  in  its  composition,  the  philonium 
than  any  other,  and  may  be  considered  as  an  effectual 
substitute  for  them  in  practice.  This  very  warm  and 
stimulating  confection  is  admirably  calculated  to  re- 
lieve diarrhoea,  or  spasms  of  the  stomach  and  bowels, 
and  is  frequently  ordered  in  doses  of  from  10  grs.  to 
half  a drachm.  About  30  grains  contain  one  of' 
opium. 

Confectio  piperis  NiGRi.  Confection  of  black 
pepper.  Take  ©f  black  pepper ; elecampane,  of  each 
a pound ; fennel  seeds,  three  pounds ; honey ; refined 
sugar,  of  each  two  pounds.  Rub  the  dry  ingredients 
together,  so  as  to  reduce  them  to  a very  fine  powder ; 
then,  having  added  the  honey,  rub  them  again,  so  that 
the  whole  may  incorporate.  This  confection  is  given 
internally  against  a relaxed  condition  of  the  extremity 
of  the  rectum,  producing  partial  prolapse,  and  against 
that  piley  state  which  results  from  weakness.  A 
similar  compound  has  been  long  celebrated  and  sold 
under  the  name  of  Ward’s  paste. 

Confectio  ros®  canin®.  Conserva  cynosbati. 
Conserva  fructus  cynosbati.  Conserve  of  hips.  Con- 
fection of  dog-rose.  Take  of  dog-rose  pulp,  a pound  ; 
refined  sugar  powdered,  twenty  ounces.  Expose  the 
pulp  in  a water  bath  to  a gentle  heat ; then  add  the 
sugar  gradually,  and  rub  them  together  until  they  are 
thoroughly  incorporated.  Thjj.  preparation  is  cooling 
and  adstringent ; it  is  seldom  given  alone,  but  mostly 
joined  to  some  other  medicine,  in  the  form  of  linctus, 
or  electuary. 

Confectio  ros®  gallic®.  Conserva  rosm.  Con- 
serva rosarum  rubrarum.  Conserve  of  red  rose. 
Take  of  the  petals  of  the  red  rose,  before  it  is  expanded, 
and  without  the  claws,  a pound ; refined  sugar,  three 
pounds.  Bruise  the  petals  in  a stone  mortar;  then, 
having  added  the  sugar,  beat  them  again  together,  until 
they  are  thoroughly  incorporated.  This  is  an  excel- 
lent sub-astringent  composition.  Rubbed  down  with 
water,  it  forms  an  excellent  drink,  with  some  lemon 
juice,  in  haemorrhagic  complaints;  it  may  also  be 
given  with  vitriolated  zinc,  in  the  form  of  an  electuary. 

Confectio  rut®.  Electuariumebaccis  lauri.  Con- 
fection of  rue.  Take  of  rue  leaves  dried,  caraway 
seeds,  bay-berries,  of  each  an  ounce  and  a half ; saga- 
penum,  half  an  ounce;  black  pepper,  two  drachms; 
clarified  honey,  sixteen  ounces.  Rub  the  dry  articles 
together,  into  a very  fine  powder ; then  add  the  honey, 
and  mix  the  whole.  Its  use  is  confined  to  clysters. 

Confectio  scammOne®.  Electuarium  scammonii. 
Electuarium  e scammonio.  Electuarium  caryocbsti- 
num.  Confection  of  scammony.  Take  of  scammony 
gum  resin  powdered,  an  ounce  and  a half;  cloves 
bruised,  ginger  root  powdered,  of  each,  six  drachms ; 
oil  of  caraway,  half  a drachm  ; syrup  of  roses,  as 
much  as  is  sufficient.  Rub  the  dry  articles  together, 
into  very  fine  powder ; next  rub  them  again  while  the 
syrup  is  gradually  added  ; then  add  the  oil  of  caraway, 
and  mix  the  whole  well  together.  This  is  a strong 
stimulating  cathartic,  and  calculated  to  remove  worms 
fr am  the  primae  vise,  with  which  view  it  is  mostly  ex- 
hibited. Dose  from  3 ss.  to  3j. 

Confectio  senn®.  Electuarium  sennee.  Electu- 
arium lenitivum.  Confection  of  senna.  Take  of  senna 
leaves,  eight  ounces;  figs,  a pound;  tamarind  pulp, 
pulp  of  prunes,  cassia  pulp,  of  each  half  a pound ; 
coriander  seeds,  four  ounces;  liquorice  root,  three 
ounces  ; refined  sugar,  two  pounds  and  a half.  Pow- 
der the  senna  leaves  with  the  coriander  seeds,  and 
separate,  by  sifting  ten  ounces  of  the  mixed  powder. 
Boil  the  remainder  with  the  figs  and  the  liquorice-root, 
in  four  pints  of  water,  until  it  be  reduced  to  half ; then 
press  out  and  strain  the  liquor.  Evaporate  the  liquor, 
until  a pint  and  a half  only  remains  of  the  whole ; 
then  add  the  sugar,  to  make  syrup.  Lastly,  mix  the 
pulps  gradually  with  the  syrup,  and,  having  added  the 
sifted  powder,  mix  the  whole  together.  This  is  a 
mild  and  elegant  aperient,  well  adapted  for  pregnant 
women,  and  those  whose  bowels  are  easily  moved. 
Dose,  3ss.  fss. 

CONFERTUS.  Clustered,  or  crowded  together: 
applied  to  leaves.  See  Leaf. 

CONFE  RVA.  (From  conferveo , to  knit  together.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Crypto  garni  a;  Order,  Algee. 

2.  A kind  of  moss:  named  from  its  use  formerly  in 
healing  broken  bones. 


CON 

Conferva  helminthocortos.  See  Corallina  cor- 

sicana. 

Conferva  rivalis.  This  plant,  Conferva;  jila- 
mentis  simplicissimus  cequalibus  longissimus,  of  Lin- 
naeus, has  been  recommended  in  cases  of  spasmodic 
asthma,  phthisis,  &c.  on  account  of  the  great  quantity 
of  vital  air  it  contains. 

CONFIRM  A'NTI  A.  (From  con,  and  firmo,  to 

strengthen.)  1.  Restoratives. 

2.  Medicines  which  fasten  the  teeth  in  their  sockets* 

CONFLUENT.  Running  together.  Applied  to 
eruptions.  See  Variola. 

CONFLU'XION.  Much  used  by  Hippocrates,  and 
his  interpreter  Galen,  from  a notion  that  parts  at  a 
distance  have  mutual  consent  with  one  another,  and 
that  they  are  all  perspirable  by  many  subtle  streams. 
Paracelsus,  according  to  his  way,  expressed  the  former 
by  confederation. 

CONFORMA'TIO.  (From  conformo,  to  shape  or 
fashion.)  Conformation.  The  natural  shape  and 
form  of  any  part. 

Conforta'ntia.  (From  conforto,  to  strengthen* 
Cordial  and  strengthening  medicines* 

Confortati'va.  The  same. 

Confu'sio.  (From  confundo,  to  mix  tdgether.)  A 
confusion,  or  disorder  in  the  eyes,  proceeding  from  a 
rupture  of  the  membranes,  which  include  the  hu- 
mours, by  which  means  they  are  all  confounded  to- 
gether. 

Congela'ti.  (From  congelo,  to  freeze.)  Congela - 
tici.  Persons  afflicted  with  a catalepsy  are  so  called, 
by  which  all  sensation  seems  to  be  taken  away. 

CONGELA'TION.  (Congelatio ; from  congelo,  to 
freeze.)  That  change  of  liquid  bodies  which  takes 
place  when  they  pass  to  a solid  state,  by  losing  the 
caloric  which  kept  them  in  a state  of  fluidity. 

Conge lati  va.  (From  congelo , to  congeal.)  Medi- 
cines that  inspissate  humours,  and  stop  fluxions  and 
rheums. 

CO'NGENER.  (From  con,  and  gcnUs,  kind.)  Of 
the  same  kind  ; concurring  in  the  same  action.  It  is 
usually  said  of  the  muscles. 

CONGE  STION.  (From  congero,  to  amass.)  A 
collection  of  blood  or  other  fluid  ; thus  we  say  a con- 
gestion of  blood  in  the  vessels,  when  they  are  over  dis- 
tended, and  the  motion  is  slow. 

CONGLOBA  TE.  Conglobatus  ; from  conglobo,  to 
gather  into  a ball.)  1.  A term  applied  to  a gland, 
Glandula  conglobata , which  is  formed  of  a contortion 
of  lymphatic  vessels,  connected  together  by  cellular 
structure,  having  neither  a cavity  nor  any  excretory 
duct:  such  are  the  mesenteric,  inguinal,  axillary 
glands,  &c.  See  Gland. 

2.  A conglobate  flower,  is  a compound  one  growing 
in  the  form  of  a sphere  or  globe. 

CONGLOMERATE.  (.Con glomeral us  ; from  con- 
glomero , to  heap  upon  one.)  1.  Applied  to  a gland, 
Glandula  conglomerata , which  consists  of  a number 
of  smaller  glomerate  glands,  the  excretory  ducts  of 
which  all  unite  into  one  common  duct : such  are  the 
salival,  parotid  glands,  &c. 

2.  Conglomerate  flowers,  are  such  as  are  heaped  to- 
gether on  a footstalk,  to  which  they  are  irregularly, 
but  closely  connected.  See  Panicula. 

CONGLOMERITE.  A compound  mineral  mass, 
in  which  angular  fragments  of  rocks  are  imbedded* 
The  Italian  term  brecchia , has  the  same  meaning.  In 
pudding  stone,  the  imbedded  fragments  are  round, 
bearing  the  marks  of  having  been  polished  by  attrition. 

CONGLUTINA'NTIA.  (From  conglutino,  to  glue 
together.)  Healing  medicines  ; and  such  as  unite  parts 
disjoined  by  accident. 

CONICUS.  Conical.  Applied  to  leaves,  nectaries, 
receptacles,  &c. — Nectarium  conicum,  in  the  Utricu- 
lariafoliosa,  and  the  receptacle  of  the  daisy,  Anthemis 
arvensis , cotula , and  Matricaria  chamomilla. 

CON1FERA1.  Cone-bearing  plants.  The  name  of 
an  order  in  Linnaeus's  Fragments  of  a Natural  Me- 
thod. 

CO'NIS.  Kortj.  Dust;  fine  powder;  ashes;  ank 
in  the  hair ; scurf  from  the  head ; and  sometimes  it 
signifies  lime. 

CONITE.  1.  An  ash  or  greenish-gray  coloured  mi- 
neral, which  becomes  brown  on  exposure  to  air.  It  is 
found  in  Saxony  and  Iceland. 

2.  Dr.  Maccullock  has  given  this  name  to  a pulveru- 
lent mineral,  as  fusible  as  glass  into  a transparent  bead, 

257 


R 


CON 

which  he  found  in  the  trap  hills  of  Kilpatrick,  and  the 
Isle  of  Sky. 

[3.  The  petrifaction  of  a conus.  See  Organic  re- 
lics. A.] 

CONITIM.  '(From  Kovia,  dust,  according  to  Lin- 
naeus ; or  from  Ktovao),  circumago,  on  account  of  its 
inebriating  and  poisonous  quality.)  Hemlock. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  officinal  hem- 
lock. See  Conium  maculatum. 

Comum  maculatum.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
cicuta  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  It  is  called  by  some 
camaran;  by  others  abiotos ; and,  according  to  Ero- 
tian,  cambeion  is  an  old  Sicilian  word  for  cicuta.  Ci- 
cuta major  fmtida.  Conium— seminibus  striatis , of 
Linnaeus. 

Hemlock  is  found  in  every  part  of  England,  and  is 
distinguished  from  those  plants  which  bear  some  re- 
semblance to  it,  by  the  spotted  stem.  It  is  generally 
believed  to  be  a very  active  poison.  In  a very  mode- 
rate dose  it  is  apt  to  occasion  sickness  and  vertigo ; in  a 
larger  quantity  it  produces  anxiety,  cardialgia,  vomit- 
ing, convulsions,  coma,  and  death.  Baron  Stoerk  was 
the  first  who  brought  hemlock  into  repute  as  a medi- 
cine of  extraordinary  efficacy  : and  although  we  have 
not  in  this  country  any  direct  facts,  like  those  men- 
tioned by  Stoerk,  proving  that  inveterate  seirrhuses, 
cancers,  ulcers,  and  many  other  diseases  hitherto  deem- 
ed irremediable,  are  to  be  completely  cured  by  the 
cicuta;  we  have  however  the  testimonies  of  several 
eminent  physicians,  showing  that  some  complaints 
which  had  resisted  other  powerful  remedies,  yielded  to 
hemlock  ; and  that  even  some  disorders,  which  if  not 
really  cancerous,  were  at  least  suspected  to  be  of  that 
tendency,  were  greatly  benefited  by  this  remedy.  In 
chronic  rheumatisms,  some  glandular  swellings,  and  in 
various  fixed  and  periodical  pains,  the  cicuta  is  now 
very  generally  employed ; and  from  daily  experience, 
it  appears  in  such  cases  to  be  a very  efficacious  remedy. 
It  has  also  been  of  singular  use  in  the  hooping-cough. 
Nor  is  it  less  efficacious  when  applied  externally ; a 
poultice  made  of  oatmeal  and  the  expressed  juice,  (or 
a decoction  of  the  extract,  when  the  other  cannot  be 
obtained,)  allays  the  most  excruciating  torturing  pains 
of  a cancer,  and  thus  gives  rest  to  the  distracted  patient. 

The  proper  method  of  administering  conium  inter- 
nally, is  to  begin  with  a few  grains  of  the  powder  or 
inspissated  juice,  and  gradually  to  increase  the  dose 
until  a giddiness  affects  the  head,  amotion  is  felt  in  the 
eyes  as  if  pressed  outwards,  with  a slight  sickness  and 
trembling  agitation  of  the  body.  One  or  more  of  these 
symptoms  are  the  evidence  of  a full  dose,  which  should 
be  continued  until  they  have  ceased,  and  then  after  a 
few  daysthe  dose  may  be  increased;  for  little  advan- 
tage can  be  expected  but  by  a continuance  of  the 
greatest  quantity  the  patient  can  bear.  In  some  con- 
stitutions even  small  doses  greatly  offend,  occasioning 
spasms,  heat  and  thirst ; in  such  instances  it  will  be  of 
no  service.  As  the  powder  of  the  dried  leaves  has 
been  thought  to  act,  and  may  be  depended  upon  with 
more  certainty  than  the  extract,  the  following  direction 
should  be  observed  in  the  preparation: — Gather  the 
plant  about  the  end  of  June,  when  it  is  in  flower; 
pick  off'  the  little  leaves,  and  throw  away  the  leaf- 
stalks: dry  the  small  selected  leaves  in  a hot  sun,  or  in 
a tin  or  pewter  dish  before  the  fire.  Preserve  them  in 
bags  made  of  strong  brown  paper,  or  powder  them 
and  keep  the  powder  in  glass  phials  where  the  light  is 
excluded  ; for  light  dissipates  the  beautiful  green  co- 
lour very  soon,  and  thus  the  medicine  loses  its  appear- 
ance, if  not  its  efficacy : this  mode  is  recommended  by 
Dr.  Withering.  The  extract  should  also  be  made  of 
the  plant  gathered  at  this  period.  From  2 to  20  grains 
of  the  powder  may  be  taken  twice  or  thrice  a day. 

CONJUGATUS.  Conjugate  or  yoked:  applied  to 
leaves,  which  are  said  to  be  conjugate  or  binate.  They 
consist  of  one  pair  of  leaflets ; us  in  the  Mimosa. 

CONJUNCTIVA.  Membrana  conjunctiva.  The 
conjunctive  membrane  of  the  eye ; a thin,  transpa- 
rent, delicate  membrane,  that  lines  the  internal  super- 
ficies of  one  eyelid,  and  is  reflected  from  thence  over 
the  anterior  part  of  the  bulb,  then  reflected  again  to 
the  edge  of  the  other  eyelid.  That  portion  which 
covers  the  transparent  cornea  cannot,  without  much 
difficulty,  be  separated  from  it.  Inflammation  of  this 
membrane  is  called  ophthalmia. 

256 


CON 

CONJUNCTUS.  Conjoined.  A botanical  term 
applied  to  a tuber  which  is  said  to  be  conjoined  whe;- 
in  immediate  contact  with  another,  as  in  many  of  tb< 

Orchid.es. 

CONNA  TUS.  (From  con,  and  nascor , to  grow 
together.)  1.  Bom  with  a person;  the  same  with  con 
genitus. 

2.  In  botany  it  is  applied  to  leaves,  which  are  said 
to  be  connate  when  united  at  their  base ; as  in  Chlora 

perfoliata. 

CONNEXION.  See  Articulation. 

CONNIVENS.  (From  conniveo,  to  make  as  if  he 
did  not  see.)  In  botany  applied  to  petals  of  flowers, 
as  in  those  of  the  Rumex , and  to  the  receptacle  of  the 
fig,  which  the  fruit  really  is,  being  a fleshy  connivent 
receptacle,  enclosing  and  hiding  the  florets. 

Connutri'tus.  (From  cow,  and  n utrior,  to  be 
nourished  with.)  It  is  what  becomes  habitual  to  a 
person  from  his  particular  nourishment,  or  what 
breaks  out  into  a disease  in  process  of  time,  which 
gradually  had  its  foundation  in  the  first  aliments,  as 
from  sucking  a distempered  nurse,  or  the  like. 

Conquassa'tio.  Conquassation.  In  pharmacy  it 
is  a species  of  comminution,  or  an  operation  by  which 
moist  concrete  substances,  as  recent  vegetables,  fruits> 
the  softer  parts  of  animals,  &c.  are  agitated  and 
bruised,  till,  partly  by  their  proper  succulence,  or  by 
the  aff  usion  of  some  lj^uor,  they  are  reduced  to  a soft 
pulp. 

CONRI'NOIUS,  Herman,  was  bom  at  Norden,  in 
East  Friesland,  1606,  and  graduated  in  medicine  at 
Helmstat,  where  he  soon  after  became  professor  in 
that  science,  and  subsequently  in  physics,  law,  and 
politics.  He  was  also  made  physician  and  aulic  coun- 
sellor to  the  Queen  of  Sweden,  the  King  of  Denmark, 
and  several  of  the  German  princes.  He  wrote  nume- 
rous works  in  philosophy,  medicine,  and  history,  dis- 
playing great  learning,  and  long  highly  esteemed.  In 
one  treatise  he  refers  the  degeneracy  of  the  modern 
Germans  to  their  altered  mode  of  living,  the  use  of 
stoves,  tobacco,  &c.  He  published  also  an  “Introduc- 
tion to  the  whole  Art  of  Medicine,  and  its  several 
Parts,”  containing  a History  of  Bibliotheca  Medica, 
with  numerous  Dissertations  on  particular  Diseases. 
He  died  in  1681. 

CONSENT.  Consent  of  parts.  See  Sympathy. 

CONSE'RVA.  (From  coiiservo,  to  keep.)  A con- 
serve. A composition  of  some  recent  vegetable  and 
sugar,  beat  together  into  a uniform  mass  of  the  con- 
sistence of  honey ; as  conserve  of  hips,  orange  peel, 
&c.'  Conserves  are  called  confections  in  the  last  edi- 
tion of  the  London  Pharmacopoeia.  See  Confectio. 

Conserva  absinthii  maritimi.  See  Artemisia 
maritima. 

Conserva  ari.  This  is  occasionally  exhibited  as  a 
stimulant  and  diuretic.  See  Arum  maculatum. 

Conserva  aurantii  hispalensis.  See  Confectio 
aurantiorum. 

Conserva  cynosbati.  See  Confectio  roscc  camina. 

Conserva  LUJULi®.  A preparation  of  woodsorrel, 
possessing  acid,  cooling,  and  antiseptic  qualities.  See 

Oxalis  acetosella. 

Conserva  menthje.  This  preparation  of  mint  is 
given  occasionally  as  a stomachic,  in  sickness  and 
weakness  of  the  stomach.  See  Mentha  viridis. 

Conserva  pruni  sylvkstris.  Astringent  virtues 
are  ascribed  to  this  medicine,  which  is  now  seldom 
used  but  in  private  formulte. 

Conserva  ros.e.  This  conserve,  rubbed  down  with 
water,  to  which  is  added  some  lemon-juice,  forms  an 
excellent  drink  in  hemorrhagic  complaints.  See  Con- 
fectio rosce  gallicce. 

Conserva  scill/e.  A preparation  of  squills,  which 
affords  an  excellent  basis  for  an  electuary,  possessing 
expectorant  and  diuretic  qualities. 

[Conservatives.  See  Organic  relics.  A.] 

Consiste'ntia.  (From  consisto , to  abide.)  The 
state  or  acme  of  a disease.  The  appearance  or  state 
of  the  humours  and  excrements. 

CONSO'LIDA.  (So  called,  quia  consolidandi  et 
conglutinandi  vi  pollet ; from  its  power  in  agglutina- 
ting and  joining  together  things  broken.)  See  Sym- 
phytum. 

Consolida  aurra.  See  Solidago  virga  aurea. 

Consolida  major.  See  Symphytum. 

Consolida  media.  See  Ajuga  pyramidalit 

Consolida  minor.  See  Prundla. 


CON 


CON 


Oonsolida  rkgalis.  See  Delphinium,  consoltaa.  1 

Oonsolida  saracenica.  See  Solidago  virga.  aurea. 

CONSOUND.  See  Symphytum. 

'Consound  middle.  See  A jug  a pyramidalis. 

CONSTANTI'NUS,  Africanus,  was  born  at  Car- 
thage, towards  the  middle  of  the  11th  century.  He 
lived  near  forty  years  at  Babylon,  and  was  celebrated 
for  his  knowledge  of  the  Eastern  languages.  Among 
the  sciences,  medicine  appears  to  have  principally 
occupied  his  attention ; and  two  of  his  works  were 
thought  deserving  of  being  printed  at  B&le,  about  4 1-2 
centuries  after  his  death,  which  occurred  in  1087.  They 
ars  thought  however  to  have  been  chiefly  translated 
from  Arabian  writers. 

CONSTIPATION.  ( Constipatio  : from  constipo, 
to  crowd  together.)  Obstipatio.  Costiveness.  A 
person  is  said  to  be  costive  when  the  alvine  excre- 
ments are  not  expelled  daily,  and  when  the  faeces  are 
so  hardened  as  not  to  receive  their  form  from  the  im- 
pression of  the  rectum  upon  them. 

CONSTITUTION.  Constitutio.  The  general  con- 
dition of  the  body,  as  evinced  by  the  peculiarities  in 
the  performance  of  its  functions:  such  are,  the  pecu- 
liar predisposition  to  certain  diseases,  or  liability  of 
particular  organs  to'disease ; the  varieties  in  digestion, 
in  muscular  power  and  motion,  in  sleep,  in  the  appe- 
tite, <fcc.  Some  marked  peculiarities  of  constitution 
are  observed  to  be  accompanied  with  certain  external 
characters,  such  as  a particular  colour  and  texture  of 
the  skin,  and  of  the  hair,  and  also  with  a peculiarity  of 
form  and  disposition  oft  mind  ; all  of  which  have  been 
observed  fiom  the  earliest  time,  and  divided  into 
classes : and  which  received  names  during  the  preva- 
lence of  the  humeral  pathology  which  they  still  retain. 
See  Temperament. 

Constricti'va.  (From  constringo , to  bind  toge- 
ther.,) Styptics. 

CONSTRI  CTOR.  (From  constringo , to  bind  toge- 
ther.) A name  given  to  those  muscles  which  con- 
tract any  opening  of  the  body. 

Constrictor  al^e  nasi.  See  Depressor  labii  su- 
perioris  alceque  nasi. 

Constrictor  ani.  See  Sphincter  ani. 

Constrictor  isthmi  faucium.  Glosso-stapliilinus. 
of  Winslow,  Douglas,  and  Cowper ; and  Glosso  sta- 
philin  of  Dumas.  A muscle  situated  at  the  side  of 
the  entry  of  the  fauces,  that  draws  the  velum  pendu- 
lum palati  towards  the  root  of  the  tongue,  which  it 
raises  at  the  same  time,  and  with  its  fellow  contracts 
the  passage  between  the  two  arches,  by  which  it  shuts 
the  opening  of  the  fauces. 

Constrictor  labiorum.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

Constrictor  oris.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

Constrictor  palpebrarum.  See  Orbicularis  pal- 
pebrarum. 

Constrictores  pharyng.ei.  The  muscles  of  the 
oesophagus. 

Constrictor  pharyngis  inferior.  Crico  pha- 
ryngeus ; Thyro-pharyngeus  of  Douglas  and  Win- 
slow. Cricothyropharyngien  of  Dumas.  A muscle 
situated  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  pharynx.  It 
arises  from  the  side  of  the  thyroid  cartilage,  near  the 
attachment  of  the  sterno-hyoideus  and  thyro-hyoideus 
muscles ; and  from  the  cricoid  cartilage,  near  the 
crico-thyroideus ; it  is  inserted  into  the  white  line, 
where  it  joins  with  its  fellow,  the  superior  fibres  run- 
ning obliquely  upwards,  covering  nearly  one-half  of 
the  middle  constrictor,  and  terminating  in  a point ; the 
inferior  fibres  run  more  transversely,  and  cover  the 
beginning  of  the  oesophagus.  Its  use  is  to  compress 
that  part  of  the  pharynx  which  it  covers,  and  to  raise 
it  with  the  larynx  a little  upwards. 

Constrictor  pharyngis  medius.  Hyopharyn- 
geus  and  cephalo-pharyngeus  of  Douglas  and  Win- 
slow. Chondro-pharyngeus  of  Douglas.  Syndesmo- 
pharyngeus  of  Winslow.  Cephalo-pharyngeus  of 
Winslow  and  Douglas.  Hyo-glosso  basi  pharyngien 
of  Dumas.  A muscle  situated  on  the  posterior  part  of 
the  pharynx.  It  arises  from  the  appendix  of  the  os 
hyoides,  from  the  cornu  of  that  bone,  and  from  the 
ligament  which  connects  it  to  the  thyroid  cartilage ; the 
fibres  of  the  superior  part  running  obliquely  upwards, 
and  covering  a considerable  part  of  the  superior  con- 
strictor, terminate  in  a point ; and  it  is  inserted  into 
the  middle  of  the  cuneiform  process  of  the  os  occipitis, 
before  the  foramen  magnum,  and  joined  to  its  fellow 
at  a white  line  in  the  middle  part  of  the  pharynx 

R 2 


This  muscle  compresses  that  part  of  the  pharynx 
which  it  covers,  and  draws  it  and  the  os  hyoides  up- 
wards. 

Constrictor  pharyngis  superior.  Glosso-pha- 
ryngeus  ; Mylo-pharyngeus  ; Pterygo-pharyngeus  of 
Douglas  and  Winslow,  and  Pterigo  syndesmo  staphili 
pharyngien  of  Dumas.  A muscle  situated  on  the  pos- 
terior part  of  the  pharynx.  It  arises  above,  from  the 
cuneiform  process  of  tiie  os  occipitis,  before  the  fora- 
men magnum,  from  the  pterygoid  process  of  the  sphe- 
noid bone,  from  the  upper  and  under  jaw,  near  the 
roots  of  the  last  dentes  molares,  and  between  the 
jaws.  It  is  inserted  in  the  middle  of  the  pharynx  Its 
use  is  to  compress  the  upper  part  of  the  pharynx,  and 
to  draw  it  forwards  and  upwards. 

Constrictor  vesicje  urinaria.  See  Detrusor 
urince. 

CONSTRICTO'RIUS.  A disease  attended  with 
constriction,  or  spasm. 

Constringen'tia.  (From  constringo , to  bind  to- 
gether.) Astringent  medicines.  See  Astringent. 

CONSUMPTION.  (From  consumo,  to  waste  away.) 
See  Phthisis. 

Contabesce'ntia.  (From  contabesco , to  pine  or 
w'aste  away.)  An  atrophy,  or  nervous  consumption. 

CONTAGION.  (Contagio ; from  contango , to 
meet  or  touch  each  other.)  This  word  properly  im- 
ports the  application  of  any  poisonous  matter  to  the 
body  through  the  medium  of  touch.  It  is  applied  to 
those  very  subtile  particles  arising  from  putrid  sub- 
stances, or  from  persons  labouring  under  certain  dis- 
eases, which  communicate  the  disease  to  others ; as 
the  contagion  of  putrid  fever,  the  effluvia  of  dead  ani- 
mal or  vegetable  substances,  the  miasm  of  bogs  and 
fens,  the  virus  of  smallpox,  lues  venerea,  &c.  &.c. 

The  principal  diseases  excited  by  poisonous  mias- 
mata are,  intermittent,  remittent,  and  yellow  fevers, 
dysentery,  and  typhus.  That  of  the  last  is  generated  in 
the  human  body  itself,  and  is  sometimes  called  the 
typhoid  fomes.  The  other  miasmata  are  produced 
from  moist  vegetable  matter,  in  some  unknown  state  of 
decomposition.  The  contagious  virus  of  the  plague, 
smallpox,  measles,  chincough,  cynanche  maligna,  and 
scarlet  fever,  as  well  as  of  typhus  and  the  jail  fever, 
operates  to  a much  more  limited  distance  through  the 
intermedium  of  the  atmosphere,  than  the  marsh  mias- 
mata. Contact  of  a diseased  person  is  said  to  be  ne- 
cessary for  the  communication  of  plague;  and  ap- 
proach within  2 or  3 yards  of  him,  for  that  of  typhus. 
The  Walclieren  miasmata  extended  their  pestilential 
influence  to  vessels  riding  at  anchor,  fully  a quarter  of 
a mile  from  the  shore. 

The  chemical  nature  of  all  these  poisonous  effluvia 
is  little  understood.  They  undoubtedly  consist,  how- 
ever, of  hydrogen,  united  with  sulphur,  phosphorus, 
carbon,  and  azot,  in  unknown  proportions,  and  un- 
known states  of  combination.  The  proper  neutral- 
izers or  destroyers  of  these  gasiform  poisons,  are  nitric 
acid  vapour,  muriatic  acid  gas,  and  chlorine.  The  last 
two  are  the  most  efficacious ; but  require  to  be  used 
in  situations  from  which  the  patients  can  be  removed 
at  the  time  of  the  application.  Nitric  acid  vapour 
may,  however,  be  diffused  in  the  apartments  of  the 
sick,  without  much  inconvenience.  Bed-clothes,  par- 
ticularly blankets,  can  retain  the  contagious  fomes,  in 
an  active  state,  for  almost  any  length  of  lime.  Hence, 
they  ought  to  be  fumigated  with  peculiar  care.  The 
vapour  of  burning  sulphur  or  sulphurous  acid  is  used 
in  the  East,  against  the  plague.  It  is  much  inferior  in 
power  to  the  other  antiloimic  reagents. 

There  does  not  appear  to  be  any  distinction  com- 
monly made  between  contagious  and  infectious  dis- 
eases. 

[The  very  evident  distinction  has  long  since  been  made 
and  employed  in  this  country.  Contagion  is  applied 
to  those  diseases  which  are  propagated  from  one  to 
another  by  contact  or  close  approach,  and  which 
produces  a like  disease ; as  the  venereal  disease,  itch, 
smallpox,  measles,  &c.  Diseases  produced  by  infec- 
tion, are  those  contracted  from  a vitiated  atmosphere, 
as  intermittent,  remittent,  bilious,  and  yellow  fevers. 
In  1819  and  1822,  we  had  the  yellow-fever  in  New- 
York,  and  the  board  of  health  shut  up  that  part 
of  the  city  where  the  disease  prevailed,  by  running 
fences  across  the  streets  leading  to  it.  This  was  called 
the  infected  district , from  the  local  causes  contami- 
nating the  atmosphere  and  producing  the  infection. 

239 


CON 


Beyond  this  district  the  city  was  not  unhealthy,  and 
those  who  were  taken  sick  in  the  infected  district, 
when  removed  to  other  parts  not  infected,  recovered, 
and  did  not  communicate  the  disease  to  others.  A.] 

Conte'nsio.  (From  contineo , to  restrain.)  It  is 
sometimes  used  to  express  a tension  or  stricture. 

Co'ntinens  febris.  A continent  fever,  which  pro- 
ceeds regularly  in  the  same  tenor,  without  either  exa- 
cerbation or  remission.  This  rarely,  if  ever,  happens. 

Conti'nua  febris.  (From  continuo,  to  persevere.; 
A continued  fever.  See  Febris  contj.nua. 

CONTINUED.  Continuus ; from  continuo , to  per- 
severe.) A term  applied  in  pathology  to  diseases 
which  go  on  with  a regular  tenor  of  symptoms,  but 
mostly  to  fevers,  the  symptoms  of  which  continue, 
without  intermission,  until  the  disease  terminates: 
lienee  continual  fevers  in  distinction  to  intermittent 
fevers. 

CONTINUUS.  See  Continued. 

CONTO'RSIO.  (From  contorqueo , to  twist  about.) 
A contortion,  or  twisting.  In  medicine  this  word  has 
various  significations,  and  is  applied  to  the  iliac  pas- 
sion, to  luxation  of  the  vertebra;,  head,  &c. 

CONTORTA3.  Twisted  plants.  The  name  of  an 
order  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method, 
consisting  of  plants  which  have  a single  petal  that  is 
twisted  or  bent  toward  the  side,  as  Nerium  Vinca , &c. 

CONTORTUS.  (From  con,  and  torqueo,  to  twist.) 
Twisted.  Applied  to  the  seed-vessel  of  plants : as  the 
legumen  contortum  of  the  Medicago  sativa 

CONTRA-APERTURA.  (From  contra,  against, 
and  aperio , to  open.)  A counter-opening.  An  open- 
ing made  opposite  to  the  one  that  already  exists. 

CONTRACTILITY.  Contractilitas.  A property 
in  bodies,  the  effect  of  the  cohesive  power,  by  which 
their  particles  resume  their  former  propinquity  when 
the  force  ceases  which  was  applied  to  separate  them. 
It  also  denotes  the  power  which  muscular  fibres  pos- 
sess of  shortening  themselves. 

CONTRACTION.  (From  contraho,  to  draw  toge- 
ther.) Contractura  ; Beriberia.  A rigid  contraction 
of  the  joints.  It  is  a genus  of  disease  in  the  class  lo- 
cales, and  order  Dyscinesicc  of  Cullen.  The  species 
are, 

1.  Contractura  primaria , from  a rigid  contraction 
of  the  muscles,  called  also  obstipitas;  a word  that, 
with  any  other  annexed,  distinguishes  the  variety  of 
the  contraction.  Of  this  species  he  forms  four  va- 
rieties. 1.  Contractura  ab  inflammatione,  when  it 
arises  from  inflammation.  2.  Contractura  a spasmo, 
called  also  tonic  spasm  and  cramp,  when  it  depends 
Upon  spasm.  3.  Contractura  ob  antagonistas  parali- 
ticos , from  the  antagonist  muscles  losing  their  action. 
4.  Contractura  ab  acrimonid  irritantc,  which  is  in- 
duced by  some  irritating  cause. 

2.  Contractura  articularis,  originating  from  a dis- 
ease of  the  joint. 

CONTRAFISSU'RA.  (From  contra,  against,  and 
findo,  to  cleave.)  Contre-coup  of  French  writers.  A 
fracture  in  a part  opposite  to  that  in  which  the  blow 
is  received  ; as  when  the  frontal  bone  is  broken  by  a 
fall  on  the  occiput,  where  the  bone  remains  sound. 

Contrahe'ntla.  (From  contraho,  to  contract.) 
Medicines  which  shorten  and  strengthen  the  fibres. 
Astringents  are  the  only  medicines  of  this  nature. 

CONTRA-INDICATION.  (Conlra-indicatio ; from 
contra,  against,  and  indico,  to  show.)  A symptom 
attending  a disease,  which  forbids  the  exhibition  of  a 
remedy  which  would  otherwise  be  employed  ; for  in- 
stance, bark  and  acids  are  usually  given  in  putrid 
fevers ; but  if  there  be  difficulty  of  breathing,  or  in- 
flammation of  any  viscus,  they  are  contra-indications 
to  their  use. 

Contra-luna'ris.  (From  contra,  and  luna,  the 
moon.)  An  epithet  given 'by  Dietericus  to  a woman 
who  conceives  during  the  menstrual  discharge. 

Contra-semen.  See  Artemisia  Santonica. 

CONTRA  YE'RVA.  (From  contra,  against,  and 

yerva,  poison,  Span. ; i.  e.  an  herb  good  against  poison.) 
See  Dorstenia. 

Contrayerva  alba.  Cantrayerva  Ocrmanorum. 
A name  for  a species  of  asclepias. 

Contrayerva  nova.  Mexican  contrayerva.  See 
Psoralea  pentaphylla. 

Contrayerva  virginiana.  See  Aristolochia  ser- 
pentaria. 

Contre-coup.  See  Contrajissura. 

260 


CON 

CONTRI'TIO.  The  act  of  grinding,  or  reducing  to 
powder. 

CONTUSION.  (Contusio ; from  contundo , to  knock 
together.)  A bruise,  or  contused  wound. 

CONUS.  A cone.  See  Strobilus. 

CONVALESCENCE.  ( Convalescents  a ; from  con- 
valesco,  to  grow  well.)  The  recovery  of  health  after 
the  cure  of  a disease.  The  period  of  convalescence  i s 
that  space  from  the  departure  of  a disease,  to  the  re- 
covery of  the  strength  lost  by  it. 

CONVALESCENT.  Recovering  or  returning  to  a 
state  of  health  after  the  cure  of  a disease. 

CONVALLA'RIA.  (From  convallis,  a valley; 
named  from  its  abounding  in  valleys  and  marshes.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Hexandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Con vall aria  majalis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lily  of  the  valley.  Lillium  convallivm;  Convallaria  ; 
Maianthemum.  May-lily.  The  flowers  of  this  plant, 
Convallaria — scapo  nudo  of  Linnaeus,  have  a pene- 
trating bitter  taste,  and  are  given  in  nervous  and  catar- 
rhal disorders.  When  dried  and  powdered,  they  prove 
strongly  purgative.  Watery  or  spirituous  extracts 
made  from  them,  given  in  doses  of  a scruple,  or  drachm, 
act  as  gentle  stimulating  aperients  and  laxatives ; and 
seem  to  partake  of  the  purgative  virtue,  as  well  as  the 
bitterness  of  aloes.  The  roots,  in  the  form  of  tincture, 
or  infusion,  act  as  a sternutatory  when  snuffed  up  the 
nose,  and  as  a laxative  or  purgative  when  taken  inter- 
nally. 

Convallaria  polygonatum.  The  systematic  name 
of  Solomon’s  seal.  Sigillum  Salomonis  ; Convallaria 
— foliis  altemis  ample  xicaulibus,  caule  ancipiti,  pe- 
dunculis  axillaribus  subunijloris , of  Linnaeus.  The 
roots  are  applied  externally  as  adstringents,  and  are 
administered  internally  as  corroborants. 

CONVEXUS.  Convex.  A term  in  very  general 
use  in  anatomy,  botany,  &c. 

Convolb'ta  ossa.  See  Spongiosa  ossa. 

CONVOLU'TUS.  Rolled  up  or  folded.  Applied 
to  bones,  membranes,  leaves,  &c. 

CONVO'LVULUS.  (From  convolvo,  to  roll  toge- 
ther, or  entwine.) 

1.  A name  for  the  iliac  passion. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnrean 
system,  so  called  from  their  twisting  round  others, 
(Class,  Pcntandria ; Order,  Monogynia ,)  which  affords 
the  Jalapa,  mechoacanna,  turbith,  and  scammony. 
The  whole  genus  consists  of  plants  containing  a milky 
juice  strongly  cathartic  and  caustic. 

Convolvulus  americanus.  The  jalap  root.  See 
Convolvulus  j alap  a. 

Convolvulus  batatas.  Batatas.  A native  of 
the  West  Indies.  Its  root  is  firm  and  of  a pale  brown 
on  the  outside,  and  white  within.  When  boiled  it  is 
sweet,  like  cliesnuts,  and  is  esteemed  by  some  as  an 
esculent. 

[This  is  the  sweet  potato,  extensively  cultivated  and 
eaten  in  all  the  southern  parts  of  the  United  States, 
even  as  far  north  as  New-Jersey.  It  is  commonly 
called  the  Carolina  potato.  See  Batatas.  A.] 

Convolvulus  cantabrica.  A name  for  the  can- 
tabrica.  Convolvulus  minimus  spiccc  foliis ; Convol- 
vulus UnaricD  folio ; Convolvulus  Cantabrica  of  Lin- 
na:us.  Lavender-leaved  bind  weed.  Pliny  says  it 
was  discovered  in  the  time  of  Augustus,  in  the  coun- 
try of  the  Cantabri  in  Spain ; whence  its  name.  It  is 
anthelmintic  and  actively  cathartic. 

Convolvulus  colubrinus.  The  pariera  brava. 
See  Cissarnpelos  pareira. 

Convolvulus  jalapa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
jalap  plant.  Jalapium  mechoacanna  nigra.  Convol 
vulus;  caule  volubli ; foliis  ovatis , subcordatis,  ob - 
tusis , obsolete  repandis,  subtus  villosis  ; pcdunculis 
unifloris  of  Linnams.  It  is  a native  of  South  Ameri- 
ca. In  the  shops,  the  root  is  found  both  cut  into  slices 
and  whole,  of  an  oval  shape,  solid,  ponderous,  black- 
ish on  the  outside,  but  gray  within,  and  marked  with 
several  dark  veins,  by  the  number  of  which,  and  by 
its  hardness,  heaviness,  and  dark  colour,  the  goodness 
of  the  root  is  to  be  estimated.  It  has  scarcely  any 
smell,  and  very  little  taste,  but  to  the  tongue,  and  to 
the  throat,  manifests  a slight  degree  of  pungency. 
The  medicinal  activity  of  jalap  resides  principally,  if 
not  wholly,  in  the  resin,  which,  though  given  in  small 
doses,  occasions  violent  tormina.  The  root  powdered 
is  a very  common,  efficacious,  and  safe  purgative,  as 


CON 


CON 


daily  experience  evinces;  but,  according  as  it  contains 
more  or  less  resin,  its  effects  must  of  course  vary.  In 
large  doses,  or  when  joined  with  calomel,  it  is  recom- 
mended as  an  anthelmintic  and  hydragogue.  In  the 
pharmacopoeias,  this  root  is  ordered  in  the  form  of 
tincture  and  extract ; and  the  Edinburgh  College  di- 
rects it  also  in  powder,  with  twice  its  weight  of  crys- 
tals of  tartar. 

Convolvulus  major  albus.  See  Convolvulus 
sepium. 

Convolvulus  maritimus.  The  brassica  mari- 
tima,  or  sea  colewort. 

Convolvulus  mechoacan.  Mechoacanna;  Jalapa 
alba;  or  Bryonia  alba  Peruviana;  Rhabarbarum 
album.  Mechoacan.  The  root  of  this  species  of  con- 
volvulus is  brought  from  Mexico.  It  possesses  aperi- 
ent properties,  and  was  long  used  as  the  common 
purge  of  this  country,  but  is  now  wholly  superseded  by 
jalap. 

[“  Convolvulus  panduratus.  Wild  potato.  The 
affinity  of  this  plant  to  jalap,  in  its  botanical  charac- 
ter, has  caused  a medicinal  quality  to  be  ascribed  to  it 
which  it  does  not  possess.  It  is  one  of  the  weakest  of 
our  indigenous  cathartics,  and  requires  too  large  a dose 
to  be  of  much  use  in  that  character.  It  is  said  to  miti- 
gate strangury  and  gravel,  and  to  operate  as  a diuretic.” 
— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Convolvulus  scammonia.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  scammony  plant.  See  Scammonium;  Con- 
volvulus syriacus  ; Scammonium  syriacum ; Diagry- 
dium.  This  plant,  Convolvulus — foliis  sagittatis  pos- 
tice truncatis , pedunculis  teretibus  subtifloris  of  Lin- 
naeus, affords  the  concrete  gummi-resinous  juice  termed 
scammony.  It  grows  plentifully  about  Maraash,  An- 
tioch, Eallib,  and  towards  Tripoli,  in  Syria.  No  part 
of  the  dried  plant  possesses  any  medicinal  quality,  but 
the  root,  which  Dr.  Russel  administered  in  decoction, 
and  found  it  to  be  a pleasant  and  mild  cathartic.  It  is 
from  the  milky  juice  of  the  root  that  we  obtain  the 
officinal  scammony,  which  is  procured  in  the  follow- 
ing manner  by  the  peasants,  who  collect  it  in  the  be- 
ginning of  June.  Having  cleared  away  the  earth  from 
about  the  root,  they  cut  off  the  top  in  an  oblique  di- 
rection, about  two  inches  below  where  the  stalks 
spring  from  it.  Under  the  most  depending  part  of 
the  slope,  they  fix  a shell,  or  some  other  convenient  re- 
ceptacle, into  which  the  milky  juice  gradually  flows. 
It  is  left  there  about  twelve  hours,  which  time  is  suffi- 
cient for  draining  off  the  whole  juice;  this,  however, 
is  in  small  quantity,  each  root  affording  but  a very  few 
drachms.  This  juice  from  the  several  roots  is  put 
together,  often  into  the  leg  of  an  old  boot,  for  want  of 
some  more  proper  vessel,  where,  in  a little  time,  it 
grows  hard,  and  is  the  genuine  scammony.  The  smell 
of  scammony  is  rather  unpleasant,  and  the  taste  bit- 
terish and  slightly  acrid.  The  different  proportions 
of  gum  and  resin,  of  which  it  consists,  have  been  vari- 
ously stated ; but,  as  proof  spirit  is  the  best  menstruum 
for  it,  these  substances  are  supposed  to  be  nearly  in 
equal  parts.  It  is  brought  from  Aleppo  and  Smyrna 
in  masses,  generally  of  a light  shining  gray  colour,  and 
friable  texture;  of  rather  an  unpleasant  smell,  and 
bitterish  and  slightly  acrid  taste.  The  scammony  of 
Aleppo  is  by  far  the  purest.  That  of  Smyrna  is  pon- 
derous, black,  and  mixed  with  extraneous  matters. 
Scammony  appears  to  have  been  well  known  to  the 
Greek  and  Arabian  physicians,  and  was  exhibited  in- 
ternally as  a purgative,  and  externally  for  the  itch, 
tinea,  fixed  pains,  &c.  It  is  seldom  given  alone,  but 
enters  several  compounds,  which  are  administered  as 
purgatives. 

Convolvulus  sepium.  Convolvulus  major,  albus. 
The  juice  of  this  plant,  Convolvulus— foliis  sagittatis 
postice  truncatis  pedunculis  tetragonis , unifloris , of 
Linnams,  is  violently  purgative,  and  given  in  dropsical 
affections.  A poultice  of  the  herb,  made  with 
oil,  is  recommended  in  white  swellings  of  the  knee 
joint. 

Convolvulus  soldanella.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  sea  convolvulus.  KpaySr/  SaXaooia.  Brassica 
marina;  Convolvulus  maritimus;  Soldanella.  Sol- 
danella. This  plant,  Convolvulus— foliis  reniformi- 
bus,  pedunculis  unifloris , of  Linnaeus,  is  a native  of 
our  coasts.  The  leaves  are  said  to  be  a drastic  purge. 
It  is  only  used  by  the  common  people,  the  pharmaco- 
poeias having  now  substituted  more  safe  and  valuable 
remedies  in  its  place. 


Convolvulus  syriacus.  The  scammony  plant 
See  Convolvulus  scammonia. 

Convolvulus  turpethum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  turbith  plant.  Turpethum.  The  cortical  part 
of  the  root  of  a species  of  convolvulus,  brought  from 
the  East  Indies,  in  oblong  pieces : it  is  of  a brown  or 
ash  colour  on  the  outside,  and  whitish  within.  The 
best  is  ponderous,  not  wrinkled,  easy  to  break,  and 
•discovers  to  the  eye  a large  quantity  of  resinous  mat- 
ter. When  chewed,  it  at  first  imparts  a sweetish  taste, 
which  is  followed  by  a nauseous  acrimony.  It  is  consi- 
dered as  a purgative  liable  to  much  irregularity  of  action- 

CONVULSION.  ( Convulsio ; from  convcllo)  to  pull 
together.)  Hieranosos ; Distentio  nervorum ; Syspa- 
cia  convulsio  of  Good.  Clonic  spasm.  A diseased 
action  of  muscular  fibres,  known  by  alternate  re- 
laxations, with  violent  and  involuntary  contractions 
of  the  muscular  parts,  without  sleep.  Cullen  arranges 
convulsion  in  the  class  Neuroses , and  order  Spasmi. 
Convulsions  are  universal  or  partial,  and  have  obtain- 
ed different  names,  according  to  the  parts  affected,  or 
the  symptoms ; as  the  risus  sardonicus , when  the 
muscles  of  the  face  are  affected ; St.  Vitus’s  dance, 
when  the  muscles  of  the  arm  are  thrown  into  invo- 
luntary motions,  with  lameness  and  rotations.  The 
hysterical  epilepsy,  or  other  epilepsies,  arising  from 
different  causes,  are  convulsive  diseases  of  the  uni- 
versal kind : the  muscles  of  the  globe  of  the  eye, 
throwing  the  eye  into  involuntary  distortions  in  defi- 
ance of  the  direction  of  the  will,  are  instances  of  par- 
tial convulsion.  The  muscles  principally  affected  in 
all  species  of  convulsions,  are  those  immediately  under 
the  direction  of  the  will ; as  those  of  the  eyelids,  eye, 
face,  jaws,  neck,  superior  and  inferior  extremities. 
The  muscles  of  respiration,  acting  both  voluntarily  and 
involuntarily,  are  not  unfrequently  convulsed  ; as  the 
diaphragm,  intercostals,  &c.  The  more  immediate 
causes  of  convulsions  are,  1.  Either  mental  affection, 
or  any  irritating  cause  exciting  a greater  action  in  the 
arterial  system  of  the  brain  and  nerves.  2.  An  in- 
crease of  nervous  energy,  which  seems  to  hold  pace  or 
be  equipment  with  the  increased  arterial  energy  ex- 
cited in  the  brain.  3.  This  increased  energy,  convey- 
ing its  augmented  effects,  without  the  direction  of  the 
will,  to  any  muscles  destined  to  voluntary  motion, 
over-irritates  them.  4.  The  muscles,  irritated  by  the 
increased  nervous  energy  and  arterial  influx,  contract 
more  forcibly  and  involuntarily  by  their  excited  vis 
insita,  conjointly  with  other  causes,  as  long  as  the  in- 
creased nervous  energy  continues.  5.  This  increased 
energy  in  the  nervous  system  may  be  excited  either  by 
the  mind,  or  by  any  acrimony  in  the  blood,  or  other 
stimuli  sufficiently  irritating  to  increase  the  arterial 
action,  nervous  influence,  and  the  vires  insitte  of 
muscles.  6.  After  muscles  have  been  once  accustom- 
ed to  act  involuntarily,  and  with  increased  action,  the 
same  causes  can  readily  produce  the  same  effects  on 
those  organs.  7.  All  parts  that  have  muscular  fibres 
may  be  convulsed.  8.  The  sensations  in  the  mind 
most  capable  of  producing  convulsions,  are  timidity, 
horror,  anger,  great  sensibility  of  the  soul,  «§cc. 

Convulsio  canina.  A wry  mouth. 

Convulsio  cerealis.  Cereal  convulsion  is  a sin- 
gular disorder  of  the  spasmodic  convulsive  kind,  not 
common  to  this  country,  but  mentioned  by  Cartheuser 
under  this  title,  from  the  peculiar  tingling  and  formi- 
cation perceived  in  the  arms  and  legs.  Motus  spas- 
nodicus  of  Hoffman.  It  is  endemial  in  some  places 
in  Germany ; but  more  a rural  than  urbanical  disor- 
der, said  to  arise  from  the  use  of  spoiled  corn. 

Convulsio  habitualis.  Saint  Vitus’s  dance.  See 
Chorea  Sancti  Viti. 

CONY'ZA.  (From  kovis , dust ; because  its  powder 
is  sprinkled  to  kill  fleas  in  places  where  thevare  trou- 
blesome.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class  Syngenesia;  Order,  Polygamia 
superflua.  There  is  some  difficulty  in  ascertaining  the 
plants  called  conyzas  by  the  older  practitioners:  they 
are  either  of  the  genus  conyza,  inula,  gnaphalium,  eri- 
geron,  or  chrysocoma. 

Conyza  ^ethiopica.  The  plant  so  called  is  most 
probably  the  Chrysocoma  comaurea  of  Willdenow,  a 
shrub  which  grows  wild  about  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,  and  is  cultivated  in  our  green-houses,  because  it 
flowers  the  greater  part  of  the  year. 

Conyza  ccerulea.  The  Erigeron  acre  of  Linntsua 
answers  to  the  description  of  this  plant. 


261 


COP 


COP 

Conyza  major.  Supposed  to  be  the  Inula  viscosa 
of  Linnaeus. 

Conyza  major  vulgaris.  See  Inula  dysenterica. 

Conyza  media.  See  Inula  dysenterica. 

Conyza  minor.  The  Inula  pulicaris  of  Linnaeus 
answers  to  the  description  given  of  this  plant  in 
most  books.  Its  chief  use  is  to  destroy  fleas  and 
gnats. 

Cooperto'ria.  (From  co-operio , to  cover  over.) 
The  thyroid  cartilage. 

Coo'strum.  The  centre  of  the  diaphragm. 

COPA  IBA.  [Copaiba,  . a.  foem. ; from  copal,  the 
American  name  for  any  odoriferous  gum,  and  iba,  or 
iva , a tree.)  The  name  given  by  the  College  of  Physi- 
cians of  London  to  the  balsam  of  copaiva.  See  Co- 
paifera  officinalis. 

COPAI'FERA.  (From  Copaiva,  theindian  name, 
and  fero,  to  bear.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnsan  system.  Class,  Decandria;  Order,  Mo- 
noo-ynia. 

Copaifera  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  from  which  the  Copaiba  balsam,  Balsamum 
Braziliense  ; Balsamum  copaiba;  Balsamum  de  co- 
paibu;  Balsamum  capivi ; Copaiba;  Capevi ; is  ob- 
tained. 

Copaiba  is  a yellow  resinous  juice,  of  a moderately 
agreeable  smell,  and  a bitterish  biting  taste,  very  per- 
manent on  the  tongue.  The  tree  which  affords  it 
grows  in  Brazil,  New-Spain.  It  is  obtained  by  making 
deep  incisions  near  its  trunk,  when  the  balsam  imme- 
diately issues,  and,  at  the  proper  season,  flows  in  such 
abundance,  that  sometimes,  in  three  hours,  twelve 
pounds  have  been  procured.  The  older  trees  afford 
the  best  balsam,  and  yield  it  two  or  three  times  in  the 
same  year.  The  balsam  supplied  by  the  young  and 
vigorous  trees,  which  abound  with  the  most  juice,  is 
crude  and  watery,  and  is,  therefore,  accounted  less 
valuable.  While  flowing  from  the  tree,  this  balsam 
is  a colourless  fluid  ; in  time,  however,  it  acquires  a 
yellowish  tinge,  and  the  consistence  of  oil ; but,  though 
by  age  it  has  been  found  thick,  like  honey,  yet  it  never 
becomes  solid,  like  other  resinous  fluids.  By  distilla- 
tion in  water,  the  oil  is  separated  from  the  resin ; and, 
in  the  former,  the  taste  and  smell  of  the  balsam  are 
concentrated.  If  the  operation  is  carefully  performed, 
about  one-half  of  the  balsam  rises  into  the  receiver,  in 
the  form  of  oil.  The  balsam  unites  with  fixed  and 
volatile  oils,  and  with  spirit  of  wine.  It  is  given  in  all 
diseases  of  the  urinary  organs,  when  no  inflammation 
is  present.  In  gleets,  and  in  gonorrhoea,  it  was  once  a 
favourite  remedy,  but  is  now  disused.  In  diseases  of 
the  kidneys  it  is  still  employed,  though  less  frequently 
than  usual;  and  in  haemorrhoids  it  is  occasionally 
trusted.  The  dose  is  from  20  to  30  drops,  twice  or 
three  times  a day,  mixed  with  water,  by  means  of  an 
egg,  or  any  mucilage.  The  balsam  of  copaiva  is  occa- 
sionally  adulterated  with  turpentine,  but  its  virtues 
are  not  greatly  injured  by  the  fraud. 

Copaiva.  See  Copaiba. 

COPAL.  (The  American  name  of  all  clear  odori- 
ferous gums.)  Gum  copal.  This  resinous  substance 
is  imported  from  Guinea,  where  it  is  found  in  the  sand 
on  the  shore.  It  is  a hard,  shining,  transparent,  citron- 
coloured,  odoriferous,  concrete  juice  of  an  American 
tree,  but  which  has  neither  the  solubility  in  water 
common  to  gums,  nor  the  solubility  in  alkohol  common 
to  resins,  at  least  in  any  considerable  degree.  By 
these  properties  it  resembles  amber.  It  may  be  dis- 
solved by  digestion  in  linseed  oil,  rendered  drying  by 
quicklime,  with  a heat  very  little  less  than  sufficient 
to  boil  or  decompose  the  oil.  This  solution,  diluted 
with  oil  of  turpentine,  forms  a beautiful  transparent 
varnish,  which,  when  properly  applied,  and  slowly 
dried,  is  very  hard,  and  very  durable.  This  varnish 
is  applied  to  snuff-boxes,  tea-boards,  and  other  utensils. 
It  preserves  and  gives  lustre  to  paintings,  and  greatly 
restores  the  decayed  colours  of  old  pictures,  by  filling 
up  the  cracks,  aiul  rendering  the  surfaces  capable  of 
reflecting  light  more  uniformly. 

Cope'lla.  See  Cupel. 

Co'pher.  A name  for  camphor. 

CO'PHOS.  (K uxpos,  dumb.)  Deaf  or  dumb.  Also 
adulness  in  any  of  the  senses. 

COPHG'SIS.  (From  deaf.)  A difficulty  of 

hearing.  It  is  often  symptomatic  of  some  disease. 
See  Dyseccea. 

COPPER.  [Cuprum,  i.  neut.  quasi  as  Cyprium ; 

m 


so  named  from  the  island  of  Cyprus,  whence  it  was 
formerly  brought.)  “A  metal  of  a peculiar  reddish- 
brown  colour : hard,  sonorous,  very  malleable  and 
ductile;  of  considerable  tenacity,  and  of  a specific 
gravity  from  8.6  to  8 9.  At  a degree  of  heat  far  below 
ignition,  the  surface  of  a piece  of  polished  copper  be- 
comes covered  with  various  ranges  of  prismatic  co- 
lours, the  red  of  each  order  being  nearest  the  end 
which  has  been  most  heated ; an  effect  which  must 
doubtless  be  attributed  to  oxidation,  the  stratum  of 
oxide  being  thickest  where  the  heat  is  greatest,  and 
growing  gradually  thinner  and  thinner  towards  the 
colder  part.  A greater  degree  of  heat  oxidizes  it 
more  rapidly,  so  that  it  contracts  thin  powdery  scales 
on  its  surface,  which  may  easily  be  rubbed  off ; the 
flame  of  the  fuel  becoming  at  the  same  time  of  a beau- 
tifV 5 bluish-green  colour.  In  a heat,  nearly  the  same 
as  u lecessary  to  melt  gold  or  silver,  it  melts,  and  ex- 
hibits a bluish-green  flame  ; by  a violent  heat  it  boils 
and  is  volatilized  partly  in  the  metallic  state. 

Copper  rusts  in  the  air ; but  the  corroded  part  is 
very  thin,  and  preserves  the  metal  beneath  from  far 
ther  corrosion. 

There  are  two  oxides  of  copper : 

1st,  The  black,  procurable  by  heat,  or  by  drying  the 
hydratic  oxide  precipitated  by  potassa  from  the  ni- 
trate. It  consists  of  8 copper-j-2  oxygen.  It  is  a deu- 
toxide. 

2dly,  The  protoxide  is  obtained  by  digesting  a solu- 
tion of  muriate  of  copper  with  copper  turnings,  in  a 
close  phial.  The  colour  passes  from  green  to  dark 
brown,  and  gray  crystalline  grains  are  deposited. 
The  solution  of  these  yields,  by  potassa,  a precipitate 
of  an  orange  colour,  which  is  the  protoxide.  It  con- 
sists of  8 copper  -f  1 oxygen.  Protoxyde  of  copper  has 
been  lately  founff;by*Mushet,  in  a mass  of  copper, 
which  had  been, exposed  to  heat  for  a considerable 
time,  in  one  of  the  melting  furnaces  of  the  mint  under 
his  superintendence. 

Copper,  in  filings,  or  thin  laminae,  introduced  into 
chlorine,  unites  with  flame  into  the  chloride,  of  which 
there  are  two  varieties;  the  protochloride,  a fixed 
yellow  substance,  and  the  deutochloride,  a yellowish- 
brown  pulverulent  sublimate. 

1.  The  crystalline  grains  deposited  from  the  above 
muriatic  solution,  are  protochloride.  The  protochlo- 
ride is  conveniently  made  by  heating  together  two 
parts  of  corrosive  sublimate,  and  one  of  copper  filings. 
An  amber-coloured  translucent  substance,  first  dis- 
covered by  Boyle,  who  called  it  resin  of  copper,  is  ob- 
tained. It  is  fusible  at  a heat  just  below  redness ; and 
in  a close  vessel,  or  a vessel  with  a narrow  orifice,  is 
not  decomposed  or  sublimed  by  a strong  red  heat. 
But  if  air  be  admitted,  it  is  dissipated  in  dense  white 
fumes.  It  is  insoluble  in  water.  It  effervesces  in 
nitric  acid.  It  dissolves  silently  in  muriatic  acid,  from 
which  it  may  be  precipitated  by  water.  By  slow  cool- 
ing of  the  fused  mass,  Dr.  John.Davy  obtained  it  crys- 
tallized, apparently  in  small  plates,  semi-transparent, 
and  of  a light  yellow  colour.  It  consists,  by  the  same 
Ingenious  chemist,  of 

Chlorine,  36  or  1 prime  =4.45  35.8 
Copper,  64  or  1 prime  8.00  64.2 

100  12.45  100.0 

2.  Deutochloride  is  bestjnade  by  slowly  evaporating 
to  dryness,  at  a temperature  not  much  above  400° 
Fahr.  the  deliquescent  muriate  of  copper.  It  is  a yel- 
low powder.  By  absorption  of  moisture  from  the  air, 
it  passes  from  yellow  to  white,  and  then  green,  repro- 
ducing common  muriate.  Heat  converts  it  into  proto- 
chloride,  with  the  disengagement  of  chlorine.  Dr. 
Davy  ascertained  the  chemical  constitution  of  both 
these  compounds,  by  separating  the  copper  with  iron, 
and  the  chlorine  by  nitrate  of  silver.  The  deutochlo- 
ride consistsof 

Chlorine,  53  2 primes  8.9  52.7 
Copper,  47  1 do.  8.0  47.3 

100  16.9  100.0 

The  iodide  of  copper  is  formed  by  dropping  aqueous 
hydriodate  of  potassa  into  a solution  of  any  cupreous 
salt.  It  is  an  insoluble  dark  brown  powder. 

Phosphurct  of  copper  is  made  by  projecting  phos- 
phorus into  red-hot  copper. 


COP 


COP 


Sulphuret  of  copper  is  formed  by  mixing  together 
eight  parts  of  copper  filings,  and  two  of  sulphur,  and 
exposing  the  mixture  to  a gentle  heat. 

The  sulphuric  acid,  when  concentrated  and  boiling, 
dissolves  copper. 

Nitric  acid  dissolves  copper  with  great  rapidity,  and 
disengages  a large  quantity  of  nitrous  gas.  Part  of 
the  metal  falls  down  in  the  form  of  an  oxide  ; and  the 
filtrated  or  decanted  solution,  which  is  of  a much 
deeper  blue  colour  than  the  sulphuric  solution;  affords 
crystals  by  slow  evaporation.  This  salt  is  deliquescent, 
very  soluble  in  water,  but  most  plentifully  when  the 
fiuid  is  heated. 

The  saline  combinations  of  copper  were  formerly 
called  sales  veneres , because  Venus  was  the  mytho- 
logical name  of  copper.  They  have  the  following 
general  characters : 

1.  They  are  mostly  soluble  in  water,  and  their  solu- 
tions have  a green  or  blue  colour,  or  acquire  one  of 
these  colours  on  exposu  re  to  air. 

2.  Ammonia  added  to  the  solutions,  produces  a 
deep  blue  colour. 

3.  Ferroprussiate  of  potassa  gives  a reddish-brown 
precipitate,  with  cupreous  salts. 

4.  Gallic  acid  gives  a brown  precipitate. 

5.  Hydrosulphuret  of  potassa  gives  a black  precipi- 
tate. 

6.  A plate  of  iron  immersed  in  these  solutions 
throws  down  metallic  copper,  and  very  rapidly  if  there 
be  a slight  excess  of  acid.  The  protoxide  of  copper 
can  be  combined  with  the  acids  only  by  very  particular 
management.  All  the  ordinary  salts  of  copper  have 
the  peroxide  for  a base. 

The  joint  agency  of  air  and  acetic  acid,  is  neces- 
sary to  the  production  of  the  cupreous  acetates.  By 
exposing  copperplates  to  the  vapours  of  vinegar,  the 
bluish-green  verdigris  is  formed,  which,  by  solution  in 
vinegar,  constitutes  acetate  of  copper. 

Arseniate  of  copper  presents  us  with  many  sub- 
species which  are  found  native.  The  arseniate  may 
be  formed  artificially  by  digesting  arsenic  acid  on  cop- 
per, or  by  adding  arseniate  of  potassa  to  a cupreous 
saline  solution. 

Carbonate  of  copper.  Of  this  compound  there  arc 
three  native  varieties,  the  green,  the  blue,  and  the  an- 
hydrous. 

Chlorate  of  copper  is  a deflagrating  deliquescent 
green  salt. 

Fluate  of  copper  is  in  small  blue-coloured  crystals. 

Hydriodate  of  copper  is  a grayish- while  powder. 

Protomuriate  of  copper  has  already  been  described 
in  treating  of  the  chlorides. 

Deutomuriate  of  copper , formed  by  dissolving  the 
deutoxide  in  muriatic  acid,  or  by  heating  muriatic 
acid  on  copper  filings,  yields  by  evaporation  crystals 
of  a grass-green  colour. 

The  ammonio-nitrate  evaporated,  yields  a fulmi- 
nating copper.  Crystals  of  nitrate,  mixed  with  phos- 
phorus, and  struck  with  a hammer,  detonate. 

Subnitrate  of  copper  is  the  blue  precipitate,  occa- 
sioned by  adding  a little  potassa  to  the  neutral  nitric 
solution. 

Nitrate  of  copper  is  formed  by  mixing  nitrate  of 
lead  with  sulphate  of  copper. 

The  sulphate , or  blue  vitriol  of  commerce,  is  a bisul- 
phate. 

A mixed  solution  of  this  sulphate  and  salammoniac, 
forms  an  ink,  whose  traces  are  invisible  in  the  cold, 
but  become  yellow  when  heated ; and  vanish  again 
as  the  paper  cools. 

Protosulphite  of  copper  is  formed  by  passing  a cur- 
rent of  sulphurous  acid  gas  through  the  deutoxide 
of  copper  diffused  in  water.  It  is  deprived  of  a part 
of  its  oxygen,  and  combines  with  the  acid.  The  sul- 
phate, simultaneously  produced,  dissolves  in  the  wa- 
ter ; while  the  sulphite  forms  small  red  crystals,  from 
which  merely  long  ebullition  in  water  expels  the  acid. 

Sulphite  of  potassa  and  copper  is  made  by  adding 
the  sulphite  of  potassa  to  nitrate  of  copper.  A yellow 
flocculent  precipitate,  consisting  of  minute  crystals, 
falls. 

Ammonia-sulphate  of  copper  is  the  salt  formed  by 
adding  water  of  ammonia  to  solution  of  the  bisulphate. 
It  consists,  according  to  Berzelius,  of  1 prime  of  the 
cupreous,  and  1 of  the  ammoniacal  sulphate,  com- 
bined together ; or  20.0-f-7.13+14.625  of  water. 

Subsulphate  of  ammonia  and  copper  is  formed  by 


adding  alkohol  to  the  solution  of  the  preceding  salt, 
which  precipitates  the  subsulphate.  It  is  the  cuprum 
ammoniacum  of  the  pharmacopoeia. 

Sulphate  of  potassa  and  copper  is  formed  by  di- 
gesting bisulphate  of  potassa  on  the  deutoxide  or  car- 
bonate of  copper. 

The  following  acids,  antimonic,  antimonious,  bo- 
racic,  chromic,  molybdic,  phosphoric,  tungstic,  form 
insoluble  salts  with  deutoxide  of  copper.  The  first 
two  are  green,  the  third  is  brown,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
green,  and  the  sixth  white.  The  benzoate  is  in  green 
crystals,  sparingly  soluble.  The  oxalate  is  also  green. 
The  binoxalates  of  potassa  and  soda,  with  oxide  of 
copper,  give  triple  salts,  in  green  needle-form  crystals. 
There  are  also  ammonia-oxalates  in  different  varieties. 
Tartrate  of  copper  forms  dark  bluish-green  crystals. 
Cream-tartrate  of  copper  is  a bluish-green  powder, 
commonly  called  Brunswick  green. 

To  obtain  pure  copper  for  experiments,  we  precipi- 
tate it  it)  the  metallic  state,  by  immersing  a plate  of 
iron  in  a solution  of  the  deutomuriate.  The  pulve- 
rulent copper  must  be  washed  with  dilute  muriatic 
acid. 

This  metal  combines  very  readily  with  gold , silver , 
and  mercury.  It  unites  imperfectly  with  iron  in  the 
way  of  fusion.  Tin  combines  with  copper,  at  a tem- 
perature much  lower  than  is  necessary  to  fuse  the 
copper  alone.  On  this  is  grounded  the  method  of 
tinning  copper  vessels.  For  this  purpose,  they  are 
first  scraped  or  scoured  ; after  which  they  are  rubbed 
with  sal-ammoniac.  They  are  then  heated,  and 
sprinkled  with  powdered  resin,  which  defends  the 
clean  surface  of  the  copper  from  acquiring  the  slight 
film  of  oxide  that  would  prevent  the  adhesion  of  the 
tin  to  its  surface.  The  melted  tin  is  then  poured  in, 
and  spread  about.  An  extremely  small  quantity  ad- 
heres to  the  copper,  which  may  perhaps  be  supposed 
insufficient  to  prevent  the  noxious  effects  of  the  cop- 
per as  perfectly  as  might  be  wished. 

When  tin  is  melted  with  copper,  it  composes  the 
compound  called  bronze. 

Copper  unites  with  bismuth , and  forms  a reddish 
white  alloy.  With  arsenic  it  forms  a white  brittle 
compound,  called  tombac.  With  zinc  it  forms  the 
compound  called  brass,  and  distinguished  by  various 
other  names,  according  to  the  proportions  of  the  two 
ingredients. 

Copper  unites  readily  with  antimony,  and  affords  a 
compound  of  a beautiful  violet  colour.  It  does  not 
readily  unite  with  manganese.  With  tungsten  it 
forms  a dark  brown  spongy  alloy,  which  is  somewhat 
ductile. 

Verdigris,  and  other  preparations  of  copper,  act  as 
virulent  poisons,  when  introduced  in  very  small  quan- 
tities into  the  stomachs  of  animals.  A few  grains  are 
sufficient  for  this  effect.  Death  is  commonly  preceded 
by  very  decided  nervous  disorders,  such  as  convulsive 
movements,  tetanus,  general  insensibility,  or  a palsy 
of  the  lower  extremities.  This  event  happens  fre- 
quently so  soon,  that  it  could  not  be  occasioned  by  in- 
flammation or  erosion  of  the  primes  vice ; and  indeed, 
where  these  parts  are  apparently  sound.  It  is  proba- 
ble that  the  poison  is  absorbed,  and,  through  the  circu- 
lation, acts  on  the  brain  and  nerves.  The  cupreous 
preparations  are  no  doubt  very  acrid,  and  if  death  do 
not  follow  their  immediate  impression  on  the  sentient 
system,  they  will  certainly  inflame  the  intestinal  canal. 
The  symptoms  produced  by  a dangerous  dose  of  cop- 
per are  exactly  similar  to  those  which  are  enumerated 
under  arsenic,  only  the  taste  of  copper  is  strongly  felt. 
The  only  chemical  antidote  to  cupreous  solutions, 
whose  operation  is  well  understood,  is  water  strongly 
impregnated'  with  sulphuretted  hydrogen.  The  al- 
kaline hydrosulphurets  are  acrid,  and  ought  not  to  be 
prescribed. 

But  we  possess,  in  sugar,  an  antidote  to  this  poison, 
of  undoubted  efficacy,  though  its  mode  of  action  be 
obscure.  Duval  introduced  into  the  stomach  of  a dog, 
by  means  of  a caoutchouc  tube,  a solution  in  acetic 
acid,  of  four  French  drachms  of  oxide  of  copper. 
Some  minutes  afterward  he  injected  into  it  four 
ounces  of  strong  syrup.  He  repeated  this  injection 
every  half-hour,  and  employed  altogether  12  ounces  of 
syrup.  The  animal  experienced  some  tremblings  and 
convulsive  movements.  But  the  last  injection  was 
followed  by  a perfect  calm.  The  animal  fell  asleep, 
and  awakened  free  from  any  ailment. 


263 


COR 


COR 


Orfila  relates  several  cases  of  individuals  who  had 
by  accident  or  intention  swallowed  poisonous  doses  of 
acetate  of  copper,  and  who  recovered  by  getting  large 
doses  of  sugar.  He  uniformly  found,  that  a dose  of 
verdigris  which  would  kill  a dog  in  the  course  of  an 
hour  or  two,  might  be  swallowed  with  impunity, 
provided  it  was  mixed  with  a considerable  quantity 
of' sugar. 

As  alkohol  has  the  power  of  completely  neutraliz- 
ing, in  the  a;thers,  the  strongest  muriatic  and  hydriodic 
acids,  so  it  would  appear  that  sugar  can  neutralize  the 
oxides  of  copper  and  lead.  The  neutral  saccharite  of 
lead,  indeed,  was  employed  by  Berzelius  in  his  experi- 
ments, to  determine  the  prime  equivalent  of  sugar.  If 
we  boil  for  half  an  hour,  in  a flask,  an  ounce  of  white 
sugar,  an  ounce  of  water,  and  10  grains  of  verdigris, 
we  obtain  a green  liquid,  which  is  not  affected  by  the 
nicest  tests  of  copper,  such  as  ferroprussiate  of  potassa, 
ammonia,  and  the  hydrosulphurets.  An  insoluble 
green  carbonate  of  copper  remains  at  the  bottom  of 
the  flask.” — Ure's  Ckem . Diet. 

Copper , ammoniated  solution  of.  See  Cupri  ammo- 
niati  liquor.  , 

COPPERAS.  A name  given  to  blue,  green,  and 
white  vitriol. 

Coprago'ga.  (From  Konpos,  dung,  and  ayw,  to 
bring  away.)  Purgatives.  Copragogum  is  the  name  of 
a gently-purging  electuary,  mentioned  by  Rulandus. 

COPRIE'MESIS.  (From  icoirpos,  excrement,  and 
ept(o,  to  vomit.)  A vomiting  of  faeces. 

Coprocri'tica.  (From  Konpos , excrement,  and 
tepivu),  to  separate.)  Mild  cathartic  medicines. 

Copropho'ria.  (From  icoitpos,  excrement,  and 
0ope w,  to  bring  away.)  A purging. 

CO' PROS.  Ko:rpaf.  The  faeces,  or  excrements  from 
the  bowels. 

COPROSTA'SIA.  (From  Koirpos,  faeces,  and  ipj/u, 
to  remain.)  Costiveness,  or  a constriction  of  the 
belly. 

Copta'riom.  {Kan'Jrf,  a small  cake.)  Coptarium. 
A lozenge. 

CO'PTE.  (Koir'Jr],  a small  cake.)  1.  The  form  of 
a medicine  used  by  the  ancients. 

2.  A cataplasm  generally  made  of  vegetable  sub- 
stances, and  applied  externally  to  the  stomach,  and  on 
many  occasions  given  internally. 

[“Cgptis  trifolia.  Goldthread.  The  coptis  tri- 
folia, which  was  arranged  among  the  Hellebores  by 
Linmeus,  is  a beautiful  native,  evergreen  plant,  of  the 
northern  States.  Its  roots  are  creeping,  thread-shaped, 
and  of  a bright  yellow  colour.  They  have  an  intensely 
bitter  taste,  without  warmth  or  astringency.  Alkohol 
is  the  best  solvent  of  this  article,  forming  a bright  yel- 
low tincture.  Water  also  extracts  Ihe  bitterness,  but 
less  perfectly.  Gold  thread  is  a pleasant  tonic,  and 
promotes. appetite  and  digestion.  It  is  a popular  reme- 
dy in  apthous  mouths  and  ulcers  of  the  throat,  though 
it  does  not  appear  to  be  very  powerful  in  these  com- 
plaints. As  a tonic  it  may  be  given  in  the  dose  of  ten 
or  twenty  grains  of  the  powder.  It  is,  however,  some- 
what difficult  to  pulverize,  owing  to  the  tenacity  of  the 
fibres.  A tincture,  formed  by  an  ounce  of  the  root  in 
a pint  of  diluted  alkohol,  may  be  given  in  doses  of  a 
drachm.”— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Co'pula.  ( Quasi  compula;  from  compello , to  re- 
strain.) A name  for  a ligament. 

Coque'ntia.  (From  coquo,  to  digest.)  Medicines 
Which  promote  concoction. 

COR.  (Cor,  dis.  neut.) 

1.  The  heart.  See  Heart. 

2.  Gold. 

3.  An  intense  fire. 

Coraci'ne.  (From  Acopa^,  a crow;  so  named  from 
its  black  colour.)  A name  for  a lozenge,  quoted  by 
Galeq  from  Asclepiades. 

CORACO.  The  first  part  of  the  name  of  some 
muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  coracoid  process  of 
the  blade-bone. 

Coraco-brachialis.  Coraco-humeral  of  Dumas. 
Coraco-brachiceus.  A muscle,  so  called  from  its  origin 
and  insertion.  It  is  situated  on  the  humerus,  before 
the  scapula.  It  arises,  tendinous  and  fleshy,  from  the 
forepart  of  the  coracoid  process  of  the  scapula,  ad- 
hering, in  its  descent,  to  the  short  head  of  the  biceps ; 
inserted,  tendinous  and  fleshy,  about  the  middle  of  the 
internal  part  of  the  os  humeri,  near  the  origin  of  the 
third  head  of  the  triceps,  called  brachialis  cztcrnus, 
964 


where  it  sends  down  a thin  tendinous  expansion  to  the 
internal  condyle  of  tin  os  humeri.  Its  use  is  to  raise 
the  arm  upwards  and  forwards. 

Coraco  hyoideus.  See  Omo  hyoideus. 

CO  RACOID.  (Coracoideus ; from  Kopa\,  a crow, 
and  uSos,  resemblance:  shaped  like  the  beak  of  a 
crow.)  Some  processes  of  the  bones  are  so  named 
which  were  supposed  to  resemble  the  beak  of  a crow. 

Coracoid  process.  Processus  coracoides.  See 
Scapula. 

CO'RAL.  See  Corallium. 

CORALLI'NA.  (Diminutive  of  corallium.)  Mus- 
cus  maritimus ; Corallina  officinalis ; Corallina  alba. 
Sea  coralline  ; Sea  moss ; White  wormseed.  A ma- 
rine production,  or  fucus,  resembling  a small  plant 
without  leaves,  consisting  of  numerous  brittle  creta- 
ceous substances,  friable  betwixt  the  fingers,  and 
crackling  between  the  teeth.  Powdered,  it  is  admin- 
istered to  children  as  an  anthelminthic,  in  the  dose 
of  half  a drachm  to  a drachm  once  or  twice  a day. 

Corallina  corsicana.  Helmintho-corton ; Con 
ferva  helmintho-cortos : Corallina  rubra;  Corallina 
melito-corton ; Lemitho-corton ; Mouse  de  Corse.  Cor- 
sican worinweed.  Fucus  helmintho-corton  of  De  la 
Tourrette.  This  plant  has  gained  great  repute  in  de- 
stroying all  species  of  intestinal  worms.  Its  virtues 
are  extolled  by  many;  but  impartial  experimentalists 
have  frequently  been  disappointed  of  its  efficacy. 
The  Geneva  Pharmacopoeia  directs  a syrup  to  be  made 
of  it. 

Corallina  melito-corton.  See  Corallina  corsi- 
cana. 

Corallina  rubra.  See  Corallina  corsicana. 

CORALLINE.  See  Corallina. 

Coralline , Corsican.  See  Corallina  corsicana. 

[Corallinite.  See  Organic  relics."] 

CORA'LLIUM.  ( Corallium , i.  n. ; from  Koprj,  a 
daughter,  and  aX?,  the  sea,  because  it  is  the  production 
of  the  sea.)  Coral. 

Corallium  album.  A hard,  white,  calcareous  brit- 
tle substance ; the  nidus  of  the  Madrepora  oculata. 
Class,  Vermes;  Order,  Lithophyta.  It  is  sometimes 
exhibited  as  an  absorbent  earth. 

Corallium  rubrum.  Acmo.  Azur.  The  red  coral 
is  mostly  employed  medicinally.  It  is  a hard,  brittle, 
calcareous  substance,  resembling  the  stalk  of  a plant, 
and  is  the  habitation  of  the  Isis  nobilis.  Class,  Ver- 
mes; Order,  Zoophyta.  When  powdered,  it  is  ex- 
hibited as  an  absorbent  earth  to  children ; but  docs 
not  appear  to  claim  any  preference  to  common  chalk. 

CORALLODE'NDRON.  (From  KopaWiov , coral, 
and  fovdpov,  a tree,  resembling  in  hardness  and  colour 
a piece  of  coral.)  The  coral-tree  of  America;  anti- 
venereal. 

CORALLOI'DES.  (From  tcopaWiov,  coral,  and 
eitios,  likeness.)  Coral-like.  See  Clavaria  coral- 
loidcs. 

Co'rchoron.  (From  Kopy,  the  pupil  of  the  eye, 
and  Kopsa),  to  purge ; so  called  because  it  was  thought 
to  purge  away  rheum  from  the  eyes.)  The  herb  pim- 
pernel, or  duckweed. 

CORCULUM.  ( Corculum , a little  heart ; diminu- 
tive of  cor,  a heart.)  An  essential  part  of  a germi- 
nating seed,  called  also  the  embryo,  or  germ.  It  lies 
between  the  cotyledons.  It  is  the  point  from  which 
the  life  and  organization  of  the  future  plant  originate. 
In  some  seeds  it  is  much  more  conspicuous  than  in 
others.  The  walnut,  bean,  pea,  and  lupine  show  it 
in  perfection.  Its  internal  structure,  before  it  begins 
to  vegetate,  is  observed  to  be  very  simple,  consisting 
of  a uniformly  medullary  substance,  enclosed  in  its 
appropriate  bark  or  skin.  Vessels  are  formed  in  it  as 
soon  as  the  vital  principle  is  excited  to  action,  and  parts 
are  then  developed  which  seemed  not  previously  to 
exist.  There  are  observed  in  it, 

1.  The  rostcllum,  or  little  beak,  w hich  penetrates 
into  the  earth  and  becomes  the  root. 

2.  The  plumula,  which  shoots  above  the  ground, 
and  becomes  a tuft  of  young  leaves,  with  which  the 
young  stem,  if  there  be  any,  ascends.  See  Cotyledon. 

Co'rda.  See  Chorda. 

Corda  tympani.  See  Chorda  tympani. 

Corda  willisii.  See  Dura  mater. 

CORDATUS.  Heart-shaped.  Applied  to  leaves, 
petals,  &.c.  which  are  ovate,  hollowed  out  at  the  base, 
according  to  the  vulgar  idea  of  a heart:  a form  very 
, frequent  in  leaves ; as  in  those  of  Arctium  lappa,  and 


COR 


COR 

Tamus  communis , and  the  petals  of  the  Siurn  Seli- 
num. 

A leaf  is  called  obcordate,  when  the  apex  of  the 
heart-shaped  leaf  is  fixed  to  the  petiole. 

CO'RDIA.  (So  called  by  Plumier  in  honour  of 
Euricius  Cordius  and  his  son  Valerius,  two  eminent 
German  botanists.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Cordia  myxa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  Sebes- 
ten  plant.  Sebesten;  Sebestina;  Cordia — foliis  ova- 
tis , supra  glabris  ; corymbis  lateralibus  ; calycibus 
decemstriatis  of  Linnaeus.  The  dark  black  fruit  pos- 
sesses glutinous  and  aperient  qualities,  and  is  exhi- 
bited in  form  of  decoction  in  various  diseases  of  the 
chest,  hoarseness,  cough,  difficult  respiration,  &c. 

CORDIAL.  Cardiacus.  Medicines  are  generally 
so  termed,  which  possess  warm  and  stimulating  pro- 
perties, and  that  are  given  to  raise  the  spirits. 

Cordine'ma.  (From  Kapa,  the  head,  and  Stucco,  to 
move  about.)  A headache  attended  with  a vertigo. 

Cordo'lium.  (From  cor,  the  heart,  and  dolor, 
pain.)  A name  formerly  applied  to  cardialgia,  or 
heartburn. 

CORDUS,  Valerius,  was  born  in  1515,  of  a Hes- 
sian family.  After  studying  in  some  of  the  German 
universities,  he  travelled  through  Italy,  chiefly  engaged 
in  botanical  researches.  He  died  at  the  early  age  of 
20,  leaving  several  works;  a “History  of  Plants,” 
many  of  them  never  before  described ; “ Annotations 
on  Dioscorides a Nuremberg  Dispensatory,  &c. 
CO'RE.  Kopy.  The  pupil  of  the  eye. 

Core'mata.  (From  nope  to,  to  cleanse.)  Medicines 
for  cleansing  the  skin. 

CORIACEUS.  Leathery.  Applied  to  leaves  and 
pods  that  are  thick  and  tough  without  being  pulpy,  or 
succulent ; as  in  the  leaves  of  Magnolia  grandiflora, 
Aucuba,  &c.  and  the  pods  of  the  Lupin. 
CORIANDER.  See  Coriandrum. 

CORIA'NDRUM.  ( Coriandrum , i.  n. ; from  Kopy, 
a pupil,  and  avyp,  a man:  because  of  its  roundness, 
like  the  pupil  of  a man’s  eye ; or  probably  so  called 
from  Kopts,  cimex,  a bug,  because  the  green  herb, 
seed  and  all,  stinks  intolerably  of  bugs.)  Coriander. 

].  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Dygynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  officinal  corian- 
der. See  Coriandrum  sativum. 

Coriandrum  sativum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  called  coriandrum  in  the  pharmacopoeias. 
Cassibor ; Corianon.  The  Coriandrum — fructibus 
lobosis , of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  is  a native  of  the 
outh  of  Europe,  where,  in  some  places,  it  is  said  to 
grow  in  such  abundance  as  frequently  to  choke  the 
growth  of  wheat  and  other  grain.  From  being  culti- 
vated here  as  a medicinal  plant,  it  has  for  some  time 
become  naturalized  to  this  country,  where  it  is  usually 
found  in  corn  fields,  the  sides  of  roads,  and  about  dung- 
hills. Every  part  of  the  plant,  when  fresh,  has  a very 
offensive  odour,  but,  upon  being  dried,  the  seeds  have 
a tolerably  grateful  smell,  and  their  taste  is  moderately 
warm  and  slightly  pungent.  They  give  out  their  vir- 
tue totally  to  rectified  spirit,  but  only  partially  to 
water.  In  distillation  with  water,  they  yield  a small 
quantity  of  a yellowish  essential  oil,  which  smells 
strongly  and  pretty  agreeably  of  the  coriander. 

Dioscorides  asserts,  that  the  seeds,  when  taken  in  a 
considerable  quantity,  produce  deleterious  effects ; and, 
in  some  parts  of  Spain  and  Egypt,  where  the  fresh 
herb  is  eaten  as  a cordial,  instances  of  fatuity,  lethar- 
gy,- &c.  are  observed  to  occur  very  frequently  ; but 
these  qualities  seem  to  have  been  unjustly  ascribed  to 
the  coriander;  and  Dr.  Withering  informs  us,  that  he 
has  known  six  drachms  of  the  seeds  taken  at  once, 
without  any  remarkable  effect.  These  seeds,  and  in- 
deed most  of  those  of  the  umbelliferous  plants,  possess 
a stomachic  and  carminative  power.  They  are  di- 
rected in  the  infusum  amarum,  the  infusum  sennre 
tartarizatum,  and  some  other  compositions  of  the 
pharmacopoeias  ; and  according  to  Dr.  Cullen,  the  prin- 
cipal use  of  these  seeds  is,  “ that  infused  along  with 
senna,  they  more  powerfully  correct  the  odour  and 
taste  of  this  than  any  other  aromatic  that  I have  em- 
ployed, and  are,  I believe,  equally  powerful  in  obvi- 
ating the  griping  that  senna  is  very  ready  to  pro- 
duce.” 

Coria'non.  See  Coriandrum. 

CO'RiS.  (From  Ktipco,  to  cleave,  or  cut;  so  called 


because  it  was  said  to  heal  wounds.)  The  herb  St 
John’s  wort.  See  Hypericum. 

Coris  cretica.  See  Hypericum  Saxatile. 

Coris  lutea.  See  Hypericum  coris. 

Coris  monspe  liens  is.  Symphetumpcetreum.  Heath 
pine.  This  plant  is  intensely  bitter  and  nauseous,  but 
apparently,  an  active  medicine,  and  employed,  it  is 
said,  with  success  in  syphilis. 

CORK.  Suber.  The  bark  of  the  Quercus  suber  ot 
Linnasus,  formerly  employed  as  an  astringent,  but  now 
disused.  By  the  action  of  nitric  acid  it  is  acidified.  See 
Suberic  acid. 

Cork  has  been  recently  analyzed  by  Chevreuil  by 
digestion,  first  in  water  and  then  in  alkohol.  By  distil 
lation  there  came  over  an  aromatic  principle,  and  a 
little  acetic  acid.  The  watery  extract  contained  a yel  - 
low and  a red  colouring  matter,  an  undetermined  acid, 
gallic  acid,  an  astringent  substance,  a substance  con 
raining  azot,  a substance  soluble  in  water  and  insolu- 
ble in  alkohol,  gallate  of  iron,  lime,  and  traces  of  mag- 
nesia. 20  parts  of  cork  treated  in  this  way,  left  17.15 
of  insoluble  matter.  The  undissolved  residue  being 
treated  a sufficient  number  of  times  with  alkohol, 
yielded  a variety  of  bodies,  but  which  seem  reducible 
to  three  ; namely,  cerin,  resin,  and  an  oil.  The  ligne- 
ous portion  of  the  cork  still  weighed  14  parts,  which 
are  called  suber. 

[Cork,  when  burnt  and  reduced  to  a black  coal,  may 
be  pulverized  and  given  as  a medicine.  It  produces  a 
light  and  delicate  carbon,  which  may  be  given  by  the 
tea-spoonful,  in  a little  syrup  or  milk,  to  children  with 
cholera  infantum  or  sour  stomach.  It  is  an  excellent 
corrector  of  acidity,  and  is  a useful  domestic  remedy 
for  complaints  of  the  bowels  in  children  during  warm 
weather.  A.] 

Cork,  fossil.  See  Asbestos. 

CORN.  Clavus.  A hardened  portion  of  cuticle, 
produced  by  pressure : so  called  because  a piece  can  be 
picked  out  like  a corn  of  barley. 

Corn  salad.  See  Valeriana  locusta. 

Cornachini  pulvis.  Scammony,  antimony,  and 
cream  of  tartar. 

CORNARIUS,  John,  was  born  in  Upper  Saxony,  in 
the  year  1500.  According  to  Haller  his  real  name  was 
Haguenbot,  or  Hanbut.  He  is  said  to  have  been  led  to 
the  study  of  medicine  from  the  delicacy  of  his  own 
constitution.  He  graduated  at  Padua,  after  attending 
several  other  universities.  Besides  translating  Hip- 
pocrates, and  some  other  Greek  writers  into  Latin,  he 
was  author  of  several  works  on  medicine;  and  is  said 
to  have  had  an  extensive  practice.  He  died  in  1558, 
leaving  a son,  Diomede,  who  succeeded  him,  and 
was  afterward  professor  of  medicine  at  Vienna,  and 
physician  to  Maximilian  II. 

CORNARO,  Lewis,  of  a noble  Venetian  family, 
was  born  in  1467.  Having  impaired  his  constitution 
by  a debauched  and  voluptuous  life,  and  brought  on  at 
last  a severe  illness,  on  recovering  from  this,  at  the  age 
of  more  than  40,  he  adopted  a strict,  abstemious  regi- 
men, limiting  himself  to  twelve  ounces  of  solid  food, 
and  fourteen  of  wine,  daily;  which  quantity  he  rather 
diminished  in  the  latter  part  of  his  life.  He  carefully 
avoided  also  the  extremes  of  heat  or  cold,  with  all  vio- 
lent exercise  ; and  took  care  to  live  in  a pure  dry  air. 
He  thus  preserved  a considerable  share  of  health  and 
activity  to  the  great  age  of  98.  His  wife,  by  whom  he 
had  an  only  child,  a daughter,  when  they  were  both 
advanced  in  years,  survived  him,  and  attained  nearly 
the  same  period.  When  he  was  83,  he  published  a 
short  treatise  in  commendation  of  temperance,  which 
has  been  repeatedly  translated,  and  printed  in  every 
country  of  Europe.  He  then  states  himself  to  have 
been  able  to  mount  his  horse,  without  assistance,  from 
any  rising  ground.  He  wrote  three  other  discourses  on 
similar  subjects  at  subsequent  periods,  the  last  only 
three  years  before  his  death.  The  best  English  trans- 
lation is  said  to  be  that  of  1779. 

CO  RNEA.  The  sclerotic  membrane  of  the  eye  is 
so  called,  because  it  is  of  a horny  consistence.  See 
Sclerotic  coat. 

Cornea  opaca.  See  Sclerotic  coat. 

Cornea  transparens.  Sclerotica  ceratoides.  The 
transparent  portion  of  the  sclerotic  membrane,  through 
which  the  rays  of  light  pass,  is  so  tailed,  to  distin- 
guish it  from  that  which  is  opaque.  See  Sclerotic 
coat. 

[“Cornea  tunica.  (From  cornu,  a horn.)  Thqan 

265 


COR 


COR 


terldr  transparent  convex  part  of  the  eye,  Which,  in 
texture,  is  tough  like  horn.  It  has  a structure  peculiar 
to  itself,  being  composed  of  a number  of  concentric 
cellular  lamellae,  in  the  cells  of  which  is  deposited  a 
particular  sort  of  fluid.  It  is  covered  externally  by  a 
continuation  of  the  conjunctiva,  which  belongs  to  the 
class  of  mucous  membranes ; and  it  is  lined  by  a mem- 
brane, the  tunica  humoris  aquei,  which  seems  10  be- 
long to  the  serous  class.” — Cooper's  Surg.  Diet.  A.] 
Corne'sta.  A chemical  retort. 

CORNFLOWER.  See  Centaurea  cyanus. 
Corni'cula.  (From  cornu,  a horn.)  A cupping  in- 
strument, made  of  horn. 

CORNICULA'RIS.  (From  cornu , a horn.)  Shaped 
like  a horn  ; the  coracoid  process  of  the  scapula. 

CORNIFORMIS.  (From  cornu,  a horn,  and  forma 
resemblance.)  Horn-shaped : applied  to  the  nectary 
of  plants : — nectar ium  corni forme , in  the  orchis  tribe. 

CO'RNU.  A horn.  This  term  is  used  both  in  ana- 
tomy, surgery,  and  materia  medica.  1.  A wart.  See 
Verruca. 

2.  A corn  or  horny  induration  of  the  cuticle.  See 
Com. 

3.  The  horn  of  the  stag. 

4.  The  cavities  of  the  brain. 

Cornu  ammonis.  Cornu  arietis.  When  the  pes 
hippocampi  of  the  human  brain  is  cut  transversely 
through,  the  cortical  substance  is  so  disposed  as  to  re- 
semble a ram’s  horn.  This  is  the  true  cornu  ammo- 
nis, though  the  name  is  often  applied  to  the  pes  hippo- 
campi. 

| This  name  is  also  applied  to  the  chambered  shells 
found  in  a petrified  state,  and  designated  among  the 
organic  relics  of  another  world  as  Ammonites.  They 
are  very  abundant  in  Yorkshire,  England,  and  have 
been  found  in  some  places  in  this  country.  A.] 

Cornu  arietis.  See  Cornu  ammonis. 

Cornu  cervi.  Hartshorn.  The  horns  of  several 
species  of  stag,  as  the  Cervus  dices,  Cervus  damn, 
Cervus  elaphus , and  Cervus  taranda , are  used  medi- 
cinally. Boiled,  they  impart  to  the  water  a nutritious 
jelly,  which  is  frequently  served  at  table.  Hartshorn 
jelly  is  made  thus : — Boil  half  a pound  of  the  shavings 
of  hartshorn,  in  six  pints  of  water,  to  a quart ; to  the 
strained  liquor  add  one  ounce  of  the  juice  of  lemon,  or 
of  Seville  orange,  four  ounces  of  mountain  wine  and 
half  a pound  of  sugar ; then  boil  the  whole  to  a pro- 
per consistence.  The  chief  use  of  the  horns  is  for  cal- 
cination, and  to  afford  the  liquor  volatius  cornu  ceroi 
and  subcarbonate  of  ammonia. 

Cornu  cervi  calcinatum.  See  Cornu  ustum. 
Cornu  ustum.  Cornu  cervi  calcinatum.  Burn 
pieces  of  hartshorn  in  an  open  fire,  till  they  become 
thoroughly  white ; then  powder,  and  prepare  them  in 
the  same  manner  as  is  directed  for  chalk.  Burnt 
hartshorn  shavings  possess  absorbent,  antacid,  and  ad- 
stringent  properties,  and  are  given  in  the  form  of 
decoction,  as  a common  drink  in  diarrhoeas,  pyrosis,  &c. 

Cornua  uteri.  Plectenoe.  In  comparative  anato- 
my, the  horns  of  the  womb;  the  womb  being  in  some 
animals  triangular,  and  its  angles  resembling  horns. 
Cornumu'sa.  A retort. 

CO'RNUS.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tetrandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  cornel-tree.  See 
Cornus  sanguinea. 

[“Cornus  Florida.  Dogwood.  This  is  a small 
native  tree,  well  known  for  its  ornamental  flowers  in 
most  parts  of  the  country,  but  more  particularly  in  the 
middle  and  southern  states.  The  bark  of  the  trunk  is  i 
rough  externally,  and  of  a brownish  colour  within. 

Its  taste  is  a strong  bitter,  with  some  astringent  and  : 
aromatic  flavour.  It  appears  to  contain  a bitter  ex- 
tractive substance,  tannin,  gallic  acid,  and  a small  por-  < 
tion  of  resin.  This  bark  has  been  much  employed  as  < 
a tonic  in  various  parts  of  the  interior  country.  It  is 
particularly  used  in  intermittent  fevers,  and  is  applied 
to  various  other  cases  of  debility,  in  which  tonics  are  i 
indicated.  When  fresh,  it  is  sometimes  liable  to  dis- 
order the  stomach  and  bowels,  which  tendency  it  is 
thought  to  lose  by  age.  It  may  be  given  iu  powder  in  ] 
doses  of  one  or  two  scruples.  Although  this  species 
has  been  most  attended  to,  there  are  several  others  of  i 
the  same  genus,  which,  from  their  bitterness,  promise 
quite  as  much  efficacy.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 
[“Cornus  circinata.  Round-leafed  dogwood-  This 
2C8 


i species  of  dogwood  is  a native  shrub,  distinguished 
• from  others  of  its  genus  by  its  round  leaves  and  beau- 
: tifully  spotted  twigs.  The  bark  is  not  exceeded  by 
, any  other  in  bitterness,  and  unites  with  this  property 
. the  chemical  and  sensible  evidences  of  astringency. 
It  is  highly  valuable  as  a tonic  and  stomachic,  and 
appears  to  be  largely  in  use  in  some  parts  of  the  United 
States,  particularly  in  Connecticut,  where  it  is  em- 
ployed as  a substitute  for  cinchona,  and  has  become 
an  officinal  article.  It  is  exhibited  in  the  same  way  as 
Cornus  florida." — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[“Cornus  sericea.  Swamp  dogwood.  This  is 
anotner  of  the  bitter  cornels , native  in  the  United 
States.  Its  properties  resemble  the  preceding  so  much, 
that  it  is  unnecessary  to  repeat  them.  Indeed,  the 
genus  Cornus  in  the  northern  hemisphere,  like  Cincho- 
na in  the  southern,  appears  to  have  the  same  medical 
character  pervading  all  its  species,  differing  only  in 
degree.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Cornus  sanguinea.  The  fruit  is  moderately  cool- 
ing and  astringent. 

Cornu'ta.  (From  cornu ; from  its  resemblance  to 
a horn.)  A retort. 

COROLLA.  (From  coronula,  a little  crown.)  The 
leaves  of  a flower  which  consist  of  those  more  delicate 
and  dilated,  generally  more  coloured  leaves,  which  are 
always  internal  with  respect  to  the  calyx,  between  it 
and  the  internal  organs  of  the  flower,  and  which  con- 
stitute its  chief  beauty.  It  always  consists  of  one  or 
more  coloured  leaves,  which  are  termed  petals. 

A coloured  calyx  is  to  be  distinguished  from  a co- 
rolla, which  may  be  readily  done  in  the  Allyssum 
alpestre , and  Lamium  orvala. 

There  are  four  general  divisions  of  corols. 

1.  Monopetalous , which  consists  of  one  petal,  as  in 
Nicotiana  tabacum. 

2.  Polypetalous , having  many ; as  in  Lillium  candi - 
dum. 

3.  Compound , consisting  of  many  corolla,  which  are 
not  calculated,  and  are  on  a common  receptacle,  and 
calyx ; as  in  Helianthus  annuus. 

4.  Aggregate,  consisting  of  many  calculated  co- 
rolla placed  on  a common  calyx ; as  in  Scabiosa  arven 
sis,  and  Echinops  spcerocephalus. 

A.  Corolla  monopetala , formed  of  one  petal,  which, 
for  the  most  part,  forms  a cavity,  and  is  divided  into, 

a.  Limbus,  the  limb,  which  is  the  margin,  or  hori- 
zontal spreading  portion. 

b.  Tubus,  the  tube,  which  is  the  cylindrical  and  in- 
ferior part,  and  is  enclosed  in  the  calyx. 

c.  Fauces,  or  the  orifice  of  the  tube. 

From  the  figure  of  a regular  or  uniform  limb  are  de- 
rived the  following  terms : 

1.  Corolla  campanulata,  bell-shaped ; as  in  Campa- 
nula and  Atropa. 

2.  C.  globosa,  globular  ; as  in  Hyacynthus  botry ai- 
des and  Erica  ramentacea. 

3.  C.  Tubulosa,  tubular,  as  in  Primula  and  Erica 
Massoni. 

4.  C.  claviculata;  as  in  Erica  tubifiora. 

5.  C.  cyathiformis,  cup-shaped;  as  in  Sympathum 
officinale. 

6.  C.  infundibuliformis,  funnel-shaped ; as  in  JV7- 
cotiana  tabacum , and  Datura  stramonium. 

7.  C.  hypocrateriformis , salver-shaped,  a flat  limb 
upon  a long  tube ; as  in  Vinca  rosea. 

8.  C.  rotata:  wheel-shaped,  that  is,  salver-shaped, 
with  scarcely  any  tube ; as  in  Borago-officinalis,  and 
Physalis  alkekengi. 

9.  C.  urceolata,  saucer-like ; as  in  Evolvulus  alci- 
noides. 

1U.  C.  contorta,  obliquely  bent ; as  in  Vinca  minor 
and  Nerium  oleander. 

11.  C.  ligulaUi,  the  tube  very  short,  and  ending  sud 
denly  in  an  oblong  petal ; as  in  the  corolla  of  the  ra- 
dius of  the  Helianthus  annuus. 

From  the  figure  of  an  unequal  limb  : 

1.  Corolla  ringens,  irregular  and  gaping  like  the 
mouth  of  an  animal ; as  in  Lamium  album,  and  Salvia 
sclarea. 

2.  C.  personuta , irregular  and  closed  by  a kind  of 
palate ; as  in  Antirrhinum  majus. 

In  the  ringent  and  personate  corollte  are  to  be  no 
ticed  the  following  parts : 

a.  T'ubus,  the  inferior  part. 

b.  Rictus,  the  space  between  the  two  lips. 

c.  Faux.,  the  orifice  of  the  tube  in  the  rectus. 


COR 


COR 


d.  Galea,  the  helmet  or  superior  arched  lip. 

e.  Labellum  or  barba , the  inferior  lip. 

f.  Palatum , the  palate,  an  eminence  in  the  inferior 
lip  which  shuts  the  rictus  of  a personate  corolla. 

g.  Calcar , the  spur  which  forms  an  obtuse  or  acute 
bag  at  the  side  of  the  receptacle. 

3.  C.  bilabiata,  two-lipped,  the  tube  divided  into 
two  irregular  lips  opposite  each  other,  without  any 
visible  rictus ; as  in  Aristolochia  bilabiata. 

In  the  bilabiate  corolla  are  to  be  noticed, 

a.  The  tubus. 

b.  The  faux. 

c.  The  superior  lip,  formed  of  one  or  two  lobes. 

d.  The  inferior  lip , mostly  three-lobed. 

e.  One-lipped , the  upper  or  lower  wanting,  as  in 
Aristolochia  clematitis,  and  Teucrium. 

Corolla  inf  era,  means  that  it  is  below  the  germen, 
which  is  the  most  common  place  of  the  corolla ; and 
corolla  super  a,  above  the  germen,  as  in  roses. 

B.  Corolla polypetala,  formed  of  many  petals. 

In  the  petal  of  this  division  are  noticed, 

a.  The  unguis,  the  claw,  the  thin  inferior  part. 

b.  The  lamina  or  border,  the  broader  and  superior 
part ; example,  Dianthus  caryophyllis. 

From  the  number  of  uniform  petals,  the  corol  of 
this  division  is  named, 

1.  Dipetalous ; as  in  Euphorbia  graminea. 

2.  Tripetalous : as  in  Tradescantia  virginica. 

3.  Tetrapetalous ; as  in  Chieranthus  incanus. 

4.  Pentapetalous ; as  in  Paionia  officinalis. 

5.  Hexapetalous ; as  in  Lilium  candidum. 

6.  Polypetalous ; as  in  Rosa  centifolia. 

From  the  figure , 

1.  Malvaceous ; pentapetalous,  with  its  claws 
united  laterally,  so  that  it  appears  monopetalous ; as 
in  Malva  sylvestris , and  Alcta. 

2.  Rosaceous , spreading  like  a rose,  pentapetalous, 
almost  destitute  of  claws ; as  in  Rosa  canina , and 
Paionia  officinalis. 

3.  Liliaceous;  six-petalled,  sometimes  three  with- 
out a calyx ; as  in  Lilium  candidum. 

4.  Caryophyllaceous : five-petalled,  with  a long 
claw,  spreading  border,  and  a monophyllous  tubular 
calyx ; as  in  Dianthus  caryophyllus,  and  Saponaria 
officinalis. 

5.  Cruciform ; three-petalled,  like  a cross ; as  in 
Sinapis  alba,  and  Lunaria  alba. 

6.  Manifold,  many  corols  lying  one  on  another ; as 
in  Cactus  fiagelliformis. 

From  the  figure  of  unequal  petals : 

1.  Orchideal , five  petals,  three  of  which  are  bent 
backward,  and  two  are  lateral  and  in  the  middle  of 
these:  the  labellum  is  bent  back  on  the  nectary. 

2.  Papilionaceous,  four  petals,  irregular  and  spread- 
ing, somewhat  like  a butterfly ; as  in  Lathyrus  latifo- 
lius,  and  Robinii  pseudacacia. 

In  a papilionaceous  corolla,  observe, 

a.  The  vexillum,  the  standard  or  large  concave  one 
at  the  bark. 

b.  Alee,  the  wings  or  two  side-petals,  placed  in  the 
middle. 

c.  The  carina,  or  keel,  consisting  of  twq  petals, 
united  or  separate,  embracing  the  internal  organs. 

3.  Calcarate  or  spurred,  pentapetalous,  one  petal 
formed  into  a spur-like  tube. 

C.  Compound  corolla;  consisting  of  numerous  flo- 
rets, not  calyculate,  and  within  a common  perian- 
thium. 

It  affords, 

a.  The  discus , disk,  or  middle. 

b.  The  radius , which  forms  the  circumference. 
The  marginal  white  florets  of  the  daisy  exemplify  the 
rays,  and  the  central  yellow  ones  the  disk. 

From  the  difference  in  the  florets  of  a compound 
flower  it  is  said  to  be, 

a.  Tubulate,  when  all  the  florets  are  cylindrical. 

b.  Ligulate  or  semifiosculose,  shaped  like  a strap  or 
riband ; as  in  Leontodon  taraxacum. 

c.  Radiate , if  the  florets  in  the  radius  are  ligulate, 
and  those  in  the  disk  tubular. 

d.  Semiradiate , the  radius  consisting  of  only  a few 
ligulate  florets  on  one  side ; as  in  Bidens.  See  also 
Petala. 

COROLLULA.  (A  diminutive  of  corolla,  a little 
wreath  or  crown.)  The  partial  petal,  or  floret  of  a 
compound  flower. 

CORONA.  A crown.  This  term  is  used  in  ana- 


tomy to  designate  the  basis  of  some  parts ; and  in  bo- 
tany, to  parts  of  plants,  from  their  resemblance.  In 
the  writings  of  some  botanists,  it  is  synonymous  with 
radius. 

Corona  ciliaris.  The  ciliar  ligament. 

Corona  glandis.  The  margin  of  the  glans  penis. 

Corona  imperialis.  A name  for  crown-imperial. 
The  Turks  use  it  as  an  emetic.  The  whole  plant  is 
poisonous. 

Corona  regia.  The  melilotus. 

Corona  solis.  See  Helianthus  annuus. 

Corona  veneris.  Venereal  blotches  on  the  fore- 
head are  so  termed. 

CORONAL.  (Goronalis ; from  corona,  a crown 
or  garland.)  Belonging  to  a crown  or  garland : so 
named  because  the  ancients  wore  their  garlands  in  its 
direction. 

Coronal  suture.  Sutura  coronalis ; Sutura  ar- 
cualis.  The  suture  of  the  head,  that  extends  from  one 
temple  across  to  the  other,  uniting  the  two  parietal 
bones  with  the  frontal. 

CORONA'RIUS.  See  Coronary. 

Coronarije.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting 
of  such  as  have  beautiful  flowers,  thus  forming  a 
floral  crown. 

CORONARY.  {Coronarius ; from  corona,  a 
crown.)  This  term  is  applied  to  vessels  and  nerves, 
which  supply  the  corona  or  basis  of  parts,  or  because 
they  spread  round  the  part  like  a garland  or  crown. 

Coronary  ligaments.  (From  corona , a crown.) 
Ligaments  uniting  the  radius  and  ulna.  The  term 
ligamentum  coronarium  is  also  applied  to  a ligament 
of  the  liver. 

Coronary  vessels.  Vasa  coronaria.  The  arte- 
ries and  veins  of  the  heart  and  stomach. 

CORONATUS.  Little  crown-like  eminences  on 
the  surface  of  the  petal ; or  in  Nerium  oleander. 

Coronati.  Coronaticus.  The  name  of  a class  of 
plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method, 
consisting  of  plants  which  have  the  seed-bud  placed 
under  the  flower-cup  which  serves  it  for  a crown. 

CORO'NE.  (Kopiovr),  a crow : so  named  from  its 
supposed  likeness  to  a crow’s  bill.)  The  acute  process 
of  the  lower  jaw-bone. 

CORONOID.  (Coronoidcus ; from  Kopwvt],  a crow, 
and  eiSos,  likeness.  Processes  of  bones  are  so  called, 
that  have  any  resemblance  to  a crow’s  beak ; as  coro- 
noid  process  of  the  ulna,  jaw,  &c. 

CORONO'PUS.  (From  Kopuivr/,  a carrion  crow, 
and  ttov  , a foot ; the  plant  being  said  to  resemble  a 
crow’s  foot.)  See  Plantago. 

CORONUL  A.  The  hem  or  border  which  surrounds 
the  seeds  of  some  flowers  in  the  form  of  a crown. 

CO'RPUS.  1.  The  body.  See  Body. 

2.  Many  parts  and  substances  are  also  distinguished 
by  this  name : as  corpus  callosum,  corpus  luteum , &c. 

Corpus  albicans.  Two  white  eminences  in  the 
basis  of  the  brain,  discovered  by  Willis,  and  called  cor- 
pora albicantia  Willisii. 

Corpus  annulare.  A synonyme  of  the  pons  Va- 
rolii.  See  Pons  Varolii. 

Corpus  callosum.  Commissura  magna  cerebri. 
The  white  medullary  part  joining  the  two  hemispheres 
of  the  brain,  and  coming  into  view  under  the  falx  of 
the  dura  mater  when  the  hemispheres  are  drawn  from 
each  other.  On  the  surface  of  the  corpus  callosum 
two  lines  are  conspicuous,  called  the  raphe. 

Corpus  cavernosus  clitoridis.  See  Clitoris. 

Corpus  cavernosus  penis.  See  Penis. 

Corpus  pimbriatum.  The  flattened  terminations 
of  the  posterior  crura  of  the  fornix  of  the  brain,  which 
turn  round  into  the  inferiof  cavity  of  the  lateral  ventri 
cle,  and  end  in  the  pedes  hippocampi. 

Corpus  glandulosum.  The  prostate  gland. 

Corpus  lobosum.  Part  of  the  cortical  part  of  the 
kidney. 

Corpus  luteum.  A yellow  spot  found  in  that  part 
of  the  ovarium  of  females,  from  whence  an  ovum  has 
proceeded ; hence  their  presence  determines  that  the 
female  has  been  impregnated.  The  number  of  the 
corpora  lutea  corresponds  with  the  number  of  impreg- 
nations. It  is,  however,  asserted  by  a modern  writer, 
that  corpora  lutea  have  been  detected  in  young  vir- 
gins, where  no  impregnations  could  possibly  have 
taken  place. 

Corpus  mucosum.  See  Rcte  mucosum. 


2C7 


cos 


COR 

Corpus  nerveo-si>ongiosum.  The  cavernous  sub- 
stance of  the  penis. 

Corpus  nervosum.  The  cavernous  substance  of 
tile  clitoris. 

Corpus  ouivare.  Two  external  prominences  of 
the  medulla  oblongata,  shaped  somewhat  like  an  olive, 
are  called  corpora  olivaria. 

Corpus  pampiniforme.  Applied  to  the  spermatic 
chord  and  thoracic  duct ; also  to  the  plexus  of  veins 
surrounding  the  spermatic  artery  in  the  cavity  of  the 
adbomen. 

Corpus  pyramidale.  Two  internal  prominences 
of  the  medulla  oblongata,  which  are  of  a pyramidal 
shape,  are  called  corpora  pyramidalia. 

Corpus  quadrigeminum.  See  Tubercula  quadri- 
gemina. 

Corpus  reticulare.  See  Rete  mucosum. 

Corpus  sesamoideum.  A little  prominence  at  the 
entry  of  the  pulmonary  artery. 

Corpus  spongiosum  urethra.  Substantia  spon- 
giosa  urethrae.  Corpus  spongiosum  penis.  This  sub- 
stance originates  before  the  prostate  gland,  surrounds 
the  urethra,  and  forms  the  bulb  ; then  proceeds  to  the 
end  of  the  corpora  cavernosa,  and  terminates  in  the 
glans  penis,  which  it  forms. 

Corpus  striatum.  So  named  from  its  appearance. 
See  Cerebrum. 

Corpus  varicosum.  The  spermatic  chord. 

Corra'go.  (From  cor,  the  heart ; it  being  supposed 
to  have  a good  effect  in  comforting  the  heart.)  See 
Borago  officinalis. 

Co'rre.  (From  KCipw,  to  shave.)  The  temples. 
That  part  of  the  jaws  where  the  beard  grows,  and 
which  it  is  usual  to  shave. 

CORROBORANT.  ( Corroborans .)  Whatever 
gives  strength  to  the  body ; as  bark,  wine,  beef,  cold- 
bath,  &c.  See  Tonic. 

CORROSIVE.  (Corrosivus  ; from  corrodo , to  eat 
away.)  See  Escharotic. 

Corrosive  sublimate.  The  oxymuriate  of  mercury. 
See  Hydrargyri  oxymurias. 

CORRUGA'TOR.  (From  corrugo,  to  wrinkle.) 
The  name  of  muscles,  the  office  of  which  is  to  wrin- 
kle or  corrugate  the  parts  they  act  on. 

Corrugator  supercilii.  A small  muscle  situated 
on  the  forehead.  Musculus  supercilii  of  Winslow ; 
Musculus  frontalis  verus,  seu  corrugator  coiterii  of 
Douglas ; and  Cutanio  sourcillier  of  Dumas.  When 
one  muscle  acts,  it  is  drawn  towards  the  other,  and 
projects  over  the  inner  canthus  of  the  eye.  When  both 
muscles  act,  they  pull  down  the  skin  of  the  forehead, 
and  make  it  wrinkle,  particularly  between  the  eye- 
brows. 

CO'RTEX.  ( Cortex,  ids.  m.  or  f.)  This  term  is 
generally,  though  improperly,  given  to  the  Peruvian 
bark.  It  applies  to  any  rind,  or  bark. 

Cortex  angeling.  The  bark  of  a tree  growing  in 
Grenada.  A decoction  of  it  is  recommended  as  a ver- 
mifuge. It  excites  tormina,  similar  to  jalap,  and  ope- 
rates  by  purging. 

Cortex  angustur®.  See  Cusparia. 

Cortex  antiscorbuticus.  The  caneila  alba.  See 
Winteria  aromatica. 

Cortex  aromaticus.  See  Winteria  aromatica. 

Cortex  bela-aye.  See  Nerium  antidysenteri- 
cum. 

Cortex  canell.®  malabaric®.  See  Laurus 
cassia. 

Cortex  cardinalis  de  lugo.  The  Peruvian  bark : 
so  called,  because  the  Cardinal  Lugo  had  testimonials 
of  above  a thousand  cures  performed  by  it  in  the  year 
1653. 

Cortex  cerebri.  The  cortical  substance  of  the 
brain.  See  Cerebrum. 

Cortex  chin®  regius.  See  Cinchona. 

Cortex  chin.®  surinamensis.  This  bark  is  re- 
markably bitter,  and  preferable  to  the  other  species  in 
intermittent  fevers. 

Cortex  chinchin®.  See  Cinchona. 

Cortex  elutheri®.  See  Croton  cascarilla. 

Cortex  geoffroy®  jamaicensis.  See  Geoffroya 
jamaicensis. 

Cortex  jamaicensis.  See  Acras  sapota. 

Cortex  lavola.  The  bark  bearing  this  name  is 
supposed  to  be  the  produce  of  the  tree  which  affords 
the  Anisum  stellatum  Its  virtues  are  similar. 

Cortex  magellanicus.  See  Winteria  aromatica. 

268 


Cortex  massoy.  The  produce  of  New  Guinea, 
where  it  is  beaten  into  a pultaceous  mass  with  water, 
and  rubbed  upon  the  abdomen  to  allay  pain  of  the 
bowels.  It  has  the  smell  and  flavour  of  cinnamon. 

Cortex  patrum.  See  Cinchona. 

Cortex  peruvianus.  See  Cinchona. 

Cortex  peruvianus  flavus.  See  Cinchona. 

Cortex  peruvianus  ruber.  See  Cinchona. 

Cortex  pocgereb.e.  A bark  sent  from  America ; 
said  to  be  serviceable  in  diarrhoeas,  and  dysenteries. 

Cortex  quassia.  See  Quassia  amara. 

Cortex  winterianus.  See  Winteria  aromatica. 

CO'RTICAL.  Corticalis.  1.  Belonging  to  the 
bark  of  a plant  or  tree. 

2.  Embracing  or  surrounding  any  part  like  the  bark 
of  a tree ; as  the  cortical  substance  of  the  brain,  kid 
ney,  &c. 

CORTICO'SUS.  Like  bark  or  rind.  Applied  to 
the  hard  pod  of  the  Cassia  fistularis. 

Cortu'sa.  See  Sanicula  europcea. 

Co'ru  canarica.  A quince-like  tree  of  Malabar  ; 
it  is  antidysenteric. 

CORUNDUM.  A genus  of  minerals,  which,  ac 
cording  to  Jameson,  contains  three  species ; the  octo 
hedral,  rhomboidal,  and  prismatic. 

CORYDALES.  (From  uopvs,  a helmet.)  The 
name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments 
of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of  plants  which  have 
flowers  somewhat  resembling  a helmet  or  hood. 

CO'RYLUS.  (Derivation  uncertain:  according  to 
some,  from  Kapva,  a walnut.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Li  nna:an  system.  Class,  Moncecia; 
Order,  Polyandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  hazel-tree.  See 
Corylus  avellana. 

Corylus  avellana.  The  hazel-nut  tree.  The  nuts 
of  this  tree  are  much  eaten  in  this  country ; they  are 
hard  of  digestion,  and  often  pass  the  bowels  very  little 
altered ; if,  however,  they  are  well  chewed,  they  give 
out  a nutritious  oil.  An  oil  is  also  obtained  from  the 
wood  of  this  tree,  Corylus  avellana  stipulis  ovatis, 
obtusis,  of  Linnaeus ; which  is  efficacious  against  the 
toothache,  and  is  said  to  kill  worms. 

CORYMBIFERA3.  .(From  corymbus  ; a species  of 
florescence,  and  fero,  to  bear.)  Plants  which  bear 
corymbal  flowers. 

CORYMBUS.  (K opvpf3ov,  or  Kopvp(3os,  a branch 
or  cluster  crowning  the  summit  of  a plant ; from  xopvs, 
a helmet.)  A corymb.  That  species  of  inflorescence 
formed  by  many.flowers,  the  partial  flower-stalks  of 
which  are  gradually  longer,  as  they  stand  lower  on  the 
common  stalk,  so  that  all  the  flowers  are  nearly  on  a 
level;  as  in  the  Crysanthemum  corymhosum.  It  is 
said  to  be  simple,  wiien  not  divided  into  branches;  as 
in  Thlaspi  arvense,  and  Gnaphalium  dentaturn : and 
compound,  when  it  has  brandies ; as  in  Gnaphalium 
stcechas. 

Co'ryphe.  Kcpvcpy.  The  vertex  of  the  head.— 
Galen. 

CORY'ZA.  (Kopuga;  from  icapa,  the  head,  and  gea>, 
to  boil.)  An  increased  discharge  of  mucus  from  the 
nose.  See  Catarrh.  Dr.  Good  makes  this  a genus  of 
disease ; running  at  the  nose.  It  has  two  species, 
Coryza  entonica,  and  atonica. 

Coscu'lia.  The  grains  of  kermes. 

COSME  TIC.  Cosmeticus.  A term  applied  to 
remedies  against  blotches  and  freckles. 

Co'smos.  A regular  series.  In  Hippocrates  it  is  the 
order  and  series  of  critical  days. 

Co'ssis.  A little  tubercle  in  the  face,  like  the  head 
of  a worm. 

Co'ssum.  A malignant  ulcer  of  the  nose,  men- 
tioned by  Paracelsus. 

COSTA.  A rib.  1.  The  rib  of  an  animal.  See  Ribs. 

2.  The  thick  middle  nerve-like  cord  of  a leaf,  whiGh 
proceeds  from  its  base  to  the  apex.  See  Leaf. 

Costa  herba.  The  Hypochccris  radicata. 

COSTAL1S.  (From  costa,  a rib.)  Belonging  to«a 
rib:  applied  to  muscles,  arteries,  nerves,  &c. 

Costa  pulmonaria.  Very  probably  the  Hypochccris 
radicata,  or  long-rooted  hawk-weed,  which  was  used 
in  pulmonary  affections,  and  pains  of  the  side. 

COSTA'TUS.  Ribbed.  Applied  to  leaves,  and  is 
synonymous  with  nervous:  the  leaf  having  simple 
lines  extended  from  the  base  to  the  point.  See  Leaf. 

Costo-iiyoideus.  A muscle,  so  named  from  its 
origin  and  insertion.  See  Omohyoideus. 


cotr 


CRA 


CO'STUS.  (From  kasta,  Arabian.)  The  name  of  I 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Monandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Cost  us  amarvs.  See  Costus  arabicus. 

Costus  arabicus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Costus  indicus ; amarus  ; dulcis ; orientalis.  Sweet 
and  bitter  costus.  The  root  of  this  tree  possesses  bit- 
ter and  aromatic  virtues,  and  is  considered  as  a good 
stomachic.  Formerly  there  were  two  other  species, 
the  bitter  and  sweet , distinguished  for  use.  At  present, 
the  Arabic  only  is  known,  and  that  is  seldom  employed. 
It  is,  however,  said  to  be  stomachic,  diaphoretic,  and 
diuretic. 

€ostus(corticosus.  The  canella  alba. 

Costus  hortordm  minor.  Th e Achillcea  ageratum. 

Costus  niqra.  The  artichoke. 

Cotaro'nium.  A word  coined  by  Paracelsus,  im- 
plying a liquor  into  which  all  bodies,  and  even  their 
elements,  may  be  dissolved. 

Co'tis.  (From  Kofly,  the  head.)  The  back  part 
of  the  head  ; sometimes  the  hollow  of  the  neck. 

CO'TULA.  ( Cotula , diminutive  of  cos,  a whet- 
stone, from  the  resemblance  of  its  leaves  to  a whet- 
stone ; or  from  Ko'JvXy,  a hollow.)  Stinking  chamo- 
mile. 

[“  Cotula.  Mayweed.  The  anthemis  cotula  is  an 
annual  weed  imported  from  Europe,  and  now  very 
common  by  road  sides  throughout  the  United  States. 
Its  taste  is  strong,  disagreeable,  and  bitter.  In  small 
quantities  it  is  tonic,  stimulating,  and  diaphoretic;  in 
large  ones  emetic  and  sudorific.  It  is  commonly  given 
in  infusion.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

CO'TULE.  {Ko-vXrj,  the  name  of  an  old  measure.) 
The  socket  of  the  hipbone.  See  Acetabulum. 

Cottula  fcetida.  See  Anthemis  cotula. 

COTYLEDON.  ( Cotyledon , onis.  f. ; from  KOTvXy, 
a cavity.)  Seed-lobe,  or  cotyledon.  The  cotyledones 
are  the  two  halves  of  a seed,  which,  when  germi- 
nating, become  two  pulpy  leaves,  called  the  seminal 
leaves.  These  leaves  are  often  of  a different  form 
from  those  which  are  about  to  appear;  as  in  the 
Raphanus  sativus ; and  sometimes  they  are  of  an- 
other colour;  as  in  Cannabis  sativa , the  seminal 
leaves  of  which  are  white. 

Almost  all  the  cotyledons  wither  and  fall  off,  as  the 
plant  grows  up. 

These  bodies  are  spoken  of  in  the  plural,  because  it 
it  is  much  doubted  whether  any  plant  can  be  said  to 
have  a solitary  cotyledon,  so  that  most  plants  are 
dicotyledonous.  Plants  without  any,  are  called  acoty- 
ledones.  Those  with  more  than  two,  polycotyledo- 
nous. 

Between  the  two  cotyledons  of  the  germinating  seed, 
is  seated  the  embryo , or  germ  of  the  plant,  called  by 
Linnaeus,  corculum , or  little  heart,  in  allusion  to  the 
heart  of  the  walnut.  Mr.  Knight  denominates  it  the 
germen:  but  that  term  is  appropriated  to  a very  dif- 
ferent part,  the  rudiment  of  the  fruit.  The  expanding 
embryo,  resembling  a little  feather,  has,  for  that  rea- 
son, been  called  by  Linnaeus,  plumula  : it  soon  becomes 
a tuft  of  young  leaves,  with  which  the  young  stem  as- 
cends. See  Corculum. 

COTYLOID.  ( Cotyloidcs  ; from  kotvXij , the  name 
of  an  old  measure,  and  ados,  resemblance.)  Resem- 
bling the  old  measure,  or  cotule. 

Cotyloid  cavity.  The  acetabulum.  See  Innomi- 
natum  os.  * 

COTYLOI'DES. — See  Cotyloid. 

COUCHING.  A surgical  operation  that  consists  in 
removing  the  opaque  lens  out  of  the  axis  of  vision,  by 
means  of  a needle  constructed  for  the  purpose. 

Couch-grass.  See  'Priticum  repens. 

COUGH.  Tussis.  A sonorous  concussion  of  the 
thorax,  produced  by  the  sudden  expulsion  of  the  air 
from  the  chest  through  the  fauces.  See  Catarrh. 

Co'um.  The  meadow-saffron. 

COUNTER-OPENING.  Contra-apertura.  An 
openiiig  made  in  any  part  of  an  abscess  opposite  to 
one  already  in  it.  This  is  often  done  in  order  to  afford 
a readier  egress  to  the  collected  pus. 

Coup  de  soleil.  The  French  for  an  erysipelas  or 
apoplexy,  or  any  affection  produced  instantaneously 
from  a scorching  sun. 

Cou'rap.  (Indian.)  The  provincial  name  of  a dis- 
ease of  the  skin  common  in  Java,  and  other  parts  of 
the  East  Indies,  accompanied  by  a perpetual  itching 
and  discharge  of  matter. 


I Cou'rbaril.  The  tree  which  produces  the  gum 
anime.  See  Anime. 

Couro'ndi.  An  evergreen  tree  of  India,  said  to  be 
antidysenteric. 

Couroy  moelli.  A shrub  of  India,  said  to  be  anti- 
venomous. 

Cou'scous.  An  African  food,  much  used  about  the 
river  Senegal.  It  is  a composition  of  the  flour  of 
millet,  with  some  flesh,  and  what  is  there  called  lalo. 

Covola'm.  See  Cratceva  marmelos. 

COWHAGE.  See  Dolichos  pruriens. 

COW-ITCH.  See  Dolichos  pruriens. 

COWPER,  William,  was  born  about  the  middle  of 
the  17th  century,  and  became  distinguished  as  a sur- 
geon and  anatomist  in  this  metropolis.  His  first  work, 
entitled  “ Myotomia  Reformata,”  in  1694,  far  excelled 
any  which  preceded  it  on  that  subject  in  correct- 
ness, though  since  surpassed  by  Albinus.  Three 
years  after,  he  published  at  Oxford  “ the  Anatomy  of 
Human  Bodies,”  with  splendid  plates,  chiefly  from 
Bidloo  ; but  forty  of  the  figures  were  from  drawings 
made  by  himself;  he  added  also  some  ingenious  and 
useful  anatomical  and  surgical  observations.  Having 
been  accused  of  plagiarism  by  Bidloo,  lie  wrote  an  apo- 
logy, called  “ Eucharistia ;”  preceded  by  a description 
of  some  glands,  near  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  which 
have  been  called  by  his  name.  He  was  also  author 
of  several  communications  to  the  Royal  Society,  and 
some  observations  inserted  in  the  anthropologia  of 
Drake.  He  died  in  1710. 

Cowper’s  glands.  (Cowperi  glandulw  ; named 
from  Cowper,  who  first  described  them.)  Three  large 
muciparous  glands  of  the  male,  two  of  which  are  situ- 
ated before  the  prostate  gland  under  the  accelerator 
muscles  of  the  urine,  and  the  third  more  forward,  be- 
fore the  bulb  of  the  urethra.  They  excrete  a fluid, 
similar  to  that  of  the  prostate  gland,  during  the  vene- 
real orgasm. 

Cowpe'ri  glandule:.  See  Cowper' s glands. 

CO  XA.  The  ischium  is  sometimes  so  called,  and 
sometimes  the  os  coccygis. 

COXE'NDIX.  (From  coxa , the  hip.)  The  ischi- 
um ; the  hip-joint. 

Crablouse.  A species  of  pediculus  which  infests 
the  axillae  and  pudenda. 

[The  crab-louse  is  not  a pediculus,  but  belongs  to  the 
genus  of  acarus.  If  the  parts  infested  by  them  be 
washed  with  an  infusion  of  tobacco,  it  will  soon  kill 
these  vermin.  A.] 

Grab-yaws.  A name  in  Jamaica  for  a kind  of  ulcer 
on  the  soles  of  the  feet,  with  callous  lips,  so  hard  that 
it  is  difficult  to  cut  them. 

[“CRAIK,  James,  M.D.  Dr.  Craik  was  born  in 
Scotland,  where  he  received  his  education  for  the 
medical  service  of  the  British  army.  He  came  to  the 
colony  of  Virginia  in  early  life,  and  had  the  honour  to 
accompany  the  youthful  Washington  in  his  expedition 
against  the  French  and  Indians  in  1754,  and  returned 
in  safety  after  the  battle  of  the  Meadows,  and  surren- 
der of  Fort  Necessity.  In  1755,  he  attended  Braddock 
in  his  march  through  the  wilderness,  and  on  the  9th 
of  July,  assisted  in  dressing  the  wounds  of  that  brave, 
but  unfortunate  commander.  At  the  close  of  the 
Frehch  war,  the  subject  of  this  article  resumed  and 
continued  his  professional  labours  till  the  commence- 
ment of  the  Revolution  in  1775.  By  the  aid  of  his 
early  and  fast  friend,  General  Washington,  he  was 
transferred  to  the  Medical  Department  in  the  Conti 
nental  army,  and  rose  to  the  first  rank  and  distinction. 
In  1777,  he  had  an  opportunity,  which  he  gladly  em- 
braced, to  show  his  fidelity  to  his  General,  and  to  his 
adopted  country,  by  taking  an  active  part  in  the  de- 
velopement  of  a nefarious  conspiracy,  the  object  of 
which  was  the  removal  of  the  commander  in  chief. 
In  1780,  he  was  deputed  to  visit  Count  de  Rocham- 
beau,  then  recently  arrived  at  Rhode-Island,  and  to 
make  arrangements  for  the  establishment  of  Hospitals 
to  accommodate  the  French  army.  Having  performed 
this  difficult  duty,  he  continued  in  the  army  to  the  end 
of  the  war,  and  was  present  at  the  surrender  of  Corn- 
wallis, on  the  memorable  19th  October,  1781. 

After  the  cessation  of  hostilities,  the  Doctor  settled 
as  a physician  in  Charles  County,  in  Maryland,  but 
soon  removed  to  the  neighbourhood  of  his  illustrious 
friend  and  companion,  the  fanner  of  Mount  Vernon, 
at  his  particular,  repeated,  and  urgent  request.  In 
1798,  when,  like  a guardian  angel,  the  never  to  be  for- 

269 


CRA 


gotten  Washington  again  stepped  forth  to  redress  the 
Wrongs  of  his  country ; the  venerable  Craik  was  once 
more  appointed  to  his  former  station  in  the  medical 
staff.  With  the  disbandment  of  the  army,  then  called 
into  service,  ceased  the  public  professional  labours  of 
the  subject  of  this  memoir,  whose  life,  for  nearly  half 
a century,  has  been  devoted  with  zeal  and  high  repu- 
tation to  the  cause  of  his  country. 

One  trying  duty  yet  remained  to  be  performed ; it 
was  to  witness  the  closing  scene,  and  to  receive  the 
last  sigh  of  his  revered  commander,  the  most  distin- 
guished man  of  his  age.  Their  youthful  commissions 
had  been  signed  on  the  same  day;  they  had  served 
together  in  the  ranks  of  war;  their  friendship  was 
cemented  by  a social  intercourse  of  fifty  years’  continu- 
ance, and  they  were  greatly  endeared  to  each  other  by 
common  toils,  privations,  and  honours.  At  length  the 
moment  of  parting  arrived ; it  was  tender,  affectionate, 
solemn,  and  impressive.  In  reference  to  that  painful 
event,  the  Doctor  is  said  to  have  expressed  himself  in 
this  manner : “ I,  who  was  bred  amid  scenes  of  human 
calamity,  who  had  so  often  witnessed  death  in  its  direst 
and  most  awful  forms,  believed  that  its  terrors  were 
too  familiar  to  my  eye  to  shake  my  fortitude ; but  when 
I saw  this  great  man  die,  it  seemed  as  if  the  bonds  of 
my  nature  were  rent  asunder,  and  that  the  pillar  of 
my  country’s  happiness  had  fallen  to  the  ground.” 

As  a physician,  Dr.  Craik  was  greatly  distinguished 
by  his  skill  and  success,  and  his  professional  merits 
were  highly  and  justly  appreciated.  In  the  various 
relations  of  private  life,  his  character  was  truly  esti- 
mable, and  his  memory  is  precious  to  all  who  had  the 
happiness  and  the  honour  of  his  acquaintance.  He 
was  one,  and  what  a proud  eulogy  it  is,  of  whom  the 
immortal  Washington  was  pleased  to  write,  “my 
compatriot  in  arms,  my  old  and  intimate  friend.”  He 
departed  this  life  at  the  place  of  his  residence  in  Fair- 
fax county,  on  the  6th  February,  1814,  in  the  84th  year 
of  his  age.” — Thack.  Med.  Biug.  A.] 

CRA'MBE.  (Kpap&7,  the  name  given  by  Dioscori- 
des,  Galen,  and  others,  to  the  cabbage ; the  derivation 
is  uncertain.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Li nnaean  system.  Class,  Tetradynamia ; Order,  Sili- 
culosa.  Cabbage. 

Crambe  maritima.  The  systematic  name  for  the 
sea-cole,  or  sea-kale.  A delicious  vegetable  when 
forced  and  blanched.  It  is  brought  to  table  about 
Christmas,  has  a delicate  flavour,  and  is  much  es- 
teemed. Like  to  all  oleraceous  plants,  it  is  flatulent 
and  watery. 

CRAMP.  (From  krempen , to  contract.  Germ.) 
See  Spasm. 

CRANESBILL.  See  Geranium. 

Cranesbill , bloody.  See  Geranium  sanguineum. 

CRA'NIUM.  (Kpavtov,  quasi  Kapaviov  ; from  xapa, 
the  head.)  The  skull  or  superior  part  of  the  head. 
See  Caput. 

Cranterer.  (From  Kpaivo),  to  perform.)  A name 
given  to  the  dentes  sapientiae  and  other  molares,  from 
their  office  of  masticating  the  food. 

CRA'PULA.  (KpaiirvXa.)  A surfeit ; drunkenness. 

CRA'SIS.  (From  KCpavvvui , to  mix.)  Mixture. 
A term  applied  to  the  humours  of  the  body,  when 
there  is  such  an  admixture  of  their  principles  as  to 
constitute  a healthy  state : hence,  in  dropsies,  scurvy, 
&c.  the  crasis,  or  healthy  mixture  of  the  principles  of 
the  blood,  is  said  to  be  destroyed. 

Cra'spedon.  ( KpaenreSov , the  hem  of  a garment ; 
from  Aprpaw,  to  hang  down,  and  7T£(5ov,  the  ground.)  A 
relaxation  of  the  uvula,  when  it  hangs  down  in  a thin, 
long  membrane,  like  the  hem  of  a garment. 

CRASSAME'NTUM.  (From  crassus , thick.)  See 
Blood. 

CRA'SSULA.  (From  crassus , thick:  so  named 
from  the  thickness  of  its  leaves.)  See  Sedum  tele- 
phium. 

CRAT^E'GUS.  (From  Kpa"]os,  strength  : so  called 
from  the  strength  and  hardness  of  its  wood.)  The 
wild  service-tree,  of  which  there  are  many,  are  all  spe- 
cies of  the  genus  Prunus.  The  fruits  are  most  of  them 
astringent. 

CRATEVA.  (So  called  from  Cratevas,  a Greek 
physician,  celebrated  by  Hippocrates  for  his  knowledge 
of ’plants.  ) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Polyandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Crateva  marmelos.  The  fruit  is  astringent  while 
unripe ; but  when  Hoe,  of  a delicious  taste.  The  bark 
270 


CRI 


of  the  tree  strengthens  the  stomach,  and  relieves  hy- 
pochondriac languors. 

Crati'cula.  (From  crates , a hurdle.)  The  bars 
or  grate  which  covers  the  ash-hole  in  a chemical  fur- 
nace. 

CRATON,  John,  called  also  Crafftheim,  was  bom 
at  B reslaw  in  1519.  He  was  intended  for  the  church, 
but  preferring  the  study  of  medicine,  went  to  graduate 
at  Padua,  and  then  settled  at  Breslaw.  But  after  a 
few  years  he  was  called  to  Vienna,  and  made  physi- 
cian and  aulic  counsellor  to  the  Emperor  Ferdinand  I. : 
which  offices  also  he  held  under  the  two  succeeding 
emperors,  and  died  in  1585.  His  works  were  nume- 
rous : the  principal  are,  “ A Commentary  on  Syphilis ;” 
“ A Treatise  on  Contagious  Fever  another  on  “ The- 
rapeutics;” and  seven  volumes-  of  Epistles  and  Con- 
sultations. 


Cream  of  tartar.  See  Potasses  supertartras. 

CREMA  STER.  (From  xpepaw,  to  suspend.)  A 
muscle  of  the  testicle,  by  which  it  is  suspended,  and 
drawn  up  and  compressed,  in  the  act  of  coition.  It 
arises  from  Poupart’s  ligament,  passes  over  the  sper- 
matic chord,  and  is  lost  in  the  cellular  membrane  of 
the  scrotum,  covering  the  testicles. 

Cre'mnus.  (From  xp^pvof,  a precipice,  or  shelving 
place.)  1.  The  lip  of  an  ulcer. 

2.  The  labium  pudendi. 

CRE'MOR.  1.  Cream.  The  oily  part  of  milk 
which  rises  to  the  surface  of  that  liquid,  mixed  with  a 
little  curd  and  serum.  When  churned,  butler  is  ob 
tained.  See  Milk. 

2.  Any  substance  floating  on  the  top,  and  skimmed 

off. 


CRENATUS.  Crenate  or  notched,  applied  to  a 
leaf  or  petal,  when  the  indentations  are  blunted  or 
rounded,  and  not  directed  toward  either  end  of  the 
leaf ; as  in  Glecoma  hederacea.  The  two  British  spe- 
cies of  Salvia  are  examples  of  doubly  crenate  leaves. 
The  petals  of  the  Linum  usitatissimum  are  crenate. 

CRE'PITUS.  (From  crepo , to  make  a noise.)  A 
puff  or  little  noise.  The  word  is  generally  employed 
to  express  the  pothognamonic  symptoms  of  air  being 
collected  in  the  cellular  membrane  of  the  body ; for 
when  air  is  in  these  cavities,  and  the  part  is  pressed,  a 
little  cracking  noise,  or  crepitus,  is  heard. 

Crepitus  lupi.  See  Lycoperdon  bovista. 

Crescent- shaped.  See  Leaf. 

CRESS.  There  are  several  kinds  of  cresses  eaten 
at  the  table,  and  used  medicinally,  as  antiscorbutics. 

Cress , water.  See  Sisymbrium  nasturtium  aquati- 
cum. 

CRE'TA.  Chalk.  An  impure  carbonate  of  lime. 
See  Greta  pr cep  arata. 

Creta  pr^iparate.  Take  of  chalk  a pound  ; add 
a little  water,  and  rub  it  to  a fine  powder.  Throw 
this  into  a large  vessel  full  of  water ; then  shake  them, 
and  after  a little  while  pour  the  still  turbid  liquor  into 
another  vessel,  and  set  it  by  that  the  powder  may  sub- 
side ; lastly,  pouring  off  the  water,  dry  this  powder 
Prepared  chalk  is  absorbent,  and  possesses  antacid 
qualities : it  is  exhibited  in  form  of  electuary,  mixture, 
or  bolus,  in  pyrosis,  cardialgia,  diarrhsea,  acidities  of 
the  primae  viae,  rachitis,  crusta  lactea,  &c.  and  is  said 
by  some  to  be  an  antidote  against  white  arsenic. 

Cretaceous  add.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

Crete , dittany  of.  See  Origanum  dictamnus. 

CRETLNISMUS.  Cretinism.  A species  of  Cyrto 
sis  in  Dr.  Good’s  Nosology:  a disease  affecting  chiefly 
the  head  and  neck ; countenance  vacant  and  stupid  ; 
mental  faculties  feeble,  or  idiotic ; sensibility  obtuse, 
mostly  with  enlargement  of  the  thyroid  gland. 

CRIBRIFO'RM.  (Cnbnformis ; from  cribrum , a 
sieve,  and  form  a,  likeness  ; because  it  is  perforated 
like  a sieve.)  Perforated  like  a sieve.  See  Ethmoid 
bone.  . 

CRICHTONITE.  A mineral  named  after  Dr. 
Crichton,  which  Jameson  thinks  is  a new  species  of 
titanium  ore.  It  is  of  a splendent  velvet  black  colour. 

CRI'CO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  belong 
to  muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  cricoid  cartilage. 

Crico-aryt-enoideus  lateralis.  Crico-lateri 
arithenoidien  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  glottis,  that 
opens  the  rima  by  pulling  the  ligaments  from  each 
other. 

Crico-arytje.voideus  posticus.  Cnco-creti  ari 
thenoidien  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  glottis,  that 
opens  the  rima  glottidis  a little,  and  by  pulling  back 


CRO 


CRI 

the  arytaenoid  cartilage,  stretches  the  ligament  so  as  to 
make  it  tense. 

Crico-pharyngeus.  See  Constrictor  pharyngis 
inferior. 

Crico-thyfoibeus.  Crico-thyroidien  of  Dumas. 
The  last  of  the  second  layer  of  muscles  between  the 
os  hyoides  and  trunk,  that  pulls  forward  and  depresses 
the  thyroid  cartilage,  or  elevates  and  draws  backwards 
the  cricoid  cartilage. 

CRICOI'D.  {Cricoides ; from  KpiKos,  a ring,  and 
resemblance.)  A round  ring-like  cartilage  of 
the  larynx  is  called  the  cricoid.  See  Larynx. 

CRIMNO'DES.  (From  Kpipvov,  bran.)  A term 
applied  to  urine,  which  deposites  a sediment  like  bran. 

Crina'tus.  (From  Kpivov,  the  lily.)  A term  given 
to  a suffumigation  mentioned  by  P.  HEgineta,  composed 
chiefly  of  the  roots  of  lilies. 

CRI'NIS.  The  hair.  See  Capillus. 

Crinomy'ron.  (From  Kpivov,  a lily,  and  pypov,  oint- 
ment.) An  ointment  composed  chiefly  of  lilies. 

CRINONES.  (From  crinis,  the  hair.)  Malis  gor- 
dii  of  Good.  Morbus  pilaris  of  Horst.  Malis  a,  cri- 
nonibus  of  Elmuller  and  Sauvages.  Collections  of  a 
sebaceous  fluid  in  the  cutaneous  follicles  upon  the 
face  and  breast,  which  appear  like  black  spots,  and 
when  pressed  out,  look  like  small  worms,  or,  as  they 
are  commonly  called,  maggots. 

Crio'genes.  An  epithet  for  certain  troches,  men- 
tioned by  P.  AEgineta,  and  which  he  commends  for 
cleansing  ulcers. 

CRIPSO'RCHIS.  (From  upv ifju),  to  conceal,  and 
opxis,  a testicle.)  Having  the  testicle  concealed,  or 
not  yet  descended  from  the  abdomen  into  the  scro- 
tum. 

CRl'SIS.  (From  xpivco,  to  judge.)  The  judgment. 
The  change  of  symptoms  in  acute  diseases,  from 
which  the  recovery  or  death  i3  prognosticated  or 
judged  of. 

Crispatu'ra.  (From  crispo,  to  curl.)  A spas- 
modic contraction  or  curling  of  the  membranes  and 
fibres. 

CRISPUS.  Curled.  Applied  to  a leaf,  when  the 
border  is  so  much  more  dilated  than  the  disk,  that  it 
necessarily  becomes  curled  and  twisted ; as  in  Malva 
crispa,  &c. 

CRI'STA.  (Quasi  cerista;  from  Ktpaq,  a horn,  or 
carista;  from  Kapa , the  head,  as  being  on  the  top  of 
the  head.)  Any  thing  which  has  the  appearance  of  a 
crest,  or  the  comb  upon  the  head  of  a cock.  1.  In 
anatomy  it  is  thus  applied  to  a process  of  the  ethmoid 
bone,  christa  galli,  and  to  a part  of  the  nymphos 
crista  clitoridis. 

2.  In  surgery,  to  excrescences,  like  the  comb  of  a 
cock,  about  the  anus. 

3.  In  botany,  to  several  accessary  parts  or  appen- 
dages, chiefly  belonging  to  the  antheras  of  plants ; as 
-the  pod  of  the  Hedysarum  crista  galli,  &c. 

Crista  galli.  An  eminence  of  the  ethmoid  bone, 
-so  called  from  its  resemblance  to  a cock’s  comb.  See 
Ethmoid  bone. 

CRIST ATUS.  Crested.  Applied  to  several  parts 
of  plants. 

Cri'thamum.  See  Crithmum. 

Cri'the.  (K pidrj,  barley.)  A stye  or  tumour  on 
the  eyelid,  in  the  shape  and  of  the  size  of  a barley- 
corn. 

Crithe'r-ion.  (From  Kpiviv,  to  judge.)  The  same 
as  crisis. 

CRI  THMUM.  (From  Kpiv o>,  to  secrete ; so  named 
from  its  supposed  virtues  in  promoting  a discharge  of 
the  urine  and  menses.)  Samphire  or  sea-fennel. 

Crithmum  maritimum.  The  Linnaean  name  of 
the  samphire  or  sea-fennel.  Crithmum  of  the  phar- 
macopoeias. It  is  a low  perennial  plant,  and  grows 
about  the  sea-coast  in  several  parts  of  the  island.  It 
has  a spicy  aromatic  flavour,  which  induces  the  com- 
mon people  to  use  it  as  a pot-herb.  Pickled  with  vine- 
gar and  spice,  it  makes  a wholesome  and  elegant  con- 
diment, which  is  in  much  esteem. 

CRITHO'DES.  (From  KpiOy,  barley,  and  eiSos,  re- 
semblance.) Resembling  a barley-corn.  It  is  applied 
to  small  protuberances. 

CRI'TICAL.  (Criticus ; from  crisis;  from  kuvo), 
to  judge.)  Determining  the  event  of  a disease.  Many 
physicians  have  been  of  opinion,  that  there  is  some- 
thing in  the  nature  of  fevers  which  generally  deter- 
mines them  to  be  of  a certain  duration ; and,  therefore, 


that  their  terminations,  whether  salutary  or  fatal,  hap* 
pen  at  certain  periods  of  the  disease,  rather  than  at 
others.  These  periods,  which  were  carefully  marked 
by  Hippocrates,  are  called  critical  days.  The  critical 
days,  or  those  on  which  we  suppose  the  termination 
of  continued  fevers  especially  to  happen,  are  the  third, 
fifth,  seventh,  ninth,  eleventh,  fourteenth,  seventeenth, 
and  twentieth. 

CROCIDl'XIS.  (From  KpoKiSify,  to  gather  wool.) 
Floccilation.  A fatal  symptom  in  some  diseases, 
where  the  patient  gathers  up  the  bed-clothes,  and 
seems  to  pick  up  substances  from  them. 

Cro'cinum.  (From  kpokos,  saffron.)  A mixture  of 
oil,  myrrh,  and  saffron. 

Croco'des.  (From  kpokos,  saffron ; so  called  from 
the  quantity  of  saffron  they  contain.)  A name  of  some 
old  troches. 

Crocoma'gma.  (From  kpokos,  saffron,  and  paypa, 
the  thick  oil  or  dregs.)  A troch  made  of  oil  of  saffron 
and  spices. 

CRO'CUS.  (Kpoxo?  of  Theophrastus.  The  story 
of  the  young  Crocus,  turned  into  this  flower,  may  be 
seen  in  the  fourth  book  of  Ovid’s  Metamorphoses. 
Some  derive  this  name  from  upoKy  or  xp okis,  a thread ; 
whence  the  stamens  of  flowers  are  called  KpoKiSes- 
Others,  again,  derive  it  from  Coriscus,  a city  and 
mountain  of  Cilicia,  and  others  from  crokin,  Chald.) 
Saffron. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnasan 
system.  Class,  Triandria : Order,  Monogynia.  Saf 
fron. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  prepared  stig- 
mata of  the  saffron  plant.  See  Crocus  sativus. 

3.  A term  given  by  the  older  chemists  to  several  pre- 
parations of  metallic  substances,  from  their  resem- 
blance : thus,  Crocus  martis,  Crocus  veneris. 

Crocus  antimonii.  A sulphuretted  oxide  of  an- 
timony. 

Crocus  germanicus.  See  Carthamus. 

Crocus  indicus.  See  Curcuma. 

Crocus  martis.  Burnt  green  vitriol. 

Crocus  metallorum.  A sulphuretted  oxide  of 
antimony. 

Crocus  officinalis.  See  Crocus  sativus. 

Crocus  saracenicus.  See  Carthamus. 

Crocus  sativus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
saffron  plant.  Crocus : — spatha  univalvi  radicali , 

corolloe  tubo  longissimo,  of  Linnaeus.  Saffron  has  a 
powerful,  penetrating,  diffusive  smell,  and  a warm, 
pungent,  bitterish  taste.  Many  virtues  were  formerly 
attributed  to  this  medicine,  but  little  confidence  is  now 
placed  in  it.  The  Edinburgh  College  directs  a tincture, 
and  that  of  London  a syrup  of  this  drug. 

Crocus  veneris.  Copper  calcined  to  a red  powder. 

Cro'mmyon.  (Ilapa  to  raj  Kopas  pveiv,  because  it 
makes  the  eyes  wink.)  An  onion. 

Crommyoxyre'gma.  (From  Kpoppvov,  an  onion, 
o(u?,  acid,  and  pyyvvpi,  to  break  out.)  An  acid  eruc- 
tation accompanied  with  a taste  resembling  onions. 

CROONE,  William,  was  born  in  London,  where 
he  settled  as  a physician,  after  studying  at  Cambridge. 
In  1659,  he  was  chosen  rhetoric  professor  of  Gresham 
College,  and  soon  after  register  of  the  Royal  Society, 
which  then  assembled  there.  In  1662,  he  was  created 
doctor  in  medicine  by  mandate  of  the  king,  and  the 
same  year  elected  fellow  of  the  Royal  Society,  and  of 
the  College  of  Physicians.  In  1670,  he  was  appointed 
lecturer  on  anatomy  to  the  Company  of  Surgeons. 
On  his  death,  in  1684,  he  bequeathed  them  100Z. ; his 
books  on  Medicine  to  the  College  of  Physicians,  as 
also  the  profits  of  a house,  for  Lectures,  to  be  read  an- 
nually, on  Muscular  Motion ; and  donations  to  seven 
of  the  colleges  at  Cambridge,  to  found  Mathematical 
Lectures.  He  left  several  papers  on  philosophical  sub- 
jects, but  his  only  publication  was  a small  tract,  “ De 
Ralione  Motus  Musculorum.” 

CROSS-STONE.  Harmotome;  Pyramidal  zeolite. 
A crystallized  grayish-white  mineral,  harder  than 
fluor-spar,  but  not  so  hard  as  apatite,  found  only  in 
mineral  veins  and  agate  balls  in  the  Hartz,  Norway, 
and  Scotland. 

CROTALUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  reptiles. 

Crotalus  iiorridus.  The  rattle-snake ; the  stone 
out  of  the  head  of  which  is  erroneously  said  to  be  an 
antidote  to  the  poison  of  venomous  animals.  A name 
also  of  the  Cobra  de  capella,  the  Coluber  naja  of  Lin- 
nteus. 

*71 


CRO 


CRO 

Crota'phica  arteria.  The  tendon  of  the  tempo- 
ral muscle. 

CROTAPHl'TES.  (From  KpolaQos , the  temple.) 
See  Temporalis. 

Crotaphium.  (From  Kpo'Jeu),  to  pulsate ; so  named 
from  the  pulsation  which  in  the  temples  is  eminently 
discernible.)  Crotaphos.  Crotaphus.  A pain  in  the 
temples. 

Cro  taphos.  See  Crotaphium. 

Cro'taphus.  See  Crotaphium.  > 

CROTCHET.  A curved  instrument  with  a sharp 
hook  to  extract  the  foetus. 

CRO  TON.  (From  Kpo'Jeo),  to  beat.) 

1.  An  insect  called  a tick,  from  the  noise  it  makes  by 
beating  its  head  against  wood. 

2.  A name  of  the  ricinus  or  castor-oil  berry,  from  its 
likeness  to  a tick. 

3.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linna;an 
system.  Class,  Moncecia;  Order,  Monadelphia. 

Croton  bknzoe.-  See  Styrax  benzoe. 

Croton  cascarilla.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  Cascarilla  bark.  Cascarilla ; 
Chocarilla ; Elutheria;  Eluteria.  The  bark  comes 
to  us  in  quills,  covered  upon  the  outside  with  a rough, 
whitish  matter,  and  brownish  on  the  inner  side,  ex- 
hibiting, when  broken,  a smooth,  close,  blackish-brown 
surface.  It  has  a light  agreeable  smell,  and  a mode- 
rately bitter  taste,  accompanied  with  a considerable 
aromatic  warmth.  It  is  a very  excellent  tonic,  adstrin- 
gent,  and  stomachic,  and  is  deserving  of  a more  gene- 
ral use  than  it  has  hitherto  met  with. 

Croton  lacciferum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  upon  which  gum-lac  is  deposited.  See 
Lacca. 

Croton  tiglium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  affords  the  pavana  wood,  and  tiglia  seeds. 
Croton — foliis  ovatis gla.br is  acuminatis  serratis,  caule 
arboreo  of  Linnaeus. 

1.  Favana  wood.  Lignum  pavance ; Lignum  pava- 
num;  Lignum  moluccense.  The  wood  is  of  a light 
spongy  texture,  white  within,  but  covered  with  a 
grayish  bark : and  possesses  a pungent,  caustic  taste, 
and  a disagreeable  smell.  It  is  said  to  be  useful  as  a 
purgative  in  liydropical  complaints. 

2.  Grana  tiglia.  Grana  tilli.  Grana  tiglii.  The 
grana  tiglia  are  seeds  of  a dark  gray  colour,  in  shape 
very  like  the  seed  of  the  ricinus  communis.  They 
abound  with  an  oil  which  is  far  more  purgative  than 
castor-oil,  which  has  been  lately  imported  from  the 
East  Indies,  where  it  has  been  long  used,  and  is  now 
admitted  into  the  London  pharmacopoeia.  One  drop 
proves  a drastic  purge,  but  it  may  be  so  managed 
as  to  become  a valuable  addition  to  the  materia  me- 
dica. 

[The  oil  of  Croton  is  the  produce  of  a shrub  or 
arborescent  plant  well  known  to  botanists,  and  the  oil 
when  taken  into  the  stomach  acts  as  a powerful  ca- 
thartic. The  shrub  belongs  to  the  Class  Moncecia,  and 
Order,  Monadelphia , of  Linnaeus's  sexual  system. 

Persoon  enumerates  82  species  of  this  genus  of 
plants.  The  specific  character  of  the  Tilgium  is,  that 
“The  leaves  are  ovate,  smooth,  acuminated, serrated, 
and  the  stem  arborescent.”  It  is  a native  of  the  East 
Indies,  China,  and  other  Australasian  islands.  Ceylon, 
and  the  Moluccas  are  particularly  quoted  as  affording 
this  species  of  Croton.  It  is  also  well  known  in  Am- 
boyna  and  Batavia,  and,  indeed,  generally  through  the 
distant  east.  Several  parts  of  the  plant  possess  medi- 
cinal virtue. 

1.  Radix,  the  root,  or  pulvis  radicis  croti.  The  pow- 
dered root  of  Croton  is  a drastic  cathartic,  when  exhi- 
bited in  the  small  quantity  of  even  a few  grains,  on 
which  account  it  lias  been  considered  by  the  Asiatics 
as  a grand  remedy  for  dropsy,  upon  the  same  principle 
by  which  the  operation  of  scannnony  and  gamboge  is 
explained. 

2.  The  JVood  of  the  Croton.  Lignum  croti  tiglii. 
This  is  also  efficacious,  for  in  small  doses  it  acts  as  a 
sudorific,  by  relaxing  the  pores  of  the  skin ; while  in 
large  ones  it  purges  severely. 

3.  The  Leaves.  Folia  croti  tiglii.  Pulvis  foliorum 
tiglii  siccatorum.  The  dried  leaves  when  powdered 
are  reputed  an  antidote  against  the  bite  cf  that  formi- 
dable and  venomous  serpent  the  Cobra  de  Capello. 

4.  The  Seeds.  Semina  vel  grana  croti  tiglii.  They 
are  the  part  of  the  plant  most  known  and  employed  in 
medicine.  They  are  of  a dale  at  least  as  old  as  the 

272 


age  of  Serapion,one  of  the  earliest  physicians  of  Ara- 
bia who  wrote  on  the  Materia  Medica,  and  he  flour- 
ished about  1000  years  ago,  or  probably  in  the  8th  cen- 
tury. When  they  were  introduced  into  Europe  long 
since,  they  were  known  by  the  name  of  “ Molucca 
grains  or  seeds , and  as  the  grains  or  seeds  of  Tilium 
or  Tiglium. 

It  appears  that  they  were  freely  administered,  not 
merely  for  the  purpose  as  a cathartic,  but  for  the  ac- 
complishment of  mischievous  and  deleterious  ends.  It 
is  even  stated  by  the  accomplished  Rumphius,  the 
Dutch  physician  and  botanist,  that  a dose  of  four 
grains  had  been  administered  for  the  working  of  de- 
struction by  women  who  wished  to  kill  their  hus- 
bands. Though  the  seeds  were  freely  administered  at 
that  age  and  after,  the  extreme  violence  of  their  opera- 
tion seems  to  have  induced  a very  unfavourable  opi- 
nion of  them.  This  no  doubt  arose  from  injudicious 
doses ; as,  under  similar  circumstances,  the  digitalis 
purpurea,  or  purple  fox-glove,  had  undergone  a similar 
fate.  It  had  been  frequently  administered,  and  was 
even  popular,  but  from  the  bad  consequences  of  inju- 
dicious prescription,  was  condemned  as  noxious,  and 
was  neglected  as  unfit  for  use.  So,  cubebs  (ainomum 
cubeba)  were  once  in  use,  then  discontinued  from  a 
supposed  want  of  power,  and  latterly  revived  and 
rendered  fashionable.  It  nevertheless  appears,  that 
molucca  grains  are  still  used  in  the  East  Indies  as  an 
effectual  cathartic. 

5.  The  baked  Seeds.  Semina  tosta  vel  furno  cocta. 
The  baked  or  roasted  seeds  of  the  Croton  Tiglium. 
By  these  operations  the  shell  or  hull  was  removed,  the 
seed  rendered  capable  of  being  powdered,  and,  accord- 
ing to  Ainslie’s  Materia  Medica  of  Hindostan,  the 
acrimonious  and  vehement  qualities  very  much  mo- 
derated. 

The  medicinal  history  of  this  plant  seems  to  have 
rested  a long  time.  At  length,  however,  as  the  seeds 
were  replete  with  oil,  it  occurred  to  somebody  to  ex- 
press it,  and  this  oil  was  known  to  the  celebrated 
pharmacians,  Lemery  and  Geoffroy.  Yet  it  lay  dor- 
mant, until  a revival  was  made  by  Mr.  E.  Conwell,  of 
the  English  East  India  Company’s  service  on  the  Ma- 
dras Establishment.  Having  prescribed  the  Croton 
oil  for  many  years  with  advantage,  he  sent  a parcel  of 
it  to  London  for  experiment. 

6.  The  Oil  of  Tiglium , or  oil  of  Croton.  Oleum, 
croti  tiglii  expressum.  The  oil  has  a yellowish  hue, 
but  a faint  smell,  and  an  acrimonious  taste.  Though 
these  qualities  have  some  variation,  caused  probably 
by  the  degree  of  heat,  or  torrefaction,  employed  in  the 
process  for  obtaining  it. 

7.  Gustus  old  tiglii.  Touching  the  tongue  with 
the  oil.  It  is  reported,  that  in  some  constitutions  the 
mere  application  of  a particle  to  the  tongue,  is  suffi- 
cient to  produce  a cathartic  effect,  thereby  evincing  an 
extraordinary  power  of  sympathy  between  the  organ 
of  taste  and  the  alimentary  canal.  There  are,  how- 
ever, very  striking  analogies  to  illustrate  its  action. 
Tobacco,  for  example,  in  the  form  of  a segar,  applied 
to  the  mouth  of  some  persons,  moves  the  intestines  to 
evacuation.  A drop  of  the  Prussic  acid  applied  to  the 
mouth  of  a rat  causes  instant  death.  The  poison  of  a 
rattlesnake,  as  witnessed  by  Dr.  Mitchill,  infused  in 
a wound,  destroys  the  life  of  a rat,  or  other  small 
animal  in  an  exceedingly  short  time.  It  is  reported, 
that  a man  who  had  been  in  the  habit  of  using  enemas, 
had  been  brought  to  a.  stool  by  the  sight  of  a clyster- 
pipe. 

8.  Pills  of  the  Oil  of  Tiglium.  Pillulos  olei  tiglii. 
A single  drop,  or  at  most  two,  is  a sufficient  dos.e.  A 
safe  method  is  to  take  the  pills,  to  contain  each  one 
drop,  with  a crumb  of  bread;  or,  for  more  expeditious 
practice,  the  prescriber  may  prepare  them  containing 
two  drops.  He  can  thus  administer  with  an  assurance 
that  the  laxative  effect  will  be  produced  without  the 
fear  of  exciting  any  alarming  commotion,  in  cases 
where  there  is  an  aversion  to  taking  medicines,  and 
where  the  bulk  and  repetition  of  the  doses  are  objec- 
tionable, this  remedy  therefore  possesses  advantages 
which  highly  recommend  it.  The  quantity  of  even 
half  a drop,  or  in  other  words  half  a grain,  will  fie- 
quently  move  the  intestines  to  discharge;  and  the  ef- 
fect, which  is  generally  speedy,  more  resembles  that 
of  the  saline  cathartics  than  the  other  drastics,  such  as 
elaterium,  gamboge,  and  scammony. 

9.  Tincture  of  the  Oil  of  Tiglium.  Solulio  olei 


CRU 


CRY 


tiglii  ir  alcohol.  Chemistry  has  proved  that  this  oil 
is  composed  of  two  principal  constituent  parts : 1.  A 
fixed,  oil , resembling  that  of  the  olive,  destitute  of 
cathartic  qualities;  and,  2.  An  acrid  purgative  prin- 
ciple, in  which  its  virtue  resides.  The  proportions  are 
stated  by  Dr.  Nimmo  thus, 

Fixed  oil, 55  parts. 

Acrid  principle, 45  do. 

100 

The  latter  has  been  denominated  Tiglin , in  the  modern 
nomenclature.  Alkohol  is  capable  of  decomposing 
this  native  oil ; the  tiglin  being  dissolved  with  a minute 
quantity  only  of  the  fixed  oil,  and  the  rest  of  it  left  un- 
combined. This  discovery  enables  us  to  form  a tinc- 
ture upon  a well-ascertained  principle.  It  is  accord- 
ingly proposed  to  form  the  tincture,  by  adding  two 
drops  of  the  oil  (as  it  comes  to  us)  to  a fluid  drachm  of 
rectified  spirit.  After  digesting  long  enough  to  secure 
the  union  between  the  spirit  and  the  tiglin,  the  tincture 
must  be  filtered.  Yet,  as  a fluid  so  volatile  as  the 
spirit  will  suffer  some  loss  by  evaporation,  it  is  calcu- 
lated that  half  a fluid  drachm  of  the  tincture  is  equal  to 
a drop  and  an  half  of  the  oil.  It  is  found  that  the  alko- 
hol does  not  impair  the  cathartic  power  of  the  tiglin. 
This  solution  may  therefore  be  exactly  apportioned  to 
the  nature  of  the  disorder,  and  the  wish  of  the  physi- 
cian, and  thus  be  regulated  with  the  greatest  exact- 
ness. If  taken  in  quantity  corresponding  to  the  num- 
ber of  drops  decomposed,  experience  has  decided  that 
the  same  effects  were  produced  as  by  the  same  quantity 
of  undecompounded  and  entire  oil. 

An  article  so  expensive  as  this  in  comparison  with 
other  fixed  oils,  holds  out  a strong  temptation  for 
fraud  by  adulteration.  This  has  been  practised  to  a 
considerable  extent  by  mixing  it  with  the  cheaper 
kinds.  A method,  however,  has  been  proposed  for  de- 
tecting such  vitiation  by  Dr.  Nimmo,  by  means  of  alko- 
nol,  a phial,  a balance,  and  an  evaporating  process,  of 
which  an  abstract  will  be  found  in  the  Pharmacologia 
of  Dr.  Paris,  vol.  2,  p.  338.  New-York  edit,  by  Dr. 
Ives.  This  writer’s  opinion  is,  on  the  whole  matter, 
“ that  this  oil  does  not  appear  to  produce  any  effects 
which  cannot  be  commanded  by  other  drastic  purga- 
tives. Its  value  depends  upon  the  facility  with  which 
it  may  be  administered. — Notes  from  Dr.  Mitchill's 
Lectures  on  Mat.  Med.  AJ 

Croton  tinctorium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lacmus  plant.  Croton— foliis  rhombeis  repandis , cap- 
sulis  pendulis , caule  herbaceo , of  Linnaeus.  Bezetta 
cxrulea.  This  plant  yields  ' the  Succus  heliotropii ; 
Lacmus  seu  tornce ; Lacca  ccerulea;  Litmus.  It  is 
much  used  by  chemists  as  a test. 

Croto'ne.  (From  Kpaijov , the  tick.)  A fungus  on 
trees  produced  by  an  insect  like  a tick ; and  by  meta- 
phor applied  to  tumours  and  small  fungous  excres- 
cences on  the  periosteum. 

Crotopus.  (From  Kporos , pulsus .)  Painful  pulsa- 
tion. 

Crotophium.  (From  Kporos,  the  pulse.)  Painful 
pulsation. 

CROUP.  See  Synanche. 

Crousis.  (From  Kpovo),  to  beat,  or  pulsate.)  Pul- 
sation. 

Crou'smata.  (From  Kpov<o,  to  pulsate.)  Rheums 
or  defluxions  from  the  head. 

CROWFOOT.  See  Ranunculus. 

Crowfoot-cranesbill.  See  Geranium  pratense. 

CRUCIAL.  (Crucialis ; from  crus,  the  leg.)  I. 
Cross-like.  Some  parts  of  the  body  are  so  called 
when  they  cross  one  another,  as  the  crucial  ligaments 
of  the  thigh. 

2.  A name  of  the  mugweed  or  crosswort. 

CRUCIA'LIS.  See  Crucial. 

CRUCIBLE.  ( Crucibulum ; from  crucio , to  tor- 
ment: so  named,  because,  in  the  language  of  old 
chemists,  metals  are  tormented  in  it,  and  tortured,  to 
yield  up  their  powers  and  virtues.)  A chemical  ves- 
sel made  mostly  of  earth  to  bear  the  greatest  heat. 
They  are  of  various  shapes  and  composition. 

CRUCIFORM  IS.  Cross-like.  Applied  to  leaves, 
flowers,  &c.  which  have  that  shape. 

CRU'DITAS.  (From  crudus,  raw.)  It  is  applied 
to  undigested  substances  in  the  stomach,  and  formerly 
to  humours  in  the  body  unprepared  for  concoction. 

CRUICKSHANK,  William,  was  born  at  Edin- 
burgh, in  1746.  He  was  intended  for  the  church,  and 

s 


made  great  proficiency  in  classical  learning;  but 
showing  a partiality  to  medicine,  he  was  placed  with  a 
surgeon  at  Glasgow.  In  1771,  he  came  to  London,  and 
was  soon  after  made  librarian  to  Dr.  William  Hunter ; 
and,  on  the  secession  of  Mr.  Hewson,  became  assist- 
ant, and  then  joint  lecturer  in  anatomy,  with  the 
Doctor.  He  contributed  largely  to  enrich  the  Museum, 
particularly  by  his  curious  injections  of  the  lympathic 
vessels.  He  published,  in  1786,  a work  on  this  subject, 
which  is  highly  valued  for  its  correctness.  In  1795,  he 
communicated  to  the  Royal  Society  an  Account 
of  the  Regeneration  of  the  Nerves ; and  the  same  year 
published  a pamphlet  on  Insensible  Perspiration  ; and 
in  1797,  an  Account  of  Appearances  in  the  Ovaria  of 
Rabbits  in  different  Stages  of  Pregnancy.  He  died 
in  1800. 

Cru'nion.  (From  Kpovvos,  a torrent.)  A medicine 
mentioned  by  AStius,  and  named  from  the  violence  of 
its  operations  as  a diuretic. 

CRU'OR.  (From  Kpvos,frigus,  it  being  that  which 
appears  like  a coagulum  as  the  blood  cools.)  The  red 
part  of  the  blood.  See  Blood. 

CRU'RA.  The  plural  of  crus. 

Crura  clitoridis.  See  Clitoris. 

Crura  medulla  oblongata.  The  roots  of,  the 
medulla  oblongata. 

CRURiE'US.  (From  crus,  a leg  ; so  named,  be- 
cause it  covers  almost  the  whole  foreside  of  the  upper 
part  of  the  leg  or  thigh.)  Cruralis.  A muscle  of  the 
leg,  situated  on  the  forepart  of  the  thigh.  It  arises, 
fleshy,  from  between  the  two  trochanters  of  the  os 
femoris,  but  nearer  the  lesser,  firmly  adhering  to  most 
of  the  forepart  of  the  os  femoris  ; and  is  inserted,  ten- 
dinous, into  the  upper  part  of  the  patella,  behind  the 
rectus.  Its  use  is  to  assist  the  vasti  and  rectus  muscles 
in  the  extension  of  the  leg. 

CRURAL.  ( Cruralis ; from  crus,  the  leg.)  Be- 
longing to  the  crus,  leg,  or  lower  extremity. 

Crural  hernia.  See  Hernia  cruralis. 

CRURA'LIS.  See  Crurceus. 

CRUS.  1.  The  leg. 

2.  The  root  or  origin  of  some  parts  of  the  body, 
from  their  resemblance  to  a leg  or  root ; as  Crura  ce- 
rebri, Crura  cerebelli ; Crura  of  the  diaphragm,  &c. 

CRUSTA.  1.  A shell. 

2.  A scab. 

3.  The  scum  or  surface  of  a fluid. 

Crusta  lactea.  A disease  that  mostly  attacks 
some  part  of  the  face  of  infants  at  the  breast.  It  is 
known  by  an  eruption  of  broad  pus  tules,  full  of  a 
glutinous  liquor,  which  form  white  scabs  when  they 
are  ruptured.  It  is  cured  by  mineral  alteratives. 

Crusta  villosa.  The  inner  coat  of  the  stomach 
and  intestines  has  been  so  called. 

Crustula.  (Dim.  of  crusta,  a shell.)  A discolo- 
ration of  the  flesh  from  a bruise,  where  the  skin  is  en- 
tire, and  covers  it  over  like  a shell. 

Crustumina'tum.  (From  Crustuminum,  a town 
where  they  grew.)  1.  A kind  of  Catherine  pear. 

2.  A rob  or  electuary  made  of  this  pear  and  apples 
boiled  up  with  honey. 

Crymo'des.  (From, Kpvos,  cold.)  An  epithet  for  a 
fever,  wherein  the  external  parts  are  cold. 

CRYOLITE.  A white  or  yellowish  brown  mi- 
neral, composed  of  alumina,  soda,  and  fluoric  acid.  It 
is  curious  and  rare,  and  found  hitherto  only  at  West 
Greenland. 

CRYOPHORUS.  (From  Kpvos,  cold,  and  <pepu>,  to 
bear.)  The  frost-bearer,  or  carrier  of  cold  ; an  ele- 
gant instrument  invented  by  Dr.  Wollaston,  to  demon- 
strate the  relation  between  evaporation  at  low  tempe- 
ratures, and  the  production  of  cold. 

CRYPSO'RCHIS.  (From  Kpvn'Ju),  to  conceal,  and 
opxis,  a testicle.)  A term  applied  to  a man  whose 
testicles  are  hid  in  the  belly,  or  have  not  descended  into 
the  scrotum. 

CRY'PTA.  (From  Kfyvnru),  to  hide.)  The  little 
rounded  appearances  at  the  end  of  the  small  arteries 
of  the  cortical  substance  of  the  kidneys,  that  appear 
as  if  formed  by  the  artery  being  convoluted  upon  it- 
self. 

CRYPTOGAMIA.  (From  Kpvrrru),  to  conceal,  and 
yapos,  a marriage.)  The  twenty-fourth  and  last  class 
of  the  sexual  or  Linnaean  system  of  plants,  containing 
several  numerous  genera,  in  which  the  parts  essential 
to  their  fructification  have  not  been  sufficiently  ascer- 
tained to  admit  of  their  being  referred  to  the  other 

273 


CRY 


CRY 


class.  It  is  divided  by  Linnaeus  into  four  orders,  Fi- 
lices,  Jl lusci,  'Alga,  and  Fungi. 

Cryso'rchis.  Kpvoopxu-  !•  A retraction  or  retro- 
cession of  one  of  the  testicles. 

2.  See  Crypsorehis. 

CRYSTAL.  See  Crystallus. 

CRYSTALLINE.  ( Crystallinus  ; from  its  crystal- 
like appearance.)  Crystal-like. 

Crystalline  lens.  A lentiform  pellucid  part  of  • 
the  eye,  enclosed  in  a membranous  capsule,  called  the 
capsule  of  the  crystalline  lens,  and  situated  in  a pecu- 
liar depression  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  vitreous  hu- 
mour. Its  use  is  to  transmit  and  refract  the  rays  of 
light.  See  Eye. 

Crvstalli'num  (From  Kpv s-a\\os,  a crystal:  so 
called  from  its  transparency.)  White  arsenic. 

CRYSTALLIZATION.  (Crystallizalio  ; from 
crystallus , a crystal.)  A property  by  which  crystal- 
lizable  bodies  tend  to  assume  a regular  form,  when 
placed  in  circumstances  favourable  to  that  particular 
disposition  of  their  particles.  Almost  all  minerals 
possess  this  property,  but  it  is  most  eminent  in  saline 
substances.  The  circumstances  which  are  favourable 
to  the  crystallization  of  salts,  and  without  which  it 
cannot  take  place,  are  two  : 1.  Their  particles  must  be 
divided  and  separated  by  a fluid,  in  order  that  the  cor- 
responding faces  of  those  particles  may  meet  and  unite. 
2.  In  order  that  this  union  may  take  place,  the  fluid 
which  separates  the  integrant  parts  of  the  salt  must  be 
gradually  carried  off.  so  that  it  may  no  longer  divide 
them. 

[“  Crystallization , in  the  most  limited  extent  of  the 
term,  is  that  process  by  which  the  particles  of  bodies 
unite  in  such  a manner  as  to  produce  determinate  and 
regular  solids.  But  it  is  equally  true,  that  those  mine- 
rals, which  possess  a foliated  or  fibrous  structure,  are 
the  products  of  crystallization,  under  circumstances 
which  have  rendered  the  process  more  or  less  imper- 
fect, and  prevented  the  appearance  of  distinct  and 
regular  forms. 

The  ancients  believed  crystallized  quartz  (rock 
crystal),  to  be  water,  congealed  by  exposure  to  intense 
cold;  and  accordingly  applied  to  it  the  term  itpv^aXXo^, 
which  signified  ice.  Hence  the  etymology  of  the  word 
crystal.  Now,  as  a beautiful  regularity  of  form  is  one 
of  the  most  striking  properties  of  crystallized  quartz, 
the  name  crystal  has  been  extended  to  all  mineral  and 
other  inorganic  substances,  which  exhibit  themselves 
under  the  form  of  regular  geometrical  solids. 

A crystal  may  therefore  be  defined  an  inorganic 
body,  which,  by  the  operation  of  affinity,  has  assumed 
the  form  of  a regular  solid,  terminated  by  a number 
of  plane  and  polished  faces.  The  corresponding  faces 
of  all  crystals,  which  possess  the  same  variety  of  form, 
and  belong  to  the  same  substance,  are  inclined  to  each 
other  in  angles  of  a constant  quantity.  This  con- 
stancy of  angles  remains,  even  in  those  cases  where 
the  faces  themselves,  from  some  accidental  causes, 
have  changed  their  dimensions  or  number  of  sides. 
Transparency,  though  many  crystals  possess  it  in  a 
greater  or  less  degree,  is  not  a necessary  property. 
But  plane  surfaces,  bounded  by  right  lines,  are  so 
essential  to  the  crystalline  form,  that  their  absence 
decidedly  indicates  imperfection  in  the  process  of  crys- 
tallization. The  lustre  and  smoothness  of  the  faces 
may  also  be  diminished  by  accidental  causes.” — 
Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

CRYSTA'LLUS.  ( Crystallus , i.  m. ; from  cpuoj, 
cold,  and  to  contract : i.  e.  contracted  by  cold 

into  ice.)  A crystal.  “ When  fluid  substances  are 
suffered  to  pass  with  adequate  slowness  to  the  solid 
state,  the  attractive  forces  frequently  arrange  their 
ultimate  particles,  so  as  to  form  regular  polyhedral 
figures  or  geometrical  solids,  to  which  the  name  of 
crystals  has  been  given.  Most  of  the  solids  which 
compose  the  mineral  crust  of  the  earth  are  found  in 
the  crystallized  state.  Thus  granite  consists  of  crys- 
tals of  quartz,  felspar,  and  mica.  Even  mountain 
masses  like  clay-slate,  have  a regular  tabulated  form. 
Perfect  mobility  among  the  corpuscles  is  essential  to 
crystallization.  The  chemist  produces  it  either  by  ig- 
neous fusion,  or  by  solution  in  a liquid.  When  the 
temperature  is  slowly  lowered  in  the  former  case,  or 
the  liquid  slowly  abstracted  by  evaporation  in  the  lat- 
ter, the  attractive  forces  resume  the  ascendency,  and 
arrange  the  particles  in  symmetrical  forms.  Mere  ap- 
proximation of  the  particles,  however*  is  not  alone  suf- 


ficient for  crystallization.  A hot  saturated  saline  solu- 
tion, when  screened  from  all  agitation,  will  contract 
by  cooling  into  a volume  much  smaller  than  what  it 
occupies  in  the  solid  state,  without  crystallizing.  Hem  e 
the  molecules  must  not  only  be  brought  within  a ce/ 
tain  limit  of  each  other,  for  their  concreting  into  crys- 
tals ; but  they  must  also  change  the  direction  of  their 
poles,  from  the  fluid  collocation  to  their  position  in  the 
solid  state. 

This  reversion  of  the  poles  may  be  effected,  1st,  By 
contact  of  any  part  of  the  fluid  with  a point  of  a solid, 
of  similar  composition,  previously  formed.  2d,  Vi- 
bratory motions  communicated,  either  from  the  atmos- 
phere or  any  other  moving  body,  by  deranging,  how- 
ever slightly,  the  fluid  polar  direction,  will  instantly 
determine  the  solid  polar  arrangement,  when  the  ba- 
lance had  been  rendered  nearly  even  by  previous  re- 
moval of  the  interstitial  fluid.  On  this  principle  we 
explain  the  regular  figures  which  particles  of  dust  or 
iron  assume,  when  they  are  placed  on  a vibrating 
plane,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  electrized  or  magnetized 
bodies.  3d,  Negative  or  resinous  voltaic  electricity 
instantly  determines  the  crystalline  arrangement,  while 
positive  voltaic  electricity  counteracts  it.  Light  also 
favours  crystallization,  as  is  exemplified  with  camphor 
dissolved  in  spirits,  which  crystallizes  in  bright  and  ro- 
dissolves  in  gloomy  weather 

It  might  be  imagined,  that  the  same  body  would  al- 
ways concrete  in  the  same,  or  at  least  in  a similar  crys- 
talline form.  This  position  is  true,  in  general,  for  the 
salts  crystallized  in  the  laboratory  ; and  on  this  unifor- 
mity of  figure,  one  of  the  principal  criteria  between 
different  salts  depends.  But  even  these  forms  are  lia- 
ble to  many  modifications,  from  causes  apparently 
slight;  and  in  nature  we  find  frequently  the  same 
chemical  substance  crystallized  in  forms  apparently 
very  dissimilar.  Thus,  carbonate  of  lime  assumes  the 
form  of  a rhomboid,  of  a regular  hexaSdral  prism,  of 
a solid  terminated  by  12  scalene  angles,  or  of  a dodeca- 
hedron with  pentagonal  faces,  &c.  BisUlphuret  of 
iron  or  martial  pyrites  produces  sometimes  cubes  and 
sometimes  regular  octohedrons,  at  one  time  dodeca- 
hedrons with  pentagonal  faces,  at  another  icosahedrons 
with  triangular  faces,  &c. 

While  one  and  the  same  substance  lends  itself  to  so 
many  transformations,  we  meet  with  very  different 
substances,  which  present  absolutely  the  same  form. 
Thus  fluate  of  lime,  muriate  of  soda,  sulphuret  of  iron, 
sulphuret  of  lead,  &c.  crystallize  in  cubes,  under  cer- 
tain circumstances ; and  in  other  cases,  the  same  mi- 
nerals, as  well  as  sulphate  of  alumina  and  the  dia- 
mond, assume  the  form  of  a regular  octohedron. 

Rom£  de  l’lsle  first  referred  the  study  of  crystalliza- 
tion to  principles  conformable  to  observation.  He  ar- 
ranged together,  as  far  as  possible,  crystals  of  the  same 
nature.  Among  the  different  forms  relative  to  each 
species,  he  chose  one  as  the  most  proper,  from  its  sim- 
plicity, to  be  regarded  as  the  primitive  form  ; and  by 
supposing  it  truncated  in  different  ways,  lie  deduced 
the  other  forms  from  it,  and  determined  a gradation,  a 
series  of  transitions  between  this  same  form  and  that 
of  polyhedrons,  which  seem  to  be  still  further  removed 
.from  it.  To  the  descriptions  and  figures  which  he 
gave  of  the  crystalline  forms,  he  added  the  results  of 
the  mechanical  measurement  of  their  principal  angles, 
and  showed  that  these  angles  were  constant  in  each 
variety. 

The  illustrious  Bergmann,  by  endeavouring  to  pene- 
trate to  the  mechanism  of  the  structure  of  crystals, 
considered  the  different  forms  relative  to  one  and  the 
same  substance,  as  produced  by  a superposition  of 
planes,  sometimes  constant  and  sometimes  variable, 
and  decreasing  around  one  and  the  same  primitive 
form.  He  applied  this  primary  idea  to  a small  number 
of  crystalline  forms,  and  verified  it  with  respect  to  a 
variety  of  calcareous  spar  by  fractures,  which  enabled 
him  to  ascertain  the  position  of  the  nucleus,  or  of  the 
primitive  form,  and  the  successive  order  of  the  laminas 
covering  this  nucleus.  Bergmann,  however,  stopped 
here,  and  did  not  trouble  himself  either  with  deter- 
mining the  laws  of  structure,  or  applying  calculation 
to  it.  It  was  a simple  sketch  of  the  most  prominent 
point  of  view  in  mineralogy,  but  in  which  we  see  tha 
hand  of  the  same  master  who  so  successfully  filled  up 
the  outlines  of  chemistry. 

In  the  researches  which  Haiiy  undertook,  about  the 
same  period,  on  the  structure  of  crystals,  he  proposed. 


CUL 


CtJC 

Combining  the  form  and  dimensions  of  integrant  mole- 
cules with  simple  and  regular  laws  of  arrangement, 
and  submitting  these  laws  to  calculation.  This  work 
produced  a mathematical  theory,  which  he  reduced  to 
analytical  formulae,  representing  every  possible  case, 
and  the  application  of  which  to  known  forms  leads  to 
valuations  of  angles,  constantly  agreeing  with  ob- 
servation.”— Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

2.  Aii  eruption  over  the  body  of  white  transparent 
pustules. 

[/‘CrystaIlogRaphy.  Of  the  physical  properties 
of  minerals,  no  one  is  so  important  in  itself,  and  ex- 
tensive in  its  influence  and  application,  as  that  uy 
which  crystals  or  regular  solids  are  produced.  To  in 
vestigate  and  describe  these  solids  is  the  object  of  crys- 
tallography, and  constitutes,  without  doubt,  the  most 
interesting  branch  of  mineralogical  research.” — Clean. 
Mineralogy.  A.] 

Cte'dones.  (From  k'J tjSwv,  a rake.)  The  fibres 
are  so  called  from  their  pectinated  course. 

Cteis.  Kt«j.  A comb  or  rake.  Ctenes , in  the 
plural  number,  implies  those  teeth  which  are  called 
incisores,  from  their  likeness  to  a rake. 

CUBE  ORE.  Hexaddral  olivenite.  Wurfelerz  of 
Werner.  A mineral  arseniate  of  iron,  of  a pistachio- 
green  colour. 

CUBE  SPAR.  See  Anhydrite. 

CUBEB.  See  Piper  cubeba. 

CUBE'BA.  (From  cubabah , Arab.)  See  Piper 
cubeba. 

Cubit.eus  externus.  An  extensor  muscle  of  the 
fingers.  See  Extensor  digitorum  communis. 

Cubitjeus  internus.  A flexor  muscle  of  the  fin- 
gers. See  Flexor  sublimis , and  profundus. 

CUBITAL.  ( Cubitalis  ; from  cubitus , the  fore- 
arm.) Belonging  to  the  forearm. 

Cubital  artery.  Arteria  cubitalis;  Arteria  ul- 
iiaris.  A branch  of  the  brachial  that  proceeds  in  the. 
forearm,  and  gives  off  the  recurrent  and  interosseals, 
and  forms  the  palmary  arch,  from  which  arise 
branches  going  to  the  fingers,  called  digitals. 

Cubital  nerve.  Nervus  cubitalis  ; JVervus  ul- 
naris.  It  arises  from  the  brachial  plexus,  and  pro- 
ceeds along  the  ulna. 

Cubitalis  musculus.  An  extensor  muscle  of  the 
fingers.  See  Extensor. 

CU'BITUS.  (From  cubo , to  lie  down  ; because  the 
ancients  used  to  lie  down  on  that  part  at  their  meals.) 
1.  The  forearm,  or  that  part  between  the  elbow  and 
wrist. 

2.  The  larger  bone  of  the  forearm  is  called  os  cubiti. 
See  Ulna. 

CUBOI'DES  OS.  (From  kv6os,  a cube  or  die,  and 
eiSos,  likeness.)  A tarsal  bone  of  the  foot,  so  called 
from  its  resemblance. 

CUCKOW  FLOWER.  See  Carddmine. 

CUCU'BALUS.  The  name  of  an  herb  mentioned 
by  Pliny.  The  name  of  a genus  or  family  of  plants  in 
the  Lin  naean  system.  Class,  Decandria  ; Order  Try- 
gynia. 

Cucubalus  bacciferus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  berry-bearing  chick-weed,  which  is  sometimes 
used  as  an  emollient  poultice. 

Cucubalus  behen.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Behen  officinarum,  or  spatling  poppy,  formerly  used  as 
a cordial  and  alexipharmic. 

CUCULLA'RIS.  (From  cucullis,  a hood:  so 
named,  because  it  is  shaped  like  a hood.)  See  Tra- 
pezius. 

CUCULLATUS.  Hooded.  Applied  to  a leaf, 
when  the  edges  meet  in  the  lower  part,  and  expand  in 
the  upper,  forming  a sheath  or  hood,  of  which  the 
genus  Sarcacenia  are  an  example ; to  the  nectary  of 
the  aconite  tribe,  Sec. 

CUCU'LLUS.  1.  A hood. 

2.  An  odoriferous  Cap  for  the  head. 

CUCUMBER.  See  Cucumis. 

Cucumber , bitter.  See  Cucumis  colocynthis. 

Cucumber , squirting.  See  Momordica  elaterium. 

Cucumber , wild.  See  Momordica  elaterium. 

CU'CUMIS.  ( Qucumisrmis . m. ; also  cucnmer , ris. ; 
quasi  curvimeres,  from  their  curvature.)  The  cucum- 
ber. 1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
ntp.an  system.  Class,  Moncecia ; Order,  Syngenesia. 
The  cucumber. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  garden  cucum- 
ber. See  Cucumis  sativus. 

S 2 


Cucumis  agrestis.  See  Momordica  elatefiUlftt 

Cucumis  asininus.  See  Momordica  elaterium. 

Cucumis  colocynthis.  The  systematic  name  fof 
the  officinal  bitter  apple.  Colocynthis;  Alhandulaot' 
the  Arabians.  Coloquintida.  Bitter  apple;  bitter 
gourd ; bitter  cucumber.  The  fruit,  which  is  the  me 
dicinal  part  of  this  plant,  Cucumis— foliis  multifidist 
pomis  globosis  glabris , of  Linnaeus,  is  imported  from 
Turkey.  Its  spongy  membranous  medulla  or  pith,  is 
directed  for  use;  it  has  a nauseous,  acrid,  and  in- 
tensely bitter  taste ; and  is  a powerful  irritating  ca- 
thartic. In  doses  of  ten  or  twelve  grains,  it  operates 
with  great  vehemence,  frequently  producing  violent 
gripes,  bloody  stools,  and  disordering  the  whole  sys- 
tem. It  is  recommended  in  various  complaints,  as 
worms,  mania,  dropsy,  epilepsy,  &c. ; but  is  seldom 
resorted  to,  except  where  other  more  mild  remedies 
have  been  used  without  success,  and  then  only  in  the 
form  of  the  extractum  colocynthidis  compositum , and 
the  pilulee  ex  colocynthide  cum  aloe  of  the  pharmaco- 
poeias. 

Cucumis  melo.  The  systematic  name  of  the  md- 
lon  plant.  Melo.  Musk-melon.  This  fruit,  when 
ripe,  has  a delicious  refrigerating  taste,  but  must  be 
eaten  moderately,  with  pepper,  or  some  aromatic,  as 
all  this  class  of  fruits  are  obnoxious  to  the  stomach, 
producing  spasms  and  colic.  The  seeds  possess  muci- 
laginous qualities. 

Cucumis  sativus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  cih 
cumber  plant.  Cucumis.  Cucumis— foliorum  angu- 
lis.  rectis ; pomis  oblongis  scabris  of  Linnaeus.  It  is 
cooling  and  aperient,  but  very  apt  to  disagree  with 
bilious  stomachs.  It  should  always  be  eaten  with  pep- 
per and  oil.  The  seeds  were  formerly  used  medi- 
cinally. 

Cucumis  sylvestris.  See  Momordica  elaterium. 

Cu'cupha.  A hood.  An  odoriferous  cap  for  the 
head,  composed  of  aromatic  drugs. 

CUCU'RBITA.  ( A curvita,te,  according  to  Scali- 
ger,  the  first  syllable  being  doubled ; as  in  Cacula , Po- 
pulus,  Sec.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Moncecia;  Order,  Syngene- 
sia. The  pumpioh. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  common  gourd.- 
See  Cucurbita  pepo. 

3.  A chemical  distilling  vessel,  shaped  like  a gourd. 

Cucurbita  citrullus.  The  systematic  name  of 

the  water-melon  plant.  Citrullus;  Angura;  Jace 
brasilientibUs ; Tetranguria.  Sicilian  citrul,  or  wa- 
ter-melon. The  seeds  of  this  plant,  Cucurbita— foliis 
multipartiiis  of  Linnaeus,  were  formerly  used  medi- 
cinally, but  now  only  to  reproduce  the  plant.  Water- 
melon is  cooling  and  somewhat  nutritious;  but  so 
soon  begins  to  ferment,  as  to  prove  highly  noxious  to 
some  stomachs,  and  bring  on  spasms,  diarrhoeas,  cho- 
lera, colics,  Set. 

Cucurbita  lagenaria.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  bottle-gourd  plant.  See  Cucurbita  pepo. 

Cucurbita  fepo.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  pumpion  or  gourd.  Cucurbita.  The  seeds 
of  this  plant,  Cucurbita — foliis  lob  at  is,  pomis  Icevibusj 
are  used  indifferently  with  those  of  the  Cucurbita  lage- 
naria— foliis  subangulatis , tornentosis , basi  subtus  bi- 
glandulosus  ; pomis  lignosis.  They  contain  a large 
proportion  of  oil,  which  may  be  made  into  emulsions; 
but  is  superseded  by  that  of  sweet  al  mond's. 

CucurbitacejE.  (From  cucurbita , a gourd.)  The 
name  of  an  order  of  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural 
Method,  consisting  of  plants  which  resemble  the 
gourd. 

CUCURBI'TINUS.  A species  of  wgrm,  so  called 
from  its  resemblance  to  the  seed  of  the  gourd.  See 
Tcenia. 

CUCURBI'TULA.  (A  diminutive  of  cucurbita , a 
gourd  ; so  called  from  its  shape.)  A cupping-glass. 

Cucurbitula  cruenta.  A cupping-glass,  with 
scarification  to  procure  blood. 

Cucurbitula  cum  ferro.  A cupping-glass,  with 
scarification  to  draw  out  blood. 

Cucurbitula  sicca.  A cupping-glass  without 
scarification. 

- CUE'MA.  (From  kvco,  to  carry  in  the  womb.) 
The  conception,  or  rather,  as  Hippocrates  signifies  by 
this  word,  the  complete  rudiments  of  the  foetus. 

Culbi'cio.  A sort  of  stranguary,  or  rather  heat  of 
urine. 

Cuhla'wan.  See  Laurus  culilawan. 


275- 


CUJu 


CUP 


CULI'NARY.  ( Culinarius , from  culina,'a.  kitchen.) 
Any  thing  belonging  to  the  kitchen,  as  salt,  pot-herbs, 
&c. 

CULLEN,  William,  was  born  at  Lanark,  Scot- 
land, in  1712,  of  respectable,  but  not  wealthy  parents. 
After  the  usual  school  education,  he  was  apprenticed 
to  a surgeon  and  apothecary  at  Glasgow,  and  then, 
made  several  voyages,  as  surgeon,  to  the  West  Indies. 
He  afterward  settled  in  practice  at  Hamilton,  and 
formed  a connexion  with  the  celebrated  William 
Hunter  ; but  their  business  being  scanty,  they  agreed 
to  pass  a winter  alternately  at  some  university.  Cul- 
len went  first  to  Edinburgh,  and  attended  the  classes  so 
diligently,  that  he  was  soon  after  able  to  commence 
teacher.  Hunter  came  the  next  winter  to  London, 
and  engaged  as  assistant  in  the  dissecting-room  of  Dr. 
William  Douglas,  who  was  so  pleased  with  his  assi- 
duity and  talent,  as  to  offer  him  a share  in  his  lectures: 
but  though  the  partnership  with  Cullen  was  thus  dis- 
solved, they  continued  ever  after  a friendly  corres- 
pondence. Cullen  had  the  good  fortune,  while  at  Ha- 
milton, to  assist  the  Duke  of  Argyle  in  some  chemical 
pursuits : and  still  more  of  being  sent  for  to  the  Duke 
of  Hamilton,  in  a sudden  alarming  illness,  which  he 
speedily  relieved  by  his  judicious  treatment,  and  gain- 
ed the  entire  approbation  of  Dr.  Clarke,  who  afterward 
arrived.  About  the  same  time  he  married  the  daugh- 
ter of  a neighbouring  clergyman,  who  bore  him  seve- 
ral children.  In  1746  he  took  the  degree  of  doctor  in 
medicine,  and  was  appointed  teacher  of  chemistry  at 
Glasgow.  His  talents  were  peculiarly  fitted  for  this 
office;  his  systematic  genius,  distinct  enunciation, 
lively  manner,  and  extensive  knowledge  of  the  subject, 
rendered  his  lectures  highly  interesting.  In  the  mean 
time  his  reputation  as  a physician  increased,  so  that 
he  was  consulted  in  most  difficult  cases.  In  1751,  he 
was  chosen  professor  in  medicine  to  the  university ; 
and,  five  years  after,  the  chemical  chair  at  Edinburgh 
was  offered  him,  on  the  death  of  Dr.  Plummer,  which 
was  too  advantageous  to  be  refused.  He  soon  became 
equally  popular  there,  and  his  class  increased,  so  as  to 
exceed  that  of  any  other  professor,  except  the  anato- 
mical. This  success  was  owing  not  only  to  his  assi- 
duity, and  his  being  so  well  qualified  for  the  office,  but 
also  in  a great  measure  to  the  kindness  which  he 
showed  to  his  pupils,  and  partly  to  the  new  Views  on 
the  Theory  of  Medicine,  which  he  occasionally  intro- 
duced into  his  lectures.  He  appears  also,  about  this 
time,  to  have  given  Clinical  Lectures  at  the  Infirmary. 
On  the  death  of  Dr.  Alston,  Lecturer  on  the  Materia 
Medica,  he  was  appointed  to  succeed  him : and  six 
years  afterward,  jointly  with  Dr.  Gregory,  to  lecture 
on  the  Theory  and  Practice  of  Medicine,  when  he  re- 
signed the  Chemical  Chair  to  his  pupil,  Dr.  Black.  Dr. 
Gregory  having  died  the  following  year,  he  continued 
the  Medical  Lectures  alone,  till  within  a few  months 
of  his  death,  which  happened  in  February  1790,  in  his 
seventy-seventh  year;  and. he  is  said,  even  at  the  last, 
to  have  shown  no  deficiency  in  his  delivery,  nor  in  his 
memory,  being  accustomed  to  lecture  from  short  notes. 
His  Lectures  on  the  Materia  Medica  being  surrepti- 
tiously printed,  he  obtained  an  injunction  against  their 
being  issued  until  he  had  corrected  them,  which  was 
accomplished  in  1772 : but  they  were  afterward  much 
improved,  and  appeared  in  1789,  in  two  quarto  vo- 
lumes. Fearing  a similar  fate  to  his  Lectures  on  Me- 
dicine, he  published  an  outline  of  them  in  1784,  in  four 
volumes,  octavo,  entitled  “ First  Lines  of  the  Practice 
of  Physic.”  He  wrote  also  the  “ Institutions  of  Me- 
dicine,” in  one  volume,  octavo:  and  a “Letter  to 
Lord  Catbcart*  on  the  Recovery  of  drowned  Persons  ” 
But  his  most  celebrated  work  is  his  “ Synopsis  Noso- 
logiae  Rlethodicae,”  successively  improved  in  different 
editions;  the  fourth,  published  in  1785,  in  two  octavo 
volumes,  contains  the  Systems  of  other  Nosologists  till 
that  period,  followed  by  his  own,  which  certainly,  as  a 
practical  arrangement  of  diseases,  greatly  surpasses 
them. 

CULMUS.  Culm.  Straw.  The  stem  of  grasses, 
rushes,  and  plants  nearly  allied  to  them.  It  bears  both 
leaves  and  flowers,  and  its  nature  is  more  easily  un- 
derstood than  defined.  Its  varieties  are, 

1.  Culmus  teres , round;  as  in  Car  ex  uliginosa. 

2.  C.  tetragonus  ; as  in  Festuca  ovina. 

3.  C.  triangularis ; as  in  Eriocaulon  triangulare. 

4.  C.  capillaris  ; as  in  Scirpus  capillaris. 

5.  C.  prostratus ; as  in  .igrostis  canina. 

276 


6.  C.  repens;  as  in  Agrostis  stolonifera . 

7.  C.  nudus , as  in  Carex  montana. 

8.  C.  enodis , without  joints ; as  in  Juncus  conglo 

meratus. 

9.  C.  articulatus , jointed ; as  in  Jlgrostis  alba. 

10.  C.  geniculatus , bent  like  the  knee ; as  in  Mo- 
pecurus  geniculatus. 

It  is  also  either  solid  or  hollow,  rough  or  smooth, 
sometimes  hairy  or  downy,  scarcely  woolly. 

CuLMiFERa:.  Plants  which  have  smooth  soft 
stems. 

CULPEPER,  Nicholas,  was  the  son  of  a clergy- 
man, who  put  him  apprentice  to  an  apothecary ; after 
serving  his  time,  he  settled  in  Spitalfields,  London, 
about  the  year  1642.  In  the  troubles  prevailing  at  that 
period,  he  appears  to  have  favoured  the  Puritans  ; but 
his  decided  warfare  was  with  the  College  of  Physi- 
cians, whom  he  accuses  of  keeping  the  people  in  igno- 
rance, like  the  Popish  clergy.  He  therefore  published 
a translation  of  their  Dispensary,  with  practical  re- 
marks ; also  an  Herbal,  pointing  out,  among  other  mat- 
ters, under  what  plarfet  the  plants  should  be  gathered ; 
and  a directory  to  midwives,  showing  the  method  of 
ensuring  a healthy  progeny,  &c.  These  works  were 
for  some  time  popular.  He  died  in  1654. 

CU'LTER.  (From  colo , to  cultivate.) 

1.  A knife  or  shear. 

2.  The  third  lobe  of  the  liver  is  so  called  from  its 
supposed  resemblance. 

CU'LUS.  (From  acovXos-)  The  anus  or  funda- 
ment. 

Cu'mamus.  See  Piper  cubeba. 

CUMIN.  See  Cuminum. 

CU'MINUM.  (From  kvio,  to  bring  forth ; because 
it  was  said  to  cure  sterility.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Heptandria;  Order,  Digynia.  The 
cumin  plant. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  cumin  plant. 
See  Cuminum  cyminum. 

Cuminum  j.thiopicum.  A name  for  the  ammi  ve- 
rum.  See  Sison  ammi. 

Cuminum  cyminum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cumin  plant.  Cuminum;  Feeniculum  orientale.  A 
native  of  Egypt  and  Ethiopia,  but  cultivated  in  Sicily 
and  Malta,  from  whence  it  is  brought  to  us.  The  seeds 
of  cumin,  which  are  the  only  part  of  the  plant  in  use, 
have  a bitterish  taste,  accompanied  with  an  aromatic 
flavour,  but  not  agreeable.  They  are  generally  pre- 
ferred to  other  seeds  for  external  use  in  discussing  in- 
dolent tumours,  as  the  encysted  scrofulous,  &c.  and 
give  name  both  to  a plaster  and  cataplasm  in  the  phar- 
macopoeias. 

Cunea'pis  sutura.  The  suture  by  which  the  os 
sphenoides  is  joined  to  the  os  frontis. 

CUNEIFORMIS.  (From  cuneus,  a wedge,  and 
forma,  likeness.)  Cuneiform,  wedge-like.  Applied 
to  bones,  leaves,  &c.  which  are  broad  and  abrupt  at 
the  extremity.  See  Sphenoid  bone ; Tarsus,  and  Car- 
pas  ; Leaf;  Petalum. 

Cune'olus.  (From  cuneo , to  wedge.)  A crooked 
tent  to  put  into  a fistula. 

[“  Cunila.  Pennyroyal.  The  plant  called  penny- 
royal, in  England,  is  a species  of  mint,  Mentha  pule- 
gium;  while  the  American  plant,  which  bears  the 
same  common  appellation,  belongs  to  the  genus  Cu- 
nila, of  Linnaeus,  and  Hedeoma,  of  Persoon.  Ameri- 
can pennyroyal  is  a warm  aromatic,  possessing  a pun- 
gent flavour,  which  is  common  to  many  of  the  labiate 
plants  of  other  genera.  Like  them,  it  is  heating,  car- 
minative, and  diaphoretic.  It  is  in  popular  repute  as 
an  emmenagogue.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Cup  of  the  flower.  See  Calyx. 

CUPEL.  ( Kuppel , a cup,  German.)  Copella; 
Catellus  cinereus  ; Cineritium  ; Patella  docimastica ; 
Testa  probatrix,  cxploratnx,  or  docimastica.  A shal- 
low earthen  vessel  like  a cup,  made  of  phosphate  of 
lime,  which  suffers  the  baser  metals  to  pass  through  it, 
when  exposed  to  heat,  and  retains  the  pure  metal. 
This  process  is  termed  cupellation. 

CUPELLATION.  Cupellatio.  The  purifying  of 
perfect  metals  by  means  of  an  addition  of  lead,  which, 
at  a due  heat,  becomes  vitrified,  and  promotes  the 
vitrification  and  calcination  of  such  imperfect  metals 
as  may  be  in  the  mixture,  so  that  these  last  are  carried 
off  in  the  fusible  glass  that  is  formed,  and  the  perfect 
metals  are  left  nearly  pure.  The  name  of  this  opera- 


cus 


CUP 

tion  is  taken  from  the  vessels  made  use  of,  which  are 
called  cupels. 

Cu'phos.  Kot/$off.  Light.  When  applied  to  ali- 
ments, it  imports  their  being  easily  digested ; when  to 
distempers,  that  they  are  mild. 

[Cupping.  Topical  bleeding.  “This  is  done  by 
means  of  a scarificator,  and  a glass,  shaped  somewhat 
like  a bell.  The  scarificator  is  an  instrument  contain- 
ing a number  of  lancets,  sometimes  as  many  as 
twenty,  which  are  so  contrived,  that  when  the  instru- 
ment is  applied  to  any  part  of  the  surface  of  the  body, 
and  a spring  is  pressed,  they  suddenly  start  out,  and 
make  the  necessary  punctures.  The  instrument  is  so 
constructed,  that  the  depth,  to  which  the  lancets  pe- 
netrate, may  be  made  greater  or  less,  at  the  option  of 
the  practitioner.  As  only  small  vessels  can  be  thus 
opened,  a very  inconsiderable  quantity  of  blood  would 
be  discharged,  were  not  some  method  taken  to  pro- 
mote the  evacuation.  This  is  commonly  done  with  a 
cupping-glass,  the  air  within  the  cavity  of  which  is 
rarefied  by  the  flame  of  a little  lamp,  containing  spirit 
of  wine,  and  furnished  with  a thick  wick.  This  plan 
is  preferable  to  that  of  setting  on  fire  a piece  of  tow, 
dipped  in  this  fluid,  and  put  in  the  cavity  of  the  glass. 
The  larger  the  glass,  if  propel  ly  exhausted,  the  less 
pain  does  the  patient  suffer,  and  the  more  freely  does 
the  blood  flow.  When  the  mouth  of  the  glass  is  placed 
over  the  scarifications,  and  the  rarefied  air  in  it  be- 
comes condensed  as  it  cools,  the  glass  is  forced  down 
on  the  skin,  and  a considerable  suction  takes  place.” — 
Cooper's  Surg.  Diet.  A.] 

CUPRE'SSUS.  (So  called,  airo  tov  kveiv  napiaovs 
rovs  atepepovas,  because  it  produces  equal  branches.) 
Cypress. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Monxcia  ; Order,  Monadelphia.  The 
cypress-tree. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  cypress-tree. 
See  Cupressus  semper virens. 

Cupressus  sempervirens.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  cupressus  of  the  shops.  Cupressus— foliis  im- 
bricatis  squamis  quadrangulis,  of  Linnaeus ; called 
also  cyparissus.  Every  part  of  the  plant  abounds 
with  a bitter,  aromatic,  terebinthinate  fluid;  and  is 
said  to  be  a remedy  against  intermittents.  Its  wood  is 
extremely  durable,  and  constipates  the  cases  of  Egyp- 
tian mummies. 

Cupri  ammoniati  liquor.  Solution  of  ammoni 
ated  copper.  Aqua  cupri  ammoniati  of  Pharm.  Lond. 
1787,  and  formerly  called  Aqua  sapphirina.  Take  of 
ammoniated  copper,  a drachm;  distilled  water,  a pint. 
Dissolve  the  ammoniated  copper  in  the  water,  and 
filter  the  solution  through  paper.  This  preparation  is 
employed  by  surgeons  for  cleansing  foul  ulcers,  and  dis- 
posing them  to  heal. 

Cupri  rubigo.  Verdigris. 

Cupri  sulphas.  Vitriolum  cupri ; Vitriolum  cce- 
ruleum ; Vitriolum  Romanum  ; Cuprum  vitriolatum. 
Sulphate  of  copper.  It  possesses  acrid  and  styptic 
qualities ; is  esteemed  as  a tonic,  emetic,  adstringent, 
and  escharotic,  and  is  exhibited  internally  in  the  cure 
of  dropsies,  haemorrhages,  and  as  a speedy  emetic.  Ex- 
ternally it  is  applied  to  stop  haemorrhages,  to  haemor- 
rhoids, Ieucorrhcea,  phagedaenic  ulcers,  proud  flesh,  and 
condylomata. 

CU'PRUM.  (Qudsi  as  Cyprium;  so  called  from 
the  island  of  Cyprus,  whence  it  was  formerly  brought.) 
See  Copper. 

Cuprum  ammoniacale.  See  Cuprum  ammonia- 
turn. 

Cuprum  ammoniatum.  Cuprum  ammoniacale.  Am- 
moniated copper.  Ammoniacal  sulphate  of  copper 
Take  of  sulphate  of  copper,  half  an  ounce;  subcar 
bonate  of  ammonia,  six  drachms;  rub  them  together 
in  a glass  mortar,  till  the  effervescence  ceases;  then 
dry  the  ammoniated  copper,  wrapped  up  in  bibulous 
paper,  by  a gentle  heat.  In  this  process  the  carbonic 
acid  is  expelled  from  the  ammonia,  which  forms  a 
triple  compound  with  the  sulphuric  acid  and  oxide  of 
copper.  This  preparation  is  much  milder  than  the 
sulphate  of  copper.  It  is  found  to  produce  tonic  and 
astringent  effects  on  the  human  body.  Its  principal 
internal  use  has  been  in  epilepsy,  and  other  obstinate 
spasmodic  diseases,  given  in  doses  of  half  a grain, 
gradually  increased  to  five  grains  or  more,  two  or  three 
times  a day.  For  its  external  application,  see  Cupri 
ammoniati  liquor. 


Cuprum  vitriolatum.  See  Cupri  sulphas. 

CUPULA.  An  accidental  part  of  a seed,  being  a 
rough  calyculus,  surrounding  the  lower  part  of  a gland, 
as  that  of  the  oak,  of  which  it  is  the  cup. 

Cura  avanacea.  A decoction  of  oats  and  succory 
roots,  in  which  a little  nitre  and  sugar  were  dis- 
solved, was  formerly  used  in  fevers,  and  was  thus 
named. 

Cu'rcas.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Cu'rculio.  (From  karkarah,  Hebrew.)  The  throat 
and  the  aspera  arteria. 

[Also  the  name  of  a genus  of  coleopterous  insects, 
according  to  Linnaeus's  system.  A.] 

Cu'rcum.  See  Cheledonium  majus. 

CURCU'MA.  (From  the  Arabic  curcum  or  hercum.) 
Turmeric.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linntean  system.  Class,  Monandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  turmeric-tree. 
See  Curcuma  long  a. 

Curcuma  longa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
turmeric  plant.  Crocus  Indicus ; Terramarita ; Can- 
nacorus  radice  croceo ; Curcuma  rotunda ; Mayella  ,* 
Kua  kaha  of  the  Indians.  Curcuma— foliis  lanceola- 
tis ; nervis  later alibus  numerossimis  of  Linnaeus. 
The  Arabians  call  every  root  of  a saffron  colour  by 
the  name  of  curcum.  The  root  of  this  plant  is  im- 
ported here  in  its  dried  state  from  the  East  Indies,  in 
various  forms.  Externally  it  is  of  a pale  yellow  colour, 
wrinkled,  solid,  ponderous,  and  the  inner  substance  of 
a deep  saffron  or  gold  colour:  its  odour  is  somewhat 
fragrant  ; to  the  taste  it  is  bitterish,  slightly  acrid,  ex- 
citing a moderate  degree  of  warmth  in  the  mouth,  and 
on  being  chewed,  it  tinges  the  saliva  yellow.  It  is  an 
ingredient  in  the  composition  of  Curry  powder , is 
valuable  as  a dying  dru  and  furnishes  a chemical 
test  of  the  presence  of  uncombined  alkalies.  It  is  now 
very  seldom  used  medicinally,  but  retains  a place  in 
our  pharmacopoeias. 

Curcuma  rotunda.  See  Curcuma  longa. 

CURD.  The  coagulum,  which  separates  from  milk, 
upon  the  addition  of  acid  or  other  substances. 

[“Curette.  (French.)  An  instrument  shaped 
like  a minute  spoon,  or  scoop,  invented  by  Daviel,  and 
used  in  the  extraction  of  the  cataract,  for  taking  away 
any  opaque  matter,  which  may  remain  behind  the  pu- 
pil, immediately  after  the  crystalline  has  been  taken 
out.” — Cooper's  Surg.  Diet.  A.] 

Curled  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

CU'RMI.  (From  Kepata,  to  mix.)  Ale.  A drink 
made  of  barley,  according  to  Dioscorides. 

CURRANT.  See  Ribes. 

Cu'rsuma.  Curtuma.  The  Ranunculus  ficaria  of 
Linnaeus. 

Cursu'ta.  (Corrupted  from  cassuta,  kasuth,  Ara- 
bian.) The  root  of  the  Gentiana  purpurea  of  Lin- 
naeus. 

Curva'tor  coccygis.  A muscle  bending  the  coo 
cyx.  See  Coccygeus. 

CURVATUS.  (From  curvus,  a curve.)  Curvate,- 
bent.  Applied  to  the  form  of  a pepo  or  gourd  seed- 
vessel;  as  in  Cucumi  flexuosus. 

CUSCU'TA.  (According  to  Linnaeus,  a corruption 
from  the  Greek  Kaov^as,  or  Kadv'Jas,  which  is  from 
the  Arabic  Chessuth. , or  Chasuth.)  Dodder.  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Tetrandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  dodder  of  thyme. 
See  Cuscuta  epithymum. 

Cuscuta  epithymum.  The  systematic  name  of 
dodder  of  thyme.  Epythymum.  Cuscuta— foliis  ses- 
silibus , quinquifidisy  bracteis  obvallaiis.  A parasiti- 
cal plant,  possessing  a strong  disagreeable  smell,  and 
a pungent  taste,  very  durable  in  the  mouth.  Recom- 
mended in  melancholia,  as  cathartics. 

Cuscuta  europjea.  The  systematic  name  of  a 
species  of  dodder  of  thyme.  Cuscuta— floribus  sessi- 
libusy  of  Linnaeus- 

CUSPA'RIA.  The  name  given  by  Messrs.  Hum- 
boldt and  Bonpland  to  a genus  of  plants  in  which  is 
the  tree  we  obtain  the  Angustura  bark  from. 

Cusparia  fkbrifuga.  This  is  the  tree  said  to 
yield  the  bark  called  Angustura. — Cortex  cusparice, 
and  imported  from  Angustura  in  South  America.  Its 
external  appearances  vary  considerably.  The  best  is 
not  fibrous,  but  hard,  compact,  and  of  a yellowish- 
brown  colour,  and  externally  of  a whitish  hue.  When 

277 


CYC 


reduced  into  powder,  it  resembles  that  of  Indian  rhu- 
barb. It  is  very  generally  employed  as  a febrifuge, 
tonic,  and  adstringent.  While  some  deny  its  virtue  in 
curing  intermittent^,  by  many  it  is  preferred  to  the 
Peruvian  bark ; and  it  has  been  found  useful  in  diar- 
rhoea, dyspepsia,  and  scrofula.  It  was  thought  to  be 
the  bark  of  the  Brucea  antidys  enteric  a,  or  fcrruginea. 
Wildenow  suspected  it  to  be  the  Magnalia  plumieri ; 
but  Humboldt  and  Bonpland,  the  celebrated  travellers 
in  South  America,  have  ascertained  it  to  belong  to  a 
tree  not  before  known,  and  which  they  promise  to  de- 
scribe by  the  naipe  of  Cuspariafebrifuga. 

CUSPIDA'TUS.  (Froih  cuspis,  a point.)  1.  Four 
of  the  teeth  are  called  cuspidati , from  their  form-  See 
Teeth- 

2.  Sharp-pointed.  Applied  to  leaves  which  are 
tipped  with  a spine,  as  in  thistles.  See  Leaf. 

CU'SPIS.  (From  cuspa , Chaldean,  a shell,  or  bone, 
with  which  spears  were  formerly  pointed.)  1.  The 
glans  penis  was  so  called,  from  its  likeness  to  the  point 
of  a spear. 

2.  The  name  of  a bandage. 

Cu'stos  oculi.  An  instrument  to  fix  the  eye  dur- 
ing an  operation. 

Cuta'mbulus.  (From  cutis,  the  skin,  and  ambulo , 
to  walk.)  1.  A cutaneous  worm, 

2.  Scorbutic  itching. 

CUTANEOUS.  {Cutaneus ; from  cutis,  the  skin.) 
belonging  to  the  skin. 

Cuta'neus  muscclus.  See  Platysma  myoides. 

CUTICLE.  Cuticula.  (A  diminutive  of  cutis,  the 
skin.)  Epidermis.  Scarf-skin.  A thin,  pellucid, 
insensible  membrane,  of  a white  colour,  that  covers 
and  defends  the  true  skin,  with  which  it  is  connected 
by  the  hairs,  exhaling  and  inhaling  vessels,  and  the 
rete  mucosum. 

CUTICULA.  See  Cuticle. 

CU'TIS.  (Cutis,  tis.  fcem.)  See  Skin. 

Cutis  anserina.  The  rough  state  the  skin  is  some- 
times thrown  into  from  the  action  of  cold,  or  other 
cause,  in  which  it  looks  like  the  skin  of  the  goose. 

Cutis  vera.  The  true  skin  under  the  cuticle. 

CYANIA.  The  trivial  name  in  Good’s  arrange- 
ment of  diseases  of  a species  called  Exangia  cyania , 
or  blue  skin.  Class,  Hccmatica;  Order,  Struma. 

CYANIC  ACID.  Acidum  cyanicum.  See  Prussic 
acid. 

CYANITE.  Kyanite.  Disthene  of  Haiiy.  A mi- 
neral of  a Berlin  blue  colour,  found  in  India  and  Eu- 
rope. 

CYANOGEN.  (From  tcvavos,  blue,  and  ytvopai , to 
form  ) Production  of  blue.  See  Prussine.’ 

CY'ANUS.  (Kuavoj,  cserulean,  or  sky-blue;  so 
palled  from  its  colour.)  Blue-bottle.  See  Centauria 
cyanus. 

CY'AR.  (From  xro),  to  pour  out.)  1.  The  lip  of  a 

vessel. 

2.  The  eye  of  a needle. 

3.  The  orifice  of  the  internal  ear,  from  its  likeness 
to  the  eye  of  a needle. 

Cya'sma.  Spots  on  the  skin  of  pregnant  women. 

Cyathi'scus.  (From  KvaOos , a cup.)  The  hollow 
part  of  a probe,  formed  in  the  shape  of  a small  spoon, 
as  an  ear-picker. 

Cy'bitos.  See  Cubitus. 

Cy'bitum.  See  Cubitus. 

Cy'bitus.  See  Cubitus. 

Cyboi'des.  See  Cuboides. 

CYCAS.  (Ki )Kas,  of  Theophrastus.  The  name  of  a 
palm,  said  to  grow  in  Ethiopia.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants,  one  of  the  Palmce  pinnatifoliee,  of  Lin- 
nteus;  but  afterward  removed  by  him  to  the  felices. 

Cycas  circinalis.  The  systematic  name  of  a 
palm-tree  which  affords  a sago,  called  also  Sagus ; 
Sagu  : — a dry  fecula,  obtained  from  the  pith  of  this 
palm,  in  the  islands  of  Java,  Molucca,  and  the  Philip- 
pines. The  same  substance  is  also  brought  from  the 
West  Indies,  but  it  is  inferior  to  that  brought  from  the 
East.  Sago  becomes  soft  and  transparent  by  boiling 
in  water,  and  forms  a light  and  agreeable  liquid,  much 
recommended  in  febrile,  phthisical  and  calculous  dis- 
orders, &c.  To  make  it  palatable,  it  is  customary  to 
add  to  it,  when  boiled  or  softened  with  water,  some 
lemon  juice,  sugar,  and  wine. 

Cy'ceum.  (From  miKau),  to  mix.)  Cyceon.  A 
mixture  of  the  consistence  of  pap. 

Cy'cima.  (From  Kvitaw,  to  mix.)  So  called  from 
?T8 


CYN 

the  mixture  of  the  ore  with  lead,  by  which  litharge  is 
made. 

CY'CLAMEN.  (From  xincXoj,  circular ; either  on 
account  of  the  round  form  of  the  leaves,  or  of  the 
roots.)  Cyclamen. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  sow-bread.  See 
Cyclamen  Europceum. 

Cyclamen  europium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  sow-bread.  Arthanita  of  the  pharmacopoeias. 
The  root  is  a drastic  purge  and  errhine  ; and  by  the 
common  people  it  has  been  used  to  procure  abortion. 

Cycli'scus.  (From  xvkAoj,  a circle.)  An  instru- 
ment in  the  form  of  a half-moon,  formerly  used  for 
scraping  the  rotten  bones, 

Cycli'smus.  (From  kvk\o$,  a circle.)  A lozenge. 

Cyclofho'ria.  (From  achkAoj,  a circle,  and  (pcpio, 
to  bear.)  The  circulation  of  the  blood,  or  other 
fluids. 

Cyclo'pion.  (From  kvkXooj,  to  surround,  and  uip, 
the  eye.)  The  white  of  the  eye. 

CY'CLOS.  Cyclus.  A circle.  Hippocrates  uses 
this  word  to  signify  the  cheeks,  and  the  orbits  of  the 
eyes. 

Cyclus  metasyncriticus.  A long  protracted 
course  of  remedies,  persisted  in  with  a view  of  restor- 
ing the  particles  of  the  body  to  such  a state  as  is  neces- 
sary to  health. 

C YDO'NIA.  (From  Cydon,  a town  in  Crete,  where 
the  tree  grows  wild.)  The  quince-tree.  See  Pyrus 
cydonia. 

Cydonium  malum.  The  quince.  See  Pyrus  cy- 
donia. 

CYE'MA.  (From  kvu,  to  bring  forth.)  Parturition. 

Cyli'chnis.  (From  /cvAil-,  a cup.)  A gallipot  or 
vessel  to  hold  medicines. 

Cylindrical  Leaf.  See  Leaf. 

CYLI'NDRUS.  (From  kvmw,  to  roll  round.)  A 
cylinder.  A tent  for  a wound,  equal  at  the  top  and 
bottom. 

Cyllo'sis.  (From  kvXXoui,  to  make  lame.)  A tibia 
or  leg  bending  outwards. 

Cy'lus.  (From  xpAAow,  to  make  lame.)  In  Hip- 
pocrates, it  is  one  affected  with  a kind  of  luxation, 
which  bends  outwards,  and  is  hollowed  inward.  Such 
a defect  in  the  tibia  is  called  Cyllosis,  and  the  person 
to  whom  it  belongs,  is  called  by  the  Latins  Varus, 
which  term  is  opposed  to  Valgus. 

CYMA.  A cyme.  A species  of  inflorescence  of 
plants,  consisting  of  several  flower-stalks,  all  spring- 
ing from  one  centre  or  point,  but  each  stalk  is  variously 
subdivided ; and  in  this  last  respect,  a cyme  differs 
essentially  from  an  umbel,  the  subdivisions  of  the  lat- 
ter being  formed  like  its  primary  divisions, ,*of  several 
stalks  springing  from  one  point.  This  difference  is  of 
great  importance  in  nature.  The  mode  of  inflores- 
cence agrees  also  with  a corymbus  in  general  aspect ; 
but  in  the  latter  the  primary  stalks  have  no  common 
centre,  though  the  partial  ones  may  sometimes  be  um- 
bellate, which  last  case  is  precisely  the  reverse  of  a 
cyme. 

From  its  division  into  primary  stalks  or  branches,  it 
is  distinguished  into, 

1.  Trifid  ; as  in  Sedum  acre. 

2.  Quadrifid;  as  in  Crassula  rubens. 

3.  Tripartite,  having  three  less  cymes ; as  in 
Sambucus  ebulus. 

4.  Quinquipartite ; as  in  Sambucus  nigra. 

5.  Sessile,  or  without  stalk ; as  in  Onaphalium  fru - 
tescens. 

Comus  sangujnea  and  sericea  afford  examples  of  the 
Cyma  nuda. 

Cymato'des.  Is  applied  by  Galen  and  others  to  an 
unequal  fluctuating  pulse. 

Cy  mba.  (From  Kvy&os,  hollow.)  A boat,  pinnace, 
or  skiff.  A bone  of  the  wrist  is  so  called,  from  its 
supposed  likeness  to  a skiff.  See  JVavicvlare  os. 

CYMBIFORMIS.  (From  cymba , a boat  or  skiff, 
and  forma,  likeness.)  Skiff  or  boat-like.  Applied  to 
the  seeds  of  the  Calendula  officinalis . 

CY'MINUM.  See  Cuminum. 

CYMOPHANE.  See  Chrysoberyl. 

Cymosus.  Having  the  character  of  a cyme.  Ap- 
plied to  aggregate  flowers. 

CYNA'NCHE.  (From  a dog,  and  ayxw,  to 
suffocate,  or  strangle ; so  called  from  dogs  being  said  to 


CYN 


C3YN 


be  subject  to  it.)  Sore  throat.  A genus  or  disease  In 
the  class  Pyrexia,  and  order  Phlegmasia  of  Cullen. 
It  is  known  by  pain  and  redness  of  the  throat,  attend- 
ed with  a difficulty  of  swallowing  and  breathing. 

The  species  of  this  disease  are  : — 

1.  Cynanche  trachealis ; Cynanche  laryngca;  Suffo- 
catio  stridula  ; Angina  perniciosa ; Asthma  infant- 
um; Cynanche  stridula;  Morbus  strangulator  ius ; 
Catarrhus  suffocatius ; Barbadensis  ; Angina  poly- 
posa  sive  membranacea.  The  croup.  A disease  that 
mostly  attacks  infants,  who  are  suddenly  seized  with 
a difficulty  of  breathing  and  a crouping  noise : it  is  an 
inflammation  of  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  trachea 
that  induces  the  secretion  of  a very  tenacious  coagu- 
hible  lymph,  which  lines  the  trachea  and  bronchia, 
and  impedes  respiration.  The  croup  does  not  appear 
to  be  contagious,  whatever  some  physicians  may  think 
to  the  contrary ; but  it  sometimes  prevails  epidemi- 
cally. It  seems,  however,  peculiar  to  some  families; 
and  a child  having  once  been  attacked,  is  very  liable 
to  its  returns.  It  is  likewise  peculiar  to  young  chil- 
dren, and  has  never  been  known  to  attack  a person 
arrived  at  the  age  of  puberty. 

The  application  of  cold  seems  to  be  the  general 
cause  which  produces  this  disorder,  and  therefore  it 
occurs  more  frequently  in  the  winter  and  spring,  than 
in  the  other  seasons.  It  has  been  said,  that  it  is  most 
prevalent  near  the  sea-coast ; but  it  is  frequently  met 
with  in  inland  situations,  and  particularly  those  which 
are  marshy. 

Some  days  previous  to  an  attack  of  the  disease,  the 
child  appears  drowsy,  inactive,  and  fretful ; the  eyes 
are  somewhat  suffused  and  heavy;  and  there  is  a 
cough,  which,  from  the  first,  has  a peculiar  shrill 
sound ; this,  in  the  course  of  two  days,  becomes  more 
violent  and  troublesome,  and  likewise  more  shrill. 
Every  fit  of  coughing  agitates  the  patient  very  much ; 
the  face  is  flushed  and  swelled,  the  eyes  are  protube- 
rant, a general  tremor  takes  place,  and  there  is  a kind 
of  convulsive  endeavour  to  renew  respiration  at  the 
close  of  each  fit.  As  the  disease  advances,  a constant 
difficulty  of  breathing  prevails,  accompanied  some- 
times with  a swelling  and  inflammation  in  the  tonsils, 
uvula,  and  velum  pendulum  palati ; and  the  head  is 
thrown  back,  in  the  agony  of  attempting  to  escape  suf- 
focation. There  is  not  only  an  unusual  sound  pro- 
duced by  the  cough,  (something  between  the  yelping 
and  barking  of  a dog,)  but  respiration  is  performed 
with  a hissing  noise,  as  if  the  trachea  was  closed  up 
by  some  slight  spongy  substance.  The  cough  is  gene- 
rally dry;  but  if  any  thing  is  spit  up,  it  has  either  a 
purulent  appearance,  or  seems  to  consist  of  films  re- 
sembling portions  of  a membrane.  Where  great  nau- 
sea and  frequent  retchings  prevail,  coagulated  matter 
of  the  same  nature  is  brought  up.  With  these  symp- 
toms, there  is  much  thirst,  an  uneasy  sense  of  heat 
over  the  whole  body,  a continual  inclination  to  change 
from  place  to  place,  great  restlessness,  and  frequency 
of  the  pulse. 

In  an  advanced  stage  of  the  disease,  respiration  be- 
comes more  stridulous,  and  is  performed  with  still 
greater  difficulty,  being  repeated  at  longer  periods,  and 
with  greater  exertions,  uptil  at  last  it  ceases  entirely. 

The  croup  generally  proves  fatal  by  suffocation,  in- 
duced either  by  spasm  affecting  the  glottis,  or  by  a 
quantity  of  matter  blocking  up  by  the  trachea  or  bron- 
chia ; but  when  it  terminates  in  health,  it  is  by  a reso- 
lution of  the  inflammation,  by  a ceasing  of  the  spasms, 
and  by  a free  expectoration  of  the  matter  exuding  from 
the  trachea,  or  of  the  crusts  formed  there. 

The  disease  has,  in  a few  instances,  terminated 
fatally  within  twenty-four  hours  after  its  attack  ; but 
it  more  usually  happens,  that  where  it  proves  fatal,  it 
runs  on  to  the  fourth  or  fifth  day.  Where  consider- 
able portions  of  the  membranous  films,  formed  on  the 
surface  of  the  trachea,  are  thrown  up,  life  is  sometimes 
protracted  for  a day  or  two  longer  than  would  other- 
wise have  happened. 

Dissections  of  children  who  have  died  of  the  croup, 
have  mostly  shown  a preternatural  membrane,  lining 
the  whole  internal  surface  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
trachea,  which  may  always  be  easily  separated  from 
the  proper  membrane.  There  is  likewise  usually  found 
a good  deal  of  mucus,  with  a mixture  of  pus,  in  the 
trachea  and  its  ramifications. 

The  treatment  of  this  disease  must  be  conducted  on 
the  strictly  antiphlogistic  plan.  It  will  commonly  be 


proper,  where  the  patient  is  not  very,  young,  to  begin 
by  taking  blood  from  the  arm,  dr  the  jugular  vein ; 
several  leeches  should  be  applied  along  the  forepart  of 
the  neck.  It  will  then  be  right  to  give  a nauseating 
emetic,  ipecacuanha  with  tartarized  antimony,  or  with 
squill  in  divided  doses;  this  may  be  followed  up  by  ca- 
thartics, diaphoretics,  digitalis,  See.  Large  blisters 
ought  to  be  applied  near  the  affected  part,  and  a dis- 
charge kept  up  by  savine  cerate,  or  other  stimulant 
dressing.  Mercury,  carried  speedily  to  salivation,  has 
in  several  instances  arrested  the  progress  of  the  dis- 
ease, when  it  appeared  proceeding  to  a fatal  termina- 
tion. As  the  inflammation  is  declining,  it  is  very  im- 
portant that  free  expectoration  should  take  place  ; this 
may  be  promoted  by  nauseating  medicines,  by  inhaling 
steam,  and  by  stimulating  gargles  ; for  which  the  de- 
coction of  senna  is  particularly  recommended.  Where 
there  is  much  wheezing,  an  occasional  emetic  may 
relieve  the  patient  considerably,  and  under  symptoms 
of  threatening  suffocation,  the  operation  of  broncho- 
tomy  has  sometimes  saved  life. — Should  fits  of  spas- 
modic difficulty  of  breathing  occur  in  the  latter  pe- 
riods of  the  disease,  opium  joined  with  diaphoretics 
would  be  most  likely  to  do  good. 

2.  Cynanche  tonsillaris.  The  inflammatory  quinsy, 
called  also  angina  injlamm atoria.  In  this  complaint, 
the  inflammation  principally  occupies  the  tonsils  ; but 
often  extends  through  the  whole  mucous  membrane  of 
the  fauces,  so  as  essentially  to  interrupt  the  speech, 
respiration,  and  deglutition  of  the  patient. 

The  causes  which  usually  give  rise  to  it  are,  expo 
sure  to  cold,  either  from  sudden  vicissitudes  of  wea- 
ther, from  being  placed  in  a partial  current  of  air, 
wearing  damp  linen,  sitting  in  wet  rooms,  or  getting 
wet  in  the  feet;  all  of  which  may  give  a sudden  check 
to  perspiration.  It  principally  attacks  those  of  a full 
and  plethoric  habit,  and  is  chiefly  confined  to  cold 
climates,  occurring  usually  in  the  spring  and  autumn ; 
whereas  the  ulcerated  sore  throat  chiefly  attacks  those 
of  a weak  irritable  habit,  and  is  most  prevalent  in 
warm  climates.  The  former  differs  from  the  latter 
likewise  in  not  being  contagious.  In  many  people 
there  seems  to  be  a particular  tendency  to  this  dis- 
ease; as  from  every  considerable  application  of  cold  it 
is  readily  induced. 

An  inflammatory  sore  throat  discovers  itself  by  a 
difficulty  of  swallowing  and  breathing,  accompanied  by 
a redness  and  tumour  in  one  or  both  tonsils,  drynessof 
the  throat,  foulness  of  the  tongue,  lancinating  pains  in 
the  parts  affected,  a frequent  but  difficult  excretion  of 
mucus,  and  some  small  degree  of  fever.  As  the  dis- 
ease advances,  the  difficulty  of  swallowing  and  breath- 
ing becomes  greater,  the  speech  is  very  indistinct,  the 
dryness  of  the  throat  and  thirst  increases,  the  tongue 
swells  and  is  incrusted  with  a dark  fur,  and  the  pulse 
is  full  and  frequent.  In  some  cases,  a few  white, 
sloughy  spots  are  to  be  observed  on  the  tonsils.  If  the 
inflammation  proceeds  to  such  a height  as  to  put  a 
total  stop  to  respiration,  the  face  will  become  livid,  the 
pulse  will  sink,  and  the  patient  will  quickly  be  de- 
stroyed. 

The  chief  danger  arising  from  this  species  of  quin- 
sy is,  the  inflammation  occupying  both  tonsils,  and 
proceeding  to  such  a degree  as  to  prevent  a sufficient 
quantity  of  nourishment  for  the  support  of  nature  from 
being  taken,  or  to  occasion  suffocation  ; but  this  seldom 
happens,  and  its  usual  termination  is  either  in  resolu- 
tion or  suppuration.  When  proper  steps  are  adopted, 
it  will  in  general  readily  go  off  by  the  former. 

Where  The  disease  has  proved  fatal  by  suffocation, 
little  more  than  a highly  inflamed  state  of  the  parts  af- 
fected, with  some  morbid  phenomena  in  the  head,  have 
been  observed  on  dissection. 

This  is  usually  a complaint  not  requiring  very  active 
treatment.  If,  however,  the  inflammation  run  high, 
in  a tolerably  strong  and  plethoric  adult,  a moderate 
quantity  of  blood  should  be  drawn  from  the  arm,  or 
the  jugular  vein:  but  still  more  frequently  leeches 
will  be  required ; or  scarifying  the  tonsils  may  afford 
more  effectual  relief.  An  emetic  will  often  be  very 
beneficial,  sometimes  apparently  check  the  progress  of 
the  complaint : likewise  cathartics  must  be  employed, 
diaphoretics,  and  the  general  antiphlogistic  regimen. 
A blister  to  the  throat,  or  behind  the  neck,  sometimes 
has  a very  excellent  effect:  but  in  milder  cases,  the  lini- 
mentum  ammonia?,  or  other  rubefacient  application, 
applied  every  six  or  eight  hours,  and  wearing  flannel 


CYN 


round  the  throat,  may  produce  a sufficient  determina- 
tion from  the  part  affected.  The  use  of  proper  gargles 
generally  contributes  materially  to  the  cure.  If  there 
be  much  tension  and  pain  in  the  fauces,  a solution  of 
nitrate  of  potassa  will  be  best ; otherwise  dilute  acids, 
a \Yeak  solution  of  alum,  &c.  Should  the  disease  pro- 
ceed to  suppuration,  warm  emollient  gargles  ought  to 
be  employed,  and  perhaps  similar  external  applications 
may  be  of  some  service : but  it  is  particularly  impor- 
tant to  make  an  early  opening  into  the  abscess  for  the 
discharge  of  the  pus.  When  deglutition  is  prevented 
by  the  tumefaction  of  the  tonsils,  it  is  recommended 
to  exhibit  nutritious  clysters ; and  when  suffocation  is 
threatened,  an  emetic  or  inhaling  sther  may  cause  a 
rupture  of  the  abscess,  or  this  may  be  opened ; but  if 
relief  be  not  thereby  obtained,  bronchotomy  will  be- 
come necessary. 

3.  Cynanche  pharyngea.  This  species  is  so  called 
when  the  pharynx  is  chiefly  affected.  Dr.  Wilson,  in 
his  Treatise  on  Febrile  Diseases,  includes  in  his  defi- 
nition of  cynanche  tonsillaris,  that  of  cynanche  pha- 
ryngea. These  varieties  of  cynanche  differ  consider- 
ably when  they  are  exquisitely  formed.  But  the  one 
is  seldom  present  in  any  considerable  degree,  without 
being  attended  with  more  or  less  of  the  other.  Dr. 
Cullen  declares,  indeed,  that  he  never  saw  a case  of 
true  cynanche  pharyngea ; that  is,  a case  in  which  the 
inflammation  was  confined  to  the  pharynx ; it  con- 
stantly spread  in  a greater  or  less  degree  to  the  tonsils 
and  neighbouring  parts.  Besides,  the  mode  of  treat- 
ment is,  in  almost  every  instance,  the  same  in  both 
cases.  And  if  we  admit  the  cynanche  pharyngea  to 
be  a distinct  variety,  we  must  admit  another,  the  cy- 
nanche cesophagea;  for  inflammation  frequently  at- 
tacks the  oesophagus,  and  is  sometimes  even  confined 
to  it. 

4.  Cynanche  parotidea.  The  mumps.  A swelling 
on  the  cheek  and  under  the  jaw,  extending  over  the 
neck,  from  inflammation  of  the  parotid  and  other  sali- 
vary glands,  rendering  deglutition,  or  even  respiration, 
sometimes  difficult,  declining  the  fourth  day.  Epide- 
mic and  contagious. 

The  disease  is  subject  to  a metastasis  occasionally, 
in  females  to  the  mamnue,  in  males  to  the  testes ; and 
in  a few  instances,  repelled  from  these  parts,  it  has 
affected  the  brain,  and  even  proved  fatal.  In  general, 
however,  the  disease  is  without  danger,  and  scarcely 
calls  for  medical  aid.  Keeping  a flannel  over  the  part, 
and  the  antiphlogistic  regimen,  with  mild  laxatives, 
will  be  sufficient.  Should  the  mammae,  or  the  testes, 
be  affected,  more  active  evacuations  may  be  necessary 
to  prevent  the  destruction  of  those  organs,  bleeding 
general  and  topical,  &c.but  avoiding  cold  applications, 
lest  it  should  be  driven  to  the  brain.  And  where  this 
part  is  unfortunately  attacked,  besides  the  means  ex- 
plained under  Phrenitis , it  may  be  useful  to  endeavour 
to  recall  the  inflammation  to  its  former  seat  by  warm 
fomentations,  stimulant  liniments,  &c. 

5.  Cynanche  maligna.  The  malignant,  putrid,  or 
ulcerous  sore  throat.  Called  also  Cynanche  gangrce- 
nosa ; Angina  ulcerosa ; Febris  epidemica  cum  angina 
ulcusculosa;  Angina  epidemica;  Angina  gangrce- 
nosa;  Angina  suffocativa ; Angina  maligna.  This 
disease  is  "readily  to  be  distinguished  from  the  inflam- 
matory quincy,  by  the  soreness  and  specks  which  ap- 
pear in  the  fauces,  together  with  the  great  debility  of 
the  system,  and  small  fluttering  pulse,  which  are  not 
to  be  observed  in  the  former.  In  the  inflammatory 
sore  throat  there  is  always  great  difficulty  of  swallow- 
ing, a considerable  degree  of  tumour,  with  £ tendency 
in  the  parts  affected  to  suppurate,  and  a hard,  full 
pulse.  Moreover  in  the  former  affection  the  disease  is 
seated  principally  in  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
mouth  and  throat ; whereas  in  the  latter  the  inflam- 
mation chiefly  occupies  the  glandular  parts. 

The  putrid  sore  throat  often  arises  from  a peculiar 
state  of  the  atmosphere,  and  so  becomes  epidemical ; 
making  its  attacks  chiefly  on  children,  and  those  of  a 
weak  relaxed  habit.  It  is  produced  likewise  by  con- 
tagion, as  it  is  found  to  run  through  a whole  family, 
when  it  has  once  seized  any  person  in  it  ; and  it  proves 
often  fatal,  particularly  to  those  in  an  infantile  state. 

It  appears,  however,  that  under  this  head  two  differ- 
ent complaints  have  been  included  ; the  one,  especially 
fatal  to  children,  is  an  aggravated  form  of  scarlatina ; 
the  other,  a combination  of  inflammation  of  the  fauces 
with  typhus  fever  ; the  former  is  perhaps  always,  the 
280 


CPY 

latter  certainly  often,  contagious.  See  Scarlatina  and 

Typhus. 

CYNA  NCHICA.  (Cinanchicus ; from  Kvvayyt/, 
the  quincy.)  Medicines  which  relieve  a quincy. 

Cynanthro'pia.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  avdpwnog, 
a man.)  It  is  used  by  Bellini,  De  Morbis  Capitas,  to 
express  a particular  kind  of  melancholy,  when  men 
fancy  themselves  changed  into  dogs,  and  imitate  their 
actions. 

Cy'nara.  See  Cinara. 

Cynarocephalus.  (From  Kivapa,  the  artichoke, 
and  K£<pa\r],  a head.)  Having  a head  like  the  Cinara , 
or  artichoke ; as  the  thistle,  globe  thistle,  burdock,  blue 
bottle. 

Cy'nchnis.  KvyxvlS-  A vessel  of  any  kind  to 
hold  medicines  in. 

CYNOCRA'MBE.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  KpapSy, 
cabbage  ; an  herb  of  the  cabbage  tribe,  with  which  dogs 
are  said  to  physic  themselves.)  See  Mercurialis  pe- 
rennis. 

Cyno'ctanum.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  k)uvw,  to 
kill,)  A species  of  aconitum,  said  to  destroy  dogs. 
See  Aconitum  napellus. 

Cynocy'tisis.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  Kv'JiaoSy 
the  cytisis : so  named  because  it  was  said  to  cure  the 
distemper  of  dogs.)  The  dog-rose.  See  Rosa  canina. 

CYNODE'CTOS.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  SaKvw, 
to  bite.)  So  Dioscorides  calls  a person  bit  by  a mad 
dog. 

Cynode'smion.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  San,  to 
bind  ; so  named  because  in  dogs  it  is  very  discernible 
and  strong.)  A ligature  by  which  the  prepuce  is 
bound  to  the  glands.  See  Frcenum. 

CYNODO'NTES.  (KvvoSovres  : from  kvwv,  a dog, 
and  oSovs,  a tooth.)  The  canine  teeth.  See  Teeth. 

CYNOGLO'SSUM.  (From  kvwv,  a.  dog,  and 
yXwcroa,  a tongue;  so  named  from  its  supposed  re- 
semblance.) Hound’s  tongue. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  hound’s  tongue. 
See  Cynoglossum  officinale. 

Cynoglossom  officinale.  The  systematic  name 
for  hound’s  tongue.  Cynoglossum ; Lingua  canina  ; 
Cynoglossum — staminibus  corolla  brevioribus ; foliis 
lato  lanceolatis  tomentosis , sessilibus , of  Linnaeus. 
It  possesses  narcotic  powers,  but  is  seldom  employed 
medicinally.  Acids  are  said  to  counteract  the  ill 
effects  of  an  over-dose  more  speedily  than  any  thing 
else,  after  clearing  the  stomach. 

Cyno'lophus.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  Xotfog,  a 
protuberance : so  called  because  in  dogs  they  are  pecu- 
liarly eminent.)  The  asperities  and  prominences  of 
the  vertebrae. 

CYNOLY'SSA.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  Xvacij, 
madness.)  Canine  madness. 

CYNOMO'RIUM.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Monxcia ; Order, 
Monandria. 

Cynomorium  coccineum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Fungus  melitensis ; improperly  called  a fungus 
It  is  a small  plant  which  grows  only  on  a little  rock  ad 
joining  Malta.  A drachm  of  the  powder  is  given  for 
a dose  in  dysenteries  and  haemorrhages,  and  with 
remarkable  success. 

CYNORE'XIA.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  opelis, 
appetite.)  A voracious  or  canine  appetite.  See  Bu 
limia. 

CYNO'SBATOS.  See  Cynosbatus. 

CYNO'SBATUS.  (From  kvwv,  a dog,  and  f}ot] os, 
a thorn : so  called  because  dogs  are  said  to  be  attracted 
by  its  smell.)  The  dog-rose.  See  Rosa  canina. 

Cynospa'stum.  (From  icvaiv,  a dog,  and  <nraw,  to 
attract.)  See  Rosa  canina. 

CYOPHO'RIA.  (From  icvos,  a foetus,  and  <f>epw,  to 
bear.)  Pregnancy. 

Cypari'ssus.  See  Cupressus. 

CY'PERUS.  (From  Kvnapos,  a little  round  vessel, 
which  its  roots  are  said  to  resemble.)  Cyperus.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan  system. 
Class,  Triandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Cyperus  esculentus.  The  rush-nut.  This  plant 
is  a native  of  Italy,  where  the  fruit  is  collected  and 
eaten,  and  said  to  be  a greater  delicacy  than  the 
cliesnut 

Cyperus  longus.  The  systematic  and  pharmaco- 
poeia! name  of  the  English  galangale.  Cyperus— culm* 


DAC 


DAC 


triquetro  folioso , umbella  foliosa  supra-decomposila ; 
peduncvlis  nudis,  spicis  alter  nis,  of  Linnaeus.  The 
smell  of  the  root  of  this  plant  is  aromatic,  and  its  taste 
warm,  and  sometimes  bitter.  It  is  now  totally  fallen 
into  disuse. 

Cyperus  rotundus.  This  species,  the  round  cype- 
rus,  Cyperus — culmo  triquetro  subnudo , umbella  de- 
composita  ; spicis  alternis  linearibus,  of  Linnaeus,  is 
generally  preferred  to  the  former,  being  a more  grate- 
fully aromatic  bitter.  It  is  chiefly  used  as  a stomachic. 

CYPHELLA.  A peculiar  sort  of  pit  or  pore  on  the 
under  side  of  the  frond,  in  that  section  of  lichens 
called  stricta. 

CYPHO'MA.  (From  kvttIu),  to  bend.)  A gibbosity, 
or  curvature  of  the  spine. 

CYPHO'SIS.  An  incurvation  of  the  spine. 

CYPRESS.  See  Cyprus. 

Cypress  spurge.  See  Esula  minor. 

Cy'prinum  oleum.  Flowers  of  cypress,  calamus, 
cardamoms,  &c.  boiled  in  olive  oil,  now  fallen  into 
disuse. 

Cy'prium.  (From  Kvnpos , Cyprus,  an  island  where 
it  is  said  formerly  to  have  abounded.)  Copper. 

CY'PRUS.  (So  called  from  the  island  of  Cyprus, 
where  it  grew  abundantly.)  The  cypress-tree,  or 
Eastern  privet. 

[CYPRCEITE.  Petrifaction  of  a Cyprcea  or  Cow- 
rey.  See  Organic  relics.  A.l. 

CY'PSELIS.  (From  Kv^eXq,  a beehive.)  The 
aperture  of  the  ear,  also  the  wax  of  the  ear. 

Cyrcne'sis.  (From  KvpKvaco,  to  mix.)  A mixture, 
or  composition. 

Cyrto'ma.  (From  icvplos , curved.)  1.  An  unna- 
tural convex  tumour. 

2.  Tympanites. 

Cyrtono'sus.  (From  Kvp'jos,  curved,  and  vooos,  a 
disease.)  1.  The  rickets. 

2.  Curved  spine. 

CYRTOSIS.  ( Cyrtosis , is.  f.;  from  Kvpros,  curvus , 
incurvus,  gibbosus,  and  among  the  ancients  particu- 
larly imputed  recurvation  of  the  spine,  or  posterior 
crookedness,  as  XopSaois,  imputed  procurvation  of  the 
head  and  shoulders,  or  anterior  crookedness.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Class,  Eccritioa ; Order,  Mesotica.  Contortion  of  the 
bones ; defined,  head  bulky,  especially  anteriorly ; sta- 
ture short  and  incurvated;  flesh  flabby,  pale,  and 
wrinkled.  It  has  two  species,  Cyrtosis  rhachia , and 
C.  cretenismus , cretenism. 

Cy'ssarus.  (From  kvoos , the  anus.)  The  intes- 
tinum  rectum  is  so  called,  because  it  reaches  to  the 
anus. 

Cysso'tis.  (From  kvoos,  the  anus.)  An  inflamma- 
tion of  the  anus. 

CYSTEOLI'THUS.  (Prom  the  bladder,  and 
\i6os , a stone.)  A stone  in  the  bladder,  either  urinary 
or  gall-bladder. 

Cy'sthus.  Kvodos-  The  anus. 

CYSTIC.  (Cysticus  ; from  kv^cs,  a bag.)  Belong- 
ing to  the  urinary  or  gall-bladder. 

Cystic  duct.  See  Ductus  cysticus. 

Cystic  oxide.  A peculiar  animal  product  disco- 
vered by  Dr.  Wollaston.  See  Calculus , urinary. 

Cy'stica.  ( Cysticus ; from  kv^is,  the  gladder.) 
Remedies  for  diseases  of  the  bladder. 

CY'STIDES.  (Cystis,  idis.  f. ; from  kv^is,  a bag.) 
Encysted  tumours. 

CYSTIPHLO'GIA.  (From  kv?is,  the  bladder,  and 


Aryco,  to  burn.)  An  (inflammation  in  the  bladder 

ee  Cystitis. 

CYSTIRRHA'GIA.  (From  kv?is,  the  bladder,  and 
prjyvvpi , to  burst  forth.)  A discharge  from  the  bladder. 

CY'STIS.  (Kus-!?)  a bag.)  1.  Cyst  or  bladder. 

2.  The  urinary  bladder. 

3.  The  membranous  or  cyst  surrounding  or  contain 
ing  any  morbid  substance. 

Cystis  choledocha.  See  Gall-bladder 

Cystis  fellea.  See  Gall-bladder. 

Cystis  urinaria.  See  Urinary  bladder. 

CYSTITIS.  (From  kv^is,  the  bladder.)  Inflam- 
mation of  the  bladder.  A genus  of  disease  arranged 
by  Cullen  in  the  class  Pyrexia,  and  order  Phlegmasia. 
It  is  known  by  great  pain  in  the  region  of  the  bladder, 
attended  with  fever  and  hard  pulse,  a frequent  and 
painful  discharge  of  urine,  or  a suppression,  and  gene- 
rally tenesmus.  This  is  rarely  a primary  disease,  and 
when  it  occurs,  the  above  character  of  it  will  readily 
point  it  out.  There  also  is  frequently  nausea  and 
vomiting,  and,  in  some  cases,  delirium.  It  most 
generally  arises  in  consequence  of  inflammation  of  the 
adjacent  parts,  or  from  calculi  in  the  bladder.  The 
treatment  is  very  similar  to  that  of  Nephritis ; which 
see.  When  suppression  of  urine  attends,  the  catheter 
must  be  occasionally  introduced. 

CYSTOCE'LE.  (From  kv?is,  the  bladder,  and 
KrjXrj,  a tumour.)  A hernia  formed  by  the  protusion 
of  the  urinary  bladder. 

CYSTOLI'THICUS.  (From  kv^is,  the  bladder,  and 
XiOos,  a stone.)  Having  a stone  in  the  bladder. 

CYSTOPHLE'GICUS.  (From  kv?is,  the  bladder, 
and  (pXeyu),  to  burn.)  An  inflammation  of  the  bladder. 

CYSTOPHLEGMA'TICUS.  (From  xns-'J)^e  blad- 
der, and  (f>\ eypa,  phlegm.)  Having  matter  or  mucus 
in  the  bladder. 

CYSTOPRO'CTICUS.  (From  kv^is,  the  bladder, 
and  zspooKjos,  the  anus,  or  rectum.)  A disease  of  the 
bladder  and  rectum. 

CYSTOPTO'SIS.  (From  kv^is,  the  bladder,  and 
zsli:'](o,  to  fall.)  A protrusion  of  the  inner  membrane 
of  the  bladder,  through  the  urethra. 

CYSTOSPA'STICUS.  (From  kv?is,  the  bladder, 
and  oiraopa , a spasm.)  A spasm  in  the  sphincter  of 
the  bladder. 

CYSTOSPYTCUS..  (From  kv$is,  the  bladder,  and 
zsvov,  pus.)  Purulent  matter  in  the  bladder. 

CYSTOTHROMBOI'DES.  (From  kv?iS,  the  blad- 
der, and  QpopSos , a coagulation  of  blood.)  A concre- 
tion of  grumous  blood  in  the  bladder. 

CYSTOTO'MIA.  (From  KVjis,  the  bladder,  and 
'Jepvco,  to  cut.)  The  operation  of  cutting  or  piercing 
the  bladder. 

Cy'thion.  An  eye-wash. 

CY'TINUS.  (Perhaps,  as  Martyn  suggests,  from 
kv'Jivoi,  a name  given  by  Theophrastus  to  the  blos- 
soms of  the  pomegranate,  the  calyx  of  which  the  flower 
in  question  resembles  in  shape.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants.  Class,  Gynandria;  Order,  Octandria  of 
Linnaeus. 

Cytinus  hypocistis.  Rape  of  Cystus.  A fleshy 
pale-yellowish  plant,  parasitical  on  the  roots  of  several 
species  of  cystus  in  the  south  of  Europe,  from  which 
the  succus  hypocistidus  is  obtained. 

Cytiso-genista.  Common  broom.  See  Spartium 
scoparium. 

Cyzemer.  A swelling  of  the  wrists. 

Cyzice'nus.  A plaster  for  wounds  of  the  nerves. 


D 


TfcACNE'RUS.  (From  SaKvo),  to  bite.)  Biting.  Pun- 
■*-*gent.  An  epithet  for  a sharp  eye-wash,  composed 
of  burnt  copper,  pepper,  cadmia,  myrrh,  and  opium. 

Dacry'dium.  (From  ia/cpv,  a tear.)  The  inspis- 
sated juice  of  scammony,  in  small  drops,  and  there- 
fore called  a tear. 

DACRYGELO'SIS.  (From  SaKpv w,  to  weep,  and 
yeXau,  to  laugh.)  A species  of  insanity,  in  which  the 
patient  weeps  and  laughs  at  the  same  time. 

Dacryo'des.  (From  Jaxpvw,  to  weep.)  Asanious, 

or  weeping  ulcer. 


% 


DACRYO'MA.  (From  SaKpvw,  to  weep.)  A closing 
of  one  or  more  of  the  puncta  lachrymalia,  causing  an 
effusion  of  tears. 

Dactyle'thra  (From  Suk'JvXos,  a finger.)  A 
species  of  bougies  shaped  like  a finger,  to  excite 
vomiting. 

Dactyle'tus.  (From  Sok'JvXos,  the  date.)  The 
hermodactyl.  See  Hcrmodactylus. 

Da'ctylius.  (From  SaK'/vXos,  a finger.)  A round 
pastil,  troche,  or  lozenge,  shaped  like  a finger. 

DA'CTYLUS.  (From  datfvXoS)  a finger ; so  called 

281 


DAP 


DAP 

fvom  Ihe  likeness  of  its  fruit  to  a finger.)  1.  A finger. 
See  Digitus. 

2.  The  date.  See  Phoenix  dactylifera. 

DA5DIUM.  (From  Sous,  a torch.  A small  torch  or 
candle.  A bougie. 

DASMONOMA'NIA.  (From  Saipwv,  a daemon, 
and  pavia,  madness.)  That  species  of  melancholy 
where  the  patient  supposes  himself  to  be  possessed  by 
devils. 

DAISY.  See  Beilis  perennis. 

Daisy , ox-eye.  See  Chrysanthemum  leucanthemum. 

DALE,  Samuel,  was  born  in  1659.  After  practising 
as  an  apothecary,  he  became  a licentiate  of  the  col- 
lege of  physicians,  and  settled  at  Booking,  where  he 
continued  till  his  death  in  1739.  He  was  also  chosen  a 
fellow  of  the  Royal  Society.  In  1693,  he  published 
his  “ Pharmacologia,”  an  Introduction  to  the  Materia 
Medica,  which  he  afterward  much  enlarged  and  im- 
proved ; the  work  was  well  received,  and  passed 
through  many  editions.  He  also  gave  a good  account 
of  the  natural  productions  about  Harwich  and  Dover 
Court. 

Damask  rose.  See  Rosa  centifolia. 

Damna'tus.  (From  damno , to  condemn.)  The 
dry  useless  faeces,  left  in  a vessel  after  the  moisture  has 
been  distilled  from  it,  is  called  terra  damnata,  or  caput 
mortuum. 

DAMSON.  The  fruit  of  a variety  of  the  Prunus 
domes  tica. 

[DANA,  James  Freeman,  M.  Di,  was  the  oldest 
son  of  Luther  Dana,  Esq.,  and  was  born  in  Amherst, 
in  the  state  of  New-Hampshire,  in  September  1793. 
After  his  graduation,  he  commenced  the  study  of  me- 
dicine under  Dr.  John  Gorham,  at 'that  time  Professor 
of  Chemistry  in  Harvard  University.  In  the  year 
1815,  before  he  had  completed  his  professional  studies, 
he  had  become  so  well  known  as  a practical  chemist, 
that  he  was  selected  by  the  University  to  go  to  London, 
as  an  agent,  for  the  purpose  of  procuring  a new  appa- 
ratus for  the  chemical  department.  While  in  Eng- 
land, where  he  remained  several  months,  he  prose- 
cuted the  study  of  chemistry  in  the  Laboratory  of 
Accum,  a celebrated  operative  chemist. 

With  Dartmouth  College  he  remained  connected,  in 
the  capacity  of  Lecturer  on  Chemistry,  until  the  year 
1820,  when  he  received  the  appointment  of  Professor 
of  Chemistry  and  Mineralogy  in  the  same  institution. 
This  office  he  held  until  the  year  1826 ; and  those  who 
enjoyed  the  privilege  of  hearing  his  admirable  lectures, 
will  long  remember  with  what  ability  and  success  he 
discharged  its  duties.  In  1826  he  was  appointed  one 
of  the  Board  of  Visiters  of  the  Military  Academy  at 
West  Point;  and,  immediately  after  his  return  from 
the  discharge  of  this  duty,  he  was  appointed  Professor 
of  Chemistry  in  the  University  of  New-York.  This 
appointment,  which  opened  a wide  field  for  the  ex- 
ertion of  his  talents,  he  readily  accepted,  and  removed 
with  his  family  to  the  city,  in  the  autumn  of  the  same 
year.  About  six  months  after  his  removal  to  New- 
York,  he  sunk  under  an  attack  of  erysipelas,  at  the 
early  age  of  33,  and  when  just  entering  upon  an  ex- 
tended sphere  of  usefulness  and  honour. 

His  principal  publications  were  the  following,  viz. 
“Outlines  of  the  Mineralogy  and  Geology  of  Boston 
and  its  Vicinity “ Epitome  of  Chemical  Philoso- 
phy “ Report  on  a singular  Disease  of  horned  Cat- 
tle, in  the  Town  of  Burton,  New-Hampshire.”  Besides 
these  publications,  he  contributed  several  papers  to  the 
American  Journal  of  Science,  the  New-England 
Journal  of  Medicine,  and  the  Annals  of  the  Lyceum  of 
Natural  History  of  New-York,  some  of  them  of  very 
considerable  merit,  and  some  of  which  have  been  re- 
printed in  Europe.” — Thatch.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

DANDELION.  See  Leontodon  Taraxacum. 

DANDRIF.  See  Pityriasis. 

DANE  WORT.  See  Sambucus  Ebulus. 

DAOURITE.  A variety  of  red  schorl  from  Siberia. 

DA'PHNE.  ( Daphne , Sa<j>vrj ; from  Saw,  to  burn, 
and  <pwvtj , a noise:  because  of  the  noise  it  makes 
when  burnt.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Octandria;  Order,  Mono- 
gynia.  The  laurel,  or  bay-tree. 

Daphne  alpina.  Chamcelea ; Chameleea.  This 
species  of  dwarf  olive-tree  is  said  to  be  purgative  in 
the  dose  of  3jj,  and  is  sometimes  given  by  country 
people.  The  French  chemists  have  lately  examined  it 
cliemically.  See  Daphnin. 

282 


2.  The  mezereon  is  also  so  called,  because  it  has 
leaves  like  the  olive-tree.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Daphne,  fiax'-leaved.  See  Daphne  gnidium. 

Daphne  gnidium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  affords  the  Garou  bark.  Daphne : — pani- 
cula  terminali  foliis  lineari-lanceolatis  acuminatis  of 
Linnaeus.  Thymelcea ; Oneoron.  Spurge-flax ; Flax- 
leaved Daphne.  Garou  bark,  which  very  much  re- 
sembles that  of  our  mezereum,  is  to  be  immersed  in 
vinegar  for  about  an  hour  before  it  is  wanted  ; a small 
piece,  the  size  of  a sixpence,  thus  steeped,  is  applied 
to  the  arm  or  any  other  part,  and  renewed  once  a day 
in  winter  and  twice  in  summer.  It  produces  a serous 
exudation  from  the  skin  without  irritating  or  blistering. 
It  is  recommended,  and  is  in  frequent  use  in  France 
and  Russia,  against  some  diseases  of  the  eyes. 

Daphne  laureola.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
spurge-laurel.  Laureola  daphnoides.  The  bark  of 
this  plant  is  recommended  to  excite  a discharge  from 
the  skin,  in  the  same  way  as  that  of  the  Daphne  gni- 
dium. 

Daphne  mezereum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
mezereon.  Spurge-olive;  Widow-wail.  Mezereum. 
Daphne— floribus  sessilibus  ternis  caulinis,  foliis  lan - 
ceolatis  deciduis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  is  extreme- 
ly acrid,  especially  when  fresh,  and,  if  retained  in  the 
mouth,  excites  great  and  long-continued  heat  and  in- 
flammation, particularly-of  the  mouth  and  fauces ; the 
berries, ,gr  an  a cnidii  of  old  writers,  also  have  the 
same  effects,  and,  when  swallowed,  prove  a powerful 
corrosive  poison,  not  only  to  man,  but  to  dogs,  wolves, 
and  foxes.  The  bark  of  the  root  is  the  part  employed 
medicinally  in  the  dccoctum  sarsaparilla  compositum, 
intended  to  assist  mercury  in  resolving  nodes  and  other 
obstinate  symptoms  of  syphilis.  The  antisyphilitic 
virtues  of  mezereum,  however,  have  been  by  many 
writers  very  justly  doubted.  “ The  result  of  my  own 
experience  (says  Mr.  Pearson,  of  the  Lock  Hospital) 
by  no  means  accords  with  the  representation  given  of 
this  root  by  former  writers.  From  all  that  I have  been 
able  to  collect,  in  the  course  of  many  years’  observa- 
tion, I feel  myself  authorized  to  assert,  unequivocally, 
that  the  mezereum  has  not  the  power  of  curing  the 
venereal  disease  in  any  one  stage,  or  under  any  one 
form.  If  a decoction  of  this  root  should  ever  reduce 
a venereal  node,  where  no  mercury  has  been  previ- 
ously given,  yet  the  patient  will  by  no  means  be  ex- 
empted from  the  necessity  of  employing  mercury  for 
as  long  a space  of  time,  and  in  as  large  a quantity,  as 
if  no  mezereum  had  been  taken.  With  respect  to  the 
power  it  is  said  to  possess,  of  alleviating  the  pain,  and 
diminishing  the  bulk  of  membraneous  nodes,  nothing 
peculiar  and  appropriate  can  be  ascribed  to  the  meze- 
reum on  these  accounts,  since  we  obtain  the  same 
good  effects  from  sarsaparilla,  guaiacum,  volatile  alkali, 
blistering  plasters,  &c.  Nevertheless,  venereal  nodes, 
which  have  subsided  under  the  use  of  any  of  these 
articles  of  the  materia  medica,  will  appear  again,  and 
often  with  additional  symptoms,  if  a full  and  effica- 
cious course  of  mercury  be  not  submitted  to.  It  has, 
indeed,  been  alleged,  that  mezereum  always  alleviates 
the  pain  occasioned  by  a venereal  node,  and  generally 
reduces  it,  where  the  periosteum  only  is  affected ; and 
that  it  •eldom  fails  of  removing  those  enlargements  of 
the  periosteum  which  have  not  yielded  during  the  ad- 
ministration of  mercury. 

That  some  instances  of  success,  in  cases  like  these, 
may  have  fallen  to  the  share  of  those  who  made  tne 
assertion,  it  would  not  become  me  to  deny ; but  I have 
met  with  few  sucii  agreeable  evidences  of  the  efficacy 
of  this  medicine.  I have  given  the  mezereum  in  the 
form  of  a simple  decoction,  and  also  as  an  ingredient 
in  compound  decoctions  cf  the  woods,  in  many  cases, 
where  no  mercury  had  been  previously  employed,  but 
never  with  advantage  to  a single  patient.  I have  also 
tried  it,  ift  numerous  instances,  after  the  completion  of 
a course  of  mercury ; yet,  with  the  exception  of  two 
cases,  where  the  thickened  state  of  the  periosteum  was 
removed  during  the  exhibition  of  it,  I never  saw  the 
least  benefit  derived  from  taking  this  medicine  In  a 
few  cases  of  anomalous  pains,  which  I supposed  were 
derived  from  irregularities  during  a mercurial  course, 
the  mezereum  was  of  service,  after  I had  tried  the 
common  decoction  of  the  woods  without  success ; brrt 
even  in  this  description  of  cases,  I have  always  found 
it  a very  uncertain  remedy.  I have  made  trial  ol  this 
vegetable  in  a great  number  of  scrofulous  cases,  where 


DAR 


the  membranes  covering  the  bones  were  in  a diseased 
state,  and  I am  not  sure  that  one  single  patient  obtain- 
ed any  evident  and  material  benefit  from  it. 

The  late  Dr.  Cullen,  whose  reports  may  justly  claim 
attention  from  all  medical  men,  when  treating  of  the 
mezereum,  in  his  Materia  Medica,  says,  “I  have  fre- 
quently employed  it  in  several  cutaneous  affections, 
and  sometimes  with  success.”  It  were  to  have  been 
wished,  that  the  professor  of  medicine  had  specified 
what  those  diseases  of  the  skin  were,  in  which  the 
mezereum  was  sometimes  employed  with  success ; for, 
if  I except  an  instance  or  two  of  lepra,  in  which  the 
decoetion  of  this  plant  conferred  a temporary  benefit, 
I have  very  seldom  found  it  possessed  of  medicinal 
virtue,  either  in  syphilis,  or  in  the  sequel®  of  that  dis- 
ease, in  scrofula  or  in  cutaneous  affections.  Indeed 
the  mezereum  is  of  so  acrimonious  a nature,  often  pro- 
ducing heat  and  other  disagreeable  sensations  in  the 
fauces,  and,  on  many  occasions,  disordering  the  prim® 
Vi®,  that  I do  not  often  subject  my  patients,  to  the  cer- 
tain inconveniences  which  are  connected  with  the  pri- 
mary effects  of  this  medicine,  as  they  are  rarely  com- 
pensated by  any  other  important  and  useful  qualities.” 

DAPHNELjE'ON.  (From  6a(f>vri,  the  laurel,  and 
cAatov,  oil.)  The  oil  of  bay-berries. 

DAPHNIN.  The  bitter  principle  of  the  Daphne 
alpina , discovered  by  Vauquelin.  From  the  alkoholic 
infusion  of  this  bark,  the  resin  was  separated  by  its 
concentration.  On  diluting  the  tincture  with  water, 
filtering  and  adding  acetate  of  lead,  a yellow  daphnate 
of  lead  fell,  from  which  sulphuretted  hydrogen  sepa- 
rated the  lead,  and  left  the  daphnin  in  small  trans- 
parent crystals.  They  are  hard,  of  a grayish  colour, 
a bitter  taste  when  heated,  evaporate  in  acrid  acid 
vapours,  sparingly  soluble  in  cold,  but  moderately  in 
boiling  water.  It  is  stated,  that  its  solution  is  not  pre- 
cipitated by  acetate  of  lead  ; yet  acetate  of  lead  is  em- 
ployed in  the  first  process  to  throw  it  down. 

Daphni'tis.  (From  Sa<}>vri,  the  laurel.)  A sort  of 
cassia  resembling  the  laurel. 

DAPHNOI'DES.  (From  SaQv 77,  the  laurel,  and  tu5oj, 
a likeness.)  The  herb  spurge  laurel.  See  Daphne 
laureola. 

Da'rsin.  (From  darzin , Arabian.)  The  grosser 
sort  of  cinnamon. 

DA'RSIS.  (From  Seput,  to  excoriate.)  An  excoria- 
tion. 

DA'RTOS.  (From  Sepu),  to  excoriate:  so  called 
from  its  raw  and  excoriated  appearance.)  The  part 
so  called,  under  the  skin  of  the  scrotum,  is  by  some 
anatomists  considered  as  a muscle,  although  it  appears 
to  be  no  more  than  a condensation  of  the  cellular  mem- 
brane lining  the  scrotum.  It  is  by  means  of  the  dar- 
tos  that  the  skin  of  the  scrotum  is  corrugated  and  re- 
laxed. 

DARWIN,  Erasmus,  was  born  at  Ellon,  in  Not- 
tinghamshire, in  1731.  After  studying  at  Cambridge 
and  Edinburgh,  and  becoming  doctor  of  medicine,  he 
went  to  settle  at  Litchfield.  He  had  soon  after  the 
good  fortune  to  succeed  in  the  cure  of  a gentleman  in 
the  neighbourhood,  who  was  so  ill  of  a fever,  as  to 
have  been  given  over  by  the  physician  previously  in 
attendance  : this  speedily  procured  him  very  extensive 

{tractice.  He  soon  after  married,  and  by  his  first  wile 
lad  three  sons,  of  whom  only  one  survived  him.  At 
the  age  of  50,  he  married  again,  and  removed  to  Derby, 
where  he  continued  till  his  death  in  1802,  leaving  six 
children  by  his  second  wife.  The  active  life  lie  led, 
and  his  very  temperate  habits,  preserved  his  health  and 
faculties  in  a great  degree  unimpaired.  He  distin- 
guished himself  more  as  a poet,  th&u  by  professional 
improvements : though  he  certainly  suggested  some  in- 
genious methods  of  practice;  but,  warned  by  prece- 
ding examples,  he  avoided  publishing  any  material 
poem,  till  his  medical  fame  was  thoroughly  established. 
His  “ Botanic  Garden,”  and  “ Zoonomia,”  are  well 
known,  but  they  have  long  ceased  to  be  popular : and 
the  philosophy  of  the  latter  work,  which  advocates 
materialism,  is  justly  censured.  He  communicated  to 
the  College  of  Physicians  an  account  of  his  successful 
use  of  digitalis  in  dropsy,  and  some  other  diseases, 
which  was  published  in  their  Transactions.  His  son 
Charles,  who  died  while  studying  at  Edinburgh,  ob- 
tained a gold  medal  by  an  Essay  on  the  distinction  of 
Pus  and  Mucus ; and  left  another  unfinished  on  the 
Retrograde  Action  of  the  Absorbents : which  were 
published  after  his  death  by  his  father. 


DAT 

Dasy'mna.  (From  daws,  rough.)  A scabby  rough- 
ness of  the  eyelids. 

Da'sys.  (A aavi,  rough.)  1.  A dry,  parched  tongue, 

2.  Difficult  respiration. 

DATE.  See  Dactylus. 

Date  plum,  Indian.  See  Dyospyrus  lotus. 

DATOLYTE.  Datholit  of  Werner.  A species  of 
silicious  ore  divided  into  common  datolyte  and  botroi- 
dal  datolyte. 

[This  is  the  silicious  borate  of  lime,  called  Datho 
lit,  by  Werner  and  Brogniart.  It  was  discovered  by 
Esmark.  “ It  is  sometimes  in  prismatic  crystals,  with 
ten  sides,  having  two  opposite  solid  angles  on  each 
base  truncated.  The  primitive  form  is  a right  prism, 
whose  bases  are  rhombs,  with  angles  of  109°  28'  and 
70°  32'.  It  also  appears  in  large  granular  concretions, 
which  frequently  discover  indications  of  a prismatic 
form ; also  in  grains  or  amorphous.  The  surface  of 
the  concretions  is  rough  and  glimmering. 

Its  hardness  enables  it  to  scratch  fluate  of  lime,  and 
its  specific  gravity  is  2.98.  Its  fracture  is  imperfectly 
conchoidal,  shining,  and  nearly  vitreous.  Its  colour 
is  white,  shaded  with  gray  or  green,  often  very  de- 
licately. 

When  exposed  to  the  flame  of  a candle,  it  assumes  a 
dull  white  colour,  and  becomes  very  brittle,  even  be- 
tween the  fingers.  Before  the  blowpipe  it  swells  into 
a milk-white  mass,  and  then  melts  into  a pale  rose- 
coloured  glass.  It  is  composed  of 


Lime 35.5 

Silex  36.5 

Boracic  acid 24.0 

Water 4.0 


100 

Clean.  Min.  A.] 

D ATU'RA.  (Blanchard  says,  it  is  derived  from  the 
Indian  word  datiro,  of  which  he  knows  not  the  mean- 
ing.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linn®an 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Datura  stramonium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  thorn-apple.  Stramonium;  Dutr ay  ; Barry 0 coc- 
calon;  Solanum  maniacum  of  Dioscorides.  Stramo- 
nium spinosum  of  Gerard.  Solanum  fatidum  of  Bau 
hin.  Stramonium  majus  album.  Common  thorn-apple. 
Datura — pericarpiis  spinosis  erectis  ovatis,  foliis  ova - 
tis  glahris , of  Linn® us.  This  plant  has  been  long 
known  as  a powerful  narcotic  poison.  In  its  recent 
state  it  has  a bitterish  taste,  and  a smell  somewhat  re- 
sembling that  of  poppies,  especially  if  the  leaves  be 
rubbed  between  the  fingers.  Instances  of  the  delete- 
rious effects  of  the  plant  are  numerous,  more  particu- 
larly of  the  seed.  An  extract  prepared  from  the  seeds 
is  recommended  by  Baron  Stoerck  in  maniacal,  epilep- 
tic, and  convulsive  affections;  and  is  said  by  some  to 
succeed,  while,  in  the  hands  of  others,  it  has  failed. 
In  this  country,  says  Dr.  Woodville,  we  are  unac- 
quainted with  any  practitioners  whose  experience 
tends  to  throw  light  on  the  medical  character  of  this 
plant.  It  appears  to  us,  continues  Dr.  Woodville,  that 
its  effects  as  a medicine  are  to  be  referred  to  no  other 
power  than  thaf’  of  a narcotic.  And  Dr.  Cullen, 
speaking  on  this  subject,  says,  “I  have  no  doubt  that 
narcotics  may  be  a remedy  in  certain  cases  of  mania 
and  epilepsy ; but  I have  not,  and  I doubt  if  any  other 
person  has,  learned  to  distinguish  the  cases  to  which 
such  remedies  are  properly  adapted.  It  is  therefore 
that  we  find  the  other  narcotics,  as  well  as  the  stramo- 
nium, to  fail  in  the  same  hands  in  which  they  had  in 
other  cases  seemed  to  succeed.  It  is  this  consideration 
that  has  occasioned  my  neglecting  the  use  of  stramo- 
nium, and  therefore  prevented  me  from  speaking  more 
precisely  from  my  own  experience  on  this  subject.” 

The  extract  of  this  plant  has  been  the  preparation 
usually  employed  from  one  to  ten  grains  and  upwards 
a day ; but  the  powdered  leaves,  prepared  after  the 
manner  of  those  of  hemlock,  would  seem  to  be  more 
certain  and  convenient.  Greding  found  the  strength  of 
the  extract  to  vary  exceedingly  ; that  which  he  obtain- 
tained  from  Ludwig  was  much  more  powerful  than 
that  which  he  had  of  Stoerck.  Externally,  the  leaves 
of  stramonium  have  been  applied  to  inflammatory  tu- 
mours and  burns,  and  it  is  said  with  success,  andxjf 
late,  the  dried  leaves  have  been  smoked  as  a remedy 
in  asthma ; but  it  does  not  appear  that  they  have  been 
more  efficacious  in  this  way  than  tobacco. 

[The  Stramonium  is  known  in  different  parts  of  the 
United  States,  by  the  name  of  Thorn-apple , Jamestown - 

283 


DEC 


DEC 


weed,  Stink-weed,  &c.  All  parts  of  the  plant  appear 
to  be  poisonous.  Some  soldiers  died,  during  the  revo- 
lutionary war,  by  eating  the  young  plants,  for  greens, 
early  in  the  spring.  I have  seen  children  labouring 
under  the  effects  of  the  poison  from  having  swallowed 
the  seeds,  and  from  drinking  a decoction  of  herbs  in 
which  some  of  the  young  seed-vessels,  and  small 
leaves,  of  the  stramonium  had  been  accidentally  mixed. 

The  poison  of  the  stramonium  produces,  in  children^ 
a peculiar  spasmodic  delirium,  attended  with  dilata- 
tion of  the  pupils  of  the  eyes,  heat  of  the  skin,  and  a 
flush  of  the  face.  The  ripe  or  unripe  seeds,  or  the 
leaves,  produce  the  same  effect,  and  the  only  remedy 
is  to  discharge  them  from  the  stomach  by  emetics,  as 
soon  as  possible.  A.] 

DAUBENTON,  Lewis  Mary,  was  born  in  Bur- 
gundy, 1716.  Having  become  doctor  in  medicine  at 
the  age  of  24,  he  went  to  Paris,  and  being  very  zealous 
in  the  study  of  comparative  anatomy,  the  office  of 
keeper  of  the  royal  cabinet  of  natural  history  was  pro- 
cured for  him  by  the  celebrated  Buffon.  He  contri- 
buted materially  to  enrich  the  splendid  work  of  that 
eminent  naturalist,  by  furnishing  the  anatomy  both  of 
man  and  animals.  He  was  a member  of  several  dis- 
tinguished societies,  among  others  of  the  Royal  Aca- 
demy of  Sciences  at  Paris,  to  which  he  made  some  use- 
ful communications.  Having  escaped  the  revolution- 
ary horrors  in  France,  he  was  chosen,  in  1799,  a mem- 
ber of  the  Conservative  Senate:  but  he  died  towards 
the  end  of  the  same  year. 

Dauc'ites  vinum.  Wild-carrot  seeds,  steeped  in 
must. 

DAU'CUS.  Aitov  tov  Saveiv,  from  its  relieving  the 
colic,  and  discussing  flatulencies.)  The  carrot.  1. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  garden  carrot. 
See  Daucus  carota. 

Daucus  alsaticus.  The  Oreoselinum  pratense, 
of  Linnaeus. 

Daucus  annuus  minor.  The  Caucalis  anthriscus, 
of  Linnaeus. 

Daucus  carota.  The  systematic  name  of  the  car- 
rot plant.  Daucus;  Daucus  sylvestris ; Pastinaca 
sylvestris  tenuifolia  officinarum ; Daucus — seminibus 
hispidis,  petiolis  subtus  nervosis,  of  Linnsus.  The 
cultivated  root,  scraped,  and  applied  in  the  form  of  a 
poultice,  is  a useful  application  to  phagedaenic  ulcers, 
and  to  cancers  and  putrid  sores.  The  seeds,  which 
obtain  a place  in  the  materia  medica,  have  a light 
aromatic  smell,  and  a warm  acrid  taste,  and  are 
esteemed  for  their  diuretic  qualities,  and  for  their 
utility  in  calculous  and  nephritic  complaints,  in  which 
an  infusion  of  three  spoonfuls  of  the  seeds,  in  a pint  of 
boiling  water,  has  been  recommended;  or  the  seeds 
may  be  fermented  in  malt  liquor,  which  receives  from 
them  an  agreeable  flavour,  resembling  that  of  lemon- 
peel.  The  boiled  root  is  said  by  many  to  be  difficult  of 
digestion ; but  this  is  the  case  only  when  the  stomach 
is  weak.  It  contains  a considerable  quantity  of  the 
saccharine  principle,  and  is  very  nutritious. 

Daucus  creticus.  See  Athamanta  cretensis. 

Daucus  sativus.  A variety  of  the  Daucus  carota, 
the  seeds  of  which  are  preferred  by  some  practitioners, 

Daucus  seprinius.  Common  chervil. 

Daucus  sylvestris.  Wild  carrot,  or  bird’s  nest. 
The  seeds  of  the  wild  plant  are  said  to  be  more  effica- 
cious than  those  of  the  garden  carrot ; they  possess  de- 
mulcent and  aromatic  qualities,  and  are  given,  in  in- 
fusion, or  decoction,  in  calculous  complaints. 

DAY-MARE.  See  Ephialtes. 

DAY-SIGHT.  See  Paropsis  noctifuga. 

Dead  nettle.  See  Lamium  album. 

Deadly  nightshade.  See  Alropa  belladonna. 

DEAFNESS.  Surditas.  See  Paracusis. 

Deaf-dumbness.  Speechlessness,  from  deafness. 

Dearticula'tio.  (From  de,  and  articulus,  a joint.) 
Articulation  admitting  evident  motion. 

Deascia'tio.  (From  de,  and  ascio,  to  chip,  as  with 
a hatchet.)  A bone  splintered  on  its  side. 

DECAGY'NIA.  (From  Seta,  ten,  and  ywy,  a wo- 
man.) The  name  of  an  order  of  the  class  Decandria, 
of  the  sexual  system  of  plants.  See  Plants. 

Decamy'ron.  (From  8eica,  ten,  and  pvpov,  an  oint- 
ment.) An  aromatic  ointment,  mentioned  by  Oriba- 
Bius,  containing  ten  ingredients. 

DECA'NDRIA.  (From  Seica,  ten,  and  avyp,  a man.) 

284 


The  name  of  a class,  and  also  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
the  sexual  system.  See  Plants. 

Decide'ntia.  (From  decido,  to  fall  down.)  Any 
change  prolonging  acute  diseases. 

DECI'DUA.  (Deciduus ; from  decido , to  fall  off.) 
Membrana  decidua.  A very  thin  and  delicate  mem- 
brane or  tunic,  which  adheres  to  the  gravid  uterus,  and 
is  said  to  be  a reflection  of  the  chorion,  and,  on  that 
account,  is  called  decidua  reflexa.  The  tunica  decidua 
comes  away  after  delivery,  in  small  pieces,  mixed  with 
the  lochia. 

DECI'DUUS.  (From  decido,  to  fall  off,  or  down 
to  die.)  Deciduous  ; falling  off.  Applied  to  trees  and 
shrubs,  which,  in  most  European  countries,  lose  their 
leaves  as  winter  approaches,  and  to  the  perianthium 
of  Tilia  europcea,  which  does  not  fall  off  until  after 
the  flower  is  expanded. 

This  term  is  expressive  of  the  second  stage  of  dura- 
tion, and,  like  caducous,  has  a different  application 
according  to  the  particular  part  to  which  it  refers: 
thus  leaves  are  deciduous  which  drop  off  in  the  au- 
tumn, petals  which  fall  off  with  the  stamina  and  pis- 
tils ; and  calyces  are  deciduous  which  fall  off  after  the 
the  expansion,  and  before  the  dropping  of  the  flower. 

DECIMA'NUS.  (From  decern,  ten,  and  mane,  the 
morning.)  Returning  every  tenth  day,  applied  to 
some  erratic  fevers. 

DECLI'VIS.  (From  de,  and  clivis,  a hill.)  De 
dining,  descending.  A name  of  an  abdominal  muscle, 
because  of  its  posture. 

DECO'CTUM.  (From  decoquo,  to  boil.)  A decoc 
tion.  Any  medicine  made  by  boiling  in  a watery  fluid. 
In  a chemical  point  of  view,  it  is  a continued  ebullition 
with  water,  to  separate  such  parts  of  bodies  as  are 
only  soluble  at  that  degree  of  heat.  The  following  are 
among  the  most  approved  decoctions. 

Decoctum  album.  See  Mistura  cornu  usti. 

Dkcoctum  aloes  compositum.  Compound  de 
coction  of  aloes.  Take  of  extract  of  liquorice,  half  an 
ounce;  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  two  scruples;  extract 
of  spiked  aloe  powdered,  myrrh  powdered,  saffron  stig- 
mata, of  each  a drachm ; water,  a pint.  Boil  down  to 
twelve  fluid  ounces,  and  strain  ; then  add  compound 
tincture  of  cardamoms,  four  fluid  ounces.  This  decoc- 
tion, now  first  introduced  into  the  London  Pharmaco- 
poeia, is  analogous  to  an  article  in  very  frequent  use, 
invented  by  the  late  Dr.  Devalingin,  and  sold  under  the 
name  of  Beaume  de  vie.  By  the  proportion  of  tincture 
which  is  added,  it  will  keep  unchanged  for  any  length 
of  time. 

Decoctum  althje.®.  Decoction  of  marsh  mallows. 
Take  of  dried  marsh-mallow  roots,  5 iv ; raisins  of 
the  sun,  stoned,  | ij  5 water  Ibvij.  Boil  to  five  pounds ; 
place  apart  the  strained  liquor,  till  the  fteces  have  sub- 
sided, then  pour  off  the  clear  part.  This  preparation, 
directed  in  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia,  may  be  ex- 
hibited as  a common  drink  in  nephralgia,  and  many 
diseases  of  the  urinary  passages,  with  advantage. 

Decoctum  anthemidis.  See  Decoctum  chamce- 
meli. 

Decoctum  astragali.  Take  of  the  root  of  the 
astragalus  escapus,  5 j ; distilled  water,  ibiij.  These  are 
to  be  boiled,,  till  only  a quart  of  fluid  remain.  The 
whole  is  to  be  taken,  a little  warmed,  in  the  course  of 
24  hours.  This  remedy  was  tried  very  extensively  in 
Germany,  and  said  to  evince  very  powerful  effects,  as 
an  antisyphilitic. 

Decoctum  bardanje.  Take  of  bardana  root,  3 vj; 
of  distilled  water,  Ibvj.  These  are  to  be  boiled  till 
only  two  quarts  remain.  From  a pint  to  a quart  in  a 
day  is  given,  in  those  cases  where  sarsaparilla  and 
other  remedies,  that  are  called  alterative,  are  supposed 
to  be  requisite. 

Decoctum  chamjemeli.  Chamomile  decoction. 
Take  of  chamomile  flowers,  $j;  caraway  seeds,  33s; 
water,  ibv.  Boil  fifteen  minutes,  and  strain.  A very 
common  and  excellent  vehicle  for  tonic  powders,  pills, 
&c.  It  is  also  in  very  frequent  use  for  fomentation, 
and  clysters. 

Decoctum  cinchon.e.  Decoction  of  cinchona, 
commonly  called  decoction  of  Peruvian  bark.  Take 
of  lance-leaved  cinchona  bark  bruised,  an  ounce  ; wa- 
ter, a pint.  Boil  for  ten  minutes,  in  a vessel  slightly 
covered,  and  strain  the  decoction  while  hot.  Accord- 
ing to  the  option  of  the  practitioner,  the  nark  of  either 
of  the  other  species  of  cinchona,  the  cordi folia,  or  yel- 
low, or  the  oblongifolia,  or  red,  may  be  substituted  for 


DEC 


DEC 


the  lancifolia,  or  quilled;  which  is  here'  directed. 
This  way  of  administering  the  bark  is  very  general,  as 
nil  the  other  preparations  may  be  mixed  with  it,  as  ne- 
cessity requires.  It  is  a very  proper  fomentation  for 
prolapsus  of  the  uterus  and  rectum. 

Decoctum  coknu.  See  Mistura  cornu  usti. 

Decoctum  cydoni/E.  Mucilago  seminis  cydonii 
malii.  Mucilago  scminum  cydoniorum.  Decoction 
of  quince  seeds.  Take  of  quince  seeds,  two  drachms ; 
water,  a pint.  Boil  over  a gentle  fire  for  ten  minutes, 
then  strain.  This  decoction,  in  the  new  London  Phar- 
macopoeia, has  been  removed  from  among  the  muci- 
lages, as  being.less  dense  than  either  of  the  others,  and 
as  being  employed  in  larger  doses,  like  other  mucila- 
ginous decoctions.  In  addition  to  gum,  it  contains 
other  constituent  parts  of  the  seeds,  and  is,  therefore, 
more  apt  to  spoil  than  common  mucilage,  over  which 
it  possesses  no  other  advantages,  than  that  it  is  more 
grateful,  and  sufficiently  thin,  without  further  dilution, 
to  form  the  bulk  of  any  liquid  medicine.  Its  virtues 
are  demulcent.  Joined  with  syrup  of  mulberry  and  a 
little  borax,  it  is  useful  against  aphthte  of  the  mouth  and 
fauces. 

Decoctum  daphnes  mezerei.  Decoction  of  me- 
zereon.  Take  of  the  bark  of  mezereon  root,  | ij ; 
liquorice  root,  bruised,  | ss;  water,  ibiij.  Boil  it,  with 
a gentle  heat,  down  to  two  pounds,  and  strain  it. 
From  four  to  eight  ounces  of  this  decoction  may  be 
given  four  times  a day,  in  some  obstinate  venereal  and 
rheumatic  affections.  It  operates  chiefly  by  per- 
spiration. 

Decoctum  dulcamara.  Decoction  of  woody  night- 
shade. Take  of  woody  nightshade  stalks,  newly  ga- 
thered, 3j;  distilled  water,  Ibiss.  These  are  to  be 
boiled  away  to  a pint,  and  strained.  The  dose  is  half 
an  ounce  to  two  ounces,  mixed  with  an  equal  quantity 
(If  milk.  This  remedy  is  employed  in  inveterate  cases 
of  scrofula ; in  cancer  and  phagedsena ; in  lepra,  and 
other  cutaneous  affections;  and  in  anomalous  local 
diseases,  originating  in  venereal  lues. 

Decoctum  geoffr^^e  inermis.  Decoctionof  cab- 
bage-tree plant.  Take  of  bark  of  the  cabbage-tree, 
powdered,  § j ; water,  Ibij.  Boil  it,  with  a gentle  fire, 
down  to  one  pound,  and  strain.  This  is  a powerful 
anthelmintic.  It  may  be  given  in  doses  of  one  table- 
spoonful to  children,  and  four  to  adults.  If  disagreea- 
ble symptoms  should  arise  from  an  over-dose,  or  from 
drinking  cold  water  during  its  action,  we  must  imme- 
diately purge  with  castor  oil,  and  dilute  with  acidu- 
lated drinks. 

Decoctum  guaiaci  officinalis  compositum. 
Decoctum  lignorum.  Compound  decoction  of  guaia- 
cum,  commonly  called  decoction  of  the  woods.  Take 
of  guaiacum  raspings,  | iij ; raisins,  stoned,  § ij  ; sas- 
safras root,  liquorice,  each,  5 j ; water,  Ibx.  Boil  the 
guaiacum  and  raisins  with  the  water,  over  a gentle 
fire,  to  the  consumption  of  ore  half ; adding,  towards 
the  end,  the  sassafras  and  liquorice.  Strain  the  liquor 
without  expression.  This  decoction  possesses  stimu- 
lant and  diaphoretic  qualities,  and  is  generally  exhibit- 
ed in  rheumatic  and  cutaneous  diseases,  which  are  de- 
pendent on  a vitiated  state  of  the  humours.  It  may 
be  taken  by  itself,  to  the  quantity  of  a quarter  of  a 
pint,  twice  or  thrice  a day,  or  used  as  an  assistant  in  a 
course  of  mercurial  or  antimonial  alteratives ; the  pa- 
tient, in  either  case,  keeping  warm,  in  order  to  promote 
the  operation  of  the  medicine. 

Decoctum  hellebori  albi.  Decoction  of  white 
hellebore.  Take  of  the  root  of  white  hellebore,  pow- 
dered, by  weight,  |j  ; water,  two  pints;  rectified  spi- 
rits of  wine,  1 ij,  by  measure.  Boil  the  water,  with 
the  root,  to  one  pint ; and  the  liquor  being  cold  and 
strained,  add  to  it  the  spirit.  This  decoction,  in  the 
last  London  Pharmacopoeia,  is  called  decoctum  vera- 
tri.  It  is  a very  efficacious  application,  externally,  as 
a wash,  in  tinea  capitis,  lepra,  psora,  &c.  When  the 
skin  is  very  tender  and  irritable,  it  should  be  diluted 
with  an  equal  quantity  of  water. 

Decoctum  hordei.  Decoctum  hordei  distichi. 
Jlqua  hordeata.  Take  of  pearl  barley,  | ij ; water, 
four  pints  and  a half.  First  wash  away  any  adhering 
extraneous  substances  with  cold  water ; next,  having 
poured  upon  the  barley  half  a pint  of  water,  boil  for  a 
few  minutes.  Let  this  water  be  thrown  away,  and 
add  the  remainder  of  the  water  boiling;  then  boil 
down  to  two  pints,  and  strain.  Barley-water  is  a nu- 
tritive and  softening  drink,  and  the  most  proper  of  all 


liquors  in  inflammatory  diseases.  It  is  an  excellent 
gargle  in  inflammatory  sore  throats,  mixed  with  a little 
nitre. 

Decoctum  hordei  compositum.  Decoctum  pec - 
torale.  Compound  decoction  of  barley.  Take  of  de- 
coction of  barley,  two  pints ; figs,  sliced,  1 ij ; liquorice 
root,  sliced  and  bruised,  5 ss ; raisins,  stoned,  1 ij ; wa 
ter,  a pint.  Boil  down  to  two  pints  and  strain.  From 
the  pectoral  and  demulcent  qualities  of  this  decoction, 
it  may  be  administered  as  a common  drink  in  fevers 
and  other  acute  disorders,  in  catarrh,  and  several  affec- 
tions of  the  chest. 

Decoctum  hordei  cum  gummi.  Barley-water, 
Ibij;  gumarab.,5j-  The  gum  is  to  be  dissolved  in  the 
barley  decoction,  while  warm.  It  then  forms  a suita- 
ble diluent  in  strangury,  dysury,  &c.  for  the  gum, 
finding  a passage  into  the  bladder,  in  an  unaltered 
state,  mixes  with  the  urine,  and  prevents  the  action  of 
its  neutral  salts  on  the  urinary  canal. 

Decoctum  lichenis.  Decoction  of  Iceland  moss  or 
liverwort.  Take  of  liverwort,  one  ounce  ; water,  a 
pint  and  a half.  Boil  down  to  a pint,  and  strain.  The 
dose  is  from  1 j to  | iv. 

[The  Iceland  moss  was  once  in  great  repute  as  a 
remedy  in  consumption,  the  decoction  being  made 
with  milk,  but  it  is  no  longer  in  repute,  being  consider- 
ed a weak  mucilagious  bitter  of  little  or  no  effi- 
cacy. A.] 

Decoctum  lobelije.  Take  a handful  of  the  roots 
of  the  Lobelia,  syphilitica ; distilled  water,  Ibxij.  These 
are  to  be  boiled  in  the  usual  way,  till  only  four  quarts 
remain.  The  very  desirable  property  of  curing  the 
venereal  disease  has  been  attributed  to  this  medicine; 
but  it  is  not  more  to  be  depended  on  than  guaiacum, 
or  other  vegetable  substances,  of  which  the  same  thing 
has  been  alleged.  The  effects  of  this  decoction  are 
purgative,  and  the  manner  of  taking  it,  as  described 
by  Swediaur,  is  as  follows : — The  patient  is  to  begin 
with  half  a pint,  twice  a day.  The  same  quantity  is 
then  to  be  taken,  four  times  a day,  and  continued  so 
long  as  its  purgative  effect  is  not  too  considerable. 
When  the  case  is  otherwise,  it  is  to  be  discontinued  for 
three  or  four  days,  and  then  had  recourse  to  again  till 
the  cure  is  completed.  As  this  is  a remedy  on  the  old 
system,  and  not  admitted  into  our  pharmacopoeias, 
little  confidence  ought  to  be  placed  in  it. 

Decoctum  lusitanicum.  Take  of  sliced  sarsapa- 
rilla, lignum  sassafras,  lignum  santalum  rubrum,  offi- 
cinal lignum  guaiacum,  of  each  one  ounce  and  a half; 
of  the  root  of  mezereon,  coriander  seed,  of  each  half  an 
ounce  ; distilled  water,  ten  pounds.  These  are  to  be 
boiled  till  only  half  the  fluid  remains.  The  dose  is  a 
quart  or  more  in  a day. 

Take  of  sliced  sarsaparilla,  lignum  santalum  ru- 
brum, lignum  santalum  citrinum,  of  each,  § iss ; of  the 
root  of  glycirrhiza  and  mezereon,  of  each,  3 ij ; of  lig- 
num rliodii,  officinal  lignum  guaiacum,  and  lignum 
sassafras,  of  each,  ^ss;  of  antimony,  § j ; distilled 
water,  Ibv.  These  ingredients  are  to  be  macerated  for 
twenty-four  hours,  and  afterward  boiled,  till  the  fluid 
is  reduced  to  half  its  original  quantity.  From  one  to 
four  pints  are  given  daily. 

The  late  Mr.  Hunter  notices  this,  and  also  the  fob 
lowing  formula,  in  his  Treatise  on  the  Venereal  Dis- 
ease. 

Take  of  sliced  sarsaparilla,  of  the  root  of  China,  of 
each  5 j ; walnut  peels  dried,  xx ; antimony,  §ij; 
pumice-stone,  powdered,  5 j ; distilled  water,  ibx.  The 
powdered  antimony  and  pumice-stone  are  to  be  tied 
in  separate  pieces  of  rag,  and  boiled,  along  with  the 
other  ingredients.  This  last  decoction  is  reckoned  to 
be  the  genuine  Lisbon  diet  drink,  the  qualities  of 
which  have  been  the  subject  of  so  much  encomium. 

Decoctum  malv®  compositum.  Decoctum  pro 
enemate.  Decoctum  commune  pro  clystere.  Com- 
pound decoction  of  mallows.  Take  of  mallows  dried, 
an  ounce ; chamomile  flowers  dried,  half  an  ounce ; 
water,  a pint.  Boil  for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  and 
strain.  A very  excellent  form  for  an  emollient  clyster. 
A variety  of  medicines  may  be  added  to  answer  par- 
ticular indications. 

Decoctum  mezerei.  See  Decoctum  daphnes  me- 
zerei. 

Decoctum  papaveris.  Decoctum  pro  fomento . 
Fotus  communis.  Decoction  of  poppy.  Take  of 
white  poppy  capsules  bruised,  1 iv  ; water,  four  pints 
Boil  for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  and  strain.  This  pre 

285 


DEC 


DEG 


paration  possesses  sedative  and  antiseptic  properties, 
and  may  be  directed  with  advantage  in  sphacelus,  &c. 

Decoctum  pro  enemate.  See  Decoctum  male  os 
compositum. 

Decoctum  pro  fomento.  See  Decoctum papaveris. 

Decoctum  quercus.  Decoction  of  oak  bark.  Take 
of  oak  bark,  §j;  water,  two  pints.  Boil  down  to  a 
pint,  and  strain.  This  astringent  decoction  has  lately 
been  added  to  the  Lond.  Pharm.,  and  is  chiefly  used 
for  external  purposes.  It  is  a good  remedy  in  prolap- 
sus ani,  and  may  be  used  also  in  some  cases  as  an  in- 
jection. 

Decoctum  sarsaparilla.  Decoction  of  sarsapa- 
rilla. Take  of  sarsaparilla  root,  sliced,  | iv ; boiling 
water,  four  pints.  Macerate  for  four  hours,  in  a ves- 
sel lightly  covered,  near  the  fire ; then  take  out  the 
sarsaparilla  and  bruise  it.  After  it  is  bruised,  put  it 
again  into  the  liquor,  and  macerate  it  in  a similar 
manner  for  two  hours  more ; then  boil  it  down  to  two 
pints,  and  strain. 

This  decoction  is  'much  extolled  by  some  practition- 
ers, in  phthisis,  and  to  restore  the  strength  after  a long 
course  of  mercury. 

Decoctum  sarsaparilla  compositum.  Com- 
pound decoction  of  sarsaparilla.  Take  of  decoction 
of  sarsaparilla  boiling,  four  pints ; sassafras  root 
sliced,  guaiacum  wood  shavings,  liquorice  root  bruised, 
of  each  an  ounce ; mezereon  root  bark,  3 iij.  Boil 
for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  and  strain.  The  alterative 
property  of  the  compound  is  very  great ; it  is  generally 
given  after  a course  of  mercury,  where  there  have 
been  nodes  and  indolent  ulcerations,  and  with  great 
benefit.  The  dose  is  from  half  a pint  to  a pint  in 
twenty-four  hours. 

Decoctum  senega.  Decoction  of  senega.  Take 
of  senega  root,  §j;  water,  two  pints.  Boil  down  to 
a pint,  and  strain.  This  is  now  first  introduced  into 
the  Lond.  Pharm.  as  being  a useful  medicine,  espe- 
cially in  affections  of  the  lungs,  attended  with  debility 
and  inordinate  secretion. 

Decoctum  ulmi.  Decoction  of  elm  bark.  Take 
of  fresh  elm  bark  bruised,  four  ounces;  w’ater,  four 
pints.  Boil  down  to  two  pints,  and  strain.  This  may 
be  employed  with  great  advantage  as  a collyrium  in 
chronic  ophthalmia.  It  is  given  internally  in  some 
cutaneous  eruptions. 

Decoctum  veratri.  See  Decoctum  hellebori  albi. 

[The  Pharmacopoeia  of  the  United  States  contains 
the  following  decoctions. 

Decoctum  aralia  nudicaulis.  Decoction  of 
false  sarsaparilla. 

Decoctum  cinchona.  Decoction  of  Peruvian 
bark. 

Decoctum  colomba  compositum.  Compound  de- 
coction of  Columhe. 

Decoctum  dulcamara.  Decoction  of  bitter-sweet. 

Decoctum  guaiaci.  Decoction  of  guaiacum. 

Decoctum  hordei.  Decoction  of  barley. 

Decoctum  hordei  compositum.  Compound  de- 
coction of  barley. 

Decoctum  lichenis.  Decoction  of  Iceland  moss. 

Decoctum  mezerei.  Decoction  of  mezereon. 

Decoctum  sarsaparilla.  Decoction  of  sarsapa- 
rilla. 

Decoctum  sarsaparilla  compositum.  Com- 
pound decoction  of  sarsaparilla. 

Decoctum  scilla.  Decoction  of  squill. 

Decoctum  senega.  Decoction  of  seneca  snake  root. 

Decoctum  veratri.  Decoction  of  white  helle- 
bore. A .] 

DECOLLA'TIO.  (From  decollo,  to  behead.)  The 
loss  of  a part  of  the  skull. 

Decomposita.  The  name  of  a class  in  Sauvage’s 
Methodus  Foliorum,  consisting  of  such  as  have  twice 
compounded  leaves;  that  is,  have  a common  foot- 
stalk supporting  a number  of  less  leaves,  each  of 
which  is  compounded ; as  in  Fumaria , and  many  un- 
belliferous  plants. 

DECOMPOSITION.  Decompositio.  The  separa- 
tion of  the-  component  parts  or  principles  of  bodies 
from  each  other.  The  decomposition  of  bodies  forms  a 
very  large  part  of  chemical  science.  It  seems  proba- 
ble, from  the  operations  we  are  acquainted  with,  that 
it  seldom  lakes  place  but  in  consequence  of  some  com- 
binations or  composition  having  been  effected.  It 
would  be  difficult  to  point  out  an  instance  of  the  sepa- 
ration of  any  of  the  principles  of  bodies  which  has 


been  effected,  unless  in  consequence  of  some  new 
combination.  The  only  exceptions  seem  to  consist  in 
those  separations  which  are  made  by  heat,  and  voltaic 
electricity. 

DECOMPOSITUS.  A term  applied  to  leaves,  and 
means  doubly  compound.  Sir  James  Smith  observes, 
that  Linnaeus,  in  his  Philosophia  Botanica,  gives  an 
erroneous  definition  of  this  term  which  does  not  agree 
with  his  own  use  of  it.  The  JEgopodium  podagraria 
and  Fulmaria  claviculata , afford  examples  of  The  de- 
composite leaves.  Supra  decompositum , means  thrice 
compound,  or  more ; as  in  Caucalis  anthriscus.  The 
decomposite  flowers  are  such  as  contain  within  a com- 
mon calyx  a number  of  less  or  partial  flower-cups, 
each  of  which  is  composed  of  many  florets. 

DECORTICATION.  ( Decorticatio ; from  dc,  from, 
and  cortex , bark.)  The  stripping  of  any  thing  of  its 
bark,  husk,  or  shell ; thus  almonds,  and  the  like,  are 
decorticated,  that  is,  deprived  of  their  pellicle,  when 
ordered  for  medicinal  purposes. 

[There  is  a natural  and  artificial  decortication  per 
formed  on  certain  trees.  The  shag-bark  hickory-tree 
(juglans  alba)  throws  off  its  bark  by  a natural  and 
spontaneous  decortication.  So  does  the  button-wood 
(platanus  occidentalis)  or  plane-tree.  The  cork-tree 
is  deprived  of  its  bark  artificially  every  few  years,  and 
lives  longer  than  those  trees  which  are  suffered  to  grow 
without  molestation.  Those  not  decorticated  become 
shaggy  and  hide-bound,  while  the  others  form  a new 
bark  and  improve  in  appearance  and  vigour.  These 
facts  suggested  the  idea  of  improving  fruit-trees  that 
had  become  hide-bound  and  shaggy,  and  appeared  to 
be  in  a state  of  decay.  Dr.  Mitchill  first  tried  the  ex- 
periment on  an  old  apple-tree,  and  by  removing  the 
old  bark,  in  the  warm  season,  from  the  body  of  the 
tree,  and  protecting  it  from  external  injury  for  a time, 
he  succeeded  hi  producing  a new  bark  and  in  regent 
rating  a tree  which  was  considered  as  past  bearing. 
The  tree  became  vigorous,  again  put  forth  blossoms 
and  bore  fruit.  Since  that  experiment,  it  has  become 
common  in  apple  orchards  to  improve  old  trees  by  a 
similar  process.  A.] 

DECREPITATION.  (Decrepitatio ; from  decrepo, 
to  crackle.)  A kind  of  crackling  noise,  which  takes- 
place  in  some  bodies,  when  heated : it  is  peculiar  to 
some  kinds  of  salts,  as  muriate  of  soda,  sulphate  of 
barytes,  &c. 

DECUMBENS.  (From  dccumbo , to  lie  down.) 
Drooping:  a term  applied  to  flowers  which  incline  to 
one  side  and  downwatds. 

DECURRENS.  Decurrent.  A term  applied  by 
botanists  to  leaves  Which  run  down  the  stem  or  leafy 
border  or  wing;  as  in  Onopordium  acanthium , and 
many  thistles,  great  mullein,  and  comfrey : and  to  leaf- 
stalks ; as  in  Pisum  ochrus. 

DECURSIVE'.  Decurrently.  Applied  to  leaflets 
that  run  down  the  stem  ; as  in  Eryngium  campcstre. 

DECUSSATION.  (Decussatio ; from  dccutio,  to 
divide.)  When  nerves,  or  muscular  fibres  cross  one 
another,  they  are  said  to  decussate  each  other. 

DECUSSATUS.  Decussated.  Applied  to  leaves 
and  spines  which  are  in  pairs,  alternately  crossing  each- 
other  ; as  in  Veronica  decussata,  and  Oenista  luct- 
tanica. 

DECUSSO'RIUM.  (From  decusso , to  divide.) 
An  instrument  to  depress  the  dura  mater,  after  tre- 
panning. 

Defensi'va.  (From  defendo,  to  preserve.)  Cordial 
medicines,  or  such*as  resist  infection. 

DE'FERENS.  (From  defcro,  to  sonvey;  because 
it  conveys  the  semen  to  the  vesiculae  seminales.)  See 

DEFLAGRATION.  (Defiagratio  ; From  drfla- 
gro,  to  burn.)  A chemical  term,  chiefly  employed  to 
express  the  burning  or  setting  fire  to  any  substance ; as 
nitre,  sulphur,  &c. 

DEFLUXION.  ( Defluxio ; fiom  deflue,  to  run  off.) 
A falling  down  of  humours  from  a superior  to  an  in- 
ferior part.  Many  writers  mean  nothing  more  by  it 
than  inflammation. 

DEFOLIATIO.  (Fromde,  And  folium,  a leaf.)  The 
fall  of  the  leaf.  A term  opposed  to  frondescentia , or 
the  renovation  of  the  leaf. 

DEGLUTITION.  (Deglutitio ; from  deglvtio,  tar 
swallow  down.)  A natural  action.  “ It  is  under  - 
stood to  be  the  passage  of  a substance,  either  solid* 
liquid,  or  gaseous,  from  the  mouth  to  the  stomach- 


DEG 


DEG 


Though  deglutition  is  very  simple  in  appearance,  it  is 
nevertheless  the  most  complicated  of  all  the  muscular 
actions  that  serve  for  digestion.  It  is  produced  by  the 
contraction  of  a great  number  of  muscles,  and  requires 
the  concurrence  of  many  important  organs. 

All  the  muscles  of  the  tongue,  those  of  the  velum  of 
the  palate,  of  the  pharynx,  of  the  larynx,  and  the  mus- 
cular layer  of  the  oesophagus,  are  employed  in  deglu- 
tition. 

The  velum  is  a sort  of  valve  attached  to  the  poste- 
rior edge  of  the  roof  of  the  palate ; its  form  is  nearly 
quadrilateral ; its  free  or  inferior  edge  is  pointed,  and 
forms  the  uvula.  Like  the  other  valves  of  the  intes- 
tinal canal,  the  velum  is  essentially  formed  by  a du- 
plicature  of  the  digestive  mucous  membrane;  there 
are  many  mucous  follicles  that  enter  into  its  composi- 
tion. particularly  in  the  uvula.  Eight  muscles  move 
it ; it  is  raised  by  the  two  internal  pterygoid ; the  ex- 
ternal pterygoid  hold  it  transversely  ; the  two  palato- 
pharyngei , and  the  two  constrictores  isthmi  faucium 
carry  it  downwards.  These  four  are  seen  at  the  bot- 
tom of  the  throat,  where  they  raise  the  mucous  mem- 
brane, and  form  the  pillars  os  of  the  velum  of  the  pa- 
late, between  which  are  situated  the  amygdalccy  a mass 
of  mucous  follicles.  The  opening  between  the  base 
of  the  tongue  below,  the  velum  of  the  palate  above, 
and  the  pillars  laterally,  is  called  the  isthmus  of  the 
throat.  By  means  of  its  muscular  apparatus,  the  ve- 
lum of  the'  palate  may  have  many  changes  of  posi- 
tion. In  the  most  common  state  it  is  placed  vertically, 
one  of  its  faces  is  anterior,  the  other  posterior ; in  cer- 
tain cases  it  becomes  horizontal : it  has  then  a supe- 
rior and  inferior  aspect,  and  its  free  edge  corresponds 
to  the  concavity  of  the  pharynx.  This  last  posi- 
tion is  determined  by  the  contraction  of  the  elevating 
tjnuscles. 

The  pharynx  is  a vestibule  into  which  open  the  nos- 
trils, the  Eustachian  tubes,  the  mouth,  the  larynx,  and 
the  oesophagus,  and  which  performs  very  important 
functions  in  the  production  of  voice,  in  respiration, 
hearing,  and  digestion. 

The  pharynx  extends  from  top  to  bottom,  from  the 
basilar  process  of  the  occipital  bone,  to  which  it 
is  attached,  to  the  level  of  the  middle  part  of  the 
neck.  % 

Its  transverse  dimensions  are  determined  by  the  os 
hyoides,  the  larynx,  and  the  pterygo-maxillary  apo- 
neurosis, to  which  it  is  fixed.  The  mucous  membrane 
which  covers  it  interiorly  is  remarkable  for  the  deve- 
lopement  of  its  veins,  which  form  a very  apparent 
plexus.  Round  this  membrane  is  the  muscular  layer, 
the  circular  fibres  of  which  form  the  three  constrictor 
muscles  of  the  pharynx,  the  longitudinal  fibres  of 
which  are  represented  by  the  stylo-pharyngeus  and 
constrictores  isthmi  faucium.  The  contractions  of 
these  different  muscles  are  not  generally  subject  to  the 
will. 

The  oesophagus  is  the  immediate  continuation  of  the 
pharynx,  and  is  prolonged  as  far  as  the  stomach,  where 
it  terminates.  Its  form  is  cylindrical ; it  is  united  to 
the  surrounding  parts  by  a slack  and  extending  cellu- 
lar tissue,  which  gives  way  to  its  dilatation  and  its 
motions.  To  penetrate  into  the  abdomen  the  oesopha- 
gus passes  between  the  pillars  of  the  diaphragm,  with 
which  it  is  closely  united.  The  mucous  membrane  of 
the  oesophagus  is  white,  thin,  and  smooth  ; it  forms 
longitudinal  folds  very  proper  for  favouring  the  dilata- 
tion of  the  canal.  Above  it  is  confounded  with  that 
of  the  pharynx. 

There  are  found  in  it  a great  number  of  mucous  fol- 
licles, and  at  its  surface  there  are  perceived  the  orifices 
of  many  excretive  canals  of  the  mucous  glands. 

The  muscular  layer  of  the  oesophagus  is  thick,  its 
tissue  is  denser  than  that  of  the  pharynx  ; the  longitu- 
dinal fibres  are  the  most  external  and  the  least  nume- 
rous; the  circular  are  placed  in  the  interior  and  are 
very  numerous. 

Round  the  pectoral  and  inferior  portion  of  the  oeso- 
phagus, the  two  nerves  of  the  eighth  pair  form  a plexus 
which  embraces  the  canal,  and  sends  many  filaments 
into  it. 

The  contraction  of  the  oesophagus  takes  place  with- 
out the  participation  of  the  will. 

Mechanism  of  Deglutition.  Deglutition  is  divided 
into  three  periods.  In  the  first,  the  food  passes  from 
the  mouth  to  the  pharynx ; in  the  second,  it  passes  the 
opening  of  the  glottis,  that  of  the  nasal  canals,  and 


arrives  at  the  oesophagus ; in  the  the  third  it  pas  set 
•through  this  tube  and  enters  the  stomach. 

Let  us  suppose  the  most  common  case,  that  irt 
which  we  swallow  at  several  times  the  food  which  is 
in  the  mouth,  and  according  as  mastication  takes 
place. 

As  soon  as  a certain  quantity  of  food  is  sufficiently 
chewed,  it  is  placed,  by  the  effects  of  the  motions  of 
mastication,  in  part  upon  the  superior  face  of  the 
tongue,  without  the  necessity,  as  some  think,  of  its 
being  collected  by  the  point  of  the  tongue  from  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  mouth.  Mastication  then  stops; 
the  tongue  is  raised  and  applied  to  the  roof  of  the 
palate,  in  succession,  from  the  point  towards  the  base. 
The  portion  of  food,  or  the  alimentary  bolus  placed 
upon  its  superior  surface,  having  no  other  way  to  es- 
cape from  the  force  that  presses,  is  directed  towards 
the  pharynx ; it  soon  meets  the  velum  of  the  palate 
applied  to  the  base  of  the  tongue  and  raises  it ; the 
velum  becomes  horizontal,  so  as  to  make  a continua- 
tion of  the  palate.  The  tongue,  continuing  to  press 
the  food,  would  carry  it  towards  the  nasal  canals,  if 
the  velum  did  not  prevent  this  by  the  tension  that  it 
receives  from  the  external  peristaphyline  muscles,  and 
particularly  by  the  contraction  of  its  pillars ; it  thus 
becomes  capable  of  resisting  the  action  of  the  tongue, 
and  of  contributing  to  the  direction  of  the  food  to- 
wards the  pharynx. 

The  muscles  which  determine  more  particularly  the 
application  of  the  tongue  io  the  top  of  the  palate,  and 
to  the  velum  of  the  palate,  are  the  proper  muscles  of 
the  organ,  aided  by  the  mylo-hyoideus.  Here  the  first 
time  of  deglutition  terminates.  Its  motions  are  volun- 
tary, except  those  of  the  velum  of  the  palate.  The 
phenomena  happen  slowly  and  in  succession;  they 
are  few  and  easily  noticed. 

The  second  period  is  not  the  same ; in  it  the  pheno 
mena  are  simultaneous,  multiplied,  and  are  produced 
with  such  .promptitude,  that  Boerhaave  considered 
them  as  a sort  of  convulsion. 

The  space  that  the  alimentary  bolus  passes  through 
in  this  time  is  very  short,  for  it  passes  only  from  the 
middle  to  the  inferior  part  of  the  pharynx  ; but  it  was 
necessary  to  avoid  the  opening  of  the  glottis  and  that 
of  the  nasal  canals,  where  its  presence  would  be  inju- 
rious. Besides,  its  passage  ought  to  be  sufficiently 
rapid,  in  order  that  the  communication  between  the 
larynx  and  the  external  air  may  not  be  interrupted, 
except  for  an  instant. 

Let  us  see  how  nature  has  arrived  at  this  important 
result.  The  alimentary  bole  no  sooner  toiiches  the 
pharynx  than  every  thing  is  in  motion.  First,  the 
pharynx  contracts,  embraces  and  retains  the  bole  ; the 
velum  of  the  palate,  drawn  down  by  its  pillars,  acts  in 
the  same  way.  On  the  other  liand,  and  in  the  same 
instant,  the  base  of  the  tongue,  the  os  hyoides,  the 
larynx,  are  raised  and  carried  forward  to  meet  the 
bole,  in  order  to  render  its  passage  more  rapid  over  the 
opening  of  the  glottis.  While  the  os  hyoides,  and  the 
larynx  are  raised,  they  approach  each  other,  that  is, 
the  superior  edge  of  the  thyroid  cartilage  engages  it- 
self behind  the  body  of  the  os  hyoides : the  epiglottic 
gland  is  pushed  back  ; the  epiglottis  descends,  inclines 
downwards  and  backwards,  so  as  to  cover  the  en- 
trance of  the  larynx.  The  cricoid  cartilage  makes  a 
motion  of  rotation  upon  the  inferior  horns  of  the  thy- 
roid, whence  it  results  that  the  entrance  of  the  larynx 
becomes  oblique  downwards  and  backwards.  The 
bole  slides  along  its  surface,  and  being  always  pressed 
by  the  contraction  of  the  pharynx  and  of  the  velum  of 
the  palate,  it  arrives  at  the  oesophagus. 

It  is  not  long  since  the  position  that  the  epiglottis 
takes  in  this  place  was  considered  as  the  only  obstacle 
opposed  to  the  entrance  of  the  food  into  the  larynx,  at 
the  instant  of  deglutition;  but  Dr.  Magendie  has 
shown,  by  a series  of  experiments,  that  this  cause 
ought  to  be  considered  as  only  accessary.  In  fact,  the 
epiglottis  maybe  entirely  taken  away  from  an  animal 
without  deglutition  suffering  any  injury  from  it.  What 
is  the  reason,  then,  that  no  part  of  the  food  is  intro- 
duced into  the  larynx  the  instant  that  we  swallow  \ 
The  reason  is  this.  In  the  instant  that  the  larynx  is 
raised  and  engaged  behind  the  os  hyoides,  the  glottis 
shuts  with  the  greatest  closeness.  This  motion  is  pro- 
duced by  the  same  muscles  that  press  the  glottis  in  the 
production  of  the  voice;  so  that  if  an  animal  has  the 
recurrent3  and  nerver  of  the  larynx  divided,  while  tha 


DEt 


DEL 


epiglottis  is  untouched,  its  deglutition  is  rendered  very 
difficult,  because  the  principal  cause  is  removed  which 
opposes  the  introduction  of  food  into  the  glottis. 

Immediately  after  the  alimentary  bole  has  passed 
the  glottis,  the  larynx  descends,  the  epiglottis  is  raised, 
and  the  glottis  is  opened  to  give  passage  to  the  air. 

After  what  has  been  said,  it  is  easy  to  conceive  why 
the  food  reaches  the  oesophagus  without  entering  any 
of  the  openings  which  end  in  the  pharynx.  The  velum 
of  the  palate,  which,  in  contracting,  embraces  the  pha- 
rynx, protects  the  posterior  nostrils,  and  the  orifices  of 
the  Eustachian  tubes ; the  epiglottis,  and  particularly 
the  motion  by  which  the  glottis  shuts,  preserves  the 
larynx. 

Thus,  the  second  period  of  deglutition  is  accom- 
plished ; by  the  etfects  of  which  the  alimentary  bole 
passes  the  pharynx,  and  is  engaged  in  the  superior  part 
of  the  oesophagus.  All  the  phenomena  which  concur 
in  it  take  place  simultaneously,  and  with  great  prompti- 
tude : they  are  not  subject  to  the  will ; they  are  then 
different  in  many  respects  from  the  phenomena  that 
belong  to  the  first  period. 

The.third  period  of  deglutition  is  that  which  has 
been  studied  with  the  least  care,  probably  on  account 
of  the  situation  of  the  oesophagus,  which  is  difficult  to 
be  observed  except  in  its  cervical  portion. 

The  phenomena  which  are  connected  with  it  are  not 
complicated.  The  pharynx,  by  its  contraction,  presses 
the  alimentary  bole  into  the  oesophagus  with  sufficient 
force  to  give  a suitable  dilatation  to  the  superior  part 
of  this  organ.  Excited  by  the  presence  of  the  bolus, 
its  superior  circular  fibres  very  soon  contract,  and 
press  the  food  towards  the  stomach,  thereby  producing 
the  distension  of  those  more  inferior.  These  contract 
in  their  turn,  and  the  same  thing  continues  in  succes 
sion  until  the  bolus  arrives  at  the  stomach.  In  the 
upper  two-thirds  of  the  oesophagus,  the  relaxation  of 
the  circular  fibres  follows  immediately  the  contraction 
by  which  (they  displaced  the  alimentary  bolus.  It  is 
not  the  same  with  the  inferior  third ; this  remains  some 
moments  contracted  after  the  introduction  of  food  into 
the  stomach. 

All  the  extent  of  the  mucous  surface  that  the  ali- 
mentary bolus  passes  in  the  three  periods  of  degluti- 
tion is  lubricated  by  an  abundant  mucosity.  In  the 
way  that  the  bolus  passes,  it  presses  more  or  less  the 
follicles  that  it  meets  in  its  passage,  it  empties  them  of 
the  fluid  that  they  contain,  and  slides  more  easily  upon 
the  mucous  membrane.  We  remark  that  in  those 
places  where  the  bolus  passes  more  rapidly,  and  is 
pressed  with  greater  force,  the  organs  for  secreting  mu- 
cus are  much  more  abundant.  For  example,  in  the 
narrow  space  where  the  second  period  of  deglutition 
takes  place,  there  are  found  the  tonsils,  the  fungous 
papillae  of  the  base  of  the  tongue,  the  follicles  of  the 
velum  of  the  palate,  and  the  uvula,  those  of  the  epi- 
glottis, and  the  arytenoid  glands.  In  this  case  the 
saliva  and  the  mucosity  fulfil  uses  analogous  to  those 
of  the  synovia. 

The  mechanism  by  which  we  swallow  the  succeed- 
ing mouthfuls  of  food  does  not  differ  from  that  which 
we  have  explained. 

Nothing  is  more  easy  than  the  performance  of  deglu- 
tition, and,  nevertheless,  all  the  acts  of  which  it  is 
composed  are  beyond  the  influence  of  the  will  and  of 
instinct.  We  cannot  make  an  empty  motion  of  deglu- 
tition. If  the  substance  contained  in  the  mouth  is  not 
sufficiently  chewed,  if  it  has  not  the  form,  the  consist- 
ence, and  the  dimensions  of  the  alimentary  bolus,  if 
the  motions  of  mastication  which  immediately  pre- 
cede deglutition  have  not  been  made,  we  will  fre- 
quently find  it  impossible  to  swallow  it,  whatever 
efforts  we  make.  How  many  people  do  we  not  find 
who  cannot  swallow  a pill,  or  medicinal  bolus,  and 
who  are  obliged  to  fall  upon  other  methods  to  intro- 
duce it  into  the  oesophagus  1 — Magendie. 

DE'GMUS.  (From  Sanvu),  to  bite.)  A biting  pain 
in  the  orifice  of  the  stomach. 

DEHISCENTIA.  (From  dehisco,  to  gape  wide.) 
A spitting,  or  bursting  open.  Applied  to  capsules, 
anthers,  &c.  of  plants. 

DEIDIER,  Anthony,  was  son  of  a surgeon  of 
Montpelier.  Having  graduated  in  medicine  in  1601,  he 
was  six  years  after  made  professor  of  chemistry.  In 
1732,  being  appointed  physician  to  the  galleys,  he  went 
to  Marseilles,  where  he  died  in  1746.  He  published, 
among  many  other  works  on  different  branches  of  me- 


dicine, “ Experiments  on  the  Bile,  and  the  Bodies  of 
those  who  died  of  the  Plague,”  which  occurred  while 
he  was  at  Marseilles.  He  states  that  he  tried  mercu- 
rial inunctions,  but  they  had  no  effect  on  the  disease. 
There  are  three  volumes  of  consultations  and  obser- 
vations by  him  deserving  of  perusal.  The  rest  of  his 
works  are  scarcely  now  referred  to. 

Deino'sis.  (From  Seivou,  to  exaggerate.)  An  en- 
largement of  the  supercilia. 

DEJE'CTIO.  A discharge  of  any  excrementitious 
matter ; generally  applied  to  the  faeces : hence  dejectio 
alvina. 

DEJECTO'RIA.  (From  dejicio , to  cast  out.) 
Purging  medicines. 

Delachrymati'va.  (From  de,  and  lachryma,  a 
tear.)  Medicines  which  dry  the  eyes,  first  purging 
them  of  tears. 

DELA'PSIO.  (From  delabor , to  slip  down.)  A 
falling  down  of  any  part,  as  the  anus,  uterus,  or  intes- 
tines. 

DELETERIOUS.  (Deleterius  ; from  Sr/Xeu,  to 
hurt  or  injure.)  Of  a poisonous  nature;  as  opium, 
hemlock,  henbane,  &c. 

[Deliquesce.  To  deliquesce  is  that  action  by 
which  certain  bodies  become  liquid  by  absorbing  mois- 
ture from  the  atmosphere.  Potash  for  instance  by  ex- 
posure to  the  air  will  absorb  so  much  water  as  to 
change  from  a solid  to  a fluid  state.  This  is  common 
to  many  saline  bodies.  A.l 

DELIQUESCENCE.  Deliquation,  or  the  spon- 
taneous assumption  of  the  fluid  state  of  certain  saline 
bodies,  when  left  exposed  to  the  air,  in  consequence 
of  their  attracting  water  from  it. 

DELI'QUIUM.  {Deliquium ; from  delinquo , to 
leave.)  A fainting.  See  Syncope. 

DELI'RIUM.  (From  deliro , to  rave.)  A febrile 
symptom,  consisting  in  the  person’s  acting  or  talking 
unreasonably.  It  is  to  be  carefully  distinguished  from 
an  alienation  of  the  mind,  without  fever. 

DELIVERY.  See  Parturition. 

Deloca'tio.  (From  de,  from,  and  locus , a place.) 
A dislocation. 

DELPHIA.  See  Delphinia. 

DELPHINE.  See  Delphinia. 

DELPHINIA.  Delphia.  Delphine.  A new  vege- 
table alkali,  recently  discovered  by  Lasseigne  and 
Feneulle,  in  Stavesacre.  See  Dilphinium  staphysa- 
gria. 

DELPHINIC  ACID  fleidum  delphimcum.  The 
name  of  an  acid,  extracted  from  the  oil  of  the  dolphin. 
It  resembles  a volatile  oil ; has  a light  lemon  colour, 
and  a strong  aromatic  odour,  analogous  to  that  of  ran- 
cid butter.  Its  taste  is  pungent,  and  its  vapour  has  a 
sweetened  taste  of  aether.  It  is  slightly  soluble  in  wa- 
ter, and  very  soluble  in  alkohol.  The  latter  solution 
strongly  reddens  litmus.  100  parts  of  delphinic  acid 
neutralize  a quantity  of  base,  which  contains  9 of 
oxygen,  whence  its  prime  equivalent  appears  to  be 
11.11. 

DELPHINITE.  See  Epidote. 

DELPHI'NIUM  (From  5e\<Jnvos , the  dolphin.) 
Larkspur ; so  called  from  the  likeness  of  its  flower  to 
the  dolphin’s  head.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Polyandria;  Order,  Tri- 
gynia. 

[“Delphinium  or  Larkspur.  The  botanical  al- 
liance of  the  larkspur  of  our  gardens  with  aconite 
and  some  other  poisonous  plants,  would  justify,  a pri- 
ori, a belief,  that  it  possesses  active  properties.  This 
is  found  on  experiment  to  be  the  case.  A tincture 
formed  by  infusing  an  ounce  of  the  bruised  seeds  in 
a pound  of  spirit  has  been  found  an  antispasmodic  in 
asthma,  and  an  active  diuretic  in  dropsy.  The  dose  is 
from  ten  to  twenty  drops.  Larger  doses  are  liable  to 
nauseate,  and  would,  not  improbably,  produce  narco- 
tic symptoms.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Delphinium  consolida.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Consolida  regalis.  Calcatrippa.  Delphinium— 
nectariis  monophyllis , caule  subdiviso , of  Linnaeus. 
Many  virtues  have  been  attributed  to  this  plant.  The 
flowers  are  bitter,  and  a water  distilled  from  them  is 
recommended  in  ophthalmia.  The  herb  has  been  ad- 
ministered in  calculous  cases,  obstructed  menses,  and 
visceral  diseases. 

Delphinium  staphisagria.  The  systematic  name 
of  stavesacre.  Staphisagria ; Staphis ; Pedicularia  ; 
Delphinium — nectariis  tetraphyllis  petals  brevioribus, 


DEL 


foliis  palmatis , lobis  obtusis , of  Linnaeus.  The  seeds, 
which  are  the  only  parts  directed  for  medicinal  use, 
are  usually  imported  here  from  Italy ; they  are  large, 
rough,  of  an  irregular  triangular  figure,  and  of  a black- 
ish colour  on  the  outside,  but  yellowish  within ; their 
smell  is  disagreeable,  and  somewhat  foetid ; to  the  taste 
they  are  very  bitter,  acrid,  and  nauseous.  It  was  for- 
merly employed  as  a masticatory,  but  is  now  con- 
fined to  external  use,  in  some  kinds  of  cutaneous  erup- 
tions, but  more  especially  for  destroying  lice  and  other 
insects : hence,  by  the  vulgar,  it  is  called  louse-wort. 

A new  vegetable  alkali  has  lately  been  discovered 
in  this  plant  by  Lasseigne  and  Feneulle.  It  is  thus 
obtained : 

The  seeds,  deprived  of  their  husks,  and  ground,  are 
to  be  boiled  in  a small  quantity  of  distilled  water,  and 
then  pressed  in  a cloth.  The  decoction  is  to  be  filter- 
ed, and  boiled  for  a few  minutes  with  pure  magnesia. 
It  must  then  be-refiltered,  and  the  residuum  left  on  the 
filter  is  to  be  well  washed,  and  then  boiled  with  highly 
rectified  alkohol,  which  dissolves  out  the  alkali.  By 
evaporation,  a white  pulverulent  substance,  presenting 
a few  crystalline  points,  is  obtained. 

It  may  also  be  procured  by  the  action  of  dilute  sul- 
phuric acid,  on  the  bruised  but  unshelled  seeds.  The 
lolution  of  sulphate  thus  formed,  is  precipitated  by 
subcarbonate  of  potassa.  Alkohol  separates  from 
this  precipitate  the  vegetable  alkali  in  an  impure  state. 

Pure  deiphinia  obtained  by  the  first  process,  is  crys- 
talline while  wet,  but  becomes  opake  on  exposure  to 
air.  Its  tasttf  is  bitter  and  acrid.  When  heated  it 
melts ; and  on  cooling  becomes  hard  and  brittle  like 
resin.  If  more  highly  heated,  it  blackens  and  is  de- 
composed. Water  dissolves  a very  small  portion  of 
it.  Alkohol  and  tether  dissolve  it  very  readily.  The 
alkoholic  solution  renders  syrup  of  violets  green,  and 
restores  the  blue  tint  of  litmus  reddened  by  an  acid. 
It  forms  soluble  neutral  salts  with  acids.  Alkalies 
precipitate  the  deiphinia  in  a white  gelatinous  state, 
like  alumina. 

Sulphate  of  deiphinia  evaporates  in  the  air,  does  not 
crystallize,  but  becomes  a transparent  mass  like  gum. 
It  dissolves  in  alkohol  and  water,  and  its  solution  has 
a bitter  acrid  taste.  In  the  voltaic  circuit  it  is  de- 
composed, giving  up  its  alkali  at  the  negative  pole. 

Nitrate  of  deiphinia,  when  evaporated  to  dryness,  is 
a yellow  crystalline  mass.  If  treated  with  excess  of 
nitric  acid,  it  becomes  converted  into  a yellow  matter, 
little  soluble  in  water,  but  soluble  in  boiling  alkohol, 
This  solution  is  bitter,  is  not  precipitated  by  potassa, 
ammonia,  or  lime-water,  and  appears  to  contain  no 
nitric  acid,  though  itself  is  not  alkaliue.  It  is  not  de- 
stroyed by  further  quantities  of  acid,  nor  does  it  form 
oxalic  acid.  Strychnia  and  morphia  take  a red  colour 
from  li'tric  acid,  but  deiphinia  never  does.  The  muri- 
ate is  very  soluble  in  water. 

The  acetate  of  deiphinia  does  not  crystallize,  but 
forms  a hard  transparent  mass,  bitter  and  acrid,  and 
readily  decomposed  by  cold  sulphuric  acid.  The  oxa- 
late forms  small  white  plates,  resembling  in  taste  the 
preceding  salts. 

Deiphinia,  calcined  with  oxide  of  copper,  gave  no 
other  gas  than  carbonic  acid.  It  exists  in  the  seeds  of 
the  stavesacre,  in  combination  with  malic  acid,  and 
associated  with  the  following  principles:  1.  A brown 
bitter  principle,  precipitable  by  acetate  of  lead.  2. 
Volatile  oil.  3.  Fixed  oil.  4.  Albumen.  5.  Animal- 
ized  matter.  6.  Mucus.  7.  Saccharine  mucus.  8. 
Yellow  bitter  principle,  not  precipitable  by  acetate  of 
ead.  9.  Mineral  salts. — Annales  de  Chimio  et  de  Phy- 
sique, vol.  xii.  p.  358. 

DE'LPHYS.  AeX^uy.  The  uterus,  or  pudendum 
muliebre. 

DE'LTA.  (The  Greek  letter,  A.)  The  external 
pudendum  muliebre  is  so  called,  from  the  triangular 
shape  of  its  hair? 


DELTOI'DES.  (From  $c\ra,  the  Greek  letter  A, 
and  ctSos , a likeness;  shaped  like  the  Greek  delta.)  1. 
A muscle  of  the  superior  extremity,  situated  on  the 
shoulder.  Sous-acromio-clavi-humeral  of  Dumas.  It 
arises  exactly  opposite  to  the  trapezius,  from  one-third 
part  of  the  clavicle,  from  the  acromion  and  spine  of 
the  scapula,  and  is  inserted,  tendinous,  into  the  middle 
of  the  os  humeri,  which  bone  it  lifts  up  directly ; and 
it  assists  with  the  supraspinatus  and  coracobrachialis 
n all  the  actions  of  the  humerus,  except  the  depres- 
sion; it  being  convenient  that  the  arm  should  be 

T 


DEN 

raised  and  sustained,  in  order  to  its  moving  on  any 
side. 

2.  A leaf  is  so  called,  folium  deltoides , which  is 
trowel  shaped,  or  like  the  letter  delta,  having  three  an- 
gles, of  which  the  terminal  one  is  much  further  from 
the  base  than  the  lateral  ones ; as  in  Chenopodium  bo- 

nus-henricus. 

DEME'NTIA.  (From  de,  and  mens,  without  mind.) 
Absence  of  intellect ; madness;  fatuity. 

DEMERSUS.  A leaf  which  is  naturally  under  wa- 
ter, and  different  from  those  above,  is  so  called ; folia 
immersa , and  submersa,  are  the  same  as  demersa.  See 
Natans. 

DEMULCENT.  ( Demulcens  ; from  demulceo , to 
soften.)  Medicines  suited  to  obviate  and  prevent  the 
action  of  acrid  and  stimulant  matters;  and  that  not  by 
correcting  or  changing  their  acrimony,  but  by  involving 
it  in  a mild  and  viscid  matter,  which  prevents  it  from 
acting  upon  the  sensible  parts  of  our  bodies,  or  by  cover- 
ing the  surface  exposed  to  their  action. 

Where  these  substances  are  directly  applied  to  the 
parts  affected,  it  is  easy  to  perceive  how  benefit  may 
be  derived  from  their  application.  But  where  they 
are  received  by  the  medium  of  the  stomach,  into  the 
circulating  system,  itlias  been  supposed  that  they  can  be 
of  no  utility,  as  they  must  lose  that  viscidity  on  which 
their  lubricating  quality  depends.  Hence  it  has  been 
concluded  that  they  can  be  of  no  service  in  gonorrhoea, 
and  some  similar  affections.  It  is  certain,  however, 
says  J.  Murray,  in  his  Elements  of  Materia  Medica 
and  Pharmacy,  that  many  substances  which  undergo 
the  process  of  digestion  are  afterward  separated,  in 
their  entire  state,  from  the  blood,  by  particular  secret- 
ing organs,  especially  by  the  kidneys;  and  it  is  possi- 
ble, that  mucilaginous  substances,  which  are  the  prin- 
cipal demulcents,  may  be  separated  in  this  manner. 
There  can  be  no  doubt,  however,  but  that  a great  share 
of  the  relief  demulcents  afford,  in  irritation  or  inflam- 
mation of  the  urinary  passages,  is  owing  to  the  large 
quantities  of  water  in  which  they  are  diffused,  by 
which  the  urine  is  rendered  less  stimulating  from  dilu- 
tion. In  general,  demulcents  may  be  considered  merely 
as  substances  less  stimulating  than  the  fluids  usually 
applied. 

Catarrh,  diarrhoea,  dysentery,  calculus,  and  gonor- 
rhoea, are  the  diseases  in  which  demulcents  are  em- 
ployed. As  they  are  medicines  of  no  great  power, 
they  may  be  taken  in  as  large  quantities  as  the  stomach 
can  bear. 

The  particular  demulcents  may  be  reduced  to  the 
two  divisions  of  mucilages  and  expressed  oils.  The 
principal  demulcents  are,  the  acacia  vera,  astragalus, 
tragacanthe,  linum  usitatissimum,  altha:a  officinalis, 
malva,  sylvestris,  glycyrrhiza  glabra,  cycas  circinalis, 
orchis  mascula,  maranta  arundinacea,  triticuin  hyber- 
num,  iclithyocolla,  olea  Europsea,  amygdalus  commu- 
nis, cetaceum,  and  cera. 

[Dendritic.  (From  Sevdpov,  a tree.)  A term  used 
in  mineralogy  to  designate  those  appearances  fre- 
quently found  in  minerals  resembling  trees  or  clusters 
of  trees.  A.l 

DENDROEI'BANUS.  (From  SevSpov,  a tree,  and 
oXtfiavoy,  frankincense.)  Frankincense-tree.  See  Ros- 
marinus officinalis. 

DENS.  {Dens,  tis.  m. ; quasi  edens ; from  edo,  to 
eat,  or  from  oSovg,  oSov“]os.) 

1.  A tooth.  See  Teeth. 

2.  Many  herbs  have  this  specific  name,  from  their 
fancied  resemblance  to  the  tooth  of  some  animal , 
as  Dens  leonis,  the  dandelion;  Dens  canis,  dog’s 
tooth,  &c. 

Dens  caninus.  See  Teeth. 

Dens  cusiudatus.  See  Teeth. 

Dens  incisor.  See  Teeth. 

Dens  lacteus.  See  Teeth,  and  Dentition. 

Dens  leonis.  See  Leontodon  Taraxacum. 

Dens  molaris.  See  Teeth. 

DENTA'GRA.  {Dcntagra,  o^ovraypa]  fromoJovy, 
a tooth,  and  aypa,  a seizure.)  1.  The  toothache. 

2.  An  instrument  for  drawing  the  teeth. 

DENTA'RIA.  ( Dcntaria ; from  dens,  a tooth : so 
called  because  its  root  is  denticulated.)  See  Plumbago 
europcea. 

DENTARPA'GA.  (From  odov y,  a tooth,  and 
apna^w,  to  fasten  upon.)  An  instrument  for  drawing 
of  teeth. 

Dentata.  See  Dentatus. 

389 


DEP 


DENT  A'TUS.  (From  dens , a tooth ; from  its  tooth- 
.ike  process.)  1.  The  second  vertebra  of  the  neck. 
Dentata;  Epistrophaeus.  It  differs  from  the  other 
cervical  vetebrse,  by  having  a tooth-like  process  at  the 
upper  part  of  the  body.  See  Vertebra. 

2.  Toothed  : applied  to  roots,  leaves,  petals,  &c.  which 
are  beset  with  projecting,  horizontal,  rather  distant 
teeth  of  its  own  substance ; as  in  the  leaf  of  Atriplex 
lacinata,  and  the  perianthium  of  Marrubium  vulgare , 
and  Ereca  denticulate , and  the  petals  of  the  Silene 
lucitanica.  The  Ophris  corallorhiza  lias  a toothed 
root. 

Dentella’ria.  (From  dentella , a little  tooth ; so 
called  because  its  root  is  denticulated.)  The  herb 
tooth-wort.  See  Plumbago  europea. 

DENTLDU'CUM.  (From  dens , a tooth,  and  duco, 
to  draw.)  An  instrument  for  drawing  of  teeth. 

DENTIFRICE.  (Dentifrices;  from  dens,  a tooth, 
and  frigo , to  rub.)  A medicine  to  clean  the  teeth. 

DENITSCA'LPIUM.  (From  dens,  a tooth,  and 
sculpo , to  scrape.)  ‘ An  instrument  for  scaling  teeth. 

DENTITION.  ( Dentitio ; from  deniio,  to  breed 
teeth.)  Odontiasis ; Odontophica.  The  breeding  or 
cutting  of  the  teeth.  The  first  dentition  begins  about 
the  sixth  or  seventh  month,  and  the  teeth  are  termed 
the  primary  or  milk  teeth.  About  the  seventh  year, 
these  fall  out,  and  are  succeeded  by  others,  which  re- 
main during  life,  and  are  called  the  secondary  or  pe- 
rennial teeth.  The  last  dentition  takes  place  between 
the  ages  of  twenty  and  five-and-twenty,  when  the  four 
last  grinders  appear ; they  are  called  dentes  sapientie. 
See  also  Teeih.  ' 

Dentodu'cum.  See  Dentiduciim. 

Denudate  plante.  The.name  of  an  order  of  Lin- 
nseus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  embracing 
those  plants,  the  flowers  of  which  are  naked,  or  with- 
out a flower-cup. 

DENUDA'TIO.  (From  denudo,  to  make  bare.) 
The  laying  bare  any  .part ; usually  applied  to  a 
bone. 

DENUDATUS.  (From  denudo,  to  strip  naked.) 
Denude;  naked. 

DEOBSTRUENT.  (Deobstruens ; from  de,  and 
obstruo,  to  obstruct.)  A medicine  that  is  exhibited 
with  a view  of  removing  any  obstruction. 

DEOPPILA'NTIA.  (From  de,  and  oppilo , to  stop.) 
Deoppilativa.  Medicines  which  remove  obstructions. 

Departi'tio.  (From  de,  and  partior,  to  divide.) 
Separating  metals. 

Depzrdi’tio.  (From  deperdo,  to  lose.)  Abortion, 
or  the  undue  loss  of  the  foetus. 

Dkpeti'go.  (From  de,  and  petigo,  a running  scab.) 
A ringworm,  tetter,  scurf,  or  itch,  where  the  skin  is 
rough. 

DEPHLEGM A'TION.  (Dephlegmatio ; from  de, 
and  phlegma,  phlegm.)  The  operation  of  rectifying 
or  freeing  spirits  from  their  watery  parts,  or  any  me- 
thod by  which  bodies  are  deprived  of  their  water. 

DEPIILOGISTICATED.  A term  of  the  old  che- 
mistry, implying  deprived  of  phlogiston  or  the  inflam- 
mable principle. 

Dephlogisticatcd  air.  See  Oxygen  gas. 

Dephlogisticatcd  muriatic  acid.  See  Chlorine. 

DEPILATORY.  ( Depilatorius ; from  de,  of,  and 
piles,  the  hair.)  Any  application  which  removes  the 
hairs  from  any  part  of  the  body;  thus,  a pitch  cap 
pulls  the  hairs  of  the  head  out  by  the  roots. 

[A  depilatory  ointment  is  sometimes  used  to  remove 
hairs  from  inconvenient  places.  The  French  call  it 
Fate  depilatoire , a depilatory  paste.  It  is  made  with 
quick  lime,  lapis  calaminaris,  and  arsenic,  intimately 
united  and  made  into  a thin  paste  writh  a little  water, 
and  a thin  coat  spread  upon  the  surface.  The  hairs 
are  removed  by  the  action  of  the  arsenic  as  a caustic, 
but  its  action  is . modified  by  the  other  ingredi- 
ents. A.] 

Deplu'matio.  (From  de,  and  pluma, a feather.)  A 
disease  of  the  eyelids,  which  causes  the  hair  to  fall  off. 

DEPREHE'NSIO.  (From  deprekendo , to  catch  un- 
awares.) The  epilepsy  is  so  called,  from  the  sudden- 
ness with  which  persons  are  seized  with  it. 

DEPRESSION.  ( Depressio ; from  deprimo,  to 

press  down.)  When  the  bones  of  the  skull  are  forced 
inwards  by  fracture,  they  are  said  to  be  depressed. 

DEPRE'SSOR.  (From  deprimo , to  press  down.) 
A muscle  is  so  termed,  which  depresses  the  part  on 
which  it  acts. 

290 


DES 

Depressor  ale  nasi.  See  Depressor  labii  supe- 
rions aleque  nasi. 

Depressor  anguli  oris.  A muscle  of  the  mouth 
and  lip,  situated  below  the  under  lip.  Triangularis, 
of  Winslow.  Depressor  labiorum  communis,  of  Doug- 
las. Depressor  labiorum,  of  Cowper.  Sous-maxillo- 
labial  of  Dumas.  It  arises  broad  and  fleshy,  from  the 
lower  edge  of  the  lower  jaw,  near  the  chin ; and  is  in- 
serted into  the  angle  of  the  mouth,  which  it  pulis 
downwards. 

Depressor  labii  inferioris.  A muscle  of  the 
mouth  and  lip.  Quadratus,  of  Winslow.  Depressor 
labii  inferioris  proprius,  of  Douglas  and  Cowper. 
Menton icr  labial,  of  Dumas.  It  pulls  the  under  lip 
and  skin  of  the  side  of  the  chin  downwards,  and  a 
little  outwards. 

Depressor  labii  supeIrioris  aleque  nasi.  A 
uiNScle  of  the  mouth  and  lip.  Depressor  aloe  nasi,  of 
Aibinus.  Incisivus  medius,  of  Winslow.  Depressor 
labii  superioris  proprius,  of  Douglas.  Constriclores 
alarum  nasi.,  ac  depressores  labii  superiores,  of  Cow- 
per. Maxillo-alveoli  nasal,  of  Dumas.  It  is  situated 
above  the  mouth,  draws  the  upper  lip  and  ala  nasi 
downwards  and  backwards.  It  arises,  thin  and  fleshy, 
from  the  superior  maxillary  bone,  immediately  above 
the  joining  of  the  gums,  with  the  two  incisor  teeth  and 
cuspidalus;  from  thence  it  runs  upwards,  and  is  in- 
serted, into  the  upper  lip  and  root  of  the  ala  of  the 
nose. 

Dfpressor  labii  superioris  proprius.  SeeDe- 
pressor  labii  superioris  aleeque  nasi. 

Depressor  labiorum.  communis.  See  Depressor 
anguli  oris. 

Depressor  oculi.  See  Rectus  inferior  oculi. 

DEPRESS  US.  Depressed ; flattened  vertically,  as 
the  leaves  of  the  Mescmbryanthemum  linguiforme. 
Folia  depressa  is  applied  also  to  radical  leaves  which 
are  pressed  close  to  the  ground,  as  is  seen  in  Plantago 
media;  but  when  applied  to  stem  leaves,  it  regards 
their  shape  only,  as  being  vertically  flattened  in  op- 
position to  compressa. 

DE'PRIMENS.  See  Rectus  inferior  oculi. 

DEPURA'NTIA.  (Depurans ; from  depuro,  to 
make  clean.)  Medicines  which  evacuate  impurities. 

DEPURA  TION.  Depuratio.  The  freeing  a liquor 
or  solid  from  its  foulness. 

DEPURATO'RIUS.  (From  de,  and  purus,  pure.) 
Depuritory:  applied  to  fevers,  which  terminate  in 
perspiration. 

DERBYSHIRE  SPAR.  A mineral  formed  of  cal- 
careous earth  with  fluoric  acid. 

DE  RIS.  (Aepts ; from  Septa,  to  excoriate.)  The 
skin. 

DERIVATION.  (Derivatio  ; from  derreo,  to  drain 
off)  The  doctrines  of  derivation  and  revulsion  talked 
of  by  the  ancients,  are  now,  in  their  sense  of  the  terms, 
wholly  exploded.  Derivation  means  the  drawing 
away  any  disease  from  its  original  seat  to  another 
part. 

DE'RMA.  A eppa.  The  skin.  See  Sim. 

DERMATO'DES.  (From  Seppa,  skin,  and  eiSoi,  a 
likeness.)  Resembling  skin,  or  leather;  applied  to  the 
dura  mater. 

DERMATOLO'GIA.  (From  Seppa,  the  skin,  and 
Xoyoj,  a discourse.)  A discourse  or  treatise  on  the 
skin. 

De'rtron.  (From  Septs,  skin.)  The  omentum, 
and  peritonaeum,  are  so  named,  from  their  skin-like 

consistence. 

DESAULT,  Peter,  was  a native  of  Bordeaux, 
where  he  graduated,  and  became  distinguished  as  a 
practitioner  in  medicine  about  the  beginning  of  the 
last  century.  He  was  author  of  some  popular  and 
useful  dissertations  on  medical  subjects.  In  syphilis 
he  maintained  that  a cure  could  be  effected  without 
salivation  ; and  in  calculous  complaints,  by  the  patient 
drinking  the  Bareges  water,  this  being  also  injected 
into  the  bladder ; but  it  probably  merely  palliated  the 
symptoms.  He  exposed  also  some  of  the  prevailing 
errors  concerning  hydrophobia;  as  that  the  patient 
barked  like  a dog,  and  had  a propensity  to  bite  his 
attendants.  The  precise  period  of  his  death  is  not 
mentioned. 

DESAULT,  Peter  Joseph,  was  chief  surgeon  to 
the  Hdtel-Dieu  at  Paris.  He  published  several  num- 
bers of  a surgical  journal,  in  1791,  Sec. ; also,  jointly 
with  Chopart,  in  1794,  “ A Treatise  on  Chirurgical 


DEU 


DIA 


Diseases,  and  the  Operations  required  in  their  Cure;” 
which  is  allowed  to  have  considerable  merit.  He 
attended  the  young  King  of  France,  Lewis  XVII.,  in 
the  temple ; and  died  under  suspicious  circumstances, 
shortly  before  his  royal  patient,  in  1795. 

DESCENSO'RIUM.  (From  descendo,  to  move 
downwards.)  A vessel  in  which  the  distillation  by 
descent  is  performed. 

DESCE'NSUS.  (From  descendo , to  move  down- 
wards.) The  same  chemists  call  it  a distillation  per 
descensum,  by  descent,  when  the  fire  is  applied  at  the 
top  and  round  the  vessel,  the  orifice  of  which  is  at  the 
bottom. 

DESICCATI'VE.  (Desicativus ; from  desicco,  to 
dry  up.)  An  application  to  dry  up  the  humours  and 
moisture  running  from  a wound  or  ulcer. 

DESIPIE'NTIA.  (From  desipio,  to  dote.)  A de- 
fect of  reason. 

DESIRE.  Will.  We  give  the  name  of  will  to  that 
modification  of  the  faculty  of  perception  by  which  we 
form  desires.  It  is  generally  the  effect  of  our  judgment ; 
but  what  is  remarkable,  our  happiness  or  our  misery 
are  necessarily  connected  with  it.  When  we  satisfy 
our  desires  we  are  happy ; but  we  are  miserable  if  our 
desires  be  not  fulfilled ; it  is  then  necessary  to  give 
such  a^lirection  to  our  desires  that  we  may  be  enabled 
to  obtain  happiness.  We  ought  not  to  desire  things 
which  cannot  be  obtained ; we  ought  to  avoid,  even 
with  greater  care,  those  things  which  are  hurtful;  for 
in  such  cases  we  must  be  unhappy,  whether  our  de- 
sires are  satisfied  or  not.  Morality  is  a science  which 
tends  to  give  the  best  possible  direction  to  our  desires. 

De'sme.  (From  deu),  to  bind  up.)  A bandage,  or 
ligature. 

Desmi'dion.  (From  Seoprj,  a handful.)  A small 
bundle,  or  little  bandage. 

De'smos.  (From  Ssco,  to  bind  up.)  1.  A bandage. 

2.  An  inflammatory  stricture  of  a joint,  after  luxa- 
tion. 

DE'SPUMATION.  ( Despumatio ; frojn  despumo , 
to  clarify.)  The  clarifying  a fluid,  or  separating  its 
foul  parts  frohi  it. 

DESQUAMATION.  (Desquamatio ; from  desqiia- 
mo , to  scale  off.)  The  separating  of  laminae,  or  scales, 
from  a bone.  Exfoliation. 

Desquamato'rium.  (From  desquamo,  to  scale  off.) 
A trepan,  or  instrument  to  take  a piece  out  of  the 
skull. 

DESTILLA'TION.  See  Distillation. 

DESUDA'TIO.  (From  desudo , to  sweat  much.) 
An  unnatural  and  morbid  sweating. 

Dkte'ntio.  (From  detineo , to  stop,  or  hinder.) 
Epilepsy  is  so  called,  from  the  suddenness  with  which 
the  patient  is  seized. 

DETERGENT.  (From  detergo , to  wipe  away.) 
1.  A medicine  which  cleanses  and  removes  such  vis- 
cid humours  as  adhere  to  and  obstruct  the  vessels. 

2.  An  application  that  clears  away  foulness  from 
ulcers. 

DETERMINATE'.  Applied  by  botanists  to  branches 
and  stems:  determinate  ramosus  is  abruptly  branched, 
when  each  branch,  after  terminating  in  flowers,  pro- 
duces a number  of  fresh  shoots,  in  a circular  order, 
from  just  below  the  origin  of  those  flowers.  The  term 
occurs  frequently  in  the  latter  publication  of  Linnteus, 
particularly  the  second  Mantissa;  but  he  does  not 
appear  to  have  any  where  explained  its  meaning. — 
Smith. 

DETONATION.  ( Detonatio ; from  detono , to 

make  a noise.)  A sudden  combustion  and  explosion. 

DETRACTOR.  (From  detraho , to  draw.)  Ap- 
plied to  a muscle,  the  office  of  which  is  to  dfaw  the 
part  to  which  it  Is  attached. 

DE'TRAHENS.  (From  detraho , to  draw.)  The 
name  of  a muscle,  the  office  of  which  is  to  draw  the 
part  it  is  attached  to. 

Detrahens  quadratus.  See  Platijsma  myoides. 

DETRU'SOR  URINA3.  (From  detrudo,  to  thrust 
out.)  1.  The  name  of  a muscle,  the  office  of  which  is 
to  squeeze  out  the  urine. 

2.  The  muscular  coat  of  the  urinary  bladder  was 
formerly  so  called. 

Deu'teri.  (From  Sevjepos,  second : because  it  is 
discharged  next  after  the  lcetus.)  The  secundines,  or 
after- birth. 

DEUTEROPA'THI A.  (From  Sev^epog , second,  and 
vsados,  a suffering.)  An  affection  or  suffering  by  con- 
i’ 2 


sent,  where  a second  part  suffers,  from  consent,  with 
the  part  originally  affected,  as  where  the  stomach  is 
disturbed  through  a wound  in  the  head. 

DEUTOXIDE.  See  Oxide. 

Deutoxide  of  azot.  See  Nitrogen. 

DEVENTER,  Henry,  was  born  in  Holland,  toward 
the  end  of  the  17th  century.  He  took  a degree  in  me- 
dicine, but  his  practice  was  principally  in  surgery,  and 
at  last  almost  confined  to  midwifery.  He  distin- 
guished hjmseif  much  by  his  improvements  in  this 
art,  as  well  as  by  his  mechanical  inventions  for  obvi- 
ating deformities  in  children.  He  published  some  ob- 
stetrical works  several  years  prior  to  his  death,  which 
occurred  in  1739 ; after  which  appeared  a Treatise  on 
the  Rickets  in  his  native  language,  of  which  Haller 
makes  favourable  mention.  , 

Devil’s  dung.  See  Ferula  assafcctida. 

Dewberry.  See  Blackberry.  ‘ ' 

DIA.  Ata.  Many  terms  in  medicine,  surgery,  and 
pharmacy,  commence  with  this  word,  when  they  sig- 
nify composition  and  mixture  ; as  Diacassia,  Diacas- 
toreum , &c. 

[Diabase.  The  Diabase  of  some  French  mineralo- 
gists is  the  greenstone  of  Werner  and  Jameson. 
Greenstone  abounds  in  the  United  States.  There  is  a 
long  ridge  of  this  kind  of  rock  in  Connecticut  running 
northward  from  New-Haven.  There  are  several 
ridges  of  this  formation  of  superincumbent  rocks  in 
New-Jersey.  The  most  remarkable  is  the  ridge  bor- 
dering the  Hudson  river  on  the  west  side,  running 
north  from  New-York  city  to  the  extent  of  thirty  or 
forty  miles,  and  known  by  the  common  appellation  of 
the  Palisado  Rocks.  There  is  a sublime  show  of  this 
kind  of  rock  on  the  south  side  of  Lake  Superior. 

Diabase  or  “ Greenstone  is  essentially  composed  of 
hornblende  and  felspar , in  the  state  of  grains,  or  some- 
times of  small  crystals.  The  proportions  are  somewhat 
various ; but  the  hornblende  predominates,  and  very 
frequently  gives  to  this  aggregate  more  or  less  of  a 
greenish  tinge,  especially  when  it  is  moistened.  Hence 
the  name  of  this  rock  (Greenstone).  Sometimes  the 
tinge  of  green  is  considerably  lively,  and  may  arise 
either  from  the  hornblende,  or  from  Epidote  dissemi- 
nated through  the  mass.  Sometimes  also  its  colour  is 
dark  gray,  or  grayish  black.  In  fine,  its  colour,  espe- 
cially at  the  surface,  is  often  modified  by  the  presence 
of  oxide  of  iron. 

“ This  rock  presents  a considerable  variety  of  as- 
pect, depending  on  the  general  structure,  or  on  the 
size,  proportion,  disposition,  and  more  or  less  intimate 
mixture  of  its  constituent  parts. 

“ In  some  of  the  more  common  varieties,  the  two 
ingredients  are  in  distinct  grains  of  considerable  size, 
like  those  of  granite ; and  the  foliated  structure  both 
of  the  hornblende  and  felspar  is  often  distinctly 
visible.  The  proportion  of  felspar  is  sometimes  very 
small. 

“ From  Greenstone  with  a coarse  granular  structure, 
to  those  varieties  whose  texture  is  so  finely  granular 
that  the  two  ingredients  can  scarcely  be  perceived, 
there  is  a gradual  passage,  exhibiting  every  interme- 
diate step.  Indeed  the  grains  are  sometimes  so  mi- 
nute, and  so  uniformly  and  intimately  mingled,  that 
the  mass  is  altogether  homogeneous,  and  the  different 
ingredients  are  hardly  perceptible,  even  with  a glass. 
Hence  the  texture  of  this  rock  is  sometimes  disfjnctly 
crystalline,  and  sometimes  almost  compact  and 
earthy. 

“ Greenstone,  like  basalt,  sometimes  presents  itself 
in  prisms , or  columns  of  various  sizes.  These  prisms 
may  have  from  three  to  seven  sides,  and  are  sometimes 
as  regular  as  those  of  basalt. 

“ The  general  aspect  of  Greenstone  is  sometimes 
much  diversified  by  the  foreign  ingredients,  which  it 
admits  into  its  composition.  Among  these  are  quartz, 
epidote,  mica,  talc,  carbonate  of  lime,  and  almost 
always  sulphuret  of  iron,  which  is  sometimes  mag- 
netic.— The  quartz  is,  in  some  cases,  abundant,  and 
seems  almost  to  take  the  place  of  felspar.  Iron  fre- 
quently enters  into  the  composition  of  this  rock.  Hence 
by  exposure  to  the  weather,  its  exterior  becomes 
brownish  or  reddish  brown ; and  sometimes  Green- 
stones are  gradually  decomposed.  * 

“ Many  Greenstones  are  susceptible  of  a polish  ; — 
and  that  variety  which  admits  epidote  into  its  compo- 
sition, often  forms  a very  beautiful  mineral,  when  po- 
lished, especially  if  it  be  porpbyritic.  Its  colour  is 

291 


DIA 


DIA 


often  a fine  dark  green,  resembling  serpentine.  The 
epidote,  either  crystallized  or  compact,  is  sometimes  in 
very  narrow  veins ; and  sometimes  it  is  uniformly  dis- 
seminated in  very  minute  grains.  In  other  cases,  the 
epidote  and  felspar  form  a kind  of  base,  containing 
acicular  crystals  of  hornblende  ; or  the  three  ingre- 
dients are  distinct,  as  in  granite.” — Cleavcland' s Mi- 
neral. A.] 

Diabe'cus.  (From  Sia6e6aiou),  to  strengthen  ; so 
called,  as  affording  the  chief  support  to  the  foot.)  The 
ankle-bone. 

DIABETES.  (From  5ia,  through,  and  (3aivu> , to 
pass.)  An  immoderate  flow  of  urine.  A genifs  of  dis- 
ease in  the  class  Neuroses , and  order  Spasmi  of  Cullen. 

There  are  two  species  in  this  complaint : 

1.  Diabetes  insipidus,  in  which  there  is  a supera- 
bundant discharge  of  limpid  urine,  of  its  usual  urinary 
taste. 

2.  Diabetes  mellitus , in  which  the  urine  is  very 
sweet,  and  contains  a great  quantity  of  sugar. 

Great  thirst,  with  a voracious  appetite,  gradual 
emaciation  of  the  whole  body,  and  a frequent  dis- 
charge of  urine,  containing  a large  proportion  of  sac- 
charine and  other  matter,  which  is  voided  in  a quan- 
tity even  exceeding  that  of  the  aliment  or  fluid  intro- 
duced, are  the  characteristics  of  this  disease.  Those 
of  a shattered  constitution,  and  those  who  are  in  the 
decline  of  life,  are  most  subject  to  its  attacks.  It  not 
unfrequently  attends  on  hysteria,  hypochondriasis, 
dyspepsia,  and  asthma : but  it  is  always  much  milder 
when  symptomatic,  than  when  it  appears  as  a primary 
affection. 

Diabetes  may  be  occasioned  by  the  use  of  strong  di- 
uretic medicines,  intemperance  of  life,  and  hard  drink- 
ing; excess  in  venery,  severe  evacuations,  or  by  any 
thing  that  tends  to  produce  an  impoverished  state  of 
the  blood,  or  general  debility.  It  has,  however,  taken 
place,  in  many  instances,  without  any  obvious  cause. 

That  which  immediately  gives  rise  to  the  disease, 
has  ever  been  considered  as  obscure,  and  various  the- 
ories have  been  advanced  on  the  occasion.  It  has  been 
usual  to  consider  diabetes  as  the  effect  of  relaxation  of 
the  kidneys,  or  as  depending  on  a general  colliquation 
of  the  fluids.  Dr.  Richter,  professor  of  medicine  in 
the  university  of  Gottingen,  supposes  the  disease  to  be 
generally  of  a spasmodic  nature,  occasioned  by  a sti- 
mulus acting  on  the  kidneys;  hence  a secretio  aucta 
urince , and  sometimes  perversa , is  the  consequence. 
Dr.  Darwin  thinks  that  it  is  owing  to  an  inverted  ac- 
tion of  the  urinary  branch  of  the  lymphatics;  which 
doctrine,  although  it  did  not  escape  the  censure  of  the 
best  anatomists  and  experienced  physiologists,  met, 
nevertheless,  with  a very  favourable  reception  on  its 
being  first  announced.  The  late  Dr.  Cullen  offered  it 
as  his  opinion,  that  the  proximate  cause  of  this  disease 
might  be  some  fault  in  the  assimilatory  powers,  or  in 
those  employed  in  converting  alimentary  matters  into 
the  proper  animal  fluids,  which  theory  has  since  been 
adopted  by  Dr.  Dobson,  and  still  later  by  Dr.  Rolla, 
surgeon-general  to  the  royal  artillery.  The  liver  has 
been  thought,  by  some,  to  be  the  chief  source  of  the 
disease ; but  diabetes  is  hardly  ever  attended  with  any 
affection  of  this  organ,  as  has  been  proved  by  frequent 
dissections ; and  when  observed,  it  is  to  be  considered 
as  accidental. 

The  primary  seat  of  the  disease  is,  however,  far 
from  being  absolutely  determined  in  favour  of  any 
hypothesis  yet  advanced ; and,  from  the  most  atten- 
tive consideration  of  all  the  circumstances,  the  weight 
of  evidence  appears  to  induce  the  majority  of  practi- 
tioners to  consider  diabetes  as  depending  on  a primary 
affection  of  the  kidneys. 

Diabetes  sometimes  comes  on  slowly  and  impercep- 
tibly, without  any  previous  disorder ; and  it  now  and 
then  arises  to  a considerable  degree,  and  subsists  long 
without  being  accompanied  with  evident  disorder  in 
any  particular  part  of  the  system;  the  great  thirs*„ 
which  always,  and  the  voracious  appetite  which  fre- 
quently occur  in  it,  being  often  the  only  remarkable 
symptoms;  but  it  more  generally  happens,  that  a con- 
siderable affection  of  the  stomach  precedes  the  coming 
on  of  the  disease;  and  that,  in  its  progress,  besides  the 
symptoms  already  mentioned,  there  is  a great  dryness 
in  the  skin,  with  a sense  of  weight  in  the  kidneys,  and 
a pain  in  the  ureters,  and  the  other  urinary  passages. 

Under  a long  continuance  of  the  disease,  the  body 
becomes  much  emaciated,  the  feet  oedematous,  great 


debility  arises,  the  pulse  is  frequent  and  small,  and  an 
obscure  fever,  with  all  the  appearance  of  hectic,  pro 
vails. 

The  urine  in  diabetes  mellitus,  from  being  at  first 
insipid,  clear,  anjl  colourless,  soon  acquires  a sweetish 
or  saccharine  taste,  its  leading  characteristic;  and, 
when  subjected  to  experiment,  a considerable  quantity 
of  saccharine  matter  is  to  be  extracted  from  it.  Some- 
times it  is  so  loaded  with  sugar,  as  to  be  capable  of 
being  fermented  into  a vinous  liquor  Upwards  of 
one-tweifth  of  its  weight  of  sugar  was  extracted  from 
some  diabetic  urine,  by  Cruickshank,  which  was  at 
the  rate  of  twenty-nine  ounces  troy  a day,  from  one 
patient. 

In  some  instances,  the  quantity  of  urine  in  diabetes 
is  much  greater  than  can  be  accounted  for  from  all  the 
sources  united.  Cases  are  recorded,  in  which  25  to 
30  pints  were  discharged  in  the  space  of  a natural  day, 
for  many  successive  weeks,  and  even  months ; and  in 
which  the  whole  ingesta,  as  was  said,  did  not  amount 
to  half  the  weight  of  the  urine.  To  account  for  this 
overplus,  it  has  been  alleged  that  water  is  absorbed 
from  the  air  by  the  surface  of  the  body ; as  also  that 
a quantity  of  water  is  compounded  in  the  lungs  them- 
selves. 

Dissections  of  diabetes  have  usually  shown  4he  kid- 
neys to  be  much  affected.  In  some  instances,  they 
have  been  found  in  a loose  flabby  state,  much  enlarged 
in  size,  and  of  a pale  ash  colour ; in  others,  they  have 
been  discovered  much  more  vascular  than  in  a healthy 
state,  approaching  a good  deal  to  what  takes  place  in 
inflammation,  and  containing,  in  their  infundibula,  a 
quantity  of  whitish  fluid,  somewhat  resembling  pus, 
but  without  any  sign  of  ulceration  whatever.  At  the 
same  time  that  these  appearances  have  been  observed 
in  their  interior,  the  veins  on  their  surface  were  found 
to  be  much  fuller  of  blood  than  usual,  forming  a most 
beautiful  net-work  of  vessels,  the  larger  branches  of 
which  exhibited  an  absorbent  appearance.  In  many 
cases  of  dissection,  the  whole  of  the  mesentery  has 
been  discovered  to  be  much  diseased,  and  its  glands  re- 
markably enlarged ; some  of  them  beihg  very  hard, 
and  of  an  irregular  texture ; others  softer,  and  of  a 
uniform  spherical  shape.  Many  of  the  lacteals  have 
likewise  been  seen  considerably  enlarged.  The  liver, 
pancreas,  spleen,  and  stomach,  are  in  general  perceived 
to  be  in  a natural  state ; when  they  are  not  so,  the  oc- 
currence is  to  be  considered  as  accidental.  The  blad- 
der, in  many  cases,  is  found  to  contain  a considerable 
quantity  of  muddy  urine. 

A great  variety  of  remedies  has  been  proposed  for 
this  disease  : but  their  success  is  generally  precarious, 
or  only  temporary,  at  least  in  the  mellitic  form  of  the 
complaint.  The  treatment  has  been  generally  con- 
ducted on  the  principles  of  determining  the  fluids  to 
other  outlets,  particularly  the  skin,  and  of  increasing 
the  tone  of  the  kidneys.  Diaphoretics  are  certainly 
very  proper  remedies,  especially  the  combination  of 
opium  with  ipecacuanha,  or  antimonials,  assisted  by 
the  warm  bath,  suitable  clothing,  and  perhaps  removal 
to  a milder  climate : in  the  insipid  form  of  diabetes, 
this  plan  has  sometimes  effected  a cure ; andit  appears 
that  the  large  use  of  opium  has  even  the  power  of 
correcting,  for  the  time,  the  saccharine  quality  of  the 
urine.  Cathartics  are  hardly  of  service,  farther  than 
to  keep  the  bowels  regular.  Tonics  are  generally  indi- 
cated by  obvious  marks  of  debility ; and  if  the  patient 
be  troubled  with  acidity  in  the  prima;  viae,  alkaline 
medicines  will  be  properly  joined  with  them,  prefer- 
ring those  which  have  no  diuretic  power.  Astringents 
have  been  highly  extolled  by  some  practitioners,  but 
do  not  appear  likely  to  prevail,  except  those  which 
pass  off  by  the  urine,  as  uva  ursi ; or  the  milder  sti- 
mulants, which  can  be  directed  to  the  kidneys,  as  co- 
paiba, &c.  may  correct  the  laxity  of  those  organs,  if 
the  disease  depend  on  this  cause.*  The  tinctura  lyttae 
must  be  used  with  great  caution,  and  its  efficacy  is  not 
well  established : and  blisters  to  the  loins  ctfn  only  be 
useful  as  counter-irritants,  though  not  the  most  suit- 
able. Frequent  friction,  especially  over  the  kidneys, 
wearing  a tight  belt,  and  gentle  exercise,  may  assist  the 
recovery  of  the  patient ; and  when  the  function  of  the 
skin  is  restored,  using  the  bath  gradually  of  a lower 
temperature,  will  tend  greatly  to  obviate  its  suppres- 
sion afterward.  It  is  likewise  highly  important  to 
regulate  the  diet,  especially  in  the  mellitic  diabetes. 
Dr.  Rolla  first  pointed  out  the  advantage  derived  from 


DIA 


DIA 


5 

restricting  the  patient  to  a diet  principally  of  animal 
food,  avoiding  especially  those  vegetables  which  might 
aiford  saccharine  matter,  the  urine  becoming  thereby 
of  a more  healthy  quality,  and  diminishing  in  quan- 
tity : but  unfortunately  the  benefit  appears  but  tempo- 
rary, and  the  plan  is  not  persevered  ni  without  distress 
to  the  patient.  The  same  gentleman  recommended 
also  the  sulphuret  of  potassa,  and  still  more  the  hy- 
drosulphuret  of  ammonia ; but  they  are  very  nau- 
seous medicines,  and  of  doubtful  efficacy.  Another 
plan  of  treating  the  disease  has  been  more  recently 
proposed,  namely,  by  bleeding,  and  other  antiphlogistic 
measures  ; and  some  cases  of  its  success  have  been 
recorded:  but  farther  experience  is  certainly  required, 
before  we  should  be  justified  in  relying  much  upon  it. 

Dia'bolus  metallorum.  Tin. 

Diabo'tanum.  (From  Sia,  and  jioTavrj , an  herb.) 
A plaster  made  of  herbs. 

Diaca'dmias.  (From  <5ta,  and  KaSpua,  cadmia.)  The 
name  of  a plaster,  the  basis.of  which  is  cadmia. 

Diacalami'nthes.  (From  Sia,  and  KaXapivdij,  cala- 
mint.)  The  name  of  an  antidote,  the  chief  ingredient 
in  which  is  calanrint. 

Dlaca'rcinum.  (From  Sia,  and  Kapicivo s,  a crab.) 
The  name  of  an  antidote  prepared  from  the  flesh  of 
crabs  and  cray-fish. 

Diaca'ryon.  (From  <5ta,  and  Kapvov,  a nut.)  Rob 
of  nuts,  or  walnuts. 

Diaca'ssia.  (From  Sia,  and  naacia,  cassia.)  Elec- 
tuary of  cassia. 

Diacasto'riom.  (From  Sia,  and  Ka^eap,  castor.) 
An  antidote,  the  basis  of  which  is  castor. 

Diacatho'licon.  (From  Sia , and  koQoXikos,  uni- 
versal.) The  name  of  a purge,  so  called  from  its 
general  usefulness. 

Diacentau'rium.  (From  Sia,  and  Ktvjavpiov,  cen- 
taury.) The  Duke  of  Portland’s  powder  is  so  called, 
because  its  chief  ingredient  is  centaury. 

Diacentro'tum.  (From  Sia,  and  Kev'Jpoio,  to  prick.) 
A collyrium,  so  called  from  its  pungency  and  stimula- 
ting qualities. 

Diachalci'tis.  (From  Sia,  and  x^XkiJis,  chalci- 
tis.)  A plaster,  the  chief  ingredient  in  which  is  chalcitis. 

Diacha'lsis.  (From  SiaxaXio,  to  be  relaxed.)  1. 
A relaxation. 

2.  The  opening  of  the  sutures  of  the  head. 

Diaciieiri'smus.  (From  Sia,  and  x«Pi  the  hand.) 
Any  operation  performed  by  the  hand. 

Diachelido'nium.  (From  Sia,  and  x£XiSu)viov, 
celandine.)  A plaster,  the  chief  ingredient  in  which 
was  the  .herb  celandine. 

. Diachore'ma.  (From  Ataxwpea),  to  separate  from.) 
Diachoresis.  Any  excretion,  or  excrement,  but  chiefly 
that  by  stool. 

Diachore'sis.  See  Diackorema. 

Diachri'sta.  (From  Sia,  and  xptw,  to  anoint.) 
Medicines  to  anoint  parts. 

Diachry'sum.  (From  Sia,  and  %pu<ro s,  gold.)  A 
plaster  for  fractured  limbs  ; so  named  from  its  yellow 
colour. 

DIA'CHYLUM.  (From  Sia,  and  xuAoj,  juice.)  A 
plaster  formerly  made  of  certain  juices,  but  it  now 
means  an  emollient  digestive  plaster. 

Dia'chysis.  (From  Sia,  and  %uw,  to  pour  out.) 
Fusion  or  melting. 

Diachy'tica.  (From  Siaxvw,  to  dissolve.)  Medi- 
cines which  discuss  tumours. 

Diacine'ma.  (From  Sia,  and  kiveo),  to  move.)  A 
slight  dislocation. 

Diaci'ssum.  (From  Sia,  and  kiooos,  ivy.)  An  ap- 
plication composed  of  ivy  leaves. 

Dia'clasis.  (From  Sia,  and  xKau>,  to  break.)  A 
small  fracture. 

Diacly'sma.  (From  Sian to  wash  out.)  A 
gargle  or  wash  for  the  mouth. 

Diacoccyme'lon.  (From  Sia,  and  kok.kvixt{\ov,  a 
plum.)  An  electuary  made  of  prunes. 

Diaco'dium.  (From  Sia,  and  icuSia,  a poppy  head.) 
A composition  made  of  the  heads  of  poppies. 

Diacolocy'nthis.  (From  Sia,  and  koXokvvOis,  the 
colocynth.)  A preparation,  the  chief  ingredient  of 
which  is  colocynth. 

Diaco'mma.  (From  Siaicoir'Jo),  to  cut  through.) 
Diacope.  A deep  cut  or  wound. 

Dia;cope.  See  Diacomma. 

Diacofrje'gia.  (From  Sia,  Koirpos,  dung,  and  ail,  a 
goat.)  A preparation  with  goat’s  dung. 


Diacora'llum.  (From  Sia,  and  KopaXXicv,  coral.) 
A preparation  in  which  coral  is  a chief  ingredient. 

DIA'CRISIS.  (From  SiaKpivw,  to  distinguish.)  The 
distinguishing  diseases  one  from  another  by  their 
symptoms. 

Diacuo  cium.  (From  &a,  and  xpo/coj,  saffron.)  A 
collyrium  in  which  is  saffron. 

Diacurcu'ma.  (From  Sia,  and  KvpKovpa,  turmeric.) 
An  antidote  in  which  is  turmeric  or  saffron. 

Diacydo'nium.  (From  Sia,  and  KvSiovia,  a quince.) 
Marmalade  of  quinces. 

Diadaphni'dion.  (From  Sia,  and  SaQvis,  the  laurel- 
tree.)  A drawing  plaster  in  which  were  bay-berries. 

DIADE'LPHIA.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  aSeXipis,  a 
brotherhood ; two  brotherhoods.)  The  name  of  a 
class  in  the  sexual  system  of  plants,  embracing  those 
the  flowers  of  which  are  hermaphrodites,  and  have  the 
male  organs  united  below  in  two  sets  of  cylindrical  fila- 
ments. 

DIADE'MA.  (From  SiaSew,  to  surround.)  1.  A 
diadem  or  crown. 

2.  A bandage  to  put  round  the  head. 

Diade'xis.  (From  SiaStxopai , to  transfer.)  Dia - 
doche.  A transposition  of  humours  from  one  place  to 
another. 

Dia  doche.  See  Diodexis. 

Dia'dosis.  (From  SiaSiSiapn,  to  distribute.)  The 
remission  of  a disorder. 

DI A3  RESIS.  (From  Siaipeo),  to  divide  or  separate.) 
A solution  of  continuity  of  the  soft  parts  of  thehumun 
body. 

DijEre'tica.  (From  Siaipeu,  to  divide.)  Corrosive 
medicines. 

DLE'TA.  (From  Siai'Jau),  to  nourish.)  Diet;  food. 
It  means  also  the  whole  of  the  non-naturals.  See 
Diet. 

Diaglau'cium.  (From  Sia,  and  yXavKiov,  the  blue 
juice  of  an  herb.)  An  eye-water  made  of  the  purging 
thistle. 

DIAGNO'SIS.  (From  Siayivwaico),  to  discern  or 
distinguish.)  The  science  which  delivers  the  signs  by 
which  a disease  may  be  distinguished  from  another 
disease : hence  those  symptoms  which  distinguish  such 
affections  are  termed  diagnostic. 

Diagry'dium.  Corrupted  from  dacrydium  or  scam- 
mony. 

Diahermoda'ctylun.  (From  Sia,  and eppoSaK'JvXos, 
the  hermodactyl.)  A purging  medicine,  the  basis  of 
which  is  the  hermodactyl. 

Diai'reon.  (From  Sia,  and  ipig,  the  lily.)  An  an- 
tidote in  which  is  the  root  of  the  lily. 

Diai'um.  (From  Sia,  and  iov,  a violet.)  A pastil, 
the  chief  ingredient  of  which  is  violets. 

Diala'cca.  (From  Sia,  and  Xaiata.)  An  antidote 
in  which  is  the  lacca. 

Dialago'um.  (From  Sia,  and  Xaytos,  a hare.)  A 
medicine  in  which  is  the  dung  of  a hare. 

Diale'mma.  (From  SiaXapfiavio,  to  interrupt.)  The 
remission  of  a disease. 

Diale'psis.  (From  SiaXapiBavu),  to  interrupt.)  1. 
An  intermission. 

2.  A space  left  between  a bandage. 

Diali'banum.  (From  Sia,  and  XiSavov,  frankin- 
cense.) A medicine  in  which  frankincense  is  a chief 
ingredient. 

DIALLAGE.  Smaragdite  of  Saussure.  Verde  di 
Corsica  duro  of  artists.  A species  of  the  genus  Schil- 
ler spar.  It  is  a mineral  of  a greenish  colour,  com- 
posed of  silica,  alumina,  magnesia,  lime,  oxide  of  iron, 
oxide  of  copper,  and  oxide  of  chrome.  It  is  found 
principally  in  Corsica. 

Dia'loes.  (From  Sia,  and  aXorj,  the  aloe.)  A me- 
dicine chiefly  composed  of  aloes. 

Dialtha;'a.  (From  Sia,  and  aXOaia , the  mallow  ) 
An  ointment  composed  chiefly  of  marsh-mallows. 

DIA  LYSIS.  (From  SiaXvu),  to  dissolve.)  A solu- 
tion of  continuity,  or  a destruction  of  parts. 

Dia'lyses.  The  plural  of  dialysis.  The  name  of 
an  order  in  the  class  Locales  of  Cullen’s  Nosology. 

Dialy'tica.  (From  SiaXvu),  to  dissolve.)  Medi- 
cines which  heal  wounds  and  fractures. 

Diamargari'ton.  (From  Sia,  and  papyapi'Jis, 
pearl.)  An  antidote  in  which  pearls  are  the  chief  in- 
gredient. 

DIAMASSE'MA.  (From  Sia,  and  jxaaaopai , to 
chew.)  A masticatory,  or  substance  put  into  the 
mouth,  and  chewed  to  excite  a discharge  of  the  saliva. 

293 


DIA 


DIA 


Dia'mbra.  (From  Sia,  and  apSfM,  amber.)  An 
aromatic  composition  in  which  was  ambergris. 

Diamk'lon.  (From  6ia,  and  pyXov,  a quince.)  A 
composition  of  quinces. 

DIAMON  D.  The  diamond,  which  was  well  known 
to  the  ancients,  is  principally  found  in  the  western 
peninsula  of  India,  on  the  coast  of  Coromandel,  in  the 
kingdoms  of  Golconda  and  Visapour,  in  the  island  of 
Borneo,  and  in  the  Brazils.  It  is  the  most  valued  of 
all  minerals. 

Diamonds  are  generally  found  bedded  in  yellow 
ochre  or  in  rocks  of  freestone,  or  quartz,  and  sometimes 
in  the  beds  of  running  waters.  When  taken  out  of 
the  earth,  they  are  incrusted  with  an  exterior  earthly 
covering,  under  which  is  another,  consisting  of  carbo- 
nate of  lime. 

In  the  Brazils,  it  is  supposed  that  diamonds  might  be 
obtained  in  greater  quantities  than  at  present,  if  the 
sufficient  working  of  the  diamond-mines  was  not  pro- 
hibited, in  order  to  prevent  that  diminution  of  their 
commercial  value,  which  a greater  abundance  of  them 
might  occasion. 

Brazilian  diamonds  are,  in  commercial  estimation, 
inferior  to  the  oriental  ones. 

In  the  rough,  diamonds  are  worth  two  pounds  ster- 
ling the  carat,  or  four  grains,  provided  they  are  without 
blemish.  The  expense  of  cutting  and  polishing 
amounts  to  about  four  pounds  more.  The  value  how- 
ever is  far  above  what  is  now  stated  when  they  be- 
come considerable  in  size.  The  greatest  sum  that  has 
been  given  for  a single  diamond  is  one  hundred  and 
fifty  thousand  pounds. 

Tire  usual  method  of  calculating  the  value  of  dia- 
monds is  by  squaring  the  number  of  carats,  and  then 
multiplying  the  amount  by  the  price  of  a single  carat: 
thus  supposing  one  carat  to  be  22.  a diamond  of8carats 
is  worth  128Z.  being  8x8x2. 

The  famous  Pigot  diamond  weighs  188  l-8th  grains. 

Physical  Properties  of  Diamond. 

Diamond  is  always  crystallized,  but  sometimes  so 
imperfectly,  that,  at  first  sight,  it  might  appear  amor- 
phous. The  figure  of  diamond,  when  perfect,  is  an 
eight-sided  prism.  There  are  also  cubical,  flat,  and 
round  diamonds.  It  is  the  oriental  diamond  which 
crystallizes  into  octohedra,  and  exhibits  all  the  varie- 
ties of  this  primitive  figure.  The  diamond  of  Brazil 
crystallizes  into  dodecahedra. 

The  texture  of  the  diamond  is  Iamellated.for  it  may 
be  split  or  cleft  with  an  instrument  of  well-tempered 
steel,  by  a swift  blow  in  a particular  direction.  There 
are  however  some  diamonds  which  do  not  appear  to 
be  formed  of  lamina,  but  of  twisted  and  interwoven 
fibres,  like  those  of  knots  in  wood.  These  exceed  the 
others  greatly  in  hardness,  they  cannot  be  cut  or  po- 
lished, and  are  therefore  called  by  the  lapidaries  dia- 
monds of  nature. 

The  diamond  is  one  of  the  hardest  bodies  known. 
It  resists  the  most  highly-tempered  steel  file,  which  cir- 
cumstance renders  it  necessary  to  attack  it  with  dia- 
mond powder.  It  takes  an  exquisite  and  lasting  polish. 
It  has  a great  refractive  powder,  and  hence  its  lustre, 
when  cut  into  the  form  of  a regular  solid,  is  uncom- 
monly great.  The  usual  colour  of  diamonds  is  a light 
gray,  often  inclining  to  yellow,  at  times  lemon  colour, 
violet,  of  black,  seldomer  rose-red,  and  still  more  rarely 
green  or  blue,  but  more  frequently  pale  brown.  The 
purest  diamonds  are  perfectly  transparent.  The  colour- 
less diamond  has  a specific  gravity  which  is  in  propor- 
tion to  that  of  water  as  3.512  to  1.001),  according  to 
Brisson.  This  varies  however  considerably.  When 
rubbed  it  becomes  positively  electric,  even  before  it  has 
been  cut  by  the  lapidary. 

Diamond  is  not  acted  upon  by  acids,  or  by  any 
chemical  agent,  oxygen  excepted;  and  this  requires  a 
very  great  increase  of  temperature  to  produce  any 
effect. 

The  diamond  burns  by  a strong  heat,  with  a sensible 
flame,  like  other  combustible  bodies,  attracting  oxy- 
gen, and  becoming  wholly  converted  into  carbonic 
acid  gas  during  that  process. 

It  combines  with  iron  by  fusion,  and  converts  it,  like 
common  charcoal,  into  steel ; but  diamond  requires  a 
much  higher  temperature  for  its  combustion  than  com- 
mon charcoal  does,  and  even  then  it  consumes  but 
slowly,  and  ceases  to  burn  the  instant  its  temperature 
is  lowered.’ 

“From  the  high  refractive- power  of  the  diamond, 
294 


ft 

Bigot  and  Arago  supposed  that  it  might  contain  hydro- 
gen. Sir  II.  Davy,  from  the  action  of  potassium  on  it, 
and  its  non-conduction  of  electricity,  suggested  in  his 
third  Bakerian  lecture,  that  a minute  portion  of  oxy- 
gen might  exist  in  it ; and  in  his  new  experiments  on 
the  fluoric  compounds,  he  threw  out  the  idea,  that  it 
might  be  the  carbonaceous  principle,  combined  with 
some  new,  light,  and  subtle  element  of  the  oxygenous 
and  chlorine  class 

This  unrivalled  chemist,  during  his  residence  at 
Florence  in  March  1814,  made  several  experiments  on 
the  combustion  of  the  diamond  and  of  plumbago,  by 
means  of  the  great  lens  in  the  cabinet  of  natural  his- 
tory ; the  same  instrument  as  that  employed  in  the  first 
trials  on  the  action  of  the  solar  heat  on  the  diamond, 
instituted  in  1694  by  Cosmo  III.  Grand  Duke  of  Tus- 
cany. He  subsequently  made  a series  of  researches 
on  the  combustion  of  different  kinds  of  charcoal  at 
Rome.  His  mode  of  investigation  was  peculiarly  ele- 
gant, and  led  to  the  most  decisive  results. 

He  found  that  diamond,  when  strongly  ignited  by  the 
lens,  in  a thin  capsule  of  platinum,  perforated  with 
many  orifices,  so  as  to  admit  a free  circulation  of  air, 
continued  to  burn  with  a steady  brilliant  red  light, 
visible  in  the  brightest  sunshine,  after  it  was  with- 
drawn from  the  focus.  Borne  time  after  the  diamonds 
were  removed  out  of  the  focus,  indeed,  a wire  of  pla- 
tina  that  attached  them  *o  the  tray  was  fused,  though 
their  weight  was  omy  1.84  grains.  His  apparatus 
consisted  of  clear  glass  globes  of  the  capacity  of  from 
14  to  40  cubic  inches,  ha  ving  single  apertures  to  which 
stop-cocks  were  attached.  A small  hollow  cylinder  of 
platinum  was  attached  to  one  end  of  the  stop-cock, 
and  was  mounted  with  the  little  perforated  capsule  for 
containing  the  diamond.  When  the  experiment  was 
to  be  made,  the  globe  containing  the  capsule  and  the 
substance  to  be  burned  was  exhausted  by  an  excellent 
air-pump,  and  pure  oxygen,  from  chlorate  of  potassa, 
was  then  introduced.  The  change  of  volume  in  the 
gas  after  combustion  was  estimated  by  means  of  a fine 
tube  connected  with  a stop-cock,  adapted  by  a proper 
screw  to  the  stop-cock  of  the  globe,  and  the  absorption 
was  judged  of  by  the  quantity  of  mercury  that  entered 
the  tube  which  afforded  a measure  so  exact,  that  no 
alteration  however  minute  could  be  overlooked.  He 
had  previously  satisfied  himself  that  a quantity  of 
moisture,  less  than  1- 100th  of  a grain,  is  rendered  evi- 
dent by  deposition  on  a polished  surface  of  glass  ; for 
a piece  of  paper  weighing  one  grain  was  introduced 
into  a tube  of  about  four  cubic  inches’  capacity,  whose 
exterior  was  slightly  heated  by  a candle.  A dew  was 
immediately  perceptible  on  the  inside  of  the  glass, 
though  the  paper,  when  weighed  in  a balance  turning 
with  1-lOOth  of  a grain,  indicated  no  appreciable 
diminution. 

The  diamonds  were  also  heated  to  redness  before 
they  were  introduced  into  the  capsule.  Duriug  their 
combustion,  the  glass  globe  was  kept  cool  by  the  appli- 
cation of  water  to  that  part  of  it  immediately  above 
the  capsule,  and  where  the  heat  was  greatest. 

From  the  results  of  his  different  experiments,  con- 
ducted with  the  most  unexceptionable  precision,  it  is 
demonstrated,  that  diamond  affords  no  other  substance 
by  its  combustion  than  pure  carbonic  acid  gas  ; and 
that  the  process  is  merely  a solution  of  diamond  in 
oxygen,  without  any  change  in  the  volume  of  the  gas. 
It  likewise  appears,  that  in  the  combustion  of  the  dif- 
ferent kinds  of  charcoal,  water  is  produced  ; and  that 
from  the  diminution  of  the  volume  of  the  oxygen, 
there  is  every  reason  to  believe  that  the  water  is 
formed  by  the  combustion  of  hydrogen  existing  in 
strongly  ignited  charcoal.  As  the  charcoal  from  oil  of 
turpentine  left  no  residuum,  no  other  cause  but  the 
presence  of  hydrogen  can  be  assigned  for  the  diminu- 
tion occasioned  in  the  volume  of  the  gas  during  its 
combustion. 

The  only  chemical  difference  perceptible  between 
diamond  and  the  purest  charcoal  is,  that  the  last  con 
tains  a minute  portion  of  hydrogen  : but  can  a quan- 
tity of  an  element,  less  in  some  cases  than  1-50, 000th 
part  of  the  weight  of  the  substance,  occasion  so  great 
a difference  in  physical  and  chemical  characters  ? 
The  opinions  of  Tennant,  that  the  difference  depends 
on  crystallization,  seems  to  be  correct.  Transparent 
solid  bodies  are  in  general  non-conductors  of  electri- 
city ; and  it  is  probable  that  the  same  corpuscular 
arrangements  winch  give  to  matter  the  power  of  trant- 


DIA 


witting  and  polarizing  light,  are  likewise  connected 
with  its  relation*  to  electricity.  Thus  water,  the  hy- 
drates of  the  alkalies,  and  a number  of  other  bodies 
which  are  conductors  of  electricity  when  fluid,  become 
non-conductors  in  their  crystallized  form. 

That  charcoal  is  more  inflammable  than  the  dia- 
mond, may  be  explained  from  the  looseness  of  its  tex- 
ture, and  from  the  hydrogen  it  contains.  But  the 
diamond  appears  to  bum  in  oxygen  with  as  much 
facility  as  plumbago,  so  that  at  least  one  distinction 
supposed  to  exist  between  the  diamond  and  common 
carbonaceous  substances  is  done  away  by  these  re- 
searches. The  power  possessed  by  certain  carbon- 
aceous substances  of  absorbing  gases,  and  separating 
colouring  matters  from  fluids,  is  probably  mechanical 
and  dependent  on  their  porous  organic  structure  ; for 
it  belongs  in  the  highest  degree  to  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal charcoal,  and  it  does  not  exist  in  plumbago,  coke, 
or  anthracite. 

The  nature  of  the  chemical  difference  between  the 
diamond  and  other  carbonaceous  substances,  may  be 
demonstrated  by  igniting  them  in  chlorine,  when  mu- 
riatic acid  is  produced  from  the  latter,  but  not  from  the 
former.  The  visible  acid  vapour  is  owing  to  the  moist- 
ure present  in  the  chlorine  uniting  to  the  dry  muriatic 
gas.  But  charcoal,  after  being  intensely  ignited  in 
chlorine,  is  not  altered  in  its  conducting  power  of  colour. 
This  circumstance  is  in  favour  of  the  opinion,  that  the 
minute  quantity  of  hydrogen  is  not  the  cause  of  the 
great  difference  between  the  physical  properties  of 
the  diamond  and  charcoal.”  See  Carbon. 

Diamond- shaped.  See  Leaf. 

Diamo'ron.  (From  Sia , and  piopov,  a mulberry.)  A 
preparation  of  mulberries. 

Diamo'schum.  (From  Sia,  and  ^o<r%oj,  musk.)  An 
antidote  in  which  musk  is  a chief  ingredient. 

Diamoto'sis.  (From  Sia,  and  po^os,  lint.)  The 
introduction  of  lint  into  an  ulcer  or  wound. 

DIA'NA.  1.  The  moon. 

2.  The  chemical  name  for  silver  from  its  white 
shining  appearance. 

Diananca  smus.  (From  Sia , and  avay/caty,  to 
force.)  1.  The  forcible  restoration  of  a luxated  part 
into  its  proper  place. 

2.  An  instrument  to  reduce  a distorted  spine. 

DIA'NDRIA.  (From  Sis  twice,  and  avrjp,  a man.) 
The  name  of  a class  in  the  sexual  system,  consisting  of 
hermaphrodite  plants  which  have  flowers  with  two 
staminas. 

DIA'NTHUS.  (From  Afj,  Siog,  Jove,  and  avdog, 
a flower : so  called  from  the  elegance  and  fragrance 
of  its  flower.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnrean  system.  Class,  Decandria  ; Order,  Di- 
gynia. 

Dianthus  caryophyllus.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  clove-pink.  Caryophyllum  rubrum  ; Tunica ; 
Vetonica;  Betonica ; Coronaria;  Caryophyllus  hor- 
tensis.  Clove  gilliflower.  Clove  July  flower.  This 
fragrant  plant,  Dianthus— floribus  solitariis , squamis 
calycinus  subovatis , brevis simus,  corollis  crenatis,  of 
Linmeus,  grows  wild  in  several  parts  of  England ; but 
the  flowers,  which  are  pharmaceutically  employed, 
are  usually  produced  in  gardens : they  have  a pleasant 
aromatic  smell,  somewhat  allied  to  that  of  clove- 
spice;  their  taste  is  bitterish  and  sub-’adstringent. 
These  flowers  were  formerly  in  extensive  use,  but  are 
now  merely  employed  in  form  of  syrup,  as  a useful 
and  pleasant  vehicle  for  other  medicines. 

Diapa'sma.  (From  Sianaaoui,  to  sprinkle.)  A me- 
dicine reduced  to  powder  and  sprinkled  over  the  body, 
or  any  part. 

DIAPEDE'SIS.  (From  SianrjSaw,  to  leap  through.) 
The  transudation  or  escape  of  blood  through  the  coats 
of  an  artery. 

Diapk'oma.  (From  Siairnyvvio,  to  close  together.) 
A surgical  instrument  for  closing  together  broken 
bones. 

Diape'nte.  (From  Sia,  and  irsvre,  five.)  A medi- 
cine composed  of  five  ingredients. 

DIAPHANOUS.  (Diaphanosus  ; from  Sta,  through, 
and  rpaivo),  to  shine.)  A term  applied  to  any  substance 
which  is  transparent;  as  the  hyaloid  membrane 
covering  the  vitreous  humour  of  the  eye,  which  is  as 
transparent  as  glass. 

Diaphce'nicum.  From  Sia,  and  <f>oivi\ , a date.)  A 
medicine  made  of  dates. 

D1ATHORA.  (From  Siacpcpu,  to  distinguish.)  The 


DIA 

distinction  of  diseases  by  their  characteristic  marks 
and  symptoms. 

DIAPHORE’SIS  (From  Siaipopcw,  to  carry  through.) 
Perspiration. 

DIAPHORETIC.  ( Diaphoreticus ; from  Sia<J>opeuy, 
to  carry  through.)  . That  which,  from  being  taken  in- 
ternally, increases  the  discharge  by  the  skin.  When 
this  is  carried  so  far  as  to  be  condensed  on  the  surface, 
it  forms  sweat : and  the  medicine  producing  it  is  named 
sudorific.  Between  diaphoretic  and  sudorific,  there  is 
no  distinction  ; the  operation  is  in  both  cases  the  same, 
and  differs  only  in  degree  from  augmentation  of  dose, 
or  employment  of  assistant  means.  This  class  of  me- 
dicines comprehends  five  orders. 

1.  Pungent  diaphoretics,  as  the  volatile  salts , and 
essential  oils,  which,  are  weil  adapted  for  the  aged ; 
those  in  whose  system  there  is  little  sensibility ; those 
who  are  difficultly  affected  by  other  diaphoretics ; and 
those  whose  stomachs  will  not  bear  large  doses  of  me- 
dicines. 

2.  Calefacient  diaphoretics , such  as  serpentaria  con- 
trayerva , and  guaiacum:  these  are  given  in  cases 
where  the  circulation  is  low  and  languid. 

3.  Stimulant  diaphoretics,  as  antimonial  and  mercu- 
rial preparations,  which  are  best  fitted  for  the  vigorous 
and  plethoric. 

4.  Antispasmodic  diaphoretics , as  opium,  musk,  and 
camphire,  which  are  given  to  produce  a diaphoresis, 
when  the  momentum  of  the  blood  is  increased. 

5.  Diluent  diaphoretics , as  water,  wliey,  &c.  which 
are  best  calculated  for  that  habit  in  which  a predispo- 
sition to  sweating  is  wanted,  and  in  which  no  diapho- 
resis takes  place,  although  there  be  evident  causes  to 
produce  it. 

DIAPHRA'GMA.  ( Diaphragma , mat  is.  n. ; from 
Sia,  and  Qpaf]o),  to  divide.)  Septum  transversum. 
The  midrif,  or  diaphragm.  A muscle  that  divides  the 
thorax  from  the  abdomen.  Ifis  composed  of  two  mus- 
cles ; the  first  and  superior  of  these  arises  from  the 
sternum,  and  the  ends  of  the  last  ribs  on  each  side.  Its 
fibres,  from  this  semicircular  origination,  tend  towards 
their  centre,  and  terminate  in  a tendon,  or  aponeurosis, 
which  is  termed  the  centrum  tendinosum.  The  se- 
cond and  inferior  muscle  comes  from  the  vertebrae  of 
the  loins  by  two  productions,  of  which  that  on  the 
right  side  comes  from  the  first,  second,  and  third  ver- 
tebrae of  the  loins;  that  on  the  left  side  is  somewhat 
shorter,  and  both  these  portions  join  and  make  the 
lower  part  of  the  diaphragm,  which  joins  its  tendons 
with  the  tendon  of  the  other,  so  that  they  make  but  one 
muscular  partition.  It  is  covered  by  the  pleura  on  its 
upper  side,  and  by  the  peritonaeum  on  the  lower  side. 
It  is  pierced  in  the  middle  for  the  passage  of  the  vena 
cava;  in  its  lower  part  for  the  oesophagus,  and  the 
nerves,  which  go  to  the  upper  orifice  of  the  stomach, 
and  between  the  productions  of  the  inferior  muscle, 
passes  the  aorta,  the  thoracic  duct,  and  the  vena  azy- 
gos. It  receives  arteries  and  veins  called  phrenic  or 
diaphragmatic,  from  the  cava  and  aorta:  and  some- 
times on  its  lower  part  two  br  anches  from  the  vena 
adiposa,  and  two  arteries  from  the  lumbares.  It  has 
two  nerves  which  come  from  the  third  vertebra  of  the 
neck,  which  pass  through  the  cavity  of  the  thorax,  and 
are  lost  in  its  substance.  In  its  natural  situation,  the  dia- 
phragm is  convex  on  the  upper  side  towards  the  breast, 
and  concave  on  its  lower  side  towards  the  belly; 
therefore,  when  its  fibres  swell  and  contract,  it  must 
become  plain  on  each  side,  and  consequently  the  cavity 
of  the  breast  is  enlarged  to  give  liberty  to  the  lungs  to 
receive'air  in  inspiration ; and  the  stomach  and  intes- 
tines are  pressed  for  the  distribution  of  their  contents ; 
hence  the  use  of  this  muscle  is  very  considerable  ; it  is 
the  principal  agent  in  respiration,  particularly  in  in- 
spiration ; lor  when  it  is  in  action  the  cavity  of  the 
thorax  is  enlarged,  particularly  at  the  sides,  where  the 
lungs  are  chiefly  situated  ; and  as  the  lungs  must 
always  be^  contiguous  to  the  inside  of  the  thorax  and 
upper  side  of  the  diaphragm,  the  air  rushes  into  them, 
in  order  to  fill  up  the  increased  space.  In  expiration  it 
is  relaxed  and  pushed  up  by  the  pressure  of  the  abdo- 
minal muscles  upon  the  viscera  of  the  abdomen;  and 
at  the  same  time  that  they  press  it  upwards,  theyvpull 
down  the  ribs,  by  which  the  cavity  of  the  thorax  is  di- 
minished, and  the  air  suddenly  pushed  out  of  the  lungs 

DIAPHRAGM ATI'TIS.  (From  Siacpoaypa,  the  dia- 
phragm.) Inflammation  of  the  diaphragm.  See  Pa 
rejihrenitis. 


295 


DIA 


DIA 


Dia'piithora.  (From  Sia<f>6cip(o  to  corrupt.)  An 
abortion  where  the  foetus  is  corrupted)  in  the  womb. 

Diaphylaxtica.  (From  diacpvXaaau),  to  preserve.) 
Medicines  which  resist  putrefaction  or  prevent  infec- 
tion. 

Dia'physis.  (From  Siaipvu,  to  divide.)  An  inter- 
stice or  partition  between  the  joints. 

Diapisselje'um.  (From  8ia,  and  maat\aiov,  the 
oil  of  pitch,  or  liquid  pitch.)  A composition  in  which 
is  liquid  pitch. 

Dia'plasis.  (From  8iair\aaaw,  to  put  together.) 
The  replacing  a luxated  or  fractured  bone  in  its  proper 
situation. 

Diapla'sma.  (From  SianXaeau),  to  anoint.)  An 
unction  or  fomentation  applied  to  the  whole  body  or 
any  part. 

Dia'pne.  (From  Stanvew,  to  blow  through,  or  pass 
gently  as  the  breath  does.)  An  insensible  discharge 
of  the  urine. 

DIA'PNOE.  (From  Stcnrvcw,  to  breathe  through.) 
The  transpiration  of  vapour  through  the  pores  of  the 
skin. 

DIAPNO'ICA.  (From  tiiairveu,  to  transpire.)  Dia- 
phoretics or  medicines  which  promote  perspiration. 

Diapore'ma.  (From  Siampeu),  to  be  in  doubt.) 
Nervous  anxiety. 

Diaporon.  (From  Sia,  and  ornopa,  autumnal  fruits.) 
A composition  in  which  are  several  autumnal  fruits, 
as  quinces,  medlars,  and  services. 

Diapra'ssium.  (From  <5ta, and  irpacraiov,  hoarhound.) 
A composition  in  which  hoarhound  is  the  principal 
ingredient. 

Diapru'num.  (From&a,  and 7rpovju7,  a prune.)  An 
electuary  of  prunes. 

Diapso'ricum.  (From  Sia,  and  \pwpa,  the  itch  or 
scurvy.)  A medicine  for  the  itch  or  scurvy. 

Diapte'rnes.  (From  Sia,  and  ir'Jepva,  the  heel.) 
A composition  of  cow  heel  and  cheese. 

Diaptero'sis.  (From  Sia,  and  iv'Jepov,  a feather.) 
The  cleaning  the  ears  with  a feather. 

Diapye'ma.  (From  Sia,  and  nvov,  pus.)  A suppu- 
ration or  abscess. 

Diapye'mata.  (From  Siaitvnpa,  a suppuration.) 
Suppurating  medicines. 

Diapye'tica.  (From  Siaizvripa,  a suppuration.) 
Suppurating  applications. 

Diarho'cha.  (From  Sia,  and  p^o?,  a space.)  The 
space  between  the  foldings  of  a bandage. 

DIA'RIUS.  (From  dies,  a day.)  A term  applied  to 
fevers  which  last  but  one  day. 

Diaroma'ticum.  (From  Sia,  and  apopaJiKov,  an 
aromatic.)  A composition  of  spices, 

Dia'rrhage.  (From  Siappr/yvvpi,  to  break  asun- 
der.) A fracture. 

Diarrhodo'meli.  (From  Sia,  poSov,  a rose,  and 
pe\i,  honey.)  Scammony,  agaric,  pepper,  and  honey. 

Dia'rrhodon.  (From  <5ta,  and  poSov,  a rose.)  A 
composition  of  roses. 

DIARRHCE'A.  (From  Siappco),  to  flow  through.) 
A purging.  It  is  distinguished  by  frequent  stools  with 
the  natural  excrement,  not  contagious,  and  seldom  at- 
tended with  pyrexia.  It  is  a genus  of  disease  in  the 
class  Neuroses,  and  order  Spasmi  of  Cullen,  contain- 
ing the  following  species : 

1.  Diarrhoea  crapulosa.  The  feculent  diarrhoea, 
from  crapulus,  one  who  overloads  his  stomach. 

2.  Diarrhoea  biliosa.  The  bilious,  from  an  increased 
secretion  of  bile. 

3.  Diarrhoea  mucosa.  The  mucous,  from  a quantity 
of  slime  being  voided. 

4.  Diarrhoea  hcpatirrhoea.  The  hepatic,  in  which 
there  is  a quantity  of  serous  matter,  somewhat  resem- 
bling the  washings  of  flesh,  voided ; the  liver  being 
primarily  affected. 

5.  Diarrhoea  lienterica.  The  lientery ; when  the 
food  passes  unchanged. 

6.  Diarrhoea  caeliaca.  The  cceliac  passion:  the 
food  passes  off  in  this  affection  in  a white  liquid  state 
like  chyle. 

7.  Diarrhoea  verminosa.  Arising  from  worms. 

Diarrhoea  seems  evidently  to  depend  on  an  increase 

of  the  peristaltic  motion,  or  of  the  secretion  of  the  in- 
testines; and  besides  the  causes  already  noticed,  it 
may  arise  from  many  others,  influencing  the  system 
generally,  or  the  particular  seat  of  the  disease.  Of 
the  former  kind  are  cold,  checking  perspiration,  cer- 
tain passions  of  the  mind,  and  other  disorders ; as  den- 1 
296 


tition,  gout,  fever,  &c.  To  the  latter  belong  various 
acrid  ingesta,  drastic  cathartics,  spontaneous  acidity, 
&c.  In  this  complaint  each  discharge  is  usually  pre- 
ceded by  a murmuring  noise,  with  a sense  of  weight 
and  uneasiness  in  the  hypogastrium.  When  it  is  pro- 
tracted, the  stomach  usually  becomes  affected  with 
sickness,  or  sometimes  vomiting,  the  countenance 
grows  pale  or  sallow,  and  the  skin  generally  dry  and 
rigid.  Ultimately  great  debility  and  emaciation,  with 
dropsy  of  the  lower  extremities,  often  supervene.  Dis- 
sections of  diarrhoea,  where  it  terminated  fatally,  have 
shown  ulcerations  of  the  internal  surface  of  the  intes- 
tines, sometimes  to  a considerable  extent,  especially 
about  the  follicular  glands ; in  which  occasionally  a 
cancerous  character  has  been  observable.  The  treat- 
ment of  this  complaint  must  vary  greatly  according  to 
circumstances : sometimes  we  can  only  hope  to  palli- 
ate, as  when  it  occurs  in  the  advanced  period  of  phthi- 
sis pulmonalis  ; sometimes  it  is  rather  to  be  encour- 
aged, relieving  more  serious  symptoms,  as  a bilious 
diarrhoea  coming  on  in  fever,  though  still  some  limits 
must  be  put  to  the  discharge.  Where,  however,  we 
are  warranted  in  using  the  most  tpeedy  means  of  stop- 
ping it,  the  objects  are,  1.  To  obviate  the  several 
causes.  2.  To  lessen  the  inordinate  action,  and  give 
tone  to  the  intestine. 

I.  Emetics  may  sometimes  be  useful,  clearing  out 
the  stomach,  and  liver,  as  well  as  determining  to  the 
skin.  Cathartics  also,  expelling  worms,  or  indurated 
faeces ; but  any  acrimony  in  the  intestine  would  pro- 
bably cause  its  own  discharge,  and  where  there  is 
much  irritability,  they  might  aggravate  the  disease: 
however,  in  protracted  cases,  the  alvine  contents 
speedily  become  vitiated,  and  renew  the  irritation ; 
which  may  be  best  obviated  by  an  occasional  mild 
aperient,  particularly  rhubarb.  If,  however,  the  liver 
do  not  perform  its  office,  the  intestine  will  hardly  re- 
cover its  healthy  condition : and  that  may  most  proba- 
bly be  effected  by  the  cautious  use  of  mercury.  Like- 
wise articles  which  determine  the  fluids  to  other  out- 
lets, diuretics,  and  particularly  diaphoretics,  in  many 
cases  contribute  materially  to  recovery ; the  latter  per- 
haps assisted  by  bathing,  warm  clothing,  gentle  exer- 
cise, &.c.  Diluent,  demulcent,  antacid,  and  other 
chemical  remedies,  may  be  employed  to  correct  acri- 
mony, according  to  its  particular  nature.  In  children 
teething,  the  gums  should  be  lanced ; and  if  the  bowels 
have  been  attacked  on  the  repulsion  of  some  other  dis- 
ease, it  may  often  be  proper  to  endeavour  to  restore 
this.  But  a matter  of  the  greatest  importance  is  the 
due  regulation  of  the  diet,  carefully  avoiding  those  ar- 
ticles, which  are  likely  to  disagree,  or  irritate  the  bow- 
els, and  preferring  such  as  have  a mild  astringent  effect. 
Fish,  milk,  and  vegetables,  little  acescent,  as  rice,  bread, 
&c.  are  best ; and  for  the  drink,  madeira  or  brandy, 
sufficiently  diluted,  rather  than  malt  liquors. 

II.  Some  of  the  means  already  noticed  will  help  to 
fulfil  the  second  indication  also,  as  a wholesome  diet, 
exercise,  diaphoretics,  &c. : but  there  are  others  of 
more  power,  which  must  be  resorted  to  in  urgent  cases. 
At  the  head  of  these  is  opium,  a full  dose  of  which 
frequently  at  once  effects  a cure ; but  where  there  is 
some  more  fixed  cause,  and  the  complaint  of  any  stand- 
ing, moderate  quantities  repeated  at  proper  intervals 
will  answer  better,  and  other  subsidiary  means  ought 
not  to  be  neglected ; aromatics  may  prevent  its  disor- 
dering the  stomach,  rhubarb  obviate  its  causing  per- 
manent constipation,  &c-  Tonics  are  generally  pro- 
per, the  discharge  itself  inducing  debility,  and  where 
there  is  a deficiency  of  bile  particularly,  the  lighter 
forms  of  the  aromatic  bitters,  as  the  infusum  calumbie, 
&.c.  will  materially  assist;  and  mild  chalybeates  are 
sometimes  serviceable.  In  protracted  cases  astringents 
come  in  aid  of  the  general  plan,  and  where  opium  dis- 
agrees, they  may  be  more  necessary:  but  the  milder 
ones  should  be  employed  at  first,  the  more  powerful 
only  where  the  patient  appears  sinking.  Chalk  and 
lime-water  answer  best  where  there  is  acidity ; other- 
wise the  pomegranate  rind,  logwood  extract,  catechu, 
kino,  tormentil,  &c.  may  be  given:  where  these  fail, 
alum,  sulphate  of  zinc,  galls,  or  superacetate  of  lead. 

DIARTDRO’SIS.  (From  SiapBpow,  to  articulate.) 
A moveable  connexion  of  bones.  This  genus  has  five 
species,  viz.  enarthrosis,  arthrodia,  giuglymus,  troeboi- 
des,  and  amphiarthrosis. 

Diasapo'nium.  (From  Sia,  and  aairwv,  soap.)  An 
ointment  of  soap. 


DIA 


DIE 


Diasaty'riitm.  (From  Sia,  and  oa'Jvpiov , the 
orchis.)  An  ointment  of  the  orchis-root. 

Diasci'llium.  (From  Sia , and  cxtXAa,  the  squill.) 
Oxymel  and  vinegar  of  squills. 

Diasci'ncus.  (From  Sia , and  oKiytcos,  the  croco- 
dile.) A name  for  the  mithridate,  in  the  composition 
of  which  there  was  a part  of  the  crocodile. 

Diasco'rdium.  (From  Sia , and  axopSiov,  the  water 
germander.)  Electuary  of  scordium. 

Diase'na.  (From  Sia,  and  sena.)  A medicine  in 
which  is  senna. 

Diasmy'rnum.  (From  Sia,  and  cpvpvrj,  myrrh.) 
Diasmyrnes.  A wash  for  the  eyes,  composed  of 
myrrh. 

Diaso'stictjs.  (From  Siao(og<o,  to  preserve.)  That 
which  preserves  health. 

Diaspe'rmatum.  (From  Sia,  and  c-zppa,  seed.) 
A medicine  composed  chiefly  of  seeds. 

Dia'sphage.  (From  Siaacpa^io,  to  separate.)  Dias- 
phaxis.  The  interstice  between  two  veins. 

Diasphy'xis.  (From  Sia,  and  aipv^io,  to  strike.) 
The  pulsation  of  an  artery. 

[Diaspore,  of  Haly,  Brogniart,  Cleaveland,  &c. 
“ This  mineral  is  but  little  known.  It  is  composed  of 
laminae,  somewhat  curved,  easily  separable  from  each 
other,  and  possessing  a pearly  gray  colour,  with  consi- 
derable lustre.  These  laminae  according  to  the  natural 
joints,  which  they  present,  when  examined  by  a light, 
seem  to  have  separated  in  the  direction  of  the  smaller 
diagonals  of  the  bases  of  a rhomboidal  prism.  The 
edges  or  angles  of  its  fragments  are  capable  of  scratch- 
ing glass.  Its  specific  gravity  is  3.43. 

“ A small  fragment,  placed  in  the  flame  of  a candle, 
almost  instantly  decrepitates,  and  is  dispersed  in  nu- 
merous little  spangles.  Hence  its  name  from  the 
Greek  AiaSirtipio.  It  is  composed  of  alumine  80, 
water  17,  iron  3.  Nothing  is  known  of  its  geological 
situation.  Its  gangue,  is  a rock,  both  argillaceous  and 
ferruginous.” — Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

DIA'STASIS.  (From  SuoTrgii,  to  separate.)  Dias- 
tema. A separation.  A separation  of  the  ends  of  the 
bones;  as  that  which  occasionally  happens  to  the 
bones  of  the  cranium,  in  some  cases  of  hydrocephalus. 

Diaste'aton.  (From  Sia,  and  ssap,  fat.)  An  oint- 
ment of  the  fat  of  animals. 

Diaste'ma.  See  Diastasis. 

DIASTOLE.  (From  Sia,  and  ort'X'Xb),  to  stretch.) 
The  dilatation  of  the  heart  and  arteries.  See  Circu- 
lation. 

Diastomo'sis.  (From  Sia^ogou),  to  dilate.)  Any 
dilatation,  or  dilating  instrument. 

Diastre'mma.  (From  Sias-peifon,  to  turn  aside.) 
Diastrophe.  A distortion  of  any  limb  or  part. 
Dia'strophe.  See  Diastremma. 

Dia'tasis.  (From  Siareivio,  to  distend.)  The  ex- 
tension of  a fractured  limb,  in  order  to  reduce  it. 

Diatecoli'thum.  (From  Sia,  and  'JtjkoXiQos,  the 
Jew’s  stone.)  An  antidote  containing  lapis  judaicus. 

DIATERE'SIS.  (From  Sia,  and  lepeio,  to  perfo- 
rate.) A perforation  or  aperture. 

Diatere'tica.  (From  Sia  and  Jepew,  to  preserve.) 
Medicines  which  preserve  health  and  prevent  disease. 

Diate'ssaron.  (From  Sia , and  reaaapes,  four.)  A 
medicine  compounded  of  four  simple  ingredients. 

Diate'ttigum.  (From  Sia,  and  'JerJiyov,  a grass- 
hopper.) A medicine  in  the  composition  of  which 
were  grasshoppers,  given  as  an  antidote  to  some  ne- 
phritic complaints,  by  A3ginetus. 

DIA'THESIS.  (From  SianOypi,  to  dispose.)  Any 
particular  state  of  the  body : thus,  in  inflammatory 
fever,  there  is  an  inflammatory  diathesis,  and,  during 
putrid  fever,  a putrid  diathesis. 

Diathe'smus.  (From  Siadeoi,  to  run  through.)  A 
rupture  through  which  some  fluid  escapes. 

Diatragaca'nthum.  From  Sia,  and  rpayaicavQa, 
tragacanth.)  A medicine  composed  of  gum-traga- 
canth. 

Dia'trium.  (From  Sia,  and  Jpcis,  three.)  A me- 
dicine composed  of  three  simple  ingredients. 

Diaxyla'loes.  (From  Sia,  and|vAaAo»?,  the  lignum 
aloes.)  A medicine  in  which  is  lignum  aloes. 

Diazo'ma.  (From  Sialiovwpt,  to  surround;  be- 
cause it  surrounds  the  cavity  of  the  thorax.)  The  dia- 
phragm. 

Diazo'ster.  -(From  SiaZiovwpi,  to  surround;  be- 
cause, when  the  body  is  girded,  the  belt  usually  lies 
upon  it.)  A name  of  the  twelfth  vertebra  of  the  back. 


Dicente'tum.  (From  Sia,  and  Kev'Jen,  to  stimu- 
late.) A pungent  or  stimulating  wash  lor  the  eyes. 

Dichaste'res.  (From  Six<rt>u,  to  divide,  because 
they  divide  the  food.)  A name  of  the  foreteeth. 

Dichophy'ia.  (From  Six&,  double,  and  <pvo),  to 
grow.)  A distemper  of  the  hairs,  in  which  they  split 
and  grow  forked. 

DICHOTOMUS.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  reyvio,  to 
cut;  that  is,  cut  into  two.)  Dichotomous  or  bifur- 
cated. Applied  to  stems,  styles,  &c.  which  are  forked 
or  divided  into  two. 

DICHROITE.  A species  of  iolite. 

DICOTYLEDONES.  Two  cotyledons.  See  Co- 
tyledon. 

DICROTIC.  ( Dicroticus ; from  Sis,  twice,  and 
icpovu),  to  strike.)  A term  given  to  a pulse  in  which 
the  artery  rebounds  after  striking,  so  as  to  convey  the 
sensation  of  a double  pulsation. 

Dictamni'tes.  (From  Sinjayvos,  dittany.)  A wine 
medicated  with  dittany. 

DICTA'MNUS.  (From  Dictamnus,  a city  in 
Crete,  on  whose  mountains  it  grows.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  De- 
candria ; Order , Monogynia.  Dittany. 

Dictamnus  albus.  White  fraxinella,  or  bastard 
dittany.  Fraxinella.  Dictamnus  albus— foliis  pin - 
natis , caule  simplici , of  Linnasus.  The  root  of  this 
plant  is  the  part  directed  for  medicinal  use;  when 
fresh,  it  has  a moderately  strong,  not  disagreeable 
smell.  Formerly  it  was  much  used  as  a stomachic, 
tonic,  and  alexipharmic,  and  was  supposed  to  be  a 
medicine  of  much  efficacy  in  removing  uterine  obstruc- 
tions, and  destroying  worms ; but  its  medicinal  pow- 
ers became  so  little  regarded  by  modern  physicians, 
that  it  had  fallen  almost  entirely  into  disuse,  till  Baron 
Stoerck  brought  it  into  notice,  by  publishing  several 
cases  of  its  success,  viz.  in  tertian  intermittents, 
worms,  (lumbrici)  and  menstrual  suppressions.  In 
all  these  cases,  he  employed  the  powdered  root  to  the 
extent  of  a scruple  twice  a day.  He  also  made  use  of, 
a tincture,  prepared  of  two  ounces  of  the  fresh  root  di- 
gested in  14  ounces  of  spirit  of  wine;  ofthis20to50 
drops,  two  or  three  times  a day,  were  successfully  em- 
ployed in  epilepsies,  and,  when  joined  with  steel,  this 
root,  we  are  told,  was  of  great  service  to  chlorotic  pa- 
tients. The  dictamnus  undoubtedly,  says  Dr.  Wood- 
ville,  is  a medicine  of  considerable  power;  but  not- 
withstanding the  account  of  it  given  by  Stoerck,  who 
seems  to  have  paid  little  attention  to  its  modus  ope- 
randi,  we  may  still  say  with  Haller,  llnondum  autem 
vires  pro  dignitate  exploratus  est ,”  and  it  is  now 
fallen  into  disuse. 

Dictamnus  creticus.  See  Origanum  dictamnus. 

Didym.u'a.  (From  SiSvpos,  double.)  A cataplasm ; 
so  called  by  Galen,  from  the  double  use  to  which  he 
puts  it. 

DI'DYMI.  (From  SiSvyos,  double.)  Twins.  An 
old  name  of  the  testicles,  and  two  eminences  of  the 
brain,  from  their  double  protuberance. 

DIDYNAMIA.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  Svvagis , 
power,  two  powers.)  The  name  of  a class  in  the 
sexual  system  of  plants,  consisting  of  those  with  her- 
maphrodite flowers,  which  have  four  stamina,  two  of 
■which  are  long,  and  two  short. 

Diecbo'lium.  (From  Sia , and  eicBaWu),  to  cast  out.) 
A medicine  causing  an  abortion. 

Diele'ctron.  (From  Sia,  and  cXexJpov,  amber.) 
A name  of  a troche,  in  which  amber  is  an  ingredient. 

DIEMERBROECK,  Iserand,  was  born  near 
Utrecht, in  1609.  After  graduating  at  Angers,  he  went 
to  Nimeguen  in  1636,  and  for  some  years  continued 
freely  attending  those  who  were  ill  of  the  plague,  which 
raged  with  great  violence,  and  of  which  he  subse- 
quently published  an  account.  This  obtained  him 
much  credit:  and,  in  1642,  he  was  made  professor  ex- 
traordinary in  medicine  at  Utrecht;  when  he  gave 
lectures  on  that  subject,  as  well  as  on  anatomy,  which 
rendered  him  very  popular.  He  received  also  other 
distinctions  at  that  university,  and  continued  in  high 
esteem  till  his  death,  in  1674.  He  was  author,  besides, 
of  a system  of  anatomy,  and  several  other  works  in 
medicine  and  surgery;  part  of  which  were  published 
after  his  death  by  his  son,  especially  his  treatise  on 
the  measles  and  smallpox. 

DIERVTLLA.  (Named  in  honour  of  Mr.Jlierville, 
who  first  brought  it  from  Arcadia.)  See  Lonicera 
diervilla. 


DIG 


DIG 


DIET.  Diceta.  The  dietetic  part  of  medicine  is 
no  inconsiderable  branch,  and  seems  to  require  a 
much  greater  share  of  regard  tlian  it  commonly  meets 
with.  A great  variety  of  diseases  might  be  removed 
by  the  observance  of  a proper  diet  and  regimen,  with- 
out the  assistance  of  medicine,  were  it  not  for  the  im- 
patience of  the  sufferers.  However,  it  may  on  all  oc- 
casions come  in  as  a proper  assistant  to  the  cure, 
which  sometimes  cannot  be  performed  without  a due 
observance  of  the  non-naturals.  That  food  is,  in  ge- 
neral, thought  the  best  and  most  conducive  to  long  life, 
which  is  most  simple,  pure,  and  free  from  irritating 
qualities,  and  such  as  approaches  nearest  to  the  nature 
of  our  own  bodies  in  a healthy  state,  or  is  capable  of 
being  easiest  converted  into  their  substance  by  the  vis 
vitte,  after  it  has  been  duly  prepared  by  the  art  of 
cookery ; but  the  nature,  composition,  virtues,  and  uses 
of  particular  aliments,  can  never  be  learnt  to  satisfac- 
tion, without  the  assistance  of  practical  chemistry. 

Diet  drink.  An.  alterative  decoction  employed 
daily  in  considerable  quantities,  at  least  from  a pint  to 
a quart.  The  decoction  of  sarsaparilla  and  mezereon, 
the  Lisbon  diet  drink,  is  the  most  common  and  most 
useful. 

DIETE'TIC.  Dieteticus.  That  part  of  medicine 
which  considers  the  way  of  living  with  relation  to 
food,  or  diet,  suitable  to  any  particular  case. 

Die'xodos.  (From  Sia,  and  e£oSos , a way  to  pass 
out.)  Diodos.  In  Hippocrates  it  means  evacuation 
by  stool. 

Diffla'tio.  (From  difflo,  to  blow  away.)  Per- 
spiration. 

DIFFUSUS.  Diffused;  spreading.  Applied  to  pa- 
nicles and  stems.  Panicvla  diffusa , that  is,  lax  and 

spreading;  as  in  Saxifrage  umbrosa;  the  London 
pride,  so  common  in  our  gardens ; and  many  grasses, 
especially  the  common  cultivated  oat.  The  Bunias 
kalcile , or  sea  rocket,  has  the  cavils  diffusus. 

DIGA'STRICUS.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  yaorrip,  a 
belly:  so  called  from  its  having  two  bellies.)  Biventer 
raaxillce  of  Albinus.  Mastoido-hygenien  of  Dumas. 
A muscle  situated  externally  between  the  lower  jaw 
and  os  hyoides.  It  arises,  by  a fleshy  belly,  from  the 
upper  part  of  the  processus  mastoideus,  and  descend- 
ing, it  contracts  into  a round  tendon,  which  passes 
through  the  stylohyoideus,  and  an  annular  ligament 
which  is  fastened  to  the  os  hyoides:  then  it  grows 
fleshy  again,  and  ascends  towards  the  middle  of  the 
edge  of  the  lower  jaw,  where  it  is  inserted.  Its  use  is 
to  open  the  mouth  by  pulling  the  lower  jaw  down- 
wards and  backwards ; and  w’ben  the  jaws  are  shut, 
to  raise  the  larynx,  and  consequently  the  pharynx,  up- 
wards, as  in  deglutition. 

Digerk'ntia.  (From  digero,  to  digest.)  Medi- 
cines which  promote  the  secretion  of  proper  pus  in 
wounds  and  ulcers. 

DIGESTER.  A strong  and  tight  iron  kettle  or  cop- 
per, furnished  with  a valve  of  safety,  in  which  bodies 
may  be  subjected  to  the  vapour  of  water,  alkohol,  or 
Eether,  at  a pressure  above  that  of  the  atmosphere. 

DIGESTION.  ( Digestio ; from  digero , to  dis- 
solve.) 

1.  An  operation  in  chemistry  and  pharmacy,  in 
which  such  matters  as  are  intended  to  act  slowly  on" 
each  other,  are  exposed  to  a heat,  continued  for  some 
time. 

2.  In  physiology,  the  change  that  the  food  under- 
goes in  the  stomach,  by  which  it  is  converted  into 
chyme. 

“ The  immediate  object  of  digestion  is  the  forma- 
tion of  chyle,  a matter  destined  for  the  reparation  of 
the  continual  waste  of  the  animal  economy.  The  di- 
gestive organs  contribute  also  in  many  other  ways  to 
nutrition. 

If  we  judge  of  the  importance  of  a function  by  the 
number  and  variety  of  its  organs,  digestion  ought  to 
be  placed  in  the  first  rank ; no  other  function  of  the 
animal  economy  presents  such  a complicated  appa- 
ratus. 

There  always  exists  an  evident  relation  between  the 
sort  of  aliment  proper  for  an  animal  and  the  disposi- 
tion of  its  digestive  organs.  If,  by  their  nature,  the 
aliments  are  very  different  from  the  elements  which 
compose  the  animal : if,  for  example,  it  is  gramini- 
vorous, the  dimensions  of  the  apparatus  will  be  more 
complicated,  and  more  considerable;  if, on  the  con- 
trary, the  animal  feeds  on  flesh,  the  digestive  organs 
2S8 


will  be  fewer  and  more  simple,  as  is  seen  in  the  carni- 
vorous animals.  Man,  called  to  use  equally  animal 
and  vegetable  aliments,  keeps  a mean  between  the 
graminivorous  and  carnivorous  animals,  as  to  the  dis- 
position and  complication  of  his  digestive  apparatus, 
without  deserving,  on  that  account,  to  be  called  omni- 
vorous. 

We  may  represent  the  digestive  apparatus  as  a long 
canal  differently  twisted  upon  itself,  wide  in  certain- 
points,  narrow  in  others,  susceptible  of  contracting  or 
enlarging  its  dimensions,  and  into  which  a great  quan- 
tity of  fluids  are  poured  by  means  of  different  ducts. 
The  canal  is  divided  into  many  parts  by  anatomists ; 

1.  The  mouth. 

2.  The  pharynx. 

3.  The  esophagus.  . 

4.  The  stomach. 

5.  The  small  intestines. 

6.  The  great  intestines. 

7.  The  anus. 

Two  membranous  layers  form  the  sides  of  the  diges- 
tive canal  in  its  whole  length.  The  inner  layer,  winch 
is  intended  to  be  in  contact  with  the  aliments,  consists 
of  a mucous  membrane,  the  appearance  and  structure 
of  which  vary  in  every  one  of  the  portions  of  the 
canal,  so  that  it  is  not  the  same  in  the  pharynx  as  in 
the  mouth,  nor  is  it  in  the  stomach  like  what  it  is  in 
t he  oesophagus,  &c.  In  the  lips  and  the  anus  this  mem- 
brane becomes  confounded  with  the  skin.  The  second 
layer  of  the  sides  of  the  digestive  canal  is  muscular  ; 
it  is  composed  of  two  layers  of  fibres,  one  longitudinal, 
the  other  circular.  The  arrangement,  the  thickness, 
the  nature  of  the  fibres  which  enter  into  the  composi- 
tion of  these  strata  are  different,  according  as  they  are 
observed  in  the  mouth,  in  the  oesophagus,  or  in  the 
large  intestine,  &c.  A great  number  of  blood-vessels 
go  to,  or  come  from  the  digestive  canal ; but  the  abdo- 
minal portion  of  this  canal  receives  a quantity  incom- 
parably greater  than  the  superior  parts.  This  presents 
only  w hat  are  necessary  for  its  nutrition,  and  the  in- 
considerable secretion,  of  which  it  is  the  seat ; while 
the  number  and  the  volume  of  the  vessels  that  belong 
to  the  abdominal  portion  show  that  it  must  be  the 
agent  of  a considerable  secretion.  The  chyliferous 
vessels  arise  exclusively  from  the  small  intestine. 

As  to  the  nerves,  they  are  distributed  to  the  diges- 
tive canal  in  an  order  inverse  tfuthat  of  the  vessels; 
that  is,  the  cephalic  parts,  ccrvicrff&jad  pectoral , receive 
a great  deal  more  than  the  abdominal  portion,  the 
stomach  excepted,  where  the  two  nerves  of  the  eighth 
pair  terminate.  The  other  parts  of  the  canal  scarcely 
receive  any  branch  of  the  cerebral  nerves.  The  only 
nerves  that  are  observed,  proceed  from  the  subdia- 
phragmatic  ganglions  of  the  great  sympathetic.  We 
w ill  see,  farther  on,  the  relation  that  exists  between  the 
mode  of  distribution  of  the  nerves,  and  the  functions 
of  the  superior  and  inferior  portions  of  the  digestive 
canal. 

The  bodies  that  pour  fluids  into  the  digestive  canal, 
are, 

1.  The  digestive  mucous  membrane. 

2.  Isolated  follicles  that  are  spread  in  great  numbers 
in  the  whole  length  of  this  membrane. 

3.  The  agglomerated  follicles  which  are  found  at 
the  isthmus  of  the  throat,  between  the  pillars  of  the 
velum  of  the  palate,  and  sometimes  at  the  junction  of 
the  oesophagus  and  the  stomach. 

4.  The  mucous  glands  which  exist  in  a greater  or 
less  number  in  the  sides  of  the  cheeks,  in  the  roof  of 
the  palate,  around  the  oesophagus. 

5.  The  parotid , the  submaxillary , and  sublingual 
glands,  which  secrete  the  saliva  of  the  mouth,  the 
liver,  and  the  pancreas;  the  first  of  which  pours  the 
bile,  thesecond  the  pancreatic  juice,  by  distinct  canals, 
into  the  superior  part  of  the  small  intestine,  called 
duodenum. 

All  the  digestive  organs  cohtained  in  the  abdominal 
cavity  are  immediately  covered,  more  or  less  com 
pletely,by  the  serous  membrane  called  the  peritomeum. 
This  membrane,  by  the  manner  in  whichit  is  disposed, 
and  by  its  physical  and  vital  properties,  is  very  useful 
in  the  act  of  digestion,  by  preserving  to  the  organs 
their  respective  relations,  by  favouring  their  changes 
of  volume,  by  rendering  easy  the  sliding  motions 
which  they  perform  upon  each  other,  and  upon  the 
adjoiniug  parts. 

The  surface  of  the  mucous  digestive  membrane  is 


DIG 


DIG 


always  lubrificd  by  a glutinous  adhesive  matter,  more 
or  less  abundant,  than  is  seen  in  greatest  quantity 
where  there  exist  no  follicles, — a circumstance  which 
seems  to  indicate  that  these  are  not  the  only  secreting 
organs.  A part  of  this  matter,  to  which  is  given 
generally  the  name  of  mucus , continually  evaporates, 
so  that  there  exists  habitually  a certain  quantity  of 
vapours  in  all  the  points  of  the  digestive  canal.  The 
chemical  nature  of  this  substance,  as  taken  at  the 
intestinal  surface,  is  still  very  little  known.  It  is 
transparent,  with  a light  gray  tint;  it  adheres  to  the 
membrane  which  forms  it ; its  taste  is  salt,  and  its 
acidity  is  shown  by  the  re-agents  : its  formation  still 
continues  some  time  after  death.  That  which  is 
formed  in  the  mouth,  in  the  pharynx,  and  in  the  oeso- 
phagus, goes  into  the  stomach  mixed  with  the  saliva, 
and  the  fluids  of  the  mucous  glands,  by  movements  of 
deglutition,  which  succeed  each  other  at  near  inter- 
vals. According  to  this  detail,  it  would  appear  that 
the  stomach  ought  to  contain,  after  it  has  been  some 
time  empty  of  aliments,  a considerable  quantity  of  a 
mixture  of  mucus,  of  saliva,  and  follicular  fluid.  This 
observation  is  not  proved,  at  least  in  the  greatest  num- 
ber of  ihdividuals.  However,  in  a number  of  persons, 
who  are  evidently  in  a particular  state,  there  exist,  in 
the  morning,  in  the  stomach,  many  ounces  of  this 
mixture.  In  certain  cases  it  is  foamy,  slightly  troubled, 
very  little  viscous,  holding  suspended  some  flakes  of 
mucus;  its  taste  is  quite  acid,  not  disagreeable,  very 
sensible  in  the  throat,  acting  upon  the  teeth,  so  as  to 
diminish  the  polish  of  their  surface,  and  rendering 
their  motion  upon  each  other  more  difficult.  This 
liquid  reddens  paper  stained  with  turnsol. 

In  the  same  individual,  in  other  circumstances,  and 
with  the  same  appearances  as  to  colour,  transparency, 
and  consistency,  the  liquid  of  the  stomach  had  no 
savour,  nor  any  acid  property ; it  is  a little  salt : the 
solution  of  potassa,  as  well  as  the  nitric  and  sulphuric 
acids,  produced  in  it  no  apparent  change. 

When  we  examine  the  dead  bodies  of  persons  killed 
by  accident,  the  stomach  not  having  received  any  ali- 
f ments  nor  drink  for  some  time,  this  organ  contains  only 
a very  few  acid  mucosities  adhering  to  the  coats  of  the 
stomach,  part  of  which,  in  the  pyloric  portion  of  that 
viscus,  appears  reduced  to  chyme.  It  is,  then,  very 
probable,  that  the  liquid  which  ought  to  be  in  the 
stomach  is  digested  by  this  viscus  as  an  alimentary 
substance,  and  that  this  is  the  reason  why  it  does  not 
accumulate  there. 

In  animars  the  organization  of  which  approaches  to 
that  of  man,  such  as  dogs  and  cats,'  there  is  no  liquid 
found  in  the  stomach  after  one,  or  many  days  of  com- 
plete abstinence ; there  is  seen  only  a small  quantity 
of  viscous  mucosity  adhering  to  the  sides  of  the  organ, 
towards  its  splenic  extremity.  This  matter  has  the 
greatest  analogy,  both  chemical  and  physical,  with 
that  which  is  found  in  the  stomach  of  man.  But,  if 
we  make  these  animals  swallow  a body  which  is  not 
susceptible  of  being  digested,  as  a pebble  for  example, 
there  forms,  after  some  time,  in  the  cavity  of  the  sto- 
mach, a certain  quantity  of  an  acid  liquid  mucus  of 
a grayish  colour,  sensibly  salt,  which,  in  its  composi- 
tion, is  nearly  the  same  as  that  found  sometimes  in 
man. 

This  liquid,  resulting  from  the  mixture  of  the  muco- 
sities of  the  mouth,  of  the  pharynx,  of  the  cesophagus 
and  the  stomach,  with  the  liquid  secreted  by  the  folli- 
cles of  the  same  parts  and  with  the  saliva,  has  been 
called  by  physiologists  the  gastric  juice,  and  to  which 
they  have  attributed  particular  properties. 

In  the  small  intestine  there  is  also  formed  a great 
quantity  of  mucous  matter,  which  rests  habitually 
attached  to  the  sides  of  the  intestine;  it  differs  little 
from  that  of  which  we  have  spoken  above  ; it  is  vis- 
cid, tough,  and  has  a salt  and  acid  savour  ; it  is  renew- 
ed with  great  rapidity.  If  the  mucous  membrane  of 
this  intestine  is  laid  bare,  in  a dog,  and  the  layer  of 
mucus  absorbed  by  a sponge,  it  will  appear  again  in  a 
minute.  This  observation  may  be  repeated  as  often  as 
we  please,  until  the  intestine  becomes  inflamed  by  the 
contact  of  the  air,  and  foreign  bodies. 

The  mucus  of  the  stomach  penetrates  into  the  cavity 
of  the  small  intestine  only  under  the'form  of  apulpous 
matter,  grayish  and  opaque,  which  has  all  the.appear- 
ance  of  a particular  chyme. 

It  is  at  the  surface  of  this  same  portion  of  the  diges- 
tive canal  that  the  bile  is  delivered  as  well  as  the  liquid 


secreted  by  the  pancreas.  In  animals,  such  as  dogs, 
the  flowing  of  these  liquids  takes  place  at  intervals  ; 
that  is,  about  twice  in  a minute,  there  is  seen  to  spring 
from  the  orifice  of  the  ductus  choledochus,  or  biliary 
canal,  a drop  of  bile,  which  immediately  spreads  itself 
uniformly  in  a sheet  upon  the  surrounding  parts,  which 
are  already  impregnated  with  it;  there  is,  also,  con- 
stantly found  a certain  quantity  of  bile  in  the  small 
intestine. 

The  flowing  of  the  liquid  formed  by  the  pancreas 
takes  place  much  in  the  same  manner,  but  it  is  much 
slower ; sometimes  a quarter  of  an  hour  passes  before 
a drop  of  this  fluid  springs  from  the  orifice  of  the  canal 
which  pours  it  into  the  intestine 

The  different  fluids  deposited  in  the  small  intestine, 
which  are,  the  chymous  matter  that  comes  from  the 
stomach,  the  mucus,  the  follicular  fluid,  the  bile,  and 
the  pancreatic  liquid,  all  mix  together ; but,  on  account 
of  its  properties,  and  perhaps  of  its  proportions,  the 
bile  predominates,  and  gives  to  the  mixture  its  proper 
taste  and  colour.  A great  part  of  this  mixture  de- 
scends towards  the  large  intestine,  and  passes  into  it ; 
in  this  passage,  it  becomes  more  consistent,  and  the 
clear  yellow  colour  which  it  had  before  becomes  dark, 
and  afterward  greenish.  There  are,  however,  in  this 
respect,  strong  individual  differences. 

In  the  large  intestine,  the  mucous  and  follicular  se- 
cretion appears  less  active  than  in  the  small  intestine  ; 
the  mixture  of  fluids  which  comes  from  the  small  in- 
testine acquires  in  it  more  consistence;  it  contracts  a 
foetid  odour,  analogous  to  that  of  ordinary  excrements : 
it  has,  besides,  the  appearance  of  it,  by  its  colour, 
odour,  &c. 

The  knowledge  of  these  facts  enables  us  to  under- 
stand how  a person  who  uses  no  aliments  can  continue 
to  produce  excrements,  and  how,  in  certain  diseases, 
their  quantity  is  very  considerable,  though  the  sick 
person  has  been  long  deprived  of  every  alimentary 
substance,  even  of  a liquid  kind.  Round  the  anus 
exist  follicles,  which  secrete  a fatty  matter  of  a singu- 
larly powerful  odour. 

We  find  gas  almost  always  in  the  intestinal  canal ; 
the  stomach  contains  only  very  little.  The  chemical 
nature  of  these  gases  has  not  yet  been  examined  with 
care ; but  as  the  saliva  that  we  swallow  is  always 
more  or  less  impregnated  with  atmospheric  air,  it  is 
probably  the  atmospheric  air,  more  or  less  changed, 
which  is  found  in  the  stomach.  At  least,  it  contains 
carbonic  acid.  The  small  intestine  contains  only  a 
small  quantity  of  gas ; it  is  a mixture  of  carbonic  acid, 
of  azote  and  hydrogen.  The  large  intestine  contains 
carbonic  acid,  azote,  and  hydrogen,  sometimes  carbu- 
retted,  sometimes  sulphuretted.  Twenty-three  per 
cent,  of  this  gas  was  found  in  the  rectum  of  an  in- 
dividual, whose  large  intestine  contained  no  excre- 
ment. 

The  muscular  layer  of  the  digestive  canal  deserves 
to  be  remarked,  in  respect  to  the  different  inodes  of 
contraction  it  presents.  The  lips,  the  jaws,  in  most 
cases  the  tongue,  the  cheeks,  are  moved  by  a contrac- 
tion, entirely  like  that  of  the  muscles  of  locomotion. 
The  roof  of  the  palate,  the  pharynx,  the  oesophagus, 
and  the  tongue  in  certain  particular  circumstances, 
offer  many  motions,  which  have  a manifest  analogy 
with  muscular  contraction,  but  which  are  very  differ- 
ent from  it,  because  they  take  place  without  the  parti- 
cipation of  the  will. 

This  dues  not  imply  that  the  motions  of  the  parts' 
just  named  are  beyond  the  influence  of  the  nerves  ; 
experience  proves  directly  the  contrary.  If,  for  exam- 
ple, the  nerves  that  come  to  the  oesophagus  are  cut, 
this  tube  is  deprived  of  its  contractile  faculty. 

The  muscles  of  the  velum  of  the  palate,  those  of  the 
pharynx,  the  superior  two-thirds  of  the  oesophagus, 
scarcely  contract  like  digestive  organs,  but  when  they 
act  in  permitting  substances  to  pass  from  the  mouth 
into  the  stomach.  The  inferior  third  of  the  oesophagus 
presents  a phenomenon  which  is  important  to  be 
known  : this  is  an  alternate  motion  of  contraction  and 
relaxation  which  exists  in  a constant  manner.  The 
contraction  commences  at  the  union  of  the  superior 
two-thirds  of  the  canal  with  the  inferior  third ; it  is 
continued,  with  a certain  rapidity,  to  the  insertion  of 
the  oesophagus  into  the  stomach : when  it  is  once  pro- 
duced, it  continues  for  a time,  which  is  variable;  its 
mean  duration  is,  at  least,  thirty  seconds.  Being  so 
contracted  in  its  inferior  third,  the  oesophagus  is  hard 


DIG 


DIG 


and  elastic,  like  a cord  strongly  stretched.  The  re- 
laxation which  succeeds  the  contraction  happens  all 
at  once,  and  simultaneously  in  all  the  contracted  fibres; 
in  certain  cases,  however,  it  seems  to  take  place  from 
the  superior  to  the  inferior  fibres.  In  the  state  of  re- 
laxation, the  oesophagus  presents  a remarkable  flac- 
cidity,  which  makes  a singular  contrast  with  its  state 
of  contraction. 

This  motion  of  the  oesophagus  depends  on  the  nerves 
of  the  eighth  pair.  When  these  nerves  of  an  animal  are 
cut,  the  oesophagus  no  longer  contracts,  but  neither  is 
it  in  the  relaxed  state  that  we  havedescribed;  its  fibres 
being  separated  from  nervous  influence,  shorten  them- 
selves with  a certain  force,  and  the  canal  is  found  in 
an  intermediate  state  between  contraction  and  relaxa- 
tion. The  vacuity,  or  distention  of  the  stomach,  has 
an  influence  upon  the  duration  and  intensity  of  the 
contraction  of  the  oesophagus. 

From  the  inferior  extremity  of  the  stomach  to  the 
end  of  the  intestine,  rectum,  the  intestinal  canal  pre- 
sents a mode  of  contraction  which  differs,  in  almost 
every  respect,  from  the  contraction  of  the  sub-diaphrag- 
matic portion  of  the  canal.  This  contraction  always 
takes  place  slowly,  and  in  an  irregular  manner ; some- 
times an  hour  passes  before  any  trace  of  it  can  be  per- 
ceived ; at  other  times  many  intestinal  portions  contract 
at  once.  It  appears  to  be  very  little  influenced  by  the 
nervous  system : for  example, — it  continues  in  the  sto- 
mach after  the  section  of  the  nerves  of  the  eighth  pair ; 
it  becomes  more  active  by  the  weakness  of  animals, 
and  even  by  their  death ; in  some,  by  this  cause  it  be- 
comes considerably  accelerated ; it  continues  though 
the  intestinal  canal  is  entirely  separated  from  the  body. 
The  pyloric  portion  of  the  stomach,  the  small  intes- 
tine, are  the  points  of  the  intestinal  canal  where  it  is 
presented  oftenest,  and  most  constantly.  This  motion, 
which  arises  from  the  successive  or  simultaneous  con- 
traction of  the  longitudinal  or  circular  fibres  of  the  in- 
testinal canal,  has  been  differently  denominated  by 
authors : some  have  named  it  vermicular , others  peris- 
taltic, others  again,  sensible  organic  contractility,  &c. 
Whatever  it  is,  the  will  appears  to  exert  no  sensible 
influence  upon  it. 

The  muscles  of  the  anus  contract  voluntarily. 

The  supra-diaphragmatic  portion  of  the  digestive 
canal  is  not  susceptible  of  undergoing  any  considerable 
dilatation ; we  may  easily  see,  by  its  structure,  and  the 
inode  of  contraction  of  its  muscular  coat,  that  it  is  not 
intended  to  allow  the  aliments  to  remain  in  its  cavity, 
but  that  it  is  rather  formed  to  carry  these  substances 
from  the  mouth  into  the  stomach:  this  last  organ,  and 
the  large  intestine,  are  evidently  prepared  to  undergo 
a very  great  distention ; substances,  also,  which  are 
introduced  into  the  alimentary  canal,  accumulate,  and 
remain  for  a time,  more  or  less,  in  their  interior. 

The  diaphragm,  and  the  abdominal  muscles,  pn> 
duce  a sort  of  perpetual  agitation  of  the  digestive  or- 
gans contained  in  the  abdominal  cavity;  they  exert, 
upon  them,  a continual  pressure,  which  becomes  some- 
times very  considerable. 

The  digestive  actions  which  by  their  union  consti- 
tute digestion,  are — 

1.  The  apprehension  of  aliments. 

2.  Mastication. 

3.  Insalivation. 

4.  Deglutition. 

5.  The  action  of  the  stomach. 

6.  The  action  of  the  small  intestines. 

7.  The  action  of  the  large  intestines. 

8.  The  expulsion  of  the  fcecal  matter. 

All  the  digestive  actions  do  not  equally  contribute 
to  the  production  of  chyle ; the  action  of  the  stomach 
and  that  of  the  small  intestines,  are  alone  absolutely 
necessary. 

The  digestion  of  solid  food  requires  generally  the 
eight  digestive  actions;  that  of  drinks  is  much  more 
simple;  it  comprehends  only  apprehension,  degluti- 
tion, the  action  of  the  stomach,  and  that  of  the  small 
intestine. 

The  mastication  and  deglutition  of  the  food  being 
effected,  we  have  now  to  notice  the  action  of  the  sto- 
mach on  the  aliment:  chemical  alterations  will  now 
present  themselves  to  our  examination.  In  the  sto- 
mach the  food  is  transformed  into  a matter  proper  to 
animals,  which  is  named  chyme. 

Before  showing  the  changes  that  the  food  undergoes 
in  the  stomach,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  phenomena 
300 


of  their  accumulation  in  this  viscus,  as  well  as  the 
local  and  general  effects  that  result  from  it. 

The  first  mouthfuls  of  food  swallowed  are  easily 
lodged  in  the  stomach.  This  organ  is  not  much  com 
pressed  by  the  surrounding  viscera ; its  sides  separate 
easily,  and  give  way  to  the  force  which  presses  the  ali- 
mentary bole ; but  its  distention  becomes  more  difficult 
in  proportion  as  new  food  arrives,  for  this  is  accom- 
panied by  the  pressing  together  of  the  abdominal  vis- 
cera, and  the  extension  of  the  sides  of  the  abdomen. 
This  accumulation  takes  place  particularly  towards 
the  right  extremity  and  the  middle  part:  the  pyloric 
half  gives  way  with  more  difficulty. 

While  the  stomach  is  distended,  its  form,  its  rela- 
tions, and  even  its  positions,  undergo  alterations:  in 
place  of  being  flattened  on  its  aspects,  of  occupying 
only  the  epigastrium  and  a part  of  the  left  hypochondri- 
um,  it  assumes  a round  form ; its  great  cul  de  sac  is 
thrust  into  this  hypochondrium,  and  fills  it  almost  com- 
pletely ; the  greater  curvature  descends  towards  the 
umbilicus,  particularly  on  the  left  side ; the  pylorus, 
alone,  fixed  by  a fold  of  the  peritonaeum , preserves  its 
motion  and  its  relations  with  the  surrounding  parts. 
On  account  of  the  resistance  that  the  vertebral  column 
presents  behind,  the  posterior  surface  of  the  stomach 
cannot  distend  itself  on  that  side : for  that  reason  this 
viscus  is  wholly  carried  forward ; and  as  the  pylorus 
and  the  oesophagus  cannot  be  displaced  in  this  direc- 
tion, it  makes  a motion  of  rotation,  by  which  its  great 
curve  is  directed  a little  forward;  its  posterior  aspect 
inclines  downwards,  and  its  superior  upwards. 

Though  it  undergoes  these  changes  of  position  and 
relation,  it,  nevertheless,  preserves  the  recurved  conoid 
form  which  is  proper  to  it.  This  effect  depends  on  the 
manner  in  which  the  three  tunics  contribute  to  its  dila- 
tation. The  two  plates  of  the  serous  membrane  sepa- 
rate and  give  place  to  the  stomach.  The  muscular 
layer  suffers  a real  distention  ; its  fibres  are  prolonged, 
but  so  as  to  preserve  the  particular  form  of  the  stomach. 
Lastly,  the  mucous  membrane  gives  way,  particularly 
in  the  points  where  the  folds  are  multiplied.  It  will 
be  noticed  that  these  are  found  particularly  along  the 
larger  curve,  as  well  as  at  the  splenic  extremity. 

The  dilatation  of  the  stomach  alone  produces  very 
important  changes  in  the  abdomen.  The  total  volume 
of  this  cavity  augments;  the  belly  juts  out;  the  ab- 
dominal viscera  are  compressed  with  greater  force ; 
often  the  necessity  of  passing  urine,  or  faeces,  is  felt. 
The  diaphragm  is  pressed  towards  the  breast,  it  de- 
scends w ith  some  difficulty ; thence  the  motions  of  re- 
spiration, and  the  phenomena  which  depend  on  it, 
are  more  incommoded,  such  as  speech,  singing,  &c. 

In  certain  cases,  the  dilatation  of  the  stomach  may 
be  carried  so  far  that  the  sides  of  the  abdomen  are 
painfully  distended,  and  respiration  becomes  difficult. 

To  produce  such  effects,  the  contraction  of  the  (Eso- 
phagus, which  presses  the  food  in  the  stomach,  must 
be  very  energetic.  We  have  remarked  above  the  con 
siderable  thickness  of  the  muscular  layer  of  this  canal, 
and  the  great  number  of  nerves  which  go  to  it ; nothing 
less  than  this  disposition  is  necessary  to  account  for  the 
force  with  which  the  food  distends  the  stomach.  For 
more  certainty,  the  finger  has  only  to  be  introduced 
into  the  oesophagus  of  an  animal  by  the  cardiac  ori- 
fice, and  the  force  of  the  contraction  will  be  found 
striking. 

But  if  the  food  exerts  so  marked  an  influence  upon 
the  sides  of  the  stomach  and  the  abdomen,  they  ought 
themselves  to  suffer  a proportionate  reaction,  and 
tend  to  escape  by  the  two  openings  of  the  stomach. 
Why  does  this  effect  not  take  place  1 It  is  generally 
said  that  the  cardia  and  pylorus  shut ; but  this  pheno- 
menon has  not  been  submitted  to  any  particular  re- 
searches. Here  is  what  Dr.  Magendie’s  experiments 
have  produced  in  this  respect. 

The  alternate  motion  of  the  oesophagus  prevents  the 
return  of  the  food  into  this  cavity.  The  more  the  sto- 
mach is  distended,  contraction  becomes  the  more  in- 
tense and  prolonged,  and  the  relaxation  of  shorter 
duration.  Its  contraction  generally  coincides  with  the 
instant  of  inspiration,  w'hen  the  stomach  is  most  forci- 
bly compressed.  Its  relaxation  ordinarily  happens  at 
the  instant  of  expiration. 

We  may  have  an  idea  of  this  mechanism  by  laying 
bare  the  stomach  of  a dog,  and  endeavouring  to  make 
the  food  pass  into  the  oesophagus  by  compressing  the 
stomach  with  both  hands.  It  will  be  nearly  impossible 


DIG 


DIG 


to  succeed,  whatever  force  is  used,  if  it  is  done  at  the 
instant  when  the  oesophagus  is  contracted:  but  the 
passage  will  take  place,  in  a certain  degree,  of  itself; 
if  the  stomach  is  compressed  at  the  instant  of  relaxa- 
tion. 

The  resistance  that  the  pylorus  presents  to  the  pas- 
sage of  the  aliments  is  of  another  kind.  In  living 
animals,  whether  the  stomach  is  empty  or  full,  this 
opening  is  habitually  shut,  by  the  constriction  of  its 
fibrous  ring,  and  the  contraction  of  its  circular  fibres. 
There  is  frequently  seen  another  constriction  in  the 
stomach,  at  the  distance  of  one  or  two  inches,  which 
appears  intended  to  prevent  the  food  from  reaching  the 
pylorus;  we  perceive,  also,  irregular  and  peristaltic 
contractions,  which  commence  at  the  duodenum,  and 
are  continued  into  the  pyloric  portion  of  the  stomach, 
the  effect  of  whicli  is  to  press  the  food  towards  the 
splenic  part.  Besides,  should  the  pylorus  not  be  natu- 
rally shut,  the  food  would  have  little  tendency  to  enter 
it,  for  it  only  endeavours  to  escape  into  a place  where 
the  pressure  is  less ; and  this  would  be  equally  great  in 
the  small  intestine  as  in  the  stomach,  since  it  is  nearly 
equally  distributed  over  all  the  abdominal  cavity. 

Among  the  number  of  phenomena  produced  by  the 
food  in  the  stomach,  there  are  several,  the  existence 
of  which,  though  generally  admitted,  do  not  appear 
sufficiently  demonstrated ; such  is  the  diminution  of 
the  volume  of  the  spleen,  and  that  of  the  blood-vessels 
of  the  liver,  or  the  omenta , &c. ; such  is  also  a motion 
of  the  stomach,  which  should  preside  over  the  recep- 
tion of  the  food,  distribute  it  equally  by  exerting  upon 
it  a gentle  pressure,  so  that  its  dilatation,  far  from  being 
a passive  phenomenon,  must  be  essentially  active.  Dr. 
Magendie  has  frequently  opened  animals  the  stomachs 
of  which  were  filled  with  food  ; he  has  examined  the 
bodies  of  executed  persons,  a short  time  after  death, 
and  has  seen  nothing  favourable  to  these  assertions. 

The  accumulation  of  food  in  the  stomach  is  accom- 
panied by  many  sensations,  of  which  it  is  necessary  to 
take  account : — at  first,  it  is  an  agreeable  feeling,  or  the 
pleasure  of  a want  satisfied.  Hunger  is  appeased  by 
degrees;  the  general  weakness  that  accompanied  it  is 
replaced  by  an  active  state,  and  a feeling  of  new  force. 
If  the  introduction  of  food  is  continued,  we  experience 
a sensation  of  fulness  and  satiety  which  indicates  that 
the  stomach  is  sufficiently  replenished ; and  if,  con- 
trary to  this  instinctive  information,  we  still  persist  to 
make  use  of  food,  disgust  and  nausea  soon  arrive,  and 
they  are  very  soon  followed  by  vomiting.  These  dif- 
ferent impressions  must  not  be  attributed  to  the  volume 
of  the  aliments  alone.  Every  thing  being  equal  in 
other  respects,  food  very  nutritive  occasions,  more 
promptly,  the  feeling  of  satiety.  A substance  which  i 
is  not  very  nourishing  does  not  easily  calm  hunger, 
though  it  is  taken  in  great  quantity. 

The  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach,  then,  is  en- 
dowed with  considerable  sensibility,  since  it  distin- 
guishes the  nature  of  substances  which  come  in  con- 
tact with  it.  This  property  is  very  strongly  marked  if 
an  irritating  poisonous  substance  is  swallowed : intole- 
rable pain  is  then  felt.  We  also  know  that  the  stomach 
is  sensible  to  the  temperature  of  food. 

We  cannot  doubt  that  the  presence  of  the  aliments  < 
of  the  stomach  causes  a great  excitement,  from  the  s 
redness  of  the  mucous  membrane,  from  the  quantity  ( 
of  fluid  it  secretes,  and  the  volume  of  vessels  directed  1 
there ; but  this  is  favourable  to  chymification.  This  1 
excitement  of  the  stomach  influences  the  general  state  ; 
of  the  functions. 

The  time  that  the  aliments  remain  in  the  stomach  is  i 
considerable,  generally  several  hours ; it  is  during  this  t 
stay  that  they  are  transformed  into  chyme.  ( 

Changes  of  the  aliments  in  the  stomach : — s 

It  is  more  than  an  hour  before  the  food  suffers  any  t 
apparent  change  in  the  stomach,  more  than  what  re-  i 
suits  from  the  perspiratory  and  mucous  fluids  with  i 
which  they  are  mixed,  and  which  are  continually  re-  t 
newed.  i 

The  stomach  is  uniformly  distended  during  this  l 
time  ; but  the  whole  extent  of  the  pyloric  portion  af-  i 
tervvai  d contracts,  particularly  that  nearest  the  splenic  c 
portion,  into  which  the  food  is  pressed.  Afterward,  t 
there  is  nothing  found  in  the  pyloric  portion  but  t 
chyme,  mixed  with  a small  quantity  of  unchanged  j 
food. 

The  best  authors  have  agreed  to  consider  the  chyme  c 
as  a homogeneous  substance,  pultaceous,  grayish,  of  t 


e a sweetish  taste,  insipid,  slightly  acid,  and  preserving 
ie  some  of  the  properties  of  the  food.  This  description 
';  leayes  much  to  be  explained. 

i-  The  result  of  Dr.  Magendie’s  experiments  are  as  fol- 
lows: 

3-  A.  There  are  as  many  sorts  of  chyme  as  there  are 
g different  sorts  of  food,  if  we  judge  by  the  colour,  con- 
is  sistence,  appearance,  &c. ; as  we  may  easily  ascertain, 
ts  by  giving  different  simple  alimentary  substances  to 
3.  dogs  to  eat,  and  killing  them  during  the  operation  of 
e digestion.  He  frequently  fotfnd  the  same  result  in 
h man,  in  the  dead  bodies  of  criminals,  or  persons  dead 
e by  accident. 

c B.  Animal  substances  are  generally  more  easily  and 
d completely  changed  than  vegetable  substances.  It  fre- 
i,  quently  happens  that  these  last  traverse  the  whole  in- 
e testinal  canal  without  changing  their  apparent  proper- 
ties.  He  has  frequently  seen  in  the  rectum,  and  in  the 
r small  intestine,  the  vegetables  which  are  used  in  soup, 
e spinage,  sorrel,  &c.,  which  had  preserved  the  most 
l partrof  their  properties:  their  colour  alone  appeared 
y sensibly  changed  by  the  contact  of  the  bile. 

Chyme  is  formed  particularly  in  the  pyloric  portion, 
e The  food  appears  to  be  introduced  slowly  into  it,  and 
e during  the  time*  they  remain  they  undergo  transforma- 
r tion.  The  Doctor  believes,  however,  that  he  has  ob- 
’ served  frequently  chymous  matter  at  the  surface  of 
5 the  mass  of  aliments  which  fill  the  splenic  portion ; 
l but  the  aliments  in  general  preserve  their  properties  in 
- this  part  of  the  stomach. 

i It  would  be  difficult  to  tell  why  the  pyloric  portion  is 

> better  adapted  to  the  formation  of  chyme  than  the  rest 
. of  the  stomach  ; perhaps  the  great  number  of  follicles 
s that  are  seen  in  it  modify  the  quantity  or  the  nature 

> of  the  fluid  that  is  there  secreted.  The  transforma- 
, tion  of  alimentary  substances  into  chyme  takes  placq 

generally  from  the  superficies  to  the  centre.  On  the 
surface  of  portions  of  food  swallowed,  there  is  formed 
i a soft  layer  easy  to  be  detached.  The  substances  seem 
: to  be  attacked  and  corroded  by  a reagent  capable  of 
dissolving  them.  The  white  of  a hard  egg,  for  in- 
i stance,  becomes  in  a little  time  as  if  plunged  in  vinegar, 
or  in  a solution  of  potassa. 

C.  Whatever  is  the  alimentary  substance  employed, 
the  chyme  has  always  a sharp  odour  and  taste,  and 
reddens  paper  coloured  with  turnsol. 

D.  There  is  only  a small  quantity  of  gas  found  in 
the  stomach  during  the  formation  of  chyme ; some- 
times there  exists  none.  Generally,  it  forms  a small 
bubble  at  the  superior  part  of  the  splenic  portion. 
Once  only  in  the  body  of  a criminal  a short  time  after 
death  lie  gathered  with  proper  precautions  a quantity 
sufficient  to  be  analyzed.  Chevreuil  found  it  com- 


posed of: 

Oxygen, 11.00 

Carbonic  acid, 14.00 

Pure  hydrogen, 3.55 

Azote, 71.45 


Total, 100.00 


There  is  rarely  any  gas  found  in  the  stomach  of  a 
dog.  We  cannot  then  believe,  with  Professor  Chaus- 
sier,  that  we  swallow  a bubble  of  air  at  every  motion 
of  deglutition,  which  is  pressed  into  the  stomach  by 
the  alimentary  bole.  Were  it  so,  there  ought  to  be 
found  a considerable  quantity  of  air  in  this  organ  after 
a meal : now  the  contrary  is  to  be  seen. 

E.  There  is  never  a great  quantity  of  chyme  accu- 
mulated in  the  pyloric  portion : the  most  that  the  Doc- 
tor ever  saw  in  it  was  scarcely  equal  in  volume  to  two 
or  three  ounces  of  water.  The  contraction  of  the 
stomach  appears  to  have  an  influence  upon  the  pro- 
duction of  chyme.  The  following  is  what  he  observed 
in  this  respect.  After  having  been  some  time  im- 
moveable, the  extremity  of  the  duodenum  contracts, 
the  pylorus  and  the  pyloric  portion  contract  also ; this 
motion  presses  the  chyme  towards  the  splenic  portion 
but  it  afterward  presses  it  in  a contrary  direction,  that 
is,  after  being  distended,  and  having  permitted  the 
chyme  to  enter  again  into  its  cavity,  the  pyloric  por- 
tion contracts  from  left  to  right,  and  directs  the  chyme 
towards  the  duodenum,  which  immediately  passes  the 
pylorus  and  enters  the  intestine. 

The  same  phenomenon  is  repeated  a certain  number 
of  times,  but  it  stops  to  begin  again,  after  a certain 
time.  When  the  stomach  contains  much  food,  this 

301 


DIG 


DIG 


motion  is  limited  to  the  parts  of  the  organ  nearest  the 
pylorus;  but  in  proportion  as  it  becomes  empty,  the 
motion  extends  farther,  and  is  seen  even  in  the  splenic 
portion  when  the  stomach  is  almost  entirely  empty. 
It  becomes  generally  more  strong  about  the  end  of 
cliymification.  Some  persons  have  a distinct  feeling 
of  it  at  this  moment. 

The  pylorus  has  been  made  to  play  a very  important 
part  in  the  passage  of  the  chyme  from  the  stomach  to 
tire  intestine.  It  judges,  they  say,  of  the  chymification 
of  the  food ; it  opens  to  those  that  have  the  required 
qualities,  and  shuts  against  those  that  have  not.  How- 
ever, as  we  daily  observe  substances  not  digestible  tra- 
verse it  easily,  such  as  stones  of  cherries,  it  is  added, 
that  becoming  accustomed  to  a substance  not  chymi- 
fied,  which  presents  itself  repeatedly,  it  at  last  opens 
a passage.  These  considerations,  consecrated  in  a 
certain  degree  by  the  word  pylorus , a porter,  may 
please  the  fancy,  but  they  are  purely  hypothetical. 

F.  All  the  alimentary  substances  are  not  transform- 
ed into  chyme  with  the  same  promptitude. 

Generally  the  fat  substances,  the  tendons,  the  car- 
tilages, the  concrete  albumen,  the  mucilaginous  and 
sweet  vegetables,  resistmore  the  action  of  the  stomach 
than  the  caseous,  fibrinous,  and  glutinous  substances. 
Even  some  substances  appear  refractory : such  as  the 
bones,  the  epidermis  of  fruits,  their  stones,  and  whole 
seeds,  &c. 

In  determining  the  digestibility  of  food,  the  volume 
of  the  portions  swallowed  ought  to  be  taken  into  ac- 
count. The  largest  pieces,  of  whatever  nature,  re- 
main longest  in  the  stomach  ; on  the  contrary,  a sub- 
stance which  is  not  digestible,  if  it  is  very  small,  such 
as  grape  stones,  does  not  rest  in  the  stomach,  but  passes 
quickly  with  the  chymd  into  the  intestine. 

In  respect  of  the  facility  and  quickness  of  the  forma- 
tion of  chyme,  it  is  different  in  every  different  indi- 
vidual. It  is  evident,  after  what  has  been  said,  that  to 
fix  the  necessary  time  for  the  chymification  of  all  the 
food  contained  in  the  stomach,  we  ought  to  take  into 
account  their  quantity,  their  chemical  nature,  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  mastication  acts  upon  them,  and  the 
individual  disposition.  However,  in  four  or  five  hours 
after  an  ordinary  meal,  the  transformation  of  the  whole 
of  the  food  into  chyme  is  generally  effected. 

The  nature  of  the  chemical  changes  that  the  food 
undergoes  in  the  stomach  is  unknown.  It  is  not  be- 
cause there  have  been  no  attempts  at  different  periods 
to  give  explanations  of  them  more  or  less  plausible. 
The  ancient  philosophers  said  that  the  food  became 
putrified  in  the  stomach;  Hippocrates  attributed  the 
digestive  process  to  coction;  Galen  assigned  the  sto- 
mach attractive,  retentive,  concoctive,  expulsive  fa* 
culties,  and  by  their  help  he  attempted  to  explain  di- 
gestion. The  doctrine  of  Galen  reigned  in  the  schools 
until  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century,  when  it 
was  attacked  and  overturned  by  the  fermenting  che- 
mists, who  established  in  the  stomach  an  effervescence, 
a particular  fermentation,  by  means  of  which  the  food 
was  macerated,  dissolved,  precipitated , &c. 

This  system  was  not  long  in  repute ; it  was  replaced 
by  ideas  much  less  reasonable.  Digestion  was  sup- 
posed to  be  only  a trituration,  a bruising  performed  by 
the  stomach;  an  innumerable  quantity  of  little  worms 
was  supposed  to  attack  and  divide  the  food.  Boer- 
liaave  thought  he  had  found  the  truth,  by  combining 
the  different  opinions  that  had  reigned  before  him. 
Haller  did  not  follow  the  ideas  of  his  master;  he  con- 
sidered digestion  a simple  maceration.  He  knew  that 
vegetable  and  animal  matters,  plunged  into  water,  are 
soon  covered  with  a soft  homogeneous  layer;  he  be- 
lieved that  the  food  underwent  a like  change,  by  ma- 
cerating in  the  saliva  and  fluids  secreted  by  the 
stomach. 

Reaumur  and  Spallanzani  made  experiments  on 
animals,  and  demonstrated  the  falsity  of  the  ancient 
systems ; they  showed  that  food,  contained  in  hollow 
metallic  balls  pierced  with  small  holes,  was  digested  the 
same  as  if  it  was  free  in  the  cavity  of  the  stomach. 
They  proved  that  the  stomach  contains  a particular 
fluid,  which  they  call  gastric  juice,  and  that  this  fluid 
w as  the  principal  agent  of  digestion ; but  they  much 
exaggerated  its  properties,  and  they  were  mistaken 
when  they  thought  to  have  explained  digestion  in  con- 
sidering it  as  a solution:  because,  in  not  explaining 
this  solution,  they  did  not  explain  the  changes  of  food 
in  the  stomach. 

302 


In  the  formation  of  chyme,  it  is  necessary  to  consi- 
der, 1st,  The  circumstances  in  which  the  food  is  found 
in  the  stomach.  2dly,  The  chemical  nature  of  it. 

The  circumstances  affecting  the  food  in  the  stomach, 
during  its  stay  there,  are  not  numerous  : 1st,  it  suffers  a 
pressure  more  or  less  strong,  either  from  the  sides  of 
the  abdomen,  or  from  those  of  the  stomach ; 2d!y,  the 
whole  is  entirely  moved  by  the  motions  of  respiration ; 
3dly,  it  is  exposed  to  a temperature  of  thirty  to  thirty- 
two  degrees  of  Reaumur ; 4thly,  it  is  exposed  to  the 
action  of  the  saliva,  of  the  mucosities  proceeding  from 
the  mouth  and  the  oesophagus,  as  well  as  the  fluid 
secreted  by  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  this  fluid  is  slightly  vis- 
cous, that  it  contains  much  water,  mucus,  salts,  with  a 
base  of  soda  and  ammonia,  and  lactic  acid  of  Ber- 
zelius. 

With  regard  to  the  nature  of  the  food,  we  have 
already  seen  how  variable  it  is,  since  all  the  imme- 
diate principles,  animal  or  vegetable,  may  be  carried 
into  the  stomach,  in  different  forms  and  proportions, 
and  serve  usefully  in  the  formation  of  chyme.  Now, 
making  allowance  for  the  nature  of  the  food,  and  the 
circumstances  in  which  it  is  placed  in  the  stomacn, 
shall  we  be  able  to  account  for  the  known  phenomena 
of  the  formation  of  chyme  1 The  temperature  of  thirty 
to  thirty-two  degrees,  R.  = 100  to  104  F. ; the  pressure, 
and  the  tossing  that  the  food  sustains,  cannot  be  con- 
sidered as  the  principal  cause  of  its  transformation  into 
chyme ; it  is  probable  that  they  only  co-operate  in  this ; 
the  action  of  the  saliva  and  that  of  the  fluid  secreted  in 
the  stomach  remain ; but  after  the  known  composition 
of  the  saliva,  it  is  hardly  possible  that  it  can  attack 
and  change  the  nature  of  the  food ; at  most,  it  can 
only  serve  to  divide,  to  imbibe  it  in  such  a manner  as 
to  separate  its  particles : it  must  then  be  the  action  of 
the  fluid  formed  by  the  internal  membrane  of  the  sto- 
mach. It  appears  certain  that  this  fluid,  in  acting  che- 
mically upon  the  alimentary  substances,  dissolves 
them  from  the  surface  towards  the  centre. 

To  produce  a palpable  proof  of  it,  with  this  fluid  of 
which  we  speak,  there  have  been  attempts  made  to 
produce  what  is  called  in  physiology,  artificial  di- 
gestions, that  is,  after  having  macerated  food,  it  is 
mixed  with  gastric  juice,  and  then  exposed  in  a tube, 
or  any  other  vase,  to  a temperature  equal  to  that  of 
Jhe  stomach.  Spallanzani  advanced,  that  these  di- 
gestions succeeded,  and  that  the  food  was  reduced  to 
chyme ; but,  according  to  the  researches  of  de  Monte- 
gre,  it  appears  that  they  are  not ; and  that,  on  the  con- 
trary, the  substances  employed  undergo  no  alteration 
analogous  to  chymification ; this  is  agreeable  to  expe- 
riments made  by  Reaumur.  But  because  the  gastric 
juice  does  not  dissolve  the  food  when  put  with  it  into 
a tube,  we  ought  not  to  conclude  that  the  same  fluid 
cannot  dissolve  the  food  when  it  is  introduced  into  the 
stomach ; the  circumstances  are  indeed  far  front  being 
the  same : in  the  stomach,  the  temperature  is  constant, 
the  food  is  pressed  and  agitated,  and  the  saliva  and 
gastric  juice  are  constantly  renewed ; as  soon  as  the 
chyme  is  formed,  it  is  carried  away  and  pressed  in  the 
duodenum.  Nothing  of  this  takes  place  in  the  tube  or 
vase  which  contains  the  food  mixed  with  gastric 
juice;  therefore,  the  want  of  success  in  artificial  di- 
gestions, proves  nothing  which  tepds  to  explain  the 
formation  of  chyme. 

But  how  does  it  happen  that  the  same  fluid  can  act 
in  a manner  similar  upon  the  great  variety  of  aliment- 
ary substances,  animal  and  vegetable!  The  acidity 
which  characterizes  it,  though  fit  to  dissolve  certain 
matters,  as  albumen,  for  example,  would  not  be  suita- 
ble for  dissolving  fat. 

To  this  it  may  be  answered,  that  nothing  proves  the 
gastric  juice  to  continue  always  the  same;  the  small 
number  of  analyses  that  have  been  made  of  it  demon- 
strate, on  the  contrary,  that  it  presents  considerable 
varieties  in  its  properties.  The  contact  of  different 
sorts  of  food  upon  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  sto- 
mach, may  possibly  influence  its  composition ; it  is  at 
least  certain,  that  this  varies  in  the  different  animals. 
For  qxample,  that  of  man  is  incapable  of  acting  on 
bones ; it  is  well  known  that  the  dog  digests  these  sub- 
stances perfectly. 

Generally  speaking,  the  action  by  which  the  chyme 
is  formed  prevents  the  reaction  of  the  constituent 
elements  of  the  food  upon  each  other : but  this  effort 
takes  place  only  in  good  digestions;  in  bad  digestion, 


. DIG 


DIG 


fermentation,  and  even  putrefaction  may  take  place : 
this  may  be  suspected  by  the  great  quantity  of  inodor- 
ous gases  that  are  developed  in  certain  cases,  and  the 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  which  is  disengaged  in  others. 

The  nerves  of  the  eighth  pair  have  long  been  consi- 
dered to  direct  the  act  of  chymification : in  fact,  if 
these  nerves  are  cut,  or  tied  in  the  neck,  the  matters 
introduced  into  the  stomach  undergo  no  alteration. 
But  the  consequence,  (says  Dr.  Magendie)  that  is  de- 
duced from  this  fact,  does  not  appear  to  me  to  be  rigor- 
ous. Is  not  the  effect  produced  upon  the  stomach  by 
the  injury  done  to  respiration,  confounded  here  with 
the  direct  influence  of  the  section  of  the  nerves  of  the 
eighth  pair  upon  this  organ  1 I am  inclined  to  believe 
it : for,  as  I have  many  times  done,  if  the  two  eighth 
pairs  be  cut  in  the  breast  below  the  branches  which  go 
to  the  lungs,  the  food  which  is  introduced  afterward 
into  the  stomach  is  transformed  into  chyme,  and  ulti- 
mately furnishes  an  abundant  chyle. 

Some  persons  imagine  that  electricity  may  have  an 
influence  in  the  production  of  chyme,  and  that  the 
nerves  we  mention  may  be  the  conductors:  there  is  no 
established  fact  to  justify  this  conjecture.  The  most 
probable  use  of  the  nerves  of  the  eighth  pair  is,  to  esta- 
blish intimate  relations  between  the  stomach  and  the 
brain,  to  give  notice  whether  any  noxio/ts  substances 
have  entered  along  with  the  food,  and  whether  they 
are  capable  of  being  digested. 

In  a strong  person,  the  operation  of  the  formation  of 
chyme  takes  place  without  his  knowledge ; it  is  merely 
perceived  that  the  sensation  of  fulness,  and  the  diffi- 
culty of  respiration  produced  b^  the  distention  of  the 
stomach,  disappear  by  degrees ; but  frequently,  with 
people  of  a delicate  temperament,  digestion  is  accom- 
panied with  feebleness  in  the  action  of  the  senses,  with 
a general  coldness,  and  slight  shiverings ; the  activity 
of  the  mind  diminishes,  and  seems  to  become  drowsy, 
and  there  is  a disposition  to  sleep.  The  vital  powers 
are  then  said  to  be  concentrated  in  the  organ  that  acts, 
and  to  abandon  for  an  instant  the  others.  To  those 
general  effects  are  joined  the  production  of  the  gas  that 
escapes  by  the  mouth,  a feeling  of  weight,  of  heat,  of 
giddiness,  and  sometimes  of  burning,  followed  by  an 
analogous  sensation  along  the  oesophagus,  &c.  These 
effects  are  felt  particularly  towards  the  end  of  the 
chymification.  It  does  not  appear,  however,  that  these 
laborious  digestions  are  much  less  beneficial  than  the 
others. 

From  the  stomach,  the  food  is  received  into  the 
small  intestine , which  is  the  longest  portion  of  the  di- 
gestive canal ; it  establishes  a communication  between 
the  stomach  and  the  large  intestine.  Not  being  sus- 
ceptible of  much  distention,  it  is  twisted  a great  many 
times  upon  itself,  being  much  longer  than  the  place 
in  which  it  is  contained.  It  is  fixed  to  the  vertebral 
column  by  a fold  of  the  peritonteum,  which  limits,  yet 
aids  its  motions ; its  longitudinal  and  circular  fibres 
are  not  separated  as  in  the  stomach ; its  mucous  mem- 
brane, which  presents  many  villi,  and  a great  number 
of  mucous  follicles,  forms  irregular  circular  folds,  the 
number  of  which  are  greater  in  proportion  as  the  intes- 
tine is  examined  nearer  the  pyloric  orifice:  these  folds 
are  called  valvules  conniventes. 

The  small  intestine  receives  many  blood-vessels ; its 
nerves  come  from  the  ganglions  of  the  great  sympa- 
thetic. At  its  internal  surface,  the  numerous  orifices 
of  the  chyliferous  vessels  open. 

This  intestine  is  divided  into  three  parts,  called  the 
duodenum,  jejunum , and  ileum.  The  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  small  intestine,  like  that  of  the  stomach, 
secretes  abundance  of  mucus ; viscous,  thready,  of  a 
salt  taste,  and  reddens  strongly  turnsol  paper ; all  which 
properties  are  also  in  the  liquid  secreted  by  the  sto- 
mach. Haller  qave  this  fluid  the  name  of  intestinal 
juice ; the  quantity  that  is  formed  in  twenty-four  hours 
he  estimated  at  eight  pounds. 

Not  far  from  the  gastric  extremity  of  this  intestine 
is  the  common  orifice  of  the  biliary  and  pancreatic 
canals,  by  which  the  fluid  secreted  by  the  liver  and 
the  pancreas  flow  into  the  intestinal  cavity.  If  the 
formation  of  the  chyme  is  still  a mystery,  the  nature  of 
the  phenomena  that  take  place  in  the  small  intestine 
are  little  better  known. 

In  the  experiments  which  have  been  made  on  dogs 
and  rabbitSfthe  chyme  is  seen  to  pass  from  the  stomach 
into  the  duodenum.  The  phenomena  are  these.  At 
Intervals,  more  or  less  distant,  a contractile  motion 


commences  towards  the  middle  of  the  duodenum;  it 
is  propagated  rapidly  to  the  site  of  the  pylorus : this 
ring  contracts  itself,  as  also  the  pyloric  part  of  the 
stomach  ; by  this  motion,  the  matters  contained  in  the 
duodenum  are  pressed  back  towards  the  pylorus,  where 
they  are  stopped  by  the  valve,  and  those  that  are  found 
in  the  pyloric  part,  are  partly  pressed  towards  the 
splenic  part ; but  this  motion,  directed  from  the  intes- 
tine towards  the  stomach,  is  very  soon  replaced  by 
another  in  a contrary  direction,  that  is,  which  propa- 
gates itself  from  the  stomach  towards  the  duodenum, 
the  result  of  which  is  to  make  a considerable  quantity 
of  chyme  pass  the  pylorus. 

This  fact  seems  to  indicate  that  the  valve  of  the 
pylorus  serves  as  much  to  prevent  the  matters  con- 
tained in  the  small  intestine  from  flowing  back  into  the 
stomach,  as  to  retain  the  chyme  and  the  food  in  the 
cavity  of  this  organ. 

The  motion  that  we  have  described,  is  generally  re- 
peated many  times  following,  and  modified  as  to  the 
rapidity,  the  intensity  of  the  contraction,  &c. ; it  then 
ceases  to  begin  again  after  some  time.  It  is  not  very 
marked  in  the  first  moments  of  the  formation  of  the 
qhyme ; the  extremity  only  of  the  pyloric  part  partici- 
pates in  it.  It  augments  in  proportion  as  the  stomach 
becomes  empty;  and,  towards  the  end  of  chymifica- 
tion, i'c  often  takes  place  over  the  whole  stomach.  It 
is  not  suspended  by  the  section  of  the  nerves  of  the 
eighth  pair. 

Thus  the  entrance  of  chyme  into  the  small  intestine 
is  not  perpetual.  According  as  it  is  repeated,  the  chyme 
accumulates  in  the  first  portion  of  the  intestine,  it  dis- 
tends its  sides  a little,  and  presses  into  the  intervals  of 
the  valves ; its  presence  very  soon  excites  the  organ 
to  contract,  and  by  this  means  one  part  advances  into 
the  intestine ; the  other  remains  attached  to  the  sur- 
face of  its  membrane,  and  afterward  takes  the  same 
direction.  The  same  phenomenon  continues  down  to 
the  large  intestine ; but,  as  the  duodenum  receives  new 
portions  of  the  chyme,  it  happens  at  last  that  the  small 
intestine  is  filled  in  its  whole  length  with  this  matter. 
It  is  observed  only  to  be  much  less  abundant  near  the 
caecum  than  at  the  pyloric  extremity. 

The  motion  that  determines  the  progress  of  the 
chyme  through  the  small  intestine,  has  a great  analogy 
with  that  of  the  pylorus : it  is  irregular,  returns  at  pe- 
riods which  are  variable,  is  sometimes  in  one  direc- 
tion, sometimes  in  another,  takes  place  sometimes  in 
many  parts  at  once;  It  is  always  slow,  more  or  less ; 
it  causes  relative  changes  among  the  intestinal  cir- 
cumvolutions. It  is  beyond  the  influence  of  the  will. 

We  should  form  a false  idea  of  it  were  we  merely 
to  examine  the  intestine  of  an  animal  recently  dead ; 
it  has  then  a much  greater  activity  than  during  life. 
Nevertheless,  in  weak  digestions  it  appears  to  acquire 
more  than  ordinary  energy  and  velocity. 

In  whatever  manner  this  motion  takes  place,  the 
chyme  appears  to  move  very  slowly  in  the  small  intes- 
tine: the  numerous  valves  that  it  contains,  the  multi- 
tude of  asperities  that  cover  the  mucous  membrane, 
the  many  bendings  of  the  canal,  are  so  many  circum- 
stances that  ought  to  contribute  to  retard  its  progress, 
but  which  ought  to  favour  its  mixture  with  the  fluids 
contained  in  the  intestine,  and  the  production  of  the 
chyle  which  results  from  it. 

Changes  that  the  chyme  undergoes  in  the  small  in- 
testine.— It  is  only  about  the  height  of  the  orifice  of 
the  choledochus  and  pancreatic  canal  that  the  chyme 
begins  to  change  its  properties.  Befbre  this,  it  pre- 
serves its  colour,  its  semi-fluid  Consistence,  its  sharp 
odour,  its  slightly  acid  savour  ; but,  in  mixing  with  the 
bile  and  the  pancreatic  juice,  it  assumes  new  qualities : 
its  colour  becomes  yellowish,  its  taste  bitter,  and  its 
sharp  odour  diminishes  much.  If  it  proceeds  from  ani- 
mal or  vegetable  matters,  which  contained  grease  or 
oil,  irregular  filaments  are  seen  to  form  here  and  there 
upon  its  surface ; they  are  sometimes  flat,  at  other 
times  rounded,  attach  themselves  quickly  to  the  surface 
of  the  valve,  and  appear  to  consist  of  crude  chyle. 
This  matter  is  not  seen  when  the  chyme  proceeds  from 
matter  that  contained  no  fat ; it  is  a grayish  layer, 
more  or  less  thick,  which  adheres  to  the  mucous  mem- 
brane, and  appears  to  contain  the  elements  of  chyle. 
The  same  phenomena  are  observed  in  the  two  superior 
thirds  of  the  small  intestine:  but  in  the  inferior  third , 
the  chymous  matter  is  more  consistent ; its  yellow  co- 
lour becomes  more  deep ; it  ends  sometimes  bv  becom- 

303 


DIG 


DIG 


Ing  of  a greenish  brown,  which  pierces  through  the 
intestinal  parietes,  and  gives  an  appearance  to  the 
ileum,  distinct  from  that  of  the  duodenum  and  jejunum. 
When  it  is  examined  near  the  ccecum , there  are  few  or 
no  whitish  chylous  striae  seen ; it  seems,  in  this  place, 
to  be  only  the  remainder  of  the  matter  which  has 
served  in  the  formation  of  the  chyle. 

After  what  has  been  said  above,  upon  the  varieties 
that  the  chyme  presents,  we  may  understand  that  the 
changes  it  undergoes  in  the  small  intestine  are  variable 
according  to  its  properties ; in  fact,  the  phenomena  of 
digestion  in  the  small  intestine,  vary  according  to  the 
nature  of  the  food.  . The  chyme,  however,  preserves 
its  acid  property ; and  if  it  contains  small  quantities 
of  food  or  other  bodies  that  have  resisted  the  action  of 
the  stomach,  they  traverse  the  small  intestine  without 
undergoing  any  alteration.  The  same  phenomena  ap- 
pear when  the  same  substances  have  been  used.  Dr. 
Magendie  has  ascertained  this  fact  upon  the  bodies  of 
two  criminals,  who,  two  hours  before  death,  had  taken 
an  ordinary  meal,  in  which  they  had  eaten  the  same 
food  nearly  in  equal  quantity  ; the  matters  contained 
in  the  stomach,  the  chyme  in  the  pyloric  portion 
and  in  the  small  intestine,  appeared  to  him  exactly 
the  same  as  to  consistence,  colour,  taste,  odour,  &c. 

There  is  generally  gas  found  in  the  small  intestine 
during  the  formation  of  chyle.  Drs.  Magendie  and 
Chevreuil  have  made  experiments  upon  the  bodies  of 
criminals  opened  shortly  after  death,  and  who,  being 
young  and  vigorous,  presented  the  most  favourable  con- 
ditions for  such  researches.  In  a subject  of  twenty- 
four  years,  who  had  eaten,  two  hours  before  his  death, 
bread,  and  some  Swiss  cheese,  and  drank  water  red- 


dened with  wine,  they  found  in  the  small  intestine: 

Oxygen 

Carbonic  acid 

...  24.39 

Pure  hydrogen 

Azote 

...  20.08 

Total 

In  a second  subject,  aged  twenty-three  years,  who 

had  eaten  of  the  same  food  at  the 

same  hour,  and 

whose  punishment  took  place  at  the 

same  time : 

Oxygen 

Carbonic  acid '..... 

Pure  hydrogen 

Azote 

Total 

in  a third  experiment,  made  upon  a young  man  of 
twenty-eight  years,  who,  four  hours  before  death  had 
eaten  bread,  beef,  lentiles,  and  drank  red  wine,  they 
found  in  the  same  intestine : 


Oxygen 0.00 

Carbonic  acid • • • • 25.00 

Pure  hydrogen 8.40 

Azote 66.60 

Total 100.00 


They  never  observed  any  other  gases  in  the  small  in- 
testine. These  gases  might  have  different  origins. 
They  might  possibly  come  from  the  stomach  with  the 
chyme ; or  they  were,  perhaps,  secreted  by  the  intes- 
tinal mucous  membrane ; they  might  arise  from  the 
reciprocal  action  of  the  matters  contained  in  the  intes- 
tine ; or  perhaps  they  might  come  from  all  these  sources 
at  once. 

However,  the  stomach  contains  oxygen,  and  very 
little  hydrogen,  while  they  have  almost  always  found 
much  hydrogen  in  the  small  intestine,  and  never  any 
oxygen.  Besides,  it  is  a daily  observation,  that  the 
little  gas  that  the  stomach  contains  is  generally  passed  | 
by  the  mouth  towards  the  end  of  chymificalion,  pro- 
bably, because  at  this  instant  it  can  more  easily  ad- 
vance into  the  oesophagus. 

The  probability  of  the  formation  of  gases  by  the 
secretion  of  the  mucous  membrane  could  not  be  at  all 
admissible,  except  for  carbonic  acid,  which  seems  to 
be  formed  in  this  manner  in  respiration.  With  regard 
to  the  action  of  matters  contained  in  the  intestine,  Dr. 
Magendie  says  he  has  many  times  seen  the  chymous 
matter  let  bubbles  of  gas  escape  very  rapidly.  This 
took  place  from  the  orifice  of  the  ductus  choledochus 
to  the  commencement  of  the  ileum  • there  was  no  trace 
304 


of  it  perceived  in  this  last  intestine,  nor  in  the  superior 
part  of  the  duodenum,  nor  the  stomach.  He  made 
this  observation  again  upon  the  body  of  a criminal 
four  hours  after  death ; it  presented  no  traces  of  putre- 
faction. 

The  alteration  which  chyme  undergoes  in  the  sma'l 
intestine  is  unknown ; it  is  easily  seen  to  be  the  result 
of  the  action  of  the  bile,  of  the  pancreatic  juice,  and 
of  the  fluid  secreted  by  the  mucous  membrane,  upon 
the  chyme.  But  what  is  the  play  of  the  affinities  in 
this  real  chemical  operation,  and  why  is  the  chyle  pre- 
cipitated against  the  surface  of  the  valmdce  conniven- 
tes,  while  the  rest  remains  in  the  intestine  to  be  after- 
ward expelled  1 This  is  completely  unknown. 

We  have  learned  something  more  of  the  time  that 
is  necessary  for  this  alteration  of  the  chyme.  The 
phenomenon  does  not  take  place  quickly:  in  animals, 
it  often  happens  that  we  do  not  find  any  chyle  formed 
three  or  four  hours  after  the  meal. 

After  what  has  been  said,  we  see  that  in  the  small 
intestine,  the  chyme  is  divided  into  two  parts  : the  one 
which  attaches  itself  to  the  sides,  and  which  is  the 
chyle  still  impure;  the  other  the  true  refuse,  which  is 
destined  to  be  thrown  into  the  large  intestine,  and  af- 
terward entirely  carried  out  of  the  body. 

The  manner  in  which  drinks  accumulate  in  the  sto- 
mach differs  little  from  that  of  the  aliments ; it  is  gene- 
rally quicker,  more  equal,  and  more  easy;  probably 
because  the  liquids  spread,  and  distend  the  stomach 
more  uniformly.  In  the  same  manner  as  the  food, 
they  occupy  more  particularly  its  left  and  middle  por- 
tion ; the  pyloric,  or  *ight  extremity,  contains  always 
much  less.  * 

The  distention  of  the  stomach  must  not,  however,  be 
carried  to  a great  degree,  for  the  liquid  would  be  ex- 
pelled by  vomiting.  This  frequently  happens  to  per- 
sons that  swallow  a great  quantity  of  drink  quickly. 
When  we  wish  to  excite  vomiting  in  persons  who 
have  taken  an  emetic,  one  of  the  best  means  is  to 
make  them  drink  a number  of  glasses  of  liquid  quickly. 

The  presence  of  drinks  in  the  stomach  produces 
local  phenomena  like  those  which  take  place  from  the 
accumulation  of  the  aliments;  the  same  changes  in  the 
form  and  position  of  the  organ,  the  same  distention  of 
the  abdomen,  the  same  contraction  of  the  pylorus  and 
the  oesophagus,  &c. 

The  general  phenomena  are  different  from  those 
produced  by  the  aliments:  this  depends  on  the  action 
of  the  liquids  upon  the  sides  of  the  stomach,  and 
the  quickness  with  which  they  are  carried  into  the 
blood. 

Potations,  in  passing  rapidly  through  the  mouth  and 
the  oesophagus,  preserve  more  than  the  food  their  pro- 
per temperature  until  they  arrive  in  the  stomach.  We 
therefore  prefer  them  to  those,  when  we  wish  to  expe- 
rience in  this  organ  a feeling  of  heat  or  of  cold : hence 
arises  the  preference  that  we  give  to  hot  drinks  in 
winter,  and  cold  drinks  in  summer. 

Every  one  knows  that  the  drinks  remain  a much 
shorter  time  in  the  stomach  than  the  aliments ; but  the 
manner  of  their  passage  out  of  this  viscus  is  still  very 
little  known.  It  is  generally  supposed  that  they  tra- 
verse the  pylorus  and  pass  into  the  small  intestine, 
where  they  are  absorbed  with  the  chyle ; nevertheless 
a ligature  applied  round  the  pylorus  in  such  a manner 
as  to  hinder  it  from  penetrating  into  the  duodenum, 
does  not  much  retard  its  disappearance  from  the  cavity 
of  the  stomach. 

Alteration  of  drinks  in  the  stomach. — Fluids,  in 
respect  of  the  alterations  that  they  prove  in  the  sto- 
mach, may  be  divided  into  two  classes : the  one  sort 
do  not  form  any  chyme,  and  the  other  are  chymified 
wholly  or  in  part. 

To  the  first  class  belong  pure  water,  alkohol,  suffi- 
ciently weak  to  be  considered  as  a drink,  the  vegetable 
acids,  &c.  During  its  stay  in  the  stomach,  water 
assumes  an  equilibrium  of  temperature  with  the  sides 
of  this  viscus : it  mixes  at  the  same  time  with  mucus, 
the  gastric  juice,  and  the  saliva  which  are  found  in  it ; 
it.  becomes  muddy,  and  afterward  disappears  slowly 
without  suffering  any  other  transformation.  One  part 
passes  into  the  small  intestine;  the  other  appears  to  be 
directly  absorbed.  There  remains  after  its  disappear- 
ance a certain  quantity  of  mucus,  which  is  very  soon 
reduced  to  chyme  like  the  aliments.  By.  observation 
we  know  that  water  deprived  of  atmospheric  air,  as 
distilled  water,  or  water  charged  with  a great  quantity 


DIG 


DIG 


of  salts,  as  well-water,  remain  long  in  the  stomach 
and  produce  a feeling  of  weight. 

Alkohol  acts  quite  in  a different  manner.  We  know 
the  impression  of  burning  heat  that  it-causes  at  first  in 
its  passage  through  the  mouth,  the  pharynx,  the  oeso- 
phagus ; and  that  which  it  excites  when  it  enters  the 
stomach  : the  effects  of  this  action  determine  the  con- 
traction of  this  organ,  irritate  the  mucous  membrane, 
and  augment  the  secretion  of  which  it  is  the  seat ; it 
coagulates  at  the  same  time  all  the  albuminous  parts 
with  which  it  is  in  contact ; and  as  the  different  liquids 
in  the  stomach  contain  a considerable  proportion  of 
this  matter,  it  happens  that  a short  time  after  alkohol 
has  been  swallowed,  there  is  in  this  viscus  a certain 
quantity  of  concrete  albumen.  The  mucus  undergoes 
a modification  analogous  to  that  of  the  albumen  ; it 
becomes  hard,  forms  irregular  elastic  filaments,  which 
preserve  a certain  transparency. 

In  producing  these  phenomena,  the  alkohol  mixes 
with  the  water  that  the  saliva  and  the  gastric  juice 
contain ; probably  it  dissolves  a part  of  the  elements 
that  enter  into  their  composition,  so  that  it  ought  to  be 
much  weakened  by  its  stay  in  the  stomach.  It  dis- 
appears very  quickly ; its  general  effects  are  also  very 
rapid,  and  drunkenness  or  death  follow  almost  imme- 
diately the  introductionof  too  great  a quantity  of  alko- 
hol into  the  stomach. 

The  matters  coagulated  by  the  action  of  the  alkohol 
are,  after  its  disappearance,  digested  like  solid  ali- 
ments. 

Among  the  drinks  that  are  reduced  to  chyme,  some 
are  reduced  in  part  and  some  wholly. 

Oil  is  in  this  last  case;  it  is  transformed,  in  the 
pyloric  part,  into  a matter  analogous  in  appearance 
with  that  which  is  drawn  from  the  purification  of  oils 
by  sulphuric  acid  ; this  matter  is  evidently  the  chyme 
of  oil.  On  account  of  this  transformation,  oil  is  per- 
haps the  liquid  that  remains  longest  in  the  stomach. 

Every  one  knows  that  milk  curdles  soon  after  it  is 
swallowed ; this  curd  then  becomes  a solid  aliment, 
which  is  digested  in  the  ordinary  manner.  Whey  only 
can  be  considered  as  drink 

The  greatest  number  of  drinks  that  we  use  are 
formed  of  water,  or  of  alkohol,  in  which  are  in  sus- 
pension or  dissolution,  immediate  animal  or  vegetable 
principles,  such  as  gelatine,  albumen,  osmazome,  sugar, 
gum,  fecula,  colouring  or  astringent  matters,  <fcc. 
These  drinks  contain  salts  of  lime,  of  soda,  of  po- 
tassa,  &c. 

The  result  of  several  experiments  that  have  been 
made  upon  animals,  and  some  observations  that  have 
been  made  on  man,  is,  that  there  is  a separation  of  the 
water  and  the  alkohol  in  the  stomach  from  the  mat- 
ters that  these  liquids  hold  in  suspension  Or  solution. 
These  matters  remain  in  the  stomach,  where  they  are 
transformed  into  chyme,  like  the  aliments ; while  the 
liquids  with  which  they  were  united  are  absorbed,  or 
pass  into  the  small  intestine ; lastly,  they  are  conduct- 
ed, as  we  have  just  now  seen,  in  treating  of  water  and 
alkohol. 

Salts  that  are  in  solution  in  water  do  not  abandon 
this  liquid,  and  are  absorbed  with  it.  Red  wine,  for 
example,  becomes  muddy  at  first  by  its  mixture  with 
juices  that  are  formed  in,  or  carried  into  the  stomach ; 
it  very  soon  coagulates  the  albumen  of  these  fluids,  | 
and  becomes  flaky;  afterward,  its  colouring  matter, 
carried  perhaps  by  the  mucus  and  the  albumen,  is  de- 
posited upon  the  mucous  membrane:  there  is  a cer- 
tain quantity  of  it  seen  at  least  in  the  pyloric  por- 
tion ; the  watery  and  alkoholic  parts  disappear  with 
rapidity. 

The  broth  of  meat  undergoes  the  same  changes. 
The  water  that  it  contains  is  absorbed;  the  gelatine, 
the  albumen,  the  fat,  and  probably  the  osmazome, 
remain  in  the  stomach,  where  they  are  reduced  into 
chyme. 

Action  of  the  small  intestine  upon  drinks. — After 
what  has  been  read,  it  is  clear  that  fluids  penetrate, 
under  two  forms,  into  the  small  intestine  : 1st,  under 
that  of  liquid ; 2dly,  under  that  of  chyme. 

The  liquids  that  pass  from  the  stomach  into  the  in- 
testine remain  but  a short  time,  except  under  particular 
circumstances;  they  do  not  appear  to  undergo  any 
other  alteration  than  their  mixture  with  the  intestinal 
juice,  the  chyme,  the  pancreatic  liquid,  and  the  bile ; 
they  do  not  form  any  sort  of  chyle ; they  are  generally 
absorbed  in  the  duodenum,  and  the  commencement  of 


the  jejunum ; they  are  rarely  seen  in  the  ilium,  and 
still  more  rarely  in  the  large  intestine.  It  appears  that 
this  last  case  does  not  happen  except  in  the  state 
of  sickness;  for  example,  during  the  action  of  a pur- 
gative. 

The  chyme  that  proceeds  from  drinks  follows  the 
same  rule,  and  appears  to  undergo  the  same  changes  os 
that  of  the  food  ; it  therefore  produces  chyle. 

Such  are  the  principal  phenomena  of  the  digestion 
of  drinks  : we  see  how  necessary  it  was  to  distinguish 
them  from  those  that  belong  to  the  digestion  of  the 
aliments. 

But  we  do  not  always  digest  the  aliments  and  the 
drinks  separately,  as  we  have  supposed;  very  fre- 
quently the  two  digestions  take  place  at  the  same 
time. 

Drink  favours  the  digestion  of  the  aliments ; this 
eflect  is  probably  produced  in  various  manners.  Those 
that  are  watery,  softqn,  divide,  dissolve  even  certain 
foods ; they  aid  in  this  manner  their  chymification  and 
their  passage  through  the  pylorus. 

Wine  fulfils  analogous  uses,  but  only  for  the  sub- 
stances that  it  is  capable  of  dissolving ; besides,  it  ex- 
cites by  its  contact  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  sto- 
mach, and  causes  a greater  secretion  of  the  gastric 
juice.  Alkohol  acts  much  in  the  same  manner  as 
wine,  only  it  is  more  intense.  It  is  thus  that  those 
liquors  which  are  used  after  meals,  are  useful  in  ex- 
citing the  action  of  the  stomach.” — Magendie's  Phy- 
siology. 

DIGESTIVE.  Digestivus ; from  digero,  to  dis- 
solve.) A term  applied  by  surgeons  to  those  sub- 
stances which,  when  applied  to  an  ulcer  or  wound, 
promote  suppuration:  such  are  the  ccratum  resinai , 
unguentum  elemi,  warm  poultices,  fomentations,  &c 

Digestive  salt.  The  muriate  of  potassa. 

Digestive  salt  of  Sylvius.  The  muriate  of  po- 
tassa. 

Digesti'vum  sal.  See  Potassa  murias. 

DIGITA'LIS.  (From  digitus , a finger ; because  its 
flower  represents  a finger.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Order,  Angiospermia. 

' Fox-glove. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  fox- 
glove. See  Digitalis  purpurea. 

Digitalis  purpurea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
fox-glove.  Digitalis — calycinis  foliolis  ovatis  acu- 
tis,  corottis  obtusis,  labio  superiore  integro , of  Lin- 
nams.  The  leaves  of  this  plant  have  a bitter  nauseous 
taste,  but  no  remarkable  smell ; they  have  been  long 
used  externally  to  ulcers  and  scrofulous  tumours 
with  considerable  advantage.  When  properly  dried, 
their  colour  is  a lively  green.  They  ought  to  be  col- 
lected when  the  plant  begins  to  blossom,  to  be  dried 
quickly  before  the  fire,  and  preserved  unpowdered. 

Of  all  the  narcotics,  digitalis  is  that  which  dimi- 
nishes most  powerfully  the  actions  of  the  system  ; and 
it  does  so  without  occasioning  any  previous  excite- 
ment. Even  in  the  most  moderate  dose,  it  diminishes, 
the  force  and  frequency  of  the  pulse,  and,  in  a large 
dose,  reduces  it  to  a great  extent,  as  from  70  beats  to 
40  or  35  in  a minute,  occasioning,  at  the  same  time, 
vertigo,  indistinct  vision,  violent  and  durable  sickness, 

! with  vomiting.  In  a still  larger  quantity,  it  induces 
convulsions,  coldness  of  the  body,  and  insensibility; 
symptoms  which  have  sometimes  terminated  fatally. 
As  a narcotic,  fox-glove  has  been  recommended  in  epi- 
lepsy, insanity,  and  in  some  acute  inflammatory  dis- 
eases. Lately  it  has  been  very  extensively  employed 
in  phthisis,  and  the  beneficial  effects  which  it  pro- 
duces in  that  disease,  are  probably  owing  to  its  nar- 
cotic power,  by  which  it  reduces  the  force  of  the  cir- 
culation through  the  lungs  and  general  system.  It  is 
administered  so  as  to  produce  this  effect.  One  grain 
of  the  powdered  leaves,  or  ten  drops  of  the  saturated 
tincture,  may  be  given  night  and  morning.  This  dose 
is  increased  one-half  every  second  day,  till  its  action 
on  the  system  becomes  apparent.  As  soon  as  the  pulse 
begins  to  be  diminished,  the  increase  of  dose  must  be 
made  with  more  caution : and,  whenever  nausea  is 
induced,  it  ought  rather  to  be  reduced,  or,  if  necessary, 
intermitted  for  a short  time.  If  the  sickness  become 
urgent,  it  is  best  relieved  by  stimulants,  particularly 
large  doses  of  brandy,  with  aromatics.  The  tincture 
has  been  supposed  to  be  the  best  form  of  administering 
digitalis,  when  the  remedy  is  designed  to  act  as  anar- 


DIS 


cotic : it  is  also  more  manageable  in  its  dose,  and  more 
uniform  in  its  strength,  than  the  dried  leaves. 

Besides  its  narcotic  effects,  digitalis  acts  as  one  of 
the  most  certain  diuretics  in  dropsy,  apparently  from 
its  power  of  promoting  absorption.  It  has  frequently 
succeeded  where  the  other  diuretics  have  failed.  Dr. 
Withering  has  an  undoubted  claim  to  this  discovery  ; 
and  the  numerous  cases  of  dropsy  related  by  him,  and 
other  practitioners  of  established  reputation,  afford  in- 
contestable evidence  of  its  diuretic  powers,  and  of  its 
practical  importance  in  the  cure  of  those  disorders. 
From  Dr.  Withering’s  extensive  experience  of  the  use 
of  the  digitalis  in  dropsies,  he  has  been  able  to  judge  of 
its  success  by  the  following  circumstances; — “It  sel- 
dom succeeds  in  men  of  great  natural  strength,  of 
tense  fibre,  of  warm  skin,  of  florid  complexion,  or  in 
those  with  a tight  and  cordy  pulse.  If  tire  belly  in  as- 
cites be  tense,  hard,  and  circumscribed,  or  tlje  limbs  in 
anasarca  solid  and  resisting,  we  have  but  little  hope. 
On  the  contrary,  if  the  pulse  be  feeble,  or  intermitting, 
the  countenance  pale,  the  lips  livid,  the  skin  cold,  the 
swollen  belly  soft  and  fluctuating,  the  anasarcous 
limbs  readily  pitting  under  the  pressure  of  the  finger, 
we  may  expect  the  diuretic  effects  to  follow  in  a kindly 
manner.”  Of  the  inferences  which  he  deduces,  the 
fourth  is,  “ that  if  it  (digitalis)  fails,  there  is  but  Jittle 
chance  of  any  other  medicine  succeeding.”  Although 
the  digitalis  is  now  generally  admitted  to  be  a very 
powerful  diuretic,  yet  it  is  but  justice  to  acknowledge 
that  this  medicine  has  more  frequently  failed  than 
could  have  been  reasonably  expected,  from  a compari- 
son of  the  facts  stated  by  Dr.  Withering.  The  dose  of 
the  dried  leaves  in  powder  is  from  one  to  three  grains, 
twice  a day.  But  if  a liquid  medicine  be  preferred,  a 
drachm  of  the  dried  leaves  is  to  be  infused  for  four 
hours,  in  half  a pint  of  boiling  water,  adding  to  the 
strained  liquor  an  ounce  of  any  spirituous  water.  One 
ounce  of  this  infusion,  given  twice  a day,  is  a medium 
dose.  It  is  to  be  continued  in  these  doses  till  it  either 
acts  upon  the  kidneys,  the  stomach,  the  pulse  (which, 
as  has  been  said,  it  has  a remarkable  power  of  lower- 
ing,) or  the  bowels. 

The  administration  of  this  remedy  requires  to  be 
conducted  with  much  caution.  Its  effects  do  not  im-' 
mediately  appear ; and  when  the  doses  are  too  fre- 
quent, or  too  quickly  augmented,  its  action  is  concen- 
trated so  as  to  produce  frequently  the  most  violent 
symptoms.  The  general  rules  are,  to  begin  with  a 
small  dose,  to  increase  it  gradually,  till  the  action  is 
apparent  on  the  kidneys,  stomach,  intestines,  or  vas- 
cular system ; and  immediately  suspending  its  exhibi- 
tion, when  its  effects  on  any  of  these  parts  take 
place. 

The  symptoms  arising  from  tod  large  a dose  of  digi- 
talis are,  extreme  sickness,  vertigo,  indistinct  vision, 
incessant  vomiting,  and  a great  reduction  of  the  force 
of  the  circulation,  terminating  sometimes  in  syncope, 
or  convulsions.  They  are  relieved  by  frequent  and 
small  doses  of  opium,  brandy,  aromatics,  and  strong 
bitters,  and  by  a blister  applied  to  the  region  of  the 
stomach. 

DIGITATUS.  Digitatd  or  fingered.  A leaf  is  call- 
ed folium  digitatum , when  several  leaflets  proceed 
from  the  summit  of  a common  footstalk,  as  in  Pcten- 
tilla  verna ; and  reptans. 

DIGITIFORMIS.  Finger-like.  Applied  to  the  re- 
ceptacle of  the  Arum  maculatum , and  Caila  cethio- 
vica. 

DiGi'TitrM.  (From  digitus , a finger.) 

1.  A contraction  of  the  finger-joint. 

2.  A whitlow,  or  other  sore  upon  the  finger. 

DI'GITUS.  (From  digero,  to  direct.)  A finger. 

L^gitus  manus,  is  the  finger,  properly  so  called ; and 
digitus  pedis,  the  toe. 

Digitus  manus.  A finger.  The  fingers  and  thumb 
in  each  hand  consist  of  fourteen  bones,  there  being 
three  to  each  finger , and  two  to  the  thumb ; they  are  a 
little  convex  and  round  towards  the  back  of  the  hand, 
but  hollow  and  plain  towards  the  palm,  except  the 
last,  where  the  nails  are.  The  order  of  their  disposi- 
tion is  called  first,  second,  and  third  phalanx.  The 
first  is  longer  than  the  second,  and  the  second  longer 
than  the  third.  What  has  been  said  of  the  fingers,  ap- 
plies to  the  toes  also. 

Digitus  pedis.  A toe.  See  Digitus  Manus. 

DIGLO'SSUM.  (From  Sis,  double,  and  yAoxnra,  a 
tongue : so  called  because  above  its  leaf  there  grows  a 
300 


DIO 

less  leaf,  like  two  tongues.)  1.  The  Laurus  alexan- 

drina. 

2.  Galen  makes  mention  of  a man  born  with  two 

tongues. 

Digno'tio.  (From  dignosco,  to  distinguish.)  See 

Diagnosis. 

DIGY'NIA.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  yvvy,  a wo- 
man.) The  name  of  an  order  of  several  classes  of  the 
sexual  system  of  plants,  embracing  those  plants  which 
to  the  character  of  the  class,  whatever  it  may  be,  add 
the  circumstance  of  having  two  styles. 

Dih^'maton.  (From  Sia  and  aipa,  blood.)  An 
antidote  in  which  is  the  blood  of  many  animals. 

Diha'lon.  (From  Sia  and  a\s,  salt.)  A plaster 
prepared  with  salt  and  iiitte,  adapted  to  foul  ulcers. 

Dii'petes.  (From  Zevs,  Stos  heaven,  and  Z3iir')u>, 
to  fall : i.  e.  falling  as  rain.)  An  epithet  applied  by 
Hippocrates  to  semen,  when  it  is  discharged  like  a 
shower  of  rain. 

DILATA'TIO.  (From  dilato , to  enlarge.) 

1.  Dilatation,  or  enlargement. 

2.  The  diastole  of  the  heart. 

DILA'TOR.  (From  dilato,  to  enlarge.)  The  name 
of  some  muscles,  the  office  of  which  is  to  open  and 
enlarge  parts. 

Dilator  al.e  nasi.  See  Levator  lahii  superioris. 

DILATO'RIUM.  (From  dilato,  to  enlarge.)  A 
surgical  instrument  for  enlarging  any  part. 

DILL.  See  Anethum. 

DILUENT.  ( Diluens ; from  diluo,  to  wash  away.) 
Those  substances  which  increase  the  proportion  of 
fluid  in  the  blood.  It  is  evident  that  this  must  be  done 
by  watery  liquors.  Water  is,  indeed,  properly  speak- 
ing, the  only  diluent.  Various  additions  are  made  to 
it,  to  render  it  pleasant,  and  frequently  to  give  it  a 
slightly  demulcent  quality.  But  these  are  not  suffi- 
ciently important  to  require  to  be  noticed,  or  to  be 
classed  as  medicines. 

Diluents  are  merely  secondary  remedies.  They  are 
given  in  acute  inflammatory  diseases,  to  lessen  the  sti- 
mulant quality  of  the  blood.  They  are  used  to  pro- 
mote the  action  of  diuretics  in  dropsy,  and  to  favour 
the  operation  of  sweating. 

Di  nica.  (From  Sivos,  giddiness.)  Medicines  which 
relieve  a giddiness. 

Di'nos.  See  Dinus. 

DINUS.  (From  Sivem,  to  turn  round.)  Dinos. 
Dizziness.  The  name  of  a genus  of  disease  in  Good’s 
Nosology.  Class,  JVeurotica;  Order,  Systatica.  It 
has  only  one  species.  Dinus  vertigo.  Vertigo,  or 
giddiness. 

Dio'cres.  The  name  of  a lozenge. 

Di'odos.  (From  4ia,  and  olios,  the  way  through.) 
Evacuation  by  stool. 

DICE'CIA.  (From  Sis,  double,  and  oiKia,  a house.) 
The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual  system  of 
Linnams,  containing  such  as  have  barren,  or  male, 
flowers  on  one  individual,  and  fertile,  or  female,  ones 
on  another  of  the  same  species. 

Dkena'nthes.  (From  Sia,  and  oivavdy,  the  flower 
of  the  vine.)  A remedy  said  to  be  good  for  cholera, 
in  which  was  the  flower  of  the  vine-tree. 

DIO'GMUS.  (From  Siwku),  to  persecute.)  A dis- 
tressing palpitation  of  the  heart. 

DIOI'CUS.  (From  <5u,  double,  and  oiKia,  a house.) 
Dioecious.  Plants  and  flowers  are  so  called  when  the 
barren  and  fertile  flowers  grow  from  two  separate 
roots. 

DIONIS,  Peter,  was  born  about  the  middle  of  the 
17th  century,  and  educated  to  the  practice  of  surgery. 
He  was  appointed  to  read  the  lectures  in  anatomy,  &c. 
in  the  royal  gardens  at  Paris,  instituted  by  Lewis 
XIV.,  and  after  this,  surgeon  to  the  queen,  and  other 
branches  of  the  royal  family,  which  offices  he  held, 
with  great  credit,  till  his  death,  in  1718.  . His  first  pub- 
lication gave  an  account  of  a woman  who  died  in  the 
sixth  month  of  pregnancy,  of  what  he  considered  to  be 
a ruptured  uterus ; but  as  lie  states  that  there  were  two 
uteri,  it  is  suspected  that  the  ruptured  part  was  one  of 
the  Fallopian  tubes  much  enlarged.  He  afterward 
gave  a useful  epitome  of  anatomy,  which  was  very  fa- 
vourably received,  passed  through  several  editions, 
and  was  even  translated  into  the  Tartar  language,  by 
order  of  the  emperor  of  China.  Ilis  next  work,  a 
course  of  surgical  operations,  obtained  still  more  cele- 
brity, which  it  even  now  in  some  degree  retains,  espe 
cialiy  as  commented  upon  by  Heister.  Besides  these 


a dissertation  on  sudden  death,  and  a treatise  on  mid- 
wifery, were  published  by  this  author. 

Dionysi'scus.  (From  Aiovvoos,  Bacchus,  who  was 
of  old  represented  as  having  horns.)  Certain  bony 
excrescences,  near  the  temples,  were  called  dionysisci. 

Dionysony'mpiias.  (From  Aiovvoos , Bacchus,  and 
vvpQa,  a nymph.)  An  herb  which,  if  bruised,  smells 
of  wine,  and  yet  resists  drunkenness. 

Diopo'rum.  (From  Sia , and  oiuvpa,  autumnal  fruits.) 
A medicine  composed  of  ripe  fruits  for  quinsy. 

DIOPSIDE.  A subspecies  of  oblique-edged  augite, 
found  near  Piedmont. 

DIOPTASE.  Emerald,  copper  ore. 

Dio'ptra.  (From  Sioirjopai,  to  see  through.)  Di- 
optron.  1.  Speculum  ani,  oris;  or  uteri. 

2.  The  lapis  spccularis. 

DIO  PTRICS.  ( Dioptricus ; from  Sionjopai,  to 

see  through.)  The  doctrine  of  the  refraction  of  light. 

Dioptri'smus.  (From  SioiCJopai,  to  see  through.) 
Dilatation  of  any  natural  passage. 

Dio'robum.  (From  Sia , and  opoBos , a vetch.)  A 
medicine,  in  the  composition  of  which  there  are 
vetches. 

Diorrho'sis.  (From  Sia,  and  oppos,  the  serum.) 
Diorosis.  1.  A dissolved  state  of  the  blood. 

2.  A conversion  of  the  humours  into  serum  and 
water. 

Diorthro'sis.  (From  SiopQpow,  to,  direct.)  The 
reduction  of  a fracture. 

DIOSCO'REA.  (Named  in  honour  of  Dioscorides.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Diaecia;  Order,  Hexandria. 

Dioscorea  alata.  The  name  of  the  plant  which 
affords  the  esculent  root,  called  the  yam.  It  is  obtain- 
ed, however,  from  three  species ; the  alata,  bulbifera , 
and  saliva.  They  grow  spontaneously  in  both  Indies, 
and  their  roots  are  promiscuously  eaten,  as  the  potato 
is  with  us.  There  is  great  variety  in  the  colour,  size, 
and  shape  of  yams ; some  are  generally  blue  or  brown, 
round  or  oblong,  and  weigh  from  one  pound  to  two. 
They  are  esteemed,  when  dressed,  as  being  nutritious 
and  easy  of  digestion,  and  are  preferred  to  wheaten 
bread.  Their  taste  is  somewhat  like  the  potato,  but 
more  luscious.  The  negroes,  whose  common  food  is 
yams,  boil  and  mash  them.  They  are  also  ground 
and  made  into  bread  and  puddings. 

When  they  are  to  be  kept  for  some  time,  they  are 
exposed  upon  the  ground  to  the  sun,  as  we  do  onions, 
and  when  sufficiently  withered,  they  are  put  into  dry- 
sand  in  casks,  and  placed  in  a dry  garret,  where  they 
remain  often  for  many  seasons  without  losing  any  of 
their  primitive  goodness. 

Dioscorea  bulbifera.  See  Dioscorea  alata. 

Dioscorea  sativa.  See  Dioscorea  alata. 

DIOSCORI'DES,  Pedacius,  or  Pedanius,  a cele- 
brated Greek  physician  and  botanist  of  Anazarba,  in 
Cilicia,  now  Caramania,  who  is  supposed  to  have  lived 
in  the  time  of  Nero.  He  is  said  to  have  been  origin- 
ally a soldier,  but  soon  became  eminent  as  a physician, 
and  travelled  much  to  improve  his  knowledge.  He 
paid  particular  attention  to  the  materia  medica,  and 
especially  to  botany,  as  subservient  to  medicine. 
He  profited  much  by  the  writings  of  Theophrastus, 
who  appears  to  have  been  a more  philosophical  bo- 
tanist. Dioscorides  has  left  a treatise  on  the  materia 
medica,  in  five  books,  chiefly  considering  plants;  also 
two  books  on  the  composition  and  application  of 
medicines,  an  essay  on  antidotes,  and  another  on  ve- 
nomous animals.  His  works  have  been  often  printed  in 
modern  times,  and  commented  upon,  especially  by 
Matthiolus.  He  notices  about  600  plants,  but  his  de- 
scriptions are  often  so  slight  and  superficial,  as  to  leave 
their  identity  a matter  of  conjecture ; which  is  perhaps 
of  no  very  great  medical  importance;  though  their 
virtues  being  generally  handed  down  from  the  Greeks, 
it  might  be  useful  to  ascertain  which  particular  plants 
they  meant. 

Dioscu'ri.  (i.  e.  Aiog,  K ovpot,  the  sons  of  Jupiter, 
or  Castor  and  Pollux.)  The  parotid  glands  were  so 
named  from  their  twin-like  equality  in  shape  and  po- 
sition. 

[“  Diosiwros.  Persimmon.  The  persimmon-tree 
is  very  common  in  the  middle  and  western  states,  and 
grows  also  in  the  southern  parts  of  our  country.  The 
bark  is  bitter,  and  has  been  added  to  our  numerous 
list  of  native  tonics.  It  is  recommended  in  intermit- 
tents  and  ulcerated  sore  throats,  and  may  be  exhibited 


in  the  same  manner  as  cinchona.” — Bigelow's  Mat. 
Med.  A.1 

Diospy'ros  lotus.  The  Indian  date  plum.  The 
fruit,  when  ripe,  has  an  agreeable  taste,  and  is  very 
nutritious. 

Dioxek/e'um.  (From  Sia,  ofys,  acid,  and  eXaiov , 
oil.)  A medicine  composed  of  oil  and  vinegar 

Dio'xos.  CFtom  Sia,  and  o\vs,  acid.)  A collyrium 
composed  chiefly  of  vinegar. 

DIPHYLLUS.  (Fro™  Sis,  double,  and  (pvXXov,  a 
leaf.)  Diphyllous,  or  two- leaved.  Applied  to  the 
perianthium  of  flowers,  when  there  are  two  calyces; 
as  in  Papaver  rheeas. 

Diplasia'smus.  (From  SiuXoiv,  to  double.)  The 
re-exacerbation  of  a disease. 

DI'PLOE.  (From  SnrXow,  to  double.)  The  spongy 
substance  between  the  two  tables-of  the  skull. 

DIPLO  PIA.  (From  SiirXoos,  double,  and  onropai, 
to  see.)  Visus  duplicatus.  A disease  of  the  eye,  in 
which  the  person  sees  an  object  double  or  triple.  Dr. 
Cullen  makes  it  a variety  of  the  second  species  of 
pseudoblepsis,  which  he  calls  mutans,  in  which  ob- 
jects appear  changed  from  what  they  really  are ; and 
the  disease  varies  according  to  the  variety  of  the  re- 
mote causes. 

Di'pnoos.  (From  Sts,  twice,  and  nveco,  to  breathe.) 
A wound  which  is  perforated  quite  through,  and  ad- 
mits the  air  at  both  ends. 

Dipple's  animal  oil.  See  Animal  oil. 

DI'PSACUS.  (From  Siipa,  thirst ; so  called  from 
the  concave  situation  of  its  leaves,  which  hold  water, 
by  which  the  thirst  of  the  traveller  may  be  relieved.) 
Dipsacum. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Syngenesia  ; Order,  Polygamia.  The 
teasel. 

2.  A diabetes,  from  the  continual  thirst  attend- 
ing it. 

DIPSOSIS.  (From  Siipa,  thirst.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology,  known  by  the 
desire  for  drinking  being  excessive  or  impaired.  It 
has  two  species,  Dipsosis  avens,  and  Dipsosis  expers. 

DIPYRE.  Schmelstein.  A mineral  found  in  white 
or  reddish  steatite  in  the  Western  Pyrenees,  composed 
of  silica,  alumina,  andjime. 

Dipyre'num.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  nvpyv,  a ber 
ry.)  1.  A berry,  or  kernel. 

2.  A probe  with  two  buttons. 

Dipyri'tes.  (From  Sis,  twice,  and  nvp,  fire.)  Di- 
pyros.  An  epithet  given  by  Hippocrates  to  bread 
twice  baked,  and  which  he  recommended  in  dropsies. 

DIRE'CTOR.  (From  dirigo,  to  direct.) 

1.  A hollow  instrument  for  guiding  an  incisor- 
knife. 

2.  The  name  of  a muscle. 

Director  penis.  (From  dirigo , to  direct.)  The 
same  as  erector  penis. 

Diri'nga.  A name,  in  the  isle  of  Java,  for  the 
Calamus  aromaticus.  See  Acorus  calamus. 

Disce'ssus.  (From  discedo,  to  depart.)  The  sepa- 
ration of  any  two  bodies,  before  united,  by  chemical 
op  ration. 

DISCIFO'RMIS.  (From  discus,  a quoit,  and  forma, 
likeness.)  Resembling  a disk,  or  quoit,  in  shape.  It 
is  applied  to  the  knee-pan. 

DISCOI'DES.  (From  Siokos,  a quoit,  and  aSos, 
resemblance.)  Resembling  a disk,  or  quoit,  in  shape. 
It  is  applied  to  the  crystalline  humour  of  the  eye 

Discri'men.  1.  A small  roller. 

2.  The  diaphragm. 

DISCUS.  (From  Siokos,  a quoit  and  disk,  and  from 
its  flat  and  round  appearance  like  the  circumference 
of  the  sun.)  The  disk,  or  central  part  of  a leaf,  and 
of  a compound  flower.  In  the  common  daisy,  the 
white  leaflets  of  the  flower  surround  the  disk- 

The  disk  of  a leaf  is  the  whole  flat  sur/hce  within 
the  margin. 

DISCU'TIENT.  ( Discutiens ; ffom  discutio , to 
shake  in  pieces.)  Discusorius;  Diachyticus.  A 
term  in  surgery,  applied  to  fl*>se  substances  which 
possess  a power  of  repellinyor  resolving  tumours. 

DISEASE.  Morbus.  Any  alteration  from  a per- 
fect state  of  health,  a disease  is  variously  termed: 
when  it  pervades  whole  system,  as  fever  does,  it  is 
called  a general,  disease , to  distinguish  it  from  inflam- 
mation of  the^e,  or  any  other  viscus,  which  is  a 
partial,  or  lo fal  one.  When  it  does  not  depend  on 

307 


DIS 


another  disease,  it  is  termed  idiopathic,  which  may  be 
either  general  or  partial,  to  distinguish  it  from  a symp- 
tomatic one,  which  depends  upon  another  disease.  See 
also  Endemic , Epidemic , Sporadic,  Sec. 

[Disintegration.  This  is  a geological  term,  and 
means  the  crumbling  down  of  rock  by  their  de- 
composition, and  the  consequent  formation  of  alluvial 
soil.  A.] 

DISK.  . See  Discus. 

DISLOCATION.  (Dirfocatio ; from  disloco,  to 
put  out  of  place.)  luxation.  The  secession  of  a 
bone  of  a moveable  articulation  from  its  natural  ca- 
vity. 

DISPE'NSARY.  (Dispensarium ; from  dispendo, 
to  distribute.)  1.  The  shop  or  place  in  which  medi- 
cines are  prepared. 

2.  The  name  of  an  institution,  in  which  the  poor 
are  supplied  with  medicines  and  advice. 

DISPE'NSATORY.  {Dispensatorium ; from  dis- 
pendo, to  distribute.)  Antidotarinm.  A book  which 
treats  of  the  composition  of  medicines. 

DISSE'CTION  (Dissectio ; from  disseco,  to  cut 
asunder.)  The  cutting  to  pieces  of  any  part  of  an 
animal,  or  vegetable,  for  the  purpose  of  examining  its 
structure.  See  Anatomy. 

DISSECTUS.  Cut.  A term  used  by  botanists  sy- 
nonymously with  incised  and  laciniated , to  leaves 
which  are  cut,  as  it  were,  into  numerous  irregular 
portions.  See  Leaf. 

DISSEPiMENTUM.  (From  dissepio,  to  separate.) 
A partition.  Applied  by  botanists  to  partitions  which 
separate  the  cells  of  a capsule.  See  Capsula. 

Disse'ptum.  (From  dissepio,  to  enclose  round.) 
The  diaphragm,  or  membrane,  which  divides  the  ca- 
vity of  the  thorax  from  the  abdomen. 

Dissolve'ntia.  (From  dissolvo,  to  loosen.) 

1.  Medicines  which  loosen  and  dissolve  morbid  con- 
cretions in  the  body. 

2.  In  chemistry,  it  means  menstrua. 

Dissolu'tus.  (From  dissolvo,  to  loosen.)  Loose, 

morbus  dissolutus.  An  epithet  applied  to  dysentery. 

DISTANS.  Distant.  Applied  to  petals  from  their 
direction ; as  in  Cucubalus  bacciferus. 

Diste'ntio.  (From  distendo,  to  stretch  out.)  1. 
Distention,  or  dilatation. 

2.  A convulsion. 

DISTHENE.  See  Cyanite. 

Disti'chia.  See  Distichiasis. 

DISTICHI'ASIS.  (From  Sianxia : from  Sis,  dou- 
ble, and  a row.)  Districhiasis ; Disticliia.  A 

disease  of  the  eyelash,  in  which  there  is  a double  row 
of  hairs,  the  one  row  growing  outwards,  the  other  in- 
wards towards  the  eye. 

DISTICHUS.  Two-ranked.  Applied  to  stems, 
leaves,  &c.  when  they  spread  in  two  horizontal  direc- 
tions ; as  the  branches  of  the  Pinus  picea , or  silver 
fur,  and  the  leaves  of  the  Taxus  baccata,  or  yew. 

DISTILLATION.  [Distillatio ; from  distillo,  to 
drop  little  by  little.)  Alsacta  ; Catastagmos.  A che- 
mical process,  very  similar  to  evaporation,  instituted 
to  separate  the  volatile  from  the  fixed  principles,  by 
means  of  heat.  Distillatory  vessels  are  either  alem- 
bics or  retorts ; the  former  consist  of  an  inferior  ves- 
sel called  a cucurbit  designed  to  contain  the  matter  to 
be  examined,  and  having  an  upper  part  fixed  to  it, 
called  the  capital,  or  head.  In  this  last,  the  vapours 
are  condensed  by  the  contact  of  the  surrounding  air, 
or,  in  other  cases,  by  the  assistance  of  cold  water  sur- 
rounding the  head,  and  contained  in  a vessel  called  the 
refrigeratory.  From  the  lower  part  of  the  capital 
proceeds  a lube  called  the  nose,  beak,  or  spout,  through 
which  the  vapours,  after  condensation,  are,  by  a pro- 
per figure  of  the  capital,  made  to  flow  into  a vessel 
called  the  receiver,  which  is  usually  spherical.  These 
receivers  have  different  names,  according  to  their 
figure,  being  tailed  mattresses,  balloons,  &c.  Retorts 
are  a kind  of  bottle  of  glass,  pottery,  or  metal,  the  bot- 
tom being  spherica’i , and  the  upper  part  gradually  di- 
minishing into  a neck,  which  is  turned  on  one  side. 

Distilled  vinegar.  Set  Acetum. 

DISTO'RTION.  (Distcrrtio ; from  distorqueo , to 
wrest  aside.)  A term  applied  to  the  eyes,  when  a per- 
son seems  to  turn  them  from  the  object  he  would  look 
at,  and  is  then  called  squinting,  or  strabismus.  It  also 
signifies  the  bending  of  a bone  pretematurally  to  one 
side ; as  distortion  of  the  spine,  or  vertebrae. 

DISTO  RTOR.  (From  distorqueo , to  wrest  aside.) 

30b 


DIU 

A muscle,  the  office  of  which  is  to  draw  the  moutli 

awry. 

Distortor  oris.  See  Zygomaticus  minor. 

Districhi'asis.  See  Distichiasis. 

DI  STRIX.  (From  Sis,  double,  and  0pi|,  the  hair.) 
A disease  of  the  hair,  when  it  splits  and  divides  at  the 

end. 

DITTANDER.  See  Lepidium  sativum. 

DITTANY.  See  Dictamnus. 

Dittany , bastard.  ■ See  Dictamnus  albus. 

Dittany  of  Crete.  See  Origanum  dictamnus. 

Dittany , white.  See  Dictamnus  albus. 

DIURE  SIS.  (From  Sia,  through,  and  ovpao,  to 
make  water.)  An  increased  secretion  of  urine.  It  is 
also  applied  to  a diabetes. 

DIURETIC.  ( Diureticus . AiovprjriKos',  from  Siov- 
prjais,  a discharge  of  urine.)  That  which,  when  taken 
internally,  augments  the  flow  of  urine  from  the  kid- 
neys It  is  obvious  that  such  an  effect  will  be  produced 
by  any  substance  capable  of  stimulating  the  secreting 
vessels  of  the  kidneys.  All  the  saline  diuretics  seem 
to  act  in  this  manner.  They  are  received  into  the  cir- 
culation ; and  passing  off  with  the  urine,  stimulate  the 
vessels,  and  increase  the  quantity  secreted. 

There  are  other  diuretics,  the  effect  of  which  ap- 
pears not  to  arise  from  direct  application,  but  from  an 
action  excited  in  the  stomach,  and  propagated  by 
nervous  communication  to  the  secreting  urinary 
vessels. 

The  diuretic  operation  of  squill,  and  other  vegeta- 
bles, appears  to  be  of  this  kind. 

There  is  still,  perhaps,  another  mode  in  which  cer- 
tain substances  produce  a diuretic,  effect ; that  is,  by 
promoting  absorption.  When  a large  quantity  of  wa- 
tery fluid  is  introduced  into  the  circulating  mass,  it 
stimulates  the  secreting  vessels  of  the  kidneys,  and  is 
carried  off  by  urine.  If,  therefore,  absorption  be  pro- 
moted, and  if  a portion  of  serous  fluid,  perhaps  previ- 
ously effused,  be  taken  up,  the  quantity  of  fluid  secret- 
ed by  the  kidneys  will  be  increased.  In  this  way  digi- 
talis seems  to  act : its  diuretic  effect,  it  has  been  said, 
is  greater  when  exhibited  in  dropsy  than  it  is  in 
health. 

On  the  same  principle  (the  effect  arising  from  stimu- 
lating the  absorbent  system)  may  probably  be  explained 
the  utility  of  mercury  in  promoting  the  action  of  seve- 
ral diuretics. 

The  action  of  these  remedies  is  promoted  by  drink- 
ing freely  of  mild  diluents.  It  is  also  influenced  by 
the  state  of  the  surface  of  the  body.  If  external  heat 
be  applied,  diuresis  is  frequently  prevented,  and  dia- 
phoresis produced.  Hence  the  doses  of  them  should 
be  given  in  the  course  of  the  day,  and  the  patient,  if 
possible,  be  kept  out  of  bed. 

The  direct  effects  of  diuretics  are  sufficiently  evi- 
dent. They  discharge  the  watery  part  of  the  blood ; 
and,  by  that  discharge,  they  indirectly  promote  ab- 
sorption over  the  whole  system. 

Dropsy  is  the  disease  in  which  they  are  principally 
employed ; and  when  they  can  be  brought  to  act,  the 
disease  is  removed  with  less  injury  to  the  patient  than 
it  can  be  by  exciting  any  other  evacuation.  Their 
success  is  very  precarious,  the  most  powerful  often 
failing ; and,  as  the  disease  is  so  frequently  connected 
with  organic  affection,  even  the  removal  of  the  effused 
fluid,  when  it  takes  place,  only  palliates  without  effect- 
ing a cure. 

Diuretics  have  been  likewise  occasionally  used  in 
calculous  affections,  in  gonorrhoea,  and  with  a view  of 
diminishing  plethora,  or  checking  profuse  perspiration. 

Murray,  in  his  Elements  of  Materia  Medica,  classes 
the  supertartrate  of  potassa,  or  cream  of  tartar,  and 
nitrate  of  potassa,  or  nitre,  the  muriate  of  ammonia,  or 
crude  sal-ammoniac,  potassa,  and  the  acetate  of  po- 
tassa, or  kali  acctatum,  among  the  saline  diuretics ; 
and  selects  the  following  from  the  vegetable  kingdom : 
— scilla  maritima,  digitalis  purpurea,  nicotiapa  taba- 
cum,  solatium  dulcamara,  lactuca  virosa,  colchicum 
autumnale,  gratiola  officinalis,  spartium  scoparium, 
juniperis  communis,  copaitera  officinalis,  pinus  bal- 
samea,  and  pinus  larix ; and  the  lytta  vesicatoria  from 
the  animal  kingdom. 

In  speaking  of  particular  diuretics,  Dr.  Cullen  says, 
the  diuretic  vegetables,  mentioned  by  writers,  are  of 
very  little  power,  and  are  employed  with  very  little 
success.  Of  the  umbellatie,  the  medicinal  power  re- 
sides especially  in  their  seeds ; but  he  never  found  any 


DOG 


DOR 


of  them  very  efficacious.  The  semen  dauci  sylvestris 
has  been  commended  as  a diuretic;  but  its  powers  as 
such  are  not  very  remarkable.  In  like  manner,  some 
of  the  plantoe  stellatoz  have  been  commended  as  diu- 
retics; but  none  of  them  deserve  our  notice,  except 
the  rubia  tinctorium , the  root  of  which  passes  so  much 
by  the  kidneys  as  to  give  its  colour  to  the  urine. 
Hence  it  may  fairly  be  supposed  to  stimulate  the  se- 
cretaries ; but  Dr.  Cullen  found  its  diuretic  powers  did 
not  always  appear,  and  never  to  any  considerable  de- 
gree ; and  as,  in  brute  animals,  it  has  always  appeared 
hurtful  to  the  system,  he  does  not  think  it  fit  to  be  em- 
ployed to  any  extent  in  human  diseases.  The  bar- 
dana,  lithospermum,  ononis,  asparagus,  enula  campa- 
na,  are  all  substances  which  seem  to  pass,  in  some 
measure,  by  the  kidneys;  but  their  diuretic  powers 
are  hardly  worth  notice. 

The  principal  articles  included  by  Dr.  Cullen,  in  his 
catalogue  of  diuretics,  are  dulcamara,  digitalis,  scilla ; 
some  of  the  alliacete  and  siliquoste  ; the  balsams  and 
resins ; cantharides,  and  the  diuretic  salts. 

Divapora'tio.  Evaporation. 

DIVARICATION.  The  crossing  of  any  two  things : 
thus  when  the  muscular  or  tendinous  fibres  intersect 
each  other  at  different  angles,  they  are  said  to  diva- 
ricate. 

Divellent  affinity.  See  Affinity  quiescent. 

Diverso'rium.  (From  diversor,  to  resort  to.)  The 
receptaculum  chyli. 

DIVERTFCULUM.  A mal-formation  or  diseased 
appearance  of  q part,  in  which  a portion  goes  out  of 
the  regular  course ; and  thereby  forms  a diverticulum, 
or  deviation  from  the  usual  course.  It  is  generally 
applied  to  the  alimentary  canal. 

Diverticulum  nuckii.  The  opening  through  which 
the  round  ligaments  of  the  uterus  pass.  Nuck  assert- 
ed that  it  remained  open  a long  time  after  birth ; to 
these  openings  he  gave  the  name  of  diverticula. 

DIVI'NUS.  A pompous  epithet  of  many  composi- 
tions, from  their  supposed  excellence. 

Divu'lsio.  (From  divello , to  pull  asunder.)  Urine 
with  uneven  sediment. 

DOCIMASTIC.  Ars  docimastica.  The  art  of  ex- 
amining fossils,  in  order  to  discover  what  metals,  &c. 
they  contain. 

DOCK.  See  Rumex. 

Dock-cresscs.  See  Lapsana. 

Dock , sour.  See  Rumex  acetosa. 

Dock , water.  See  Rumex  hydrolapathum. 

DODDER.  See  Cuscuta  epithymum. 

Dodecada'ctylus.  (From  dwSsica,  twelve,  and 

SaK'JvXos,  a finger;  so  named  because  its  length  is 
about  the  breadth  of  twelve  fingers.)  The  duodenum, 
an  intestme  so  called.  It  must  be  observed,  that  at 
the  time  this  name  was  given,  anatomy  consisted  in 
the  dissection  of  brutes ; and  the  length  was  therefore 
probably  adjudged  from  the  gut  of  some  animal,  and 
not  of  man. 

DODECA'NDRIA.  (From  SwSeica,  twelve,  and 
avrjp,  a man.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the 
sexual  system,  embracing  those  with  hermaphrodite 
flowers,  and  twelve  stamina. 

Dodecapha'rmacum.  (From  SwSeica,  twelve,  and 
(pappatcov,  a medicine.)  An  ointment  consisting  of 
twelve  ingredients,  for  which  reason  it  was  called  the 
ointment  of  the  twelve  apostles. 

Dodeca'theon.  (From  dwticica,  twelve,  and  7 idy/xi, 
to  put.)  An  antidote  consisting  of  twelve  simples. 

DODONA3US,  Rembertus,  (or  Dodoens,)  was 
born  at  Mechlin,  in  1517.  He  became  physician  to 
two  succeeding  emperors,  and,  in  1582,  was  appointed 
professor  of  physic  in  the  newly-founded  University 
of  Leyden,  the  duties  of  which  he  performed  with  cre- 
dit, till  his  death,  three  years  after.  His  lame  at  pre- 
sent chiefly  rests  on  his  botanical  publications,  parti- 
cularly his  “ Pemplades,”  or  30  books  of  the  history 
of  plants.  The  “ Frugum  Historia,”  . “ Herbarium 
Belgicum,”  &c.  are  of  much  inferior  merit. 

DOG.  See  Canis. 

Dog's-bane,  Syrian.  S eeAsclepias  syriaca. 

Dog's-grass.  See  Triticum  repens. 

Dog's-mercury.  See  Mercurialis  perennis. 

Dog-rose.  See  Rosa  canina. 

Dog-stones.  See  Orchis  mascula. 

[Dogwood.  See  Cornus  Florida.  A.] 

DO'GMA.  (From  doice a>,  to  be  of  opinion.)  A dog- 
ma, or  opinion,  founded  on  reason  and  experience. 


DOLERITE.  When  volcanic  masses  are  composed 
of  grains  distinct  from  each  other,  and  contain  be- 
sides felspar,  much  pyroxene,  black  oxide  of  iron,  am- 
pibole,  &c.,  they  are  called,  by  the  French  geologist, 

dolcrite. 

DOLICHOS.  (From  So\ixos-.  long:  so  called  from 
its  long  shape.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnasan  system.  Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  De- 
candria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  cowhage.  See 
Dolichos  pruriens. 

Dolichos  pruriens.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cowhage.  Dolichos;  Dolichos — volubilis , legumini- 
bus  racemosis , valvulis  subcarinatis  hirtis , ffieduncu- 
lis  tends,  of  Linnteus.  The  pods  of  this  plant  are  co- 
vered with  sharp  hairs,  which  are  the  parts  employed 
medicinally  in  form  of  electuary,  as  anthelmintics: 
The  manner  in  which  these  hairy  spicula  act,  seems 
to  be  purely  mechanical:  for  neither  the  tincture,  nor 
the  docoction,  possess  the  least  anthelmintic  power. 

Dolichos  soja.  The  plant  which  affords  the  soy. 
It  is  much  cultivated  in  Japan,  where  it  is  called  da- 
idsu : and  where  the  pods  supply  their  kitchens  with 
various  productions ; but  the  two  principal  are,  a sort 
of  butter,  termed  miso , and  a pickle  called  sooju. 

DOLABRIFORMIS.  (From  dolabella , a hatchet, 
and  forma , resemblance.)  Hatchet-shaped.  A term 
applied  to  a leaf,  which  is  compressed  with  a very  pro- 
minent dilated  keel,  and  a cylindrical  base;  as  in 
Misembryanthemum  dolabriforme. 

DOLOMITE.  A calcareo-magnesian  carbonate. 

DO'LOR.  (Dolor,  oris,  f.)  Pain. 

Dolor  faciei.  See  Tic  douloureux. 

DORONICUM.  (From  dorongi , Arab.)  Leopard’s 
bane.  See  Arnica  montana. 

Doronicum  germanicum.  See  Arnica ■ montana. 

Doronicum  romanum.  The  pharmacopoeial  name 
of  the  Roman  leopard’s  bane.  See  Doronicum  par- 
dalianches. 

Doronicum  pardalianoiies.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  Roman  leopard’s  bane.  Doronicum  romanum  ; 
Doronicum— foliis  cordatis,  obtucis,  denticulatis ; ra 
dicalibus  petiolatis ; caulinis  amplexicaulibus,  of 
Linnaeus.  The  root  of  this  plant,  if  given  in  a full 
dose,  possesses  poisonous  properties ; but  instances 
are  related  of  its  efficacy  in  epileptical  and  other 
nervous  diseases. 

DO'RSAL.  (Dorsalis;  from  dorsum , the  back.) 
Belonging  to  the  back. 

Dorsalis  nervus.  The  nerve  which;  passes  out 
from  the  vertebrae  of  the  back. 

[DORSEY,  John  Syng,  M.D.,  Professor  of  anatomy 
in  the  university  of  Pennsylvania,  was  bom  in  the  city 
of  Philadelphia,  in  December,  1783.  In  early  life  he 
received  an  excellent  elementary  and  classical  educa- 
tion at  a school  in  Philadelphia,  of  the  society  of 
Friends,  then  in  high  repute,  and  here  manifested  the 
same  vivacity  of  genius  and  quickness  in  learning,  with 
the  mild  and  gracious  dispositions,  for  which  he  was 
subsequently  so  conspicuous.  At  the  age  of  15  years, 
he  entered  the  office  of  his  relation,  the  celebrated  Dr. 
Physick. 

Not  long  after  receiving  his  degree,  the  yellow  fever 
reappeared  in  the  city,  and  prevailed  so  widely  that  an 
hospital  was  opened  for  the  accommodation  exclu- 
sively of  the  sick  with  this  disease,  to  which  he  was 
appointed  resident  physician.  So  great  was  the  value 
attached  to  his  services,  that  it  is  difficult  to  speak  too 
highly  of  the  manner  in  which  he  discharged  the  du- 
ties of  his  office  of  hazardous  benevolence.  At  the 
close  of  the  same  season,  he  proceeded  to  Europe,  for 
the  purpose  of  improving  his  medical  knowledge.  In 
December,  1804,  he  returned  home,  and  immediately 
entered  on  the  practice  of  his  profession.  The  repu- 
tation he  brought  with  him,  his  amiable  temper,  and 
popular  manners,  his  fidelity  and  attention,  speedily 
introduced  him  into  a large  share  of  business.  From 
this  period  professional  honours  were  heaped  on  him 
with  profusion.  He  was  appointed  surgeon  to  the 
dispensary,  the  alms-house,  and  hospitals,  and  in 
all  our  medical  associations  he  held  some  elevated 
office.  But  there  was  reserved  for  him  a still  highei 
and  more  dignified  station.  In  1807  he  was  elected 
adjunct  professor  of  surgery,  in  which  office  he  con- 
tinued till  he  was  raised  to  the  chair  of  anatomy,  by 
the  lamented  death  of  the  venerable  Dr.  Wistar. 

“ Considering  himself  now  placed  for  the  first  time 

309 


DOU 


DRA 


in  the  proper  sphere  for  the  exercise  of  his  talents  and 
the  gratification  of  a generous  ambition,  the  appoint- 
ment gave  him  much  delight ; and  with  ample  prepa- 
ration, he  opened  the  session  by  one  of  the  finest  exhi- 
bitions of  eloquence  ever  heard  within  the  walls  of  the 
college.  But  here  his  bright  and  prosperous  career 
ended,  and  the  expectations  of  success  thus  created 
were  not  permitted  to  be  realized.  Elevated  to  a po- 
sition above  which  he  could  hardly  ascend,  and  sur- 
rounded by  all  that  we  most  value,  Providence  seems 
to  have  selected  him  as  an  instance  to  teach  a salutary 
lesson  of  the  shortness  of  life,  the  insignificance  of 
things  transitory,  and  the  importance  of  that  eternity 
which  absorbs  all  being  and  all  time.  On  the  evening 
of  the  same  day  that  he  pronounced  his  introductory 
lecture,  and  while  the  praises  of  it  still  resounded,  he 
was  attacked  with  a fever  of  such  vehemence,  that  in 
one  short  week  it  closed  his  existance,  leaving  to  us 
only  his  enviable  name  and  inestimable  example.  He 
died  in  November,  1818,  aged  35  years.” — Tkach. 
Med.  Biog.  A.] 

DORSTE'NIA.  (Named  in  honour  of  Dr.  Dors- 
ten.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Tetrandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Dorstenia  braziliensis.  The  root  of  this  plant 
is  used  by  the  natives  of  Brazil,  internally  and  exter- 
nally. They  call  it  Caa  apia.  When  chewed,  it  has 
the  same  effects  as  ipecacuanha.  The  wounds  from 
poisoned  darts  are  said  to  be  cured  with  the  juice  of 
the  root,  which  they  pour  into  the  wound. 

Dorstenia  contrayerva.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  which  affords  the  contrayerva  root ; Con- 
trayerva; Drakena;  Cyperus  longus,  odorus,  perua- 
nus ; Bezoardica  radix.  The  contrayerva  root  was 
first  brought  into  Europe  about  the  year  1581,  by  Sir 
Francis  Drake,  whence  its  name  Drakena.  It  is  the 
root  of  a small  plant  found  in  Peru,  and  other  parts  of 
the  Spanish  West  Indies.  Dr.  Houston  observes,  that 
the  roots  of  different  species  of  dorstenia  are  promis- 
cuously gathered  and  exported  for  those  of  the  contra- 
yerva, and,  as  all  the  species  bear  a great  resemblance 
to  each  other,  they  are  generally  used  for  medical  pur- 
poses in  this  country.  The  tuberous  parts  of  these 
roots  are  the  strongest,  and  should  be  chosen  for  use. 
They  have  an  agreeable  aromatic  smell ; a rough,  bit- 
ter, penetrating  taste;  and,  when  chewed,  they  give 
out  a sweetish  kind  of  acrimony. 

It  is  diaphoretic  and  antiseptic  ; and  was  formerly 
used  in  low  nervous  fevers,  and  those  of  the  malig- 
nant kind  ; gbut  its  use  is  superseded  by  the  cinchona. 

Dr.  Cullen  observes,  that  this  and  serpen taria  are 
powerful  stimulants ; and  both  have  been  employed  in 
fevers  in  which  debility  prevailed.  However,  he 
thinks,  wine  may  always  supersede  the  stimulant 
powers  of  these  medicines  ; and  that  debility  is  better 
remedied  by  the  tonic  and  antiseptic  powers  of  cold 
and  Peruvian  bark,  than  by  any  stimulants. 

By  the  assistance  of  heat,  both  spirit  and  water  ex- 
tract all  its  virtues  ; but  they  carry  little  or  nothing  in 
distillation ; extracts  made  by  inspissating  the  decoc- 
tion, retain  all  the  virtues  of  the  root. 

The  London  College  forms  the  compound  powder  of 
contrayerva,  by  combining  five  ounces  of  contrayerva 
root  with  a pound  and  a half  of  prepared  shells.  This 
powder  was  formerly  made  up  in  balls,  and  called 
lapis  contrayerva,  employed  in  the  decline  of  ardent 
fevers,  and  through  the  whole  course  of  low  and  ner- 
vous ones.  The  radix  serpcntariae  virginiensis,  in  all 
cases,  may  be  substituted  for  the  contrayerva. 

Dorstenia  drakena.  The  systematic  name  forone 
sort  of  the  contrayerva. 

Dorstenia  houstonii.  See  Dorstenia  contra- 
yerva. 

Do'thien.  A name  for  the  furunculus. 

DOUGLAS,  James,  M.  D.  was  born  in  Scotland  in 
1675.  After  completing  his  education,  he  came  to 
London,  and  applied  himself  diligently  to  the  study  of 
anatomy  and  surgery,  which  he  both  taught  and-prac- 
tised  several  years  with  success.  Haller  has  spoken 
very  highly  of  his  preparations,  to  show  the  motion  of 
the  joints,  and  the  structure  of  the  bones.  He  patron- 
ised the  celebrated  William  Hunter ; who  assisted 
him  shortly  before  his  death  in  1742.  He  was  reader 
of  Anatomy  to  the  Company  of  Surgeons,  and  a Fel- 
low of  the  Royal  Society,  to  which  he  made  several 
communications.  He  published,  in  1707,  a more  cor- 
rect description  of  the  muscles  than  had  before  appear- 
310 


ed ; eight  years  after,  a tolerable  account  of  preceding 
anatomical  writers ; in  1726,  a History  of  the  lateral 
Operation  for  the  Stone ; and  in  1730,  a very  accurate 
Description  of  the  Peritonaeum,  &c. 

DOUGLAS,  John,  brother  of  the  preceding,  was 
surgeon  to  the  Westminster  Infirmary,  and  author  of 
several  controversial  pieces.  In  one  of  them,  called 
“ Remarks  on  a late  pompous  Work,”  he  censures, 
with  no  small  degree  of  severity,  Cheselden’s  Anatomy 
of  the  Bones ; in  another,  he  criticises,  with  equal 
asperity,  the  works  of  Chamberlen  and  Chapman;  and 
in  a third,  he  decries  the  new  forceps  of  Dr.  Smellie. 
He  also  wrote  a work  on  the  high  operation  for  the 
stone,  which  he  practised  ; aDissertation  on  the  Vene- 
real Disease  ; and  an  Account  of  the  Efficacy  of  Bark 
in  stopping  Gangrene. 

DOVE’S  FOOT.  See  Geranium  rotundifolium. 

Dover's  powder.  See  Pulvis  ipecacuanha  compo- 
situs. 

Down  of  seed.  See  Pappus. 

DRA'BA.  (From  dpaaaui,  to  seize;  so  called  from 
its  sudden  effect  upon  the  nose  of  those  who  eat  it.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Tetr adynamia ; Order,  Siliculosa. 

Draba  verna.  A common  plant  on  most  walls. 
The  seed  is  hot  and  stimulating,  and  might  be  used  for 
pepper. 

DRA'CO.  ( Draco , onis.  m.  Apaxwv,  the  dragon.) 
The  dragon. 

Draco  mitigatus.  The  submuriate  of  mercury. 

Draco  sylvestris.  See  Achillea  Ptarmica. 

DRACOCE'PHALUM.  (From  Spawv,  a dragon, 
and  K£<pa\rj,  a head.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order, 
Gymnospermia. 

Dracocephalum  canariense.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  balm  of  Gilead.  Turkey-balsam;  Cana- 
ry balsam  ; Balsam  of  Gilead.  Moldavica ; Melissa 
Turcica.  Dracocephalum  moldavica— floribus  verti- 
cellatis,  bracteis  lanceolatis , serraturis  capillaceis  of 
Linnaeus.  This  plant  affords  a fragrant  essential  oil, 
by  distillation,  known  in  Germany  by  the  name  of 
oleum  syria.  The  whole  herb  abounds  with  an  aro- 
matic smell,  and  an  agreeable  taste,  joined  with  an 
aromatic  flavour ; it  is  recommended  to  give  tone  to 
the  stomach  and  nervous  system. 

Draconis  sanguis.  Dragon’s  blood.  See  Calamus 
rotang. 

Dracontia.  The  dracontia  of  the  Greeks,  accord- 
ing to  Pliny,  was  the  Guinea-worm,  or  dracunculus. 
See  Medinensis  vena. 

Draco'ntium.  (From  Spaicwv , a dragon ; so  called 
because  its  roots  resemble  a dragon’s  tail.)  See  Arum 
dracunculus. 

[“  Dracontium.  Skunk  Cabbage.  The  skunk 
cabbage  is  an  indigenous  plant,  very  common  in  wet 
meadows  throughout  the  United  States,  and  well 
known  for  its  offensive  odour,  perfectly  resembling 
that  of  the  animal  whose  name  it  bears.  Its  odour 
resides  in  a volatile  substance  not  easily  obtained  in 
a separate  state,  and  soon  dissipated  by  heat  or  by 
drying.  It  contains  likewise  an  acrid  principle  like  that 
of  the  genus  arum;  also  a portion  of  resin  and  mu- 
cilage. 

“ This  plant  in  small  doses  is  a stimulant  and  anti 
spasmodic,  and  in  large  doses  a narcotic.  Thirty 
grains  of  the  powdered  root,  if  freshly  prepared,  will 
bring  on  vertigo,  nausea,  and  frequently  vomiting. 
Age  and  exposure,  however,  diminish  its  activity. 
In  medicine  this  vegetable  has  been  found  of  impor- 
tant use  in  certain  forms  of  asthma,  and  in  chronic 
catarrh,  in  which  diseases  it  has  succeeded,  even  when 
the  cases  had  previously  been  of  great  obstinacy.  It 
has  also  been  recommended  in  rheumatism,  in  hysteria, 
and  in  dropsy. 

“ A.  popular  form  of  using  this  medicine  is  that  of  a 
syrup.  This  is  an  uncertain  preparation,  owing  to  the 
volatility  of  the  active  ingredients.  It  is  better  given 
in  powder  made  from  the  dried  root  a short  time  be 
fore  it  is  wanted.  Ten  grains  may  be  taken  at  a dose, 
in  honey  or  treacle,  and  the  quantity  gradually  in- 
creased as  long  as  the  stomach  and  head  remain  unaf- 
fected.”— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

DRACU'NCULUS.  (From  SpaKuv,  a serpent.) 
Gordius  medinensis  ; Term  is  medinensis  ; Vena  me- 
dincnsis  ; Vermiculus  capillaris.  The  Guinea  worm. 
This  animalcule  is  common  in  both  Indies,  in  most 


DRO 


DUC 


parts  of  Africa,  occasionally  at  Genoa,  and  other  hot 
countries.  It  resembles  the  common  worm,  but  is 
much  larger ; is  commonly  found  in  the  legs,  but  some- 
times in  the  muscular  part  of  the  arms.  It  principally 
affects  children,  and  its  generation  is  not  unlike  that 
of  the  broad  worms  of  the  belly.  While  it  moves 
under  the  skin,  it  creates  no  trouble;  but,  in  length  of 
time,  the  place  near  the  dracunculus  suppurates,  and 
the  animal  puts  forth  its  head.  If  it  be  drawn,  it  ex- 
cites considerable  uneasiness,  especially  if  drawn  so 
forcibly  as  to  break  it ; for  the  part  left  within  creates 
intolerable  pain.  These  worms  are  of  different 
lengths.  In  the  Edin.  Med.  Essays,  mention  is  made 
of  one  that  was  three  yards  and  a half  in  length. 

Dracunculus  pratensis.  See  Achillea  ptarmica. 

Dragaca'ntha.  See  Astragalus. 

Dragant  gum.  See  Astragalus. 

DRAGON.  See  Draco. 

Dragon's  blood.  See  Calamus  rotang. 

Dragon's  wort.  See  Arum  dracunculus. 

DRAKE,  James,  M.D.  Fellow  of  the  College  of 
Physicians,  and  of  the  Royal  Society,  published,  in 
1707,  “A  New  System  of  Anatom^,”  which,  though 
taken  principally  from  Cowper,  being  on  a reduced 
plan,  and  more  within  the  reach  of  students,  was 
pretty  favourably  received.  In  the  third  edition,  it 
was  styled  “ Anthropologia  Nova.”  In  abscesses  of 
the  antrum  maxillare,  he  advised  drawing  one  of  the 
molar  teeth,  to  let  out  the  matter.  The  description  of 
the  internal  nostrils,  and  of  the  cavities  entering  them, 
is  new;  as  are  also  the  plates  of  the  abominal 
viscera. 

Drake'na.  See  Dorstenia  contrayerva. 

DRA'STIC.  ( Drasticus . ApaariKos,  active,  brisk  ; 
from  Spain,  to  effect.)  A term  generally  applied  to 
those  medicines  which  are  very  violent  in  their  action ; 
thus,  drastic  purges,  emetics,  &c. 

Drawing  slate.  See  Chalk , black. 

DRELINGCOURT,  Charles,  was  born  at  Paris  in 
1633;  and  after  studying  some  years  at  Saumur,  he 
went  to  graduate  at  Montpelier.  He  soon  after  attend- 
ed the  celebrated  Turenne  in  his  campaigns,  and  was 
by  him  made  physician  to  the  army.  He  was  also 
appointed  one  of  the  physicians  to  Lewis  XIV.  But 
in  1688  he  was  chosen  to  succeed  Vander  Linden,  as 
professor  of  medicine  at  Leyden ; and  two  years  after 
he  was  advanced  to  the  chair  of  anatomy.  He  was 
also  made  physician  to  William,  then  Prince  of 
Orange,  and  his  consort ; and  on  their  accession  to  the 
throne  of  England,  he  spoke  the  congratulatory  ora- 
tion to  them,  as  rector  of  the  university.  He  conti- 
nued in  his  professorship,  giving  general  satisfaction,  to 
the  period  of  his  death  in  1697.  He  was  a voluminous 
and  learned,  but  hardly  an  original  writer;  yet  his 
works  were  very  much  read  at  the  time.  In  one  of 
his  orations,  he  exculpates  medical  men  from  the 
charge  of  impiety,  observing  that  the  contemplation  of 
the  wo rlcs  of  God  tends  to  blind  them  more  to  religion. 
In  his  “ Apologia  Medica,”  he  refutes  the  notion,  that 
physicians  were  excluded  from  Rome  for  six  hundred 
years.  He  strenuously  opposed  the  introduction  of 
chemical  preparations  into  medicine,  which  wa3  then 
very  prevalent.  His  son,  Charles , succeeded  him  in 
practice,  but  has  left  no  publication,  except  his  thesis 
“ De  Lienosis.” 

Dro'ma.  The  name  of  a plaster  described  by 
Myrepsus. 

Dropaci'smus.  ( From  Spann,  to  remove.)  Dro- 
pax.  A stimulant  plaster  of  pitch,  wax,  &c.  to  take 
off  hair. 

DRo'rxx.  See  Dropacismus. 

DRO  PSY.  Hydrops.  A collection  of  a serous 
fluid  in  the  cellular  membrane  ; in  the  viscera  and  the 
circumscribed  cavities  of  the  body.  See  Hydrops , 
Ascites , Anasarca , Hydrocephalus , Hydrothorax , Hy- 
drocele. 

Dropsy  of  the  belly.  See  Ascites. 

Dropsy  of  the  brain.  See  Hydrocephalus. 

Dropsy  of  the  chest.  See  Hydrothorax. 

Dropsy  of  the  ovary.  See  Ascites. 

Dropsy  of  the  skin.  See  Anasarca. 

Dropsy  of  the  testicle.  See  Hydrocele. 

DROPWORT.  See  CEnanthe , and  Spiraea. 

Dropwort , hemlock.  See  CEnanthe. 

Dropwort,  water.  See  CEnanthe. 

DRO'SERA.  (From  Spocrepa,  dewy ; which  is  from 
Spoaos,  dew ; drops  hanging  on  tire  leaves  like  dew.) 


The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  PerUandria  ; 
Order,  Hexagynia.  Sun-dew. 

Drosera  rotundifolxa.  The  sytematic  name  of 
the  sun-dew.  Ros  solis;  Rosella.  Sun-dew.  Dro- 
sera rotundifolia — scapis  radicatis  ; foliis  orbiculatis 
of  Linnaeus.  This  elegant  little  plant  is  said  to  be  so 
acrid  as  to  ulcerate  the  skin,  and  remove  warts  and 
corns ; and  to  excite  a fatal  coughing  and  delirium  in 
sheep  who  eat  it.  It  is  seldom  given  medicinally  in 
this  country  but  by  the  lower  orders,  who  esteem 
a decoction  of  it  as  serviceable  in  asthmas  and 
coughs. 

DROsoBa'TANUM.  (From  Spoaos,  dew,  and  (io'Javy, 
an  herb  : so  called  from  its  being  covered  with  an  aro- 
matic dew.)  The  herb  betony.  See  Betonica. 

Drosso'meli.  (From  Spooos,  dew,  and  peXi,  honey.y 
Honey-dew.  Manna. 

DRUPA.  ( Drupes , unripe  olives.)  A stone  fruit 
formed  of  a fleshy  or  coriaceous  seed-vessel,  enclosing 
a nut. 

It  is  distinguished  into, 

1.  Drupa  succosa,  when  of  a succulent  fleshy  con- 
sistence ; as  the  cherry,  plilm,  peach,  and  nectarine. 

2.  D.  fibrosa,  the  nut  being  fibrose;  as  in  Cocus  nu- 
cifera. 

3.  D.  exsicca,  dry  and  subcoriaceous ; as  the  almond 
and  horse-chesnut. 

4.  D.  dehiscens , opening ; as  in  Juglans  regia , and 
Myristica  moschata. 

From  the  number  of  nuts  it  contains,  the  drupa  is 
said  to  be  monosperma , when  there  is  but  one,  as  in  the 
olive  and  pistachia;  and  disperma  when  there  are  two, 
as  in  Styrax. 

DRUPACEUS.  Drupaceous;  resembling  a drupe, 
or  stone  fruit.  Applied  to  the  pod  of  Erugago  and 
Bunias. 

DUCT.  See  Ductus. 

Duct , biliary.  See  Biliary  duct. 

DUCTI  LITY.  Ductilitas.  A property  by  which 
bodies  are  elongated  by  repeated  or  continued  pres- 
sure. It  is  peculiar  to  metals.  Most  authors  confound 
the  words  malleability,  laminability,  and  ductility,  to- 
gether, and  use  them  in  a loose  indiscriminate  way; 
but  they  are  very  different.  Malleability  is  the  pro- 
perty of  a body  which  enlarges  one  or  two  of  its  three 
dimensions,  by  a blow  or  pressure  very  suddenly  ap- 
plied. Laminability  belongs  to  bodies  extensible  in 
dimension  by  a gradually  applied  pressure  ; and  duc- 
tility is  properly  to  be  attributed  to  such  bodies  as  can 
be  rendered  longer  and  thinner  by  drawing  them 
through  a hole  of  less  area  than  the  transverse  section 
of  the  body  so  drawn. 

DU'CTUS.  A canal  or  duct. 

Ductus  arteriosus.  A great  artery-like  canal 
found  only  in  the  foetus,  and  very  young  children,  be- 
tween the  pulmonary  artery  and  tire  aorta.  In  adult3 
it  is  closed  up. 

Ductus  auris  palatinus.  The  Eustachian  tube. 

Ductus  biliaris.  See  Choledochus  ductus. 

Ductus  communis  choledochus.  See  Choledo- 
chus ductus. 

Ductus  cysticus.  The  trunk  of  the  biliary  ducts 
in  the  liver  which  carries  the  bile  from  them  into  the 
gall-bladder. 

Ductus  hepaticus.  See  Hepatic  duct. 

Ductus  lachrymalis.  See  Lachrymal  ducts. 

Ductus  lactiferus.  Ductus  galactophorus.  The 
excretory  ducts  of  the  glandular  substance  composing 
the  female  breast.  The  milk  passes  along  these  ducts 
to  the  nipple. 

Ductus  ad  nasum.  See  Canalis  nasalis. 

Ductus  pancreaticus.  The  pancreatic  duct.  It 
is  white  and  small,  and  arises  from  the  sharp  extremity 
of  the  pancreas,  runs  through  the  middle  of  the  gland 
towards  the  duodenum,  into  which  it  pours  its  contents 
by  an  opening  common  to  it  and  the  ductus  communis 
choledochus. 

Ductus  salivales.  The  excretory  ducts  of  the 
salivary  glands,  which  convey  the  saliva  into  the 
mouth. 

Ductus  stenonis.  The  Stenonian  duct,  which 
was  so  called  after  its  discoverer,  Steno.  It  arises 
from  all  tlife  small  excretory  ducts  of  the  parotid  gland, 
and  passes  transversely  over  the  masseter  muscle, 
penetrates  the  buccinator,  and  opens  into  the  mouth. 

Ductus  thoracicus.  See  Thoracic  duct. 

Ductus  venosus.  When  the  vena  cava  passes  the 


DUR 


I)YS 


liver  in  the  foetus,  it  sends  off  the  ductus  venosus, 
which  communicates  with  the  sinus  of  the  vena  porta; ; 
but,  in  adults,  it  becomes  a flat  ligament. 

Ductus  warthonianus.  The  excretory  duct  of 
the  maxillary  glands ; so  named  qfter  its  discoverer. 

Dulca'cidum.  (From  dulcis,  sweet,  and  acidus , 
sour.)  A medicine  composed  of  a sweet  and  sour  in- 
gredient. 

DULCAMA'RA.  (From  dulcis , sweet,  and  ama- 
rus,  bitter.)  Bitter-sweet.  See  Solanum  dulcamara. 

Dumbness.  See  Aphonia  and  Paracusis. 

DUMOSUS.  (From  dumus  a bush.)  Bushy. 

DuMOSyE.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Lin- 
naeus’s Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of 
shrubby  plants,  which  are  thick  set  with  irregular 
branches,  and  bushy. 

DUNCAN,  Daniel,  was  born  at  Montaubon,  in 
Languedoc,  in  1649,  son  of  a professor  of  physic  in 
that  city,  but  of  a family  originally  Scotch.  Having 
lost  both  his  parents  in  early  infancy,  he  was  taken 
under  the  protection  of  his  maternal  uncle,  and  at  a 
roper  age  sent  to  study  medicine  at  Montpelier,  where 
e took  his  degree.  He  afterward  resided  seven  years 
at  Paris,  where  he  published  his  first  work,  upon  the 
principle  of  motion  in  animal  bodies.  He  then  visited 
London,  partly  to  arrange  some  family  affairs,  partly 
to  obtain  information  concerning  the  plague,  and  in- 
tended to  have  settled  there ; but  after  two  years  he 
was  summoned  to  attend  his  patron,  the  great  Colbert. 
He  soon  after  made  public  two  works,  in  which  he  at- 
tempted to  explain  the  Annual  Functions  on  Chemical 
and  Mechanical  Principles.  On  the  death  of  Colbert, 
he  resided  for  some  years  in  his  native  city ; but  the 
persecution  of  the  Protestants  in  1690  drove  him  to 
Switzerland,  and  he  was  appointed  Professor  of  Ana- 
tomy and  Chemistry  at  Berne,  where  he  got  into  con- 
siderable practice.  In  1699  he  was  sent  for  to  attend 
the  Princess  of  Hesse-Cassel,  who  had  symptoms  of 
threatening  consumption,  induced  by  the  excessive 
use  of  tea,  and  other  hot  liquors;  which  led  him  to 
write  a Treatise  against  that  practice,  published  sub- 
sequently by  the  persuasion  of  his  friend,  Boerhaave. 
He  remained  there  three  years,  affording  meanwhile 
much  relief  to  the  French  refugees ; and  the  fame  of 
his  liberality  procured  his  invitation  to  the  court  of 
Berlin ; but  a regard  to  his  health  and  to  economy  soon 
obliged  him  to  remove  to  the  Hague.  In  1714  he  ac- 
complished his  favourite  object  of  settling  in  London, 
and  when  he  reached  his  70th  year,  put  in  practice  his 
previous  resolution  of  giving  his  professional  services 
only  gratuitously;  in  which  he  steadily  persevered 
during  the  remaining  sixteen  years  of  his  life,  though, 
in  1721,  he  lost  the  third  part  of  his  property  by  the 
South-sea  scheme. 

DUNG.  See  Fax. 

Dung , devil's.  See  Ferula  assafeetida. 

DUO.  (Auw,  two.)  Some  compositions  consisting 
of  two  ingredients,  are  distinguished  by  this  term ; as 
pilula;  ex  duobus. 

DUODE'NUM.  (From  duodenus , consisting  of 
twelve;  so  called  because  it  was  supposed  not  to  ex- 
ceed the  breadth  of  twelve  fingers  : but  as  the  ancients 
dissected  only  animals,  this  does  not  hold  good  in  the 
human  subject.)  The  first  portion  of  the  small  intes- 
tines. See  Intestines. 

DUPLEX.  (From  duo,  two,  and  plico,  to  fold.) 
Double  or  two-fold.  In  botany  applied  to  leaves, 
petals,  perianths,  &c.  The  perianthum  duplex  is  seen 
in  Malva  althcea  and  Hibiscus. 

Duplica'na.  (From  duplex , double.)  A name  of 
the  double  tertian  fever. 

DUPLICATUS.  (From  duplex,  double.)  This 
terry  is  applied  to  a flower  which  has  two  series  or 
rows  of  petals. 

DU'RA  MATER.  (From  durus,  hard,  and  mater , a 
mother:  called  dura,  from  its  comparative  hardness 
with  the  pia  mater;  and  mater , from  its  being  sup- 
posed to  be  the  source  of  all  the  other  membranes. 
Other  parts  have  received  the  trivial  name  of  dura, 
from  their  comparative  hardness;  as  portio  dura,  a 
branch  of  the  seventh  pair  of  nerves.)  Dura  meninz  ; 
Dermatodes.  A thick  and  somewhat  opaque  and  in- 
sensible membrane,  formed  of  two  layers,  that  sur- 
rounds and  defends  the  brain,  and  adheres  strongly  to 
the  internal  surface  of  the  cranium.  It  has  three  con- 
siderable processes,  the  falciform,  the  tentorium,  and 
the  septum  cerebelli ; and  several  sinuses,  of  which 


the  longitudinal,  lateral,  and  inferior  longitudinal,  are 
the  principal.  Upon  the  external  surface  of  the  dura 
mater,  there  are  little  holes,  from  which  emerge  fleshy- 
coloured  papilla,  and  which,  upon  examining  the 
skull-cap,  will  be  found  to  have  corresponding  fovea. 
These  are  the  external  glandulas  Pacchioni.  They  are 
in  number  from  ten  to  fifteen  on  each  side,  and  are 
chiefly  lateral  to  the  course  of  the  longitudinal  sinus. 
The  arteries  which  supply  this  membrane  with  vessels 
for  its  own  nourishment,  for  that  of  the  contiguous 
bone,  and  for  the  perpetual  exudation  of  the  fluid,  or 
halitus  rather,  which  moistens  or  bedews  its  internal 
surface,  may  be  divided  into  anterior,  middle,  and  pos- 
terior. The  first  proceeds  from  the  ophthalmic  and 
ethmoidal  branches ; the  second  from  the  internal 
maxillary  and  superior  pharyngeal ; the  posterior  from 
the  occipital  and  vertebral  arteries. 

The  principal  artery  of  the  dura  mater,  named,  by 
way  of  distinction,  the  great  artery  of  the  dura  mater, 
is  derived  from  the  internal  maxillary  artery,  a branch 
of  the  external  carotid.  It  is  called  the  spinalis,  or 
spheno-spinalis,  from  its  passing  into  the  head  through 
the  spinous  hole  of  the  sphenoid  bone,  or  meninga  me- 
dia, from  its  relative  situation,  as  it  rises  in  the  great 
middle  fossa  of  the  skull.  This  artery,  though  it 
sometimes  enters  the  skull  In  two  branches,  usually 
enters  in  one  considerable  branch,  and  divides,  soon 
after  it  reaches  the  dura  mater,  into  three  or  four 
branches,  of  wrhich  the  anterior  is  the  largest;  and 
these  spread  their  ramifications  beautifully  upon  the 
dura  mater,  over  all  that  part  which  is  opposite  to  the 
anterior,  middle,  and  posterior  lobes  of  the  brain.-  Its 
larger  trunks  run  upon  the  internal  surface  of  the  pa- 
rietal bone,  and  are  sometimes  for  a considerable  space 
buried  in  its  substance.  The  extreme  branches  of  this 
artery  extend  so  as  to  inosculate  with  the  anterior  and 
posterior  arteries  of  the  dura  mater ; and  through  the 
bones  (chiefly  parietal  and  temporal  bones),  they  inos- 
culate with  the  temporal  and  occipital  arteries.  The 
meningeal  artery  has  been  known  to  become  aneuris- 
nial,  and  distended  at  intervals ; it  has  formed  an 
aneurism,  destroying  the  bones  and  causing  epilepsy. 

Dura  meninx.  See  dura  mater. 

DVVALE.  See  Atropa  belladonna. 

Dwarf  elder.  See  Sambucus  ebulus. 

Dyo'ta.  (From  Svu>,  two,  and  ovs,  u>7 os,  an  ear.)  A 
chemical  instrument  with  two  ears,  or  handles. 

DYSESTHE  SIA.  (From  Svs,  difficulty,  and  aia- 
Oavopai,  to  feel  or  perceive.)  Impaired  feeling. 

Dysjesthesi®.  (The  plural  of  Dyscesthesia.)  The 
name  of  an  order  in  the  class  Locales  of  Dr.  Cullen’s 
Nosology,  containing  those  diseases,  in  which  the 
senses  are  depraved,  or  destroyed,  from  a defect  of  the 
external  organs. 

Dysanago'gus.  (From  Svs,  with  difficulty,  and 
avayio,  to  subdue.)  Viscid  expectoration. 

DYSCATAPO'TIA.  (From  6tty,  and  Ka'Jamvu),  to 
drink.)  A difficulty  of  swallowing  liquids,  which  Dr. 
Mead  thinks  a more  proper  term  than  that  generally 
used  for  canine  madness,  viz.  hydrophobia;  as  it  is 
more  particularly  descriptive  of  the  affection  under 
which  the  unhappy  patients  labour;  for,  in  reality, 
they  dread  water  from  the  difficulty  of  swallowing  it. 

DYSCINE'SIA.  (From  <5uy,  bad,  and  xtvru,  to 
move.)  Bad  or  imperfect  motion. 

Dyscinesiie.  (The  plural  of  dyscinesia .)  Applied 
to  an  order  in  the  class  Locales  of  Cullen’s  Nosology ; 
embracing  diseases  in  which  the  motion  is  impeded,  or 
depraved,  from  an  imperfection  of  the  organ. 

DYSCOPHO'SIS.  (From  &jy,  with  difficulty,  and 
KW0OW,  to  be  deaf.)  A defect  in  the  sense  of  hearing. 

DYSCRA'SIA.  (From  Svs,  with  difficulty,  and 
uepavvvni,  to  mix.)  A bad  habit  of  body. 

DYSECCE'A.  (From  Svs,  difficulty,  and  aico 77,  hear- 
ing). Cophosis.  Deafness.  Hearing  diminished,  or 
destroyed.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  J.ocales 
and  order  Dyscesthesia  of  Cullen,  containing  two  spe- 
cies : Dysecaa  organica,  which  arises  front  wax  in  the 
meatus,  injuries  of  the  membrane,  or  inflammation 
and  obstruction  of  the  tube : Dysecaa  atonica,  when 
without  any  discernible  injury  of  the  organ. 

Dyse'lcia.  (From  Svs,  with  difficulty,  and  rXroy, 
an  ulcer.)  An  inveterate  ulcer,  or  one  difficult  to  heal- 

Dysk'metus.  (From  Svs,  with  difficulty,  and  cytm, 
to  vomit.)  A person  no’  easily  made  to  vomit. 

DYSENTE'RIA.  See  Dysentery 

DYSENTERY.  ( Dysenteria ; from  So s,  difficulty 


DYS 


DYS 


and  tvlepa,  the  bowels.)  Dissolutus  morbus.  Diar- 
rhoea carnosa.  The  flux.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
class  Pyrexia,  and  order  Profiuvia  of  Cullen’s  Nosolo- 
gy. It  is  known  by  contagious  pyrexia;  frequent 
griping  stools ; tenesmus;  stools,  chiefly  mucous,  some- 
times mixed  with  blood,  the  natural  feces  being  re- 
tained or  voided  in  small,  compact,  hard  Strbstances, 
known  by  the  name  of  scybala,  loss  of  appetite,  and 
nausea.  It  occurs  chiefly  in  summer  and  autumn,  and 
is  often  occasioned  by  much  moisture  succeeding 
quickly  intense  heat,  or  great  drought;  whereby  the 
perspiration  is  suddenly  checked,  and  a.  determination 
made  to  the  intestines.  It  is  likewise  occasioned  by 
the  use  of  unwholesome  and  putrid  food,  and  by 
noxious  exhalations  and  vapours;  hence  it  appears 
often  in  armies  encamped  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
low  marshy  ground,  and  proves  highly  destructive ; but 
the  cause  which  most  usually  gives  rise  to  it,  is  a spe- 
cific contagion ; and  when  it  once  makes  its  appear- 
ance, where  numbers  of  people  are  collected  together, 
it  not  unfrequently  spreads  with  great  rapidity.  A pe- 
culiar disposition  in  the  atmosphere  seems  often  to  pre- 
dispose, or  give  rise  to  the  dysentery,  in  which  case  it 
prevails  epidemically. 

It  frequently  occurs  about  the  same  time  with  au- 
tumnal intermittent  and  remittent  fevers,  and  with 
these,  it  is  often  complicated. 

The  disease,  however,  is  much  more  prevalent  in 
warm  climates  than  in  cold  ones ; and  in  the  months 
of  August,  September,  and  October,  which  is  the  rainy 
season  of  the  year  in  the  West  Indies,  it  is  very  apt  to 
break  out  and  to  become  very  general  among  the 
negroes  on  the  different  plantations  in  the  colonies. 
The  body  having  been  rendered  irritable  by  the  great 
heat  of  the  summer,  and  being  exposed  suddenly  to 
much  moisture  with  open  pores,  the  blood  is  thereby 
thrown  from  the  exterior  vessels  upon  the  interior,  so 
as  to  give  rise  to  dysenteries. 

An  attack  of  dysentery  is  sometimes  preceded  by 
loss  of  appetite,  costiveness,  flatulency,  sickness  at  the 
stomach,  and  a slight  vomiting,  and  comes  on.  with 
chills,  succeeded  by  heat  in  the  skin,  and  frequency  of 
the  pulse.  These  symptoms  are  in  general  tire  lore- 
runners  of  the  griping  and  increased  evacuations  which 
afterward  occur. 

When  the  inflammation  begins  to  occupy  the  lower 
part  of  the  intestinal  tube,  the  stools  become  more  fre- 
quent, and  less  abundant;  and,  in  passing  through  the 
inflamed  parts,  they  occasion  great  pain,  so  that  every 
evacuation  is  preceded  by  a severe  griping,  as  also  a 
rumbling  noise. 

The  motions  vary  both  in  colour  and  consistence, 
being  sometimes  composed  of  frothy  mucus,  streaked 
with  blood,  and  at  other  times  of  an  acrid  watery  hu- 
mour, like  the  washings  of  meat,  and  with  a very  foetid 
smell.  Sometimes  pure  blood  is  voided  ; now  and  then 
lumps  of  coagulated  mucus,  resembling  bits  of  cheese, 
are  to  be  observed  in  the  evacuations,  and  in  some  in- 
stances a quantity  of  purulent  matter  is  passed. 

Sometimes  what  is  voided  consists  merely  of  a 
mucous  matter,  without  any  appearance  of  blood,  exhi- 
biting that  disease  which  is  known  by  the  name  of  dy- 
senteria  alba,  or  morbus  mucosus. 

While  the  stools  consist  of  these  various  matters, 
and  are  voided  frequently,  it  is  seldom  that  we  can 
perceive  any  natural  fasces  among  them,  and  when  we 
do,  they  appear  in  .small  hard  balls,  called  scybala, 
which  being  passed,  the  patient  is  sure  to  experience 
some  temporary  relief  from  the  griping  and  tenesmus. 

It  frequently  happens,  from  the  violent  efforts  which 
are  made  to  discharge  the  irritating  matters,  that  a por- 
tion of  the  gut  is  forced  beyond  the  verge  of  the 
anus,  which,  in  the  progress  of  the  disease,  proves  a 
troublesome  and  distressing  symptom;  as  does  like- 
wise the  tenesmus,  there  being  a constant  inclination 
to  go  to  stool,  without  the  ability  of  voiding  any  thing, 
except  perhaps  a little  mucus. 

More  or  less  pyrexia  usually  attends  with  the  symp- 
toms which  have  been  described,  throughout  the  whole 
of  the  disease,  where  it  is  inclined  to  terminate  fatally ; 
and  is  either  of  an  inflammatory  or  putrid  tendency. 
In  other  cases,  the  febrile  stale  wholly  disappears  after 
a time,  while  the  proper  dysenteric  symptoms  probably 
will  be  of  long  continuance.  Hence  the  distinction 
into  acute  and  chronic  dysentery. 

When  tbe  symptoms  run  high,  produce  great  loss  of 
strength  and  are  accompanied  with  a putrid  tendency 


and  a fetid  and  involuntary  discharge,  the  disease  often 
terminates  fatally  in  the  course  of  a few  days ; but 
when  they  are  more  moderate,  it  is  often  protracted  to 
a considerable  length  of  time,  and  so  goes  off  at  last  by 
a gentle  perspiration,  diffused  equally  over  the  whole 
body  ; the  fever,  thirst,  and  griping  then  ceasing,  and 
the  stools  becoming  of  a natural  colour  and  consist- 
ence. When  the  disease  is  of  long  standing,  and  has 
become  habitual,  it  seldom  admits  of  any  cure ; and 
when  it  attacks  a person  labouring  under  an  advanced 
stage  of  scurvy,  or  pulmonary  consumption,  or  whose 
constitution  has  been  much  impaired  by  any  other  dis- 
order, it  is  sure  to  prove  fatal.  It  sometimes  appears 
at  the  same  time  with  autumnal  intermittent  and  re- 
mittent fevers,  as  has  beep  observed,  and  is  then  more 
complicated  and  difficult  to  remove. 

Upon  opening  the  bodies  of  those  who  die  of  dysen- 
tery, the  internal  coat  of  the  intestines  (but  more  parti- 
cularly of  the  colon  and  rectum)  appears  to  be  affected 
with  inflammation  and  its  consequences,  such  as  ul- 
ceration, gangrene,  and  contractions.  The  perito- 
neum, and  other  coverings  of  the  abdomen,  seem  like- 
wise, in  many  instances,  to  be  affected  by  inflammation. 

In  the  treatment  of  the  acute  dysentery,  when  not 
arising  from  contagion,  but  attended  by  considerable 
pyrexia  and  pain,  in  persons  of  a strong  and  full  habit, 
it  will  be  right  to  commence  by  a moderate  venaesec- 
tion ; but  in  general,  leeches  to  the  abdomen  will  ab- 
stract a sufficient  quantity  of  blood  followed  by  fo- 
mentations, or  the  warm  bath,  which  may  produce  a 
powerful  determination  to  the  surface  as  well  as  coun- 
teract spasm  ; also  blisters  or  rubefacients  should  not 
be  neglected.  With  regard  to  internal  remedies,  a 
brisk  emetic  will  often  be  advisable,  particularly  where 
the  tongue  is  very  foul,  the  stomach  loaded,  or  marks 
of  congestion  in  the  liver  appear : it  may  also,  by  in- 
ducing diaphoresis,  materially  check  the  violence  of 
the  symptomsAnay  sometimes  cut  short  the  disease 
at  once.  The  mext  object  is  effectually  to  clear  out  the 
bowels:  for  which  purpose  calomel,  joined  with  opium 
in  quantity  sufficient  to  relieve  the  pain  may  be  given, 
and  followed  up  by  castor  oil,  neutral  salts,  &c.  till 
they  operate.  In  the  mean  time,  mucilaginous  demul- 
cents may  help  to  moderate  the  irritation.  When  the 
bowels  have  been  thoroughly  evacuated,  it  will  be  im- 
portant to  procure  a steady  determination  to  the  sur- 
face, and  the  compound  powder  of  ipecacuanha  is 
perhaps  the  best  medicine ; assisted  by  warm  clothing, 
friction,  exercise,  &c.  Should  the  liver  not  perform  its 
office  properly,  the  continued  use  of  mercury  may  be 
necessary  : to  restore  the  strength,  and  relieve  dyspep- 
tic symptoms,  tonics  and  antacids  will  be  useful,  with 
a mild  nutritious  diet ; and  great  care  must  be  taken  to 
obviate  accumulation  of  faeces.  In  the  chronic  form 
of  the  disease,  demulcents  and  sedatives  may  be  freely 
employsd  by  the  mouth,  or  in  the  form  of  clyster ; the 
bowels  may  be  occasionally  relieved  by  rhubarb,  or 
other  mild  aperients;  mercury  should  be  cautiously 
employed,  where  the  discharge  of  bile  is  indicated,  or 
if  that  cannot  be  borne,  nitric  acid  may  be  tried  ; and 
besides  great  attention  to  regimen,  as  in  the  decline  of 
acute  dysentery,  mild  astringents,  with  tonics,  &c.  may 
contribute  materially  to  the  recovery  of  the  patient. 

Dysepulo'ticus.  (From  Svg,  with  difficulty,  and 
crruAow,  to  cicatrize.)  Dysepulotus.  An  inveterate 
ulcer  difficult  to  be  healed. 

Dyshjemorrho'is.  (From  Svs,  with  difficulty,  and 
aiyoppois , tbe  piles.)  Suppression  of  the  bleeding  from 
piles. 

DYSLO'CHIA.  (From  tivs,  difficulty,  and  Ao%ia, 
the  lochia.)  A suppression  of  the  lochia. 

DYSMENORRIUE'A.  (From  8vS,  with  difficulty, 
and  pyvoppoia,  the  menses.)  A difficult  or  painful 
menstruation,  accompanied  with  severe  pains  in  the 
back,  loins,  and  bottom  of  the  belly. 

Dyso'des.  (From  Svs,  bad,  and  o£&>,  to  smell.) 

1.  A bad  smell.  Foetid. 

2.  Hippocrates  applies  it  to  a fetid  disorder  of  the 
small  intestines. 

3.  The  name  of  a malagma  and  acopon  in  Galen 
and  Paulus  ASgineta. 

DYSO'PIA.  (From  5vs,  bad,  and  wip,  an  eye.) 
Parorasis.  Difficult  sight.  Sight  depraved,  requiring 
one  certain  quantity  of  light,  one  particular  distance, 
or  one  posit  ion.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Loca- 
les, and  order  Dysocsthesiae  of  Cullen,  containing  the 
five  following  species : 


313 


DYS 


DYS 


T.  Dysopia  tenebrarum , called  also  Amblyopia  cre- 
puscularis,  requiring  objects  to  be  placed  in  a strong 
light. 

2.  Dysopia  luminis,  likewise  termed  Amblyopia 
meridiana,  objects  only  discernible  in  a weak  light. 

3.  Dysopia  dissitorum , in  which  distant  objects  are 
not  perceived. 

’ 4.  Dysopia  proximoram,  or  Dysopia  amblyopia , in 
which  objects  too  near  are  not  perceived. 

5.  Dysopia  lateralis , called  also  Amblyopia  lusco- 
rum,  in  which  objects  are  not  seen,  unless  placed  in  an 
oblique  position. 

DYSORE'XIA.  (From  Svs,  bad,  and  opefa,  appe- 
tite.) A depraved  appetite. 

Dysorexi^e.  (The  plural  of  Dysorezia.)  The 
name  of  an  order  in  the  class  Locales  of  Cullen’s  No- 
sology, which  he  divides  into  two  sections,  appetitus 
erronei  and  deficientes. 

DYSPE  PSIA.  (From  Svs,  bad,  and  to  con- 

coct.) Apepsia.  Indigestion.  Dr.  Cullen  arranges 
this  genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Neuroses,  and  order 
Adynamia.  It  chiefly  arises  in  persons  between  thirty 
and  forty  years  of  age,  and  is  principally  to  be  met 
with  in  those  who  devote  much  time  to  study,  or  who 
lead  either  a very  sedentary  or  irregular  life.  A great 
singularity  attendant  on  it  is,  that  it  may  and  often 
does  continue  a great  length  of  time,  without  any  ag- 
gravation or  emission  of  the  symptoms. 

Great  grief  and  uneasiness  of  mind,  intense  study, 
profuse  evacuations,  excess  in  venery,  hard  drinking, 
particularly  of  spirituous  liquors,  and  of  tea,  tobacco, 
opium,  and  other  narcotics,  immoderate  repletion,  and 
over  distention  of  the  stomach,  a deficiency  in  the  se- 
cretion of  the  bile,  or  gastric  juice,  and  the  being  much 
exposed  to  moist  and  cold  air,  when  without  exercise, 
are  the  causes  which  usually  occasion  dyspepsia. 

A long  train  of  nervous  symptoms  generally  attend 
on  this  disease,  such  as  a loss  of  anpetite,  nausea., 
heart-burn,  flatulency,  acid,  foetid,  or  Odorous  eructa- 
tions, a gnawing  in  the  stomach  when  empty,  a sense 
of  constriction  and  uneasiness  in  the  throat,  with  pain 
in  the  side,  or  sternum,  so  that  the  patient  at  times  can 
only  lie  on  his  right  side ; great  costiveness,  habitual 
chilliness,  paleness  of  the  countenance,  languor,  un- 
willingness to  move  about,  lowness  of  spirits,  palpita- 
tions, and  disturbed  sleep. 

The  number  of  these  symptoms  varies  in  different 
cases,  with  some,  being  felt  only  in  part ; in  others, 
being  accompanied  even  with  additional  ones,  equally 
unpleasant,  such  as  severe  transient  pains  in  the  head 
and  breast,  and  various  affections  of  the  sight,  as 
blindness,  double  vision,  &lc. 

Dyspepsia  never  proves  fatal,  unless  when,  by  a 
very  long  continuance,  it  produces  great  general  de- 
bility and  weakness ; and  so  passes  into  some  other 
disease,  such  as  dropsy ; but  it  is  at  all  times  very  diffi- 
cult to  remove,  but  more  particularly  so  in  warm  cli- 
mates. 

The  morbid  appearances  to  be  observed  on  dissec- 
tions of  this  disease,  are  principally  confined  to  that 
part  of  the  stomach  which  is  called  the  pylorus ; which 
is  often  found  either  in  a contracted,  scirrhous,  or  ul- 
cerated state.  In  every  instance,  the  stomach  is  per- 
ceived to  be  considerably  distended  with  air. 

The  treatment  of  dyspepsia  consists,  1.  In  obviating 
the  several  exciting  causes.  2.  In  relieving  urgent 
symptoms,  some  of  which  may  tend  to  prolong  the  dis- 
ease. 3.  In  restoring  the  tone  of  the  stomach,  or  of 
the  general  system,  and  thus  getting  rid  of  the  liability 
to  relapse. 

L In  fulfilling  the  first  indication,  we  are  often  much 
circumscribed  by  the  circumstances  or  habits  of  the 
patient ; and  particularly  when  they  have  been  accus- 
tomed to  drink  spirits,  which  they  can  hardly  relin- 
quish, or  only  in  a very  gradual  manner.  Tlje  diet 
must  be  regulated  by  the  particular  form  of  the  disease ; 
in  those  who  are  liable  to  acidity,  it  should  be  chiefly 
of  an  animal  nature,  with  the  least  acescent  vegetable 
substances,  and  for  drink,  toast  and  water,  or  soda 
water,  adding  a little  brandy,  if  really  necessary; 
where  the  opposite,  or  septic  tendency  appears,  which 
happens  especially  in  persons  of  a florid  complexion,  it 
should  consist  principally  of  vegetable  matter,  particu- 
larly the  ripe  subacid  fruits,  with  the  meat  of  young 
animals  occasionally,  and  if  plain  water  be  not  agreea- 
ble, table-beer,  cider,  &c.  may  be  allowed  for  drink ; 
and  in  those  of  the  phlegmatic  temperament  the  most 


nutritious  and  digestible  articles  must  be  selected, 
mostly  of  an  animal  nature,  assisted  by  the  warmer 
condiments,  and  the  more  generous  fermented  liquors 
in  moderation.  It  will  be  generally  better  to  take  food 
oftener,  rather  than  to  load  the  stomach  too  much  at 
once  ; but  more  than  four  meals  a day  can  hardly  be 
requisite ; if  at  any  other  time  a craving  should  occur, 
a crust  of  bread  or  a piece  of  biscuit  may  be  eaten. 

II.  Among  the  symptoms  requiring  palliation,  heart- 
burn is  frequent,  resulting  from  acrimony  in  the  sto- 
mach, and  to  be  relieved  by  antacid,  or  antiseptic 
remedies,  according  to  circumstances,  or  diluents  and 
demulcents  may  answer  the  purpose.  A sense  of 
weight  at  the  stomach,  with  nausea,  mav  occasionally 
indicate  a gentle  emetic;  but  will  be  less  likely  to  occur 
if  the  bowels  are  kept  regular.  Flatulence  may  be  re- 
lieved by  aromatics,  tether,  &c. ; and  these  will  be  pro- 
per for  spasmodic,  or  nervous  pains;  but  if  ineffectual, 
opium  should  be  had  recourse  to.  Vomiting  is  gene- 
rally best  checked  by  carbonic  acid.  When  diarrhoea 
occurs,  the  aromatic  confection  is  mostly  proper,  some- 
times with  a little  opium.  But  the  bowels  are  much 
more  commonly  confined,  and  mild  cathartics  should 
be  frequently  exhibited,  as  castor  oil,  rhubarb,  aloes, 
See. ; sometimes  the  more  active,  where  these  do  not 
answer.  In  those  of  a florid  complexion  a laxative 
diet,  with  the  supertartrate  of  potassa,  or  other  saline 
cathartic  occasionally,  may  agree  better:  and  where 
the  liver  is  torpid,  mercurials  should  be  resorted  to. 

ill.  The  third  object  is  to  be  attempted  by  tonics, 
particularly  the  aromatic  bitters,  the  mineral  acids,  or 
the  preparations  of  iron ; by  the  cold  bath  prudently 
regulated;  by  gentle  exercise' steadily  persevered  in, 
particularly  walking  or  riding  on  horseback  ; by  a care- 
ful attention  to  the  diet;  by  seeking  a pure  mild  air, 
keeping  regular  hours,  with  relaxation  and  amusement 
of  the  mind,  &c. 

DYSPERMATI'SMUS.  (From Svs,  bad,  and  cnepya, 
seed.)  Agenesia.  Slow,  or  impeded  emission  of  se- 
men, during  coition,  insufficient  for  the  purpose  of 
generation.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , 
and  order  Epischeses  of  Cullen.  The  species  are : 

1.  Dyspermatismus  urethralis,  when  the  obstruc- 
tion is  in  the  urethra. 

2.  Dyspermatismus  nodosus,  when  a tumour  is 
formed  in  either  corpus  cavernosum  penis. 

3.  Dyspermatismus  praputialis,  when  the  impedi- 
ment is  from  a straightness  of  the  orifice  of  the  prte- 
puce. 

4.  Dyspermatismus  mucosus , when  the  urethra  is 
obstructed  by  a viscid  mucus. 

4.  Dyspermatismus  hypertonicus , when  there  is  an 
excess  of  erection  of  the  penis. 

6.  Dyspermatismus  epilepticus,  from  epileptic  fits 
coming  on  during  coition. 

7.  Dyspermatismus  apractodes,  from  a want  of  vi  • 
gour  in  the  genitals. 

8.  Dyspermatismus  refiuus,  in  which  the  semen  is 
thrown  back  into  the  urinary  bladder. 

DYSPHA'GIA.  (From  <5uj,  with  difficulty,  and 
0ayw,  to  eat.)  A difficulty  of  deglutition.  A genus 
of  disease  in  Good’s  Nosology,  embracing  five  species, 
Dysphagia  constricta ; atonica;  globosa ; uvulosa; 
linguosa. 

DYSPHO'NIA.  (From  Svs,  bad,  and  <f>w vtj,  the 
voice.)  A difficulty  of  speaking.  Dissonant  voice. 
The  sound  of  the  voice  imperfect  or  depraved.  A ge- 
nus of  disease  in  Good’s  Nosology,  embracing  three 
species  Dysphonia  susurra'is,  puberans,  and  immo- 
dulata.  " 

DYSPHORIA.  (From  <5uj,  and  tpopeu , gesto.) 
Restlessness.  A genus  of  disease  in  Good’s  Nosology, 
it  has  two  species,  Dysphorea  simplex  and  anzietas. 

DYSPNCE'A.  (From  Svs,  difficult,  and  xveco,  to 
breathe.)  Dyspnoon.  Difficult  respiration,  without 
sense  of  stricture,  and  accompanied  with  cough 
through  the  whole  course  of  the  disease.  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  class  Neuroses,  and  order  Spastni  of 
Cullen.  He  distinguishes  eight  species. 

1.  Dyspnoea  catarrhalis,  when  with  a cough  there 
are  copious  discharges  of  viscid  mucus,  called  also 
asthma  catarrhale , pneumodes , pncumonicum , and 
pituitosum. 

2.  Dyspnoea  sicca,  when  there  is  a cough  without 
any  considerable  discharge. 

3.  Dyspnoea  agrea,  when  the  disease  is  much  in 
creased  by  slight  changes  of  the  weather 


EAR 


EAR 

4.  Dyspnoea  terrea , when  earthy  or  calculous  mat- 
ters are  spit  up. 

5.  Dyspnoea  aquosa , when  there  is  a scarcity  of 
urine  and  eedematous  feet,  without  the  other  symptoms 
of  a dropsy  in  the  chest. 

6.  Dyspnoea  pinguedinosa,  from  corpulency. 

7.  Dyspnoea  thoracic, a.,  when  parts  surrounding  the 
chest  are  injured,  or  deformed. 

8.  Dyspnoea ;]  extrinseca , from  manifest  external 
causes. 

Dy'spnoon.  See  Dyspnoea. 

DYSTHETICA.  (AvadenKa,  an  ill-conditioned 
state  of  the  body.)  The  name  of  the  fourth  order  of 
the  class  Hamatica  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Cachexies. 
Its  genera  are  Plethora  ; Heemorrhagia ; Marasmus  ; 
Struma  ; Car  emus ; Lues  ; Elephantius  ; Bucnemia  ; 
Catacausis ; Porphyra;  Exangia;  Oangrena  ; Ulcus. 

DYSTHY'MIA.  (From  Jvs,  bad,  and  dvpos,  mind.) 
Insanity. 

DYSTO'CHIA.  (From  with  difficulty,  and 
tik'Ju ),  to  ..bring  forth.)  Difficult  labour. 

DYSTtECHI'ASIS.  (From  6vs,  bad,  and  j-orxoj,  or- 
der.) An  irregular  disposition  of  the  hairs  in  the  eyelids. 

DYSU'RIA.  (From  6v$,  difficulty,  and  ovpov , urifle.) 
Siillicidium ; Ardor  urines  ; Culbicio.  A suppression 
or  difficulty  in  discharging  the  urine.  A total  suppres- 
sion is  called  ischuria  ; a partial  suppression,  dysuria : 
and  this  may  be  with  or  without  heat.  When  there 
are  frequent,  painful,  or  uneasy  urgings  to  discharge  the 
, urine,  and  it  passes  off  only  by  drops,  or  in  very  small 
quantities,  the  disease  is  called  strangury.  When  a 
sense  of  pain,  or  heat,  attends  the  discharge,  it  passes 
with  difficulty,  and  is  styled  ardor  urinse,  heat  of  the 
urine.  The  dysuria  is  acute,  or  chronic.  Dr.  Cullen 
places  this  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Epis- 
chescs , containing  six  species : 

1.  Dysuria  ardens,  with  a sense  of  heat,  without 
any  manifest  disorder  of  the  bladder. 

2.  Dysuria  spasmodica , from  spasm. 


3.  Dysuria  compressionis,  from  a compression  of 
the  neighbouring  parts. 

4.  Dysuria  phlogistica,  from  violent  inflammation. 

5.  Dysuria  calculosa , from  stone  in  the  bladder. 

6.  Dysuria  mucosa , from  an  abundant  secretion  of 
mucus. 

The  causes  which  give  rise  to  these  diseases  are,  an 
inflammation  of  the  urethra,  occasioned  either  by  ve- 
nereal sores,  or  by  the  use  of  acrid  injections,  tumour, 
ulcer  of  the  prostate  gland,  inflammation  of  the  kid- 
neys, or  bladder,  considerable  enlargements  of  the 
hannorrlioidal  veins,  a lodgment  of  indurated  faeces  in 
the  rectum,  spasm  at  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  the 
absorption  of  cantharides,  applied  externally  or  taken 
internally,  and  excess  in  drinking  either  spirituous  or 
vinous  liquors  ; but  particles  of  gravel,  sticking  at  the 
neck  of  the  bladder,  or  lodging  in  the  urethra,  and 
thereby  producing  irritation,  prove  the  most  frequent 
cause.  Gouty  matter  falling  on  the  neck  of  the  blad- 
der, will  sometimes  occasion  these  complaints. 

In  dysury,  there  is  a frequent  inclination  to  make  wa- 
ter, with  a smarting  pain,  heat,  and  difficulty  in  void- 
ing it,  together  with  a sense  of  fulness  in  the  region  of 
the  bladder.  The  symptoms  often  vary,  however,  ac- 
cording to  the  cause  which  has  given  rise  to  it.  If  it 
proceeds  from  a calculus  in  the  kidney  or  ureter,  be- 
sides the  affections  mentioned,  it  will  be  accompanied 
with  nausea,  vomiting,  and  acute  pains  in  the  loins  and 
region  of  the  ureter  and  kidney  of  the  side  affected. 
When  a stone  in  the  bladder,  or  gravel  in  the  urethra, 
is  the  cause,  an  acute  pain  will  be  felt  at  the  end  of 
the  penis,  particularly  on  voiding  the  last  drops  of 
urine,  and  the  stream  of  water  will  either  be  divided 
into  two,  or  be  discharged  in  a twisted  manner,  not 
unlike  a corkscrew.  If  a scirrlius  of  the  prostate 
gland  has  occasioned  the  suppression  or  difficulty  of 
urine,  a hard  indolent  tumour,  unattended  with  any 
acute  pain,  may  readily  be  felt  in  the  perinseum,  or  by 
introducing  the  finger  into  the  rectum. 


E 


17JAGLE  STONE.  An  argillaceous  iron  stone. 

EAR.  Auris.  The  ear  is  the  organ  of  hearing. 
It  is  situated  at  the  side  of  the  head,  and  is  divided  into 
external  and  internal  ear.  The  auricula , or  pinna , 
commonly  called  the  ear,  constitutes  the  external  part. 
It  is  of  a greater  or  less  size,  according  to  the  indi- 
vidual. Its  external  face,  which,  in  a well-formed 
ear,  is  a little  anterior,  presents  five  eminences,  the 
helix , anti-helix , tragus , anti-tragus , lobula ; and 
three  cavities,  those  of  the  helix , fossa  navicularis , 
concha. 

The  pinna  is  formed  of  a fibrous  cartilage , elastic 
and  pliant ; the  skin  which  covers  it  is  thin  and  dry ; 
adheres  to  the  fibro-cartilage  by  a cellular  tissue,  which 
is  compact,  and  contains  very  little  adipose  substance : 
the  lobule  alone  contains  it  in  considerable  quantity. 
There  are  seen  under  the  skin  a number  of  sebaceous 
follicles,  whicli  furnish  a micaceous  white  matter, 
that  produces  the  polish  and  suppleness  of  the  skin. 

There  are  also  seen,  upon  the  different  projections 
of  the  cartilaginous  ear,  certain  muscular  fibres,  to 
which  the  name  of  muscles  have  been  given,  but  which 
are  only  vestigia.  The  pinna,  receiving  many  vessels 
and  nerves,  is  very  sensible,  and  easily  becomes  red. 
It  is  fixed  to  the  head  by  the  cellular  tissue,  and  by 
muscles,  which  are  called  according  to  their  position, 
anterior,  superior,  and  posterior.  These  muscles  are 
much  developed  in  many  animals:  in  man  they  may 
be  considered  as  simple  vestiges. 

The  meatus  auditorius  extends  from  the  concha  to 
the  membrane  of  the  tympanum;  its  length,  variable 
according  to  age,  is  from  ten  to  twelve  lines  in  the 
adult;  it  is  narrower  in  the  middle  than  at  the  ends; 
it  presents  a slight  curve  above,  and  in  front.  Its  ex- 
ternal orifice  is  commonly  covered  with  hairs,  like  the 
entrance  to  the  other  cavities.  It  is  composed  of  an 
osseous  part,  of  a fibro-cartilaginous  substance,  which 
is  confounded  with  that  of  the  pinna,  of  a fibrous  part, 
which  completes  it  above.  The  skin  sinks  into  it,  be- 
coming thinner,  and  terminates  in  covering  the  exter- 


nal surface  of  the  membrane  of  the  tympanum.  Be 
low  this  skin  exist  a great  number  of  sebaceous  fol- 
licles, which  furnish  the  cerumen , a yellow,  bitter 
matter. 

The  middle  ear  comprehends  the  cavity  of  the 
tympanum,  the  little  bones  which  are  contained  in 
this  cavity,  the  mastoid  cells,  the  Eustachian  tube,  &c. 

The  tympanum  is  a cavity  which  separates  the  ex- 
ternal from  the  internal  ear.  Its  form  is  that  of  a por- 
tion of  a cylinder,  but  a little  irregular.  Its  external 
partition  presents,  on  the  upper  part,  the  fenestra  ovalis , 
which  communicates  with  the  vestibule,  and  which 
is  formed  by  a membrane  ; immediately  below,  a pro- 
jection which  is  called  promontory ; below  this  projec- 
tion, a little  groove,  which  lodges  a small  nerve ; still 
lower,  an  opening  called  the  fenestra  rotunda,  which 
corresponds  to  the  external  winding  of  the  cochlea : 
and  which  is  also  shut  by  a membrane.  The  external 
side  presents  the  membrana  tympani.  This  membrane 
is  directed  obliquely  downward  and  inward ; it  is  bent, 
very  slender  and  transparent,  covered  on  the  outside 
by  a continuation  of  the  skin,  on  the  inside  by  the 
narrow  membrane  which  covers  the  tympanum  ; it  is 
also  covered  on  this  side  by  the  nerve  called  chorda 
tympani : its  centre  serves  as  a point  of  fixation  for 
the  extremity  of  the  handle  of  the  malleus;  its  cir- 
cumference is  fixed  to  the  bony  extremity  of  the  mea- 
tus auditorius:  it  adheres  equally  in  every  point,  and 
presents  no  opening  that  might  admit  a communica- 
tion between  the  external  and  middle  ear.  Its  tissue 
is  dry,  brittle,  and  has  nothing  analogous  In  the  animal 
economy ; there  are  neither  fibres,  vessels,  nor  nerves, 
found  in  it.  The  circumference  of  the  tympanum  pre- 
sents, in  the  forepart,  1st,  The  opening  of  the  Eusta- 
chian tube,  by  which  the  cavity  communicates  with 
the  superior  part  of  the  pharynx ; 2dly,  The  opening 
by  which  the  tendon  of  the  internal  muscle  of  the 
malleus  enters.  Behind  are  seen,  1st,  The  openingof 
the  mastoid  cells, — irregular  winding  cavities,  which 
are  formed  in  the  mastoid  process,  and  which  are  al- 


EAR 


EAU 


ways  filled  with  air;  2dly,The  pyramid,  a little  hollow 
projection,  which  lodges  the  muscle  of  the  stapes; 
3dly,  The  opening  by  which  the  chorda  tympani  enters 
into  the  hollow  of  the  tympanum.  Below,  the  tympa- 
num presents  a slit,  called  glenoid , by  which  the  ten- 
don of  the  anterior  muscle  of  the  malleus  enters,  and 
the  chorda  tympani  passes  out,  and  goes  to  unite  itself 
with  the  lingual  nerve  of  the  fifth  pair. 

Above,  the  circumference  presents  only  a few  small 
openings,  by  Which  blood-vessels  pass.  The  cavity  of 
the  tympanum,  and  all  the  canals  which  end  there,  are 
covered  with  a very  slender  mucous  membrane this 
cavity,  which  is  always  full  of  air,  contains  besides 
four  small  bones,  (the  malleus , incus , os  orbiculare , 
and  stapes,)  which  form  a chain  from  the  membrana 
tympani  to  the  fenestra  ovalis,  where  the  base  of  the 
stapes  is  fixed.  There  are  some  little  muscles  for  the 
purpose  of  moving  this  osseous  chain,  of  stretching 
and  slackening  the  membranes  to  which  they  are  at- 
tached : thus,  the  internal  muscle  of  the  malleus  draws 
it  forward,  bends  the  chain  in  this  direction,  and 
stretches  the  membranes;  the  anterior  muscle  pro- 
duces the  contrary  effect : it  is  also  supposed  that  the 
small  muscle  which  is  placed  in  the  pyramid,  and 
which  is  attached  to  the  neck  of  the  stapes,  may  give 
a slight  tension  to  the  chain,  in  drawing  it  towards 
itself. 

The  internal  ear , or  labyrinth , is  composed  of  the 
cochlea,  of  the  semicircular  canals,  and  of  the  ves- 
tibule. • 

The  cochlea  is  a bony  cavity,  in  form  of  a spiral, 
from  which  it  has  taken  its  name.  This  cavity  is  di- 
vided into  two  others,  called  the  gyri  of  the  cochlea, 
and  which  are  distinguished  into  external  and  internal. 
The  partition  which  separates  them  is  a plate  set  edge- 
ways, and  which  in  its  whole  length  is  partly  bony, 
and  partly  membranous.  The  external  gyration  comr 
municates  by  the  fenestra  rotunda  with  the  cavity  of 
the  tympanum ; the  internal  gyration  ends  in  the  ves- 
tibule. 

The  semicircular  canals  are,  three  cylindrical  cavi- 
ties, bent  in  a semicircular  form,  two  of  which  are 
disposed  horizontally,  and  the  others  vertically.  These 
canals  terminate  by  their  extremities  in  the  vestibule. 
They  contain  bodies  of  a gray  colour,  the  extremities 
of  which  are  terminated  by  swellings. 

The  vestibule  is  the  central  cavity,  the  point  of  union 
of  all  the  others.  It  communicates  with  the  tympa- 
num by  the  fenestra  ovalis,  with  the  internal  gyration 
of  the  cochlea,  with  the  semicircular  canals,  and  with 
the  internal  meatus  auditorius,  by  a great  number  of 
little  openings. 

The  whole  of  the  cavities  of -the  internal  ear  are 
hollowed  out  of  the  hardest  part  of  the  petrous  portion 
of  the  temporal  bone : they  are  covered  with  an  ex- 
tremely thin  membrane,  and  are  full  of  ai  very  thin  and 
limpid  fluid,  called  Liquor  of  Cotunnius,  which  can 
flow  out  by  two  narrow  apertures,  known  by  the  name 
of  the  aquaducts  of  the  cochlea,  and  of  the  vestibule: 
they  contain,  besides,  the  acoustic  nerve. 

The  acoustic  nerve  proceeds  from  the  fourth  ventri- 
cle ; it  enters  into  the  labyrinth  by  the  holes  that  the 
internal  auditory  meatus  presents  in  its  bottom.  Hav- 
ing entered  into  the  vestibule,  it  separates  itself  into  a 
number  of  branches,  one  of  which  remains  in  the  ves- 
tibule, another  enters  into  the  cochlea,  and  two  go  to 
tne  semicircular  canals.  Scarpa  has  very  minutely 
described  the  distribution  of  these  different  branches 
in  the  cavities  of  the  internal  ear. 

In  terminating  this  short  description,  we  remark 
that  the  internal  and  middle  ear  are  traversed  by 
several  nervous  threads,  the  presence  of  which  is,  per- 
haps, aseful  to  hearing.  It  is  known  that  the  facial 
nerve  proceeds  a considerable  space  in  a canal  of  the 
petrous  portion.  In  this  canal  it  receives  a small 
thread  of  the  vidian  nerve ; it  furnishes  the  chorda 
tympani,  which  attaches  itself  to  this  membrane. 
There  are  two  other  nervous  inosculations  in  the  ear ; 
to  one  of  which  Ribes  called  the  attention  of  anato- 
mists not  long  since ; the  other  was  recently  discovered 
by  Jacobson. 

Ear-wax.  See  Cerumen  aurium. 

Eari'tes.  Hrematites,  or  blood-stone. 

EARTH.  Terra.  Although  there  seems  to  be  an 
almost  infinite  variety  of  earthy  substances  scattered 
on  the  surface  of  this  globe,  yet  when  we  examine 
them  with  a chemical  eye,  we  find,  not  without  sur- 
316 


prise,  that  all  the  earth  and  stones  which  we  tread  un- 
der our  feet,  and  which  compose  the  largest  rocks,  aa 
well  as  the  numerous  different  specimens  which  adorn 
the  cabinets  of  the  curious,  are  composed  of  a very 
few  simple  or  elementary  earths.  “Analysis  has 
shown,  that  the  various  stony  or  pulverulent  masses, 
which  form  our  mountains,  valleys,  and  plains,  might 
be  considered  as  resulting  from  the  combination  or  in- 
termixture, in  various  numbers  and  proportions,  of 
nine  primitive  earths,  to  which  the  following  names 
were  given : 

X.  Barytes.  2.  Strontites.  3.  Lime.  4.  Magnesia. 
5.  Alumina,  or  clay.  6.  Silica.  7.  Glucina.  8.  Zir- 
conia.  9.  Yttria. 

Alkalies,  acids,  metallic  ores,  and  native  metals, 
were  supposed  to  be  of  an  entirely  dissimilar  consti- 
tution. 

The  brilliant  discovery  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  in  1808,  of 
the  metallic  bases  of  potassa,  soda,  barytes,  strontites, 
and  lime,  subverted  the  ancient  ideas  regarding  the 
earths,  and  taught  us  to  regard  them  as  all  belonging, 
by  most  probable  analogies,  to  the  metallic  class. 

To  the  above  nine  earthy  substances,  Berzelius  has 
lately  added  a tenth,  which  he  calls  thorina.  What- 
ever may  be  the  revolutions  of  chemical  nomenclature, 
mankind  will  never  cease  to  consider  as  earths,  those 
solid  bodies  composing  the  mineral  strata,  which  are 
incombustible,  colourless,  not  convertible  into  metals 
by  all  the  ordinary  methods  of  reduction,  or  when  re- 
duced by  scientific  refinements,  possessing  but  an 
evanescent  metallic  existence,  and  which  either  alone, 
or  at  least  when  combined  with  carbonic  acid,  are  in- 
sipid and  insoluble  in  water. 

Earth,  absorbent.  See  Absorbent. 

Earth,  aluminous.  See  Alumina. 

Earth,  animal  calcareous.  This  term  is  applied  to 
crab’s-claws,  &c.  which  contain  calcareous  earth,  and 
are  obtained  from  the  animal  kingdom. 

Earth,  argillaceous.  See  Alumina. 

Earth-bath.  A remedy  recommended  by  some 
writers  on  the  continent,  as  a specific  in  consumption. 

Earth , bolar.  See  Bole. 

Earth,  fullers'.  Cimoliapurpurescens.  A compact 
bolar  earth,  commonly  of  a grayish  colour.  It  is  some- 
times applied  by  the  common  people  to  inflamed 
breasts,  legs,  &x.  with  a view  of  cooling  them. 

Earth,  heavy.  See  Barytes. 

Earth,  Japan.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

Earth,  mineral  calcareous.  Those  calcareous  earths 
which  are  obtained  from  the  mineral  kingdom.  The 
term  is  applied  in  opposition  to  those  obtained  from 
animals. 

Earth-nut.  See  Bunium  bulbocastanum. 

Earth , scaled.  Terra  sigillata.  Little  cakes  of 
earths,  which  are  stamped  with  impressions.  They 
were  formerly  in  high  estimation  as  absorbents,  but 
now  fallen  into  disuse. 

Earth-worm.  See  Lumbricus  terrestris. 

Eaton's  styptic.  French  brandy  highly  impreg- 
nated with  calcined  green  vitriol.  A remedy  for 
checking  htemorrliages. 

[EATON,  Amos,  professor  in  the  Rensselaer  school, 
at  Troy,  in  the  state  of  New-York.  Although  Pro- 
fessor Eaton  is  still  living,  we  deem  it  but  justice  to 
say,  that  he  is  one  of  the  most  industrious  and  inde- 
fatigable votaries  of  natural  science  in  the  state.  He 
has  lectured  a number  of  years  at  Albany  and  Troy, 
on  botany,  mineralogy,  and  geology.  He  has  publish- 
ed a valuable  Manual  of  Botany  for  the  Northern 
States,  a Geological  Section  of  the  Country  from  Bos- 
ton to  Lake  Erie,  and  a pamphlet,  containing  a “ Ge- 
ological Nomenclature  for  North  America.”  He  has 
been  employed  for  seven  years  past,  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  Hon.  Stephen  Van  Rensselaer,  in  travelling 
over  different  parts  of  the  state  of  New-York,  and 
those  adjoining,  and  in  making  geological  surveys  and 
examinations  of  strata.  He  has  probably  done  more 
in  this  way  than  any  geologist  in  the  country.  He 
promises  to  publish  a System  of  American  Geology,  in 
which  will  be  displayed  some  peculiarities  of  the  for- 
mations in  this  country,  and  show  how  they  differ 
from  those  of  the  Eastern  continent.  A.] 

Eau-de-luce.  See  Spiritus  ammonite  succinatus. 

Eau-de-rabel.  This  is  composed  of  one  part  of 
sulphurous  acid  to  three  of  rectified  spirit  of  wine.  It 
s much  used  in  France,  when  diluted,  in  the  cure  of 
[ igonorrheeas,  leucorrhaea,  &c. 


ECH 


ECP 


Ebi'scus.  See  Hibiscus  abelmoschus. 

EBULLITION.  ( Ebullitio . From  ebullio,  to 

bubble  up.)  Boiling.  This  consists  in  the  change 
which  a fluid  undergoes  from  a state  of  liquidity  to 
that  of  an  elastic  fluid,  iu  consequence  of  the  ap- 
plication of  heat,  which  dilates  and  converts  it  into 
vapour. 

E'BULUS.  (From  ebullio , to  make  boil : so  called 
because  of  its  supposed  use  in  purifying  the  humours 
oLthe  body.)  See  Sambucus  ebulus. 

Ecbo'uca.  (From  ek&zXXw,  to  cast  out.)  Medi- 
cines which  cause  abortion. 

Ecbo'lios.  (From  ek&xXX w,  to  cast  out.)  Miscar- 
riage. 

Ecbra'smata.  (From  E/cSpagw,  to  be  very  hot.) 
Ecchymata.  Painful  fiery  pimples  in  the  face,  or  sur- 
face of  the  body. 

Ecbra'smus.  (From  £K6pa$w,  to  become  hot.)  Fer- 
mentation. 

Ecbyrso'mata.  (Prom  ex,  and  /3vp?a,  the  skin.) 
Protuberances  of  the  bones  at  the  joints,  which  appear 
through  the  skin. 

Ecchylo'ma.  (From  ex,  and  %tjXoj,  juice.)  An 
extract. 

Ecchy'mata.  (From  ek%d w,  to  pour  out.)  See 
Ecbrasmata. 

ECCHYMO'MA.  (Exxvpto/m ; from  £x%uto,  to 
ponr  out/)  Ecchymosis;  Crustula;  Sugillatio.  Ex- 
travasation. A black  and  blue  swelling,  either  from  a 
bruise  or  spontaneous  extravasation  of  blood.  A ge- 
nus of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Tumor es 
of  Cullen. 

Ecchymoma  arteriosum.  The  false  aneurism. 

ECCHYMO'SIS.  See  Ecchymoma. 

E'CCLISIS.  (From  ExxXtvw , to  turn  aside.)  A 
luxation  or  dislocation. 

E'CCOPE.  (From  tKKOic']w1  to  cut  off.)  The  cut- 
ting off  any  part. 

Ecco'peus.  (From  ckkou'Jo),  to  cut  off.)  An  an- 
cient instrument,  the  raspatory,  used  in  trepanning. 

ECCOPRO'TIC.  (Eccoproticus ; from  ex,  and  xo- 
irpos,  dung.)  An  opening  medicine,  the  operation  of 
which  is  very  gentle  ; such  as  manna,  senna,  &c. 

ECCRIN  OCRI'  TIC  A.  (From  Exxptvw,  to  secrete, 
and  Kpivaj,  to  judge.)  Judgments  formed  from  the  se- 
cretions. 

ECCRINOLO'GIA.  (From  Exxpivw,  to  secrete,  and 
Xoyof,  a discourse.)  Eccrinologica.  The  doctrine  of 
secretions. 

E'CCRISIS.  (From  Exxptvw,  to  secrete.)  A secre- 
tion of  any  kind. 

ECCRITICA.  (From  Exxptvw,  to  secern,  or  strain 
off.)  Dr.  Good  applies  this  name  to  a class  of  diseases 
of  the  excernent  system.  It  has  three  orders,  viz.  Me- 
sotica , Catotica r -dcrotica. 

ECCYESIS.  (From  e«,  and  Hvr/eis,  gravidity.) 
Extra-uterine  fetation.  The  name  of  a genus  of  dis- 
eases in  Good’s  Nosology.  It  has  three  species:  Ec- 
cyesis  ovaries,  tubalis,  abdominalis. 

ECCYMO'SIS.  See  Ecchymoma. 

E'CDORA.  (From  Exfcpw,  to  excoriate.)  An  exco- 
riation : and  particularly  used  for  an  excoriation  of 
the  urethra. 

Ecdo'ria.  (From  £K<5spw,  to  excoriate.)  Medicines 
which  excoriate  and  burn  through  the  skin. 

Echeco'llon.  (From  e%w,  to  have,  and  xoXXa, 
glue.)  Echecollum.  Any  topical  glutinous  remedy. 

Echetro'sis.  So  Hippocrates  calls  the  white 
briony. 

ECHINATUS.  Bristly.  Applied  in  botany  to  any 
thing  beset  with  bristles,  as  the  pod  of  Glycyrrhiza 
echinata,  and  to  the  gourd  seed-vessel,  or  pepo. 

Echini'des.  In  Hippocrates  it  is  mentioned  as  what 
he  used  for  purging  the  womb  with. 

ECHINOPHTHA'LMIA.  (From  evivos,  a hedge- 
hog, and  o<pda\/ua,  an  inflammation  of  the  eye.)  An 
inflammation  of  that  part  of  the  eyelids,  where  the 
hairs  bristle  out  like  the  quills  of  an  echinus,  or  hedge- 
hog. 

ECHINOPO'DIUM.  (From  £%iros,  a hedge-hog, 
and  irovs,  a foot ; so  named  because  its  flowers  resem- 
ble the  foot  of  an  urchin.)  A species  of  broom  or 
genista. 

ECHI'NOPS.  (From  eyivoj,  as  beset  with  prickles.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Syngenesia; 
Order,  Polygamia  segregata. 

Euhinops  sphjkrocefhalus.  The  systematic  name 


of  the  globe-thistle.  Orocodilion ; Acanthairuca  ; 
Scabiosa  carduifolia  ; Splicer ocephala  elatis  ; Echino- 
pus.  It  is  raised  in  our  gardens.  The  root  and  seeds 
are  moderately  diuretic,  but  not  used. 

Echi'nopus.  See  Eckinops. 

ECHINUS.  1.  The  hedge-hog,  or  Erinaceus  Eu- 
ropceus  of  Linnaeus. 

2.  A genus  in  the  Linncean  system,  included  in  the 
molusca  order  of  vermes. 

3.  The  calcareous  petrifaction  of  the  sea  hedge-hog. 

4.  The  prominent  points  on  the  surface  of  the  pilcus , 
or  upper  part  of  the  mushroom  tribe,  are  called  echini. 
See  Fungus. 

ECHIOIDES.  (From  e%j?,  a viper,  and  aSos,  re 
semblance.)  The  trivial  name  of  some  plants,  from 
their  supposed  resemblance  to  the  Echium. 

E'CHIUM.  (From  £%{?,  a viper  ; so  called  because 
it  was  said  to  heal  the  stings  of  vipers.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pen- 
tandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  Viper’s  bugloss. 

Echium  jegyptiacum.  Wall  bugloss.  The  Aspe- 
rugo  cegyptiaca,  the  root  of  which  is  sudorific,  and  is 
used  with  oil  as  a dressing  for  wounds. 

E'CIIOS.  H Sound.  In  Hippocrates,  it  signi- 
fies the  same  as  the  tinnitus  auriurn,  or  noise  in  the 
ears. 

E'CHYSIS.  (From  e%v(o,  to  pour  out.)  A fainting 
or  swooning. 

ECLA  MPSIA.  (From  ExXap7ra>,  to  shine.  See 

Eclampsis. 

ECLA'MPSIS.  (From  ExXajumi),  to  shine.  Eclamp 
sia..  It  signifies  a splendour,  brightness,  effulgence, 
flashing  of  light,  scintillation.  It  is  a flashing  light,  or 
those  sparklings  which  strike  the  eyes  of  epileptic  pa- 
tients. Ccelius  Aurelianus  calls  them  circuit  ignei , 
scintillations,  or  fiery  circles.  Though  only  a symp- 
tom of  the  epilepsy,  Hippocrates  puts  it  for  epilepsy 
itself. 

ECLE'CTIC.  (Eclecticus  ; from  e/cXe/w,  to  select.) 
Archigenes  and  some  others  selected  from  all  other 
sects  what  appeared  to  them  to  be  the  best  and  most 
rational ; hence  they  were  called  Eclectics , and  their 
medicine  Eclectic  medicine. 

ECLE'CTOS.  (From  exXeixw,  to  lick  up.  A linc- 
tus,  or  soft  medicine,  like  an  electuary,  to  be  licked  up. 

ECLE'GMA.  (From  ExX£i%w,  to  lick.)  A linctus, 
or  form  of  medicine  made  by  the  incorporation  of  oils 
with  syrups,  and  which  is  to  be  taken  upon  a liquor- 
ice stick. 

E'CLYSIS.  (From  exXvw,  to  dissolve.)  A uni- 
versal faintness. 

ECMA'GMA.  (From  tK/xaac ro>,  to  form  together.) 
A mass  of  substances  kneaded  together. 

ECPEPIE'MENOS.  (From  eKTriegco,  to  press  out.) 
An  ulcer  with  protuberating  lips. 

ECPHLYSIS.  (E/apXvois;  from  ex</>Xi>£co,  to  boil,  or 
bubble  up,  or  over.)  A blain,  or  vesicular  eruption. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  disease  in  Good’s  Nosology. 
It  has  four  species,  viz.  Ecphlysis  pompholex , herpes , 
rhypia , and  eczema. 

ECPHRA'CTIC.  (From  eiccppacou),  to  remove  ob- 
structions. That  which  attenuates  tough  humours,  so 
as  to  promote  their  discharge. 

ECPHRA'XIS.  (From  tKtppaoc ro>,  to  remove  ob 
struction.)  A perspiration,  an  opening  of  obstructed 
pores. 

ECPHRONIA.  (Ex^pwvE,  or  cKcbpotrvvrj,  from  uc- 
(ppwv,  extra  mentem,  out  of  one’s  mind.)  The  name 
of  a genus  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Insanity  and  crazi- 
ness. It  has  two  species:  Ecphronia  melancholiay 
and  Ecphronia  mania. 

E'CPHYAS.  (From  ex,  and  <pvo,  to  produce.)  1. 
An  appendix,  or  excrescence. 

2.  The  appendicula  casci  vermiformis. 

ECPHYMA.  (From  eiccpvo),  educo,  egero.)  A cu 
taneous  excrescence.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases 
in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Eccritica;  Order,  Aero- 
tia.  It  has  four  species,  viz.  Ecphyma  caruncula,  ver 
ruca , clavus , and  callus. 

E'cphyse.  (From  eiccpvoae),  to  blow  out.)  Flatus 
from  the  bladder  through  the  urethra,  and  from  the 
wound  through  the  vagina. 

Ecphyse'sis.  (From  eK^vaaa),  to  breathe  through.) 
A quick  expulsion  of  the  air  from  the  lungs. 

E'CPHYSIS.  (From  ex^uw,  to  produce.) 

1.  An  apophysis,  or  appendix. 

2.  A process. 


317 


ECT 


Ecpie'sma.  (From  ekitie^u),  to  press  out.)  A frac- 
ture of  the  skull,  in  which  the  bones  press  inwardly. 

EcriE'sMos.  (From  ekitie^o),  to  press  out.)  A dis- 
order of  the  eye,  in  which  the  globe  is  almost  pressed 
out  of  the  socket  by  an  afflux' of  humours. 

Ecplero'ma.  (From  EKiiXypoio,  to  fill.)  In  Hippo- 
crates they  are  hard  balls  of  leather,  or  other  sub- 
stances, adapted  to  fill  the  arm-pits,  while  by  the  help 
of  the  heels,  placed  against  the  balls,  and  repressing 
the  same,  the  luxated  os  humeri  is  reduced  into  its 
place. 

ECPLE'XIS.  (From  ek-'Xtjoo),  to  terrify  or  astonish.) 
A stupor,  or  astonishment,  from  sudden  external  acci- 
dents. 

E'cpnoe.  (From  ckttveo),  to  breathe.)  Expiration ; 
that  part  of  respiration  in  which  the  air  is  expelled  from 
the  lungs. 

ECPTO'MA.  (From  ektcl-k'Jo),  to  fall  out.)  1.  A 
luxation  of  a bone. 

2.  The  expulsion  of  the  secundines. 

3.  The  falling  oft’  of  gangrenous  parts. 

4.  A hernia  in  the  scrotum. 

5.  A falling  down  of  the  womb. 

Ecpy'ctica.  (From  ek-kvkciIu),  to  condense.)  Medi- 
cines that  render  the  fluids  more  solid. 

ECPYE'MA.  (From  ek , and  -n vov,  pus.)  A collec- 
tion of  pus,  from  the  suppuration  of  a tumour. 

ECPYESIS.  (From  ekitvu),  to  suppurate.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Class,  Eccritica ; Order,  Acrotica.  Humid  scalp.  It 
has  four  species,  Ecpyesis  impetigo , porrigo , ecthyma , 
scabies. 

Ecre'gma.  (From  EKptjyvvpi,  to  break.)  A rup- 
ture. 

Ecre'xis.  (From  EKpiryvvpi , to  break.)  A rupture. 
Hippocrates  expresses  by  it  a rupture  or  laceration 
of  the  womb. 

Echry'th.mos.  (From  ek,  and  pvdpo j-,  harmony.) 
A term  applied  to  the  pulse,  and  signifies  that  it  is  irre- 
gular. 

E'croe.  (From  EKpe o>,  to  flow  out.)  An  efflux,  or 
the  course  by  which  any  humour  which  requires 
purging  is  evacuated. 

Ecrueles.  The  French  for  scrofula. 

E'crysis.  (From  EKpeu,  to  flow  out.)  In  Hippo- 
crates it  is  an  efflux  of  the  semen  before  it  receives  the 
conformation  of  a foetus,  and  therefore  is  called  an 
efflux,  to  distinguish  it  from  abortion. 

ECSARCO'MA.  (From  ek,  and  aap\,  flesh.)  A 
fleshy  excrescence. 

E'CSTASIS.  ( Ecstasis , eos.  f.  Ex-nfft? ; from  e\i^a- 
uai , to  be  out  of  one’s  senses.)  An  ecstasy,  or  trance. 
In  Hippocrates  it  signifies  a delirium. 

Ecstro'phius.  (From  EK^pctpu),  to  invert.)  An 
epithet  for  any  medicine,  that  makes  the  blind  piles 
appear  outwardly. 

Ecthely'nsis.  (From  ekOe\vvo),  to  re  nder  effemi- 
nate.) Softness.  It  is  applied  to  the  skin  and  flesh, 
when  lax  and  soft,  and  to  bandages,  when  not  suffi- 
ciently tight. 

Ecthli'mma.  (From  ek9\l6o),  to  press  out  against.) 
An  ulceration  caused  by  pressure  of  the  skin. 

Ecthli'psis.  (From  £Kdyi6u>,  to  press  out  against.) 
Elision,  or  expression.  It  is  spoken  of  swelled  eyes, 
when  they  dart  forth  sparks  of  light. 

E'CTHYMA.  ( Ecthyma , at  is.  n.  ekOveiv,  to  rage,  or 
break  forth  with  fury.)  A pustule  or  cutaneous  erup- 
tion. 

Ectillo'tica.  (From  ek'JiWw,  to  pull  out.)  Medi- 
cines which  eradicate  tubercles  or  corns,  or  destroy 
superfluous  hail-. 

ECTO'PIA.  (From  ekJottos,  out  of  place.)  Dis- 
placed. 

Ectopi.e.  (The  plural  of  ectopia.)  Parts  dis- 
placed. An  order  in  the  class  locales  of  Cullen's  No- 
sology. See  Nosology. 

Ectrapeloga'stros.  (From  EKjpEiropai,  to  degene- 
rate, and  yasvPt  a belly.)  One  who  has  a monstrous 
belly,  or  whose  appetite  is  voraciously  large. 

Ectri'mma.  (From  ck]pi6u >,  to  rub  off.)  An  exco- 
riation. In  Hippocrates  it  is  an  exulceration  of  the 
skin  about  the  os  sacrum. 

E'ctrope.  (From  ekJpetio,  to  divert,  pervert,  or  in- 
vert.) It  is  any  duct  by  which  the  humours  are  diverted 
and  drawn  off.  In  P.  iEgiueta  it  is  the  same  as  Ectro- 
pium. 

ECTRO'PIUM.  (From  ekjpeirv,  to  evert.)  An 


ECT 

eversion  of  the  eyelids,  so  that  their  internal  surface 

is  outermost. 

There  are  two  species  of  this  disease : one  produced 
by  an  unnatural  swelling  of  the  lining  of  the  eyelids, 
which  not  only  pushes  their  edges  from  the  eyeball,  but 
also  presses  them  so  forcibly,  that  they  become  everted ; 
the  other  arising  from  a contraction  of  the  skin  cover- 
ing the  eyelid,  or  of  that  in  the  vicinity,  by  which 
means  the  edge  of  the  eyelid  is  first  removed  for  some 
distance  from  the  eye,  and  afterward  turned  com- 
pletely outward,  together  with  the  whole  of  the  affect 
ed  eyelid. 

The  morbid  swelling  of  the  lining  of  the  eyelids, 
which  causes  the  first  species  of  ectropium,  arises 
mostly  from  a congenital  laxity  of  this  membrane, 
afterward  increased  by  chronic  ophthalmies,  particu- 
larly of  a scrofulous  nature,  in  relaxed,  unhealthy 
subjects ; or  else  the  disease  originates  from  the  small- 
pox affecting  the  eyes. 

While  the  disease  is  confined  to  the  lower  eyelid,  as 
it  most  commonly  is,  the  lining  of  this  part  may  be  ob- 
served rising  in  the  form  of  a semilunar  fold,  of  a pale 
red  colour  like  the  fungous  granulations  of  wounds, 
and  intervening  between  the  eye  and  eyelid,  which  lat- 
ter it  in  some  measure  everts.  When  the  swelling  is 
afterward  occasioned  by  the  lining  of  both  the  eye- 
lids, the  disease  assumes  an  annular  shape,  in  the  cen- 
tre of  which  the  eyeball  seems  sunk,  while  the  circum- 
ference of  the  ring  presses  and  everts  the  edges  of  the 
two  eyelids,  so  as  to  cause  both  great  uneasiness  and 
deformity.  In  each  of  the  above  cases,  on  pressing  the 
skin  of  the  eyelids  with  the  point  of  the  finger,  it  be- 
comes manifest  that  they  are  very  capable  of  being 
elongated,  and  would  readily  yield,  so  as  entirely  to 
cover  the  eyeball,  were  they  not  prevented  by  the  in- 
tervening swelling  of  their  membranous  lining. 

Besides  the  very  considerable  deformity  which  the 
disease  produces,  it  occasions  a continual  discharge  of 
tears  over  the  cheek,  and,  what  is  worse,  a dryness  of 
the  eyeball,  frequent  exasperated  attacks  of  chronic 
ophthalmy,  incapacity  to  bear  the  light,  and,  lastly 
opacity  and  ulceration  of  the  cornea. 

The  second  species  of  ectropium,  or  that  arising 
from  a contraction  of  the  integuments  of  the  eyelids, 
or  neighbouring  parts,  is  not  unfrequently  a conse- 
quence of  puckered  scars,  produced  by  a confluent 
small-pox,  deep  burns,  or  the  excision  of  cancerous  or 
encysted  tumours,  without  saving  a sufficient  quantity 
of  skin ; or,  lastly,  the  disorder  fs  the  effect  of  malig- 
nant carbuncles,  or  any  kind  of  wound  attended  with 
much  loss  of  substance.  Each  of  these  causes  is  quite 
enough  to  bring  on  such  a contraction  of  the  skin  of 
the  eyelids  as  to  draw  the  parts  towards  the  arches  of 
the  orbits,  so  as  to  remove  them  from  the  eyeball,  and 
turn  their  edges  outward.  No  sooner  has  this  circum- 
stance happened,  than  it  is  often  followed  by  another 
one  equally  unpleasant,  namely,  a swelling  of  the  in- 
ternal membrane  of  the  affected  eyelids,  which  after- 
ward has  a great  share  in  completing  the  eversion. 
The  lining  of  the  eyelids,  though  trivially  everted, 
being  continually  exposed  to  the  air,  and  irritation  of 
extraneous  substances,  soon  swells,  and  rises  up  like 
fungus.  One  side  of  this  fungous-like  tumour  covers  a 
part  of  the  eyeball ; the  other  pushes  the  eyelid  so  con- 
siderably outwards,  that  its  edge  is  not  unfrequently  in 
contact  with  the  margin  of  the  orbit.  The  complaints 
induced  by  this  second  species  of  ectropium  are  the 
same  as  those  brought  on  by  the  first ; it  being  noticed, 
however,  that  in  both  cases,  whenever  the  disease  is 
very  inveterate,  the  fungous  swelling  of  the  inside  of 
the  eyelids  becomes  hard,  and  as  it  were  callous. 

Although,  in  both  species  of  ectropium,  the  lining  of 
the  eyelids  seems  equally  swollen,  yet  the  surgeon  can 
easily  distinguish  to  which  of  the  two  species  the  dis- 
ease belongsT  For,  in  the  first,  the  skin  of  the  eyelids, 
and  adjoining  parts,  is  not  deformed  with  scars;  and 
by  pressing  the  everted  eyelid  with  the  point  of  the 
finger,  the  part  would  with  ease  cover  the  eye,  were  it 
not  for  the  intervening  fungous  swelling.  But  in  the 
second  species  of  ectropium,  besides  the  obvious  cica- 
trix and  contraction  of  the  skin  of  the  eyelids,  or  adja- 
cent parts,  when  an  effort  is  made  to  cover  the  eye 
with  the  everted  eyelid,  by  pressing  upon  the  latter  part 
with  the  point  of  the  finger,  it  does  not  give  way  so  as 
completely  to  cover  the  globe,  as  it  ought  to  do,  only 
yielding  for  a certain  extent : or  it  does  not  move  in  the 
least  from  its  unnnatural  position,  by  reason  of  the 


EIS 


ELA 


Integuments  of  the  eyelids  having  been  so  extensively 
destroyed,  that  their  margin  has  become  adherent  t® 
the  arch  of  the  orbit. 

ECTRO'SIS.  (E Krpwcris ; from  eK'Jt'JpivcKW,  to  mis- 
carry.) A miscarriage. 

Ectro'tica.  (From  ekJiJpuxtku),  to  miscarry.)  Ec- 
tyrotica;  Ectylotica.  Medicines  which  cause  abor- 
tion. 

Ectylo'tica.  See  Ectillotica. 

Ectyro'tica.  See  EctrOtica. 

ECZE'MA.  (From  sicgeu),  to  boil  out.)  Eczesma.  A 
hot,  painful  eruption,  or  pustule. 

Ede'lphus.  The  prognosis  of  a disease  from  the 
nature  of  elements. 

EDULCORA'NTIA.  (From  edulco , to  make  sweet.) 
Edulcorants.  Medicines  which  purify  the  fluids,  by 
depriving  them  of  their  acrimony. 

EFFERVESCENCE.  (Effervescentia ; from  effer- 
vesco,  to  grow  hot.)  1.  That  agitation  which  is  pro- 
duced by  mixing  substances  together,  which  cause  the 
evolution  of  a gas. 

2.  A small  degree  of  ebullition. 

E'ffila.  Freckles. 

EFFLORESCENCE.  (Efflorescentia ; from  effio- 
resco,  to  blow  as  a flower.)  1.  In  pathology , it  is  used 
to  express  a morbid  redness  of  the  skin,  and  is  gene- 
rally synonymous  with  exanthema. 

2.  In  chemistry , it  means  that  effect  which  takes 
place  when  bodies  spontaneously  become  converted 
into  a dry  powder.  It  is  almost  always  occasioned 
by  the  loss  of  the  water  of  crystallization  in  saline 
bodies. 

3.  In  botany , it  is  applied  to  express  the  blooming  of 
flowers,  and  the  time  of  flowering. 

EFFLU'VIUM.  (From  effluo , to  spread  abroad.) 
See  Contagion. 

Effractu'ra.  (From  effringa, to  break  down.;  A 
fracture,  in  which  the  bone  is  much  depressed  by  the 
blow. 

EFFUSION.  ( Effusio ; from  effundo,  to  pour  out.) 
In  pathology  it  means  the  escape  of  any  fluid  out  of 
the  vessel,  or  viscus,  naturally  containing  it,  and  its 
lodgment  in  another  cavity,  in  the  cellular  substance, 
or  in  the  substance  of  parts.  Effusion  also  sometimes 
signifies  the  morbid  secretion  of  fluids  from  the  ves- 
sels ; thus  physicians  frequently  speak  of  coagulable 
lymph  being  effused  on  different  surfaces. 

EGERAN.  A sub-species  of  pyramidal  garnet  of  a 
reddish-brown  colour. 

Ege'ries.  (From  egero,  to  carry  out.)  Egestio. 
An  excretion,  or  evacuation. 

EGG.  Ovum.  The  eggs  of  hens,  and  of  birds  in 
general,  are  composed  of  several  distinct  substances. 
1.  The  shell  or  external  coating,  which  is  composed  of 
carbonate  of  lime  .72,  phosphate  of  lime  .2,.  gelatine 
.3.  The  remaining  .23  are  perhaps  water.  2.  A thin 
white  and  strong  membrane,  possessing  the  usual  cha- 
racters of  animal  substances.  3.  The  white  of  the 
egg,  for  which,  see  Albumen.  4.  The  yelk,  which  ap- 
pears to  consist  of  an  oil  of  the  nature  of  fat  oils, 
united  with  a portion  of  serous  matter,  sufficient  to 
render  it  diffusible  in  cold  water,  in  the  form  of  an 
emulsion,  and  concrecible  by  heat.  Yelk  of  egg  is 
used  as  the  medium  for  rendering  resins  and  oils  diffu- 
sible in  water.  The  eggs  of  poultry  are  chiefly  used  as 
food,  the  different  parts  are  likewise  employed  in  phar- 
macy and  in  medicine.  The  calcined  shell  is  esteemed 
as  an  absorbent.  The  oil  is  softening,  and  is  used  ex- 
ternally to  burns  and  chaps.  The  yelk  renders  oil  mis- 
cible with  water,  and  is  triturated  with  the  same  view 
with  resinous  and  other  substances.  Raw  eggs  have 
been  much  recommended  as  a popular  remedy  for 
jaundice. 

Egrego'rsis.  (From  eypyyopsoj,  to  watch.)  A 
watchfulness,  or  want  of  sleep. 

Ei'lamis.  (From  aXeco,  to  involve.)  A membrane 
involving  the  brain. 

Eile'ma.  (From  aXeto,  to  form  convolutions.)  In 
Hippocrates,  it  signifies  painful  convolutions  of  the  in- 
testines from  flatulence.  Sometimes  it  signifies  a co- 
vering. Vogel  says,  it  is  a fixed  pain  in  the  bowels,  as 
if  a nail  was  driven  in. 

Ei'leon.  (From  ecXeco,  to  wind.)  Gorrteus  says  it 
is  a name  of  the  intestinum  ileum. 

Ei'leos.  (From  aXsto,  to  form  convolutions.)  The 
iliac  passion. 

Ei'sbole.  (From  as,  into,  and  /3aXX w,  to  cast.)  It  I 


signifies  strictly  an  injection,  but  is  used  to  express  the 
access  of  a distemper,  or  of  a particular  paroxysm. 

Ei'spnoe.  (From  as,  into,  and  nvuo,  to  breathe.) 
Inspiration  of  air. 

EJACULA'NTIA.  (From  cjaculo,  to  cast  out.) 
Ejaculatoria.  The  vessels  which  convey  the  seminal 
matter  secreted  in  the  testicles  to  the  penis.  These 
are  the  epididymis,  and  the  vasa  deferentia ; the  vesi- 
cuke  seminales  are  the  receptacles  of  the  semen. 

EJE'CTIO.  (From  ejicio,  to  cast  out.)  Ejection, 
or  the  discharging  of  any  thing  from  the  body. 

Elaca'lli.  The  Indian  name  of  a cathartic  shrub, 
the  Euphorbia  nervifolia , of  Linnams. 

El.ka'gnon.  (From  eXaiov,  oil,  and  ayvos , chaste.) 
-See  Vitex  agnus  castus. 

El^eo'meli.  (From  eXaiov , oil,  and  pcXt,  honey.) 
A sweet  purging  oil,  like  honey. 

ELiEOSA'CCHARUM.  (From  eXaiov,  oil,  and 
aaKxapov,  sugar.)  A mixture  of  an  essential  oil  with 
sugar. 

El.'eoseli'num.  See  Eleoselinum. 

ELAIN.  The  oily  principle  of  solid  fats,  so  named 
by  its  discoverer,  Chevreuil,  who  dissolves  tallow  in 
very  pure  hot  alkohol,  separates  the  stearin  by  crys- 
tallization, and  then  procures  the  elain  by  evaporation 
of  the  spirit.  Braconnot  has  adopted  a simpler,  and 
probably  a more  exact  method.  By  squeezing  tallow 
between  the  folds  of  porous  paper,  the  elain  soaks  into 
it,  while  the  stearin  remains.  The  paper  being  then 
soaked  in  water,  and  pressed,  yields  up  its  oily  im- 
pregnation. Elain  has  very  much  the  appearance  and 
properties  of  vegetable  oil.  It  is  liquid  at  the  tempera- 
ture of  60°.  Its  smell  and  colour  are  derived  from 
the  solid  fats  from  which  it  is  extracted. 

[“  Mr.  Pictet’s  method  of  procuring  elaine,  consists 
in  pouring  upon  oil  a concentrated  solution  of  caustic 
soda,  stirring  the  mixture,  heating  it  slightly  to  sepa- 
rate the  elaine  from  the  soap  of  the  stearine,  pouring 
it  on  a cloth,  and  then  separating  by  decantation  the 
elaine  from  the  excess  of  alkaline  solution. — Webster's 
Man.  of  Chemistry.  A.] 

Elais  guinee'nsis.  A species  of  palm  which  grows 
spontaneously  on  the  coast  of  Guinea,  but  is  much  cul- 
tivated in  the  West  Indies.  It  is  from  this  tree  that 
the  oil,  called  in  the  West  Indies  Mac/caio  fat,  is  ob- 
tained : and,  according  to  some,  the  palm-oil,  which  is 
considered  as  an  emollient  and  strengthener  of  all 
kinds  of  weakness  of  the  limbs.  It  also  is  recom- 
mended against  bruises,  strains,  cramps,  pains,  swell- 
ings, &c. 

Elambxca'tio.  A method  of  analyzing  mineral 
waters. 

ELAOLITE.  A subspecies  of  pyramidal  felspar. 

ELAPHOBO'SCUM.  (From  eXa 0oj,  a stag,  and 
/ 3o<tk(i) , to  eat : so  called,  because  deer  eat  them  greedi- 
ly.) See  Pastinaca. 

ELAPHOSCO'RODON.  * (From  eXaQos,  the  stag, 
and  oKopoSov,  garlic.)  Stag’s  or  viper’s  garlic. 

Ela'sma.  (From  eXavno,  to  drive.)  A lamina  of 
any  kind.  A clyster-pipe. 

ELASTIC.  ( Elasticus ; from  eXa^ys,  impulsor , or 
of  eXavvuv,  to  impel,  /o  push.)  Springy ; having  the 
power  of  returning  to/the  form  from  which  it  has  been 
forced  to  deviate,  or  from  which  it  is  withheld;  thus, 
a blade  of  steel  is  said  to  be  elastic,  because  if  it  is 
bent  to  a certain  degree,  and  then  let  go,  it  will  of  it- 
self return  to  its  former  situation ; the  same  will  hap- 
pen to  the  branch  of  a tree,  a piece  of  Indian  rubber, 
&cc.  See  Elasticity. 

Elastic  fluid.  See  Gas. 

Elastic  gum.  S ee  C aoutchouc. 

ELASTICITY.  Elastizitas.  A force  in  bodies,  by 
which  they  endeavour  to  restore  themselves  to  the 
posture  from  whence  they  were  displaced  by  any  ex 
ternal  force.  To  solve  this  property,  many  have  re 
course  to  the  universal  law  of  nature,  attraction,  by 
which  the  parts  of  solid  and  firm  bodies  are  caused  to 
cohere  together:  whereby,  when  hard  bodies  are 
struck  or  bent,  so'that  the  component  parts  are  a little 
moved  from  one  another,  but  not  quite  disjoined  or 
broken  off,  nor  separated  so  far  as  to  be  out  of  the 
power  of  the  attracting  force,  by  which  they  cohere 
together ; they  certainly  must,  on  the  cessation  of  the 
external  violence,  ipring  back  with  a very  great  velo- 
city to  their  former  state.  But  in  this  circumstance, 
the  atmospherical  pressure  will  account  for  it  as  well ; 
because  such  a violence,  if  it  be  not  great  enough  to 


ELA 


separate  the  constituent  particles  of  a body  far  enough 
to  let  in  any  foreign  matter,  must  occasion  many  va- 
cuola  between  the  separated  surfaces,  so  that  upon  the 
removal  of  the  external  force,  they  will  close  again  by 
the  pressure  of  the  aerial  fluid  upon  the  external  parts, 

e.  the  body  will  come  again  into  its  natural  posture. 
The  included  air,  likewise,  in  most  bodies,  gives  that 
power  of  resilitioh  upon  their  percussion. 

If  two  bodies  perfectly  elastic  strike,  one  against 
another,  there  will  be  or  remain  in  each  the  same  rela- 
tive velocity  as  before,  i.  e.  they  will  recede  with  the 
same  velocity  as  they  met  together.  For  the  compress- 
ive force,  or  the  magnitude  of  the  stroke  in  any  given 
bodies,  arises  from  the  relative  velocity  of  those  bodies, 
and  is  proportional  to  it,  and  bodies  perfectly  elastic 
will  restore  themselves  completely  to  the  figure  they 
had  before  the  shock ; or,  in  other  words,  the  resti- 
tutive  force  is  equal  to  the  compressive,  and  therefore 
must  be  equal  to  the  force  with  which  they  came  to- 
gether, and  consequently  they  must,  by  elasticity,  re- 
cede again  from  eacli  other  with  the  same  velocity. 
Hence,  taking  equal  times  before  and  after  the  shock, 
the  distances  between  the  bodies  will  be  equal : and 
therefore  the  distances  of  them  from  the  common  cen- 
tre of  gravity  will,  in  the  same  times,  be  equal.  And 
hence  the  laws  of  percussion  of  bodies  perfectly  elastic 
are  easily  deduced. 

ELATE'RIUM.  (From  eXavvw , to  stimulate  or 
agitate : so  named  from  its  great  purgative  qualities.) 
See  Momordica  elaterium. 

[“The  Momordica  elaterium  is  a perennial  plant, 
growing  spontaneously  in  the  south  of  Europe.  The 
fruit,  which  is  botanically  allied  to  the  cucumber  and 
melon,  has  the  curious  property  of  separating  itself, 
when  ripe,  from  its  stalk,  and  ejecting  its  seeds  with 
great  force  through  an  opening  in  the  base,  where  the 
stalk  was  attached.  The  medicinal  property  resides 
chiefly  in  the  juice  at  the  centre  of  the  fruit,  and  about 
the  seeds.  The  drug  called  Elaterium  in  our  Phar- 
macopoeia, and  which  the  London  College  have,  with 
some  latitude  of  application,  called  an  extract,  is  the 
sediment  whiqh  subsides  from  the  juice  of  the  fruit 
after  it  has  been  drawn  out.  The  quantity  of  genuine 
elaterium  contained  in  a single  fruit  is  extreiaejy  small, 
as  it  appears  that  only  six  grains  were  obtained  by 
Dr.  Clutterbuck  from  forty  of  the  cucumbers.  The 
plant  might  be  raised  in  this  country. 

“ Elaterium  is  sold  in  small,  thin  cakes,  or  fragments, 
of  a greenish  colour,  and  a bitter  and  somewhat  acrid 
taste.  It  is  liable  to  vary  in  strength,  according  to  the 
mode  of  its  preparation.  If  the  juice  has  been  ex- 
tracted with  much  pressure,  the  sediment  contains 
portions  of  the  fruit  which  are  comparatively  inac- 
tive, and  which,  of  course,  tend  to  lessen  its  activity. 
In  selecting  elaterium , those  specimens  which  have  a 
very  dark  colour,  are  compact  and  heavy,  and  break 
with  a shining  resinous  fracture,  are  to  be  rejected  as 
bad. 

“ This  drug  is  one  of  the  most  violent  cathartics. 
It  was  employed  by  the  ancients  as  a hydragogue  in 
dropsy,  in  a form  not  dissimilar  to  that  used  at  the 
present  day.  It  was  also  used  by  the  Arabians,  and 
in  more  modern  times  by  Boerhaave,  Sydenham,  and 
Lister.  Quite  recently  it  has  been  highly  recom- 
mended in  dropsy  by  some  distinguished  English  phy- 
sicians, and  their  practice  has  been  successfully  imi- 
tated in  this  country ; although  the  great  uncertainty 
of  its  operation  has  repeatedly  caused  it  to  be  aban- 
doned. It  has  the  peculiar  property  of  not  only  pur- 
ging, but  at  the  same  time  exciting  a febrile  action, 
which  Lister  describes  as  attended  with  a throbbing 
that  is  felt  to  the  fingers’  ends.  Orfila  found  that  a 
large  dose,  given  to  a dog,  brought  on  inflammation  of 
the  stomach,  but  when  injected  In  two  cases  into  the 
cellular  texture  of  the  thigh,  the  rectum  was  the  only 
part  of  the  canal  which  became  Inflamed.  Hence  he 
concludes,  that  the  medicine  has  some  peculiar  action 
on  that  organ. 

“ The  uncertainty  arising  from  the  different  prepa- 
rations of  this  medicine  may  be  inferred  from  the  cir- 
cumstance, that  Fallopius  gave  it  in  doses  of  a drachm, 
while  Dr.  Clutterbuck  found  one-eighth  of  a grain  to 
purge  violently.  The  strength  or  any  particular  par- 
cel ought  always  to  be  tested  by  small  doses,  before  it 
is  ventured  on  in  any  considerable  quantity.  Of  the  ar- 
ticle imported  into  this  country,  I have  given  from  one 
to  two  grains  in  a pill  three  times  a day,  without  any 


ELE 

excessive  operation  resulting  from  it.”— Biff.  Mat 
Med.  A.] 

ELATHE'RIA.  A name  for  the  cascarilla  bark. 

ELATIN.  The  active  principle  of  elaterium.  See 

Momordica  elaterium. 

ELATI'NE.  (From  cXa'Jrwv,  smaller,  being  the 
smaller  species.)  See  Antirrhinum  elatine. 

ELATIO.  Elevated,  exalted.  This  term  is  ap- 
plied in  Good’s  Nosology,  to  a species  of  the  genus 
Alusio , to  designate  mental  extravagance. 

Elati'tes.  Bloodstone. 

ELCO'SIS.  (From  eAacoj,  an  ulcer.)  A disease  at- 
tended with  foetid,  carious,  and  chronic  ulcers.  The 
term  is  seldom  used. 

ELDER.  See  Sambucus. 

Elder , dwarf.  See  Sambucus  Ebulus. 

ELECAMPANE.  See  Inula  helenium. 

ELECTIVE.  That  which  is  done,  or  passes,  by 
election. 

Elective  affinity,  double.  See  Affinity  double. 

Elective  attraction.  See  Affinity. 

Elective  attraction , double.  See  Affinity  double 

ELECTRICITY.  (Electricitas ; from  electrum, 
yXeurpov , from  yXacJwp,  the  sun,  because  of  its  bright 
shining  colour;  or  from  c\ku),  to  draw,  because  of  its 
magnetic  power.)  A property  which  certain  bodies 
possess  when  rubbed,  heated,  or  otherwise  excited, 
whereby  they  attract  remote  bodies,  and  frequently 
emit  sparks  or  streams  of  light.  The  ancients  first  ob- 
served this  property  in  amber,  which  they  called  Elec- 
trum, and  hence  arose  the  word  electricity. 

“If  a piece  of  sealing-wax  and  of  dry  warm  flannel 
be  rubbed  against  each  other,  they  both  become  capa- 
ble of  attracting  and  repelling  light  bodies.  A dry  and 
warm  sheet  of  writing-paper,  rubbed  with  India  rub- 
ber, or  a tube  of  glass  rubbed  upon  silk,  exhibit  the 
same  phenomena.  In  these  cases,  the  bodies  are  said 
to  be  electrically  excited ; and  when  in  a dark  room, 
they  always  appear  luminous.  If  two  pith-balls  be 
electrified  by  touching  them  with  the  sealing-wax,  or 
with  the  flannel,  they  repel  each  other;  but  if  one 
pith-ball  be  electrified  by  the  wax,  and  the  other  by  the 
flaimel,  they  attract  each  other.  The  same  applies  to 
the  glass  and  silk:  it  shows  a difference  in  the  electri- 
cities of  the  different  bodies,  and  the  experiment  leads 
to  the  conclusion,  that  bodies  similarly  electrified  repel 
each  other ; but  that  when  dissimilarly  electrified , they 
attract  each  other. 

The  term  electrical  repulsion  is  here  used  merely  to 
denote  the  appearance  of  the  phenomenon,  the  separa- 
tion being  probably  referrible  to  the  new  attractive 
power  which  they  acquire,  when  electrified,  for  the  air 
and  other  surrounding  bodies. 

If  one  ball  be  electrified  by  sealing  wax  rubbed  by 
flannel,  and  another  by  silk  rubbed  with  glass,  those 
balls  will  repel  each  other;  which  proves  that  the 
electricity  of  the  silk  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  sealing- 
wax.  But  if  one  ball  be  electrified  by  the  sealing-wax 
and  the  other  by  the  glass,  they  then  attract  each 
other,  showing  that  they  are  oppositely  electrified. 

These  experiments  are  most  conveniently  performed 
with  a large  downy  feather,  suspended  by  a silken 
thread.  If  an  excited  glass  tube  be  brought  near  it,  it 
will  receive  and  retain  its  electricity ; it  will  be  first 
attracted  and  then  repelled  ; and  upon  re-exciting  the 
tube,  and  again  approaching  it,  it  will  not  again  be  at- 
tracted, but  retain  its  state  of  repulsion;  but  upon  ap- 
proaching it  with  excited  sealing-wax,  it  will  instantly 
be  attracted,  and  remain  in  contact  with  the  wax  till 
it  has  acquired  its  electricity,  when  it  will  be  repelled, 
and  in  that  state  of  reptflkion  it  will  be  attracted  by 
the  glass.  Tn  these  experiments,  care  must  be  taken 
that  the  feather  remains  freely  suspended  in  the  air, 
and  touches  nothing  capable  of  carrying  off  its  elec- 
tricity. 

The  terms  vitreous  and  resinous  electricity  were 
applied  to  these  two  phenomena;  but  Franklin,  ob- 
serving that  the  same  electricity  was  not  inherent  in 
the  same  body,  but  that  glass  sometimes  exhibited  the 
same  phenomena  as  wax,  and  viceversd,  adopted  ano- 
ther term,  and  instead  of  regarding  the  phenomena  as 
dependent  upon  two  electric  fluids,  referred  them  to 
the  presence  of  one  fluid,  in  excess  in  some  cases,  and 
in  deficiency  in  others.  To  represent  these  states,  he 
used  the  terms  plus  and  mvius,  positive  and  negative. 
When  glass  is  rubbed  with  silk,  a portion  of  electri- 
city leaves  the  silk,  and  enters  the  glass ; it  becomes  po- 


ELE 


ELE 


sitive , therefore,  and  the  silk  negative : but  when  seal- 
ing-wax is  rubbed  with  flannel,  the  wax  loses,  and  the 
flannel  gains ; the  former,  therefore,  is  negative,  and 
the  latter  positive.  All  bodies  in  nature  are  thus  re- 
garded as  containing  the  electric  fluid,  and  when  its 
equilibrium  is  disturbed,  they  exhibit  the  phenomena 
just  described.  The  substances  enumerated  in  the  fol- 
lowing table  become  positively  electrified  when  rubbed 
with  those  which  follow’  them  in  the  list;  but  with 
those  which  precede  them  they  become  negatively 
electrical. — Biot , Traiti  de  Physique , tom  ii.  p.  220. 

Cat’s-skin.  Paper. 

Polished  glass.  Silk. 

Woolen  cloth.  Gum  lac. 

Feathers.  Rough  glass. 

Very  delicate  pith-balls,  or  strips  of  gold  leaf,  are 
usually  employed  in  ascertaining  the  presence  of  elec- 
tricity ; and  by  the  way  in  which  their  divergence  is 
effected  by  glass  or  sealing-wax,  the  kind  or  state  of 
electricity  is  judged  of.  When  properly  suspended  or 
mounted  for  delicate  experiments,  they  form  an  elec- 
trometer or  electroscope.  For  this  purpose,  the  slips  of* 
gold  leaf  are  suspended  by  a brass  cap  and  wire  in  a 
glass  cylinder : they  hang  in  contact  when  unelec- 
trified, but  when  electrified  they  diverge. 

When  this  instrument,  as  usually  constructed, 
becomes  in  a small  degree  damp,  its  delicacy  is  much 
diminished,  and  it  is  rendered  nearly  useless. 

The  kind  of  electricity  by  which  the  gold  leaves  are 
diverged  may  be  judged  of  by  approaching  the  cap  of 
the  instrument  with  a stick  of  excited  sealing-wax  ; if 
it  be  negative , the  divergence  will  increase  ; if  positive , 
the  leaves  will  collapse,  upon  the  principle  of  the  mu- 
tual annihilation  of  the  opposite  electricities,  or  that 
bodies  similarly  electrified  repel  each  other,  but  that 
when  dissimilarly  electrified,  they  become  mutually 
attractive. 

Some  bodies  suffer  electricity  to  pass  through  their 
substance,  and  are  called  conductors.  Others  only 
receive  it  upon  the  spot  touched,  and  are  called  non- 
conductors. The  former  do  not,  in  general,  become 
electrified  by  friction, . and  are  called  non- electrics : 
the  latter,  on  the  contrary,  are  electrics , or  acquire  elec- 
tricity by  friction.  They  are  also  called  insulators. 
The  metals  are  all  conductors ; dry  air,  glass,  sulphur, 
and  resins,  are  non-conductors.  Water,  damp  wood, 
spirit  of  wine,  damp  air,  and  some  oils,  are  imperfect 
conductors. 

Ratified  air  admits  of  the  passage  of  electricity ; so 
does  the  Jarricellian  vacuum  ; hence,  if  an  electrified 
body  be  placed  under  the  receiver  of  the  air-pump,  it 
loses  its  electricity  during  exhaustion.  So  that  the 
air,  independent  of  its  non-conducting  power,  appears 
to  influence  the  retentive  properties  of  bodies,  in  re- 
spect to  electricity,  by  its  pressure. 

There  appears  to  be  no  constant  relation  between  the 
state  of  bodies  and  their  conducting  powers:  among 
solids,  metals  are  conductors  ; but  gums  and  resins  are 
non-conductors:  among  liquids,  strong  alkaline  acid, 
and  saline  solutions,  are  good  conductors;  pure  water 
is  an  imperfectconduCtor,  and  oils  are  non-conductors  ; 
solid  wax  is  almost  a non-conductor  ; but  when  melted 
a good  one. 

Conducting  powers  belong  to  bodies  in  the  most  op- 
posite states ; thus,  the  flame  of  alkohol  and  ice  are 
equally  good  conductors.  Glass  is  a non-conductor 
when  cold,  but  conducts  when  red-hot : the  diamond 
is  a non-conductor;  but  pure  and  well-burned  char- 
coal is  among  the  best  conductors. 

There  are  many  mineral  substances  which  show 
signs  of  electricity  when  heated,  as  the  tourmalin, 
topaz,  diamond,  boracite,  &c.,  and  in  these  bodies  the 
different  surfaces  exhibit  different  electrical  states. 

Whenever  one  part  of  a body,  or  system  of  bodies, 
is  positive,  another  part  is  invariably  negative ; and 
these  opposite  electrical  states  are  always  such  as  ex- 
actly to  neutralize  each  other.  Thus,  in  the  common 
electrical  machine,  one  conductor  receives  the  electri- 
city of  the  glass-cylinder,  and  the  other  that  of  the 
silk-rubber,  and  the  former  conductor  is  positive,  and 
the  latter  negative ; but,  if  they  be  connected,  all  elec- 
trical phenomena  cease. 

Electricians  generally  employ  the  term  quantity  to 
indicate  the  absolute  quantity  of  electric  power  in  any 
body,  and  the  term  intensity , to  signify  its  power  of 
passing  through  a certain  stratum  of  air,  orotherill- 
conducting  medium. 

X 


If  we  suppose  a charged  Leyden  phial  to  furnish  a 
spark,  when  discharged,  of  one  inch  in  length,  we 
should  find  that  another  uncharged  Leyden  phial,  the 
inner  and  outer  coating  of  which  were  communicated 
with  those  of  the  former,  would,  upon  the  same  quan- 
tity of  electricity  being  thrown  in,  reduce  the  length  of 
the  spark  to  half  an  inch  ; here  the  quantity  of  elec- 
tricity remaining  the  same,  its  intensity  is  diminished 
by  one-half,  by  its  distribution  over  the  larger  surface 

It  is  obvious  that  the  extension  of  surface  alluded  to 
in  the  last  paragraph  will  be  attended  with  a greater 
superficial  exposure  to  the  unelectrified  air;  and  hence 
it  might  be  expected  that  a similar  diminution  of  in 
tensity  would  result  from  the  vicinity  of  the  electrified 
surface  to  the  ground,  or  to  any  other  body  of  sufficient 
magnitude  in  its  ordinary  state.  That  this  is  the  case, 
may  be  shown  by  diverging  the  leaves  of  the  gold  leaf 
electrometer,  and  in  that  state  approaching  the  instru- 
ment with  an  uninsulated  plate,  which,  when  within 
half  an  inch  of  the  electrometer  plate,  will  cause  the 
leaves  to  collapse;  but,  on  removing  the  uninsulated 
plate,  they  will  again  diverge,  in  consequence  of  the 
electricity  regaining  its  former  intensity.  The  same 
fact  is  shown  by  the  condensing  electrometer. 

The  power  of  the  Leyden  jar  is  proportioned  to  its 
surface ; but  a very  large  jar  is  inconvenient  and  diffi- 
cult to  procure  ; the  same  end  is  attained  by  arranging 
several  jars,  so  that  by  a communication  existing  be- 
tween all  their  interior  coatings,  their  exterior  being 
also  united,  they  may  be  charged  and  discharged  as 
one  jar.  Such  a combination  is  called  an  electrical 
battery , and  is  useful  for  exhibiting  the  effect  of  accu- 
mulated electricity. 

The  discharge  of  the  battery  is  attended  by  a consi- 
derable report,  and  if  it  be  passed  through  small  ani- 
mals, it  instantly  kills  them;  if  through  fine  metallic 
wires,  they  are  ignited,  melted,  and  burned ; and  gun- 
powder, cotton  sprinkled  with  powdered  resin,  and  a 
variety  of  other  combustibles,  may  be  inflamed  by  the 
same  means. 

There  are  many  other  sources  of  electricity  than 
those  just  noticed.  When  glass  is  rubbed  by  mercury, 
it  becomes  electrified ; and  this  is  the  cause  of  the 
luminous  appearance  observed  when  a barometer  is 
agitated  in  a dark  room,  in  which  case  flashes  of  light 
are  seen  to  traverse  the  empty  part  of  the  tube.  Even 
the  friction  of  air  upon  glass  is  attended  by  electrical 
excitation  : for  Wilson  found,  that  by  blowing  upon  a 
dry  plate  of  glass  with  a pair  of  bellows,  it  acquired  a 
positive  electricity.  Whenever  bodies  change  their 
forms,  their  electrical  states  are  also  altered.  Thus, 
the  conversion  of  water  into  vapour,  and  the  congela- 
tion of  melted  resins  and  sulphur  are  processes  in 
which  electricity  is  also  rendered  sensible. 

When  an  insulated  plate  of  zinc  is  brought  into 
contact  with  one  of  copper  or  silver,  it  is  found,  after 
removal,  to  be  positively  electrical,  and  the  silver  or 
copper  is  left  in  the  opposite  state. 

The  most  oxidisable  metal  is  always  positive,  in 
relation  to  the  least  oxidisable  metal,  which  is  nega- 
tive, and  the  more  opposite  the  metals  in  these  respects 
the  greater  the  electrical  excitation  ; and  if  tfie  metals 
be  placed  in  the  following  order,  each  will  ' become 
positive  by  the  contact  of  that  which  precedes  it,  and 
negative  by  the  contact  of  that  which  follows  it ; and 
the  greatest  effect  will  result  from  the  contact  of  the 
most  distant  metals. 

Platinum.  Mercury.  Tin. 

Gold.  Copper.  Lead. 

Silver.  Iron.  Zinc. 

If  the  nerve  of  a recently  killed  frog  be  attached  to 
a silver  probe,  and  a piece  of  zinc  be  brought  into  the 
contact  of  the  muscular  parts  of  the  animal,  violent 
convulsions  are  produced  every  time  the  metals  thus 
connected  are  made  to  touch  each  other.  Exactly  the 
same  effect  is  produced  by  an  electrib  spark,  or  the  dis- 
charge of  a very  small  Leyden-phial. 

If  a piece  of  zinc  be  placed  upon  the  tongue, .and  a 
piece  of  silver  under  it,  a peculiar  sensation  will  be 
perceived  every  time  the  two  metals  are  made  to  touch. 

In  these  cases  the  chemical  properties  of  the  metals 
are  observed  to  be  effected.  If  a silver  and  zinc  wire 
be  put  into  a wine  glass  full  of  dilute  sulphuric  acid, 
the  zinc  wire  will  only  evolve  gas  ; but  upon  bringing 
the  two  wires  in  contact  with  each  other,  the  silver 
will  also  copiously  produce  air  bubbles. 

If  a number  of  alterations  be  made  of  copper  or  sil- 

321 


ELE 


ELE 


ver  leaf,  zinc  leaf,  and  thin  paper,  the  electricity  ex- 
cited by  the  contact  of  the  metals  will  be  rendered  evi- 
dent to  the  common  electrometer. 

If  the  same  arrangement  be  made  with  the  paper 
moistened  with  brine,  or  a weak  acid,  it  will  be  found, 
on  bringing  a wire  communicating  with  the  last  copper 
plate  into  contact  with  the  first  zinc  plate,  that  a spark 
is  perceptible,  and  also  a slight  shock,  provided  the 
number  of  alternations  be  sufficiently  numerous.  This 
is  the  voltaic  apparatus. 

Several  modes  of  constructing  this  apparatus  have 
been  adopted,  with  a view  to  render  it  more  conve- 
nient or  active.  Sometimes  double  plates  of  copper 
and  zinc  soldered  together,  are  cemented  into  wooden 
troughs  in  regular  order,  the  intervening  cells  being 
filled  with  water,  or  saline,  or  acid  solutions. 

Another  form  consists  in  arranging  a row  of  glasses, 
containing  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  in  each  of  which  is 
placed  a wire,  or  plate  of  silver,  or  copper,  and  one  of 
zinc,  not  touching  each  other,  but  so  connected  by 
metallic  wires,  that  the  zinc  of  the  first  cup  may  com- 
municate with  the  copper  of  the  second  ; the  zinc  of 
the  second  with  the  copper  of  the  third ; and  so  on 
throughout  the  series. 

When  the  poles  of  the  Voltaic  apparatus  are  con- 
nected by  a steel  wire,  it  requires  magnetic  properties, 
and  if  by  a platinum,  or  other  metallic  wire,  that  wire 
exhibits  numerous  magnetic  poles,  whit  h attract  and 
repel  the  common  magnetic  needle.  This  very  curious 
fact  was  first  observed  by  Professor  Oersted,  of  Copen- 
hagen. 

On  immersing  the  wires  from  the  extremes  of  this 
apparatus  into  water,  it  is  found  that  the  fluid  suffers 
decomposition,  and  that  oxygen  gas  is  liberated  at  the 
positive  wire  or  pole,  and  hydrogen  gas  at  the  negative 
pole. 

All  other  substances  are  decomposed  with  similar 
phenomena,  the  inflammable  element  being  disengaged 
at  the  negatively  electrical  surface ; hence  it  would 
appear,  upon  the  principle  of  similarly  electrified 
bodies  repelling  each  other,  and  dissimilarly  electrified 
bodies  attracting  each  other,  that  the  inherent  or  natu- 
ral electrical  state  of  the  inflammable  substances  is 
positive,  for  they  are  attracted  by  the  negative  or  op- 
positely electrified  pole;  while  the  bodies,  called  sup- 
porters of  combustion,  or  acidifying  principles,  are 
attracted  by  the  positive  pole,  and,  therefore,  may  be 
considered  as  possessed  of  the  negative  power. 

When  bodies  are  thus  under  the  influence  of  elec- 
trical decomposition,  their  usual  chemical  energies  are 
suspended,  and  some  very  curious  phenomena  are  ob- 
served. 

The  most  difficult  decomposable  compounds  may  be 
thus  resolved  into  their  component  parts  by  the  elec- 
trical agency;  by  a weak  power  the  proximate  ele- 
ments are  separated,  and  by  a stronger  power  these 
are  resolved  into  their  ultimate  constituents. 

All  bodies  which  exert  powerful  chemical  agencies 
upon  each  other  when  freedom  of  motion  is  given  to 
their  particles,  render  each  other  oppositely  electrical 
when  acting  as  masses.  Hence  Sir  H.  Davy,  the  great 
and  successful  investigator  of  this  branch  of  chemical 
philosophy,  has  supposed  that  electrical  and  chemical 
phenomena,  though  in  themselves  qqite  distinct,  may 
be  dependent  on  one  and  the  same  power,  acting  in  the 
former  case  upon  masses  of  matter,  in  the  other  upon 
its  particles. 

The  power  of  the  Voltaic  apparatus  to  communicate 
divergence  to  the  electrometer,  is  most  observed  when 
it  is  well  insulated,  and  filled  with  pure  water  : but  its 
power  of  producing  ignition  and  of  giving  shocks,  and 
of  producing  the  other  effects  observed  when  its  poles 
are  connected,  are  much  augmented  by  the  interpo- 
sition of  dilute  acids,  which  act  chemically  upon  one 
of  the  plates : here  the  insulation  is  interfered  with  by 
the  production  of  vapour,  but.  the  quantity  of  elec- 
tricity is  much  increased,  a circumstance  which  may, 
perhaps,  be  referred  to  the  increase  of  the  positive 
energy  of  the  most  oxidisable  metal  by  the  contact  of 
the  acid.  In  experiments  made  with  the  great  battery 
of  the  Royal  Institution,  it  has  been  found  that  120 
plates  rendered  active  by  a mixture  of  one  part  of  ni- 
tric acid,  and  three  of  water,  produces  effects  equal  to 
480  plates  rendered  active  by  one  part  of  nitric  acid, 
and  fifteen  of  water. 

In  the  Voltaic  pile,  the  intensity  of  the  electricity 
Increases  with  the  number  of  alternations,  but  the 

m 


quantity  is  increased  by  extending  the  surface  of  the 
plates.  Thus,  if  a battery,  composed  of  thirty  pairs 
of  plates,  two  inches  square,  be  compared  with  another 
battery  of  thirty  pairs  of  twelve  inches  square  charged 
in  the  same  way,  no  difference  will  be  perceived  in 
their  effects  upon  bad  or  imperfect  conductors  ; their 
powers  of  decomposing  water,  and  of  giving  shocks, 
will  be  similar  ; but  upon  good  conductors  the  effects 
of  the  large  plates  will  be  considerably  greater  than 
those  of  the  small:  they  will  ignite  and  fuse  large 
quantities  of  platinum  wire,  and  produce  a very  bril- 
liant spark  between  charcoal  points.  The  following 
experiment  well  illustrates  the  different  effects  of 
quantity  and  intensity  in  the  Voltaic  apparatus. 

Immerse  the  platinum  wires  connected  with  the  ex- 
tremity of  a charged  battery  composed  of  twelve-inch 
plates  into  water,  and  it  will  be  found  that  the  evolu- 
tion of  gas  is  nearly  the  same  as  that  occasioned  by  a 
similar  number  of  two-inch  plates.  Apply  the  moist- 
ened fingers  to  the  wires,  and  the  shock  will  be  the 
same  as  if  there  were  no  connexion  by  the  water. 
While  the  circuit  exists  through  the  human  body  and 
the  water,  let  a wire  attached  to  a thin  slip  of  char- 
coal be  made  to  connect  the  poles  of  the  battery,  and 
the  charcoal  will  become  vividly  ignited.  The  water 
and  the  animal  substance  discharge  the  electricity  of  a 
surface,  probably,  not  superior  to  their  own  surface  of 
contact  with  the  metals  ; the  wires  discharge  all  the 
residual  electricity  of  the  plates;  and  if  a similar  ex- 
periment be  made  on  plates  of  an  inch  square,  there 
will  scarcely  be  any  sensation  when  the  hands  are 
made  to  connect  the  ends  of  the  battery,  a circuit 
being  previously  made  through  water  ; and  no  spark, 
when  charcoal  is  made  the  medium  of  connexion,  im- 
perfect conductors  having  been  previously  applied. 
These  relative  effects  of  quantity  and  intensity  were 
admirably  illustrated  by  the  experiments  instituted  by 
Children,  who  constructed  a battery,  the  plates  of 
which  were  two  feet  eight  inches  wide,  and  six  feet 
high.  They  were  fastened  to  a beam,  suspended  by 
counterpoises,  from  the  ceiling  of  his  laboratory,  so  as 
to  be  easily  immersed  into,  or  withdrawn  from  the 
cells  of  acid.  The  effects  upon  metallic  wires,  and 
perfect  conductors,  were  extremely  intense;  but  upon 
imperfect  conductors,  such  as  the  human  body,  and 
water,  they  were  feeble. — Phil.  Trans.  1815,  p.  363. 

When  the  extremes  of  a battery  composed  of  large 
plates  are  united  by  wires  of  different  metals,  it  is 
found  that  some  are  more  easily  ignited  than  others, 
. a circumstance  which  has  been  referred  to  their  con- 
ducting powers:  thus  platinum  is  more  easily  ignited 
than  silver,  and  silver  than  zinc.  If  the  ignition  be 
supposed  to  result  from  the  resistance  to  the  passage 
of  electricity,  we  should  say  that  the  zinc  conducted 
better  than  silver,  and  the  silver  than  platinum. 

An  important  improvement  has  been  suggested  in 
the  construction  of  the  Voltaic  apparatus,  by  Dr.  Wol- 
laston, (Annals  of  Philosophy,  Sept.  1815,)  by  which 
great  increase  of  quantity  is  obtained,  without  incon- 
venient augmentation  of  the  size  of  the  plates ; it  con- 
sists in  extending  the  copper  plate,  so  as  to  oppose  it 
to  every  surface  of  the  zinc. 

With  the  single  pair  of  plates,  of  very  small  dimen- 
sions, constructed  upon  this  principle,  Dr.  Wollaston 
succeeded  in  fusing  and  igniting  a fine  platinum  wire. 
This  is  the  most  economical  and  useful  form  of  the 
Voltaic  apparatus  ; certainly,  at  least,  it  is  so  for  all 
those  researches  in  which  there  is  an  occasional  de- 
mand for  quantity  as  well  as  intensity  of  electricity. 

The  theory  of  the  Voltaic  pile  is  involved  in  many 
difficulties.  The  original  source  of  electricity  appears 
to  depend  upon  the  contact  of  the  metals,  for  we  know 
that  a plate  of  silver  and  a plate  of  zinc,  or  of  any  other 
difficultly  and  easily  oxidisable  metals,  become  nega- 
tive and  positive  on  contact.  The  accumulation  must 
be  referred  to  induction , which  takes  place  in  the  elec- 
trical column,  through  the  very  thin  stratum  of  air,  or 
paper,  and  through  water,  when  that  fluid  is  interposed 
between  the  plates.  Accordingly,  we  observe,  that 
the  apparatus  is  in  the  condition  of  the  series  of  con- 
ductors, with  interposed  air,  and  of  the  Leyden  phials. 
When  the  electric  column  is  insulated,  the  extremities 
exhibit  feeble  negative  and  positive  powers,  but  if 
either  extremity  be  connected  with  the  ground,  the 
electricity  of  its  poles  or  extremities  is  greatly  increased, 
as  may  be  shown  by  the  increased  divergence  of  the 
leaves  of  the  electrometer  which  then  ensues. 


ELE 


ELE 


As  general  changes  in  the  form  and  constitution  of 
matter  are  connected  with  its  electrical  states,  it  is  ob- 
vious that,  electricity  must  be  continually  active  in  na- 
ture. Its  etfects  are  exhibited  on  a magnificent  scale 
in  the  thunder-storm,  which  results  from  the  accumu- 
lation of  electricity  in  the  clouds,  as  was  first  experi- 
mentally demonstrated  by  Dr.  Franklin,  who  also  first 
showed  the  advantage  of  pointed  conductors  as  safe- 
guards to  buildings.  In  these  cases,  the  conducting 
rod,  or  rods,  should  be  of  copper,  or  iron,  and  from  half 
to  three-fourths  of  an  inch  diameter.  Its  upper  end 
should  be  elevated  three  or  four  feel  above  the  highest 
part  of  the  building,  and  all  the  metallic  parts  of  the 
roof  should  be  connected  with  the  rod,  which  should 
be  perfectly  continuous  throughout,  and  passing  down 
the  side  of  the  building,  penetrate  several  feet  below  its 
foundation,  so  as  always  to  be  immersed  in  a moist 
stratum  of  soil,  or  if  possible,  into  water.  The  leaden 
water  pipes  attached  to  houses,  often  might  be  made 
to  answer  the  purpose  of  conductors,  especially  when 
thick  enough  to  resist  fusion. 

During  a thunder-storm  the  safest  situation  is  in  the 
middle  of  a room,  at  a distance  from  the  chimney,  and 
standing  upon  a woollen  rug,  which  is  a nonconductor. 
Blankets  and  feathers  being  nonconductors,  bed  is  a 
place  of  comparative  safety,  provided  the  bell-wires 
are  not  too  near,  which  are  almost  always  melted  in 
houses  struck  by  lightning.  When  out  of  doors,  it  is 
dangerous  to  take  shelter  under  trees : the  safest  situ- 
ation is  within  some  yards  of  them,  and  upon  the 
dryest  spot  that  can  be  selected. 

Tire  discharge  of  electricity  in  a thunder-storm  is 
sometimes  only  from  cloud  to  cloud ; sometimes  from 
the  earth  to  the  clouds;  and  sometimes  from  the  clouds 
to  the  earth  ; as  one  or  the  other  may  be  positive  or 
negative.  When  aqueous  vapour  is  condensed,  the 
clouds  formed  are  usually  more  or  less  electrical ; and 
the  earth  below  them  being  brought  into  an  opposite 
state,  by  induction,  a discharge  takes  place  when  the 
clouds  approach  within  a certain  distance,  constituting 
lightning ; and  the  indulation  of  the  air,  produced  by 
the  discharge,  is  the  cause  of  thunder,  which  is  more 
or  less  intense,  and  of  longer  or  shorter  duration,  ac- 
cording to  the  quantity  of  air  acted  upon,  and  the  dis- 
tance of  the  place,  where  the  report  is  heard  from  the 
point  of  the  discharge.  It  may  not  be  uninteresting  to 
give  a further  illustration  of  this  idea.  Electrical 
effects  take  place  in  no  sensible  time.  It  has  been 
found  that  a discharge  through  a circuit  of  four  miles 
is  instantaneous  ; but  sound  moves  at  the  rate  of  about 
twelve  miles  a minute.  Now,  suppose  the  lightning  to 
pass  through  a space  of  some  miles,  the  explosion  will 
be  first  heard  from  the  point  of  the  air  agitated  nearest 
to  the  spectator:  it  will  gradually  come  from  the  more 
distant  parts  of  the  course  of  electricity,  and  last  of 
all,  will  be  heard  from  the  remote  extremity,  and  the 
different  degrees  of  the  agitation  of  the  air,  and  like- 
wise the  difference  of  the  distance,  will  account  for 
the  different  intensities  of  the  sound,  and  its  apparent 
reverberations  and  changes. 

In  a violent  thunder-storm,  when  the  sound  instantly 
succeeds  the  flash,  the  persons  who  witness  the  cir- 
cumstance are  in  some  danger ; when  the  interval  is  a 
quarter  of  a minute,  they  are  secure. 

A variety  of  electrical  apparatus  has  been  devised 
to  illustrate  the  operation  of  conductors  for  lightning, 
and  the  advantage  of  points  over  balls;  the  simplest 
consists  of  a model  of  a house  having  a conductor  with 
a break  in  it,  in  which  some  inflammable  matter 
should  be  placed ; the  lower  end  of  the  conductor 
should  be  communicated  with  the  exterior  of  a charged 
Leyden  phial,  the  knob  of  which,  brought  over  its 
upper  end,  will  then  represent  a thunder  cloud.  If  the 
conductor  be  pointed,  it  will  be  slowly  discharged,  if 
surrounded  by  a ball,  there  will  be  an  explosion,  and 
the  combustibles  probably  inflamed. 

The  coruscations  of  the  Aurora  borealis  are  also 
probably  electrical,  and  much  resemble  flashes  of  elec- 
tric light  traversing  rarefied  air.  The  water-spout  may 
be  referred  to  the  same  source,  and  is  probably  the  re- 
sult of  the  operation  of  a weakly  electrical  cloud,  at 
an  inconsiderable  elevation  above  the  sea,  brought 
into  an  opposite  electrical  state  : and  the  attraction  of 
the  lower  part  of  the  cloud,  for  the  surface  of  the 
water,  may  be  the  immediate  cause  of  this  extraordi- 
nary phenomenon. 

In  the  gymnotust  or  electric  eel,  and  in  the  torpedo , 


or  electric  ray , are  arrangements  given  to  those  re- 
markable animals  for  the  purpose  of  defence,  which 
certain  forms  of  the  Voltaic  apparatus  must  resemble  ; 
for  they  consist  of  many  alternations  of  different  sub- 
stances. These  electrical  organs  are  much  more 
abundantly  supplied  with  nerves  than  any  other  part 
of  the  animal,  and. the  too  frequent  use  of  them  is 
succeeded  by  debility  and  death. 

That  arrangements  of  different  organic  substances 
are  capable  of  producing  electrical  etfects,  has  been 
shown  by  various  experimentalists.  If  the  hind-legs  of 
a frog  be  placed  upon  a glass  plate,  and  the  crural  nerve 
dissected  out  of  one  made  to  communicate  with  ano- 
ther, it  will  be  found  on  making  occasional  contacts 
with  the  remaining  crural  nerve,  that  the  limbs  of  the 
animal  will  be  agitated  at  each  contact.  These  cir- 
cumstances have  induced  some  physiologists  to  sup- 
pose, that  electricity  may  be  concerned  in  some  of  the 
most  recondite  phenomena  of  vitality,  and  Dr.  Wol- 
laston, SirE.  Home,  and  myself,  have  made  some  ex- 
periments tending  to  confer  probability  on  this  idea. 

We  have  as  yet  no  plausible  hypothesis  concerning 
the  cause  of  electrical  phenomena,  though  the  subject 
has  engaged  the  attention  of  the  most  eminent  philo- 
sophers of  Europe.  They  have  been,  by  some,  referred 
to  the  presence  of  a peculiar  fluid  existing  in  all  mat- 
ter, and  exhibiting  itself  by  the  appearances  which 
have  been  described  wherever  its  equilibrium  is  dis- 
turbed, presenting  negative  and  positive  electricity, 
when  deficient,  and  when  redundant.  Others  have 
plausibly  argued  for  the  presence  of  two  fluids,  distinct 
from  each  other.  Others  have  considered  the  effects 
as  referrible  to  peculiar  exertions  of  the  attractive 
powers  of  matter,  and  have  regarded  the  existence  of 
any  distinct  fluid,  or  form  of  matter,  to  be  as  unneces- 
sary to  the  explanation  of  the  phenomena,  as  it  is  in 
the  question  concerning  the  cause  of  gravitation. 

When  the  flame  of  a candle  is  placed  between  a 
positive  and  negative  surface,  it  is  urged  towards  the 
latter ; a circumstance  which  has  been  explained  upon 
the  supposition  of  a current  of  electrical  matter  pass- 
ing from  the  positive  to  the  negative  pole;  indeed,  it 
has  been  considered  as  demonstrating  the  existence  of 
such  a current  of  matter.  But  if  the  flame  of  phos- 
phorus be  substituted  for  that  of  a candle,,  it  takes  an 
opposite  direction ; and  instead  of  being  attracted  to- 
wards the  negative,  it  bends  to  the  positive  surface.  It 
has  been  shown  that  inflammable  bodies  are  always 
attracted  by  negative  surfaces;  and  acid  bodies,  and 
those  in  which  the  supporters  of  combustion  prevail, 
are  attracted  by  positive  surfaces.  Hence  the  flame 
of  the  candle  throwing  oft'  carbon,  is  directed  to  the 
negative  pole,  while  that  of  phosphorus  forming  acid 
matter  goes  to  the  positive,  consistently  with  the  ordi- 
nary laws  of  electro-chemical  attraction. 

There  are  other  experiments  opposed  to  the  idea  that 
electricity  is  a material  substance.  If  we  discharge  a 
Leyden  phial  through  a quire  of  paper,  the  perforation 
is  equally  burred  upon  both  sides,  and  not  upon  the 
negative  side  only,  as  would  have  been  the  case  if 
any  material  body  had  gone  through  in  that  direction. 
The  power  seems  to  have  come  from  the  centre  of  the 
paper,  as  if  one  half  of  the  quire  had  been  attracted  by 
the  positive,  and  the  other  by  the  negative  surface. 

When  a pointed  metallic  wire  is  presented  towards 
the  conductor  of  the  electrical  machine,  in  a darkened 
room,  a star  of  light  is  observed  when  the  conductor  is 
positive,  but  a brush  of  light  when  it  is  negative  ; a 
circumstance  which  has  been  referred  to  the  reception 
of  the  electric  fluid  in  the  one  case,  and  its  escape  in 
the  other.  In  the  Voltaic  discharge  the  same  appear- 
ances are  evident  upon  the  charcoal  point;  rays  ap- 
pearing to  diverge  from  the  negative  conductor,  while 
from  the  positive  a spot  of  bright  light  is  perceptible. 
But  these  affections  of  light  can  scarcely  be  considered 
as  indicating  the  omission,  or  reception  of  any  specific 
form  of  matter. 

The  elficacy  of  electricity  in  the  cure  of  several  dis- 
eases has  been  supported  by  many  very  respectable 
authorities,  especially  in  paralytic  diseases.  It  con- 
siderably augments  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and 
excites  the  action  of  the  absorbents.” — Brands' s Che- 
mistry. 

ELECTRO-MAGNETISM.  The  name  given  to  a 
class  of  very  interesting  phenomena,  first  observed  by 
Oersted,  of  Copenhagen,  in  the  winter  of  1810-20,  and 
l which  have  since  received  great  illustration  from  the 

323 


£LE 


ELE 


labours  of  Ampere,  Arago,  Sir  H.  Davy,  Wollaston, 
Faraday,  de  la  Rive,  and  several  other  philosophers. 
The  following  is  a short  outline  of  the  fundamental 
facts. 

Let  the  opposite  poles  of  a voltaic  battery  be  con- 
nected by  a metallic  wire,  which  may  be  left  of  such 
length  as  to  suffer  its  being  bent  or  turned  in  various 
directions.  This  is  the  conjunctive  wire  of  Oersted. 
Let  us  suppose  that  the  rectilinear  portion  of  this  wire 
is  extended  horizontally  in  the  line  of  the  magnetic 
meridian.  If  a freely  suspended  compass-needle  be 
now  introduced,  with  its  centre  under  the  conjunctive 
wire,  the  needle  will  instantly  deviate  from  the  mag- 
netic meridian ; and  it  will  decline  towards  the  west, 
under  that  part  of  the  conjunctive  wire  which  is  near- 
est the  negative  electric  pole,  or  the  copper  end  of  the 
voltaic  apparatus.  The  amount  of  this  declination 
depends  on  the  strength  of  the  electricity,  and  the  sen- 
sibility of  the  needle.  Its  maximum  is  90°. 

We  may  change  the  direction  of  the  conjunctive 
wire,  out  of  the  magnetic  meridian,  towards  the  east 
or  the  west,  provided  it  remains  above  the  needle,  and 
parallel  to  its  plane,  without  any  change  in  the  above 
result,  except  that  of  its  amount.  Wires  of  platinum, 
gold,  silver,  brass,  and  iron,  may  be  equally  employed ; 
nor  does  the  effect  cease,  though  the  electric  circuit  be 
partially  formed  by  water.  The  effect  of  the  con- 
junctive wire  takes  place  across  plates  of  glass,  metal, 
wood,  water,  resin,  pottery,  and  stone. 

If  the  conjunctive  wire  be  disposed  horizontally  be- 
neath the  needle,  the  effects  are  of  the  same  nature  as 
those  which  occur  when  it  is  above  it ; but  they  operate 
in  an  inverse  direction  ; that  is  to  say,  the  pole  of  the 
needle  under  which  is  placed  the  portion  of  the  con- 
junctive wire  which  receives  the  negative  electricity 
of  the  apparatus,  declines  in  that  case  towards  the 
east. 

To  remember  these  results  more  readily,  we  may 
employ  the  following  proposition : The  pole , above 
which  the  negative  electricity  enters , declines  towards 
the  west  ; but  if  it  enters  beneath  it,  the  needle  de- 
clines towards  the  east. 

If  the  conjunctive  wire  (always  supposed  horizon- 
tal) is  slowly  turned  about,  so  as  to  form  a gradually 
increasing  angle  with  the  magnetic  meridian,  the  de- 
clination of  the  needle  increases,  if  the  movement  of 
the  wire  be  towards  the  line  of  position  of  the  dis- 
turbed needle ; it  diminishes,  on  the  contrary,  if  it  re- 
cede from  its  position. 

When  the  conjunctive  wire  is  stretched  alongside 
of  the  needle  in  the  same  horizontal  plane,  it  occasions 
no  declination  either  to  the  east  or  west ; but  it  causes 
it  merely  to  incline  in  a vertical  line,  so  that  the  pole 
adjoining  the  negative  influence  of  the  pile  on  the 
wire  dips  when  the  wire  is  on  its  west  side,  and  rises 
when  it  is  on  the  east. 

If  we  stretch  the  conjunctive  wire,  either  above  or 
beneath  the  needle,  in  a plane  perpendicular  to  the 
magnetic  meridian,  it  remains  at  rest,  unless  the  wire 
be  very  near  the  pole  of  the  needle  ; for,  in  this  case, 
it  rises  when  the  entrance  takes  place  by  the  west  part 
of  the  wire,  and  sinks  when  it  takes  place  by  the  east 
part. 

When  we  dispose  the  conjunctive  wire  in  a vertical 
line  opposite  the  pole  of  the  needle,  and  make  the 
upper  extremity  of  the  wire  receive  the  electricity  of 
the  negative  end  of  the  battery,  the  pole  of  the  needle 
moves  towards  the  east;  but  if  we  place  the  wire  op- 
posite a point  between  the  pole  and  the  middle  of  the 
needle,  it  moves  to  the  west.  The  phenomena  are 
presented  in  an  inverse  order,  when  the  upper  extre- 
mity of  the  conjunctive  wire  receives  the  electricity 
of  the  positive  side  of  the  apparatus. 

It  appears  from  the  preceding  facts,  says  Oersted, 
that  the  electric  conflict  (action)  is  not  enclosed  within 
the  conducting  wire,  but  that  it  has  a pretty  extensive 
sphere  of  activity  round  it.  We  may  also  conclude 
from  the  observations,  that  this  conflict  acts  by  revo- 
lution ; for  without  this  supposition  we  could  not  com- 
prehend how  the  same  portion  of  the  conjunctive 
wire,  which,  placed  beneath  the  magnetic  pole,  carries 
the  needle  towards  the  east,  when  it  is  placed  above 
this  pole,  should  carry  it  towards  the  west.  But  such 
is  the  nature  of  the  circular  action,  that  the  move- 
ments which  it  produces  take  place  in  directions  pre- 
cisely contrary  to  the  two  extremities  of  the  same  di- 
ameter. It  appears  also,  that  the  circular  movement, 


combined  with  a progressive  movement  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  length  of  the  conjunctive  wire,  ought  to 
form  a kind  of  action,  which  operates  spirally  around 
this  wire  as  an  axis.  For  further  information,  Fara- 
day’s able  and  original  paper,  in  the  Journal  of  Sci- 
ence, may  be  consulted  ; as  also  Ampere’s  several  in- 
genious memoirs  in  the  Annales  de  Chimie  et  de  Phy- 
sique. 

ELECTRO'DES.  (From  yXeKlpov,  amber.)  An 
epithet  for  intestinal  faices  which  shine  like  amber. 

ELECTROMETER.  (From  ijXticJpov,  and  ptrpov, 
a measure.)  See  Electricity. 

ELECTROSCOPE.  (From  t\tK]pov , and  cKontw, 
to  see.)  See  Electricity. 

ELE'CTRUM.  EXskJpov.  Amber. 

Electrum  minerale.  The  tincture  of  metals.  It 
is  made  of  tin  and  copper,  to  which  some  add  gold,  and 
double  its  quantity  of  martial  regulus  of  antimony 
melted  together;  from  these  there  results  a metallic 
mass,  to  which  some  chemists  have  given  the  name  of 
electrum  minerale.  This  mass  is  powdered  and  deto- 
nated with  nitre  and  charcoal  to  a kind  of  scoria  ; it 
is  powdered  again  while  hot,  and  then  digested  in 
spirit  of  wine,  whence  a tincture  is  obtained  of  a fine 
red  colour. 

ELECTUA'RIUM.  An  electuary.  The  London 
Pharmacopoeia  refers  those  articles  which  were  for- 
merly called  electuaries  to  confections.  See  Confectio. 

Electuarium  antimonii.  R.  Electuarii  sennre, 

§j  ; guaiaci  guinmi,  hydrargyri  cum  sulphure,  anti- 
monii ppii.  sing.  5ss  ; syrupi  simplicis  q.  s.  misce.  Of 
this  electuary,  from  a drachm  to  about  two  drachms  is 
given  twice  a day,  in  those  cutaneous  diseases  which 
go  under  the  general  name  of  scorbutic.  It  is  usually 
accompanied  with  the  decoctions  of  elm  bark  or  sar- 
saparilla. 

Electuarium  cassia.  See  Confectio  cassia. 

Electuarium  catechu.  Confectio  Japonica. 

Electuary  of  catechu,  commonly  called  Japonic  con- 
fection. Take  of  mimosa  catechu,  four  ounces ; kino, 
three  ounces;  cinnamon,  nutmeg,  each  one  ounce; 
opium  diffused  in  a sufficient  quantity  of  Spanish  white 
wine  one  drachm  and  a half ; syrup  of  red  roses  boiled 
to  the  consistence  of  honey,  two  pounds  and  a quarter. 
Reduce  the  solids  tc  powder,  and,  having  mixed  them 
with  the  opium  and  syrup,  make  them  into  an  electu- 
ary. A very  useful  astringent,  and  perhaps  the  most 
efficacious  way  of  giving  the  catechu  to  advantage. 
Ten  scruples  of  this  electuary  contain  one  grain  of 
opium. 

Electuarium  cinchona  cum  natro.  R.  natri 
ppti.  3 ij. ; pulveris  cinchonre  unc. : mucilaginis  gummi 
arabici  q.  s.  misce.  In  this  composition,  mucilage  is 
preferred  to  syrup  on  account  of  its  covering  the  taste 
of  the  bark  mucii  more  advantageously.  It  should, 
for  this  purpose,  however,  be  made  thin,  otherwise  it 
will  increase  the  bulk  of  the  electuary  too  much. 

This  remedy  will  be  found  an  excellent  substitute 
for  the  burnt  sponge,  the  powers  of  which,  as  a remedy 
in  scrofula,  are  known  solely  to  dejiend  on  the  pro- 
portion of  natron  contained  in  it.  The  dose  is  two 
drachms,  twice  or  thrice  a day. 

Electuarium  opiatum.  See  Confectio  opii. 

Eleli'sphacos.  (From  eXcXt^o),  to  distort,  and 
ff^a/coj,  sage:  so  named  from  the  spiral  coiling  of  its 
leaves  and  branches.)  A species  of  sage. 

ELEMENT.  Radical.  First  principles.  A sub- 
stance which  can  no  further  be  divided  or  decomposed 
by  chemical  analysis. 

E'LEMI.  (It  is  said  this  is  the  Ethiopian  name.) 
Gum  elemi.  The  parent  plant  of  this  resin  is  sup- 
posed to  be  an  amyris.  See  Amyris  elemifera. 

Elen'gi.  A tree  of  Malabar,  which  is  said  to  pos- 
sess cordial  and  carminative  properties. 

ELEOCHRY'SUM.  (From  yhos,  the  sun,  and 
Xpvaos,  gold : so  called  from  its  gold-like,  or  shining 
yellow  appearance.)  Goldilocks.  See  Gnaphalium 
stcechas. 

ELEOSELI'NUM  (From  tXoj,  a lake,  and  oc\r 
vov , parsley.)  See  Apium. 

ELEPHA'NTIA.  (From  tXe0as,  an 'elephant  : so 
called  from  the  great  enlargement  of  the  body  in  this 
disorder.)  See  Elephantiasis. 

Elephantia  arabum.  In  Dr.  Cullen’s  Nosology  it 
is  synonymous  with  elephantiasis.  The  terra  is,  how- 
ever, occasionally  confined  to  this  disease  when  it 
affects  the  feet. 


ELE 


ELM 


ELEPHANTI'ASIS.  (From  eXcQas,  an  elephant: 
so  named  from  the  legs  of  people  atfected  with  this 
disorder  growing  scaly,  rough,  and  wonderfully  large, 
at  an  advanced  period,  like  the  legs  of  an  elephant.) 
Elephas ; Elephantia;  Lazari  morbus  vel  malum; 
Phaniceus  morbus.  A disease  that  attacks  the  whole 
body,  but  mostly  affects  the  feet,  which  appear  some- 
what like  those  of  the  elephant.  It  is  known  by  the 
skin  being  tnick,  rough,  wrinkly,  unctuous,  and  void 
of  hair,  and  mostly  without  the  sense  of  feeling.  It  is 
said  to  be  contagious.  Cullen  makes  it  a genus  of  dis- 
ease in  the  c!ass~ Cachexia,  and  order  Jmpetigines. 

Elephantiasis  has  generally  been  supposed  to  arise 
in  consequence  of  some  slight  attack  of  fever,  on  the 
cessation  of  which  the  morbid  matter  falls  on  the  leg, 
and  occasions  a distention  and  tumefaction  of  the 
limb,  which  is  afterward  overspread  with  uneven 
lumps,  and  deep  fissures.  By  some  authors  it  has  been 
considered  as  a species  of  leprosy  ; but  it  often  subsists 
for  many  years  without  being  accompanied  with  any 
of  the  symptoms  which  characterize  that  disease. 

It  sometimes  comeson  gradually,  without  much  pre- 
vious indisposition  ; but  more  generally,  the  person  is 
seized  with  a coldness  and  shivering,  pains  in  the 
head,  back,  and  loins,  and  some  degree  of  nausea.  A 
slight  fever  then  ensues,  and  a severe  pain  is  felt  in 
one  of  the  inguinal  glands,  which,  after  a short  time, 
becomes  hard,  swelled,  and  ihflamed.  No  suppura- 
tion, however,  ensues ; but  a red  streak  may  be  ob- 
served running  down  the  thigh  from  the  swelled  gland 
to  the  leg.  As  the  inflammation  increases  in  all  the 
parts,  the  fever  gradually  abates;  and,  perhaps,  after 
two  or  three  days’  continuance,  goes  off.  It,  however, 
returns  again  at  uncertain  periods,  leaving  the  leg 
greatly  swelled  with  varicose  turgid  veins,  the  skin 
rough  and  rugged,  and  a thickened  membrana  cellu- 
losa.  Scales  appear  also  on  the  surface,  which  do  not 
fall  off,  but  are  enlarged  by  the  increasing  thickness  of 
the  membranes ; uneven  lumps,  with  deep  fissures,  are 
formed,  and  the  leg  and  foot  become  at  last  of  an 
enormous  size. 

A person  may  labour  under  this  disease  many  years 
without  finding  much  alteration  in  the  general  health, 
except  during  the  continuance  of  the  attacks ; and 
perhaps  the  chief  inconvenience  he  will  experience  is 
the  enormous  bulky  leg  which  he  drags  about  with 
him.  The  incumbrance  has,  indeed,  induced  many 
who  have  laboured  under  this  disease  to  submit  to  an 
amputation ; but  the  operation  seldom  proves  a radi- 
cal cure,  as  the  other  leg  frequently  becomes  affected. 

Hilary  observes,  that  he  never  saw  both  legs  swelled 
at  the  same  time.  Instances  where  they  have  alike 
acquired  a frightful  and  prodigious  size,  have,  how- 
ever, frequently  fallen  under  the  observation  of  other 
physicians. 

Elepiianti'num  emplastrum.  A plaster  described 
by  Oribasius.  Celsus  describes  one  of  the  same  name, 
but  very  different  in  qualities. 

E'LEPHAS.  (E \e.(f>as,  the  elephant.) 

1.  The  name  of  an  animal. 

2.  The  name  of  a disease  of  the  skin.  See  Ele- 
phantiasis. 

3.  Aqua  fortis  was  so  called  in  some  old  chemical 
books. 

Ele'ttari  primum.  The  true  amomum.  See 
Elettaria  cardamomum.. 

ELETTA'RIA.  (From  elettari.)  The  name  of  a 
new  genus  of  plants  formed  by  Dr.  Maton,  to  which 
the  less  card  i mom  is  referred.  Class,  Monandria; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Elettaria  cardamomum.  Cardamomum  minus. 
Less  or  officinal  cardamom.  Amomum  repens ; or  le 
cardamome  de  la  c6te  de  Malabar , of  Sonnerat.  Elet- 
taria cardamomum , of  Maton,  in  Act.  Soc.  Lin.  The 
seeds  of  this  plant  are  imported  in  their  capsules  or 
husks,  by  which  they  are  preserved,  for  they  soon  lose 
a part  of  their  flavour  when  freed  from  this  covering. 
On  being  chewed,  they  impart  a glowing  aromatic 
warmth,  and  grateful  pungency;  they  are  supposed 
gently  to  stimulate  the  stomach,  and  prove  cordial, 
carminative,  and  antispasmodic,  but  without  that  irri- 
tation and  heat  which  many  of  the  other  spicy  aroma- 
tics are  apt  to  produce.  Simple  and  compound  spi- 
rituous tinctures  are  prepared  from  them,  and  they  are 
ordered  as  a spicy  ingredient  in  many  of  the  officinal 
compositions. 

ELEUTHE'RIA.  See  Croton  cascarilla. 


Eleva'tio.  (From  elevo,  to  lift  up.)  Elevation. 
Sublimation. 

ELEVA'TOR.  (From  elevo,  to  lift  up.) 

1.  A muscle  is  so  called,  the  office  of  which  is  to  lift 
up  the  part  to  which  it  is  attached. 

2.  A chirurgical  instrument,  elevatorium,  with 
which  surgeons  raise  any  depressed  portion  of  bone, 
but  chiefly  those  of  the  cranium. 

Elevator  labii  inferioris  proprius.  See  Le- 
vator labii  inferioris. 

Elevator  labii  superioris  proprius.  See  Le- 
vator labii  sup'erloris  alaque  nasi. 

Elevator  labiorum.  See  Levator  anguli  oris . 

Elevator  nasi  alarum.  See  Levator  labii  supe- 
rioris alceque  nasi. 

Elevator  oculi.  See  Rectus  superior  oculi. 

Elevator  palpebr.®  superioris.  See  Levator 
palpebrce  superioris. 

Elevator  scapulie.  See  Levator  scapula. 

ELEVATO'RIUM.  (From  elevo,  to  lift  up.)  An 
instrument  to  raise  a depression  in  the  skull. 

Eli'banum.  See  Juniperus  lycia. 

ELICHRY'SUM.  (From  yXios,  the  sun,  and  xpv 
(rof,  gold  ; so  called  from  its  gold-like,  or  shining  yel- 
low appearance.)  See  Gnaphalium  stachas. 

Eli'drion.  Mastich.  A mixture  of  brass. 

ELI'GMA.  A linctus. 

ELIOSELI'NUM.  See  Eleoselinum. 

ELIPTICUS.  Eliptic.  Applied  to  leaves  and  re- 
ceptacles, which  are  of  a somewhat  oval  form,  but 
broader  at  each  end ; as  in  the  leaf  of  the  Convalla- 
ria  majalis,  and  the  receptacle  of  the  Dorstenia 
dralccnia. 

ELIQ.UATION.  An  operation,  by  means  of  which 
a more  fusible  substance  is  separated  from  another, 
which  is  less  fusible.  It  consists  in  the  application  of 
a degree  of  heat,  sufficient  to  fuse  the  former,  but  not 
the  latter. 

[“  If  lead  be  heated  so  as  to  boil  and  smoke,  it  soon 
dissolves  pieces  of  copper  thrown  into  it;  the  mixture 
when  cold  is  brittle.  The  union  of  these  two  metals 
is  remarkably  slight ; for  upon  exposing  the  mass  to  a 
heat  no  greater  than  that  in  which  lead  melts,  the  lead 
almost  entirely  runs  off  by  itself.  This  process  is 
called  eliquation.  The  coarser  sorts  of  lead,  which 
owe  their  brittleness  and  granulated  texture  to  an  ad- 
mixture of  copper,  throw  it  up  to  the  surface  on  being 
melted  by  a small  heat.” — Web.  Man.  of  Cliem.  A.] 

ELITHROJ'DES.  The  vaginal  coat  of  the  testicle 
See  Elythroides  and  Testis. 

Elixa'tio.  (From  elixo,  to  boil.)  The  act  of 
seething  or  boiling. 

ELI'XIR.  (From  elekser,  an  Arabic  word,  signify- 
ing quintessence.)  A term  formerly  applied  to  many 
preparations  similar  to  compound  tinctures.  It  is  now 
very  little  employed. 

Elixir  of  health.  Elixir  salutis.  A term  formerly 
applied  to  tincture  of  senna. 

Elixir  paregoricum.  See  Tinctura  camphora 
composita. 

Elixir  proprietatis.  A preparation  like  the 
compound  tincture  of  aloes. 

Elixir  sacrum.  A tincture  of  rhubarb  and  aloes. 
* Elixir  salutis.  See  Tinctura  senna. 

Elixir  stomachicum.  See  Tinctura  gentiana 
composita. 

Elixiva'tio.  (From  elixo , to  boil,  or  from  lixivium , 
lye.)  The  extraction  of  a fixed  salt  from  vegetables, 
by  an  affusion  of  water.  See  Lixiviation 

ELLAGIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  ellagicum ; so  named 
by  Braconnot,  by  reversing  the  word  guile.)  The  de- 
posite  which  forms  in  infusion  of  nut-galls,  left  to 
itself,  is  not  composed  solely  of  gallic  acid  and  a mat- 
ter which  colours  it.  It  contains,  besides,  a little  gal- 
late  and  sulphate  of  lime,  and  a new  acid,  which  was 
pointed  out  for  the  first  time  by  Chevreuil,  in  1815,  an 
acid  on  which  Braconnot  made  observations,  in  1818, 
and  which  he  proposed  to  call  acid  cllagic,  from  the 
word  galle  reversed.  Probably  this  acid  does  not 
exist  ready  formed  in  nut-galls.  It  is  insoluble ; and, 
carrying  down  with  it  the  greater  part  of  the  gallic 
acid,  forms  the  yellowish  crystalline  deposite.  But 
boiling  water  removes  the  gallic  acid  from  the  eliagic; 
whence  the  means  of  separating  them  from  one  ano- 
ther. Ann.  de  Chim.  et  de  Phys.  ix.  181. 

Elleborum.  See  Helieborus  and  Veratrum. 

ELM.  See  Ulmus. 

325 


EMB 


EME 


Elm-leaved  sumach.  See  Rhus  coriaria. 

ELMI'NTHES.  (From  uXeu>,  to  involve,  from  its 
contortions.)  A worm. 

ELO'DES.  (From  eX os,  a swamp.)  A term  given 
to  a sweating  fever,  from  its  great  moisture. 

Elonga'tio.  (From  elongo,  to  lengthen  out.)  An 
imperfect  luxation,  where  the  ligament  is  only  length- 
ened. and  tiie  bone  not  put  out  of  its  socket. 

ELOY,  Nicholas  Francis  Joseph,  was  born  at 
Mons,  in  1714,  and  died  in  1788,  having  practised  as  a 
physician  with  great  ability  and  humanity.  He  had 
the  honour  of  attending  Prince  Charles  of  Lorraine. 
He  was  a man  of  extensive  learning,  and,  notwith- 
standing his  professional  avocations,  was  author  of 
several  publications.  The  principal  of  these,  an  His- 
torical Medical  Dictionary,  was  originally  in  two  octavo 
volumes;  but  in  1788,  it  appeared  greatly  improved 
and  enlarged  in  four  volumes  quarto.  An  Introduction 
to  Midwifery ; a Memoir  on  Dysentery;  Reflections  on 
the  Use  of  Tea ; and  a Medico-Political  Tract  on  Cof- 
fee ; were  likewise  written  by  this  author.  The  latter 
work  procured  him  the  reward  of  a superb  snuff-box 
from  the  estates  of  Hainault,  inscribed  “Ex  dono 

ELUTRIATION.  (Elutriatio ; from  elutrio , to 
cleanse.)  Washing.  It  is  the  pouring  a liquor  out  of 
one  vessel  into  another,  in  order  to  separate  the  lighter 
earthy  parts,  which  are  carried  away  while  the  heavier 
metallic  parts  subside  to  the  bottom. 

ELU' VIES.  (From  eluo , to  wash  out.)  The  efflu- 
vium from  a swampy  place.  Also  the  humour  dis- 
charged in  fluor  albus. 

Eluxa'tio.  (From  eluxo,  to  put  out  of  joint.)  A 
luxation,  or  dislocation. 

EL  YMAGRO  STIS.  (From  cXv/ios,  the  herb  panic, 
and  aypo^is,  wild.)  Wild  panic. 

ELY'MUS.  E Xv/ios-  The  herb  panie,  or  panicum 
of  Dioscorides,  but  now  the  name  of  a new  genus  of 
grasses,  in  the  Linneean  system. 

ELYOT,  Sir  Thomas,  was  born  of  a good  family 
in  Suffolk,  about  the  beginning  of  the  sixteenth  cen- 
tury. After  studying  afiOxford,  and  improving  himself 
by  travelling,  he  was  introduced  at  court ; and  Henry 
VIII.  conferred  upon  him  the  honour  of  knighthood, 
and  employed  him  in  several  embassies.  He  distin- 
guished himself  in  various  branches  of  learning,  as 
well  as  by  patronising  learned  men  ; and  was  generally 
beloved  by  his  contemporaries  for  his  virtues  and  ac- 
complishments. He  died  in  1546,  and  was  buried  in 
Cambridgeshire,  of  which  he  had  been  sheriff.  Among 
other  studies,  he  was  partial  to  medicine,  and  made 
himself  master  of  the  ancient  authors  on  that  subject, 
though  he  never  exercised  the  profession.  He  pub- 
lished a work  about  the  year  1541,  called  “ The  Castell 
of  Health,”  which  was  much  admired,  even  by  some 
of  the  faculty : in  this  he  is  a strong  advocate  for  tem- 
perance, especially  in  sexual  pleasures.  He  also  no- 
tices, that  catarrhs  were  much  more  common  than 
they  had  been  forty  years  before;  which  he  ascribes 
chiefly  to  free  living,  and  keeping  the  head  too  much 
covered.  He  also  wrote  and  translated  several  other 
works,  but  not  on  medical  subjects. 

ELYTROCE'LE.  (From  eXurpov,  the  vagina,  and 
kijXtj,  a tumour.)  A herniain  the  vagina.  Bee  Hernia 
vaginalis. 

ELYTROI'DES.  {Elytroides ; from  eXvrpov , a 
sheath,  and  eidos,  form.)  Like  a sheath.  The  tunica 
vaginalis  is  so  called  by  some  writers,  because  it  in- 
cludes the  testis  like  a sheath 

ELY  TRON.  (From  eAuw,  to  involve.)  The  va- 
gina. A sheath.  The  membranes  which  involve  the 
spinal  marrow  are  called  eXvjpa. 

EMACIATION.  See  Atrophia  and  Marasmus. 

Emargina'tio.  (From  emargino , to  cleanse  the 
edges.)  The  cleansing  of  the  edges  of  wounds  from 
scurf  and  filth. 

EMARGINATUS.  Emarginate,  nicked,  that  is, 
having  a small  acute  notch  at  the  summit ; as  the  leaf 
of  the  bladder  senna,  Colutea  arborescens , the  petals 
of  the  Allium  roseum , and  Agrostema  Jlos  jo  vis. 

EMASCULA'TUS.  (From  emasculo,  to  render  im- 
potent.) Having  the  testicles  in  the  belly,  and  not 
fallen  into  the  scrotum. 

Emba'mma.  (From  epBanju),  to  emerge  in.)  A 
medicated  pickle  to  dip  the  food  in. 

E'mbole.  (From  ep6aX Aw,  to  put  in.)  The  setting 
of  a dislocated  bone. 

326 


E'MBOLUM.  (From  spBaXXu,  to  cast  out'  so 
named  because  it  ejects  the  semen.)  The  penis. 

Embre'gma.  (From  to  make  wet.)  A 

fluid  application  to  any  pail  of  the  body. 

EMBROCA'TIO.  (From  £/i6pe%w,  to  moisten  or 
soak  in.)  Embrochc.  An  embrocation.  A fluid  ap- 
plication to  rub  any  part  of  the  body  with.  Many  use 
the  term,  however,  as  synonymous  w’ith  liniment. 
The  following  embrocations  are  in  general  use.- 

Embrocatio  aluminis.  ft-  Aluminis  3ij.  Aceti, 
spiritus  vinosi  tenuloris,  sing.  Ibss.  For  chilblains  and 
diseased  joints. 

Embrocatio  ammonite.  ft.  Embrocationis  ara- 
monite  acetatis  5 *j-  Aquae  ammonite  purae  3 ij.  For 
sprains  and  bruises. 

Embrocatio  ammonije  acetatis.  ft.  Aquae  am- 
monite acetatae.  Solutionis  saponis  sing.  |j  M.  For 
bruises  with  inflammation. 

Embrocatio  ammonia  acetatis  camphorata.  R. 
Solutionis  saponis  cum  camphora,  aquae  arnmonis 
acetatae  sing.  5j.  Aquae  ammonia;  purte  |ss.  For 
sprains  and  bruises.  It  is  also  frequently  applied  to 
disperse  chilblains  which  have  not  suppurated.  It  is 
said  to  be  the  same  as  Steer’s  opodeldoc. 

Embrocatio  cantharidis  cum  camphora  ft. 
Tinct.  cantharidis.  Spiritus  camphorae  sing.  3 j M. 
This  may  be  used  in  any  case  in  which  the  object  is 
to  stimulate  the  skin.  The  absorption  of  cantharides, 
however,  may  bring  on  a stranguary. 

E'mbroche.  See  Embrocatio. 

E'MBRYO.  (From  cpgpuw,  to  bud  forth.)  1.  The 
germ  of  a plant;  called  by  Linnaeus  the  corculum. 
See  Corculum  and  Cotyledon. 

2.  The  fait  is  in  utero  is  so  called  before  the  fifth 
month  of  pregnancy,  because  its  growth  resembles  that 
of  the  budding  of  a plant. 

Embryothla'stes.  (From  epBpvov,  the  fcetus,  and 
OXuu,  to  break.)  Embryorectes.  A crotchet  or  instru- 
ment for  breaking  the  bones  of  a dead  fcetus  to  pro- 
mote its  delivery. 

EMBRYO'TOMY.  {Embryotomia ; from  epfipvov; 
a foetus,  and  repvo),  to  cut.)  The  separating  of  any 
part  of  the  fcetus  while  in  utero , to  extract  it. 

Embryu'lcus.  (From  epSpvou,  a fcetus,  and  cXiao, 
to  draw.;  A blunt  hook  or  forceps,  for  drawing  the 
child  from  the  womb. 

EMERALD.  A beautiful  genus  of  minerals,  which 
contains  two  species. 

1.  The  prismatic  emerald , Euclase  of  Hauy.  This 
is  of  a green  and  sky-blue  colour,  and  is  found  in  Peru 
and  Brazil. 

2.  Rhomboidal  emerald , of  which  there  are  two  sub- 
species, the  precious  emerald  and  the  beryl.  The  first 
is  well  known  by  its  emerald  green  colour.  The  most 
beautiful  emeralds  come  from  Peru.  As  a gem,  it  is 
valued  next  to  ruby. 

[u  This  mineral  is  by  no  means  uncommon  in  the 
United  States.  It  occurs  in  the  primitive  range,  and 
particularly  in  granite,  in  which  it  is  imbedded.  In 
the  State  of  Maine,  it  has  been  found  remarkably 
clear  and  transparent,  and  in  every  respect  resembling 
the  'Siberian Beryl , particularly  that  discovered  at  Tops- 
ham  by  Professor  Cleveland,  of  Brunswick  College 
The  crystals  are  well  defined  hexaa-dral  prisms,  and  are 
often  imbedded  in  the  smoky  quartz  which  abound  in 
the  large-grained  granite.  In  some  instances,  in  point 
of  colour,  it  equals  the  finest  Peruvian  emerald. 

“ At  Chesterfield,  in  Massachusetts,  it  occurs  in  great 
abundance.  Dr.  J.  F.  Waterhouse,  who  has  carefully 
examined  this  locality,  informs  us  that  crystals,  in 
hexangular  prisms,  from  an  ounce  and  under  to  61b. 
in  weigut,  are  found  singly  disseminated  through  the 
granite.  They  are  of  various  dimensions,  from  a small 
size  to  that  of  a foot  in  diameter;  their  colour  light 
green.  The  Chesterfield  emerald  greatly  resembles 
that  lately  discovered  in  France.  If  the  new  earth 
glucine  should  be  required  for  the  arts  or  manufac- 
tures, this  emerald  would  furnish  it  in  abundance;  as 
such  is  the  quantity  occurring  at  this  place,  that  Dr. 
Waterhouse  obtained  upwards  of  '01b.  within  a very 
small  space.  The  emerald  occurs  in  other  parts  of 
Massachusetts.  To  the  politeness  of  Dr.  David  Hunt, 
we  are  indebted  for  several  specimens  found  by  that 
indefatigable  mineralogist,  in  the  vicinity  of  North- 
ampton and  Goshen. 

“ At  Haddam,  in  Connecticut,  this  mineral  occurs  in 
abundance ; the  crystals  are  from  a very  small  size  to 


EME 


EMP 


several  inches  in  length;  they  are  generally  of  a light 
yellowish-green,  and  sometimes  of  an  amber  colour, 
resembling  topaz.  Col.  Gibbs  has  in  his  possession 
a crystal  of  a deep  green  an  inch  in  diameter,  and 
several  in  length,  it  bears  a strong  resemblance  to  the 
Peruvian  emerald.  Mr.  Mather,  a young  mineralogist 
of  great  promise,  discovered  one  seven  inches  in  lengt  h, 
by  nine  inches  in  the  diagonal  diameter:  it  is  in  the 
cabinet  of  Professor  Silliman. 

“New-York  affords  but  few  instances  of  the  pro- 
duction of  emerald.  It  now  and  then,  though  rarely, 
occurs  in  the  granite  veins  which  traverse  the  gneiss 
on  the  island,  about  four  miles  from  the  city. 

“ The  emerald  is  found  in  the  vicinity  of  Philadelphia, 
and  at  Chester.  These  arc  the  principal  localities  of 
this  mineral  in  the  United  States,  which  have  as  yet 
come  to  our  knowledge.  As  others  occur,  we  shall 
with  pleasure  notice  them.” — Bruce's  Min.  Journal. 
A-] 

EMERSUS.  (From  emcrgo , to  rise  up  or  appear 
out  of  the  water.)  Raised  above  the  water,  as  the 
upper  leaves  accompanying  the  flowers  of  the  Merio- 
phyllurn  verticillatum,  while  its  lower  ones  are  de- 
nier s a. 

E'merus.  Scorpion  senna.  A laxative. 

EMERY.  A sub-species  of  rhomboidal  corundum, 
found  in  quantities  in  the  isle  of  Naxor,  and  at  Smyr- 
na. Its  fine  powder,  which  is  used  for  polishing  hard 
minerals  and  metals,  is  made  by  trituration  and  elu- 
triation. 

EMESIA.  (From  eyew,  to  vomit.)  Emesma; 
Emesis.  The  act  of  vomiting.  Medicines  which 
cause  vomiting. 

EME'TIC.  (jBto£«*cms;  from  £ntw,  to  vomit.)  That 
which  is  capable  of  exciting  vomiting,  independently 
of  any  effect  arising  from  the  mere  quantity  of  matter 
introduced  into  the  stomach,  or  of  any  nauseous  taste 
or  flavour- 

The  susceptibility  of  vomiting  is  very  different  in 
different  individuals,  and  is  often  considerably  varied 
by  disease. 

Emetics  are  employed  in  many  diseases. 

When  any  morbid  affection  depends  upon,  or  is  con- 
nected with,  over-distention  of  the  stomach,  or  the 
presence  of  acrid,  indigestible  matters,  vomiting  gives 
speedy  relief.  Hence  its  utility  in  impaired  appetite, 
acidity  in  the  stomach,  in  intoxication,  aud  where  poi- 
sons have  been  swallowed. 

From  the  pressure  of  the  abdominal  viscera  in  vo- 
miting, emetics  have  been  considered  as  serviceable  in 
jaundice,  arising  from  biliary  calculi  obstructing  the 
ducts. 

The  expectorant  power  of  emetics,  and  their  utility 
in  catarrh  and  phthisis,  have  been  ascribed  to  a similar 
pressure  extended  to  the  thoracic  viscera. 

In  the  different  varieties  of  febrile  affections,  much 
advantage  is  derived  from  exciting  vomiting,  especially 
in  the  very  commencement  of  the  disease.  In  high 
inflammatory  fever  it  is  considered  as  dangerous,  and 
in  the  advanced  stage  of  typhus  it  is  prejudicial. 

Emetics  given  in  such  doses,  as  only  to  excite 
nausea,  have  been  found  useful  in  restraining  hemor- 
rhage. 

Different  speciesof  dropsy  have  been  cured  by  vomit- 
ing, from  its  having  excited  absorption.  To  the  same 
effect,  perhaps,  is  owing  the  dispersion  of  swelled  tes- 
ticle, bubo,  and  other  swellings,  which  has  occasion- 
ally resulted  from  this  operation. 

The  operation  of  vomiting  .is  dangerous,  or  hurtful, 
in  the  following  cases : where  there  is  determination 
of  the  blood  to  the  head,  especially  in  plethoric  ha- 
bits; in  visceral  inflammation ; in  the  advanced  stage 
of  pregnancy;  in  hernia  and  prolapsus  uteri;  and 
wherever  there  exists  extreme  general  debility.  The 
frequent  use  of  emetics  weakens  the  tone  of  the  sto- 
mach. An  emetic  should  always  be  administered  in 
the  fluid  form.  Its  operation  may  be  promoted  by 
drinking  any  tepid  diluent,  or  bitter  infusion. 

The  individual  emetics  may  be  arranged  under  two 
heads,  those  derived  from  the  vegetable,  and  those 
from  the  mineral  kingdom.  From  the  vegetable  king- 
dom are  numbered  ipecacuanha,  scilla  maritima,  an- 
themis  nobilis,  sinapis  alba,  asarum  Europeum,  nico- 
tiana  tabacuin.  From  the  mineral  kingdom,  antimony, 
the  sulphates  of  zinc  and  copper,  and  the  subacetate 
of  copper.  To  these  may  be  added  ammonia  and  its 
bydro-sulphuret. 


EMETIN.  Emetine.  Digest  ipecacuan  root,  first 
in  ether  and  then  in  alkohol.  Evaporate  the  alkoholic 
infusion  to  dryness,  redissolve  in  water,  and  drop  in’ 
acetate  of  lead.  Wash  the  precipitate,  and  then  dif- 
fusing it  in  water,  decompose  by  a current  of  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen  gas.  Sulphuret  of  lead  falls  to  the 
bottom,  and  the  einetin  remains  in  solution.  By  eva- 
porating the  water,  this  substance  is  obtained  pure. 

Emetin  forms  transparent  brownish-red  scales.  It 
has  no  smell,  but  a bitter  acrid  taste.  At  a heat  some- 
what above  that  of  boiling  water,  it  is  resolved  into 
carbonic  acid,  oil,  and  vinegar.  It  affords  no  ammo- 
nia. It  is  soluble  both  in  water  and  alkohol,  but  not 
in  aether  ; and  uncrystallizable.  It  is  precipitated  by 
protonitrate  of  mercury  and  corrosive  sublimate,  but 
not  by  tartar  emetic.  Half  a grain  of  emetin  acts  as 
a powerful  emetic,  followed  by  sleep  ; six  grains  vomit 
violently,  and  produce  stupor  and  death.  The  lungs 
and  intestines  are  inflamed.” — Pelletier  and  Ma- 
gendie. 

Emetine.  See  Emetin. 

EMETOCATHA'RTIGUS.  (From  epee),  to  vomit, 
and  KaOaipu),  to  purge.)  Purging  both  by  vomit  and 
stool. 

EMINE'NTLE  QUADRIGEMUNLE.  See  Tuber- 
cula  quadrigemina. 

ENMENAGOGUE.  {Emmcnagovus ; from  epiiyvia, 
the  menses,  and  aye),  to  move.)  Whatever  possesses 
the  power  of  promoting  that  monthly  discharge  by  the 
uterus,  which,  from  a law  of  the  animal  economy, 
should  take  place  in  certain  conditions  of  the  female 
system.  The  articles  belonging  to  this  class  may  be 
referred  to  four  ordres : — 

1.  Stimulating  emmenagogues , as  hydrargyrine  and 
antimonial preparations,  which  are  principally  adapted 
for  the  young,  and  those  with  peculiar  insensibility  of 
the  uterus. 

2.  Irritating  emmenagogues , as  aloes,  savine,  and 
Spanish  flies : these  are  to  be  preferred  in  torpid  and 
chlorotic  habits. 

3.  Tonic  emmenagogues,  as  ferruginous  prepara- 
tions, cold  bath , and  exercise,  which  are  advanta- 
geously selected  for  the  lax  and  phlegmatic. 

4.  Antispasmodic  emmenagogues,  as  asafeetida,  cas- 
tor, and  pediluvia  : the  constitutions  to  which  these 
are  more  especially  suited  are  the  delicate,  the  weak, 
and  the  irritable. 

EMME'NIA.  (From  ev,  in,  and  pyv,  a month.) 
The  menstrual  flux. 

EMO  LLIENT.  ( Emolliens ; from  emollio,  to  soft- 
en.) Possessing  the  power  of  relaxing  the  living  and 
animal  fibre,  without  producing  that  effect  from  any 
mechanical  action.  The  different  articles  belonging 
to  this  class  of  medicines  may  be  comprehended  under 
the  following  orders : — 

1.  Humect  ant  emollients,  as  warm  water,  and  tepid 
vapours,  which  are  fitted  for  the  robust  and  those  in 
the  prime  of  life. 

2.  Relaxing  emollients,  as  altluea,  malva,  &c.  These 
may  be  employed  in  all  constitutions,  while  at  the 
same  time  they  do  not  claim  a preference  to  others 
from  any  particular  habit  of  body. 

3.  Lubricating  emollients , as  bland  oils,  fat,  and 
lard.  The  same  observation  will  hold  of  this  order  as 
was  made  of  the  last  mentioned. 

4.  Atonic  emollients,  as  opium  and  pediluvia.  These 
are  applicable  to  any  constitution,  but  are  to  be  pre- 
ferred in  habits  where  the  effects  of  this  class  are  re- 
quired over  the  system  in  general. 

EMPATHEMA.  CEpnadyg ; from  naOqpa,  passio, 
affectio.)  Ungovernable  passion.  A genus  of  disease 
in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Neurotica;  Order, 
Phrenica. 

It  has  three  species,  Empatliema  entonicum,  atoni- 
cum , insane,  and  innumerable  varieties. 

Empei'ria.  (From  ev,  and  vseipeo,  to  endeavour.) 
Professional  experience. 

Emphero'menus.  (From  epepepo),  to  bear.)  Urine, 
or  other  substances  which  have  a sediment. 

EMPHLYSIS.  (From  £//,  in,  and  cpXvais,  a vesicu-: 
lar  tumour  or  eruption.)  The  name  of  a genus, 
ichorous  exanthem , of  Good’s  Nosology,  which  includes 
six  species:  Emphlysis  miliaria  ; Aphtha;  Vaccinia; 
Varicella;  Pemphigus  ; Erysipelas. 

Emphra'ctica.  (From  epippar'Jw,  to  obstruct.) 
Medicines  which,  applied  to  the  skin,  shut  up  the 


EMP 


EMP 


EMPHYMA.  This  term,  applied  by  Good  to  a 
genus  of  disease,  Class,  Eccritica ; Order,  Mesotica, 
of  his  arrangement,  imports  (in  contradiction  to  Phy- 
ma , which,  in  his  system,  is  limited  to  cutaneous  tu- 
mours, accompanied  with  inflammation,)  a tumour 
originating  below  the  integuments,  and  unaccompanied 
with  inflammation,  at  least  in  its  commencement,  ft 
embraces  three  species,  viz.  Eniphyma  sarcoma ; En- 
cystis  ; Exostosis. 

EMPHYSE'MA.  ( Emphysema , alis,  n. ; from 

ep&voau),  to  inflate.)  See  Pneumatosis. 

EMPIRIC.  ( Empiricus . Eyneipucos;  from  ev,  in, 
and  sjapa,  experience.)  One  who  practises  the  heal- 
ing art  upon  experience,  and  not  theory.  This  is  the 
true  meaning  of  the  word  empiric ; but  it  is  now  ap- 
plied, in  a very  opposite  sense,  to  those  who  deviate 
from  the  line  of  conduct  pursued  by  scientific  and  re- 
gular practitioners,  and  vend  nostrums,  or  sound  their 
own  praise  in  the  public  papers. 

Empla'stica.  (From  cpnXaaaa),  to  obstruct.)  Me- 
dicines which,  spread  upon  the  skin,  stop  the  pores. 

EMPLA'STRUM.  ( Emplastrum , i.  n. ; from 

eynXaooo),  to  spread  upon.)  A plaster.  Plasters  are 
composed  of  unctuous  substances,  united  either  to 
powders  or  metallic  oxides,  &c.  They  ought  to  be  of 
such  a consistence  as  not  to  stick  to  the  fingers  when 
cold,  but  to  become  soft,  so  as  to  be  spread  out  in  a 
moderate  degree  of  heat,  and  in  that  of  the  human 
body,  to  continue  tenacious  enough  to  adhere  to  the 
skin.  They  owe  their  consistence  either  to  metallic 
oxides,  especially  those  of  lead,  or  to  wax,  resin,  &c. 
They  are  usually  kept  in  rolls  wrapped  in  paper,  and 
spread,  when  wanted  for  use,  upon  thin  leather ; if  the 
laster  be  not  of  itself  sufficiently  adhesive,  it  is  to 
e surrounded  at  its  margin  by  a boundary  of  resin 
plaster. 

Emplastrum  ammoniaci.  Take  of  purified  am- 
rKoniacum,  five  ounces  ; acetic  acid,  half  a pint.  Dis- 
solve the  ammoniacum  in  the  acid,  then  evaporate  the 
liquor  in  an  iron  vessel,  by  means  of  a water-bath, 
constantly  stirring  it,  until  it  acquires  a proper  con- 
sistence. This  plaster  is  now  first  introduced  into  the 
London  Pharmacopoeia ; it  adheres  well  to  the  skin, 
without  irritating  it,  and  without  producing  inconve- 
nience by  its  smell. 

Emplastrum  ammoniaci  cum  hydrargyro.  Take 
of  purified  ammoniacum,  a pound ; purified  mercury, 
three  ounces ; sulphuretted  oil,  a fluid  drachm.  Rub 
the  mercury  with  the  sulphurated  oil  until  the  glo- 
bules disappear ; then  add  by  degrees  the  ammonia- 
cum, previously  melted,  and  mix  the  whole  together. 
This  composition  is  said  to  possess  resolvent  vir- 
tues; and  the  plaster  is  recommended  with  this  view 
to  be  applied  to  nodes,  tophs,  indurated  glands,  and 
tumours. 

Emplastrum  asafcetids!.  Emplastrum  antiliys- 
tericum.  Plaster  of  asafoetida.  Take  of  plaster  of 
semi-vitrified  oxide  of  lead,  asafoetida,  each  two  parts: 
galbanum,  yellow  wax,  each  one  part.  This  plaster 
is  said  to  possess  anodyne  and  antispasmodic  virtues. 
It  is,  therefore,  occasionally  directed  to  be  applied  to 
the  umbilical  region  in  hysterical  cases. 

Emplastrum  cantharidis.  Blistering-fly  plaster. 
Emplastrum  vesicatorium.  Take  of  blistering  flies, 
in  very  fine  powder,  a pound ; wax  plaster,  a pound 
and  a half;  prepared  fat,  a pound.  Having  melted 
the  plaster  and  fat  together,  and  removed  them  from 
the  fire,  a little  before  they  become  solid  sprinkle  in  the 
blistering  flies,  and  mix  the  whole  together.  See  Blis- 
ter and  Cantharis. 

Emplastrum  cer®.  Wax  plaster.  Emplastrum 
attrahons.  Take  of  yellow  wax,  prepared  suet,  of 
eaeh  three  pounds ; yellow  resin,  a pound.  Melt  them 
together  and  strain.  This  is  a gently-drawing  prepa- 
ration, calculated  to  promote  a moderate  discharge 
from  the  blistered  surface,  with  which  intention  it  is 
mostly  used.  Where  the  stronger  preparations  irri- 
tate, this  will  be  found  in  general  to  agree. 

Emplastrum  cumini.  Cumin  plaster.  Take  of 
cumin-seeds,  caraway-seeds,  bay-berries,  of  each  three 
ounces ; dried  pitch,  three  pounds  ; yellow  wax,  three 
ounces.  Having  melted  the  dry  pitch  and  wax  toge- 
ther, add  the  remaining  articles  previously  powdered, 
and  mix.  A warm  stomachic  plaster,  which,  when  ap- 
plied to  the  stomach,  expels  flatulency.  To  indolent 
scrofulous  tumours,  where  the  object  is  to  promote 
suppuration,  this  is  an  efficacious  plaster. 


Emplastrum  galbani  compositum.  Compound 
Galbanum  plaster,  formerly  called  emplastrum  lithar- 
gyri compositum  and  diachylon  magnum  cum  gummi. 
Take  of  galbanum  gum  resin  purified,  eight  ounces; 
lead  plaster,  three  pounds;  common  turpentine,  ten 
drachms  ; resin  of  the  spruce  fir,  three  ounces.  Hav- 
ing melted  the  galbanum  gum  resin  with  the  turpen- 
tine, mix  in  first  the  powdered  resin  of  the  spruce  fir, 
and  then  the  lead  plaster,  previously  melted  )>y  a slow 
fire,  and  mix  the  whole.'  This  plaster  is  used  as  a 
warm  digestive  and  suppurative,  calculated  to  pro- 
mote maturation  of  indolent  or  scirrhous  tumours, 
and  to  allay  the  pains  of  sciatica,  arthrodynia,  &c. 

Emplastrum  hydrargyri.  Mercurial  plaster. 
Emplastrum  lithargyri  cum  hydrargyro.  Take  of 
purified  mercury,  three  ounces ; sulphurated  oil,  a fluid 
drachm  ; lead  plaster,  a pound.  Rub  the  mercury  with 
the  sulphurated  oil,  until  the  globules  disappear ; then 
add  by  degrees  the  lead  plaster,  melted,  and  mix  the 
whole. 

Emplastrum  ladani  compositum.  Take  of  soft 
lalrdanum,  three  ounces ; of  frankincense,  one  ounce; 
cinnamon  and  expressed  oil  of  mace,  each  half  an 
ounce;  essential  oil  of  mint,  one  drachm:  add  to  the 
frankincense,  melted  first,  the  labdanum  a little  heat- 
ed, till  it  becomes  soft,  and  then  the  oil  of  mace;  after- 
ward mix  in  the  cinnamon  with  the  oil  of  mint,  and 
beat  them  together  into  a mass,  in  a warm  mortar,  and 
keep  it  in  a vessel  well  closed.  This  may  be  used  with 
the  same  intentions  as  the  cumin-plaster,  to  which 
it  is  in  no  way  superior,  though  composed  of  more 
expensive  materials.  Formerly,  it  was  considered 
as  a very  elegant  stomach  plaster,  but  is  now  dis- 
used. 

Emplastrum  lithargyri.  See  Emplastrum 
plumbi. 

Emplastrum  lithargyri  compositum.  SeeEm- 
plastrum  Galbani  compositum. 

Emplastrum  lithargyri  cum  resina.  See  Em- 
plastrum resina. 

Emplastrum  lytt.e.  See  Emplastrum  cantha- 
ridis. 

Emplastrum  opii.  Plaster  of  opium.  Take  of 
hard  opium,  powdered,  half  an  ounce ; resin  of  the 
spruce  fir,  powdered,  three  ounces;  lead  plaster,  a 
pound.  Having  melted  the  plaster,  mix  in  the  resin  of 
the  spruce  fir,  and  opium,  and  mix  the  whole.  Opium 
is  said  to  produce  somewhat,  though  in  a smaller  de- 
gree, its  specific  effect  when  applied  externally. 

Emplastrum  picis  compositum.  Compound  pitch 
plaster.  Emplastrum  picis  Burgundicce.  Take  of 
dried  pitch,  two  pounds;  resin  of  spruce  fir,  a pound  ; 
yellow  resin,  yellow  wax,  of  each  four  ounces ; ex- 
pressed oil  of  nutmegs,  an  ounce.  Having  melted  to- 
gether the  pitch,  resin,  and  wax,  add  first  the  resin  of 
the  spruce  fir,  then  the  oil  of  nutmegs,  and  mix  the 
whole  together.  From  the  slight  degree  of  redness 
this  stimulating  application  produces,  it  is  adapted  to 
gently  irritate  the  skin,  and  thus  relieve  rheumatic 
pains.  Applied  to  the  temples,  it  is  sometimes  of  use 
in  pains  of  the  head. 

Emplastrum  plumbi.  Lead  plaster.  Emplastrum 
lithargyri;  Emplastrum  commune ; Diachylon  sim- 
plex. Take  of  semi- vitreous  oxide  of  lead,  in  very  fine 
powder,  five  pounds ; olive  oil,  a gallon ; water,  two 
pints.  Boil  them  with  a slow  fire,  constantly  stirring 
until  the  oil  and  litharge  unite,  so  as  to  form  a plaster. 
Excoriations  of  the  skin,  slight  burns,  and  the  like, 
may  be  covered  with  this  plaster:  but  is  in  more  gene- 
ral use,  as  a defensive,  where  the  skin  becomes  red 
from  lying  a long  time  on  the  part.  This  plaster  is  also 
of  great  importance,  as  forming  the  basis,  by.  addition 
to  which  many  other  plasters  are  prepared. 

Emplastrum  resin.<e.  Resin  plaster.  Emplastrum 
adhasivum ; Emplastrum  lithargyri  cum  resina.  Take 
of  yellow  resin,  half  a pound ; lead  plaster,  three 
pounds.  Having  melted  the  lead  plaster  over  a slow 
fire,  add  the  resin  in  powder,  and  mix.  The  adhe- 
sive, or  sticking  plaster,  is  chiefly  used  for  keeping  on 
other  dressings,  and  for  retaining  the  edges  of  recent 
wounds  together. 

Emplastrum  saponis.  Soap  plaster.  Take  of 
hard  soap  sliced,  half  a pound;  lead  plaster,  three 
pounds.  Having  melted  the  plaster,  mix  in  the  soap ; 
then  boil  it  down  to  a proper  consistence.  Discutient 
properties  are  attributed  to  this  elegant  plaster,  with 
which  view,  it  is  applied  to  lymphatic  and  other  indo- 


EMU 


ENC 


lent  tumours.  It  forms  an  admirable  defensive  and 
soft  application,  spread  on  linen,  to  surround  a frac- 
tured limb. 

EmplastruM  thtjris  compositum.  Compound 
frankincense  plaster.  Take  of  frankincense,  half  a 
pound ; dragon’s  blood,  three  ounces ; litharge  plaster, 
two  pounds.  To  the  melted  lead  plaster,  add  the  rest 
powdered.  This  plaster  is  said  to  possess  strengthen- 
ing,'as  well  as  adhesive  powers.  By  keeping  the  skin 
firm,  it  may  give  tone  to  the  relaxed  muscles  it  sur- 
rounds, but  cannot,  in.  any  way,  impart  more  strength 
than  the  common  adhesive  plaster. 

[The  pharmacopeia  of  the  United  States  admits  the 
following  plasters : 

Emplastrum  ammoniaci. 

Do.  asafcetidte. 

Do.  ferri. 

Do.  hydrargyri. 

Do.  plumbi. 

Do.  plumbi  subcarbonatis  compositum. 

Do.  resinosum. 

Do.  resinosum  cantharidum.  A.] 

Empneumato'sis.  From  ev,  in,  and  zsveu),  to  blow.) 
An  inflation  of  the  stomach,  or  any  other  viscus. 

EMPO'RIUM.  (From  epnopeo),  to  negotiate.)  A 
mart.  The  brain  is  so  called,  as  being  the  place  where 
all  rational  and  sensitive  transactions  are  collected. 

EMPRESMA.  Good  revives  this  term  (used  in  its 
simple  form  both' by  Hippocrates  and  Galen,  to  express 
internal  inflammation)  to  designate  a genus  of  disease 
in  his  Class,  Hcematica;  Order,  Pklogotica.  Visceral 
inflammation.  It  embraces  inflammation  of  all  the 
viscera : hence  Empresma  cephalitis  ; otitis  ; paroti- 
tis ; paristhmitis  ; laryngitis ; bronchitis  ; pneumo- 
nitis ; pleuritis ; carditis;  peritonitis;  gastritis; 
enteritis;  hepatitis;  splenitis;  nephritis;  cystitis; 
hysteritis ; orchitis. 

E'mprion.  (From  ev,  and  apuov,  a saw.)  Serrated. 
Formerly  applied  to  a pulse,  in  which  the  artery  at  dif- 
ferent times  is  unequally  distended. 

EMPROSTHO'TONOS.  (From  epnpoaQev,  before, 
or  forwards,  and  retvw,  to  draw.)  A clonic  spasm  of 
several  muscles,  so  as  to  keep  the  body  in  a fixed  posi- 
tion and  bent  forward.  Cullen  considers  it  as  a spe- 
cies of  tetanus.  See  Tetanus. 

E'MPTYSIS.  (From  epir'Jvu:,  to  spit  out.)  A dis- 
charge of  blood  from  the  mouth. 

EMPYE'MA.  (From  ev , within,  and  esvov,  pus.) 
A collection  of  pus  in  the  cavity  of  the  thorax.  It  is 
one  of  the  terminations  of  pleuritis.  There  is  reason 
for  believing  that  matter  is  contained  in  the  cavity  of 
the  chest,  when,  after  a pleurisy,  or  inflammation  in 
the  thorax,  the  patient  has  a difficulty  of  breathing, 
particularly  on  lying  on  the  side  opposite  the  affected 
one ; and  when  an  oedematous  swelling  is  externally 
perceptible. 

EMPYE'MATA.  (From  ev,  andavov,  pus.)  Sup- 
purating medicines. 

EMPYESIS.  (From  epimow,  or  epirvem,  suppuro.) 
Good  has  given  this  term  (found  in  the  fifth  book  of 
Hippocrates’s  aphorisms)  to  a genus  of  disease,  class, 
Hcematica ; order,  Exanthemalica,  characterized  by 
phlegmonous  pimples,  which  gradually  fill  with  a pu- 
rulent fluid.  It  has  only  one  species,  small-pox — 
Empyesis  variola. 

Empyreal  air.  Scheele  gave  this  name  to  oxygen 
gas. 

EMPYREU'MA.  (From  cpnvpevu:,  to  kindle,  from 
imp,  fire.)  A peculiar  and  offensive  smell  that  distilled 
waters  and  other  substances  receive  from  being  ex- 
posed to  heat  in  closed  vessels,  or  when  burned  under 
circumstances  which  prevent  the  accession  of  air  to  a 
considerable  part  of  the  mass. 

EMPYREUMA'TIU.  Empyreumaticus ; from  ep- 
nvpevui,  to  kindle.)  Smelling  as  it  were  burnt ; thus 
enipyreumatio  oils  are  those  distilled  with  a great  heat, 
and  impregnated  with  a smell  of  the  fire. 

EMU'LGENT.  (Emulgens ; from  cmulgeo,  to 
melt  out ; applied  to  the  artery  and  vein  which  go 
from  the  aorta  and  vena  cava  to  the  kidneys,  because 
the  ancients  supposed  they  strained,  and,  as  it  were, 
milked  the  serum  through  the  kidneys.)  The  vessels 
of  the  kidneys  are  so  termed.  (The  emulgent  artery  is 
a branch  of  the  aorta.  The  eruvlgent  vein  evacuates 
its  blood  into  the  ascending  cava. 

EMULSIO.  ( Emulsio , onis.  f. ; from  emulgeo,  to 
milk ) An  emulsion.  A soft  and  somewhat  oily  me- 


dicine resembling  milk.  An  imperfect  combination  oi 
oil  and  water,  by  the  intervention  of  some  other  sub- 
stance capable  of  combining  with  both  these  sub- 
stances. 

Emulsio  acacije.  This  is  made  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  almond  emulsion,  only  adding  while  beating 
the  almonds,  two  ounces  of  gum  arabic.  This  cooling 
and  demulcent  emulsion,  ordered  in  the  Edinburgh 
Pharmacopoeia,  may  be  drank  ail  libitum  to  mitigate 
ardor  urinoc,  whether  from  the  venereal  virus  or  any 
other  cause.  In  difficult  and  painful  micturition,  and 
strangury,  it  is  of  infinite  service. 

Emulsio  amygdala.  Almond  emulsion.  Take  of 
almonds,  one  ounce ; water,  two  pounds  and  a half. 
Beat  the  blanched  almonds  in  a stone  mortar,  gra- 
dually pouring  on  them  the  water;  then  strain  off  the 
liquor.  It  possesses  cooling  and  demulcent  properties. 

Emulsio  camphorata.  Take  of  camphor,  one 
scruple ; sweet  almonds,  blanched,  two  drachms ; dou- 
ble refined  sugar,  one  drachm ; water,  six  ounces. 
This  is  to  be  made  in  the  same  manner  as  the  common 
emulsion.  It  is  calculated  for  the  stomachs  of  those 
who  can  only  bear  small  quantities  of  camphire. 

EMULSION.  See  Emulsio. 

Emulsion,  almond.  See  Emulsio  amygdala:. 

Emulsion,  Arabic.  See  Emulsio  acacia. 

Emulsion  of  asafatida.  Sec  Mistura  asafatidce. 

Emulsion , camphorated.  See  Emulsio  camphorata . 

Emulsion  of  gum-ammoniac.  See  Mistura  ammo- 
niaci. 

EMU'NCTORY.  ( Emunctorium ; from  emitngo, 
to  drain  off.)  The  excretory  ducts  of  the  body  are  so 
termed ; thus  the  exhaling  arteries  of  the  skin  consti- 
tute the  great  emunctory  of  the  body. 

En.'e'ma.  (From  ev,  and  aipa,  blood.)  Enamos. 
So  Hippocrates  and  Galen  call  such  topical  medicines 
as  are  appropriated  to  bleeding  wounds. 

En.'eore'ma.  (From  ev,  and  atapeu j,  to  lift  up.)  The 
pendulous  substance  which  floats  in  the  middle  of  the 
urine. 

ENA'MEL.  See  Teeth. 

■ ENANTHE'SIS.  J.  (From  ev,  in,  intra , and  avBeu:, 
fioreo ; efflorescence  from  within,  or  from  interna!  af- 
fection.) A genus  of  disease,  Class,  Hcematica ; Order, 
Exanthematica , in  Good’s  Nosology.  Rash  exanthem. 
It  comprehends  three  species:  viz.  Enanthesis  rosalia; 
rubeola ; urticaria. 

2.  (From  ev,  and  av'Jaw,  to  meet.)  The  near  ap- 
proach of  ascending  and  descending  vessels. 

ENARTHRO'SIS.  (From  ev,  in,  and  apdpov,  a 
joint.)  The  ball  and  socket-joint.  A species  of  diar- 
throsis, or  moveable  connexion  of  bones,  in  which  the 
round  head  of  one  is  received  into  the  deeper  cavity 
of  another,  so  as  to  admit  of  motion  in  every  direction ; 
as  the  head  of  the  os  fentoris  with  the  acetabulum  of 
the  os  innominatum.  See  Articulation. 

ENCA'NTHIS.  (From  ev,  and  icavOos,  the  angle  of 
the  eye.)  A disease  of  the  caruncula  lachrymalis,  of 
which  there  are  two  species.  Encanthis  benigna , 
and  Encanthis  maligna  seu  inveterata.  The  encan- 
this, at  its  commencement,  is  nothing  more  than  a 
snrlall,  soft,  red,  and  sometimes  rather  livid  excrescence, 
which  grows  from  the  caruncula  lachrymalis,  and  at 
the  same  time  from  the  neighbouring  semilunar  fold  of 
the  conjunctiva.  This  excrescence  on  its  first  appear- 
ance is  commonly  granulated,  like  a mulberry,  or  is  of 
a ragged  and  fringed  structure.  Afterward,  when  it 
has  acquired  a certain  size,  one  part  of  it  represents  a 
granulated  tumour,  while  the  rest  appears  like  a 
smooth,  whitish,  or  ash- coloured  substance,  streaked 
with  varicose  vessels,  sometimes  advancing  as  far  over 
the  conjunctiva,  covering  the  side  of  the  eye  next  to 
the  nose,  as  where  the  cornea  and  sclerotica  unite. 

The  encanthis  keeps  up  a chronic  ophthalmy,  im- 
pedes the  action  of  the  eyelids,  and  prevents,  in  parti- 
cular, the  complete  closure  of  the  eye.  Besides,  partly 
by  compressing  and  partly  by  displacing  thetnificesof 
the  puncta  lachrymalia,  it  obstructs  the  free  passage 
of  the  tears  into  the  nose.  The  inveterate  encanthis 
is  ordinarily  of  a very  considerable  magnitude ; its  roots 
extend  beyond  the  caruncula  lachrymalis  and  semi- 
lunar fold  to  the  membraneous  lining  of  one  or  both 
eyelids.  The  patient  experiences  very  serious  incon 
venience  from  its  origin  and  interposition  between  the 
commissure  of  the  eyelids,  which  it  necessarily  keeps 
asunder  on  the  side  towards  the  nose.  Sometimes  the 
.disease  assumes  a cancerous  malignancy.  This  cha- 

329 


END 


ENN 


racter  is  evinced  by  the  dull  red,  and,  as  it  were,  leaden 
colour  of  the  excrescence ; by  its  exceeding  hardness, 
and  the  lancinating  pains  which  occur  in  it,  and  ex- 
tend to  the  forehead,  the  whole  eyeball  and  the  temple, 
especially  when  the  tumour  has  been,  though  slightly, 
touched.  It  is  also  shown,  by  the  propensity  of  the 
excrescence  to  bleed,  by  the  partial  ulcerations  on  its 
surface,  which  emit  a fungous  substance,  and  a thin 
and  exceedingly  acrid  discharge. 

ENCATALE  PSIS.  (From  £v,  and  Ka'JaXap.^avoj, 
to  seize.)  A catalepsy. 

ENCATHI'SMA.  (From  ev,  and  Kadi^o),  to  sit  in.) 
A semicupium,  or  bath  for  half  the  body. 

ENCAU'MA.  (From  ev,  in,  and  tcaia,  to  burn.)  A 
burn.  See  Burn. 

ENCAU'SIS.  (From  ev,  and  nano,  to  burn.)  A 
burn.  See  Burn. 

ENCEPIIALOCE'LE.  (From  evkeQoXov,  the  brain, 
and  KriXrj,  a tumour.)  A rupture  of  the  brain. 

ENCE  PHALON.  (From  ev,  in,  and  KetpaXy,  the 
head.)  Encephalum.  By  some  writers  the  cerebrum 
only  is  so  called;  and  others  express  by  this  term  the 
contents  of  the  cranium. 

Ence'kis.  (From  ev,  and  nypos , wax.)  A roll  of 
wax  for  making  piasters. 

Encero'sis.  (From  ev,  and  Kspou),  to  wax.)  The 
covering  of  a plaster  with  wax. 

ENCHARA'XIS.  (From  ev,  and  xaPal 7<7W> t0  sca“ 
rify.)  A scarification. 

ENCHEIRE  SIS.  (From  ev,  and  %£ip,  the  hand.) 
Encheira.  Galen  uses  this  word  as  a part  of  the  title 
to  one  of  his  works,  which  treats  of  dissection.  The 
word  imports  the  manual  treatment  of  any  subject. 

Enchei'ria.  See  Encheiresis. 

Enchilo'ma.  See  Enchyloma. 

Encho'ndrus.  (Froin'ev,  and  %ov<5pof,  a cartilage.) 
A cartilage. 

Enchris'ta.  (From  fyxpiw,  t0  anoint.)  Oint- 
ments. 

Enchylo'ma.  (From  ev,  and  %uAof,  juice.)  An 
inspissated  juice.  An  elixir,  according  to  Lemery. 

E'NCHYMA.  (From  ev,  and  %£w,  to  infuse.)  En- 
chysis.  1.  An  infusion. 

2.  A sanguineous  plethora. 

Enciiy'mata.  (From  £y%ea),  to  infuse.)  Injec- 
tions for  the  eyes  and  ears. 

Enchymo'ma.  (From  ev,  and  xv(°i  to  pour  in.)  In 
the  writings  of  the  ancient  physicians,  it  is  a word  by 
which  they  express  that  sudden  effusion  of  blood  into 
the  cutaneous  vessels,  which  arises  from  joy,  anger,  or 
shame ; and,  in  the  last  instance,  is  what  we  usually 
call  blushing. 

Enchymo'sis.  E yxvpvtriS-  !•  Blushing. 

2.  An  extravasation  of  blood,  which  makes  the  part 
appear  livid. 

E'nchysis.  See  Enchyma. 

Encly'saia.  (From  ev,  and  kXv&o),  to  cleanse  out.) 
A clyster. 

ENCCE'LIA.  (From  £v,  within,  and  KoiXia,  the 
belly.)  The  abdominal  viscera. 

Encolpi'smus.  (From  eykoXiteu),  to  insinuate.)  A 
uterine  injection. 

ENCRA'NIUM.  (From  £v,  within,  and  npavtov,  the 
skull.)  The  cerebrum  and  the  whole  contents  of  the 
skull. 

Encrasi'cholus.  (From  ev,  in,  Kepas,  the  head,  and 
XoXr),  bile ; because  it  is  said  to  have  the  gall  in  its 
head.)  The  anchovy.  See  Clupea. 

E'ncris.  E yxpij.  A cake  of  meal,  oil,  and  honey. 

E'ncymon.  (From  ev,  and  kvio,  to  conceive.) 
Pregnancy.  , . , , 

E'NCYSIS.  (From  ev,  and  kuw,  to  bring  forth.) 
Parturition. 

ENCY'STED.  Saccatus.  A term  applied  to  those 
tumours  which  consist  of  a fluid  or  other  matter,  en- 
closed in  a sac  or  cyst. 

ENCY'STIS.  (From  ev,  in,  and  kv?is,  a bag.)  An 
encysted  tumour. 

ENDE'MIC.  ( Endemicus , sc.  morbus;  from  £v,  in, 
and  Syuos,  people.)  A disease  is  so  termed  that  is  pe- 
culiar to  a certain  class  of  persons,  or  country : thus 
struma  is  endemial  to  the  inhabitants  of  Derbyshire 
and  the  Alps;  scurvy  to  seafaring  people;  and  the 
plica  polonica  is  met  with  in  Poland. 

E'ndksis.  (From  ev,  and  Seu),  to  tie  up.)  A ligature. 
A bandage. 

ENDIVE.  See  Cichorium. 

330 


ENDI'VIA.  (Quasi  eundo  via,  quia  passim  nasci- 
tur ; named  from  the  quickness  of  its  growth.)  See 

Cichorium. 

E'ndosis.  (From  ev,  and  diduyi,  to  give.)  A re- 
mission, disorder. 

ENECIA.  (From  Hv£*j7S,  continued.)  A genus  of 
disease  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Haimatica ; Or- 
der, Pyretica : continued  fever.  It  comprehends  three 
species,  Enecia  cauma;  typhus;  synochus. 

Enella'gmencs.  (From  £vaAAar7w,  to  inter- 
change.) An  epithet  applied  to  the  union  of  the 
joints  of  the  vertebra. 

E NEMA.  (Enema,  matis.  neut.;  from  cvirjpi,  to 
inject.)  A clyster.  A well-known  form  of  conveying 
both  nourishment  and  medicine  to  the  system,  under 
certain  morbid  circumstances.  The  former  takes 
place  where  obstruction  of  the  passage  to  the  stomach 
is  so  great  as  to  render  access  to  that  organ  impossible, 
such  as  occurs  in  lockjaw,  diseased  oesophagus,  &c. 
By  these  means  the  body  can  be  supported  for  a few 
weeks,  while  an  attempt  is  made  at  effecting  a cure. 
It  is  composed,  in  such  cases,  of  animal  broths,  gruels 
made  of  farinaceous  seeds,  mucilages,  &c.  As  a form 
of  medicine,  clysters  are  no  less  useful ; and,  accord- 
ing to  the  intention  with  which  they  are  prescribed, 
they  are  either  of  an  emollient,  anodyne,  or  purgative 
nature.  The  following  forms  are  in  general  use. 

Enema  anodynom.  Take  of  starch  jelly,  half  a 
pint;  tincture  of  opium,  forty  to  sixty  drops.  Mix. 
The  whole  to  be  injected  by  means  of  a clyster-syringe, 
in  cases  of  dysentery  or  violent  purging,  and  pain  in 
the  bowels. 

Enema  antispasmodicum.  Take  of  tincture  of 
asafeetida,  half  an  ounce;  tincture  of  opium,  forty 
drops ; gruel,  half  a pint.  Mix.  For  spasmodic  affec- 
tions of  the  bowels. 

Enema  laxativum.  Take  of  sulphate  of  magne- 
sia, two  ounces;  dissolve  in  three  quarters  of  a pint 
of  warm  gruel,  or  broth,  with  an  ounce  of  fresh  butter, 
or  sweet  oil. 

Enema  nicotian.®:.  Take  of  the  infusion  of  to- 
bacco from  a half  to  a whole  pint.  Employed  in  cases 
of  strangulated  hernia. 

Enema  nutriens.  Take  of  strong  beef  tea,  twelve 
ounces ; thicken  with  hartshorn  shavings,  or  arrow- 
root. 

Enema  terebinthin®:.  Take  of  common  turpen- 
tine, half  an  ounce;  the  yelk  of  one  egg,  and  half  a 
pint  of  grueJ.  The  turpentine  being  first  incorporated 
with  the  egg,  add  to  them  the  gruel.  This  clyster  is 
generally  used,  and  with  great  good  effect,  in  violent 
fits  of  the  stone. 

Enerei'sis.  (From  evEpuSu),  to  adhere  to  a com- 
pression.) A tight  ligature. 

E'NERGY.  (Energia;  from  evepyeu),  to  act.)  The 
degree  of  force  exercised  by  any  power : thus,  nervous 
energy,  muscularenergy,  &c. 

ENERVATING.  The  act  of  destroying  the  force, 
use,  or  office  of  the  nerves,  either  by  cutting  them,  or 
breaking  them  by  violence  or  abuse  of  the  non-na- 
turals. 

Eneure'sis.  See  Enuresis. 

ENERVIS.  Ribless:  applied  to  leaves  which  are 
without  lines  or  ribs. 

Engala'ctum.  (From  £v,  and  yaXa,  milk;  so 
called,  because  it  is  eaten  by  nurses  to  increase  £eir 
milk.)  The  herb  saltwort.  See  Salsola. 

ENG  ASTRIMY'THUS.  (From  ev.  in,  yas^o,  the 
belly,  and  pvdeopai,  to  discourse.)  Jf  ventriloquist; 
one  who  appears  to  speak  from  his  belly. 

Engiso'ma.  (From  eyyigu),  to  approach.) 

1.  An  instrument  for  making  the  parts  of  a broken 
clavicle  meet. 

2.  A fracture  of  Lie  cranium. 

English  Mercury.  See  Mercurialis. 

Englotto-gastor.  (From  ev,  yXurJri,  the  tongue, 

and  ya<pip,  the  belly.)  A ventriloquist. 

ENGOlMPHO'SIS.  (From  £v,  and  yoypos,  a nail./ 
That  species  of  articulation  which  resembles  a nail 
driven  into  wood,  as  a tooth  in  its  socket. 

Engo'nios.  (From  ev,  and  yiovia,  an  angle.)  The 
flexure,  or  angle  made  by  the  bending  of  a joint 

Eni'xitm  paracklsi.  The  caput  mortuum  of  the 
distiliatiou  of  nitric  acid,  which  is  a super-sulphate  of 
potassa. 

ENNEANDRIA.  (From  ewca,  nine,  and  dvvp,  a 
man.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual 


ENT 


ENT 

system,  containing  such  as  have  hermaphrodite  flow- 
ers with  nine  stamina. 

Enneapha'rmacum.  (From  tvvta , nine,  and  tpapr 
pauov , a medicine.)  A medicine  composed  of  nine 
simple  ingredients. 

ENNEAPHY'LLUM.  (From  tvvta,  nine,  and 
0vAA ov,  a leaf;  because  its  flower  consists  of  nine 
leaves.)  A name  for  helleboraster,  or  bear’s-foot. 

ENODIS.  Without  knots  : applied  to  stems  of 
plants,  as  Culmus  enodis ; that  is,  a smooth  culm,  as 
in  oQr  common  rushes. 

Enry'thmus.  (From  tv,  and  pvOpos,  number.)  A 
pulse  in  some  respect  regular. 

ENS.  This  word  denoted  in  ancient  chemistry  the 
most  efficacious  part  of  any  natural  mixed  body,  whe- 
ther animal,  vegetable,  or  fossil,  wherein  all  the  qua- 
lities or  virtues  of  the  ingredients  of  the  mixed  are 
comprehended  in  a small  compass. 

ENSATA2.  (From  ensis,  a sword.)  The  name  of 
a natural  order  of  plants,  consisting  of  such  as  have 
sword-shaped  leaves. 

E'NSIFORM.  ( Ensiformis ; from  ensis,  a sword, 
and  forma , resemblance.)  Sword-like.  1.  A term 
applied  to  some  parts  from  their  resemblance;  as  the 
ensiform  cartilage. 

2.  In  botany,  a leaf  is  called  folium  ensiforme,  which 
has  two  edges,  and  tapers  to  a point,  like  a sword. 
See  Leaf. 

Ensta'ctum.  (From  tv,  and  syiljw,  to  instil.)  A 
liquid  medicine,  which  is  applied  instillatim , or  drop 
by  drop. 

ENTASIA.  (From  tvraois,  intentio  vchemenfta.) 
A name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Class,  Neurotica ; Order,  Cinetica.  Constrictive 
spasm.  It  has  eight  species,  viz.  Entasia  priapis- 
mus;  lozia ; articularis ; systremma ; trismus;  teta- 
nus; lyssa;  acrotismus. 

Enta'tica.  (From  ev'Jtivio,  to  strain.)  Provoca- 
tives, or  whatever  excites  venereal  inclination. 
E'NTERA.  (From  tv'Jos , within.) 

1.  The  bowels. 

2.  Hippocrates  calls  by  this  name  the  bags  in  which 
medicines  for  fomentations  were  formerly  enclosed. 

ENTERADE'NES.  (From  tvrtpov,  an  intestine, 
and  aSyv , a gland.)  The  intestinal  glands. 

Entere'nchyta.  (From  tvjtpa , the  bowels,  and 
£y%uw,  to  infuse  into.)  An  instrument  for  adminis- 
tering clysters.  A clyster-pipe. 

ENTERICA.  (From  tvrtpov,  intestinum , alvus.) 
The  name  of  the  first  order,  class  Cceliaca,  of  Good’s 
Nosology.  Diseases  affecting  the  alimentary  canal. 
Its  genera  are,  Odontia;  Ptyalismus ; Dysphagia ; 
Dip  so  sis ; Limosis;  Colica;  Copro  stasis ; Diar- 
rhea; Cholera;  Enterolithus ; Helminthia;  Proctica. 

ENTERI'TIS.  (From  tv'] tpov,  an  intestine.)  In- 
flammation of  the  intestines.  It  is  a genus  of  disease 
in  the  class  Pyrexia,  and  order  Phlegmasia  of  Cullen, 
and  is  known  by  the  presence  of  pyrexia,  fixed  pain 
in  the  abdomen,  costiveness,  and  vomiting.  The 
causes  of  enteritis  are  much  the  same  as  those  of  gas- 
tritis, being  occasioned  by  acrid  substances,  indurated 
feces,  long-continued  and  obstinate  costiveness,  spas- 
modic colic,  and  a strangulation  of  any  part  of  the  in- 
testinal canal;  but  another  very  general  cause  is  the 
application  of  cold  to  the  lower  extremities,  or  to  the 
belly  itself.  It  is  a disease  which  is  most  apt  to  occur 
at  an  advanced  period  of  life,  and  is  very  liable  to  a 
relapse. 

It  comes  on  with  an  acute  pain,  extending  in  general 
over  the  whole  of  the  abdomen  ; but  more  especially 
round  the  navel,  accompanied  with  eructations,  sick- 
ness at  the  stomach,  a vomiting  of  bilious  matter,  ob- 
stinate costiveness,  thirst,  heat,  great  anxiety,  and  a 
quick  and  hard  small  pulse.  After  a short  time  the 
pain  becomes  more  severe,  the  bowels  seem  drawn  to- 
gether by  a kind  of  spasm,  the  whole  region  of  the 
abdomen  is  highly  painful  to  the  touch,  and  seems 
drawn  together  in  lumpy  contractions ; invincible  cos- 
tiveness prevails,  and  the  urine  is  voided  with  great 
difficulty  and  pain. 

The  inflammation  continuing  to  proceed  with  vi- 
olence, terminates  at  last  in  gangrene;  or  abating 
gradually,  it  goes  off  by  resolution. 

Enteritis  is  always  attended  with  considerable  dan- 
ger, as  it  often  terminates  in  gangrene  in  the  space  of 
a few  hours  from  its  commencement;  which  event  is 
marked  by  the  sudden  remission  of  pain,  sinking  of 


the  pulse,  shrinking  of  the  features,  and  distention  of 
the  belly,  and  it  frequently  proves  fatal  likewise,  du- 
ring the  inflammatory  stage.  If  the  pains  abate  gra- 
dually, if  natural  stools  be  passed,  if  a universal  sweat, 
attended  with  a firm  equal  pulse,  comes  on,  or  if  a 
copious  discharge  of  loaded  urine,  with  the  same  kind 
of  pulse,  takes  place,  a resolution  and  favourable  ter- 
mination may  be  expected. 

Dissections  of  this  disease  show,  that  the  inflamma- 
tion pervades  the  intestinal  tube  to  a very  considerable 
extent ; that  adhesions’  of  the  diseased  portion  to  con- 
tiguous parts  are  formed  ; and  that,  in  some  cases,  the 
intestines  are  in  a gangrenous  state,  or  that  ulcerations 
have  formed.  They  likewise  show,  that,  besides  ob- 
stinate obstructions,  introsusceptxon,  constrictions,  and 
twistings,  are  often  to  be  met  with ; and  that,  in  most 
cases,  the  peritonajum  is  more  or  less  affected,  and  is 
perceived,  at  times,  to  be  covered  with  a layer  of 
coagulable  lymph.  The  treatment  must  be  begun  by 
taking  blood  freely  from  the  arm,  as  far  as  the  strength 
of  the  patient  will  allow;  but  the  disease  occurring 
more  frequently  in  persons  rather  advanced  in  years, 
and  of  a constitution  somewhat  impaired,  it  becomes 
more  important  to  limit  this  evacuation  and  rely  in  a 
great  measure  on  the  effects  of  a number  of  leeches, 
applied  to  the  abdomen.  Another  very  useful  step  is 
to  put  the  patient  into  a hot  bath,  which  may  presently 
induce  faintness  ; or  where  this  cannot  be  procured, 
fomenting  the  abdomen  assiduously.  When  the  symp- 
toms are  thus  materially  relieved,  an  ample  blister 
should  be  applied.  It  becomes  also  of  the  first  import- 
ance to  clear  out  the  bowels : a copious  laxative  clyster 
will  evacuate  the  inferior  part  of  the  canal,  and  solicit 
the  peristaltic  motion  downwards;  and  the  milder 
cathartics,  as  castor  oil,  neutral  sails,  &c.  in  divided 
doses,  may  gradually  procure  a passage.  But  where 
the  disease  has  been  preceded  by  costiveness,  more 
active  articles  will  probably  be  necessary,  as  calomel, 
compound  extract  of  colocynth,  infusion  of  senna, 
with  salts,  &c.  If  the  stomach  be  irritable,  the  effer- 
vescing saline  draught  may  enable  it  to  retain  the  re- 
quisite cathartics.  Another  plan,  often  very  success- 
ful, is  giving  opium  in  a full  dose,  particularly  in  con- 
junction with  calomel,  taking  care  to  follow  it  up  by 
some  of  the  remedies  above  mentioned,  till  the  bowels 
are  relieved  ; which  effect  it  appears  to  promote  by  its 
soothing  artispasmodic  power.  Afterward  we  may  en- 
deavour to  keep  up  diaphoresis,  and  recruit  the  strength 
of  the  patient  by  a mild  nourishing  diet ; taking  care 
to  guard  against  accumulation  of  feces,  exposure  to 
cold,  or  any  thing  else  likely  to  occasion  a relapse. 

ENTERO'.  (From  tv'] tpov,  an  intestine.)  Names 
compounded  of  this  word  belong  to  things  which  re- 
semble an  intestine ; or  to  parts  connected  with,  or 
diseases  of  some  part  of  the  intestine. 

ENTEROCE'LE.  (From  tv'Jtpov,  an  intestine,  and 
Krj\y,  a tumour.)  An  intestinal  rupture  or  hernia. 
Every  hernia  may  be  so  called  that  is  produced  by  the 
protrusion  of  a portion  of  intestine,  whether  it  is  in  the 
groin,  navel,  or  elsewhere. 

Entero-epiplocele.  (From  tv'Jtpov,  an  intestine, 
tiunXoov,  the  epiploon,  and  KrjXr),  a tumour.)  A rup- 
ture formed  by  the  protrusion  of  part  of  an  intestine, 
with  a portion  of  the  epiploon. 

Entero-hydrocele.  (From  tvrtpov,  an  intestine, 
vScop,  water,  and  kt/Xt;,  a tumour.)  This  must  mean  a 
common  scrotal  hernia,  with  a good  deal  of  water  in 
the  hernial  sac  ; or  else  a hernia  congenita,  (in  which 
the  bowels  descend  into  the  tunica  vaginalis  testis,) 
attended  with  a collection  of  fluid  in  the  cavity  of  this 
membrane. 

ENTEROLITHUS.  (From  tvrtpov,  an  intestine, 
and  A idog,  a stone.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  disease, 
Class,  Caliaca;  Order,  Enterica,  in  Good’s  Nosology 
Intestinal  concretion.  It  embraces  three  species,  viz 
Enterolithus  bezoar  ; calculus ; scybalum 
ENTERO'MPHALUS.  (From  tvrtpov,  an  intes- 
tine, and  ouQaXos,  the  navel.)  An  umbilical  hernia, 
produced  by  the  protrusion  of  a portion  of  intestine. 

ENTERO'PHYTUM.  (From  tvrtpov,  an  intestine, 
and  <J>v!]ov,  a plant.)  A plant  which  grows  in  the  form 
of  a cut,  the  sea-chitterling. 

ENTERORA'PIIIA.  (From  tvrtpov,  an  intestine, 
and  pa<f>r],  a suture.)  A suture  of  the  intestines,  or  the 
sewing  together  the  divided  edges  of  an  intestine. 

ENTEROSCHEOCE'LE.  (From  tv'Jtpov , an  intes- 
tine, oax£OVi  the  scrotum,  and  tcyXij,  a rupture.)  A 


EPI 


EPH 

scrotal  hernia,  or  rupture  of  the  intestines  into  the 
scrotum. 

Enthe'mata.  (From  tv~l iQypi,  to  put  in.)  Anti-in- 
flammatory styptics. 

E'nthlasis.  A contusion  with  the  impression  of 
the  instrument  by  which  it  happened. 

Entire  Leaf . See  Integerrimus. 

ENTROCHi.  A genus  of  extraneous  fossils,  made 
up  of  round  joints,  which,  when  separate  and  loose, 
are  called  truchitcc. 

ENTRO  PIUM  ( Entropium , t.  n. ; from  tv,  and 
Tpeno),  to  turn.)  A disease  of  the  eyelids,  occasioned 
by  the  eyelashes  and  eyelid  being  inverted  towards  the 
bulb  of  the  eye. 

Entypo'sis.  (From  tv'Jvnotj),  to  make  an  impres- 
sion.) 1.  The  acetabulum. 

2.  The  scapula,  or  concave  bone  of  the  shoulder. 

E'NULA.  (A  corruption  of  henula,  or  Helenium , 
from  Helene , the  island  where  it  grew.)  See  Inula 
helenium. 

Enula  campana.  See  Inula  helenium. 

Enu'lon.  (From  tv,  and  ouXov,  the  gums.)  The 
internal  flesh  of  the  gums,  or  that  part  of  them  which 
is  within  the  mouth. 

ENURE  SIS.  ( Eneuresis , is.  f.  ; from  cvovpco),  to 
make  water.)  Anincontinency,  or  involuntary  flow  of 
urine.  This  disease  usually  proceeds  either  from  re 
laxation  or  a paralytic  attection  of  the  sphincter  of  the 
bladder,  induced  by  various  debilitating  causes,  as  too 
free  a use  of  spirituous  liquors,  manustupration,  and 
excess  in  venery  ; or  it  arises  from  compression  on  the 
bladder,  from  the  diseased  state  of  the  organ,  or  from 
jsome  irritating  substance  contained  in  its  cavity.  It 
is  arranged  in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Jlpocenoses 
of  Cullen,  and  contains  two  species : 1.  Enuresis  ato- 
nica , the  sphincter  of  the  bladder  having  lost  its  tone 
from  some  previous  disease.  2.  Enuresis  ab  irrita- 
tione,  vel  compressions  vesica:,  from  an  irritation  or 
compression  of  the  bladder. 

Epacma'sticus.  (From  cm,  and  ax/iaf a>,  to  in- 
crease.) A fever  which  is  increasing  in  malignity. 

Epa'cmk.  (From  ciraKpafyi),  to  increase.)  The  in- 
crease, or  exacerbation  of  a disease. 

Epago'gium.  (From  cirayo),  to  draw  over.)  The 
praepuce,  or  that  part  of  the  penis  which  is  drawn  over 
the  glans,  according  to  Dioscorides. 

Epanadido'ntes.  (From  cnavaSiSupi, to  increase.) 
A term  applied  to  fevers  which  continue  to  increase 
in  their  degree  of  heat. 

Epanadiplo'sis.  (From  aravaSi-Xou),  to  redupli- 
cate.) The  reduplication  of  a fit  of  a semitertian  fever ; 
that  is,  the  return  of  the  cold  fit  before  the  hot  fit  is 
ended. 

Epana'stasis.  (From  cm,  and  avisnpi,  to  excite.) 
A tubercle,  or  small  pustule  upon  the  skin. 

Epancylo'tps.  (From  cm,  and  ay/cuAos,  crooked.) 
A sort  of  crooked  bandage  in  Oribasius. 

EPANETUS.  (From  'Enavcipi,  to  return.)  The 
name  of  a genus,  Class  Hcematica ; Order,  Pyretica, 
in  Good’s  Nosology.  Remittent  fever.  It  has  three 
species,  viz.  Epanetus  nutis ; malignus ; hectica. 

Epa'rma.  (From  eiraipo),  to  elevate.)  Eparsis. 
Any  kind  of  tumour,  but  frequently  applied  to  one  of 
the  parotid  gland. 

Epa'rsis.  See  Eparma. 

Epasma'stiga  feeris.  A fever  is  so  called  by  Bel- 
lini, and  others,  while  it  is  in  its  increase.  See  Epac- 
masticus. 

Epe'ncranis.  (From  cm,  tv,  in,  and  upaviov,  the 
skull.)  The  name  of  the  cerebellum. 

Ephebje'um.  (From  m,  and  ySi),  the  groin.)  The 
hair  upon  the  pubes. 

E phedra.  (From  cQefypai,  to  sit  upon.)  Epliedrana. 
I.  The  buttocks. 

2.  A species  of  horse-tail. 

Ephe'drana.  See  Ephedra. 

Ephe'lcis.  (From  art,  upon,  and  tXico;,  an  ulcer.) 
1.  The  crust  of  an  ulcer. 

2.  Hardened  purulent  expectoration. 

EPHE'LIS.  ( Eplielis ; from  eirt,  and  17X10?,  the 
sun.)  A sun  spot.  A solitary,  or  aggregated  spot,  at- 
tacking most  commonly  the  face,  back  of  the  hand,  and 
breast,  from  exposure  to  the  sun. 

EPHE'MERA.  (From  eirt,  upon, and  tjpepa,  a day.) 
A disease  of  a day’s  duration. 

2.  A fever  which  begins,  is  perfectly  formed,  and 
runs  through  its  course  in  tile  space  of  twelve  hours. 

332 


EPHEME  RIDES.  ( Ephemeris , id  is.  f.  ; from 
£<f>rjpepis , an  almanac : so  called  because,  like  tho 
moon’s  age,  they  may  be  foretold  by  the  almanac.) 
Diseases  which  return  at  particularMmes  of  the  moon. 

I^PHIA'LTES.  (From  ccpaXhopai,  to  leap  upon : 
so  called  because  it  was  thought  a daemon  leaped  upon 
the  breast.)  Incubus,  or  nightmare.  See  Oneirodynia. 

Ephia’ltia.  (From  ephialtes , the  nightmare ; so 
called  because  it  was  said  to  cure  the  nightmare.) 
The  herb  peony. 

EPHIDRO'SIS.  (From  cdnopoco,  to  perspire.)  Su - 
datio.  Mador.  A violent  and  morbid  perspiration. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and  order 
Jlpocenoses  of  Cullen. 

EPHI'PPIUM.  A saddle,  which  it  is  thought  to  re- 
semble. See  Sella  turcica. 

E'phodos.  (From  cm  and  oSos , a way.)  In  Hip- 
pocrates it  hath  three  significations : 

1.  The  ducts  or  passages,  by  which  the  excrements 
of  the  body  are  evacuated. 

2.  The  periodical  attack  of  a fever,  from  the  com- 
mon use  of  it  to  express  the  attack  of  thieves. 

3.  The  access  of  similar  or  dissimilar  things,  which 
may  be  useful  or  hurtful  to  the  body. 

Epia'ltes.  See  Ephialtes. 

Epi'alus.  (From  yiriov,  gently,  and  aX/ca^w,  to 
heat.)  Epialos.  An  ardent  fever,  in  which  both  heat 
and  cold  are  felt  in  the  same  part  at  the  same  time. 
Galen  defines  it  to  be  a fever  in  which  the  patient 
labours  under  a preternatural  heat  and  a coldness  at 
the  same  time.  The  ancient  Latins  call  it  Quercera. 

Epi  bole.  (From  cmBaXho),  to  press  upon.)  The 
nightmare,  or  ephialtes. 

Epica'nthis.  (From  cm,  and  icavOos,  the  angle  of 
the  eye.)  The  angle  of  the  eye. 

Epxca'rpium.  (From  tiri,  upon,  and  uapnos,  the 
wrist.)  A medicine  applied  to  the  wrist. 

Epica'uma.  (From  cm,  and  tcaiu>,  to  burn.)  A 
burn. 

Epicau'sis.  A burn. 

Epi'ceras.  (From  tin,  and  nepag , a horn : so  called 
because  its  pods  are  shaped  like  a horn.)  See  Trigo- 
nellaftEnum  gr cecum. 

Epicera'stica.  (From  cm,  and  Kepavwpi , to  mix.) 
Medicines  which,  by  mixing  with  acrimonious  juices, 
temper  them  and  render  them  less  troublesome;  as 
emollients. 

Epioheire'sis.  (From  tin,  and  x£tPi  the  hand.) 
A manual  operation. 

Epi'cholIjs.  (From  cm,  and  %oX»7,  the  bile.) 
Bilious. 

Epicho'rdis.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  x°P^Vc  a gut.) 
The  mesentery. 

Epicho'rios.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  xopa,  a region.) 
The  same  as  epidermis. 

EPICHROSIS.  (From  cmxpoxrts,  a coloured  or 
spotted  surface.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  disease, 
Class,  Eccritica;  Order,  Jlcrotica , in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Macular  skin,  or  simple  discoloration  of  the  surface. 
It  embraces  seven  species,  viz.  Epichrosis  leucasmus ; 
spilus  ; lenticula ; ephelis ; aurigo  ; p media  ; alphosis . 

Epiccelis.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  koiXij,  the  eyelid.) 
The  upper  eyelid. 

EPICO'LIC.  (Epicolicus ; from  cm,  upon,  and 
kwXov,  the  colon.)  That  part  of  the  abdomen  which 
lies  over  the  head  of  the  caecum  and  the  sigmoid  flex- 
ure of  the  colon,  is  called  the  epicolic  region. 

Epicopho'sis.  (From  cm,  and  suxpos,  deaf.)  A 
total  deafness. 

EPICRA'NIUM.  (From  cm,  and  upaviov,  the 
cranium.)  The  common  integuments,  aponeurosis, 
and  muscular  expansion  which  lie  upon  the  cranium. 

Epicra'nius.  See  Occipito  frontalis. 

EPI’CRASIS.  (From  cm,  and  Kepavwpi , to  tem- 
per.) A critical  evacuation  of  .had  humours,  an  at- 
temperation  of  bad  ones.  • When  a cure  is  performed 
in  the  alterative  way,  it  is  called  per  Epicrasin. 

EPICRISIS.  (From  cm,  and  koivw,  to  judge  from.) 
A judgment  of  the  termination  of  a disease  from  pre- 
sent symptoms. 

Epictk'nium.  (From  cm,  about,  and  ic7«f,  the 
pubes.)  The  parts  above  and  about  the  pubes. 

Eph  ye'ma.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  kvuj,  to  conceive.) 
Epicyesis.  Superfaetation. 

Epicye'sis.  See  F.picyema. 

EPIDE  MIC.  ( Epidemicvs ; from  cm,  upon,  and 
itjpos,  the  people.)  A contagious  disease  is  to  termed, 


EP1 


that  attacks  many  people  at  the  same  season,  and  in 
the  same  place ; thus,  putrid  fever,  plague,  dysentery, 
&c.  are  often  epidemic. 

EPIDE'NDRUM.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  SevSpoy,  a 
tree ; because  all  this  genus  of  plants  grow  parasiti- 
cally  on  the  trunks  or  branches  of  trees.)  The  name 
of  a gfenus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class, 
Chynandria;  Order,  Monandria. 

Epidenorum  vanilla.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  vanelloe  plant.  Vanilla;  Banlia;  Banilas ; Ara- 
cu8  aromaticus ; Epidendrum — scandens , foliis  ovato 
oblongis  nervosis  sessilibus  caulinis , cirrliis  spiralibus 
of  Linnaeus.  The  vanelloe  is  a long,  flattish  pod,  con- 
taining, under  a wrinkled  brittle  shell,  a reddish  brown 
pulp,  with  small  shining  black  seeds,  which  have  an 
unctuous  aromatic  taste,  and  a fragrant  smell  like  that 
of  some  of  the  finer  balsams  heightened  with  musk. 
Although  chiefly  used  as  perfumes,  they  are  said  to 
possess  aphrodisiac  virtues. 

En' deris.  (From  £7n,  and  Sspas , the  skin.}  The 
clitoris. 

EPIDE'RMIS,  (From  em,  upon,  and  Seppa,  the 
true  skin.)  The  scarf-skin.  See  Cuticle. 

Epi'desis.  (From  £7rj,  upon,  and  Sew,  to  bind.)  A 
bandage  to  stop  a discharge  of  blood. 

Epide'smus.  (From  eizi,  upon,  and  5eu),  to  bind.) 
A bandage  by  which  splints,  bolsters,  &c.  are  secured. 

EPIDI'DYMIS.  (From  £7rt,  upon,  and  diSvpos,  a 
testicle.)  A hard,  vascular,  oblong  substance,  that  lies 
upon  the  testicle,  formed  of  a convolution  of  the  vas 
deferens.  Ft  has  a thick  end,  which  is  convex,  and 
situated  posteriorly  ; and  a thin  end,  which  is  rather 
flat,  and  situated  interiorly.  The  epididymis  adheres 
to  the  testicle  by  its  two  extremities  only,  for  its  middle 
part  is  free,  forming  a bag,  to  which  the  tunica  vagi- 
nalis of  the  testicle  is  attached. 

Epi'dosis.  (From  eiriSiSwpi,  to  grow  upon.)  A pre- 
ternatural enlargement  of  any  part. 

EPIDOTE.  Pistacite  of  Werner.  Acanticone  from 
Norway.  A sub-species  of  prismatoidal  augite.  A 
compounded  ore,  containing  silica,  alumina,  lime,  ox- 
ide of  iron,  oxide  of  manganese,  found  in  primitive 
beds  and  veins,  along  with  augite,  hornblende,  calca- 
reous spar,  &c. 

Epi'drome.  (From  exidpepu),  to  run  upon.)  An 
afflux  of  humours. 

EPIGA'STRIC.  (Epigastricus ; from  £7ri,  upon, 
or  above,  and  ya^rjp,  the  stomach.)  That  part  of  the 
abdomen  that  lies  over  the  stomach,  is  called  the  epi- 
gastric region ; it  reaches  from  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
to  an  imaginary  line  above  the  navel,  supposed  to  be 
drawn  from  one  extremity  of  the  last  of  the  false  ribs 
to  the  other.  Its  sides  are  called  hypochondria,  and 
are  covered  by  the  false  ribs,  between  which  lies  the 
epigastrium. 

EPIGA  STRIUM.  (From  eiri,  upon,  or  above,  and 
yawp,  the  belly.)  The  part  immediately  over  the 
stomach. 

EPIGENESIS.  A name  given  by  the  ancients,  to 
that  theory  of  generation  which  consists  in  regarding 
the  foetus  as  the  joint  production  of  matter  afforded  by 
both  sexes. 

EPIGENNE'MA.  (From  eniyivopac,  to  generate 
upon.}  1.  The  f ur  on  the  tongue. 

2.  An  accessory  symptom. 

EPIGENNE'SIS.  See  Epigennema. 

EPIGINO'MENA.  (From  cmyivopai , to  succeed 
or  supervene.)  Galen  says,  they  are  those  symp- 
toms which  naturally  succeed,  or  may  be  expected 
in  the  progress  of  a disease ; but  Foesius  says,  they 
are  accessions  of  some  other  affection  to  diseases, 
which  never  happen  but  in  stubborn  and  malignant 
diseases. 

EPIGLO'SSUM.  (From  em , upon,  and  yXuxrca, 
the  tongue:  so  called  because  a less  leaf  grows  above 
the  larger  in  the  shape  of  a tongue.)  The  Alexandrian 
laurel,  a species  of  Rusciis. 

EPIGLO  TTIS.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  y^rjig,  the 
tongue.)  The  cartilage  at  the  root  of  the  tongue  that 
falls  upon  the  glottis  or  superior  opening  of  the  larynx. 
Its  figure  is  nearly  oval ; it  is  concave  posteriorly,  and 
convex  anteriorly.  Its  apex  or  superior  extremity  is 
loose,  and  is  always  elevated  upwards  by  its  own 
elasticity.  While  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  drawn 
backwards  in  swallowing,  the  epiglottis  is  put  over  the 
aperture  of  the  larynx,  hence  it  shuts  up  the  passage 
from  the  mouth  into  the  larynx.  The  base  of  the  epi- 


EPI 

glottis  is  fixed  to  the  thyroid  cartilage,  the  os  hyoidee, 
and  the  base  of  the  tongue,  by  a strong  ligament. 

Epiglo'ttum.  (From  £7uyA(or7<s,  the  epiglottis, 
which  it  resembles  in  shape.)  An  instrument  men 
tioned  by  Paracelsus  for  elevating  the  eyelids. 

EPIGLOU'TIS.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  yXov^os,  the 
buttocks.)  The  superior  parts  of  the  buttocks. 

Epigo'natis.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  yovv,  the  knee.) 
The  patella  or  knee-pan. 

Epigo'nidks.  (From  tpi,  and  yovv,  the  knee.)  The 
muscles  inserted  into  the  knees. 

Epi  gonum.  (From  cmyivouai,  to  proceed  upon.) 
A superfeetation. 

Epile'mpsis.  See  Epilepsy. 

Epile'ntia.  Corrupted  from  epilepsia. 

EPILEPSY.  ( Epilepsia , ce,  f. ; from  cniXap^avw, 
to  seize  upon : so  called,  from  the  suddenness  of  its 
attack.)  It  is  also  called  falling  sickness,  from  the 
patient  suddenly  falling  to  the  ground  on  an  attack  of 
this  disease.  By  the  ancients  it  was  termed,  from  its 
affecting  the  mind,  the  most  noble  part  of  the  rational 
creature,  the  sacred  disease.  It  consists  of  convul- 
sions with  sleep,  and  usually  froth  issuing  from  the 
mouth.  It  is  a genus  of  disease  in  the  class  JVew- 
roses,  and  order  Spasmi,  of  Cullen,  and  contains  three 
species : 

1.  Epilepsia  cerebralis ; attacking  suddenly  without 
manifest  cause,  and  not  preceded  by  any  unpleasant 
sensation,  unless  perhaps  some  giddiness  or  dimness  of 
sight. 

2.  Epilepsia  sympathica;  without  manifest  cause, 
but  preceded  by  a sensation  of  an  aura  ascending  from 
some  part  of  the  body  to  the  head. 

3.  Epilepsia  occasionalis ; arising  from  manifest 
iwitation,  and  ceasing  on  the  removal  of  this.  It  com- 
prehends several  varieties a.  Epilepsia  traumatica , 
arising  from  an  injury  of  the  head:  b.  Epilepsia  d do- 
lore,  from  pain  : c.  Epilepsia  verminosa , from  the  irri- 
tation of  worms:  d.  Epilepsia  d veneno,  from  poisons: 
e.  Epilepsia  exanthematica , from  the  repulsion  of  cuta- 
neous eruptions:  f.  Epilepsia  d cruditate  ventriculi , 
from  crudities  of  the  stomach:  g.  Epilepsia  ab  inani 
tione,  from  debility : h.  Epilepsia  uterina,  from  hys- 
terical affections:  i.  Epilepsia  ex  onanismo,  from 
onanism,  &c. 

Epilepsy  attacks  by  fits,  and  after  a certain  duration 
goes  off,  leaving  the  person  most  commonly  in  his 
usual  state ; but  sometimes  a considerable  degree  of 
stupor  and  weakness  remain  behind,  particularly  where 
the  disease  has  frequent  recurrences.  It  is  oftenermet 
with  among  children  than  grown  persons,  and  boys 
seem  more  subject  to  its  attacks  than  girls.  Its  returns 
are  periodical,  and  its  paroxysms  commence  more 
frequently  in  the  night  than  in  the  day,  being  some- 
what connected  with  sleep.  It  is  sometimes  coun- 
terfeited, in  order  to  extort  charity  or  excite  com- 
passion. 

Epilepsy  is  properly  distinguished  into  sympathetic 
and  idiopathic,  being  considered  as  sympathetic,  when 
produced  by  an  affection  in  some  other  part  of  the 
body,  such  as  acidities  in  the  stomach,  worms,  teeth- 
ing, &c.  as  idiopathic  when  it  is  a primary  disease, 
neither  dependent  on  nor  proceeding  from  any  other. 

The  causes  which  give  rise  to  epilepsy  are  blows, 
wounds,  fractures,  and  other  injuries,  done  to  the  head 
by  external  violence,  together  with  lodgments  of  water 
in  the  brain,  tumours,  concretions,  and  polypi.  Violent 
affections  of  the  nervous  system,  sudden  frights,  fits  of 
passion,  great  emotions  of  the  mind,  acute  pains  in 
any  part,  worms  in  the  stomach  or  intestines,  teething, 
the  suppression  of  long-accustomed  evacuations,  too 
great  emptiness  or  repletion,  and  poisons  received  into 
the  body,  are  causes  which  likewise  produce  epilepsy. 
Sometimes  it  is  hereditary,  and  at  others  it  depends  on 
a predisposition  arising  from  mobility  of  the  senso- 
rium,  which  is  occasioned  either  by  plethora,  or  a state 
of  debility. 

An  attack  of  epilepsy  is  now  and  then  preceded  by. 
a heavy  pain  in  the  head,  dimness  of  sight,  noise  in 
the  ears,  palpitations,  flatulency  in  the  stomach  and 
intestines,  weariness,  and  a small  degree  of  stupor, 
and  in  some  cases,  there  prevails  a sense  of  something 
like  a cold  vapour  or  aura  arising  up  to  the  head  ; but 
it  more  generally  happens  that  the  patient  falls  down 
suddenly  without  much  previous  notice;  his  eyes  are 
distorted,  or  turns  so  that  only  the  whites  of  them  can 
be  seen ; his  fingers  are  closely  clenched,  and  the  trunk 

333 


EPI 


EPI 


’ «f  his  body,  particularly  on  one  side,  is  much  agitated ; 
he  foams  at  the  mouth,  and  thrusts  out  his  tongue, 
which  often  suffers  great  injury  from  the  muscles  of 
the  lower  jaw  being  affected ; he  loses  all  sense  of 
feeling,  and  not  unfrequently  voids  both  urine  and 
faeces  involuntarily. 

The  spasms  abating,  he  recovers  gradually;  but  on 
coming  to  himself  feels  languid  and  exhausted,  and 
retains  not  the  smallest  recollection  of  what  has  passed 
during  the  fit. 

When  the  disease  arises  from  an  hereditary  disposi- 
tion, or  comes  on  after  the  age  of  puberty,  or  where 
the  fits  recur  frequently,  and  are  of  long  duration,  it 
will  be  very  difficult  to  effect  a cure : but  when  its  at- 
tacks are  at  an  early  age,  and  occasioned  by  worms, 
or  any  accidental  cause,  it  may  in  general  be  removed 
with  ease.  In  some  cases,  it  has  been  entirely  carried 
off  by  the  occurrence  of  a fever,  or  by  the  appearance 
of  a cutaneous  eruption.  It  has  been  known  to  ter- 
minate in  apoplexy,  and  in  some  instances  to  produce 
a loss  of  the  powers  of  the  mind,  and  to  bring  on 
idiotism. 

The  appearances  usually  to  be  observed  on  dissec- 
tion, are  serous  and  sanguineous  effusion,  a turgid  tense 
state  of  the  vessels  of  the  brain  without  any  effusion, 
a dilatation  of  some  particular  part  of  the  brain,  ex- 
crescences, polypi,  and  hydatids,  adhering  to  it,  and 
obstructing  its  functions,  and  likewise  ulcerations. 

During  the  epileptic  paroxysm  in  general,  little  or 
nothing  is  to  be  done,  except  using  precautions,  that 
the  patient  may  not  injure  himself;  and  it  will  be  pru- 
dent to  remove  any  tiling  which  may  compress  the 
veins  of  the  neck,  to  obviate  congestion  in  the  head. 
Should  there  be  a considerable  determination  of  blood 
to  this  part,  or  the  patient  very  plethoric,  it  may  be 
proper,  if  you  can  keep  him  steady,  to  open  a vein,  or 
Ihe  temporal  artery  ; and  in  weakly  constitutions  the 
post  powerful  antispasmodics  may  be  tried  in  the  form 
pf  clyster,  as  they  could  hardly  be  swallowed : but 
there  is  very  seldom  time  for  such  measures.  In  the 
Intervals,  the  treatment  consists : 1.  In  obviating  the 
feeveral  exciting  causes.  2.  In  correcting  any  observ- 
able predisposition.  3.  In  the  use  of  those  means, 
Ivhich  are  most  likely  to  break  through  the  habit  of  re- 
currence. 

I.  The  manner  of  fulfilling  the  first  indication  re- 
tires little  explanation  ; after  an  injury  to  the  head, 
t>r  where  there  is  disease  of  the  bone,  an  operation  may 
De  necessary,  to  remove  irritation  from  the  brain  ; in 
children  teething,  the  gums  ought  to  be  lanced : where 
the  bowels  are  foul,  or  worms  suspected,  active  purga- 
tives should  be  exhibited,  &c.  In  those  instances  in 
which  the  aura  epileptica  is  perceived,  it  has  been  re- 
commended to  destroy  the  part,  where  it  originates,  or 
divide  the  nerve  going  to  it,  or  correct  the  morbid  ac- 
tion by  a blister,  &c. ; such  means  would  certainly  be 
proper  when  there  is  any  disease  discoverable  in  it. 
Making  a tight  ligature  on  the  limb  above  has  some- 
times prevented  a fit;  but,  perhaps,  only  through  the 
medium  of  the  imagination. 

II.  Where  a plethoric  state  appears  to  lay  the  foun- , 
dation  of  the  disease,  which  is  often  the  case,  the  pa- 
tient must  be  restricted  to  a low  diet,  frequent  purges 
exhibited,  and  the  other  excretions  kept  up,  and  he 
should  take  regular  moderate  exercise,  avoiding  what- 
ever may  determine  the  blood  to  the  head ; and  to 
counteract  such  a tendency,  occasional  cupping,  blis- 
ters, issues,  &c.  may  be  useful,  as  well  as  the  shower- 
bath  ; but  in  urgent  circumstances,  the  lancet  ought  to 
be  freely  used.  If,  on  the  contrary,  there  are  marks 
of  inanition  and  debility,  a generous  diet,  with  tonic 
medicines,  and  other  means  of  strengthening  the  sys- 
tem, will.Le  proper.  The  vegetable  tonics  have  not 
been  so  successful  in  this  disease  as  t!;e  metallic  pre- 
parations, particularly  the  sulphate  of  zinc,  the  nitrate 
of  silver,  and  the  ammoniated  copper,  but  this  cannot 
perhaps  be  so  safely  persevered  in  : where  the  patient 
is  remarkably  exsanguineous,cha!ybeates  may  answer 
better ; and,  in  obstinate  cases,  the  arsenical  solution 
might  have  a cautious  trial.  In  irritable  constitutions, 
sedatives  are  indicated,  as  digitalis,  opium,  &c. : but 
the  free  use  of  opium  is  restricted  by  a tendency  to 
congestion  in  the  head.  Where  syphilis  appears  to  be 
concerned,  a course  of  mercury  is  proper:  in  scrofu- 
lous habits,  bark,  or  steel,  with  iodine,  soda,  and  sea- 
bathing ; and  so  on. 

III.  The  third  division  of  remedies  comes  especially 

334 


In  use,  where  the  fits  are  frequent,  or  where  their  re- 
currence can  be  anticipated ; emetics  will  often  pre- 
vent them,  or  a full  dose  of  opium  ; also  other  power- 
ful antispasmodics,  as  tether,  musk,  valerian,  &r. : or 
strong  odours,  andfri  short  any  thing  producing  a con- 
siderable impression  on  the  system.  Bark,  taken  large.- 
ly,  might  perhaps  be  more  successful  on  this  principle. 
The  disease  has  sometimes  been  cured,  especially 
when  originating  from  sympathy,  by  inspiring  fear  or 
horror;  and  many  frivolous  charms  may,  no  doubt 
have  taken  effect  through  the  medium  of  the  imagina- 
tion. Also  long  voyages  have  removed  it,  which  might 
especially  be  hoped  for  at  the  age  of  puberty,  particu- 
larly if  a considerable  change  in  the  mode  of  life  were 
made  in  other  respects ; those  who  had  lived  indo- 
lently being  obliged  to  exert  themselves,  the  diet  pro- 
perly adapted  to  the  state  of  the  system,  &c. 

EPILO'BIUM.  (From  titi  'XofSov  iov,  a violet  or 
beautiful  flower,  growing  on  apod.)  'The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system.  Class,  Oc- 
tandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Epilobium  angustifolium.  Rose- bay- willow  herb. 
The  young  tender  shoots  cut  in  the  spring,  and  dressed 
as  asparagus,  are  little  inferior  to  it. 

Epime'dium.  The  plant  barren-wort. 

Epimo'rius.  (Fro  em,  and  papa>,  to  divide.)  An 
obsolete  term,  formerly  applied  to  an  unequal  pulse. 

Epimy'lis.  (From  siri,  and  pvXy,  the  knee.)  The 
patella  or  knee-bone. 

Epineneu’cus.  (From  mveuw,  to  nod  or  incline.) 
An  unequal  pulse. 

Epino  tium.  (From  eve,  upon,  and  vtojos,  the 
back.)  The  shoulder-blade. 

EPINY'CTIS.  (From  £tti,  and  w\,  night.)  A pus- 
tule,  which  rises  in  the  night,  forming  an  angry  tumour 
on  the  skin  of  the  arms,  hands,  and  thighs,  of  the  size 
of  a lupine,  of  a dusky  red,  and  sometimes  of  a livid 
and  pale  colour,  with  great  inflammation  and  pain.  In 
a few  days  it  breaks,  and  sloughs  away. 

Epipa'ctis.  (From  £7n-a*7ow,  to  coagulate  ) A 
plant  mentioned  by  Dioscorides ; and  so  named  be- 
cause its  juice  was  said  to  coagulate  milk. 

Epifaroxy'smus.  (From  etti,  upon,  and  t:apo\vc- 
poj,  a paroxysm.)  An  unusual  frequency  of  febrile 
exacerbation. 

Epipa'stum.  (From  Errt,  upon,  a'bd  iracrau,  to 
sprinkle.)  Any  powdered  drug  sprinkled  on  the  body. 

Efipe'chys.  (From  £7rt,  above,  and  ntjxvSt  cur 
bit.)  That  part  of  the  arm  above  the  cubit. 

Epiphlogi'sma.  (From  ej rt,  upon,  and  ^Aoytfw,  to 
inflame.)  1.  Violent  inflammation,  or  burning  heat  in 
any  part,  attended  with  pain,  tumour,  and  redness. 

2 A name  given  by  Hippocrates  to  the  shinnies. 

EPI  PHORA.  (From  tititpepw,  to  carry  forcibly.) 
The  watery  eye.  An  involuntary  flow  of  tears.  A su- 
perabundant flowing  of  a serous  or  aqueous  humour 
from  the  eyes.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , 
and  order  dpocenoses,  of  Cullen.  The  humour  which 
flows  very  copiously  from  the  eye  in  epiphora,  appears 
to  be  furnished,  not  only  by  the  lachrymal  gland,  but 
from  the  whole  surface  of  the  conjunctive  membrane, 
Meibomius’s  glands,  and  the  caruncula  lachrymalis; 
which  increased  and  morbid  secretion  may  be  induced 
from  any  stimulus  seated  between  the  globe  of  the  eye 
and  lids,  as  sand,  acrid  fumes,  and  the  like;  or  it  may 
arise  from  the  stimulus  of  active  inflammation ; or  from 
the  acrimony  of  scrofula,  measles,  small-pox,  &c.,  or 
from  general  relaxation.  The  disease  may  also  arise 
from  a more  copious  secretion  of  tears,  than  the  puucta 
lachrymalia  can  absorb,  or,  as  is  most  common,  from 
an  obstruction  in  the  lachrymal  canal,  in  consequence 
of  which  the  tears  are  prevented  from  passing  freely 
from  the  eye  into  the  nose. 

EPIPHRAG.M A.  The  slender  membrane  which 
sometimes  shuts  the  peristoma  of  mosses,  as  is  seen 
in  Polytricum. 

EPI  PHYSIS.  (From  m,  upon,  and  0uw,  to  grow.) 
Any  portion  of  bone  growing  upon  another,  but  sepa- 
rated from  it  by  a cartilage. 

Epipla'sma.  (From  £irt,  upon,  and  TrXacoau,  to 
spread.)  1.  A poultice. 

2.  A name  for  an  application  of  wheat  meal,  boiled 
in  hydrelcpum,  to  wounds. 

EPIPLO.  (From  cmirXoov,  the  omentum.)  ftamea 
compounded  of  this  word  belong  to  parts  connected 
with,  or  disease  of,  the  epiploon. 

EPIPLOCE'LE.  (From  tm■n\oov^  the  omentum, 


EPI 


EPS 


and  Kti'Stj,  a tumour.)  An  omental  hernia.  A rupture 
produced  by  the  protrusion  of  a portion  of  the  omen- 
tum. S ee.  Hernia  omentalis. 

Epiplocomi  stis.  (From  cmirXoov,  the  omentum, 
and  kohiZ, o>,  to  carry.)  One  who  has  the  omentum 
morbidly  large. 

Epiploic  appendages.  See  Jlppendiculce  epiploicoe. 

EPIPLOl'TIS.  (From  cmnXoov,  the  omentum.) 
An  inflammation  of  the  process  of  the  peritonaeum, 
that  forms  the  epiploon  or  omentum.  See  Peritonitis. 

EPlPLOO’MPHALON.  (From  cmirXoov,  the  omen- 
tum, and  oprpaXos,  the  navel.)  An  omental  hernia 
protruding  at  the  navel. 

EPI'P  LOON.  (From  cmirXoco,  to  sail  over,  because 
it  is  mostly  found  floating,  as  it  were,  upon  the  intes- 
tines.) See  Omentum. 

EPIPLOSCHEOCE'LE.  (From  mrrAoov,the 
omentum,  o<jxcov,  the  scrotum,  and  KrjXrj,  a tumour  or 
hernia.)  A rupture  of  the  omentum  iuto  the  scrotum, 
or  a scrotal  hernia  containing  omentum. 

Epipo'lasis.  (From  cmiroXa^u),  to  swim  on  the  top.) 
1.  A fluctuation  of  humours. 

2.  A species  of  chemical  sublimation. 

Epipo'ma.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  ir upa,  a lid.)  An 
instrument  to  cover  the  shoulder  in  a luxation. 

Epiporo'ma.  (From  emmopca),  to  harden.)  A hard 
tumour  about  the  joints. 

Epipty'xis.  (From  cmirjvoau),  to  close  up.)  A 
spasmodic  closing  of  the  lips. 

Epipyre'xis.  (From  cm,  and  miper'Jii),  to  be  fever- 
ish.) A rapid  exacerbation  in  a fever. 

Epirige  sis.  (From  cm,  and  ptyco),  to  become  cold.) 
An  unusual  degree  of  cold,  or  repetition  of  rigors. 

Epi'rrhoe.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  poo,  to  flow.) 
An  influx  or  afflux  of  humours  to  any  part. 

EPISARCI'DIUM.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  aapl,  the 
flesh.)  An  anasarca,  cr  dropsy,  spread  between  the 
skin  and  flesh. 

EPISCHE'SES.  (From  cmax cw,  to  restrain.)  A 
suppression  of  excretions.  It  is  an  order  in  the  class 
Locales  of  Cullen’s  Nosology. 

EPI'SCHIUM.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  rtr%tov,  the 
hip-bone.)  The  os  pubis. 

EPISCOPA'L.  (From  episcopus,  a bishop,  or  mi- 
tred dignitary.)  Of,  or  belonging  to  a bishop:  applied 
to*a  valve  at  the  orifice  between  the  left  auricle  and 
ventricle  of  the  heart.  See  Mitral  valve. 

Epispa'smus.  (From  emairaw,  to  draw  together.) 
A quick  inspiration. 

EPISPA'STIC.  ( F.pispasticus ; from  cmairau),  to 
draw  together.)  Those  substances  which  are  capable, 
when  applied  to  the  surface  of  the  body,  of  producing 
a serous  or  puriform  discharge,  by  exciting  a previous 
stale  of  inflammation.  The  term,  though  compre- 
hending iikewise  issues  and  setons,  is  more  commonly 
restricted  to  blisters — those  applications  which,  ex- 
citing inflammation  on  the  skin,  occasion  a thin  serous 
fluid  to  be  poured  from  the  exhaiants,  raise  the  cuticle, 
and  form  the  appearance  of  a vesicle.  This  effect 
arises  from  their  strong  stimulating  power,  and  to  this 
stimulant  operation  and  the  pain  they  excite,  are  to  be 
ascribed  the  advantages  derived  from  them  in  the 
treatment  of  disease.  The  evacuation  they  occasion 
is  too  inconsiderable  to  have  any  material  effect.  See 
Blister. 

Episph-Je'ria.  (From  cm,  and  oQaipa,  a sphere  : so 
called  from  the  spherical  shape  of  the  brain.)  The 
windings  of  the  exterior  surface  of  the  brain  ; or  the 
winding  vessels  upon  it. 

Efista'gmus.  (From  eiri,  and  j-agw,  to  trickle 
down.)  A catarrh. 

Epistaphyu'nus.  (From  f7rt,  and  ^arpvXrj,  the 
uvula.)  See  Uvula. 

EPISTA'XIS.  (From  emsa^u,  to  distil  from.) 
Bleeding  at  the  nose,  with  pain  or  fulness  of  the  head. 
A genus  of  disease  arranged  by  Culien  in  the  class 
Pyrexue,  and  order  Htemorrhagias. 

Persons  of  a sanguine  and  plethoric  habit,  and  not 
yet  advanced  to  manhood,  are  very  liable  to  be  at- 
tacked with  this  complaint  : females  being  much  less 
subject  to  it  than  males,  particularly  after  menstruation. 

Epistaxis  comes  on  at  times  without  any  previous 
warning;  but  at  others,  it  is  preceded  by  a pain  and 
heaviness  in  the  head,  flushing  in  the  face,  heat  and 
itching  in  the  nostrils,  a throbbing  of  the  temporal  ar- 
teries, and  a quickness  of  the  pulse.  In  some  in- 
stances a coldness  of  the  feet,  and  shivering  over  the 


whole  body,  together  with  a costive  belly,  are  observed 
to  precede  an  attack  of  this  haemorrhage. 

This  complaint  is  to  be  considered  as  of  little  con- 
sequence, when  occurring  in  young  persons,  being 
never  attended  with  any  danger;  but  when  it  arises 
in  those  who  are  advanced  in  life,  flows  profusely,  and 
returns  frequently,  it  indicates  too  great  fulness  of  the 
vessels  of  the  head,  and  not  unfrequently  precedes 
apoplexy,  palsy,  &c.  and,  therefore,  in  such  cases,  is  to 
be  regarded  as  a dangerous  disease.  When  this 
haemorrhage  arises  in  any  putrid  disorder,  it  is  to  be 
considered  as  a fatal  symptom. 

In  general,  we  need  not  be  very  anxious  to  stop 
a discharge  of  blood  from  the  nose,  particularly 
where  there  are  marks  of  fulness  of  the  vessels  of 
the  head:  but  if  it  occurs  under  a debilitated  state  of 
the  system,  or  becomes  very  profuse,  means  must  be 
employed  to  suppress  it.  These  are  chiefly  of  a local 
nature ; applying  pressure  to  the  bleeding  vessels,  in- 
troducing astringents  into  the  nostrils,  as  solutions  of 
alum,  sulphate  of  zinc,  sulphate  of  copper,  &c.  apply- 
ing cold  to  the  head,  or  to  some  very  sensible  part  of 
the  skin,  as  in  the  course  of  the  spine,  &c.  At  the 
same  time  the  patient  should  be  kept  in  the  erect  posi- 
tion. If  the  ha:morrhage  be  of  an  active  character, 
the  antiphlogistic  regimen  should  be  carefully  ob- 
served: the  patient  kept  cool -and  quiet;  the  saline 
cathartics,  refrigerants,  as  nitrate  of  potassa  and  the 
acids,  digitalis,  diaphoretics,  &c.  administered  inter- 
nally ; and  blood  may  be  taken  from  the  temples  by 
leeches,  or  even  from  the  arm,  if  the  patient  be  very 
plethoric.  Sometimes,  after  the  failure  of  other  means, 
closing  the  posterior  as  well  as  anterior  outlets  from  the 
nose,  and  preventing  the  escape  of  the  blood  for  some 
time  mechanically,  has  been  successful ; and  this 
might  be  particularly  proper,  where  it  was  discharged 
copiously  into  the  fauces,  so  as  to  endanger  suffocation, 
on  the  patient  falling  asleep. 

EPISTHO'TONOS.  (From  cmaQcv,  forwards,  and 
TCivu),  to  extend.)  A spasmodic  affection  of  muscles 
drawing  the  body  forwards.  See  Tetanus. 

Efisto'mion.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  $-opa,  a mouth.) 

1.  A stopper  for  a bottle. 

2.  A venthole  of  a furnace,  called  the  register. 

ErisTRo'pnALus.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  $ ’pe<pw,  to 

turnabout.)  Epistrophia,  and  Epistrophis.  Applied 
to  the  first  vertebra  of  the  neck,  because  it  turns  about 
upon  the  second  as  upon  an  axis. 

Epi'strophe'.  (From  cm^pccpco,  to  invert.)  1.  An 
inversion  of  any  part,  as  when  the  neck  is  turned 
round. 

'2.  A return  of  a disorder  which  has  ceased. 

EPI  STROPHEUS.  (From  cm^pocpau,  to  turn 
round,  because  the  head  is  turned  upon  it.)  The  se- 
cond cervical  vertebra.  See  Dentatus. 

Epi'strophis.  See  Epistrophalus. 

Epi'tasis.  (From  cm,  and  rcivo),  to  extend  ) The 
beginning  and  increase  of  a paroxysm  or  disease. 

EPITHE'LIUIVI.  The  cuticle  on  the  red  part  of  the 
lips. 

Epithe'ma.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  riOr/pt,  to  apply.) 
A term  formerly  applied  to  a lotion,  fomentation,  or 
any  external  application. 

Epitiiema'tium.  The  same. 

Epi'thesis.  (From  cm,  and  riOrjpi,  to  cover,  or  lay 
upon.)  The  rectification  of  crooked  limbs  by  means  of 
instruments. 

EFITIIY'MUM.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  dvpos,  the 
herb  thyme.)  See  Cuscuta  epithymum. 

Epo'de.  (From  cm,  over,  and  uidy,  a song.)  Epo- 
dos.  The  method  of  curing  distempers  by  incantation. 

Epom'is.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  topos,  the  shoulder.) 
The  acromion,  or  upper  part  of  the  shoulder. 

Epompha'lium.  (From  cm,  upon,  and  op<paXo$,  the 
navel.)  An  application  to  the  navel. 

EPSOM.  The  name  of  a village  in  Surrey,  about 
eighteen  miles  from  London,  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
which  is  a considerable  mineral  spring,  called  Epsom 
water,  Aqua  Epsomensis.  This  water  evaporated  to 
dryness  leaves  a residuum,  the  quantity  of  which  has 
been  estimated  from  an  ounce  and  a half  in  the  gallon, 
to  five  drachms  and  one  scruple.  Of  the  total  resi- 
duum, by  far  the  greater  part,  about  four  or  five-sixths, 
issulphaieof  magnesia  mixed  with  a very  few  muri- 
ates, such  as  that  of  lime,  and  probably  magnesia, 
which  render  it  very  deliquescent,  and  increase  the 
bitterness  of  taste,  till  purified  by  repeated  crvstalliza 


ERE 


ERR 


Cions.  There  is  nothing  sulphurous  or  metallic  ever 
found  in  this  spring.  The  diseases  in  which  it  is  em- 
ployed are  similar  to  those  in  which  we  use  Seidlitz 
water.  There  are  many  other  of  the  simple  saline 
springs  that  might  be  enumerated,  all  of  which  agree 
with  that  of  Epsom,  in  containing  a notable  propor- 
tion of  some  purging  salt,  which,  for  the  most  part,  is 
either  sulphate  of  magnesia,  or  sulphate  of  soda,  or 
often  a mixture  of  both,  such  as  Acton,  Kilburne,  Bag- 
nigge  Wells,  Dog  and  Duck,  St.  George’s  Fields,  &c. 

Epsom  salt.  A purging  salt  formerly  obtained  by 
boiling  down  the  mineral  water  found  in  the  vicinity 
of  Epsom  in  Surrey.  It  is  at  present  prepared  from 
sea  water,  which,  after  being  boiled  down,  and  the 
muriate  of  soda  separated,  deposites  numerous  crystals, 
that  consist  chiefly  of  sulphate  of  magnesia,  and  sold 
in  the  shops  under  the  name  of  sal  catliarticus  amarus, 
or  bitter  purging  salt.  See  Magnesias  sulphas. 

EPU'LIS.  (From  eir i,  and  ovXa,  the  gums.)  A 
small  tubercle  on  the  gums.  It  is  said  sometimes  to 
become  cancerous. 

EPULO'TIC.  ( Epuloticus  ; from  ettovXoco,  to  cica- 
trize.) A term  given  by  surgeons  to  those  applica- 
tions which  promote  the  formation  of  skin. 

EQUISE'TUM.  (From  equus , a horse,  and  seta , a 
bristle:  so  named  from  its  resemblance  to  a horse’s 
tail.)  1.  The  name  of,  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  Cryptogamia ; Order,  Filices. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  Cauda  equina. 
See  Hippuris  vulgaris. 

Equisetum  arvense.  See  Hippwis  ulgaris. 

EQUITANS.  Equitant.  This  term  is  applied  to 
leaves,  which  are  disposed  in  two  opposite  rows,  and 
clasp  each  other  by  their  compressed  base ; as  in  JVar- 
thecium  ossijragum. 

EQUIVALENTS.  A term  introduced  into  chemis- 
try by  Dr.  Wollaston,  to  express  the  system  of  definite 
ratios,  in  which  the  corpuscular  objects  of  this  science 
reciprocally  combine,  referred  to  a common  standard, 
reckoned  unity.  See  Atomic  system. 

E QUUS.  1.  The  horse. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  animals  of  the  order 
Belluce. 

Equus  asinus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  ani- 
mal called  an  ass  ; the  female  affords  a light  and  nutri- 
tious milk.  See  Milk , asses'. 

Era'nthemus.  (From  rjp,  the  spring,  and  avOepog, 
a flower:  so  called  because  it  flowers  in  the  spring.) 
A sort  of  chamomile. 

ERASIS'TRATUS.  A celebrated  Greek  physi- 
cian, said  to  have  been  born  in  the  island  of  Ceos,  and 
to  have  been  the  most  distinguished  pupil  of  Chrysip- 
pus,  of  the  Cnidian  school.  He  was  the  first,  in  con- 
junction with  Herophilus,  to  dissect  human  bodies, 
anatomy  having  been  before  studied  only  in  brutes ; 
but  the  Ptolemies  having  allowed  them  to  examine 
malefactors,  they  were  enabled  to  make  many  impor- 
tant discoveries.  Celsus  notices  a very  improbable  re- 
port, that  they  opened  the  bodies  of  those  persons 
alive,  to  observe  the  internal  motions ; they  could 
hardly  then  have  maintained,  that  the  arteries  and  left 
ventricle,  do  not  naturally  contain  blood,  but  air  only. 
The  works  of  Erasistratus,  which  were  numerous,  are 
lost;  but,  from  the  account  of  Galen,  he  appears  to 
have  very  accurately  described  the  brain,  which  he 
considered  as  the  common  sensorium  ; also  the  heart 
and  large  vessels ; and  pointed  out  the  office  of  the 
liver  and  kidneys ; but  he  supposed  digestion  perform- 
ed by  trituration.  He  imagined  inflammation  and  fe- 
ver to  arise  from  the  blood  being  forced  through  the 
minute  veins  into  the  corresponding  arteries.  He  was 
averse  to  blood-letting,  or  the  use  of  active  medi- 
cines, but  sometimes  employed  mild  clysters;  trusting, 
however,  principally  to  abstinence,  and  proper  exer- 
cise. Being  tormented  with  an  ulcer  in  the  foot,  at  an 
extreme  old  age,  he  is  said  to  have  terminated  iiis  ex- 
istence by  poison. 

Erate'va  marmelos.  This  plant,  a native  of 
several  parts  of  India,  affords  a fruit  about  the  size  of 
an  orange,  and  covered  with  a hard  bony  shell,  con- 
taining a yellow  viscus  pulp,  of  a most  agreeable  fla- 
vour; which,  when  scooped  out,  and  mixed  with 
sugar  and  orange,  is  brought  to  the  tables  of  the 
grandees  in  India,  who  eat  it  as  a great  delicacy. 
It  is  also  esteemed  as  a sovereign  remedy  against 
dysentery. 

Erebi'nthus.  E pe6ivdos-  The  vetch. 

336 


ERE'CTOR.  The  name  of  several  muscles,  the 
office  of  which  is  to  raise  up  the  part  to  which  they  are 
inserted. 

Erector  clitoridis.  First  muscle  of  the  clitoris 
of  Douglas.  Ischio-cavemosus  of  Winslow,  and  Is- 
cliio-clitoridien  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  clitoris 
that  draws  it  downwards  and  backwards,  and  serves 
to  make  the  body  of  the  clitoris  more  tense,  by  squeez- 
ing the  blood  into  it  from  its  crus.  It  arises  from 
the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium,  and  is  inserted  into  the 
clitoris. 

Erector  penis.  Ischio-cavemosus  of  Winslow, 
and  Ischio-cavemeux  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the 
penis  that  drives  the  urine  or  semen  forwards,  and,  by 
grasping  the  bulb  of  the  urethra,  pushes  the  blood  to- 
wards the  corpus  cavernosum  and  the  glans,  and  thus 
distends  them.  It  arises  from  the  tuberosity  of  the 
ischium,  and  is  inserted  into  the  sides  of  the  cavernous 
substance  of  the  penis. 

ERECTUS.  Upright.  Botanists  use  this  to  ex- 
press the  direction  of  the  stem,  branches,  leaves,  petals, 
stamens,  pistils,  &c. ; as  Caulis  erectus , an  upright 
stem,  as  in  Lysimachia  vulgaris ; folium,  erectum , 
forming  an  acute  angle  with  the  stem,  as  in  Juncus 
articulatus , &c.  The  petals  of  the  k Brassica 
erecta. 

ERETHI'SMUS.  (From  tpeOigu,  to  excite  or  irri- 
tate.) Increased  sensibility  and  irritability.  It  is 
variously  applied  by  modern  writers.  Mr.  Pearson 
has  described  a state  of  the  constitution  produced  by 
mercury  acting  on  it  as  a poison.  He  calls  it  the  mer- 
curial erithismus,  and  mentions  that  it  is  characterized 
by  great  depression  of  strength,  anxiety  _ about  the^ 
pracordia,  irregular  action  of  the  heart,  frequent  sigh- 
ing, trembling,  a small,  quick,  sometimes  intermitting 
pulse,  occasional  vomiting,  a pale,  contracted  counte- 
nance, a sense  of  coldness ; but  the  tongue  is  seldom 
furred,  nor  are  the  vital  and  natural  functions  much 
disturbed.  In  this  state,  any  sudden  exertion  will 
sometimes  prove  fatal. 

Ergaste'rium.  (From  epyov,  work.)  A labora- 
tory : that  part  of  the  furnace  in  which  is  contained' 
the  matter  to  be  acted  upon. 

ERI  CA.  (From  epeucui,  to  break ; so  named  from 
its  fragility,  or  because  it  is  broken  into  rods  to  make 
besoms  of.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnasan  system.  Class,  Octandria ; Order,  Monogxj- 
nia.  Heath. 

Erice'rum.  (From  epeixcri,  heath.)  A medicine  in 
which  heath  is  an  ingredient. 

ERI'GERON.  (Hptytpwv,  of  the  ancient  Greeks; 
from  rjp  the  spring,  and  yrpwv,  an  old  man,  because,  in 
the  spring,  it  has  a white,  hoary  blossom,  like  the 
hair  of  an  old  man.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  ot 
plants.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Polygamia  su 
perfi.ua. 

2.  The  common  chick-weed  is  so  called  in  old  books. 

. See  Scnecio  vulgaris. 

Erigerum.  See  Senecio  vulgaris. 

ERO'SION.  (Erosio ; from  crodo , to  gnaw  off.) 
This  word  is  very  often  used  in  the  same  sense  as  ul- 
ceration, viz.  the  formation  of  a breach  or  chasm 
in  the  substance  of  parts,  by  the  action  of  the  absor- 
bents. 

EROSUS.  Jagged.  A leaf  is  called  folium  erosum, 
the  margin  of  which  is  irregularly  cut  or  notched, 
especially  when  otherwise  divided  besides;  as  in  Se- 
necio squalidus. 

EllOTIA'NUS,  the  author  of  a Glossary,  contain- 
ing an  explanation  of  the  terms  In  Hippocrates,  lived 
in  the  reign  of  Nero.  The  work  was  printed  at  Ve- 
nice, in  1566 ; and  also  annexed  to  Foesius’s  Edition 
of  Hippocrates. 

EROTOMA'NIA.  (From  cpio s,  love,  and  pavia, 
madness.)  That  melancholy,  or  madness,  which  is 
the  effect  of  love. 

E'rpes.  (From  cpiru),  to  creep : so  named  from  their 
gradually  increasing  in  size.  See  Herpes. 

ERRATIC.  (Erraticus ; from  erro , to  wander.) 
Wandering  ; irregular.  A term  occasionally  applied 
to  pains,  or  any  disease  which  is  not  fixed,  but  moves 
from  one  part  to  another,  as  gout,  rheumatism,  &c. 

E'RRHINE.  (Errhinus ; eppiva,  from  ev,  in,  and 
ptv,  the  nose.)  By  errhines  are  to  be  understood  those 
medicines  which,  when  topically  applied  to  the  inter- 
nal membrane  of  the  nose,  excite  sneezing,  and  in- 
crease the  secretion,  independent  of  any  mechanical 


ERY 


ERY 

irritation.  The  articles  belonging  to  this  class  may  be 
referred  to  two  orders. 

1.  Sternutatory  errhines ; as  nicotiana , helleborus , 
cuphorbium,  which  are  selected  lor  the  torpid,  the 
vigorous,  but  not  plethoric,  and  those  to  whom  any 
degree  of  evacuation  would  not  be  liprtful. 

§.  Evacuating  errhines;  as  asarum , &c.  which  are 
calculated  tor  the  phlegmatic  and  infirm. 

E RROR  LOCI.  Boerhaave  is  said  to  have  intro- 
‘ duced  this  term,  from  the  opinion  that  the  vessels  were 
of  different  sizes,  for  the  circulation  of  blood,  lymph, 
and  serum,  and  that  when  the  larger  sized  globules 
were  forced  into  the  less  vessels,  they  became  ob- 
structed, by  an  error  of  place.  But  this  opinion  does 
not  appear  to  be  well-grounded. 

Eru'ca.  (From  erugo,  to  make  smooth ; so  named 
from  the  smoothness  of  its  leaves,  or  from  uro , to 
burn,  because  of  its  biting  quality.)  See  Brassica 
eruca. 

Eruca  syl'vestris.  The  wild  rocket.  SeeBras- 
sica  eruca. 

ERUCTATION.  Belching. 

ERUPTION.  Eruptio.  A discoloration,  or  spots 
on  the  skin ; as  the  eruption  of  small-pox,  measles, 
nettle-rash,  & c. 

Eruthema.  (From  epvdw,  to  make  red.)  A fiery 
red  tumour,  or  pustules  on  the  skin. 

E'RVUM.  ( Quasi  arvum , a field,  because  it  grows 
wild  in  the  fields;  or  from  eruo,  to  pluck  out,  because 
it  is  diligently  plucked  from  corn.)  The  tare.  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Diadelphia;  Order,  Decandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  tare.  See  Ervum 
ervilia. 

Ervum  ervilia.  Orobus.  The  seeds  of  this  plant, 
Ervum  ervilia — germinibus  undatoplicatis , foliis  im- 
paripinnatis  of  Linnaeus,  have  been  made  into  bread 
in  times  of  scarcity,  which  is  not  the  most  salubrious. 
The  meal  was  formerly  among  the  resolvent  remedies 
by  way  of  poultice. 

Ervum  lens.  The  systematic  name  of  the  lentil. 
Eens.  Qatcos  of  the  Greeks.  Ervum — pedunculis  sub- 
bifioris  ; seminibus  compressis , converts,  of  Linnaeus. 
There  are  two  varieties ; the  one  with  large,  the  other 
with  small  seeds.  They  are  eaten  in  many  places  as 
we  eat  pease,  than  which  they  are  more  flatulent,  and 
more  difficult  to  digest.  A decoction  of  these  seeds  is 
used  as  a lotion  to  the  ulcerations  after  small-pox  and, 
it  is  said,  with  success. 

ERYNGIUM.  (From  epuyyavw,  to  eructate.) 
Eryngo,  or  sea-holly.  J.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class  Pentandria ; 
Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  sea-holly.  See 
Eryngium  maritimum. 

[“  Eryngium  aquaticum.  Button  snake-root.  The 
Eryngium  aquaticum  is  a native  of  the  southern  states. 
We  are  told  in  Mr.  Elliott’s  botany,  that  the  root  is  of 
a pungent,  bitter,  and  aromatic  taste.  When  chewed, 
it  very  sensibly  excites  a flow  of  saliva.  A decoction 
of  it  is  diaphoretic  and  expectorant,  and  sometimes 
proves  emetic.  It  is  preferred  by  some  physicians  to 
the  Seneca  snake-root,  which  it  much  resembles  in  its 
effects.”  A.] 

Eryngium  campestre.  The  root  of  this  plant, 
Eryngium — foliis  rudicalibus,  amplexicaulibus,  pin- 
nato-lanceolatis,  of  Linnaeus,  is  used  in  many  places 
for  that  of  the  sea-eryngo.  See  Eryngium. 

Eryngium  maritimum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  sea-holly  or  eryngo.  Eryngium— foliis  radicalibus 
subrotundis,  plicutis  spinosis , capitulis  pedunculatis , 
paleis  tricuspidatis , of  Linnaeus.  The  root  of  this 
plant  is  directed  for  medical  use.  It  has  no  particular 
smell,  but  to  the  taste  it  manifests  a grateful  sweet- 
ness ; and,  on  being  chewed  for  some  time,  it  discovers 
a light  aromatic  warmth  or  pungency.  It  was  former- 
ly celebrated  for  its  supposed  aphrodisiac  powers,  but 
it  is  now  very  rarely  employed. 

ERYNGO.  See  Eryngium. 

Eryngo , sea.  See  Eryngium. 

Eryngo-lcaved  lichen.  See  Lichen  islandicus. 

ERY  SIMUM.  (:  rom  epvco,to  draw,  so  called  from 
its  power  of  drawing  and  producing  blisters.  Others 
derive  it  from  airo  rov  epeiKciv , because  the  leaves  are 
much  cut ; others  from  cpmpov , piecious.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Tetradynamia ; Order,  Siliquosa. 


2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  hedge- mustard. 

See  Erysimum  officinale. 

Erysimum  alharia.  The  systematic  name  of 
Jack-in-the-hedge.  Miliaria;  Chamceplion  of  Oriba- 
sius.  Sauce  alone,  or  stinking  hedge-mustard.  The 
plant  to  which  this  name  is  given,  is  the  Erysimum 
foliis  cordatis,  of  Linnams;  it  is  sometimes  exhibited 
in  humid  astlnna  and  dyspnoea,  with  success.  Its 
virtues  are  powerfully  diaphoretic,  diuretic,  and  anti- 
scorbutic. 

Erysimum  barbarea.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  barbarea  of  the  shops.  The  leaves  of  this  plant, 
Erysipium — foliis  lyratis , extimo  subrotundo  of  Lin- 
naeus, may  be  ranked  among  the  antiscorbutics.  They 
are  seldom  used  in  practice. 

Erysimum  officinale.  The.  systematic  name  of 
the  hedge-iuustard.  Erysimum — siliquis  spicce  ad~ 
pressis,  foliis  runcinatis , of  Linnseus.  It  was  former- 
ly much  used  for  its  expectorant  and  diuretic  qualities, 
which  are  now  forgotten.  The  seeds  are  warm  and 
pungent,  and  very  similar  to  those  of  mustard  in  their 
sensible  effects. 

ERYSI  PELAS.  (From  epvco,  to  draw,  and  zsehag, 
adjoining : named  from  the  neighbouring  parts  being 
affected  by  the  eruption.)  Ignis  sacer.  The  rose,  or 
St.  Anthony’s  fire.  A genus,  of  disease  in  the  class 
Pijrexiee , and  order  Exanthemata  of  Cullen.  It  is 
known  by  synoclia  of  two  or  three  days’  continuance, 
with  drowsiness,  and  sometimes  with  delirium ; pulse 
commonly  full  andhard;  then  erythema  of  the  face, 
or  some  other  part,  with  continuance  of  synocha, 
tending  either  to  abscess  or  gangrene.  There  are  two 
species  of  this  disease,  according  to  Cullen : 1.  Erysi- 
pelas vesiculosum,  with  large  blisters : 2.  Erysipelas 
phlyctcenodes , the  shingles  or  an  erysipelas  with  phlyo 
taenae,  or  small  blisters. 

This  disease  is  an  inflammatory  affection,  princi 
pally  of  the  skin,  when  it  makes  its  appearance  ex- 
ternally, and  of  the  mucous  membrane  when  it  is 
seated  internally ; and  is  more  liable  to  attack  women 
and  children,  and  those  of  an  irritable  habit,  than 
those  of  a plethoric  and  robust  constitution. 

It  is  remarkable  that  erysipelas  sometimes  returns 
periodically,  attacking  the  patient  once  or  twice  a year, 
or  even  once  every  month,  and  then  by  its  repeated 
attacks  it  often  gradually  exhaugts  the  strength,  espe- 
cially if  he  be  old  and  of  a bad  habit. 

When  the  inflammation  is  principally  confined  to 
the  skin,  and  is  unattended  by  any  affection  of  the  sys- 
tem, it  is  then  called  erythema ; but  when  the  system 
is  affected,  it  is  named  erysipelas. 

Every  part  of  the  body  is  equally  liable  to  it,  but  it 
more  frequently  appears  on  the  face,  legs,  and  feet, 
than  any  where  else,  when  seated  externally ; and  it 
occurs  oftener  in  warm  climates  than  phlegmonous 
inflammation 

It  is  brought  on  by  all  the  causes  that  are  apt  to  ex- 
cite inflammation,  such  as  injuries  of  all  kinds,  the 
external  application  of  stimulants,  exposure  to  cold, 
and  obstructed  perspiration ; and  it  may  likewise  be 
occasioned  by  a certain  matter  generated  within  the 
body,  and  thrown  out  on  its  surface.  A particular 
state  of  the  atmosphere  seems  sometimes  to  render  it 
epidemical. 

In  slight  cases,  where  it  attacks  the  extremities,  it 
makes  its  appearance  with  a roughness,  heat,  pain,  and 
redness  of  the  skin,  which  becomes  pale  when  the  fin- 
ger is  pressed  upon  it,  and  again  returns  to  its  former 
colour,  when  it  is  removed.  There  prevails  likewise 
a small  febrile  disposition,  and  the  patient  is  rather  hot 
and  thirsty.  If  the  attack  is  mild,  these  symptoms 
will  continue  only  for  a few  days,  the  surface  of  the 
part  affected  will  become  yellow,  the  cuticle  or  scarf- 
skin  will  fall  off  in  scales,  and  no  further  inconve- 
nience will  perhaps  be  experienced ; but  if  the  attack 
has  been  severe,  and  the  inflammatory  symptoms  have 
run  high,  then  there  will  ensue  pains  in  the  head  and 
back,  great  heat,  thirst,  and  restlessness;  the  part 
affected  will  slightly  swell:  the  pulse  will  become 
small  and  frequent;  and  about  the  fourth  day,  a num- 
ber of  little  vesicles,  containing  a limpid,  and,  in  some 
cases,  a yellowish  fluid,  will  arise.  In  some  instances, 
the  fluid  is  viscid,  and  instead  of  running  out,  as  gene- 
rally happens  when  the  blister  is  broken,  it  adheres  to 
and  dries  upon  the  skin. 

In  unfavourable  cases,  these  blisters  sometimes  de- 
generate into  obstinate  ulcers,  which  now  and  then 

337 


ERY 


ESS 


become  gangrenous.  This,  however,  does  not  happen 
frequently ; for  although  it  is  not  uncommon  for  the 
surface  of  the  skin  and  the  blistered  places  to  appear 
livid,  or  even  blackish,  yet  this  usually  disappears  with 
the  other  symptoms. 

The  period  at  which  the  vesicles  show  themselves  is 
very  uncertain.  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  dura- 
tion of  the  eruption,  In  mild  cases,  it  often  disappears 
gradually,  or  is  carried  off  by  spontaneous  sweating. 
In  some  cases  it  continues,  without  showing  any  dis- 
position to  decline,  for  twelve  or  fourteen  days,  or 
longer. 

The  trunk  of  the  body  is  sometimes  attacked  with 
erysipelatous  inflammation,  but  less  frequently  so  than 
the  extremities.  It  is  not  uncommon,  however,  for 
infants  to  be  attacked  in  this  manner  a few  days  after 
birth  ; and  in  these  it  makes  its  appearance  about  the 
genitals.  The  inflamed  skin  is  hard,  and  apparently 
very  painful  to  the  touch.  The  belly  often  becomes 
uniformly  tense,  and- sphacelated  spots  sometimes  are 
to  be  observed.  From  dissections  made  by  Dr.  Un- 
derwood, it  appears,  that  in  this  form  of  the  disease 
the  inflammation  frequently  spreads  to  the  abdominal 
viscera. 

Another  species  of  erysipelatous  inflammation, 
which  most  usually  attacks  the  trunk  of  the  body,  is 
that  vulgarly  known  by  the  name  of  shingles , being  a 
corruption  of  the  French  word  ceingle , which  implies 
a belt.  Instead  of  appearing  a uniform  inflamed 
surface,  it  consists  of  a number  of  little  pimples  ex- 
tending round  the  body  a little  above  the  umbilicus, 
which  have  vesicles  formed  on  them  in  a short  time. 
Little  or  no  danger  ever  attends  this  species  of  erysi- 
pelas. 

When  erysipelas  attacks  the  face,  it  comes  on  with 
chilliness,  succeeded  by  heat,  restlessness,  thirst,  and 
other  febrile  symptoms,  with  a drowsiness  or  tendency 
to  coma  or  delirium,  and  the  pulse  is  very  frequent 
and  full.  At  the  end  of  two  or  three  days,  a fiery  red- 
ness appears  on  some  part  of  the  face,  and  this  extends 
at  length  to  the  scalp,  and  then  gradually  down  the 
neck,  leaving  a tumefaction  in  every  part  the  redness 
has  occupied.  The  whole  face  at  length  becomes  tur- 
gid, and  the  eyelids  are  so  much  swelled  as  to  deprive 
the  patient  of  sight.  When  the  redness  and  swelling 
have  continued  for  some  time,  blisters  of  different 
sizes,  containing  a thin  colourless  acrid  liquor,  arise  on 
different  parts  of  the  face,  and  the  skin  puts  on  a livid 
appearance  in  the  blistered  places ; but  in  those  not 
affected  with  blisters,  the  cuticle,  towards  the  close  of 
the  disease,  falls  off  in  scales. 

No  remission  of  the  fever  takes  place  on  the  appear- 
ance of  the  inflammation  on  the  face ; but,  on  the  con- 
trary, it  is  increased  as  the  latter  extends,  and  both 
will  continue  probably  for  the  space  of  eight  or  ten 
days.  In  the  course  of  the  inflammation,  the  disposi- 
tion to  coma  and  delirium  are  sometimes  so  increased 
as  to  destroy  the  patient  between  the  seventh  and 
eleventh  days  of  the  disease.  When  the  complaint  is 
mild,  and  not  leading  to  a fatal  event,  the  inflamma- 
tion and  fever  generally  cease  gradually  without  any 
evident  crisis. 

If  the  disease  arises  in  a bad  habit  of  body,  occupies 
a part  possessed  of  great  sensibility,  is  accompanied 
with  much  inflammation,  fever,  and  delirium,  and 
these  take  place  at  an  early  period,  we  may  suppose 
the  patient  exposed  to  imminent  danger.  Where 
translations  of  the  morbid  matter  take  place,  and  the 
inflammation  falls  on  either  the  brain,  lungs,  or  abdo- 
minal viscera,  we  may  entertain  the  same  unfavoura- 
ble opinion.  Erysipelas  never  terminates  in  suppura- 
tion, unless  combined  with  a considerable  degree  of 
phlegmonous  inflammation,  which  is,  however,  some- 
times the  case;  but  in  a bad  habit,  it  is  apt  to  termi- 
nate in  gangrene,  in  which  case  there  will  be  also 
great  danger.  When  the  febrile  symptoms  are  mild, 
and  unaccompanied  by  delirium  or  coma,  and  the  in- 
flammation does  not  run  high,  we  need  not  be  appre- 
hensive of  danger. 

Where  the  disease  has  occupied  the  face,  and  proves 
fatal,  inflammation  of  the  brain,  and  its  consequences, 
are  in  some  cases  met  with  on  dissection. 

The  treatment  of  erysipelas  must  proceed  on  the 
antiphlogistic  plan,  varied  however  in  its  activity  ac- 
cording to  the  type  of  the  disease.  When  it  occurs  in 
robust  plethoric  constitutions,  partaking  of  the  phleg- 
monous character,  with  severe  synochal  fever,  it  will 
338 


be  proper  to  begin  by  taking  a moderate  quantity  of 
blood,  then  direct  cooling  saline  purgatives,  antimonial 
diaphoretics,  a light  vegetable  diet,  <Stc.  When  the 
disorder  attacks  the  face,  it  may  be  better  to  use  cup- 
ping behind  the  neck,  and  keep  the  head  somewhat 
raised.  But  if  the  disease  exhibits  rather  the  typhoid 
type,  and  particularly  where  there  is  a tendency  to 
gangrene,  the  patient’s  strength  must  be  supported: 
after  clearing  out  the  prim®  vi®,  and  endeavouring  to 
promote  the  other  secretions  by  mild  evacuants,  when 
the  pulse  begins  to  fail,  a more  nutritious  diet,  with  a 
moderate  quantity  of  wine,  and  the  decoction  of  bark 
with  sulphurie  acid,  or  other  tonic  medicine,  may  be 
resorted  to ; nay,  even  the  bark  in  substance,  and  the 
more  powerful  stimulants,  as  ammonia,  & c.  ought  to 
be  tried,  if  the  preceding  fail.  Should  the  inflamma- 
tion, quitting  the  skin,  attack  an  internal  pa.t,  a blis- 
ter, or  some  rubefacient,  may  help  to  relieve  the  pa- 
tient; and  stimulants  to  the  lower  extremities  will 
likewise  be  proper,  where  the  head  is  severely  affected. 
To  the  inflamed  part  of  the  skin,  applications  must  not 
be  too  freely  made  : where  there  is  much  pain  and 
heat,  cooling  it  occasionally,  with  plain  water,  is  per- 
haps best ; and  where  an  acrid  discharge  occurs,  wash- 
ing it  away  from  time  to  time  with  warm  milk  and 
water.  Should  suppuration  happen,  it  is  important 
to  make  an  early  opening  for  the  escape  of  the  matter, 
to  obviate  the  extensive  sloughings  otherwise  apt  to 
follow,  and  where  gangrene  occurs,  the  fermenting  car 
taplasm  may  be  applied. 

ERYTHE'MA.  (From  epvOpos,  red.)  Inflamma- 
tory blush.  A morbid  redness  of  the  skin,  as  is  ob- 
served upon  the  cheeks  of  hectic  patients  after  eating, 
and  the  skin  covering  bubo,  phlegmon,  &c. 

Erythro  danum.  (From  epvdpos,  red : so  called 
from  the  colour  of  its  juice.)  See  Rubia  tinctorum. 

Erythroeides.  (From"  spvdpos,  red,  and  u6os , a 
likeness  : so  called  from  its  colour.)  A name  given  to 
the  tunica  vaginalis  testis. 

Erythro'nium.  (From  epvOpos,  red  : so  called  from 
the  red  colour  of  its  juice.)  A species  of  satyrion. 

[“Erythronium  Americanum.  TheErythronium 
Americanum  is  an  emetic  in  its  recent  state,  producing 
vomiting  in  the  dose  of  thirty  or  forty  grains.  This 
property  is  impaired  by  drying.  The  affinity  of  the 
plant  to  Colchicum , and  some  others  of  known  activity, 
renders  it  deserving  of  further  investigation.  The 
bulbs  should  be  dug  when  the  leaves  first  appear,  be- 
fore flowering.  A pure  fecula  may  be  obtained  from 
them.” — Biar.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Erythro7 xylum.  (From  epvdpo ?,  red,  and  tyXor, 
wood:  so  named  from  its  colour.)  Logwood.  See 
Hcematoxylum. 

E rythrus.  (From  spvdpos , red:  so  named  from 
the  red  colour  of  its  juice.)  The  sumach.  See  Rhus 
coriaria. 

E’saphe.  (From  eo-a^aw,  to  feel. J The  touch;  or 
feeling  thg  mouth  of  the  womb,  to  ascertain  its  con- 
dition. 

E SCHAR.  (Eff%apa ; from  eu^apoa),  to  scab  over.) 
Eschara.  The  portion  of  flesh  that  is  destroyed  by 
the  application  of  a caustic,  and  which  sloughs  away. 

ESCHARO'TIC.  ( Escharoticus ; from  eoxapow,  to 
scab  over.)  Caustic ; corrosive.  A term  given  by 
surgeons  to  those  substances  which  possess  a power  of 
destroying  the  texture  of  the  various  solid  parts  of  the 
animal  body  to  which  they  are  directly-  applied.  The 
articles  of  this  class  of  substances  may  be  arranged 
under  two  orders : 

1.  Eroding  escharotics ; as  blue  vitriol,  alumen 
ustum , <fec. 

2.  Caustic  escharotics ; as  lapis  infcmalis , argenti 
nitras,  acidum  sulphuricum , nitricum , &.C. 

ESCULENT.  Esculentus.  An  appellation  given 
to  such  animals,  fishes,  and  plants,  or  any  part  of 
them,  that  may  be  eaten  for  food. 

E'SOX.  The  name  of  a genus  of  fishes.  Class, 
Pisecs ; Order,  Jib  dominates. 

Esox  luciijS.  The  systematic  name  of  the  pike 
fish,  from  the  liver  of  which  an  oil  is  separated  spon- 
taneously, which  is  termed,  in  some  pharmacopoeias, 
oleum  lucii  piscis.  It  is  used  in  some  countries,  by 
surgeons,  to  destroy  spots  of  the  transparent  cornea. 

E SSENCE.  Several  of  the  volatile  or  essential 
oils  are  called  by  this  name. 

ESSENTIAL.  Essentialis.  Something  that  is  ne- 
cessary to  constitute  a thing,  or  that  has  such  a con- 


ETH 


ETM 


nexion  with  the  nature  of  a thing,  that  is  found  wher- 
ever the  thing  itself  is ; thus  the  heart,  brain,  spinal 
marrow,  lungs,  stomach,  &c.  are  parts  essential  to  life. 

In  natural  history,  it  is  applied  to  those  circum- 
stances which  mark  or  distinguish  an  animal  or  plant 
from  all  others  in  the  same  order  or  genus. 

Esse'ntial  oil.  See  Oil. 

E'SSLRA.  (Essera,  from  Esher  a,  an  Arabian 
word  literally  meaning  papules.)  A species  of  cuta- 
neous eruption,  distinguished  by  broad,  shining, 
smooth,  red  spots,  mostly  without  fever,  and  differing 
from  the  nettle-rash  in  not  being  elevated.  It  generally 
attacks  the  face  and  hands. 

Esthiomenos.  (From  eodiu),  to  eat.)  A term  for- 
merly applied  to  any  disease  which  rapidly  destroyed, 
or,  as  it  were,  ate  away  the  flesh,  as  some  forms  of 
herpes,  lupus,  cancer. 

E'SULA.  (From  esus , eaten,  because  it  is  eaten 
by  some  as  a medicine.)  Spurge. 

Esula  major.  See  Euphorbia  palustris. 

Esula  minor.  See  Euphorbia  cyparissias. 

E'THER.  See  JEther. 

Ether,  acetic.  Acetic  naphtha.  An  ethereal  fluid, 
drawn  over  from  an  equal  admixture  of  alkohol  aud 
acetic  acid,  distilled  with  a gentle  heat  from  a glass 
retort  in  a sand-bath  It  has  a grateful  smell,  is  ex- 
tremely light,  volatile,  and  inflammable. 

Ether  muriatic.  Marine  aether.  Muriatic  aether 
is  obtained  by  fixing  and  distilling  alkohol  with  ex- 
tremely concentrated  muriate  of  tin.  It  is  stimulant, 
antiseptic,  and  diuretic. 

Ether,  nitrous.  Nitric  naphtha.  This  is  only  a 
stronger  preparation  than  thespiritus  aetheris  nitrici  of 
the  London  Pharmacopoeia ; it  is  produced  by  the  dis- 
tillation of  two  parts  of  alkohol  to  one  part  and  a half 
of  fuming  nitric  acid. 

Ether,  sulphuric.  See  JEther  sulphuricus. 

Ether,  vitriolic.  See  JEther  sulphuricus. 

ETHEREAL.  A term  applied  to  any  highly  rec- 
tified essential  oil,  or  spirit.  See  Oleum  cethereum. 

Ethiops , antimonia.  See  JEthiops  antimonialis. 

Ethiops , martial.  The  black  oxide  of  iron. 

Ethiops  mineral.  See  Hydrargyri  sulphuretum  ni- 
grum. 

Ethiops  per  se.  Sec  Hydrargyri  oxydum  cinereum. 

ETHMOID.  {Ethmoides ; from  c<Pp.os,  a sieve,  and 
udof,  form  : because  it  is  perforated  like  a sieve.) 
Sieve-like. 

Ethmoid  bone.  Os  ethmoideum ; os  eethmoides.  Cri- 
briform bone.  A bone  of  the  head.  This  is,  perhaps, 
one  of  the  most  curious  bones  of  the  human  body.  It  ap- 
pears almost  a cube,  not  of  solid  bone,  but  exceedingly 
light,  spontry,  and  consisting  of  many  convoluted  plates, 
Which  form  a net-work,  like  honey-comb.  It  is  cu- 
riously enclosed  in  the  os  frontis,  between  the  orbitary 
processes  of  that  bone.  One  horizontal  plate  receives 
the  olfactory  nerves,  which  perforate  that  plate  with 
such  a number  of  small  holes,  that  it  resembles  a sieve ; 
whence  the  bone  is  named  cribriform,  or  ethmoid 
bone.  Other  plates  dropping  perpendicularly  from  this 
one,  receive  the  divided  nerves,  and  gave  them  an  op- 
portunity of  expanding  into  the  organ  of  smelling  ; and 
these  bones,  upon  which  the  olfactory  nerves  arts 
spread  out,  are  so  much  convoluted  as  to  extend  the 
surface  of  this  sense  very  greatly,  and  are  named 
spongy  bones.  Another  flat  plate  lies  in  the  orbit  of 
the  eye  ; and  being  very  smooth,  by  the  rolling  of  the 
eye,  it  is  named  the  os  planum,  or  smooth  bone.  So 
that  the  ethmoid  bone  supports  the  forepart  of  the  brain, 
receives  the  olfactory  nerves,  forms  the  organ  of  smell- 
ing, anu  makes  the  chief  part  of  the  orbit  of  the  eye; 
and  the  spongy  bones,  and  the  os  planum,  are  neither 
of  them  distinct  bones,  but  parts  of  this  ethmoid  bone. 

The  cribriform  plate  is  exceedingly  delicate  and 
thin  ; lies  horizontally  over  the  root  of  the  nose  ; and 
fills  up  neatly  the  space  between  the  two  orbitary 
plates  of  the  frontal-bone.  Tbe  olfactory  nerves,  like 
two  small  flat  lobes,  lie  out  upon  this  plate,  and,  ad- 
hering to  it,  shoot  down  like  many  roots  through  this 
bone,  so  as  to  perforate  it  with  numerous  small  holes, 
as  if  it  had  been  dotted  with  the  point  of  a pin,  or  like 
a nutmeg-grater.  Tins  plate  is  horizontal;  but  its 
processes  are  perpendicular,  one  above,  and  three 


below. 

1.  The  first  perpendicular  process  is  what  is  called 
crista  galli ; a small  perpendicular  projection,  some- 
what like  a cock’s  comb,  but  fexceedingly  small,  stand- 


ing directly  upwards  from  the  middle  of  the  cribriform 
plate,  and  dividing  that  plate  into  two  ; so  that  one  ol- 
factory nerve  lies  upon  each  side  of  the  crista  gall*; 
and  the  root  of  the  falx,  or  septum,  between  the  two 
hemispheres  of  the  brain,  begins  from  this  process. 
The  foramen  caecum,  or  blind  hole  of  the  frontal  bone, 
is  formed  partly  by  the  root  of  the  crista  galli,  which 
is  very  smooth,  and  sometimes,  it  is  said,  hollow,  or 
cellular. 

3.  Exactly  opposite  this,  and  in  the  same  direction 
with  it,  i.  e.  perpendicular  to  the  ethmoid  plate,  stands 
out  the  nasal  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone.  It  is  some- 
times called  azygous,  or  single  process  of  the  ethmoid, 
and  forms  the  beginning  of  that  septum,  or  partition, 
which  divides  the  two  nostrils.  This  process  is  thin 
but  firm,  and  composed  of  solid  bone  ; it  is  commonly 
inclined  a little  to  one  side,  so  as  to  make  the  nostrils 
of  unequal  size.  The  azygous  process  is  united  with 
the  vomer,  wiiich  forms  the  chief  part  of  the  partition  ; 
so  that  the  septum,  or  partition  of  the  nose,  consists  of 
tlie  azygous  process  of  the  ethmoid  bone  above,  of  the 
vomer  below,  and  of  the  cartilage  in  the  fore  or  pro- 
jecting part  of  the  nose ; but  the  cartilage  rots  away, 
so  that  whatever  is  seen  of  the  septum  in  the  skull 
must  be  part-either  of  the  ethmoid  bone  or  vomer. 

2.  U pon  either  side  of  the  septum,  there  hangs  down 
a spongy  bone , one  hanging  in  each  nostril.  They  are 
each  rolled  up  like  a scroll  of  parchment ; they  are 
very  spongy ; are  covered  with  a delicate  and  sensible 
membrane ; and  when  the  olfactory  nerves  depart 
from  the  clibriform  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone,  they 
attach  themselves  to  the  septum,  and  to  these  upper 
spongy  bones,  and  expand  upon  them  so  that  the  con- 
volutions of  these  bones  are  of  material  use  in  expand- 
ing the  organ  of  swelling,  and  detaining  the  odorous 
effluvia  till  the  impression  be  perfect.  Their  convolu- 
tions are  more  numerous  in  the  lower  animals,  in  pro- 
portion as  they  need  a more  acute  sense.  They  are 
named  spongy  or  turbinated  bones,  from  their  convolu- 
tions resembling  the  many  folds  of  a turban. 

The  spongy  bones  have  a great  many  honey-comb- 
like  cells  connected  with  them,  which  belong  also  to 
the  organ  of  smell,  and  which  are  useful  perhaps  by 
detaining  the  effluvia  of  odorous  bodies,  and  also  by 
reverberating  the  voice.  Thus,  in  a common  cold, 
while  the  voice  is  hurt  by  an  affection  of  these  cells, 
the  sense  of  smelling  is  almost  lost. 

4.  The  orbitary  plate , of  the  ethmoid  bone,  is  a 
large  surface ; consisting  of  a very  firm  plate  of  bone, 
of  a regular  square  form : exceedingly  smooth  and 
polished ; it  forms  a great  part  of  the  socket  for  the 
eye,  lying  on  its  inner  side.  When  we  see  it  in  the 
detached  bone,  we  know  it  to  be  just  the  flat  side  of 
the  ethmoid  bone;  but  while  it  is  incased  in  the  socket 
of  the  eye,  we  should  believe  it  to  be  a small  square 
bone : and  from  this,  and  from  its  smoothness,  it  has 
got  the  distinct  name  of  os  planum. 

The  cells  of  the  ethmoid  bone,  which  form  so  im- 
portant a share  of  the  organ  of  smell,  are  arranged 
in  great  numbers  along  the  spongy  bone.  They  are 
small  neat  cells,  much  like  a honey-comb,  and  regu- 
larly arranged  in  two  rows,  parted  from  each  other  by 
a thin  partition ; so  that  the  os  planum  seems  to  have 
one  set  of  cells  attached  to  it,  while  another  regular  set 
of  cells  belongs  in  like  manner  to  the  spongy  bones. 
There  are  thus  twelve  in  number  opening  into  each 
other,  and  into  the  nose. 

These  cells  are  frequently  the  seat  of  venereal  ulcers ; 
and  the  spongy  bones  are  the  surface  where  polypi 
often  sprout  up.  And  from  the  general  connexions  and 
forms  of  the  bone,  we  can  easily  understand  how  the 
venereal  ulcer,  when  deep  in  the  nose,  having  got  to 
these  cells,  cannot  be  cured,  but  undermines  all  the 
face ; how  the  venereal1-  disease,  having  affected  the 
nose,  soon  spreads  to  the  eye : and  how  even  the  brain 
itself  is  not  safe.  We  see  the  danger  of  a blow  upon 
the  nose,  which,  by  a force  upon  the  septum,  or  middle 
partition,  may  depress  the  delicate  cribriform  plate,  so 
as  to  oppress  the  brain  with  all  the  effects  of  a frac- 
tured skull,  and  without  any  operation  which  can 
give  relief.  And  we  also  see  the  danger  of  pulling 
away  polypi,  which  are  firmly  attached  to  the  upper 
spongy  bone. 

ETHMOI  DES.  See  Ethmoid  bone. 

ETMULLER,  Michael,  was  born  at  Leipsic,  in 
1644.  He  graduated  there  at  the  age  of  twenty-four, 
after  going  through  the  requisite  studies,  and  much  im- 


EUD 

proving  himself  by  travelling  through  different  parts  of 
Europe.  Eight  years  after  tie  was  appointed  professor 
of  botany  in  that  University,  as  well  as  extraordinary 
professor  of  surgery  and  anatomy.  He  fulfilled  those 
olfices  with  great  applause,  and  liis  death,  winch  hap- 
pened in  1683,  was  generally  regretted  by  the  faculty 
of  Leipsic.  He  was  a very  voluminous  writer,  and 
his  works  were  considered  to  have  sufficient  merit  to 
be  translated  into  most  European  languages. 

E'tron.  (From  £<5o>,  to  eat,  as  containing  the  re- 
ceptacles of  the  food.)  The  hypogastrium. 

Eua'nthemum.  (From  ev,  well,  and  avdeuos , a 
flower:  so  named  from  the  beauty  of  its  flowers.) 
The  chamomile. 

Eua'phium.  (From  sv,  well,  and  atprj , the  touch,  so 
called  because  its  touch  was  supposed  to  give  ease.) 
A medicine  for  the  piles. 

EUCHLORINE.  See  Chlorous  oxide. 

Euclase.  The  prismatic  emerald. 

Eudialitk.  A brownish  red-coloured  mineral,  be- 
longing to  the  tessular  system  of  Molis. 

EUDIO  METER.  An  instrument  by  which  the 
quantity  of  oxygen  and  nitrogen  in  atmospherical  air 
can  be  ascertained.  Several  methods  have  been  em- 
ployed, all  founded  upon  the  principle  of  decomposing 
common  air  by  means  of  a body  which  has  a greater 
affinity  for  the  oxygen.  See  Eudiometry. 

EUDIOMETRY.  The  method  of  ascertaining  the 
purity  of  atmospheric  air. 

No  sooner  was  the  composition  of  the  atmosphere 
known,  than  it  became  an  inquiry  of  importance  to 
find  out  a method  of  ascertaining,  with  facility  and 
precision,  the  relative  quantity  of  oxygen  gas  contained 
in  a given  bulk  of  atmospheric  air. 

The  instruments  in  which  the  oxygen  gas  of  a de- 
termined quantity  of  air  was  ascertained,  received  the 
name  of  Eudiometers , because  they  were  considered 
as  measures  of  the  purity  of  air.  They  are,  however, 
more  properly  called  Oximeters. 

The  eudiometers  proposed  by  different  chemists,  are 
the  following : 

1.  Priestley's  Eudiometer. — The  first  eudiometer  was 
made  in  consequence  of  Dr.  Priestley’s  discovery,  that 
when  nitrous  gas  is  mixed  with  atmospheric  air  over 
water,  the  bulk  of  the  mixture  diminishes  rapidly,  in 
consequence  of  the  combination,  of  the  gas  with  the 
oxygen  of  the  air,  and  the  absorption  of  the  nitric  acid 
thus  formed  by  the  water. 

When  nitrous  gas  is  mixed  with  nitrogen  gas,  no 
diminution  takes  place;  but  when  it  is  mixed  with 
oxygen  gas,  in  proper  proportions,  the  absorption  is 
complete.  Hence  it  is  evident,  that  in  all  cases  of  a 
mixture  of  these  two  gases,  the  diminution  will  be  pro- 
portional to  the  quantity  of  the  oxygen.  Of  course  it 
will  indicate  the  proportion  of  oxygen  in  air;  and,  by 
mixing  it  with  different  portions  of  air,  it  will  indicate 
the  diiterent  quantities  of  oxygen  which  they  contain, 
provided  the  component  parts  of  air  be  susceptible  of 
variation. 

Dr.  Priestley’s  method  was  to  mix  together  equal 
bulks  of  air  and  nitrous  gas  in  a low  jar,  and  then 
transfer  the  mixture  into  a narrow  graduated  glass  tube 
about  three  feet  long,  in  order  to  measure  the  diminu- 
tion of  bulk.  He  expressed  this  diminution  by  the 
number  of  hundredth  parts  remaining.  Thus,  suppose 
he  had  mixed  together  equal  parts  of  nitrous  gas  and 
air,  and  that  the  sum  total  was  200  (or  2.00):  suppose 
the  residuum,  when  measured  in  the  graduated  tube, 
to  amount  to  104  (or  1.04),  and  of  course  that  96  parts 
of  the  whole  had  disappeared,  he  denoted  the  purity 
of  the  air  thus  tried  by  104. 

This  method  of  analyzing  air  by  means  of  nitrous 
gas  is  liable  to  many  errors.  For  the  water  over  which 
the  experiment  is  made  may  contain  more  or  less  car- 
bonic acid,  atmospheric  air,  or  other  heterogeneous 
substance.  The  nitrous  gas  is  not  always  of  the  same 
purity,  and  is  partly  absorbed  by  the  nitrous  acid 
which  is  formed ; the  figure  of  the  vessel,  and  many 
other  circumstances  are  capable  of  occasioning  con- 
siderable differences  in  the  results. 

Fontana,  Cavendish,  Ladriani,  Magellan,  Von  Hum- 
boldt, and  Dr.  Falconer,  have  made  series  of  laborious 
experiments  to  bring  the  test  of  nitrous  gas  to  a state 
of  complete  accuracy;  but,  notwithstanding  the  exer- 
tions of  these  philosophers,  the  methods  of  analyz- 
ing air  by  means  of  nitrous  gas  are  liable  to  so  many 
anomalies,  that  it  is  unnecessary  to  give  a particu- 


EUD 

lar  description  of  the  different  instruments  invented 
by  them. 

2.  Scheele's  Eudiometer. — This  is  merely  a gradu- 
ated glass  cylinder,  containing  a given  quantity  of  air, 
exposed  to  a mixture  of  iron  filings  and  sulphur,  formed 
into  a paste  with  water.  The  substances  may  be  made 
use  of  in  the  following  manner : 

Make  a quantity  of  sulphur  in  powder,  and  iron 
filings,  into  a paste  with  water,  and  place  the  mixture 
in  a saucer,  or  plate,  over  water,  on  a stand  raised 
above  the  fluid;  then  invert  over  it  a graduated  bell- 
glass,  and  allow  this  to  stand  for  a few  days.  The 
air  contained  in  the  bell-glass  will  gradually  diminish, 
as  will  appear  from  the  ascent  of  the  water. 

When  no  further  diminution  takes  place,  the  ves- 
sel containing  the  sulphuret  must  be  removed,  and  the 
remaining  air  will  be  found  to  be  nitrogen  gas,  which 
was  contained  in  that  quantity  of  atmospheric  air. 

In  this  process,  the  moistened  sulphuret  of  iron  ha9 
a great  affinity  to  oxygen ; it  attracts  and  separates  it 
from  the  atmospheric  air,  and  the  nitrogen  gas  is  left 
behind;  the  sulphur,  during  the  experiment,  is  con- 
verted into  sulphuric  acid,  and  the  iron  oxidized,  and 
sulphate  of  iron  results. 

The  air  which  is  exposed  to  moistened  iron  and  sul 
phur,  gradually  becomes  diminished,  on  account  of  its 
oxygen  combining  with  a portion  of  the  sulphur  and 
iron,  while  its  nitrogen  remains  behind.  The  quantity 
of  oxygen  contained  in  tbe  air  examined  becomes  thus 
obvious,  by  the  diminution  of  bulk,  which  the  volume 
of  air  submitted  to  examination  has  undergone. 

A material  error  to  which  this  method  is  liable,  is 
that  the  sulphuric  acid  which  is  formed,  acts  partly  on 
the  iron,  and  produces  hydrogen  gas,  which  joins  to 
some  of  the  nitrogen  forming  ammonia;  and  hence  it 
is  that  the  absorption  amounts  in  general  to  0.27  parts, 
although  the  true  quantity  of  oxygen  is  no  more  than 
from  0.21  to  0.22. 

3.  De  Marti' s Eudiometer. — De  Marti  obviated  the 
errors  to  which  the  method  of  Scheele  was  liable.  He 
availed  himself,  for  that  ptrrpose,  of  an  hydroguretted 
sulphuret,  formed  by  boiling  sulphur  and  liquid  potassa, 
or  lime  water,  together.  These  substances,  when 
newly  prepared,  have  the  property  of  absorbing  a mi- 
nute portion  of  nitrogen  gas;  but  they  lose  this  pro- 
perty when  saturated  with  that  gas,  which  is  easily 
effected  by  agitating  them  for  a few  minutes  in  contact 
with  a small  portion  of  atmospheric  air. 

The  apparatus  is  merely  a glass  tube,  ten  inches 
long,  and  rather  less  than  half  an  inch  in  diameter, 
open  at  one  end,  and  hermetically  sealed  at  the  other. 
The  close  end  is  divided  into  one  hundred  equal  parts 
having  an  interval  of  one  line  between  each  division 
The  use  of  this  tube  is  to  measure  the  portion  of  air 
to  be  employed  in  the  experiment.  The  tube  is  filled 
with  water;  and  by  allowing  the  water  to  run  out 
gradually,  while  the  tube  is  inverted,  and  the  open  end 
kept  shut  with  the  finger,  the  graduated  part  is  exactly 
filled  with  air.  These  hundredth  parts  of  air  are  in- 
troduced into  a glass  bottle,  filled  with  liquid  sulphuret 
of  lime  previously  saturated  with  nitrogen  gas,  and 
capable  of  holding  from  two  to  four  times  the  bulk  of 
the  air  introduced.  The  bottle  is  then  to  be  closed 
with  a ground  glass  stopper,  and  agitated  for  five  mi- 
nutes. After  this,  the  stopper  is  to  be  withdiawn, 
while  the  mouth  of  the  phial  is  under  water;  and,  for 
the  greater  accuracy,  it  may  be  closed  and  agitated 
again.  Lastly,  the  air  is  to  be  again  transferred  to  the 
graduated  glass  tube,  in  order  to  ascertain  the  diminu- 
tion of  its  bulk. 

4.  Humboldt's  Eudiometer  consists  in  decompos- 
ing a definite  quantity  of  atmospheric  air,  by  means 
of  the  combustion  of  phosphorus,  after  which,  the  por- 
tion of  gas  which  remains  must  be  measured. 

Take  a glass  cylinder,  closed  at  the  top,  and  whose 
capacity  must  be  measured  into  sufficiently  small  por- 
tions by  a graduated  scale  fixed  on  it.  If  the  instru- 
ment be  destined  solely  for  examining  atmospheric  air, 
it  will  be  sufficient  to  apply  the  scale  from  the  orifice 
of  the  cylinder  down  to  about  half  its  length,  or  to 
sketch  that  scale  on  a slip  of  paper  pasted  on  the  out- 
side of  the  tube,  and  to  varnish  it  over  with  a trans- 
parent varnish. 

This  half  of  the  eudiometrical  tube  is  divided  into 
fifty  equidistant  parts,  which  in  this  case  indicate 
hundredth  parts  of  the  whole  capacity  of  the  instru- 
ment. 


EUD 


ELG 


Into  this  vessel,  full  of  atmospheric  air,  put  a piece 
of  dry  phosphorus  (one  grain  to  every  twelve  cubic 
inches),  close  it  air-tight,  and  heat  it  gradually,  first  the 
sides  near  the  bottom,  and  afterward  the  bottom  itself. 
The  phosphorus  will  take  fire  and  burn  rapidly.  After 
every  thing  is  cold,  invert  the  mouth  of  the  eudiometer- 
tube  into  a basin  of  water,  and  withdraw  the  cork. 
The  water  will  ascend  in  proportion  to  the  loss  of 
oxygen  gas  the  air  has  sustained,  and  thus  its  quantity 
may  be  ascertained. 

Analogous  to  this  is, 

5.  Seguin's  Eudiometer , which  consists  of  a glass 
tube,  of  about  one  inch  in  diameter,  and  eight  or  ten 
inches  high,  closed  at  the  upper  extremity.  It  is  filled 
with  mercury,  and  kept  inverted  in  this  fluid  in  the 
mercurial  trough.  A small  bit  of  phosphorus  is  in- 
troduced into  it,  which,  on  account  of  its  spefific  gravity 
being  less  than  that  of  mercury,  will  rise  up  in  it  to 
the  top.  The  phosphorus  is  then  melted  by  means  of 
a red-hot  poker,  or  burning  coal  applied  to  the  outside 
of  the  tube.  When  the  phosphorus  is  liquefied,  small 
portions  of  air  destined  to  be  examined,  and  which 
have  been  previously  measured  in  a vessel  graduated 
to  the  cubic  inch,  or  into  grains,  are  introduced  into 
the  tube.  As  soon  as  the  air  which  is  sent  up  reaches 
the-phosphorus,  a combustion  will  take  place,  and  the 
mercury  will  rise  again.  The  combustion  continues 
till  the  end  of  the  operation ; but,  for  the  greater  exact- 
ness, Seguin  directs  the  residuum  to  be  heated  strongly. 
When  cold,  it  is  introduced  into  the  graduated  vessel 
to  ascertain  its  volume.  The  difference  of  the  two 
volumes  gives  the  quantity  of  the  oxygen  gas  contained 
in  the  air  subjected  to  examination. 

6.  Berthollet's  Eudiometer. — Instead  of  the  rapid 
combustion  of  phosphorus,  Berthollet  has  substituted 
its  spontaneous  combustion,  which  absorbs  the  oxygen 
of  atmospheric  air  completely ; and,  when  the  quan- 
tity of  air  operated  on  is  small,  the  process  is  accom- 
plished in  a short  time. 

Berthollet’s  apparatus  consists  of  a narrow  graduated 
glass  tube,  containing  the  air  to  be  examined,  into 
which  is  introduced  a cylinder,  or  stick  of  phosphorus, 
supported  upon  a glass  rod,  while  the  tube  stands  in- 
verted in  water.  The  phosphorus  should  be  nearly  as 
long  as  the  tube.  Immediately  after  the  introduction 
of  the  phosphorus,  white  vapours  are  formed  which 
fill  the  tube ; these  vapours  gradually  descend,  and  be- 
come absorbed  by  the  water.  When  no  more  white 
vapours  appear,-  the  process  is  at  an  end,  for  all  the 
oxygen  gas  which  was  present  in  the  confined  quantity 
of  air,  has  united  with  the  phosphorus:  the  residuum 
is  the  quantity  of  nitrogen  of  the  air  submitted  to  ex- 
amination. 

This  eudiometer,  though  excellent  of  the  kind,  is 
nevertheless  not  absolutely  to  be  depended  upon  ; for, 
as  soon  as  the  absorption  of  oxygen  is  completed,  the 
nitrogen  gas  exercises  an  action  upon  the  phosphorus, 
and  thus  its  bulk  becomes  increased.  It  has  been  as- 
certained, that  the  volume  of  nitrogen  gas  is  increased 
by  l-40th  part;  consequently  the  bulk  of  the  residuum, 
diminished  by  l-40th,  gives  us  the  bulk  of  the  nitrogen 
gas  of  the  air  examined ; which  bulk,  subtracted  from 
the  original  mass  of  air,  gives  us  the  proportion  of 
oxygen  gas  contained  in  it.  The  same  allowance  must 
be  made  in  the  eudiometer  of  Seguin. 

7.  Davy's  Eudiometer. — Until  very  lately,  the  pre- 
ceding processes  were  the  methods  of  determining  the 
relative  proportions  of  the  two  gases  which  compose 
our  atmosphere. 

Some  of  these  methods,  though  very  ingenious,  are 
so  extremely  slow  in  their  action,  that  it  is  difficult 
to  ascertain  the  precise  time  at  which  the  operation 
ceases.  Others  have  frequently  involved  inaccura- 
cies, not  easily  removed. 

The  eudiometer  of  Davy  is  not  only  free  from  these 
objections,  but  the  result  it  offers  is  always  constant; 
it  requires  little  address,  and  is  very  expeditious ; the 
apparatus  is  portable,  simple,  and  convenient. 

Take  a small  glass  lube,  graduated  into  one  hundred 
equidistant  parts ; fill  this  tube  with  the  air  to  be  ex- 
amined, and  plunge  it  into  a bottle,  or  any  other  con- 
venient vessel,  containing  a concentrated  solution  of 
green  muriate  or  sulphate  of  iron,  strongly  impreg- 
nated with  nitrous  gas.  All  that  is  necessary  to  be 
done,  is  to  move  the  tube  in  the  solution  a little  back- 
wards and  forwards ; under  these  circumstances,  the 
oxygen  gas  contained  in  the  air  will  be  rapidly  ab- 


sorbed, and  condensed  by  the  nitrous  gas  in  the  solu- 
tion, in  the  form  of  nitrous  acid. 

N.  B.  The  state  of  the  greatest  absorption  should 
be  marked,  as  the  mixture  alter  ward  emits  a little  gas 
which  would  alter  the  result. 

This  circumstance  depends  upon  the  slow  decompo- 
sition of  the  nitrous  acid  (formed  during  the  experi- 
ment,) by  the  oxide  of  iron,  and  the  consequent  pro- 
duction of  a small  quantity  of  agriform  fluid  (chiefly 
nitrous  gas)  ; which,  having  no  affinity  with  the  red 
muriate,  or  sulphate  of  iron,  produced  by  the  combi- 
nation of  oxygen,  is  gradually  evolved  and  mingled 
with  the  residual  nitrogen  gas.  However,  the  nitrous 
gas  evolved  might  be  abstracted  by  exposing  the  resi- 
duum to  a fresh  solution  of  green  sulphate  or  muriate 
of  iron. 

The  impregnated  solution  with  green  muriate,  is 
more  rapid  in  its  operation  than  the  solution  with 
green  sulphate.  In  cases  when  these  salts  cannot  be 
obtained  in  a state  of  absolute  purity,  the  common  sul- 
phate of  iron  of  commerce  may  be  employed.  One 
cubic  inch  of  moderately  impregnated  solution,  is 
capable  of  absorbing  five  or  six  cubic  inches  of  oxy- 
gen, in  common  processes ; but  the  same  quantity 
must  never  be  employed  for  more  than  one  experi- 
ment. 

In  all  these  different  methods  of  analyzing  air,  it  is 
necessary  to  operate  on  air  of  a determinate  density, 
and  to  take  care  that  the  residuum  be  neither  more 
condensed  nor  dilated  than  the  air  was  when  first  ope- 
rated on.  If  these  things  are  not  attended  to,  no  de- 
pendence whatever  can  be  placed  upon  the  tesult  of 
the  experiments,  how  carefully  soever  they  may  have 
been  performed.  It  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  place 
the  air,  before  and  after  the  examination,  into  water 
of  the  same  temperature.  If  this,  and  several  other 
little  circumstances,  have  been  attended  to,  for  in- 
stance, a change  in  the  height  of  the  barometer,  &c. 
we  find  that  air  is  composed  of  about  0.21  of  oxygen 
gas,  and  0.79  of  nitrogen  gas  by  bulk.  But  as  the 
weight  of  these  two  gases  is  not  exactly  the  same,  the 
proportion  of  the  component  parts  by  weight  will  dif- 
fer a little;  for  as  the  specific  gravity  of  oxygen  gas  is 
to  that  of  nitrogen  gas  as  8 to  7 nearly,  it  follows  that 
100  parts  of  air  are  composed  by  weight  of  about  76 
nitrogen  gas,  and  24  oxygen  gas. 

The  air  of  this  metropolis,  examined  by  means  of 
Davy’s  eudiometer,  was  found,  in  all  the  different  sea- 
sons of  the  year,  to  contain  0.21  of  oxygen:  and  the 
same  was  the  case  with  air  taken  at  Islington  and 
Highgate ; in  the  solitary  cells  in  Cold-Bath-Fields  pri- 
son, and  on  the  river  Thames.  But  the  quantity  of 
water  contained  in  a given  bulk  of  air  from  these 
places,  differed  considerably. 

EUGALENUS,  Severinus,  a physician  of  Doccum, 
in  Friesland,  known  chiefly  as  the  author  of  a Trea- 
tise on  the  Scurvy,  in  1604,  which  once  maintained  a 
considerable  character : but  the  publication  of  Dr. 
Lind,  pointing  out  his  numerous  errors,  has  entirely 
superseded  it. 

EUGE'NIA.  (So  named  by  Micheli,  in  compli- 
ment to  Prince  Eugene  of  Savoy,  who  sent  him  from 
Germany  almost  all  the  plants  described  by  Clusius.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Eugenia  caryophyllata.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  tree  which  affords  the  clove.  Caryophyllus 
aromaticus.  It  grows  in  the  East  Indies,  the  Moluc- 
cas, &c.  The  clove  is  the  unexpanded  flower,  or 
rather  the  calyx ; it  has  a strong  agreeable  smell,  and 
a bitterish,  hot,  not  very  pungent,  taste.  The  oil  of 
cloves,  commonly  met  with  in  the  shops,  and  received 
from  the  Dutch,  is  highly  acrimonious  and  sophisti- 
cated. Clove  is  accounted  the  hottest  and  most  acrid 
of  the  aromatics ; and,  by  acting  as  a powerful  stimu- 
lant to  the  muscular  fibres,  may,  in  some  rases  of  ato- 
nic gout,  paralysis,  &c.  supersede  most  others  of  the 
aromatic  class ; and  the  foreign  oil,  by  its  great  acri- 
mony, is  also  well  adapted  for  several  external  pur- 
poses ; it  is  directed  by  several  pharmacopoeias,  and 
the  clove  itself  enters  many  officinal  preparations. 

Eugenia  jambos.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Malabar  plum-tree.  The  fruit  smells,  when  ripe,  like 
roses.  On  the  coast  of  Malabar,  where  the  trees  grow 
plentifully,  these  plums  are  in  great  esteem.  They 
are  not  only  eaten  fresh  off  the  trees,  but  are  preserved 
in  sugar,  in  order  to  have  them  eatable  all  the  year. 


EUP 


Of  the  flowers,  a conserve  is  prepared,  which  is  used 
medicinally  as  a mild  adstringent. 

Euce'us.  (From  cu,  well,  and  y>y,  the  earth:  so 
called  because  of  its  fertility.)  The  uterus. 

EUKAIRITE.  A new  mineral,  composed  of  silver, 
selenium,  copper,  and  alumina,  found  in  the  copper 
mine  of  Shrickerum,  in  Switzerland. 

Eu'le.  (From  evXa^ia,  to  putrefy.)  A worm  bred 
in  foul  and  putrid  ulcers. 

Eunu'chium.  (From  evvoi >x°Si  a eunuch  : so  call- 
ed because  it  was  formerly  said  to  render  those  who 
eat  it  impotent,  like  a eunuch.)  The  lettuce.  See 
Eactuca. 

Eupatoriofha'lacron  (From  evna'Jwpiov,  agri- 
mony, ‘and  <pa\aicpos,  bald.)  A species  of  agrimony 
with  naked  heads. 

EUPATO'RIUM.  (From  Eupator , its  discoverer  : 
or  quasi  hepatorium,  from  rjnap,  the  liver  ; because  it 
was  said  to  be  useful  in  diseases  of  the  liver.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  cequalis. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  Eupatorium. 
See  Eupatorium  cannabinum. 

Eupatorium  arabicum.  See  Eupatorium  canna- 
binum. 

Eupatorium  cannabinum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  hemp  agrimony.  Eupatorium;  Eupatorium 
arabicum.  The  juice  of  this  very  bitter  and  strong- 
smelling plant,  Eupatorium — foliis  digitatis  of  Lin- 
naeus, proves  violently  emetic  and  purgative,  if  taken 
in  sufficient  quantity,  and  promotes  the  secretions 
generally.  It  is  recommended  in  dropsies,  jaundices, 
agues,  &c.  and  is  in  common  use  in  Holland  among 
the  lower  orders,  as  a purifier  of  the  blood  in  old  ul- 
cers, scurvy,  and  anasarca. 

Eupatorium  mesues.  See  Achillea  ageratum. 

[“  Eupatorium  perfoliatum.  Thorougkwort.  The 
Eupatorium  perfoliatum  is  an  indigenous  vegetable, 
growing  in  wet  meadows  throughout  the  United  States. 
The  whole  plant  is  medicinal,  but  the  leaves  and 
flowers  are  most  active.  The  taste  is  intensely  bit- 
ter, accompanied  by  a flavour  peculiar  to  the  plant, 
but  without  astringency  or  acrimony.  A kind  of  ex- 
tractive matter  appears  to  contain  its  sensible  and 
medicinal  properties,  and  of  this  water  is  an  adequate 
solvent. 

“ The  medicinal  powers  of  this  plant  are,  such  as 
its  sensible  qualities  would  seem  to  indicate,  those  of 
a tonic  stimulant.  Given  in  moderate  quantities,  either 
in  substance,  in  cold  infusion  or  decoction,  it  promotes 
digestion,  strengthens  the  viscera,  and  restores  tone  to 
the  system.  Like  other  vegetable  bitters,  if  given  in 
large  quantities,  especially  in  warm  infusion  or  decoc- 
tion, it  proves  emetic,  cathartic,  and  sudorific.  Even 
in  cold  infusion,  it  brings  on  diaphoresis  more  readily 
than  most  tonics.  It  is  an  efficacious  article  in  the 
cure  of  intermittents,  and  is  much  employed  for  this 
use  in  districts  where  fever  and  ague  prevail.  Cures 
effected  by  it  appear  to  have  been  as  speedy  as  those 
from  any  of  the  medicines  in  common  use.  Thorough- 
wort  has  been  employed  in  small  doses  with  benefit  in 
other  febrile  complaints  attended  with  prostration  of 
strength  in  their  advanced  stages.  Its  action  upon  the 
skin  has  acquired  for  it  some  confidence  in  the  treat- 
ment of  cutaneous  diseases. 

“As  a tonic,  twenty  or  thirty  grains  of  the  powder 
may  be  given  in  milk  or  wine,  or  two  fluid  ounces  of 
the  infusion.  When  intended  to  act  as  an  emetic,  a 
strong  decoction  may  be  made  from  an  ounce  of  the 
plant  in  a quart  of  water  boiled  to  a pint.  The  decoc- 
tion is  a disagreeable,  but  popular  and  effectual  medi- 
cine in  catarrhs,  rheumatism,  and  febrile  attacks.  It 
is  powerfully  emetic,  cathartic,  and  sudorific.” — Big. 
Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[“  Eupatorium  purpureum.  Gravel  root.  This  is 
a taller  plant  than  the  species  already  cited.  Its  taste 
is  bitter,  astringent,  and  aromatic.  I am  informed  that 
it  operates  as  a diuretic,  and  is  employed  by  different 
country  physicians  as  a palliative  in  dysury  and  calcu- 
lous diseases.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[“  Eupatorium  teucrium.  Wild  hoar  hound.  Many 
of  the  species  of  Eupatorium,  which  nearly  resemble 
Eupatorium  perfoliatum,  in  botanical  habit,  are  like- 
wise similar  to  it  in  medicinal  properties.  The  present 
species  is  one  of  this  kind.  It  is  tonic,  diaphoretic, 
and  cathartic,  and  in  small  doses  sits  well  on  the  sto 
mach.  It  is  extensively  used  in  the  southern  states  in 


EUP 

the  cure  of  fever  and  ague.”— Bigelow's  Materia  Me- 
dico. A.] 

[“  Euphorbia  ipecacuanha.  Ipecacuanha  spurge. 
This  is  a low  tufted  plant,  growing  native  in  sandy 
soils  in  the  middle  and  southern  parts  of  the  United 
States.  It  was  at  one  time  supposed  to  be  the  plant 
from  which  the  officinal  ipecacuanha  is  derived. 

“ The  root  is  very  large  in  proportion  to  the  plant, 
fleshy,  irregular,  and  branched.  When  dried,  it  is  of 
a grayish  colour  outside,  and  white  within.  It  is  light 
and  brittle,  without  a ligneous  centre,  and  has  about 
the  hardness  of  cork.  To  the  taste  it  is  sweetish,  and 
not  particularly  unpleasant.  It  contains  a substance 
of  the  nature  of  caoutchouc,  which  is  soluble  in  ether, 
and  precipitated  by  alkohol ; likewise  resin,  mucus, 
and  probably  fcecula. 

“ Most  of  the  species  of  the  extensive  genus  Euphor- 
bia, are  violent  emetics  and  cathartics.  The  lactescent 
juice,  which  they  exude  when  wounded,  is  acrid  and 
virulent,  so  as  to  blister  and  ulcerate  the  skin  when 
externally  applied.  Taken  internally  in  large  doses, 
they  produce  the  violent  symptoms  which  are  common 
to  other  acrid  narcotics.  The  Euphorbia  ipecacuanha 
is  milder  in  its  operation  than  many  of  the  other  spe- 
cies, and  has  lately  been  revived  in  practice  as  an 
effectual  emetic.  With  a view  of  becoming  acquaint- 
ed with  the  mode  of  operation  of  this  plant,  I perform- 
ed a series  of  experiments  on  its  action,  assisted  by 
some  medical  gentlemen  of  the  Boston  Dispensary  and 
Alms-house.  These  trials  have  led  to  the  conclusion, 
tlffit  this  toot,  in  doses  of  from  ten  to  twenty  grains,  is 
both  an  emetic  and  cathartic ; that  it  is  more  active 
than  ipecacuanha,  in  proportion  to  the  number  of 
grains  administered;  that  in  small  doses  it  operates 
with  as  much  ease  as  most  emetics  in  a majority  of 
instances.  If  it  fails,  however,  at  first,  it  is  not  so  safely 
repeated  as  many  of  the  emetics  in  common  use.  If 
accumulated  in  the  stomach  to  the  amount  of  two  or 
three  scruples,  it  finally  excites  active  and  long  con- 
tinued vomiting,  attended  with  a sense  of  heat,  vertigo, 
indistinct  vision,  and  great  prostration  of  strength. 
Its  operation  seems  exactly  proportionate  to  the  quan 
tity  taken,  and  vomiting  is  not  checked  by  the  powder 
being  thrown  off  in  the  first  efforts  of  the  stomach. 

“From  ten  to  twenty  grains  constitute  an  emetic, 
to  be  given  at  once.  If  this  quantity  fails  to  vomit,  it 
generally  purges.  It  may  be  quickened  by  a little  tar- 
tarized  antimony,  but  ought  not  to  be  repeated  to  the 
amount  of  more  than  twenty-five  or  thirty  grains.” — 
Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

EUPE'PSIA.  (From  cv,  well,  and  vsn'Jw,  to  con- 
coct.) A good  digestion. 

EUPE  PTIC.  {Eupcpticus ; from  tv,  good,  and 
ire to  digest.)  That  which  is  of  easy  digestion. 

EUPHODITE.  A species  of  rock,  composed  of 
felspar  and  diallage. 

EUPHO  RBIA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Dodecandna ; Order, 
Trigynia. 

Euphorbia  antiquorum.  The  systematic  name 
of  a plant  supposed  to  produce  the  Euphorbium. 

Euphorbia  canariensis.  In  the  Canary  islands 
this  species  of  spurge  affords  the  gum  euphorbium. 

Euphorbia  cyparissias.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  cypress  spurge.  Esula  minor;  Tithymalus  cy- 
parissius.  This,  like  most  of  the  spurges,  is  very  acri- 
monious, inflaming  the  eyes  and  cesophagus  after 
touching  them.  It  is  now  fallen  into  disuse,  whatever 
were  its  virtues  formerly,  which,  no  doubt,  among 
some  others,  was  that  of  opening  the  bowels,  for 
among  rustics,  it  was  called  poor  man’s  rhubarb. 

[“Euphorbia  corollata.  Large  flowering  spurge. 
The  Euphorbia  corollata  is  a tall  species,  with  a five- 
rayed  umbel,  and  white  flowers.  It  grows  sponta- 
neously in  dry  fields  from  Pennsylvania  to  Carolina. 

“ The  soft  brittle  texture  of  the  root,  and  its  sweetish 
taste,  are  similar  to  those  of  Euphorbia  ipecacuanha. 
Its  chemical  constitution  is  nearly  the  same,  except 
that  the  quantity  of  resin  is  apparently  somewhat 
greater. 

“This  is  a very  active  medicine,  of  the  evacuating 
class,  operating  in  small  doses  as  a cathartic,  and  in 
large  ones  as  an  emetic.  It  has  been  thought  to  pos- 
sess about  twice  the  strength  of  jalap.  It  exerts  its 
cathartic  efficacy  in  doses  of  less  than  ten  grains,  and 
if  given  to  the  amount  of  fifteen  or  twenty,  it  is  as  sure 
to  vomit  as  other  common  emetics  in  their  proper 


EUS 


EVA 


quantities.  The  only  inconveniences  attending  these 
doses,  which  have  come  to  my  knowledge,  are,  that 
when  given  in  small  quantities,  for  a cathartic,  it  is 
liable  to  produce  nausea ; and  in  large  ones,  suitable 
for  an  emetic,  it  has  sometimes  induced  a degree  of 
hypercatharsis.  But  similar  inconveniences  may  oc- 
cur from  jalap  and  tartarized  antimony.  The  effects 
which  large  doses  of  this  root  may  produce  on  the  ner- 
vous system,  I have  not  had  occasion  to  witness.  The 
Euphorbia  corollata,  like  many  others  of  its  genus,  if 
applied  in  a contused  state  to  the  skin,  excites  inflam- 
mation and  vesication.  Its  volatile  particles  possess  a 
certain  degree  of  virulence,  so  that  inflammation  of 
the  face  has  been  brought  on  by  handling  the  root.  It 
remains  to  be  ascertained  whether  the  vesicating 
powers  of  this  and  the  other  species  are  equally  defi- 
nite and  manageable,  with  those  of  the  more  common 
cpispastic  substances.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  'A.] 

Euphorbia  lathyris.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  affords  the  less  cataputia  seeds.  Ca- 
taputia  minor;  Euphorbia — umbella  quadrifida , di- 
chotoma , foliis  oppositis  integerrimis  of  Linnams. 
The  seeds  possess  purgative  properties ; but  if  exhi- 
bited in  an  over  dose,  prove  drastic  and  poisonous:  a 
quality  peculiar  to  all  the  Euphorbia. 

Euphorbia  officinarum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  which  affords  the  euphorbium  in  the 
greatest  abundance.  Euphorbium  is  an  inodorous 
gum-resin,  in  yellow  tears,  which  have  the  appear- 
ance of  being  worm-eaten  ; said  to  be  obtained  from 
several  species  of  euphorbia:,  but  principally  from  the 
Euphorbia  officinarum  ; aculatea  nuda  multangular  is, 
aculeis  germinatis  of  Linnams:  it  is  imported  from 
Ethiopia,  Libya,  and  Mauritania.  It  contains  an 
active  resin,  and  is  very  seldom  employed  internally, 
but,  as  an  ingredient,  it  enters  into  many  resolvent  and 
discutient  plasters. 

Euphorbia  palustris.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  greater  spurge.  The  officinal  plant  ordered  by  the 
name,  Esula  major , in  some  pharmacopoeias,  is  the 
Euphorbia  palustris ; umbella  multifida,  bifida , invo- 
lucellis  ovatis,  foliis  lanceolatis , ramis  sterilibus  of 
Linnams.  The  juice  is  exhibited  in  Russia  as  a com- 
mon purge ; and  the  plant  is  given,  in  some  places,  in 
the  cure  of  intermittents. 

Euphorbia  paralias.  Tithymalus  par  alios.  Sea- 
purge.  Every  part  of  this  plant  is  violently  cathartic 
and  irritating,  inflaming  the  mouth  and  fauces.  It  is 
seldom  employed  in  the  practice  of  this  country  ; but 
where  it  is  used,  vinegar  is  recommended  to  correct  its 
irritating  power. 

EUPtlO  RBIUM.  (From  Eupkovbus , the  physician 
of  king  Juba,  in  honour  of  whom  it  was  named.) 
See  Euphorbia  officinarum. 

EUPHRA'SIA.  (Corrupted  from  Euphrosyne , 
ev(j)poavvrj,  from  evcppiov,  joyful : so  called  because  it 
exhilarates  the  spirits.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnamn 
system.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Jlngiospermia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  eye-bright.  See 
Euphrasia  officinalis. 

Euphrasia  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  eye-bright.  This  beautiful  little  plant,  Euphrasia 
— foliis  ovatis , lineatis , argute  denlatis  of  Linnaeus, 
has  been  greatly  esteemed  by  the  common  people,  as  a 
remedy  for  all  diseases  of  the  eyes;  yet,  notwithstand- 
ing this,  and  the  encomiums  of  some  medical  writers, 
it  is  now  wholly  fallen  into  disuse.  It  is  an  ingredient 
in  the  British  herb-tobacco. 

Eustachian  tube.  Tuba  eustuchiana.  The  tube 
bo  called  was  discovered  by  the  great  Eustachius.  It 
begins,  one  in  each  ear,  from  the  anterior  extremity  of 
the  tympanum,  and  runs  forwards  and  inwards  in  a 
bony  canal,  which  terminates  with  the  petrous  portion 
of  the  temporal  bone.  It  then  goes  on,  partly  cartila- 
ginous, and  partly  membranous,  gradually  becoming 
larger,  and  at  length  ends  behind  the  soft  palate. 
Through  this  tube  the  air  passes  to  the  tympanum. 

Eustachian  valve.  See  Valvula  Eustachii. 

EUSTACHIUS,  Hartholomew,  one  of  the  most 
celebrated  anatomists  of  the  1 6th  century,  was  born  at 
San  Severino,  in  Italy.  He  studied  at  Rome,  and 
made  himself  such  a proficient  in  anatomy,  that  he 
was  chosen  professor  of  that  branch  of  medicine 
there,  where  he  died  in  1574.  He  was  author  of 
eeveral  works,  many  of  which  are  lost,  especially  his 
treatise  “De  Controversiis  Anatomicorum,”  which  is 


much  regretted.  He  made  several  discoveries  in  ana- 
tomy ; having  first  described  the  renal  capsules,  and 
the  thoracic  duct ; al^p  the  passage  from  the  throat  to 
the  internal  ear,  named  after  him  the  Eustachian  tube. 
A series  of  copperplates,  to  which  he  alludes  in  his 
“ Opuscula,”  were  recovered  by  Lancisi,  and  pub- 
lished in  the  beginning  of  the  1 8th  century.  He 
edited  the  Lexicon  of  Erotian  with  a commentary. 

Euthypo'ria.  (From  Evffiif,  straight,  and  7ropoj,  a 
passage.)  Eutliiporos.  An  extension  made  in  a 
straight  line,  to  put  in  place  a fracture,  or  dislocation. 

EVAPORA'TION.  A chemical  operation  usually 
performed  by  applying  heat  to  any  compound  sub- 
stance, in  order  to  dispel  the  volatile  parts.  “ It  dif- 
fers from  distillation  in  its  object,  which  chiefly  con 
sists  in  preserving  the  more  fixed  matters,  while  the 
volatile  substances  are  dissipated  and  lost.  And  the 
vessels  are  accordingly  different;  evaporation  being 
commonly  made  in  open  shallow  vessels,  and  distilla- 
tion in  an  apparatus  nearly  closed  from  the  external 
air. 

The  degree  of  heat  must  be  duly  regulated  in  eva- 
poration. When  the  fixed  and  more  volatile  matters 
do  not  greatly  differ  in  their  tendency  to  fly  off,  the 
heat  must  be  very  carefully  adjusted;  but  in  other 
cases  this  is  less  necessary. 

As  evaporation  consists  in  the  assumption  of  the 
elastic  form,  its  rapidity  will  be  in  proportion  to  the 
degree  of  heat,  and  the  diminution  of  the  pressure  of 
the  atmosphere.  A current  of  air  is  likewise  of  ser- 
vice in  this  process. 

Barry  has  lately  obtained  a patent  for  an  apparatus, 
by  which  vegetable  extracts  for  the  apothecary  may 
be  made  at  a very  gentle  heat,  and  in  vacuo.  From 
these  two  circumstances,  extracts  thus  prepared  differ 
from  those  in  common  use,  not  only  in  their  physical, 
but  medicinal  properties.  The  taste  and  smell  of  the 
extract  of  hemlock  made  in  this  way  are  remarkably 
different,  as  is  the  colour  both  of  the  soluble  and  fecu- 
lent parts.  The  form  of  apparatus  is  as  follows : — 

The  evaporating-pan,  or  still,  is  a hemispherical  dish 
of  cast-iron,  polished  on  its  inner  surface,  and  fur- 
nished with  an  air-tight  flat  lid.  From  the  centre  of 
this  a pipe  rises,  and  bending  like  the  neck  of  a retort, 
it  forms  a declining  tube,  which  terminates  in  a copper 
sphere  of  a capacity  three  (four  ?)  times  greater  than 
that  of  the  still.  There  is  a stop-cock  on  that  pipe, 
midway  between  the  still  and  the  globe,  and  another 
at  the  under  side  of  the  latter. 

The  manner  of  setting  it  to  work  is  this : — The  juice, 
or  infusion,  is  introduced  through  a large  opening  into 
the  polished  iron  still,  which  is  then  closed,  made  air- 
tight, and  covered  with  water.  The  stop  cock  which 
leads  to  the  sphere  is  also  shut.  In  order  to  produce 
the  vacuum,  steam  from  a separate  apparatus  is  made 
to  rush  by  a pipe  through  the  sphere,  till  it  has  expelled 
all  the  air,  for  which  five  minutes  are  commonly  suffi- 
cient. This  is  known  to  be  effected,  by  the  steam 
issuing  uncondensed.  At  that  instant,  the  copper 
sphere  is  closed,  the  steam  shut  off,  and  cold  water  ad- 
mitted on  its  external  surface.  The  vacuum  thus  pro- 
duced in  the  copper  sphere,  which  contains  four-fifths 
of  the  air  of  the  whole  apparatus,  is  now  partially 
transferred  to  the  still,  by  opening  the  intermediate 
stop-cock.  Thus,  four-fifths  of  the  air  in  the  still 
rush  into  the  sphere,  and  the  stop-cock  being  shut 
again,  a second  exhaustion  is  effected  by  steam  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  first  was ; after  which  a mo- 
mentary communication  is  again  allowed  between  the 
iron  stiff  and  the  receiver;  by  this  means,  four-fifths 
of  the  air  remaining  after  the  former  exhaustion,  are 
expelled.  These  exhaustions,  repeated  five  or  six  times, 
are  usually  found  sufficient  to  raise  the  mercurial  co- 
lumn to  the  height  of  28  inches.  The  water-bath,  in 
which  the  iron  still  is  immersed,  is  now  to  be  heated, 
until  the  fluid  that  is  to  be  inspissated  begins  to  boil 
which  is  known  by  inspection  through  a window  in 
the  apparatus,  made  by  fastening  on,  air-tight,  a piece 
of  very  strong  glass;  and  the  temperature  at  which 
the  boiling  point  is  kept  up,  is  determined  by  a ther- 
mometer. Ebullition  is  continued  until  the  fluid  is 
inspissated  to  the  proper  degree  of  consistence,  which 
also  is  tolerably  judged  of  by  its  appearance  through 
the  glass  window.  The  temperature  of  the  boiling 
fluid  is  usually  about  100°  F.,  but  it  might  be  reduced 
to  nearly  90°. 

In  the  Medico-chirurgical  Transactions  for  1819, 

343 


EXA 


EXC 


(Vol.  x.)  there  is  a paper  by  J.  T.  Barry  on  a new  me- 
thod of  preparing  Pharmaceutical  Extracts.  It  con- 
sists in  performing  the  evaporation  in  vacuo.  For  this 
purpose  he  employed  apparatus  which  was  found  to 
answer  so  well,  that,  contemplating  its  application  to 
other  manufacturers,  he  was  induced  to  take  out  a 
patent  for  it,  that  is  to  say,  fur  the  apparatus.  As  it 
has  been  erroneously  supposed  that  the  patent  is  for 
preparing  extracts  in  vacuo,  it  may  not  he  improper  to 
correct  the  statement  by  a short  quotation  from  the 
above  paper.  ‘ On  that  account,  I have  been  induced 
to  take  out  a patent  for  it  (the  apparatus).  It  is,  how- 
ever, to  be  recollected  by  this  society,  that  I have  de- 
clined having  a patent  for  its  pharmaceutical  products 
Chemists,  desirous  of  inspissating  extracts  in  vacuo, 
are  therefore  at  liberty  to  do  it  in  any  apparatus  dif- 
fering from  that  which  has  been  made  the  subject  of 
my  patent ; and  thus  these  substances  may  continue 
the  object  of  fair  competition  as  to  quality  and  price.’ 

The  apparatus  combines  two  striking  improvements. 
The  first  consists  in  producing  a vacuum  by  the  agency 
of  steam  only,  so  that  the  use  of  air-pumps  and  the 
machinery  requisite  for  working  them,  is  superseded. 

The  other  improvement  is  a contrivance  for  super- 
seding the  injection  of  water  during  the  process  of  eva- 
poration in  vacuo." 

Evergreen  leaf.  See  Sempervirens. 

Everriculum.  (From  everro , to  sweep  away.)  A 
sort  of  spoon,  used  to  clear  the  bladder  from  gravel. 

EXACERBATION.  ( Exacerbatio ; from  exacerbo, 
to  become  violent.)  An  increase  of  the  force  or  vio- 
lence of  the  symptoms  of  a disease.  The  term  is  ge- 
nerally applied  to  an  increase  of  febrile  symptoms. 

EXiE  RESIS.  (From  elaipew,  to  remove.)  One 
of  the  divisions  of  surgery  adopted  bv  the  old  sur- 
geons ; the  term  implies  the  removal  of  parts. 

ExA  iiMA.  (From  tijaXAopai,  to  leap  out.)  Hippo- 
crates applies  it  to  the  starting  of  the  vertebrae  out  of 
their  places. 

EXAMBLO'MA.  (From  e%a/x6Aow,  to  miscarry.) 
An  abortion. 

EXAMBLO'SIS.  An  abortion. 

Exanastomo'sis.  (From  t\avao'Jopou >,  to  relax,  or 
open.)  The  opening  of  the  mouths  of  vessels,  to  dis- 
charge their  contents. 

EXANGIA.  ( Exangia ; from  and  avyeiov,  a 
vessel.)  The  name  of  a genus;  class,  Hcematica ; 
order,  Dysthetica,  in  Good’s  Nosology.  It  embraces 
three  species,  Exangia  aneurisma,  varix , cyania. 

EXANTHE'MA.  ( Exanthema , atis.  n. ; from 
avdtoj,  ejjloresco , to  effloresce,  or  break  forth  on  a sur- 
face.) Exanthisma.  An  eruption  of  the  skin,  called 
a rash.  It  consists  of  red  patches  on  the  skin,  vari- 
ously figured ; in  general  confluent,  and  diffused  irre- 
gularly over  the  body,  leaving  interstices  of  a natural 
colour.  Portions  of  the  cuticle  are  often  elevated  in 
a rash,  but  the  elevations  are  not  acuminated.  The 
eruption  is  usually  accompanied  with  a general  disor^ 
der  of  the  constitution,  and  terminates  in  a few  days 
by  cuticular  exfoliations. 

EXANTHE'MATA.  (The  plural  of  exanthema.) 
The  name  of  an  order  of  diseases  of  the  class  Pyrexice 
in  Cullen’s  Nosology.  It  includes  diseases,  beginning 
with  fever,  and  followed  by  an  eruption  on  the  skin. 

EX  AN  THEMATIC  A.  The  name  of  an  order  of 
diseases,  class,  Hamatica , in  Good’s  Nosology.  Erup- 
tive fevers.  It  comprehends  four  genera,  viz.  Exan- 
thesis, Emphlyis,  Empyesis , Anthracia. 

EXANTHESIS.  (From  extra,  and  av6ew,floreo.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  disease,  class,  Eccritica  ; or- 
der, Acrotica,  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Cutaneous  blush. 
It  affords  only  one  species,  Exanthesis  roseola. 

Exanthi'sma.  See  Exanthema. 

Exanthro'pia.  (From  t\,  without,  and  avOpwrros , 
a man,  i.  e.  having  lost  the  faculties  of  a man.)  A spe- 
cies of  melancholy,  in  which  the  patient  fancies  him- 
self some  kind  of  brute. 

Exara'gma.  (From  elapar'Ju,  to  break.)  A fracture. 

Exa'rma.  (From  £$aipw,  to  lift  up.)  A tumour  or 
swelling. 

Exarte'ma.  (From  e^ap7aw,  to  suspend.)  A 
charm,  hung  round  the  neck. 

Exarthre'ma.  (From  c%apdpou>,  to  put  out  of 
joint. 1 Exarthroma  ; Exarthrosis.  A dislocation,  or 
luxation. 

Exarthro'ma.  See  Exarthrema. 

Exarthro'sis.  See  Exarthrema. 

344 


EXARTICULA'TIO.  (From  ex,  out  of,  and  arti- 
culus,  a joint.)  A luxation,  or  dislocation  of  a bone 
from  its  socket. 

Exci'pulum.  (From  excipio,  to  receive.)  A che- 
mical receiver. 

EXCITABILITY.  That  condition  of  living  bodies 
wherein  they  can  be  made  to  exhibit  the  functions  and 
phenomena  which  distinguish  them  from  inanimate 
matter,  or  the  capacity  of  organized  beings  to  be  af- 
fected by  various  agents  called  exciting  powers. 

Much  confusion  seems  to  have  arisen  in  medical 
controversies  from  the  application  of  the  word  stimuli , 
to  denote  the  means  necessary  to  the  support  of  life : 
and  particularly  by  Brown,  in  his  celebrated  attempt 
to  reduce  the  varied  and  complicated  states  of  the  sys- 
tem to  the  reciprocal  action  of  the  exciting  powers 
upon  the  excitability.  By  this  hypothesis,  instead  of 
regarding  life  as  a continued  series  of  actions,  which 
cannot  go  on  without  certain  agents  constantly  minis- 
tering to  them,  we  are  to  suppose  a substance  or 
quality,  called  excitability,  which  is  superadded  or  as- 
signed to  every  being  upon  the  commencement  of  its 
living  state.  The  founder  of  the  Brunonian  school 
considers  that  this  substance  or  quality  is  expanded 
by  the  incessant  action  of  the  exciting  powers.  These 
are — air,  food,  and  drink,  the  blood  and  the  secretions, 
as  well  as  muscular  exertion,  sensation,  thought,  and 
passions,  or  emotion,  or  other  functions  of  the  system 
itself;  and  these  powers,  which  exhaust  the  excitabi- 
lity or  produce  excitement  (according  to  the  language 
of  the  school),  are  stiangely  enough  called  stimuli. 
We  are  told,  that  it  is  in  the  due  balance  between  the 
exciting  powers  and  the  excitability  that  health  con- 
sists : for  if  the  exciting  powers  be  in  excess,  indirect 
debility  is  produced;  and  where,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  stimuli  are  deficient  and  the  excitability  accumu- 
lated, there  ensues  a state  of  direct  debility. 

EXCITATION.  ( Excitatio ; from  cxcito,  to  ex- 
cite.) The  act  of  awakening,  rousing,  or  producing 
some  power  or  action  . thus  we  say,  the  excitation  of 
motion,  excitation  of  heat,  excitation  of  the  passions, 
&c.  In  natural  philosophy,  it  is  principally  used  in 
the  subjects  of  action  of  living  parts,  and  in  electri 
city  and  heat. 

EXCI'TEMENT.  According  to  the  opinion  of 
Brown,  excitement  is  the  continual  exhaustion  of  the 
matter  of  life,  or  excitability  by  certain  agents,  which 
have  received  the  name  of  stimuli  or  exciting  powers. 
The  dUe  degree  of  this  expension  or  excitement  is  the 
condition  necessary  to  health : the  excessive  action  of 
stimuli  causing  indirect  debility  and  generating  sthenic 
diseases,  while  the  opposite  state  of  deficient  excite- 
ment produces  direct  debility,  and  gives  birth  to  asthe- 
nic diseases : and  death  is  said  to  result  equally  from 
complete  exhaustion  of  the  excitability,  and  from  total 
absence  of  the  exciting  powers.  Excitement  is  in  this 
view  equivalent  to  that  forced  state  which  is  supposed 
by  the  Brunonian  school  to  constitute  life. 

It  has  been  objected  to  this  hypothesis,  that  by  sim- 
plifying too  much  the  varied  phenomena  of  healthy 
functions  and  of  diseases,  it  necessarily  classed  toge- 
ther conditions  of  the  system  which  have  been  consi- 
dered as  widely  different,  and  of  opposite  tendencies, 
by  the  more  patient  observer.  And  though  gladly 
caught  at  by  many,  as  pointing  out  in  a few  general 
rules  the  mode  of  cure  in  all  diseases,  namely,  by  re- 
storing the  proper  equilibrium  between  excitability 
and  the  action  of  stimuli,  the  Brunonian  theories  seem 
now  to  be  considered,  by  those  who  are  suspicious  of 
bold  classifications,  as  an  example  of  the  observation, 
“that  the  most  ingenious  way  of  becoming  foolish  is 
by  a system  ; and  the  surest  way  to  prevent  truth,  is 
to  set  up  something  in  the  room  of  it.” 

EXCITING.  That  which  has  the  power  of  im- 
pressing the  solids,  so  as  io  alter  their  action,  and  thus 
produce  disease. 

Exciting  cause.  That  which,  when  applied  to 
the  body,  excites  a disease. 

EXCORIA'TION.  {Excoriatio ; from  excorio,  to 
take  off  the  skin.)  An  abrasion  of  the  skin. 

E'XCREMENT.  ( Excremcntum  ; from  excemo,  to 
separate  from.)  The  alvine  faxes. 

EXCRE  SCENCE.  (Excrescentia ; from  excresco, 
to  grow  from.)  Any  preternatural  formation  of  flesh, 
or  any  part  of  the  body,  as  wens,  warts,  & c. 

EXCRE'TION.  ( Excretio ; from  excemo , to  sepa- 
rate from.)  This  term  is  applied  to  the  separation  of 


EXP 


EXP 


those  fluids  from  the  blood  of  an  animal,  that  are  sup- 
posed to  be  useless,  as  the  urine,  perspiration,  and 
alvine  faeces.  The  process  is  the  same  with  that  of 
secretion,  except  with  the  alvine  faeces;  but  the  term 
excretion  is  applied  to  those  substances  which,  when 
separated  from  the  blood,  are  not  applied  to  any  useful 
purposes  in  the  animal  economy. 

EXCRETORY.  (Excretorius ; from  excerno,  to 
purge,  sift,  &.c  ) This  name  is  applied  to  certain  little 
ducts  or  vessels  in  the  fabric  of  glands;  thus  the  tubes 
which  convey  the  secretion  out  of  the  testicle  into  the 
vesiculae  seminales  are  called  the  excretory  ducts. 

EXERCISE.  See&ora. 

EXFOLIA'TION.  (Erfoliatio ; from  exfolio,  to 
cast  the  leaf.)  The  separation  of  a dead  piece  of  bone 
from  the  living. 

Exfoliati'vum.  (From  exfolio,  to  shed  the  leaf.) 
A raspatory,  or  instrument  for  scraping  exfoliating 
portions  of  bone. 

Exi'schios.  (From  e\,  out  of,  and  ttr%tov,  the  is- 
chium.) A luxation  of  the  thigh-bone. 

Exitu'ra.  (From  exeb,  to  come  from.)  A running 
abscess. 

E xitus.  (From  exeo,  to  come  out.)  A prolapsus, 
or  falling  down  of  a part  of  the  womb  or  bowel. 

E'xochas.  (From  without,  and  exu , to  have.) 
Exoche.  A tubercle  on  the  outside  of  the  anus. 

E'xochk  See  Exochas. 

Exocy'ste.  See  Exocystis. 

Exocy'stis.  (From  e\o),  without,  and  kv<>is,  the 
bladder.)  Exocysle.  A prolapsus  of  the  inner  mem- 
brane of  the  bladder. 

EXO  MPHALUS.  (From  c\,  out,  and  o/r^aAoj,  the 
navel.)  Exomphalos.  An  umbilical  hernia.  See 
Hernia  umbilicalis. 

Exoncho'ma.  (From  and  oyxoj,  a tumour.)  A 
large  prominent  tumour. 

EXOPHTHA'LMIA.  (From  £^,  out,  and  o00aXpoff, 
the  eye.)  A swelling  or  protrusion  of  the  bulb  of  the 
eye,  to  such  a degree  that  the  eyelids  cannot  cover  it. 
It  may  be  caused  by  inflammation,  when  it  is  termed 
exophthalmia  inflammntoria ; or  from  a collection  of 
pus  in  the  globe  of  the  eye,  when  it  is  termed  the  ex- 
ophthalmia purulenta ; or  from  a congestion  of  blood 
within  the  globe  of  the  eye,  exophthalmia  sanguinea. 

EXORMIA.  (Ei-oppia ; from  etyppaw,  to  break 
out.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  disease,  class,  Eccri - 
tica;  order,  Acrotica,  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Papulous 
skin.  It  has  four  species,  viz.  Exormia  strophalus , 
lichen,  prurigo , milium. 

EXOSTO'SIS.  (From  e![,  and  oa'Jeov,  a bone.) 
Hyperostosis.  A morbid  enlargement,  or  hard  tumour 
of  a bone.  A genus  of  disease  arranged  by  Cullen  in 
the  class  Locales,  and  order  Tumores.  The  bones 
most  frequently  affected  with  exostosis,  are  those  of 
the  cranium,  the  lower  jaw,  sternum,  humerus,  radius, 
ulna,  bones  of  the  carpus,  the  femur,  and  tibia.  There 
is,  however,  no  bone  of  the  body  which  may  not  be- 
come the  seal  of  thisftlisease.  It  is  not  uncommon  to 
find  the  bones  of  the  cranium  affected  with  exostosis, 
in  their  whole  extent.  The  ossa  parietalia  sometimes 
become  an  inch  thick. 

The  exostosis,  however,  mostly  rises  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  bone,  in  the  form  of  a hard  round  tumour ; 
and  venereal  exostoses,  or  nodes,  are  observed  to  arise 
chiefly  on  compact  bones,  and  such  of  these  as  are 
only  superficially  covered  with  soft  parts;  as,  for  in- 
stance, the  bones  of  the  cranium,  and  the  front  surface 
of  the  tibia. 

EXPANSION.  The  increase  of  surface,  or  of  bulk, 
to  which  natural  bodies  are  susceptible. 

EXPE  CTORANT.  (Expectorans ; from  rxpec- 
toro,  to  discharge  from  the  breast.)  Those  medicines 
which  increase  the  discharge  of  mucus  from  the  lungs. 
Thevdifferent  articles  referred  to  this  class  may  be  di- 
vided into  the  following  orders : 

1.  Nauseating  expectorants ; as  squill,  ammonia- 
cum,  and  garlic,  fahich  are  to  be  preferred  for  the  aged 
and  phlegmatic. 

2.  Stimulating  expectorants ; as  marrubium,  which 
is  adapted  to  the  young  and  irritable,  and  those  easily 
affected  by  expectorants. 

3.  Jlntispasmodic  expectorants ; as  vesicatories,  pe- 
diluvium,  and  watery  vapours  : these  are  best  calcu- 
lated for  the  plethoric  and  irritable,  and  those  liable  to 
spasmodic  affections. 

4.  Irritating  cxpcctormts ; as  fumes  of  tobacco  and 


acid  vapours.  The  constitutions  to  which  these  are 
chiefly  adapted,  are  those  past,  the  period  of  youth, 
and  those  in  whom  there  are  evident  marks  of  torpor, 
either  in  the  system  generally,  or  in  the  lungs  in  par- 
ticular. 

[These  are  remedies  which  promote,  or  are  adminis- 
tered to  facilitate  the  discharge  from  the  lungs  both  by 
secretion  or  expectoration. 

This  secretion  is  of  two  kinds,  first  the  Halitus  or 
watery  vapour,  and  secondly  the  Muscus  or  slime.  In 
cases  of  disease  there  are  other  secretions,  or  rather 
fluids  to  be  excreted  ; such  as, 

1.  Blood  or  sanguineous  mixtures. 

2.  Pus  or  purulent  mixtures. 

3.  Lymphatic  or  coagulated  films,  as  in  croup 

4.  Stony  or  calculous  concretions. 

5.  Hydatids. 

There  may  be  too  little  vascular  or  grandular  action 
in  consequence  of  which  the  organ  of  respiration  may 
be  too  dry,  or  secrete  less  than  it  ought ; and  also  there 
may  be  too  little  power  to  throw  out  the  secreted  mat- 
ters. Under  the  title  therefore  of  Expectorants,  are 
comprehended  all  the  remedies  which  promote  secre- 
tion or  excretion  in  the  lungs. 

Respiration  may  be  considered  as  a perspiratory 
function,  and  acting  in  conjunction  with,orvicariousto, 
the  skin,  and  as  having  also  a somewhat  to  perform 
analogous  to  the  alimentary  canal.  For  which  pur- 
pose the  lungs  and  intestines  may  be  strictly  and  pro- 
perly considered  as  external  surfaces. 

When  the  pulmonary  and  bronchial  vessels  are  con- 
sidered as  to  the  amount  of  blood  they  convey,  the  im- 
portance of  the  function,  the  proximity  of  the  heart, 
the  frequency  and  seriousness  of  the  diseases  to  which 
the  lungs  are  subjected,  it  will  be  evident  that  this  class 
of  remedies  is  worthy  of  being  well  understood. 

The  function  of  respiration  in  my  view  has  an  ana- 
logy to  respiration. 

Remedies  therefore  which  determine  the  fluids  to 
the  skin,  or  excite  the  cuticular  surface  to  secretory 
action,  may  be  considered  as  almost  pari  passu  en- 
; couraging  pulmonary  exhalation.  This  argument  de- 
rives force  from  the  common  remark  of  the  suppressed 
perspiration  falling  upon  the  lungs.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  the  pulmonic  surface  and  the  cuticular  surface 
(both  of  which  are  to  be  considered  as  external)  are 
frequently  both  disordered  at  once.  But  the  true  in- 
terpretation probably  is,  that  the  lungs  do  not  suffer  in 
consequence  of  the  fluids  repelled  from  the  skin,  but 
from  the  same  cause  which  disturbs  the  skin:  the 
cold,  for  example,  which  acts  injuriously  upon  the 
former,  produces  a like  mischief  in  the  latter.  They 
are  cutaneous  disorders,  and  are  to  be  removed  as  far 
as  the  restoration  of  their  respective  secretions  are 
concerned  by  corresponding  means. 

I therefore  class  Sudorifics  among  the  expectorants. 

Emetics  are  to  be  placed  in  the  same  class,  and  for  a 
very  good  reason.  Their  action  in  inverting  the  mo- 
tion of  the  stomach  is  favourable  to  the  excretion  of 
fluids  from  the  trachea  and  bronchia:,  as  well  as  from 
the  stomach  and  fauces.  This  may  be  explained  from 
the  action  of  the  belly,  the  diaphragm,  and  intercos- 
tals,  and  the  compression  they  make  upon  the  chest, 
and  forcing  out  its  contents.  The  same  solution  seems 
to  apply,  at  least  as  far  as  secretion  goes,  to  the  opera- 
tion of  nauseating  doses.  Upon  the  same  principle 
that  they  relax  the  skin,  they  relax  the  pulmonary 
surfaces. 

Some  expectorants  are  directly  applied  to  the  lungs ; 
among  which  are, 

1.  Warm  air,  of  a thermometric  temperature  to  suit 
the  patient’s  case. 

2.  Respirable  air,  medicated  by  carbonic  acid  to  dimi- 
nish its  too  stimulant  quality. 

3.  Respirable  air,  quickened  by  a mixture  of  oxyge- 
nous gas  to  excite  the  bronchia:  and  rouse  them  from 
torpor.  The  same  may  be  done  by  ether. 

4.  Air  qualified  and  tempered  by  the  vapour  of  water 
and  infused  herbs,  as  in  Mudges  inhaler. 

5.  Teas  and  medicated  drinks,  sipped  slowly,  and 
swallowed  gradually,  so  that  a portion  of  their  vapour 
may  enter  the  trachea  with  the  breath. 

6.  Dry  fumes,  as  those  of  tobacco,  stramonium, 
Sec.,  a part  of  which  undoubtedly  enters  the  trachea, 
and  cannot  be  excluded,  as  of  cinnabar,  frankincense, 
Sc  c. 

7.  A medicated  atmosphere,  into  which  the  odours 

345 


EXT 


EXT 


of  plants  and  flowers,  as  of  geraniums  and  oranges, 
or  of  gums  and  drugs,  such  as  camphor  and  musk,  may 
be  set  loose  and  mingled. 

Other  expectorants  act  upon  the  mouth  and  fauces 
by  virtue  of  the  sympathy  between  those  parts  and  the 
lungs ; such  as, 

1.  Saccharine  substances,  as  honey,  syrups,  dry 
sugars  and  their  lozenges,  liquorice,  &c. 

2.  Mucilaginous  substances,  as  gum  arabic,  gum  tra- 
gacanth,  &c. 

Others  again  act  through  the  medium  of  the  sto- 
mach, as  any  of  the  before-mentioned  substances  when 
they  are  swallowed,  and  others  bringing  the  lungs  by 
consent  into  a relaxed  and  expectorating  state. 

The  rules  recommended  in  the  administration  of 
expectorants  may  be  reduced  to  two. 

1.  To  keep  the  patient  in  a warm  and  comfortable 
temperature. 

2.  To  avoid  the  administration  of  such  cathartics  as 
seem  to  act  contrariwise  to  expectorants.  Can  they 
not  however  he  so  employed  as  to  supersede  expecto- 
rants to  a certain  degree  ? 

Excessive  expectoration  will  frequently  require 
your  interposition,  as, 

1.  In  catarrhal  affections  of  the  chronic  kind,  where 
the  secreted  mucus  must  be  evacuated  by  hawking  or 
coughing;  and  the  quantity  of  slime  in  chronic  cases 
is  very  considerable.  The  disease  is  troublesome,  and 
sometimes  ends  in  hemoptysis  or  phthisis. 

2.  In  phthisis  pulmonalis;  in  which  the  excretion 
of  mucus,  pus,  &c.  is  one  of  the  most  distressing 
symptoms,  and  thus  often  without  vomica  or  ulcera- 
tion. 

3.  In  occasional  rushes  or  determination  of  fluids 
to  the  trachea  and  bronchia,  where  prodigious  quan- 
tities of  slime  are  eff  used  and  excreted,  with  great  ex- 
ertion and  straining. 

The  course  of  proceeding  in  each  case  w ill  depend 
upon  the  particular  state  of  the  constitution,  the  idio- 
syncrasy of  the  patient,  the  acquired  habits  of  living 
and  physicking;  and  the  connexion  of  this  particular 
symptom,  with  the  other  symptoms  of  the  dominant 
malady. 

The  following  are  the  principal  of  the  expectorants  : 
1.  Lichen  islandicus,  Iceland  moss.  2.  Glycyrrhiza 
glabra,  Liquorice.  3.  Mimosa  nilotica,  Gum  arabic. 

4.  Ulmus  aspera,  Slippery  elm.  5.  Heracleum  gum- 
mosiferum,  Gum  ammoniac.  6.  Scilla  maritima,  the 
Squill.  7.  Allium  sativum,  Garlic.  8.  Ferula,  Assa- 
foelida.  9.  Arum  tryphillum,  March  turnip.  10.  Poly- 
gala Senega,  Seneca  snakeroot.  11.  Carbonate  of 
ammonia.  12.  Carbonate  of  potash.  13.  Carbonate 
of  soda.  14.  Colchicuin-autumnale  or  meadow  saf- 
fron. 15.  Balsams  of  Tolu,  Capivi,  &c.  16.  Inhala- 
tions of  water,  vinegar,  medicated  infusions.  17.  Sy- 
rups and  saccharine  compositions,  as  honey  and  vine- 
gar, molasses  and  vinegar,  &c. — Notes  from  Dr. 
Mitchill's  Led.  on  Mat.  Med.  A ] 

EXPERIENCE.  A kind  of  knowledge  acquired  by 
long  use,  without  any  teacher.  Experience  consists  in 
the  ideas  of  things  we  have  seen  or  read,  which  the 
judgment  has  reflected  on,  to  form  for  itself  a rule  or 
method. 

EXPERS.  Wanting;  destitute.  The  trivial  name 
of  some  diseases;  as  dipsosis  expers,  in  which  the 
thirst  is  wanting. 

EXPIRA'TION.  ( Expiratio ; from  expiro,  to 
breathe.)  That  part  of  respiration  in  which  the  air  is 
thrust  out  from  the  lungs.  See  Respiration. 

Expressed  oil.  Such  oils  as  are  obtained  by  press- 
ing the  substance  containing  them ; as  olives,  w hich 
give  out  olive  oil,  almonds,  &c. 

Exsucca'tio.  (From  ex,  out  of,  and  succus,  hu- 
mour.) An  ecchymosis,  or  extravasation  of  humours, 
under  the  integuments. 

EXTE'NSOR.  (From  extendo , to  stretch  out.)  A 
term  given  to  those  muscles,  the  office  of  which 
is  to  extend  any  part ; the  term  is  in  opposition  to 
flexor. 

Extensor  brevis  digitorum  pedis  A muscle 
of  the  toes,  situated  on  the  foot.  Extensor  brevis,  of 
Douglas.  Calcano  phalanginien  commune,  of  Dumas. 
It  arises  fleshy  and  tendinous  from  the  fore  and  upper  t 
part  of  the  os  calcis,  and  soon  forms  a fleshy  belly,  di- 
visible into  four  portions,  which  send  oft’  an  equal 
number  of  tendons  that  pass  over  the  upper  part  of  the 
foot,  under  the  tendons  of  the  extensor  longus  digito- 
346 


rum  pedis,  to  be  inserted  into  its  tendinous  expansion. 
Its  office  is  to  extend  the  toes. 

Extensor  carpi  radialis  brevior.  An  extensor 
muscle  of  the  wrist,  situated  on  the  forearm.  Radialis 
externus  brevior,  of  Albinus.  Radialis  seenndus,  of 
Winslow.  It  arises  tendinous  from  the  external  con- 
dyle of  the  humerus,  and  from  the  ligament  that  con- 
nects the  radius  to  it,  and  runs  along  the  outside  of  the 
radius.  It  is  inserted  by  a long  tendon  into  the  upper 
and  back  part  of  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the  middle 
huger.  It  assists  in  extending  and  bringing  the  hand 
backward. 

Extensor  carpi  radialis  longior.  An  extensor 
muscle  ol  the  carpus,  situated  on  the  forearm,  that  acts 
in  conjunction  with  the  former.  Radialis  externus 
longior , of  Albinus.  Radialis  externus  primus , of 
Winslow.  It  arises  thin,  broad,  and  fleshy,  from  the 
lower  part  of  the  external  ridge  of  the  os  humeri,  above 
its  external  condyle,  and  is  inserted  by  a round  tendon 
into  the  posterior  and  upper  part  of  the  metacarpal 
bone  that  sustains  the  forefingers. 

Extensor  carpi  ulnaris.  Ulnaris  externus , of 
Albinus  and  Winslow.  It  arises  from  the  outer  con- 
dyle of  the  os  humeri,  and  then  receives  an  origin  from 
the  edge  of  the  ulna : its  tendon  passes  in  a groove  be- 
hind the  styloid  process  of  the  ulna,  to  be  inserted  into 
the  inside  of  the  basis  of  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the 
little  finger. 

Extensor  digitorum  communis.  A muscle  situ- 
ated on  the  forearm,  that  extends  all  the  joints  of  the 
fingers.  Extensor  digitorum  communis  manus,  of 
Douglas  and  Winslow.  Extensor  digitorum  commu- 
nis, seu  digitorum  tensor , of  Cowper,  and  Epichon- 
dylo-suspha-langetlien  commune,  of  Dumas.  Cum  ex- 
tensor e proprio  auricularis , of  Albinus.  It  arises 
from  the  external  protuberance  of  the  humerus  : and 
at  the  wrist  it  divides  into  three  flat  tendons,  which 
pass  under  the  annular  ligament,  to  be  inserted  into 
all  the  bones  of  the  lore,  middle,  and  ring  fingers. 

Extensor  digitorum  longus.  See  Extensor  lon- 
gus digitorum  pedis. 

Extensor  indicis.  See  Indicator. 

Extensor  longus  digitorum  pedis.  A muscle 
situated  on  (lie  leg,  that  extends  all  the  joints  of  the 
four  small  toes.  Extensor  digitorum  longus.  Pero- 
neo-tibisus-phalangitlien  commune,  of  Dumas.  It 
arises  from  the  upper  part  of  the  tibia  and  fibula,  and 
the  interosseous  ligament ; its  tendon  passes  under  the 
annular  ligament,  and  then  divides  into  five,  four  of 
which  are  inserted  into  the  second  and  third  pha 
langes  of  the  toes,  and  the  fifth  goes  to  the  basis  of  the 
metatarsal  bone.  This  last,  Winslow  reckons  a dis- 
tinct muscle,  and  calls  it  Peroneus  brevis. 

Extensor  longus  pollicis  pedis.  See  Extensor 
proprius  pollicis  pedis. 

Extensor  ma&nus.  See  Gastrocnemius  internus. 

Extensor  major  pollicis  manus.  See  Extensor 
secundi  internodii. 

Extensor  minor  pollicis  manus.  See  Extensor 

primi  internodii. 

Extensor  ossis  metacarpi  pollicis  manus.  An 
extensor  muscle  of  the  wrist,  situated  on  the  forearm. 
Abductor  longus  pollicis  manus , of  Albinus.  Extensor 
primi  in  tcrnodii,  of  Douglas.  Extensor  primus  polli- 
cis, of  Winslow.  Extensor  primi  internodii  pollicis 
of  Cowper.  Cubito-radisus  metacaipien  du  pouce,  of 
Dumas.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  middle  and  posterior 
part  of  the  ulna,  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  middle 
of  the  radius,  and  from  the  interosseous  ligament,  and 
is  inserted  into  the  os  trapezium,  and  upper  part  of  the 
metacarpal  bone  of  the  thumb. 

Extensor  pollicis  primus.  See  Extensor  primi 
internodii. 

Extensor  pollicis  secundus.  See  Extensor  se- 
cundi internodii. 

Extensor  primi  internodii.  A muscle  of  the 
thumb  situated  on  the  hand,  that  extends  the  first  bone 
of  the  thumb  obliquely  outwaras.  Extensor  minor 
pollicis  manus  of  Albinus.  This  muscle,  and  the  Ex- 
tensor ossis  metacarpi  pollicis  manus,  are  called  Ex- 
tensor pollicis  primus  by  Winslow;  Extensor  secundi 
internodii  by  Douglas;  Extensor  secundi  internodii  os- 
sis pollicis  of  Cowper.  Cnbilo-susphalangiendu  pouce 
of  Dumas.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  posterior  part  of 
the  ulna,  and  from  the  interosseous  ligament,  and  is 
inserted  tendinous  into  the  posterior  part  of  the  first 
bone  of  the  thumb. 


EXT 


EXT 


Extensor  proprius  pollicis  pedis.  An  exterior 
muscle  of  the  great  toe,  situated  on  the  foot.  Extensor 
longus  of  Douglas.  Extensor  pollicis  longus  of 
Winslow  and  Cowper.  Peroneo  susphalangien  du 
pou.ee  of  Dumas.  It  arises  by  an  acute,  tendinous,  and 
fleshy  beginning,  some  way  below  the  head,  and  ante- 
rior part  of  the  fibula,  along  which  it  runs  to  near  its 
lower  extremity,  connected  to  it  by  a number  of  fleshy 
fibres,  which  descend  obliquely,  and  form  a tendon, 
which  is  inserted  into  the  posterior  part  of  the  first  and 
last  joint  of  the  great  toe. 

Extensor  secundi  internodii.  A muscle  of  the 
thumb,  situated  on  the  hand,  that  extends  the  last  joint 
of  the  thumb  obliquely  backwards.  Extensor  major 
pollicis  munus  of  Albinus.  Extensor  pollicis  secundus 
of  Winslow.  Extensor  tertii  internodii  of  Douglas. 
Extensor  internodii  ossis  pollicis  of  Cowper.  Cubito 
susphalangettien  dupouce  of  Dumas.  It  arises  tendi- 
nous and  fleshy  from  the  middle  part  of  the  ulna,  and 
interosseous  ligament ; it  then  forms  a tendon,  which 
runs  through  a small  groove  at  the  inner  and  back  part 
of  the  radius,  to  be  inserted  into  the  last  bone  of  the 
thumb.  Its  use  is  to  extend  the  last  phalanx  of  the 
thumb  obliquely  backwards. 

Extensor  secundi  internodii  indicis  proprius. 
See  Indicator. 

Extensor  tarsi  minor.  See  Plantans. 

Extensor  tarsi  suralis.  See  Gastrocnemius 
intemus. 

Extensor  tertii  internodii  indicis.  See  Prior 
indicis. 

Extensor  tertii  internodii  minimi  digiti.  See 
Jib  duct  or  minimi  digiti  manus. 

Externus  mallei.  See  Laxator  tympani. 

EXTIPULATUS.  Without  stipulas.  A botanical 
term.  Applied  to  stems. 

EXTIRPA  TION.  (Extirpatio ; from  extirpo,  to 
eradicate.)  The  complete  removal  or  destruction  of 
any  part,  either  by  cutting  instruments,  or  the  action  of 
caustics. 

E'XTRACT.  Extr actum.  1.  When  chemists  use 
this  term,  they  generally  mean  the  product  of  an  aque- 
ous decoction. 

2.  In  pharmacy  it  includes  all  those  preparations  from 
vegetables  which  are  separated  by  the  agency  of  various 
liquids,  and  afterward  obtained  from  such  solutions,  in 
a solid  state,  by  evaporation  of  the  menstruum.  It 
also  includes  those  substances  which  are  held  in  solution 
by  the  natural  juices  of  fresh  plants,  as  well  as  those 
to  which  some  menstruum  is  added  at  the  time  of  pre- 
paration. Now,  such  soluble  matters  are  various,  and 
mostly  complicated ; so  that  chemical  accuracy  is  not 
to  be  looked  for  in  the  application  of  the  term.  Some 
chemists,  however,  have  affixed  this  name  to  one  pecu- 
liar modification  of  vegetable  matter,  which  has  been 
called  extractive , or  extract,  or  extractive  principle; 
and,  as  this  forms  one  constituent  part  of  common  ex- 
tracts, and  possesses  certain  characters,  it  wilPbe  proper 
to  mention  such  of  them  as  may  influence  its  pharma- 
ceutical relations.  The  extractive  principle  has  a 
strong  taste,  differing  in  different  plants:  it  is  soluble  in 
water,  and  its  solution  speedily  runs  into  a stateof  pu- 
trefaction, by  which  it  is  destroyed.  Repeated  evapo- 
rations and  solutions  render  it  at  last  insoluble,  in  con- 
sequence of  its  combination  with  oxygen  from  the 
atmosphere.  It  is  soluble  in  alkohol,  but  insoluble  in 
aether.  It  unites  with  alumine,  and  if  boiled  with 
neutral  salts  thereof,  precipitates  them.  It  precipitates 
with  strong  acids,  and  with  the  oxides  from  solutions 
of  most  metallic  salts,  especially  muriate  of  tin.  It 
readily  unites  with  alkalies,  and  forms  compounds  with 
them,  which  are  soluble  in  water.  No  part,  however, 
of  this  subject  has  been  hitherto  sufficiently  examined. 

In  the  preparation  of  all  the  extracts,  the  London 
Pharmacopeia  requires  that  the  water  be  evaporated 
as  speedily  as  possible,  in  a broad,  shallow  dish,  by 
means  of  a water-bath,  until  they  have  acquired  a con- 
sistence proper  for  making  pills;  and,  towards  the  end 
of  the  inspissation,  that  they  should  be  constantly  stirred 
with  a wooden  rod.  These  general  rules  require  mi- 
nute and  accurate  attention,  more  particularly  in  the 
immediate  evaporation  of  the  solution,  whether  pre- 
pared by  expression  or  decoction,  in  the  manner  as  well 
as  the  degree  of  heat  by  which  it  is  performed,  and  the 
promotion  of  it  by  changing  the  surface  by  constant 
stirring,  when  the  liquor  beeins  to  thicken,  and  even  by 
directing  a strong  current  of  air  over  its  surface,  if  it 


can  conveniently  be  done.  It  is  impossible  to  regulate 
the  temperature  over  a naked  fire,  or,  if  it  be  used,  to 
prevent  the  extract  from  burning ; the  use  of  a water- 
bath  is,  therefore,  absolutely  necessary,  and  not  to  be 
dispensed  with,  and  the  beauiy  and  precision  of  extracts 
so  prepared,  will  demonstrate  their  superiority. 

EXTRAC'TION.  (Extr actio  ; from  extraho , to 

draw  out.)  The  taking  extraneous  substances  out  of 
the  body.  Thus  bullets  and  splinters  are  said  to  be 
extracted  from  wounds;  stones  from  the  urethra,  or 
bladder.  Surgeons  also  sometimes  apply  the  term 
extraction  to  the  removal  of  tumours  out  of  cavities, 
as,  for  instance,  to  the  taking  of  cartilaginous  tumours 
out  of  the  joints.  They  seldom  speak  of  extracting 
any  diseased  original  part  of  the  body ; though  they  do 
so  in  one  example,  viz.  the  cataract. 

EXTRA  CTIVE.  See  Extract. 

EXTRA'CTUM.  (From  extraho , to  draw  out.) 
An  extract.  See  Extract. 

Extractum  aconiti.  Extract  of  aconite.  Take 
of  aconite  leaves,  fresh,  a pound ; bruise  them  in  a 
stone  mortar,  sprinkling  on  a little  water;  then  press 
out  the  juice,  and,  without  any  separation  of  the  sedi- 
ment, evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  The  dose 
is  from  one  grain  to  five  grains.  For  its  virtues,  see 
Aconitum. 

Extractum  aloes  turificatum.  Purified  extract 
of  aloes.  Take ‘of  extract  of  spike  aloe,  powdered, 
half  a pound;  boiling  water,  four  pints.  Macerate  for 
three  days  in  a gentle  heat,  then  strain  the  solution,  and 
set  it  by,  that  the  dregs  may  subside.  Pour  off  the  clear 
solution,  and  evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  The 
dose,  from  five  to  fifteen  grains.  See  Aloes. 

Extractum  anthemidis.  Extract  of  chamomile, 
formerly  called  extractum  chamauneli.  Take  of  cha 
momiie  flowers,  dried,  a pound ; water,  a gallon ; boil 
down  to  four  pints,  and  strain  the  solution  while  it  is 
hot,  then  evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  The 
dose  is  ten  grains  to  a scruple.  For  its  virtues,  see 
Anthemis  nobilis. 

Extractum  belladonna.  Extract  of  belladonna. 
Take  of  deadly  night-shade  leaves,  fresh,  a pound. 
Bruise  them  in  a stone  mortar,  sprinkling  on  a little 
water ; then  press  out  the  juice,  and  without  any  pre- 
vious separation  of  the  sediment,  evaporate  it  to  a 
proper  consistence.  The  dose  is  f rom  one  to  five  grains. 
For  its  virtues,  see  Atropa  belladonna. 

Extractum  cinchona.  Extract  of  bark.  Take  of 
lance-leaved  cinchona  bark,  bruised,  a pound ; water 
a gallon  ; boil  down  to  six  pints,  and  strain  the  liquor, 
while  hot.  In  the  same  manner,  with  an  equal  quan- 
tity of  water,  four  times  boil  down,  and  strain.  Lastly, 
consume  all  the  liquors,  mixed  together,  to  a proper 
consistence.  This  extract  should  be  kept  soft,  for 
making  pills,  and  hard  to  be  reduced  to  powder. 

Extractum  cinchona  resinosum.  Resinous  ex- 
tract of  bark.  Take  of  lance-leaved  cinchona  bark, 
bruised,  a pound  ; rectified  spirit,  four  pints;  macerate 
for  four  days  and  strain.  Distil  the  tincture  in  the  heat 
of  a water-bath,  until  the  extract  has  acquired  a proper 
consistence.  This  is  considered  by  many  as  much  more 
grateful  to  the  stomach,  and,  at  the  same  time,  pro- 
ducing all  the  effects  of  bark  in  substance,  and  by  the 
distillation  of  it,  it  is  intended  that  the  spirit  which 
passes  over  shall  be  collected  and  preserved.  The  dose 
is  from  ten  grains  to  half  a drachm.  See  Cinchona. 

Extractum  colocynthidis.  Extract  of  colocynth. 
Take  of  colocynth  pulp,  a pound;  water,  a gallon; 
boil  down  to  four  pints,  and  strain  the  solution  while  it 
is  hot,  and  evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  The 
dose  is  from  five  to  thirty  grains.  For  its  virtues,  see 
Cucumis  colocynthis. 

Extractum  colocynthidis  compositum.  Com- 
pound extract  of  colocynth.  Take  of  colocynth  pulp, 
sliced,  six  drachms ; extract  of  spike  aloe,  powdered, 
an  ounce  and  half ; scammony  gum-resin,  powdered, 
half  an  ounce;  cardamom  seeds,  powdered,  a drachm; 
proof  spirit,  a pint.  Macerate  the  colocynth  pulp  in  the 
spirit,  for  four  days,  in  a gentle  heat:  strain  the  solu- 
tion, and  add  it  to  the  aloes  and  scammony ; then,  by 
means  of  a water-bath,  evaporate  it  to  a proper  con- 
sistence, constantly  stirring,  and  about  the  end  of  the 
inspissation,  mix  in  the  cardamom-seeds.  The  dose 
from  five  to  thirty  grains. 

Extractum  conii.  Extract  of  hemlock,  formerly 
called  sucous  cicuta:  spissatus.  Take  of  fresh  hem- 
lock, a pound.  Bruise  it  in  a stone  mortar,  sprinkling 
347 


EXT 


EXT 


on  a little  water ; then  press  out  the  juice,  and,  with- 
out any  separation  to  the  sediment,  evaporate  it  to  a 
proper  consistence.  The  dose,  from  five  grains  to  a 
scruple. 

Extractum  elaterii.  Extract  of  elaterium.  Cut 
the  ripe,  wild  cucumbers  into  slices,  and  pass  the  juice, 
very  gently  expressed,  through  a very  fine  hair  sieve, 
into  a glass  vessel ; then  set  it  by  for  some  hours,  until 
the  thicker  part  has  subsided.  Pour  off,  and  throw  away 
the  thinner  part,  which  swims  at  the  top.  Dry  the 
thicker  part  which  remains  in  a gentle  heat.  The  dose, 
from  half  a grain  to  three  grains.  For  its  virtues,  see 
Momordica  elaterium. 

Extractum  gentian*:.  Extract  of  gentian.  Take 
of  gentian  root,  sliced,  a pound ; boiling  water,  a gallon ; 
macerate  for  twenty-four  hours,  then  boil  down  to  four 
pints ; strain  the  hot  liquor,  and  evaporate  it  to  a proper 
consistence.  Dose,  from  ten  to  thirty  grains.  See 
Gentiana. 

Extractum  glycyrrhiza.  Extract  of  liquorice. 
Take  of  liquorice  root,  sliced,  a pound;  boiling  water, 
a gallon;  macerate  for  twenty-four  hours,  then  boil 
down  to  four  pints;  strain  the  hot  liquor,  and  evaporate 
it  to  a proper  consistence.  Dose,  from  one  drachm  to 
half  an  ounce.  See  Glycyrrhiza. 

Extractum  hamatoxyli.  Extract  of  logwood, 
formerly  called  extractum  ligni  campechensis.  Take 
of  logwood,  powdered,  a pound ; boiling  water,  a 
gallon ; macerate  for  twenty-four  hours ; then  boil 
down  to  four  pints ; strain  the  hot  liquor,  and  evaporate 
it  to  a proper  consistence.  Dose,  from  ten  grains  to  half 
a drachm.  For  its  virtues,  see  Hcematoxylon  cam- 
pechianum. 

Extractum  humuli.  Extract  of  hops.  Take  of 
hops,  four  ounces ; boiling  water,  a gallon  ; boil  down 
to  four  pints ; strain  the  hot  liquor,  and  evaporate  it  to 
a proper  consistence.  This  extract  is  said  to  produce 
a tonic  and  sedative  power  combined ; the  dose  is  from 
five  grains  to  one  scruple.  See  Hamulus  lupulus. 

Extractum  hyoscyami.  Extract  of  henbane. 
Take  of  fresh  henbane  leaves,  a pound ; bruise  them 
in  a stone  mortar,  sprinkling  on  a little  water ; then 
press  out  the  juice,  and,  without  separating  the  fsecu- 
lencies,  evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  Dose, 
from  five  to  thirty  grains.  For  its  virtues,  see  Hyos- 
cyamus. 

Extractum  jalapa.  Extract  of  jalap.  Take  of 
jalap-root  powdered,  a pound ; rectified  spirit,  four 
pints;  water,  ten  pints ; macerate  the  jalap-root  in  the 
spirits  for  four  days,  and  pour  off  the  tincture ; boil 
the  remaining  powder  in  the  water,  until  it  be  reduced 
to  two  pints ; then  strain  the  tincture  and  decoction 
separately,  and  let  the  former  be  distilled  and  the  latter 
evaporated,  until  each  begins  to  grow  thick.  Lastly, 
mix  the  extract  with  the  resin,  and  reduce  it  to  a pro- 
per consistence.  Let  this  extract  be  kept  in  a soft 
state,  fit  for  forming  pills,  and  in  a hard  one,  so  that  it 
it  may  be  reduced  to  powder.  The  dose,  from  ten 
to  twenty  grains.  For  its  virtues,  see  Convolvulus 
jalap  a. 

Extractum  opii.  Extract  of  opium,  formerly 
called  extractum  tbebaicum.  Opium  colatum.  Take 
of  opium,  sliced,  half  a pound;  water,  three  pints; 
pour  a small  quantity  of  the  water  upon  the  opium, 
and  macerate  it  for  twelve  hours,  that  it  may  become 
soft;  then,  adding  the  remaining  water  gradually,  rub 
them  together  until  the  mixture  be  complete.  Set  it 
by,  that  the  fseculencies  may  subside;  then  strain  the 
liquor,  and  evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  Dose, 
from  half  a grain  to  five  grains. 

Extractum  papaveris.  Extract  of  white  poppy. 
Take  of  white  poppy  capsules  bruised,  and  freed  from 
the  seeds,  a pound ; boiling  water  a gallon.  Macerate 
for  twenty-four  hours,  then  boil  down  to  four  pints ; 
strain  the  hot  liquor,  and  evaporate  it  to  a proper  con- 
sistence. Six  grains  are  about  equivalent  to  one  of 
opium.  For  its  virtues,  see  Pap  aver  album. 

Extractum  rhei.  Extract  of  rhubarb.  Take  of 
rhubarb  root,  powdered,  a pound;  proof  spirit,  a pint; 
water,  seven  pints.  Macerate  for  four  days  in  a gentle 
heat ; then  strain  and  set  it  by,  that  the  faeculencies  may 
subside.  Pour  off  the  clear  liquor,  and  evaporate  to  a 
proper  consistence.  This  extract  possesses  the  purga- 
tive properties  of  the  root,  and  the  fibrous  and  earthy 
parts  are  separated;  it  is  therefore,  a useful  basis  for 
pills,  as  well  as  given  separately.  Dose,  from  ten  to 
thirty  grains.  See  Rheum. 

348 


Extractum  sarsaparilla.  Extract  of  sarsapa 
rilla.  Take  of  sarsaparilla  root,  sliced,  a pound;  boil 
ing  water, a gallon;  macerate  tor  twenty-four  hours, 
then  boil  down  to  four  pints;  strain  the  hot  liquor, 
and  evaporate  it  to  a proper  consistence.  In  practice 
this  is  much  used,  to  render  the  common  decoction  of 
the  same  root  stronger  and  more  efficacious.  Dose, 
from  ten  grains  to  a drachm.  For  its  virtues,  see  Smi- 
lax  sarsaparilla. 

Extractum  saturni.  See  Plumbi  acetatis  liquor 

Extractum  taraxaci.  Take  of  dandelion  root, 
fresh  and  bruised,  a pound;  boiling  water,  a gallon; 
macerate  for  twenty-four  hours;  boil  down  to  foui 
pints,  and  strain  the  hot  liquor ; then  evaporate  it  to  a 
proper  consistence.  Dose,  from  ten  grains  to  a drachm. 
For  its  virtues,  see  Leontodon  taraxacum. 

[The  Pharmacopoeia  of  the  United  States  admits 
the  following  extracts. 

Extractum  aconiti. 

. . belladonnas, 

conii. 

. . hyoscyami. 

. . stramonii. 

. . anthemidis. 

. . gentiana;. 

. . haematoxyli. 

. . hellebori  nigri. 

. . juglandis. 

. . quassia;. 

. . cinchona?. 

. . colocynthidis  compositum. 

. . jalapae. 

. . podophylli. 

..  sambuci.  A.] 

EXTRAFOLIACEUS.  Applied  to  stipulte,  which 
are  below  the  footstalk,  and  external  with  respect  to 
the  leaf;  as  in  Astragalus  onobrichis. 

EXTRAVASA'TION.  {Extravasatio ; from  extra, 
without,  and  vas , a vessel.)  A term  applied  by  sur- 
geons to  fluids,  which  are  out  of  their  proper  vessels, 
or  receptacles.  Thus,  when  blood  is  effused  on  the 
surface,  or  in  the  ventricles  of  the  brain,  it  is  said  that 
there  is  an  extravasation.  When  blood  is  poured  from 
the  vessels  into  the  cavity  of  the  peritonaeum,  in 
wounds  of  the  abdomen,  surgeons  call  this  accident 
extravasation.  The  urine  is  also  said  to  be  extrava- 
sated , when,  in  consequence  of  a wound,  or  of  slough 
ing,  or  ulceration,  it  makes  its  way  into  the  cellular 
substance  or  among  the  abdominal  viscera.  When 
the  bile  spreads  among  the  convolutions  of  the  bowels, 
in  wounds  of  the  gall-bladder,  it  is  also  a species  of 
extravasation. 

EXTREMITIES.  This  term  is  applied  to  the  limbs, 
as  distinguishing  them  from  the  other  divisions  of  the 
animal,  the  head  and  trunk.  The  extremities  are  four 
in  number,  divided  in  man  into  upper  and  lower ; in 
other  animals  into  anterior  and  posterior.  Each  ex- 
tremity is  divided  into  four  parts;  the  upper  into  the 
shoulder,  the  arm,  the  forearm  and  the  hand:  the 
lower  into  the  hip,  the  thigh,  the  leg,  and  the  foot. 

EYE.  Oculus.  The  parts  which  constitute  the 
eye  are,divided  into  external  and  internal.  The  exter- 
nal parts  are : 

1.  The  eyebrows , or  supercilia , which  form  arches 
of  hair  above  the  orbit,  at  the  lower  part  of  the  fore- 
head. Their  use  is  to  prevent  the  sweat  falling  into 
the  eyes,  and  for  moderating  the  light  above. 

2.  The  eyelashes,  or  cilia , are  the  short  hairs  that 
grow  on  the  margin  of  the  eyelids;  they  keep  ex- 
ternal bodies  out  of  the  eyes  and  moderate  the  influx 
of  light. 

3.  The  eyelids,  or  palpebrw , of  which,  one  is  supe- 
rior or  upper,  and  the  other  inferior,  or  under;  where 
they  join  outwardly,  it  is  called  the  external  canthus; 
inwardly,  towards  the  nose,  the  internal  canthus  ; they 
cover  and  defend  the  eyes. 

The  margin  of  the  eyelids,  which  is  cartilaginous, 
is  called  tarstis. 

In  the  tarsus , and  internal  surface  of  the  eyelids, 
small  glands  arc  situated,  called  glandulce  Meibomian#, 
because  Meibomius  discovered  them  ; they  secrete  an 
oily  or  mucilaginous  fluid,  which  prevents  the  at 
trition  of  the  eyes  and  eyelids,  and  facilitates  their 
motions. 

4.  The  lachrymal  glands,  or  glandulat  lacLrymales 
which  are  placed  near  the  external  canthus,  or  corner 
of  the  eyes,  in  a little  depression  of  the  os  lrontis. 


FAB 


From  these  glands  six  or  more  canals  issue,  which 
are  called  lachrymal  ducts,  or  ductus  lachrymales, 
and  they  open  on  the  internal  surface  of  the  upper 
eyelid. 

5.  The  lachrymal  caruncle,  or  caruncula  lachryma- 
lis , which  is  situated  in  the  internal  angle,  or  canllius 
of  the  eyelids. 

6.  Puncta  lachrymaliQf  are  two  callous  orifices  or 
openings,  which  appear  at  the  internal  angle  of  the 
tarsus  of  the  eyelids ; the  one  in  the  superior,  the  other 
in  the  inferior  eyelid. 

7.  The  canales  lachrymales , or  lachrymal  ducts,  are 
two  small  canals,  which  proceed  from  the  lachrymal 
points  into  the  lachrymal  sac. 

8.  The  succus  lachrymalis , or  lachrymal  sac,  is  a 
membraneous  sac,  which  is  situated  in  the  internal  can- 
thus  of  the  eye. 

9.  The  ductus  nasalis , or  nasal  duct,  is  a membra- 
neous canal,  which  goes  from  the  inferior  part  of  the 
lachrymal  sac  through  the  bony  canal  below,,  and  a 
little  behind,  into  the  cavity  of  the  nose,  and  opens 
under  the  inferior  spongy  bone  into  the  nostril. 

10.  The  membrana  conjunctiva , or  conjunctive  mem- 
brane, which,  from  its  white  colour  is  called  also  albu- 
ginea, or  white  of  the  eye,  is  a membrane  which  lines 
the  internal  superficies  of  the  eyelids,  and  covers  the 
whole  forepart  of  the  globe  of  the  eye : it  is  very  vas- 
cular, as  may  be  seen  in  inflammations. 

The  bulb,  or  globe  of  the  eye,  is  composed  of  eight 
membranes,  or  coverings,  two  chambers,  or  camcroe , 
and  three  humours,  improperly  so  called. 

The  membranes  of  the  globe  of  the  eye,  are,  four 
in  the  hinder  or  posterior  part  of  the  bulb,  or  globe, 
viz.  sclerotica , choroidea,  retina , and  hyaloidea , or 
arachnoidca ; four  in  the  fore  or  anterior  part  of  the 
bulb,  viz.  cornea  transparens , iris , uvea , and  capsule 
of  the  crystalline  lens. 

The  membrana  sclerotica , or  the  sclerotic  or  horny 
membrane,  is  the  outermost.  It  begins  from  the  optic 
nerve,  forms  the  spherical  or  globular  cavity,  and  ter- 
minates in  the  circular  margin  of  the  transparent 
cornea. 

The  membrana  choroidea , or  choroides , is  the  middle 
tonic  of  the  bulb,  of  a black  colour,  beginning  from 
the  optic  nerve,  and  covering  the  internal  superficies 
of  the  sclerotica,  to  the  margin  of  the  transparent  cor- 
nea. In  this  place  it  secedes  from  the  cornea,  and 
deflects  transversely  and  inwardly,  and  in  the  middle 
forms  a round  foramen.  This  circular  continuation  of 
the  choroidea  in  the  anterior  surface  is  called  ins,  in 
the  posterior  superficies,  uvea. 

The  round  opening  in  the  centre  is  called  the  pupil , 
or  pupilla.  This  foramen,  or  round  opening,  can  be 
dilated,  or  contracted  by  the  moving  powers  of  almost 
invisible  muscular  fibres. 

The  membrana  retina,  is  the  innermost  tunic  of  a 
white  colour,  and  similar  to  mucus,  being  an  expansion 
of  the  optic  nerve,  chiefly  composed  of  its  medullary 
part.  It  covers  the  inward  surface  of  the  choroides, 


FAB 

to  the  margin  of  the  crystalline  lens,  and  there  termi- 
nates. 

The  chambers , or  camera  of  the  eyes  are: 

1.  Camera  anterior , or  fore-chamber ; an  open  space, 
which  is  formed  anteriorly,  by  the  hollow  surface  of 
the  cornea  transparens , and  posteriorly,  by  the  surface 
of  the  iris. 

2.  Camera  posterior , that  small  space  which  is 
bounded  anteriorly  by  the  tunica  uvea,  and  pupilla^ 
or  pupil ; posteriorly  by  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
crystalline  lens. 

Both  these  chambers  are  filled  with  an  aqueous  hu- 
mour. The  humours  of  the  eye,  as  they  are  called, 
are  in  number  three: 

1.  The  aqueous  humour,  which  fills  both  chambers. 

2.  The  crystalline  lens,  or  humour,  is  a pellu- 
cid body,  about  the  size  of  a lentil,  which  is  in- 
cluded in  aq  exceedingly  fine  membrane,  or  capsula , 
and  lodged  in  a concave  depression  of  the  vitreous 
humour. 

3.  The  vitreous  humour,  is  a pellucid,  beautifully 
transparent  substance,  which  fills  the  whole  bulb  of 
the  eye  behind  the  crystalline  lens.  Its  external  sur- 
face is  surrounded  with  a most  pellucid  membrane, 
which  is  called  membrana  hyaloidea , or  arachnoidca. 
In  the  anterior  part  is  a fovea,  or  bed,  for  the  crystal- 
line lens. 

The  connexion  of  the  bulb  is  made  anteriorly,  by 
means  of  the  conjunctive  membrane,  with  the  inner 
surface  of  the  eyelids,  or  palpebra;  posteriorly,  by  the 
adhesion  of  six  muscles  of  the  bulb  and  the  optic  nerve 
with  the  orbit. 

The  optic  nerve,  or  nervus  opticus,  perforates  the 
sclerotica  and  choroides,  and  then  constitutes  the  re- 
tina, by  spreading  itself  on  the  whole  posterior  part  of 
the  internal  globe  of  the  eye. 

The  mqscles  by  which  the  eye  is  moved  in  the  orbit, 
are  six ; much  tat  surrounds  them,  and  fills  up  the 
cavities  in  which  the  eyes  are  seated.  The  arteries 
are  the  internal  orbital,  the  central,  and  the  ciliary  ar- 
teries. The  veins  empty  themselves  into  the  external 
jugulars.  The  nerves  are  the  optic,  and  branches 
from  the  third,  fourtn,  fifth,  and  six  pair. 

The  use  of  the  eye  is  to  form  the  organ  of  vision. 
See  Vision. 

Externally,  the  globe  of  the  eye  and  the  transparent 
cornea  are  moistened  with  a most  limpid  fluid,  called 
lachryma , or  tears ; the  same  pellucid  subtile  fluid  ex- 
actly rills  all  the  pores  of  the  transparent  cornea  ; for, 
deprived  of  this  fluid,  and  being  exposed  to  the  air, 
that  coat  of  the  eye  becomes  dry,  shrivelled,  and 
cloudy,  impeding  the  rays  of  light. 

EYE-BRIGHT.  See  Euphrasia. 

EYE-BROW.  Supercilium.  See  Eye. 

EYE-LID.  Palpebra.  See  Eye. 

Eye-tooth.  The  fangs  of  the  two  upper  cuspidati 
are  very  much  larger  than  those  on  each  side,  and  ex- 
tend up  near  to  the  orbit,  on  which  account  they  have 
have  been  called  eye-teeth.  See  Teeth. 


F 


or  ft.  In  a prescription  these  letters  are  abbre- 
• viations  of  fiat,  or  fiant,  let  it,  or  them,  be  made  ; 
thus/,  bolus,  let  the  substance  or  substances  prescribed 
be  made  into  a bolus. 

FA'BA.  A bean.  See  Bean. 

Faba  crassa.  See  Sedum  telephium. 

Faba  jeuyttiaca.  See  JYymphaa  nelumbo. 

Faba  febrifuga.  See  Ignatia  amara. 

Faba  indica.  See  Ignatia  amara. 

Faba  major.  The  garden-bean.  See  Bean. 

Faba  minor.  The  horse-bean.  It  differs  no  other- 
wise from  the  garden-bean  than  in  being  less. 

Faba  peohurim.  Faba  pichnrim ; Faba  pechuris. 
Brazilian  bean.  An  oblong  oval,  brown,  and  pon- 
derous seed,  supposed  to  be  the  produce  of  a J.aurus, 
brought  from  the  Brazils.  Their  smell  is  like  that  of 
musk,  between  it  and  the  scent  of  sassafras.  They  are 
exhibited  as  carminatives  in  flatulent  colics,  diarrhoeas, 
and  dysenteries. 


Faba  furgatrix.  See  Ricinus. 

Faba  sancti  ignatii.  See  Ignatia  amara. 

Faba  suilla.  See  Hyoscyamus. 

Faba'ria.  (From  faba,  a bean,  which  it  resembles.) 
See  Sedum  telephium. 

FABRICIUS,  Hieronymus,  born  a*  Aquapendente 
in  Italy,  1537.  He  studied  at  Padua  under  Fallopius, 
whom  he  succeeded  as  professor  of  anatomy  and  sur- 
gery there ; which  office  he  held  for  nearly  half  a cen- 
tury with  great  credit,  and  died  at  the  advanced  age  of 
eighty-tw'o,  universally  regretted.  The  republic  of 
Venice  also  conferred  many  honours  upon  him.  He 
is  thought  to  have  been  the  first  to  notice  the  valves  of 
the  veins,  which  he  demonstrated  in  1574.  But  his 
surgical  works  obtained  him  most  reputation  ; indeed 
he  has  been  called  the  father  of  modern  surgery.  Ilis 
first  publication  in  1592  contained  five  Dissertations  on 
Tumours,  Wounds,  Ulcers,  Fractures,  and  Disloca- 
tions. He  afterward  added  another  part,  treating  of 

349 


FAG 


FAL 


all  the  diseases  which  are  curable  by  manual  opera- 
tion. This  work  passed  through  seventeen  editions  in 
different  languages. 

FABRIC1US,  James,  was  born  at  Rostock,  in  1577. 
Alter  travelling  through  different  parts  of  Europe,  he 
graduated  at  Jena,  and  soon  gained  extensive  practice. 
He  was  professor  of  medicine  and  the  mathematics  at 
Rostock  during  forty  years,  and  first  physician  to  the 
Duke  of  Mecklenburgh  ; afterward  went  to  Copen- 
hagen, and  was  made  physician  to  the  kings  of  Nor- 
way and  Denmark,  and  died  there,  in  1652.  He  has 
left  several  tracts  on  medical  subjects. 

FABR1CIUS,  Philip  Conrad,  professor  of  medi- 
cine at  Ilelmsladt,  was  author  of  several  useful  works 
in  anatomy  and  surgery.  His  first  tieatise,  “Idea 
Anatomes  Practica*,”  1741,  contained  some  new  di- 
rections in  the  Art  of  Injection,  and  described  several 
branches  of  the  Portio  Dura,  &c.  In  another  work  he 
has  some  good  observations  on  the  Abuse  of  Trepan- 
ning. 

FABRICIUS,  William,  better  known  by  the  name 
of  Hildanus , from  Hilden,  in  Switzerland,  where  he 
was  born  in  1560.  He  repaired  to  Lausanne,  to  complete 
his  knowledge  of  surgery,  at  ihe  age  of  twenty-six ; and 
distinguished  himself  there  by  iris  assiduity,  and  the 
successful  treatment  of  many  difficult  cases.  He  stu- 
died medicine  also,  and  went  to  practise  both  arts  at 
Payenne,  in  1605;  but  ten  years  after  was  invited  to 
Berne  by  the  senate,  who  granted  him  a pension.  In 
the  latter  part  of  his  life,  severe  illness  prevented  his 
professional  exertions,  which  had  procured  him  general 
esteem  and  high  reputation.  IJis  death  occurred  in 
1634.  His  works  were  written  in  German,  but  have 
been  mostly  translated  into  Latin.  He  published  five 
“Centuries  of  Observations,”  which  present  many 
curious  facts,  as  also  several  instruments  invented  by 
him. 

FACE.  Facies.  The  lower  and  anterior  part  of 
the  cranium,  or  skull. 

FACIAL.  Facialis.  Belonging  to  the  face;  as 
facial  nerve,  &c. 

Facial  nerve.  Nervus  facialis.  Portio  dura  of 
the  auditory  nerve.  These  nerves  are  two  in  number, 
and  are  properly  the  eighth  pair:  but  are  commonly 
called  the  seventh,  being  reckoned  with  the  auditory, 
which  is  the  portio  mollis  of  the  seventh  pair.  They 
arise  from  the  fourth  ventricle  of  the  brain,  pass 
through  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone  to  the 
face,  where  they  form  the  pes  anserinus,  which  sup- 
plies the  integuments  of  the  face  and  forehead. 

FA'CIES.  The  face.  See  Face. 

Facies  hippocratica.  That  particular  disposition 
of  the  features  which  immediately  precedes  the  stroke 
of  death  is  so  called,  because  it  has  been  so  admirably 
described  by  Hippocrates. 

Facies  rubra.  See  Gutta  rosacea. 

FACTI'TIOUS.  A term  applied  to  any  thing  which 
is  made  by  art,  in  opposition  to  that  which  is  native, 
or  found  already  made  in  nature. 

FA  CULTY.  Facultas.  The  power  or  ability  by 
which  any  action  is  performed. 

F.s'ces.  (The  plural  of  fcex.)  The  alvine  excre- 
tions. 

FAS'CULA.  (Diminutive  of  fcex.)  A substance  ob- 
tained by  bruising  or  grinding  certain  vegetables  in 
water.  It  is  that  part  which,  after  a little,  falls  to  the 
bottom.  The  faecula  of  plants  differs  principally  from 
gum  or  mucus  in  being  insoluble  in  cold  water,  in 
which  it  falls  with  wonderful  quickness.  There  are 
few  plants  which  do  not  contain  fiecula  ; but  the  seeds 
of  gramineous  and  leguminous  vegetables,  and  all  tu- 
berose roots  contain  it  most  plentifully. 

FiEX.  (Fax,  acis,  f.  an  excretion.)  The  alvine 
excretions  are  called  faces. 

FAGA'RA.  (From  fagus , the  breech,  which  it  re- 
sembles.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Class,  Tetrundri a ; Order , Moncgynia. 

Fagara  major.  See  Fagara  plerota. 

Fagara  octandra.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  Tacamahaca , which  is  a resinous 
substance  that  exudes  both  spontaneously,  and  when 
incisions  are  made  into  the  stem  of  this  tree : Fagara 
foliolis  tomentosis , of  Linmeus,  and  not,  as  was  for- 
merly supposed,  from  the  Populus  balsamifera.  Two 
kinds  of  a tacamahaca  are  met  with  in  the  shops.  The 
best,  called,  from  its  being  collected  in  a kind  of  gourd- 
shell,  tacamahaca  in  shells,  is  somewhat  unctuous  and 
350 


soft,  of  a pale  yellowish  or  greenish  colour,  a bitterish 
aromatic  taste,  and  a fragrant  delightful  smell,  ap- 
proaching to  that  of  lavender  and  ambergris.  The 
more  common  sort  is  in  semi-transparent  grains,  of  a 
whitish,  yellowish,  brownish,  or  greenish  colour,  and 
of  a less  grateful  smell  than  the  former.  Tacamahaca 
was  formerly  in  high  estimation  as  an  ingredient  in 
warm  stimulating  plasters;  and  although  seldom  used 
internally,  it  may  be  given  with  advantage  as  a corro- 
borant and  astringent  balsamic. 

Fagara  plerota.  Fagara  major;  Castana  Lu- 
zonis ; Cubebis.  This  plant  is  found  in  the  Philip- 
pine islands.  The  berries  arc  aromatic,  and,  accord- 
ing to  Avicenna,  heating,  drying,  good  for  cold,  weak 
stomachs,  and  astringent  to  the  bowels. 

FAGOPYRUM.  (From  <f>ayos , the  beech,  and 
irupoj,  wheat ; because  its  seeds  were  supposed  to  re- 
semble the  mast,  i.  e.  fruit  of  beech.)  See  Polygonum 
fagopyrum. 

FagotRi'ticum.  See  Polygonum  fagopyrum. 

FA  GUS.  (From  <f>ayu>,  to  eat ; its  nut  being  one  of 
the  first  fruits  used  by  man.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnasan 
system.  Class,  Monacia  ; Order,  Polyandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopffiial  name  of  the  beech  See 
Fagus  sylvatica. 

Fagus  castanea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
chesnut-tree.  Castanea;  Lopima;  Mota;  Gians 
Jovis  Theophrasti.  Jupiter’s  acorn  ; Sardinian  acorn ; 
the  common  chesnut.  The  fruit  of  this  plant,  Fagus 
— foliis  lunceolutis , acuminato-serratis,  subtus  nudis , 
of  Linnaeus,  are  much  esteemed  as  an  article  of  luxury 
after  dinner.  Toasting  renders  them  more  easy  of  di- 
gestion; but,  notwithstanding,  they  must  be  considered 
as  improper  lor  weak  stomachs.  They  aie  moderately 
nourishing,  as  containing  sugar,  and  much  farinaceous 
substance. 

Fagus  sylvatica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
beech-tree.  Fagus ; Oxya ; Balanda ; Valanida. 
The  fruit  and  interior  bark  of  this  tree,  Fagus— foliis 
ovatis , obsolete  serratis,  of  Linnaeus,  are  occasionally 
used  medicinally,  the  former  in  obstinate  headache,  and 
the  latter  in  the  cure  of  hectic  fever.  The  oil  ex- 
pressed from  beech-nuts  is  supposed  to  destroy  worms ; 
a child  may  take  two  drachms  of  it  night  and  morn- 
ing ; an  adult  an  ounce.  The  poor  people  of  Silesia 
use  this  oil  instead  of  butler. 

FAHLUMITE.  A sub-species  of  octohedral  corun- 
dum. 

FAINTING.  See  Syncope. 

FAIRBURN.  The  name  of  a village  in  the  county 
of  Ross,  in  the  north  of  Britain,  where  there  is  a sul- 
phureous spring.’ 

FA'LCIFORM.  (Falciformis  ; from  falx,  a scythe, 
and  forma,  resemblance.)  Resembling  a scythe. 

Falciform  process.  The  falx.  A process  of  the 
dura  mater,  that  arises  from  the  crista  galli,  separates 
the  hemispheres  of  the  brain,  and  terminates  in  the 
tentorium. 

Falde'lla.  Lint,  used  as  a compress. 

Falling-sickness.  See  Epilepsia. 

Fallopian  tube.  See  Tuba  Fallopiava. 

Fallopian  ligament.  See  Poupart's  ligament. 

FALLOPIUS,  Gabriel,  a physician  of  Modena, 
W'as  born  about  the  year  1523.  He  showed  early 
great  zeal  in  anatomy,  botany,  chemistry,  and  other 
branches  of  knowledge;  and  alter  studying  in  Italy, 
travelled  to  other  countries  for  his  improvement.  In 
1548,  he  was  appointed  professor  of  anatomy  at  Pisa, 
and  three  years  after  at  Padua ; where  he  also  taught 
botany,  but  with  less  celebrity.  His  death  happened 
in  1563  He  distinguished  himself,  not  only  as  an 
anatomist,  but  also  in  medicine  and  surgery.  Douglas 
has  characterized  him  as  highly  systematic  in  teach- 
ing, successful  in  treating  diseases,  and  expeditious  in 
operating.  Some  of  the  discoveries,  to  which  he  laid 
claim,  appear  to  have  been  anticipated ; as,  for  in- 
stance, the  tubes  proceeding  from  the  uterus,  though 
generally  called  after  him  Fallopian.  However,  he 
has  the  merit  of  recovering  many  of  the  observations 
of  the  ancients,  which  had  fallen  into  oblivion.  His 
“ Observationes  Anatomicte,”  published  in  1561,  was 
one  of  the  best  works  of  the  16th  century;  in  this 
some  of  the  errors,  which  had  escaped  his  master, 
Vesalius,  are  modestly  pointed  out.  Many  other  pub- 
lications, ascribed  to  him,  were  printed  after  bis  death  j 
some  of  which  are  evidently  spurious: 


FAT 


FAT 


PALX.  See  Falciform  process. 

FA'MES.  Hunger. 

Fames  canina.  See  Bulimia. 

Famigerati'ssimum  emplastrum.  (From  fami- 
geratus,  renowned ; from  fama,  fame,  and  gero,  to 
bear  : so  named  from  its  excellence.)  A plaster  used 
in  intermittent  fever,  made  of  aromatic,  irritating  sub- 
stances, -and  applied  to  the  wrists. 

FAMILY.  Familia.  "A  term  used  by  naturalists  to 
express  a certain  order  of  natural  productions,  agree- 
ing in  the  principal  characters,  and  containing  nume- 
rous individuals  not  only  distinct  from  one  another, 
but  in  whole  sets,  several  members  being  to  be  col- 
lected out  of  the  same  family,  all  of  which  have  the 
family  character,  and  all  some  subordinate  distinction 
peculiar  to  that  whole  number,  or,  though  found  in 
every  individual  of  it,  not  found  in  those  of  any  others. 

It  has  been  too  common  to  confound  the  words,  class, 
family,  order,  &c.  in  natural  history ; but  the  determi- 
nate meaning  of  the  word  family  seems  to  be  that 
larger  order  of  creatures  under  which  classes  and  or- 
ders are  subordinate  distinctions. 

FARFARA.  (From  farfarus , the  white  poplar: 
so  called  because  its  leaves  resemble  those  of  the  white 
poplar.)  See  Tussilago  farfara. 

FARI'NA.  (From  far , corn,  of  which  it  is  made.) 
Meal,  or  flour.  A term  given  to  the  pulverulent  and 
glutinous  part  of  wheat,  and  other  seeds,  which  is  ob- 
tained by  grinding  and  sifting.  It  is  highly  nutritious, 
and  consists  of  gluten,  starch,  and  mucilage.  See 
Triticv.m. 

FARINA'CEA.  (From  farina , flour.)  This  term 
includes  all  those  substances,  employed  as  aliment, 
called  cerealia,  legumina , and  nuces  oleosce. 

FARINA'CEOUS.  (Farinaceus ; f rom  farina, 
flour.)  A term  given  to  all  articles  of  food  which  con- 
tain farina.  See  Farina. 

FaRina'rium.  See  Alica. 

Fa'rreus.  (From  far,  corn.)  Scurfy.  An  epithet 
of  urine,  where  it  deposites  a branny  sediment. 

FA'SCIA.  (From  fascis , a bundle ; because,  by 
means  of  a band,  materials  are  collected  into  a bun- 
dle.) 1.  A bandage,  fillet,  or  roller. 

2.  The  tendinous  expansions  of  muscles,  which 
bind  parts  together,  are  termed  fasciae.  See  Aponeu- 
rosis. 

Fascia  lata.  A thick  and  strong  tendinous  expan- 
sion, sent  off  from  the  back,  and  from  the  tendons  of 
the  glutei  and  adjacent  muscles,  to  surround  the  mus- 
cles of  the  thigh.  It  is  the  thickest  on  the  outside  of 
the  thigh  and  leg,  but  towards  the  inside  of  both  be- 
comes gradually  thinner.  A little  below  the  trochanter 
major,  it  is  firmly  fixed  to  the  linea  aspera ; and,  fur- 
ther down,  to  that  part  of  the  head  of  the  tibia  that  is 
next  the  fibula,  where  it  sends  off  the  tendinous  ex- 
pansion along  the  outside  of  the  leg.  It  serves  to 
strengthen  the  action  of  the  muscles,  by  keeping  them 
firm  in  their  proper  places  when  in  action,  particularly 
the  tendons  that  pass  over  the  joints  where  this  mem- 
brane is  thickest. 

FASCIA'LIS.  (From  fascia,  a fillet.)  See  Tensor 
vaginae  femoris. 

Fascia'tio.  (From  fascia , a fillet.)  The  binding 
up  any  diseased  or  wounded  part  with  bandages. 

FASCICULARIS.  (From  fascis,  a bundle.)  Ap- 
plied to  roots  which  are  sessile  at  their  base,  and  con- 
sist of  bundles  of  finger-like  processes  ; as  the  root  of 
the  Ophris  nidus  avis. 

FASCICULATUS.  Fasciculate.  Bundled  or  clus- 
tered. Applied  to  nerves,  stems  of  plants,  leaves,  <fcc. 
See  Leaf  and  Cavlis. 

FASCTCULUS.  (From  fascis,  a bundle.  1.  In 
pharmacy,  a handful. 

2.  In  botany,  a fascicule  is  applied  to  flowers  on  lit- 
tle stalks,  variously  inserted  and  subdivided,  collected 
into  a close  bundle,  level  at  the  top  ; as  in  Sweet-wil- 
liam. It  differs  from, 

1.  A corymb , in  the  little  stalks  coming  only  from 
about  the  apex  of  the  peduncle,  and  not  from  its  whole 
length. 

2.  An  umbel , from  the  stalks  not  coming  from  a 
common  point. 

3.  A cyme , in  not  having  its  principal  division  um- 
bellate. | 

FAT.  Adeps.  A concrete  oily  matter  contained 
in  the  cellular  membrane  of  animals,  of  a white,  or 
yellowish  colour,  with  little  or  no  smell,  or  taste.  It 


Iiliffers  in  different  animals  in  solidity,  colour,  taste,  Sec, 
and  likewise  in  the  same  animal  at  different  ages.  In 
infancy  it  is  white,  insipid,  and  not  very  solid;  in  the 
adult  it  is  firm  and  yellowish,  and  in  animals  of  an  ad- 
vanced age,  its  colour  is  deeper,  its  consistence  various, 
and  its  taste  in  general  stronger. 

The  fat  appears  to  be  useful  in  the  animal  economy 
principally  by  its  physical  properties  ; it  forms  a sort  of 
elastic  cushion  in  the  orbit  upon  which  the  eye  moves 
with  facility;  in  the  soles  of  the  feet,  and  in  the  hips, 
it  forms  a sort  of  layer,  which  renders  the  pressure  ex- 
erted by  the  body  upon  the  skin  and  otln  r soft  parts  less 
severe  ; its  presence  beneath  the  skin  concurs  in  round- 
ing the  outlines,  in  diminishing  the  bony  and  muscu- 
lar projections,  and  in  beautifying  the  form  ; and  as  all 
fat  bodies  are  bad  conductors  of  caloric,  it  contributes 
to  the  preservation  of  that  of  the  body.  Full  persons 
in  general  sutler  little  in  winter  by  the  cold. 

Age,  and  the  various  modes  of  life,  have  much  in 
fluence  upon  the  developement  of  this  fluid:  very 
young  children  are  generally  fat.  Fat  is  rarely  abun- 
dant in  the  young  man  ; but  the  quantity  of  it  increases 
much  towards  the  age  of  thirty  years,  particularly  if 
the  nourishment  is  succulent,  and  the  life  sedentary ; 
the  abdomen  projects,  the  hips  increase  in  size,  as  well 
as  the  breasts  in  women.  The  fat  becomes  more  yel- 
low in  proportion  as  the  age  is  more  advanced.  Fat 
meat  is  nourishing  to  those  that  have  strong  digestive 
powers.  It  is  used  externally,  as  a softening  remedy, 
and  enters  into  the  composition  of  ointments  and  plas- 
ters. 

“ Concerning  the  nature  of  this  important  product 
of  animalization,  nothing  definite  was  known,  till 
Clievreuil  devoted  himself  with  meritorious  zeal  and 
perseverance  to  its  investigation.  He  has  already  pub- 
lished in  the  Annalesde  Chimie,  seven  successive  me- 
moirs on  the  subject,  each  of  them  surpassing  its  pre- 
decessor in  interest.  W e shall  in  this  article  give  a 
brief  abstract,  of  the  whole. 

By  dissolving  fat  in  a large  quantity  of  alkohol,  and 
, observing  the  manner  in  which  its  different  portions 
were  acted  upon  by  this  substance,  and  again  separated 
from  it,  it  is  concluded  that  the  fat  is  composed  of  an 
oily  substance , which  remains  fluid  at  the  ordinary 
temperature  of  the  atmosphere  ; and  of  another  fatty 
substance  which  is  much  less  fusible.  Hence  it  fol- 
lows, that  fat  is  not  to  be  regarded  as  a simple  principle, 
but  as  a Combination  of  the  above  two  principles, 
which  may  be  separated  without  alteration.  One  of 
these  substances  melts  at  about  45°.  the  other  at  100° 
the  same  quantity  of  alkohoj  which  dissolves  3.2  parts 
of  the  oily  substance,  dissolves  1.8  only  of  the  fatty 
substance  : the  first  is  separated  from  the  alkohol  in 
the  form  of  an  oil ; the  second  in  that  of  small  silky 
needles. 

Each  of  the  constituents  of  natural  fat  was  then  sa- 
ponified by  the  addition  of  potassa  ; and  an  accurate 
description  given  of  the  compounds  which  were  form- 
ed, and  of  the  proportions  of  their  constituents.  The 
oily  substance  became  saponified  more  readily  than  the 
fatty  substance ; the  residual  fluids  in  both  cases  con- 
tained the  sweet  oily  principle ; but  the  quantity  that 
proceeded  from  the  soap  formed  of  the  oily  substance, 
was  four  or  five  times  as  much  as  that  from  the  fatty 
substance.  The  latter  soap  was  found  to  contain  a 
much  greater  proportion  of  the  pearly  matter  than  the 
former,  in  the  proportion  of  7.5  to  2.9 ; the  proportion 
of  the  fluid  fat.  was  the  reverse,  a greater  quantity  of 
this  being  found  in  the  soap  formed  from  the  oily  sub- 
stance of  the  fat. 

When  the  principles  which  constitute  fat  unite  with 
potassa,  it  is  probable  that  they  experience  a change  in 
the  proportion  of  their  elements.  This  change  deve- 
lopes  at  least  three  bodies,  margarine , fluid  fat,  and 
the  sweet  principle ; and  it  is  remarkable,  that  it  takes 
place  without  the  absorption  of  any  foreign  substance, 
or  the  disengagement  of  any  of  the  elements  which 
are  separated  from  each  other.  As  this  change  is 
effected  by  the  intermedium  of  the  alkali,  we  may 
conclude  that  the  newly  formed  principles  must  have 
a strong  affinity  for  salifiable  bases,  and  will  in  many 
respects  resemble  the  acids;  and,  in  fact,  they  exhibit 
the  leading  characters  of  acids,  in  reddening  litmus,  in 
decomposing  the  alkaline  carbonates  to  unite  to  their 
bases,  and  in  neutralizing  the  specific  properties  of  the 
alkalies. 

Having  already  pointed  out  the  analogy  between  the 


FAT 


FAT 


properties  of  acids  and  the  principles  into  which  fat  is 
converted  by  means  of  the  alkalies,  the  next  object 
was  to  examine  the  action  which  other  bases  have 
upon  fat,  and  to  observe  the  effect  of  water,  and  of  the 
cohesive  force  of  the  bases  upon  the  process  of  saponi- 
fication. The  substances  which  the  author  subjected  to 
experiment,  were  soda,  the  four  alkaline  earths,  alu- 
mina, and  the  oxides  of  zinc,  copper,  and  lead.  After 
giving  a detail  of  the  processes  which  he  employed 
with  these  substances  respectively,  he  draws  the  fol- 
lowing general  conclusions: — Soda,  barytes,  strontian, 
lime,  the  oxide  of  zinc,  and  the  protoxide  of  lead,  con- 
vert fat  into  margarine,  fluid  fat,  the  sweet  principle, 
the  yellow  colouring  principle,  and  the  odorous  princi- 
ple, precisely  in  the  same  manner  as  potassa.  What- 
ever be  the  base  that  has  been  employed,  the  products 
of  saponification  always  exist  in  the  same  relative  pro- 
portion. As  the  above  mentioned  bases  form  with 
margarine  and  the  fluid  fat  compounds  which  are  in- 
soluble in  water,  it  follow’s,  that  the  action  of  this  li- 
quid, as  a solvent  of  soap,  is  not  essential  to  the  pro- 
cess of  saponification.  It  is  remarkable  that  the  ox- 
ides of  zinc  and  of  lead,  which  are  insoluble  in  w’ater, 
and  which  produce  compounds  equally  insoluble, 
should  give  the  same  results  with  potassa  and  soda, — 
a circumstance  which  proves  that  those  oxides  have  a 
strong  alkaline  power.  Although  the  analogy  of  mag- 
nesia to  the  alkalies  is,  in  other  respects,  so  striking, 
yet  we  find  that  it  cannot  convert  fat  into  soap  under 
the  same  circumstances  with  the  oxides  of  zinc  and 
lead. 

It  was  found  that  100  parts  of  hog’s-lard  were  re- 
duced to  the  completely  saponified  state  by  16.36  parts 
of  potassa. 

The  properties  of  spermaceti  were  next  examined  : 
it  melts  at  about  112° ; it  is  not  much  altered  by  distil- 
lation ; it  dissolves  readily  in  hot  alkohol,  but  separates 
as  the  fluid  cools  ; the  solution  has  no  effect  in  chang- 
ing the  colour  of  the  tincture  of  litmus,  a circumstance, 
as  it  is  observed,  in  which  it  differs  from  margarine, 
a substance  which,  in  many  respects,  it  resembles. — 
Spermaceti  is  capable  of  being  saponified  by  potassa, 
with  nearly  the  same  phenomena  as  when  we  submit 
hogs-lard  to  the  action  of  potassa,  although  the  opera- 
tion is  effected  with  more  difficulty 

The  author’s  general  conclusion  respecting  the  fatty 
matter  of  dead  bodies  is,  that  even  after  the  lactic  acid, 
the  lactates,  and  other  ingredients  which  are  less  es- 
sential, are  removed  from  it,  it  is  not  a simple,  ammo- 
niacal  soap,  but  a combination  of  various  fatty  sub- 
stances with  ammonia,  potassa,  and  lime.  The  fatty 
substances  which  were  separated  from  alkohol,  had 
different  melting  points, and  different  sensible  properties. 
It  follows,  from  Chevreuil’s  experiments,  that  the  sub- 
stance which  is  the  least  fusible,  has  more  affinity  for 
bases  than  those  which  are  more  so.  It  is  observed, 
that  adipocere  possesses  the  characters  of  a saponified 
fat ; it  is  soluble  in  boiling  alkohol  in  all  proportions, 
reddens  litmus,  and  unites  readily  to  potassa,  not  only 
without  losing  its.  weight,  but  w ithout  having  its  fu- 
sibility or  other  properties  changed. 

Chevreuil  has  shown,  that  hog’s-lard,  in  its  natural 
state,  has  not  the  property  of  combining  with  alkalies  ; 
but  that  it  acquires  it  by  experiencing  some  change  in 
the  proportion  of  its  elements.  This  change  being  in- 
duced by  the  action  of  the  alkali,  it  follows  that  the 
bodies  of  the  new  formation  must  have  a decided  af- 
finity for  the  species  of  body  which  has  determined  it. 
If  we  apply  this  foundation  of  the  theory  of  saponifi- 
cation to  the  change  into  fat  which  bodies  buried  in  the 
earth  experience,  we  shall  find  that  it  explains  the  pro- 
cess in  a very  satisfactory  manner.  In  reality,  the  fatty 
matter  is  the  combination  of  the  two  adipose  sub- 
stances with  ammonia,  lime,  and  potassa : one  of  these 
substances  has  the  same  sensible  properties  with  mar- 
garine procured  from  the  soap  of  hog’s-lard  ; the  other, 
the  orange-coloured  oil,  excepting  its  colour,  appears 
to  have  a strong  analogy  w'ith  the  fluid  fat.  From 
these  circumstances,  it  is  probable  that  the  formation 
of  the  fatty  matter  may  be  the  result  of  a proper  sapo- 
nification produced  by  ammonia,  proceeding  from  the 
decomposition  of  the  muscle,  and  by  the  potassa  and 
lime,  which  proceed  from  the  decomposition  of  certain 
salts. 

The  author  remarks,  that  he  has  hitherto  made  use 
of  periphrases  when  speaking  of  the  different  bodies 
that  he  has  been  describing,  as  supposing  that  their 
352 


nature  was  not  sufficiently  determined.  He  now,  how- 
ever, conceives,  that  he  may  apply  specific  names  to 
them,  which  will  be  more  commodious,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  by  being  made  appropriate,  will  point  out 
the  relation  which  these  bodies  bear  to  each  other. 
The  following  is  the  nomenclature  which  he  after- 
ward adopted —The  crystalline  matter  of  human 
biliary  calculi  is  named  cholesterine , from  the  Greek 
word  x°^V,  bi|ei  and  s-epeog,  solid ; spermaceti  is 
named  eetine,  from  ktjtos,  a whale ; the  fatty  sub 
stance  and  the  oily  substance,  are  named  respectively, 
stearine  and  elaine,  from  the  words  j’cap,  and  e),aiov, 
oil ; margarine,  and  the  fluid  fat  obtained  after  sapo 
nification,  are  named  margaric  acid  and  oleic  acid, 
while  the  term  cetic  acid  is  applied  to  what  was  named 
saponified  spermaciti.  The  margarates,  oleates,  and 
cetates,  will  be  the  generic  names  of  the  soaps  or  com- 
binations which  these  acids  are  capable  of  forming  by 
their  union  with  salifiable  bases. 

Two  portions  of  human  fat  were  examined,  one 
taken  from  the  kidney,  the  other  from  the  thigh : after 
some  time  they  both  of  them  manifested  a tendency  to 
separate  into  two  distinct  substances,  one  of  a solid, 
and  the  other  of  a fluid  consistence : the  two  portions 
differed  in  their  fluidity  and  their  melting  point.  These 
variations  depend  upon  the  different  proportions  of 
stearine  and  elaine  ; for  the  concrete  part  of  fat  is  a 
combination  of  the  two  with  an  excess  of  stearine,  and 
the  fluid  part  is  a combination  with  an  excess  of  elaine. 
The  fat  from  the  other  animals  was  then  examined, 
principally  with  respect  to  their  melting  point  and 
their  solubility  in  alkohol ; the  melting  point  was  not 
always  the  same  in  the  fat  of  the  same  species  of 
animal. 

Chevreuil  next  examines  the  change  which  is  pro- 
duced in  the  different  kinds  of  fat  respectively  by  the 
action  of  potassa.  All  the  kinds  of  fat  are  capable  of 
being  perfectly  saponified,  when  excluded  from  the 
contact  of  the  air,  iu  allof  them  there  was  the  production 
of  the  saponified  fat  and  the  sweet  principle ; no  car- 
bonic acid  WEis  produced,  and  the  soaps  formed  con- 
tained no  acetic  acid,  or  only  slight  traces  of  it.  The 
saponified  fats  had  more  tendency  to  crystallize  in 
needles  than  the  fats  in  their  natural  slate;  they  were 
soluble  in  all  proportions  in  boiling  alkohol  of  the 
specific  gravity  of  821.  The  solution,  like  that  of  the 
saponified  fat  of  the  hog,  contained  both  the  margaric 
and  the  oleic  acids.  They  were  less  fusible  than  the 
fats  from  which  they  were  formed : thus,  when 
human  fat,  after  being  saponified,  was  melted,  the 
thermometer  became  stationary  at  95°,  when  the  fluid 
began  to  congeal,  in  that  of  the  sheep,  the  thermometer 
fell  to  118.5°,  and  rose  to  122° ; in  that  of  the  ox  it  re- 
mained stationary  at  118.5° ; and  in  that  of  the  jaguar 
at  96.5°. 

The  method  of  analysis  employed  was  to  expose  the 
different  kinds  of  fat  to  boiling  alkohol,  and  to  suffer 
the  mixture  to  cool  : a portion  of  the  fat  that  had  been 
dissolved  was  then  separated  in  two  states  of  combi- 
nation ; one  with  an  excess  of  stearine  was  deposited, 
the  other  with  an  excess  of  elaine  remained  in  solution. 
The  first  was  separated  by  filtration,  and  by  distilling 
the  filtered  fluid,  and  adding  a little  water  towards  the 
end  of  the  operation,  we  obtain  the  second  in  the  re- 
tort, under  the  form  of  an  alkoholic  aqueous  fluid.  The 
distilled  alkohol  which  had  been  employed  in  the 
analysis  of  human  fat,  had  no  sensible  odour ; the 
same  was  the  case  with  that  which  had  served  for  the 
analysis  of  the  fat  of  the  ox,  of  the  hog,  and  of  the 
goose.  The  alkohol  which  had  been  employed  in  the 
analysis  of  the  fat  of  the  sheep,  had  u slight  odour  of 
candlegrease. 

All  the  soaps  of  stearine  were  analyzed  by  the  same 
process  as  the  soap  of  the  fat  from  which  they  had  been 
extracted:  there  was  procured  from  them  the  pearly 
super-margarata  of  potassa  and  the  oleate ; but  the 
first  was  much  more  abundant  than  the  second.  The 
margaric  acid  of  the  stearines  had  precisely  the  same 
capacity  for  saturation  as  that  which  was  extracted 
from  tfle  soaps  formed  of  fat.  The  margaric  acid  of 
the  stearine  of  the  sheep  was  fusible  at  144°,  and  that 
of  the  stearine  of  the  ox  at  143.5° ; while  the  mar- 
garic acids  of  the  hog  and  the  goose  had  nearly  the 
same  fusibility  with  the  margaric  acid  of  the  fat  of 
these  animals. 

Chevreuil  technically  calls  spermaceti,  eetine.  In  the 
fifth  memoir,  in  which  we  have  an  account  of  many 


FEB 


FEB 


of  the  properties  of  this  substance,  it  was  stated,  that  it 
is  not  easily  saponified  by  potassa,  but  that  it  is  con- 
verted by  this  reagent  into  a substance  which  is  soluble 
in  water,  but  has  not  the  saccharine  flavour  of  the  sweet 
principle  of  oils ; into  an  acid  analogous  to  the  mar- 
garic,  to  which  the  name  of  cetic  was  applied ; and 
into  another  acid,  which  was  conceived  to  be  analo- 
gous to  the  oleic.  Since  he  wrote  the  fifth  memoir, 
the  author  has  made  the  following  observations  on 
this  subject : — 1.  That  the  portion  of  the  soap  of  cetine 
which  is  insoluble  in  water,  or  the  cetate  of  potassa, 
is  in  part  gelatinous,  and  in  part  pearly : 2.  The  two 
kinds  of  crystals  were  produced  from  the  cetate  of 
potassa  which  had  been  dissolved  in  alkohol : 3.  That 
the  cetate  of  potassa  exposed,  under  a bell  glass,  to  the 
heat  of  a stove,  produced  a sublimate  of  a fatty  mat- 
ter which  was  not  acid.  From  this  circumstance  Chev- 
reuil  was  led  to  suspect,  that  the  supposed  cetic  acid 
might  be  a combination,  or  a mixture  of  margaric  acid, 
and  of  a fatty  body  which  was  not  acid.  He  accord- 
ingly treated  a small  quantity  of  it  with  barytic  water, 
and  boiled  the  soap  which  was  formed  in  alkohol ; the 
greatest  part  of  it  was  not  dissolved,  and  the  alkoholic 
solution,  when  cooled,  filtered,  and  distilled,  produced 
a residuum  of  fatty  matter  which  was  not  acid.  The 
suspicion  being  thus  confirmed,  Chevreuil  determined 
to  subject  cetine  to  a new  train  of  experiments.  Be- 
ing treated  with  boiling  alkohol,  a cetine  was  pro- 
cured which  was  fusible  at  120°,  and  a yellow  fatty 
matter  which  began  to  become  solid  at  89.5°,  and  which 
at  73.5°  contained  a fluid  oil,  which  was  separated  by 
filtration. — Ure's  Chem.  Die. 

FATUTTAS.  (From  fatuus , silly.)  Fatuity  or 
foolishness. 

FAU'CES.  (Faux,  pi.  fauces.)  A cavity  behind 
the  tongue,  palatine  arch,  uvula,  and  tonsils;  from 
which  the  pharynx  and  larynx  proceed. 

Fau'fel.  Terra  japonica,  or  catechu. 

[Fausse  avoine.  False  oats.  Indian  rice.  See 
Zizania  aquatica.  A.] 

FAUX.  (Faux,  cis.  f.)  1.  The  gorge,  or  mouth, 
or  opening  of  the  gullet. 

2.  Applied  by  botanists  to  the  opening  of  the  tube 
of  monopetalous  corals.  See  Corolla. 

Fava'go  australis.  (From  favus,  a honey-comb; 
from  its  resemblance  to  a honey-comb.)  A species  of 
bastard  sponge. 

FAVOSUS.  (From  favus,  a honey-comb.)  Honey- 
comb-like.  1.  Applied  to  some  eruptive  diseases ; as 
lAchen  favosus,  the  secretion  in  which  is  cellular  and 
honey-comb-like. 

2.  To  parts  of  plants,  as  the  receptacle  of  the  ono- 
pordium  which  has  cells  like  a honey-comb. 

FAVUS.  1.  A honey-comb.. 

2.  A species  of  aclior,  or  foul  ulcer. 

FE'BRES.  (The  plural  of  febris.)  An  order  in 
the  class  Pyrexice,  of  Cullen,  characterized  by 
the  presence  of  pyrexia,  without  primary  local 
affection. 

FEBRI'CULA.  (Dim.  of  febris,  a fever.)  A term 
employed  to  express  a slight  degree  of  symptomatic 
fever. 

FEURFFUGA.  (From  febrem  fugare,  to  drive 
away  a fever.)  The  plant  feverfew  ; less  centaury. 

FE'BRIFUGE.  (Febrifugus  ; from  febris,  a fever, 
and  fugo,  to  drive  away.)  That  which  possesses  the 
property  of  abating  the  violence  of  any  fever. 

Febrifugum  crenii.  Regu lus  of  antimony. 

Febrifugum  oleum.  Febrifuge  oil.  The  flowers 
of  antimony,  made  with  sal-ammoniac  and  antimony 
sublimed  together,  and  exposed  to  the  air,  when  they 
deliquesce.  ' 

Febrifugus  pulvis.  Febrifuge  powder.  The  Ger- 
mans give  this  name  to  the  pulvis  stypticus  Helvetii. 
In  England,  a mixture  of  oculi  cancrorum  and  emetic 
tartar,  in  the  proportion  of  half  a drachm  and  two 
grains,  has  obtained  the  same  name;  in  fevers  it  is 
given  in  doses  of  gr.  iii.  to  iv. 

Febrifugus  sal.  Regenerated  marine  salt. 

FEBRIS.  ( Febris , is.  f. ; from  ferveo,  to  burn.)  A 
fever.  A disease  characterized  by  an  increase  of  heat, 
an  accelerated  pulse,  a foul  tongue,  and  an  impaired 
state  of  several  functions  of  the  body. 

Febris  alba.  See  Chlorosis. 

Febris  ampiiimerina.  A quotidian  fever. 

Febris  angisosa.  See  Scarlatina  anginosa. 

Febris  apitthosa.  See  Jlphtha. 


. Febris  ardens.  Fever  attended  by  a very  hot  or  burn- 
ing state  of  the  skin.  A burning  inflammatory  fever. 

Febris  assodes.  A tertian  fever,  with  extreme 
restlessness. 

Febris  bullosa.  See  Pemphigus. 

Febris  cacatoria.  An  intermittent  fever,  with 
diarrhoea. 

Febris  carcerum.  The  prison  fever. 

Febris  castrensis.  A camp  fever,  generally 
typhus. 

Febris  catarrhalis.  A fever,  either  typhoid, 
nervous,  or  synochal,  attended  with  symptoms  of  ca- 
tarrh. 

Febris  cholerica.  A fevet,  attended  throughout 
with  bilious  diarrhoea. 

Febris  continua.  A continued  fever.  A division 
of  the  order  Febres,  in  the  class  Pyrexice,  of  Cullen. 
Continued  fevers  have  no  intermission,  but  exacerba- 
tions coine  on  usually  twice  in  one  day.  The  genera 
of  continued  fever  are : 

1.  Synocha,  or  inflammatory  fever,  known  by  in- 
creased heat  ; pulse  frequent,  strong,  and  hard;  urine 
high-coloured ; senses  not  much  impaired.  See  Sy- 
nocha. 

2.  Typhus,  or  putrid-tending  fever,  which  is  con- 
tagious, and  is  characterized  by  moderate  heat ; quick, 
weak,  and  small  pulse ; senses  much  impaired,  and 
great  prostration  of  strength.  This  genus  has  two 
species ; Typhus  petechialis , attended  with  petechia} ; 
and  Typhus  icterodes,  or  yellow  fever;  and  of  the 
former  there  are  two  varieties;  Typhus  mitior , or 
nervous  fever ; and  Typhus  gravior , or  putrid  fever. 
See  Febris  nervosa,  and  Typhus. 

3.  Synochus,  or  mixed  fever.  See  Synochus. 

Febris  elodes.  A fever  with  contkiual  and  pro 

fuse  sweating. 

Febris  epiala.  A fever  with  a continual  sense  of 
coldness.  See  Epialus. 

Febris  erysipelatosa.  See  Erysipelas. 

Febris  exanthematica.  A fever  with  an  erup- 
tion. See  Exanthema. 

Febris  flava.  See  Typhus. 

Febris  hectica.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Pyrexice , and  order  Febris,  of  Cullen.  It  is  known  by 
exacerbations  at  noon,  but  greater  in  the  evening,  with 
slight  remissions  in  the  morning,  after  nocturnal 
sweats  ; the  urine  depositing  a furturaceo-lateritious 
sediment;  appetite  good;  thirst  moderate.  Hectic 
fever  is  symptomatic  of  chlorosis,  scrofula,  phthisis, 
diseased  viscera,  &c. 

Febris  hungarica.  A species  of  tertian  intermit- 
tent fever. 

Febris  hydrodes.  A fever  with  profuse  sweats. 

Febris  inflammatoria.  See  Synocha , 

Febris  intermittens.  An  intermittent  fever,  or 
ague.  A division  of  the  order  Febres,  of  Cullen,  in 
the  class  Pyrexice.  Intermittent  fevers  are  known  by 
cold,  hot,  and  sweating  stages,  in  succession,  attending 
each  paroxysm,  and  followed  by  an  intermission  or 
remission.  There  are  three  genera  of  intermitting 
fevers,  and  several  varieties. 

1.  Quotidiana.  A quotidian  ague.  The  paroxysms 
return  in  the  morning,  at  an  interval  of  about  twenty- 
four  hours. 

2.  Tertiana.  A tertian  ague.  The  paroxysms  com- 
monly come  on  at  mid-day,  at  an  interval  of  about 
forty-eight  hours. 

3.  Quartana.  A quartan  ague.  The  paroxysms 
come  on  in  the  afternoon,  with  an  interval  of  about 
seventy-two  hours.  The  tertian  ague  is  most  apt  to 
prevail  in  the  spring,  and  the  quartan  in  autumn. 

Of  the  quotidian,  tertian,  and  quartan  intermittents, 
there  are  several  varieties  and  forms ; as  the  double 
tertian,  having  a paroxysm  every  day,  with  the  alter- 
nate paroxysms,  similar  to  one  another.  The  double 
tertian,  with  two  paroxysms  every  other  day.  The 
triple  tertian,  with  two  paroxysms  on  one  day,  and 
another  on  the  next.  The  double  quartan,  with  two 
paroxysms  on  the  first  day,  none  on  the  second  and 
third,  and  two  again  on  the  fourth  day.  The  double 
quartan,  with  a paroxysm  on  the  first  day,  another  on 
the  second,  but  none  on  the  third.  The  triple  quartan, 
with  three  paroxysms  every  fourth  day.  The  triple 
quartan,  with  a paroxysm  every  day,  every  fourth 
paroxysm  being  similar. 

When  these  fevers  arise  in  the  spring  of  the  year, 
they  are  called  vernal ; and  when  in  the  autumn,  they 

353 


FEB 


FEB 


are  known  by  the  name  of  autumnal.  Intermittents 
often  prove  obstinate,  and  are  of  long  duration  in 
warm  climates ; and  they  not  unfrequently  resist  every 
mode  of  cure,  so  as  to  become  very  distressing  to  the 
patient;  and  by  the  extreme  debility  which  they  there- 
by induce,  often  give  rise  to  other  chronic  complaints. 

It  seems  to  be  pretty  generally  acknowledged,  that 
marsh  miasmata,  or  the  effluvia  arising  from  stagnant 
water,  or  marshy  ground,  when  acted  upon  by  heat, 
are  the  most  frequent  exciting  causes  of  this  fever.  In 
marshes,  the  putrefaction  of  both  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal matter  is  always  going  forward,  it  is  to  be  pre- 
sumed ; and  hence  it  has  been  generally  conjectured, 
that  vegetable  and  animal  putrefaction  imparted  a pe- 
culiar quality  to  the  effluvia  arising  from  thence.  We 
are  not  yet  acquainted  with  all  the  circumstances, 
which  are  requisite  to  render  marsh  miasma  pro- 
ductive of  the  intermittents  ; but  it  may  be  presumed 
that  a moist  atmosphere  has  a considerable  influence 
in  promoting  its  action.  A watery  poor  diet,  great 
fatigue,  long  watching,  grief,  much  anxiety,  exposure 
to  cold,  lying  in  damp  rooms  or  beds,  wearing  damp 
linen,  the  suppressionof  some iong-accustomed evacua- 
tion, or  the  recession  of  eruptions,  have  been  ranked 
among  the  exciting  causes  of  intermittents;  but  it  is 
more  reasonable  to  suppose  that  these  circumstances 
act  only  by  inducing  that  state  of  the  body,  which  pre- 
disposes to  these  complaints.  By  some  it  has  been 
imagined  that  an  intermittent  fever  may  be  communi- 
cated by  contagion;  but  this  supposition  is  by  no 
means  consistent  with  general  observation. 

One  peculiarity  of  this  fever  is,  its  great  susceptibi- 
lity of  a renewal  from  very  slight  causes,  as  from  the 
prevalence  of  an  easterly  wind,  even  without  the  re- 
petition of  the  original  exciting  cause.  It  would  ap- 
pear that  a predisposition  is  left  in  the  habit,  which 
favours  the  recurrence  of  the  complaint.  In  this  cir- 
cumstance, intermittents  differ  from  most  other  fevers, 
as  it  is  well  known,  that  after  a continued  fever  has 
once  occurred,  and  been  removed,  the  person  so  affect- 
ed is  by  no  means  so  liable  to  a fresh  attack  of  the  dis- 
order, as  one  in  whom  it  had  never  taken  place. 

We  have  not  yet  attained  a certain  knowledge  of 
the  proximate  cause  of  an  intermittent  fever,  but  a de- 
ranged state  of  the  stomach  and  primse  viae  is  that 
which  is  most  generally  ascribed. 

Each  paroxysm  of  an  intermittent  fever  is  divided 
into  three  different  stages,  which  are  called  the  cold, 
the  hot,  and  the  sweating  stages  or  fits. 

The  cold  stage  commences  with  languor,  a sense  of 
debility  and  sluggishness  in  motion,  frequent  yawning 
and  stretching,  and  an  aversion  to  food.  The  face  and 
extremities  become  pale,  the  features  shrink,  the  bulk 
of  every  external  part  is  diminished,  and  the  skin  over 
the  whole  body  appears  constricted,  as  if  cold  had  been 
applied  to  it.  * At  length  the  patient  feels  very  cold, 
and  universal  rigors  come  on,  with  pains  in  the  head, 
back,  loins,  and  joints,  nausea,  and  vomiting  of  bilious 
matter ; the  respiration  is  small,  frequent,  and  anxious ; 
the  urine  is  almost  colourless;  sensibility  is  greatly 
impaired ; the  thoughts  are  somewhat  confused ; and 
the  pulse  is  small,  frequent,  and  often  irregular.  In  a 
few  instances,  drowsiness  and  stupour  have  prevailed 
in  so  high  a degree  as  to  resemble  coma  or  apoplexy ; 
but  this  is  by  no  means  usual. 

These  symptoms  abating  after  a short  time,  the  se- 
cond stage  commences  with  an  increase  of  heat  over 
the  whole  body,  redness  of  the  face,  dryness  of  the 
skin,  thirst,  pain  in  the  head,  throbbing  in  the  temples, 
anxiety  and  restlessness;  the  respiration  is  fuller  and 
more  free,  but  still  frequent;  the  tongue  is  furred,  and 
the  pulse  has  become  regular,  hard,  and  full.  If  the 
attack  has  been  very  severe,  then  perhaps  delirium 
will  arise. 

When  these  symptoms  have  continued  for  some 
time,  a moisture  breaks  out  on  the  forehead,  and  by 
degrees  becomes  a sweat,  and  this,  at  length,  extends 
over  the  whole  body.  As  this  sweat  continues  to 
flow,  the  heat  of  the  body. abates,  the  thirst  ceases,  and 
most  of  the  functions  are  restored  to  their  ordinary 
state.  This  constitutes  the  third  stage. 

It  must,  however,  be  observed,  that  in  different  cases 
these  phenomena  may  prevail  in  different  degrees,  and 
their  mode  of  succession  vary ; that  the  series  of  them 
may  be  more  or  less  complete ; and  that  the  several 
stages,  in  the  time  they  occupy,  may  be  in  different 
proportions  to  one  another. 

354 


Such  a depression  of  strength  has  been  known  to 
take  place  on  the  attack  of  an  intermittent,  as  to  cut 
off  the  patient  at  once  ; but  an  occurrence  of  this  kind 
is  very  uncommon. 

Patients  are  seldom  destroyed  in  intermittents  from 
general  inflammation,  or  from  a fulness  of  the  vessels 
either  of  the  brain  or  of  the  thoracic  viscera,  as  hap- 
pens sometimes  in  a continued  fever ; but  when  they 
continue  for  any  length  of  time,  they  are  apt  to  induce 
other  complaints,  such  as  a loss  of  appetite,  flatulency, 
schirrhus  of  the  liver,  dropsical  swellings,  and  general 
debility,  which  in  the  end  now  and  then  prove  lata!. 
In  warm  climates,  particularly,  intermittents  are  very 
apt  to  terminate  in  this  manner,  if  not  speedily  re- 
moved; and  in  some  cases,  they  degenerate  into  con- 
tinued fevers.  When  the  paroxysms  are  of  short  du- 
ration, and  leave  the  intervals  quite  free,  we  may  ex 
pect  a speedy  recovery  ; but  when  they  are  long,  vio- 
lent, and  attended  with  much  anxiety  and  delirium, 
the  event  may  be  doubtful.  Relapses  are  very  com- 
mon to  this  fever  at  the  distance  of  five  or  six  months, 
or  even  a year ; autumnal  intermittents  are  more  diffi- 
cult to  remove  than  vernal  ones,  and  quartans  more 
so  than  the  other  types. 

Dissections  of  those  who  have  died  of  an  intermit- 
tent, show  a morbid  state  of  many  of  the  viscera  of  the 
thorax  and  abdomen;  but  the  liver,  and  organs  con- 
cerned in  the  formation  of  bile,  as  likewise  the  mesen- 
tery, are  those  which  are  usually  most  affected. 

The  treatment  of  an  intermittent  fever  resolves  itself 
into  those  means,  which  may  be  employed  during  a 
paroxysm,  to  arrest  its  progress,  or  to  mitigate  its  vio- 
lence ; and  those,  which  may  prevent  any  return,  and 
effect  a permanent  cure : this  forms  of  course  the  more 
important  part  of  the  plan ; but  it  is  sometimes  necessary 
to  palliate  urgent  symptoms ; and  it  is  always  desirable 
to  suspend  a paroxysm,  if  possible,  not  only  to  prevent 
mischief,  but  also  that  there  may  be  more  time  for  the 
use  of  the  most  eff  ectual  remedies.  W hen  therefore  a fit 
is  commencing,  or  shortly  expected,  we  may  try  to 
obviate  it  by  some  of  those  means,  which  excite  move- 
ments of  an  opposite  description  in  the  system;  an 
emetic  will  generally  answer  the  purpose,  determining 
the  blood  powerfully  to  the  surface  of  the  body ; or  a 
full  dose  of  opium,  assisted  by  the  pediluvium,  &c.; 
ffither  also,  and  various  stimulant  remedies,  will  often 
succeed,  but  these  may  perhaps  aggravate,  should  they 
not  prevent  the  fit ; the  cold  bath,  violent  exercise,  strong 
impressions  on  the  mind,  &c.  have  likewise  been 'occa- 
sionally employed  with  effect.  Should  the  paroxysm 
have  already  come  on,  and  the  cold  stage  be  very  se- 
vere, the  warm  bath,  and  cordial  diaphoretics  in  re- 
peated moderate  doses,  may  assist  in  bringing  warmth 
to  the  surface:  when,  on  the  contrary,  great  heat  pre- 
vails, the  antiphlogistic  plan  is  to  be  pursued ; and  it 
may  be  sometimes  advisable,  when  an  organ  of  im- 
portance is  much  pressed  upon,  to  take  some  blood 
localiy,  or  even  from  the  general  system,  if  the  patient 
is  plethoric  and  robust:  and  where  profuse  perspirations 
occur,  acidulated  drink  may  be  exhibited,  with  a little 
wine  to  support  the  strength,  keeping  the  surface  cool 
at  the  same  time.  In  the  intermissions,  in  conjunction 
with  a generous  diet,  moderate  exercise,  and  other 
means  calculated  to  improve  the  vigour  of  the  system  ; 
tonics  are  the  remedies  especially  relied  upon.  At  the 
head  of  these  we  must  certainly  place  the  cinchona, 
which,  taken  largely  in  substance,  will  seldom  fail  to 
cure  the  disease,  where  it  is  not  complicated  with  vis- 
ceral affection : in  a quotidian  an  ounce  at  least  should 
be  given  between  the  fits,  in  a tertian  half  as  much 
more,  and  in  a quartan  two  ounces.  It  will  be  gene- 
rally better  to  clear  out  the  prima:  viae  before  this  re- 
medy is  begun  with  ; and  various  additions  may  often 
be  required,  to  make  it  agree  better  with  the  stomach 
and  bowels,  particularly  aromatics  and  other  stimulants, 
aperients  or  small  doses  of  opium,  according  to  circum- 
stances. We  must  not  be  content  with  the  omission 
of  a single  paroxysm,  but  continue  it  till  the  health  ap- 
pears fully  established.  In  failure  of  the  cinchona, 
other  vegetable  tonics  may  be  tried,  as  the  salix,  gen- 
tian, calumba,  and  other  bitters;  or  the  astringents,  as 
tormentil,  galls,  &c. ; or  these  variously  combined  with 
each  other,  or  with  aromatics.  The  mineral  acids  are 
often  powerfully  tonic,  and  the  sulphuric  has  been  ot 
late  stated  to  have  proved  verv  successful  in  the  remova* 
of  this  disease.  Some  metallic  preparations  are  also 
highly  efficacious,  particularly  the  liquor  nrsenicalie, 


FEM 


FEM 


Which,  however,  is  too  hazardous  a remedy  to  he 
employed  indiscriminately;  it  must  be  given  in  small 
doses  two  or  three  times  a day,  and  its  effects  assidu- 
ously watched.  The  sulphate  of  zinc,  and  chalybeates, 
may  be  used  more  freely  alone,  or  preferably  joined  with 
bitters.  Where  visceral  disease  attends,  we  can  hardly 
succeed  in  curing  the  ague,  till  this  be  removed;  a state 
of  congestion,  or  inflammatory  tendency,  may  require 
local  bleeding,  blistering,  purging,  &c. ; and  when  there 
is  a more  fixed  obstruction,  particularly  in  the  liver  Ahe 
cautious  use  of  mercury  will  be  most  likely  to  a van. 

Fjcbris  l actea.  Milk  fever,  which  is  mostly  of  the 
synoclius-type  attended  with  much  irregularity  of  mind, 
and  nervousness. 

Febris  lenta.  See  Febris  nervosa. 

Febris  lbnticularis.  A fever,  either  typhus  or 
synochus,  attended  by  an  eruption  like  small  lentils. 

Febris  maligna.  See  Typhus. 

Febris  miliaris.  See  Miliaria. 

Febris  morbillosa.  See  Rubeola. 

Febris  nervosa.  Febris  lenta  nervosa.  The  ner- 
vous fever.  A variety  of  the  typhus  mitior  of  Cullen, 
but  by  many  considered  as  a distinct  disease.  It  mostly 
begins  with  loss  of  appetite*  increased  heat  and  ver- 
tigo; to  which  succeed  nausea,  vomiting,  great  lan- 
guor, and  pain  in  the  head,  which  is  variously  described, 
by  some  like  cold  water  pouring  over  the  top,  by  others 
a sense  of  weight.  The  pulse,  before  little  increased, 
now  becomes  quick,  febrile,  and  tremulous;  the  tongue 
is  covered  with  a white  crust,  and  there  is  great  anxiety 
about  the  prrecordia.  Towards  the  seventh  or  eighth 
day,  the  vertigo  is  increased,  and  tinnitus  aurium, 
cophosis,  delirium,  and  a dry  and  tremulous  tongue, 
take  place.  The  disease  mostly  terminates  about  the 
fourteenth  or  twentieth  day.  See  Typhus. 

Febris  nosocomiorum.  The  fever  of  hospitals, 
mostly  the  typhus  gravior. 

Febris  palcstris.  The  marsh  fever 

Febris  pestilens.  See  Pestis. 

Febris  petechialis.  See  Typhus. 

Febris  putrida.  See  Typhus. 

Febris  remittens.  A remittent  fever:  a fever  with 
strong  exacerbations,  which  approach  in  some  cases  to 
the  nature  of  a paroxysm  of  an  intermittent,  and  which 
follow  each  other  so  closely  as  to  leave  very  little  time 
between.  In  some,  there  is  a great  secretion  of  bile, 
when  it  is  called  a bilious  remittent;  in  others,  there  is 
great  putrescency,  when  it  is  termed  a. putrid  remittent, 
ajid  so  on. 

Febris  scarlatina.  See  Scarlatina. 

Febris  synocha.  See  Synocha. 

Febris  typhodes.  See  Typhus. 

Febris  urticaria.  See  Urticaria. 

Febris  variolosa.  See  Variol %. 

Febris  vesiculosa.  See  Erysipelas. 

FE'CULA.  See  Fcecula. 

FECUNDATION.  See  Generation. 

FEL.  See  Bile. 

Fel  natur®.  S eedlloes. 

FEL-WORT.  So  called  from  its  bitter  taste,  like 
bile.  See  Gentiana. 

Felli'culus.  The  gall  bladder. 

Fklli'flua  passio.  See  Cholera. 

Felon.  See  Paronychia. 

FELSPAR.  An  imporlantmineral  genus,  distributed 
by  Jameson  into  four  species:  prismatic  felspar;  pyra- 
midal felspar;  prismato-pyramidal  felspar;  rhomboidal 
felspar. 

1.  The  prismatic  felspar  has  nine  sub-species, 

a.  Adularia. 

b.  Glassy  felspar. 

r.  Ice  spar. 

d.  Common  felspar. 

e.  Labradore  felspar. 

/.  Compact  felspar. 

g.  Clink-stone. 

h.  Earthy  common  spar. 

i.  Porcelain  earth. 

2.  Pyramidal  felspar.  This  embraces  the  scapolite 
and  elaulite. 

3.  Prismato-pyramidal  felspar.  See  Meionitc. 

4.  Rhomboidal  felspar.  SeeJVY phelinc.  Chiastolite 
and  sodalite  have  also  been  annexed  to  this  species. 

[Fcsite.  Rlue  felspar  of  Stiria.  A.] 

Fk'men.  ( Quasi  ferimen ; from  fero,  In  bear:  so 
called  because  it  is  the  chief  support  of  the  body.) 
The  thigh.  „ 


j FEMINEUS.  A flower  is  termed  a female,  which  is 
furnished  with  the  pistillum,  and  not  with  the  stamina ; 
the  pistil  being  considered  as  the  female  generative 
organ. 

FEMORAL.  (Femoralis ; from  femur,  the  thigh.) 
Of  or  belonging  to  the  thigh. 

Femora'lis  arteria.  A continuation  of  the  ex- 
ternal iliac  along  the  thigh,  from  Poupart’s  ligament  to 
the  ham. 

FE'MORIS  OS.  The  thigh-bone.  A long  cylindri- 
cal bone,  situated  between  the  pelvis  and  tibia.  Its 
upper  extremity  affords  three  considerable  processes ; 
these  are,  the  head,  the  trochanter  major,  and  trochan- 
ter minor.  The  head,  which  forms  about  two-tliirds 
of  a sphere,  is  turned  inwards,  and  is  received  into  the 
acetabulum  of  the  os  innorninatum,  with  which  it  is 
articulated  by  enarthrosis.  It  is  covered  by  a cartilage, 
which  is  thick  in  its  middle  part,  and  thin  at  its  edges, 
but  which  is  wanting  in  its  lower  internal  part,  where  a 
round  spongy  fossa  is  observable,  to  which  the  strong 
ligament,  usually,  though  improperly,  called  the  round 
one,  is  attached.  This  ligament  is  about  an  inch  in 
length,  flattish,  and  of  a triangular  shape,  having  its 
narrow  extremity  attached  to  the  fossa  just  described, 
while  its  broader  end  is  fixed  obliquely  to  the  rough 
surface  near  the  inner  and  anterior  edge  of  the  ace- 
tabulum of  the  os  innorninatum,  so  that  it  appears 
shorter  internally  and  anteriorly,  than  it  does  externally 
and  posteriorly. 

The  head  of  the  os  femoris  is  supported  obliquely, 
with  respect  to  the  rest  of  the  bone,  by  a smaller  part, 
called  the  cervix , or  neck , which,  in  the  generality  of 
subjects,  is  about  an  inch  in  length.  At  its  basis  we 
observe  two  oblique  ridges,  which  extend  from  the  tro- 
chanter major  to  the  trochanter  minor.  Of  these 
ridges,  the  posterior  one  is  the  most  prominent.  Around 
this  neck  is  attached  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  joint, 
which  likewise  adheres  to  the  edge  of  the  cotyloid  ca- 
vity, and  is  strengthened  anteriorly  by  many  strong 
ligamentous  fibres,  which  begin  from  the  lower  and  am 
terior  part  of  the  ilium,  and  spreading  broader  as  they 
descend,  adhere  to  the  capsular  ligament,  and  are 
attached  to  the  anterior  oblique  ridge  at  the  bottom  of 
the  neck  of  the  femur.  Posteriorly  and  externally,  from 
the  basis  of  the  neck  of  the  bone,  a large  unequal  pro- 
tuberance stands  out,  which  is  the  trochanter  major , 
The  upper  edge  of  this  process  is  sharp  and  pointed 
posteriorly,  but  is  more  obtuse  anteriorly.  A part  of  it 
is  rough  and  unequal,  for  the  insertion  of  the  muscles ; 
the  rest  is  smooth,  and  covered  with  a thin  cartilaginous 
crust,  between  which  and  the  tendon  of  the  gluheus 
maximus  that  slides  over  it;  a large  bursa  mucosa  is 
interposed.  Anteriorly,  at  the  roof  of  this  process,  and 
immediately  below  the  bottom  of  the  neck,  is  a small 
process  called  trochanter  minor.  Its  basis  is  nearly 
triangular,  having  its  two  tipper  angles  turned  towards 
the  head  of  the  femur  and  the  great  trochanter,  while 
its  lower  angle  is  placed  towards  the  body  of  the  bone. 
Its  summit  is  rough  and  rounded.  These  two  pro 
cesses  have  gotten  the  name  of  trochanters , from  the 
muscles  that  are  inserted  into  them  being  the  principal 
instruments  of  the  rotatory  motion  of  the  thigh.  Ini 
mediately  below  these  two  processes  the  body  of  the 
bone  may  be  said  to  begin.  It  is  smooth  and  convex 
before,  but  is  made  hollow  behind  by  the  action  of  the 
muscles.  In  the  middle  of  this  posterior  concave  sur- 
face is  observed  a rough  ridge,  called  tinea  aspera , 
which  seems  to  originate  from  the  trochanters,  and  ex- 
tending downwards,  divides  at  length  into  two  branches, 
which  terminate  in  the  tuberosities  hear  the  condyles. 
At  the  upper  part  of  it,  blood-vessels  pass  to  the  internal 
substance  of  the  bone  by  a hole  that  runs  obliquely 
upwards. 

The  lower  extremity  of  the  os  femoris  is  larger  than 
the  upper  one,  and  somewhat  flattened,  so  as  to  form 
two  surfaces,  of  which  the  anterior  one  is  broad  and 
convex,  and  the  posterior  one  narrower  and  slightly 
concave.  This  end  of  the  bone  terminates  in  two  large 
protuberances,  called  condyles , which  are  united  be- 
fore so  as  to  form  a pulley,  but  are  separated  behind 
by  a considerable  cavity,  in  which  the  crural  vessels 
and  nerves  are  placed  secure  from  the  compression  to 
which  they  would  otherwise  be  exposed  in  the  action 
of  bending  the  leg.  Of  these  two  condyles,  the  ex- 
ternal one  is  the  largest ; and  when  the  bone  is  sepa 
rated  from  the  rest  of  the  skeleton,  and  placed  perpen 
dicularly,  the  internal  condyle  projects  less  forwards, 


FER 


FER 


and  descends  nearly  three-tenths  of  an  inch  lower 
than  the  external  one  ; but  in  its  natural  situation,  the 
bone  is  placed  obliquely,  so  that  both  condyles  are 
then  nearly  on  a level  with  each  other.  At  the  side 
of  each  condyle,  externally,  there  is  a tuberosity,  the 
situation  of  which  is  similar  to  that  of  the  condyles 
of  the  os  humeri.  The  two  branches  of  the  linea  as- 
pera  terminate  in  these  tuberosities,  which  are  rough, 
and  serve  for  attachment  of  ligaments  and  muscles. 

FE'MUR.  (Femur,  moris.  n.)  The  thigh. 

FENE'STRA.  (From  (patvio,  quasi  phccnestra.)  A 
window,  entry,  or  hole. 

Fenestra  ovalis.  An  oblong  or  elliptical  foramen, 
between  the  cavity  of  the  tympanum  and  the  vestibu- 
lum  of  the  ear.  It  is  shut  by  the  stapes. 

Fenestra  rotunda.  A round  foramen,  leading 
from  the  tympanum  to  the  cochlea  of  the  ear.  It  is  co- 
vered by  a membrane  in  the  fresh  subject. 

FE'NNEL.  See  Anethum  fceniculum. 

Fennel , hog's.  See  Peucedanum. 

FE  NUGREEK.  See  Trigonella  fcenvm  grcccum. 

FE'RINE.  ( Ferinus , savage  or  brutal.)  A term 
occasionally  applied  to  any  malignant  or  noxious  dis- 
ease. 

FERMENTA'TION.  ( Fermentatio , onis.  f. ; from 
fermento , to  ferment.)  When  aqueous  combinations 
of  vegetable  or  animal  substances  are  exposed  to  ordi- 
nary atmospherical  temperatures,  they  speedily  under- 
go spontaneous  changes,  to  which  the  generic  term  of 
fermentation  has  been  given.  There  are  several  cir- 
cumstances required  in  order  that  fermentation  may 
proceed : such  are,  1.  A certain  degree  of  fluidity : 
thus,  dry  substances  do  not  ferment  at  all.  2.  A cer- 
tain degree  of  heat.  3.  The  contact  of  air.  Chemists, 
after  Boerhaave,  have  distinguished  three  kinds  of 
fermentation. 

1.  The  vinous  or  spirituous , which  affords  ardent 
spirit. 

2.  The  acetous , which  affords  vinegar,  or  acetic  acid. 

3.  The  putrid  fermentation,  or  putrefaction,  which 
produces  volatile  alkali. 

I.  The  conditions  necessary  for  vinous  fermentation 
are : 1.  A saccharine  mucilage.  2.  A degree  of  flu- 
idity slightly  viscid.  3.  A degree  of  heat  between  55 
and  65  of  Fahrenheit.  4.  A large  mass,  in  which  a 
rapid  commotion  may  be  excited.  When  these  four 
conditions  are  united,  the  vinous  fermentation  takes 
place,  and  is  known  by  the  following  characteristic 
phenomena:  1.  An  intestine  motion  takes  place.  2. 
The  bulk  of  the  mixture  then  becomes  augmented.  3. 
The  transparency  of  the  fluid  is  diminished  by  opaque 
filaments.  4.  Heat  is  generated.  5.  The  solid  parts 
mixed  with  the  liquor  rise  and  float  in  consequence  of 
the  disengagement  of  elastic  fluid.  6.  A large  quan 
tity  of  carbonic  acid  gas  is  disengaged  in  bubbles.  All 
these  phenomena  gradually  cease  in  proportion  as  the 
liquor  loses  its  sweet  and  mild  taste,  and  it  becomes 
brisk,  penetrating,  and  capable  of  producing  intoxica- 
tion. In  this  manner,  wine,  beer,  cider,  &c.  are  made. 
All  bodies  which  have  undergone  the  spirituous  fer- 
mentation are  capable  of  passing  on  to  the  acid  fer- 
mentation; but  although  it  is  probable  that  the  acid 
fermentation  never  takes  place  before  the  body  has 
gone  through  the  spirituous  fermentation,  yet  the  du- 
ration of  the  first  is  frequently  so  short  and  impercep- 
tible, that  it  cannot  be  ascertained.  Besides  the  bodies 
which  are  proper  for  spirituous  fermentation,  this  class 
includes  all  sorts  of  faecula  boiled  in  water. 

II.  The  conditions  required  for  the  acid  fermenta- 
tion are,  1.  A heat  from  70  to  85  degrees  of  Fahren- 
heit. 2.  A certain  degree  of  liquidity.  3.  The  pre- 
sence of  atmospheric  air."  4.  A moderate  quantity  of 
fermentable  matter.  The  phenomena  which  accom- 
pany this  fermentation,  are  an  intestine  motion,  and  a 
considerable  absorption  of  air.  The  transparent  liquor 
becomes  turbid,  but  regains  its  limpidity  when  fermen- 
tation is  over.  The  fermented  liquor  now  consists,  in 
a great  measure,  of  a peculiar  acid,  called  the  acetic 
acid,  or  vinegar.  Not  a vestige  of  spirit  remains,  it  be- 
ing entirely  decomposed,  but  the  greater  the  quantity 
of  spirit  in  the  liquor,  previous  to  the  fermentation, 
the  greater  will  be  the  quantity  of  true  vinegar  ob- 
tained. As  the  ultimate  constituents  of  vegetable  mat- 
ter are  oxygen,  hydrogen,  and  carbon;  and  of  animal 
matter,  the  same  three  principles  with  azote,  we  can 
readily  understand  that  all  the  products  of  fermenta- 
tion must  be  merely  new  compounds  of  these  three  or 

356 


four  ultimate  constituents.  Accordingly,  100  parts  of 
real  vinegar,  or  acetic  acid,  are  resolvable,  by  Gay 
Lussac  and  Thenard’s  analysis,  into  50.224  carbon  + 
46.911  hydrogen  and  oxygen,  as  they  exist  in  water, 
+ 2.863  oxygen  in  excess.  In  like  manner,  wines  are 
all  resolvable  into  the  same  ultimate  components,  in 
proportions  somewhat  different.  The  aeriform  results 
of  putrefactive  fermentation  are  in  like  manner  found 
to  be,  hydrogen,  carbon,  oxygen,  and  azote,  variously 
combined,  and  associated  with  minute  quantities  of 
sulphur  and  phosphorus.  The  residuary  matter  con- 
sists of  the  same  principles,  mixed  with  the  saline  and 
earthy  parts  of  animal  bodies. 

Lavoisier  was  the  first  philosopher  who  instituted, 
on  right  principles,  a series  of  experiments  to  investi- 
gate the  phenomena  of  fermentation,  and  they  were 
so  judiciously  contrived,  and  so  accurately  conducted, 
as  to  give  results  comparable  to  those  derived  from  the 
more  rigid  methods  of  the  present  day.  Since  then, 
Thenard  and  Gay  Lussac  have  each  contributed  most 
important  researches.  By  the  labours  of  these  three 
illustrious  chemists,  those  material  metamorphoses, 
formerly  quite  mysterious,  seem  susceptible  of  a satis- 
factory explanation. 

As  sugar  is  a substance  of  uniform  and  determinate 
composition,  it  has  been  made  choice  of  for  determining 
the  changes  which  arise  when  its  solution  is  fermented 
into  wine  or  alkohol.  Lavoisier  justly  regarded  it  as 
a true  vegetable  oxide,  and  stated  its  constituents  to 
be,  8 hydrogen,  28  carbon,  and  64  oxygen,  in  100  parts- 
By  two  different  analyses  of  Berzelius,  we  have, 


Hydrogen 6.802  6.891 

Carbon 44.115  42.704 

Oxygen 49.083  50.405 


100.000  100.000 


Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard’s  analysis  gives, 

Hydrogen 6.90  ) n . 

Oxygen 50.63  \ 57  53  water> 

Carbon 42.47  42.47 


100.00  100.00 

It  has  been  said,  that  sugar  requires  to  be  dissolved, 
in  at  least  4 parts  of  water,  and  to  be  mixed  with  some 
yest,  to  cause  its  fermentation  to  commence.  But  this 
is  a mistake.  Syrup  stronger  than  the  above  will  fer- 
ment in  warm  weather,  without  addition.  If  the  tem- 
perature be  low,  the  syrup  weak,  and  no  yest  added, 
acetous  fermentation  alone  will  take  place.  To  de- 
termine the  vinous,  therefore,  we  must  mix  certain 
proportions  of  saccharine  matter,  water,  and  yest,  and 
place  them  in  a proper  temperature. 

To  observe  the  chemical  changes  which  occur,  we 
must  dissolve  4 or  5 parts  of  pure  sugar  in  20  parts  of 
water,  put  the  solution  into  a matrass,  and  add  1 part 
of  yest.  Into  the  mouth  of  the  matrass  a glass  tube 
must  be  luted,  which  is  recurved,  so  as  to  dip  into  the 
mercury  of  a pneumatic  trough.  If  the  apparatus  be 
now  placed  in  a temperature  of  from  70°  to  80°,  we 
shall  speedily  observe  the  syrup  to  become  muddy,  and 
a multitude  of  air  bubbles  to  form  all  around  the  fer- 
ment. These  unite,  and  attaching  themselves  to  par- 
ticles of  the  yest,  rise  along  with  it  to  the  surface,, 
forming  a stratum  of  froth.  The  yesty  matter  will 
then  disengage  itself  from  the  air,  fall  to  the  bottom  of 
the  vessel,  to  reacquire  buoyancy  a second  time  by  at- 
tached air  bubbles,  and  thus  in  succession.  If  we  ope- 
rate on  3 or  4 ounces  of  sugar,  the  fermentation  will 
be  very  rapid  during  the  first  ten  or  twelve  hours;  it 
will  then  slacken,  and  terminate  in  the  course  of  a few 
days.  At  this  period  the  matter  being  deposited  which 
disturbed  the  transparency  of  the  liquor,  this  will  be- 
come clear. 

The  following  changes  have  now  taken  place:  1. 
The  sugar  is  wholly,  and  the  yest  partially,  decom- 
posed. 2.  A quantity  of  alkohol  and  carbonic  acid, 
together  nearly  in  weight  to  the  sugar,  is  produced. 
3.  A white  matter  is  formed,  composed  of  hydrogen, 
oxygen,  and  carbon,  equivalent  to  about  half  the  weight 
of  the  decomposed  ferment.  Thecarbonic  acid  passes 
over  into  the  pneumatic  apparatus  ; the  alkohol  may 
be  separated  from  the  vinous  liquid  by  distillation,  and 
the  white  matter  falls  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  ma- 
trass with  the  remainder  of  the  yest. 

The  quantity  of  yest  decomposed  is  very  small.  100 


FER 


FER 


parts  of  sugar  require,  for  complete  decomposition, 
only  two  and  a half  of  that  substance,  supposed  to  be 
in  a dry  state.  It  is  hence  very  probable,  that  the  fer- 
ment, which  has  a strong  affinity  for  oxygen,  takes  a 
little  of  it  from  the  saccharine  particles,  by  a part  of 
its  hydrogen  and  carbon,  and  thus  the  equilibrium  be- 
ing broken  between  the  constituent  principles  of  the 
sugar,  these  so  react  on  each  other,  as  to  be  transform- 
ed into  alkohol  and  carbonic  acid.  If  we  consider 
the  composition  of  alkohol,  we  shall  find  no  difficulty 
in  tracing  the  steps  of  this  transformation. 

Neglecting  the  minute  products  which  the  yest  fur- 
nishes, in  the  act  of  fermentation,  let  us  regard  only 
the  alkohol  and  carbonic  acid.  We  shall  then  see,  on 
comparing  the  composition  of  sugar  to  that  of  alkohol, 
that  to  transform  sugar  into  alkohol,  we  must  with- 
draw from  it  one  volume  of  vapour  of  carbon,  and 
one  volume  of  oxygen,  which  form  by  their  union  one 
volume  of  carbonic  acid  gas.  Finally,  let  us  reduce 
the  volumes  into  weights,  we  shall  find,  that  100  parts 
of  sugar  ought  to  be  converted,  during  fermentation, 
into  51.55  of  alkohol,  and  48.45  of  carbonic  acid. 

When  it  is  required  to  preserve  fermented  liquors  in 
the  slate  produced  by  the  first  stage  of  fermentation,  it 
is  usual  to  put  them  into  casks  before  the  vinous  pro- 
cess is  completely  euded  ; and  in  these  closed  vessels  a 
change  very  slowly  continues  to  be  made  for  many 
months,  and  perhaps  for  some  years. 

But  if  the  fermentative  process  be  suffered  to  proceed 
in  open  vessels,  more  especially  if  the  temperature  be 
raised  to  90  degrees,  the  acetous  fermentation  comes 
on.  In  this,  the  oxygen  of  the  atmosphere  is  absorbed ; 
and  the  more  speedily  in  proportion  as  the  surfaces  of 
the  liquor  are  often  changed  by  lading  it  from  one  ves- 
sel to  another.  The  usual  method  consists  in  exposing 
the  fermented  liquor  to  the  air  in  open  casks,  the  bung- 
hole  of  which  is  covered  with  a tile  to  prevent  the  en- 
trance of  the  rain.  By  the  absorption  of  oxygen  which 
takes  place,  the  inflammable  spirit  becomes  converted 
into  an  acid.  If  the  liquid  be  then  exposed  to  distilla- 
tion, pure  vinegar  comes  over  instead  of  ardent  spirit. 

III.  When  the  spontaneous  decomposition  is  suffered 
to  proceed  beyond  the  acetous  process,  the  vinegar  be- 
comes viscid  and  foul ; air  is  emitted  with  an  offensive 
smell;  volatile  alkali  flies  off  ; an  earthy  sediment  is 
deposited  ; and  the  remaining  liquid,  if  any,  is  mere 
water.  This  is  the  putrefactive  process.  See  also 
Putrefaction. 

FERME'NTUM.  ( Quasi  fervimejitum,  from  ferveo, 
to  work.)  Yest. 

Fermentum  cerkvisijs.  Yest;  Barm;  the  scum 
which  collects  on  beer  while  fermenting,  and  has  the 
property  of  exciting  that  process  in  various  other  sub- 
stances. Medicinally  it  is  antiseptic  and  tonic ; and 
lias  been  found  useful  internally  in  the  cure  of  typhus 
fever  attended  with  an  obvious  tendency  to  putrefac- 
tion in  the  system  with  petechite,  vibices,  and  the  like  : 
the  best  way  to  administer  it,  is  to  mix  a fluid  ounce 
with  seven  of  strong  beer,  and  give  three  table  spoon- 
fuls to  an  adult  every  three  or  four  hours.  Externally, 
it  is  used  in  the  fermenting  cataplasm. 

FERN.  See  Filix  and  Poiypodium. 

Fern , male.  See  Polydodium  filix  mas. 

Fern , female.  See  Pteris  aquilina. 

FERN  EL,  John,  was  born  at  Claremont,  near  the 
end  of  the  15th  century.  He  went  at  the  age  of  19  to 
prosecute  his  studies  at  Paris,  and  distinguished  him- 
self so  much,  that,  after  taking  the  degree  of  master 
of  arts,  he  was  chosen  professor  of  dialectics  in  his 
college.  His  application  then  became  intense,  till  a 
quartan  ague  obliged  him  to  seek  his  native  air:  and 
on  his  return  to  Paris,  he  determined  on  the  medical 
profession,  and  taught  philosophy  for  his  support,  till 
in  1530,  he  took  bis  doctor’s  degree.  Soon  after  he 
married,  and  speedily  got  into  extensive  practice  ; and 
at  length  was  made  physician  to  the  Dauphin,  who 
afterward  became  Henry  II.  He  was  obliged  to  ac- 
company that  monarch  in  his  campaigns,  yet  he  still, 
though  at  the  age  of  sixty,  seldom  passed  a day  with- 
out writing.  But  in  1558,  having  lost  his  wife  of  a 
fever,  he  did  not  long  survive  her.  His  works  are  nu- 
merous on  philosophical,  as  well  as  medical  subjects: 
of  the  latter,  the  most  esteemed  were  his  “ Medicina,” 
dedicated  to  Henry  II.,  and  a posthumous  treatise  on 
fevers. 

Ferrame  ntum.  An  instrument  made  of  iron. 

FERRQ-CHYAZIC  ACID.  Acidum  ferro-chyazi- 


cum  , chyazicum , from  the  initial  letters  of  carbon, 
hydrogen,  and  azote.)  An  acid  obtained  by  Porrett  by 
adding  to  a solution  of  ferro-cyanite  of  barytes,  sul- 
phuric acid  just  enough  to  precipitate  the  barytes.  It 
has  a pale  yellow  colour,  no  smell,  and  is  decomposed 
by  gentle  heat  or  strong  light,  in  which  case  hydrocy- 
anic acid  is  formed,  and  white  hydrocyanite  of  iron  is 
deposited,  which  becomes  blue  by  exposure. 

FERRO-CYAN  ATE.  A compound  of  ferro-prus- 
sic  acid  with  salifiable  bases. 

FERRO-CYANIC  ACID.  See  Ferro-prussic  acid. 

FERRO-PRUSSIC  ACID.  Acidum  ferro-prussi- 
cum.  Acidum  ferro-cyanicum.  Into  a solution  of  the 
amber- coloured  crystals,  usually  called  prussiates  of 
potassa,  pour  liydro-sulphuret  of  barytes,  as  long  as 
any  precipitate  falls.  Throw  the  whole  on  a filter, 
and  wash  the  precipitate  with  cold  water.  Dry  it ; and 
having  dissolved  100  parts  in  cold  water,  add  gradually 
thirty  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid ; agitate  the  mix- 
ture, and  set  it  aside  to  repose.  The  supernatant  li- 
quid is  ferro-prussic  acid,  called  by  Porrett,  who  had 
the  merit  of  discovering  it,  ferruretted  chyazic  acid. 

It  has  a pale'  lemon-yellow  colour,  but  no  smell. 
Heat  and  light  decompose  it.  Hydrocyanic  acid  is  then 
formed,  and  white  ferro-prussiate  of  iron,  which  soon 
becomes  blue.  Its  affinity  for  the  bases  enables  it  to 
displace  acetic  acid,  without  heat,  from  the  acetates, 
and  to  form  ferro-prussiates. 

FERRUM.  (Ferrum,  i.  neut.;  the  etymology  un- 
certain.) Iron.  See  Iron. 

Ferrum  ammoniatum.  Ammoniated  iron;  for- 
merly known  by  the  names  of  flores  martiales ; florcs 
salis  ammoniaci  martiales  ; ens  martis ; ens  veneris 
Boylei;  sal  martis  muriaticum  sublimatum , and 
lately  by  the  title  of  ferrum  ammoniacale.  Take  of 
subcarbonate  of  iron,  muriate  of  ammonia,  of  each  a 
pound.  Mix  them  intimately,  and  sublime  by  imme- 
diate exposure  to  a strong  fire ; lastly,  reduce  the  sub- 
limed ammoniated  iron  to  powder.  This  prepara- 
tion is  astringent  and  deobstruent,  in  doses  from  tjiree 
to  fifteen  grains,  or  more,  in  the  form  of  bolus  or  pills, 
prepared  with  some  gum.  It  is  exhibited  in  most  cases 
of  debility,  in  chlorosis,  asthenia,  menorrhagia,  inter- 
mittent fevers,  &c.  This  or  some  other  strong  prepa 
ration  of  iron,  as  the  Tinct.  ferri  muriatis,  Mr.  Cline  is 
wont  to  recommend  in  schirrhous  affections  of  the 
breast.  See  Tinctura  ferri  ammoniati. 

Ferrum  tartarizatum.  Tartarized  iron.  A tar- 
trate of  potassa  and  iron ; formerly  called  tartarus 
chalybeatus  ; mars  solubilis  ; ferrum  potabile.  Take 
of  iron,  a pound:;  supertartrate  of  potassa,  powdered, 
two  pounds  ; water,  a pint.  Rub  them  together ; and 
expose  them  to  the  air  in  a broad  glass  vessel  for  eight 
days,  then  dry  the  residue  in  a sand  bath,  and  reduce  it 
to  a very  fine  powder.  Add  to  this  powder  a pint 
more  water,  and  expose  it  for  eight  days  longer,  then 
dry  it,  and  reduce  it  to  a very  fine  powder.  Its  virtues 
are  astringent  and  tonic,  and  it  forms  in  solution  an 
excellent  tonic  fomentation  to  contusions,  lacerations, 
distortions,  &c.  Dose  from  ten  grains  to  half  a 
drachm. 

Ferri  alkalini  liquor.  Solution  of  alkaline  iron. 
Take  of  iron,  two  drachms  and  a half ; nitric  acid, 
two  fluid  ounces ; disilled  water,  six  fluid  ounces  ; so- 
lution of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  six  fluid  ounces. 
Having  mixed  the  acid  and  water,  pour  them  upon  the 
iron,  and  when  the  effervescence  has  ceased,  pour  off 
the  clear  acid  solution  ; add  this  gradually,  and  at  in- 
tervals, to  the  solution  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa, 
occasionally  shaking  it,  until  it  has  assumed  a deep 
brown-red  colour,  and  no  further  effervescence  takes 
place.  Lastly,  set  it  by  for  six  hours,  and  pour  off  the 
clear  solution.  This  preparation  was  first  described 
by  Stael,  and  called  tinctura  martis  alkalina,  and  is 
now  introduced  in  the  London  Pharmacopoeia  as  afford- 
ing a combination  of  iron  distinct  from  any  other,  and 
often  applicable  to  practice.  The  dose  is  from  half  a 
drachm  to  a drachm. 

Ferri  carbonas.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

Ferri  limatura  purificata.  Purified  iron  filings. 
These  possess  tonic,  astringent,  and  deobstruent  vir- 
tues, and  are  calculated  to  relieve  chlorosis  and  other 
diseases  in  which  steel  is  indicated,  where  acidity  in 
the  primte  vine  abounds. 

Ferri  rubigo.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

Ferri  subcarbonas.  Ferri  carbonas;  Ferrum 
pracipitaium , formerly  called  chalybis  rubigo  j^rcepa- 


rata  and  ferri  rubigo.  Subcarbonate  of  iron.  Take 
of  sulphate  of  iron,  eight  ounces ; subcarbonate  of  soda, 
six  ounces ; boiling  water,  a gallon.  Dissolve  the  sul- 
phate of  iron  and  subcarbonate  of  soda  separately, 
each  in  four  pints  of  water  ; then  mix  the  solutions 
together  and  set  it  by,  that  the  precipitated  powder 
may  subside  ; then  having  poured  off  the  supernatant 
liquor,  wash  the  subcarbonate  of  iron  with  hot  water, 
and  dry  it  upon  bibulous  paper  in  a gentle  heat.  It 
possesses  mild  corroborant  and  stimulating  properties, 
and  is  exhibited  with  success  in  leucorrhoea,  ataxia, 
asthenia,  chlorosis,  dyspepsia,  rachitis,  &c.  Dose 
from  two  to  ten  grains. 

Ferri  sulphas.  Sulphate  of  iron ; formerly  called 
sal  martis,  vitriolum  martis,  vitriolum  ferri , and  fer- 
rum  vitriolatum.  Green  vitriol.  Take  of  ir  on,  sulphu- 
ric acid,  of  each  by  weight,  eight  ounces ; water,  four 
pints.  Mix  together  the  sulphuric  acid  and  water  in  a 
glass  vessel,  and  add  thereto  the  iron ; then  after  the 
effervescence  has  ceased,  filter  the  solution  through 
paper,  and  evaporate  it  until  crystals  form  as  it  cools. 
Having  poured  away  the  water,  dry  these  upon  bibu- 
lous paper.  This  is  an  excellent  preparation  of  iron, 
and  is  exhibited,  in  maty  diseases,  as  a styptic,  tonic, 
astringent,  and  anthelmintic.  Dose  from  one  grain  to 
five  grains. 

[Ferrilite.  Common  trap  of  Kirwan.  Amor- 
phous basalt  of  Cleaveland.  The  Ferrilite , and  per- 
haps the  Mullen  stone  of  Kirwan,  may  be  referred  to 
this  variety  of  basalt.  A.] 

FERRURETTED  CHYAZIC  ACID.  See  Ferro- 
prussic  acid. 

Fers;e.  The  measles. 

Fertile  flower.  See  Flos. 

FE'RULA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class  Pentandriu ; Order,  Digynia. 

Ferula  africana  galbanifera.  The  galbanum 
plant.  See  Bubon  galbanum. 

Ferula  assafcetida.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
assafoetida  plant.  Assafcetida.  Hingiseh  of  the  Per- 
sians. Altiht  of  the  Arabians.  By  some  thought  to 
be  the  oi\<f>iov,  vel  oiros  ciXcpiov  of  Dioscorides,  Theo- 
phrastus, and  Hippocrates.  Baser  et  laserpitium  of 
the  Latins.  Ferula  assafcetida — foliis  alternatim  si- 
nuatis , obtvsis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  plant,  which  affords 
us  the  assafoetida  of  the  shops,  grows  plentifully  on  the 
mountains  in  the  provinces  of  Chorassan  and  Laar,ih 
Persia. 

The  process  of  obtaining  it  is  as  follows:  the  earth 
is  cleared  away  from  the  top  of  the  roots  of  the  oldest 
plants ; the  leaves  and  stalks  are  then  twisted  away, 
and  made  into  a covering,  to  screen  the  root  from  the 
sun ; in  this  state  the  root  is  left  for  forty  djiys,  when 
the  covering  is  removed,  and  the  top  of  the  root  cut 
off  transversely;  it  is  then  screened  again  from  the 
sun  for  lorty-eight  hours,  when  the  juice  it  exudes  is 
scraped  off,  and  exposed  to  the  sun  to  harden.  A se- 
cond transverse  section  of  the  root  is  made,  and  the 
exudation  suffered  to  continue  for  forty-eight  hours, 
and  then  scraped  off.  In  this  manner  it  is  eight  times 
repeatedly  collected  in  a period  of  six  weeks.  The 
juice  thus  obtained  has  a bitter,  acrid,  pungent  taste, 
and  is  well  known  by  its  peculiar  nauseous  smell,  the 
strength  of  which  is  the  surest  test  of  its  goodness. 
This  odour  is  extremely  volatile,  and  of  course  the 
drug  loses  much  of  its  efficacy  by  keeping.  It  is 
brought  to  us  in  large  irregular  masses’,  composed  of 
various  little  shining  lumps,  or  grains,  which  are  partly 
of  a whitish  colour,  partly  reddish,  and  partly  of  a 
violet  hue.  Those  masses  are  accounted  the  best  which 
are  clear,  of  a pale  reddish  colour,  and  variegated 
with  a great  number  of  elegant  white  tears.  This 
concrete  juice  consists  of  two-thirds  of  gum,  and  one- 
third  of  resin  and  volatile  oil,  in  which  its  taste  and 
smell  reside.  It  yields  all  its  virtues  to  alkohol.  Tri- 
turated with  water,  it  forms  a milk-like  mixture,  the 
resin  being  diffused  by  the  medium  of  the  gum.  Dis- 
tilled with  water,  it  affords  a small  quantity  of  essen- 
tial oil.  It  is  the  most  powerful  of  all  the  foetid  gums, 
and  is  a most  valuable  remedy.  It  is  most  commonly 
employed  in  hysteria,  hypochondriasis,  some  symp- 
toms of  dyspepsia,  flatulent  colics,  and  in  most  of 
those  diseases  termed  nervous,  but  its  chief  use  is  de- 
rived from  its  antispasmodic  effects;  and  it  is  thought 
to  be  the  most  powerful  remedy  we  possess,  for  those 
peculiar  convulsive  and  spasmodic  affections,  which 
often  recur  in  the  first  of  these  diseases,  both  taken 


into  the  stomach  and  in  the  way  of  enema.  It  is  also 
recommended  as  an  emmenagogue,  anthelmintic,  anti- 
asthmatic, and  anodyne.  Dr.  Cullen  prefers  it  as  an 
expectorant  to  gum  ammoniacum.  Where  we  wish  it 
to  act  immediately  as  an  antispasmodic,  it  should  be 
used  in  a fluid  form,  as  that  of  tincture,  from  half  a 
drachm  to  two  drachms.  When  given  in  the  form  of  a 
pill,  or  triturated  with  water,  its  usual  dose  is  from  five 
to  twenty  grains.  When  in  the  form  of  enema,  one  or 
two  drachms  are  to  be  diffused  in  eight  ounces  of  warm 
milk  or  water.  It  is  sometimes  applied  externally  as  a 
plaster  and  stimulating  remedy,  in  hysteria,  &.c. 

Ferula  minor.  All-heal  of  ASsculapius.  This 
plant  is  said  to  be  detergent. 

Ferula' cca.  See  Bubon  galbanum. 

FEVER.  See  Febris. 

FEVERFEW.  See  Matricaria. 

FI  BER.  (From  fiber,  extreme,  because  it  resides 
in  the  extremities  of  lakes  and  rivers.)  The  beaver. 
See  Castor  fiber. 

FIBRE.  Fibra.  A very  simple  filament.  It  is 
owing  to  the  difference  in  the  nature  and  arrangements 
of  the  fibres  that  the  structure  of  the  several  parts  of 
animals  and  vegetables  differ : hence  the  barks,  woods, 
leaves,  &c.  of  vegetables,  and  the  cellular  structure, 
membranes,  muscles,  vessels,  nerves,  and,  in  short, 
every  part  of  the  body,  has  its  fibres  variously  consti- 
tuted and  arranged,  so  as  to  form  these  different  parts. 

Fibre  muscular.  See  Muscular  fibre. 

FIBRIL.  ( Fibrila , diminutive  of  fibra.')  A small 
thread-like  fibre  : applied  to  the  little  roots  which  are 
given  off  from  radicles. 

FI'BRIN.  “A  peculiar  organic  compound  found 
both  in  vegetables  and  animals.  Vauquelin  discovered 
it  in  the  juice  of  the  papaw-tree.  It  is  a soft  solid,  of 
a greasy  appearance,  insoluble  in  water,  which  sof  tens 
in  the  air,  becoming  viscid,  brown,  and  semi-transpa- 
rent. On  hot  coals  it  melts,  throws  out  greasy  drops, 
crackles,  and  evolves  the  smoke  and  odour  of  roasting 
meat.  Fibrin  is  procured,  however,  in  its  moat  cha- 
racteristic state  from  animal  matter.  It  exists  in  chyle ; 
it  enters  into  the  composition  of  blood  ; of  it,  the  chief 
part  of  muscular  flesh  is  formed  ; and  hence  it  may  be 
regarded  as  the  most  abundant  constituent  of  tire  soft 
solids  of  animals. 

To  obtain  it,  we  may  beat  blood  as  it  issues  from 
the  veins  with  a bundle  of  twigs.  Fibrin  soon  attaches 
itself  to  each  stem,  under  the  form  of  long  reddish  fila- 
ments, which  become  colourless  by  washing  them  with 
cold  water.  It  is  solid,  white,  insipid,  without  smell, 
denser  than  water,  and  incapable  of  affecting  the  hue 
of  litmus  or  violets.  When  moist  it  possesses  a spe- 
cies of  elasticity ; by  desiccation  it  becomes  yellowish, 
hard,  and  brittle.  By  distillation  we  can  extract  from 
it  much  carbonate  of  ammonia,  some  acetate,  a foetid 
brown  oil,  and  gaseous  products;  while  there  remains 
in  the  retort  a very  luminous  charcoal,  very  brilliant, 
difficult  of  incineration,  which  leaves,  after  combus- 
tion, phosphate  of  lime,  a little  phosphate  of  magnesia, 
carbonate  of  lime,  and  carbonate  of  soda. 

Cold  water  has  no  action  on  fibrin.  Treated  with 
boiling  water,  it  is  so  changed  a3  to  lose  the  properly 
of  softening  and  dissolving  in  acetic  acid.  The  liquor 
filtered  from  it,  yields  precipitates  with  infusion  of 
galls,  and  the  residue  is  white,  dry,  hard,  and  of  an 
agreeable  taste. 

When  kept  for  some  time  in  alkohol  of  0.810,  it  gives 
rise  to  an  adipocerous  matter,  having  a strong  and 
disagreeable  odour.  This  matter  remains  dissolved  in 
the  alkohol,  and  may  be  precipitated  by  water.  ASther 
makes  it  undergo  a similar  alteration,  but  more  slowly. 
When  digested  in  weak  muriatic  acid,  it  evolves  a lit- 
tle azote,  and  a compound  is  formed,  hard,  horny,  and 
which,  washed  repeatedly  with  water,  is  transformed 
into  another  gelatinous  compound.  This  seems  to  be 
a neutral  muriate,  soluble  in  hot  water  ; while  the  first 
is  an  acid  muriate,  insoluble  even  in  boiling  water. 
Sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  six  times  its  weight  of 
water,  has  similar  effects.  When  not  too  concentrated, 
nitric  acid  has  a very  different  action  on  fibrin.  For 
example,  when  its  sp.  gr.  is  1.25,  there,  results  from  it 
at  first  a disengagement  of  azote,  while  the  fibrin  be- 
comes covered  with  fat,  and  the  liquid  turns  yeljow. 
By  digestion  of  twenty-four  hours,  the  whole  fibrin  is 
attacked,  and  converted  into  a pulverulent  mass  of 
lemon  yellow  colour,  which  seems  to  be  composed  of  a 
mixture  of  fat  and  fibrin,  altered  and  intimately  com- 


FIB 


FIL 


bined  with  the  malic  and  nitric  or  nitrous  acids.  In 
fact,  if  we  put  this  mass  on  a filter,  and  wash  it  copi- 
ously with  water,  it  will  part  with  a portion  of  its 
acid,  will  preserve  the  property  of-reddening  litmus, 
and  will  take  an  orange  hue.  On  treating  it  after- 
ward with  boiling  alkohol,we  dissolve  the  fatty  mat- 
ter ; and  putting  the  remainder  in  contact  with  chalk 
and  water,  an  effervescence  will  be  occasioned  by  the 
escape  of  carbonic  acid,  and  malate  or  nitrate  of  lime 
will  remain  in  solution. 

Concentrated  acetic  acid  renders  fibrin  soft  at  ordi- 
nary temperatures,  and  converts  it  by  the  aid  of  heat 
into  a jelly,  which  is  soluble  in  hot  water,  with  the  dis- 
engagement of  a small  quantity  of  azote.  This  solu- 
tion is  colourless,  and  possesses  little  taste.  Evapo- 
rated to  dryness,  it  leaves  a transparent  residue,  which 
reddens  litmus  paper,  and  which  cannot  be  dissolved 
even  in  boiling  water,  but  by  the  medium  of  more 
acetic  acid.  Sulphuric,  nitric,  and  muriatic  acids,  pre- 
cipitate the  animal  matter,  and  form  acid  combina- 
tions. Potassa,  soda,  ammonia,  effect  likewise  the 
precipitation  of  this  matter,  provided  we  do  not  use  too 
great  an  excess  of  alkali;  for  then  the  precipitated 
matter  would  be  redissolved.  Aqueous  potassa  and 
soda  gradually  dissolve  fibrin  in  the  cold,  without  oc- 
casioning any  perceptible  change  in  its  nature ; but 
with  heat  they  decompose  it,  giving,  birth  to  a quantity 
of  ammoniacal  gas,  and  other  usual  animal  products. 
Fibrin  does  not  putrefy  speedily  when  kept  in  water. 
It  shrinks  on  exposure  to  a considerable  heat,  and 
emits  the  smell  of  burning  horn.  It  is  composed,  ac- 
cording to  the  analysis  of  Gay  Lussac,  and  Thenard, 
of 

Carbon,  53.360 

Azote,  19.934 

Oxygen,  19.685  1 22.14  water. 

Hydrogen,  7.021  £ 4.56  hydrogen. 

FTBROLITE.  A crystallized  mineral  harder  jhan 
quartz,  of  a white  or  gray  colour,  found  in  the  Car- 
natic, and  composed  of  alumina,  silica,  and  iron. 

FIBROSUS.  (From  fibre , a fibre*)  Fibrous.  A 
term  frequently  used  in  anatomy  to  express  the  texture 
of  parts.  In  botany,  its  meaning  is  the  same,  and  is 
applied  to  roots  and  other  parts,  as  those  of  grasses, 

&.C. 

FI'BULA.  ( Quasi  fig ilula ; from  figo,  to  fasten: 
so  named  because  it  joins  together  the  tibia  and  the 
muscles.)  A long  bone  of  the  leg,  situated  on  the  outer 
side  of  the  tibia,  and  which  forms,  at  its  lower  end, 
the  outer  ankle.  Its  upper  extremity  is  formed  into  an 
irregular  head,  on  the  inside  of  which  is  a slightly  con- 
cave articulating  surface,  which,  in  the  recent  subjects, 
is  covered  with  cartilage,  and  receives  the  circular  flat 
surface  under  the  edge  of  the  external  cavity  of  the 
tibia.  This  articulation  is  surrounded  by  a capsular 
ligament,  which  is  farther  strengthened  by  other  strong 
ligamentous  fibres,  so  as  to  allow  only  a small  motion 
backwards  and  forwards. — Externally,  the  head  of  the 
fibula  is  rough  and  protuberant,  serving  for  the  attach- 
ment of  ligaments,  and  for  the  insertion  of  the  biceps 
cruris  muscle. — Immediately  below  it,  on  its  inner  side, 
is  a tubercle,  from  which  a part  of  the  gastrocnemius 
internus  has  its  origin.  Immediately  below  this  head 
the  body  of  the  bone  begins.  It  is  of  a triangular  shape, 
and  appears  as  if  it  were  slightly  twisted  at  each  end, 
in  a different  direction.  It  is  likewise  a little  curved 
inwards  and  forwards.  This  curvature  is  in  part 
owing  to  the  action-of  muscles;  and  in  part  perhaps  to 
the  carelessness  of  nurses. — Of  the  three  angles  of  the 
bone,  that  which  is  turned  towards  the  tibia  is  the 
most  prominent,  and  serves  for  the  attachment  of  the 
interosseous  ligament,  which,  in  its  structure  and  uses, 
resembles  that  of  the  forearm,  and,  like  that,  is  a little 
interrupted  above  and  below.  The  three  surfaces  of 
the  bone  are  variously  impressed  by  different  muscles. 
About  the  middle  of  the  posterior  surface  is  observed 
a passage  for  the  medullary  vessels,  slanting  down- 
wards. The  lower  end  of  the  fibula  is  formed  into  a 
spongy,  oblong  head,  externally  rough  and  convex,  in- 
ternally smooth  and  covered  with  a thin  cartilage, 
where  it  is  received  by  the  external  triangular  depres- 
sion at  the  lower  end  of  the  tibia.  This  articulation, 
which  resembles  that  of  its  upper  extremity,  is  fur- 
nished with  a capsular  ligament,  and  farther  strength- 
ened by  ligamentous  fibres,  which  are  stronger  and 
more  considerable  than  those  before  described.  They 
extend  from  the  tibia  to  the  fibula,  in  an  oblique  direc- 


tion, and  are  more  easily  discernible  before  than  De- 
hind. Below  this  the  fibula  is  lengthened  out,  so  as 
to  form  a considerable  process,  called  malleolus  exter 
nus , or  the  outer  ankle.  It  is  smooth  and  covered 
with  cartilage  on  the  inside,  where  it  is  contiguous  to 
the  astragalus,  or  first  bone  of  the  foot.  At  the  lower 
and  inner  part  of  this  process*  there  is  a spongy  cavity, 
filled  with  fat;  and  a little  beyond  this,  posteriorly,  is 
a cartilaginous  groove,  for  the  tendons  of  the  peroneus 
longus  and  peroneus  brevis,  which  are  here  bound 
down  by  the  ligamentous  fibres  that  are  extended  over 
them. 

The  principal  uses  of  this  bone  seem  to  be,  to  afford 
origin  and  insertion  to  muscles,  ami  to  contribute  to 
the  articulation  of  the  leg  with  the  foot. 

FICA'RIA.  (From  ficus,  a fig;  so  called  from  its 
likeness.)  See  Ranunculus  ficaria. 

Fica'tio.  (From  ficus , a fig.)  A tuberculous  dis- 
ease, near  the  anus  and  pudenda. 

FICOIDE'A.  Ficoides.  Resembling  a.  fig.  A 
name  of  the  house-leek.  See  Sempervivum  tectorium. 

FI'CUS.  1.  A fleshy  substance  about  the  anus,  in 
figure  resembling  a fig.  . ' 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Polygamia;  Order,  Dicecia.  The  fig- 
tree. 

Ficus  carica.  The  systematic  name  of  the  fig- 
tree.  Carica ; Ficus ; Ficus  vulgaris ; Ficus  com- 
munis. Evict/  of  the  Greeks.  French  figs  are,  when 
completely  ripe,  soft,  succulent,  and  easily  digested, 
unless  eaten  in  immoderate  quantities,  when  they  are 
apt  to  occasion  flatulency,  pain  of  the  bowels,  and 
diarrhoea.  The  dried  fruit,  which  is  sold  in  our  shops, 
is  pleasanter  to  the  taste,  and  more  wholesome  and 
nutritive.  They  are  directed  in  the  decoctum  liordei 
compositum , and  in  the  confectio  sennce.  Applied  ex- 
ternally, they  promote  the  suppuration  of  tumours; 
hence  they  have  a place  in  maturating  cataplasms; 
and  are  very  convenient  to  apply  to  the  gums,  and, 
when  boiled  with  milk,  to  the  throat. 

Ficus  indica.  See  Lacca. 

Fiddle- shaped.  See  Leaf. 

Fidicina'les.  ( Fidicinalis , sc.  musculus.)  See 
Lumbricales. 

FIENUS,  Thomas,  was  son  of  a physician  of  Ant- 
werp, and  born  in  1567.  After  studying  at  Leyden  and 
Bologna,  he  was  invited,  at  the  age  of  26,  to  be  one  of 
the  medical  professors  at  Louvaine,  where  he  took  his 
degrees.  With  the  exception  of  one  year,  during  which 
he  attended  the  Duke  of  Bavaria,  he  remained  in  that 
office  till  his  death  in  1631.  Besides  his  great  abilities 
in  medicine  and  surgery,  he  was  distinguished  for  his 
knowledge  of  natural  history,  the  learned  languages, 
and  the  mathematics.  He  has  left  several  works : the 
chief  of  which  is  termed  “Libri  Chirurgici  XII.,” 
treating  of  the  principal  operations ; it  passed  through 
many  editions.  His  father,  John , was  author  of  a well- 
received  treatise,  “De  Flatibus.” 

FIG.  See  Ficus  carica. 

FIGURESTONE.  Bildstein.  Ag  almatolite.  A 
massive  mineral  of  a gray  colour,  or  brown  flesh-red, 
and  sometimes  spotted,  or  with  blue  veins;  unctuous 
to  the  touch,  and  yielding  to  the  nail.  It  comes  from 
China,  cut  into  grotesque  figures.  It  differs  from  stea- 
tite in  wanting  the  magnesia.  It  is  also  found  in  Tran- 
sylvania, and  in  Wales. 

FIG  WORT.  See  Ranunculus  ficaria. 

FILA'GO.  (From  filum,  a thread,  and  ago , to  pro- 
duce or  have  to  do  with,  in  allusion  to  the  cottony  web 
connected  with  every  part  of  the  plant.)  Cud  or  cot- 
ton-weed ; formerly  used  as  an  astringent. 

FILA'MENT.  ( Filamcntum ; from  filum , a thread.) 
1.  A term  applied  in  anatomy  to  a small  thread-like 
portion  adhering  to  any  part,  and  frequently  synony- 
mous with  fibre.  See  Fibre. 

2.  The  stamen  of  a flower  consists  of  the  filament, 
anther,  and  pollen.  The  filament  is  the  column  which 
supports  the  anther. 

From  its  figure  it  is  called, 

1.  Capillary;  as  i n Plantago. 

2.  Filiform, ; as  in  Scilla  maritima. 

3.  Flat ; as  in  Allium  ccpa. 

4.  Dilatate , spreading  laterally ; as  in  Ornithogalum 
umbellutum. 

5.  Pedicellate , affixed  transversely  to  a little  stalk  • 
as  in  Salvia. 

6.  Bifid)  having  two ; as  in  Stemodia. 


359 


FIL 


FIS 


7.  Bifur ced;  as  in  Prunella. 

8.  Multifid  ; as  in  Carolina  princeps. 

9.  Dentate ; as  in  Rosmarinus  officinalis. 

10.  Nicked;  as  in  Allium  cep  a. 

11.  Lanceolate ; as  in  Ornithogalum  pyrenaicum. 

12.  Castrate , the  anther  naturally  wanting;  as  in 
Gratiola  officinalis. 

13.  Subulate;  as  in  Tulipa  gesneriani. 

From  the  pubescence, 

1.  Barbate,  bearded  as  in  Lycium. 

2.  Lanate,  woolly ; as  in  Verbascum  thapsus. 

3.  Pilose;  as  in  Anthericum  frutescens. 

4.  Gland-bearing ; as  in  Laurus  and  Rheum. 

From  its  direction, 

1.  Erect;  as  in  Tulipa  gesneriana. 

2.  Incurved;  curved  inward,  and  a little  bent. 

3.  Declinate;  as  in  Hsmerocalis  fulva. 

4.  Connivent ; as  in  Physalis  alkekengi. 

From  its  concretion, 

1.  Liberate,  free,  nowhere  adhering;  as  in  Nico- 
tiana  tabacum. 

2.  Connate , adhering  at  their  base ; as  in  Malva  syl- 
vestris,  and  Alcea  rosea. 

From  its  insertion, 

1.  Receptaculine,  inserted  into  the  receptaculum ; as 
in  Papaver  somniferum.. 

2.  Corolline,  as  in  Verbascum  thapsus,  and  Nerium 
oleander. 

3.  Calicine  ; as  in  Pyrus  malus , and  Mespilus  ger- 
manica. 

4.  Styline ; as  in  the  Orchides. 

5.  Nectorine;  as  in  Pancratium  declinatum. 

From  its  length,  it  is  said  to  be  very  long ; as  in 

Plantago  major : very  short  in  Jasminum  and  Vinca : 
and  unequal,  some  long,  some  short;  as  in  Clieiranthus 
cheiri. 

FILARIA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  intestinal 
worms. 

File'llum.  (From  filum,  a thread ; because  it 
resembles  a string.)  The  fraenum  of  the  penis  and 
tongue. 

File'tum.  (From  filum,  a thread ; named  from  its 
string-like  appearance.)  The  frtenum  of  the  tongue 
and  penis. 

FIL1CES.  ( Filix , cis.  f. ; from  filum,  a thread.) 
Ferns.  One  of  the  families,  or  natural  tribe  into  which 
the  whole  vegetable  kingdom  is  divided.  They  are 
defined  plants  which  bear  their  flower  and  fruit  on  the 
back  of  the  leaf  or  stalk,  which  is  termed  frons. 

FILI'CULA.  (Dim.  of  filix, Tern  ; a small  sort  of 
fern : or  from  filum,  a thread,  which  it  resembles.) 
Common  maiden-hair.  See  Adianthum  capillus  ve- 
neris. 

FILIFORMIS.  Filiform,  thread-like:  applied  to 
many  parts  of  animals  and  vegetables  from  their  re- 
semblance. 

FILIPE'NDULA.  (From  filum,  a thread,  and  pen- 
deo,  to  hang ; so  named  because  the  numerous  bulbs 
of  its  roots  hang,  as  it  were,  by  small  threads.)  See 
Spircea  filipendula. 

Filipendula  aquatica.  Water-dropwort;  the 
(Enanthe  fislulosa  of  Linnaeus. 

Filius  ante  patrem.  Any  plant,  the  flower  of 
which  comes  out  before  the  leaf ; as  coltsfoot. 

FI  LIX.  (From  filum,  a thread  ; so  called  from  its 
being  cut,  as  it  were,  in  slender  portions,  like  threads.) 
Fern.  See  Polypodium. 

Filix  aculeata.  See  Polypodium  aculeatum. 

Filix  Florida.  See  Osmunda  regalis. 

Filix  f<emina.  See  Pteris  aquilina. 

Filix  mas.  See  Polypodium  filix  mas. 

FILTRA'TION.  (Filtratio ; from  filtrum,  a 
strainer.)  An  operation,  by  means  of  which  a fluid  is 
mechanically  separated  from  consistent  particles  mere- 
ly mixed  with  it.  It  does  not  differ  from  straining. 

An  apparatus  fitted  up  for  this  purpose  is  called  a 
filter.  The  form  of  this  is  various,  according  to  the 
intention  of  the  operator.  A piece  of  tow,  or  wool, 
or  cotton,  stuffed  into  the  pipe  of  a funnel,  will  prevent 
the  passage  of  grosser  particles,  and  by  that  means 
render  the  fluid  clearer  which  comes  through.  Sponge 
is  still  more  effectual.  A strip  of  linen  rag  wetted  and  J 
hung  over  the  side  of  a vessel  containing  a fluid,  in 
such  a manner  as  that  one  end  of  the  rag  tnay  be  im- 
mersed in  the  fluid,  and  the  other  end  may  remain 
without,  below  the  surface,  will  act  as  a syphon,  and 
carry  over  the  clearer  portion.  Linen  or  woollen  stuffs 


| may  eltner  be  fastened  over  the  mouths  of  proper  ves- 
sels, or  fixed  to  a frame,  like  a sieve,  for  the  purpose  of 
filtering.  AH  these  are  more  commonly  used  by  cooks 
and  apothecaries  than  by  philosophical  chemists,  who, 
for  the  most  part,  use  the  paper  called  cap  paper,  made 
up  without  size. 

As  the  filtration  of  considerable  quantities  of  fluid 
could  not  be  effected  at  once  without  breaking  the 
filter  of  paper,  it  is  found  requisite  to  use  a linen  cloth, 
upon  which  the  paper  is  applied  and  supported. 

Precipitates  and  other  pulverulent  matters  are  col- 
lected more  speedily  by  filtration  than  by  subsidence. 
But  there  are  many  chemists  who  disclaim  the  use  of 
this  method,  and  avail  themselves  of  the  latter  only, 
which  is  certainly  more  accurate,  and  liable  to  no  ob- 
jection, where  the  powders  are  such  as  will  admit  of 
edulcoration  and  drying  in  the  open  air. 

Some  fluids,  as  turbid  water,  may  be  purified  by 
filtering  through  sand.  A large  earthen  funnel,  or 
stone  bottle  with  the  bottom  beaten  out,  may  have  its 
neck  loosely  stopped  with  small  stones,  over  which 
smaller  may  be  placed,  supporting  layers  of  gravel  in- 
creasing in  fineness,  and  lastly  covered  to  the  depth 
of  a few  inches  with  fine  sand  all  thoroughly  cleansed 
by  washing.  This  apparatus  is  superior  to  a filtering 
stone,  as  it  will  cleanse  water  in  large  quantities,  and 
may  readily  be  renewed  when  the  passage  is  ob- 
structed, by  taking  out  and  washing  the  upper  stratum 
of  sand. 

A filter  for  corrosive  liquors  may  be  constructed,  on 
the  same  principles,  of  broken  and  pounded  glass. — 
Ure's  Chcm.  Diet. 

FI'LTRUM.  A filter,  straining  or  filtering  instru- 
ment. 

FILUM.  A thread  or  filament. 

Filum  arsenicale.  Corrosive  sublimate. 

FI  MBRIA.  (A  fringe,  quasi  finibria ; from  finis, 
the  extremity.)  A fringe.  1.  A term  used  by  anato- 
mists to  curled  membraneous  productions.  See  Fim- 
bria:. 

2.  In  botany,  it  is  applied  to  the  dentate  or  fringe- 
like ring  of  the  operculum  of  mosses,  by  the  elastic 
power  of  which  the  operculum  is  displaced.  See  Pe- 

ristomium. 

FimbrijE.  ( Fimbria , a fringe.  Quasi  finibria; 
from  finis , the  extremity.)  The  extremities  of  the 
Fallopian  tubes.  See  Uterus. 

FINCKLE.  See  Anethum  fceniculum. 

Fingered  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

FIORITE.  See  Pearl  sinter. 

FIR.  See  Pinus. 

Fir  balsam.  See  Pinus  balsamea. 

Fir,  Canada.  See  Pinus  balsamea. 

Fir , Norway  spruce.  See  Pinus  abies. 

Fir,  Scotch.  See  Pinus  sylvestris. 

Fir,  silver.  See  Pinus  picea. 

FIRE.  Ignis.  A very  simple  and  active  element, 
the  principal  agent  in  nature  to  balance  the  power  and 
natural  effect  of  attraction.  The  most  useful  accepta- 
tion of  the  word  fire  comprehends  heat  and  light. 
There  have  been  several  theories  proposed  respecting 
fire,  but  no  one  as  yet  is  fully  established.  See  Calorie 
and  Light. 

[FFIRTH,  Dr.  S.  of  Salem,  in  New-Jersey,  pub- 
lished a dissertation  on  malignant  fever  in  1805,  with 
an  attempt  to  prove  that  yellow  fever  is  not  conta- 
gious. The  experiments  he  tried  with  the  matter  of 
black-vomit  are  bold  and  decisive.  He  proves  by  his 
experiments,  that  neither  the  black-vomit,  serum,  nor 
saliva  of  persons  labouring  under  yellow  fever,  are 
capable  of  communicating  that  disease.  He  dropped  the 
matter  of  black-vomit  in  his  eye,  inoculated  himself 
with,  and  even  swallowed  it.  For  the  particulars  of 
these  and  other  experiments,  see  Black-vomit.  A.] 

Firmi'sium  minkralium.  Antimony. 

FISCHER,  John  Andrew,  son  of  an  apothecary 
at  Erfurt,  was  born  in  1667.  He  graduated  there,  and 
was  appointed  in  succession  to  several  professorships; 
but  that  of  pathology  and  the  practice  of  medicine  he 
did  not  receive  till  the  age  of  48.  He  acquired  con- 
siderable reputation  in  liis  profession;  and  he  had 
I been  ten  years  physician  to  the  court  of  Mayence  when 
he  died  in  1729.  Among  several  minor  works  he  was 
author  of  some  of  greater  importance;  as  the  “Con- 
silia  Medica,”  in  three  volumes;  the  “ Responsa  Frac- 
tion,” and  a Synopsis  of  Medicine,  facetiously  termed 
“Illias  in  Nuce.” 


FIS 


FLE 


[FISHERY,  SEAL.  Vessels  belonging  to  theUnited 
States,  employed  in  voyages  for  catching  seals,  usually 
pass  round  Cape-Horn,  and  visit  the  islands  of  Juan 
Fernandez  and  Massafuero.  At  the  latter  of  these, 
seals  were  formerly  very  numerous.  They  are  also 
taken  at  Falkland’s  Islands,  Southern  Georgia,  Tristan 
d’Acunha,  §t.  Paul’s,  and  Amsterdam  islands.  But  of 
late  years  they  have  been  found  to  be  much  more  rare. 
Even  at  Massafuero,  and  the  islands  in  its  vicinity, 
they  are  no  longer  found  in  that  abundance  which  pre- 
vailed when  these  voyages  were  first  undertaken. 

The  sea-elephant  belongs  to  the  same  family  with 
the  seal.  He  is  found  on  many  of  the  uninhabited 
islands  of  the  great  southern  ocean,  particularly  at 
Kerguelan’s  Land,  which  they  frequent  in  great  herds. 

They  make  little  resistance,  and  of  course  are  easily 
killed.  Several  of  our  vessels  are  said  to  have  been 
engaged  in  their  destruction.  Their  oil  is  found  to  be 
of  an  excellent  quality;  and  not  only  answers  for 
home  consumption,  but  makes  a valuable  article  of 
exportation.  A.] 

[“  Fishery,  whale.  This  branch  of  business  seems 
to  be  less  inviting  and  profitable  than  it  formerly  was. 
Whether  this  is  owing  to  a scarcity  of  whales,  to 
greater  exertions  of  other  nations,  or  to  the  inferiority 
of  the  market  at  home,  and  high  duties  abroad,  we 
need  not  examine  particularly  here.  The  decline  of 
the  whale-fishery  among  the  people  of  the  United 
States,  is  probably  to  be  ascribed  to  the  operation  of 
all  these  causes,  as  well  as  to  bounties  and  immunities 
granted  by  some  of  the  European  powers  so  generously 
as  to  tempt  many  of  our  most  enterprising  whalemen 
to  engage  themselves  and  their  capitals  in  foreign  ser- 
vice.”— Med.  Repos. 

These  observations  were  made  in  1805,  since  which 
there  has  been  a great  increase  in  the  amount  of  capi- 
tal, number  of  ships,  and  seamen  engaged  in  the  whale 
fishery  from  the  United  States.  The  greatest  number 
of  ships  in  this  business  are  fitted  out  at  New-Bedford 
in  Massachusetts,  the  island  of  Nantucket,  and  Sag- 
Harbour,  on  the  east  end  of  Long  Island,  of  the  state 
of  New- York.  Some  few  are  fitted  out  from  this  city, 
and  some  from  ports  in  Connecticut.  Few  or  none  of 
our  vessels  pursue  this  business  in  the  Arctic  seas. 
Some  take  the  light  whale  on  the  coast  of  Brazil,  but 
most  of  those  engaged  in  this  employment  from  the 
United  States  resort  to  the  Pacific  ocean,  where  they 
take  both  the  spermaceti  and  the  right  whale. 

Vessels  are  fitted  out  on  shares ; the  owners,  master, 
and  seamen,  dividing  the  proceeds  of  the  voyage  ac- 
cording to  a certain  ratio  agreed  upon  before  the 
voyage  commences,  and  which  generally  lasts  about 
two  years.  The  success  depends  upon  the  skill  and 
enterprise  of  the  officers  and  crew,  which  generally 
consists  of  hardy  and  active  young  men.  The  greater 
their  success  the  greater  their  share  of  the  profits. 
The  spermaceti-whale  is  the  great  object  of  their 
search  in  the  Pacific,  as  from  this  animal  is  derived 
the  pharmacopoeial  substance  called  sperma  ceti. 
Ambergris  is  also  occasionally  found  in  the  intestines 
of  this  whale.  A.] 

[Fishery,  cod.  “ This  employment  appears  to  be 
on  the  increase.  Notwithstanding  the  abundance  of 
business  which  might  be  followed  on  shore,  in  a coun- 
try having  so  many  millions  of  unappropriated  acres, 
there  are  found  plenty  of  people  who  prefer  the  catching 
offish  along  the  coasts  of  theUnited  States,  and  on  the 
Banks  of  Newfoundland.  Government  allows  a 
bounty  on  the  tonnage  of  the  vessels  engaged  in  the  cod- 
fishery,  in  lieu  of  a drawback  upon  the  salt  used  in 
curing  the  fish.” — Med.  Rep. 

The  cod  taken  along  our  shores  and  on  the  Banks 
of  Newfoundland  is  the  Gadus  morhua , though  some 
of  the  other  species  are  also  taken.  On  the  rocky 
shores  of  Maine,  the  hake  ( Gadus  merluccius)  is 
abundantly  taken.  The  fish  is  not  so  good  as  the 
Gadus  morhua,  but  it  has  a very  large  sound  from 
which  icthyocolla,  or  fish  glue,  of  a good  quality,  may 
be  prepared  in  any  quantity.  A.] 

Fish-glue.  See  Ickthyocolla. 

FISSURA.  A fissure.  1.  That  species  of  frac- 
ture in  which  the  bone  is  slit,  but  not  completely  di- 
vided. 

2.  A name  given  to  a deep  and  long  depression  in  a 

part. 

Fissura  magna  sYLVii.  The  anterior  and  middle 
lobes  of  the  cerebrum  on  each  side  are  parted  by  a I 


deep  narrow  sulcus,  which  ascends  obliquely  back- 
wards from  the  temporal  ala  of  the  os  sphenoides,  to 
near  the  middle  of  the  os  parietale,  and  this  sulcus  is 
thus  called. 

FISSUS.  Cleft,  cloven.  Applied  to  leaves,  and 
pods , folia  fissa,  that  are,  as  it  were,  cut  into  fissures 
or  straight  segments.  See  Leaf. 

FISTIC-NUT.  See  Pistachia  vqfa. 

FI'STULA.  ( Quasi  fusula:j£o in  fundo,  to  pour 
out ; or  from  its  similarity  to  a nj!pe,  or  reed.)  Eligii 
morbus.  A term  in  surgery,  aqpjilied  to  a long  and 
sinuous  ulcer  that  has  a narrow  opening,  and  which 
sometimes  leads  to  a larger  cavity,  and  has  no  disposi- 
tion to  heal. 

FISTULA'RIA.  (From  fistula , a pipe,  so  called 
because  its  stock  is  hollow.)  Stavesacre.  See  Del- 
phinium staphisagria. 

FIXED.  In  chemistry,  the  term  fixed  bodies  is  ap 
plied  to  those  substances  which  cannot  be  caused  to 
pass  by  a strong  rarefaction  from  the  solid  or  liquid 
state  of  an  elastic  fluid. 

Fixed  air.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

FIXITY.  The  property  by  which  bodies  resist  the 
action  of  heat,  so  as  not  to  rise  in  vapour. 

FLAG.  See  Acorus  and  Iris. 

[FLAGG,  Dr.  John,  was  son  of  the  Rev.  Ebenezer 
Flagg,  the  first  minister  of  Chester,  in  New-Hamp- 
shire.  He  was  graduated  at  Harvard  University  in 
1761,  and  studied  medicine  under  the  direction  of  Dr. 
Osgood,  of  Andover.  He  commenced  practice  at  Wo- 
burn, but  in  1769  removed  to  Lynn,  where  he  enjoyed 
the  full  confidence  of  his  fellow-citizens,  and  acquired 
a high  standing  in  his  profession. 

When,  in  1775,  the  dark  cloud  overspread  our  politi- 
cal hemisphere,  Dr.  Flagg  was  prepared  to  unite  in  the 
strong  measures  of  resistance  against  every  encroach- 
ment upon  the  rights  and  freedom  of  his  country.  He 
was  an  active  and  useful  member  of  the  committee  of 
safety,  and  contributed  largely  to  the  promotion  of  the 
military  preparations  to  meet  the  exigencies  which 
soon  after  happened.  From  a native  modesty,  he  de- 
clined any  appointment  in  the  councils  of  the  state, 
but  was  prevailed  upon  to  accept  the  commission  of 
lieutenant-colonel  of  militia,  under  the  venerable  Col. 
Timothy  Pickering,  which,  however,  he  soon  after  re- 
signed, that  he  might  devote  his  whole  attention  to 
the  practice  of  medicine,  which  he  preferred  to  mili 
tary  pursuits. 

He  was  elected  a member  of  the  Massachusetts 
Medical  Society  immediately  after  its  incorporation, 
when  the  number  of  fellows  was  restricted  to  seventy 
in  the  whole  commonwealth.  He  held  a commission 
of  justice  of  the  peace  before  the  revolution  and  after 
the  adoption  of  our  state  constitution,  till  his  death. 
The  fatigues  of  an  extensive  circle  of  practice,  and 
the  exposures  incident  to  a professional  life,  impaired 
his  constitution,  and  he  fell  a victim  to  pulmonary 
consumption  in  1793,  in  the  50th  year  of  his  age.  A.l 

FLAGELLIFORMIS.  Whip-like.  A term  ap- 
plied to  a stem  that  is  long  and  pliant,  whip  like ; as 
that  of  jasmine  and  blue  boxthorn.  See  Caulis. 

Flalce-white.  Oxide  of  bismuth. 

FLA' MMULA.  (Dim.  of fiamma,  a fire:  named 
from  the  burning  pungency  of  its  taste.)  See  Ranun- 
culus ftammula. 

Flammula  jovis.  See  Clematis  recta. 

FLATULENT.  Windy. 

FLAX.  See  Linum. 

Flax-leaved  daphne.  See  Daphne  gnidium. 

Flax , purging.  See  Linum  catharticum. 

Flax , spurge.  See  Daphne  gnidium. 

FLE  A-W ORT.  See  Plantago  psyllium. 

Fle'men.  (From  flecto , to  incline  downwards.) 
Flegma.  A tumour  about  the  ankles. 

Flere'sin.  Gout. 

FLESH.  1.  The  muscles  of  animals. 

2.  A vulgar  term  for  all  the  soft  parts  of  an  animal. 

3.  It  is  also  applied  to  leaves,  fruit,  &c.  which  have 
the  appearance  or  consistence  of  flesh. 

FLE'XOR.  The  name  of  several  muscles,  the  of- 
fice of  which  is  to  bend  parts  into  which  they  are  in- 
serted. 

Flexor  accessorius  digitorum  pedis.  See 
Flexor  longus  digitorum  pedis. 

Flexor  brevis  digitorum  pedis,  perforatus, 
sublimis.  A flexor  muscle  of  the  toes,  situated  on 
the  foot.  Flexor  brevis  digitorum  pedis,  perforatus  of 

361 


FLE 


FLE 


Albinus.  Flexor  brevis  of  Douglas.  Flexog  digitorum 
brevis,  sive  perforatus pedis  of  Winslow.  Perforatus, 
seu  fiexor  secundi  internodii  digitorum  pedis  of  Cow- 
per;  and  Calcano  sus-phalangettien  commun  of  Du- 
mas. It  arises  by  a narrow,  tendinous,  -and  fleshy  be- 
ginning, from  the  inferior  protuberance  of  the  os  cal- 
cis.  It  likewise  derives  many  of  its  fleshy  fibres  from 
the  adjacent  aponeurosis,  and  soon  forms  a thick  belly, 
which  divides  into  four  portions.  Each  of  these  por- 
tions terminates,  in  a flat  tendon,  the  fibres  of  which 
decussate,  to  afford  a passage  to  a tendon  of  the  long 
flexor,  and  afterward  reuniting,  are  inserted  into  the 
second  phalanx  of  each  of  the  four  less  toes.  This 
muscle  serves  to  bend  the  second  joint  of  the  toes. 

Flexor  brevis  minimi  digiti  pedis.  Parathenar 
minor  of  Winslow.  This  little  muscle  is  situated 
along  the  inferior  surface  and  outer  edge  of  the  meta- 
tarsal bone  of  the  little  toe.  It  arises  tendinous  from 
the  basis  of  that  bone,  and  from  the  ligaments  that 
connect  it  to  the  os  cuboides.  It  soon  becomes  fleshy, 
and  adheres  almost  the  whole  length  of  the  metatarsal 
bone,  at  the  anterior  extremity  of  which  it  forms  a 
small  tendon,  that  is  inserted  into  the  root  of  the 
first  joint  of  the  little  toe.  Its  use  is  to  bend  the  little 
toe. 

Flexor  brevis  pollicis  manus.  Flexor  secundi 
internodii  of  Douglas.  Thenar  of  Winslow.  Flexor 
primi  et  secundi  ossis  pollicis  of  Cowper ; and  Carpo- 
phalangien  du  pouce  of  Dumas.  This  muscle  is  di- 
vided into  two  portions  by  the  tendon  of  the  flexor 
longus  pollicis.  The  outermost  portion  arises  tendi- 
nous from  the  anterior  part  of  the  os  trapezoides  and 
internal  annular  ligament.  The  second,  or  innermost, 
and  thickest  portion,  arises  from  the  same  bone,  and 
likewise  from  the  os  magnum,  and  os  cuneiforme. 
Both  these  portions  are  inserted  tendinous  into  these 
sesamoid  bones  of  the  thumb.  The  use  of  this  muscle 
is  to  bend  the  second  joint  of  the  thumb. 

Flexor  brevis  pollicis  pedis.  A muscle  of  the 
great  toe,  that  bends  the  first  joint  of  that  part.  Flexor 
brevis  of  Douglas.  Flexor  brevis  pollicis  of  Cowper; 
and  Tar sophalangien  du  pouce  of  Dumas.  It  is  situ- 
ated upon  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe,  arises 
tendinous  from  the  under  and  anterior  part  of  the  os 
calcis,  and  from  the  under  part  of  the  os  cuneiforme 
externum.  It  soon  becomes  fleshy  and  divisible  into 
two  portions,  which  do  not  separate  from  each  other 
till  they  have  reached  the  anterior  extremity  of  the 
metatarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe,  where  they  become 
tendinous,  and  then  the  innermost  portion  unites  with 
the  tendon  of  the  abductor,  and  the  outermost  with  that 
of  the  abductor  pollicis.  They  adhere  to  the  external 
os  sesamoideum,  and  are  finally  inserted  into  the 
root  of  the  first  joint  of  the  great  toe.  These  two 
portions,  by  their  separation,  form  a groove,  in  which 
passes  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  longus  pollicis. 

Flexor  carpi  radialis.  A long  thin  muscle,  situ- 
ated obliquely  at  the  inner  and  anterior  part  of  the 
forearm,  between  the  palmaris  longus  and  the  pro- 
nator teres.  Radialis  intemus  of  Albinus  and  Wins- 
low ; and  Epitrochlo  metacarpien  of  Dumas.  It  arises 
tendinous  from  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os  humeri, 
and,  by  many  fleshy  fibres,  from  the  adjacent  tendi- 
nous fascia.  It  descends  along  the  inferior  edge  of 
the  pronator  teres,  and  terminates  in  a long,  flat,  and 
thin  tendon,  which  after.ward  becomes  narrower  and 
thicker,  and,  after  passing  under  the  internal  annular 
ligament,  in  a groove  distinct  from  the  other  tendons 
of  the  wrist,  it  spreads  wider  again,  and  is  inserted  into 
the  fore  and  upper  part  of  the  metacarpal  bone  that 
sustains  the  fore-finger.  It  serves  to  bend  the  hand, 
and  its  oblique  direction  may  likewise  enable  it  to  assist 
in  its  pronation. 

Flexor  carpi  ulnaris.  Ulnaris  internus  of 
Winslow  and  Albinus.  Epitrochli  cubito  carpien  of 
Dumas.  A muscle  situated  on  the  cubit  or  forearm, 
that  assists  in  bending  the  arm.  It  arises  tendinous 
from  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os  humeri,  and,  by  a 
small  fleshy  origin,  from  the  anterior  edge  of  the  ole- 
cranon. Between  these  two  portions,  we  find  the 
ulnar  nerve  passing  to  the  forearm.  Some  of  its 
fibres  arise  likewise  from  the  tendinous  fascia  that  co- 
vers the  muscles  of  the  forearm.  In  its  descent,  it 
soon  becomes  tendinous,  but  its  fleshy  fibres  do  not 
entirely  disappear  till  it  has  reached  the  lower  extre- 
mity of  the  ulna,  where  its  tendon  spreads  a little, 
and  after  sending  off  a few  fibres  to  the  external  and 
302 


internal  and  annular  ligaments,  is  inserted  into  the  go 
pisiforme. 

Flexor  longus  digitorum  pedis  profundus 
perforans.  A flexor  muscle  of  the  toes,  situated 
along  the  posterior  part  and  inner  side  of  the  leg.  Per- 
forans seu  fiexor  profundus  of  Douglas.  Flexor  digi- 
torum longus,  sive  perforans  pedis,  and  perforans  seu 
fiexor  tertii  internodii  digitorum  pedis  of  Cowper ; and 
Tibio  phalangetien  of  Dumas.  It  arises  fleshy  from 
the  back  part  of  the  tibia,  and,  after  running  down  to 
file  internal  ankle,  its  tendon  passes  under  a kind  of 
annular  ligament,  and  then  through  a sinuosity  at  the 
inside  of  the  os  calcis.®  Soon  after  this  it  receives  a 
small  tendon  from  the  flexor  longus  pollicis  pedis,  and 
about  the  middle  of  the  foot  it  divides  into  four  ten- 
dons, which  pass  through  the  slits  of  the  flexor  brevis 
digitorum  pedis,  and  are  inserted  into  the  upper  part 
of  the  last  bone  of  all  the  less  toes.  About  the  mid- 
dle of  the  foot,  this  muscle  unites  with  a fleshy  por- 
tion, which,  from  the  name  of  its  first  describer,  has 
been  usually  called  massa  carnea  Jacobi  Sylvii : it  is 
also  termed  Flexor  accessorius  digitorum  pedis.  This 
appendage  arises  by  a thin  fleshy  origin,  from  most 
part  of  the  sinuosity  of  the  os  calcis,  and  likewise  by 
a thin  tendinous  beginning  from  the  anterior  part  of 
the  external  tubercle  of  that  bone;  it  soon  becomes  all 
fleshy,  and  unites  to  the  long  flexor  just  before  it  di- 
vides into  its  four  tendons.  The  use  of  this  muscle  is 
to  bend  the  last  joint  of  the  toes. 

Flexor  longus  pollicis  manus.  Flexor  longus 
pollicis  of  Albinus.  Flexor  tertii  internodii  of  Doug- 
las ; Flexor  tertii  internodii  sive  longissimus  pollicis 
of  Cowper ; and  radio-phalangetien  du  pouce  of  Du- 
mas. A muscle  of  the  thumb  placed  at  the  side  of  the 
flexor  longus  digitorum,  profundus,  perforans,  and  co- 
vered by  the  extensores  carpi  radiales.  It  arises  fleshy 
from  the  anterior  surface  of  the  radius,  immediately 
below  the  insertion  of  the  biceps,  and  is  continued 
down  along  the  oblique  ridge,  which  serves  for  the  in- 
sertion of  the  supinator  brevis,  as  far  as  the  pronator 
quadratus.  Some  of  its  fibres  spring  likewise  from  the 
neighbouring  edge  of  the  interosseous  ligament.  Its 
tendon  passes  under  the  internal  annular  ligament  of 
the  wrist,  and,  after  running  along  the  inner  surface  of 
the  first  bone  of  the  thumb,  between  the  two  portions 
of  the  flexor  brevis  pollicis,  goes  to  be  inserted  into  the 
last  joint  of  the  thumb,  being  bound  down  in  its  way 
by  the  ligamentous  expansion  that  is  spread  over  the 
second  bone.  In  some  subjects  we  find  a tendinous 
portion  arising  from  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os  hu- 
meri, and  forming  a fleshy  slip  that  commonly  termi- 
nates near  the  upper  part  of  the  origin  of  this  muscle 
from  the  radius.  The  use  of  this  muscle  is  to  bend  the 
last  joint  of  the  thumb. 

Flexor  longus  pollicis  pedis.  A muscle  of  the 
great  toe,  situated  along  the  posterior  part  of  the  leg. 
It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  a little  below  the  head 
of  the  fibula,  and  its  fibres  continue  to  adhere  to  that 
bone  almost  to  its  extremity.  A little  above  the  heel 
it  terminates  in  a round  tendon,  which,  after  passing 
in  a groove  formed  at  the  posterior  edge  of  the  astra- 
galus, and  internal  an$  lateral  part  of  the  os  calcis,  in 
which  it  is  secured  by  an  annular  ligament,  goes  to  be 
inserted  into  the  last  bone  of  the  great  toe,  which  it 
serves  to  bend. 

Flexor  ossis  metacarpi  pollicis.  Opponens 
pollicis  of  Innes.  Opponent  pollicis  manus  of  Albi- 
nus. Flexor  primi  internodii  of  Douglas.  Antithenar 
sine  semi-interosseus  pollicis  of  Winslow ; and  Carpo- 
phalangien  du  pouce  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the 
thumb,  situated  under  the  abductor  brevis  pollicis, 
which  it  resembles  in  its  shape.  It  arises  tendinous 
and  fleshy  from  the  os  scaphoides,  and  from  the  ante- 
rior and  inner  part  of  the  internal  annular  ligament. 
It  is  inserted  tendinous  and  fleshy  into  the  under  and 
anterior  part  of  the  first  bone  of  the  thumb.  It  serves 
to  turn  the  first  bone  of  the  thumb  upon  its  axis,  and 
at  the  same  time  to  bring  it  inwards  opposite  to  the 
other  fingers. 

Flexor  parvus  minimi  digiti.  Abductor  minimi 
digiti , Hypothenar  Riolani  of  Douglas.  Hypothenar 
minimi  digiti  of  Winslow  ; and  second  carpo-phalan- 
gicn  du  petit  doigt  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  little 
finger,  situated  along  the  inner  surface  of  the  meta- 
carpal bone  of  the  little  finger.  It  arises  tendinous  and 
fleshy  from  the  liook-like  process  of  the  unciform  bone, 
and  likewise  from  the  anterior  surface  of  the  adjacent 


FLO 


FLO 


part  of  the  annular  ligament.  It  terminates  in  a flat 
tendon,  which  is  connected  with  that  of  the  abductor 
minimi  digiti,  and  inserted  into  the  inner  and  anterior 
part  of  the  upper  end  of  the  first  bone  of  the  little 
finger.  It  serves  to  bend  the  little  finger,  and  likewise 
to  assist  the  abductor. 

Flexor  profundus  perforans.  Profundus , of 
Albinus.  Perforans , of  Douglas.  Perforans  vulgo 
profundus,  of  Winslow;  Flexor  tertii  internodii  digi- 
torum  manus , vel  perforatus  manus, of  Cowper;  and 
Cubito  phalangetien  commun , of  Dumas.  A muscle 
of  the  fingers  situated  on  the  forearm,  immediately 
under  the  perforatus , which  it  greatly  resembles  in 
its  shape.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  external  side,  and 
upper  part  of  the  ulna,  for  some  way  downwards,  and 
from  a large  portion«of  the  interrosseous  ligament.  It 
splits  into  four  tendons  a little  before  it  passes  under 
the  annular  ligament  of  the  wrist,  and  these  pass 
through  the  slit  in  the  tendons  of  the  flexor  subliinis, 
to  be  inserted  into  the  fore  and  upper  part  of  the  third 
or  last  bone  of  all  the  fore-fingers,  the  joint  of  which 
they  bend. 

Flexor  sublimis  perforatus.  This  muscle, 
which  is  the  perforatus  of  Cowper,  Douglas,  and 
Winslow,  is,  by  Albinus  and  others,  named  sublimis. 
It  has  gotten  the  name  of  perforatus,  from  its  tendons 
being  perforated  by  those  of  another  flexor  muscle  of 
the  finger,  called  the  perforans.  They  who  give  it 
the  appellation  of  sublimis,  consider  its  situation  with 
respect  to  the  latter,  and  which,  instead  of  perforans, 
they  name  profundus.  It  is  a long  muscle,  situated 
most  commonly  at  the  anterior  and  inner  part  of  the 
forearm,  between  the  palmaris  longus  and  the  flexor 
carpi  ulnaris;  but,  in  some  subjects,  we  find  it  placed 
under  the  former  of  these  muscles,  between  the  flexor 
carpi  ulnaris  and  the  flexor  carpi  radialis.  It  arises, 
tendinous  and  fleshy,  from  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os 
humeri,  from  the  inner  edge  of  the  coronoid  process  of 
the  ulna,  and  from  the  upper  and  forepart  of  the  radius, 
down  to  near  the  insertion  of  the  pronator  teres.  A 
little  below  the  middle  of  the  forearm,  its  fleshy  belly 
divides  into  four  portions;  which  degenerate  into  as 
many  round  tendons,  that  pass  all  together  uhder  the 
internal  annular  ligament  of  the  wrist,  after  which 
they  separate  from  each  other,  become  thinner  and 
flatter,  and  running  along  the  palm  of  the  hand,  under 
the  aponeurosis  palmaris,  are  inserted  into  the  upper 
part  of  the  second  bone  of  each  finger.  Previous  to 
this  insertion,  however,  the  fibres  of  each  tendon  de- 
cussate near  the  extremity  of  the  first  bone,  so  as  to 
afford  a passage  to  a tendon  of  the  perforans.  Of  these 
four  tendons,  that  of  the  middle  finger  is  the  largest, 
that  of  the  forefinger  the  next  in  size,  and  that  of  the 
little  finger  the  smallest.  The  use  of  this  muscle  is  to 
bend  the  second  joint  of  the  fingers. 

Flexor  tertii  internodii.  See  Flexor  longus 
pollicis  manus. 

FLEXUOSUS.  Flexuous;  full  of  turnings  or 
windings.  A stem  is  so  named  which  is  zigzag,  form- 
ing angles  alternately  from  right  to  left,  and  from  left 
to  right ; as  in  Smilax  aspera. 

FLINT.  A hard  stone,  found  in  beds  of  chalk,  and 
in  primitive,  transition,  secondary,  and  alluvial  moun- 
tains. Its  constituents  are  silica,  lime,  alumina,  and 
oxide  of  iron. 

FLINTY  SLATE.  Basanite.  A mineral,  of  which 
there  are  two  kinds. 

1.  Common  flinty  slate,  of  an  ash-gray  colour,  with 
other  colours,  in  flamed,  striped,  and  spotted  delinea- 
tions. It  is  found  in  different  parts  of  the  great  tract 
of  clay-slate  and  gray-wacke  which  extends  from  St. 
Abb’s  head  to  Portpatrick. 

2.  Lydian  stone,  of  a grayish- black  and  velvet-black 
colour.  It  is  found  frequently  along  with  common 
flinty  slate,  in  beds  of  clay-slate.  It  occurs  in  Bohe- 
mia and  the  Pentland  hills,  near  Edinburgh.  It  is 
sometimes  used  as  a touchstone  for  ascertaining  the 
purity  of  gold  and  silver. 

FLOAT  STONE.  The  spongiform  quartz  of 
Jameson. 

FLOCCILATION.  ( Floccilalio  ; from  floccus,  the 
nap  of  clothes.)  Picking  the  bedclothes.  A symptom 
of  great  danger  in  acute  diseases. 

FLORAL.  (Floralis ; from  Jlos,  a flower.)  Be- 
longing to  a flower ; as  floral  leaf.  See  Braclea. 

[FLORA  OF  NORTH  AMERICA.  “ Before  the 
revolutionary  struggle  began  in  France,  Louis  16th  had 


pafionlzed  a botanical  inquiry  into  the  vegetable  pro- 
ductions of  North  America.  In  the  sixth  volume  of 
our  Medical  Repository,  we  gave  an  account  of  the 
establishments  formed  for  that  purpose,  and  of  the 
history  of  the  oaks  of  North  America,  published  by 
Mr.  Michaux,  the  botanist  employed  by  that  monarch. 
Since  that  work  on  the  Quercus  family  was  published, 
the  great  performance  of  Mr.  Michaux  on  the  vegeta- 
bles of  that  extensive  country  generally,  has  made  its 
appearance.” 

“ The  industrious  author  of  this  work  had  spent  six 
years  in  Persia  before  his  mission  to  America.  He 
afterward  passed  twelve  years  in  exploring  the  regions 
between  Hudson’s  Bay  and  Carolina.  In  the  course 
of  the  numerous  excursions  he  made  during  that  time 
through  the  diversified  states,  provinces,  and  territo- 
ries, he  collected  the  materials  of  this  new  and  more 
complete  synopsis  of  North  American  plants.  This, 
he  hopes,  will  be  found  to  be  the  case,  notwithstanding 
the  prior  descriptions  of  the  plants  of  Canada  by  Cornu- 
ti ; of  Virginia  by  Clayton,  aided  by  Gronovius;  of  Ca- 
rolina by  Catesby,  with  plates,  as  well  as  by  Walther 
and  Bartram ; and  of  the  more  northern  parts,  by 
Marshall  and  Forster. 

“ This  work  is  published  by  the  author’s  son,  the 
father  having  left  it  in  his  hands  rather  unfinished, 
when  he  set  off  on  his  voyage  of  discovery  to  the 
islands  lying  in  the  Great  South  Sea.  We  mention 
with  concern  the  death  of  this  indefatigable  naturalist 
in  1802.  He  fell  a victim  to  the  zeal  with  which  he 
urged  his  physical  inquiries  on  the  coast  of  Mada- 
gascar. 

“ The  author  follows  the  Linnsean  or  sexual  sys- 
tem. In  addition  to  the  vegetables,  which  are  indige- 
nous in  America,  he  has  also  noted  the  European 
plants  growing  there.  The  generic  characters  are 
chiefly  taken  from  Murray’s  last  edition  of  the  system 
of  vegetables.  Mr.  Michaux  seems  to  have  confirmed 
as  many  of  the  Linnaean  species  as  he  could  ; though, 
for  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  he  has  described  some  of 
them  ovefagain.  It  is  affirmed  that  the  work  contains 
no  species  that  have  not  either  been  seen  or  gathered  by 
Michaux  himself.  This  must  give  to  this  Flora  great 
value,  and  render  it  peculiarly  interesting  to  the  lovers 
of  botany  in  the  United  States.  Genuine  descriptions 
recently  made  of  the  plants  of  the  country  by  an  actual 
observer,  possessing  remarkable  skill  and  discernment 
in  the  practical  as  well  as  the  theoretical  parts  of  the 
science,  cannot  fail  to  increase  the  facility  of  its  ac- 
quirement among  our  studious  youth.  To  them,  in 
particular,  it  will  shorten  the  way  to  knowledge,  and 
at  the  same  time,  render  it  much  more  easy  and  de- 
lightful. 

“ Particular  labour  has  been  bestowed  upon  the 
Cyperacece  and  Graminete ; and  all  the  Cryptogamia 
have  been  sedulously  attended  to,  except  the  fungi. 
As  respects  the  Filices,  he  adopts  the  arrangement  of 
J.  E.  Smith ; on  the  Musci,  the  system  of  Hedwig ; 
and  he  fallows  the  method  of  Acharius  on  the  Lichens. 
Care  has  been  taken  that  the  genera  of  the  same  order 
should  be  assembled  under  the  banner  of  affinities,  and 
thrown  into  sections  as  far  as  the  laws  of  the  system 
would  permit ; so  that  they  may  be  found  by  the  in- 
quirer and  student  with  the  greater  readiness  and 
ease. 

“ We  consider  this  Flora  boreali  Americana  as  a 
most  desirable  addition  to  the  natural  history  of  our 
country.  With  this  work  in  his  hand,  the  botanist 
will  be  enabled  to  pursue  his  studies  on  the  vegetables 
of  Fredon  (U,  S.)  and  the  adjoining  regions,  with  ad- 
ditional ease  and  success.  Though  we  cannot  dis- 
miss it  from  our  notice,  without  expressing  our  regret 
that  the  author  had  not  enriched  his  book  with  some 
of  the  synonyms  from  other  writers,  witlrsome  of  the 
popular  and  trivial  names,  and  with  some  little  sketch 
of  the  dietetic,  medicinal,  and  economical  uses  of  the 
more  distinguished  species.” — Med.  Repos,  vol.8.  A.] 

Flores  benzoes.  See  Benzoic  acid. 

Flores  martiales.  See  Ferrum  ammoniatum. 

Flores  salis  ammoniaci.  See  Ammonia:  sub- 
carbonas. 

Flores  sulphuris.  See  Sulphur. 

Flores  sulphuris  loti.  See  Sulphur  lotum. 

FLORESCENTIA.  (From  floresco,  to  flourish  or 
bloom.)  The  act  of  flowering,  which  Linnteus  com- 

I pares  to  the  act  of  generation  in  animals. 

FLORET.  A little  flower. 


363 


FLO 


FLU 


FLOS.  (Flos,  ris.  f. ; a flower.)  1.  A flower. 
That  part  of  a plant,  for  the  most  part  beautifully  co- 
loured, and  protecting  the  internal  organs. 

Every  flower  has  parts,  which  are 

1.  Essential , constituting  properly  the  flower ; as  the 
pistil,  stamen,  and  receptacle. 

2.  Less  essential , without  which  the  flower  is  in 
some  instances  formed  ; as  the  calyx , corolla , and  pe- 
dunculus. 

3.  Accidental , noticed  in  a few  only ; as  the  bractea 
and  nectarium. 

A flower  is  said  to  be, 

1.  Complete , when  furnished  with  calyx  and  corolla ; 
as  Nicotiana  tabacum. 

2.  Incomplete , when  the  calyx  or  corolla  is  wanting. 

3.  Naked , devoid  of  the  calyx;  as  in  Lilium  candi- 
dum , and  Tulipa  gesneriana. 

4.  Apetaloid , without  the  corolla;  as  in  Galena 
Africana,  and  Saururus  cemuus. 

When  the  stamens  and  pistils  are  both,  as  usual,  in 
one  flower,  that  flower  is  called  perfect , or  united ; 
when  they  are  situated  in  different  flowers  of  the  same 
species,  they  are  called  separated  flowers ; that  which 
has  the  stamens  being  named  the  barren  flower,  as 
producing  no  fruit  in  itself,  and  that  with  the  pistils 
the  fertile .one,  as  bearing  the  seed. 

The  flower  contains  the  internal  or  genital  parts  of 
a plant: 

1.  The  stamen  or  male  genital  organ. 

2.  The  pistillum  or  female  genital  organ. 

From  their  diversity,  flowers  are  called, 

1.  Male , which  have  the  stamina  only. 

2.  Female , in  which  are  the  pistils  only. 

3.  Hermaphrodite , which  contain  both  stamens  and 
pistils. 

4.  Neuter,  naturally  deficient  of  stamens  and  pistils  ; 
as  the  marginal  flowers  of  the  Centaurea  cyanus,  and 
Jacobea. 

5.  Castrate,  when  the  anthers  or  the  pistils  are  na- 
turally wanting.  The  pistils,  for  example,  are  want- 
ing in  the  Calendula  officinalis,  and  in  the  Fiola  mira- 
bilis,  there  are  no  anthers. 

6.  Abortive,  the  fecundated  germens  of  which  wither 
before  the  maturity  of  the  fruit ; as  happens  to  the  flo- 
rets in  the  radius  of  the  Helianthus  annuus. 

7.  Monstrous,  when  the  internal  organs  become  pe- 
tals, as  is  the  case  with  full  or  double  flowers. 

Besides  these  distinctions,  Linnaeus’s  favourite  divi- 
sion is  into, 

1.  Aggregate, 

2.  Compound. 

3.  Amentaceous 

4.  Glumose,  or  chaffy,  peculiar  to  the  glasses. 

5.  The  sheathed  flower , the  common  receptacle  of 
which  springs  from  a sheath ; as  in  Arum. 

6.  The  Umbellate. 

7.  The  Cymose.  See  also  Inflorescence. 

II.  A term  used  by  former  chemists  to  whatever  had 
a flower-like  appearance,  especially  if  obtained  by  sub- 
limation, as  flowers  of  sulphur,  benjamin,  zinc,  &c. 

Flos  ferri.  A radiated  variety  of  carbonate  of 
lime. 

FLOSCULUS.  A little  flower.  A term  applied  in 
botany  to  the  small  and  numerous  florets  of  a com- 
pound flower,  which  are  all  sessile  on  a common  undi 
vided  receptacle,  and  enclosed  in  one  contiguous  ca- 
lyx, or  perianth. 

FLOUR.  The  powder  of  the  gramineous  seeds. 

FLOWER.  See  Flos. 

FLOWER-DE-LUCE.  See  Iris  germanica. 

Flowers  of  benjamin.  See  Benioic.  acid. 

FLOYER,  Sir  John,  was  born  at  Hinters,  in  Staf- 
fordshire, about  the  year  1649,  and  graduated  at  Ox- 
ford. He  then  settled  at  Litchfield,  where  his  atten- 
tion and  skill  procured  him  extensive  reputation,  inso- 
much that  he  was  honoured  with  knighthood,  as  a 
reward  for  his  talents.  He  strongly  advocated  the  use 
of  cold  bathing,  particularly  in  chronic  rheumatism, 
and  nervous  disorders : and  he  ascribed  the  increasing 
prevalence  of  consumption  to  the  discontinuance  of 
the  practice  of  baptizing  children  by  immersion.  He 
published  several  works  on  this  and  other  subjects ; 
particularly  an  excellent  treatise  on  the  asthma,  un- 
der which  he  himself  laboured  from  the  time  of  pu- 
berty, notwithstanding  which  he  lived  to  be  an  old 
man.  He  is  said  to  have  been  one  of  the  first  who 
reckoned  the  number  of  pulsations  by  a time-piece. 


FLU  ATE.  Fluas.  A compound  of  the  fluoric  acid 
with  salifiable  bases:  thus,  fluateoflime,  &c. 

FLUCTUA'TION.  Fluctuatio.  A term  used  by 
surgeons,  to  express  the  undulation  of  a fluid ; thus 
when  pus  is  formed  in  an  abscess,  or  when  water  ac- 
cumulates in  the  abdomen,  if  the  abscess  or  abdomen 
be  lightly  pressed  with  the  fingers,  the  motion  of  flue 
tuation  may  be  distinctly  felt. 

FLUELLIN.  See  Antirrhinum  elatine. 

FLUID.  Fluidus.  A fluid  is  that,  the  particles  of 
which  so  little  attract  each  other,  that  w hen  poured 
out,  it  drops  guttatim,  and  adapts  itself  in  every 
respect  to  the  form  of  the  vessel  containing  it. 

The  fluids  of  animal  bodies,  and  particularly  those 
of  the  human  body,  are  something  very  considerable 
in  proportion  to  the  solids ; the  ratio  in  the  adult  being 
as  nine  to  one.  Chaussier  put  a dead  tv>dy  of  120 
pounds  into  an  oven,  and  found  it,  after  many  days’ 
successive  desiccation,  reduced  to  12  pounds.  Bodies 
found,  after  being  buried  for  a long  time  in  the  burning 
sands  of  the  Arabian  deserts,  p relent  an  extraordinary 
diminution  of  weight. 

The  animal  fluids  are  sometimes  contained  in  ves- 
sels, wherein  they  move  with  more  or  less  rapidity ; 
sometimes  in  little  areolae  or  spaces,  where  they  seem 
to  be  kept  in  reserve ; and  at  other  times  they  are 
placed  in  the  great  cavities  where  they  make  only  a 
temporary  stay  of  longer  or  shorter  duration. 

The  fluids  of  the  human  body  are, 

1.  The  blood. 

2.  The  lymph. 

3.  The  perspiratory  or  perspirable  fluids,  which 
comprise  the  liquids  of  cutaneous  transpiration  : the 
transpiration  or  exhalation  of  mucous  membranes,  as 
also  of  the  synovial,  serous,  and  cellular ; of  the  adi- 
pose cells,  the  medullary  membranes,  the  thyroid  and 
thymus  glands,  &c. 

4.  The  follicular  fluid ; the  sebaceous  secretion  ot 
the  skin,  the  cerumen,  the  ropy  matter  from  the  eye- 
lids, the  mucus  from  the  glands  and  follicles  of  that 
name  from  the  tonsils,  the  cardiac  glands,  the  prostate, 
the  vicinity  of  the  anus,  and  some  other  parts. 

5.  The  glandular  fluids ; the  tears,  the  saliva,  the 
pancreatic  fluid,  the  bile,  the  urine,  the  secretion  from 
Cowper’s  glands,  the  semen,  the  milk,  the  liquid  con- 
tained in  the  supra-renal  capsules,  that  of  the  testicles, 
and  of  the  mammae  of  new-born  infants. 

6.  The  chyme  and  the  chyle. 

The  properties  of  fluids,  both  chemical  and  physical, 
are  exceedingly  various.  Many  have  some  analogy  to 
each  other  under  these  two  relations;  but  none  exhibit 
a perfect  resemblance.  The  writers  of  all  ages  have 
attached  a considerable  degree  of  importance  to  their 
methodical  arrangement ; and  according  to  the  doctrine 
then  flourishing  in  the  schools,  they  have  created  dif 
ferent  systems  of  classification.  Thus,  the  ancients, 
who  attributed  much  importance  to  the  four  elements, 
said  that  there  were  four  principal  humours,  the  blood, 
the  lymph,  or  pituita,  the  yellow  bile,  the  black  bile, 
or  atra  bilis ; and  these  four  humours  correspond  to 
the  four  elements,  to  tbs  four  seasons  of  the  year,  to 
the  four  divisions  of  the  day,  and  to  the  four  tempera- 
ments. Afterward,  at  different  periods,  other  divi- 
sions have  been  substituted  to  this  classification  of  the 
ancients.  Thus,  some  have  made  three  classes  of 
liquids : — 1.  the  chyme  and  chyle ; 2.  the  blood ; 3.  the 
humours  emanating  from  the  blood.  Some  authors 
have  been  content  with  forming  two  classes 1.  pri- 
mary, alimentary,  or  useless  fluids;  2.  secondary,  or 
useful.  Consequently,  they  distinguished  them  into — 

1.  Recremcntitious , or  humours  destined  from  then- 
formation  to  the  nourishment  of  the  body. 

2.  Excremcntitious , or  fluids  destined  to  be  thrown 
off  from  the  system ; 

3.  Humours,  which  at  times  participate  in  the  cha- 
racters of  the  two  former  classes,  and  are  therefore 
named  excremento-recrementitious. 

In  later  times,  chemists  have  endeavoured  to  class 
the  humours  according  to  their  intimate  or  component 
nature,  and  thus  they  have  established  albuminous, 
fibrinous,  saponaeccus,  watery,  &c.  fluids. 

FLUOBORATE.  A compound  of  the  fluoboric 
acid  with  a salifiable  basis.  - 

FLUOBORIC  ACID.  Acidum  fluoboricum.  Pro- 
bably a compound  of  fluorine  with  boron.  It  is  a 
gaseous  acid,  and  may  be  obtained  by  heating  in  a 
glass  retort  twelve  parti  of  sulphuric  acid  with  a mix- 


FLU 


FLU 


ture  of  one  part  of  fused  boracic  acid,  and  two  of  fluor- 
spar, reduced  to  a very  fine  powder.  It  must  be  re- 
ceived over  mercury.  It  combines  with  salifiable 
bases,  and  forms  salts  called  fluoborites. 

FLU'OR.  Octohedral  fluor  of  Jameson.  It  is  di- 
vided into  three  sub-species,  compact  fluor,  foliated 
fluor,  and  earthy  fluor.  This  genus  of  mineral  abounds 
in  nature,  formed  by  the  combination  of  the  fluoric 
acid  with  lime.  It  is  called  spur,  because  it  has  the 
sparry  form  and  fracture : fluor,  because  it  melts  very 
readily ; and  vitreous,  because  it  has  the  appearance 
of  glass,  and  may  be  fused  into  glass  of  no  contempti- 
ble appearance. 

Fluor  albus.  See  Leucorrlicca. 

FLUO'RIC  ACID.  (Acidum  fluoricum,  because 
obtained  from  the  fluor-spar.)  Hydro  fluoric  acid. 

“ The  fusible  spar  which  is  generally  distinguished 
by  the  name  of  Derbyshire  spar,  consists  of  calcareous 
earth  in  combination  with  this  acid.  If  the  pure  fluor, 
or  spar,  be  placed  in  a retort  of  lead  or  silver,  with  a 
receiver  of  the  same  metal  adapted,  and  its  weight  of 
sulphuric  acid  be  then  poured  upon  it,  the  fluoric  acid 
will  be  disengaged  by  the  application  of  a moderate 
heat.  This  acid  gas  readily  combines  with  water ; for 
which  purpose  it  is  necessary  that  the  receiver  should 
previously  be  half  filled  with  that  fluid. 

If  the  receiver  be  cooled  with  ice,  and  no  water  put 
in  it,  then  the  condensed  acid  is  an  intensely  active 
liquid.  It  has  the  appearance  of  sulphuric  acid,  but 
is  much  more  volatile,  and  sends  off  white  fumes  when 
exposed  to  air.  Its  specific  gravity  is  only  1.0609.  It 
must  be  examined  with  great  caution,  for  when  ap- 
plied to  the  skin  it  instantly  disorganizes  it,  and  pro- 
duces very  painful  wounds.  When  potassium  is  in- 
troduced into  it,  it  acts  with  intense  energy,  and  pro- 
duces hydrogen  gas  and  a neutral  salt;  when  lime  is 
made  to  act  upon  it,  there  is  a violent  heat  excited, 
water  is  formed,  and  the  same  substance  as  fluor-spar 
is  produced.  With  water  in  a certain  proportion,  its 
density  increases  to  1.25.  When  it  is  dropped  into 
water,  a hissing  noise  is  produced,  with  much  heat, 
and  an  acid  fluid  not  disagreeable  to  the  taste  is  formed 
if  the  water  be  in  sufficient  quantity.  It  instantly 
corrodes  and  dissolves  glass. 

It  appears  extremely  probable,  from  all  the  facts 
known  respecting  the  fluoric  combinations,  that  fluor- 
spar contains  a peculiar  acid  matter ; and  that  this 
acid  matter  is  united  to  lime  in  the  spar,  seems  evident 
from  the  circumstance,  that  gypsum  or  sulphate  of  lime 
is  the  residuum  of  the  distillation  of  fluor-spar  and 
sulphuric  acid.  The  results  of  experiments  on  fluor- 
spar have  been  differently  stated  by  chemists. 

Some  have  considered  fluoric  acid  as  a compound  of 
fluorine  with  hydrogen,  but  it  seems  on  the  whole  to  be 
the  analogy  of  chlorine.  But  the  analogy  is  incom- 
plete. Certainly  it  is  consonant  to  the  true  logic  of 
chemical  science  to  regard  chlorine  as  a simple  body, 
since  every  attempt  to  resolve  it  into  simpler  forms  of 
matter  has  failed.  But  fluorine  has  not  been  exhibited 
in  an  insulated  state  like  chlorine ; and  here  therefore 
the  analogy  does  not  hold. 

The  marvellous  activity  of  fluoric  acid  may  be  in- 
ferred from  the  following  remarks  of  Sir  H.  Davy, 
from  which  also  may  be  estimated  in  some  measure 
the  prodigious  difficulty  attending  refined  investigations 
on  this  extraordinary  substance. 

‘ I undertook  the  experiment  of  electrising  pure  liquid 
fluoric  acid  vvith  considerable  interest,  as  it  seemed  to 
offer  the  most  probable  method  of  ascertaining  its  real 
nature ; but  considerable  difficulties  occurred  in  exe- 
cuting the  process.  The  liquid  fluoric  acid  immediately 
destroys  glass,  and  all  animal  and  vegetable  substances ; 
it  acts  on  all  bodies  containing  metallic  oxides  ; and  I 
know  of  no  substances  which  are  not  rapidly  dissolved 
or  decomposed  by  it,  except  metals,  charcoal,  phospho- 
rus, sulphur,  and  certain  combinations  of  chlorine.  I 
attempted  to  make  tubes  of  sulphur,  of  muriates  of 
lead,  and  of  copper  containing  metallic  wires,  by  which 
it  might  be  electrised,  but  without  success.  I suc- 
ceeded, however,  in  boring  a piece  of  horn  silver  in 
such  a manner  that  I was  able  to  cement  a platina  wire 
into  it  by  means  of  a spirit  lamp ; and  by  inverting 
this  in  a tray  of  platina,  filled  with  liquid  fluoric  acid, 

I contrived  to  submit  the  fluid  to  the  agency  of  elec- 
tricity in  such  a manner,  that,  in  successive  experi- 
ments, it  was  possible  to  collect  any  elastic  fluid  that 
might  be  produced.  Operating  in  this  way  with  a very 


weak  voltaic  power,  and  keeping  the  apparatus  cool 
by  a freezing  mixture,  I ascertained  that  the  platina 
wire  at  the  positive  pole  rapidly  corroded,  and  became 
covered  with  a chocolate  powder ; gaseous  matter  sepa 
rated  at  the  negative  pole,  which  I could  never  obtain 
in  sufficient  quantities  to  analyze  with  accuracy,  but  it 
inflamed  like  hydrogen.  No  other  inflammable  matter 
was  produced  when  the  acid  was  pure.’ 

If  instead  of  being  distilled  in  metallic  vessels,  the 
mixture  of  fluor-spar  and  oil  of  vitriol  be  distilled  in 
glass  vessels,  little  of  the  corrosive  liquid  will  be  ob- 
tained; but  the  glass  will  be  acted  upon,  and  a peculiar 
gaseous  substance  will  be  produced,  which  must  be 
collected  over  mercury.  The  best  mode  of  procuring 
this  gaseous  body  is  to  mix  the  fluor-spar  with  pounded 
glass  or  quartz ; and  in  this  case  the  glass  retort  may 
be  preserved  from  corrosion,  and  the  gas  obtained  in 
greater  quantities.  This  gas,  which  is  called  silicated 
fluoric  gas,  is  possessed  of  very  extraordinary  pro- 
perties. 

It  is  very  heavy;  about  48  times  denser  than  hydro- 
gen. When  brought  into  contact  with  water,  it  in- 
stantly deposites  a white  gelatinous  substance,  which  is 
hydrate  of  silica;  it  produces  white  fumes  when  suf- 
fered to  pass  into  the  atmosphere.  It  is  not  affected 
by  any  of  the  common  combustible  bodies ; but  when 
potassium  is  strongly  heated  in  it,  it  takes  fire  and  burns 
with  a deep  red  light ; the  gas  is  absorbed,  and  a fawn- 
coloured  substance  is  formed,  which  yields  alkali  to 
water  with  slight  effervescence,  and  contains  a com- 
bustible body.  The  washings  afford  potassa,  and  a 
salt,  from  which  the  strong  acid  fluid  previously 
described,  may  be  separated  by  sulphuric  acid. 

If,  instead  of  glass  or  silica,  the  floor  spar  be  mixed 
with  dry  vitreous  boracic  acid,  and  distilled  in  a glass 
vessel  with  sulphuric  acid,  the  proportions  being  one 
part  boracic  acid,  two  fluor-spar,  and  twelve  oil  of 
vitriol,  the  gaseous  substance  formed  is  of  a different 
kind,  and  is  called  the  fluoboric  gas.  It  is  colourless ; 
its  smell  is  pungent,  and  resembles  that  of  muriatic 
acid ; it  cannot  be  breathed  without  suffocation ; it  ex- 
tinguishes combustion ; and  reddens  strongly  the  tinc- 
ture of  turnsol.  It  has  no  manner  of  action  on  glass, 
but  a very  powerful  one  on  vegetable  and  animal 
matter.  It  attacks  them  with  as  much  force  as  con- 
centrated sulphuric  acid,  and  appears  to  operate  on  these 
bodies  by  the  production  of  water;  for  while  it  car- 
bonizes them,  or  evolves  carbon,  they  may  be  touched 
without  any  risk  of  burning.  Exposed  to  a high  tem- 
perature, it  is  not  decomposed  ; it  is  condensed  by  cold 
without  changing  its  form.  When  it  is  put  in  contact 
with  oxygen,  or  air,  either  at  a high  or  low  temperature, 
it  experiences  no  change,  except  seizing,  at  ordinary 
temperatures,  the  moisture  which  these  gases  contain 
It  becomes  in  consequence  a liquid  which  emits  ex- 
tremely dense  vapours.  It  operates  in  the  same  way 
with  all  the  gases  which  contain  hygrometric  water. 
However  little  they  may  contain,  it  occasions  in  them 
very  perceptible  vapours.  It  may  hence  be  employed 
with  advantage  to  show  whether  or  not  a gas  contains 
moisture. 

No  combustible  body,  simple  or  compound,  attacks 
fluoboric  gas,  if  we  except  the  alkaline  metals.  Potas- 
sium and  sodium,  with  the  aid  of  heat,  burn  in  this 
gas,  almost  as  brilliantly  as  in  oxygen.  Boron  and 
fiuate  of  potassa  are  the  products  of  this  decomposi- 
tion. It  might  hence  be  inferred,  that  the  metal  seizes 
the  oxygen  of  the  boracic  acid,  sets  the  boron  at  liberty, 
and  is  itself  oxidized  and  combined  with  the  fluoric 
acid.  According  to  Sir  H.  Davy’s  views,  the  fluoboric 
gas  being  g.  compound  of  fluorine  and  boron,  the  potas- 
sium unites  to  the  former,  giving  rise  to  the  fluoride  of 
potassium,  while  the  boron  remains  disengaged. 

Fluoboric  gas  is  very  soluble  in  water.  Dr.  John - 
Davy  says,  water  can  combine  with  700  times  its  own 
volume,  or  twice  its  weight,  at  the  ordinary  temperature 
and  pressure  of  the  air.  The  liquid  lias  a specific 
gravity  of  1.770.  If  a bottle  containing  this  gas  be  un- 
corked underwater,  the  liquid  will  rush  In  and  fill  it 
with  explosive  violence.  Water  saturated  with  thi$ 
gas  is  limpid,  fuming,  and  very  caustic.  By  heat  about 
one-fifth  of  the  absorbed  gas  may  be  expelled;  but  it 
is  impossible  to  abstract  more.  It  then  resembles  con- 
centrated sulphuric  acid,  and  boils  at  a temperature 
considerably  above  212°.  It  afterward  condenses  al- 
together, in  stria;,  although  it  contains  still  a very  larg 
quantity  of  gas.  It  unites  with  the  bases  forming  salt 


PON 


FOE 

called  fluoborates,  none  of  which  has  been  applied  to 
any  use. 

The  2d  part  of  the  Phil.  Transactions,  for  1812,  con- 
tains an  excellent  paper  by  Dr.  John  Davy  on  fluosili- 
cic  and  fluoboric  gases,  and  the  combinations  of  the 
latter  with  ammoniacal  gas.  When  united  in  equal 
volumes,  a pulverulent  salt  is  formed ; a second  vo- 
lume of  ammonia,  however,  gives  a liquid  compound ; 
and  a third  of  ammonia,  which  is  the  limit  of  combina- 
tion, affords  still  a liquid ; both  of  them  curious  on 
many  accounts.  ‘ They  are,’  says  he,  ‘ the  first  salts 
that  have  been  observed  liquid  at  the  common  temper- 
ature of  the  atmosphere.  And  they  are  additional 
facts  in  support  of  the  doctrine  of  definite  proportions, 
and  of  the  relation  of  volumes.’  The  fluosiiicic  acid 
also  unites  to  bases  forming  fluosilicates. 

From  the  remarkable  property  fluoric  acid  possesses 
of  eorroding  glass,  it  has  been  employed  for  etching  on 
it,  both  in  the  gaseous  state,  and  combined  with  water ; 
and  an  ingenious  apparatus  for  this  purpose  is  given 
by  Mr.  Richard  Knight,  in  the  Philosophical  Maga- 
zine, vol.  xvii.  p.  357. 

Of  the  combinations  of  this  acid  with  most  of  the 
bases,  little  is  known. 

Beside  the  fluor  spar  and  cryolite,  in  which  it  is 
abundant,  fluoric  acid  has  been  detected  in  the  topaz ; 
in  wavelite,  in  which,  however,  it  is  not  rendered  sen- 
sible by  sulphuric  acid  ; and  in  fossil  teeth  and  fossil 
ivory,  though  it  is  not  found  in  either  of  these  in 
their  natural  state.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet- 

Fluoric  acid , silicated.  See  Fluoric  acid. 

FLUORIDE.  A combination  of  fluorine  with  a 
salifiable  basis. 

FLUORINE.  The  imaginary  radical  of  fluoric 
acid. 

FLUOSILICIC  ACID.  See  Fluoric  add. 

FLUX.  1.  This  word  is  often  employed  for  dysen- 
teria. 

2.  A general  term  made  use  of  to  denote  any  sub- 
stance or  mixture  added  to  assist  the  fusion  of  metals. 

FLUXION.  Fluxio.  A term  mostly  applied  by 
chemists,  to  signify  the  change  of  n.etals,  or  other  bo- 
dies, from  the  solid  into  the  fluid  state,  by  the  applica- 
tion of  heat.  See  Fusion. 

FLY.  Musca. 

Fly , Spanish.  See  Cantharis. 

FO'CILE.  The  ulna  and  the  radius  are  occasion- 
ally denominated  by  the  barbarous  appellations  of 
focile  majus  and  minus ; the  tibia  and  fibula  in  the 
leg  are  also  so  called. 

Fo'cus.  A lobe  of  the  liver. 

Fodi'na.  (From  fodio , to  dig.)  A quarry.  The 
labyrinth  of  the  ear. 

Fcenicula'tum  lignum.  A name  for  sassafras. 

FCENI'CULUM.  ( Quasi  fanum  oculorum,  the 
hay  or  herb  good  for  the  sight ; so  called  because  it  is 
thought  good  for  the  eyes.)  Fennel.  See  Anethum. 

F<eniculum  alpinum.  The  herb  spignel.  See 
JEthusa  meum. 

F<eniculum  annuum.  Royal  cummin. 

Fceniculum  aquaticum.  See  Phellandrium  aqua- 
ticum. 

Fceniculum  dulce.  See  Anethum  fceniculum. 

Fceniculum  germanicum.  See  Anethum  fani- 
culum. 

Fceniculum  marinum.  Samphire. 

Fceniculum  orientale.  See  Cuminum. 

Fceniculum  porcinum.  See  Peucedanum  officinale. 

Fceniculum  sinense.  Aniseed. 

Fceniculum  sylvestre.  Bastard  spignel.  See 
Scseli  montanum , of  Linnaius. 

Fceniculum  tortuosum.  French  liartvfort.  See 
Seseli  tortuosum. 

Fceniculum  vulgare.  See  Anethum  fceniculum. 

FCENUM.  (Famun,  i.  n.  hay.)  Hay. 

Fcenum  camelorum.  See  Juncus  odoratus. 

Fcenum  grjECUM.  See  Trigonella  fcenum  gr cecum. 

Fcenum  sylvestre.  Wild  fenugreek. 

FOESIUS,  Anutius,  was  born  at  Mentz,  in  1528, 
and  received  his  education  at  Paris,  where  he  imbibed 
a strong  predilection  for  the  Greek  language,  and  par- 
ticularly the  works  of  Hippocrates.  Returning  to  his 
native  place  about  the  age  of  28,  his  talents  soon  pro- 
cured him  such  extensive  reputation,  that  several 
princes  endeavoured  to  allure  him  to  their  respective 
courts,  but  without  success.  The  practice  of  his  pro- 
fession, instead  of  weakening  his  attachment  to  Hip- 


pocrates, only  stimulated  him  to  a more  profound 
study  of  his  writings ; where  he  found  the  most  cor- 
rect delineations  of  diseases,  and  the  most  important 
observations  concerning  them,  made  about  two  thou- 
sand years  before.  He  first  published  an  excellent 
Latin  translation  and  commentary  on  his  second  book 
of  Epidemics  : then  an  explanation  of  the  terms  used 
by  him,  under  the  title  of  “ CEconomia  Hippocratis;” 
and,  lastly,  at  the  solicitation  of  the  chief  physicians 
of  Europe,  he  undertook  a complete  correct  edition  of 
his  works,  with  an  interpretation  and  notes,  which  he 
accomplished  in  six  years,  in  such  a manner  as  to  rank 
him  among  the  ablest  interpreters  of  the  ancients.  He 
was  also  author  of  a Pharmacopoeia  for  his  native 
city ; and  died  in  1595. 

Fceta'bulum.  (From  fateo,  to  become  putrid.)  1. 
An  encysted  abscess. 

2.  A foul  ulcer. 

FCE'TUS.  (From  feo,  to  bring  forth,  according  to 
Voasius.)  Epicyema;  Epigonion.  The  child  en- 
closed in  the  uterus  of  its  mother,  is  called  a foetus 
from  the  fifth  month  after  pregnancy  until  the  time  of 
its  birth.  See  Ovum. 

Foliata  terra.  1.  Sulphur. 

2.  An  old  name  of  the  acetate  of  potassa. 

FOLIATIO.  (From  folium,  a leaf.)  The  manner 
in  which  leaves  are  folded  up  in  their  buds.  See  Ver 
natio. 

FOLIA'TUS.  (From  its  resemblance  to  folium,  a 
leaf.)  Foliate,  leafy. 

FOLICULUS.  (Diminutive  of  follis,  a leather 
bag.)  A small  follicle. 

FOLIOLUM.  A leaflet  or  little  leaf. 

FO'LIUM.  ( Folium , i.  n. ; from  cpvXXov , the  leaf 
of  a tree.)  See  Leaf. 

Folium  orientale.  See  Cassia  senna. 

FOLLICLE.  (Folliculus ; diminutive  of  follis,  a 
bag.)  A small  bag ; applied  to  glands.  See  Folli- 
culose. 

FOLLICULOSE.  ( Folliculosus  ; from  folliculus, 
a little  bag.)  A term  applied  to  a simple  gland  or  fol- 
licle. One  of  the  most  simple  species  of  gland,  con- 
sisting merely  of  a hollow  vascular  membrane  or  fol- 
licle, and  an  excretory  duct ; such  are  the  muciparous 
glands,  the  sebaceous,  &c. 

FOLLI'CULUS.  (Diminutive  of  follis,  a bag.) 
1.  A little  bag.  See  Folliculose. 

2.  In  botany,  a follicle  is  a one-valved  pericarp,  or 
seed-vessel.  It  has  one  cell,  and  bursts  lengthwise, 
and  bears  the  seeds  on  or  near  its  edges,  or  on  a recep- 
tacle parallel  therewith. 

From  the  adhesion  of  the  seeds  it  is  distinguished 
into, 

1.  Follicle,  with  a partition,  when  the  seeds  adhere 
to  an  intermediate  dissepiment. 

2.  Follicle,  without  a partition,  when  the  seeds  ad- 
here to  the  internal  sides  only. 

From  the  number  of  seeds, 

1.  Monosperm  follicle  ; as  in  Orontium. 

2.  Poly  sperm ; as  in  Asclepias  syriaca. 

From  the  direction  into, 

1.  Erect ; as  in  Vinca  and  JVerium. 

2.  Refected;  as  in  Plumeria. 

3.  Horizontal ; as  in  Cameraria. 

Folliculis  pellis.  The  gall-bladder. 

FOMENTATION.  Fomentatio.  A sort  of  partial 

bathing,  by  applying  hot  flannels  to  any  part,  dipped 
in  medicated  decoctions,  whereby  steams  are  commu- 
nicated to  the  parts,  their  vessels  are  relaxed,  and  their 
morbid  action  sometimes  removed 

Fomes  ventriculi.  Hypochbndriacism. 

FO'MITES.  A term  mostly  applied  to  substances 
imbued  with  contagion. 

FONS.  A fountain. 

Fons  pulsatilis.  See  Fontanella. 

FONTANE'LLA.  (Diminutive  of  fons , a foun- 
tain.) Fons  pulsatilis.  The  parietal  bones  and  the 
frontal  do  not  coalesce  until  the  third  year  after  birth, 
so  that,  before  this  period,  there  is  an  obvious  inter 
stice,  commonly  called  mould,  and  scientifically  the 
fontanel,  or  fons  pulsatilis.  There  is  also  a less 
space,  occasionally,  between  the  occipital  and  parietal 
bones,  termed  the  posterior  fontanel.  These  spares 
between  the  bones  are  filled  up  by  the  dura  mater,  pe- 
ricranium, and  external  integuments,  so  that,  during 
birth,  the  size  of  the  head  may  be  lessened ; for,  at 
that  time,  the  bones  of  the  head,  upon  the  superior 


FOll 


FOR 


part,  are  not  only  pressed  nearer  to  each  other,  but 
-ojhey  frequently  lap  over  one  another,  in  order  to  dimi- 
‘ Offish  the  size  during  the  passage  of  the  head  through 
the  pelvis. 

FONTI'CULUS.  (Diminutive  of/ons.)  An  issue. 
An  artificial  ulcer  formed  in  any  part,  and  kept  dis- 
charging, by  introducing  daily  a pea,  covered  with  any 
digestive  ointment. 

FORA'MEN.  (From  foro , to  pierce.)  A little 
opening. 

Foramen  ccecum.  1.  A single  opening  in  the  basis 
of  the  cranium  between  the  ethmoid  and  the  frontal 
bone,  that  gives  exit  to  a small  vein. 

2.  The  name  of  a hole  in  the  middle  of  the  tongue. 

Foramen  lacerum  in  basi  cranii.  A foramina 
in  the  basis  of  the  cranium,  through  which  the  internal 
jugular  vein,  and  the  eighth  pair  and  accessary  nerves 
pass. 

Foramen  lacerum  orbitale  superius.  A large 
opening  between  the  greater  and  less  wing  of  the  sphe- 
noid bone  on  each  side,  through  which  the  third, 
fourth,  first  branch  of  the  fifth,  and  the  sixth  pair  of 
nerves,  and  the  ophthalmic  artery  pass. 

Foramen  opticum.  The  hole  transmitting  the 
optic  nerve. 

Foramen  ovale.  The  opening  between  the  two 
auricles  of  the  heart  of  the  foetus.  See  also  Innomina- 
tuvi  os. 

Foramen  of  Winslow.  An  opening  in  the  omen- 
tum. See  Omentum. 

Forami'nulum  os.  The  ethmoid  bone. 

Force , vital.  See  Vis  vitce. 

FO'RCEPS.  ( Forceps , cipis.  f.;  quasi  ferriceps , 
as  being  the  iron  with  which  we  seize  any  thing  hot, 
from  ferrum,  iron,  and  cavio , to  take.)  Pincers.  A 
surgical  instrument  with  which  extraneous  bodies,  or 
other  substances,  are  extracted.  Also  an  instrument 
occasionally  used  by  men  midwives  to  bring  the  head 
of  the  foetus  through  the  pelvis. 

FORDYCE,  George,  was  born  at  Aberdeen,  in 
1736,  after  the  death  of  his  father,  and  his  mother 
having  married  again,  he  was  sent  to  Fouran,  when 
about  two  years  old,  where  he  received  his  school  edu- 
cation; and  thence  returned  to  Aberdeen,  where  he 
was  made  master  of  arts,  when  only  fourteen.  Having 
evinced  an  inclination  to  medicine,  he  was  soon  after 
sent  to  his  uncle,  Dr.  John  Fordyce,  who  practised  at 
Uppingham,  with  whom  he  remained  several  years. 
He  then  studied  at  Edinburgh,  where  he  graduated  in 
1758,  having  defended  a thesis  on  catarrh : after  which 
he  went  to  Leyden,  principally  to  improve  himself  in 
anatomy  under  Albinus.  The  following  year  he  set- 
tled in  London,  and  began  to  give  lectures  on  chemis- 
try ; and,  in  1764,  he  undertook  also  to  teach  the  prac- 
tice of  physic,  and  the  materia  medica : these  subjects 
occupied  him  nearly  three  hours’  every  morning,  ex- 
cept on  Sunday,  for  about  thirty  years  successively. 
In  1770,  he  was  chosen  physician  to  St.  Thomas’s  hos- 
pital, and,  six  years  after,  a Fellow  of  the  Royal  So- 
ciety : also,  in  1787,  he  was  admitted  a Fellow  of  the 
College  of  Physicians;  having  been  a licentiate  for 
twenty-two  years  before.  In  1793,  he  assisted  in 
forming  a small  Society  for  the  improvement  of  Medi- 
cal and  Chirurgical  Knowledge,  which  has  since  pub- 
lished three  volumes  of  their  Transactions.  He  died 
in  1802.  The  countenance  of  Dr.  Fordyce  was  by  no 
means  expressive  of  his  powers  of  mind:  he  was  ra- 
ther negligent  of  his  dress,  and  not  sufficiently  pleasing 
in  his  manners,  to  enable  him  to  get  into  very  exten- 
sive practice : besides,  he  was  too  fond  of  the  plea- 
sures of  society,  to  which  he  often  sacrificed  the  hours 
that  should  have  been  dedicated  to  sleep.  The  vigour 
of  his  constitution  long  resisted  these  irregularities ; 
but  at  length  they  brought  on  the  gout,  which  was  fol- 
lowed by  dropsy,  and  this  terminated  his  existence. 
He  possessed  a remarkably  strong  memory,  which  ena- 
bled him  to  lecture  without,  any  notes,  and  to  compose 
his  works  for  publication  without  referring  to  authors, 
which  he  had  before  read ; and  his  having  relied  too 
much  on  this  faculty  may  help  to  explain  the  want  of 
method  and  elegance,  and  the  many  inaccuracies, 
which  appear  in  his  writings.  He  was  author  of  seve- 
ral publications  on  medical  and  philosophical  subjects; 
many  of  which  are  to  be  found  in  the  transactions  of 
the  societies  to  which  he  belonged.  The  most  esteem- 
ed, and  that  on  which  he  employed  most  labour,  was 
a scries  of  “ Dissertations  on  Fever ;”  four  of  them  ap- 


peared during  his  life,  and  another  was  left  in  manu- 
script, which  has  since  been  printed.  His  Treatise  on 
Digestion,  was  read  originally  as  the  Gulstonian  Lec- 
ture before  the  College  of  Physicians.  He  was  the  pro- 
jector of  the  Experiments  in  heated  rooms,  of  which 
Sir  Charles  Blagden  gave  an  account. 

FORDYCE,  Sir  William,  was  born  at  Aberdeen  i& 
1724.  At  the  age  of  eighteen,  having  acquired  a com- 
petent knowledge  of  physic  and  surgery,  he  went  into 
the  army.  The  support  of  the  friends,  whom  he  there- 
procured,  together  with  his  own  merit,  soon  brought 
him  into  great  practice,  when  he  afterward  settled  iu 
London.  The  wealth,  which  he  thus  acquired,  was 
liberally  employed  in  aots  of  friendship,  and  in  sup- 
porting useful  projects;  though  he  had  some  very 
severe  losses.  He  wrote  a Treatise  on  Fevers,  and  on 
the  Ulcerated  Sore  Throat ; on  his  entering  into  prac- 
tice, he  likewise  published  on  the  Venereal  Disease. 
He  died  after  a long  illness  in  1792. 

FORENSIC.  Forensis.  Belonging  to  the  forum, 
or  courts  of  law : hence  forensic  medicine  is  that  which 
is  connected  with  a legal  inquiry  as  to  the  cause  of  de- 
fect, disease,  or  death. 

FORESKIN.  See  Prepuce 

FORESTUS,  or  Van  Forest,  Peter,  was  born  at 
Alcmaer,  in  1522.  He  was  sent  to  Louvain  to  study 
the  law,  but  soon  showed  a strong  inclination  to  medi- 
cine. He  therefore  cultivated  this  science  at  different 
universities  in  Italy,  and  afterward  at  Paris ; but  he 
graduated  at  Bologna.  After  being  twelve  years  set- 
tled in  his  native  town,  he  was  invited  to  Delft,  which 
was  ravaged  by  a contagious  epidemic ; and  being  ex- 
tremely successful  in  the  treatment  of  this,  he  received 
a considerable  pension,  and  was  retained  as  the  public 
physician  for  nearly  thirty  years.  In  1575,  he  was  pre- 
vailed upon  to  give  the  first  lecture  on  Medicine  at  the 
opening  of  the  University  of  Leyden.  He  spent  the 
latter  part  of  his  life  in  his  native  city,  where  he  died 
in  1597.  He  was  a very  diligent  observer  of  diseases, 
and  showed  often  great  judgment  in  anticipating  the 
result,  or  in  treating  them  successfully.  He  published 
at  different  periods  six  volumes  of  Medical  and  Sur- 
gical Cases ; to  one  of  which  was  added  a Disserta- 
tion, exposing  the  fallacy  and  absurdity  of  pretending 
to  judge  of  every  thing  by  the  urine.  Boerhaave  has 
highly  commended  his  writings,  which  have  been  often 
reprinted. 

[Formations,  mineral.  “ The  word  Formation 
may  signify  a single  mass  of  one  kind  of  rock,  more 
or  less  extensive,  or  a collection  of  mineral  substances, 
formed  by  the  same  agent,  under  the  same  or  similar 
circumstances ; or  it  may  convey  the  idea,  that  certain 
masses  or  collections  of  minerals  were  formed  not  only 
by  the  same  agent,  but  also  at  the  same  time.  In  this 
latter  sense,  indeed,  the  term  is  almost  always  em- 
ployed. The  agent  and  time  are  to  be  determined  by 
a careful  examination  of  the  external  and  internal 
relations  of  the  whole  formation.” — Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

FO'RMIATE.  Formias.  A compound  produced 
by  the  union  of  the  formic  acid  with  a salifiable  basis : 
thus,  formiate  of  ammonia , &c. 

Formic  acid.  See  Formica  rufa. 

FORMI'CA.  ( Formica , ce.  f. ; quod  feral  micas. 
because  of  his  diligence  in  collecting  small  particles  of 
provision  together.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  insects.  The  ant  or  pis- 
mire. See  Formica  rufa. 

2.  The  name  of  a black  wart  with  a broad  base,  and 
cleft  superficies,  because  the  pain  attending  it  resem- 
bles the  biting  of  an  ant. 

3.  A varicose  tumour  on  the  anus  and  glans  penis. 

Formica  miliaris.  Any  herpetic  eruption. 

Formica  rufa.  The  ant  or  pismire.  This  indus- 
trious little  insect  contains  an  acid  juice,  and  gross  oil, 
which  were  supposed  to  possess  aphrodisiac  virtues. 
The  chrysalides  of  this  animal  are  said  to  be  diuretic 
and  carminative,  and  by  some  recommended  in  the 
cure  of  dropsy. 

The  ant  also  furnishes  an  acid  called  the  formic, 
which  it  has  been  long  known  to  contain,  and  occa- 
sionally to  emit.  It  may  be  obtained,  either  by  simple 
distillation,  or  by  infusion  of  them  in  boiling  water, 
and  subsequent  distillation  of  as  much  of  the  water 
as  can  be  brought  over  without  burning  the  residue. 
After  this  it  may  be  purified  by  repeated  rectifications, 
or  by  boiling  to  separate  the  impurities ; or  after  recti- 
fication it  may  be  concentrated  by  frost. 


3C7 


FOT 


FRA 


This  acid  has  a very  sour  taste,  and  continues  liquid 
even  at  very  low  temperatures.  Its  specific  gravity  is 
1.1168  at  68°,  which  is  much  denser  than  acetic  acid 
ever  is. 

Dobereiner  has  recently  succeeded  in  forming  this 
acid  artificially.  When  a mixture  of  tartaric  acid,  or 
of  cream  of  tartar,  black  oxide  of  magnesia  and  water 
is  heated,  a tumultuous  action  ensues,  carbonic  acid 
is  evolved,  and  a liquid  acid  distils  over,  which,  on 
superficial  examination,  was  mistaken  for  acetic  acid, 
but  which  now  proves  to  be  formic  acid.  This  acid, 
mixed  with  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  is  at  common 
temperatures  converted  into  water  and  carbonic  oxide ; 
nitrate  of  silver  or  of  mercury  converts  it,  when  gently 
heated,  into  carbonic  acid,  the  oxides  being  at  the  same 
time  reduced  to  the  metallic  state.  With  barytes,  ox- 
ide of  lead,  and  oxide  of  copper,  it  produces  compounds, 
having  all  the  properties  of  the  genuine  formiates  of 
these  metals.  If  a portion  of  sulphuric  acid  be  em- 
ployed in  the  above  process,  the  tartaric  acid  is  resolved 
entirely  into  carbonic  acid,  water,  and  formic  acid ; 
and  the  product  of  the  latter  is  much  increased.  The 
best  proportions  are,  two  parts  tartaric  acid,  five  per- 
oxide of  manganese,  and  five  sulphuric  acid  diluted 
with  about  twice  its  weight  in  water. 

Fo'rmix.  See  Herpes  exedens. 

FO'RMULA.  (Diminutive  of  forma,  a form.)  A 
little  form  of  prescriptions,  such  as  physicians  direct  in 
extemporaneous  practice,  in  distinction  from  the  greater 
forms  in  pharmacopoeias,  &c. 

Fo  rnax.  A furnace. 

FORJNICIFORMIS.  Vaulted.  Applied  to  the  nec- 
tary of  some  plants ; as  the  Symphytum  officinale , &c. 
See  Nectar  turn. 

FO'RNIX.  ( Fornix , an  arch  or  vault.)  A part  of 
the  corpus  callosum  in  the  brain  is  so  called,  because, 
if  viewed  in  a particular  direction,  it  has  some  resem- 
blance to  the  arch  of  an  ancient  vault.  It  is  the  me- 
dullary body,  composed  of  two  anterior  and  two  pos- 
terior crura,  situated  at  the  bottom  and  inside  of  the 
lateral  ventricle  over  the  third  ventricle,  and  below 
the  septum  lucidutn. 

FO'SSA.  (From  fodio,  to  dig.)  Fovea.  A little 
depression  or  sinus.  The  pudendum  muliebre. 

Fossa  amynt^e.  A double-headed  roller  for  the 
face. 

Fossa  magna.  1.  The  great  groove  of  the  ear. 

2.  The  pudendum  muliebre. 

Fossa  navicularis.  1.  The  cavity  at  the  bottom 
of  the  entrance  of  the  pudendum  muliebre. 

2.  The  great  groove  of  the  ear. 

Fossa  ovalis.  The  depression  in  the  right  auricle 
of  the  human  heart,  which  in  the  foetus  opened  into 
the  other  auricle,  forming  the  foramen  ovale. 

Fossa  pituitaria.  The  depression  in  the  sella 
turcica  of  the  sphenoid  bone. 

FO'SSIL.  (Fossilis ; from  fodio,  to  dig.)  Any 
thing  dug  out  of  the  earth. 

Fossil  copal.  Highgate  resin.  A semi-transpa- 
rent, brittle,  resinous  substance,  of  a yellowish-brown 
colour ; found  in  the  bed  of  blue  clay  at  Highgate,  near 
London. 

Fo'ssilus.  The  bone  of  the  leg. 

FOTIIERGILL,  John,  was  horn  in  Yorkshire,  in 
1712,  of  a respectable  Quaker  family..  After  passing 
through  an  apprenticeship  to  an  apothecary,  he  went 
to  Edinburgh,  where  he  graduated  at  the  age  of  twen- 
ty-four, taking  for  his  inaugural  thesis  the  use  of 
emetics.  He  then  studied  for  two  years  at  St.  Thomas’s 
Hospital,  and  after  an  excursion  to  the  continent,  set- 
tled in  London  in  1740,  and  six  years  after  became  a 
licentiate.  His  practice  was  for  some  time  chiefly  gra- 
tuitous ; but  his  “Account  of  the  Putrid  Sore  Throat,” 
published  in  1748,  brought  him  speedily  into  reputa- 
tion. He  was  successively  elected  a Fellow  of  the 
College  of  Physicians  at  Edinburgh,  of  the  Royal  So- 
ciety of  London,  and  of  some  other  societies  abroad. 
His  early  partiality  to  botany  induced  him,  as  his  prac- 
tice increased,  to  purchase  a large  piece  of  ground  for 
the  cultivation  of  rare  and  valuable  plants,  in  which 
he  spared  no  expense ; neither  did  he  neglect  other  de- 
partments of  natural  history.  He  was  also  an  active 
and  liberal  promoter  of  many  successful  schemes  for 
the  public  benefit ; and  particularly  in  instituting  the 
school  at  Ackworth  in  Yorkshire.  He  was  of  a rather 
delicate  constitution,  but  a steady  temperance  pre- 
served his  health,  till  in  1778  he  had  an  attack  of  a 


suppression  of  urine,  occasioned  by  a disease  of  the 
prostate  gland  ; which,  returning  two  years  after,  soon 
put  a period  to  his  existence.  He  had  a quick  and 
comprehensive  understanding;  and  his  pleasing  ad- 
dress procured  him  general  confidence,  which  his  dis- 
cretion was  not  apt  to  forfeit  afterward.  Besides  the 
works  already  noticed,  several  papers'of  Dr.  Fothergill 
were  printed  in  the  Philosophical  Transactions,  and 
in  the  Medical  Observations  and  Inquiries:  he  also 
sent  several  communications  to  the  Gentleman’s  Maga- 
zine, and  other  periodical  publications. 

FO'TUS.  ( Fotus , us.  m.)  See  Fomentation. 

FO  VEA.  (From  fodio , to  dig.)  1.  A little  de 
pression. 

2.  The  pudendum  muliebre. 

3.  A partial  sweating-bath. 

FOVEATUS.  Having  a little  depression,  or  pit. 
Applied  to  the  nectary  of  plants.  See  Nectarium. 

FOX-GLOVE.  See  Digitalis. 

Fox-glove , Eastern.  See  Sesamum  orientale. 

FRACASTOR1US,  Hieronymus,  was  born  at  Ve- 
rona, in  1483.  He  made  a rapid  progress  in  his  studies, 
and  attained  early  considerable  excellence  as  a poet, 
philosopher,  and  astronomer.  He  was  also  much 
valued  as  a physician,  particularly  by  the  general  of 
the  Venetian  army,  whom  he  attended  during  several 
campaigns:  but  on  his  dying,  in  1515,' Fracastorius 
returned  to  his  native  place.  He  corresponded  with 
most  of  the  great  men  of  his  age,  especially  with  Car- 
dinal Bembo,  to  whom  he  dedicated  his  poem,  “ Sy- 
philis which  was  thought  worthy  of  comparison 
with  the  Georgies  of  Virgil  by  some  of  the  best  judges. 
He  died  in  1553;  and  a statue  was  erected  to  him  by 
the  town  of  Verona.  He  published  also  on  Contagious 
Diseases,  and  several  other  Medical  and  Philosophical 
Subjects. 

FRA'CTURE.  (Fractura ; from  frango,  to  break.) 
Catagrna;  Clasis  ; Clasma;  Jigmc.  A solution  of  a 
bone  into  two  or  more  fragments.  A simple  fracture 
is  when  the  bone  only  is  divided.  A r.ornpound  frac- 
ture is  a division  of  the  bone,  with  a laceration  of  the 
integuments,  the  bone  mostly  protruding.  A fracture 
is  also  termed  transverse,  oblique,  &c.  according  to  its 
direction. 

FRAS'NULUM.  (Diminutive  of  freenum,  a bridle.) 
The  cutaneous  fold  under  the  apex  of  the  tongue,  that 
connects  the  tongue  to  the  infralingual  cavity.  It  is 
sometimes,  in  infancy,  so  short  as  to  prevent  the 
child  from  sucking,  when  it  is  necessary  to  cut  it, 
in  order  to  give  more  room  for  the  motion  of  the  tongue. 

FR^E'NUM.  • The  membraneous  fold  which  con- 
lects  the  prepuce  to  the  inferior  part  of  the  glans 
penis. 

FRA'GARIA.  (From  fragro,  to  smell  sweet.)  The 
strawberry.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Poly- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  strawberry.  See 

Fragaria  vesca. 

Fraoaria  sterilis.  Barren  strawberry.  Astrin 
gent,  seldom  used. 

Fragaria  vesca.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
strawberry  plant.  Fragaria.  The  mature  fruit  of 
the  Fragaria , fragellis  reptaniibus  of  Linnaeus,  was 
formerly  recommended  in  gouty  and  calculous  affec- 
tions, in  consequence,  it  would  appear,  of  its  efficacy 
in  removing  tartar  from  the  teeth,  which  it  is  said  to 
do  very  effectually. 

Fragile  vitreum.  An  obsolete  name  for  the  fra 
gilitas  ossium. 

FRAGILIS.  Brittle. 

FRAGI'LITAS.  Brittleness. 

Fragilitas  ossium.  Brittleness  of  the  bones. 

Fra'gmkn.  Fragmcntum.  A splinter  of  a bone. 

FRA'GUM.  (From  fragro,  to  smell  sweet.)  The 
strawberry.  See  Fragaria. 

FRAMBCE'SIA.  (From  framboise , Fr.  for  a rasp- 
berry.) The  yaws.  A genus  of  disease,  arranged  by 
Cullen  in  the  class  Cachexias , and  order  Impetigines. 
It  is  somewhat  similar  in  its  nature  to  the  lues  vene- 
rea, and  is  endemial  to  the  Antilles  islands,  as  well  as 
Africa.  It  appears  with  excrescences  like  mulberries 
growing  out  of  the  skin  in  various  parts  of  the  body, 
which  discharge  an  ichorous  fluid. 

FRA'NGULA.  (From  frango,  to  break : so  called 
because  of  the  brittleness  of  its  branches.)  See 
Ilhamnus  fravgula. 


FRU 


FRE 

FRANKINCENSE.  See  Junipems  lycia,  and  Finns 
tbies. 

[Frasera  Walteri.  See  American  Cohimbo.  A.] 

FRAXINE'LLA.  (From  frazinus,  the  ash  : so 
called  because  its  leaves  resemble  those  of  the  ash.) 
See  Dictamnus  albus. 

Fraxinella,  white.  See  Dictamnus  albus. 

FRA'XINUS.  {A  fragore,  from  the  noise  its  seeds 
make  when  shaken  by  the  wind ; or  from  <ppatis, 
a hedge,  because  of  its  use  in  forming  hedges.)  The 
ash. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Polygamia  ; Order,  Diceoi  a. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name'  of  the  ash-tree.  See 
Frazinus  excelsior. 

Fraxinus  excelsior.  Thesystematicnameof  the 
ash-tree.  Frazinus.  Called  also  brumelli  and  bume- 
lia.  The  bark  of  this  tree,  Frazinus— foliis  serratis 
Jloribus  apetalis  of  Linmeus,  when  fresh,  has  a mode- 
rately strong  bitterish  taste.  It  possesses  resolvent  and 
diuretic  qualities,  and  has  been  successfully  exhibited 
in  the  cure  of  intermittents.  The  seeds  are  occasion- 
ally exhibited  medicinally  as  diuretics,  in  the  dose  of  a 
drachm.  In  warm  climates,  a sort  of  manna  exudes 
from  this  species  of  fraxinus. 

Fraxinus  ornus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  from  which  manna  flows.  This  substance  is  also 
termed  Manna  Calabrina;  Ros  calabrinus  ; Acromeli; 
Alusar  ; Drysomeli.  That  species  which  is  of  a rosy 
colour,  is  called  nuba.  Mel  aerium,  from  the  supposi- 
tion that  it  descended  from  heaven.  Manna  is  the 
condensed  juice  of  the  flowering  ash,  or  Frazinus  or- 
nus— foliis  ovato  oblongis  serratis  petiolatis,  jloribus 
corollatis , Hort.  Kew.  which  is  a native  of  the  south- 
ern parts  of  Europe,  particularly  Sicily  and  Calabria. 
Many  other  trees  and  shrubs  have  likewise  been  ob- 
served to  emit  a sweet  juice,  which  concretes  upon  ex- 
posure to  the  air,  and  may  be  considered  of  the  manna 
kind,  especially  the  Frazinus  rolundifolia , and  excel- 
sior. In  Sicily  these  three  species  of  fraxinus  are 
regularly  cultivated  for  the  purpose  of  procuring  man- 
na, and  with  this  view  are  planted  on  the  declivity  of 
a hill  with  an  eastern  aspect.  After  ten  years’  growth, 
the  trees  first  begin  to  yield  the  manna,  but  they  require 
to  be  much  older  before  they  afford  it  in  any  consider- 
able quantity.  Although  the  manna  exudes  sponta- 
neously upon  the  trees,  yet,  in  order  to  obtain  it  more 
copiously,  incisions  are  made  through  the  bark,  by 
means  of  a sharp  crooked  instrument ; and  the  season 
thought  to  be  most  favourable  for  instituting  this  pro- 
cess, is  a little  before  the  dog  days  commence,  when 
the  weather  is  dry  and  serene.  Manna  is  general  ly  dis- 
tinguished into  different  kinds,  viz.  the  manna  in  tear, 
the  canulated  and  flaky  manna,  and  the  common 
brown  or  fat  manna.  All  these  varieties  seem  rather 
to  depend  upon  their  respective  purity,  and  the  manner 
in  which  they  are  obtained  from  the  plant,  than  upon 
any  essential  difference  of  the  drug.  The  best  manna 
is  in  oblong  pieces  or  flakes,  moderately  dry,  friable, 
very  light,  of  a whitish  or  pale  yellow  colour,  and  in 
some  degree  transparent : the  inferior  kinds  are  moist, 
unctuous,  and  brown.  Manna  is  well  known  as-  a 
gentle  purgative,  so  mild  in  its  operation,  that  it  may 
be  given  with  safety  to  children  and  pregnant  women, 
to  the  delicacy  of  whose  frames  and  situations  it  is 
particularly  adapted.  It  is  esteemed  a good  and  plea- 
sant auxiliary  to  the  purgative  neutral  salts.  It 
sheathes  acrimony,  and  is  useful  in  coughs,  disorders 
of  the  breast,  and  such  as  are  attended  with  fever  and 
inflammation,  as  in  pleuritis,  &c.  It  is  particularly 
efficacious  in  bilious  complaints,  and  helps  the  dis- 
charge of  mineral  waters,  when  they  are  not  of  them- 
selves sufficiently  active.  It  is  apt,  in  large  doses,  to 
create  flatulencies  and  gripes ; both  of  which  are  pre- 
vented by  a small  addition  of  some  warm  carmina- 
tives. It  purges  in  doses  of  from  § j to  5 ij ; but  its 
purgative  quality  is  much  increased,  and  its  flatulent 
effects  prevented,  by  a small  addition  of  cassia.  The 
dose  for  children  is  from  one  scruple  to  three.  It  is 
best  dissolved  in  whey. 

Fraxinus  rotundieolia.  The  systematic  name 
of  a tree  which  affords  manna.  See  Frazinus  omus. 

FREIND,  John,  was  born  in  1675,  at  Croton,  in 
Northamptonshire,  of  which  his  father  was  rector. 
After  being  educated  at  Westminster  he  went  to  Ox- 
ford, where  he  distinguished  himself  greatly  by  his 
classical  attainments.  Having  for  some  time  studied 


medicine,  he  communicated  to  the  Royal  Society  some 
singular  cases:  but  a work,  which  he  published  in 
1703,  entitled  “ Emmenologia,”  explaining  the  pheno- 
mena of  menstruation,  both  natural  and  morbid,  on 
mechanical  principles,  first  brought  him  into  notice  as 
a physiologist  and  physician.  In  the  following  year, 
he  was  appointed  professor  of  Chemistry  at  Oxford, 
but  soon  after  went  to  Spain  as  physician  to  the  Eng- 
lish forces ; and  he  took  this  opportunity  of  visiting 
Italy.  On  his  return,  in  1707,  he  was  created  a Doctor 
by  diploma,  and  published  his  Chemical  Lectures  in 
Latin.  In  1712,  he  was  chosen  a Fellow  of  the  Royal 
Society ; but  soon  went  abroad  again  with  the  troops 
into  Flanders.  On  the  conclusion  of  the  peace  in  the 
following  year  he  settled  in  London,  and  rose  to  high 
professional  reputation.  In  1716,  he  was  received  as 
Fellow  of  the  College  of  Physicians,  and  published  the 
first  and  third  books  of  Hippocrates  on  Epidemics, 
with  a Commentary  on  Fevers,  in  nine  parts ; a work 
of  great  erudition  and  judgment.  Some  of  his  opi- 
nions having  been  severely  attacked,  he  was  led  to  de- 
fend them  in  a letter  to  Dr.  Mead,  entitled  K De  pur- 
gantibus  in  secundo  Variolarum  confluentium  Febre 
adhibendis,”  1719.  A few  years  after  this  he  got  into 
parliament,  and  having  warmly  sided  with  the  oppo- 
sition, he  was,  in  common  with  several  persons  of 
consequence,  imprisoned  on  suspicion  of  high  treason: 
but  the  minister,  Sir  Robert  Walpole,  having  fallen 
,sick,  Dr.  Mead  refused  to  attend  him  til)  his'friend  was 
liberated ; when  he  made  over  to  him  5000  guineas, 
which  he  had  received  from  his  patients  during  his 
confinement  of  a few  months  only.  While  in  the 
Tower,  Dr.  Freind  formed  the  plan  of  his  great  work, 
“ The  History  of  Physic  from  Galen  to  the  beginning 
of  {he  Sixteenth  Century,  chiefly  with  regard  to  Prac- 
tice;” which  came  out  in  two  volumes  within  three 
years  after.  This  was  intended  as  a continuation  of 
Le  Clerc,  and  met  with  a very  favourable  reception ; 
indeed  it  still  continues  to  be  a standard  book.  On  the 
accession  of  George  II.  he  was  appointed  physician  to 
the  Queen;  and  having  died  in  July  1728,  his  widow 
and  son  experienced  the  royal  protection. 

Fre'na.  The  sockets  of  the  teeth. 

Frigera'na.  A putrid  fever. 

FRIGIDA'RIUM.  (From  frigidus,  cold.)  The 
cold  bath. 

FRINGE.  See  Fimbria. 

Fringed  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

FRONS.  ( Frons , tis.  f.  or  m.)  1.  The  forehead. 
The  part  between  the  eyebrows  and  the  hairy  scalp. 

2.  {Frons,  dis,  f.)  The  frond,  or  leaf ; a tree  : now 
used  by  botanists  to  the  cryptogamious  plants  only. 

FRONTAL.  ( Frontalis ; from  frons,  the  fore- 

head.) Belonging  to  the  forehead. 

Frontal  bone.  See  Frontis  os. 

Frontal  sinus.  See  Frontis  os. 

FRONTA'LIS.  See  Occipito  frontalis. 

Frontalis  verus.  See  Corrugator  supercilii. 

FRO'NTIS  OS.  The  frontal  bone.  Oscoronale; 
Os  inverecundum  ; Metopon.  The  external  surface  of 
this  bone  is  smooth  at  its  upper  convex  part,  but  below 
several  cavities  and  processes  are  observed.  At  each 
angle  of  the  orbits  the  bone  juts  out  to  from  two  inter- 
nal and  two  external  processes ; and  the  ridge  under 
the  eyebrow  on  each  side  is  called  the  superciliary  pro- 
cess ; from  which  the  orbitar  processes  extend  back- 
wards, forming  the  upper  part  of  the  orbits ; and  be- 
tween these  the  ethmoid  bone  is  received.  The  nasal 
process  is  situated  between  the  two  internal  angular 
processes.  At  the  internal  angular  process  is  a cavity 
for  the  caruncula  lachrymalis  ; and  at  the  external, 
another  for  the  pulley  of  the  major  oblique  muscle. 
The  foramina  are  three  on  each  side ; one  in  each 
superciliary  ridge,  through  which  a nerve,  artery,  and 
vein,  pass  to  the  integuments  of  the  forehead  ; a second 
near  the  middle  of  the  internal  side  of  the  orbit,  called 
internal  orbitar ; the  third  is  smaller,  and  lies  about  an 
inch  deeper  in  the  orbit.  On  the  inside  of  the  os 
frontis  there  is  a ridge  which  is  hardly  perceptible  at 
the  upper  part,  but  grows  more  prominent  at  the  bot- 
tom, where  the  foramen  caecum  appears  ; to  this  ridge 
the  falx  is  attached.  The  frontal  sinus  is  placed  over 
the  orbit  on  each  side,  except  at  this  part  the  frontal 
bone  is  of  mean  thickness  between  the  parietal  and 
occipital ; but  the  orbitar  process  is  so  thin  as  to  he 
almost  transparent. 

FRUCTIFICATION.  (Fructificatio ; from  fmetus. 

369 


FllU 


FKU 


fruit,  and  facio,  to  make.)  Under  this  term  are  com- 
prehended the  flowers  and  the  fruit  of  a plant.  It  is  a 
temporary  part  of  plants  appropriated  to  generation, 
terminating  the  old  vegetable  and  beginning  the  new. 
By  the  parts  of  fructification,  Sir  James  Smith  ob- 
serves, each  species  is  perpetually  renewed  without 
limits,  while  all  other  modes  of  propagation  are  but 
the  extension  of  an  individual,  and  sooner  or  later  ter- 
minate in  its  total  extinction.  The  fructification  is 
therefore  essential  to  vegetables.  A plant  may  be  des- 
titute of  stem,  leaves,  or  even  roots,  because  if  one  of 
these  parts  be  wanting,  the  others  may  perform  its 
functions,  but  it  can  never  be  destitute  of  those  organs 
by  which  its  species  is  propagated. 

Linnaeus  distinguishes  seven  parts  of  fructification, 
some  of  which  are  essential  to  the  very  nature  of  a 
flower  or  fruit ; others  not  so  indispensably  necessary, 
and  therefore  are  not  universal. 

1.  The  calyx,  or  flower-cup,  not  essential  and  often 
absent.  See  Calyx. 

2.  The  corolla , or  petals,  likewise  not  essential.  See 
Corolla. 

3.  The  stamen  or  stamina.  These  are  essential. 
See  Stamen. 

4.  The  pistillum,  or  pistilla,  in  the  centre  of  the 
flower,  consisting  of  the  rudiments  of  the  fruit,  with 
one  or  more  organs  attached  to  them,  and  therefore 
essential.  See  Pistillum. 

5.  The  pericarpium,  or  seed-vessel,  wanting  in  many 
plants.  See  Pericarpium. 

6.  The  semen , or  seed,  the  perfecting  of  which  is 
the  sole  end  of  all  the  other  parts. 

7.  The  receptaculum,  which  must  necessarily  be  pre- 
sent in  some  form  or  other.  See  Receptaculum. 

FRU'CTUS.  ( Fructus , tus.  m. ; a fruor.)  The 
fruit  of  a tree  or  plant.  By  this  term  is  understood  in 
botany,  the  produce  of  the  germen,  consisting  of  the 
seed-vessel  and  seed. 

Fructus  horjei.  Summer  fruits.  Under  this  term 
are  comprehended  strawberries,  cherries,  currants,  mul- 
berries, raspberries,  and  the  like.  They  possess  a 
sweet  subacid  taste,  and  are  exhibited  as  dietetic  auxi- 
liaries, as  refrigerants,  antiseptics,  attenuants,  and 
aperients.  Formerly  they  were  exhibited  medicinally 
in  the  cure  of  putrid  affections,  and  to  promote  the 
alvine  and  urinary  excretions.  The  acid  which  they 
contain  is  either  the  tartaric,  oxalic,  citric,  or  mallic,  or 
a mixture  of  two  or  more  of  them  with  sugar  and 
gluten,  starch,  and  a gelatinous  substance.  Considering 
them  as  an  article  of  diet,  they  afford  little  nourish- 
ment, and  are  liable  to  produce  flatulencies.  To  per- 
sons of  a bilious  constitution  and  rigid  fibres,  and 
where  the  habit  is  disposed  naturally,  or  from  extrinsic 
causes,  to  an  inflammatory  or  putrescent  state,  their 
moderate  and  even  plentiful  use,  is  salubrious;  by 
those  of  a cold  inactive  disposition,  where  the  vessels 
are  lax,  the  circulation  languid,  and  the  digestion  weak, 
they  should  be  used  very  sparingly.  The  juices  ex- 
tracted from  these  fruits  by  expression,  contain  their 
active  qualities  freed  from  their  grosser  indigestible 
matter.  On  standing,  the  juice  ferments  and  changes  to 
a vinous  or  acetous  state.  By  proper  addition  of  sugar, 
and  by  boiling,  their  fermentative  power  is  suppressed, 
and  their  medicinal  qualities  preserved.  The  juices 
of  these  fruits,  when  purified  from  their  fasculencies  by 
settling  and  straining,  may  be  made  into  syrups,  with  a 
due  proportion  of  sugar  in  the  usual  way. 

FRUIT.  See  Fructus. 

Fruits,  summer.  See  Fructus  horcei. 

[ Fruits  affording  spirit.  “1  shall  class  only  the 
several  productions  which  afford  ardent  spirits,  and 
which  may  be  worked  to  advantage  at  this  day  in  the 
form  of  results  of  late  experiments  in  some,  and  a slight 
knowledge  of  others,  for  the  benefit  of  future  improve- 
ment and  research,  beginning  with 

“ The  Jlpple.  The  juice  of  this  fruit  (which  is 
called  cider,  when  expressed  and  fermented,)  affords, 
by  distillation,  one-tenth  of  its  weight  of  spirit  of  the 
first  proof  on  Dica’s  hydrometer. 

“ The  Pear.  This  fruit,  when  expressed  as  the  ap- 
ple, affords  nearly  the  same  lesult ; the  qualities  differ- 
ing, as  the  quality  of  the  fruit  differs,  in  the  same  ratio 
as  the  apple.  Process,  the  same  as  the  apple. 

'‘The  Peach.  This  fruit  is  cultivated  in  abundance 
throughout  the  United  States,  though  in  greater  abun- 
dance to  the  southward  of  Pennsylvania.  It  affords, 
by  distillation,  about  one-eighth  by  clear  expression. 

310 


Although  this  is  seldom  done,  it  is  nevertheless  the 
best  method  to  procure  a fine  flavour,  which  fixes  the 
principal  value. 

“Peaches  intended  for  distilling  are  thrown  into 
bins;  when  the  ripest  should  be  assorted  out,  and 
thrown  into  a trough  or  vat,  into  which  persons  enter 
and  mash  them  with  their  feet.  In  the  southern 
states,  wooden  stampers  are  used,  as  they  cannot  con- 
veniently be  ground  in  a mill,  owing  to  the  danger  of 
the  stone.  This  is  a practice  which  might  well  be 
remedied,  by  supplying  their  mills  with  stones  after  the 
manner  of  a tanner’s  bark-mill.  It  would  also  be  at- 
tended with  the  advantage  of  breaking  the  peach- 
stones,  which  would  impart  that  rich  aromatic  bitter 
which  its  kernel  possesses,  and  which  is  so  highly 
prized  in  that  celebrated  cordial  called  noyeau.  After 
being  well  macerated,  it  is  thrown  into  vats  or  casks, 
and  diluted  with  water,  so  as  to  prevent  an  empy- 
reuma.  In  this  state  it  is  called  mobby,  and,  after  a 
thorough  fermentation,  it  is  in  that  state  committed  to 
the  still,  together  with  the  mass.  Others  press  it  in 
cider- presses. 

“ The  Plum.  This  is  a fruit  which  is  more  used  in 
culinary  purposes,  and  for  the  table.  But  there  is  a 
kind  of  plum  which_grows  plentifully  in  most  parts  of 
the  United  States,  called  the  red  plum.  It  is  of  a beau- 
tiful saffron  colour,  inclining  to  red.  This  fruit  affords 
nearly  the  same  product  as  the  peach,  and  should  be 
treated  in  the  same  manner. 

“ The  Cherry.  There  is  a variety  of  this  fruit : that 
w’hich  affords  the  greatest  quantity  of  spirit  is  the 
black-heart  cherry,  which  should  be  treated  precisely 
as  tire  peach.  This  fruit  is  more  valued  for  the  aro- 
matic flavour  which  it  imparts  to  spirit,  and  from 
which  is  made  the  exhilarating  water  called  cherry- 
bounce. 

“ The  Papaw  is  a fruit  resembling  seed  cucumber. 
Its  pulp  is  of  a saffron  colour,  nearly  of  the  consistence 
of  a melon,  and  its  flavour  much  like  custard.  It  is 
too  luscious,  when  ripe,  to  be  agreeable  to  the  palate, 
but  when  boiled,  green,  is  pleasant.  It  ripens  about 
the  middle  of  September;  is  a native  of  Kentucky, 
Maryland,  and  Pennsylvania.  The  tree  grows  from 
twelve  to  twenty-six  feet  high.  The  fruit  affords,  by 
distillation,  a spirit  by  some  highly  prized,  and  in  con- 
siderable quantities.  The  process  is  well  known  to 
the  inhabitants  where  the  fruit  grows  in  abundance. 

“ The  Blackberry , Whortleberry , &c.  afford  spirit 
in  tolerable  quantities,  by  expression,  fermentation, 
and  distillation. 

“ The  Sugar-maple  is  a tree  which  abounds  in  the 
northern  and  western  parts  of  the  United  States : it 
grows  from  forty  to  sixty  feet  in  height.  The  sap  is 
drawn  in  February  and  March:  of  this  sap  the  inha- 
bitants make  large  quantities  of  sugar.  This  sap,  duly 
fermented  and  distilled,  produces  a spirit  of  a very  su- 
perior quality,  and  highly  esteemed.  The  process  is 
simply  a fermentation  of  the  sap,  and  distillation  in 
the  common  way. 

“ The  Persimmon  is  a fruit  so  well  known  through- 
out the  United  States,  that  a description  is  unneces- 
sary. This  fruit  is  fit  for  distillation  only  after  a 
severe  frost,  which  instantly  ripens  it,  when  it  is  ga- 
thered and  thrown  into  a cistern  or  cask,  in  winch 
state  it  is  easily  crushed  and  diluted  with  warm  water, 
fermented,  and  the  whole  mass  committed  to  the  still. 
Some  strain  the  mass  through  a coarse  catgut,  which 
takes  out  the  seeds,  that  are  of  a powerful  astringent 
quality.  This  spirit  is  not  highly  esteemed. 

“ The  Potato.  There  are  two  kinds  of  the  potato ; 
one  of  which  is  commonly  called  the  Irish  potato,  and 
the  other  the  sweet  potato;  the  latter  of  which  afford^ 
the  greatest  quantity  by  distillation.  The  process  is 
the  same  in  both,  yet  the  sweet  potato  works  more 
kindly.  After  being  well  boiled  in  water,  (steam  is 
the  best,)  they  are  macerated  by  various  means  (it 
heavy  roller  is  the  best) : they  are  then  diluted  with  a 
sufficient  quantity  of  water,  and  strained  through  a 
coarse  canvass,  to  separate  the  skins  (this  is  a pro- 
cess, however,  which  may  be  dispensed  with) ; they 
are  then  thrown  into  casks,  fermented,  and  committed 
to  the  still.  The  distillation  of  potatoes  may,  in  a 
short  time,  become  a matter  worthy  of  attention.  At 
present,  the  negroes  of  Georgia  and  the  Carolina?  are 
the  only  manufacturers.  The  spirit  is  of  an  inferioi 
quality,  and  is  used  by  the  poorer  class  of  inhabitants 
but  a vast  field  for  improvement  lies  open. 


FUL 


FUL 


; 601  bs.  per  bush,  affords  8 to  12  quarts. 

60 

do. 

10-14 

60 

do. 

10-14  .. 

— 

do. 

6-8  .. 

32 

do. 

5-7  .. 

45 

do. 

7-  9 .. 

60 

do. 

9-13  .. 

70 

do. 

13-16  .. 

“ Turnips , Parsnips , Carrots , Pumpions , Cashaws , 
fee.  afford  spirit  of  an  inferior  quality,  and  in  tolerable 
quantities.  They  are  to  be  treated  similar  to  the 
potato. 

“ Grain , of  every  description,  affords  spirits  of  dif- 


Rye, 

Indian  corn, 

Buckwheat, 

Oats, 

Barley* 

Speltz, 

Rice, 

“ The  spirit  afforded  by  the  distillation  of  rice  is 
what  is  usually  termed  rack,  or  arrack.  This  article 
is  imported  chiefly  from  Bengal,  and  is  distilled  from 
rice,  although  the  real  and  genuine  arrack  is  distilled 
in  the  island  of  Goa,  from  the  sap  of  a tree,  drawn  in 
the  same  manner  as  our  sugar-maple. 

“ The  Grape.  In  the  United  States,  the  cultivation 
of  the  domestic  grape  has  but  just  commenced:  the 
numerous  species,  however,  of  our  wild  grape,  with 
which  our  forests  abound,  make  it  a matter  of  consi- 
deration. These  being  collected  in  sufficient  quanti- 
ties, when  ripe,  they  may  be  treated  with  success, 
after  the  process  of  the  apple,  and  afford  a beautiful 
spirit,  not  unlike  cogniac. 

“ Indian  Corn  (the  stalk).  The  young  stalk  of  the 
Indian  corn,  (which  should  be  used  about  the  time  of 
earing,)  like  the  sugar-cane  of  the  West  Indies,  affords 
a large  quantity  of  juice  or  sap  by  expression,  which, 
when  fermented  and  distilled,  yields  abundantly  of 
spirit  of  a very  superior  quality.  This  should  be  broken 
and  worked  in  the  same  manner  as  the  sugar-cane, 
which  is  by  nut-mills  of  iron,  after  the  manner  of  our 
cider-mills. — Krafft's  Amer.  Distiller.  A.] 

FRUMENTA'CEOUS.  A term  applied  to  all  such 
plants  as  have  a conformity  with  wheat,  either  with 
respect  to  their  fruit,  leaves,  or  ears. 

FRUTESCENTIA.  (From  fruclus , fruit.)  The 
time  at  which  the  fruit  arrives  at  maturity. 

FRUTEX.  A shrub  or  plant,  which  rises  with  a 
woody  durable  stem,  but  never  arrives  at  the  height,  or 
lias  the  .appearance  of  an  arbor , or  tree. 

FU'Ctfs.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plaints  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Cryptogamia  ; Order,  Algce. 

Fucus  digitatus.  This  fucus  grows  upon  stones 
and  rocks  in  the  sea  near  the  shore.  It  has  several 
plain,  long  leaves  or  sinuses  springing  from  a round 
stalk,  in  the  manner  of  fingers  when  extended.  It 
affords  soda. 

Fucus  esculentus.  Edible  fucus.  Hudson  has 
made  this  a distinct  species,  but  Linnaeus  included  it 
under  his  saccharinus.  It  grows  plentifully  in  the  sea 
near  the  shores  of  Scotland,  and  also  those  of  Cum- 
berland. It  has  a broad,  plain,  simple,  sword-shaped 
leaf,  springing  from  a pinnated  stalk. 

Fucus  HELMiNTHOCORTON.  See  Corallinacorsicana. 

Fucus. palmatus.  Handed  fucus.  This  grows  in 
the  sea,  and  consists  of  a thin-lobcd  leaf  like  a hand. 

Fucus  saccharinus.  Sea-belts ; so  called  from  the 
supposed  resemblance  of  its  leaves  to  a belt  or  girdle. 
It  grows  upon  rocks  and  stones  by  the  sea-shore.  The 


leaves  are  very  sweet,  and  when  washed  and  hung  up 
to  dry,  will  exude  a substance  like  sugar,  from  whence 
it  was  named. 

Fucus  vesiculosus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sea-oak.  Sea  wreck.  Quercus  marina.  This  sea- 
weed, the  Fucus — -fronde  plana  dichotoma  costata  in- 
teger rima,  vesicvlis  axillaribus  geminis , terminalibus 
tubere.ula.tis,  of  Linnaeus,  is  said  to  be  a useful  as- 
sistant to  sea-water,  in  the  cure  of  disorders  of  the 
glands.  Burnt  in  the  open  air,  and  reduced  to  a black 
powder,  it  forms  the  adhiops  vegetabilis,  which,  as  an 
internal  medicine,  is  similar  to  burnt  sponge. 

FULCRUM.  A prop  or  support.  This  term  is  ap- 
plied by  Linnaeus,  not  only  to  those  organs  of  vegeta- 
bles correctly  so  denominated,  such  as  tendrils,  but  also 
to  various  other  appendages  to  the  herbage  of  a plant, 
none  of  which  are  universal  or  essential,  nor  is  there 
any  one  plant  furnished  with  them  all.  Sir  James 
SmitJ)  prefers  the  English  term  appendage , for  these 
organs  in  general,  to  props , because  the  latter  applies 
only  to  one  of  them. 


The  greater  props,  or  fulcra  of  vegetables,  arc  the 
roots,  trunks,  and  branches. 

A o 


To  the  less  are  referred, 

1.  The  petiolus , or  petiole,  which  is  the  fulcrum  of 
the  leaf. 

2.  Cirrus,  the  tendril.  See  Cirrus. 

3.  The  stolo , or  sucker;  a filament,  or  under- 
ground bud,  protruded  from  the  root,  and  sending  off 
radicles  into  the  earth,  pushes  up  a stem  resembling 
the  parent  plant ; as  in  the  strawberry,  and  Syringa 
vulgaris. 

4.  Sarmenttim,  the  runner,  which  gives  off  from  the 
stem,  and  radicates  on  that  which  is  nearest  to  it ; as 
does  the  Hedera  helix , or  ivy. 

The  fulcra  of  a flower  are  the  peduncle,  scape,  and 
receptacle. 

FULI'GO.  {Quasi fumiligo ; fromfumus,  smoke.) 
Araxos ; Asoper ; Asuoli.  Soot.  Wood-soot,  fuligo 
ligni , or  the  condensed  smoke  from  burning  wood,  has 
a pungent,  bitter,  and  nauseous  taste,  and  is  resolved 
by  chemical  analysis  into  a volatile  alkaline  salt,  an 
empyreumatic  oil,  a fixed  alkali,  and  an  insipid  earth. 
The  tincture  prepared  from  this  substance,  tinctura 
fuliginis,  is  recommended  as  a powerful  antispasmodic 
in  hysterical  affections. 

[FULLER,  Dr.  Samuel,  one  of  the  memorable 
planters  of  Plymouth,  who  came  over  with  the  first 
settlers,  in  1620.  He  was  the  first  regularly-educated 
physician  that  visited  New-England.  He  did  not  con- 
fine his  benevolent  offices  to  the  inhabitants  of  New- 
Plymouth,  and  to  the  aboriginals  of  the  country,  but 
readily  gave  his  assistance  to  the  people  of  Naumkeak 
(Salem)  and  Charlestown,  after  Mr.  Endicott  came  to 
that  part  of  Massachusetts  Bay.  Several  of  the  peo- 
ple died  of  the  ‘scurvy,  and  other  distempers,’  and 
many  were  subjected  to  diseases  arising  from  unwhole- 
some diet,  and  want  of  proper  accommodations. 
Having  no  physician  among  themselves,  it  was  for- 
tunate for  those  planters  that  Plymouth  could  supply 
them  with  one  so  well  qualified  as  Dr.  Fuller,  who 
visited  them  at  the  request  of  Governor  Endicott,  and 
met  with  great  success  in  his  practice.  He  visited 
Salem  first  in  1628,  and  again  in  1629,  on  account  of 
the  sickness  introduced  there  by  the  newly-arrived 
ships.  When  he  arrived  at  Plymouth,  from  Salem, 
Governor  Endicott  wrote  to  Governor  Bradford  a letter 
of  thanks,  speaking  highly  in  praise  Of  the  physician, 
and  also  expressing  his  hearty  concurrence  with  their 
church  at  Plymouth,  its  form  and  discipline:  from 
which  it  is  evident  that  the  conversation  of  Dr.  Fuller 
had  some  effect  upon  his  religious  opinions,  for  there 
was  a difference  of  sentiment  before  this  interview, 
and  a jealousy,  lest  the  Plymouth  church  should  exer- 
cise a jurisdiction  over  the  church  in  Salem. 

In  his  medical  character,  and  for  his  Christian  vir- 
tues and  unfeigned  piety,  Dr.  Fuller  was  held  in  the 
highest  estimation,  and  was  resorted  to  as  a father  and 
wise  counsellor  during  the  perils  of  his  day.  He  was 
finally  one  of  several  heads  of  families  who  died  of  a 
fever,  which  prevailed  in  Plymouth  in  the  summer  of 
1633,  and  was  most  deeply  lamented  by  all  the  colo- 
nists.”— Thatch.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

FULLERS’ EARTH.  An  earth  found  in  large  beds 
in  Buckinghamshire  and  Surrey,  composed  of  silica, 
alumine,  magnesia,  lime,  muriate  of  soda,  a trace  of 
potassa,  and  oxide  of  iron.  See  Earth , Fuller's. 

[“  FULTON,  Robert.  Notwithstanding  the  various 
unsuccessful  projects  of  propelling  boats  by  means  of 
steam-enginery,  Mr.  Robert  Fulton  has  had  the  cou- 
rage to  undertake  and  construct  one  at  New-York, 
upon  a plan  of  his  own,  and  his  success  is  undoubted. 
His  boat  is  upwards  of  140  feet  long,  and  about  15  feet 
wide,  resembling  a batteau  of  large  dimensions.  The 
engine  is  upon  the  plan  of  Watt  & Boulton’s  latest 
improvement,  and  is  a most  complete  piece  of  ma- 
chinery. The  power  is  applied  to  the  water  in  which 
the  boat  moves,  by  means  of  wheels,  with  only  eight 
arms,  revolving  on  their  axis.  When  the  piston  makes 
20  strokes  in  a minute,  these  are  turned  with  a motion 
brisk  enough  to  stem  the  currents  both  of  the  East  and 
North  rivers,  at  the  rate  of  four  miles  and  more  in  an 
hour.  She  draws  but  a few  inches  of  water.  She 
actually  made  a voyage  to  Albany  and  back  again  in 
100  hours,  or  a little  more  than  four  days,  and  she  pro- 
mises to  be  of  the  greatest  service  ig  working  her  way 
against  the  streams  of  rivers,  such  as  the  Mississippi, 
and  others  that  have  no  tides.” — Med.  Repos,  vol.  xi. 

The  preceding  notice  of  Fulton’s  first  experiment 
with  his  rough-constructed  steamboat,  was  published 

371 


FUM 


FUN 


fcn  the  summer  of  1807,  in  the  New-York  Medical  Re- 
pository. The  writer  of  this  article  was  on  board 
during  the  first  trial,  and  observed  the  anxiety  and  joy 
of  Mr.  Fulton  at  the  prospect  before  him.  The  vessel 
moved  from  the  dock  in  the  eastern  part  of  the  city  of 
New-York,  and  was  steered  into  the  North  or  Hudson 
river,  opposite  Hoboken,  where  she  was  anchored, 
and  after  remaining  there  a while,  returned  to  the 
place  of  starting.  On  the  next  day,  Mr.  Fulton  pro- 
ceeded to  ascend  the  Hudson  river,  and,  as  stated 
above,  was  100  hours  in  going  to  Albany  and  returning 
thence  to  New-York,  a distance  of  300  miles,  or  nearly 
that,  being  on  an  average  less  than  four  miles  an  hour. 
This  boat  was  afterward  fitted  up  as  a packet-boat  for 
passengers,  and  called  the  Car  of  Neptune.  The  next 
summer  (1808)  another  boat  was  constructed  upon  a 
better  model,  and  her  speed  surpassed  the  first.  Some 
alteration  or  improvement  was  made  in  every  sub- 
sequent boat  constructed  under  the  direction  of  Mr. 
Fulton,  until  the  time  of  his  death,  (in  Feb.  1815), 
when  his  boats  went  from  New-York  to  Albany  in 
about  20  hours,  making  an  average  of  more  than  seven 
miles  an  hour.  Since  his  death  further  improvements 
have  been  made  in  the  construction  of  steamboats 
and  their  machinery,  so  that  some  of  them  make  the 
trip  from  New-York  to  Albany  by  daylight,  and  some 
have  made  the  passage  down  the  river  from  Albany  to 
New-York,  in  the  extremely  short  period  of  twelve 
hours,  making  an  average  speed  of  more  than  twelve 
miles  an  hour.  It  is  the  opinion  of  some  that  further 
improvements  will  take  place,  and  that  the  same  dis- 
tance will  be  run  in  nine  or  ten  hours. 

Mr.  Fulton  has  the  merit  of  being  the  first  engineer 
who  made  a practical  and  successful  application  of 
steam-power  to  the  propulsion  of  vessels  through  the 
water.  He  claimed  no  more.  He  used  Watt  & Boul- 
ton’s steam  engine,  and  modified  it  to  suit  his  wishes, 
and  the  object  he  had  in  view;  and  having  succeeded 
feeyond  his  own  most  sanguine  expectations,  and  to  the 
astonishment  of  all  his  countrymen,  he  has  died  and  left 
a legacy  of  incalculable  value  to  his  country  and  the 
whole  civilized  world.  Others  had  indeed  engaged  in 
similar  experiments,  but  without  success.  He  was  the 
master  spirit  who  pointed  out  the  true  method,  and 
succeeding  engineers  have  profited  by  his  experience  ; 
and  steamboats  now  navigate  the  rivers,  bays,  and 
lakes  of  the  United  States,  in  greater  numbers  than  in 
any  other  country. 

Robert  Fulton  was  a native  of  Pennsylvania,  and 
by  profession  a portrait- painter.  He  became  acquaint- 
ed with  Robert  Livingston  in  Paris,  while  residing 
there  as  Minister  of  the  United  States  near  the  French 
government.  Their  views  corresponding  on  the  feasi- 
bility of  constructing  a steamboat,  Mr.  Fulton  was 
patronized  by  the  minister,  whose  wealth  enabled  him 
to  make  all  the  necessary  advances  towards  accom- 
plishing this  object.  He  was  so  far  successful  as  to 
put  a boat  in  rapid  motion  on  the  river  Seine ; and 
after  this  prelude  to  his  future  success,  he  returned  to 
his  native  country,  and  constructed  his  first  boat  in 
1807,  as  above  stated,  from  which  has  emanated  all 
the  steamboats  now  in  use  in  this  country  and  Eu- 
rope. A.] 

FULMINA'TION.  Fulminatio.  Detonation.  A 
quick  and  lively  explosion  of  bodies,  such  as  takes 
place  with  fulminating  gold,  fulminating  powder,  and 
in  the  combustioaof  a mixture  of  inflammable  gas  and 
vital  air. 

FUMA'RIA.  (From  fumus,  smoke,  from  its  juice, 
when  dropped  into  the  eye,  producing  the  same  sensa- 
tions as  smoke.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Diadelpkia;  Order,  Decandria.  Fu- 
mitory. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  fumi- 
tory. See  Fumaria  officinalis. 

Fit  maria  bulbosa.  Aristolochia  fabacea.  The 
root  of  this  plant,  Fumaria — caule  simplici,  bracteis 
longitudine  florum,  of  Linnaeus,  was  formerly  given  to 
restore  suppressed  menses,  and  as  an  anthelmintic. 

Fumaria  officinalis.  The  systematic  nameof  the 
fumitory.  Fumaria;  Fumus  terrcc  ; Capnos ; Herba 
melancholifuga.  The  leaves  of  this  indigenous  plant, 
Fumaria — pericarpiis  monospermis  racemosis , caule 
diffuso , of  Linnteus,  are  directed  for  medicinal  use  by 
the  Edinburgh  college  ; they  are  extremely  succulent, 
and  have  no  remarkable  smell,  but  a bitter,  somewhat 


saline  taste.  The  infusion  of  the  dried  leaves,  or  the 
expressed  juice  of  the  fresh  plant,  is  esteemed  for  its 
property  of  clearing  the  skin  of  many  disorders  of  the 
leprous  kind. 

FUMIGA'TION.  (Fumigatio ; from  fumus, smoke.) 
The  application  of  fumes,  to  destroy  contagious  mias- 
mata or  effluvia.  The  most  efficacious  substance  for 
this  purpose  is  chlorine ; next  to  it  the  vapour  of  nitric 
acid ; and,  lastly,  that  of  the  muriatic.  The  fumes  of 
heated  vinegar,  burning  sulphur,  or  the  smoke  of  ex- 
ploded gunpowder,  deserve  little  confidence  as  antiloi- 
rnics.  The  air  of  dissecting  rooms  should  be  nightly 
fumigated  with  chlorine,  whereby  their  atmosphere 
would  be  more  wholesome  and  agreeable  during  the 
day. 

FUMITORY.  See  Fumaria. 

FUMUS.  Smoke. 

FUNCTION.  See  Action. 

FUNGI.  (The  plural  of  fungus.)  An  order  of  the 
class  Cryptogamia  of  Linmeus’s  system.  They  cannot 
probably  be  said  to  have  any  herbage ; their  substance 
is  fleshy ; their  parts  of  fructification  are  in  form  of  very 
small  capsules  buried  in  their  fleshy  substance.  These 
seminiferous  capsules  are  on  the  surface,  or  in  plates* 
and  are  called  lamella,  or  gills,  pores,  or  prickles,  and 
they  burst,  as  in  the  algse. 

A fungus  or  mushroom  affords  the  following  parts. 

1.  Pileus,  the  hat,  which  is  the  round  upper  part,  or 
head. 

2.  The.  Umbo,  the  knob,  or  boss,  or  more  prominent 
part  in  the  centre  of  the  hat. 

3.  Lamella,  the  gills,  or  membraneous  parts  on  the 
under  side.  These  are  peculiar  to  the  Agarici. 

4.  The  pores,  or  small  punctures  on  the  under  sur- 
face, observed  only  in  the  genus  Boletus. 

5.  Echini,  or  Aculei , elevated  points  on  the  upper 
surface  of  the  pileus,  noticed  in  the  genus  Hydra  only. 

6.  Verruca , warts,  observed  on  the  inferibr  surface. 

7.  Stipes,  the  stem  supporting  the  hat. 

8.  Volva,  the  wrapper,  or  covering,  of  a membra 
neous  texture,  surrounding  the  stem,  and  concealing 
the  parts  of  fructification,  and  in  due  time  bursting  all 
around,  forming  a ring  upon  the  stalk  ; as  in  Agaricus 
campeslris.  Linnaeus  also  uses  this  term  for  the  more 
fleshy  external  covering  of  some  other  fungi,  which  is 
scarcely  raised  out  of  the  ground,  and  enfolds  the  whole 
plant  when  young. 

9.  Annulus,  the  ring,  or  slender  membrane  sur- 
rounding the  stem. 

The  varieties  of  the  pileus,  or  hat,  are, 

1.  Planus,  flat. 

2.  Convexus  ; as  in  Boletus  bovinus. 

3.  Concavus ; as  in  Octospora. 

4.  Umbonatus,  umbo  or  navel-like ; as  in  Agaricus 
conspurcatus. 

5.  Campanulatus ; as  in  Agaricus  fimitarius 

6.  Viscidus,  viscid. 

7.  Dimidiatus , half  round ; as  in  Agaricus  niveus. 

8.  Squamosus,  covered  with  coloured  scales;  as  in 
Agaricus  procerus. 

9.  SquarrosusY  having  stiff  elevated  scales ; as  in 
Agaricus  conspurcatus. 

The  varieties  of  the  lamella  are, 

1.  Equal;  as  in  Agaricus  crinitus. 

2.  Unequal. 

3.  Branched,  when  several  run  into  one ; as  in  lent- 
lius  cantharellus. 

4.  Decurrent , proceeding  down  the  stem. 

5.  Venous,  so  small  that  they  appear  like  elevated 
veins. 

6.  Dimidiate , half  round ; as  in  Agaricus  muscar 
rius. 

7.  Labyrinth-like ; as  in  Agaricus  quercinus 

The  varieties  of  the  volva  are, 

1.  Simple. 

2.  Double. 

3.  Stellate,  cut  several  times : as  in  Lycopodium 
stellatum. 

The  varieties  of  the  annulus  are, 

1.  Erect,  loose  above,  and  fixed  below  ; as  in  Agari- 
cus conspurcatus. 

2.  Inverse,  fixed  above,  free,  and  bell-like  below;  as 
in  Agaricus  Mappa. 

3.  Sessile , fixed  only  laterally 

4.  Mobile;  as  in  Agaricus  antiquatus. 

5.  Persistent , remaining  after  the  perfect  formation, 
of  the  plant. 


GAD 


GAD 

r 6.  Evanescent , disappearing  after  the  complete  evo- 
lution of  the  fungus. 

7.  Arachnoid,  resembling  a slender  white  web. 

The  varieties  of  the  stipes  or  stem. 

1.  Annulate,  having  a ring. 

2.  J Yaked,  without  any. 

3.  Squamose,  scaly. 

4.  Bulbous ; as  in  Agaricus  separatus. 

5.  Filiform ; as  in  Agaricus  crinitus. 

FUNGIC  ACID.  Acidum  fungicum.  The  ex- 
pressed juice  of  the  boletus  juglandis,  boletus  pseudo - 
igniarius,  the  phallus  impudicus , merulius  cantharel- 
lus,  or  thepeziza  nigra,  being  boiled  to  coagulate  the  al- 
bumen, then  filtered,  evaporated  to  the  consistence  of 
an  extract,  and  acted  on  by  pure  alkohol,  leaves  a sub- 
stance which  is  called  Fungic  acid. 

It  is  a colourless,  uncrystallizable,  and  deliquescent 
mass,  of  a very  sour  taste.  The  fungates  of  potassa 
and  soda  are  uncrystallizable ; that  of  ammonia  forms 
regular  six-sided  prisms;  that  of  lime  is  moderately 
soluble,  and  is  not  affected  by  the  air;  that  of  barytes 
is  soluble  in  fifteen  times  its  weight  of  water,  and 
crystallizes  with  difficulty  ; that  of  magnesia  appears 
in  soluble  granular  crystals.  This  acid  precipitates 
from  the  acetate  of  lead  a white  flocculent  fungate, 
which  is  soluble  in  distilled  vinegar.  When  insolated, 
it  does  not  affect  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver ; but  the 
fungates  decompose  this  salt. 

FUNGIN.  The  fleshy  part  of  mushrooms  deprived 
by  alkohol  and  water  of  every  thing  soluble. 

FU'NGUS.  1.  Proud-flesh.  A term  in  surgery  to 
express  any  luxuriant  formation  of  flesh  on  an  ulcer. 

2.  In  morbid  anatomy  it  is  applied  to  a disease  of  the 
structure  of  a part  which  enlarges,  is  soft,  and  excres- 
cential. 

3.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system,  belonging  to  the  Cryptogamia  class. 

Fungus  h-ematodes.  See  Hamatoma. 

Fungus  igniarius.  See  Boletus  igniarius. 

Fungus  laricis.  See  Boletus  laricis. 

Fungus  melitensis.  See  Cynomorium. 

Fungus  rosaceus.  See  Bedeguar. 

Fungus  salicis.  The  willow  fungus.  See  Boletus 
suaveolens. 

Fungus  sambucinus.  See  Peziza  auricula. 

Fungus  vinosus.  The  dark  cobweb-like  fungus, 
which  vegetates  in  dry  cellars,  where  wine,  ale,  and 
the  like  are  kept. 

FUNI'CULUS.  ( Funiculus ; diminutive  of  funis , 
a cord.)  A little  cord. 

Funiculus  umbilicalis.  See  Umbilical  cord. 

The  funiculus  of  a seed  is  a little  filament  by  which 
the  immature  seed  adheres  to  the  receptacle,  seen  in 
Pisum  sativum  and  Lunaria  annua. 

FU'NIS.  A rope  or  cord. 


Funis  umbilicalis.  See  Umbilical  cord 

FUNNEL-SHAPED.-  See  Jnfundibuliformis. 

FURCA.  A fork  or  species  of  armature  of  plants 
See  Aculeus. 

Furce'lla  inferior.  The  ensiform  cartilage 

Fu'rcula.  The  clavicle. 

FU'RFUR.  1.  Bran. 

2.  A disease  of  the  skin,  in  which  the  cuticle  keeps 
falling  off  in  small  scales  like  bran. 

FURFURA'CEOUS.  (Furfur aceus  ; from  furfur, 
bran.)  A term  applied  to  the  bran-like  sediment  occa- 
sionally deposited  in  the  urine. 

FURNACE.  Furnus.  The  furnaces  employed  in 
chemical  operations  are  of  three  kinds : 

1.  The  evaporatory  furnace,  which  has  received  its 
name  from  its  use ; it  is  employed  to  reduce  substances 
into  vapour  by  means  of  heat,  in  order  to  separate  the 
more  fixed  principles  from  those  which  are  more  volatile. 

2.  The  reverberatory  furnace,  which  name  it  has  re- 
ceived from  its  construction,  the  flame  being  prevented 
from  rising ; it  is  appropriated  to  distillation. 

3.  The  forge  furnace,  in  which  the  current  of  air 
is  determined  by  bellows. 

FU  ROR.  Fury,  rage. 

Furor  uterinus.  (From  furo,  to  be  mad,  and 
uterus , the  womb.)  See  Nymphomania. 

FURU'NCULUS.  (From  furo,  to  rage  : so  named 
from  its  heat  and  inflammation  before  it  suppurates.) 
Dothcin  of  Paracelsus.  Chiadus  ; Chioli.  A bile.  An 
inflammation  of  a subcutaneous  gland,  known  by  an 
inflammatory  tumour  that  does  not  exceed  the  size  of  a 
pigeon’s  egg. 

Fusible  metal.  A combination  of  three  parts  of 
lead,  with  two  of  tin,  and  five  of  bismuth.  It  melts  at 
1970  pahr. 

FUSIBILITY.  The  property  by  which  metals  and 
minerals  assume  the  fluid  state. 

FUSIFORMIS.  Fusiform.  Spindleshaped  or  ta 
pering.  Applied  to  parts  of  plants,  as  roots,  &c.  which 
penetrate  perpendicularly  into  the  earth ; as  the  carrot, 
parsnip,  radish,  &c. 

FUSION.  (Fusio ; from  fundo,  to  pour  out.)  A che- 
mical process,  by  which  bodies  are  made  to  pass  from 
the  solid  to'the  fluid  state,  in  consequence  of  the  appli- 
cation of  heat.  The  chief  objects  susceptible  of  this 
operation  are  salts,  sulphur,  and  metals.  Salts  are  lia- 
ble to  two  kinds  of  fusion ; the  one,  which  is  peculiar 
to  saline  matters,  is  owing  to  water  contained  in  them, 
and  is  called  aqueous  fusion ; the  other,  which  arises 
from  the  heat  alone,  is  known  by  the  name  of  igneous 
fusion. 

FUSUS.  (From  fundo,  to  pour  out.)  Poured  out. 
Applied  by  Dr.  Good  to  a species  of  purging,  diarrhoea 
fusa,  in  which  the  feces  are  loose,  copious,  and  of  a 
. bright  yellow  colour. 


G 


abia'num  oleum.  See  Petroleum  rubrum. 

Gabi'rea.  A fatty  kind  of  myrrh,  mentioned 
by  Dioscorides. 

GADOLINATE.  A hard  black-coloured  semitrans- 
parent mineral  from  Sweden,  composed  of  silica, 
yttria,  oxide  of  cerum,  and  oxide  of  iron. 

GADUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  fishes,  of  the 
jugular  tribe.  The  following  species  are  brought  to  the 
European  markets  for  the  use  of  the  table. 

Gadus  ciliaris.  The  Baltic  torsk.  The  Iceland- 
ers prepare  it  by  salting  and  drying,  when  it  becorpes 
an  article  of  commerce,  under  the  name  of  Tetteling. 
Its  flesh  is  white,  tender,  and  well  flavoured. 

Gadus  morhua.  The  cod-fish.  This  well-known 
fish  in  our  markets,  abounds  in  the  northern  seas.  Its 
flesh  is  white,  tender,  and  delicious.  When  salted,  it 
is  also  well  flavoured,  and  in  general  esteem. 

Gadus  jeglefinus.  The  haddock.  An  inhabitant 
of  the  northern  seas  of  Europe.  The  larger  ones  are 
much  esteemed  during  the  winter ; the  smaller  ones  for 
summer  use.  They  are  of  easy  digestion.  Salted  and 
dried  they  are  eaten  at  breakfast  as  a delicacy. 

Gadus  minutus.  Very  small,  never  exceeding  six 


or  seven  inches  in  length.  It  is  found  in  the  Mediter- 
ranean in  great  abundance,  where  it  is  called  a capelau, 
or  officier. 

Gadus  merlangus.  The  whiting.  A delicate 
white  fish  in  great  abundance  in  the  Irish  seas  and 
German  Ocean. 

Gadus  pollacius.  The  whiting  pollack,  found  on 
the  rocky  coasts  of  Britain,  and  other  parts  of  Europe, 
and  is  in  great  esteem  for  the  table. 

Gadus  carbonarius.  The  coal-fish.  Very  abun- 
dant on  the  rocky  coasts  of  the  northern  parts  of  this 
island,  about  the  Orkneys,  and  the  coast  of  Yorkshire, 
where  they  become  two  and  three  feet  long,  and  con 
stitute  the  chief  support  of  the  poor. 

Gadus  merluccius.  The  hake.  A native  of  the 
North  and  Mediterranean  seas,  not  much  eaten,  ex- 
cept by  the  poor  when  dried,  when  it  is  called  poor 
John,  or  stock-fish. 

Gadus  molva.  Thcling.  This  grows  to  the  length 
of  five  or  six  feet.  It  is  not  so  good  as  the  morhua, 
when  fresh ; but  dried  and  salted,  is  much  esteemed, 
and  is  the  common  food  of  the  poor  in  Cornwall,  where 
it  is  prepared  for  exportation. 

373 


GAL 


GAL 


Gadus  lota.  The  burbot.  The  flesh  of  this  is 
considered  delicious  and  of  easy  digestion. 

Gadus  brosme.  The  torsk.  This  swarms  in  the 
seas  about  the  Shetland  islands,  and  forms  a consider- 
able article  of  commerce,  either  dried,  or  salted,  or 
packed  in  barrels. 

[Most  of  the  fishes  belonging  to  the  genus  .Gadus, 
are  edible.  Of  the  preceding  enumerated  species  three 
of  them  are  common  to  the  waters  of  the  United  States, 
as  the  Gadus  morhua , Gadus  teglejinus,  and  Gadus 
merluccius.  Besides  these,  there  are  found  on  the 
stalls  of  the  fishermen  in  the  markets  of  New-York 
the  following  species,  viz.  Gadus  callarias,  Gadus 
tomcodus,  Gadus  blennoides,  Gadus  purpureus,  Ga- 
dus tenuis , Gadus  longipes,  and  Gadus  punctatus. 
Of  these  different  species,  all  of  which  are  used  as 
food,  the  Gadus  morhua , or  bank  cod,  and  the  Gadus 
callarias , are  the  most  abundant,  and  most  esteemed. 
The  Gadus  merluccius , or  hake,  is  remarkable  for  its 
large  sound,  or  swimming-bladder,  which  is  prepared 
and  dried  for  sale,  and  forms  excellent  icthyocolla ; 
(which  see.)  A.] 

GALA'CTIA.  (From  ya\a,  lac,  milk  ; or  ya\a<ri- 
vos,  lacteus,  milky.)  Galaclirrhxa.  1.  An  excess  or 
overflowing  of  the  milk. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases,  Class  Genetica; 
Order,  Cenotica,  of  Good’s  Nosology.  Mislactation. 
It  comprehends  five  species,  viz.  Galactia  prematura ; 
defectura ; depravata ; crrotica ; virorum. 

Galactina.  (From  yaXa,  milk.)  Aliment  pre- 
pared of  milk. 

GALACTIRRHCE'A.  (From  ya\a , lftilk,  and  peto, 
to  flow.)  See  Galactia. 

Galacto'des.  (From  ya\a,  milk.)  In  Hippocrates 
it  signifies  both  milk-warm  and  a milky  colour. 

GALACTO'PHORUS.  (From  ya\a,  milk,  and 
(pepu),  to  bring  or  carry.)  1.  That  which  has  the  pro- 
perty of  increasing  the  secretion  of  the  milk. 

2.  The  excretory  ducts  of  the  glands  of  the  breasts 
of  women,  which  terminate  in  the  papilla,  or  nipple, 
are  so  called,  because  they  bring  the  milk  to  the  nipple. 

GALACTOPOIE'TIC.  (Galactopoieticus ; from 
ya\a , milk,  and  noise,  to  make.)  Milk-making,  the 
faculty  of  making  milk : applied  to  particular  foods, 
plants,  &c. 

GALACTOPO'SIA.  (From  ya\a,  milk,  and  nive, 
to  drink.)  The  method  of  curing  diseases  by  a milk 
diet. 

GALA'NGA.  (Perhaps  its  Indian  name.)  See 
Maranta  and  Kcempferia. 

Galanga  major.  See  Kcempferia  galanga'. 

Galanga  minor.  See  Maranta  Galanga. 

GALANGAL.  See  Maranta  Galanga. 

Galangal,  English.  See  Cyperas  longus. 

GALBANUM.  (From  chalbanah,  Heb.)  See  Bu- 
bon  galbanum. 

Ga'lbkum.  A medical  bracelet  worn  by  the  Romans. 

GA'LBULUS.  (The  name  of  the  nut,  or  little 
round  ball  of  the  cypress-tree.)  Gaertner  applies  this 
term,  the  classical  name  of  the  cypress  fruit,  which  is 
a true  strobilus,  to  a globular  spurious  berry  with 
three  or  more  seeds  formed  by  the  coalescing  of  a few 
scales,  of  a fertile  catkin  become  succulent,  which 
happens  in  the  Juniper. — Smith. 

Galbulus.  (From  galbus , yellow.)  When  the 
skin  of  the  body  is  naturally  yellow. 

GA'LDA.  A gum-resin,  mentioned  by  old  writers, 
but  totally  forgot  in  the  present  day,  and  not  to  be  ob- 
tained. Externally,  it  is  of  a brown  colour,  but  white 
within,  of  a hard  lamellated  structure,  and  smells  and 
tastes  somewhat  like  elemi.  When  burnt  it  gives  out 
an  agreeable  odour.  It  was  formerly  used  as  a warm 
stimulating  medicine,  and  applied  in  plasters  as  a 
strengthener. 

GA'LEA-  (From  ya\y,  a cat,  of  the  skin  of  which 
it  was  formerly  made.)  A helmet.  1.  In  anatomy, 
the  amnios  is  so  called,  because  it  surrounds  the  foetus 
like  a helmet. 

2.  In  surgery ; a bandage  for  the  head. 

3.  A species  of  headache  is  so  called,  when  it  sur- 
rounds the  head  like  a helmet. 

4.  In  botany  it  is  applied  to  upper  arched  lip  of  rinr 
gent  and  personate  corols.  See  Corolla . 

GALEANTHRO'PIA.  (This  term  seems  to  be 
from  ya\y,  a cat,  and  avdpwnos,  a man.)  It  is  a spe- 
cies of  madness,  in  which  a person  imagines  himself 
to  be  a cat,  and  imitates  its  manners. 

274 


GA'LEGA.  (From  ya\a,  milk  : so  named  because 
it  increases  the  milk  of  animals  which  eat  it.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  Ruta  copraria. 
See  Gale g a officinalis. 

Galega  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
goat’s  rue.  Galega.  Ruta  capraria.  From  the  little 
smelLand  taste  of  this  plant,  Galega  leguminibus 
strictis,  erectis ; foliolis  lanceolatis,  striatis,  nudis , 
of  Linnaeus,  it  may  be  supposed  to  possess  little  vir- 
tues. In  Italy,  the  leaves  are  eaten  among  salads. 

Galegje.  A species  of  senna  from  the  East  Indies. 
The  cassia  tora  of  Linnaeus. 

GALE'NA.  (From  yaXeiv,  to  shine.)  The  name 
of  an  ore  formed  by  the  combination  of  lead  with  sul- 
phur. A native  sulphuret  of  lead  ore. 

GALE'NIC.  That  practice  of  medicine  which  con- 
forms to  the  rules  of  Galen,  and  runs  much  upon  mul- 
tiplying herbs  and  roots  in  the  same  composition,  was 
long  called  Galenical  medicine,  after  the  manner  of 
Galen.  It  is  opposed  to  chemical  medicine,  which,  by 
the  force  of  fire,  and  a great  deal  of  art,  fetches  out 
the  virtues  of  bodies,  chiefly  mineral,  into  a small 
compass. 

Gale'nium.  (From  ya\rjvri,  galena.)  A cataplasm ; 
in  the  composition  of  which  was  the  galena.  In  Pau- 
lus  iEgineta  it  is  considered  as  anodyne. 

GALENUS,  Claudius,  was  born  at  Pergamus,  in 
Asia  Minor,  in  131.  His  father,  Nicon,  having  in- 
structed him  in  the  rudiments  of  knowledge,  sent  him 
to  attend  the  best  schools  of  philosophy.  Galen  soon 
displayed  his  judgment  by  selecting  what  appeared 
most  rational  from  the  different  sects ; but  he  totally 
rejected  the  Epicurean  system,  which  was  then  in 
fashion.  About  the  age  of  17,  he  began  his  attach- 
ment to  the  science  of  medicine,  over  which  he  was 
destined  to  preside  for  many  centuries  with  oracular 
authority.  During  his  youth,  he  travelled  much,  that 
he  might  converse  with  the  most  intelligent  physicians 
of  the  age,  and  inform  himself  concerning  tire  drugs 
brought  from  other  countries.  He  resided  several 
years  at  Alexandria,  which  w as  then  the  great  resort 
of  men  of  science,  and  the  best  school  of  medicine  in 
the  world.  At  the  age  of  28,  returning  to  his  native 
place,  he  met  with  distinguished  success  in  practice; 
but  four  years  after  he  attempted  to  establish  himself 
at  Rome.  Here  he  encountered  much  opposition  from 
his  professional  brethren,  who  stigmatized  him  as  a 
theorist,  and  even  as  a dealer  in  magic ; and  though 
he  gained  the  esteem  of  several  men  of  learning  and 
rank,  yet  wanting  temper  and  experience  sufficient  to 
maintain  a successful  contest  with  a numerous  and 
popular  party,  he  was  obliged  to  return  to  Pergamus 
within  five  years,  under  the  pretence  of  avoiding  the 
plague,  which  then  raged  at  Rome.  He  was,  however, 
soon  after  sent  for  to  attend  the  emperors  Marcus  Au 
relius  and  Lucius  Verus,  of  whom  the  latter  died ; and 
the  former  conceived  so  high  an  opinion  of  Galen,  that 
subsequently,  during  his  German  expedition,  he  com 
mitted  his  two  sons  to  the  care  of  that  physician. 
These  princes  were  seized  with  fevers,  in  which  Galen 
having  prognosticated  a favourable  issue,  contrary  to 
the  opinion  of  all  his  colleagues,  and  having  accord- 
ingly restored  them  to  health,  lie  attained  an  eminence 
of  reputation,  which  enabled  him  to  defy  the  power, 
and  finally  to  ruin  the  credit,  of  his  former  opponents. 
It  is  not  certain  whether  he  continued  at  Rome  till 
his  death,  nor  at  what  precise  period  this  occurred; 
but  Fabricius  asserts  that  he  attained  the  age  of  70, 
which  corresponds  to  the  7th  year  of  Se verus ; and 
his  writings  appear  to  indicate,  that  he  was  still  in 
that  city  in  the  early  part  of  this  emperor’s  reign.  The 
greatest  part  of  Galen’s  life  was  spent  in  the  zealous 
pursuit  of  knowledge,  and  especially  of  every  thing 
which  might  have  the  least  connexion  with  medicine ; 
and  he  is  said  to  have  composed  about  750  diflerent 
essays  on  such  subjects.  He  appears,  how'ever,  to  have 
been  too  much  elated  with  the  consciousness  of  his 
superior  endowments,  and  to  have  behaved  rather 
contemptuously  towards  his  brethren;  which  may 
have  inflamed  their  opposition  to  him.  The  chief  ob- 
ject in  his  writing  appears  to  be  to  illustrate  those  of 
Hippocrates,  which  he  thought  succeeding  physicians 
had  misunderstood  or  misrepresented:  in  this  he  has 
displayed  great  acuteness  and  learning,  though  he  has 
not  much  increased  the  stock  of  practical  information. 


GAL 


GAL 


His  example,  too,  had  the  unfortunate  effect  of  intro- 
ducing a taste  for  minute  distinctions  and  abstract 
speculations  ; while  the  diligent  observation  of  nature, 
which  distinguished  the  father  of  medicine,  fell  into  ne- 
glect. We  must  therefore  regret  that  the  splendour  of 
Galen’s  talents  so  completely  dazzled  his  successors, 
that,  until  about  the  middle  of  the  J7th  century,  his 
opinion  bore  almost  undivided  sway.  Numerous  edi- 
tions of  his  works,  in  the  original  Greek,  or  trgjjglajted 
into  Latin,  have  been  printed  in  modern  times. 

GALEO'BDOLON.  (From  yakt^felis,  and  {iSo- 
Xoj,  crepitus.)  See  Galeopsis. 

G ALEO'PSIS.  (From  ko\os , good,  and  o^tj,  vision : 
so  called  because  it  was  thought  good  for  the  sight,  or 
from  yaAr?,  a cat,  and  oipis,  aspect ; the  flowers  gap- 
ing like  the  open  mouth  of  that  animal.)  Galeobdo- 
lon.  See  Lamium  album. 

Galeri'culum  aponeuroticum.  A name  in  old 
writings  for  the  tendinous  expansion  which  lies  over 
the  pericranium. 

Galipot.  See  Barras. 

GA'LIUM.  (FromyaAa,  milk ; some  species  having 
the  property  of  coagulating  milk.)  1.  The  n&me  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Te- 
trandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  phannacopoeial  name  of  the  herb  cheese- 
rennet,  or  ladies’  bedstraw.  See  Galium  verum.. 

3.  A name  for  madder. 

Galium  album.  The  greater  ladies’  bedstraw.  See 
Galium  mollugu. 

Galium  aparine.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
goose-grass,  and  cleavers’  bees.  Cleavers;  Goose- 
share;  HayrifF.  Aparine ; Philantliropus ; Ampelo- 
carpus ; Omphalocarpus ; Izus;  Asparine;  Aspe- 
rula.  This  plant  is  common  in  our  hedges  and  ditches : 
Galium— foliis  octonis  lanceolatis  carinatis  scabris 
retrorsum  aculeatis , geniculis  venosis , fructu  liispido , 
of  Linnams.  The  expressed  juice  has  been  given  with 
advantage  as  an  aperient  and  diuretic  in  incipient 
dropsies;  but  the  character  in  which  it  has  ofiate  been 
chiefly  noticed,  is  that  of  a remedy  against  cancer.  A 
tea-cupful,  internally,  gradually  increased  to  half  a 
pint,  two  or  three  times  a day,  and  the  herb  applied,  in 
cataplasm,  externally,  has  been  said  to  cure  cancers. 
Such  beneficial  results  are  not  confirmed  by  the  expe- 
rience of  others. 

Galium  mollugo.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
greater  .ladies’  bedstraw.  Galium  album.  Galium — 
foliis  octonis,  ovato-linearibus,  subserratis , paten- 
tissimis , mucronatis ; caule  flaccido,  ramis  patentibus 
of  Linnaeus.  This  herb,  with  its  flowers,  is  used  me- 
dicinally. Five  ounces  or  more  of  the  expressed  juice, 
taken  every  evening  upon  an  empty  stomach,  is  said  to 
cure  epilepsy. 

Galium  verum.  The  systematic  name  of  the  true 
ladies’  bed-straw,  or  cheese-rennet.  Galium  of  the 
pharmacopoeias.  The  tops  of  this  plant,  Galium — 
foliis  octonis , linearibus , sulcatis;  ramis  floriferis, 
brevibus,  of  Linnaeus,  were  long  used  as  an  efficacious 
medicine  in  the  cure  of  epilepsy ; but,  in  the  practice 
of  the  present  day,  they  are  abandoned.  Indeed,  from 
the  sensible  qualities  of  the  plant,  little  can  be  expect- 
ed. The  leaves  and  flowers  possess  the  property  of 
curdling  milk ; it  is  on  that  account  styled  cheese- 
rennet. 

GALL.  See  Bile. 

GALL  SICKNESS.  (See  Fcbris  remittens.)  A 
popular  name  for  the  remitting  fever  occasioned  by 
marsh  miasmata,  in  the  Netherlands,  and  which  proved 
so  fatal  to  thousands  of  the  English  soldiers  after  the 
capture  of  Walcheren  in  the  year  1809.  Dr.  Lind  in- 
forms us,  that  at  Middleburg,  the  capital  of  Walcheren, 
a sickness  generally  reigns  towards  the  latter  end  of 
August  or  the  beginning  of  September,  which  is  always 
most  violent  after  hot  summers.  It  commences  after 
the  rains  which  fall  in  the  end  of  July  ; the  sooner  it 
begins  the  longer  it  continues,  and  it  is  only  checked 
by  the  coldness  of  the  weather.  Towards  the  end  of 
August  and  the  beginning  of  September,  it  is  a con- 
tinual burning  fever,  attended  with  a vomiting  of  bile, 
which  is  the  gall-sickness.  This  fever,  after  continu- 
ing three  or  four  days,  intermits  and  assumes  the  form 
of  a double  tertian ; leaving  the  patient  in  a fortnight 
or  perhaps  sooner.  Strangers,  that  have  been  accus- 
tomed to  breathe  a dry,  pure  air,  do  not  recover  so 
quickly.  Foreigners  in  indigent  circumstances,  such 
as  the  Scots  and  German  soldM’s,  who  were  garrisoned 


in  the  adjacent  places,  were  apt,  after  those  fevers, 
to  have  a swelling  in  the  legs,  and  a dropsy;  of  which 
many  died.  * *. 

These  diseases  are  the  same  with  the  double  tertians 
common  within  the  tropics.  Such  as  are  seized  with 
the  gall  sickness,  have  at  first  some  flushes  of  heat 
over  the  body,  a loss  of  appetite,  a white,  foul  tongue, 
a yellow  tinge  in  the  eyes,  and  a pale  colour  of  the  lips. 
Such  as  live  well,  drink  wine,  and  have  warm  clothes 
and  a good  lodging,  do  not  suffer  so  much  during  the 
sickly  season  as  the  poor  people  ; however,  these  dis- 
eases are  not  infectious,  and  seldom  prove  mortal  to 
the  natives. 

Sir  John  Pringle  observes,  that  the  prevailing  epi- 
demic of  autumn,  in  all  marshy  countries,  is  a fever 
of  an  intermitting  nature,  commonly  of  a tertian  form, 
but  of  a bad  kind;  which,  in  the  dampest  places  and 
worst  seasons,  appears  as  a double  tertian,  a remitting, 
or  even  an  ardent  fever.  But,  however  these  may  vary 
in  their  appearance,  according  to  the  constitution  of 
the  patient  and  other  circumstances,  they  are  all  of  a 
similar  nature.  For  though,  in  the  beginning  of  the 
epidemic,  when  the  heat,  or  rather  the  putrefaction  in 
the  air,  is  the  greatest,  they  assume  a continued  or  a 
remitting  form;  yet,  by  the  end  of  autumn,  they  usually 
terminate  in  regular  intermittents. 

But  although  in  the  gall  sickness  there  is  both  a 
redundance  and  a depravation  of  the  bile,  still  the  dis- 
ease cannot,  with  justice,  be  said  to  originate  wholly 
from  that  cause.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  the  dis- 
ease may  be  continued,  and  the  symptoms  aggravated 
by  an  increased  secretion  and  putrefaction  of  the  bile, 
occasioned  by  the  fever.  In  proportion  to  the  coolness 
of  the  season,  Or  the  height  and  dryness  of  the  ground, 
this  disease  is  milder,  remits  and  intermits  more  freely, 
and  removes  further  from  the  nature  of  a continued 
fever.  The  higher  ranks  of  people  in  general  are  the 
least  liable  to  the  diseases  of  the  marshes ; for  such 
countries  require  dry  houses,  apartments  raised  above 
the  ground,  moderate  exercise,  without  labour,  in  the 
sun,  or  evening  damps;  a just  quantity  of  fermented 
liquors,  plenty  of  vegetables  and  fresh  meats.  With- 
out such  helps,  not  only  strangers  but  the  natives  them- 
selves are  sickly,  especially  after  hot  and  close  sum- 
mers. The  hardiest  constitutions  are  very  little  ex- 
cepted more  than  others ; and  hence  the  British  in  the 
Netherlands  have  always  been  subject  to  this  fever. 

By  this  disease,  the  British  troops  were  harassed 
throughout  the  w ar,  from  1743  to  1747.  It  appeared 
in  the  month  of  August,  1743:  the  paroxysms  came 
on  in  the  evening,  with  great  heat,  thirst,  a violent 
headache,  and  often  a delirium.  These  symptoms 
lasted  most  of  the  night,  but  abated  in  the  morning, 
with  an  imperfect  sweat ; sometimes  witli  an  licemor- 
rhage  of  the  nose,  or  looseness.  The  stomach,  from 
the  beginning,  was  disordered  with  a nausea  and  sense 
of  oppression ; frequently  with  a bilious  and  offensive 
vomiting.  If  evacuations  were  either  neglected  or  too 
sparingly  used,  the  patient  fell  into  a continued  fever, 
and  sometimes  grew  yellow,  as  in  jaundice.  When 
the  season  w’as  further  advanced,  this  fever  wTas  at- 
tended with  a cough,  rheumatic  pains,  and  sizy  blood. 
The  officers,  being  better  accommodated  than  the  com- 
mon men,  and  the  cavalry,  who  had  cloaks  to  keep 
them  warm,  were  not  so  subject  to  it ; and  others,  who 
belonged  to  the  army,  but  lay  in  quarters,  were  least 
of  all  affected ; and  the  less  in  proportion  to  their  be- 
ing exposed  to  heats,  night  damps,  and  the  other  fa- 
tigues of  the  service.  In  this  manner  did  the  remitting 
fever  infest  the  army  for  the  remaining  years  of  the 
war : and  that  exactly  in  proportion  to  their  distance 
from  the  marshy  places,  of  which  wre  have  several 
notable  instances  in  Pringle’s  observations. 

GALL-BLADDER.  Vesicula  fellis.  An  oblong 
membraneous  receptacle,  situated  under  the  liver,  to 
which  it  is  attached  in  the  right  hypochondrium.  It 
is  composed  of  three  membranes,  a common,  fibrous, 
and  villous.  Its  use  is  to  retain  the  bile  which  regur- 
gitates from  the  hepatic  duct,  there  to  become  thicker, 
more  acrid,  and  bitter,  and  to  send  it  through  the 
cystic  duct,  which  proceeds  from  its  neck  into  the 
ductus  communis  choledochus,  to  be  sent  on  to  the 
duodenum. 

GALL-STONE.  Calculus  biliosus.  Biliary  con- 
cretion. Hard  concrete  bodies,  formed  in  the  gall- 
bladder of  animals.  Of  these  there  are  four  different 
kinds. 


375 


GAL 


GAL 


1.  The  first  has  a white  colour,  and  when  broken 
presents  crystalline  plates,  or  striae,  brilliant  and  white 
like  mica,  and  having  a soft,  greasy  feel.  Sometimes 
its  colour  is  yellow  or  greenish  ; and  it  has  constantly 
a nucleus  of  inspissated  bile.  Its  specific  gravity  is  in- 
ferior to  that  of  water  : Gren  found  the  specific  gravity 
of  one  0.803.  When  exposed  to  a heat  considerably 
greater  than  that  of  boiling  water,  this  crystallized 
calculus  softens  and  melts,  and  crystallizes  again  when 
the  temperature  is  lowered.  It  is  altogether  insoluble 
in  water ; but  hot  alkohol  dissolves  it  with  facility. 
Alkohol,  of  the  temperature  of  167°,  dissolves  one- 
twentieth  of  its  weight  of  this  substance ; but  alkohol, 
at  the  temperature  of  60°,  scarcely  dissolves  any  of 
it.  As  the  alkohol  cools,  the  matter  is  deposited  in 
brilliant  plates,  resembling  talc  or  boracic  acid.  It  is 
soluble  in  oil  of  turpentine.  When  melted,  it  has  the 
appearance  of  oil,  and  exhales  the  smell  of  melted 
wax ; when  suddenly  heated,  it  evaporates  altogether 
in  a thick  smoke.  It  is  soluble  in  pure  alkalies,  and 
the  solution  has  all  the  properties  of  a soap.  Nitric 
acid  also  dissolves  it;  but  it  is  precipitated  unaltered 
by  water. 

This  matter,  which  is  evidently  the  same  with  the 
crystals  Cadet  obtained  from  bile,  and  which  he  con- 
sidered as  analogous  to  sugar  of  milk,  has  a strong  re- 
semblance to  spermaceti.  Like  that  substance,  it  is 
of  an  oily  nature,  and  inflammable ; but  it  differs  from 
it  in  a variety  of  particulars.  Since  it  is  contained  in 
bile,  it  is  not  difficult  to  see  how  it  may  crystallize  in 
the  gall-bladder  if  it  happen  to  be  more  abundant  than 
usual ; and  the  consequence  must  be  a gall-stone  of 
this  species.  Fourcroy  found  a quantity  of  the  same 
substance  in  the  dried  human  liver.  He  called  it 
adipocere. 

2.  The  second  species  of  biliary  calculus  is  of  a 
round  or  polygonal  shape,  often  of  a gray  colour  exter- 
nally, and  brown  within.  It  is  formed  of  concentric 
layers  of  a matter,  which  seems  to  be  inspissated  bile ; 
and  there  is  usually  a nucleus  of  the  white  crystalline 
matter  at  the  centre.  For  the  most  part,  there  are 
many  of  this  species  of  calculus  in  the  gall-bladder 
together ; indeed,  it  is  frequently  filled  with  them.  The 
calculi  belonging  to  this  species  are  often  light  and 
friable,  and  of  a brownish-red  colour.  The  gall-stones 
of  oxen,  used  by  painters,  belong  to  this  species.  These 
are  also  adipocere. 

3.  The  third  species  of  calculi  are  most  numerous 
of  all.  Their  colour  is  often  deep  brown  or  green ; and 
when  broken,  a number  of  crystals  of  the  substance 
resembling  spermaceti  are  observable,  mixed  with  in- 
spissated bile.  The  calculi  belonging  to  these  three 
species  are  soluble  in  alkalies,  in  soap  ley,  in  alkohol, 
and  in  oils. 

4.  Concerning  the  fourth  species  of  gall-stone,  very 
little  is  known  with  accuracy.  Dr.  Saunders  tells  us, 
that  he  has  met  with  some  gall-stones  insoluble  both 
in  alkohol  and  oil  of  turpentine;  some  of  which  do 
not  flame,  but  become  red,  and  consume  to  ashes  like 
charcoal.  Haller  quotes  several  examples  of  similar 
calculi.  Gall-stones  often  occur  in  the  inferior  ani- 
mals, particularly  in  cows  and  hogs ; but  the  biliary 
concretions  of  these  animals  have  not  hitherto  been 
examined  with  much  attention. 

Gall-stones  often  lie  quiet;  so  that  until  dissection 
after  death,  some  are  never  known  to  exist;  but  when 
they  are  prevented  from  passing  through  the  gall-ducts, 
they  obstruct  the  passage  of  the  bile  into  the  intestines, 
and  produce  also  many  inconvenient  symptoms,  parti- 
cularly the  jaundice. 

The  diagnostics  of  this  disorder  are  generally  very 
obscure  and  uncertain : for  other  causes  produce  the 
same  kind  of  symptoms  as  those  which  occur  in  this 
disease.  The  usual  symptoms  are  a loss  of  appetite, 
a sense  of  fulness  in  the  stomach,  sickness,  and  vo- 
miting, languor,  inactivity,  sleepiness ; and,  if  the  ob- 
struction continues  for  a time,  there  is  wasting  of  the 
flesh ; yellowness  of  the  eyes,  skin,  and  urine ; whitish 
stools ; a pain  in  the  pit  of  the  stomach ; while  the 
pulse  remains  in  its  natural  state.  The  pain  excited 
by  an  obstruction  of  the  gall-ducts,  in  consequence  of 
gall-stones  passing  through  them,  and  this  not  affecting 
the  pulse,  is  considered  as  the  leading  pathognomonic 
symptom.  This  pain,  in  some,  is  extremely  acute,  in 
others  there  is  only  a slight  uneasiness  felt  about  the 
region  of  the  liver ; but  Us  particular  seat  is  the  gall- 


duct,  just  where  it  enters  the  duodenum.  In  some  pa- 
tients there  is  no  yellowness  of  the  skin ; in  others  it 
exists  for  several  months.  There  is  no  disease  more 
painful  than  this,  in  some  instances;  it  is  as  frequent 
as  any  other  affection  of  the  liver ; it  admits  of  much 
relief  from  medicine,  and  is  not  immediately  danger- 
ous to  the  patient.  See  Icterus. 

GA'LLA.  (From  Gallus,  a river  in  Bithynia.)  A 
gall.  See  Quercus  cerris. 

Galla  turcica.  See  Quercus  cerris. 

[“  Gal'll.  Galls.  Most  species  of  the  oak,  when 
stimulated  by  the  puncture  of  an  insect,  and  the  de- 
position of  its  egg,  produce  a kind  of  spherical  ex- 
crescence, which  serves  as  the  habitation  and  food  of 
the  young  larva  when  hatched.  These  excrescences 
are  known  by  the  general  name  of  galls,  and  are  pro- 
duced on  various  parts  of  the  trees  by  different  insects 
of  the  genera  Cynips,  and  Diplolepsis.  The  best  galls, 
and  those  which  predominate  in  commerce,  are 
brought  from  Smyrna,  Aleppo,  and  the  neighbouring 
countries.  The  Edinburgh  College  considers  them  as 
produced  on  the  Quercus  Cerris , a tree  growing  in 
the  south  of  Europe.  The  French  traveller,  Olivier, 
informs  us,  that  the  Asiatic  galls  are  the  product  of  a 
species  of  oak,  which  he  names  Quercus  infectoria , 
and  that  the  puncturing  insect  is  the  Diplolepsis  gal- 
ls tinctoriae  of  Geoffroy.  Both  the  insect  and  the  gall 
have  been  observed  in  France. 

Good  galls  are  round,  of  a dark  colour,  and  studded 
with  tubercles.  They  are  of  various  sizes,  under  that 
of  a cherry.  They  are  hard,  brittle,  and  exhibit  an 
irregular  and  partly  resinous  fracture.  Their  taste  is 
highly  astringent,  and  somewhat  bitter  and  acrid.  Those 
which  have  been  perforated  by  the  insect  are  of  an 
inferior  quality,  their  central  portion  being  consumed. 
The  chemical  constituents,  which  give  to  galls  their 
chief  value,  are  tannin  and  gallic  acid.  Besides  these, 
they  contain,  according  to  Davy,  extractive  mucilage  ; 
according  to  Bronchi,  a concrete,  volatile  oil ; and  ac- 
cording to  Braconnot,  another  acid,  which  he  calls 
ellagic  acid.  Chemists,  however,  are  not  agreed  as 
to  their  entire  composition.  It  is  obvious,  that  the 
presence  or  absence  of  the  larva,  as  well  as  its  stage 
of  growth,  must  materially  affect  the  analysis. 

Most  metallic  salts  produce  precipitates  with  infu- 
sion of  galls,  consisting  of  the  metallic  oxides,  tannin, 
and  gallic  acid.  It  is  questionable  how  far  the  astrin- 
gency  of  the  galls  is  affected  by  such  combinations. 
The  sulphuric  and  muriatic  acids,  lime  water,  and  the 
alkaline  carbonates,  also,  occasion  precipitates.  Gela- 
tin and  starch  combine  immediately  with  the  tannin 
of  the  galls. 

Galls  are  among  the  most  powerful  vegetable  astrin- 
gents. They  are  sometimes  given  internally,  in  doses 
of  a scruple ; but  their  chief  medical  use  is  as  a local 
remedy  in  the  form  of  gargles,  and  in  the  ointment ; 
which  see.  On  account  of  the  purple  or  black  colour, 
which  they  strike  with  salts  of  iron,  they  are  exten- 
sively consumed  in  dying  and  ink-making.  For  the 
latter  purpose,  no  substitute  can  be  safely  used  instead 
of  them.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

GALLIC  ACID.  Acidum  gallicum.  An  acid  found 
in  vegetable  substances  possessing  astringent  proper- 
ties, but  most  abundantly  in  the  excrescences  termed 
galls,  whence  it  derives  its  name.  It  may  be  obtained 
by  macerating  galls  in  water,  filtering,  and  suffering 
the  liquor  to  stand  exposed  to  the  air.  It  will  grow 
mouldy,  be  covered  with  a thick  glutinous  pellicle, 
abundance  of  glutinous  flocks  will  fall  down,  and,  in 
the  course  of  two  or  three  months,  the  sides  of  the 
vessel  will  appear  covered  with  small  yellowish  crys- 
tals, abundance  of  which  will  likewise  be  found  on 
the  under  surface  of  the  supernatant  pellicle.  These 
crystals  may  be  purified  by  solution  in  alkohol,  and 
evaporation  to  dryness. 

Or  muriate  of  tin  may  be  added  to  the  infusion  of 
galls,  till  no  more  precipitate  falls  down  ; the  excess  of 
oxide  of- tin  remaining  in  the  solution,  may  then  be 
precipitated  by  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas,  and  the 
liquor  will  yield  crystals  of  gallic  acid  by  evaporation. 

A more  simple  process,  however,  i9  to  boil  an  ounce 
of  powdered  galls  in  sixteeh  ounces  of  water  to  eight, 
and  strain.  Dissolve  two  ounces  of  alum  in  water, 
precipitate  the  alumina  by  carbonate  of  potassa ; and 
after  edulcorating  it  completely  by  repeated  ablutions, 
add  it  to  the  decoction,  frequently  stirring  the  mixture 


GAL 


GAL 


with  a glass  rod.  The  next  day  filter  the  mixture, 
wash  the  precipitate  with  warm  water,  till  this  will  no 
longer  blacken  sulphate  of  iron;  mix  the  washings 
with  the  filtered  liquor,  evaporate,  and  the  gallic  acid 
will  be  obtained  in  fine  needled  crystals. 

These  crystals  obtained  in  any  of  these  ways,  how- 
ever, are  contaminated  with  a small  portion  of  ex- 
tractive matter ; and  to  purify  them  they  may  be 
placed  in  a glass  capsule  in  a sand-heat,  and  sub- 
limed into  another  capsule  inverted  over  this,  and  kept 
cooi. 

The  gallic  acid  placed  on  a red-hot  iron,  burns  with 
flame,  and  emits  an  aromatic  smell,  not  unlike  that  of 
benzoic  add.  It  is  soluble  in  20  parts  of  cold  water, 
and  in  three  parts  at  a boiling  heat.  It  is  more  soluble 
in  alkohol,  which  takes  up  an  equal  weight  if  heated, 
and  one-fourth  of  its  weight  cold. 

It  has  an  acido-astringent  taste,  and  reddens  tinc- 
ture of  litmus.  It  does  not  attract  humidity  from  the 
air. 

This  acid,  in  its  combinations  with  the  salifiable 
bases,  presents  some  remarkable  phenomena.  If  we 
pour  its  aqueous  solution  by  slow  degrees  into  lime, 
barytes,  or  strontites  water,  there  will  first  be  formed  a 
greenish-white  precipitate.  As  the  quantity  of  acid  is 
increased,  the  precipitate  changes  to  a violet  hue,  and 
eventually  disappears.  The  liquid  has  then  acquired 
a reddish  tint.  Among  the  salts,  those  only  of  black 
oxide  and  red  oxide  of  iron,  are  decomposed  by  the 
pure  gallic  acid.  It  forms  a blue  precipitate  with  the 
first,  and  a brown  with  the  second.  But  when  this 
acid  is  united  with  tannin,  it  decomposes  almost  all  the 
salts  of  the  permanent  metals. 

Concentrated  sulphuric  acid  decomposes  and  carbo- 
nizes it ; and  the  nitric  acid  converts  it  into  malic  and 
oxalic  acids. 

United  with  barytes,  strontian,  lime,  and  magnesia, 
it  forms  salts  of  a dull  yellow  colour,  which  are  little 
soluble,  but  more  so  if  their  base  be  in  excess.  With 
alkalies  it  forms  salts  that  are  not  very  soluble  in 
general. 

Its  most  distinguishing  characteristic  is  its  great 
affinity  for  metallic  oxides,  so  as,  when  combined  with 
tannin,  to  take  them  from  powerful  acids.  The  more 
readily  the  metallic  oxides  part  with  their  oxygen,  the 
more  they  are  alterable  by  the  gallic  acid.  To  a solu- 
tion of  gold,  it  imparts  a green  hue  ; and  a brown  pre- 
cipitate is  formed,  which  readily  passes  to  the  metallic 
state,  and  covers  the  solution  with  a shining  golden 
pellicle.  With  nitric  solution  of  silver,  it  produces  a 
similar  effect.  Mercury  it  precipitates  of  an  orange- 
yellow;  copper,  brown;  bismuth,  of  a lemon  colour ; 
lead,  white ; iron,  black.  Platina,  zinc,  tin,  cobalt, 
and  manganese,  are  not  precipitated  by  it. 

The  gallic  acid  is  of  extensive  use  in  the  art  of  dy- 
ing, as  it  constitutes  one  of  the  principal  ingredients  in 
all  the  shades  of  black,  and  is  employed  to  fix  or  im- 
prove several  other  colours.  It  is  well  known  as  an 
ingredient  in  ink. 

GA'LLICUS.  Belonging  to  the  French : applied  to 
the  venereal  disease.  See  Lues  venerea. 

GALLINA'GO.  (Diminutive  of  gallus,  a cock.) 
1.  The  woodcock. 

2.  An  eminence  within  the  prostate  gland  is  called 
caput  callinaginis , from  its  fancied  resemblance  to  a 
woodcock’s  head. 

Galli'trichis.  Corrupted  from  callitrichis,  or  cal- 
litrichum.  See  Callitriche. 

Ga'llium.  See  Galium.  * 

GA'LVANISM.  A professor  of  anatomy,  in  the 
university  of  Bologna,  named  Galvani , was  one  day 
making  experiments  on  electricity  in  his  elaboratory  : 
near  the  machine  were  some  frogs  that  had  been  flay- 
ed, the  limbs  of  which  became  convulsed  every  time  a 
spark  was  drawn  from  the  apparatus.  Galvani,  sur- 
prised at  this  phenomenon,  made  it  a subject  of  inves- 
tigation, and  discovered  that  metals,  applied  to  the 
nerves  and  muscles  of  these  animals,  occasioned  power- 
ful and  sudden  contractions,  when  disposed  in  a cer- 
tain manner.  He  gave  the  name  of  animal  electricity 
to  this  order  of  new  phenomena,  from  the  analogy  that 
he  considered  existing  between  these  effects  and  those 
produced  by  electricity. 

The  name  animal  electricity  has  been  superseded, 
notwithstanding  the  great  analogy  that  exists  between 
thp  effects  of  electricity  and  those  of  Galvanism,  in 
favour  of  the  latter  term ; which  is  not  only  more 


applicable  to  the  generality  of  the  phenomena,  but 
likewise  serves  to  perpetuate  the  memory  of  the  dis- 
coverer. 

In  order  to  give  rise  to  Galvanic  effects  in  animal 
bodies  it  is  necessary  to  establish  a communication 
between  two  points  of  one  series  of  nervous  and  mus- 
cular organs.  In  this  manner  a circle  is  formed,  one 
arch  of  which  consists  of  the  animal  parts,  rendered 
the  subject  of  experiment,  while  the  other  arch  is 
composed  of  excitatory  instruments,  which  generally 
consist  of  several  pieces,  some  placed  under  the  ani- 
mal parts  called  supporters,  others  destined  to  establish 
a communication  between  the  latter,  are  called  con- 
ductors. To  form  a complete  Galvanic  circle,  take 
the  thigh  of  a frog,  deprived  of  its  skin ; detach  the 
crural  nerve,  as  far  as  the  knee ; put  it  on  a piece  of 
zinc ; put  the  muscles  of  the  leg  on  a piece  of  silver ; 
then  finish  the  excitatory  arch,  and  complete  the  Gal- 
vanic circle  by  establishing  a communication  by  means 
of  the  two  supporters ; by  means  of  iron  or  copper- 
wire,  pewter  or  lead.  The  instant  that  the  communi- 
cators touch  the  two  supporters,  a part  of  the  animal 
arch  formed  by  the  two  supporters  will  be  convulsed. 
Although  this  disposition  of  the  animal  parts,  and  of 
Galvanic  instruments,  be  most  favourable  to  the  deve- 
lopement  of  the  phenomena,  yet  the  composition  of  the 
animal  and  excitatory  arch  may  be  much  varied. 
Thus  contractions  are  obtained,  by  placing  the  two 
supporters  under  the  nerve,  and  leaving  the  muscle  out 
of  the  circle,  which  proves  that  nerves  essentially  con- 
stitute the  animal  arch. 

It  is  not  necessary  for  nerves  to  be  entire  in  order  to 
produce  contractions.  They  take  place  whether  the 
organs  be  tied  or  cut  through,  provided  there  exists  a 
simple  contiguity  between  the  divided  ends.  This 
proves  that  we  cannot  strictly  conclude  what  happens 
in  muscular  action,  from  that  which  takes  place  in 
Galvanic  phenomena ; since,  if  a nerve  be  tied  or  di- 
vided, the  muscles  on  which  this  is  distributed  lose  the 
power  of  action. 

The  cuticle  is  an  obstacle  to  Galvanic  effects ; they 
are  always  feebly  manifested  in  parts  covered  by  it. 
When  it  is  moist,  fine,  and  delicate,  the  effect  is  not 
entirely  interrupted.  Humboldt,  after  having  detach- 
ed the  cuticle  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  neck  and 
back,  by  means  of  two  blisters,  applied  plates  of 
metal  to  the  bare  cutis,  and,  at  the  moment  of  estab- 
lishing a communication,  he  experienced  sharp  prick- 
ings, accompanied  with  a sero-sanguineous  discharge. 

If  a plate  of  zinc  be  placed  under  the  tongue,  and  a 
flat  piece  of  silver  on  its  superior  surface,  on  making 
them  touch  each  other,  an  acerb  taste  will  be  perceiv- 
ed, accompanied  with  a slight  trembling. 

The  excitatory  arch  may  be  constructed  with  three, 
two,  or  even  one  metal  only,  with  alloys,  amalgams, 
or  other  metallic  or  mineral  combinations,  carbonated 
substances,  &c.  It  is  observed  that  metals  which  are  * 
in  general  the  most  powerful  excitors,  induce  contrac- 
tions so  much  the  more  as  they  have  an  extent  of  sur- 
face. Metals  are  all  more  or  less  excitants ; and  it 
is  observed  that  zinc,  gold,  silver,  pewter,  are  of 
the  highest  rank;  then  copper,  lead,  nickel,  anti- 
mony, &c. 

Galvanic  susceptibility,  like  muscular  irritability,  is 
exhausted  by  too  long  continued  exercise,  and  is  re- 
cruited by  repose.  Immersion  of  nerves  and  muscles 
in  alkohol  and  opiate  solutions  diminishes,  and  even 
destroys,  this  susceptibility,  in  tne  same  manner, 
doubtless,  as  the  immoderate  use  of  these  substances 
in  the  living  man  blunts,  and  induces  paralysis  in  mus- 
cular action.  Immersion  in  oxymuriatic  acid  restores 
the  fatigued  parts,  to  be  again  acted  on  by  the  stimulus. 
Animals  killed  by  the  repeated  discharge  of  an  electric 
battery,  acquire  an  increase  of  Galvanic  susceptibility  ; 
and  this  property  subsists  unchanged  in  animals  de- 
stroyed by  submersion  in  mercury,  pure  hydrogen 
gas,  azote,  and  ammonia;  and  finally,  it  is  totally 
annihilated  in  animals  suffocated  by  the  vapour  of 
charcoal. 

Galvanic  susceptibility  is  extinct  in  the  muscles  of 
animals  of  warm  blood,  in  proportion  as  vital  heat  is 
dissipated ; sometimes  even  when  life  is  terminated  in 
convulsions,  contractility  cannot  be  put  into  action, 
although  warmth  be  not  completely  gone,  as  though 
the  vital  property  were  consumed  by  the  convulsion, 
amidst  which  the  animals  had  expired.  In  those  of 
cold  blood,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  more  durable.  The 

377 


GAL 


GAL 


t 


thighs  of  frogs,  long  after  being  separated  from  every 
thing,  and  even  to  the  instant  of  incipient  putrefaction, 
are  influenced  by  Galvanic  stimuli ; doubtless,  because 
irritability,  in  these  animals,  is  less  intimately  connect- 
ed with  respiration,  and  life  more  divided  among  the 
different  organs,  which  have  less  occasion  to  act  on 
each  other  lor  the  execution  of  its  phenomena.  The 
Galvanic  chain  does  not  produce  sensible  actions  (that 
is,  contractions,)  until  the  moment  it  is  completed,  by 
establishing  a communication  with  the  parts  consti- 
tuting it.  During  the  time  it  is  complete,  that  is, 
throughout  the  whole  space  of  time  that  the  commu- 
nication remains  established,  every  thing  remains 
tranquil ; nevertheless,  Galvanic  influence  is  not  sus- 
pended : in  fact,  excitability  is  evidently  increased,  or 
diminished,  in  muscles  that  have  been  long  continued 
in  the  Galvanic  chain,  according  to  the  difference  of 
the  reciprocal  situation  of  the  connecting  metals. 

If  silver  has  been  applied  to  nerves,  and  zinc  to 
muscles,  the  irritability  of  the  latter  increases  in  pro- 
portion to  the  time  they  have  remained  in  the  chain. 
By  this  method,  the  thighs  of  frogs  have  been  revivi- 
fied in  some  degree,  and  afterward  become  sensible  to 
stimuli,  that  before  had  ceased  to  act  on  them.  By  dis- 
tributing the  metals  in  an  inverse  manner,  applying 
zinc  to  nerves  and  silver  to  muscles,  an  effect  abso- 
lutely contrary  is  observed ; and  the  muscles  that  pos- 
sess the  most  lively  irritability  when  placed  in  the 
chain,  seem  to  be  rendered  entirely  paralytic  if  they 
remain  long  in  this  situation. 

This  difference  evidently  depends  on  the.direction  of 
the  Galvanic  fluid,  determined  towards  the  muscles  or 
nerves,  according  to  the  manner  in  which  these  metals 
are  disposed,  and  this  is  of  some  importance  to  be 
known  for  the  application  of  Galvanic  means  to  the 
cure  of  diseases. 

Galvanic  Pile. — Volta’s  apparatus  is  as  follows  : — 

Raise  a pile,  by  placing  a plate  of  zinc,  a flat  piece 
of  wet  card,  and  a plate  of  silver,  successively ; then  a 
second  piece  of  zinc,  &c.  until  the  elevation  is  several 
feet  high ; for  the  effects  are  greater  in  proportion  to  its 
height ; then  touch  both  extremities  of  the  pile,  at  the 
same  instant,  with  one  piece  of  iron  wire;  at  the  mo- 
ment of  qontact,  a spark  is  excited  from  the  extremi- 
ties of  the  pile,  and  luminous  points  are  often  perceived 
at  different  heights,  where  the  zinc  and  silver  come 
into  mutual  contact.  The  zinc  end  of  this  pile  appears 
to  be  negatively  electrified ; that  formed  by  the  silver, 
on  the  contrary,  indicates  marks  of  positive  electricity. 

If  we  touch  both  extremities  of  the  pile,  after  having 
dipped  our  hands  into  water,  or,  what  is  better,  a sa- 
line solution,  a commotion,  followed  by  a disagreeable 
prickling  in  the  fingers  and  elbow,  is  felt. 

If  we  place  in  a tube  filled  with  water,  and  herme- 
tically closed  by  two  corks,  the  extremities  of  two 
wires  of  the  same  metal  which  are  in  contact  at  the 
other  extremity,  one  with  the  summit,  the  other  with 
the  base  of  the  pile ; these  ends,  even  when  separated 
only  by  the  space  of  a few  lines,  experience  evident 
changes  at  the  instant  the  extremities  of  the  pile  are 
touched;  the  wire  in  contact  with  that  part  of  the  pile 
composed  of  silver  becomes  covered  with  bullae  of  hy- 
drogen gas ; that  which  touches  the  extremity  formed 
by  zinc,  becomes  oxidized,  or  gives  off'  oxygen  gas. 
Fourcroy  attributes  this  phenomenon  to  the  decompo- 
sition of  water  by  the  Galvanic  fluid,  which  abandons 
the  oxygen  to  the  metal  that  touches  the  positive  ex- 
tremity of  the  pile ; then  conducts  the  other  gas  invisi- 
bly to  the  end  of  the  other  wire  there  to  be  disen- 
gaged. 

Galvanic  Trough. — This  is  a much  more  conve- 
nient apparatus.  Plates  of  two  metals,  commonly 
zinc  and  copper,  are  fastened  together,  and  cemented 
into  a wooden  trough,  so  as  to  form  a number  of  cells ; 
or  earthenware  troughs  with  partitions  being  procured, 
the  metals  connected  by  a slip,  are  suspended  over 
these,  so  that  in  each  cell,  except  at  the  ends,  there  is  a 
plate  of  each  metal ; then  a diluted  acid,  (usually  the 
sulphuric,  nitric,  or  muriatic  mixed  with  from  twelve 
to  twenty  parts  of  water,)  is  poured  into  the  trough. 
It  is  necessary  that  the  metals  be  placed  in  the  same 
order  throughout,  or  one  series  will  counteract  another. 
The  zinc  end  becomes  negative,  the  copper  positive  ; 
and  the  power  is  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  the 
series:  and  several  such  troughs  may  be  connected 
together,  so  as  to  form  a most  powerful  apparatus. 

From  the  number  of  experiments  of  Davy,  many 


new  and  important  facts  have  been  established,  and 
Galvanism  has  been  found  one  of  the  most  powerful 
agents  in  chemistry : by  its  influence,  platina  wire  nas 
been  melted  ; gold,  silver,  copper,  and  most  of  the  me- 
tals, have  easily  been  burnt ; the  fixed  alkalies,  and 
many  of  the  earths,  have  been  made  to  appear  as  con- 
sisting of  a metallic  base,  and  oxygen  ; compound  sub- 
stances, which  were  before  extremely  difficult  to  decom- 
pose, are  now,  by  the  aid  of  Galvanism,  easily  resolved 
into  their  constituents. 

The  Galvanic  influence  has  been  considered  by  some 
practitioners  as  likely  to  increase  the  nervous  influence 
in  paralyzed  and  debilitated  states  of  the  muscular  sys- 
tem, and  many  ingenious  ways  of  applying  it  have 
been  resorted  to ; but  it  does  not  seem  to  have  been 
useful.  Dr.  Ure’s  observations  and  experiments  on 
this  subject  and  on  Galvanism  are  highly  interesting 
The  following  account  of  ihem  is  extracted  from  his 
Chemical  Dictionary.  “ Many  experiments,”  he  ob- 
serves, “have  oeen  performed,  in  this  country  and 
abroad,  on  the  bodies  of  criminals,  soon  after  their 
execution.  Vassali,  Julio,  and  Rossi,  made  an  ample 
set,  on  several  bodies  decapitated  at  Turin.  They 
paid  particular  attention  to  the  effect  of  Galvanic 
electricity  on  the  heart,  and  other  involuntary  muscles : 
a subject  of  much  previous  controversy.  Volta  as- 
serted, that  these  muscles  are  not  at  all  sensible  to  this 
electric  power.  Fowler  maintained,  that  they  were 
affected;  but  with  difficulty  and  in  a slight  degree. 
This  opinion  was  confirmed  by  Vassali;  who  further 
showed,  that  the  muscles  of  the  stomach  and  intes- 
tines might  thus  also  be  excited.  Aldini,  on  the  con- 
trary, declared,  that  he  could  not  affect  the  heart  by  his 
most  powerful  Galvanic  arrangements.” 

Most  of  the  above  experiments  were  however  made, 
either  without  a voltaic  battery,  or  with  piles,  feeble 
in  comparison  with  those  now  employed.  Those  in- 
deed performed  on  the  body  of  a criminal,  at  Newgate, 
in  which  the  limbs  were  violently  agitated;  the. eyes 
opened  and  shut ; the  mouth  and  jaws  worked  about, 
and  the  whole  face  thrown  into  frightful  convulsions, 
were  made  by  Aldini,  with,  I believe,  a considerable 
series  of  voltaic  plates. 

A circumstance  of  the  first  moment,  in  my  opinion, 
has  been  too  much  overlooked  in  experiments  of  this 
kind, — that  a muscular  mass  through  which  the  Gal- 
vanic energy  is  directly  transmitted,  exhibits  very 
weak  contractile  movements,  in  comparison  with  those 
which  can  be  excited  by  passing  the  influence  along 
the  principal  nerve  of  the  muscle.  Inattention  to  this 
important  distinction,  I conceive  to  be  the  principal 
source  of  the  slender  effects  hitherto  produced  in  such 
experiments  on  the  heart,  and  other  muscles,  indepen- 
dent of  the  will.  It  ought  also  to  be  observed,  that  too 
little  distinction  has  been  made  between  the  positive 
and  negative  poles  of  the  battery ; though  there  are 
good  reasons  for  supposing,  that  their  powers  on  mus- 
cular contraction  are  by  no  means  the  same. 

According  to  Ritter,  the  electricity  of  the  positive 
pole  augments,  while  the  negative  diminishes,  the  ac- 
tions of  life.  Tumefaction  of  parts  is  produced  by  the 
former ; depression  by  the  latter.  The  pulse  of  the 
hand,  he  says,  held  a few  minutes  in  contact  with  the 
positive  pole,  is  strengthened ; that  of  the  one  in  con- 
tact with  the  negative  is  enfeebled:  the  former  is  ac  - 
companied with  a sense  of  heat ; the  latter  with  a 
feeling  of  coldness.  Objects  appear  to  a positively 
electrified  eye,  larger,  brighter,  and  red ; while  to  one 
negatively  electrified,  they  seem  smaller,  less  distinct, 
and  bluish,— colours  indicating  opposite  extremities  of 
the  prismatic  spectrum.  The  acid  and  alkalines  tastes, 
when  the  tongue  is  acted  on  in  succession  by  the  two 
electricities,  are  well  known,  and  have  been  inge- 
niously accounted  for  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  in  his  admirable 
Bakerian  lectures.  The  smell  of  oxymuriatic  acid,  and 
of  ammonia,  are  said  by  Ritter  to  be  the  opposite 
odours,  excited  by  the  two  opposite  poles ; as  a full 
body  of  sound  and  a sharp  tone  are  the  corresponding 
effects  on  the  ears.  These  experiments  require  verifi- 
cation. 

Consonant  in  some  respects,  though  not  in  all,  with 
these  statements,  are  the  doctrines  taught  by  a London 
practitioner,  experienced  in  the  administration  of  me- 
dical electricity.  He  affirms,  that  the  influence  ol  the 
electrical  fluid  of  our  common  machines,  in  the  cure 
of  diseases,  may  be  referred  to  three  distinct  heads ; 
first,  the  form  of  radii,  when  projected  from  a point 


GAL 


GAL 


positively  electrified ; secondly,  that  of  a star,  or  the 
negative  fire,  concentrated  on  a brass  ball ; thirdly,  the 
Leyden  explosion.  To  each  of  these  forms  he  assigns 
a specific  action.  The  first  acts  as  a sedative,  allaying 
morbid  activity ; the  second  as  a stimulant ; and  the 
last  has  a deobstruent  operation,  in  dispersing  chronic 
tumours.  An  ample  narrative  of  cases  is  given  in 
confirmation  of  these  general  propositions.  My  own 
experience  leads  me  to  suppose,  that  the  negative  pole 
of  a Voltaic  battery  gives  more  poignant  sensations 
than  the  positive. 

The  most  precise  and  interesting  researches  on  the 
relation  between  Voltaic  electricity  and  the  phenomena 
of  life,  are  those  contained  in  Dr.  Wilson  Philip’s  Dis- 
sertations in  the  Philosophical  Transactions,  as  well 
as  in  his  experimental  Inquiry  into  the  Laws  of  the 
Vital  Functions,  more  recently  published. 

In  his  earlier  researches  he  endeavoured  to  prove, 
that  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  the  action  of  the 
involuntary  muscles,  were  independent  of  the  nervous 
influence.  In  a late  paper,  read  in  January,  1816,  he 
showed  the  immediate  dependence  of  the  secretory 
functions  on  the  nervous  influence. 

The  eighth  pair  of  nerves  distributed  to  the  stomach, 
and  subservient  to  digestion,  were  divided  by  incisions 
in  the  necks  of  several  living  rabbits.  After  the  ope- 
ration, the  parsley  which  they  ate  remained  without 
alteration  in  their  stomachs;  and  the  animals,  after 
evincing  much  difficulty  of  breathing,  seemed  to  die  of 
suffocation.  But  when  in  other  rabbits,  similarly 
treated,  the  Galvanic  power  was  transmitted  along  the 
nerve,  below  its  section,  to  a disc  of  silver,  placed 
closely  in  contact  with  the  skin  of  the  animal,  oppo- 
site to  its  stomach,  no  difficulty  of  breathing  occurred. 
The  Voltaic  action  being  kept  up  for  twenty-six  hours, 
the  rabbits  were  then  killed,  and  the  parsley  was  found 
in  as  perfectly  digested  a state,  as  that  in  healthy  rab- 
bits fed  at  the  same  time ; and  their  stomachs  evolved 
the  smell  peculiar  to  that  of  a rabbit  during  digestion. 
These  experiments  were  several  times  repeated  with 
similar  results. 

Hence  it  appears  that  the  Galvanic  energy  is  capable 
of  supplying  the  place  of  the  nervous  influence,  so 
that,  while  under  it,  the  stomach,  otherwise  inactive, 
digests  food  as  usual.  I am  not,  however,  wining  to 
adopt  the  conclusion  drawn  by  its  ingenious  author, 
that  the  identity  of  Galvanic  electricity  and  nervous 
influence  is  established  by  these  experiments.’  They 
clearly  show  a remarkable  analogy  between  these  two 
powers,  since  the  one  may  serve  as  a substitute  for  the 
other.  It  might  possibly  be  urged  by  the  anatomist, 
that  as  the  stomach  is  supplied  by  tw’igs  of  other 
nerves,  which  communicate  under  the  place  of  Dr. 
Philip’s  section  of  the  par  vagum , the  Galvanic  fluid 
may  operate  merely  as  a powerful  stimulus,  exciting 
those  slender  twigs  to  perform  such  an  increase  of  ac- 
tion, as  may  compensate  for  the  want  of  the  principal 
nerve.  The  above  experiments  were  repeated  on  dogs, 
with  like  results;  the  battery  never  being  so  strong  as 
to  occasion  painful  shocks. 

The.  removal  of  dyspnoea,  as  stated  above,  led  him 
to  try  Galvanism  as  a remedy  in  asthma.  By  transmit- 
ting its  influence  from  the  nape  of  the  neck  to  the  pit 
of  tlie  stomach,  he  gave  decided  relief  in  every  one  of 
twenty-two  cases,  of  which  four  were  in  private  prac- 
tice, and  eighteen  in  the  Worcester  Infirmary.  The 
power  employed  varied  from  ten  to  twenty -five  pairs. 

The  general  inferences  deduced  by  him  from  his  mul- 
tiplied experiments,  are,  that  Voltaic  electricity  is 
capable  of  effecting  the  formation  of  the  secreted  fluids, 
when  applied  to  the  blood  in  the  same  way  in  which 
the  nervous  influence  is  applied  to  it ; and  that  it  is 
capable  of  occasioning  an  evolution  of  caloric  from 
arterial  blood.  When  the  lungs  are  deprived  of  the 
nervous  influence,  by  which  their  function  is  impeded, 
and  even  destroyed,  when  digestion  is  interrupted,  by 
withdrawing  this  influence  from  the  stomach,  these 
two  vital  functions  are  renewed  by  exposing  them  to 
the  influence  of  a Galvanic  trough.  ‘ Hence,’  says  he, 

‘ Galvanism  seems  capable  of  performing  all  the  func- 
tions fo  the  nervous  influence  in  the  animal  economy ; 
but  obviously  it  cannot  excite  the  functions  of  animal 
life,  unless  when  acting  ©n  parts  endowed  with  the 
living  principle.’ 

These  results  of  Dr.  Philip  have  been  recently  con- 
firmed by  Dr.  Clarke  Abel,  of  Brighton,  who  employed, 
in  one  of  the  repetitions  of  the  experiments,  a com- 


j paratively  weak,  and  in  the  other  a considerable 
power  of  Galvanism.  In  the  former,  although  the  Gal- 
vanism was  not  of  sufficient  power  to  occasion  evi- 
dent digestion  of  the  food,  yet  the  efforts  to  vomit,  and 
the  difficulty  of  breathing,  constant  effects  of  dividing 
the  eighth  pair  of  nerves,  were  prevented  by  it.  These 
symptoms  recurred  when  it  was  discontinued,  and  va- 
nished on  its  reapplication.  ‘The  respiration  of  the 
animal,’  he  observes,  ‘ continued  quite  free  during  the 
experiment,  except  when  the  disengagement  of  the 
nerves  from  the  tin-foil  rendered  a short  suspension 
of  the  Galvanism  necessary  during  their  readjustment.’ 
The  nongalvanized  rabbit  breathed  with  difficulty, 
wheezed  audibly,  and  made  frequent  attempts  to  vo- 
mit.’ Jn  the  latter  experiment,  in  which  the  greater 
power  of  Galvanism  was  employed,  digestion  went  on 
as  in  Dr.  Philip’s  experiments. — Jour.  Sc.  ix. 

Gallois,  an  eminent  French  physiologist,  had  endea- 
voured to  prove,  that  the  motion  of  the  heart  depends 
entirely  upon  the  spinal  marrow,  and  immediately 
ceases  when  the  spinal  marrow  is  removed  or  de- 
stroyed. Dr.  Philip  appears  to  have  refuted  this  no- 
tion by  the  following  experiments.  Babbits  were  ren- 
dered insensible  by  a blow  on  the  occiput ; the  spinal 
marrow  and  brain  were  then  removed,  and  the  respira 
tion  kept  up  by  artificial  means  ; the  motion  of  the 
heart,  and  the  circulation,  were  carried  on  as  usual. 
When  spirit  of  wine  or  opium  was  applied  to  the  spi- 
nal marrow  or  brain,  the  rate  of  the  circulation  was 
accelerated. 

A middle-sized,  athletic,  and  extremely  muscular 
man,  about  thirty  years  of  age,  was  the  subject  of  the 
following  highly  interesting  experiments.  He  was 
suspended  from  the  gallows  nearly  an  hour,  and 
made  no  convulsive  struggle  after  he  dropped  ; while 
a thief,  executed  along  with  him,  was  violently  agi- 
tated for  a considerable  time.  He  was  brought  to  the 
anatomical  theatre  of  our  university  in  about  ten  mi- 
nutes after  he  was  cut  down.  His  face  had  a per- 
fectly natural  aspect,  being  neither  livid  nor  tumefied ; 
and  there  was  no  dislocation  of  his  neck. 

Dr.  Jeffray,  the  distinguished  professor  of  anatomy, 
having  on  the  preceding  day  requested  me  (says  Dr. 
Ure)  to  perform  the  Galvanic  experiments,  I sent  to 
his  theatre,  with  this  view,  next  morning,  my  minor 
Voltaic  battery,  consisting  of  270  pairs  of  four-inch 
plates,  with  wires  of  communication,  and  pointed  me- 
tallic rods  with  insulating  handles,  for  the  more  com- 
modious application  of  the  electric  power.  About  five 
minutes  before  the  police  officers  arrived  with  the 
body,  the  battery  was  charged  with  a dilute  nitro-sul- 
phuric  acid,  which  speedily  brought  it  into  a state  of 
intense  action.  The  dissections  were  skilfully  exe- 
cuted by  Mr.  Marshal,  under  the  superintendence  of 
the  professor. 

Exp.  1.  A large  incision  was  made  into  the  nape  of 
the  neck,  close  below  the  occiput.  The  posterior  half 
of  the  atlas  vertebra  was  then  removed  by  bone  for- 
ceps, when  the  spinal  marrow  was  brought  into  view. 
A profuse  flow  of  liquid  blood  gushed  from  the  wound, 
inundating  the  floor.  A considerable  incision  was  at 
the  same  time  made  in  the  left  hip,  through  the  great 
gluteal  muscle,  so  as  to  bring  the  sciatic  nerve  into 
sight ; and  a small  cut  was  made  in  the  heel.  From 
neither  of  these  did  any  blood  flow.  The  pointed  rod 
connected  with  one  end  of  the  battery,  was  now 
placed  in  contact  with  the  spinal  marrow,  while  the 
other  rod  was  applied  to  the  sciatic  nerve.  Every 
muscle  of  the  body  was  immediately  agitated  with 
convulsive  movements,  resembling  a violent  shudder- 
ing from  cold.  The  left  side  was  most  powerfully 
convulsed  at  each  renewal  of  the  electric  contact.  On 
moving  the  second  rod  from  the  hip  to  the  heel,  the 
knee  being  previously  bent,  the  leg  was  thrown  out 
with  such  violence  as  nearly  to  overturn  one  of  the 
assistants,  who  in  vain  attempted  to  prevent  its  ex 
tension. 

Exp.  2.  The  left  phrenic  nerve  was  now  laid  bare 
at  the  outer  edge  of  the  sterno-thyroideus  muscle, 
from  three  to  four  inches  above  the  clavicle ; the  cuta- 
neous incision  having  been  made  by  the  side  of  the 
sterno-cleido  inastoideus.  Since  this  nerve  is  distri 
buted  to  the  diaphragm,  and  since  it  communicates 
with  the  heart  through  the  eighth  pair,  it  was  expected, 
by  transmitting  the  Galvanic  pow  er  along  with  it,  that 
the  respiratory  process  would  be  renewed.  Accord- 
ingly, a small  incision  having  been  made  under  the 


GAL 


GAL 


cartilage  of  the  seventh  rib,  the  point  of  the  one  insu- 
lating rod  was  brought  into  contact  with  the  great 
head  of  the  diaphragm,  while  the  other  point  was  ap- 
plied to  the  phrenic  nerve  in  the  neck.  This  muscle, 
the  main  agent  of  respiration,  was  instantly  contracted, 
but  with  less  force  than  was  expected.  Satisfied,  from 
ample  experience  on  the  living  body,  that  more  power- 
ful effects  can  be  produced  in  Galvanic  excitation,  by 
leaving  the  extreme  communicating  rods  in  close  con- 
tact with  the  parts  to  be  operated  on,  while  the  electric 
chain  or  circuit  is  completed  by  running  the  end  of 
the  wires  along  the  top  of  the  plates  in  the  last  trough 
of  either  pole,  the  other  wire  being  steadily  immersed 
in  the  last  cell  of  the  opposite  pole,  I had  immediate 
recourse  to  this  method.  The  success  of  it  was  truly 
wonderful.  Full,  nay,  laborious  breathing,  instantly 
commenced.  The  chest  heaved,  and  fell;  the  belly 
was  protruded,  and  again  collapsed,  with  the  relaxing 
and  retiring  diaphragm.  This  process  was  continued, 
without  interruption,  as  long  as  I continued  the  elec- 
tric discharges. 

In  the  judgment  of  many  scientific  gentlemen  who 
witnessed  the  scene,  this  respiratory  experiment  was 
perhaps  the  most  striking  ever  made  with  a philoso- 
phical apparatus.  Let  it  also  be  remembered,  that  for 
full  half  an  hour  before  this  period,  the  body  had  been 
well  nigh  drained  of  its  blood,  and  the  spinal  marrow 
severely  lacerated.  No  pulsation  could  be  perceived 
meanwhile  at  the  heart  or  wrist;  but  it  may  be  sup- 
posed, that  but  for  the  evacuation  of  the  blood, — the 
essential  stimulus  of  that  organ, — this  phenomenon 
might  also  have  occurred. 

Exp.  3.  The  supra-orbital  nerve  was  laid  bare  in  the 
forehead,  as  it  issues  through  the  supra-ciliary  fora- 
men, in  the  eyebrow : the  one  conducting  rod  being 
applied  to  it,  and  the  other  to  the  heel,  most  extraor- 
dinary grimaces  were  exhibited  every  time  that  the 
electric  discharges  were  made,  by  running  the  wire  in 
my  hand  along  the  edges  of  the  last  trough,  from  the 
220th  to  the  270th  pair  of  plates:  thus  fifty  shocks, 
each  greater  than  the  preceding  one,  were  given  in 
two  seconds.  Every  muscle  in  his  countenance  was 
simultaneously  thrown  into  fearful  action;  rage,  hor- 
ror, despair,  anguish,  and  ghastly  smiles,  united  their 
hideous  expression  in  the  murderer’s  face,  surpassing 
far  the  wildest  representations  of  a Fuseli  or  a Kean. 
At  this  period  several  of  the  spectators  were  forced  to 
leave  the  apartment  from  terror  or  sickness,  and  one 
gentlemap  fainted. 

Exp.  4.  The  last  Galvanic  experiment  consisted  in 
transmitting  the  electric  power  from  the  spinal  mar- 
row to  the  ulnar  nerve,  as  it  passes  by  the  internal 
condyle  at  the  elbow : the  fingers  now  moved  nimbly, 
like  those  of  a violin  performer ; an  assistant,  who 
tried  to  close  the  fist,  found  the  hand  to  open  forcibly, 
In  spite  of  his  efforts.  When  the  one  rod  was  applied 
to  a slight  incision  in  the  tip  of  the  forefinger,  the  fist 
being  previously  clenched,  that  finger  extended  in- 
stantly ; and  from  the  convulsive  agitation  of  the  arm, 
he  seemed  to  point  to  the  different  spectators,  some  of 
whom  thought  he  had  come  to  life. 

About  an  hour  was  spent  in  these  operations. 

In  deliberating  on  the  above  Galvanic  phenomena, 
we  are  almost  willing  to  imagine,  that  if,  without  cut- 
ting into  and  wounding  the  spinal  marrow  and  blood- 
vessels in  the  neck,  the  pulmonary  organs  had  been 
set  a-playing  at  first,  (as  I proposed,)  by  electrifying 
the  phrenic  nerve,  (which  may  be  done  without  any 
dangerous  incision,)  there  is  a probability  that  life 
might  have  been  restored.  This  event,  however  little 
desirable  with  a murderer,  and  perhaps  contrary  to 
law,  would  yet  have  been  pardonable  in  one  instance, 
as  it  would  have  been  highly  honourable  and  useful  to 
science.  From  the  accurate  experiments  of  Dr.  Philip 
it  appears,  that  the  action  of  the  diaphragm  and  lungs 
is  indispensable  towards  restoring  the  suspended  action 
of  the  heart  and  great  vessels,  subservient  to  the  circu- 
lation of  the  blood. 

It  is  known,  that  cases  of  deathlike  lethargy,  or  sus- 
pended animation,  from  disease  and  accidents,  have 
occurred,  where  life  has  returned,  after  longer  inter- 
ruption of  its  functions  than  in  the  subject  of  the  pre- 
ceding experiments.  It  is  probable,  when  apparent 
death  supervenes  from  suffocation  with  noxious  gases, 
&c.  and  when  there  is  no  organic  laesion,  that  a judi- 
ciously directed  Galvanic  experiment  will,  if  any  thing 
will,  restore  the  activity  of  the  vital  functions  The 


plans  of  administering  Voltaic  electricity,  hitherto  pur 
sued  in  such  cases,  are,  in  my  humble  apprehension, 
very  defective.  No  advantage,  we  perceive,  is  likely 
to  accrue  from  passing  electric  discharges  across  tbe 
chest,  directly  through  the  heart  and  lungs.  On  the 
principles  so  well  developed  by  Dr.  Philip,  and  now 
illustrated  on  Clydesdale’s  body,  we  should  transmit 
along  the  channel  of  the  nerves,  that  substitute  for 
nervous  influence,  or  that  power  which  may  perchance 
awaken  its  dormant  faculties.  Then,  indeed,  fair  hopes 
may  be  formed  of  deriving  extensive  benefit  from  Gal- 
vanism ; and  of  raising  this  wonderful  agent  to  its  ex' 
pected  rank  among  the  ministersof  health  and  life  to  man. 

I would,  however,  beg  leave  to  suggest  another 
nervous  channel,  which  I conceive  to  be  a still  readier 
and  more  powerful  one,  to  the  action  of  the  heart  and 
lungs,  than  the  phrenic  nerve.  If  a longitudinal  inci- 
sion be  made,  as  is  frequently  done  for  aneurism, 
through  the  integuments  of  the  neck  at  the  outer  edge 
of  the  sterno-mastoideus  muscle,  about  half  way  be- 
tween the  clavicle  and  angle  of  the  lower  jaw ; then, 
on  turning  over  the  edge  of  this  muscle,  we  bring  into 
view  the  throbbing  carotid,  on  the  outside  of  which, 
the  par  vagum , and  great  sympathetic  nerve,  lie  to- 
gether in  one  sheath.  Here,  therefore,  they  may  both 
be  directly  touched  and  pressed  by  a blunt  metallic 
conductor.  These  nerves  communicate  directly,  or 
indirectly,  with  the  phrenic ; and  the  superficial  nerve 
of  the  heart  is  sent  off  from  the  sympathetic. 

Should,  however,  the  phrenic  nerve  be  taken,  that 
of  the  left  side  is  the  preferable  of  the  two.  From  the 
position  of  the  heart,  the  left  phrenic  differs  a little  in 
its  course  from  the  right.  It  passes  over  the  pericar 
dium , covering  the  apex  of  the  heart. 

While  the  point  of  one  metallic  conductor  is  applied 
to  the  nervous  cords  above  described,  the  other  knob 
ought  to  be  firmly  pressed  against  the  side  of  the  per- 
son, immediately  under  the  cartilage  of  the.seventh 
rib.  The  skin  should  be  moistened  with  a solution  of 
common  salt,  or,  what  is  better,  a hot  saturated  solu- 
tion of  sal-ammoniac,  by  which  means,  the  elec- 
tric energy  will  be  more  effectually  conveyed  through 
the  cuticle  so  as  to  complete  the  Voltaic  chain. 

To  lay  bare  the  nerves  above  described,  requires,  as 
I have  stated,  no  formidable  incision,  nor  does  it  de- 
mand more  anatomical  skill,  or  surgical  dexterity,  than 
every  practitioner  of  the  heading  art  ought  to  possess. 
We  should  always  bear  in  mind,  that  the  subject  of 
experiment  is  at  least  insensible  to  pain ; and  that  life 
is  at  stake,  perhaps  irrecoverably  gone.  And  assured- 
ly, if  we  place  the  risk  and  difficulty  of  the  operations 
in  competition  with  the  blessings  and  glory  consequent 
on  success,  they  will  weigh  as  nothing,  with  the  intel- 
ligent and  humane.  It  is  possible,  indeed,  that  two 
small  brass  knobs,  covered  with  cloth  moistened  with 
solution  of  sal  ammoniac,  pressed  above  and  below,  on 
the  place  of  the  nerve,  and  the  diaphragmatic  region, 
may  suffice,  without  any  surgical  operation:  it  may 
first  be  tried. 

Immersion  of  the  body  in  cold  water  accelerates 
greatly  the  extinction  of  life  arising  from  suffocation ; 
and  hence  less  hopes  need  be  entertained  of  recover- 
ing drowned  persons  after  a considerable  interval,  than 
when  the  vital  heat  has  been  suffered  to  continue  with 
little  abatement.  None  of  the  ordinary  practices  judi- 
ciously enjoined  by  the  Humane  Society,  should  ever 
on  such  occasions  be  neglected.  For  it  is  surely  cul- 
pable to  spare  any  pains  which  may  contribute,  in  the 
slightest  degree,  to  recall  the  fleeting  breath  of  man  to 
its  cherished  mansion. 

My  attention  has  been  again  particularly  directed  to 
this  interesting  subject,  by  a very  flattering  letter  which 
I lately  received  from  the  learned  Secretary  of  the 
Royal  Humane  Society. 

In  the  prec  “ding  account,  1 bad  accidentally  omitted 
to  state  a veiy  essential  circumstance  relative  to  the 
electrization  of  Clydesdale.  The  paper  indeed  was 
very  rapidly  written,  at  the  busiest  period  of  my  public 
prelections,  to  be  presented  to  the  society,  as  a substi- 
tute for  the  essay  of  an  absent  friend,  and  was  sent  off 
to  London  the  morning  after  it  was  read. 

The  positive  pole  or  wire  connected  with  the  zinc 
end  of  the  battery,  was  that  which  I applied  to  the 
nerve ; and  the  negative,  or  that  connected  with  the 
copper  end,  was  that  which  I applied  to  the  muscles. 
This  is  a matter  of  primary  importance,  as  the  follow- 
ing experiments  will  prove. 


GAR 


GAS 


Prepare  the  posterior  limbs  of  a frog  for  Voltaic  elec- 
trization, leaving  the  crural  nerves  connected,  as  usual, 
to  a detached  portion  of  the  spine.  When  the  excita- 
bility has  become  nearly  exhausted,  plunge  the  limbs 
into  the  water  of  one  wine-glass,  and  the  crural  nerves 
with  their  pendent  portion  of  spine,  into  that  of  the 
other.  The  edges  of  the  two  glasses  should  be  almost 
in  contact.  Then  taking  a rod  of  zinc  in  one  hand, 
and  a rod  of  silver  (or  a silver  tea-spoon)  in  the  other, 
plunge  the  former  into  the  water  of  the  limbs’  glass, 
and  the  latter  into  that  of  the  nerves’  glass,  without 
touching  the  frog  itself,  and  gently  strike  the  dry  parts 
of  the  bright  metals  together.  Feeble  convulsive 
movements,  or  mere  twitching  of  the  fibres,  will  be 
perceived  at  every  contact.  Reverse  now  the  position 
of  the  metallic  rods,  that  is,  plunge  the  zinc  into  the 
nerves’  glass,  and  the  silver  into  the  other.  On  renew- 
ing the  contact  of  the  dry  surfaces  of  the  metal  now, 
very  lively  convulsions  will  take  place ; and  if  the 
limbs  are  skilfully  disposed  in  a narrowish  conical 
glass,  they  will  probably  spring  out  to  some  distance. 
This  interesting  experiment  may  be  agreeably  varied 
in  the  following  way,  with  an  assistant  operator : let 
that  person  seize,  in  the  moist  fingers  of  his  left  hand, 
the  spine  and  nervous  cords  of  the  prepared  frog ; and 
in  those  of  the  right  hand,  a silver  rod;  and  let  the 
other  person  lay  hold  of  one  of  the  limbs  with  his  right 
hand,  while  he  holds  a zinc  rod  in  the  moist  fingers  of 
the  left.  On  making  the  metallic  contact,  feeble  con- 
vulsive twitchings  will  be  perceived  as  before.  Hold- 
ing still  the  frog  as  above,  let  them  merely  exchange 
the  pieces  of  metal.  On  renewing  the  contacts  now, 
lively  movements  will  take  place,  which  become  very 
conspicuous,  if  one  limb  be  held  nearly  horizontal, 
while  the  other  hangs  freely  down.  At  each  touch  of 
the  Voltaic  pair,  the  drooping  limb  will  start  up,  and 
strike  the  hand  of  the  experimenter. 

It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  for  the  purposes  of  re- 
suscitating dormant  irritability  of  nerves,  or  contrac- 
tility of  their  subordinate  muscles,  the  positive  pole 
must  be  applied  to  the  former,  and  the  negative  to  the 
latter.” — Ure's  Chemical  Dictionary. 

Gama'ndra.  See  Stalagmitis. 

Gambi'ense  gummi.  See  Kino. 

GAMBOGE.  See  Stalagmitis. 

GAMBO'GIA.  See  Cambogia  and  Stalagmitis. 

Gambo'gium.  See  Stalagmitis. 

Gamboi'dea.  See  Stalagmitis. 

GA'MMA.  (From  the  letter  r,  gamma , which  it 
resembles.)  A surgical  instrument  for  cauterizing  a 
hernia. 

Gamphe'le.  (From  yapxpog,  crooked.)  The  cheek. 
The  jaw. 

Ga'ngamon.  (From  yayya py,  a fishing-net,  which 
it  was  said  to  resemble.)  1.  A name  of  the  omentum. 

2.  Some  call  the  contexture  of  nerves  about  the 
navel  by  this  name. 

GA'NGLION.  (rayyXtov,  a knot.")  A knot.  1. 
In  anatomy  it  is  applied  to  a natural  knot-like  enlarge- 
ment in  the  course  of  a nerve. 

2.  In  surgery  it  is  an  encysted  tumour,  formed  in 
the  sheath  of  a tendon,  and  containing  a fluid  like  the 
white  of  an  egg.  It  most  frequently  occurs  on  the 
back  of  the  hand  or  foot. 

GA'NGRENE.  {Tayypaiva ; from  ypaw,  to  feed 
upon:  so  named  from  its  eating  away  the  flesh.) 
Gangrcna.  See  Mortification. 

Ga'rab.  An  Arabic  name  for  the  disorder  of  the 
eyes.  See  JEgylops. 

GARCI'NIA.  (So  called  in  honour  of  Dr.  Garcin, 
who  accurately  described  it.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  planks  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class  Dodecandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Garcinia  mangostana.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  mangosteen  tree.  The  mangosteen  is  a fruit  about 
the  size  of  an  orange,  which  grows  in  great  abundance 
on  this  tree  in  Java  and  the  Molucca  islands.  Ac- 
cording to  the  concurring  testimonies  of  all  travellers, 
it  is  the  most  exquisitely  flavoured,  and  the  most  salu- 
brious of  all  fruits,  it  being  such  a delicious  mixture  of 
the  tart  and  sweet.  The  flesh  is  juicy,  white , almost 
transparent,  and  of  a more  delicate  and  agreeable  fla- 
vour than  the  richest  grape.  It  is  eaten  in  almost 
every  disorder,  and  the  dried  bark  is  used  medicinally 
in  dysenteries  and  tenesmus,  and  a strong  decoction 
of  it  is  much  esteemed  as  a gargle  in  ulcerated  sore 
throats. 


Ga'rgale.  FapyaA>7.  Gargalos ; GargalismoS. 
Irritation,  or  stimulation. 

Garga'reon.  (Hebrew.)  The  uvula,  or  glandu- 
lous  body,  which  hangs  down  into  the  throat. 

GA'RGARISM.  See  Gargarisma. 

GARGARISMA.  ( Gargarisma , atis.  n. ; and 

Gargarismus , i.  m.  ; and  Gargarismum , i.  n. ; from 
yapyapigio,  to  gargle.)  A gargle,  or  wash  for  the 
throat. 

Gargarismum.  See  Gargarisma. 

Ga'rgathum.  A bed  on  which  lunatics,  &c.  were 
formerly  Confined. 

GARGLE.  See  Gargarisma. 

GARLIC.  See  Allium. 

GARNET.  Professor  Jameson  divides  this  mineral 
genus  into  three  species : the  pyramidal  garnet,  dode- 
cahedral garnet,  and  prismatic  garnet. 

1.  The  Pyramidal  contains  three  sub-species ; Vesu- 
vian,  Egeran,  Gehlenite. 

2.  The  Dodecahedral  contains  nine  sub-species; 
Pyreneite,  Grossulare,  Melanite,  Pyrope,  Garnet,  Allo- 
chroite,  Colophonite,  Cinnamon-stone,  Helvin. 

3.  The  Prismatic;  the  grenatite.  Of  the  garnet 
proper,  there  are  two  species : 

1.  The  precious  or  noble  garnet. 

2.  The  common  garnet. 

GARNET,  Thomas,  was  born  in  1766,  at  Casterton 
in  Westmoreland.  After  serving  his  time  to  a surgeon 
and  apothecary,  he  went  to  study  at  Edinburgh,  where 
he  took  his  degree  at  twenty-two,  and  then  attended 
the  London  hospitals  for  two  years.  In  1790  he  set- 
tled at  Bradford,  and  began  to  give  private  lectures  on 
Philosophy  and  Chemistry;  and  here  he  wrote  his 
Treatise  on  the  Horley  Green  Spa.  But  in  the  follow- 
ing year  he  removed  to  Knaresborough,  and  soon  after 
published  an  Analysis  of  the  different  Waters  of  Har- 
rowgate,  which  place  he  visited  during  the  summer 
season.  About  this  period  he  formed  the  design  of 
going  to  America ; but  while  waiting  to  take  his  pas- 
sage at  Liverpool,  he  was  solicited  to  deliver  some  lec- 
tures there,  which  were  so  favourably  received,  that  he 
was  induced  to  repeat  his  course  at  various  other 
places ; and  at  length  the  professorship  at  Anderson’s 
Institution  in  Glasgow  was  offered  him,  where  he 
began  lecturing  in  1796.  Two  years  after  he  made  a 
tour  to  the  Highlands,  of  which  he  subsequently  pub- 
lished an  account.  On  the  formation  of  the  Royal  In- 
stitution in  London,  he  was  invited  by  Count  Rumford 
to  become  the  lecturer  there ; he  accepted  the  appoint- 
ment, and  the  room  was  crowded  with  persons  of  the 
first  distinction  and  fashion.  He  then  turned  his 
thoughts  more  seriously  to  the  practice  of  his  profes- 
sion, as  likely  to  afford  the  most  permanent  support ; 
but  his  prospects  were  cut  short  by  death  about  the 
middle  of  the  year  1802.  A posthumous  volume,  en- 
titled “ Zoonomia,”  was  published  for  the  benefit  of  his 
family. 

Ga'ron.  Tapov.  A kind  of  pickle  prepared  of 
fish  ; at  first  it  was  made  from  a fish,  which  the  Greeks 
call  Garos ; but  the  best  was  made  from  mackarel. 
Among  the  moderns,  garum  signifies  the  liquor  in. 
which  fish  is  pickled. 

GAROU.  See  Daphne  gnidium. 

Garrophy'llus.  See  Eugenia  caryophyllata. 

Garroti'llo.  (From  garottar1  to  bind  closely. 
Spanish.)  A name  of  the  cynanche  maligna,  from  its 
sense  of  strangulation,  as  if  the  throat  were  bound  with 
a cord. 

GAS.  (From  Gascht , German,  an  eruption  of  wind.) 
Gaz.  Elastic  fluid ; Aeriform  fluid.  This  term  is  ap- 
plied to  all  permanently  elastic  fluids,  simple  or  com- 
pound, except  the  atmosphere,  to  which  the  term  air 
is  appropriated. 

Some  of  the  gases  exist  in  nature  without  the  aid  of 
art,  and  may  therefore  be  collected;  others,  on  the 
contrary,  are  only  producible  by  artificial  means. 

All  gases  are  combinations  of  certain  substances,, 
reduced  to  the  gaseous  form  by  the  addition  of  caloric. 
It  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  distinguish  in  every  gas,, 
the  matter  of  heat  which  acted  the  part  of  a solvent, 
and  the  substance  which  forms  the  basis  of  the  gas. 

Gases  are  not  contained  in  those  substances  from 
which  we  obtain  them  in  the  state  of  gas,  but  owe 
their  formation  to  the  expansive  property  of  caloric. 

Formation  of  Gases. — The  different  forms  under 
which  bodies  appear,  depend  upon  a certain  quantity 
of  caloric,  chemically  combined  with  them.  The  very 

381 


GAS 


formation  of  gases  corroborates  this  truth.  Their  pro- 
duction totally  depends  upon  the  combination  of  the 
particular  substances  with  caloric ; and  though  called 
permanently  elastic,  they  are  only  so  because  we  can- 
not so  far  reduce  their  temperature,  as  to  dispose  them 
to  part  with  it;  otherwise  they  would  undoubtedly  be- 
come fluid  or  solid. 

Water,  for  instance,  is  a solid  substance  in  all  de- 
grees below  32°  of  Fahrenheit’s  scale ; above  this  tem- 
perature it  combines  with  caloric,  and  becomes  a fluid. 
It  retains  its  liquid  state  under  the  ordinary  pressure 
of  the  atmosphere,  till  its  temperature  is  augmented 
to  212°.  It  then  combines  with  a larger  portion  of 
caloric,  and  is  converted,  apparently , into  gas,  or  at 
least  into  elastic  vapour ; in  which  state  it  would  con- 
tinue, if  the  temperature  of  our  atmosphere  was  above 
212°.  Gases  are  therefore  solid  substances,  between 
the  particles  of  which  a repulsion  is  established  by  the 
quantity  of  caloric. 

But  as  in  the  gaseous  water  or  steam,  the  caloric  is 
retained  with  but  little  force,  on  account  of  its  quitting 
the  water  when  the  vapour  is  merely  exposed  to  a 
lower  temperature,  we  do  not  admit  steam  among 
the  class  of  gases,  or  permanently  elastic  agriform 
fluids.  In  gases,  caloric  united  by  a very  forcible 
affinity,  and  no  diminution  of  temperature,  or  increase 
of  pressure,  that  has  ever  yet  been  effected,  can  sepa- 
rate it  from  them.  Thus  the  air  of  our  .atmosphere, 
in  the  most  intense  cold,  or  when  very  strongly  com- 
pressed, still  remains  in  the  agriform  state ; and  hence 
is  derived  the  essential  character  of  gases,  namely,  that 
they  shall  remain  aeriform , under  all  variations  of 
pressure  and  temperature. 

In  the  modern  nomenclature,  the  name  of  every 
substance  existing  in  the  aeriform  state,  is  derived 
from  its  supposed  solid  base ; and  the  term  gas  is  used 
to  denote  its  existence  in  this  state. 

In  order  to  illustrate  the  formation  of  gases,  or  to 
show  in  what  manner  caloric  is  combined  with  them, 
the  following  experiment  may  serve,  ■f’ut  into  a retort, 
capable  of  holding  half  a pint  of  water,  two  ounces 
of  muriate  of  soda  (common  salt) : pour-on  it  half  its 
weight  of  sulphuric  acid,  and  apply  the  heat  of  a lamp ; 
a great  quantity  of  gas  is  produced,  which  might  be 
collected  and  retained  over  mercury.  But  to  serve 
the  purpose  of  this  experiment,  let  it  pass  through  a 
glass  receiver,  having  two  openings,  into  one  of  which 
the  neck  of  the  retort  passes,  while,  from  the  other,  a 
bent  tube  proceeds,  which  ends  in  a vessel  of  water. 
Before  closing  the  apparatus,  let  a thermometer  be  in- 
cluded in  the  receiver,  to  show  the  temperature  of  the 
gas.  It  will  be  found  that  the  mercury  in  the  ther- 
mometer will  rise  only  a few  degrees : whereas  the  wa- 
ter in  the  vessel  which  receives  the  bent  tube,  will  soon 
become  boiling  hot. 

Explanation. — Common  salt  consists  of  muriatic 
acid,  united  to  soda ; on  presenting  sulphuric  acid  to 
this  union,  a decomposition  takes  place,  especially 
When  assisted  by  heat.  The  sulphuric  acid  unites  by 
Virtue  of  its  greater  affinity  to  the  soda,  and  forms  sul- 
phate of  soda,  or  Glauber’s  salt ; the  muriatic  acid  be- 
comes therefore  disengaged,  and  takes  the  gaseous 
form  in  which  it  is  capable  of  existing  at  the  common 
temperature.  To  trace  the  caloric  during  this  experi- 
ment, as  was  our  object,  we  must  remark,  that  it  first 
flows  from  the  lamp  to  the  disengaged  muriatic  acid, 
and  converts  it  into  gas ; but  the  heat  thus  expended 
is  chemically  united,  and  therefore  not  appreciable 
by  the  thermometer.  The  caloric,  however,  is  again 
evolved,  when  the  muriatic  acid  gas  is  condensed 
by  the  water,  with  which  it  forms  liquid  muriatic 
acid. 

In  this  experiment  we  therefore  trace  caloric  in  a 
chemical  combination  producing  gas;  and  from  this 
union  we  again  trace  it  in  the  condensation  of  the  gas, 
producing  sensible  heat. 

Such,  in  general,  is  the  cause  of  the  formation  and 
fixation  of  gases.  It  may  be  further  observed,  that 
each  of  these  fluids  loses  or  suffers  the  disengage- 
ment of  different  quantities  of  heat,  as  it  becomes 
more  or  less  solid  in  its  new  combination,  or  as  that 
combination  is  capable  of  retaining  more  or  less  spe- 
cific heat. 

The  discovery  of  afiriform  gaseous  fluids  has  occa- 
sioned the  necessity  of  some  peculiar  instruments,  by 
means  of  which  those  substances  may  be  conveniently 
collected  and  submitted  to  examination.  The  prin- 
382 


GAS 

cipal  ones  for  that  purpose  are  styled  the  pneumatte 

apparatus. 

The  pneumatic  trough  is  made  either  of  wood  or 
strong  sheet  iron,  tinned,  japanned,  or  painted.  A 
trough  of  about  two  feet  long,  sixteen  inches  wide, 
and  fifteen  high,  has  been  found  to  be  sufficient  for 
most  experiments.  Two  or  three  inches  below  its 
brim,  a horizontal  shelf  is  fastened,  in  dimension  about 
half  or  one-third  part  of  the  width  of  the  trough.  In 
this  shelf  are  several  holes : these  holes  must  be  made 
in  the  centre  of  a small  excavation,  shaped  like  a 
funnel,  which  is  formed  in  the  lower  part  of  the  shelf. 

This  trough  is  filled  with  water  sufficient  to  cover 
the  shelf  to  the  height  of  an  inch. 

The  use  of  this  shelf  is  to  support  receivers,  jars,  or 
bell-glasses,  which,  being  previously  filled  with  water, 
are  placed  invertedly,  their  open  end  turned  down 
upon  the  above-mentioned  holes,  through  which  the 
gases,  conveyed  there  and  directed  by  means  of  the 
funnel-shaped  excavations,  rise  in  the  form  of  air- 
bubbles  into  the  receiver. 

When  the  gaseous  fluids  are  capable  of  being  ab- 
sorbed by  water,  as  is  the  case  with  some  of  them,  the 
trough  must  be  filled  with  mercury.  Tbe  price  and 
gravity  of  this  fluid  make  it  an  object  of  convenience 
and  economy,  that  the  trough  should  be  smaller  than 
when  water  is  used. 

A mercurial  trough  is  best  cut  in  marble,  free-stone, 
or  a solid  block  of  wood.  A trough  about  twelve 
inches  long,  three  inches  wide,  and  four  deep,  is  suffi- 
cient for  all  private  experiments. 

Method  of  collecting  gases,  and  transferring  them 
from  one  vessel  to  another. — If  we  are  desirous  of 
transmitting  air  from  one  vessel  to  another,  it  is  neces- 
sary that  the  vessel  destined  to  receive  it  be  full  of 
water,  or  some  fluid  heavier  than  air.  For  that  pur- 
pose, take  it  wide-mouthed  bell-glass,  or  receiver; 
plunge  it  under  the  water  in  the  trough,  in  order  to  fill 
it ; then  raise  it  with  the  mouth  downwards,  and  place 
it  on  the  shelf  of  the  trough,  so  as  to  cover  one  or 
more  of  the  holes  in  it. 

It  will  now  be  full  of  water,  and  continue  so  as  long 
as  the  mouth  remains  below  the  surface  of  the  fluid  in 
the  cistern ; for,  in  this  case,  the  water  is  sustained  in 
the  vessel  by  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere,  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  mercury  is  sustained  in  the  ba- 
rometer. It  may  without  difficulty  be  imagined,  that 
if  comirlon  air  (or  any  other  fluid  resembling  common 
air  in  lightness  and  elasticity)  be  suffered  to  enter  the 
inverted  vessel  filled  with  water,  it  will  rise  to  the 
upper  part,  on  account  of  its  levity,  and  the  surface  of 
the  water  will  subside.  To  exemplify  this,  take  a glass, 
or  any  other  vessel,  in  that  state  which  is  usually  called 
empty , and  plunge  it  into  the  water  with  its  mouth 
downwards : scarce  any  of  it  will  enter  the  glass,  be- 
cause its  entrance  is  opposed  by  the  elasticity  of  the 
included  air ; but  if  the  vessel  be  turned  with  its  mouth 
upwards,  it  immediately  fills,  and  the  air  rises  in  bub- 
bles to  the  surfac’e.  Suppose  this  operation  be  per- 
formed under  one  of  the  jars  or  receivers,  which  are 
filled  with  water,  and  placed  upon  the  perforated  shelf, 
the  air  will  ascend  in  bubbles  as  before,  but,  instead 
of  escaping,  it  will  be  caught  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
jar,  and  expel  part  of  the  water  it  contains. 

In  this  manner  we  see  that  air  may  Jbe  emptied  out 
of  one  vessel  into  another  by  a kind  of  inverted  pour- 
ing, by  which  means  it  is  made  to  ascend  from  the 
lower  to  the  upper  vessel.  When  the  receiving  vesspl 
has  a narrow  neck,  the  air  may  be  poured,  in  a similar 
manner,  through  an  inverted  funnel,  inserted  in  its 
mouth. 

If  the  air  is  to  be  transferred  from  a vessel  that  is 
stopped  like  a bottle,  the  bottle  must  be  unstopped,  with 
its  orifice  downwards  in  the  water ; and  then  inclined 
in  such  a manner  that  its  neck  may  come  finder  the 
perforated  excavation  of  the  shelf.  The  gas  will  es 
cape  from  the  bottle,  and  passing  into  the  vessel  destined 
to  receive  it,  will  ascend  in  it  in  the  form  of  bubbles. 

In  whatever  manner  this  operation  is  performed, 
the  necessity  of  the  excavation  in  the  lower  part  of  the 
shelf  may  be  readily  conceived.  It  is,  as  mentioned 
before,  destined  to  collect  the  gas  which  escapes  from 
the  vessel,  and  direct  it  in  its  passage  towards  the  ves- 
sel adapted  to  receive  it.  Without  this  excavation,  the 
gas,  instead  of  proceeding  to  the  place  of  its  destina- 
tion, would  be  dispersed  and  lost,  unless  the  mouth  of 
the  receiving  vessel  were  large. 


GAS 


GAS 


,The  vessels,  or  receivers,  for  collecting  the  disen- 
gaged gases,  should  be  glass  cylinders,  jars,  or  bell- 
glasses  of  various  sizes ; some  of  them  should  be  open 
at  both  ends,  others  should  be  fitted  with  necks  at  the 
top,  ground  perfectly  level,  in  order  that  they  may  be 
stopped  by  ground  flat  pieces  of  metal,  glass,  slate, 
&c. ; others  should  be  furnished  with  ground  stoppers. 
Some  should  be  graduated  into  cubic  inches,  and  sub- 
divided into  decimal  or  other  equidistant  parts.  Be- 
sides these,  common  glass-bottles,  tumblers,  &c.  may 
be  used. 

Classification  of  Gases. — All  the  elastic  aeriform 
fluids  with  which  we  are  hitherto  acquainted,  are 
generally  divided,  by  systematic  writers,  into  two 
classes,  namely : those  that  are  respirable  aqd  capable 
of  maintaining  combustion , and  those  that  are  not  re- 
spirable and  incapable  of  maintaining  combustion. 
This  division,  indeed,  has  its  advantage,  but  the  term 
respirable,  in  its  physiological  application,  has  been 
very  differently  employed  by  different  writers.  Some- 
times by  the  respirability  of  a gas  has  been  meant  its 
power  of  supporting  life,  when  repeatedly  applied  to 
the  blood  in  the  lungs.  At  other  times  all  gases  have 
been  considered  respirable  which  were  capable  of  in- 
troduction into  the  lungs  by  voluntary  efforts,  without 
any  relation  to  their  vitality.  In  the  last  case,  the 
word  respirable  seems  to  us  most  properly  employed, 
and  in  this  sense  it  is  here  used. 

Non-respirable  gases  are  those  which,  when  applied 
to  the  external  organs  of  respiration,  stimulate  the 
muscles  of  the  epiglottis  in  such  a manner  as  to  keep 
it  perfectly  close  on  the  glottis;  thus  preventing  the 
smallest  particle  of  gas  from  entering  into  the  bronchia, 
in  spite  cf  voluntary  exertions. 

Of  respirable  gases,  or  those  which  are  capable  of 
being  taken  into  the  lungs  by  voluntary  efforts,  only 
one  has  the  power  of  uniformly  supporting  life,  namely, 
atmospheric  air ; other  gases,  when  respired,  sooner  or 
later  impair  the  health  of  the  human  constitution,  or 
perhaps  occasion  death ; but  in  different  modes. 

Some  gases  effect  no  positive  change  in  the  blood ; 
animals  immersed  in  it  die  of  a disease  produced  by 
the  privation  of  atmospheric  air,  analogous  to  ^iat 
occasioned  by  their  submersion  in  water. 

Others  again  produce  some  positive  change  in  the 
blood,  as  appears  from  the  experiments  of  Dr.  Bed- 
does  and  Sir  Humphrey  Davy.  They  seem  to  render 
it  incapable  of  supplying  the  nervous  and  muscular 
fibres  with  principles  essential  to  sensibility  and  irrita- 
bility. These  gases,  therefore,  destroy  animal  life  on 
a different  principle. 

It  is  obvious,  therefore,  that  the  above  classification 
is  not  very  precise,  but  capable  of  misleading  the  stu- 
dent without  proper  explanation. 

Gas , azotic.  See  Nitrogen. 

Gas , carbonic  acid.  See  Carbonic  acid. 

Gas , heavy  carbonated  hydrogen.  See  Carburetted 
hydrogen  gas. 

Gas,  hepatic.  See  Hydrogen  gas,  sulphuretted. 

Gas , hydrogen.  See  Hydrogen. 

Gas,  light  carbonated  hydrogen  See  Carburetted 
hydro  gen.  gas. 

Gaseous  oxide  of  carbon.  See  Carbon,  gaseous  ox- 
ide of. 

GA'STRIC.  ( Gastricus ; from  Ya?VP,  the  sto- 

mach.) Appertaining  to  the  stomach. 

Gastric  artery.  Arteria  gastrica.  The  right  or 
greater  gastric  artery,  is  a branch  of  the  hepatic ; the 
left,  or  smaller,  a branch  of  the  splenic. 

Gastric  juice.  Succus  gastricus.  A fluid  sepa- 
rated by  the  stomach.  See  Digestion. 

Gastrinum.  Potassa. 

GASTRITIS.  (From  va^rip,  the  stomach.)  In- 
flammation of  the  stomach.  A genus  of  disease  in 
the  class  Pyrexice , and  order  Phlegmasice  of  Cullen. 
It  is  known  by  pyrexia,  anxiety,  heat,  and  pain  in  the 
epigastrium,  increased  when  any  thing  is  taken  into 
the  stomach,  vomiting,  hiccup,  pulse  small  and  hard, 
and  prostration  of  strength.  There  are  two  species : 

1.  Gastritis  phlegmonodea,  with  acute  pain  and  se- 
vere fever. 

2.  Gastritis  erythematica,  when  the  pain  and  fever 
are  slighter,  with  an  erysipelatous  redness  appearing 
in  the  fauces. 

Gastritis  is  produced  by  acrid  substances  of  various 
kinds,  such  as  arsenic,  corrosive  sublimate,  &c.  taken 
into  the  stomach,  as  likewise  by  food  of  an  improper 


nature  ; by  taking  large  draughts  of  any  cold  liquor 
when  the  body  is  much  heated  by  exercise,  Ordancingji 
and  by  repelled  exanthemata  and  gout.  Besides  these,  it 
may  arise  from  an  inflammation  of  some  of  the  neigh 
bouring. parts  being  communicated  to  the  stomach. 

The  erysipelatous  gastritis  arises  chiefly  towards  the 
close  of  other  diseases,  marking  the  -certain  approach 
to  dissolution,  and  being  unaccompanied  with  any 
marks  of  general  inflammation,  or  by  any  burning 
pain  in  the  stomach. 

The  symptoms  of  phlegmonous  gastritis,  as  observed 
above,  are  a violent  burning  pain  in  the  stomach,  with 
great  soreness,  distention,  and  flatulency ; a severe 
vomiting,  especially  after  any  thing  is  swallowed, 
whether  it  be  liquid  or  solid ; most  distressing  thirst ; 
restlessness,  anxiety,  and  a continual  tossing  of  the 
body,  with  great  debility,  constant  watching,  and  a 
frequent,  hard,  and  contracted  pulse.  In  some  cases, 
severe  purging  attends. 

If  the  disease  increases  in  violence,  symptoffis  of 
irritation  then  ensue  ; there  is  a great  loss  of  strength, 
with  faintings ; a short  and  interrupted  respiration ; 
cold,  clammy  sweats,  hiccups,  coldness  of  the  extremi- 
ties, an  intermittent  pulse,  and  the  patient  is  soon  cut 
off. 

The  event  of  gastritis  is  seldom  favourable,  as  the 
person  is  usually  either  suddenly  destroyed  by  the  vi- 
olence of  the  inflammation,  or  else  it  terminates  in 
suppuration,  ulceration,  or  gangrene* 

If  the  symptoms  are  very  mild,  and  proper  remedies 
have  been  employed  at  an  early  period  of  the  disease, 
-it  may,  however,  terminate  in  resolution,  and  that  in 
the  course  of  the  first,  or,  at  farthest,  the  second  week. 

Its  termination  in  suppuration  may  be  known  by 
the  symptoms,  although  moderate,  exceeding  the  con- 
tinuance of  this  period,  and  a remission  of  pain  oc- 
curring, while  a sense  of  weight  and  anxiety  still  re- 
main ; and,  on  the  formation  of  an  abscess,  cold  shi- 
verings  ensue,  with  marked  exacerbations  in  the  eve- 
ning, which  are  followed  by  night  sweats,  and  other 
symptoms  of  hectic  fever ; and  these  at  length  prove 
fatal,  unless  the  pus  is  thrown  up  by  vomiting,  and 
the  ulcer  heals. 

Its  tendency  to  gangrene  may  be  dreaded,  from  the 
violence  pf  its  symptoms  not  yielding  to  proper  reme- 
dies early  in  the  disease ; and,  when  begun,  it  may  be 
known  by  the  sudden  cessation  of  the  pain ; by  the 
pulse  continuing  its  frequency,  but  becoming  weaker ; 
and  by  delirium,  with  other  marks  of  increasing  debi- 
lity ensuing. 

Fatal  cases  of  this  disease  show,  on  dissection,  a 
considerable  redness  of  the  inner  coat  of  the  stomach, 
having  a layer  of  coagulable  lymph  lining  its  surface. 
They  likewise  show  a partial  thickening  of  the  sub- 
stance of  the  organ,  at  the  inflamed  part,  the  inflam- 
mation seldom  extending  over  the  whole  of  it.  Where 
ulceration  has  taken  place,  the  ulcers  sometimes  are 
found  to  penetrate  through  all  its  coats,,  and  sometimes 
only  through  one  or  two  of  them. 

The  cure  is  to  be  attempted  by  copious  and  repeated 
bleedings,  employed  at  an  early  period  of  the  disease, 
not  regarding  the  smallness  of  the  pulse,  as  it  usually 
becomes  softer  and  fuller  after  the  operation : also  se- 
veral leeches  should  be  applied  to  the  epigastrium, 
followed  by  fomentations,  or  the  hot  bath  ; after  which 
a large  blister  will  be  proper.  The  large  intestines 
may  be  in  some  measure  evacuated  by  a laxative  clys- 
ter ; but  scarcely  any  internal  .medicine  can  be  borne 
by  the  stomach,  till  the  violence  of  the  disease  is  much 
abated;  we  may  then  try  magnesia,  or  other  mild  ca- 
I thartic,  to  clear  outthe  canal  effectually.  Where  acrid 
substances  have  been  taken,  mucilaginous  drinks  may 
be  freely  exhibited,  to  assist  their  evacuation  and 
sheathe  the  stomach ; otherwise  only  in  small  quan 
tity : and,  in  the  former  case,  according  to  the  nature 
of  the  poison,  other  chemical  remedies  may  come  in 
aid,  but  ought  never  to  be  too  much  relied  upon. 
Should  suppuration  occur,  little  can  be  done  beyond 
avoiding  irritation,  and  supporting  strength  by  a mild 
farinaceous  diet,  and  giving  opium  occasionally  to 
relieve  pain. 

GASTRO.  Names  compounded  with  this  word 
have  some  connexion  with  the  stomach. 

GASTROCE'LE.  (From  ya^yp,  the  stomach,  an 
ktj\ti,  a tumour.)  A hernia  of  the  stomach,  occasioned 
by  a protrusion  of  that  viscus  through  the  abdominal 
parietes.  See  Hernia  ventriculi. 


383 


GAY 


FRU 


GASTROCNE'MIUS.  (From  yawp,  the  stomach, 
and  Kvrjuri,  the  leg.)  The  calf  or  belly  of  the  leg. 

Gastrocnemius  externus.  Gemellus.  An  ex- 
tensor muscle  of  the  foot,  situated  immediately  under 
the  integuments  at  the  back  part  of  the  leg  ; some- 
times called  gemellus  : this  latter  name  is  adopted  by 
Albinus.  Winslow  describes  it  as  two  muscles,  which 
he  calls  gastrocnemii ; and  Douglas  considers  this 
and  the  following  as  a quadriceps , or  muscle  with  four 
heads,  to  which  he  gives  the  name  of  extensor  tarsi 
suralis.  It  is  called  bi  femoro  calcanien  by  Dumas. 
The  gastrocnemius  externus  arises  by  two  distinct 
heads.  The  first,  which  is  the  thickest  and  longest  of 
the  two,  springs  by  a strong  thick  tendon  from  the 
upper  and  back  part  of  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os 
femoris,  adhering  strongly  to  the  capsular  ligament  of 
the  joint,  between  which  and  the  tendon  is  a consider- 
able bursa  mucosa.  The  second  head  arises  by  a thin- 
ner and  shorter  tendon  from  the  back  part  of  the  outer 
condyle  of  the  os  femoris.  A little  below  the  joint, 
their  fleshy  bellies  unite  in  a middle  tendon,  and  be- 
low the  middle  of  the  tibia  they  cease  to  be  fleshy,  and 
terminate  in  a broad  tendon,  which,  a little  above  the 
lower  extremity  of  the  tibia,  unite  with  that  of  the 
gastrocnemius  internus,  to  form  one  round  tendon, 
sometimes  called  chorda  magna , but  commonly  tendo 
Jlchillis. 

Gastrocnemius  jnternus.  Tibioperonei calcanien 
of  Dumas.  This,  which  is  situated  immediately  under 
the  last  described  muscle,  is  sometimes  named  soleas , 
on  account  of  its  shape,  which  resembles  that  of  the 
sole-fish.  It  arises  by  two  heads.  The  first  springs  by 
tendinous  and  fleshy  fibres  from  the  posterior  part  of 
the  head  of  the  fibula,  and  for  some  way  below  it.  The 
second  arises  from  an  oblique  ridge  at  the  upper  and 
posterior  part  of  the  tibia,  which  affords  origin  to  the 
inferior  edge  of  the  popliteus,  continuing  to  receive 
fleshy  fibres  from  the  inner  edge  of  the  tibia  for  some 
way  down.  This  muscle,  which  is  narrow  at  its  ori- 
gin, spreads  wider,  as  it  descends,  as  far  as  its  middle ; 
after  which  it  becomes  narrower  again,  and  begins  to 
grow  tendinous,  but  its  fleshy  fibres  do  not  entirely 
disappear  till  it  has  almost  reached  the  extremity  of 
the  tibia,  a little  above  which  it  unites  with  the  last 
described  muscle,  to  form  the  tendo  Jlchillis.  This 
thick  round  chord  is  inserted  into  the  lower  and  pos- 
terior part  of  the  os  calcis,  after  sliding  over  a cartila- 
inous  surface  on  that  bone,  to  which  it  is  connected 
y a tendinous  sheath  that  is  furnished  with  a large 
bursa  mucosa. 

Both  the  gastrocnemii  have  the  same  use,  viz.  that 
of  extending  the  foot,  by  drawing  it  backwards  and 
downwards. 

GASTROCO'LIC.  {Gastrocolicus ; from  yawp, 
the  stomach,  and  kuXov,  the  colon.)  A term  applied  to 
a vein  which  proceeds  from  the  stomach  to  the  colon. 

GASTRODY'NIA.  (From  yawp,  the  stomach, 
and  oSvvr],  pain.)  Pain  in  the  stomach. 

Gastro-epiploic  artery.  Arteria  gastrico-epi- 
ploica.  The  branch  of  the  greater  gastric  artery  that 
runs  to  the  epiploon. 

GASTRORAPHY.  (Gastroraphe ; from  yawp ; 
the  stomach,  and  pa<f> y,  a suture.)  The  sewing  of 
wounds  of  the  abdomen. 

GASTROTO'MIA.  (From  yawPi  ^ie  belly,  and 
repvo),  to  cut.)  The  operation  of  cutting  open  the 
belly. 

GAU'BIUS,  Jerome  David,  a celebrated  Dutch 
physician,  was  a pupil  of  the  illustrious  Boerhaave  at 
Leyden,  where  he  graduated  in  1725,  and  about  ten 
years  after  he  became  professor  there,  and  taught  with 
great  applause  for  a period  of  forty  years.  His  repu- 
tation was  extended  all  over  Europe  by  several  valu- 
able publications,  particularly  by  his  “ Institutiones 
Pathologiae  Medicinalis,”  and  his  “Adversaria which 
contributed  not  a little  to  the  improvement  both  of  the 
theory  and  practice  of  medicine.  In  another  work,  he 
treated  ably  of  the  medical  regulation  of  the  mind  : 
and  he  printed  also  a very  elegant  little  book  “ De  Me- 
thodo  concinnandi  formulas  Medicamentorum.”  He 
died  in  1780,  in  the  seventy-sixth  year  of  his  age. 

GaULE.  See  Myrica  gale. 

[“Gaultheria.  Partridge  berry.  The g aultheria 
procumbens  is  a well  known  creeping  evergreen,  found 
in  woody  and  mountainous  tracts  throughout  the 
United  States.  Its  taste  is  astrigent  and  aromatic,  and 
has  been  compared  to  that  of  orange  flowers.  It  exactly 


resembles  that  of  black  birch  (betula  lenta).  The 
medical  properties  of  this  plant  are  not  unlike  those  of 
cinnamon,  being  a warm,  aromatic,  astringent,  parti- 
cularly useful  in  the  secondary  stage  of  diarrhoea.  It 
Is  popularly  considered  an  emmenagogue.  The  dtise 
may  be  one  or  two  scruples,  but  a tincture  and  infusion 
are  more  convenient  forms.  The  volatile  oil  of  this 
article  is  officinal.”— Bigel.  Mat.  Med  A.] 
[“Gaylcssacite.  This  name  has  recently  been 
given  to  a new  metal  obtained  from  a species  of  pyrites 
found  in  South  America,  of  which  the  following  ac- 
count has  been  received  by  Dr.  Mitchill,  together  with 
a specimen  of  the  substance  in  a crystalline  form. 

“ The  pyrites  is  obtained  from  a small  lake  in  the 
province  of  Merida  de  Columbia,  being  the  upper  coat 
of  a substratum  of  strong  mineral  alkali,  called  urao , 
much  used  by  the  lower  class  of  the  natives  of  Colum- 
bia, mixed  with  an  extract  of  tobacco,  and  then  called 
chimoo.  The  alkali  produces  to  the  government  a 
rental  of  from  50,000  to  60,000  dollars  per  annum.  The 
mineral  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  lake,  about  three  fathoms 
under  water.  Several  Indians  are  employed  by  the 
government  to  dive  and  extract  it,  which  they  do  by 
means  of  small  crowbars.  They  are  paid  about  two 
reales  per  pound  for  it,  and  the  government  afterward 
sell  it  at  one  dollar.  The  situation  of  the  lake  is  about 
ten  leagues  west  of  the  city  of  Merida,  called  Lagunil- 
Ias.  The  pyrites  are  there  called  espejuelas,  and  have 
been  analyzed  in  Paris,  and  found  to  contain  a metal 
hitherto  unknown,  and  now  called  Gaylussacite,  from 
the  celebrated  French  chemist  of  that  name.” — A.] 
GAZ.  (From  gaschl,  a German  word  which  means 
an  eruption  of  wind.)  See  Gas. 

GEHLENITE.  A mineral-  substance  allied  to  Ve- 
suvian,  found  along  with  calcareous  spar  in  the  Tyrol. 

Geiso'ma.  (From  yeiaov,  the  eaves  of  the  house.) 
Geison.  The  prominent  parts  of  the  eyebrows,  which 
hang  over  the  eyes  like  the  eaves  of  a house. 

Gei'son.  See  Geisoma. 

Gela'sinos.  (From  yeXaw,  to  laugh.)  An  epithet 
for  the  middle  fore-teeth,  because  they  are  shown  in 
laughter. 

Gela'smus.  (From  yrXaw,  to  laugh.)  The  Sar- 
donic laugh.  See  Sardonic  laugh. 

GE'LATIN.  Geliy,  or  jelly.  An  animal  substance 
soluble  in  water,  but  not  in  alkohol:  capable  of  as- 
suming a well-known  elastic  or  tremulous  consistence, 
by  cooling,  when  the  water  is  not  too  abundant,  and 
liquifiable  again,  by  increasing  its  temperature.  This 
last  property  remarkably  distinguishes  it  from  albumen, 
which  becomes  consistent  by  heat.  It  is  precipitated 
in  an  insoluble  form  by  tannin,  and  it  is  this  action  of 
tannin  on  gelatin  that  is  the  foundation  of  the  art  of 
tanning  leather. 

Jellies  are  very  common  in  our  kitchens ; they  may  be 
extracted  from  all  the  parts  of  animals,  by  boiling  them 
in  water.  Hot  water  dissolves  a large  quantity  of  this 
substance.  Acids  likewise  dissolve  them,  as  do  like 
wise  more  particularly  the  alkalies.  Jelly,  which  has 
been  extracted  without  long  decoction,  possesses  most 
of  the  characters  of  vegetable  mucilage  ; but  it  is  sel 
dom  obtained  without  a mixture  of  albumen. 

Jellies,  in  a pure  state,  have  scarcely  any  smell  or 
remarkable  taste.  By  distillation,  they  afford  an  insi- 
pid and  inodorous  phlegm,  which  easily  putrefies.  A 
stronger  heat  causes  them  to  swell  up,  become  black, 
and  emit  a foetid  odour,  accompanied  with  white  acrid 
fumes.  An  impure  volatile  alkali,  together  with  empy- 
reumatic  oil,  then  passes  over,  leaving  a spongy  coal, 
not  easily  burned,  and  containing  common  salt  and 
phosphate  of  lime. 

The  jelly  of  various  animal  substances  is  prepared 
for  the  use  of  seafaring  persons  under  the  name  of 
portable  soup.  The  whole  art  of  performing  this  ope- 
ration consists  in  boiling  the  meat,  and  taking  the  scum 
off,  as  usual,  until  the  soup  possesses  the  requisite  fla- 
vour. It  is  then  suffered  to  cool,  in  order  that  the  fat 
may  be  separated.  In  the  next  place,  it  is  mixed  with 
five  or  six  whites  of  eggs,  and  slightly  boiled.  This 
operation  serves  to  clarify  the  liquid,  by  the  removal  of 
opaque  particles,  which  unite  with  the  white  of  esrg  at 
the  time  it  becomes  solid  by  the  beat,  and  are  conse- 
quently removed  along  with  it.  The  liquor  is  then  to 
be  strained  through  flannel,  and  evaporated  on  the 
water-bath,  to  the  consistence  of  a very  thick  paste  ; 
after  which  it  is  spread,  rather  thin,  upon  a smooth 
stone,  then  cut  into  cakes,  and,  lastly,  dried  in  a stove, 


GEM 


GEM 


until  it  becomes  brittle.  These  cakes  may  be  kept  four 
or  five  years,  if  defended  from  moisture.  When  in- 
tended to  be  used,  nothing  more  is  required  to  be  done 
than  to  dissolve  a sufficient  quantity  in  boiling  water, 
which  by  that  means  becomes  converted  into  soup. 

Jelly  is  also  found  in  vegetables,  as  ripe  currants, 
and  other  berries  mixed  with  an  acid. 

GELA'TIO.  (From  gelo,  to  freeze.) 

1.  Freezing. 

2.  That  rigidity  of  the  body  which  happens  in  a 
catalepsy,  as  if  the  person  were  frozen. 

GEM.  This  word  is  used  to  denote  a stone  which 
is  considered  as  precious;  as  the  diamond,  ruby,  sap- 
phire, topaz,  chrysolite,  beryl,  emerald,  &c. 

GEME'LLUS.  (From  geminus , double,  having  a 
fellow.)  See  Gastrocnemius  and  Gemini. 

GEMINI.  Gemelli  of  Winslow.  Part  of  the  mar- 
supialis  of  Cowper.  Jschio  spini  trochanterien  of 
Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  thigh,  which  has  been  a 
subject  of  dispute  among  anatomists  since  the  days  of 
Vesalius.  Some  describe  it  as  two  distinct  muscles ; 
and  hence  the  name  it  has  gotten  of  gemini.  Others 
contend  that  it  ought  to  be  considered  as  a single  mus- 
cle. The  truth  is,  that  it  consists  of  two  portions, 
which  are  united  together  by  a tendinous  and  fleshy 
membrane,  and  afford  a passage  between  them  to  the 
tendon  of  the  obdurator  internus,  which  they  enclose 
as  it  were  in  a purse.  These  two  portions  are  placed 
under  the  glutseus  maximus,  between  the  ischium  and 
the  great  trochanter. 

The  superior  portion,  which  is  the  shortest  and 
thickest  of  the  two,  rises  fleshy  from  the  external  sur- 
face of  the  spine  of  the  ischium ; and  the  inferior,  from 
the  tuberosity  of  that  bone,  and  likewise  from  the  pos- 
terior sacro-ischiatic  ligament.  They  are  inserted,  ten- 
dinous and  fleshy,  into  the  cavity  at  the  root  of  the 
great  trochanter.  Between  the  two  portions  of  this 
muscle,  and  the  termination  of  the  obturator  internus, 
there  is  a small  bursa  mucosa , connected  to  both,  and 
to  that  part  of  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  joint  which 
lies  under  the  gemini. 

This  muscle  assists  in  rolling  the  os  femoris  out- 
wards, and  prevents  the  tendon  of  the  obturator  inter- 
nus from  slipping  out  of  its  place  while  that  muscle  is 
in  action. 

GEMMA.  1.  A precious  stone  or  gem. 

2.  In  botany  this  term  is  now  applied  exclusively  to 
the  buds  on  the  stems  of  plants.  The  ancients  used 
the  terms  germen  and  oculus  to  denote  those  buds 
which  contain  the  rudiments  of  branches  and  leaves, 
and  gemma  those  in  which  flowers  only  are  contained ; 
but  by  the  moderns,  germen  has  been  applied  to  denote 
the  rudiment  of  the  fruit,  or  as  a generic  term  for  all 
buds. — Thompson. 

A gemma  or  bud  contains  the  rudiments  of  a plant, 
or  of  part  of  a plant,  for  a while  in  a latent  state,  till 
the  time  of  the  year,  and  other  circumstances,  favour 
their  evolution.  In  the  bud,  therefore,  the  vital  princi- 
ple is  dormant.  Buds  of  trees  or  shrubs,  destined  for 
cold  countries,  are  formed  in  the  eourse  of  the  summer 
in  the  bosoms  of  their  leaves,  and  are  generally  soli- 
tary; but  in  the  Lonicera  ccerulea,  or  blue-berried 
honey-suckle,  they  grow  one  under  another  for  three 
successive  seasons. 

The  buds  of  the  plane-tree,  Platanus , are  concealed 
in  the  footstalk,  which  must  be  removed  before  they 
can  be  seen,  and  which  they  force  off  by  their  in- 
crease ; so  that  no  plant  can  have  more  truly  and 
necessarily  deciduous  leaves. 

Shrubs  in  general  have  no  buds,  neither  have  the 
rees  of  hot  climates. 

Buds  are  various  in  their  forms,  but  very  uniform  in 
the  same  species,  or  even  genus.  They  consist  of 
scales  closely  enveloping  each  other,  and  enfolding  the 
embryo  plant  or  branch.  Externally  they  have  often 
an  additional  guard  of  gum,  resin,  or  woolliness, 
against  wet  or  cold.  The  horse-chesnut  affords  a fine 
example  of  large  and  well-formed  buds. 

The  contents  of  buds  are  different,  even  in  differ- 
ent species  of  the  same  genus,  as  willows.  The  buds 
of  some  produce  leaves  only,  others  flowers,  while  in 
other  species  the  same  bud  bears  both  leaves  and  flow- 
ers. Different  causes,  depending  on  the  soil  or  situa- 
tion, seem  in  one  case  to  generate  leaf-buds,  in  another 
flower-buds.  In  general,  whatever  checks  the  luxu- 
riant production  of  leaf-buds,  favours  the  formation  of 
flowers  and  seeds. — Smith. 

Bb 


Gems  are  found  in  all  trees  and  shrubs  in  temperate 
climates.  In  the  majority  of  instances  they  are  visible 
from  the  first,  in  which  case  they  are  axillary , that  is, 
seated  in  the  axill*  of  the  leaves,  or  the  angle  which 
the  upper  part  of  the  footstalk  of  the  leaf  makes  with 
the  surface  of  the  stem  ; but  in  some  instances,  as  the 
sumachs  and  planes,  they  are  latent , being  hid  within 
the  base  of  the  footstalk,  and  never  seen  until  the  fall 
of  the  leaf.  Gems  are  however  sometimes  protruded 
from  the  trunk,  long  after  it  has  ceased  to  produce 
leaves,  as  in  the  case  of  adventitious  buds ; they  are 
also  situated  on  roots,  and  on  tubers,  but  in  these  cases 
they  are  usually  denominated  oculi , or  eyes. 

Annual  plants  are  supposed  to  be  furnished  with 
gems  ; but  although  they  are  devoid  of  covered  gems, 
yet  their  lateral  shoots  proceed  from  naked  buds  which 
immediately  spread  into  foliage. 

The  relative  position  of  axillary  gems  is  necessarily 
regulated  by  that  of  the  leaf,  and  therefore  we  find  them, 

1.  Opposite , or  placed  exactly  on  the  same  line  on 
opposite  sides  of  the  stem  or  the  branch. 

2.  Alternate,  or  placed  alternately,  although  on  op- 
posite sides ; and, 

3.  Spiral , that  is,  placed  round  the  stem  or  branch  in 
such  a manner  that  a cord  wound  in  a spiral  manner 
round  it  would  touch  each  gem.  They  are  said  to  be 
simple  or  solitary , when  one  gem  only  is  seen  in  the 
axilla  of  each  leaf,  as  in  the  greater  number  of  in- 
stances ; and  aggregate , when,  as  in  some  plants,  two, 
three,  or  even  more  are  protruded  at  the  same  lime  : 
thus  we  find  two  in  the  Sambucus  nigra , or  common 
elder ; three  in  the  Aristolochia  sipho , or  broad-leaved 
birth-wort;  and  many  in  the  Zanthoxylum  fraxine 
urn , or  toothache  tree. 

Du  Hamel  first  noticed  the  fact,  that  stems  and 
branches  furnished  with  alternate  axillary  gems  have 
generally  one  terminal  gem  only  ; and  those  with  oppo 
site  have  generally  three  terminal  gems. 

The  gems  on  most  trees  and  shrubs  rise  with  a 
broad  base  from  the  surface  where  they  are  protruded, 
and  consequently  being  in  close  contact  with  it,  are 
said  to  be  sessile ; but  they  are  distant  or  stalked  on 
some,  as  the  common  alder,  on  which  they  are  sup- 
ported on  a short  footstalk,  and  are  termed  pedicillatce , 
or  stalked. 

Gems  differ  very  considerably  in  the  number  and 
characters  of  the  enclosing  scales,  their  contents,  the 
folding  up  of  the  leaves  within  them,  and  the  manner 
in  which  they  are  evolved  in  the  spring. 

a.  The  scales  differ  in  size  and  texture,  even  in  the 
same  gem  : in  the  gems  of  different  plants,  they  differ 
also  in  number  and  in  the  nature  of  their  coverings; 
some  gems  are  entirely  destitute  of  scales ; as  those  of 
annual  plants,  and  many  perennials  of  tropical  cli- 
mates. The  scales  in  some  instances  are  besmeared 
with  a resinous  matter ; in  others  they  are  entirely 
free  from  any  moist  exudation,  but  are  smooth  and 
polished,  being  covered  with  a dry  gummy  varnish  : or 
they  are  externally  hairy  or  enveloped  in  a velvetv 
down. 

Gems  are  arranged  into  three  species : 

1.  Gemmce  foliiferce,  leaf  gems. 

2.  Gemmce  floriferce , flower  gems. 

3.  Gemmce  mixta,  mixed  gems. 

The  Amygdalus  persica,  or  peach-tree,  the  Daphne 
mezereum , and  many  other  plants,  afford  examples  of 
distinct  leaf  and  flower  gems;  the  Syringa  vulgaris 
and  JEsculus  hippocastanum,  of  mixed  gems;  and  the 
pear  and  apple  trees  of  both  leaf  and  mixed  gems. 

The  leaves,  as  has  already  been  mentioned,  are 
variously  folded  up  so  as  to  occupy  the  smallest  possi- 
ble space  in  the  gem.  This  regulates  the  expansion 
of  the  leaves  when  the  gem  opens  in  spring,  and  it  is 
invariably  the  same  in  individual  plants  of  the  same 
species.  This  process  is  termed  foliation , and  the 
figures  which  the  leaves  assume  at  the  time  have  re- 
ceived different  appellations. — Thompson. 

1.  Foliutio  involuta , involute,  in  which  each  inter- 
nal margin  of  the  leaf  is  rolled  inwards ; as  in  Hamu- 
lus lupulus  and  Nymphcea  lutea. 

2.  F.  revoluta , revolute,  in  which  the  lateral  margins 
are  rolled  outwards;  as  in  willows,  and  Rumcx  pa- 
tientia. 

3.  F.  obvoluta,  obvolute,  in  which  one  leaf,  doubled 
lengthways,  embraces  within  its  doubling  one  half  of 
the  other  leaf,  folded  in  the  same  manner ; as  in  Sulvia 
officinalis , and  Dipsacus  communis. 

385 


GEN 


GEN 


4.  F.  convoluta , convolute,  in  which  the  leaf  is  rolled 
lengthwise  in  a spiral  manner,  one  margin  forming  the 
axis  round  which  the  other  turns ; as  in  Prunus  domes- 
tica,  and  Prunus  armeniaca,  the  cabbage,  grasses,  &c. 

5.  F.  equitans,  equitant,  in  which  the  leaf  is  so 
folded  that  the  two  sides  deeply  embrace  the  opposite 
leaf,  which  in  its  turn  encloses  the  one  opposed  to  it, 
and  so  on  to  the  centre  of  the  bud : this  is  beautifully 
exemplified  in  the  Hemarocallisr  or  day-lily,  and  Sy- 
ringa  vulgaris. 

fi.  F.  cimduplicata , in  which  the  two  sides  of  the 
leaf  lie  parallel  to  each  other;  as  in  Fagus  sylvatica 
and  Quercus  robur. 

7.  F.  plicata , plaited,  the  leaf  being  folded  up  like  a 
fan  ; as  in  Belula  alba , and  Alchemilla  vulgaris. 

8.  F.  rectinata,  reclinate,  turned  down,  the  leaf 
hanging  down  and  wrapped  round  the  footstalk ; as  in 
Aconitum  and  Arum. 

9.  F.  circmata :,  circinal,  in  which  the  leaf  is  rolled 
from  the  apex  to  the  base ; as  in  all  ferns. 

As  the  gems  open,  the  leaves  gradually  unfold  them- 
selves, and  assume  their  natural  forms ; but  the  open- 
ing of  the  bud  does  not,  in  every  instance,  immedi- 
ately set  free  the  leaves,  for  in  some  gems  each  leaf  is 
separately  enclosed  in  a membraneous  cover. 

GEMMACEUS.  A term  used  by  botanists  to  a 
flower-stalk  which  grows  out  of  a leaf-bud,  as  is  seen 
in  the  Berberis  vulgaris.  • 

GEMMATIO.  (From  gemma , a bud.)  A term 
used  by  Linnaeus  expressive  of  the  origin,  form,  &c.  of 
buds. 

Gkmu'rsa.  (From  gcmo,  to  groan : so  called  from 
the  pain  it  was  said  to  occasion  in  walking.)  The 
name  of  an  excrescence  between  the  toes. 

Genei'as.  (From  yevvf,  the  cheek.) 

1.  The  downy  hairs  which  first  cover  the  cheek. 

2.  The  name  of  a bandage  mentioned  by  Galen, 
which  covers  the  cheek,  and  comes  under  the  chin. 

GENERATION.  (Generatio ; from  yetvopai , to 
beget.)  Many  ingenious  hypotheses  have  been  insti- 
tuted by  physiologists  to  explain  the  mystery  of  gene- 
ration ; but  the  whole  of  our  knowledge  concerning  it 
appears  to  be  built  upon  the  phenomena  it  affords,  and 
may  be  seen  in  the  works  of  Haller,  Buffon,  Cruick- 
shanks,  and  Haighton.  It  is  a sexual  action,  performed 
in  different  ways  in  most  animals ; many  of  them  have 
different  sexes  and  require  conjunction:  such  are  the 
human  species,  quadrupeds,  and  others.  The  females 
of  quadrupeds  have  a matrix,  separated  info  two  cavi- 
ties, uterus  bicomis,  and  a considerable  number  of 
teats  ; they  have  no  menstrual  flux ; most  of  them  bear 
several  young  at  a time,  and  the  period  of  their  ges- 
tation is  generally  short.  The  generation  of  birds  is 
very  different.  The  males  have  a strong  genital  organ, 
which  is  often  double.  The  vulva  in  the  females  is 
placed  behind  the  anus ; the  ovaries  have  no  matrices, 
and  there  is  a duct  for  the  purpose  of  conveying  the 
egg  from  the  ovarium  into  the  intestines : this  passage 
is  called  the  oviduct.  The  eggs  of  pullets  have  exhi- 
bited unexpected  facts  to  physiologists,  who  examined 
the  phenomena  of  incubation.  The  most  important 
discoveries  are  those  of  the  immortal  Haller,  who 
found  the  chicken  perfectly  formed  in  eggs  which 
were  not  fecuudated.  There  is  no  determinate  con- 
junction between  fishes ; the  female  deposites  her  eggs 
on  the  sands,  over  which  the  male  passes,  and  emits  its 
seminal  fluid,  doubtless  for  the  purpose  of  fecundating 
them;  these  eggs  are  hatched  after  a certain  time. 
The  males  of  several  oviparous  quadrupeds  have  a 
double  or  forked  organ.  Insects  exhibit  all  the  varie- 
ties which  are  observed  in  other  animals:  there  are 
some,  indeed  the  greater  number,  which  have  the 
sexes  in  two  separate  individuals ; among  others,  the 
reproduction  is  made  either  with  or  without  conjunc- 
tion, as  in  the  vine-fretter ; one  of  these  insects,  con- 
fined alone  beneath  a glass,  produces  a great  number 
of  others.  The  organ  of  the  male  in  insects  is  usually 
armed  with  two  hooks  to  seize  the  female : the  place 
of  these  organs  is  greatly  varied ; with  some,  it  is  at 
the  upper  part  of  the  belly,  near  the  chest,  as  in  the 
female  dragon-fly ; in  others,  it  is  at  the  extremity  of 
the  antenna^  as  in  the  male  spider.  Most  worms  are 
hermaphrodite;  each  individual  has  both  sexes.  Po- 
lypi, with  respect  to  generation,  are  singular  animals , 
they  are  reproduced  by  buds  or  offsets : a bud  is  sepa- 
rated from  each  vigorous  polypus,  which  is  fixed  to 
some  neighbouring  body,  and  grows:  polypi  are  like 


wise  found  on  their  surface,  in  the  same  manner  as 
branches  issue  from  plants.  These  are  the  principal 
modes  of  generation  in  animals.  In  the  human  spe- 
cies, which  engages  our  attention  more  particularly, 
the  phenomena  are  as  follow : 

The  part  of  the  male,  in  the  act  of  reproduction,  is 
to  deposite  the  semen  in  the  vagina,  at  a greater  or 
less  distance  from  the  orifice  of  the  uterus. 

The  function  which  the  female  discharges  is  much 
more  obscure ; some  feel,  at  this  moment,  very  strong 
voluptuous  sensations;  others  appear  entirely  insen- 
sible; while  others,  again,  experience  a sensation 
which  is  very  painful.  Some  of  them  pour  out  a mu- 
cous substance  in  considerable  abundance,  at  the  in- 
stant of  the  most  vivid  pleasure  : while,  in  the  greater 
part,  this  phenomenon  is  entirely  wanting.  In  aU 
these  respects,  there  is,  perhaps,  no  exact  resemblance 
between  any  two  females. 

These  different  phenomena  are  common  to  the  most 
frequent  acts  of  copulation,  that  is,  to  those  which  do 
not  produce  impregnation,  as  well  as  those  which  are 
effective. 

The  most  recent  opinion  is,  that  the  uterus  during 
impregnation  opens  a little,  draws  in  the  semen  by 
aspiration,  and  directs  it  to  the  ovarium  by  means  of 
the  Fallopian  tubes,  the  fimbriated  extremity  of  which 
closely  embraces  that  organ. 

The  contact  of  the  semen  determines  the  rupture  of 
one  of  the  vesicles,  and  the  fluid  that  passes  from  it,  or 
the  vesicle  itself,  passes  into  the  uterus,  where  the  new 
individual  is  to  be  developed. 

However  satisfactory  this  explanation  may  appear, 
it  is  purely  hypothetical,  and  even  contrary  to  the  ex- 
periments of  the  most  exact  observers. 

In  the  numerous  attempts  made  upon  animals,  by 
Harvey,  DeGraaf,  Valisneri,  &c.  the  semen  has  never 
been  perceived  in  the  cavity  of  the  uterus ; much  less 
has  it  been  seen  in  the  Fallopian  tube  at  the  surface  of 
the  ovarium.  It  is  quite  the  same  with  the  motion 
which  the  Fallopian  tube  is  supposed  to  have  in  em- 
bracing the  circiun Terence  of  the  ovarium:  it  has 
never  been  proved  by  experiment.  Even  if  one  should 
suppose  that  the  semen  penetrates  into  the  uterus  at 
the  moment  of  coition,  which  is  not  impossible,  though 
it  has  not  been  observed,  it  would  still  be  very  difficult 
to  comprehend  how  the  fluid  could  pass  into  the  Fallo- 
pian tubes,  and  arrive  at  the  ovarium.  The  uterus  in 
the  empty  state  is  not  contractible ; the  uterine  orifice 
of  the  Fallopian  tubes  is  extremely  narrow,  and  these 
canals  have  no  known  sensible  motion. 

On  account  of  the  difficulty  of  conceiving  the  passage 
of  the  semen  to  the  ovarium,  some  authors  have  ima- 
gined that  this  matter  is  not  carried  there,  but  only  the 
vapour  which  exhales  from  it,  or  the  aura  seminalis. 
Others  think  that  the  semen  is  absorbed  in  the  vagina, 
passes  into  the  venous  system,  and  arrives  at  the  ova- 
ria  by  the  arteries.  The  phenomena  which  accom- 
pany the  fecundation  of  women  are,  then,  nearly  un- 
known. An  equal  obscurity  rests  on  the  fecundation 
of  other  mammifergus  females.  Nevertheless,  it 
would  be  more  easy  to  conceive  a passage  of  the  se- 
men to  the  ovaria  in  these,  since  the  uterus  and  the 
Fallopian  tubes  possess  a peristaltic  motion  like  that 
of  the  intestines.  Fecundation,  however,  taking  place 
by  the  contact  of  the  semen  with  the  ova,  in  fishes, 
reptiles,  and  birds,  it  is  not  very  likely  that  nature  em- 
ploys any  other  mode  for  the  mammifera ; it  is  neces- 
sary’, then,  to  consider  it  as  very  probable,  that,  either 
at  the  instant  of  coition,  or  at  a greater  or  a less  time 
afterward,  the  semen  arrives  at  the  ovarium,  where  it 
exerts  more  especially  its  action  upon  the  vessels  most 
developed. 

But,  even  should  it  be  out  of  doubt  that  the  semen 
arrives  at  the  vesicles  of  the  ovarium,  it  would  still 
remain  to  be  known  how  its  contact  animates  the 
germ  contained  in  it.  Now,  this  phenomenon  is  one 
of  those  on  which  our  senses,  and  even  our  mind,  have 
' o hold : it  is  one  of  those  impenetrable  mysteries  of 
vhich  we  are,  and,  perhaps,  shall  ever  remain  ig- 
norant 

t We  have,  however,  on  this  subject,  some  very  inge- 
[ nious  experiments  of  Spallanzani,  which  have  removed 
the  difficulty  as  far  as  it  seems  possible. 

This  philosopher  has  proved,  by  a great  number  of 
! trials,  1st,  that  three  grains  of  semen,  dissolved  in  two 
1 pounds  of  water,  are  sufficient  to  give  to  it  the  fecun 
1 iating  virtue;  2d,  that  the  spermatic  animalcula  are 


GEN 


GEN 


not  necessary  to  fecundation,  as  Buffon  and  other  au- 
thors have  thought;  3d,  that  the  aura  seminalis,  or 
seminal  vapour,  has  no  fecundating  property ; 4th,  that 
a bitch  can  be  impregnated  by  the  mechanical  injec- 
tion of  semen  into  her  vagina,  &c.  &c. 

It  is  thus  necessary  to  consider  as  conjectural  what 
authors  say  about  the  general  signs  of  fecundation. 
At  the  instance  of  conception,  the  woman  feels,  it  is 
said,  a universal  tremor,  continued  for  some  time,  ac- 
companied by  a voluptuous  sensation ; the  features 
are  discomposed,  the  eyes  lose  their  brilliancy,  the  pu- 
pils are  dilated,  the  visage  pale,  &c.  No  doubt,  im- 
pregnation is  sometimes  accompanied  by  these  signs ; 
but  many  mothers  have  never  felt  them,  and  reach 
even  the  third  month  of  their  pregnancy  without  sus- 
pecting their  situation.” — Magendie's  Physiology. 

Fecundation  having  thus  taken  place,  a motion  is 
induced  in  the  vivified  ovum,  which  ruptures  the  ten- 
der vesicle  that  contains  it ; the  fimbria;  of  the  Fallo- 
pian tube  then  grasp  and  convey  it  into  the  tube, 
which,  by  its  peristaltic  motion,  conducts  it  into  the 
cavity  of  the  uterus,  there  to  be  evolved  and  brought 
to  maturity,  and,  at  the  expiration  of  nine  months,  to 
be  sent  into  the  world. 

Generation,  oroans  of.  The  parts  subservient 
to  generation  in  a woman  are  divided  into  external 
and  internal.  The  external  parts  are  the  mone  veneris , 
the  labia,  the  perinceum,  the  clitoris , and  the  nymphee. 
To  these  may  be  added  the  meatus  urinarius,  or  ori- 
fice of  the  urethra.  The  hymen  may  be  esteemed  the 
barrier  between  the  external  and  internal  parts.  The 
internal  parts  of  generation  are  the  vagina  and  uterus, 
and  its  appendages. 

The  parts  which  constitute  the  organs  of  genera- 
tion in  men,  are  the  penis , testes , and  vesiculce  semi- 
nales. 

GENICULATUS.  Geniculate ; beRt  like  the  knee : 
applied  to  the  culm  or  straw  of  grasses  ; as  in  Alopecu- 
risgeniculatus. 

GENIO.  (From  yeveiov,  the  chin.)  Names  com- 
pounded of  this  word  belong  to  muscles  which  are 
attached  to  the  chin. 

Genio-hyo-glossus.  (From  yeveiov , the  chin, 
voeides,  the  os  hyoides,  and  yXiooca,  the  tongue ; so 
called  from  its  origin  and  insertion.)  Oenioglossus 
of  some  authors.  The  muscle  which  forms  the  fourth 
layer  between  the  lower  jaw  and  os  hyoides.  It  arises 
from  a rough  protuberance  in  the  inside  of  the  middle 
of  the  lower  jaw ; its  fibres  run  like  a fan,  forwards, 
upwards,  and  backwards,  and  are  inserted  into  the  tip, 
middle,  and  root  of  the  tongue,  and  base  of  the  os 
hyoides,  near  its  corner.  Its  use  is  to  draw  the  tip  of 
the  tongue  backwards  into  the  mouth,  the  middle 
downwards,  and  to  render  its  back  concave.  It  also 
draws  its  root  and  the  os  hyoides  forwards,  and  thrusts 
the  tongue  out  of  the  mouth. 

Genio-hyoideus.  (From  yeveiov,  the  chin,  and 
voeides,  the  os  hyoides ; so  called  from  its  origin  in  the 
chin,  and  its  insertion  in  the  os  hyoides.)  The  muscle 
which  contitutes  the  third  layer  between  the  lower 
jaw  and  os  hyoides.  It  is  a long,  thin,  and  fleshy 
muscle,  arising  tendinous  from  a rough  protuberance 
at  the  inside  of  the  chin,  and  growing  somewhat 
broader  and  thicker  as  it  descends  backward  to  be  in- 
serted by  very  6hort  tendinous  fibres  into  both  the 
edges  of  the  base  of  the  os  hyoides.  It  draws  the  os 
hyoides  forwards  to  the  chin. 

Gkniopharynge'us.  See  Constrictor  pharyngis 
superior. 

Gknipi  album.  See  Artemisia  rupestris. 

Genim  verum.  The  plant  directed  for  medicinal 
purposes  under  this  title,  is  the  Achillea— foliis  pinna- 
tis,  pinnis  simplicibus,  glabris,  punctatis,  of  Haller. 
It  has  a very  grateful  smell,  and  a very  bitter  taste,  and 
is  exhibited  in  Switzerland,  in  epilepsy,  diarrhoea,  and 
debility  of  the  stomach. 

GENI'STA.  (From  genu,  a knee;  so  called  from 
the  inflection  and  angularity  of  its  twigs.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Liunaian  system. 
Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  hame  of  the  common  broom. 
See  Spartium  scoparium. 

Genista  canariensis.  This  tree  was  supposed 
to  afford  the  lignum  Rhodium,  which  is  now  known 
to  be  an  aspalathus.  See  Aspalathus  canariensis. 

Genista  spinosa  indica.  Bake l scliulli.  An  In- 
dian tree,  a decoction  of  the  roots  of  which  is  diuretic. 


The  leaves,  boiled  and  sprinkled  in  vinegar,  have  the 
same  effect,  according  to  Ray. 

Genista  vincToria.  The  systematic  name  of 
Chamceparttum , or  Dyer’s  broom. 

GEN  IT  A LE.  (From  gigno,  to  beget.)  The  mem- 
brum  virile  See  Penis. 

Genita'iaum.  (From  genitale,  the  membrmn  virile.) 
A disease  of  the  genital  parts. 

GENITICA.  (From  yeivopat , gignor.)  The  name 
of  a class  of  diseases,  in  Good’s  Nosology,  embracing 
diseases  of  the  sexual  function.  It  has  three  orders, 
viz.  Cenotica,  Orgastica ; Carpotica. 

Genitu'ra.  (From  gigno.)  I.  The  male  seed. 

2.  The  membrum  virile. 

Ge'non.  (From  yew,  the  knee.)  A mo#eable  ar- 
ticulation like  that  of  the  knee. 

[“Genesee  oil.  This  is  a variety  of  petroleum 
found  in  various  parts  of  the  United  States,  sometimes 
abundantly,  as  in  Kentucky , Ohio , the  western  parts 
of  Pennsylvania , and  in  Mew-  York , at  Seneca  lake, 
&c.  It  usually  floats  on  the  surface  of  springs,  which; 
in  many  cases,  are  known  to  be  in  the  vicinity  of  coal. 
It  is  sometimes  called  Seneca  or  Genesee  oil.”— 
Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

GENSING.  See  Panax. 

GENTIA'NA.  (From  Oentius,  king  of  Illyria,  who 
first  used  it.)  1.  The -name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order, 
Digynia.  Gentian. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  gentian  root. 
See  Gentiana  lutea. 

Gentiana  alba.  See  Laserpitium  latifolium. 

Gentiana  centaurium.  Less  centaury  was  so 
called  in  the  Linnsean  system;  but  it  is  now  Chironia 
oentaurium. 

Gentiana  lutea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  gentian.  Gentiana  rubra.  Felwort.  The 
gentian  met  with  in  the  shops  is  the  root  of  the  gen- 
tiana— corollis  subquinquefidis  rotatis  verticillatis, 
calycibus  spathaceis,  of  Linnaeus ; and  is  imported 
from  Switzerland  and  Germany.  It  is  the  only  medi- 
cinal part  of  the  plant,  has  little  or  no  smell,  but  to  the 
taste  manifests  great  bitterness,  on  which  account  it  is 
in  general  use  as  a tonic,  stomachic,  anthelmintic,  an- 
tiseptic, emmenagogue,  and  febrifuge.  The  officinal 
preparations  of  this  root  are  tfie  infusum  gentiana 
conipositum,  and  tinctura  gentiana  composita , of  the 
London  Pharmacopoeia ; and  the  inf  usum  amarum, 
vinum  amcurum,  tinctura  amara,  of  the  Edinburgh 
Pharmacopoeia  ; and  the  extractum  gentiana  is  order- 
ed by  both. 

Gentiana  rubra.  See  Gentiana  lutea. 

[“Gentiana  catesb(ei.  Blue  gentian.  Of  various 
native  species  of  gentian,  which  our  country  affords  ; 
this  approaches  most  nearly  to  the  officinal  plant  in 
bitterness.  Its  virtue  appears  to  reside  chiefly  in  an 
extractive  principle,  soluble  in  water  and  alkoliol.  It 
has  also  a little  resin.  Like  the  imported  gentian,  it 
is  an  active  tonic,  invigorating  the  stomach,  and  giving 
relief  in  complaints  arising  from  indigestion.  It  ap- 
pears to  possess  much  reputation  in  the  Southern  States, 
to  which  its  growth  is  principally  confined.” — Bigel. 
Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Gentianine.  The  bitter  principle  of  the  Gentian 
root. 

[“  The  discovery  of  this  immediate  principle,  pre- 
sents a circumstance  so  singular  as  to  merit  being  re- 
lated. 

“ M.  Henry,  chief  of  central  pharmacy,  and  M.  Ca- 
ventou,  were  occupied  at  the  same  time,  and  without 
the  knowledge  of  each  other,  on  the  analysis  of  gen- 
tian. They  arrived  at  results  so  much  alike,  that 
having  communicated  their  labours  to  each  other,  they 
perceived  that  they  seemed  to  have  acted  in  concert, 
and  resolved  to  publish  them  in  common. 

“ Preparation  of  gentianine.  The  powder  of  gen- 
tian is  treated  with  cold  ether.  After  forty-eight  hours, 
a tincture  is  obtained  of  a greenish  yellow ; — this  tinc- 
ture filtered,  poured  into  an  open  vase,  and  exposed  to 
heat,  will  become,  by  cooling,  if  the  liquor  is  sufficiently 
concentrated,  a yellow  crystalline  mass,  with  a Very 
perceptible  taste  and  smell  of  gentian. 

“ This  mass  is  treated  with  alkoliol  until  it  ceases 
taking  a citron  tinge.  The  washings  are  reunited  and 
exposed  to  a mild  heat;  the  yellow  crystalline  mass 
reappears,  which,  upon  evaporation,  becomes  con- 
centrated, and  of  a very  strong  bitterness. 


387 


GEO 


GEO 


“Resumed  by  feeble  alkohol,  it  is  redissolved  in 
part,  with  the  exception  of  a certain  quantity  of  oily 
niatter 

“ This  last  alkoholic  solution,  besides  the  bitter  prin- 
ciple of  the  gentian,  contains  an  acid  substance,  and 
the  odorous  matter  of  gentian. 

“ By  evaporating  this  liquor  to  dryness,  soaking  the 
matter  in  water,  adding  a little  washed  and  calcined 
magnesia,  boiling  and  evaporating  with  a vapour  bath, 
the  greatest  part  of  the  odorous  matter  of  the  gentian 
is  expelled;  the  acidity  disappears  by  means  of  the 
magiiesia,  and  the  yellow  bitter  principle  remains  in 
part  free  and  in  part  combined  with  the  magnesia,  to 
which  it  communicates  a beautiful  yellow  colour. 
Then  by  boiling  this  magnesia  with  ether,  the  greater 
part  of  this  bitter  principle  is  taken  up,  which  is  ob- 
tained pure  and  alone  by  evaporation.  If  it  be  wished 
to  separate  the  greatest  part  of  the  bitter  principle, 
which  remains  fixed  in  the  magnesia,  and  which  the 
ether  could  not  take  up,  it  must  be  treated  with  oxalic 
acid,  in  a quantity  sufficient  to  produce  acidity.  This 
acid  unites  with  the  magnesia,  and  sets  free  the  bit- 
ter principle,  which  is  retaken  by  the  means  already 
pointed  out. 

“ Properties  of  gentianine.  The  gentianine  is  yel- 
low, inodorous,  with  the  aromatic  bitterness  of  the 
gentian  very  strong,  and  which  is  increased  very  much 
when  it  is  dissolved  in  an  acid. 

“It  is  very  soluble  in  ether  and  alkohol,  and  is  sepa- 
rated by  spontaneous  evaporation,  in  the  form  of  very 
small  yellow  crystalline  needles.  It  is  much  less  solu- 
ble in  cold  water,  which  it  renders,  however, very  bitter; 
boiling  water  dissolves  more. 

“The  dilute  alkalies  deepen  very  much  its  colour, 
and  dissolve  it  a little  more  than  water  alone. 

“ Acids  lighten  its  yellow  colour  in  a very  evident 
manner.  Its  solutions  are  almost  colourless  with  sul- 
phuric and  phosphoric  acid,  and  yellowish  with  acids 
more  feeble,  such  as  the  acetic  acid.  Concentrated 
sulphuric  acid  carbonizes  it  and  destroys  its  bitterness. 

“ Gentianine,  exposed  in  a glass  tube  to  the  heat  of 
boiling  mercury,  is  sublimed  in  the  form  of  small  yel- 
low crystalline  needles.  One  part  is  decomposed.. 

“ Action  of  gentianine  on  man  and  other  animals. 
Some  which  I made,  taught  me  that  gentianine  has  no 
poisonous  qualities.  Several  grains  of  this  substance 
injected  into  the  veins,  produce  no  apparent  effect.  I 
myself  swallowed  two  grains  dissolved  in  alkohol,  and 
only  experienced  an  extreme  bitterness,  and  a slight 
feeling  of  warmth  at  the  stomach 

11  Mode  of  employing  gentianine.  The  tincture  is 
the  preparation  which  should  be  most  frequently  used. 
It  may  be  prepared  from  the  following  formula : 

Tincture  of  gentianine.  fit.  Alkohol  at  24°,  1 ounce. 

Gentianine,  5 grains. 

“This  tincture  replaces  with  success  the  elixir  of 
gentian,  and  is  employed  in  the  same  circumstances : 

Svrup  of  gentianine  fit.  syrup  of  sugar,  1 pound. 

Gentianine,  16  grains. 

« This  is  one  of  the  best  bitters  which  can  be  used  in 
scrofulous  affections.”— Magendie's  Formulary.  A.] 

GE'NU.  The  knee. 

GENU'GRA.  (From  yew,  the  knee,  and  aypa, 
a seizure.)  A name  in  Paracelsus  for  the  gout  in  the 

GENUS.  (From  yevos,  a family.)  By  this  term  is 
understood,  in  natural  history,  a certain  analogy  of  a 
number  of  species,  making  them  agree  together  in  the 
number,  figure,  and  situation  of  their  parts ; in  such  a 
manner,  that  they  are  easily  distinguished  from  the 
species  of  any  other  genus,  at  least  by  some  one  arti- 
cle. This  is  the  proper  and  determinate  sense  of  the 
word  genus,  whereby  it  forms  a subdivision  of  any 
class,  or  order  of  natural  beings,  whether  of  the  ani- 
mal, vegetable,  or  mineral  kingdoms,  all  agreeing  in 
certain  common  and  distinct  characters. 

GEODES.  A kind  of  ajtites,  the  hollow  of  which 
contains  only  loose  earth,  instead  of  a nodule. 

GEOFFR^E'A.  (Named  in  honour  of  Dr.  Geoffroy.) 
Oeoffroya.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  lHadelphia  ; Order,  Decat i- 
dria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  cabbage  bark- 
tree.  See  Geoffrcea  inermis. 

Geoffr.ea  inermis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cabbage  bark-tree,  or  worm  bark-tree.  Geoffraa — 

foliis  lanceolatis  of  Swartz.  It  has  a mucilaginous 
388 


and  sweetish  taste,  and  a disagreeable  smell.  Accord- 
ing to  Dr.  Wright  of  Jamaica,  it  is  powerfully  medici 
nal  as  an  anthelmintic. 

Geoffr.ea  jamaicensis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  bastard  cabbage-tree,  or  bulgewater-tree.  Geoffroy  a 
— inermis  foliolis  lanceolatis , of  Swartz.  The  bark  is 
principally  used  in  Jamaica,  and  with  great  success,  as 
a vermifuge. 

Geoffrcea  surinamensis.  The  systematic  name 
of  a tree,  the  bark  of  which  is  esteemed  as  an  anthel- 
mintic. 

GEOFFROY,  Stephen  Francis,  was  born  at 
Paris,  in  1672.  After  giving  him  an  excellent  general 
education,  his  father,  who  was  an  apothecary,  sent 
him  to  study  his  own  profession  at  Montpelier  ; where 
he  attended  the  several  lectures.  On  his  return  to 
Paris,  having  already  acquired  considerable  reputation, 
he  was  appointed  to  attend  the  Duke  de  Tallard,  on  his 
embassy  to  England,  in  1698.  Here  he  was  very  favour- 
ably received,  and  elected  a member  of  the  Royal  So- 
ciety : and  he  afterward  visited  Holland  and  Italy.  His 
attention  was  chiefly  directed  to  natural  history  and 
the  materia  medica,  his  father  wishing  him  to  succeed 
to  his  establishment  at  Paris : however,  he  became  am- 
bitious of  the  higher  branch  of  the  profession,  and  at 
length  graduated  in  1704.  His  reputation  rapidly  in- 
creased ; and  he  was  called  in  consultation  even  by 
the  most  distinguished  practitioners.  In  1709  he  was 
appointed  to  the  professorship  of  medicine  on  the 
death  of  Tournefort.  He  then  undertook  to  deliver  to 
his  pupils  a complete  History  of  the  Materia  Medica, 
divided  into  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  sub- 
stances ; the  first  part  of  which  he  finished,  and  about 
half  of  the  second:  this  was  afterward  published  from 
his  papers,  in  Latin,  in  three  octavo  volumes.  In  1712 
he  was  made  professor  of  chemistry  in  the  king’s  gar- 
den ; and  14  years  after,  dean  of  the  faculty.  In  this 
office  he  was  led  into  some  active  disputes ; whence 
his  health,  naturally  delicate,  began  to  decline ; and  he 
died  in  the  beginning  of  1731.  Notwithstanding  his 
illness,  however,  he  completed  a work,  which  had 
been  deemed  necessary  by  preceding  deans,  but  never 
accomplished  ; namely,  a Pharmacopoeia,  which  was 
published  under  the  name  of  “ Code  Medicamentaire 
de  la  Faculty  de  Paris.” 

GEOGNOSY.  The  same  as  geolog^. 

GEOLOGY.  ( Geologia ; from  yy,  the  earth,  and 
Aoyos,  a discourse.)  A description  of  the  structure  of 
the  earth.  This  study  may  be  divided,  like  most 
others,  into  two  parts ; observation  and  theory.  By 
the  first  we  learn  the  relative  positions  of  the  great 
rocky  or  mineral  aggregates  that  compose  the  crust  of 
our  globe  ; through  the  second,  we  endeavour  to  pene- 
trate into  the  causes  of  these  collocations.  A valuable 
work  w’as  some  time  since  published,  comprehending 
a view  of  both  parts  of  the  subject,  by  Mr.  Greenough, 
to  which  the  reader  is  referred  for  much  instruction, 
communicated  in  a very  lively  manner. 

Very  recently  the  world  has  been  favoured  with  the 
first  part  of  an  excellent  view  of  this  science  by  Messrs. 
Conybeare  and  Phillips,  in  their  “ Outlines  of  the 
Geology  of  England  and  Wales;”  from  which  work, 
the  following  brief  sketch  of  the  subject  is  taken:  The 
Traili  de  Geognosie  of  D’Aubuisson  bears  a high 
character  on  the  continent. 

Werner’s  Table  of  the  different  Mountain  Rocks, 
from  Jameson. 

Class  I. — Primitive  rocks. 

1.  Granite.  8.  Porphyry. 

2.  Gneiss.  9.  Syenite. 

3.  Mica-slate.  10.  Topaz-rock. 

4.  Clay-slate.  11.  Quartz-rock. 

5.  Primitive  limestone.  12.  Primitive  flinty-slate. 

6.  Primitive  trap.  13.  Primitive  gypsum. 

7.  Serpentine.  14.  White  stone. 

Class  II. — Transition  rocks. 

1.  Transition  lime-stone.  4.  Transition  flinty-slate. 

2.  Transition  trap.  5.  Transition  gypsum. 

3.  Greywacke 

Class  III. — Floetz  rocks. 

1.  Old  red  sandstone,  or  first  sandstone  formation. 

2.  First  or  oldest  floetz  limestone. 

3.  First  or  oldest  floetz  gypsum. 

4.  Second  or  variegated  sandstone  formation. 

5.  Second  floetz  gypsum. 

6.  Second  floetz  limestone. 

7.  Third  floetz  limestone. 


GEO 


GEO 

8.  Rocksalt  formation. 

9.  Chalk  formation. 

10.  Floetz-trap  formation. 

11.  Independent  coal  formation. 

12.  Newest  floetz-trap  formation. 

Class  IV. — Alluvial  rocks. 

1.  Peat.  5.  Nagelfluh. 

2.  Sand  and  gravel.  6.  Calc-tuff. 

3.  Loam.  7.  Calc-sinter. 

4.  Bog-iron  ore. 

Class  V. — Volcanic  rocks. 
Pseudo-volcanic  rocks. 

1.  Burnt  clay. 

2.  Porcelain  jasper. 

3.  Earth  slag. 

4.  Columnar  clay  ironstone. 

5.  Polier,  or  polishing  slate. 

True  volcanic  rocks. 

1.  Ejected  stones  and  ashes. 

2.  Different  kinds  of  lava. 

3.  The  matter  of  muddy  eruptions. 

The  primitive  rocks  lie  undermost,  and  never  con- 
tain any  traces  of  organized  beings  imbedded  in  them. 
The  transition  rocks  contain  comparatively  few  or- 
ganic remains,  and  approach  more  nearly  to  the 


In  all  these  formations,  from  the  lowest  to  the  high- 
est, we  And  a repetition  of  rocks  and  beds  of  similar 
chemical  composition ; i.  e.  siliceous,  argillaceous,  and 
calcareous,  but  with  a considerable  difference  in  tex- 
ture ; those  in  the  lowest  formations  being  compact 
and  often  crystalline,  while  those  in  the  highest  and 
most  recent  are  loose  and  earthy.  These  repetitions 
form  what  the  Wernerians  call  formation  suites.  We 
may  mention, 

1st.  The  limestone  suite.  This  exhibits,  in  the  in- 
ferior or  primitive  order,  crystalline  marbles ; in  the 
two  next,  or  transition  and  carboniferous  orders,  com- 
pact and  subcrystalline  limestones  (Derbyshire  lime- 
stone) ; in  the  supermedial  or  floetz  order,  less  compact 
limestone  (lias),  calcareous  freestone  (Portland  and 
Bath  stone),  and  chalk ; in  the  superior  or  newest 
floetz  order,  loose  earthy  limestones. 

2 d.  The  argillaceous  suite  presents  the  following 
gradations;  clay-slate,  shale  of  the  coal-measures,  shale 
of  the  lias,  clays  alternating  in  the  oolite  series,  and 
that  of  the  sand  beneath  the  chalk  ; and,  lastly,  clays 
above  the  chalk. 

3d.  The  siliceous  suite  may  (since  many  of  the  sand- 
stones of  which  it  consists  present  evident  traces  of 
felspar  and  abundance  of  mica,  as  well  as  grains  of 
quartz,  and  since  mica  is  more  or  less  present  in  every 
bed  of  sand)  perhaps  deserves  to  have  granite  placed  at 
its  head,  as  its  several  members  may  possibly  have  been 
derived  from  the  detritus  of  that  rock:  it  may  be  con- 
tinued thus  ; quartz  rock  and  transition  sandstone,  old 
red  sandstone,  millstone-grit,  and  coal-grits,  new  red 
sandstone,  sand  and  sandstone  beneath  the  chalk,  and 


chemical  structure  of  the  primitive,  than  the  mechani- 
cal of  the  secondary  rocks.  As  these  transition  rocks 
were  taken  by  Werner  from  among  those  which,  in 
his  general  arrangement,  were  called  secondary,  the 
formation  of  that  class  made  it  necessary  to  abandon 
the  latter  term.  To  denote  the  mineral  masses  re- 
posing in  his  transition  series,  he  accordingly  employed 
the  term  floetz  rocks,  from  the  idea  that  they  were 
generally  stratified  in  planes  nearly  horizontal,  while 
those  of  the  older  strata  were  inclined  to  the  horizon 
at  considerable  angles.  But  this  holds  good  with  re- 
gard to  the  structure  of  those  countries  which  are 
comparatively  low ; in  the  Jura  chain,  and  on  the 
bbrders  of  the  Alps  and  Pyrenees,  Werner’s  floetz 
formations  are  highly  inclined.  Should  we  therefore 
persist  in  the  use  of  this  term,  says  Mr.  Conybeare,  we 
must  prepare  ourselves  to  speak  of  vertical  beds  of 
floetz,  (*.  e.  horizontal),  limestone,  &c.  As  the  in- 
quiries of  geologists  extended  the  knowledge  of  the 
various  formations,  Werner,  or  his  disciples,  found  it 
necessary  to  subdivide  the  bulky  class  of  floetz  rocks 
into  floetz  and  newest  floetz,  thus  completing  a fourfold 
enumeration.  Soma  writers  have  bestowed  the  term 
tertiary  on  the  newest  floetz  rocks  of  Werner.'  The 
following  synoptical  view  of  geological  arrangement 
is  given  by  the  Rev.  Mr.  Conybeare. 


above  the  chalk.  In  all  these  instances  a regular 
diminution  in  the  degree  of  consolidation  may  be  per- 
ceived in  ascending  the  series. 

[“  A Geological  Nomenclature  for  North  America , 

founded  upon  Geological  Surveys,  by  Amos  Eaton , 

Professor  in  the  Rensellaer  School  at  Troy , N.  Y. 

Classes  of  Rocks. 

Class  1.  Primitive  Rocks;  being  those  which  contain 
no  organic  relics  nor  coal  See  Fig.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  and  6. 

Class  2.  Transition  Rocks ; being  those  which  con- 
tain no  animal  remains,  but  radiated  and  molluscous — 
the  latter  more  than  one  valvcd,  or  one  valved  and 
chambered.  See  Fig.  7, 8,  9,  10, 11,  and  12. 

Class  3.  Secondary  Rocks  ; being  those  which  con- 
tain in  some  localities,  one  valved  molluscous  animal 
remains,  not  chambered.  They  embrace  most  of  those 
remains  found  in  transition  rocks  also;  and  the  upper 
secondary  rocks  contain  oviparous  vertebral  remains. 
See  Fig.  13,  14,  15, 16,  17,  18,  and  19. 

Class  4.  Superincumbent  Rocks ; being  those  horn- 
blende rocks,  which  overlay  others  without  any  regular 
order  of  superposition,  supposed  to  be  of  volcanic 
origin.  See  Fig.  20. 

Classes  of  Detritus. 

Class  5.  Alluvial  Detritus ; being  those  masses 
of  detritus,  which  have  been  washed  into  their  present 
situation.  See  Fig.  21,  22,  23,  and  24. 

Class  6.  Analluvial  Detritus ; being  those  masses 
of  detritus,  which  have  not  been  washed  from  places 
where  they  were  first  formed  by  the  disintegration  of 
rocks.  Sec  Fig.  25  and  26. 


Character. 

Proposed  Names. 

Wernerian  names 

Other  Writers. 

1.  Formations  (chiefly  of  sand  and 
clay)  above  the  chalk. 

Superior  order. 

Newest  floetz  class. 

Tertiary  class. 

2.  Comprising, 

a.  Chalk. 

b.  Sands  and  clay,  beneath  the 

chalk. 

c.  Calcareous  freestones  {ooli- 

tes) and  argillaceous  beds. 

d.  New  red  sandstone , conglo- 

merate, and  magnesian 
limestone. 

Supermedial  order. 

Floetz  class. 

Secondary  ^lass. 

3.  Carboniferous  rdeks,  comprising, 

a.  Coal  measures. 

b.  Carboniferous  limestone. 

c.  Old  red  sandstone. 

Medial  order. 

Sometimes  referred  to  the  preceding,  some- 
times to  the  succeeding  class,  by  writers  of  these 
schools ; very  often  the  coal  measures  are  refer- 
red to  the  former,  the  subjacent  limestone  and 
sandstone  to  the  latter. 

4.  Roofing  slate,  &c.  &c. 

Submedial  order. 

Transition  class. 

Intermediate  class. 

5#  Mica  slate,  gneiss,  granite,  &c. 

Inferior  order. 

Primitive  class. 

Primitive  class. 

389 


GEOLOGICAL  NOMENCLATURE 


CASK  OF 

SPECIMENS. 
Classes  2 & 1. 

GENERAL  STRATA 

and 

SUBDIVISIONS. 

VARIETIES. 

IMBEDDED 

and 

DISSEMINATED. 

in 

Second  Gray- 
Wacke. 

B.  Rubble. 

A.  Compact. 

Red  sandy,  (old 
red  sand  "?) 
Home-slate. 
Grind-stone. 

Manganese. 

Anthracite. 

JJL. 

Metalliferous 

Limerock. 

B.  Shelly. 

A.  Compact. 

Birdseye  marble. 

JO 

V 

Calciferous 

Sandrock. 

B.  Oeodiferous 
A.  Compact. 

Quartzose. 

Sparry. 

Oolitic. 

Semi-opal.  An- 
thracite. Barytes. 

Concentric  con- 
cretions. 

9L 

IIIIJ 

Sparry  Limerock. 

B.  Slaty. 

A.  Compact. 

Checkered  rock. 

Chlorite. 
Calc  spar. 

*ggj| 

First  Gray- 
Wacke.* 
B.  Rubble. 

A.  Compact. 

Chloritic. 

Milky  quartz. 
Calc  spar. 
Anthracite. 

7.® 

\ 

1881 

Argillite. 

B.  Wacke  Slate. 
A.  Clay  Slate. 

Chloritic. 
Glazed. 
Roof-slate. 
Red.  Purple. 

Flinty  slate.  An- 
thracite. Striated 
quartz.  Milky 

quartz.  Chlorite. 

a 

Granular  Lime- 
rock. 

B.  Sandy. 

A.  Compact. 

Verd-antique. 
Dolomite. 
Statuary  marble. 

Tremolite. 
Serpentine. 
Chromate  of  iron. 

V N&oll 

Granular 

Quartz. 

B.  Sandy. 

A.  Compact. 

Ferruginous. 

Yellowish. 

Translucent. 

Manganese. 

Hematite. 

Ism 

Talcose  Slate. 

B.  Fissile. 

A.  Compact. 

Chloritic. 

Octahedral  crys- 
tals of  iron  ore. 
Chlorite. 

|§l§ 

Hornblende 

Rock. 

B.  Slaty. 

A.  Granitia 

Greenstone. 

Gneissoid. 

Porphyritic. 

Sienitic. 

Granite. 

Actynolite. 

Augite. 

lSi 

Mica-Slate. 

B.  Fissile. 

A.  Compact. 

Staurotide. 

Sappare; 

Garnet. 

1 

gpil 

Granite. 

B.  Slaty  (gneiss). 
A.  Crystalline. 

Sandy. 

Porphyritic. 

Graphic. 

Shorl. 

Plumbago. 

Steatite. 

Diallage. 

* No.  8.  (Second  Gray-Wacke)  is  a secondary  rock,  and  embraces  the  Authracite  coal  o£  tbe  Lehigh  river,  in 
Pennsylvania. 

3'JO 


OF  ROCKS  IN  PLACE. 


CASE  OF 

SPECIMENS. 
Classes  4 & 3. 

GENERAL  STRATA 

and 

SUBDIVISIONS. 

VARIETIES. 

IMBEDDED 

and 

DISSEMINATED. 

ZBAOJ  Si 

Basalt. 

B.  Greenstone  trap 
(columnar). 

A.  Amygdaloid. 
(cellular). 

Granular 

Compact 

Toadstone. 

Amethyst. 

Calcedony. 

Prehnite. 

Zeolite. 

Opal. 

Third  Gray* 

WACKE.* 

B.  Pyritiferous  grit. 
A.  Pyritiferous  late. 

Conglomerate 
(breccia). 
Calcareous  grit. 
Red  sandstone, 
(old  red  sandstone  7) 
Red-vvacke. 
Argillaceous. 

Grindstone. 
Hornstone  7 
Honeslate. 
Bituminous  shale 
and  coal. 

Fibrous  barytes. 

Cornitiferous 

Limerock. 

B.  Shelly. 

A.  Compact. 

Hornstone. 

JlRjl 

Geodiferous 

Limerock. 

B.  Sandy. 

A.  Swinestone. 

Foetid. 

Snow-gypsum. 

Strontian. 

Zinc. 

Fluor  spar. 

Lias. 

B.  Calciferous  grit. 
A.  Calciferous  slate. 

Shell  grit. 

Argillaceous. 

Conchoidal. 

Shell  limestone. 
Vermicular. 
Water  cement. 
Gypsum. 

V 

Ferriferous 

Rock. 

B.  Sandy. 

A.  Slaty. 

Conglomerate. 
Green.  Blue. 

Argillaceous  iron 
ore  (reddle). 

ttgii 

J & 

Saliferous 

Rock. 

B.  Sandy. 

A.  Marl- slate. 

Conglomerate. 
Gray-band. 
Red-sandy. 
Gray  slate. 
Red  slate. 

Salt,  or  salt  springs 

ijpjji 

HH 

Millstone  Grit. 

B.  Conglomerate. 
A.  Sandy. 

Coal  7 

* No  19.  (Third  Graywacke)  u overlaid  by  Oolite,  in  the  State  of  Ohio.  It  is  the  upper  secondary  of  Bake 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  DETRITUS 


CASE  OF 

SPECIMENS. 
Classes  6 & 5. 

GENERAL  DEPO- 
SITES  AND 
SUBDIVISIONS. 

VARIETIES. 

IMBEDDED  and 

disseminated 

SUBSTANCES. 

%e. 

Superficial  Anal- 
luvion. 

B.  Granulated 
(from  graywacke). 

mmmm 

A.  Clay-loam 
(from  argillite). 

Various  boulders. 
Pebbles. 

Stratified  Anal- 
luvion. 

C.  Lias. 

B.  Ferriferous. 
A.  Saliferous. 

Gypsum. 

Shell  limestone. 
Reddle. 



Post-diluvion. 

m 

' ; - ' r ^ 

B.  Sediment. 

A.  Pebbles  (in  the 
rocky  bed  of  a river). 

* 

Various  boulders. 
Trees  and  herbs. 
Fish  bones  and 
shells. 

Works  of  art. 

Ilf 

Ultimate  Dilu- 
vion 

(on  crag  in  old  fo- 
rests). 

Yellowish  gray. 
Grayish  yellow. 

kill 

Diluvion 

(in  an  antediluvial 
trough). 

Quicksand. 

Gravel. 

Vegetable  mould. 

Boulders. 

Trees  and  leaves. 
Bones  and  shells. 
No  works  of  art. 

Antediluvion,  or 
Upper  Tertiary.* 

|BS» 

C.  Marine , or  Bag- 
shot,  sand t and  crag. 

B.  Marly  clay. 

Pudding-stone. 

Buhrstone. 

Bog  ore. 
Shell-marl. 
Indurated  marl 

Quicksand. 
Yellow  sand. 
Hard  pan. 

A.  Plastic  clay. 

Brick  earth. 

Septaria  ? 

P— B =-=1  _ 

- 

« No.  21.  (Antediluvion)  is  the^'enutne  tertiary  formation  in  New  Jersey,  along  the  bay  of  Amboy. 

Professor  Eaton  has  recently  reviewed  most  of  the  territory  upon  which  his  synopsis  was  founded.  He  now 
savs  that  all  strata  may  be  arranged  under  five  series,  each  comprising  thru  formations : the  first  series  according 
with  the  primitive  class,  the  second  with  the  transition,  the  third  with  the  lower  secondary,  the  fourth  with  the 
upper  seconda-y,  and  the  fifth  with  the  tertiary : that  the  lower  formation  of  every  series  is  carboniferous,  the  middle 
one  quartzose,  the  upper  one  calcareous.  In  the  course  of  a year,  this  view  of  the  subject  will  probably  be  published, 
illustrated  by  a geological  map  of  the  State  of  New  York.  A prodeomus  of  the»o  series  will  appear  in  Si! liman* 
Journal. 

302 


GEO 


definitions*  of  names  arranged 

IN  THE  SYNOPSIS. 

Names  under  the  Primitive  Class. 

1.  Granite,  is  an  aggregate  of  angular  masses  of 
quartz,  felspar,  and  mica.  Subdivisions. — It  is  called 
chrystalline  (granite  proper)  when  the  felspar  and 
quartz  present  a crystalline,  not  a slaty,  form.  It  is 
called  slaty  (gneiss)  when  the  mica  is  so  interposed  in 
layers  as  to  present  a slaty  form.  Varieties. — It  is 
graphic  when  the  felspar -is  in  a large  proportion,  and 
the  quartz  is  arranged  in  oblong  masses,  so  as  to  pre- 
sent an  appearance  resembling  Chinese  letters.  It  is 
porphyritic  when  spotted  with  cuboid  blocks  of  fel- 
spar. This  variety  is  peculiar  to  the  slaty  division. 

2.  Mica-Slate,  is  an  aggregate  of  grains  of  quartz 
and  scales  of  mica.  Subdivisions. — Compact , when 
the  slaty  laminae  are  so  closely  united,  that  it  will  pre- 
sent a uniform  smooth  face  when  cut  transversely. 
Fissile , when  the  laminae  separate  readily  by  a blow 
upon  its  surface. 

3.  Hornblende  RocK,t  is  an  aggregate,  not  basal- 

tic, consisting  wholly,  or  in  part,  of  hornblende  and 
felspar.  Subdivisions. — Granitic , when  it  presents 

the  appearance  of  crystalline  granite  with  hornblende 
substituted  for  mica.  Slaty,  when  of  a rifty  or  tabular 
structure.  Varieties. — Gneisseoid,  when  it  resembles 
slaty  granite  (gneiss)  with  scales  of  hornblende  substi- 
tuted for  mica.  Greenstone,  when  of  a pretty  uniform 
green  colour,  and  containing  but  a small  proportion  of 
felspar,  generally  of  a slaty  structure.  Porphyritic, 
when  spotted  with  cuboid  blocks  of  felspar.  Sienitic, 
when  speckled  with  small  irregular  masses  of  felspar. 

4.  Talcose  Slate,  is  an  aggregate  of  grains  of 
quartz  and  scales  of  mica  and  talc.J  Subdivisions. — 
Compact,  having  the  laminae  so  closely  united  that  a 
transverse  section  may  be  wrought  into  a smooth  face. 
When  the  quartzose  particles  are  very  minute  and  in 
a large  proportion,  it  is  manufactured  into  scythe-whet- 
stones, called  Quinnebog  stones.  Fissile , when  the 
laminae  separate  readily  by  a blow  upon  the  surface. 
Varieties. — Chloritic,  when  coloured  green  by  chlorite. 
In  some  localities  the  chlorite  seems  to  form  beds ; or 
rather  the  rock  passes  into  an  aggregate  consisting  of 
quartz,  mica,  talc,  and  a large  proportion  of  chlorite. 
Vast  beds  of  pure  chlorite  are  embraced  in  this  rock  on 
Deerfield  river,  in  Florida,  Mass. 

5.  Granular  Quartz,  consists  of  grains  of  quartz 
united  without  cement.  Subdivisions. — Compact,  when 
it  consists  of  fine  grains,  so  as  to  appear  almost  homo- 
geneous; generally  in  large  rhomboidal  blocks.  Sandy, 
when  the  grains  are  so  slightly  attached  as  to  be  some- 
what friable.  Varieties. — Translucent,  when  it  is  so 
compact  and  homogeneous  as  to  transmit  light.  Yel- 
low, when  slightly  tinged  with  iron  (probably  a carbo- 
nate). Ferruginous,  when  an  aggregate  of  minute 
crystals,  strongly  coloured  yellow  or  red  with  the  car- 
bonate or  peroxyde  of  iron.  There  is  a remarkable 
locality  two  miles  north  of  Bennington  village,  in  Ver- 
mont. Large  masses  may  be  found  consisting  of  six- 
Bided  crystals,  with  six-sided  pyramids  on  both  ends. 

6.  Granular  Limestone,  consists  of  glimmering 
grains  of  carbflnate  of  lime  united  without  cement. 
Subdivisions. — Compact,  when  it  consists  of  grains  of 
nearly  pure  carbonate  of  lime,  so  closely  united  that  it 
will  take  a polish.  Sandy,  when  grains  of  quartz  are 
aggregated  with  the  grains  of  carbonate  of  lime,  but 
so  loosely  as  to  be  somewhat  friable.  Varieties. — Do- 
lomite, when  it  consists  in  part  of  magnesia,  and  is 
friable.  Verdrantiquc,  when  it  is  variegated  in  colour 
by  the  presence  of  serpentine,  giving  it  more  or  less  of 
a clouded  green. 

Names  under  the  Transition  Class. 

7.  Argillite,  is  a slate  rock  of  an  aluminous 

* Every  rock  consists,  essentially,  of  one,  two,  or  three,  of  the  fol- 
lowing nine  homogeneous  minerals'.’  These  are  called  the  geological 
alphabet;  and  every  student  must  procure  and  familiarize  himself 
with  a specimen  of  each,  before  he  commences  the  study  of  geology — 
quartz,  felspar,  mica,  talc,  hornblende,  argillite,  limestone,  gypsum, 
chlorite.  He  should  procure  also  a specimen  of  iron  pyrites,  horn- 
stone,  calc  spar,  reddle-ore,  bog-ore,  glance  coal,  bituminous  coal. 

t'l  believe  M'Clure  first  applied  this  general  name,  to  all  the 
varieties  of  primitive  hornblende  rock. 

J That  a small  proportion  of  talc  scales  should  serve  to  distinguish 
this  rock  from  mica-slate,  would  scarcely  satisfy  a mere  cabinet 
student.  But  the  travelling  geologist  will  acknowledge  its  importance. 
See  Taghconnuc  and  Saddle  mountains,  and  the  same  range  along  the 
west  side  of  the  Green  mountains  to  Canada. 


GEO 

character  and  nearly  homogeneous,  always  consisting 
of  tables  or  laminae  whose  direction  forms  a large  angle 
with  the  general  directionof  the  rock.  Subdivisions. — 
Clay  Slate,  when  the  argillite  is  nearly  destitute  of  all 
grittiness,  and  contains  no  scales  of  mica  or  talc. 
Wacke  Slate , when  it  is  somewhat  gritty  and  contains 
glimmering  scales  of  mica  or  talc.  Varieties. — Roof 
Slate,  when  the  slate  is  susceptible  of  division  into 
pieces  suitable  for  roofing  houses  and  for  ciphering 
slate.  Glazed  Slate , when  the  natural  cleavages  are 
lined  with  a black  glazing.  This  variety  contains 
anthracite  coal  and  marine  organic  relics. 

8.  First  Graywacke,  is  an  aggregate  of  angular 
grains  of  quartzose  sand,  united  by  an  argillaceous 
cement,  apparently  disintegrated  clay  slate,  and  is 
never  above  the  calciferous  sandroek.  Subdivisions. 
— Compact , when  the  grains  are  so  fine  and  united  so 
compactly,  as  to  be  suitable  for  quarrying.  Rubble , 
when  the  grains,  or  a part  of  them,  are  too  large  for 
quarrying.  This  division  is  often  very  hard,  and  some- 
times contains  felspar,  and  has  the  appearance  of 
coarse  granite  ; though  some  of  the  largest  pebbles  are 
generally  rounded.  It  is  often  coloured  green  with 
chlorite.  Every  kind  »f  first  graywacke  is  almost 
horizontal — being  a little  elevated  at  the  edge  next  to 
the  primitive  rocks  only. 

9.  Sparry  Limerock,  consists  of  carbonate  of  lime 
intermediate  in  texture  between  granular  and  compact ; 
and  is  traversed  by  veins  of  calcareous  spar.  Subdi 
visions. — Compact , when  the  masses  or  blocks,  between 
the  veins  of  spar,  are  sufficiently  homogeneous  and 
uniform  to  receive  a polish.  Slaty,  when  the  rock 
is  in  slaty  tables  or  laminae,  with  transverse  veins  of 
calcareous  spar.  This  rock  is  often  cut  into  very  small 
irregular  blocks  by  the  spar,  which  gives  it  the  name 
of  checkered  rock. 

10.  Calciferous  Sandrock,  consists  of  fine  grains 
of  quartzose  sand  and  of  carbonate  of  lime,  united 
without  cement,  or  with  an  exceeding  small  proportion. 
Subdivisions. — Compact,  when  the  rock  is  uniform,  or 
nearly  so,  without  cells  or  cavities.  Geodiferous, 
when  it  contains  numerous  geodes,  or  curvilinear  cavi 
ties;  which  are  empty  or  filled  with  calc  spar,  quartz 
crystals,  barytes,  anthracite,  or  other  mineral  substan- 
ces different  from  tile  rock.  Varieties. — Oolitic,  when 
it  consists  in  part  of  oolite,  of  a dark  colour,  and  harder 
than  the  kind  which  is  common  in  the  lias  or  oolitic 
formation  of  Europe. 

11.  Metalliferous  Limerock,  consists  of  carbo- 
nate of  lime  in  a homogeneous  state,  or  in  a state  of 
petrifactions.  Subdivisions. — Compact,  when  it  .con- 
tains but  few  petrifactions, and  is  susceptible  of  a polish. 
Shelly,  when  it  consists  of  petrifactions,  mostly  of 
bivalve  molluscous  animals.  Variety. — Birdseye  mar 
ble,  when  the  natural  layers  are  pierced  transversely 
with  cylindrical  petrifactions,  so  as  to  give  the  birds- 
eye  appearance  when  polished. 

12.  Second  Graywacke,  scarcely  distinguished 
from  first  graywacke,  excepting  by  its  relative  position, 
being  always  above  calciferous  sandrock.  Subdi- 
visions.— Compact,  when  in  blocks  or  slaty,  consisting 
of  fine  grains.  Rubble , when  it  consists  of,  or  contains 
large  rounded  pebbles.  The  rubble  of  second  graywacke 
is  in  a much  smaller  proportion  than  in  first  gray- 
wacke. Varieties. — Red  sandy,  when  it  passes  into 
red  sandstone,  which  formation  occurs  in  a few  locali- 
ties. Hone-slate,  when  soft,  and  suitable  for  setting  a 
fine  edge.  Grindstone , when  the  quartzose  particles 
are  sharp-angular. 

Names  under  the  Secondary  Class. 

13.  Millstone  Grit,  is  a coarse,  hard  aggregate  of 
sharp-angular  quartzose  sand  or  pebbles ; mostly  with- 
out any  cement,  always  gray  or  rusty  gray.  Subdi- 
visions.— Sandy,  when  it  contains  few  or  no  pebbles. 
Conglomerate,  when  it  consists  chiefly  of  rounded 
pebbles. 

14.  Saliferous  Rock,  consists  of  red,  or  bluish- 
gray,  sand  or  clay-marie,  or  both.  The  grains  of  sand 
are  mostly  somewhat  rounded,  and  all  the  varieties  of 
this  rock,  in  some  localities,  form  the  floor  of  salt 
mines  and  salt  springs.  Subdi  visions. — Marie-slate , 
when  the  rock  is  soft,  slaty,  and  contains  minute  grains 
of  carbonate  of  lime.  Sandy,  when  it  is  in  solid 
blocks  or  layers,  consisting  of  red  or  bluish-gray  quart- 
zose sand.  Varieties. — Gray-band , the  uppermost 
layers  of  bluish-gray  sandrock.  Conglomerate,  (brec- 
cia) consisting  chiefly  of  rounded  pebbles,  red,  gray,  or 


GEO 


GER 


rust-colour,  as  under  the  superincumbent  rocks  at 
Mount  Holyoke,  the  Palisades,  on  the  Hudson  river,  &c. 

15.  Ferriferous  Rook,  is  a soft,  slaty,  argillaceous, 
or  a hard,  sandy,  siliceous  rock,  embracing  red  argil- 
laceous iron  ore.  Subdivisions. — Slaty , consists  of 
green,  or  bluish-green,  smooth  soft  slate,  generally  im- 
mediately under  the  layer  of  red  argillaceous  iron  ore. 
Sandy,  consists  of  a gray,  or  rusty-gray,  aggregate  of 
quartzose  sandrock,  in  compact  blocks  or  layers,  over- 
laying or  embracing  red  argillaceous  iron  ore.  V ariety. 
— Conglomerate,  consists  of  rounded  pebbles,  cemented 
together  by  carbonate  or  oxide  of  iron,  or  adhering 
without  cement. 

16.  Lias,  consists  of  rounded  grains  of  quartzose 
sand,  clay-slate,  and  sometimes  partly  of  other  alumi- 
nous compounds,  of  a dark  or  light-gray  colour,  aggre- 
gated with  fine  grains  of  carbonate  of  lime.  Subdi- 
visions.— Calciferous  slate,  when  it  is  of  a slaty  texture, 
and  the  argillaceous  and  calcareous  constituents  pre- 
dominate. Calciferous  grit,  when  it  is  in  blocks  or 
thick  layers,  and  the  quartzose  sand,  or  sharp  grit, 
predominates.  Varieties. — Conchoidal,  when  the  slaty 
kind  is  separated  into  small  divisions,  somewhat  of  a 
lenticular  form,  by  natural  conchoidal  cleavages. 
Shell  grit,  when  the  gritty  variety  consists,  in  part,  of 
petrifactions  of  quartzose  sand. 

17.  Geodiferous  Limerock,  (lowest  of  the  oolitic 

formation  of  Europe,)  consists  of  carbonate  of  lime, 
combined  with  a small  proportion  of  argillite  or  quartz, 
in  a compact  state,  mostly  foetid,  and  always  contain- 
ing numerous  geodes.  Subdivisions. — Swinestone, 

when  it  contains  very  little  or  no  quartzose  sand,  is 
irregular  in  structure,  foetid  and  abounds  in  geodes. 
Sandy,  when  it  contains  quartzose  sand,  is  stratified, 
scarcely  foetid,  and  contains  but  few  geodes. 

jff  18.  Cornitiferous  Limeaock,  (included  in  the 
oolitic  formation  of  Europe,)  consists  of  carbonate 
of  lime,  embracing  hornstone.  Subdivisions. — Com- 
pact, when  the  rock  is  close-grained ; and  it  generally 
contains  homstone  in  layers.  Shelly,  when  it  consists 
of  shells,  and  contains  homstone  in  nodules  or  irregular 
masses. 

19.  Third  Graywacke,  (well-known  to  be  em- 
braced in  the  oolitic  formation  of  Europe';  but  con- 
tains no  oolite,)  having  the  character  of  first  and  second 
graywacke  in  general ; but  differing  in  containing 
much  iron  pyrites,  fine  grains  of  carbonate  of  lime,  in 
larger  or  smaller  proportion,  and  in  having  the  quart- 
zose grains  mostly  rounded. — Subdivisions. — Pyriti- 
ferous  slate,  when  the  rock  has  a slaty  structure,  and 
is  in  thin  laminae  or  in  blocks  or  thick  layers.  Pyriti- 
ferous  grit,  when  the  rock  has  a siliceous  or  gritty 
structure,  containing  a large  proportion  of  quartzose 
sand  or  pebbles.  Varieties. — Red  sandstone,  and  red 
wacke,  when  the  gray  rock  passes  into  a dirty  orange, 
and  thence  into  a red  siliceous  sandrock.  This  has 
been  called  old  red  sandstone;  but  I do  not  believe  that 
such  a general  stratum  is  admissible.  Conglomerate , 
(breccia)  when  the  rock  consists  chiefly  of  rounded 
pebbles,  of  a light-red,  grayish  red,  or  rust  colour. 

Names  under  the  Superincumbent  Class. 

20.  Basalt,  is  a hornblende  rock,  not  primitive,  pro- 
bably of  volcanic  origin.  Subdivisions. — Amygdaloid, 
when  amorphous,  of  a compact  texture,  but  containing 
cellules,  empty  or  filled.  Greenstone  trap,  when  of  a 
columnar  structure,  or  in  angular  blocks,  often  coarse 
grained.  Variety. — Toadstone,  when  the  amygdaloid 
has  a warty  appearance,  and  resembles  slag. 

Names  under  the  Alluvial  Class. 

21.  Antediluvion,  or  upper  tertians,  when  the 
detritus  is  in  layers,  so  situated  that  it  must  have  been 
deposited  from  water,  while  standing  over  it  at  a great 
depth,  in  nearly  a quiescent  state.  As  we  have  no 
chalk  in  North  America,  and  as  no  tertiajy  rocks  have 
hitherto  been  ascertained,  this  grand  division  may  all 
be  referred  to  detritus.  Subdivisions. — Plastic  clay , 
when  it  will  not  effervesce  with  acids ; being  destitute 
of  carbonate  of  lime.  Marly  clay,  when  the  clay 
contains  fine  grains  of  carbonate  of  lime,  sufficient  to 
effervesce  strongly  with  acids.  Marine,  or  Bagshot, 
$and  and  crag , when  it  consists  of  quartzose  sand, 
nearly  pure,  or  combined  with  a little  loam,  it  is  called 
marine  sand ; when  it  passes  into  a gravelly  forma- 
tion, often  containing  pudding-stone,  beds  of  clay,  &r.., 
it  is  called  crag.  Variety. — Hard-pan,  when  the  crag 
consists  of  gravel,  strongly  cemented  by  clay. 

22.  Diluvion,  consists  of  a confused  mixture  of 

394 


gravel,  sand,  clay,  loam,  plants,  shell-animals,  &c.  so 
situated,  that  it  must  have  been  deposited  from  water, 
in  a state  of  forcible  and  violent  action.  To  make  its 
character  perfectly  evident,  it  must  be  so  situated,  that 
the  elevation  of  the  water,  sufficient  for  making  the 
deposite,  could  not  have  been  effected  by  any  existing 
cause. 

23.  Ultimate  Diluvion,  a thin  deposite  of  yellow- 
ish-gray loam,  reposing  on  crag  or  some  other  sub- 
stance in  ancient  uncultivated  forest  grounds.  It  is  so 
situated,  that  it  could  not  have  been  produced  by  the 
disintegration  of  any  stratum  in  the  vicinity,  nor  by 
water  when  running  with  much  velocity.  It  appears 
to  have  ueen  deposited  from  waters  greatly  elevated, 
and  which  had  been  rendered  turbid  by  violent  action, 
but  had  become  almost  quiescent.  It  may  be  consi- 
dered as  the  last  settlings  of  a deluge. 

24.  Post-diluvion,  when  the  detritus  is  so  arranged 
that  coarse  pebbles  appear  towards  the  source  of  the 
waters  which  deposited  them,  and  fine  sediment  more 
remote. 

Names  under  the  Analluvial  Class. 

25.  Stratified  Analluvion,  is  the  detritus  formed 
by  the  disintegration  of  rock  strata,  which  remains 
in  the  situation  formerly  occupied  by  the  rocks,  retain- 
ing the  same  order  of  superposition.  Subdivisions. — 
These  take  the  names,  and  retain  the  essential  charac- 
ters, of  the  original  rocks ; as  saliferous,  ferriferous, 
lias,  Sec. 

' 26.  Superficial  Analluvion,  is  the  detritus  formed 
by  the  disintegration  of  the  exposed  surfaces  of  all 
rocks,  and  remains  on  or  near  the  place  of  disintegra- 
tion. Subdivisions.— Clay-loam,  when  the  detritus  is 
fine  and  adhesive.  Granulated , when  in  coarse  grains, 
or  friable.  The  character  of  the  soil  depends  on  the 
character  of  the  rock  disintegrated. 

Remarks. 

1.  The  upper  part  of  every  general  rock-stratum,  is 
either  more  fissile  or  more  loose  and  siliceous , than  the 
under  part.  This  affords  a natural  character  for 
making  the  two-fold  divisions  adopted  in  this  nomen- 
clature. 

2.  The  upper  surface  of  every  general  rock-stratum 
in  our  district , is  destitute  of  a superimposed  rocky 
covering,  for  a great  distance.  This  affords  a very 
natural  guide  for  the  limit  of  general  strata. 

3.  By  general  strata  is  meant , those  deposites  of 
rocks  and  detritus , which  constitute  the  exterior  visible 
rind  of  the  earth , of  nearly  equal  importance.  They 
may  be  distinguished  from  each  other  by  essential 
characters.  The  most  conclusive  is  relative  position 
— the  next  in  importance  is  the  contents — the  last  is  the 
constituents.  For  example,  we  know  the  third  gray- 
wacke as  the  uppermost  rock  in  the  regular  series  of 
superposition — we  know  the  ferriferous  rock  from 
its  embracing  the  argillaceous  peroxyde  of  iron— we 
know  the  granite  from  its  consisting  of  quartz,  feld- 
spar, and  mica. 

4.  The  words  upper  and  lower  are  applied,  without 
reference  to  degree  of  elevation.  A straium  is  said  to 
be  geologically  the  lowest,  or  oldest,  when  it  is  nearest 
to  the  centre  of  the  range  of  granite  towards  which  it 
inclines. 

5.  General  strata  may  be  very  naturally  subdivided, 
are  subject  to  variations  in  character,  and  contain  beds. 
Numerous  minerals  not  essential  to  their  respective 
characters,  are  found  in  them  in  the  state  of  veins  and 
of  dissemination.  They  appear  to  have  become  hard, 
while  the  strata  containing  them  were  in  a soft  state ; 
for  their  forms  are  always  impressed  in  them. 

6.  All  strata  have  their  peculiar  associates  and  con- 
tents. Therefore  a knowledge  of  strata  enables  us 
to  foretell  the  probable  discovery  of  useful  minerals. 
Geology,  then,  embraces  the  “ Science  of  Mining.” 

7.  The  bassetting,  or  out-cropping  sides  of  transition 
and  secondary  rocks,  at  and  near  the  edges  approach- 
ing primitive  rocks,  present  more  of  a primitive  aspect, 
and  contain  fewer  petrifactions,  than  other  parts  of 
the  same  rocks.  A.] 

Gera'nis.  (From  yepavo f,  a crane : so  called  from 
its  supposed  resemblance  to  an  extended  crane ) A 
bandage  for  a fractured  clavicle. 

GERA'NIUM.  (From  yepavoi,  a crane:  so  called 
because  its  pistil  is  long  like  the  bill  of  a crane.) 
Class,  Monadclphia ; Ordef,  Decandria.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaian  system.  Gera- 
nium or  crane's-bill. 


GIL 


GES 

Geranium  batracbioidks.  See  Geranium  pra- 
tense.  \ 

Geranium  columbinum.  See  Geranium  rotundi- 
folium. 

Geranium  moschatum.  The  adstringent  property 
of  this  plant  has  induced  practitioners  to  exhibit  it  in 
cases  of  debility  and  profluvia. 

Geranium  pratense.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  crow  foot  crane’s-bill.  Geranium,  batrachioides. 
A plant  which  possesses  adstringent  virtues,  but  in  a 
■light  degree. 

Geranium  robertianum.  Stinking  crane’s-bill. 
Herb  Robert.  This  common  plant  has  been  much  es- 
teemed as  an  external  application  in  erysipelatous 
inflammations,  cancer,  mastodynia,  and  old  ulcers,  but 
is  now  deservedly  fallen  into  disuse. 

Geranium  rotundifolium.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  dove’s-foot.  Geranium  columbinum.  This 
plant  is  slightly  astringent. 

Geranium  sanguinarium.  See  Geranium  sangui- 
neum. 

Geranium  sanguineum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Geranium  sanguinarium.  Bloody  crane’s-bill. 
The  adstringent  virtues  ascribed  to  this  plant  do  not 
appear  to  be  considerable. 

[“Geranium  maculatum.  Crane’s-bill.  The 
Geranium  maculatum  is  a native  (American)  plant, 
common  about  woods  and  fences,  and  conspicuous  for 
its  large  purple  flowers  in  May  and  June. 

“ The  root  is  horizontal,  nearly  as  large  as  the  little 
finger,  tortuous,  and  full  of  knobs.  To  the  taste  it  is  a 
pure  and  powerful  astringent.  It  abounds  with  tan- 
nin, which  is  imparted  in  great  quantities  both  to  the 
tincture  and  watery  solution,  and  appears  to  be  the 
basis  of  its  medicinal  efficacy. 

“ It  is  applicable  to  all  the  purposes  of  vegetable 
astringents,  being  surpassed  by  very  few  articles  of 
that  class.  In  various  debilitating  discharges,  particu- 
larly from  the  bowels,  it  has  afforded  relief,  when  the 
disease  has  been  of  a nature  to  require  astringent  me- 
dicines. In  apthous  eruptions,  and  ulcerations  of  the 
mouth  and  throat,  a strong  decoction  has  been  found 
beneficial  as  a gargle.  A dose  of  the  powder  is  twenty 
or  thirty  grains,  and  of  a saturated  tincture  from  one 
to  two  fluid  drachms.  The  extract  of  this  root  is  a 
very  powerful  astringent,  and  may  be  substituted  for 
kino  and  catechu.”— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

GERM.  See  Corculum. 

GERMANDER.  See  Teucrium  chamcedrys. 

Germander  water.  See  Teucrium  Scordium. 

GERMEN.  This  is  the  rudiment  of  the  young  fruit 
and  seed,  and  is  found  at  the  bottom  of  the  pistil.  See 
Pistillum.  It  appears  under  a variety  of  shapes  and 
sizes.  — 

From  its  figure  it  is  called, 

1.  Globose;  as  in  Rosa  eglantaria , and  cinna- 
momea. 

2.  Oblong ; as  in  Stellaria  biflora. 

3.  Ovate;  as  in  Rosa  canina , and  alba. 

From  its  situation,  it  is  distinguished  into, 

1.  Superior , when  internal  between  the  corolla ; as 
in  Prunus. 

2.  Inferior , below  and  without  the  corolla;  as  in 
Galanthus  nivalis.  ■ 

3.  Pedicellate , upon  a footstalk ; as  in  the  Eu- 
phorbia. 

It  is  of  great  moment,  for  botanical  distinctions,  to 
observe  whether  it  be  superior,  above  the  bases  of  the 
calyx,  or  below. 

GERMINATION.  Germinatio.  The  vital  deve- 
lopement  of  a seed,  when  it  first  begins  to  grow. 

GEROCO'MIA.  (From  ycpwv,  an  aged  person,  and 
koueu),  to  be  concerned  about.)  That  part  of  medicine 
wnich  regards  the  regimen  and  treatment  of  old  age. 

Gerontopo'gon.  (From  yepwv,  an  old  man,  and 
Trwywv,  a beard  ; so  called  because  its  downy  seed, 
while  enclosed  in  the  calyx,  resembles  the  beard  of  an 
aged  man.)  The  herb  old  man’s  beard,  a species  of 
tragopogon. 

GERONio'xoN.  (.From  vepuv,  an  old  person,  and 
to][ov,  a dart.)  1.  A small  ulcer,  like  the  head  of  a 
dart,  appearing  sometimes  in  the  cornea  of  old  persons. 

2.  The  socket  of  a tooth. 

Geropo'gon.  See  Gerontopogon. 

GESNER,  Conrad,  was  born  at  Zurich,  in  1516. 
His  father  was  killed  in  the  civil  war,  and  left  him  in 
such  poverty,  that  he  was  obliged  to  become  a servant 


at  Strasburg.  His  master  allowed  him  to  devote  somo 
time  to  study,  in  which  he  made  great  progress ; and 
having  acquired  a little  money,  he  went  to  Paris, 
where  he  improved  rapidly  in  the  classics  and  rheto- 
ric, and  then  turned  his  attention  to  philosophy  and 
medicine.  But  he  was  soon  compelled  to  return  to 
his  native  country,  and  teach  the  languages,  &c.  for  a 
livelihood.  This  enabled  him  afterward  to  resume 
his  medical  studies  at  Montpelier,  and  he  graduated  at 
Basil  in  1540.  He  then  settled  in  his  native  city, 
where  he  was  appointed  professor  of  philosophy, 
which  office  he  discharged  with  great  reputation  for 
twenty-four  years.  He  had  an  early  predilection  for 
botany,  which  led  him  to  cultivate  other  parts  of  na- 
tural history;  he  was  the  first  collector  of  a museum, 
and  acquired  the  character  of  being  the  greatest  na- 
turalist since  Aristotle.  He  also  founded  and  sup- 
ported a botanic  garden,  had  numerous  drawings  and 
wood  engravings  made  of  plants,  and  appears  to  have 
meditated  a general  work  on  that  subject.  He  like- 
wise discovered  the  only  true  principles  of  botanical 
arrangement  in  the  flower  and  fruit.  Though  of  a 
feeble  and  sickly  constitution,  he  traversed  the  Alps, 
and  even  sometimes  plunged  into  the  waters  in  search 
of  plants : he  also  carefully  studied  their  medical  pro- 
perties, and  frequently  hazarded  his  life  by  experi- 
ments on  himself ; indeed  he  was  at  one  time  reported 
to  have  been  killed  by  the  root  of  doronicum.  His 
other  occupations  prevented  his  entering  very  exten- 
sively into  practice,  but  his  enlarged  views  rendered 
him  successful;  and  the  profits  of  his  profession  ena- 
bled him  to  support  the  great  expense  of  his  favourite 
pursuits.  He  gave  also  many  proofs  of  liberal  and 
active  friendship.  He  died  of  the  plague,  in  1565. 
His  chief  works  are  his  “ Histories  Animalium,”  in 
three  folio  volumes,  with  wood  cuts ; and  a pharma- 
copoeia, entitled  “ De  Secretis  Remediis  Thesaurus,” 
which  passed  through  many  editions. 

Gestationy  uterine.  See  Pregnancy. 

GETJM.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Icosanana;  Order,  Poly- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia'!  name  of  the  two  following 
species  of  this  genus. 

Geum  rivale.  The  root  is  the  part  directed  for 
medicinal  uses.  It  is  inodorous,  and  imparts  an  aus- 
tere taste.  In  America  it  is  in  high  estimation  in  the 
cure  of  intermittents,  and  is  said  to  be  more  efficacious 
than  the  Peruvian  bark.  Diarrhoeas  and  haemor- 
rhages are  also  stopped  by  its  exhibition. 

Geum  urbanum.  The  systematic  name  of  the  herb 
bennet,  or  avens.  Caryophyllata ; Herba  benedicta  ; 
Caryophyllus  vulgaris;  Garyophylla ; Janamunda ; 
Geum—floribus  erectis,  fructibus  globosis  villosis, 
aristis  uncinatis  nudis,  foliis  lyratis , of  Linnaeus. 
The  root  of  this  plant  has  been  employed  as  a gentle 
styptic,  corroborant,  and  stomachic.  It  has  a mildly 
austere,  somewhat  aromatic  taste,  and  a very  pleasant 
smell,  of  the  clove  kind.  It  is  also  esteemed  on  the 
Continent  as  a febrifuge. 

GIBBUS.  Gibbous;  swelled;  applied  to  leaves 
when  swelled  on  one  side  or  both,  from  excessive 
abundance  of  pulp ; as  in  the  Aloe  retusa. 

GIDDINESS.  See  Vertigo. 

GILBERT,  William,  was  bom  at  Colchester,  in 
1540.  After  studying  at  Cambridge,  he  went  abroad  for 
improvement,  and  graduated  at  some  foreign  univer- 
sity. He  returned  with  a high  character  for  philoso- 
phical and  chemical  knowledge,  and  was  admitted 
into  the  college  of  physicians  in  London,  where  he  set- 
tled about  the  year  1573.  He  was  so  successful  in  his 
practice,  that  he  was  at  length  made  first  physician  to 
Queen  Elizabeth,  who  allowed  him  a pension  to  pro- 
secute philosophical  experiments.  He  died  in  1603, 
leaving  his  books,  apparatus,  and  minerals,  to  the  col- 
lege of  physicians.  His  capital  work  on  the  magnet 
was  published  three  years  before  his  death ; it  is  not 
only  the  earliest  complete  system  on  that  subject,  but 
also  one  of  the  first  specimens  of  philosophy  founded 
upon  experiments;  which  method  the  great  Lord 
Bacon  afterward  so  strenuously  recommended. 

Gilead , balsam.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

GILLIFLOWER.  See  Dianthus  caryophyllus. 

[“  Gillenia  trifoliata.  The  Gillema  trifoliata  is 
a native,  perennial  plant,  more  generally  known  to 
cultivators  of  the  American  Materia  Medica  by  the 
Linntean  name  of  Spiraea  trifoliata.  It  grows  in  and 


GLA 


GLA 


about  woods,  in  light  soil,  throughout  most  parts  of  the 
Union,  excepting  the  eastern  states. 

“ The  root  is  much  branched  and  knobby.  It  con- 
sists of  a woody  portion,  invested  with  a thick  bark, 
which,  when  dry,  is  brittle,  and  very  bitter  to  the  taste. 
The  predominant  soluble  ingredients  appear  to  be,  a 
bitter  extractive  matter  and  resin.  When  boiled  in 
water,  it  imparts  to  it  a beautiful  red  wine-colour,  and 
an  intensely  bitter  taste.  The  tincture  deposites  an 
abundant  resinous  precipitate  on  the  addition  of 
water. 

“ This  article  is  one  of  the  most  prominent  indige- 
nous emetics,  resembling  ipecacuanha  in  its  operation, 
but  requiring  a large  dose.  It  sometimes  fails  to  pro- 
duce vomiting,  especially  if  the  portion  used  has  be- 
come old.  Thirty  grains  of  the  bark  of  the  root,  re- 
cently dried  and  powdered,  are  a suitable  dose  for  an 
emetic.  In  doses  so  small  as  not  to  excite  nausea,  it 
has  been  thought  useful  as  a tonic.  The  Gillenia  sti- 
pulacea , of  the  western  states,  possesses  properties 
similar  to  those  of  this  species.” — Bigelow's  Mat. 
Med.  A.] 

GIN.  Spiritus  Jumperi.  Geneva.  Hollands.  The 
name  of  a spirit  distilled  from  malt  or  rye,  which  after- 
ward undergoes  the  same  process,  a second  time,  with 
juniper-berries.  This  is  the  original  and  most  whole- 
some state  of  the  spirit ; but  it  is  now  prepared  without 
juniper-berries,  and  is  distilled  from  turpentine,  which 
gives  it  something  of  a similar  flavour.  The  consump- 
tion of  this  article,  especially  in  the  metropolis,  is  im- 
mense, and  the  consequences  are  pernicious  to  the 
health  of  the  inhabitants. 

GINGER.  See  Zingiber. 

GI'NGIBER.  See  Zingiber. 

Gingibra'chium.  (From  gingivae , the  gums,  and 
V brachium,  the  arm.)  A name  for  the  scurvy,  because 
the  gums,  arms,  and  legs,  are  affected  with  it. 

Gingi'dium.  A species  of  Daucus. 

Gi'ngihil.  See  Zingiber. 

Gingipe'dium.  (From  gingivae,  the  gums,  and  pes , 
the  foot.)  A name  for  the  scurvy,  because  the  gums, 
arms,  and  legs  are  affected. 

GINGI'VAS.  (From  gigno,  to  beget;  because  the 
teeth  are,  as  it  were,  born  in  them.)  The  gums.  See 
Gums. 

GI'NGLYMUS.  (rVyyAtqioj,  a hinge.)  The  hinge- 
like joint.  A species  of  diarthrosis  or  moveable  con- 
nexion of  bones,  which  admits  of  flexion  and  extension, 
as  the  knee-joint,  &c. 

GI'NSENG.  An  Indian  word.  S eePanax  quinque- 
folium. 

Gir.  Q.uick-lime. 

Gi'rmir.  Tartar. 

GITHAGO.  A name  used  by  Pliny,  for  the  Lolium, 
or  darnel-grass. 

GIZZARD.  The  stomach  of  poultry.  Those  from 
white  flesh,  have  long  been  considered  in  France  as 
medicinal.  They  have  been  recommended  in  obstruc- 
tions of  the  urinary  passages,  complaints  of  the  blad- 
der, and  nephritic  pains  ; but  particularly  as  a febri- 
fuge. Bouillon  Lagrange  considers  its  principal  sub- 
stance as  oxygenated  gelatine,  with  a small  quantity 
of  extractive  matter. 

Glabk'lla.  (From  glaber , smooth;  because  it  is 
without  hair.)  The  space  between  the  eyebrows. 

GLABER.  Glabrous ; Smooth ; applied  to  stems, 
leaves,  seeds,  &c.  of  plants,  and  opposed  to  all  kinds  of 
hairiness  and  pubescence  ; as  in  the  stem  of  the  Eu- 
phorbia peplus , and  the  seeds  of  Galium  montanum. 

GLACIES.  Ice. 

GLADI'OLUS.  (Diminutive  of  gladius , a sword ; 
so  named  from  the  sword-like  shape  of  its  leaf.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnrean  system. 
Qlass,  Triandria : Order,  Monogynia. 

Gladiolus  lutkus.  See  Iris  pseudacorus, 

Gla'ma.  r \apa.  The  sordes  of  the  eye. 

GLAND.  Gians.  Glandula.  I.  In  anatomy,  an 
organic  part  of  the  body,  composed  of  blood-vessels, 
nerves,  and  absorbents,  and  destined  for  the  secretion 
or  alteration  of  some  peculiar  fluid.  The  glands  of 
the  human  body  are  divided,  by  anatomists,  iqjo  dif- 
ferent classes,  either  according  to  their  structure,  or 
the  fluid  they  contain.  According  to  their  fabric,  they 
are  distinguished  into  four  classes: 

1.  Simple  glands. 

2.  Compounds  of  simple  glands. 

3.  Conglobate  glands. 

396 


4.  Conglomerate  glands. 

According  to  their  fluid  contents,  they  are  more  pro* 
perly  divided  into, 

1.  Mucous  glands. 

2.  Sebaceous  glands. 

3.  Lymphatic  glands. 

4.  Salival  glands. 

5.  Lachrymal  glands. 

1.  Simple  glands  are  small  hollow  follicles,  covered 
with  a peculiar  membrane,  and  having  a proper  ex- 
cretory duct,  through  which  they  evacuate  the  liquor 
contained  in  their  cavity.  Such  are  the  mucous 
glands  of  the  nose,  tongue,  fauces,  trachea,  stomach, 
intestine,  and  urinary  bladder,  the  sebaceous  glands 
about  the  anus,  and  those  of  the  ear.  These  simple 
glands  are  either  dispersed  here  and  there,  or  are  con- 
tiguous to  one  another,  forming  a heap  in  such  a man- 
ner that  they  are  not  covered  by  a common  mem- 
brane, but  each  hath  its  own  excretory  duct,  which  is 
never  joined  to  the  excretory  duct  of  another  gland. 
The  former  are  termed  solitary  simple  glands,  the  lat- 
ter aggregate  or  congregate  simple  glands. 

2.  The  compound  glands  consist  of  many  simple 
glands,  the  excretory  ducts  of  which  are  joined  in  one 
common  excretory  duct;  as  the  sebaceous  glands  of 
the  face,  lips,  palate,  and  various  parts  of  the  skin, 
especially  about  the  pubes. 

3.  Conglobate , or,  as  they  are  also  called,  lymphatic 
glands , are  those  into  which  lymphatic  vessels  enter, 
and  from  which  they  go  out  again : as  the  mesenteric, 
lumbar,  &c.  They  have  no  excretory  duct,  but  are 
composed  of  a texture  of  lymphatic  vessels  connected 
together  by  cellular  membrane : they  are  the  largest 
in  the  foetus. 

4.  Conglomerate  glands  are  composed  of  a congeries 
of  many  simple  glands,  the  excretory  ducts  of  which 
open  into  one  common  trunk:  as  the  parotid  gland, 
thyroid  gland,  pancreas,  and  all  the  salival  glands. 
Conglomerate  glands  differ  but  little  from  the  com- 
pound glands,  yet  they  are  composed  of  more  simple 
glands  than  the  compound. 

The  excretory  duct  of  a gland  is  the  duct  through 
which  the  fluid  of  the  gland  is  excreted.  The  vessels 
and  nerves  of  glands  always  come  from  the  neighbour- 
ing parts,  and  the  arteries  appear  to  possess  a high  de- 
gree of  irritability.  The  use  of  the  glands  is  to  sepa- 
rate a peculiar  liquor,  or  to  change  it.  The  use  of  the 
conglobate  glands  is  unknown. 

IJ.  In  botany,  Linnaeus  defines  it,  a little  tumour 
discharging  a fluid. 

From  their  situation  they  are  said  to  be, 

1.  Foliarcs,  when  on  the  surface  of  the  leaf;  as  in 
the  Gossypium  religiosum , which  has  one  gland  on 
the  leaf;  and  Gossypium  barbadense,  the  leaves  of 
which  have  three. 

2.  Petiolares , when  in  the  footstalk ; as  in  Prvnus 
cerasus. 

3.  Corollares.  The  claw  of  the  corolla  of  the  Ber- 
ber is  vulgaris  has  two  glands. 

4.  Filamentares , in  the  filaments ; as  in  Dictamnus 
albus. 

From  their  adhesion, 

1.  Glandula  sessilis,  without  any  peduncle ; as  in 
Prunus  cerasus. 

2.  Glandula  pedicillata , furnished  with  a peduncle ; 
as  in  Drosera. 

Glands  are  abundant  on  the  stalk  and  calyx  of  the 
moss-rose,  and  between  the  serratures  of  the  leaf  of 
the  Salix  pentandria ; on  the  footstalks  of  the  Vibur- 
num opulus , and  various  species  of  passion-flower. 
The  liquor  discharged  is  resinous  and  fragrant. 

GLANDORP,  Matthias  Louis,  was  born  at  Co- 
logne, in  1595.  Soon  after  commencing  his  medical 
pursuits,  he  went  to  Padua,  which  had  at  that  time 
great  reputation.  He  improved  so  much  in  anatomy 
under  Spigelius,  that  he  was  deemed  competent  to  give 
public  demonstrations : and  he  took  his  degree  in  1618. 
He  settled  in  Bremen,  whence  his  family  originated  ; 
and  he  was  so  successful  in  practice,  that  he  was 
raised  to  the  most  honourable  offices.  He  was  physi- 
cian to  the  archbishop,  and  to  the  republic,  when  he 
died  in  1640.  lie  left  several  works,  with  plates,  con- 
taining many  important  observations  on  anatomy,  &c. 
The  principal  are  his  “Speculum  Chirurgorum,”  and 
a Treatise  on  Issues  and  Setons.  He  was  very  partia. 
to  the  use  of  the  actual  cautery,  even  in  the  most  com 
mon  disorders. 


GLE 


GLO 


GLA'NDULA.  (A  diminutive  of  glans , a gland.) 
A small  gland.  See  Gland. 

Glandula  lachrymalis.  See  Lachrymal  gland. 

Glandule  myrtiformes.  See  Carunculce  myr- 
tiformes. 

Glandul.®  Pacchioni  as.  A numberof  small,  oval, 
fatty  substances,  not  yet  ascertained  to  be  glandular, 
situated  under  the  dura  mater,  about  the  sides  of  the 
longitudinal  sinus.  Their  use  is  not  known. 

Glandulosoca'rneus.  An  epithet  given  by  Ruysch 
to  some  excrescences,  which  he  observed  in  the 
bladder. 

GLANDULOSUS.  Glandular.  1.  In  anatomy, 
having  the  appearance,  structure,  or  function  of  a 
gland. 

2.  In  botany,  applied  to  leaves  which  have  little 
glandiform  elevations ; as  the  bay-leaved  willow,  and 
Hypericum  montanum. 

GLANS.  A gland,  or  nut.  See  Gland. 

Glans  penis.  The  very  vascular  body  that  forms 
the  apex  of  the  penis.  The  posterior  circle  is  termed 
the  corona  glandis.  See  Corpus  spongiosum  urethra. 

Glans  unguentaria.  See  Guilandina  moringa. 

GLASS.  This  substance  was  formerly  employed 
by  surgeons,  when  roughly  powdered,  to  destroy  opa- 
cities of  the  cornea. 

Glass  of  antimony.  See  Antimony. 

Glass-wort , snail- seeded.  See  Salsola  kali. 

Gla'stum.  ( Quasi  callastum;  from  Gallia,  who 
first  used  it.)  The  herb  woad.  See  I satis  tinctoria. 

Glauber's  salt.  A sulphate  of  soda.  It  is  found 
native  in  Bohemia,  and  is  the  produce  of  art.  See 
Sodas  sulphas. 

GLAUBERITE.  A native  crystallized  salt,  com- 
posed of  dry  sulphate  of  lime,  and  dry  sulphate  of  soda, 
found  in  rock  salt  at  Villarubra  in  Spain. 

GLAUCEDO.  (From  yXavKos,  bluish,  or  greenish 
tint.)  See  Glaucoma. 

GLAU'CIUM.  (So  named  from  its  glaucous  or  sea- 
green  colour.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Polyandria  ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia.)  The  horned  poppy. 

GLAUCO  MA.  (From  yXavKos,  blue;  because  of 
the  eye  becoming  of  a blue,  or  sea-green  colour.) 
Glaucedo ; Glaucosis ; Apoglaucosis.  1.  An  opacity 
of  the  vitreous  humour.  It  is  difficult  to  ascertain,  and 
is  only  to  be  known  by  a very  attentive  examination  of 
the  eye. 

2.  A species  of  cataract.  See  Cataract. 

GLAUCO'SIS.  See  Glaucoma. 

GLAUCUS.  (rAau/coy,  sea-green.)  Stems  are 
called  glaucous  which  are  clothed  with  a fine  sea-green 
mealiness,  which  easily  rubs  off;  as  in  Chlora  pcr- 
foliata. 

GLECO'MA.  (From  yXrjxuv,  the  name  of  a plant 
in  Dioscorides.)  Class,  Didynamia;  Order,  Gymno- 
spermia.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Ground-ivy. 

Glecoma  hederacea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
ground-ivy,  or  gill.  Hedera  terrestris.  Glecoma — 
foliisereniformibus  crenatis,  of  Linnams.  This  indi- 
genous plant  has  a peculiar  strong  smell,  and  a bitterish 
somewhat  aromatic  taste.  It  is  one  of  those  plants 
which  was  formerly  much  esteemed  for  possessing  vir- 
tues that,  in  the  present  age,  cannot  be  detected.  In 
obstinate  coughs,  it  is  a favourite  remedy  with  the 
poor. 

Gle'ciion.  (rX»7%wv.)  Pennyroyal. 

Glkchoni'tes.  (From  yXyx^)  pennyroyal.)  Wine 
impregnated  with  pennyroyal. 

GLEET.  In  consequence  of  the  repeated  attacks 
of  gonorrhoea,  and  the  debility  of  the  part  occasioned 
thereby,  it  not  unfrequently  happens,  that  a gleet,  or 
constant  small  discharge  takes  place,  or  remains  be- 
hind, after  all  danger  of  infection  is  removed.  Mr. 
Hunter  remarks,  that  it  differs  from  gonorrhoea  in  be- 
ing uninfectious , and  in  the  discharge  consisting  of 
globular  particles,  contained  in  a slimy  mucus,  instead 
of  serum.  It  is  unattended  with  pain,  scalding  in 
making  of  water,  &c. 

GLE'NE.  TXyvri.  Strictly  signifies  the  cavity  or 
socket  of  the  eye ; but  by  some  anatomists  is  also  used 
for  that  cavity  of  a bone  which  receives  another  with- 
in it. 

GLE'NOID.  ( Glenoides ; from  yXrjvrj,  a cavity, 
and  eidos,  resemblance.)  The  name  of  articulate  ca- 
vities of  bones. 


Gleu'cinum.  (From  yXevKos , must.)  An  oint- 
ment, in  the  preparation  of  which  was  must. 

Gleu'xis.  (From  yXcvKvs,  sweet.)  A sweet  wine. 

GLIADINE.  Sec  Gluten. 

Gli'scere.  To  increase  gradually, properly  as  fire 
does  ; but,  by  physical  writers,  is  sometimes  applied 
to  the  natural  heat  and  increase  of  spirits ; and  by 
others  to  the  exacerbation  of  fevers  which  return  pe- 
riodically. 

GLISCHRO'CHOLOS.  (From  yXicr%pof,  viscid, 
and  %oX»7,  the  bile.)  Viscid  bilious  excrement. 

GLISCRA'SMA.  (From  yXnrxpaivw,  to  become 
glutinous.)  Viscidity. 

Glisoma'rgo’.  White  chalk. 

GLISSON,  Francis,  was  born  in  Dorsetshire,  1597. 
He  studied  at  both  the  English  universities ; but  took 
his  degree  of  doctor  in  Cambridge,  where  he  was 
made  Regius  professor  of  Physic,  which  office  he 
held  about  forty  years.  He  settled,  however,  to  prac- 
tise in  London,  and  became  a Fellow  of  the  College  in 
1635 ; four  years  after  which  he  was  chosen  reader  of 
Anatomy,  and  distinguished  himself  much  by  his  lec- 
tures “De  Morbis  Partium,”  which  he  was  requested 
to  publish.  During  the  civil  wars  he  retired  to  Col- 
chester, where  he  practised  with  great  credit;  and  was 
there  during  the  siege  of  that  town  by  the  Parliament- 
ary forces.  He  was  one  of  the  members  of  the  society, 
which,  about  the  year  1645,  held  weekly  meetings  in 
London  to  promote  Natural  Philosophy : and  which 
having  removed  to  Oxford  during  the  troubles,  was 
augmented  after  the  Restoration,  and* became  ulti- 
mately the  present  Royal  Society.  He  was  afterward 
several  years  president  of  the  College  of  Physicians, 
and  died  at  the  advanced  age  of  eighty.  He  left  the 
following  valuable  works : I.  A Treatise  on  the  Rick- 
ets. 2.  The  Anatomy  of  the  Liver,- which  he  described 
much  more  accurately  than  any  one  before,  and  par- 
ticularly the  capsule  of  the  Vena  Portarum,  which  has 
since  been  named  after  hipi.  3.  A large  metaphysical 
treatise  “ De  Natura  Substantia  Energetica,”  after  the 
manner  of  Aristotle.  4.  A Treatise  on  the  Stomach, 
Intestines,  &c.,  a well-arranged  and  comprehensive 
work,  with  various  new  observations,  which  came  out 
the  year  before  his  death. 

Glisson's  Capsule.  See  Capsule  of  Glisson. 

GLOBATE.  See  Gland. 

GLOBOSUS.  Globose.  A root  is  so  called  which 
is  rounded,  and  gives  off  radicles  in  every  direction  ;^ 
as  that  of  the  Cyclamen  europeum.  The  receptacle  of* 
the  Cephalanthus  and  JVauclea , are  so  called  from 
their  form. 

GLOBULA'RIA.  (From  globus,  a globe:  so 
called  from  the  shape  of  its  flower.)  The  French 
daisy. 

Globula'ria  alypum.  The  leaves  of  this  plant  are 
used  in  some  parts  of  Spain  in  the  cure  of  the  venereal 
disease.  It  is  said  to  act  also  as  a powerful  but  safe 
cathartic. 

GLO  BUS.  A ball. 

Globus  hystericus.  The  air  rising  in  the  oeso- 
phagus, and  prevented  by  spasm  from  reaching  the 
mouth,  is  so  called  by  authors,  because  it  mostly  at- 
tends hysteria,  and  gives  the  sensation  of  a ball  as- 
cending in  the  throat. 

GLOCHIS.  (rXwxtj,  cuspis  teli.)  A pointed  hair. 
A sharp  point:  used  in  botany  to  a bristle-like  pubes- 
cence, which  is  turned  backwards  at  its  point  into 
many  straight  teeth. 

GLO'MER.  A clue  of  thread.  A term  mostly  ap- 
plied to  glands. 

GLOMERATE.  A gland  is  so  called  which  is 
formed  of  a glomer  of  sanguineous  vessels,  having  no 
cavity,  but  furnished  with  an  excretory  duct ; as  the 
lachrymal  and  mammary  glands 

GLOMERULUS.  In  botany,  a small  tuft,  or  capi- 
tulum , mostly  in  the  axilla  of  the  peduncle. 

GLOSSA'GRA.  (From  yhuxraa,  the  tongue,  and 
aypa , a seizure.)  A violent  pain  in  the  tongue. 

GLO'SSO.  (From  yXuxraa,  the  tongue.)  Names 
compounded  with  this  word  belong  to  muscles,  nerves, 
or  vessels,  from  their  being  attached,  or  going  to  the 
tongue. 

Glosso-pharyngeal  nerves.  The  ninth  pair  of 
nerves.  They  arise  from  the  processes  of  the  cere- 
bellum, which  run  to  the  medulla  spinalis,  and  termi- 
nate by  numerous  branches  in  the  muscles  of  the 
tongue  and  pharynx. 


397 


GLU 


GLU 

Glosso-PHARYNGEUS.  See  Constrictor  pharyngeus 
Superior. 

Glosso-staphylinus.  See  Constrictor  isthmi  f au- 
cium. 

Glossoca'tochos.  (From  yXoffffa,  tongue,  and  Ka- 
Tfxw,  to  hold.)  An  instrument  in  P.  AUgineta  for  de- 
pressing the  tongue.  A spatula  linguae.  The  ancient 
glossocatochus  was  a sort  of  forceps,  one  of  the  blades 
of  which  served  to  depress  the  tongue,  while  the  other 
was  applied  under  the  chin. 

GLOSSOCE'LE.  (From  yXwaaa,  the  tongue,  and 
tcyXy,  a tumour.)  An  extrusion  of  the  tongue. 

Glossocoma.  A retraction  of  the  tongue. 

Glossocomi'on.  (From  yAa xjaa,  a tongue,  and  ko- 
peio,  to  guard.)  By  this  was  formerly  meant  a case 
for  the  tongue,  for  a hautboy ; but  the  old  surgeons,  by 
metaphor,  use  it  to  signify  an  instrument,  or  case,  for 
containing  a fractured  limb. 

GLO'TTA.  (rXur'Ja,  the  tongue.)  The  tongue. 

GLO'TTIS.  (From  yXior^a,  the  tongue.)  The  su- 
perior opening  of  the  larynx  at  the  bottom  of  the 
tongue. 

GLUCINA.  (From  yhvKvs,  which  signifies  sweet, 
because  it  gives  that  taste  to  the  salts  in  forms.)  The 
name  of  an  earth,  for  the  discovery  of  which  we  are 
indebted  to  Yauquelin,  who  found  it,  in  1795,  in  the 
Aigue-marine  or  beryl,  a transparent  stone,  of  a green 
colour,  and  in  the  emerald  of  Peru.  It  exists  com- 
bined with  silex,  alumine,  lime,  and  oxide  of  iron,  in 
the  one ; and  with  the  same  earths,  and  oxide  of 
chrome,  in  the  other.  It  has  lately  been  discovered  in 
the  gadolinite  by  Mr.  Ekeberg. 

Glucina  is  white,  light,  and  soft  to  the  touch.  It  is 
insipid,  and  adheres  to  the  tongue  ; and  is  inlusible  by 
itself  in  the  fire.  Its  specific  gravity  is  2.967.  It  is  so- 
luble in  alkalies  and  their  carbonates,  and  in  all  the 
acids  except  the  carbonic  and  phosphoric,  and  forms 
with  them  saccharine  and  slightly  astringent  salts.  It 
is  exceedingly  soluble  in  sulphuric  acid  used  to  excess. 
It  is  fusible  with  borax,  and  forms  with  it  a transpa- 
rent glass.  It  absorbs  one-fourth  of  its  weight  of  car- 
bonic acid.  It  decomposes  sulphate  of  alumine.  It  is 
not  precipitated  by  the  hydro- sulphurets  nor  bv  prus- 
siate  of  potassa,  but  by  all  the  succinates.  Its  affinity 
for  the  acids  is  intermediate  between  magnesia  and 
alumine. 

To  obtain  this  earth,  reduce  some  beryl  to  an  impal- 
pable powder,  fuse  it  with  three  times  its  weight  of 
potassa,  and  dissolve  the  mass  in  muriatic  acid.  Se- 
parate the  silex  by  evaporation  and  filtration,  and  de- 
compose the  remaining  fluid  by  adding  earbonate  of 
potassa ; redissolve  the  deposite  when  washed  in  sul- 
phuric acid,  and  by  mingling  this  solution  with  sul- 
phate of  potassa,  alum  will  be  obtained,  which  crys- 
tallizes. 

Then  mix  the  fluid  with  a solution  of  carbonate  of 
ammonia,  which  must  be  used  in  excess  ; filter  and 
boil  it,  and  a white  powder  will  gradually  fall  down, 
which  is  glucine. 

GLUE.  An  inspissated  jelly  made  from  the  parings 
of  hides  and  other  offals,  by  boiling  them  in  w ater, 
straining  through  a wicker  basket,  suffering  the  impu- 
rities to  subside,  and  then  boiling  it  a second  time.  The 
articles  should  first  be  digested  in  lime  water,  to 
cleanse  them  from  grease  and  dirt;  then  steeped  in 
water,  stirring  them  well  from  time  to  time  ; and,  last- 
ly, laid  in  a heap,  to  have  the  water  pressed  out,  be- 
fore they  are  put  into  the  boiler.  Some  recommend, 
that  the  water  should  be  kept  as  nearly  as  possible  to  a 
boiling  heat,  without  suffering  it  to  enter  into  ebulli- 
tion. In  this  state  it  is  poured  into  flat  frames  or 
moulds,  then  cut  into  square  pieces  when  congealed, 
and  afterward  dried  in  a coarse  neb  It  is  said  to  im- 
prove by  age ; and  that  glue  is  reckoned  the  best, 
which  swells  considerably  without  dissolving  by  three 
or  four  days’  infusion  in  cold  water,  and  recovers  its 
former  dimensions  and  properties  by  drying.  Shreds 
or  parings  of  vellum,  parchment,  or  white  leather, 
make  a clear  and  almost  colourless  glue. 

GLUM  A.  ( Oluma , d glubendo,  a husk  of  corn.) 
The  husk.  The  peculiar  calyx  of  grasses  and  grass- 
like plants,  of  a chaffy  texture,  formed  of  little  con- 
cave leaflets  which  are  called  valves.  To  the  husk 
belongs  the  arista , the  beard  or  awn.  See  Arista. 

The  glum  a is, 

1.  Univalve , in  Loilum  percnne. 

2.  Bivalve,  in  most  grasses. 

398 


3.  Trivalved  in  Panicum  miliaceum. 

4.  JUany-valved,  in  Uniola  paniculata. 

5.  Coloured , otherwise  than  green;  as  in  Holcus 
bicolor. 

. From  the  number  of  flowers  the  husk  contains,  it  is 
called, 

1.  Gluma  uni  flora,  one-flowered ; as  in  Panicum. 

2.  G.  biflora , with  two  ; as  in  Aira. 

3.  G.  multiflora , having  many;  as  in  Poa  and 
Avena. 

From  the  external  appearance,  the  gluma  is  termed, 

1.  Glabrous,  smooth  ; as  in  Holcus  laxus. 

2.  Hispid , briskly ; as  in  Secale  orientate. 

3.  Striate  ; as  in  Holcus  striatum. 

4.  Villose ; as  in  Holcus  sorgham , Holcus  saccha- 
ratus , and  Bromus  purgans. 

5.  Ciliate,  fringed ; as  in  Bromus  ciliatus. 

6.  Beardless  ; as  in  Briza  and  Poa. 

7.  Awncd;  as  in  Hordeum. 

GLUMOSUS.  A flower  is  so  called,  which  is  ag- 
gregate, and  has  a glumous  or  husky  calyx. 

GLUTEAL.  Belonging  to  the  buttocks. 

Gluteal  artery.  A branch  of  the.  internal  iliac 
artery. 

GLU'TEN.  ( Quasi geluten ; from gelo,  to  congeal.) 
See  Glue. 

Gluten,  animal.  This  substance  constitutes  the 
basis  of  the  fibres  of  all  the  solid  parts.  It  resembles 
in  its  properties  the  gluten  of  vegetables. 

Gluten,  vegetable.  If  wheat-flower  be  made 
into  a paste,  and  washed  in  a large  quantity  of  water, 
it  is  separated  into  three  distinct  substances : a muci- 
laginous saccharine  matter,  which  is  readily  dissolved 
in  the  liquor,  and  may  be  separated  from  it  by  evapo- 
ration ; starch,  which  is  suspended  in  the  fluid,  and 
subsides  to  the  bottom  by  repose ; and  gluten,  which 
remains  in  the  hand,  and  is  tenacious,  very  ductile, 
somewhat  elastic,  and  of  a brown-gray  colour.  The 
first  of  these  substances  does  not  essentially  differ  from 
other  saccharine  mucilages.  The  second,  namely,  the 
starch,  forms  a gluey  fluid  by  boiling  in  water,  though 
it  is  scarcely,  if  at  all,  acted  upon  by  that  fluid  when 
cold.  Its  habitudes  aud  products  with  the  fire,  or  with 
nitric  acid,  are  nearly  the  same  as  those  of  gum  and 
of  sugar.  It  appears  to  be  as  much  more  remote  from 
the  saline  state  than  gum,  as  gum  is  more  remote  from 
that  state  than  sugar. 

The  vegetable  gluten,  though  it  existed  before  the 
washing  in  the  pulverulent  form,  and  has  acquired  its 
tenacity  and  adhesive  qualities  from  the  water  it  has 
imbibed,  is  nevertheless  totally  insoluble  in  this  fluid. 
It  has  scarcely  any  taste.  When  dry,  it  is  semitrans 
parent,  and  resembles  glue  in  its  colour  and  appear 
ance.  If  it  be  drawn  out  thin,  when  first  obtained,  it 
may  be  dried  by  exposure  to  the  air : but  if  it  be  ex. 
posed  to  warmth  and  moisture  while  wet,  it  putrefies 
like  an  animal  substance.  The  dried  gluten  applied  to 
the  flame  of  a candle,  crackles,  swells,  and  burns,  ex- 
actly like  a feather,  or  piece  of  horn.  It  affords  the 
same  products  by  destructive  distillation  as  animal 
matters  do ; is  not  soluble  in  alkohol,  oils,  or  aether ; 
and  is  acted  upon  by  acids  and  alkalies,  when  heated. 
According  to  Rouelle,  it  is  the  same  with  the  caseous 
substance  of  milk. 

Gluten  of  Wheat. — Taddey,  an  Italian  chemist,  has 
lately  ascertained  that  the  gluten  of  wheat  may  be  de- 
composed into  two  principles,  which  he  has  distin- 
guished by  the  names,  gliadine  (from  yXia,  gluten,) 
and  zimorne  (from  typy,  ferment.)  They  are  obtained 
in  a separate  state  by  kneading  the  fresh  gluten  in  suc- 
cessive portions  of  alkohol,  as  long  as  that  liquid  con- 
tinues to  become  milky,  when  diluted  with  water 
The  alkohol  solutions  being  set  aside,  gradually  depo 
site  a whitish  matter,  consisting  of  small  filaments  of 
gluten,  and  become  perfectly  transparent.  Being  now 
left  to  slow  evaporation,  the  gliadine  remains  behind, 
of  the  consistence  of  honey,  and  mixed  with  a little 
yellow  resinous  matter,  from  which  it  may  be  freed  by 
digestion  in  sulphuric  ffither,  in  which  gliadine  is  not 
sensibly  soluble.  The  portion  of  the  gluten  not  dissolved 
by  the  alkohol  is  the  zimorne. 

Properties  of  Gliadine. — When  dry,  it  has  a straw - 
yellow  colour,  slightly  transparent,  and  in  thin  plates, 
brittle,  having  a slight  smell,  similar  to  that  of  honey- 
comb, and,  when  slightly  heated,  giving  out  an  odour 
similar  to  that  of  boiled  apples.  In  the  mouth,  it  be- 
comes adhesive,  and  has  a sweetish  and  balsamic 


GLU 


GNA 


taste.  It  is  pretty  soluble  in  boiling  alkoho!,  which 
loses  its  transparency  in  proportion  as  it  coois,  and 
then  retains  only  a small  quantity  in  solution.  It  forms 
a kind  of  varnish  in  those  bodies  to  which  it  is  applied. 
It  softens,  but  does  not  dissolve  in  cold  distilled  water. 
At  a boiling  heat  it  is  converted  into  froth,  and  the  li- 
quid remains  slightly  milky.  It  is  specifically  heavier 
than  water. 

The  alkoholic  solution  of  gliadine  becomes  milky 
•when  mixed  with  water,  and  is  precipitated  in  white 
flocks  by  the  alkaline  carbonates.  It  is  scarcely  af- 
fected by  the  mineral  and  vegetable  acids.  Dry  gli- 
adine dissolves  in  caustic  alkalies  and  in  acids.  It 
swells  upon  red-hot  coals,  and  then  contracts  in  the 
manner  of  animal  substances.  It  burns  with  a pretty 
lively  flame,  and  leaves  behind  it  a light  spongy  char- 
coal, difficult  to  incinerate  Gliadine,  in  some  re- 
spects, approaches  the  properties  of  resins ; but  differs 
from  them  in  being  insoluble  in  sulphuric  aether.  It  is 
very  sensibly  affected  by  the  infusion  of  nut-galls.  It 
is  capable  of  itself  of  undergoing  a slow  fermentation, 
and  produces  fermentation  in  saccharine  substances. 

From  the  flour  of  barley,  rye,  or  oats,  no  gluten  can 
be  extracted  as  from  that  of  wheat,  probably  because 
they  contain  too  small  a quantity. 

The  residue  of  wheat  which  is  not  dissolved  in  al- 
kohol,  is  called  z imome.  If  this  be  boiled  repeatedly  in 
alkohol,  it  is  obtained  pure. 

Zimome  thus  purified  has  the  form  of  small  globules, 
or  constitutes  a Shapeless  mass,  which  is  hard,  tough, 
destitute  of  cohesion,  and  of  an  ash-white  colour. 
When  washed  in  water,  it  recovers  part  of  its  visco- 
sity, and  becomes  quickly  brown,  when  left  in  contact 
with  the  air.  It  is  specifically  heavier  than  water.  Its 
mode  of  fermenting  is  no  longer  that  of  gluten ; for 
when  it  purifies  it  exhales  a foetid  urinous  odour. 
It  dissolves  completely  in  vinegar,  and  in  the  mineral 
acids  at  a boiling  temperature.  With  caustic  potassa, 
it  combines  and  forms  a kind  of  soap.  When  put  into 
lime  water,  or  into  the  solutions  of  the  alkaline  carbo- 
nates, it  becomes  harder,  and  assumes  a new  appear- 
ance without  dissolving.  When  thrown  upon  red-hot 
coals,  it  exhales  an  odour  similar  to  that  of  burning 
hair  or  hoofs,  and  burns  with  flame. 

Zimome  is  to  be  found  in  several  parts  of  vegetables. 
It  produces  various  kinds  of  fermentation,  according 
to  the  nature  of  the  substance  with  which  it  comes  in 
contact. 

GLUTE'US.  (From  yXovros,  the  buttocks.)  The 
name  of  some  muscles  of  the  buttocks. 

Gluteus  maximus.  Gluteus  magnus  of  Albinus. 
Glutceus  major  of  Cowper;  and  llio  sacro  femoral  of 
Dumas.  A broad  radiated  muscle,  on  which  we  sit, 
is  divided  into  a number  of  strong  fasciculi,  is  covered 
by  a pretty  thick  aponeurosis  derived  from  the  fascia 
lata , and  is  situated  immediately  under  the  integu- 
ments. It  arises  fleshy  from  the  outer  lip  of  somewhat 
more  than  the  posterior  half  of  the  spine  of  the  ilium, 
from  the  ligaments  that  cover  the  two  posterior  spinous 
processes  ; from  the  posterior  sacro-ischiatic  ligament ; 
and  from  the  outer  sides  of  the  os  sacrum  and  os  coc- 
cygis.  From  these  origins  the  fibres  of  the  muscle  run 
towards  the  great  trochanter  of  the  os  femoris,  where 
they  form  a broad  and  thick  tendon,  between  which 
and  the  trochanter  there  is  a considerable  bursa  mu- 
cosa. This  tendon  is  inserted  into  the  upper  part  of 
the  linea  aspera,  for  the  space  of  two  or  three  inches 
downwards  ; and  sends  off  fibres  to  the  fascia  lata,  and 
to  the  upper  extremity  of  the  vastus  externus.  This 
muscle  serves  to  extend  the  thigh,  by  pulling  it  directly 
backwards  ; at  the  same  time  it  draws  it  a little  out- 
wards, and  thus  assists  in  its  rotatory  motion.  Its 
origin  from  the  coccyx  seems  to  prevent  that  bone  from 
being  forced  too  far  backwards. 

Gluteus  medius.  Ilio  trochanterien  of  Dumas. 
The  posterior  half  of  this  muscle  is  covered  by  the 
gluteus  maximus,  which  k greatly  resembles  in  shape  ; 
but  the  anterior  and  upper  part  of  it  is  covered  only  by 
the  integuments,  and  by  a tendinous  membrane  which 
belongs  to  the  fascia  lata.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the 
outer  lip  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  spine  of  the  ilium, 
from  part  of  the  posterior  surface  of  that  bone,  and 
likewise  from  the  fascia  that  covers  it.  From  these 
origins  its  fibres  run  towards  the  great  trochanter,  into 
the  outer  and  posterior  part  of  which  it  is  inserted  by 
a Droad  tendon.  Between  this  tendon  and  the  trochan- 
ter there  is  a small  tliin  bursa  mucosa.  The  uses  of 


this  muscle  are  nearly  the  same  as  those  of  the  glu* 
teus  maximus;  but  it  is  not  confined,  like  that  muscle* 
to  rolling  the  os  femoris  outwards,  its  anterior  portion 
being  capable  of  turning  that  bone  a little  inwards. 
As  it  has  no  origin  from  the  coccyx,  it  can  have  no 
effect  on  that  bone. 

Gluteus  Minimus.  Glutceus  minor  of  Albinus 
and  Cowper ; and  Ilio  ischii  trochanterien  of  Dumas. 
A radiated  muscle,  is  situated  under  the  gluteus  me- 
dius. In  adults,  and  especially  in  old  subjects,  its 
outer  surface  is  usually  tendinous.  It.  arises  fleshy 
between  the  two  semicircular  ridges  we  observe  on  the 
outer  surface  of  the  ilium,  and  likewise  from  the  edge 
of  its  great  niche.  Its  fibres  run,  in  different  direc- 
tions, towards  a thick  flat  tendon,  which  adheres  to  a 
capsular  ligament  of  the  joint,  and  is  inserted  into  the 
fore  and  upper  part  of  the  great  trochanter.  A small 
bursa  mucosa  may  be  observed  between  the  tendon  of 
this  muscle  and  the  trochanter.  This  muscle  assists 
the  two  former  in  drawing  the  thigh  backwards  and 
outwards,  and  in  rolling  it.  It  may  likewise  serve  to 
prevent  the  capsular  ligament  from  beyig  pinched  in 
the  motions  of  the  joint. 

GLU'TIA.  (From  yXovros,  the  buttocks.)  The 
buttocks.  See  Nates 

Gluttu'patens.  (From  gluttus,  the  throat,  and 
pateo,  to  extend.)  The  stomach,  which  is  an  exten- 
sion of  the  throat. 

GLU'TUS.  (rXouroj ; from  yXotos,  filthy.)  The 
buttock.  See  Nates. 

Glyca'sma.  (From  yXvuvs,  swreet.)  A sweet  me- 
dicated wine. 

Glycypi'cros.  (From  yXiucv?,  sw7eet,  and  n expos, 
bitter:  so  called  from  its  bitterish-sweet  taste.)  See 
Solanum  dulcamara. 

GLYCYRRHIZA.  (From  yXvicus,  sweet,  and 
piC,a,  a root.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Lirmsean  system.  Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  Der 
candria. 

2.  The  pliarmacopceial  name  of  liquorice.  See 
Glycyrrhiza  glabra. 

Glycyrrhiza  echinata.  This  species  of  liquorice 
is  substituted  in  some  places  foi'the  root  of  the  glabra. 

Glycyrrhiza  glabra.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  officinal  liquorice.  Glycyrrhiza;  leguminibus 
glabris,  stipulis  nullis , foliolo  impari  petiolato.  A 
native  of  the  south  of  Europe,  but  cultivated  in  Bri- 
tain. The  root  contains  a great  quantity  of  saccha- 
rine matter,  joined  with  some  proportion  of  mucilage, 
and  hence  it  has  a viscid  sweet  taste.  It  is  in  common 
use  as  a pectoral  or  emollient,  in  catarrhal  defluxiona 
on  the  breast,  coughs,  hoarsenesses,  &c.  Infusions, 
or  the  extract  made  from  it,  which  is  called  Spanish 
liquorice , afford  likewise  very  commodious  vehicles 
for  the  exhibition  of  other  medicines;  the  liquorice 
taste  concealing  that  of  unpalatable  drugs  more  effec- 
tually than  syrups  or  any  of  the  sweets  of  the  saccha- 
rine kind. 

Glycysa'ncon.  (From  yXtncuj,  sweet,  and  ayxwv, 
the  elbow : so  called  from  its  sweetish  taste,  and  its  in- 
flections, or  elbows  at  the  joints.)  A . species  of  south- 
ern wood. 

GNAPIIA'LIUM.  (From  yvKpaXov.  cotton:  so 
named  from  its  soft  downy  surface.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system.  Class, 
Syngenesia;  Order,  Polygamia  superflua. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  herb  cotton 
weed.  See  Gnaphalium  dioicum. 

Gnaphalium  arenarium.  The  flowers  of  this 
plant,  as  well  as  those  of  the  gnaphalium  stcechas,  are 
called,  in  the  pharmacopoeias,  flores  elichrysi.  See 
Gnaphalium  stcechas. 

Gnaphalium  dioicum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  pcs  cati.  Gnaphalium  albinum.  Cotton  weed. 
The  flores  gnaplTalii  of  the  pharmacopoeias,  called  also 
flores  hispidulce , seu  pedis  cati , are  the  produce  of  this 
plant.  They  are  now  quite  obsolete,  but  were  for 
merly  used  as  astringents,  and  recommended  in  the 
cure  of  hooping-cough,  phthisis  pulmonalis,  and  hae- 
moptysis. 

Gnaphalium  stiechas.  The  systematic  name  of 
Goldilocks.  Elichrysum ; Stcechas  citrina.  The  flow- 
ers of  this  small  downy  plant  are  w arm,  pungent,  and 
bitter,  and  said  to  possess  aperient  and  corroborant 
virtues. 

Gna'thus.  (From  vvair'Ju),  to  bend ; so  called  from 
their  curvature.)  1.  The  jaw,  or  jaw-bones. 

399 


GOM 


GON 


2.  The  cheek. 

GNEISS.  A compound  rock,  consisting  of  felspar, 
quartz,  and  mica,  disposed  in  slates,  from  the  prepon- 
derance of  the  mica  scales. 

Gni'dius.  A term  applied  by  Hippocrates,  and 
others  since,  to  some  medicinal  precepts  wrote  in  the 
island  of  Gnidos. 

Goat' s-rue.  See  Galega. 

Goat's-thorn.  See  Astragalus  verus. 

GOAT- WEED.  See  (Egopodium. 

GOUT-WEED.  See  (Egopodium  podagraria. 

GODDARD,  Jonathan,  was  born  at  Greenwich,  in 
1617.  After  studying  at  Oxford,  and  travelling  for  im- 
provement, he  graduated  at  Cambridge,  and  settled  to 
practise  in  London.  He  was  elected  a Fellow  of  the 
College  of  Physicians  in  1646,  and,  the  following  year, 
appointed  Lecturer  on  Anatomy.  He  formed  a So- 
ciety for  Experimental  Inquiry,  which  met  at  his 
house ; and  he  was  very  assiduous  in  promoting  its 
objects.  Having  gained  considerable  reputation,  and 
sided  with  the  popular  party,  he  was  appointed  by 
Cromwell  chief  physician  to  the  army,  and  attended 
him  in  some  of  his  expeditions.  Cromwell  then  made 
him  warden  of  Merton  College,  Oxford,  afterward  sole 
representative  of  that  university  in  the  short  parlia- 
ment, in  1653,  and  in  the  same  year  one  of  the  Coun- 
cil of  State.  On  the  Restoration,  being  driven  from 
Oxford,  he  removed  to  Gresham  College,  where  he  had 
been  chosen  Professor  of  Physic.  Here  he  continued 
to  frequent  those  meetings,  which  gave  birth  to  the 
Royal  Society,  and  he  was  nominated  one  of  the  first 
council  of  that  institution.  He  was  an  able  and  con- 
scientious practitioner ; and  was  induced,  partly  from 
the  love  of  experimental  chemistry,  but  principally 
from  doubting  the  competency  of  apothecaries,  to  pre- 
pare his  own  medicines:  in  which,  however,  finding 
numerous  obstacles,  he  published  “ A Discourse,  set- 
ting forth  the  unhappy  Condition  of  the  Practice  of 
Physic  in  London but  this  was  of  no  avail.  Two 
papers  of  his  appeared  in  the  Philosophical  Transac- 
tions, and  many  others  in  Birch’s  History  of  the  Royal 
Society.  He  died  in  1674,  of  an  apoplectic  stroke. 

GOELICKE,  Andrew  Offon,  a German  physi- 
cian, acquired  considerable  reputation  in  the  begin- 
ning of  the  eighteenth  century,  as  a medical  professor, 
and  especially  as  an  advocate  of  the  doctrines  of  Stahl. 
He  left  several  works  which  relate  principally  to  the 
History  of  Anatomy,  &c.,  particularly  the  “ Historia 
Medicinae  Universalis,”  which  was  published  in  six 
different  portions,  between  the  years  1717  and  1720. 

Goitre.  See  Bronchocele. 

GOLD.  Aurum.  A metal  found  in  nature  only  in 
a metallic  state ; most  commonly  in  grains,  ramifica- 
tions, leaves,  or  crystals,  rhomboidal,  octahedral,  or 
pyramidal.  Its  matrix  is  generally  quartz,  sandstone, 
siliceous  schistus,  &c.  It  is  found  also  in  the  sands 
of  many  rivers,  particularly  in  Africa,  Hungary,  and 
France,  in  minute  irregular  grains,  called  gold  dust. 
Native  gold,  found  in  compact  masses,  is  never  com- 
pletely pure ; it  is  alloyed  with  silver,  or  copper,  and 
sometimes  with  iron  and  tellurium.  The  largest  piece 
of  native  gold  that  has  been  hitherto  discovered  in 
• Europe,  was  found  in  the  county  of  Wicklow,  in  Ire- 
land. Its  weight  was  said  to  be  twenty-two  ounces, 
and  the  quantity  of  alloy  it  contained  was  very  small. 
Several  other  pieces,  exceeding  one  ounce,  have  also 
been  discovered  at  the  same  placq,  in  sand,  covered 
with  turf,  and  adjacent  to  a rivulet. 

Gold  is  also  met  with  in  a particular  sort  of  argenti- 
ferous copper  pyrites,  called,  in  Hungary,  Gelf.  This 
ore  is  found  either  massive,  or  crystallized  in  rhom- 
boids, or  other  irregular  quadrangular  or  polygonal 
masses.  It  exists  likewise  in  the  sulphurated  ores  of 
Nigaya  in  Transylvania.  These  all  contain  the  metal  j 
called  tellurium.  Berthollet,  and  other  French  che- 
mists, have  obtained  gold  out  of  the  ashes  of  vege- 
tables. 

GOLD-CUP.  See  Ranunculus. 

GOLDEN-ROD.  See  Solidago  virga  aurea. 

Golden  maidenhair.  See  Poly  trichum  commune. 

GOLDILOCKS.  See  Gnaphalium  stccchas 

[Goldthread.  See  Coptis  trifolia.  A.j 

GOMPHI'ASIS.  (From  yo//0oy,  a nail.)  Gomphi- 
asrnus.  A disease  of  the  teeth,  when  they  are  loosened 
from  the  sockets,  like  nails  drawn  out  of  the  wood. 

Gomphia'smus.  See  Gomphiasis. 

Go'mphioi.  (From  yop<}.os , a nail:  so  called  be- 


cause they  are  as  nails  driven  into  their  sockets.)  The 
dentes  molares,  or  grinding  teeth. 

Gomfho'ma.  See  Gomphosis. 

GOMPHO'SIS.  (From  yop<pou>,  to  drive  in  a nail.) 
Gomphoma.  A species  of  immoveable  connexion  of 
bones,  in  which  one  bone  is  fixed  in  another,  like  a naU 
in  a board,  as  the  teeth  in  the  alveoli  of  the  jaws. 

GONA'LGIA.  See  Gonyalgia. 

GONA'GRA.  (From  yovv,  the  knee,  and  aypa,  a 
seizure.)  The  gout  in  the  knee. 

GO'NE.  (yovy.)  1.  The  seed. 

2.  In  Hippocrates  it  is  the  uterus. 

GONG.  Tam-tam.  A species  of  cymbal  which 
produces  a very  loud  sound  when  struck.  It  is  an 
alloy' of  about  eighty  parts  of  copper  with  twenty  of 
tin. 

GONGRO'NA.  (From  yoyypos,  a hard  knot.)  1. 
The  cramp. 

2.  A knot  in  the  trunk  of  a tree. 

3.  A hard  round  tumour  of  the  nervous  parts ; but 
particularly  ^ bronchocele,  or  other  hard  tumour  of  the 
neck. 

Gongy'lion.  (From  yoyyvXos , round.)  A pill. 

GONIOMETER.  An  instrument  for  measuring  the 
angles  of  crystals. 

GONOI'DES.  (From  yovr/,  seed,  and  nSos,  form.) 
Resembling  seed.  Hippocrates  often  uses  it  as  an 
epithet  for  the  excrements  of  the  belly,  and  for  the  con- 
tents of  the  urine,  when  there  is  something  in  them 
which  resembles  the  seminal  matter. 

GONORRHOEA.  (From  yovt],  the  semen,  and 
pew,  to  flow ; from  a supposition  of  the  ancients,  that 
it  was  a seminal  flux.)  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Locales , and  order  Apocenoses , of  Dr.  Cullen’s  ar- 
rangement, who  defines  it  a preternatural  flux  of  fluid 
from  the  urethra  in  males,  with  or  without  libidinous 
desires.  Females,  however,  are  subject  to  the  same 
complaint  in  some  forms.  He  makes  four  species,  viz. 

1.  Gonorrhma  pur  a or  benigna;  a puriform  dis- 
charge from  the  urethra,  without  dysuria,  or  lascivious 
inclination,  and  not  following  an  impure  connexion. 

2.  Gonorrhoea  impura,  maligna , syphilitica , viru- 
lenta ; a discharge  resembling  pus,  from  the  urethra, 
with  heat  of  urine,  &c.,  after  impure  coition,  to  which 
often  succeeds  a discharge  of  mucus  from  the  urethra, 
with  little  or  no  dysury,  called  a gleet.  This  disease 
is  also  called  Fluor  albus  malignus.  Blennorrhagia , 
by  Swediaur.  In  English,  a clap , from  the  old  French 
Avoid  clapises , which  were  public  shops,  kept  and  in- 
habited by  single  prostitutes,  and  generally  confined 
to  a particular  quarter  of  the  town,  as  is  even  now  the 
case  in  several  of  the  great  towns  in  Italy.  In  Ger- 
many, the  disorder  is  named  tripper , from  dripping ; 
and  in  French,  chaudpisse,  from  the  heat  and  scalding 
in  making  water. 

No  certain  rule  can  be  laid  down  with  regard  to  the 
time  that  a clap  will  take  before  it  makes  its  appear- 
ance, after  infection  has  been  conveyed.  With  some 
persons  it  will  show  itself  in  the  course  of  three  or  four 
days,  while,  with  others,  there  will  not  be  the  least 
appearance  of  it  before  the  expiration  of  some  weeks. 
It  most  usually  is  perceptible,  however,  in  the  space 
of  from  six  to  fourteen  days,  and  in  a male,  begins 
with  an  uneasiness  about  the  parts  of  generation,  such 
as  an  itching  in  the  glans  penis,  and  a soreness  and 
tingling  sensation  along  the  whole  course  of  the  ure- 
thra; soon  after  which,  the  person  perceives  an  ap- 
pearance of  whitish  matter  at  its  orifice,  and  also  some 
degree  of  pungency  upon  making  water. 

In  the  course  of  a few  days,  the  discharge  of  matter 
will  increase  considerably ; will  assume,  most  proba- 
bly, a greenish  or  yellowish  hue,  and  will  become  thin- 
ner, and  lose  its  adhesiveness ; the  parts  will  also  be 
| occupied  with  some  degree  of  redness  and  inflamma- 
tion, in  consequence  of  which  the  glans  will  put  on  the 
appearance  of  a ripe  cherry,  the  stream  of  urine  wiB 
be  smaller  than  usual,  owing  to  the  canal  being  made 
narrower  by  the  inflamed  state  of  its  internal  mem- 
brane, and  a considerable  degree  of  pain,  and  scald- 
ing heat  will  be  experienced  on  every  attempt  to  make 
j water. 

Where  the  inflammation  prevails  in  a very  high  de- 
gree, it  prevents  the  extension  of  the  urethra,  on  the 
taking  place  of  any  erection,  so  that  the  penis  is,  at 
that  time,  curved  doAvnwards,  with  great  pain,  which 
is  much  increased,  if  attempted  to  be  raised  towards 
the  belly,  and  the  stimulus  occasions  it  often  to  be 


GON 


GOS 


erected,  particularly  when  the  patient  is  warm  in  bed, 
and  so  deprives  him  of  sleep,  producing,  in  some  cases, 
an  involuntary  emission  of  semen. 

In  consequence  of  the  inflammation,  it  sometimes 
happens  that,  at  the  time  of  making  water,  owing  to 
the  rupture  of  some  small  blood-vessel,  a slight  haemor- 
rhage ensues,  and  a small  quantity  of  blood  is  voided. 
In  consequence  of  inflammation,  the  prepuce  likewise 
becomes  often  so  swelled  at  the  end,  that  it  cannot  be 
drawn  back,  which  symptom  is  called  a phimosis ; or, 
that  being  drawn  behind  the  glans,  it  cannot  be  re- 
turned, which  is  known  by  the  name  of  paraphimosis. 
Now  and  then,  from  the  same  cause,  little  hard  swell- 
ings arise  on  the  lower  surface  of  the  penis,  along  the 
course  of  the  urethra,  and  these  perhaps  suppurate  and 
form  into  fistulous  sores. 

The  adjacent  parts  sympathizing  with  those  already 
affected,  the  bladder  becomes  irritable,  and  incapable 
of  retaining  the  urine  for  any  length  of  time,  which 
gives  the  patient  a frequent  inclination  to  make  water, 
and  he  feels  an  uneasiness  about  the  scrotum,  peri- 
naeum,  and  fundament.  Moreover,  the  glands  of  the 
groins  grow  indurated  and  enlarged,  or  perhaps  the 
testicles  become  swelled  and  inflamed,  in  consequence 
of  which  he  experiences  excruciating  pains,  extending 
from  the  seat  of  the  complaint  up  into  the  small  of  the 
back ; he  gets  hot  and  restless,  and  a small  sympto- 
matic fever  arises. 

Where  the  parts  are  not  occupied  by  much  inflam- 
mation, few  or  none  of  the  last-mentioned  symptoms 
will  arise,  and  only  a discharge  with  a slight  heat  or 
scalding  in  making  water  will  prevail. 

If  a gonorrhoea  be  neither  irritated  by  any  irregu- 
larity of  the  patient,  nor  prolonged  by  the  want  of 
timely  and  proper  assistance,  then,  in  the  course  of 
about  a fortnight,  or  three  weeks,  the  discharge,  from 
having  been  thin  and  discoloured  at  first,  will  become 
thick,  white,  and  of  a ropy  consistence;  and  from 
having  gradually  begun  to  diminish  in  quantity,  will 
at  last  cease  entirely,  together  with  every  inflammatory 
symptom  whatever ; whereas,  on  the  contrary,  if  the 
patient  has  led  a life  of  intemperance  and  sensuality, 
has  partaken  freely  of  the  bottle  and  high-seasoned 
meats,  and  ltas,  at  the  same  time,  neglected  to  pursue 
the  necessary  means,  it  may  then  continue  for  many 
weeks  or  months;  and,  on  going  off,  may  leave  a 
weakness  or  gleet  behind  it,  besides  being  accompa- 
nied with  the  risk  of  giving  rise,  at  some  distant  period, 
to  a constitutional  affection,  especially  if  there  has 
been  a neglect  of  proper  cleanliness ; for  where  vene- 
real matter  has  been  suffered  to  lodge  between  the 
prepuce  and  glans  penis  for  any  time,  so  as  to  have  oc- 
casioned either  excoriation  or  ulceration,  there  will 
always  be  danger  of  its  having  been  absorbed. 

Another  risk,  arising  from  the  long  continuance  of 
a gonorrhoea,  especially  if  it  has  been  attended  with 
inflammatory  symptoms,  or  has  been  of  frequent  re- 
currence, is  the  taking  place  of  one  or  more  strictures 
in  the  urethra.  These  are  sure  to  occasion  a consider- 
able degree  of  difficulty,  as  well  as  pain,  in  making 
water,  and,  instead  of  its  being  discharged  in  a free 
and  uninterrupted  stream,  it  splits  into  two,  or  perhaps 
is  voided  drop  by  drop.  Such  affections  become,  from 
neglect,  of  a most  serious  and  dangerous  nature,  as 
they  not  unfrequently  block  up  the  urethra,  so  as  to 
induce  a total  suppression  of  urine. 

Where  the  gonorrhoea  has  been  of  long  standing, 
warty  excrescences  are  likewise  apt  to  arise  about  the 
pans  of  generation,  owing  to  the  matter  falling  and 
lodging  thereon ; and  they  not  unfrequently  prove  both 
numerous  and  troublesome. 

Having  noticed  every  symptom  which  usually  at- 
tends on  gonorrhoea,  in  the  male  sex,  it  will  only  be 
necessary  to  observe,  that  the  same  heat  and  soreness 
in  making  water,  and  the  same  discharge  of  discolour- 
ed mucus,  together  with  a slight  pain  in  walking,  and 
an  uneasiness  in  sitting,  take  place  in  females  as  in  the 
former ; but  as  the  parts  in  women,  which  are  most 
apt  to  be  affected  by  the  venereal  poison,  are  less  com- 
plex in  their  nature,  and  fewer  in  number,  than  in 
men,  so  of  course  the  former  are  not  liable  to  many  of 
the  symptoms  which  the  latter  are;  and,  from  the 
urinary  canal  being  much  shorter,  and  of  a more  sim- 
ple form,  in  them  than  in  men,  they  are  seldom,  if 
ever,  incommoded  by  the  taking  place  of  strictures. 

With  women,  it  indeed  often  happens,  that  all  the 
symptoms  of  a gonorrhoea  are  so  very  slight,  they  ex- 

C c 


perience  no  other  inconvenience  than  the  discharge, 
except  perhaps  immediately  after  -menstruation,  at 
which  period,  it  is  no  uncommon  occurrence  for  them 
to  perceive  some  degree  of  aggravation  in  the  symp 
toms. 

Women  of  a relaxed  habit,  and  such  as  have  had 
frequent  miscarriages,  are  apt  to  be  afflicted  with  a 
disease  known  by  the  name  of  fluor  albus,  which  it  ig 
often  difficult  to  distinguish  from  gonorrhoea  virulenta, 
as  the  matter  discharged  in  both  is,  in  many  cases,  of 
the  same  colour  and  consistence.  The  surest  way  of 
forming  a just  conclusion,  in  instances  of  this  nature, 
will  be  to  draw  it  from  an  accurate  investigation,  both 
of  the  symptoms  which  are  present  and  those  which 
have  preceded  the  discharge;  as  likewise  from  the 
concurring  circumstances,  such  as  the  character  and 
mode  of  life  of  the  person,  and  the  probability  there 
may  be  of  her  having  had  venereal  infection  con 
veyed  to  her  by  any  connexion  iq  which  she  mqy  be 
engaged. 

Not  long  ago, -it  was  generally  supposed  that  gonor- 
rhoea depended  always  upon  ulcers  in  the  urethra,  pro- 
ducing a discharge  of  purulent  matter;  and  such  ulcers 
do,  indeed,  occur  in  consequence  of  a high  degree  of 
inflammation  and  suppuration  ; but  many  dissections 
of  persons,  who  have  died  while  labouring  under  a 
gonorrhoea,  have  clearly  shown  that  the  disease  may, 
and  often  does,  exist  without  any  ulceration  in  the 
urethra,  so  that  the  discharge  which  appears  is  usually 
of  a vitiated  mucus,  thrown  out  from  the  mucous  folli- 
cles of  the  urethra.  On  opening  this  canal,  in  recent 
cases,  it  usually  appears  red  and  inflamed;  its  mucous 
glands  are  somewhat  enlarged,  and  its  cavity  is  filled 
with  matter  to  within  a small  distance  from  its  ex- 
tremity. Where  the  disease  has  been  of  long  con- 
tinuance, its  surface  all  along,  even  to  the  bladder,  is 
generally  found  pale  and  relaxed,  without  any  erosion. 

3.  Gonorrhaa  laxorum , libidinosa;  a pellucid  dis- 
charge from  the  urethra,  without  erection  of  the  penis, 
but  with  venereal  thoughts  while  awake. 

4.  Gonorrhea  dormientium.  Oneirogonos.  When, 
during  sleep,  but  dreaming  of  venereal  engagements, 
there  is  an  erection  of  the  penis,  and  a seminal  dis- 
charge. 

Gonorrhcf.a  balanx.  A species  ofgonorrhrea  af- 
fecting the  glans  penis  only. 

GONYA'LGIA.  (From  yovv , the  knee,  and  aAyo?, 
pain.)  Gonialgia ; Gonalgia.  Gout  in  the  knee. 

GOOSE.  A user.  The  Anser  domesticus,  or  tame 
goose. 

GOOSE-FOOT.  See  Chenopodium. 

GOOSE-GRASS.  See  Galium  aparine. 

GO'RDIUS.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  the  Order 
Vermes , of  animals. 

2.  The  gordius,  or  hair-tail  worm,  of  old  writers, 
which  is  the  seta  equina  found  in  stagnant  marshes 
and  ditches  in  Lapland,  a;id  other  places. 

Gordius  medinensis.  The  systematic  name  of  a 
curious  animal.  See  Medinensis  vena. 

GORGONIA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  corals. 

Gorgonia  nobiuis.  The  red  coral. 

GOSSY'PIUM.  (From  gotne,  whence  gottipium , 
Egyptian.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Lin  naean  system.  Class,  Monddelphia;  Order,  Poly- 
andria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  cotton-tree.  See 
Gossypium  herbaceum. 

Gossypium  herbaceum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  cotton-plant.  Gossypium ; Bombax.  Gossy- 
pium— foliis  quinquelobis  subtus  eglandulosis , caule 
herbaceo , of  Linnaeus.  The  seeds  are  directed  lor 
medicinal  use  in  some  foreign  pharmacopoeias ; and 
are  administered  in  coughs,  on  account  of  the  muci- 
lage they  contain.  The  cotton,  the  produce  of  this 
tree,  is  well  known  for  domestic  purposes. 

[Besides  the  Gossypium  herbaceum , there  are  other 
species,  producing  cotton-wool,  some  of  which  is  of  a 
fawn-colour,  found  in  Peru,  and  used  by  the  natives 
of  the  country.  Which  of  the  following  species  it  is, 
we  have  not  been  able  to  ascertain.  Persoon,  in  hia 
Synopsis  Plantarum , gives  the  ten  following  species 
of  Gossypium,  viz. 

1.  Gossypium  herbaceum. 

2.  . . indicum. 

3.  . . micranthum. 

4.  . . arboreum. 

5.  . . vitifolium. 


401 


GKA 


GKA 


6.  Gossypium  liirsutum. 

7.  • . religiosurn. 

8.  . . latilblium. 

9.  . . barbadense. 

10.  . . peruvianum.  A.] 

Goulard's  Extract.  A saturated  solution  of  acetate 
ef  lead.  See  Plumbi  acetatis  liquor. 

GOULSTON,  Theodore,  was  born  in  Northamp- 
tonshire. After  studying  medicine  at  Oxford,  he  prac- 
tised for  a time  with  considerable  reputation  at  Wy- 
mondham,  of  which  his  father  was  rector.  Having 
taken  his  doctor’s  degree  in  1610,  he  removed  to  Lon- 
don, and  became  a fellow  of  the  College  of  Physicians. 
He  was  much  esteemed  for  classical  and  theological 
learning,  as  well  as  in  his  profession.  He  died  in  1632, 
and  bequeathed  .£200  to  purchase  a rent-charge  for 
maintaining  an  annua!  Pathological  Lecture,  to  be  read 
at  the  college  by  one  of  the  four  junior  doctors.  He 
translated  and  wrote  learned  notes  on  some  of  tlje 
works  of  Aristotle  and  Galen ; of  which  the  latter  were 
not  published  till  after  his  death. 

GOURD.  See  Cucurbita. 

Gourd , bitter.  See  Cucumis  colocynthis. 

GOUT.  See  Arthritis , and  Podagra. 

Gout  stone.  See  Chalk  stone. 

GRAAF,  Reinier  de,  was  born  at  Scboonhove,  in 
Holland,  1641.  He  studied  physic  at  Leyden,  where 
he  made  great  progress,  and  at  the  age  of  twenty-two 
published  his  treatise  “ De  Succo  Pancreatico,”  which 
gained  him  considerable  reputation.  Two  years  after 
he  went  to  France,  and  graduated  at  Angers ; he  then 
returned  to  his  native  country,  and  settled  at  Delft, 
where  he  was  very  successf ul  in  practice ; but  he  died 
at  the  early  age  of  thirty-two.  He  published  three 
dissertations  relative  to  the  organs  of  generation  in 
both  sexes;  upon  whieh  he  had  a controversy  with 
Swammerdam. 

GRA'CILIS.  (So  named  from  its  smallness.)  Rec- 
tus interior  femoris,  sire  gracilis  interior  of  Winslow. 
Sous  pubio  creti  tibial  of  Dumas.  A long,  straight, 
and  tender  muscle,  situated  immediately  under  the 
integuments,  at  the  inner  part  of  the  thigh.  It  arises 
by  a broad  and  thin  tendon,  from  the  anterior  part 
of  the  ischium  and  pubis,  and  soon  becoming  -fleshy, 
descends  nearly  in  a straight  direction  along  the  in- 
side of  the  thigh.  A little  above  the  knee,  it  termi- 
nates in  a slender  and  roundish  tendon,  which  after- 
ward becomes  flatter,  and  is  inserted  into  the  middle 
of  the  tibia,  behind  and  under  the  sartorius.  Under 
the  tendons  of  this  and  the  rectus,  there  is  a consider- 
able bursa  mucosa,  which  on  one  side  adheres  to  them 
and  to  the  tendon  of  the  semitendinosus,  and  on  the 
other  to  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  knee.  This  mus- 
le  assists  in  bending  the  thigh  and  leg  inwards. 

GRACCUS.  The  trivial  name  of  some  herbs  found 
in  or  brought  from  Greece. 

GRAFTING.  Budding  and  inoculating  is  the  pro- 
cess of  uniting  the  branches  or  buds  of  two  or  more 
separate  trees.  The  bud  or  branch  of  one  tree,  accom- 
panied by  a portion  of  its  bark,  is  inserted  into  the 
bark  of  another,  and  the  tree  which  is  thus  engrafted 
upon  is  called  the  stock.  By  this  mode  different  kinds 
of  fruits,  pears,  apples,  plums,  ike.,  each  of  which  is 
only  a Variety  accidentally  raised  from  seed,  but  no 
further  perpetuated  in  the  same  manner,  are  multi- 
plied; buds  of  the  kind  wanted  to  be  propagated, 
being  engrafted  on  so  many  stalks  of  a wild  nature. 

GRA'MEN.  (Gramen, inis.  n.)  Grass.  Any  kind 
of  grass-like  herb. 

Gramen  aritndinaceum.  See  Calamagrostis. 

Gramen  caninum.  See  Triticum  repens. 

Gramen  crucis  ctperioidis.  Gramen  cegyptia- 
cum.  Egyptian  cock’s-foot  grass,  or  grass  of  the  cross. 
The  roots  and  plants  possess  the  same  virtues  as  the 
dog’s  grass,  and  are  serviceable  in  the  earlier  stages  of 
dropsy.  They  are  supposed  to  correct  the  bad  smell  of 
the  breath,  and  to  relieve  nephritic  disorders,  colics, 
See.,  although  now  neglected. 

Gramia.  The  sordes  of  the  eyes. 

GRAMMATITE.  See  Tremolite. 

Gramme.  (From  ypappii,  a line : so  called  from  its 
linear  appearance.)  The  iris  of  the  eye. 

Granadi'lla.  (Diminutive  of  granado,  a pome- 
granate, Spanish  : so  called  because  at  the  top  of  the 
flower  there  are  points,  like  the  grains  of  the  pomegra- 
nate.) The  passion-flower,  the  fruit  of  which  is  said 
to  possess  refrigerating  qualities. 


GRANATITE.  See  Grenatite. 

Granatri'stum.  A bile  or  carbuncle. 

GRANATUM.  (From  granum , a grain,  because  it 
is  full  of  seed.)  The  pomegranate.  See  Punica  gra- 
natum. 

Grande'bal.®.  (Quod  in  grandioribus  estate  nas 
cantur , because  they  appear  m those  who  are  advanced 
in  years.)  The  hairs  under  the  arm-pits. 

Grandinosum  os.  The  os  cuboules. 

GRA'NDO.  ( Grando,inis.i . Quod  similitudincm 
granorum  habeat , because  it  is  in  shape  and  size  like 
a grain  of  seed.) 

1.  Hail. 

2.  A moveable  tumour  on  the  margin  of  the  eyelid 
is  so  called,  from  its  likeness  to  a hail-stone. 

GRANITE.  A compound  rock  consisting  of  quartz, 
felspar,  and  mica,  each  crystallized,  and  cohering  by 
mutual  affinity  without  any  basis  or  cement. 

GRANULA'TION.  (Granulatio ; from  granum , 
a grain.)  1.  In  surgery  : The  little  grainlike  fleshy 
bodies  which  form  on  the  surfaces  of  ulcers  and  sup- 
purating wounds,  and  serve  both  for  filling  up  the  cavi- 
ties, and  bringing  nearer  together  and  uniting  their 
sides,  are  called  granulations. 

Nature  is  supposed  to  be  active  in  bringing  parts  as 
nearly  as  possible  to  their  voriginal  state,  whose  dispo- 
sition, action,  and  structure,  have  been  altered  by  acci- 
dent, or  disease ; and  after  having,  in  her  operations 
for  this  purpose,  formed  pus,  she  immediately  sets 
about  forming  a new  matter  upon  surfaces,  in  which 
there  has  been  a breach  of  continuity.  This  process 
is  called  granulating  or  incarnation ; and  the  sub- 
stance formed  is  called  granulations.  The  colour  of 
healthy  granulations  is  a deep  florid  red.  When  livid, 
they  are  unhealthy,  and  have  only  a languid  circula- 
tion. Healthy  granulations,  on  an  exposed  or  flat 
surface,  rise  nearly  even  with  the  surface  of  the  sur- 
rounding skin,  and  often  a little  higher ; but  when  they 
exceed  this,  and  take  on  a growing  disposition,  they  are 
unhealthy,  become  soft,  spongy,  and  without  any  dis- 
position to  form  skin.  Healthy  granulations  are 
always  prone  to  unite  to  each  other,  so  as  to  be  the 
means  of  uniting  parts. 

2.  In  chemistry : The  method  of  dividing  metallic 
substances  into  grains  or  small  particles,  in  order  to 
facilitate  their  combination  with  other  substances,  and 
sometimes  for  the  purpose  of  readily  subdividing  them 
by  weight. 

GRANULATUS.  Granulated.  Applied  to  ulcers 
and  to  parts  of  plants.  A root  is  so  called  which  is 
jointed ; as  that  of  the  Oxalis  acetocella. 

GRA'NUM.  (Granum,  i.  n.)  A grain  or  kernel. 

Granum  cnidicm.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Granum  ihfectorium.  Kerrnes  berries. 

Granum  kermes.  Kermes  berries. 

Granum  moschi.  See  Hibiscus  abebnoschus 

Granum  paradisi.  See  Amomum. 

Granum  regium.  The  castor-oil  seed. 

Granum  tiglii.  See  Croton  tiglium. 

Granum  tinctorxjE.  Kermes  berries. 

GRAPHIC  ORE.  An  ore  of  tellurium. 

GRAPHIOI'DES.  (Ffom  ypa<pis,  a pencil,  and 
etSos,  a form.)  1.  The  styliform  process  of  the  os 
temporis. 

2.  A process  of  the  ulna. 

3.  The  digastricus  w as  formerly  so  called  from  its 
supposed  origin  from  the  above-mentioned  process  of 
the  temporal  bone 

GRAPHITE.  Rhomboidal  graphite  of  Jameson,  or 
plumbago,  or  black-lead,  of  which  he  gives  two  sub- 
species, the  scaly  and  compact. 

Gra'ssa.  Borax. 

GRATI'OLA.  (Diminutive  of  gratia , so  named 
from  its  supposed  admirable  qualities.)  Hyssop. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Diandria : Order,  Jlfonogynia- 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  hedge-hyssop. 
See  Gratiola  officinalis. 

Grattola  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  hedge-hyssop.  Digitalis  minima ; Gratia  dei  ; 
Gratiola  centauriodes.  This  exotic  plant,  the  Gra- 
tiola; — foliis  lanceolatis , serratis,floribus  prduncu- 
latis,  of  Linnreus,  is  a native  of  the  south  of  Europe  ; 
but  is  raised  in  our  gardens.  The  leaves  have  a nau- 
seous bitter  taste,  but  no  remarkable  smell ; they  purge 
and  vomit  briskly  in  the  dose  of  half  a drachm  of  the 
dry  heilqor  of  a drachm  infused  in  win#  or  water 


GRE 


GRE 


This  plant,  in  small  doses,  has  been  commonly  em- 
ployed as  a cathartic  and  diuretic  in  hydropical  dis- 
eases ; and  instances  of  its  good  ©fleets  in  ascites  and 
anasarca  are  recorded  by  many  respectable  practi- 
tioners. Gesner  and  Bergius  found  a scruple  of  the 
powder  a sufficient  dose,  as  in  this  quantity  it  fre- 
quently excited  nausea  or  vomiting ; others  have  given 
it  to  half  a drachm,  two  scruples,  a drachm,  and  even 
hiore. 

An  extract  of  the  root  of  this  plant  is  said  to  be 
more  elficacidus  than  the  plant  itself,  and  exhibited  in 
the  dose  of  half  a drachm,  or  drachm,  in  dysenteries, 
produces  the  best  effect.  We  are  also  told  by  Kostr- 
zewski  that  in  the  hospitals  at  Vienna,  three  maniacal 
patients  were  perfectly  recovered  by  its  use ; and  in 
the  most  confirmed  cases  of  lues  venerea,  it  effected  a 
complete  cure ; it  usually  acted  by  increasing  the  uri- 
nary, cutaneous,  or  salivary  discharges. 

GRAVEDO.  (From  grains,  heavy.)  A catarrh, 
or  cold,  with  a sense  of  heaviness  in  the  head. 

GRAVEL.  See  Calculus. 

[Gravel  root.  See  Eupatorium  purpureum.  A.] 

GRAVITY".  A term  used  by  physical  writers  to 
denote  the  cause  by  which  all  bodies  move  toward 
each  other,  unless  prevented  by  some  other  force  or 
obstacle. 

Gravity,  specific.  The  density  of  the  matter  of 
Which  any  body  is  composed,  compared  to  the  destiny 
of  another  body,  assumed  as  the  standard.  This 
standard  is  pure  distilled  water,  at  the  temperature  of 
60°  F.  To  determine  the  specific  gravity  of  a solid,  we 
weigh  it,  first  in  air,  and  then  in  water.  In  the  latter 
case,  it  loses  of  its  weight  a quantity  precisely  equal  to 
the  weight  of  its  own  bulk  of  water ; and  hence,  by 
comparing  this  weight,  with  its  total  weight,  we  find 
its  specific  gravity.  The  rule,  therefore,  is,  Divide  the 
total  weight  by  the  loss  of  weight  in  water,  the  quo- 
tient is  the  specific  gravity.  If  it  be  a liquid  or  a gas. 
we  weigh  it  in  a glass  or  other  vessel  of  known  capa- 
city ; and  dividing  that  weight  by  the  weight  of  the 
same  bulk  of  water,  the  quotient  is,  as  before,  the  spe- 
cific gravity. 

[“  GREEN,  Thomas.  The  family  of  Green  has 
made  itself  remarkable,  in  the  medical  profession,  by 
its  humble  and  singular  origin.  The  subject  of  this 
notice,  the  medical  ancestor  of  the  family,  was  born 
in  Malden,  and  was  one  of  the  first  settlers  of  Leices- 
ter, county  of  Worcester,  Massachusetts.  He  received 
his  first  medical  impressions,  and  impulse,  from  a 
book,  given  him  by  a surgeon  of  a British  ship,  who 
resided  a few  months  at  his  father’s,  and  took  an  in- 
terest in  his  vigorous  and  opening  intellect.  His  outfit, 
for  the  wilderness,  consisted  of  his  gun,  his  axe,  his 
book,  his  sack,  and  his  cow.  His  first  habitation  was 
built  by  nature,  its  roof  composed  of  a shelving  rock. 
Here  he  passed  the  night  in  sound  repose,  after  the 
labour  of  the  day,  in  felling  and  clearing  the  forest. 
Soon  after  he  began  his  settlement,  he  was  attacked 
by  a fever.  Foreseeing  the  difficulties  which  must 
attend  his  situation,  without  a friendly  hand  to  admi- 
nister even  the  scanty  necessaries  of  life,  he  had  the 
precaution  to  tie  a young  calf  to  his  cabin,  formed 
under  the  rock.  By  this  stratagem  he  was  enabled  to 
obtain  sustenance  from  the  cow,  as  often  as  she  re- 
turned to  give  nourishment  to  her  young.  In  this  man- 
ner he  derived  his  support  for  some  weeks.  By  the 
aid  of  his  book,  and  the  knowledge  of  simples,  a profi- 
ciency in  which  he  early  acquired  by  an  intercourse 
with  the  Indians,  he  was  soon  enabled  to  prescribe 
successfully  for  the  simple  maladies  of  his  fellow-set- 
tlers. By  practice,  from  the  necessity  of  the  case,  as 
well  as  from  choice,  he  acquired  theory  and  skill,  and 
soon  rose  to  great  reputation.  Thus,  from  fortuitous 
circumstances,  and  an  humble  beginning,  the  name  of 
Green  has  attained  its  present  eminence  in  the  medical 
profession  ” — Tkach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

[“GREEN,  Dr.  John,  (senior,)  son  of  the  above 
mentioned,  was  born  at  Leicester,  in  the  year  1736. 
By  the  aid  of  his  father,  he  early  became  a physician, 
and  settled  at  Worcester.  He  married  a daughter  of 
Brigadier  Ruggles,  of  Hardwick,  and  became  the  father 
of  a large  family.  Not  satisfied,  as  too  many  are, 
with  the  limited  means  of  knowledge  which  necessa- 
rily fell  to  his  lot,  he  afforded  his  children  the  best  edu- 
cation in  his  power.  He  was  extensively  employed, 
and  distinguished  himself  for  his  tenderness  and  fide- 
lity. He  inherited  a taste  and  skill  in  botany,  with 

C c 2 


his  profession,  from  his  father.  In  his  garden  were  td 
be  found  the  useful  plant,  the  healing  herb,  and  the 
grateful  fruit;  which  either  his  humanity  bestowed 
on  the  sick,  or  his  hospitality  on  his  friends.  He  died, 
November  29th,  1799,  aged  63  years. — Tkach.  Med. 
Biog.  A.l 

[“  GREEN,  Dr.  John,  (junior,)  son  of  the  pre- 
ceding, was  born  A.  D.  1763.  Descended  from  an- 
cestors who  made  the  art  of  healing  their  study,  Dr. 
Green  was  easily  initiated  in  the  school  of  physic ; and, 
from  his  childhood,  the  natural  bias  of  his  mind  led 
him  to  that  profession,  which,  through  life,  was  tire 
sole  object  of  his  ardent  pursuit.  To  be  distmguished 
as  a physician,  was  not  his  chief  incentive.  To  as- 
suage the  sufferings  of  humanity,  by  hi§  skill,  was  a 
higher  motive  of  his  benevolent  mind.  Every  duty 
was  performed  with  delicacy  and  tenderness.  With 
these  propensities,  aided  by  a strong,  inquisitive,  and 
discriminating  mind,  he  attained  to  a pre-eminent  rank 
among  the  physicians  and  surgeons  of  our  country. 
To  this  sentiment  of  his  worth,  correctly  derived  from 
witnessing  his  practice  on  others,  a more  feeling  tribute 
is  added  by  those  who  have  experienced  his  skill ; for 
so  mild  was  his  deportment,  so  soothing  were  his 
manners,  and  so  indefatigable  was  his  attention,  that 
he  gained  the  unbounded  confidence  of  his  patients, 
and  the  cure  was  in  a good  measure  performed  before 
medicine  was  administered.  To  those  who  were  ac- 
quainted with  Dr.  Green,  the  idea,  that  “ some  men 
are  born  physicians ,”  was  not  absurd;  for  he  not 
only  possessed  an  innate  mental  fitness  for  the  profes 
sion,  but  was  constitutionally  formed  to  bear  its  fa- 
tigues and  privations.  Few  men,  of  his  age,  have 
had  such  extensive  practice,  or  endured  a greater  va 
riety  of  fatigue,  or  have  been  so  often  deprived  of 
stated  rest  and  refreshment.  It  is  worthy  of  remark, 
that  in  all  the  variety  of  duty,  incident  to  his  calling, 
he  was  never  known  to  yield  to  the  well-intended 
proffer  of  that  kind  of  momentary  refreshment,  so 
ready  at  command,  and  so  often  successfully  pressed 
upon  the  weary,  exhausted,  and  incautious  physician. 

“ The  firmness  and  equanimity  of  his  mind,  which 
were  conspicuous  in  all  the  exigencies  of  life,  forsook 
him  not  in  death.  With  Christian  resignation,  he  uset 
his  house  in  order,"  knowing  he  “ must  die  and  not 
live."  In  perfect  possession  of  his  intellectual  facul- 
ties, with  a mind  calm  and  collected,  he  spent  the  last 
moments  of  life  performing  its  last  duties,  with  the 
sublime  feelings  of  a philosopher  and  Christian.  And 
when,  by  an  examination  of  his  pulse,  he  found  the 
cold  hand  of  death  pressing  hard  upon  him,  he  bade  a 
calm  adieu  to  his  attending  physicians,  whom  he 
wished  should  be  the  sole  witnesses  of  nature’s  last 
conflict.  Placing  himself  in  the  most  favourable  pos- 
ture  for  an  easy  exit,  he  expressed  a hope  that  his  for- 
titude would  save  his  afflicted  family  and  friends  from 
the  distress  of  hearing  a dying  groan.  His  hope  was 
accomplished!  He  died,  August  11th,  1808,  aged  45 
years.  At  his  request,  his  body  was  examined.  The 
cause  of  death  was  found  in  the  enlargement,  and 
consequent  flaccidity,  of  the  aorta.”—  Thacker's  Med. 
Biog.  A.l 

GREEN  EARTH.  Mountain  green.  A mineral 
of  a celandine  green  colour,  found  in  Saxony,  Verona, 
and  Hungary. 

GREEN  SICKNESS.  See  Chlorosis. 

Green  vitriol.  Sulphate  of  iron. 

GREENSTONE.  A rock  of  the  trap  fbrmatlon, 
consisting  of  a hornblend,  and  felspar,  both  in  the 
state  of  grains  or  small  crystals.  See  Diabase. 

GREGORY,  John,  was  born  in  1725,  his  father 
being  professor  of  medicine  at  King’s  College,  Aber- 
deen : after  studying  under  whom,  he  went  to  Edin- 
burgh, Leyden,  and  Paris.  At  the  age  of  20,  he  was 
elected  professor  of  philosophy  at  Aberdeen,  and  was 
made  doctor  of  medicine.  In  the  year  1756  he  was 
chosen  professor  of  medicine  on  the  death  of  his  bro- 
ther James,  who  had  succeeded  his  father  in  that  chair. 
But  about  nine  years  after  he  went  to  Edinburgh ; and 
was  appointed  professor  of  the  practice  of  medicine 
there,  Dr.  Rutherford  having  resigned  in  his  favour. 
The  year  following,  on  the  death  of  Dr.  White,  he  was 
nominated  first  physician  to  the  king  for  Scotland.  He 
also  enjoyed  very  extensive  practice,  prior  to  his  death 
in  1773.  He  published,  in  1765,  “ A Comparative  View 
of  the  State  and  Faculties  of  Man  with  those  of  the 
Animal  World,”  which  contains  many  just  and  origi- 


GRY 


GUA 


nal  remarks,  and  was  very  favouranly  received.  Five 
years  after  his  “Observations  on  the  Duties  and  Of- 
fices of  a Physician,  &c.,”  given  in  his  introductory 
lectures,  were  made  public  surreptitiously ; which  in- 
duced him  to  print  them  in  a more  correct  form.  The 
work  has  been  greatly  admired.  His  last  publication, 
“ Elements  of  the  Practice  of  Physic  ” was  intended 
as  a syllabus  to  his  lectures ; but  he  did  not  live  to 
complete  it. 

GRENATITE.  Prismatoidal  garnet. 

Gressu'ra.  (From  gradior , to  proceed.)  The  pe- 
rineum which  goes  from  the  pudendum  to  the  anus. 

GREW,  Nkhemiah,  was  born  at  Coventry  ; where, 
after  graduating  at  some  foreign  university,  he  settled 
in  practice.  He  there  formed  the  idea  of  studying  the 
anatomy  of  plants.  His  first  essay  on  this  subject  was 
Communicated  to  the  Royal  Society  in  1670,  and  met 
with  great  approbation : whence  he  was  induced  to 
settle  in  London,  and  two  years  after  became  a fellow 
of  that  society;  of  which  he  was  also  at  one  period 
secretary.  In  1680  lie  was  made  an  honorary  fellow 
of  the  College  of  Physicians.  He  is  said  to  have  at- 
tained considerable  practice,  and  died  in  1711.  His 
“Anatomy  of  Vegetable  Roots  and  Trunks,”  is  a large 
collection  of  original  and  useful  facts;  though  his 
theories  have  been  invalidated  by  subsequent  disco- 
veries. He  had  no  correct  ideas  of  the  propulsion  or 
direction  of  the  sap ; but  he  was  one  of  the  first 
who  adopted  the  doctrine  of  the  sexes  of  plants  ; nor 
did  even  the  principles  of  methodical  arrangement 
entirely  escape  his  notice.  In  1681,  he  published  a de- 
scriptive catalogue  of  the  Museum  of  the  Royal  So- 
ciety ; to  which  were  added  some  lectures  on  the  com- 
parative anatomy  of  the  stomach  and  intestines. 
Another  publication  was  entitled  “ Cosmographia  Sa- 
cra, or  a Discourse  of  the  Universe;  as  it  is  the  Crea- 
ture and  Kingdom  of  God.”  His  works  were  soon 
translated  into  French  and  Latin ; but  the  latter  very 
incorrectly 

GREYWACKE.  A mountain  formation,  consist- 
ing of  two  similar  rocks,  which  alternate  with,  and 
pass  into  each  other,  called  grey  wacke,  and  grey  wacke- 
slate. 

GR1AS.  (A  name  mentioned  by  Apuleius.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Grias  cauliflora.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree,  the  fruit  of  which  is  the  anchovy  pear.  The  in- 
habitants of  Jamaica  esteem  it  as  a pleasant  and  cool- 
ing fruit 

Grie'lum.  A name  formerly  applied  to  parsley  and 
smallage. 

Gripho'menos.  (From  ypiipos,  a net;  because  it 
surrounds  the  body  as  with  a net.)  Applied  to  pains 
which  surround  the  body  at  the  loins. 

GROMWELL.  See  Lithospermum. 

GROSS  UL  ARE.  A mineral  of  an  asparagus-green 
colour,  of  the  garnet  genusi 

GROSSULA'RIA.  (Diminutive of  grossus , an  un- 
ripe fig ; so  named  because  its  fruit  resembles  an  unripe 
fig.)  The  gooseberry,  or  gooseberry-bush.  See  Ribes. 

Grotto  del  cane.  (The  Italian  for  the  dogs’ 
grotto.)  A grotto  near  Naples,  in  which  dogs  are  suf- 
focated. The  carbonic  acid  ga^  rises  about  eighteen 
inches.  A man  therefore  is  not  affected,  but  a dog 
forcibly  held  in,  or  that  cannot  rise  above  it,  is  soon 
killed,  unless  taken  out.  He  is  recovered  by  plunging 
him  in  an  adjoining  lake. 

Ground  ivy.  See  Glecoma  hederacea. 

Ground  liverwort.  See  Lichen  caninus. 

Ground  nut.  See  Bunium  bulbocastanum. 

Ground-pine.  See  Teucrium  chamwpitys. 

GROUNDSEL.  See  Senecio  vulgaris. 

GRUINALES.  (From  grusy  a crane.)  The  name 
of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnajus’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  geranium,  or  crane’s- 
bill  genus  principally. 

GRU'TUM.  A hard,  white  tubercle  of  the  skin,  re- 
sembling in  size  and  appearance  a millet-seed. 

GRYLLUS.  The  name  of  an  extensive  genus  of 
insects,  including  the  grasshoppers,  and  the  locust  of 
the  Scriptures. 

Gryllus  verrccivorus.  The  wart-eating  grass- 
hopper. Tt  has  green  wings,  spotted  with  brown,  and 
is  caught  by  the  common  people  in  Sweden  to  destroy 
warts,  which  they  do,  by  biting  off  the  excrescence  and 
discharging  a corrosive  liquor  on  the  wound. 

404 


GRYPHO'SIS,  (From  ypuirow,  to  incurvate.)  A 
disease  of  the  naile,  which  turn  inwards,  and  irritate 
the  soft  parts  below. 

GUAI'ACUM.  (From  the  Spanish  Guayacan, 
which  is  formed  from  the  Indian  Hoaxacum.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Decandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  officinal  guaia- 
cum.  See  Guaiacum  officinale. 

Guaiacum  officinale.  This  tree,  Guaiacum — 
foliis  bijugis , obtusis  of  Linnaeus,  is  a native  of  the 
West  Indian  islands.  The  wood,  gum,  bark,  fruit, 
and  even  the  flowers,  have  been  found  to  possess  medi 
cinal  qualities.  The  wood,  which  is  called  Guaiacum 
Americanum ; Lignum  vitae ; Lignum  sanctum ; Lig- 
num behedictum ; Palus  sanctus , is  brought  principally 
from  Jamaica,  in  large  pieces  of  four  or  five  hundred 
weight  each,  and  from  its  hardness  and  beauty  is  used 
for  various  articles  of  turnery-ware.  It  scarcely  dis- 
covers any  smell,  unless  heated,  or  while  rasping,  in 
which  circumstances  it  yields  a light  aromatic  one  : 
chewed,  it  impresses  a slight  acrimony,  biting  the 
palate  and  fauces.  The  gum,  or  rather  resin,  is  ob- 
tained by  wounding  the  bark  in  different  parts  of  the 
body  of  the  tree,  or  by  what  has  been  called  jagging. 
It  exudes  copiously  from  the  wounds,  though  gradu- 
ally; and  when  a quantity  is  found  accumulated  upon 
the  several  wounded  trees,  hardened  by  exposure  to 
the  sun,  it  is  gathered  and  packed  up  in  small  kegs  for 
exportation : it  is  of  a friable  texture,  of  a deep  green- 
ish colour,  and  sometimes  of  a reddish  hue  ; it  has  a 
pungent  acrid  taste,  but  little  or  no  smell,  unless  heat- 
ed. The  bark  contains  less  resinous  matter  than  the 
wood,  and  is  consequently  a less  powerful  medicine, 
though  in  a recent  state  it  is  strongly  cathartic.  “ The 
fruity"  says  a late  author,  “is  purgative,  and,  for 
medicinal  use,  far  excels  the  bark.  A decoction  of  it 
has  been  known  to  cure  the  venereal  disease,  and  even 
the  yaws  in  its  advanced  stage,  without  the  use  of 
mercury.”  The  flowers , or  blossoms,  are  laxative, 
and  in  Jamaica  are  commonly  given  to  the  children  in 
the  form  of  syrup.  It  is  only  the  wood  and  resin  of 
guaiacum  which  are  now  in  general  medicinal  use  in 
Europe ; and  as  the  efficacy  of  the  former  is  supposed 
to  be  derived  merely  from  the  quantity  of  resinous 
matter  which  it  contains,  they  may  be  considered'  in- 
discriminately as  the  same  medicine.  Guaiacum  was 
first  introduced  into  the  materia  medica  soon  after  the 
discovery  of  America;  and  previous  to  the  use  of 
mercury  in  the  lues  venerea,  it  was  the  principal  reme- 
dy employed  in  the  cure  of  that  disease:  its  great  suc- 
cess brought  it  into  such  repute,  that  it  is  said  to  have 
been  sold  for  seven  gold  crowns  a pound : but  notwith- 
standing the  very  numerous  testimonies  in  its  favour, 
it  often  failed  in  curing  the  patient,  and  was  at  length 
entirely  superseded  by  mercury  ; and  though  it  be  still 
occasionally  employed  in  syphilis,  it  is  rather  with  a 
view  to  correct  other  diseases  in  the  habit,  than  for  its 
effects  as  an  anti- venereal.  It  is  now  more  generally 
employed  for  its  virtues  in  curing  gouty  and  rheumatic 
pains,  and  some  cutaneous  diseases.  Dr.  Woodville 
and  others  frequently  conjoined  it  with  mercury  and 
soap,  and  in  some  cases  with  bark  or  steel,  and  found 
it  eminently  useful  as  an  alterative.  In  the  pharma- 
copoeia it  is  directed  in  the  form  of  mixture  and  tinc- 
ture : the  latter  is  ordered  to  be  prepared  in  two  ways, 
viz.  with  rectified  spirit,  and  the  aromatic  spirit  of 
ammonia.  Of  these  latter  compounds,  the  dose  may 
be  from  two  scruples  to  two  drachms ; the  gum  is  gene- 
rally given  from  six  grains  to  twenty,  or  even  more,  for 
a dose,  either  in  pills  or  in  a fluid  form,  by  means  of 
mucilage  or  the  yelk  of  an  egg.  The  decoctum  ligno- 
rum  (Pharm.  Edinb.)  of  which  guaiacum  is  the  chief 
ingredient,  is  commonly  taken  in  the  quantity  of  a 
pint  a day. 

As  many  writers  of  the  sixteenth  century  contended 
that  guaiacum  was  a true  specific  for  the  venereal  dis- 
ease, and  the  celebrated  Boerhaave  maintained  the 
same  opinion,  the  following  observations  are  inserted : 
Mr.  Pearson  mentions,  that  when  he  was  first  intrust- 
ed with  the  care  of  the  Lock  Hospital,  1781,  Mr.  Brom- 
field  and  Mr.  Williams  were  in  the  habit  of  reposing 
great  confidence  in  the  efficacy  of  a decoction  of  guaia- 
cum wood.  This  was  administered  to  such  patients 
as  had  already  employed  the  usual  quantity  of  mer- 
cury ; but  who  complained  of  nocturnal  pains,  or  had 
gummata,  nodes,  ozama,  and  other  effects  of  llie  vene- 


GUI 


GUM 


real  virus,  connected  with  secondary  symptoms,  as  did 
not  yield  to  a course  of  mercurial  frictions.  The  diet 
consisted  of  raisins,  and  hard  biscuit;  from  two  to 
four  pints  of  the  decoction  were  taken  every  day;  the 
hot  bath  was  used  twice  a week ; and  a dose  of  anti- 
monial  wine  and  laudanum,  or  Dover’s  powder,  was 
commonly  taken  every  evening.  Constant  confine- 
ment to  bed  was  not  deemed  necessary ; neither  was 
exposure  to  the  vapour  of  burning  spirit,  with  a view 
of  exciting  perspiration,  often  practised;  as  only  a 
moist  state  of  the  skin  was  desired.  This  treatment 
was  sometimes  of  singular  advantage  to  those  whose 
health  had  sustained  injury  from  the  disease,  long  con- 
finement, and  mercury.  The  strength  increased;  bad 
ulcers  healed ; exfoliations  were  completed ; and  these 
anomalous  symptoms  which  would  have  been  exas- 
perated by  mercury,  soon  yielded  to  guaiacum. 

Besides*  such  cases,  in  which  the  good  effects  of 
guaiacum  made  it  be  erroneously  regarded  as  a specific 
tor  the  lues  venerea,  the  medicine  was  also  formerly 
given,  by  some,  on  the  first  attack  of  the  venereal  dis- 
ease. The  disorder  being  thus  benefited,  a radical 
cure  was  considered  to  be  accomplished:  and  though 
frequent  relapses  followed,  yet,  as  these  partly  yielded 
to  the  same  remedy,  its  reputation  was  still  kept  up. 
Many  diseases  also,  which  got  well,  were  probably 
not  venereal  cases.  Pearson  seems  to  allow,  that  in 
syphilitic  affections,  it  may  indeed  operate  like  a true 
antidote,  suspending,  for  a time,  the  progress  of  certain 
venereal  symptoms,  and  removing  other  appearances 
altogether ; but  he  observes  that  experience  has  evinced, 
that  the  unsubdued  virus  yet  remains  active  in  the 
constitution. 

Pearson  has  found  guaiacum  of  little  use  in  pains 
of  the  bones,  except  when  it  proved  sudorific ; but  that 
it  was  then  inferior  to  antimony  or  volatile  alkali. 
When  the  constitution  has  been  impaired  by  mercury 
and  long  confinement,  and  there  is  a thickened  state 
of  the  ligaments,  or  periosteum,  or  foul  ulcers  still  re- 
maining, Pearson  says,  these  effects  will  often  subside 
during  the  exhibition  of  the  decoction;  and  it  will 
often  suspend,  for  a short  time,  the  progress  of  certain 
secondary  symptoms  of  the  lues  venera ; for  instance, 
ulcers  of  the  tonsils,  venereal  eruptions,  and  even 
nodes.  Pearson,  however,  never  knew  one  instance 
in  which  guaiacum  eradicated  the  virus ; and  he  con- 
tends, that  its  being  conjoined  with  mercury  neither 
increases  the  virtue  of  this  mineral,  lessens  its  bad 
affects,  nor  diminishes  the  necessity  of  giving  a certain 
quantity  of  it.  Pearson  remarks  that  he  has  seen 
guaiacum  produce  good  effects  in  many  patients,  having 
cutaneous  diseases,  the  oztena,  and  scrofulous  affec- 
tions of  the  membranes  and  ligaments. 

GUILA'NDINA.  (Named  after  Guilandus,  a Prus- 
sian, who  travelled  in  Palestine,  Egypt,  Africa,  and 
Greece,  and  succeeded  Fallopius  in  the  botanical  chair 
at  Padua.  He  died  in  1589.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants.  Class,  Dccandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 
Guilandina  bonduc.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lant,  the  fruit  of  which  is  called  Bonduch  indorum. 
lolucca  or  bezoar  nut.  It  possesses  warm,  bitter,  and 
carminative  virtues. 

Guilandina  moringa.  This  plant,  Ouilandina — 
inermis , foliis  subpinnatis , foliolis  inferioribus  terna- 
tis  of  Linnaeus,  affords  the  ben-nut  and  the  lignum 
nephriticum. 

1.  Ben  nux  ; Qians  unguentaria ; Balanus  myrep- 
sica ; Coatis.  The  oily  acorn,  or  ben-nut.  A whitish 
nut,  about  the  size  of  a small  filberd,  of  a roundish 
triangular  shape,  including  a kernel  of  the  same  figure, 
covered  with  a white  skin.  They  were  formerly  em- 
ployed to  remove  obstructions  of  the  primae  viae.  The 
oil  afforded  by  simple  pressure,  is  remarkable  for  its 
not  growing  rancid  in  keeping,  or,  at  least,  not  until 
it  has  stood  for  a number  of  years;  and  on  this  ac- 
count, it  is  used  in  extricating  the  aromatic  principles 
of  such  odoriferous  flowers  as  yield  little  or  no  essen- 
tial oil  in  distillation.  The  unalterability  of  this  oil 
would  render  it  the  most  valuable  substance  for  ce- 
rates, or  liniments,  were  it  sufficiently  common.  It  is 
actually  employed  for  this  purpose  in  many  parts  of 
Italy. 

2.  Lignum  nephriticum.  Nephritic  wood.  It  is 
brought  from  America  in  large,  compact,  ponderous 
pieces,  without  knots,  the  outer  part  of  a whitish,  or 
pale  yellowish  colour,  the  inner  of  a dark  brown  or 
red.  When  rasped,  it  gives  out  a faint  aromatic  smell. 


It  is  never  used  medicinally  in  this  country,  but  stands 
high  in  reputation  abroad,  against  difficulties  of  making 
urine,  nephritic  complaints,  and  most  disorders  of  the 
kidneys  and  urinary  passages. 

GUINEA  PEPPER.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Guinea-worm.  See  Medinensis  vena. 

GUINTERIUS,  John,  was  born  in  1487,  at  Ander- 
nach,  in  Germany.  He  was  of  obscure  birth,  and  his 
real  name  was  said  to  have  been  Winther.  He  showed 
very  early  a great  zeal  for  knowledge,  and  at  the  age 
of  12  went  to  Utrecht  to  study  ; but  he  had  to  struggle 
with  great  hardships,  supported  partly  by  his  own  in- 
dustry, partly  by  the  bounty  of  those  who  commiserated 
his  situation.  At  length,  having  given  striking  proofs 
of  his  talents,  he  was  appointed  professor  of  Greek  at 
Louvain.  But  his  inclination  being  to  medicine,  he 
went  to  Paris  in  1525 ; where  he  was  made  doctor  five 
years  after.  He  was  appointed  physician  to  the  king, 
and  practised  there  during  several  years  ; giving  also 
lectures  on  anatomy.  His  reputation  had  reached  the 
north  of  Europe ; and  he  received  the  most  advanta- 
geous offers  to  repair  to  the  court  of  Denmark.  But 
in  1537  he  was  compelled  by  the  religious  disturbances 
to  retire  into  Germany.  At  Strasburgh  he  was  received 
with  honour  by  the  magistrates,  and  had  a chair  as- 
signed him  by  the  faculty  ; he  also  practised  very 
extensively  and  successfully ; and  at  length  letters  of 
nobility  were  conferred  upon  him  by  the  emperor.  He 
lived,  however,  only  twelve  years  to  enjoy  these 
honours,  having  died  in  1574.  His  works  are  nume- 
rous, consisting  partly  of  translations  of  the  best 
ancient  physicians,  but  principally  of  commentaries 
and  illustrations  of  them. 

GUM.  I.  Gummi.  The  mucilage  of  vegetables.  It 
is  usually  transparent,  more  or  less  brittle  when  dry, 
though  difficultly  pulverable  ; of  an  insipid,  or  slightly 
saccharine  taste ; soluble  in,  or  capable  of  combining 
with,  water  in  all  proportions,  to  which  it  gives  a 
gluey  adhesive  consistence,  in  proportion  as  its  quan- 
tity is  greater.  It  is  separable,  or  congulates  by  the 
action  of  weak  acids;  it  is  insoluble  in  alkohol,  and  in 
oil ; and  capable  of  the  acid  fermentation,  when  diluted 
with  water.  The  destructive  action  of  fire  causes  it 
to  emit  much  carbonic  acid,  and  converts  it  into  coal 
without  exhibiting  any  flame.  Distillation  affords 
water,  acid,  a small  quantity  of  oil,  a small  quantity 
of  ammonia,  and  much  coal. 

These  are  the  leading  properties  of  gums,  rightly  so 
called ; but  the  inaccurate  custom  of  former  times  ap- 
plied the  term  gum  to  all  concrete  vegetable  juices,  so 
that  in  common  we  hear  of  gum  copal,  gum  sandarach, 
and  other  gums,  which  are  either  pure  resms,  or  mix- 
tures of  resins  with  the  vegetable  mucilage. 

The  principal  gums  are,  1.  The  common  gums,  ob- 
tained from  the  plum,  the  peach,  the  cherry-tree,  <fcc. 
2.  Gum  Arabic,  which  flows  naturally  from  the  acacia 
in  Egypt,  Arabia,  and  elsewhere.  This  forms  a clear 
transparent  mucilage  with  water.  3.  Gum  Seneca,  or 
Seuegal.  It  does  not  greatly  differ  from  gum  Arabic : 
the  pieces  are  larger  and  clearer  ; and  it  seems  to  com- 
municate a higher  degree  of  the  adhesive  quality  to 
water.  It  is  much  used  by  calico-printers  and  others. 
The  first  sort  of  gums  are  frequently  sold  by  this  name, 
but  may  be  known  by  their  darker  colour.  4.  Gum 
adragant,  or  tragacanth.  It  is  obtained  from  a small 
plant,  a species  of  astragalus,  growing  in  Syria,  and 
other  eastern  parts.  It  comes  to  us  in  small  white  con- 
torted pieces,  resembling  worms.  It  is  usually  dearer 
than  other  gums,  and  forms  a thicker  jelly  with  water. 

Willis  has  found,  that  the  root  of  the  common  blue- 
bell, Hyacinthus  non  scriptus , dried  and  powdered, 
affords  a mucilage  possessing  all  the  qualities  of  that 
from  gum  Arabic.  The  roots  of  the  vernal  squill,  white 
lily,  and  orchis,  equally  yield  mucilage.  Lord  Dun- 
donald  has  extracted  a mucilage  also  from  lichens. 

Gums  treated  with  nitric  acid  afford  the  saclactic, 
malic,  and  oxalic  acids. 

II.  Gingiva.  The  very  vascular  and  elastic  sub- 
stance that  covers  the  alveolar  arches  of  the  upper  and 
under  jaws,  and  embraces  the  necks  of  the  teeth. 

Gum  acacia.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gum  arable.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gum.,  clastic.  See  Caoutchouc. 

GUM-BILE.  See  Parulis. 

GU'MMA.  A strumous  tumour  on  tha  periosteum 
of  a bone. 

GUMMI.  (Gummi,  n.  indeclin.)  See  Gum. 

405 


GUT 


Gummi  acaci®.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  acanthinum.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  arabxcum.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  carann®.  See  Caranna. 

Gummi  cerasorum.  The  juices  which  exude  from 
the  bark  of  cherry-trees.  It  is  very  similar  to  gum 
Arabic,  for  which  it  may  be  substituted. 

Gummi  chibou.  A spurious  kind  of  gum  elemi,  but 
little  used. 

Gummi  courbaril.  An  epithet  sometimes  applied 
to  the  juice  of  the  Mymencea  courbaril.  See  Anime. 

Gummi  euphorbii.  See  Euphorbia. 

Gummi  galda.  See  Oalda. 

Gummi  gambiense.  See  Kino. 

Gummi  guttle.  See  Stalagmitis. 

Gummi  heder®.  See  Hedera  helix. 

Gummi  juniperinum.  See  Juniperus  communis. 

Gummi  kikekunemalo.  See  KikeJcunemulo. 

Gummi  kino.  See  Kino. 

Gummi  lacca.  See  Lacca. 

Gummi  lamac.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  lutea.  See  Botany  Bay. 

Gummi  myrrha.  See  Myrrha. 

Gummi  rubrum  astringens gambiense.  See  Kino. 

Gummi  sagapenum.  See  Sagapenum. 

Gummi  scorpionis.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  senega.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  senegalense.  See  Mimosa  Senegal. 

Gummi  senica.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  thebaicum.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Gummi  tragacanth®.  See  Astragalus. 

GUM-RE'SIN.  Gummi  resina.  Gum-resins  are 
the  juices  of  plants  that  are  mixed  with  resin,  and  an 
extractive  matter,  which  has  been  taken  for  a gum- 
my substance.  They  seldom  flow  naturally  from 
plants,  but  are  mostly  extracted  by  incision  in  the  form 
of  white,  yellow,  or  red  fluids,  which  dry  more  or  less 
quickly.  Water,  spirit  of  wine,  wine,  or  vinegar,  dis- 
solve them  only  in  part  according  to  the  proportion 
they  contain  of  resin  or  extract.  Gum-resins  may  also 
be  formed  by  art,  by  digesting  the  parts  of  vegetables 
containing  the  gum-resin  in  diluted  alkohol,  and  then 
evaporating  the  solution.  For  this  reason  most  tinc- 
tures contain  gum-resin.  The  principal  gum-resins 
employed  medicinally  are  aloes,  ammoni&cum,assafceti- 
da,galbanum,  cambogia,  guaiacum,  myrrha,  ollbanum, 
opoponax,  sagapenum,  sarcocolla,  scammonium,  and 
styrax. 

GUNDELIA.  (The  name  given  by  Tournefort  in 
honour  of  his  companion  and  friend,  Andrew  Gundel- 
scheimer,  its  discoverer,  in  the  mountains  of  Armenia.) 
A genus  of  plants.  Class,  Syngenesia  ; Order,  Poly- 
gamia  segregata. 

Gundelia  tournifortii.  The  young  shoots  of 
this  plant  are  eaten  by  the  Indians  but  the  roots  are 
emetic. 

GU'TTA.  ( Gutta , ae.  f.)  1.  A drop.  Drops  are 
uncertain  forms  of  administering  medicines,  and 
should  never  be  trusted  to.  The  shape  of  the  bottle 
or  of  its  mouth,  from  whence  the  drops  fall,  as  well  as 
the  consistence  of  the  fluid,  occasion  a considerable 
difference  in  the  quantity  administered.  See  Minimum. 

2.  A name  of  apoplexy,  from  a supposition  that  its 
cause  was  a drop  of  blood  falling  from  the  brain  upon 
the  heart. 

Gutta  gamba.  See  Stalagmitis. 

Gutta  nigra.  The  black  drop,  occasionally  called 
the  Lancashire,  or  the  Cheshire  drop.  A secret  pre- 
preparation of  opium  said  to  be  more  active  than  the 
eommon  tincture,  and  supposed  to  be  less  injurious,  as 
seldom  followed  by  headache. 

Gutta  opaca.  A name  for  the  cataract. 

Gutta  serena.  (So  called  by  the  Arabians.)  See 
Amaurosis. 

406 


GYP 

Gutt®  rosace®.  Red  spots  upon  the  face  and 
nose. 

GU'TTURAL.  Belonging  to  the  throat. 

Guttural  artery.  The  superior  thyroideal  artery. 
The  first  branch  of  the  external  carotid. 

GYMNA'STIC.  {Gymnasticus ; from  yvpvos,  na- 
ked, performed  by  naked  men  in  the  public  games.) 
This  term  is  applied  to  a method  of  curing  diseases  by 
exercise,  or  that  part  of  physic  which  treats  of  the 
rules  that  are  to  be  observed  in  all  sorts  of  exercises, 
for  the  preservation  of  health.  This  is  said  to  have 
been  invented  by  one  Herodicus,  born  at  Salymbra,  a 
city  of  Thrace  ; or,  as  some  say,  at  Leutini,  in  Sicily. 
He  was  first  master  of  an  academy  where  young  gen- 
tlemen came  to  learn  warlike  and  manly  exercises; 
and  observing  them  to  be  very  healthful  on  that  ac- 
count, he  made  exercise  become  an  art  in  reference  to 
the  recovering  of  men  out  of  diseases,  as  well  as  pre- 
serving them  from  them,  and  called  it  Gymnastic , 
which  he  made  a great  part  of  his  practice.  But  Hip- 
pocrates, who  was  his  scholar,  blames  him  sometimes 
for  his  excesses  with  this  view.  And  Plato  exclaims 
against  him  with  some  warmth,  for  enjoining  his 
patients  to  walk  from  Athens  to  Megara,  which  is 
about  25  miles,  and  to  come  home  on  foot  as  they  went, 
as  soon  as  ever  they  had  but  touched  the  walls  of  the 
city. 

GYMNOCARPI.  The  second  division  in  Persoon’s 
arrangement  of  mushrooms,  such  as  bear  seeds  em- 
bedded in  an  appropriate,  dilated,  exposed  membrane, 
denominated  hymenium , like  helvella , in  which  that 
part  is  smooth  and  even ; boletus , in  which  it  is  porous ; 
and  the  vast  genus  agaricus , in  which  it  consists  of 
gills. 

GYMNOSPERMIA,  (From  yv pvo$,  naked,  and 
aneppa,  a seed.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  the  class 
Didynamia , of  the  sexual  system  of  plants,  embracing 
such  as  have  added  to  the  didynaraial  character,  four 
naked  seeds. 

Gyn®'cia.  (From  ywrj,  a woman.)  The  menses, 
and  also  the  lochia. 

GYNAS'CIUM.  (From  ywt),  a woman.) 

1.  A seraglio. 

2.  The  pudendum  muliebre. 

3.  A name  for  antimony. 

GYNASCOMA'NIA.  (From  yvyrj,  a woman,  and 
pavia,  madness.)  That  species  of  insanity  that  arises 
from  love. 

Gyn®comy'stax.  (From  yvvrj,  a woman,  and 
pvs-ral,  a beard.)  The  hairs  on  the  female  pudendum. 

Gyn®coma'ston.  (From  yvvr},  a woman,  and 
pa?of,  a breast.)  An  enormous  increase  of  the  breasts 
of  wome  n. 

GYNANDRIA.  (From  yvvr},  a woman,  and  avrjp, 
a man,  or  husband.)  The  name  of  a class  in  the 
sexual  system  of  plants.  It  contains  those  hermaphro- 
dite flowers,  the  stamina  of  which  grow  upon  the  pistil, 
so  that  the  male  and  female  organs  are  united,  and  do 
not  stand  separate  as  in  other  hermaphrodite  flowers. 

GYPSATA.  (From  gypsum , a saline  body  consist- 
ingof  sulphuric  acid  and  lime.)  Dr.  Good  denominates 
a species  of  purging  diarrhoea  gypsata , in  which  the 
digestions  are  liquid,  serous,  and  compounded  of  earth 
of  lime. 

GYPSUM.  A genus  of  minerals,  composed  of  lime 
and  sulphuric  acid,  containing,  according  to  Jameson, 
two  species:  the  prismatic  and  the  axifrangible. 

1.  Prismatic  gypsum,  or  anhydrite , has  five  sub-spe- 
cies : sparry  anhydrite,  scaly  anhydrite,  fibrous  anhy- 
drite, convoluted  anhydrite,  compact  anhydrite.  See 
Anhydrite. 

2.  Axifrangible  gypsum  contains  six  sub-species: 
sparry  gypsum,  foliated,  compact,  fibrous,  scaly  foliated, 
and  earthy  gypsum. 


HiEM 


H 


HiEM 


aarkxks.  Werner’s  name  for  the  capillary 
pyrites  of  Jameson,  and  the  Nickel  natif  of 
Haiiy.  Native  nickel.  A.] 

HABE'NA.  A bridle.  A bandage  for  keeping  the 
lips  of  wounds  together,  made  in  the  form  of  a bridle. 

Hacub.  See  Oundeiia  tournefortii. 

HiEMAGO'GA.  (From  ax/za,  blood,  and  ayw,  to 
bring  off)  Medicines  which  promote  the  menstrual 
and  haemorrhoidal  discharges. 

HxEMALO'PIA.  (From  at/za,  blood,  and  oitjopai, 
to  see.)  A disease  of  the  eyes,  in  which  all  things  ap- 
pear of  a red  colour.  A variety  of  the  Pseudoblepsis 
imaginana. 

IEE'MALOPS.  (From  aiya,  blood,  and  the 
face.)  1.  A red  or  livid  mark  in  the  face  or  eye. 

• 2.  A blood-shot  eye. 

HxEMA'NTHUS.  (From  at/za,  blood,  and  avQos,  a 
flower,  so  called  from  its  colour.)  The  blood-flower. 

HxEMATE'MESIS.  (From  at/za,  blood,  and  r/zrw, 
to  vomit.)  Voviitus  cruentus.  A vomiting  of  blood  is 
readily  to  be  distinguished  from  a discharge  from  the 
lungs,  by  its  being  usually  preceded  by  sense  of  weight, 
pain,  or  anxiety  in  the  region  of  the  stomach ; by  its 
being  unaccompanied  by  any  cough ; by  the  blood  being 
discharged  in  a very  considerable  quantity;  by  its 
being  of  a dark  colour,  and  somewhat  grumous ; and 
by  its  being  mixed  with  the  other  contents  of  the 
stomach. 

The  disease  may  be  occasioned  by  any  thing  re- 
ceived into  the  stomach,  which  stimulates  it  violently 
or  wounds  it ; or  may  proceed  from  blows,  bruises,  or 
any  other  cause  capable  of  exciting  inflammation  in  this 
organ,  or  of  determining  too  great  a flow  of  blood  to  it ; 
but  it  arises  more  usually  as  a symptom  of  some  other 
disease  (such  as  a suppression  of  the  menstrual,  or 
haemorrhoidal  flux,  or  obstructions  in  the  liver,  spleen, 
and  other  viscera)  than  as  a primary  affection.  It  is 
seldom  so  profuse  as  to  destroy  the  patient  suddenly, 
and  the  principal  danger  seems  to  arise,  either  from  the 
great  debility  which  repeated  attacks  of  the  complaint 
induce,  or  from  the  lodgment  of  blood  in  the  intestines, 
which  by  becoming  putrid  might  occasion  some  other 
disagreeable  disorder. 

This  haemorrhage,  being  usually  rather  of  a passive 
character,  does  not  admit  of  large  evacuations.  Where 
it  arises,  on  the  suppression  of  the  menses,  in  young 
persons,  and  returns  periodically,  it  may  be  useful  to 
anticipate  this  by  taking  away  a few  ounces  of  blood ; 
not  neglecting  proper  means  to  help  the  function  of  the 
uterus.  In  moderate  attacks,  particularly  where  the 
bowels  have  been  confined,  the  infusion  of  roses  and 
sulphate  of  magnesia  may  be  employed:  if  this  should 
not  check  the  bleeding,  the  sulphuric  acid  may  be  ex- 
hibited more  largely,  or  some  of  the  more  powerful 
astringents  and  tonics,  as  alum,  tincture  of  muriate  of 
iron,  decoction  of  bark,  or  superacetate  of  lead.  Where 
pain  attends,  opium  should  be  given  freely,  taking  care 
that  the  bowels  be  not  constipated ; and  a blister  to  the 
epigastrium  may  be  useful.  If  depending  on  scirrhous 
tumours,  these  must  be  attacked  by  mercury,  hemlock, 
&c.  In  all  cases  the  food  should  be  light,  and  easy  of 
digestion ; but  more  nourishing  as  the  patient  is  more 
exhausted. 

HiEMATICA.  The  name  of  a class  of  diseases  in 
Good’s  Nosology,  of  the  sanguineous  system.  Its  orders 
are,  Pyretica,  Phlegotica,  Exanlhematica , Dysthetica. 

HA3MATIN.  The  colouring  matter  of  logwood, 
and  according  to  Chevreuil,  a distinct  vegetable  sub- 
stance. See  HamuUixylon. 

HADMATI'TES.  (From  aiya , blood:  so  named 
from  its  property  of  stopping  blood,  or  from  its  colour.) 
Lapis  hematites.  An  elegant  iron  ore  called  blood- 
stone. Finely  levigated,  and  freed  from  the  grosser 
parts  by  frequent  washings  with  water,  it  has  been 
long  recommended  in  haemorrhages,  fluxes,  uterine 
obstructions,  &c.  in  doses  of  from  one  scruple  to  three 
or  four. 

Hacmati'tinus.  (From  aiya'Ji'Jrjs,  the  bloodstone.) 
An  epithet  of  a colly  riuin,  in  which  was  the  bloodstone. 

HA2M ATOCE'LE.  (From  at/za,  blood,  and  KrjXru 


a tumour.)  A swelling  of  the  scrotum,  or  spermatic  cord, 
proceeding  from  or  caused  by  blood.  The  distinction 
of  the  different  kinds  of  liaematocele,  though  not.usually 
made,  is  absolutely  necessary  towards  rightly  under- 
standing the  disease  ; the  general  idea,  or  concept  ion  of 
which,  appears  to  Pott  to  be  somewhat  erroneous,  and 
to  have  produced  a prognostic  which  is  ill  founded  and 
hasty.  According  to  this  eminent  surgeon,  the  disease, 
properly  called  haematocele,  is  of  four  kinds  ; two  of 
which  have  their  seat  within  the  tunica  vaginalis  testis; 
one  within  the  albuginea ; and  the  fourth  in  the  tunica 
communis  or  common  cellular  membrane,  investing  the 
spermatic  vessels. 

In  the  passing  an  instrument,  in  order  to  let  out  the 
water  from  a hydrocele  of  the  vaginal  coat,  a vessel 
is  sometimes  wounded,  which  is  of  such  size,  as  to 
tinge  the  fluid  pretty  deeply  at  the  time  of  its  running 
odt : the  orifice  becoming  close,  when  the  water  is  all 
discharged,  and  a plaster  being  applied,  the  blood  ceases 
to  flow  from  thence,  but  insinuates  itself  partly  into 
the  cavity  of  the  vaginal  coat,  and  partly  into  the  cells 
of  the  scrotum  ; making  in  the  space  of  a few  hours,  a 
tumour  nearly  equal  in  size  to  the  original  hydrocele. 
This  is  one  species. 

It  sometimes  happens  in  tapping  a hydrocele,  that 
although  the  fluid  discharged  by  that  operation  be  per- 
fectly clear  and  limpid,  yet  in  a very  short  space  of  time 
(sometimes  in  a few  hours,)  the  scrotum  becomes  as 
large  as  it  was  before,  and  palpably  as  full  of  a fluid.  If 
a new  puncture  be  now  made,  the  discharge,  instead 
of  being  limpid  (as  before,)  is  either  pure  blood  or 
very  bloody.  This  is  another  species;  and,  like  the 
preceding,  confined  to  the  tunica  vaginalis. 

The  whole  vascular  compages  of  the  testicle  is 
sometimes  very  much  enlarged,  and  at  the  same  time 
rendered  so  lax  and  loose,  that  the  tumour  produced 
thereby  has,  to  the  fingers  of  an  examiner,  very  much 
the  appearance  of  a swelling  composed  of  a mere  fluid, 
supposed  to  be  somewhat  thick,  or  viscid.  This  is  in 
some  measure  a deception;  but  not  totally  so:  the 
greater  part  of  the  tumefaction  is  caused  by  the 
loosened  texture  of  the  testes ; but  there  is  very  fre- 
quently a quantity  of  extravasated  blood  also.  If  this  be 
supposed  to  be  a hydrocele,  and  pierced,  the  discharge 
will  be  mere  blood.  This  is  a third  kind  of  haunatocele ; 
and  very  different,  in  all  its  circumstances,  from  the 
two  preceding : the  fluid  is  shed  from  the  vessels  of  the 
glandular  part  of  the  testicle,  and  contained  within  the 
tunica  albuginea. 

The  fourth  consists  in  a rupture  of,  and  an  effusion  of 
blood,  from  a branch  of  the  spermatic  vein,  in  its  pas- 
sage from  the  groin  to  the  testicles.  In  which  case,  the 
extravasation  is  made  into  the  tunica  communis,  or 
cellular  membrane,  investing  the  spermatic  vessels. 

Each  of  these  species,  Pott  says,  he  has  seen  so  dis- 
tinctly, and  perfectly,  that  he  has  not  the  smallest 
doubt  concerning  their  existence,  and  of  their  differ- 
ence from  each  other. 

HzEMATO'CHYSIS.  (From  at/za , blood,  and  xew, 
to  pour  out.)  A haemorrhage  or  flux  of  blood. 

HxEMATO'DES.  (From  at/za,  blood,  and  eidos,  ap- 
pearance : so  called  from  the  red  colour.)  1.  An  old 
name  for  the  bloody  .crane’s-bill.  See  Geranium  san- 
guineum. 

2.  A fungus,  which  has  somewhat  the  appearance  of 
blood.  See  Hcematoma. 

HxEMATO'LOGY.  ( Hcematologia  ; from  at/za, 
blood,  and  Xovos . a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the 
blood. 

HA2MATOMA.  (From  at/za,  blood.)  Fungus  h<B- 
matodes.  The  bleeding  fungus.  Spongoid  inflamma- 
tion of  Burns.  This  disease  has'been  described  also 
under  the  names  of  soft  cancer  and  medullary  sar- 
coma. It  assumes  a variety  of  forms,  and  attacks  most 
parts  of  the  body,  but  particularly  the  testicle,  eye, 
breast,  and  the  extremities.  It  begins  with  a soft  en- 
largement or  tumour  of  the  part,  which  is  extremely 
elastic,  and  in  some  cases  very  painful ; as  it  increases, 
it  often  has  the  feel  of  an  encysted  tumour,  and  at  length 
becomes  irregular,  bulging  out  here  and  there,  and  in 

407 


HiEM 


WFM 


sinuales  itself  between  the . neighbouring  parts,  and 
forms  a large  mass,  if  under  an, aponeurotic  expansion. 
When  it  ulcerates  it  bleeds,  shoots  up  a mass  of  a bloody 
fungus,  and  then  shows  its  decided  character  if  unknown 
before.  Most  of  the  medicines  which  have  been  em- 
ployed against  cancerous  diseases  have  been  un profit- 
ably exhibited  against  hamatoma ; as  alteratives,  both 
vegetable  and  mineral ; tonics  and  narcotics.  Extirpa- 
tion, when  practicable,  is  the  only  cure. 

II-emato-uphaloce'le.  (From  aqua,  blood,  optpaXoi, 
the  navel,  and  kt/Xt),  a tumour.)  A tumour  about  the 
navel,  from  an  extravasation  of  blood.  A species  of 
ecchymosis. 

ILematopede'sis.  (From  aipa , blood,  and  zueSaa,  a 
leap.)  The  leaping  of  the  blood  from  a wounded 
artcrv. 

HrEMATO  SIS.  (From  aipa,  blood.)  A haemor- 
rhage or  flux  of  blood. 

HrEMATO'XYLON.  (From  aipa , blood,  and  £vAov, 
wood : so  called  from  the  red  colour  of  its  wood.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Decandria ; Order,  Monogijnia. 

Hjematoxylon  campechianum.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  logwood-tree.  Acacia  Zeylonica.  The 
part  ordered  in  the  Pharmacopoeia,  is  the  wood,  called 
Jlcematozyli  lignum;  Lignum  campeckcnse ; Lignum 
campechianum ; Lignum  campescanum  ; Lignum  Indi- 
ana ; Lignum  sappan.  Logwood.  It  is  of  a solid 
texture  and  of  a dark  red  colour.  It  is  imported  princi- 
pally as  a substance  for  dying,  cut  into  junks  and  logs 
of  about  three  feet  in  length ; of  these  pieces  the  largest 
and  Thickest  are  preserved,  as  being  of  the  deepest 
colour.  Logwood  has  a sweetish  sub-adstringent  taste, 
and  no  remarkable  smell ; it  gives  a purplish  red  tinc- 
ture both  to  watery  and  spirituous  infusions,  and  tinges 
the  stools,  and  sometimes  the  urine,  of  the  same  colour. 
It  is  employed  medicinally  as  an  adstringent  and  cor- 
roborant. In  diarrhoeas  it  has  been  found  peculiarly 
efficacious,  and  has  the  recommendation  of  some  of  the 
first  medical  authorities;  also  in  the  latter  stages  of 
dysentery,  when  the  obstructing  causes  are  removed ; 
to  obviate  the  extreme  laxity  of  the  intestines  usually 
superinduced  by  the  repeated  dejections.  In  the  form 
of  a decoction  the  proportion  is  two  ounces  to  21b.  of 
fluid,  reduced  by  boiling  to  one.  A-n  extract  is  ordered 
in  the  pharmacopoeias^  The  dose  from  ten  to  forty 
grains.  The  colouring  principle  of  this  root  is  called 
hemctin.  On  the  watery  extract  of  logwood,  digest 
alkohol  for  a day,  filter  the  solution,  evaporate,  add  a 
little  water,  evaporate  gently  again,  and  then  leave  the 
liquid  at  rest.  Hematin  is  deposited  in  small  crystals, 
which,  after  washing  with  alkohol,  are  brilliant,  and  of 
a reddish-white  colour.  Their  taste  is  bitter,  acrid,  and 
slightly  astringent. 

Hematin  forms  an  orange-red  solution  with  boiling 
water,  becoming  yellow  as  it  cools,  but  recovering, 
with  increase  of  heat,  its  former  hue.  Excess  of 
alkali  converts  it  first  to  purple,  then  to  violet,  and, 
lastly,  to  brown  : in  which  state  the  hematin  seems  to 
be  decomposed.  Metallic  oxides  unite  with  hematin, 
forming  a blue-coloured  compound.  Gelatin  throws 
down  reddish  flocculi.  Peroxide  of  tin,  and  acid, 
merely  redden  it. 

HASMATO'XYLUM.  See  Hcematoxylon. 

HrEMATU'RIA.  (From  aipa,  blood,  and  ovpov, 
urine.)  The  voiding  of  blood  with  urine.  This  dis- 
ease is  sometimes  occasioned  by  falls,  blows,  bruises, 
or  some  violent  exertion,  such  as  hard  riding  and 
jumping ; but  it  more  usually  arises,  from  a small 
stone  lodged  either  in  the  kidney  or  ureter,  which  by 
its  size  or  irregularity  wounds  the  inner  surface  of  the 
part  it  comes  in  contact  with ; in  which  case  the 
blood  discharged  is  most  usually  somewhat  coagu- 
lated, and  the  urine  deposites  a sediment  of  a dark 
brown  colour,  resembling  the  grounds  of  coffee. 

A discharge  of  blood  by  urine,  when  proceeding 
from  the  kidney  or  ureter,  is  cpmmonlv  attended  with 
an  acute  pain  in  the  back,  and  some  difficulty  of  mak- 
ing water,  the  urine  which  comes  away  first,  being 
muddy  and  high  coloured,  but  towards  the  close  of  its 
flowing,  becoming  transparent  and  of  a natural  ap- 
pearance. When  the  blood  comes  immediately  from 
the  bladder,  it  is  usually  accompanied  with  a sense  of 
heat  and  pain  at  the  bottom  of  the  belly. 

The  voiding  of  bloody  urine  is  always  attended  with 
some  danzer,  particularly  when  mixed  with  purulent 
matter  When  it  arises  in  the  course  of  any  malig- 
403 


nant  disease,  it  shows  a highly  putrid  state  of  the 
blood,  and  always  indicates  a fatal  terminatiou. 

The  appearances  to  be  observed  on  dissection  will 
accord  with  those  usually  met  with  in  the  disease  which 
has  given  rise  to  the  complaint. 

When  the  disease  has  resulted  from  a mechanical 
injury  in  a plethoric  habit,  it  may  be  proper  to  take 
blood,  and  pursue  the  general  antiphlogistic  plan,  open- 
ing the  bowels  occasionally  with  castor  oil,  &c.  When 
owing  to  calculi,  which  cannot  be  removed,  we  must 
be  chiefly  content  with  palliative  measures,  giving  al 
kalies  or  acids  according  to  the  quality  of  the  urine ; 
likewise  mucilaginous  drinks  and  clysters ; and  opium, 
fomentations,  &c.  to  relieve  pain ; uva  ursi  also  has 
been  found  useful  under  these  circumstances;  but 
more  decidedly  where  the  haemorrhage  is  purely  pas- 
sive ; in  which  case  also  some  of  the  terebinthate 
remedies  may  be  cautiously  tried ; and  means  of 
strengthening  the  constitution  must  not  be  neglected. 

H^mo'dia.  (From  aiptnde w,  to  stupefy.)  A painful 
stupor  of  the  teeth,  caused  by  acrid  substances  touch- 
ing them. 

HrEMO'PTOE.  (From  aqua.  blood,  and  ir'Jvut, 
to  spit  up.)  The  spitting  of  blood.  See  Heemoplysis. 

HrEMO'PTYSIS.  (From  aipa,  blood,  and/or,  to 
spit.)  Haemoptoe.  A spitting  of  blood.  A genus  of 
disease  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the  class  Pyrexia:.,  and 
order  Heemoji-hagiw.  It  is  characterized  by  coughing 
up  florid  or  frothy  blood,  preceded  usually  by  heat  or 
pain  in  the  chest,  irritation  in  the  larynx,  and  a saltish 
taste  in  the  mouth.  There  are  five  species  of  this  dis- 
ease. 

1.  Haemoptysis  plcthorica,  from  fulness  of  the  vessels. 

2.  Haemoptysis  violenta  romsome  external  violence. 

3.  Heemoplysis  phthisica , from  ulcers  corroding  the 
small  vessels. 

4.  Haemoptysis  calculosa , from  calculous  matter  in 
the  lungs. 

5.  Haemoptysis  vicaria,  from  the  suppression  of 
some  customary  evacuation. 

It  is  readily  to  be  distinguished  from  baematemesis, 
as  in  this  last,  the  blood  is  usually  thrown  out  in  consi- 
derable quantities ; and  is,  moreover,  of  a darker  co- 
lour, more  grumous,  and  mixed  with  the  other  con- 
tents of  the  stomach ; whereas  blood  proceeding  from 
the  lungs  is  usually  in  small  quantity,  of  a florid  co- 
lour, and  mixed  with  a little  frothy  mucus  only. 

A spitting  of  blood  arises  most  usually  between  the 
ages  of  sixteen  and  twenty-five,  and  may  be  occasioned 
by  any  violent  exertion  either  in  running,  jumping, 
wrestling,  singing  loud,  or  blowing  wind-instruments ; 
as  likewise  by  wounds,  plethora,  weak  vessels,  hectic 
fever,  coughs,  irregular  living,  excessive  drinking,  or  a 
suppression  of  some  accustomed  discharge,  such  as  the 
menstrual  or  hoemorrhoidal.  It  may  likewise  be  occa- 
sioned by  breathing  air  which  is  too  much  rarefied  to 
be  able  properly  to  expand  the  lungs. 

Persons  in  whom  there  is  a faulty  proportion,  either 
in  the  vessels  of  the  lungs,  or  in  the  capacity  of  the 
chest,  being  distinguished  by  a narrow  thorax  and  pro- 
minent shoulders,  or  who  are  of  a delicate  make  and 
sanguine  temperament,  seem  iuuqh  predisposed  to  this 
haemorrhage  ; but  in  these,  the  complaint  is  often 
brought  on  by  the  concurrence  of  the  various  occa- 
sional and  exciting  causes  before  mentioned. 

A spitting  of  blood  is  not,  however,  always  to  be 
considered  as  a primary  disease.  It  is  often  only  a 
symptom,  and  in  some  disorders,  such  as  pleurisies, 
peripneumonies,  and  many  fevers,  often  arises,  and  is 
the  presage  of  a favourable  termination. 

Sometimes  it  is  preceded,  as  has  already  been  ob- 
served, by  a sense  of  weight  and  oppression  at  the 
chest,  a dry  tickling  cough,  and  some  slight  difficulty 
of  breathing.  Sometimes  it  is  ushered  in  with  shiver- 
ings,  coldness  at  the  extremities,  pains  in  the  back  and 
loins,  flatulency,  costiveness,  and  lassitude.  The  blood 
which  is  spit  up  is  generally  thin,  and  of  a florid  red 
colour ; but  sometimes  it  is  thick,  and  of  a dark  or 
blackish  cast ; nothing,  however,  can  be  inferred  from 
this  circumstance,  bufthat  the  blood  has  lain  a longer 
or  shorter  time  in  the  breast,  before  it  was  discharged. 

An  haemoptoe  is  not  attended  with  danger,  where  no 
symptoms  of  phthisis  pulmonalis  have  preceded  or 
accompanied  the  haemorrhage,  or  where  it  leaves  be- 
hind no  cough,  dyspnoea,  or  other  affection  of  the 
lungs  ; nor  is  it  dangerous  in  a strong  healthy  person, 
of  a sound  constitution  ; but  when  it  attacks  persons 


HiEM 


HiEM 

of  a weak  lax  fibre,  and  delicate  habit,  it  may  be  diffi- 
cult to  remove  it. 

It  seldom  takes  place  to  such  a degree  as  to  prove 
fatal  at  once ; but  when  it  does,  the  effusion  is  from 
some  large  vessel.  The  danger,  therefore,  will  be  in 
proportion  as  the  discharge  of  blood  comes  from  a 
large  vessel,  or  a small  one. 

When  the  disease  proves  fatal,  in  consequence  of 
the  rupture  of  some  large  vessels,  there  is  found,  on 
dissection,  a considerable  quantity  of  clotted  blood  in 
the  lungs,  and  there  is  usually  more  or  less  of  an  in- 
flammatory appearance  at  the  ruptured  part.  Where 
the  disease  terminates  in  pulmonary  consumption,  the 
same  morbid  appearances  are  to  be  met  with  as  de- 
scribed under  that  particular  head. 

In  this  haemorrhage,  which  is  mostly  of  the  active 
kind,  the  antiphlogistic  regimen  must  be  strictly  ob- 
served ; particularly  avoiding  heat,  muscular  exer- 
tion, and  agitation  of  the  mind ; and  restricting  the 
patient  to  a light,  cooling,  vegetable  diet.  Acidulated 
drink  will  be  useful  to  quench  the  thirst,  without  so 
much  liquid  being  taken.  Where  the  blood  is  dis- 
charged copiously,  but  no  great  quantity  has  been  lost 
already,  it  will  be  proper  to  attempt  to  check  it  by 
bleeding  freely,  if  the  habit  will  allow  : and  sometimes, 
where  there  is  pain  in  the  chest,  local  evacuations  and 
blisters  may  be  useful.  The  bowels  should  be  well 
cleared  with  some  cooling  saline  cathartic,  which  may 
be  given  in  the  infusion  of  roses.  Digitalis  is  also  a 
proper  remedy,  particularly  where  the  pulse  is  very 
quick,  from  its  sedative  influence  on  the  heart  and  ar- 
teries. Antimonials  in  nauseating  doses  have  some- 
times an  excellent  effect,  as  well  bv  checking  the  force 
of  the  circulation,  as  by  promoting  diaphoresis;  calo- 
mel also  might  be  added  with  advantage ; and  opium, 
or  other  narcotic,  to  relieve  pain  and  quiet  cough, 
which  may  perhaps  keep  up  the  bleeding.  Emetics 
have,  on  some  occasions,  been  successful ; but  they 
are  not  altogether  free  from  danger.  In  protracted 
cases,  internal  astringents  are  given,  as  alum,  kino,  & c. 
but  their  effects  are  very  precarious  : the  superacetate 
of  lead,  however,  is  perhaps  the  most  powerful  medi- 
cine, especially  combined  with  opium,  and  should 
always  be  resorted  to  in  alarming  or  obstinate  cases, 
though  as  it  is  liable  to  occasion  colic  and  paralysis, 
its  use  should  not  be  indiscriminate  ; but  it  acts  proba- 
bly rather  as  a sedative  than  astringent.  Sometimes 
the  application  of  cold  water  to  some  sensible  part  of 
the  body,  producing  a general  refrigeration,  will  check 
the  bleeding.  When  the  discharge  is  stopped,  great 
attention  to  regimen  is  still  required,  to  obviate  its  re- 
turn, with  occasional  evacuations:  the  exercise  of 
swinging,  riding  in  an  easy  carriage,  or  on  a gentle 
horse,  or  especially  sailing,  may  keep  up  a salutary 
determination  of  the  blood  to  other  parts : an  occa- 
sional blister  may  be  applied,  where  there  are  marks 
of  local  disease,  or  an  issue  or  seton  perhaps  answer 
better.  Should  haemoptysis  occasionally  exhibi  t rather 
the  passive  character,  evacuations  must  be  sparingly 
used,  and  tonic  medicines  will  be  proper,  with  a more 
nutritious  diet. 

HiEMORRHAGIA.  (From  aipa,  blood,  and  prjy- 
vvul , to  break  out.)  A haemorrhage,  or  flow  of  blood. 

IlASMORRHA'GIiE.  Haemorrhages,  or  fluxes  of 
blood.  The  name  of  an  order  in  the  class  Pyrexia:  of 
Cullen’s  Nosology  is  so  called.  It  is  characterized  by 
pyrexia  with  a discharge  of  blood,  without  any  exter- 
nal injury ; the  blood  on  venaesection  exhibiting  the 
buffy  coat.  The  order  Hamorrhagia  contains  the 
following  generaof  diseases,  viz.epistaxis,  haemoptysis, 
(of  which  phthisis  is  represented  as  a sequel,)  hiemor- 
rhois,  and  menorrhagia. 

II-dEMORRHOI'DAL.  ( Hamorrhoidalis ; the  name 
of  the  vessels  which  are  the  seat  of  the  haemorrhoids  or 
piles.)  1.  Of  or  belonging  to  the  haemorrhoidal  vessels. 

2.  The  trivial  name  of  some  plants  which  were  sup- 
posed to  be  efficacious  against  piles ; as  Carduus  ha- 
morrhoidales,  & c. 

Hemorrhoidal  arteries.  Arteria  hamorrhoi- 
dales.  The  arteries  of  the  rectum  are  so  called:  they 
are  sometimes  two,  and  at  other  times  three  in  number. 
1.  The  upper  haemorrhoidal  artery,  which  is  the  great 
branch  of  the  lower  mesenteric  continued  into  the 
pelvis  2 The  middle  haemorrhoidal,  which  some- 
times comes  off  from  the  hypogastric  artery,  and  very 
often  from  the  pudical  artery.  It  is  sometimes  want- 
ing. 3 The  lower  or  external  haemorrhoidal  is  almost 


always  a branch  of  the  pudical  artery,  or  that  artery 
which  goes  to  the  penis. 

Hemorrhoidal  veins.  Vena  Haemorrhoid  ales. 
These  are  two.  l.  The  external,  which  evacuates  it- 
self into  the  vena  iliaca  interna. 

2.  The  internal,  which  conveys  its  blood  into  the 
vena  port®. 

HASMO'RRHOIS.  (From  aipa,  blood,  and  pea,  to 
flow.)  Aimorrhois.  The  piles.  A genus  of  disease 
in  the  class  pyrexia , and  order  Hamorrhagia  of  Cul- 
len. They  are  certain  excrescences  or  tumours  arising 
about  the  verge  of  the  anus,  or  the  inferior  part  of  the 
intestinum  rectum ; when  they  discharge  blood,  parti- 
cularly upon  the  patient’s  going  to  stool,  the  disease  is 
known  by  the  name  of  bleeding  piles;  but  when  there 
is  no  discharge,  it  is  called  blind  piles.  The  rectum, 
as  well  as  the  colon,  is  composed  of  several  membranes 
connected  to  each  other  by  an  intervening  cellular  sub- 
stance ; and  as  the  muscular  fibres  of  this  intestine 
always  tend,  by  their  contraction,  to  lessen  its  cavity, 
the  internal  membrane,  which  is  very  lax,  forms  itself 
into  several  rugae,  or  folds.  In  this  construction  nature 
respects  the  use  of  the  part,  which  occasionally  gives 
passage  to,  or  allows  the  retention  of,  the  excrements, 
the  hardness  and  bulk  of  which  might  produce  con- 
siderable lacerations,  if  this  intestine  were  not  capable 
of  dilatation.  The  arteries  and  veins  subservient  to 
this  part  are  called  haemorrhoidal,  and  the  blood  that 
returns  from  hence  is  carried  to  the  meseraic  veins. 
The  intestinum  rectum  is  particularly  subject  to  the 
haemorrhoids,  from  its  situation,  structure,  and  use; 
for  while  the  course  of  the  blood  is  assisted  in  almost 
all  the  other  veins  of  the  body,  by  the  distention  of 
the  adjacent  muscles,  and  the  pressure  of  the  neigh- 
bouring parts,  the  blood  in  the  haemorrhoidal  veins, 
which  is  to  ascend  against  the  natural  tendency  of  its 
own  weight,  is  not  only  destitute  of  these  assistances, 
but  is  impeded  in  its  passage : for,  first,  the  large  ex- 
crements which  lodge  in  this  intestine  dilate  its  sides, 
and  the  different  resistances  which  they  form  there 
are  so  many  impediments  obstructing  the  return  of  the 
blood  ; not  in  the  large  veins,  for  they  are  placed  along 
the  external  surface  of  the  intestine,  but  in  all  the  ca- 
pillaries which  enter  into  its  composition.  Secondly, 
as  often  as  these  large  excrements,  protruded  by  others, 
approached  near  the  anus,  their  successive  pressure 
upon  the  internal  coats  of  the  intestine,  which  they 
dilate,  drives  back  the  blood  into  the  veins,  and  for  so 
long  suspends  its  course  ; the  necessary  consequence 
of  which  is,  a distention  of  the  veins  in  proportion  to 
the  quantity  of  blood  that  fills  them.  Thirdly,  in  every 
effort  we  make,  either  in  going  to  stool,  or  upon  any 
other  occasion,  the  contraction  of  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles, and  the  diaphragm  pressing  the  contents  of  the 
abdomen  downwards,  and  these  pressing  upon  the 
parts  contained  in  the  pelvis,  another  obstruction  is 
thereby  opposed,  to  the  return  of  the  blood,  not  only 
in  the  large  veins,  but  also  in  the  capillaries,  which, 
being  of  too  weak  a texture  to  resist  the  impulse  of 
the  blood  that  always  tends  to  dilate  them,  may  hereby 
become  varicose. 

The  dilatation  of  all  these  vessels  is  the  primary 
cause  of  the  haemorrhoids ; for  the  internal  coat  of 
the  intestine,  and  the  cellular  membrane  which  con- 
nects that  to  the  muscular  coat,  are  enlarged  in  propor- 
tion to  the  distention  of  the  vessels  of  which  they  are 
composed.  This  distention,  not  being  equal  in  every 
part,  .produces  separate  tumours  in  the  gut,  or  at  the 
verge  of  the  anus,  which  increases  according  as  the 
venal  blood  is  obstructed  in  them,  or  circulates  there 
more  slowly. 

Whatever,  then,  is  capable  of  retarding  the  course 
of  the  blood  in  the  haemorrhoidal  veins,  may  occasion 
this  disease.  Thus,  persons  that  are  generally  costive, 
who  are  accustomed  to  sit  long  at  stool,  and  strain 
hard;  pregnant  women,  or  such  as  have  had  difficult 
labours:  and  likewise  persons  who  have  an  obstruc- 
tion in  their  liver,  are  for  the  most  part  afliictqd  with 
the  piles;  yet  every  one  has  not  the  hamiorrhoids,  the 
different  causes  which  are  mentioned  above  being  not 
common  to  all,  or  at  least  not  having  in  all  the  same 
effects.  When  the  haemorrhoids  are  once  formed, 
they  seldom  disappear  entirely,  and  we  may  judge  of 
those  within  the  rectum  by  those  which,  being  at  the 
verge  of  the  anus,  are  plainly  to  be  seen.  A small 
pile,  that  has  been  painful  for  some  days,  may  cease 
to  be  so,  and  dry  up  ; but  the  skin  does  not  afterward 

40b 


HiEM 


HAL 


retain  its  former  firmness,  being  more  lax  and  wrin- 
kled, like  the  empty  skin  of  a grape.  If  this  external 
pile  swells  and  sinks  again  several  times,  we  may  per- 
ceive, after  each  return,  the  remains  of  each  pile, 
though  shrivelled  and  decayed,  yet  still  left  larger  than 
before.  The  case  is  the  same  with  those  that  are  situ- 
ated within  the  rectum;  they  may  happen  indeed 
never  to  return  again,  if  the  cause  that  produced  them 
is  removed ; but  it  is  probable  that  the  excrements  in 
passing  out  occasion  a return  of  the  swelling,  to  which 
the  external  ones  are  less  liable : for  the  internal  piles 
make  a sort  of  knots  or  tumours  in  the  intestine,  which 
straightening  the  passage,  the  excrements  in  passing 
out,  occasion  irritations  there  that  are  more  or  less 
painful  in  proportion  to  the  efforts  which  the  person 
makes  in  going  to  stool ; and  it  is  thus  these  tumours 
become  gradually  larger.  The  haemorrhoids  are  sub- 
ject to  many  variations ; they  may  become  inflamed 
from  the  above  irritations  to  which  they  are  exposed, 
and  this  inflammation  cannot  always  be  removed  by 
art.  In  some,  the  inflammation  terminates  in  an  ab- 
scess, which  arises  in  the  middle  of  the  tumour,  and 
degenerates  into  a fistula.  These  piles  are  very  painful 
till  the  abscess  is  formed.  In  others,  the  inflammation 
terminates  by  induration  of  the  haemorrhoid,  which  re- 
mains in  a manner  scirrhous.  These  never  lessen,  but 
often  grow  larger.  Thisscirrhus  sometimes  ulcerates, 
and  continually  discharges  a sanies,  which  the  patient 
perceives  by  stains  on  his  shirt,  and  by  its  occasioning 
a very  troublesome  itching  about  the  verge  of  the  anus. 
These  kinds  of  haemorrhoids  sometimes  turn  cancer- 
ous. There  are  some  haemorrhoids,  and  those  of  dif- 
ferent sizes,  which  are  covered  with  so  fine  a skin  as 
frequently  to  admit  blood  to  pass  through.  This  fine 
skin  is  only  the  internal  coat  of  the  rectum,  greatly  at- 
tenuated by  the  varicose  distention  of  its  vessels.  The 
haemorrhage  may  proceed  from  two  causes,  namely, 
either  from  an  excoriation  produced  by  the  hardness 
of  the  excrements,  or  from  the  rupture  of  the  tumefied 
vessels,  which  break  by  their  too  great  distention.  In 
some  of  these,  the  patient  voids  blood  almost  every 
time  he  goes  to  stool ; in  others  not  so  constantly.  We 
sometimes  meet  with  men  who  have  a periodical  bleed- 
ing by  the  piles,  not  unlike  the  menses  in  women ; and 
as  this  evacuation,  if  moderate,  does  not  weaken  the 
constitution,  we  may  infer  that  it  supplies  some  other 
evacuation  which  nature  either  ceases  to  carry  on,  or 
does  not  furnish  in  due  quantity;  and  hence  also  we 
may  explain  why  the  suppression  of  this  discharge,  to 
which  nature  had  been  accustomed,  is  frequently  at- 
tended with  dangerous  diseases.  The  haemorrhoids 
are  sometimes  distended  to  that  degree  as  to  fill  the 
rectum,  so  that  if  the  excrements  are  at  all  hard  they 
cannot  pass.  In  this  case  the  excrements  force  the  hae- 
morrhoids out  of  the  anus  to  procure  a free  passage, 
consequently  the  internal  coat  of  the  rectum,  to  which 
they  are  connected,  yields  to  extension,  and  upon  ex- 
amining these  patients  immediately  after  having  been 
at  stool,  a part  of  the  internal  coat  of  that  gut  is  per- 
ceived. A difficulty  will  occur  in  the  return  of  these, 
in  proportion  to  their  size,  and  as  the  verge  of  the  anus 
is  more  or  less  contracted.  If  the  bleeding  piles  come 
out  in  the  same  manner  upon  going  to  stool,  it  is  then 
they  void  most  blood,  because  the  verge  of  the  anus 
forms  a kind  of  ligature  above  them.  The  treatment 
of  this  complaint  will  vary  much,  according  to  circum- 
stances. When  the  loss  of  blood  is  considerable,  we 
should  endeavour  to  stop  it  by  applying  cold  water,  or 
ice;  or  some  astringent,  as  a solution  of  alum,  or  sul- 
phate of  zinc:  but  a more  certain  way  is  making  con- 
tinued pressure  on  the  part.  At  the  same  time  inter- 
nal astringents  may  be  given ; joined  with  opium,  if 
much  pain  or  irritation  attend.  Care  must  be  taken, 
however,  to  avoid  constipation : and  in  all  cases  pa- 
tients find  benefit  from  the  steady  use  of  some  mild 
cathartic,  procuring  regular  loose  motions.  Sulphur  is 
mostly  resorted  to  for  this  purpose ; and  especially  in 
combination  with  supertartrate  of  potassa,  tamarinds, 
&c.  in  the  form  of  electuary,  usually  answers  very 
well ; likewise  castor  oil  is  an  excellent  remedy  in  these 
cases.  Should  the  parts  be  much  inflamed,  leeches 
may  be  applied  near  the  anus,  and  cold  saturnine  lotions 
used ; sometimes,  however,  fomenting  with  the  decoc- 
tion of  poppy  will  give  more  relief ; where  symptom- 
atic fever  attends,  the  antiphlogistic  regimen  must  be 
strictly  observed,  and  besides  clearing  the  bowels,  an- 
Ximonials  may  be  given  to  promote  diaphoresis.  Where 
410 


the  tumours  are  consideranle  and  flaccid,  without  in- 
flammation, powerful  astringent  or  even  stimulant 
applications  will  be  proper,  together  with  similar  in- 
ternal medicines ; and  the  part  should  be  supported  by 
a compress  kept  on  by  a proper  bandage.  An  oint- 
ment of  galls  is  often  very  useful,  with  opium,  to  re- 
lieve pain  ; and  some  of  the  liquor  plumbi  subacetatis 
may  be  farther  added,  if  there  be  a tendency  to  inflam- 
mation. In  these  cases  of  relaxed  piles  of  some  stand- 
ing, the  copaiba  frequently  does  much  good,  both  ap- 
plied locally  and  taken  internally,  usually  keeping  the 
bowels  regular;  also  the  celebrated  Ward’s  paste,  a 
medicine  of  which  the  active  ingredient  is  black  pep- 
per. Sometimes  where  a large  tumour  has  been  form- 
ed by  extravasated  blood,  subsequently  become  organ- 
ized, permanent  relief  can  only  be  obtained  by  extir- 
pating this. 

HASMOSTA'SIA.  (From  aipa , blood,  and  to 
stand.)  A stagnation  of  blood. 

HiEMOSTA'TICA.  (From  atpa,  blood,  and  g-nw, 
to  stop.)  Medicines  which  stop  haemorrhages.  See 

Styptics. 

HAEN,  Anthony  de,  was  born  in  Leyden,  in 
1704,  and  became  one  of  the  distinguished  pupiisofthe 
celebrated  Boerhaave.  After  graduating  at  his  native 
place,  he  settled  at  the  Hague,  vvhere  he  practised  with 
considerable  reputation  for  nearly  20  years.  Baron 
Van  Swieten,  being  acquainted  with  the  extent  of  his 
talents,  invited  him  to  Vienna,  to  assist  in  the  plan  of 
reform,  which  the  empress  had  consented  to  support  in 
the  medical  faculty  of  that  capital.  De  Haen  accord- 
ingly repaired  thither  in  1754,  was  made  professor  of 
the  practice  of  medicine,  and  fully  answered  the  ex- 
pectation which  had  been  formed  of  him.  He  under- 
took a system  of  clinical  education,  as  the  best  method 
of  forming  good  physicians:  the  result  of  this  was  the 
collection  of  a great  number  of  valuable  observations, 
which  were  published  in  successive  volumes  of  a 
work,  entitled,  “Ratio  Medendi  in  Nosocomio  Practi 
co,”  amounting  ultimately  to  16.  He  left  also  several 
other  works,  as  On  the  Division  of  Fevers,  &c.,  and 
died  at  the  age  of  72.  He  was  generally  an  enemy  to 
new  opinions  and  innovations  in  practice,  which  led 
him  into  several  controversies;  particularly  against 
variolous  inoculation,  and  the  use  of  poisonous  plants 
in  medicine : but  he  exhibited  much  learning  and  prac- 
tical knowledge. 

Hagiospe'rmum.  (From  aytog,  holy,  and  oneppa, 
seed:  so  called  from  its  reputed  virtues. j Wormseed. 

Hagio'xylum.  (From  ayios,  holy,  and  S-uAov,  wood : 
so  named  because  of  its  medical  virtues.)  Guaiacum. 

HAIR.  See  Capillus. 

[Hair  salt.  The  Haar  salz,  (or  hair  salt,)  of 
Werner,  formerly  supposed  to  be  a variety  of  alum,  is, 
according  to  Klaproth,  a mixture  of  the  sulphates  of 
magnesia  and  iron. — Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

Hala'tium.  (From  aAj,  salt.)  A clyster,  composed 
chiefly  of  salt. 

Halberd-shaped  Leaf.  See  Leaf. 

[Halb-opal.  This  is  the  Semi-opal  of  Jameson,  and 
Cleaveland.  The  other  synonymes  are  La  dcmi-opule 
ofBrochant;  Silex  risinite  of  Brogniart ; Quartz  re- 
sinite  commune  of  Haiiy : all  these  being  the  same  as 
the  Halb-opal  of  Werner.  “This  variety  is  a little 
harder  than  the  precious  opal,  and  is  easily  broken. 
Its  fracture  is  imperfectly  conchoidal  with  large  cavi- 
ties, or  nearly  even,  usually  more  or  less  glistening 
and  a little  resinous,  but  sometimes  nearly  dull.  The 
edges  of  the  conchoidal  fracture,  and  those  of  the 
fragments,  are  usually  very  sharp.  It  is  more  or  less 
translucent,  sometimes  only  in  a slight  degree  at  the 
edges,  and  some  specimens  are  semitransparent.” — 
Cleav.  Min.  A.] 

IIalche'mia.  (From  aAj.  salt,  and  xea»,  to  pour 
out.)  The  art  of  fusing  salts 

Halel^e'um.  (From  aXf,  salt,  and  tXaiov.  oil.)  A 
medicine  composed  of  salt  and  oil. 

Halica'cabum.  (From  aAj,  the  sea,  and  Aaxafof, 
night-shade:  so  called  because  it  grows  upon  the 
banks  of  the  sea.)  See  Physalis  alkekengi. 

Ha'limus.  (From  aXipos,  belonging  to  the  sea.) 
The  A triplex  halimus  of  Linnaeus,  or  sca-purslain, 
said  to  be  antispasmodic. 

Halini'trum.  (From  aAj,  the  sea,  and  vi/pov. 
niire.)  Nitre,  or  rather  rock  salt. 

IIA'LITUS.  (Frpm  halito,  to  breathe  out.)  A 
vapour. 


HAM 


HALLER,  Albert,  was  born  at  Berne,  where  his 
father  was  an  advocate,  in  1709.  He  displayed,  at  a 
very  early  age,  extraordinary  rmirks  of  industry  and 
talents.  He  was  intended  for  the  church,  but  having 
lost  his  father  when  only  thirteen,  he  soon  after  deter- 
mined upon  the  medical  profession.  Having  studied 
a short  time  at  Tubingen,  he  was  attracted  to  Leyden 
by  the  reputation  of  Boerhaave,  to  whom  lie  has  ex- 
pressed his  obligations  in  the  most  affectionate  terms ; 
but  he  took  his  degree  at  the  former  place,  when  about 
seventeen  years  of  age.  He  soon  after  visited  Eng- 
land and  France ; then  returning  to  his  native  country, 
first  acquired  a taste  for  botany,  which  he  pursued 
with  great  zeal,  making  frequent  excursions  to  the 
neighbouring  mountains.  He  also  composed  a “ Poem 
on  the  Alps,”  and  other  pieces,  which  were  received 
with  much  applause.  Having  settled  in  his  native 
city,  about  1730,  he  began  to  give  lectures  on  anatomy, 
but  with  indifferent  success;  and  some  detached 
pieces  on  anatomy  and  botany  having  gained  him  con- 
siderable reputation  abroad,  he  was  invited  by  George 
H.,  in  1736,  to  become  professor  in  the  university, 
which  he  had  recently  founded  at  Gottingen.  He  ac- 
cepted this  advantageous  offer,  and,  though  his  arrival 
was  rendered  melancholy  by  the  loss  of  a beloved  wife, 
from  some  accident  which  occurred  in  the  journey,  he 
commenced  at  once  the  duties  of  his  office  with  great 
zeal ; he  encouraged  the  most  industrious  of  his  pupils 
to  institute  an  experimental  investigation  on  some  part 
of  the  animal  economy,  affording  them  his  assistance 
therein.  He  was  likewise  himself  indefatigable  in 
similar  researches^during  the  seventeen  years  which 
he  spent  there,  having  in  view  a grand  reform  in  phy- 
siology, which  his  writings  ultimately  effected,  dissi- 
pating the  metaphysical  and  chemical  jargon,  whereby 
it  was  before  obscured.  He  procured  the  establish- 
ment of  a botanic  garden,  an  anatomical  theatre,  a 
school  for  surgery  and  for  midwifery,  with  a lying-in 
hospital,  and  other  useful  institutions  at  that  univer- 
sity. He  received  also  many  honourable  testimonies 
of  his  fame,  being  chosen  a member  of  the  Royal  So- 
cieties of  Stockholm  and  London,  made  physician  and 
counsellor  to  George  II.,  and  the  emperor  conferred  on 
him  the  title  of  Baron ; which,  however,  he  declined, 
as  it  would  not  have  been  esteemed  in  his  native 
country.  To  this  he  returned  in  1753,  and  during  the 
remainder  of  his  life  discharged  various  important 
public  offices  there.  He  ultimately  received  every 
testimony  of  the  general  estimation  in  which  he  was 
held ; the  learned  societies  of  Europe,  as  well  as  seve- 
ral sovereigns,  vying  with  each  other  in  conferring 
honours  upon  him.  His  constitution  was  delicate,  and 
impatience  of  pain,  or  interruption  to  his  studies,  led 
him  to  use  violent  remedies  when  ill ; however,  by 
temperance  and  activity,  he  reached  an  advanced  age, 
having  died  towards  the  end  of  1777.  He  was  one  of 
the  most  universally  informed  men  in  modern  times. 
He  spoke  with  equal  facility  the  German,  French,  and 
Latin  languages ; and  read  all  the  other  tongues  of  Eu- 
rope, except  the  Sclavonic;  and  there  was  scarcely 
any  book  of  reputation,  with  which  he  was  not  ac- 
quainted. His  own  works  were  extremely  numerous, 
on  anatomy,  physiology,  pathology,  surgery,  botany, 
&c.,  besides  his  poems  and  political  and  religious  pub- 
lications. The  principal  are,  1.  His  large  work  on  the 
Botany  of  Switzerland,  in  3 vols.  folio,  with  many 
plates ; 2.  Commentaries  on  Boerhaave’s  Lectures,  7 
vols.  octavo;  3.  Elements  of  Physiology,  8 vols. 
quarto,  a work  of  the  greatest  merit ; 4.  His  “ Biblio- 
theca,” or  Chronological  Histories  of  Authors,  with 
brief  Analyses;  2 vols.  quarto  on  Botany,  two  on  Sur- 
gery, two  on  Anatomy,  and  four  on  the  Practice  of 
Medicine,  displaying  an  immense  body  of  research. 

HALLUCINA'TIO.  (From  hallucinor,  to  err.) 
An  erroneous  imagination. 

Halmyro'des.  (From  aXpvpoj,  salted.)  A term 
applied  to  the  humours;  it  means  acrimonious.  It  is 
also  applied  to  fevers  which  communicate  such  an 
itching  sensation  as  is  perceived  from  handling  salt 
substances. 

HA'LO.  (From  aXoj,  an  area  or  circle.)  The  red 
circle  surrounding  the  nipple,  which  becomes  some- 
what brown  in  old  people,  and  is  beset  with  many 
sebaceous  glands. 

Hama'loama.  See  Amalgam. 

HAMOSUS.  Hooked.  Applied  to  the  bristly  pu- 
bescence of  seeds  and  plants ; as  the  pericarpe  of  the 


HAR 

Arctium  lappa;  the  seeds  of  Daucus  muricatus , and 
Alisma  cordifolia. 

HAMPSTEAD.  A village  near  to  London,  where 
there  is  an  excellent  chalybeate  water,  not  inferior  to 
that  of  Tunbridge-wells  in  any  respect,  except  being 
nearer  to  the  metropolis. 

HA'MULUS.  (Diminutive  of  hamus,  a hook.)  A 
term  in  anatomy,  applied  to  any  hook-like  process,  as 
the  hamulus  of  the  pterygoid  process  of  the  sphenoid 
bone. 

HA'MUS.  A hook.  A species  of  pubescence  of 
plants  formed  of  bristles,  bent  at  their  point  into  a 
hook ; as  in  Rumex  tuberosus,  Caucalis  daucoides , and 
Galium  aparine , &.C. 

HAND.  Manus.  The  hand  is  composed  of  the 
rtirpus  or  wrist,  metacarpus,  and  fingers.  The  arte- 
ries of  the  hand  are  the  palmary  arch,  and  the  digital 
arteries.  The  veins  are  the  digital,  the  cephalic  of  the 
thumb,  and  the  salvatella.  The  nerves  are  the  cuta- 
neous, externus,  and  internus. 

Harde'sia.  See  Lapis  Hibemicus. 

HARE.  See  Lepus  timidus. 

HARE-LIP.  Lagocheilus ; Lagostoma;  Labium 
leporinum.  A fissure  or  longitudinal  division  of  one 
or  both  lips.  Children  are  frequently  born  with  this 
kind  of  malformation,  particularly  of  the  upper  lip. 
Sometimes  the  portions  of  the  lip  which  ought  be  united, 
have  a considerable  space  between  them ; in  other 
instances  they  are  not  much  apart.  The  cleft  is  occa- 
sionally double,  there  being  a little  lobe,  or  small  por- 
tion of  the  lip,  situated  between  the  two  fissures. 
Every  species  of  the  deformity  has  the  same  appella- 
tion of  hare-lip,  in  consequence  of  the  imagined  re- 
semblance which  the  part  has.  to  the  upper  lip  of  a 
hare. 

The  fissure  commonly  affects  only  the  lip  itself.  In 
many  cases,  however,  it  extends  along  the  bones  of 
the  palate,  even  as  far  as  the  uvula.  Sometimes  these 
bones  are  totally  wanting : sometimes  they  are  only 
divided  by  a fissure. 

Such  a malformation  is  always  peculiarly  afflicting. 
In  its  least  degree,  it  constantly  occasions  consider- 
able deformity ; and  when  it  is  more  marked,  it  fre- 
quently hinders  infants  from  sucking,  and  makes  it 
indispensable  to  nourish  them  by  other  means.  When 
the  lower  lip  alone  is  affected,  which  is  more  rarely 
the  case,  the  child  can  neither  retain  its  saliva,  nor 
learn  to  speak,  except  with  the  greatest  impediment. 
But  when  the  fissure  pervades  the  palate,  the  patient 
not  only  never  articulates  perfectly,  but  cannot  masti 
cate  nor  swallow,  except  with  great  difficulty,  on  ac- 
count of  the  food  readily  getting  up  into  the  nose. 

HARMO'NIA.  (From  aoa>,  to  fit  together.)  Har- 
mony. A species  of  synarthrosis,  or  immoveable  con- 
nexion of  bones,  in  which  bones  are  connected  together 
by  means  of  rough  margins,  not  dentiform : in  this 
manner  most  of  the  bones  of  the  face  are  connected 
together. 

HARMOTOME.  See  Gross- stone. 

HARRIS,  Walter,  was  born  at  Gloucester  about 
the  year  1651.  He  took  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  phy- 
sic at  Oxford,  but,  having  embraced  the  Roman  Ca- 
tholic religion,  he  was  made  doctor  at  some  French 
university.  He  settled  in  London  in  1676,  and  two 
years  after,  to  evade  the  order  that  all  Catholics  should 
quit  the  metropolis,  he  publicly  adopted  the  Protestant 
Faith.  His  practice  rapidly  augmented,  and  on  the 
accession  of  William  III.  he  was  appointed  his  physi- 
cian in  ordinary.  He  died  in  1725.  His  principal 
work,  “ De  Morbis  Acutis  Infantum,”  is  said  to  have 
been  published  at  the  suggestion  of  the  celebrated  Sy- 
denham : it  passed  through  several  editions.  He  left 
also  a Treatise  on  the  Plague,  and  a collection  of  me- 
dical and  surgical  papers,  which  had  been  read  before 
the  College  of  Physicians. 

HARROGATE.  The  villages  of  High  and  Low 
Harrogate  are  situate  in  the  centre  of  the  county  of 
York,  adjoining  the  town  of  Knaresborough.  The 
whole  of  Harrogate,  in  particular,  has  long  enjoyed 
considerable  reputation,  by  possessing  two  kinds  of 
very  valuable  springs:  and,  some  years  ago,  the  cha- 
lybeate was  the  only  one  that  was  used  internally, 
while  the  sulphureous  water  was  confined  to  external 
use.  At  present,  however,  the  latter  is  employed 
largely  as  an  internal  medicine. 

The  sulphureous  springs  of  Harrogate  are  four  in 
number,  of  the  same  quality,  though  different  in  the 


HAR 


HEA 


degree  of  their  powers.  This  water,  when  first  taken 
up,  appears  perfectly  clear  and  transparent,  and  sends 
forth  a few  air  bubbles,  but  not  in  any  quantity.  It 
possesses  a very  strong  sulphureous  and  fcetid  smell, 
precisely  like  that  of  a damp  rusty  gun  barrel,  or  bilge- 
water.  To  the  taste  it  is  bitter,  nauseous,  and  strongly 
saline,  which  is  soon  borne  without  any  disgust.  In  a 
few  hours  of  exposure  this  water  loses  its  transparen- 
cy, and  becomes  somewhat  pearly,  and  rather  greenish 
to  the  eye ; its  sulphureous  smell  abates,  and  at  last 
the  sulphur  is  deposited  in  the  form  of  a thin  film,  on 
the  bottom  and  sides  of  the  vessel  in  which  it  is  kept. 
The  volatile  productions  of  this  water  show  carbonic 
acid,  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  and  azotic  gas. 

The  sensible  effects  which  this  water  excites,  are 
often  a headache  and  giddiness  on  being  first  drunk, 
followed  by  a purgative  operation,  which  is  speedy  and 
mild,  without  any  attendant  gripes : and  this  is  the 
only  apparent  effect  the  exhibition  of  this  water  dis- 
plays. 

The  diseases  in  which  this  water  is  used  are  nume- 
rous, particularly  of  the  alimentary  canal,  and  irregu- 
larity of  the  bilious  secretions.  Under  this  water  the 
health,  appetite,  and  spirits  improve;  and,  from  its 
opening  effects,  it  cannot  fail  to  be  useful  in  the  costive 
habit  of  hypochondriasis.  But  the  highest  recom- 
mendation of  this  water  has  been  in  cutaneous  dis- 
eases, and  for  this  purpose  it  is  universally  employed, 
both  as  an  internal  medicine,  and  an  external  applica- 
tion : in  this  united  form,  it  is  of  particular  service  in 
the  most  obstinate  and  complicated  forms  of  cutaneous 
affections ; nor  is  it  less  so  in  states  and  symptoms 
supposed  connected  with  worms,  especially  with  the 
round  worm  and  ascarides,  when  taken  in  such  a dose 
as  to  prove  a brisk  purgative  ; and  in  the  latter  case 
also,  when  used  as  a clyster,  the  ascarides  being 
chiefly  confined  to  the  rectum,  and,  therefore,  within 
the  reach  of  this  form  of  medicine.  From  the  union 
of  the  sulphureous  and  saline  ingredients,  the  benefit 
of  its  use  has  been  long  established  in  haemorrhoidal 
affections. 

A course  of  Harrogate  waters  should  be  conducted 
so  as  to  produce  sensible  effects  on  the  bowels ; half  a 
pint  taken  in  the  morning,  and  repeated  three  or  four 
times,  will  produce  it,  and  its  nauseating  taste  may  be 
corrected  by  taking  a dry  biscuit,  or  a bit  of  coarse 
bread  after  it.  The  course  must  be  continued,  in  ob- 
stinate cases,  a period  of  some  months,  before  a cure 
can  be  expected. 

H ARTFELL.  The  name  of  a place  near  Moffat,  in 
Scotland.  It  has  a mineral  water  which  contains  iron 
dissolved  by  the  sulphuric  acid,  and  is  much  celebrated 
in  scrofulous  affections,  and  cutaneous  diseases.  It 
is  used  no  less  as  an  external  application,  than  drank 
internally.  The  effects  of  this  water,  at  first,  are  some 
degree  of  drowsiness,  vertigo,  and  pain  in  the  head, 
which  soon  go  off,  and  this  may  be  hastened  by  a 
slight  purge.  It  produces  generally  a flow  of  urine, 
and  an  increase  of  appetite.  It  has  acquired  much  re- 
putation also  in  old  and  languid  ulcers,  where  the  tex- 
ture of  the  diseased  part  is  very  lax,  anil  the  discharge 
profuse  and  ill  conditioned. 

The  dose  of  this  water  is  more  limited  than  that  of 
most  of  the  mineral  springs  which  are  used  medicinally. 
It  is  of  importance  in  all  caSes,  and  especially  in  deli- 
cate and  irritable  habits,  to  begin  with  a very  small 
quantity,  for  an  over-dose  is  apt  to  be  very  soon  reject- 
ed by  the  stomach,  or  to  occasion  griping  and  dis- 
turbance in  the  intestinal  canal ; and  it  is  never  as  a 
direct  purgative  that  this  water  is  intended  to  be  em- 
ployed. Few  patients  will  bear  more  that  an  English 
pint  in  the  course  of  the  day ; but  this  quantity  may 
be  long  continued.  It  is  often  advisable  to  warm  the 
water  for  delicate  stomachs,  and  this  may  be  done 
without  occasioning  any  material  change  in  its  pro- 
perties. 

HARTLEY,  David,  was  born  in  1705,  son  of  a 
clergyman  in  Yorkshire.  He  studied  at  Cambridge, 
and  was  intended  for  the  church,  but  scruples  about 
subscribing  to  the  39  Articles  led  him  to  change  to  the 
medical  profession;  for  which  his  talents  and  benevo- 
lent disposition  well  qualified  him.  After  practising  in 
different  parts  of  the  country,  he  settled  for  some  time 
in  London,  but  finally  went  to  Bath,  where  he  died  in 
1757.  He  published  some  tracts  concerning  the  stone, 
especially  in  commendation  of  Mrs.  Stephens’s  medi- 
cine, and  appears  to  have  been  chiefly  instrumental  in 


procuring  her  a reward  from  Parliament ; yet.  he  ia 
said  to  have  died  of  the  disease  after  taking  about  two 
hundred  pounds  of  ^oap,  the  principal  ingredient  in 
that  nostrum.  , Some  other  papers  were  also  written 
by  him  ; but  the  principal  work,  upon  which  his  fame 
securely  rests,  is  a metaphysical  treatise,  entitled  “ Ob- 
servations on  Man,  his  Frame,  his  Duty,  and  his 
Expectations.”  The  doctrine  of  vibration,  indeed,  on 
which  he  explained  sensation,  is  merely  gratuitous  ; 
but  his  Disquisitions  on  the  Power  of  Association,  and 
other  mental  Phenomena,  evince  great  subtlety  and 
accuracy  of  research. 

HARTSHORN.  See  Cornu. 

Hartshorn  shavings.  See  Cornu. 

HART’S-TONGUE.  See  Asplenium  scholopen 
drium. 

HART- WORT.  See  Laserpitium  siler. 

Hart-wort  of  Marseilles.  See  Seseli  tortuosum. 

HARVEY, William,  the  illustrious  discoverer  of  the 
circulation  of  the  blood,  was  bom  at  Folkstone,  in 
Kent,  in  1578.  After  studying  four  years  at  Cambridge, 
he  went  abroad  at  the  age  of  19,  visited  France  and 
Germany,  and  then  fixed  himself  at  Padua,  which  was 
the  most  celebrated  medical  school  in  Europe,  where 
he  was  created  Doctor  in  1602.  On  returning  to  Eng- 
land he  repeated  his  graduation  at  Cambridge,  and 
settled  in  London : he  became  a Fellow  of  the  College 
of  Physicians  in  1603,  and  soon  after  physician  to  St. 
Bartholomew’s  hospital.  In  1615  he  was  appointed  Lec- 
turer on  Anatomy  and  Surgery  to  the  College,  which 
was  probably  the  more  immediate  cause  of  the  publi- 
cation of  his  grand  discovery.  He  appears  to  have 
withheld  his  opinions  from  the  world,  until  reiterated 
experiment  had  confirmed  them,  and  enabled  him  to 
prove  the  whole  in  detail,  with  every  evidence  of 
which  the  subject  will  admit.  The  promulgation  of 
this  important  doctrine  brought  on  him  the  most  unjust 
opposition,  some  condemning  it  as  an  innovation, 
others  pretending  that  it  was  known  before  ; and  he 
complained  that  his  practice  materially  declined  after- 
ward : however,  he  had  the  satisfaction  of  living  to 
see  the  truth  fully  established-.  He  likewise  received 
considerable  marks  of  royal  favour  from  James  and 
Charles  I.,  to  whom  he  was  appointed  physician;  and 
the  latter  particularly  assisted  his  inquiries  concerning 
generation,  by  the  opportunity  of  dissecting  numerous 
females  of  the  deer  kind  in  different  stages  of  pregnan- 
cy. During  the  civil  war,  when  he  retired  to  Oxford, 
his  house  in  London  was  pillaged,  and  many  valuable 
papers,  the  result  of  several  years  labour,  destroyed. 
He  published  his  first  work  on  the  circulation  in  1628, 
at  Frankfort,  as  the  best  means  of  circulating  his 
opinions  tnroughout Europe;  after  which  he  found  it 
necessary  to  write  two  “Exercitations”  in  refutation 
of  his  opponents.  In  1651  he  allowed  his  other  great 
work,  “ De  Generatione  AnimaUum,”  to  be  made 
public,  leading  to  the  inference  of  the  universal  preva- 
lence of  oval  generation.  In  the  year  following  he  had 
the  gratification  of  seeing  his  bust  in  marble,  with  a 
suitable  inscription  recording  his  discoveries,  placed  in 
the  hall  of  the  College  of  Physicians,  by  a vote  of  that 
body,  and  he  was  soon  after  chosen  President,  but  de- 
clined the  office  on  account  of  his  age  and  infirmities. 
In  return  he  presented  to  the  College  an  elegantly  fur- 
nished convocation  room,  and  a museum  filled  with 
choice  books  and  surgical  instruments.  He  also  gave 
up  his  paternal  estate  of  56  pounds  per  annum  for  the 
institution  of  an  annual  feast,  at  which  a Latin  oration 
should  be  spoken  in  commemoration  of  the  benefac- 
tors of  the  College,  &c.  He  died  in  1658.  A splendid 
edition  of  his  works  was  printed  in  1766,  by  the  College, 
in  quarto,  to  which  a Latin  life  of  the  author  was  pre- 
fixed, written  by  Dr.  Laurence. 

HASTATUS.  Spear,  or  halberd-shaped.  Applied 
to  a triangular  leaf,  hollowed  out  at  the  base  and  sides, 
but  with  spreading  lobes ; as  in  Rumex  acetocella  and 
Solanum  dulcamara. 

Hatchet-shaped.  See  Dolabriformis. 

HAUYNE.  A blue-coloured  mineral  found  imbed- 
ded in  the  basalt  rock  of  Albaco  and  Frescate,  which 
Jameson  thinks  is  allied  to  the  azure  stone.  So  named 
after  Haiiy,  the  celebrated  French  mineralogist. 

I lay,  camel’s.  See  Juncus  odoratus. 

HEAD.  See  Caput. 

HEARING.  Auditus.  “ The  hearing  is  a function 
intending  to  make  known  to  us  the  vibratory  motion 
ofbodies. 


HEA 


HEA 


Sound  is  to  the  hearing  what  light  is  to  the  sight. 
Sound  is  the  result  of  an  impression  produced  upon  the 
ear  by  the  vibratory  motion  impressed  upon  the  atoms 
of  the  body  by  percussion,  or  any  other  cause.  This 
word  signifies  also  the  vibratory  motion  itself.  When 
the  atoms  of  a body  have  been  thus  put  in  motion, 
they  communicate  it  to  the  surrounding  elastic  bodies : 
these  communicate  it  in  the  same  manner,  and  so  the 
vibratory  motion  is  often  continued  to  a great  distance. 
In  general,  only  elastic  bodies  are  capable  of  producing 
and  propagating  sound ; but  for  the  most  part  solid 
bodies  produce  it,  and  the  air  is  generally  the  medium 
by  which  it  reaches  the  ear. 

There  are  three  things  distinguished  in  sound,  in- 
tensity, tone , and  timbre , or  expression.  The  intensity 
of  sound  depends  on  the  extent  of  the  vibrations. 

The  tone  depends  on  the  number  of  vibrations 
which  are  produced  in  a given  time,  and,  in  this 
respect,  sound  is  distinguished  into  acute  and  grave. 

The  grave  sound  arises  from  a small  number  of  vi- 
brations, the  acute  from  a great  number. 

The  gravest  sound  which  the  air  is  capable  of  per- 
ceiving, is  formed  of  thirty-two  vibrations  in  a second. 
The  most  acute  sound  is  formed  of  twelve  thousand 
vibrations  in  a second.  Between  these  two  limits  are 
contained  all  the  distinguishable  sounds;  that  is,  those 
sounds  of  which  the  ear  can  count  the  vibration.  Noise 
differs  from  distinguishable  sound  in  so  much  as  the 
ear  cannot  distinguish  the  number  of  vibrations  of 
which  it  is  composed. 

A distinguishable  sound,  composed  of  double  the 
number  of  vibrations  of  another  sound,  is  said  to  be  its 
octave.  There  are  intermediate  sounds,  between  these 
two,  which  are  seven  in  number,  and  which  constitute 
the  diatonic  scale , or  gamut : they  are  distinguished 
by  the  names,  ut,  re , mi,  fa,  sol,  la,  si. 

When  the  sonorous  body  is  put  in  motion  by  percus- 
Bion,  there  is  at  first  heard  a sound  very  distinct,  more 
or  less  intense,  more  or  less  acute,  &c.,  according  as  it 
may  happen ; this  is  the  fundamental  sound ; but  with 
a little  attention  other  sounds  can  be  perceived.  These 
are  called  harmonic  sounds.  This  can  be  easily  per- 
ceived in  touching  the  strings  of  an  instrument. 

The  timbre , or  expression  of  sound,  depends  on  the 
nature  of  the  sonorous  body. 

Sound  is  propagated  through  all  elastic  bodies.  Its 
rapidity  is  variable  according  to  the  body  which  pro- 
pagates it.  The  rapidity  of  sound  in  the  air  is  a thou- 
sand one  hundred  and  thirty  English  feet.  It  is  still 
more  rapidly  transmitted  by  water,  stone,  wood,  &c. 
Sound  loses  its  force  in  a direct  proportion  to  the 
square  of  the  distance ; this  happens  at  least  in  the  air. 
It  may  also  become  more  intense  as  it  proceeds ; as 
happens  when  it  passes  through  very  elastic  bodies,  such 
as  metals,  wood,  condensed  air,  &c.  All  sorts  of  sounds 
are  propagated  with  the  same  rapidity,  without  being 
confounded  one  with  another. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  sound  is  propagated  in 
right  lines,  forming  cones,  analogous  to  those  of  light, 
with  this  essential  difference,  however,  that,  in  sono- 
rous cones,  the  atoms  have  only  a motion  of  oscillation, 
while  those  of  the  cones  of  light  have  a real  transitive 
motion. 

When  sound  meets  a body  that  prevents  its  passage, 
it  is  reflected  in  the  same  manner  as  light,  its  angle  of 
reflection  being  equal  to  the  angle  of  incidence.  The 
form  of  the  body  which  reflects  sound,  has  similar  in- 
fluence upon  it.  The  slowness  with  which  sound  is 
propagated,  produces  certain  phenomena,  for  which 
we  can  easily  account.  Such  is  the  phenomenon  of 
echo,  or  the  mysterious  chamber,  &c. 

Apparatus  of  Hearing. — There  are  in  the  appara- 
tus of  hearing  a number  of  organs,  which  appear  to 
concur  in  that  function  by  their  physical  properties ; 
and  behind  them,  a nerve  for  the  purpose  of  receiving 
and  transmitting  impressions. 

The  apparatus  of  hearing  is  composed  of  the  outer, 
middle,  and  internal  ear;  and  of  the  acoustic  nerve. 

The  auricle  collects  the  sonorous  radiations,  and  di- 
rects them  towards  the  meatus  externus ; in  proportion 
as  it  is  large,  elastic,  prominent  from  the  head,  and 
directed  forward.  Boerhaave  supposed  he  had  proved 
by  calculation,  that  all  the  sonorous  radiations  (or  pul- 
sations) which  fall  upon  the  external  face  of  the  pinna, 
are,  ultimately,  directed  to  the  auditory  passage.  This 
assertion  is  evidently  erroneous,  at  least  for  those  pinna; 
in  which  the  antihelix  is  more  projecting  than  the  helix. 


How  could  those  rays  arrive  at  the  concha,  which  fall 
upon  the  posterior  surface  of  the  antihelix  1 The 
pinna  is  not  indispensable  to  the  hearing;  for,  both  in 
men  and  in  the  animals,  it  may  be  removed  without 
any  inconvenience  beyond  a few  days. 

The  Meatus  auditorius  transmits  the  sound  in  the 
same  manner  as  any  other  conduit,  partly  by  the  air  it 
contains,  and  partly  by  its  parietes,  until  it  arrives  at 
the  membrane  of  the  tympanum.  The  hairs,  and  the 
cerumen  with  which  it  is  provided  at  the  entrance, 
are  intended  to  prevent  the  introduction  of  sand,  dust, 
insects,  &c. 

The  Membrane  of  the  Tympanum  receives  the 
sound  which  has  been  transmitted  by  the  meatus  au- 
ditorius. In  what  circumstances  is  it  stretched  by  the 
internal  muscle  of  the  malleus  1 Or  when  is  it  relaxed 
by  the  contraction  of  the  anterior  muscle  of  the  mal- 
leus l — All  our  knowledge  on  this  subject  is  merely 
conjectural.  An  opening  made  in  this  membrane  does 
not  much  impair  the  faculty  of  hearing.  As  this  mem- 
brane is  dry  and  elastic,  it  ought  to  transmit  the  sound 
very  well,  both  to  the  air  contained  in  the  tympanum, 
and  to  the  chain  of  little  bones.  The  chorda  tympani 
cannot  fail  to  participate  in  the  vibrations  of  the  mem- 
brane, and  transmit  impressions  to  the  brain.  The 
contact  of  any  foreign  body  upon  the  membrane  is 
very  painful,  and  a violent  noise  also  gives  great  pain. 
The  membrane  of  the  tympanum  may  be  torn,  or  even 
totally  destroyed,  without  deranging  the  hearing  in 
any  sensible  degree. 

The  Cavity  of  the  Tympanum  transmits  the  sounds 
from  the  external  to  the  internal  ear.  The  transmis- 
sion of  sound  by  the  tympanum  happens — 1st,  By  the 
chain  of  bones  which  has  a particular  action  upon  the 
membrane  of  the  fenestra  ovalis.  2d,  By  the  air 
which  fills  it,  and  which  acts  upon  the  whole  petrous 
portion,  but  particularly  upon  the  membranum  of  the 
fenestra  ovalis.  3d,  By  its  sides. 

The  Eustachian  Tube  renews  the  air  in  the  tym- 
panum ; being  destroyed,  it  is  said  to  cause  deafness. 

The  notion  of  its  being  capable  of  carrying  sound  to 
the  internal  ear  is  erroneous ; there  is  nothing  to  sup- 
port this  assertion  ; it  permits  the  air  to  pass  in  cases 
when  the  tympanum  is  struck  by  violent  sounds,  and 
it  permits  the  renewal  of  that  which  fills  the  tympa- 
num, and  the  mastoid  cells.  The  air  in  the  tympanum 
being  much  rarefied,  is  very  suitable  for  diminishing 
the  intensity  of  the  sounds  it  transmits. 

The  use  of  the  mastoid  cells  is  not  well  known  ; it 
is  supposed  that  they  help  to  augment  the  intensity  of 
the  sound  that  arises  in  the  cavity.  If  they  produce 
this  effect  it  ought  to  be  rather  from  the  vibrations  of 
the  partitions  which  separate  the  cells  than  from  the 
air  which  they  contain.  Sound  may  arrive  in  the 
tympanum  by  another  way  than  the  external  meatus ; 
the  shocks  received  by  the  bones  of  the  head  are  di- 
rected towards  the  temples,  and  perceived  by  the  ear. 
It  is  well  known  that  the  movement  of  a watch  is 
heard  distinctly  when  it  is  placed  in  contact  with  the 
teeth. 

We  know  little  of  the  functions  of  the  internal  ear; 
we  can  only  imagine  that  the  sonorous  vibrations  are 
propagated  in  different  modes,  but  principally  by  the 
membrane  of  the  fenestra  ovalis,  by  that  of  the  fe- 
nestra rotunda,  and  by  the  internal  partition  of  the 
tympanum ; that  the  liquor  of  Cotunnius  ought  to  suffer 
vibrations  which  are  transmitted  to  the  acoustic  nerve. 
It  may  be  conceived  how  necessary  it  is  that  this  liquid 
should  give  way  to  those  vibrations  which  are  too  in- 
tense, and  which  might  injure  this  nerve.  Possibly,  in 
his  case,  it  flows  into  the  aqueducts  of  the  cochlea 
and  of  the  vestibule,  which,  in  this  respect,  would 
tube. 

have  a great  deal  of  analogy  with  the  Eustachian 

The  internal  gyri  of  the  cochlea  ought  to  receive  the 
vibrations  principally  by  the  membrane  of  th e fenestra 
ovalis;  the  vestibule,  by  the  chain  of  bones  ; the  semi- 
circular canals,  by  the  sides  of  the  tympanum,  and 
perhaps  by  the  mastoid  cells,  which  frequently  extend 
beyond  the  canals.  But  the  aid  which  is  given  to  the 
hearing  by  each  separate  part  of  the  internal  ear  is 
totally  unknown. 

The  osseo-membraneous  partition,  which  separates 

I the  cochlea  into  two  parts,  has  given  rise  to  an  hypo- 
thesis which  no  one  now  admits. 

The  impressions  are  received  and  transmitted  to 
the  brain  bv  the  acoustic  nerve ; the  brain  perceives 

413 


HEA 


HEA 


them  with  more  or  lese  facility  and  exactness  in  differ- 
ent individuals.  Many  people  have  a false  ear, 
which  means  that  they  do  not  distinguish  sounds 
perfectly. 

There  is  no  explanation  given  of  the  action  of  the 
acoustic  nerve  and  of  the  brain  in  hearing. 

In  order  to  be  heard,  sounds  must  be  within  certain 
limits  of  intensity.  Too  strong  a sound  hurts  us,  while 
one  too  weak  produces  no  sensation.  We  can  per- 
ceive a great  number  of  sounds  at  once.  Sounds,  par- 
ticularly appreciable  sounds,  combined,  and  succeed- 
ing each  other  in  a certain  manner,  are  a source  of 
agreeable  sensations.  It  is  in  such  combinations,  for 
the  production  of  this  effect,  that  music  is  employed. 
On  the  contrary,  certain  combinations  of  sound  pro- 
duce a disagreeable  impression ; the  ear  is  hurt  by 
very  acute  sounds.  Sounds  which  are  very  intense 
and  very  grave,  hurt  excessively  the  membrane  of  the 
tympanum.  By  the  absence  of  the  liquor  of  Cotun- 
nius,  the  hearing  is  destroyed.  When  a sound  has 
been  of  long  duration,  we  still  think  we  hear  it,  though 
it  may  have  been  some  time  discontinued. 

We  receive  two  impressions,  though  we  perceive 
only  one.  It  has  been  said  that  we  use  only  one  ear  at 
once,  but  this  notion  is  erroneous. 

When  the  sound  comes  more  directly  to  the  one  ear, 
it  is  in  reality  distinguished  with  more  facility  by  that 
one,  than  by  the  other : therefore  in  this  case  we  em- 
ploy only  one  ear ; and  when  we  listen  with  attention 
to  a sound  which  we  do  not  hear  exactly,  we  place 
ourselves  so  that  the  rays  may  enter  directly  into  the 
concha ; but  when  it  is  necessary  to  determine  the  di- 
rection of  the  sound,  that  is,  the  point  whence  it  pro- 
ceeds, we  are  obliged  to  employ  both  ears,  for  it  is  only 
by  comparing  the  intensity  of  the  two  impressions, 
that  we  are  capable  of  deciding  from  whence  the 
sound  proceeds.  Should  we  shut  one  ear  perfectly 
close,  and  cause  a slight  noise  to  be  made,  in  a dark 
place,  at  a short  distance,  it  would  be  utterly  impossi- 
ble to  determine  its  direction  ; in  using  both  ears  this 
could  be  determined.  In  these  cases  the  eye  is  of 
great  use,  for  even  in  using  both  ears  it  is  frequently 
impossible  to  tell  in  the  dark  from  whence  a sound 
comes.  By  the  sound  we  may  also  estimate  the  dis- 
tance of  the  body  from  which  it  proceeds:  but  in  order 
to  judge  exactly  in  this  respect  we  ought  to  be  perfectly 
acquainted  with  the  nature  of  the  sound,  for  without 
this  condition  the  estimation  is  always  erroneous.  The 
principle  upon  which  we  judge  is,  that  an  intense  sound 
proceeds  from  a body  which  is  near,  while  a feeble 
sound  proceeds  from  a body  at  a distance:  if  it  happen 
that  an  intense  sound  comes  from  a distant  body  while 
a feeble  sound  proceeds  from  a body  which  is  near, 
we  fall  into  acoustic  errors.  We  are  generally  very 
subject  to  deception  with  regard  to  the  point  whence  a 
sound  comes : sight  and  reason  are  of  great  use  in  as- 
sisting our  judgment. 

The  different  degree  of  convergence,  and  divergence, 
of  the  sonorous  rays,  do  not  seem  to  have  any  influ- 
ence on  the  hearing,  neither  are  they  modified  in  their 
course,  except  for  the  purpose  of  making  them  enter 
into  the  ear  in  greater  quantity : it  is  to  produce  this 
effect  that  speaking  trumpets  are  used  for  those  who 
do  not  hear  well.  Sometimes  it  is  necessary  to  dimi- 
nish the  intensity  of  sounds : in  this  case  a soft  and 
scarcely  elastic  body  is  placed  in  the  external  meatus.” 
— Magendie'e  Physiology. 

HEART.  Cor.  A hollow  muscular  viscus,  situ- 
ated in  the  cavity  of  the  pericardium  for  the  circula- 
tion of  the  blood.  It  is  divided  externally  into  a base, 
or  its  broad  part ; a superior  and  an  inferior  surface, 
and  an  anterior  and  posterior  margin.  Internally,  it 
is  divided  into  a right  and  left  ventricle.  The  situa- 
tion of  the  heart  is  oblique,  not  transverse ; its  base 
being  placed  on  the  right  of  the  bodies  of  the  vertebrae, 
and  its  apex  obliquely  to  the  sixth  rib  on  the  left  side ; 
so  that  the  left  ventricle  is  almost  posterior,  and  the 
right  anterior.  Its  inferior  surface  lies  upon  the  dia- 
phragm. There  are  two  cavities  adhering  to  the  base 
of  the  heart,  from  their  resemblance  called  auricles. 
The  right  auricle  is  a muscular  sac,  in  which  are  four 
apertures , two  of  the  venae  cavae,  an  opening  into  the 
right  ventricle,  and  the  opening  of  the  coronary  vein. 
The  left  is  a similar  sac,  in  which  there  are  five  aper- 
tures, viz.  those  of  the  four  pulmonary  veins,  and  an 
opening  into  the  left  ventricle  The  cavities  in  the 
heart  are  called  ventricles ; these  are  divided  by  a 
414 


fleshy  septum,  called  septum  cordis,  into  a right  hnd 
left.  Each  ventricle  lias  two  orifices ; the  one  auri- 
cular, through  which  the  blood  enters,  the  other  arte- 
rious,  through  which  the  blood  passes  out.  These  four 
orifices  dre  supplied  with  valves,  which  are  named 
from  their  resemblance ; those  at  the  arterior  orifices 
are  called  the  semilunar ; those  at  the  orifice  of  the 
right  auricle,  tricuspid ; and  those  at  the  orifice  of  the 
left  auricle,  mitral.  The  valve  of  Eustachius  is  situ- 
ated at  the  termination  of  the  vena  cava  inferior,  just 
within  the  auricle.  The  substance  of  the  heart  is  mus- 
cular ; its  exterior  fibres  are  longitudinal,  its  middle 
transverse,  and  its  interior  oblique.  The  internal  su- 
perficesof  the  ventricles  and  auricles  of  the  heart  are 
invested  with  a strong  and  smooth  membrane,  which 
is  extremely  irritable.  The  vessels  of  the  heart  are 
divided  into  common  and  proper.  The  common  are,  1. 
The  aorta,  which  arises  from  the  left  ventricle.  2. 
The  pulmonary  artery , which  originates  from  the 
right  ventricle.  3.  The  four  pulmonary  veins,  which 
terminate  in  the  left  auricle.  4.  The  two  venae  cava, 
which  evacuate  themselves  into  the  right  auricle.  The 
proper  vessels  are,  1.  The  coronary  arteries,  which 
arise  from  the  aorta,  and  are  distributed  on  the  heart. 
2.  The  coronary  veins,  which  return  the  blood  into 
the  right  auricle.  The  nerves  of  the  heart  are  branches 
of  the  eight  and  great  intercostal  pairs.  The  heart  of 
the  foetus  differs  from  that  of  the  adult,  in  having  a 
foramen  ovale,  through  which  the  blood  passes  from 
the  right  auricle  to  the  left. 

Heart-shaped.  See  Cordatus. 

HEART’S  EASE.  See  Viola  tricolor. 

HEAT.  See  Caloric. 

Heat,  absolute.  This  term  is  applied  to  the  whole 
quantity  of  caloric  existing  in  a body  in  chemical 
union. 

Heat,  animal.  “An  inert  body  which  does  not 
change  its  position,  being  placed  among  other  bodies, 
very  soon  assumes  the  same  temperature,  on  account 
of  the  tendency  of  caloric  to  an  equilibrium.  The 
body  of  man  is  very  different : surrounded  by  bodies 
hotter  than  itself,  it  preserves  its  inferior  temperature 
as  long  as  life  continues  ; being  surrounded  with  bodies 
of  a lower  temperature,  it  maintains  its  temperature 
more  elevated.  There  are,  then,  in  the  animal  econo- 
my, two  different  and  distinct  properties,  the  one  of  pro- 
ducing heat,  the  other  of  producing  cold.  We  will 
examine  these  two  properties.  Let  us  first  see  how 
heat  is  produced. 

The  respiration  appears  to  be  the  principal,  or  at 
least  the  most  evident  source  of  animal  heat.  In  fact, 
experience  demonstrates  that  the  heat  of  the  blood 
increases  nearly  a degree  in  traversing  the  lungs ; and 
as  it  is  distributed  to  all  parts  of  the  body  from  the 
lungs,  it  carries  the  heat  every  where  into  the  organs ; 
for  we  have  also  seen  that  the  heat  of  the  veins  is  less 
than  that  of  the  arteries. 

This  developement  of  heat  in  the  respiration  appears, 
as  we  have  already  said,  to  proceed  from  the  formation 
of  carbonic  acid,  whether  it  takes  place  directly  in  the 
lungs,  or  happens  afterward  in  the  arteries,  or  in  the 
parenchyma  of  the  organs.  Some  very  good  experi- 
ments of  Lavoisier,  and  De  Laplace,  lead  to  this  con- 
clusion: they  placed  animals  in  a calorimeter , and 
compared  the  quantity  of  acid  formed  by  the  respira- 
tion, with  the  quantity  of  heat  produced  in  a given 
time : except  a very  small  proportion,  the  hpat 
produced  was  that  which  would  have  beer,  occa- 
sioned by  the  quantity  of  carbonic  acid  which  was 
formed. 

It  has  also  been  proved  by  the  experiments  of  Bro- 
die,  Thillage,  and  Legallois,  that  if  the  respiration  of 
an  animal  is  incommoded,  either  by  putting  it  in  a 
fatiguing  position,  or  in  making  it  respire  artificially, 
its  temperature  lowers,  and  the  quantity  of  carbonic 
acid  that  it  forms  becomes  less.  In  diseases  when  the 
respiration  is  accelerated,  the  heat  increases,  except  in 
particular  circumstances.  The  respiration  is  then  a 
focus  in  which  caloric  is  developed. 

In  considering  for  an  instant  only  this  source  of  heat 
in  the  economy,  we  see  that  the  caloric  must  be  dis- 
tributed to  the  different  parts  of  the  body  in  an  unequal 
manner ; those  farthest  from  the  heart,  those  that  re- 
ceive least  blood,  or  which  cool  more  rapidly,  must 
generally  be  colder  than  those  that  are  differently  dis- 
posed. 

This  difference  partly  exists.  The  extremities  are 


HEA 


HEJB 


colder  than  the  trank ; sometimes  they  present  only 
89°  or  91°  F.,  and  often  much  less,  while  the  cavity  of  the 
thorax  is  about  104°  F. : but  the  extremities  have  a 
considerable  surface  relative  to  their  mass  ; they  are 
farther  from  the  heart,  and  receive  less  blood  than 
most  of  the  organs  of  the  trunk. 

On  account  of  the  extent  of  their  surface  and  dis- 
tance from  the  heart,  the  feet  and  hands  would  proba- 
bly have  a temperature  still  lower  than  that  which  is 
peculiar  to  them,  if  these  parts  did  not  receive  a greater 
proportional  quantity  of  blood.  The  same  disposition 
exists  for  all  the  exterior  organs  that  have  a very  large 
surface,  as  the  nose,  the  pavilion  of  the  ear,  &x. : their 
temperature  is  also  higher  than  their  surface  and  dis- 
tance from  the  heart  would  seem  to  indicate. 

Notwithstanding  the  providence  of  nature,  those 
parts  that  have  large  surfaces  lose  their  caloric  with 
greater  facility;  and  they  are  not  only  habitually 
colder  than  the  others,  but  their  temperature  often  be- 
comes very  low:  the  temperature  of  the  feet  and 
hands  in  winter  is  often  nearly  as  low  as  32°  F,  It  is 
on  this  account  we  expose  them  30  willingly  to  the 
heat  of  our  fires. 

Among  other  means  that  we  instinctively  employ  to 
remedy  or  prevent  coldness,  are  motion,  walking,  run- 
ning, leaping,  which  accelerate  the  circulation  ; press- 
ure, shocks  upon  the  skin,  which  attract  a great  quan- 
tity of  blood  into  the  tissue  of  this  membrane.  Ano- 
ther equally  effective  means  consists  in  diminishing 
the  surface  in  contact  with  the  bodies  that  deprive  us 
of  caloric.  Thus  we  bend  the  different  parts  of  the 
limbs  upon  each  other,  we  apply  them  forcibly  to  the 
trunk  when  the  exterior  temperature  is  very  low. 
Children  and  weak  persons  often  take  this  position 
when  in  bed.  In  this  respect  it  would  be  very  proper 
that  young  children  should  not  be  confined  too  much  in 
their  swathing  clothes  to  prevent  them  from  thus  bend- 
ing themselves.  Our  clothes  preserve  the  heat  of  our 
bodies ; for  the  substance  of  which  they  are  formed 
being  bad  conductors  of  caloric,  they  prevent  that  of  the 
body  from  passing  off. 

According  to  what  has  been  said,  the  combination 
of  the  oxygen  of  the  air  with  the  carbon  of  the  blood 
is  sufficient  for  the  explanation  of  most  of  the  pheno- 
mena presented  by  the  production  of  animal  heat;  but 
there  are  several  which,  if  real,  could  not>be  explained 
by  this  means.  Authors  worthy  of  credit  have  re- 
marked, that,  in  certain  local  diseases,  the  temperature 
of  the  diseased  place  rises  several  degrees  above  that 
of  the  blood,  taken  at  the  left  auricle.  If  this  is  so,  the 
continual  renewal  of  the  arterial  blood  is  not  sufficient 
to  account  for  this  increase  of  heat. 

This  second  source  of  heat  must  belong  to  the  nutri- 
tive phenomena  which  take  place  in  the  diseased  part. 

There  is  nothing  forced  in  this  supposition ; for  most 
of  the  chemical  combinations  produce  elevations  of 
temperature,  and  it  cannot  be  doubted  that  botli  in  the 
secretions  and  in  the  nutrition,  combinations  of  this 
sort  take  place  in  the  organs. 

By  means  of  these  two  sources  of  heat,  life  can  be 
maintained  though  the  external  temperature  is  very 
low,  as  that  of  winter  in  countries  near  the  pole,  which 
descends  sometimes  to  — 42°  FT  Generally  such  an 
excessive  cold  is  not  supported  without  great  difficulty, 
and  it  often  happens  that  the  parts  most  easily  cooled 
are  mortified  : many  of  the  military  suffered  these  ac- 
cidents in  the  wars  of  Russia.  Nevertheless,  as  we 
easily  resist  a temperature  much  lower  than  our  own, 
it  is  evident  that  we  are  possessed  of  the  faculty  of  pro- 
ducing heat  to  a great  degree. 

The  faculty  of  producing  cold,  or,  in  more  exact 
terms,  of  resisting  foreign  heat,  which  has  a tendency 
to  enter  our  organs,  is  more  confined.  In  the  torrid 
zone,  it  has  happened  that  men  have  died  suddenly, 
when  the  temperature  has  approached  122°  F. 

But  this  property  is  not  less  real,  though  limited. 
Banks,  Blagden,  and  Fordyce,  having  exposed  them- 
selves to  a heat  of  nearly  260°,  they  found  that  their 
bodies  had  preserved  nearly  their  own  temperature. 
More  recent  experiments  of  Berger  and  Delaroche  have 
shown  that  by  this  cause  the  heat  of  the  body  may 
rise  several  degrees:  for  this  to  take  place  it  is  only 
necessary  that  the  surrounding  temperature  should  be 
a little  elevated.  Having  both  placed  themselves  in  a 
stove  of  120°,  their  temperature  rose  nearly  6.8°  F. 
Delaroche  having  remained  sixteen  minutes  in  a dry 
stove  at  170°,  his  temperature  rose  9°  F. 


Franklin,  to  whom  the  physical  and  moral  sciences 
are  indebted  for  many  important  discoveries,  and  a 
great  many  ingenious  views,  was  the  first  who  disco- 
vered the  reason  why  the  body  thus  resists  such  a 
strong  heat.  He  showed  that  this  effect  was  due  to  the 
evaporation  of  the  cutaneous  and  pulmonary  transpira- 
tion. and  that  m this  respect  the  bodies  of  animals  re- 
semble the  porous  vases  called  alcarrazas.  These  ves- 
sels, which  are  used  in  hot  countries,  allow  the  water 
that  they  contain  to  sweat  through  them  ; their  surface 
is  always  humid,  and  a rapid  evaporation  takes  place, 
which  cools  the  liquid  they  contain. 

In  order  to  prove  this  important  result,  Delaroche 
placed  animals  in  a hot  atmosphere  that  was  so  satu- 
rated with  humidity  that  no  evaporation  could  take 
place.  These  animals  could  not  support  a heat  but  a 
little  greater*  than  their  own  without  perishing,  and 
they  became  heated,  because  they  had  no  longer  the 
means  of  cooling  themselves.  Thus,  there  is  no 
doubt  that  the  cutaneous  and  pulmonary  evaporation 
are  the  causes  which  enable  man  and  animals  to  resist 
a strong  heat.  This  explanation  is  also  confirmed  by 
the  considerable  loss  of  weight  that  the  body  suffers 
after  having  been  exposed  to  a great  heat. 

According  to  these  facts  it  is  evident  that  the  au 
thors  who  have  represented  animal  heat  as  fixed,  have 
been  very  far  from  the  truth.  To  judge  exactly  of  it, 
it  would  be  necessary  to  take  into  account  the  sur- 
rounding temperature  and  humidity ; the  degree  of 
heat  of  different  parts  ought  to  be  considered,  and  the 
temperature  of  one  part  ought  not  to  be  determined  by 
that  of  another. 

We  have  few  correct  observations  upon  the  temper- 
ature proper  to  the  body  of  man ; the  latest  are  due  to 
Edwards  and  Gentil.  These  authors  observed  that 
the  most  suitable  place  for  judging  of  the  heat  of  the 
body  is  the  armpit.  They  noticed  nearly  2£  degrees 
of  difference  between  the  heat  of  a young  man  and 
that  of  a young  girl : the  heat  of  her  hand  was  a little 
less  than  97^°,  that  of  the  young  man  was  98.4°.  The 
same  person  observed  great  differences  of  heat  in  the 
different  temperaments.  There  are  also  diurnal  varia- 
tions ; the  temperature  may  change  about  two  or  three 
degrees  from  morning  to  evening. — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

Heat,  free.  If  the  heat  which  exists  in  any  sub- 
stance be  from  any  cause  forced  in  some  degree  to  quit 
that  substance,  and  to  combine  with  those  that  sur- 
round it,  then  such  heat  is  said  to  be  free,  or  sensible, 
until  the  equilibrium  is  restored. 

Heat,  latent.  When  any  body  is  in  equilibrium 
with  the  bodies  which  surround  it  with  respect  to  it? 
heat,  that  quantity  which  it  contains  is  not  perceptible 
by  any  external  sign,  or  organ  of  sense,  and  is  termed 
combined  caloric,  or  latent  heat. 

Heat , sensible.  See  Heat , free. 

Heavy  carbonated  hydrogen.  See  Carburetted  hy- 
drogen. 

HEAVY  SPAR.  Baryte.  A genns  of  minerals, 
divided  by  Professor  Jameson  into  four  species. 

1.  Rhomboidal  baryte,  or  Witherite.  This  rs  a car- 
bonate of  barytes;  and  is  found  in  Cumberland  and 
Durham. 

2.  Prismatic  baryte,  or  heavy  spar , a sulphate ; found 
also  in  Cumberland  and  Durham. 

3.  Diprismatic  baryte , or  strontianite.  A carbonate 
of  barytes ; found  in  Strontian,  in  Argyleshire. 

4.  Jixifrangible  baryte,  or  Celestine.  A sulphate  of 
strontites,  with  about  two  per  cent,  of  sulphate  of  ba- 
rytes : found  near  Edinburgh,  in  Inverness-shire,  and 
Bristol. 

Heavy  inflammable  air.  See  Carrburetted  hydrogen 
gas. 

HEBERDEN,  William,  was  born  in  London  fr* 
1710,  and  graduated  at  Cambridge,  where  he  afterward 
practised  during  ten  years,  and  gave  lectures  on  the 
Materia  Medica.  During  this  period  he  published  a 
little  Tract,  entitled  “ Antitheriaca,”  condemning  the 
complication  of  certain  ancient  Formulae  of  Medi- 
cines. In  1748,  he  removed  to  London,  having  pre- 
viously been  elected  a fellow  of  the  College  of  Phy- 
sicians; and  he  was  shortly  after  admitted  into  the 
Royal  Society.  He  soon  rose  to  considerable  reputa- 
tion and  practice  in  his  profession.  At  his  suggestior* 
“the  Medical  Transactions  of  the  College  of  Physi- 
cians,” first  appeared  in  1768;  and  four  other  volumes 
have  since  been  published  at  different  periods.  Dr. 
Heberden  contributed  some  valuable  papers  to  tfiis> 


HEL 


HEL 


work,  especially  on  the  Angina  Pectoris,  a disease  not 
before  described ; and  on  Chicken  Pox,  which  he  first 
accurately  distinguished  from  Small  Pox.  Some  other 
papers'of  his  appeared  in  the  Philosophical  Transac- 
tions. As  he  advanced  in  years  he  began  to  relax 
from  the  fatigue  of  practice : and  in  1782  he  drew  up  the 
result  of  his  experience  in  a volume  of  “Commenta- 
ries,” written  in  Latin,  the  great  excellence  of  which  is 
its  style.  He  reserved  it  for  publication,  however,  till 
after  his  death,  which  did  not  happen  till  1801. 

HECTIC.  ( Hecticus ; front  habit.)  See  Febris 
hectica. 

HE'DERA.  (From  hcereo,  to  stick,  because  it  at- 
taches itself  to  trees  and  old  walls.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaan  system.  Class,  Pentan- 
dria ; Order,  Monogynia.  The  ivy. 

Hedera  arborea.  See  Hedera  Helix. 

Hedera  helix.  Hedera  arborea.  The  ivy.  The 
leaves  of  this  tree  have  little  or  no  smeli,  but  a very 
nauseous  taste.  Haller  informs  us,  that  they  are  re- 
commended in  Germany  against  the  atrophy  of  chil- 
dren. By  the  common  people  of  this  country  they  are 
sometimes  applied  to  running  sores,  and  to  keep  issues 
open.  The  berries  were  supposed  by  the  ancients  to 
have  a purgative  and  emetic  quality;  and  an  extract 
was  made  from  them  by  water,  called  by  Quercetanus 
extraction  pur gans.  Later  writers  have  recommended 
them  in  small  doses  as  alexipharmic  and  sudorific; 
it  is  said,  that  in  the  plague  at  London,  the  powder  of 
them  was  given  in  vinegar,  or  white  wine,  with  good 
success.  It  is  from  the  stalk  of  this  tree  that  a resinous 
juice,  called  Gummi  hedera,  exudes  very  plentifully  in 
warm  climates.  It  is  imported  from  the  East  Indies, 
though  it  may  be  collected  from  trees  in  this  country. 
It  is  brought  over  in  hard  compact  masses,  externally  of 
a reddish  brown  colour,  internally  of  a bright  brownish 
yellow,  with  reddish  specks  or  veins.  It  has  a strong, 
resinous,  agreeable  smell,  and  an  adstringent  taste. 
Though  never  used  in  the  practice  of  the  present  day, 
it  possesses  corroborant,  astringent,  and  antispasmodic 
virtues. 

Hedera  terrestris.  See  Glecoma. 

HEDERACEA3.  (From  hedera , the  ivy.)  The 
name  of  an  orderof  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  the  ivy  and  a few  other 
genera  which  in  their  form  and  appearance  resem- 
ble it. 

Hedge  hyssop.  See  Gratiola  officinalis. 

Hedge  mustard.  See  Erysimum  officinale. 

Hedge  mustard , stinking.  See  Erysimum  Alliaria. 

He'dra.  1.  The  anus. 

2.  Excrement. 

3.  A fracture 

Hedyo'smos.  Mint. 

IIEISTER,  Laurence,  was  born  at  Frankfort  on 
Ihe  Maine  in  1683.  After  studying  in  different  German 
universities,  and  serving  sometime  as  an  army-surgeon, 
he  graduated  at  Leyden : and  in  1709  was  appointed 
physician  general  to  the  Dutch  Military  Hospital.  The 
next  year  he  became  professor  of  anatomy  and  surgery 
at  Altorf : and  having  distinguished  himself  greatly  by 
his  lectures  and  writings,  he  received  in  1720  a more 
advantageous  appointment  at  Helmstadt,  under  the 
Duke  of  Brunswick,  as  physician,  Aulic  counsellor, 
and  professor  of  medicine ; in  which  he  continued, 
notwithstanding  an  invitation  to  Russia  from  the  Czar 
Peter,  till  the  period  of  his  death  in  1758.  He  was  author 
of  several  esteemed  works,  particularly  a Compendium 
of  Anatomy,  which  became  very  popular,  being  re- 
markable for  its  conciseness  and  clearness.  “ His  In- 
stitutions of  Surgery,”  also  gained  him  great  credit ; 
being  translated  into  Latin,  and  most  of  the  modern 
languages  of  Europe.  Another  valuable  practical 
work  was  entitled  “Medical,  Surgical,  and  Anatomi- 
cal Cases  and  Observations.”  He  had  some  taste  for 
botany  also,  which  he  taught  at  Helmstadt,  and  con- 
siderably enriched  the  garden  there ; but  he  unfortu- 
nately became  an  antagonist  of  the  celebrated  Linnaeus, 
not  properly  appreciating  the  excellence  of  the  system 
of  that  eminent  naturalist. 

HELCO’MA.  Ulceration. 

IIelconia.  (From  eXko?,  an  ulcer.)  An  ulcer  in  the 
external  or  internal  superficies  of  the  cornea,  known  by 
an  excavation  and  oozing  of  puruleut  matter  from  the 
cornea.  :. 

Helcy'drion.  (From  e\ kos,  an  ulcer,  and  vdup, 
water.)  Helcydrium.  A moist  ulcerous  pustule. 

416 


IIelcy'ster.  (From  cXtcw,  to  draw.)  An  instra 
ment  for  extracting  the  foetus. 

Hele'nium.  (From  Helene,  the  island  where  it 
grew.)  See  Inula  helenium. 

HELIANTHUS.  (From  77X10?,  the  sun  ; and  avOos, 
a flower.  This  name  originated  from  the  resemblance 
which  its  broad  golden  disk  and  ray  bear  to  the  sun, 
and  is  rendered  further  appropriate  by  its  having  the 
power  of  constantly  presenting  its  flowers  to  that  lumi- 
nary.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.'  Class,  Syngenc- 
sia;  Order,  Polygamia  frustranea.  The  sun-flower. 

Helianthus  annuus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Corona  solis,  and  chimalatus.  The  seeds  have  been 
made  into  a nutritious  bread.  The  whole  plant  when 
young  is  boiled  and  eaten  in  some  countries,  as  being 
aphrodisiac. 

Helianthus  tuberosus.  Jerusalem  artichoke. 
Although  formerly  in  estimation  for  the  table,  this 
root  is  now  neglected,  it  being  apt  to  produce  flatulen- 
cy and  dyspepsia. 

Helica'lis  major.  See  Helicis  major. 

Helica'lis  minor.  See  Helicis  minor. 

HE'LICIS  MAJOR.  A proper  muscle  of  the  ear, 
which  depresses  the  part  of  the  cartilage  of  the  ear  into 
which  it  is  inserted  ; it  lies  upon  the  upper  or  sharp 
point  of  the  helix,  or  outward  ring,  arising  from  the 
upper  and  acute  part  of  the  helix  anteriorly,  and  pass- 
ing to  be  inserted  into  its  cartilage  a little  above  the 
tragus. 

Helicis  minor.  A proper  muscle  of  the  ear,  which 
contracts  the  fissure  of  the  ear;  it  is  situated  below  the 
helicis  major,  upon  part  of  the  helix.  It  arises  from 
the  inferior  and  anterior  part  of  the  helix,  and  is  in- 
serted into  the  crus  of  the  helix,  near  the  fissure  in  the 
cartilage  opposite  to  the  concha. 

HELIOTROPE.  A sub-species  of  rhomboidal 
quartz. 

HELIOTROPIUM.  (’HXiorpo7ru)v  toi  peya,  of  Di- 
oscorides ; from  77X10?,  the  sun,  and  rpony,  a turning 
or  inclination.:  because,  says  that  ancient  writer,  it 
turns  its  leaves  round  with  the  declining  sun.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Heliotro'pii  succus.  See  Croton  tinctarium. 

HE'LIX.  (EXt£,  from  £iXw,  to  turn  about.)  The 
external  circle  or  border  of  the  outer  ear,  that  curls  in* 
wards. 

HeLix  hortensis.  The  garden  snail. 

HELLEBORA'STER.  (From  eXXtSopo?,  hellebore.) 
See  Helleborus  feetidus. 

HELLEBORE.  See  Helleborus. 

Hellebore,  black.  See  Helleborus  niger. 

Hellebore,  white.  See  Veratrum  album. 

HELLE'BORUS.  (E XXsfiopo?:  naparorr) fiopatWeiv, 
because  it  destroys,  if  eaten.)  The  nameof  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class  Polyandria  ; 
Order,  Polygynia.  Hellebore. 

Helleborus  albus.  See  Veratrum  album. 

Hellebore  fietidus.  Stinking  Hellebore,  or  bear’s- 
foot.  Hellebor aster.  Helleborus — caule  multifloro 

folioso,  foliis  pedatis,  of  Linnteus.  The  leaves  of  this 
indigenous  plant  are  recommended  by  many  as  possess- 
ing extraordinary  anthelmintic  powers.  The  smell  of 
the  recent  plant  is  extremely  feetid,  and  the  taste  is  bit- 
ter and  remarkably  acrid,  insomuch  that,  when  chewed,’ 
it  excoriates  the  mouth  and  fauces.  It  commonly 
operates  as  a cathartic,  sometimes  as  an  emetic,  anil 
in  large  doses  proves  highly  deleterious. 

Helleborus  niger/  Black  hellebore,  or  Christmas 
rose.  Mclampodium.  Helleborus — scapo  subbijlore 
subnudo,  foliis  pedatis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  root  of  this 
exotic  plant  is  the  part  employed  medicinally  : its  taste, 
when  fresh,  is  bitterish,  and  somewhat  acrid : it  also 
emits  a nauseous  acrid  smell:  but,  being  long  kept, 
both  its  sensible  qualities  and  medicinal  activity  suffer 
very  considerable  diminution.  The  ancients  esteemed 
it  as  a powerful  remedy  in  maniacal  cases.  At  present 
it  is  exhibited  principally  as  an  alterative,  or,  when 
given  in  a large  dose,  as  a purgative.  It  often  proves  a 
very  powerful  emmenagogue  in  plethoric  habits,  where 
steel  is  ineffectual,  or  improper.  It  is  also  recom- 
mended in  dropsies,  and  some  cutaneous  diseases. 

HELMET-FLOWER.  See  Anthora. 

HELMI'NTHAGOGUE.  (Hclminthagogus,  from 
cXptv?,  a worm,  and  ayco,  to  drive  out.)  Whatever  de- 
stroys and  expels  worms.  See  Anthelmintic. 

HELMINTIHA.  The  nameof  a genus  of  diseases. 


HEM 


HEP 


Class,  Caliaca ; Order,  Enterica , in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Inverrnination,  worms.  It  has  three  species,  viz.  Hel- 
minthia  alvi , podicis , erratica. 

HELMINTHI'ASIS.  (EX/iivOtaais ; from  s\pivs, 
which  signifies  any  species  of  worm.)  A disease  in 
which  worms,-  or  the  larva;  of  worms,  are  bred  under 
the  skin,  or  some  external  part  of  the  body.  It  is  ende- 
rnial  to  Martinique,  Westphalia,  Transylvania,  and 
some  other  places. 

HELMINTHOCO'RTON.  See  Corallina  corsicana. 

HELMONT,  John  Baptist  Van,  was  born  of  a 
noble  family  at  Brussels  in  1577.  He  exhibited  very 
early  proofs  of  superior  abilities,  and  soon  became 
convinced  how  much  hypothesis  was  ranked  under  the 
name  of  science  and  philosophy  in  books ; he  seems  to 
have  perceived  the  necessity  of  experiment  and  induc- 
tion in  the  discovery  of  real  knowledge  ; but  did  not 
methodize  his  ideas  sufficiently,  to  pursue  that  plan 
with  its  full  advantage.  After  taking  his  degree  at 
Louvain  he  travelled  during  ten  years,  and  in  this 
period  acquired  some  practical  knowledge  of  chemis- 
try. On  his  return  in  1609  he  married  a noble  lady  of 
large  fortune,  which  enabled  him  to  pursue  his  re- 
searches into  the  three  kingdoms  of  nature  with  little 
interruption.  He  declined  visiting  patients,  but  gave 
gratuitous  advice  to  those  who  went  to  consult  him ; 
and  he  boasts  of  having  cured  several  thousands  an- 
nually. He  continued  his  investigations  with  astonish- 
ing diligence  during  thirty  years,  and  made  several  dis- 
coveries in  chemistry ; among  which  w'ere  certain 
articles  possessed  of  considerable  activity  on  the  human 
body.  This  confirmed  his  opposition  to  the  Galenical 
school,  the  absurd  hypotheses,  and  inert  practice  of 
which  he  attacked  with  great  warmth  and  ability.  In- 
deed he  contributed  greatly  to  overturn  their  influence ; 
but  from  a desire  to  explain  every  thing  on  chemical 
principles,  he  substituted  doctrines  equally  gratuitous 
or  unintelligible.  He  published  various  works  from 
time  to  time,  which  brought  him  considerable  reputa- 
tion, and  he  was  repeatedly  invited  to  Vienna;  but 
he  preferred  continuing  in  his  laboratory.  He  died 
in  1644. 

HELO'DES.  (From  rXo?,  a marsh.)  A term  ap- 
plied to  fevers  generated  from  marsh  miasma. 

HELO'SIS.  (From  rtXw,  to  turn.)  An  eversion  or 
turning  up  of  the  eyelids. 

HELVINE.  A sub-species  of  dodecahedral  garnet. 

He'lxines.  (From  eXxu,  to  draw  : so  called  be- 
cause it  sticks  to  whatever  it  touches.)  Pellilory  of 
the  wall. 

Hemalo'pia.  Corruptly  written  for  haemalopia. 

HEMATIN.  The  colouring  principle  of  logwood. 
See  Hcematoxylon  campechianum. 

HEMATU'RIA.  See  Hcematuria. 

HEMERALO'PIA.  (From  ryjispa,  the  day,  and  0ij/, 
the  eye.)  A defect  in  the  sight,  which  consists  in  being 
able  to  see  in  the  daytime,  but  not  in  the  evening. 
The  following  is  Scarpa’s  description  of  this  curious 
disorder.  Hemeralopia,  or  nocturnal  blindness , is  pro- 
perly nothfc.g  but  a kind  of  imperfect  periodical  amau- 
rosis, most  commonly  sympathetic  with  the  stomach. 
Its  paroxysms  come  on  towards  the  evening,  and  dis- 
appear in  the  morning.  The  disease  is  endemic  in 
some  countries,  and  epidemic,  at  certain  seasons  of  the 
year,  in  others.  At  sunset,  objects  appear  to  persons 
affected  with  this  complaint  as  if  covered  with  an  ash- 
coloured  veil,  which  gradually  changes  into  a dense 
cloud,  which  intervenes  between  the  eyes  and  sur- 
rounding objects.  Patients  wpth  hemeralopia,  have 
the  pwpil,  both  in  the  day  and  nighttime,  more  dilated, 
and  less  moveable  than  it  usually  is  in  healthy  eyes. 
The  majority  of  them,  however,  have  the  pupil  more 
or  less  moveable  in  the  daytime,  and  always  expanded 
and  motionless  at  night.  When  brought  into  a room 
faintly  lighted  by  a candle,  where  all  the  bystanders 
can  see  tolerably  well,  they  cannot  discern  at  all,  or  in 
a very  feeble  manner,  scarcely  any  one  object ; or  they 
only  find  themselves  able  to  distinguish  light  from 
darkness,  and  at  moonlight  their  sight  is  still  worse. 
At  daybreak  they  recover  their  sight,  which  continues 
perfect  all  the  rest  of  the  day  till  sunset. 

[“According  to  M.  Dujardin,  this  term  is  derived 
from  fiyepa,  the  day,  dXaoj,  blind,  and  the  eye ; 
and  in  its  right  signification  is  therefore  inferred  to  be 
diurna  ccecitudo , or  day  blindness.  In  the  same  sense, 
Dr.  Hillary  and  Dr.  Heberden,  have  employed  the 
term 

D d 


“ Hemeralopia  then,  which  is  of  very  rare  occur* 
rence,  stands  in  opposition  to  the  nyctalopia  of  the  an- 
cients, or  night-blindness.  Numerous  modern  writers, 
however,  have  used  these  terms  in  the  contrary  sense; 
considering  the  hemeralopia,  as  denoting  sight  during 
the  day,  and  blindness  in  the  night ; and  nyctalopia  as 
expressing  night-seeing,  (owl-sight,  as  the  French  call 
it,)  and  blindness  during  the  daytime.” — Cooper's 
Hur.  Die.  A.] 

HEMERALOPS.  (From  rjpepa,  the  day,  and  coif/, 
the  eye.)  One  who  can  see  but  in  the  daytime. 

Hemicerau'nios.  (From  ypiavs,  half,  and  Keipa), 
to  cut : so  called  because  it  was  cut  half  way  down.) 
A bandage  for  the  back  and  breast. 

HEMICRA'NIA.  (Frotn  ripiavs,  half,  and  upaviov , 
the  head.)  A pain  that  affects  only  one  side  of  the 
head.  It  is  generally  nervous  or  hysterical,  sometimes 
bilious ; and  in  both  cases  sometimes  comes  at  a regu- 
lar period,  like  an  ague.  When  it  is  accompanied  by 
a strong  pulsation  like  that  of  a nail  piereing  the  part, 
it  is  denominated  clavus. 

HEMIO'PSIA.  (From  rjpiavi,  half,  and  a >\p,  air 
eye.)  A defect  of  vision,  in  which  the  person  sees  the 
half,  but  not  the  whole  of  an  object. 

Hemipa'gia.  (From  rjpiavsi  half,  and  irayios , 
fixed.)  A fixed  pain  on  one  side  of  the  head.  See 
Hemicrania. 

HE.YllPLE'GIA.  (From  rjpiovs,  half,  and  nkyoad), 
to  strike.)  A paralytic  affection  of  one  side  of  the 
body.  See  Paralysis. 

HEMLOCK.  See  Conium  maculatum. 

HEMLOCK-DROPWORT.  See  (Enanthe  crocata. 

Hemlock , water.  See  Cicuta  virosa. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  lungs.  See  Hcemoptysis. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  nose.  See  Epistaxis. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  stomach.  See  Hwmatemesis. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  urinary  organs.  See  H<ema- 
turia. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  uterus.  See  Menorrhagia. 

HEMP.  See  Cannabis. 

HEMP-AGRIMONY.  See  Eupatorium  canniba- 
num. 

Hemp , water.  See  Eupatorium. 

HENBANE.  See  Hyoscyamus. 

HE'PAR.  ( Hepar , at  is.  n.  H7rap,  the  liver.)  See 
Liver. 

Hepar  sulphuris.  Liver  of  sulphur.  A sulphu- 
ret  made  either  with  potassa  or  soda.  See  Sulphure- 
tum  potassx. 

Hepar  uterinum.  The  placenta. 

HEPATA'L GIA.  (From  ?j7rap,  the  liver,  and  aXyoj, 
pain.)  Pain  in  the  liver. 

HEPATIC.  ( Hepaticus ; from  j;7:ap,  the  liver.) 

Belonging  to  the  liver. 

Hepatic  air.  See  Hydrogen  sulphuretted. 

Hepatic  artery.  Arteria  hepatica.  The  artery 
which  nourishes  the  substance  of  the  liver.  It  arises 
from  the  coeliac,  where  it  almost  touches  the  point  of 
the  lobulus  Spigelii.  Its  root  is  covered  by  the  pan- 
creas ; it  then  turns  a little  forwards,  and  passes  under 
the  pylorus  to  the  porta  of  the  liver,  and  runs  between 
the  biliary  ducts  and  the  vena  porta5,  where  it  divides 
into  two  large  branches,  one  of  which  enters  the  right, 
and  the  other  the  left  lobe  of  the  liver.  In  this  place 
it  is  enclosed  along  with  all  the  other  vessels  in  the 
capsule  of  Glisson. 

Hepatic  duct.  Ductus  hepaticus.  The  trunk  of 
the  biliary  pores.  It  runs  from  the  sinus  of  the  liver 
towards  the  duodenum,  and  is  joined  by  the  cystic 
duct,  to  form  the  ductus  communis  choledochus.  See 
Biliary  duct. 

Hepatic  veins.  See  Vein,  and  Vena  porta;. 

Hepatica.  (From  ryirap,  the  liver:  so  called  be- 
cause it  was  thought  to  be  useful  in  diseases  of  the 
liver.)  See  Marcliantia  polymorpha. 

Hepatica  nobilis.  See  Anemone  hepatica. 

Hepatica  terrestris.  See  Marchantia  poly- 
I morpha.  • 

HEPATIRRH^E'A.  (From  urrap,  the  liver,  and 
peij),  to  flow.)  1.  A purging  with  bilious  evacuations. 

2.  A diarrhoea,  in  which  portions  of  flesh,  like  liver 
are  voided. 

HEPATITE.  Foetid,  straight,  lamellar,  heavy  spar. 
A variety  of  lamellar  barytes,  containing  a small  quan- 
tity of  sulphur,  in  consequence  of  which,  when  it 
is  heated  or  rubbed,  it  emits  a foetid  sulphureous 
. odour. 


417 


HEP 


HER 


HEPATITIS.  (From  ynap,  the  liver.)  Inflamma- 
tio  hcpalis.  An  inflammation  of  the  liver.  A genus 
of  disease  in  theclass  Pyrexia , and  order  Phlegmasia 
of  Cullen,  who  defines  it  “ febrile  affection,  attended 
with  tension  and  pain  of  the  right  hypochondrium, 
©ften  pungent,  like  that  of  a pleurisy,  but  more  fre- 
quently dull,  or  obtuse,  a pain  at  the  clavicle  and  at  the 
top  of  the  shoulder  of  the  right  side;  much  uneasiness 
in  lying  down  on  the  left  side : difficulty  of  breathing  ; 
a dry  cough,  vomiting,  and  hiccup.” 

Besides  the  causes  producing  other  inflammations, 
such  as  the  application  of  cold,  external  injuries  from 
contusions,  blows,  &c.  this  disease  may  be  occasioned 
by  certain  passions  of  the  mind,  by  violent  exercise, 
by  intense  summer  hents,  by  long-continued  intermit- 
tent and  remittent  fevers,  and  by  various  solid  concre- 
tions in  the  substance  of  the  liver.  In  warm  climates 
this  viscus  is  more  apt  to  be  affected  with  inflamma- 
tion than  perhaps  any  other  part  of  the  body,  proba- 
bly from  the  increased  secretion  of  bile  which  takes 
place  when  the  blood  is  thrown  on  the  internal  pajts, 
by  an  exposure  to  cold  ; or  from  the  bile  becoming 
acrid,  and  thereby  exciting  an  irritation  in  the  part. 
Hepatitis  has  generally  been  considered  of  two  kinds  ; 
one  the  acute,  the  other  chronic. 

The  acute  species  of  hepatitis  comes  on  with  a pain 
in  the  right  hypochondrium,  extending  up  to  the  cla 
vide  and  shoulder ; which  is  much  increased  by  press- 
ing upon  the  part,  and  is  accompanied  with  a cough, 
oppression  cf  breathing,  and  difficulty  of  lying  on  the 
left  side  ; together  with  nausea  and  sickness,  and  often 
with  a vomiting  of  bilious  matter.  The  urine  is  of  a 
deep  saffron  colour,  and  small  in  quantity  ; there  is 
loss  of  appetite,  great  thirst,  and  costiveness,  with  a 
strong,  hard,  and  frequent  pulse;  and  when  the  dis- 
ease has  continued  for  some  days,  the  skin  and  eyes 
become  tinged  of  a deep  yellow.  When  the  inflam- 
mation is  in  the  cellular  structure  or  substance  of  the 
liver,  it  is  called  by  some  hepatitis  parenchymatosa, 
and  when  the  gall-bladder  which  is  attached  to  this 
organ,  is  the  seat  of  the  inflammation,  it  has  been 
called  hepatitis  cystica. 

The  chronic  species  is  usually  accompanied  with  a 
morbid  complexion,  loss  of  appetite  and  flesh,  costive- 
ness, indigestion,  flatulency,  pains  in  the  stomach,  a 
yellow  tinge  of  the  skin  and  eyes,  clay-coloured  stools, 
high-coloured  urine,  depositing  a red  sediment  and 
ropy  mucus ; an  obtuse  pain  in  the  region  of  the  liver, 
extending  to  the  shoulder,  and  not  unfrequeutly  with  a 
considerable  degree  of  asthma. 

These  symptoms  are,  however,  often  so  mild  and 
insignificant  as  to  pass  almost  unnoticed ; as  large  ab- 
scesses have  been  found  in  the  liver  upon  dissection, 
which  in  the  person’s  lifetime  had  created  little  or  no 
inconvenience,  and  which  we  may  presume  to  have 
been  occasioned  by  some  previous  inflammation. 

Hepatitis,  like  other  inflammations,  may  end  in  re- 
solution, suppuration,  gangrene,  or  scirrhus,  but  its 
termination  in  gangrene  is  a rare  occurrence. 

The  disease  is  seldom  attended  with  fatal  conse- 
quences of  an  immediate  nature,  and  is  often  carried 
off  by  haemorrhage  from  the  nose,  or  haemorrhoidal 
vessels,  and  likewise  by  sweating,  by  a diarrhoea,  or 
by  an  evacuation  of  urine,  depositing  a copious  sedi- 
ment. In  a few  instances,  it  has  been  observed  to 
cease  on  the  appearance  of  erysipelas,  in  some^external 
part. 

When  suppuration  takes  place,  as  it  generally  does, 
before  this  forms  an  adhesion  with  some  neighbouring 
part,  the  pus  is  usually  discharged  by  the  different 
outlets  with  which  this  part  is  connected,  as  by  cough- 
ing, vomiting,  purging,  or  by  an  abscess  breaking  out- 
wardly ; but,  iu  some  instances,  the  pus  has  been  dis- 
charged into  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen,  where  no  such 
adhesion  had  been  formed. 

On  dissection,  the  liver  is  often  found  much  enlarged, 
and  hard  to  the  touch ; its  colour  is  more  of  a deep 
purple  than  what  is  natural,  and  its  membranes  are 
more  or  less  affected  by  inflammation.  Dissections 
likewise  show  that  adhesions  to  the  neighbouring  parts 
often  take  place,  and  large  abscesses,  containing  a con- 
siderable quantity  of  pus,  are  often  found  in  its  sub- 
stance. 

The  treatment  of  .this  disease  must  be  distinguished, 
as  it  is  of  the  acute,  or  of  the  chronic  form.  In  acute 
hepatitis,  where  the  symptoms  run  high,  and  the  con- 
stitution will  admit,  we  should,  In  the  beginning,  bleed 
418 


freely  from  the  arm;  which  it  will  seldom  be  neees 
sary  to  repeat,  if  carried  to  the  proper  extent  at  first  > 
in  milder  cases,  or  where  there  is  less  power  in  the 
system,  the  local  abstraction  of  blood,  by  clipping  or 
leeching,  may  be  sufficient.  We  should  next  give  calo- 
mel alone,  or  combined  with  opium,  and  followed  up 
by  infusion  of  senna  with  neutral  salts,  jalap,  or  other 
cathartic,  to  evacuate  bile,  and  thoroughly  clear  out 
the  intestines.  When,  by  these  means,  the  inflamma- 
tion is  materially  abated,  wTe  should  endeavour  to  pro- 
mote diaphoresis  by  suitable  medicines,  assisted  by 
the  warm  bath;  a blister  may  be  applied;  and  the 
antiphlogistic  regimen  is  to  be  duly  enforced.  But  the 
dischaige  of  bile,  by  occasional  doses  of  calomel,  must 
not  be  neglected : and  where  the  alvine  evacuations 
are  deficient  in  that  secretion,  it  w ill  be  proper  to  push 
this,  or  other  mercurial  preparation,  till  the  mouth  is 
in  some  measure  affected.  In  India  this  is  the  re- 
medy chiefly  relied  upon,  and  exhibited  often  in  much 
larger  doses  than  appear  advisable  in  more  temperate 
climates.  Should  the  disease  proceed  to  suppuration, 
means  must  be  used  to  support  the  strength  ; a nutri- 
tious diet,  with  a moderate  quantity  of  wine,  and  de- 
coction of  bark,  or  other  tonic  medicine : fomentations 
or  poultices  will  also  be  proper  to  promote  the  discharge 
externally ; but  when  any  fluctuation  is  perceptible,  it 
is  better  to  make  an  opening,  lest  it  should  burst  in- 
w'ardiy.  In  the  chronic  form  of  the  disease,  mercury 
is  the  remedy  chiefly  to  be  relied  upon  ; but  due  cau- 
tion must  be  observed  in  its  use,  especially  in  scrofu- 
lous subjects.  It  appears  more  effectual  in  restoring 
the  healthy  action  of  the  liver,  when  taken  internally : 
but  if  the  mildest  forms,  though  guarded  by  opium,  or 
rather  sedative,  cannot  so  be  borne,  the  ointment  may 
be  rubbed  in.  In  the  meantime,  calumba,  or  other 
tonic,  with  antacids,  and  mild  aperients,  ns  rhubarb,  to 
regulate  the  state  of  the  primae  via;,  will  be  proper. 
Where  the  system  will  not  admit  the  adequate  use  of 
mercury,  the  nitric  acid  is  the  most  promising  substi- 
tute. An  occasional  blister  may  be  required  to  relieve 
unusual  pain ; or  w here  this  is  very  limited  and  con- 
tinued, an  issue,  or  seton  may  answer  better.  The 
strength  must  be  supported  by  a light  nutritious  diet ; 
and  gentle  exercise  with  warm  clothing,  to  maintain 
the  perspiration  steadily,  is  important,  in  the  convales- 
cent state:  more  especially  a sea  voyage  in  persona 
long  resident  in  India  has  often  appeared  the  only 
means  of  restoring  perfect  health. 

Hepatitis  parenchymatosa.  Inflammation  of 
the  substance  of  the  liver. 

Hepatitis  peritonaea  lis.  Inflammation  in  the 
peritonaeum  covering  the  liver. 

HEPATOCE'LE.  (From  rjnap,  the  liver,  and  *77X7, 
a tumour.)  A hernia,  in  which  a portion  of  the  liver 
protrudes  through  the  abdominal  parietes. 

Hepato'rium.  The  same  as  Kupatorium. 

Hephae'stias.  (From  H(pais’os>  Vulcan,  or  fire.) 
A drying  plaster  of  burnt  tiles. 

Hepi'alus.  (From  ymos,  gentle.)  A mild  quoti- 
dian fever.  • 

HEPTA'NDKIA.  (From  enra,  seven,  and  avyp,  a 
man,  or  husband.)  The  name  of  a class  in  the  sexual 
system  of  plants,  consisting  of  such  hermaphrodite 
flow’ers  as  have  seven  stamens. 

Heptapha'rmacum.  (From  cn'ja,  seven,  and  (papya - 
kov,  medicine.)  A medicine  composed  of  seven  in 
gredients,  the  principal  of  which  were  cerusse,  litharge, 
wax,  fee. 

HEPTAPHY'LLUM.  (From  cn'Ja,  seven,  and 
0uAA ov,  a leaf : so  named  because  it  consists  of  seven 
leaves.)  See  Tormentilla  erecta. 

Heptaple'urum.  (From  tir'la,  seven,  and  7tA evpa, 
a rib:  so  named  from  its  having  seven  ribs  upon  the 
leaf.)  The  herb  plantain.  See  Plantago  major. 

HERA'CLEA.  1.  Water  hoarhound. 

2.  The  common  wild  marjoram  received  a trivial 
name  from  its  growing  in  abundance  in  Heraclea.  See 
Origanum  vulgare. 

HERA’CLEUM.  (From  Heraclea , the  city  near 
which  it  grows ; or  frpin  ’HpaxA^f,  Hercules,  being  the 
plant  sacred  to  him.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Liunaan  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order, 

IJigynia. 

Heraci.rum  gummiferum.  This  specii'9  is  sup- 
posed by  Wildenow  to  afford  the  gum  ammoniacum. 

See  Ammoniacum. 

IIeraclkum  sPONDYLiuii.  Branca  ursina  Oerma- 


HER 


HER 


nica;  Spondylium.  Cow-parsnip.  All-heal.  Hera- 
cleum—fo liol is  pinnatifidis , Icevibus ; Jloribus  unifor- 
mibus  of  Linnceus.  The  plant  which  is  directed  by 
the  name  of  Branca  ursina  in  foreign  pharmacopoeias. 
In  Siberia  it  grows  extremely  high,  and  appears  to  have 
virtues  in  the  cure  of  dysentery  which'  the  plants  of 
this  country  do  not  possess. 

[“The  Hcracleum  Lanatum  is  one  of  our  largest 
native  umbellate  plants,  growing  frequently  to  the 
height  of  a man,  with  a stalk  more  than  an  inch  in 
thickness.  Its  taste  is  strong  and  acrid.  The  bruised 
root  or  leaves,  externally  applied,  excite  rubefaction. 
Internally  used,  this  article  has  been  recommended  in 
epilepsy.  It  appears  to  me  to  possess  a virose  charac- 
ter, and  should  be  used  with  caution,  especially  when 
gathered  from  a watery  or  damp  situation.”— Big. 
Mat.  Med.  A.] 

HERB-BENNET.  See  Oeurn  urbanum. 

HERB-OF-GRACE.  See  Gratiola. 

HERB  MASTICH.  See  Thymus  mastichina. 

Herb-trinity.  See  Anemone  hepatica. 

HERBA.  An  herb.  A plant  is  properly  so  called 
which  bears  its  flower  and  fruit  once  only,  and  then 
with  its  root  wholly  perishes.  There  are  two  kinds : 
annuals , which  perish  the  same  year;  and  biennials, 
which  have  their  leaves  the  first  year,  and  their  flowers 
and  fruit  the  second,  and  then  die  away. 

By  the  term  herba , Linnajus  denominates  that  por- 
tion of  every  vegetable  which  arises  from  the  root, 
and  is  terminated  by  the  fructification. 

Herba  britannica.  See  Rumex  hydrolap athum. 

Herba  militaris.  See  Achilloea  millefolium. 

Herba  sacra.  See  Verbena  trifoliata. 

Herba  trinitatis.  See  Anemone  hepatica. 

HERBACEUS.  Herbaceous.  Plants  are  so  con- 
sidered which  have  succulent  stems  or  stalks,  and  die 
down  to  the  root  every  year. 

HERBARIUM.  A collection  of  dried  or  preserved 
plants ; called  also  Hortus  siccus. 

HERCULES’S  ALL-HEAL.  See  Laserpitium 
chironium. 

Hercules  bovii.  Gold  and  mercury  dissolved  in 
a distillation  of  copperas,  nitre,  and  sea-salt. 

HERE'DITARY.  (From  hceres,  an  heir.)  A disease, 
or  predisposition  to  a disease,  which  is  transferred  from 
parents  to  their  children. 

HERMA'PHRODITE.  ( Hermaphroditus ; from 
'Ep/^r/f,  Mercury,  and  AcppoSi^y,  Venus,  i.  e.  partaking 
of  both  sexes.)  1.  The  true  hermaphrodite  of  the  an- 
cients was,  the  man  with  male  organs  of  generation, 
and  the  female  stature  of  body,  that  is,  narrow  chest 
and  large  pelvis ; or  the  woman  with  female  organs  of 
generation,  and  the  male  stature  of  body,  that  is,  broad 
chest  and  narrow  pelvis.  The  term  is  now,  how- 
ever, used  to  express  any  lusus  natures  wherein  the 
parts  of  generation  appear  to  be  a mixture  of  both 
sexes 

2.  In  botany,  an  hermaphrodite  flower  is  one  which 
contains  both  the  male  and  female  organs,  for  the 
production  of  the  fruit,  within  the  same  calyx  and 
petals. 

HERME'TIC.  (From  'Eppiji,  Mercury.)  In  the 
language  of  the  ancient  chemists,  Hermes  was  the 
father  of  chemistry,  and  the  hermetic  seal  was  the 
closing  the  end  of  a glass  vessel  while  in  a state  of 
fusion,  according  to  the  usage  of  chemists. 

HERMODACTYL.  See  Hermodactylus. 

HERMODA'CTYLUS.  ('EpixodaicIvXos.  Etymolo- 
gists have  always  derived  this  word  from  rE puys, 
Mercury,  and  Sau'JvXos,  a finger.  It  is,  however,  pro- 
bably named  from  Hermus , a river  in  Asia,  upon  whose 
banks  it  grows,  and  San'Jvi.os,  a date,  which  it  is  like.) 
Anima  articulorum.  The  root  of  a species  of  col- 
chicum,  not  yet  ascertained,  but  supposed  to  be  the 
Colchicum  illyricum  of  Linnaeus,  of  the  shape  of  a 
heart,  flattened  on  one  side,  with  a furrow  on  the  other, 
of  a white  colour,  compact  and  solid,  yet  easy  to  cut 
or  powder.  This  root,  which  has  a viscous,  sweetish, 
farinaceous  taste,  and  no  remarkable  smell,  is  import- 
ed from  Turkey.  Its  use  is  totally  laid  aside  in  the 
practice  of  the  present  day.  Formerly  the  roots  were 
esteemed  as  cathartics,  which  power  is  wanting  in 
those  that  reach  this  country. 

HE'RNIA.  (From  rpvoj,  a branch;  from  its  p-o- 
truding  out  of  its  place.)  A rupture.  Surgeons  un- 
derstand, by  the  term  hernia , a tumour  formed  by  the 
protrusion  of  some  of  the  viscera  of  the  abdomen  out 

D d 2 


of  that  cavity  into  a kind  of  sac,  composed  of  the 
portion  of  peritoneum,  which  is  pushed  before  them. 
However,  there  are  certainly  some  cases  which  will 
not.  be  comprehended  in  this  definition;  either  because 
the  parts  are  not  protruded  at  all,  or  have  no  hernial 
sac.  The  places  in  which  these  swellings  most  fre- 
quently make  their  appearance,  are  the  groin,  the  navel, 
the  labia  pudendi,  and  the  upper  arid  forepart  of  the 
thigh ; they  do  also  occur  at  every  point  of  the  anterior 
part  of  the  abdomen ; and  there  are  several  less  com- 
mon instances,  in  which  hernial  tumours  present  them- 
selves at  the  foramen  ovale,  in  the  perinaeum,  in  the 
vagina,  at  the  ischiatic  notch,  &c.  The  parts  which, 
by  being  thrust  forth  from  the  cavity,  in  whiclr  they 
ought  naturally  to  remain,  mostly  produce  herniae,  are 
either  a portion  of  the  omentum,  or  a part  of  the  in- 
testinal canal,  or  both  together.  But  the  stomach,  the 
liver,  the  spleen,  uterus,  ovaries,  bladder,  & c.  have 
been  known  to  form  the  contents  of  some  hernial  tu- 
mours. From  these  two  circumstances  of  situations 
and  contents,  are  derived  all  the  different  appellations 
by  which  herniae  are  distinguished.  If  a portion  of 
intestine  only  forms  the  contents  of  the  tumour,  it  is 
called  enterocele;  if  a piece  of  omentum  only,  epiplo- 
cele;  and  if  both  intestine  and  omentum  contribute  ta 
the  formation  of  a tumour,  it  is  called  enter o-epiplo- 
cele.  When  the  contents  of  a hernia  are  protruded  at 
the  abdominal  ring,  but  only  pass  as  low  as  the  groin* 
or  labium  pudendi,  the  case  receives  the  name  of  bubo* 
nocele , or  inguinal  hernia;  when  the  parts  descend 
into  the  scrotum,  it  is  called  an  oscheocele  or  scrotal 
hernia.  The  crural , or  femoral  hernia , is  the  name 
given  to  that  which  takes  place  below  Poupart’s  liga- 
ment. When  the  bowels  protrude  at  the  navel,  the 
case  is  named  an  exomphalos , or  umbilical  hernial 
and  ventral  is  the  epithet  given  to  the  swelling,  when 
it  occurs  at  any  other  promiscuous  part  of  the  front  of 
the  abdomen.  The  congenital  rupture  is  a very  parti- 
cular case,  in  which  the  protruded  viscera  are  not 
covered  with  a common  hernial  sac  of  peritoneum, 
but  are  lodged  in  the  cavity  of  the  tunica  vaginalis,  in 
contact  with  the  testicle;  and,  as  must  be  obvious,  it 
is  not  named,  like  hernia  in  general,  from  its  situation, 
or  contents,  but  from  the  circumstances  of  its  existing 
from  the  time  of  birth. 

When  the  hernial  contents  lie  quietly  in  the  sac,  and 
admit  of  being  readily  put  back  into  the  abdomen,  it  is 
termed  a reducible  hernia : and  when  they  suffer  no 
constriction,  yet  cannot  be  put  back,  owing  to  adhe- 
sions, or  their  large  size  in  relation  to  the  aperture, 
through  which  they  have  to  pass,  the  hernia  is  termed 
irreducible.  An  incarcerated , or  strangulated  hernia, 
signifies  one  which  not  only  cannot  be  reduced,  but 
suffers  constriction:  so  that,  if  a piece  of  intestine  bo 
protruded,  the  pressure  to  which  it  is  subjected  stops 
the  passage  of  its  contents  onward  towards  the  anus, 
makes  the  bowel  inflame,  and  brings  on  a train  of  most 
alarming  and  often  fatal  consequences. 

The  general  symptoms  of  a hernia,  which  is  reduci- 
ble and  free  from  strangulation,  are — an  indolent  tu- 
mour at  some  point  of  the  parietes  of  the  abdomen ; 
most  frequently  descending  out  of  the  abdominal  ring, 
or  from  just  below  PoupartTs  ligament,  or  else  out  of 
the  navel  ; but  occasionally  from  various  other  situa- 
tions. The  swelling  mostly  originates  suddenly,  ex- 
cept in  the  circumstances  above  related ; and  it  is  sub- 
ject to  a change  of  size,  being  smaller  when  the  patient 
lies  down  upon  his  back,  and  larger  when  he  stands 
up,  or  draws  in  his  breath.  The  tumour  frequently 
diminishes  when  pressed,  and  grows  large  again  when 
the  pressure  is  removed.  Its  size  and  tension  often 
increase  after  a meal,  or  when  the  patient  is  flatulent. 
Patients  with  hernia,  are  apt  to  be  troubled  with  colic, 
constipation,  and  vomiting  in  consequence  of  the  un- 
natural situation  of  the  bowels.  Very  often,  however, 
the  functions  of  the  viscera  seem  to  suffer  little  or  no 
interruption. 

If  the  case  be  an  enterocele , and  the  portion  of  the 
intestine  be  small,  the  tumour  is  small  in  proportion; 
but  though  small,  yet,  if  the  gut  be  distended  with 
wind,  inflamed,  or  have  any  degree  of  stricture  mada 
on  it,  it  will  be  tense,  resist  the  impression  of  the  finger, 
and  give  pain  upon  being  handled.  On  the  contrary,, 
if  there  be  no  stricture,  and  the  intestine  suffers  no  de- 
gree of  inflammation,  let  the  prolapsed  piece  be  of 
what  length  it  may,  and  the  tumour  of  whatever  size, 
yet  the  tension  will  be  little,  and  no  pain  will  attend 


HER 


HER 


the  handling  of  it ; upon  the  patient’s  coughing,  it  will 
feel  as  if  it  was  blown  into ; and,  in  general,  it  will  be 
found  very  easily  returnable.  A guggling  noise  is 
often  made  when  the  bowel  is  ascending. 

If  the  hernia  be  an  epiplocele,  or  one  of  the  omental 
kind,  the  tumour  has  a more  flabby  and  a more  un- 
equal feel ; it  is  in  general  perfectly  indolent,  is  more 
compressible,  and  (if  in  the  scrotum)  is  more  oblong 
and  less  round  than  the  swelling  occasioned  in  the 
same  situation  by  an  intestinal  hernia ; and,  if  the 
quantity  be  large,  and  the  patient  an  adult,  it  is,  in 
some  measure,  distinguishable  by  its  greater  weight. 

If  the  case  be  an  enter o-cpipLocele , that  is,  one  con- 
sisting of  both  intestine  and  omentum,  the  character- 
istic marks  will  be  less  clear  than  in  either  of  the  sim- 
ple cases ; but  the  disease  may  easily  be  distinguished 
from  every  other  one,  by  any  body  in  the  habit  of 
making  the  examination. 

Hernia  cerebri.  Fungus  cerebri.  This  name  is 
given  to  a tumour  which  every  now  and  then  rises 
from  the  brain,  through  an  ulcerated  opening  in  the 
dura  mater,  and  protrudes  through  a perforation  in 
the  cranium,  made  by  the  previous  application  of  the 
trephine. 

Hernia  congenita.  (So  called  because  it  is,  as  it 
were,  born  with  the  person.)  This  species  of  hernia 
consists  in  the  adhesion  of  a protruded  portion  of  intes- 
tine or  omentum  to  the  testicle,  after  its  descent  into 
the  scrotum.  This  adhesion  takes  place  while  the 
testicle  is  yet  in  the  abdomen.  Upon  its  leaving  the 
abdomen,  it  draws  the  adhering  intestine,  or  omentum, 
along  with  it  into  the  scrotum,  where  it  forms  the 
hernia  congenita. 

From  the  term  congenital , we  might  suppose  that 
this  hernia  always  existed  at  the  time  of  birth.  The- 
protrusion,  however,  seldom  occurs  till  after  this  pe- 
riod, on  the  operation  of  the  usual  exciting  causes  of 
hernia  in  general.  The  congenital  hernia  does  not 
usually  happen  till  some  months  after  birth ; in  some 
instances  not  till  a late  period.  Hey  relates  a case,  in 
which  a hernia  congenita  was  first  formed  in  a young 
man,  aged  sixteen,  whose  right  testis  had,  a little  while 
before  the  attack  of  the  disease,  descended  into  the 
scrotum.  It  seems  probable  that,  in  cases  of  hernia 
congenita,  which  actually  take  place  when  the  testicle 
descends  into  the  scrotum  before  birth,  the  event  may 
commonly  be  referred,  as  observed  above,  to  the  testi- 
cle having  contracted  an  adhesion  to  a piece  of  intes- 
tine, or  of  the  omentum,  in  its  passage  to  the  ring. 
Wrisberg  found  one  testicle  which  had  not  passed  the 
ring,  adhering,  by  means  of  a few  slender  filaments,  to 
the  omentum,  just  above  this  aperture,  in  an  infant 
that  died  a few  days  after  birth. 

Excepting  the  impossibility  of  feeling  the  testicle  in 
hernia  congenit^  as  we  can  in  most  cases  of  bubono- 
cele, (which  criterion  Mr.  Samuel  Cooper,  in  his  Sur- 
gical Dictionary,  observes  Mr.  Pott  should  have  men- 
tioned,) the  following  account  is  very  excellent.  “The 
appearance  of  a hernia,  in  very  early  infancy,  will 
always  make  it  probable  that  it  is  of  this  kind;  but  in 
an  adult,  there  is  no  reason  for  supposing  his  rupture 
to  be  of  this  sort,  but  his  having  been  afflicted  with  it 
from  his  infancy ; there  is  no  external  mark,  or  cha- 
racter, whereby  it  can  be  certainly  distinguished  from 
the  one  contained  in  a common  hernial  sac  ; neither 
would  it  be  of  any  material  use  in  practice,  if  there 
was.” 

Hernia  cruralis.  Femoral  hernia.  The  parts 
composing  this  kind  of  hernia  are  always  protruded 
under  Poupart’s  ligament,  and  the  swelling  is  situated 
towards  the  inner  part  of  the  bend  of  the  thigh.  The 
rupture  descends  on  the  side  of  the  femoral  artery  and 
vein,  between  these  vessels  and  the  os  pubis.  Fe- 
males are  particularly  subject  to  this  kind  of  rupture 
in  consequence  of  the  great  breadth  of  their  pelvis, 
while  in  them  the  inguinal  hernia  is  rare.  It  has  been 
computed,  that  nineteen  out  of  twenty  married  women, 
afflicted  with  hernia,  have  this  kind;  but  that  not  one 
out  of  a hundred  unmarried  females,  or  out  of  the 
same  number  of  men,  have  this  form  of  the  disease. 
The  situation  of  the  tumour  makes  it  liable  to  be  mis- 
taken for  an  enlarged  inguinal  gland  ; and  many  fatal 
events  are  recorded  to  have  happened  from  the  sur- 
geon’s ignorance  of  the  existence  of  the  disease.  A 
gland  can  only  become  enlarged  by  the  gradual  effects 
of  inflammation ; the  swelling  of  a crural  hernia  comes 
on  in  a momentary  and  sudden  manner ; and,  when 


strangulated,  occasions  the  train  of  symptoms  described 
in  the  account  ot  the  hernia  incarcerate,  which  symp- 
toms an  enlarged  gland  could  never  occasion.  Such 
circumstances  seem  to  be  sufficiently  discriminative : 
though  the  feel  of  the  two  kinds  of  swelling  is  often 
not  in  itself  enough  to  make  the  surgeon  decided  in 
his  opinion.  A femoral  hernia  may  be  mistaken  for  a 
bubonocele,  when  the  expanded  part  of  the  swelling 
lies  over  Poupart’s  ligament.  As  the  taxis  and  opera- 
tion for  the  first  case  ought  to  be  done  differently  from 
those  for  the  latter,  the  error  may  lead  to  very  bad 
consequences.  The  femoral  hernia,  however,  may 
always  be  discriminated,  by  the  neck  of  the  tumour 
having  Poupart/s  ligament  above  it.  In  the  bubono- 
cele, the  angle  of  the  pubes  is  behind  and  below  this 
part  of  the  sac;  but  in  the  femoral  hernia,  it  is  on  the 
same  horizontal  level,  a little  on  the  inside  of  it. 

Until  very  l-ately,  the  stricture,  in  cases  of  femoral 
hernia,  was  always  supposed  to  be  produced  by  the 
lower  border  of  the  external  oblique  muscle,  or  as  it  is 
termed,  Poupart’s  ligament.  A total  change  of  surgi- 
cal opinion  on  this  subject  has,  however,  latterly  taken 
place,  in  consequence  of  the  accurate  observations  first 
made  in  1768,  by  Gimbernat,  surgeon  to  the  king  of 
Spain.  In  the  crural  hernia,  (says  he,}  the  aperture 
through  which  the  parts  issue  is  not  formed  by  two 
bauds,  (as  in  the  inguinal  hernia,)  but  it  is  a foramen, 
almost  round,  proceeding  from  the  internal  margin  of 
the  crural  arch,  (Poupart’s  ligament,)  near  its  insertion 
into  the  branch  of  the  os  pubis,  between  the  bone  and 
the  iliac  vein,  so  that,  in  this  hernia,  the  branch  of  the 
os  pubis  is  situated  more  internally  than  the  intestine, 
and  a little  behind ; the  vein  externally,  and  behind ; 
and  the  internal  border  of  the  arch  before.  Now  it  is 
this  border  which  always  forms  the  strangulation. 

Hernia  flatulenta.  A swelling  of  the  side, 
caused  by  air  that  has  escaped  through  the  pleura:  an 
obsolete  tefm. 

Hernia  gutturis.  Bronchocele,  or  tumour  of  the 
bronchial  gland. 

Hernia  humoralis.  See  Orchitis. 

Hernia  incarcerata.  Incarcerated  hernia.  Stran- 
gulated hernia,  or  a hernia  with  stricture.  The  symp- 
toms are  a swelling  in  the  groin,  &. c.  resisting  the  im- 
pression of  the  fingers.  If  the  hernia  be  of  the  intes- 
tinal kind,  it  is  generally  painful  to  the  touch,  and  the 
pain  is  increased  by  coughing,  sneezing,  or  standing 
upright.  These  are  the  very  first  symptoms,  and,  if 
they  are  not  relieved,  are  soon  followed  by  others; 
viz.  a sickness  at  the  stomach,  a frequent  retching,  or 
inclination  to  vomit,  a stoppage  of  all  discharge  per 
anum,  attended  with  frequent  hard  pulse,  and  some 
degree  of  fever.  These  are  the  first  symptoms;  and 
if  the>  are  not  appeased  by  the  return  of  the  intestine, 
that  is,  if  the  attempts  made  for  this  purpose  do  not 
succeed,  the  sickness  becomes  more  troublesome,  the 
vomiting  more  frequent,  the  pain  more  intense,  the 
tension  of  the  belly  greater,  the  fever  higher,  and  a 
general  restlessness  comes  on,  which  is  very  terrible 
to  bear.  When  this  is  the  6tate  of  the  patient,  no 
time  is  to  be  }ost ; a very  little  delay  is  now  of  the 
utmost  consequence;  and  if  the  one  single  remedy, 
which  the  disease  is  now  capable  of,  be  not  admi- 
nistered immediately,  it  will  generally  baffle  every 
other  attempt.  This  remedy  is  the  operation  whereby 
the  parts  engaged  in  the  stricture  may  be  set  free.  If 
this  be  not  now  performed,  the  vomiting  is  soon  ex- 
changed for  a convulsive  hjpeup,  and  a frequent  gulp- 
ing up  of  bilious  matter:  the  tension  of  the  belly,  the 
restlessness  and  fever,  having  been  considerably  in- 
creased for  a few  hours,  the  patient  suddenly  becomes 
perfectly  easy,  the  belly  subsides,  the  pulse,  from 
having  been  hard,  full,  and  frequent,  becomes  low, 
languid,  and  generally  interrupted';  and  the  skin,  espe- 
cially that  of  the  limbs,  cold  and  moist ; the  eyes  have 
now  a languor  and  glassiness,  a lack  lustre  not  easy  to 
be  described : the  tumour  of  the  part  disappears,  and 
the  skin  covering  it  sometimes  changes  its  natural  co- 
lour for  a livid  hue;  but  whether  it  keeps  or  loses  its 
colour,  it  has  an  emphysematous  feel,  a crepitus  to 
the  touch,  which  will  easily  be  conceived  by  all  who 
have  attended  to  it,  but  is  not  easy  to  convey  an  idea 
of  by  words.  This  crepitus  is  the  too  sure  indicator 
of  gangrenous  mischief  within.  In  this  state,  the 
gut  either  goes  up  spontaneously  or  is  returned  with 
the  smallest  degree  of  pressure;  a discharge  is  made 
by  stool,  and  the  patient  is  generally  much  pleased  at 


HER 


HER 

the  ease  he  finds ; but  this  pleasure  is  of  short  dura- 
tion, for  the  hiccup  and  the  cold  sweats  continuing 
and  increasing,  with  the  addition  of  spasmodic  rigours 
and  subiultus  tendinum,  the  tragedy  soon  finishes. 

Hernia  inguinalis.  Bubonocele.  Inguinal  hernia. 
The  hernia  inguinalis  is  so  called  because  it  appears  in 
both  sexes  at  the  groin.  It  is  one  of  the  divisions  of 
hernia,  and  includes  all  those  hernias  in  which  the 
parts  displaced  pass  out  of  the  abdomen  through  the 
ring,  that  is,  the  arch  formed  .by  the  aponeurosis  of 
the  musculus  obliquus  externus  in  the  groin,  for  the 
passage  of  the  spermatic  vessels  in  men.  and  the  round 
ligament  in  women.  The  parts  displaced  that  form 
the  hernia,  the  part  into  which  they  fall,  the  manner 
of  the  hernia  being  produced,  and  the  time  it  has  con- 
tinued, occasion  great  differences  in  this  disorder. 
There  are  three  different  parts  that  may  produce  a 
hernia  in  the  groin,  viz.,  one  or  more  of  the  intestines, 
the  epiploon,  and  the  bladder.  That  which  is  formed 
by  one  or  more  of  the  intestines,  was  called,  by  the 
ancients,  enterocele.  The  intestine  which  most  fre- 
quently produces  the  hernia,  is  the  ilium:  because, 
being  placed  in  the  iliac  region,  it  is  nearer  the  groin 
than  the  rest : but  notwithstanding  the  situation  of  the 
other  inlN*5tines,  which  seems  not  to  allow  of  their 
coming  near  the  groin,  we  often  find  the  jejunum,  and 
frequently  also  a portion  of  the  colon  and  caecum,  in- 
cluded in  the  hernia.  It  must  be  remembered,  that  the 
mesentery  and  mesocolon  are  membranous  substances, 
capable  of  extension,  which,  by  little  and  little,  are 
sometimes  so  far  stretched  by  the  weight  of  the  intes- 
tines, as  to  escape  with  the  ilium,  in  this  species  of 
hernia.  The  hernia  made  by  the  epiploon,  is  called 
•piplocele , as  that  caused  by  the  epiploon  and  any  of 
the  intestines  together,  is  called  entero  epiplocclc.  The 
hernia  of  the  bladder  is  called  crytocele.  Hernia  of 
the  bladder  is  uncommon,  and  has  seldom  been  known 
to  happen  nut  in  conjunction  with  some  of  the  other 
viscera.  When  the  parts,  having  passed  through  the 
abdominal  rings,  descend  no  lower  than  the  groin,  it  is 
called  an  incomplete  hernia  ; when  they  fall  into  the 
scrotum  in  men,  or  into  the  labia  pudendi  in  women,  it 
is  then  termed  complete. 

The  marks  of  discrimination  between  some  other 
diseases  and  inguinal  hernia  are  these : — 

The  disorders  in  which  a mistake  may  possibly  be 
made,  are  the  circocele,  bubo,  hydrocele,  and  hernia 
humoralis,  or  inflamed  testicle. 

For  an  account  of  the  manner  of  distinguishing  cir- 
cocele from  a bubonocele,  see  Circocele. 

The  circumscribed  incompressible  hardness,  the  situ- 
ation of  the  tumour,  and  its  being  free  from  all  connex- 
ion with  the  spermatic  process,  will  sufficiently  point 
out  its  being  a bubo,  at  least  while  it  is  in  a recent 
state;  and  when  it  is  in  any  degree  suppurated,  he 
must  have  a very  small  share  of  the  tactiis  eruditus 
who  cannot  feel  the  difference  between  matter,  and 
either  a yiece  of  intestine  or  omentum. 

The  perfect  equality  of  the  whole  tumour,  and  free- 
dom and  smallness  of  the  spermatic  process  above  it, 
the  power  of  feeling  the  spermatic  vessels,  and  the  vas 
deferens  in  that  process ; its  being  void  of  pain  upon 
being  handled,  the  fluctuation  of  the  water,  the  gra- 
dual formation  of  the  swelling,  its  having  begun  below 
and  proceeded  upwards,  its  not  being  affected  by  any 
posture  or  action  of  the  patient,  nor  increased  by  his 
coughing  or  sneezing,  together  with  the  absolute  im- 
possibility of  feeling  the  testicle  at  the  bottom  of  the 
scrotum,  will  always,  to  an  intelligent  person,  prove 
the  disease  to  be  hydrocele. 

Pott,  however,  allows  that  there  are  some  exceptions 
in  which  the  testicle  cannot  be  felt  at  the  bottom  of  the 
scrotum,  in  cases  of  hernia.  In  recent  bubonoceles, 
while  the  hernial  sac  is  thin,  has  not  been  long,  or 
very  much  distended,  and  the  scrotum  still  preserves  a 
regularity  of  figure,  the  testicle  may  almost  always  be 
easily  felt  at  the  inferior  and  posterior  part  of  the 
tumour.  But  in  old  ruptures,  which  have  been  long, 
down,  in  which  the  quantity  of  contents  is  large,  the 
sac  considerably  thickened,  and  the  scrotum  of  an 
irregular  figure,  the  testicle  frequently  cannot  be  felt ; 
neither  is  it  in  general  easily  felt  in  the  congenital  her- 
nia, for  obvious  reasons. 

In  the  hernia  humoralis , the  pain  in  the  testicle,  its 
enlargement,  the  hardened  state  of  the  epididyinus, 
and  the  exemption  of  the  spermatic  cord  from  all  un- 
natural fulness,  are  such  marks  as  cannot  easily  be 


mistaken  ; not  to  mention  the  generally  preceding  go- 
norrhoea. But  if  any  doubt  still  remains  of  the  true 
nature  of  the  disease,  the  progress  of  it  from  above 
downwards,  its  different  state  and  size  in'  different  pos- 
tures, particularly  lying  and  standing,  together  with  its 
descent  and  ascent,  will,  if  duly  attended  to,  put  it  out 
of  all  doubt  that  the  tumour  is  a true  hernia. 

When  an  inguinal  hernia  does  not  descend  through 
the  abdominal  ring,  but  only  into  the  canal  for  the 
spermatic  cord,  it  is  covered  by  the  aponeurosis  of  the 
external  oblique  muscle,  and  the  swelling  is  small  and 
undefined. 

Now  and  then,  the  testicle  does  not  descend  into 
the  scrotum  till  a late  period.  The  first  appearance  of 
this  body  at  the  ring,  in  order Jq  get  into  its  natural 
situation,  might  be  mistaken  for  that  of  a herniaj  were 
the  surgeon  not  to  pay  attention  to  the  absence  of  the 
testicle  from  the  scrotum,  and  the  peculiar  sensation 
occasioned  by  pressing  the  swelling. 

Hernia  intestinalis.  A rupture  caused  by  the 
protrusion  of  a portion  of  the  intestine.  See  Hernia 
inguinalis. 

Hernia  ischiatica.  A rupture  at  the  ischiatic 
notch.  This  is  very  rare.  A case,  however,  which 
was  strangulated,  and  undiscovered  till  after  death,  is 
related  in  Sir  A.  Cooper’s  second  part  of  his  work  on 
hernia.  The  disease  happened  in  a young  man  aged 
27.  On  opening  the  abdomen,  the  ilium  was  found  to 
have  descended  on  the  right  side  of  the  rectum  into 
the  pelvis ; and  a fold  of  it  was  protruded  into  a small 
sac,  which  passed  out  of  the  pelvis  at  the  ischiatic 
notch.  The  intestine  was  adherent  to  the  sac  at  two 
points  ; the  strangulated  part,  and  about  three  inches 
on  each  side,  were  very  black.  The  intestines  towards 
the  stomach,  were  very  nruch  distended  with  air,  and 
here  and  there  had  a livid  spot  on  them.  A dark  spot 
was  even  found  on  the  stomach  itself,  just  above  the 
pylorus.  The  colon  was  exceedingly  contracted,  as 
far  as  its  sigmoid  .flexure.  A small  orifice  was  found 
in  the  side  of  the  pelvis,  in  front  cf,  but  a little  above 
the  sciatic  nerve,  and  on  the  forepart  of  the  pyrifor- 
mis  muscle.  The  sac  lay  under  the  glutteus  maximus 
muscle,  and  its  orifice  was  before  the  internal  iliac 
artery,  below  the  obturator  artery,  but  above  the  vein. 

Hernia  lachrymalis.  When  the  tears  passthrough 
the  puncta  lachrymalia,  but  stagnate  in  the  succulus 
lachrymalis,  the  tumour  is  styled  hernia  lachrymalis 
with  little  propriety  or  precision.  It  is  with  equal 
impropriety  called,  by  Anel,  a dropsy  of  the  lachrymal 
sac.  If  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye  is  pressed,  and  an 
aqueous  humour  flows  out,  the  disease  is  the  fistula 
lachrymalis. 

Hernia  mesenterica.  Mesenteric  hernia.  If  one 
of  the  layers  of  the  mesentery  be  torn  by  a blow,  while 
the  other  remains  in  its  natural  state,  the  intestines 
may  insinuate  themselves  into  the  aperture  and  form 
a kind  of'hernia.  The  same  consequences  may  result 
from  a natural  deficiency  in  one  of  these  layers.  Sir 
A.  Cooper  relates  a case,  in  which  all  the  small  intes- 
tines, except  the  duodenum,  were  thus  circumstanced. 
The  symptoms  during  life  were  unknown. 

Hernia  mesocolica.  Mesoeolic  hernia.  So  named 
by  Sir  A.  Cooper,  when  the  bowels  glide  between  the 
layers  of  the  mesocolon.  Every  surgeon  should  be 
aware  that  the  intestines  may  be  strangulated  from  the 
following  causes : 1.  Apertures  in  the  omentum,  me- 
sentery, or  mesocolon,  through  which  the  intestine 
protrudes.  2.  Adhesions,  leaving  an  aperture,  in  which 
a piece  of  intestine  becomes  confined.  3.  Membra- 
nous bands  at  the  mouth  of  hernial  sacs,  which  be- 
coming elongated  by  the  frequent  protrusion  and  return 
of  the  viscera,  surround  the  intestine,  so  as  to  strangu- 
late them  within  the  abdomen  when  returned  from 
the  sac. 

Hernia  omentaus.  Epiplocele.  A rupture  of  the 
omentum ; or  a protrusion  of  the  omentum  through 
apertures  in  the  integuments  of  the  belly.  Sometimes, 
according  to  Sharpe,  so  large  a quantity  of  the  omen- 
tum hath  fallen  into  the  scrotum,  that  its  weight,  draw- 
ing the  stomach  and  bowels  downwards,  hath  excited 
vomiting,  inflammation,  and  symptoms  similar  to 
those  of  the  incarcerated  hernia. 

Hernia  perinealis.  Perineal  hernia.  In  men,  the 
parts  protrude  between  the  bladder  and  rectum  ; in 
women,  between  the  rectum  and  vagina.  The  hernia 
does  not  project  so  as  to  form  an  external  tumour;  and, 
in  men,  its  existence  can  only  be  distinguished  by  ex- 

421 


HER 


HER 


amining  in  the  rectum.  In  women,  it  may  be  detected 
both  from  this  part  and  the  vagina. 

Hernia  phrenica.  Phrenic  hernia.  The  abdomi- 
nal viscera  are  occasionally  protruded  through  the 
diaphragm,  either  through  some  of  the  natural  aper- 
tures in  this  muscle,  or  deficiencies,  or  wounds,  and 
lacerations  in  it.  The  second  kind  of  case  is  the  most 
frequent.  Morgagni  furnishes  an  instance  of  the  first. 
Two  cases  related  by  Dr.  Macauley,  and  two  others 
published  by  Sir  A.  Cooper,  are  instances  of  the  se- 
cond sort.  And  another  case  has  been  lately  recorded 
by  the  latter  gentleman,  affording  an  example  of  the 
third  kind.  Hildanus,  Paid,  Petit,  Schenck,  &c.  also 
mention  cases  of  phrenic  hernia. 

Hernia  pudendalis.  Pudendal  hernia.  This  is 
the  name  assigned  by  Sir  A.  Cooper,  to  that  which 
descends  betw-een  the  vagina  and  ramus  ischii,  and 
forms  an  oblong  tumour  in  the  labium,  traceable  within 
the  pelvis,  as  far  as  the  os  uteri.  Sir  A.  C.  thinks  this 
case  has  sometimes  been  mistaken  for  a hernia  of  the 
foramen  ovale. 

Hernia  scrotalis.  Hernia  Oscheal.is.  Oscheocele. 
Paracelsus  calls  it  Crepatura.  When  the  omentum, 
the  intestine,  or  both,  descend  into  the  scrotum,  it  has 
these  appellations ; when  the  omentum  only,  it  is  called 
epiploscheocele.  It  is  styled  a perfect  rupture  in  con- 
tradistinction to  a bubonocele,  which  is  the  same  dis- 
order ; but  the  descent  is  not  so  great.  The  hernia 
scrotalis  is  distinguished  into  the  true  and  false  ; in  the 
former,  the  omentum  or  intestine,  or  both,  fall  into  the 
scrotum ; in  the  latter,  an  inflammation,  or  a fluid, 
causes  a tumour  in  this  part,  as  in  hernia  humoralis,  or 
hydrocele.  Sometimes  sebaceous  matter  is  collected 
in  the  scrotum  ; and  this  hernia  is  called  steatocele. 

Hernia  thyroidealis.  Hernia  foraminis  ovalis. 
Thyroideal  hernia.  In  the  anterior  and  upper  part  of  the 
obturator  ligament  there  is  an  opening,  through  which 
the  obturator  artery,  vein,  and  nerve  proceed,  and 
through  which  occasionally  a piece  of  omentum  or  in- 
testine is  protruded,  covered  with  a part  of  the  perito- 
naeum, which  constitutes  the  hernial  sac. 

Hernia  umbilicalis.  Epiploomphalion  ; Ompha- 
locele; Exomphalos;  Omphalos;  and  when  owing  to 
flatulency,  Pneumatomp halos.  The  exomphalos,  or 

umbilical  rupture,  is  so  called  from  its  situation,  and 
has,  like  other  herniae,  for  its  general  contents,  a por- 
tion of  intestine,  or  omentum,  or  both.  In  old  umbi- 
lical ruptures,  the  quantity  of  omentum  is  sometimes 
very  great.  Mr.  Ranby  says,  that  he  found  two  ells  and 
a half  of  intestine  in  one  of  these,  with  about  a third 
part  of  the  stomach,  all  adhering  together.  Gay  and 
Nourse  found  the  liver  in  the  sac  of  an  umbilical  hernia ; 
and  Bohnius  says  that  he  did  also.  But  whatever  are 
the  contents,  they  are  originally  contained  in  the  sac,- 
formed  by  the  protrusion  of  the  peritoneum. 

In  recent  and  small  ruptures,  this  sac  is  very  visible; 
but  in  old  and  large  ones,  it  is  broken  through  at  the 
knot  of  the  navel,  by  the  pressure  and  weight  of  the 
contents,  and  is  not  always  to  be  distinguished ; which 
is  the  reason  why  it  has  by  some  been  doubted  whether 
this  kind  of  rupture  has  a hernial  sac  or  not. 

Infants  are  very  subject  to  this  disease,  in  a small  de- 
gree, from  the  separation  of  the  funiculus;  but  in  gene- 
ral they  either  get  rid  of  it  as  they  gather  strength,  or 
are  easily  cured  by  wearing  a proper  bandage.  It  is  of 
still  more  consequence  to  get  this  disorder  cured  in  fe- 
males, than  in  males ; that  its  return,  when  they  are 
become  adult  and  pregnant,  may  be  prevented  as  much 
as  possible ; for  at  this  time  it  often  happens,  from  the 
too  great  distention  of  the  belly,  or  from  unguarded 
motion  when  the  parts  are  upon  the  stretch. 

Dr.  Hamilton  has  met  with  about twocases  aunually 
for  the  space  of  seventeen  years,  of  umbilical  hernia, 
which  strictly  deserve  the  name  of  congenital  umbili- 
cal hernia.  The  funis  ends  in  a sort  of  bag,  containing 
some  of  the  viscera,  which  pass  out  of  the  abdomen 
through  an  aperture  in  the  situation  of  the  navel.  The 
swelling  is  not  covered  with  skin,  so  that  the  contents 
of  the  hernia  can  be  seen  through  the  then  distended 
covering  of  the  cord.  The  disease  is  owing  to  a pre- 
ternatural deficiency  in  the  abdominal  muscles,  and 
the  hope  of  cure  must  be  regulated  by  the  size  of  the 
malformation  and  quantity  of  viscera  protruded. 

Hernia  uteri.  Hysterocele.  Instances  have  oc- 
curred of  the  uterus  being  thrust  through  the  rings  of 
the  muscles ; but  this  is  scarcely  to  be  discovered,  unless 
in  a pregnant  state,  when  the  smugglings  of  a child 
429 


would  discover  the  nature  of  the  disease.  In  that  state, 
however,  it  could  scarcely  ever  occur.  It  is  the  cerexit 
of  Hippocrates. 

Hernia  vaginalis.  Elytrocele.  Vaginal  hernia.  A 
tumour  occurs  within  the  os  externum  of  the  vagina. 
It  is  elastic,  but  not  painful.  When  compressed,  it 
readily  recedes,  but  is  reproduced  by  coughing,  or  even 
without  this,  when  the  pressure  is  removed.  The  in- 
conveniences produced  are  an  inability  to  undergo  much 
exercise  or  exertion  ; for  every  effort  of  this  sort  brings 
on  a sense  of  bearing  down.  The  vaginal  hernia  pro- 
trudes in  the  space  left  between  the  uterus  and  rectum. 
This  space  is  bounded  below  by  the  peritoneum,  which 
membrane  is  forced  downwards,  towards  the  perinseum ; 
but  being  unable  to  protrude  further  in  that  direction,  is 
pushed  towards  the  back  part  of  the  vagina.  These 
cases  probably  are  always  intestinal.  Some  hernia: 
protrude  at  the  anterior  part  of  the  vagina. 

Hernia  varicosa.  See  Circocele. 

Hernia  ventosa.  See  Pneumatocele. 

Hernia  ventralis.  Hypogaslrocele.  The  ventral 
hernia  may  appear  at  almost  any  point  of  the  anterior 
part  of  the  belly,  but  is  most  frequently  found  between 
the  recti  muscles.  The  portion  of  intestine,  &c.  &c.  is 
always  contained  in  a sac  made  by  the  protrusion  of  the 
peritonaeum.  Sir  A.  Cooper  imputes  its  causes  to  the 
dilatation  of  the  natural  foramina,  for  the  transmission 
of  vessels,  to  congenital  deficiencies,  lacerations,  and 
wounds  of  the  abdominal  muscles,  or  their  tendons 
In  small  ventral  herniae,  a second  fascia  is  found  be 
neath  the  superficial  one  ; but  in  large  ones  the  latter  is 
the  only  one  covering  the  sac. 

Hernia  ventriculi.  Gastrocelc.  A ventral  rup- 
ture caused  by  the  stomach  protruding  through  some 
part  of  the  abdominal  parietes.  It  rarely  occurs,  but  it 
does  it  generally  at  or  near  the  navel. 

Hernia  vesicalis.  Hernia  cystica ; Cystocele. 
The  urinary  bladder  is  liable  to  be  thrust  forth,  from  its 
proper  situation,  either  through  the  openings  in  the 
oblique  muscle,  like  the  inguinal  hernia,  or  under  Pou 
part’s  ligament,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  femoral. 

This  is  not  a very  frequent  species  of  hernia,  but  does 
happen,  and  has  as  plain  and  determined  a character 
as  any  other. 

HERNIA'RIA.  (From  hernia , a rupture : so  called 
from  its  supposed  efficacy  in  curing  ruptures.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia.  Rupture-wort. 

Hernia  glabra.  The  systematic  name  of  the  rup- 
ture-wort. Herniaria.  This  plant,  though  formerly 
esteemed  as  efficacious  in  the  cure  of  hernias,  appears 
to  be  destitute,  not  only  of  such  virtues,  but  of  any  other. 
It  has  no  smell  nor  taste. 

HER  NIO'TOM Y.  (Herniotomia ; from  hernia , and 
repvto,  to  cut.)  The  operation  to  remove  the  strangu 
lated  part  in  cases  of  incarcerated  hernise. 

HE  RPES.  From  epirio,  to  creep ; because  it  creeps 
and  spreads  about  the  skin.)  Tetter.  A genus  of  dis- 
ease in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Dihlyses  of  Cullen, 
distinguished  by  an  assemblage  of  numerous  little 
creeping  ulcers,  in  clusters,  itching  very  much,  and 
difficult  to  heal,  but  terminating  in  furfuraceous  scales. 

Bell,  in  his  Treatise  on  Ulcers,  arranges  the  herpes 
among  the  cutaneous  ulcers,  and  says,  that  all  the 
varieties  of  importance  may  be  comprehended  in  the 
four  following  species : 

1.  Herpes  farinosus,  or  what  may  be  termed  the  dry 
letter,  is  the  most  simple  of  all  the  species.  It  appears 
indiscriminately  in  different  parts  of  the  body,  but  most 
commonly  on  the  face,  neck,  arms  and  wrists,  in  pretty 
broad  spots  and  small  pimples.  These  are  generally 
very  itchy,  though  not  otherwise  troublesome ; and, 
afler  continuing  a certain  time,  they  at  last  fall  off  in 
the  form  of  a white  powder,  similar  to  fine  bran,  leav- 
ing the  skin  below  perfectly  sound  ; and  again  return- 
ing in  the  form  of  a red  efflorescence,  they  fall  off,  and 
are  renewed  as  before. 

2.  Herpes  pustulosns.  This  species  appears  in  the 
form  of  pustules,  which  originally  are  separate  and  dis- 
tinct, but  which  afterward  run  together  in  clusters. 
At  first,  they  seemed  to  contain  nothing  but  a thin  wa- 
tery serum,  which  afterward  turns  yellow,  and,  exud- 
ing over  the  whole  surface  of  the  part  affected,  it  at  last 
dries  into  a thick  crust,  or  scab  ; when  this  falls  off,  the 
skin  below  frequently  appears  entire,  with  only  a 
slightdegree  of  redness  on  its  surface  ; but  on  some  oc- 
casions, when  the  matter  has  probably  been  more  acrid, 


HEW 


HIE 


upon  the  scab  falling  off,  the  skin  is  found  slightly  ex- 
coriated. Eruptions  of  this  kind  appear  most  frequently 
on  the  face,  behind  the  ears,  and  on  other  parts  of  the 
head;  and  they  occur  most  commonly  in  children. 

3.  Herpes  miliaris.  The  miliary  tetter.  This  breaks 
out  indiscriminately  over  the  whole  body ; but  more 
frequently  about  the  loins,  breast,  perinreum,  scrotum, 
and  inguina,  than  in  other  parts.  It  generally  appears 
in  clusters,  though  sometimes  in  distinct  rings,  or  cir- 
cles, of  very  minute  pimples,  the  resemblance  of  which 
to  the  millet-seed  has  given  rise  to  the  denomination  of 
the  species.  The  pimples  are  at  first,  though  small, 
perfectly  separate,  and  contain  nothing  but  a clear 
lymph,  which,  in  the  course  of  this  disease,  is  excreted 
upon  the  surface,  and  there  forms  into  small  distinct 
scales ; these,  at  last,  fall  otf,  and  leave  a considerable 
degree  of  inflammation  below,  and  still  continues  to 
exude  fresh  matter,  which  likewise  forms  into  cakes, 
and  so  falls  off  as  before.  The  itching,  in  this  species 
of  complaint,  is  always  very  troublesome ; and  the 
matter  discharged  from  the  pimples  is  so  tough  and 
viscid,  that  every  thing  applied  to  the  part  adheres,  so 
as  to  occasion  much  trouble  and  uneasiness  on  its  being 
removed. 

4.  Herpes  exedens , the  eating  and  corroding  tetter  (so 
called  from  its  destroying  or  corroding  the  parts  which 
it  attacks,)  appears  commonly,  at  first,  in  the  form  of 
several  small  painful  ulcerations,  all  collected  into 
larger  spots,  of  different  sizes  and  of  various  figures, 
with  always  more  or  less  of  an  erysipelatous  inflamma- 
tion. These  ulcers  discharge  large  quantities  of  a thin, 
sharp,  serous  matter,  which  sometimes  forms  into  small 
crusts,  that  in  a short  time  fall  otf;  but  most  frequently 
the  discharge  is  so  thin  and  acrid  as  to  spread  along  the 
neighbouring  parts,  where  it  soon  produces  the  same 
kind  of  sores.  Though  these  ulcers  do  not,  in  general, 
proceed  farther  than  the  cutis  vera,  yet  sometimes  the 
discharge  is  so  very  penetrating  and  corrosive  as  to 
destroy  the  skin,  cellular  substance,  and,  on  some  occa- 
sions, even  the  muscles  themselves.  It  is  this  species 
that  should  be  termed  the  dep ascent,  or  phagedenic 
ulcer,  from  the  great  destruction  of  parts  which  it  fre- 
quently occasions.  See  Pliagedcena. 

Herpes  ambulativa.  A species  Of  erysipelas 
which  moves  from  one  part  to  another. 

Herpes  depascens.  The  same  as  herpes  exedens. 
See  Herpes. 

Herpes  esthiomenos.  Herpes  destroying  the  skin 
by  ulceration. 

Herpes  farinosus.  See  Herpes. 

Herpes  feros.  An  erysipelas. 

Herpes  inPica.  A fiery,  itchy  herpes,  peculiar  to 
India. 

Herpes  miliaris.  See  Herpes. 

Herpes  periscelis.  The  shingles.  See  Erysipe- 
las phlyctcenodcs. 

Herpes  pustulosus.  See  Herpes. 

Herpes  serpigo.  The  ring-worm. 

Herpes  siccus.  The  dry,  mealy  tetter. 

Herpes  zoster.  Shingles  encircling  the  body. 

See  Erysipelas. 

HERPETIC.  Relating  to  Herpes. 

He'rpeton.  (From  tpizeo),  to  creep.)  A creeping 
pustule,  or  ulcer. 

HESPERIDEA2.  (From  Hcsperides,  whose  or- 

chards, according  to  the  poets,  produced  golden  ap- 
ples.) Golden  or  precious  fruit.  The  name  of  an 
order  of  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural 
Method,  consisting  of  plants  which  have  rigid  ever- 
green leaves ; odorous  and  polyandrous  flowers ; as 
the  myrtle,  clove,  &c. 

[“  The  Heuchera  Cortusa  of  Michaux,  is  a native 
plant,  growing  in  woods,  from  New-England  to  Caro- 
lina. The  root  is  one  of  the  strongest  vegetable  as- 
tringents. As  such,  it  has  been  employed  in  various 
complaints,  to  which  astringents  are  adapted,  and 
favourable  reports  are  made  of  its  operation.  Hitherto 
it  has  been  more  known  as  an  external  application 
than  as  an  internal  remedy.” — Fig.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

HEWSON,  William,  was  born  at  Hexham,  in 
1739.  After  serving  an  apprenticeship  to  his  father,  he 
came  to  London  at  the  age  of  twenty,  and  resided 
with  Mr.  John  Hunter,  attending  also  the  lectures  of 
Dr.  Hunter.  His  assiduity  and  skill  were  so  conspicu- 
ous, that  he  was  appointed  to  superintend  the  dissect 
ing  room,  when  the  former  went  abroad  with  the 
army  in  1760.  He  then  studied  a year  at  Edinburgh, 


and  in  1762  he  became  associated  with  Dr.  Hunter  in 
delivering  the  anatomical  lectures,  and  he  was  after- 
ward allowed  an  apartment  in  Windmill-street.  Here 
he  pursued  his  anatomical  investigations,  and  his 
experimental  inquiries  into  the  properties  of  the  blood, 
of  which  he  published  an  account  in  1771.  He  also 
communicated  to  the  Royal  Society  several  papers 
concerning  the  lymphatic  system  in  birds  and  fishes, 
for  which  he  received  the  Copleyan  medal,  and  was 
soon  after  elected  a fellow  of  that  body.  He  began  a 
course  of  lectures  alone  in  1772,  having  quitted  Dr. 
Hunter  two  years  before,  and  soon  became  very  popu- 
lar. In  1774,  he  published  his  work  on  the  Lymphatic 
System.  But  not  long  after,  his  life  was  terminated 
by  a fever,  occasioned  by  a wound  received  in  dis- 
secting a morbid  body,  in  the  thirty-fifth  year  of  his 


HEXAGY'NIA.  (From  six,  and  yovy,  a woman , 
or  wife.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  the  sex- 
ual system,  which,  besides  the  classic  character,  have 
six  females  or  pistils. 

HEXA'NDRIA.  (From  fjj,  six,  and  avyp,  a man,  or 
husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual 
system,  consisting  of  plants  with  hermaphrodite  flow- 
ers that  are  furnished  with  six  stamens  of  an  equal 
length. 

Hexapha'rmacum.  (From  six,  and  <f>appaKov , 
a medicine.)  Any  medicine  in  the  composition  of 
which  are  six  ingredients. 

Hibe'rnicus  lapis.  See  Lapis  hibernicus. 

HIBI  SCUS.  (From  ijStj,  a stork,  who  is  said  to 
chew  it,  and  inject  it  as  a clyster.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Mona- 
delphia;  Order,  Polyandria. 

Hibiscus  abelmoschus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant,  the  seeds  of  which  are  called  musk-seed ; 
Abelmoschus ; Oranum  moschi ; Moschus  Arabum; 
JEgyptia  moschata ; Bamia  moschata;  Alcea;  Alcea. 
Jndica ; Alcea  JEgyptiaca  villosa ; Abrette  ; Abel- 
mosch ; Abelmusk.  The  plant  is  indigenous  jn  Egypt, 
and  in  many  parts  of  both  the  Indies.  These  seeds 
have  the  flavour  of  musk.  The  best  comes  from  Mar- 
tinico.  By  the  Arabians,  they  are  esteemed  cordial, 
and  are  mixed  with  their  coffee,  to  which  they  impart 
their  fragrance.  In  this  country  they  are  used  by  the 
perfumers. 

HICCUP.  Singultus.  A spasmodic  affection  of 
the  diaphragm,  generally  arising  from  irritation  pro- 
duced by  acidity  in  the  stomach,  error  of  diet,  &c. 

HIDRO'A.  (From  iSpwg,  sweat.)  A pustular  dis- 
ease, produced  by  sweating  in  hot  weather. 

HIDRO'CRISIS.  (From  t(5pw?,  sweat,  and  upivw, 
to  judge.)  A judgment  formed  from  the  sweat  of  the 
patient. 

HIDRO'NOSOS.  (From  iSpwi,  sweat,  and  voaos, 
a disease  ) The  sweating  sickness. 

HIDROPY'RETUS.  (From  idpws,  sweat,  and 
irvpc'Jos , a fever.)  Sweating  fever. 

HIDRO'TICA.  (From  t<5pwj,  sweat.)  Medicines 
which  cause  perspiration. 

IIIDROTOPOIE'TICA.  (From  iSpws,  sweat,  and 
Troteu),  to  make.)  Sudorifics. 

HI'ERA.  (From  icpos,  holy;  and  from  icpal,  a 
hawk.)  Holy.  Also  applied  to  some  plants  which 
hawks  are  said  to  be  fond  of. 

Hiera  picra.  (From  icpos,  holy,  and  iriKpae,  bitter. 
Holy  bitter.)  Pulvis  aloeticus , formerly  called  hiera 
logadii,  made  in  the  form  of  an  electuary  with  honey. 
It  is  now  kept  in  the  form  of  dry  powder,  prepared  by 
mixing  Socotorine  aloes,  one  pound,  with  three  ounces 
of  white  canella. 

Hierabo'tane.  (From  repos,  holy,  and  (io'javn,  an 
herb:  so  called  from  its  supposed  virtues.)  See  Ver- 
bena trifoliata. 

Hieraca'ntha.  (From  itpa\,  a hawk,  and  avQos,  a 
flower:  so  named  because  it  seizes  passengers  as  a 
hawk  does  its  prey.)  A sort  of  thistle. 

HIERA'CIUM.  (From  i£pa%,  a hawk  : so  called  be- 
cause hawks  feed  upon  it,  or  because  it  was  said  that 
hawks  applied  the  juice  of  it  to  cleanse  their  eyes.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  sys»- 
tem.  Class,  Syngenesia  ; Order,  Polygamia  equalis. 
Hawk- weed. 

Hieracium  pilosella.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  mouse-ear,  Auriculamuris ; Pilosella;  Myosotis ; 
Hieraculum.  This  common  plant  contains  a bitter 
lactescent  juice,  which  has  a slight  degree  of  astria- 


HIP 


HIP 


- 


gency.  The  roots  are  more  powerful  than  the  leaves. 
They  are  very  seldom  used  in  this  country. 

Hiera'culumi  See  Hieracium. 

HIERA'NOSOS.  (From  tcpos,  holy,  and  vooos,  a 
disease : so  called  because  it  was  supposed  to  be  that 
disorder  which  our  Saviour  cured  in  those  who  were 
said  to  be  possessed  of  devils.)  The  epilepsy. 

Hiera'ticum.  (From  tepos,  hoiy.)  A poultice  for 
the  stomach,  so  named  from  its  supposed  divine  vir- 
tues. 

Highgate  resin.  See  Fossil  copal. 

HIGHMORE,  Nathaniel,  was  born  at  Fording- 
bridge,  in  Hampshire,  in  1613.  After  gradupaing  at 
Oxford,  he  settled  at  Sherborne,  where  he  obtained 
considerable  reputation  in  practice,  and  died  in  1684. 
He  pursued  the  study  of  anatomy  with  zeal,  though 
with  limited  opportunities  of  dissection ; and  his  name 
has  been  attached' to  a part,  though  not  originally  dis- 
covered by  him,  namely,  the  Antrum  Maxillare,  which 
had  been  before  mentioned  by  Casserius.  His  prin- 
cipal work  is  “ Corporis  liumani  Disquisitio  anato- 
mica,”  printed  at  the  Hague  in  1651,  with  figures, 
chiefly  from  Vesalius.  He  also  published  two  disser- 
tations on  Hystgria  and  Hypochondriasis ; and  a his- 
tory of  Generation. 

Highmore's  antrum.  See  Antrum  of  Highmore. 

Higue'ro.  The  calabash-tree,  the  fruit  of  which  is 
said  to  be  febrifuge. 

HILDA'NUS.  See  Fabricius,  William. 

HILUM.  The  s$ar,  or  point  by  which  the  seed  is 
attached  to  its  seed-vessel  or  receptacle,  and  through 
which  alone  life  and  nourishment  are  conveyed  for  the 
perfecting  of  its  internal  parts.  Consequently  all  those 
parts  must  be  intimately  connected  with  the  inner  sur- 
face of  this  scar,  and  they  are  all  found  to  meet  there, 
and  to  divide  or  divaricate  from  that  point,  more  or 
less  immediately.  In  describing  the  form  or  various 
external  portions  of  any  seed,  the  hilum  is  always  to  be 
considered  as  the  base.  When  the  seed  is  quite  ripe, 
the  communication  through  this  channel  is  interrupted, 
it  separates  from  the  parent  plant  without  injury,  a 
scar  being  formed  on  each.  Yet  the  hilum  is  so  far 
capable  of  resuming  its  former  nature,  that  the  moisture 
of  the  earth  is  imbibed  through  it,  previous  to  germi- 
nation.— Smith. 

Himanto'sis.  (From  ipas , a thong  of  leather.)  A 
relaxation  of  the  uvula,  when  it  hangs  down  like  a 
thong. 

Hi'mas.  A- relaxation  of  the  uvula. 

Hin.  Hindisch.  Hing.  Assafcetida. 

HIP.  The  ripe  fruit  of  the  dog-rose.  They  are 
chiefly  used  as  a sweetmeat,  or  in  a preserved  state. 
See  Confectio  msec  canince. 

HIPPOCAMPUS.  {IniroKapnos,  the  name  of  a sea 
insect  which  has  a head  like  that  of  the  horse,  and  tail 
like  the  napnr},  or  eruca.)  1.  The  sea-horse. 

2.  Some  parts  are  so  called  from  their  supposed  re- 
semblance. See  Cerebrum. 

HIPPOCA'STANUM.  (From  iTrrro?,  a horse,  and 
Ka^avov,  achesnut:  so  called  from  its  size.)  See  JEs- 
culus  hippocastanum. 

HIPPOCRATES,  usually  called  the  father  of  phy- 
sic, was  born  in  the  island  of  Cos,  about  460  years  be- 
fore Christ.  He  is  reckoned  the  18th  lineal  descendant 
from  Alsculapius,  the  profession  of  medicine  having 
been  hereditarily  followed  in  that  family,  under  whose 
direction  the  Coan  school  attained  its  high  degree  of 
eminence,  and  by  the  mother’s  side  he  is  said  to  have 
descended  from  Hercules.  Born  with  these  advan- 
tages, and  stimulated  by  the  fame  of  his  ancestors,  he 
devoted  himself  zealously  to  the  cultivation  of  the 
healing  art.  Not  content  with  the  empirical  prac- 
tice, which  was  derived  from  his  predecessors,  he 
studied  under  Herodicus,  who  had  invented  the  gym- 
nastic medicine,  as  well  as  some  other  philosophers. 
But  he  appears  to  have  judged  carefully  for  himself, 
and  to  have  adopted  only  those  principles,  which 
seemed  founded  in  sound  reason.  He  was  thus  ena- 
bled to  throw  light  on  the  deductions  of  experience,  and 
clear  away  the  false  theories  with  which  medicine  had 
been  loaded  by  those  who  had  no  practical  knowledge 
of  diseases,  and  bring  it  into  the  true  path  of  observa- 
tion, under  the  guidance  of  reason.  Hence  the  physi- 
cians of  the  rational  or  dogmatic  sect  always  acknow- 
ledged him  as  their  leader.  The  events  of  his  life  are 
involved  in  much  obscurity  and  fable.  But  he  appears 
to  have  travelled  much,  residing  at  different  ulaces  for 


some  time,  and  practising  his  profession  there.  He  died 
at  Larissa,  in  Thessaly,  at  a very  advanced  age,  which 
is  variously  stated  from  85  to  109  years.  He  left  two 
sons,  Thessalus  and  Draco,  who  followed  the  same 
profession,  and  a daughter,  married  to  his  favourite 
pupil  Poly  bus,  who  arranged  and  published  his  works ; 
and  he  formed  many  other  disciples.  lie  acquired  a 
high  reputation  among  his  countrymen,  which  has 
descended  to  modern  times  ; and  his  opinions  have  been 
respected  as  oracles,  not  only  in  the  schools  of  medi- 
cine, but  even  hi  the  courts  of  law.  He  has  shared 
with  Plato  the  title  of  divine:  statues  and  temples 
have  been  erected  to  his  memory,  and  his  altars  co- 
vered with  incense,  like  those  of  vEsculapius  himself. 
Indeed,  the  qualifications  %nd  duties  required  in  a phy- 
sician, were  never  more  fully  exemplified  than  in  his 
conduct,  and  more  eloquently  described  than  by  his 
pen.  He  is  said  to  have  admitted  no  one  to  his  in- 
structions without  the  solemnity  of  an  oath,  in  which 
the  chief  obligations  are,  the  most  religions  atten- 
tion to  the  advantages  of  the  sick,  the  strictest  chas- 
tity, and  inviolable  secrecy  concerning  matters  which 
ought  not  to  be  divuiged.  Besides  these  charac- 
teristics, he  displayed  great  simplicity,  candour,  and 
benevolence,  with  unwearied  zeal,  in  investigating  the 
progress  and  nature  of  disease,  and  in  administering  to 
their  cure.  The  books  attributed  to  him  amount  to 
72 ; of  which,  however,  many  are  considered  spurious, 
and  others  have  been  much  corrupted.  The  most  es- 
teemed, and  generally  admitted  genuine,  are  the  essay 
“ On  Air,  Water,  and  Situation,”  the  first  and  third 
books  of  “ Epidemics,”  that  on  “ Prognostics,”  the 
“ Aphorisms,”  the  treatise  “ On  the  Diet  in  acute  Dis- 
eases,” and  that  “ On  Wounds  of  the  Head.”  He  m 
wrote  in  the  Ionic  dialect,  in  a pure  but  remarkably 
concise  style.  He  was  necessarily  deficient  in  the 
knowledge  of  anatomy,  as  the  dissection  of  human 
bodies  w~as  not  then  allowed  ; whence  his  Physiology 
also  is,  in  many  respects,  erroneous : but  he,  in  a great 
measure,  compensated  this  by  unceasing  observation 
of  diseases,  whereby  he  attained  so  much  skill  in 
pathology  and  therapeutics,  that  he  has  been  regarded 
as  the  founder  of  medical  science : and  his  opinions 
still  influence  the  healing  art  in  a considerable  degree. 

He  diligently  investigated  the  several  causes  of  dis- 
eases, but  especially  their  symptoms,  which  enabled 
him  readily  to  distinguish  them  from  each  other : and 
very  few  of  those  noticed  by  him  are  now  unknown, 
mostly  retaining  even  the  same  names.  But  he  is 
more  remarkably  distinguished  by  his  Prognostics, 
which  have  been  comparatively  little  improved  since, 
founded  upon  various  appearances  in  tire  state  of  the 
patient,  but  especially  upon  the  excretions.  His  at 
tention  seems  to  have  been  directed  chiefly  to  these  in 
consequence  of  a particular  theory.  He  supposed 
that  there  are  four  humours  in  the  body,  blood, 
phlegm,  yellow  and  black  bile,  having  different  de- 
grees of  heat  or  coldness,  moisture  or  dryness,  and 
that  to  certain  changes  in  the  quantity  or  quality  of 
these,  all  diseases  might  be  referred ; and  farther,  that 
in  acute  disorders  a concoction  of  the  morbid  humours 
took  place,  followed  by  a critical  discharge,  which  he 
believed  to  happen,  especially  on  certain  days.  Bat 
he  seems  to  have  paid  little,  if  any,  attention  to  the 
state  of  the  pulse.  He  advanced  another  opinion, 
which  has  since  very  generally  prevailed,  that  there  is 
a principle,  or  power  in  the  system,  which  he  called 
Nature,  tending  to  the  preservation  of  health,  and  the 
removal  of  disease.  He,  therefore,  advised  practition- 
ers carefully  to  observe  and  promote  the  efforts  of 
nature,  at  the  same  time  correcting  morbid  states  by 
their  opposites,  and  endeavouring  to  bring  back  the 
fluids  into  their  proper  channels.  The  chief  part  of 
his  treatment  at  first  was  a great  restriction  of  the  diet ; 
in  very  acute  diseases  merely  allowing  the  mouth  to  be 
moistened  occasionally  for  three  or  four  days,  and  only 
a more  plentiful  dilution  during  a fortnight,  provided 
the  strength  would  bear  it ; afterward  a more  substan- 
tial diet  was  directed,  but  hardly  any  medfcines,  except 
gentle  emetics,  and  laxatives,  or  clysters.  Where 
these  means  failed,  very  active  purgatives  were,  em- 
ployed, as  hellebore,  elaterium,  fee.  or  sometimes  the 
sudorific  regimen,  or  garlic  and  other  diuretics.  He 
seems  cautious  in  the  use  of  narcotics,  but  occasionally 
had  recourse  to  some  of  the  preparations  of  lead,  cop- 
per, silver,  and  iron.  He  bled  freely  in  cases  of  extreme 
pain  or  inflammation,  sometimes  opening  two  veins  at 


HOD 


HOL 


once,  so  S3  to  produce  fainting;  and  also  took  blood 
often  by  cupping,  but  preferably  from  a remote  part, 
with  a view  of  producing  a revulsion.  \Vhere  medi- 
cines fail,  he  recommends  the  knife,  or  even  fire,  as  a 
last  resource,  and  he  advises  trepanning,  in  cases  of 
violent  headache.  But  he  wishes  the  more  difficult 
operations  of  surgery  to  be  performed  only  by  particular 
persons,  who  might  thereby  acquire  more  expertness. 

HIPPOCRATIC.  Relating  to  Hippocrates.  See 
Facies  hippocratica. 

Hippo  la  pathum.  (From  limbs,  a horse,  and  \aira- 
Bov,  the  lapathum.)  A species  of  lapathum ; so 
named  from  its  size.  See  Rumex  patientia. 

Hippoma'rathrum.  (From  liriros,  a horse,  and 
p apadpov,  fennel : so  named  from  its  size.)  See  Peuce- 
datiunt  silaus. 

Hipposeli'num.  (From  hnrog,  a horse,  and  aeXivov, 
purslane;  so  named  because  it  resembles  a large  kind 
of  purslane.)  See  Smyrnaum  olusatrum. 

HIPPU'RIS.  (From  bnrus,  a horse,  and  ovpa,  a tail.) 
1.  Some  herbs  are  thus  named  because  they  resemble 
a horse’s  tail. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Monandna  ; Order,  Monogynia.  Mare’s 
tail. 

Hippurus  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
horse’s  or  mare’s  tail.  Equisctum;  Cauda  equina.  It 
possesses  astringent  qualities,  and  is  frequently  used 
by  the  common  people  as  tea  in  diarrhoeas  and  hcemor- 
rhages.  The  same  virtues  are  also  attributed  to  the 
Fquisetum  arvcnse , fluviatile,  limosum , and  other 
species,  which  are  directed  indiscriminately  by  the 
term  Equisetum. 

HIPPUS.  (From  luitos,  a horse;  because  the  eyes 
of  those  who  labour  under  this  affliction  are  continually 
twinkling  and  trembling,  as  is  usual  with  those  who 
ride  on  horseback.)  A repeated  dilatation  and  alter- 
nate constriction  of  the  pupil,  arising  from  spasm,  or 
convulsion  of  the  iris. 

Hir.  (From  %ap,  the  hand.)  The  palm  of  the 
hand.  . 

Hira.  (From  hir,  the  palm  of  the  hand  ; because 
it  is  usually  found  empty.)  The  intestinum  jejunum. 

HIRCUS.  IVagus.  The  goat. 

Hircus  bezoarticus.  ( Quasi  hirtus ; from  his 
shaggy  hair.)  The  goat  which  affords  the  oriental 
bezoar. 

Hi'rquus.  (From  epieos,  a hedge ; because  it  is 
hedged  in  by  the  eyelash.)  The  angle  of  the  eye. 

HIRSUTIES.  A trivial  name  in  Good’s  Nosology 
for  a species  of  disease  in  which  hair  grows  in  extra- 
«eous  parts,  or  superfluously  in  parts  where  it  naturally 
grows.  Tricliosis  hirsuties. 

HIRSUTUS.  Hairy : applied  to  leaves,  petals, 
seeds,  &c.  of  plants  ; as  the  petals  of  the  Menyuntlies 
trifoliata  and  Asclepias  crispa : the  seeds  of  the  Scan- 
dix  trichosperma. 

HI'RTUS.  (A  contraction  of  hirsutus.)  Hairy: 
applied  to  stems  of  plants,  as  that  cf  the  Cirastium  al- 
pinum. 

IIIRU'DO.  ( Quasi  haurudo  ; from  haurio,  to  draw 
out : so  named  from  its  greediness  to  suck  blood.)  See 
Leech. 

IIirudo  MEDIC1NALIS.  See  Leech. 

HIRUNDINA'RIA.  (From  hirundo,  the  swallow  : 
so  called  from  the  resemblance  of  its  pods  to  a swal- 
low.) Swallowwort,  or  asclepias.  See  Lysimachia 
numularia  and  Jlsclepias  vincetuxicum. 

Hiru'ndo.  (.Qbhairendo;  from  its  sticking  its  nest 
to  the  eaves  of  houses.) 

1.  The  swallow. 

2.  The  cavity  in  the  bend  of  the  arm. 

Hispi'dula.  (From  hispidus,  rough : so  named 

from  the  rough,  woolly  surface  of  its  stalks.)  See 
Gnaphnlium. 

HISPIDUS.  Bristly:  applied  to  stems,  seeds,  &c. 
of  plants.  The  Borago  officinalis  is  a good  example 
of  the  Caulus  hispidus : the  seedsof  the  Daucus  carota, 
and  Galium  boreale. 

HOARHOUND.  See  Marrubium. 

HODGES,  Nathaniel,  son  of  the  Dean  of  Hereford, 
was  born  at  Kensington,  and  graduated  at  Oxford  in 
1659.  He  then  settled  in  London,  and  continued  there 
during  the  plague,  when  mostother  physicians  deserted 
Iheir  post.  He  was  twice  taken  ill,  but  by  timely  reme- 
dies recovered.  He  afterward  published  an  authentic 
account  of  the  disease,  which  appears  to  have  de- 


stroyed 68,596  persons  in  the  year  1685.  It  is  to  be 
regretted,  that  a person  who  had  performed  such  an 
important  and  dangerous  service  to  his  fellow-citizens, 
should  have  died  in  prison,  confined  for  debt,  in  1684. 

HOFFMANN,  Frederic,  was  born  at  Halle,  in 
Saxony,  1660.  Having  lost  his  parents  from  an  epi- 
demic disease,  he  went  to  study  medicine  at  Jena, 
where  he  graduated  in  1681.  The  year  following  he 
published  an  excellent  tract,  “ De  Cinnabari  Anti- 
monii,”  which  gained  him  great  applause,  and  nume- 
rous pupils  to  attend  a course  of  Chemical  lectures, 
which  he  delivered  there.  He  then  practised  his  pro- 
fession for  two  years  at  Mindcn  with  very  good  suc- 
cess ; and  after  travelling  to  Holland  and  England, 
where  he  received  many  marks  of  distinction,  he  was 
appointed,  on  his  return  in  1685,  physician  to  the  gar- 
rison, and  subsequently  to  Frederic  William,  Elector 
of  Brandenhurgh,  and  the  whole  principality  of  Min- 
den.  He  was,  however,  induced  to  settle,  in  1688,  as 
public  physician  at  Halberstadt  ; where  he  published  a 
treatise,  “De  Insufficiencia  Acidi  et  Viscidi.”  A 
university  being  founded  at  Halle,  by  Frederic  III., 
afterward  first  King  of  Prussia,  Hoffman  was  ap- 
pointed, in  1693,  primary  Professor  of  Medicine,  and 
composed  the  Statutes  of  that  institution,  and  recom- 
mended Stahl  as  his  colleague.  He  was  most  active 
in  his  professional  duties ; and  by  the  eloquence  and 
learning  displayed  in  his  lectures  and  publications,  he 
extended  his  own  reputation,  and  that  of  the  new  uni 
versity.  He  was  admitted  into  the  scientific  societies 
at  Berlin,  Petersburgh,  and  London  ; and  had  the 
honour  of  attending  many  of  the  German  courts  as 
physician.  Haller  asserts  that  he  acquired  great 
wealth  by  the  sale  of  various  chemical  nostrums.  He 
examined  many  of  the  mihera!  waters  in  Germany, 
particularly  those  of  Seidliiz,  which  he  first  introduced 
to  public  notice  in  1717.  The  year  after  he  com- 
menced the  publication  of  his  “ Medicina  Rationrdis 
Systematica,”  which  was  received  with  great  applause 
by  the  faculty  in  various  parts  of  Europe,  and  is  said 
to  ’have  occupied  him  nearly  twenty  years.  He  also 
published  two  volumes  of  “Consultations,”  and  thiee 
books  of  select  chemical  observations.  In  1727,  he 
was  created  Count  Palatine,  by  the  Prince  of  Swart- 
zenburgh,  whom  he  carried  through  a dangerous  dis- 
ease. About  seven  years  after,  he  attended  Frederic 
William,  King  of  Prussia,  and  is  said  by  dignified 
remonstrance  to  have  secured  himself  acainst  the 
brutal  ruedness  shown  by  that  monarch  to  those  about 
him ; he  was  ultimately  distinguished  with  great 
honours,  and  invited  strongly  to  settle  at  Berlin,  but 
declined  it  on  account  of  his  advanced  age.  He  con- 
tinued to  perform  his  duties  at  Halle  till  1742,  in  which 
year  he  died.  Hoffman  was  a very  voluminous  writer. 
His  works  have  been  collected  in  six  fofio  volumes, 
printed  at  Geneva.  They  contain  a great  mass  of 
valuable  practical  matter,  partly  original,  but  detailed 
in  a prolix  manner,  and  intermixed  with  much  hypo- 
thesis. He  has  the  merit,  however,  of  first  turning  the 
attention  of  practitioners  to  the  morbid  affections  of 
the  nervous  system,  instead  of  framing  mere  mechani- 
cal or  chemical  theories : but  he  did  not  carry  the  doc- 
trine to  its  fullest  extent,  and  retained  some  of  the 
errors  of  the  humoral  pathology.  He  pursued  the 
study  of  chemistry  and  pharmacy  with  considerable 
ardour  ; but  his  practice  was  cautious,  particularly  in 
advanced  age,  trusting  much  to  vegetable  simples. 

[Hoffman’s  anodyne  liquor.  Formerly  so  called  ; 
now  known  by  the  name  of  compound  spirit  of  Sul- 
phuric ether.  A.] 

Hug's  fennel.  See  Peucedanum. 

[Hog-tooth  spar.  A variety  of  calcareous  spar.  A.] 

Ho'lcimos.  (From  eAxw,  to  draw.)  It  sometimes 
means  a tumour  of  the  liver. 

HO'LCUS.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Polygamia  ; Order,  Mo- 
naecia. 

2.  The  Indian  millet-seed,  which  is  said  to  be  liutri 
tive. 

Holcus  sorgum.  Guinea  corn. 

HOLER ACEUS.  See  Oleraceous. 

[HOLYOKE,  Dr.  Edward.  This  beloved  and 
venerated  man  was  born  at  Marblehead,  Mass,  in 
1728.  The  house  in  which  he  was  born  is  still  stand- 
ing. He  was  graduated  at  Harvard  University  in  1746, 
and  settled  in  this  place  in  1749,  where  he  has  ever 
since,  for  a period  of  80  years,  resided,  useful,  beloved, 


HOR 


HOR 


and  honoured,  He  was  married,  the  first  time  in  1755, 
and  a second  time  in  1759.  He  had  by  the  second 
marriage  12  children,  of  whom  only  two  survive.  His 
only  child  by  his  first  wife  died  in  infancy  He  has 
lived  in  his  mansion-house,  in  Essex-street,  for  the  last 
66  years,  and  at  one  period  of  his  practice,  he  has 
stated  that  there  was  not  a dwelling-house  in  Salem 
which  he  had  not  visited  professionally.  For  a long 
period  he  nearly  engrossed  the  medical  practice  of  the 
place,  and  is  known  to  have  made  a hundred  profes- 
sional visits  in  a day.  This  was  in  May  or  June  of 
1783,  at  which  time  the  measles  prevailed  epidemi- 
cally. He  passed  his  long  life  in  almost  uninterrupted 
health,  without  any  of  those  accidents  and  dangers 
which  his  skill  was  exerted  to  remedy  and  remove  in 
others,  and  his  old  age  has  been  almost  without  infir- 
mity, and  literally  without  decrepitude.  Who  that 
saw  him  does  not  recollect  his  firm  and  elastic  step  and 
his  cheerful  looks  on  the  day  of  his  hundredth  anni- 
versary ? To  much  exercise  and  great  temperance  he 
was  disposed  to  attribute  his  health  and  advanced  age. 
And  when  to  these  causes  we  add  those  of  piousopinions, 
virtuous  practices,  and  a calm,  cheerful,  and  contented 
spirit,  we  shall  have  disclosed  much  of  the  secret  of 
his  corporeal  advantages.  Of  his  temperance  we  are 
induced  to  make  one  remark,  that  it  was  not  a system 
of  rules  in  diet  and  regimen,  but  a temperance  of  mo- 
derate desires.  He  enjoyed  all  the  bounties  of  Provi- 
dence with  remarkable  appetency,  but  his  well-regu- 
lated mind  always  saved  him  from  excessive  indul- 
gence. Of  his  exercise  some  idea  may  be  formed  by 
a computation  which  he  made  a short  time  before  his 
decease,  that  he  had  walked  in  the  course  of  his  prac- 
tice, a distance  which  would  reach  three  times  round 
the  globe.  He  died  in  1829.  A.J 

Hollow  leaf.  See  Concavus. 

HOLLY.  See  Ilex. 

Holly , knee.  See  Ruscus. 

Holly , sea.  See  Eryngium. 

Holmi'scus.  (Dim.  of  oA/ioj,  a mortar.) 

1.  A small  mortar. 

2.  The  cavity  of  the  large  teeth,  because  they  pound 
the  food  as  in  a mortar. 

HOLMITE.  A new  mineral  composed  of  lime, 
carbonic  acid,  alumina,  silica,  oxide  of  iron,  and 
water. 

Holophlv'ctides.  (From  oXoj,  whole,  and  (P\vkJis, 
a pustule.)  Little  pimples  all  over  the  body. 

Holo'stes.  See  Holosteus. 

Holo'steum.  See  Holosteus. 

Holo'steus.  (From  oAof,  whole,  and  o?tov,  a bone.) 
Glue-bone.  See  Osteocolla. 

Holoto'nicus.  (From  oAos,  whole,  and  reivio,  to 
stretch.)  A terra  formerly  applied  to  diseases  accom- 
panied with  universal  convulsion,  or  rigour. 

HOLY  THISTLE.  See  Centaurea  benedicta. 

HOLYWELL.  There  is  a mineral  water  at  this 
place  arranged  under  the  class  of  simple  cold  waters, 
remarkable  for  its  purity.  It  possesses  similar  virtues 
to  that  of  Malvern.  See  Malvern  water. 

Ho’ma.  An  anasarcous  swelling. 

Homberg's  phosphorus.  Ignited  muriate  of  lime. 

Homberg's  salt.  See  Boracic  acid. 

HOMOGENEOUS.  ( Homogeneus ; from  opos,  like, 
and  yevos,  a kind.)  Uniform,  of  a like  kind  or  species, 
of  the  same  quality.  A term  used  in  contradistinction 
to  heterogeneous,  when  the  parts  of  the  body  are  of 
different  qualities. 

HOMOPLA'TA.  (From  wpos,  the  shoulder,  and 
vikala,  the  blade.)  See  Scapula. 

HONEY.  See  Mel. 

HONEY-STONE.  Mellite.  Crystalhartzof  Mohs. 
Pyramidal  honey-stone  of  Jameson.  This  is  of  a 
honey  colour,  distinctly  crystallized,  and  occurs  on 
bituminous  wood  and  earth  coal,  and  is  usually  accom- 
panied with  sulphur  at  Artern,  in  Thuringia. 

HONEY-SUCKLE.  See  Loniccra  periclymenum. 

Hooded  leaf.  Cucullatus. 

HOOPING-COUGH.  See  Pertussis. 

HOP.  See  Humulus  lupulus. 

Hoplochri'sma.  (From  ott\ov,  a weapon,  and 
Xptopa,  a salve.)  A salve  which  was  ridiculously  said 
to  cure  wounds  by  consent ; that  is,  by  anointing  the 
instrument  with  which  the  wound  was  made. 

HORDE'OLUM.  (Diminutive  of  hordcum,  barley.) 
A little  tumour  on  the  eyelids,  resembling  a barley- 
corn. A stye.  Scarpa  remarks,  the  stye  is  strictly 
426 


only  a little  bile,  which  projects  from  the  edge  of  the 
eyelids,  mostly  near  the  great  angle  of  the  eye.  This 
little  tumour,  like  the  furunculus,  is  of  a dark  red 
colour,  much  inflamed,  and  a great  deal  more  painful 
than  might  be  expected,  considering  its  small  size.  The 
latter  circumstance  is  partly  owing  to  the  vehemence 
of  the  inflammation  producing  the  stye,  and  partly  to 
the  exquisite  sensibility  and  tension  of  the  skin,  which 
covers  the  edge  of  the  eyelids.  On  this  account,  the 
hordeolum  very  often  excites  fever  and  restlessness  in 
delicate,  irritable  constitutions ; it  suppurates  slowly 
and  imperfectly  ; and,  when  suppurated,  has  no  ten- 
dency to  burst. 

The  stye,  like  other  furunculous  inflammations,  forms 
an  exception  to  the  general  rule,  that  the  best  mode  in 
which  inflammatory  swellings  can  end,  is  resolution  ; 
for  whenever  a furunculous'  inflammation  extends  so 
deeply  as  to  destroy  any  of  the  cellular  substance,  the 
little  tumour  can  never  be  resolved,  or  only  imperfectly 
so.  This  event,  indeed,  would  rather  be  hurtful,  since 
there  would  still  remain  behind  a greater  or  smaller 
portion  of  dead  cellular  membrane  ; which,  sooner  or 
later,  might  bring  on  a renewal  of  the  stye  in  the  same 
place  as  before,  or  else  become  converted  into  a 
hard  indolent  body,  deforming  the  edge  of  the  eyelid. 

HORDEUM.  {Ab  horrore  aristae;  from  the  un- 
pleasantness of  its  beard  to  the  touch.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linna-an  system.  Class, 
Triandria;  Order,  Digynia.  Barley. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  common  barley 
See  Hordeum  vulgare. 

Hordeum  causticum.  See  Cevadilia. 

Hordeum  distichon.  This  plant  aftords  the  barley 
in  common  use.  See  Hordeum  vulgare. 

Hordeum  perlatum.  See  Hordeum  vulgare. 

Hordeum  vulgare.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  barley.  The  seed  called  barley,  is  obtained 
from  several  species  of  hordeum , but  principally  from 
the  vulgare,  or  common  or  Scotch  barley,  and  the 
distichon,  or  hordeum  gallicum  vel  mundatum,  or 
French  barley,  of  Linnteus.  It  is  extremely  nutritious 
and  mucilaginous,  and  in  common  use  as  a drink, 
when  boiled,  in  all  inflammatory  diseases  and  affec- 
tions of  the  chest,  especially  where  there  is  cough  or 
irritation  about  the  fauces.  A decoction  of  barley  with 
gum,  is  considered  a useful  diluent  and  demulcent  in 
dysury  and  strangury;  the  gum  mixing  with  the  urine, 
sheaths  the  urinary  canal  from  the  acrimony  of  the 
urine.  Among  the  ancients,  decoctions  of  barley, 
icpidr),  were  the  principal  medicine,  as  well  as  aliment, 
in  acute  diseases.  Barley  is  freed  from  its  shells  in 
mills,  and  in  this  state  called  Scotch  and  French  barley. 
In  Holland,  they  rub  barley  into  small  round  grains, 
somewhat  like  pearls,  which  is  therefore  called  pearl 
barley , or  hordeum  perlatum. 

HORIZONTAI AS.  Horizontal : applied  to  leaves, 
roots,  &.c.  which  spread  in  the  greatest  possible  degree ; 
as  the  leaves  of  Gentiana  campestris , and  roots  of  the 
Easerpitium  prutenicum. 

HORMINUM.  (From  opyau,  to  incite:  named 
from  its  supposed  qualities  of  provoking  venery.)  See 
Salvia  sclarea. 

HORN.  An  animal  substance  chiefly  membraneous, 
composed  of  coagulated  albumen,  with  a little  gelatin, 
and  about  a half  per  cent,  of  phosphate  of  lime. 
The  horns  of  the  buck  and  hart  are  of  a different 
nature,  being  intermediate  between  bone  and  horn. 
See  Cornu. 

Horn  silver.  A chloride  of  silver. 

HORNBLENDE.  A sub-species  of  straight-edged 
augite.  There  are  three  varieties  of  it: 

1.  Common  hornblende , which  is  of  a greenish  black 
colour:  is  an  essential  ingredient  of  the  mountain 
rocks,  syenite  and  green-stone,  and  occurs  frequently 
in  granite,  gneiss,  &c.  It  is  found  abundantly  in  the 
British  isles,  and  on  the  Continent. 

2.  Hornblende  slate,  of  a colour  intermediate  be- 
tween green  and  black.  It  occurs  in  beds  of  gneiss 
in  many  parts  of  Scotland,  England,  and  the  Conti- 
nent. 

3.  Basaltic  hornblende , of  a velvet  black  colour.  It 
is  found  imbedded  in  basalt,  along  with  olivine  and 
augite,  at  Arthur’s  Seat,  near  Edinburgh,  and  in  basal- 
tic rocks  of  England,  Ireland,  and  the  Continent. 

HORNSTONE.  Professor  Jameson’s  ninth  sub 
species  of  rhomboidal  quartz. 

HORRIPILA'TIO.  Horripilation.  (From  horror , 


HUM 


HUM 


and  pilus,  a hair.)  A shuddering  or  n sense  of  creep* 
ing  in  different  parts  of  the  body.  A symptom  of  the 
approach  of  fever. 

Horse-chesnut.  See  JEs  cuius  hippocastanum. 

Horse-radish.  See  Cochlearia  armoracia. 

IIORSE-TAIL.  See  Hippurus  vulgaris. 

HORSTIUS,  Gregory,  was  born  at  Torgau,  in 
1578.  After  studying  in  different  parts  of  Germany 
and  Switzerland,  he  graduated  at  Rpsil  in  1606,  and 
was  soon  after  appointed  to  a medical  professorship  at 
Wittenburg.  But  two  years  after  he  received  a simi- 
lar appointment  at  Giessen,  and  was  made  chief  phy- 
sician of  Hesse  ; where  he  attained  considerable  repu- 
tation in  his  profession.  In  1722  he  went  to  Ulm,  on 
an  invitation  from  the  magistracy  as  public  physician 
and  president  of  the  college  ; where  his  learning,  skill, 
and  humanity,  procured  him  general  esteem.  He  died 
in  1636.  His  works  were  collected  by  his  sons  in  three 
folio  volumes. 

HO'RTUS.  (From  orior , to  rise,  as  being  the  place 
where  vegetables  grow  up  ) 1.  A garden. 

2.  The  genitals  of  a woman,  which  is  the  repository 
of  the  human  semen. 

Hortus  sircus.  A collection  of  dried  plants 

HOUNDS-TONGUE.  See  Cynoglossum. 

HOUSE-LEEK.  See  Sempervivum  tectorum. 

HUBER,  John  James,  was  born  at  Basle  in  1707, 
and  graduated  there  at  the  age  of  26,  after  studying 
under  the  celebrated  Haller  and  other  able  teachers. 
Two  years  after  he  was  appointed  physician  to  the 
Court  of  Baden  Dourlach.  He  materially  assisted 
Haller  in  his  work  on  the  Botany  of  Switzerland,  and 
was  consequently  invited  by  him  in  1738  to  be  dis- 
sector at  Gottingen. 

He  speedily  rose  to  considerable  reputation  there, 
and  received  different  public  appointments.  He  had 
likewise  the  honour  of  being  elected  into  the  most 
celebrated  of  the  learned  societies  in  Europe.  He  died 
in  1778.  The  chief  objects  of  his  research  were  the  ' 
spinal  marrow,  and  the  nerves  originating  from  it:  he 
also  inquired  into  the  supposed  influence  of  the  imagi- 
nation of  the  mother  on  the  foetus,  and  into  the  cause 
of  miscarriages. 

[HULL,  Dr.  Amos  G.  This  gentleman  is  a living 
practitioner  of  physic  and  surgery  in  the  city  of  New- 
York.  He  has  paid  particular  attention  to  the  cure  of 
Reducible  Hernia,  and  has  succeeded  beyond  all  other 
surgeons  in  the  cure  of  this  frequent  complaint.  Prac- 
titioners have  most  usually  directed  their  patients  to 
apply  a truss.  Dr.  Hull,  however,  in  attending  more 
particularly  and  personally  to  the  adaptation  of  trusses 
to  different  kinds  of  Reducible  Hernia,  found  that  they 
were  all  made  upon  erroneous  principles.  He  has  ac- 
cordingly invented  a truss  differing  from  all  preceding 
trusses,  and  it  has  the  general  approbation  of  practi- 
tioners in  this  country,  for  its  simplicity  and  superior 
utility.  He  has  improved  upon  those  he  first  made, 
and  he  now  calls  it  his  improved  hinge  and  pivot 
Truss,  for  an  account  of  which  see  article,  Truss.  A.] 

HULME,  Nathaniel,  was  born  at  Halifax,  in  York- 
shire, 1732,  and  bred  to  the  profession  of  a surgeon- 
apothecary.  After  serving  some  time  in  the  navy,  he 
graduated  at  Edinburgh  in  1765.  He  then  settled  in 
London,  and  was  soon  after  appointed  physician  to  the 
General  Dispensary,  the  first  institution  of  that  kind 
established  in  the  metropolis.  About  the  year  1775  he 
was  elected  physician  to  the  Charter-house.  In  1807 
he  died,  in  consequence  of  a severe  bruise  by  a fall. 
He  was  author  of  several  dissertations  on  scurvy, 
puerperal  fever,  &c.  He  also  made  a series  of  expe- 
riments on  the  light  spontaneously  emitted  from  vari- 
ous bodies,  published  in  the  Philosophical  Transac- 
tions : and  he  was  one  of  the  editors  of  the  London 
Practice  of  Physic. 

HUMECTA'NTIA.  (From  humecto,  to  make  moist.) 
Medicines  which  are  supposed  capable  of  softening  by 
making  the  solids  of  the  body  moist. 

HUMERAL.  Humeralis.  Belonging  to  the  hume- 
rus or  arm. 

Humeral  artery.  Arteria  humeralis.  Brachial 
artery.  The  axillary  artery,  having  passed  the  tendon 
of  the  great  pectoral  muscle,  changes  its  name  to  the 
brachial  or  humeral  artery,  which  name  it  retains  in 
its  course  down  the  arm  to  the  bend,  where  it  divides 
into  the  radial  and  ulnar  arteries.  In  this  course  it 
gives  off  several  muscular  branches,  three  of  which 
oulv  deserve  attention : 1.  The  artcria  profunda  supe- 


j rior)  which  goes  round  the  back  of  the  arm  to  the  ex- 
terior muscle,  and  is  often  named  the  upper  muscular 
artery.  2.  Another  like  it,  called  arteria  profunda  in- 
ferior, or  the  lower  muscular  artery.  3.  Ramus  anas- 
tornoticus  major , which  anastomoses  round  the  elbow 
with  the  branches  of  the  ulnar  artery. 

Humeralis  musculus.  See  Deltoides. 

HU'MERUS.  (From  topos,  the  shoulder.) 

1.  The  arm,  as  composed  of  hard  and  soft  parts, 
from  the  shoulder  to  the  forearm. 

2.  The  shoulder. 

3.  The  bone  of  the  arm,  or  os  humeri , os  bracliii.  A 
long  cylindrical  bone,  situated  between  the  scapula  and 
forearm.  Its  upper  extremity  is  formed  somewhat 
laterally  and  internally,  into  a large,  round,  and  smooth 
head,  which  is  admitted  into  the  glenoid  cavity  of  the 
scapula.  Around  the  basis  of  this  head  is  observed  a 
circular  fossa,  deepest  anteriorly  and  externally,  which 
forms  what  is  . called  the  neck  of  the  bone,  and  from 
the  edge  of  which  arises  the  capsular  ligament,  which 
is  further  strengthened  by  a strong  membraneous  ex- 
pansion, extending  to  the  upper  edge  of  the  glenoid 
cavity,  and  to  the  coracoid  process  of  the  scapula ; and 
likewise  by  the  tendinous  expansions  of  the  muscles, 
inserted  into  the  head  of  the  humerus.  This  capsular 
ligament  is  sometimes  torn  in  luxation,  and  becomes 
an  obstacle  to  the  easy  reduction  of  the  bone.  The 
articulating  surface  of  the  head  is  covered  by  a car- 
tilage, which  is  thick  in  its  middle  part,  and  thin  to- 
wards its  edges ; by  which  means  it  is  more  convex  in 
the  recent  subject  than  in  the  skeleton.  This  upper 
extremity,  besides  the  round  smooth  head,  affords  two 
other  smaller  protuberances.  One  of  these,  which  is 
the  largest  of  the  two,  is  of  an  irregular  oblong  shape, 
and  is  placed  at  the  back  of  the  head  of  the  bone,  from 
which  it  is  separated  by  a kind  of  groove,  that  makes 
a part  of  the  neck.  This  tuberosity  is  divided,  at  its 
upper  part,  into  three  surfaces  ; the  first  of  these,  which 
is  the  smallest  and  uppermost,  serves  for  the  insertion 
of  the  supraspinatus  muscle;  the  second  or  middle- 
most, for  the  insertion  of  the  infraspinatus;  and  the 
third,  which  is  the  lowest  and  hindmost,  for  the  inser- 
tion of  the  teres  minor.  The  other  smaller  tuberosity 
is  situated  anteriorly,  between  the  larger  one  and  the 
head  of  the  humerus,  and  serves  for  the  insertion  of 
the  subscapularis  muscle.  Between  these  two  tube- 
rosities there  is  a deep  groove  for  lodging  the  tendinous 
head  of  the  biceps  brachii ; the  capsular  ligament  of 
the  joint  affording  here  a prolongation,  thinner  than 
the  capsule  itself,  which  covers  and  accompanies  this 
muscle  to  its  fleshy  portion,  where  it  gradually  disap- 
pears in  the  adjacent  cellular  membrane.  Immedi- 
ately below  its  neck,  the  os  humeri  begins  to  assume  a 
cylindrical  shape,  so  that  here  the  body  of  the  bone 
may  be  said  to  commence.  At  its  upper  part  is  ob- 
served a continuation  of  the  groove  for  the  biceps, 
which  extends  downward,  about  the  fourth  part  of 
the  length  of  the  bone  in  an  oblique  direction.  The 
edges  of  this  groove  are  continuations  of  the  greater  and 
smaller  tuberosities,  and  serve  for  the  attachment  of 
the  pectoralis,  latissimus  dorsi,  and  teres  major  mus- 
cles. The  groove  itself  is  lined  with  a glistening  sub- 
stance like  cartilage,  but  which  seems  to  be  nothing 
more  than  the  remains  of  tendinous  fibres.  A little 
lower  down,  towards  the  external  and  anterior  side  of 
the  middle  of  the  bone,  it  is  seen  rising  into  a rough 
ridge  for  the  insertion  of  the  deltoid  muscle.  On  each 
side  of  this  ridge  the  bone  is  smooth  and  flat,  for  the 
lodgment  of  the  brachialis  internus  muscle;  and  be- 
hind the  middle  part  of  the  outermost  side  of  the  ridge 
is  a channel,  for  the  transmission  of  vessels  into  the 
substance  oLthe  bone.  A little  lower  down,  and  near 
the  inner  side  of  the  ridge,  there  is  sometimes  seen 
such  another  channel,  which  is  intended  for  the  same 
purpose.  The  os  humeri,  at  its  lower  extremity,  be- 
comes gradually  broader  and  flatter,  so  as  to  have  this 
end  nearly  of  a triangular  shape.  The  bone,  thus  ex- 
panded, affords  two  surfaces,  of  which  the  anterior 
one  is  the  broadest,  and  somewhat  convex ; and  the 
posterior  one  narrower  and  smoother.  The  bone  ter- 
minates in  four  large  processes,  the  two  outermost  of 
which  are  called  condyles , though  not  designed  for  the 
articulation  of  the  bone.  These  condyles,  which  are 
placed  at  some  distance  from  each  other,  on  each  side 
of  the  bone,- are  rough  and  irregular  protuberances, 
formed  for  the  insertion  of  muscles  and  ligaments,  and 
differ  from  each  other  in  size  and  shape.  The  external 


HUN 


HUN 


condyle,  when  the  arm  is  in  the  most  natural  position, 
is  found  to  be  placed  somewhat  forwarder  than  the 
other.  The  internal  condyle  is  longer,  and  more  pro- 
tuberant, than  the  external.  From  each  of  these  pro- 
cesses a ridge  is  continued  upwards,  at  the  side  or  the 
bone.  In  the  interval  between  the  two  condyles  aie 
placed  the  two  articulating  processes,  contiguous  to 
each  other,  and  covered  with  cartilage.  One  of  these, 
which  is  the  smallest,  is  formed  into  a small,  obtuse, 
smooth  head,  on  which  the  radius  plays.  This  little 
head  is  placed  near  the  external  condyle,  as  a part  of 
which  it  has  been  sometimes  described.  The  other, 
and  larger  process,  is  composed  of  two  lateral  protu- 
berances and  a middle  cavity,  all  of  which  are  smooth 
and  covered  with  cartilage.  From  the  manner  in 
which  the  ulna  moves  upon  this  process,  it  has  gotten 
the  name  of  trochlea , or  pulley.  The  sides  of  this  pul- 
ley are  unequal ; that  which  is  towards  the  little  head, 
is  the  highest  of  the  two ; the  other,  which  is  contigu- 
ous to  the  external  .condyle,  is  more  slanting,  being 
situated  obliquely  from  within  outwards,  so  that  when 
the  forearm  is  fully  extended,  it  does  not  form  a straight 
line  with  the  os  humeri,  and,  for  the  same  reason,  when 
we  bend  the  elbow,  the  hand  comes  not  to  the  shoulder, 
as  it  might  be  expected  to  do,  but  to  the  forepart  of  the 
breast.  There  is  a cavity  at  the  root  of  these  pro- 
cesses, on  each  of  the  two  surfaces  of  the  bone.  The 
cavity  on  the  anterior  surface  is  divided  by  a ridge  into 
two,  the  external  of  which  receives  the  end  of  the 
radius,  and  the  internal  one  lodges  the  coronoid  pro- 
cess of  the  ulna  in  the  flexions  of  the  forearm.  The 
cavity  on  the  posterior  surface,  at  the  basis  of  the  pul- 
ley, is  much  larger,  and  lodges  the  olecranon  when  the 
arm  is  extended.  The  internal  structure  of  the  os 
humeri  is  similar  to  that  of  other  long  bones.  In  new- 
oorn  infants,  both  the  ends  of  the  bone  are  cartilagi- 
nous, and  the  large  head,  with  the  two  tubercles  above, 
and  the  condyles,  with  the  two  articulating  processes 
below,  become  epiphyses  before  they  are  entirely  united 
to  the  rest  of  the  bone. 

HU'MILIS.  (From  humi,  on  the  ground : so  named 
because  it  turns  the  eye  downwards,  and  is  expressive 
of  humility.)  See  Rectum  inferior  oculi. 

HUMITE.  A mineral  of  a reddish  brown  colour 
found  near  Naples,  and  named  by  Count  Bournon  in 
honour  of  Sir  Abraham  Hume,  a distinguished  culti- 
vator of  mineralogy. 

HU'MOR.  ( Jib  humo , from  the  ground  ; because 
moisture  springs  from  the  earth.)  Humour,  a general 
name  for  any  fluid  of  the  body  except  the  blood. 

Humor  vitreus.  The  vitreous  humour  of  the  eye, 
which  takes  its  name  from  the  resemblance  to  melted 
glass,  is  less  dense  than  the  crystalline  but  more  than 
the  aqueous  humour;  it  is  very  considerable  in  the 
human  eye,  and  seems  to  be  formed  by  the  small  arte- 
ries that  are  distributed  in  cells  of  the  hyaloid  mem- 
brane ; it  is  heavier  than  common  water,  slightly  albu- 
minous and  saline. 

HUMOUR.  See  Humor. 

Humour,  aqueous.  See  Aqueous  humour. 

Humour , vitreous.  See  Humor  vitreus. 

Humours  of  the  Eye.  See  Eye. 

HUMULIN.  The  narcotic  principle  of  the  fruit  of 
the  hop.  See  Humulus. 

HU'MULUS.  (From  humus , the  ground : so  named 
because,  without  factitious  support,  it  creeps  along  the 
ground.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  JDiacia;  Order,  Pentandria. 
The  hop. 

Humulus  luvulus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
hop-plant.  JLupulus ; Convolvulus  perennis.  The 
hop  is  the  floral  leaf  or  bractea  of  this  plant:  it  is 
dried  and  used  in  various  kinds  of  strong  beer.  Hops 
have  a bitter  taste,  less  ungrateful  than  most  of  the 
other  strong  bitters,  accompanied  with  some  degree  of 
warmth  and  aromatic  flavour,  and  are  highly  intoxi- 
cating. The  hop-flower  also  exhales  a considerable 
quantity  of  its  narcotic  power  in  drying ; hence  those 
who  sleep  in  the  hop-houses  are  with  difficulty  roused 
from  their  slumber.  A pillow  stuffed  with  these  flow- 
ers is  said  to  have  laid  our  late  monarch  to  sleep  when 
other  remedies  had  failed.  The  young  sprouts,  called 
hop-tops,  if  plucked  when  only  a foot  above  the  ground, 
and  boiled,  are  eaten,  like  asparagus,  and  are  a whole- 
some delicacy.  The  active  or  narcotic  principle  of  the 
hop,  is  called  humulin. 

HUNGER.  Fames.  “ The  want  of  solid  aliments 
428 


is  characterized  by  a peculiar  sensation  in  the  region 
of  the  stomach,  and  by  a general  feebleness,  more  or 
less  marked.  This  feeling  is  generally  renewed  after 
the  stomach  has  been  for  some  time  empty  ; it  is  varia- 
ble in  its  intensity  and  its  nature  in  different  individu- 
als, and  even  in  the  same  individual.  In  some  its 
violence  is  excessive,  in  others  it  is  scarcely  felt;  some 
never  feel  it,  and  eat  only  because  the  hour  of  repast 
is  come.  Many  persons  perceive  a drawing,  a pres- 
sure more  or  less  painful  in  the  epigastric  region,  ac- 
companied by  yawnings,  and  a particular  noise,  pro- 
duced by  the  gases  contained  in  the  stomach,  which 
becomes  contracted.  When  this  want  is  not  satisfied 
it  increases,  and  may  become  a severe  pain  : the  same 
takes  place  with  the  sensation  of  weakness  and  gene- 
ral fatigue,  which  is  felt,  and  which  may  increase, 
so  as  to  render  the  motions  difficult,  or  even  im- 
possible. 

Authors  distinguish  in  hunger,  local  phenomena,  and 
general  phenomena. 

This  distinction  is  good  in  itself,  and  may  be  useful 
for  study;  but  have  not  mere  gratuitous  suppositions 
been  described  as  local  or  general  phenomena  of  hun- 
ger, the  existence  of  which  was  rendered  probable  by 
this  theory  1 This  point  of  physiology  is  one  of  those 
in  which  the  want  of  direct  experiment  is  the  most 
strongly  felt. — The  pressure  and  contraction  of  the 
stomach  are  considered  among  the  local  phenomena 
of  hunger : 4 the  sides  of  that  viscus,’  it  is  said,  4 be- 
come thicker;  it  changes  its  form  and  situation,  and 
draws  the  duodenum  a little  towards  it;  its  cavity  con- 
tains saliva  mixed  with  air,  mucosities,  bile,  which 
has  regurgitated  in  consequence  of  the  dragging  of 
the  duodenum ; the  quantity  of  these  humours  in- 
creases in  the  stomach  in  proportion  as  hunger  is  of 
longer  continuation.  The  cystic  bile  does  not  flow 
into  the  duodenum;  it  collects  in  the  gall-bladder,  and 
it  becomes  abundant  and  black  according  to  the  con- 
tinuance of  abstinence.  A change  takes  place  in  the 
order  of  the  circulation  of  the  digestive  organs;  the 
stomach  receives  less  blood,  perhaps  on  account  of  the 
flexion  of  these  vessels,  which  is  then  greater  ; perhaps 
by  the  compression  of  the  nerves,  in  consequence  of 
this  confinement,  the  influence  of  which  upon  tne  cir- 
culation will  then  be  diminished.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  liver,  the  spleen,  the  epiploon,  receive  more,  and 
perform  the  office  of  diverticula:  the  liver  and  the 
spleen,  because  they  are  less  supported  when  the  sto- 
mach is  empty,  and  then  present  a more  easy  access 
to  the  blood  ; and  the  epiploon,  because  the  vessels  are 
then  less  fiexuous ,’  &c.  The  most  of  these  data  are 
mere  conjectures,  and  nearly  devoid  of  proof.  After 
twenty- four,  forty-eight,  and  even  sixty  hours  of  com- 
plete abstinence,  Dr.  Magendie  says  he  never  saw  the 
contraction  and  pressure  of  the  stomach  of  which 
some  authors  speak:  this  organ  has  always  presented 
to  him  very  considerable  dimensions,  particularly  in 
its  splenic  extremity;  it  was  only  after  the  fourth  and 
fifth  day  that  it  appeared  to  ltlurn  upon  itself,  to  di- 
minish much  in  size,  and  slightly  in  position ; even 
these  effects  are  not  strongly  marked  unless  fasting  has 
been  very  strictly  observed. 

Bichit  thinks  that  the  pressure  sustained  by  the 
empty  stomach  is  equal  to  that  which  it  supports  when 
distended  by  aliments,  since,  says  he,  the  sides  of  the 
abdomen  are  compressed  in  proportion  as  the  volume 
of  the  stomach  diminishes.  The  contrary  of  this  may 
be  easily  proved  by  putting  one  or  two  fingers  into  the 
abdominal  cavity,  after  having  made  an  incision  in  its 
sides;  it  will  then  be  easily  seen  that  the  pressure  sus- 
tained by  tire  viscera,  is,  in  a certain  degree,  in  direct 
proportion  to  the  distention  of  the  stomach;  if  the 
stomach  is  full,  the  finger  will  be  stronger  pressed,  and 
the  viscera  will  press  outward  to  escape  through  the 
opening;  if  it  is  empty,  the  pressure  will  be  very 
trifling,  and  the  viscera  will  have  little  tendency  to 
pass  out  from  the  abdominal  cavity.  It  must  be  un 
derstood  that  in  this  experiment  the  pressure  exertec 
by  the  abdominal  muscle,  when  they  are  relaxed,  ought 
not  to  be  confounded  with  that  which  they  exert  when 
contracted  with  force.  Also,  when  the  stomach  is 
empty,  all  the  reservoirs  contained  in  the  abdomen 
are  more  easily  distended  by  the  matters  which  re- 
main some  lime  in  them.  Perhaps  this  is  the  princi- 
pal reason  wrhy  bile  then  accumulates  in  the  gall- 
bladder. With  regard  to  the  presence  of  bile  in  the 
stomach,  that  some  persons  regard  as  the  cause  of 


HUN 


HUN 


hunger,  unless  in  certain  sickly  cases  bile  does  not  I 
enter  it,  though  it  continues  .to  flow  into  the  small  in- 
testine. 

The  quantity  of  mucus  that  the  cavity  of  the  sto- 
mach presents  is  so  much  greater  in  proportion  to  the 
prolongation  of  abstinence. 

Relatively  to  the  quantity  of  blood  which  goes  to 
the  stomach  when  empty,  in  proportion  to  the  volume 
of  its  vessels,  and  the  mode  of  circulation  which  then 
exists,  the  general  opinion  is  that  it  receives  less  of 
this  fluid  than  when  it  is  full  of  aliments ; but,  far 
from  being  in  this  respect  in  opposition  with  the  other 
abdominal  organs,  this  disposition  appears  to  be  com- 
mon to  all  the  organs  contained  in  the  abdomen. 

To  the  general  phenomena  of  hunger  is  ascribed  a 
weakness  and  diminution  of  the  action  of  all  the 
organs;  the  circulation  and  the  respiration  become 
slow,  the  heat  of  the  body  lowers,  the  secretions  dimi- 
nish, the  whole  of  the  functions  are  exerted  with  more 
difficulty.  The  absorption  alone  is  said  to  become 
more  active,  but  nothing  is  strictly  demonstrated  in 
this  respect. 

Hunger,  appetite  itself,  which  is  only  its  first  degree, 
ought  to  be  distinguished  from  that  feeling  which  in- 
duces us  to  prefer  one  sort  of  food  to  another,  from  that 
which  causes  us,  during  a repast,  to  choose  one  dish 
rather  than  another,  &.c. 

These  feelings  are  very  different  from  real  hunger, 
which  expresses  the  true  wants  of  the  economy  ; they 
in  a great  measure  depend  on  civilization,  on  habits, 
and  certain  ideas  relative  to  the  properties  of  aliments. 
Some  of  them  are  in  unison  with  the  season,  the  cli- 
mate, and  then  they  are  equally  legitimate  as  hun- 
ger itself ; such  is  that  which  inclines  us  to  a vegetable 
regimen  in  hot  countries,  or  during  the  heats  of 
cummer. 

Certain  circumstances  render  hunger  more  intense, 
and  cause  it  to  return  at  nearer  intervals  ; such  as  a 
cold  and  dry  air,  winter,  spring,  Cold  baths,  dry  fric- 
tions upon  the  skin,  exercise  on  horseback,  walking, 
bodily  fatigue,  and  generally  all  the  causes  that  put 
the  action  of  the  organs  in  play,  and  accelerate  the  nu- 
tritive process  with  which  hunger  is  essentially  con- 
nected. Some  substances,  being  introduced  into  the 
6tomach,  excite  a feeling  like  hunger,  but  which  ought 
not  to  be  confounded  with  it. 

There  are  causes  which  diminish  the  intensity  of 
hunger,  and  which  prolong  the  periods  at  which  it 
habitually  manifests  itself ; among  this  number  are  the 
inhabiting  of  hot  countries,  and  humid  places,  rest  of 
the  body  and  mind,  depressing  passions,  and  indeed 
all  the  circumstances  that  interrupt  the  action  of  tiie 
organs,  and  diminish  the  activity  of  nutrition.  There 
are  also  substances  which,  being  brought  into  the  di- 
gestive canals,  prevent  hunger,  or  cause  it  to  cease,  as 
opium,  hot  drinks,  &c. 

With  respect  to  the  cause  of  hunger,  it  has  been,  by 
turns,  attributed  to  the  providence  of  the  vital  princi- 
ple, to  the  frictions  of  the  sides  of  the  stomach  against 
each  otner,  to  the  dragging  of  the  liver  upon  the  dia- 
phragm, to  the  action  of  bile  upon  the  stomach,  to  the 
acrimony  and  acidity  of  the  gastric  juice,  to  fatigue  of 
the  contracted  fibres  of  the  stomach,  to  compression  of 
the  nerves  of  this  viscus,  <se.c.  &c. 

Hunger  arises,  like  all  other  internal  sensations,  from 
the  action  of  the  nervous  system ; it  has  no  other  seat 
than  this  system  itself,  and  no  other  causes  than  the 
general  laws  of  organization.  What  very  well  proves 
the  truth  of  this  assertion  is,  that  it  sometimes  conti- 
nues though  the  stomach  is  filled  with  food;  that  it 
cannot  he  produced  though  the  stomach  has  been 
some  time  empty;  lastly,  that  it  is  so  subject  to  habit 
as  to  cease  spontaneously  after  the  habitual  hour  of 
repast  is  over.  This  is  true  not  only  of  the  feeling 
which  takes  place  in  the  region  of  the  stomach,  but 
also  of  the  general  weakness  that  accompanies  it,  and 
which,  consequently,  cannot  be  considered  as  real,  at 
least  in  the  first  instant  in  which  it  is  manifested.” 

HUNTER,  W illiam,  was  born  in  1718,  at  Kilbride 
in  Scotland.  He  was  educated  for  the  church  at  Glas- 
gow; but  feeling  scruples  against  subscription,  and 
having  become  acquainted  with  the  celebrated  Cullen, 
he  determined  to  pursue  the  medical  profession.  After 
living  three  years  with  that  able  teacher,  who  then 
practised  as  a surgeon-apothecary  at  Hamilton,  he 
went  to  Edinburgh  in  November,  1740;  and  in  the  fol- 
lowing summer  came  to  London  with  a recommenda- 


tion to  Dr.  James  Douglas,  who  engaged  him  to  assist 
in  his  dissections,  and  superintend  the  education  of 
his  son.  He  was  also  enabled  by  that  physician’s  libe- 
rality to  attend  St.  George’s  Hospital,  and  other  teach- 
ers ; but  death  deprived  him  of  so  valuable  a friend 
within  a year.  However,  he  remained  in  the  family, 
and  prosecuted  his  studies  with  great  zeal.  In  1743, 
he  communicated  to  the  Royal  Society  a paper  on  the 
structure  and  diseases  of  articulating  cartilages,  which 
was  much  admired.  He  now  formed  the  design  of 
teaching  anatomy ; and,  after  encountering  some  dif- 
ficulties, commenced  by  giving  a course  on  the  opera- 
tions of  surgery  to  a society  of  navy  surgeons  in  lieu 
of  Mr.  Samuel  Sharpe.  At  first  he  felt  considerable 
solicitude  in  speaking  in  public;  but  gradually  this 
wore  off,  and  he  evinced  a remarkable  facility  in  ex- 
pressing himself  with  perspicuity  and  elegance.  He 
gave  so  much  satisfaction,  that  he  was  requested  to  ex- 
tend the  plan  to  anatomy,  which  he  began  accordingly 
in  1746.  His  success  was  considerable,  but  having 
somewhat  embarrassed  himself  at  first  by  assisting  his 
friends,  he  was  obliged  to  adopt  proper  caution  in 
lending  money;  which,  with  his  talents,  industry,  and 
economy,  enabled  him  to  acquire  an  ample  fortune. 
In  1748,  he  accompanied  his  pupil, ‘young  Douglas,  on 
a tour,  and  having  seen  the  admirable  injections  of 
Albinus  at  Leyden,  he  was  inspired  with  a strong 
emulation  to  excel  in  that  branch.  On  his  return,  he 
relinquished  the  profession  of  surgery,  and  devoted 
himself  to  midwifery,  to  which  his  person  and  man- 
ners well  adapted  him  ; and  having  been  appointed  to 
the  Middlesex  and  British  lying-in  hospitals,  as  well  as 
favoured  by  other  circumstances,  he  made  a rapid  ad- 
vance in  practice.  In  1750  he  obtained  a doctor’s 
degree  from  Glasgow,  and  was  afterward  often  con- 
sulted as  a physician,  in  cases  which  required  peculiar 
anatomical  skill.  Six  years  after,  he  was  admitted  a 
licentiate  of  the  College  in  London  ; and  also  a mem- 
ber of  the  society,  by  which  the  “ Medical  Observa- 
tions and  Inquiries”  were  published.  He  enriched 
that  work  with  many  valuable  communications ; par- 
ticularly an  account  of  the  disease,  since  called  Aneu- 
rismal  Varix,  a case  of  emphysema,  with  practical  re- 
marks, wherein  he  showed  the  fat  to  be  deposited  in 
distinct  vesicles ; and  some  observations  on  the  retro- 
version of  the  uterus:  and,  on  the  death  of  Dr.  Fother- 
gill,  he  was  chosen  president  of  that  society.  In  1762 
he  published  his  “ Medical  Commentaries,”  in  which 
he  laid  claim,  with  much  asperity,  to  several  anatomi- 
cal discoveries,  especially  relative  to  the  absorbent 
system,  in  opposition  to  the  second  Monro,  of  Edin- 
burgh. He  was  extremely  tenacious  of.  his  rights  in 
this  respect,  and  would  not  allow  them. to  be  infringed, 
even  by  his  own  brother.  It  must  be  very  difficult, 
and  of  little  importance,  to  decide  such  controversies  ; 
especially  as  the  principal  points  concerning  the  ab- 
sorbent system  had  been  stated  as  early  as  1726,  in  a 
work  printed  at  Paris  by  M.  Noguez.  About  the  same 
period,  the  queen  being  pregnant,  Dr.  Hunter  was  con- 
sulted; and,  two  years  after,  he  was  appointed  her 
physician  extraordinary.  In  1767  he  was  chosen  a 
Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society,  to  which  he  communi- 
cated some  papers ; and,  in  the  year  following,  he 
was  appointed,  by  the  king,  Professor  of  Anatomy  to 
the  Royal  Academy,  on  its  first  institution ; he  was 
alsa  elected  into  the  Society  of  Antiquaries,  and  some 
respectable  foreign  associations.  In  1775  he  published 
a splendid  work,  which  had  occupied  him  for  24  years 
previously,  “The  Anatomy  of  the  Gravid  Uterus,” 
illustrated  by  plates,  admirable  for  their  accuracy,  as 
well  as  elegance;  among  other  improvements,  the 
membrana  decidua  reflexa,  discovered  by  himself,  was 
here  first  delineated.  He  drew  up  a detailed  descrip- 
tion of  the  figures;  which  was  published  after  his 
death  by  his  nephew,  Dr.  Baillie.  Another  posthu- 
mous publication,  deservedly  much  admired,  was  the 
“Two  Introductory  Lectures”  to  his  anatomical 
course.  As  his  wealth  increased,  he  formed  the  noble 
design  of  establishing  an  anatomical  school;  and  pro- 
posed to  government,  on  the  grant  of  a piece  of  ground, 
to  build  a proper  edifice  and  endow  a perpetual  pro- 
fessorship ; but  this  not  beimr  acceded  to,  he  set  about 
the  establishment  in  Great  Windmill-street,  where  he 
collected  a most  valuable  museum  of  anatomical  pre- 
parations, subjects  of  natural  history,  scarce  books, 
coins,  &c.  to  which  an  easy  access  was  always  given. 
He  continued  to  lecture  and  practise  till  near  the  pe- 

429 


HUX 


HYD 


lriod  of  his  death,  in  1783.  He  bequeathed  the  use  of 
his  museum,  for  thirty  years,  to  Dr.  Baillie;  after 
which  it  was  to  belong  to  the  University  of  Glasgow. 

HUNTER,  John,  was  born  ten  years  after  his  bro- 
ther William.  His  early  education  was  much  ne- 
glected, and  his  temper  injured,  through  his  mother’s 
indulgence.  At  a proper  age  he  was  put  under  a rela- 
tion, a carpenter  and  cabinet-maker,  who  failed  in  his 
business.  Hearing,  at  this  period,  of  his  brother’s  suc- 
cess, he  applied  to  become  his  assistant,  and  accord- 
ingly came  to  London  in  the  autumn  of  1748.  He 
made  such  proficiency  in  dissection,  that  he  was  capa- 
ble of  undertaking  the  demonstrations  in  the  following 
season.  During  the  summer  lie  attended  the  surgical 
practice  at  different  hospitals ; and,  in  1756,  he  was 
appointed  house-surgeon  at  St.  George’s.  He  had 
been  admitted  by  his  brother  to  a partnership  in  the 
lectures  the  year  before.  After  labouring  about  ten 
years  with  unexampled  ardour  iu  the  study  of  human 
anatomy,  be  turned  his  attention  to  that  of  other  ani- 
mals, with  a view  to  elucidate  physiology.  His  health 
was  so  much  impaired  by  these  pursuits,  that,  in  1760, 
he  went  abroad  as  surgeon  on  the  stall',  and  thus  ac- 
quired a knowledge  of  gun-shot  wounds.  On  his  re- 
turn, after  three  years,  he  settled  in  London  as  a sur- 
geon, and  gave  instructions  in  dissection  and  the  per- 
formance of  operations ; and  he  continued,  with  great 
zeal,  his  researches  into  comparative  anatomy  and 
natural  history.  Several  papers  were  communicated 
by  him  to  the  Royal  Society,  of  which  he  was  elected 
a member  in  1767.  About  this  time,  by  his  brother’s 
interest,  he  was  appointed  one  of  the  surgeons  at  St. 
George’s  Hospital ; and  his  professional  reputation  was 
rapidly  increasing.  In  1771  he  published  the  first  part 
of  his  work  on  the  teeth,  displaying  great  accuracy  of 
research  : and,  two  years  after,  he  began  a course  of 
lectures  on  the  principles  of  surgery.  He  fell. short  of 
his  brother  in  methodical  arrangement,  and  facility  of 
expressing  his  ideas,  and  indeed  adopted  a peculiar 
language,  perhaps  in  part  from  the  deficiency  of  his 
education ; but  he  certainly  brought  forward  many  in- 
genious speculations  in  physiology  and  pathology,  and 
suggested  some  important  practical  improvements, 
particularly  the  operation  for  popliteal  aneurism.  In 
1776  he  was  appointed  surgeon-extraordinary  to  the 
king;  and  soon  after  received  marks  of  distinction 
from  several  foreign  societies.  His  emoluments  in- 
creasing, he  took  a large  house  in  Leicester-square, 
and  built  a spacious  museum,  which  he  continued  to 
store  with  subjects  in  comparative  anatomy,  at  a very 
great  expense.  The  post  of  Deputy-Surgeon  General 
to  the  Army  was  conferred  upon  him  in  1786 ; and,  in 
the  same  year,  his  great  work  on  the  venereal  disease 
appeared,  which  will  ever  remain  a monument  of  his 
extraordinary  sagacity  and  talent  for  observation.  lie 
also  published,  at  this  period,  “ Observations  on  the 
Animal  Economy,”  chiefly  composed  of  papers 
already  printed  in  the  Philosophical  Transactions. 
In  1790  he  was  appointed  Inspector-General  of  Hos- 
pitals, and  Surgeon-General  to  the  Army ; when  he 
resigned  his  lectures  to  Mr.  Home,  whose  sister  he  had 
married.  He  had  been  for  two  years  before  labouring 
under  symptoms  of  organic  disease  about  the  heart, 
which  were  aggravated  by  any  sudden  exertion  or  agi- 
tation of  his  mind ; these  increased  progressively,  and, 
in  October  1793,  while  at  the  hospital,  being  vexed  by 
some  untoward  circumstance,  he  suddenly  expired. 
He  left  a valuable  treatise  on  the  blood,  inflammation, 
and  gun-shot  wounds,  which  was  published  soon  after, 
with  a life  prefixed,  by  his  brother-in-law.  His  mu- 
seum was  directed  to  be  offered  to  the  purchase  of 
government:  it  was  bought  for  15,0001.  and  presented 
to  the  College  of  Surgeons,  on  condition  of  their  open- 
ing it  to  public  inspection,  and  giving  a set  of  lectures 
annually,  explanatory  of  its  contents.  The  prepara- 
tions are  arranged  so  as  to  exhibit  all  the  gradations  of 
nature,  from  the  simplest  state  of  animated  existence 
up  to  man,  according  to  the  different  functions.  It 
comprehends  also  a large  series  of  entire  animals,  ske- 
letons of  almost  every  genus,  and  other  subjects  of  na- 
tural history. 

HURTSICKLE.  (So  called  because  it  is  trouble- 
some to  cut  down,  and  sometimes  notches  the  sickle.) 
See  Centaurea  cyanus. 

HUSK.  See  Gluma. 

HUXHAM,  John,  was  born  about  the  end  of  the  17th 
century,  and  practised  as  a physician,  with  consider- 


able reputation,  at  Plymouth,  where  he  died  in  1768 
His  writings  display  great  learning  and  talent  for  ob- 
servation. He  kept  a register  of  the  weather  and  pre- 
vailing diseases  for  nearly  thirty  years,  which  was 
published  in  Latin,  in  three  volumes.  He  was  early 
elected  into  the  Royal  Society,  and  communicated 
several  papers  on  pathology  and  morbid  anatomy.  But 
his  fame  rests  chiefly  upon  his  “ Essay  on  Fevers,” 
which  Went  through  several  editions ; a dissertation 
being  afterward  added  on  the  malignant  sore  throat. 

HYACINTH.  1.  A sub-species  of  pyramidal  zircon. 
It  comes  from  Ceylon,  and  is  much  esteemed  as  a gem. 

2.  See  Hyacinthus. 

HYACI'NTHUS.  (Said  by  the  poets  to  be  named 
from  the  friend  of  Apollo,  who  was  turned  into  this 
flower.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Hex.av.dria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Hyacinthus  muscari.  Muscari.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  musk-grape  flower,  which,  according  to 
Ray,  posseses  emetic  and  diuretic  qualities. 

Hyacinthus  non  scrittus.  Hare-bells.  The  sys- 
tematic name  of  the  blue-bells,  so  common  in  our 
hedges  in  spring.  The  roots  are  bulbous  ; the  flowers 
agreeably  scented.  Galen  considered  the  root  as  a 
remedy  in  jaundice.  It  is  ranked  among  the  astrin- 
gents, but  of  very  inferior  power. 

HYALITE.  A transparent  siliceous  stone,  which 
is  often  cut  into  ring-stones,  found  near  Frankfort  on 
the  Maine. 

HYALO'IDES.  ( Membrana  hyaloides  ; from  vahos, 
glass,  and  tidosi  likeness.)  Membrana  aracknoidea. 
Capsule  of  the  vitreous  humour.  The  transparent 
membrane  enclosing  the  vitreous  humour  of  the  eye. 

HYBERNACULUM.  This  is  defined  by  Linnaeus 
to  be  a part  of  the  plant  which  protects  the  embryo 
herb  from  external  injuries. 

An  organic  body  which  sprouts  from  the  surface  of 
different  parts  of  a plant,  enclosing  the  rudiments  of  the 
new  shoot,  and  which  is  capable  of  evolving  a new  in- 
dividual perfectly  similar  to  the  parent.  This  is  a 
modification  of  the  definition  of  Gaertner. — Thompson. 

Hyboma.  A gibbosity  of  the  spine. 

HYBRID.  ( Hybrida , from  v6pi$,  an  injury ; because 
its  nature  is  tainted.)  A monstrous  production  of  two 
different  species  of  animals  or  plants.  In  the  former  it 
is  called  mongrel,  or  mule.  Neither  the  animal  nor  the 
seeds  of  hybrid  plants  propagate  their  species. 

HYDA'RTHRUS.  (From  vScop,  water,  and  apdpov, 
a joint.)  Hydarlhron.  Hydarthros.  Spina  vcntosa 
of  the  Arabian  writers,  Rhazes  and  Avicenna.  White- 
swelling. The  white-swelling,  in  this  country,  is  a 
peculiarly  common  and  exceedingly  terrible  disease. 
The  varieties  of  white-swelling  are  very  numerous,  and 
might  usefully  receive  particular  appellations.  Syste- 
matic writers  have  generally  been  content  with  a dis 
tinction  into  two  kinds,  viz.  rheumatic  and  scrofulous 
The  last  species  of  the  disease  they  also  distinguish 
into  such  tumours  as  primarily  affect  the  bones,  and 
then  the  ligaments  and^oft  parts;  and  into  other  eases, 
in  which  the  ligaments  and  soft  parts  become  diseased 
before  there  is  any  morbid  affection  of  the  bones. 

These  divisions,  Mr.  Samuel  Cooper,  in  his  Treatise 
on  the  Diseases  of  the  Joints,  proves  to  be  not  suffi- 
ciently comprehensive ; and  the  propriety  of  using  the 
term  rheumatic  he  thinks  to  be  very  questionable. 

The  knee,  ankle,  wrist,  and  elbow,  are  the  joints 
most  subject  to  white-swellings.  As  the  name  of  the 
disease  implies,  the  skin  is  not  at  all  altered  in  colour. 
In  some  instances,  the  swelling  yields,  in  a certain 
degree,  to  pressure  ; but  it  never  pits,  and  is  almost 
always  sufficiently  firm  to  make  an  uninformed  ex- 
aminer believe  that  the  bones  contribute  to  the  tumour. 
The  pain  is  sometimes  vehement  from  the  very  first 
in  other  instances,  there  is  hardly  the  least  pain  in  th 
beginning  of  the  disease.  In  the  majority  of  scrofu 
lous  white-swellings,  let  the  pain  be  trivial  or  violent 
it  is  particularly  situated  in  one  part  of  the  joint,  viz 
either  the  centre  of  the  articulation , or  the  head  of  the 
tibia , supposing  the  knee  affected.  Sometimes  the 
pain  continues  without  interruption;  sometimes  there 
are  intermissions;  and  in  other  instances  the  pain 
recurs  at  regular  times,  so  as  to  have  been  called  by 
some  writers,  periodical.  Almost  all  authors  describe 
the  patient  assuffering  more  uneasiness  in  thediseased 
part,  when  he  is  warm,  and  particularly*  hen  he  is  in 
this  condition  in  bed. 

At  the  commencement  of  the  disease  in  the  majority 


HYD 


HYD 


of  instances,  the  swelling  is  very  inconsiderable,  or 
there  is  eveh  no  visible  enlargement  whatever.  In  the 
little  depressions,  naturally  situated  on  each  side  of 
the  patella,  a fulness  first  shows  itself,  and  gradually 
spreads  all  over  the  affected  joint. 

The  patient,  unable  to  bear  the  weight  of  his  body  on 
the  disordered  joint,  in  consequence  of  the  great  in- 
crease of  pain  tiius  created,  gets  into  the  habit  of  only 
touching  the  ground  with  his  toes:  and  the  knee  being 
generally  kept  a little  bent  in  this  manner,  soon  loses 
the  capacity  of  becoming  extended  again.  When  white- 
swellings  have  lasted  a while,  the  knee  is  almost  always 
found  in  a permanent  state  of  flexion.  In  scrofulous 
cases  of  this  kind,  pain  constantly  precedes  any  appear- 
ance of  swelling;  but  the  interval  between  the  two 
symptoms  differs  very  much  in  different  subjects. 

The  morbid  joint,  in  the  course  of  time,  acquires  a 
vast  magnimde.  Still  the  integuments  retain  their 
natural  colour,  and  remain  unaffected.  The  enlarge- 
ment of  the  articulation,  however,  always  seems 
greater  than  it  really  is,  in  consequence  of  the  emacia- 
tion of  the  limb  both  above  and  below  the  disease. 

An  appearance  of  blue  distended  veins,  and  a shining- 
smoothness,  are  the  only  alterations  to  be  noticed  in 
the  skin  covering  the  enlarged  joint.  The  shining 
smoothness  seems  attributable  to  the  distention,  which 
obliterates  the  natural  furrows  and  wrinkles  qf  the 
cutis.  When  the  joint  is  thus  swollen,  the  integuments 
cannot  be  pinched  up  into  a fold,  as  they  could  in  the 
state  of  health,  and  even  in  the  beginning  of  thedisease. 

As  the  distemper  of  the  articulation  advances,  col- 
lections of  matter  form  about  the  part,  and  at  length 
burst.  The  ulcerated  openings  sometimes  heal  up ; but 
such  abscesses  are  generally  followed  by  other  collec- 
tions, which  pursue  the  same  course.  In  some  cases, 
these  abscesses  form  a few  months  after  the  first  affec- 
tion of  the  joint ; on  other  occasions,  several  years 
elapse,  and  no  suppuration  of  this  kind  makes  its  ap- 
pearance. 

Such  terrible  local  mischief  must  necessarily  produce 
constitutional  disturbance.  The  patient’s  health  be- 
comes gradually  impaired;  he  loses  both  his  appetite 
and  natural  rest  and  sleep ; his  pulse  is  small  and  fre- 
quent; and  obstinate  debilitating  diarrhoea  and  profuse 
nocturnal  sweats  ensue.  Such  complaints  are  sooner 
or  later  followed  by  dissolution,  unless  the  constitution 
be  relieved  in  time,  either  by  the  amendment  or  remo- 
val of  tire  diseased  part.  In  different  patients,  how- 
ever, the  course  of  the  disease,  and  its  effects  upon  the 
system,  vary  very  m-uch  in  relation  to  the  rapidity  with 
which  they  occur. 

Rheumatic  white-swellings  are  very  distinct  diseases 
from  the  scrofulous  distemper  of  large  joints.  In  the 
first,  the  pain  is  said  never  to  occur  without  being  at- 
tended with  swelling.  Scrofulous  white-swellings,  on 
the  other  hand,  are  always  preceded  by  a pain,  which 
is  particularly  confined  to  one  point  of  the  articulation. 

In  rheumatic  cases,  the  pain  is  more  general,  and  dif- 
fused over  the  whole  joint. 

With  respect  to  the  particular  causes  of  all  such 
white  swellings  as  come  within  the  class  of  rheumatic  : 
ones,  little  is  known.  External  irritation,  either  by 
exposure  to  damp  or  cold,  or  by  the  application  of  vio- 
lence, is  often  concerned  in  bringing  on  the  disease ; 
but  very  frequently  no  cause  of  this  kind  can  be  as- 
signed for  the  complaint.  As  for  scrofulous  white- 
swellings,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  they  are  under 
the  influence  of  a particular  kind  of  constitution,  i 
termed  a scrofulous  or  strumous  habit.  In  this  sort  i 
of  temperament,  every  cause  capable  of  exciting  in-  1 
flam mation,  or  any  morbid  and  irritable  state  of  a large  i 
joint,  may  bring  such  disorder  as  may  end  in  the  severe  ■ 
disease  of  which  we  are  now  speaking.  t 

In  a man  of  a sound  constitution,  an  irritation  of  1 
the  kind  alluded  to  might  only  induce  common  healthy  I 
inflammation  of  the  affected  joint.  i 

In  scrofulous  habits,  it  also  seems_ probable  that  the  i 
irritation  of  a joint  is  much  more  easily  produced  than  f 
in  the  other  constitutions ; and  no  one  can  doubt  that,  < 
when  once  excited  in  scrofulous  habits,  it  is  much  1 
more  dangerous  and  difficult  of  removal  than  in  other  i 
patients.  t 

HYDATID.  (Hydatis ; from  vScop,  water.  1.  A i 
very  singular  animal,  formed  like  a bladder,  and  dis-  ; 
tended  with  np  *queous  fluid.  These  animals  are  j 
sometimes  formed  in  the  natural  cavities  of  the  body,  t 
as  the  abdomen  and  ventiicles  of  the  brain,  but  more  t 


frequently  in  the  liver,  kidney,  and  lungs,  where  they 
produce  diseased  actions  of  those  viscera.  Cullen 
arranges  these  affections  in  the  class  Locales , and 
order  Tumores.  If  the  vires  naturae  medicatrices  are 
not  sufficient  to  effect  a cure,  the  patient  mostly  falls  a 
sacrifice  to  their  ravages.  Dr.  Baillie  gives  the  follow- 
ing interesting  account  of  the  hydatids,  as  they  are 
sometimes  found  in  the  liver: — ‘There  is  no  gland  in 
the  human  body  in  which  hydatids  are  so  frequently 
found  as  the  liver,  except  the  kidneys,  where  they  are 
still  more  common.  Hydatids  of  the  liver  are  usually 
found  in  a cyst,  which  is  frequently  of  considerable 
s size,  and  is  formed  of  very  firm  materials,  so  as  to  give 
■ to  the  touch  almost  the  feeling  of  cartilage.  This  cyst, 
> when  cut  into,  is  obviously  laminated,  and  is  much 
thicker  in  one  liver  than  another.  In  some  livers  it  is 
i not  thicker  than  a shilling,  and  in  others  it  is  near  a 
• quarter  of  an  inch  in  thickness.  The  laminte  which 
compose  it  are  formed  of  a white  matter,  and  on  the 
! inside  there  is  a lining  of  a pulpy  substance,  like  the 
. coagulable  lymph.  The  cavity  of  the  cyst,  I have 
seen,  in  one  instance,  subdivided  by  a partition  of  this 
; pulpy  substance.  In  a cyst  may  be  found  one  hydatid, 
or  a greater  number  of  them.  They  lie  loose  in  the 
cavity,  swimming  in  a fluid;  or  some  of  them  are 
attached  to  the  side  of  the  cyst.  They  consist  of  a 
: round  bag,  which  is  composed  of  a white,  semi-opaque, 

: pulpy  matter,  and  contain  a fluid  capable  of  coagula- 
tion. Although  the  common  eolour  of  hydatids  be 
white,  yet  I have  occasionally  seen  some  of  a ligh* 
amber  colour.  The  bag  of  the  hydatid  consists  of  two 
laminte,  and  possesses  a good  deal  of  contractile  power 
In  one  hydatid  this  coat,  or  bag,  is  much  thicker  anc 
more  opaque  than  in  another ; and  even  in  the  same 
hydatid,  different  parts  of  it  will  often  differ  in  thick 
ness.  On  the  inside  of  a hydatid,  smaller  ones  are 
sometimes  found,  which  are  commonly  not  larger  than 
the  heads  of  pins,  but  sometimes  they  are  even  larger 
in  their  size  than  a gooseberry.  These  are  attached 
the  larger  hydatid,  either  at  scattered  irregular  dis 
tances,  or  so  as  to  form  small  clusters  ; and  they  are 
also  found  floating  loose  in  the  liquor  of  the  larger 
hydatids.  Hydatids  of  the  liver  are  often  found  un- 
connected with  each  other ; but  sometimes  they  have 
been  said  to  enclose  each  other  in  a series,  like  pill- 
boxes. The  most  common  situation  of  hydatids  of 
the  liver  is  in  its  substance,  and  enclosed  in  a cyst; 
but  they  are  occasionally  attached  to  the  outer  surface 
of  the  liver,  hanging  from  it,  and  occupying  more  or 
less  of  the  general  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  The  origin 
and  real  nature  of  these  hydatids  are  not  fully  ascer- 
tained ; it  is  extremely  probable,  however,  that  they 
are  a sort  of  imperfect  animalcules.  There  is  no  doubt 
at  all,  that  the  hydatids  in  the  livers  of  sheep  are  ani- 
malcules ; they  have  been  often  seen  to  move  when 
taken  out  of  the  liver  and  put  into  warm  water ; and 
they  retain  this  power  of  motion  for  a good  many  hours 
after  a sheep  has  been  killed.  The  analogy  is  great 
between  hydatids  in  the  liver  of  a sheep  and  those  of 
the  human  subject.  In  both,  they  arc  contained  in 
strong  cysts,  and  in  both  they  consist  of  the  same 
white  pulpy  matter.  There  is  undoubtedly  some  dif- 
ference between  them  in  simplicity  of  organization; 
the  hydatid  in  the  human  liver  being  a simple  uniform 
bag,  and  the  hydatid  in  that  of  a sheep  having  a neck 
and  mouth  appendant  to  the  bag.  This  difference 
need  be  no  considerable  objection  to  the  opinion  above 
stated.  Life  may  be  conceived  to  be  attached  to  the 
most  simple  form  of  organization.  In  proof  of  this, 
hydatids  have  been  found  in  the  brains  of  sheep,  re- 
sembling almost  exactly  those  in  the  human  liver,  and 
which  have  been  seen  to  move  and  therefore  are  cer- 
tainly known  to  be  animalcules.  The  hydatids  of  the 
human  liver,  indeed,  have  not,  as  far  as  I know,  been 
found  to  move  when  taken  out  of  the  body  and  put 
into  warm  water;  were  this  to  have  happened,  no 
uncertainty  would  remain.  It  is  not  difficult  to  see  a 
good  reason  why  there  will  hardly  occur  any  proper 
opportunity  of  making  this  experiment.  Hydatids  are 
not  very  often  found  in  the  liver,  because  it  is  not  a 
very  frequent  disease  there ; and  the  body  is  allowed 
to  remain  for  so  long  a time  after  death  before  it  is 
examined,  that  the  hydatids  must  have  lost  their  living 
principle,  even  if  they  were  animalcules,  and  it  ap- 
pears even  more  difficult  to  account  for  their  produc- 
tion, according  to  the  common  theory  of  generation, 
than  lor  that  of  intestinal  won  is  We  do  not  get  rid 

431 


IIYD 


HYD 


of  the  difficulty  by  asserting,  that  the  hydatids  in  the 
human  liver  are  not  living  animals,  be.cause  in  sheep 
they  are  certainly  such,  where  the  difficulty  of  account- 
ing for  their  production  is  precisely  the  same.” 

2.  The  name  of  a tumour,  the  contents  of  which  is 
a water-like  fluid.  , 

HYDERUS.  (From  v5s po?,  ley-drops;  from  v<5o>p, 
water.)  An  increased  flow  of  urine. 

HY'DRAGOGUE.  ( Hydragogus ; from  eciwp,  wa- 
ter, and  ayu),  to  drive  out.)  Medicines  are  so  termed 
which  possess  the  property  of  increasing  the  secre- 
tions or  excretions  of  the  bodv  so  as  to  cause  the  re- 
moval of  water  from  any  of  its  cavities,  such  as  ca- 
thartics, See. 

H YDRARGYRATUS.  Of  or  belonging  to  mer- 
cury. 

H YDRA  RGYRUM.  CYcpapyvpos ; from  uJwp,  wa- 
ter, a ini  apyvpos,  silver:  so  named  from  its  having  a 
resemblance  to  fluid  silver.)  Hydrargyrus.  The 
name  in  the  London  Pharmacopoeia,  and  other  works, 
for  mercury.  See  Mercury. 

Hydrargyrum  pr/ecipitatum  album.  White  pre- 
cipitated mercury.  Calx  hydrargyri  alba.  Take  of 
oxymuriarte  of  mercury,  half  a pound;  muriate  of 
ammonia,  four  ounces;  solution  of  subcarbonate  of 
potassa,  half  a pint ; distilled  water,  four  pints.  First 
dissolve  the  muriate  of  ammonia,  then  the  oxymuriate 
of  mercury,  in  the  distilled  water,  and  add  thereto  the 
solution  of  subcarbonaje  of  potassa.  Wash  the  pre- 
cipitated powder  until  it  becomes  tasteless ; then  dry 
it.  It  is  only  used  externally,  in  the  form  of  ointment, 
as  an  application  in  some  cutaneous  affections. 

Hydrargyrum  purificatum.  Purifled  mercury. 
Jlrgentum  vivum  purificatum.  Take  of  mercury,  by 
weight,  six  pounds ; iron  filings,  a pound.  Rub  them 
together,  and  distil  the  mercury  from  an  iron  retort, 
by  the  application  of  heat  to  it.  Purified  quicksil- 
ver is  sometimes  administered  In  its  metallic  state, 
in  doses  of  an  ounce  cr  more,  in  constipation  of  the 
bowels. 

Hydrargyrus  acetatus.  Mercurius  acetatus; 
Pilulce  Keyseri.  By  this  preparation  of  mercury,  the 
celebrated  Keyser  acquired  an  immense  fortune  in 
curing  the  venereal  disease.  It  is  an  acetate  of  mer- 
cury, and  therefore  termed  hydrargyri  acetas  in  the 
new  chemical  nomenclature.  The  dose  is  from  three 
to  five  grains.  Notwithstanding  the  encomium  given 
to  it  by  some,  it  does  not  appear  to  be  so  efficacious  as 
some  other  preparations  of  mercury. 

Hydrargyrum  cum  creta.  Mercury  with  chalk. 
Mercurius  alkalizatus.  Take  of  purified  mercury, 
by  weight,  three  ounces;  prepared  chalk,  five  ounces. 
Rub  them  together,  until  the  metallic  globules  disap- 
pear. This  preparation  is  milder  than  any  other  mer- 
curial, except  the  sulphuret,  and  does  not  so  easily  act 
upon  the  bowels ; it  is  therefore  used  largely  by  many 
practitioners,  and  possesses  alterative  properties  in 
cutaneous  and  venereal  complaints,  in  obstructions  of 
the  viscera,  or  of  the  prostate  gland,  given  in  the  dose 
of  3ss  to  3 ss,  two  or  three  times  a day. 

Hydrargyrus  phosphorates.  This  remedy  has 
been  observed  to  heal  inveterate  venereal  ulcers  in  a 
very  short  tyne,  nay,  in  the  course  of  a very  few  days, 
particularly  those  about  the  pudenda.  In  venereal  in- 
flammations of  the  eyes,  chancres,  rheumatisms,  and 
chronic  eruptions,  it  has  proved  of  eminent  service. 
Upon  the  whole,  if  used  with  necessary  precaution, 
and  in  the  hands  of  a judicious  practitioner,  it  is  a 
medicine  mild  and  gentle  in  its  operation.  The  cases 
in  which  it  deserves  the  preference  over  other  mer- 
curial preparations,  are  these : in  an  inveterate  stage 
of  syphilis,  particularly  in  persons  of  torpid  insensible 
fibres;  in  cases  of  exostosis,  as  well  as  obstructions  in 
the  lymphatic  system;  in  chronic  complaints  of  the 
skin.  The  following  is  the  formula.  R.  Hydrargyri 
phosphorati,  gr.  iv.  Corticis  cinnamomi  in  pulverein 
triti,  gr.  xiv.  Sacchari  purif.  3 ss.  Misce.  The  whole 
to  be  divided  into  eight  equal  parts,  one  of  which  is  to 
be  taken  every  morning  and  evening,  unless  salivation 
takes  place,  when  it  ought  to  be  discontinued.  Some 
patients,  however,  will  bear  from  one  to  two  grains  of 
the  phosphate  of  quicksilver,  without  inconvenience. 

Hydrargyrus  prkcipitatus  cinereus.  This  pre- 
paration is  an  oxide  of  mercury,  and  nearly  the  same 
with  the  hydrargyri  oxydum  cincrcum  of  the  London 
pharmacopoeia.  It  is  used  as  an  alterative  in  cases  of 
pains  arising  from  an  admixture  of  rheumatism  with 
432 


■ syphilis.  It  may  be  substituted  for  the  hydrargyrus 
sulphuratus  ruber,  in  fumigating  ozaena,  and  venereal 
ulcerated  sore  throat,  on  account  of  its  not  yielding 
any  vapour  offensive  to  the  patient. 

Hydrargyrus  vitriolatus.  7'urpethumminerale ; 
Mercurius  emeticus  fiavus ; Sulphas  hydrargyri.  For- 
merly this  medicine  was  in  more  general  use  than  in 
the  present  day.  It  is  a very  powerful  and  active 
alterative  when  given  in  small  doses.  Two  grains  act 
on  the  stomach  so  as  to  produce  violent  vomitings, 
is  recommended  as  an  errhine  in  cases  of  amaurosis 
In  combination  with  antimony  it  acts  powerfully  on. 
the  skin. 

Hydrargyri  nitrico-oxydum.  Nitrico-ozydun 
hydrargyri ; Hydrargyrus  nitratus  ruber ; Mcrci*- 
rius  corrosivus  ruber ; Mercurius  prcecipitatus  corrt- 
sivus.  Nitric  oxide  of  mercury.  Red  precipitate. 
Take  of  purified  mercury,  by  weight,  three  pounds, 
of  nitric  acid,  by  weight,  a pound  and  a half : of  dis- 
tilled water  two  pints.  Mix  in  a glass  vessel,  and  boil 
the  mixture  in  a sand-bath,  until  the  mercury  be  dis- 
solved, the  water  also  evaporated,  and  a white  mass 
remain.  Rub  this  into  powder,  and  put  it  into  anothe : 
shallow  vessel,  then  apply  a moderate  heat,  and  raise 
the  fire  gradually,  until  red  vapour  shall  cease  to  rise 
This  preparation  is  very  extensively  employed  by  sur 
geons  as  a stimulant  and  escharotic,  but  its  extraordi- 
nary activity  does  not  allow  of  its  being  given  inter- 
nally. Finely  levigated  and  mixed  with  common 
cerates,  it  is  an  excellent  application  to  indolent  ul- 
cers, especially  those  which  remain  after  burns  and 
scalds,  and  those  in  which  the  granulations  are  indo- 
lent and  flabby.  It  is  also  an  excellent  caustic  appli- 
cation to  chancres. 

Hydrargyri  oxydum  cinkrkum.  Oxydum  hydrar- 
gyri nigrum.  The  gray  or  black  oxide  of  mercury. 
It  has  received  several  names;  JEthiops  per  se  ; Pul- 
vis  mercurialis  cinereus;  Mercurius  cinereus;  Tur- 
peihum  nigrum ; Mercurius  prcecipitatnb  niger.  Take 
of  submuriate  of  mercury,  an  ounce ; limewater,  a 
gallon.  Boil  the  submuriate  of  mercury  in  the  lime- 
water,  constantly  stirring,  until  a gray  oxide  of  mer- 
cury is  separated.  Wash  this  with  distilled  water, 
and  then  dry  it.  The  dose  from  gr.  ii.  to  x.  There 
are  four  other  preparations  of  this  oxide  in  high  esti- 
mation : 

One  made  by  rubbing  mercury  with  mucilage  of 
gum-arabic.  Plenk,  of  Vienna,  has  written  a treatise 
on  the  superior  efficacy  of  this  medicine.  It  is  very 
troublesome  to  make ; and  does  not  appear  to  possess 
more  virtues  than  some  other  mercurial  preparations. 
Another  made  by  triturating  equal  parts  of  sugar  and 
mercury  together.  The  third,  composed  of  honey  oi 
liquorice  and  purified  mercury.  The  fourth  is  the  blue 
mercurial  ointment.  All  these  preparations  possess 
anthelmintic,  antisyphilitic,  alterative,  sialagogue,  and 
deobstruent  virtues,  and  are  exhibited  in  the  cure 
of  worms,  syphilis,  araenorrhcea,  diseases  of  the  skin, 
chronic  diseases,  obstructions  of  the  viscera,  &c. 

Hydrargyri  oxydum  nigrum.  See  Hydrargyri 
oxydum  cinereum. 

Hydrargyri  oxydum  rubrum.  Oxydum  hydrar- 
gyri rubrum ; Hydrargyrus  calcinatus.  Red  oxide 
of  mercury.  Take  of  purified  mercury  by  weight  a 
pound.  Pour  the  mercury  into  a glass  matrass,  with 
a very  narrow  mouth  and  broad  bottom.  Apply  a 
heat  of  600°  to  this  vessel,  without  stopping  it,  until  the 
mercury  has  changed  into  red  scales:  then  reduce 
these  to  a very  fine  powder.  The  whole  process  may 
probably  require  an  exposure  of  six  weeks.  This  pre- 
paration of  mercury  is  given  with  great  advantage  in 
the  cure  of  syphilis.  Its  action,  however,  is  such, 
when  given  alone,  on  the  bowels,  as  to  require  the 
addition  of  opium,  which  totally  prevents  it.  It  is  also 
given  in  conjunction  with  opium  and  camphire,  as  a 
diaphoretic,  in  chronic  pains  and  diseases  of  long  con- 
tinuance. It  is  given  as  an  alterative  and  diaphoretic 
from  gr.  ss.  to  ii.  every  night,  joined  with  camphor 
and  opium,  each  gr.  one-fourth  or  one-half.  It  is 
violently  emetic  and  cathartic  in  the  dose  of  gr.  iv.  to 
gr.  v. 

Hydrargyri  oxymurias.  Oxymurias  hydrargyri ; 
Hydrargyrus  muriatus.  Oxymuriate  of  mercury. 
Take  of  purified  mercury  by  weight  two  pounds,  sul- 
phuric acid  by  weight  thirty  ounces,  dried  muriate  of 
soda  four  pounds.  Boil  the  mercury  with  the  sulphu- 
ric acid  in  a glass  vessel  until  the  sulphate  of  mercury 


HYD 


HYD 


shall  be  left  dry.  Rub  this,  when  it  is  cold,  with  the 
muriate  of  soda  in  an  earthen-ware  mortar;  then 
sublime  it  in  a glass  cucurbit,  increasing  the  heat  gra- 
cually.  An  extremely  acrid  and  violently  poisonous 
preparation. 

Given  internally  in  small  doses  properly  diluted,  and 
never  in  the  form  of  pill,  it  possesses  antisyphilitic  and 
alterative  virtues.  Externally,  applied  in  form  of  lotion, 
it  facilitates  the  healing  of  venereal  sores,  and  cures 
the  itch.  In  gargles  for  venereal  ulcers  in  the  throat, 
the  oxymuriatc  of  mercury  gr.  iii.  or  iv.  barley  decoc- 
tion Ibj.,  honey  of  roses  5 ij.,  proves  very  serviceable  ; 
also  in  cases  of  tetters,  from  gr.  v.  to  gr.  x.  in  water 
Ibj.  ; and  for  films  and  ulcerations  of  the  cornea,  gr.  i. 
to  water  § iv. 

Mr.  Pearson  remarks,  that  “ when  the  sublimate  is 
given  to  cure  the  primary  symptoms  of  syphilis,  it  will 
sometimes  succeed ; more  especially,  when  it  produces 
a considerable  degree  of  soreness  of  the  gums,  and  the 
common  specific  effects  of  mercury  in  the  animal  sys- 
tem. But  it  will  often  fail  of  removing  even  a recent 
chancre  ; and  where  that  symptom  has  vanished  dur- 
ing the  administration  of  corrosive  sublimate,  I have 
known,  says  he,  a three  months’  course  of  that  medi- 
cine fail  of  securing  the  patient  from  a constitutional 
affection.  The  result  of  my  observation  is,  that  simple 
mercury,  calomel  or  calcined  mercury,  are  prepara- 
tions more  to  be  confided  in  for  the  cure  of  primary 
symptoms,  than  corrosive  sublimate.  The  latter  will 
often  check  the  progress  of  secondary  symptoms  very 
conveniently,  and  I think  it  is  peculiarly  efficacious  in 
relieving  venereal  pains,  in  healing  ulcers  of  the  throat, 
and  in  promoting  the  desquamation  of  eruptions.  Yet 
even  in  these  cases  it  never  confers  permanent  benefit; 
for  new  symptoms  will  appear  during  the  use  of  it ; 
and  on  many  occasions  it  will  fail  of  affording  the 
least  advantage  to  the  patient  from  first  to  last.  I do, 
sometimes,  indeed,  employ  this  preparation  in  venereal 
cases ; but  it  is  either  at  the  beginning  of  a mercurial 
course,  to  bring  the  Constitution  under  the  influence  of 
mercury  at  an  early  period,  or  during  a course  of  in- 
unction, with  the  intention  of  increasing  the  action  of 
simple  mercury.  I sometimes  also  prescribe  it  after 
the  conclusion  of  a course  of  friction,  to  support  the 
mercurial  influence  in  the  habit,  in  order  to  guard 
against  the  danger  of  a relapse.  But  on  no  occasion 
whatever  do  I think  it  safe  to  confide  in  this  prepara- 
tion singly  and  uncombined  for  the  cure  of  any  truly 
venereal  symptoms.” 

A solution  of  it  is  ordered  in  the  pharmacopoeia, 
termed  IAquor  hydrargyri  oxymuriatis.  Solution  of 
oxymuriate  of  mercury.  Take  of  oxymuriatc  of  mer- 
cury, eight  grains  ; distilled  water,  fifteen  fluid  ounces; 
rectified  spirit,  a fluid  ounce.  Dissolve  the  oxymuriate 
of  mercury  in  the  water,  and  add  the  spirit. 

This  solution  is  directed  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
administration  of  divisions  of  the  grain  of  this  active 
medicine.  Half  an  ounce  of  it  contains  one-fourth  of 
a grain  of  the  salt.  The  dose  is  from  one  drachm  to 
half  an  ounce. 

Hydrargyri  submurias.  Submurias  hydrargyri. 
Submuriate  of  mercury.  Calomelas.  Calomel.  Take 
of  oxymuriate  of  mercury,  a pound  ; purified  mercury, 
by  weight  nine  ounces.  Rub  them  together  until  the 
metallic  globules  disappear,  then  sublime  ; take  out 
the  sublimed  mass,  and  reduce  it  to  powder,  and  sub- 
lime it  in  the  same  manner  twice  more  ■uccessively. 
Lastly,  bring  it  into  the  state  of  very  fine  powder  by 
the  same  process  which  has  been  directed  for  the  pre- 
paration of  chalk.  Submuriate,  or  mild  muriate  of 
mercury,  is  one  of  the  most  useful  preparations  of 
mercury.  As  an  anti-venereal  it  is  given  in  the  dose 
of  a grain  night  and  morning,  its  usual  determination 
to  the  intestines  being  prevented,  if  necessary,  by 
opium.  It  is  the  preparation  which  is  perhaps  most 
usually  given  in  the  other  diseases  in  which  mercury 
is  employed,  as  in  affections  of  the  liver,  or  neighbour- 
ing organs,  in  cutaneous  diseases,  chronic  rheumatism, 
tetanus,  hydrophobia,  hydrocephalus,  and  febrile  affec- 
tions, especially  those  of  warm  climates.  It  is  em- 
ployed as  a cathartic  alone,  in  doses  from  v.  to  xii. 
grains,  or  to  promote  the  operation  of  other  purgatives. 
Its  anthelmintic  power  is  justly  celebrated ; and  it  is 
perhaps  superior  to  the  other  mercurials  in  assisting 
the  operation  of  diuretics  in  dropsy.  From  its  specific 
gravity  it  ought  always  to  be  given  in  the  form  of  a 
bolus  or  pill. 

E e 


Hydrargyri  sulphuretum  nigrum.  Hydrargp- 
rus  cum  sulphure.  iEthiop’s  mineral.  Take  of  pun 
fled  mercury,  sublimed  sulphur,  each  a pound,  by 
weight.  Rub  them  together,  till  the  metallic  globules 
disappear.  Some  suppose  that  the  mercury  is  oxidized 
in  this  process,  but  that  is  not  confirmed  by  the  best 
experiments.  The  mercury,  by  this  admixture  of  the 
Sulphur,  is  deprived  of  its  salivating  power,  and  may 
be  administered  with  safety  to  all  ages  and  constitu- 
tions, as  an  anthelmintic  and  alterative. 

Hydrargyri  sulphuretum  rubrum.  Red  sul- 
phuret  of  mercury.  Hydrargyrus  sulphuratus  ruber  ; 
Minium  purum ; Minium  Grcecorum ; Magnes  epi- 
lepsia;; Atzcmafor ; Amnion;  Azamar.  Vitruvius 
calls  it  anthrax.  A red  mineral  substance  composed 
of  mercury  combined  with  sulphur.  It  is  either  native 
or  factitious.  The  native  is  an  ore  of  quicksilver  mo- 
derately compact,  and  of  an  elegant  striated  red  colour. 
It  is  found  in  the  dutchy  of  Deuxponts,  in  the  Palati- 
nate, in  Spain,  South  America,  See.  It  is  called  native 
vermilion,  and  cinnabar  in  flowers.  The  factitious  is 
thus  prepared : “ Take  of  purified  mercury,  by  weight 
forty  ounces  ; sublimed  sulphur,  eight  ounces.  Having 
melted  the  sulphur  over  the  fire,  mix  in  the  mercury, 
and  as  soon  as  the  mass  begins  to  swell,  remove  the 
vessel  from  the  fire,  and  cover  it  with  considerable 
force  to  prevent  inflammation;  then  rub  the  mass  into 
powder,  and  sublime.”  This  preparation  is  esteemed 
a mild  mercurial  alterative,  and  given  to  children  in 
small  doses.  Hoffman  greatly  recommends  it  as  a 
sedative  and  antispasmodic.  Others  deny  that  cinna- 
bar, taken  internally,  has  any  medicinal  quality ; and 
their  opinion  is  grounded  on  the  insolubility  of  it  in  any 
menstruum.  In  surgery  its  chief  and  almost  only  use  is 
in  ihe  administration  of  quicksilver  by  fumigation. 
Thus  employed  it  has  proved  extremely  serviceable  in 
venereal  cases.  U'lcers  and  excrescences  about  the 
pudendum  and  anus  in  women,  are  particularly  bene- 
fited by  it ; and  in  these  cases  it  is  most  conveniently 
applied  by  placing  a red  hot  heater  at  the  bottom  of  a 
night  stool-pan,  and  after  sprinkling  on  it  a few  grains 
of  the  red  sulphuret  of  quicksilver,  placing  the  patient 
on  the  stool.  To  fumigate  ulcers  in  the  throat,  it  is 
necessary  to  receive  the  fumes  on  the  part  affected, 
through  the  tube  of  a funnel.  By  enclosing  the  patient 
naked  in  a box,  it  has  on  some  occasions  been  contrived 
to  fumigate  the  whole  body  at  once,  and  in  this  way 
the  specific  powers  of  the  quicksilver  have  been  very 
rapidly  excited. 

This  mode  of  curing  the  lues  venerea  is  spoken  of 
as  confirmed;  and  the  subject  has  of  late  years  been 
revived  in  a treatise  by  Sabonette,  and  by  trials  made 
in  Bartholomew’s  hospital. 

Mr.  Pearson,  from  his  experiments  on  mercurial  fu- 
migation, concludes,  that  where  checking  the  progress 
of  "the  disease  suddenly  is  an  object  of  great  moment, 
and  where  the  body  is  covered  with  ulcers  or  large 
and  numerous  eruptions,  and  in  general  to  ulcers, 
fungi,  and  excrescences,  the  vapour  of  mercury  is  an 
application  of  great  efficacy  and  utility;  but  that  it  is 
apt  to  induce  a ptyalism  rapidly,  and  great  consequent 
debility,  and  that  for  the  purpose  of  securing  the  con- 
stitution against  a relapse,  as  great  a quantity  of  mer- 
cury must  be  introduced  into  the  system,  by  inunction, 
as  if  no  fumigation  had  been  employed. 

HYDRATE.  Hydroxure.  Hydro-oxide.  A com- 
pound of  oxygen,  in  a definite  proportion,  with  water. 

HYDRELiE  UM.  (From  utScup,  water,  and  e\aiov, 
oil.)  A mixtute  of  oil  and  water. 

HYDRENTEROCE'LE.  (From  vScop,  water,  ev- 
Jepov,  an  intestine,  and  Ktj'Xr),  a tumour.)  A hydro- 
cele, or  dropsy  of  the  scrotum,  attended  with  a rup- 
ture. 

HYDRIODATE.  A salt  consisting  of  the  hydriodic 
acid,  combined  in  a definite  proportion  with  an  oxide. 

HYDRIODIC  ACID.  Acidum  hydriodicum.  A 
gaseous  acid  in  its  Insulated  state.  “ If  four  parts  of 
iodine  be  mixed  with  one  of  phosphorus,  in  a small 
glass  retort,  applying  a gentle  heat,  and  adding  a few 
drops  of  water  from  time  to  time,  a gas  comes  over, 
which  must  be  received  in  the  mercurial  bath.  Its 
specific  gravity  is  4.4 ; 100  cubic  inches,  therefore, 
weigh  134.2  grs.  It  is  elastic  and  invisible,  but  has  a 
smeil  somewhat  similar  to  that  of  muriatic  acid.  Mer- 
cury after  some  time  decomposes  it,  seizing  its  iodine, 
and  leaving  its  hydrogen,  equal  to  one-half  the  ori 
ginal  bulk,  at  liberty.  Chlorine,  on  the  other  hand, 


II  YD 


II  YD 


unites  to  its  hydrogen,  and  precipitates  the  iodine. 
From  these  experiments,  it  evidently  consists  of  vapour 
of  iodine  and  hydrogen,  which  combine  in  equal  vo- 
lumes, without  change  of  their  primitive  bulk.  Hy- 
driodic  acid  is  partly  decomposed  at  a red-heat,  and 
the  decomposition  is  complete  if  it  be  mixed  with  oxy- 
gen. Water  is  formed,  and  iodine  separated. 

We  can  easily  obtain  an  aqueous  hydriodic  acid 
very  economically,  by  passing  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
gas  through  a mixture  of  water  and  iodine  in  a 
YVoolfe’s  bottle.  On  heating  the  liquid  obtained,  the 
excess  of  sulphur  flies  ofl;  and  leaves  liquid  hydriodic 
acid.  At  temperatures  below  262°,  it  parts  with  its 
water ; and  becomes  of  a density  = 1.7.  At  262°  the 
acid  distils  over.  When  exposed  to  the  air,  it  is  speed- 
ily decomposed,  and  iodine  is  evolved.  Concentrated 
sulphuric  and  nitric  acids  also  decompose  it.  When 
poured  into  a saline  solution  of  lead,  it  throws  down  a 
fine  orange  precipitate.  With  solution  of  peroxide  of 
mercury,  it  gives  a red  precipitate;  and  with  that  of 
silver,  a white  precipitate  insoluble  in  ammonia.  Hy- 
driodic acid  may  also  be  formed,  by  passing  hydrogen 
over  iodine  at  an  elevated  temperature. 

The  compounds  of  hydriodic  acid  with  the  salifiable 
bases  may  be  easily  formed,  either  by  direct  combina- 
tion, or  by  acting  on  the  basis  in  water,  with  iodine. 
The  latter  mode  is  most  economical.  Upon  a deter- 
minate quantity  of  iodine,  pour  solution  of  potassa  or 
soda,  till  the  liquor  ceases  to  be  coloured.  Evaporate 
to  dryness,  and  digest  the  dry  salt  in  alkohol  of  the  spe- 
cific gravity  0.810,  or  0.820.  As  the  iodate  is  not  solu- 
ble in  this  liquid,  while  the  hydriodate  is  very  soluble, 
the  two  salts  easily  separate  from  each  other.  After- 
having  washed  the  iodate  two  or  three  times  with  al- 
kohol, dissolve  it  in  water,  and  neutralize  it  with  ace- 
tic acid.  Evaporate  to  dryness,  and  digest  the  dry  salt 
in  alkohol,  to  remove  the  acetate.  Alter  two  or  three 
washings,  the  iodate  is  pure.  As  for  the  alkohol  con- 
taining the  hydriodate,  distil  it  off,  and  then  complete 
the  neutralization  of  the  potassa,  by  means  of  a little 
hydriodic  acid  separately  obtained.  Sulphurous  and 
muriatic  acids,  as  well  as  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  pro- 
duce no  change  on  the  hydriodates,  at  the  usual  tem- 
perature of  the  air. 

Chlorine,  nitric  acid,  and  concentrated  sulphuric,  in- 
stantly decompose  them,  and  separate  the  iodine. 

With  solution  of  silver,  they  give  a white  precipi- 
tate insoluble  in  ammonia;  with  the  pernitrate  of  mer- 
cury, a greenish-yellow  precipitate;  with  corrosive 
sublimate,  a precipitate  of  a fine  orange- red,  very  solu- 
ble in  an  excess  of  hydriodate ; and  with  nitrate  of 
lead,  a precipitate  of  an  orange-yellow  colour.  They 
dissolve  iodine,  and  acquire  a deep  reddish-brown  co- 
lour. 

Hydriodate  of  potassa,  or  in  the  dry  state,  iodide  of 
potassium , yields  crystals  like  sea-salt,  which  melt  and 
sublime  at  a red-heat.  This  salt  is  not  changed  by 
being  heated  in  contact  with  air.  100  parts  of  water 
at  64°,  dissolve  143  of  it.  It  consists  of  15.5  iodine, 
and  5 potassium. 

Hydriodate  of  soda,  called  in  the  dry  state  iodide  of 
sodiuvi,  may  be  obtained  in  pretty  large  flat  rhom- 
boidal  prisms.  It  consists,  when  dry,  of  15.5  iodine 
+ 3 sodium. 

Hydriodate  of  barytes  crystallizes  in  fine  prisms, 
similar  to  muriate  of  strontites.  In  its  dry  state,  it  con- 
sists of  15.5  iodine  -f-  8.75  barium. 

The  hydriodates  of  lime  and  strontites  are  very  so- 
luble ; and  the  first  exceedingly  deliquescent. 

Hydriodate  of  ammonia  results  from  the  combina- 
tion of  equal  volumes  of  ammoniacal  and  hydriodic 
gases  ; though  it  is  usually  prepared  by  saturating  the 
liquid  acid  with  ammonia.  It  is  nearly  as  volatile  as 
sal  ammoniac;  but  it  is  more  soluble  and  more  deli- 
quescent. It  crystallizes  in  cubes. 

Hydriodate  of  magnesia  is  formed  by  uniting  its 
constituents  together;  it  is  deliquescent,  and  crystal- 
lizes with  difficulty. — It  is  decomposed  by  a strong 
heat. 

Hydriodate  of  zinc  is  easily  obtained,  by  putting 
iodine  into  water  with  an  excess  of  zinc,  and  favour- 
ing their  action  hy  heat.  When  dried  it  becomes  an 
iodide. 

All  the  nydriodates  nave  the  property  of  dissolving 
abundance  of  iodine  : and  thence  they  acquire  a deep 
reddish-brown  colour.  They  part  with  it  on  boiling, 
or  when  exposed  to  the  air  after  being  dried.” 

434 


HYDRO-CHLORIC  ACID.  Muriatic  acid  ; a com- 
pound of  chlorine  and  hydrogen.  See  Muriatic  acid. 

HYDRO-CYANIC  ACID.  See  Pi-ussic  acid. 

HYDRO-FLUORIC  ACID.  Jicidum  hydrofluori- 
cum.  This  is  procured  by  distilling,  in  lead  or  silver, 
a mixture  of  one  part  of  the  purest  floor  spar,  in  fine 
powder,  with  two  of  sulphuric  acid.  The  heat  re- 
quired is  not  considerable ; sulphate  of  lime  remains  in 
the  retort,  and  a highly  acrid  and  corrosive  liquid  passes 
over,  which  requires  the  assistance  of  ice  lor  its  con- 
densation. 

HYDRO-SULPHURIC  ACID.  The  aqueous  solu- 
tion of  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  is  so  called  by  Gay 

HYDRO-SULPHUROUS  ACID.  When  three  vo- 
lumes of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  and  two  of  sul- 
phurous acid  gas,  both  dry,  are  mixed  together  over 
mercury,  they  are  condensed  into  a solid  orange-yellow 
body,  which  Dr.  Thompson  calls  hydro-sulphurous 
acid. 

IlYDRO'A.  (From  vSuip,  water.)  A watery  pus- 
tule. 

HYDROCARBONATE.  See  Carburetled  hydro- 
gen gas. 

HYDROCA'RDIA.  (From  vSiop,  water,  and  Kafr 
6ia , the  heart.)  Hydrocordis.  Hydrops  pericardii. 
Dropsy  of  the  heart.  Dropsy  of  the  pericardium.  A 
collection  of  fluid  in  the  pericardium,  which  may  be 
either  coagulable  lymph,  serum,  or  a puriform  fluid. 
It  produces  symptoms  similar  to  those  of  hydrothorax, 
with  violent  palpitation  of  the  heart,  and  mostly  an 
intermittent  pulse.  It  is  incurable, 

HYDROCE'LE.  (From  vSmp,  water,  and  *77X77,  a 
tumour.)  The  term  hydrocele , used  in  a literal  sense, 
means  any  tumour  produced  by  water;  but  surgeons 
have  always  confined  it  to  those  which  possess  either 
the  membranes  of  the  scrotum,  or  the  coats  of  the 
testicle  and  its  vessels.  The  first  of  these,  viz.  that 
which  has  its  seat  in  the  membranes  of  the  scrotum, 
anasarca  integumentorum,  is  common  to  the  whole 
bag,  and  to  all  the  cellular  substance  which  loosely 
envelopes  both  the  testes.  It  is,  strictly  speaking,  only 
a symptom  of  a disease,  in  which  the  whole  habit  is 
most  frequently  more  or  less  concerned,  and  very  sel- 
dom alfects  the  part  only.  The  latter,  or  that  which 
occupies  the  coats  immediately  investing  the  testicle 
and  its  vessels,  hydrocele  tunica  vaginalis,  is  abso- 
lutely local,  very  seldom  affects  the  common  membrane 
of  the  scrotum,  generally  attacks  one  side  only ; and  is 
frequently  found  in  persons  who  are  perfectly  free 
from  all  other  complaints. 

The  anasarca  integumentorum  retains  the  impres- 
sion of  the  finger.  The  vaginal  hydrocele  has  an  un- 
dulating feel. 

The  hydrocele  of  the  tunica  vaginalis  testis  is  a mor- 
bid accumulation  of  the  water  separated  on  the  inter- 
nal surface  of  the  tunica  vaginalis,  to  moisten  or  lubri- 
cate the  testicle. 

From  its  first  appearance,  it  seldom  disappears  or 
diminishes,  but  generally  continues  to  increase,  some- 
times rapidly,  at  others  more  slowly.  In  some  it  grows 
to  a painful  degree  of  distention  in  a few  months : in 
others,  it  continues  many  years  with  little  disturbance. 
As  it  enlarges,  it  becomes  more  tense,  and  is  sometimes 
transparent;  so  that  if  a candle  is  held  on  the  oppo- 
site side,  a degree  of  light  is  perceived  through  the 
whole  tumour ; but  the  only  certain  distinction  is  the 
fluctuation,  which  is  not  found  when  the  disease  is  a 
hernia  of  the  omentum,  or  intestines,  or  an  inflamma- 
tory or  scirrhous  tumour  of  the  testicle. 

Hydrocele  cystata.  Encysted  hydrocele  of  the 
spermatic  cord,  resembles  the  common  hydrocele  ; but 
the  tumour  does  not  extend  to  the  testicle,  which  may 
be  felt  below  or  behind  it,  while,  in  the  hydrocele  of  the 
vaginal  coat,  when  large,  the  testicle  cannot  be  disco- 
vered. In  this  disease,  also,  the  penis  is  not  buried  in 
the  tumour.  Sometimes  the  fluid  is  contained  in  two 
distinct  cells ; and  this  is  discovered  by  little  contrac- 
tions in  it.  It  is  distinguished  from  the  anasarcous 
hydrocele  by  a sensible  fluctuation,  and  the  want  of 
the  inelastic  pitting;  from  hernia,  by  its  beginning  be- 
low, from  its  not  receding  in  a horizontal  position, 
and  not  enlarging  by  coughing  and  sneezing. 

Hydrocele  funiculi  spermatici,  or  hydrocele  of 
the  spermatic  cord.  Anasarcous  hydrocele  of  the  sper- 
matic cord  sometimes  accompanies  ascites,  and,  at 
other  times,  it  is  found  to  be  confined  to  the  cellular 


HYD 


HYD 


substance,  in  or  about  the  spermatic  cord.  The  causes  | 
of  this  disease  may  be  obstructions  in  the  lymphatics, 
leading  from  the  part,  in  consequence  of  scirrhous  af- 
fections of  the  abdominal  viscera,  or  the  pressure  of 
a truss  applied  for  the  cure  of  hernia. 

When  the  affection  is  connected  with  anasarca  in 
other  parts,  it  is  then  so  evident  as  to  require  no  par- 
ticular description.  When  it  is  local  it  is  attended 
with  a colourless  tumour  in  the  course  of  the  spermatic 
cord,  soft  and  inelastic  to  the  touch,  and  unaccom- 
panied with  fluctuation.  In  an  erect  position  of  the 
body,  it  is  of  an  oblong  figure  ; but  when  the  body  is 
recumbent,  it  is  flatter,  and  somewhat  round.  Gene- 
rally it  is  no  longer  than  the  part  of  the  cord  which  lies 
m the  groin ; though  sometimes  it  extends  as  far  as  the 
testicle,  and  even  stretches  the  scrotum  to  an  uncom- 
mon size.  By  pressure  a great  part  of  the  swelling  can 
always  be  made  to  recede  into  the  abdomen.  It  in- 
stantly, however,  returns  to  its  former  situation,  on  the 
pressure  being  withdrawn. 

Hydrocele  peritonjei.  The  common  dropsy  of 
the  belly. 

Hydrocele  spinalis.  A watery  swelling  on  the 
vertebrae. 

HYDROCE  PHALUS.  (From  v<5o>p,  water,  and 
KapaXrj,  the  head.)  Hydroccphalum  ; Hydrencephalus. 
Dropsy  of  the  brain.  Dropsy  of  the  head.  A genus 
of  disease  arranged  by  Cullen  in  the  class  Cachexia , 
and  order  Inluinescentia.  It  is  distinguished  by 
authors  into  external  and  internal : 

1.  Hydrocephalus  extcrnus,  is  a collection  of  water 
between  the  membranes  of  the  brain. 

2.  Hydrocephalus  internus , is  when  a fluid  is  col- 
lected in  the  ventricles  of  the  brain,  producing  dilata- 
tion of  the  pupils,  apoplexy,  &c.  See  Apoplexia.  It 
is  sometimes  of  a chronic  nature,  when  the  water  has 
been  known  to  increase  to  an  enormous  quantity, 
effecting  a diastasis  of  the  bones  of  the  head,  and  an 
absorption  of  the  brain. 

Pain  in  the  head,  particularly  across  the  brow,  stupor, 
dilatation  of  the  pupils,  nausea,  vomiting,  preternatu- 
ral slowness  of  the  pulse,  and  convulsions,  are  the 
pathognomonic  symptoms  of  this  disease,  which  have 
been  laid  down  by  the  generality  of  writers. 

Hydrocephalus  is  almost  peculiar  to  children,  being 
rarely  known  to  extend  beyond  the  age  of  twelve  or 
fourteen;  and  it  seems  more  frequently  to  arise  in 
those  of  a scrofulous  and  rickety  habit  than  in  others. 
Jt  is  an  affection  which  has  been  observed  to  pervade 
families,  affecting  all  or  the  greater  part  of  the  children 
at  a certain  period  of  their  life  ; which  seems  to  show 
that,  in  many  cases,  it  depends  more  on  the  general 
habit,  than  on  any  local  affection  or  accidental  cause. 

The  disease  has  generally  been  supposed  to  arise  in 
consequence  either  of  injuries  done  to  the  brain  itself, 
by  blows,  falls,  &c.  from  scirrhous  tumours  or  excres- 
cences within  the  skull,  from  original  laxity  or  weak- 
ness in  the  brain,  or  from  general  debility  and  an 
impoverished  state  of  the  blood. 

With  respect  to  its  proximate  cause,  very  opposite 
opinions  are  still  entertained  by  medical  writers,  which, 
in  conjunction  with  the  equivocal  nature  of  its  symp- 
toms, prove  a source  of  considerable  embarrassment  to 
the  young  practitioner.  Some  believe  it  to  be  inflam- 
matory, and  bleed  largely. 

Dr.  Withering  observes,  that  in  a great  many  cases, 
if  not  in  all,  congestion,  or  slight  inflammation,  are  the 
precursors  to  the  aqueous  accumulation. 

Dr.  Rush  thinks  that,  instead  of  its  being  considered 
an  idiopathic  dropsy,  it  should  be  considered  only  as 
an  effect  of  a primary  inflammation  or  congestion  of 
blood  in  the  brain.  It  appears,  says  he,  that  the  dis- 
ease, in  its  first  stage,  is  the  effect  of  causes  which  pro- 
duce a less  degree  of  that  inflammation  which  consti- 
tutes phrenitis ; and  that  its  second  stage  is  a less 
degree  of  that  effusion  which  produces  serous  apoplexy 
in  adults.  The  former  partakes  of  the  nature  of  the 
chronic  inflammation  of  Dr.  Cullen,  and  the  asthenic 
inflammation  of  Dr.  Brown. — There  are  others,  again, 
who  view  the  subject  in  a very  different  light.  Dr. 
Darwin  supposes  inactivity,  or  torpor  of  the  absorbent 
vessels  of  the  brain,  to  be  the  cause  of  hydrocephalus 
internus ; but  he  confesses,  in  another  part  of  his 
work,  that  the  torpor  of  the  absorbent  vessels  may 
often  exist  as  a secondary  effect. 

Dr.  Whytt,  who  has  published  an  ingenious  treatise 
on  the  disease,  observes,  the  immediate  cause  of  every 

E e 3 


| kind  of  dropsy  is  the  same ; viz.  such  a state  of  the 
parts  as  makes  the  exhalent  arteries  throw  out  a greater 
quantity  of  fluids  than  the  absorbents  can  take  up. 
From  what  he  afterward  mentions,  he  evidently  con- 
siders this  state  as  consisting  in  debility. 

As  many  cases  are  accompanied  with  an  increased 
or  inflammatory  action  of  the  vessels  of  the  brain,  and 
others  again  are  observed  to  prevail  along  with  general 
anasarca,  it  seems  rational  to  allow,  that  hydrocepha- 
lus is,  in  some  instances,  the  consequence  of  conges- 
tion, or  slight  inflammation  of  the  brain;  and  that,  in 
others,  it  arises  either  from  general  debility  or  topical 
laxity.  In  admitting  these  as  incontrovertible  facts, 
Dr.  Thomas  is,  at  the  same  time,  induced  to  suppose, 
that  the  cases  of  it  occurring  from  mere  debility  are 
by  no  means  frequent. 

The  great  analogy  subsisting  between  the  symptoms 
which  are  characteristic  of  inflammation,  and  those 
which  form  the  first  stage  of  the  acute  species  of  hydro- 
cephalus, (for  the  disease,  as  already  observed,  has 
been  divided  into  the  chronic  and  acute  by  some 
writers,)  together  with  the  good  effects  often  conse- 
quent on  b lood-letting,  and  the  inflammatory  appear- 
ance which  the  blood  frequently  exhibits,  seems  to 
point  out  strong  proof  of  the  disease  being,  in  most 
instances,  an  active  inflammation,  and  that  it  rarely 
occurs  from  mere  debility,  as  a primary  cause. 

The  progress  of  the  disorder  has,  by  some,  been 
divided  into  three  stages. 

When  it  is  accompanied  by  an  increased  or  inflam- 
matory action  of  the  brain,  as  not  uncommonly  hap- 
pens, its  first  stage  is  marked  with  many  of  the  symp- 
toms of  pyrexia,  such  as  languor,  inactivity,  loss  of 
appetite,  nausea,  vomiting,  parched  tongue,  hot,  dry 
skin,  flushing  of  the  face,  headache,  throbbing  of  the 
temporal  arteries,  and  quickened  pulse  ; which  symp- 
toms always  suffer  an  exacerbation  in  the  evening,  but 
towards  morning  become  milder. 

When  it  is  unaccompanied  by  any  inflammatory 
action  of  the  brain,  many  of  these  appearances  are  not 
to  be  observed.  In  these  cases,  it  is  marked  by  a 
dejection  of  countenance,  loss  of  appetite,  pains  over 
the  eyes,  soreness  of  the  integuments  of  the  cranium  to 
the  touch,  propensity  to  the  bed,  aversion  to  being 
moved,  nausea,  and  costiveness.  The  disease,  at  length, 
makes  a remarkable  transition,  which  denotes  the 
commencementof  its  second  stage.  The  child  screams 
out,  without  being  able  to  assign  any  cause  ; its  sleep 
is  much  disturbed  ; there  is  a considerable  dilatation 
of  the  pupils  of  the  eyes,  without  any  contraction  on 
their  being  exposed  to  light : lethargic  torpor,  with 
strabismus,  or  perhaps  double  vision  ensues,  and  the 
pulse  becomes  slow  and  unequal. 

In  the  third  stage,  the  pulse  returns  again  to  the 
febrile  state,  becoming  uncommonly  quick  and  va- 
riable; and  coma,  with  convulsions,  ensue.  When 
the  accumulation  of  water  is  very  great,  and  the  child 
young,  the  sutures  recede  a considerable  way  from 
each  other,  and  the  head,  towards  the  end,  becomes 
much  enlarged. 

When  recoveries  have  actually  taken  place  in  hy- 
drocephalus, we  ought  probably  to  attribute  more  to 
the  efforts  of  nature  than  to  the  interference  of  art.  It 
is  always  to  be  regarded  as  of  difficult  cure. 

An  accumulation  of  water  in  the  ventricles  of  the 
brain,  is  one  of  the  most  common  appearances  to  be 
observed  on  dissection.  In  different  cases  this  is  ac- 
cumulated in  greater  or  less  quantities.  It  sometimes 
amounts  only  to  a few  ounces,  and  occasionally  to 
some  pints.  When  the  quantity  of  water  is  consider- 
able, the  fornix  is  raised  at  its  anterior  extremity,  in 
consequence  of  its  accumulation,  and  an  immediate 
opening  of  communication  is  thereby  formed  between 
the  lateral  ventricles.  The  water  is  of  a purer  colour 
and  more  limpid  than  what  is  found  in  the  dropsy  of 
the  thorax,  or  abdomen.  It  appears,  however,  to  be 
generally  of  the  same  nature  with  the  water  that  is 
accumulated  in  these  cavities.  In  some  instances,  the' 
water  in  hydrocephalus  contains  a very  small  propor- 
tion of  coagulable  matter,  and  in  others  it  is  entirely 
free  from  it. 

When  the  water  is  accumulated  to  a very  large 
quantity  in  the  ventricles,  the  substance  of  the  brain 
appears  to  be  a sort  of  pulpy  bag,  containing  a fluid. 
The  skull,  upon  such  occasions,  is  very  much  enlarged 
in  its  size,  and  altered  in  its  shape;  and  it  appears 
exceedingly  large  in  proportion  to  the  face.  On  re- 

405 


HYD 


HYD 


moving  the  scalp,  the  bones  are  found  to  be  very  thin, 
and  there  are  frequently  broad  spots  of  membrane  in 
the  bone.  These  appearances  are,  however,  only  to 
be  observed  where  the  disease  has  been  of  some  years’ 
continuance. 

In  some  cases,  where  the  quantity  of  water  collected 
is  not  great,  the  substance  of  the  brain  has  appeared  to 
be  indurated,  and  in  others  softened.  At  times,  the 
organ  has  been  found  gorged  with  blood : collections 
also  of  a viscid  tenacious  matter  have  been  discovered 
in  cysts,  upon  its  external  surface,  and  tumours  have 
been  found  attached  to  its  substance. 

The  treatment  must  be  prompt  and  active  to  give  a 
tolerable  chance  of  success.  The  general  indications 
are,  in  the  first  stage,  to  lessen  the  inflammatory  action, 
afterward  to  promote  absorption.  Should  the  patient 
be  about  the  age  of  puberty,  of  a plethoric  habit,  and 
the  symptoms  run  high  at  the  beginning,  it  will  be 
proper  to  take  some  blood,  especially  from  the  tempo- 
ral artery,  or  the  jugular  vein  ; but,  if  younger,  or  the 
disease  more  advanced,  a sufficient  quantity  may  be 
withdrawn  by  leeches,  applied  to  the  temples,  or  in  the 
direction  of  the  sutures.  The  bowels  must  then  be 
thoroughly  evacuated  by  some  active  cathartic,  as  they 
are  usually  very  torpid,  calomel  with  scammony,  or 
jalap,  for  example ; and,  in  the  progress  of  the  com- 
plaint, this  function  must  be  kept  up  with  some  degree 
of  activity.  Fur  this  purpose,  calomel  may  be  given 
in  divided  doses,  or  some  other  mercurial  preparation, 
which  may  not  run  off  too  rapidly,  producing  mere 
watery  stools,  but  regularly  clear  out  the  bowels,  as 
well  as  the  liver,  and  promote  the  other  secretions. 
Besides,  mercury  is  the  most  powerful  remedy  in 
rousing  the  absoi bents,  and  some  of  the  most  remark- 
able cures  of  this  disease,  even  at  an  advanced  period, 
have  been  affected  by  it : whence  it  would  be  advisa- 
ble, where  the  disease  was  proceeding  rapidly,  and 
particularly  if  the  bowels  were  irritable,  to  use  mer- 
curial frictions,  that  the  system  might  be  sooner 
affected.  Another  very  important  step,  after  clearing 
the  bowels,  is  to  apply  some  evaporating  lotion  assidu- 
ously to  the  scalp,  previously  shaved ; and  the  anti- 
phlogistic regimen  should  be  steadily  observed.  Dia- 
phoretics will  generally  be  proper,  assisted  by  the 
warm  bath  ; and  diuretics  on  some  occasions  may  be 
useful ; but  digitalis,  which  has  been  recommended  on 
this  ground,  seems  more  likely  to  avail  by  lessening 
arterial  action.  Blisters  may  be  applied  to  the  tem- 
ples, behind  the  ears,  or  to  the  nape  of  the  neck,  each 
perhaps  successively : and  dressed  with  eavine  cerate 
occasionally,  to  increase  the  discharge,  and  irritation 
externally  : issues  appear  not  so  likely  to  prove  bene- 
ficial. Errhines  may  farther  contribute  to  obviate 
internal  effusion.  Electricity  has  been  proposed  to 
rouse  the  absorbents  to  the  second  stage  ; but  its  effi- 
cacy, and  even  propriety,  is  very  doubtful.  Should 
the  progress  of  the  complaint  be  fortunately  arrested, 
the  strength  must  be  established  by  a nutritious  diet, 
and  tonic  medicines ; taking  care  to  keep  the  bowels 
in  good  order,  and  the  head  cool : an  issue,  under  these 
circumstances,  may  be  a very  useful  remedy. 

Hydrocephalus  acutus.  See  Hydrocephalus. 

Hydrocephalus  externus.  Water  between  the 
brain  and  its  membranes. 

Hydrocephalus  internus.  Water  in  the  ventri- 
cles of  the  brain. 

HYDROCO'TYLE.  (From  vSwp,  water,  and 
ko'JvXti,  the  cotula.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order, 
Digynia. 

2.  The  name,  in  some  pharmacopoeias,  for  the  com- 
mon marsh  or  water  cotula,  or  pennywort,  which  is 
said  to  possess  acrid  qualities. 

Hydrocy'stis.  (From  vSu>p,  water,  and  kv^is,  a 
vesicle.)  An  encysted  dropsy. 

HY  DROGEN.  {Hydrogenium ; from  v<5a)p,  water, 
and  yivoyai , to  become,  oryevvao),  to  produce,  because 
with  oxygen  it  produces  water.)  Base  of  inflammable  air. 

Hydrogen  is  a substance  not  perceptible  to  our  sensa- 
tions in  a separate  state ; but  its  existence  is  not  at  all 
the  less  certain.  Though  we  cannot  exhibit  it  ex- 
perimentally uncombined,  we  can  pursue  it  while  it 
passes  out  of  one  combination  into  another;  we  can- 
not, indeed,  arrest  it  on  its  passage,  but  we  never  fail 
to  discover  it,  at  least  if  we  use  the  proper  chemical 
means,  when  it  presents  itself  to  our  notice  in  a new 
compound. 

433 


Hydrogen,  as  its  name  expresses,  is  one  of  the  con- 
stituent elements  of  water,  from  which  it  can  alone  be 
procured.  Its  existence  was  unknown  till  lately.  It  is 
plentifully  distributed  in  nature,  and  acts  a very  con- 
siderable part  in  the  process  of  the  animal  and  vegeta- 
ble economy.  It  is  one  of  the  ingredients  in  the  varie- 
ties of  bitumen,  oils,  fat,  ardent  spirits,  a:ther,  and,  in 
fact,  all  the  proximate,  component  parts  of  animal  and 
vegetable  bodies.  It  forms  a constituent  part  of  ail 
animal  and  vegetable  acids.  It  is  one  of  the  constitu- 
ents of  ammonia  and  of  various  other  compound  gases. 

It  possesses  so  great  an  affinity  for  caloric,  that  it 
can  only  exist  separately  in  the  state  of  gas;  it  is  con- 
sequently impossible  to  procure  it  in  the  concrete  or 
liquid  state,  independent  of  combination. 

Solid  hydrogen,  therefore,  united  to  caloric  and  light, 
forms  HYDROGEN  GAS. 

Properties  of  Hydrogen  Gas. 

This  gas,  which  was  commonly  called  inflammable 
air,  was  discovered  by  Cavendish  in  the  year  1768,  or 
rather  he  first  obtained  it  in  a state  of  purity,  and  as- 
certained its  more  important  properties,  though  it  had 
been  noticed  long  before.  The  famous  philosophical 
candle  attests  the  antiquity  of  this  discovery. 

Hydrogen  gas,  like  oxygen  gas,  is  a triple  compound, 
consisting  of  the  ponderable  base  of  hydrogen,  caloric, 
and  light.  It  possesses  all  the  mechanical  properties 
of  atmospheric  air.  It  is  the  lightest  substance  whose 
weight  we  are  able  to  estimate : when  in  its  purest 
state,  and  free  from  moisture,  it  is  about  fourteen  times 
lighter  than  atmospheric  air.  It  is  not  fitted  for  respi- 
ration ; animals,  when  obliged  to  breathe  in  it,  die  al- 
most instantaneously.  It  is  decomposed  by  living  vege- 
tables, and  its  basis  becomes  one  of  the  constituents  of 
oil,  resin,  &c.  It  is  inflammable,  and  burns  rapidly 
when  kindled,  in  contact  with,  atmospheric  air  or 
oxygen  gas,  by  means  of  the  electric  spark,  or  by  an 
inflamed  body;  and  burns,  when  pure,  with  a yellow- 
ish lambent  flame:  but  all  burning  substances  are  im- 
mediately extinguished  when  immersed  in  it.  It  is 
therefore,  incapable  of  supporting  combustion.  It  is 
not  injurious  to  growing  vegetables.  It  is  unabsorba- 
ble  by  most  substances ; water  absorbs  it  very  sparingly. 
It  is  capable  of  dissolving  carbon,  sulphur,  phospho- 
rus, arsenic,  and  many  other  bodies.  When  its  basis 
combines  with  that  of  oxygen  gas,  water  is  formed  ; 
with  nitrogen  it  forms  ammonia.  It  does  not  act  on 
earthy  substances. 

Method  of  obtaining  Hydrogen  Gas. — A ready 
method  of  obtaining  hydrogen  gas  consists  in  subject- 
ing water  to  the  action  of  a substance  which  is  capa- 
ble of  decomposing  this  fluid. 

1.  For  this  purpose,  let  sulphuric  acid,  previously 
diluted  with  four  or  five  times  its  weight  of  water,  be 
poured  ouiron  filings,  or  bits  of  zinc,  in  a small  retort, 
or  gas-bottle^  called  a pneumatic  flask,  or  proof ; as 
soon  as  the  diluted  acid  comes  in  contact  with  the  metal, 
a violent  effervescence  takes  place,  and  hydrogen  gas 
escapes  without  external  heat  being  applied.  It  may 
be  collected  in  the  usual  manner  over  water,  taking  care 
to  let  a certain  portion  escape  on  account  of  the- atmos- 
pheric air  contained  in  the  disengaging  vessels. 

The  production  of  hydrogen  gas  in  the  above  way  is 
owing  to  the  decomposition  of  water.  The  iron,  or 
zinc,  when  in  contact  with  tins  fluid,  in  conjunction 
with  sulphuric  acid,  has  a greater  affinity  to  oxygen 
than  the  hydrogen  has;  the  oxygen,  therefore,  unites 
to  it,  and  forms  an  oxide  of  that  metal  which  is  in- 
stantly attacked  and  dissolved  by  the  acid ; the  other 
constituent  part  of  the  water,  the  hydrogen,  is  set  free, 
which,  by  uniting  with  caloric,  assumes  the  form  of 
hydrogengas.  The  oxygen  is,  therefore,  the  bond  of 
union  between  the  metal  and  the  acid. 

The  hissing  noise,  or  effervescence,  observable  during 
the  process,  is  owing  to  the  rapid  motion  excited  in  the 
mixture  by  means  of  the  great  number  of  air-bubbles 
quickly  disengaged  and  breaking  at  the  surface  of  the 
fluid. 

We  see,  also,  in  this  case,  that  two  substances  exert 
an  attraction,  and  are  even  capable  of  decomposing 
jointly  a third , which  neither  of  them  is  able  to  do 
singly ; viz.  if  we  present  sulphuric  acid  alone,  or  iron 
or  zinc  alone,  to  water,  they  cannot  detach  the  oxygen 
from  the  hydrogen  of  that  lluid  ; but,  if  both  are  applied, 
a decomposition  is  instantly  effected.  This  experiment, 
therefore,  proves  that  the  agency  of  chemical  affinity 
between  two  or  more  bodies  may  lie  dormant,  until  it 


HYD 


HYD 


is  called  into  action  by  the  interposition  of  another 
body,  which  frequently  exerts  no  energy  upon  any 
of  them  in  a separate  state.  Instances  of  this  kind 
were  formerly  called  predisposing  affinities. 

2.  Iron,  in  a red  heat,  has  also  the  property  of  decom- 
posing water,  by  dislodging  the  oxygen  from  its  combi- 
nation with  hydrogen,  in  the  following  manner : — 

Let  a gun-barrel,  having  its  touch-hole  screwed  up, 
pass  through  a furnace,  or  large  crucible  perforated  for 
that  purpose,  taking  care  to  incline  the  barrel  at  the 
narrowest  part;  adjust  to  its  upper  extremity  a retort 
charged  with  water,  and  let  the  other  extremity  termi- 
nate in  a tube  introduced  under  a receiver  in  the  pneu- 
matic trough.  When  the  apparatus  is  thus  disposed, 
and  well  luted,  bring  the  gun-barrel  to  a red  heat,  and, 
when  thoroughly  red-hot,  make  the  water  in  the  retort 
boil ; the  vapour,  when  passing  through  the  red-hot 
tube,  will  yield  hydrogen  gas  abundantly.  In  this  ex- 
periment, the  oxygen  of  the  water  combines  with  the 
iron  at  a red  heat,  so  as  to  convert  it  into  an  oxide,  and 
the  caloric  applied  combines  with  the  hydrogen  of  the 
water,  and  forms  hydrogen  gas.  It  is,  therefore,  the 
resuit  of  a double  affinity,  that  of  the  oxygen  of  the 
water  for  the  metal,  and  that  of  its  hydrogen  for  caloric. 

The  more  caloric  is  employed  in  the  experiment  of 
decomposing  water  by  means  of  iron,  &c.  the  sooner  is 
the  water  decomposed. 

Hydrogen  gas,  combined  with  carbon,  is  frequently 
found  in  great  abundance  in  mines  and  coal-pits,  where 
it  is  sometimes  generated  suddenly,  and  becomesmixed 
with  the  atmospheric  air  of  these  subterraneous  cavi- 
ties. If  a lighted  candle  be  brought  in,  this  mixture 
often  explodes,  and  produces  the  most  dreadful  effects. 
It  is  called  by  miners,  fire  damp.  It  generally  forms  a 
cloud  in  the  upper  part  of  the  mine,  on  account  of  its 
levity,  but  does  not  mix  there  with  atmospheric  air, 
unless  some  agilation  takes  place.  The  miners  fre- 
quently set  fire  to  it  with  a candle,  lying  at  the  same 
time  flat  on  their  faces  to  escape  the  violence  of  the 
shock.  An  easier  and  more  safe  method  of  clearing 
the  mine,  is  by  leading  a long  tube  through  the  shaft  of 
it,  to  the  ash-pit  of  a furnace ; by  this  means  the  gas 
will  be  conducted  to  feed  the  fire. 

Sir  Humphrey  Davy  has  invented  a valuable  instru- 
ment called  a safety  lamp , which  will  enable  the 
miners  to  convey  a light  into  such  impure  air  without 
risk.  This  is  founded  on  the  important  discovery, 
made  by  him,  that  flame  is  incapable  of  passing  through 
minute  apertures  in  a metallic  substance,  which  yet 
are  pervious  to  air ; the  reason  of  which  appears  to  be, 
that  the  ignited  gas,  or  vapour,  is  so  much  cooled  by  the 
metal  in  its  passage  as  to  cease  being  luminous. 

Hydrogen  gas,  in  whatever  manner  produced,  always 
originates  from  water,  either  in  consequence  of  a pre- 
ceding decomposition,  by  which  it  had  been  combined 
in  the  state  of  solid  or  fixed  hydrogen,  with  one  of  the 
substances  employed,  or  from  a decomposition  of  water 
actually  taking  place  during  the  experiment. 

There  are  instances  recorded  of  a vapour  issuing  from 
the  stomach  of  dead  persons  which  took  fire  on  the  ap- 
proach of  a candle.  We  even  find  accounts,  in  several 
works,  of  the  combustion  of  living  human  beings,  which 
appeared  to  be  spontaneous.  Dr.  Swediaur  has  related 
some  instances  of  porters  at  Warsaw,  who  having 
drunk  abundantly  of  spirit,  fell  down  in  the  street,  with 
the  smoke  issuing  out  of  their  mouths;  and  people  came 
to  their  assistance,  saying  they  would  take  fire;  to 
prevent  which,  they  made  them  drink  a great  quantity 
of  milk,  or  used  a more  singular  expedient,  by  caus- 
ing them  to  swallow  the  urine  of  the  bystanders,  im- 
mediately on  its  evacuation. 

However  difficult  it  may  be  to  give  credit  to  such 
narratives,  it  is  equally  difficult  to  reject  them  entirely, 
without  refusing  to  admit  the  numerous  testimonies  of 
men,  who  were,  for  the  most  part,  worthy  of  credit. 
Citizen  Lair  has  collected  all  the  circumstances  of  this 
nature  which  he  found  dispersed  in  different  books,  and 
has  rejected  those  which  did  not  appear  to  be  supported 
by  respectable  testimony,  to  which  he  has  added  some 
others  related  by  persons  still  living.  These  narratives 
are  nine  in  number;  they  were  communicated  to  the 
Philomathic  Society,  at  Paris,  and  inserted  in  the  bul- 
letin Thermidor,  An.  5,  No.  29.  The  cause  of  this 
pnenomenon  has  been  attributed  to  a developement  of 
hydrogen  gas  taking  place  in  the  stomachs  of  these  in- 
dividuals. 

Lair  believes  that  the  bodies  of  these  people  were 


hot  burned  perfectly  spontaneously,  but  it  appeared  to 
be  owing  to  some  very  slight  external  cause,  such  as  the 
fire  of  a candle,  taper,  or  pipe. 

Hydrogen  gas,  seleniuretted.  This  gas  is  co- 
lourless. It  reddens  litmus.  Its  density  has  not  been 
determined  by  experiment.  Its  smell  resembles,  at  first, 
that  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  • but  the  sensation 
soon  changes,  and  another  succeeds,  which  is  at  once 
pungent,  astringent,  and  painful.  The  eyes  become 
almost  instantly  red  and  inflamed,  and  the  sense  of 
smelling  entirely  disappears.  A bubble  of  the  sjze  of 
a little  pea  is  sufficient  to  produce  these  effects.  Of 
all  the  bodies  derived  from  the  inorganic  kingdom,  se- 
leniuretted hydrogen  is  that  which  exercises  the 
strongest  action  on  the  animal  economy.  Water  dis- 
solves this  gas ; hut  in  what  proportions  is  not  known. 
This  solution  disturbs  almost  all  the  metallic  solutions, 
producing  black  or  brown  precipitates,  which  assume, 
on  rubbing  with  polished  hamiatites,  a metallic  lustre. 
Zinc,  manganese,  and  cerium,  form  exceptions.  They 
yield  flesh-coloured  precipitates,  which  appear  to  be 
hydro-seleniurets  of  the  oxides,  while  the  others,  for 
the  most  part,  are  merely  metallic  seleniurets. 

Hydrogen,  sulphuretted.  Sulphuretted  hydro- 
gen gas  possesses  the  properties  of  an  acid  ; for,  when 
absorbed  by  water,  its  solution  reddens  vegetable  blues ; 
it  combines  also  with  alkalies,  earths,  and  with  seve- 
ral metallic  oxides.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen,  combined 
with  any  base,  forms  a hydro- sulphuret , which  may 
be  also  called  an  hepatule,  to  distinguish  it  from  an 
hepar,  which  is  the  union  of  sulphur  singly  with  a 
base.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  possesses  an  ex- 
tremely offensive  odour,  resembling  that  of  putrid  eggs. 
It  kills  animals,  and  extinguishes  burning  bodies. 
When  in  contact  with  oxygen  gas,  or  atmospheric  air, 
it  is  inflammable.  Mingled  with  nitrous  gas,  it  barns 
with  a yellowish  green  flame.  It  is  decomposed  by 
ammonia,  by  oxymuriatic  acid  gas,  and  by  sulphurous 
acid  gas.  It  has  a strong  action  on  the  greater  number 
of  metaliic  oxides.  Its  specific  gravity  is  about  1.18 
when  pure.  It  is  composed,  according  to  Thomson, 
of  sixteen  parts  of  sulphur,  and  one  of  hydrogen.  It 
has  the  property  of  dissolving  a small  quantity  of 
phosphorus. 

Sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  may  be  obtained  in  seve- 
ral ways : — 

1.  Take  dry  sulphuretof  potassa,  put  it  into  a tubu- 
lated retort,  lodged  in  a sand-bath,  or  supported  over  a 
lamp ; direct  the  neck  of  the  retort  under  a receiver 
placed  in  the  pneumatic  trough;  then  pour  gradually 
upon  the  sulphuret  diluted  sulphuric  or  muriatic  acid ; 
a violent  effervescence  will  take  place,  and  sulphuret- 
ted hydrogen  gas  will  be  liberated.  When  no  more 
gas  is  produced  spontaneously,  urge  the  mixture  with 
heat,  l)y  degrees,  till  it  boils,  and  gas  will  again  be 
liberated  abundantly. 

The  water  made  use  of  for  receiving  it,  should  be 
heated  to  about  80°  or  90° ; at  this  temperature  it  dis- 
solves little  of  the  gas ; whereas,  if  cold  water  be  made 
use  of,  a much  greater  quantity  of  it  is  absorbed. 

Explanation. — Though  sulphur  makes  no  alteration 
on  water,  which  proves  that  sulphur  has  less  attraction 
for  oxygen  than  hydrogen  has,  yet  if  sulphur  be  united 
to  an  alkali,  this  combination  decomposes  water 
whenever  itcomes  in  contact  with  it,  though  the  alkali 
itself  has  no  attraction  either  for  oxygen  or  hydrogen. 

The  formation  of  this  gas  explains  this  truth.  On 
adding  the  sulphuret  of  potassa  to  the  water,  this  fluid 
becomes  decomposed,  part  of  the  sulphur  robs  it  of  its 
oxygen  ; and  forms  with  it  sulphuric  acid  ; this  gene- 
rated acid  unites  to  part  of  the  alkali,  and  forms  sul- 
phate of  potassa.  The  liberated  hydrogen  dissolves 
another  part  of  the  sulphur,  and  forms  with  it  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen,  the  basis  of  this  gas,  which  is  retained 
by  the  separated  portion  of  the  alkali.  The  sulphuric 
or  muriatic  acid,  added  now,  extricates  it  from  the 
alkali,  and  makes  it  fly  off  in  the  form  of  gas. 

Diluted  muriatic  acid  seems  best  adapted  for  the 
production  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  from  alka- 
line sulphurets.  If  nitric  acid  be  made  use  of,  it  must 
be  much  diluted.  Sulphuric  acid  yields  little  gas,  un- 
less assisted  by  heat.  When  the  proportion  of  sulphur 
in  the  sulphuret  exceeds  that  of  the  alkali,  the  dense 
sulphuric  acid,  poured  upon  it,  emits  sulphurous  acid 
gas.  All  the  rest  of  the  acids  may  be  made  use  of  for 
decomposing  the  sulphurets. 

2.  When  iron  and  sulphur  are  united  together,  they 


HYD 


HYD 


Afford  a large  quantity  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas, 
on  submitting  them  to  the  action  of  heat,  in  contact 
with  diluted  muriatic  acid. 

Melt  together,  in  a crucible,  equal  parts  of  iron 
filings  and  sulphur ; the  product  is  a black  brittle  mass, 
called  sulphuret  of  iron.  Reduce  this  to  powder,  and 
put  it,  with  a little  water,  into  a tubulated  retort;  add 
diluted  muriatic  acid,  and  apply  a gentle  heat,  till  no 
more  gas  is  disengaged.  The  philosophy  of  this  expe- 
riment is  analogous  to  the  former.  Part  of  the  oxygen 
of  the  water  unites  to  part  of  the  sulphur,  and  forms 
sulphuric  acid ; another  part  oxidizes  the  iron,  which, 
dissolved  by  the  acid,  forms  sulphate  of  iron : the  hy- 
drogen of  the  water  unites  to  another  part  of  the  sul- 
phur, and  forms  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  which  be- 
comes gaseous  by  the  addition  of  caloric. 

3.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  may  also  be  obtained 
by  heating  an  alkaline  sulphuret,  with  the  addition  of 
water,  without  the  aid  of  an  acid.  In  this  case,  the 
water  is  also  deconfiposed ; its  hydrogen  unites  with 
part  of  the  sulphur,  and  forms  sulphuretted  hydrogen ; 
the  oxygen  of  the  water  unites  with  another  part  of 
the  sulphur,  and  produces  sulphuric  acid,  which  joins 
to  the  alkali  and  forms  a sulphate.  The  sulphuretted 
hydrogen  becomes  disengaged  by  heat  in  the  gaseous 
form. 

4.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  may  be  obtained  by 
passing  hydrogen  gas  through  sulphur,  in  a state  of 
fusion. 

For  this  purpose,  put  sulphur  into  a gun-barrel,  or 
Wedgewood’s  tube,  and  place  it  across  a furnace ; fit 
to  the  lower  extremity  a bent  glass  tube,  which  goes 
under  a receiver  placed  in  the  pneumatic  trough,  and 
adapt  to  the  upper  extremity  a tubulated  retort,  or 
other  apparatus  proper  for  producing  hydrogen  gas. 
The  sulphur  must  then  be  heated,  and,  when  melted  . 
the  hydrogen  gas  evolved  must  be  made  to  pass  over 
it,  which,  in  this  manner,  will  dissolve  part  of  the 
sulphur,  and  become  converted  into  sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen gas. 

5.  It  may  likewise  be  procured  in  the  following  di- 
rect manner : let  a small  quantity  of  sulphur  be  en- 
closed in  a jar  full  of  hydrogen  gas,  and  melt  it  by 
means  of  a burning-glass.  This  method  does  not  suc- 
ceed except  the  hydrogen  gas  be  as  dry  as  possible,  for 
its  affinity  to  sulphur  is  weakened  in  proportion  to  its 
moisture. 

6.  The  method,  however,  which  affords  it  purest,  is 
by  treating  sulphuret  of  antimony  with  diluted  muri- 
atic acid.  Thq  explanation  is  similar  to  the  preceding 
processes. 

Hydrogen , carburetted.  See  Carburetted  hydrogen 
gas. 

Hydrogen , percarburetted.  See  Carburetted  hydro- 
gen gas. 

Hydrogen , sub  carburetted.  See  Carburetted  hydro- 
gen gas. 

Hydrogen , phosphuretted.  See  Phosphorus. 
Hydrogen , subphosphuretted.  See  Phosphorus. 
Hydrogen  gas,  heavy,  carbonated.  See  Carbonated 
hydrogen  gas. 

Hydrogen  gas,  light,  carbonated.  See  Carburetted 
hydrogen  gas. 

HYDROGURET.  See  Uret. 

Hydrogurct  of  carbon.  See  Carburetted  hydrogen 
gas. 

HYDROLA'PATHUM.  (From  vScop,  water,  and 
Xaitadov , the  dock.)  See  Rumez  hydrolap athuin. 

HYDRO  MELI.  (From  vdoop,  water,  and  peX i,  ho- 
ney.) Mulsum ; Aqua  Muls a;  Melicr atum ; Brag- 
gat;  Hydromel.  Water  impregnated  with  honey. 
After  it  is  fermented,  it  is  called  vinous  hydromel,  or 
mead. 

IIYDROTHIONIC  ACID.  See  Sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen. 

HYDROMETER.  (Hydrometer ; from  vStop,  wa- 
ter, or  fluid,  and  ptrpov , a measure.)  The  best  me- 
thod of  weighing  equal  quantities  of  corrosive  volatile 
fluids,  to  determine  their  specific  gravities,  appears  to 
consist  in  enclosing  them  in  a bottle  with  a conical 
stopper,  in  the  side  of  which  stopper  a fine  mark  is  cut 
with  a file.  The  fluid  being  poured  into  the  bottlej  it 
is  easy  to  put  in  the  stopper,  because  the  redundant 
fluid  escapes  through  the  notch,  or  mark,  and  may  be 
carefully  wiped  off.  Equal  bulks  of  water,  and  other 
fluids,  are  by  this  means  weighed  to  a great  degree  of 
Accuracy,  care  being  taken  to  keep  the  temperature  as 


equal  as  possible,  by  avoiding  any  contact  of  the  bot 
tie  with  the  hand,  or  otherwise'  The  bottle  itself 
shows  with  much  precision,  by  a rise  or  fall  of  the 
liquid  in  the  notch  of  the  stopper,  whether  any  such 
change  have  taken  place. 

The  hydrometer  of  Fahrenheit  consists  of  a hollow 
ball,  with  a counterpoise  below,  and  a very  slender 
stem  above,  terminating  in  a small  dish.  The  middle, 
or  half  length  of  the  stem,  is  distinguished  by  a fine 
line  across.  In  this  instrument  every  division  of  the 
stem  is  rejected,  and  it  is  immersed  in  all  experiments 
to  the  middle  of  the  stem,  by  placing  proper  weights  in 
the  little  dish  above.  Then,  as  the  part  immersed  is 
constantly  of  the  same  magnitude,  and  the  whole 
weight  of  the  hydrometer  is  known,  this  last  weight, 
added  to  the  weights  in  the  dish,  will  be  equal  to  the 
weight  of  fluid  displaced  by -the  instrument,  as  all  wri- 
ters on  hydrostatics  prove.  And,  accordingly,  the  sp. 
gravities  for  the  common  form  of  the  tables  will  be  had 
by  the  proportion : 

As  the  whole  weight  of  the  hydrometer  and  its 
load,  when  adjusted  in  distilled  water, 

Is  to  the  number  1000,  &c. 

So  is  the  whole  weight  when  adjusted  in  any 
other  fluid 

To  the  number  expressing  its  specific  gravity. 
The  hydrometers,  or  pese-liqueurs,  of  Baum£, 
though  in  reality  comparable  with  each  other,  are  sub- 
ject in  part  to  the  defect,  that  their  results,  having  no 
independent  numerical  measure,  require  explanation 
to  those  who  do  not  know  the  instruments. 

HYDROME'TRA.  (From  tx5wp,  water,  and  pyrpa, 
the  womb.)  Hydrops  uteri.  Dropsy  of  the  womb. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Cachezice , and  order 
Intumescentice,  of  Cullen.  It  produces  a swelling  of 
the  hypogastric  region,  slowly  and  gradually  in- 
creasing, resembling  the  figure  of  the  uterus,  yielding 
to,  or  fluctuating  on  pressure  ; without  ischury  or  preg- 
nancy. Sauvages  enumerates  seven  species.  It  must 
be  considered  as  a very  rare  disease,  and  one  that  can 
with  difficulty  be  ascertained. 

HYDRO' MPH  ALUM.  (From  v5<ap,  water,  and 

op0aAoj,  the  navel.)  A tumour  of  the  navel,  contain- 
ing water. 

Hydro'nosos.  (From  vScop,  water,  and  vocos,  a 
disease.)  The  sweating  sickness.  See  Ephidrosis. 
HYDRO-OXIDE.  See  Hydrate. 
HYDROPEDE'SIS.  (From  u<5wp,  water,  and  irySaot, 
to  break  out.)  A breaking  out  into  a violent  sweat. 

HYDROPHANE.  Oculus  mundi.  A variety  of 
opal,  which  has  the  property  of  becoming  transparent 
on  immersion  in  water. 

HYDROPHO'BIA.  (From  vSup,  water,  and  0o6s<*>, 
to  fear.)  Rabies  canina;  Cynanthropia ; Cynolesia. 
Canine  madness.  This  disease  arises  in  consequence 
of  the  bite  of  a rabid  animal,  as  a dog  or  cat,  and 
sometimes  spontaneously.  It  is  termed  hydrophobia, 
because  persons  that  are  thus  bitten  dread  the  sight  or 
the  falling  of  water  when  first  seized.  Cullen  has 
arranged  it  under  the  class  Neuroses,  and  order  Spas- 
mi,  and  defines  it  a loathing  and  great  dread  of  drink- 
ing any  liquids,  from  their  creating  a painful  convul- 
sion of  the  pharynx,  occasioned  most  commonly  by  the 
bite  of  a mad  animal. 

There  are  two  species  of  hydrophobia. 

1.  Hydrophobia  rabiosa,  when  there  is  a desire  of 
biting. 

2.  . Hydrophobia  simplez , when  there  is  not  a desire 
of  biting. 

Dr.  James  observes,  that  this  peculiar  affection  pro- 
perly belongs  to  the  canine  genus,  viz.  dogs,  foxes,  and 
wolves;  in  which  animals  only  it  seems  to  be  innate 
and  natural,  scarcely  ever  appearing  in  any  others, 
except  when  communicated  from  these.  When  a dog 
is  affected  with  madness,  he  becomes  dull,  solitary, 
and  endeavours  to  hide  himself,  seldom  barking,  but 
making  a murmuring  noise,  and  refusing  all  kinds  of 
meat  and  drink.  He  flies  at  strangers ; but,  in  this 
stage,  he  remembers  and  respects  his  master  ; his  head 
and  tail  hang  down  ; he  walks  as  if  overpowered  by 
sleep  ; and  a bite,  at  this  period,  though  dangerous,  is 
not  so  apt  to  bring  on  the  disease  in  the  animal  bitten 
as  one  inflicted  at  a later  period.  The  dog  at  length 
begins  to  pant ; he  breathes  quickly  and  heavily ; his 
tongue  hangs  out;  his  mouth  is  continually  open,  and 
discharges  a large  quantity  of  froth.  Sometimes  he 
walks  slowly,  as  if  half  asleep,  and  then  runssuddenly 


HYP 


HYD 


but  not  always  directly  forward.  At  last  lie  forgets  his 
master ; his  eyes  have  a dull,  watery,  red  appearance : 
he  grows  thin  and  weak,  often  falls  down,  gets  up  and 
attempts  to  fly  at  every  thing,  becoming  very  soon 
quite  furious.  The  animal  seldom  lives  in  this  latter 
state  longer  than  thirty  hours ; and  it  is  said,  that  his 
bites  toward  the  end  of  his  existence,  are  the  most 
dangerous.  The  throat  of  a person  suffering-  hydro- 
phobia is  always  much  affected ; and,  it  is  asserted, 
the  nearer  the  bite  to  this  part  the  more  perilous. 

Hydrophobia  may  be  communicated  to  the  human 
subject  from  the  bites  of  cats,  cows,  and  other  animals, 
not  of  the  canine  species,  to  which  the  affection  has 
been  previously  communicated.  However,  it  is  from 
the  bites  of  those  domestic  ones,  the  dog  and  cat,  that 
most  cases  of  hydrophobia  originate.  It  does  not  ap- 
pear that  the  bite  of  a person  affected  can  communi- 
cate the  disease  to  another;  at  least  the  records  of  me- 
diciue  furnish  no  proof  of  this  circumstance. 

In  the  human  species,  the  general  symptoms  attend- 
ant upon  the  bite  of  a mad  dog,  or  other  rabid  animal, 
are,  at  some  indefinite  period,  and  occasionally  long 
after  the  bitten  part  seems  quite  well;  a slight  pain 
begins  to  be  felt  in  it,  now  and  then  attended  with 
itching,  but  generally  resembling  a rheumatic  pain. 
Then  come  on  wandering  pains,  with  an  uneasiness 
and  heaviness,  disturbed  sleep,  and  frightful  dreams, 
accompanied  with  great  restlessness,  sudden  startings, 
and  spasms,  sighing,  anxiety,  and  a love  for  solitude. 
These  symptoms  continuing  to  increase  daily,  .pains 
begin  to  shoot  from  the  place  which  was  wounded,  all 
along  up  to  the  throat  with  a straitness  and  sensation 
of  choking,  and  a horror  and  dread  at  the  sight  of 
water,  and  other  liquids,  together  with  a loss  of  appe- 
tite and  tremor.  The  person  is,  however,  capable  of 
swallowing  any  solid  substance  with  tolerable  ease ; 
but  the  moment  that  any  thing  in  a fluid  form  is 
brought  in  contact  with  his  lips,  it  occasions  him  to 
start  back  with  much  dread  and  horror,  although  he 
labours  perhaps  under  great  thirst  at  the  time. 

A vomiting  of  bilious  matter  soon  comes  on,  in  the 
course  of  the  disease,  and  an  intense  hot  fever  ensues, 
attended  with  continual  watching,  great  thirst,  dryness 
and  roughness  of  the  tongue,  hoarseness  of  the  voice, 
and  the  discharge  of  a viscid  saliva  from  the  mouth, 
which  the  patient  is  constantly  spitting  out;  together 
with  spasms  of  the  genital  and  urinary  organs,  in  con- 
sequence of  which  the  evacuations  are  forcibly  thrown 
out.  His  respiration  is  laborious  and  uneasy,  but  his 
judgment  is  unaffected  ; and,  as  long  as  he  retains  the 
power  of  speech,  his  answers  are  distinct. 

In  some  few  instances,  a severe  delirium  arises,  and 
closes  the  tragic  scene ; but  it  more  frequently  happens, 
that  the  pulse  becomes  tremulous  and  irregular,  that 
convulsions  arise,  and  that  nature  being  at  length  ex- 
hausted, sinks  under  the  pressure  of  misery. 

The  appearances  to  be  observed,  on  dissection  in 
hydrophobia,  are  unusual  aridity  of  the  viscera  and 
other  parts ; marks  of  inflammation  in  the  fauces, 
gula,  and  larynx;  inflammatory  appearances  in  the 
stomach,  and  an  accumulation  or  effusion  of  blood  in 
the  lungs.  Some  marks  of  inflammation  are  likewise  to 
be  observed  in  the  brain,  consisting  in  a serous  effusion 
on  its  surface,  or  in  a redness  of  the  pia  mater ; which 
appearances  have  also  presented  themselves  in  the  dog. 

In  some  cases  of  dissection,  not  the  least  morbid  ap- 
pearance has  been  observed,  either  in  the  fauces,  dia- 
phragm, stomach,  or  intestines.  The  poison  has,  there- 
fore, been  conceived  by  some  physicians  to  act  upon 
the  nervous  system,  and  to  be  so  wholly  confined  to  it, 
as  to  make  it  a matter  of  doubt  whether  the  qualities 
of  the  blood  are  altered  or  not.  There  is  no  known 
cure  for  this  terrible  disease  : and  the  only  preventive 
to  be  relied  upon  is  the  complete  excision  of  the  bitten 
part,  which  should  be  performed  as  soon  as  possible  ; 
though  it  may  perhaps  not  be  too  late  any  time  before 
the  symptoms  appear. 

HYDROPHOSPHOROUS  ACID.  See  Phosphorous 
acid. 

IIYDROPHTHA'LMrA.  From  vdwp,  water,  and 
o00aApof,  the  eye.)  Hydrophthalmium.  There  are 
two  diseases,  different  in  their  nature  and  consequence, 
thus  termed.  The  one  is  a mere  anasarcous  or  cede- 
matous  swelling  of  the  eyelid.  The  other,  the  true 
hydrophthalmia,  is  a swelling  of  the  bulb  of  the  eye, 
from  too  great  a collection  of  -vitreous  or  aqueous 
humours. 


HYDROPHTHA'LMIUM.  (From  water,  and 
od>6a\pos,  the  eye.)  See  Hydrophthalmia. 

HYDROPHTORIC  ACID.  Acidum  hydrophtori- 
cum.  (From  vficop,  water,  and  (pOopios , destructive.) 
Ampere’s  name  for  the  base  of  the  fluoric  acid,  called 
by  Davy , fluorine.  See  Hydro-fluoric  acid. 

HYDROPHYSOCE'LE.  (From  vSwp,  water,  <pvmj, 
flatulence,  and  a tumour.)  A swelling  formed 
of  water  and  air.  It  was  applied  to  a hernia,  in  the 
sac  of  which  was  a fluid  and  air. 

HYDRO'PICA.  (From  v5pw4>,  the  dropsy.)  Medi 
cines  which  relieve  or  cure  dropsy. 

HYDRO'PIPER.  (From  vS wp,  water,  and  Tzenepi, 
pepper : so  called  from  its  biting  the  tongue  like  pepper 
and  growing  in  marshy  places.)  See  Polygonum  hydro 


i 


piper. 

HYDROPNEUMOSA'RCA.  (From  vtiwf),  water, 
irvcvpa,  wind,  and  aapl,  flesh.)  A tumour  of  air,  water, 
and  solid  substances. 

IIYDROPOI'DES.  (From  vSpa)^,  a dropsy,  and 
eiSos,  likeness.)  Serous  or  watery,  formerly  applied  to 
liquid  and  watery  excrements. 

HY'DROPS.  ( Hydrops , pis.  m. ; from  vSiup,  water.) 
Dropsy.  A preternatural  collection  of  serous  or 
watery  fluid  in  the  cellular  substance,  or  different 
cavities  of  the  body.  It  receives  different  appella- 
tions, according  to  the  particular  situation  of  the 
fluid. 

When  it  is  diffused  through  the  cellular  membrane, 
either  generally  or  partially,  it  is  called  anasarca. 
When  it  is  deposited  in  the  cavity  of  the  cranium,  it  is 
called  hydrocephalus  ; when  in  the  chest,  hydrothorax , 
or  hydrops  pectoris ; when  in  the  abdomen,  ascites. 
In  the  uterus,  hydrometra , and  within  the  scrotum, 
hydrocele. 

The  causes  of  these  diseases  are  a family  disposition 
thereto,  frequent  salivations,  excessive  and  long-conti- 
nued evacuations,  a free  use  of  spirituous  liquors, 
(which  never  fail  to  destroy  the  digestive  powers,) 
scirrhosities  of  the  liver,  spleen,  pancreas,  mesentery, 
and  other  abdominal  viscera ; preceding  diseases,  as 
the  jaundice,  diarrhoea,  dysentery,  phthisis,  asthma, 
gout,  intermittents  of  long  duration,  scarlet  fever,  and 
some  of  the  exanthemata ; a suppression  of  accus- 
tomed evacuations,  the  sudden  striking  in  of  eruptive 
humours,  ossification  of  the  valves  of  the  heart,  polypi 
in  the  right  ventricle,  aneurism  in  the  arteries,  tumours 
making  a considerable  pressure  on  the  neighbouring 
parts,  permanent  obstruction  in  the  lungs,  rupture  of 
the  thoracic  duct,  exposure  for  a length  of  time  to  a 
moist  atmosphere,  laxity  of  the  exhalants,  defect  in 
the  absorbents,  topical  weakness,  and  general  debility. 

Hydrops  articdli.  A white  swelling  of  a joint  is 
sometimes  so  called. 

Hydrops  cysticus.  A dropsy  enclosed  in  a bag, 
or  cyst. 

Hydrops  genu.  An  accumulation  of  synovia,  or 
serum,  within  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  knee. 

Hydrops  ad  matulam.  Diabetes. 

Hydrops  medullje  spinalis.  See  Hydrorachitis 
and  Spina  bifida. 

Hydrops  ovarii.  A dropsy  of  the  ovarium.  See 

Ascites. 

Hydrops  pectoris.  See  Hydrothorax. 

Hydrops  pericardii.  See  Hydrocardia. 

Hydrops  pulmonum.  Water  in  the  cellular  inter- 
stices of  the  lungs. 

Hydrops  scroti.  See  Hydrocele. 

Hydrops  uteri.  See  Hydrometra. 

Hydropy'retus.  (From  v6wp,  water,  and  nvpejoi, 
fever.)  A sweating  fever. 

H YDROR A CHI'TIS.  (From  vStop,  water,  and 

pa%t?,  the  spine.)  A fluctuating  tumour,  mostly  situ- 
ated on  the  lumbar  vertebrae  of  new-born  children.  It 
is  a genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Cachexies , and  order 
Intumesccntice,  of  Cullen,  and  is  always  incurable. 
See  Spina  bifida. 

IIydroro'satum.  A drink  made  of  water,  honey, 
and  the  juice  of  roses. 

HYDROSA'CCIIARUM.  (From  txfop,  water,  and 
oaicxapov,  sugar.)  A drink  made  of  sugar  and  water. 

HYDROSA'RCA.  (From  adoip,  water,  and  oapl, 
the  flesh.)  See  Anasarca. 

IIYDROSARCOCE'LE.  (Froma^wp,  water,  <r ap£ 
the  flesh,  and  KyXrj,  a tumour.)  Saiuucele,  with  an 
effusion  of  wafer  into  the  cellular  membrane. 

HYDROSELENIC  ACID.  The  best  process  which 

439 


HYD 


HYG 


we  can  employ  for  procuring  this  acid,  consists  in 
treating  the  seleniuret  of  iron  with  the  liquid  muriatic 
acid.  The  acid  gas  evolved  must  be  collected  over 
mercury.  As  in  this  case  a little  of  another  gas,  con- 
densible neither  by  water  nor  alkaline  solutions,  ap- 
pears, the  best  substance  for  obtaining  absolutely 
pure  hydroselenic  acid  would  be  seleniuret  of  potas- 
sium. 

HYDROSELI'NUM.  (From  v<5wp,  water,  and 
ce'Xivov,  purslane.)  A species  of  purslane  growing  in 
marshy  places. 

HYDROSULPHURET.  Hydrosulphuretum.  A 
compound  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  with  a salifiable 
basis. 

Hydrosulphure'tum  stibii  luteum.  See  Anti- 
monii  sulphuretum  praicipitatum. 

Hydrosulphuretum  stibii  rubrum.  Kermes 
mineralis.  A hydro-sulphuret  of  antimony  formerly 
in  high  estimation  as  an  expectorant,  sudorific,  and 
antispasmodic,  in  . difficult  respiration,  rheumatism, 
diseases  of  the  skin  and  glands. 

HYDROTHIONIC  ACID.  Some  German  chemists 
distinguish  sulphuretted  hydrogen  by  this  name  on  ac- 
count of  its  properties  resembling  those  of  an  acid. 

HYDRQTHO'RAX.  (From  v<5wp,  water,  and  Oupal, 
the  chest.)  Hydrops  thoracis ; Hydrops  pectoris. 
Dropsy  of  the  chest.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Cachexia and  order  Intumescentiae , of  Cullen.  Diffi- 
culty of  breathing,  particularly  when  in  a horizontal 
posture;  sudden  startings  from  sleep,  with  anxiety, 
and  palpitations  of  the  heart;  cough,  paleness  of 
the  visage,  anasarcous  swellings  of  the  lower  ex- 
tremities, thirst,  and  a scarcity  of  urine,  are  the  cha- 
racteristic symptoms  of  hydrothorax;  but  the  one 
which  is  more  decisive  than  all  the  rest  is  a fluc- 
tuation of  water  being  perceived  in  the  chest,  either 
by  the  patient  himself  or  his  medical  attendant,  on  cer- 
tain motions  of  the  body. 

The  causes  which  give  rise  to  the  disease,  are  pretty 
much  the  same  with  those  which  are  productive  of 
the  other  species  of  dropsy.  In  some  cases,  it  exists 
without  any  other  kind  of  dropsical  affection  being 
present;  but  it  prevails  very  often  as  a part  of  more 
universal  dropsy. 

It  frequently  takes  place  to  a considerable  degree  be- 
fore it  becomes  very  perceptible ; and  its  presence  is 
not  readily  known,  the  symptoms,  like  those  of  hydro- 
cephalus, not  being  always  very  distinct.  In  some  in- 
stances, the  water  is  collected  in  both  sacs  of  the 
pleura ; but,  at  other  times,  k is  only  in  one.  Some- 
times it  is  lodged  in  the  pericardium  alone;  but,  lor 
the  most  part,  it  only  appears  there  when,  at  the  same 
time,  a collection  is  present  in  one  or  both  cavities  of 
the  thorax.  Sometimes  the  water  is  effused  in  the 
cellular  texture  of  the  lungs,  without  any  being  de- 
posited in  the  cavity  of  the  thorax.  In  a few  cases, 
the  water  that  is  collected  is  enveloped  in  small  cysts, 
of  a membraneous  nature,  known  by  the  name  of 
hydatides,  which  seem  to  float  in  the  cavity ; but 
more  frequently  they  are  connected  with,  and  attach- 
ed to,  particular  parts  of  the  internal  surface  of  the 
pleura. 

Hydrothorax  often  comes  on  with  a sense  of  uneasi- 
ness at  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum,  accompanied  by 
a difficulty  of  breathing  which  is  much  increased  by 
any  exertion,  and  which  is  always  most  considerable 
during  night,  when  the  body  is  in  a horizontal  posture. 
Along  with  these  symptoms  there  is  a cough,  that  is  at 
first  dry,  but  which,  after  a time,  is  attended  with  an 
expectoration  of  thin  mucus.  There  is  likewise  a 
paleness  of  the  complexion,  and  an  anasarcous  swell- 
ing of  the  feet  and  legs,  together  with  a considerable 
degree  of  thirst  and  a diminished  flow  of  urine.  Under 
these  appearances,  we  have  just  grounds  to  suspect 
that  there  is  a collection  of  water  in  the  chest;  but 
if  the  fluctuation  can  be  perceived,  there  can  then  re- 
main no  doubt  as  to  the  reality  of  its  presence. 

During  the  progress  of  the  disease,  it  is  no  uncom- 
mon thing  for  the  patient  to  feel  a numbness,  or  degree 
of  palsy,  in  one  or  both  arms,  and  to  be  more  than 
ordinarily  sensible  to  cold.  With  regard  to  the  pulse, 
it  is  usually  quick  at  first,  but,  towards  the  end,  be- 
comes irregular  and  intermitting. 

Our  prognostic  in  hydrothorax  must,  in  general,  be 
unfavourable,  as  it  has  seldom  been  cured,  and,  in 
many  cases,  will  hardly  admit  even  of  alleviation,  the 
difficulty  of  breathing  continuing  to  increase,  until  the 
440 


action  of  the  lungs  is  at  last  entirely  impeded  by  the 
quantity  of  water  deposited  in  the  chest.  In  some 
cases,  the  event  is  suddenly  fatal ; but  in  others,  it  is 
preceded,  for  a few  days  previous  to  death,  by  a spit- 
ting of  blood. 

Dissections  of  this  disease  show  that,  in  some  cases, 
the. water  is  either  collected  in  one  side  of  the  thorax, 
or  that  there  are  hydatides  formed  in  some  particular 
part  of  it ; but  they  more  frequently  discover  water  in 
both  sides  of  the  chest,  accompanied  by  a collection 
in  the  cellular  texture  and  principal  cavities  of  the 
body.  The  fluid  is  usually  of  a yellowish  colour ; pos- 
sesses properties  similar  lo  serum,  and,  with  respect  to 
its  quantity,  varies  very  much,  being  from  a few 
ounces  to  several  quarts.  According  to  the  quantity, 
so  are  the  lungs  compressed  by  it;  and,  where  it  is 
very  considerable,  they  are  usually  found  much  re- 
duced in  size.  When  universal  anasarca  has  pre- 
ceded the  collection  in  the  chest,  it  is  no  uncommon 
occurrence  to  find  some  of  the  abdominal  viscera  in  a 
scirrhous  state. 

The  treatment  of  this  disease  must  be  conducted  on 
the  same  general  plan  as  that  of  anasarca.  Emetics, 
however,  are  hazardous,  and  purgatives  do  not  afford 
so  much  benefit;  but  the  bowels  must  be  kept  regular, 
and  other  evacuating  remedies  may  be  employed  in 
conjunction  with  tonics.  Squill  has  been  chiefly  re- 
sorted to,  as  being  expectorant  as  well  as  diuretic ; but 
its  power  is  usually  not  great,  unless  it  be  carried  so  f ar 
as  to  cause  nausea,  which  cannot  usually  be  borne  to 
any  e’xtent.  Digitalis  is  more  to  be  relied  upon ; but  it 
will  be  better  to  conjoin  them,  adding,  perhaps,  some 
form  of  mercury;  and  employing  at  the  same  time 
other  diuretics,  as  the  supertartrate  or  acetate  of  po- 
tassa,  juniper  berries,  &c.  Where  febrile  symptoms 
attend,  diaphoretics  will  probably  be  especially  ser- 
viceable, as  the  pulvis  ipecacuanhse  compositus,  or 
antimonials,  in  small  doses ; which  last  may  also  pro- 
mote expectoration.  Blisters  to  the  chest  will  be  pro- 
per in  many  cases,  particularly  should  there  be  auy 
pain  or  other  mark  of  inflammatory  action.  Myrrh 
seems  to  answer  better  than  most  other  tonics,  as  more 
decidedly  promoting  expectoration  ; or  the  nitric  acid 
may  be  given,  increasing  the  secretion  of  urine,  as  well 
as  supporting  the  strength.  The  inhalation  of  oxygen 
gas  is  stated  to  have  been  in  some  instances  singularly 
beneficial.  Where  the  fluid  is  collected  in  either  of 
the  sacs  of  the  pleura,  the  operation  of  paracentesis  of 
the  thorax  may  afford  relief  under  urgent  symptoms, 
and,  perhaps,  contribute  to  the  recovery-ef  the  patient. 

HYDROXURE.  See  Hydrate. 

HYDRURET  A compound  of  hydrogen  with  a 
metal.  See  Uret. 

HYGEIA.  Hygieia.  The  goddess  of  health.  One 
of  the  four  daughters  ef  Esculapius.  Site  often  ac- 
companies her  father  in  the  monuments  of  him  now 
remaining,  and  appears  like  a young  woman,  com- 
monly holding  a serpent  in  one  hand,  and  a patera  in 
the  other.  Sometimes  the  serpent  drinks  out  of  the 
patera ; sometimes  he  twines  about  the  whole  body  of 
the  goddess. 

HYGIENE.  (From  vy  tat  vw,  to  be  well.)  Hygiesis. 
Modern  physicians  have  applied  this  term  to  that  divi- 
sion of  therapeia  which  treats  of  the  diet  and  non 
naturals  of  the  sick. 

Hygie'sis.  See  Hygiene. 

Hy'gra.  (From  vypos,  humid.)  An  ancient  term 
for  liquid  plasters. 

Hygrempla'strum.  (From  vypos,  moist,  and  tp- 
iz'Xas'pov,  a plaster.)  A liquid  plaster. 

Hygroblepha'ricu3.  (From  vypos,  humid,  and 
B^ttpapov,  the  eyelid.)  Applied  to  the  emunctory 
ducts  in  the  extreme  edge,  or  inner  part  of  the  eyelid 

Hygrocirsoce'le.  (From  vypos,  moist,  Kipaos,  a 
varix,  and  ktjXt],  a tumour.)  Dilated  spermatic  veins, 
or  circocele,  with  dropsy  of  the  scrotum. 

Hygrocolly'rium.  (From  vypos,  liquid,  and  ko\- 
Avptov,  a collyrium.)  Acollyrium  composed  of  liquids 

HYGRO  LOGY.  {Hygrologia ; from  vyoos,  a hu- 
mour or  fluid,  and  Aoyos,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine 
of  the  fluids. 

HYGRO  MA.  (Yypwpa;  from  vypos,  a liquid.)  An 
encysted  tumour,  the  contents  of  which  are  either 
serum  or  a fluid-like  lymph.  It  sometimes  happens 
that  these  tumours  are  filled  with  hydatids.  Hygro- 
inatous  tumours  require  the  removal  of  the  cyst,  or  the 
destruction  of  its  secreting  surface 


HYM 


HYGRO'METER.  (Hygrometrum ; from  vypos, 
moist,  and  yerpov,  a measure.)  Hygrometer.  An  in- 
strument to  measure  the  degrees  of  moisture  in  the 
atmosphere.  It  also  means  an  infirm  part  of  the  body, 
affected  by  moisture  of  the  atmosphere. 

Hygromy'rum.  (From  vypog,  moist,  and  yvpov , a 
liquid  ointment.)  A liquid  ointment. 

HYGROSCO  PIC.  Substances  which  have  the  pro- 
perty of  absorbing  moisture  from  the  atmosphere.  See 
Atmosphere. 

Hygropho'bia.  See  Hydrophobia. 

HY'LE.  (fYA»7,  matter.)  The  materia  medica,  or 
matter  of  any  kind  that  comes  under  the  cognizance 
of  a medical  person. 

HY'MEN.  (From  Hymen,  the  god  of  marriage, 
because  this  membrane  is  supposed  to  be  entire  before 
marriage,  or  copulation.)  The  hymen  is  a thin  mem- 
brane, of  a semilunar  or  circular  form,  placed  at  the 
entrance  of  the  vagina,  which  it  partly  closes.  It  has 
a very  different  appearance  in  different  women,  but  it 
is  generally,  if  not  always,  found  in  virgins,  and  is 
very  properly  esteemed  the  test  of  virginity,  being 
ruptured  in  the  first  act  of  coition.  The  remnants  of 
the  hymen  are  called  the  carunculte  myrtiformes.  The 
hymen  is  also  peculiar  to  the  human  species.  There 
are  two  circumstances  relating  t-o  the  hymen  which 
require  medical  assistance.  It  is  sometimes  of  such  a 
strong  ligamentous  texture,  that  it  cannot  be  ruptured, 
and  prevents  the  connexion  between  the  sexes.  It  is 
also  sometimes  imperforated,  wholly  closing  the  en- 
trance into  the  vagina,  and  preventing  any  discharge 
from  the  uterus ; but  both  these  cases  are  extremely 
rare.  If  the  hymen  be  of  an  unnaturally  firm  tex- 
ture, but  perforated,  though  perhaps  with  a very 
small  opening,  the  inconveniences  thence  arising 
will  not  be  discovered  before  the  time  of  marriage, 
when  they  may  be  removed  by  a crucial  incision 
made  through  it,  taking  care  not  to  injure  the  adjoin- 
ing parts. 

The  imperforation  of  the  hymen  will  produce  its 
inconveniences  when  the  person  begins  to  menstruate. 
For  the  menstruous  fluid,  being  secreted  from  the 
uterus  at  each  period,  and  not  evacuated,  the  patient 
suffers  much  pain  from  the  distention  of  the  parts, 
many  strange  symptoms  and  appearances  are  occa- 
sioned, and  suspicions  injurious  to  her  reputation  are 
often  entertained.  In  a case  of  this  kind,  for  which 
Dr.  Denman  was  consulted,  the  young  woman,  who 
was  twenty-two  years  of  age,  having  many  uterine 
complaints^-with  the  abdomen  enlarged,  was  suspected 
to  be  pregnant,  though  she  persevered  in  asserting  the 
contrary,  and  had  never  menstruated.  When  she  was 
prevailed  upon  to  submit  to  an  examination,  the  cir- 
cumscribed tumour  of  the  uterus  was  found  to  reach 
as  high  as  the  navel,  and  the  external  parts  were 
stretched  by  a round  soft  substance  at  the  entrance  of 
the  vagina,  in  such  a manner  as  to  resemble  that  ap- 
pearance which  they  have  when  the  head  of  a child 
is  passing  through  them ; but  there  was  no  entrance 
into  the  vagina.  On  the  following  morning  an  incision 
was  carefully  made  through  the  hymen,  which  had  a 
fleshy  appearance,  ami  was  thickened  in  proportion 
to  its  detention.  Not  less  than  four  pounds  of  blood, 
of  the  colour  and  consistence  of  tar,  were  discharged ; 
and  the  tumefaction  of  the  abdomen  was  immediately 
removed.  Several  stellated  incisions  were  afterward 
made  through  the  divided  edges,  which  is  a very  ne- 
cessary part  of  the  operation : and  care  was  taken  to 
prevent  a reunion  of  the  hymen  till  the  next  period 
of  menstruation,  after  which  she  suffered  no  inconve- 
nience. The  blood  discharged  was  not  putrid  or  co- 
agulated, and  seemed  to  have  undergone  no  other 
change  after  its  secretion,  but  what  was  occasioned  by 
the  absorption  of  its  more  fluid  parts.  Some  caution 
is  required  when  the  hymen  is  closed  in  those  who  are 
in  advanced  age,  unless  the  membrane  be  distended  by 
the  confined  menses ; as  Dr.  Denman  once  saw  an  in- 
stance of  inflammation  of  the  peritonaeum  being  im- 
mediately produced  after  the  operation,  of  which  the 
patient  died  as  in  the  true  puerperal  fever;  and  no 
other  reason  could  be  assigned  for  the  disease. 

The  caruncula;  myrtiformes,  by  their  elongation  and 
enlargement,  sometimes  become  very  painful  and 
troublesome. 

HYMENA3A.  (From  Hymen,  the  god  of  marriage; 
because,  as  Linnaeus  informs  ns,  its  younger  leaves 
cohere  together  in  pairs,  throughout  the  night.)  The 


HYO 

name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Decandria ; Order, 

Monogynia. 

Hymkn^a  courbaril.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  locust-tree  which  affords  the  resin  called  gum 
anime,  which  is  now  fallen  into  disuse,  and  is  only  to 
be  found  in  the  collections  of  the  curious. 

HYMENIUM.  (From  vyyv,  a membrane.)  The 
dilated  exposed  membrane  of  gymnocarpous  mush- 
rooms, in  which  the  seed  is  placed.  See  Gymnocarpi. 

HYMENODES.  (From  vyrjv,  a membrane,  and 
uSog i likeness.)  An  old  term  for  such  urine  as  is  iound 
to  be  full  of  little  films  and  pellicles.  Hippocrates 
applies  it  also  to  the  menstrual  discharge  when  mixed 
with  a tough  viscid  phlegm. 

HYO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  belong  to 
muscles  which  originate  from,  or  are  inserted  into,  or 
connected  with,  the  os  hyoides ; as  Hyo-glossus,  Hyo- 
pharyngeus,  Genio- hyo-glossus , &.c. 

HYO-GLOSSUS.  Cerato-glossus  of  Douglas  and 
Cowper.  Basio-ccrato-chondro-glossus  of  Albinus. 
Hyo- chondro-glosse  of  Dumas.  A muscle  situated  at 
the  sides,  between  the  os  hyoides  and  the  tongue.  It 
arises  from  the  basis,  but  chiefly  from  the  corner  of  the 
os  hyoides,  running  laterally  and  forwards  to  the  tongue, 
which  it  pulls  inward  and  downward. 

HYOI  DES  OS.  (From  the  Greek  letter  v , and  uoog, 
likeness:  so  named  from  its  resemblance.)  This  bone, 
which  isNgituated  between  the  root  of  the  tongue  and 
the  larynx,  derives  its  name  from  its  supposed  resem- 
blance to  the  Greek  letter  «,  and  is,  by  some  writers, 
described  along  with  the  parts  contained  in  the  mouth. 
Ruyscli  has  seen  the  ligaments  of  tlie  bone  so  com- 
pletely ossified,  that  the  os  hyoides  was  joined  to 
the  temporal  bones  by  anchylosis.  In  describing  this 
bone,  it  may  be  distinguished  into  its  body,  horns,  and 
appendices.  The  body  is  the  middle  and  broadest  part 
of  the  bone,  so  placed  that  it  may  be  easily  felt  with 
the  finger  in  the  forepart  of  the  throat.  Its  forepart, 
which  is  placed  toward  the  tongue,  is  irregularly  con- 
vex, and  its  inner  surface,  which  is  turneds  towards  the 
larynx,  is  unequally  concave.  The  cornua , or  horns, 
which  are  flat,  and  a little  bent,  are  considerably  longer 
than  the  body  of  the  bone,  and  may  be  said  to  form  the 
sides  of  the  v.  These  horns  are  thickest  near  the  body 
of  the  bone.  At  the  extremity  of  each  is  observed  a 
round  tubercle,  from  which  a ligame-;*  passes  to  the 
thyroid  cartilage.  The  appendices,  or  smaller  horns, 
cornua  minora , as  they  are  called  by  some  writers,  are 
two  small  processes,  which,  in  their  size  and  shape,  are 
somewhat  like  a grain  of  wheat.  They  rise  up  from 
the  articulations  of  the  cornua,  with  the  body  of  the 
bone,  and  are  sometimes  connected  with  the  styloid 
process  on  each  side,  by  means  of  a ligament.  It  is  not 
unusual  to  find  small  portions  of  bone  in  these  liga- 
ments; and  R^ysch,  as  we  have  already  observed,  has 
seen  them  coijjpletely  ossified.  In  the  foetus,  almost  the 
whole  of  the  bone  is  in  a cartilaginous  state,  excepting 
a small  point  of  a bone  in  the  middle  of  its  body,  and 
in  each  of  its  horns.  The  appendices  do  not  begin  to 
appear  till  after  birth,  and  usually  remain  cartilaginous 
many  years.  The  os  hyoides  serves  to  support  the 
tongue,  and  affords  attachment  to  a variety  of  muscles, 
some  of  w'hich  perform  the  motions  of  the  tongue, 
while  others  act  on  the  larynx  and  fauces. 

HYOPHARYNGE'US.  (From  vouSeg,  the  hyoid 
bone,  and  the  pharynx.)  A muscle  so  called 

from  its  origin  in  the  os  hyoides,  and  its  insertion  in 
the  pharynx. 

HYOPHTHA'LMUS.  (From  Wf,  a swine,  and  o0- 
6a\yog,  an  eye : so  named  from  the  supposed  resem- 
blance of  its  flower  to  a hog’s  eye.)  Hogs-eye  plant. 
Most  probably  the  Buphthalmum  spinosvm  of  Linnanis. 

HYOSCIANIA.  A new  vegetable  alkali  extracted 
by  Dr.  Brande  from  henbane.  See  Hyoscyamus  niger. 

HYOSCY'AMIJS.  (From  vg,  a swine,  and  uvayog, 
a bean  : so  named  because  hogs  eat  it  as  a medicine, 
or  it  may  be  because  the  plant  is  hairy  and  bristly,  like 
a swine.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linna:an 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Older,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  henbane.  See 
Hyoscyamus  niger. 

Hyoscyamus  albus.  This  plant,  a native  of  the 
south  of  Europe,  possesses  similar  virtues  to  the  hyos- 
cyamus niger. 

Hyoscyamus  luteus.  A species  of  tobacco,  the 
Nicotiana  rustica  of  Linnecus. 


441 


HYP 


HYP 


Hyoscyamus  nigkr.  The  systematic  name  of  com- 
mon or  black  henbane,  called  also  Fab  a suilla;  Apolli- 
naris  altercum;  A gone  ; Altercangenon  ; Hyoscyamus 
— foliis  amplexicaulibus  sinuatis,  floribus  sessilibus 
of  Linnaeus.  The  leaves  of  this  plant,  when  recent, 
have  a slightly  foetid  smell,  and  a mucilaginous  taste  ; 
when  dried,  they  lose  both  taste  and  smell,  and  part  also 
of  their  narcotic  power.  The  root  possesses  the  same 
qualities  as  the  leaves,  and  even  in  a more  eminent 
degree.  Henbane  resembles  opium  in  its  action,  more 
than  any  other  narcotic  dose.  In  a moderate  dose  it 
increases  at  first  the  strength  of  the  pulse,  and  occa- 
sions some  sense  of  heat,  which  are  followed  by 
diminished  sensibility  and  motion  ; in  some  cases,  by 
thirst,  sickness,  stupor,  and  dimness  of  vision.  In  a 
larger  quantity  it  occasions  profound  sleep,  hard  pulse, 
and  sometimes  fierce  delirium,  ending  in  coma,  or  con- 
vulsions, with  a remarkable  dilatation  of  the  pupil,  dis- 
tortion of  the  countenance,  a weak  tremulous  pulse, 
and  eruption  of  petechias.  On  dissection,  gangrenous 
spots  have  been  found  on  the  internal  surface  of  the 
stomach.  Its  baneful  effects  are  best  counteracted  by 
a powerful  emetic,  and  by  drinking  largely  of  the  vege- 
table acids. 

Henbane  has  been  used  in  various  spasmodic  and 
painful  diseases,  as  in  epilepsy,  hysteria,  palpitation, 
headache;  paralysis,  mania,  and  scirrhus.  It  is  given 
in  the  form  of  the  inspissated  juice  of  the  fresh  leaves, 
the  dose  of  which  is  from  one  to  two  grains ; which 
requires  to  be  gradually  increased.  It  is  sometimes 
employed  as  a substitute  for  opium,  where  the  latter, 
from  idiosyncrasy,  occasions  any  disagreeable  symp- 
tom. The  henbane  also  is  free  from  the  constipating 
quality  of  the  opium. 

Dr.  Brande  has  extracted  a new  alkali  from  this 
plant,  which  he  calls  hyosciania.  It  crystallizes  in  long 
prisms,  and  when  neutralized  by  sulphuric  or  nitric 
acid,  forms  characteristic  salts. 

Hyothyroi'dks.  (From  voetdes , the  hyoid  bone, 
and  dvpouSr/s,  the  thyroid  cartilage.)  A muscle  named 
from  its  origin  in  the  hyoid  bone,  and  insertion  in  the 
thyroid  cartilage. 

Hypa'ctica.  (From  vir  ay  w,  to  subdue.)  Medicines 
which  evacuate  the  faces. 

Hypalei'ptrum.  (From  viraXei<t>w,  to  spread  upon.) 
A spatula  for  spreading  ointments  with. 

Hype'lata.  (From  virsXaw,  to  move.)  Medicines 
which  purge. 

HYPER ASTHE'SIS.  (From  virep,  and  aiodavopai , 
to  feel.)  Error  of  appetite,  whether  by  excess  or  de- 
ficiency. 

HYPERCATHA'RSIS.  (From  u7T£:p,  supra , over  or 
above,  and  Kadaipw,  to  purge.)  Hyperinesis ; Hype- 
rinos.  An  excessive  purging  from  medicines. 

Hypercorypho'sis.  (From  vir ep,  above,  and  icopv- 
(prj,  the  vertex.)  A prominence  or  protuberance.  Hip- 
pocrates calls  the  lobes  of  the  liver  and  lungs  Hyper- 
coryphoses. 

HYPE  RCRISIS.  ('Yirepicpicns  5 from  virep,  over 
or  above,  and  icpivw , to  separate.)  A critical  excretion 
above  measure ; as  when  a fever  terminates  in  a loose- 
ness, the  humours  may  flow  off  faster  than  the  strength 
can  bear,  and  therefore  it  is  to  be  checked. 

IIYPERE'MESIS.  (From  virep,  in  excess,  and  epew, 
to  vomit.)  An  excessive  evacuation  by  vomiting. 

HYPEREPHIDRO'SIS.  (From  virep,  excess,  and 
idpws,  sweat.)  Immoderate  sweating. 

HYPE  RICUM.  (From  vir ep,  over,  and  eikwv,  an 
image  or  spectre : so  named  because  it  was  thought  to 
have  powerover  and  to  drive  away  evil  spirits.)  I. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Polyadtlphia ; Order,  Polyandria.  St.  John’s 
wort. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  St. 
John’s  wort.  See  Hypericum  perfoliatum. 

Hypericum  bacciferum  Caa-opia ; Arbuncula 
gummifera  Braziliensts.  A juice  exudes  from  the 
wounded  bark  of  this  plant,  in  the  Brazils,  which, 
in  a dry  state,  resembles  camboge,  but  is  rather  darker. 

Hypericum  coris.  Cons  Inlca ; Coris  legitima 
cretica.  Bastard  St.  John’s  wort.  The  seeds  are 
diuretic,  einmenagogue,  and  antispasmouic. 

Hypericum  perfoliatum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  St.  John’s  wort,  called  also/uo-a  deemonum;  and 
andro sternum.  Hypericum  perforatum— floribus  tri- 
gyiiis , caule  aucipiti,  foliis  obtusis pellueido-punctatis, 
of  Linnaeus.  This  indigenous  plant  was  greatly  es- 
442 


teemed  by  the  ancients,  internally  in  a great  variety 
of  diseases,  and  externally  as  an  anodyne  and  dis- 
cutient,  but  is  now  very  rarely  used.  The  flowers 
were  formerly  used  in  our  pharmacopoeia,  on  account 
of  the  great  proportion  of  resinous  oily  matter,  in  which 
the  medical  efficacy  of  the  plant  is  supposed  to  reside, 
but  are  now  omitted. 

Hypericum  saxatile.  Hypericoides.  The  seeds 
are  said  to  be  diuretic  and  antispasmodic. 

HYPERI'NA.  (From  virep,  in  excess,  and  ivew,  to 
evacuate.)  Medicines  which  purge  excessively. 

Hyperine'sis.  See  Hypercatharsis. 

Hyperi'nos.  See  Hyper  catharsis. 

IIypero'a.  (From  virep,  above,  and  wov,  the  top  ot 
a house.)  The  palate. 

Hyperopharynge'us.  (From  virep,  above,  and 
( papvy% , the  pharynx.)  A muscle  named  from  its  situa- 
tion above  the  pharynx. 

HYPEROSTO'SIS.  (From  virep,  upon,  and  wov,  a 

bone.)  See  Exostosis. 

Hypero'um.  (From  virep,  above,  and  wov,  the  roof 
or  palate.)  A foramen  in  the  upper  part  of  the  palate. 

Hyperoxymuriate  of  potassa.  See  Marias  potasses 
oxygenatus 

Hyperoxymuriatic  acid.  See  Chlorine. 

HYPEROXYMURIATE.  A salt  now  called  a chlo- 
rate. 

HYPERSARCO  MA.  (From  virep,  in  excess,  and 
aap\,  flesh.)  Hypersarcosis.  A fleshy  excrescence. 
A polypus. 

Hypersarco'sis.  See  Hypersarcoma. 

HYPERSTENE.  LaDrador  6chiller  spar.  Found 
in  Labrador,  Greenland,  and  Isle  of  Skye.  It  has  a 
beautiful  copper  colour  when  cut  and  polished  into 
rings,  brooches,  &c. 

Hyperydro'sis.  (From  virep,  in  excess,  and  vSwp, 
water.)  A great  distention  of  any  part,  from  water 
collected  in  it. 

Hype'xodos.  (From  vir o,  under,  and  passing 

out.)  A flux  of  the  belly. 

HYPNO'BATES.  (From  virvos,  sleep,  and  fiaivw, 
to  go.)  Hypnobatasis.  One  who  walks  in  his  sleep 
See  Oneirodynia. 

HYPNOLO'GIA.  (From  virvos,  sleep,  and  Xoyos,  a 
discourse.)  A dissertation,  or  directions  for  the  due 
regulation  of  sleeping  and  waking. 

HYPNOPOIE'TICA.  (From  virvos,  sleep,  and 
iroiew,  to  cause.)  Medicines  which  procure  sleep.  See 
Anodyne. 

HYPNO'TIC.  (Hipnoticus ; from  virvos,  sleep.) 
See  Anodyne. 

HYPO-SULPHITE.  A sulphuretted  sulphite. 

HYPOiE'MA.  (From  viro,  under,  and  aipa , blood ; 
because  the  blood  is  under  the  cornea.)  An  effusion 
of  red  blood  into  the  chambers  of  the  eye. 

Hypocaro'des.  (From  viro,  and  uapos,  a carus.) 
Hypocarothis.  One  who  labours  under  a low  degree 
of  carus. 

Hypocatha'rsis.  (From  virw,  under,  and  tcaBaipw, 
to  purge.)  It  is  when  a medicine  does  not  work  so 
much  as  expected,  or  but  very  Iigle.  Or  a slight  purg- 
ing, when  it  is  a disorder. 

II  YPOCAU'STRUM.  (From  viro,  under,  and  uaiw, 
to  burn.)  A stove,  hot  house,  or  any  such  like  con- 
trivance, to  preserve  plants  from  cold  air. 

Hypocerchna'leon.  (From  viro,  and  Kepxvos,  an 
asperity  of  the  fauces.)  A stridulous  kind  of  asperity 
of  the  fauces. 

Hypociieo'menos.  (From  viro,  under,  and  xru,  to 
pour.)  One  who  labours  under  a cataract. 

Hypociiloro'sis.  (From  viro,  and  ^Awponrij,  the 
green-sickness.)  A slight  degree  of  chlorosis. 

HYPOCHO'NDRIAC.  (From  viro,  under,  and 
Xovdpos,  a cartilage.)  1.  Belonging  to  the  hypochon- 
dria. 

2.  A person  affected  with  lowness  of  spirits.  See 

Hypochondriasis 

Hypochondriac  regions.  Regiones  hypochondri- 
acal; Hypochondria.  The  spaces  in  the  abdomen  that 
are  under  the  cartilages  of  the  spurious  ribs  on  each 
side  of  the  epigastrium. 

H YPOCHONDRI'ASIS.  (From  viroxovSpiaicos,  one 
who  is  hipped. i Hypochondriacus  morbus;  Affcctio 
hypochondriuca ; Passio  hypochondriaca.  The  hypo; 
chondriac  affection,  vapours,  spleen,  &c  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  class  Neuroses,  and  order  Adynamue,  of 
Cullen,  characterized  by  dyspepsia,  languor,  and  want 


HYP 

rtf  energy;  sadness  and  fear  from  uncertain  causes, 
with  a melancholic  temperament. 

The  state  of  mind  peculiar  to  hypochondriacs  is  thus 
described  by  Cullen : — “A  larigour,  listlessness,  or  want 
of  resolution  and  activity,  with  respect  to  ail  undertak- 
ings ; a disposition  to  seriousness,  sadness,  and  timidity, 
as  to  all  future  events,  and  apprehension  of  the  worst 
or  most  unhappy  state  of  them ; and,  therefore,  often 
upon  slight  grounds,  and  apprehension  of  great  evil. 
Such  persons  are  particularly  attentive  to  the  state  of 
their  own  health,  to  every  the  smallest  change  of  feel- 
ing in  their  bodies:  and  from  any  unusual  sensation, 
perhaps  of  the  slightest  kind,  they  apprehend  great 
danger,  and  even  death  itself.  In  respect  to  these 
feelings  and  fears,  there  is  commonly  the  most  obsti- 
nate belief  and  persuasion.”  He  adds,  “ that  it  is  only 
when  the  state  of  mind  just  described  is  joined  with 
indigestion,  in  either  sex^somewhat  in  years,  of  a me- 
lancholic temperament,  and  a firm  and  rigid  habit,  that 
the  disease  takes  the  name  of  Hypochondriacism .” 

The  seat  of  the  hypochondriac  passions  is  in  the 
stomach  and  bowels ; for,  first  these  parts  are  disor- 
dered, then  the  others  suffer  from  the  connexion.  The 
causes  are,  sorrow,  fear,  or  excesses  of  any  of  the  pas- 
sions; too  long  continued  watching;  irregular  diet. 
Those  habitually  disposed  to  it  (and  these  causes  have 
little  effect  in  other  constitutions,)  have  generally  a sal- 
low or  brown  complexion,  and  a downcast  look;  a 
rigidity  of  the  solids,  and  torpor  of  the  nervous  system. 
Whatever  may  occasion  nervous  disorders  in  general, 
may  also  be  the  cause  of  this. 

The  signs  of  this  complaint  are  so  various,  that  to 
describe  them  is  to  describe  almost  every  other  disease  ; 
but,  in  general,  there  is  an  insurmountable  indolence, 
dejected  spirits,  dread  of  death,  costiveness,  a slow  and 
somewhat  difficult  inspiration,  flatulencies  in  theprima 
vise,  and  various  spasmodic  affections.  It  is  seldom 
fatal;  but  if  neglected,  or  improperly  treated,  may 
bring  on  incurable  melancholy,  jaundice,  madness,  or 
vertigo,  palsy,  and  apoplexy. 

On  dissections  of  hypochondriacal  persons,  some  of 
the  abdominal  viscera  (particularly  the  liver  and 
spleen)  are  usually  found  considerably  enlarged.  In 
some  few  instances,  effusion  and  a turgescence  of  the 
vessels  have  been  observed  in  the  brain. 

This  being  a disease  of  a mixed  description,  the  treat- 
ment must  be  partly  corporeal,  partly  mental ; but  it  has 
been  too  often  neglected,  as  merely  imaginary,  and 
their  complaints  met  by  argument  or  railiery,  which, 
however,  can  only  weaken  their  confidence  in  the 
practitioner.  It  may  be  very  proper  to  inform  them, 
that  their  disorder  is  not  so  dangerous  as  they  suppose, 
and  may  be  removed  by  suitable  remedies ; but  to  tell 
them  they  ail  nothing,  is  absurd.  In  reality,  medicine 
is  often  of  much  service ; and  though  others  have  been 
cured  ehiefly  by  amusements,  country  air,  and  exer- 
cise, it  by  no  means  follows,  that  their  disorder  was  only 
in  the  imagination.  In  so  far  as  dyspeptic  symptoms 
appear,  these  must  be  encountered  by  the  remedies 
pointed  out  under  that  head;  antacids,  aperients,  &c. 
Sometimes  emetics,  or  drastic  cathartics,  have  pro- 
duced 9peedy  relief ; but  they  are  too  debilitating  to  be 
often  employed.  The  bowels  will  be  better  regulated 
by  milder  remedies,  as  castor  oil,  senna,  aloes,  (unless 
they  are  subject  to  haemorrhoids,)  and  the  like ; and 
magnesia  may  at  the  same  time  correct  ascidity ; but  if 
the  liver  be  torpid,  some  mercurial  preparation  will  be 
of  more  avail.  Flatulence  and  spasmodic  pains  may 
be  relieved  by  aromatics,  ether,  the  foetid  gum  resins, 
musk,  va:aerian,  fee.  but  severe  and  obstinate  pain,  or 
high  irritation,  will  be  best  attacked  by  opium:  it  is 
important,  however,  to  guard  against  the  patient  get- 
ting into  tlie  habitual  use  of  this  remedy.  Occasionally, 
mild  tonics  appear  useful,  especially  chalybeate 
waters ; and  tepid  bathing,  with  friction,  gentle  exer- 
cise, and  warm  clothing,  are  important  to  keep  up  the 
function  of  the  skin.  The  diet  should  be  light,  and 
sufficiently  nutritious;  but  moderation  must  be  en- 
joined to  those  who  have  been  accustomed  to  indulge 
too  much  in  the  luxuries  of  the  table:  and,  in  all  cases, 
those  articles  which  are  ascescent,  flatulent,  or  difficult 
of  digestion,  must  be  avoided.  Malt  liquors  do  not 
usually  agree  so  well  as  wine  or  spirits,  considerably 
diluted ; but  these  stimuli  should  never  be  allowed  un- 
necessarily. The  mental  treatment  required  will  be 
such  as  is  calculated  to  restore  the  strength,  and  cor- 
rect the  aberrations  of  the  judgment.  When  any 


HYP 

false  association  of  ideas  occurs,  the  best  mode  of  re- 
moving it  is,  by  keeping  up  a continued  train  of  natural 
associated  impressions  of  superior  force,  which  may 
amuse  the  mind,  and  moderately  exercise,  without 
exhausting  it.  A variety  of  literary  recreations  and 
diversions,  especially  in  the  open  air,  with  agreeable 
company,  will  be  therefore  advisable:  frequently 
changing  the  scene,  taking  them  to  watering  places, 
and  adopting  other  expedients,  to  prevent  them  from 
dwelling  too  much  upon  their  own  morbid  feelings. 

H YPOCHO'NDRHJM.  (From  viro,  under,  and 
XovSpog,  a cartilage.)  That  part  of  the  body  which 
lies  under  the  cartilages  of  the  spurious  ribs. 

HYPO'CH  Y MA.  (From  vtto,  and  %ow,  to  pour  ; 
because  the  ancients  thought  that  the  opacity  pro- 
ceeded from  something  running  under  the  crystalline 
humour.)  A cataract. 

HYPOCI'STIS.  (From  viro,  under,  and  ki^os,  the 
cistus.)  See  Asarum  hypocistis  and  Cytinus  hypo- 
cistis. 

Hypocle'pticum.  (From  viro,  under,  and  xAcrrrw, 
to  steal.)  A chemical  vessel  for  separating  liquors, 
particularly  the  essential  oil  of  any  vegetable  from  the 
water;  and  named  because  it  steals,  as  it  were,  the 
water  from  the  oil. 

Hypocoelon.  (From  viro,  under,  and  koi\ov,  a 
cavity.)  The  cavity  under  the  lower  eyelid. 
Hypocopho'sis.  A trifling  degree  of  deafness. 
Hypocra'nium.  (From  vno , under,  and  Kpaviov,  the 
skull.)  A kind  of  abscess,  so  called  because  seated 
under  the  cranium,  between  it  and  the  dura  mater. 

HYPOCRATERIFORMIS.  (From  viro,  xparyp,  a 
cup,  goblet,  or  salver,  and  forma,  likeness.)  Hypocrate- 
riform,  salver-shaped ; applied  to  leaves  so  shaped,  as 
those  of  the  Primula. 

Hypodei'ris.  In  Rufus  Ephesius,  it  is  the  extremity 
of  the  forepart  of  the  neck. 

Hypode'rmis.  (From  viro,  under,  and  Stppa,  the 
skin.)  1.  The  skin  over  the  clitoris,  which  covers  it 
like  a prepuce. 

2.  The  clitoris. 

Hypo'desis.  (From  viro,  under,  and  Sect  to  bind.) 
Hypodesmus.  An  underswathe,  or  bandage. 

HYPO'GALA.  (From  viro,  under,  and  ya\a,  milk; 
because  it  is  a milk-like  effusion  under  the  cornea.)  A 
collection  of  white  humour,  like  milk,  in  tne  chambers 
of  the  eye.  There  are  two  species  of  this  disease ; the 
one  takes  place,  it  is  said,  from  a deposition  of  the  milk, 
as  is  sometimes  observed  in  women  who  suckle,  the 
other  from  a depression  of  the  milky  cataract. 

HYPOGA'STRIC.  (From  viro,  under,  and  ya^rjp, 
the  stomach.)  Belonging  to  the  hypogastria.  See 
Hypogastrium. 

Hypogastric  arteries.  Of  or  belonging  to  the 
hypogastrium.  See  Iliac  arteries. 

Hypogastric  region.  See  Hypogastrium. 
HYPOGA'STRIUM.  (From  viro , under,  and  ya^rjp, 
the  stomach.)  Regio  hypogastrica.  The  region  of 
the  abdomen  that  reaches  from  above  the  pubes  to 
within  three  fingers’  breadth  of  the  navel. 

HYPOGASTROCE'LE.  (From  viroya^piov,  the 
hypogastrium,  and  ktjXtj,  a tumour.)  A hernia,  in  the 
hypogastric  region. 

HYPOGLO'SSIS.  (From  viro,  under,  and  yXioaaa, 
the  tongue.)  The  under  part  of  the  tongue,  which 
adheres  to  the  jaw. 

HYPOGLO'SSUS.  (From  viro,  under,  and  y\u>aaa, 
the  tongue.)  A nerve  which  goes  to  the  under  part  of 
the  tongue. 

HYPOGLO'TTIDES.  (From  viro,  under,  and 
Awr7a,  the  tongue.)  They  arc  a kind  of  lozenge  to 
e held  under  the  tongue  until  they  are  dissolved. 
HYPOGLU'TIS.  (From  viro,  under,  and  yXovros, 
the  nates.)  It  is  the  fleshy  part  under  the  nates  to- 
wards the  thigh.  Some  say  it  is  the  flexure  of  the 
coxa,  under  the  nates. 

Hypo'mia.  (From  viro,  under,  and  copos,  shoulder.) 

In  Galen’s  Exegesis,  it  is  the  part  subjacent  to  the 
shoulder. 

HYPONTTRIC  ACID.  See  JV/tric  acid. 
HYPONITROUS  ACID.  Pernitrous  acid.  “It 
appears  from  the  experiments  of  Gay  Lussac,  that 
there  exists  an  acid,  formed  of  100  azote  and  150 
oxygen.  When  into  a test  tube  filled  with  mercury, 
we  pass  up  from  500  to  GOO  volumes  of  deutoxide  of 
azote,  a little  alkaline  water,  and  100  parts  of  oxygen 
gas,  we  obtain  an  absorption  of  500,  proceeding  from 

443“ 


HYP 


the  condensation  of  the  100  parts  of  oxygen  with  400 
of  deutoxide  of  azote.  Now  these  400  parts  are  com- 
posed of  200  azote  and  200  oxygen ; consequently,  the 
new  acid  is  composed  of  azote  and  oxygen,  in  the  ratio 
of  100  to  150,  as  wc  have  said  above.  It  is  the  same 
acid,  according  to  Gay  Lussac,  which  is  produced  on 
leaving  for  a long  time  a strong  solution  of  potassa  in 
contact  with  deutoxide  of  azote.  At  the  end  of  three 
months  he  found  that  100  parts  of  deutoxide  of  azote 
were  reduced  to  25  of  protoxide  of  azote,  and  that 
crystals  of  hyponilrite  {per nitrite)  were  formed. 

Hyponitrous  acid  (called  pernitrous  by  the  French 
chemists)  cannot  be  insulated.  As  soon  as  we  lay 
hold,  by  an  acid,  of  the  potassa  with  which  it  is  asso- 
ciated, it  is  transformed  into  deutoxide  of  azote,  which 
is  disengaged,  and  into  nitrous  or  nitric  acid,  which 
remains  in  solution.” 

Hypo'nomos.  (From  vzsovopos,  a phagedenic  ulcer.) 
1.  A subterraneous  place. 

2.  A deep  phagedenic  ulcer. 

Hypope'dium.  (From  viro,  under,  and  i roe;,  the 
foot.)  A cataplasm  for  the  sole  of  the  foot. 

Hypo'phora.  (From  vKocpepopai,  to  be  carried  or 
conveyed  underneath.)  A deep  fistulous  ulcer. 

HYPOPHOSPIIOROUS  ACID.  This  acid  was 
lately  discovered  by  Dulong.  Pour  water  on  the  phos- 
phuret  of  barytes,  and  wait  till  all  the  phosphuretted 
hydrogen  be  disengaged.  Add  cautiously  to  the 
filtered  liquid  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  till  the  barytes  be 
all  precipitated  in  the  state  of  sulphate.  The  superna- 
lant  liquid  is  hypophosphorous  acid,  which  should  be 
passed  through  a filter.  This  liquid  may  be  concen- 
trated by  evaporation,  till  it  become  viscid.  It  has  a 
very  sour  taste,  reddens  vegetable  blues,  and  does  not 
crystallize.  It  is  probably  composed  of  2 primes  of 
phosphorus  = 3+  1 of  oxygen.  Dulong’s  analysis  ap- 
proaches to  this  proportion.  lie  assigns,  but  from 
rather  precarious  data,  100  phosphorus  to  37.44  oxy- 
gen. The  hypophospliites  have  the  remarkable  pro- 
perty of  being  all  soluble  in  water;  while  many  of  the 
phosphates  and  phosphites  are  insoluble. 

HYPOPHTHA'LMION.  (From  viro,  under,  and 
o<pda\pos,  the  eye.)  The  part  under  the  eye  which  is 
subject  to  swell  in  a cachexy,  or  dropsy. 

Hypo  physis.  (From  viro,  under,  and  <pvu),  to  pro- 
duce.) A disease  of  the  eyelids,  when  the  hairs  grow 
so  much  as  to  irritate  and  oflend  the  pupil. 

HYPOPYUM.  (From  viro,  under,  and  irvov,  pus; 
because  the  pus  is  under  the  cornea.)  Hypopion; 
Pyosis;  Jlbscessiis  oculi.  An  accumulation  of  a glu- 
tinous yellow  fluid,  like  pus,  which  takes  place  in  the 
anterior  chamber  of  the  aqueous  humour,  and  fre- 
quently also  in  the  posterior  one,  in  consequence  of 
severe,  acute  ophthalmy,  particularly  the  internal  spe- 
cies. This  viscid  matter  of  the  liypopyum,  is  com- 
monly called  pus ; but  Scarpa  contends,  that  it  is  only 
coagulating  lymph.  The  symptoms  portending  an 
extravasation  of  coagulable  lymph  in  the  eyd,  or  an 
hypopyum,  are  the  same  as  those  which  occur  in  the 
highest  stage  of  violent  acute  ophthalmy,  viz.  prodi- 
gious tumefaction  of  the  eyelids;  the  same  swelling 
and  redness  as  in  chemosis;  burning  heat  and  pain  in 
the  eye ; pains  in  the  eyebrow,  and  nape  of  the  neck ; 
fever,  restlessness,  aversion  to  the  faintest  light,  and  a 
contracted  state  of  the  pupil. 

Hypori'nion.  (From  viro,  under,  and  piv,  the  nose.) 
h name  for  the  parts  of  the  upper  lip  below  the 
nostrils. 

Hyposa'rca.  (From  viro,  under,  and  mp\,  flesh.) 
Hyposarcidios.  A collection  of  fluid  or  air  in  the  cel- 
lular membrane 

Hypospadi  e'os.  (From  viro,  under,  and  <rir«a>,  to 
draw.)  The  urethra  terminating  under  the  glans. 

Hypospathi'smvs.  (From  vxo,  under,  and  oiraOr j, 
a spatula.)  The  name  of  an  operation  formerly  used 
in  surgery,  for  removing  defluxions  in  the  eyes.  It 
was  thus  named  from  the  instrument  with  which  it 
was  performed. 

Hypospiia'gma.  (From  viro,  under,  and 
to  kill.)  Jposphagma.  An  extravasation  of  blood 
in  the  tunica  adnata  of  the  eye,  from  external 
injury. 

IIyposple'nia.  (From  viro,  under,  and  oit\riv,  the 
spleeq.)  A tumour  under  the  spleen. 

Hyposta'phyle.  (From  viro,  and  s-a0vXi7,  the 
uvula.)  Relaxation  of  the  uvula. 

Hypo'st.vsi3.  (From  v<pi^rjpi,  to  subside.)  A sedi- 
444 


HYS 

ment,  as  that  which  is  occasionally  let  down  from 
urine. 

HYPOSIJLPHUREOUS  AUID.  “ In  order  to  ob- 
tain hyposulphio-eous  acid,  Herschel  mixed  a dilute 
solution  of  hyposulphite  of  strontites  with  a slight  ex- 
cess of  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  and,  after  agitation, 
poured  the  mixture  on  three  filters.  The  first  was  re- 
ceived into  a solution  of  carbonate  of  potassa,  from 
which  it  expelled  carbonic  acid  gas.  The  second  phr- 
tion  being  received  successively  into  nitrates  of  silver 
and  mercury,  precipitated  the  metals  copiously  in  the 
state  of  sulphurets,  but  produced  no  effect  on  solutions 
of  copper,  iron,  or  zinc.  The  third,  being  tasted,  was 
acid,  astringent,  and  bitter.  When  fresh  filtered,  it 
was  clear ; but  -it  became  milky  on  standing,  deposit- 
ing sulphur,  and  colouring  sulphureous  acid.  A mo- 
derate exposure  to  air,  or  a gentle  heat,  caused  its  en: 
tire  decomposition.”  # 

HYPOSULPHURIC  ACID.  “Gay  Lussac  and 
Welther  have  recently  announced  the  discovery  of  a 
new  acid  combination  of  sulphur  and  oxygen,  interme- 
diate between  sulphureous  and  sulphuric  acids,  to 
which  they  have  given  the  name  of  hyposulphuric 
acid.  It  is  obtained  by  passing  a current  of  sulphure- 
ous acid  gas  over  the  black  oxide  of  manganese.  A 
combination  takes  place;  the  excess  of  the  oxide  of 
manganese  is  separated  by  dissolving  the  hyposulphate 
of  manganese  in  water.  Caustic  barytes  precipitates 
the  manganese,  and  forms  with  the  new  acid  a very 
soluble  salt,  which,  freed  from  excess  of  barytes  by  a 
current  of  carbonic  acid,  crystallizes  regularly,  like 
the  nitrate  or  muriate  of  barytes.  Hyposulphate  of 
barytes  being  thus  obtained,  sulphuric  acid  is  cau- 
tiously added  to  the  solution,  which  throws  down  the 
barytes,  and  leaves  the  hyposulphuric  acid  in  the  wa- 
ter. This  acid  bears  considerable  concentration  under 
the  receiver  of  the  air-pump.  It  consists  of  five  parts 
of  oxygen  to  four  of  sulphur.  The  greater  number  of 
the  hyposulphates,  both  earthy  and  metallic,  are  solu- 
ble, and  crystallize ; those  of  barytes  and  lime  are  un- 
alterable in  the  air. 

Hyposulphuric  acid  is  distinguished  by  the  following 
properties : — 

1st,  It  is  decomposed  by  heat  into  sulphurous  and 
sulphuric  acids. 

2 d,  It  forms  soluble  salts  with  barytes,  strontites, 
lime,  lead,  and  silver. 

3d,  The  hyposulphates  are  all  soluble. 

4 th,  They  yield  sulphurous  acid  when  their  solutions 
are  mixed  with  acids,  only  if  the  mixture  becomes  hot 
of  itself,  or  be  artificially  heated. 

5th,  They  disengage  a great  deal  of  sulphurous  acid 
at  a high  temperature,  and  are  converted  into  neutral 
sulphates.” 

HYPO'THENAR.  (From  viro,  under,  and  Bevap, 
the  palm  of  the  hand.)  1.  A muscle  which  runs  on 
the  inside  of  the  hand. 

2.  That  part  of  the  hand  which  is  opposite  to  the 
palm. 

HYPO  THESIS.  An  opinion,  or  a system  of  gene- 
ral rules,  founded  partly  on  fact  but  principally  on 
conjecture.  A theory  explains  every  fact,  and  every 
circumstance  connected  with  it ; an  hypothesis  ex- 
plains only  a certain  number,  leaving  some  unac- 
counted for,  and  others  in  opposition  to  it. 

HYPO'THETON.  (From  viro,  under,  and  ndypi, 
to  pul.)  A suppository,  or  medicine  introduced  into 
the  rectum,  to  procure  stools. 

Hypo'xylon.  (From  viro,  and  £uXov.  wood.  A spe- 
cies of  clavaria,  which  grows  under  old  wood. 

IIypozo'ma.  (From  viro  and  ^tovvv/n,  bind 
round.)  The  diaphrasrm. 

Hypsiglo'ssus.  (From  v^aXori^rs.  the  hyoid  bone, 
and  yXh)cr aa,  the  tongue.)  A muscle  named  from  its 
origin  in  the  os  hyoides,  and  its  insertion  in  the 
tongue. 

HYPSILOI'DES.  1.  The  Os  hyoides. 

2.  The  hyoglossus  muscle. 

Hyptxa'smos.  (From  v-rfiaQu),  to  lie  with  the  face 
upwards.)  A supine  decubiture,  or  a nausea,  with  in 
cli  nation  to  vomit. 

Hvpu'lits.  (From  viro,  under,  and  ovA  17,  a cicatrix,  j 
An  vilcer  under  a cicatrix. 

HYSSOP.  See  Hyssopus. 

Hyssop  hedge.  See  Gratiola. 

Hyssopites.  (From  vffouirof,  hyssop ) Wineim- 
pregnated  with  hyssop. 


HYS 


HYS 


HYSSO'PUS.  ('YffffcoTrof ; from'  Azoh , Hebrew.)  ] 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnrean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Gymnospermia. 
Hyssop. 

2.  The  pharmacopmial  name  of  the  common  hys- 
sop. See  Hyssopus  officinalis. 

Hyssopus  capitata.  Wild  thyme. 

■Hyssopus  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  cofhmon  hyssop.  Hyssopus — svicis  secundis,  fo- 
liis  lanceolatis  of  Linnaeus.  This  exotic  plant  is  es- 
teemed as  an  aromatic  and  stimulant,  but  is  chiefly 
employed  as  a pectoral,  and  has  long  been  thought  use- 
ful in  humoral  asthnms,  coughs,  and  catarrhal  affec- 
tions; for  this  purpose,  an  infusion  of  the  leaves, 
sweetened  with  honey,  or  sugar,  is  recommended  to 
be  drank  as  Ua. 

HY'STERA.  (From  v^epos,  behind : so  called  be- 
cause it  is  placed  behind  the  other  parts.)  The  womb. 
See  Uterus. 

HYSTERA'LGIA.  (From  tiycpa,  the  womb,  and 
aXyof,  pain.)  A pain  in  the  womb. 

HYSTE  RIA.  (From  vs-epa,  the  womb,  from  which 
the  disease  was  supposed  to  arise.)  Passio  hysterica. 
Hysterics.  Dr.  Cullen  places  this  disease  in  the  class 
Neuroses,  and  order  Spasmi.  There  are  four  species : 

1.  Hysteria  chlorotica , from  a retention  of  the 
menses. 

2.  Hysteria  ri  leucorrhcea , from  a fluor  albus. 

3.  Hysteria  d menorrhagia , from  an  immoderate 
flow  of  the  menses. 

4.  Hysteria  libidinosa,  from  sensual  desires. 

The  complaint  appears  under  such  various  shapes, 
imitates  so  many  other  diseases,  and  is  attended  with 
such  a variety  of  symptoms,  which  denote  the  animal 
and  vital  functions  to  be  considerably  disordered,  that 
it  is  difficult  to  give  a just  character  or  definition  of  it ; 
and  it  is  only  by  taking  an  assemblage  of  all  its  appear- 
ances, that  we  can  convey  a proper  idea  of  it  to  others. 
The  disease  attacks  in  paroxysms,  or  fits.  These  are 
sometimes  preceded  by  dejection  of  spirits,  anxiety  of 
mind,  effusion  of  tears,  difficulty  of  breathing,  sickness 
at  the  stomach,  and  palpitations  at  the  heart ; but  it 
more  usually  happens,  that  a pain  is  felt  on  the  left 
side,  about  the  flexure  of  the  colon,  with  a sense  of 
distention  advancing  upwards,  till  it  gets  into  the  sto- 
mach, and  removing  from  thence  into  the  throat,  it  oc- 
casions, by  its  pressure,  a sensation  as  if  a ball  was 
lodged  there,  which  by  authors  has  been  called  globus 
hystericus.  The  disease  having  arrived  at  this  height, 
the  patient  appears  to  be  threatened  with  suffocation, 
becomes  faint,  and  is  affected  with  stupor  and  insen- 
sibility ; while,  at  the  same  time,  the  trunk  of  the  body 
is  turned  to  and  fro,  the  limbs  are  variously  agitated ; 
wild  and  irregular  actions  take  place  ia  alternate  fits 
of  laughter,  crying,  and  screaming : incoherent  ex- 
pressions are  uttered,  a temporary  delirium  prevails, 
and  a frothy  saliva  is  discharged  from  the  mouth.  The 
spasms  at  length  abating,  a quantity  of  wiud  is  evacu- 
ated upwards,  with  frequertt  sighing  and  sobbing,  and 
the  woman  recovers  the  exercise  of  sense  and  motion 
without  any  recolledtion  of  what  has  taken  place  dur- 
ing the  fit ; feeling,  however,  a severe  pain  in  her 
head,  and  a soreness  over  her  whole  body.  In  some 
cases,  there  is  little  or  no  convulsive  motion,  and  the 
person  lies  seemingly  in  a state  of  profound  sleep,  with- 
out either  sense  or  motion.  Hiccup  is  asymptorn  which 
likewise  attends,  in  some  instances,  on  hysteria  ; and 
now  and  then  il  happens,  that  a fit  of  hysteria  consists 
of  this  alone.  In  some  cases,  of  this  nature,  it  has  been 
known  to  continue  for  two  or  three  days,  during  which 
it  frequently  seems  as  if  it  would  suffocate  the  patient, 
and  proceeds,  gradually  weakening  her,  till  it  either 
goes  off  or  else  occasions  death  by  suffocation : bui 
this  last  is  extremely  rare.  Besides  hiccup,  other 
slight  spasmodic  affections  sometimes  wholly  form  a 
fit  of  hysteria,  which  perhaps  continue  for  a day  or 
two,  and  then  either  go  oft"  of  themselves,  or  are  re- 
moved by  the  aid  of  medicine.  In  some  cases  the  pa- 
tient is  attacked  with  violent  pain  in  the  back,  which 
extend  from  the  spine  to  the  sternum,  and  at  length 
become  fixed  upon  the  region  of  the  stomach,  being 
evidently  of  a spasmodic  nature,  and  often  prevailing 
in  so  high  a degree  as  to  cause  clammy  sweats,  a pale 
cadaverous  look,  coldness  of  the  extremities,  and  a 
pulse  hardly  perceptible. 

Hysteric  affections  occur  more  frequently  in  a single 
state  of  life  than  in  the  married  ; and  usually  between 


the  age  of  puberty  and  that  of  thirty-five  years ; and 
they  make  their  attack  oftener  about  the  period  of 
menstruation  than  at  any  other. 

They  are  readily  excited  in  those  who  are  subject  to 
them,  by  passions  of  the  mind,  and  by  every  consider- 
able emotion,  especially  when  brought  on  by  surprise; 
hence,  sudden  joy,  grief,  fear,  &c.  are  very  apt  to  occa- 
sion them.  They  have  also  been  known  to  arise  from 
imitation  and  sympathy. 

Women  of  a delicate  habit,  and  whose  nervous  sys- 
tem is  extremely  sensible,  are  those  who  are  most  sub- 
ject to  hysteric  affections ; and  the  habit  which  predis- 
poses to  their  attacks,  is  acquired  by  inactivity  and  a 
sedentary  life,  grief,  anxiety  of  mind,  a suppression  or 
obstruction  of  the  menstrual  flux,  excessive  evacua- 
tions, and  a constant  use  of  a low  diet,  or  of  crude  un- 
wholesome food. 

Hysteria  differs  from  hypochondriasis  in  the  follow- 
ing particulars,  and,  by  paying  attention  to  them,  may 
always  readily  be  distinguished  from  it : — Hysteria  at- 
tacks the  sanguine  and  plethoric ; comes  on  soon  after 
the  age  of  puberty;  makes  its  onset  suddenly  and  vi- 
olently, so  as  to  deprive  the  patient  of  all  sense  and 
voluntary  motion  : is  accompanied  with  the  sensation 
of  a ball  rising  upwards  in  the  throat,  so  as  to  threaten 
suffocation  ; is  attended  usually  with  much  spasmodic 
affection  ; is  more  apt  to  terminate  in  epilepsy  than  in 
any  other  disease ; and,  on  dissection,  its  morbid  ap- 
pearances are  confined  principally  to  the  uterus  and 
ovaria. 

The  reverse  happens  in  hypochondriasis.  It  attacks 
the  melancholic ; seldom  occurs  till  after  the  age  of 
thirty  five;  comes  on  gradually;  is  a tedious  disease, 
and  difficult  to  cure  ; exerts  its  pernicious  effects  on  the 
membraneous  canal  of  the  intestines,  as  well  by  spasms 
as  wind;  is  more  apt  to  terminate  in  melancholy,  or  a 
low  fever,  than  in  any  other  disease ; and,  on  dissec- 
tion, exhibits  its  morbid  effects  principally  on  the  liver, 
spleen,  and  pancreas,  which  are  often  found  in  a dis- 
eased state. 

Another  very  material  difference  might  be  pointed 
out  between  these  two  diseases,  which  is,  that  hysteria 
is  much  relieved  by  advancing  in  age,  whereas  hypo- 
chondriasis usually  becomes  aggravated. 

The  two  diseases  have  often  been  confounded  to- 
gether; but,  from  considering  the  foregoing  circum- 
stances, it  appears  that  a proper  line  of  distinction 
should  be  drawn  between  them. 

The  hysteric  passion  likewise  differs  from  a syncope, 
as  in  this  there  is  an  entire  cessation  of  the  pulse,  a con 
traded  face,  and  a ghastly  countenance ; whereas,  in 
the  uterine  disorder,  there  is  often  something  of  a co- 
lour, and  the  face  is  more  expanded  ; there  is  likewise 
a pulse,  though  languid;  and  this  state  may  continue 
some  days,  which  never  happens  in  a syncope. 

It  also  differs  from  apoplexy,  in  which  the  abolition 
of  sense  and  voluntary  motion  is  attended  with  a sort 
of  snoring,  great  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  a quick 
pulse ; which  do  not  take  place  in  hysteria. 

It  differs  from  epilepsy,  in  that  this  is  supposed  to 
arise  in  consequence  of  a distention  of  the  vessels  of 
the  brain:  whereas,  in  hysteria,  the  spasmodic  and 
convulsive  motions  arise  from  a turgesceuce  of  blood 
in  the  uterus,  or  in  other  parts  of  the  genital  system. 

However  dreadful  and  alarming  any  hysteric  fit  may 
appear,  still  it  is  seldom  accompanied  with  danger,  and 
the  disease  never  terminates  fatally,  unless  it  changes 
into  epilepsy,  or  that  the  patient  is  in  a very  weak  re- 
duced state. 

The  indications  in  this  disease  are,  I.  To  lessen  the 
| violence  of  the  fits.  2.  To  prevent  their  return  by  ob- 
| viating  trie  several  causes.  Where  the  attack  is  slight, 
l it  may  be  as  well  to  leave  it  in  a great  measure  to 
j have  its  course.  But  where  the  paroxysm  is  severe, 
and  the  disease  of  no  long  standing,  occurring  in  a 
young  plethoric  female,  as  is  most  frequent,  and  espe- 
cially from  suppression  of  the  menses,  a liberal  ab- 
straction of  blood  should  be  made,  and  will  often  afford 
speedy  relief.  If  this  step  do  not  appear  advisable,  and 
the  disorder  be  rather  connected  with  the  state  of  the 
prim®  vise,  an  emetic  may  check  its  progress,  if  the 
patient  can  be  got  to  swallow  during  a remission  of  the 
convulsions.  At  other  times  the  application  of  cold 
water  to  the  skin  more  or  less  extensively ; strong  and 
disagreeable  odours,  as  hartshorn,  burnt  feathers,  &c. ; 
rubbing  the  temples  with  tether;  antispasinodies,  par- 
ticularly opium,  by  the  mouth  or  in  glyster : the  pedi- 

445 


HYS 


HYS 


luvium,  &c.  may  be  resorted  to  according  to  the  state 
of  the  patient.  During  the  intervals,  we  must  endea- 
vour to  remove  any  observable  predisposition ; in  the 
plethoric,  by  a spare  diet,  exercise,  and  occasional  pur- 
gatives ; in  those  who  are  weakly,  and  rather  deficient 
in  blood,  by  proper  nourishment,  with  chalybeates,  or 
other  tonic  medicines.  The  state  of  the  uterine  func- 
tion must  be  particularly  attended  to,  as  well  as  that 
of  the  primte  vite ; those  cathartics  are  to  be  preferred 
which  are  not  apt  to  occasion  flatulence,  nor  particu- 
larly irritate  the  rectum,  unless  where  the  menses  are 
interrupted,  when  the  aloetic  preparations  may  claim 
a preference ; and  the  perspiration  should  be  main- 
tained by  warm  clothing,  particularly  to  the  feet,  with 
the  prudent  use  of  the  cold  bath.  The  mind  ought  also 
to  be  occupied  by  agreeable  and  useful  pursuits,  and 
regular  hours  will  tend  materially  to  the  restoration  of 
the  general  health. 

Hysteria'lges.  (From  vj-epa,  the  womb,  and  aX- 
yos,  pain.)  1.  An  epithet  for  any  thing  that  excites 
pain  in  the  uterus. 

2.  Hippocrates  applies  this  word  to  vinegar. 

3.  The  pains  which  resemble  labour- pains,  generally 
called  false  pains. 

HYSTERI'TIS.  (From  vs’cpa,  the  womb.)  Me- 
tritis. Inflammation  of  the  womb.  A genus  of  disease 
in  the  class  Pyrexia,  and  order  Phlegmasia , of  Cullen ; 
characterised  by  fever,  heat,  tension,  tumour,  and 
pain  in  the  region  of  the  womb ; pain  in  the  os  uteri, 
when  touched,  and  vomiting. 

In  natural  labours,  as  well  as  those  of  a laborious 
sort,  manv  causes  of  injuiy  to  the  uterus,  and  the  peri- 
tonaeum which  covers  it,  will  be  applied.  The  long 
continued  action  of  the  uterus  on  the  body  of  the 
child,  and  the  great  pressure  made  by  its  head  on  the 
soft  parts,  will  further  add  to  the  chance  of  injury. 
Besides  these,  an  improper  application  of  instruments, 
or  an  officiousness  of  the  midwife  in  hurrying  the 
labour,  may  have  contributed  to  the  violence.  To 
these  causes  may  be  added  exposure  to  cold,  by  taking 
the  woman  too  early  out  of  bed  after  delivery,  and 
thereby  throwing  the  circulating  fluids  upon  the  inter- 
nal parts,  putting  a stop  to  the  secretion  of  milk,  or 
occasioning  a suppression  of  the  lochia. 

An  inflammation  of  the  womb  is  sometimes  per- 
fectly distinct,  but  is  more  frequently  communicated  to 
the  peritonaeum,  Fallopian  tubes,  and  ovaria;  and 
having  once  begun,  the  natural  functions  of  the  organ 
become  much  disturbed,  which  greatly  adds  to  the 
disease.  It  is  oftener  met  with  in  women  of  a robust 
and  plethoric  habit  than  in  those  of  lax  fibres  and  a de- 
licate constitution,  particularly  where  they  have  in- 
dulged freely  in  food  of  a heating  nature,  and  in  the 
use  of  spirituous  liquors.  It  never  prevails  as  an  epi- 
demic, like  puerperal  fever,  for  which  it  has  probably 
often  been  mistaken  ; and  to  this  we  may,  with  some 
reason,  ascribe  the  difference  in  the  mode  of  treatment 
which  has  taken  place  among  physicians. 

An  inflammation  of  the  uterus  shows  itself  usually 
about  the  second  or  third  day  after  delivery,  with  a 
painful  sensation  at  the  bottom  of  the  belly,  which 
gradually  increases  in  violence,  without  any  kind  of 
intermission.  On  examining  externally,  the  uterus 
appears  much  increased  in  size,  is  hard  to  the  feel,  and 
on  making  a pressure  upon  it,  the  patient  experiences 
great  soreness  and  pain.  Soon  afterward  there  ensues 
an  increase  in  heat  over  the  whole  of  the  body,  with 
pains  in  the  head  and  back,  extending  into  the  groins, 
rigors,  considerable  thirst,  nausea,  and  vomiting.  The 
tongue  is  white  and  dry,  the  secretion  of  milk  is  usually 
much  interrupted,  the  lochia  are  greatly  diminished, 
the  urine  is  high-coloured  and  scanty;  the  body  is  cos- 
tive, and  the  pulse  hard,  full,  and  frequent 


These  are  the  symptoms  which  usually  present  them- 
selves when  the  inflammation  does  not  run  very  high, 
and  is  perfectly  distinct;  but  when  it  is  so  extensive 
as  to  affect  the  peritonaeum,  those  of  irritation  succeed, 
and  soon  destroy  the  patient. 

Uterine  inflammation  is  always  attended  with  much 
danger,  particularly  where  the  symptoms  run  high, 
and  the  proper  means  for  removing  them  have  not  been 
timely  adopted.  In  such  cases,  it  may  terminate  iu 
suppuration,  scirrhus,  or  gangrene. 

Frequent  rigors,  succeeded  by  flushings  of  the  face, 
quickness  and  weakness  of  the  pulse,  great  depression 
of  strength,  delirium,  and  the  sudden  cessation  of  pain 
and  soreness  in  the  region,  of  the  abdomen,  denote  a 
fatal  termination.  On  the  contrary,  the  ensuing  of  a 
gentle  diarrhoea,  the  lochial  discharge  returning  in  due 
quantity  and  quality,  the  secretion  of  milk  recom- 
mencing, and  the  uterus  becoming  gradually  softer 
and  less  tender  to  the  touch,  with  an  abatement  of 
heat  and  thirst,  prognosticate  a favourable  issue. 

When  shiverings  attack  the  patient,  after  several 
days’  continuance  of  the  symptoms,  but  little  relief 
can  be  afforded  by  medicine,  the  event  being  generally 
fatal.  In  this  case,  the  woman  emaciates  and  loses  her 
strength,  becomes  hectic,  and  sinks  under  colliquative 
sweating,  or  purging. 

Upon  opening  the  bodies  of  women  who  have  died 
of  this  disease,  and  where  it  existed  in  a simple  state, 
little  or  no  extravasated  fluid  is  usually  to  be  met  with 
in  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  In  some  instances,  the 
peritoneal  surfaces  have  been  discovered  free  from  the 
disease;  while  in  others,  that  pprtion  which  covers 
the  uterus  and  posterior  part  of  the  bladder,  has  been 
found  partially  inflamed.  The  inflammation  has  been 
observed,  in  some  cases,  to  extend  to  the  ovaria  and 
Fallopian  tubes,  which,  when  cut  open,  are  often 
loaded  with  blood.  The  uterus  itself  usually  ap- 
pears of  a firm  substance,  but  is  larger  than  in  its 
natural  state,  and.  when  cut  into,  a quantity  of  pus 
is  often  found.  Gangrene  is  seldom,  if  ever,  to  be 
met  with. 

H YSTEROCE'LE.  (From  v?cpa,  the  womb,  and 
KTjXrj,  a tumour.)  A hernia  of  the  womb.  This  is 
occasioned  by  violent  muscular  efforts,  by  blows  on  the 
abdomen  at  the  time  of  gestation,  and  also  by  wounds 
and  abscesses  of  the  abdomen  which  permit  the  uterua 
to  dilate  the  part,  Ruysch  relates  the  case  of  a woman, 
who,  becomingpregnant  after  an  ulcer  had  been  healed 
in  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen,  the  tumid  uterus 
descended  into  a dilated  sac  of  the  peritonaeum  in  that 
weakened  part,  till  it  hung,  with  the  included  foetus,  at 
her  knees.  Yet  when  her  full  time  was  come,  the- 
midwife  reduced  this  wonderful  hernia,  and,  in  a natu- 
ral way,  she  was  safely  delivered  of  a son. 

Hy'stkron.  (From  v^epos,  afterward;  so  named 
because  it  comes  immediately  after  the  foetus.)  The 
placenta. 

HYSTEROPHY'SA.  (From  v^tpa,  the  womb,  and 
< pvaa , flatus.)  A swelling,  or  distention  of  the  womb, 
from  a collection  of  air  in  its  cavity. 

HYSTEROTOMY.  (Hystcrotomia ; from  v^epa, 
the  womb,  and  rrpvw,  to  cut.)  See  Casarian  ope- 
ration. 

Hysterotomatocia.  See  Ccesarian  operation. 
HYSTEROPTO'SIS.  (From  v?epa,  the  womb,  and 
irunu),  to  /all.)  A bearing  down  of  the  womb. 

HYSTRICI'ASIS.  (From  v?pil,  a hedge  hog,  or 
porcupine.)  A disease  of  the  hairs,  in  which  they 
stand  erect,  like  porcupine  quills.  An  account  of  this 
rare  disease  is  to  be  seen  in  the  Philosophical  Trans- 
actions, No.  424. 

Hy'stricis  lapis.  See  Bezoar  hyslricis. 
IIYSTRI'TIS  See  Hysteritis. 


1 


ICH 

IATRALEI'PTES.  (From  tarpos,  a physician,  and 
aXei<f>u >,  to  anoint.)  One  who  undertakes  to  cure 
distempers  by  external  unction  and  friction : Galen 
makes  mention  of  such  in  his  time,  particularly  one 
Diotas;  and  Pliny  informs  us,  that  this  practice  was 
first  introduced  by  Prodicus  of  Selymbria,  who  was  a 
disciple  of  iEsculapius. 

IATROCHY'MICLS.  (From  tarpos , a physician, 
and  x^pta,  chemistry.)  Chymiater.  A chemical  phy- 
sician, who  cures  by  means  of  chemical  medicines. 

IATROLI'PTICE.  (.From  tarpos , a physician,  and 
aXetip or,  to  anoint.)  The  method  of  curing  diseases  by 
unction  and  friction. 

IATRQPHY'SICUS.  (From  tarpos,  physician,  and 
tyvots,  nature.)  An  epithet  bestowed  on  some  writ- 
ings which  treat  of  physical  subjects  with  relation  to 
medicine. 

IBE'RIS.  (So  named  from  Iberia,  the  place  of  its 
natural  growth.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaran  system.  Class,  Tetradynamia ; Order, 
Siliculosa. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  Sciatica  cresses. 
See  Lepidium  iberis. 

Ibira'ce.  See  Guaiacum. 

I'BIS.  IjSr s-  A bird  much  like  our  kingfisher, 
taken  notice  of  by  the  Egyptians,  because,  when  it  was 
sick,  it  used  to  inject  with  its  long  bill  the  water  of  the 
Nile  into  its  fundament,  whence  Langius,  lib.  ii.  ep.  ii. 
says  they  learned  the  use  of  clysters. 

IBI'SCUS.  (From  the  stork,  who  was  said 
to  chew  it  and  inject  it  as  a clyster.)  Marshmallow. 

Ibi'xuma.  (From  iSiokos,  the  mallow,  and  t\os , 
glue:  so  named  from  its  having  a glutinous  leaf,  like 
the  mallow'.)  Saponaria  arbor.  The  soap  tree,  pro- 
bably the  Sapindus  saponaria  of  Lirmteus. 

ICE.  Glades.  Water  made  solid  by  the  applica- 
tion of  cold.  It  .is  frequently  applied  by  surgeons  to 
resolve  external  inflammatory  diseases,  to  stop  ha:mor- 
rhages,  and  constringe  relaxed  parts. 

Iceland  spar.  A calcareous  spar. 

I CHOR.  (Ixwp-)  A thin,  aqueous,  and  acrid  dis- 
charge. 

I'CTH  Y A.  ( JxOva , a fish-hook ; from  txOvs , a fish.) 
1.  The  skin  of  the  Squatina,  or  monkfish. 

2,  The  name  of  an  instrument  like  a fish-hook,  for 
extracting  the  foetus. 

ICHTHYASIS.  See  Ichthyosis. 
ICIITHYOCO'LLA.  (From  tX9vs,  a fish,  and 
icoXXa,  glue.)  Coll  a piscium.  Isinglass.  Fish  glue. 

This  substance  is  almost  wholly  gelatin ; 100  grains  of 
good  dry  isinglass  containing  rather  more  than  98  of 
matter  soluble  in  water. 

Isinglass  is  made  from  certain  fish  found  in  the 
Danube,  and  the  rivers  of  Muscovy.  Willoughby  and 
others  inform  us,  that  it  is  made  of  the  sound  of  the 
Beluga;  and  Neumann,  that  it  is  made  of  the  Huso 
Germanorum,  and  other  fish,  which  he  has  frequently 
seen  sold  in  the  public  markets  of  Vienna.  Jackson 
remarks,  that  the  sounds  of  cod,  properly  prepared, 
afford  this  substance;  and  that  the  lakes  of  America 
abound  with  fish  from  which  the  very  finest  sort  may 
be  obtained. 

Isinglass  receives  its  different  shapes  in  the  follow- 
ing manner:  the  parts  of  which  it  is  composed,  parti- 
cularly the  sounds,  are  taken  from  the  fish  while  sweet 
and  fresh,  slit  open,  washed  from  their  slimy  sordes , 
divested  of  a very  thin  membrane  which  envelopes 
the  sound,  and  then  exposed  to  stiffen  a little  in  the 
air.  In  this  state,  they  are  formed  into  rolls  about  the 
thickness  of  a finger,  and  in  length  according  to  the 
intended  size  of  the  staple:  a thin  membrane  is  gene- 
rally selected  for  the  centre  of  the  roll,  round  which 
the  rest  are  folded  alternately,  and  about  half  an  inch 
of  each  extremity  of  the  roll  is  turned  inwards. 

Isinglass  is  best  made  in  the  summer,  as  frost  gives  it 
a disagreeable  colour,  deprives  it  of  weight,  and  im- 
pairs its  gelatinous  principles. 

Isinglass  boiled  in  milk  forms  a mild  nutritious  jelly, 
and  is  thus  sometimes  employed  medicinally.  This, 
when  flavoured  by  the  art  of  the  cook,  is  the  blanc- 


ICH 

manger  of  our  tables  A solution  of  isinglass  in  water, 
with  a very  small  proportion  of  some  balsam,  spread 
on  black  silk,  is  the  court-plaster  of  the  shops. 

[That  variety  of  the  codfish  called  the  Hake,  and 
known  to  naturalists  as  the  Gadus  Merluccius , has  a 
very  large  sound  or  swimming  bladder,  which  affords 
ichthyocolla  in  abundance.  In  1824,  a quantity  was 
presented  to  the  New-York  Lyceum  of  Natural  His- 
tory for  their  inspection,  and  a committee  of  that 
learned  body  made  the  following  report  on  the  sub- 
ject : 

“ The  Isinglass,  or  Ichthyocolla,  made  by  Mr.  Wil- 
liam Hall,  at  the  Isle  of  Shoals,  which  was  presented 
by  him,  for  examination,  at  the  last  sitting  of  the  Ly 
ceum,  has  been  submitted  to  several  experiments  by  the 
committee..  It  proved  more  pure  Ilian  the  Russian 
isinglass,  with  which  it  was  compared,  possesses 
greater  solubility,  and  exhibits  more  tenacity  ; and  its 
solution  resists  longer  the  process  of  putrefaction ; but 
it  retains  to  a peculiar  degree  the  unpleasant  flavour 
peculiar  to  fish. 

The  result  of  the  experiment  induces  the  committee 
to  recommend  the  article  as  a valuable  acquisition  to 
our  domestic  manufactures.  It  is  found  excellent  in 
clarifying  liquors,  and  merits  the  particular  attention 
of  brewers  ; it  is  valuable  in  preparing  leather,  render- 
ing it  soft  and  pliable,  and  deserves  to  be  employed  in 
cotton  manufactories  for  glazing,  and  starching  gene- 
rally. In  its  present  state,  however,  it  would  not  be 
agreeable  as  an  article  in  the  preparation  of  food  ; it 
might  be,  if  deprived  of  the  fishy  smell. 

The  form  of  the  ichthyocolla  from  the  Isle  of 
Shoals,  is  far  preferable  to  that  of  foreign  manufac- 
ture. The  peculiar  shape  of  the  isinglass  from  the 
Muscovy  rivers  Was  probably  adopted  to  conceal  and 
disguise  the  real  substance,  and  to  preserve  the  mono- 
poly ; but  now,  as  the  subterfuge  is  no  longer  neces- 
sary, it  is  acknowledged  to  answer  every  purpose  more 
effectually  in  its  native  state.  In  the  rolled  or  curled 
form,  it  is  more  apt  to  retain  oily  particles  and  exuvia 
of  insects  between  the  membranes,  that  frequently  con- 
taminate the  liquor  for  whose  clarification  it  is  em- 
ployed. The  sounds  of  the  Cod  (gadus  morhua)  and 
Ling  (gadus  molva)  have  long  been  used  by  Newfound- 
land and  Iceland  fishermen,  and  bear  a strong  re- 
semblance to  those  of  the  genus  Accipenser;  the  Huso 
(or  Beluga)  which  family  has  always  supplied  Muscovy 
(to  which  country  we  are  originally  indebted  for  it) 
with  this  article  of  commerce.  Mr.  Hall,  alone,  as  far 
as  we  know,  employs  the  Hake  (gadus  merluccius) 
and  he  offers  his  isinglass  at  $4,000  a ton,  nearly  one 
quarter  less  than  we  pay  for  the  foreign,  of  which  100 
tons  are  every  year  imported.  If  the  manufacture 
succeeds,  of  which  ( with  capital  and  zeal)  we  little 
doubt,  it  will  save  yearly  from  80  to  $100,000  to  our 
citizens ; at  the  same  time  itfcpeiialto  them  a field  of  en- 
terprise which  will  yield  annuallyTrom  4 to  $5,000,  and 
which  must  increase  with  tlie  growth  of  our  country. 

In  concluding,  we  may  remark,  that  Mr.  Hall  em- 
ploys the  mode  described  in  the  G3d  volume  of  the 
Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London,  but 
without  previously  salting  the  sounds. 

J.  VAN  RENSSELAER. 

J.  E.  DE  KAY. 

SAMUEL  AKERLY. 

Mr.  Hall  observes  that  the  unpleasant  smell  of 
the  isinglass  can  be  entirely  extracted  by  three  weeks’ 
exposure  to  the  night-air,  after  finished.”— From  the 
Statesman , Jan.  9th,  1824.] 

ICHTHYOPHTHAL'MITE.  Fish  eyestone.  See 
Apophyllite. 

ICHTHYO'SIS.  (From  txGva,  the  scale  of  a fish; 
from  the  resemblance  of  the  scales  to  those  of  a fish.) 
Ichthyasis.  A genus  of  diseases  of  the  second  order 
of  Dr.  Willan’s  disease  of  the  skin.  The  character- 
istic of  ichthyosis  is  a permanently  harsh,  dry,  scaly, 
and  in  some  cases,  almost  horny  texture  of  the  integu- 
ments of  the  body,  unconnected  with  internal  disorder. 
Psoriasis  and  Lepra  differ  from  this  affection,  in  being 
but  partially  diffused,  and  in  having  deciduous  scales. 

447 


ICT 


ICT 


The  arrangement  and  distribution  of  the  scales  in  ich- 
thyosis are  peculiar.  Above  and  below  the  olecranon 
on  the  arm,  says  Dr.  Willan,  and  in  a similar  situation 
with  respect  to  the  patella  on  the  thigh  and  leg,  they 
are  small,  rounded,  prominent,  or  papillary,  and  of  a 
black  colour;  some  of  the  scaly  papilla  have  a short, 
narrow  neck,  and  broad  irregular  tops.  On  some  part 
of  the  extremities,  and  on  the  trunk  of  the  body,  the 
scales  are  fiat  and  large,  often  placed  like  tiling,  or  in 
the  same  order  as  scales  on  the  back  of  a fish  ; but,  in 
a few  cases,  they  have  appeared  separate,  Being  inter- 
sected by  whitish  furrows.  There  is  usually  in  this 
complaint  a dryness  and  roughness  of  the  soles  of  the 
feet ; sometimes  a thickened  and  brittle  state  of  fhe 
skin  in  the  palms  of  the  hands,  with  large  painful 
fissures,  and  on  the  face  an  appearance  of  the  scurf 
rather  than  of  scales.  The  inner  part  of  the  wrist, 
the  hams,  the  inside  of  the  elbow,  the  furrow  along 
the  spine,  the  inner  and  upper  part  of  the  thigh,  are 
perhaps  the  only  portions  of  the  skin  always  exempt 
from  the  scaliness.  Patients  affected  with  ichthyosis 
are  occasionally  much  harassed  with  inflamed  pus- 
tules, or  with  large  painful  biles  on  different  parts  of 
the  body ; it  is  also  remarkable,  that  they  never  seem 
to  have  the  least  perspiration  or  moisture  of  the  skin. 
This  disease  did  not,  in  any  case,  appear  to  Dr.  Willan 
to  have  been  transmitted  hereditarily;  nor  was  more 
than  one  child  from  the  same  parents  affected  with  it. 
Dr.  Willan  never  met  with  an  instance  of  the  horny 
rigidity  of  the  integuments,  Ichthyosis  cornea,  im- 
peding the  motion  of  the  muscles  or  joints.  It  is,  how- 
ever, mentioned  by  authors  as  affecting  the  lips,  pre- 
puce, toes,  fingers,  &x.  and  sometimes  as  extending 
over  nearly  the  whole  body. 

ICOSA'NDRIA.  (From  ckooi , twenty,  and  avtjp, 
a man,  or  husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants 
in  the  sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  consisting  of  those 
which  have  hermaphrodite  flowers  furnished  with 
twenty  or  more  stamina  that  are  inserted  into  the  inner 
side  of  the  calyx,  or  petals,  or  both.  By  this  last  cir- 
cumstance is  this  class  distinguished  from  Polyandria. 

ICTERI'TIA.  (From  icterus,  the  jaundice.)  1. 
An  eruption  of  yellowish  spots. 

2.  A yellow  discoloration  of  the  skin. 

I'CTERUS.  (Named  from  its  likeness  to  the  plu- 
mage of  the  golden  thrush,  of  which  Pliny  relates,  that 
if  a jaundiced  person  looks  on  one,  the  bird  dies,  and 
the  patient  recovers.)  Morbus  arcuatus,  or  arguatus ; 
Aurigo ; Morbus  regius  ; Morbus  leseoli.  The  jaun- 
dice. A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Cachexies,  and 
order  Impetigines , of  Cullen ; characterized  by  yel- 
lowness of  the  skin  and  eyes ; faices  white,  and  urine 
of  a high  colour.  There  are  six  species : — 

1.  Icterus  calculosus,  acute  pain  in  the  epigastric 
region,  increasing  after  eating : gall-stones  pass  by 
stool. 

2.  Icterus  spasmodicus,  without  pain,  after  spasmo- 
dic diseases  and  passions  of  the  mind. 

3.  Icterus  mucosus,  without  either  pain,  gall-stones, 
or  spasm,  and  relieved  by  the  discharge  of  tough 
phlegm  by  stool. 

4.  Icterus  hepaticus,  from  an  induration  in  the  liver. 

5.  Icterus  gravi^runtjGom  pregnancy,  and  disap- 
pearing after  delivem 

6.  Icterus  infanmm , of  infants. 

It  takes  place  most  usually  in  consequence  of  an  in-  i 
terrupted  excretion  of  bile,  from  an  obstruction  in  the 
ductus  communis  choledochus,  which  occasions  its  ab- 
sorption into  the  blood-vessels.  In  some  cases  it  may, 
however,  be  owing  to  a redundant  secretion  of  the 
bile.  The  causes  producing  the  first  species  are,  the 
presence  of  biliary  calculi  in  the  gall-bladder  and  its 
ducts ; spasmodic  constriction  of  the  ducts  themselves ; 
and,  lastly,  the  pressure  made  by  tumours  in  adjacent 
parts;  hence  jaundice  is  often  an  attendant  symptom 
on  a scirrhosity  of  the  liver,  pancreas,  &c.,  and  on  | 
pregnancy. 

Chronic  bilious  affections  are  frequently  brought  on 
by  drinking  freely,  but  more  particularly  by  spirituous 
liquors : hence  they  are  often  to  be  observed  in  the 
debauchee  and  the  drinker  of  drams.  They  are  like- 
wise frequently  met  with  in  those  who  lead  a seden- 
tary life ; and  who  indulge  much  in  anxious  thoughts. 

A slight  degree  of  jaundice  often  proceeds  from  the 
redundant  secretion  of  bile;  and  a bilious  habit  is 
therefore  constitutional  to  some  people,  particularly  to 
those  who  reside  long  in  a warm  climate. 

448 


By  attending  to  the  various  circumstances  and  symp- 
toms which  present  themselves,  we  shall  in  general  be 
able  to  ascertain,  with  much  certainty,  the  real  nature 
of  the  cause  which  has  given  rise  to  the  disease. 

We  may  be  assured  by  the  long  continuance  of  the 
complaint,  and  by  feeling  the  liver  and  other  parts  ex- 
ternally, whether  or  not  it  arises  from  disease  of  the 
liver,  pancreas,  or  adjacent  parts. 

Where  passions  of  the  mind  induce  the  disease, 
without  any  hardness  or  enlargement  of  the  liver,  or 
adjacent  parts,  and  without  any  appearance  of  calculi 
in  the  faeces,  or  on  dissection  after  death,  we  are  na- 
turally induced  to  conclude  that  the  disorder  was 
owing  to  a spasmodic  affection  of  the  biliary  ducts. 

Where  gall-stones  are  lodged  in  the  ducts,  acute 
lancinating  pains  will  be  felt  in  the  region  of  the  parts, 
which  will  cease  for  a time,  and  then  return  again ; 
great  irritation  at  the  stomach  and  frequent  vomiting 
will  attend,  and  the  patient  will  experience  an  aggra- 
vation of  the  pain  after  eating.  Such  calculi  are  of 
various  sizes,  from  a pea  to  that  of  a walnut;  and,  in 
some  cases,  are  voided  in  a considerable  number,  being, 
like  the  gall,  of  a yellowish,  brownish,  or  green  colour. 

The  jaundice  comes  on  with  languor,  inactivity, 
loathing  of  food,  flatulence,  acidities  in  the  stomach 
and  bowels,  and  costiveness.  As  it  advances  in  its 
progress,  the  skin  and  eyes  become  tinged  of  a deep 
yellow  ; there  is  a bitter  taste  in  the  mouth,  with  fre- 
quent nausea  and  vomiting ; the  urine  is  very  high- 
coloured  ; the  stools  are  of  a gray  or  clayey  appearance, 
and  a dull  obtuse  pain  is  felt  in  the  right  hypochon- 
drium,  which  is  much  increased  by  pressure.  Where 
the  pain  is  very  acute,  the  pulse  is  apt  to  become  hard 
and  full,  and  other  febrile  symptoms  to  attend. 

The  disease,  when  of  long  continuance,  and  pro- 
ceeding from  a chronic  affection  of  the  liver,  or  other 
neighbouring  viscera,  is  often  attended  with  anasar- 
cous  swellings,  and  sometimes  with  ascites : also  scor- 
butic symptoms  frequently  supervene. 

Where  jaundice  is  recent,  and  is  occasioned  by  con- 
cretions obstructing  the  biliary  dupts,  it  is  probable 
that,  by  using  proper  means,  we  may  be  able  to  effect 
a cure ; but  where  it  is  brought  on  by  tumours  of  the 
neighbouring  parts,  or  has  arisen  in  consequence  of 
other  diseases  attended  with  symptoms  of  obstructed 
viscera,  our  endeavours  will  most  likely  not  be 
crowned  with  success.  Arising  during  a state  of  preg- 
nancy, it  is  of  little  consequence,  as  it  will  cease  on 
parturition. 

On  opening  the  bodies  of  those  who  die  of  jaundice, 
the  yellow  tinge  appears  to  pervade  even  the  most  in- 
terior part  of  the  body ; it  is  diffused  throughout  the 
whole  of  the  cellular  membrane,  in  the  cartilages  and 
bones,  and  even  the  substance  of  the  brain  is  coloured 
with  it.  A diseased  state  of  the  liver,  gall-bladder,  or 
adjacent  viscera,  is  usually  to  be  met  with. 

The  Icterus  infantum,  or  yellow  gum,  is  a species 
of  jaundice  which  affects  children,  at  or  soon  after 
their  birth,  and  which  usually  continues  for  some 
days.  It  has  generally  been  supposed  to  arise  from  the 
meconium,  impacted  in  the  intestines,  preventing  the 
flow  of  bile  into  them.  The  effects  p;  oduced  by  it  are 
languor,  indolence,  a yellow  tinge  of  the  skin,  and  a 
tendency  to  sleep,  which  is  sometimes  fatal,  where  the 
child  is  prevented  from  sucking. 

The  indications  in  this  disease  are,  1.  To  palliate 
urgent  symptoms.  2.  To  remove  the  cause  of  obstruc- 
tion to  the  passage  of  the  bile  into  the  duodenum:  this 
is  the  essential  part  of  the  treatment ; but  the  means 
will  vary  according  to  circumstances.  When  there 
are  appearances  of  inflammation,  of  which  perhaps 
the  jaundice  is  symptomatic,  or  both  produced  by  a 
gall-stone,  the  means  explained  under  the  head  of  he- 
patitis will  be  proper.  If  there  be  severe  spasmodic 
pain,  as  is  usual  when  a gall-stone  is  passing,  the  libe- 
| ral  use  of  opium ‘and  the  warm  bath  will  probably  re- 
lieve it.  After  which,  in  all  instances,  where  there  is 
reason  for  supposing  an  obstructing  cause  within  the 
duct,  a nauseating  emetic,  or  brisk  cathartic,  would  be 
the  most  likely  to  force  it  onward:  emetics,  however, 
are  hardly  advisable,  except  in  recent  cases  without 
inflammation ; and  calomel,  seeming  to  promote  the 
discharge  of  bile  more  than  other  cathartics,  may  be 
given  in  a large  dose  with  or  after  the  opium.  Several 
remedies  have  been  recommended,  on  the  idea  that 
they  may  dissolve  gall-stones;  which,  however,  is 
hardly  probable,  unless  they  should  have  advanced  to 


IGA 


IDE 

the  end  of  the  common  duct : the  fixed  alkalies,  ether 
with  oil  of  turpentine,  raw  eggs,  &c.  come  under  this 
head ; though  the  alkalies  may  be  certainly  beneficial 
by  correcting  acidity,  which  usually  results  fVom  a de- 
ficient supply  of  bile  to  the  intestines;  and  .possibly 
alter  the  secretion  of  the  liver  so  much  as  to  prevent 
the  formation  of  more  concretions.  When  the  com- 
plaint arises  from  scirrhous  tumours,  mercury  is  the 
remedy  most  likely  to  afford  relief,  particularly  should 
the  liver  itself  be  diseased : but  it  must  be  used  with 
proper  caution,  and  hemlock,  or  other  narcotic,  may 
sometimes  enable  the  system  to  bear  it  better.  Where 
this  remedy  is  precluded,  nitric  acid  promises  to  be  the 
best  substitute,  the  taraxacum  appears  by  no  means  so 
much  to  be  depended  upon.  In  all  tedious  cases  the 
strength  must  be  supported  by  the  vegetable  bitters,  or 
other  tonics,  and  a nutritious  diet,  easy  of  digestion : 
there  Is  often  a dislike  of  animal  food ; and  a craving 
for  acids,  which  mostly  may  be  indulged;  indeed, 
when  scorbutic  symptoms  attended,  the  native  vegeta- 
ble acids  have  been  sometimes  very  serviceable.  The 
bowels  must  be  kept  regular,  and  the  other  secretions 
promoted,  to  get  rid  of  the  bile  diffused  in  the  system; 
as  well  as  to  obviate  febrile  or  inflammatory  action. 
When  accumulations  of  hardened  faeces  induce  the 
complaint,  or  in  the  icterus  infantum,  cathartics  may 
be  alone  sufficient  to  afford  relief : and,  in  that  of  preg- 
nant females,  we  must  chiefly  look  to  the  period  of 
delivery. 

Icterus  albus.  The  white  jaundice.  Chlorosis 
is  sometimes  so  called. 

I'CTUS.  1.  A stroke  or  blow. 

2.  The  pulsation  of  an  artery. 

3.  The  sting  of  a bee,  or  other  insect. 

IDiE'US.  (From  iSi 7,  a mountain  in  Phrygia,  their 
native  place.)  A name  of  the  peony  and  blackberry. 

IDE.  This  terminal  is  affixed  to  oxygen,  chlorine, 
and  iodine,  when  they  enter  into  combination  with 
each  other,  or  with  simple  combustibles  or  metals  in 
proportions  not  forming  an  acid,  thus  ox-ide  of  chlo- 
rine, ox-ide  of  nitrogen,  chlor-ide  of  sulphur,  iod-ide 
of  iron. 

IDE'OLOGY.  {Ideologic, ; from  iSea,  a thought, 
and  \oyos,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  or  study  of  the 
understanding.  “ Whatever  be  the  number  and  the 
diversity  of  the  phenomena  which  belong  to  human 
intelligence,  however  different  they  appear  from  the 
other  phenomena  of  life,  though  they  evidently  depend 
on  the  soul,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  consider  them 
as  the  result  of  the  action  of  the  brain,  and  to  make  no 
distinction  between  them  and  the  other  phenomena 
that  depend  on  the  actions  of  that  organ.  The  func- 
tions of  the  brain  are  absolutely  subject  to  the  same 
law's  as  the  other  functions;  they  develope  and  goto 
decay  in  the  progress  of  age ; they  are  modified  by  ha- 
bit, sex,  temperament,  and  individual  disposition  ; they 
become  confused,  weakened,  or  elevated  in  diseases; 
the  physical  injuries  of  the  brain  weaken  or  destroy 
them  ; in  a word,  they  are  not  susceptible  of  any  ex- 
planation more  than  the  other  actions  of  the  organ ; 
and  setting  aside  all  hypothetical  ideas,  they  are  capa- 
ble of  being  studied  only  by  observation  and  ex- 
perience. 

We  must  also  be  cautious  in  imagining  that  the 
study  of  the  functions  of  the  brain  is  more  difficult  than 
that  of  the  other  organs,  and  that  it  appertains  pecu- 
liarly to  metaphysics.  By  keeping  close  to  observa- 
tion, and  avoiding  carefully  any  theory,  or  conjecture, 
this  study  becomes  purely  physiological,  and  perhaps 
it  is  easier  than  the  most  part  of  the  other  functions, 
on  account  of  the  facility  with  which  the  phenomena 
can  be  produced  and  observed.  The  innumerable 
phenomena  which  form  the  intellect  of  man,  are  only 
modifications  of  the  faculty  of  perception.  If  they  are 
examined  attentively,  this  truth,  which  is  well  illus- 
trated by  modern  metaphysicians,  will  be  found  very 
clear. 

There  are  four  principal  modifications  of  the  faculty 
of  perception. 

1st.  Sensibility,  or  the  action  of  the  brain,  by  which 
we  receive  impressions,  either  from- within  or  from' 
without. 

2d.  The  Memory , or  the  faculty  of  reproducing  im- 
pressions, or  sensations  formerly  received. 

3d.  The  faculty  of  perceiving  the  relations  which 
sensations  have  to  each  other,  or  the  Judgment. 

4th.  The  Desires , or  the  Will. 

Ff 


The  study  of  the  understanding,  from  whatever 
cause,  is  not  at  present  an  essential  part  of  physiology ; 
the  science  which  treats  particularly  of  it  is  Ideology. 
Whoever  may  wish  to  acquire  an  extensive  knowledge 
on  this  interesting  subject,  should  consult  the  works  of 
Bacon,  Locke,  Condillac,  Cabanis,  and  especially  the 
excellent  book  of  Destutt  Tracy,  entitled  “ Elements 
of  Ideology.” 

IDIOCRA'SIA.  See  Idiosyncrasy. 

IDIOPA'THIC.  {Idiopathicus ; from  iSios , peculiar, 
and  iraOos,  an  affection.)  A disease  which  does  not 
depend  on  any  other  disease,  in  which  respect  it  is 
opposed  to  a systematic  disease,  which  is  dependen 
on  another. 

IDIOSY'NCRASY.  {Idiosyncrasia ; from  iSios , 
peculiar,  aw,  with,  and  icpacis,  a temperament.)  A 
peculiarity  of  constitution,  in  which  a person  is  affected 
by  certain  agents,  which,  if  applied  to  a hundred  other 
persons,  would  produce  no  effect:  thus  some  people 
cannot  see  a finger  bleed  without  fainting ; and  thus 
violent  inflammation  is  induced  on  the  skin  of  some 
persons,  by  substances  that  are  perfectly  innocent  to 
others. 

Idiot'ropia.  (From  iSios,  peculiar,  and  rper ru>,  to 
turn.)  The  same  as  Idiosyncrasia. 

IDOCRASE.  See  Vesuvian. 

IGASURIC  ACID.  Acidum  Igusaricum.  Pelletier 
and  Caventou,  in  their  elegant  researches  in  the  faba 
Sancti  Ignatii , et  nux  vomica , having  observed  that 
these  substances  contained  a new  vegetable  base  (strych- 
nine) in  combination  with  an  acid,  sought  to  sepa- 
rate the  latter,  in  order  to  determine  its  nature.  It 
appeared  to  them  to  be  new,  and  they  called  it  igasuric 
acid,  from  the  Malay  name  by  which  the  natives  desig- 
nate in  the  Indies  the  faba  Sancti  Ignatii.  This  bean, 
according  to  these  chemists,  is  composed  of  igasurate 
of  strychnine,  a little  wax,  a concrete  oil,  a yellow 
colouring  matter,  gum,  starch,  bassorine,  and  vege- 
table fibre. 

To  extract  the  acid,  the  rasped  bean  must  be  heated 
in  ether,  in  a digester,  with  a valve  of  safety.  Thus 
the  concrete  oil,  and  a little  igasurate  of  strychnine, 
are  dissolved  out.  When  the  powder  is  no  longer 
acted  on  by  the  ether,  they  subject  it,  at  several  times, 
to  the  action  of  boiling  alkohol,  which  carries  off  the 
oil  which  had  escaped  the  ether,  as  also  wax,  which 
is  deposited  on  cooling,  some  igasurate  of  strychnine, 
and  colouring  matter.  All  the  alkoholic  decoctions  are 
united,  filtered,  and  evaporated.  The  brownish-yellow 
residuum  isdiffused  in  water ; magnesia  is  now  added, 
and  the  whole  is  boiled  together  for  some  minutes. 
By  this  means,  the  igasurate  is  decomposed,  and  from 
this  decomposition  there  results  free  strychnine,  and  a 
sub-igasurate  of  magnesia,  very  little  soluble  in  water. 
Washing  with  cold  water  removes  almost  completely 
the  colouring  matter,  and  boiling  alkohol  then  separates 
the  strychnine,  which  falls  down  as  the  liquid  cools. 
Finally,  to  procure  igasuric  acid  from  the  sub-igasurate 
of  magnesia,  which  remains  united  to  a small  quantity 
of  colouring  matter,  we  must  dissolve  the  magnesian 
salt  in  a great  body  of  boiling  distilled  water  ; concen- 
trate the  liquor,  and  add  to  it  acetate  of  lead,  which 
immediately  throws  down  the  acid  in  the  state  of  an 
igasurate  of  lead.  This  compound  is  then  decomposed, 
by  transmitting  a current  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
through  it,  diffused  in  8 or  10  times  its  weight  of  boiling 
water. 

This  acid,  evaporated  to  the  consistence  of  syrup, 
and  left  to  itself,  concretes  in  hard  and  granular  crys- 
tals. It  is  very  soluble  in  water,  and  in  alkohol.  Its 
taste  is  acid  and  very  styptic.  It  combines  with  the 
alkaline  and  earthy  bases,  forming  salts  soluble  in 
water  and  alkohol.  Its  combination  with  barytes  is 
very  soluble,  and  crystallizes  with  difficulty,  and  mush- 
room-like. Its  combination  with  ammonia,  when  per- 
fectly neutral,  does  not  form  a precipitate  with  the 
salts  of  silver,  mercury,  and  iron;  but  it  comports 
itself  with  the  salts  of  copper  in  a peculiar  manner,  and 
which  seems  to  characterize  the  acid  of  strychnns  (for 
the  same  acid  is  found  in  nux  vomica , and  in  snake- 
wood,  bois  de  coulevvre ) ; this  effect  consists  in  the 
decomposition  of  the  salts  of  copper,  by  its  ammoniacal 
compound.  These  salts  pass  immediately  to  a green 
colour,  and  gradually  deposite  a greenish-white  salt,  of 
very  sparing  solubility  in  water.  The  acid  of  strychnoa 
seems  thus  to  resemble  meconic  acid ; but  it  differs 
essentially  from  it,  by  its  action  with  salts  of  iron, 


ILE 


ILL 


which  immediately  assume  a very  deep  red  colour  with 
the  meconic  acid ; an  effect  not  produced  by  the  acid  of 
strychnos.  The  authors,  after  all,  do  not  positively 
affirm  this  acid  to  be  new  and  peculiar. 

IGNA'TIA.  (So  named  by  Linnaeus,  because  the 
seeds  are  known  in  the  materia  medica  by  the  name 
of  Saint  Ignatius’s  beans.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants.  Class,  Penlandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Ignatia  amara.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
which  affords  St.  Ignatius’s  bean ; Fab  a indica ; Faba 
Sancti  Ignatii ; Faba  febrifuga.  These  beans  are  of 
a roundish  figure,  very  irregular  and  uneven,  about 
the  size  of  a middling  nutmeg,  semi-transparent,  and 
of  a hard,  horny  texture.  They  have  a very  bitter 
taste,  and  no  considerable  smell.  They  are  said  to  be 
used  in  the  Philippine  islands  in  all  diseases,  acting  as 
a vomit  and  purgative.  Infusions  are  given  in  the 
cure  of  iutermittents,  &c. 

Ignatii  faba.  See  Ignatia  amara. 

IGNATIUS’S  BEAN.  See  Ignatia  amara. 

I'GNIS.  Fire.  1.  Van  Helmont,  Paracelsus,  and 
other  alchemists,  applied  this  term  to  what  they  con- 
sidered as  universal  solvents. 

•2.  In  medicine,  the  older  writers  used  it  to  express 
several  diseases  characterized  by  external  redness  and 
heat. 

Ignis  calidus.  A hot  fire:  a gangrene:  also  a 
violent  inflammation,  just  about  to  degenerate  into 
a gangrene,  were  formerly  so  called  by  some. 

Ignis  fatuus.  A luminous  appearance  or  flame, 
frequently  seen  in  the  night  in  different  country  places, 
and  called  in  England  Jack  with  a lantern,  or  Will  with 
the  wisp.  It  seems  to  be  mostly  occasioned  by  the 
extrication  of  phosphorus  from  rotting  leaves  and 
other  vegetable  matters.  It  is  probable,  that  the  motion- 
less ignes  fatui  of  Italy,  which  are  seen  nightly  on  the 
same  spot,  are  produced  by  the  slow  combustion  of 
sulphur,  emitted  through  clefts  and  apertures  in  the 
soil  of  that  volcanic  country. 

Ignis  frigidus.  A cold  fire.  A sphacelus  was  so 
called,  because  the  parts  that  are  so  affected  become 
as  cold  as  the  surrounding  air. 

Ignis  persicus.  A name  of  the  erysipelas,  also  of 
the  carbuncle.  See  Anthrax. 

Ignis  rot.e.  Fire  for  fusion.  It  is  when  a vessel, 
which  contains  some  matter  for  fusion,  is  surrounded 
with  live,  i.  e.  red-hot,  coals. 

Ignis  sacer.  A name  of  erysipelas,  and  of  a species 
of  herpes. 

Ignis  sapientium.  Heat  of  horse-dung. 

Ignis  sancti  antonii.  See  Erysipelas. 

Ignis  svlvaticus.  See  Impetigo. 

Ignis  volagrius.  See  Impetigo. 

Ignis  volaticus.  See  Erysipelas. 

I'kan  radix.  A somewhat  oval,  oblong,  compressed 
root,  brought  from  China.  It  is  extremely  rare,  and 
would  appear  to  be  the  root  of  some  of  the  orchis 
tribe. 

I'laphis.  A name  in  Myrepsus  for  the  burdoch. 
See  Arctium  lappa. 

I'lech.  By  this  word,  Paracelsus  seems  to  mean  a 
first  principle. 

I'leon  cruentum.  Hippocrates  describes  it  in  lib. 
De  Intern.  Affect.  In  this  disease,  as  well  as  in  the 
scurvy,  the  breath  is  foetid,  the  gums  recede  from  the 
teeth, ‘haemorrhages  of  the  nose  happen,  and  sometimes 
there  are  ulcers  in  the  legs,  but  the  patient  can  move 
about. 

ILEUM.  (From  eiKtw,  to  turn  about;  from  its 
convolutions.)  Ileum  intestinum.  The  last  portion 
of  the  small  intestines,  about  nfteen  hands’  breadth  in 
length,  which  terminates  at  the  valve  of  the  caecum. 
See  Intestine. 

ILEUS.  See  Iliac  passion. 

I'LEX.  (The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnsean  system.  Class,  Tetrandria ; Order,  Tetra- 
gynia.)  The  holly. 

Ilex  aquifolium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  holly.  Aquifolium.  The  leaves  of  this  plant, 
llex—foliis  ovatis  acutis  spinosis , of  Linnaeus,  have 
been  known  to  cure  intermittent  fevers ; and  an  in- 
fusion of  the  leaves,  drank  as  tea,  is  said  to  be  a pre- 
ventive against  the  gout. 

Ilex  oassine.  Cassina;  Apalachine  gallis.  This 
tree  grows  in  Carolina ; the  leaves  resemble  those  of 
senna,  blackish  when  dried,  with  a biller  taste,  and 
aromatic  smell.  They  are  considered  as  stomachic 
450 


and  stimulant.  They  are  sometimes  used  as  expec- 
torants ; and  when  fresh  are  emetic. 

I'Ll  A.  (The  plural  of  lie,  ceXy.) 

1.  The  flanks,  or  that  part  in  which  are  enclosed  the 
small  intestines. 

2.  The  small  intestines.  , 

I'LIAC.  ( Iliacus ; from  ileum  intestinum.)  Be- 
longing to  the  ilium  ; an  intestine  so  called. 

Iliac  arteries.  Arteries  iliacas.  The  arteries  so 
called  are  formed  by  the  bifurcation  of  the  aorta,  near 
the  last  lumbar  vertebra.  They  are  divided  into  inter- 
nal and  external.  The  internal  iliac , also  called  the 
liypograstic  artery,  is  distributed  in  the  foetus  into  six, 
and  in  the  adult  into  five  branches,  which  are  div  ided 
about  the  pelvis,  viz.  the  little  iliac,  the  gluteal,  the 
ischiatic,  the  pudical,  and  the  obturatory ; and  in  the 
. foetus,  the  umbilical.  The  external  iliac  proceeds  out 
of  the  pelvis  through  Poupart’s  ligament,  to  form  trie 
femoral  artery 

Iliac  passion.  (ErXroj,  CXtos,  eiXeios,  is  described  as 
a kind  of  nervous  colic,  the  seat  of  which  is  the  ilium.) 
Pass  io  iliaca ; Volvulus;  Miserere  met;  Convolvulus; 
Chordapsus ; Tormentum.  A violent  vomiting,  in 
which  the  faecal  portion  of  the  food  is  voided  by  the 
mouth.  It  is  produced  by  many  morbid  conditions  of 
the  bowels,  by  inflammatory  affections  of  the  abdomi- 
nal viscera,  and  by  herniae. 

Iliac  region.  The  side  of  the  abdomen,  between 
the  ribs  and  the  hips. 

ILl'ACUS.  The  name  of  muscles,  regions,  or  dis- 
eases, situated  near  to,  or  connected  with,  parts  about 
the  ilia  or  flanks. 

Iliacus  internus.  Iliacus  of  Winslow.  Iliaco 
trachanten  of  Dumas.  A thick,  broad,  and  radiated 
muscle,  which  is  situated  in  the  pelvis,  upon  the  inner 
surface  of  the  ilium.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  inner 
lip  of  the  ilium,  from  most  of  the  hollow  part,  and  like- 
wise from  the  edge  of  that  bone,  between  its  anterior 
superior  spinous  process  and  the  acetabulum.  It  joins 
with  the  psoas  magnus,  where  it  begins  to  become  ten- 
dinous, and  passing  under  the  ligamentum  Fallopii,  is 
inserted  in  common  with  that  muscle.  The  tendon  of 
this  muscle  has  been  seen  distinct  from  that  of  the 
psoas,  and,  in  some  subjects,  it  has  been  found  divided 
into  two  portions.  The  iliacus  internus  serves  to  assist 
the  psoas  magnus  in  bending  the  thigh,  and  in  bringing 
it  directly  forwards. 

ILI'ADUM.  Iliadus.  The  first  matter  of  all  things, 
consisting  of  mercury,  salt,  and  sulphur.  These  are 
Paracelsus’s  three  principles.  His  iliadus  is  also  a 
mineral  spirit,  which  is  contained  in  every  element, 
and  is  the  supposed  cause  of  diseases. 

Ilia'ster.  Paracelsus  gives  this  name  to  the  occult 
virtue  of  nature,  whence  all  things  have  their  increase. 

ILI'NGOS.  (From  t\iyl,  a vortex.)  A giddiness, 
in  which  all  things  appear  to  turn  round,  and  the  eyes 
grow  dim. 

Ili'scus.  Avicenna  says,  it  is  madness  caused  by 

love. 

I LIUM  OS.  (From  ilia,  the  small  intestines ; so 
named  because  it  supports  the  ilia.)  The  haunch-bone. 
The  superior  portion  of  the  os  innominatum,  which,  in 
the  foetus,  is  a distinct  bone.  See  Innominatum  os. 

ILLA.  See  Ula. 

ILLE'CEBRA.  (From  eiXtw,  to  turn;  because  its 
leaves  resemble  worms.)  See  Scdum  acre. 

ILLI'CIUM.  (Ilttcium,  ab  illiciendo;  denoting  an 
enticing  plant,  from  its  being  very  fragrant  and  aro- 
matic.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
ntean  system.  Class,  Poly andri a : Order,  Polygynia 

Illicium  anisatum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
yellow-flowered  aniseed-tree:  the  seeds  of  which  are 
called  the  star  aniseed.  Anisum  stellatum ; Anisum 
stinense ; Semen  badian.  They  are  used  with  the  same 
views  as  those  of  the  Pimpinella  anisum.  The  same 
tree  is  supposed  to  furnish  the  aromatic  bark,  called 
cortex  anisi  stellati,  or  cortex  lavola. 

ILLO'SIS.  (From  tXXoj,  the  eye.)  A distortion  of 
the  eyes. 

Ii.lutame'ntum.  An  ancient  form  of  an  external 
medicine,  like  the  Ceroma,  with  which  the  limbs  of 
wrestlers,  and  others  delighting  in  like  exercises,  were 
rubbed,  especially  after  bathing  ; an  account  of  which 
may  be  met  with  in  Bactius  De  Thermis. 

Illuta'tio.  (From  in,  and  lutum,  mud.)  Illutation. 
A besmearing  any  part  of  the  body  with  mud,  and  re- 
newing it  as  it  grows  dry,  with  a view  of  heating,  dry- 


IMP 


1ND 


Ing,  and  discussing.  It  was  chiefly  done  with  the  mud  j 
found  at  the  bottom  of  mineral  springs. 

I'llys.  (From  tXAos,  the  eye.)  A person  who 
squints,  or  with  distorted  eyes. 

I'lys.  (From  tXvs,  mud.)  1.  The  faeces  of  wine. 
An  obsolete  term. 

2.  The  sediment  in  stools  which  resemble  faeces  of 
wine. 

3.  The  sediments  in  urine,  when  it  resembles  the 
same. 

Imbeci'llitas  oculorum.  Celsus  speaks  of  the 
Nyctalopia  by  this  name. 

IiMBiBi  Tio.  (From  imbibo,  to  receive  into.)  An  ob- 
solete term.  In  chemistry  for  a kind  of  cohobation, 
when  the  liquor  ascends  and  descends  upon  a solid  sub- 
stance, till  it  is  fixed  therewith. 

IMBRICATUS.  Imbricated : like  tiles  upon  a house. 
A term  applied  to  leaves  as  those  of  the  Euphorbia 
paralia. 

1MMERSUS.  Immersed:  plunged  under  water — 
folia  immersa : leaves  which  are  naturally  under  the 
water,  and  are  different  from  those  which  naturally 
float.  See  Leaf. 

It  is  remarked  by  Linnaeus,  that  aquatic  plants  have 
their  lower,  and  mountainous  ones  their  upper,  leaves 
most  divided,  by  which  they  better  resist  the  action  of 
the  stream  in  one  case,  and  of  the  wind  in  the  other. 

Immk  rsus.  A term  given  by  Bartholine,  and  some 
other  anatomists  to  the  Subscapularis  muscle,  because 
it  was  hidden,  or,  as  it  were,  sunk. 

IMPA'TIENS.  (From  in,  not,  and  paiior,  to  suffer ; 
because  its  leaves  recede  from  the  hand  with  a crack- 
•ingnoise,  as  impatient  of  the  touch,  or  from  the  great 
elasticity  of  the  sutures  of  its  seed  vessel  which  is  com- 
pletely impatient  of  the  touch,  curling  up  with  the 
greatest  velocity,  and  scattering  round  the  seeds,  the 
instant  any  extraneous  body  comes  in  contact  with  it.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

IMPERATO'RIA.  (From  impero,  to  overcome : so 
named  because  its  leaves  extend  and  overwhelm  the 
less  herbs  which  grow  near  it.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  master-wort. 
See  Imperatoria  ostruthium. 

Imperatoria  ostruthium.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  inaster-wort.  Imperatoria;  Magistrantia. 
The  roots  of  this  plant  are  imported  from  the  Alps  and 
Pyrenees,  notwithstanding  it  is  indigenous  to  this 
Island : they  have  a fragrant  smell,  and  a bitterish  pun- 
gent taste.  The  plant,  as  its  name  imports,  was  for- 
merly thought  to  be  of  singular  efficacy ; and  its  great 
success,  it  is  said,  caused  it  to  be  distinguished  by  the 
name  of  divinium  remedium.  At  present,  it  is  consi- 
dered merely  as  an  aromatic,  and  consequently  is  super- 
seded by  many  of  that  class  which  possess  superior 
qualities. 

IMPETI'GINES.  (The  plural  of  impetigo ; from 
in.peto,  to  infest.)  An  order  in  the  class  Cachexia  of 
Cullen,  the  genera  of  which  are  characterized  by 
cachexia  deforming  the  external  parts  of  the  body  with 
tumours,  eruptions,  &c. 

IMPETI  GO.  Ignis  sylvaticus ; Ignis  volagrius. 
A disease  of  the  skin,  variously  described  by  authors, 
but  mostly  as  one  in  which  several  red,  hard,  dry,  pru- 
rient spots  arise  in  the  face  and  neck,  and  sometimes  all 
over  the  body,  and  disappear  by  furfuraceous  or  tender 
scales. 

Impetum  faciens.  See  Vis  vita. 

IMPETUSA.  Force  or  motion. 

I'mpia  herba.  (From  in,  not,  and  pius,  good ; 
because  it  grows  only  on  barren  ground.)  *A  name 
given  to  cudweed.  See  Gnaphalium. 

IMPLICATED.  Celsus,  Scribonius,and  some  others, 
call  those  parts  of  physic  so,  which  have  a necessary 
dependence  on  one  another ; but  the  term  has  been 
more  significantly  applied,  by  Bellini,  to  fevers,  where 
two  at  a time  afflict  a person,  either  of  the  same  kind, 
as  a double  tertian  ; or,  of  different  kinds,  as  an  inter- 
mittent tertian,  and  a quotidian,  called  a Semi- 
tertian. 

Implu'vium.  (From  impluo,  to  shower  upon.)  1. 
•The  shower-bath. 

2.  An  embrocation. 

IMPOSTHUMA.  A term  corrupted  from  impostem 
and  apostcm.  An  abscess. 


j IMPREGNA  TION.  Impregnahu  See  Conception 

and  Generation. 

INANI'TIO.  (From  inanio,  to  empty.)  Inanition 
Applied  to  the  body  or  vessels,  it  means  emptiness; 
applied  to  the  mind,  it  means  a defect  of  its  powers. 

INCANTA  TION.  Incantatio ; Incantamentum.  A 
way  of  curing  diseases  by  charms,  defended  by  Para- 
celsus, Helmont,  and  some  other  chemical  enthusiasts. 

INCANUS.  Hoary.  Applied  to  stems  which  are 
covered  with  a kind  of  scaly  mealiness,  as  that  of  the 
A'-temisia  absinthium,  and  Atriplez  portulacoides. 

Ince'ndium.  (From  incendo,  to  burn.)  A burning 
fever,  or  heat. 

Inck'nsio.  1.  A burning  fever. 

2.  A hot  inflammatory  tumour, 

Incerni'culum.  (From  incerno,  to  sift.) 

1.  A strainer,  or  sieve. 

2.  A name  for  the  pelvis  of  the  kidney,  from  its 
office  as  a strainer. 

Incide'ntia.  (From  incido , to  cut.)  Medicines 
which  consist  of  pointed  and  sharp  particles,  as  acids, 
and  most  salts,  which  are  said  to  incide  or  cut  the 
phlegm,  when  they  break  it,  so  as  to  occasion  its  dis- 
charge. 

INCINERA'TION.  (From  incinero,  to  reduce  to 
ashes.)  Incineratio.  The  combustion  of  vegetable 
and  animal  substances,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining 
their  ashes  or  fixed  residue. 

INCISrVUS.  (From  incido,  to  cut.)  A name  given 
to  some  muscles,  &c. 

Incisivus  inferior.  See  Levator  labii  iufcrioris. 

Incisivus  lateralis.  See  Levator  labii  svperioris 
alaque  nasi. 

Incisivus  medius.  See  Depressor  labii  supcrioris 
alaque  nasi. 

INCPSOR.  (Dentes  incisores  ; from  incido,  to  cut, 
from  their  use  in  cutting  the  food.)  The  four  front 
teeth  of  both  jaws  are  called  incisors,  because  they  cut 
the  food.  See  Teeth. 

INCISO'RIUM.  (From  incido,  to  cut.)  A table 
whereon  a patient  is  laid  for  an  operation. 

Incisorium  foramen.  A name  of  the  foramen, 
which  lies  behind  the  dentes  incisores  of  the  upper 
jaw. 

INCISUS.  (From  incido,  to  cut.)  Cut.  A term 
applied  in  botany,  synonymously  with  dissectus,  to 
leaves  ; as  those  of  the  Geranium  dissectum. 

INCONTINE  NTIA.  (From  in,  and  contineo,  to 
contain.)  Inability  to  retain  the  natural  evacuations. 
Hence  we  say,  incontinence  of  urine,  &x. 

Incrassa'ntia.  ( Incrassans ; from  incrasso,  to 
make  thick.)  Medicines  which  thicken  the  fluids. 

INCUBUS.  (From  incuha,  to  lie  upon;  because 
the  patient  fancies  that  something  lies  upon  his  chest.) 
See  Oneirodynia . 

INCURVUS.  Curved  inwards:  applied  to  leaves; 
as  in  Erica  empetrifolia. 

INCUS.  (A  smith’s  anvil:  from  incudo,  to  smite 
upon : so  named  from  its  likeness  in  shape  to  an  anvil ) 
The  largest  and  strongest  of  the  bones  of  the  ear  in  the 
tympanum.  It  is  divided  into  a body  and  two  crura. 
Its  body  is  situated  anteriorly,  is  rather  broad  and 
thick,  and  has  two  eminences’  and  two  depressions, 
both  covered  with  cartilage,  and  intended  for  the  re- 
ception of  the  head  of  the  malleus.  Its  shorter  crus 
extends  no  farther  than  the  cells  of  the  mastoid  apophy- 
sis. Its  longer  crus,  together  with  the  manubrium  of 
the  malleus,  to  which  it  is  connected  by  a ligament,  is 
of  the  same  extent  as  the  shorter;  but  its  extremity  is 
curved  inwards,  to  receive  the  os  orbicuiare,  by  the  in- 
tervention of  which  it  is  united  with  the  stapes. 

l'NDEX.  (From  indico,  to  point  out;  because  it  ig 
generally  used  for  such  purposes.)  The  forefinger. 

Indian  arrow-root.  See  Maranta. 

Indian  cress.  See  Tropaolum  majus. 

Indian  date-plum.  See  Diospyros  lotus. 

Indian  leaf.  See  Laurus  cassia. 

Indian  pink.  See  Spigelia. 

Indian-rubbcr.  See  Caoutchouc. 

Indian  wheat.  See  Zea  mays. 

“ Indian  tobacco.  Lobelia.  The  Lobelia  inflata 
is  an  annual  American  plant,  found  in  a great  variety 
of  soils  throughout  the  United  States. 

It  is  lactescent,  like  many  others  of  its  genus.  When 
chewed  it  communicates  to  the  mouth  a burning,  pun- 
gent sensation,  which  remains  long  in  the  fauces,  re* 
sembling  the  effect  of  green  tobacco.  The  plant  con- 

451 


F f 2 


LNL> 


INF 


tains  caoutchouc,  extractive,  and  an  acrid  principle, 
which  is  present  in  -the  tincture,  decoction,  and  dis- 
tilled water. 

The  lobelia  is  a prompt  emetic,  attended  with  nar- 
cotic effects  during  its  operation.  If  a leaf  or  capsule 
be  held  in  the  mouth  for  a short  time,  it  brings  on  gid- 
diness, headache,  a trembling  agitation  of  the  whole 
body,  sickness,  and  finally  vomiting.  These  effects  are 
analogous  to  those  which  tobacco  produces  in  the  un- 
accustomed. If  swallowed  in  substance,  it  excites 
speedy  vomiting,  accompanied  with  distressing  and 
long-continued  sickness,  and  even  with  dangerous 
symptoms,  if  the  dose  be  large.  On  account  of  the 
violence  of  its  operation,  it  is  probable  that  this  plant 
will  never  come  in  use  for  the  common  purpose  of  an 
emetic.  It  is,  however,  entitled  to  notice  as  a remedy 
in  asthma  and  some  other  pulmonary  affections.  It 
produces  relief  in  asthmatic  cases,  sometimes  with- 
out vomiting,  but  more  frequently  after  discharging 
the  contents  of  the  stomach.  On  account  of  the 
harshness  of  its  operation,  it  is  reluctantly  resorted  to 
by  patients,  who  expect  relief  from  any  milder  means. 
It,  however,  certainly  relieves  some  cases,  in  which 
other  emetic  substances  fail.  In  small  doses  the  lobe- 
lia is  found  a good  expectorant  for  pneumonia,  in  its 
advanced  stages,  and  for  catarrh.  In  rheumatism  it 
has  also  been  found  of  service. 

The  strength  of  the  lobelia  varies  with  its  age,  and 
other  circumstances.  In  some  instances,  a grain  will 
produce  vomiting.  The  tincture  is  most  frequently 
given  in  asthma,  in  doses  of  about  a fluid  draclnn.” — 
Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[Indian  turnip.  Dragon  root.  Arum.  “ The 
Arum  triphyllum  is  an  American  plant,  growing  in 
damp,  shady  situations,  and  sometimes  called  Indian 
Turnip , and  Wake  robin.  The  root  is  large  andfleshy, 
consisting  chiefly  of  fcecula,  which  it  affords,  without 
taste  or  smell,  in  the  form  of  a white  delicate  powder. 
In  its  recent  state,  this  root,  and  in  fact  every  part  of 
the  plant,  is  violently  acrid,  and  almost  caustic.  Ap- 
plied to  the  tongue,  or  to  any  secreting  surface,  it  pro- 
duces an  effect  like  that  of  Cayenne  pepper,  but  far 
more  powerful,  so  as  to  leave  a permanent  soreness 
for  many  hours.  Its  action  does  not  readily  extend 
through  the  cuticle,  since  the  bruised  root  may  be  worn 
upon  the  skin  till  it  becomes  dry,  without  occasioning 
pain  or  rubefaction.  The  acrimony  of  this  plant  re- 
sides in  a highly  volatile  principle,  which  is  driven  off 
by  heat,  and  gradually  disappears  in  drying.  It  is  not 
communicated  to  water,  alkohol,  nor  oil,  but  may  be 
obtained  in  the  form  of  an  inflammable  gas  or  vapour, 
by  boiling  the  plant  under  an  inverted  receiver,  filled 
with  water.  Arum  is  too  violently  acrid  to  be  a safe 
medicine  in  its  recent  state,  though  it  has  sometimes 
been  given  with  impunity.  The  dried  root,  while  it 
retains  a slight  portion*  of  acrimony,  is  sometimes 
grated  in  milk,  and  given  as  a carminative  and  dia- 
phoretic.”— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

India'na  radix.  Ipecacuanha. 

I'ndica  camotes.  Potatoes. 

INDICANT.  ( Indicans ; from  indico,  to  show.) 
That  from  which  the  indication  is  drawn,  which  is  in 
reality  the  proximate  cause  of  a disease. 

Indicating  days  Critical  days. 

INDICATION.  ( Indicatio ; from  indico,  to  show.) 
An  indication  is  that  which  demonstrates  in  a disease 
what  ought  to  be  done.  It  is  three-fold : preservative, 
which  preserves  health;  curative,  which  expels  a 
present  disease ; and  vital,  which  respects  the  powers 
and  reasons  of  diet.  The  scope  from  which  indications 
are  taken,  or  determined,  is  comprehended  in  this  dis- 
tich: 

Ars,  mtas , regio , complexio,  virtus , 

Mos  et  symptoma , repletio,  tempus,  et  usus. 

INDICATOR.  (From  indico , to  point:  so  named 
from  its  office  of  extending  the  index,  or  forefinger ) 
An  extensor  muscle  of  the  forefinger,  situated  chiefly 
on  the  lower  and  posterior  part  of  the  forearm.  Ex- 
tensor indicis  of  Cowper.  Extensor  secundii  inter- 
nodii  indicis  proprius , vulgo  indicator  of  Douglas ; 
and  Gubitosus  phalangettien  de  Vindix  of  Dumas.  It 
arises,  by  an  acute  fleshy  beginning,  from  the  middle  of 
the  posterior  part  of  the  ulna ; its  tendon  passes  under 
the  same  ligament  with  the  extensor  digitorum  commu- 
nis, with  part  of  which  it  is  inserted  into  the  posterior 
part  of  the  forefinger. 

Indicum  lignum.  Logwood. 

45  2 


Indicus  morbus.  The  venereal  disease. 

INDI  GENOUS.  ( Indigenus ; indigena  ab  indu , 
i.  e.  in  et  geno , i.  e.  gigno , to  beget.)  Applied  to  dis- 
eases, plants,  and  other  objects  which  are  peculiar  to 
any  country. 

INDIGO.  A blue  colouring  matter  extracted  from 
the  Indigofer  a tinctoria.  Anil,  or  the  indigo  plant. 

INDIGOFERA.  (From  indigo,  and  fero,  to  bear.t 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Diadelphia  ; 
Order,  Decandria. 

Indigofera  tinctoria.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  affords  indigo. 

INDUCIUM.  (From  induco,  to  cover  ordrawover.) 
A covering.  1.  A shirt. 

2.  The  name  of  the  amnios  from  its  covering  the 
foetus  like  a shirt. 

3.  Wildenow  and  Swart’s  name  for  the  involucrum, 
or  thin  membraneous  covering  of  the  fructification  of 
ferns. 

Its  varieties  are, 

1.  Inducium  planum , flat;  as  in  the  genus  PoZy- 
podium. 

2.  I.peltatum,  connected  with  the  seed  by  a fila- 
ment or  stalk ; as  in  Aspidium  filixmas. 

3.  I.  corniculatum , round  and  hollow ; as  in  Equi- 
selum. 

Indura'ntia.  (From  induro,  to  harden.)  Medi 
cines  which  harden. 

INEQUALIS.  Unequal.  Applied  to  a leaf  when 
the  two  halves  are  unequal  in  dimensions  and  the  base 
end  parallel ; as  in  Eucalyptus  resinifera. 

INERMIS.  (From  in,  priv.  and  arma .)  Unarmed: 
opposed,  in  designating  leaves,  to  such  as  are  spinous. 

Ine'sis.  (From  ivau),  to  evacuate ) Inethus.  An 
evacuation  of  the  humours. 

INFECTION.  See  Contagion. 

INFERNAL.  A name  given  to  a caustic,  lapis  in- 
femalis , from  its  strong  burning  property.  See  Argenti 
nitras. 

Infibula'tio.  (From  infibulo,  to  button  together.) 
An  impediment  to  the  retraction  of  the  prepuce. 

INFLAMMABLE.  Chemists  distinguish  by  this 
term  such  bodies  as  burn  with  facility,  and  flame  inau 
increased  temperature. 

Inflammable  air.  See  Hydrogen  gas. 

Inflammable  air,  heavy.  See  Carburetted  hydrogen 
gas. 

INFLAMMATION.  ( Inflammatio , onis.  f.;  from  in- 
flammo,  to  burn.)  Phlogosis ; Phlegmasia.  A dis- 
ease characterized  by  heat,  pain,  redness,  attended 
with  more  or  less  of  tumefaction  and  fever.  Inflam- 
mation is  divided  into  two  species,  viz.  phlegmonous  and 
erysipelatous. 

Besides  this  division,  inflammation  is  either  acute  or 
chronic,  local  or  general,  simple  or  complicated  with 
other  diseases. 

1.  Phlegmonous  inflammation  is  known  by  its  bright 
red  colour,  tension,  heat,  and  a circumscribed,  throb- 
bing, painful  tumefaction  of  the  part ; tending  to  sup- 
puration. Phlegmon  is  generally  used  to  denote  an 
inflammatory  tumour,  situated  in  the  skin  or  cellular 
membrane.  When  the  same  disease  affects  the  vis- 
cera, it  is  usually  called  phlegmonous  inflammation. 

2.  Erysipelatous  inflammation  is  considered  as  an 
inflammation  of  a dull  red  colour,  vanishing  upon 
pressure,  spreading  unequally,  with  a burning  pain,  the 
tumour  scarcely  perceptible,  ending  in  vesicles,  or  des- 
quamation. This  species  of  inflammation  admits  of  a 
division  into  erythema,  when  there  is  merely  an  affec- 
tion of  the  skin,  with  very  little  of  the  whole  system ; 
and  erysipelas,  when  there  is  general  affection  of  the 
system. 

The  fever  attending  erysipelatous  inflammation  is 
generally  synocli us  or  typhus,  excepting  when  it  affects 
very  vigorous  habits,  and  then  it  may  be  synoclia.  The 
fever  attending  phlegmonous  inflammation  is  almost 
always  synocba.  Persons  in  the  prime  of  life,  and  in  full 
vigour  with  a plethoric  habit  of  body,  are  most  liable  to 
the  attacks  of  a phlegmonous  inflammation  ; whereas 
those  advanced  in  years,  and  those  of  a weak  habit  of 
body,  irritable,  and  lean,  are  most  apt  to  be  attacked 
with  erysipelatous  inflammation. 

Phlegmonous  inflammation  terminates  in  resolution, 
suppuration,  gangrene,  and  scirrhus,  or  induration. 
Resolution  is  known  to  be  about  to  take  place  when 
the  symptoms  gradually  abate;  suppuration,  when  the 
inflammation  docs  not  readily  yield  to  proper  remedies, 


INN 


INN 


the  throbbing  increases,  the  tumour  points  externally, 
and  rigors  come  on.  Gangrene  is  about  to  take  place, 
when  the  pain  abates,  the  pulse  sinks,  and  cold  per- 
spirations come  on.  Schirrhus,  or  induration,  is  known 
by  the  inflammation  continuing  a longer  time  than 
usual ; the  tumefaction  continues,  and  a considerable 
hardness  remains.  This  kind  of  tumour  gives  little  or 
no  pain,  and,  when  it  takes  place,  it  is  usually  the  se- 
quel of  inflammation  affecting  glandular  parts.  It 
sometimes,  however,  is  accompanied  with  lancinating 
pakis,  ulcerates,  and  becomes  cancerous. 

Erythematous  inflammation  terminates  in  resolu- 
tion, suppuration,  or  gangrene.  The  symptoms  of  in- 
flammation are  accounted  for  in  the  following  way 

The  redness  arises  from  the  dilatation  of  the  small 
vessels,  which  become  sufficiently  large  to  admit  the 
red  particles  in  large  quantities;  it  appears  also  to 
occur,  in  some  cases,  from  the  generation  of  new  ves- 
sels. The  swelling  is  caused  by  the  dilatation  of  the 
vessels,  the  plethoric  state  of  the  arteries  and  veins,  the 
exudation  of  coagulable  lymph  into  the  cellular  mem- 
brane, and  the  interruption  of  absorption. 

In  regard  to  the  augmentation  of  heat,  as  the  ther- 
mometer denotes  very  little  increase  of  temperature,  it 
appears  to  be  accounted  for  from  the  increased  sensi- 
bility of  the  nerves,  which  convey  false  impressions 
to  the  sensorium.  The  pain  is  occasioned  by  a de- 
viation from  the  natural  state  of  the  parts,  and  the 
unusual  condition  into  which  the  nerves  are  thrown. 
The  throbbing  depends  on  the  action  of  the  arteries. 

Blood  taken  from  a person  labouring  under  active 
inflammation,  exhibits  a yellowish  white  crust  on  the 
surface  ; this  is  denominated  the  buffy  coriaceous,  or 
inflammatory  coat.  This  consists  of  a layer  of  coagu- 
lable lymph,  almost  destitute  of  red  particles.  Blood, 
in  this  state,  is  often  termed  sizy.  The  colouring  part 
of  the  blood  is  its  heaviest  constituent;  and,  as  the 
blood  of  a person  labouring  under  inflammation  is 
longer  coagulating  than  healthy  blood,  it  is  supposed 
that  the  red  particles  have  an  opportunity  to  descend 
to  a considerable  depth  from  the  surface  before  they 
become  entangled.  The  buffy  coat  of  blood  is  gene- 
rally the  best  criterion  of  inflammation ; there  are  a few 
anomalous  constitutions  in  which  this  state  of  blood  is 
always  found ; but  these  are  rare. 

The  occasional  and  exciting  causes  of  inflammation 
are  very  numerous:  they,  however,  may  generally  be 
classed  under  external  violence,  produced  either  by 
mechanical  or  chemical  irritation,  changes  of  tempera- 
ture, and  stimulating  foods.  Fever  often  seems  to  be 
a remote  cause ; the  inflammation  thus  produced  is 
generally  considered  as  critical.  Spontaneous  inflam- 
mation sometimes  occurs  when  no  perceptible  cause 
can  be  assigned  for  its  production.  Scrofula  and 
syphilis  may  be  considered  as  exciting  causes  of  in- 
flammation. 

With  regard  to  the  proximate  cause,  it  has  been  the 
subject  of  much  dispute.  Galen  considered  phlegmon 
to  be  produced  by  a superabundance  of  the  humor 
sanguineus.  Boerhaave  referred  the  proximate  cause 
to  an  obstruction  in  the  small  vessels,  occasioned  by  a 
lentor  of  the  blood.  Cullen  and  others  attributed  it 
rather  to  an  affection  of  the  vessels  than  a change  of  the 
fluids. 

The  proximate  cause,  at  the  present  period,  is  gene- 
rally considered  to  be  a morbid  dilatation,  and  increased 
action  of  such  arteries  as  lead  and  are  distributed  to 
the  inflamed  part. 

Inflammation  of  the  bladder.  See  Cystitis. 

Inflammation  of  the  brain.  See  Phrenitis. 

Inflammation  of  the  eyes.  See  Ophthalmia. 

Inflammation  of  the  intestines.  See  Enteritis. 

Inflammation  of  the  kidneys.  See  Nephritis. 

Inflammation  of  the  liver.  See  Hepatitis. 

Inflammation  of  the  lungs.  See  Pneumonia. 

Inflammation  of  the  peritonceum . See  Peritonitis. 

Inflammation  of  thepleura.  See  Pleuritis. 

Inflammation  of  the  stomach.  See  Gastritis.  . 

Inflammation  of  the  testicle.  See  Orchitis. 

Inflammation  of  the  uterus.  See  Hysteritis. 

INFLA'TIO.  (From  inflo , to  puff  up.)  A windy 
swelling.  See  Pneumatosis. 

Infla'tiva.  ( Inflativus ; from  inflo,  to  puff  up  with 
wind.)  Medicines  or  food  which  cause  flatulence. 

INFLATUS.  Inflated.  In  botany  applied  to  vesi- 
culated  parts,  which  naturally  contain  only  air;  as 
legumen  inflatum , seen  in  Astragalus  vesicarius , and 


the  distended  and  hollow  perianths  of  the  Cucubalus 
behen,  and  Physalis  alkekengi  in  fruit. 

INFLEXUS.  Curved  inwards ; synonymous  to  in- 
curvus , as  applied  to  leaves,  petals,  &c.  See  Incurvus. 
Tire  petals  of  the  Pimpinella,  and  Chcerophyllum,  are 
described  as  inflexa. 

INFLORESCENCE.  (Inflorescentia;  from  inflo- 
resco,  to  flower  or  blossom.)  A term  used  by  Lin- 
naeus to  express  the  particular  manner  in  which  flowers 
are  situated  upon  a plant,  denominated  by  preceding 
writers,  modus  florendi,  or  manner  of  flowering. 

It  is  divided  into  simple , when  solitary,  and  com- 
pound, when  many  flowers  are  placed  together  in  one 
place. 

The  first  affords  the  following  distinctions. 

1.  Flos  pedunculatus,  furnished  with  a stalk ; as  in 
Gratiolus  and  Vinca. 

2.  F.  sessilis,  adhering  to  the  plant  without  a flower- 
stalk;  as  in  Daphne  meierium , and  Zinia  pauciflora. 

3.  F.  cauiinus,  when  on  the  stem. 

4.  F.  rameus,  when  on  the  branch. 

5.  F.  terminalis , when  on  the  apex  of  the  stem,  or 
branch ; as  Paris  quadrifolia , and  Chrysanthemum 
leucanthemum. 

6.  F.  axillaris , in  the  axilla;  as  in  Convallaria  mul- 
tiflora. 

7.  F.  foliaris,  on  the  surface  of  the  leaf ; as  in  Phyl- 
lanthus. 

8.  F.  radicalis,  on  the  root ; as  Carlina  acaulis, 
Crocus,  and  Colchicum. 

9.  F.  latitans,  concealed  in  a fleshy  receptacle ; as 
in  Ficus  carica. 

Again,  it  is  said  to  be, 

1.  Alternate;  as  in  Polyanthes  tuberosa. 

2.  Opposite;  as  in  Passiflora  hirsuta. 

3.  Unilateral,  hanging  all  to  one  side ; as  Erica  her - 
bacea , and  Silene  amcena. 

4.  Solitary;  as  in  Campanula  speculum , and  Car- 
duus  tuberosus. 

The  second,  or  compound  inflorescence,  has  the  fol- 
lowing kinds : 

1.  The  verticillus , or  whirl. 

2.  The  capitulum,  or  tuft. 

3.  The  spica,  or  spike. 

4.  The  racemus,  or  cluster. 

5.  The  corymbos,  or  corymb. 

6.  The  umbella,  or  umbel. 

7.  The  cyma,  or  cyme. 

8.  The  fasciculus,  or  fascicle. 

9.  The  panicula,  or  panicle. 

10.  The  thyrsus , or  bunch. 

11.  The  spadix , or  sheath. 

12.  The  amentum,  or  catkin. 

INFLUE'NZA.  (The  Italian  word  for  influence.) 

The  disease  is  so  named  because  it  was  supposed  to  be 
produced  by  a peculiar  influence  of  the  stars.  See 
Catarrhus  a.  contagione. 

INFRASCAPULA' RIS  (From  infra,  beneath,  and 
scapula,  the  shoulder-blade.)  A muscle  named  from 
its  position  beneath  the  scapula.  See  Subscapularis. 

INFRASPINA'TUS.  (From  infra,  beneath,  and 
spina,  the  spine.)  A muscle  of  the  humerus,  situated 
on  the  scapula.  It  arises  fleshy,  from  all  that  part  of 
the  dorsum  scapulae  which  is  below  its  spine ; and  from 
the  spine  itself,  as  far  as  the  cervix  scapulae.  The 
fibres  run  obliquely  towards  a tendon  in  the  middle  of 
a muscle,  which  runs  forwards,  and  adheres  to  the 
capsular  ligament.  It  is  inserted  by  a flat,  thick  tendon, 
into  the  upper  and  outer  part  of  the  large  protuberance 
on  the  head  of  the  os  humeri.  Its  use  is  to  roll  the  os 
humeri  outwards,  to  assist  in  raising  and  supporting 
it  when  raised,  and  to  pull  the  ligament  from  between 
the  bones.  This  muscle  and  the  supra  spinatus  are 
covered  by  an  aponeurosis,  which  extends  between  the 
cost®,  and  edges  of  the  spine  of  the  scapula,  and  gives 
rise  to  many  of  the  muscular  fibres. 

INFUNDIBULIFORMIS.  Funnel-shaped.  Ap- 
plied to  the  corolla  of  plants  ; as  in  Pulmonaria. 

INFUNDIBULUM.  (From  inf  undo , to  pour  in.) 
1.  A canal  that  proceeds  from  the  vulva  of  the  brain 
to  the  pituitary  gland  in  the  sella  turcica. 

2.  The  beginnings  of  the  excretory  duct  of  the  kid- 
ney, or  cavities  into  which  the  urine  is  first  received, 
from  the  secretory  cryptse,  are  called  infundibula. 

INFUSION.  ( Infusum ; from  infundo,  to  pour  ill.) 
Infusio.  A process  that  consists  in  pouring  water  of 
any  required  degree  of  temperature  on  such  substances 

453 


INF 


INN 


as  have  a loose  texture,  as  thin  bark,  wood  in  shavings, 
or  small  pieces,  leaves,  flowers,  &c.  and  suffering  it  to 
stand  a certain  time.  The  liquor  obtained  by  the  above 
process  is  called  an  inf  usion.  The  following  are  among 
the  most  approved  infusions. 

INFU'SUM.  See  Infusion . 

Infusum  anthemidis.  Infusion  of  chamomile.  Take 
of  chamomile-flowers,  two  drachms;  boiling-water,  half 
a pint.  Macerate  for  ten  minutes  in  a covered  vessel, 
and  strain.  For  its  virtues,  see  Anthemis  nobilis. 

Infusum  armoraci.®  compositum.  Compound  in- 
fusion of  horse-radish.  Take  of  fresh  horse-radish 
root,  sliced,  mustard-seeds,  bruised,  of  each  one  ounce; 
boiling  water,  a pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  in  a 
covered  vessel,  and  strain ; then  add  compound  spirit 
of  horse-radish,  a fluid  ounce.  See  Cochlearia  armo- 
racia. 

Infusum  aurantii  compositum.  Compound  in- 
fusion of  orange-peel.  Take  of  orange-peel,  dried, 
two  drachms;  lemon-peel,  fiesh,  a drachm;  cloves, 
bruised,  half  a drachm ; boiling  water,  half  a pint. 
Macerate  for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  in  a covered  ves- 
sel, and  strain.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Infusum  calumb®.  Infusion  of  calumba.  Take  of 
caiumba-root,  sliced,  a drachm;  boiling  water,  half  a 
pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  in  a covered  vessel,  and 
strain.  See  Calumba. 

Infusum  caryofhyllorum.  Infusion  of  cloves. 
Take  of  cloves,  bruised,  a drachm ; boiling  water,  half 
a pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  in  a covered  vessel, 
and  strain.  See  Eugenia  caryophyllata. 

Infusum  cascarill®.  Infusion  of  cascarilla.  Take 
of  cascarilla  bark,  bruised,  half  an  ounce;  boiling 
water,  half  a pint.  Macerate  lor  two  hours,  in  a co- 
vered vessel,  and  strain.  See  Croton  cascarilla. 

Infusum  catechu  compositum.  Compound  in- 
fusion of  catechu.  Take  of  extract  of  catechu,  two 
drachms  and  a half;  cinnamon  bark,  bruised,  half  a 
drachm  ; boiling  water,  half  a pint.  Macerate  for  an 
hour,  in  a covered  vessel,  and  strain.  See  Acacia 
catechu. 

Infusum  cinchona.  Infusion  of  cinchona.  Take 
of  lance-leaved  cinchona  bark,  bruised,  hplf  an  ounce ; 
boiling  water,  half  a pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  in 
a covered  vessel,  and  strain.  See  Cinchona. 

Infusum  cuspari®.  Infusion  of  cusparia.  Take 
of  cusparia  bark,  bruised,  two  drachms  ; boiling  water, 
half  a pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  in  a covered  ves- 
sel, and  strain.  See  Cusparia  febrifuga. 

Infusum  digitalis.  Infusion  of  lox-glove.  Take 
of  purple  fox-glove  leaves,  dried,  a drachm ; boiling 
water,  half  a pint.  Macerate  for  four  hours,  in  a co- 
vered vessel,  and  strain;  then  add  spirit  of  cinnamon, 
half  a fluid  ounce.  See  Digitalis  purpurea. 

Infusum  gentian.e  compositum.  Compound  in- 
fusion of  gentian.  Take  of  gentian-root,  sliced,  orange- 
peel,  dried,  of  each  a drachm  ; leinon-peel,  fresh,  two 
drachms;  boiling  water,  twelve  fluid  ounces.  Mace- 
rate for  an  hour,  in  a covered  vessel,  and  strain.  See 
Gentiana  lutea.  y 

Infusum  lini.  Infusion  of  linseed.  Take  of  lin- 
seed, bruised,  an  ounce ; liquorice-root,  sliced,  half  an 
ounce ; boiling,  water,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  two 
hours,  near  the  fire,  in  a covered  vessel,  and  strain. 
See  Linum  usitatissimum.. 

Infusum  quassi®.  Infusion  of  quassia.  Take  of 
quassia  wood,  a scruple;  boiling  water,  half  a pint. 
Macerate  for  two  hours  and  strain.  See  Quassia 
amara. 

Infusum  rhei.  Infusion  of  rhubarb.  Take  of 
rhubarb-root,  sliced,  a drachm ; boiling  water,  half  a 
pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  and  strain.  See  Rheum. 

Infusum  ros®.  Take  of  the  petals  of  red  rose, 
dried,  half  an  ounce ; boiling  water,  two  pints  and  a 
half;  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  three  fluid  draclnns;  double- 
refined  sugar,  an  ounce  and  a half.  Pour  the  water 
upon  the  petals  of  the  rose  in  a glass  vessel ; then  add 
the  acid,  and  macerate  for  half  an  hour.  Lastly, 
strain  the  infusion,  and  add  the  sugar  to  it.  See  Rosa 
Gallica. 

Infusum  senn®.  Infusion  of  senna.  Take  of 
senna-leaves,  an  ounce  and  a half;  ginger-root,  sliced, 
a drachin;  boiling  water,  a pint.  Macerate  for  an 
hour,  in  a covered  vessel,  and  strain  the  liquor.  See 
Cassia  senna. 

Infusum  simaroub®.  Infusion  of  simarouba.  Take 
of  simarouba  bark  bruised,  half  a arachm ; boiling  1 
454 


i water,  half  a pint.  Macerate  for  two  hours,  in  a co- 
vered vessel,  and  strain.  See  Quassia  simarouba. 

Infusum  tabaci.  Infusion  of  tobacco.  Take  of 
tobacco-leaves,  a drachm  ; boing  water,  a pint.  Mace 
rate  for  an  hour,  in  a covered  vessel,  and  strain.  See 
Nicotiana. 

INGENHOUZ,  John,  was  born  at  Breda,  in  1730 
Little  is  known  of  his  early  life  ; but  in  1767,  he  came 
to  England  to  learn  the  Suttonian  method  of  inocula- 
tion. In  the  following  year  he  went  to  Vienna,  to 
inoculate  some  of  the  imperial  family,  for  which  ser- 
vice he  received  ample  honours;  and  shortly  after 
performed  the  same  operation  on  the  Grand  Duke  of 
Tuscany,  when  he  returned  to  this  country,  and  spent 
the  remainder  of  his  life  in  scientific  pursuits.  In  1779, 
he  publishod  “Experiments  on  Vegetables,”  disco- 
vering their  great  power  of  purifying  the  air  in  sun- 
shine, but  injuring  it  in  the  shade  and  night.  He  war 
also  author  of  several  papers  in  the  Philosophical 
Transactions,  being  an  active  member  of  the  Royal 
Society.  He  died  in  1799. 

INGLUVIES.  1.  Gluttony. 

2.  The  claw,  crop,  or  gorge  of  a bird. 

INGRASSIAS,  John  Philip,  was  born  in  Sicily, 
and  graduated  at  Padua  in  1537  with  singular  reputa- 
tion ; whence  he  was  invited  to  a professorship  in 
several  of  the  Italian  schools;  bnt  he  gave  the  prefer- 
ence to  Naples,  where  he  distinguished  himself  greatly 
by  his  learning  and  judgment.  At  length  he  returned 
to  his  native  island,  and  settled  in  Palermo,  where  he 
was  also  highly  esteemed ; and  in  1563  made  first  physi- 
cian to  that  country  by  Philip  II.  of  Spain,  to  whom  it 
then  belonged.  This  office  enabled  him  to  introduce 
excellent  regulations  into  the  medical  practice  of  the 
island,  and  when  the  plague  raged  there  in  1575,  th«i 
judicious  measures  adopted  by  him  arrested  its  pro- 
gress; whence  the  magistrates  decreed  him  a largs 
reward,  of  which,  however,  he  only  accepted  a part, 
and  applied  that  to  religious  uses.  He  died  in  1580,  at 
the  age  of  70.  He  cultivated  anatomy  with  great 
assiduity,  and  is  reckoned  one  of  the  improvers  of  that 
art,  especially  in  regard  to  the  structure  of  the  cranium, 
and  the  organ  of  hearing.  He  is  said  also  to  have  dis- 
covered the  seminal  vesicles.  He  published  several 
works,  particularly  an  account  of  the  plague,  and  a 
treatise,  “DeTumoribus  prater  Naturam,”  which  is 
chiefly  a commentary  on  Avicenna,  but  is  deserving 
of  notice,  as  containing  the  first  modern  description  of 
Scarlatina,  under  the  name  of  Rossalia;  and  perhaps 
the  first  account  of  varicella,  which  he  called  crystalli. 
But  his  principal  work  was  published  by  his  nephew, 
in  1603,  entitled,  “Commentaries  on  Galen’s  Book 
concerning  the  Bones.” 

Ingra  vidation.  (From  ingravidor , to  be  great  with 
child.)  The  same  as  impregnation,  or  going  with  child. 

I'NGUEN.  ( Inguen , inis,  n.)  The  groin.  The 
lower  and  lateral  part  of  the  abdomen,  above  the  thigh. 

INGUINAL.  Inguinalis.  Appertaining  to  the  groin. 

Inguinal  hernia.  See  Hernia. 

Inguinal  ligament.  See  Poupart's  ligament. 

INHUMATION.  (From  inhumo,  to  put  into  the 
ground.)  The  burying  a patient  in  warm  or  medicated 
earth.  Some  chemists  have  fancied  thus  to  call  that 
kind  of  digesUon  which  is  performed  by  burying  the 
materials  in  dung,  or  iu  the  earth. 

1'nion.  (From  tj,  a nerve;  as  being  the -place  where 
nerves  originate.)  The  occiput.  Blancard  says  it  is 
the  beginning  of  the  spinal  marrow;  others  say  it  is 
the  back  part  of  the  neck. 

Injacula'tio.  (From  injaculor,  to  shdotinto.)  So 
Helmont  calls  a disorder  which  consists  of  a violent 
spasmodic  pain  in  the  stomach,  and  an  immobility  of 
the  body. 

INJE'CTION.  ( Injectio  ; from  injicio , to  cast  into.) 
A medicated  liquor  to  throw  into  a natural  or  preter- 
natural cavity  of  the  body  by  means  of  a syringe. 

INNOMINA'TUS.  (From  in,  priv.,  and  nomen,  a 
name.)  Some  parts  of  the  body  are  so  named:  thus, 
the  pelvic  bones,  which  in  the  young  subject  are  three 
in  number,  to  which  names  were  given,  become  one  in 
the  adult,  which  was  without  a name ; an  artery  from 
the  arch  of  the  aorta,  and  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves, 
because  they  appeared  to  have  been  forgotten  by  the 
older  anatomists.  . 

Innominata  artkria.  The  first  branch  given  off 
by  the  arch  of  the  aorta.  It  soon  divides  into  the  right 
carotid  and  right  subcla  ? n arteries. 


INN 


INN 

Innominati  nkrvi.  The  fifth  pair  of  nerves.  See 
'Trigemini. 

Innominatum  os.  (So  called  because  the  three  bones 
of  which  it  originally  was  formed  grew  together,  and 
formed  one  complete  bone,  which  was  then  left  name- 
less.) A large  irregular  bone,  situated  at  the  side  of  the 
pelvis.  It  is  divided  into  three  portions,  viz.  the  iliac, 
ischiatic,  and  pubic,  which  are  usually  described  as 
three  distinct  bones. 

The  os  ilium , or  haunch-bone,  is  of  a very  irregular 
shape.  The  lower  part  of  it  is  thick  and  narrow  ; its 
superior  portion  is  broad  and  thin,  terminating  in  a 
ridge,  called  the  spine  of  the  ilium,  and  more  commonly 
known  by  the  name  of  the  haunch.  The  spine  rises 
up  like  an  arch,  being  turned  somewhat  outward,  and 
from  this  appearance,  the  upper  part  of  the  pelvis, 
when  viewed  together,  has  not  been  improperly  com- 
pared to  the  wings  of  a phaeton.  This  spine,  in  the 
recent  subject,  appears  as  if  tipped  with  c.artilage;  but 
this  appearance  is  nothing  more  than  the  tendinous 
fibres  of  the  muscles  that  are  inserted  into  it.  Exter- 
nally, this  bone  is  unequally  prominent,  and  hollowed 
for  the  attachment  of  muscles;  and  internally,  at  its 
broadest  forepart,  it  is  smooth  and  concave.  At  its 
lower  part,  there  is  a considerable  ridge  on  its  inner 
surface.  This  ridge,  which  extends  from  the  os  sacrum, 
and  corresponds  with  a similar  prominence,  both  on 
that  bone  and  the  ischium,  forms,  with  the  inner  part 
of  the  ossa  pubis,  what  is  called  the  brim  of  the  pelvis. 
The  whole  of  the  internal  surface,  behind  this  ridge,  is 
very  unequal.  The  os  ilium  has  likewise  a smaller 
surface  posteriorly,  by  which  it  is  articulated  to  the 
sides  of  the  os  sacrum.  This  surface  has,  by  some, 
been  compared  to  the  human  ear,  .and,  by  others,  to 
the  head  of  a bird  : but  neither  of  these  comparisons 
seem  to  convey  any  just  idea  of  its  form  or  appearance. 
Its  upper  part  is  rough  and  porous;  lower  down  it  is 
more  solid.  It  is  firmly  united  to  the  os  sacrum  by  a 
cartilaginous  substance,  and  likewise  by  very  strong 
ligamentous  fibres,  which  are  extended  to  that  bone 
from  the  whole  circumference  of  this  irregular  surface. 
The  spine  of  this  bone,  which  is  originally  an  epiphysis, 
has  two  considerable  tuberosities,  one  anteriorly,  and 
the  other  posteriorly,  which  is  the  largest  of  the  two. 
The  ends  of  this  spine  too,  from  their  projecting  more 
than  the  parts  of  the  bone  below  them,  are  called 
spinal  processes.  Before  the  anterior  spinal  process, 
the  spine  is  hollowed,  where  part  of  the  Sartorius 
muscle  is  placed ; and  below  the  posterior  spinal  pro- 
cess, there  is  a very  large  niche  in  the  bone,  which,  in 
the  recent  subject,  has  a strong  ligament  stretched  over 
its  lower  part,  from  the  os  sacrum  to  the  sharp-pojnted 
process  of  the  ischium;  so  that  a great  hole  is  formed, 
through  which  pass  the  great  sciatic  nerve  and  the 
posterior  crural  vessels  under  the  pyriform  muscle, 
part  of  which  is  likewise  lodged  in  this  hole.  The 
lowest,  thickest,  and  narrowest  part  of  the  ilium,  in  con- 
junction with  the  other  two  portions  of  each  os  inaomi- 
natum,  helps  to  form  the  acetabulum  for  the  os  femoris. 

The  os  ischium , or  hip-bone,  which  is  the  lowest  ©f 
the  three  portions  of  each  os  innominatum,  is  of  a very 
irregular  figure,  and  usually  divided  into  its  body,  tu- 
berosity, and  ramus.  The  body  externally  forms  the 
inferior  portion  of  the  acetabulum,  and  sends  a sharp- 
pointed  process  backward,  called  the  spine  of  the 
ischium.  This  is  the  p-ocess  to  which  the  ligament  is 
attached,  which  was  just  now  described  as  forming  a 
great  foramen  for  the  passage  of  the  sciatic  nerve. 
The  tuberosity  is  large  and  irregular,  and  is  placed  at 
the  inferior  part  of  the  bone,  giving  origin  to  several 
muscles.  In  the  recent  subject,  it  seems  covered  with 
a cartilaginous  crust;  but  this  appearance,  as  in  the 
spine  of  the  ilium,  is  nothing  more  than  the  tendinous 
fibres  of  the  muscles  that  are  inserted  into  it.  This 
tuberosity,  which  is  the  lowest  portion  of  the  trunk, 
supports  us  when  we  sit.  Between  the  spine  and  the 
tuberosity  is  observed  a sinuosity,  covered  with  a car- 
tilaginous crust,  which  serves  as  a pulley,  on  which 
the  obturator  muscle  plays.  From  the  tuberosity,  the 
bone,  becoming  narrower  and  thinner,  forms  the  ramus, 
or  branch,  which,  passing  forwards  and  upwards, 
Makes,  with  the  ramus  of  the  os  pubis,  a large  hole, 
>f  an  oval  shape,  the  foramen  magnum  ischn,  which 
affords,  through  its  whole  circumference,  attachment 
*o  muscles.  This  foramen  is  more  particularly  noticed 
*n  describing  the  os  pubis. 

The  os  pubis , or  share-bone,  which  is  the  smallest  I 


of  the  three  portions  of  the  os  innominatum,  is  placed 
at  the  upper  and  forepart  of  the  pelvis,  where  the  two 
ossa  pubis  meet,  and  are  united  to  each  other  by  means 
of  a very  strong  cartilage,  which  constitutes  what  is 
called  the  symphysis  pubis.  Each  os  pubis  may  be 
divided  into'  its  body,  angle,  and  ramus.  The  body, 
which  is  the  outer  part,  is  joined  to  the  os  ilium.  The 
angle  comes  forward  to  form  the  symphisis,  and.thc 
ramus  is  a thin  apophysis,  which,  uniting  with  the 
ramus  of  the  ischium,  forms  the  foramen  magnum 
iscjiii,  or  thyroidcurn , as  it  has  been  sometimes  called, 
from  its  resemblance  to  a door  or  shield.  This  foramen 
is  somewhat  wider  above  than  below,  and  its  greatest 
diameter  is,  from  above  downwards,  and  obliquely 
from  within  outwards.  In  the  recent  subject,  it  is 
almost  completely  closed  by  a strong  fibrous  membrane, 
called  the  obturator  ligament.  Upwards  and  outwards, 
where  we  observe  a niche  in  the  bone,  the  fibres  of 
this  ligament  are  separated,  to  allow  a passage  to  the 
posterior  crural  nerve,  an  artery  and  vein.  The  great 
uses  of  this  foramen  seem  to  be  to  lighten  the  bones 
of  the  pelvis,  and  to  afford  a convenient  lodgment  to 
the  obturator  muscles.  The  three  bones  now  described 
as  constituting  the  os  innominatum  on  each  side,  ail 
concur  to  form  the  great  acetabulum,  or  cotyloid  cavily, 
which  receives  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone;  the  os  ilium 
and  os  ischium  making  each  about  two-fifths,  and  the 
os  pubis  one-fifth,  of  the  cavity.  This  acetabulum, 
which  is  of  considerable  depth,  is  of  a spherical  shape. 
Its  brims  are  high,  and,  in  the  recent  subject,  it  is  tipped 
with  cartilage.  These  brims,  however,  are  higher 
above  and  externally,  than  they  are  internally  and 
below,  where  we  observe  a niche  in  the  bone  (namely, 
the  ischium),  across  which  is  stretched  a ligament, 
forming  a hole  for  the  transmission  of  blood-vessels 
and  nerves  to  the  cavity  of  the  joint.  The  cartilage 
w hich  lines  the  acetabulum,  is  thickest  at  its  circum- 
ference, and  thinner  within,  where  a little  hole  is  to  be 
observed,  in  which  is  placed  the  apparatus  that  serves 
to  lubricate  the  joint,  and  facilitate  its  motions.  We 
are  likewise  able  to  discover  the  impression  made  by 
the  internal  ligament  of  the  os  femoris,  which,  by 
being  attached  both  to  this  cavity  and  to  the  head  of 
the  os  femoris,  helps  to  secure  the  latter  in  the  aceta- 
bulum. The  bones  of  the  pelvis  serve  to  support  the 
spine  and  upper  parts  of  the  body,  to  lodge  the  intes- 
tines, urinary  bladder,  and  other  viscera;  and  likewise 
to  unite  the  trunk  to  the  lower  extremities.  But, 
besides  these  uses,  they  are  destined,  in  the  female 
subject,  for  other  important  purposes ; and  the  ac- 
coucheur finds,  in  the  study  of  these  bones,  the  founda- 
tion of  all  midwifery  knowledge.  Several  eminent 
waiters  are  of  opinion,  that  in  difficult  parturition,  all 
the  bones  of  the  pelvis  undergo  a certain  degree  of 
separation.  It  has  been  observed,  likewise,  that  the 
cartilage  uniting  the  ossa  pubis  is  thicker,  and  of  a 
more  spongy  texture,  in  women  than  in  men  ; and 
therefore  more  likely  to  swell  and  enlarge  during  preg 
nancy.  That  many  instances  of  a partial  separation 
of  these  bones,  during  labour,  have  happened,  there 
can  be  no  doubt ; such  a separation,  however,  ought 
by  no  means  to  be  considered  as  a uniform  and  salutary 
work  of  nature,  as  some  writers  seem  to  think,  but  as 
the  effect  of  disease.  But  there  is  another  circumstance 
in  regard  to  this  part  of  osteology,  which  is  well  worthy 
of  attention  ; and  this  is,  the  different  capacities  of  the 
pelvis  in  the  male  and  female  subject.  It  has  been 
observed  that  the  os  sacrum  is  shorter  and  broader  in 
women  than  in  men  ; the  ossa  ilia  are  also  found  more 
expanded  ; whence  it  happens,  that  in  women  the  cen- 
tre of  gravity  does  not  fall  so  directly  on  the  upper  part 
of  the  thigh  as  in  men,  and  this  seems  to  be  the  reason 
why,  in  general,  they  step  with  less  firmness,  and  move 
their  hips  forward  in  walking.  From  these  circum- 
stances, also,  the  brim  of  the  female  pelvis  is  nearly 
of  an  oval  shape,  being  considerably  wider  from  side  to 
side,  than  from  the  symphysis  pubis  to  the  os  sacrum  ; 
whereas,  in  men,  it  is  rounder,  and  everywhere  of  less 
diameter.  The  inferior  opening  of  the  pelvis  is  like- 
wise proportionably  larger  in  the  female  subject,  the 
ossa  ischia  being  more  separated  from  each  other,  and 
the  foramen  ischii  larger,  so  that,  where  the  os  ischium 
and  os  pubis  are  united  together,  they  form  a greater 
circle ; the  os  sacrum  is  also  more  hollowed,  though 
shorter,  and  the  os  coccygis  more  loosely  connected, and, 
therefore,  capable  of  a greater  degree  of  motion  than 
I in  men. 


455 


INO 


INOCULATION.  Inoculatio.  The  insertion  of  a 
poison  into  any  part  of  the  body.  It  was  mostly  prac- 
tised with  that  of  the  smallpox,  because  we  had  learned, 
from  experience,  that  by  so  doing,  we  generally  pro- 
cured fewer  pustules,  and  a much  milder  disease,  than 
when  the  small-pox  was  taken  in  a natural  way.  Al- 
though the  advantages  were  evident,  yet  objections 
were  raised  against  inoculation,  on  the  notion  that  it 
exposed  the  person  to  some  risk,  when  he  might  have 
passed  through  life,  without  ever  taking  the  disease 
naturally ; but  it  is  obvious  that  he  was  exposed  to 
much  greater  danger,  from  the  intercourse  which  he 
must  have  with  his  fellow-creatures,  by  taking  the  dis- 
order in  a natural  way.  It  has  also  been  adduced,  that 
a person  is  liable  to  take  the  small-pox  a second  time, 
when  produced  at  first  by  artificial  means  ; but  such 
instances  are  very  rare,  besides  not  being  sufficiently 
authentic.  We  may.  conjecture  that,  in  most  of  those 
cases,  the  matter  used  was  not  variolous,  but  that  of 
some  other  eruptive  disorder,  such  as  the  chicken-pox, 
which  has  often  been  mistaken  for  the  small-pox. 
However,  since  the  discovery  of  the  preventive  power 
of  the  cow-pox,  small-pox  inoculation  has  been  ra- 
pidly falling  into  disuse.  See  Variola  vaccina. 

To  illustrate  the  benefits  arising  from  inoculation,  it 
lias  been  calculated  that  a third  of  the  adults  die  who 
take  the  disease  in  a natural  way,  and  about  one- 
seventh  of  the  children ; whereas  of  those  who  are 
inoculated,  and  are  properly  treated  afterward,  the 
proportion  is  probably  not  greater  than  one  in  five  or 
six  hundred. 

Inoculation  is  generally  thought  to  have  been  intro- 
duced into  Britain  from  Turkey,  by  Lady  Mary  Wort- 
ley  Montague,  about  the  year  1721,  whose  son  had 
been  inoculated  at  Constantinople,  during  her  resi- 
dence there,  and  whose  infant  daughter  was  the  first 
that  underwent  the  operation  in  this  country.  It  ap- 
pears, however,  to  have  been  well  known  before  this 
period,  both  in  the  south  of  Wales  and  Highlands  of 
Scotland.  Mungo  Park,  in  his  travels  into  the  interior 
of  Africa,  founiT that  inoculation  had  been  long  prac- 
tised by  the  Negroes  on  the  Guinea  coast ; and  nearly 
in  the  same  manner,  and  at  the  same  time  of  life,  as 
in  Europe.  It  is  not  clearly  ascertained  where  inocu- 
lation really  originated.  It  has  been  ascribed  to  the 
Circassians,  who  employed  it  as  the  means  of  preserv- 
ing the  beauty  of  their  women.  It  appears  more  pro- 
bable that  accident  first  suggested  the  expedient  among 
different  nations,  to  whom  the  small-pox  had  long  been 
known,  independently  of  any  intercourse  with  each 
other  ; and  what  adds  to  the  probability  of  this  con- 
jecture is,  that  in  most  places  where  inoculation  can  be 
traced  back,  for  a considerable  length  of  time,  it  seems 
to  have  been  practised  chiefly  by  old  women,  before  it 
was  adopted  by  regular  practitioners. 

Many  physicians  held  inoculation  in  the  greatest 
contempt  at  first,  from  its  supposed  origin  ; others  again 
discredited  the  fact  of  its  utility  ; while  others,  on  the 
testimony  of  the  success  in  distant  countries,  believed 
in  the  advantages  it  afforded,  but  still  did  not  think 
themselves  warranted  to  recommend  it  to  the  families 
they  attended  ; and  it  was  not  until  the  experiment  of 
it  had  been  made  on  six  criminals  (all  of  whom  reco- 
vered from  the  disease  and  regained  their  liberty), 
that  it  was  practised,  in  the  year  1726,  on  the  royal 
family,  and  afterward  adopted  as  a general  thing. 

To  ensure  success  from  inoculation,  the  following 
precautions  should  strictly  be  attended  to. 

1.  That  the  person  should  be  of  a good  habit  of 
body,  and  free  from  any  disease,  apparent  or  latent,  in 
order  that  he  may  not  have  the  disease  and  a bad  con- 
stitution, or  perhaps  another  disorder,  to  struggle  with 
at  the  same  time. 

2.  To  enjoin  a temperate  diet  and  proper  regimen  ; 
and,  where  the  body  is  plethoric,  or  gross,  to  make  use 
of  gentle  purges,  together  with  mercurial  and  antimo- 
nial  medicines. 

3.  That  the  age  of  the  person  be  as  little  advanced 
as  possible,  but  not  younger  if  it  can  be  avoided,  than 
four  months. 

4.  To  choose  a cool  season  of  the  year,  and  to  avoid 
external  heat,  either  by  exposure  to  the  sun,  sitting  by 
fires,  or  in  warm  chambers,  or  by  going  too  warmly 
clothed,  or  being  too  much  in  bed. 

5.  To  take  the  matter  from  a young  subject,  who  has 
the  small-pox  in  a favourable  way,  and  who  is  other- 
wise healthy,  and  free  from  disease ; and.  when 

4.76 


INS 

fresh  matter  can  be  procured,  to  give  it  the  prefer- 
ence. 

Where  matter  of  a benign  kind  cannot  be  procured, 
and  the  patient  is  evidently  in  danger  of  the  casual 
small-pox,  we  should  not,  however,  hesitate  a moment 
to  inoculate  from  any  kind  of  matter  that  can  be  pro- 
cured ; as  what  has  been  taken  in  malignant  kinds  of 
small-pox  has  been  found  to  produce  a very  mild  dis- 
ease. The  mildness  or  malignity  of  the  disease  ap- 
pears, therefore,  to  depend  little  or  not  at  all  on  the 
inoculating  matter.  Variolous  matter,  as  well  as  the 
vaccine,  by  being  kept  for  a length  of  time,  particularly 
in  a warm  place,  is  apt,  however,  to  undergo  decompo- 
sition, by  putrefaction ; and  then  another  kind  of  con- 
tagious material  has  been  produced. 

In  inoculating,  the  operator  is  to  make  the  slightest 
puncture  or  scratch  imaginable  in  the  arm  of  the  per- 
son, rubbing  that  part  of  the  lancet  which  is  besmeared 
with  matter  repeatedly  over  it,  by  way  of  ensuring  the 
absorption ; and  in  order  to  prevent  its  being  wiped  off, 
the  shirt  sleeve  ought  not  to  be  pulled  down  until  the 
part  is  dry. 

A singular  circumstance  attending  inoculation  is, 
that  when  this  fails  in  producing  the  disease,  the  in- 
oculated part  nevertheless  sometimes  inflames  and 
suppurates,  as  in  cases  where  the  complaint  is  about 
to  follow ; and  the  matter  produced  in  those  cases,  is 
as  fit  for  inoculation  as  that  taken  from  a person 
actually  labouring  under  the  disease.  The  same  hap- 
pens very  frequently  in  inoculation  for  the  cow- 
pox. 

If,  on  the  fourth  or  fifth  day  after  the  operation,  no 
redness  or  inflammation  is  apparent  on  the  edge  of  the 
wound,  we  ought,  then  to  inoculate  in  the  other  arm, 
in  the  same  manner  as  before ; or,  for  greater  certain- 
ty, we  may  do  it  in  both. 

Some  constitutions  are  incapable  of  having  the  dis- 
ease in  any  form.  Others  do  not  receive  the  disease  at 
one  time,  however  freely  exposed  to  its  contagion, 
even  though  repeatedly  inoculated,  and  yet  receive  it 
afterward  by  merely  approaching  those  labouring 
under  it. 

On  the  coming  on  of  the  febrile  symptoms,  which  is 
generally  on  the  seventh  day  in  the  inoculated  small- 
pox, the  patient  is  not  to  be  suffered  to  lie  abed,  but 
should  be  kept  cool,  and  partake  freely  of  antiseptic 
cooling  drinks.  See  Variola. 

INOSCULA'TION.  (Inosculatio ; from  in,  and 
osculum , a little  mouth.)  The  running  of  the  veins 
and  arteries  into  one  another,  or  the  interunion  of  the 
extremities  of  the  arteries  and  veins. 

INSA'NIA.  (From  in,  not,  and  sanus , sound.) 
Insanity,  or  deranged  intellect.  A genus  of  disease  in 
the  class  Neuroses,  and  order  Vesanice,  characterized 
by  erroneous  judgment,  from  imaginary  perceptions  or 
recollections,  attended  with  agreeable  emotions  in  per- 
sons of  a sanguine  temperament.  See  Mania. 

Inse'ssus.  (From  insideo,  to  sit  upon.)  A hot- 
bath,  simple  or  medicated,  over  which  the  patient 
sits. 

Insipie'ntia.  (From  in,  and  sapienlia,  wisdom.) 
A delirium  without  fever. 

Insola'tio.  (From  in,  upon,  and  sol,  the  sun.)  A 
disease  which  arises  from  a too  great  influence  of  the 
sun’s  heat  upon  the  head,  a coup  de  soleil. 

INSPIRATION.  ( Inspiratio  ; from  in,  and  spiro, 
to  breathe.)  The  act  of  drawing  the  air  into  the  lungs. 
See  Respiration. 

INSTINCT.  ( Instinctus , i Is.  m.)  Animals  are 

not  abandoned  by  nature  to  themselves : they  are  all 
employed  in  a series  of  actions  ; whence  results  that 
marvellous  whole  that  is  seen  among  organized  beings. 
To  incline  animals  to  the  punctual  execution  of  those 
actions  which  are  necessary  for  them,  nature  has  pro- 
vided them  with  instinct;  that  is,  propensities,  incli- 
nations, wants,  by  which  they  are  constantly  excited, 
and  forced  to  fulfil  the  intentions  of  nature. 

Instinct  may  excite  in  two  different  modes,  with  or 
without  knowledge  of  the  end.  The  first  is  enlight- 
ened instinct,  the  second  is  blind  instinct ; the  one 
is  particularly  the  gift  of  man,  the  other  belongs  to 
animals. 

In  examining  carefully  the  numerous  phenomena 
which  depend  on  instinct,  we  see  that  there  is  a double 
design  in  every  animal: — 1.  The  preservation  of  the 
individual.  2.  The  preservation  of  the  species.  Every 
animal  fulfils  this  end  in  its  own  way,  and  according  to 


INT 


INT 


Ita  organization;  there  are  therefore  as  many  dif- 
ferent instincts  as  there  are  different  species ; and  as 
the  organization  varies  in  individuals,  instinct  pre- 
sents individual  differences  sometimes  strongly  marked. 

We  recognise  two  sorts  of  instinct  in  man  : the  one 
depends  more  evidently  pn  his  organization,  on  his 
animal  state ; he  presents  it  in  whatever  state  he  is 
found.  This  sort  of  instinct  is  nearly  the  same  as  that 
of  animals.  The  other  kind  of  instinct  springs  from 
the  social  state  ; and,  without  doubt,  depends  on  orga- 
nization : what  vital  phenomenon  does  not  depend  on 
it  1 But  it  does  not  display  itself  except  when  man 
lives  in  civilized  society,  and  when  he  enjoys  all  the 
advantages  of  that  state. 

To  the  first,  that  may  be  called  animal  instinct,  be- 
long hunger,  thirst,  the  necessity  of  clothing,  of  a 
covering  from  the  weather ; the  desire  of  agreeable 
sensations ; the  fear  of  pain  and  of  death  ; the  desire 
to  injure  others,  if  there  is  any  danger  to  be  feared 
from  them,  or  any  advantage  to  arise  from  hurting 
them  ; the  venereal  inclinations ; the  interest  inspired 
by  children  ; inclination  to  imitation  ; to  live  in  society, 
which  leads  man  to  pass  through  the  different  degrees 
of  civilization,  &c.  These  different  instinctive  feel- 
ings incline  him  to  concur  in  the  established  order  of 
organized  beings.  Man  is,  of  all  the  animals,  the  one 
whose  natural  wants  are  most  numerous,  and  of  the 
greatest  variety ; which  is  in  proportion  to  the  extent 
of  his  intelligence:  if  he  had  only  these  wants,  he 
would  have  always  a marked  superiority  over  the 
animals. 

When  man,  living  in  society,  can  easily  provide  for 
all  the  wants  which  we  have  mentioned,  he  has  then 
time  and  powers  of  action  more  than  his  original 
wants  require : then  new  wants  urise,  that  may  be 
called  social  wants : such  is  that  of  a lively  perception 
of  existence  ; a want  which,  the  more  it  is  satisfied, 
the  more  difficult  it  becomes,  because  the  sensations 
become  blunted  by  habit. 

This  want  of  a vivid  existence,  added  to  the  conti- 
nually increasing  feebleness  of  the  sensations,  causes  a 
mechanical  restlessness,  vague  desires,  excited  by  the 
remembrance  of  vivid  sensations  formerly  felt:  in 
order  to  escape  from  this  state,  man  is  continually 
forced  to  change  his  object,  or  to  overstrain  sensations 
of  the  same  kind.  Thence  arises  an  inconstancy 
which  never  permits  our  desires  to  rest,  and  a progres- 
sion of  desires,  which,  always  annihilated  by  enjoy- 
ment, and  irritated  by  remembrance,  proceed  forward 
without  end  ; thence  arises  ennui,  by  which  the  civil- 
ized idler  is  incessantly  tormented. 

The  want  of  vivid  sensations  is  balanced  by  the 
love  of  repose  and  idleness  in  the  opulent  classes  of 
society.  These  contradictory  feelings  modify  each 
other,  and  from  their  reciprocal  reaction  results  the 
love  of  power,  of  consideration,  of  fortune,  &c.  which 
gives  us  the  means  of  satisfying  both. 

These  two  instinctive  sensations  are  not  the  only 
ones  which  spring  from  the  social  state ; a crowd  of 
others  arise  from  it,  equally  real,  though  less  important; 
besides,  the  natural  wants  become  so  changed  as  no 
longer  to  be  known ; hunger  is  often  replaced  by  a 
capricious  taste ; the  venereal  desires  by  a feeling  of 
quite  another  nature,  &c. 

The  natural  wants  have  a considerable  influence 
upon  those  which  arise  from  society ; these,  in  their 
turn,  modify  the  former;  and  if  we  add  age,  tempera- 
ment, sex,  &c.  which  tend  to  change  every  sort  of  want, 
we  will  have  an  idea  of  the  difficulty  which  the  study 
of  the  instinct  of  man  presents.  This  part  of  physi- 
ology is  also  scarcely  begun.  We  remark,  however, 
that  the  social  wants  necessarily  carry  along  with  them 
the  enlargement  of  the  understanding;  there  is  no 
comparison  in  regard  to  the  capacity  of  the  mind,  be- 
tween a man  in  the  higher  class  of  society,  and  a man 
whose  physical  powers  are  scarcely  sufficient  to  pro- 
vide for  his  natural  wants. 

INTEGER.  When  applied  to  leaves,  perianths, 
petals,  &c.  folia  integra , means  undivided  ; and  is  said 
of  the  simple  leaves,  as  those  of  the  orchises  and 
grasses.  The  female  flower  of  the  oak  affords  an  ex- 
ample of  the  perianthium  integrum , and  the  petals  of 
the  JVigella  arvensis  and  Silene  quinquevulncra  are 
described  as  petala  integra. 

INTEGERRIMUS.  Most  perfect  or  entire.  Ap- 
plied to  leaves,  the  margin  of  which  has  no  teeth, 
notches,  or  incisions.  It  regards  solely  the  margin- 


whereas  the  f olium  integrum  respects  the  whole  shape, 
and  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  margin. 

INTERCO  STAL.  (Intercostalis ; from  inter,  be- 
tween, and  costa , a rib.)  A name  given  to  muscles, 
vessels,  &c.  which  are  between  the  ribs. 

Intercostal  arteries.  Arteries  intercostales. 
The  arteries  which  run  between  the  ribs.  The  superior 
intercostal  artery  is  a branch  of  the  subclavian.  The 
other  intercostal  arteries  are  given  off  from  the  aorta. 

Intercostal  muscles.  Intercostales  extemi  et 
interni.  Between  the  ribs  on  each  siae  are  eleven 
double  rows  of  muscles.  These  are  the  intercostales 
extemi , and  interni..  Galen  has  very  properly  observed, 
that  they  decussate  each  other  like  the  strokes  of  the 
letter  X.  The  intercostales  extemi  arise  from  the 
lower  edge  of  each  superior  rib,  and,  running  obliquely 
downwards  and  forwards,  are  inserted  into  the  upper 
edge  of  each  inferior  rib,  so  as  to  occupy  the  intervals 
of  the  ribs,  from  as  far  back  as  the  spine  to  their  car- 
tilages ; but  from  their  cartilages  to  the  sternum,  there 
is  only  a thin  aponeurosis  covering  the  internal  inter- 
costales. The  intercostales  interni  arise  and  are  in- 
serted in  the  same  manner  as  the  external.  They  begin 
at  the  sternum,  and  extend  as  far  as  the  angles  of  the 
ribs,  their  fibres  running  obliquely  backwards.  These 
fibres  are  spread  over  a considerable  part  of  the  inner 
surface  of  the  ribs,  so  as  to  be  longer  than  those  of  the 
external  intercostals.  Some  of  the  posterior  portions 
of  the  internal  intercostals  pass  over  one  rib,  and  are 
inserted  into  the  rib  below.  Verheyen  first  described 
these  portions  as  separate  muscles,  under  the  name  of 
infra  costales.  Winslow  has  adopted  the  same  name. 
Cowper,  and  after  him  Douglas,  call  them  costarum 
depressores  proprii.  These  distinctions,  however,  are 
altogether  superfluous,  as  they  are  evidently  nothing 
more  than  appendages  of  the  intercostals.  The  num- 
ber of  these  portions  varies  in  different  subjects.  Most 
commonly  there  are  only  four,  the  first  of  which  runs 
from  the  second  rib  to  the  fourth,  the  second  from  the 
third  rib  to  the  fifth,  the  third  from  the  fourth  rib  to 
the  sixth,  and  the  fourth  from  the  fifth  rib  to  the  seventh. 
The  internal  intercostals  of  the  two  inferior  false  ribs 
are  frequently  so  thin,  as  to  be  with  difficulty  separated 
from  the  external ; and,  in  some  subjects,  one  or  both 
of  them  seem  to  be  altogether  wanting.  It  was  the 
opinion  of  the  ancients,  that  the  external  intercostals 
serve  to  elevate,  and  the  internal  to  depress  the  ribs. 
They  were  probably  led  to  this  opinion,  by  observing 
the  different  direction  of  their  fibres ; but  it  is  now  well 
known,  that  both  have  the  same  use,  which  is  that 
of  raising  the  ribs  equally  during  inspiration.  Fallo- 
pius was  one  of  the  first  who  ventured  to  call  in  ques- 
tion the  opinion  of  Galen  on  this  subject,  by  contend- 
ing that  both  layers  of  the  intercostals  serve  to  elevate 
the  ribs.  In  this  opinion  he  was  followed  by  Hierony- 
mus Fabricius,  our  countryman  Mayow,  and  Borelli. 
But,  towards  the  close  of  the  last  century,  Bayle,  a 
writer  of  some  eminence,  and  professor  at  Toulouse, 
revived  the  opinion  of  the  ancients  by  the  following 
arguments  : — He  observed,  that  the  oblique  direction 
of  the  fibres  of  the  internal  intercostals  is  such,  that 
in  each  inferior  rib,  these  fibres  are  nearer  to  the  verte- 
brae than  they  are  at  their  superior  extremities,  or  in 
the  rib  immediately  above ; and  that,  of  course,  they 
must  serve  to  draw  the  rib  downwards,  as  towards 
the  most  fixed  point.  This  plausible  doctrine  was 
adopted  by  several  eminent  writers,  and  among  others, 
by  Nicholls,  Hoadley,  and  Schreiber;  but  above  all, 
by  Hamberger,  who  went  so  far  as  to  assert,  that  not 
only  the  ribs,  but  even  the  sternum,  are  pulled  down 
wards  by  these  muscles,  and  constructed  a particular 
instrument  to  illustrate  this  doctrine.  He  pretended 
likewise  that  the  intervals  of  the  ribs  are  increased  by 
their  elevation,  and  diminished  by  their  depression; 
but  he  allowed  that,  while  those  parts  of  the  internal 
intercostals  that  are  placed  between  the  bony  part  of 
the  ribs  pull  them  downwards,  the  anterior  portions  of 
the  muscle,  which  are  situated  between  the  cartilages, 
concur  with  the  external  intercostals  in  raising  them 
upwards.  These  opinions  gave  rise  to  a warm  and 
interesting  controversy,  in  which  Hamberger  and  Hal- 
ler were  the  principal  disputants.  The  former  argued 
chiefly  from  theory,  and  the  latter  from  experiments 
on  living  animals,  which  demonstrate  the  fallacy  cf 
Hamberger’s  arguments,  and  prove,  beyond  a doubt, 
that  the  internal  intercostals  perform  the  same  func- 
tions as  the  external. 


457 


1NT 


INT 


Intercostal  nerve.  Nervus  intercostalis.  Great 
intercostal  nerve.  Sympathetic  nerve.  The  great  in- 
tercostal nerve  arises  in  the  cavity  of  the  cranium, 
from  a branch  of  the  sixth  and  one  of  the  fifth  pair, 
uniting  into  one  trunk,  which  passes  out  of  the  cranium 
through  the  carotid  canal,  and  descends  by  the  sides 
of  the  bodies  of  the  vertebra  of  the  neck,  thorax,  loins, 
and  os  sacrum  : in  its  course,  it  receives  the  small  ac- 
cessory branches  from  all  the  thirty  pair  of  spinal 
nerves.  In  the  neck,  it  gives  off  three  cervical  gan- 
glions, the  upper,  middle,  and  lower ; from  which  the 
cardiac  and  pulmonary  nerves  arise.  In  the  thorax, 
it  gives  oft' the  splanchnic  or  anterior  intercostal,  which 
perforates  the  diaphragm,  and  forms  the  semilunar 
ganglions,  from  which  nerves  pass  to  all  the  abdominal 
viscera.  They  also  form  in  the  abdomen  ten  peculiar 
plexuses,  distinguished  by  the  name  of  the  viscus,  to 
which  they  belong,  as  the  coeliac,  splenic,  hepatic, 
superior,  middle,  and  lower  mesenteric,  two  renal,  and 
two  spermatic  plexuse^.  The  posterior  intercostal 
nerve  gives  accessory  branches  about  the  pelvis  and 
ischiatic  nerve,  and  at  length  terminates. 

Intercostal  veins.  The  intercostal  veins  empty 
their  blood  into  the  vena  azygos. 

INTERCURRENT.  Those  fevers  which  happen 
in  certain  seasons  ordy,  are  called  stationary : others 
are  called,  by  Sydenham,  intercurrents. 

Inte'rcus.  (From  inter , between,  and  cutis,  the 
skin.)  A dropsy  between  the  skin  and  the  flesh.  See 
Anasarca. 

INTERDE'NTIUM.  (From  inter , between,  and 
dens,  a tooth.)  The  intervals  between  teeth  of  the 
same  order. 

INTERDI'GITUM.  (From  inter,  between,  and 
digitus , a toe,  or  finger.)  A corn  between  the  toes,  or 
wart  between  the  fingers. 

INTERF^EML'NEUM.  (From  inter,  between,  and 
feemen,  the  thigh.)  The  perinaeum,  or  space  between 
the  anus  and  pudendum. 

Interlu'nius.  (From  inter , between,  and  luna , 
the  moon;  because  it  was  supposed  to  affect  those 
who  were  born  in  the  wane  of  the  moon.)  The  epi- 
lepsy. 

Intermediate  affinity.  See  Affinity  intermediate. 

INTERMITTENT.  ( Intermittens ; from  inter, 
between,  and  mitto,  to  send  away.)  A disease  is  so 
called  which  does  not  continue  until  it  finishes  one 
way  or  the  other,  as  most  diseases  do,  but  ceases  and  re- 
turns again  at  regular  or  uncertain  periods ; as  agues,  & c. 

Intermittent  fever.  See  Febris  intermittens. 

INTERNODIS.  Applied  to  a flowerstalk  or  pedun- 
culus,  when  it  proceeds  from  the  intermediate  part 
of  a branch  between  two  leaves ; as  in  Ehretia  inter- 
nodis. 

Internu'ntii  dies.  (From  internuncio , to  go  be- 
tween.) Applied  to  critical  days,  or  such  as  stand 
between  the  increase  of  a disorder  and  its  decrease. 

Intero'ssei  manus.  (Interosseus ; from  inter,  be- 
tween, and  os,  the  bone.)  These  are  small  muscles 
situated  between  the  metacarpal  bones,  and  extending 
from  the  bones  of  the  carpus  to  the  fingers.  They  are 
divided  into  internal  and  external;  the  former  are  to 
be  seen  only  on  the  palm  of  the  hand,  but  the  latter 
are  conspicuous  both  on  the  palm  and  back  of  the 
hand.  The  interossei  intemi  are  three  in  number. 
Tire  first,  which  Albinus  names  posterior  indicis, 
arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  basis  and  inner 
part  of  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the  forefinger,  and 
likewise  from  the  upper  part  of  that  which  supports 
the  middle  finger.  Its  tendon  passes  over  the  articula- 
lion  of  this  part  of  these  bones  with  the  forefinger, 
and,  uniting  with  the  tendinous  expansion  that  is  sent 
off  from  the  extensor  digitorurn  communis,  is  inserted 
into  the  posterior  convex  surface  of  the  first  phalanx 
of  that  finger.  The  second  and  third,  to  which  Albinus 
gives  the  names  of  prior  annularis , and  interrosseus 
auricularis,  arise,  in  the  same  manner,  from  the  basis 
of  the  outsides  of  the  metacarpal  bones  that  sustain 
the  ring-finger  and  the  little  finger,  and  are  inserted 
into  the  outside  of  the  tendinous  expansion  of  the  ex- 
tensor digitorurn  communis  that  covers  each  of  those 
fingers.  These  three  muscles  draw  the  fingers  into 
which  they  are  inserted,  towards  the  thumb.  The 
inttrossei  externi  are  four  in  number;  for  among  these 
is  included  the  small  muscle  that  is  situated  on  the 
outside  of  the  metacarpal  bone  that  supports  the  fore- 
finger. Douglas  calls  it  extensor  tertii  intemodii  in- 


dicis, and  Winslow  semi-inter osseus  indicis.  Albinus, 
who  describes  it  among  the  interrossei,  gives  it  the 
name  of  prior  indicis.  This  first  interosseus  externus 
arises  by  two  tendinous  and  fleshy  portions.  One  of 
these  springs  from  the  upper  half  of  the  inner  side  of 
the  first  bone  of  the  thumb,  and  the  other  from  the 
ligaments  that  unite  the  os  trapezoides  to  the  metacar- 
pal bone  of  the  forefinger,  and  likewise  from  all  the 
outside  of  this  latter  bone.  These  two  portions  unite 
as  they  descend,  and  terminate  in  a tendon,  which  is 
inserted  into  the  outside  of  that  part  of  the  tendinous 
expansion  from  the  extensor  digitorurn  communis  that 
is  spread  over  the  posterior  convex  surface  of  the  fore- 
finger. The  second,  to  which  Albinus  gives  the  name 
of  prior  medii,  is  not  quite  so  thick  as  the  last  described’ 
muscle.  It  arises  by  two  heads,  one  of  which  springs 
from  the  inner  side  of  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the  fore- 
finger, chiefly  towards  its  cpr.vex  surface,  and  the  other 
arises  from  the  adjacent  ligaments,  and  from  the  whole 
outer  side  of  the  metacarpal  bone  that  sustains  the 
middle  finger.  These  two  portions  unite  as  they  de- 
scend, and  terminate  in  a tendon,  which  is  inserted, 
in  the  same  manner,  as  the  preceding  muscle,  into  the 
outside  of  the  tendinous  expansion  that  covers  the  pos- 
terior part  of  the  middle  finger.  The  third  belongs 
likewise  to  the  middle  finger,  and  is  therefore  named 
posterior  medii  by  Albinus.  It  arises,  like  the  last  de- 
scribed muscle,  by  two  origins,  which  spring  from  the 
roots  of  the  metacarpal  bones  of  the  ring  and  middle 
fingers,  and  from  the  adjacent  ligaments,  and  is  in- 
serted into  the  inside  of  the  same  tendinous  expansion 
as  the  preceding  muscle.  The  fourth,  to  which  Albi- 
nus gives  the  name  of  posterior  annularis,  differs  from 
the  last  two  only  in  its  situation,  xvhicb  is  between  the 
metacarpal  bones  of  the  ring  and  little  fingers.  It  is 
inserted  into  the  inside  of  the  tendinous  expansion  of 
the  extensor  digitorurn  communis,  that  covers  the  pos- 
terior part  of  the  ring-finger.  All  these  four  muscles 
serve  to  extend  the  fingers  into  which  they  are  inserted, 
and  likewise  to  draw  them  inwards,  towards  the 
thumb,  except  the  third,  or  posterii  medii , which,  from 
its  situation  and  insertion,  is  calculated  to  pull  the 
middle  finger  outwards. 

Interossei  pedis.  These  small  muscles,  in  their 
situation  between  the  metatarsal  bones,  resemble  the 
interossei  of  the  hand,  and,  like  them,  are  divided  into 
internal  and  external.  The  interossei  pedis  intemi 
are  three  in  number.  They  arise  tendinous  and  fleshy, 
from  the  basis  and  inside  of  the  metatarsal  bones  of  the 
middle,  the  third,  and  little  toes,  in  the  same  manner 
as  those  of  the  hand,  and  they  each  terminate  in  a 
tendon  that  runs  to  the  inside  of  the  first  joint  of  these 
toes,  and  from  thence  to  their  upper  surface,  where  it 
loses  itself  in  the  tendinous  expansion  that  is  sent  off 
from  the  extensors.  Each  of  these  three  muscles 
serves  to  draw  the  toe  into  which  it  is  inserted  towards 
the  great  toe.  The  interossei  extemi  are  four  in  num- 
ber. The  first  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the 
outside  of  the  root  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  great 
toe,  from  the  os  cuneiforme  internum,  and  from  the 
root  of  the  inside  of  the  metatarsal  bone  of  the  foretoe 
Its  tendon  is  inserted  into  the  inside  of  the  tendinous 
expansion  that  covers  the  back  part  of  the  toes.  The 
second  is  placed  in  a similar  manner  between  the 
metatarsal  bones  of  the  fore  and  middle  toes,  and  is 
inserted  into  the  outside  of  the  tendinous  expansion 
on  the  back  part  of  the  foretoe.  The  third  and  fourth 
are  placed  between  the  two  next  metatarsal  bones,  and 
are  inserted  into  the  outside  of  the  middle  and  third 
toes.  The  first  of  these  muscles  draws  the  foretoe 
inwards  towards  the  great  toe.  The  three  others  pull 
the  toes,  into  which  they  are  inserted,  outwards.  They 
all  assist  in  extending  the  toes. 

INTEROSSEOUS.  (Interosseus ; from  inter,  be- 
tween, and  os,  a bone.)  A name  given  to  muscles, 
ligaments,  &.c.  which  are  between  bones. 

Interpella'tus.  (From  interpello , to.  interrupt.) 
A name  given  by  Paracelsus  to  a disease  attended  with 
irregular  or  uncertain  paroxysms. 

Interpola'tus  dies.  (From  interpolo,  to  renew.) 
In  Paracelsus,  these  are  the  days  interpolated  between 
two  paroxysms. 

INTERSCAPU'LIUM.  (From  inter,  between,  and 
scapula , the  shoulder-blade.)  That  part  of  tire  spine 
which  lies  between  the  shoulders. 

INTERSE'PTUM.  (From  inter,  between,  and  sep- 
tum, an  enclosure.)  The  uvula  and  the  septum  narium. 


INV 


INT 

INTERSPINA'LIS.  (From  inter , between,  and 
spina,  the  spine.)  Muscles,  nerves,  &c.  are  so  named 
which  are  between  the  processes  of  the  spine. 

Inter  spin  ales.  The  fleshy  portions  between  the 
spinous  processes  of  the  neck,  back,  and  loins,  distin- 
guished by  the  names  of  interspinales  colli,  dorsi  et 
lumborum.  Those  which"  connect  processes  of  the 
back  and  loins,  are  rather  small  tendons  than  muscles  : 
they  draw  these  processes  nearer  to  each  other. 

INTERTRANSVERSA'LES.  Four  distinct  small 
bundles  of  flesh,  which  fill  up  the  spaces  between  the 
transverse  processes  of  the  vertebrae  of  the  loins,  and 
serve  to  draw  them  towards  each  other 

INTERTRl'GO.  (From  inter,  between,  and  tern, 
to  rub.)  An  excoriation  about  the  anus,  groins,  axilla, 
or  other  parts  of  the  body,  attended  with  inflammation 
and  moisture.  It  is  most  commonly  produced  by  the 
irritation  of  the 'urine,  from  riding,  or  some  acrimony 
in  children. 

INTE'STINE.  ( Intestmum : trom  intus,  within.) 
The  convoluted  membraneous  tube  that  extends  from 
the  stomach  to  the  anus,  receives  the  ingested  food,  re- 
tains it  a certain  time,  mixes  with  it  the  bile  and  pan- 
creatic juice,  propels  the  chyle  into  the  lacteals,  and 
covers  the  faeces  with  mucus,  is  so  called.  The  intes- 
tines are  situated  in  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen,  and 
are  divided  into  the  small  and  large,  which  have,  be- 
sides their  size,  other  circumstances  of  distinction. 

The  small  intestines  are  supplied  internally  with 
folds,  called  valvuloe  conniventes,  and  have  no  bands 
on  their  external  surface.  The  large  intestines  have 
no  folds  internally;  are  supplied  externally  with  three 
strong  muscular  bands,  which  run  parallel  upon  the 
surface,  and  give  the  intestines  a saccated  appearance  ; 
they  have  also  small  fatty  appendages,  called  appendi- 
cuIcb  epiploicce. 

The  first  portion  of  the  intestinal  tube,  for  about  the 
extent  of  twelve  fingers’  breadth,  is  called  the  duode- 
num; it  lies  in  the  epigastric  region;  makes  three 
turnings,  and  between  the  first  and  second  flexure  re- 
ceives by  a common  opening,  the  pancreatic  duct,  and 
the  ductus  communis  choledochus.  It  is  in  this  por- 
tion of  the  intestines  that  chylificaiion  is  chiefly  per- 
formed. The  remaining  portion  of  the  small  intestines 
is  distinguished  by  an  imaginary  division  into  the  jeju- 
num and  ileum. 

The  jejunum,  which  commences  where  the  duode- 
num ends,  is  situated  in  the  umbilical  region,  and  is 
mostly  found  empty ; hence  its  name : it  is  everywhere 
covered  with  red  vessels,  and,  about  an  hour  and  a half 
after  a meal,  with  destended  lacteals. 

The  ileum  occupies  the  hypogastric  region  and  the 
pelvis,  is  of  a more  pallid  colour  than  the  former,  and 
terminates  by  a transverse  opening  into  the  largo  intes- 
tines, which  is  called  the  valve  of  the  ileum , valve  of 
the  ctBcum,  or  the  valve  of  Tulpius. 

The  beginning  of  the  large  intestines  is  firmly  tied 
down  in  the  right  iliac  region,  and  for  the  extent  of 
about  four  fingers’  breadth  is  called  the  ccecum , having 
adhering  to  it  a worm-like  process,  called  the  processus 
cocci  vermiformis , or  appendicula  coed  vermiformis. 
The  great  intestine  then  commences  colon,  ascends  to- 
wards the  liver,  passes  across  the  abdomen,  under  the 
stomach,  to  the  left  side,  where  it  is  contorted  like  the 
letter  5,  and  descends  to  the  pelvis : hence  it  is  divided 
in  this  course  into  the  ascending  portion , the  transverse 
arch,  and  the  sigmoid  flexure.  When  it  has  reached 
the  pelvis,  it  is  called  the  rectum , from  whence  it  pro- 
ceeds in  a straight  line  to  the  anus. 

The  intestinal  canal  is  composed  of  three  mem- 
branes, or  coats;  a common  one  from  the  peritoneum,  a 
muscular  coat , and  a villous  coat , the  villi  being  formed 
of  the  fine  terminations  of  arteries  and  nerves,  and  the 
origins  of  lacteals  and  lymphatics.  The  intestines  are 
connected  to  the  body  by  the  mesentery  ; theduodenum 
has  also  a peculiar  collecting  cellular  substance,  as 
have  likewise  the  colon  and  rectum,  by  whose  means 
the  former  is  firmly  accreted  to  the  back,  the  colon  to 
the  kidneys,  and  the  latter  to  the  os  coccygis,  and,  in 
women,  to  the  vagina.  The  remaining  portion  of  the 
tube  is  loose  in  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  The  arte- 
ries of  this  canal  are  branches  of  the  superior  and  infe- 
rior mesenteric,  and  the  duodenal.  The  veins  evacu- 
ate their  blood  into  the  vena  portae.  The  nerves  are 
branches  of  the  eight  pair  and  intercostals.  The 
lacteal  vessels , which  originate  principally  from  the 
jejunum,  proceed  to  the  glands  in  the  mesentery. 


INTRAFOLIACEUS.  Applied  to  stipuls,  which 
are  above  the  footstalk,  and  internal  with  respect  to 
the  leaf;  as  in  Ficus  carica  and  Mcrus  nigra. 

Intrica'tus.  (From  intrico,  to  entangle  ; so  called 
from  its  intricate  folds  ) A muscle  of  the  ear. 

Intri'nsecus.  (From  intra,  within,  and  secus,  to- 
wards.) A painful  disorder  of  an  internal  part 

Introce'ssio.  (From  introcedo,  to  go  in.)  Depres- 
sio.  A depression  or  sinking  of  any  part  inwards. 

INTUS-SUSCE'PTION.  ( Intus- susceptio , and  in - 
tro-susceptio ; from  intus,  within,  and  suscipio , to  re- 
ceive.) A disease  of  the  intestinal  tube,  and  most  fre- 
quently of  the  small  intestines ; it  consists  in  a portion 
of  gut  passing  for  some  length  within  another  portion. 

I'NTYBUS.  (From  in,  and  tuba , a hollow  instru- 
ment: so  named  from  tite  hollowness  of  its  stalk.)  See 
Cichorium  endivia. 

I'NULA.  (Contracted  or  corrupted  from  helenium, 
y\eviov,  fabled  to  have  sprung  from  the  tears  of  Helen.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaan  sys* 
tern.  Class,  Syngencsia ; Order,  Polygamia  superflua. 

2.  The  herb  inula , or  elecampane.  See  Inula  hele- 
nium. 

Inula , common.  See  Inula  helenium. 

Inula  crithmoides.  Caaponga  of  the  Brazilians. 
Trifolia  spica;  Crithmum  marinum  non  spinosum. 
The  leaves  and  young  stalks  of  this  plant  are  pickled  for 
the  use  of  the  table ; they  are  gently  diuretic. 

Inula  dysenterica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
smaller  inula,  Conyza  media.  Arnica  Suedensis,  Arnica 
spurio , Conyza  : Inula — amplexicaulibus,  cordato  ob- 
longis ; caule  villoso,  paniculato ; squamis  calycinis, 
setaceis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  indigenous  plant  was 
once  considered  as  possessing  great  antidyseuteric  vir- 
tues. The  whole  herb  is  to  the  taste  aciid,  and  at  the 
same  time  rather  aromatic.  It  is  now  fallen  into  dis- 
use. 

Inula  helenium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  inula  or  elecampane.  Enula  campana  : He- 
lenium.  Inula — foliis  amplexicaulibus  ovatis  rugosis 
subtus  tomentosis , calycum  squamis  ovatis,  of  Lin- 
naeus. This  plant,  though  a native  of  Britain,  is  sel- 
dom met  with  in  its  wild  state,  but  mostly  cultivated. 
The  root,  which  is  the  part  employed  medicinally,  in 
its  recent  state,  has  a weaker  and  less  grateful  smell 
than  when  thoroughly  dried,  and  kept  for  a length  of 
time,  by  which  it  is  greatly  improved ; its  odour  then  ap- 
proaching to  that  of  Florentine  orris-root.  It  was  former- 
ly in  high  estimation  in  dyspepsia,  pulmonary  affections, 
and  uterine  obstructions,  but  is  now  fallen  into  disuse. 
From  the  root  of  this  plant,  Rose  first  extracted  the 
peculiar  vegetable  principle  called  inulin ■ Funke  has 
since  given  the  following  as  the  analysis  of  elecampane 
root: — A crystallizable volatile  oil ; inulin;  extractive; 
acetic  acid ; a crystallizable  resin ; gluten : a fibrous 
matter.  See  Inulin. 

INULIN  In  examining  the  Inula  kelemum,  or 
Elecampane,  Rose  imagined  he  discovered  a new  vege- 
table product,  to  which  the  name  of  Inulin  has  been 
given.  It  is  white  and  pulverulent,  like  starch.  When 
thrown  on  red-hot  coals,  it  melts,  diffusing  a white 
smoke,  with  the  smell  of  burning  sugar.  It  yields,  on 
distillation  in  a retort,  all  the  products  furnished  by 
gum.  It  dissolves  readily  in  hot  water ; and  precipi- 
tates almost  entirejy  on  cooling,  in  the  form  of  a white 
powder;  but  before  falling  down,  it  gives  the  liquid  a 
mucilaginous  consistence.  It  precipitates  quickly  on 
the  addition  of  alkohol. 

The  above  substance  is  obtained  oy  boiling  the  root 
of  this  plant  in  four  times  its  weight  of  water,  and 
leaving  the  liquid  in  repose.  Pelletier  and  Caventou 
have  found  the  same  starch-like  matter  in  abundance 
in  the  root  of  colchicum:  and  Gautier  in  the  root  of 
pellitory. 

Inustion.  (From  In,  and  uro,  to  burn.)  It  is  some 
times  used  for  hot  and  dry  seasons;  and  formerly  by 
surgeons  for  the  operation  of  the  cautery. 

Inverecu'ndum  os.  (From  in,  not,  and  v crecundus 
modest.)  An  obsolete  name  of  the  frontal  bones, 
from  its  being  regarded  as  the  seat  of  impudence. 

INVERSION.  Inversio.  Turned  inside  outward. 

INVOLUCELLUM.  A partial  involucrum.  See 
Involucrum. 

INVOLU'CRUM.  (From  in,  and  volvo,  to  wrap 
up;  because  parts  are  enclosed  by  it.)  In  anatomy. 
1.  A name  of  the  pericardium. 

2.  A membrane  which  covers  any  part 

459 


IOD 


IOD 


In  botany.  A leafy  calyx,  remote  from  the  flower, 
applied  particularly  to  umbelliferous  plants. 

From  the  part  of  the  umbel  in  which  it  is  placed,  it 
is  called, 

1.  Involucrum  universaie,  being  at  the  base  of  the 
whole  umbel;  as  in  Coriandrum  sativum , Scandix 
cerefolium , and  Cornus  mascula. 

2.  I.  partiale , called  involucellum  ; at  the  bottom  of 
each  umbellula,  or  partial  stalk  of  the  umbel ; as  in 
Daucus  carota. 

3.  I.  dimidialum,  surrounding  the  middle  of  the 
stalk  at  the  base  of  the  umbel;  as  in  JEthusa  cy- 
napium. 

From  the  number  of  the  involucre  leaves, 

4.  Monophyllous  ; as  in  Coriander  and  Hermas. 

5.  Tryphillous  ; as  in  Bupleurum  junceum. 

6.  Polyphillous ; as  in  Bunium  bulbocastanum , and 
Sium. 

7.  Pinnatifid;  as  in  Daucus  carota , and  Sium  an- 
gustifolium. 

8.  Reflex , turned  back ; as  in  Selinum  monnieri. 

Solitary  flowers  rarely  have  an  involucrum ; yet  it 

is  found  in  the  anemones. 

LNVOLUTUS.  Involute.  Rolled  inwards.  Ap- 
plied to  leaves,  petals,  &c.  when  their  margins  are 
turned  inward ; as  in  the  leaves  of  Pinguicula,  and 
petals  of  Anethum , Pastinaca , and  Bupleurum. 

IODATE.  A compound  of  iodine  with  oxygen, 
and  a metallic  basis.  The  oxiodes  of  Davy. 

Iodes.  (From  tos,  verdigris.)  Green  matter  thrown 
off  by  vomiting. 

IODIC  ACID.  Acidum  iodicum.  Oxiodlc  acid. 
“ When  barytes  water  is  made  to  act  on  iodine,  a so- 
luble hydriodate,  and  an  insoluble  iodate  of  barytes, 
are  formed.  On  the  latter,  well  washed,  pour  sulphu- 
ric acid,  equivalent  to  the  barytes  present,  diluted  with 
twice  its  weight  of  water,  and  heat  the  mixture.  The 
iodic  acid  quickly  abandons  a portion  of  its  base,  and 
combines  with  the  water ; but  though  even  less  than 
the  equivalent  proportion  of  sulphuric  acid  has  been 
used,  a little  of  it  will  be  found  mixed  with  the  liquid 
acid.  If  we  endeavour  to  separate  this  portion,  by 
adding  barytes  water,  the  two  acids  precipitate  to- 
gether. 

The  above  economical  process  is  that  of  Gay  Lus- 
sac ; but  Sir  H.  Davy,  who  is  the  first  discoverer  of 
this  acid,  invented  one  more  elegant,  and  which  yields 
a purer  acid.  Into  a long  glass  tube,  bent  like  the 
letter  L inverted,  (>q)  shut  at  one  end,  put  100  grains 
of  chlorate  of  potassa,  and  pour  over  it  400  grains  of 
muriatic  acid,  specific  gravity  1.105.  Put  40  grains  of 
iodine  into  a thin  long-necked  receiver.  Into  the  open 
end  of  the  bent  tube  put  some  muriate  of  lime,  and 
then-connect  it  with  the  receiver.  Apply  a gentle  heat 
to  the  sealed  end  of  the  former.  Protoxide  of  chlorine 
is  evolved,  which,  as  it  comes  in  contact  with  the 
iodine,  produces  combustion,  and  two  new  compounds, 
a compound  of  iodine  and  oxygen,  and  one  of  iodine 
and  chlorine.  The  latter  is  easily  separated  by  heat, 
while  the  former  remains  in  a state  of  purity. 

The  iodic  acid  of  Sir  H.  Davy  is  a white  semitrans- 
parent solid.  It  has  a strong  acido-astringent  taste, 
but  no  smell.  Its  density  is  considerably  greater  than 
that  of  sulphuric  acid,  in  which  it  rapidly  sinks.  It 
melts,  and  is  decomposed  into  iodine  and  oxygen,  at  a 
temperature  of  about  620°.  A grain  of  iodic  acid  gives 
out  176.1,  grain  measure,  of  oxygen  gas.  It  would  ap- 
pear from  this,  that  iodic  acid  consists  of  15.5  iodine, 
to  5 oxygen. 

Iodic  acid  deliquesces  in  the  air,  and  is,  of  course, 
very  soluble  in  water.  It  first  reddens  and  then  de- 
stroys the  blues  of  vegetable  infusions.  It  blanches 
other  vegetable  colours.  Between  the  acid  prepared 
by  Gay  Lussac,  and  that  of  Sir  H.  Davy,  there  is  one 
important  difference.  The  latter,  being  dissolved, 
may,  by  evaporation  of  the  water,  pass  not  only  to  the 
inspissated  syrup  state,  but  can  be  made  to  assume  a 
pasty  consistence;  and,  finally,  by  a stronger  heat, 
yields  the  solid  substance  unaltered.  When  a mixture 
of  it,  with  charcoal,  sulphur,  resin,  sugar,  or  the  com- 
bustible metals,  in  a finely  divided  state,  is  heated,  de- 
tonations are  produced ; and  its  solution  rapidly  cor- 
rodes all  the  metals  to  which  Sir  H.  Davy  exposed  it, 
both  gold  and  platinum,  but  much  more  intensely  the 
first  of  these  metals. 

It  appears  to  form  combinations  with  all  the  fluid  or 
solid  acids  which  it  does  not  decompose.  When  sul- 
460 


phuric  acid  is  dropped  into  a concentrated  solution  of 
it  in  hot  water,  a solid  substance  is  precipitated,  which 
consists  of  the  acid  and  the  compound ; for,  on  evapo- 
rating the  solution  by  a gentle  heat,  nothing  rises  but 
water.  On  increasing  the  heat  in  an  experiment  of 
this  kindv  the  solid  substance  formed  fused  ; and  on 
cooling  the  mixture,  rhomboidal  crystals  formed  of  a 
pale  yellow  colour,  which  were  very  fusible,  and 
which  did  not  change  at  the  heat  at  which  the  com- 
pound of  oxygen  aud  iodine  decomposes,  but  sublimed 
unaltered.  When  urged  by  a much  stronger  heat,  it 
partially  sublimed,  and  partially  decomposed,  afford- 
ing oxygen,  iodine,  and  sulphuric  acid. 

With  hydro-phosphoric,  the  compound  presents  phe- 
nomena precisely  similar,  and  they  form  together  a 
solid,  yellow,  crystalline  combination. 

With  hydro-nitric  acid,  it  yields  white  crystals  in 
rhombeidal  plates,  which,  at  a lower  heat  than  the 
preceding  acid  compounds,  are  resolved  into  hydro- 
nitric  acid,  oxygen,  and  iodine.  By  liquid  muriatic 
acid,  the  substance  is  immediately  decomposed,  and 
the  compound  of  chlorine  and  iodine  is  formed.  All 
these  acid  compounds  redden  vegetable  blues,  taste 
sour,  and  dissolve  gold  and  platinum.  From  these 
curious  researches  Sir  H.  Davy  infers,  that  Gay  Lus- 
sac’s  iodic  acid  is  a sulpho-iodic  acid,  and  probably  a 
definite  compound.  However  minute  the  quantity 
of  sulphuric  acid  made  to  act  on  the  iodide  of  ba- 
rium may  be,  a part  of  it  is  always  employed  to 
form  the  compound  acid ; and  the  residual  fluid  con- 
tains both  the  compound  acid  and  a certain  quantity 
of  the  original  salt.” — Ure. 

IODIDE.  lode;  Iodure.  A compound  of  iodine 
with  a metal;  as  Iodide  of  potassium. 

IODINE.  ( Iodina ; from  tiadrjs,  a violet  colour,  so 
termed  from  its  beautiful  colour.)  A peculiar  or  uu 
decompounded  principle. 

“ Iodine  was  accidentally  discovered,  in  1812,  by 
De  Courtois,  a manufacturer  of  saltpetre  at  Paris.  In 
his  processes  for  procuring  soda  from  the  ashes  of  sea- 
weeds, he  found  the  metallic  vessels  much  corroded ; 
and,  in  searching  for  the  cause  of  the  corrosion,  he 
made  this  important  discovery.  But  for  this  circum- 
stance, nearly  accidental,  one  of  the  most  curious  of 
substances  might  have  remained  for  ages  unknown, 
since  nature  has  not  distributed  it,  in  either  a simple  or 
compound  state,  through  her  different  kingdoms,  but 
has  confined  it  to  what  the  Roman  satirist  considers  as 
the  most  worthless  of  things,  the  vile  seaweed. 

Iodine  derived  its  first  illustration  from  Clement  and 
Desormes.  In  their  memoir,  read  at  a meeting  of  the 
Institute,  these  able  chemists  described  its  principal 
properties.  They  stated  its  sp.  gr.  to  be  about  4 ; that 
it  becomes  a violet-coloured  gas  at  a temperature  be- 
low that  of  boiling  water, — whence  its  name ; that  it 
combines  with  the  metals,  and  with  phosphorus  and 
sulphur,  and  likewise  with  the  alkalies  and  metallic 
oxides ; that  it  forms  a detonating  compound  with  am- 
monia; that  it  is  soluble  in  alkoliol,  and  still  more 
soluble  in  ether ; and  that,  by  its  action  upon  phospho- 
rus and  upon  hydrogen,  a substance  having  the  cha- 
racters of  muriatic  acid  is  formed.  In  this  communi- 
cation they  offered  no  decided  opinion  respecting  its 
nature. 

In  1813,  Sir  H.  Davy  happened  to  be  on  a visit  to 
Paris,  receiving,  amid  the  political  convulsions  of 
France,  the  tranquil  homage  due  to  his  genius.  ‘ When 
Clement  showed  iodine  to  me,’  says  Sir  H.  Davy,  ‘ he 
believed  that  the  hydriodic  acid  was  muriatic  acid ; 
and  Gay  Lussac,  after  his  early  experiments,  made 
originallv  with  Clement,  formed  the  same  opinion,  and 
maintained  it,  when  I first  stated  to  him  my  belief, 
that  it  was  a new  and  peculiar  acid,  and  that  iodine 
was  a substance  analogous  in  its  chemical  relations  to 


chlorine.’ 

Iodine  has  been  found  in  the  following  seaweeds, 
the  Alga  aquaticce  of  Linnaeus: — 

Fucus  cartilagir.eus,  Fucus  palmatus, 

membranaceus,  filum, 

filamentosus,  digitatus, 

rubens,  saccharinus, 

nodosus,  Ulva  umbilicalis, 

serratus,  pavonia, 

siliquosus,  linza,  and  in  sponge. 

It  is  from  the  incinerated  seaweed,  or  kelp,  tha 
iodine  in  quantities  is  to  be  obtained.  Dr.  Wollaston 
first  communicated  a precise  formula  for  extracting  it. 


iOD 


IOD 


Dissolve  the  soluble  part  of  kelp  in  water.  Concen- 
trate the  liquid  by  evaporation,  and  separate  all  the 
crystals  that  can  be  obtained.  Pour  the  remaining 
liquid  into  a clean  vessel,  and  mix  with  it  an  excess  of 
sulphuric  acid.  Boil  this  liquid  for  some  tiipe.  Sul- 

Ehur  is  precipitated,  and  muriatic  acid  driven  off. 

•ecant  off  the  clear  liquid,  and  strain  it  through  wool. 
Put  it  into  a small  flask,  and  mix  it  with  as  much 
black  oxide  of  manganese  as  we  used  before  of  sulphu- 
ric acid.  Apply  to  the  top  of  the  flask  a glass  tube, 
shut  at  one  end.  Then  heat  the  mixture  in  the  flask. 
The  iodine  sublimes  into  the  glass  tube.  None  can  be 
obtained  from  sea-water. 

Iodine  is  a solid,  of  a grayish-black  colour  and  me- 
tallic lustre.  It  is  often  in  scales  similar  to  those  of 
micaceous  iron  ore,  sometimes  in  rhomboid  al  plates, 
very  large  and  very  brilliant.  It  has  been  obtained  in 
elongated  octohedrons,  nearly  half  an  inch  in  length; 
the  axes  of  which  were  shown  by  Dr.  Wollaston  to  be 
to  each  other,  as  the  numbers  2,  3,  and  4,  at  least  so 
nearly,  that  in  a body  so  volatile,  it  is  scarcely  possible 
to  detect  an  error  in  this  estimate,  by  the  reflective 
goniometer.  Its  fracture  is  lamellated,  and  it  is  soft 
and  friable  to  the  touch.  Its  taste  is  very  acrid,  though 
it  be  very  sparingly  soluble  in  water.  It  is  a deadly 
poison.  It  gives  a deep  brown  stain  to  the  skin,  which 
soon  vanishes  by  evaporation.  In  odour,  and  power  of 
destroying  vegetable  colours,  it  resembles  very  dilute 
aqueous  chlorine.  The  sp.  gr.  of  iodine  at  62i°  is  4.948. 
It  dissolves  in  7000  parts  of  water.  The  solution  is  of 
an  orange-yellow  colour,  and  in  small  quantity  tinges 
raw  starch  of  a purple  hue. 

It  melts,  according  to  Gay  Lussac,  at  227°  F.,  and  is 
volatilized  under  the  common  pressure  of  the  atmos- 
phere, at  the  temperature  of  350°.  It  evaporates  pretty 
quickly  at  ordinary  temperatures.  Boiling  water  aids 
its  sublimation,  as  is  shown  in  the  above  process  of  ex- 
traction. The  sp.  gr.  of  its  violet  vapour  is  8.678.  It  is 
a non-conductor  of  electricity.  When  the  voltaic 
chain  is  interrupted  by  a small  fragment  of  it,  the  de- 
composition of  water  instantly  ceases. 

Iodine  is  incombustible,  but  with  azote  it  forms  a 
curious  detonating  compound  ; and  in  combining  with 
several  bodies,  the  intensity  of  mutual  action  is  such  as 
to  produce  the  phenomena  of  combustion.  Its  combi- 
nationswith  oxygen  and  chlorine  are  described,  under 
iodic  and  chloriodic  acids. 

With  a view  of  determining  whether  it  was  a simple 
or  compound  form  of  matter,  Sir  H.  Davy  exposed  it  to 
the  action  of  the  highly  inflammable  metals.  When 
its  vapour  is  passed  over  potassium  heated  in  a glass 
tube,  inflammation  takes  place,  and  the  potassium 
burns  slowly  with  a pale  blue  light.  There  was  no  gas 
disengaged  when  the  experiment  was  repeated  in  a 
mercurial  apparatus.  The  iodide  of  potassium  is  white, 
fusible  at  a red  heat,  and  soluble  in  water.  It  has  a 
peculiar  acrid  taste.  When  acted  on  by  sulphuric 
acid,  it  effervesces,  and  iodine  appears.  It  is  evident 
that  in  this  experiment  there  had  been  no  decomposi- 
tion ; the  result  depending  merely  on  the  combination  of 
iodine  with  potassium.  By  passing  the  vapour  of  iodide 
over  dry  red-hot  potassa,  formed  from  potassium, 
oxygen  is  expelled,  and  the  above  iodine  results.  Hence, 
we  see,  that  at  the  temperature  of  ignition,  the  affinity 
between  iodine  and  potassium  is  superior  to  that  of  the 
latter  for  oxygen.  But  iodine  in  its  turn  is  displaced  by 
chlorine,  at  a moderate  heat,  and  if  the  latter  be  in  ex- 
cess, chloriodic  acid  is  formed.  Gay  Lussac  passed 
vapour  of  iodine  in  a red  heat  over  melted  subcar- 
bonate of  potassa;  and  he  obtained  carbonic  acid  and 
oxygen  gases,  in  the  proportions  of  two  in  volume  of  the 
first,  and  one  of  the  second,  precisely  those  which  exist 
in  the  salt. 

The  oxide  of  sodium,  and  the  suDcarbonate  of  soda, 
are  also  completely  decomposed  by  iodine.  From 
these  experiments  it  would  seem,  that  this  substance 
ought  to  disengage  oxygen  from  most  of  the  oxides ; but 
this  happens  only  in  a small  number  of  cases.  The 
protoxides  of  lead  and  bismuth  are  the  only  oxides  not 
reducible  by  mere  heat,  with  which  it  exhibited  that 
power.  Barytes,,  strontian,  and  lime  combine  with 
iodine,  without  giving  out  oxygen  gas,  and  the  oxides 
of  zinc  and  iron  undergo  no  alteration  in  this  respect. 
From  these  facts  we  must  conclude,  that  the  decompo- 
sition of  the  oxides  by  iodine  depends  less  on  the  con- 
densed state  of  the  oxygen,  than  upon  the  affinity  of 
the  metal  for  iodine.  Except  barytes,  strontian,  and 


lime,  no  oxide  can  remain  in  combination  with  iodine 
at  a red  heat.  For  a more  particular  account  of  some 
iodides, .see  Hydriodic  acid ; the  compounds  of  which, 
in  the  liquid  or  moist  state,  are  hydriodates , but  change, 
on  drying,  into  iodides , in  the  same  way  as  the  muri- 
ates become  chlorides. 

From  the  proportion  of  the  constituents  in  hydriodic 
acid,  15.5  has  been  deduced  as  the  prime  equivalent  of 
iodine. 

Iodine  forms  with  sulphur  a feeble  compound,  of  a 
grayish-black  colour,  radiated  like  sulphuret  of  antimo 
ny.  When  it  is  distilled  with  water,  iodine  separates. 

Iodine  and  phosphorus  combine  with  great  rapidity 
at  common  temperatures,  producing  heat  without  light. 
From  the  presence  of  a little  moisture,  small  quantities 
of  hydriodic  acid  gas  are  exhaled. 

Oxygen  expels  iodine  from  both  sulphur  and  phos- 
'phorus. 

Hydrogen,  whether  dry  or  moist,  did  not  seem  to 
have  any  action  on  iodine  at  the  ordinary  tempera- 
ture; but  if  we  expose  a mixture  of  hydrogen  and 
iodine  to  a red  heat  in  a tube,  they  unite  together,  and 
hydriodic  acid  is  produced,  which  gives  a reddish 
brown  colour  to  water.  Sir  H.  Davy  threw  the  violet- 
coloured  gas  upon  the  flame  of  hydrogen,  when  it 
seemed  to  support  its  combustion.  He  also  formed  a 
compound  of  iodine  with  hydrogen,  by  heating  to  red- 
ness the  two  bodies  in  a glass  tube. 

Charcoal  has  no  action. upon  iodine,  either  at  a high 
or  low  temperature.  Several  of  the  common  metals, 
on  the  contrary,  as  zinc,  iron,  tin,  mercury,  attack  it 
readily,  even  at  alow  temperature, provided  they  be  in 
a divided  state.  Though  these  combinations  take 
place  rapidly,  they  produce  but  little  heat,  and  but 
rarely  any  light. 

The  compound  of  iodine  and  zinc,  or  iodide  of  zinc, 
is  white.  It  melts  readily,  and  is  sublimed  in  the  state 
of  fine,  acicular,  four-sided  prisms.  It  is  very  soluble  in 
water,  and  rapidly  deliquesces  in  the  air.  It  dissolves  in 
water  without  the  evolution  of  any  gas.  The  solution 
is  slightly  acid,  and  does  not  crystallize.  The  alkalies 
precipitate  from  it  white  oxide  of  zinc;  while  concen- 
trated sulphuric  acid  disengages  hydriodic  acid  and 
iodine,  because  sulphurous  acid  is  produced.  The  so- 
lution is  a hydriodate  of  oxide  of  zinc.  When  iodine  and 
zinc  are  made  to  act  on  each  other  under  water  in 
vessels  hermetically  sealed,  on  the  application  of  a 
slight  heat,  the  water  assumes  a deep  reddish-brown 
colour,  because,  as  soon  as  hydriodic  acid  is  produced, 
it  dissolves  iodine  in  abundance.  But  by  degrees  the 
zinc,  supposed  to  be  in  excess,  combines  with  the 
whole  iodine,  and  the  solution  becomes  colourless  like 
water. 

Iron  is  acted  on  by  iodine  in  the  same  way  as  zincJ 
and  a brown  iodide  results,  which  is  fusible  at  a red 
heat.  It  dissolves  in  water,  forming  a light  green  so- 
lution, like  that  of  muriate  of  iron.  When  the  dry 
iodide  was  heated,  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  in  a small  retort 
containing  pure  amrnoniacal  gas,  it  combined  with  the 
ammonia  and  formed  a compound  which  volatilized 
without  leaving  any  oxide. 

The  iodide  of  tin  is  very  fusible.  When  in  powder, 
its  colour  is  a dirty  orange-yellow,  not  unlike  that  of 
glass  of  antimony.  When  put  into  a considerable 
quantity  of  water,  it  is  completely  decomposed.  Hy- 
driodic acid  is  formed,  which  remains  in  solution  in  the 
water,  and  the  oxide  of  tin  precipitates  in  white  floc- 
culi.  If  the  quautity  of  water  be  small,  the  acid, 
being  more  concentrated,  retains  a portion  of  oxide  of 
tin  and  forms  a silky  orange-coloured  salt,  which  may 
be  almost  entirely  decomposed  by  water.  Iodine  and 
tin  act  very  well  on  each  other,  in  water  of  the  tempe- 
rature of  212°.  By  employing  an  excess  of  tin,  we 
may  obtain  pure  hydriodic  acid,  or  at  least  an  acid 
containing  only  traces  of  the  metal.  The  tin  must  be 
in  considerable  quantity,  because  the  oxide  which  pre- 
cipitates on  its  surface,  diminishes  very  much  its  action 
on  iodine. 

Antimony  presents  with  iodine  the  same  phenomena- 
as  tin;  so  that  we  might  employ  either  for  the  prepara- 
tion of  hydriodic  acid,  if  we  were  not  acquainted  with 
preferable  methods. 

The  iodides  of  lead,  copper,  bismuth,  silver,  and  mer- 
cury, are  insoluble  in  water,  while  the  iodides  of  the 
very  oxidizable  metals  are  soluble  in  that  liquid.  It 
we  mix  a hydriodate  with  the  metallic  solutions,  all 
the  metals  which  do  not  decompose  water  will  give 

461 


IOD 


IOD 


precipitates,  while  those  which  decompose  that  liquid 
will  give  none.  This  is  at  least  the  case  with  the 
above-mentioned  metals 

There  are  two  iodides  of  mercury ; the  one  yellow, 
the  other  red ; both  are  fusible  and  volatile.  The  yel- 
low or  prot-iodide,  contains  one  half  less  iodine  than 
the  deut-iodide.  The  latter  when  crystallized  is  a bright 
crimson.  In  general,  there  ought  to  be  for  each  metal 
as  many  iodides  as  there  are  oxides  and  chlorides.  All 
the  iodides  are  decomposed  by  concentrated  sulphuric 
and  nitric  acids.  The  metal  is  converted  into  an  oxide, 
and  iodine  is  disengaged.  They  are  likewise  decom- 
posed by  oxygen  at  a red  heat,  if  we  except  the  iodides 
of  potassium,  sodiun.,  lead,  and  bismuth.  Chlorine 
likewise  separates  iodine  from  all  the  iodides;  but 
iodine,  on  the  other  hand,  decomposes  most  of  the  sul- 
phurets  and  phosphurets. 

When  iodine  and  oxides  act  upon  each  other  in  con- 
tact with  water,  very  different  results  take  place  from 
those  above  described.  The  water  is  decomposed;  its 
hydrogen  unites  with  iodine,  to  form  hydriodic  acid  ; 
while  its  oxygen,  on  the  other  hand,  produces  with 
iodine,  iodic  acid.  All  the  oxides,  however,  do  not 
give  the  same  results.  We  obtain  them  only  with 
potassa,  soda,  barytes,  sirontian,  lime,  and  magnesia. 
The  oxide  of  zinc,  precipitated  by  ammonia  from  its 
solution  in  sulphuric  acid,  and  well  washed,  gives  no 
trace  of  iodate  and  hydviodate. 

From  all  the  above-recited  facts,  we  are  warranted 
in  concluding  iodine  to  be  an  undecompounded  body. 
In  its  specific  gravity,  lustre,  and  magnitude  of  its 
prime  equivalent,  it  resembles  the  metals ; but  in  all 
its  chemical  agencies,  it  is  analagous  to  oxygen  and 
chlorine.  It  is  a non-ccr.iductor  of  electricity,  and  pos- 
sesses, like  these  two  bodies,  the  negative  electrical 
energy  with  regard  to  metals,  inflammable  and  alkaline 
substances;  and  hence,  when  combined  with  these  sub- 
stances in  aqueous  solution,  and  electrised  in  the  voltaic 
circuit,  it  separates  at  the  positive  surface.  But  it  has 
a positive  energy  with  respect  to  chlorine : for  when 
united  to  chlorine,  in  the  chloriodic  acid,  it  separates  at 
the  negative  surface.  This  likewise  corresponds  with 
their  relative  attractive  energy,  since  chlorine  expels 
iodine  from  all  its  combinations.  Iodine  dissolves  in 
carburet  of  sulphur,  giving,  in  very  minute  quantities, 
a fine  amethystine  tint  to  the  liquid. 

Iodide  of  mercury  hq^been  proposed  for  a pigment. 
Orfiia  swallowed  6 grams  of  iodine  ; and  was  imme- 
diately affected  with  heat,  constriction  of  the  throat, 
nausea,  eructation,  salivation,  and  cardialgia.  In  ten 
minutes  he  had  copious  bilious  vomitings,  and  slight 
colic  pains.  His  pulse  rose  from,70  to  about  90  beats  in 
a minute.  By  swallowing  large  quantities  of  muci- 
lage, and  emollient  clysters,  he  recovered,  and  felt 
nothing  next  day  but  slight  fatigue.  About  70  or  80 
grains  proved  a fatal  dose  to  dogs.  They  usually  died 
on  the  fourth  or  fifth  day. 

Dr.  Coindel  of  Geneva  has  recommended  the  use  of 
iodine  in  the  form  of  tincture,  and  also  hydrioflate  of 
potassa  or  soda,  as  an  efficacious  remedy  for  the  cure  of 
glandular  swellings,  of  the  goitrous  and  scrofulous 
kind.  I have  found  an  ointment  composed  of  1 oz. 
hog’s  lard,  and  1 drachm  of  iodide  of  zinc,  a powerful 
external  application  in  such  cases.  About  a drachm 
of  this  ointment  should  be  used  in  friction  on  the  swell- 
ing once  or  twice  a-day.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

[This  powerful  remedy,  which  has  recently  been 
introduced  into  practice,  is  obtained  from  the  plants 
affording  soda,  or  the  vegetables  called  “ Varecks,” 
by  the  French,  or  from  other  species  of  the  algae  or 
seaweeds.  A species  furnishing  a more  considerable 
portion  of  iodine  than  its  congeners  is  the  Fucus  sac- 
charinus,  or  Sugar-seaweed , belonging  to  the  class 
Cryptogamia , order  .dlgie. 

In  the  year  1815,  Dr.  Mitchill  received  from  Mr.  G. 
De  Claubry,  of  Paris,  his  researches  upon  this  subject. 
His  particular  objects  were  to  find  whether  iodine  ex- 
isted in  ocean-water,  and  the  condition  and  manner  of 
its  evolution  from  the  vegetables  that  furnished  the 
soda  or  salt  of  Varecks.  He  ascribes  the  discovery  of 
this  substance  to  Messrs.  Macquer  and  De  La  Salle, 
who,  in  their  experiments  upon  the  Varecks  or  sea- 
weeds-, discovered  iodine  in  the  mother-water  of  the 
soda  they  afforded.  This  fact  he  deemed  sufficiently 
important  to  encourage  chemists  to  look  for  it  in  the 
vegetables  themselves,  from  which  that  kind  of  soda 
wus  obtained.  He  made  a journey  to  the  west  of  Nor 


I mandy  (in  Fi  ance)  for  the  express  purpose  of  examin- 
ing upon  the  spot  the  different  species  of  Fucus;  and 
| he  obtained  from  the  able  botanist  of  Caen,  various 
| kinds  of  these  marine  plants,  which  he  submitted  to 
experiment.  His  analyses  were  chiefly  made  upon  the 
following  sorts,  viz. 

L Of  the  Family  of  the  Ulvse. 

1.  The  Ulva  saccharina. 

2.  . . digitata. 

3.  The  Fucus  saccharinus,  J T « 

4.  ..  digitatus,  | °f  Linnaeus 

n.  Of  the  Family  of  the  Varecks. 

1.  The  Fucus  vesiculosus. 

2.  . . serratus. 

3.  ..  siliquosus.  . 

III.  Of  the  Family  of  the  Ceramium. 

1.  The  Ceramium  filum,  or  tfie  Fucus  filum, 
of  Linnasus. 

Such  and  other  seaweeds  are  gathered  on  the  shores 
of  the  ocean,  among  other  purposes,  for  that  of  being 
burned  to  ashes,  for  the  preparation  of  the  fixed  alkali, 
called  the  soda  or  salt  of  Varecks  by  the  French  and 
Dutch,  as  distinguished  from  the  soda  or  barilla,  made 
by  burning  the  maritime  plant  called  salsola.  The 
product  of  the  above-mentioned  seaweeds  is  a compli- 
cated mixture  of  things,  such  as, 

1.  A small  quantity  of  the  subcarbonate  of  soda. 

2.  A good  deal  of  the  hydro-chlorate  of  soda, 

3.  . . sulphate  of  soda. 

4.  Sulphate  of  magnesia 

5.  Hydro-chlorate  of  potash  and  magnesia. 

6.  Subcarbonate  of  potash. 

7.  A little  sulphuretted  sulphate  of  soda,  and 

8.  A minute  portion  of  the  hydro-iodate  of  potash. 

The  poverty  of  this  sort  of  soda  gives  it  but  little 

value  in  commerce,  its  chief  consumption  being  in  the 
glass  manufactures.  It  is  called  kelp , and  contains 
much  less  soda  than  barilla. 

It  was  in  the  mother  waters  of  the  leys  or  lixiviums 
of  kelp  that  iodine  was  first  discovered,  as  is  said  by 
Mr.  Courtois.  All  the  foregoing  products  were  conse- 
quent upon  the  preceding  incineration  of  the  fuci.  As 
a number  of  these  fuci  are  employed  in  their  recent 
state  as  human  food,  (as  is  the  fucus  edulis)the  several 
sorts  acquired  an  interest  corresponding  to  their  use- 
fulness, as  applicable  for  manure,  for  making  kelp  or 
iodine,  or  for  food. 

On  burning  the  fucus  saccharinus,  one  of  the  results 
of  a most -elaborate  and  complicated  analysis  of  the 
residue,  was  that  potash  was  associated  with  iodine  in 
the  form  of  a liydro-iodatc , the  hyd->  o-iodalc  of  potash. 
As  a general  remark,  he  says,  tha*  the  species  of  fuci 
which  contain  the  most  mucilage,  contain  more  iodine 
than  the  others,  by  a large  difference. 

This  analysis  of  ocean  or  sea-water,-  proved  that  it 
contained  no  iodine  ; therefore  it  may  be  fairly  con- 
cluded, that  the  peculiar  article  under  consideration,  is 
prepared,  or  elaborated,  by  the  living  economy  of  these 
marine  vegetables.  Of  the  fuci  he  analyzed,  the  fucus 
saccharinus  which  contained  more  of  it  than  the  other 
species.  This  species,  treated  with  sulphuric  acid, 
yielded  immediately  the  iodine  it  contained,  without 
the  process  of  burning  to  ashes.  This  saves  the  trou- 
ble of  resorting  to  the  cau  mere,  or  mother  water,  to  ob- 
tain it.  The  iodine  has  an  affinity  to  oxygen,  and 
under  convenient  circumstances,  forms  the  hydro-iodic 
acid. 

Iodine  is  particularly  acted  upon  by  starch,  and  other 
vegetable  feculae,  whereby  it  acquires,  in  the  cool  and 
dry  way  by  trituration,  a violet  colour,  passing  into 
blue  and  black,  according  to  the  relative  proportions 
of  the  iodine  and  starch  employed.  The  hue  is  red- 
dish if  the  starch  predominates  ; a superb  blue , if  the 
ingredients  are  duly  apportioned;  and  black,  if  the 
iodine  is  in  excess;  as  also  violets  of  different  shades, 
between  the  reds  and  blues.  By  a particular  process, 
iodine  may  be  obtained  white.  This  is  shown  in  the 
memoir  of  Messrs.  Colin  and  Claubry,  on  the  combi- 
nation of  iodine  with  vegetable  and  animal  sub- 
stances, as  contained  in  the  Annals  of  Chemistry  for 
1814.  . 

It  has  lately  been  discovered,  that  iodine  ensted  m 
small  quantity,  with  a portion  of  carbon,  and  of  the 
other  muriate  and  carbonate  of  soda,  in  the  officinal 
preparation  called  burnt  sponge,  or  pulvis  spongia 
usta. 

The  sponges  are  in  modern  zoology,  classed  among 


IOD 


IE1 


the  zoophytes.  They  are  marine  productions,  of  a 
fibrous  and  tough  constitution,  covered  with  a slimy 
matter,  in  which  it  has  not  yet  been  possible  to  disco- 
ver either  polypes,  or  other  moveable  parts,  nor  any 
decided  proofs  of  animality.  It  seems,  nevertheless, 
that  living  sponges  evince  a kind  of  shrinking,  or  con- 
traction, on  being  touched,  and  that  there  is  a sort  of 
palpitation  in  the  pores  with  which  the  body  of  the 
sponge  is  pierced. 

From  such  feeble  evidence  of  the  animal  nature  of 
the  sponge,  it  has  been  doubted  by  some  naturalists, 
whether  they  ought  to  be  referred  to  tire  animal  king- 
dom. By  others  they  have  been  roundly  pronounced 
to  be  vegetables.  Dr.  MitchiU’s  opinion  is,  that  from 
the  analysis  of  sponge,  the  proximity  of  the  results  to 
those  of  varecks  and  other  seaweeds,  and  more  espe- 
cially the  detection  and  presence  of  iodine,  is  in  favour 
of  the  vegetable  character  of  sponge. 

Burnt  sponge  was  admitted  into  the  Edinburgh 
New  Dispensatory,  for  the  first  time,  in  1786,  by  reason 
of  the  reputation  it  had  acquired  as  a remedy  for  scro- 
fulous and  cutaneous  diseases,  for«removing  obstruc- 
tions in  the  glands,  and  among  others,  for  lessening  and 
removing  the  bronchocele.  There  the  process  for  re- 
ducing it  to  ashes  is  detailed.  The  dose  is  a scruple 
several  times  a-day. 

Now,  since  the  discovery  of  iodine  in  the  ashes  of 
sponge,  modern  physicians  have  ascribed  the  chief  vir- 
tue, against  the  aforesaid  disorders,  to  this  ingredient. 
The  conjecture  is  a rational  one ; for  it  is  more  probable 
its  efficacy  proceeds  from  the  iodine  than  from  the 
charcoal  and  neutral  salts. 

Upon  the  faith  of  this  interpretation,  it  was  con- 
ceived belter  to  prescribe  the  iodine  by  itself,  or  in 
known  and  exact  combination,  than  in  form  of  burnt 
sponge,  and  as  sponge  contained  this  active  principle, 
it  was  naturally  concluded,  that  the  iodine  would  be 
in  all  respects  as  good  when  prepared  from  the  sea- 
wrecks  as  from  sponges. 

In  that  ugly  and  obstinate  disorder,  the  goitre,  Dr. 
Coindet,  of  Geneva,  (in  Switzerland,)  has  prescribed 
iodine  with  remarkable  success.  The  preparation  he 
employs  requires  explanation,  by  reason  of  its  chemi- 
cal intricacy.  To  understand  the  receipt  we  must 
recapitulate.  Tho  forms  of  iodine  are, 

1.  Simple  iodine.  2.  Oxide  of  iodine,  by  starch  or 
other  feculce.  3.  Iodic-acid.  4.  Hydro-iodic  acid.  5. 
Hydro-iodate  of  potash,  by  burning,  &c. 

Dr.  Coindet  prescribes  what  is  termed  “ Ioduretted 
hydro-iodate  of  jtotash .”  To  prepare  this  the  hydro- 
iodic  acid  must  first  be  procured,  which  is  done  thus  : 
Take  of  (ilkoholic  spirit,  pure  iodine,  any  quantities. 
Then  pass  sulphuretted  hydrogen  through  the  solution. 
This  forms  the  hydro-iodic  acid . The  next  process  is, 
to  take  potash  and  hydro -iodic  acid,  and  combine  them 
to  saturation.  This  forms  Dr.  Coindet’s  medicine.  The 
hydro-iodate  of  potash. — To  reduce  this  into  a form 
for  medicinal  prescription,  he  proceeds  as  follows: 
Take  of  the  hydro-iodate  of  potash,  grs.  36.  Pure 
iodine,  grs.  10.  Distilled  water,  ?j.  m. 

This  is  the  ioduretted  hydro-iodate  of  potash.  It  is 
so  active  a preparation,  that  a full  dose  is  from  5 to  10 
drops  three  times  a-day  in  syrup.  The  dose  may  be 
gradually  increased,  according  to  circumstances,  but 
with  great  caution,  to  the  extent  of  20  drops.  It  must 
be  remembered,  whenever  it  is  administered,  an  over- 
dose must  be  avoided,  as  it  acts  with  an  extreme  and 
dangerous  effect  upon  the  constitution. 

They  say,  that  after  a few  weeks’  skilful  administra- 
tion, the  external  swelling  will  gradually  disappear. 
Should  the  patient,  while  under  a course  of  it,  experi- 
ence any  considerable  quickening  of  the  pulse,  a rapid 
loss  of  flesh,  palpitation  of  the  heart,  a dry  cough, 
restlessness,  and  want  of  sleep,  and  in  certain  cases 
with  an  increase  of  appetite  for  food,  though  the  swell- 
ing shall  undergo  diminution,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
intermit  the  medicine  for  some  days ; and  afterward 
resume  the  use  of  it  when  the  health  and  safety  of  the 
patient  will  permit — Motes  from  Mitchill's  Eecls.  on 
JUat.  Med.  A.l 

IODO-SULPHURIC  ACID.  “When  sulphuric  acid 
is  poured,  drop  by  drop,  into  a concentrated  and  hot 
aqueous  solution  of  iodic  acid,  there  immediately  re- 
sults a precipitate  of  iodo-sulphuric  acid,  possessed  of 
peculiar  properties.  Exposed  gradually  No  the  action  of 
a gentle  heat,  the  iodo-sulphuric  acid  melts,  and  crys- 
tallizes on  cooling  into  rhomboids  of  a pale  yellow 


colour.  When  strongly  heated,  it  sublimes,  and  is 
partially  decomposed ; the  latter  portion  being  converted 
into  oxygen,  iodine,  and  sulphuric  arid. 

Phosphoric  and  nitric  acids  exhibit  similar  pheno- 
mena. These  compound  acids  act  with  great  energy 
on  the  metals.  They  dissolve  gold  and  platinum.” 

IOLITE.  Dichroite.  Prismato-rhomboidal  quartz 
of  Mohs.  This  is  of  a colour  intermediate  between 
black,  blue,  and  violet-blue.  When  viewed  in  the 
direction  of  the  axis  of  the  crystals,  the  colour  is  dark 
indigo-blue  ; but  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  crys- 
tals, pale  brownish-yellow.  It  comes  from  Finland. 

I'onis.  (From  iov  • a violet.)  A'  carbuncle  of  a violet 
colour. 

IO'NTHUS.  (From  iov,  a violet,  and  avOos,  a flower.) 
A pimple  in  the  face,  of  a violet  colour. 

lOTACl'SMUS.  (From  twra,  the  Greek  letter  i.) 
A defect  in  the  tongue  or  organs  of  speech,  which  ren- 
ders a person  incapable  of  pronouncing  his  letters. 

IPECACUA'NHA.  (An  Indian  word.)  See  Calli- 
cocca  ipecacuanha. 

[Ipecacuanha  spurge.  See  Euphorbia  ipecacu- 
anha. A.] 

1POMCEA.  (So  called  by  Linnaeus  from  tip,  which 
he  unaccountably  mistakes  for  the  convolvulus  plant, 
whereas  it  means  a creepirtgsort  of  worm  that  infests 
and  corrodes  vines,  and  o/rotoj,  like.  By  this  appella- 
tion he  evidently  intended  to  express  the  close  resem- 
blance of  Ipomcca  to  the  genus  Convolvulus , with 
which  it  agrees  in  habit  altogether.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pen- 
tandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

Ipomcea  quajyioci.it.  Batata  peregrina.  The  ca- 
thartio  potato.  If  about  two  ounces  are  eaten  at  bed- 
time, they  gently  open  the  bowels  by  morning. 

Iqueta'ia.  The  inhabitants  of  the  Brazils  give  this 
name  to  the  Scrophvlaria  ayuatica,  which  is  there 
celebrated  as  a corrector  of  the  ill  flavour  of  senna. 

IRACU'NDUS.  (From  ira , anger : so  called  because 
it  forms  the  angry  look.)  A muscle  of  the  eye. 

IRIDIUM.  A metal  found  with  another,  called  os- 
mium, in  the  black  powder  left  after  dissolving  plati 
num.  See  Platinum. 

I'RIS.  (A  rainbow : so  called  because  of  the  variety 
of  its  colours.)  1.  The  anterior  portion  of  the  continu- 
ation of  the  choroid  membrane  of  the  eye,  which  is 
perforated  in  the  middle  by  the  pupil.  It  is  of  various 
colours.  The  posterior  surface  of  the  iris  is  termed  the 
uvea.  See  Choroid  membrane. 

2.  The  flower-de-luce , from  the  resemblance  of  its 
flowers  to  the  rainbow. 

3.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean 
system.  Class,  Triandria ; Order , Mttvogynia. 

Iris  florentina.  Florentine  orris,  or  iris.  The 
root  of  this  plant,  Iris — corollis  barbatis , caule  fnliis 
altiore  subbifloro , floribus  sessilibus , of  Linnajus, 
which  is  indigenous  to  Italy,  in  its  recent  state  is  ex- 
tremely acrid,  and,  when  chewed,  excites  a pungent 
heat  in  the  mouth,  that  continues  several  hours  : on 
being  dried,  this  acrimony  is  almost  wholly  dissipated  ; 
the  taste  is  slightly  bitter,  and  the  smell  agreeable,  and 
approaching  to  that  of  violets.  The  fresh  root  is  ca- 
thartic, and  for  this  purpose  has  been  employed  in 
dropsies.  It  is  now  chiefly  used  in  its  dried  state,  and 
ranked  as  a pectoral  and  expectorant ; and  hence  has  a 
place  in  the  trochisci  amyli  of  the  pharmacopoeias. 

Iris,  florentine.  See  Iris  florentina. 

Iris  germanica.  The  systematic  name  of  the  com- 
mon iris,  or  orris,  or  flower-de-luce.  Iris  nostra.  The 
fresh  roots  of  this  plant,  Iris — corollis  barbatis,  caule 
foliis  altiori  multifloro,  floribus  iyf  erioribus  peduncu- 
latis,  of  Linna:us,  have  a strong,  disagreeable  smell, 
and  an  acrid,  nauseous  taste.  They  are  powerfully 
cathartic,  and  are  given  in  dropsical  diseases,  where 
such  remedies  are  indicated. 

Iris  nostras.  See  Iris  germanica. 

Iris  palustris.  See  Iris  pseudacorus. 

Iris  pseudacorus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
yellow  water-flag.  Iris  palustris ; Gladiolus  luteus  ; 
Acorus  vulgaris.  This  indigenous  plant,  Iris — im- 
berbis,  foliis  ensiformibus,  petalis  altcrnis,  stigmati- 
bus  minoribus , is  common  in  marshes,  and  on  the 
banks  of  rivers.  It  formerly  had  a place  in  the  London 
Pharmacopoeia,  under  the  name  of  Gladiolus  luteus. 
The  root  is  without  smell,  but  has  an  acrid  styptic  taste, 
and  its  juice,  on  being  snuffed  up  the  nostrils,  produces 
a burning  heat  in  the  nose  and  mouth,  accompanied  by 


[RO 


IRO 


copious  discharge  from  these  organs:  hence  it  is 
recommended  both  as  an  errhine  and  sialagogue.  Given 
internally,  when  perfectly  dry,  its  adstringent  qualities 
are  such  as  to  cure  diarrhoeas.  The  expressed  juice  is 
likewise  said  to  be  a useful  application  to  serpiginous 
eruptions  and  scrofulous  tumours. 

Irish  Slate.  See  Lapis  Hybernicus. 

IRITIS.  ( Iritis , idis.  f.;  from  iris , the  name  of  the 
membrane.)  Inflammation  of  the  iris  : it  produces  the 
symptoms  of  deep-seated  or  internal  inflammation  of 
the  eye.  See  Ophthalmia. 

IRON.  Ferrum.  Of  all  the  metals,  there  is  none 
which  is  so  copiously  and  so  variously  dispersed  through 
nature  as  iron.  In  annuals,  in  vegetables,  and  in  all 
parts  of  the  mineral  kingdom,  we  detect  its  presence. 
Mineralogists  are  not  agreed  with  respect  to  the  exist- 
ence of  native  iron,  though  immense  masses  of  it  have 
been  discovered,  which  could  not  have  been  the  products 
of  art ; but  there  is  much  in  favour  of  the  notion  that 
these  specimens  have  been  extracted  by  subterraneous 
fire.  A massof  native  iron,  of  IGOOpounds  weight,  was 
found  by  Pallas,  on  the  river  Denisei,  in  Siberia  ; and 
another  mass  of  300  pounds  was  found  in  Paraguay,  of 
which  specimens  have  been  distributed  everywhere. 
A piece  of  native  iron,  of  two  pounds  weight,  has  been 
also  met  with  at  Kamsdorf,  in  the  territories  of  Neu- 
stadt,  which  is  still  preserved  there.  These  masses 
evidently  did  not  originate  in  the  places  where  they 
were  found. 

[Specimens  of  native  iron  have  been  found  in  several 
places  in  America,  in  situations  which  give  rise  to  the 
conjecture,  that  they  were  of  meteoric  origin.  One  of 
the  largest  of  these  lias' been  deposited  by  its  owner, 
Colonel  Gibs,  in  the  Cabinet  of  the  New-York  Lyceum 
of  Natural  History.  It  is  an  irregular  mass,  weighing 
upwards  of  3000  lbs.  “ Its  surface,  which  is  covered 
by  a blackish  crust,  is  greatly  indented,  from  which  it 
would  appear  that  this  mass  had  been  in  a soft  state. 
On  removing  the  crust,  the  iron,  on  exposure  to 
moisture,  soon  becomes  oxidated.  Sp.  gr.  ,7.400. 

“It  appears  to  consist  entirely  of  iron,  which 
possesses  a high  degree  of  malleability;  experiments 
have  been  made  without  detecting  nickel  or  any  other 
metal.  This  enormous  mass  of  iron  is  said  to  have 
been  found  near  the  Red  river,  in  Louisiana.”— Brace's 
Min.  Journal.  A.] 

There  are  a vast  variety  of  iron  ores:  they  may, 
however,  be  all  arranged  under  the  following  genera ; 
namely,  sulphurets,  carburets,  oxides,  and  salts  of  iron. 
The  sulphurets  of  iron  form  the  ores  called  Pyrites , 
of  which  there  are  many  varieties.  Their  colour  is,  in 
general,  a straw-yellow,  with  a metallic  lustre ; some- 
times brownish,  which  sort  is  attracted  by  the  magnet. 
They  are  often  amorphous,  and  often  also  crystallized. 
Iron,  in  the  state  of  a carburet,  forms  the  graphite  of 
Werner  (plumbago ).  This  mineral  occurs  in  kidney- 
form  lumps  of  various  sizes.  Its  colour  is  a dark  iron- 
gray,  or  brownish-black;  when  cut,  bluish-gray.  It 
has  a metallic  lustre.  Its  texture  is  fine-grained.  It 
is  very  brittle.  The  combination  of  iron  with  oxy- 
gen is  very  abundant.  The  common  magnetic  iron- 
stone, or  load-stone , belongs  to  this  class;  as  does 
specular  iron  ore,  and  all  the  different  ores  called  haema- 
tites, or  bloodstone.  Iron,  united  to  carbonic  acid, 
exists  in  the  sparry  iron  ore.  Joined  to  arsenic  acid, 
it  exists  in  the  ores  called  arseniate  of  iron,  and  arse- 
niale  of  iron  and  copper. 

[The  different  varieties  of  the  ores  of  iron  are  ar- 
ranged as  follows  in  Cleaveland’s  Mineralogy,  which  is 
a standard  work  on  the  subject  in  the  United  States : — 
Species  1.  Native  irqn. 

. . 2.  Arsenical  iron. 

a.  Argentiferous  arsenical  iron. 

. . 3.  Sulphuret  of  iron.  Iron  Syrites. 

a.  Common  sulphuret  of  iron. 

b.  Radiated 

c.  Hepatic* 

Sub-species  1.  Magnetic  sulphuret  of  iron. 

. . 2.  Arsenical 

. . 4.  Magnetic  oxide  of  iron 

a.  Native  magnet. 

b.  Iron  sand. 

. . 5.  Specular  oxide  of  iron. 

Sub-species  1.  Micaceous  oxide  of  iron. 

• . 6.  Red  oxide  of  iron. 

a.  Scaly  red  oxide  of  iron. 

b.  Red  hematite. 


c.  Compact  red  oxide  of  iron. 

d.  Ochrey  red  oxide. 

Species  7.  Brown  oxide  of  iron. 

a.  Scaly  red  oxide  of  iron 

b.  Hematitic  . . 

c.  Compact 

d.  Ochrey 

t . 8.  Argillaceous  oxide  of  iron. 

a.  Columnar  argillaceous  oxide  of  iron 

b.  Granular 

c.  Lenticular 

’d.  Nodular  ..  ..  .. 

e.  Common  ..  ..  .. 

f.  Bog  ore. 

. . 9.  Carbonate  of  iron. 

. . 10.  Sulphate  of  iron. 

. . 11.  Phosphate  of  iron. 

a.  Foliated  phosphate  of  iron. 

b.  Earthy 

c.  Green  iron  earth. 

. . 12.  Arseniate  of  iron. 

. . 13.  Chromate  of  iron. 

a.  Crystallized  chromate  of  iron. 

b.  Granular 

c.  Amorphous  . . A.] 

Properties  of  iron. — Iron  is  distinguished  from  every 

other  metal  by  its  magnetical  properties.  It  is  attracted 
by  the  magnet,  and  acquires,  under  various  conditions, 
the  property  of  attracting  other  iron.  Pure  iron  is  of  a 
whitish  gray,  or  rather  bluish  colour,  very  slightly 
livid ; but  when  polished,  it  has  a great  deal  of  bril- 
liancy. Its  texture  is  either  fibrous,  fine-grained,  or  in 
dense  plates.  Its  specific  gravity  varies  from  7.6  to 
7.8.  It  is  the  hardest  and  most  elastic  of  all  the  metals. 
It  is  extremely  ductile,  and  may  therefore  be  drawn  into 
wire  as  fine  as  a human  hair;  it  is  also  more  tena- 
cious than  any  other  metal,  and  yields  with  facility  to 
pressure.  It  is  extremely  infusible,  and  when  not  in 
contact  with  the  fuel,  it  cannot  be  melted  by  the  heat 
which  any  furnace  can  excite ; it  is,  how’ever,  softened 
by  heat,  still  preserving  its  ductility;  and  when  thus 
softened,  different  pieces  may  be  united ; this  consti- 
tutes the  valuable  property  of  welding . It  is  very 
dilatable  by  heat.  It  is  the  only  metal  which  takes  fire 
by  the  collision  of  flint.  Heated  in  contain  with  air 
it  becomes  oxidized.  If  intensely  and  briskly  heated, 
it  takes  fire  with  scintillation,  and  becomes  a black 
oxide.  It  combines  with  carbon,  and  forms  what  is 
called  steel.  It  combines  with  phosphorus  in  a direct 
and  an  indirect  manner,  and  unites  with  sulphur  readily 
by  fusion.  It  decomposes  water  in  the  cold  slowly,  but 
rapidly  when  ignited.  It  decomposes  most  of  the  me- 
tallic oxides.  All  acids  act  upon  iron.  Very  concen- 
trated sulphuric  acid  has  little  or  no  effect  upon  it,  but 
when  diluted  it  oxidizes  it  rapidly.  The  nitric  acid 
oxidizes  it  with  great  vehemence.  Muriate  of  ammonia 
is  decomposed  by  it.  Nitrate  of  potassa  detonates  very 
vigorously  with  it.  Iron  is  likewise  dissolved  by  alka- 
line sulphurets.  It  is  capable  of  combining  with  a 
number  of  metals.  It  does  not  unite  with  lead  or  bis- 
muth, and  very  feebly  with  mercury.  It  detonates  by 
percussion  with  the  oxygenated  muriates. 

Method  of  obtaining  iron. — The  general  process  by 
which  iron  is  extracted  from  its  oros,  is  first  to  roast 
them  by  a strong  heat,  to  expel  the  sulphur,  carbonic 
acid,  and  other  mineralizers  which  can  be  separated  by 
heat.  The  remaining  ore,  being  reduced  to  small 
pieces,  is  mixed  with  charcoal,  or  coke ; and  is  then 
exposed  to  an  intense  heat,  in  a close  furnace,  excited 
by  bellows ; the  oxygen  then  combines  with  the  carbon, 
forming  carbonic  acid  gas  during  the  process,  and  the 
oxide  is  reduced  to  its  metallic  state.  There  are  like- 
wise some  fluxes  necessary  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
separation  of  the  melted  metal.  The  matrix  of  the 
iron  ore  is  generally  either  argillaceous  or  calcareous, 
or  sometimes  a portion  of  siliceous  earth ; but  which- 
ever of  these  earths  is  present,  the  addition  of  one  or 
both  of  the  others  makes  a proper  flux.  These  are 
therefore  added  in  due  proportion,  according  to  the 
nature  of  the  ores ; and  this  mixture,  in  contact  with 
the  fuel,  is  exposed  to  a heat  sufficient  to  reduce  the 
oxide  to  its  metallic  state. 

The  metal  thus  obtained,  and  called  smelted,  pig,  or 
cast  iron,  is  far  from  being  pure,  always  retaining  a 
considerable  quantity  of  carbon  and  oxygen,  as  well 
as  several  heterogeneous  ingredients.  According  aa 
one  or  other  of  these  predominates,  the  property  of 


464 


TRO 


IRO 


the  metal  differs.  Where  the  oxygen  is  present  in  a 
large  proportion,  the  colour  of  the  iron  is  whitish  gray ; 
it  is  extremely  brittle,  and  its  fracture  exhibits  an  ap- 
pearance of.  crystallization  : where  the  carbon  exceeds, 
it  is  of  a dark  gray,  inclining  to  blue,  or  black,  and  is 
less  brittle.  The  former  is  the  white,  the  latter  the 
black  crude  iron  of  commerce.  The  gray  is  interme- 
diate to  both.  In  many  of  these  states,  the  iron  is 
much  more  fusible  than  when  pure;  hence  it  can  be 
fused  and  cast  into  any  form ; and  when  suffered  to 
cool  slowly,  it  crystallizes  in  octahedra:  it  is  also 
much  more  brittle,  and  cannot  therefore  be  either 
flattened  under  the  hammer,  or  by  the  laminating 
rollers. 

To  obtain  the  iron  more  pure,  or  to  free  it  from  the 
carbon  with  which  it  is  combined  in  this  state,  it  must 
be  refined  by  subjecting  it  to  the  operations  of  melting 
and  forging.  By  the  former,  in  which  the  metal  is 
kept  in  fusion  for  some  time,  and  constantly  kneaded 
and  stirred,  the  carbon  and  oxygen  it  contains  are 
partly  combined,  and  the  produced  carbonic  acid  gas 
is  expelled : the  metal  at  length  becomes  viscid  and 
stiff ; it  is  then  subjected  to  the  action  of  a very  large 
hammer,  or  to  the  more  equal,  but  less  forcible  pres- 
sure of  large  rollers,  by  which  the  remaining  oxide  of 
iron,  and  other  impurities,  not  consumed  by  the  fusion, 
are  pressed  out.  The  iron  is  now  no  longer  granular 
nor  crystallized  in  its  texture  ; it  is  fibrous,  soft,  duc- 
tile, malleable,  and  totally  infusible.  It  is  termed 
forged,  wrought,  or  bar  iron,  and  is  the  metal  in  a 
purer  state,  though  far  from  being  absolutely  pure. 

The  compounds  of  iron  are  the  following  : 

1.  Oxides ; of  which  there  are  two,  or  perhaps  three. 

1st,  The  oxide,  obtained  either  by  digesting  an  ex- 
cess of  iron  filings  in  water,  by  the  combustion  of  iron 
wire  in  oxygen,  or  by  adding  pure  ammonia  to  solution 
of  green  copperas,  and  drying  the  precipitate  out  of 
contact  of  air,  is  of  a black  colour,  becoming  white  by 
its  union  with  water,  in  the  hydrate,  attractible  by  the 
magnet,  but  more  feebly  than  iron.  By  a mean  of  the 
experiments  of  several  chemists,  its  composition  seems 
to  be, 

Iron,  100  77.82  3.5 

Oxygen,  28.5  22.18  1.0 

2d,  Deutoxide  of  Gay  Lussac.  He  forms  it  by  ex- 
posing a coil  of  fine  iron  wire,  placed  in  an  ignited 
porcelain  tube,  to  a current  of  steam,  as  long  as  any 
hydrogen  comes  over.  There  is  no  danger,  he  says, 
of  generating  peroxide  in  this  experiment,  because  iron, 
once  in  the  state  of  deutoxide,  has  no  such  affinity  for 
oxygen  as  to  enable  it  to  decompose  water.  It  may 
also,  he  states,  be  procured  by  calcining  strongly  a 
mixture  of  1 part  of  iron  and  3 parts  of  the  red  oxide 
in  a stoneware  crucible,  to  the  neck  of  which  a tube 
is  adapted  to  cut  off  the  contact  of  air.  But  this  pro- 
cess is  less  certain  than  the  first,  because  a portion  of 
peroxide  may  escape  the  reaction  of  the  iron.  But  we 
may  dispense  with  the  trouble  of  making  it,  adds 
Thenard,  because  it  is  found  abundantly  in  nature. 
He  refers  to  this  oxide,  the  crystallized  specular  iron 
ore  of  Elba,  Corsica,  Dalecarlia,  and  Sweden.  He 
also  classes  under  this  oxide  all  the  magnetic  iron  ores ; 
and  says,  that  the  above-described  protoxide  does  not 
exist  in  nature.  From  the  synthesis  of  this  oxide  by 
steam,  Gay  Lussac  has  determined  its  composition 
to  be, 

Iron,  100  72.72 

Oxygen,  37.5  27.28 

3 d,  The  red  oxide.  It  may  be  obtained  by  igniting 
the  nitrate,  or  carbonate ; by  calcining  iron  in  open 
vessels ; or  simply  by  treating  the  metal  with  strong 
nitric  acid,  then  washing  and  drying  the  residuum. 
Colcothar  of  vitriol,  or  thorough  calcined  copperas, 
may  be  considered  as  peroxide  of  iron.  It  exists 
abundantly  native  in  the  red  iron  ores.  It  seems  to  be 
a compound  of, 

Iron,  100  70  = 4 primes. 

Oxygen,  43  30  = 3 primes. 

2.  Chlorides  of  iron;  of  which  there  are  two,  first 
examined  in  detail  by  Dr.  John  Davy. 

The  protochloride  may  be  procured  by  heating  to 
redness,  in  a glass  tube  with  a very  small  orifice,  the 
residue  which  is  obtained  by  evaporating  to  dryness  the 
green  muriate  of  iron.  It  is  a fixed  substance,  re- 
quiring a red  heat  for  its  fusion.  It  has  a grayish,  varie- 
gated colour,  a metallic  splendour,  and  a lamellar  tex- 
ture. 

G g 


The  deutochloride  maybe  formed  by  the  combustion 
of  iron  wire  in  chlorine  gas,  or  by  gent'y  heating  the 
green  muriate  in  a glass  tube.  It  is  the  volatile  com- 
pound described  by  Sir  H.  Davy  in  his  celebrated 
Bakerian  lecture  on  oxymuriatic  acid.  It  condenses 
after  sublimation,  in  the  form  of  small  brilliant  iri- 
descent plates. 

3.  For  the  iodide  of  iron,  see  Iodine. 

4.  Sulphurets  of  iron  ; of  which,  according  to  Por- 
rett,  there  are  four,  though  only  two  are  usually  de- 
scribed, his  protosulphuret  and  persulphuret. 

5.  Carburets  of  iron.  These  compounds  form  steel, 
and  probably  cast-iron;  though  the  latter  contains  also 
some  other  ingredients.  The  latest  practical  researches 
on  the  constitution  of  these  carburets,  are  those  of 
Daniel. 

6.  Salts  of  iron. 

1.  Protacetate  of  iron  forms  small  prismatic  crys- 
tals, of  a green  colour,  a sweetish  styptic  taste. 

2.  Peracetate  of  iron  forms  a reddish-brown,  un- 
crystallizable  solution,  much  used  by  the  calico-print- 
ers, and  prepared  by  keeping  iron  turnings,  or  pieces 
of  old  iron,  for  six  months  immersed  in  redistilled 
pyrolignous  acid. 

3.  Protarseniate  of  iron  exists  native  in  crystals, 
and  may  be  formed  in  a pulverulent  state,  by  pouring 
arseniate  of  ammonia  into  sulphate  of  iron. 

4.  Perarseniate  of  iron  may  be  formed  by  pouring 
arseniate  of  ammonia  into  peracetate  of  iron  ; or  by 
boiling  nitric  acid  on  the  protarseniate.  It  is  inso 
luble. 

5.  Antimoniate  of  iron  is  white,  becoming  yellow 
insoluble. 

6.  Borate , pale  yellow,  insoluble. 

7.  Benzoate , yellow,  do. 

8.  Protocarbonate , greenish,  soluble 

9.  Percarbonate , brown,  insoluble. 

10.  Chromate , blackish,  do. 

11.  Protocitrate , brown  crystals,  soluble. 

12.  Protoferroprussiate , white,  insoluble 

13.  Perferroprussiate , white,  do. 

This  constitutes  the  beautiful  pigment  called  Prua 
sian  blue. 

14.  Protogallate,  colourless,  soluble. 

15.  P erg allate,  purple,  insoluble. 

16.  Protomuriate,  green  crystals,  very  soluble. 

17.  Permuriate , brown,  uncrystallizable,  very  so 
luble. 

18.  Protonitrate,  pale  green,  soluble. 

19.  Pernitrate,  brown,  do. 

20.  Protoxalate,  green  prisms,  do. 

21.  Pcroxalate,  yellow,  scarcely  soluble. 

22.  Protophosphate,  blue,  insoluble. 

23.  Perphosphate,  white,  do. 

24.  Protosuccinate,  brown  crystals,  soluble. 

25.  Persuccinate,  brownish-red,  insoluble. 

26.  Protosulphate,  green  vitriol,  or  copperas.  It  ia 
generally  formed  by  exposing  native  pyrites  to  air  and 
moisture,  when  the  sulphur  and  iron  both  absorb 
oxygen,  and  form  the  salt. 

27.  Persulphate.  Of  this  salt  there  seems  to  be  four 
or  more  varieties,  having  a ferreous  base,  which  con- 
sists, by  Porrett,  of  4 primes  iron  + 3 oxygen  = 10 
in  weight,  from  which  their  constitution  may  be 
learned. 

The  tartrate  and  pertartrate  of  iron  may  also  be 
formed  ; or  by  digesting  cream  of  tartar  with  water  or 
iron  filings,  a triple  salt  may  be  obtained,  formerly 
called  tartarized  tincture  of  Mars. 

These  salts  have  the  following  general  characters : — 

1.  Most  of  them  are  soluble  in  water;  those  with 
the  protoxide  for  a base  are  generally  crystallizable; 
those  with  the  peroxide  are  generally  not ; the  former 
are  insoluble,  the  latter  soluble  in  alkohol. 

2.  Ferroprussiate  of  potassa  throws  down  a blue 
precipitate,  or  one  becoming  blue  in  the  air. 

3.  Infusion  of  galls  gives  a dark  purple  precipitate, 
or  one  becoming  so  in  the  air. 

4.  Hydrosulphuret  of  potassa  or  ammonia  gives  a 
black  precipitate ; but  sulphuretted  hydrogen  merely 
deprives  the  solutions  of  iron  of  their  yellow-brown 
colour. 

5.  Phosphate  of  soda  gives  a whitish  precipitate. 

6.  Benzoate  of  ammonia,  yellow. 

7.  Succinate  of  ammonia,  flesh-coloured  with  the 
peroxide. 

The  general  medicinal  virtues  of  iron,  and  the 

465 


IRR 


IRR 


several  preparations  of  it,  are  to  constringe  the  fibres, 
to  quicken  the  circulation,  to  promote  the  different 
secretions  in  the  remoter  parts,  and  at  the  same  time 
to  repress  inordinate  discharges  into  the  intestinal 
tube.  By  the  use  of  chalybeates,  the  pulse  is  very  sen- 
sibly raised,  the  colour  of  the  face,  though  before  pale, 
changes  to  a florid  red ; the  alvine,  urinary,  and  cuti- 
cular  excretions,  are  increased. 

When  given  improperly,  or  to  excess,  iron  produces 
headache,  anxiety,  heats  the  body,  and  often  causes 
haemorrhages,  or  even  vomiting,  pain3  in  the  stomach, 
spasms,  and  pains  of  the  bowels. 

Iron  is  given  in  most  cases  of  debility  and  relax- 
ation ; in  passive  haemorrhages ; in  dyspepsia,  hysteria, 
and  chlorosis ; in  most  of  the  cachexia; ; and  it  has 
lately  been  recommended  as  a specific  in  cancer. 
Where  either  a preternatural  discharge,  or  suppression 
of  natural  "lecretions,  proceeds  from  a languor,  or 
sluggishness  of  the  fluids,  and  weakness  of  the  solids, 
this  metal,  by  increasing  the  motion  of  the  former  and 
the  strength  of  the  latter,  will  suppress  the  flux,  or  re- 
move the  suppression ; but  where  the  circulation  is 
already  too  quick,  the  solids  too  tense  and  rigid,  where 
there  is  any  stricture,  or  spasmodic  contraction  of  the 
vessels,  iron,  and  all  the  preparations  of  it,  will  aggra- 
vate both  diseases.  Iron  probably  has  no  action  on 
the  body  when  taken  into  the  stomach,  unless  it  be 
oxidized.  But  during  its  oxidizement,  hydrogen  gas  is 
evolved,  and  accordingly  we  find  that  fcetid  eructa- 
tions and  black  fieces  are  considered  as  proofs  of  the 
medicine  having  taken  effect.  It  can  only  be  exhibited 
internally  in  the  state  of  filings,  which  may  be  given 
in  doses  from  five  to  twenty  grains.  Iron  wire  is  to 
be  preferred  for  pharmaceutical  preparations,  both 
because  it  is  the  most  convenient  form,  and  because  it 
is  the  purest  iron. 

The  medicinal  preparations  of  iron  now  in  use 
are; — 

1.  Subcarbonas  ferri.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

2.  Sulphas  ferri.  See  Ferri  sulphas. 

3.  Fenrum  tartarizatum.  See  Ferrum  tartarizatum. 

4.  Liquor  ferri  alkalini.  See  Ferri  alkalini  liquor. 

5.  Tinctura  acetatis  ferri.  See  Tinctura  ferri 
acetatis. 

6.  Tinctura  muriatis  ferri.  See  Tinctura  ferri  mu- 
riatis. 

7.  Tinctura  ferri  ammoniati.  See  Tinctura  ferri 
ammoniati. 

8.  Vinum  ferri.  See  Vinum  ferri. 

9.  Ferrum  ammoniatum.  See  Ferrum  ammonia- 
tum. 

10.  Oxidum  ferri  rubrum.  See  Oxidum  ferri  ru- 
brum. 

11.  Oxidum  ferri  nigrum.  See  Oxidum  ferri  ni- 
grum. 

IRON-FLINT.  This  occurs  in  veins  of  ironstone, 
and  in  trap-rocks,'  near  Bristol,  and  in  many  parts  of 
Germany. 

IRRITABILITY.  (Trritabilitas ; from  irrito,  to 
provoke.)  Vis  insita  of  Haller.  Vis  vitalis  of  Goer- 
ter.  Oscillation  of  Boerhaave.  Tonic  power  of  Stahl. 
Muscular  power  of  Bell.  Inherent  power  of  Cullen. 
The  contractility  of  muscular  fibres,  or  a property  pe- 
culiar to  muscles,  by  which  they  contract  upon  the 
application  of  certain  stimuli,  without  a consciousness 
of  action.  This  power  may  be  seen  in  the  tremulous 
contraction  of  muscles  when  lacerated,  or  when  en- 
tirely separated  from  the  body  in  operations.  Even 
when  the  body  is  dead  to  all  appearance,  and  the 
nervous  power  is  gone,  this  contractile  power  remains 
till  the  organization  yields,  and  begins  to  be  dissolved. 
It  is  by  this  inherent  power  that  a cut  muscle  con- 
tracts, and  leaves  a gap  ; that  a cut  artery  shrinks  and 
grows  stiff  after  death.  This  irritability  of  muscles  is 
so  far  independent  of  nerves,  and  so  little  connected 
with  feeling,  which  is  the  province  of  the  nerves,  that, 
upon  stimulating  any  muscle  by  touching  it  with  caus- 
tic, or  irritating  it  with  a sharp  point,  or  driving  the 
electric  spark  through  it,  or  exciting  with  the  metallic 
conductors,  as  those  of  silver,  or  zinc,  the  muscle  in- 
stantly contracts,  although  the  nerve  of  that  muscle  be 
tied ; although  the  nerve  be  cut  so  as  to  separate  the 
muscle  entirely  from  all  connexion  with  the  system ; 
although  the  muscle  be  separated  from  the  body ; al- 
though the  creature  upon  which  the  experiment  is  per- 
formed may  have  lost  all  sense  of  feeling,  and  have 
been  long  apparently  dead.  Thus  a muscle,  cut  from 

AtU I 


the  limb,  trembles  and  palpitates  a long  time  after ; the 
heart,  separated  from  the  body,  contracts  when  irri- 
tated ; the  bowels,  when  torn  from  the  body,  continue 
their  peristaltic  motion,  so  as  to  roll  upon- the  table, 
ceasing  to  answer  to  stimuli  only  when  they  become 
stiff  and  cold ; and  too  often,  in  the  human  body,  the 
vis  insita  loses  the  exciting  power  of  the  nerves,  and 
then  palsy  ensues ; or,  losing  all  governance  of  the 
nerves,  the  vis  insita,  acting  without  the  regulating 
power,  falls  into  partial  or  general  convulsions.  Even 
in  vegetables,  as  in  the  sensitive  plant,  this  contractile 
power  lives.  Thence  comes  the  distinction  between 
the  irritability  of  muscles  and  the  sensibility  of  nerves : 
for  the  irritability  of  muscles  survives  the  animals,  as 
when  it  is  active  after  death ; survives  the  life  of  the 
part,  or  the  feelings  of  the  whole  system,  as  in  uni- 
versal palsy,  where  the  vital  motions  continue  entire 
and  perfect,  and  where  the  muscles,  though  not  obe- 
dient to  the  will,  are  subject  to-  irregular  and  violent 
actions  ; and  it  survives  the  connexion  with  the  rest 
of  the  system,  as  when  animals,  very  tenacious  of  life, 
are  cut  into  parts;  but  sensibility , the  property  of  the 
nerves,  gives  the  various  modifications  of  sense,  as  vi- 
sion, hearing,  and  the  rest ; gives  also  the  general 
sense  of  pleasure  or  pain,  and  makes  the  system,  ac- 
cording to  its  various  conditions,  feel  vigorous  and 
healthy,  or  weary  and  low.  And  thus  the  eye  feels, 
and  the  skin  feels ; but  their  appointed  stimuli  produce 
no  emotions  in  these  parts ; they  are  sensible,  but  not 
irritable.  The  heart,  the  intestines,  the  urinary  blad- 
der, and  all  the  muscles  of  voluntary  motion,  answer 
to  stimuli  with  a quick  and  forcible  contraction ; and 
yet  they  hardly  feel  the  stimuli  by  which  these  con- 
tractions are  produced,  or,  at  least,  they  do  not  convey 
that  feeling  to  the  brain.  There  is  no  consciousness 
of  present  stimulus  in  those  parts  which  are  called  into 
action  by  the  impulse  of  the  nerves,  and  at  the  com- 
mand of  the  will : so  that  muscular  parts  have  all  the 
irritability  of  the  system,  with  but  little  feeling,  and 
that  little  owing  to  the  nerves  which  enter  into  their 
substance ; while  nerves  have  all  the  sensibility  of  the 
system,  but  no  motion. 

The  discovery  of  this  singular  property  belongs  to  our 
countryman  Glisson;  but  Baron  Haller  must  be  con- 
sidered as  the  first  who  clearly  pointed  out  its  existence, 
and  proved  it  to  be  the  cause  of  muscular  motion. 

The  laws  of  irritability,  according  to  Dr.  Crichton, 
are,  1.  After  every  action  in  an  irritable  part,  a state 
of  rest,  or  cessation  from  motion,  must  take  place  be- 
fore the  irritable  part  can  be  again  incited  to  action. 
If,  by  an  act  of  volition,  we  throw  any  of  our  muscles 
into  action,  that  action  can  only  be  continued  for  a 
certain  space  of  time ; the  muscle  becomes  relaxed, 
notwithstanding  all  our  endeavours  to  the  contrary, 
and  remains  a certain  time  in  that  relaxed  state,  before 
it  can  be  again  thrown  into  action.  2.  Each  irritable 
part  has  a certain  portion  or  quantity  of  the  principle 
of  irritability  which  is  natural  to  it,  part  of  which  it 
loses  during  action,  or  from  the  application  of  stimuli. 
3.  By  a process  wholly  unknown  to  us,  it  regains  this 
lost  quantity,  during  its  repose,  or  state  of  rest.  In 
order  to  express  the  different  quantities  of  irritability 
in  any  part,  we  say  that  it  is  either  more  or  less  re- 
dundant, or  more  or  less  defective.  It  becomes  re- 
dundant in  a part  when  the  stimuli  which  are  calcu- 
lated to  act  on  that  part  are  withdrawn,  or  withheld 
for  a certain  length  of  time,  because  then  no  action  can 
take  place : while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  application 
of  stimuli  causes  it  to  be  exhausted,  or  to  be  deficient, 
not  only  by  exciting  action,  but  by  some  secret  influ- 
ence, the  nature  of  which  has  not  yet  been  detected ; 
for  it  is  a circumstance  extremely  deserving  of  atten- 
tion, that  an  irritable  part,  or  body,  may  be  suddenly 
deprived  of  its  irritability  by  powerful  stimuli,  and  yet 
no  apparent  muscular  or  vascular  action  takes  place 
at  the  time.  A certain  quantity  of  spirits,  taken  at 
once  into  the  stomach,  kills  almost  as  instantaneously 
as  lightning  does : the  same  thing  may  be  observed  of 
some  poisons,  as  opium,  distilled  laurel-water,  the 
juice  of  the  cerbera  ahovai,  & c.  4.  Each  irritable 
part  has  stimuli  which  are  peculiar  to  it,  and  which 
are  intended  to  support  its  natural  action ; thus,  blood, 
which  is  the  stimulus  proper  to  the  heart,  and  arteries, 
if,  by  any  accident,  it  gets  into  the  stomach,  produces 
sickness,  or  vomiting.  If  the  gall,  which  is  the  natural 
stimulus  to  the  ducts  of  the  liver,  the  gall-bladder,  and 
the  intestines,  is  by  any  accident  effused  into  the  ca- 


ISA 


ISC 


vity  of  the  peritonaeum,  it  excites  too  great  action  of 
the  vessels  of  that  part,  and  induces  inflammation. 
The  urine  does  not  irritate  the  tender  fabric  of  the  kid- 
neys, ureters,  or  bladder,  except  in  such  a degree  as  to 
preserve  their  healthy  action  ; but  if  it  be  effused  into 
the  cellular  membrane,  it  brings  on  such  a violent  ac- 
tion of  the  vessels  of  these  parts,  as  to  produce  gan- 
grene. Such  stimuli  are  called  habitual  stimuli  of 
parts.  5.  Each  irritable  part  differs  from  the  rest  in 
regard  to  the  quantity  of  irritability  which  it  possesses.- 
This  law  explains  to  us  the  reason  of  the  great  di- 
versity which  we  observe  in  the  action  of  various  irri- 
table parts;  thus,  the  muscles  of  voluntary  motion  can 
remain  a long  time  in  a state  of  action,  and  if  it  be 
continued  as  long  as  possible,  another  considerable 
portion  of  time  is  required  before  they  regain  the  irri- 
tability they  lost;  but  the  heart  and  arteries  have  a 
more  short  and  sudden  action,  and  their  state  of  rest 
is  equally  so.  The  circular  muscles  of  the  intestines 
have  also  a quick  action  and  short  rest.  The  urinary 
bladder  does  not  fully  regain  the  irritability  it  loses 
during  its  contraction  for  a considerable  space  of  time; 
the  vessels  which  separate  and  throw  out  the  men- 
strual discharge,  act,  in  general,  for  three  or  four  days, 
and  do  not  regain  the  irritability  they  lose  for  a lunar 
month.  6.  All  stimuli  produce  action  in  proportion  to 
their  irritating  powers.  As  a person  approaches  his 
hand  to  the  fire,  the  action  of  all  the  vessels  in  the 
skin  is  increased,  and  it  glows  with  heat ; if  the  hand 
be  approached  still  nearer,  the  action  is  increased  to 
such  an  unusual  degree  as  to  occasion  redness  and 
pain;  and  if  it  be  continued  too  long,  real  inflamma- 
tion takes  place;  but  if  this  heat  be  continued,  the 
part  at  last  loses  its  irritability,  and  a sphacelus  or  gan- 
grene ensues.  7.  The  action  of  every  stimulus  is  in 
an  inverse  ratio  to  the  frequency  of  its  application.  A 
small  quantity  of  spirits  taken  into  the  stomach,  in- 
creases the  action  of  its  muscular  coat,  and  also  of  its 
various  vessels,  so  that  digestion  is  thereby  facilitated. 
If  the  same  quantity,  however,  be  taken  frequently,  it 
loses  its  effect.  In  order  to  produce  the  same  effect  as 
at  first,  a larger  quantity  is  necessary ; and  hence  the 
origin  of  dram-drinking.  8.  The  more  the  irritability 
of  a part  is  accumulated,  the  more  that  part  is  disposed 
to  be  acted  upon.  It  is  on  this  account  that  the  ac- 
tivity of  all  animals,  while  in  perfect  health,  is  much 
livelier  in  the  morning  than  at  any  other  part  of  the 
day ; for,  during  the  night,  the  irritability  of  the  whole 
frame,  and  especially  that  of  the  muscles  destined  for 
labour,  viz.  the  muscles  for  voluntary  action,  is  reac- 
cumulated. The  same  law  explains  why  digestion 
goes  on  more  rapidly  the  first  hour  after  food  is  swal- 
lowed than  at  any  other  time;  and  it  also  accounts 
for  the  great  danger  that  accrues  to  a famished  person 
upon  first  taking  in  food.  9.  If  the  stimuli  which  keep 
up  the  action  of  any  irritable  body  be  withdrawn  for 
too  great  a length  of  time,  that  process  on  which  the 
formation  of  the  principle  depends  is  gradually  dimi- 
nished, and  at  last  entirely  destroyed.  When  the  irri- 
tability of  the  system  is  too  quickly  exhausted  by  heat, 
as  is  the  case  in  certain  warm  climates,  the  application 
of  cold  invigorates  the  frame,  because  cold  is  a mere 
diminution  of  the  overplus  of  that  stimulus  which  was 
causing  the  rapid  consumption  of  the  principle.  Under 
such  or  similar  circumstances,  therefore,  cold  is  a tonic 
remedy;  but  if,  in  a climate  naturally  cold,  a person 
were  to  go  into  a cold  bath,  and  not  soon  return  into 
a warmer  atmosphere,  it  would  destroy  life  just  in  the 
same  manner  as  many  poor  people  who  have  no  com- 
fortable dwellings  are  often  destroyed,  from  being  too 
long  exposed  to  the  cold  in  winter.  Upon  the  first  ap- 
plication of  cold  the  irritability  is  accumulated,  and 
the  vascular  system  therefore  is  exposed  to  great 
action ; but,  after  a certain  time,  all  action  is  so  much 
diminished,  that  the  process,  whatever  it  be,  on  which 
the  formation  of  the  irritable  principle  depends,  is  en- 
tirely lost.  For  further  information  on  this  interesting 
subject,  see  Dr.  Crichton  on  Mental  Derangement. 

IRRITATION.  Irritatio.  The  action  produced 
by  any  stimulus. 

ISATlS.  (Ij-artf  of  Dioscorides,  and  Isatis  of 
Pliny,  the  derivation  of  which  is  unknown.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
Class,  Tetr adynamia;  Order,  Siliquosa. 

Isatis  tinctoria.  Glastum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  used  for  dying  called  woad.  It  is  said  to 
be  adstringent. 


I'sca.  A sort  of  fungous  excrescence  of  the  oak, 
or  of  the  hazel,  &c.  The  ancients  used  it  as  the 
moderns  used  moxa. 

ISCHAS'MON.  (From  tax w,  to  restrain,  and  aipa, 
blood.)  A name  for  any  mcuicine  which  restrains  or 
stops  bleeding. 

Ischje'mum.  A species  of  Andropogon. 

I'SCHIAS.  (Itr^taj;  from  ttr^tov,  the  hip.)  A 
rheumatic  affection  of  the  hip-joint.  See  Rheuma- 

ISCHIATOCE'LE.  (From  ta%tov,  the  hip,  and 
Kq\rj,  a rupture.)  Jschiocele.  An  intestinal  rupture, 
through  the  sciatic  ligaments. 

Ischio-cavernosus.  See  Erector  penis. 

Ischioce'le.  See  Ischialocele. 

ISCHIUM.  (From  ioxh,  the  loin:  so  named  be- 
cause it  is  near  the  loin.)  A bone  of  the  pelvis  of  the 
foetus,  and  a part  of  the  os  innoininatum  of  the  adult. 
See  Innominatum  os. 

ISCIINOPHO'NIA.  (From  itrxvog,  slender,  and 
</>uvq,  the  voice.)  1.  A shrillness  of  the  voice. 

2.  A hesitation  of  speech,  or  a stammering. 

Ischure'tica.  (From  taxovpia,  a suppression  of 
the  urine.)  Medicines  which  relieve  a suppression  of 
the  urine. 

ISCHU'RIA.  (From  to-% co,  to  restrain,  and  ovpov, 
the  urine.)  A suppression  of  urine.  A genus  of  dis- 
ease in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Epischeses,  of 
Cullen.  There  are  four  species  of  ischuria : 

1.  Ischuria  renalis , coming  after  a disease  of  the 
kidneys,  with  a troublesome  sense  of  weight  or  pain 
in  that  part. 

2.  Ischuria  ureterica , after  a disease  of  the  kidneys, 
with  a sense  of  pain  or  uneasiness  in  the  course  of 
the  ureters. 

3.  Ischuria  vesicalts,  marked  by  a frequent  desire  to 
make  water,  with  a swelling  of  the  hypogastrium,  and 
pain  at  the  neck  of  the  bladder. 

4.  Ischuria  urethralis , marked  by  a frequent  desire 
to  make  water,  with  a swelling  of  the  hypogastrium, 
and  pain  of  some  part  of  the  urethra. 

When  there  is  a frequent  desire  of  making  water, 
attended  with  much  difficulty  in  voiding  it,  the  com- 
plaint is  called  a dysury,  or  strangury ; and  when  there 
is  a total  suppression  of  urine,  it  is  known  by  the  name 
of  an  ischury.  Both  ischuria  and  dysuria  are  distin- 
guished into  acute,  when  arising  in  consequence  of 
inflammation,  and  chronic,  when  proceeding  from 
any  other  cause,  such  as  calculus,  &c. 

The  causes  which  give  rise  to  these  diseases,  are 
an  inflammation  of  the  urethra,  occasioned  either  by 
venereal  sores  or  by  a use  of  acrid  injections,  tumour 
or  ulcer  of  the  prostate  gland,  inflammation  of  the 
bladder  or  kidneys,  considerable  enlargements  of  the 
haemorrhoidal  veins,  a lodgment  of  indurated  faeces 
in  the  rectum,  spasm  at  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  the 
absorption  of  cantharides  applied  externally,  or  taken 
internally,  and  excess  in  drinking  either  spirituous  or 
vinous  liquors ; but  particles  of  gravel  sticking  at  the 
neck  of  the  bladder,  or  lodging  in  the  urethra,  and 
thereby  producing  irritation,  prove  the  most  frequent 
cause.  Gouty  matter  falling  on  the  neck  of  the  blad- 
der, will  sometimes  occasion  these  complaints. 

In  dysury  there  is  a frequent  inclination  to  make 
water,  attended  with  a smarting  pain,  heat,  and  diffi- 
culty in  voiding  it,  together  with  a sense  of  fulness  in 
the  region  of  the  bladder.  The  symptoms  often  vary, 
however,  according  to  the  cause  which  has  given  rise 
to  it.  If  it  proceeds  from  a calculus  in  the  kidney,  or 
ureter,  besides  the  affections  mentioned,  it  will  be  ac- 
companied with  nausea,  vomiting,  and  acute  pains  in 
the  loins  and  regions  of  the  ureter  and  kidney  of  the 
side  affected.  When  a stone  in  the  bladder,  or  gravel 
in  the  urethra,  is  the  cause,  an  acute  pain  will  be  felt 
at  the  end  of  the  penis,  particularly  on  voiding  the  last 
drops  of  urine,  ant^  the  stream  of  water  will  either  be 
divided  into  two,  or  be  discharged  in  a twisted  manner, 
not  unlike  a cork-screw.  If  a scirrhus  of  the  prostate 
gland  has  occasioned  the  suppression  or  difficulty  of 
urine,  a hard  indolent  tumour,  unattended  with  any 
acute  pain,  may  readily  be  felt  in  the  perinaeuin,  or  by 
introducing  the  finger  in  ano. 

Dysury  is  seldom  attended  with  much  danger,  unless, 
by  neglect,  it  should  terminate  in  a total  obstruction. 
Ischury  may  always  be  regarded  as  a dangerous  com- 
plaint, when  it  continues  for  any  length  of  time,  from 
the  great  distention  and  oflen  consequent  inflammation 

467 


J AS 


JEB 


Which  ensue.  In  those  cases  where  neither  a bougie 
nor  a catheter  can  be  introduced,  the  event  in  all  pro- 
bability, will  be  fatal,  as  few  patients  will  submit  to 
the  only  other  means  of  drawing  off  the  urine  before 
a considerable  degree  of  inflammation  and  tendency  to 
gangrene  have  taken  place. 

ISERINE.  (So  called  from  the  river  Iser,  near  the 
origin  of  which  it  is  found.)  An  iron  black-coloured  ore. 

ISINGLASS.  See  Ichthvocolla. 

ISO'CHRONOS.  (From  nroj,  equal,  and  %p ovog, 
time.)  Preserving  an  equal  distance  of  time  between 
the  beats ; applied  to  the  pulse. 

Iso  crates.  (From  iaog , equal,  and  Kcpavvvpi,  to 
mix.)  Wine  mixed  with  an  equal  quantity  of  water. 

ISO'DROMUS.  (From  iaog,  equal,  and  Spopog,  a 
course.)  The  same  as  Isochronos. 

Isopy'rum.  (From  iaog,  equal,  and  nvp,  fire:  so 
named  from  its  flame-coloured  flower.)  The  Aqui- 
legia  vulgaris. 

ISO'TONUS.  (From  iaog,  equal,  and  rovog,  exten- 
sion.) Applied  to  fevers  which  are  of  equal  strength 
during  the  whole  of  the  paroxysm. 

I'SSUE.  Fonticulus.  An  artificial  ulcer  made  by 
cutting  a portion  of  the  skin,  and  burying  a pea  or 
some  other  substance  in  it,  so  as  to  produce  a discharge 
of  purulent  matter. 

I'STHMION.  (From  icdpog,  a narrow  piece  of 
land  between  two  seas.)  The  fauces  narrow  passage 
between  the  mouth  and  gullet. 

Isthmus  vieussenii.  The  ridge  surrounding  the 
remains  of  the  foramen  ovale,  in  the  right  auricle  of 
the  human  heart. 


Ithmox'des.  See  Ethmoides. 

Itinera'rium.  (From  iter , a way.)  The  catheter ; 
also  a staff-  used  in  cutting  for  the  stone. 

ITIS.  From  the  time  of  Boerhaave,  visceral  in* 
flammations  have  been  generally  distinguished  by  ana- 
tomical terms  derived  from  the  organ  affected,  with  the 
Greek  term  itis,  added  as  a suffix;  as  cephalitis,  Sec. 
Itis  is  sufficiently  significant  of  its  purpose;  it  is  im- 
mediately derived  from  icpai,  which  is  itself  a ramifica- 
tion from  to),  and  imports,  not  merely  action,  “putting 
or  going  forth,”  which  is  the  strict  and  simple  meaning 
of  £oj,  but  action  in  its  fullest  urgency,  “violent  or 
impetuous  action.”  When  this  term  then  is  added  to 
the  genitive  case  of  the  Greek  name  of  an  organ,  it 
means  inflammation  of  that  viscus:  hence,  hepatitis , 
nephritis,  gastritis,  carditis,  mean  inflammation  erf 
the  liver,  kidney,  stomach,  heart. — Good. 

I'va  pecanga.  See  Srrdlax  sarsaparilla. 

IVORY.  The  tusk,  or  tooth  of  defence,  of  the  male 
elephant.  It  is  an  intermediate  substance  between 
bone  and  horn.  The  dust  is  occasionally  boiled  to 
form  jelly,  instead  of  isinglass,  for  which  it  is  a bad 
substitute.  In  100  parts  there  are  24  gelatin,  64  phos- 
phate of  lime,  and  0.1  carbonate  of  lime. 

IVY.  See  Hedera  helix. 

Ivy,  ground.  See  Glecoma  hedcracea. 

Ivy-gum.  See  Hedera  helix. 

I'xia.  (From  i\og , glue.)  1.  A name  of  the  Carina 
gummifera , from  its  viscous  juice. 

2.  (From  i\opai,  to  proceed  from.)  A preternatural 
distention  of  the  veins. 

Ixine.  See  Carlina  gummifera. 


J 


XA'CEA.  ( Quia  prodest  hominibus  tristitia  jacen- 
**  tibus ; because  it  resists  sorrow ; or  from  taopai, 
to  heal.)  The  herb  pansey,  or  heart’s-ease.  See  Viola 
tricolor. 

Jaceranta  tinga.  See  Acorus  calamus. 

Jaci'nthus.  See  Hyacinthus. 

Jack-by-the-hedge.  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 

JACOBiE'A.  (Named  because  it  was  dedicated 
to  St.  James,  or  because  it  was  directed  to  be  gathered 
about  the  feast  of  that  saint.)  See  Senecio  Jacobcea. 

JADE.  See  Nephrite. 

Jagged  leaf.  See  Erosus. 

JALAP.  'Sec  Convolvulus  jalap  a. 

JALAPA.  See  Convolvulus jalapa. 

JALA'PIUM.  (From  Chalapa,  or  Xalapa , in 
New  Spain,  whence  it  is  brought.)  See  Convolvulus 
jalapa. 

Jalappa  alba.  White  jalap.  See  Convolvulus 
mecoacan. 

JAMAICA  BARK.  See  Cinchona  caribcea. 

JAMAICA  PEPPER.  S ee  Myrtus  pimento. 

Ja'mblichi  sales.  A preparation  with  sal-ammo- 
niac, some  aromatic  ingredients,  Sec.  so  called  from 
Jamblichus,  the  inventor. 

JA'NITOR.  (From  janua,  a gate.)  The  pylorus, 
so  called  from  its  being,  as  it  were,  the  door  or  entrance 
of  the  intestines. 

Japan  earth.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

Japo'nica  terra.  (So  called  from  the  place  it 
came  from.)  See  Acacia  catechu. 

JARGON.  See  Zircon. 

JASMINUM.  ( Jasminum ; from  jasmen,  Arab.; 

or  from  «>i>,  a violet,  and  oopy,  odour,  on  account  of 
the  fine  odour  of  the  flowers.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Diandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia.- 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  jessamine.  See 
Jasminum  officinale. 

Jasminum  officinale.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  jessamine- tree.  The  flowers  of  this  beautiful  plant 
have  a very  fragrant  smell,  and  a hitter  taste.  They 
afford,  by  distillation,  an  essential  oil,  which  is  much 
esteemed  in  Italy  to  rub  paralytic  limbs,  and  in  the 
cure  of  rheumatic  pains. 

JASPER.  A sub-species  ’ of  rhomboidal  quartz, 
488 


according  to  Jameson,  who  enumerates  five  kinds : 
Egyptian,  striped,  porcelain,  common,  agate  jasper. 

JATROPHA.  (Most  probably  from  lajpos,  a phy- 
sician.) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  Monacia ; Order,  Monadelphia. 

Jatropha  curcas.  The  systematic  name  of  a plant, 
the  seeds  of  which  resemble  the  castor-oil  seeds.  Ri- 
cinus  major ; Ricinoides  ; Pineus  purgans  ; Pinhones 
indici;  Faba  cathartica ; Nux  cathartica;  Ameri- 
cana ; Nux  barbadensis.  The  seed  or  nut  so  called  in 
the  pharmacopoeias  is  oblong  and  black,  the  produce  of 
the  Jatropha— foliis  cordatis  angulatis  of  Linnaeus. 
It  affords  a quantity  of  oil,  which  is  given,  in  many 
places,  as  the  castor-oil  is  in  this  country,  to  which  it 
is  very  nearly  allied.  The  seeds  of  the  Jatrophamulti- 
fida&re  of  an  oval  and  triangular  shape,  of  a pale  brown 
colour,  are  called  purging-nuts,  and  give  out  a similar 
oil. 

Jatropha  elastica.  The  juice,  of  this  plant  affords 
an  elastic  gum.  See  Caoutchouc. 

Jatropha  manihot.  This  is  the  plant  which  af- 
fords the  Cassada  root.  Cassada;  Cacavi;  Cassave; 
Cassava;  Pain  de  Madagascar ; Ricinus  minor; 
Maniot ; Yucca;  Manibar ; Aipi ; Aipima  cover  a; 
Aipipoca;  Janipha.  The  leaves  are  boiled,  and  eaten 
as  we  do  spinach.  The  root  abounds  with  a milky 
juice,  and  every  part,  when  raw,  is  a fatal  poison.  It 
is  remarkable  that  the  poisonous  quality  is  destroyed 
by  heat  Thence  the  juice  is  boiled  with  meat,  pepper, 
Sec.  into  a wholesome  soup,  and  what  remains  after 
expressing  the  juice,  is  formed  into  cakes  or  meal,  the 
principal  food  of  the  inhabitants.  This  plant,  which  is 
a native  of  three  quarters  of  the  world,  is  one  of  the 
most  advantageous  gifts  of  Providence,  entering  into 
the  composition  of  innumerable  preparations  of  an 
economical  nature. 

Cassada  roots  yield  a great  quantity  of  starch,  called 
tapioca,  exported  in  little  lumps  by  the  Brazilians,  and 
now  well  known  to  us  as  a diet  for  sick  and  weakly 
persons. 

JEBB,  John,  was  bom  at  London  in  1736.  He  was 
originally  devoted  to  the  church,  and  after  studying  at 
Cambridge,  entered  into  orders,  and  obtained  a living 
in  Norfolk  in  1764.  The  year  following,  he  published, 
in  conjunction  with  two  friends,  a selection  from  New 


JON 


JON 


ton’s  Principia,  with  notes,  which  was  highly  es- 
teemed. He  soon  afterward  returned  to  Cambridge, 
and  engaged  warmly  as  an  advocate  for  a reform  in 
church  and  state,  as  well  as  in  the  discipline  of  that 
university.  At  length,  in  1775,  he  resigned  all  his  of- 
fices in  the  church,  the  established  doctrines  of  which 
he  did  not  approve ; and  determined  upon  entering  into 
the  Medical  profession  He  soon  qualified  himself  for 
this,  obtained  a diploma  from  St.  Andrews,  and  was 
admitted  a licentiate  of  the  London  College  of  Physi- 
cians ; and  in  the  same  year,  1778,  he  was  elected  a 
fellow  of  the  Royal  Society.  In  1782  he  published 
“ Select  Cases  of  Paralysis  of  the  Lower  Extremities 
which  tend  to  support  the  practice  of  Pott,  of  applying 
caustics  near  the  spine.  To  this  work  is  added  an  in- 
teresting description  of  a very  rare  disease,  catalepsy. 
The  warmth  of  his  political  sentiments,  however,  ob- 
structed his  professional  career;  and  the  various  fa- 
tigues and  anxieties  to  which  he  exposed  himself,  in 
order  to  further  his  benevolent  designs,  exhausted  his 
constitution  so  much,  that  he  sunk  a premature  victim 
in  1786. 

Jecora'ria.  (From  Jecwr,  the  liver:  so  named  from 
its  supposed  efficacy  in  diseases  of  the  liver.)  1.  The 
name  of  a plant.  See  Marchantia  polymorpha. 

2.  A name  given  to  a vein  in  the  right  hand,  because 
it  was  usually  opened  in  diseases  of  the  liver. 

JECUR.  ( Jecur , oris.,  or  jecinoris,  neut.)  The 
liver.  See  Liver. 

Jecur  uterinum.  The  placenta  is,  by  some,  thus 
called,  from  the  supposed  similitude  of  its  office  with 
that  of  the  liver. 

JEJU'NUM.  (From  jejunus,  empty.)  Jejunum  in- 
testinum.  The  second  portion  of  the  small  intestines, 
so  called  because  it  is  mostly  found  empty.  See  Intes- 
tine. 

JELLY.  See  Gelatin. 

JENITE.  See  Lievrite. 

Jerusalem  cowslips.  See  Pulmonaria  officinalis. 

Jerusalem  oak.  See  Chenopodium  botrys. 

Jerusalem  sage.  See  Pulmonaria  officinalis. 

JESSAMINE.  See  Jasminum. 

Jesuita'nus  cortex.  (Fromjesuita,  a jesuit.)  A 
name  of  the  Peruvian  bark,  because  it  was  first  intro- 
duced into  Europe  by  Father  de  Lugo,  a jesuit.  See 
Cinchona. 

Jesui'ticus  cortex.  See  Cinchona. 

Jesuit's  bark.  See  Cinchona. 

JET.  (So  called  from  the  river  Gaza  in  Lesser 
Asia,  from  whence  it  came.)  A black  bituminous 
coal,  hard  and  compact,  found  in  great  abundance  in 
various  parts  of  France,  Sweden,  Germany,  and  Ireland. 
It  is  brilliant  and  vitreous  in  its  fracture,  and  capable 
of  taking  a good  polish  by  friction ; it  attracts  light  sub- 
stances, and  appears  to  be  electric  like  amber;  hence 
it  has  been  called  black  amber.  It  lias  no  smell,  but 
when  heated,  it  acquires  one  like  bitumen  judaicum. 

Jew's  Pitch.  See  Bitumen  judaicum. 

JOHN’S  WORT.  See  Hypericum. 

Jointed  Leaf.  See  Articulatus. 

[“JONES,  John,  M.  D.  The  family  of  Dr.  Jones 
was  of  Welsh  extraction,  and  of  the  religious  society 
of  Friends.  He  was  born  in  the  town  of  Jamaica, 
(Long  Island,)  in  Queen's  county,  New-York,  in  the 
year  1729  ; and  received  his  education  partly  from  his 
excellent  parents,  but  chiefly  at  a private  school  in  the 
city  of  New- York.  He  was  early  led,  both  by  the 
advice  of  his  father,  and  his  own  inclination,  to  the 
study  of  medicine. 

Dr.  Jones  early  indicated  an  attachment  for  that 
profession  which,  at  a subsequent  period,  he  cultivated 
with  so  much  ardour,  by  his  fondness  for  anatomical 
researches ; and  though,  as  it  may  be  readily  supposed, 
these  could  only  be  of  the  comparative  kind,  yet  it  is  a 
remarkable  fact,  that  this  love  for  pursuits  of  the  same 
nature  has  been  noticed  in  the  youth  of  some  of  the 
most  distinguished  anatomists  that  ever  lived. 

After  completing  his  studies  in  this  country,  Dr. 
Jones  visited  Europe,  in  order  to  improve  himself  still 
farther  in  his  profession. 

Upon  the  return  of  Dr.  Jones  to  this  country,  he 
settled  in  New-York,  where  his  abilities  soon  procured 
him  extensive  practice.  To  the  profession  of  surgery, 
in  particular,  he  devoted  much  attention  ; he  was  the 
first  who  performed  the  operation  of  lithotomy  in  that 
city,  and  succeeded  so  well  in  several  cases  that  offered 
shortly  after  his  return,  that  his  fame  as  an  opemtor 


became  generally  known  throughout  the  middle  and 
eastern  states  orAmerica. 

Upon  the  institution  of  a medical  school  in  the  col- 
lege of  New-York,  Dr.  Jones  was  appointed  professor 
of  Surgery,  up«n  which  branch  he  gave  several  courses 
of  lectures,  and  thereby  diffused  a taste  for  it  among 
the  students,  and  made  known  the  improved  methods 
of  practice  lately  adopted  in  Europe,  with  which  most 
of  the  practitioners  in  this  country  were  entirely  unac- 
quainted. 

For  a considerable  part  of  the  previous  life  of  Dr. 
Jones,  he  had  been  afflicted  by  the  asthma,  and  for  a 
long  time  had  struggled  to  overcome  that  painful  dis- 
ease ; but  the  exertions  both  of  his  own  skill,  and  of 
the  rest  of  his  medical  brethren  in  most  parts  of  the 
cpntineyt,  had  hitherto  proved  ineffectual  even  to  hi9 
relief.  He  determined,  therefore,  to  take  a voyage  tc 
Europe,  and  accordingly  sailed  for  London  Here,  in 
a thick  smoke  and  an  impure  atmosphere,  where  sc 
many  asthmatics  have  found  such  remarkable  benefit, 
he  also  experienced  a considerable  alleviation  of  his 
complaint;  and  probably  the  permanent  alteration  in 
his  health  which  he  afterward  enjoyed,  may  be  in 
some  measure  attributed  to  the  effects  of  his  residence 
in  London.  He  also  employed  himself  during  his  con- 
tinuance in  the  metropolis,  in  collecting  subscriptions 
for  an  hospital  in  New-York,  which  he  had  been  chiefly 
instrumental  in  establishing. 

In  London  he  again  had  an  opportunity  of  seeing 
his  friend,  Mr.  Pott,  at  the  head  of  his  profession,  and 
of  renewing  that  intercourse  which  had  been  previously 
commenced  between  them.  He  had  now  been  for 
some  years  left  to  the  guidance  of  his  own  judgment ; 
but  unlike  many  who  suppose  all  knowledge  to  become 
stationary  at  the  time  of  their  leaving  college,  he  was 
still  willing  to  be  taught  by  those  who  had  formerly 
been  his  instructers,  and  who,  from  the  great  opportu- 
nities they  enjoyed,  would  be  enabled  to  afford  him 
much  information.  Eager  for  the  acquisition  of 
knowledge,  whenever  and  wherever  it  could  be  ob- 
tained, he  again  attended  the  lectures  of  his  old  master, 
Dr.  Hunter,  and  those  of  his  friend,  Mr.  Pott,  who  lost 
no  opportunity  of  showing  the  consistency  between  his 
profession  and  proofs  of  respect ; during  his  short  stay 
there,  he  paid  Dr.  Jones  the  most  particular  attention, 
and  presented  him  with  a complete  copy  of  his  lectures, 
just  before  his  departure  from  London.  His  kindness, 
however,  did  not  end  here  ; for  in  the  frequent  appli- 
cations which  he  received  for  advice  from  all  parts  of 
this  country,  in  difficult  and  important  cases,  he  never 
failed  to  recommend  his  old  pupil,  as  capable  of  afford- 
ing any  relief  to  be  derived  from  surgical  assistance. 
In  consequence  of  this,  his  attendance  was  frequently 
desired  in  the  different  states  ; and  while  he  showed, 
by  his  skill  and  success,  that  the  opinion  which  had 
been  formed  of  him  was  just,  his  fame  became  thereby 
diffused  throughout  the  continent  of  America. 

The  following  year  he  returned  to  his  native  country, 
the  political  situation  of  which,  at  that  time,  called 
loudly  for  the  exertions  of  all  her  citizens.  He  again 
resumed  his  lectures,  and  delivered  several  courses, 
and  in  the  autumn  of  the  next  year,  1775,  published  his 
“ Plain  Remarks  upon  Wounds  and  Fractures,”  which 
he  inscribed  to  his  old  preceptor,  Dr.  Cadwallader,  in 
a neat  dedication.  A work  of  this  kind  which  would 
give  the  young  practitioner  clear  notions  of  the  im- 
proved mode  of  treating  disease,  without  embarrassing 
him  with  refined  speculations  or  useless  disquisitions, 
was  much  wanted.  He  attempted  no  systematic  ar- 
rangements, but  simply  treated  of  those  subjects  to 
which  the  attention  of  the  surgeons  of  the  army  and 
navy  would  be  most  continually  directed.  No  present 
could  have  been  more  acceptable  to  his  country,  and  no 
gift  more  opportunely  made ; for  in  the  situation  of 
American  affairs,  many  persons  were  chosen  to  act  as 
surgeons,  who,  from  their  few  opportunities,  and  their 
ignorance  of  the  improvements  that  had  lately  been 
brought  in  practice,  were  but  ill  qualified  for  the  office. 
His  well-meant  endeavours  were  not  lost ; for  the  im- 
provements which  he  had  made  known,  though  new  to 
most  practitioners  and  surgeons,  were  readily  adopted 
when  recommended  by  such  authority.  This  was  the 
only  work  ever  published  by  Dr.  Jones  ; it  might  have, 
indeed,  been  readily  supposed,  that  more  would  have 
come  from  his  pen,  considering  how  well  qualified  he 
was  to  make  observations,  and  impart  to  others  some 
portion  of  that  knowledge  of  which  he  himself 


JUD 


JUG 


possessed  so  great  a ‘share.  Such  was  actually  his  in- 
tention ; and  he  had  prepared  anotlAr  work  for  the 
press,  but  was  prevented  by  the  most  base  treachery 
from  giving  it  to  the  world. 

He  died  1791,  in  the  63d  year  of  his  age.  As  a Sur- 
geon, Dr.  Jones  stood  at  the  head  of  the  profession  in 
this  country  ; and  he  may  be  deservedly  considered  as 
the  chief  instrument  in  effecting  the  remarkable  re- 
volution in  that  branch  of  the  healing  art,  which  is  now 
so  apparent,  by  laying  aside  the  former  complicated 
modes  of  practice,  and  substituting  those  which  are 
plain  and  simple.  The  operation  to  which  he  princi- 
pally confined  himself  for  many  of  the  last  years  of  his 
life,  was  lithotomy ; and  his  success  in  this  difficult 
and  important  object  of  a surgeon’s  duty,  was  great 
indeed.  Even  in  the  month  before  his  death,  in  a most 
capital  and  nice  operation,  there  did  not  appe&r  to  be  | 
any  diminution  of  that  dexterity  and  steadiness  of 
hand,  for  which  he  had  always  been  remarkable,  and 
of  which  those  not  half  his  age  might  have  boasted. 

Connected  with  this  part  of  his  professional  charac- 
ter, was  his  merit  as  an  accoucheur  ; and  in  this  diffi- 
cult and  important  branch  his  success  was  great. 

The  merit  bf  Dr.  Jones  as  a physician  was  likewise 
considerable.  Though  educated  in  the  school  of  Boer- 
haave,  he  never  professed  an  implicit  faith  in  that,  or 
any  other  system.  He  was  guided  by  just  principles, 
and  he  varied  his  practice  like  every  judicious  phy- 
sician, with  the  varying  circumstances  of  the  case. 
The  success  of  his  practice  was  the  best  proof  of  the 
truth  of  his  principles,  and  of  the  judgment  which  di- 
rected their  application.”—  Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

[“  JONES,  Walter,  M.  D.,  one  of  the  most  eminent 
physicians  of  our  country,  was  born  in  Virginia,  and 
received  his  medical  education  at  the  University  of 
Edinburgh,  where  he  was  graduated  about  the  year 
1770.  While  at  this  institution  he  became  a favourite 
of  the  school,  and  enjoyed  the  particular  friendship 
and  esteem  of  Cullen,  and  the  other  professors  of  that 
time. 

On  his  return  to  his  native  country,  he  settled  in 
Northumberland  county,  Virginia,  where  he  acquired 
an  extensive  practice,  and  sustained  throughout  life  the 
highest  standing  both  as  a scholar  and  physician.  ‘ He 
was,’  (says  a distinguished  gentleman,  who  for  some 
time  enjoyed  his  acquaintance,)  ‘ for  the  variety  and 
extent  of  bis  learning,  the  originality  and  strength  of  his 
mind,  the  sagacity  of  his  observations,  and  the  capti- 
vating powers  of  his  conversation,  one  of  the  most  ex- 
traordinary men  I have  ever  known.  He  was  an  ac- 
curate observer  of  nature  and  of  human  character;  and 
seemed  to  possess  intuitively  the  faculty  of  discerning 
the  hidden  cause  of  disease,  and  of  applying,  with  a 
promptness  and  decision  peculiar  to  himself,  the  ap- 
propriate remedies.’  For  a few  years  he  was  returned 
a member  of  the  national  legislature ; but  he  spent  the 
most  of  his  life  in  the  practice  of  that  profession  of 
which  he  was  a distinguished  ornament.” — Thach. Med. 
Biog.  A.] 

JUDGMENT.  The  judgment  is  the  most  important 
of  the  intellectual  faculties.  We  acquire  all  our 
knowledge  by  this  faculty ; without  it  our  life  would 
be  merely  vegetative ; we  would  have  no  idea  either 
of  the  existence  of  other  bodies,  or  of  our  own ; for 
these  two  sorts  of  notions,  like  our  knowledge,  are  the 
consequence  of  our  faculty  of  judging. 

To  judge  is  to  establish  a relation  between  two  ideas, 
or  between  two  groups  of  ideas.  When  I judge  of  the 
goodness  of  a work,  I feel  that  the  idea  of  goodness 
belongs  to  the  book  which  I have  read  ; I establish  a 
relation,  I form  to  myself  an  idea  of  a different  kind 
from  that  which  arises  from  sensibility  and  memory. 

A continuation  of  judgments  linked  together  form  an 
inference,  or  process  of  reasoning. 

We  see  how  important  it  is  to  judge  justly,  that  is,  to 
establish  only  those  relations  which  really  exist.  If  I 
judge  that  a poisonous  substance  is  salutary,  I am  in 
danger  of  losing  my  life ; my  false  judgment  is  there- 
fore hurtful.  It  is  the  same  with  all  those  of  the  same 
kind.  Almost  all  the  misfortunes  which  oppress  man 
in  a moral  sense,  arise  from  errors  of  judgment;  crimes, 
vices,  bad  conduct,  spring  from  false  judgment. 

The  science  of  logic  has  for  its  end  the  teaching  of 
just  reasoning : but  pure  judgment,  or  good  sense,  and 
false  judgment,  or  wrong-headedness , depend  on  organi- 
zation. We  cannot  change  in  this  respect ; we  must 
remain  as  nature  has  made  us.  There  are  men  en- 
470 


dowed  with  the  precious  gift  of  finding  relations  of 
things  which  have  never  been  perceived  before.  If 
these  relations  are  very  important,  and  beneficial  to 
humanity,  the  authors  are  men  of  genius ; if  the  rela- 
tions are  of  less  importance,  they  are  considered  men 
of  wit,  imagination.  Men  differ  principally  by  their 
manner  of  feeling  different  relations,  or  of  judging. 
The  judgment  seems  to  be  injured  by  an  extreme 
vivacity  of  sensations ; hence  we  see  that  faculty  be- 
come more  perfect  with  ag e.—Magendie's  Physiology 

Judicato'rius.  (From  judico,  to  discern.)  An  ob- 
solete term  applied  to  a synocha  of  four  days,  because 
its  termination  may  certainly  be  foreseen. 

JUGA'LE  OS.  (Jugalis ; from  jugum,  a yoke  : 
from  its  resemblance,  or  because  it  is  articulated,  to  the 
bone  of  the  upper  jaw,  like  a yoke.)  Os  malce ; Os 
zygomaticum.  The  ossa  malarum  are  the  prominent 
square  bones  which  form  the  upper  part  of  the  cheeks. 
They  are  situated  close  under  the  eyes,  and  make  part 
of  the  orbit.  Each  of  these  bones  have  three  surfaces 
to  be  considered.  One  of  these  is  exterior  and  some- 
what convex.  The  second  is  superior  and  concave, 
serving  to  form  the  lower  and  lateral  parts  of  the  orbit. 
The  third,  which  is  posterior,  is  very  unequal  and  con- 
cave, for  the  lodgment  of  the  lower  part  of  the  temporal 
muscle.  Each  of  these  bones  may  be  described  as 
having  four  processes  formed  by  their  four  angles.  Two 
of  these  may  be  called  orbitar  processes.  The  superior 
one  is  connected  with  the  orbitar  process  of  the  os 
frontis  ; and  the  inferior  one  with  the  malar  process  of 
the  maxillary  bone.  The  third  is  connected  with  the 
temporal  process  of  the  sphenoid  bone ; and  the  fourth 
forms  a bony  arch,  by  its  connexion  with  the  zygomatic 
process  of  the  temporal  bone.  In  infants,  these  bones 
are  entire  and  completely  ossified. 

JU'GLANS.  {Quasi  Jovis  glans,  the  royal  fruit, 
from  its  magnitude.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Moncecia;  Order,  Poly- 
andria.  The  walnut-tree. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  walnut.  See 
Juglans  regia. 

Juglans  regia.  The  systematic  name  of  the  wal- 
nut-tree. The  tree  which  bears  the  walnut  is  the 
Juglans — foliolis  ovalibus  glabris  subserratis  subae- 
qualibus  of  Linnteus.  It  is  a native  of  Persia,  but 
cultivated  in  this  country.  The  unripe  fruit,  which 
has  an  astringent  bitterish  taste,  and  has  been  long 
employed  as  a pickle,  is  the  part  which  was  directed 
for  medical  use  by  the  London  College,  on  account  of 
its  athelmintic  virtues.  An  extract  of  the  green  fruit 
is  the  most  convenient  preparation,  as  it  may  be  kept  for 
a sufficient  length  of  time,  and  made  agreeable  to  the  sto- 
mach of  the  patient,  by  mixing  it  with  cinnamon  water. 

The  putamen,  or  green  rind  of  the  walnut,  has  been 
celebrated  as  a powerful  anti-venereal  remedy,  for 
more  than  a century  and  a half;  and  Petrus  Borellus 
has  given  directions  for  a decoction  not  unlike  that 
which  is  commonly  called  the  Lisbon  diet-drink,  in 
which  the  walnut,  with  its  green  bark,  forms  a princi- 
pal ingredient.  Ramazzini,  whose  works  were  pub- 
lished early  in  the  present  century,  has  likewise  in- 
formed us,  that  in  his  time,  the  green  rind  of  the  wal- 
nut was  esteemed  a good  anti-vinereal  remedy  in  Eng- 
land. This  part  of  the  walnut  has  been  much  used  iu 
decoctions,  during  the  last  fifty  years,  both  in  the  green 
and  dried  stale ; it  has  been  greatly  recommended  by 
writers  on  the  continent,  as  well  as  by  those  of  our 
own  country  ; and  is,  without  doubt,  a very  useful  addi- 
tion to  the  decoction  of  the  woods.  Pearson  has  em- 
ployed it  during  many  years,  in  those  cases  where  pains 
in  the  limbs  and  indurations  of  the  membranes  have 
remained,  after  the  venereal  disease  has  been  cured  by 
mercury ; and  he  informs  us  that  he  has  seldom  direct- 
ed it  without  manifest  advantage. 

BrambiHa  and  Girtanner  also  contend  for  the  anti 
venereal  virtues  of  the  green  bark  of  the  walnut : but 
the  result  of  Pearson’s  experience  will  not  permit  him 
to  add  his  testimony  to  theirs.  I have  given  it,  says 
he,  in  as  large  doses  as  the  stomach  could  retain,  and 
for  as  long  a time  as  the  strength  of  the  patients,  and 
the  nature  of  their  complaints  would  permit ; but  I 
have  uniformly  observed,  that  if  they  who  take  it  be 
not  previously  cured  of  lues  venerea , the  peculiar 
symptoms  will  appear,  and  proceed  in  their  usual 
course,  in  defiance  of  the  powers  of  this  medicine.  The 
Decoctum  Jusitanicum  may  be  given  with  great  ad 
vantage  in  many  of  those  cutaneous  diseases,  which 


■UN 


JUN 


are  attended  with  aridity  of  the  skin ; and  I have  had 
some  opportunities  of  observing  that  when  the  putamen 
of  the  walnut  has  been  omitted,  either  intentionally  or 
by  accident,  the  same  good  effects  have  not  followed 
the  taking  of  the  decoction,  as  when  it  contained  this 
ingredient.  See  Juglans. 

JUGULAR.  (Jugularis ; from  jugulum,  the  throat.) 
Belonging  to  the  throat. 

Jugular  veins.  The  veins  so  called  run  from  the 
head  down  the  sides  of  the  neck,  and  are  divided,  from 
their  situation,  into  external  and  internal.  The  exter- 
nal, or  superficial  jugular  vein , receives  the  blood 
from  the  frontal,  angular,  temporal,  auricular,  sublin- 
gual or  ranine,  and  occipital  veins.  The  internal , or 
deep-seated  jugular  vein,  receives  the  blood  from  the 
lateral  sinuses  of  the  dura  mater,  the  laryngeal  and  pha- 
ryngeal veins.  Both  jugulars  unite,  and  form,  with  the 
subclavian  vein,  the  superior  vena  cava,  which  termi- 
nates i n the  superior  part  of  the  right  auricle  of  the  heart. 

JU'GULUM.  (From  jugum,  a yoke;  because  the 
yoke  is  fastened  to  this  part.)  The  throat  or  anterior 
»art  of  the  neck. 

JUJUBA.  (An  Arabian  word.)  Jujube.  See  Rham- 
uus  zizyphus. 

JU'JUBE.  See  Rhamnus  zizyphus. 

JULY-FLOWER.  See  Dianthus  Caryophyllus. 

JUNCKER,  Gottlob  John,  was  born  in  1680  at 
Londorff,  in  Hesse.  After  the  proper  studies  he  gradu- 
ated at  Halle  in  1718 ; and  became  afterward  a distin- 
guished professor  there,  as  well  as  physician  to  the 
public  hospital. i His  works,  which  are  chiefly  compi- 
lations, have  been  much  esteemed,  and  are  still  occa- 
sionally referred  to ; especially  as  giving  a compendious 
view  of  the  doctrines  of  Stahl,  which  he  espoused  and 
taught.  He  has  given  a “ Conspectus”  of  medicine,  of 
surgery,  of  chemistry,  and  of  several  other  departments 
of  professional  knowledge ; also  many  academical  theses 
on  medical,  chirurgical,  and  philosophical  subjects.  He 
died  in  1752. 

JU'NCUS.  (An  old  Latin  word,  a jungendo,  say 
the  etymologists,  from  the  use  of  the  plants  which  bear 
this  name  in  joining  or  binding  things  together.)  ®The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
Class,  Hexandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Jungus  odoratus.  See  Andropogon  schmnanthus. 

JUNIPER.  See  Juniperus  communis. 

Juniper  gum.  See  Juniperus  communis. 

JUNI'PERUS.  (From  juvenis,  young,  and  pario, 
to  bring  forth : so  called  because  it  produces  its  young 
terries  while  the  old  ones  are  ripening.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Dicecia;  Order,  Mono- 
delphia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  juniper. 
See  Juniperus  communis. 

Juniperus  communis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
juniper-tree.  Juniperus — foliis  ternis  patentibus  mu- 
cronalis,  baccis  longioribus,  of  Linnaeus.  Both  the  tops 
and  berries  of  this  indigenous  plant  are  directed  in 
our  pharmacopoeias,  but  the  latter  are  usually  preferred, 
and  are  brought  chiefly  from  Holland  and  Italy.  Of 
their  efficacy  as  a stomachic,  carminative,  diaphoretic, 
and  diuretic,  there  are  several  relations  by  physicians 
of  great  authority:  and  medical  writers  have  also 
spoken  of  the  utility  of  the  juniper  in  nephritic  cases, 
uterine  obstructions,  scorbutic  affections,  and  some 
cutaneous  diseases.  Our  pharmacopoeias  direct  the 
essential  oil,  and  a spirituous  distillation  of  the  berries, 
to  be  kept  in  the  shops.  From  this  tree  is  also  obtained 
a concrete  resin,  which  has  been  called  sandarach,  or 
gum  juniper.  It  exudes  in  white  tears,  more  transpa- 
rent than  mastich.  It  Is  almost  totally  soluble  in  alko- 
hol,  with  which  it  forms  a white  varnish  that  dries 
speedily.  Reduced  to  powder  it  is  called  pounce,  which 
prevents  ink  from  sinking  into  paper  from  which  the 
exterior  coating  of  size  has  been  scraped  away. 

Juniperus  lycia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  true  frankincense.  Olibanum ; 
Thus.  Frankincense  has  received  different  appella- 
tions, according  to  its  different  appearances ; the  single 
tears  are  called  simply  olibanum,  or  thus ; when  two 
are  joined  together,  thus  masculum ; and  when  two  are 
very  large,  thus  femininum ; if  several  adhere  to  the 
bark,  thus  corticosum ; the  fine  powder  which  rubs  off 
from  the  tears,  mica  thuris  • and  the  coarser,  manna 
thuris.  The  gum-resin,  that  is  so  called,  is  the  juice  of 
the  Juniperus— foliis  ternis  undique  imbricatis  ovatis 

blusis,  and  is  brought  from  Turkey  and  the  East 


Indies;  but  that  which  comes  from  India  is  ’.ess  es- 
teemed. It  is  said  to  ooze  spontaneously  from  the 
bark  of  the  tree,  appearing  in  drops,  or  tears,  of  a pale 
yellowish,  and  sometimes  of  a reddish  colour.  Olba- 
num  has  a moderately  strong  and  not  very  agreeable 
smell,  and  a bitterish,  somewhat  pungent  taste:  in 
chewing,  it  sticks  to  the  teeth,  becomes  white,  and  ren- 
ders the  saliva  milky.  Laid  on  a red-hot  iron,  it  readily 
catches  flame,  and  burns  with  a strong  diffusive  and 
not  unpleasant  smell.  On  trituration  with  water,  the 
greatest  part  dissolves  into  a milky  liquor,  which,  on 
standing,  deposites  a portion  of  resinous  matter.  The 
gummy  and  resinous  parts  are  nearly  in  equal  propor- 
tions ; and  though  rectified  spirit  dissolves  less  of  the 
olibanum  than  water,  it  extracts  nearly  all  its  active 
matter.  In  ancient  times,  olibanum  seems  to  have 
been  in  great  repute  in  affections  of  the  head  and  breast, 
coughs,  hemoptysis,  and  in  various  fluxes,  both  uterine 
and  intestinal ; it  was  also  much  employed  externally. 
Recourse  is  now  seldom  had  to  this  medicine,  which  is 
superseded  by  myrrh,  and  other  articles  of  the  resinous 
kind.  It  ig,  however,  esteemed  by  many  as  an  adstrin- 
gent,  and  though  not  in  general  use,  is  considered  as  a 
valuable  medicine  in  fluor  albus,  and  debilities  of  the 
stomach  and  intestines : applied  externally  in  the  form 
of  plaster,  it  is  said  to  be  corroborant,  &c.  and  with  this 
intention  it  forms  the  basis  of  the  emplastrum  thuris.  j 
Juniperus  sabina.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  or  barren  savin-tree.  Sabina;  Savina;  Sa- 
bina sterilis ; Brathu.  Juniperus— foliis  oppositis 
erectis  decurrentibus,  oppositionibus  pyxidatis,  of  Lin- 
naeus. Savin  is  a native  of  the  south  of  Europe  and 
the  Levant;  it  has  long  been  cultivated  in  our  gardens, 
and  from  producing  male  and  female  flowers  on  sepa- 
rate plants,  it  was  formerly  distinguished  into  the  barren 
and  berry- bearing  savin.  The  leaves  and  tops  of  this 
plant  have  a moderately  strong  smell  of  the  disagreea- 
ble kind,  and  a hot,  bitterish,  acrid  taste.  They  give 
out  great  part  of  their  active  matter  to  watery  liquors, 
and  the  whole  to  rectified  spirit.  Distilled  with  water 
they  yield  a large  quantity  of  essential  oil.  Decoctions 
of  the  leaves,  freed  from  the  volatile  principle  by  in 
spissation  -to  the  consistence  of  an  extract,  retain  a 
considerable  share  of  their  pungency  and  warmth  along 
with  their  bitterness,  and  have  some  degree  of  smell, 
but  not  resembling  that  of  the  plant  itself.  On  inspis- 
sating the  spirituous  tincture,  there  remains  an  extract 
consisting  of  two  distinct  substances,  of  which  one  is 
yellow,  unctuous,  or  oily,  bitterish,  and  very  pungent ; 
the  other  black,  resinous,  less  pungent,  and  sub- astrin- 
gent. Savin  is  a powerful  and  active  medicine,  and 
has  been  long  reputed  the  most  efficacious  in  the  m ateria 
medica,  for  producing  a determination  to  the  uterus, 
and  thereby  proving  emmenagogue ; it  heats  and  stimu- 
lates the  whole  system  very  considerably,  and  is  said 
to  promote  the  fluid  secretions.  The  power  which  this 
plant  possesses  (observes  Dr.  Woodville)  in  opening  ute- 
rine obstructions,  is  considered  to  be  so  great,  that  we 
are  told  it  has  been  frequently  employed,  and  with  too 
much  success,  for  purposes  the  most  infamous  and 
unnatural.  It  seems  probable,  however,  that  its  effects 
in  this  way  have  been  somewhat  overrated,  as  it  is 
found,  very  frequently,  to  fail  as  an  emmenagogue, 
though  this,  in  some  measure,  may  be  ascribed  to  the 
smallness  of  the  dose  in  which  it  has  been  usually  pre- 
scribed by  physicians;  for  Dr.  Cullen  observes,  “that 
savin  is  a very  acrid  and  heating  substance,  and  I have 
been  often,  on  account  of  these  qualities,  prevented 
from  employing  it  in  the  quantity  necessary  to  render 
it  emmenagogue.  I must  own,  however,  that  it  shows 
a more  powerful  determination  to  the  uterus  than  any 
other  plant  I have  employed ; but  I have  been  frequently 
disappointed  in  this,  and  its  heating  qualities  always 
require  a great  deal  of  caution.”  Dr.  Home  appears  to 
have  had  very  great  success  with  this  medicine,  for  in 
five  cases  of  amenorrhoea,  which  occurred  at  the  Royal 
Infirmary  at  Edinburgh,  four  were  cured  by  the  sabina, 
which  he  gave  in  powder  from  a scruple  to  a drachm 
twice  a-day.  He  says  it  is  well  suited  to  the  debile,  but 
improper  in  plethoric  habits,  and  therefore  orders  re- 
peated bleedings  before  its  exhibitions.  Country  people 
give  the  juice  from  the  leaves  and  young  tops  of  savin 
mixed  with  milk  to  their  children,  in  order  to  destroy 
the  worms ; it  generally  operates  by  stool,  and  brings 
them  away  with  it.  The  leaves  cut  small,  and  given 
to  horses,  mixed  with  their  corn,  destroy  the  bots. 
Externally,  savin  is  recommended  as  an  escharotic  to 


juit 


JUX 


foul  ulcers,  syphilitic  warts,  &c.  A strong  decoction  of 
the  plant  in  lard  and  wax  forms  a useful  ointment  to 
keep  up  a constant  discharge  from  blisters.  &c.  See 
Ceratum  sabinae. 

JU'PJTER.  The  ancient  chemical  name  of  tin, 
because  supposed  under  the  government  of  that  planet. 

JURIN,  James,  was,  during  several  years,  an  active 
member  and  Secretary  of  the  Royal  Society,  and  at  his 
death  in  1750,  President  of  the  College  of  Physicians.  He 
distinguished  himself  by  a series  of  seventeen  disserta- 
tions, printed  in  the  Philosophical  Transactions,  and 
afterward  as  a separate  work,  in  which  mathematical 
science  was  applied  with  considerable  acuteness  to 
physiological  subjects.  These  papers,  however,  in- 
volved him  in  several  philosophical  controversies  con- 


cerning the  force  of  the  heart,  &c.  He  was  a warm 
advocate  for  the  practice  of  inoculation,  which  he 
proved  greatly  to  lessen  the  violence  of  the  small-pox : 
but  he  did  not  anticipate  that  it  would  increase  the 
mortality  upon  the  whole,  by  keeping  up  the  infection, 
while  many  retained  their  prejudices  against  adopting  it. 

JUSTICIA.  (So  named  in  honour  of  Mr.  Justice, 
who  published  the  British  Gardener’s  Director.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Diandria.-  Order, 
Monogynia. 

JUVA'NTIA.  (From  juvo,  to  assist.)  Whatever 
assists  in  relieving  a disease. 

JUVENTUS.  S eeJlge. 

Juxtangi'na.  (From  juxta , near,  and  angina , a 
quinsy.)  A disease  resembling  a quinsy. 


472 


END  OF  VOL.  I, 


Harper's  Stereotype  Edition,  improved  and  enlarged. 


LEXICON  MEDICUM; 

OR 

MEDICAL  DICTIONARY; 

CONTAINING  AN  EXPLANATION  OF  THE  TERMS  IN 


ANATOMY, 
BOTANY, 
CHEMISTRY, 
MATERIA  MEDICA, 
MIDWIFERY, 


MINERALOGY, 
PHARMACY, 
PHYSIOLOGY, 
PRACTICE  OF  PHYSIC, 
SURGERY, 


AND  THE  VARIOUS  BRANCHES  OF 

NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY  CONNECTED  WITH  MEDICINE* 

SELECTED,  ARRANGED,  AND  COMPILED  FROM  THE  BEST  AUTHORS. 


“ Nec  aranearum  sane  texus  ideo  melior,  quia  ex  se  fila  gignunt,  nec 
noster  viiior  quia  ex  alienis  libamus  ut  apes.” 

Just.  Lips.  Monit.  Polit.  Lib.  i.  cap.  i. 


By  ROBERT  HOOPER,  M.D.  F.L.S. 


TIIE  FOURTH  AMERICAN,  FROM  THE  LAST  LONDON  EDITION, 

WITH  ADDITIONS  FRt)M  AMERICAN  AUTHORS  ON  BOTANY,  CHEMISTRY,  MATERIA  MEDICA,  MINERALOGY,  &« 

By  SAMUEL  AKERLY,  M.D. 

FORMERLY  PHYSICIAN  TO  THE  NEW-YORK  CITY  DISPENSARY,  RESIDENT  PHYSICIAN  TO  THE  CITY  HOSPITAL, 
LATE  HOSPITAL  SURGEON  UNITED  STATES’  ARMY,  PHYSICIAN  TO  THE  NEW-YORK  INSTITUTION 
FOR  THE  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  DEAF  AND  DUMB,  &C.  &G. 


IN  TWO  VOLUMES. 

VOL.  II. 

NEW-YORK: 

PRINTED  AND  PUBLISHED  BY  J.  & J.  HARPER, 

NO.  82  CLIFF-STREET, 

AND  FOP.  SALE  BY  THE  PRINCIPAL  BOOKSELLERS  THROUGHOUT  THE 
UNITED  STATES. 


18  33 


SOUTHERN  DISTRICT  OF  NEW- YORK,  t». 

BE  iT  REMEMBERED,  That  on  the  15th  day  of  Oct  «r,  A.  D.  1S29,  in  the  fifty-fourth  year  of  the  independence  of  the 
United  States  of  America,  J.  & J.  HARPER,  of  the  said  district,  have  deposited  in  this  office  the  title  of  a book,  the  right 
whereof  they  claim  as  Proprietors,  in  the  words  following,  to  wit : 

“lexicon  Medicum  ; or  Medical  Dictionary;  containing  an  explanation  of  the  terms  in  Anatomy,  Botany,  Chemistry,  Materia 
Medica,  Midwifery,  Mineralogy,  Pharmacy,  Physiology,  Practice  of  Physic,  Surgery,  and  the  various  branches  of  Natural  Philo- 
sophy connected  with  Medicine.  Selected,  arranged,  and  compiled  from  the  best  authors. 

‘ Nec  aranearum  sane  texus  ideo  melior,  quia  ex  se  fila  gignunt,  nec  noster  vilior  quia  ex  alienis  libamus  ut  apes.’ 

Just.  Lips.  Monit.  Polit.  Lib.  i.  cap.  i. 

By  Robert  Hooper,  M.D.  F.L.S.  The  fourth  American,  from  the  last  London  edition,  with  additions  from  American  authors  o” 
Botany,  Chemistry,  Materia  Medica,  Mineralogy,  &c.  By  Samuel  Akerly,  M.D..  formerly  physician  to  the  New-York  City 
Dispensary,  resident  physician  to  the  City  Hospital,  late  hospital  surgeon  United  States’ army,  physician  to  the  New-York  Institution 
for  the  Instruction  of  the  Deaf  and  Dumb,  &c.  &c.” 

In  conformity  to  the  Act  of  Congress  of  the  United  States,  entitled  “ Ail  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  Learning,  by  securing  the 
copies  of  maps,  charts,  and  hooks,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  snch  copies,  during  the  time  therein  mentioned.”  And  also  to 
an  Aot,  entitle!  “ An  Act,  supplementary  to  an  Act,  entitled  an  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  Learning,  by  securing  the  copies  of 
maps,  charts,  and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies,  during  the  times  therein  mentioned,  and  extending  the 
benefits  thereof  to  the  arts  of  designing,  engraving,  and  etching  historical  and  other  prints.” 

FREDERICK  I.  BETTS, 

Clerk  ef  the  Sontlvm  District  cf  JYftp-Foi* 


A NEW 


MEDICAL  DICTIONARY. 


K 


KEI 

Kaath.  See  Jlcacia  catechu. 

KAEMPFER,  Engelbert,  wag  born  in  1651  at 
Lippe,  in  Westphalia.  He  was  educated  in  Sweden, 
and  being  eager  to  travel,  accompanied  tire  Swedish 
ambassador,  Fabricius,  to  Persia,  as  secretary:  on 
whose  departure  from  Ispahan,  after  two  years,  he  ob- 
tained the  appointment  of  chief  surgeon  to  the  Dutch 
East  India  Company ; and  was  thus  enabled  to  pene- 
trate as  far  as  Siam  and  Japan,  and  cleared  up  the 
geography  of  these-countries,  which  was  very  imper- 
fectly known  before.  On  his  return  to  Eurcpe,  in 
lf)lJ4,  he  graduated  at  Leyden,  and  settled  in  his  own 
country;  he  was  afterward  appointed  physician  to  his 
sovereign,  and  continued  engaged  in  practice,  and  in 
composing  several  works,  till  his  death,  in  1716.  In  his 
inaugural  dissertation,  among  other  subjects  relating 
to  medicine,  he  notices  a method  of  curing  colic  among 
the  Japanese  by  puncture  with  a needle.  But  his  great 
work,  entitled  “ Amaenitates  Exoticce,”  is  more  espe- 
cially esteemed  for  its  botanical  information,  and  au- 
thentic details,  relating  to  the  history  and  manners  of 
Persia,  &c.  His  History  of  Japan,  of  which  there  is  an 
English  translation  in  folio,  is  highly  valued  for  its 
accuracy  and  fidelity. 

KiEMPFE'RIA.  (Named  after  Kcempfer,  the 
Westphalian  naturalist.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants.  Class,  Monandria  ; Order,  Monogynia. 

K.empferia  galanga.  The  plant  which  affords 
the  greater  galangal  root. 

K/empfkria  rotunda.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  affords  the  officinal  zedoary.  Zedoa- 
ria.  Kampferia — foliis  lanccolatis  petiolatis,  of  Lin- 
nteus.  The  roots  of  this  plant  are  brought  to  us  in 
long  pieces,  zedoaria  longa , about  the  thickness  of  the 
little  finger,  two  or  three  inches  in  length,  bent,  rough, 
and  angular;  or  in  roundish  pieces,  zedoaria  rotunda, 
about  an  inch  in  diameter,  of  an  ash  colour  on  the  out- 
side, and  white  within.  They  have  an  agreeable 
camphoiaceous  smell,  and  a bitterish  aromatic  taste. 
Though  formerly  much  esteemed  against  rheumatic 
affections,  they  are  at  present  thought  to  possess  very 
little  medicinal  powers,  although  they  had  a place  in 
the  confectio  aromatica  of  the  London  Pharmacopoeia. 
Ka'jeput  oleum.  See  Melaleuca. 

KA'LI.  (An  Arabian  word.)  The  vegetable  alkali. 
See  Potassa. 

Kali  acetatum.  See  Potassce  acetas. 

Kali  aeratitm.  See  Potassa  carbonas. 

Kali  arsemcatum.  A preparation  of  arsenic, 
composed  of  the  vegetable  alkali  and  the  acid  of 
arsenic. 

Kali  citratum.  See  Potassce  citrcs. 

Kali  pr.eparatum.  See  Potassce  subcarbonas. 
Kali  purum.  See  Potassce  fusa. 

Kali  sulphuratum.  See  Sulphuretum potassa. 
Kali  tartarizatum.  See  Potassa  tartras. 

Kali  vitriolatom.  See  Potassa  sulphas. 
KARPHOLITE.  A yellow  mineral  which  occurs 
in  thin  prismatic  concretions. 

KEEL.  See  Carina. 

Keeled  leaf.  See  Carinatus. 

KE1LL,  James,  was  born  in  Scotland,  1673.  After 
going  through  the  proper  studies  abroad,  and  especi- 
ally attending  to  anatomy,  he  was  enabled  to  lecture 
on  that  subject  with  great  reputation  in  both  the  Eng- 


KID 

lish  universities,  and  received  an  honorary  degree  a! 
Cambridge.  During  this  period  he  published  a Com- 
pendium of  Anatomy,  chiefly  from  Cowper.  In  1703- 
he  settled  in  practice  at  Northampton ; and  three 
years  after  sent  to  the  Royal  Society  an  account  of  the 
dissection  of  a man,  reputed  to  have  been  130  years  of 
age;  which  agreed  very  much  with  what  Harvey 
found  in  old  Parr.  He  was  well  skilled  in  mathema- 
tics, which  he  applied  to  the  explanation  of  the  laws 
of  the  animal  economy.  In  1708,  he  published  “ An 
Account  of  Animal  Secretion,  the  Quantity  of  Blood 
in  the  Human  Body,  and  Muscular  Motion.’*  To 
which,  in  a second  edition,  he  added  an  Essay  on  the 
Force  of  the  Heart.  This  engaged  him  in  a contro- 
versy with  Dr.  Jurin,  which  was  carried  on  in  the 
Philosophical  Transactions  (Dr.  Kelli  being  then  a 
member  of  the  Royal  Society)  till  the  period  of  his 
premature  death  in  1719,  occasioned  by  a cancer  in  the 
mouth,  to  which  he  had  applied  the  cautery,  but  with- 
out any  relief. 

Kei'ri.  See  Cheirantlius  cheiri. 

KELP.  Incinerated  seaweed. 

KENEANGIA.  (From  icevos , empty,  and  ayysiov, 
a vessel.)  1.  A state  of  inaction  of  the  blood  or  other 
vessels. 

2.  A deficiency  of  blood  in  the  vessels. 

KERATE.  The  third  mineral  order  of  Mohs. 

Kerato-pharyng^us.  (From  Ktpas,  a horn,  and 
cpapvyl,  the  pharynx.)  A muscle  so' named  from  its 
shape,  and  insertion  in.  the  pharynx. 

KE'RMES.  ( Chermah , Arabian.)  Granitm  tinc- 
torium ; Coccus  baphica.  Round  reddish  grains,  about 
the  size  of  peas,  found  in  Spain,  Italy,  and  the  south 
of  France,  adhering  to  the  branches  of  the  scarlet  oak. 
They  are  the  nidus  of  a minute  red  animalcule,  called 
Coccus  quercus  ilicis.  The  confectio  alkermes , now 
obsolete,  was  prepared  with  these,  which  possess  cor- 
roborant and  adstringent  virtues. 

Kermes  mineralis.  A preparation  of  antimony, 
so  termed  from  its  resemblance  in  colour  to  the  insect 
of  that  name.  It  is  now  disused  in  medicine,  and 
gives  place  to  the  other  preparations  of  antimony.  See 
Hydrosulphurctvm  stibii  rubruni. 

KERNEL  WORT.  See  Scrophularia nodosa. 

Ke'rva.  ( Kcrvah , Arabian.)  The  Ricinus  cowi- 
munis. 

KETCHUP.  The  prepared  liquor  of  the  mush- 
room, made  by  sprinkling  salt  on  that  vegetable,  and 
collecting  the  fluid  whicn  escapes. 

Keyset’s  pills.  A once  celebrated  mercurial  me- 
dicine, the  method  of  preparing  which  was  purchased 
by  the  French  government,  and  has  since  been  pub- 
lished by  Richard.  The  hydrargyrus  acetatus  is  con- 
sidered as  an  adequat  e substitute  for  the  more  elaborate 
form  of  Koyser.  Richard  concludes  his  account  of 
Keyser’s  pills  with  observing,  that  he  considers  it  to  be, 
without  exception,  the  most  effectual  remedy  for  the 
venereal  disease  hitherto  discovered.  But  further 
trials  of  this  remedy  do  not  justify  the  sanguine  ac- 
counts of  its  properties  ; though  it  may  sometimes  suc- 
ceed when  some  of  the  other  mercurial  preparations 
have  failed. 

Kibes.  A name  for  chilblains. 

Kihria  terrestris.  Barbadoes  tar. 

KIDNEY.  (.Ren,  nis.  m.)  Ah  abdominal  viscua* 


LAB 


LAC 


shaped  like  a kidney-bean,  that  secretes  the  urine. 
There  are  two  kidneys.  One  is  situated  in  each  lum- 
bar region,  near  the  first  lumbar  vertebra,  behind-  the 
peritonseuin.  This  organ  is  composed  of  three  sub- 
stances ; a cortical,  which  is  external,  and  very  vas- 
cular ; a tubulous,  which  consists  of  small  tubes ; and 
a papillous  substance,  which  is  the  innermost.  The 
kidneys  are  generally  surrounded  with  more  or  less 
adipose  membrane,  and  they  have  also  a proper  mem- 
brane, membrava  propria.,  which  is  closely  accreted  to 
the  cortical  substance.  The  renal  arteries,  called  also 
emulgents,  proceed  from  the  aorta.  Tiie  veins  eva- 
cuate their  blood  into  the  ascending  cava.  The  absor- 
bents accompany  the  blood-vessels,  and  terminate  in 
the  thoracic  duct.  The  nerves  of  the  kidneys  are 
branches  of  the  eighth  pair  and  great  intercostal.  The 
excretory  duct  of  this  viscus  is  called  the  ureter.  At 
the  middle  of  the  kidney,  where  the  blood-vessels  enter 
it,  is  a large  membraneous  bag.  called  the  pelvis,  which 
diminishes  like  a funnel,  and  forms  a long  canal,  the 
ureter,  that  conveys  the  urine  from  the  kidney  to  the 
bladder,  which  it  perforates  obliquely. 

Kidney- shaped  leaf  . See  Remformis. 

KIFFEKILL.  See  Meerschaum. 

Kikekunemalo.  A pure  resin,  very  similar  to 
copal,  but  of  a more  beautiful  whiteness  and  transpa- 
rency. It  is  brought  from  America,  where  it  is  said  to 
be  used  medicinally,  in  the  cure  of  hysteria,  tetanus, 
&.c.  It  forms  the  most  beautiful  of  all  varnishes. 

Ki’ki.  {Kike,  Arabian.)  See  Ricinus. 

Ki'na  kina.  See  Cinchona. 

KIN  ATE.  Kinas.  A compound  of  the  Kinic  acid, 
with  a salifiable  base. 

KINIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  kinicum;  from  kinia,  the 
French  name  of  cinchona , from  which  it  is  obtained.) 
“A  peculiar  acid  extracted  from  cinchona.  Let  a 
watery  extract  from  hot  infusions  of  the  bark  in  pow- 
der be  made.  Alkohol  removes  the  resinous  part  of 
this  extract,  and  leaves  a viscid  residue,  of  a brown 
colour,  which  has  hardly  any  bitter  taste,  and  which 
consists  of  kinate  of  lime  and  a mucilaginous  matter. 
This  residue  is  dissolved  in  water,  the  liquor  is  filtered 
and  left  to  spontaneous  evaporation  in  a warm  place. 
It  becomes  thick  like  syrup,  and  then  deposites  by  de- 
grees crystalline  plates,  sometimes  hexaedral,  some- 
times rbomboidal,  sometimes  square,  and  always 
coloured  slightly  of  a reddish-brown.  These  plates  of 
kinate  of  lime  must  be  purified  by  a second  crystalliza- 
tion. They  are  then  dissolved  in  ten  or  twelve  times 
their  weight  of  water,  and  very  dilute  aqueous  oxalic 
acid  is  poured  into  the  solution,  till  no  more  precipitate 
is  formed.  By  filtration,  the  oxalate  of  lime  is  sepa- 
rated, and  the  kinic  acid  being  concentrated  by  spon- 
taneous evaporation,  yields  regular  crystals.  It  is  de- 
composed by  heat.  While  it  forms  a soluble  salt  with 
lime,  it  does  not  precipitate  lead  or  silver  from  their 
solutions.  These  are  characters  sufficiently  distinctive. 


The  kinates  are  scarcely  known ; that  of  liine  const! 
tutes  seven  per  cent,  of  cinchona .” 

Kinki  na.  See  Cinchona. 

KINO.  (An  Indian  word.)  Gummi  gambiense  ; 
Gummi  rubrum  adstringens  gambiense.  The  tree 
from  which  this  resin  is  obtained,  though  not  botani- 
cally  ascertained,  is  known  to  grow  on  the  banks  of 
the  river  Gambia,  in  Africa.  On  wounding  its  bark 
the  fluid  kino  immediately  issues  drop  by  drop,  and, 
by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  is  formed  into  hard  masses.  It 
is  in  appearance  very  like  the  resin  called  Sanguis 
draconis ; much  redder,  more  firm,  resinous,  and  ad- 
stringent  than  catechu.  It  is  now  in  common  use,  and 
is  one  of  the  most  efficacious  vegetable  adstringents, 
or  strptics,  in  the  materia  medica.  Its  dose  is  from 
twenty  to  thirty  grains. 

KN  EE-HOLLY.  See  Ruscus. 

KNEE-PAN.  See  Patella. 

KOLLYRITE.  A light  greasy  mineral  of  a white 
colour,  which  adheres  to  the  tongue. 

Kolto.  (A  Polonese  word.)  The  plica  polonica, 
or  plaited  hair. 

KOUMIS.  A vinous  liquid  which  the  Tartars  make 
by  fermenting  mare’s  milk.  Something  similar  is 
prepared  in  the  Orkneys  and  Shetland. 

KRAMERIA.  (So  named  in  commemoration  of 
two  German  botanists,  who  flourished  about  the  mid- 
dle of  the  last  century.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Tetrandria; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Krameria  triandria.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree,  the  root  of  which  is  called  rhatania , a substance 
which  has  been  long  known  to  the  manufacturers  of 
port  wine ; it  is  the  production  of  Peru,  and  was  long 
thought  to  be  the  root  of  the  cinchona  cordifolia.  It  is 
described  as  externally  resembling  the  root  of  the 
rubia  tinctorum  to  the  taste,  being  aromatic,  bitter, 
and  very  astringent ; its  infusion  or  decoction  turns 
black  with  sulphate  of  iron,  and  precipitates  tannin. 
The  principal  virtues  appear  to  reside  in  the  cortical 
part  of  the  root,  which  is  thick  and  resinous.  An 
opinion  prevails  that  the  substance  sold  in  the  shops 
under  the  name  of  foreign  extract  of  bark,  is  made 
from  this  root. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  medical  virtues  of  this 
root  are  powerfully  tonic.  In  debility  of  the  digestive 
organs,  in  chronic  rheumatisms,  fluor  albus,  and  in 
intermittent  fevers,  it  has  been  employed  with  good 
effect.  While  given  in  doses  similar  to  cinchona.,  it 
has  the  advantage  of  being  only  one-third  the  price  of 
that  substance. 

KR  A MERIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  hramericum  ; from 
krameria , the  name  of  the  plant  from  which  it  is  ob- 
tained.) An  acid  obtained  by  Peschier  from  the  root 
of  the  Krameria  triandria 

Kyanite.  See  Cyanite. 

Kyna'nche.  See  Cynanche. 


IT  A'BDANUM.  See  Cistus  creticus. 

LABELLUM.  A little  lip.  Applied  in  botany  to 
the  barba,  or  inferior  lip,  of  ringent  and  personate 
plants.  See  Corolla. 

LABIUM.  ( Labium , i.  n. ; airo  tov  \a6etv.) 

1.  The  lip  of  animals. 

2.  Applied  in  botany  to  coroils  of  plants,  which  are 
termed  unilabiate , bilabiate , &c. ; and  from  their  posi- 
tion in  certain  flowers,  superior , inferior , Sec. 

La'bium  i.eporinum.  See  Hare-lip. 

LABORATO'UIUM.  (From  laboro , labour.)  A 
place  properly  fitted  up  for  the  performance  of  chemi- 
cal operations. 

LABRADOR  STONE.  See  Felspar. 

LA'BYRINTII.  Labyrinthus.  That  part  of  the 
internal  ear  which  is  behind  the  cavity  of  the  tympa- 
num ; it  is  constituted  by  the  cochlea,  vestibulum,  and 
semicircular  canals.  See  Ear. 

4 


LAC.  (7„ac.  tis.  n.)  1.  Milk.  See  Milk. 

2.  The  name  of  a vegetable  substance.  See  Lacea. 

Lac  ammoniaci.  See  Mistura  ammoniaci. 

Lac  amygdalje.  See  Mistura  amygdala. 

Lac  assafostidje.  See  Mistura  assafeetidee. 

Lac  sulphuris.  See  SuJpnur  prceapilatum. 

LA'CCA.  (From  lakah , Arabian.)  Gummi  lacca. 
Stick-lac:  Gum-lac;  Seed-lac;  Shell-lac.  The  im- 
proper name  of  gum  lac  is  given  to  a concrete  brittle 
substance,  of  a dark  red  colour,  brought  from  the  East 
Indies,  incrustated  on  the  twigs  of  the  Croton  laccife- 
rum;  fuliis  ovatis  tomentosis  serrulatis  petiolatis , 
calycibus  tomentosis,  of  Linnams,  where  it  is  deposited 
by  a sirtall  insect,  at  present  not  scientifically  known. 
It  is  found  in  very  great  quantities  on  the  uncultivated 
mountains  on  both  sides  the  Ganges,  and  is  of  great 
use  to  the  natives  in  various  works  of  art,  as  varnish, 
painting,  dying,  &, c.  When  the  resinous  matter  is 
broken  olf  the  wood  into  small  pieces  or  grains,  it  is 


LAC 


LAC 


termed  seed-lac.,  and  when  melted  and  formed  into  flat 
plates,  shell-lac.  This  substance  is  chiefly  employed 
lor  making  sealing-wax.  A tincture  of  it  is  recom- 
mended as  an  antiscorbutic  to  wash  the  gums. 

LA'CHR  YMA.  A tear.  A limpid  fluid  secreted  by 
the  lachrymal  gland,  and  flowing  on  the  surface  of  the 
eye.  See  Tear. 

Lachryma  abiegna.  See  Terebinthina  argentora- 
tensis. 

LACHRYMAL.  Lachrymalis.  Of  or  belonging 
to  tears,  or  parts  near  where  they  are  secreted. 

Lachrymal  bone.  See  Unguis  os.  • 

Lachrymal  duct.  Ductus  lachrymalis.  The  ex- 
cretory duct  of  the  lachrymal  gland,  which  opens  upon 
the  internal  surface  of  the  upper  eyelid. 

Lachrymal  gland.  Qlandula  lachrymalis.  A 
glomerate  gland,  situated  above  the  external  angle  of 
the  orbit,  in  a peculiar  depression  of  the  frontal  bone. 
It  secretes  the  tears,  and  conveys  them  to  the  eye  by  its 
excretory  ducts,  which  are  six  or  eight  in  number. 

Lachrymal  nerve.  The  fifth  pair  of  nerves  from 
the  head  is  divided  into  several  branches,  the  first  of 
which  is  called  the  orbitary  branch;  this  is  divided 
into  three  more,  the  third  of  which  is  called  the  lachry- 
mal branch  ; it  goes  off  chiefly  to  the  lachrymal  gland. 

LACCIC  ACID.  (Acidum  laccicum ; from  lacca , 
the  substance  in  which  it  exists.)  “ Dr.  John  made  a 
watery  extract  of  powdered  stick-lac,  and  evaporated  it 
to  dryness.  He  digested  alkohol  on  this  extract,  and 
evaporated  the  alkoholic  extract  to  dryness.  He  then 
digested  this  mass  in  ether,  and  evaporated  the  ethereal 
solution ; when  he  obtained  a syrupy  mass  of  a light 
yellow  colour,  which  was  again  dissolved  in  alkohol. 
On  adding  water  to  this  solution,  a little  resin  fell.  A 
peculiar  acid  united  to  potassa  and  lime  remains  in 
the  solution,  which  is  obtained  free,  by  forming  with 
acetate  of  lead  an  insoluble  lacoate,  and  decomposing 
this  with  the  equivalent  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid. 
Laccic  acid  crystallizes ; it  has  a wine-yellow  colour, 
a sour  taste,  and  is  soluble,  as  we  have  seen,  in  water, 
alkohol,  and  ether.  It  precipitates  lead  and  mercury 
white ; but  it  does  not  affect  lime,  barytes,  or  silver,  in 
their  solutions.  It  throws  down  the  salts  of  iron 
white.  With  lime,  soda,  and  potassa,  it  forms  deli- 
quescent salt,  soluble  in  alkohol.” 

LACINIATUS.  Laciniate,  fringe-like:  cut  into 
numerous  irregular  portions  ; applied  to  leaves,  petals, 
&c. ; as  the  leaves  of  the  Ranunculus  parvi floras,  and 
Geranium  columbinum , the  petals  of  the  Reseda. 

Laco'nicum.  (Because  they  were  much  used  by  the 
people  of  Laconia.)  A stove,  or  sweating-room. 

Lacquer.  A solution  of  lac  in  alkohol. 

LACTATE.  Ladas.  A definite  compound,  formed 
by  the  union  of  the  acid  of  sour  whey,  or  lactic  acid, 
with  salifiable  bases ; thus  lactate  of  potassa,  &.e. 

LACTATION.  ( Lactatio ; from  ladeo,  to  suckle.) 
The  giving  suck. 

LACTEAL.  (Ladeus ; from  lac,  milk;  because 
the  fluid  they  absorb  looks  like  milk.) 

1.  Milky. 

2.  In  anatomy,  this  term  is  applied  to  the  vasa  ludea. 
The  absorbents  of  the  mesentery,  which  originate  in 
the  small  intestines,  and  convey  the  chyle  from  thence 
to  the  thoracic  duct.  They  are  very  tender  and  trans- 
parent vessels,  possessed  of  an  infinite  number  of  valves, 
which,  when  distended  with  chyle,  a milky  or  lacteal 
fluid,  give  them  a knotty  appearance.  They  arise 
from  the  internal  surface  of  the  villous  coat  of  the 
small  intestine,  perforate  the  other  coats,  and  form  a 
kind  of  network,  while  the  greater  number  unite  one 
with  another  between  the  muscular  and  external  coats. 
From  thence  they  proceed  between  the  laminae  of  the 
mesentery  to  the  conglobate  glands.  In  their  course 
they  constitute  the  greater  part  of  the  gland  through 
which  they  pass,  being  distributed  through  them 
several  times,  and  curled  in  various  directions.  The 
lacteals  having  passed  these  giands,  go  to  others,  and 
at  length  seek  those  nearest  the  mesentery.  From 
these  glands,  which  are  only  four  or  five,  or  perhaps 
more,  the  lacteals  pass  out  and  ascend  with  the  mesen- 
teric artery,  and  unite  with  the  lymphatics  of  the  lower 
extremities,  and  those  of  the  abdominal  viscera,  and 
then  form  a common  trunk,  the  thoracic  duct , which, 
in  some  subjects,  is  dilated  at  its  origin,  forming  the 
receptaculum  chyli.  See  Nutrition. 

LACTESCENS.  (From  Uic\  milk.)  Lactescent 
or  milky.  1 


LACTIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  lacticum;  from  lac  milk.) 
“ By  evaporating  sour  whey  to  one-eighth,  fi  lering, 
precipitating  with  lime-water,  and  separating  the  iime 
by  oxalic  acid,  Scheele  obtained  an  aqueous  solution 
of  what  he  supposed  to  be  a peculiar  acid,  which  has 
accordingly  been  termed  the  lactic.  To  procure  it 
separate,  he  evaporated  the  solution  to  the.  consistence 
of  honey,  poured  on  it  alkohol,  filtered  this  solution, 
and  evaporated  the  alkohol.  The  residuum  was  an 
acid  of  a yellow  colour,  incapable  of  being  crystallized, 
attracting  the  humidity  3f  the  air,  and  forming  deli- 
quescent salts  with  the  earths  and  alkalies. 

Bouillon  Lagrange  since  examined  it  more  narrowly ; 
and  from  a series  of  experiments  concluded,  that  it  con- 
sists of  acetic  acid,  muriate  of  potassa,  a small  portion 
of  iron  probably  dissolved  in  the  acetic  acid,  and  an 
animal  matter. 

This  judgment  of  Lagrange  was  afterward  supported 
by  the  opinions  of  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin.  But  since 
then,  Berzelius  has  investigated  its  nature  very  fully, 
and  has  obtained,  by  means  of  a long  and  often-re- 
peated series  of  different  experiments,  a complete  con- 
viction that  Scheele  was  in  the  right,  and  that  the  lactic 
acid  is  a peculiar  acid,  very  distinct  from  all  others. 

The  lactic  acid,  purified,  has  a brown-yellow  colour, 
and  a sharp  sour  taste,  which  is  much  weakened  by 
diluting  it  with  water.  It  is  without  smell  in  the  cold, 
but  emits,  when  heated,  a sharp  sour  smell,  not  unlike 
that  of  sublimed  oxalic  acid.  It  cannot  be  made  to 
crystallize,  and  does  not  exhibit  the  slightest  appear- 
ance of  a saline  substance  ; but  dries  into  a Jhick  and 
smooth  varnish,  which  slowly  attracts  moisture  from 
the  air.  It  is  very  easily  soluble  in  alkohol.  Heated 
in  a gold  spoon  over  the  flame  of  a candle,  it  first 
boils,  and  then  its  pungent  acid. smell  becomes  very 
manifest,  but  extremely  distinct  from  that  of  the  acetic 
acid  ; afterward  it  is  charred,  and  has  an  einpyreuma- 
tic,  but  by  no  means  an  animal,  smell.  A porous  char- 
coal is  left  behind,  which  does  not  readily  burn  to 
ashes.  When  distilled,  it  gives  an  empyreumatic  oil, 
water,  empyreumatic  vinegar,  carbonic  acid,  and  in- 
flammable gases.  With  alkalies,  earths,  and  metallic 
oxides,  it  affords  peculiar  salts;  and  these  are  distin- 
guished by  being  soluble  in  alkohol,  and  in  general  by 
not  having  the  least  disposition  to  crystallize,  but  dry- 
ing into  a mass  like  gum,  which  slowly  becomes  moist 
in  the  air. 

La'ctica.  The  Arabian  name  for  the  fever  which 
the  Greeks  call  Typhos. 

LACTI'FUGA.  (From  lac,  milk,  and  fugo,  to  drive 
away.)  A medicine  or  other  means  which  dispel  milk. 

LACTU'CA.  (From  lac , milk;  named  from  the 
milky  juice  which  exudes  upon  its  being  wounded.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linna:an  sys- 
tem. Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Folygaiaia  aiqualis. 
The  lettuce. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  garden-lettuce, 
the  Lactuca  sativa. 

Lactuca  graveolens.  See  Lactuca  virosa. 

Lactuca  sativa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lettuce.  It  is  esteemed  as  a wholesome,  aperient,  bitter 
anodyne,  easy  of  digestion,  but  affording  no  nutriment. 
Lettuces  appear  to  agree  better  with  hot,  bilious,  me- 
lancholic temperaments,  than  the  phlegmatic.  The 
seeds  possess  a quantity  of  oily  substance,  which, 
triturated  with  water,  forms  an  emulsion  esteemed  by 
some  in  ardor  urinae,  and  some  diseases  of  the  urinary 
passages.  Lettuce  was  famous  for  the  cure  of  the 
emperor  Augustus,  and  formed  the  opiate  of  Galen, 
in  liis  old  age ; d proof  that,  in  the  warmer  climates, 
it  must  acquire  an  exaltation  of  its  virtues  above  what 
is  met  with  in  this  country. 

Lactuca  sc ariola.  Lactuca  sylvestris ; Scariola, 
Scariola  gallorum.  This  species  possesses  a stronger 
degree  of  bitterness  than  the  Lactuca  sativa , and  is 
said  to  be  more  aperient  and  laxative.  It  is  nearly 
similar,  in  virtue  as  in  taste,  to  endive  unblanched. 

Lactuca  sylvestris.  See  Lactuca  scariola. 

Lactuca  virosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
opium,  or  strong-scented  lettuce-  Lactuca  graveolens. 
Lactuca — -foliis  horizontalibus  carino  aculeatis  den- 
tatis,  of  Linneeus.  A common  plant  in  our  hedges 
and  ditches.  It  has  a strong,  ungrateful  smell,  resem- 
bling that  of  opium,  and  a bitterish  acrid  taste:  it 
abounds  with  a milky  juice,  in  which  its  sensible 
qualities  seem  to  reside,  and  which  appears  to  have 
been  noticed  by  Dioscorides,  who  desciibes  the  odour 

5 


L2EV 


and  taste  of  the  juice  as  nearly  agreeing  with  that  of  the 
white  poppy.  Its  effects  are  also  said,  according  to  H aller, 
to  be  powerfully  narcotic.  Dr.  Collin,  at  Vienna,  first 
brought  the  lactuca  virosa  into  medical  repute,  and  its 
character  has  lately  induced  the  College  of  Physicians  at 
Edinburgh,  to  insert  it  in  the  catalogue  of  the  materia 
medica.  More  than  twenty-fourcases  of  dropsy  are  said, 
by  Collin,  to  have  been  successfully  treated  by  employing 
an  extract  prepared  from  the  expressed  juice  of  this 
plant,  which  is  stated  not  only  to  be  powerfully  diuretic, 
but,  by  attenuating  the  viscid  humours  to  promote  all 
the  secretions,  and  to  remove  visceral  obstructions.  In 
the  more  simple  cases,  proceeding  from  debility,  the 
extract,  in  doses  of  eighteen  to  thirty  grains  a-day, 
proved  sufficient  to  accomplish  a cure;  but  when  the 
disease  was  inveterate,  and  accompanied  with  visceral 
obstructions,  the  quantity  of  extract  was  increased  to 
three  drachms ; nor  did  larger  doses,  though  they  ex- 
cited nausea,  ever  produce  any  other  bad  effect;  and 
the  patient  continued  so  strong  under  the  use  of  this 
remedy,  that  it  was  seldom  necessary  to  employ  any 
tonic  medicines.  Though  Dr.  Collin  began  his  experi- 
ments with  the  lactuca  at  the  Paztnan  hospital,  at  the 
time  he  was  trying  the  arnica,  1771,  yet  very  few  phy- 
sicians, eVen  at  Vienna,  have  since  adopted  the  use  of 
this  plant.  Plenciz,  indeed,  has  published  a solitary 
instance  of  its  efficacy,  while  Q,uarin  informs  us  that 
he  never  experienced  any  good  effect  from  its  use ; 
alleging,  that  those  who  were  desirous  of  supporting 
its  character,  mixed  it  with  a quantity  of  extractum 
scillffi.  lender  these  circumstances  we  shall  only  say, 
that  the  recommendation  of  this  medicine  by  Dr.  Col- 
lin will  be  scarcely  thought  sufficient  to  establish  its 
use  in  England. 

[“Lactuca  elongata.  This  is  a tall,  lactescent, 
native  plant.  It  is  substituted  for  the  Lactuca  virosa 
of  Europe,  which  it  somewhat  resembles  in  its  proper- 
ties, though  of  inferior  strength.  I have  no  personal 
experience  with  this  plant,  but  am  informed  by  physi- 
cians who  have  tried  it,  that  it  is  anodyne,  and  pro- 
motes the  excretion  of  the  skin  and  kidneys.  An  ex- 
tract made  by  inspissating  the  expressed  juice  may  be 
given  in  doses  of  from  five  to  fifteen  grains.  The  con- 
crete, lactescent  juice  would  probably  be  found  much 
stronger.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.J 

[“  Lactucarium.  Common  garden-lettuce,  like 
many  plants  of  its  class,  exudes  a milky  juice  on  being 
wounded  after  it  is  fully  grown.  This  juice  concretes 
on  exposure  to  the  air,  into  a brownish,  bitter  sub- 
stance, resembling  opium  in  some  of  its  characters.  It 
is  most  abundant  when  the  plant  is  in  flower,  and 
least  so  while  the  leaves  are  young,  or  when  they  are. 
etiolated  by  heading.  Lactucarium  has  the  colour, 
and  in  some  degree  the  taste  and  odour,  of  opium,  for 
which  it  has  been  proposed  as  a substitute  by  Dr.  Coxe 
and  Dr.  Duncan.  It  has  been  said  to  contain  morphia 
in  addition  to  its  other  component  parts.  It  acts  as  a 
soporific,  and  has  been  thought  useful  in  phthisis  as  a 
palliative.  Dose,  one  or  two  grains.”— Big.  Mat. 
Med.  A.] 

Lactuce'lla.  (Diminutive  of  lactuca , the  lettuce ; 
so  named  from  its  milky  juice.)  The  sow-thistle.  The 
Sonchus  arvensis. 

Lactuci'mina.  (From  lacteo,  to  suckle:  so  called 
because  they  happen  chiefly  to  children  while  at  the 
breast.)  The  thrush,  and  little  ulcers,  or  crusty  scabs 
on  the  skin,  which  happen  during  the  time  the  child  is 
at  the  breast. 

LACTU'MEN.  (From  lac , milk ; so  named  because 
it  is  covered  with  a white  crust.)  The  achor,  or  scald- 
head  ; also  a little  crusty  scab  on  the  skin,  affecting 
children  at  the  breast. 

LACU'NA.  (From  lacus  a channel.)  The  mouth 
or  opening  of  the  excretory  duct  of  a muciparous  gland, 
as  those  of  the  urethra,  and  other  parts. 

LA'DANUM.  (From  ladon , Arab.)  See  Cistus 
creticus. 

Ladies'  bed-straw.  See  Galium. 

J.adies'  mantle.  See  Alchemilla. 

Ladies'  smock.  See  Cardamine. 

Ljetifica'ntia.  (From  latifico,  to  make  glad.)  This 
term  has  been  applied'to  many  compositions  under  the 
intention  of  cordials;  but  both  the  medicines  and  dis- 
tinctions are  now  quite  disused. 

LA2VIS.  Smooth  and  even.  Applied  to  stems  of 
plants,  and  is  opposed  to  all  roughness  and  inequality 
whatever. 

6 


LAM 

L.evitas  ixtestinorum.  A name  of  the  lientery1' 

See  Diarrhwa. 

La'garos.  ( Aayapog , lax ; so  named  from  its  com- 
parative laxity.)  The  right  ventricle  of  the  heart. 

LAGENA2FORMIS.  Bottle-shaped.  Applied  to 
the  gourd  ; as  in  Cncurbita  lagenaria. 

L AGNESIS.  (From  Xayvys,  libidinous.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  diseases.  Glass,  Geuetiea ; Order,  Or- 
gastica;  in  Good’s  Nosology:  lust.  It  embraces  two 
species,  viz.  Lagnesis  salacitas , and  L.  furor. 

LAGOPHTHA'LMIA.  (From  Aaywoj,  a hare,  and 
otpdaXpos,  an  eye;  because  it  is  believed  that  hares 
sleep  with  their  eyes  open.)  Lagophthalmos.  The 
hare’s  eye.  A disease  in  which  the  eye  cannot  be  shut. 
The  following  complaints  may  arise  from  it : a constant 
weeping  of  the  organ,  in  consequence  of  the  interrup- 
tion of  the  alternate  closure  and  opening  of  the  eyelids, 
which  motions  so  materially  contribute  to  propelling 
the  tears  into  the  nose;  blindness  in  a strong  light,  in 
consequence  of  the  inability  to  moderate  the  rays  which 
fall  on  the  eye ; on  the  same  account,  the  sight  becomes 
gradually  very  much  weakened;  incapacity  to  sleep 
where  there  is  any  light;  irritation,  pain,  and  redness 
of  the  eye,  from  this  organ  being  exposed  to  the  ex- 
traneous substances  in  the  atmosphere,  without  the 
eyelids  having  the  power  of  washing  them  away  in 
the  natural  manner. 

An  enlargement  or  protrusion  of  the  whole  eye,  or  a 
staphyloma,  may  obviously  produce  lagophthalmos 
But  affections  of  the  upper  eyelids  are  the  common 
causes.  Heister  says,  he  has  seen  the  complaint  ori- 
ginate from  a disease  of  the  lower  one.  Now  and 
then  lagophthalmos  depends  on  paralysis  of  the  orbi- 
cularis muscle.  A cicatrix  after  a wound,  ulcer,  or 
burn,  is  the  most  frequent  cause. 

LAGOPO'DIIJM.  (From  Aaywoj,  a hare,  and  icons, 
a foot:  so  called  because  it  has  narrow  hairy  leaves, 
like  the  foot  of  a hare.)  The  herb  hare’s-foot  trefoil. 

LAGO'STOM A.  ( From  Xaymos,  a hare,  and  $opa, 
the  mouth:  so  called  because  the  upper  lip  is  divided 
in  the  middle  like  that  of  a hare.)  See  Hare  lip. 

LAKEWEED.  See  Polygonum  hydropiper. 

LALLANS.  S ee  Lallatto. 

LALLATTO.  That  species  of  vicious  pronuncia- 
tion in  which  the  letter  l is  rendered  unduly  liquid,  or 
substituted  for  an  r.  The  Greeks  denominated  it 
lambdacismus,  from  the  letter  A,  lambda. 

La'mac.  Gum-arabic. 

LAMBDACI'SMUS.  A defect  in  speech,  wlUch 
consists  in  an  inability  to  pronounce  certain  conso- 
nants; or  that  stammering  or  difficulty  of  speech  when 
the  letter  l is  pronounced  too  liquid,  and  often  in  the 
place  of  r.  See  Psellismus  lallans. 

LAMBDOIDAL.  (Lambduidalis ; from  A,  and 
eiSos,  resemblance,  because  it  is  shaped  like  the  letter 
A.)  Belonging  to  the  suture  so  called. 

Lambdoidal  suture.  ( Sutura  lambdoidalis ; be- 
cause it  is  shaped  like  the  letter  A ) Occipital  suture. 
The  suture  that  unites  the  occipital  bone  to  the  two 
parietal  bones. 

LAMBITIVUM.  (From  lambo , to  lick  up.)  A 
linctus  or  medicine  to  be  licked  up. 

LAME  LLA.  (Dim.  of  lamina , a plate  of  metal.) 

1.  A thin  plate  of  metal. 

2.  The  parallel  gills  or  plates  in  the  inferior  surface 
of  the  aaaric  family  only. 

LA'MINA.  (From  eAaw,  to  beat  off.)  A bone,  or 
membrane,  or  any  substance  resembling  a thin  plate  of 
metal . 

2.  Tiie  lap  of  the  ear. 

3.  The  parts  of  the  corolla  of  a polypetalous  flower, 
are  named  the  unguis , or  claw,  and  lamina , or  border. 

LAMIXABIL1TY.  A property  possessed  by  some 
bodies  of  being  extended  in  dimensions  by  a gradually- 
applied  pressure.  See  Ductility. 

LA'MIUM.  (From  Lamium,  a mountain  of  Ionia, 
where  it  grew ; or  from  lama , a ditch,  because  it  usually 
grows  about  ditches  and  neglected  places.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaan  system.  Class, 
Didynamia ; Order,  Qyinnospermia.  The  nettle. 

Lamium  album.  Urtica  mortua;  Archangelica, 
Galcobdolon;  Stachys  fattida;  Urtica  iners  mngna 
faetidissima.  Dead  nettle;  White  archangel  nettle. 
Uterine  hannorriiages  and  fluor  albus  are  said  to  be 
relieved  by  infusions  of  this  plant,  from  whose  sensible 
qualities  very  little  benefit  can  be  expected. 

LAMPIC  ACID.  ( Acidumlampsicum  from  Xapnot 


LAN 


LAP 


to  shine.)  “Sir  H.  Davy,  during  his  admirable  re- 
searches on  the  nature  and  properties  of  flame,  an- 
nounced the  singular  fact,  that  combustible  bodies  might 
be  made  to  combine  rapidly  with  oxygen,  at  temperatures 
below  what  were  necessary  to  their  visible  inflamma- 
tion. Among  the  phenomena  resulting  from  these  new 
combinations,  he  remarked  the  production  of  a peculiar 
acid  and  pungent  vapour  from  the  slow  combustion  of 
ether;  and  from  its  obvious  qualities  he  was  led  to 
suspect,  that  it  might  be  a product  yet  new  to  the 
chemical  catalogue.  Faraday,  in  the  3d  volume  of  the 
Journal  of  Science  and  the  Arts,  has  given  some  ac- 
count of  the  properties  of  this  new  acid  ; but  from  the 
very  small  quantities  in  which  he  was  able  to  collect 
it,  was  prevented  from  performing  any  decisive  expe- 
riments upon  it. 

In  the  6th  volume  of  the  same  Journal,  We  have  a 
pretty  copious  investigation  of  the  properties  and  com- 
pounds of  this  new  acid,  by  Daniell.  From  the  slow 
combustion  of  ether  during  six  weeks,  by  means  of  a 
coil  of  platina  wire  sitting  on  the  cotton  wick  of  the 
lamp,  he  condensed  with  the  head  of  an  alembic,  whose 
beak  was  inserted  in  a receiver,  a pint  and  a half  of 
the  lampic  acid  liquor. 

When  first  collected,  it  is  a colourless  fluid,  of  an  in- 
tensely sour  taste,  and  pungent  odour.  Its  vapour, 
when  heated,  is  extremely  irritating  and  disagreeable, 
and,  when  received  into  the  lungs,  produces  an  op- 
pression at  the  chest  very  much  resembling  the  effect 
of  chlorine.  Its  specific  gravity  varies  according  to  the 
care  with  which  it  has  been  prepared,  from  less  than 
1.000, to  1.008.  It  may  be  purified  by  careful  evapora- 
tion ; and  it  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  the  vapour 
which  rises  from  it  is  that  of  alkohol,  with  which  it  is 
slightly  contaminated,  and  not  of  ether.  Thus  recti- 
fied, its  specific  gravity  is  1.015.  It  reddens  vegetable 
blues,  and  decomposes  all  the  earthy  and  alkaline  car- 
bonates, forming  neutral  salts  with  their  bases,  which 
are  more  or  less  deliquescent.” — lire's  Chari.  Diet. 

[“Lamp,  safety.  The  safety-lampas  recommended 
for  general  use  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  is  a cylinder  of  wire 
gauze  with  adouble  top,  securely  and  carefully  fastened. 
The  whole  is  protected  and  rendered  convenient  for 
carrying  by  a frame  and  ring.  If  the  cylinder  be  of 
twilled  wire-gauze  the  wire  should  be  at  least  of  the 
thickness  of  one-fortieth  of  an  inch,  and  of  iron  or 
copper,  and  30  in  the  warp,  and  16  or  18  in  the  weft. 
If  of  plain  wire-gauze  the  wire  should  not  bo  less  than 
one-sixtieth  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  and  from  28  to  30 
both  warp  and  woof. 

The  operation  of  this  lamp  may  be  shown  on  a small 
scale  by  suspending  it  in  a glass  jar,  and  then  admitting 
a sufficient  stream  of  coal  gas  to  render  the  enclosed, 
atmosphere  explosive.  The  flame  of  the  lamp  first  en- 
larges, and  is  then  extinguished,  the  whole  of  the  cage 
being  filled  with  a lambent  blue  light;  on  turning  off 
the  supply  of  the  gas  this  appearance  gradually  ceases 
and  the  wick  becomes  rekindled,  when  the  atmosphere 
returns  to  its  natural  state.” — Web.  Man.  of  Chen.  A.l 

LA'MPSANA.  See  Lapsanr.. 

LANA.  Wool.  In  botany,  applied  to  a species  of 
hairy  pubescence,  consisting  of  white,  long,  somewhat 
crisp  hair,  like  wool.  It  is  applied  to  stems,  leaves, 
seeds,  &c. 

Lana  philosopfiica.  The  snowy  flakes  of  white 
oxide,  which  rise  and  float  in  the  air  from  the  combus- 
tion of  zinc. 

LANATUS.  Woolly.  Applied  to  the  stems, 
leaves,  seeds,  &c.  of  plants.  The  Verbascum  thapsus 
is  a good  example  of  the  Caulis  lanatus  ; the  Siachys 
lanata  of  the  leaves;  and  the  Gossypium  of  the  seed. 

LANCEOLATUS.  Lanceolate, lance-shaped.  Ap- 
plied to  leaves,  petals,  seeds,  &c.  of  a narrow,  oblong 
form,  tapering  towards  each  end;  as  the  leaves  in 
Plantago  lanceolata,  and  petals  of  Narcissus  minor, 
and  seeds  of  the  Fraxinus. 

LANCE'TTA.  (Dim.  of  lancca , a spear.)  A 
lancet.  An  instrument  used  for  bleeding  and  other 
purposes. 

L ANCISI,  John  Maria,  was  born  at  Rome,  in  1654. 
He  was  intended  for  the  church,  but  a taste  for  natural 
history  led  him  to  the  study  of  medicine,  which  he  pur- 
sued with  great  ardour,  and  took  his  degree  at  the  age 
of  18.  After  some  minor  appointments,  which  ena- 
bled him  to  display  his  talents  and  acquirements,  he 
was  appointed  professor  of  anatomy  in  1684 ; and  con- 
tinued his  duties  for  13  years,  with  great  reputation 


He  was  made  physician  to  three  succeeding  popes,  and 
attained  the  age  of  65.  He  had  great  knowledge  of 
mankind,  with  very  engaging  manners;  and  his  zeal 
for  the  advancement  of  medicine  was  extreme  and  un- 
ceasing. He  collected  a library  of  above  20,000  vo- 
lumes, which  he  devoted  to  the  use  of  the  public,  and 
particularly  of  medical  students:  it  was  opened  four 
years  before  his  death.  He  left  a considerable  num- 
ber of  works,  several  of  which  were  printed,  others 
remain  in  manuscript  in  that  library.  His  more  im 
portant  publications  are,  a treatise,  “De  Subitaneis 
Mortibus;”  “The  Anatomical  Plates  of  Eustachius, 
with  a Preface  and  Notes,  in  folio;”  and  a disserta- 
tion, “ De  Noxiis  Paludum  Effluviis,”  referring  inter- 
mittents  to  the  marsh  miasmata,  printed  in  1717.  After 
bis  death,  a treatise,  “De  Motu  Cordis et  Aneurysma- 
tibus,”  and  a collection  of  cases  from  his  manuscript, 
were  given  to  the  public. 

LANGR1SH,  Browne,  a physician  of  the  last  cen- 
tury, distinguished  himself  as  an  advocate  for  the  me- 
chanical theories  of  physiology  and  medicine,  which 
he  supported  by  numerous  experiments.  He  had  the 
merit  of  ascertaining  several  interesting  facts  in  respect 
to  the  nature  of  the  circulating  powers.  He  died  in 
London,  in  1759.  His  publications  are,  “A, New  Es- 
say on  Muscular  Motion,  &c. ;”  “Modern  Theory  of 
Physic;”  “Physical  Experiments  upon  Brutes ;”  and 
“ Croonian  Lectures  on  Muscular  Motion.” 

Lao'nica  curatio.  A method  of  curing  the  gout, 
by  evaporating  the  morbid  matter  by  topical  applica- 
tions. 

Lapa'ctica.  (From  Xanadu,  to  evacuate.)  Pur- 
gative medicines. 

LA'PARA.  (From  Xairaf to,  to  empty;  so  named 
from  its  concave  and  empty  appearance.)  The  flank. 

LAPAROCE'LE.  (From  Xatrapa,  the  flank,  and 
KrjXrj,  a rupture.)  A rupture  through  the  side  of  the 
belly. 

LA'PATHUM.  (From  Acoragw,  to  evacuate:  so 
named  because  it  purges  gently.)  The  dock.  See 
Riimex. 

Lapathum  acetosum.  See  Rumex  acetosa. 

Lapathum  acutijm.  See  Rumex  acutus. 

Lapathum  aquaticum.  See  Rumex  hydrolapa- 
thum. 

Lafide'llum.  (From  lapis,  a stone.)  Lapidellus. 
The  name  of  a kind  of  spoon,  formerly  used  to  take 
out  small  stones  and  fragments  from  the  bladder. 

LAP1DEUS.  Stony.  Applied  to  seeds  of  plants; 
as  those  of  the  Lithospermvm  and  Ostcosperma. 

La'pides  cancrorum.  See  Cancer. 

Lapi'lli  cancrorum.  See  Cancer. 

LA'PIS.  {Lapis,  idis.  m. ; of  uncertain  deriva 
tion.)  A stone. 

Lapis  ageratus.  See  Ageratus. 

Lapis  bezoar.  See  Bezoar. 

Lapis  cjeruleus.  See  Lapis  lazuli. 

Lapis  calaminaris.  See  Calamine. 

Lapis  calcarkus.  A carbonate  of  lime. 

Lapis  cvanus.  See  Lapis  lazuli. 

Lapis  ii.ematites.  See  Haematites. 

Lapis  hibernicus.  Tegula  hibcrnica.  Ardesia 
hibernica.  Hardesia.  Irish  slate.  A kind  of  slate, 
or  very  hard  stone,  found  in  different  parts  of  Ireland, 
in  a mass  of  a bluish-black  colour,  which  stains  the 
hands.  When  dried  and  powdered,  it  is  pale,  or  of  a 
whitish  blue,  and,  by  keeping,  grows  black.  In  the 
fire  it  yields  a sulphureous  gas,  and  acquires  a pale- 
red  colour,  with  additional  hardness.  It  is  occasion- 
ally powdered  by  the  common  people,  and  taken  in 
spruce  beer,  against  inward  bruises. 

Lapis  hystricis.  See  Bezoar  hystricis. 

Lapis  infernalis.  An  old  name  for  the  caustic 
potassa.  See  Potassa  fusa. 

Lapis  lazuli.  Lapis  cyanus.  Azure  stone.  A 
combination  of  46  silica,  28  lime,  14.5  alumina,  3 oxide 
of  iron,  6 5 sulphate  of  lime,  and  2 water,  according 
to  Klaproth.  This  singular  mixture  forms  a stone,  of 
a beautiful  azure  blue,  which  it  preserves  in  a strong 
heat,  and  does  not  suffer  any  alteration  by  the  contact 
of  air.  The  finest  specimens  come  from  China,  Per 
sia,  and  Great  Bucha  ia.  It  was  formerly  exhibited  as 
a purgative  and  vomit,  and  given  in  epilepsy. 

Lapis  malacensis.  See  Bezoar  hystricis. 

Lapis  ollaris.  Potstone. 

Lapis  porcinus.  See  Bezoar  hystricis. 

Lapis  simi£.  See  Bezoar  simiai. 


7 


LAT 


LAU 


LAPPA.  (Lappa,  ano  tu  \a6eiv,  from  its  seizing 
the  garments  of  passengers.)  See  Arctium  lappa. 

Lappa  major.  See  Arctium  lappa. 

LA'PSANA.  ( Aaipavr 7,  from  Lampsacus , the  town 
near  which  it  flourished ; or  from  Xairagu),  to  evacu- 
ate ; because  it  was  said  to  relax  the  bowels.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Syngenesia  ; Order, 
Polygamia  cequales. 

Lapsana  communis.  Lampsana;  Napium;  Pa- 
pillaris herb  a..  Dock-cresses.  JMipplewort.  This 
plant  is  a lactescent  bitter,  and  nearly  similar  in  vir- 
tues to  the  cichory,  dandelion,  and  endive.  It  has 
been  employed  chiefly  for  external  purposes,  against 
wounds  and  ulcerations,  whence  the  name  of  nipple- 
wort and  papillaris. 

La'ques'  gutturis.  A malignant  inflammation  of 
the  tonsils,  in  which  the  patient  appears  as  if  he  were 
suffocated  with  a noose. 

LARCH.  See  Pinus  iarix • 

LARD.  The  English  name  of  hog’s  fat,  when 
melted  down.  S ee'Adeps  suilla. 

[Larkspur.  See  Delphinium.  A.] 

LARYNGISMUS.  Theuameof agenusof  diseases, 
Class,  Pneumatica;  Order,  Pneumonica,  in  Good’s 
Nosology.  Laryngic  suffocation.  It  has  only  one 
species,  stridulus , the  spasmodic  croup. 

LARYNGOTOMY.  (Laryngutomia ; from  Aa- 
pvyl,  the  larynx,  and  rrpvoj,  to  cut.)  See  Broncho - 
tomy. 

LARYNX.  ( Larynx , gis.  f. ; a Greek  primitive.) 
A cartilaginous  cavity,  situated  behind  the  tongue,  in 
the  anterior  part  of  the  fauces,  and  lined  with  an  ex- 
quisitely sensible  membrane.  It  is  composed  of  the 
annular  or  cricoid  cartilage,  the  scutiform  or  thyroid, 
the  epiglottis  and  two  arytaenoid  cartiiagfes.  The 
superior  openiug  of  the  larynx  is  called  the  glottis. 
The  laryngeal  arteries  are  branches  of  the  external 
carotids.  The  laryngeal  veins  evacuate  their  blood 
into  the  external  jugulars.  The  nerves  of  the  larynx 
are  from  the  eighth  pair.  The  use  of  the  larynx  is  to 
constitute  the  organ  of  voice,  and  to  serve  also  for 
respiration. 

LASCrVUS.  (From  lacio,  to  ensnare;  upon  ac- 
count of  its  irregular  motions.) 

1.  Lascivious. 

2.  An  epithet  used  by  Paracelsus  for  the  chorea 
sancti  viti. 

LA'SER.  (A  term  used  by  the  Cyrenians.)  The 
lierb  laserwort,  or  assafcetida. 

LASERPITIUM.  ( Lac  serpitium , alluding  to  its 
milky  juice.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linmean  system;  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Di- 
gynia. 

Laserpitium  chironium.  Panax.  Hercules’  all- 
heal, or  woundwort.  The  seeds  and  roots  of  this  plant 
are  warm,  and  similar  in  flavour  and  quality  to  those 
of  the  parsnip.  The  roots  and  stalks  have  a much 
stronger  smell,  which  resembles  that  of  opoponax  ; and 
Boerhaave  relates,  that,  on  wounding  the  plant  in  the 
summer,  he  obtained  a yellow  juice,  which,  beipg  in- 
spissated a little  in  the  sun,  agreed  perfectly  in  both  re- 
spects with  that  exotic  gum  resin. 

Laserpitium  latifolium.  The  systematic  name 
of  tlie  white  gentian.  Gentiana  alba.  The  root  of 
this  plant,  Laserpitium  foliis  cordatis , inciso-serratis , 
Of  Linnaeus,  possesses  stomachic,  corroborant,  and  de- 
obstruent virtues.  It  is  seldom  used. 

Laserpitium  siler.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
lieartwort.  Seseli;  Siler  montanum.  Sermountain. 
The  seeds  and  roots  of  this  plant,  which  grows  in  the 
southern  parts  of  Europe,  are  directed  as  ofiicinals. 
They  have  an  agreeable  smell,  and  a warm,  glowing, 
aromatic  taste;  and  though  neglected  in  this  country, 
do  not  appear  to  be  deservedly  so. 

LATERAL.  ( Lateralis ; from  latus , the  side.) 
On  the  side.  A term  in  general  use,  applied  to  parts 
of  the  body,  operations,  and  to  flower-stalks,  when 
situated  on  the  side  of  a stem  or  stalk  ; as  in  Erica 
vagans. 

Lateral  operation.  A name  given  to  an  opera- 
tion. One  mode  of  cutting  for  the  stone,  because  it  is 
performed  on  the  side  of  the  pelvis.  See  Lithotomy. 

Lateral  sinus.  See  Sinus. 

LATERITIOUS.  ( Lateritius ; from  later , a brick.) 
A term  applied  to  the  brick-like  sediment  occasionally 
deposited  in  the  urine  of  people  afflicted  with  fever. 

I.A'TEX.  (Latex,  quod  in  venis  terra  lateat.) 


Water,  or  juice.  A term  sometimes  applied  to  the 
blood,  as  being  the  spring  or  source  of  all  the  hu- 
mours. 

La'thyris.  (From  Aa0w,  to  forget;  because  it  was 
thought  to  affect  the  memory.)  A term  given  by  some 
author  to  a species  of  tithymal  or  spurge,  commonly 
known  by  the  name  of  Tithymalus  latifolius,  the 
broad-leaved  spurge,  and  called  by  some  also  Cata- 
putia. 

LA'THYRUS.  *(A  name  adopted  from  Theophras 
tus,  whose  A advpof,  appears  evidently  to  be  like  ours, 
something  of  the  pea  or  vetch  kind,  though  it  is  impos- 
sible precisely  to  determine  what.)  The  name  of  a 
genuBof  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Diadel- 
phia  ; Order,  Decandria.  The  vetch. 

Lati'bulum.  (From  lateo , to  lie  hid.)  The  fomes 
or  hidden  matter  of  infectious  diseases. 

LATI'SSIMUS.  A term  applied  to  a muscle  from 
its  great  breadth. 

Latissimus  colli.  See  Platysma  myoides. 

Latissimus  dorsi.  Aniscalptor,  of  Cowper.  Dorsi~ 
lumbo  sacro  humeral , of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the 
humerus,  situated  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  trunk. 
It  is  a very  broad,  thin,  and,  for  the  most  part,  fleshy 
muscle,  which  is  placed  immediately  under  the  skin, 
except  where  it  is  covered  by  the  lower  extremity  of 
the  trapezius.  It  arises  tendinous  from  the  posterior 
half  of  the  upper  edge  of  the  spine  of  the  os  ilium, 
from  the  spinous  processes  of  the  os  sacrum  and  lum- 
bar vertebra,  and  from  five  or  six,  and  sometimes  from 
seven,  and  even  eight,  of  the  lowermost  ones  of  the 
back  ; also  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  upper  edges 
and  external  surface  of  the  four  inferior  false  ribs,  near 
their  cartilages,  by  as  many  distinct  slips.  From  these 
different  origins  the  fibres  of  the  muscle  run  in  different 
directions;  those  from  the  ilium  and  false  ribs  run 
almost  perpendicularly  upwards;  those  from'the  sa- 
crum and  lumbar  vertebra,  obliquely  upwards  and 
forwards ; and  those  from  the  vertebra  of  the  back, 
transversely  outwards  and  forwards,  over  the  inferior 
angle  of  the  scapula,  where  they  receive  a small  thin 
bundle  of  fleshy  fibres,  which  arise  tendinous  from 
that  angle,  and  are  inserted  with  the  rest  of  the  mus- 
cle, by  a strong,  flat,  and  thin  tendon,  of  about  two 
inches  in  length,  into  the  forepart  of  the  posterior  edge 
of  the  groove  observed  between  the  two  tuberosities 
of  the  os  humeri,  for  lodging  the  tendon  of  the  long 
head  of  the  biceps.  In  dissection,  therefore,  this  mus- 
cle ought  not  to  be  followed  to  its  insertion,  till  some 
of  the  other  muscles  of  the  os  humeri  have  been  first 
raised.  Its  use  is  to  pull  the  os  humeri  downwards 
and  backwards,  and  to  turn  it  upon  its  axis.  Riolanus, 
from  its  use  on  certain  occasions,  gave  it  the  name  of 
ani  tersor.  When  we  raise  ourselves  upon  our  hands, 
as  in  rising  from  off  an  arm-chair,  we  may  easily  per- 
ceive the  contraction  of  this  nu.scle.  A bursa  mucosa 
is  (bund  between  the  tendon  of  this  muscle  and  the  os 
humeri,  into  which  it  is  inserted. 

Lauca'nia.  (From  Aavoi,  to  receive:  so  called  be- 
cause it  receives  and  conveys  food.)  The  cesophagus. 

LAU'DANUM.  (From  laus , praise:  so  named 
from  its  valuable  properties.)  See  Tinctura  opii. 

LAUMONITE.  Diprismatic  zeolite. 

LAUREL.  See  Lauras. 

Laurel , cherry.  See  Prunus . laurocerasus . 

Laurel , spurge.  See  Daphne  laureoja, 

LAURE'OL A.  (Dim.  of  laurus , the  laurel : named 
from  its  resemblance  to  the  laurel.)  See  Daphne 
laureola. 

Lauro-cerasus.  (From  laurus , the  laurel,  and 
cerasus , the  cherry-tree:  so  called  because  it  has 
leaves  like  the  laurel.)  See  Prunus  laurocerasus. 

Lauro'sis.  (So  called  from  Mount  Laurus,  where 
there  were  silver  mines.)  The  spodium  of  silver. 

LAU'RUS.  (From  laus,  praise;  because  it  was 
usual  to  crown  the  heads  of  eminent  men  with  branches 
of  it.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naian  system.  Class,  Enneandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 
The  laurel. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  sweet  bay.  See 

Laurus  nobilis. 

Laurus  camphora.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cam phire- tree.  Laurus— foliis  triplincrviis  lancto- 
lato-ovatis.  It  affords  the  substance  called  Camphora ; 
Camphura;  Caf  ; Cafar;  Ligatura  veneris ; Caphor.i; 
Capur : Alkosor ; Altesor.  Camphire,  or  camphor,  is 
a peculiar  concrete  substance  prepared  by  distillation 


la  a 


LAU 


The  tree  is  indigenous  and  grows  abundantly.  The 
camphire  is  found  to  lodge  everywhere  in  the  inter- 
stices of  the  fibres  of  the  wood,  pith,  and  knots  of  the 
tree.  The  crude  camphire,  exported  from  Japan,  ap- 
.pears  in  small  grayish  pieces,  and  is  intermixed  with 
various  extraneous  matters ; in  this  state  it  is  received 
by  the  Dutch,  and  purified  by  a second  sublimation ; it 
is  then  formed  into  loaves,  in  which  state  it  is  sent  to 
England. 

“ Purified  camphor  is  a white  'Concrete  crystalline 
substance,  not  brittle,  but  easily  crumbled,  having  a 
peculiar  consistence  resembling  that  of  spermaceti, 
but  harder.  It  has  a strong  lively  smell,  and  an  acrid 
taste ; is  so  volatile  as  totally  to  exhale  when  left  ex- 
posed in  a warm  air;  is  light  enough  to  swim  on  water; 
and  is  very  inflammable,  burning  with  a very  white 
flame  and  smoke,  without  any  residue. 

The  roots  of  zedoary,  thyme,  rosemary,  sage,  the 
inula  helleniurn,  the  anemone,  the  pasque  flower  or 
pulsatilla,  and  other  vegetables,  afford  camphor  by  dis- 
tillation. It  is  observable,  that  all  these  plants  afford 
a much  larger  quantity  of  camphor,  when  the  sap  has 
been  suffered  to  pass  to  the  concrete  state  by  several 
months’  drying.  Thyme  and  peppermint,  slowly  dried, 
afford  much  camphor;  and  Achard  has  observed  that 
a smell  of  camphor  is  disengaged  when  volatile  oil  of 
fennel  is  treated  with  acids. 

Kind,  a German  chemist,  endeavouring  to  incorpo- 
rate muriatic  acid  gas  with  oil  of  turpentine,  by  putting 
this  oil  into  the  vessels  in  which  the  gas  was  received 
when  extricated,  found  the  oil  change,  first  yellow, 
then  brown,  and,  lastly,  to  be  almost  wholly  coagulated 
into  a crystalline  mass,  which  comported  itself  in  every 
respect  like  camphor.  Tromsdorf  and  Boullay  con- 
firm this.  A small  quantity  of  camphor  may  be  ob- 
tained from  oil  of  turpentine  by  simple  distillation  at 
a verjr  gentle  heat.  Other  essential  oils,  however, 
afford  more.  By  evaporation  in  shallow  vessels,  at  a 
heat  not  exceeding  57°  F.,  Proust  obtained  from  oil  of 
lavender  .25,  of  sage  .21,  of  marjoram  .1014,  of  rose- 
mary .0025.  He  conducted  the  operation  on  a pretty 
large  scale. 

Camphor  is  not  soluble  in  water  in  any  perceptible 
degrees,  though  it  communicates  its  smell  to  that 
fluid,  and  may  be  burned  as  it  floats  on  its  surface. 
It  is  said,  however,  that  a surgeon  at  Madrid  has 
effected  its  solution  in  water  by  means  of  the  carbo- 
nic acid. 

Camphor  may  be  powdered  by  moistening  it  with 
alkohol,  and  triturating  it  till  dry.  It  may  be  formed 
into  an  emulsion  by  previous  grinding  with  near  three 
times  its  weight  of  almonds,  and  afterward  gradually 
adding  the  water.  Yelk  of  egg  and  mucilages  are 
also  effectual  for  this  purpose;  but  sugar  does  not 
answer  well. 

It  has  been  observed  by  Romieu,  that  small  pieces 
of  camphor  floating  on  water  have  a rotatory  motion. 

Alkohol,  ethers,  and  oils,  dissolve  camphor. 

The  addition  of  water  to  the  spirituous  or  acid  solu- 
tions of  camphor,  instantly  separates  it. 

Hatchett  has  particularly  examined  the  action  of 
sulphuric  acid  on  camphor.  A hundred  grains  of  cam- 
phor were  digested  in  an  ounce  of  concentrated  sul- 
phuric acid  for  two  days.  A gentle  heat  was  then  ap- 
plied, and  the  digestion  continued  for  two  days  longer. 
Six  ounces  of  water  were  then  added,  and  the  whole 
distilled  to  dryness.  Three  grains  of  an  essential  oil, 
having  a mixed  odour  of  lavender  and  peppermint, 
came  over  with  the  water.  The  residuum  being  treated 
twice  with  two  ounces  of  alkohol  each  time,  fifty- 
three  grains  of  a compact  coal  in  small  fragments 
remained  undissolved.  The  alkohol,  being  evaporated 
in  a water-bath,  yielded  forty-nine  grains  of  a blackish 
brown  substance,  which  was  bitter,  astringent,  had 
the  smell  of  caromel,  and  formed  a dark  brown  solu- 
tion with  water.  This  solution  threw  down  very  dark 
brown  precipitates,  with  sulphate  of  iron,  acetate  of 
lead,  muriate  of  tin,  and  nitrate  of  lime.  It  precipi- 
tated gold  in  the  metallic  state.  Isinglass  threw  down 
the  whole  of  what  was  dissolved  in  a nearly  black 
precipitate. 

When  nitric  acid  is  distilled  repeatedly  in  large 
quantities  from  camphor,  it  converts  it  into  a peculiar 
acid.”  See  Camphoric  acid. 

The  use  of  this  important  medicine,  in  different 
diseases,  is  very  considerable.  It  has  been  much  em- 
ployed, with  great  advantage,  in  fevers  of  all  kinds, 


particularly  in  nervous  fevers,  attended  with  delirium 
and  much  watchfulness.  The  experienced  Werlhoff 
has  witnessed  its  utility  in  several  inflammatory  dis- 
eases, and  speaks  highly  in  favour  of  its  refrigerant 
qualities.  The  benefit  derived  from  it  in  putrid  fevers, 
where  bark  and  acids  are  contra-indicated,  is  remarka- 
ble. In  spasmodic  and  convulsive  affections  it  is  also 
of  much  service,  and  even  in  epilepsy.  In  chronic 
diseases  this  medicine  is  likewise  employed;  and 
against  rheumatism,  arthritis,  and  mania,  we  have 
several  accounts  of  its  efficacy.  Nor  is  it  less  effica- 
cious when  applied  externally  in  certain  diseases:  it 
dissipates  inflammatory  tumours  in  a short  time ; and 
its  antiseptic  quality,  in  resisting  and  curing  gangrene, 
is  very  considerable.  Another  property  peculiar  to 
this  medicine,  must  not,  however,  be  omitted ; the 
power  it  possesses  of  obviating  the  strangury  that  is 
produced  by  cantharides,  when  sprinkled  over  a blister. 
The  preparations  of  camphor  are,  spiritus  camphorce , 
linimentum  camphorce , tinctura  camphorce  composita , 
and  the  mistura  camphorac.  Camphor,  dissolved  in 
acetic  acid  with  some  essential  oils,  forms  the  aromatic 
vinegar. 

Laurijs  cassia.  Cassia  lignea;  Canella  malaba- 
rica ; Cassia  lignea  maiabarica ; Xylocassia;  Canella 
malabarica  et  javensis ; Kama;  Canella  cub  ana ; 
Arbor  judaica;  Cassia  canella ; Canelliferu  malaba- 
rica; Cinnamomum  malabaricum ; Calihacha  canela. 
Wild  cinnamon- tree;  Malabar  cinnamon-tree,  or  cas- 
tia  lignea-tree.  Cassia  lignea  is  the  bark  of  the  Lauras 
tree,  the  foliis  triplinerviis  lanceolatis,  of  Linmeus. 
The  leaves  are  called  folia  malabathri  in  the  shops. 
The  bark  and  leaves  abound  with  the  flavour  of 
cinnamon,  for  which  they  may  be  substituted ; but 
in  much  larger  doses,  as  they  are  considerably 
weaker. 

Laurus  cinnamomum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  cinnamon-tree.  Cinnamomum.  This  tree  affords 
the  true  cinnamon,  which  is  its  inner  bark.  Jacquin 
describes  the  tree  thus : Laurus  cinnamomum ; foliis 
trinerviis  ovalo-oblongis ; nervis  ■ versus  aptcem.  cva- 
ncscentibus.  Cinnamon  bark  is  one  of  the  most  grate- 
ful of  the  aromatics;  of  a fragrant  smell,  and  a mode- 
rately pungent,  glowing,  but  not  fiery  taste,  accompa- 
nied with  considerable  sweejness,  and  some  degree  of 
adstringency.  It  is  one  of  the  best  cordial  carminative 
and  restorative  spices  we  are  in  possession  of,  and  is 
generally  mixed  with  the  diet  of  the  sick.  The  essen- 
tial oil,  on  account  of  its  high  price,  is  seldom  used : a 
tincture,  simple  and  spirituous  water,  are  directed  to 
be  kept  in  the  shops.  The  watery  infusion  of  cinna- 
mon is  given  with  advantage  to  relieve  nausea  and 
check  vomiting. 

Laurus  cijlilawan.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant,  the  bark  of  which  is  called  cortex  culilawan  in 
the  shops.  Cullitlawan;  Cortex  caryophylloides. 
Laurus — foliis  triplinerviis  oppositis,  of  Linntcus 
This  bark  very  much  resembles  cinnamon  in  appear- 
ance and  properties. 

Laurus  nobilis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sweet  bay-tree.  Laurus— foliis  venosis  lanceolatis 
perennantibus,  floribus  quadrifidis , of  Linnaeus.  This 
tree  is  a native  of  Italy,  but  cultivated  in  our  gardens 
and  shrubberies,  as  a handsome  evergreen.  The 
leaves  and  berries  possess  the  same  medicinal  quali- 
ties, both  having  a sweet  fragrant  smell,  and  an  aro- 
matic adstringent  taste.  The  laurus  of  honorary  me- 
mory, the  distinguished  favourite  of  Apollo,  may  be 
naturally  supposed  to  have  had  no  inconsiderable 
fame  as  a medicine ; but  its  pharmaceutical  uses  are 
so  limited  in  the  practice  of  the  present  day,  that  this 
dignified  plant  is  now  rarely  employed,  except  in  the 
way  of  enema,  or  as  an  external  application : thus  the 
leaves  are  directed  in  the  decoctum  pro  fomento,  arid 
the  berries  in  the  emplastrum  cumini. 

Laurus  prrsea.  This  species  affords  the  Avigato 
pear,  which,  when  ripe,  melts  in  the  mouth  like  mar- 
row, which  it  greatly  resembles  in  flavour.  It  is  sup- 
posed to  be  the  most  nutritious  of  nil  tin?  tropical  fruits, 
and  grows  in  vast  abundance  in  the  West  Indies  and 
New  Spain.  The  unripe  fruit  have  but  little  taste  ; 
yet,  being  very  salubrious,  are  often  eaten  with  salt 
and  pepper.  The  sailors,  when  they  arrive  at  the  Ha- 
vana, and  those  parts,  purchase  them  in  great  quan- 
tities; and,  chopping  them  into  small  pieces,  with 
green  capsicums,  and  a little  salt,  regale  themselves 
heartily  with  them.  They  are  esteemed  also  for  their 

9 


LAX 


LEA 


ttntidyserfferic  qualities,  and  are  prepared  in  a variety 
of  ways  for  the  tables  of  the  rich. 

Laurus  sassafras.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sassafras-tree.  Sassafras;  Cornus  mas  odorata; 
Lignum  pavanum ; Anhuiba.  The  wood  of  this  tree, 
Laurus—foliis  trilobis  integrisque , of  Linnatus,  is 
imported  from  North  America,  in  long  straight  pieces, 
very  light,  and  of  a spongy  texture,  and  covered  with 
a rough,  fungous  bark.  It  has  a fragrant  smell,  and  a 
sweetish,  aromatic,  subacrid  taste;  the  root,  wood, 
and  bark  agree  in  their  medicinal  qualities,  and  are 
all  mentioned  in  the  pharmacopoeias  ; but  the  bark  is 
the  most  fragrant,  and  thought  to  be  more  efficacious 
than  Use  woody  part;  and  the  branches  are  preferred 
to  the  large  pieces.  The  medical  character  of  this 
drug  was  formerly  held  in  great  estimation,  and  publi- 
cations were  professedly  written  on  the  subject.  It  is 
now,  however,  thought  to  be  of  little  importance,  and 
seldom  used  but  in  conjunction  with  other  medicines, 
as  a corrector  of  the  fluids.  It  is  an  ingredient  in  the 
decoclum  sarsaparilla  compositum , or  decoctum  ligno- 
rum;  but  the  only  officinal  preparation  of  it  is  the 
essential  oil,  which  is  carminative  and  stimulant,  and 
which  may  be  given  in  the  dose  of  two  drops  to  ten. 

LAVA.  The  cinders  or  product  of  volcanoes. 

Lava'ndula.  See  Lavendula. 

LAVENDER.  See  Lavendula. 

Lavender , French.  See  Lavendula  stcechas. 

LAVENDULA.  (From  lavo,  to  wash  : so  called, 
because,  on  account  of  its  fragrancy,  it  was  used  in 
baths.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Older,  Gymno- 
spermia.  Lavender. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  common  laven- 
der. See  Lavendula  spica. 

Lavendula  spiua.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  lavender.  J Yardus  italica.  Lavendula — 
folds  sessilibus  lanceolato-linearibus  margine  revolu- 
tis,  spica  interrupta  nuda , of  Linnaeus.  A native  of 
the  southern  parts  of  Europe,  but  cultivated  in  our 
gardens  on  account  of  the  fragrance  of  its  flowers. 
Their  taste  is  bitter,  warm,  and  somewhat  pungent ; 
the  leaves  are  weaker  and  less  grateful.  The  essen- 
tial oil,  obtained  by  distillation,  is  of  a bright  yellow 
colour,  of  a very  pungent  .taste,  and  possesses,  if  care- 
fully distilled,  the  fragrance  of  the  lavender  in  per- 
fection. Lavender  has  been  long  recommended  in 
nervous  debilities,  and  various  affections  proceeding 
from  a want  of  energy  in  the  animal  functions.  The 
College  directs  an  essential  oil,  a simple  spirit,  and  a 
compound  tincture,  to  be  kept  in  the  shops. 

Lavendula  stgechas.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  French  lavender.  Stoechas ; Stachas  arabica; 
Spica  liortulana ; Stucadore.  This  plant  is  much  less 
grateful  in  smell  and  flavour  than  the  common  laven- 
der, to  which  it  is  allied  in  its  properties. 

L A'VER.  (From  lavo,  to  wash : so  named  because 
it  is  found  in  brooks,  where  it  is  constantly  washed  by 
the  stream.) 

1.  The  brook-lime. 

2.  The  English  name  of  a species  of  fucus  which  is 
oaten  as  a delicacy. 

LAVIPE'DIUM.  (From  lavo , to  wash,  and  pes, 
the  foot.)  A bath  for  the  feet. 

LAWSONIA.  (After  Mr.  Lawson,  a Scotchman, 
who  published  an  excellent  account  of  his  voyage  to 
Carolina,  containing  much  information  concerning  the 
plants  of  that  country.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnteau  system.  Class,  Octandria; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Lawsonia  inermis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
true  alkanna.  Allcanna  vera ; alkanna  orientalis. 
An  oriental  plant;  the  Lawsonia — ramis  inermibus, 
of  Linmeus;  principally  employed,  in  its  native  place, 
as  a dye.  The  root  is  the  officinal  part;  which,  how- 
ever, is  rarely  met  with  in  the  shops.  It  possesses  ad- 
stringent  properties,  and  may  be  used  as  a substitute 
lor  the  anchusa. 

LAXATI'VA.  (From  laxo , to  loosen.)  Gentle 
purgatives. 

LAXA'TOR.  (From  laxo , to  loosen : so  called  from 
Its  office  to  relax.)  A name  applied  to  muscles,  the 
office  of  which  is  to  relax  parts  into  which  they  are 
inserted. 

Laxator  tympani.  Extcmus  mallei,  of  Albinus; 
Anterior  mallei , of  Winslow ; Obliquus  auris , of 
Douglas;  Externus  auris  vcl  laxator  interims,  of 

10 


Cowper ; and  Sphcni  salpingo  mallien,  Of  Dumas.  A 
muscle  of  the  internal  ear,  that  draws  the  malleus 
obliquely  forwards  towards  its  origin ; consequently  the 
membrana  tympani  is  made  less  concave,  or  is  relaxed. 

LAXUS.  Lax  or  ditfused.  Applied  by  botanists  in 
opposition  to  rectus  and  strictus  ; as  in  the  stem  of  the 
Bunias  cakile,  or  sea  rocket,  the  stem  of  which  is  de- 
scribed as  caulis  laxus. 

LAZULITE.  See  Azurite. 

LA'ZULUS.  (From  azul,  Arabian.)  A precious 
stone,  of  a blue  colour.  See  Lapis  lazuli. 

LEAD.  Plumbum.  A metal  found  in  considerable 
quantity  in  many  parts  of  the  earth,  in  different  states, 
seldom,  if  at  all,  in  the  metallic  state.  It  is  found  in 
that  of  oxide,  red  lead  ore,  mixed  with  a portion  of  iron, 
clay,  and  other  earths.  The  colour  of  this  ore  is  aurora 
red,  resembling  red  arsenic.  It  is  found  in  small  lumps, 
of  an  indeterminate  figure,  and  also  crystallized  in 
tour-sided  rhomboidal  prisms. 

Combined  with  carbonic  acid,  it  forms  the  sparry  lead 
ore,  so  called  because  it  has  the  texture  and  crystalliza- 
tion of  certain  spars.  There  are  a great  many  varieties 
of  this  kind.  It  is  found  also  united  with  sulphuric 
phosphoric,  arsenic,  molybdic,  and  chromic  acids 
Lastly,  lead  is  found  mineralized  by  sulphur,  forming 
what  is  called  galena  ( svlphuret  of  lead),  which  is  by 
far  its  most  abundant  ore.  This  ore,  which  is  very 
common,  is  found  both  in  masses  and  crystals.  The  pri- 
mitive form  of  its  crystals  is  a cube.  Its  colour  is  of  a 
bluish  lead  gray.  It  has  a considerable  metallic  lustre,  its 
texture  is  foliated.  It  stains  the  fingers,  and  often  feels 
greasy.  It  contains  ingeneral  aminutequantity  of  silver. 

Properties  of  Lead Lead  is  of  a bluish-white  co- 

lour, and  very  brilliant  when  fresh  cut.  It  is  malleable. 
It  soon  tarnishes  in  the  atmosphere.  It  may  easily  be 
cut  with  a knife,  and  stains  the  fingers  bluish-gray 
when  rubbed.  It  fuses  at  612°  Falrr.  and  renders 
other  more  refractory  metals  fusible.  It  becomes  vit- 
rified in  a strong  and  continued  heat,  and  vitrifies 
various  other  metals.  It  is  the  least  elastic  of  all  the 
metals.  It  is  very  laminable,  but  it  possesses  very  little 
ductility.  Its  specific  gravity  is  11.435.  It  crystallizes 
by  cooling  in  small  octahedra.  When  fused  in  contact 
with  air,  its  surface  first  becomes  yellow,  and  then  red. 
It  unites  by  fusion  with  phosphorus  and  sulphur.  The 
greater  part  of  the  acids  act  upon  it.  The  sulphuric 
acid  requires  the  assistance  of  a boiling  heat.  Nitric 
acid  is  decomposed-by  it.  Muriatic  acid  acts  very  weakly 
on  it.  Acetic  acid  dissolves  it.  Fluoric  acid  attacks  it  by 
heat,  and  slightly  in  the  cold.  It  combines  with  other 
metals,  but  few  of  its  alloys  are  applied  to  any  use. 
When  combined  with  mercury,  it  forms  a crystailizable 
alloy  which  becomes  fluid  when  triturated  with  that 
of  bismuth. 

Method  of  obtaining  Lead. — In  order  to  obtain  lead 
in  a great  way,  the  ore  is  picked  from  among  the  extra- 
neous matter  with  which  it  was  naturally  mixed.  It  is 
then  pulverized  and  washed.  It  is  next  roasted  in  a 
reverberatory  furnace,  in  which  it  is  to  be  agitated,  iu 
order  to  bring  the  wholeincontaclwiththe  air.  When 
the  external  parts  begin  to  soften,  or  assume  the  form 
of  a paste,  it  is  covered  with  charcoal,  the  mixture  is 
stirred,  and  the  heat  increased  gradually ; the  lead  then 
runs  on  all  sides,  and  is  collected  at  the  bottom  of  the 
furnace,  which  is  perforated  so  as  to  permit  the  metal  to 
flow  into  a receptacle  defended  by  a lining  of  charcoal. 

The  scoriae  remaining  above  in  the  furnace  still  re- 
tain a considerable  proportion  of  lead;  in  order  to 
extract  it,  the  scoriae  must  be  fused  in  a blast  furnace. 
The  lead  is  by  that  means  separated,  and  cast  into  imn 
moulds,  each  of  which  contains  a portion  called  a pig 
of  lead.  These  pigs  are  sold  under  the  name  of  ore  lead. 

In  order  to  obtain  perfectly  pure  lead,  the  lead  of 
commerce  may  be  dissolved  in  pure  nitric  acid,  and  the 
solution  be  decomposed  by  adding  to  it,  gradually,  a 
solution  of  sulphate  of  soda,  so  long  as  a precipitate 
ensues.  This  precipitate,  which  is  sulphate  of  lead, 
must  then  be  collected  on  a filter,  washed  repeatedly  in 
distilled  water,  and  then  dried  In  order  to  reduce  it 
to  its  metallic  state,  let  it  be  mixed  with  two  or  three 
times  its  weight  of  black  flux,  intioduce  the  mixture 
into  a crucible,  and  expose  it  briskly  to  a red  heat. 

“ There  are  certainly  two,  and  perhaps  three  oxides 
of  lead : — 

1.  The  powder  precipitated  bv  potassa  from  the 
solution  of  the  nitrate  of  lead  beinc  dried,  forms  the 
vellow  protoxide.  When  somewhat  vitrified,  it  con- 


LEA 


LEA 

stitutes  litharge,  and  combined  with  carbonic  acid, 
white-lead  or  ceruse. 

2.  When  massicot  has  been  exposed  for  about  48 
hours  to  the  flame  of  a reverberatory  furnace,  it  be- 
comes red-lead,  or  minium. 

3.  If  upon  100  parts  of  red-lead  we  digest  nitric  acid 
of  the  sp.  gr.  1.26,  92.5  parts  will  be  dissolved,  but  7.5 
of  a dark  brown  powder  will  remain  insoluble.  This 
is  the  peroxide  of  lead. 

Chloride  of  lead  is  formed,  either  by  placing  lead  in 
chlorine,  or  by  exposing  the  muriate  to  a moderate 
heat.  It  is  a semi-transparent,  grayish-white  mass, 
somewhat  like  horn,  whence  the  old  name  of  plumbum 
corneum. 

The  iodide  is  easily  formed,  by  heating  the  two  con- 
stituents. It  has  a fine  yellow  colour.  It  precipitates 
when  we  pour  hydriodate  of  potassa  into  a solution  of 
nitrate  of  lead. 

The  salts  of  lead  have  the  protoxide  for  their  base, 
and  are  distinguishable  by  the  following  general  cha- 
racters : — 

1.  The  salts  which  dissolve  in  water,  usually  give 
colourless  solutions,  which  have  an  astringent  sweetish 
taste. 

2.  Placed  on  charcoal  they  all  yield,  by  the  blowpipe, 
a button  of  lead. 

3.  Ferroprussiate  of  potassa  occasions  in  their  solu- 
tions a white  precipitate. 

4.  Hydrosulphuret  of  potassa,  a black  precipitate. 

5.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen,  a black  precipitate. 

6.  Gallic  acid,  and  infusion  of  galls,  a white  pre- 
cipitate. 

7.  A plate  of  zinc,  a white  precipitate,  or  metallic 
lead. 

Most  of  the  acids  attack  lead.  The  sulphuric  does 
not  act  upon  it,  unless  it  be  concentrated  and  boiling. 
Sulphurous  acid  gas  escapes  during  this  process,  and 
the  acid  is  decomposed.  When  the  distillation  is  car- 
ried on  to  dryness,  a saline  white  mass  remains,  a 
small  portion  of  which  is  soluble  in  water,  and  is  the 
sulphate  of  lead  ; it  affords  crystals.  The  residue  of 
the  white  mass  is  an  insoluble  sulphate  of  lead. 

Nitric  acid  acts  strongly  on  lead. 

The  nitrate  solution,  by  evaporation,  yields  tetrahe- 
dral crystals,  which  are  white,  opaque,  and  possess 
considerable  lustre. 

A subnitrate  may  be  formed  in  pearl-coloured  scales, 
by  boiling  in  water  equal  weights  of  the  nitrate  and 
orotoxide. 

Muriatic  acid  acts  directly  on  lead  by  heat,  oxidizing 
ft,  and  dissolving  part  of  its  oxide. 

The  acetic  acid  dissolves  lead  and  its  oxides : though 
probably  the  access  of  air  may  be  necessary  to  tire 
solution  of  the  metal  itself  in  this  acid,  white-lead , or 
ceruse , is  made  by  rolling  leaden  plates  spirally  up, 
so  as  to  leave  the  space  of  about  an  inch  between  each 
coil,  and  placing  them  vertically  in  earthen  pots,  at  the 
bottom  of  which  is  some  good  vinegar.  The  pots  are 
to  be  covered,  and  exposed  for  a length  of  time  to  a 
gentle  heat  in  a sand-bath,  or  by  bedding  them  in  dung. 
The  vapour  of  the  vinegar,  assisted  by  the  tendency 
of  the  lead  to  combine  with  the  oxygen  which  is  pre- 
sent, corrodes  the  lead,  and  converts  the  external  por- 
tion into  a white  substance  which  comes  off  in  flakes, 
when  the  lead  is  uncoiled.  The  plates  are  thus  treated 
repeatedly,  until  they  are  corroded  through.  Ceruse 
is  the  only  white  used  in  oil  paintings.  Commonly  it 
is  adulterated  with  a mixture  of  chalk  in  the  shops.  It 
may  be  dissolved  without  difficulty  in  the  acetic  acid, 
and  affords  a crystallizable  salt,  called  sugar  of  lead , 
from  its  sweet  taste  This,  like  all  the  preparations  of 
lead,  is  a deadly  poison.  The  common  sugar  of  lead  is 
an  acetate;  and  Goulard’s  extract,  made  by  boiling 
litharge  in  vinegar,  a subacetate.  The  power  of  this 
salt,  as  a coagulator  of  mucus,  is  superior  to  the  other. 
If  a bit  of  zinc  be  suspended  by  brass  or  iron  wire,  or  a 
thread,  in  a mixture  of  water  and  the  acetate  of  lead, 
the  lead  will  be  revived  and  form  an  arbor  saturni. 

The  acetate,  or  sugar  of  lead,  is  usually  crystallized 
in  needles,  which  have  a silky  appearance. 

The  subacetate  crystallizes  in  plates.  The  sulphu- 
rct,  sulphate,  carbonate,  phosphate,  arseniate,  and 
chromate  of  lead  are  found  native. 

When  lead  is  alloyed  with  an  equal  weight  of  tin, 
or  perhaps  even  less,  it  ceases  to  be  acted  on  by 
vinegar.  Acetate  and  subacetate  of  lead  in  solution, 
has  been  used  as  external  applications  to  inflamed  sur- 


faces, and  scrofulous  sores,  and  as  eye-washes.  In 
some  extreme  cases  of  htemorrbagy  from  the  lungs  and 
bowels,  and  uterus,  the  former  salt  has  been  prescribed, 
but  rarely,  and  in  minute  doses,  as  a corrugant  or  as- 
tringent. The  colic  of  the  painters,  and  that  formerly 
prevalent  in  certain  counties  of  England,  from  the  lead 
used  in  the  cider  presses,  show  the  very  deleterious 
operation  of  the  oxide,  or  salts  of  this  metal,  when  ha- 
bitually introduced  into  the  system  in  the  minutest 
quantities  at  a time*  Contraction  of  the  thumbs,  pa- 
ralysis of  the  hand,  or  even  of  the  extremities,  have 
not  unfrequently  supervened.  A course  of  sulphuretted 
hydrogen  waters,  laxatives,  of  which  sulphur,  castor 
oil,  sulphate  of  magnesia,  or  calomel,  should  be  pre- 
ferred, a mercurial  course,  the  hot  sea-bath,  and  elec- 
tricity, are  the  appropriate  remedies. 

Dealers  in  wines  have  occasionally  sweetened  them, 
when  acescent,  with  litharge  or  its  salts.  This  delete- 
rious adulteration  may  be  detected  by  sulphuretted 
hydrogen  water,  which  will  throw  down  the  lead  in 
the  state  of  a dark  brown  sulphuret.  Or,  subcarbonate 
of  ammonia,  which  is  a very  delicate  test,  may  be  em- 
ployed to  precipitate  the  lead  in  the  state  of  a white 
carbonate  ; which,  on  being  washed  and  digested  with 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  water,  will  instantly  become 
black.  If  the  white  precipitate  be  gently  heated,  it  will 
become  yellow,  and,  on  charcoal  before  the  blowpipe, 
it  will  yield  a globule  of  lead.  Chromate  of  potassa 
will  throw  down  from  saturnine  solutions,  a beautiful 
orange-yellow  powder.  Burgundy  wine,  and  all  such 
as  contain  tartar,  will  not  hold  lead  in  solution,  in 
consequence  of  the  insolubility  of  the  tartrate. 

The  proper  counter-poison  for  a dangerous  dose  of 
sugar  of  lead,  is  a solution  of  Epsom  or  Glauber  salt, 
liberally  swallowed ; either  of  which  medicines  in- 
stantly converts  the  poisonous  acetate  of  lead  into  the 
inert  and  innoxious  sulphate.  The  sulphuret  of  potas- 
sa, so  much  extolled  by  Navier,  instead  of  being  an 
antidote,  acts  itself  as  a poison  on  the  stomach. 

Oils  dissolve  the  oxide  of  lead,  and  become  thick  and 
consistent ; in  which  state  they  are  used  as  the  basis 
of  plasters,  cements  for  water-works,  paints,  &c. 

Sulphur  readily  dissolves  lead  in  the  dry  way,  and 
produces  a brittle  compound,  of  a deep  gray  colour  and 
brilliant  appearance,  which  is  much  less  fusible  than 
lead  itself ; a property  which  is  common  to  all  the  com- 
binations of  sulphur  with  the  more  fusible  metals. 

The  phosphoric  acid,  exposed  to  heat  together  with 
charcoal  and  lead,  becomes  converted  into  phosphorus, 
which  combines  with  the  metal.  This  combination 
does  not  greatly  differ  from  ordinary  lead : it  is  mal- 
leable, and  easily  cut  with  a knife ; but  it  loses  its  bril- 
liancy more  speedily  than  pure  lead  ; and  when  fused 
upon  charcoal  with  the  blowpipe,  the  phosphorus  burns, 
and  leaves  the  lead  behind. 

Litharge  fused  with  common  salt  decomposes  it ; the 
lead  unites  with  the  muriatic  acid,  and  forms  a yellow 
compound,  used  as  a pigment.  The  same  decompo- 
sition takes  place  in  the  humid  way,  if  common  salt  be 
macerated  with  litharge ; and  the  solution  will  contain 
caustic  alkali. 

Lead  unites  with  most  of  the  metals.  Gold  and 
silver  are  dissolved  by  it  in  a slight  red  heat.  Both 
these  metals  are  said  to  be  rendered  brittle  bj^a  small 
admixture  of  lead,  though  lead  itself  is  rendered  more 
ductile  by  a small  quantity  of  them.  Platina  forms  a 
brittle  compound  with  lead;  mercury  amalgamates 
with  it ; but  the  lead  is  separated  from  the  mercury  by 
agitation,  in  the  form  of  an  impalpable  black  powder, 
oxygen  being  at  the  same  time  absorbed.  Copper  and 
lead  do  not  unite  but  with  a strong  heat.  If  lead  be 
heated  so  as  to  boil  and  smoke,  it  soon  dissolves  pieces 
of  copper  thrown  into  it;  the  mixture,  when  cold,  is 
brittle.  The  union  of  these  two  metals  is  remarkably 
slight ; for,  upon  exposing  the  mass  to  a heat  no  greater 
than  that  in  which  lead  melts,  the  lead  almost  eivtirely 
runs  oif  by  itself.  This  process  is  called  eliquation. 
The  coarser  sorts  of  lead,  which  owe  their  brittleness 
and  granulated  texture  to  an  admixture  of  copper, 
throw  it  up  to  the  surface  on  being  melted  by  a small 
heat.  Iron  does  r.ot  unite  with  lead,  as  long  as  both 
substances  retain  their  metallic  form.  Tin  unites  very 
easily  with  this  metal,  and  forms  a compound,  which 
is  much  more  fusible  than  lead  by  itself,  and  is,  for 
this  reason,  used  as  a solder  for  lead.  Two  parts  of 
lead  and  one  of  tin,  form  an  alloy  more  fusible  than 
either  metal  alone ; this  is  the  solder  of  the  plumbers 

11 


LEA 


LEA 


Bismuth  combines  readily  with  lead,  and  affords  a 
motal  of  a flue  close  grain,  but  very  brittle.  A mixture 
of  eight  parts  bismuth,  five  lead,  and  three  tin,  will 
melt  in  a heat  which  is  not  sufficient  to  cause  water  to 
boil.  Antimony  forms  a brittle  alloy  with  lead.  Nickel, 
cobalt,  manganese,  and  zinc,  do  not  unite  with  lead  by 
fusion.” 

The  preparations  of  lead  used  in  medicines  are : — 

1.  Plumbi  subcarbonas.  See  Plumbi  subcarbonas. 

2.  Oxiduin  plumbi  rubrum.  S§e  Minium. 

3.  Oxidum  plumbi  semivitreum.  See  Lithar gyrus. 

4.  Acetas  plumbi.  See  Plumbi  acetas. 

5.  Liquor  plumbi  acetatis.  S ee Plumbi  acetatis  liquor. 

6.  Liquor  plumbi  acetatis  dilutus.  S eePlumbi  acetatis 
liquor  dilutus. 

Lead , white.  See  Plumbi  subcarbonas. 

LEAF.  Folium.  A laminar  expansion  of  a plant 
generally  of  a green  colour. 

It  is  difficult,  however,  to  define  this  universal  and 
important  organ  of  vegetables. 

They  are  considered  as  the  respiratory  organs  of 
plants. 

Leaves  are,  for  the  most  part,  remarkable  for  their 
expanded  form ; their  colour  is  almost  universally 
green,  their  internal  substance  pulpy  and  vascular, 
sometimes  very  succulent,  and  their  upper  and  under 
surfaces  differ  commonly  in  hue,  as  well  as  in  kind  or 
degree  of  roughness. 

In  discriminating  the  species  of  plants,  a knowledge 
of  the  various  forms  of  leaves  is  of  the  utmost  im- 
portance. Botanists,  therefore,  have  paid  particular 
attention  to  their  names,  which  are  derived  either  from 
their  origin,  distribution,  situation,  direction,  insertion, 
form,  base,  point,  margin,  surface,  distribution  of  its 
vessels,  nerves,  expansion,  substance,  duration,  com- 
position, <fcc. 

A leaf  consists  of  a thin  and  expanded  part,  which, 
in  common  language,  is  named  the  leaf,  and  a stalk 
called  the  petiole  or  petiolus.  The  surface  of  a leaf, 
superficies,  ot  pagina,  is  distinguished  into  the  upper 
part,  or  face,  and  the  under  part,  or  back,  of  the  leaf. 
The  base,  or  origin  of  the  leaf,  is  that  part  next  the 
stem  or  branch ; the  apex  is  the  termination  of  the  leaf ; 
the  margin  or  edge,  the  circumference ; the  disk, 
discum , is  the  middle  part  of  the  surfaces  within  the 
margin. 

From  their  origin , we  have  the  following  terms  : — 

I. ,  Seminal ; folia  seminalia , which  are  the  first 
leaves  of  the  majority  of  plants,  proceeding  from  seeds 
that  have  more  than  one  seed-lobe ; they  are  seen  in 
Raphanus  sativus,  and  Cannabis  sativa. 

2.  Radical,  which  spring  directly  from  the  root ; as 
in  Leontodon  taraxacum,  and  Viola  odorata. 

3.  Cauline , or  stem-leaf.  The  Valeriana  phu  has 
its  radical  leaves  undivided,  and  the  cauline  leaves 
pinnate. 

4.  Randal,  or  branch-leal,  which  are  only  described 
when  they  differ  from  those  of  the  stem.  The  Sis  on 
ammi  has  its  radicaUeaves,  linear ; its  cauline,  setous ; 
and  its  branch  leaves,  tnpinnate. 

5.  Axillary,  when  seated  on  joints  or  axillae  ; as  in 
Partheniurn  integrifolium. 

6.  Floral,  when  next  the  flower,  and  like  the  other 
leaves;  as  in  Lonicera  caprifolium. 

From  tiieir  distribution  on  the  stem  and  branches, 
leaves  are  named, 

7.  Alternate , when  not  in  pairs,  and  are  given  off  in 
various  directions,  one  after  another ; as  in  Malva  ro- 
tundifolia. 

8.  Opposite,  when  they  appear  directly  on  opposite 
sides  of  the  stem,  in  pairs  ; as  in  Lamium  album,  and 
Urtica  dioica. 

9.  Two-ranked ; folia  disticha , which  implies  that 
they  spread  in  two  directions,  and  yet  are  not  regularly 
opposite  at  their  insertion  ; as  in  Cupressus  disticha, 
Taxus  baccata,  Pinus  picea,  and  Lonicera  symphori- 
carpos. 

10.  Bifarial , that  is,  two-ranked,  but  given  off  from 
the  side  only  of  the  branch  ; as  in  Carpinus  betulus, 
and  Fagus  sylvatica 

II.  Unilateral , looking  to  one  side  only ; as  in  Con- 
vallaria  multiflora. 

12.  Scattered , irregular  or  without  any  order  ; as  in 
Reseda  luteola,  and  Sedum  reflexum. 

13.  Decussate,  crossing  each  other  in  pairs ; cross- 
like  ; as  in  Euphorbia  lathyris,  and  Crassula  tetra- 
gona. 

J2 


14.  Imbricate,  like  tiles  upon  a house ; as  in  Cupres- 
sus sempervirens,  and  Aloe  spiralis. 

15.  Fasciculate,  or  tufted,  when  several  spring  from 
the  same  point ; as  in  Pinus  larix,  and  Berberis  vul- 
garis. 

16.  Stellate,  star-leaved,  whirled ; several  leaevs 
growing  in  a circle  round  the  stem,  without  any  refer- 
ence to  the  precise  number ; as  in  Rubia  tinctorum, 
Lilium  martagon,  Asperula  odorata.  In  large  natural 
genera  it  is  necessary  to  mention  the  number ; as  in 
Galium. 

17.  Remote , when  at  an  unusual  distance  from  each 
other. 

18.  Clustered ; crowded  together ; as  in  Antirrhinum 
linaria,  and  Trientalis  europea. 

19.  Binal,  when  there’is  only  two  on  a plant;  as  in 
Galanthus  nivalis,  Scilla  bilolia,  and  Couvallaria 
magalis. 

20.  Temal,  three  together  ; as  in  Verbena  triphylla. 

21.  Quaternal,  Quinal,  Sec.,  when  four,  five,  or 
more  are  situated  together ; as  in  various  species  of 
Erica. 

From  their  determinate  direction , leaves  are  distin- 
guished into, 

22.  Close-pressed ; adpressa ; when  their  upper  sur- 
face is  close  to  the  stem  ; as  in  Thlaspi  campestris,  and 
Xerantheinum  sesamoides. 

23.  Erect , when  nearly  perpendicular,  or  forming  a 
very  acute  angle  with  the  stem  ; as  in  Juncus  articu- 
latis,  and  Bryum  unquiculatum. 

24.  Spreading,  forming  a moderately  acute  angle 
with  the  stem  ; as  in  Atriplex  portulacoides,  Nerium 
oleander,  and  Veronica  beccabunga. 

25.  Horizontal,  spreading  in  the  greatest  possible 
degree ; as  in  Gentiana  campestris,  and  Pelargonium 
patulum. 

26.  Ascending , rising  gently,  so  as  to  be  somewhat 
arched  ; as  in  Geranium  nitifolium. 

27.  Recurved,  reflexed,  curved  backward;  as  in 
Erica  retorta,  and  Bryum  pellucidum. 

28.  Reclined,  depending,  hanging  downward  towards 
the  earth ; as  in  Cichorium  intybus,  and  Leonurus 
cardiaca. 

29.  Oblique,  twisted,  so  that  one  part  is  vertical,  the 
other  horizontal ; as  Allium  obliquum,  and  Fritallaria 
obliqua. 

30.  Adverse , the  upper  surface  turned  to  the  meri- 
dian, not  the  sky ; as  in  Lactuca  scariola. 

31.  Resupinate , or  reversed,  w hen  the  upper  surface 
is  turned  dowmvard  ; as  in  Alstromeria  pelegrina,  and 
Sloebe  prostrata. 

32.  Revolute , having  a spiral  apex;  as  Dianthus 
carthusianorum,  and  barbatus. 

33.  Rooting , sending  rootlets  into  the  earth  ; as  As- 
plenium  rhizophylla. 

34.  Floating  on  the  surface  of  the  water;  as  in 
Potamogeton  natans,  and  Nymphaea  alba. 

35.  Submersed,  demersed,  immersed,  under  water  ; 
os  Hottonia  palustris,  and  Ranunculus  aquatilis. 

From  their  insertion , into, 

36.  Petiolate,  leaves  on  footstalks ; as  Prunus  cera- 
sus,  and  Verbascum  nigrum. 

37.  Sessile , without  footstalk,  lying  immediately  on 
the  stem  ; as  in  Saponaria  officinalis,  and  Pinguicula 
vulgaris. 

, 38.  Adnate , the  upper  surface  adhering  a little  way 

to  the  branch ; as  in  Xeranlhemum  vestitum. 

39.  Decurrent , when  a lamellar  part  of  the  leaf  runs 
down  the  stem,  or  branch ; as  in  Carduus  spinosus, 
and  Verbascum  thapsus. 

40.  Connate,  when  two  opposite  leaves  embrace, 
and  are  united  at  their  bases  ; as  in  Cerastium  perfo- 
liatum,  and  Dipsacus  laciniatus.  , 

41.  Connato-perfoliate , when  the  union  is  in  the 
whole  or  nearly  the  whole  breadth  of  the  leaves,  so  as 
to  give  the  two  leaves  the  appearance  of  being  united 
into  but  one  leaf;  as  in  Eupaforium  perfoliatum,  and 
Lonicera  dioica.  Connate  leaves  are,  in  some  in- 
stances, united  by  a membrane,  which,  stretching  from 
the  margins  of  the  opposed  leaves,  near  the  base,  forms 
a kind  of  pitcher  around  the  stem,  in  which  the  rain  is 
retained ; as  in  Dipsacus  fullonium. 

42.  Embracing,  clasping  the  stem  with  their  bases  ; 
as  in  Carduus  mariauus,  and  Papaver  somniferum 

43.  Vaginatc,  sheathing  the  stem  at  their  bases,  as  in 
Canna  indica,  and  Polygonum  bistoi  ta. 

44.  Peltate,  when  the  footstalk  is  inserted,  not  into 


LEA 


fhe  basis,  but  into  the  disk  of  the  leaf,  as  in  Drosera 
peltata,  and  Tropaeolum  majus. 

45.  Perfoliate , when  the  stem  runs  through  the  leaf ; 
as  in  Bupleurum  rotundifolium,  and  Uvularia  perfo- 
liata. 

46.  Articulate , one  leaf  growing  out  of  the  apex  of 
another;  as  Cactus  opuntia.  and  Cactus  ficus  indica. 

From  the  basis  of  the  leaf,  it  is  called, 

47.  Cordate,  heart-shaped,  or  ovate,  hollowed  out  at 
the  base  ; as  Arctium  lappa,  and  Tamus  communis. 

48.  tirrow-shaped , triangular,  hollowed  out  very 
much  at  the  base ; as  Rumex  acetosa,  and  Sagittaria 
sagittilalia. 

49.  Hastate , halberd-shaped,  triangular,  hollowed 
out  at  the  base  and  sides,  but  with  spreading  lobes;  as 
in  Arum  maculatum,  and  Rumex  acetosella. 

50.  Remform,  kidney-shaped,  a short,  broad,  round- 
ish leaf,  the  base  of  which  is  hollowed  out ; as  Asarum 
europeum,  and  Glecoma  hederacea. 

51.  Auricled , furnished  at  its  base  with  a pair  of 
leaflets,  properly  distinct,  but  occasionally  joined  with 
it ; as  in  Citrus  aurantiuin. 

Linnaeus  uses  the  term  appendiculatum , which  is 
correct. 

52.  Unequal , the  basis  larger  on  one  side  than  the 
other  ; as  in  Tilia  europea,  and  Piper  tuberculatum. 

The  form  of  the  apex  of  a leaf,  gives  rise  to  the 
following  names. 

53.  Acute , sharp,  ending  in  an  acute  angle,  which  is 
common  to  a great  number  of  plants;  example  in  Li- 
num  angustifolium,  and  Campanula  trachelium. 

54.  Acuminate.,  pointed,  having  a taper,  or  awl- 
shaped  point;  as  Arundo  phragmitis,  and  Syringa 
vulgaris. 

55.  Cuspidate , or  mucronate,  sharp  pointed,  tipped 
with  a rigid  spine,  as  in  the  thistles,  and  Ficus  reli- 
giosa. 

56.  Obtuse , blunt,  terminating  in  a segment  of  a 
circle : as  Rumex  obtusifolius,  and  Hypericum  quad- 
rangulum. 

57.  Retuse , ending  in  a broad,  shallow  notch ; as  in 
Ervum  ervilia,  and  Rumex  digynus. 

58.  Prcemorse,  jagged  pointed,  as  if  bitten  off ; very 
Dlunt,  with  various  irregular  notches ; as  in  Hibiscus 
praeinorsus,  and  Swartz’s  genus  ASride. 

59.  Truncate , an  abrupt  leaf,  with  the  extremity  cut 
off,  as  it  were,  by  a transverse  line  ; as  in  Liriodendron 
tulipifera. 

60.  Dedaleous , with  a broad,  incised,  and  crisp 
apex  ; as  in  Asplenium  scolopendrum. 

61.  Emarginate,  nicked,  having  a small  notch  at  the 
summit ; as  Hydrocotile  vulgaris,  and  Euphorbia  tu- 
berosa. 

62  Summit-cut,— folia  apice  incisa;  as  in  Glinko 
biloba. 

63.  Cirrhose,  tipped  with  a tendril;  as  in  Lathyrus 
articulatus,  and  Gloriosa  superba. 

64.  Tridentate , three-toothed ; an  obtuse  point,  be- 
set with  three  teeth;  as  in  Buchera  aethiopica,  and 
Genista  tridentata. 

65.  Asculiate,  or  pitcher-leaf,  a cylindrical  tube, 
filled  with  water ; as  in  Nepenthes  distillatoria,  and 
Saracenia. 

The  names  derived  from  the  margin  of  the  leaf,  are, 

66.  Entire , not  divided ; as  in  Tragopogon  pratense, 
and  porrifolium. 

67.  Very  entire , integerrima,  the  margin  void  of 
irregularity;  as  Citrus  aurantium. 

68.  Undulate , when  the  disk  near  the  margin  is 
waved  obtusely  up  and  down  ; as  in  Panicum  liirtel- 
lum,  and  Reseda  lutea. 

€9.  Crenate , notched,  when  the  teeth  are  rounded, 
and  not  directed  towards  either  end  of  the  leaf;  as  in 
Betonica  officinalis,  and  Scutellaria  galericulata. 

70.  Doubly  crenate,  the  greater  teeth,  notched  with 
smaller  ones ; as  in  Salvia  sclara,  and  Ranunculus 
auricomus. 

71.  Serrate,  when  the  teeth  are  sharp,  and  resemble 
those  of  a saw,  pointing  towards  the  extremity  of  the 
leaf ; as  in  Sedum  telephium. 

72.  Acutely  serrate ; as  in  Thymus  acinos. 

73.  Obtusely  serrate;  as  inBallota  nigra. 

74.  Doubly  serrate , having  a series  of  smaller  serra- 
tures  intermixed  with  the  larger  ; as  in  Rubus  frutico- 
eus,  and  Campanula  trachelium. 

75.  Dentate , toothed,  beset  with  projecting,  horizon- 
tal, rather  distant,  teeth  of  its  own  substance ; as  the 


LEA 

lower  leaves  of  the  Centaurea  cyanus,  and  Campanula 
trachelium. 

76.  Jagged , irregularly  cut  or  notched,  especially 
when  otherwise  also  divided ; as  in  Salvia  Ethiopia, 
and  Senecio  squalidus. 

77.  Cartilagivous-edged,  hard,  and  hoary:  as  in 
Saxifraga  callosa,  and  Yucca  gloriosa. 

78.  Prickle-edged , beset  with  prickles  ; as  in  Car 
duus  lanceolatus,  and  Ilex  aquifolium. 

79.  Fringed,  bordered  with  soft  parallel  hairs;  as  in 
Sempervivum  tectorum,  and  Galium  cruciatum. 

From  the  openings , or  sinuses,  in  the  margin. 

80.  Sinuuted,  i, ul  as  it  were  into  rounded,  or  wide 
openings  ; as  in  Guercus  robur,  and  Alcea  rosea. 

81.  Repand , wavy,  bordered  with  numerous  angles 
and  segments  of  circles,  alternately  ; as  in  Menyantlus 
nymphoides,  and  Erysimum  alliaria. 

82.  Pinnatifid , cut  transversely  into  several  oblong 
parallel  segments;  as  in  Centaurea  calcitrapa,  and 
Scabiosa  arvensis. 

83.  Bipinnatifid,  doubly  pinnatifid;  as  in  Papaver 
argemone. 

84.  Lyrate , lyre-shaped,  cut  into  several  tranverse 
segments,  gradually  larger  towards  the  extremity  of  the 
leaf,  which  is  rounded ; as  in  Geum  urbanum,  and  Ery- 
simum barbarea. 

85.  Pandvnform , fiddle-shaped,  oblong,  broad  at  the 
two  extremities,  and  contracted  in  the  middle ; as  in 
Rumex  pulcher,  and  Convolvulus  panduratus. 

86.  Runcinate,  lion-toothed,  cut  into  several  trans- 
verse, acute,  segments,  pointing  backwards;  as  in  Le- 
ontodon  taraxacum,  and  Erysimum  officinale. 

87.  Eaciniate,  cut  into  numerous  irregular  portions; 
as  in  Ranunculus  parviflorus,  and  Geranium  columbi- 
num,  and  Cotyledon  laciniata. 

88.  Squarrose,  the  margin  beset  with  a rough  fringe  ; 
as  in  Centaurea  calcitrapa,  and  Carduus  marianus. 

89.  Partite,  deeply  divided  nearly  to  the  basis ; as 
in  Helleborus  viridis;  bipartite,  tripartite , and  multi- 
partite, according  tc  the  nunlber  of  the  divisions. 

90.  Trifid,  divided  into  three  ; as  in  Bidens  tripartita. 

91.  Quinquifid,  divided  into  five;  as  in  Geranium 
maculatum. 

92.  Multifid,  the  margin  of  round  leaves  cut  from  the 
apex  almost  to  the  base,  without  leaving  any  great  in- 
termediate sinuses ; as  in  Aconitum  napellus,  and  Cu 
cumis  colocynthis. 

From  the  angles  in  the  margin  of  the  leaf, 

93.  Rounded,  the  margin  not  having  any  angle. 

94.  Angulate , the  margin  having  acute  angles. 

a.  Triangular;  as  in  Chenopodium  bonus  henricus, 
and  Atriplex  liortensis. 

b.  Quinqueangular  ; as  in  Geranium  peltatum. 

c.  Septangular  ; as  in  Hibiscus  abelmoschus. 

95.  Rhomboid , trapeziform,  or  approaching  to  a 
square;  as  in  Chenopodium  vulvaria,  and  Trapa 
natans. 

96.  Quadrangular,  with  four  angles ; as  in  Lirio- 
dendron tulipifera. 

97.  Deltoid,  trowel-shaped,  having  three  angles,  of 
which  the  terminal  one  is  much  farther  from  the  base, 
than  the  lateral  ones ; as  in  Mesembryanthemum  del- 
toideum,  and  Populus  nigra. 

98.  Lobate,  when  the  margins  of  deep  segments  are 
rounded,  hence: 

a.  Two-lobed;  as  in  Bauhinia  porresta. 

b.  Three-lobed ; as  in  Anemone  hepatica. 

c.  Five-lobed ; as  in  Humulus  lupulus,  and  Acer 
pseudo-platanus. 

99.  Palmate , cut  into  several  oblong,  nearly  equal 
segments,  about  half  way,  or  rather  more,  towards  the 
base,  leaving  an  entire  space  like  the  palm  of  the  hand  ; 
as  in  Passiflora  coerulea,  and  Alcea  ficifolia. 

From  the  figure  of  the  circumference,  are  derived  the 
following  names . 

100.  Orbiculate , circular,  the  length  and  breadth  of 
which  are  equal,  and  the  circumference  in  an  even 
circular  line ; as  in  Cotyledon  orbiculata  and  Hydroco- 
tyle  vulgaris. 

101.  Subratund,  roundish ; as  in  Pyrola,  and  Malva 
rotundifolia. 

102.  Oblong,  three  or  four  times  longer  than  broad; 
as  in  Musasapientum,  and  Elaeagnus  orientalis. 

103.  4dvate,  of  the  shape  of  an  egg,  cut  length 
wise,  the  base  being  rounded,  and  broader  than  the 
extremity;  as  in  Origanum  vulgare,  and  Inula  he 
lenium. 


13 


LEA 


LEA 


104.  Gbovate , of  the  same  figure,  with  the  broader 
end  uppermost;  as  in  Primula  veris,  and  Samulus 
valerandi. 

104*.  Oval , ovate,  but  each  end  has  the  same  round- 
ness; as  in  Rhus  catinus,  and  Mammea  americana. 

103.  Elliptical , oval,  the  longitudinal  diameter  being 
greater  than  the  transverse. 

106.  Parabolic , oblong,  the  summit  narrow  and 
round  ; as  in  Marrubiuin  pseudodictamnus. 

107.  Cuneiform , wedge-shaped,  broad  and  abrupt  at 
the  summit,  and  tapering  down  to  the  base;  as  Saxi- 
fraga  cuneifolia,  and  Iberis  semperflorens. 

108.  Spatulate , of  a roundish  figure,  tapering  to  an 
oblong  base ; as  in  Cotyledon  spuria,  and  Cucubalus 
otites. 

109.  Lanceolate,  of  a narrow,  oblong  form,  tapering 
towards  each  end  ; as  in  Plantago  lanceolata. 

110.  Linear , narrow,  with  parallel  sides ; as  in  Se- 
necio  linifolius. 

111.  Capillary , long,  fine,  and  flexible,  resembling  a 
hair;  as  in  Anethum  fceniculum,  and  Graveolens. 

112.  Setaceous,  bristly ; as  in  Asparagus  officinalis, 
and  Scirpus  setaceus. 

113.  Acerose , needle-shaped,  linear,  and  evergreen, 
generally  acute  and  rigid ; as  in  Pinus  sylvestris,  and 
Juniperus  communis. 

From  the  difference  of  the  surface  of  leaves : 

114.  Glabrous,  smooth,  without  roughness;  as  the 
leaves  of  most  plants. 

115.  Nitid,  smooth  and  shining ; as  in  Laurus  no- 
bilis,  and  Canna  indica. 

118.  Lucid,  as  if  covered  with  a varnish;  as  in 
Angelica  lucida,  and  Royena  lucida. 

117.  Viscid , covered  with  a clammy  juice:  as  in 
Senecio  viscosus,  and  Erygeron  viscosum. 

118.  Naked,  without  bristles,  or  hairs;  as  the  leaves 
of  many  plants. 

119.  Scabrous , or  asperous,  with  little  roughness 
visible,  as  well  as  tangible;  as  in  Morus  nigra,  and 
Ilumulus  lupulus. 

120.  Punctuate,  dotted,  perforated  with  little  holes ; 
as  in  Hypericum  perforatum. 

121.  Pertuse,  bored,  naturally  having  large  perfora- 
tions ; as  Dracontium  pertusum. 

122.  Maculate,  spotted ; as  in  Orchis  maculata,  and 
Pulmonaria  officinalis. 

123.  Coloured,  being  of  any  other  than  a green 
colour ; as  in  Amaranthus  tricolor,  and  Atriplex  hor- 
tensis  rubra. 

124.  Hoary,  having  a whitish  mealy  surface ; as  in 
Populus  alba. 

125.  Lineate,  having  superficial  lines:  asinScripus 
rnariiimus. 

126.  Striate,  marked  with  coloured  lines;  as  in  Pha- 
laris  arundinacea. 

127.  Sulcate,  furrowed,  having  broad  and  deep  fur- 
rows ; as  in  Digitalis  ferruginea. 

128.  Rugose,  rugged;  as  in  Salvia sclara. 

129.  Bullate , blistered,  a greater  degree  of  the  last ; 
as  in  Brassica  oleracea. 

130.  Papulous,  or  vesiculous,  covered  with  hollow 
vesicles  ; as  in  Mesembryanthemum  crystallinum. 

131.  Papillose , or  Varicose,  covered  with  solid  wart- 
like tubercles ; as  in  Aloe  margaritifera. 

132.  Glandular,  covered  with  small  glandiform 
bodies;  as  in  Salix  alba,  and  Prunus  padus. 

From  the  distributions  of  the  vessels  on  the  surface 
of  the  leaf, 

Nerves  are  white,  elevated  chords,  which  originate 
from  the  base  of  the  leaf. 

A rib  is  the  middle  nerve,  thick,  and  extending  from 
the  basis  to  the  apex  of  the  leaf. 

Veins  are  anastomosing  vessels  which  are  given  off 
from  the  costa  or  rib. 

The  greater  clusters  of  vessels  are  generally  called 
nervi  or  coster,,  nerves  or  ribs,  and  the  smaller  venae, 
whether  they  are  branched  or  reticulate,  simple  or 
otherwise. 

133.  A nervous  or  ribbed  leaf  is  where  they  extend  in 
simple  lines  from  the  base  to  the  point;  as  in  the  Con- 
vallarice,  and  Helianthus  annuus.  The  Laurus  cam- 
phora  is  an  example  of  a trinerve ; the  Siniiax  tetragona 
has  five  nerves  ; the  Dioscorea  septemloba,  seven. 

134.  When  a pair  of  large  ribs  branch  off  from  the 
main  one  above  the  base,  and  run  in  a straight  line 
towards  the  apex,  as  in  Helianthus  tuberosus,  the  leaf  is 
said  to  be  triple  nerved. 

14 


135.  When  two  go  from  the  base  and  four  from  the 
costa  in  a straight  line,  it  is  termed  folium  quintupli- 
nervum. 

136.  Venous,  veiny,  when  the  vessels  by  which  the 
leaf  is  nourished  are  branched,  subdivided,  and  more  or 
less  prominent,  forming  a net-work  over  either,  or  both 
its  surfaces;  as  in  Clusia  venosa,  and  Verbascum 
lychritis. 

137.  Avenial,  or  veinless,  when  without  veins ; as  io 
Clusia  alba,  and  rosea. 

138.  Enervous,  ribless,  when  no  nerve  is  given  ofT 
from  the  base  ; as  in  Asperuia  levigata. 

The  terms  from  the  expansion  of  the  leaves  are, 

139.  Flat,  as  most  leaves  are. 

140.  Concave,  hollow,  depressed  in  the  middle ; as  in 
Saxifraga  stolonifera. 

141.  Convex,  the  reverse  of  the  former;  as  in  Ocy- 
mum  basilicum  majus. 

142.  Canaliculate,  channelled,  having  a longitudinal 
furrow  ; as  in  Plantago  maritima. 

143.  Cucullate,  hooded,  when  the  edges  meet  in  the 
lower  parts,  and  expand  in  the  upper  ; as  in  Geranium 
cucullatum,  and  that  curious  genus  Saracenia. 

144.  Plicate,  plaited,  when  the  disk  of  the  leaf,  espe- 
cially towards  the  margin,  is  acutely  folded  up  and 
down  ; as  in  the  Malvas,  and  Alchemilla  vulgaris. 

145.  Undulate , waved,  when  the  disk  near  the  margin 
is  waved  obtusely  up  and  down;  as  in  Reseda  lutea, 
and  Ixia  undulaia. 

146.  Crisp , curled,  when  the  border  of  the  leaf  be- 
comes more  expanded  than  the  disk,  so  as  to  grow 
elegantly,  curled,  and  twisted  ; as  in  Malva  crispa. 

From  the  internal  substance: 

147.  Membranaceous,  when  there  is  scarcely  any 
pulp  between  the  external  membranes  of  the  leaf;  as  in 
Citrus  aurantium,  and  the  leaves  of  many  plants. 

148.  Thick,  the  membranes  being  rather  more  than 
usually  firm ; as  in  Sedum  telephium. 

149.  Corneous,  fleshy,  of  a thick  substance,  as  in  all 
those  called  succulent  plants;  as  Crassula  lactea,  and 
Sempervivum  tectorum. 

150.  Pulpy,  very  thick,  and  of  the  consistence  of  a 
plumb;  as  in  Mesembryanthemum  verruculalum. 

151.  Tubular,  hollow  within;  as  in  Allium  cepa. 
The  leaf  of  the  Lobelia  dortmanaa  is  very  peculiar,  in 
consisting  of  a double  tube. 

152.  Compact,  not  hollow. 

153.  Rigid,  easily  broken  on  being  bent ; as  in  Sta- 
pelia. 

The  thick  leaves,  folia  crassa,  afford  the  following 
distinctions : 

154.  Gibbous,  swelling  on  one  side,  or  both,  from 
excessive  abundance  of  pulp ; as  in  Crassula  cotyledon, 
and  Aloe  retusa. 

155.  Round,  cylindrical ; as  in  Allium  schcenoprasum, 
and  Salsola  sativa. 

156.  Subulate,  awl-shaped,  tapering  from  a tliickish 
base  to  a point;  as  in  Allium  ascalonicum,  and  Narcis- 
sus jonquilla. 

157.  Compressed,  flattened  laterally;  as  in  Cacalia 

ficoides. 

158.  Depressed,  flattened  vertically ; as  in  Crassula 
tetragona. 

159.  Triquetral,  thick  and  triangular ; as  in  Bulo- 
mus  umbellatus. 

160.  Tetragonal,  quadrangular  and  awl-shaped ; as 
in  Gladiolus  tristis. 

161.  Lingulate,  tongue-shaped,  a thick,  oblong, 
blunt  figure,  and  a little  convex  on  its  inferior  surface ; 
as  in  Mesembryanthemum  linguiforme. 

162.  Ancipital,  two-edged ; as  in  Typha  latifolia. 

163.  Ensiform,  sword-shaped,  two  edges  tapering 
to  a point,  slightly  convex  on  both  surfaces,  neither  of 
which  can  properly  be  called  upper  or  under ; as  in 
Iris  germanica,  and  Gladiolus  communis. 

164.  Carinate,  keeled,  when  the  bark  is  longitudinally 
prominent;  as  in  Allium  carinatum,  and  Narcissus 
biflorus. 

165.  Acinaciform,  scimitar-shaped,  compressed  with 
one  thick  and  straight  edge,  the  other  thin  and  curved ; 
as  in  Mesembryanthemum  acinacil'orme. 

166.  Dolabriform,  hatchet-shaped,  compressed  with 
a very  prominent  dilated  keel,  and  a cylindrical  base ; 
as  in  Mesembryanthemum  dolabriforme. 

167.  Uncinate,  hooked,  flat  above,  compressed  at  its 
sides,  and  turned  back  at  the  apex,  forming  a hook. 

l When  the  shape  of  membranaceous  leaves  is 


LEA 


LED 


Imperfect,  the  particle  sub  is  attached,  as  sui-sessile, 
tfui-ovate,  stii-pilous,  &c 

When  the  shape  is  reversed , by  the  'prefixing  the 
preposition  ob , as  oi-cordate,  when  the  point  is  in- 
serted into  the  petiole,  ob- ovate,  &c. 

From  the  coadunation , leaves  are  designated  by  pre- 
fixing the  prominent  shape,  as  lanceolato-ovate  ; as  in 
Nicotiana  tabacurn : and  ovato-lanceolate,  lanceolate, 
but  swelling  out  in  the  middle ; as  in  Saponaria  offi- 
cinalis. 

From  their  duration , leaves  are  termed, 

168.  Deciduous , falling  off  at  the  approach  of  winter, 
as  in  most  European  trees  and  shrubs. 

169.  Caducous , falling  off  in  the  middle  of  summer. 

170.  Perennial , green  the  whole  year,  and  falling 
off  as  the  new  ones  appear. 

171.  Persistant , lasting  many  years,  and  always 
green ; as  in  Pinus  and  Taxus. 

All  the  foregoing  terms  belong  to  simple  leaves , or 
those  which  have  one  leaf  only  on  the  petiole  or  foot- 
stalk. 

The  following  regard  compound  leaves , or  such  as 
consist  of  two  or  any  greater  number  of  foliola , or 
leaflets,  connected  by  a common  footstalk. 

172.  Digitate , fingered,  when  several  leaflets  pro- 
ceed from  the  summit  of  a common  footstalk ; as  in 
Trifolium  pratense. 

173.  Pinnate,  when  several  leaflets  proceed  late- 
rally from  one  footstalk,  instead  of  being  supported  at 
the  top ; as  in  Acacia  pseudacacia. 

A digitate  leaf  is  called,  after  its  mode  of  digitation, 

174.  Conjugate , or  yoked,  when  there  is  one  pair  of 
leaflets,  ox  pinnae;  as  in  Zygophillum  fabago. 

175.  Binate,  when  the  pair  of  leaflets  unite  some- 
what at  their  base ; as  in  Lathyrus  sylvestris. 

176.  Ternate,  where  there  are  three  leaflets ; as  in 
Trifolium  pratensis,  and  Oxalis  acetosella. 

177.  Quinate,  there  being  five  leaflets;  as  in  Poten- 
tilla  rsptans,  and  Lupinus  albus. 

178.  Septenate,  with  seven;  as  in  iEsculus  hippo- 
castanum. 

179.  Novenate,  nine ; as  in  Sterculia  fetida. 

180.  Pedate,  a peculiar  kind  of  leaf,  being  ternate, 
with  its  lateral  leaflets  compounded  in  their  forepart ; 
or  a leaf  with  a bifid  footstalk,  divided  into  two  di- 
verging branches,  with  an  intermediate  leaflet,  and 
each  supporting  two  or  more  lateral  leaflets  on  their 
anterior  edge ; as  in  Helleborus  niger. 

181.  Articulate,  jointed,  when  one,  or  a pair  of  leaf- 
lets, grows  out  of  the  summit  of  another,  with  a sort 
of  joint ; as  in  Cactus  ficus  indica,  and  Fagara  tra- 
godes. 

Pinnate  leaves  are  called  from  their  number  of 
pinnae , 

182.  Bipinnate , or  duplicato-pinnate , doubly  pin- 
nate ; as  in  Tanacetum  vulgare. 

183.  Tripinnate , or  triplicato-pinnate , three  pinnate ; 
as  in  Scandix  odorata. 

From  the  number  of  pairs , pinnate  leaves  are 
termed, 

184.  Biguga;  as  in  Mimosa  nodosa. 

185.  Triguga ; as  in  Cassia  emarginata. 

186.  Quadriguga ; as  in  Cassia  longisiliqua. 

187.  Quinquiguga  ; as  in  Cassia  occidentalis. 

188.  Mulliguga;  as  in  Cassia  javanica. 

The  difference  in  the  termination  of  a pinnate  leaf, 

189.  Impari-pinnate , with  an  odd  or  terminal  leaflet ; 
as  Rosa  centifolia. 

190.  Abrupti-pinnaU,  with  a terminal  leaflet,  as  in 
Orobus  tuberosus. 

191.  Cirrhosi-pinn/ite,  when  furnished  with  a ten- 
dril in  place  of  an  odd  leaflet ; as  in  the  pea  and  vetch 
tribe. 

From  the  mode  of  adhesion  of  the  leaflets  arise, 

192.  Oppositely-pinnate , when  the  leaflets  are  oppo- 
site, or  in  pairs  . as  in  Sium  angustifolium. 

193.  Altemately-pinnate,  when  alternate;  as  in  Vi- 
cia  sativa. 

194.  Interruptedly-pinnate,  when  the  principal  leaf- 
lets are  arranged  alternately  with  an  intermediate 
series  of  smaller  ones ; as  in  Spiraea  ulmaria. 

195.  Decurrently-pinnatc , when  the  leaflets  are  de- 
current ; as  in  Eryngium  campestre. 

196.  Jointedly-pinnate , with  apparent  joints  in  the 
common  footstalk ; as  in  Fagara  tragodes. 

197.  Petiolato-pinnate,  the  leaflets  on  footstalks ; as 
in  Robinia  pseudacacia. 


198.  Alate-pinnate , when  the  footstalk  has  little 
wings  between  the  leaflets. 

]99.  Sessile-pinnate,  with  leaflets  within  any  pe- 
tiole. 

200.  Conjugate-pinnate,  confluent : the  leaflets  grow- 
ing somewhat  together  at  their  margins. 

From  their  bipinnation,  pinnate  leaves  are, 

201.  Bigeminate , two-paired ; as  in  Mimosa  unguis 
cate. 

202.  Trigeminate,  or  triplicato-gcminate,  Unre- 
paired ; as  in  Mimosa  tergemina. 

From  the  tripinnation, 

203.  Doubly- ternate , or  dvphcato-ternate,  when  the 
common  footstalk  supports  tnese  secondary  petioles  on 
its  apex,  and  each  of  these  supports  three  leaflets ; as 
in  Epimediuin  alpinum. 

204.  Triternate,  or  triplicato-temate,  when  the 
common  petiole  supports  on  its  apex  three  secondary 
footstalks,  each  of  which  supports  three  ternary  one 
and  every  one  of  these  three  leaflets ; as  in  Aquilegia 
vulgaris,  and  Fumaria  enneapliylla. 

205.  Multiplicato-pinnate,  there  being  more  than 
three  orders ; as  in  Ruta  hortensis. 

Pinnae  are  the  leaflets  of  pinnate  leaves. 

206.  Pinullce , the  leaflets  of  tjie  double  and  triple 
range  of  pinnate  leaves. 

LE^E'NA.  (From  Xeaiva,  a lioness.) 

1.  The  lioness. 

2.  The  name  of  a plaster,  so  called  from  its  great 
power. 

LEAKE,  John,  was  born  in  Cumberland,  and,  after 
qualifying  himself  as  a surgeon  in  London,  travelled 
to  Portugal  and  Italy.  On  his  return  he  settled  in  the 
metropolis,  and  published  a dissertation  on  the  Lisbon 
Diet  Drink.  He  not  long  after  became  a licentiate  of 
the  College  of  Physicians,  and  began  to  lecture  on 
Midwifery.  In  1765,  he  originated  the  plan  for  the 
Westminster  Lying-in  Hospital,  and  purchased  a piece 
of  ground  for  the  purpose.  His  death  occurred  in 
1792.  He  published  a volume  of  “ Practical  Observa- 
tions on  Child-bed  Fever ;”  “ Medical  Instructions, 
concerning  the  Diseases  of  Women  ;”  in  two  volumes, 
which  passed  through  several  editions;  and  some 
other  works. 

LE  CLERC,  Daniel,  was  born  at  Geneva,  in  1652. 
His  father  being  professor  in  the  Greek  language,  in- 
structed him  in  the  rudiments  of  knowledge,  and  gave 
him  a taste  for  researches  into  antiquity.  He  after- 
ward studied  at  different  universities,  and  took  his  me- 
dical degree  at  Valence,  at  the  age  of  20.  Returning 
to  his  native  city,  he  soon  got  into  considerable  prac- 
tice ; which  he  at  length  relinquished  in  1704,  on  be- 
ing appointed  a member  of  the  council  of  state,  and 
that  he  might  complete  his  various  literary  under- 
takings, which  had  already  greatly  distinguished  him. 
His  death  occurred  in  1728.  He  had  published,  in  con- 
junction with  Mangets,  a 11  Bibliotheca  Anatomica,,r 
in  two  volumes,  1685.  But  his  most  celebrated  work- 
is  the  “ Histoire  de  la  M4d6cine,”  from  the  earliest 
times  to  that  of  Galen,  which  evinces  immense  erudi- 
tion. He  afterward  addeo  a plan  for  continuing  it  to 
the  middle  of  the  17th  century.  But  Dr.  Freind  has 
completed  this  part  of  the  task  on  a much  better  me- 
thod. Le  Clerc  also  published  an  account  of  certain 
worms  occurring  in  men  and  animals. 

LE  DRAN,  Henry  Francis,  was  born  at  Paris,  in 
1685,  and  educated  under  his  father,  who  had  acquired 
reputation  as  an  operator,  particularly  in  removing 
cancers  of  the  breast.  The  young  surgeon  turned  his 
attention  principally  to  lithotomy,  which  he  performed 
in  the  lateral  method,  and  made  some  valuable  im- 
provements; which  he  communicated  to  the  public  in 
1730,  giving  an  accurate  description  of  the  parts:  the 
work  was  favourably  received,  has  been  frequently 
reprinted,  and  translated  into  most  modern  languages. 
His  surgical  observations  contain  also  much  valuable 
practical  matter:  and  his  Treatise  on  Gun-shot 
Wounds  is  remarkable  for  the  bold  and  successful 
measures  which  he  adopted.  He  published  likewise  a 
Treatise  on  Operations,  another  called  Surgical  Con- 
sultations, and  sent  several  papers  of  considerable 
merit  to  the  academy  of  surgeons,  which  appear  in 
their  memoirs.  He  died  in  1770. 

LE'DUM.  (A  name  adopted  from  the  Greeks, 
whose  \tj6ov  is  generally  believed  to  be  a species  of 
Cistus.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin 
ntean  system.  Class  Decandria ; Order,  Jfoncgynia 


LEE 


. Lkdum  palustrk.  The  systematic  name  of  the 

Ilosmarimis  sylvestris,  and  Cistus  ledon  of  the  shops. 
The  plant  has  a bitter  subastringent  taste,  and  was 
formerly  used  in  Switzerland  in  the  place  of  hops.  Its 
medicinal  use  is  confined  to  the  Continent,  where  it  is 
occasionally  given  in  the  cure  of  hooping-cough,  sore 
throat,  dysentery,  and  exanthematous  diseases. 

[“  LEE,  Arthur,  M.  D.  was  a native  of  Virginia,  and 
brother  to  Richard  Henry  Lee  the  celebrated  patriot  of 
the  revolution.  Dr.  Lee  received  his  classical  educa- 
tion at  Edinburgh,  and  afterward  studied  medicine  in 
that  University.  As  soon  as  he  was  graduated  he  re- 
turned to  his  native  state,  and  settled  at  Williamsburgh, 
where  he  practised  medicine  for  several  years  ; but  af- 
terward abandoned  the  profession,  went  to  England, 
and  commenced  the  study  of  the  law  in  the  Temple. 

He  soon  after  entered  into  political  life,  and  rendered 
important  services  to  his  country  during  the  Revolu- 
tionary war.  To  the  abilities  of  the  statesman,  he  is 
said  to  have  united  the  acquisitions  of  the  scholar.  In 
the  year  1775,  Dr.  Lee  was  in  London  as  the  agent  of 
Virginia,  and  he  presented  in  August  the  second  petition 
to  the  king.  All  his  exertions  were  now  directed  to  the 
good  of  his  country.  He  was  appointed  minister  to 
France  in  1776;  and  l^e  was  tor  many  subsequent  years 
engaged  in  the  affairs  of  the  public  until  the  close  of 
lite,  which,  after  a short  illness,  took  place  December 
14th,  1792,  at  Urbanna,  in  Middlesex  county,  Virginia. 

He  was  a man  of  uniform  patriotism,  of  sound  un- 
derstanding, of  great  probity,  of  plain  manners  and 
strong  passions.  During  his  residence  in  England 
for  a number  of  years  he  was  indefatigable  in  his  exer- 
tions to  promote  the  interests  of  his  country.  He  was 
a member  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society.  He 
published  the  Monitor’s  Letters  in  vindication  of  the 
colonial  rights  in  1769;  Extracts  from  a letter  to  the 
President  of  Congress  in  answer  to  a libel  by  Silas 
Deane,  1780 ; and  observations  on  certain  commercial 
transactions  in  France  laid  before  Congress,  1780.” — 
Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

LEECH.  Uirudo.  A genus  of  insects  of  the  order 
Vermes.  The  body  moves  either  forward  or  back- 
ward. There  are  several  species,  principally  distin- 
guished by  their  colour;  but  that  most  known  to  me- 
dical men  is  the  hirudo  medicinalis , or  medicinal 
leech,  which  grows  to  the  length  of  two  or  three 
inches.  The  body  is  of  a blackish-brown  colour, 
marked  on  the  back  with  six  yellow  spots,  and  edged 
with  a yellow  line  on  each  side ; but  both  the  spots 
and  lines  grow  faint,  and  almost  disappear  at  some 
seasons.  The  head  is  smaller  than  the  tail,  which  fixes 
■tself  very  firmly  to  any  thing  the  creature  pleases.  It 
is  viviparoqp,  and  produces  but  one  young  one  at  a 
time,  which  is  in  the  month  of  July.  It  is  an  inhabitant 
of  clear  running  waters,  and  is  well  known  for  its  use 
in  bieeding.  The  species  most  nearly  approaching 
this,  and  which  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish,  is  the 
hirudo  sanguisuga,  or  horse-leech.  This  is  larger 
than  the  former ; its  skin  is  smooth  and  glossy  ; the 
body  is  depressed,  the  back  is  dusky ; and  the  belly  is 
of  a yellowish-green,  having  a yellow  lateral  margin. 
It  inhabits  stagnant  waters. 

The  leech’s  head  is  armed  with  a sharp  instrument 
that  makes  three  wounds  at  once.  They  are  three 
sharp  tubercles,  strong  enough  to  cut  through  the  skin 
of  a man,  or  even  of  an  ox,  or  horse.  The  mouth  is, 
as  it  were,  the  body  of  the  pump,  and  the  tongue,  or 
fleshy  nipple,  the  sucker.  By  the  working  of  this 
piece  of  mechanism,  the  blood  is  made  to  rise  up  to  the 
conduit  which  conveys  it  to  the  animal’s  stomach, 
which  is  a membranaceous  skin,  divided  into  twenty- 
four  small  cells.  The  blood  which  is  sucked  out  is 
there  preserved  for  several  months,  almost  without 
coagulating,  and  proves  a store  of  provision  for  the 
animal.  The  nutritious  parts,  absorbed  after  digestion 
by  animals,  need  not  in  this  to  be  disengaged  from  the 
heterogeneous  substances;  nor  indeed  is  there  an  anus 
discoverable  in  the  leech ; mere  transpiration  seems  to 
be  all  that  it  performs,  the  matter  fixing  on  the  surface 
of  the  body,  and  afterward  coming  off  in  small  threads. 
Of  this,  an  experiment  may  be  tried,  by  putting  a leech 
into  oil,  where  it  keeps  alive  for  several  days ; upon 
being  taken  out,  and  put  into  water,  there  appears  to 
loosen  from  its  body  a kind  of  slough,  shaped  like  the 
creature’s  body.  The  organ  of  respiration  though 
unascertained,  seems  to  be  situated  in  the  mouth  ; for 
if,  like  an  insect,  it  drew  breath  through  vent-holes,  it 


LEG 

would  not  subsist  in  oil,  as,  by  it,  these  would  be 

stopped  up. 

The  hirudo  medicinalis  is  the  only  species  used  in 
medicine ; being  applied  to  the  skin  in  order  to  draw 
off  blood.  With  this  view  they  are  employed  to  bleed 
young  children,  and  for  the  purposes  of  topical  bleeding, 
in  cases  of  inflammation,  fullness  or  pain.  They  may 
be  employed  in  every  case  where  topical  bleedings  are 
thought  necessary,  or  where  venesection  cannot  be 
performed.  If  the  leech  does  not  fasten,  a drop  of 
sugared  milk  is  put  on  the  spot  it  is  wished  to  fix  on; 
or  a little  blood  is  drawn  by  means  of  a slight  puncture, 
after  which  it  immediately  settles.  The  leech,  when 
fixed,  should  be  watched,  lest  it  should  find  its  way  into 
the  anus,  when  used  for  the  hemorrhoids,  or  penetrate 
into  the  oesophagus,  if  employed  to  draw  the  gums; 
otherwise  it  might  fix  upon  the  stomach,  or  intestines. 
In  such  a case,  the  best  and  quickest  remedy  is  to 
swallow  some  salt;  which  is  the  method  practised  to 
make  it  loose  its  hold,  when  it  sucks  longer  than  is 
intended.  Vegetable  or  volatile  alkali,  pepper,  or  acids, 
also  make  it  leave  the  part  on  which  it  was  applied. 
Cows  and  horses  have  been  known  to  receive  leeches, 
when  drinking,  into  the  throat;  and  the  usual  remedy 
is  to  force  down  some  salt,  which  makes. them  fall  off. 
If  it  is  intended  that  the  leech  shall  draw  a larger 
quantity  of  blood,  the  end  of  the  tail  is  cut  off;  and  it 
then  sucks  continually,  to  make  up  the  loss  it  sustains. 
The  discharge  occasioned  by  the  puncture  of  a leech 
after  the  animal  falls  off,  is  usually  of  more  service 
than  the  process  itself.  When  too  abundant,  itis  easily 
stopped  w ith  biandy,  vinegar,  or  other  styptics,  or  with 
a compress  of  dry  linen  rags,  bound  strongly  on  the 
bleeding  orifice.  They  are  said  to  be  very  restless  be- 
fore a change  of  weather,  if  confined  in  glasses,  and  to 
fix  themselves  above  the  water  on  the  approach  of  a 
fine  day. 

As  these  little  animals  are  depended  on  for  the  re- 
moval of  very  dangerous  diseases,  and  as  they  often 
seem  capriciously  determined  to  resist  the  endeavours 
made  to  cause  them  to  adhere,  the  following  directions 
arc  added,  by  which  their  assistance  may,  with  more 
certainty,  be  obtained. 

The  introducing  a hand,  to  winch  any  ill-flavoured 
medicine  adheres,  into  the  water  in  which  they  are 
kept,  w ill  be  often  sufficient  to  deprive  them  of  life ; 
the  application  of  a small  quantity  of  any  saline  matter 
to  their  skin,  immediately  occasions  the  expulsion  of 
the  contents  of  their  stomach ; and  w'hat  is  most  to  our 
purpose,  the  least  flavour  of  any  medicament  that  has 
been  applied  remaining  on  the  skin,  or  even  the  accu- 
mulation of  the  matter  of  perspiration,  will  prevent 
them  from  fastening.  The  skin  should,  therefore,  pre- 
vious to  their  application,  be  very  carefully  cleansed 
from  any  foulness,  and  moistened  w ith  a little  milk. 
The  method  of  applying  them  is  by  retaining  them  to 
the  skin  by  a small  wine-glass,  or  the  bottom  of  a large 
pill-box  when  .hey  will,  in  general,  in  a little  time, 
fasten  themselves  to  the  skin.  On  their  removal,  the 
rejection  of  the  blood  they  have  drawn  may  be  ob- 
tained by  the  application  of  salt  externally  : but  it  is 
to  be  remarked,  that  a few  grains  of  salt  are  sufficient 
for  this  purpose  ; and  that  covering  them  with  it,  as  is 
sometimes  done,  generally  destroys  them. 

LEEK.  See  A Ilium  porrum. 

Le'gna.  (From  Xsyvov,  a fringed  edge.)  The  ex 
tremities  of  the  pudenda  muliebria. 

LEGU'MEN.  (From  lego , to  gather:  so  called 
because  they  are  usually  gathered  by  the  hand.)  A 
legume.  A peculiar  solitary  fruit  of  the  pea  Kind 
formed  of  two  oblong  valves,  without  any  longitudina. 
partition,  and  bearing  the  seeds  along  one  of  its  mar- 
gins only. 

From  the  figure,  the  legumen  is  called, 

1.  Teres , round  ; as  in  I’haseolus  radialus. 

2.  Lineare ; as  in  Phaseolus  vexillatus. 

3.  Compressum;  as  in  Pisum  sativum. 

4.  Capitatum ; as  in  Phaseolus  mvngo. 

5.  Aciniforme;  as  in  Phaseolus  lunatus. 

6.  Ovatum ; as  in  Lotus  hirsutus , and  grcecvs. 

7.  luflatum,  a cavity  filled  with  air;  as  in  Astraga- 
lus vesirarius , and  exscapus. 

8.  Cochlcatum , spiral ; as  in  Medicago  polymorphoj 
and  marina. 

9.  Lunatum ; as  in  Medicago  falcata. 

10.  Obcordatum ; as  in  Polygala. 

11.  Contortum;  as  in  Medicago  saliva. 


LEM 


LEO 


Quadrangulatum ; as  in  Dolychos  tetragonolo- 

bus. 

13.  Canalicutatum , the  upper  suture  deeply  hollowed ; 
as  in  Lathyrus  sativus. 

14.  Jsthmis  interceptum ; as  in  Coronilla. 

15.  Eckinatum ; as  in  Glycyrrhiza  echinata. 

16.  Rhombeum ; as  in  Cicer  arietinum. 

From  its  insertion, 

1.  Pendulum ; as  in  Phaseolus  vulgaris. 

2.  Pedicellatum ; as  in  Viscia  scepium. 

From  its-substance, 

1.  Membranaceum ; as  in  Phaseolus  vulgaris. 

2.  Carnosum ; as  in  Cynometra  caulijlora. 

3.  Coriaceum,  dry  and  fleshy;  as  in  Ceratonia  sili- 
qua,  and  Lupinus. 

From  the  number  of  seeds, 

1.  Monospermum;  as  in  Medicago  lupulina. 

2.  Dispermum ; as  in  Glycine  tomentosa. 

3.  Trispermum  ; as  in  Trifolium  reflexum. 

4.  Tetraspermum  ; as  in  Trifolium  repens. 

5.  Polyspermum ; as  in  Trifolium  lupinaster. 

Legumine  is  a particular  vegetable  principle,  ob- 
tained by  M.  H.  Braconnot,  from  pease.  When  well 
washed  it  resembled  paste  ; exposed  to  heat  it  liquefied 
without  coagulating.  Iodine,  mixed  with  it  in  water, 
appeared  to  dissolve.  It  was  insoluble  in  boiling  water, 
and  produced  a deep  blue  colour  with  starch.” — Web. 
Man.  of  Chcm.  A.] 

LEGUMINOUS.  Appertaining  to  a legume. 

Lei'chen.  See  Lichen. 

Leiente'ria.  See  Lienteria. 

LEIPOPSY'CHIA.  (From  \entw,  to  leave,  and 
zpvxVi  hfe-,)  A swoon.  See  Syncope. 

Leipopy'ria.  (From  A«7rw,  to  leave,  and  irvp,  heat.) 
An  ardent  fever,  in  which  the  internal  parts  are  much 
heated,  while  the  external  parts  are  cold. 

LEIPOTH  Y'MIA.  (From  Aftirw,  to  leave,  and  Svpos, 
the  mind.)  See  Lipothymia. 

Le'mk.  (From  A a,  much,  and  pxna,  to  wink.)  A 
constant  winking  of  the  eyes. 

LEMERY,  Nicholas,  was  born  at  Rouen  in  1645, 
and  brought  up  to  the  business  of  pharmacy.  He  went 
to  Paris  at  the  age  of  21  to  improve  himself,  particu- 
larly in  chemistry ; and  then  travelled  for  some  years  : 
after  which,  in  1672,  he  began  to  give  chemical  lectures 
at  Paris,  and  became  very  popular.  Three  years  after 
he  published  his  “ Cours  de  Chymie,”  which  passed 
rapidly  through  numerous  editions;  and  so  great  was 
his  reputation,  that  he  acquired  a fortune  by  the  sale 
of  his  preparations,  some  of  which  he  kept  secret.  In 
1681,  he  was  interdicted  from  lecturing  on  account  of 
his  religious  principles,  and  took  shelter  in  this  country ; 
hut  shortly  after  obtained  the  degree  of  doctor  of  phy- 
sic at  Caen,  and  got  considerable  practice  in  the  French 
metropolis;  the  revocation  of  the  edict  of  Nantes, 
however,  forbidding  this  employment  also,  he  was  re- 
duced to  such  difficulties,  that  he  at  length  adopted  the 
Catholic  religion.  He  then  flourished  again,  and  in 
1697  published  his  “ Pharmacop^e  Universelle,”  fol- 
lowed the  year  after  by  his  “ Dictionnaire  Universel 
des  Drogues  simples,”  which,  though  with  many  im- 
perfections, proved  of  considerable  utility.  On  the 
re-establishment  of  the  Academy  of  Sciences,  he  was 
made  associate  chemist,  and  read  before  that  body  his 
papers  on  antimony,  which  were  printed  in  1707.  He 
died  in  1715. 

LEMERY,  Louts,  son  of  the  preceding,  was  born  at 
Paris  in  1677,  and  intended  for  the  law,  but  adopted 
such  a partiality  for  his  father’s  pursuits,  that  he  was 
allowed  to  indulge  it,  and  graduated  in  his  native  city 
in  1696.  Two  years  after,  he  was  admitted  into  the 
Academy  of  Sciences ; and  in  1708  began  to  lecture  on 
chemistry,  in  the  royal  garden  : he  was  appointed 
physician  to  the  lIAtel  Dieu  in  1710;  and  twelve  years 
after  purchased  the  office  of  King’s  physician,  which 
soon  led  him  to  the  appointment  of  consulting  physician 
to  the  Queen  of  Spain.  In  1731  he  was  appointed 
professor  of  chemistry  in  the  royal  garden  ; and  subse- 
quently communicated  several  papers  to  the  Academy 
of  Sciences,  which  appeared  in  their  Memoirs.  He 
published  also  “Traits  des  Aliments,”  which  was  fre- 
quently reprinted ; “ A Dissertation  on  the  Nourishment 
of  Bones,  refuting  the  Idea  of  its  being  effected  by  the 
Marrow  ; and  “ Three  Letters  on  the  Generation  of 
Worms.”  He  died  in  1743. 

LemithOcho'rton.  See  CoralUna  corsicana. 

Le  mma.  (From  Ae7rw,  to  decorticate.) 


1.  The  bark  of  a tree. 

2.  The  skin. 

Le'mnius.  (From  Lemnos , whence  it  is  brought.) 
See  Bole. 

LEMON.  See  Citrus. 

Lemon  scurvy-grass.  See  Cochlearia  officinalis. 

LENIE'NTIA.  (From  lenio,  to  assuage.)  Medi- 
cines which  abate  irritation. 

LENITIVE.  (From  lenis , gentle.)  Medicines  which 
gently  palliate  diseases.  A gentle  purgative. 

Lenitive  electuary.  A preparation  composed  chiefly 
of  senna  and  some  aromatics,  with  the  pulp  of  tama- 
rinds. See  Confectio  sennce. 

LENS.  (A  lentore ; from  its  glutinous  quality.)  1 
The  lentil.  See  Ervum  lens. 

2.  See  Crystalline  lens. 

LENTICULA.  (Dim.  of  lens,  a lentil.) 

1.  A smaller  sort  of  lentil. 

2.  A freckle,  or  small  pustule,  resembling  the  seeds 
of  lentil. 

LENTICULAR.  (Lenticularis  ; from  lenticulaire, 
doubly  convex.)  A surgical  instrument  employed  for 
removing  the  jagged  particles  of  bone  from  the  edge  of 
the  perforation  made  in  the  cranium  with  the  trephine.* 

LENTICULA'RIA.  (From  lenticula.)  A species 
of  lentil. 

LENTI'GO.  (From  lens,  a lentil : so  named  from 
its  likeness  to  lentil-seeds.)  A freckle  on  the  skin. 

LENTIL.  An  annual  vegetable  of  the  pulse  kind, 
much  used  for  improving  the  flavour  of  soups.  See 
Ervum  lens. 

LENTI'SCUS.  (From  lentesco,  to  become  clammy ; 
so  called  from  the  gumminess  of  its  juice.)  The  mas- 
tich-tree. 

LE'NTOR.  (From  lentus,  clammy.)  A viscidity 
to  siziness  of  any  fluid. 

LEONI'NUS.  (From  leo,  the  lion.)  An  epithet  of 
that  sort  of  leprosy  called  leontiasis. 

LEONTI'ASIS.  (From  Aewv,  a lion:  so  called  be- 
cause it  is  said  lions  are  subject  to  it.)  A species  of 
leprosy  resembling  the  elephantiasis. 

LEO'NTODON.  (From  A twv,  the  lion,  and  odovs,  a 
tooth:  so  called  from  its  supposed  resemblance.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linneean  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polygamia  cequalis.  The 
dandelion. 

Leontodon  taraxacum.  Dens  leonis.  The  dan- 
delion or  pissabed.  Leontodon — caule  squamis  inf  erne 
reflexis , foliis  runcinatis,  denticulatis,  Icevibus,  of 
Linnteus.  Theyoung  leavesof  this  plant  in  a blanched 
state  have  the  taste  of  endive,  and  make  an  excellent 
addition  to  those  plants  eaten  early  in  the  spring  as 
salads  ; and  Murray  informs  us,  that  at  GoSttingin,  the 
roots  are  roasted  and  substituted  for  coffee  by  the 
poorer  inhabitants,  who  find  that  an  infusion  prepared 
in  this  way,  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  that  of 
the  coffee-berry.  The  expressed  juice  of  dandelion  is 
bitter  and  somewhat  acrid;  but  that  of  the  root  is  bit- 
terer, and  possesses  more  medicinal  power  than  any 
other  part  of  the  plant.  It  has  been  long  in  repute  as  a 
detergent  and  aperient,  and  its  diuretic  effects  may  be 
inferred  from  the  vulgar  name  it  bears  in  most  of  the 
European  languages,  quasi  lecii  minga  et  urinaria 
herba  dicitur ; and  there  are  various  proofs  of  its 
efficacy  in  jaundice,  dropsy,  consumption,  and  some 
cutaneous  disorders.  The  leaves,  roots,  flowers,  stalks, 
and  juice  of  dandelion,  have  all  been  separately 
employed  for  medical  purposes,  and  seem  to  differ 
rather  in  degrde  of  strength  than  in  any  essential  pro- 
perty ; therefore  the  expressed  juice,  or  a strong  decoc- 
tion of  the  roots  have  most  commonly  been  prescribed, 
from  one  ounce  to  four,  two  or  three  times  a-day.  The 
plant  should  be  always  used  fresh  ; even  extracts  pre- 
pared from  it  appear  to  lose  much  of  their  power  by 
keeping. 

LEONTOPO'DIUM.  (From  A cwv,  a lion,  and  novs, 
a foot  : so  named  from  its  supposed  resemblance.)  The 
herb  lion’s  foot,  or  Filago  leontopodium. 

LEONU'RUS.  (From  Acwv,  a lion,  and  ovpa,  a tail: 
so  named  from  its  likeness.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia  ; 
Order,  Gymnospermia.  Lion’s  tail. 

2.  The  name,  in  some  pharmacopoeias,  for  the  lion’s 
tail..  See  Leonurus  cardiaca. 

Leonurus  cardiaca.  The  mother-wort.  Jlgri- 
palma  gallis;  Marrubium ; Cardiaca  crisp  a ; Leo 
nurus— foliis  caulinis  lanceolatis,  trilobis,  ofLinnaus 

17 


LLP 


LEU 


The  leaves  of  this  plant  have  a disagreeable  smell  and 
a bitter  taste,  and  are  said  to  be  serviceable  in  disorders 
of  the  stomachs  of  children,  to  promote  the  uterine  dis- 
charge, and  to  allay  palpitation  of  the  heart. 

Leopard's  bane.  See  Arnica  montana. 

LEPIDIUM.  (From  Asms,  a scale : so  named  from 
its  supposed  usefulness  in  cleansing  the  skin  from 
scales  and  impurities.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linrueau  system.  Class  Tetradynamia  ; Order, 
Siliculosa. 

Lepidium  iberis.  Iberis;  Cardamantica.  Scia- 
tica cresses.  This  plant  possesses  a warm,  penetrating, 
pungent  taste,  like  unto  other  cresses,  and  is  recom- 
mended as  an, antiscorbutic,  antiseptic,  and  stomachic. 

Lepidium  sativum.  Nasturtium  hortense.  Dit- 
tander.  This  plant  possesses  warm,  nervine,  and 
stimulating  qualities,  and  is  given  as  an  antiscorbutic 
antiseptic,  and  stomachic,  especially  by  the  lower  \ 
orders. 

Lepidosarco'ma.  (From  A eni$,  a scale,  and  crap|, 
flesh.)  A scaly  tumour. 

LEPIDOSES.  (From  A emgSoSi  squama , a scale.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  Class,  Eccritica; 
Order,  Jlcrotica;  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Scale-skin. 
It  contains  four  species,  Lepidosis  pityriasis,  lepri- 
asis , psoriasis,  icthyasis. 

LE'PISMA.  (From  Xcm%u>,  to  decorticate.)  Decor- 
tication. A peeling  oft' of  the  skin. 

LEPORINUS.  (From  lepus , a hare.)  Leporine  or 
hare-like.  Applied  to  some  malformations,  diseases, 
and  parts,  from  their  resemblance  to  labium  lepori- 
num,  &c. 

LE'PRA.  (From  Xeirpogi  scaber , vel  asper  ex  squam- 
v latis  decedentibus  ; named  from  its  appearance.)  The 
leprosy.  A disease  in  the  class  Cachexies , and  order 
Impetigincs,  of  Cullen.  Dr.  Willan  describes  this  dis- 
ease as  characterized  by  scaly  patches,  of  different 
sizes,  but  having  always  nearly  a circular  form.  In 
this  country,  three  varieties  of  the  disease  are  observed, 
which  he  has  described  under  the  names  of  Lepra  vul- 
garis, Lepra  alphos , Lepra  nigricans. 

1.  The  'Lepra  vulgaris , exhibits  first  small  distinct 
elevations  of  the  cuticle,  which  are  reddish  and  shin- 
ing, but  never  contain  any  fluid ; these  patches  con- 
tinue to  enlarge  gradually,  till  they  nearly  equal  the 
dimensions  of  a crown-piece.  They  have  always  an 
orbicular,  or  oval  form ; are  covered  with  dry  scales, 
and  surrounded  by  a red  border.  The  scales  accumu- 
late on  them,  so  as  to  form  a thick  prominent  crust, 
which  is  quickly  reproduced,  whether  it  fall  off  spon- 
taneously, or  may  have  been  forcibly  detached.  This 
species  of  lepra  sometimes  appears  first  at  the  elbow,  or 
on  the  forearm ; but  more  generally  about  the  knee.  In 
the  latter  case,  the  primary  patch  forms  immediately 
below  the  patella ; within  a few  weeks,  several  other 
scaly  circles  appear  along  the  fore  part  of  the  leg  and 
thigh,  increasing  by  degrees  till  they  come  nearly  into 
contact.  The  disease  is  then  often  stationary  for  a 
considerable  length  of  time.  If  it  advance  farther,  the 
progress  is  towards  the  hip  and  loins;  afterward  to 
the  sides,  back,  and  shoulders,  and  about  the  same 
time  to  the  arms  and  hands.  In  the  greater  number  of 
eases,  the  hairy  scalp  is  the  part  last  affected  ; although 
the  circles  formed  on  it  remain  for  some  time  distinct,  yet 
they  finally  unite,  and  cover  the  whole  surface  on  which 
the  hair  grows  with  a white  scaly  incrustation.  This 
appearance  is  attended,  more  especially  in  hot  weather,4 
with  a troublesome  itching,  and  with  a watery  dis- 
charge for  several  hours,  when  any  portion  of  the  crust 
is  detached,  which  takes  place  from  very  slight  im- 
pressions. The  pubes  in  adults  is  sometimes  affected 
iu  the  same  manner  as  the  head  : and  if  the  subject  be 
a female,  there  is  usually  an  internal  pruritus  pudendi. 
In  some  cases  of  the  disorder,  the  nails,  both  of  the 
fingers  and  toes,  are  thickened,  and  deeply  indented 
longitudinally.  When  the  lepra  extends  universally,  it 
becomes  highly  disgusting  in  its  appearance,  and  incon- 
venient from  the  stiffness  and  torpor  occasioned  by  it 
in  the  limbs.  The  disease,  however,  even  in  this  ad- 
vanced stage,  is  seldom  disposed  to  terminate  sponta- 
neously. It  continues  nearly  in  the  same  state  for  seve- 
ral years,  or  sometimes  during  the  whole  life  of  the 
person  affected,  not  being  apparently  connected  with 
any  disorder  of  the  constitution. 

2.  Lepra  alphos.  The  scaly  patches  in  the  alphos 
are  smaller  than  those  of  the  lepra  vulgaris,  and  also 
differ  from  them  in  having  their  central  parts  depressed 

hi 


or  indented.  This  disorder  usually  begins  about  thi» 
elbow,  with  distinct,  eminent  asperities,  of  a dull  red 
colour,  and  not  much  longer  than  papillae.  These,  in  d 
short  time,  dilate  to  nearly  the  size  of  a silver  penny. 
Two  or  three  days  afterward,  the  central  part  of  them 
suffers  a depression,  within  which  small  white  pow- 
dery scales  may  be  observed.  The  surrounding  border, 
however,  still  continues  to  be  raised,  but  retains  the 
same  size,  and  the  same  red  colour  as  at  first.  The 
whole  of  the  forearm,  and  sometimes  the  back  of  the 
hand,  is  spotted  with  similar  patches : they  seldom 
become  confluent,  excepting  round  the  elbow,  which, 
in  that  case,  is  covered  with  a uniform  crust.  This  af 
fection  appears  in  the  same  manner  upon  the  joint  of 
the  knee,  but  without  spreading  far  along  the  thigh  or 
leg.  Dr.  Willan  has  seldom  seen  it  on  the  trunk  of 
the  body,  and  never  on  the  face.  It  is  a disease  of 
long  duration,  and  not  less  difficult  to  cure  than  the 
foregoing  species  of  lepra : even  when  the  scaly  patches 
have  been  removed  by  persevering  in  the  use  of  suita- 
ble applications,  the  cuticle  still  remains  red,  tender,  and 
brittle,  very  slowly  recovering  its  usual  texture.  The 
alphos,  as  above  described,  frequently  occurs  in  this 
country. 

3.  The  Lepra  nigricans  differs  little  from  the  lepra 
vulgaris,  as  to  its  form  and  distribution.  The  most  strik- 
ing difference  is  in  the  colour  of  the  patches,  which  are 
dark  and  livid:  They  appear  first  on  the  legs  and  fore- 
arms, extending  afterward  to  the  thighs,  loins,  neck, 
and  hands.  Their  central  part  is  not  depressed,  as  in 
the  alphos.  They  are  somewhatsmaller  in  size  than  the 
patches  of  the  lepra  vulgaris,  and  not  only  is  the  bordet 
livid  or  purplish,  but  the  livid  colour  of  the  base  like- 
wise appears  through  the  scaly  iifcrustation,  which  is 
seldom  very  thick.  It  is  further  to  be  observed,  that 
the  scales  are  more  easily  detached  than  in  the  other 
forms  of  lepra,  and  that  the  surface  remains  longer  ex- 
coriated, discharging  lymph,  often  with  an  intermix- 
ture of  blood,  till  a new  incrustation  forms,  which  is 
usually  hard,  brittle,  and  irregular.  The  lepra  nigri- 
cans, affects  persons  whose  occupation  is  attended 
with  much  fatigue,  and  exposes  them  to  cold  or  damp, 
and  to  a precarious  or  improper  mode  of  diet,  as  sol- 
diers, brewers,  labourers,  butchers,  stage-coachmen, 
scullermen,  &c.;  some  women  are  also  liable  to  it,  who 
are  habituated  to  poor  living  and  constant  hard  labour. 

Lepra  gr^corum.  The  lepra  vulgaris,  alphos,  and 
nigricans  have  all  been  so  denominated.  See  Lepra. 

LEPRIASIS.  (From  Xenpog,  scaber.)  The  specific 
name  of  a species  of  leprosis  in  Good’s  Nosology,  which 
embraces  the  several  kinds  of  leprosy. 

LEPROSY.  See  Lepra. 

Leptu'ntica.  (From  Xenros,  thin.)  Attenuating 
medicines. 

Lkpty'smus.  (From  Xenrog,  slender.)  Attenua- 
tion, or  the  making  a substance  less  solid. 

LEPUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  animals  of  the 
order  Glires , in  the  class  Mammalia.  The  hare. 

Lepus  cu.niculus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
rabbit,  the  flesh  of  which,  when  young  and  tender,  is 
easy  of  digestion. 

Lepus  timidus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  com- 
mon hare  ; the  flesh  of  which  is  considered  as  a deli- 
cacy, and  easy  of  digestion. 

Le'ros.  (From  Xyoeu),  to  trifle.)  A slight  de- 
lirium. 

LETHARGY.  (Lethargus ; from  Xydp,  forgetful- 
ness : so  called  because  with  it  the  person  is  forgetful.) 
A heavy  and  constant  sleep,  with  scarcely  any  inter- 
vals of  waking ; when  awakened,  the  person  answers, 
but  ignorant  or  forgetful  of  what  ne  said,  immediately 
sinks  into  the  same  state  of  sleep.  It  is  considered  as 
an  imperfect  apoplexy,  and  is  mostly  symptomatic. 

Lethe'a.  The  name  of  the  poppy 

LETTUCE.  See  Lactuca. 

LEUCACA'NTHA.  (From  Xevnos,  white,  and 
aicavQa , a thorn : so  named  from  its  white  blossom.) 
The  cotton-thistle. 

LEUCA' NTHEMUM.  (From  XevKos,  white,  and 
avflepoi,  a flower:  so  called  from  its  white  floret.)  See 
C/i rys a n them.um  le ucanthemum. 

LEUCASMUS.  (AevKaopos,  whiteness:  so  named 
from  its  appearance.)  The  specific  name,  Epichrosis 
leucasmus , veal  skin,  in  Good’s  Nosology,  for  the  V t it 
ligo  of  Willan. 

LEUCE.  (Acvkos,  white.)  A species  of  leprosy 

See  Jllphus. 


LEU 


LEV 


LEUCELE'CTRUM.  (From  Xcvkos , white,  and 
tjXeKTpov,  amber.)  White  amber. 

LEUCINE.  (From  Xevkos,  white  ; from  its  appear- 
ance.) The  name  given  by  Braconnot  to  a white 
pulverulent  matter  obtained  by  digesting  equal  parts 
of  beef  fibre  and  sulphuric  acid  together,  and  after 
separating  the  fat,  diluting  the  acid  mixture,  and  satu- 
rating with  chalk,  filtering  and  evaporating.  A sub- 
stance tasting  like  ozmazome  is  thus  procured,  which 
is  to  be  boiled  in  different  portions  of  alkohol.  The 
alkoholic  solutions,  on  cooling,  deposite  the  whjte  pul- 
verulent matter,  or  leucine. 

Leucola'chanum.  (From  Xcvkos,  white,  and  Aa%a- 
vov,  an  herb : so  named  from  its  colour.)  The  Valeriana 
sylvestris. 

LEUCO'MA.  (From  Xeuaoj,  white.)  Leucomaand 
albugo  are  often  used  synonymously,  to  denote  a white 
opacity  of  the  cornea  of  the  eye.  Both  of  them,  ac- 
cording to  Scarpa*  are  essentially  different  from  the 
nebula,  for  they  are  not  the  consequence  of  chronic 
ophthalmy,  attended  with  varicose  veins,  and  an  effu- 
sion of  a milky  serum  into  the  texture  of  the  delicate 
continuation  of  the  conjunctiva  over  the  cornea,  but 
are  the  result  of  violent  acute  ophthalmy.  In  this 
state,  a dense  coagulating  lymph  is  extra vasated  from 
the  arteries;  sometimes  superficially,  at  other  times 
deeply,  into  the  substance  of  the  cornea.  On  other 
occasions,  the  disease  consists  of  a firm  callous  cicatrix 
on  this  membrane,  the  effect  of  an  ulcer,  or  wound, 
with  loss  of  substance.  The  term  albugo , strictly 
belongs  to  the  first  form  of  the  disease ; leucoma,  to  the 
last,  more  particularly  when  the  opacity  occupies  the 
whole,  or  the  chief  part,  of  the  cornea. 

LEUCONYMPILE'A.  (From  Xev/cof,  white,  and 
vvn<baia , the  water-lily.)  See  Nymphaia  alba. 

LEUCOPHA'GIUM.  (From  Xcvkos,  white,  and 
w,  to  eat.)  A medicated  white  food. 
EUCOPHLEGMA'SIA.  (From  Xevkos, white,  and 
QXtypa,  phlegm.)  Leuco-phlegmatic.  A tendency  in 
the  system  to  a dropsical  state  known  by  a pale  colour 
of  the  skin,  a flabby  condition  of  the  solids,  and  a re- 
dundancy of  serum  in  the  blood. 

LEUCOTIPER.  (From  Xcvkos,  white,  and  -kett epi, 
pepper.)  White  pepper.  See  Piper  nigrum. 

LEUCORRHCE'A.  (From  Xevkos,  white,  and  pew, 
to  flow.)  Fluor  albus.  The  whites.  A secretion  of 
whitish  or  milky  mucus  from  the  vagina  of  women, 
arising  from  debility  and  not  from  the  venereal  virus. 
This  disease  is  marked  by  the  discharge  of  a thin  white 
or  yellow  matter  from  the  uterus  and  vagina,  attended 
likewise  with  some  degree  of  foetor,  smarting  in  making 
water,  pains  in  the  back  and  loins,  anorexia  and  atro- 
phy. In  some  cases,  the  discharge  is  of  so  acrid  a 
nature,  as  to  produce  effects  on  those  who  are  con- 
nected with  the  woman,  somewhat  similar  to  venereal 
matter,  giving  rise  to  excoriations  about  the  glans  penis 
and  prarputium,  and  occasioning  a weeping  from  the 
urethra. 

To  distinguish  leucorrhoea  from  gonorrhoea,  it  will 
be  very  necessary  to  attend  to  the  symptoms.  In  the 
latter  the  running  is  constant,  but  in  a small  quantity ; 
there  is  much  ardor  urinae,  itching  of  the  pudenda, 
swelling  of  the  labia,  increased  inclination  to  venery, 
and  very  frequently  an  enlargement  of  the  glands  in  the 
groin ; whereas,  in  the  former  the  discharge  is  irregular, 
and  in  considerable  quantities,  and  is  neither  preceded 
by,  nor  accompanied  with,  any  inflammatory  affection 
of  the  pudenda. 

Immoderate  coition,  injury  done  to  the  parts  by  diffi- 
cult and  tedious  labours,  frequent  miscarriages,  immo- 
derate flowings  of  the  menses,  profuse  evacuations, 
poor  diet,  an  abuse  of  tea,  and  other  causes,  giving 
rise  to  general  debility,  or  to  a laxity  of  the  parts  more 
immediately  concerned,  are  those  which  usually  pro- 
duce the  whites,  vulgarly  so  called,  from  the  discharge 
being  commonly  of  a milky  white  colour. 

Fluor  albus,  in  some  cases,  indicates  that  there  is  a 
disposition  to  disease  in  the  uterus,  or  parts  connected 
with  it,  especially  where  the  quantity  of  the  discharge 
is  very  copious,  and  its  quality  highly  acrimonious.  By 
some  the  disease  has  been  considered  as  never  arising 
from  debility  of  the  system,  but  as  being  always  a 
primary  affection  of  the  uterus.  Delicate  women, 
with  lax  fibres,  who  remove  from  a cold  climate  to  a 
warm  one,  are  very  apt  to  be  attacked  with  it,  without 
the  parts  having  previously  sustained  any  kind  of 
injury 


The  disease  shows  itself  by  an  irregular  discharge 
from  the  uterus  and  vagina  of  a fluid  which,  in  differ 
ent  women,  varies  much  in  colour,  being  either  of  a 
white,  green,  yellow,  or  brown  hue.  In  the  beginning, 
it  is,  however,  most  usually  white  and  pellucid,  aud  ill 
the  progress  of  the  complaint  acquires  the  various  dis- 
colorations, and  different  degrees  of  acrimony,  from 
whence  proceeds  a slight  degree  of  smarting  in  making 
water.  Besides  the  discharge,  the  patient  is  frequently 
afflicted  with  severe  and  constant  pains  in  the  back  and 
loins,  loss  of  strength,  failure  of  appetite,  dejection  of 
spirits,  paleness  of  the  countenance,  chilliness,  and 
languor.  AVhere  the  disease  has  been  of  long  con- 
tinuance, and  very  severe,  a slow  fever,  attended  with 
difficult  respiration,  palpitations,  faintings,  and  swell- 
ings of  the  lower  extremities,  often  ensues. 

A perfect  removal  of  the  disorder  will  at  all  times  be 
a difficult  matter  to  procure ; but  it  will  be  much  more 
so  in  cases  of  long  standing,  and  where  the  discharge 
is  accompanied  with  a high  degree  of  acrimony.  In 
these  cases,  many  disorders,  such  as  prolapsus  uteri, 
ulcerations  of  the  organ,  atrophy,  and  dropsy,  are  apt 
to  take  place,  which  in  the  end  prove  fatal. 

Where  the  disease  terminates  in  death,  the  internal 
surface  of  the  uterus  appears,  on  dissection,  to  be  pale, 
flabby,  and  relaxed  ; and  where  organic  affections  have 
arisen,  much  the  same  appearances  are  to  be  met  with 
as  have  been  noticed  under  the  head  of  menorrhagia. 

LEUCO'RRHOIS.  (From  Xevkos,  white,  and  pew, 
to  flow.)  A discharge  of  mucus  from  the  urethra  01 
vagina. 

LEVA'TOR.  (From  levo,  to  lift  up.)  A muscle, 
the  office  of  which  is  to  lift  up  the  part  to  which  it  is 
attached. 

Levator  anguli  oris.  Abducens  labiorum , of 
Spigelius ; Elevator  labiorum  communis , of  Douglas ; 
Caniuus,  of  Winslow  ; and  Sus  maziilo  labial , of  Du 
mas.  A muscle  situated  above  the  mouth,  which  draws 
the  corner  of  the  mouth  upwards,  and  makes  that  part 
of  the  cheek  opposite  to  the  chin  prominent,  as  in 
smiling.  It  arises  thin  and  fleshy  from  the  hollow  of 
the  superior  maxillary  bone,  between  the  root  of  the 
socket  of  the  first  grinder  and  the  foramen  infra  orbita- 
rium,  and  is  inserted  into  the  angle  of  the  mouth  and 
under  lip,  where  it  joins  with  its  antagonist. 

Levator  ani.  Levator  magnus , scu  interims , of 
Douiilas;  Pubo  coccigi  annul  air  e,  of  Dumas.  A mus- 
cle of  the  rectum.  It  arises  from  the  os  pubis,  within 
the  pelvis,  as  far  up  as  the  upper  edge  of  the  foramen 
thyroideum,  and  joining  of  the  os  pubis  with  the  os 
ischium,  from  the  thin  tendinous  membrane  that  covers 
the  obturator  interims  and  coccygeeus  muscles,  aud  from 
the  spinous  process  of  the  ischium.  From  these  origins 
all  round  the  inside  of  the  pelvis,  its  fibres  run  down 
like  rays  from  the  circumference  to  a centre,  to  be 
inserted  into  the  sphincter  ani,  acceleratores  unnre. 
and  anterior  part  of  the  two  last  bones  of  the  os  coc- 
cygis,  surrounding  the  extremity  of  the  rectum,  neck 
of  the  bladder,  prostrate  gland,  and  part  of  the  vesi- 
cuIeb  semiriales.  Its  fibres,  joining  with  those  of  its 
fellow,  form  a funnel-shaped  hole,  that  draws  the  rec- 
tum upwards  after  the  evacuation  of  the  fieces,  and 
assists  in  shut|jng  it.  The  levatores  ani  also  sustain 
the  contents  of  the  pelvis,  and  assist  in  ejecting  the 
semen,  urine, "and  contents  of  the  rectum,  and  perhaps, 
by  pressing  upon  the  veins,  contribute  greatly  to  the 
erection  of  the  penis. 

Levator  labii  inferioris.  A muscle  of  the  mouth 
situated  below  the  lips.  Levator  menli , of  Albinus. 
Incisivus  inferior , of  Winslow.  Elevator  labii  infer 
rioris  proprius , of  Douglas.  It  arises  from  the  lower 
jaw,  at  the  roots  of  the  alveoli  of  two  incisor  teeth  and 
the  cuspidatus,  and  is  inserted  into  the  under  lip  and 
skin  of  the  chin. 

Levator  labii  superioris  aljeque  nasi.  Elevator 
labii  superioris  proprius , of  Douglas ; Incisivus  late- 
ralis et  pyramidalis,  of  Winslow.  A muscle  of  the 
mouth  and  lips,  that  raises  the  upper  lip  towards  the 
orbit,  and  a littlo-outwards ; it  serves  also  to  draw  the 
skin  of  the  nose  upwards  and  outwards,  by  which  the 
nostril  is  dilated.  It  arises  by  two  distinct  origins ; the 
first,  broad  and  fleshy,  from  the  external  part  of  the 
orbitar  process  of  the  superior  maxillary  bone,  irnme 
diately  above  the  foramen  infra  orbitariuin ; the  second, 
from  the  nasal  process  of  the  superior  maxillary  bone, 
where  it  joins  the  os  frontis.  The  first  portion  is  in 
serted  into  the  upper  lip  and  orbicularis  muscle,  the 


I i 3 


LIB 


LIC 


second  into  the  upper  lip  and  outer  part  of  the  ala 
nasi. 

Levator  labii  suferioris  proprius.  Musculus 
incisivus.  A muscle  of  the  upper  lip.  It  arises  under 
the  edge  of  the  orbit,  and  is  inserted  into  the  middle  of 
the  lip. 

Levator  oculi.  See  Rectus  superior  oculi. 

Levator  palati.  A muscle  situated  between  the 
lower  jaw  and  the  os  hyoides  laterally.  Levator 
palati  mollis , of  Albinus;  Petrosalpingo-staphilinus , 
vel  salpingo- staphilinus  internus , of  Winslow;  Sal- 
pingo-staphilinus , of  Valsalva ; Pterigo-staphilinus  ez- 
temus  vulgo,  of  Douglas;  Spheno-staphilinus,  of  Cow- 
per.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  extremity 
of  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  where  it 
is  perforated  by  the  Eustachian  tube,  and  also  from  the 
membraneous  part  of  the  same  tube,  and  is  inserted  into 
the  whole  length  of  the  velum  pendulum  palati,  as  far 
as  the  root  of  the  uvula,  and  unites  with  its  fellow. 
Its  use  is  to  draw  the. velum  pendulum  palati  upwards 
and  backwards,  so  as  to  shut  the  passage  from  the 
fauces  into  the  mouth  and  nose. 

Levator  palati  mollis.  S ee  Levator  palati. 

Levator  palpebr/e  superioris.  Aperiehs  pal- 
pebrarum rectus  ; Jlpertor  oculi.  A proper  muscle  of 
the  upper  eyelid,  that  opens  the  eyes,  by  drawing  the 
eyelid  upwards.  It  arises  from  the  upper  part  of  the 
foramen  opticum  of  the  sphenoid  bone,  above  the 
rectus  superior  oculi,  near  the  trbehlearis,  and  is  in- 
serted by  a broad  thin  tendon  into  the  cartilage  that 
supports  the  upper  eyelid. 

Levator  parvus.  See  Transverus  perinei. 

Levator  scapula;.  A muscle  situated  on  the  pos- 
terior part  of  the  neck,  that  pulls  the  scapula  upwards 
and  a little  forwards.  This  name,  which  was  first 
given  to  it  by  Riolanus,  has  been  adopted  by  Albinus. 
Douglas  calls  it  elevator  seu  musculus  patienlice ; and 
Winslow,  angularis , vulgo  levator  proprius.  It  is  a 
long  muscle,  nearly  two  inches  in  breadth,  and  is  situ- 
ated obliquely  under  the  anterior  edge  of  the  trapezius. 
It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  transverse  pro- 
cesses of  the  four  and  sometimes  five  superior  vertebra 
colli,  by  so  many  distinct  slips,  which  soon  unite  to 
form  a muscle  that  runs  obliquely  downwards  and 
outwards,  and  is  inserted  by  a flat  tendon  into  the 
upper  angle  of  the  scapula.  Its  use  is  to  raise  the 
scapula  upwards  and  a little  forwards. 

LEVIGATION.  ( Lcevigatio  ; from  Icevigo , to  make 
smooth.)  The  reduction  of  ^a  hard  substance,  by  tri- 
ture,  to  an  impalpable  powder. 

LEVI'STICUM.  (From  levo , to  assuage : so  called 
from  the  relief  it  gives  in  painful  flatulencies.)  See 
Ligusticum  levisticum. 

LEVRET,  Andrew,  a French  surgeon  and  accou- 
cheur, was  admitted  into  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sur- 
gery, at  Paris,  in  1742.  He  obtained  considerable  re- 
putation by  the  improvements  which  he  made  in  some 
of  the  instruments  used  in  difficult  cases,  and  by  the 
great  number  of  pupils  whom  he  instructed.  He  was 
employed  and  honoured  with  official  appointments  by 
all  the  female  branches  of  the  royal  family.  He  pub- 
lished several  works,  which  went  through  various 
editions  and  translations,  mostly  on  obstetrical  sub- 
jects; but  there  is  one  on  the  Radical  Cure  of  Polypi 
in  different  parts  of  the  body. 

LEXIPHA'RMACA.  (From  Aifl'w,  to  terminate, 
and  (pappaKov , poison.)  Medicines  which  resist  or 
destroy  the  power  of  poison. 

LEXIPY'RETA.  (From  to  make  cease,  and 
ruprros,  a fever.)  Febrifuge  medicines. 

Liba'dium.  (From  Atfiufw,  to  make  moist : so  called 
because  it  grows  in  watery  places.)  The  less  cen- 
taury. See  Ckironia  centaurium. 

LIBANO'TIS.  (From  A iSavos,  frankincense  r so 
called  from  its  resemblance  in  smell  to  frankincense.) 
Rosemary. 

LI'BANUS.  (From  Libanon,&  mountain  in  Syria, 
where  it  grows.)  1.  The  Pinus  ccdrus , or  cedar  of 
Lebanon. 

2.  The  frankincense  tree,  or  Pinus  abies. 

LIBER.  Bark.  Immediately  under  the  cuticle  of 
plants  and  trees  is  a succulent  cellular  substance,  for 
the  most  part  of  a green  colour,  at  least  of  the  leaves 
and  branches,  called  by  Du  Hamel  enveloppe  cellulaire , 
and  by  Mirbel  tissue  herbaci.  Under  this  is  the  bark, 
consisting  of  but  one  layer  in  plants  or  branches  only 
one  year  old.  In  the  older  branches  and  trunks  of 
20 


; trees,  it  consists  of  as  many  layers  as  they  are  years 
old,  the  innermost  being  called  the  liber ; and  it  is  this 
layer  only  that  the  essential  vital  functions  are  carried 
on  for  the  time  being,  after  which  it  is  pushed  out- 
wards with  the  cellular  integument,  and  becomes,  like 
that,  a lifeless  crust. — Smith. 

Li'bos.  (From  A u6u),  to  distil.)  A rheum  or  de- 
fluxion from  the  eyes,  or  nose. 

LIBU'RNUM.  (From  Liburnia,  the  country  where 
it  flourished.)  The  mealy-tree.  See  Viburnum  lan- 
tana. 

LICETO,  Fortunio,  was  son  of  a Genoese  physi- 
cian, and  born  in  1577.  After  prosecuting  with  dili- 
gence the  requisite  studies,  he  settled  at  Pisa  at  the  age 
of  twenty-two,  and  soon  obtained  the  professorship  of 
philosophy  there;  and  in  1609  he  received  a similar 
appointment  at  Padua.  Thence,  after  twenty-seven 
years,  he  removed  to  Bologna,  being  disappointed  of 
the  medical  chair ; but  on  a vacancy  occurring  in  1645, 
he  was  induced,  by  the  pressing  invitations  made  to 
him,  to  accept  the  office,  in  which  he  continued  till  his 
death  in  1657.  He  was  a very  copious  writer,  having 
published  above  fifty  treatises  on  different  subjects,  and 
displayed  much  erudition;  but  no  great  acuteness  or 
originality.  His  treatise,  “De  Monstrorum  Causis, 
Natura,  et  Differentiis,”  is  best  known,  and  shows  him 
to  have  been  very  credulous ; which  appears  farther 
from  his  belief,  that  the  ancients  had  a method  of 
making  lamps,  which  should  burn  for  ever  without  a 
fresh  supply  of  fuel,  and  that  such  had  been  found  in 
sepulchres. 

LI'CHANUS.  (From  Aapccj,  to  lick:  so  called  be- 
cause it  is  commonly  used  in  licking  up  any  thing.) 
The  forefinger. 

LI'CHEX.  (Aaxjjv,  or  A ixvv>  a tetter,  or  ring- 
worm.) Tetter,  or  ringworm. 

1.  The  name  of  a disease,  defined,  by  Dr.  Willan, 
an  extensive  eruption  of  papulae  affecting  adults,  con- 
nected with  internal  disorder,  usually  terminating  in 
scurf,  recurrent,  not  contagious.  The  varieties  of 
lichen  he  considers  under  the  denominations  of  Lichen 
simplex , Lichen  agrius,  Lichen  pilaris , Lichen  lividus , 
and  Lichen  tropicus. 

The  Lichen  simplex  usually  commences  with  head- 
ache, flushing  of  the  face,  loss  of  appetite,  general 
languor,  and  increased  quickness  of  the  pulse.  Distinct 
red  papulae  arise  first  about  the  cheeks  and  chin,  or  on 
the  arms;  and,  in  the  course  of  three  or  four  days,  the 
same  appearance  takes  place  on  the  neck,  body,  and 
lower  extremities,  -accompanied  with  an  unpleasant 
sensation  of  tingling,  which  is  somewhat  aggravated 
during  the  night.  In  about  a week,  the  colour  of  the 
eruption  fades,  and  the  cuticle  begins  to  separate;  the 
whole  surface  is  at  length  covered  with  scurvy  exfolia- 
tions, which  are  particularly  large,  and  continue  longest 
in  the  flexures  of  the  joints.  The  duration  of  the  com- 
plaint is  seldom  in  any  two  cases  alike ; ten,  fourteen, 
seventeen,  or  sometimes  twenty  days  intervene  between 
the  eruption  and  the  renovation  of  the  cuticle.  The 
febrile  state,  or  rather  the  state  of  irritation  at  the  be- 
ginning of  this  disorder,  is  seldom  considerable  enough 
to  confine  the  patient  to  the  house.  After  remaining 
five  or  six  days,  it  is  generally  relieved  on  the  appear- 
ance of  the  eruption.  This,  as  well  as  some  other 
species  of  the  lichen,  occurs  about  the  beginning  of 
summer,  or  in  autumn,  more  especially  affecting  per- 
sons of  a weak  and  irritable  habit ; hence  women  are 
more  liable  to  it  than  men.  Lichen  simplex  is  also  a 
frequent  sequel  of  acute  diseases,  particularly  fever 
and  catarrhal  inflammation,  of  which  it  seems  to  pro- 
duce a crisis.  In  these  cases  the  eruption  has  been 
termed,  by  medical  writers,  scabies  critica.  Many 
instances  of  it  are  collected  under  that  title  by  Sau- 
vages,  Nosol.  Method.  Class  x.  Order  5.  Impeti- 
gines. 

The  Lichen  agrius  is  preceded  by  nausea,  pain  in 
<he  stomach,  headache,  loss  of  strength,  and  deep- 
seated  pains  in  the  limbs,  with  fits  of  coldness  and 
shivering ; which  symptoms  continue  several  days,  and 
are  sometimes  relieved  by  the  papulous  eruption.  The 
papulae  are  distributed  in  clusters,  or  often  in  large 
patches,  chiefly  on  the  arms,  the  upper  part  of  the 
breast,  the  neck,  face,  back  and  sides  of  the  abdomen  , 
they  are  of  a vivid  red  colour,  and  have  a redness,  or 
some  degree  of  inflammation,  diffused  round  them  to 
a considerable  extent,  and  attended  with  itching,  heat, 
and  a painful  tingling.  Dr.  Willan  has  observed,  in 


LIC 


LIC 


one  or  two  cases  where  it  was  produced  from  impru- 
dent exposure  to  cold,  that  an  acute  disease  ensued, 
with  great  quickness  of  the  pulse,  heat,  thirst,  pains 
of  the  bowels,  frequent  vomiting,  headache,  and  deli- 
rium. After  these  symptoms  had  continued  ten  days, 
or  somewhat  longer,  the  patient  recovered,  though  the 
eruption  did  not  return.  The  diffuse  redness  connect- 
ing the  papulae,  and  the  tendency  to  become  pustular, 
distinguish  the  lichen  agrius  from  the  lichen  simplex, 
and  the  other  varieties  of  this  complaint,  in  which  the 
inflammation  does  not  extend  beyond  the  basis  of  the 
papulae,  and  terminates  in  scurf,  or  scales. 

Lichen  pilaris.  This  is  merely  a modification  of 
the  first  species  of  lichen,  and,  like  it,  often  alternates 
with  complaints  of  the  head,  or  stomach,  in  irritable 
habits.  The  peculiarity  of  the  eruption  is,  that  the 
small  tubercles  or  asperities  appear  only  at  the  roots 
of  the  hairs  of  the  skin,  being  probably  occasioned  by 
an  enlargement  of  their  bulbs,  or  an  unusual  fulness 
of  the  blood-vessels  distributed  to  them.  This  affec- 
tion is  distinguishable  from  the  cutis  anserina,  by  its 
permanency,  by  its  red  papulae,  and  by  the  troublesome 
itching  or  tingling  which  attends  it.  If  a part  thus 
affected  be  violently  rubbed,  some  of  the  papulae  en- 
large to  the  size  of  wheals,  but  the  tumour  soon  sub- 
sides again.  The  eruption  continues  more  or  less 
vivid  for  about  ten  days,  and  terminates,  as  usual,  in 
small  exfoliations  of  the  cuticle,  one  of  which  sur- 
rounds the  base  of  each  hair.  This  complaint,  as 
likewise  the  lichen  agrius,  frequently  occurs  in  persons 
accustomed  to  drink  largely  of  spirituous  liquors  un- 
diluted. 

Lichen  lividus.  The  papulae  characterizing  this 
eruption  are  of  a dark  red,  or  livid  hue,  and  somewhat 
more  permanent  than  in  the  foregoing  species  of  lichen. 
They  appear  chiefly  on  the  arms  and  legs,  but  some- 
times extend  to  other  parts  of  the  body.  They  are 
finally  succeeded,  though  at  very  uncertain  periods,  by 
slight  exfoliations  of  the  cuticle,  after  which  a fresh 
eruption  is  not  preceded  or  attended  by  any  febrile 
symptoms.  It  principally  affects  persons  of  a weak 
constitution,  who  live  on  a poor  diet,  and  are  engaged 
in  laborious  occupations.  Young  persons,  and  often 
children  living  in  confined  situations,  or  using  little 
exercise,  are  also  subject  to  the  lichen  lividus ; and  in 
them,  the  papulae  are  generally  intermixed  with  pete- 
chia;, or  larger  purple  spots,  resembling  vibices.  This 
circumstance  points  out  the  affinity  of  the  lichen  lividus 
with  the  purpura,  or  land  scurvy,  and  the  connexion 
is  further  proved  by  the  exciting  causes,  which  are  the 
same  in  both  complaints.  The  same  method  of  treat- 
ment is  likewise  successful  in  both  cases.  They 
are  presently  cured  by  nourishing  food,  moderate 
exercise  in  the  open  air,  along  with  the  use  of  Peru- 
vian bark  and  vitriolic  acid,  or  the  tincture  of  muri- 
ated  steel. 

Lichen  tropicus.  By  this  term  is  expressed  the 
prickly  heat,  a papulous  eruption,  almost  universally 
affecting  Europeans  settled  in  tropical  climates.  The 
prickly  heat  appears  without  any  preceding  disorder 
of  the  constitution.  It  consists  of  numerous  papuls, 
about  the  size  of  a small  pin’s  head,  and  elevated  so 
as  to  produce  a considerable  roughness  on  the  skin. 
The  papulEe  are  of  a vivid  red  colour,  and  often  ex- 
hibit an  irregular  form,  two  or  three  of  them  being 
in  many  places  united  together;  but  no  redness  or  in- 
flammation extends  to  the  skin  in  the  interstices  of  the 
papulte. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  (applied  by  the 
Romans  to  a plant  which  was  supposed  by  them  to 
cure  the  lichen,  or  tetter,)  in  the  Linnsean  system. 
. Class,  Cryptogamia ; Order,  Alga.  There  are  several 
species,  some  of  which  are  used  in  medicine. 

Lichen  aphthosus.  Muscus  camalilis.  This  plant 
is  said  to  have  a decided  good  effect  in  some  com- 
plaints of  the  intestines,  but  is  not  used  in  the  practice 
of  this  country. 

Lichen  caninus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  ash- 
coloured  ground  liverwort.  Lichen  cinereus  terrestris; 
Muscus  caninus.  This  cryptogamous  plant  has  a 
weak,  faint  smell,  and  a sharpish  taste.  It  was  for  a 
long  time  highly  extolled  as  a medicine  of  singular  vir- 
tue, in  preventing  and  curing  that  dreadful  disorder 
which  is  produced  by  the  bite  of  rabid  animals,  but  it  is 
now  deservedly  forgotten. 

Lichen  cinereus  terrestris.  See  Lichen  caninus. 

Lichen  cocciferus.  See  Lichen pyxidatus. 


Lichen  islandicus.  The  medicinal  qualities  of  this 
plant  have  lately  been  so  well  established  at  Vienna, 
that  it  is  now  admitted  into  the  materia  medica  of  the 
London  pharmacopoeia.  It  is  extremely  mucilaginous, 
and  to  the  taste  bitter,  and  somewhat  astringent.  Its 
bitterness,  as  well  as  the  purgative  quality  which  it 
manifests  in  its  recent  state,  are  in  a great  measure  dis- 
sipated on  drying,  or  may  be  extracted  by  a slight 
infusion  in  water  ; so  that  the  inhabitants  of  Iceland 
convert  it  into  a tolerably  grateful  and  nutritive  food. 
An  ounce  of  this  lichen,  boiled  a quarter  of  an  hour  in 
a pint  of  water,  yielded  seven  ounces  of  a mucilage  as 
thick  as  that  procured  by  the  solution  of  one  part  of 
gum-arabic  in  three  of  water. 

The  medical  virtues  of  this  lichen  were  probably 
first  learned  from  the  Icelanders,  who  employ  it  in  its 
fresh  state  as  a laxative ; but  when  deprived  of  this 
quality,  and  properly  prepared,  we  are  told  that  it  is 
an  efficacious  remedy  in  consumptions,  coughs,  dysen- 
teries, and  diarrhoeas.  Scopoli  seems  to  have  been  the 
first  \\[ho,  of  late  years,  called  the  attention  of  phy- 
sicians to  this  remedy  in  consumptive  disorders : and 
further  instances  of  its  success  are  related  by  Herz, 
Cramer,  Tromsdorff,  Ebeling,  Paulisky,  Stoll,  and 
others,  who  bear  testimony  to  its  efficacy  in  most  of 
the  other  complaints  above  mentioned.  Dr.  Herz  says, 
that  since  he  first  used  the  lichen  in  dysentery,  he  found 
it  so  successful,  that  he  never  had  occasion  to  employ 
any  other  remedy  ; it  must  be  observed,  however,  that 
cathartics  and  emetics  were  always  repeatedly  ad- 
ministered before  he  had  recourse  to  the  lichen,  to 
which  he  also  occasionally  added  opium.  Dr.  Crichton 
informs  us,  that  during  seven  months’  residence  at 
Vienna,  he  had  frequent  opportunities  of  seeing  the 
lichen  islandicus  tried  in  phthisis  pulmonalis  at  the 
general  hospitals,  and  confesses,  “that  it  by  no  means 
answered  the  expectation  he  had  formed  of  it.”  He 
adds,  however,  “ from  what  I have  seen,  I am  fully 
convinced  in  my  own  mind,  that  there  are  only  two 
species  of  this  disease  where  this  sort  of  lichen  pro- 
mises a cure.  The  two  species  I hint  at  arc  the 
phthisis  liaemoptoica,  and  the  phthisis  pituitosa,  or 
mucosa.  In  several  cases  of  these,  I have  seen  the 
patients  so  far  get  the  better  of  their  complaints  as  to 
be  dismissed  the  hospital  cured,  but  whether  they  re- 
mained long  so  or  not,  l cannot  take  upon  me  to  say.” 
That  this  lichen  strengthens  the  digestive  powers,  and 
proves  extremely  nutritious,  there  can  be  no  doubt ; but 
the  great  medicinal  efficacy  attributed  to  it  at  Vienna, 
will  not  readily  be  credited  at  London.  It  is  commonly 
given  in  the  form  of  a decoction  : an  ounce  and  a half 
of  the  lichen  being  boiled  in  a quart  of  milk.  Of  this, 
a teacupful  is  directed  to  be  drank  frequently  in  the 
course  of  the  day.  If  milk  disagree  with  the  stomach, 
a simple  decoction  of  the  lichen  in  water  is  to  be  used. 
Care  ought  to  be  taken  that  it  be  boiled  over  a slow 
fire,  and  not  longer  than  a quarter  of  an  hour. 

Lichen  pi.icatus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
muscus  arboreus.  This  plant,  we  are  informed  by  the 
great  botanist  Linnaeus,  is  applied  by  the  Laplanders 
to  parts  which  are  excoriated  by  a long  journey.  It  is 
slightly  astringent,  and  is  applied  with  that  intention  to 
bleeding  vessels. 

Lichen  pulmonarius_.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  muscus  pulmonarius  quercinus.  Pulmonaria 
arborea.  This  subastringent  and  rather  acid  plant 
was  once  in  high  estimation  in  the  cure  of  diseases  of 
the  lungs,  especially  coughs,  asthmas,  and  catarrhs. 
Its  virtues  are  similar,  and  in  no  way  inferior,  to  those 
of  the  lichen  islandicus. 

Lichen  pyxidatus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cup-moss.  Muscus  pyxidatus;  Mvsculus  pyxoides 
terrestris  ; Lichen  pyxidatus  major.  These  very  com- 
mon little  plants,  Lichen  cocciferus , and  pyxidatus,  of 
Linnaeus,  for  both  are  used  indifferently,  are  employed 
by  the  common  people  in  this  country  in  the  cure  of 
hooping-cough,  in  the  form  of  decoction. 

Lichen  roccella.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
roccella  of  the  shops.  Roccella.  It  has  been  employed 
medicinally  with  success  in  allaying  the  cough  attend- 
ant on  phthisis,  and  in  hysterical  coughs.  The  princi- 
pal use  is  as  a blue  dye.  It  is  imported  to  us  as  it  is 
gathered : those  who  prepare  it  for  the  use  of  the  dyer, 
grind  it  between  stones,  so  as  thoroughly  to  bruise,  bu* 
not  to  reduce  it  into  powder,  and  then  moisten  it  occa- 
sionally with  a strong  spirit  of  urine,  or  urine  itself 
mixed  with  quicklime;  in  a few  days  it  acquires  a 


LIF 


LIG 


purpiish-red,  and  at  length  a blue  colour ; in  the  first 
state  it  is  called  archil,  in  the  latter  laemus  or  litmus. 

Litmus  is  used  in  chemistry  as  a test,  either  staining 
paper  with  it,  or  by  infusing  it  in  water,  when  it  is  very 
commonly,  but  with  great  impropriety,  called  tincture 
of  turnsole.  The  persons  by  whom  this  article  was 
prepared  formerly,  gave  it  the  name  of  turnsole,  pre- 
tending that  it  was  extracted  from  the  turnsole  heliotro- 
pium  tricoccum,  in  order  to  keep  its  true  source  a 
secret.  The  tincture  should  not  be  too  strong,  other- 
wise it  will  have  a violet  tinge,  which,  however,  may 
be  removed  by  dilution.  The  light  of  the  sun  turns  it 
red  even  in  close  vessels.  It  may  be  made  with  spirit 
instead  of  water.  This  tincture,  or  paper  stained  with 
it,  is  presently  turned  red  by  acids ; and  if  it  be  first 
reddened  by  a small  quantity  of  vinegar,  or  some  weak 
acid,  its  blue  colour  will  be  restored  by  an  alkali. 

Liciikn  saxatilxs.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
muscus  cranii  humani.  Usnea.  This  moss,  when 
growing  on  the  human  skull,  was  formerly  in  high  es- 
timation, but  is  now  deservedly  forgotten. 

LI  EN.  (From  Xsiog,  soft,  or  smooth.)  The  spleen. 
See  Spleen.  » 

Lien  sinarum.  The  Faba  tegyptia.  See  JVymphwa 
nclumbo. 

HENTE'RIA.  (From  Xsios,  smooth,  and  svrepov, 
the  intestine.)  Lientery.  See  Diarrhoea. 

LIEUTAUD,  Joseph,  was  born  at  Aix,  in  Provence, 
in  1703.  A taste  for  botany  induced  him  to  travel  into 
the  countries  which  Tournefort  had  visited : and  he 
brought  back  many  plants  unnoticed  by  that  distin- 
guished botanist:  this  gained  him  great  applause,  and 
lie  obtained  the  reversion  of  the  chairs  of  Botany  and 
Anatomy,  which  his  maternal  uncle  had  long  filled. 
He  was  also  appointed  physician  to  the  hospital  at 
Aix,  which  led  him  to  turn  his  attention  chiefly  to 
anatomy.  His  audience  soon  became  numerous,  and 
in  1742  he  published  a syllabus,  entitled,  “Essais  Ana- 
toiniques,”  which  was  many  times  reprinted,  with  im- 
provements. He  communicated  also  several  papers 
on  morbid  anatomy,  and  on  physiology,  to  the  Academy 
oftsciences,  of  which  he  was  elected  a corresponding 
member.  In  1749  he  went  to  Versailles,  Senac  having 
obtained  for  him  the  appointment  of  physician  to  the 
Royal  Infirmary ; which  act  of  friendship  is  ascribed  to 
a liberal  private  communication  of  some  errors  com- 
mitted by  Senac.  He  there  continued  his  investigations 
with  great  zeal,  and  was  soon  elected  assistant  anato- 
• mist  to  the  Royal  Academy,  which  he  presented  with 
many  valuable  memoirs  He  also  printed  a volume, 

“ Elementa  Physiologiae,”  composed  for  his  class  at 
Aix.  In  1755  he  was  nominated  physician  to  the  royal 
family,  and  20  years  after,  first  physician  to  Louis  XVI. 
In  1759  his  “Prdcis  de  la  M6decine  Pratique,”  ap- 
peared, which  went  through  several  editions;  and 
seven  years  after,  his  “ Precis  de  la  Mature  M£dicale.” 
But  his  most  important  work,  which  still  ranks  high  in 
the  estimation  of  physicians,  is  entitled,  “ Historia 
Anatomico-Medica,”  in  2 vols.  quarto,  1767,  contain- 
ing numerous  dissections  of  morbid  bodies.  His  death 
occurred  in  1780. 

LIEVRITE,  Yenite.  A blackish  green-coloured 
mineral,  composed  of  silica,  alumina,  lime,  oxide  of 
iron,  and  oxide  of  manganese,  found  in  primitive  lime- 
stone, along  with  epidote,  quartz, &c.  in  the  isle  of  Elba. 

LIFE.  A peculiar  condition,  or  mode  of  existence, 
of  living  beings.  Surrounding  matter  is  divided  into 
two  great  classes,  living  and  dead.  The  latter  is  sub- 
ject to  physical  laws,  which  the  former  also  obeys  in 
a great  degree.  Living  matter  exhibits  also  physical 
properties,  which  are  found  equally  in  dead  matter. 
But  living  bodies  are  endowed  likewise  with  a set  of 
properties  altogether  different  from  these,  and  contrast- 
ing with  them  in  a very  remarkable  way;  these  are 
called  vital  properties,  actions,  powers,  faculties,  or 
forces.  These  animate  living  matter  so  long  as  it 
continues  alive,  and  are  the  source  of  the  various  phe- 
nomena which  constitute  the  functions  of  the  living 
animal  body,  and  which  distinguish  its  history  from 
that  of  dead  matter.  The  study  of  life  is  the  object  of 
the  science  of  physiology,  which  includes  an  inquiry 
into  the  properties  that  characterize  living  matter,  and 
an  investigation  of  the  functions  which  the  various 
organs,  by  virtue  of  these  properties,  are  enabled  to 
. execute.  The  vital  principle  diffused  throughout  these 
organs  induces  a mode  of  union  in  the  elements,  widely 
differin'.'  from  that  which  arises  from  the  common  laws  ] 
22 


of  chemical  affinity.  By  the  aid  of  this  principle,  rat- 
ture  produces  the  animal  fluids,  as  blood,  bile,  semen, 
and  the  rest,  which  can  never  be  produced  by  the  art 
of  chemistry.  But  if,  in  consequence  of  death,  the 
laws  of  vital  attraction,  or  affinity,  cease  to  ■operate, 
then  the  elements,  recovering  their  physical  properties, 
become  again  obedient  to  the  common  laws  of  chemi- 
cal affinity,  and  enter  into  new  combinations,  fioin 
which  new  principles,  in  the  process  of  putrefaction, 
are  produced.  Thus  the  hydrogen,  combining  itself 
with  the  azote,  forms  volatile  alkali ; and  the  carbu- 
retted  hydrogen,  with  the  azote,  putrid  air,  into  which 
the  whole  body  is  converted.  It  also  appears  from 
hence,  why  organized  bodies  alone,  namely,  animal 
and  vegetable,  are  subject  to  putridity ; to  which  inor- 
ganic or  mineral  substances  are  in  no  degree  liable,  the 
latter  not  being  compounded  according  to  the  laws  of 
vital  affinity,  but  only  according  to  those  of  chemical 
affinity.  For  the  fatiscence,  or  resolution  of  pyrites, 
or  sulphuret  of  iron,  in  atmospheric  air,  is  not  putre- 
faction, but  only  the  oxygen,  furnished  by  the  air,  com- 
bining with  the  sulphur,  and  forming  iron  and  sulphate 
of  iron. 

The  life  of  an  animal  body  appears  to  be  three- 
fold. 

1.  Its  chemical  life , which  consists  in  that  attraction 
of  the  elements,  by  which  the  vital  principle,  diffused 
through  the  solids  and  fluids,  defends  all  the  parts  of 
the  body  from  putrefaction.  In  this  sense  it  may  be 
said,  that  every  atom  of  our  body  lives  chemically , and 
that  life  is  deployed  by  putrefaction  alone. 

2.  Itsphysical  life , which  consists  in  the  irritability 
of  the  parts.  This  physical  property  remains  for  some 
time  alter  death.  Thus  the  heart  or  intestines  removed 
from  the  body,  while  still  warm,  contract  themselves 
on  the  application  of  a stimulus.  In  like  manner  the 
serpent  or  eel,  being  cut  into  pieces,  each  part  moves 
and  palpitates  for  a long  time  afterward.  Hence  these 
parts  may  be  said  to  live  physically,  as  long  as  they  are 
warm  and  soft. 

3.  Its  physiological  life,  consists  in  the  action  of 
inorganic  parts  proper  to  each,  as  the  action  of  the 
heart  and  vessels ; so  that  these  actions  ceasing,  the 
body  is  said  to  be  physiologically  dead.  The  physiolo- 
gical life  ceases  first,  next  the  physical,  and  finally  the 
chemical  perishes. 

LIGAMENT.  ( Ligamentum ; from  ligo,  to  bind.) 
An  elastic  and  strong  membrane  connecting  the  extre- 
mities of  the  moveable  bones.  Ligaments  are  divided 
into  capsular,  which  surround  joints  like  a bag,  and 
connecting  ligaments.  The  use  of  the  capsular  liga- 
ments is  to  connect  the  extremities  of  the  moveable 
bones,  and  prevent  the  efflux  of  synovia ; the  external 
and  internal  connecting  ligaments  strengthen  the  union 
of  the  extremities  of  the  moveable  bones. 

Ligamentum  annulare.  The  angular  ligament. 
A strong  ligament  on  each  ankle  and  each  wrist. 

Ligamentum  arteriosum.  The  ductus  arteriosus 
of  the  feetus  becomes  a ligament  after  birth,  which  is 
so  called. 

Ligamentum  ciliare.  Behind  the  uvea  of  the 
human  eye,  there  arise  out  of  the  choroid  membrane, 
from  the  ciliary  circle,  white  complicated  striae,  cover- 
ed with  a black  matter.  The  fluctuating  extremities 
of  these  striae  are  spread  abroad  even  to  the  crys- 
talline lens,  upon  which  they  lie,  but  are  not  affixed. 
Taken  together,  they  are  called  ligamentum  ciliare. 

Ligamentum  denticulatum.  A small  ligament 
supporting  the  spinal  marrow. 

Ligamentum  fallopii.  The  round  ligament  of  the 
uterus  has  been  so  called.  See  also  Ligamentum  pou- 
parti. 

Ligamentum  interosseum.  The  ligament  uniting 
the  radius  and  ulna,  and  also  that  between  the  tibia 
and  fibula. 

Ligamentum  latum.  The  broad  ligament  of  the 
liver,  and  that  of  the  uterus.  See  Liver  and  Uterus. 

Ligamentum  nuchje.  A strong  ligament  of  the 
neck,  which  proceeds  from  one  spinous  process  to  an 
other. 

Ligamentum  ovarii.  The  thick,  round  portion  of 
the  broad  ligament  of  the  uterus,  by  which  the  ova- 
rium is  connected  with  the  uterus. 

Ligamentum  pouparti.  Fallopian  ligament.  Pou 
part’s  ligament.  A ligament  extending  from  the  ante 
rior  suiierior  spinous  process  of  the  ilium  to  the  crista 
of  the  os  pubis. 


LIG 


L1G 


LtaAMENTTTM  rotundum.  The  round  ligament  of 
the  uterus.  See  Uterus. 

LIGATURE.  ( Ligatura ; from  It  go,  to  bind.)  A 
thread,  or  silk,  of  various  thickness,  covered  with 
white  wax,  for  the  purpose  of  tying  arteries,  or  veins, 
or  other  parts.  Ligatures  should  be  round  and  very 
firm,  so  as  to  allow  their  being  tied  with  some  force, 
without  risk  of  breaking. 

The  immediate  effect  of  a tight  ligature  on  an  artery 
is  to  cut  through  its  middle  and  internal  coats,  a cir- 
cumstance that  tends  very  much  to  promote  the  adhe- 
sion of  the  opposite  sides  of  the  vessel  to  each  other. 
Hence  the  form  and  mode  of  applying  a ligature  to  an 
artery  should  be  such  as  are  most  certain  of  dividing 
the  above  coats  of  the  vessel  in  the  most  favourable 
manner.  A broad  flat  ligature  does  not  promise  to 
answer  the  purpose  in  the  best  manner ; because  it  is 
scarcely  possible  to  tie  it  smoothly  round  the  artery, 
which  is  veiy  likely  to  be  thrown  into  folds,  or  to  be 
puckered  by  it,  and  consequently  to  have  an  irregular 
bruised  wound  made  in  its  middle  and  internal  coats. 
A ligature  of  an  irregular  form  is  likely  to  cut  through 
these  coats  more  completely  at  some  parts  than  at 
others ; and  if  it  does  not  perfectly  divide  them  no  ad- 
hesion can  take  place,  and  secondary  Haemorrhage  will 
follow.  A fear  of  tying  the  ligature  loo  tight  may 
often  lead  to  the  same  consequences. 

LIGHT.  Lux.  The  nature  of  light  has  occupied  much 
of  the  attention  of  philosophers,  and  numerous  opinions 
have  been  entertained  concerning  it.  It  has  been  some- 
times oonsidered  as  a distinct  substance,  at  other  times 
as  a quality ; sometimes  as  a cause,  frequently  as  an 
effect ; by  some  it  has  been  considered  as  a compound, 
by  others  as  a simple  substance.  Philosophers  of  the 
present  day  are  mostly  agreed  as  to  the  independent 
existence  of  light,  or  the  cause  by  which  we  see. 

Nature  of  light. — Light  is  that  which  "proceeds  from 
any  body  producing  the  sensation  of  vision,  or  percep- 
tion of  other  bodies,  by  depicting  an  image  of  external 
objects  on  the  retina  of  the  eye.  Hence  it  announces 
to  animals  the  presence  of  the  bodies  which  surround 
them,  and  enables  them  to  distinguish  these  bodies  into 
transparent,  opaque,  and  coloured.  These  properties 
are  so  essentially  connected  with  the  presence  of  light, 
that  bodies  lose  them  in  the  dark,  and  become  undis- 
tinguishable. 

Light  is  regarded  by  philosophers  as  a substance  con- 
sisting of  a vast  number  of  exceedingly  small  parti- 
cles, which  are  actually  projected  from  luminous  bo- 
dies, and  which  probably  never  return  again  to  the 
body  from  which  they  were  emitted. 

It  is  universally  expanded  through  space.  It  exerts 
peculiar  actions,  and  is  obedient  to  the  laws  of  attrac- 
tion, and  other  properties  of  matter. 

Explanation  of  certain  terms  of  light. — In  order 
to  facilitate  the  doctrine  of  light,  we  shall  shortly  ex- 
plain a few  terms  made  use  of  by  philosophers  when 
treating  of  it ; namely, 

A ray  of  light  is  an  exceedingly  small  portion  of 
light  as  it  comes  from  a luminous  body. 

A medium  is  a body  which  affords  a passage  for  the 
rays  of  light. 

A beam  of  light  is  a body  of  parallel  rays. 

A pencil  of  rays  is  a body  of  diverging  or  converging 
rays. 

Converging  rays  are  rays  which  tend  to  a common 
point. 

Diverging  rays  are  those  which  come  from  a point, 
and  continually  separate  as  they  proceed. 

The  rays  of  light  are  parallel , when  the  lines  which 
they  describe  are  so. 

The  radiant  point  is  the  point  from  which  diverging 
rays  proceed. 

The  focus  is  the  point  to  which  the  converging  rays 
are  directed. 

Sources  of  light. — Light  is  emitted  from  the  sun 
the  fixed  stars,  and  other  luminous  bodies.  It  is  pro- 
duced by  percussion,  during  electrization,  combus- 
tion, and  in  various  other  chemical  processes. 

Why  the  sun  and  stars  are  constantly  emitting  light, 
is  a question  which  probably  will  for  ever  baffle  hu- 
man understanding. 

The  light  emitted  during  combustion  exists  previ- 
ously, either  combined  with  the  combustible  body,  or 
with  the  substance  which  supports  the  combustion. 
The  light  liberated  during  chemical  action,  formed 
a constituent  part  of  the  bodies  which  act  on  each  other. 


Chemical  properties  of  light. — The  chemical  effects 
of  light  have  much  engaged  the  attention  of  philoso- 
phers. Its  influence  upon  animal,  vegetable,  and  other 
substances,  is  as  follows : 

1.  On  vegetables. — Every  body  knows  that  most  of 
the  discous  flowers  follow  the  sun  in  his  course  ; that 
they  attend  him  to  his  evening  retreat,  and  meet  his 
rising  lustre  in  the  morning  with  the  same  unerring 
law.  It  is  also  well  known  that  the  change  of  {tosition 
in  the  leaves  of  plants,  at  different  periods  of  the  day, 
is  entirely  owing  to  the  agency  of  light,  and  that  plants 
which  grow  in  windows,  in  the  inside  of  houses,  are, 
as  it  were,  solicitous  to  turn  their  leaves  towards  the 
light.  Natural  philosophers  have  long  been  aware  of 
the  influence  of  light  on  vegetatioh.  It  was  first  ob 
served  that  plants  growing  in  the  shade,  or  darkness, 
are  pale  and  without  colour.  The  term  etiolation 
has  been  given  to  this  phenomenon,  and  the  plants,  in 
which  it  takes  place,  are  said  to  be  etiolated , or 
blanched.  Gardeners  avail  themselves  of  the  know- 
ledge of  this  fact,  to  furnish^our  tables  with  white  and 
tender  vegetables.  .When  the  plants  have  attained  a 
certain  height,  they  compress  the  leaves,  by  tying  them 
together,  and  by  these  means  (or  by  laying  earth  over 
them,)  deprive  them  of  the  contact  of  light : and  thus 
it  is  that  our  white  celery,  lettuce,  cabbages,  endive, 
&c.  are  obtained.  For  the  same  reason,  wood  is  white 
under  the  green  bark ; and  roots  are  less  coloured  than 
plants ; some  of  them  alter  their  taste,  &c. ; they  even 
acquire  a deleterious  quality  when  suffered  to  grow 
exposed  to  light.  Potatoes  are  of  this  kind.  Herbs 
that  grow  beneath  stones,  or  in  places  utterly  dark,  are 
white,  soft,  aqueous,  and  of  a mild  and  insipid  taste. 
The  more  plants  are  exposed  to  the  light,  the  more 
colour  they  acquire.  Though  plants  are  capable  of 
being  nourished  exceedingly  well  in  the  dark,  and  in 
that  state  grow  much  more  rapidly  than  in  the  sun, 
(provided  the  air  that  surrounds  them  is  fit  for  vegeta- 
tion,) they  are  colourless  and  unfit  for  use. 

Professor  Davy  found,  by  experiment,  that  red  rose- 
trees,  carefully  excluded  from*  light,  produce  roses 
almost  white.  He  likewise  ascertained  that  this  flower 
owes  its  colour  to  light  entering  into  its  composition  ; 
that  pink,  orange,  aud  yellow  flowers  imbibe  a smaller 
portion  of  light  than  red  ones,  and  that  white  flowers 
contain  no  light.  But  vegetables  are  not  only  indebted 
to  the  light  for  their  colour : taste  and  odour  are  like- 
wise derived  from  the  same  source. 

Light  contributes  greatly  to  the  maturity  of  fruits 
and  seeds.  This  seems  to  be  the  cause  why,  under  the 
burning  sun  of  Africa,  vegetables  are  in  general  more 
odoriferous,  of  a stronger  taste,  and  more  abounding 
with  resin.  From  the  same  cause  it  happens,  that  hot 
climates  seem  to  be  the  native  countries  of  perfumes, 
odoriferous  fruits,  and  aromatic  resins. 

The  action  of  light  is  so  powerful  on  the  organs  of 
vegetables,  as  to  cause  them  to  pour  forth  torrents  of 
pure  air  from  the  surface  of  their  leaves  into  the 
atmosphere,  while  exposed  to  the  sun ; whereas,  on 
the  contrary,  when  in  the  shade,  they  emit  an  air  of  a 
noxious  quality.  Take  a few  handfuls  of  fresh- 
gathered  leaves  of  mint,  cabbage,  or  any  other  plant ; 
place  them  in  a bell-glass,  filled  with  fresh  water,  and 
invert  it  into  a basin  with  the  same  fluid.  If  the  whole 
be  then  exposed  to  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun,  small  air 
bubbles  will  appear  on  the  surface  of  the  leaves,  which 
will  gradually  grow  larger,  and  at  last  detach  them- 
selves and  become  collected  at  the  surface  of  the  wa- 
ter. This  is  oxygen  gas,  or  vital  air. 

All  plants  do  not  emit  this  air  with  the  same  facility; 
there  are  some  which  yield  it  the  moment  the  sun  acts 
upon  them;  as  the  jacoboea  or  ragwort,  lavender,  pep- 
permint, and  some  other  aromatic  plants.  The  leaves 
afford  more  air  when  attached  to  the  plant  than  when 
gathered  ; the  quantity  is  also  greater,  the  fresher  and 
sounder  they  are,  and  if  full  grown  and  collected  during 
dry  weather.  Green  plants  afford  more  air  than  those 
which  are  of  a yellowish  or  white  colour.  Green  fruits 
afford  likewise  oxygen  gas  ; but  it  is  not  so  plentifully 
furnished  by  those  which  are  ripe.  Flowers  in  general 
render  the  air  noxious.  The  Nasturtium  indicum,  in 
the  space  of  a few  hours,  gives  out  more  air  than  is 
equal  to  the  bulk  of  all  its  leaves.  On  the  contrary,  it 
a like  bell-glass,  prepared  in  the  same  manner,  be  kept 
in  the  dark,  another  kind  of  air  will  be  disengaged,  of 
an  opposite  quality. 

There  itf  not  a substance  which,  in  well-closed  glass 

23 


LIM 


LUr 


vessels,  and  exposed  to  the  sun’s  light,  does  not  expe- 
rience some  alteration. 

Camphor,  kept  in  glass  bottles,  exposed  to  light,  crys- 
tallizes into  the  most  beautiful  symmetrical  figures,  on 
that  side  of  the  glass  which  is  exposed  to  the  light. 

Yellow  wax,  exposed  to  the  light,  loses  its  colour  and 
becomes  bleached.  Gum  guaiacum,  reduced  to  pow- 
der, becomes  green  on  exposure  to  light.  Vegetable 
colours,  such  as  those  of  satfron,  logwood,  &c.  become 
pale,  or  white,  &c. 

2.  On  animals. — The  human  being  is  equally  de- 
pendent on  the  influence  of  light.  Animals  in  general 
droop  when  deprived  of  light,  they  become  unhealthy, 
and  even  sometimes  die.  When  a man  has  been  long 
confined  in  a dark  dungeon  (though  well  aired),  his 
whole  complexion  becomes  sallow ; pustules,  filled  with 
aqueous  humours,  break  out  on  his  skin;  and  the  per- 
son, who  has  been  thus  deprived  of  light,  becomes 
languid,  and  frequently  dropsical.  Worms,  grubs,  and 
caterpillars,  which  live  in  the  earth,  or  in  wood,  are  of 
a whitish  colour;  moths,  and  other  insects  of  the  night, 
are  likewise  distinguishable  from  those  which  fly  by 
day  by  the  want  of  brilliancy  in  their  colour.  The  dif- 
ference between  those  insects,  in  northern  and  southern 
parts,  is  still  more  obvious. 

The  parts  of  fish  which  are  exposed  to  light,  as  the 
back,  fins,  &c.  are  uniformly  coloured,  but  the  belly, 
which  is  deprived  of  light,  is  white  in  all  of  them. 

Birds  which  inhabit  the  tropical  countries  have 
much  brighter  plumage  than  thoseol’  the  north.  Those 
parts  of  the  birds  which  are  not  exposed  to  the  light  are 
uniformly  pale.  The  feathers  on  the  belly  of  a bird 
are  generally  pale,  or  white ; the  back,  which  is  ex- 
posed to  the  light,  is  almost  always  coloured;  the 
breast,  which  is  particularly  exposed  to  light  in  most 
biids,  is  brighter  than  the  belly. 

Butterflies,  and  various  other  animals  of  equatorial 
countries,  are  brighter  coloured  than  those  of  the  polar 
regions.  Some  of  the  northern  animals  are  even  darker 
in  summer  and  paler  in  winter. 

3.  On  other  substances—  Certain  metallic  oxides 
become  combustible  when  exposed  to  light ; and  acids, 
as  the  nitric,  <fcc.  are  decomposed  by  its  contact,  and 
various  other  substances  change  their  nature. 

Light  carbonated  hydrogen.  See  Carburetted  hy- 
drogen gas. 

LIGNEUS.  Woody.  Applied  in  botany  to  pods, 
barks,  &c.  which  are  of  a hard  membraneous,  or  woody 
texture  ; as  the  strobilus  of  the  Pinus  sylvestris. 

LI'GNUM.  Wood. 

Lignum  agallochi  veri.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Lignum  aloes.  Lignum  agallochi  veri ; Agalluge ; 
Agallugum ; Lignum  aquilce ; Lignum  calambac  ; 
Lignum  aspalathi ; Xylo  aloes;  Jig  alio  chum ; Ca- 
lambac. Aloes  wood.  The  tree,  the  wood  of  which 
bears  this  name,  is  not  yet  scientifically  known.  It  is 
by  some  supposed  to  be  the  Exccearia  agallocha , the 
bark  as  well  as  the  milk  of  which  is  purgative.  It  is 
imported  from  China  in  small,  compact,  ponderous 
pieces,  of  a yellow  rusty  brown  colour,  with  black  or 
purplish  veins,  and  sometimes  of  a black  colour.  It 
has  a bitterish  resinous  taste,  and  a slight  aromatic 
smell.  It  is  used  to  fumigate  rooms  in  eastern  countries. 

Lignum  aquilje.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Lignum  aspalathi.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Lignum  calambac.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Lignum  campechense.  (Cumpechensis : so  called 
because  it  was  Drought  from  Campeachy,  in  the  bay  of 
Honduras.  See  Haematoxylon  campechianum. 

Lignum  indicum.  See  Guaiacum. 

Lignum  moluccensk.  See  Croton  tiglium. 

Lignum  nephritioum.  See  Guilandina  moringo. 

Lignum  pavaNjE.  See  Croton  tiglium. 

[Lignum  quassi.e.  See  Quassia  amara.  A.] 

Lignum  rhodium.  See  Aspalathus  Canariensis. 

Lignum  sanctum.  See  Guaiacum. 

Lignum  santali  rubri.  See  Pterocarpus  santa- 
linus 

Lignum  sappan.  See  Hcematoxylon  campechianum. 

Lignum  serpentum.  See  Ophioxylum  serpenti- 
ntm. 

| “Lignum  vitie  The  tree  which  produces  this 
wood  grows  in  the  West  Indies  and  tropical  parts  of 
America.  It  attains  to  the  height  of  forty  feet,  and  its 
trunk  is  four  or  five  feet  in  circumference. 

Lignum  vita  is  brought  in  logs  or  masses,  consisting 
of  a dark  greenish  heart,  covered  with  a yellowish  al- 


burnum. It  is  exceedingly  hard,  sinks  in  water,  has 
little  smell  except  when  heated,  and  possesses  a bitter 
and  pungent  taste. 

The  medicinal  properties  of  the  wood  are  princi- 
pally derived  from  its  resinous  particles.  It  is,  however, 
used  as  an  ingredient  in  some  decoctions,  to  which  it 
imparts  a certain  portion  of  extractive  matter  of  a tonic 
and  stimulating  nature.  It  was  formerly  much  cele- 
brated as  an  antisyphilitic.  The  hardness  and  solidity 
of  lignum  vitae  render  it  of  great  importance  in  the 
mechanic  arts.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

LIGULA.  (Ligula,  a strap.)  1.  The  clavicle. 

2.  The  glottis. 

3.  The  name  of  a measure  and  a weight. 

3.  A genus  of  the  Mollusca  order. 

5.  The  small  transparent  membrane  on  the  margin 
of  the  sheath  and  base  of  the  leaves  of  grasses. 

LIGULATUS.  Shaped  like  a straw  or  ribband  ; a 
term  applied  to  a kind  of  floret  of  a compound  flower, 
which  is  so  shaped;  as  those  of  the  Tragopogon  and 
Taraxacum. 

LIGUSTICUM.  (Aiyvq-tKov  of  Dioscorides;  so 
called  from  Liguria , in  Italy,  its  native  country.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class  Pentandria ; Order, 
Digynia. 

Ligusticum  levisticum.  The  systematic  name 
of  lovage.  Levisticum.  The  odour  of  this  plant,  Li- 
gusticum— foliis  multiplicibus,  foliolis  superne  incisis, 
of  Linnaeus,  is  very  strong,  and  particularly  ungratef  ul ; 
its  taste  is  warm  and  aromatic.  It  abounds  with  a yel- 
lowish gummy  resinous  juice,  very  much  resembling 
opoponax.  Its  virtues  are  supposed  to  be  similar  to 
those  of  angelica  and  masterwort,  in  expelling  flatu- 
lencies, exciting  sweat,  and  openingobstructions ; there- 
fore it  is  chiefly  used  in  hysterical  disorders  and  uterine 
obstructions.  The  leaves,  eaten  in  salad,  are  accounted 
emmenagogue.  The  root,  which  is  less  ungrateful  than 
the  leaves,  is  said  to  possess  similar  virtues,  and  may 
be  employed  in  powder. 

LIGU'STRUM.  (From  ligo,  to  bind : so  named 
from  its  use  in  making  bands.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Diandria ; Order,  Munogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  herb  privet. 
The  Ligustrum  vulgare. 

LI'LALTTE.  The  mineral  lipidolite. 

LILIACEUS.  (From  lilium , a lily.)  Liliaceous,  or 
resembling  the  lily. 

Liliace.e.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Lin- 
naeus’s Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of 
such  as  have  liliaceous  corollae,  and  a three-lobed  stig- 
ma ; as  colchicum,  lilium,  Crocus,  &c. 

LILIA'GO.  {Diminutive  of  lilium,  the  lily  : so  named 
from  the  resemblance  of  its  flower  to  that  of  a lily.) 
Liliastrum.  Spiderwort.  The  Anthericum  lilias- 
trum  of  Linnaeus,  formerly  said  to  be  alexipliarmic  and 
carminative. 

LI'LIUM.  (From  Xeios,  smooth,  graceful : so  named 
from  the  beauty  of  its  leaf.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Hezandria; 
Order,  Monogynia.  The  lily. 

Lilium  album.  The  white  lily.  See  Lilium  can- 
didum. 

Lilium  candidum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
white  lily.  Lilium  album.  Lilium — foliis  spars  is, 
corollis  campanulatis , intus  glabris , of  Linnseus. 
The  roots  are  directed  by  the  Edinburgh  pharma- 
copoeia ; they  are  extremely  mucilaginous,  and  chiefly 
used,  boiled  in  milk  and  water,  in  emollient  and  sup- 
purating cataplasms,  to  inflammatory  tumours.  These 
lily-roots  afford  a good  substitute,  in  times  of  scarcity, 
for  bread.  The  distilled  water  has  been  sometimes 
used  as  a cosmetic. 

Lilium  convallium.  Sec  Convallaria  majalis. 

Lilium  martagon.  The  martagon  lily.  Linnaeus 
tells  us  that  the  root  of  this  plant  forms  a part  of  the 
ordinary  food  of  the  Siberians. 

LILY.  See  Lilium  and  Nymphcea. 

Lily , May.  See  Convallaria  majalis. 

Lily , water.  See  Mympheea  alba , and  J Yymphaa 
lulea. 

Lily , white.  See  Lilium  candidum. 

Lily  of  the  valley.  See  Convallaria  majalis. 

LIMATU'RA.  (From  lima , a file.)  File  dust  or 
powder.  . . 

Limatura  ferri.  Steel  filings  are  considered  as 
possessing  stimulating  and  strengthening  qualities,  and 


are  exhibited  in  worm  cases,  ataxia,  leucorrhcea,  diar- 
rhoea, chlorosis,  &c. 

JLI'MAX.  (From  limus,  slime:  so  named  from  its 
sliminess.)  Cochlea  terrestris.  The  snail.  This 
aniinal  abounds  with  a viscid  slimy  juice,  which  is 
readily  given  out  by  boiling,  to  milk  or  water,  so  as  to 
render  them  thick'  and  glutinous.  These  decoctions 
are  apparently  very  nutritious  and  demulcent,  and  are 
recommended  in  consumptive  cases  and  emaciations. 

LIMBUS.  The  brim  or  border.  Applied  to  a part 
of  the  corolla  in  botany.  See  Corolla. 

LIME.  Calx.  1.  The  oxide  of  calcium,  one  of  the 
primitive  earths.  It  is  found  in  great  abundance  in 
nature,  though  never  pure,  or  in  an  uncombiued  state. 
It  is  always  united  to  an  acid,  and  very  frequently  to 
the  carbonic  acid,  as  in  chalk,  common  lime-stone, 
marble,  calcareous  spar,  &c.  It  is  contained  in  the 
waters  of  the  ocean ; it  is  found  in  vegetables ; and  is 
the  basis  of  the  bones,  shells,  and  other  hard  parts  of 
animals.  Its  combination  with  sulphuric  acid  is  known 
by  the  name  of  sulphate  of  lime  ( gypsum , or  plaster  of 
Paris).  Combined  with  flouric  acid  it  constitutes  fluate 
of  lime,  or  Derbyshire  spar. 

Properties. — Lime  is  in  solid  masses,  of  a white 
colour,  moderately  hard,  but  easily  reducible  to  powder. 
Its  taste  is  bitter,  urinous,  and  burning.  It  changes 
blue  cabbage  juice  to  a green.  It  is  unalterable  by  the 
heat  of  our  furnace^.  It  splits  and  falls  into  powder  in 
the  air,  and  loses  its  strong  taste.  It  is  augmented  in 
weight  and  in  size  by  slowly  absorbing  water  and  car- 
bonic acid  from  the  atmosphere.  Its  specific  gravity  is 
2.3.  It  combines  with  phosphorus  by  heat.  It  unites 
to  sulphur  both  in  the  dry  and  humid  way.  It  absorbs 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  It  unites  with  some  of  the 
metallic  oxides.  Its  slaking  by  water  is  attended  with 
heat,  hissing,  splitting,  and  swelling  up,  while  the  water 
is  partly  consolidated  and  partly  converted  into  vapour; 
and  the  lime  is  reduced  into  a very  voluminous  dry 
powder,  when  it  has  been  sprinkled  with  only  a small 
quantity  of  water.  It  is  soluble  when  well  prepared 
in  about  450  parts  of  water.  It  unites  to  acids.  It  ren- 
ders silex  and  alumine  fusible,  and  more  particularly 
these  two  earths  together. 

Method  of  obtaining  Lime—  Since  the  carbonic  acid 
may  be  separated  from  the  native  carbonate  of  lime, 
this  becomes  a means  of  exhibiting  the  lime  in  a state 
of  tolerable  purity.  For  this  purpose,  introduce  into 
a porcelain,  or  earthen  retort,  or  rather  into  a tube  of 
green  glass,  well  coated  over  with  lute,  and  placed 
across  a furnace,  some  powdered  Carara  marble,  or 
oyster-shell  powder.  Adapt  to  its  lower  extremity  a r 
bent  tube  of  glass,  conveyed  under  a bell.  If  we  then 
heat  the  tube,  we  obtain  carbonic  acid  gas;  and  lime 
will  be  found  remaining  in  the  tube  or  retort. 

The  burning  of  lime  in  the  large  way,  depends  on 
the  disengagement  of  the  carbonic  acid  by  heat;  and, 
as  lime  is  infusible  in  our  furnaces,  there  would  be  no 
danger  from  too  violent  a heat,  if  the  native  carbonate 
of  lime  were  perfectly  pure ; but  as  this  is  seldom  the 
case,  an  extreme  degree  of  heat  produces  a commence- 
ment of  vitrification  in  the  mixed  stone,  and  enables  it 
to  preserve  its  solidity,  and  it  no  longer  retains  the 
qualities  of  lime,  for  it  is  covered  with  a sort  of  crust, 
which  prevents  the  absorption  of  the  water  when  it  is 
attempted  to  be  slaked.  This  is  called  over-burnt 
lime. 

In  order  to  obtain  lime  in  a state  of  great  purity,  the 
following  method  may  be  had  recourse  to. 

Take  Carara  marble,  or  oyster-shells ; reduce  them 
to  powder,  and  dissolve  the  powder  in  pure  acetic 
acid ; precipitate  the  solution  by  carbonate  of  ammo- 
nia. Let  the  precipitate  subside,  wash  it  repeatedly 
in  distilled  water,  let  it  dry,  and  then  expose  it  to  a 
white  heat  for  some  hours. 

The  acetic  acid,  in  this  operation,  unites  to  the  lime, 
and  forms  acetate  of  lime,  disengaging  at  the  same 
time  the  carbonic  acid,  which  flies  off  in  the  gaseous 
state : on  adding  to  the  acetate  of  lime  carbonate  of 
ammonia,  acetate  of  ammonia,  and  an  artificial  car- 
bonate of  lime  are  formed ; from  the  latter  the  car- 
bonic acid  is  again  expelled,  by  exposure  to  heat,  and 
the  lime  is  left  behind  in  a state  of  perfect  purity.  See 
Calx. 

2.  A fruit  like  a small  lemon,  the  juice  of  which  is  a 
very  strong  acid,  and  very  much  used  in  the  making 
of  punch.  Externally,  the  same  acid  is  applied  in  the 
cutaneous  affections  of  warm  climates,  and  also  as  a 


remedy  against  the  pains  that  precede  the  appearance 
of  yaws.  See  Ttlia. 

Lime,  chloride  of.  The  bleaching  salt  or  bleach- 
ing powder,  sold  under  the  name  of  oxymuriate  of 
lime. 

LIMESTONE.  A genus  of  minerals  which  Pro- 
fessor Jameson  divides  into  the  four  following  species: 

1.  Rhombspar.  2.  Dolomite.  3.  Limestone.  4. 
Arragonite. 

Limestone  has  twelve  sub-species. 

1.  Foliated  limestone.  Of  this  there  are  two  kinds, 
calcareous  spar,  and  foliated  granular  limestone. 

2.  Compact  limestone,  of  which  there  are  three 
kinds,  common  compact  limestone,  blue  Vesuvian,  and 
rosestone. 

3.  Chalk. 

4.  Agaric-mineral,  or  Rock  milk. 

5.  Fibrous  limestone,  to  which  belong  the  satin  spar, 
and  the  fibrous  calc-sinter. 

6.  Tufaceous  limestone , or  calc-tuff. 

7.  Pisiform  limestone,  ox  peas  tone. 

8.  Slatespar. 

9.  Aphrite. 

10.  Luculite,  of  which  there  are  three  kinds,  com- 
pact, prismatic,  and  foliated. 

11.  Marie,  of  which  there  are  two  species,  the 
earthy  and  compact. 

12.  Bituminous  marie  slate. 

Limestone , bituminous.  See  Bituminous  limestone. 

LIME-TREE.  See  Tilia. 

Lime-water.  See  Calcis  liquor. 

LI'MON.  (Hebrew.)  See  Citrus  medica 

LIMO'NIUM.  (From  Xeip ojv,  a green  field;  so 
called  from  its  colour.)  This  name  has  been  applied 
to, 

1.  The  Valeriana  rubra. 

2.  The  Polygonum  fagopyrum. 

3.  The  Pyroli  rotundifolia. 

4.  More  commonly  to  the  sea-lavender,  or  Statice 
limonium,  of  Linnteus,  which  is  said  to  possess  astrin- 
gent properties. 

LIMO'NUM.  (From  Xcipwv,  a green  field:  so 
called  from  the  colour  of  its  unripe  fruit.)  The  lemon- 
tree.  See  Citrus  medica. 

LIMOSIS.  (From  \iposv  hunger.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Cceli- 
aca;  Order,  Enterica.  Morbid  appetite.  It  has  seven 
species,  viz.  Limosis  avens,  expers,  pica,  cardialgia, 
flatus , emesis , dyspepsia. 

LINACRE,  Thomas,  was  born  at  Canterbury, 
about  the  year  1460.  After  studying  at  Oxford,  he 
travelled  to  Italy,  where  he  acquired  a perfect  know- 
ledge of  the  Latin  and  Greek  languages;  and  after- 
ward devoted  his  attention  to  medicine  and  natural 
philosophy  at  Rome.  On  his  return,  he  graduated  at 
Oxford,  and  gave  lectures  there  on  physic,  as  well  as 
taught  the  Greek  language.  His  reputation  soon  be- 
came so  high,  that  he  was  called  to  court  by  Henry 
VII.  who  not  only  intrusted  him  with  the  education 
of  his  children,  but  also  appointed  him  his  physician  ; 
which  office  he  likewise  enjoyed  under  his  successor, 
Henry  VIII.  He  appears  in  this  monarch’s  reign  to 
have  stood,  above  all  rivalship,  at  the  head  of  his  pro- 
fession; and  evinced  his  attachment  to  its  interests,  as 
well  as  to  the  public  good,  by  founding  medical  lec- 
tures at  the  two  universities,  and  obtaining  the  institu- 
tion, in  1518,  of  the  royal  college  of  physicians  in  Lon- 
don. The  practice  of  medicine  was  then  occupied  by 
illiterate  monks  and  empirics,  who  were  licensed  by 
the  bishops,  whence  much  mischief  must  have  arisen. 
A corporate  body  of  regularly  bred  physicians  was 
therefore  established,  in  whom  was  vested  the  sole 
right  of  examining  and  admitting  persons  to  practice, 
as  well  as  of  examining  apothecaries’  shops.  Linacre 
was  the  first  president,  which  office  he  retained  during 
the  remainder  of  his  life ; and,  at  his  death,  in  1524, 
bequeathed  his  house  to  the  college.  He  had  relin- 
quished practice,  and  entered  into  holy  orders,  about 
five  years  before,  being  greatly  afflicted  with  the  stone, 
whichwasthe  cause  of  his  dissolution.  In  his  literary 
character,  Linacre  stands  eminently  distinguished, 
having  been  one  of  the  first  to  introduce  the  learning 
of  the  ancients  into  this  country.  He  translated  seve- 
ral of  the  most  valuable  works  of  Galen  into  Latin; 
and  his  style  is  remarkable  for  its  purity  and  elegance; 
he  had  indeed  devoted  great  time  to  Latin  composi- 
tion, on  which  be  published  a large  philosophical 


LIN 


LIN 


treatise.  Ilis  professional  skill  was  universally  al- 
lowed among  his  conteihporaries,  as  well  as  the  ho- 
nour and  humanity  with  which  he  exercised  the  medi- 
cal art;  and  the  celebrated  Erasmus  has  bestowed 
upon  him  the  highest  commendation.  He  was  buried 
Li  St.  Paul's  Cathedral,  where  a monument  was  after- 
ward erected  to  his  memory,  with  a Latin  inscription, 
by  Dr.  Caius. 

LINAGROSTIS.  (From  Aivov,  cotton,  and  aypm^is, 
grass : so  called  from  the  softness  of  its  texture.)  Cot- 
ton-grass. The  Eriophorum  of  Linnaeus,  four  species 
of  which  are  found  in  Britain. 

LINANGI'NA.  (From  linum,  flax,  and  ango,  to 
strangle : so  called  because,  if  it  grows  among  flax  or 
hemp,  it  twists  round  it,  and  chokes  it.)  The  herb 
dodder.  The  Cuscuta  europcea  of  Linnams. 

LINA'RIA.  (From  linum,  flax:  named  from  the 
resemblance  of  its  leaves  to  those  of  flax.)  See  An- 
tirrhinum Unarm. 

LI'NCTUS.  (Linctus,  us.  m. ; from  lingo,  to  lick.) 
Lohoc;  Eclegma;  Elexis ; Elegma;  Ecleclos ; Eclei- 
tos ; lllinctus.  A loch,  a lambative.  A term  in 
pharmacy,  that  is  generally  applied  to  a soft  and  some- 
what oily  substance,  of  the  consistence  of  honey, 
which  is  licked  oft"  the  spoon,  it  being  too  solid  and 
adhesive  to  be  taken  otherwise. 

LI'NrEA.  (From  linum,  a thread.)  This  term  is 
applied  to  some  parts  which  have  a thread  or  line-like 
appearance,  as  the  long  tendinous  appearance  of  the 
muscles  in  the  abdomen,  &c. 

Line  a alba.  Linea  centralis.  An  aponeurosis 
that  extends  from  the  scrobiculus  cordis  straight  down 
to  the  navel,  and  from  thence  to  the  pubes.  It  is 
formed  by  the  tendinous  fibres  of  the  internal  oblique 
ascending  and  the  external  oblique  descending  muscles, 
and  the  transversalis,  interlaced  with  those  of  the  op- 
posite side. 

Linee  semilunares.  The  lines  which  bound 
the  outer  margin  of  the  recti  muscles,  formed  by  the 
union  of  the  abdominal  tendons. 

Linee  transverse.  The  lines  which  cross  the 
recti  muscles  of  the  abdomen. 

LINEARIS.  Linear.  Applied  to  leaves,  petals, 
leaf-stalks,  seeds,  &c.  of  plants,  which  are  narrow, 
with  parallel  sides,  as  the  leaves  of  most  grasses,  those 
of  the  Narcissus,  Pseudo-narcissus , and  the  petals  of 

le  Tussilago  farfara,  leaf-stalk  of  the  Citrus  mc- 

ica,  and  seeds  of  the  Crucianella. 

LIN  EAT  US.  Lineate.  See  Linearis. 

LI  NGUA.  (From  lingo,  to  lick  up.)  The  tongue. 
See  Tongue. 

Lingua  avis.  The  seeds  of  the  Fraxinus,  or  ash, 
are  so  called,  from  their  supposed  resemblance  to  a 
bird’s  tongue. 

Lingua  canina.  So  called  from  the  resemblance 
of  its  leaves  to  a dog’s  tongue.  See  Cynoglossum. 

Lingua  cervina.  See  Asplenium  Scolopendrium. 

LINGUA'LIS.  (From  lingua,  the  tongue.)  Basio- 
glossus,  of  Cowper.  A muscle  of  the  tongue.  It  arises 
from  the  root  of  the  tongue  laterally,  and  runs  for- 
ward between  the  liyo-glossus  and  genio-glossus,  to  be 
inserted  into  the  tip  of  the  tongue,  along  with  part  of 
the  stylo-glossus.  Its  use  is  to  contract  the  substance 
of  the  tongue,  and  to  bring  it  backwards. 

LINGUIFORMIS.  See  Lingulatus. 

LINGULATUS.  (From  lingua , a tongue.)  Tongue- 
shaped. A term  applied  to  a leaf  of  a thick,  oblong, 
blunt  figure,  generally  cartilaginous  at  the  edges : as  in 
the  Mesemhryanthemum  linguiforme. 

LINIMENT.  See  Linimentum. 

LINIME'NTUM.  (From  lino,  to  anoint.)  A lini- 
ment. An  oily  substance  of  a mediate  consistence, 
between  an  ointment  and  oil,  but  so  thin  as  to  drop. 
The  following  are  some  of  the  most  approved  forms. 

Linimentum  eruginis.  Liniment  of  verdigris, 
formerly  called  oxymel  anuginis,  mel  aegyptiacum,  and 
unguentum  segyptiacum : — Take  of  verdigris,  pow- 
dered, an  ounce ; vinegar,  seven  fluid  ounces ; clarified 
honey,  fourteen  ounces.  Dissolve  the  verdigris  in  the 
vinegar,  and  strain  it  through  a linen  cloth ; having 
added  the  honey,  gradually  boil  it  down  to  a proper 
consistence. 

Linimentum  ammonie  fortius.  Strong  liniment 
of  ammonia. — Take  of  solution  of  ammonia,  a fluid 
ounce ; olive  oil,  two  fluid  ounces.  Shake  them  toge- 
ther until  they  unite.  A more  powerful  stimulating 
application  than  the  former,  acting  as  a rubefacient- 1 
2t> 


In  pleurodynia,  indolent  tumours,  stiffness  of  the 
joints,  and  anthritic  pains,  it  is  to  be  preferred  to  the 
milder  one. 

Linimentum  ammonie  subcarbonatis.  Liniment 
of  subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  formerly  called  linimen- 
tum ammonia;  and  linimentum  volatile.— Take  of  so- 
lution of  subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  a fluid  ounce ; olive 
oil,  three  fluid  ounces.  Shake  them  together  until 
they  unite.  A stimulating  liniment,  mostly  used  to 
relieve  rheumatic  pains,  bruises,  and  paralytic  numb- 
ness. 

Linimentum  aque  calcis.  Liniment  of  lime- 
water.  Take  of  lime-water,  olive  oil,  of  each  eight 
ounces;  rectified  spirit  of  wine,  one  ounce.  Mix. 
This  has  been  long  in  use  as  an  application  to  burns 
and  scalds. 

Linimentum  camphor.®.  Camphor  liniment.  Take 
of  camphor,  half  an  ounce ; olive  oil,  two  fluid  ounces. 
Dissolve  the  camphor  in  the  oil.  In  .retentions  of 
urine,  rheumatic  pains,  distentions  of  the  abdomen 
from  ascites,  and  tension  of  the  skin  from  abscess,  this 
is  an  excellent  application. 

Linimentum  camphore  compositum.  Compound 
camphor  liniment.  Take  of  camphor,  two  ounces; 
solution  of  ammonia,  six  fluid  ounces ; spirit  of  laven- 
der, a pint.  Mix  the  solution  of  ammonia  with  the 
spirit  in  a glass  retort ; then,  by  the  heat  of  a slow  fire, 
distil  a pint.  Lastly,  in  this  distilled  liquor  dissolve 
the  camphor.  An  elegant  and  useful  stimulant  appli- 
cation in  paralytic,  spasmodic,  aud  rheumatic  diseases. 
Also,  for  bruises,  sprains,  rigidities  of  the  joints,  incipi- 
ent chilblains,  &c.  &c. 

Linimentum  hvdrargyri.  Mercurial  liniment. 
Take  of  strong  mercurial  ointment,  prepared  lard,  of 
each  four  ounces,  camphor  an  ounce ; rectified  spirit, 
fifteen  minims ; solution  of  ammonia,  four  fluid  ounces. 
First  powder  the  camphor,  with  the  addition  of  the 
spirit,  then  rub  it  with  the  mercurial  ointment  and  the 
lard;  lastly,  add  gradually  the  solution  of  ammonia, 
and  mix  the  whole  together.  An  excellent  formula  for 
all  surgical  cases,  in  which  the  object  is  to  quicken  the 
action  of  the  absorbents,  and  gently  stimulate  the  sur- 
faces of  parts.  It  is  a useful  application  for  diminish- 
ing the  indurated  state  of  particular  muscles,  a pecu- 
liar affection  every  now  and  then  met  with  in  practice  • 
and  it  is  peculiarly  well  calculated  for  lessening  the 
stiffness  and  chronic  thickening  often  noticed  in  the 
joints.  If  it  be  frequently  or  largely  applied,  it  af- 
fects the  mouth  more  rapidly  than  the  mercurial  oint- 
ment. 

Linimentum  opiatum.  A resolvent  anodyne  em- 
brocation, adapted  to  remove  indolent  tumours  of  the 
joints,  and  those  weaknesses  which  remain  after 
strains  and  chilblains  before  they  break. 

Linimentum  saponis  compositum.  Compound 
soap  liniment.  Linimentum  saponis.  Take  of  hard 
soap,  three  ounces ; camphor,  an  ounce ; spirit  of  rose- 
mary, a pint.  Dissolve  the  camphor  in  the  spirit,  then 
add  the  soap,  and  macerate  in  the  heat  of  a sand-bath, 
until  it  be  melted.  The  basis  of  this  form  was  first 
proposed  by  Riverius,  and  it  is  now  commonly  used 
under  the  name  of  opodeldoc.  This  is  a more  pleasant 
preparation,  to  rub  parts  affected  with  rheumatic  pains, 
swellings  of  the  joints,  &c.  than  any  of  the  foregoing, 
and  at  the  same  time  not  inferior,  except  where  a 
rubefacient  is  required. 

Linimentum  saponis  cum  opio.  Soap  liniment, 
with  opium.  Take  of  compound  soap  liniment,  six 
ounces;  tincture  of  opium,  two  ounces.  Mix.  For 
dispersing  indurations  and  swellings,  attended  with 
pain,  but  no  acute  inflammation. 

Linimentum  terebinthine.  Turpentine  liniment. 
Take  of  resin  cerate,  a pound ; oil  of  turpentine,  half 
a pint.  Add  the  oil  of  turpentine  to  the  cerate,  pre- 
viously melted,  and  mix.  This  liniment  is  very  com- 
monly applied  to  burns,  and  was  first  introduced  by 
Mr.  Kentish, ‘of  Newcastle. 

Linimentum  terebinthine  vitriolicum.  Vitri- 
olic liniment  of  turpentine.  Take  of  olive  oil,  ten 
ounces;  oil  of  turpentine,  four  ounces;  vitriolic  acid, 
three  drachms.  Mix.  This  preparation  is  said  to  be 
efficacious  in  chronic  affections  of  the  joints,  and  in 
the  removal  of  long-existing  effects  of  sprains  and 
bruises. 

Liniment  of  ammonia.  See  Linimentum  ammonia. 

Liniment  of  camphire.  See  Linimentum  camphora. 

I Liniment  of  mercury.  See  Linimentum  hydrargyri 


LIP 


LIN 

Liniment  of  turpentine.  S§e  Liniment  um  terebin- 
thince. 

Liniment  of  verdigris.  See  Linimcntum  ceruginis. 

LINNiE'A.  (So  named  in  honour  of  Linnarus.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan  system. 
Class,  Didynamia;  Order,  Angiospermia. 

LinNjEa  borealis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  named  in  honour  of  the  immortal  Linnams, 
which  has  a bitter,  subastringent  taste,  and  is  used  in 
some  places  in  the  form  of  fomentation,  to  rheumatic 
pains,  and  an  infusion  with  milk  is  much  esteemed  in 
Switzerland  in  the  cure  of  sciatica, 

LINNAGUS,  Charles,  was  born  in  Sweden,  in  1707. 
He  derived  at  a very  early  age  from  his  father,  that  at- 
tachment to  the  study  of  nature,  by  which  he  after- 
ward so  eminently  distinguished  himself.  He  was  in- 
tended for  the  church,  but  made  so  little  improvement 
in  the  requisite  learning,  that  this  was  soon  abandoned 
for  the  profession  of  medicine.  He  appears  to  have 
had  a singular  inaptitude  for  learning  languages ; 
though  he  was  sufficiently  versed  in  Latin.  His  scanty 
finances  much  embarrassed  his  progress  at  first;  but 
his  taste  for  botany  at  length  having  procured  him  the 
patronage  of  Dr.  Celsius,  professor  of  divinity  at  Upsal, 
he  was  enabled  to  pursue  his  studies  to  more  advan- 
tage. In  1730,  he  was  appointed  to  give  lectures  in 
the  botanic  garden,  and  began  to  compose  some  of 
those  works,  by  which  he  rendered  his  favourite  science 
more  philosophical,  and  more  popular  than  it  had 
ever  been  before.  Two  years  afterward  he  was  com- 
missioned to  make  a tour  through  Lapland,  of  which 
he  subsequently  published  an  interesting  account;  and 
having  learned  the  art  of  assaying  metals,  he  gave  lec- 
tures on  this  subject  also  on  his  return.  In  1735,  he 
took  his  degree  in  physic  at  Harderwyck,  and  in  his 
inaugural  dissertation  advanced  a strange  hypothesis, 
that  intermittent  fevers  are  owing  to  particles  of  clay, 
taken  in  with  the  food,  obstructing  the  minute  arteries. 
Soon  after  this,  his  Systema  Naturae  first  appeared ; 
which  was  greatly  enlarged  and  improved  in  numerous 
successive  editions.  In  Holland,  he  fortunately  ob- 
tained the  support  of  a Mr.  Clifford-,  an  opulent  banker, 
whereby  he  was  enabled  to  visit  England  also;  but 
his  great  exertions  afterward  impaired  his  health,  and 
being  attacked  with  a severe  intermittent,  he  could  not 
resist  the  desire,  when  somewhat  recovered,  of  return- 
ing to  his  native  country.  Arriving  there  in  1738,  he 
settled  at  Stockholm,  where  his  reputation  soon  pro- 
cured him  some  medical  practice,  and  the  appointment 
of  physician  to  the  navy,  as  well  as  lecturer  on  botany 
and  mineralogy ; a literary  society  was  also  established, 
of  which  he  was  the  first  president,  and  by  which  nu- 
merous volumes  of  transactions  have  since  been  pub- 
lished. In  1740,  he  was  chosen  professor  of  medicine 
at  Upsal,  having  been  admitted  a member  of  that  aca- 
demy on  his  return  to  Sweden ; he  also  shared  with  Dr. 
Rosen  the  botanical  duties,  and  considerably  improved 
the  garden ; he  was  afterward  made  secretary,  and  on 
some  public  occasions  did  the  honours  of  the  univer- 
sity. He  received  likewise  marks  of  distinction  from 
several  foreign  societies.  About  the  year  1746,  he  was 
appointed  Archiater;  and  it  became  an  object  of  na- 
tional interest  to  make  additions  to  his  collection  from 
every  part  of  the  world.  A systematic  treatise  on  the 
Materia  Medica  was  published  by  him  in  1749  ; and 
two  years  after  his  Philosophia  Botanica,  composed 
during  a severe  fit  of  the  gout,  in  which  he  supposed 
himself  to  have  derived  great  benefit  from  taking  a 
large  quantity  of  wood  strawberries.  This  was  soon 
followed  by  his  great  work,  the  Species  Plantarum ; 
after  which  he  was  honoured  with  the  order  of  the  Polar 
Star,  never  before  conferred  for  literary  merit;  and 
having  declined  a splended  invitation  to  Spain,  he  was 
raised  to  the  rank  of  nobility.  In  1763  his  son  was 
allowed  to  assist  him  in  the  botanical  duties.  About 
this  time  he  published  his  Genera  Morborum,  and 
three  years  after  his  Clavis  Medicine.  His  medical 
lectures,  though  too  theoretical,  were  very  much  es- 
teemed ; but  he  had  declined  general  practice  on  his 
establishment  at  Upsal.  As  he  advanced  in  life,  the 
fatiguing  occupations  in  which  he  was  engaged  im- 
paired his  health,  notwithstanding  his  temperate  and 
regular  habits;  and  at  length  brought  on  his  dissolu- 
tion in  1778.  This  was  regarded  as  a loss  to  the 
nation,  and  even  to  the  world.  About  ten  years  after, 
a society,  adopting  his  name,  was  formed  in  this  coun- 
try, which  has  published  many  valuable  volumes  of 


transactions,  and  the  president  purchased  Linnrrus  n 
collections  of  his  widow;  similar  institutions  have  also 
been  established  in  other  parts  of  the  world. 

Linn.ean  system.  This  name  is  applied  particularly 
to  that  arrangement  of  plants,  which  Linmeus  has 
founded  on  the  fructification  or  sexes  of  plants.  See 
Sexual  system  of  plants. 

LINOSPE'RMUM.  (From  \ivov , flax,  and  cneppa, 
seed.)  See  Linum  usitatissimum. 

Linozostris.  A name  given  by  the  ancient  Greek 
writers  to  two  plants,  very  different  from  one  another. 
The  one  is  the  Mercurialise  or  British  mercury ; the 
other  the  Epilinum , or  dodder. 

LINSEED.  See  Linum  usitatissimum. 

LINT.  See  Linteum. 

LI'NTEUM.  Lint.  A soft,  woolly  substance,  made 
by  scraping  old  linen  cloth,  and  employed  in  surgery  as 
the  common  dressing  iu  all  cases  of  wounds  and  ulco.  s, 
either  simply  or  covered  with  different  unctuous  sub- 
stances. 

LI'NUM.  (From  Aaoj,  soft,  smooth : so  called  from 
its  soft,  smooth  texture.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria. 
Order,  Pentagynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  common  flax. 
See  Linum  usitatissimum. 

Linum  catharticum.  Linum  minimum  ; Chamcc- 
lium.  Purging  flax,  or  mill-mountain.  This  small 
plant,  Linum— foliis  oppositis  ovato-lanceolatis , caule 
dichotomo , corollis  acutis,  of  Linnaus,  is  an  effectual 
and  safe  cathartic.  It  has  a bitterish  and  disagreeable 
taste.  A handful  infused  in  half  a pint  of  boiling 
water  is  the  dose  for  an  adult. 

Linum  usitatissimum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  flax.  Linum  sylvestre.  Linum — calyci- 
bus  capsulisque  mucronatis , petalis  crenatis,  foliis 
lanceolatis  alternis , caule  subsolitario,  of  Linna:us. 
The  seeds  of  this  useful  plant,  called  linseed,  have  an 
unctuous,  mucilaginous,  sweetish  taste,  but  no  remark- 
able smell ; on  expression  they  yield  a large  quantity 
of  oil,  which,  when  carefully  drawn  without  the  appli 
cation  of  heat,  has  no  particular  taste  or  flavour: 
boiled  in  water,  they  yield  a large  proportion  of  strong 
flavourless  mucilage,  which  is  in  use  as  an  emollient  or 
demulcent  in  cough,  hoarseness,  and  pleuritic  symp- 
toms, that  frequently  prevail  in  catarrhal  affections 
and  it  is  likewise  recommended  in  nephritic  pains  anu 
stranguries.  The  meal  of  the  seeds  is  also  much  used 
externally,  in  emollient  and  maturating  cataplasms. 
The  expressed  oil  is  an  officinal  preparation,  and  is 
supposed  to  be  of  a more  healing  and  balsamic  nature 
than  the  other  oils  of  this  class:  it  has,  therefore,  been 
very  generally  employed  in  pulmonary  complaints,  and 
in  colics  and  constipations  of  the  bowels.  The  cake 
which  remains  after  the  expression  of  the  oil,  contains 
the  farinaceous  part  of  the  seed,  and  is  used  in  fatten- 
ing cattle  under  the  name  of  oil-cake. 

Lion-toothed  leaf.  See  Runcinatus. 

LI'PARIS.  (From  \n -os,  fat:  so  npmed  from  its 
unctuous  quality.)  See  Pinguicula. 

LIPAROCE'LE.  (From  Ai7ros,  fat,  and  a tu- 

mour.) That  species  of  sarcocele  in  which  the  sub- 
stance constituting  thedisease  very  much  resembles  fat. 

LIPO'MA.  (From  Atroj,  fat.)  A solitary,  soft, 
unequal,  indolent  tumour,  arising  from  a luxuriancy  of 
adeps  in  the  cellular  membrane.  The  adipose  struc- 
ture forming  the  tumour  is  sometimes  diseased  towards 
its  centre,  and  more  fluid  than  the  rest.  At  other  times 
it  does  not  appear  to  differ  in  any  respect  from  adipose 
membrane,  except  in  the  enlargement  of  the  cells  con- 
taining the  fat.  These  tumours  are  always  many  years 
before  they  arrive  at  anv  size. 

LIPOPSY'CHIA.  (From  Anirw,  to  leave,  and  ipvxv, 
the  soul,  or  life.)  A swoon,  or  fainting.  See  Syncope. 

LIPOTHY'MIA.  (From  A«7tw,  to  leave,  and  dvpos , 
the  mind.)  Fainting.  See  Syncope. 

LIPPITU'DO.  (Prom  lippus,  blear-eyed.)  Epi- 
phora; Xerophthalmia.  Blcar-eyedness,  An  exuda- 
tion of  a puriform  humour  from  the  margin  of  the 
eyelids.  The  proximate  cause  is  a deposition  of  acri- 
mony on  the  glandular  meibomian®  in  the  margin  of 
the  eyelids.  This  humour  in  the  night  glues  the  tarsi 
of  the  eyelids  together.  The  margins  of  the  eyelids 
are  red  and  tumefy,  are  irritated,  and  excite  pain.  An 
opthalmia,  fistula  lachryinalis,  and  sometimes  an  ectro 
pium,  are  the  consequences.  The  species  of  the  lippi 
tudo  are, 


27 


LIS 


LIQ 

1.  Lippitudo  infantum , which  is  familiar  to  children, 
particularly  of  an  acrimonious  habit.  The  lippitudo  of 
infants  is  mostly  accompanied  with  tinea,  or  some 
scabby  eruption,  which  points  out  that  the  disease 
originates,  not  from  a local,  but  general  or  constitu- 
tional affection. 

2.  Lippitudo  adultorum,  or  senilis.  This  arises  from 
various  acrimonies,  and  is  likewise  common  to  hard 
drinkers. 

3.  Lippitudo  venerea , which  arises  from  a suppressed 
gonorrhoea,  or  fluor  albus,  and  is  likewise  observed  of 
children  born  of  parents  with  venereal  complaints. 

4.  Lippitudo  scrophulosa,  which  accompanies  other 
scrofulous  symptoms. 

5.  Lippitudo  scorbutica , which  affects  the  scorbutic. 

Lipy'ria.  (From  Xairw,  to  leave,  and  nvp,  heat.) 

A sort  of  fever,  where  the  heat  is  drawn  to  the  inward 
parts,  while  the  externals  are  cold. 

LIQUIDA'MBAR.  (From  liquidum,  fluid,  and  am- 
bar,  a fragrant  substance,  generally  taken  for  amber- 
gris; alluding  to  the  aromatic  liquid  gum  which  distils 
from  this  tree.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Moncecia  ; Order,  Polyandria. 

Liquidambar  styraciflua.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  tree  which  affords  both  the  liquid  amber  and  sto- 
rax  liquida , or  liquid  storax.  The  liquid  amber  is  a 
resinous  juice  of  a yellow  colour,  inclining  to  red,  at 
first  about  the  consistence  of  turpentine,  by  age  hard- 
ened into  a solid  brittle  mass.  It  is  obtained  by  wound- 
ing the  bark  of  this  tree,  which  is  described  by  Lin- 
naeus the  Liquidambar — foliis  palmato-angulatis  ; 
foliis  indivisis , acutis.  The  juice  has  a moderately 
pungent,  warm,  balsamic  taste,  and  a very  fragrant 
smell,  not  unlike  that  of  the  Styrax  calamita  height- 
ened by  a little  ambergris.  It  is  seldom  used  medi- 
cinally. The  Styrax  liquida  is  also  obtained  from  this 
plant  by  boiling.  There  are  two  sorts  distinguished  by 
authors  ; the  one  the  purer  part  of  the  resinous  matter, 
that  rises  to  the  surface  in  boiling,  separated  by  a 
strainer,  of  the  consistence  of  honey,  tenacious  like  tur- 
pentine, of  a reddish  or  ash-  brown  colour,  moderately 
transparent,  of  an  acrid  unctuous  taste  and  a fragrant 
smell,  faintly  resembling  that  of  the  solid  styrax,  but 
somewhat  disagreeable.  The  other,  the  more  impure 
part,  which  remains  on  the  strainer,  Untransparent,  and 
in  smell  and  taste  much  weaker  than  the  former.  Their 
use  is  chiefly  as  stomachics,  in  the  form  of  plaster. 

LIQUIFACTION.  A chemical  term,  in  some  in- 
stances synonymous  with  fusion,  in  others  with  the  word 
deliquescence , and  in  others  with  the  word  solution. 

LIQUIRI'TIA.  (From  liquor , juice,  or  from  eli- 
koris,  Welsh.)  See  Glycyrrhiza. 

LI'QUOR.  A liquor.  This  term  is  applied  in  the 
last  editions  of  the  London  Pharmacopoeia  to  some 
preparations,  before  improperly  called  waters  ; as  the 
aqua  ammonia , &c. 

Liquor  acetatis  plumbi.  See  Plumbi  acetatis 
liquor. 

Liquor  acetatis  plumbi  dilutus.  See  Plumbi 
acetatis  liquor  dilutus. 

Liquor  a:thereus  vitriolicus.  See  JEther  sul- 
phuricus. 

Liquor  a luminis  compositus.  Compound  solution 
of  alum.  Take  of  alum,  sulphate  of  zinc,  of  each 
half  an  ounce  ; boiling  water  two  pints.  Dissolve  at 
the  same  time  the  alum  and  sulphate  of  zinc  in  the 
water,  and  then  strain  the  solution  through  paper. 
This  water  was  long  known  in  our  shops  under  the 
title  of  Aqua  aluminosa  batcana.  It  is  used  for  cleans- 
ing and  healing  ulcers  and  wounds,  and  for  removing 
cutaneous  eruptions,  the  part  being  bathed  with  it  hot 
three  or  four  times  a-day.  It  is  sometimes  likewise 
employed  as  a collyrium  ; and  as  an  injection  in  fluor 
albus  and  gonorrhoea,  when  not  accompanied  with 
virulence. 

Liquor  ammonia.  See  Ammonia. 

Liquor  ammonia:  acetatis.  See  Ammonia  acetatis 
liquor. 

Liquor  ammonia  carbonatis.  See  Ammonia  sub- 
carbonatis  liquor. 

Liquor  ammonias  subcarbonatis.  See  Ammonia 
subcurbonatis  liquor. 

JAquor  of  ammonia.  See  Ammonia. 

Liquor  amnii.  Ail  that  fluid  which  is  contained  in 
the  membranaceous  ovum  surrounding  the  foetus  in 
uter,  is  caned  by  the  general  name  of  the  waters,  the 
water  of  the  amnion,  or  ovum,  or  liquor  amnii.  The , 
28 


quantity,  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  different  parts 
of  the  ovum,  is  greatest  by  far  in  early  pregnancy.  At 
the  time  of  parturition,  in  some  cases,  it  amounts  to  or 
exceeds  four  pints  ; and,  in  others,  it  is  scarcely  equal 
to  as  many  ounces.  It  is  usuallyin  the  largest  quantity 
when  the  child  has  been  some  time  dead,  or  is  born  in 
a weakly  state.  This  fluid  is  generally  transparent, 
often  milky,  and  sometimes  of  a yellow  or  light-brown 
colour,  and  very  different  in  consistence ; and  these 
alterations  seem  to  depend  upon  the  state  of  the  consti- 
tution of  the  parent  It  does  not  coagulate  with  heat, 
like  the  serum  of  the  blood , and  chemically  examined, 
it  is  found  to  be  composed  of  phlegm,  earthy  matter, 
and  sea-salt,  in  different  proportions  in  different  sub- 
jects, by  which  the  varieties  in  its  appearance  and 
consistence  are  produced.  It  has  been  supposed  to  be 
excrementitious ; but  it  is  generally  thought  to  be 
secreted  from  the  internal  surface  of  the  ovum,  and  to 
be  circulatory  as  in  other  cavities.  It  was  formerly 
imagined  that  the  foetus  was  nourished  by  this  fluid,  of 
which  it  was  said  to  swallow  some  part  frequently  ; 
and  it  was  then  asserted,  that  the  qualities  of  the  fluid 
were  adapted  for  its  nourishment.  But  there  have  been 
many  examples  of  children  born  without  any  passage 
to  the  stomach ; and  a few  of  children  in  which  the 
head  was  wanting,  and  which  have  nevertheless  ar- 
rived at  the  full  size.  These  cases  fully  prove  that  this 
opinion  is  not  just,  and  that  there  must  be  some  other 
medium  by  which  the  child  is  nourished,  besides  the 
waters.  The  incontrovertible  uses  of  this  fluid  are,  to 
serve  the  purpose  of  affording  a soft  bed  for  the  resi- 
dence of  the  foetus,  to  which  it  allows  free  motion,  and 
prevents  any  external  injury  during  pregnancy;  and 
enclosed  in  the  membranes,  it  procures  the  most  gentle, 
yet  efficacious,  dilatation  of  the  os  uteri,  and  soft  parts,  at 
the  time  of  parturition.  Instances  have  been  recorded, 
in  which  the  waters  of  the  ovum  are  said  to  have  been 
voided  so  early  as  in  the  sixth  month  of  pregnancy, 
without  prejudice  either  to  the  child  or  parent.  The 
truth  of  these  reports  seems  to  be  doubtful ; because 
when  the  membranes  are  intentionally  broken,  the 
action  of  the  uterus  never  fails  to  come  on,  when  all 
the  water  is  evacuated.  A few  cases  have  occurred  to 
me,  says  Dr.  Denman,  in  practice,  which  might  have 
been  construed  to  be  of  this  kind  ; for  there  was  a daily 
discharge  of  some  colourless  fluid  from  the  vagina,  for 
several  months  before  delivery;  but  there  being  no 
diminution  of  the  size  of  the  abdomen,  and  the  waters 
being  regularly  discharged  at  the  time  of  labour,  it  was 
judged  that  some  lymphatic  vessel  near  the  os  uteri  had 
been  ruptured,  and  did  not  close  again  till  the  patient 
was  delivered.  He  also  met  with  one  case,  in  which, 
after  the  expulsion  of  the  placenta,  there  was  no  san- 
guineous discharge,  but  a profusion  of  lymph,  to  the 
quantity  of  several  pints,  in  a few  hours  after  delivery, 
but  the  patient  suffered  no  inconvenience  except  from 
surprise. 

Liquor  antimonii  tajrtarizati.  See  Antimonix 

tartarizati  liquor. 

Liquor  arsenicalis.  See  Arsenicalis  liquor. 

Liquor  calcis.  See  Calcis  liquor. 

Liquor  cupri  ammoniati.  See  Cupri  ammoniati 
liquor. 

Liquor  ferri  alkalini.  See  Ferri  alkalini  liquor. 

Liquor  hydrargyri  oxymuriatis.  See  Hydrar 
gyri  oxymurias. 

Liquor  mineralis  anodynus  hoffmanni.  Hoff- 
mann’s anodyne  liquor.  See  Spirilus  atheris  sulphu- 
rici  compositi. 

Liquor  potassa:.  See  Potassa  liquor. 

Liquor  subcarbonatis  potassa;.  See  Potassa 
subcarbonatis  liquor. 

Liquor  volatilis  cornu  cervi.  This  preparation 
of  the  fluid  volatile  alkali,  commonly  termed  hartshorn, 
is  in  common  use  to  smell  at  in  faintings,  &c.  See 
Ammonia  subcarbonas. 

LIQUORICE.  Sec  Glycyrrhiza. 

Liquorice , Spanish.  Se.e  Glycyrrhiza. 

LIRELLA.  (A  diminutive  of  lire , a ridge  between 
two  furrows.)  Acharius’s  name  for  the  black  letter- 
like receptacles  of  the  genus  Opegrapha. 

LISTER,  Martin,  was  born  about  1638,  of  a York- 
shire family,  settled  in  Buckinghamshire,  which  pro- 
duced many  medical  practitioners  of  reputation  ; and 
his  uncle  Sir  Matthew  Lister,  was  physician  to  Charles 
I.  and  president  of  the  college.  After  studying  at 
Cambridge,  where  he  was  made  fellow  of  St.  John’s 


LIT 


LIT 


college,  by  royal  mandate,  he  travelled  to  the  Continent 
for  improvement.  On  his  return,  in  1670,  he  settled  at 
York,  where  he  practised  for  many  years  with  consi- 
derable success.  Having  communicated  many  papers 
on  the  natural  history  and  antiquities  of  the  north  of 
England  to  the  Royal  Society,  he  was  elected  a fellow 
of  that  body;  and  he  likewise  enriched  the  Ashmolean 
Museum  at  Oxford.  He  came  by  the  solicitation  of 
his  friends  to  London  in  1684,  having  received  a diplo- 
ma at  Oxford  ; and  soon  after  was  admitted  a fellow  of 
the  College  of  Physicians.  In  1698  he  accompanied 
the  embassy  to  France,  and  published  an  account  of 
this  journey  on  his  return.  He  was  made  physician  to 
Queen  Anne  about  three  years  before  his  death,  which 
happened  in  the  beginning  of  1712.  He  wrote  on  the 
English  medicinal  waters,  on  small-pox,  and  some 
other  diseases;  but  his  writings,  though  containing 
some  valuable  practical  observations,  are  marked  by 
too  much  hypothesis  and  attachment  to  ancient  doc- 
trines ; and  he  particularly  condemned  the  cooling  plan 
of  treatment  in  febrile  diseases,  introduced  by  the  saga- 
cious Sydenham.  His  reputation  is  principally  founded 
on  his  researches  in  natural  history  and  comparative 
anatomy,  on  which  he  published  several  separate 
works,  as  well  as  nearly  forty  papers  in  the  Philoso- 
phical Transactions. 

LITHAGO'GA.  (From  \idos,  a stone,  and  ayw,  to 
bring  away.)  Medicines  which  expel  the  stone. 

LITHARGE.  See  Lithargyrus. 

Litharge  plaster.  See  Emplastrum  lithargyri. 

LITHA  RGYRUS.  (From  \i9os,  a stone,  and 
apyvpog,  silver.)  Lithargyruvi.  Litharge.  An  oxide 
of  lead,  in  an  imperfect  state  of  vitrification.  When 
silver  is  refined  by  cupellation  with  lead,  this  latter 
metal,  which  is  scorified,  and  causes  the  scorification 
of  the  imperfect  metals  alloyed  with  the  silver,  is  trans- 
formed into  a matter  composed  of  small,  semitranspa- 
rent, shining  plates, resembling  mica;  which  is  litharge. 
Litharge  is  more  or  less  white  or  red,  according  to  the 
metals  with  which  the  silver  is  alloyed.  The  white  is 
called  litharge  of  silver ; and  the  red  has  been  impro- 
perly called  litharge  of  gold.  See  Lead,  and  Plumbi 
subacetatis  liquor. 

LITHIA.  {Lithia,  from \iQuos,lapidcus.)  Lithion; 
I Atkina.  1.  A new  alkali.  It  was  discovered  by 
Arfredson,  a young  chemist  of  great  merit,  employed 
in  the  laboratory  of  Berzelius.  It  was  found  in  a 
mineral  from  the  mine  of  Uten  in  Sweden  called  peta- 
lite  by  D’Andrada,  who  first  distinguished  it.  Sir  H. 
Davy  demonstrated  by  Voltaic  electricity,  that  the  basis 
of  this  alkali  is  a metal,  to  which  the  name  of  lithium 
has  been  given. 

Bernelius  gives  the  following  simple  process  as  a test 
for  lithia  in  minerals:— 

A fragment  of  the  mineral,  the  size  of  a pin’s  head, 
is  to  be  heated  with  a small  excess  of  soda,  on  a piece 
of  platinum  foil,  by  a blowpipe  for  a couple  of  minutes. 
The  stone  is  decomposed,  the  soda  liberates  the  lithia, 
and  the  excess  of  alkali  preserving  the  whole  fluid  at 
this  temperature,  it  spreads  over  the  foil,  and  surrounds 
the  decomposed  mineral.  That  part  of  the  platinum 
near  to  the  fused  alkali  becomes  of  a dark  colour, 
which  is  more  intense,  and  spreads  over  a larger  sur- 
face, in  proportion  as  there  is  more  lithia  in  the  mineral. 
The  oxidation  of  the  platinum  does  not  take  place 
beneath  the  alkali,  but  only  around  it,  where  the  metal 
is  in  contact  with  both  air  and  lithia.  Fotassa  destroys 
the  reaction  of  the  platinum  on  the  lithia,  if  the  lithia 
be  not  redundant.  The  platina  resumes  its  metallic 
surface,  after  having  been  washed  and  heated. 

Caustic  lithia  has  a very  sharp,  burning  taste.  It 
destroys  the  cuticle  of  the  tongue  like  potassa.  It  does 
not  dissolve  with  great  facility  in  water,  and  appears 
not  to  be  much  more  soluble  in  hot  than  in  cold  water. 
In  this  respect  it  has  an  analogy  with  lime.  Heat  is 
evolved  during  its  solution  in  water. 

When  exposed  to  the  air  it  does  not  attract  moist- 
ure but  absorbs  carbonic  acid,  aud  becomes  opaque. 
When  exposed  for  an  hour  to  a white  heat  in  a cover- 
ed platinum  crucible,  its  bulk  does  not  appear  to  be 
diminished : but  it  has  absorbed  a quantity  of  carbonic 
acid. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  No- 
sology. Class,  Eccritica;  Order,  Catotica.  Urinary 
calculus. 

LI'THIAS.  A lithiate,  or  salt,  formed  by  the  union 
of  the  lithic  acid  or  acid  of  the  stone  sometimes  found 


in  the  bladder  of  animals  with  salifiable  bases ; thu» 
lithiate  of  ammonia , &c. 

LITHl'ASIS.  (From  M0os,  a stone.) 

1.  The  formation  of  stone  or  gravel. 

2.  A tumour  of  the  eyelid,  under  which  is  a haid 
concretion  resembling  a stone. 

•LITHIC  ACID.  {Jicidum  lithicum;  from  \i6os,  a 
stone,  because  it  is  obtained  from  the  stones  of  the 
bladder.)  Mcidum  uricum.  This  was  discovered  in 
analyzing  human  calculi,  of  many  of  which  it  consti- 
tutes the  greater  part,  and  of  some,  particularly  that 
which  resembles  wood  in  appearance,  it  forms  almost 
the  whole.  It  is  likewise  present  in  human  urine,  and 
in  that  of  the  camel.  It  is  found  in  those  arthritic 
concretions  commonly  called  chalkstones.  It  is  often 
called  uric  acid. 

The  following  are  the  results  of  Scheele’s  experi- 
ments on  calculi,  which  were  found  to  consist  almost 
wholly  of  this  acid. 

1.  Dilute  sulphuric  acid  produced  no  effect  on  the 
calculus,  but  the  concentrated  dissolved  it;  and  the 
solution,  distilled  to  dryness,  left  a black  coal,  giving 
oft'  sulphurous  acid  fumes.  2.  The  muriatic  acid, 
either  diluted  or  concentrated,  had  no  effect  on  it  even 
with  ebullition.  3.  Dilute  nitric  acid  attacked  it  cold  ; 
and  with  the  assistance  of  heat,  produced  an  efierves 
cence  and  red  vapour,  carbonic  acid  was  evolved,  and 
the  calculus  was  entirely  dissolved.  The  solution  was 
acid,  even  when  saturated  with  the  calculus,  and  gave 
a beautiful  red  colour  to  the  skin  in  half  an  hour  after 
it  was  applied ; when  evaporated,  it  became  of  a blood- 
red,  but  the  colour  was  destroyed  by  adding  a drop  of 
acjd:  it  did  not  precipitate  muriate  of  barytes,  or 
metallic  solutions,  even  with  the  addition  of  an  alkali ; 
alkalies  rendered  if  more  yellow,  and  if  superabundant, 
changed  it  by  a strong  digesting  heat  to  a rose  colour  ; 
and  this  mixture  imparts  a similar  colour  to  the  skin, 
and  is  capable  of  precipitating  sulphate  of  iron  black, 
sulphate  of  copper  green,  nitrate  of  silver  gray,  super- 
oxygenated  muriate  of  mercury,  and  solutions  of  lead 
and  zinc,  white.  Lime-water  produced  in  the  nitric 
solution  a white  precipitate,  which  dissolved  in  the 
nitric  and  muriatic  acids  without  effervescence,  and 
without  destroying  their  acidity.  Oxalic  acid  did  not 
precipitate  it.  4.  Carbonate  of  potassa  did  not  dissolve 
it,  either  cold  or  hot,  but  a solution  of  perfectly  pure 
potassa  dissolved  it  even  cold.  The  solution  was  yel- 
low ; sweetish  to  the  taste ; precipitated  by  all  the  acids, 
even  the  carbonic;  did  not  render  lime-water  turbid  ; 
decomposed  and  precipitated  solution  of  iron  brown, 
of  copper  gray,  of  silver  black,  of  zinc,  mercury,  and 
lead,  white;  and  exhaled  a smell  of  ammonia.  5. 
About  200  parts  of  lime-water  dissolved  the  calculus 
by  digestion,  and  lost  its  acrid  taste.  The  solution  W'as 
partly  precipitated  by  acids.  6.  Pure  water  dissolved 
it  entirely,  but  it  was  necessary  to  boil  for  some  time 
360  parts  with  one  of  the  calculus  in  powder.  This 
solution  reddened  tincture  of  litmus,  did  not  render 
lime-water  turbid,  and  on  cooling  deposited  in  small 
crystals  almost  the  whole  of  what  it  had  taken  up.  7. 
Seventy-two  grains  distilled  in  a small  glass  retort  over 
an  open  fire,  and  gradually  brought  to  a red  heat,  pro- 
duced water  of  ammonia  mixed  with  a little  animal 
oil,  and  a brown  sublimate,  weighing  28  grains,  and  12 
grains  of  coal  remained,  which  preserved  its  black 
colour  on  red-hot  iron  in  the  open  air.  The  brown 
sublimate  was  rendered  white  by  a second  sublimation ; 
was  destitute  of  smell,  even  when  moistened  by  an- 
alkali ; was  acid  to  the  taste ; dissolved  in  boiling 
water,  and  also  in  alkohol,  but  in  Jess  quantity ; did 
not  precipitate  lime-water;  and  appeared  to  resemble 
succinic  acid. 

Fourcroy  has  found,  that  this  acid  is  almost  entirely 
soluble  in  2000  times  its  weight  of  cold  water,  when 
the  powder  is  repeatedly  treated  with  it.  From  his 
experiments  he  infers,  that  it  contains  azote,  with  a 
considerable  portion  of  carbon,  and  but  little  hydrogen, 
and  little  oxygen. 

Of  its  combinations  with  the  basis  we  know  but 
little. 

Much  additional  information  has  been  obtained 
within  these  few  years  on  the  nature  and  habitudes  of 
the  lithic  acid.  Dr.  Henry  wrote  a medical  thesis,  and 
afterward  published  a paper  on  the  subject,  in  the 
second  volume  of  the  new  series  of  the  Manchester 
memoirs,  both  of  which  contain  many  important  facts. 
He  procured  the  acid  in  the  manner  above  described 

59 


LIT 


LIT 


by  Fourcroy.  It  has  the  form  of  white  shining  plates, 
which  are  denser  than  water.  Has  no  taste  nor  smell. 
It  dissolves  in  about  1400  parts  of  boiling  water.  It 
reddens  the  infusion  of  litmus.  When  dissolved  in 
nitric  acid,  and  evaporated  to  dryness,  it  leaves  a pink 
sediment.  The  dry  acid  is  not  acted  on  nor  dissolved 
by  the  alkaline  carbonates,  or  sub-carbonates.  It  de- 
composes soap  when  assisted  by  heat ; as  it  does  also 
the  alkaline  sulphurets  and  hydrosulphurets.  No  acid 
acts  on  it,  except  those  that  occasion  its  decomposition. 
It  dissolves  in  hot  solutions  of  potassa  and  soda,  and 
likewise  in  ammonia,  but  less  readily.  The  lithates 
may  be  formed,  either  by  mutually  saturating  the  two 
constituents,  or  we  may  dissolve  the  acid  in  an  excess 
of  base,  and  we  may  then  precipitate  by  carbonate  of 
ammonia.  The  lithates  are  all  tasteless,  and  resemble 
in  appearance  lithic  acid  itself.  They  are  not  altered 
by  exposure  to  the  atmosphere.  They  are  very  sparing- 
ly soluble  in  water.  They  are  decomposed  by  a red 
heat,  which  destroys  the  acid.  The  lithic  acid  is  pre- 
cipitated from  these  salts  by  all  the  acids,  except  the 
prussic  and  carbonic.  They  are  decomposed  by  the 
nitrates,  muriates,  and  acetates  of  barytes,  strontites, 
lime,  magnesia,  and  alumina.  They  are  precipitated 
by  all  the  metallic  solutions  except  that  of  gold.  When 
lithic  acid  is  exposed  to  heat,  the  products  are  car- 
buretted  hydrogen,  and  carbonic  acid,  prussic  acid, 
carbonate  of  ammonia,  a sublimate,  consisting  of  am- 
monia combined  with  a peculiar  acid,  which  has  the 
following  properties : — 

Its  colour  is  yellow,  and  it  has  a cooling,  bitter  taste. 
It  dissolves  readily  in  water,  and  in  alkaline  solutions, 
from  which  it  is  not  precipitated  by  acids.  It  dissolves 
also  sparingly  in  alkohol.  *It  is  volatile,  and  when 
sublimed  a second  time,  becomes  much  whiter.  The 
watery  solution  reddens  vegetable  blues,  but  a very 
small  quantity  of  ammonia  destroys  this  property.  It 
does  nor  cause  effervescence  with  alkaline  carbonates. 
By  evaporation  it  yields  permanent  crystals,  but  ill 
defined,  from  adhering  animal  matter.  These  redden 
vegetable  blues.  Potassa,  when  added  to  these  crys- 
tals, disengages  ammonia.  When  dissolved  in  nitric 
acid,  they  do  not  leave  a red  stain,  as  happens  with 
uric  acid ; nor  does  their  solution  in  water  decompose 
the  earthy  salts,  as  happens  with  alkaline  lithates  (or 
urates).  Neither  has  it  any  action  on  the  salts  of 
copper,  iron,  gold,  platinum,  tin,  or  mercury.  With 
nitrates  of  silver,  and  mercury,  and  acetate  of  lead,  it 
forms  a white  precipitate,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  nitric 
acid.  Muriatic  acid  occasions  no  precipitate  in  the 
solution  of  these  crystals  in  water.  These  properties 
show,  that  the  acid  of  the  sublimate  is  different  from 
the  uric,  and  from  every  other  known  acid.  Ur.  Austin 
found,  that  by  repeated  distillations  lithic  acid  was  re- 
solved into  ammonia,  nitrogen,  and  prussic  acid. 

When  lithic  acid  is  projected  into  a flask  with  chlo- 
rine, there  is  formed,  in  a little  time,  muriate  of  ammo- 
nia, oxalate  of  ammonia,  carbonic  acid,  muriatic  acid, 
and  malic  acid ; the  same  results  are  obtained  by 
passing  chlorine  through  water,  holding  this  acid  in 
suspension. 

LITHIUM.  The  metallic  basis  of  lithia.  SeeUthia. 

LITHOIDES.  (From  At0os,  a stone,  and  a(5oj,  a 
likeness:  so  called  from  its  hardness.)  The  petrous 
portion  of  the  temporal  bone. 

Litho'labum.  (From  At0os,  a stone,  and  \an6av u>, 
to  seize.)  An  instrument  for  extracting  the  stone  from 
the  bladder. 

LITHO'LOGY.  {IAthologia ; from  At0os,  a stone, 
and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  A discourse,  or  treatise  on 
stones. 

Lithoma'rga.  See  Lithomargc. 

LITHOMARGE.  Stone-marrow.  A mineral,  of 
which  there  are  two  kinds,  the  friable  and  the  in- 
durated. 

LITHONTRIPTIC.  ( Lilkontripticvs ; from  At0oj, 
a stone,  and  t ptSw,  to  bear  away.)  Lithontryptic. 
From  the  strict  sense  and  common  acceptation  of  the 
word,  this  class  of  medicine  should  comprehend  such 
as  possess  a power  of  dissolving  calculi  in  the  urinary 
passages.  It  is,  however,  doubted  by  many,  whether 
there  be  in  nature  any  such  substances.  By  this  term, 
then,  is  meant  those  substances  which  possess  a power 
of  removing  a disposition  in  the  body  to  the  formation 
of  calculi.  The  researches  of  modern  chemists  have 
proved,  that  these  calculi  consist  mostly  of  a peculiar 
acid,  named  the  lithic  or  uric  acid.  With  this  sub 
30 


stance,  the  alkalies  are  capable  of  uniting,  and  form- 
ing a soluble  compound ; and  these  are,  accordingly, 
almost  the  sole  lithontriptics.  From  the  exhibition  of 
alkaline  remedies,  the  symptoms  arising  from  stone  in 
the  bladder  are  very  generally  alleviated ; and  they 
can  be  given  to  such  an  extent  that  the  urine  becomes 
very  sensibly  alkaline,  and  is  even  capable  of  exerting 
a solvent  power  on  these  concretions.  Their  adminis- 
tration, however,  cannot  be  continued  to  this  extent 
for  any  length  of  time,  from  the  irritation  they  produce 
on  the  stomach  and  urinary  organs.  The  use,  there- 
fore, of  the  alkalies,  as  solvents,  or  lithontriptics,  is  now 
scarcely  ever  attempted ; they  are  employed  merely  to 
prevent  the  increase  of  the  concretion,  and  to  palliate 
the  painful  symptoms,  which  they  do  apparently  by 
preventing  the  generation  of  lithic  acid,  or  the  separa- 
tion of  it  by  the  kidneys  ; the  urine  is  thus  rendered 
less  irritating,  and  the  surface  of  the  calculus  is  allowed 
to  become  smooth. 

When  the  alkalies  are  employed  with  this  view,  they 
are  generally  given  neutralized,  or  with  excess  of  car- 
bonic acid.  This  renders  them  nftich  less  irritating 
It  at  the  same  time,  indeed,  diminishes  their  solvent 
power ; for  the  alkaline  carbonates  exert  no  action. on 
urinary  calculi ; but  they  are  still  capable  of  correcting 
that  acidity  in  the  prima?  vise,  which  is  the  cause  of  the 
deposition  of  the  lithic  acid  from  the  urine,  and,  there- 
fore, serve  equally  to  palliate  the  disease.  And  when 
their  acrimony  is  thus  diminished,  their  use  can  be 
continued  for  any  length  of  time. 

It  appears,  from  the  experiments  of  Fourcroy  and 
others,  that  some  other  ingredients  of  calculi,  as  well 
as  the  lithic  acid,  are  dissolved  by  the  caustic  alkali, 
and  various  experiments  have  shown,  that  most  calculi 
yield  to  its  potver.  It  is  obvious,  however,  that  what 
is  taken  by  the  mouth  is  subject  to  many  changes  in  the 
alimentary  canal,  and  also  the  lymphatic  and  vascular 
systems  ; and  in  this  way  it  must  be  exceedingly  diffi 
cult  to  get  such  substances  (even  were  /hey  not  liable 
to  alterations)  in  sufficient  quantity  into  the  bladder. 
Indeed,  there  are  very  few  authenticated  cases  of  the 
urine  being  so  changed  as  to  become  a menstruum  for 
the  stone.  Excepting  the  case  of  Dr.  Newcombe, 
recorded  by  Dr.  Whytt,  the  instance  of  Mr.  Home  is 
almost  the  only  one.  Though  lithontriptics,  however, 
may  not  in  general  dissolve  the  stone  in  the  bladder, 
yet  it  is  an  incontrovertible  fact,  that  they  frequently 
mitigate  the  pain : and  to  lessen  such  torture  as  that 
of  the  stone  in  the  bladder,  is  surely  an  object  of  no 
little  importance.  Lime  was  long* ago  known  as  a 
remedy  for  urinary  calculi,  and  different  methods  were 
employed  to  administer  it.  One  of  these  plans  fell  into 
the  hands  of  a Mrs.  Steevens,  and  her  success  caused 
great  anxiety  for  the  discovery  of  the  secret.  At  last 
Parliament  bought  the  secret  for  the  sum  of  500W.  In 
many  instances,  stones  which  had  been  unquestionably 
felt,  were  no  longer  to  be  discovered  ; and  as  the  same 
persons  were  examined  by  surgeons  of  the  greatest  skill 
and  eminence,  both  before  and  after  the  exhibition  of 
her  medicines,  it  was  no  wonder  that  the  conclusion 
was  drawn,  that  the  stones  really  were  dissolved. 
From  the  cessation  of  such  success,  and  from  its  now 
being  known  that  the.  stones  are  occasionally  protruded 
between  the  fasciculi  of  the  muscular  fibres  of  the  blad- 
der, so  as  to  be  lodged  in  a kind  of  cyst  on  the  outside 
of  the  muscular  coat,  and  cause  no  longer  any  griev- 
i ances,  surgeons  of  the  presentday  are  inclined  tosuspect 
that  this  must  have  happened  in  Mrs.  Steevens’s  cases. 
This  was  certainly  what  happened  in  one  of  the  cases 
on  whom  the  medicine  had  been  tried.  It  is  evident 
that  a stone,  so  situated,  would  not  any  longer  produce 
irritation,  but  would  also  be  quite  indiscoverable  by 
the  sound,  for,  in  fact,  it  is  no  longer  iii  the  cavity  of 
the  bladder. 

As  soap  was,  with  reason,  supposed  to  increase  the 
virtues  of  the  lime,  it  led  to  the  use  of  caustic  alkalit 
taken  in  mucilage,  or  veal  broth.  Take  of  pure  po- 
tassa, 5 viij ; of  quick-lime,  ^ iv ; of  distilled  water,  fbij. 
Mix  them  well  together  in  a large  bottle,  and  let  them 
stand  for  twenty-four  hours.  Then  pour  off  the  ley, 
filter  it  through  paper,  and  keep  it  in  well-stopped  vials 
for  use.  Of  this,  the  dose  is  from  thirty  drops  to  3 ij, 
which  is  to  be  repeated  two  or  three  times  a-day,  in  a 
pint  of  veal  broth,  early  in  the  morning,  at  noon,  and 
in  the  evening.  Continue  this  plan  for  three  or  tour 
months,  living,  during  the  course,  on  such  tilings  as 
least  counteract  the  effect  of  the  medicine. 


LIV 


LIV 


The  common  fixed  alkalies,  or  carbonated  alkali, 
and  the  acidulous  soda-water,  have  of  late  been  used 
as  lithontriptics.  Honey  has  also  been  given  ; and  Mr. 
Home,  surgeon  at  the  Savoy,  has  recorded  its  utility  in 
his  own  and  in  his  father’s  cases.  Bitters  have  like- 
wise been  tried. 

Dismissing  all  theories,  lime-water,  soap,  acidulous 
soda-water,  caustic,  alkali,  and  bitters,  are  useful  in 
cases  of  stone.  Of  the  soap,  as  much  may  be  taken  as 
the  stomach  will  bear,  or  as  much  as  will  prove  gently 
laxative ; but  of  the  lime-water,  few  can  take  more 
than  a pint  daily. 

The  acidulous  soda-water  may  be  taken  in  larger 
quantities,  as  it  is  more  agreeable. 

There  is  a remedy  celebrated  in  Holland,  under  the 
name  of  liquor  lithontriptica  Loosii,  which  contains, 
according  to  an  accurate  analysis,  muriate  of  lime. 
This,  professor  Hufeland  recommends  in  the  following 
form : 

ft  Calcis  muriate  3 j. 

Aquae  distillates,  \ ij.  ft.  solurio. 

Thirty  drops  are  to  be  taken  four  times  a-day,  which 
may  be  increased  as  far  as  the  stomach  will  bear. 

For  curing  stone  patients,  little  reliance  can  be 
placed  in  any  lithontriptics  hitherto  discovered,  though 
they  may  rationally  be  given,  with  a confident  hope  of 
procuring  an  alleviation  of  the  fits  of  pain  attending 
the  presence  of  stone  in  the  bladder.  After  all,  the 
only  certain  method  of  getting  rid  of  the  calculus  is  the 
operation.  See  Lithotomy. 

[“  Lithontriptor.  (From  a stone,  and 

&pvnr(t >,  to  break.)  The  name  of  an  instrument,  in- 
vented by  Dr.  Civiale  of  Paris,  for  reducing  calculi  in 
the  bladder  into  small  particles  or  a powder,  which  is 
voided  with  the  urine,  and  lithotomy  thus  rendered 
unnecessary.  The  lithontriptor  consists  of  a straight 
silver  catheter,  of  considerable  diameter,  and  enclosing 
another  of  steel,  the  lower  extremity  of  which  consists 
of  three  branches,  calculated  to  grasp  the  stone  on  with- 
drawing the  steel  catheter  a short  way  within. the  outer 
one,  when  they  become  approximated.  The  cavity  of 
the  inner  catheter  is  capable  of  admitting  a steel  rod, 
to  which  may  be  affixed,  at  the  surgeon’s  option,  a 
simple  quadrangular  drill,  or  a strawberry-shaped  file, 
or  a trephine.  By  means  of  a spring,  the  latter  part  of 
the  apparatus  is  pressed  evenly  inwards,  and  it  is  made 
to  revolve  with  velocity  through  the  medium  of  a bow, 
after  the  manner  of  a common  hand  drill.” — Coop. 
Sur.  Die.  A.l 

LITHONTRY'PTIC.  (From  At0of,  a stone,  and 
S-pvirlu),  to  break.)  See  Lithontriptic. 

LITHOSPE'RMUM.  (From  XiOos,  a stone,  and 
onepiJia , seed ; named  from  the  hardness  of  its  seed.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  common  gronnvell. 
See  Lithospermum  officinale. 

Lithospermum  officinale.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  officinal  gromwell.  The  seeds  of  this  officinal 
plant,  Lithospermum — seminibus  Icevibus , corollis  viz 
ealyeem  superantibus , foliis  lanceolatis,  of  Linnaeus, 
were  formerly  supposed,  from  their  stony  hardness,  to 
be  efficacious  in  calculous  and  gravelly  disorders. 
Little  credit  is  given  to  their  lithontriptic  character, 
vet  they  are  occasionally  used  as  diuretic  for  clearing 
• he  urinary  passages,  and  for  obviating  strangury,  in 
the  form  of  emulsion. 

LITHO'TOMY.  {Lithotomia ; from  "XiOos,  a stone, 
and  repvio,  to  cut.)  Cystomia.  The  operation  of  cut- 
ting into  the  bladder,  in  order  to  extract  a stone. 
Several  methods  have  been  recommended  for  perform- 
ing this  operation,  but  there  are  only  two  which  can 
be  practised  with  any  propriety.  One  is,  where  the 
operation  is  to  be  performed  immediately  above  the 
pubes,  in  that  part  of  the  bladder  which  is  not  covered 
with  peritomeum,  called  the  high  operation.  The 
other,  where  it  is  done  in  the  perimeum,  by  laying  open 
the  neck  and  lateral  part  of  the  bladder,  so  as  to  allow 
of  the  extraction  of  the  stone,  called  the  lateral  opera- 
tion, from  the  prostate  gland  of  the  neck  of  the  bladder 
being  laterally  cut. 

LITMUS.  The  beautiful  blue  prepared  from  a 
white  lichen.  See  Lichen  roccello. 

Li'tron.  See  JVitre. 

Li'tus.  A liniment. 

IjI'VER.  ( Hepar,  f)i:ap .)  A large  viscus,  of  a deep 
red  colour,  of  great  size  and  weight,  situated  under  the 


diaphragm,  in  the  right  hypochondrium,  its  smaller 
portion  occupying  part  of  the  epigastric  region.  In  the 
human  body,  the  liver  is  divided  into  two  principal 
lobes,  the  right  of  which  is  by  far  the  greatest.  They 
are  divided  on  the  upper  side  by  a broad  ligament,  and 
on  the  other  side  by  a considerable  depression  or  fossa. 
Between  and  below  these  two  lobes  is  a smaller  lobe, 
called  lobulus  spigelii.  In  describing  this  viscus,  it  is 
necessary  to  attend  to  seven  principal  circumstances 
its  ligaments ; its  surfaces  ; its  margins ; its  tubercles  ; 
its  fissure  ; its  sinus  ; and  the  pori  biliapi. 

The  ligaments  of  the  liver  are  five  in  number,  all 
arising  from  the  peritonaeum.  1.  The  right  lateral 
ligament , which  connects  the  thick  right  lobe  with  the 
posterior  part  of  the  diaphragm.  2.  The  left  lateral 
ligament , which  connects  the  convex  surface  and  mar- 
gin of  the  left  lobe  with  the  diaphragm,  and,  in  those 
of  whom  the  liver  is  very  large,  with  the  oesophagus 
and  spleen.  3.  The  broad  or  middle  suspensory  liga- 
ment, which  passes  from  the  diaphragm  into  the  ccn 
vex  surface,  and  separates  the  right  lobe  of  the  liver 
from  the  left.  It  descends  from  above  through  the  large 
fissure  to  the  concave  surface,  and  is  then  distributed 
over  the  whole  liver.  4.  The  round  ligament , which 
in  adults  consists  of  the  umbilical  vein,  indurated  into 
a ligament.  5.  The  coronary  ligament. 

The  liver  has  two  surfaces , one  superior,  which  is 
convex  and  smooth,  and  one  inferior,  which  is  con- 
cave, and  has  holes  and  depressions  to  receive,  not 
only  the  contiguous  viscera,  but  the  vessels  running 
into  the  liver. 

The  margins  of  the  liver  are  also  two  in  number ; 
the  one,  which  is  posterior  .and  superior  is  obtuse,  the 
other,  situated  anteriorly  and  inferiorly,  is  acute 

The  tubercles  of  the  liver  are  likewise  two  in  num- 
ber, viz.  lobulus  anonymus , and  lobulus  caudalus , and 
are  found  near  the  vena  portae. 

Upon  looking  on  the  concave  surface  of  this  viscus, 
a considerable  fissure  is  obvious,  known  by  the  name 
of  the  fissure  of  the  liver. 

In  order  to  expose  the  sinus , it  is  necessary  to  re- 
move the  gall-bladder,  when  a considerable  sinus,  be 
fore  occupied  by  the  gall-bladder,  will  be  apparent. 

The  blood-vessels  of  the  liver  are  the  hepatic  artery, 
the  vena  portae,  and  the  vena  cavse  hepatic®,  which 
are  described  under  their  proper  names.  The  absor- 
bents of  the  liver  are  very  numerous.  The  liver  has 
nerves , from  the  great  intercostal  and  eighth  pair, 
which  arise  from  the  hepatic  plexus,  arid  proceed  along 
with  the  hepatic  artery  and  vena  portae  into  the  sub- 
stance of  the  liver.  With  regard  to  the  substance  of 
the  liver,  various  opinions  have  been  entertained.  It 
is,  however,  now  pretty  well  ascertained  to  be  a large 
gland,  composed  of  lesser  glands  connected  together  by 
cellular  structure.  The  small  glands  which  thus  com- 
pose the  substance  of  the  liver,  are  termed  penicilli, 
from  the  arrangement  of  the  minute  ramifications  of 
the  vena  portae  composing  each  gland,  resembling  that 
of  the  hairs  of  a pencil.  The  chief  use  of  this  large 
viscus  is  to  supply  a fluid,  named  bile,  to  the  intes- 
tines, which  is  of  the  utmost  importance  in  chylifica- 
tion.  The  small  penicilli  perform  this  function  by  a. 
specific  action  on  the  blood  they  contain,  by  which 
they  secrete  in  their  very  minute  ends  the  fluid  termed 
hepatic  bile;  but  whether  they  pour  it  into  what  is 
called  a follicle,  or  not,  is  yet  undecided,  and  is  the 
cause  of  the  difference  of  opinion  respecting  the  sub- 
stance of  the  liver.  If  it  be  secreted  into  a follicle,  the 
substance  is  truly  glandular,  according  to  the  notion  of 
the  older  anatomists  : but  if  it  be  secreted  merely  into 
a small  vessel,  called  a biliary  pore  (the  existence  of 
which  can  be  demonstrated)  corresponding  to  the  end 
of  each  of  the  penicilli,  without  any  intervening  folli- 
cle, its  substance  is  then,  in  their  opinion,  vascular.  Ac- 
cording to  our  notions  in  the  present  day,  in  either 
case,  the  liver  is  said  to  be  glandular;  for  we  have  the 
idea  of  a gland  when  any  arrangement  of  vessels  per 
forms  the  office  of  separating  from  the  blood  a fluid  or 
substance  different  in  its  nature  from  the  blood.  The 
small  vessels  which  receive  the  bile  secreted  by  the 
penicilli,  are  called  pori  biliarii ; these  converge  toge- 
ther throughout  the  substance  of  the  liver  towards  its 
under  surface,  and,  at  length,  form  one  trunk,  called 
ductus  hepaticus , which  conveys  the  bile  into  either  the 
ductus  communis  cholcdochus,  or  ductus  cysticus.  See 
Oall-  bladder. 

Liver , inflammation  of.  See  Hepatitis. 


31 


LOB 


LON 


Liver  of  sulphur.  See  Potassce  sulphurelum. 

LIVERWORT.  See  Marchantia  polymorpha. 

Liverwort , ash-coloured.  See  Lichen  caninus. 

Liverwort , ground.  See  Lichen  caninus. 

Liverwort , Iceland.  See  Lichen  islandicus. 

Liverwort , noble.  See  Marchantia  polymorpha. 

LI'VOR.  (From  liveo,  to  be  black  and  blue.)  Livid- 
ness.  A black  mark,  from  a blow.  A dark  circle 
under  the  eye. 

LIX.  (From  Xtj,  light.)  Woodash. 

LIX'IVIAL.  Salts  are  so  called  which  are  extract- 
ed by  lixiviation. 

LIXIVIATION.  ( Lixivialis  ; from  lix,  woodash.) 
Lessive.  The  process  employed  by  chemists  of  dis- 
solving, by  means  of  warm  water,  the  saline  and  solu- 
ole  particles  of  cinders,  the  residues  of  distillation  and 
combustion,  coals,  and  natural  earths.  Salts  thus  ob- 
tained are  called  Lizivial- salts. 

LIXI  VIUM.  (From  lix,  woodash.)  The  liquor  in 
which  saline  and  soluble  particles  of  the  residues  of 
distillation  and  combustion  are  dissolved. 

Lixivium  saponarium.  See  Potassce  liquor. 

Lixivium  tartari.  See  Potassce  subcarbonatis 
liquor. 

LOBATUS.  (From  lobus,  a lobe.)  Lobed.  Ap- 
plied to  leaves  which  have  the  margins  of  the  seg- 
ments lobed,  as  in  Anemone  hepatica , and  to  such  as 
are  lobed  like  the  vine  thistle,  and  many  geraniums. 

LOBB,  Thkophilus,  practised  as  a physician  in 
London  with  considerable  reputation,  and  left  several 
works  on  medical  topics.  He  died  in  1763,  in  the  S5th 
year  of  his  age.  He  wrote  on  fevers,  small-pox,  and 
some  other  diseases  ; but  his  most  celebrated  publica- 
tion was,  “ A Treatise  on  Solvents  of  the  Stone,  and 
on  curing  the  Stone  and  the  Gout  by  Aliments,” 
which  passed  through  several  editions,  and  was  trans- 
lated into  Latin  and  French  ; he  considered  the  mor- 
bid matter  of  an  alkaline  nature,  and  vegetable  acids 
as  the  remedy.  He  was  author  also  of  “ A Compen- 
dium of  the  Practice  of  Physic,”  and  of  several  papers 
in  the  Gentleman’s  Magazine. 

Lobed  leaf.  See  Lobatus. 

LOBE'LIA.  (Named  in  honour  of  Lobel,  a botan- 
ist.) 1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
liaean  system.  Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Monogamia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceiai  name  of  the  blue  lobelia. 
See  Lobelia  syphilitica. 

Lobklia  syphilitica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
blue  lobelia  of  the  pharmacopoeias.  The  root  is  the 
part  directed  by  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia  for  me- 
dicinal use  ; in  taste  it  resembles  tobacco,  and  is  apt  to 
excite  vomiting.  It  derived  the  name  of  syphilitica 
from  its  efficacy  in  the  cure  of  syphilis,  as  experienced 
by  the  North  American  Indians,  who  considered  it  as 
a specific  in  that  disease,  and  with  whom  it  was  long 
an  important  secret,  which  was  purchased  by  Sir 
William  Johnson,  and  since  published  by  different 
authors.  The  method  of  employing  this  medicine  is 
stated  as  follows:  a decoction  is  made  of  a handful 
of  the  roots  in  three  measures  of  water.  Of  this  half 
a measure  is  taken  in  the  morning  fasting,  and  repeated 
in  the  evening;  and  the  dose  is  gradually  increased, 
till  its  purgative  effects  become  too  violent,  when  the 
decoction  is  to  be  intermitted  for  a day  or  two,  and  then 
renewed,  until  a perfect  cure  is  effected.  During  the 
use  of  this  medicine,  a proper  regimen  is  to  be  enjoined, 
and  the  ulcers  are  also  to  be  frequently  washed  with 
the  decoction,  or  if  deep  and  foul,  to  be  sprinkled  with 
the  powder  of  the  inner  bark  of  the  New-Jersey  tea- 
tree,  Ceanothus  americanus.  Although  the  plant 
thus  used  is  said  to  cure  the  disease  in  a very  short 
time,  yet  it  is  not  found  that  the  antisyphilitic  powers 
of  the  lobelia  have  been  confirmed  in  any  instance  of 
European  practice. 

[Lobelia  inflata.  See  Indian  tobacco.  A.] 

LO'BULUS.  (Dim.  of  lobus , a lobe.)  A small 
lobe,  as  lobulus  spigelii. 

Lobulus  accessorius.  See  Lobulus  anonymus. 

Lobulus  anonymus.  Jjobulus  accessorius  anterior- 
quadrat  us.  The  anterior  point  of  the  right  lobe  of  the 
liver.  Others  define  it  to  be  that  space  of  the  great 
lobe  between  the  fossa  of  the  umbilical  vein  and  gall- 
bladder, and  extending  forward  from  the  fossa  for  the 
lodgment  of  the  vena  port®,  to  the  anterior  margin  of 
the  liver. 

Lobulus  caudatus.  Processus  caudatus.  A tail- 
like process  of  the  liver,  stretching  downward  from  the 


middle  of  the  great  right  lobe  to  the  lobulus  spigelii.  it 
is  behind  the  gall-bladder,  and  between  the  fossa  ven® 
portarum,  and  the  fissure  for  the  lodgment  of  the  vena 
cava. 

Lobulus  spigelii.  Lobulus  posterior;  Lobulus 
posticus  papillatus.  A lobe  of  the  liver  between  the 
two  greater  lobes,  but  rather  belonging  to  the  right 
great  lobe.  From  its  situation  deep  behind,  and  from 
its  having  a perpendicular  papilla-like  projection,  it  is 
called  lobulus  posterior,  or  papillatus.  To  the  left  side 
it  has  the  fissure  for  the  lodgment  of  the  ductus  veno- 
sus;  on  the  right,  the  fissure  for  the  vena  cava ; and 
above,  it  has  the  great  transverse  fissure  of  the  jiver, 
for  the  lodgment  of  the  cylinder  of  the  porta  ; obliquely 
to  the  right,  and  upwards,  it  Jias  a connexion  with  the 
lower  concave  surface  of  the  great  lobe,  by  the  pro- 
cessus caudatus,  which  \^inslow  calls  one  of  the  roots 
of  the  lobulus  spigelii.  It  is  received  into  the  bosom 
of  the  less  curve  of  the  stomach. 

LOCA'LES.  (Locales,  the  plural  of  localis.)  The 
fourth  class  of  Cullen’s  Nosology,  which  comprehends 
morbid  affections  that  are  partial,  and  includes  eight 
orders,  viz.  dys®sthesi®,  dysorexi®,  dyscinesi®,  apo- 
cenoses,  epischeses,  tumorcs,  ectopia,  and  dialyses. 

LOCA  LIS.  Local.  Belonging  to  a part  and  not 
the  whole.  A common  division  of  diseases  is  into 
general  and  local. 

Localis  membrana.  The  pia  mater. 

LO’CHIA.  (From  Xoxojw,  to  bring  forth.)  The 
cleansings.  The  serous,  and  for  the  most  part  green- 
coloured,  discharge  that  takes  place  from  the  uterus 
and  vagina  of  women,  during  the  first  four  days  after 
delivery. 

LOCHIORRHCE'A.  (From  Xo%ia,  and  pew,  to 
flow.)  An  excessive  discharge  of  the  lochia. 

LOCKED-JAW.  See  Tetanus. 

LOCULAMENTUM.  In  botany  means  the  space 
or  cell  between  the  valves  and  partitions  of  a capsule  ; 
distinguished  from  their  number  into  unilocular,  bilo- 
cular, &c.  See  Capsula. 

LOCUSTA.  A term  sometimes  applied  to  the 
spikelet  of  grasses.  See  Spicula. 

LOGWOOD.  See  Hcematoxylon  campechi anum. 

LOMENTACEAD.  (From  lomentum ; in  allusion 
to  the  pulse-like  nature  of  the  plants  in  question,  so  as 
to  keep  in  view  their  analogy  with  the  papilionacea.) 
The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linn®us’s  Frag- 
ments of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of  such  as  have 
a bivalve  pericarpium  or  legume,  and  not  papiliona- 
ceous corolls  ; as  Cassia,  Funtaria,  Ceretonia,  &c. 

LOMENTUM.  1.  A word  used  by  old  writers  on 
medicine,  to  express  a meal  made  of  beans,  or  bread 
made  of  this  meal,  and  used  as  a wash. 

2.  A bivalve  pericarpium,  divided  into  cells  by  very 
small  partitions,  never  lateral  like  those  of  the  legume. 

From  its  figure  it  is  termed, 

1.  Articulatum,  when  the  partitions  are  visible  ex- 
ternally; as  in  Hedysarum  argenteum. 

2.  Moniliforme,  necklace-like,  consisting  of  a num- 
ber of  little  globules;  as  in  Hedysarum  tnoliferum. 

3.  Aculeatum;  as  in  Hedysarum  onobrychis. 

4.  Crystatum;  as  in  Hedysarum  caput  galli. 

5.  Isthmis  interceptum , when  the  cells  are  much 
narrower  than  the  joints  ; as  in  Hippocrepis. 

6.  Corticosum , the  external  bark  being  woody,  and 
the  inside  pulpy;  as  in  Cassia  fistula. 

LOMMIUS,  Jodocus,  was  born  in  Guelderland, 
about  the  commencement  of  the  16th  century.  Having 
received  from  his  father  a good  classical  education,  he 
turned  his  attention  to  medicine,  which  he  studied 
chiefly  at  Paris.  He  practised  for  a considerable  time 
at  Tournay,  where  he  was  pensionary  physician  in 
1557 ; and,  three  years  after,  he  removed  to  Brussels. 
The  period  of  his  death  is  not  known.  He  left  three 
small  works,  which  are  still  valued  from  the  purity 
and  elegance  of  their  Latinity ; a Commentary  on 
Celsus;  Medicinal  Observations,  in  three  books;  and 
a Treatise  on  the  Cure  of  Continued  Fevers ; the  two 
latter  having  been  several  times  reprinted  and  trans- 
lated. 

LOMONITE.  Diphrismatie  zeolite. 

LONCHI  TIS.  (From  Xoyx» 7,  a lance:  so  named 
because  the  leaves  resemble  the  head  of  a lance.)  The 
herb  spleenwort.  The  Ceterach  officinalis. 

Longa'num.  (From  longus,  long : so  named  from 
its  length.)  The  intestinum  rectum. 

LONGING.  A desire  peculiar  to  the  female,  and 


LON 

only  during  pregnancy,  and  those  states  in  which  the 
uterine  discharge  is  suppressed. 

LONGISSIMUS.  The  longest.  Parts  are  so  named 
from  their  length,  compared  to  that  of  others ; as  lon- 
gissimus dorsi , &c. 

Longissimus  dorsi.  Lumbo  dorso  traclielien , of 
Dumas.  This  muscle,  which  is  somewhat  thicker 
th  n the  sacrolumbalis,  greatly  resembles  it,  however, 
in  its  shape  and  extent,  and  arises,  in  common  with 
that  muscle,  between  it  and  tire  spine.  It  ascends  up- 
wards along  the  spine,  and  is  inserted  by  small  double 
tendons  into  the  posterior  and  inferior  part  of  all  the 
transverse  processes  of  the  vertebras  of  the  back,  and 
sometimes  of  the  last  vertebra  of  the  neck.  From  its 
outside  it  sends  off  several  bundles  of  fleshy  fibres,  in- 
terspersed with  a few  tendinous  filaments,  which  are 
usually  inserted  into  the  lower  edge  of  the  ten  upper- 
most ribs,  not  far  from  their  tubercles.  In  some  sub- 
jects, however,  they  are  found  inserted  in  a less  num- 
ber, and  in  others,  though  more  rarely,  into  every  one 
of  the  ribs.  Towards  the  upper  part  of  this  muscle 
is  observed  a broad  and  thin  portion  of  fleshy  fibres, 
which  cross  and  intimately  adhere  to  the  fibres  of  the 
longissimus  dorsi.  This  portion  arises  from  the  upper 
and  posterior  part  of  the  transverse  processes  of  the 
five  or  six  uppermost  vertebrae  of  the  back,  by  as  many 
tendinous  origins,  and  is  usually  inserted  by  six  tendi- 
nous and  fleshy  slips,  into  the  transverse  processes  of 
the  six  inferior  vertebrae  of  the  neck.  This  portion  is 
described,  by  Winslow  and  Albinus,  as  a distinct  mus- 
cle ; by  the  former  under  the  name  of  transversalis 
major  colli , and  by  the  latter  under  that  of  trans- 
versalis cervices.  But  its  fibres  are  so  intimately  con- 
nected with  those  of  the  longissimus  dorsi,  that  it  may 
very  properly  be  considered  as  an  appendage  to  the 
latter.  The  use  of  this  muscle  is  to  extend  the  verte- 
brae of  the  back,  and  to  keep  the  trunk  of  the  body 
erect ; by  means  of  its  appendage,  it  likewise  serves  to 
turn  the  neck  obliquely  backwards,  and  a little  to  one 
side. 

Longissimus  manus.  See  Flexor  tertii  internodii 
pollicis. 

Longissimus  oculi.  See  Obliquus  superior  oculi. 

LONGITUDINAL.  Longitudinalis.  Parts  are  so 
named  from  their  direction. 

Longitudinal  sinus.  Longitudinal  sinus  of  the 
dura  mater.  A triangular  canal,  proceeding  in  the 
falciform  process  of  the  dura  mater,  immediately  un- 
der the  bones  of  the  skull,  from  the  crista  galli  to  the 
tentorium,  where  it  -branches  into  the  lateral  sinuses. 
The  longitudinal  sinus  has  a number  of  trabecuke  or 
fibres  crossing  it.  Its  use  is  to  receive  the  blood 
from  the  veins  of  the  pia  mater,  and  convey  it  into  the 
lateral  sinuses,  to  be  carried  through  the  internal  jugu- 
lars to  the  heart. 

LO'NGUS.  Long.  Some  parts  are  so  named  from 
their  comparative  length ; as  longus  colli,  &-c. 

Longus  colli.  Prw  dorso  cervical , of  Dumas. 
This  is  a pretty  considerable  muscle,  situated  close  to 
the  anterior  and  lateral  part  of  the  vertebra  of  the 
neck.  Its  outer  edge  is  in  part  covered  by  the  rectus 
internus  major.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  within 
the  thorax,  from  the  bodies  of  the  three  superior  verte- 
brae of  the  back,  laterally ; from  the  bottom  and  fore- 
part of  the  transverse  processes  of  the  first  and  second 
vertebrae  of  the  back,  and  of  the  last  vertebrae  of  the 
neck : and  likewise  from  the  upper  and  anterior  points 
of  the  transverse  processes  of  the  sixth,  fifth,  fourth, 
and  third  vertebrae  of  the  neck,  by  as  many  small  dis- 
tinct tendons ; and  is  inserted  tendinous  into  the  fore- 
part of  the  second  vertebra  of  the  neck,  near  its  fellow. 
This  muscle,  when  it  acts  singly,  moves  the  neck  to 
one  side ; but  when  both  act,  the  neck  is  brought  di- 
rectly forwards. 

LONl'CERA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Mo- 
nogynia. 

Lonicera  diervilla.  The  systematic  name  of  a 
species  of  honeysuckle.  Diervilla.  The  young 
branches  of  this  species,  Lonicera — racemis  termina- 
libus,  foliis  serratis , of  Linnaeus,  are  employed  in 
North  America  as  a certain  remedy  in  gonorrhoea  and 
suppression  of  urine.  It  has  not  yet  been  exhibited  in 
Europe. 

Lonicera  periclimknum.  Honeysuckle.  This 
beautiful  and  common  plant  was  formerly  used  in  the 
cure  of  asthma,  for  cleansing  sordid  ulcers,  and  re- 


LOW 

moving  diseases  of  the  skin,  virtues  it  does  not  now 
appear  to  possess. 

LOOSENESS.  See  Diarrhoea. 

LO'PEZ.  Radix  lopeziana;  Radix  indica  lopezi- 
ana.  The  root  of  an  unknown  tree,  growing,  accord- 
ing to  some,  at  Goa.  It  is  met  with  in  pieces  of  differ- 
ent thickness,  some  at  least  of  two  inches  diameter- 
The  woody  part  is  whitish,  and  very  light;  softer, 
more  spongy,  and  whiter  next  the  bark,  including  a 
denser,  somewhat  reddish,  medullary  part.  The  bark 
is  rough,  wrinkled,  brown,  soft,  and,  as  it  were, 
woolly,  pretty  thick,  covered  with  a thin  paler  cuticle. 
Neither  the  woody  nor  cortical  part  has  any  remarka- 
ble smell  or  taste,  nor  any  appearance  of  resinous  mat- 
ter. It  appears  that  this  medicine  has  been  remarka- 
bly effectual  in  stopping  colliquative  diarrhoeas,  which 
had  resisted  the  usual  remedies.  Those  attending  the 
last  stage  of  consumptions  were  particularly  relieved 
by  its  use.  It  seemed  to  act,  r.ot  by  an  astringent 
power,  but  by  a faculty  of  restraining  and  appeasing 
spasmodic  and  inordinate  motions  of  the  intestines. 
Dr.  Gaubius,  who  gives  this  account,  compares  its 
action  to  that  of  Simarouba,  but  thinks  it  more  effica- 
cious than  this  medicine. 

Lopez-root.  See  Lopez. 

Lopeziana  radix.  See  Lopez. 

Lopha'dia.  (From  Ao^oj,  the  hinder  part  of  the 
neck.)  Lophia.  The  first  vertebra  of  the  neck. 

LORDO  SIS.  (From  hopSos,  curved,  bent.)  An 
affection  af  the  spine,  in  which  it  is  bent  inwards. 

Lo'rica.  (From  lorico,  to  crust  over.)  A kind  of 
lute,  with  which  vessels  are  coated  before  they  are  put 
into  the  fire. 

LORICA'TION.  Coating.  Nicholson  recommends 
the  following  composition  for  the  coating  of  glass  ves- 
sels, to  prevent  their  breaking  when  exposed  to  heat. 
Take  of  sand  and  clay,  equal  parts ; make  them  into  a 
thin  paste,  with  fresh  blood,  prevented  from  coagu- 
lating by  agitation,  till  it  is  cold,  and  diluted  with  wa- 
ter ; add  to  this  some  hair,  and  powdered  glass ; with 
a brush,  dipped  in  this  mixture,  besmear  the  glass ; 
and  when  this  layer  is  dry,  let  the  same  operation  be 
repeated  twice,  oroftener,  till  the  coat  applied  is  about 
one-third  part  of  an  inch  in  thickness. 

LORRY,  Anne-Charles,  was  born  near  Paris,  in 
1725.  He  studied  and  practised  as  a physician,  with 
unremitting  zeal  and  peculiar  modesty,  and  obtained 
a high  reputation.  At  23,  he  was  admitted  doctor  of 
medicine  at  Paris,  and  subsequently  became  doctor- 
regent  of  the  faculty.  He  was  author  of  several  works, 
some  of  which  still  maintain  their  value  ; particularly 
his  Treatise  on  Cutaneous  Diseases,  which  combines 
much  erudition  and  accurate  observation,  with  great 
clearness  of  arrangement,  and  perspicuity  of  language. 
He  died  in  1783. 

LOTION.  ( Lotio ; from  lavo,  to  wash.)  An  ex 
ternal  fluid  application.  Lotions  are  usually  applied 
by  wetting  linen  in  them,  and  keeping  it  on  the  part 
affected. 

LO'TUS.  (From  Aw,  to  desire.)  1.  A tree,  the 
fruit  of  which  was  said  to  be  so  delicious  as  to  make 
those  who  tasted  it  forsake  all  other  desires ; hence 
the  proverb,  Awrov  tdayov,  lotum  gustavi : I have 
tasted  lotus. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linn.-ean 
system.  Class,  Diadclphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

LOUTS,  Anthony,  was  born  at  Metz,  in  1723.  He 
attained  great  reputation  as  a surgeon,  and  was  ho- 
noured with  numerous  appointments,  and  marks  of 
distinction,  as  well  in  his  own  as  in  foreign  countries. 
He  wrote  the  surgical  part  of  the  “ Encyclopedic,”  and 
presented  several  interesting  papers  to  the  Royal  Aca- 
demy of  Surgery,  of  which  he  was  secretary:  besides 
which,  he  was  author  of  several  works  on  anatomi- 
cal, medical,  and  other  subjects.  In  a memoir,  on  the 
legitimacy  of  retarded  births,  he  maintains  that  the 
detention  of  the  foetus,  more  than  ten  days  beyond  the 
ninth  month,  is  physically  impossible. 

LOVAGE.  See  IJ gusticum  levisticum. 

LOVE-APPLE.  See  Solanum  lycopersicum. 

LOWER,  Richard,  was  born  in  Cornwall,  about 
the  year  1631.  He  graduated  at  Oxford,  and  having 
materially  assisted  the  celebrated  Dr.  Willis,  in  his 
dissections,  he  was  introduced  into  practice  by  that 
physician.  In  1665,  he  published  a defence  of  Willis’s 
work  on  Fevers,  displaying  much  learning  and  inge- 
nuity. But  his  most  important  performance  was  en- 


LUM 


LUN 


titled,  11  Tractalus  de  Corde,  item  de  motu  et  calore 
Sanguinis,  et  Chyli  in  eum  transitu,”  printed  four 
years  after.  He  demonstrated  the  dependence  of  the 
motions  of  the  heart  upon  the  nervous  influence,  and 
referred  the  red  colour  of  arterial  blood  to  the  action 
of  the  air  in  the  lungs ; he  also  gave  an  account  of  his 
experiments,  made  at  Oxford  in  February,  1665,  on 
the  transfusion  of  blood  from  one  living  animal  to 
another,  of  which  an  abstract  had  before  appeared  in 
the  Philosophical  Transactions.  He  afterward  prac- 
tised this  upon  an  insane  person,  before  the  Royal  So- 
ciety, of  which  he  was  admitted  a fellow  in  1667,  as 
well  as  of  the  College  of  Physicians.  The  reputation 
acquired  by  these,  and  some  other  minor  publications, 
procured  him  extensive  practice,  particularly  after  the 
death  of  Dr.  Willis;  but  his  political  opinions  brought 
him  into  discredit  at  court,  and  he  declined  considera- 
bly before  the  close  of  his  life,  in  1691.  The  operation 
of  transfusion  was  soon  exploded,  experience  having 
shown  that  it  was  attended  with  pernicious  conse- 
quences. 

Loxa'rthros.  (From  \v\og,  oblique,  and  apOpov,  a 
joint.)  Loxarthrus.  An  obliquity  of  the  joint,  with- 
out spasm  or  luxation. 

LOXIA.  (From  oblique.)  The  specific  name 
in  the  genus  Entasia  of  Good’s  Nosology,  for  wry  neck. 
[“  Also,  in  Ornithology,  the  name  of  a genus  of  birds, 
including  the  Grosbeaks,  or  Crossbills,  of  which  there 
are  numerous  species.”  A.] 

LUCULLITE.  A species  of  limestone. 

Lu'dus  helmontii.  Ludus  paracelsi.  The  waxen 
vein.  A stony  matter  said  to  be  serviceable  in  calculus. 

LUDWIG,  Christian  Theophilus,  was  born  in 
Silesia  in  1709,  and  educated  for  the  medical  profes- 
sion. Having  a strong  bias  towards  natural  history,  lie 
went  on  an  expedition  to  the  north  of  Africa  : and  soon 
after  his  return,  in  1733,  he  became  professor  of  medi- 
cine at  Leipsic.  The  first  thesis  defended  there  under 
his  presidency  related  to  the  manner  in  which  marine 
plants  are  nourished ; which  he  showed  not  to  be  by 
the- root,  as  is  the  case  in  the  generality  of  the  vegetable 
kingdom.  He  afterward  published  several  botanical 
works,  in  which  he  finds  many  objections  to  the  Lin- 
nsean  arrangement,  rather  preferring  that  of  Rivinus ; 
but  on  very  unsatisfactory  grounds.  Elementary  works 
were  likewise  written  by  him  on  the  different  branches 
of  medical  knowledge.  A more  important  wwk  is 
entitled  “ Adversaria  Medico-practica,”  in  three  octavo 
volumes.  He  has  given  an  account  of  his  trials  of 
Stramonium  and  Belladonna  in  epilepsy,  by  no  means 
favourable  to  either.  He  died  in  1773. 

LU'ES.  {Lues,  is.  f.;  from  A»o>,  to  dissolve,  because 
it  produces  dissolution.)  A pestilence,  poison,  plague. 

Lues  deifica.  One  of  the  many  pompous  names 
formerly  given  to  epilepsy. 

Lues  neurodes.  A typhus  fever. 

Lues  venerea.  The  plague  of  Venus,  or  the  vene- 
real disease.  See  Syphilis. 

LUISINUS,  Louis,  was  born  at  Udina,  where  he 
obtained  considerable  reputation  about  the  middle  of 
the  16lh  century.  He  translated  Hippocrates’s  aphor- 
isms into  Latin  hexameters : and  published  a treatise 
on  regulating  the  affections  of  the  mind  by  moral  phi- 
losophy and  the  medical  art : but  his  most  celebrated 
work  is  entitled  “ Aphrodisiacus,”  printed  at  Veniee,  in 
two  folio  volumes : the  first  containing  an  account  of 
preceding  treatises  on  syphilis,  the  second  compre- 
hended principally  the  manuscript  works  on  the  sub- 
ject which  had  not  then  been  committed  to  the  press. 

LU'JULA.  (Corrupted  or  contracted  from  Allelu- 
jah , Praise  the  Lord  ; so  called  from  its  many  virtues.) 
See  Oxalis  ascetosella. 

LUMBA'GO.  (From  lumhus , the  loin.)  A rheu- 
matic affection  of  the  muscles  about  the  loins'.  See 
Ehcumatismus. 

LUMBAR.  Lumbalis.  Belonging  to  the  loins. 

Lumbar  abscess.  Psoas  abscess.  A species  of 
arthropuosis,  that  receives  its  name  from  the  situation 
in  which  the  matter  is  found,  namely,  upon  the  side 
of  the  psoas  muscle,  or  between  that  and  the  iliacus 
internus.  Between  these  muscles,  there  lies  a quantity 
of  loose  cellular  membrane,  in  which  an  inflammation 
often  takes  place,  either  spontaneously  or  from  me- 
chanical injuries.  This  terminates  in  an  abscess  that 
can  procure  no  outlet  but  by  a circuitous  course  in 
which  it  generally  produces  irreparable  mischief,  with- 
out any  violent  symptoms  occurring  to  alarm  the 


patient.  The  abscess  sometimes  forms  a swelling 
above  Poupart’s  ligament:  sometimes  below  it;  and 
frequently  the  matter  glides  under  the  fascia  of  the 
thigh.  Occasionally,  it  makes  its  way  through  the 
sacro-ischiatic  foramen,  and  assumes  rather  the  ap- 
pearance of  a fistula  in  ano.  The  uneasiness  in  the 
loins,  and  the  impulse  communicated  to  the  tumour  by 
coughing,  evince  that  the  disease  arises  in  the  lumbar 
region ; but  it  must  be  confessed,  that  we  can  hardly 
ever  know  the  existence  of  the  disorder,  before  the  tu- 
mour, by  presenting  itself  externally,  leads  us  to  such 
information.  The  lumbar  abscess  is  sometimes  con- 
nected with  diseased  vertebra,  which  may  either  be  a 
cause  or  effect  of  the  collection  of  matter.  The  disease, 
however,  is  frequently  unattended  with  this  complica- 
tion. 

The  situation  of  the  symptoms  of  lumbar  abscess 
renders  this  affection  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  some 
other,  viz.  lumbago  and  nephritic  pains,  and,  towards 
its  termination,  for  crural  or  femoral  hernia.  The  first, 
however,  is  not  attended  with  the  shivering  that  occurs 
here  ; and  nephritic  complaints  are  generally  discover- 
able by  attention  to  the  state  of  the  urine.  The  dis- 
tinction from  crural  hernia  is  more  difficult.  In  both, 
a soft  inelastic  swelling  is  felt  in  the  same  situation ; 
but  in  hernia,  it  is  attended  with  obstructed  faeces, 
vomiting,  &c.  and  its  appearance  is  always  sudden, 
while  the  lumbar  tumour  is  preceded  by  various  com- 
plaints before  its  appearance  in  the  thigh.  In  a hori- 
zontal posture,  the  abscess  adso  totally  disappears,  while 
the  hernia  does  not. 

Lumbar  regions.  The  loins. 

Lumbaris  externus.  See  Quadratus  lumborum. 

Lumbaris  internus.  See  Psoas  magnus. 

LUMBRICA'LIS.  {Lumbric alls  mus cuius  ; from 
its  resemblance  to  the  lumbricus,  or  earth  worm.)  A 
name  given  to  some  muscles  from  their  resemblance  to 
a worm. 

Lumbricalis  manus.  Fidicinales.  Flexor  primi  in- 
ternodii  digitorum  manus , vel  perforatus  lumbricalis, 
of  Cowper  ; Jinuli  tcndino-phal art g tens,  of  Dumas. 
The  small  flexors  of  the  fingers  which  assist  the  bend- 
ing the  fingers  when  the  long  flexors  are  in  full  action. 
They  arise  thin  and  fleshy  from  the  outside  of  the 
tendons  of  the  flexor  profundus,  a little  above  the  lower 
edge  of  the  carpal  ligaments,  and  are  inserted  by  long 
slender  tendons  into  the  outer  sides  of  the  broad  ten- 
dons of  the  interosseal  muscles,  about  the  middle  of  the 
first  joints  of  the  fingers. 

Lumbricales  pedis.  Plantitendino-phalangien , of 
Dumas.  Four  muscles  like  the  former,  that  increase 
the  flexion  of  the  toes,  and  draw  them  inwards. 

LUMBRI'CUS.  {A'  Lubricitate ; from  its  slipperi- 
ness.) A scar  is  lumbricoides  ; Lumbricus  teres  The 
long  round  worm.  A species  of  worm  w hich  inhabits 
occasionally  the  human  intestines.  It  has  three  nip- 
ples at  its  head,  and  a triangular  mouth  in  its  middle. 
Its  length  is  from  four  to  twelve  inches,  and  its  thick- 
ness, when  twelve  inches  long,  about  that  of  a goose- 
quill.  They  are  sometimes  solitary,  at  other  limes 
very  numerous.  See  Worms. 

Lumbricus  terrestris.  Vermis  terrestris.  The 
earth  worm.  Formerly  given  internally  when  dried 
and  pulverized  as  a diuretic. 

Lu'mbus  veneris.  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

LU'NA.  {Luna,  ce.  f.  ; d lucendo.)  1.  The  moon 

2.  The  old  alchemisiical  name  of  silver. 

Luna  cornea.  Muriate  of  silver. 

Luna  plena.  A term  used  by  the  old  alchemists  in 
the  transmutation  of  metals. 

Lunar  caustic.  See  Argenti  nitras. 

LUNA'RE  OS.  One  of  the  bones  of  the  ivrist. 

Lunaria  rediviva.  Bulbonach  of  the  Germans. 
Satin  and  honesty.  It  w7as  formerly  esteemed  as  a 
warm  diuretic. 

LUNA'TICUS.  ^rom  luna  the  moon;  so  called 
because  the  malady  returns,  or  is  aggravated,  or  influ- 
enced by  the  moon.) 

1.  A lunatic. 

2.  A disease  which  appears  to  be  influenced  by  the 
moon. 

LUNG.  Pulmo.  The  lungs  are  two  viscera  situated 
in  the  chest,  by  means  of  which  we  breathe.  Tire  lung 
in  the  right  cavity  of  the  chest  is  divided  into  three 
lobes,  that  in  the  left  cavity  into  two.  They  hang  in 
the  chest,  attached  at  their  superior  part  to  the  neck, 
by  means  of  the  trachea,  and  are  separated  by  the 


LU9 


LYC 


mediastinum.  They  are  also  attached  to  the  heart  by 
means  of  the  pulmonary  vessels.  The  substance  of 
the  lungs  is  of  four  kinds,  viz.  vesicular,  vascular, 
bronchial,  and  parenchymatous.  The  vesicular  sub- 
stance is  composed  of  the  air-cells.  The  vascular  in- 
vests those  cells  like  a net-work.  The  bronchial  is 
formed  by  the  ramifications  of  the  bronchia  throughout 
the  lungs,  having  the  air-cells  at  their  extremities  ; and 
the  spongy  substance  that  connects  these  parts  is  termed 
the  parenchyma.  The  lungs  are  covered  with  a fine 
membrane,  a reflection  of  the  pleura,  called  pleura 
pulmonalis.  The  internal  surface  of  the  air-cells  is 
covered  with  a very  fine,  delicate,  and  sensible  mem- 
brane, which  is  continued  from  the  larnyx  through  the 
trachea  and  bronchia.  The  arteries  of  the  lungs  are 
the  bronchial,  a branch  of  the  aorta,  which  carries 
blood  to  the  Jungs  for  their  nourishment ; and  the  pul- 
monary, which  circulates  the  blood  through  the  air- 
cells  to  undergo  a certain  change.  The  pulmonary 
veins  return  the  blood  that  has  undergone  this  change, 
by  four  trunks,  into  the  left  auricle  of  the  heart.  The 
bronchial  veins  terminate  in  the  vena  azygos.  The 
nerves  of  the  lungs  are  from  the  eighth  pair  and  great 
intercostal.  The  absorbents  are  of  two  orders  ; the 
superficial,  and  deep-seated : the  former  are  more  readily 
detected  than  the  latter.  The  glands  of  these  viscera 
are  called  bronchial.  They  are  muciparous,  and  situ- 
ated about  the  bronchia.  See  Respiration. 

LUNG  WORT.  S ee  Pulmonaria  officinalis. 

LUNULATUS.  Crescent-shaped,  or  half-moon- 
like : a term  applied  to  leaves,  pods,  &c.  which  are  so 
shaped,  whether  the  points  are  directed  towards  the 
stalk,  or  from  it ; as  in  the  leaves  of  Passiflora  lunata , 
and  legumen  of  Medicago  foliata. 

LU'PIA.  (From  Xvitcio,  to  molest.) 

1.  A genus  of  disease,  including  encysted  tumours, 
the  contents  of  which  are  very  thick,  and  sometimes 
solid ; as  meliceris,  atheroma , stealoma , and  ganglion. 

2.  (From  lupus , a wolf : so  called  because  it  does  not 
cease  to  destroy  the  part  it  seizes.)  A malignant  ulcer 
which  eats  away  the  soft  parts  on  which  it  appears, 
laying  bare  the  bones  and  cartilages,  and  which  is 
equally  fatal  with  the  cancer. 

LUP'INUS.  (So  called  by  Pliny  and  other  ancient 
writers.  Professor  Martin  says  the  word  owes  its 
origin  to  Lupus , a wolf,  because  plants  of  this  genus 
ravage  the  ground  by  overrunning  it,  after  the  manner 
of  that  animal.  It  is  also  derived  from  A vny,  grief: 
whence  Virgil’s  epithet,  tristes  lupini;  from  the  fan- 
ciful idea  of  its  acrid  juices,  when  tasted,  producing  a 
sorrowful  appearance  on  the  countenance.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Diadelphia , Order,  De- 
candria. 

2.  Under  this  term  the  white  lupin  is  directed  in 
some  pharmacopoeias. 

Lupinus  albus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  white 
lupin.  The  seed,  the  ordinary  food  of  mankind  in  the 
days  of  Galen  and  Pliny,  is  now  forgotten.  Its  fari- 
naceous and  bitter' meal  is  occasionally  exhibited  to 
remove  worms  from  the  intestines,  and  made  into  poul- 
tices to  resolve  indolent  tumours. 

LUPULIN.  Lupuline.  The  name  given  by  Dr. 
Ives,  of  New  York,  to  an  impalpable  yellow  powder,  in 
which  he  believes  the  virtue  of  the  hop  to  reside,  and 
which  may  be  obtained  by  beating  and  sifting  the  hops 
used  in  brewing.  It  appears  to  be  peculiar  to  the  fe- 
male plant,  and  is  probably  secreted  by  the  nectaria. 
In  preserving  beer  from  the  acetous  fermentation,  and 
in  communicating  an  agreeable  flavour  to  it,  lupulin 
was  found  to  be  equivalent  to  ten  times  its  weight  of 
hop  leaves. 

LU'PULUS.  (From  Amr y,  dislike : so  named  from 
its  bitterness.)  See  Humulus. 

LU'PUS.  1.  The  wolf,  so  named  from  its  rapacity. 

2.  The  cancer  is  also  so  called,  because  it  eats  away 
the  flesh  like  a wolf. 

Lurid*:.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Lin- 
naeus’s Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of 
those  which  prove  some  deadly  poison ; the  corolla 
mostly  monopetalous ; as  Datura , Solanum,  Nico- 
tiana. 

Lustra'go.  (From  lustro , to  expiate : so  called 
because  it  was  used  in  the  ancient  purifications.)  Flat 
or  base  vervain. 

LUSUS.  A sport. 

Lusus  nature.  A sport  of  nature  ; a monster. 
See  Monster. 


LUTE.  See  Lutum. 

Lu'tea  corpora.  See  Corpus  luteum. 

LUTE'OLA.  (From  lutum , mud  ; because  it  grows 
in  muddy  places,  oris  of  the  colour  of  mud.)  See 
Reseda  luteola. 

LU'TUM.  (From  A vtos,  soluble.)  Ccemcntum 
Mud.  Lute.  A composition  with  which  chemical 
vessels  are  covered,  to  preserve  them  from  the  violence 
of  the  fire,  and  to  close  exactly  their  joinings  to  each 
other,  to  retain  the  substances  which  they  contain 
when  they  are  volatile  and  reduced  to  vapour. 

LUXATION.  (Luxatio ; from  luxo,  to  put  out  of 
joint.)  A dislocation  of  a bone  from  its  proper  cavity. 

Lyca'nche.  (From  A vkos,  a wolf,  and  ay%w,  to 
strangle.)  A species  of  quincy,  in  which  the  patient 
makes  a noise  like  the  howling  of  a wolf. 

Lycanthro'pia.  (From  Aiucos,  a wolf,  and  avdpunot,, 
a man.)  A species  of  insanity,  in  which  the  patients 
leave  their  houses  in  the  night,  and  wander  about  like 
wolves,  in  unfrequented  places. 

LY'CHNIS.  (From  A ex3'0?)  a torch  ; because  the 
ancients  used  its  leaves  rolled  up  for  torches.)  1.  A 
name  of  several  vegetable  productions. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Decan 
dria ; Order,  Pentagynia. 

Lychnis  segetum.  See  Jlgrostemma  githago. 

LYCHNOIDES.  (From  lychnis,  the  name  of  a 
plant,  and  ctSos,  resemblance.)  Like  the  herb  lychnis. 

Lychnoides  segetum.  See  Jlgrostemma  githago. 

LYCO'CTONUM.  (FromAtneoj,  a wolf,  and  ktuvu, 
to  slay  : so  called  because  it  was  the  custom  of  hunt- 
ers to  secrete  it  in  raw  flesh,  for  the  purpose  of  de- 
stroying wolves.)  The  Aconitum  lycoctunum. 

LYCOPE'RDON.  (From  A vkos,  a wolf,  andnnpdw, 
to  break  wind : so  named  because  it  was  supposed  to 
spring  from  the  dung  of  wolves.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Cryp- 
to gamia  ; Order,  Fungi. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  pufflball.  See 
Lycoperdon  bovista. 

Lycoperdon  bovista.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  puff-ball.  • Crepitus  lupi.  A round  or  egg-shaped 
fungus,  the  Lycoperdon ; subrotundum , lacerato  dchis  ■ 
cens,  of  Linnaeus ; when  fresh,  of  a white  colour,  with 
a very  short,  or  scarcely  any  pedicle,  growing  in  dry 
pasture  grounds.  When  young,  it  is  sometimes  cover- 
ed with  tubercles  on  the  outside,  and  is  pulpy  within. 
By  age  it  becomes  smooth  externally,  and  dries  inter- 
nally into  a very  fine,  light,  brownish  dust,  which  i3 
used  by  the  common  people  to  stop  haemorrhages.  See 
Lycoperdon. 

Lycoperdon  tuber.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
truffle.  Tuber  cibarium , of  Dr.  Withering.  A solid 
fungus  of  a globular  figure,  which  groves  under  the 
surface  of  the  ground  without  any  roots  or  the  access 
of  light,  and  attains  a size  from  a pea  to  the  largest 
potato.  It  has  a rough,  blackish  coat,  and  is  destitute 
of  fibres.  Cooks  are  well  acquainted  with  its  use  and 
qualities.  It  is  found  in  woods  and  pastures  in  some 
parts  of  Kent,  but  is  not  very  common  in  England. 
In  France  and  Spain,  truffles  are  very  frequent,  and 
grow  to  a much  larger  size  than  they  do  here.  In  these 
places  the  peasants  find  it  worth  their  while  to  search 
for  them,  and  they  train  up  dogs  and  swine  for  this 
purpose,  who,  after  they  have  been  inured  to  their 
smell  by  their  masters  frequently  placing  them  in  their 
way,  will  readily  scrape  them  up  as  they  ramble  the 
fields  and  woods.  > 

LYCOPE'RSICUM.  (From  Atncoj,  a wolf,  and 
nepaiKov,  a peach : so  called  from  its  exciting  a violent 
degree  of  lust.)  Lycopersicon.  WolFs  peach.  Love 
apple. ||  See  Solanum  lycopersicon. 

LYOOPO'DIUM.  (From  A vkos,  a wolf,  and  irons, 
a foot . so  called  from  its  supposed  resemblance.)  I. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Cryptogamia ; Order,  Musci. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  club-moss.  See 
Lycopodium  clavatum. 

Lycopodium  clavatum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  club-moss.  Wolf’s  claw.  Muscus  clavatus.  This 
plant  affords  a great  quantity  of  pollen,  which  is  much 
esteemed  in  some  places  to  sprinkle  on  young  children, 
to  prevent,  and  in  the  curing  parts  which  are  fretting. 
A decoction  of  the.herb  is  said  to  be  a specific  in  the 
cure  of  the  plica  polonica. 

Lycopodium  selago.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  upright  club-moss.  Muscus  ertetus.  The  decoc 

35 


LYM 


tlon  of  this  plant  acts  violently  as  a vomit  and  a pur 
gative,  and  was  formerly  on  that  account  employed  to 
produce  abortions. 

LYCO'PSIS.  (From  Avkoj,  a wolf,  and  ot/aj,  an 
aspect : so  called  from  its  being  of  the  colour  of  a 
wolf,  or  from  the  circumstance  of  the  flowers  being 
ringent,  and  having  the  appearance  of  a grinning 
mouth.  The  herbage  is  also  furnished,  says  Ambro- 
sinus,  with  a sort  of  rigid  hairiness  similar  to  the  coat 
of  a wolf.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  Wall-bugloss, 
Echium  cegyptiacum , the  Asperugo  eegyptiaca  of  Wil- 
denowr. 

LY'COPUS.  (From  Xvkos,  a wolf,  and  -novg,  a foot: 
so  named  from  its  likeness.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnasan  system.  Class,  Diandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia.  Wolfs-claw,  or  water  hoar- 
hound. 

Lycopus  europeus!  This  plant  is  sometimes  used 
as  an  astringent. 

[Lycopus.  virginica.*  Bee  Bugle  weed.  A.] 

Lydian  stone.  A flinty  slate. 

Lygi'smus.  (From  Avyt^a),  to  distort.)  A disloca- 
tion. 

Ly'gus.  (From  A to  bend : so  called  from  its 
flexibility.)  The  agnus  castus. 

LYMPH.  Lympha.  The  liquid  contained  in  the 
lymphatic  vessels.  Two  processes  may  be  employed 
to  procure  lymph.  One  is  to  lay  bare  a lymphatic  ves- 
sel, divide  it,  and  receive  the  liquid  that  flows  from  it ; 
but  this  is  a method  difficult  to  execute,  and  besides, 
as  the  lymphatic  vessels  are  not  always  filled  with 
lymph,  it  is  uncertain  : the  other  consists  in  letting  an 
animal  fast  during  four  or  five  days,  and  then  extract- 
ing the  fluid  contained  in  the  thoracic,  duct. 

The  liquid  obtained  in  either  way  has  at  first  a 
slightly  opaline  rose  colour.  It  has  a strong  spermatic 
odour;  u salt  taste;  it  sometimes  presents  a slight 
yellow  tinge,  and  at  other  times  a red  madder  colour. 

But  lymph  does  not  long  remain  liquid  ; it  congeals. 
Its  rose  colour  becomes  more  deep,  an  immense  num- 
ber of  reddish  filaments  are  developed,  irregularly  ar- 
borescent, and  very  analogous  in  appearance  to  the 
vessels  spread  in  the  tissue  of  organs. 

When  we  examine  carefully  the  mass  of  lymph  thus 
coagulated,  we  find  it  formed  of  two  parts ; the  one 
solid,  and  forming  a great  many  cells,  in  which  the 
other  remains  in  a liquid  state.  If  the  solid  part  be 
separated,  the  liquid  congeals  again. 

The  quantity  of  lymph  procured  from  one  animal 
is  but  small ; a dog  of  a large  size  scarcely  yields  an 
ounce.  Its  quantity  appears  to  increase  according  to 
the  time  of  fasting. 

The  solid  part  of  the  lymph,  which  may  be  called 
clot,  has  much  analogy  with  that  of  the  blood.  It  be- 
comes scarlet-red  by  the  contact  of  oxygen  gas,  and 
purple  when  plunged  in  carbonic  acid. 

This  specific  gravity  of  lymph  is  to  that  of  distilled 
water  as  1022-28:  1000  00. 

Chevreuil  analyzed  the  lymph  of  the  dog  : 


Water, 626-4 

Fibrin, 004-2 

Albumen, 610 

Muriate  of  Soda, C.l 

Carbonate  of  Soda, 18 

Phosphate  of  Lime, - i 

Phosphate  of  Magnesia, > 0-5 

Carbonate  of  Lime,  ) 

Total 1000-0 


Its  specific  gravity  is  greater  than  water  rfn  con- 
sistence, it  is  thin  and  somewhat  viscid.  The  quan- 
tity in  the  human  body  appears  to  be  very  great,  as  the 
system  of  the  lymphatic  vessels  forms  no  small  part 
of  it.  Its  constituent  principles  appear  to  be  albumi- 
nous water  and  a little  salt.  The  lymphatic  vessels 
absorb  this  fluid  from  the  tela  cellulosa  of  the  whole 
body,  from  all  the  viscera  and  the  cavities  of  the  vis- 
cera ; and  convey  it  to  the  thoracic  duct,  to  be  mixed 
with  the  chyle. 

The  use  of  the  lymph  is  to  return  the  superfluous 
nutritious  jelly  from  every  part,  and  to  mix  it  with  the 
chyle  in  the  thoracic  duct,  there  to  be  further  convert- 
ed into  the  nature  of  the  animal ; Jnd,  lastly,  it  has 
mixed  with  it  the  superfluous  aqueous  vapour,  which 


LYM 

is  effused  into  the  cavities  of  the  cranium,  thorax,  al> 
domen,  &c. 

LYMPHATIC.  {Lymphaticus ; trom  lympha, 
lymph.)  1.  Of  the  nature  of  lymph. 

2.  An  absorbent  vessel,  that  carries  a transparent 
fluid,  or  lymph.  The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  human 
body  are  small  and  transparent,  and  originate  in  every 
part  of  the  body.  With  the  lacteal  vessels  of  the  in- 
testines, they  form  what  is  termed  the  absorbent  sys- 
tem. Their  termination  is  in  the  thoracic  duct.  See 
Absorbent , Lacteal , and  Thoracic  duct. 

Lymphatics  of  the  head  and  neck. — Absorbents  are 
found  on  the  scalp  and  about  the  viscera  of  the  neck, 
which  unite  into  a considerable  branch,  that  accom- 
panies the  jugular  vein.  Absorbents  have  not  been 
detected  in  the  humane  brain : yet  there  can.be  no 
doubt  of  there  being  such  vessels : it  is  probable  that 
they  pass  out  of  the  cranium  through  the  canalis 
caroticus  and  foramen  lacerum  in  basi  cranii,  on  each 
side,  and  join  the  above  jugular  branch , which  passes 
through  some  glands  as  it  proceeds  into  the  chest  to  the 
angle  of  the  subclavian  and  jugular  veins. 

The  absorbents  from  the  light  side  of  the  head  and 
neck,  and  from  the  right  arm,  do  not  run  across  the 
neck,  to  unite  with  the  great  trunk  of  the  system ; they 
have  an  equal  opportunity  of  dropping  their  contents 
into  the  angle  between  the  right  subclavian  and  the 
jugular  vein.  These  vessels  then  uniting,  form  a 
trunk,  which  is  little  more  than  an  inch,  nay,  some- 
times not  a quarter  of  an  inch,  in  length,  but  which  has 
nearly  as  great  a diameter  as  the  proper  trunk  of  the 
left  side. 

This  vessel  lies  upon  the  right  subclavian  vein,  and 
receives  a very  considerable  number  of  lymphatic  ves- 
sels ; not  only  does  it  receive  the  lymphatics  from  the 
right  side  of  the  head,  thyroid  gland,  neck,  See.  and  the 
lymphatics  of  the  arm,  but  it  receives  also  those  from 
the  right  side  of  the  thorax  and  diaphragm,  from  the 
lungs  of  this  side,  and  from  the  parts  supplied  by  the 
mammary  arteiy.  Both  in  this  and  in  the  great  trunk, 
there  are  many  valves. 

Of  the  upper  extremities. — The  absorbents  of  the 
upper  extremities  are  divided  into  superficial  and  deep- 
seated.  The  superficial  absorbents  ascend  under  the 
skin  of  the  hand  in  every  direction  to  the  wrist,  from 
whence  a branch  proceeds  upon  the  posterior  surface 
of  the  fore-arm  to  the  head  of  the  radius,  over  the 
internal  condyle  of  the  humerus,  up  to  the  axilla, 
receiving  several  branches  as  it  proceeds.  Another 
branch  proceeds  from  the  wrist  along  the  anterior  part 
of  the  fore-arm,  and  forms  a net-work,  w ith  a branch 
coming  over  the  ulna  from  the  posterior  part,  and  as- 
cends on  the  inside  of  the  humerus  to  the  glands  of  the 
axilla.  The  deep-seated  absorbents  accompany  the 
larger  blood-vessels,  and  pass  through  two  glands  about 
the  middle  of  the  humerus,  and  ascend  to  the  glands 
of  the  axilla.  The  superficial  and  deep-seated  absor- 
bents having  passed  through  the  axillary  glands,  form 
two  trunks,  which  unite  into  one , to  be  inserted  with 
the  jugular  absorbents  into  the  thoracic  duct,  at  the 
angle  formed  by  the  union  of  the  subclavian  with  the 
jugular  vein. 

Lymphatics  of  the  inferior  extremities. — These  are 
also  superficial  and  deep-seated.  The  superficial  ones 
lie  between  the  skin  and  muscles.  Those  of  the  toes 
and  foot  form  a branch,  which  ascends  upon  the  back 
of  the  foot,  over  the  tendon  of  the  crurseus  anticus, 
forms  with  other  branches  a plexus  above  the  ankles, 
then  proceeds  along  the  tibia  over  the  knee,  sometimes 
passes  through  a gland,  anu  proceeds  up  the  inside  of 
the  thigh,  to  the  subinguinal  glands.  The  deep-seated 
absorbents  follow  the  course  of  the  arteries,  and  ac 
company  the  femoral  artery,  in  which  course  they  pass 
through  some  glands  in  the  leg  and  above  the  knee, 
and  then  proceed  to  some  deep-seated  subinguinal 
glands.  The  absorbents  from  about  the  external  pans 
of  the  pubes,  as  the  penis  and  perineum,  and  from  'he 
external  pans  of  the  pelvis,  in  general,  proceed  to  the 
inguinal  glands.  The  subinguinal  and  inguinal  g’a;  ds 
send  forth  several  branches,  which  pass  through  the 
abdominal  ring  into  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen. 

Of  the  abdominal  and  thoracic  nicer  a. — The  absor 
bents  of  the  lower  extremities  accompany  the  external 
iliac  artery,  where  they  are  joined  by  many  branches 

from  the  uterus,  urinary  bladder,  spermatic  chord,  and 

some  branches  accompanying  the  internal  iliac  artery  ; 
they  then  ascend  to  the  sacrum,  where  they  form  a 


MAC 


MAC 


plexus , which  proceeds  over  the  psoas  muscles,  and 
meeting  with  the  laeteals  of  the  mesentery,  form  the 
thoracic  duct,  or  trunk  of  the  absorbents,  which  is  of  a 
serpentine  form,  about  the  size  of  a crow-quill,  and  runs 
up  the  dorsal  vertebrae,  through  the  posterior  opening 
of  the  diaphragm,  between  the  aorta  and  vena  azygos, 
to  the  angle  formed  by  the  union  of  the  left  subclavian 
and  jugular  veins.  In  this  course  it  receives: — the 
absorbents  of  the  kidneys , which  are  superficial  and 
deep-seated,  and  unite  as  they  proceed  towards  the 
thoracic  duct:  and  the  absorbents  of  the  spleen , which 
are  upon  its  peritoneal  coat,  and  unite  with  those  of 
the  pancreas : — a branch  from  the  plexus  of  vessels 
passing  above  and  below  the  duodenum,  and  formed 
by  the  absorbents  of  the  stomach , which  come  from  the 
less  and  greater  curvature,  and  are  united  about  the 
pylorus  with  those  of  the  pancreas  and  liver,  which 
converge  from  the  external  surface  and  internal  parts 
towards  the  portte  of  the  liver,  and  also  by  several 
branches  from  the  gall-bladder. 

Use  of  lymphatics. — The  office  of  these  vessels  is 
to  take  up  substances  which  are  applied  to  their 
mouths ; thus  the  vapour  of  circumscribed  cavities,  and 
of  the  cells  of  the  cellular  membrane,  are  removed  by 
the  lymphatics  of  those  parts  ; and  thus  mercury  and 
other  substances  are  taken  into  the  system  when  rubbed 
on  the  skin. 

The  principle  by  which  this  absorption  takes  place, 
is  a power  inherent  in  the  mouths  of  absorbing  vessels, 
a vis  insita,  dependent  on  the  high  degree  of  irritability 
of  their  internal  membrane  by  which  the  vessels  con- 
tract and  propel  the  fluid  forwards.  Hence  the  use  of 
this  function  appears  to  be  of  the  utmost  importance, 
viz.  to  supply  the  blood  with  chyle ; to  remove  the  su- 
perfluous vapour  of  circumsbribed  cavities,  otherwise 
dropsies,  as  hydrocephalus,  hydrothorax,  hydrocardia, 
ascites,  hydrocele,  &c.  would  constantly  be  taking 
place : to  remove  the  superfluous  vapour  from  the  cells 
of  the  cellular-membrane  dispersed  throughout  every 
part  of  the  body,  that  anasarca  may  not  take  place : to 
remove  the  hard  and  soft  parts  of  the  body,  and  to 
convey  into  the  system  medicines  which  are  applied  to 
the  surface  of  the  body. 

Lymphatic  glands.  Glandules  lymphaticce.  See 
Conglobate  gland. 


Lypo'ma.  See  Lipoma. 

LY'RA.  (From  Xvpa,  a lyre,  or  musical  instru- 
ment.) Psalterium.  The  triangular  medullary  space 
between  the  posterior  crura  of  the  fornix  of  the  cere- 
brum, which  is  marked  with  prominent  medullary 
fibres  that  give  the  appearance  of  a lyre. 

LYRATUS.  (From  lyra , a musical  instrument.) 
Lyrate  or  lyre-shaped.  A leaf  is  so  named  which  is 
cut  into  transverse  segments,  generally  longer  towards 
the  extremities  of  the  leaf,  which  is  rounded  as  in 
Erysimum  barbaria. 

Ly'PvUS.  (From  lyra,  the  lyre:  so  called  because  its 
leaves  are  divided  like  the  strings  of  a lyre.)  S tv  Ar- 
nica montana. 

Lysigy'ia.  (From  Avar,  to  loosen,  and  yviov,  a 
member.)  The  relaxation  of  limbs. 

LYSIMA'CHIA.  (From  Lysimachus , who  first  dis- 
covered it.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
na:an  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Lysimachia  numularia.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  money-wort.  Nummularia;  Hirundinaria ; Cen- 
timorbia.  Money-wort.  This  plant  is  very  common 
in  our  ditches.  It  was  formerly  accounted  vulnerary  ; 
and  was  said  to  possess  antiscorbutic  and  restringent 
qualities.  Boerhaave  looks  upon  it  as  similar  to  a 
mixture  of  scurvy-grass  with  sorrel. 

Lysimachia  purpurea.  See  Lythrum  salicaria. 

LYSSA.  (Avaaot  rabies .)  The  specific  name  in 
Good’s  Nosology  for  hydrophobia.  Entasia  lyssa. 

Lyssode'ctus.  (From  Xvooa,  canine  madness,  and 
SaKvvpt,  to  bite.)  One  who  is  mad  in  consequence  of 
having  been  bitten  by  a mad  animal. 

LYTI1RODES.  See  Scapolite. 

LY'THR  UM.  (From  Xvdpov,  blood  : so  called  from 
its  resemblance  in  colour.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Dodecandria ; 
Order,  Digynia. 

Lythrum  salicaria.  Lysimachia  purpurea.  The 
systematic  name  of  the  common  or  purple  willow-herb. 
The  herb,  root,  and  flowers  possess  a considerable 
degree  of  astringency,  and  are  used  medicinally  in  the 
cure  of  diarrhoeas  and  dysenteries,  fluor  albus,  and 
haemoptysis. 

LYTTA.  (The  name  of  a genus  of  insects.)  See 
Cantharis. 


M 


TWBT  This  letter  has  two  significations.  When  herbs, 
ITi  * flowers,  chips,  or  such-like  substan«es  are  or- 
dered in  a prescription,  and  M.  follows  them,  it  signifies 
manipulus , a handful ; and  when  several  ingredients 
have  been  directed,  it  is  a contraction  of  misce;  thus, 
m.f.  haust.  signifies  mix  and  let  a draught  be  made. 

Maca'ndon.  (Indian.)  A tree  growing  in  Malabar, 
the  fruit  of  which  is  roasted  and  eaten  as  a cure  for 
dysenteries,  and  in  cholera  morbus,  and  other  com- 
plaints. 

Macapa'tli.  , Sarsaparilla. 

Macaxocotli'fera.  The  name  of  a tree  in  the 
West  Indies,  the  fruit  of  which  is  sweet  and  laxative. 
A decoction  of  the  bark  of  this  tree  cures  the  itch,  and 
the  powder  thereof  heal  ulcers. 

MACBRIDE,  David,  was  bom  in  the  county  of 
Antrim,  of  an  ancient  Scotch  family,  in  1726.  After 
serving  his  apprenticeship  to  a surgeon,  he  went  into 
the  navy,  where  he  remained  some  years.  At  this 
period  he  was  led  to  investigate  particularly  the  treat- 
ment of  scurvy,  upon  which  he  afterward  published 
a treatise.  After  the  peace  of  Aix-la-Chape!le,  he  at- 
tended the  lectures  in  Edinburgh  and  London ; and 
about  the  end  of  1749,  settled  in  Dublin  as  a surgeon 
and  accoucheur,  but  his  youth  and  modesty  greatly 
retarded  his  advancement  at  first.  In  1764,  he  pub- 
lished his  Experimental  Essays,  which  were  every 
where  received  with  greatapplausc ; and  the  University 
of  Glasgow  conferred  on  him  a Doclor’s  degree.  For 
several  years  after  this  he  gave  private  lectures  on 
physic ; which  he  published  in  1772 : this  work  dis- 
played great  acuteness  of  observation,  and  very  philo- 


sophical views  of  pathology;  and  contained  a new 
arrangement  of  diseases,  which  appeared  to  Dr.  Cullen 
of  sufficient  importance  to  be  introduced  into  his  system 
of  nosology.  His  merit  being  thus  displayed,  he  got 
into  very  extensive  practice;  indeed,  he  was  so  much 
harassed,  that  he  suffered  for  some  time  an  almost  total 
incapacity  for  sleep ; when  an  accidental  cold  brought 
on  high  fever  and  delirium,  which  terminated  his  ex- 
istence towards  the  close  of  1778. 

MACE.  See  Myristica  moschala. 

. Macedonian  parsley.  See  Bubon  macedonicum. 

Macedoni'sium  semen.  See  Smyrnium  olusatrum. 

Ma'cer.  (From  masa , Hebrew.)  Grecian  macer 
or  mace.  The  root  which  is  imported  from  Barbary  by 
this  name,  and  is  supposed  to  be  the  simarouba,  and  is 
said  to  be  anti- dysenteric. 

MACER  A'TION.  {Macer atio ; from  macero,  to 
soften  by  water.)  In  a pharrhaceutical  sense,  this  term 
implies  an  infusion  either  with  or  withoutheat,  wherein 
the  ingredients  are  intended  to  be  almost  wholly  dis- 
solved in  order  to  extract  their  virtues. 

Macero'na.  See  Smyrnium  olusatrum. 

Mach.e'rion.  Machceris.  The  amputating  knife 

MACIIA'ON.  The  proper  name  of  an  ancient 
physician,  said  to  be  one  of  the  sons  of  iEsculapius ; 
whence  some  authors  have  fancied  to  dignify  their 
own  inventions  with  his  name,  as  particularly  a col- 
lyrium,  described  by  Scribonius,  intituled,  Jisclepias 
Machaonis ; and  hence  also,  medicine  in  general  is  by 
some  called  Jlrs  Machaonia. 

Machinamk'ntum  aristionis.  A machine  for  re- 
ducing dislocation. 


37 


MAG 


MAG 


MA'CIES.  Emaciation.  See  Atrophy  and  Tales. 

MA'CIS.  Mace.  See  Myristica. 

MAO  KAREL.  This  delicious  fish  is  the  Scomber 
scomber  of  Linnseus.  When  fresh  it  is  of  easy  diges- 
tion, and  very  nutritious.  Pickled  and  salted,  it  be- 
comes hard  and  difficult  for  the  stomach  to  manage. 

[The  Scomber  genus  forms  a family  of  fish,  most  of 
which  are  remarkable  for  their  beauty  and  elegance,  as 
well  as  for  their  qualities  of  being  generally  good  food. 
The  New-York  markets  are  supplied  with  abundance 
of  mackarel  in  their  season.  There  are  eight  species 
frequenting  the  ocean  and  waters  adjacent  to  this  city, 
and  they  are  all  eatable  ; some  of  them,  however,  are 
more  abundant  than  others.  We  have  the  following, 
viz 

Scomber  grex, 

vernalis, 

. . plumbeus, 

. ductor, 

. . crysos, 

. . maculatus, 

. . zonatos,  and 

MACQ.UER,  Joseph,  was  born  at  Paris,  in  1710, 
where  he  became  doctor  of  medicine,  professor  of  phar- 
macy, and  censor  royal.  He  was  likewise  a member 
of  some  foreign  academies,  and  conducted  the  inedi 
cal  and  chemical  department  of  the  Journal  des  Sga- 
vans.  He  pursued  chemistry,  not  so  much  with  a view 
of  multiplying  pharmaceutical  preparations,  as  had 
been  mostly  the  case  before,  but,  rather  as  a branch  of 
natural  philosophy ; and  gained  a considerable  reputa- 
tion by  publishing  several  useful  and  popular  works 
on  the  subject.  The  most  laborious  of  these  was  a 
dictionary  in  two  octavo  volumes ; subsequently  trans- 
lated into  English  by  Keir,  with  great  improvements. 
He  published  also  “ Formulae  Medicamentorum  Magis- 
tralium,”  and  had  a share  in  the  composition  of  the 
Pharmacopoeia  Parisiensis  of  1758.  His  death  occur- 
red in  1784. 

MACROCE'PHALUS.  [From  paicpos , long,  and 
Kt<pakq,  the  head.)  The  name  of  a whale  fish.  See 
Physeter  macro  cephalus. 

MACROPHYSOCE'PHALUS.  (From  paxpog,  long, 
<f>vms,  nature,  and  KE(j>a\i ;,  the  head,  so  called  from  the 
length  of  the  head.)  One  who  has  a head  unnaturally 
long  and  large.  This  word,  according  to  Turton,  is 
only  used  by  Ambrose  Par6. 

MACRO'PIPER.  (From  paxpog , long,  and  neirepi, 
pepper.)  See  Piper  longum. 

iMACROPNCE' A.  (From  panpos,  long,  and  nveo), 
to  breathe.)  A difficulty  of  breathing,  where  the  in- 
spirations are  at  long  intervals. 

MA'CULA.  A spot,  a permanent  discoloration  of 
some  portion  of  the  skin,  often  with  a change  of  its 
texture,  but  not  connected  with  any  disorder  of  the 
constitution. 

Macula  matricis.  A mother’s  mark.  See  Mccvus 
maternus. 

MACULATUS.  Spotted:  applied  in  botany  to 
stems,  petals,  &c.  as  the  stem  of  the  common  hem- 
lock, Conium  maculatum ; the  petals  of  the  Digitalis 
purpurea. 

Mad-apple.  See  Solanum  melongena. 

MADARO'SIS-  (From  paSog , bald,  without  hair.) 
A defect  or  loss  of  eyebrows  or  eyelashes,  causing  a 
disagreeable  deformity,  and  painful  sensation  of  the 
eyes,  in  a strong  light. 

MADDER.  See  Rubia. 

MADNESS.  See  Melancholia,  and  Mania. 

Madness , canine.  See  Hydrophobia. 

MA'DOR.  Moisture.  A sweating. 

MADREPORA.  Madrepore.  1.  A genus  in  natu- 
ral history,  of  the  class,  Vermes ; and  order,  Zoophyta. 
An  animal  resembling  a Medusa. 

2.  A species  of  coral.  It  consists  of  carbonate  of 
lime,  and  a little  animal  membraneous  substance. 

MAGATTI,  Cjesar,  was  born  in  1579,  in  the  dutchy 
of  Reggio.  He  distinguished  himself  by  his  early  pro- 
ficiency in  philosophy  and  medicine  at  Bologna,  where 
he  graduated  in  his  18th  year;  and  afterward  went 
to  Rome.  Returning  at  last  to  his  native  country,  he 
Boon  acquired  so  much  reputation  in  his  profession, 
that  he  was  invited,  as  professor  of  surgery,  to  Ferrara ; 
and  after  greatly  distinguishing  himself  in  that  capa- 
city., he  was  induced,  during  a severe  illness,  to  enter 
into  the  fraternity  of  Capuchins.  He  still  continued, 


however,  to  practise,  and  acquired  the  confidence  of 
persons  of  the  first  rank,  especially  the  duke  of  Modena. 
But  suffering  severely  from  the  stone,  he  underwent  an 
operation  at  Bologna  in  1647,  which  he  did  not  long 
survive.  He  was  author  of  a considerable  improve- 
ment in  the  art  of  surgery,  by  his  work  entitled,  “ De 
rara  Medicatione  Vulnerum,”  condemning  the  use  of 
tents,  and  recommending  a simple,  easy  method  of 
dressing,  without  the  irritation  of  frequently  cleansing 
and  rubbing  the  tender  granulations  : and  in  an  appen- 
dix he  refutes  the  notion  of  gun-shot  wounds  being 
envenomed,  or  attended  with  cauterization.  He  after- 
ward published  a defence  of  this  work  against  some 
objections  of  Sennertus. 

Magda'leon.  (From  paoou),  to  knead.)  A mass 
of  plaster,  or  other  composition,  reduced  to  a cylindri- 
cal form. 

Magella'nicus  cortex.  See  Wintera  aromatica. 

MA'GISTERY.  (Magisterium ; from  magister , a 
master.)  An  obsolete  term  used  by  ancient  chemists 
to  signify  a peculiar  and  secret  method  of  preparing 
any  medicine,  as  it  were,  by  a masterly  process.  The 
term  was  also  long  applied  to  all  precipitates. 

MAGISTRA'LIA.  (From  magister,  a master.)  Ap- 
plied, by  way  of  eminence,  to  such  medicines  as  are 
extemporaneous,  or  in  common  use. 

Magistra'ntia.  (From  magistro,  to  rule : so  called, 
by  way  of  eminence,  as  exceeding  all  others  in  virtue.) 
See  Imperatoria. 

MA'GMA.  (From  paaoo),  to  blend  together.) 
Ecpiesma.  1.  A thick  ointment. 

2.  The  faeces  of  an  ointment  after  the  thinner  parts 
are  strained  off. 

3.  A confection. 

MA'GNES.  (From  Magnes,  its  inventor.)  The 
magnet,  or  loadstone.  A muddy  iron  ore,  in  which 
the  iron  is  modified  in  such  a manner  as  to  afford  a 
passage  to  a fluid  called  the  magnetic  fluid.  The  mag- 
net exhibits  certain  phenomena ; it  is  known  by  its  pro- 
perty of  attracting  steel  filings,  and  is  found  in  Au 
vergne,  in  Biscay,  in  Spain,  in  Sweden,  and  Siberia. 

Magnes  arsenicalis.  Arsenical  magnet.  It  is  a 
composition  of  equal  parts  of  antimony,  sulphur,  and 
arsenic,  mixed  and  melted  together,  so  as  to  become  a 
glassy  body. 

Magnes  epilepsia.  An  old  and  obsolete  name  of 
native  cinnabar. 

MAGNE  SIA.  1.  The  ancient  chemists  gave  this 
name  to  such  substances  as  they  conceived  to  have  the 
power  of  attracting  any  principle  from  the  air.  Thus 
an  earth  which,  on  being  exposed  to  the  air,  increased 
in  weight,  and  yielded  vitriol,  they  called  magnesia 
vitriolata : and  later  chemists,  observing  in  their  pro- 
cess for  obtaining  magnesia,  that  nitrous  acid  was 
separated,  and  an  earth  left  behind,  supposing  it  had 
attracted  the  acid,  called  it  magnesia  nitri,  which, 
from  its  colour,  soon  obtained  the  name  of  magnesia 
alba. 

2.  The  name  of  one  of  the  primitive  earths,  having 
a metallic  basis,  called  magnesium.  It  has  been  found 
native  in  the  state  of  hydrate. 

Magnesia  may  be  obtained  by  pouring  into  a solu- 
tion of  its  sulphate  a solution  of  subcarbonate  of  soda, 
washing  the  precipitate,  drying  it,  and  exposing  it  to  a 
red  heat.  It  is  usually  procured  in  commerce,  by  act- 
ing on  magnesian  limestone  with  the  impure  muriate 
of  magnesia,  or  bittern  of  the  sea-salt  manufactories. 
The  muriatic  acid  goes  to  the  lime,  forming  a soluble 
salt,  and  leaves  behind  the  magnesia  of  both  the  bit- 
tern and  limestone.  Or  the  bittern  is  decomposed  by 
a crude  subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  obtained  from  the 
distillation  of  bones  in  iron  cylinders.  Muriate  of  am- 
monia and  subcarbonate  of  magnesia  result.  The 
former  is  evaporated  to  dryness,  mixed  with  chalk,  and 
sublimed.  Subcarbonate  of  ammonia  is  thus  recover- 
ed, with  which  a new  quantity  of  bittern  may  be  de- 
composed ; and  thus,  in  ceaseless  repetition,  forming 
an  elegant  and  economical  process.  100  parts  of  crys- 
tallized Epsom  salt,  require  for  complete  decomposition 
56  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  or  44  dry  subcarbo- 
natc  of  soda,  and  yield  16  of  pure  magnesia  after  cal- 
cination. 

Magnesia  is  a white,  soft  powder.  Its  sp.  gr.  is  2.3 
by  Kirwan.  It  renders  the  syrup  of  violets,  and  infu- 
sion of  red  cabbage,  green,  and  reddens  turmeric.  It 
is  infusible,  except  by  the  hydroxygen  blow-pipe.  It  has 
scarcely  any  taste,  and  no  smell.  It  is  nearly  insoluble 


MAG 


MAG 


In  water ; but  it  absorbs  a quantity  of  that  liquid  with 
the  production  of  heat.  And  when  it  is  thrown  down 
from  the  sulphate  by  a caustic  alkali,  it  is  combined 
With  water  constituting  a hydrate,  which,  however, 
separates  at  a red  heat.  It  contains  about  one  fourth 
its  weight  of  water. 

When  magnesia  is  exposed  to  the  air,  it  very  slowly 
attracts  carbonic  acid.  It  combines  with  sulphur,  form- 
ing a sulphuret. 

The  metallic  basis,  or  magnesium,  may  be  obtain- 
ed in  the  state  of  amalgam  with  mercury  by  electri- 
zation. 

When  magnesia  is  strongly  heated  in  contact  with 
2 volumes  of  chlorine,  this  gas  is  absorbed,  and  1 vo- 
lume of  oxygen  is  disengaged.  Hence  it  is  evident  that 
there  exists  a combination  of  magnesium  and  chlorine, 
or  a true  chloride.  The  salt  called  muriate  of  mag- 
nesia, is  a compound  of  the  chloride  and  water.  When 
it  is  acted  on  by  a strong  heat,  by  far  the  greatest  part 
of  the  chlorine  unites  to  the  hydrogen  of  the  water, 
and  rises  in  the  form  of  muriatic  acid  gas ; while  the 
oxygen  of  the  decomposed  water  combines  with  the 
magnesium  to  form  magnesia. 

Magnesia  is  often  associated  with  lime  in  minerals, 
and  their  perfect  separation  becomes  an  interesting 
problem  in  analysis. 

Properties.  Pure  magnesia  does  not  form  with 
water  an  adhesive  ductile  mass.  It  is  in  the  form  of 
a very  white  spongy  powder,  soft  to  the  touch,  and 
perfectly  tasteless.  It  is  very  slightly  soluble  in  water. 
It  absorbs  carbonic  acid  gradually  from  the  atmosphere. 
It  changes  very  delicate  blue  vegetable  colours  to  green. 
Its  attraction  to  the  acids  is  weaker  than  those  of  the 
alkalies.  Its  salts  are  partially  decomposed  by  ammo- 
nia, one  part  of  the  magnesia  being  precipitated,  and 
the  other  forming  a triple  compound.  Its  specific  gra- 
vity is  about  2.3.  It  is  infusible  even  by  the  most  in- 
tense heat ; but  when  mixed  with  some  of  the  other 
earths  it  becomes  fusible.  It  combines  with  sulphur. 
It  does  not  unite  to  phosphorus  or  carbon.  It  is  not 
dissolved  by  alkalies  in  the  humid  way.  When  heated 
strongly,  it  becomes  phosphorescent.  With  the  dense 
acids  it  becomes  ignited.  With  all  the  acids  it  forms 
salts  of  a bitter  taste,  mostly  very  soluble. 

The  magnesia  of  the  present  London  Pharmacopceia 
was  formerly  called  Magnesia  calcinata ; usta  ; pur  a. 
It  is  directed  to  be  made  thus : — Take  of  carbonate  of 
magnesia,  four  ounces ; burn  it  in  a very  strong  fire, 
for  two  hours,  or  until  acetic  acid  being  dropped  in, 
extricates  no  bubbles  of  gas.  It  is  given  as  an  absorb- 
ent, antacid,  and  eccoprotic,  in  cardialgia,  spasms,  con- 
vulsions, and  tormina  of  the  bowels  of  infants ; pyro- 
sis, flatulencies,  and  other  diseases  of  the  primae  via?; 
obstipation,  leucorrhoea,  rickets,  scrofula,  crusta  lactea, 
and  podagra.  The  dose  is  from  half  a drachm  to  a 
drachm. 

Magnesia  calcinata.  See  Magnesia. 

Magnesia,  hydrate  of.  A mineral  found  in  New 
Jersey,  consisting  of  magnesia  and  water. 

[“The  structure  of  this  new  and  interesting  mineral 
is  very  distinctly  foliated;  and  the  folias  frequently 
radiate  from  a centre.  Their  lustre  is  more  or  less 
shining  and  pearly;  and  they  are  somewhat  elastic. 

The  laminae  when  separate  are  transparent  ; in  the 
mass  only  semi-transparent ; and  by  exposure  to  the 
weather,  their  surface  becomes  dull  and  opaque. 

It  is  soft,  and  may  be  scratched  by  the  finger  nail, 
like  talc.  It  slightly  adheres  to  the  tongue ; and  its 
sp.  gr.  is  2.13.  Its  colour  is  white,  often  tinged  with 
green  ; its  powder  is  a pure  white. 

Iubecomes  opaque  and  friable  before  the  blow  pipe, 
andiits  weight  is  diminished.  In  diluted  sulphuric  acid, 
it  nearly  dissolves  without  effervescence,  and  yields  a 
limpid  solution  extremely  bitter  to  the  taste.  Accord- 
ing to  Prof.  Bruce,  to  whom  we  are  indebted  for  a 
knowledge  of  this  mineral,  it  is  composed  of  pure 
magnesia  70,  water  30. 

It  is  sufficiently  distinguished  from  talc  by  its  solu- 
bility in  acids. 

It  is  found  at  Hoboken,  New-Jersey,  in  veins,  a few 
lines  to  two  inches  in  thickness ; they  traverse  serpen- 
tine in  various  directions,  and,  near  the  sides  of  the 
veins,  the  serpentine  is  sometimes  intermixed  with  the 
folia?  of  the  magnesia.” — Clean.  Min. 

Specimens  of  this  hydrate,  or  native  magnesia,  have 
also  been  found  in  the  veins  of  the  serpentine  at  Hobo- 
ken, and  on  Staten  Island,  in  a pulverulent  form,  and 


when  collected  has  the  appearance  of  the  magnesia 
alba  of  the  shops,  a specimen  of  which  is  in  iny  pos- 
session. A.] 

Magnesia  usta.  See  Magnesia' 

Magnesia  vitriolata.  See  Magnesia  sulphas. 

Magnesia  subcarbonas.  Magncsicecarbonas;  Mag- 
nesia alba.  Subcarbonate  of  Magnesia.  The  London 
College  direct  it  to  be  made  as  follows: — Take  of  sul- 
phate of  magnesia,  a pound  ; subcarbonate  of  potassa, 
nine  ounces ; water,  three  gallons.  Dissolve  the  sub 
carbonate  of  potassa  in  three  pints  of  the  water,  and 
strain ; dissolve  also  the  sulphate  of  magnesia  separately 
in  five  pints  of  the  water,  and  strain  ; then  add  the  rest 
of  the  water  to  this  latter  solution,  apply  heat,  and 
when  it  boils,  pour  in  the  former  solution,  stirring  them 
well  together ; next,  strain  through  a linen  cloth ; 
lastly,  wash  the  powder  repeatedly  with  boiling  water, 
and  dry  it  upon  bibulous  paper,  in  a heat  of  200°.  It 
is  in  form  of  very  fine  powder,  considerably  resembling 
flour  in  its  appearance  and  feel;  it  has  no  sensible 
taste  on  the  tongue ; it  gives  a faint  greenish  colour  to 
the  tincture  of  violets,  and  converts  turnsole  to  a blue. 
It  is  employed  medicinally  as  an  absorbent,  antacid, 
and  purgative,  in  doses  from  half  a drachm  to  two 
drachms. 

Magnesite  sulphas.  Sulphas  magnesite ; Sulphas 
magnesite  purificata ; Magnesia  vitriolata ; Sal  ca- 
tharticus  amarus.  Sal  catharticum  amarum.  Sul- 
phate of  magnesia.  Epsom  salt.  Bitter  purging  salt. 

The  sulphate  of  magnesia  exists  in  several  mineral 
springs,  and  in  sea-water. 

It  is  from  these  saliiffi  solutions  that  the  salt  is  ob- 
tained ; the  method  generally  adopted  for  obtaining  it 
is  evaporation,  which  causes  the  salt  to  crystallize  in 
tetrahedral  prisms.  It  has  a very  bitter  taste,  and  is 
soluble  in  its  own  weight  of  water  at  60°,  and  in  three- 
fourths  of  its  weight  of  boiling  water.  Sulphate  of 
magnesia,  when  perfectly  pure,  effloresces ; but  that 
of  commerce  generally  contains  foreign  salts,  such  as 
the  muriate  of  magnesia,  which  renders  it  so  deliques- 
cent, that  it  must  be  kept  in  a close  vessel  or  bladder. 
By  the  action  of  heat  it  undergoes  the  watery  fusion, 
and  loses  its  water  of  crystallization,  but  does  not  part 
with  its  acid.  One  hundred  parts  of  crystallized  sul- 
phate of  magnesia  consist  of  29.35  parts  of  acid,  17  of 
earth,  and  53.65  of  water.  The  alkalies,  strontian, 
barytes,  and  all  the  salts  formed  by  these  salifiable 
bases,  excepting  the  alkaline  muriates,  decompose  sul- 
phate of  magnesia.  It  is  also  decomposed  by  the 
nitrate,  carbonate,  and  muriate  of  lime. 

Epsom  salt  is  a mild  and  gentle  purgative,  operating 
with  sufficient  efficacy,  and  in  general  with  ease  and 
safety,  rarely  occasioning  any  gripes,  or  the  other  in- 
conveniences of  resinous  purgatives.  Six  or  eight 
drachms  may  be  dissolved  in  a proper  quantity  of  com- 
mon water  ; or  four,  five,  or  more  in  a pint  or  quart  of 
the  purging  mineral  waters.  These  solutions  may 
likewise  be  so  managed,  in  small  doses,  as  to  produce 
evacuation  from  the  other  emunctories;  if  the  patient 
be  kept  warm,  they  increase  perspiration,  and  by 
moderate  exercise  in  the  cool  air,  the  urinary  dis- 
charge. Some  allege  that  this  salt  has  a peculiar  effect 
in  allaying  pain,  as  in  colic,  even  independently  of 
evacuation. 

It  is,  however,  principally  used  for  the  preparation 
of  the  subcarbonate  of  magnesia. 

[Magnesian  limestone.  This  is  a magnesian  car- 
bonate of  lime,  of  which  there  are  two  varieties; 
common  magnesian  limestone,  or  bitter-spar,  and  do- 
lomite ; both  of  which  have  been  found  in  abundance 
in  Pennsylvania,  New-York,  and  Connecticut.  Some 
of  the  quarries  supplying  this  limestone  may  hereafter 
become  important  in  the  manufacture  of  Epsom  salts, 
or  sulphate  of  magnesia.  A.] 

MAGNESITE.  ~ A yellowish  gray  or  white  mineral, 
composed  of  magnesia,  carbonic  acid,  alumina,  a ferru- 
ginous manganese,  lime,  and  water,  found  in  serpentine 
rocks,  in  Moravia. 

MAGNESIUM.  The  metallic  basis  of  magnesia. 
See  Magnesia. 

MAGNET.  See  Magnes. 

MAGNETISM.  The  property  which  iron  possesses 
of  attracting  or  repelling  other  iron,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances, that  is,  similar  poles  of  magnets  repel,  but 
opposite  poles  attract  each  other. 

Magnetism,  animal.  A sympathy  lately  supposed, 
by  some  persons,  to  exist  between  the  magnet  and  the 

39 


MAL, 


MAL 


human  body;  by  means  of  which,  the  former  became 
capable  of  curing  many  diseases  in  an  unknown  way, 
somewhat  resembling  the  performances  of  the  old  ma- 
gicians. Animal  magnetism  is  now  entirely  exploded. 

Magnum  os.  The  third  bone  of  the  lower  row  of 
bones  of  the  carpus,  reckoning  from  the  thumb  towards 
the  little  finger. 

MAGNUS.  The  term  is  applied  to  parts  from  their 
relative  size ; and  to  diseases  and  remedies  from  their 
importance ; as  magnum  os , magnus  morbus , magnum 
dei  donum , See. 

Magnum  dei  donum.  So  Dr.  Mead  calls  the  Peru- 
vian bark. 

Magnus  morbus.  The  great  disease.  So  Hippo- 
crates calls  the  epilepsy. 

Magy'daris.  The  root  of  the  laserwort- 

Mahagoni.  See  Swietenia. 

Mahaleb.  A species  of  Prunus. 

Mahmou'dy.  Scammonium. 

MAIDENHAIR.  See  Adianthum. 

Maidenhair , Canada.  See  Adianthum  pedatum. 

Maidenhair , common.  See  Asplenium  trichomancs. 

Maidenhair , English.  See  Adianthum. 

Maidenhair , golden.  See  Polytrichum. 

Maidenhair-tree.  Oinan  itsio.  The  Ginkobiloba. 
In  China  and  Japan,  where  this  tree  grows,  the  fruit 
acquires  the  size  of  a damask  plumb,  and  contains  a 
kernel  resembling  that  of  our  apricot.  These  kernels 
always  make  part  of  the  desert  at  all  public  feasts  and 
entertainments.  They  are  said  to  promote  digestion, 
and  to  cleanse  the  stomach  and  bowels.  The  oil  is 
used  at  the  table. 

Majanthemum.  See  Convallaria  majalis. 

MAJORA'NA.  ( Quodmense  Maio  floreat,  because 
it  flowers  in  May.)  See  Origanum  majorana. 

Majorana  syriaca.  See  Teucrium  marum. 

M A'LA.  (From  mains , an  apple : so  called  from  its 
roundness.)  A prominent  part  of  the  cheek.  See 
Jugale  os. 

Mala  jethiopica.  A species  of  love-apple.  See 
Solanum  lycopersicum. 

Mala  Assyria.  The  citron. 

Mala  aurantia.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Mala  cotonea.  The  quince. 

Mala  insana  nigra.  See  Solanum  melongena. 

Malabar  plum.  See  Eugenia  jambos. 

Malabathri  oleum.  Oil  of  cassia. 

Malaba'thrinum.  (From  paXafiaOpov,  malaba- 
thrum.)  Ointment  of  malabathrum.  It  is  compounded 
of  myrrh,  spikenard,  malabathrum,  and  many  other 
aromatic  ingredients. 

Malaba'thrum.  (MaXa(?a0pov : from  Malabar,  in 
India,  whence  it  was  brought,  and  belre,  a leaf,  Ind.) 
See  Lauras  cassia. 

Ma'laca  radix.  See  Sagittaria  alexipharmaca. 

Malacca  bean.  See  Avicennia  tomentosa. 

Ma'lache.  ( Malache , es.  f. ; from  paXaKos,  soft  : so 
called  from  the  softness  of  its  leaf.)  The  mallow.  See 
Malva. 

MALACHITE.  (From  paXaxn-,  the  mallow : from 
its  resemblance  in  colour  to  the  mallow.)  Mountain 
blue,  a carbonate  of  copper  ore  found  in  Siberia. 

MALACHOLITE.  See  Sahlite. 

Mala'cia.  (From  paXaxiov,  a ravenous  fish.)  De- 
praved appetite,  when  such  things  are  coveted  as  are 
not  proper  for  food.  See  Pica. 

MALACO'STEON.  (From  paXaicog,  soft,  and  o^eov, 
a bone.)  A softness  of  the  bones.  Mollities  ossium. 
A disease  of  the  bones,  wherein  they  can  be  bent  with- 
out fracturing  them,  in  consequence  either  of  the  inor- 
dinate absorption  of  the  phosphate  of  lime,  from  which 
their  natural  solidity  is  derived,  or  else  of  this  matter 
not  being  duly  secreted  and  deposited  in  their  fabric. 
In  rickets,  the  bones  only  yield  and  become  distorted 
by  slow  degrees  ; but  in  the  present  disease  they  may 
be  at  once  bent  in  any  direction.  The  mollities  ossium 
is  rare,  and  its  causes  not  well  understood.  All  the 
cases  of  mollities  ossium  yet  on  record  have  proved 
fatal,  and  no  means  of  cure  are  yet  known.  On  dissec- 
tion of  those  who  have  died,  all  the  bones,  except  the 
teeth,  have  been  found  unusually  soft,  so  that  scarcely 
any  of  them  could  resist  the  knife,  the  periosteum  has 
been  found  thicker  than  usual,  and  the  bones  have 
been  found  to  contain  a great  quantity  of  oily  matter 
and  little  earth. 

Mala'ctica.  (From  paXaoaoo,  to  soften.)  Emol- 
lient medicines. 

40 


Malagfue'tta.  Grains  of  paradise. 

Malaguetta.  Grains  of  paradise. 

MALA'GMA.  (From  paXaaaw,  to  soften.)  A poul 
tice. 

Malamiris.  A species  of  Piper. 

MALA'RIA.  The  name  in  Italy  of  an  endemic  in- 
termittent, which  attacks  people  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  Rome,  and  especially  about  the  Pontine  marshes, 
which  have  often  been  drained  to  carry  off  the  decom- 
posing animal  and  vegetable  materials  that  spread  their 
Aria  cattiva , as  it  is  called,  over  the  whole  of  the  cam- 
pagna. 

[The  Malaria  of  Rome  is  an  infected  atmosphere 
arising  from  marsh-miasmata,  producing  an  endemic 
disease.  We  have,  in  the  United  States,  many  similar 
instances  of  malaria  producing  also  local  and  endemic 
diseases.  The  Pontine  marshes  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  Rome  are  very  extensive,  and  infect  the  atmosphere 
over  a large  tract  of  country.  Lancisi  has  ably  de- 
scribed the  condition  and  effects  of  the  marsh-miasma 
of  Rome,  in  his  work  Be  noxiis  paludum  effluviis. 
The  Malaria  returns  annually  during  the  height  of  the 
warm  season,  and  is  destroyed  with  the  approach  of 
winter,  producing  in  this  country  what  we  call  a sea- 
sonable disease.  The  term  marsh-miasma , has  become 
rather  unfashionable,  as  perhaps  its  meaning  is  too 
indefinite,  but  it  is  not  more  so  than  Malaria.  In  fact, 
they  both  mean  the  same  thing,  or  the  same  state  of 
the  atmosphere,  both  producing  seasonable,  and  local 
or  endemic  diseases.  One  is  an  Italian  word,  meaning 
bad  air,  or  a sickening  state  of  the  atmosphere.  Mias- 
ma is  a Greek  word,  from  piaivu >,  to  infect,  importing 
a polluted,  corrupted,  or  infected  state  of  the  atmos- 
phere. A.] 

Malarum  ossa.  See  Jugale  os. 

MA'LATE.  Malas.  A salt  formed  by  the  union 
of  the  malic  acid,  or  acid  of  apples  with  salifiable 
bases  ; thus  malate  of  copper , malate  of  lead , &c. 

Ma'le.  The  arm-pit. 

Male  fern.  See  Polypodium  filix  mas. 

Male  orchis.  See  Orchis  mascula. 

Male  speedwell.  See  Veronica  officinalis. 

MALIC  ACID.  Acidum  malicum.  This  acid  is  ob- 
tained by  saturating  the  juice  of  apples  with  alkali, 
and  pouring  in  the  acetous  solution  of  lead,  until  it 
occasions  no  more  precipitate.  The  precipitate  is  then 
to  be  edulcorated  and  sulphuric  acid  poured  on  it, 
until  the  liquor  has  acquired  a fresh  acid  taste,  with- 
out any  mixture  of  sweetness.  The  whole  is  then  to 
be  filtered,  to  separate  the  sulphate  of  lead.  The  fil- 
tered liquor  is  the  malic  acid,  which  is  very  pure, 
remains  always  in  a fluid  state,  and  cannot  be  rendered 
concrete.  See  Sorbic  acid. 

MALIASMUS.  (From  paXis,  cutaneous  vermina- 
tion.)  Breeding  animalcules  on  the  skin,  as  the  louse, 
flea,  tick,  &c. 

MALI'GNANT.  (Malignus ; from  malus.)  A 
term  which  may  be  applied  to  any  disease,  the  symp- 
toms of  which  are  so  aggravated  as  to  thi eaten  the 
destruction  of  the  patient.  It  is  frequently  used  to  sig- 
nify a dangerous  epidemic. 

Malignant  fever.  See  Typhus. 

Malignant  sore  throat.  See  Cynanche  maligna. 

MA'LIS.  (M aXii,  and  paXiaopos,  are  Greek  nouns 
composing  cutaneous  vermination.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Eccritica, 
Order,  Acrotica.  Cutaneous  vermination.  It  has  six 
species,  vix.  Malis  pediculi ; pulicis ; acari ; filariw , 
cestri ; gordii. 

MALLEABILITY.  (Malleabilitas  ; from  malleus, 
a hammer.)  The  property  which  several  metals  pos- 
sess of  being  extended  under  the  hammer  into  thin 
plates,  without  cracking.  The  thin  leaves  of  silver 
and  gold  are  the  best  examples  of  malleability.  See 
Ductility. 

Malleamothe.  Pavette;  Pavate;  Erysipelas  eu- 
rans  arbor.  A shrub  wdiich  grows  in  Malabar.  The 
leaves,  boiled  in  palm  oil,  cure  the  impetigo;  the  root, 
powdered  and  mixed  with  ginger,  is  diuretic. 

MALLEATIO.  A species  of  St.  Vitus's  dance,  in 
which  the  person  has  a convulsive  action  of  one  or 
both  hands,  which  strike  the  knee  like  a hammer. 

Mallei  anterior.  See  Laxator  tympani. 

Mallei  externus.  See  Laxator  tympani. 

Mallei  internes.  See  Tensor  tympani. 

MALLE  OLUS.  (Dim.  of  malleus , a mallet:  bo 
j called  from  its  supposed  resemblance  to  a mallet) 


MAL 


MAL 


The  ankle,  distinguished  into  external  and  internal,  or 
malleolus  externus  and  internus. 

MA'LLEUS.  ( Malleus  quasi  molleus ; from  mollio , 
to  soften ; a hammer.)  A bone  of  the  internal  ear  is 
so  termed  from  its  resemblance.  It  is  distinguished 
into  a head,  neck,  and  manubrium.  The  head  is 
round,  and  incrusted  with  a thin  cartilage,  and  an- 
nexed to  another  bone  of  the  ear,  the  incus,  by  gingly- 
mus.  Its  neck  is  narrow,  and  situated  between  the 
head  and  manubrium,  or  handle ; from  which  a long 
slender  process  arises,  adheres  to  a furrow  in  the  au- 
ditory canal,  and  is  continued  as  far  as  the  fissure  in 
the  articular  cavity  of  the  temporal  bone.  The  ma- 
nubrium is  terminated  by  an  enlarged  extremity,  and 
connected  to  the  membrana  tympani  by  a short  conoid 
process. 

MALLOW.  S ee  Malva. 

Mallow , round-leaved.  See  Malva  rotundifolia. 

Mallow , vervain.  See  Malva  alcea. 

Malograna'tum.  (From  malum , an  apple,  and 
granum,  a grain : so  named  from  its  grain-like  seeds.) 
The  pomegranate. 

MALPIGHI,  Marcello,  was  bom  near  Bologna, 
in  1628.  He  went  through  his  preliminary  studies 
with  great  eclat,  and  especially  distinguished  himself 
by  his  zealous  pursuit  of  anatomy.  His  merit  pro- 
cured him,  in  1653,  the  degree  of  doctor  in  medicine, 
and,  three  years  after,  the  appointment  of  professor  of 
physic,  at  Bologna ; but  he  was  soon  invited  to  Pisa, 
by  the  Grand  Duke  of  Tuscany.  However,  the  air  of 
this  place  injuring  his  health,  which  was  naturally  de- 
licate, he  was  obliged,  in  1659,  to  return  to  his  office  at 
Bologna.  Three  years  after,  he  was  tempted  by  the 
magistrates  of  Messina  to  accept  the  medical  profes- 
sorship there ; but  his  little  deference  to  ancient  au- 
thorities involved  him  in  controversies  with  iiis  col- 
leagues, which  forced  him  to  return  again  to  Bologna, 
in  1666.  His  reputation  rapidly  extended  throughout 
Europe,  as  a philosophical  inquirer,  and  he  was 
chosen  a member  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London, 
which  afterward  printed  his  works  at  their  own  ex- 
pense. In  1691,  Pope  Innocent  XII.,  on  his  election, 
chose  Malpighi  for  his  chief  physician  and  chamber- 
lain,  when  he  removed  to  Rome;  but,  three  years 
after,  he  was  carried  off  by  an  apoplectic  stroke.  He 
joined,  with  an  indefatigable  pursuit  of  knowledge,  a 
remarkable  degree  of  candour  and  modesty ; and  ranks 
very  high  among  the  philosophers  of  the  physiological 
age  in  which  he  lived.  He  was  the  first  to  employ  the 
microscope  in  examining  the  circulation  of  the  blood ; 
and  the  same  instrument  assisted  him  in  exploring  the 
minute  structure  of  various  organs,  as  is  evident  from 
his  first  publication  on  the  lungs,  in  1661 ; and  this  was 
followed  by  successive  treatises  on  many  other  parts. 
In  1669,  his  essay,  “ De  Formatione  Pulli  in  Ovo,” 
was  printed  at  London,  with  his  remarks  on  the  silk- 
worm, and  on  the  conglobate  glands:  much  light  was 
thrown  by  these  investigations  on  the  obscure  subject 
of  generation,  and  other  important  points  of  physio- 
logy. He  was  thence  led  to  the  consideration  of  the 
structure  and  functions  of  plants,  and  evinced  himself 
an  original,  as  well  as  a very  profound  observer.  His 
“ Anatome  Plantarum”  was  published  by  the  Royal 
Society,  in  1675  and  1679,  with  some  observations  on 
the  incubation  of  the  egg.  His  only  medical  work, 
“ Consultatiorum  Medicinalium  Centuria  Prima,”  did 
not  appear  till  1713:  he  was  not  distinguished  as  a 
practitioner,  but  deserves  praise  for  pointing  out  the 
mischief  of  bleeding,  in  the  malignant  epidemics 
which  prevailed  in  Italy  in  his  time. 

MALPI'GHIA.  (So  named  in  honour  of  Malpighi, 
the  celebrated  vegetable  anatomist.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  De- 
candria;  Order,  Trigynia. 

Malpighia  glabra.  The  systematic  name  of  a 
tree  which  affords  an  esculent  cherry. 

MALT.  Grain  which  has  become  sweet,  from  the 
conversion  of  its  starch  into  sugar,  by  an  incipient 
growth  or  germination,  artificially  induced,  called 
malting. 

Ma'ltha.  (From  pa\aaau>,  to  soften.)  Maltlia- 
ecdes.  1.  A medicine  softened  and  tempered  with  wax. 

2.  The  name  of  the  mineral  tallow  of  Kirwan, 
which  resembles  wax,  and  is  said  to  have  been  found 
on  the  coast  of  Finland. 

Maltha'ctica.  (From  ^aX0«Ac«^w,  to  soften.)  Emol- 
lient medicines. 


Maltheorum.  Common  salt. 

MA'LIJM.  1.  A disease. 

2.  An  apple. 

Malum  mortuum.  A disease  that  appears  in  the 
form  of  a pustule,  which  soon  forms  a dry,  brown, 
hard,  and  broad  crust.  It  is  seldom  attended  with 
pain,  and  remains  fixed  for  a long  time  before  it  can 
be  detached.  It  is  mostly  observed  on  the  tibia  and  os 
coccygis,  and  sometimes  the  face. 

Malum  pilare.  See  Plica. 

MA'LUS.  See  Pyrus  malus. 

Malus  indica.  Bilumbi  biting-bing , of  Bontius. 
The  Malus  indica — fructu  pentagono , of  Europeans. 
It  is  carefully  cultivated  in  the  gaidens  of  the  East  In- 
dies, where  it  flowers  throughout  the  year.  The  juice 
of  the  root  is  cooling,  and  drank  as  a cure  for  fevers. 
The  leaves,  boiled  and  made  into  a cataplasm  with 
rice,  are  famed  in  all  sorts  of  tumours,  and  tlie  juice 
of  the  fruit  is  used  in  almost  all  external  heats,  dipping 
linen  rags  in  it,  and  applying  them  to  the  parts.  It  is 
drank,  mixed  with  arrack,  to  cure  diarrhoeas;  and  the 
dried  leaves,  mixed  with  betel  leaves,  and  given  in 
arrack,  are  said  to  promote  delivery.  The  ripe  fruit  is 
eaten  as  a delicacy,  and  the  unripe  made  into  a pickle 
for  the  use  of  the  table. 

M A'LVA.  ( Malva  quasi  molva ; from  mollis , soft : 
named  from  the  softness  of  its  leaves.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan  system.  Class, 
Monadelphia;  Order,  Polyandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  common  mal- 
low See  Malva  sylvestris. 

Malva  alcea.  Malva  verbcnaca.  The  vervain 
mallow.  This  plant  is  distinguished  from  the  common 
mallow  by  its  leaves  being  jagged,  or  cut  in  about  the 
edges.  It  agrees  in  virtues  with  the  other  mallows, 
but  it  is  the  least  mucilaginous  of  any.  This,  like  to 
the  other  mallows,  abounds  with  a mucilage,  and  is 
good  for  pectoral  drinks. 

Malva  arborea.  See  Alcea  rosea. 

Malva  rotundifolia.  Round-leaved  mallow.  The 
whole  herb  and  root  possess  similar  virtues  to  the  com- 
mon mallow.  See  Malva  sylvestris. 

Malva  sylvestris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  mallow.  Malva  vulgaris;  Malva — caule 
erecto  herbaceo,  foliis  septemlobatis  acutis , peduveulis 
petiolisque  pilosis.  This  indigenous  plant  has  a 
strong  affinity  to  the  altha;a,  both  in  a botanical  and 
a medical  respect.  See  Althaea.  The  leaves  and 
flowers  are  principally  used  in  fomentations,  cata- 
plasms, and  emollient  enemas.  The  internal  use  of 
the  leaves  seems  to  be  wholly  superseded  by  the  radix 
althsea. 

Malva  verbenaca.  See  Malva  alcea. 

Malva  vulgaris.  See  Malva  sylvestris. 

MaLvavi'scus.  (From  malva , the  mallow,  and 
viscus,  glue : so  named  from  its  viscidity.)  See  Al- 
thcea  officinalis. 

MALVERN.  The  village  of  Great  Malvern  has, 
for  many  years,  been  celebrated  for  a spring  of  re- 
markable purity,  which  has  acquired  the  name  of  the 
holy  well,  from  the  reputed  sanctity  of  its  waters,  and 
the  real  and  extensive  benefit  long  derived  in  various 
cases  from  its  use. 

The  holy  well  water,  when  first  drawn,  appears 
quite  clear  and  pellucid,  and  does  not  become  sensibly 
turbid  on  standing.  It  possesses  somewhat  of  an 
agreeable  pungency  to  the  taste ; but  this  is  not  consi- 
derable. In  other  respects  it  does  not  differ  in  taste 
from  pure  good  water. 

The  contents  of  Malvern  holy  well  are: — some  car- 
bonic acid,  which  is  in  an  uncombined  state,  capable 
of  acting  upon  iron,  and  of  giving  a little  taste  to  the 
water;  but  the  exact  quantity  of  which  has  not  been 
ascertained : — a very  small  portion  of  earth,  either 
lime  or  magnesia,  united  with  the  carbonic  and  ma- 
rine acids ; perhaps  a little  neutral  alkaline  salt,  and 
a very  large  proportion  of  water: — for  we  may  add, 
that,  the  carbonic  acid  perhaps  excepted,  the  foreign 
matter  is  less  than  that  of  any  spring- water  which  we 
use.  No  iron  or  metal  of  any  kind  is  found  in  it, 
though  there  are  chalybeates  in  the  neighbourhood. 

It  is  singular  that,  notwithstanding  its  apparent 
purity,  this  water  is  said  not  to  keep  well,  and  soon 
acquires  a foetid  smell,  by  standing  in  open  vessels. 

Malvern  water,  like  many  others,  whs  at  first  only 
employed  as  an  external  application ; and  this,  indeed 
is  still  its  principal  use,  though  it  is  extended,  with 


MAM 


MAN 


some  advantage,  to  a few  internal  diseases.  It  has 
been  found  highly  efficacious  in  painful  and  deep  ul- 
cerations, the  consequence  of  a scrofulous  habit  of 
body,  and  which  are  always  attended  with  much  local 
irritation,  and  often  general  fever.  Applied  to  the  sore, 
it  moderates  the  profuseness  of  the  discharge,  corrects 
the  fcetor,  which  so  peculiarly  marks  a caries  of  the 
bone,  promotes  the  granulating  process,  and  a salutary 
exfoliation  of  the  carious  part ; and  by  a long  perse- 
verance in  this  course,  very  dangerous  and  obstinate 
cases  have  at  last  been  cured.  Inflammation  of  the 
eye,  especially  the  ophthalmia,  which  is  so  trouble- 
some in  scrofulous  habits,  often  yields  to  this  simple 
application,  and  we  find,  that,  for  a great  number  of 
years,  persons  afflicted  with  sore  eyes  have  been  in  the 
habit  of  resorting  to  Malvern  holy  well.  Another  order 
of  external  diseases,  for  which  this  water  is  greatly 
celebrated,  is  cutaneous  eruptions ; even  those  obsti- 
nate cases  of  dry  desquamations,  that  frequently  fol- 
low a sudden  application  of  cold  in  irritable  habits, 
are  often  cured  by  this  remedy.  Where  the  skin  is  hot 
and  dry,  it  remarkably  relieves  the  intolerable  itching 
of  herpetic  disorders,  and  renders  the  surface  of  the 
body  more  cool  and  perspirable.  It  appears,  however, 
from  a nice  observation  of  Dr.  Wall,  that  this  method 
of  treatment  is  not  so  successful  in  the  cutaneous 
eruptions  of  very  lax  leucophlegmatic  habits,  where 
the  extremities  are  cold  and  the  circulation  languid ; 
but  that  it  succeeds  best  where  there  is  unusual  irrita- 
tion of  the  skin,  and  where  it  is  apt  to  break  in  painful 
fissures,  that  ooze  out  a watery  acrid  lymph.  On  the 
first  application  of  this  water  to  an  inflamed  surface,  it 
will  often,  for  a time,  increase  the  pain  and  irritation, 
but  these  effects  go  off  in  a few  days. 

The  great  benefit  arising  from  using  Malvern  waters 
as  an  external  remedy,  in  diseases  of  the  skin  and  sur- 
lace  of  the  body,  has  led  to  its  employment  in  some 
internal  disorders,  and  often  with  considerable  advan- 
tage. Of  these,  the  most  important  are  painful  affec- 
tions of  the  kidneys  and  bladder,  attended  with  the 
discharge  of  bloody,  purulent,  or  foetid  urine,  the  hectic 
fever,  produced  by  scrofulous  ulceration  of  the  lungs, 
or  very  extensive  and  irritating  sores  on  the  surface  of 
the  body,  and  also  fistulas  of  long  standing,  that  have 
been  neglected,  and  have  become'  constant  and  trouble- 
some sores. 

The  Malvern  water  is  in  general  a perfectly  safe  ap- 
plication, and  may  be  used  with  the  utmost  freedom, 
both  as  an  external  dressing  for  sores,  and**  a common 
drink. 

The  internal  use  of  Malvern  waters  is  sometimes 
attended  at  first  with  a slight  nausea,  and  not  unfre- 
quently,  for  the  first  day  or  two,  it  occasions  some 
degree  of  drowsiness,  vertigo,  or  slight  pain  of  the  head, 
which  comes  on  a few  minutes  after  drinking  it.  These 
symptoms  go  off  spontaneously,  after  a few  days,  or 
may  readily  be  removed  by  a mild  purgative.  The 
effects  of  this  water  on  the  bowels  are  not  at  all  con- 
stant ; frequently  it  purges  briskly  for  a few  days,  but 
it  is  not  uncommon  for  the  body  to  be  rendered  costive 
by  its  use,  especially,  as  Dr.  Wall  observes,  with  those 
who  are  accustomed  to  malt  liquors.  In  all  cases,  it 
decidedly  increases  the  flow  of  urine,  and  the  general 
health  of  the  patient.  The  duration  of  a course  of 
Malvern  waters  must  vary  very  considerably  on  ac- 
count of  the  different  kinds  of  disease  for  which  this 
spring  is  resorted  to. 

Mamk'i.  The  mammoe,  momin,  or  toddy-tree. 
This  tree  is  found  in  different  parts  of  the  West  Indies, 
but  those  on  the  Island  of  Hispaniola  are  the  best. 
From  incisions  made  in  the  branches,  a copious  dis- 
charge of  pellucid  liquor  is  obtained,  which  is  called 
momin,  or  toddy-wine.  It  must  be  drank  very  sparingly, 
because  of  its  very  diuretic  quality.  It  is  esteemed  as 
an  effectual  preservative  from  the  stone,  as  also  a sol- 
vent of  it  when  generated.  There  are  two  species. 

MAMI  LLA.  (Diminutive  of  mamma , the  breast.) 
1.  The  breast  of  man. 

2.  The  nipple  of  the  male  and  female  breasts. 

Mami'ra.  It  is  said,  by  Paulus  Aigineta,  to  be  the 
root  of  a plant  which  is  of  a detergent  quality.  Some 
think  it  is  the  root  of  the  doronicum;  but  what  it 
really  is  cannot  be  ascertained. 

MA'MMA.  See  Breast. 

MA'MMARY.  Belonging  to  the  breast. 

Mammary  artery.  Arteria  mammillaris.  The 
internal  mammary  artery  is  a branch  of  the  subclavian, 
42 


and  gives  off  the  mediastinal,  thymal,  and  pericardial 
arteries.  The  external  mammary  is  a branch  of  the 
axillary  artery. 

Mammary  vein.  Vena  mamillaris.  These  vessels 
accompany  the  arteries,  and  evacuate  their  blood  into 
the  subclavian  vein. 

MAMMEA.  (So  called  from  its  vernacular  appella- 
tion in  the  West  Indies,  mamei , and  allowed  by  Lin- 
naeus, because  of  its  affinity  to  mamma , abreast,  allud- 
ing to  the  shape  of  its  fruit.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order  Monogynia. 

Mammea  Americana.  The  systematic  name  of  a 
tree,  which  affords  a delicious  fruit  called  mammea.  It 
has  a very  grateful  flavour  when  ripe,  and  is  much 
cultivated  in  Jamaica,  where  it  is  generally  sold  in  the 
markets  for  one  of  the  best  fruits  of  the  island. 

MAN.  Homo.  Man  is  compounded  of  solids,  fluids, 
a vital  principle,  and,  what  distinguishes  him  from 
every  other  animal,  a soul.  See  Animal. 

Ma'ncoron.  According  to  Oribasius,  a kind  of 
sugar  found  in  a sort  of  cane. 

Mancura'na.  See  Origanum  vulgare. 

MANDI'BULA.  (From  mando , to  chew.)  The 
jaw.  See  Maxilla  inferior. 

MANDRAGORA.  (From  yavSpa , a den,  and 
aycipw,  to  collect ; because  it  grows  about  caves  and 
dens  of  beasts ; or  from  the  German  man  dragen , 
bearing  man.)  See  Atropa  mandragora. 

Mandragori'tes.  (From  pavSpayopa , the  man- 
drake.) Wine,  in  which  the  roots  of  the  male  man- 
drake are  infused. 

MANDRAKE.  See  Atrop a mandragora. 

MANDUCA'TOR.  (From  manduco,  to  chew.)  A 
muscle  which  assists  in  the  action  of  chewing. 

Ma'nga.  (Indian.)  The  mango-tree. 

MANGANESE.  This  metallic  substance  seems, 
after  iron,  to  be  the  most  frequently  diffused  meial 
through  the  earth;  its  ores  are  very  common.  As  a 
peculiar  metal,  it  was  first  noticed  by  Gahn  and  Schcele, 
in  the  years  1774  and  1777.  It  is  always  found  in  the 
state  of  an  oxide,  varying  in  the  degree  of  oxidisement. 
La  Peyrouse  affirmed  that  he  had  found  manganese  in 
a metallic  state ; but  there  was  probably  some  mistake 
in  his  observation.  The  ores  are  distinguished  into 
gray  oxide  of  manganese,  black  oxide  of  manganese , 
reddish  white  oxide  of  manganese,  and  carbonate  of  man- 
ganese. All  these  combinations  have  an  earthy  tex- 
ture ; they  are  very  ponderous ; they  occur  both  amor- 
phous and  crystallized ; and  generally  contain  a large 
quantity  of  iron.  Their  colour  is  black,  blackish- 
brown,  or  gray,  seldom  white.  They  soil  the  fingers 
like  soot.  They  are  sometimes  crystallized  in  prisms, 
tetrahedral,  rhomboidal,  or  striated. 

Properties. — Manganese  is  of  a whitish  gray  colour. 
Its  fracture  is  granulated,  irregular,  and  uneven.  It  is 
of  a metallic  brilliancy,  which  it,  however,  soon  loses 
in  the  air.  Its  specific  gravity  is  about  8.  It  is  very 
hard,  and  extremely  brittle.  It  is  one  of  the  most  refrac- 
tory metals,  and  most  difficult  to  fuse,  requiring  at  least 
160°  of  Wedgwood’s  pyrometer.  Its  attraction  of  oxy- 
gen is  so  rapid,  that  exposure  to  the  air  is  sufficient  to 
render  it  red,  brown,  black,  and  friable,  in  a very  short 
time  ; it  can,  therefore,  only  be  kept  under  water,  oil, 
or  ardent  spirits.  It  is  the  most  combustible  of  all  the 
metals.  It  decomposes  water  by  means  of  heat,  very 
rapidly,  as  well  as  the  greater  part  of  the  metallic  ox- 
ides. It  decomposes  sulphuric  acid.  It  is  soluble  in 
nitric  acid.  It  is  fusible  with  earths,  and  colours  them 
brown,  violet,  or  red,  according  to  its  state  of  oxidise- 
ment. It  frees  from  colour  glasses  tinged  by  iron.  It 
does  not  readily  unite  with  sulphur.  It  combines 
with  phosphorus.  It  unites  with  gold,  silver,  and  cop- 
per, and  renders  them  brittle.  It  unites  to  arsenic  in 
close  vessels,  but  does  not  enter  into  union  with  mer- 
cury. 

Manganese,  heated  in  oxygen  or  chlorine,  takes  fire 
and  forms  an  oxide  or  chloride.  It  has  been  thought  dif- 
ficult to  decide  on  the  oxides  of  manganese. 

According  to  Sir  H.  Davy  there  are  two  oxides  only, 
the  olive  and  the  black;  Mr.  Brande  has  three,  the 
olive,  dark  red,  and  black;  Thenard  has  four,  the  % 
green,  the  white  (in  the  state  of  hydrate),  the  chesnut- 
brown,  and  the  black;  Berzelius  has  five,  the  first  gray 
the  second  green,  the  third  and  fourth  are  not  well  de- 
fined, and  the  fifth  is  the  black. 

Two  oxides,  however,  are  well  defined. 

1.  The  first  oxide  may  be  obtained  by  dissolving  com 


MAN 


MAN 


mon  black  manganese  in  sulphuric  or  nitric  acid,  add- 
ing a little  sugar,  and  precipitating  by  solution  of  po- 
tassa.  A white  powder  is  obtained,  which  being  heated 
to  redness  out  of  the  contact  of  air,  becomes  yellow, 
puce-coloured,  and,  lastly,  red-brown.  To  be  pre- 
served, it  should  be  washed  in  boiling  water,  previously 
freed  from  air,  and  then  dried  by  distilling  off  the  moist- 
ure in  a retort  filled  with  hydrogen.  The  dark  olive 
oxide,  when  examined  in  large  quantities,  appears  al- 
most black ; but  when  spread  upon  white  paper,  its 
olive  tint  is  apparent.  It  takes  fire  when  gently  heated, 
increases  in  weight,  and  acquires  a browner  tint.  It 
slowly  absorbs  oxygen  from  the  air,  even  at  common 
temperatures.  It  dissolves  in  acids  without  efferves- 
cence. The  white  powder  obtained  above,  is  the  hy- 
drated protoxide.  The  different  tints  which  it  assumes 
by  exposure  to  air,  are  supposed  by  Sir  H.  Davy  to  de- 
pend on  the  formation  of  variable  quantities  of  the 
black-brown  oxide,  which  probably  retains  the  water 
contained  in  the  white  hydrate,  and  is  hence  deep 
puce-coloured. 

2.  The  black  peroxide.  Its  sp.  gr.  is  4.  It  does  not 
combine  with  any  of  the  acids.  It  yields  oxygen  when 
heated  ; and  by  intense  ignition  passes  in  a great  mea- 
sure into  the  protoxide. 

.Method  of  obtaining  Manganese. — This  metal  is  ob- 
tained by  mixing  the  black  oxide,  finely  powdered,  with 
pitch ; making  it  into  a ball,  and  putting  this  into  a 
crucible,  with  powdered  charcoal,  one-tenth  of  an  inch 
thick  at  the  sides,  and  one-fourth  of  an  inch  deep  at  the 
bottom.  The  empty  space  is  then  to  be  filled  with 
powdered  charcoal ; a cover  is  to  be  luted  on  ; and  the 
crucible  exposed,  for  an  hour,  to  the  strongest  heat  that 
can  be  raised  Or,  digest  the  black  oxide  of  manga- 
nese repeatedly,  with  the  addition  of  one-sixteenth  of 
sugar,  in  nitric  acid ; dilute  the  mixture  with  three 
times  its  bulk  of  water;  filter  it,  and  decompose  it  by 
the  addition  of  potassa  ; collect  the  precipitate,  form  it 
into  a paste  with  oil,  and  put  it  into  a crucible,  well 
lined  with  charcoal.  Expose  the  crucible  for  at  least 
two  hours  to  the  strongest  heat  of  a forge. 

MANGANESIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  manganesium ; 
from  manganese , its  base.)  Chevillott  and  Edwards 
have  ascertained  that  the  carnelion  mineral,  which  is 
formed  b.y  igniting  a mixture  of  the  black  oxide  of 
manganese  and  nitre,  has  the  property  of  making  a 
neutral  manganesate  of  potassa. 

Mange i,  wursel.  The  root  of  scarcity.  The  Beta 
hybrida  of  Linneeus.  A plant  of  great  importance,  as 
a substitute  for  bread  in  periods  of  famine.  It  is  culti- 
vated here  as  green  food  for  cattle,  especially  milch 
cows.  It  has  not,  however,  succeeded  so  well  in  this 
country  as  in  Germany. 

MANGET,  John  James,  was  born  at  Geneva  in 
1652.  He  originally  studied  for  the  clerical  profession, 
but,  after  five  years’  labour,  his  inclination  to  medical 
pursuits  prevailed,  and  he  made  such  progress,  without 
the  aid  of  any  teacher,  that  he  was  admitted  to  the  de- 
gree of  doctor  at  Valence  in  1678.  He  then  commenced 
practice  in  his  native  city,  and  obtained  considerable 
reputation,  and  refused  many  invitations  to  go  to  other 
countries.  In  1699  he  was  appointed  chief  physician 
to  Frederick  III.  afterward  first  King  of  Prussia.  In 
his  literary  labours  he  was  indefatigable  even  to  the 
end  of  his  life,  which  terminated  in  his  91st  year. 
Among  the  nufnerous  works  of  compilation,  executed 
by  him,  originality  is  not  to  be  expected;  nor  are  they 
remarkable  for  judgment  or  accuracy,  though  still 
sometimes  useful  for  reference.  He  published  ample 
collections  on  almost  every  subject  connected  with  me- 
dicine, besides  improved  editions  of  the  works  of 
others ; but  the  most  important  of  his  productions  is 
entitled  “ Bibliotheca  Scriptorum  Medicorum  veterum 
et  recentiorum,”  at  which  he  laboured  when  at  least 
eighty  years  of  age. 

MANGI'FERA.  (From  mango,  the name  of  the  fruit 
which  it  bears.)  The  name  of  agenus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaian  system.  Class  Pcntandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia.  The  Mango- tre1. 

Mangifera  indica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
mango-tree,  which  is  cultivated  all  over  Asia.  Man- 
goes. when  ripe,  are  juicy,  of  a good  flavour,  and  so 
fragrant  as  to  perfume  the  air  to  a considerable  dis- 
tance. They  are  eaten  either  raw  or  preserved  with 
sugar.  Their  taste  is  so  luscious,  that  they  soon  pall 
the  appetite.  The  unripe  fruits  are  pickled  in  the  milk 
of  the  cocoa-nut,  that  has  stood  until  sour,  with  salt, , 


capsicum,  and  garlick.  From  the  expressed  juice  ia 
prepared  a wine  ; and  the  remainder  of  the  kernel  can 
be  reduced  to  an  excellent  flour  for  the  making  of  bread. 

MANGO.  See  Mangifera  indica. 

Mangostana.  See  Garcinia  mangostana. 

Mangosteen.  See  Garcinia  mangostana. 

MANIA.  (From  paivoyai , to  rage.)  Raving  or 
furious  madness.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Neu- 
roses; and  order  Vesaniue , of  Cullen.  The  definition 
of  mania  is  delirium,  unaccompanied  with  fever;  but 
this  does  not  seem  altogether  correct,  as  a delirium 
may  prevail  without  any  frequency  of  pulse  or  fever ; 
as  happens  sometimes  with  women  in  the  hysteric 
disease.  In  mania,  the  mind  is  not  perfectly  master  of 
all  its  functions;  it  receives  impressions  from  the 
senses,  which  are  very  different  from  those  produced  in 
health  ; the  judgment  and  memory  are  both  lost,  or 
impaired,  and  the  irritability  of  the  body  is  much  di- 
minished, being  capable,  as  is  supposed,  of  resisting  the 
usual  mobid  effects  of  cold,  hunger,  and  watching,  and 
being  likewise  less  susceptible  of  other  diseases  than 
before. 

Mania  may  be  said  to  be  a false  perception  of  things, 
marked  by  an  incoherence,  or  raving,  and  a resistance 
of  the  passions  to  the  command  of  the  will,  accom- 
panied, for  the  most  part,  with  a violence  of  action, 
and  furious  resentment  at  restraint. 

There  are  two  species  of  madness,  viz.  the  melan- 
cholic and  furious. 

Madness  is  occasioned  by  affections  of  the  mind,  such 
as  anxiety,  grief,  love,  religion,  terror,  or  enthusiasm  ; 
the  frequent  and  uncurbed  indulgence  in  any  passion, 
or  emotions,  and  by  abstruse  study.  In  short,  it  may  be 
produced  by  any  thing  that  affects  the  mind  so  forcibly 
as  to  take  oft'  its  attention  from  all  other  affairs.  Vio- 
lent exercise,  frequent  intoxication,  a sedentary  life, 
the  suppression  of  periodical  and  occasional  discharges 
and  secretions,  excessive  evacuations,  and  paralytic 
seizures,  are  likewise  enumerated  as  remote  causes. 
Certain  diseases  of  the  febrile  kind  have  been  found  to 
occasion  madness,  where  their  action  has  been  very 
violent.  In  some  cases  it  proceeds  from  an  hereditary 
predisposition.  Two  constitutions  are  particularly  the 
victims  of  madness  ; the  sanguine  and  melancholic : 
by  the  difference  of  which  its  appearance  is  somewhat 
modified.  Each  species  of  mania  is  accompanied  with 
particular  symptoms.  Those  which  attend  on  the 
melancholic  are  sadness,  dejection  of  spirits,  and  its 
attendants.  Those  which  accompany  an  attack  of 
furious  madness,  are  severe  pains  in  the  head,  redness 
of  the  face,  noise  in  the  ears,  wildness  of  the  counte- 
nance, rolling  and  glistening  of  the  eyos,  grinding  of 
the  teeth,  loud  roaring,  violent  exertion  of  strength, 
absurd  incoherent  discourse,  unaccountable  malice  to 
certain  persons,  particularly  to  the  nearest  relatives  and 
friends,  a dislike  to  such  places  and  scenes  as  formerly 
afforded  particular  pleasure,  a diminution  of  the  irrita- 
bility of  the  body,  with  respect  to  the  morbid  effects  of 
cold,  hunger,  and  watching,  together  with  a full,  quick 
pulse. 

Mania  comes  on  at  different  periods  of  life  : but,  in 
the  greater  number  of  cases,  it  makes  its  attack  be- 
tween thirty  and  forty  years  of  age.  Females  appear 
to  be  more  subject  to  mania  than  males. 

Dissections  of  maniacal  cases,  Dr.  Thomas  observes, 
most  generally  show  an  effusion  of  water  into  the 
cavities  of  the  brain ; but  in  some  cases,  we  are  able  to 
discover  evident  marks  of  previous  inflammation,  such 
as  thickening  and  opacity  of  the  tunica  arachonoides 
and  pia  mater.  In  a few  instances,  a preternatual  hard- 
ness of  the  substance  of  the  brain. 

From  Dr.  Greding’s  observations,  it  appears  that  the 
skulls  of  the  greater  number  of  such  persons  are  com 
monly  very  thick.  Some  he  found  of  a most  extraor- 
dinary degree  of  thickness;  but  it  appears  that  the 
greater  number  of  insane  people  die  of  atrophy  and 
hydrothorax.  f 

The  treatment  of  madness  is  partly  corporeal,  partly 
mental.  The  leading  indications  under  the  first  head 
are:  to  diminish  vascular  or  nervous  excitement  when 
excessive,  as  in  mania ; to  increase  them  when  defec- 
tive, as  in  melancholia ; at  the  same  time  guarding 
against  the  several  exciting  causes,  and  removing  any 
obvious  fault  in  the  constitution,  or  in  particular  parts, 
by  which  the  brain  may  be  sympathetically  affected. 
Among  the  most  powerful  means  of  lessening  excite- 
ment is  the  abstraction  of  blood,  which,  freely  practised 

43 


MAN 


MAR 


has  been  often  an  effectual  remedy  in  recent  cases  anti 
robust  habits ; but  repeated  small  bleedings  are  rather 
likely  to  confirm  the  disease;  and  in  those  who  have 
long  laboured  under  it,  the  object  should  merely  be  to 
obviate  dangerous  accumulation  in  the  head,  by  occa- 
sionally withdrawing  the  requisite  quantity  locally. 
Purging  is  much  more  extensively  applicable  : where 
the  strength  will  admit,  it  may  be  useful  to  make  very 
large  evacuations  in  this  way;  and  in  all  cases  it 
should  be  a rule  to  procure  regular  discharges  from  the 
bowels,  which  are  generally  torpid.  Calomel  is  mostly 
proper,  as  it  may  evacuate  bile  more  freely,  and  have 
other  beneficial  effects ; but  it  usually  requires  the  as- 
sistance of  other  cathartics.  The  application  of  cold 
to  the  head  is  materially  serviceable  under  increased 
excitement,  and  some  have  advised  it  to  the  body  gene- 
rally ; at  any  rate,  the  accumulation  of  heat  should  be 
avoided,  and  the  antiphlogistic  regimen  steadily  ob- 
served. Emetics  have  sometimes  had  a good  effect, 
especially  as  influencing  the  mind  of  the  patient;  but 
to  diminish  excitement,  and  induce  diaphoresis,  it  will 
generally  be  better  to  give  merely  nauseating  doses; 
and  occasionally  their  operation  may  be  promoted  by 
the  tepid  bath;  even  the  hot  bath  has  been  found  use- 
ful, producing  great  relaxation,  and  rendering  the  pa- 
tient more  tractable.  Digitalis  may  be  emploved  with 
advantage  from  its  sedative  power,  exerted  especially 
on  the  circulation,  pushing  it  till  some  obvious  effect  is 
produced.  Narcotics,  particularly  opium,  have  been 
much  used,  but  certainly  are  not  indiscriminately  pro- 
per ; where  there  is  fulness  of  the  vessels  of  the  head, 
they  may  even  do  mischief;  arid  where  organic  disease 
exists,  they  will  probably  only  palliate:  whenever  re- 
sorted to,  the  dose  should  be  large,  such  as  may  induce 
sleep,  and  if  no  mitigation  of  the  disease  appear,  it  may 
be  better  not  to  persevere  in  them.  Camphor  has  been 
sometimes  decidedly  useful  carried  gradually  to  a very 
considerable  extent.  'Blisters  and  other  means  of 
lessening  fulness  and  irritation  in  the  brain,  should  not 
be  neglected,  where  circumstances  indicate  their  use. — 
In  the  melancholic,  .on  the  other  hand,  where  there  is 
rather  a deficiency  of  excitement,  it  is  necessary  to 
direct  a more  generous  diet,  nutritious  and  easy  of 
digestion,  as  the  stomach  is  usually  weak,  with  a 
moderate  quantity  of  some  fermented  liquor,  and  medi- 
cines of  a tonic  or  even  stimulant  nature,  especially 
ammonia,  to  relieve  flatulence  and  acidity.  Attention 
should  be  paid  to  the  bowels,  and  to  maintain  the 
function  of  the  skin,  &c.  The  utility  of  the  cold  bath 
seems  questionable  in  melancholics;  though  it  may 
occasionally  arrest  a paroxysm  of  mania.  Regular 
exercise  may  contribute  materially  to  improve  the 
health ; and  even  hard  labour  has  been  often  signally 
useful  in  a convalescent  state,  particularly  to  those  ac- 
customed to  it.  If  the  mental  derangement  supervened 
on  the  stoppage  of  any  evacuation,  or  the  metastasis 
of  any  other  disorder ; or  appear  connected  with  a 
scrofulous  or  syphilitic  taint ; proper  remedies  to  restore 
the  former,  or  remove  the  latter,  should  be  exhibited  : 
and  in  some  instances  trepanning  has  relieved  the  brain 
rfrom  local  irritation.  In  the  management  of  the  in- 
sane, it  is  necessary  to  inspire  a certain  degree  of  awe 
from  a conviction  of  superior  power,  and  at  the  same 
time  seek  to  gain  their  confidence  and  affection  by 
steadiness  and  humanity.  Some  restraint  is  often 
necessary  for  the  security  of  the  patient,  or  of  others, 
carefully  watching,  or  even  confining  them,  if  they 
threaten  the  lives  of  their  attendants.  When  they 
refuse  to  take  food,  or  medicine,  or  any  thing  which 
appears  absolutely  necessary,  coercion  is  proper,  or 
sometimes  these  caprices  may  be  overcome  by  strata- 
gem ; or  exciting  uneasy  sensations  by  the  motion  of 
a swing,  whirling  chair,  &c.  In  order  to  remove  any 
deranged  association  of  ideas,  it  will  be  right  to  en- 
deavour to  occupy  their  minds  with  some  agreeable 
and  regular  train  of  thought,  cheerful  music,  poetry, 
narrative,  the  elementary  parts  of  geometry,  &c.  ac- 
cording to  their  previous  inclinations;  to  lead  them 
gradually  to  I heir  former  habits,  and  the  society  of 
their  friends,  engage  them  in  rural  sports,  take  them  to 
public  amusements,  the  watering  places,  &c.  but  with 
as  little  appearance  of  design  as  possible. 

Maniguetta.  See  Amomum  granum  Paradisi. 

MA'NIHOT.  See  Jatropha  mamhot. 

MANI'PULUS.  ( Quod  manum  impleat , because  it 
fills  the  hand.)  A handful. 

Manjapu'meram.  A common  tree  in  the  West 
44 


Indies,  the  flowers  of  which  are  distilled,  and  the 
waters  used  against  inflammation  of  the  eyes. 

MA'NNA.  (From  mano,  a gift,  Syrian  ; it  being  the 
food  given  by  God  to  the  children  of  Israel  in  the  wil- 
derness ; or  from  mahna , what  is  it  1 an  exclamation 
occasioned  by  their  wonder  at  its  appearance.)  See 
Fraxinus  ornus. 

Manna  brigantiaca.  A species  of  manna  brought 
from  the  neighbourhood  of  Brianconois,  in  Dauphiny. 

Manna  calabrina.  Calabrian  manna. 

Manna  canulata.  Flaky  manna,  or  manna  con- 
creted on  straw,  or  chips. 

Manna  thuris.  A coarse  powder  of  olibanum. 

Mannifera  arbor.  (From  manna , and  fero,  to 
bear.)  See  Fraxinus  ornus. 

Manso'rius.  (From  mando , to  chew.)  The  mas- 
seter  muscle. 

Manti'le.  The  name  of  a bandage. 

MANUS.  The  hand.  This  consists  of  the  carpus, 
metacarpus,  and  fingers. 

Ma'nus  dei.  1.  A name  of  a resolvent  plaster,  de- 
scribed by  Lemery. 

2.  An  old  name  of  opium. 

MAPLE.  See  Acer  pseudoplatanus,  and  acer  sac- 

charinum. 

Mara'nda.  A species  of  myrtle,  growing  in  the 
island  of  Ceylon,  a decoction  of  the  leaves  of  which 
is  said  to  be  excellent  against  the  venereal  disease. 

MARA'NTA.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Monandria;  Order, 
Monogynia. 

2.  The  name  of  the  Indian  arrow  root,  of  which 
there  are  three  species,  the  Arundinacea , Oalanga , 
and  Comesa , all  of  t)*em  herbaceous,  perennial  exotics 
of  the  Indies,  kept  here  in  hot-houses  for  curiosity ; 
they  have  thick,  knotty,  creeping  roots,  crowned  with 
long,  broad,  arundinaceous  leaves,  ending  in  points, 
and  upright  stalks  half  a yard  high,  terminated  by 
bunches  of  monopetalous,  ringent,  five-parted  flowers. 
They  are  propagated  by  parting  the  roots  in  spring,  and 
planting  them  in  pots  of  light  rich  earth,  and  then 
plunging  them  in  the  bark-bed. 

Maranta  arundinacea.  The  root  of  this  species, 
commonly  called  arrow-root,  is  used  by  the  Indians  to 
extract  the  virus  communicated  by  their  poisoned 
arrows,  from  whence  it  has  obtained  its  name.  It  is 
cultivated  in  gardens  and  provision-grounds  in  the 
West  Indies ; and  the  starch  is  obtained  from  it  by  the 
following  process : — The  roots,  when  a year  old,  are 
dug  up,  well  washed  in  water,  and  then  beaten  in  a 
large  deep  wooden  mortar,  to  a pulp  ; this  is  thrown 
into  a large  tub  of  clean  water:  the  whole  is  then  well 
stirred,  and  the  fibrous  part  wrung  out  by  the  hands, 
and  thrown  away.  The  milky  liquor  being  passed 
through  a hair  sieve,  or  coarse  cloth,  is  suffered  to  settle, 
and  the  clear  water  drained  off.  At  the  bottom  of  the 
vessel  is  a white  mass,  which  is  again  mixed  with 
clean  water,  and  drained : lastly,  the  mass  is  dried  on 
sheets  in  the  sun,  and  is  pure  starch. 

Arrow- root  contains,  in  small  bulk,  a greater  propor- 
tion of  nourishment  than  any  other  yet  known.  The 
powder,  boiled  in  water,  forms  a very  pleasant  trans- 
parent jelly,  very  superior  to  that  of  sago  or  tapioca, 
and  is  much  recommended  as  a nutritious  diet  for  chil- 
dren and  invalids.  The  jelly  is  made  in  the  following 
manner : — to  a dessert  spoonful  of  powder,  add  as  much 
cold  water  as  will  make  it  into  a paste  ; then  pour  on 
half  a pint  of  boiling  water : stir  it  briskly,  and  boil  it 
a few  minutes,  when  it  will  become  a clear  smooth 
jelly  ; a little  sugar  and  sherry  wine  may  be  added  for 
debilitated  patients,  but  for  infants  a drop  or  two  of 
essence  of  caraway-seeds  or  cinnamon,  is  prefer- 
able, wine  being  very  liable  to  become  acescent  in  the 
stomachs  of  infants,  and  thus  disagree  with  the  bowels. 
Fresh  milk,  either  alone  or  diluted  with  w ater,  may  be 
substituted  for  the  water.  For  very  debilitated  frames, 
and  especially  for  ricketty  children,  this  jelly,  blended 
with  an  animal  jelly,  as  that  of  the  stag’s  horn  (ra- 
surce  cornu  emu),  affords  a more  nutritious  diet  than 
arrow-root  alone,  which  may  be  done  in  the  following 
manner  :— Boil  half  an  ounce  of  stag's  horn  shavings, 
in  a pint  of  w'ater,  for  fifteen  minutes ; then  strain 
and  add  two  dessert-spoonfuls  of  arrow-root  powder, 
previously  well-mixed  with  a tea-cupful  of  w’ater;  stir 
them  briskly  together,  and  boil  them  for  a few  minutes. 
If  the  child  should  be  much  troubled  with  flatulency, 
two  or  three  drops  of  essence  of  caraway-seeds,  or  a 


MAR 


MAR 


little  grated  nutmeg  may  be  added;  but  for  adults, 
port  wine,  or  brandy,  will  answer  best. 

Maranta  galanga.  The  smaller  galangal.  The 
roots  of  .this  plant  are  used  medicinally ; two  kinds  of 
galangal  are  mentioned  in  the  pharmacopoeias ; the 
greater  galangal  obtained  from  the  Kcempferia galanga 
of  Linnaeus,  and  the  smaller  galangal,  the  root  of  the 
Maranta  galanga  ; caulino  simplici  foliis  lanceolatis 
subsessilibus  of  Linnaeus.  The  dried  root  is  brought 
from  China,  in  pieces  from  an  inch  to  two  in  length, 
scarcely  half  so  thick,  branched,  full  of  knots  and 
joints,  with  several  circular  rings  of  a reddish-brown 
colour  on  the  outside,  and  brownish  within.  It  has  an 
aromatic  smell,  not  very  grateful,  and  an  unpleasant, 
bitterish,  hot,  biting  taste.  It  was  formerly  much  used 
as  a warm  stomachic  bitter,  and  generally  ordered 
in  bitter  infusions.  It  is  now,  however,  seldom  em- 
ployed. 

MARA'SMUS.  (From  papaiv «,  to  grow  lean.) 
Emaciation.  1.  A wasting  away  of  the  flesh,  without 
fever  or  apparent  disease.  See  Atrophia. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Noso- 
logy. Class,  Hamatica ; Order,  Dysthetica.  Emaci- 
ation. It  embraces  four  species,  viz.  Marasmus  atro- 
phia, climactericus,  tabes , phthisis. 

Marathri'tes.  (From  papadpov,  fennel.)  A vi- 
nous infusion  of  fennel ; or  wine  impregnated  with 
fennel. 

MARATIIROPHY'LLUM.  (From  papadpov,  fen- 
nel, and  (pvWov , a leaf:  so  named  because  its  leaves 
resemble  those  of  the  common  fennel.  See  Ptuceda- 
num  officinale. 

Mara'thrum.  (From  papaivw,  to  wither : so  called 
because  its  stalk  and  flowers  wither  in  the  autumn.) 
See  Anethum  faniculum. 

Marathrum  sylvestre.  See  Peucedanum  offici- 
nale. 

MARBLE.  A species  of  limestone  or  carbonate  of 
lime.  Powdered  marble  is  used  in  pneumatic  medi 
cine,  to  give  out  carbonic  acid  gas. 

MARCASITE.  See  Bismuth. 

MARCESCENS.  Withering,  decaying : applied  to 
the  perianths  of  the  Pyrus  communis , and  Mespilus 
germanica. 

MARCHANTIA.  (Named  after  Marchant,  who 
wrote  several  Essays  on  the  Memoirs  of  the  Academy 
of  Science,  1713.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Cryptogamia ; Order,  Algce. 

Marchantia  polymorpiia.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  liverwort.  Hepatica  lerrestris  ; Jecoraria.  A 
plant  very  common  in  this  country.  It  has  a penetra- 
ting though  mild  pungency,  and  bitter  taste,  sinking, 
as  it  were,  into  the  tongue.  It  is  recommended  as  an 
aperient,  resolvent,  and  antiscorbutic  ; and,  though  sel- 
dom used  in  this  country,  appears  to  be  a plant  of  no 
inconsiderable  virtue. 

MARCO'RES.  ( Marcores , pi.  of  marcor ; from 

marceo,  to  become  lean.)  Universal  emaciation. 
The  first  order  in  the  class  Cachexia , of  Cullen’s  No- 
sology. 

MARESTAIL.  See  Hippuris  vulgaris. 

MARGARI'TA.  (From  rr.argalith , Rab.)  The 
pearl.  1.  The  pearl.  Perla  ; TJnio.  A small,  calca- 
reous concretion,  of  a bright  transparent  whiteness, 
found  on  the  inside  of  the  shell,  Concha  margaritifera 
of  Linnaeus,  or  mother-of-pearl  fish.  Pearls  are  very 
highly  prized.  They  consist  of  alternating  concentric 
layers  of  membrane  and  carbonate  of  lime.  They 
were  formerly  exhibited  as  antacids. 

2.  A tumour  upon  the  eye  resembling  a pearl. 

MARGARITIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  margariticum  ; 
from  margarita,  the  pearl : so  called  from  its  pearly 
appearance.)  Margaric  acid.  When  we  immerse 
soap  made  of  pork-grease  and  potassa  in  a large  quan- 
tity of  water,  one  part  is  dissolved,  while  another  part 
is  precipitated  in  the  form  of  several  brilliant  pellets. 
These  are  separated,  dried,  washed  in  a large  quantity 
of  water,  and  then  dried  on  a filter.  They  are  now 
dissolved  in  boiling  alkohol,  sp.gr.  0.820,  from  which, 
as  it  cools,  the  pearly  substance  falls  down  pure.  On 
acting  on  this  with  dilute  muriatic  acid,  a substance  of 
a peculiar  kind,  which  Chevreuil,  the  discoverer,  calls 
margarine,  or. margaric  acid,  is  separated.  It  must  be 
well  washed  with  water,  dissolved  in  boiling  alkohol, 
from  which  it  is  recovered  in  the  same  crystalline 
pearly  form,  when  the  solution  cools. 

Margaric  acid  is  pearly  white,  and  tasteless.  Its 


smell  is  feeble,  and  a little  similar  to  that  of  melted 
wax.  Its  specific  gravity  is  inferior  to  water.  It 
melts  at  134°  F.  into  a very  limpid,  colourless  liquid, 
which  crystallizes,  on  cooling,  into  brilliant  needles  of 
the  finest  white.  It  is  insoluble  in  water,  but  very 
soluble  in  alkohol,  sp.  gr.  0.800.  Cold  margaric  acid 
has  no  action  on  the  colour  of  litmus;  but  when  heated 
so  as  to  soften  without  melting,  the  blue  was  redden- 
ed. It  combines  with  the  salifiable  bases,  and  forms 
neutral  compounds.  Two  orders  of  margarates  arc 
formed,  the  margarates  and  the  supermargarates , the 
former  being  converted  into  the  latter,  by  pouring  a 
large  quantity  of  water  on  them.  Other  fats  besides 
that  of  the  hog  yield  this  substance. 

That  of  man  is  obtained  under  three  different  forms. 
1.  In  very  fine  long  needles,  disposed  in  fiat  stars.  2. 
In  very  fine  and  very  short  needles,  foiming  waved 
figures,  like  those  of  the  margaric  acid  of  carcasses.  3. 
In  very  large  brilliant  crystals  disposed  in  siars,  simi- 
lar to  the  margaric  acid  of  the  hog.  The  margaric 
acids  of  man  and  the  hog  resemble  each  other ; as  do 
those  of  the  ox  and  the  sheep  ; and  of  the  goose  and 
the  jaguar  The  compounds,  with  the  bases,  are  real 
soaps.  The  solution  in  alkohol  affords  the  transparent 
soap  of  this  country. 

MARIGOLD.  See  Calendula  officinalis. 

Marigold , marsh.  See  Caltha  palustris. 

MARINE.  {Marinas  ; from  mare,  the  sea.)  Ap- 
pertaining to  the  sea. 

Marine  acid.  See  Muriatic  acid. 

Marine  salt.  See  Soda  murias. 

Maripe'ndam.  A plant  in  the  island  of  St.  Do- 
mingo : a distilled  water  from  the  tops  is  held  in  great 
esteem  against  pains  in  the  stomach. 

MARI'SCA.  An  excrescence  about  the  anus,  or  the 
piles  in  a state  of  tumefaction. 

Mari'sicum.  The  Mercurialis  fruticosa. 

MARJORAM.  See  Origanum. 

MARJORA'NA.  See  Origanum. 

MARLE.  See  Limestone. 

MARMALADE.  The  pulp  of  quinces,  or  any  other 
fruit,  boiled  into  a consistence  with  honey. 

Marmary'g.®.  (From  pappatpu >,  to  shine.)  An 
appearance  of  sparks,  or  coruscations,  flashing  before 
the  eyes. 

Marmola'ria.  (From  marmor , marble  : so  named 
because  it  is  spotted  like  marble).  . See  Acanthus 
mollis. 

MARMOR.  Marble. 

Marmor  metalicum.  Native  sulphate  of  barytes. 

Marmora'ta  aurium.  (From'  marmor , marble.) 
The  wax  of  the  ear. 

Marmo'reus  tartarus.  The  hardest  species  of 
human  calculus. 

Marmorige.  An  affection  of  the  eyes,  in  which 
sparks  and  flashes  of  fire  are  supposed  to  present  them- 
selves. 

, Maroco'stinum.  A purgative  extract  made  of 
the  marum  and  costus ; originally  made  by  Minde- 
rerus. 

MARROW.  Medulla.  The  fat  substance  secreted 
by  the  small  arteries  of  its  proper  membrane ; and  con- 
tained in  tne  medullary  cavities  of  the  long  cylindrical 
bones.  See  Bone. 

Marrow , spinal.  See  Medulla  spinalis. 

Marrubia'strum.  The  Balote  nigra , or  stinking 
hoarhound. 

MARItUBIUM.  (From  marrob,  a bitter  juice* 
Ileb.)  Hoarhound.  I.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order, 
Gymnospermia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  hoar- 
hound. See  Marrubium  vulgare. 

Marrubium  album.  See  Marrubium  vulgare. 

Marrubium  alysson.  Alyssum.  Galen’s  mad- 
wort.  It  is  supposed  to  be  diaphoretic. 

Marrubium  aquaticum.  Water  hoarhound  ; open- 
ing, corroborant. 

Marrubium  iiispanicum,  or  Spanish  hoarhound. 
See  Marrubium  verticillatum. 

Marrubium  nigrum  fcetidum.  The  black,  stink- 
ing hoarhound,  or  Balote  nigra. 

Marrubium  verticillatum.  Marrubium  hispani- 
cum.  The  Sideritis  syriaca , or  base  hoarhound. 

Marrubium  vulgare.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  hoarhound.  Marrubium  album ; Marru- 
bium— dentibus  calycinis , setaceis  uncinatis  of  Lin- 

45 


MAR 


MAS 


na;us.  The  leaves  of  this  indigenous  plant  have  a 
moderately  strong  smell  of  the  aromatic  kind,  but  not 
agreeable ; which,  by  drying,  is  improved ; and  in 
keeping  for  some  months  is,  in  great  part,  dissipated  ; 
their  taste  is  very  bitter,  penetrating,  diffusive,  and 
durable  in  the  mouth.  That  hoarhound  possesses  some 
share  of  medicinal  power,  may  be  inferred  from  its 
sensible  qualities;  but  its  virtues  do  not  appear  to  be 
clearly  ascertained.  It  is  a favourite  remedy  with  the 
common  people  in  coughs  and  asthmas.  The  usual 
dose  is  from  half  an  ounce  to  an  ounce,  in  infusion, 
two  or  three  times  a day.  The  dose  of  the  extract  is 
from  gr.  x.  to  3 ss. 

MARS.  The  mythological  and  alchemistical  name 
of  iron. 

Mars  alkalizatus.  One  of  the  alkalies  with  an 
admixture  of  iron. 

Mars  saccharatcs.  Iron  mixed  with  starch  and 
melted  sugar. 

Mars  solubilis.  Ferrum  tartarizatum. 

Mars  sulphuratus.  Iron  filings,  and  sulphur  de- 
flagrated. 

Marseilles  hart-wort.  See  Seseli  tortuosum. 

Marsh-mallow.  See  Althcea  officinalis. 

Marsh  trefoil.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

MARSUPIA'LIS.  (From  marsupium , a purse: 
so  named  from  its  resemblance.)  See  Obturator  in- 
ternus. 

Martagon  lily.  See  Lilium  martagon. 

MARTIAL.  (Martialis ; from  Mars,  iron.)  Some- 
times used  to  express  preparations  of  iron,  or  such  as 
are  impregnated  therewith;  as  the  Martial  Regulus 
of  antimony,  &c. 

Martial  ethiops.  The  protoxide  of  iron. 

Martial  salts.  Salts  of  iron. 

Martia'tum  unguentum.  Soldiers’  ointment. 
Ointment  of  laurel,  rue,  marjoram,  <fcc. 

Ma'rtis  limatura  prxsparata.  Purified  filings 
of  iron. 

MARTYN,  John,  was  born  in  1699.  His  father,, 
being  in  a mercantile  station  in  London,  he  was  in- 
tended to  succeed  in  this,  which  he  does  not  appear  to 
have  neglected ; but  his  taste  for  literature  led  him  to 
devote  much  of  the  night  to  study.  His  partiality, 
however,  was  particularly  directed  to  botany,  and  he 
made  many  experiments  on  the  germination  of  seeds, 
& c.  When  about  22  years  of  age,  he  became  secre- 
tary of  a botanical  society",  and  proved  one  of  its  most 
active  members:  three  years  after,  he  was  admitted 
into  the  Royal  Society,  and  many  of  his  papers  ap- 
peared in  the  Philosophical  Transactions,  of  which 
he  subsequently  took  a part  in  the  abridgment.  At 
what  period  he  changed  to  the  medical  profession  is 
not  known.  In  1726,  he  published  his  tables  of  offici- 
nal plants,  disposed  according  to  Ray’s  system.  Having 
given  public  lectures  on  botany  in  London  with  much 
approbation,  he  was  thought  qualified  to  teach  that 
science  at  Cambridge ; and  accordingly,  in  the  follow- 
ing year,  he  delivered  the  first  course  ever  heard  in 
that  university.  In  1730,  he  entered  at  Emanuel  col- 
lege, with  an  intention  of  graduating  in  physic;  but 
this  was  soon  abandoned  on  his  marriage,  and  from 
the  necessary  attendance  to  his  profession  in  London. 
On  the  death  of  the  botanical  professor  at  Cambridge, 
Mr.  Martyn  was  appointed  to  succeed  him  in  the  be- 
ginning of  1733;  but  he  continued  lecturing  only  two 
or  three  years,  owing  to  the  want  of  sufficient  encou- 
ragement, and  especially  of  a botanic  garden  there.  In 
1741,  he  published  a splendid  quarto  addition  of  Virgil’s 
Georgies,  in  which  much  new  light  was  thrown  on  the 
natural  history  of  that  author.  Dr.  Halley  having 
assisted  him  in  the  astronomical  part ; this  was  fol- 
lowed by  the  Bucolics,  on  the  same  plan.  In  1752,  he 
retired  from  practice,  and  about  nine  years  after  re- 
signed his  professorship  in  favour  of  his  son,  the  Rev. 
Thomas  Martyn;  in  consequence  of  whose  election 
he  presented  his  botanical  library,  of  above  200  vo- 
lumes, with  his  drawings,  herbarium,  &c.  to  the  uni- 
versity. He  died  in  1768. 

MA'RUM.  (From  mar,  Hebrew  for  bitter:  so 
named  from  its  taste.)  Several  species  of  teucrium 
were  so  named. 

Marum  creticum.  See  Teucrium  marum. 

Marum  syriacum.  (From  mar,  bitter,  Hebrew.) 
See  Teucrium  marum. 

Marum  verum.  See  Teucrium  marum. 

Marum  vulgare.  See  Thymus  mastichina. 

46 


Ma'rvisum.  Malmsey  wine. 

MA'SCHALE.  MatrxaXjj.  The  armpit. 

Maschalx'ster.  (From  pacxahsrip-)  The  second 
vertebra  of  the  back. 

MASCULUS.  There  are  two  sexes  of  animals  and 
vegetables,  the  male  and  the  female.  The  male  of 
animals  is  distinguished  by  his  peculiar  genital  organs, 
and  the  analogy  is  carried  to  vegetables.  A flower  is 
called  a male  flower,  which  has  stamina  only,  which 
are  reckoned  by  the  sexualists  to  be  the  male  organ. 

Ma'slach.  A medicine  of  the  opiate  kind,  in  use 
among  the  Turks. 

Maspetum.  The  leaf  of  the  asafeetida  plant. 

MA'SSA.  (From  pao<yi»,  to  blend  together.)  A 
mass.  A term  generally  applied  to  the  compound  out 
of  which  pills  are  to  be  formed. 

Massa  carnea  jacobi  SYLVii.  See  Flexor  longus 
digitorum  pedis. 

Ma'ssalis.  An  old  name  for  mercury. 

MASSE'TER.  (From  paoaaopai,  to  chew ; because 
it  assists  in  chewing.)  Zigomato-viaxillaire , of  Dumas. 
A muscle  of  the  lower  jaw,  situated  on  the  side  of  the 
face.  It  is  a short,  thick  muscle,  which  arises,  by 
fleshy  and  tendinous  fibres,  from  the  lower  edge  of  the 
malar  process  of  the  maxillary  bone,  the  lower  hori- 
zontal edge  of  the  os  malae,  and  the  lower  edge  of  the 
zygomatic  process  of  the  temporal  bone,  as  far  back- 
wards as  the  eminence  belonging  to  the  articulation  of 
the  lower  jaw.  From  some  little  interruption  in  the 
fibres  of  this  muscle,  at  their  origin,  some  writers  de- 
scribe it  as  arising  by  two,  and  others  by  three,  distinct 
portions,  or  heads.  The  two  layers  of  fibres,  of  which 
it  seems  to  be  composed,  cross  each  other  as  they  de- 
scend, the  external  layer  extending  backwards,  and 
the  internal  one  slanting  forwards.  It  is  inserted  into 
the  basis  of  the  coronoid  process,  and  into  all  that  part 
of  the  lower  jaw  which  supports  the  coronoid  and  con- 
dyloid processes.  Its  use  is  to  raise  the  lower  jaw, 
and,  by  means  of  the  above-mentioned  decussation,  to 
move  it  a little  forwards  and  backwards  in  the  act  of 
chewing. 

MASSICOT.  The  yellow  oxide  of  lead. 

Ma'ssoy  cortex.  See  Cortex  massoy. 

MASTERW  ORT.  S efrlmperatoria. 

MASTIC.  See  Pistachio  lentiscus. 

MASTICATION.  (Masticatio ; from  mastico,  to 
chew.)  Chewing.  A natural  function.  It  embraces 
the  seizing,  catching,  or  taking  the  food,  the  chewing 
and  the  insalivation.  The  organs  for  taking  in  food 
are  the  superior  extremities  and  the  mouth. 

The  mouth  is  the  oval  cavity  formed  above,  by  the 
palate  and  the  upper  jaw;  below,  by  the  tongue  and 
the  lower  jaw ; on  the  sides,  by  the  cheeks ; behind,  by 
the  velum  of  the  palate  and  the  pharynx ; and  in  front 
by  the  lips. 

The  dimensions  of  the  moutli  are  variable  in  differ- 
ent persons,  and  are  susceptible  of  an  enlargement  in 
every  direction  ; downwards,  by  lowering  the  tongue 
and  separating  the  jaws ; transversely,  by  the  disten- 
tion of  the  cheeks,  and  from  the  front  backward,  by 
the  motion  of  the  lips,  and  of  the  velum  of  the  pala:e. 

The  jaws  determine  most  particularly  the  form  and 
dimensions  of  the  mouth ; the  superior  jaw  makes  an 
essential  part  of  the  face,  and  moves  only  along  with 
the  head  ; on  the  contrary,  the  inferior  possesses  a very 
great  mobility. 

The  jaws  are  furnished  with  small,  very  hard  bodies, 
called  teeth. 

The  edge  of  the  socket  is  covered  with  a thick  layer, 
fibrous,  resisting,  denominated  gum. 

We  ought  to  consider  in  the  parts  that  contribute  to 
the  apprehension  of  aliments,  the  muscles  that  move 
the  jaws,  and  particularly  the  inferior-  The  same 
thing  takes  place  with  the  tongue,  the  numerous  mo- 
tions of  which  have  a great  influence  on  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  mouth. 

Mechanism  of  the  taking  of  food. — Nothing  is  sim 
pier  than  the  taking  in  of  aliments:  it  consists  in  the 
introduction  of  alimentary  substances  into  the  mouth. 
For  this  purpose  the  hands  seize  the  aliments,  and 
divide  them  into  small  portions  susceptible  of  being 
contained  in  the  mouth,  and  introduce  them  into  it 
either  directly  or  by  means  of  proper  instruments. 

But,  in  order  to  their  being  received  into  this  cavity, 
the  jaws  must  separate;  in  other  words,  the  mouth 
opens.  _ 

In  many  cases,  when  the  food  is  introociced  into  the 


MAS 


MAS 


mouth,  the  jaws  come  together  to  retain  it,  and  assist 
in  mastication,  or  deglutition ; but  frequently  the  ele- 
vation of  the  inferior  jaw  contributes  to  the  taking  of 
the  food.  We  have  an  example  of  it  when  one  bites 
into  fruit:  then  the  incisors  are  thrust  into  the  ali- 
mentary substance  in  opposite  directions,  and,  acting 
as  the  blades  of  scissors,  they  detach  a portion  of  the  mass. 

This  motion  is  produced,  principally  by  the  contrac- 
tion of  the  elevated  muscles  of  the  lower  jaw,  which 
represents  a lever  of  the  third  kind,  xhepower  of  which 
is  at  the  insertion  of  the  elevating  muscles,  the  point 
of  support  at  the  articulation  temporo-maxillary,  and 
the  resistance  in  the  substance  upon  which  the  teeth 
act.  The  volume  of  the  body  placed  between  the 
incisors  has  an  influence  upon  the  force  by  which  it 
may  be  pressed.  If  it  is  small,  the  power  will  be  much 
greater,  for  all  the  elevating  muscles  are  inserted  per- 
pendicularly to  the  jaw,  and  the  whole  of  their  force 
is  employed  in  moving  the  lever  that  it  represents ; if 
the  volume  of  the  body  is  such  that  it  can  hardly  enter 
the  mouth,  though  it  presents  very  little  resistance,  the 
incisors  will  not  enter  it,  for  the  masseter , the  temporal, 
and  the  internal  pterygoid  muscles,  are  inserted  very 
obliquely  into  the  jaw,  whence  results  the  loss  of  the 
greater  part  of  the  force  that  they  develope  in  contract- 
ing. When  the  efforts  of  the  muscles  of  the  jaws  are 
not  sufficient  to  detach  a portion  of  the  alimentary 
mass,  the  hand  so  acts  upon  it  as  to  separate  it  from 
the  portion  retained  by  the  teeth.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  posterior  muscles  pf  the  neck  draw  the  head  strong- 
ly back,  and  fronr  the  combination  of  these  efforts  re- 
sults the  separation  of  a portion  of  the  food  which 
remains  in  the  mouth.  In  this  mode  the  incisors  and 
eye  teeth  are  generally  employed ; the  grinders  are 
rarely  used.  By  the  succession  of  these  motions  of 
taking  food  the  mouth  is  filled,  and  on  account  of  the 
suppleness  of  the  cheeks,  and  the  easy  depression  of 
the  tongue,  a considerable  quantity  of  food  may  be 
accumulated  in  it. 

When  the  mouth  is  full,  the  velum  of  the  palate  is 
lowered,  its  inferior  edge  is  applied  upon  the  most  dis- 
tant part  of  the  base  of  the  tongue,  so  that  all  commu- 
nication is  intercepted  between  the  mouth  and  the  pha- 
rynx. 

Independently  of  what  we  have  said  of  the  mouth,  in 
respect  to  taking  the  food,  to  conceive  its  uses  in  masti- 
cation and  insalivation,  it  is  useful  to  remark  that 
fluids  abound  in  the  mouth  proceeding  from  different 
sources.  First,  the  mucous  membrane  which  covers 
its  sides  secretes  an  abundant  mucosity ; numerous 
isolated,  or  agglomerated  follicles  that  are  observed  in 
the  interior  of  the  cheeks,  at  the  junction  of  the  lips 
with  the  gums,  upon  the  back  of  the  tongue,  on  the  an- 
terior aspect  of  the  velum  and  the  uvula,  pour  con- 
tinually the  liquid  that  they  form  into  the  internal  sur- 
face of  the  mouth.  The  same  thing  takes  place  with 
mucous  glands,  which  exist  in  great  number  in  the  in- 
terior of  the  cheeks  and  palate. 

Lastly,  there  is  poured  into  the  mouth,  the  saliva  se- 
creted by  six  glands,  three  on  each  side,  and  which 
bear  the  name  of  parotid , sub-maxillary , and  sub-lin- 
gual. The  first,  placed  between  the  external  ear  and 
the  jaw,  have  each  a secreting  canal  which  opens  on 
the  level  of  the  second  small  superior  grinder ; each 
maxillary  gland  has  one  which  terminates  on  the  sides 
of  the  ligaments  of  the  tongue,  near  which  those  of  the 
sub-lingual  glands  open. 

These  fluids  are  probably  variable  in  their  physical 
and  chemical  properties  according  to  the  organs  by 
which  they  are  formed ; but  the  distinction  has  not  yet 
been  established  by  chemistry  by  direct  experiments : 
the  mixture  under  the  name  of  saliva  has  been  exactly 
analyzed. 

Among  the  alimentary  substances  deposited  in  the 
mouth,  the  one  sort  only  traverse  this  cavity  without 
suffering  any  change  ; the  others,  on  the  contrary,  re- 
main a considerable  time  in  it,  and  undergo  important 
modifications.  The  first  are  the  soft  sorts  of  food,  or 
nearly  liquid,  of  which  the  temperature  is  little  differ- 
ent from  that  of  the  body ; the  second  are  the  aliments, 
which  are  hard,  dry,  fibrous,  and  those  whose  tem- 
perature is  more  or  less  different  from  what  is  proper 
for  the  animal  economy.  They  are  both  in  common, 
however,  appreciated  by  the  organs  of  taste  in  passing 
through  the  mouth. 

We  may  attribute  to  thrge  principal  modifications 
the  changes  that  the  food  undergoes  in  the  mouth : 1st, ' 


change  of  temperature;  2d,  mixture  with  the  fluids  that 
are  poured  into  the  mouth,  and  sometimes  dissolution 
in  these  fluids ; 3d,  pressure  more  or  less  strong,  and 
very  often  division,  which  bruising  destroys  the  cohe- 
sion of  their  parts.  It  is  besides  easily  and  frequently 
transported  from  one  part  of  this  cavity  to  another. 
These  three  modes  of  change  do  not  take  place  suc- 
cessively, but  simultaneously,  by  mutually  favouring 
each  other. 

The  change  of  temperature  of  the  food  retained  in 
the  mouth  is  evident ; the  sensation  which  it  excites  in 
it  is  sufficient  to  prove  this.  If  it  has  a low  tempera- 
ture, it  produces  a vivid  impression  of  cold,  which 
continues  until  it  has  absorbed  the  caloric  necessary  to 
bring  it  near  to  the  temperature  of  the  sides  of  the 
mouth  ; the  contrary  takes  place  if  the  temperature  is 
higher  than  that  of  the  mouth. 

It  is  the  same  with  our  judgment  on  this  occasion,  as 
with  that  which  relates  to  the  temperature  of  bodies 
which  touch  the  skin  ; we  join  to  it,  unknown  to  us,  a 
comparison  with  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere 
and  with  that  of  the  bodies  which  have  been  previously 
in  contact  with  the  mouth  ; so  that  a body  preserving 
the  same  degree  of  heat  will  appear  to  us  alternately 
hot  or  cold,  according  to  the  temperature  of  the  bodies 
formerly  in  the  mouth. 

The  change  of  temperature  that  the  food  undergoes  in 
the  mouth  is  only  an  accessary  phenomenon  ; its  tritu- 
ration and  its  mixture  more  or  less  intimate  with  the 
fluids  poured  into  this  cavity,  are  what  merit  particular 
attention. 

As  soon  as  an  aliment  is  introduced  into  the  mouth, 
it  is  pressed  by  the  tongue,  applying  it  against  the 
palate,  or  against  some  other  part  of  the  sides  of  the 
mouth.  If  the  aliment  is  soft,  if  its  parts  cohere  but 
little,  this  simple  pressure  is  enough  to  break  it ; if  the 
alimentary  substance  is  composed  of  liquid  and  solid, 
the  liquid  is  expressed  by  this  pressure,  and  the  solid 
part  only  remains  in  the  mouth.  The  tongue  produces 
the  effect,  of  which  we  speak,  so  much  better  in  pro- 
portion as  its  membrane  is  muscular,  and  as  a great 
number  of  muscles  are  destined  to  move  it. 

It  might  astonish  us  that  the  tongue,  which  is  so  soft, 
could  be  capable  of  breaking  a body  offering  even  small 
resistance;  but,  on  the  one  hand,  it  hardens  in  con- 
tracting, like  all  the  muscles,  and,  besides,  it  presents 
under  the  mucous  membrane  which  covers  its  superior 
aspect,  a dense  and  thick  fibrous  layer. 

Such  are  the  phenomena  that  take  place  if  the  food 
has  but  little  resistance  ; but  if  it  presents  a considera 
ble  resistance,  it  then  undergoes  the  action  of  the  mas- 
ticating organs. 

The  essential  agents  of  mastication  are  the  muscles 
that  move  the  jaws,  the  tongue,  the  cheeks,  and  the 
lips : the  maxillary  bones  and  the  teeth  serve  only  as 
simple  instruments. 

Though  the  motions  of  both  jaws  may  contribute  to 
mastication,  it  is  produced  almost  always  by  those  of 
the  inferior  one.  This  bone  may  be  lowered,  raised, 
and  pressed  strongly  against  the  upper  jaw  ; carried 
forward,  backward,  and  even  directed  a little  towards 
the  sides.  These  different  motions  are  produced  by  the 
numerous  muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  jaw. 

But  the  jaws  could  never  have  produced  the  neces- 
sary effect  in  mastication  if  they  had  not  been  furnished 
with  teeth,  the  physical  properties  of  which  are  par 
ticularly  suited  to  this  digestive  action. 

[There  are  exceptions  to  all  rules,  and  although  teeth 
are  absolutely  necessary  in  general,  yet  it  is  within  our 
knowledge  that  a man,  who  has  followed  the  coasting 
trade  from  New- York,  never  had  any  teeth,  and  could 
eat  crackers,  ship-bread,  or  any  hard  substance,  break- 
ing and  chewing  it  with  his  gums,  as  well  as  any  one 
with  teeth.  A.] 

Mechanism  of  mastication. — For  the  commencement 
of  mastication,  the  inferior  jaw  must  be  lowered,  an 
effect  which  is  produced  by  the  relaxation  of  its  ele- 
vating, and  the  contraction  of  its  depressing  muscles. 
The  food  must  then  be  placed  between  the  dental 
arches,  either  by  the  tongue  or  some  other  agent ; the 
inferior  jaw  is  then  raised  by  the  masseter,  internal 
pterygoid,  and  temporal  muscles,  the  intensity  of  whose 
contraction  depends  upon  the  resistance  of  the  food. 
This  being  pressed  between  two  unequal  surfaces 
whose  asperities  fit  into  each  other,  is  divided  into 
small  portions,  the  number  of  which  is  in  proportion  to 
ie  facility  with  which  they  have  given  way. 


MAS 


MAT 


Eat  a motion  of  this  kind  reaches  only  a part  of  the 
food  contained  in  the  mouth,  and  it  must  be  all  equally 
divided.  This  takes  place  by  the  successive  motions 
of  the  inferior  jaw,  and  by  the  contraction  of  the  mus- 
cles of  the  cheeks,  of  those  of  the  tongue  and  lips,  which 
bring  the  food  between  the  teeth  successively  and 
promptly  during  the  separation  of  the  javv.s,  that  it  may 
be  bruised  when  they  come  together. 

When  the  alimentary  substances  are  soft  and  easily 
bruised,  two  or  three  masticatory  motions  are  sufficient 
to  divide  all  that  is  in  the  mouth ; the  three  kinds  of 
teeth  are  employed  in  it.  A longer  continued  mastica- 
tion is  necessary  when  the  substances  are  more  resist- 
ing, fibrous,  or  tough : in  this  case  we  chew  only  with 
the  molares , and  often  only  with  ope  side  at  a time,  to 
allow  the  other  to  rest.  In  employing  the  grinders 
there  is  an  advantage  of  shortening'  the  arm  of  the  lever 
represented  by  the  jaw,  and  by  so  doing  of  rendering  it 
more  advantageous  for  the  power  that  moves  it. 

In  the  mastication,  the  teeth  have  sometimes  to  sup- 
port very  considerable  efforts,  which  would  inevitably 
shake,  or  else  displace  them,  were  it  not  for  the  extreme 
solidity  of  their  articulation  with  the  jaws.  Each  root 
acts  like  a wedge,  in  transmitting  to  the  sides  of  the 
sockets  the  force  by  which  it  is  pressed. 

The  advantage  of  the  conical  form  of  the  roots  is  not 
doubtful.  By  reason  of  this  form,  the  force  by  which 
the  tooth  is  pressed,  and  which  tends  to  thrust  it  into 
the  jaw,  is  decomposed ; one  part  tends  to  separate  the 
sides  of  the  sockets,  the  other  to  lower  them  ; and  the 
transmission,  instead  of  being  carri  :d  to  the  extremity 
of  the  root,  which  could  not  have  failed  to  take  place 
in  a cylindric  form,  is  distributed  over  all  the  surface 
of  the  socket.  The  grinders  that  have  more  considera- 
ble efforts  to  sustain,  have  a number  of  roots,  or  at 
least  one  very  large.  The  incisors  and  eye  teeth,  that 
have  only  one  small  root,  have  never  any  great  pres- 
sure to  support. 

If  the  gums  had  not  presented  a smooth  surface  and 
a dense  tissue,  placed  as  they  are  round  the  neck  of  the 
teeth  and  filling  their  intervals,  they  would  have  been 
torn  every  instant ; for,  in  the  mastication  of  hard  and 
irregular  substances,  they  are  constantly  exposed  to  the 
pressure  of  their  edges  and  angles.  This  inconvenience 
happens  whenever  their  tissue  becomes  soft,  as  in  scor- 
butic affections. 

During  the  time  of  mastication  the  mouth  is  shut  be- 
hind by  the  curtain  of  the  palate,  the  anterior  surface 
of  which  is  pressed  against  the  base  of  the  tongue  ; the 
food  is  retained  before  by  the  teeth  and  the  lips. 

Insalivalion  of  the  aliments. — Whenever  we  have 
an  appetite,  the  view  of  food  determines  a considerable 
afflux  of  saliva  into  the  mouth  ; in  some  people  it  is  so 
strong  as  to  be  projected  to  the  distance  of  several 
feet. 

While,  the  aliments  are  bruised  and  triturated  by 
the  masticating  organs,  they  imbibe,  and  are  pene- 
trated completely  by  the  fluids  that  are  poured  into  the 
mouth,  and  particularly  by  thqf  aliva.  It  is  easy  to  con- 
ceive that  the  division  of  the  food  and  the  numerous 
displacements  that  it  suffers  during  mastication,  sin- 
gularly favour  its  mixture  with  the  mucous  and  sali- 
vary juices. 

Most  of  the  alimentary  substances  submitted  to  the 
action  of  the  mouth  are  dissolved  or  suspended  wholly 
or  in  part  in  the  saliva,  and  immediately  they  become 
proper  for  being  introduced  into  the  stomach,  and  are 
forthwith  swallowed. 

On  account  of  its  viscosity,  the  saliva  absorbs  air,  by 
which  it  is  swept  in  the  different  motions  necessary  for 
mastication ; but  the  quantity  of  air  absorbed  in  this 
circumstance  is  inconsiderable,  and  has  been  generally 
exaggerated. 

Of  what  use  is  the  trituration  of  food  and  its  mixture 
with  the  saliva?  Is  it  a simple  division  which  renders 
the  aliments  more  proper  for  the  alterations  which  they 
undergo  in  the  stomach,  or  do  they  suffer  the  first  de- 
gree of  animalization  in  the  mouth  ? On  this  point  there 
is  nothing  certain  known. 

Let  us  remark  that  mastication  and  insalivation 
change  the  savour  and  odour  of  the  food  ; that  masti- 
cation, sufficiently  prolonged,  generally  renders  diges- 
tion more  quick  and  easy;  that,  on  the  contrary, 
people  who  do  not  chew'  their  food,  have  often  on  this 
account  very  painful  and  slow  digestion. — Magendic's 
Physiology. 


MASTICATORY.  (Masticatorium ; from  mastico, 
to  chew.)  A medicine  intended  for  chewing. 

MA'STICHE.  (From  yaooai,  to  express.)  See  Pis- 

tacia  lentiscus. 

Mastich-herb.  See  Thymus  mastichina. 

Mastich , Syrian.  See  Teucrium  marum. 

Mastich-tree.  See  Pistacia  lentiscus. 

Mastich  wood.  See  Pistacia  lentiscus. 

Mastichklai’um.  (From  ya^ixvi  mastich,  and 
eXaiov,  oil.)  Oil  of  mastich. 

Masti'china.  (Diminutive  of  mastiche.)  See  Thy- 
mus mastichina. 

Masticot.  See  Massicot. 

Ma'stix.  See  Pistacia  lentiscus. 

MASTODY'NIA.  (From  ya?os,  a breast,  and 
oSvvz),  pain.)  Nacla.  Phlegmon  of  the  breast  of 
women.  This  disease  may  take  place  at  any  period 
of  life,  but  it  most  commonly  affects  those  who  give 
suck.  It  is  characterized  by  tumefaction,  tension,  heat, 
redness,  and  pain;  and  comes  sometimes  in  both 
breasts,  but  most  commonly  in  one.  Pyrexia  generally 
attends  the  disease.  It  is  sometimes  very  quickly 
formed,  and  in  general  without  any  thing  preceding  to 
show  it ; but  now  and  then  a slight  shivering  is  the 
forerunner.  This  disease  terminates  either  in  resolu- 
tion, in  suppuration,  or  scirrhus.  If  the  disease  is  left 
to  itself,  it  generally  terminates  in  suppuration. 

The  causes  which  give  rise  to  this  disease,  are  those 
which  give  rise  to  most  of  the  phleginashe,  as  cold, 
violent  blows,  See.  In  women  who  are  lying-in,  or 
giving  suck,  it  mostly  arises  either'  from  a suppression 
of  the  lochia,  or  a retention  of  milk.  Mastodynia  is 
often  of  long  continuance ; it  is  a very  painful  disease, 
but  is  seldom  fatal,  unless  when  absolutely  neglected, 
when  it  may  run  into  scirrhus,  and  finally  cancer.  The 
termination  of  the  disease  by  gangrene  is  never  to  be 
apprehended,  at  least  few,  if  any,  have  seen  the  disease 
terminate  in  this  way. 

MASTOID.  (Mastoideus ; from  /laj-os,  a breast, 
and  ados , resemblance.)  1.  Those  processes  of  bones 
are  so  named  that  are  shaped  like  the  nipple  of  the 
breast,  as  the  mastoid  process  of  the  temporal  bone, 
&c. 

2.  The  name  of  a muscle.  See  Sterno-deido-mas 
toideus. 

Mastoid  foramen.  A hole  in  the  temporal  bone  of 
the  skull. 

Mastoideus  lateralis.  A name  for  the  complexus 
muscle. 

Matali'sta  radix.  A root  said  to  be  imported 
from  America,  where  it  is  given  as  a purgative,  its 
action  being  rather  milder  than  that  of  jalap. 

MA'TER.  (Murjyp,  a mother:  so  called  by  the 
Arabians,  who  thought  they  gave  origin  to  all  other 
membranes  of  the  body.)  1.  Two  membranes  of  the 
brain  had  this  epithet  given  them.  See  Dura  mater , 
and  Pia  mater. 

2.  A name  of  the  herb  mugwort,  because  of  its  virtue 
in  disorders  of  the  womb. 

Mater  herbarum.  Common  mugwort.  See  Ar- 
temisia vulgaris. 

Mater  metallorum.  Quicksilver. 

Mater  perlarum.  See  Margarita. 

MATE'RIA.  A term  given  to  a substance  that  is 
selected  for  a particular  experiment  or  purpose,  which 
is  expressed  by  adding  the  name  of  that  purpose; 
hence  materia  medica , materia  chemica , &C. 

Materia  medica.  By  this  term  is  understood  a 
general  class  of  substances,  both  natural  and  artificial, 
which  are  used  in  the  cure  of  diseases. 

Cartheuser,  Newman,  Lewis,  Gleditsch,  Linn.vus, 
Vogel,  Alston,  Bergius,  Cullen,  Murray,  Paris,  in  his 
excellent  work  on  pharmacology,  and  other  writers  on 
the  Materia. Medica,  have  been  at  much  labour  to  con- 
trive arrangements  of  these  articles.  Some  have  dis- 
posed them  according  to  their  natural  resemblances , 
others  according  to  their  real  or  supposed  virtues; 
others  according  to  their  active  constituent  principles. 
These  arrangements  have  their  peculiar  advantages. 
The  first  may  be  preferred  by  the  natural  historian,  the 
second  by  the  physiologist,  and  the  last  by  the  chemist. 
The  pharmacopoeias,  published  by  the  Colleges  of  Phy 
sicians  of  London,  Dublin,  and  Edinburgh,  have  the 
articles  of  the  Materia  Medica  arranged  in  alphabetical 
order;  this  plan  is  also  adopted  by  almost  all  the  con- 
tinental pharmacopoeias. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


Dr.  Cullen  has  arranged  the  Materia  Medica  as  fol- 
cws : — 

f Nutriments,  which  are 
Food, 

Drinks, 

Condiments ; 

Medicines  which  act  on  the 
f Solids, 

Simple,  as 

Astringents , 

Tonics , 

Emollients , 

Corrosives  ; 

Living,  as 

Stimulants , 

Sedatives , 

Narcotics, 

Refrigerants, 

Antispasmodics. 

. Fluids,  • 

The  following  is  a list  of  articles  which  come  under  the  preceding  classes 


'Producing  a change  of 
fluidity, 

Attenuants, 

Jnspissants. 

Mixture. 

Correctors  of  Acrimony, 
Demulcents , 
Antacids, 
Antalkalines, 
Antiseptics. 

Evacuants;  viz. 

Errhines, 

Sialagogues, 

Expectorants , 

Emetics, 

Cathartics, 

Diuretics, 

Diaphoretics, 

Emmenagogues. 


I.  NUTRIMENTS. 
a.  Fruits. 

a.  Fresh,  sweet,  acidu- 

lous, as 
Prunes 
Oranges 
Lemons 
Raspberries 
Red  and  black  currants 
Mulberries 
Grapes,  &c. 

b.  Dried,  sweet,  acidu 
lous,  as 

Raisins 

Currants 

Figs. 

(}.  Oleraceous  Herbs. 
Water-cresses 
Dandelion 


Artichoke. 


Wormwood 
Southernwood 
Sea-wormwood 
W ater- germ  a rider 
Virginian  snake-root 
Leopard’s  bane 
Peruvian  bark. 

3.  Emollients. 
Colurrmiferous, 
Marsh  mallow 
Mallow. 
Farinaceous, 
Quince-seeds 
F;enugreek-seed 
Linseed 

Various  emollients , 
-Pellitory 
Verbascum 
White  lily. 

4.  Corrosives. 

5.  Stimulants. 
Verticellated . 


Benzoin. 

Aromatics , 
Cinnamon 
N utmeg 
Mace 
Clove 
Allspice 
Canella 
Cascarilla 
Black  pepper 
Long  pepper 
Indian  pepper 
Ginger 

Lesser  cardamom 
Zedoary 

Virginian  snake-root 
Ginseng 
Aromatic  reed. 
Acrids, 

Wake-robin 
Pellitory 
Stavesacre. 


Farinaceous  and  muci 
laginous  demulcents 

12.  Demulcents. 
Mucilaginous, 

Gum  arabic 

tragacanth. 

Farinaceous, 

as 

Starch 
Bland  oils. 

13.  Antacids. 

Alkalies  and  earths. 

14.  Antalkalines. 

Acids. 

15.  Antiseptics. 

Acid  parts  of  plants 
Acescent  herbs 
Sugar 

Siliquose  plants 
Alliaceous  plants 
Astringents 
Bitters 


Carrot 

Lavender 

6.  Narcotics. 

Aromatics 

Garlick 

Balm 

Rhceadaceous, 

Essential  oils 

Satyrion. 

Marjoram 

White  poppy 

Camphor 

5.  Seeds  and  Nuts. 

Sweet  marjoram 

Red  poppy. 

Gum  resins 

Almonds,  sweet  and 

Syrian  herb  mastich 

Umbellated, 

Saffron 

bitter 

Rosemary 

Hemlock 

Contrayerva 

Walnuts 

Hyssop 

Water  hemlock. 

Valerian 

Olives. 

Ivy 

Solanaceous, 

Opium 

II.  MEDICINES. 

Mint 

Belladonna 

Wine. 

1.  Astringents. 

Peppermint 

Henbane 

16.  Errhines. 

Red  rose 

Pennyroyal 

Tobacco 

Asarabacca 

Cinquefoil 

Thyme 

Bitter-sweet 

White  hellebore 

Tormentil 

Mother  of  thyme 

Stramonium 

Water  iris 

Madder 

Sage. 

Varia, 

Pellitory. 

Sorrel 

Umbellated, 

Laurel 

17.  Sialagogues 

Water-dock 

Fennel 

Camphor 

Archangel 

Bistort 

Archangel 

Saffron 

Cloves 

Fern 

Anise 

Wine. 

Masterwort 

Pomegranate 

Oak-bark 

Galls 

Logwood 

Quince 

Mulberry 

Sloe 

Gum-arabic 
Catechu 
Dragon’s  blood 
Alkanet 

Balaustine  flower 
St.  John’s  wort 
Millefoil 
Plantain 
Convallaria 
Bear’s  berry. 

2.  Tonics. 

Gentian 
Lesser  centaury 
Quassia 
Simarouba 
Marsh  trefoil 
Fumitory 
Camomile 
Tansy 


Caraway 

Coriander 

Cumin 

Dill 

Saxifrage. 

Siliquose, 

Horseradish 

Watercress 

Mustard 

Scurvy-grass. 

Alliaceous, 

Garlick. 

Coniferous, 

Fir 

Juniper. 

Balsamics, 

Venice  turpentine 
Common  turpentine 
Canada  balsam 
Copaiba  balsam 
Tolu  balsam 
Balm  of  Gilead. 
Resinous, 
Guaiacum 
Ladanum 
Storax 

L 1 


7.  Refrigerants. 
Fruits  of  plants 
Acidulous  herbs  and 

roots. 

8.  Antispasmodics. 
Foetid  herbs, 
Wormwood 
Foetid  goosefoot 
Cumin 
Pennyroyal 

' Ttue 
Savine. 

Foetid  gums , 

Asafcetida 

Galbanum 

Opoponax 

Valerian. 

9.  Diluents. 

Water. 

10.  Attenuants. 
Alkalies 
Sugar 
Liquorice 
Dried  fruits. 

11.  Inspissants. 

Acids 


Tobacco 

Pepper 

Pellitory. 

18.  Expectorants 
Ivy 

Hoarhound 

Pennyroyal 

Elecampane 

Florentine  orris-root 

Tobacco 

Squill 

Coltsfoot 

Benzoin 

Storax 

Canada  balsam 
Tolu  balsam. 

19.  Emetics. 
Asarabacca 
Ipecacuan 
Tobacco 
Squill 
Mustard 
Horseradish 
Bitters. 

20.  Catharticus. 
Milder, 


/ 


49 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


Mild  acid  fruits 

Castor  oil 

Cassia  pulp 

Senna 

Tamarind 

Black  hellebore 

Sugar 

Jalap 

Manna 

Scammony 

Sweet  roots 

Buckthorn 

Bland  oils 

Tobacco 

Damask  rose 

White  hellebore 

Violet 

Coloquintida 

Polypody 

Elaterium. 

Mustard 

21.  Diuretics. 

Bitters 

Parsley 

Balsamics. 

Carrot 

Acrid , 

Fennel 

Rhubarb 

Pimpinel 

Seneka 

Eryngo 

Broom 

Madder 

Elder 

Burdock 

The  following  is  the  arrangement  of  the  Materia 
Medica,  according  to  J.  Murray,  in  his  Elements  of 
Materia  Medica  and  Pharmacy. 

a.  General  stimulants. 

l.  Permanent  J Astringents. 

b.  Local  stimulants.  Emetics 

Cathartics 

Emmen  agogues 

Diuretics 

Diaphoretics 

Expectorants 

Sialagogues 

Errhines 

Epispastics. 

c.  Chemical  remedies.  Refrigerants 

Antacids 

Lithontriptics 

Escharotics. 

d.  Mechanical  remedies.  Anthelmintics 

Demulcents 

Diluents 

Emollients. 

Under  the  head  of  Narcotics  are  included — 

Alkohol.  Ether.  Camphor.  Papaver  somniferum. 
Hyoscyamus  niger.  Atropa  belladonna.  Aconitum 
napellus.  Conium  maculatum.  Digitalis  purpurea. 
Nicotiana  tabacum.  Lactuca  virosa.  Datura  stra- 
monium. Rhododendron  chrysanthemum.  Rhus  toxi- 
codendron. Arnica  montana.  Strychnos  nux  vo- 
mica. Prunus  lauro-cerasus. 

Under  the  second  class,  Antispasmodics,  are  in- 
cluded— Moschus.  Castoreum.  Oleum  animale  em- 
pyreumatieum.  Petroleum.  Ammonia.  Ferula  asa- 
fcetida.  Sagapenum.  Bubon  galbanum.  Valeriana 
officinalis.  Crocus  sativus.  Melaleuca  leucadendron. 

Narcotics  used  as  Antispasmodics — 

Ether.  Camphor.  Opium. 

Tonics  used  as  Antispasmodics — 

Cuprum.  Zincum.  Hydrargyrus.  Cinchona. 

The  head  of  Tonics  embraces — 

1.  From  the  mineral  kingdom, 

Hydrargyrus.  Ferrum.  Zincum.  Cuprum.  Ar- 
senicum. Barytes.  Calx.  Acidum  nitricum.  Oxy- 
murias  potass®. 

2.  From  the  vegetable  kingdom, 

Cinchona  officinalis.  Cinchona  cariboea.  Cinchona 
fioribunda.  Cuspaiia.  Aristolochia  serpen taria.  Dors- 
tenia  contrayerva.  Croton  eleutheria.  Calumba. 
Quassia  excelsa.  Quassia  simarouba.  Swietenia 
febrifiiga.  Swietenia  mahagoni.  Gentianalutea.  An- 
themis  nobilis.  Artemisia  absinthum.  Chironia  c9n- 
taurium.  Marrubium  vulgare.  Menyanthcs  trifoliata. 
Centaurea  benedicta.  Citrus  aurantium.  Citrus  me- 
dica. Laurus  cinnamomum.  Laurus  cassia.  Ca- 
nella  alba.  Acorus  calamus.  Ainomum  zinziber. 
Kaempferia  rotunda.  Santalum  album.  Pterocarpus 
santalinus.  Myristica  moscliata.  Caryophyllus  aro- 
maticus.  Capsicum  annuum.  Piper  nigrum.  Piper 
longum.  Piper  cubeba.  Myrtus  pimenta.  Ainomum 
repens.  Carum  carui.  Coriandrum  sativum.  Pim- 
pinella  anisum.  Ancthum  faeniculum.  Anethum 
graveolens.  Cuminum  cyminum.  Angelica  archan- 
gellCa.  Mentha  piperita.  Mentha  viridis.  Mentha 
pulegium.  Hysopus  officinalis. 

The  class  of  Astringents  comprehends  the  follovv- 

ing-*o 


Bitter-sweet1 
Wake-robin 
Asarabacca 
Foxglove 
Tobacco 
Rue 
Savine 
Snakeroot 
Squill 
Bitters 
Balsamics 
Siliquos® 

Alliace®. 

22.  Diaphoretics. 

Saffron 
Bitter-sweet 
Opium 
Camphor 

1.  From  the  vegetable  kingdom, 

Quercus  robur.  Quercus  cerris.  Tormentilla 

erecta.  Polygonum  bistorta.  Anchusa  tinctoria.  Has 
matoxylon  campechianum.  Rosa  gallica.  Arbutus 
uva  ursi.  Mimosa  catechu.  Kino.  Pterocarpus 
draco.  Ficus  indica.  Pistachia  lentiscus. 

2.  From  the  mineral  kingdom, 

Acidum  sulphuricum.  Argilla.  Supersulphas  ar- 
gillae  et  potass®.  Calx.  Carbonas  calcis.  Plumbum. 
Zincum.  Ferrum.  Cuprum. 

The  articles  which  come  under  the  head  of  Eme- 
tics, are 

1.  From  the  vegetable  kingdom, 

Calliocca  ipecacuanha.  Scilla  maritima.  Anthe- 
mis  nobilis.  Sinapis  alba.  Asarum  europaeum.  Ni- 
cotiana tabacum. 

2.  From  the  mineral  kingdom. 

Antimonium.  Sulphas  zinci.  Sulphas  cupri.  Sub- 
acetas  cupri.  Ammonia.  Hydro-sulphuretum  am- 
nion iae. 

Cathartics  include 

Laxatives.  Manna.  Cassia  fistula.  Tamarindus 
indica.  Ricinus  communis.  Sulphur.  Magnesia. 

Purgatives.  Cassia  senna.  Rheum  palmatum. 
Convolvulus  jalapa.  Helleborus  niger.  Bryonia  alba. 
Cucumis  colocynthis.  Momordica  elaterium.  Rliam- 
nus  catliarticus.  Aloe  perfoliata.  Convolvulus  scam- 
monia.  Gambojia  gutta.  Submurias  hydrargyri. 
Sulphas  magnesiae.  Sulphas  sod®.  Sulphas  potass®. 
Supertartras  potass®.  Tartras  potass®  et  sod®.  Mu- 
riassod®.  Terebinthina  veneta.  Nicotiana  tabacum. 
The  medicines  arranged  under  Emmenagogues,  are: 

1.  From  the  class  of  Antispasmodics. 

Castoreum.  Ferula  asafeetida.  Bubon  galbanum. 

2.  From  the  class  of  tonics. 

Ferrum.  Hydrargyrus.  Cinchona  officinalis. 

3.  From  the  class  of  Cathartics. 

Aloe.  Helleborus  niger.  Sinapis  alba.  Rosmarinus 
officinalis.  Rubia  tinctoruin.  Ruta  graveolens.  Ju- 
niperus  sabina. 

The  class  of  Diuretics  includes, 

1.  Saline  diuretics. 

Supertartras  potass®.  Nitras  potass®.  Murias  am- 
monia. Acetas  potass®.  Potassa. 

2.  From  the  vegetable  kingdom, 

Scilla  maritima.  Digitalis  purpurea.  Nicotiana  ta- 
bacum. Solanum  dulcamara.  Lactuca  virosa.  Col- 
chicum  autumnale.  Gratiola  officinalis.  Spartium 
scoparium.  Juniperus  communis.  Copaifera  offici- 
nalis. Pinus  balsamea.  Pinus  larix. 

3.  From  the  animal  kingdom, 

Meloe  vesicatorius. 

Under  the  class  Diaphoretics,  are, 

Ammonia.  Murias  ammoni®.  Acetas  ammoni®. 
Citras  arnmoni®.  Submurias  hydrargyri.  Antimoni- 
um. Opium.  Camphor.  Guaiacum  officinale.  Daphne 
mezereum.  Smilax  sarsaparilla.  Laurus  sassafras. 
Cochlearia  armoracia.  Salvia  officinalis. 

The  class  Expectorants  comprehends, 
Antimonium.  Ipecacuanha.  Nicotiana  tabacum 
Digitalis  purpurea.  Scilla  maritima.  Allium  sativum. 
Polygala  senega.  Ammoniacum.  Myrrha.  Styrax 
benzoin.  Styrax  officinalis.  Toluifera  balsamum. 
Myroxylon  perUiferum.  Amyris  gileadensis. 

The  articles  of  the  class  Sialagogues  are  Hydrar- 
gyrus. Anthemis  pyrethrum.  Arum  maculatum. 
Amomum  zinziber.  'Daphne  mezereum.  Nicotiana 
tabacum. 

The  class  of  Errhine3  are,  Iris  florentina  iEscu- 


Contrayerva 

Serpentaria 

Sage 

W ater  germander 
Guaiacum 
Sassafras 
Seneka 

Vegetable  acids 
Essential  oil 
Wine 
Diluents. 

23.  Emmenagogues. 
Aloes 

Foetid  gums 
Foetid  plants 
Saffron. 


MATERIA  MED1CA, 


lus  hippocastanum.  Origanum  majorana.  Lavendula 
spica.  Assarum  europaeum.  Veratrum  album.  Ni- 
cotiana  tabacum.  Euphorbia  officinalis. 

In  the  class  Epispastics,  and  Rubefacients  are 
Meloe  vesicatorius.  Ammonia  Pix  Burgundica. 
Sinapis  alba.  Allium  sativum. 

Refrigerants  are  constituted  by  the  following  ar- 
ticles. Citrus  aurantium.  Citrus  mediea.  Tamarin- 
dus  indica.  Acidum  acetosum.  Supertartras  potass®. 
Nitras  potass®.  Boras  sod®. 

The  list  of  articles  that  come  under  the  class  Ant- 
acids are,  Potassa.  Soda.  Ammonia.  Calx.  Car- 
bonas  calcis.  Magnesia. 

In  the  class  Lithontriptics  are,  Potassa.  Carbo- 
nas  potass®.  Soda.  Carbonas  sod®.  Sapo  albus. 
Calx. 

In  the  class  Escharotics  are,  Acida  mineralia. 
Potassa.  Nitras  argenti.  Murias  antimonii.  Sulphas 


cupri.  Acetas  cupri.  Murias  hydrargyri.  Subnitras 
hydrargyri.  Oxydum  arsenici  album.  Juniperus  sa- 
bina. 

In  the  class  Anthelmintics  are,  Doliclios  pruriens. 
Ferri  limatura.  Stannum  pulveratum.  Olea  europ®a. 
Artemisia  sintonica.  Spigelia  marilandica.  Polypo- 
dium filix  tpas.  Tanacetum  vulgare.  Geoffroea  inermis. 
Gainbojia  gutta.  Submurias  hydrargyri. 

Demulcents  are,  Mimosa  nilotica.  Astragalus  tra- 
gacanthus.  Linum  usitatissimum.  Altbaa  officinalis. 
Malva  syl^estris.  Glycyrrhiza  glabra.  Cycas  circi- 
nalis.  Orchis  mascula.  Maranta  arundinacea.  Tri- 
ticum  hybernum.  Ichthyocolla.  Olea  europ®a. 
Amygdalus  communis.  Sevum  ceti.  Cera. 

Water  is  the  principal  articlepfjhe  class  Diluents  ; 
and  as  for  the  last  class,  Emollients,  heat  conjoined 
with  moisture  is  the  principal,  though  all  unctuous  ap- 
plications may  be  included. 


The  New  London  Pharmacopoeia  presents  us  with  the  following 


Abietis  resina 
Absinthium 
Acaci®  gummi 
Acetos®  folia 
Acetosella 
Acetum 

Acidum  aceticum  fortius 

Acidum  citricum 

Acidum  sulphuricum 

Aconiti  folia 

Adeps 

iErugo 

Allii  radix 

Aloes  spicat®  extraclum 
Alth®®  folia  et  radix 
Alumeu 
Ammoniacum 
Ammoni®  murias 
Amygdala  amara  et  dulcis 
Amylum 
A nethi  semina 
Anisi  semina 
Anthemidis  floris 
Antimonii  sulphuretum 
Antimonii  vitrum 
Argentum 
Armoraci®  radix 
Arsenicum  album 
Asara  folia 

Asafcetid®  gummi  resina 
Aven®  semina 
Aurantii  bacc® 

Aurantii  cortex 

Balsamum  peruvianum 

Balsamum  tolutanum 

Belladonn®  folia 

Benzoinura 

Bismuthum 

Bistorta  radix 

Cajuputi  oleum 

Calamina 

Calami  radix 

Calumba 

Camphora 

Canell®  cortex 

Cantharis 

Capsici  bacc® 

Carbo  ligni 
Cardamines  flores 
Cardamomi  semina 
Caric®  fructus 
Carui  semina 
Caryophilli 

Caryophyllorum  oleum 
Cascarill®  cortex 
Cassi®  pulpa 
Castoreum 
Catechu  extractum 
Centaurii  cacumina 
Cera  alba 
Cera  flava 

Cerevisi®  fermentum 
Cetaceum 

Cinchon®  lancifoli®,  cordifoli®  et 
oblongifoli®  cortex 
Cinnamomi  cortex 
Cinnamomi  oleum 


Coccus 
Colchici  radix  et  semina 
Colocynthidis  pulpa 
Conii  folia  et  semina 
Contrayerva  radix 
Copaiba 

Coriandri  semina 

Cornua 

Creta 

Croci  stigmata 
Cubeba 

Cumini  semina 
Cupri  sulphas 
Cuspari®  cortex 
Cydoni®  semina 
Dauci  radix 
Dauci  semina 
Digitalis  folia  et  semina 
Dolichi  pubes 
Dulcamar®  caulis 
Elaterii  pepones 
Elemi 

Euphorbi®  gummi  resina 
Farina 

Foeniculi  semina 
Ferrum 
Filicis  radix 
Fucus 

Galbani  gummi  resina 
Gall®  ' 

Gentian®  radix 
Glycyrrhiz®  radix 
Granati  cortex 
Guaiaca  resina  et  lignum 
H®matoxyli  lignum 
Helenium 

Hellebori  foetidi  folia 
Hellebori  nigri  radix 
Hordei  semina 
Humuli  strobili 
Hydrargyrum 
Hyoscyami  folia  et  semina 
Ipecacuanh®  radix 
Jalap®  radix 
Juniperi  bacc®  et  semina 
Kino 

Kramen®  radix 
Lactuca 

Lavendul®  flores 
Lauri  bacc®  et  folia 
Lichen 
Limones 

Limonum  cortex  et  oleum 
Linum  catharticum 
Lini  usitatissimi  semina 
Magnesi®  subcarbonas 
Magnesi®  sulphas 
Malva 
Manna 

Marmor  aloum 
Marrubium 
Mastiche 
Mel 

Mentha  piperita 
Mentha  viridis 
Menyanthes 
Mezerei  cortex 

L 2 


list  for  the  Materia  Mediea : — 

Mori  bacc® 

Moschus 

Myristic®  nuclei  et  oleum  expressum 

Myrrha 

Olibanum 

Oliv®  oleum 

Opium 

Opopanacis  gummi  resina 

Origanum 

Ovum 

Papaveris  capsul® 

Petroleum 
Piment®  bacc® 

Piperis  longi  fructus 
Piperis  nigri  bacc® 

Pix  abietina 
Pix  liquida 
Pix  nigra 

Plumbi  subcarbonas 
Plumbi  oxydum  semivitreum 
Porri  radix 
Potassa  impura 
Potass®  nitras 
Potass®  sulphas 
Potass®  supertartras 
Pruna 

Pterocarpi  lignum 
Pulegium 
Pyrethri  radix 
Ouassi®  lignum 
Q,uercus  cortex 
Resina  flava 
Rhamni  bacc® 

Rhei  radix 
Rhceados  petala 
Ricini  semina  et  oleum 
Ros®  canin®  pulpa 
Ros®  centi  foliffi  petala 
Ros®  gallic®  petala 
Rosmarini  cacumina 
Rubi®  radix 
Rut®  folia 
Sabin®  folia 
Saccharum 

purificatum 

Salicis  cortex 
Sagapenum 
Sambuci  flores 
Sapo  durus  etf’lnollis 
Sarsaparill®  radix 
Sassafras  lignum  et  radix 
Scamrnone®  gummi  resina 
Scill®  radix 
Seneg®  radix 
Senn®  folia 
Serpentari®  radix 
Sevum 

SimarOub®  cortex 
Sinapis  semina 
Sodsmurias 
Sod®  subboras 
Sod®  sulphas 
Soda  impura 
Spartii  cacumina 
Spigeli®  radix 

Spiritus  rectificatus  et  tenulor 
Spongia 


51 


MAT 


MAX 


Btramonii  folia  et  semina 
Stannum 

Staphisagriee  semina 
Styracis  balsamum 
Succinum 

Sulphur  et  sulphur  sublimatum 
Tabaci  folia 
Tamarindi  pulpa 
Taraxaci  radix 


Tartarum 

Terebinthina  Canadonsis 

Chia 

vulgaris 

Terebinthinae  oleum 

Teslfe 

Tiglii  ®leum 
Tormentillse  radix 
Toxicodendri  folia 


Tragacantha 
Tussilago 
Valerianae  radix 
Veratri  radix 
Ulmi  cortex 
Uvae  pass® 

Uvae  ursi  folia 
Zincum 

Zingiberis  radix; 


Materia  perlata.  If,  instead  of  crys®ilizing  the 
salts  contained  in  the  liquor  separated  from  diaphoretic 
antimony,  an  acid  be  poured  into  it,  a white  precipi- 
tate is  formed,  which  is  nothing  else  but  a very  refrac- 
tory calx  of  antimony. 

Materiatu'ra.  Castellus  explains  morbi  materia - 
turat  to  be  diseases  of  intemperance. 

MATLOCK.  A village  in  Derbyshire.  It  affords  a 
mineral  water  of  the  acidulous  class:  which  issues 
from  a limestone  rock,  near  the  banks  of  the  Derwent. 
Several  of  the  springs  possess  a temperature  of  66°. 
Matlock  water  scarcely  differs  from  common  good 
spring  water,  in  sensible  properties.  It  is  extremely 
transparent,  and  exhales  no  vapour,  excepting  in  cold 
weather.  It  holds  little  or  no  excess  of  aSi ini  particles ; 
it  curdles  soap  when  first  taken  up,  but  it  loses  this  effect 
upon  long  keeping,  perhaps  from  the  deposition  of  its 
calcareous  salts ; it  appears  to  differ  very  little  from 
good  spring  water  when  tasted  : and  its  effects  seem 
referable  to  its  temperature.  It  is  from  this  latter  cir- 
cumstance that  it  forms  a proper  tepid  bath  for  the  ner- 
vous and  irritable,  and  those  of  a debiliiafed  constitu- 
tion ; hence  it  is  usually  recommended  after  the  use  of 
Bath  and  Buxton  waters,  and  as  preparatory  to  sea- 
bathing. 

MATRICA'LIA.  ( Matricalis  ; from  matrix , the 
wbmb.)  Medicines  appropriated  to  disorders  of  the 
uterus. 

MATRICA'RIA.  (From  matrix , the  womb:  so 
called  from  its  uses  in  disorders  of  the  womb.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Liiyiaean  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia  ; Order,  Polygamia  superjlua. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  Matricaria  par- 
thenium.  See  Matricaria  parthenium. 

Matricaria  chamomilla.  Chamcp.melum  vulgare ; 
Chamomilla  nostras ; Lcucanthemum  of  Dioscorides. 
Common  wild  corn,  or  dog’s  camomile.  The  plant  di- 
rected under  this  name  in  the  phamacopceias,  is  the 
Matricaria — receptaculis  conicis  radiis  patentibus  ; 
squamis  calycinis,  margine  cequalibus , of  Linnteus. 
Its  virtues  are  similar  to  those  of  the  parthenium , but 
in  a much  inferior  degree. 

Matricaria  parthenium.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  fever-few.  Parthenium  febrifuga.  Common 
fever-few,  or  febrifuge,  and  often,  but  very  improperly, 
feather-few.  Mother’s  wort.  The  leaves  and  flowers 
of  this  plant,  Matricaria— foliis  compositis , planis  ; 
foliolis  ovatis,  incisis ; pcdunculis  ramosis , have  a 
strong,  not  agreeable  smell,  and  a moderately  bitter 
taste,  both  which  they  communicate  by  warm  infusion, 
to  water  and  rectified  spirit.  The  watery  infusions, 
inspissated,  leave  an  extract  of  considerable  bitternoss, 
and  which  discovers  also  a saline  matter,  both  to  the 
taste,  and  in  a more  sensible  manner  by  throwing  up  to 
the  surface  small  crystalline  efflorescences  in  keeping. 
The  peculiar  flavour  of  the  matricaria  exhales  in  the 
evaporation,  and  impregnates  the  distilled  water,  on 
which  also  a quantity  of  essential  oil  is  found  floating. 
The  quantity  of  spiri^us  extract,  according  to  Car- 
theuser’s  experiments!  is  only  about  one-sixth  the 
weight  of  the  dry  leaves,  whereas  the  watery  extract 
amounts  to  near  one-half.  Tlii^j  plant  is  evidently  the 
Parthenium  of  Dioscorides,  since  whose  time  it  has 
been  very  generally  employed  for  medical  purposes. 
In  natural  affinity,  it  ranks  with  camomile  and  tansy, 
and  its  sensible  qualities  show  it  to  be  nearly  allied  to 
them  in  its  medicinal  character.  Bergius  states  its  vir- 
tues to  be  tonic,  stomachic,  resolvent,  and  einmena- 
gogue.  It  has  been  given  successfully  as  a vermifuge, 
and  for  the  cure  of  intermittents;  but  its  use  is  most 
celebrated  in  female  disorders,  especially  in  hysteria  ; 
and  hence  it  is  supposed  to  have  derived  the  name  of 
matricaria.  Its  smell,  taste,  and  analysis,  prove  it  to 
be  a medicine  of  considerable  activity  ; we  may,  there- 
fore, say,  with  Murray — Rarius  hodte  pracscribitur , 
quam  dcbetur. 


Matrisy'lva.  See  Asperula. 

MA  TRIX.  (Mar^p.)  It  The  womb  See  Uterus. 

2.  The  earthy  or  stony  matter  which  accompanies 
ores,  or  envelopes  them  in  the  earth. 

Matrona'lis.  (From  matrona , a matron  : so  called 
because  its  smell  is  grateful  to  women.)  The  violet. 

MATTHIOLUS,  Peter  Andrew,  was  born  at  Si- 
enna in  1501.  He  went  to  study  the  law  at  Padua ; 
but  disliking  that  pursuit,  he  turned  his  attention  to 
medicine.  His  father’s  death  interrupted  him  in  his 
progress  ; but  having  conciliated  the  good  opinion  of 
the  professors,  the  degree  of  doctor  was  conferred  upon 
him  before  his  departure.  He  speedily  found  ample 
employment  in  his  native  place,  but  afterward  went 
to  Rouse,  and  in  1527  to  the  court  of  the  prince  bishop 
of  Trent.  During  his  residence  of  fourteen  years 
there,  he  acquired  such  general  esteem,  that  on  his  re- 
moval, men,  women,  and  children,  accompanied  him, 
calling  him  their  father  and  benefactor.  At  Gorizia, 
where  he  then  settled  as  public  physician,  he  likewise 
experienced  a signal  mark  of  gratitude ; a fire  having 
consumed  all  his  furniture,  the  people  flocked  to  him 
next  day  with  presents,  which  more  than  compensated 
his  loss,  and  the  magistrates  advanced  him  a year’s  sa- 
lary. After  twelve  years,  he  accepted  an  invitation  to 
the  Imperial  court,  where  he  was  highly  honoured,  and 
created  aulic  counsellor : but  finding  the  iveight  of  age 
pressing  upon  him,  he  retired  to  Trent,  where  he  shortly 
died  of  the  plague  in  1577.  He  left  several  works, 
chiefly  relating  to  the  virtues  of  plants:  and  that,  by 
which  he  principally  distinguished  himself,  was  a Com- 
mentary on  the  writings  of  Dioscorides.  This  was 
first  published  in  Italian,  afterward  translated  by  him 
into  Latin,  with  plates,  and  passed  through  numerous 
editions.  He  certainly  contributed  much  to  lay  the 
foundation  of  botanical  science,  though  he  was  not 
sufficiently  scrupulous  in  consulting  the  original  sources, 
and  examining  the  plants  themselves. 

MATURA'NTIA.  ( Maturans  ; from  maturo , to 
ripen.)  Medicines  which  promote  the  suppuration  of 
tumours. 

MATURATION.  (Maturatio ; from  maturo,  to 

make  ripe.)  A term  in  surgery,  signifying  that  pro- 
cess which  succeeds  inflammation,  by  which  pus  iscol- 
lected  in  an  abscess. 

MAUDLIN.  See  Achillea  ageratum. 

MAURICEAU,  Francis,  was  born  at  Paris,  where 
he  studied  surgery  with  great  industry  for  many  years, 
especially  at  the  Hdtel-Dieu.  He  had  acquired  so  much 
experience  in  midwifery,  before  he  commenced  public 
practice,  that  be  rose  almost  at  once  to  the  head  of  his 
profession.  His  reputation  was  farther  increased  by 
his  writings,  and  maintained  by  his  prudent  conduct 
during  a series  of  years ; after  which  he  retired  into  the 
country,  and  died  in  1709.  He  published  several  works, 
relating  to  the  particular  branch  of  the  art  which  he 
practised,  containing  a great  store  of  useful  facts, 
though  not  well  arranged,  nor  free  from  the  false  rea- 
soning prevalent  in  his  time. 

Mauro-marson.  See  Marrubium. 

Maw-worm.  * See  Ascaris. 

MAXI'LL  A.  (From  rjacaao),  to  chew.)  The  jaw, 
both  upper  and  lower. 

Maxillare  inferius  os.  Maxilla  inferior.  Man- 
dibula.  The  maxilla  inferior,  or  lower  jaw,  which,  in 
its  figure,  may  be  compared  to  a horse-shoe,  is  at  first 
composed  of  two  distinct  bones  ; but  these,  soon  after 
birth,  unite  together  at  the  middle  of  the  chin,  so  as  to 
form  only  one  bone.  The  superior  edge  of  this  bone 
has,  like  the  upper  jaw,  a process,  called  the  alveolar 
process.  This,  as  well  as  that  of  the  upper  jaw,  to 
which  it  i^  in  other  fespects  a good  deal  similar,  is  like- 
wise furnished  with  cavities  for  the  reception  of  the 
teeth.  The  posterior  part  of  the  bone,  on  each  side, 
rises  perpendicularly  into  two  processes,  one  of  which 
is  called  the  coronoid,  and  the  oilier  the  condyloid  pro- 


MAX 


MAY 


cess.  The  first  of  these  is  the  highest : it  is  thin  and 
pointed ; and  the  temporal  muscle,  which  is  attached 
to  it,  serves  to  elevate  the  jaw.  The  condyloid  process 
is  narrower,  thicker,  and  shorter  than  the  other,  termi- 
nating in  an  oblong,  rounded  head,  which  is  formed  for 
a moveable  articulation  witli  the  cranium,  and  is  re- 
ceived into  the  forepart  of  the  fossa  described  in  the 
temporal  bone.  In  this  joint  there  is  a moveable  car- 
tilage, which,  being  more  closely  connected  to  the  con- 
dyle than  to  the  cavity,  may  be  considered  as  belonging 
to  the  former.  This  moveable  cartilage  is  connected 
with  both  the  articulating  surface  of  the  temporal  bone 
and  the  condyle  of  the  jaw,  by  distinct  ligaments  aris- 
ing from  its  edges  all  round.  These  attachments  of 
the  cartilage  are  strengthened,  and  the  whole  articula- 
tion secured,  by  an  external  ligament,  which  is  com- 
mon to  both,  and  which  is  fixed  to  the  temporal  bone, 
and  to  the  neck  of  the  condyle.  On  the  inner  surface 
of  the  ligament,  which  attaches  the  cartilage  to  the 
temporal  bone,  and  backwards  in  the  cavity,  is  placed 
what  is  commonly  called  the  gland  of  the  joint ; at 
least  the  ligament  is  there  found  to  be  much  more  vas- 
cular than  at  any  other  part.  At  the  bottom  of  each 
coronoid  process,  on  its  inner  part,  is  a foramen,  or  ca- 
nal, which  extends  under  the  roots  of  all  the  teeth,  and 
terminates  at  the  outer  surface  of  the  bone  near  the 
chin.  Each  of  these  foramina  affords  a passage  to  an 
artery,  vein,  and  nerve,  which  send  off  branches  to  the 
several  teeth. 

This  bone  is  capable  of  a great  many  motions.  The 
condyles,  by  sliding  from  the  cavity  towards  the  emi- 
nences on  each  side,  bring  the  jaw  horizontally  for- 
wards, as  in  the  action  of  biting  ; or  the  condyles  only 
may  be  brought  forwards,  w-hile  the  rest  of  the  jaw  is 
tilted  backwards,  as  is  the  case  when  the  mouth  is 
open.  The  condyles  may  also  slide  alternately  back- 
wards and  forwards  from  the  cavity  to  the  eminence, 
and  vice  versa;  so  that  while  one  condyle  advances, 
the  other  moves  backwards,  turning  the  body  of  the 
jaw  from  side  to  side,  as  in  grinding  the  teeth.  The 
great  use  of  the  cartilages  seems  to  be  that  of  securing 
the  articulation,  by  adapting  themselves  to  the  different 
inequalities  in  these  several  motions  of  the  jaw,  and  to 
prevent  any  injuries  from  friction.  This  last  circum- 
stance is  of  great  importance  where  there  is  so  much 
motion,  and,  accordingly,  this  cartilage  is  found  in  the 
different  tribes  of  carnivorous  animals,  where  there 
is  no  eminence  and  cavity,  nor  other  apparatus  for 
grinding. 

The  alveolar  processes  are  formed  of  an  external 
and  internal  plate,  united  together  by  thin  bony  parti- 
tions, which  divide  the  processes  at  the  forepart  of  the 
jaw,  into  as  many  sockets  as  there  are  teeth.  But,  at 
the  posterior  part,  where  the  teeth  have  more  than  one 
root,  each  root  has  a distinct  cell.  These  processes  in 
both  jaws,  begin  to  be  formed  with  the  teeth,  accom- 
pany them  in  their  growth,  and  disappear  when  the 
teeth  fall.  So  that  the  loss  of  the  one  seems  constantly 
to  be  attended  with  the  loss  of  the  other. 

Maxillare  superius  os.  Maxilla  superior.  The 
superior  maxillary  bones  constitute  the  most  consider- 
able portion  of  the  upper  jaw,  are  two  in  number,  and 
generally  remain  distinct  through  life.  Their  figure  is 
exceedingly  irregular,  and  not  easily  to  be  described. 
On  each  of  these  bones  are  observed  several  eminences. 
One  of  these  is  at  the  upper  and  forepart  of  the  bone, 
and,  from  its  making  part  of  the  nose,  is  called  the 
nasal  process.  Internally,  in  the  inferior  portion  of 
this  process,  is  a fossa,  which,  with  the  os  unguis,  forms 
a passage  for  the  lachrymal  duct.  Into  this  nasal 
process,  likewise,  is  inserted  the  short  round  tendon  of 
the  musculus  orbicularis  palpebrarum.  Backwards 
and  outwards,  from  the  root  of  the  nasal  process,  the 
bone  helps  to  form  the  lower  side  of  the  orbit,  and  this 
part  is  therefore  called  the  orbitar  process.  Behind 
this  orbitar  process,  the  bone  forms  a considerable  tu- 
berosity, and,  at  the  upper  part  of  this  tuberosity,  is  a, 
channel,  which  is  almost  a complete  hole.  In  this 
channel  passes  a branch  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves, 
which,  together  with  a small  artery,  is  transmitted  to 
the  face  through  the  external  orbitar  foramen,  which 
opens  immediately  under  the  orbit.  Where  the  bone 
on  each  side  is  joined  to  the  os  malsc,  and  helps  to  form 
the  cheeks,  is  observed  what  is  called  the  malar  pro- 
cess. The  lower  and  anterior  parts  of  the  bone  make 
a kind  of  circular  sweep,  in  which  are  the  alveoli,  or 
sockets  for  the  teeth ; this  is  called  the  alveolar  pro- 


cess. This  alveolar  process  has  posteriorly  a consider* 
able  tuberosity  on  its  internal  surface.  Above  this 
alveolar  process,  and  just  behind  the  fore-teeth,  is  an 
irregular  hole,  called  the  foramen  incisivum , which, 
separating  into  two,  and  sometimes  more  holes,  serves 
to  transmity^mall  arteries  and  veins,  and  a minute 
branch  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves  to  the  nostrils. 
There  are  two  horizontal  lamellae  behind  the  alveolar 
process,  which,  uniting  together,  form  part  of  the  roof 
of  the  mouth,  and  divide  it  from  the  nose.  This  par- 
tition, being  seated  somewhat  higher  than  the  lower 
edge  of  the  alveolar  process,  gives  the  roof  of  the  mouth 
a considerable  hollowness.  Where  the  ossa  maxillaria 
are  united  to  each  other,  they  project  somewhat  for- 
wards, leaving  between  them  a furrow,  which  receives 
the  inferior  portion  of  the  septum  nasi.  Each  of  these 
bones  is  hollow,  and  forms  a considerable  sinus  under 
its  orbitar  part.  This  sinus,  which  is  usually,  though 
improperly,  called  antrum  Higkmorianum,  is  lined  with 
the  pituitory  membrane.  It  answers  the  same  purposes 
as  the  other  sinuses  of  the  nose,  and  communicates 
with  the  nostrils  by  an  opening,  which  appears  to  be  a 
large  one  in  the  skeleton,  but  which,  in  the  recent  sub- 
ject, is  much  smaller.  In  the  fetus,  instead  of  these 
sinuses,  an  oblong  depression  only  is  observed  at  each 
side  of  the  nostrils,  nor  is  the  tuberosity  of  the  alveo- 
lar process  then  formed.  On  the  side  of  thtf  palate,  in 
young  subjects,  a kind  of  fissure  may  be  noticed,  which 
seems  to  separate  the  portion  of  the  bone  which  con- 
tains the  dentes  incisores  from  that  which  contains  the 
dentes  canini.  This  fissure  is  sometimes  apparent  till 
the  sixth  year,  but  after  that  period  it  in  general  wholly 
disappears. 

The  ossa  maxillaria  not  only  serve  to  form  the 
cheeks,  but  likewise  the  palate,  nose,  and  orbits;  and, 
besides  their  union  with  each  other,  they  are  connected 
with  the  greatest  part  of  the  bones  of  the  face  and  crani- 
um, viz.  with  the  ossa  nasi,  ossa  malarum,  ossa  unguis, 
ossa  palati,  os  frontis,  os  sphenoides,  and  os  ethmoides. 

M AXILLARIS.  (From  maxilla ; the  jaw.)  Max- 
illary : appertaining  to  the  jaw. 

Maxillary  artery.  Arteria  maxillaris ■ A branch 
of  the  external  carotid.  The  external  maxillary  is  the 
fourth  branch  of  the  carotid  ; it  proceeds  anteriorly, 
and  gives  off  the  facial  or  mental,  the  coronary  of  the 
lips,  and  the  angular  artery.  The  internal  maxillary 
is  the  next  branch  of  the  carotid ; it  gives  off  the  spheno- 
maxillary, the  inferior  alveolar,  and  the  spinous  artery. 

Maxillary  gland.  Glandula  maxillaris.  The 
gland  so  called  is  conglomerate,  and  situated  under  the 
angles  of  the  lower  jaw.  The  excretory  ducts  of  these 
glands  are  called  Warthouian,  after  their  discoverer. 

Maxillary  t*erve.  JVervus  maxillaris.  The  su- 
perior and  inferior  maxillary  nerves  are  branches  of 
the  fifth  pair,  or  trigemini.  The  former  is  divided  into 
the  sphenopalatine,  posterior  alveolar,  and  the  infra- 
orbital nerve.  The  latter  is  divided  into  two  branches, 
the  internal  lingual,  and  one,  more  properly,  called  the 
inferior  maxillary. 

[May-apple.  See  Podophyllum  peltatum.  A.] 

May-lily.  See  Convallaria  majalis. 

May-ioe.ed.  See  Anthemis  cotula. 

MA  VERNE,  Sir  Theodore  Turquet  de,  Baron 
D’Aubonne,  was  born  at  Geneva  in  1573,  and  gradu 
ated  at  Montpelier.  He  then  went  to  Paris,  and,  by 
the  influence  of  Riverius,  was  appointed  in  1600  to 
attend  the  Duke  de  Rohan,  in  his  embassy  to  the  diet 
at  Spire  ; and  also  one  of  the  physicians  in  ordinary  to 
Henry  IV.  On  his  return,  he  setiled  in  Paris  as  physi- 
cian, and  gave  lectures  in  anatomy  and  pharmacy,  in 
which  he  strongly  recommended  various  chemical 
remedies  : this  drew  on  him  the  ill-will  of  the  faculty, 
and  he  was  anonymously  attacked  as  an  enemy  to  Hip- 
pocrates and  Galen,  whence  in  his  “Apologia,”  he 
cleared  himself  from  this  imputation,  making  also  some 
severe  strictures  on  his  opponents.  They  consequently 
issued  a decree  against  consulting  with  him  ; but  the 
esteem  of  the  king  supported  him  against  this  perse- 
cution, and  he  would  have  been  appointed  first  physi- 
cian, had  he  not  refused  to  embrace  the  Catholic 
religion.  After  the  assassination  of  Henry  IV.  in  1610, 
he  received  an  invitation  from  James  I.  of  England,  to 
whom  he  had  been  introduced  three  years  before:  he 
accepted  the  office  of  his  first  physician,  and  passed  the 
remainder  of  his  life  in  this  country.  He  was  ad- 
mitted to  the  degree  of  doctor  in  both  universities,  and 
into  the  College  of  Physicians,  and  met  with  very 


MEA 


MEC 


general  respect.  He  incurred  some  obloquy,  indeed,  on 
the  death  of  the  Prince  of  Wales,  having  dilfered  in 
opinion  from  the  other  physicians,  but  his  conduct  ob- 
tained the  written  approbation  of  the  king  and  council. 
He  was  knighted  in  1624,  and  honoured  with  the  ap- 
pointment of  physician  to  the  two  succeeding  mo- 
narchs;  and  accumulated  a large  fortune  bynis  exten- 
sive practice.  He  died  in  1655,  and  bequeathed  his 
library  to  the  College  of  Physicians.  Several  papers, 
written  by  him,  were  published  after  his  death : among 
which  are  the  cases  of  many  of  his  distinguished 
patients,  well  drawn  up. 

MAYOW,  John,  was  bom  in  Cornwall  in  1645.  He 
studied  at  Oxford,  and  took  a degree  in  civil  law,  but 
afterward  changed  to  medicine,  which  he  practised 
chiefly  at  Bath  ; but  he  died  in  London  at  the  age  of 
34.  These  are  the  only  records  of  the  life  of  a man, 
who  went  before  his  age  in  his  views  of  chemical  phy- 
siology, and  anticipated,  though  obscurely,  some  of  the 
most  remarkable  discoveries  in  pneumatic  chemistry, 
which  have  since  been  made.  He  published  at  Oxford 
in  1669  two  tracts,  one  on  Respiration,  the  other  on 
Rickets ; which  were  reprinted  five  years  after  with 
three  additional  dissertations,  one  on  the  Respiration 
of  the  Foetus  in  Utero  et  Ovo,  another  on  Muscular 
Motion  and  the  Animal  Spirits,  and  the  remaining  one 
on  Saltpetre  and  the  Nitro-agrial  Spirit.  On  this  latter 
his  claim  above-mentioned  chiefly  rests,  the  existence 
of  the  nitro-aiirial  spirit  being  proved  by  many  ingeni- 
ous experiments,  as  a constituent  of  air,  and  of  nitre, 
the  food  of  life  and  flame,  agreeing  with  the  oxygen  of 
modern  chemists.  Much  vague  speculation,  indeed, 
occurs  in  the  work:  but  he  clearly  maintains  that  this 
spirit  is  absorbed  by  the  blood  in  the  lungs,  and  proves 
the  source  of  the  animal  heat,  as  also  of  the  nervous 
energy  and  of  muscular  motion.  He  likewise  antici- 
pated the  mode  of  operating  with  aerial  fluids  in  vessels 
inverted  over  water,  and  transferring  them  from  one 
to  another. 

Mays , Indian.  See  Zea  mays. 

MEAD.  1.  The  name  of  a physician,  Dr.  Richard, 
bom  near  London  in  1673.  After  studying  some  time 
at  Leyden,  and  in  different  parts  of  Italy,  he  graduated 
at  Padua  in  1695.  Then  returning  to  his  native  country, 
he  settled  in  practice,  and  met  with  considerable  suc- 
cess. His  first  publication,  “ A Mechanical  Account  of 
Poisons,”  appeared  in  1702,  and  displayed  much  inge- 
nuity ; though  he  afterward  candidly  retracted  some  of 
his  opinions,  as  inadequate  to  explain  the  functions  of 
a living  body.  He  was  soon  after  elected  a member  of 
the  Royal  Society,  and  in  the  following  year  physician 
to  St.  Thomas’s  Hospital.  In  1704,  he  published  a 
treatise,  maintaining  the  influence  of  the  sun  and  moon 
on  the  human  body,  arguing  from  the  Newtonian  theory 
of  the  tides,  and  the  changes  effected  by  those  bodies 
in  the  atmosphere.  In  1707,  he  received  a diploma 
from  Oxford,  and  about  four  years  after  he  was  ap- 
pointed to  read  the  anatomical  lectures  at  Surgeons’ 
Hall,  which  he  continued  for  some  time  with  great 
applause.  In  1714,  on  the  death  of  his  patron  Dr.  Rad- 
cliffe,  he  took  his  house,  and  being  then  a fellow  of  the 
College  of  Physicians,  and  having  been  called  into 
consultution,  in  the  last  illness  of  Q.ueen  Anne,  when 
he  displayed  superior  judgment,  he  seems  to  have  been 
regarded  among  the  first  of  the  profession,  and  soon 
after,  from  his  extensive  engagements,  resigned  his 
office  at  St.  Thomas’s  Hospital.  The  plague  raging  at 
Marseilles  in  1719,  he  was  officially  consulted  on  the 
means  of  prevention,  which  led  fo  a publication  by  him, 
in  the  following  year,  decidedly  maintaining  its  infec- 
tious nature,  which  had  been  questioned  in  .France,  and 
recommending  suitable  precautions : this  work  passed 
rapidly  through  many  editions.  In  1721,  he  superin- 
tended the  experiment  of  innoculating  the  small-pox 
in  the  persons  of  some  criminals ; and  his  report  being 
favourable,  the  practice  was  rapidly  diffused.  He  was 
soon  after  engaged  in  a controversy  with  Dr.  Middle- 
ton,  concerning  the  condition  of  physicians  among  the 
Romans,  which  was,  however,  carried  on  in  a manner 
honourable  to  both  parties.  About  the  same  period  Dr. 
Freind  having  been  committed  to  the  Tower  for  his 
political  sentiments,  Dr.  Mead  obtained  his  liberation 
in  a spirited  manner,  and  presented  him  a considerable 
sum,  received  from  his  patients  during  his  imprison- 
ment. In  1727,  he  was  appointed  physician  in  ordinary 
to  George  II.  and  his  professional  occupations  became 
so  extensive,  that  he  had  no  leisure  for  writing.  It  was 


not  till  20  years  after,  therefore,  that  he  printed  hia 
treatise  on  Small-pox  and  Measles,  written  in  a pure 
Latin  style,  with  a translation  in  the  same  language  of 
Rhazes’  Commentary  on  the  former  disease.  In  1749, 
he  published  a treatise  on  the  Scurvy,  ascribing  the 
disease  to  moisture  and  putridity,  and  recommending 
Mr.  Sutton’s  ventilator,  which  was,  in  consequence  of 
his  interposition,  received  into  the  navj^  His  “ Medi- 
cina  Sacra,”  appeared  in  the  same  year,  containing 
remarks  on  the  diseases  montioned  in  the  Scripture. 
His  last  work  was  a summary  of  his  experience,  en- 
titled “ Monita  et  Pra:cepla  Medica,”  in  1751;  it  was 
frequently  reprinted,  and  translated  into  English.  His 
life  terminated  in  1754;  and  a monument  was  erected 
to  him  in  Westminster  Abbey.  He  distinguished  him- 
self, not  only  in  his  profession,  but  he  was  the  greatest 
patron  of  science  and  polite  literature  of  his  time ; and 
he  made  an  ample  collection  of  scarce  and  valuable 
books,  manuscripts,  and  literary  curiosities ; to  which 
all  respectable  persons  had  free  access. 

2.  An  old  English  liquor  made  from  the  honey-combs, 
from  which  honey  has  been  drained  out  by  boiling  in 
water,  and  then  fermenting.  This  is  often  confounded 
with  metheglin. 

Meadow  crowfoot.  See  Ranunculus  acris. 

Meadow , queen  of  the.  See  Spiraea  ulmaria. 

Meadow  saffron.  See  Colchicum. 

Meadow  saxifrage.  See  Peucedanum  silaus. 

Meadow  sweet.  See  Spiraea  ulmaria. 

Meadow  thistle , round  leaved.  See  Cnicus  ole- 


1 j four  quarts. 


raceus. 

MEASLES.  See  Rubeola. 

MEASURE.  The  English  measures  of  capacity, 
are  according  to  the  following  table : 

One  gallon,  wine  measure, 
is  equal  to 

One  quart,  - two  pints. 

One  pint,  - 28.875  cubic  inches. 

The  pint  is  subdivided  by  chemists  and  apothecaries 
into  16  ounces 

MEA'TUS.  An  opening  which  leads  to  a canal  or 
duct. 

Meatus  auditorius  externus.  The  external  pas- 
sage of  the  ear  is  lined  with  the  common  integuments, 
under  which  are  a number  of  glands,  which  secrete 
the  wax.  The  use  of  this  duct  is  to  admit  the  sound 
to  the  tympanum,  which  is  at  its  extremity. 

Meatus  auditorius  internus.  The  internal  au- 
ditory passage  is  a small  bony  canal,  beginning  inter- 
nally by  a longitudinal  orifice  at  the  posterior  surface 
of  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  running 
towards  the  vestibulum  and  cochlea,  and  there  being 
divided  into  two  less  cavities  by  an  eminence.  The 
superior  and  smaller  of  these  is  the  orifice  of  the  aque- 
duct of  Fallopius,  which  receives  the  portio  dura  of 
the  auditory  nerve : the  other  inferior  and  larger  cavity 
is  perforated  by  many  small  holes,  through  which  the 
portio  mollis  of  the  auditory  nerve  passes  into  the 
labyrinth. 

Meatus  cjecus.  A passage  in  the  throat  to  the 
ear,  called  Eustachian  tube. 

Meatus  cuticulares.  The  pores  of  the  skin. 

Meatus  cysticus.  The  gall-duct. 

Meatus  urinarius.  In  women,  this  is  situated  in 
the  vagina,  immediately  below  the  symphisis  of  the 
pubes,  and  behind  the  nymphte.  In  men,  it  is  at  the 
end  of  the  glans  penis. 

Mecca  balsam.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

MECHOACAN.  See  Convolvulus  mechoacanna. 

Mechoaca'nna.  (From  Mecheacan , a province  in 
Mexico,  whence  it  is  brought.)  See  Convolvulus  me- 
choacanna. 

Mechoacanna  nigra.  See  Convolvulus  jalapa. 

Me'con.  (From  ur/sos,  bulk:  so  named  from  the 
largeness  of  its  head.)  The  papaver,  or  poppy. 

MECONIC  ACID.  (Acidum  meconicum  ; so  called 
from  ptjKuv,  the  poppy,  from  which  it  is  procured.) 
This  acid  is  a constituent  of  opium.  It  was  discover- 
ed by  Sertuerner,  who  procured  it  in  the  following 
way : After  precipitating  the  morphia , from  a solution 
of  opium,  by  ammonia,  he  added  to  the  residual  fluid 
a solution  of  the  muriate  of  barytes.  A precipitate  is 
in  this  way  formed,  which  is  supposed  to  be  a quadru- 
ple compound  of  barytes,  morphia,  extract,  and  the 
meconic  acid.  The  extract  is  removed  by  alkohol,  and 
the  barytes  by  sulphuric  acid;  when  the  meconic  acid 
is  left,  merely  in  combination  with  a portion  of  the 


MED 


MED 


tnorphia;  and  from  this  it  is  purified  by  successive 
solutions  and  evaporations.  The  acid,  when  sublimed, 
forms  long  colourless  needles ; it  has  a strong  affinity 
for  the  oxide  of  iron,  so  as  to  take  it  from  the  muriatic 
solution,  and  form  with  it  a cherry-red  precipitate.  It 
torms  a crystallizable  salt  with  lime,  which  is  not  de- 
composed by  sulphuric  acid ; and  what  is  curious,  it 
seems  to  possess  no  particular  power  over  the  human 
body,  when  received  into  the  stomach.  The  essential 
salt  of  opium,  obtained  in  Derosne’s  original  experi- 
ments, was  probably  the  meconiate  of  morphia. 

Itobiquet  has  made  a useful  modification  of  the  pro- 
cess for  extracting  meconic  acid.  He  treats  the  opium 
with  magnesia,  to  separate  the  morphia,  while  meco- 
niate of  magnesia  is  also  formed.  The  magnesia  is 
-emoved  by  adding  muriate  of  barytes,  and  the  ba- 
rytes is  afterward  separated  by  dilute  sulphuric  acid. 
A larger  proportion  of  meconic  acid  is  thus  obtained. 

Me'conis.  (From  utjkuv,  the  poppy:  so  called 
because  its  juice  is  soporiferous,  like  the  poppy.)  The 
lettuce. 

MECO'NIUM.  (From  prjwov,  the  poppy.)  1.  The 
inspissated  juice  of  the  poppy.  Opium. 

2.  The  green  excrementitious  substance  that  is  found 
in  the  large  intestines  of  the  foetus. 

MEDIAN.  Medianus.  This  term  is  applied  to 
vessels,  &c.  from  their  situation  between  others. 

Median  nerve.  The  second  branch  of  the  brachial 
plexus. 

Median  vein.  The  situation  of  the  veins  of  the 
arms  is  extremely  different  in  different  individuals. 
When  a branch  proceeds  near  the  bend  of  the  arm, 
inwardly  from  the  basilic  vein,  it  is  termed  the  basilic 
median  ; and  when  a vein  is  given  off  from  the  cepha- 
lic in  the  like  manner,  it  is  termed  the  cephalic  median. 
When  these  two  veins  are  present,  they  mostly  unite 
just  below  the  bend  of  the  arm,  and  the  common  trunk 
proceeds  to  the  cephalic  vein. 

Media'num.  The  Mediastinum. 

MEDIASTl'NUM.  ( Quasi  in  medio  stans , as  being 
in  the  middle.)  The  membraneous  septum,  formed 
by  the  duplicature  of  the  pleura,  that  divides  the  cavity 
of  the  chest  into  two  parts.  It  is  divided  into  an  ante- 
rior and  posterior  portion. 

Mediastinum  cerebri.  The  falciform  process  of 
the  dura  mater. 

ME'DICA.  (Medicus ; from  medico , to  heal.)  1. 
Belonging  to  medicine. 

2.  (From  Media,  its  native  soil.)  A sort  of  trefoil. 

MEDICA'GO.  (So  called  by  Tourneforte;  from 
medica,  which  is  indeed  the  proper  name  of  the  plant — 
prjSiKrj,  of  Dioscorides.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Diadelphia ; 
Order,  Decandria.  The  herb  trefoil. 

MEDIC  AMEN  TA'RI  A.  Pharmacy,  or  the  art  of 
making  and  preparing  medicines. 

MEDICAME'NTUM.  (From  medico , to  heal.)  A 
medicine. 

MEDICA'STER.  A pretender  to  the  knowledge  of 
medicine:  the  same  as  quack. 

MEDICI'NA.  (From  medico , to  heal.)  Medicine. 
1.  The  medical  art:  applied  to  the  profession  generally. 

2.  Any  substance  that  is  exhibited  with  a view  to 
cure  or  allay  the  violence  of  a disease.  It  is  also  very 
frequently  made  use  of  to  express  the  healing  art, 
when  it  comprehends  anatomy,  physiology,  and  pa- 
thology. 

Medicina  di.etetica.  That  department  of  medi- 
cine which  regards  the  regulation  of  regimen,  or  the 
non-naturals. 

Medicina  diasostica.  Thatpart  of  medicine  which 
preserves  health. 

Medicina  oymnastica.  That  part  of  medicine 
which  relates  to  exercise. 

Medicina  hermetica.  The  application  of  chemi- 
cal remedies. 

Medicina  prophylactica  That  part  of  medicine 
which  relates  to  preservation  of  health. 

Medicina  tristitije.  Common  saffron. 

MEDICINAL.  (Medicinalis ; from  medicina.) 
Medicinal,  having  a power  to  restore  health,  or  re- 
move disease. 

Medicinal  days.  Such  days  were  so  called  by 
some  writers,  wherein  the  crisis  or  change  is  expected, 
so  as  to  forbid  the  use  of  medicines,  in  order  to  wait 
nature’s  effort,  and  require  all  the  assistance  of  art  to 
help  forward,  or  prepare  the  humours  for  such  a crisis: 


but  it  is  most  properly  used  for  those  days  wherein 
purging,  or  any  other  evacuation,  is  most  conveniently 
complied  with. 

Medicinal  hours.  Are  those  wherein  it  is  sup- 
posed that  medicines  may  be  taken  to  the  greatest  ad- 
vantage, commonly  reckoned  in  the  morning  fasting, 
about  an  hour  before  dinner,  about  four  hours  after 
dinner,  and  at  going  to  bed ; but  in  acute  cases,  the 
times  are  to  be  governed  by  the  symptoms  and  aggra 
vation  of  the  distemper. 

Medina.  A species  of  ulcer,  mentioned  by  Para- 
celsus. 

MEDINE'NSIS  VENA.  (Mcdinensis ; so  called 
because  it  is  frequent  at  Medina,  and  improperly  called 
vena  for  vermis;  and  sometimes  nervus  medinensis , 
and  no  one  knows  why.)  Dracunculus ; Gordius 
medinensis , of  Linnaeus.  The  muscular  hair  worm. 
A very  singular  animal,  which,  in  some  countries,  in- 
habits the  cellular  membrane  between  the  skin  and 
muscles.  See  Dracunculus. 

MEDITU'LLIUM.  (From  medius , the  middle.) 
See  Diploe. 

Me'dius  venter.  The  middle  venter,  the  thorax, 
or  chest. 

MEDLAR.  See  Mespilus. 

MEDU'LL  A.  ( Quasi  in  medio  ossis.)  1.  The  mar- 
row. See  Marrow. 

2.  The  pith  or  pulp  of  vegetables.  The  centre  or 
heart  of  a vegetable  within  the  wood.  “ This,”  says 
Dr.  E.  Smith,  “in  parts  most  endowed  with  life,  as 
roots  and  young  growing  stems  or  branches,  is  a tole- 
rably firm  juicy  substance,  of  a uniform  texture,  and 
commonly  a pale  green  or  yellowish  colour.  In  many 
annual  stems  the  petal,  abundant  and  very  juicy  while 
they  are  growing,  becomes  little  more  than  a web, 
lining  the  hollow  of  the  complete  stem ; as  in  some 
thistles.  Concerning  the  nature  and  functions  of  this 
part  various  opinions  have  been  held.  Du  Hamel  con- 
sidered it  as  merely  cellular  substance,  connected  with, 
what  is  diffused  through  the  whole  plant,  combining 
its  various  parts,  but  not  performing  any  remarkable 
office  in  the  vegetable  economy.  Linnaeus,  on  the  con- 
trary, thought  it  the  seat  of  life,  and  source  of  vegeta- 
tion ; that  its  vigour  was  the  main  cause  of  the  propul- 
sion of  the  branches,  and  that  the  seeds  were  more 
especially  formed  from  it.  This  latter  hypothesis  is 
not  better  founded  than  his  idea  of  the  pith  adding 
new  layers  to  the  wood.  In  fact,  the  pith  is  soon  ob- 
literated in  the  trunk  of  many  trees;  which,  neverthe- 
less, keep  increasing  for  a long  series  of  years,  by 
layers  of  wood,  added  every  year  from  the  bark, 
even  after  the  heart  of  the  tree  is  become  hollow  from 
decay. 

Some  considerations  have  led  Sir  James  Smith  to 
hold  a medium  opinion  between  these  two  extremes. 
There  is  in  certain  respects,  he  observes,  an  analogy 
between  the  medulla  of  plants  and  the  nervous  system 
of  animals.  It  is  no  less  assiduously  protected  than 
the  spinal  marrow  or  principal  nerve.  It  is  branched 
off  and  diffused  through  the  plant,  as  nerves  are  through 
the  animal;  hence  it  is  not  absurd  to  presume  that  it 
may,  in  like  manner,  give  life  and  vigour  to  the  whole, 
though  by  no  means  any  more  than  nerves,  the  organ 
or  source  of  nourishment. 

It  is  certainly  most  vigorous  and  abundant  in  young 
and  growing  branches,  and  must  be  supposed  to  be  sub- 
servient, in  some  way  or  other,  to  their  increase. 

Mr.  Lindsay,  of  Jamaica,  thought  he  demonstrated 
the  medulla  in  the  leafstalk  of  the  Mimosa  pudica,  or 
sensitive  plant. 

Knight  supposes  the  medulla  may  be  a reservoir  of 
moisture,  to  supply  the  leaves  whenever  an  excess  of 
perspiration  renders  such  assistance  necessary,  but  it 
should  be  recollected  that  all  the  moisture  in  the  me- 
dulla of  a whole  plant  is,  in  some  cases,  too  little  to 
supply  one  hour’s  perspiration  of  a single  leaf,  and  it  is 
not  found  that  the  moisture  of  the  medulla  varies,  let 
the  leaves  be  ever  so  flaccid 

3.  The  white  substance  of  the  brain  is  called  me- 
dulla, or  the  medullary  part,  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
cortical. 

Medulla  cassi.e.  The  pulp  of  the  cassia;  flstularis. 

See  Cassia  fistularis. 

Medulla  oblongata.  Cerebrum  elongatum.  The 
medullary  substance  that  lies  within  the  cranium,  upon 
the  basil! ary  process  of  the  occipital  bone.  It  is  formed 
by  the  connexion  of  the  crura  cerebri  and  crura  cere- 

55 


MEL 


MEL 


belli,  and  terminates  in  the  spinal  marrow.  It  has  se- 
veral eminences,  viz.  pons  varolii,  corpora  pyrami- 
dalia,  and  corpora  olivaria. 

Medulla  spinalis.  Cerebrum  elongatum  JEon.  The 
spinal  marrow.  A continuation  of  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata, which  descends  into  the  specus  vertebralis  from 
the  foramen  magnum  occipitale,  to  the  third  vertebra 
of  the  loins,  where  it  terminates  in  a number  of  nerves, 
which,  from  their  resemblance,  are  called  cauda  equina. 
The  spinal  marrow  is  composed,  like  the  brain,  of  a 
cortical  and  medullary  substance ; the  former  is  placed 
internally.  It  is  covered  by  a continuation  of  the  dura 
mater,  pia  mater,  and  tunica  arachnoidea.  The  use  of 
the  spinal  marrow  is  to  give  off,  through  the  lateral  or 
intervertebral  foramina,  thirty  pairs  of  nerves,  called 
cervical,  dorsal,  lumbar,  and  sacral  nerves. 

MEDULLARY.  (Medullaris ; from  medulla,  mar- 
row.) Like  unto  marrow. 

Medullary  substance.  The  white  or  internal 
substance  of  the  brain  is  so  called.  See  Cerebrum. 

MEDELLIN.  The  name  given  by  Dr.  John  to  the 
porous  pith  of  the  sun-flower. 

MEERSCHAM.  Kessecil  of  Kirwan.  A mineral 
composed  of  silica,  magnesia , lime-water,  and  carbonic 
acid,  of  a yellowish  and  grayish  white  colour,  and 
greasy  feel,  and  soft  when  first  dry.  It  lathers  like 
soap,  and  is  used  by  the  Tartars  for  washing.  In  Tur- 
key they  make  tobacco  pipes  from  meerschaum,  dug  in 
Natolia  and  near  Thebes. 

Megalospla'nohnus.  (From  peyas,  great,  and 
oirhayxvov,  a bowel.)  Having  some  of  the  viscera  en- 
laiged. 

ME'GRIM.  A species  of  headache ; a pain  gene- 
rally affecting  one  side  of  the  head,  towards  the  eye,  or 
temple,  and  arising  from  the  state  of  the  stomach. 

MEIBOMIUS,  Henry,  was  born  at  Lubeckin  1638. 
After  studying  in  different  universities,  he  graduated  at 
Angers,  and  afterward  was  appointed  professor  of  me- 
dicine at  Helmstadt,  where  he  continued  till  his  death 
in  1700.  He  published  several  works,  and  commenta- 
ries on  those  of  others.  That  which  chiefly  illustrates 
his  name  is  entitled  “ De  Vasis  Palpebrarum  novis,” 
printed  in  1666.  He  seems  to  have  contemplated  a 
history  of  medicine,  and  published  a letter  on  the  sub- 
ject, which  indeed  his  father  had  begun ; but  the  diffi- 
culties which  he  met  with  in  investigating  the  medi- 
cine of  the  Arabians,  arrested  his  progress. 

Meibomius’s  glands.  Meibomii  glandules.  The 
small  glands  which  are  situated  between  the  conjunc- 
tive membrane  of  the  eye  and  the  cartilage  of  the  eye- 
lid, first  described  by  Meibomius. 

MEIONITE.  Prismatico-pyramidal  felspar.  This 
mineral  occurs  along  with  ceylanite,  and  nepheline,  in 
granular  limestone,  at  Monte  Somna,  near  Naples. 

MEL.  Honey.  A substance  collected  by  bees  from 
the  nectary  of  flowers,  resembling  sugar  in  its  elemen- 
tary properties.  It  has  a white  or  yellowish  colour,  a 
soft  and  grained  consistence,  and  a saccharine  and 
aromatic  smell.  It  is  supposed  to  consist  of  sugar,  mu- 
cilage, and  an 'acid-  Honey  is  an  excellent  food,  and  a 
softening  and  slightly  aperient  remedy:  mixed  with 
vinegar,  it  forms  oxymel , and  is  used  in  various  forms, 
in  medicine  and  pharmacy.  It  is  particularly  recom- 
mended to  the  asthmatic,  and  those  subject  to  gravel 
complaints,  from  its  detergent  nature.  Founded  upon 
the  popular  opinion  of  honey,  as  a pectoral  remedy,  Dr. 
Hill’s  balsam  of  honey,  a quack  medicine,  was  once  in 
demand ; but  thfs,  besides  honey,  contained  balsam  of 
Tolu,  or  gum  benjamin,  in  solution. 

Mel  acetatum.  See  Oxymel. 

Mel  boracis.  Honey  of  borax. — Take  of  borax, 
powdered,  a drachm ; clarified  honey,  an  ounce.  Mix. 
This  preparation  is  found  very  useful  in  aphthous  affec- 
tions of  the  fauces. 

Mel  despumatum.  Clarified  honey.  Melt  honey 
in  a water  bath,  then  remove  the  scum. 

Mel  ros«.  Rose  honey.— Take  of  red-rose  petals, 
dried,  four  ounces;  boiling  water,  three  pints;  clari- 
fied honey,  five  pounds.  Macerate  the  rose  petals  in  the 
water  for  six  hours,  and  strain ; then  add  the  honey  to 
the  strained  liquor,  and,  by  means  of  a water-bath,  boil 
it  down  to  a proper  consistence.  An  admirable  prepa- 
ration for  the  base  of  various  gargles  and  collutories.  It 
may  also  be  employed  with  advantage,  mixed  with 
extract  of  bark,  or  other  medicines,  for  children  who 
have  a natural  disgust  to  medicines. 

Mel  scill&.  See  Oxymel  sails 
56 


Me'la.  (From  jt taw,  to  search.)  A probe. 

MELAD'NA.  (From  peXas,  black.)  The  black  vomit. 
The  black  disease.  MeXaiva  vovoos,  of  the-  Greeks. 
Hippocrates  applies  this  name  to  two  diseases.  In  the 
first,  the  patient  vomits  black  bile,  which  is  sometimes 
bloody  and  sour ; sometimes  he  throws  up  a thin  sa- 
liva ; and  at  others  a green  bile,  &c.  In  the  second, 
the  patient  is  as  described  in  the  article  Morbus  niger. 
See  Morbus  niger. 

[The  Malaria  which  produces  intermittent,  remittent, 
and  other  fevers,  occasionally  becomes  so  powerful,  or 
produces  such  a corrupted,  or  infected  state  of  the 
atmosphere,  as  to  induce  black  vomiting,  and  yellow 
fevers,  as  was  long  since  noticed  by  Hippocrates. 

“ The  morbus  regius,  or  Icterus,  of  the  first  section 
of  his  Coan  Prognostics,  is  undoubtedly  febrile  yellow- 
ness, and  not  idiopathic  jaundice.  The  epithet  otys, 
acute,  is  repeatedly  applied  by  Hippocrates  to  denote  a 
febrile  jaundice,  which  soon  destroys  life,  in  contradis- 
tinction to  the  other  kinds,  which  are  of  a more  chronic 
type,  and  less  fatal.  The  like  interpretation  is  to  be 
put  upon  the  sixty-third  aphorism  of  the  third  book, 
which  declares  a yellowness  (jxrrpoi)  supervening  in 
fevers,  on  the  seventh,  ninth,  or  fourteenth  day,  to  be 
a good  symptom,  provided  there  is  no  hardness  in 
the  region  of  the  liver.  In  the  sixty-second  aphorism, 
he  clearly  means  to  be  understood  in  the  same  manner, 
when  he  says  that  yellowness  (ik repot  again)  appearing 
in  fevers  before  the  seventh  day,  is  an  unfavourable 
symptom.  A similar  meaning  must  be  intended  in  the 
ninth  section  of  his  book  on  Crises,  where  it  is  laid 
down  as  a maxim,  that 1 in  burning  fevers,  a yellow- 
ness ( iKrepos ) breaking  out  on  the  fifth  day , and  ac- 
companied by  hiccough , is  a fatal  sign.'  (Ev  rotci 
Kavaoitnv  eav  tmycvyrai  ucrcpos  xai  \vfyj  nepnraio)  eovri , 
davaru>6cs  vnoq-potpai  XapBavovrai-) 

Let  this  sentence  be  particularly  considered.  In  the 
whole  catalogue  of  diseases,  there  is  none  but  that 
commonly  called  yellow  fever  to  which  this  aphorism 
can  properly  be  applied.  And  it  would  be  exceedingly 
difficult,  in  so  few  words,  to  give  a more  expressive 
delineation  of  the  disease  in  question.  In  the  third 
section  of  the  same  book,  he  declares  that  yellowness 
appearing  on,  or  after  the  seventh  day,  denotes  a criti- 
cal sweating.  In  contradistinction  to  all  which  is  the 
case  mentioned  in  the  forty-second  aphorism  of  the 
sixth  book,  in  which  it  is  stated,  that  an  indurated  liver 
following  a yellowness,  is  an  unfavourable  occur- 
rence, because  it  is  a case  of  idiopathic  jaundice,  con- 
nected with  a very  morbid  condition  of  that  important 
viscus.  Yellowness,  as  a symptom  of  fever,  is  men- 
tioned in  other  places.  I shall  mention  but  one  more, 
and  that  bears  so  direct  an  application  to  the  subject, 
that  it  is  impossible  to  mistake  its  meaning.  It  is  from 
his  book  De  Ratione  Victus  in  Morbis  aculis.  In  a 
bilious  fever,  yellowness  coming  on  with  shivering  be- 
fore the  seventh  day,  terminates  the  fever ; but  if  it 
come  on  abruptly  (or  unseasonably)  without  shivering, 
it  is  mortal.  (Ev  irvpzTO)  %oAux5a,  7rpo  ttjs  cSSopys,  pc]  a 
f) tycog  ucrcpos  ciuycvopcvos,  Xva  rov  ttvoctov  ; avev  6i 
piyeos  yv  cnycvyjai , eijo)  row  icaipwv,  6\iopiov.) 

It  will  not  appear  strange  that  Hippocrates  should 
have  been  acquainted  with  the  disease  called  yellow 
fever,  if  we  attend  to  the  following  account  of  the 
Phasians,  delivered  in  his  book  on  air , water , and 
situation. 

“ As  to  the  inhabitants  of  Phasis,  their  country  is 
marshy , hot,  watery,  woody,  and  subject  to  many  vio- 
lent showers  at  all  seasons.  They  also  live  in  the 
marshes,  in  houses  or  huts,  built  in  the  water,  of  wood 
and  reeds  ; seldom  walk  to  the  city  or  the  market,  but 
pass  from  place  to  place,  as  they  have  many  canals 
and  ditches,  in  boats  cut  out  of  one  piece  of  timber. 
The  waters  they  drink  are  hot  and  stagnant,  corrupted 
by  the  sun,  and  supplied  by  the  rain.  The  river  Phasis 
itself  is  the  most  stagnant  of  all  rivers,  and  the  stream 
the  gentlest.  The  fruits  they  have  there  never  come  to 
perfection,  but  are  cramped  in  their  growth,  and,  as  it 
were,  effeminated  by  the  vast  quantity  of  water.  The 
air  of  the  country  is  also  thick,  and  misty  from  so 
much  water.  For  these  reasons  the  Phasians  differ  in 
their  appearance  from  other  people ; for  they  are  large 
and  thick  to  a prodigy,  without  any  sign  of  joint  or 
vessel.  Their  colour  is  a pale  yellow  “like  that  in  a 
jaundice.”  T/;v  6c  XP01V71  ^xpyv  cxovoiv,  oxnrep  ivo 
iKTtpov  exopevot. 

Having  found  these  facts  in  the  works  of  the  father 


MEL 


MEL 


of  physic,  I turned  over  his  pages  with  a view  of  find- 
ing whether  he  knew  any  thing  of  black  vomiting.  I 
soon  found  the  phrases  peXaiva  black  bile,  peXava 
eperov,  black  vomit,  and  peXavov  epejov,  the  vomiting 
of  black  matter.  In  the  twelfth  section  of  his  prognos- 
tics, lie  affirms,  that  if  the  matter  vomited  be  of  a livid  or 
black  colour,  it  betokens  ill.  So  in  the  first  section  of 
the  first  book  of  his  Coan  Prognostics , he  enumerates 
black  vomiting  among  a number  of  the  most  desperate 
symptoms.  And  also  in  the  fourth  section  of  the  same 
book,  he  considers  leek-green,  livid,  and  black  vomit- 
ing, as  omens  of  sad  import.  (Et  6rj  eiy  to  evpevpevov 
tt paaoeiSsg,  rj  nr/Xiov,  r/  peXav,  av  rj  rov^eov  tuv  %pw//a 
tu)V,  vopi\uv  x£V  novrjpov  eiTai.)  The  passage  in  the 
eleventh  paragraph  of  the  first  book  of  his  Predictions 
indicates  strongly  the  unfavourable  issue  of  a fever  after 
black  vomiting.  The  connexion  between  black  vomit- 
ing and  death  is  noticed  likewise  in  the  third  paragraph 
of  the  second  section  of  his  Coan  Prognostics.  The 
same  symptom  is  mentioned  in  the  first  paragraph  of 
the  first  section  of  the  same  book.  And  you  will  find 
the  like  to  occur  in  the  fourth  paragraph  of  the  third 
section. 

I have  confined  myself  in  citing  the  works  of  Hip- 
pocrates to  some  of  the  passages  which  contain  pointed 
facts  and  opinions,  relative  to  a yellowness  of  the  skin, 
and  a vomiting  of  dark  or  black  matter  in  fevers.  My 
object  is,  to  show  that  these  are  by  no  means  new 
symptoms : that  they  existed  in  the  days  of  Artaxerxes, 
certainly  among  the  Greeks,  and  probably  among  the 
Persians  ; that  they  had  been  observed  more  than  2000 
years  ago  by  one  of  the  most  careful  of  men  in  the 
southern  parts  of  Europe ; and  of  course,  since  they 
existed  so  long  before  the  voyage  of  Columbus,  there  is 
no  need  of  resorting  to  the  stale  and  delusive  notion 
that  the  fevers  with  these  symptoms  are  of  modern  ex- 
istence, and  imported  solely  from  America.  Unfor- 
tunately, fevers  with  these  accompaniments  were  long, 
long  before,  found  to  prostrate  the  strength  and  shorten 
the  life  of  man.  This  subject  may  be  further  illustrated 
by  recollecting  that  Hippocrates  practised  physic,  for  a 
considerable  portion  of  his  life,  in  parts  of  Greece,  situ- 
ated nearly  in  the  same  parallel  of  latitude  with  those 
in  North  America  where  the  yellow  fever  has  exhibited 
its  greatest  ravages,”  and  where  it  has  always  been  a 
seasonable  and  local  disease  and  not  contagious. — 
J\led.  Repos.  A.] 

Mblaina  nosos.  See  Melasna. 

MELALEU'CA.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  A evKog, 
white : so  named  by  Linnams,  because  the  principal, 
and  indeed  original,  species  was  called  leucadendron , 
and  arbor  alba;  words  synonymous  with  its  appel- 
lation in  the  Malay  tongue,  Caja-puti , or  white  tree, 
but  it  is  not  known  why  the  idea  of  black  was  asso- 
ciated with  white.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order,  Ico- 
sandria. 

Melaleuca  leucadendron.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant  which  is  said  to  afford  the  cajeput  oil. 
Oleum  cajeputtB  ; Oleum  Wittnebianum  ; Oleum  vola- 
tile melaleucce ; Oleum,  cajeput.  Thunberg  says  cajeput 
oil  has  the  appearance  of  inflammable  spirit,  is  of  a 
green  colour,  and  so  completely  volatile,  that  it  evapo- 
rates entirely,  leaving  no  residuum  ; its  odour  is  of  the 
camphoraceouskind,  with  a terebinthiaate  admixture. 
Goetz  says  it  is  limpid,  or  rather  yellowish.  It  is  a 
very  powerful  medicine,  and  in  high  esteem  in  India 
and  Germany,  in  the  character  of  a general  remedy  in 
chronic  and  painful  diseases:  it  is  used  for  the  same 
purposes  for  which  we  employ  the  officinal  adhers,  to 
which  it  seems  to  have  a considerable  affinity  ; the 
cajeput,  however,  is  more  potent  and  pungent ; taken 
into  the  stomach,  in  the  dose  of  five  or  six  drops,  it 
heats  and  stimulates  the  whole  system,  proving,  at  the 
same  time,  a very  certain  diaphoretic,  by  which  pro- 
bably the  good  effects  it  is  said  to  have  in  dropsies  and 
intermittent  fevers,  are  to  be  explained.  For  its  effi- 
cacy in  various  convulsive  and  spasmodic  complaints, 
it  is  highly  esteemed.  It  has  also  been  used  both  in- 
ternally and  externally,  with  much  advantage,  in  se- 
veral other  obstinate  disorders:  as  palsies,  hypochon- 
driacal, and  hysterical  affections,  deafness,  defective 
vision,  toothache,  gout,  rheumatism,  &c.  The  dose  is 
from  two  to  six,  or  even  twelve  drops.  The  tree  which 
affords  this  oil,  by  distillation  of  its  leaves,  generally 
was  supposed  to  be  the  Melaleuca  leucadendron  of 
Linnaeus,  but  it  appears  from  the  specimens  of  the  tree 


producing  the  true  oil,  sent  home  from  India,  by  Chris- 
topher Smith,  that  it  is  anotherspecies,  which  is  there- 
fore named  Melaleuca  cajaputi. 

MELAMEMA.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  aipa , 
blood.)  A term  applied  to  blood  when  it  is  of  a mor- 
bidly dark  colour. 

MELAMPHY'LLUM.  (From  p&Xag,  black,  and 
QvXX ov,  a leaf:  so  named  from  the  blackness  of  its 
leaf.)  See  Acanthus  mollis. 

MELAMPO'DIUM.  (From  Melampus , the  shep- 
herd who  first  used  it.)  Black  hellebore.  See  Hellc- 
borus  niger. 

Melanago'ga.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  aym,  to  ex- 
pel.) Medicines  which  purge  off  black  bile. 

Melanchlo'rus.  MeXayxXwpog.  I.  A livid  colour 
of  the  skin. 

2.  The  black  jaundice. 

MELANCHO  LIA.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  %oA»7, 
bile;  because  the  ancients  supposed  that  it  proceeded 
from  a redundance  of  black  bile.)  Melancholy  mad- 
ness. A disease  in  the  class  Neuroses,  and  order  Ve- 
sanioe , of  Cullen,  characterized  by  erroneous  judg- 
ment, but  not  merely  respecting  health,  from  imaginary 
perceptions,  or  recollection  influencing  the  conduct  and 
depressing  the  mind  with  ill-grounded  fears  ; not  com- 
bined with  either  pyrexia  or  comatose  affections ; often 
appearing  without  dyspepsia,  yet  attended  with  cos- 
tiveness, chiefly  in  persons  of  rigid  fibres  and  torpid  in- 
sensibility. See  Mania. 

MELANITE.  A velvet-black  coloured  mineral  in 
roundish  or  crystallized  grains,  found  in  a rock  at 
Frascate  near  Rome. 

MELANO'MA.  (From  peXag,  black.)  Melanosis. 
A rare  disease  which  is  found  under  the  common  in- 
teguments, and  in  the  viscera,  in  the  form  of  a tuber- 
cle, of  a dark  soot-black  colour. 

MELANO'PIPER.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  ncirepi 
pepper.)  See  Piper  nigrum. 

Melanorrhizon.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  pity,  a 
root.)  A species  of  hellebore  with  black  roots.  See 
Ilelleborus  niger. 

MELANOSIS.  See  Melanoma. 

Melante'ria.  (From  peXag,  black : so  called  be- 
cause it  is  used  for  blacking  leather.)  Green  vitriol,  or 
sulphate  of  iron. 

MELANTHELiE'uM.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  eXaiov, 
oil.)  Oil  expressed  from  the  black  seeds  of  the  Nigella 
sativa. 

Mela'nthium.  (From  peXag,  black:  so  named  from 
its  black  seed.)  The  Nigella  sativa,  or  herb  fennel 
flower. 

ME'LAS.  (From  peXag,  black.)  Vitiligo  nigra; 
Morphce  nigra;  Lepra  maculosa  nigra.  A disease 
that  appears  upon  the  skin  in  black  or  brown  spots, 
which  very  frequently  penetrate  deep,  even  to  the 
bone,  and  do  not  give  any  pain,  or  uneasiness.  It  is  a 
disease  very  frequent  in,  and  endemial  to,  Arabia, 
where  it  is  supposed  to  be  produced  by  a peculiar  mi- 
asma. 

MELA'SMA.  (Prom  peXag,  black.)  Melasmus. 
A disease  that  appears  not  unfrequently  upon  the  tibia 
of  aged  persons,  in  form  of  a livid  black  spot, 
which,  in  a day  or  two,  degenerates  into  a very  foul 
ulcer. 

MELASPE’RMUM.  (From  peXag,  black,  and  <rnep- 
pa , seed.)  See  Nigella  sativa. 

MELASSES.  Treacle.  The  black  empvreumatic 
syrup  which  exists  in  raw  sugar. 

MELASSIC  ACID.  The  acid  present  in  melasses, 
which  has  been  thought  a peculiar  acid  by  some  ; by 
others,  the  acetic. 

Me'lca.  (From  ape Ayw,  to  milk.)  Milk.  A food 
made  of  acidulated  milk. 

Me'le.  (From  pam,  to  search.)  A probe. 

MELEA'GRIS.  (From  Meleager , whose  sisters 
were  fabled  to  have  been  turned  into  this  bird.)  1. 
The  guinea  fowl. 

2.  A species  of  fritillaria:  so  called  because  its 
flowers  are  spotted  like  a guinea-fowl. 

Meleoe'ta.  Grains  of  paradise. 

Mkleguetta.  Grains  of  paradise.  See  Amomum 
granum  paradisi. 

Melei'os.  (From  Melos , the  island  where  it  is 
made.)  A species  of  alum. 

M ELI.  MeAt.  Honey.  See  Mel. 

Meliceria.  See  Meliceris. 

MELI'CERIS.  (From  //{At,  honey,  and  Kepog,  wax.’ 


MEL 


Meliceria.  An  encysted  tumour,  the  contents  of  which 
resemble  honey  in  consistence  and  appearance. 

Meli'craton.  (From  pe\i,  honey,  and  Kepavvvpi, 
to  mix.)  Wine  impregnated  with  honey. 

Meligei'on.  (From  pe\i,  honey.)  A foetid  hu- 
mour, discharged  from  ulcers  attended  with  a caries 
of  the  bone,  of  the  consistence  of  honey. 

MELILOT.  See  Melilotus. 

MELILO'TUS.  (From  psXi,  honey,  and  Xwrof,  the 
lotus : so  called  from  its  smell,  being  like  that  of  ho- 
ney.) See  Trifolium  melilotus  officinalis.  m 

Melime'lum.  (From  psXt,  honey,  and  prj\ov,  an 
apple : so  named  from  its  sweetness.)  Paradise  apple, 
the  produce  of  a dwarf  wild  apple-tree. 

Mkli'num.  (From  peXov,  an  apple.)  Oil  made 
from  the  flowers,  or  the  fruit  of  the  apple-tree. 

MELIPHY'LLUM.  (From  pe\i,  honey,  and  <pv\- 
Xov,  a leaf:  so  called  from  the  sweet  smell  of  its  leaf, 
or  because  bees  gather  honey  from  it.)  See  Melissa. 

MELI'SSA.  (From  peXiooa,  a bee;  because  bees 
gather  honey  from  it.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order, 
Gymnospermia.  Balm. 

Melissa  calamintha.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  calamint.  Calamintha ; Calamintha 
vulgaris;  Calamintha  officinarum;  Melissa— pedun- 
culis  axillaribus , dichotomis , longitudine  foliorum , of 
Linnaeus.  This  plant  smells  strongly  like  wild  mint, 
though  more  agreeable ; and  is  often  used  by  the  com- 
mon people,  in  form  of  tea,  against  weakness  of  the  sto- 
mach, flatulent  colic,  uterine  obstructions,  hysteria,  &c. 

Melissa  citrina.  See  Melissa  officinalis. 

Melissa  grandiflora.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  mountain  calamint.  Calamintha  magno  flore; 
Calamintha  montana.  This  plant  has  a moderately 
pungent  taste,  and  a more  agreeable  aromatic  smell 
than  the  common  calamint,  and  appears  to  be  more 
eligible  as  a stomachic. 

Melissa  nepeta.  Field  calamint.  Spotted  cala- 
mint. Calamintha  anglica ; Calamintha pulegii  odor e ; 
JVepeta  agrestis.  It  was  formerly  used  as  an  aro 
matic. 

Melissa  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
balm.  Citrago;  Citraria:  Melis sophy llum;  Mclli- 
tis ; Cedronella ; Apiastrum ; Melissa  citrina  ; Ero- 
tion.  A native  of  the  southern  parts  of  Europe,  but 
very  common  in  our  gardens.  In  its  recent  state,  it 
has  a roughish  aromatic  taste,  and  a pleasant  smell  of 
the  lemon  kind.  It  was  formerly  much  esteemed  in 
nervous  diseases,  and  very  generally  recommended  in 
melancholic  and  hypochondriacal  affections;  but,  in 
modern  practice,  it  is  only  employed  when  prepared  as 
tea,  as  a grateful  diluent  drink  in  fevers,  &c. 

Melissa  turcica.  See  Dracocephalum  moldavica. 

Melissophy'llum.  (From  pzXioaa,  baum,  and 
<j>v\\ov,  a leaf.)  A species  of  melittis,  with  leaves  re- 
sembling baum.  See  Melittis  melissophyllum. 

Meliti'smus.  (From  prXi,  honey.)  A linctus, 
prepared  with  honey. 

MELI  TTIS.  (From  peXirla,  which,  in  the  Attic 
dialect,  is  the  name  of  a bee ; so  that  this  word  is,  in 
fact,  equivalent  to  Melissa,  and  was  adopted  by  Lin- 
naeus, therefore,  for  the  bastard  balm.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Gym- 
nospermia. Bastard  balm. 

Melittis  melissophyllum.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  mountain  balm,  or  nettle.  Sophyllum. 
This  elegant  plant  is  seldom  used  in  the  present  day  ; 
it  is  said  to  be  of  service  in  uterine  obstructions  and 
calculous  diseases. 

Melitto'ma.  (From  pe\i,  honey.)  A confection 
made  with  honey.  Honey-dew. 

Mklizo'mum.  (From  pe\i,  honey,  and  ^oipos,' Hbroth.) 
Honey-broth.  A drink  prepared  with  honey,  like 
mead. 

Mella'go.  (From  mel,  honey.)  Any  medicine 
which  has  the  consistence  and  sweetness  of  honey. 

MELLATE.  A compound  of  mellitic  acid,  with 
salifiable  bases. 

Melliceris.  See  Meliceris. 

Mellilo'tus.  See  Melilotus. 

Melli'na.  (From  mel , honey.)  Mead.  A sweet 
drink  prepared  with  honey. 

MELLI'TA.  (From  mel , honey.)  Preparations  of 
honey. 

MELLITE.  Mellilite.  Honey-stone.  A mineral 
of  a honey-yellow  colour,  slightly  resino-electric 
58 


MEM 

by  friction,  hitherto  found  only  at  Atern,  in  Thu- 
ringia. 

MELLITIC  ACID.  ( Jlcidum  melliticum ; from 

mellilite , the  honey-stone,  from  which  it  is  obtained.) 
“ Klaproth  discovered  in  the  mellilite,  or  hone-stone, 
what  he  conceives  to  be  a peculiar  acid  of  the  vegeta- 
ble kind,  combined  with  alumina.  This  acid  is  easily 
obtained  by  reducing  the  stone  to  powder,  and  boiling 
it  in  about  seventy  times  its  weight  of  water ; when 
the  acid  will  dissolve,  and  may  be  separated  from  the 
alumina  by  filtration.  Ey  evaporating  the  solution,  it 
may  be  obtained  in  the  form  of  crystals.  The  follow 
ing  are  its  characters : — 

It  crystallizes  in  fine  needles  or  globules  by  the  union 
j>f  these,  or  small  prisms.  Its  taste  is  at  first  a sweet- 
lsli-sour,  which  leaves  a bitterness  behind.  On  a plate 
of  hot  metal  it  is  readily  decomposed,  and  dissipated 
in  copious  gray  fumes,  which  affect  not  the  smell, 
leaving  behind  a small  quantity  of  ashes,  that  do  not 
change  either  red  or  blue  tincture  of  litmus.  Neu- 
tralized by  potassa  it  crystallizes  in  groups  of  long 
prisms : by  soda,  in  cubes,  or  triangular  lamina:,  some- 
times in  groups,  sometimes  single  ; and  by  ammonia, 
in  beautiful  prisms  with  six  planes,  which  soon  lose 
their  transparency,  and  acquire  a silver-white  hue.  If 
the  mellitic  acid  be  dissolved  in  lime-water,  and  a solu- 
tion of  calcined  strontian  or  barytes  be  dropped  into 
it,  a white  precipitate  is  thrown  down,  which  is  redis- 
solved on  adding  muriatic  acid.  With  a solution  of 
acetate  of  barytes,  it  produces  likewise  a white  preci- 
pitate, which  nitric  acid  redissolves.  With  solution 
of  muriate  of  barytes,  it  produces  no  precipitate,  or 
even  cloud ; but,  after  standing  some  time,  fine  trans- 
parent needly  crystals  are  deposited.  The  mellitic 
acid  produces  no  change  in  a solution  of  nitrate  of 
silver.  From  a solution  of  nitrate  of  mercury,  either 
hot  or  cold,  it  throw's  down  a copious  white  precipi- 
tate, which  an  addition  of  nitric  acid  immediately  re- 
dissolves. With  nitrate  of  iron,  it  gives  an  abundant 
precipitate  of  a dun-yellow  colour,  which  may  be  re- 
dissolved by  muriatic  acid.  With  a solution  of  ace- 
tate of  lead,  it  produces  an  abundant  precipitate,  im- 
mediately redissolved  on  adding  nitric  acid.  With 
acetate  of  copper,  it  gives  a grayish-green  precipitate  ; 
but  it  does  not  affect  a solution  of  muriate  of  copper. 
Lime-water,  precipitated  by  it,  is  immediately  redis- 
solved on  adding  nitric  acid.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

ME'LO.  See  Cucumis  melo. 

Meloca'rpus.  (From  prjXov,  an  apple,  and  Kapnos, 
fruit : from  its  resemblance  to  an  apple.)  The  fruit 
of  the  aristolochia,  or  its  roots. 

ME'LOE.  An  insect  called  the  blossom-eater.  A 
genus  of  the  order  Coleoptera.  Some  of  its  species 
were  formerly  used  medicinally. 

Melok  vesicatorius.  See  Cantharis. 

[Meloe  vittata,  or  potato-fly.  See  Cantharides 
vittata.  A.] 

MELON.  See  Cucumis  melo. 

Melon,  musk.  See  Cucumis  melo. 

Melon , water.  See  Cucurbita  citrullus. 

Me'lon.  M77X0V.  A disorder  of  the  eye,  in  which 
the  ball  of  the  eye  is  pressed  forward  from  the  socket. 

MELO'NGENA.  Malainsana.  Solanum  pomife- 
rum.  Mad-apple.  The  Spaniards  and  Italians  eat  it 
in  sauce  and  in  sweetmeats.  The  taste  somewhat 
resembles  citron.  See  Solanum  melongena. 

Melo'sis.  MjyXumf.  A term  which  frequently  oc- 
curs in  Hippocrates,  De  Capitis  Vulneribus,  for  that 
search  into  wounds  which  is  made  by  surgeons  with 
the  probe. 

Melo'tis.  Mauris-  A little  probe,  and  that  par- 
ticular instrument  contrived  to  search  or  cleanse  the 
ear  with,  commonly  called  Auriscalpium. 

MELO'THRIA.  (A  name  borrowed  bv  Linnaeus 
in  his  Hortus  Cliffortianus ; from  the  in/\o)$pov,  of 
Dioscorides.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Triandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Melothria  pendula.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
small  creeping  cucumber  plant.  The  American  bry- 
ony. The  inhabitants  of  the  West  Indies  pickle  the 
berries  of  this  plant,  and  use  them  as  we  do  capers. 

Melyssophyllum.  (From  peXiaaa,  balm,  and  <pv\- 
\ov,  a leaf.)  See  Melittis.  • 

MEMBRANA.  See  Membrane. 

Membrana  hyaloidea.  Membrana  arachnoidea. 
The  transparent  membrane  which  includes  the  vitre- 
ous humour  of  the  eye. 


MEN 


Membrana  pupillaris.  Velum,  pupilla.  A very 
delicate  membrane  of  a thin  and  vascular  texture,  and 
an  ash  colour,  arising  from  the  internal  margin  of  the 
iris,  and  totally  covering  the  pupil  in  the  foetus  before 
the  sixth  month. 

Membrana  ruyschiana.  The  celebrated  anato- 
mist Ruysch  discovered  that  the  choroid  membrane 
of  the  eye  was  composed  of  two  lamina;.  He  gave 
the  name  of  membrana  ruyschiana  to  the  internal 
lamina,  leaving  the  old  name  of  choroides  to  the  ex- 
ternal. 

Membrana  schneideriana.  The  very  vascular 
pituitary  membrane  which  lines  the  nose  and  its  cavi- 
ties ; secretes  the  mucus  of  that  cavity,  and  is  the  bed 
of  the  olfactory  nerves. 

Membrana  tympani.  The  membrane  covering  the 
cavity  of  the  drum  of  the  ear,  and  separating  it  from 
the  meatus  auditorius  externus.  It  is  of  an  oval  form, 
convex  below  the  middle,  towards  the  hollow  of  the 
tympanum,  and  concave  towards  the  meatus  audito- 
rius, and  convex  above  the  meatus,  and  concave  to- 
wards the  hollow  of  the  tympanum.  According  to  the 
observations  of  anatomists,  it  consists  of  six  laminae  ; 
the  first  and  most  external,  is  a production  of  the  epi- 
dermis ; the  second  is  a production  of  the  skm  lining 
the  auditory  passage  ; the  third  is  cellular  membrane, 
in  which  the  vessels  form  an  elegant  net-work ; the 
fourth  is  shining,  thin,  and  transparent,  arising  from 
the  periosteum  of  the  meatus  ; the  fifth  is  cellular  mem- 
brane, with  a plexus  of  vessels  like  the  third ; and  the 
sixth  lamina,  w hich  is  the  innermost,  comes  from  the 
periosteum  of  the  cavity  of  the  tympanum.  This 
membrane,  thus  composed  of  several  lamina;,  has 
lately  been  discovered  to  possess  muscular  fibres. 

MEMBRANACEUS.  Membranaceous:  Applied  to 
leaves,  pods,  &c.  of  a thin  and  pliable  texture,  as  the 
leaf  of  the  Magnolia  purpurea,  and  several  capsules, 
ligaments,  &c. 

MEMBRANOLO'GIA.  (From  membrana , a mem- 
brane, and  Aoyos,  a discourse.)  Membranology.  That 
which  relates  to  the  common  integuments  and  mem- 
branes. 

MEMBRANE.  Membrana.  1.  In  anatomy.  A 
thin  expanded  substance,  composed  of  cellular  texture, 
the  elastic  fibres  of  which  are  so  arranged  and  woven 
together,  as  to  allow  of  great  pliability.  The  mem- 
branes of  the  body  are  various,  as  the  skin,  peritoneum, 
pleura,  dura  mater,  See.  Sec, 

2.  In  botany.  See  Testa. 

MEMBRANO'SUS.  See  Tensor  vagina  femoris. 

Membra' nus.  See  Tensor  vagina  femoris. 

Memo'rij®  os.  See  Occipital  bone. 

MEMORY.  Memoria.  The  brain  is  not  only  capa- 
ble of  perceiving  sensations,  but  it  possesses  the  faculty 
of  reproducing  those  it  has  already  perceived.  This 
cerebral  action  is  called  remembrance,  when  the  ideas 
are  reproduced  which  have  not  been  long  received  : it 
it  is  called  recollection  when  the  ideas  are  of  an 
older  date.  An  old  man  who  recalls  the  events  of  his 
youth,  has  recollection  ; he  who  recalls  the  sensations 
which  he  had  last  year,  has  memory,  or  remembrance. 

Reminiscence  is  an  idea  produced  which  one  does 
not  remember  having  had  before. 

Til  childhood  and  youth,  memory  ;s  very  vivid  as 
well  as  sensibility  : it  is  therefore  at  this  age,  that  the 
greatest  variety  of  knowledge  is  acquired,  particularly 
that  sort  which  does  not  require  much  reflection ; such 
as  history,  languages,  the  descriptive  science,  Sec. 
Memory  afterward  weakens  along  with  age : in  adult 
age  it  diminishes ; in  old  age  it  fails  almost  completely. 
There  are,  however,  individuals  who  preserve  their 
memory  to  a very  advanced  age ; but  if  this  does  not 
flepend  on  great  exercise,  as  happens  with  actors,  it 
exists  often  only  to  the  detriment  of  the  other  intellec- 
tual faculties. 

The  sensations  are  recalled  with  ease  in  proportion 
as  they  are  vivid.  The  remembrance  of  internal  sen- 
sations is  almost  always  confused ; certain  diseases  of 
the  brain  destroy  the  memory  entirely. 

MENACHANITE.  A mineral  of  a grayish  black 
colour,  found  accompanied  with  fine  quartz  sand  in 
the  bed  of  a rivulet,  which  enters  the  valley  of  Manac- 
can,  in  Cornwall. 

MENAGOGUE.  See  Emmenagogue. 

MENDO'SUS.  (From  mendax,  counterfeit.)  This 
term  is  used,  by  some,  in  the  same  sense  as  spurious, 
or  illegitimate ; Mendosa  cosia  false  or  spurious  ribs ; 


MEN 

Mendosa  sutura , the  squamous  suture,  or  bastard 
suture  6f  the  skull. 

MENILITE.  A sub-species  of  indivisible  quartz. 
It  is  of  two  kinds,  the  brown  and  the  gray. 

Meningo'phylax.  (From  prjviyl,  a membrane,  and 
< pvXaaau ;,  to  guard.)  An  instrument  to  guard  the 
membranes  of  the  brain,  while  the  bone  is  cut,  or 
rasped,  after  the  operation  of  the  trepan. 

ME'NINX.  (From  pevw,  to  remain.)  Before  the 
time  of  Galen,  meninx  was  the  common  term  of  all  the 
membranes  of  the  body,  afterward  it  was  appropri- 
ated to  those  of  the  brain.  See  Dura  mater,  and  Pza 
mater. 

MENISPERMIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  menispermievm  ; 
from  menispermum,  the  name  of  the  plant  in  the  ber- 
ries of  which  it  exists.)  The  seeds  of  Menispermum 
cocculus  being  macerated  for  24  hours  in  5 times  their 
weight  of  water,  first  cold,  and  then  boiling  hot,  yield 
an  infusion,  from  which  solution  of  subacetate  of  lead 
throws  down  a menispermate  of  lead.  This  is  to  be 
washed  and  drained,  ditfused  through  water,  and  de- 
composed by  a current  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas. 
The  liquid,  thus  freed  from  lead,  is  to  be  deprived  of 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  by  heat,  and  then  forms  solution 
of  menispermic  acid.  By  repeated  evaporations  and 
solutions  in  alkohol,  it  loses  its  bitter  taste,  and  be- 
comes a purer  acid.  If  occasions  no  precipitate  with 
lime-water ; with  nitrate  of  barytes  it  yields  a gray 
precipitate  ; with  nitrate  of  silver,  a deep  yellow  ; and 
with  sulphate  of  magnesia,  a copious  precipitate. 

MENISPE'RMTJM.  (From  prjvrj,  the  moon,  and 
GTreppa,  seed,  in  allusion  to  the  crescent-like  form,  of 
the  seed.)  Moon-geed.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants.  Class,  Dixcia ; Order,  Dodecandria. 

Menispermum  cocculus.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  plant,  the  berries  of  which  are  well  known  by 
the  name  of  Cocculus  indicus.  Indian  berries,  or  In- 
dian cockles ; Coccus  indicus ; Coccvla  officinarium  ; 
Cocci  orientalcs.  The  berry,  the  produce  of  the  Menis- 
permum—folks  cordatis , retusis,  mucroziatis  ; caule 
lacero,  of  Linnaeus,  is  rugous  and  kidney-shaped,  and 
contains  a white  nucleus.  It  is  brought  from  Malabar 
and  the  East  Indies.  It  is  poisonous  if  swallowed, 
bringing  on  nausea,  fainting,  and  convulsions.  The 
berries  possess  an  inebriating  quality;  and  are  supposed 
to  impart  that  power  to  most  of  the  London  porter. 
While  green,  they  are  used  by  the  Indians  to  catch 
fish,  which  they  have  the  power  of  intoxicating  and 
killing.  In  the  same  manner  they  catch  birds,  making 
the  berry  into  a paste,  forming  it  into  small  seeds,  and 
putting  these  in  places  where  they  frequent.  A pecu- 
liar acid  called  menispermic,  is  obtained  from  these 
berries. 

By  recent  chemical  analysis,  this  seed  is  found  to 
contain,  1st,  about  one-half  of  its  weight  of  a concrete 
fixed  oil ; 2 d,  an  albuminous  vegeto-animal  substance ; 
3 d,  a peculiar  colouring  matter ; 4th,  one-fiftieth  of 
picrotoxia;  5 th,  one-half  its  weight  of  fibrous  matter; 
6th,  bimalate  of  lime  and  potassa;  1th,  sulphate  of 
potassa ; 8th,  muriate  of  potassa ; 9 th,  phosphate  of 
lime ; 10tA,  a littleiron  and  silica.  It  is  poisonous ; and 
is  frequently  employed  to  intoxicate  or  poison  fishes. 
The  deleterious  ingredient  is  the  Picrotoxia. 

The  poisonous  principle  called  picrotoxia,  is  obtained 
in  the  following  way  : “ To  the  filtered  decoction  of 
these  berries,  add  acetate  of  lead,  while  any  precipitate 
falls.  Filter  and  evaporate  the  liquid  cautiously  to 
the  consistence  of  an  extract.  Dissolve  in  alkohol 
of  0.817,  and  evaporate  the  solution  to  dryness.  By 
repeating  the  solutions  and  evaporations,  we  at  last 
obtain  a substance  equally  soluble  in  water  and  alko- 
hol. The  colouring,  matter  may  ne  removed  by  agi- 
tating it  with  a little  water.  Crystals  of  pure  picrotoxia 
now  fall,  which  may  be  washed  with  a little  alkohol. 

The  crystals  are  four-sided  prisms,  of  a white  colour, 
and  intensely  bitter  taste.  They  are  soluble  in  25  times 
their  weight  of  water,  and  are  not  precipitable  by  any 
known  reagent.  Alkohol,  sp.  gr.  0.810,  dissolves  one- 
third  of  its  weight  of  picrotoxia.  Pure  sulphuric  ether 
dissolves  two-fifths  of  its  weight. 

Strong  sulphuric  acid  dissolves  it,  but  not  when 
much  diluted.  Nitric  acid  converts  it  into  oxalic  acid. 
It  dissolves  and  neutralizes  in  acetic  acid,  and  falls 
when  this  is  saturated  with  an  alkali.  It  may,  there- 
fore be  regarded  as  a vegeto-alkali  itself.  Aqueous 
potassa  dissolves  it,  without  evolving  any  smell  of 
ammonia.  It  acts  as  an  intoxicating  poison. 


MEN 


MEN 


Sulphate  of  picrotoxia  must  be  formed  by  dissolving 
picrotoxia  in  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  for  the  strong  acid 
chars  and  destroys  it.  The  solution  crystallizes  on 
cooling.  The  sulphate  of  picrotoxia  dissolves  in  120 
times  its  weight  of  boiling  water.  The  solution  gradu- 
ally lets  fall  the  salt  in  tine  silky  filaments  disposed  in 
bundles,  and  possessed  of  great  beauty. 

Nitrate  of  picrotoxia.  Nitric  acid,  of  the  specific 
gravity  1.38,  diluted  with  twice  its  weight  of  water,  dis- 
solves when  assisted  by  heat,  the  fourth  of  its  weight 
of  picrotoxia.  When  this  solution  is  evaporated  to 
one-half,  it  becomes  viscid,  and  on  cooling  is  converted 
into  a transparent  mass,  similar  to  a solution  of  gum- 
arabic.  In  this  state  the  nitrate  of  picrotoxia  is  acid, 
and  exceedingly  bitter. 

Muriate  of  picrotoxia.  Muriatic  acid,  of  the  specific 
gravity  1.145,  has  little  action  on  picrotoxia.  It  dis- 
solves it  when  assisted  by  heat,  but  does  not  become 
entirely  saturated.  Five  parts  of  this  acid,  diluted  with 
three  times  its  weight  of  water,  dissolve  about  one  part 
of  picro.toxia  at  a strong  boiling  temperature.  The 
liquor,  on  cooling,  is  converted  into  a grayish  crystal- 
line mass,  composed  of  confused  crystals.  When 
these  crystals  are  well  washed,  they  are  almost  desti- 
tute of  taste,  and  feel  elastic  under  the  teeth. 

Acetate  of  picrotoxia.  Acetic  acid  dissolves  picro- 
toxia very  well,  and  may  be  nearly  saturated  with  it 
by  the  assistance  of  a boiling  heat.  On  cooling,  the 
acetate  precipitates  in  well-defined  prismatic  needles. 
This  acetate  is  soluble  in  fifty  times  its  weight  of  boil- 
ing water. 

MENORRHA'GIA.  (From  pr/via,  the  menses,  and 
pijyvvpi,  to  break  out.)  Hamorrhagia  uterina.y  Flood- 
ing. An  immoderate  Row  of  the  menses,  or  uterine 
haemorrhage.  A genus  of  diseases  in  the  class  Pyrexia , 
and  order  Hcemorrhagia , of  Cullen,  characterized  by 
pains  in  the  back,  loins,  and  belly,  similar  to  those  of 
labour,  attended  with  a preternatural  flux  of  blood  from 
the  vagina,  or  a discharge  of  menses,  more  copious 
than  natural.  He  distinguishes  six  species : — 

1.  Menorrhagia  rubra ; bloody,  from  women  neither 
with  child  nor  in  child-birth. 

2.  Menorrhagia  alba,  serous ; the  fluor  albus.  See 
Leucorrhaa. 

3.  Menorrhagia  vitorium,  from  some  local  disease. 

4.  Menorrhagia  lochialis , from  women  after  de- 
livery. See  Lochia. 

5.  Menorrhagia  abortus.  See  Abortion. 

6.  Menorrhagia  nabothi,  when- there  is  a serous  dis- 
charge from  the  vagina  in  pregnant  women. 

This  disease  seldom  occurs  before  the  age  of  puberty, 
and  is  often  an  attendant  on  pregnancy.  It  is  in  gene- 
ral a very  dangerous  disease,  more  particularly  if  it 
occur  at  the  latter  period,  as  it  is  then  often  so  rapid 
and  violent  as  to  destroy  the  female  in  a very  short 
time,  where  proper  means  are  not  soon  adopted. 
Abortions  often  give  rise  to  floodings,  and  at  any 
period  of  pregnancy,  but  more  usually  before  the  fifth 
month  than  at  any  other  time.  Moles,  in  consequence 
of  an  imperfect  conception,  becoming  detached,  often 
give  rise  to  a considerable  degree  of  haemorrhage. 

The  causes  which  most  frequently  give  rise  to  flood- 
ings, are  violent  exertions  of  strength,  sudden  surprises 
and  frights,  violent  fits  of  passion,  great  uneasiness  of 
mind,  uncommon  longings  during  pregnancy,  over  ful- 
ness of  blood,  profuse  evacuations,  general  weakness 
of  the  system,  external  injuries,  as  blows  and  bruises, 
and  the  death  of  the  child,  in  consequence  of  which" 
the  placenta  becomes  partially  or  wholly  detached  from 
the  uterus,  leaving  the  mouths  of  the  vessels  of  the 
latter,  which  anastomosed  with  those  of  the  former, 
perfectly  open.  It  is  necessary  to  distinguish  between 
an  approaching  miscarriage  and  a common  flooding, 
which  may  be  readily  done  by  inquiring  whether  or  not 
the  hemorrhage  has  proceeded  from  any  evident 
cause,  and  whether  it  flows  gently  or  is  accompanied 
with  unusual  pains.  The  former  usually  arises  from 
some  fright,  surprise,  or  accident,  and  does  not  flow 
gently  and  regularly  but  bursts  out  of  a sudden,  and 
again  stops  all  at  once,  and  also  is  attended  with  severe 
pains  in  the  back  and  the  bottom  of  the  belly  ; whereas 
the  latter  is  marked  with  no  such  occurrence.  The 
further  a woman  is  advanced  in  pregnancy,  the  greater 
will  be  the  danger  if  floodings  take  place,  as  the  mouths 
of  the  vessels  are  much  enlarged  during  the  last  stage 
of  pregnancy,  and  of  course  a quantity  will  be  dis- 
charged in  a short  time. 

60 


The  treatment  must  differ  according  to  the  particular 
causes  of  the  disease,  and  according  to  the  different 
states  of  constitution  under  which  it  occurs.  The 
haemorrhage  is  more  frequently  of  the  active  kind,  and 
requires  the  antiphlogistic  plan  to  be  strictly  enforced, 
especially  obviating  the  accumulation  of  heat  in  every 
way,  giving  cold  acidulated  drink,  and  using  cold  local 
applications;  the  patient  must  remain  quiet  in  the 
horizontal  posture ; the  diet  be  of  the  lightest  and  least 
stimulant  description  ; and  the  bowels  kept  freely  open 
by  cooling  laxatives,  as  the  neutral  salts,  &c.  It  may 
be  sometimes  advisable  in  robust,  plethoric  females, 
particularly  in  the  pregnant  state,  to  take  blood  at  an 
early  period,  especially  where  there  is  much  pain  with 
a hard  pulse ; digitalis  and  antimonials  in  nauseating 
doses  would  also  be  proper  under  such  circumstances. 
But  where  the  discharge  is  rather  of  a passive  cha- 
racter, tonic  and  astringent  medicines  ought  to  be 
given : rest  and  the  horizontal  position  are  equally  ne- 
cessary, costiveness  must  be  obviated,  and  cold  astrin- 
gent applications  may  be  materially  useful,  or  the 
escape  of  the  blood  may  be  prevented  mechanically. 
In  alarming  cases,  perhaps  the  most  powerful  internal 
remedy  is  the  superacetate  of  lead,  combined  with 
opium ; which  latter  is  often  indicated  by  the  irritable 
state  of  the  patient.  A nourishing  diet,  with  gentle 
exercise  in  a carriage,  and  the  prudent  use  of  the  cold 
bath,  may  contribute  to  restore  the  patient,  when  the 
discharge  has  subsided. 

Me'nsa.  The  second  lobe  of  the  liver  was  so  called 
by  the  ancients.  svj 

ME'NSES.  (From  mensis,  a month.)  See  Menstru- 
ation. 

Menses , immoderate  flow  of  the.  See  Menor- 
rhagia. 

Menses,  interruption  of.  See  Amenorrhcea. 

Menses,  retention  of.  See  Amenorrhcea. 

Mensis  philosophicus.  A philosophical,  or  chemi 
cal  month.  According  to  some,  it  is  three  days  and 
nights ; others  say  it  is  ten ; and  there  are  who  reckon 
it  to  be  thirty  or  forty  days. 

MENSTRUATION.  ( Menstruatio ; from  menses.) 
From  the  uterus  of  every  healthy  woman  who  is  not 
pregnant,  or  who  does  not  give  suck,  there  is  a discharge 
of  a red  fluid,  at  certain  periods,  from  the  time  of 
puberty  to  the  approach  of  old  age ; and  from  the  periods 
or  returns  of  this  discharge  being  monthly,  it  is  called 
Menstruation.  There  are  several  exceptions  to  this 
definition.  It  is  said  that  some  women  never  men- 
struate ; some  menstruate  while  they  continue  to  give 
suck ; and  others  are  said  to  menstruate  during  preg- 
nancy ; some  are  said  to  menstruate  in  early  infancy, 
and  others  in  old  age ; but  such  discharges,  Dr.  Denman 
is  of  opinion,  may,  with  more  propriety,  be  called 
morbid,  or  symptomatic  ; and  certainly  the  definition 
is  generally  true. 

At  whatever  time  of  life  this  discharge  comes  on,  a 
woman  is  said  to  be  at  puberty : though  of  this  state  it 
is  a consequence,  and  not  a cause.  The  early  or  late 
appearance  of  the  menses  may  depend  upon  the  climate, 
the  constitution,  the  delicacy  or  hardness  of  living,  and 
upon  the  manners  of  those  with  whom  young  women 
converse.  In  Greece,  and  other  hot  countries,  girls 
begin  to  menstruate  at  eight,  nine,  and  ten  years  of 
age ; but,  advancing  to  the  northern  climates,  there  is 
a gradual  protraction  of  the  time  till  we  come  to  Lap- 
land,  where  women  do  not  menstruaie  till  they  arrive 
at  inaturer  age,  and  then  in  small  quantities,  at  long 
intervals,  and  sometimes  only  in  the  summer.  But,  if 
they  do  not  menstruate  according  to  the  genius  of  the 
country,  it  is  said  they  suffer  equal  inconveniences  as 
in  wanner  climates,  where  the  quantity  discharged  is 
much  greater,  and  the  periods  shorter.  In  this  country, 
girls  begin  to  menstruate  from  the  fourteenth  to  the 
eighteenth  year  of  their  age,  and  sometimes  at  a later 
period,  without  any  signs  of  disease;  but  if  they  are 
luxuriously  educated,  sleeping  upon  down  beds,  and 
sitting  in  hot  rooms,  menstruation  usually  commences 
at  a more  early  period. 

Many  changes  in  the  constitution  and  appearance  of 
women  are  produced  at  the  time  of  their  first  beginning 
to  menstruate.  Their  complexion  is  improved,  their 
countenance  is  more  expressive  and  animated,  their 
attitudes  graceful,  and  their  conversation  more  intel- 
ligent and  agreeable ; the  tone  of  their  voice  becomes 
more  harmonious,  their  whole  frame,  but  particularly 
.their  breasts,  are  expanded  and  enlarged,  and  their 


MEN 


MEN 

minds  are  no  longer  engaged  in  childish  pursuits  and 

amusements. 

Some  girls  begin  to  menstruate  without  any  pre- 
ceding indisposition  ; but  there  are  generally  appear- 
ances or  symptoms  which  indicate  the  change  which  is 
about  to  take  place.  These  are  usually  more  severe 
at  the  first  than  in  the  succeeding  periods ; and  they 
are  similar  to  those  produced  by  uterine  irritation  from 
other  causes,  as  pains  in  the  back  and  inferior  extremi- 
ties, complaints  of  the  viscera,  with  various  hysteric 
and  nervous  affections.  These  commence  with  the 
first  disposition  to  menstruate,  and  continue  till  the  dis- 
charge comes  on,  when  they  abate,  or  disappear,  re- 
turning however  with  considerable  violence  in  some 
women,  at  every  period  during  life.  The  quantity  of 
fluid  discharged  at  each  evacuation,  depends  upon  the 
climate,  constitutipn,  and  manner  of  living  ; but  it 
varies  in  different  women  in  the  same  climate,  or  in 
the  same  woman  at  different  periods;  in  this  country 
it  amounts  to  about  five  or  six  ounces. 

There  is  also  a great  difference  in  the  time  required 
for  the  completion  of  each  period  of  menstruation.  In 
some  women  the  discharge  returns  precisely  to  a day, 
or  an  hour,  and  in  others  there  is  avariation  of  several 
days  without  inconvenience.  In  some  it  is  finished  in 
a few  hours,  and  in  others  it  continues  from  one  to  ten 
days  ; but  the  intermediate  time,  from  three  to  six  days, 
is  most  usual. 

There  has  been  an  opinion,  probably  derived  from 
the  Jewish  legislature,  afterward  adopted  by  the  Ara- 
bian physicians,  and  credited  in  other  countries,  that 
the  menstruous  blood  possessed  some  peculiar  malig- 
nant properties.  The  severe  regulations  which  have 
been  made  in  some  countries  for  the  conduct  of  women 
at  the  time  of  menstruation ; the  expression  used,  Isaiah, 
chap.  xxx.  and  in  Ezekiel : the  disposal  of  the  blood 
discharged,  or  of  any  thing  contaminated  with  it ; — 
the  complaints  of  women  attributed  to  its  retention  : — 
and  the  effects  enumerated  by  grave  writers,  indicate 
the  most  dreadful  apprehensions  of  its  baneful  influ- 
ence. Under  peculiar  circumstances  of  health,  or 
states  of  the  uterus,  or  in  hot  climates,  if  the  evacuation 
be  slowly  made,  the  menstruous  blood  may  become 
more  acrimonious  or  offensive  than  the  common  mass, 
or  any  other  secretion  from  it ; but  in  this  country  and 
age  no  malignity  is  suspected,  the  menstruous  woman 
mixes  in  society  as  at  all  other  times,  and  there  is  no 
reason  for  thinking  otherwise  than  that  this  discharge 
is  of  the  most  inoffensive  nature. 

At  the  approach  of  old  age,  women  cease  to  men- 
struate ; but  the  time  of  cessation  is  commonly  regu- 
lated by  the  original  early  or  late  appearance  of  the 
menses.  With  those  who  began  to  menstruate  at  ten 
or  twelve  years  of  age,  the  discharge  will  often  cease 
before  they  arrive  at  forty ; but  if  the  first  appearance 
was  protracted  to  sixteen  or  eighteen  years  of  age, 
independently  of  disease,  such  women  may  continue 
to  menstruate  till  they  have  passed  the  fiftieth,  or  even 
approach  the  sixtieth  year  of  their  age.  But  the  most 
frequent  time  of  the  cessation  of  the  menses  in  this 
country,  is  between  the  forty- fourth  and  forty -eighth 
year  ; after  which  women  never  bear  children.  By 
this  constitutional  regulation  of  the  menses,  the  propa- 
gation of  the  species  is  in  every  country  confined  to 
the  most  vigorous  part  of  life;  and  had  it  been  other- 
wise, children  might  have  become  parents,  and  old 
women  might  have  had  children  when  they  were  unable 
to  supply  them  with  proper  or  sufficient  nourishment. 
See  Catamenia. 

ME'NSTRUUM.  Solvent.  All  liquors  are  so  called 
which  are  used  as  dissolvents,  or  to  extract  the  virtues 
of  ingredients  by  infusion,  decoction,  &c.  The  princi- 
pal menstrua  made  use  of  in  Pharmacy , are  water,  vi- 
nous spirits,  oils,  acid,  and  alkaline  liquors.  Water  is 
the  menstruum,  of  all  salts,  of  vegetable  gums,  and  of 
animal  jellies.  Of  the  first  it  dissolves  only  a deter- 
minate quantity,  though  of  one  kind  of  salt  more  than 
of  another  ; and  being  thus  saturated,  leaves  any  addi- 
tional quantity  of  the  same  salt  untouched.  It  is  ne- 
ver saturated  with  the  two  latter,  but  unites  readily 
with  any  proportion  of  them,  forming,  with  different 
quantities,  liquors  of  different  consistencies.  It  takes 
up  likewise,  when  assisted  by  trituration,  the  vegeta 
ble  gummy  resins,  as  ammoniacum  and  myrrh  ; the  so- 
lutions of.  which,  though  imperfect,  that  is,  not  trails 
parent,  but  turbid  and  of  a milky  hue,  arc  nevertheless 
applicable  to  valuable  purposes  in  medicine.  Rectified 


spirit  of  wine  is  the  menstruum  of  the  essential  oils  and 
resins  of  vegetables;  of  the  pure  distilled  oils  of  ani- 
mals, and  of  soaps,  though  it  does  not  act  upon  the  ex- 
pressed oil,  and  fixed  alkaline  salt,  of  which  soap  is 
composed.  Ileiice,  if  soap  contains  any  superfluous 
quantity  of  either  the  oil  or  salt,  it  may,  by  means  of 
this  menstruum , be  excellently  purified  therefrom.  It 
dissolves,  by  the  assistance  of  heat,  volatile  alkaline 
salts,  and  more  readily  the  neutral  ones,  composed 
either  of  fixed  alkali  and  the  acetic  acid,  as  the  sal  diu- 
reticus,  or  of  volatile  alkali  and  the  nitric  acid.  Oils 
dissolve  vegetable  resins  and  balsams,  wax,  animal 
fats,  mineral  bitumens,  sulphur,  and  certain  metallic 
substances,  particularly  lead.  The  expressed  oils  are, 
for  most  of  these  bodies,  more  powerful  menstrua  than 
those  obtained  by  distillation  ; as  the  former  are  more 
capable  of  sustaining,  without  injury,  a strong  heat, 
which  is,  in  most  cases,  necessary  to  enable  them  to 
act.  All  acids  dissolve  alkaline  salts,  alkaline  earths, 
and  metallic  substances.  The  different  acids  differ 
greatly  in  their  action  upon  these  last:  one  dissolving 
some  particular  metals,  and  another  others.  The  ve- 
getable acids  dissolve  a considerable  quantity  of  zinc, 
iron,  copper,  and  tin  ; and  extract  so  much  from  the  me- 
tallic part  of  antimony  as  to  become  powerfully  emetic; 
they  likewise  dissolve  lead,  if  previously  calcined  by 
fire;  but  more  copiously  if  corroded  by  their  steam. 
The  muriatic  acid  dissolves  zinc,  iron,  and  copper ; and 
though  it  scarcely  acts  on  any  other  metallic  substance 
in  the  common  way  of  making  solutions,  it  may  never- 
theless be  artfully  combined  with  them  all.  The  cor- 
rosive sublimate  and  antimonial  caustic  of  the  shops, 
are  combinations  of  it  with  the  oxides  of  mercury  and 
antimony,  effected  by  applying  the  acid  in  the  form  of 
fume,  to  the  subjects  at  the  same  time  strongly  heated. 
The  nitric  acid  is  the  common  menstruum  of  all  metal- 
lic substances,  except  gold  and  antimony,  which  are  so- 
luble only  in  a mixture  of  the  nitric  and  muriatic.  The 
sulphuric  acid  easily  dissolves  zinc,  iron,  and  copper  ; 
and  may  be  made  to  corrode  or  imperfectly  dissolve 
most  of  the  other  metals.  Alkaline  lixivia  dissolve 
oils,  resinous  substances,  and  sulphur.  Their  power  is 
greatly  promoted  by  the  addition  of  quicklime,  in- 
stances of  which  occur  in  the  preparation  of  soap  and 
in  the  common  caustic.  Thus  assisted,  they  reduce  the 
flesh,  bones,  and  other  solid  parts  of  animals,  into 
a gelatinous  matter.  Solutions  made  in  water  and 
spirit  of  wine,  possess  the  virtue  of  the  body  dissolved1 
while  oils  generally  sheathe  its  activity,  and  acids  and 
alkalies  vary  its  quality.  Hence  watery  and  spirituous 
liquors  arc  the  proper  menstrua  of  the  native  virtues 
of  vegetable  and  animal  matters.  Most  of  the  forego- 
ing solutions  are  easily  effected,  by  pouring  the  men- 
struum on  the  body  to  be  dissolved,  and  suffering  them 
to  stand  together  for  some  time,  exposed  to  a suitable 
warmth.  A strong  heat  is  generally  requisite  to  enable 
oils  and  alkaline  liquors  to  perform  their  office ; nor 
will  acids  act  on  some  metallic  bodies  without  its  as- 
sistance. The  action  of  watery  and  spirituous  men- 
strua is  likewise  expedited  by  a moderate  heat,  though 
the  quantity  which  they  afterward  keep  dissolved,  is 
not,  as  some  suppose,  by  this  means  increased.  All 
that  heat  occasions  these  to  take  up,  more  than  they 
would  do  in  a longer  time  in  the  cold,  will,  when  the 
heat  ceases,  subside  again.  The  action  of  acids  on 
the  bodies  which  they  dissolve,  is  generally  accompa- 
nied with  heat,  effervescence,  and  a copious  discharge 
of  fumes.  The  fumes  which  arise  during  the  dissolu- 
tion of  some  metals,  in  the  sulphuric  acid,  pro've  in- 
flammable ; hence,  in  the  preparation  of  the  artificial 
vitriols  of  iron  and  zinc,  the  operator  ought  to  be  care- 
ful, especially  where  the  solution  is  made  in  a narrow- 
mouthed vessel,  fest,  by  the  imprudent  approach  of  a 
candle,  the  exhaling  vapour  be  set  on  fire.  There  is 
another  species  of  solution  in  which  the  moisture  of  air 
is  the  menstruum.  Fixed  alkaline  salts,  and  those  of 
the  neutral  kind,  composed  of  alkaline  salts  and  cer- 
tain vegetable  acids,  or  of  alkaline  earths,  and  any  acid 
except  the  sulphuric;  and  some  metallic  salts,  on  being 
exposed  for  some  time  to  a moist  air,  gradually  attract 
its  humidity,  and  at  length  become  liquid.  Some  sub- 
stances, not  dissoluble  in  water  in  its  grosser  form,  as 
the  butter  of  antimony,  are  easily  liquefied  by  this  slow 
action  of  the  agrial  moisture.  This  process  is  termed 
Deliquation.  The  cause  of  solution  assigned  by  some 
naturalist:-,  namely,  the  admission  of  the  fine  particles 
of  one  body  into  the  pores  of  another,  whose  figure  fita 

61 


MEN 


MER 


them  for  their  reception,  is  not  just,  or  adequate,  but 
hypothetical  and  ill-presumed ; since  it  is  found  that 
come  bodies  will  dissolve  their  own  quantity  of  others, 
as  water  does  of  Epsom  salt,  alkohol  of  essential  oils, 
mercury  of  metals,  one  metal  of  another,  &c.  w'hereas 
the  sum  of  the  pores  or  vacuities  of  every  body  must 
be  necessarily  less  than  the  body  itself,  and  conse- 
quently those  pores  cannot  receive  a quantity  of  matter 
equal  to  the  body  wherein  they  reside. 

How  a menstruum  can  suspend  bodies  much  heavier 
than  itself,  which  very  often  happens,  may  be  con- 
ceived by  considering,  that  the  parts  of  no  fluids  can  be 
so  easily  separated,  but  they  will  a little  resist  or  retard 
the  descent  of  any  heavy  bodies  through  them;  and 
that  this  resistance  is,  cceteris  paribus , still  proportional 
to  the  surface  of  the  descending  bodies.  But  the  sur- 
faces of  bodies  do  by  no  means  increase  or  decrease 
in  the  same  proportion  as  their  solidities  do : for  the  so- 
lidity increases  as  the  cube,  but  the  surface  only  as  the 
square  of  the  diameter ; wherefore  it  is  plain,  very 
small  bodies  will  have  much  larger  surfaces,  in  propor- 
tion to  their  solid  contents,  than  larger  bodies  will,  and 
consequently,  when  grown  exceeding  small,  may  easily 
be  buoyed  up  in  the  liquor. 

MENTA'GRA.  (From  mentum,  the  chin,  and  aypa, 
a prey.)  An  eruption  about  the  chin,  forming  a tena- 
cious crust,  like  that  on  scald  heads. 

MENTHA.  (From  Mint  he,  the  harlot  who  was 
changed  into  this  herb.)  Hedyosmus  of  the  Greeks. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Gymnospermia.  Mint. 

Mentha,  aquatica.  Mentliastrum ; Sisymbrium 
menthrastrum ; Mentha  rotundifolia  palustris.  Wa- 
termint.  This  plant  is  frequent  in  most  meadows, 
marshes,  and  on  the  banks  of  rivers.  It  is  less  agree- 
able than  the  spearmint,  and  in  taste  bitterer  and  more 
pungent.  It  may  be  used  with  the  same  intentions  as 
the  spearmint,  to  which,  however,  it  is  much  inferior. 

Mentha  cataria.  See  Nepeta  cataria. 

Mentha  cervina.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
hart’s  pennyroyal.  Pulegium  cervinum.  This  plant 
possesses  the  virtues  of  pennyroyal  in  a very  great  de- 
gree ; but  is  remarkably  unpleasant.  It  is  seldom  em- 
ployed but  by  the  country  people,  who  substitute  it  for 
pennyroyal. 

Mentha  crispa.  Colymbifera  minor ; Achillea  age- 
ratum.  This  species  of  mentha  has  a strong  and  fra- 
grant smell,  its  taste  is  warm,  aromatic,  and  slightly 
bitter.  In  flatulence  of  the  prim®  viae,  hypochondri- 
acal and  hysterical  affections,  it  is  given  with  ad- 
vantage. 

Mentha  piperita.  The  systematic  and  pharmaco- 
pceial  name  of  peppermint.  Mentha  piper itis  ; Men- 
tha—floribus  capitatis , foliis  ovatis  petiolatisi,  stami- 
nibus  corolla  brevioribus , of  Linnaeus.  The  sponta- 
neous growth  of  this  plant  is  said  to  be  peculiar  to 
Britain.  It  has  a more  penetrating  smell  than  any  of 
the  other  mints ; a strong  pungent  taste,  glowing  like 
pepper,  sinking,  as  it  were,  into  the  tongue,  and  fol- 
lowed by  a sense  of  coolness.  The  stomachic,  anti- 
spasmodic,  and  carminative  properties  of  peppermint, 
render  it  useful  in  flatulent  colics,  hysterical  affections, 
retchings,  and  other  dyspeptic  symptoms,  acting  as  a 
cordial,  and  often  producing  an  immediate  relief.  Its 
officinal  preparations  are  an  essential  oil,  a simple  wTa- 
ter,  and  a spirit. 

Mentha  piperitis.  See  Mentha  piperita. 

Mentha  pulegium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
pennyroyal.  Pulegium ; Pulegium  regale ; Pulegium 
latifolium  glechon.  Pudding-grass.  Mentha— floribus 
verticillatis,  foliis  ovatis  obtusis  suberenatis , caulibus 
subteretibus  repentibus,  of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  is 
considered  as  a carminative,  stomachic,  and  emme- 
nagogue ; and  is  in  very  common  use  in  hysterical  dis- 
orders. The  officinal  preparations  of  pennyroyal  are, 
a simple  water,  a spirit,  and  an  essential  oil. 

Mentha  saracenica.  See  Tanacetum  balsamila. 

Mentha  sativa.  See  Mentha  viridis. 

Mentha  spicata.  See  Mentha  viridis. 

Mentha  viridis.  Spearmint.  Called  also  Mentha 
vulgaris ; Mentha  spicata;  Mentha — spicis  oblongis, 
foliis  lanceolatis  nudis  serratis  scssilibus , staminibus 
corolla  longioribus , of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  grows 
wild  in  many  parts  of  England.  It  is  not  so  warm  to 
the  taste  as  peppermint,  but  has  a more  agreeable  fla- 
vour, and  is  therefore  preferred  for  culinary  purposes. 
Its  medic  inaT  qualities  are  similar  to  those  of  pepper- 


mint; but  the  different  preparations  of  the  former, 
though  more  pleasant,  are,  perhaps,  less  efficacious. 
The  officinal  preparations  of  spearmint  are  an  essen- 
tial oil,  a conserve,  a simple  water,  and  a spirit. 

Mentha'strum.  (Diminutive  of  mentha.)  See 
Mentha  aquatica. 

Me'nti  levator.  See  Levator  labii  inferioris. 

ME'NTULA.  (From  matah , a staff,  Heb.)  The 
penis. 

Mentula'gra.  (From  mentula , the  penis,  and 
aypa,  a prey.)  A disorder  of  the  penis,  induced  by  a 
contraction  of  the  erectores  musculi,  and  causing  im 
potence. 

MENYA'NTHES.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order, 
Monogynia. 

Menyanthes  trifoliata.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  buck-bean.  Trifolium  paludosum:  Trifolium 
aquaticum ; Trifolium  fibrinum;  Menyanthes.  Wa- 
ter trefoil,  or  buck-bean.  Menyanthes— foliis  tematis , 
of  Linnaeus.  The  whole  plant  is  so  extremely  bitter, 
that  in  some  countries  it  is  used  as  a substitute  for 
hops,  in  the  preparation  of  malt  liquor.  It  is  some- 
times employed  in  country  places  as  an  active  eccopro- 
tic  bitter  in  hydropic  and  rheumatic  affections.  Cases 
are  related  of  its  good  effects  in  some  cutaneous  dis- 
eases of  the  herpetic  and  seemingly  cancerous  kind. 

MEPHITIC.  Having  a disagreeable  noxious  smell 
or  vapour. 

Mephitic  acid.  The  carbonic  acid. 

Mephitic  air.  See  Nitrogen. 

MEPHl'TIS.  (From  mephuhith , a blast,  Syr.)  A 
poisonous  exhalation. 

MERCURIALI,  Girolamo,  was  born  at  Torli,  in 
Romagna,  in  1530.  After  taking  the  requisite  degrees, 
he  settled  as  a physician  in  his  native  town ; and  was 
delegated,  at  the  age  of  32,  on  some  public  business  to 
Pope  Pius  IV.  at  Rome.  He  evinced  so  much  talent 
on  this  occasion,  that  he  was  particularly  invited  to 
remain  there ; which  he  accepted,  chiefly  as  it  enabled 
him  to  pursue  his  favourite  studies  to  more  advantage. 
He  produced,  in  1569,  a learned  and  elegant  work, 
“ De  Arte  Gymnastica,”  which  was  many  times  re- 
printed ; and  the  reputation  of  this  procured  him  the 
appointment  to  the  first  medical  chair  at  Padua.  In 
1573,  he  was  called  to  Vienna  to  attend  the  emperor 
Maximilian  II.,  and  was  so  successful,  that  he  returned 
loaded  with  valuable  presents,  and  honoured  with  the 
dignities  of  a knight  and  count  palatine.  In  1587,  he 
removed  to  Bologna,  which  is  ascribed  to  a degree  of 
self-accusation,  in  consequence  of  an  error  of  judg- 
ment, into  which  he  had  been  led,  in  pronouncing  a 
disease,  about  which  he  was  consulted  at  Venice,  not 
contagious,  whence  much  mischief  had  arisen.  His 
reputation,  hpwever,  doe9  not  appear  to  have  materi- 
ally suffered  from  this;  and  he  was  invited,  in  1599,  by 
the  grand  duke  of  Tuscany,  to  Pisa;  but  shortly  after, 
a severe  calculous  affection  prevented  the  execution  of 
his  duties,  and  he  retired  to  his  native  place,  where  his 
death  happened  in  1606.  He  was  a voluminous  writer, 
and,  among  many  other  publications,  edited  a classified 
collection  of  the  works  of  Hippocrates,  with  a learned 
commentary  ; but  he  was  too  much  bigoted  to  ancient 
authority  and  hypothesis.  He  wrote  on  the  diseases  of 
the  skin,  those  peculiar  to  women  and  children,  on 
poisons,  and  several  other  subjects. 

MERCURIA'LIS.  (From  Mercurius , its  disco- 
verer.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Diaecia  ; Order,  Enneandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  French  mercury. 
See  Mercurialis  annua. 

Mercurlalis  annua.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
French  mercury.  The  leaves  of  this  plant  have  no 
remarkable  smell,  and  very  little  taste.  It  is  ranked 
among  the  emollient  oleraceous  herbs,  and  is  said  to 
be  gently  aperient.  Its  principal  use  has  been  in 
clysters.  ' 

Mercurialis  Montana.  See  Mercurialis  perennis. 

Mercurialis  terennis.  The  systematic  name  of 
dog’s  mercury.  Cynocrambe ; Mercurialis  montana 
sylvestris.  A poisonous  plant,  very  common  in  our 
hedges.  It  produces  vomiting  and  purging,  and  the 
person  then  goes  to  sleep,  from  which  he  does  not 
often  awake. 

Mercurialis  sylvestris.  See  Mercurialis  pe- 
rennis. 


MER 


MER 


MERCURIUS.  (So  called  from  some  supposed 
•elation  it  bears  to  the  planet  of  that  name.)  Mercury. 
See  Mercury. 

Mkrcurius  acetatus.  See  Hydrargyrus  acetatus. 

Mkrctjrius  alkalizatus.  See  Hydrargyrum  cum 
creta. 

Mercurius  calcinatus.  See  Hydrargyri  oxydum 
rubrum. 

Mercurius  chemicorum.  Quicksilver. 

Mercurius  cinnabarinus.  See  Sulphuretum  hy- 
drargyri rubrum. 

Mercurius  corrosivus.  See  Hydrargyri  oxy- 
murias. 

Mercurius  corrosivus  ruber.  See  Hydrargyri 
nitrico-oxydum. 

Mercurius  corrosivus  sublimatus.  See  Hy- 
drargyri oxyxnurias. 

Mercurius  dulcis  sublimatus.  See  Hyrdargyri 
submurias. 

Mercurius  emeticus  flavus.  See  Hydrargyrus 
vitriolatus. 

Mercurius  mortis.  See  Mercurius  vitce. 

Mercurius  pr.®cipitatus  albus.  See  Hydrargy- 
rum prmcipitatum  album. 

Mercurius  pr^ecifitatus  dulcis.  See  Hydrar- 
gyri submurias. 

Mercurius  pr^cipitatus  ruber.  See  Hydrar- 
gyri nitrico-oxydum. 

MERCURY.  Hydrargyrum ; Hydrargyrus  ; Mer- 
curius. A metal  found  in  five  different  states  in  na- 
ture. 1.  Native,  ( native  mercury ,)  adhering  in  small 
globules  to  the  surface  of  cinnabar  ores,  or  scattered 
through  the  crevices,  or  over  the  surfaces  of  different 
kinds  of  stones.  2.  It  is  found  united  to  silver,  in  the 
ore  called  amalgam  of  silver , or  native  amalgam  of 
silver.  This  ore  exhibits  thin  places,  or  grains;  it 
sometimes  crystallizes  in  cubes,  parallelopipeda,  or 
pyramids.  Its  colour  is  of  a silver  white,  or  gray  ; its 
lustre  is  considerably  metallic.  3.  Combined  with  sul- 
phur, it  constitutes  native  cinnabar , or  sulpliuret  of 
mercury.  This  ore  is  the  most  common.  It  is  fre- 
quently found  in  veins,  and  sometimes  crystallized  in 
tetrahedra,  or  three-sided  pyramids.  Its  colour  is  red. 
Its  streak  metallic.  4.  Mercury  oxidized,  and  united 
either  to  muriatic  or  sulphuric  acid,  forms  the  ore 
called  horn  quicksilver , or  corneous  mercury.  These 
ores  are,  in  general,  semi-transparent,  of  a gray  or 
white  colour,  sometimes  crystallized,  but  more  fre- 
quently in  grains.  5.  United  to  oxygen,  it  constitutes 
the  ore  called  native  oxide  of  mercury.  Mercurial  ores 
particularly  abound  in  Spain,  Hungary,  China,  and 
South  America. 

Properties. — Mercury,  or  quicksilver,  is  the  only  one 
of  the  metals  that  remains  fluid  at  the  ordinary  tem- 
perature of  the  atmosphere,  but  when  its  temperature 
is  reduced  to  — 40  degrees  below  0 on  Fahrenheit’s  ther- 
mometer; it  assumes  a solid  form.  This  is  a degree 
of  cold,  however,  that  only  occurs  in  high  northern 
latitudes,  and,  in  our  climate,  mercury  cannot  be  ex- 
hibited in  a solid  state,  but  by  means  of  artificial  cold. 
When  rendered  solid,  it  possesses  both  ductility  and 
malleability.  It  crystallizes  in  octahedra,  and  con- 
tracts strongly  during  congelation.  It  is  divisible  into 
very  small  globules.  It  presents  a convex  appearance 
in  vessels  to  which  it  has  little  attraction,  but  is  con- 
cave in  those  to  which  it  more  strongly  adheres.  It 
becomes  electric  and  phosphorescent  by  rubbing  upon 
glass,  and  by  agitation  in  a vacuum.  It  is  a very  good 
conductor  of  caloric,  of  electricity,  and  of  galvanism. 
The  specific  gravity  of  mercury  is  13.563.  Although 
fluid,  its  opacity  is  equal  to  that  of  any  other  metal, 
and  its  surface,  when  clean,  has  considerable  lustre. 
Its  colour  is  white,  similar  to  silver.  Exposed  to  the 
temperature  of  somewhat  above  600°  Fah.  it  is  vola- 
tilized. When  agitated  in  the  air,  especially  in  contact 
with  viscous  fluids,  it  becomes  converted  into  a black 
oxide.  At  a temperature  nearly  the  same  as  that  at 
which  it  boils,  it  absorbs  about  14  or  15  per  cent,  of 
oxygen,  and  then  becomes  changed  into  a red  crystal  - 
lizable  oxide,  which  is  spontaneously  reducible  by  light 
and  caloric  at  a higher  temperature.  The  greater 
number  of  the  acids  act  upon  mercury,  or  are  at  least 
capable  of  combining  with  its  oxides.  It  combines 
with  sulphur  by  trituration,  but  more  intimately  by 
heat.  It  is  acted  on  by  the  alkaline  sulphurels.  It 
combines  with  many  of  the  metals;  these  compounds 
are  brittle,  or  soft,  when  the  mercury  is  in  large  pro- 


portion. There  is  a slight  union  between  mercury 
and  phosphorus.  It  does  not  unite  with  carbon,  or  the 
earths. 

Method  of  obtaining  Mercury. — Mercury  may  be  ob- 
tained pure  by  decomposing  cinnabar,  by  means  of 
iron  filings.  For  that  purpose,  take  two  parts  of  red 
sulphuret-of  mercury  (cinnabar),  reduce  it  to  powder, 
and  mix  it  with  one  of  iron  filings,  put  the  mixture 
into  a stone  retort,  direct  the  neck  of  it  into  a bottle, 
or  receiver,  filled  with  water,  and  apply  heat.  The 
mercury  will  then  be  obtained  in  a state  of  purity. 

In  this  process,  the  sulphuret  of  mercury,  which 
consists  of  sulphur  and  mercury,  is  heated  in  contact 
with  iron,  the  sulphur  quits  the  mercury  and  unites 
to  the  iron,  and  the  mercury  becomes  disengaged ; the 
residue  in  the  retort  is  a sulphuret  of  iron. 

Mercury  is  a very  useful  article  both  in  the  cure  of 
diseases  and  the  arts.  There  is  scarcely  a disease 
against  which  some  of  its  preparations  are  not  exhi- 
bited; and  over  the  venereal  disease  it  possesses  a 
specific  power.  It  is  considered  to  have  first  gained 
repute  in  curing  this  disease,  from  the  good  effects  it 
produced  in  eruptive  diseases.  In  the  times  immedi- 
ately following  the  venereal  disease,  practitioners  only 
attempted  to  employ  this  remedy  with  timorous  cau- 
tion, so  that,  of  several  of  their  formulae,  mercury 
scarcely  composed  a fourth  part,  and  few  cures  were 
effected.  On  the  other  hand,  empirics  who  noticed 
the  little  efficacy  of  these  small  doses,  ran  into  the 
opposite  extreme,  and  exhibited  mercury  in  such  large 
quantities,  and  with  such  little  care,  that  most  of  their 
patients  became  suddenly  attacked  with  the  most  vio- 
lent salivations,  attended  with  dangerous  consequences. 
From  these  two  very  opposite  modes  of  practice,  there 
originated  such  uncertainty  respecting  what  could  be 
expected  from  mercury,  and  such  fears  of  the  conse- 
quences which  might  result  from  its  employment,  that 
every  plan  was  eagerly  adopted  which  offered  the  least 
chancfe  of  cure  without  having  recourse  to  this  mi- 
neral. A medicine,  however,  so  powerful,  and  whose 
salutary  effects  were  seen  by  attentive  practitioners, 
amid  all  its  inconveniences,  could  not  sink  into 
oblivion.  After  efforts  had  been  made  to  discover  a 
substitute  for  it,  and  it  was  seen  how  little  confidence 
those  means  deserved  on  which  the  highest  praises 
had  been  lavished,  the  attempts  to  discover  its  utility 
were  renewed.  A medium  was  pursued,  between  the 
too  timid  methods  of  those  physicians  who  had  first 
administered  it,  and  the  inconsiderate  boldness  of  the 
empirics.  Thus  the  causes  from  which  both  parties 
failed  were  avoided;  the  character  of  the  medicine 
was  revived  in  a more  durable  way,  and  from  this 
period  its  reputation  has  always  been  maintained. 

It  was  about  this  epoch  that  mercury  began  to  be  in- 
ternally given : hitherto  it  had  only  been  externally 
employed,  which  was  done  in  three  manners.  The 
first,  was  in  the  form  of  liniment,  or  ointment ; the 
second,  as  a plaster ; and  the  third,  as  a fumigation. 
Of  the  three  methods  just  described,  only  the  first  is  at 
present  much  in  use,  and  even  this  is  very  much  alter- 
ed. Mercurial  plasters  are  now  only  used  as  topical 
discutient  applications  to  tumours  and  indurations. 
Fumigations,  as  anciently  managed,  were  liable  to 
many  objections,  particularly  from  its  not  being  possi- 
ble to  regulate  the  quantity  of  mercury  to  be  used,  and 
from  the  effect  of  the  vapour  on  the  organs  of  respira- 
tion frequently  occasioning  trembling,  palsies,  &c. 
Frictions  with  ointment  have  always  been  regarded 
as  the  most  efficacious  mode  of  administering  mercury. 

Mercury  is  carried  into  the  constitution  in  the  same 
way  as  other  substances,  either  by  being  absorbed  from 
the  surface  of  the  body,  or  that  of  the  alimentary 
canal.  It  cannot,  however,  in  all  cases,  be  taken  into 
the  constitution  in  both  ways,  for  sometimes  the  ab- 
sorbents of  the  skin  will  not  readily  receive  it;  at 
least  no  effect  is  produced,  either  on  the  disease  or 
constitution,  from  this  mode  of  application.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  internal  absorbents  will,  sometimes, 
not  take  up  the  medicine,  or,  at  least,  no  effect  is  pro- 
duced either  on  the  disease  or  constitution.  In  many 
persons,  the  bowels  can  hardly  bear  mercury  at  all ; 
and  it  should  then  be  given  in  the  mildest  form  possi- 
ble, conjoined  with  such  medicines  as  will  lessen  or 
correct  its  violent  effects,  although  not  its  specific  ones, 
on  the  constitution.  When  mercury  can  be  thrown 
into  the  constitution  with  propriety,  by  the  external 
method,  it  is  preferable  to  the  internal  plan  ; because 


MER 


MER 


the  skin  is  not  nearly  so  essential  to  life  as  the  stomach, 
and  is  therefore  in  itself  capable  of  bearing  much  more 
than  the  stomach.  The  constitution  is  also  less  in- 
jured. Many  courses  of  mercury  would  kill  the  patient 
if  the  medicine  were  only  given  internally,  because  it 
proves  hurtful  to  the  stomach  and  intestines,  when 
given  in  any  form,  or  joined  with  the  greatest  cor- 
rectors. 

Mercury  has  two  effects : one  as  a stimulus  on  the 
constitution  and  particular  parts,  the  other  as  a specific 
on  a diseased  action  of  the  whole  body,  or  of  parts. 
The  latter  action  can  only  be  computed  by  the  disease 
disappearing. 

In  giving  mercury  in  the  venereal  disease,  the  first 
attention  should  be  to  the  quantity,  and  its  visible  effects 
in  a given  time;  which,  when  brought  to  a proper  pitch, 
are  only  to  be  kept  up,  and  the  decline  of  the  disease 
to  be  watched  ; for  by  this  we  judge  of  the  invisible 
or  specific  effects  of  the  medicine,  and  know  what  va- 
riation in  the  quantity  may  be  necessary.  The  visible 
effects  of  mercury  affect  either  the  whole  constitution, 
or  some  parts  capable  of  secretion.  In  the  first,  it  pro- 
duces universal  irritability,  making  it  more  susceptible 
of  all  impressions.  It  quickens  the  pulse,  increases  its 
hardness,  and  occasions  a kind  of  temporary  fever. 
In  some  constitutions  it  operates  like  a poison.  In 
some  it  produces  a hectic  fever ; but  such  effects  com- 
monly diminish  on  the  patient  becoming  accustomed 
to  the  medicine. 

Mercury  often  produces  pains  like  those  of  rheuma- 
tism, and  nodes  of  a scrofulous  nature.  The  quantity 
of  mercury  to  be  thrown  in  for  the  cure  of  any  vene- 
real complaint,  must  be  proportioned  to  the  violence 
of  the  disease.  A small  quantity  used  quickly,  will 
have  equal  effects  to  those  of  a large  one  employed 
slowly  ; but  if  these  effects  are  merely  local,  that  is, 
upon  the  glands  of  the  mouth,  the  constitution  at  large 
not  being  equally  stimulated,  the  effects  upon  tire  dis- 
eased parts  must  be  less,  which  may  be  known  by  the 
local  disease  not  giving  way  in  proportion  to  the  effects 
of  mercury  on  some  particular  part.  If  it  be  given  in 
very  small  quantities,  and  increased  gradually,  so  as  to 
steal  insensibly  on  the  constitution,  a vast  quantity  at 
a time  may  at  length  be  thrown  in,  without  any  visible 
effects  at  all. 

The  constitution,  or  parts,  are  more  susceptible  of 
mercury  at  first  than  afterward. 

Mercury  occasionally  attacks  the  bowels,  and  causes 
violent  purging,  even  of  blood.  This  effect  is  remedied 
by  intermitting  the  use  of  the  medicine,  and  exhibiting 
opium.  At  other  times,  it  is  suddenly  determined  to 
the  mouth,  and  produces  inflammation,  ulceration,  and 
an  excessive  flow  of  saliva.  To  obtain  relief  in  this 
circumstance,  purgatives,  nitre,  sulphur,  gum-arabic, 
lime-water,  camphor,  bark,  sulphuret  of  potassa,  blis- 
ters, &c.  have  been  advised.  Pearson,  however,  does 
not  place  much  confidence  in  the  efficacy  of  such 
means ; and,  the  mercury  being  discontinued  for  a 
time,  he  recommends  the  patient  to  be  freely  exposed 
to  cold  air,  with  the  occasional  use  of  cathartics, 
mineral  acids,  Peruvian  bark,  and  the  assiduous  appli- 
cation of  astringent  gargles.  The  most  material  ob- 
jection (says  Pearson)  which  I foresee  against  the 
method  of  treatment  I have  recommended,  is  the 
hazard  to  which  the  patient  will  be  exposed  of  having 
the  saliva  suddenly  checked,  and  of  suffering  some 
other  disease  in  consequence  of  it. 

The  hasty  suppression  of  a ptyalism  may  be  followed 
by  serious  inconveniences,  as  violent  pains,  vomiting, 
and  general  convulsions. 

Cold  liquids  taken  into  the  stomach,  or  exposure  of 
the  body  to  the  cold  air,  must  be  guarded  against  during 
a course  of  mercury.  Should  a suppression  of  the 
ptyalism  take  place,  from  any  act  of  indiscretion,  a 
quick  introduction  of  mercury  should  be  had  recourse 
to,  with  the  occasional  use  of  the  warm  bath. 

Mercury,  when  it  falls  on  the  mouth,  sometimes 
produces  inflammation,  which  now  and  then  termi- 
nates in  mortification.  The  ordinary  operation  of 
mercury  does  not  permanently  injure  the  constitution  ; 
but,  occasionally,  the  impairment  is  very  material ; 
mercury  may  even  produce  local  diseases,  and  retard 
the  cure  of  chancres,  buboes,  and  certain  effects  of  the 
lqes  venerea,  after  the  poison  has  been  destroyed.  Oc- 
casionally mercury  acts  on  the  system  as  a poison, 
quite  unconnected  with  its  agency  as  a remedy,  and 
neither  proportionate  to  the  inflammation  of  the  mouth 


nor  actual  quantity  of  the  mineral  absorbed.  Pearson 
has  termed  this  morbid  state  of  the  system  erethismus  ; 
it  is  characterized  by  great  depression  of  strength,  a 
sense  of  anxiety  about  the  praecordia,  irregular  action 
of  the  heart,  frequent  sighing,  trembling,  a small,  quick, 
and  sometimes  intermitting  pulse,  occasional  vomit- 
ing, a pale  contracted  countenance,  a sense  of  cold- 
ness ; but  the  tongue  is  seldom  furred,  and  neither  the 
natural  nor  vital  functions  are  much  disturbed . When 
this  effect  of  mercury  takes  place,  the  use  of  mercury 
should  be  discontinued,  whatever  may  be  the  stage, 
extent,  or  violence  of  the  venereal  disease.  The  pa- 
tient should  be  exposed  to  a dry  and  cool  air,  in  such  a 
way  as  not  to  give  fatigue ; in  this  way,  the  patient  will 
often  recover  in  ten  or  fourteen  days.  In  the  early 
stage,  th&  erethismus  may  often  be  averted  by  leaving 
oft'  the  mercury,  and  gi  ving  camphor  mixture  with  vola- 
tile alkali.  Occasionally,  the  use  of  mercury  brings 
on  a peculiar  eruption,  which  has  received  the  names 
of  mercurial  rash,  eczema  mercuriale,  lepra  mercuri- 
alis,  mercurial  disease,  and  erythema  mercuriale. 

In  order  that  mercury  should  act  on  the  human  body, 
it  is  necessary  that  it  should  be  oxidised,  or  combined 
with  an  acid.  The  mercury  contained  in  the  unguen- 
tum  hydrargyri,  is  an  oxide.  This,  however,  is  the 
most  simple  and  least  combined  form  of  all  its  prepara- 
tions, and  hence  (says  Mr.  S.  Cooper),  it  not  only  ope- 
rates with  more  mildness  on  the  system,  but  with  more 
specific  effect  on  the  disease.  Various  salts  of  mercury 
operate  more  quickly  when  given  internally  than  mer- 
curial frictions ; but  few  practitioners  of  the  present 
day  confide  in  the  internal  use  of  mercury  alpne ; 
particularly  when  the  venereal  virus  has  produced 
efleots  in  consequence  of  absorption.  Rubbing  in  mer- 
curial ointment  is  the  mode  of  affecting  the  system 
with  mercury  in  the  present  day ; and,  as  a substitute 
for  this  mode  of  applying  mercury,  Mr.  Abernethy  re- 
commends the  mercurial  fumigation,  where  the  patient 
has  not  strength  to  rub  in  ointment,  and  whose  bowels 
will  not  bear  the  internal  exhibition  of  it. 

The  preparations  of  mercury  now  in  use  are, 

1.  Nitrico-oxydum  hydrargyri. 

2.  Oxydum  hydrargyri  cinereum. 

3.  Oxydum  hydrargyri  rubrum. 

4.  Oxy-murias  hydrargyri. 

5.  Submurias  hydrargyri. 

6.  Sulphuretum  hydrargyri  rubrum  et  nigrum. 

7.  Hydrargyrum  cum  creta. 

8.  Hydrargyrum  precipitatum  album. 

9.  Hydrargyrum  purificatum. 

Mercury , dog's.  See  Mcrcurialis. 

Mercury , English.  See  Chenopodium  bonus  henricus 

Mercury , French.  See  Mercurialis. 

Meroba'lanum.  (From  pepos,  a part,  and  /JaAcn/aov, 
a bath.)  A partial  bath. 

MEROCE'LE.  (From  pcpoj,  the  thigh,  and  UTj'Xt),  a 
tumour.)  A femoral  hernia.  See  Hernia. 

Me'ron.  M?7pof.  The  thigh. 

MERRET,  Christopher,  was  bora  atWinchcombe 
in  1614.  After  graduating  at  Oxford,  he  settled  in 
London,  became  a fellow  of  the  College  of  Physicians, 
and  one  of  the  original  members  of  the  Philosophical 
Society,  which,  after  the  Restoration,  was  called  the 
Royal  Society.  He  appears  to  have  had  a considerable 
practice,  and  reached  his  81st  year.  His  first  publica- 
tion was  a Collection  of  Acts  of  Parliament,  &c.  in 
proof  of  the  exclusive  Rights  of  the  College,  printed 
in  1660 ; which  afforded  the  basis  of  Dr.  GoodalFs 
history : this  was  followed  nine  years  after  by  “ A 
Short  View  of  the  Frauds  of  Apothecaries,”  which 
involved  him  in  much  controversy.  He  published  also 
a Catalogue  of  the  Natural  Productions  of  this  Island, 
of  which  the  botanical  partis  best  executed;  and  he 
communicated  several  papers  to  the  Royal  Society. 

ME'RUS.  Applied  to  several  things  in  the  same 
sense  as  genuine,  or  unadulterated ; as  merum  vinum, 
neat  wine. 

MERY,  John,  was  bom  at  Vatau,  in  France,  in 
1645.  His  father  being  a surgeon,  he  determined  upon 
the  same  profession,  and  went  accordingly  to  the  Hdtel 
Dieu  at  Paris,  wrhere  he  studied  with  extraordinary 
ardour,  even  passing  the  night  in  dissection  in  his  bed- 
room. In  1681  he  was  appointed  to  the  office  of 
queen’s  surgeon  ; and  two  years  after,  surgeon-major 
to  the  invalids.  Soon  after  this  he  was  chosen  to 
attend  the  Queen  of  Portugal,  who  died,  however, 
before  his  arrival ; and  he  refused  very  advantageous 


MES 


MES 


offers  to  detain  him  at  that,  as  well  as  the  Spanish 
court.  He  was  now  received  into  the  Academy  of 
Sciences,  and  shortly  after  sent  on  a secret  journey  to 
England;  then  chosen  to  attend  upon  the  Duke  of  Bur- 
gundy, who  was  a child.  But  these  occupations  were 
irksome  to  him,  and  he  even  shunned  private  practice, 
and  general  society,  devoting  himself  to  the  duties  of 
the  hospital  of  Invalids,  and  to  the  dissecting-room. 
In  1700,  he  was  appointed  first  surgeon  to  the  Hotel 
Dieu,  which  gratified  his  utmost  ambition ; and  he 
declined  repeated  solicitations  to  give  lectures  thereon 
anatomy.  He  procured,  however,  the  erection  of  a 
theatre  for  the  students,  where  they  might  have  more 
regular  instruction.  It  was  a great  part  of  the  labour 
of  his  life  to  form  an  anatomical  museum,  yet  he  did 
not  estimate  these  researches  too  highly,  and  was  very 
slow  in  framing,  or  in  receiving,  new  theories  concern- 
ing the  animal  economy.  About  the  age  of  75,  he  sud- 
denly lost  the  use  of  his  legs,  after  which  his  health 
declined,  and  he  died  in  1722.  Besides  many  valuable 
communications  to  the  Academy  of  Sciences,  he  pub- 
lished a description  of  the  ear;  Observations  on  Fr£re 
Jacques’s  Method  of  Cutting  for  the  Stone,  the  general 
principle  of  which  he  approved;  a tract  on  the  Foetal 
Circulation,  controverting  the  received  opinion,  that 
part  of  the  blood  passes  from  the  right  to  the  left  ven- 
tricle, through  the  foramen  ovale,  and  even  assigning 
it  an  opposite  course;  and  physical  problems,  concern- 
ing the  connexion  of  the  foetus  with  the  mother,  and 
its  nutrition. 

MesaRje'um.  (From  peoog.,  the  middle,  and  apaia, 
the  belly.)  The  mesentery. 

MESEMBRYA'NTHEMUM.  (So  called  from  the 
circumstance  of  its  flowers  expanding  at  midday. 
The  name  of  a vast  genus  of  plants.  Class,  Icosan- 
dria ; Order,  Pentagynia. 

Mesembryanthemum  crystallinum.  The  juice 
of  this  plant,  in  a dose  of  four  spoonfuls  every  two 
hours,  it  is  asserted,  has  removed  an  obstinate  spas- 
modic affection  of  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  which 
Would  not  yield  to  other  remedies. 

MESENTERIC.  Mesentericus.  Belonging  to  the 
mesentery.  See  Mesentery. 

Mesenteric  artery.  Arteria  mesenterica.  Two 
branches  of  the  aorta  in  the  abdomen  are  so  called. 
The  superior  mesenteric  is  the  second  branch;  it  is 
distributed  upon  the  mesentery,  and  gives  off  the  supe- 
rior or  right  colic  artery.  The  inferior  mesenteric  is 
the  fifth  branch  of  the  aorta;  it  sends  off  the  internal 
haemorrhoidal. 

Mesenteric  glands.  Glandules  mesenterica:. 
These  are  conglobate,  and  are  situated  here  and  there 
in  the  cellular  membrane  of  the  mesentery.  The 
chyle  from  the  intestines  passes  through  these  glands 
to  the  thoracic  duct. 

Mesenteric  nerves.  Nervorum  plexus  mesente- 
ricus.  The  superior,  middle,  and  lower  mesenteric 
plexuses  of  nerves  are  formed  by  the  branches  of  the 
great  intercostal  nerves. 

Mesenteric  veins.  Vena:  mesenterica:.  They  all 
run  into  one  trunk,  that  evacuates  its  blood  into  the 
vena  portie.  See  Vena  portee. 

M ESENTERI'TIS.  (From  peoev'Jepiov,  the  mesen- 
tery.) An  inflammation  of  the  mesentery.  See  Peri- 
tonitis. 

ME  SENTERY.  (Mesenterium ; from  peoog,  the 
middle,  and  ev'jepov,  an  intestine.)  A membrane  in 
the  cavity  of  the  abdomen  attached  to  the  vertebras  of 
the  loins,  and  to  which  the  intestines  adhere.  It  is 
formed  of  a duplicature  of  the  peritonaeum,  and  con- 
tains within  it  adipose  membrane,  lacteals,  lymphatics, 
lacteal  glands,  mesenteric  arteries,  veins,  and  nerves. 
Its  use  is  to  sustain  the  intestines  in  such  a manner  that 
they  possess  both  mobility  and  firmness ; to  support 
and  conduct  with  safety  the  blood-vessels,  lacteals,  and 
nerves;  to  fix  the  glands,  and  give  an  external  coat  to 
the  intestines. 

It  consists  of  three  parts : one  uniting  the  small  in- 
testines, which  receives  the  proper  name  of  mesentery  ; 
another  connecting  the  colon,  termed  mesocolon;  and 
a third  attached  to  the  rectum,  termed  mesorectum. 

MESERAIC.  The  same  as  mesenteric. 

Mese'kion.  See  Daphne  metereum. 

Mesi're.  A disorder  of  the  liver,  mentioned  by 
Avicenna,  accompanied  with  a sense  of  heaviness, 
tumour,  inflammation,  pungent  pain,  and  blackness  of 
the  tongue. 

Mm 


MESOCO  LON.  (From  peoog , the  middle,  and 
ku)\ov,  the  colon.)  The  portion  of  the  mesentery  to 
which  the  colon  is  attached.  The  mesentery  and  me- 
socolon are  the  most  important  of  all  the  productions 
of  the  peritomeum.  In  the  pelvis,  the  peritonaeum 
spreads  itself  shortly  before  the  rectum.  But  where 
that  intestine  becomes  loose,  and  forms  the  semilunar 
curve,  the  peritonaeum  there  rises  considerably  from 
the  middle  iliac  vessels,  and  region  of  the  psoas  muscle, 
double,  and  with  a figure  adapted  for  receiving  the  hol- 
low colon.  But  above,  on  the  left  side,  the  colon  is 
connected  with  almost  no  intermediate  loose  produc- 
tion to  the  peritonaeum,  spread  upon  the  psoas  muscle, 
as  high  as  the  spleen,  where  this  part  of  the  perito- 
naeum, which  gave  a coat  to  the  colon,  being  extended 
under  the  spleen,  receives  and  sustains  that  viscus  in 
a hollow  superior  recess. 

Afterward  the  peritonaeum,  from  the  left  kidney, 
from  the  interval  between  the  kidneys,  from  the  large 
vessels,  and  from  the  right  kidney,  emerges  forwards 
under  the  pancreas,  and  forms  a broad  and  sufficiently 
long  continuous  production,  called  the  transverse  me- 
socolon, which,  like  a partition,  divides  the  upper  part 
of  the  abdomen,  containing  the  stomach,  liver,  spleen, 
and  pancreas,  from  the  lower  part.  The  lower  plate 
of  this  transverse  production  is  continued  singly  from 
the  right  mesocolon  to  the  left,  arid  serves  as  an  exter- 
nal coat  to  a pretty  large  portion  of  the  liver,  and  de- 
scending part  of  the  duodenum.  But  the  upper  plate, 
less  simple  in  the  course,  departs  from  the  lumbar  peri- 
tomeum  at  the  kidney,  and  region  of  the  vena  cava, 
farther  to  the  right  than  the  duodenum,  to  which  it 
gives  an  external  membrane,  not  quite  to  the  valve  of 
the  pylorus ; and  beyond  this  intestine,  and  beyond  the 
colon,  it  is  joined  with  the  lower  plate,  so  that  a large 
part  of  the  duodenum  lies  within  the  cavity  of  the 
mesocolon.  Afterward,  in  the  region  of  the  liver,  the 
mesocolon  is  inflected,  and  descending  over  the  kidney 
of  the  same  side  much  shorter,  it  includes  the  right  of 
the  colon,  as  far  as  the  intestinum  caecum,  which  rests 
upon  the  iliac  muscle  and  the  appendix,  which  is  pro- 
vided with  a peculiar  long  curved  mesentery.  There 
the  mesocolon  terminates,  almost  at  the  bifurcation  of 
the  aorta. 

The  whole  of  the  mesocolon  and  of  the  mesentery 
is  hollow,  so  that  the  air  may  be  forced  in  between  its 
two  laminte,  in  such  a manner  as  to  expand  them  into 
a bag.  At  the  place  where  it  sustains  the  colon,  and 
also  from  part  of  the  intestinum  rectum,  the  mesoco- 
lon, continuous  with  the  outer  membrane  of  the  intes- 
tine, forms  itself  into  small  slender  bags,  resembling 
the  omentum,  for  the  most  part  in  pairs,  with  their 
loose  extremities  thicker  and  bifid,  and  capable  of 
admitting  air  blown  in  between  the  plates  of  the  meso- 
colon. 

MESOCRA'NIUM.  (From  peoog,  the  middle, and 
Kpaviov,  the  skull.)  The  crown  of  the  head,  or  vertex. 

MESOGA'STRIUM.  (From  peoog,  the  middle,  and 
yasT7p,thestomach.)  The  concave  part  of  the  stomach, 
which  attaches  itself  to  the  adjacent  parts. 

MESOGLO'SSUS.  (From  peoog,  the  middle,  and 
y\wooa,  the  tongue.)  A muscle  inserted  in  the  middle 
of  the  tongue. 

MESOME'RA.  (From  peoog,  the  middle,  and  pypog, 
the  thigh.)  The  parts  between  the  thighs. 

MESOMPIIALIUM.  (From  peoog,  the  middle,  and 
op(ba\og,  the  navel.)  The  middle  of  the  navel. 

MESO'PHRYUM.  (From  peoog , the  middle,  and 
o0paa,  the  eyebrows.)  The  part  between  the  eye- 
brows. } 

MESOPLEU'RUM.  (From  peoog , the  middle,  and 
n\evpov,  a rib.)  The  space  or  muscles  between  the 
ribs. 

MESORE'CTUM.  (From  peoog}  the  middle,  and 
rectum , the  straight  gut.)  The  portion  of  peritonsum 
which  connects  the  rectum  of  the  pelvis. 

MESO'THENAR.  (From  peoog , the  middle,  and 
Oevap , the  palm  of  the  hand.)  The  muscle  situated  in 
the  middle  of  the  palm  of  the  hand. 

MESOTICA.  (From  peoog , medius.)  The  name 
of  an  order  of  diseases  in  the  class  Eccripica , in  Good’s 
Nosology.  Diseases  affecting  the  parenchyma.  Its 
genera  are  the  following:  Polysarcia;  Emphyma; 
Parosti.a ; Cyrlosis ; Osthexia. 

MESOTYPE.  Prismatic  zeolite.  A species  of  the 
genus  zeolite. 

MESPILU9.  (On  tv  rw  peou)  iu\og,  because  it 

65 


Met 


met 


has  a cap  or  crown  in  the  middle  of  it.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system.  Class, 
Icosandria ; Order,  Pentagynia. 

2.  The  pharmacoposial  name  of  the  medlar.  See 
Mcspilus  germanica. 

Mespilus  germanica.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  medlar-tree.  This  fruit,  and,  also  its  seeds,  have 
been  used  medicinally.  The  immature  fruit  is  ser- 
viceable in  checking  diarrhoeas;  and  the  seeds  were 
formerly  esteemed  in  allaying  the  pain  attendant  on 
nephritic  diseases. 

MESUE,  one  of  the  early  physicians  among  the 
Arabians,  was  born  in  the  province  of  Khorasan,  and 
flourished  in  the  beginning  of  the  ninth  century.  His 
father  was  an  apothecary  at  Nisaboar.  He  was  edu- 
cated in  the  profession  of  physic  by  Gabriel,  the  son 
of  George  Backtishua,  and  through  his  favour  was  ap- 
pointed physician  to  the  hospital  of  his  native  city. 
Although  a Christian,  he  was  in  great  favour  with 
several  successive  Caliphs,  being  reputed  the  ablest 
scholar  and  physician  of  his  age.  When  Haroun  al 
Raschid  appointed  his  son  viceroy  of  Khorasan,  Mesue 
was  nominated  his  body  physician,  and  was  placed 
by  him  at  the  head  of  a colleg6  of  learned  men,  which 
he  instituted  there.  When  Almammon  succeeded  to 
the  throne  in  813,  he  brought  Mesue  to  Bagdad,  and 
made  him  a professor  of  medicine  there,  as  well  as 
superintendent  of  the  great  hospital,  w liich  offices  he 
filled  a great  number  of  years.  He  was  also  employed 
in  transferring  the  science  of  the  Greeks  to  his  own 
country,  by  translating  their  works.  He  is  supposed 
by  Freind  to  have  written  in  the  Syriac,  tongue.  He 
was  author  of  some  works,  which  are  cited  by  Rhazes, 
and  others,  but  appear  to  have  perished;  for  those  now 
extant  in  his  name  do  not  correspond  with  these  cita- 
tions, nor  with  the  character  given  of  them  by  Haly 
Abbas,  besides  that  Rhazes  is  quoted  in  them,  who 
lived  long  after  Mesue:  they  probably  belonged  to 
another  physician  of  the  same  name,  who  is  mentioned 
by  Leo  Africanus,  and  died  in  the  beginning  of  the 
eleventh  century. 

META'BASIS.  (From  perafiatvw,  to  digress.)  Me- 
tabole. A change  of  remedy,  of  practice,  or  disease; 
or  any  change  from  one  thing  to  another,  either  in 
the  curative  indications,  or  the  symptoms  of  a dis- 
temper. 

Meta'bole.  See  Metabasis. 

METACARPAL.  Belonging  to  the  metacarpus. 

Metacarpal  bones.  The  five  longitudinal  bones 
that  are  situated  between  the  wrist  and  the  fingers; 
they  are  distinguished  into  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the 
thumb,  forefinger,  &c. 

METACA  RPUS.  (From  pera,  after,  and  Kap-rros, 
the  wrist.)  Metacarpium.  That  part  of  the  hand 
which  is  between  the  wrist  and  the  fingers. 

Metaca'rpeus.  A muscle  of  the  carpus.  See  Ad- 
ductor metacarpi  minimi  digiti  manus. 

Mktacera'sma.  (From  ptra,  after,  and  Kepavvvpi, 
to  mix.)  Cerasma.  A mixture  tempered  with  any 
additional  substance. 

METACHEIRI'XIS.  (From  psTaxcip^m,  to  per- 
form by  the  hand.)  Surgery,  or  any  manual  operation. 

Metachore'sis.  (From  prraxwpsw,  to  digress.) 
The  translation  of  a disease  from  one  part  to  another. 

Metacine'ma.  (From  pera,  and  /amt),  to  remove.) 
A distortion  of  the  pupil  of  the  eye. 

Mktaco'ndylus.  (From  pera , after,  and  kovSvXos, 
a knuckle.)  The  last  joint  of  a finger,  which  contains 
the  nail. 

Meta'liage.  (From  peTaWarlu),  to  change.  A 
change  in  the  state  or  treatment  of  a disease. 

METALLU'ltGIA.  (From  peraWov , a metal,  and 
_ tfyyov , work,  labour.)  That  part  of  chemistry  which 
concerns  the  operations  of  metals. 

METALS.  The  most  numerous  class  of  undecom- 
pounded chemical  bodies,  distinguished  by  the  follow- 
ing general  characters:— 


1.  They  possess  a peculiar  lustre,  which  continues 
in  the  streak,  and  in  their  smallest  fragments. 

2.  They  are  fusible  by  heat;  and  in  fusion  retain 
their  lustre  and  opacity. 

3.  They  are  all,  except  selenium,  excellent  conduc- 
tors, both  of  electricity  and  caloric. 

4.  Many  of  them  may  be  extended  under  the  ham- 
mer, and  are  called  malleable;  or  under  the  rolling 
press,  and  are  called  laminable;  or  drawn  into  wire, 
and  are  called  ductile.  This  capability  of  extension 
depends,  in  some  measure,  on  a tenacity  peculiar  to 
the  metals,  and  which  exists  in  the  different  species 
with  very  different  degrees  of  force. 

5.  When  their  saline  combinations  are  electrized, 
the  metals  separate  at  the  resino-electric  or  negative 
pole. 

6.  When  exposed  to  the  action  of  oxygen,  chlorine, 
or  iodine,  at  an  elevated  temperature,  they  generally 
take  fire ; and,  combining  with  one  or  other  of  these 
three  elementary  dissolvents  in  definite  proportions, 
are  converted  into  earthy  or  saline-looking  bodies, 
devoid  of  metallic  lustre  and  ductility,  called  oxides, 
chlorides  or  iodides. 

7.  They  are  capable  of  combining  in  their  melted 
state  with  each  other,  in  almost  every  proportion,  con- 
stituting the  important  order  of  metallic  alloys ; in 
which  the  characteristic  lustre  and  tenacity  are  pre- 
served. 

8.  From  this  brilliancy  and  opacity  conjointly,  they 
reflect  the  greater  part  of  the  light  which  falls  on  their 
surface,  and  hence  form  excellent  mirrors. 

9.  Most  of  them  combine  in  definite  proportions 
with  sulphur  and  phosphorus,  forming  bodies  frequent- 
ly of  a semi-metallic  aspect ; and  others  unite  with 
hydrogen,  carbon,  and  boron,  giving  rise  to  peculiar 
gaseous  or  solid  compounds. 

10.  Many  of  the  metals  are  capable  of  assuming,  by 
particular  management,  crystalline  forms;  which  are, 
for  the  most  part,  either  cubes  or  octohedrons. 

The  relations  of  the  metals  of  the  various  objects  of 
chemistry,  are  so  complex  and  diversified.,  as  to  render 
their  classification  a task  of  peculiar  difficulty. 

The  first  12  are  malleable  ; and  so  are  the  31st  and 
32d,  in  their  congealed  state. 

The  first  16  yield  oxides,  which  are  neutral  salifi- 
able bases. 

The  metals  17, 18, 19,  20,  21,  22,  and  23,  are  acidifi- 
able  by  combination  with  oxygen.  Of  the  oxides  of 
the  rest,  up  to  the  30th,  little  is  known.  The  remain- 
ing metals  form,  with  oxygen,  the  alkaline  and  earthy 
bases. 

All  the  metals  are  found  in  the  bowels  of  the  earth, 
though  sometimes  they  are  on  the  surface.  They  are 
met  with  in  different  combinations  with  other  matters, 
such  as  sulphur,  oxygen,  and  acids ; particularly  with 
the  carbonic,  muriatic,  sulphuric,  and  phosphoric  acids. 
They  are  also  found  combined  with  each  other,  and 
sometimes,  though  rarely,  in  a pure  metallic  state,  dis- 
tinguishable by  the  naked  eye. 

In  their  different  stales  of  combination,  they  are  said 
to  be  mineralized,  and  are  called  ores.  The  ores  of 
metals  are,  for  the  most  part,  found  in  nature  in  moun- 
tainous districts;  and  always  in  such  as  form  a con- 
tinued chain.  There  are  mountains  which  consist  en- 
tirely of  iron  ore,  but,  in  general,  the  metallic  part  of  a 
mountain  bears  a very  inconsiderable  proportion  to  its 
bulk.  Ores  are  also  met  with  in  the  cavities  or  crevices 
of  rocks,  forming  what  are  termed  veins,  which  are 
move  easily  discovered  in  these  situations  than  when 
they  lie  level  in  plains. 

The  metallic  matter  of  ores  is  very  generally  in- 
crusted,  and  intermingled  with  some  earthy  substance, 
difterent  from  the  rock  in  which  the  vein  is  situated  ; 
which  is  termed  its  matrix.  This,  however,  must  not 
be  confounded  with  the  mineralizing  substae'e  with 
which  the  metal  is  combined,  such  as  sulphur,  Sec 


MET 


MET 


General  Table  of  the  Metals. 


Colour  of  Precipitates  by 


NAMES. 

j 1 Piantinum 
2 Gold 
I 3 Silver 
I 4 Palladium 

5 Mercury 

6 Copper 

7 Iron 


Sp.  gr. 


21.47 
19.30 
10.45 
11  8 
13.6 
8.9 
7.7 


Hydrosulphurets. 


Sulphuretted  hydrc 
gen. 


Prccipitants. 


Mur.  Ammon. 
Sulph.  iron 
Nitr.  mercury 
Common  salt 
Prus.  mercury 
Common  salt 
Heat 
Iron 

Succin.  soda 
with  perox. 


Ferroprussiate  of 
potassa. 


0 

Yellowish-white 
White 
Deep  orange 
White  passing  to 
yellow 
Red  brown 
Blue,  or  white 
passing  to  blue 


Infusion  of  galls. 


0 

Green;  met 
Yellow-brown 

Orange-yellow 
Brown 
Protox.  0. 
Perox.  black 


Yellow 

Black 

Blackish-brown 

Brownish-black 

Black 

Black 


Black  met.  powd. 

Yellow 

Black 

Black-brown 

Black 

Do. 


8 Tin 

I 9 Lead 

f 10  Nickel 

II  Cadmium 

12  Zinc 

13  Bismuth 

14  Antimony 

15  Manganese 

16  Cobalt 

17  Tellurium 

18  Arsenic 

19  Chromium 

20  Molybdenum 
'21  Tungsten 

22  Columbium 

23  Selenium 


7.29 

11.35 

8.4 

8.6 

6.9 

9.88 

6.70 

8. 

8.6 


f 8.35  ? 
f 5.76  ? 
5.90 


17.4 

5.6? 

4.3? 


Cor.  sublim. 
Sulph.  soda 
Sulph.  potassa  ? 
Zinc 

Aik.  carbonates 
Water 
$ Water 
? Zinc 
Tatr.  pot. 

Aik.  carbonates 
( Water 
l Antimony 
Nitr.  lead 
Do. 

Do.? 

Mur.  lime  ? 

Zinc  or  inf.  galls 
S Iron 

t Sulphite  amm. 


White 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

With  dilute  solu- 
tions white 
White 

Brown-yellow 


White 
Green 
Brown 
Dilute  acids 
Olive 


0 

White 

Gray-white 

0 

0 

Yellow 
White  from 
water 

0 

Yellow-white 

Yellow 


Brown 
Deep  brown 

Orange 


Protox.  black 
Perox.  yellow 
Black 
Do. 

Orange-yellow 

White 

Black-brown 

Orange 

White 

Black 

Blackish 

Yellow 

Green 


Chocolate 


Brown 

Black 

0 

Orange-yellow 

Yellowish-white 

Black-brown 

Orange 

Milkiness 

0 


Yellow 

Brown 


24  Osmium 

25  Rhodium 

26  Iridium 

27  Uranium 

28  Titanium 

29  Cerium 

30  Potassium 

31  Sodium 

32  Lithium 

33  Calcium 

34  Barium 

35  Strontium 

36  Magnesium 

37  Yttrium 

38  Glucinora 

39  Aluminum 

40  Thorinum 

41  Zirconium 

42  Silicium 


? 

10.65 

18.68 

9.0 

? 

? 

0.865 

0.972 


Mercury 

Zinc? 

Do.  ? 

Ferropr-pot. 
Inf.  galls. 
Oxal.  amm. 

C Mur.  plat, 
t Tart.  acid. 


0 

0 

Bt  own-red 
Grass-green 
Milk-white 

0 


Purple  passing  to 
deep  blue 

0 

Chocolate 

Red-brown 

0 

0 


0 

Brown-yellow 

Grass-green 

White 

0 


0 

0 

0 

0 


METAMORPHO’PSIA.  (From  pcrapop(l>ii)ais,  a 
change,  and  oipa,  sight.)  Visus  defiguratus.  Dis- 
figured vision.  It  is  a defect  in  vision,  by  which  per- 
sons perceive  objects  changed  in  their  figures.  The 
species  are, 

1.  Metamorphopsia  acuta , when  objects  appear 
much  larger  than  their  size. 

2.  Metamorphopsia  diminuta , when  objects  appear 
diminished  in  size,  arising  from  the  same  causes  as  the 
former. 

3.  Metamorphopsia  mutans,  when  objects  seem  to 
be  in  motion  : to  the  vertiginous  and  intoxicated  per- 
sons, every  thing  seems  to  stagger. 

4.  Metamorphopsia  tortuosa  ssu  flexuosa,  when  ob- 
jects appear  tortuous,  or  bending. 

5.  Metamorphopsia  inversa,  when  all  objects  appear 
inverted. 

6.  Metamorphopsia  imaginaria , is  the  vision  of  a 
thing  not  present,  as  may  be  observed  in  the  delirious, 
and  in  maniacs. 

7.  Metamorphopsia  from  a remaining  impression  : 
it  happens  to  those  who  very  attentively  examine  ob- 
jects, particularly  in  a great  light,  for  some  time  after 
to  perceive  the  impression. 

Metape'dium.  (From  pera,  after,  and  novs,  the 
foot.)  The  metatarsus. 

Meta'phrenitm.  (From  psra,  after,  and  eppeves,  the 
diaphragm.)  That  part  of  the  back  which  is  behind 
the  diaphragm. 

Metaporopoie'sis.  (From  pera,  iropoj,  a duct,  and 
7 to(co),  to  make.)  A change  in  the  pores  of  the  body. 

Metapto'sis.  (From  ptramitro >,  to  digress.)  A 
change  from  one  disease  to  another. 

META’STASIS.  (From  pediarr/pt,  to  change,  to 
translate.)  The  translation  of  a disease  from  one  place 
to  another. 

Metasy'ncricis.  (From  peraorvyKaivuiy  to  trans- 
mute.) Any  change  of  constitution. 


METATARSAL.  Belonging  to  the  metatarsus. 

Metatarsal  bonks.  The  five  longitudinal  bones 
between  the  tarsus  and  the  toes ; they  are  distinguished 
into  the  metatarsal  bom1  nf  the  great-toe,  fore-toe,  &c. 

METATA'RSUS.  (From  pera , after,  and  rapaopt 
the  tarsus.)  That  part  of  the  foot  between  the  tarsus 
and  toes. 

Mete'lla  nux.  See  St.rychnos  mix  vomica. 

METEOKISMUS.  (From  ptreiopos,  a vapour.)  1. 
A dropsy  of  the  belly,  accompanied  by  a considerable 
■distention  from  wind  in  the  bowels. 

2.  A tympanitic  state  of  the  abdomen,  that  takes 
place  in  acute  diseases  suddenly  and  unexpectedly,  as 
does  the  appearance  of  a meteor  in  the  heavens. 

METEOROLITE.  Meteoric  stone.  A peculiar 
solid  compound  of  earthy  and  metallic  matters,  of  sin- 
gular aspect  and  compo.sitiou,  which  occasionally  de- 
scends from  the  atmosphere  ; usually  from  the  bosom 
of  a luminous  meteor. 

Meteo'ros.  (Mrrruipoj ; from  peja,  and  aetpw,  to 
elevate.)  Elevated,  suspended,  erect,  sublime,  tumid. 
Galen  expounds  pains  of  this  sort,  as  being  those  which 
affect  the  peritorueum,  or  other  more  superficial  parts 
of  the  body : these  are  opposed  to  the  more  deep  seated 
ones. 

METHE'GLIN.  A drink  prepared  from  honey  by 
fermentation.  It  is  often  confounded  with  mead.  It 
is  made  in  the  following  way. , Honey,  one  hundred 
weight;  boiling  water,  enough  to  fill  a thirty-two  gal- 
lon cask,  or  half  a hogshead ; stir  it  well  for  a day  or 
two,  then  add  yeast  and  ferment.  Some  boil  the  honey 
in  water  with  one  ounce  of  hops  to  each  gallon,  for  an 
hour  or  two,  but  this  boiling  hinders  its  fermentation. 

Methemeri'nus.  (From  pera,  and  ypepa,  a day.) 
A quotidian  fever. 

' Metho'dic  medicine.  That  practice  which  was 
conducted  by  rules,  such  as  are  taught  by  Galen  and 
his  followers,  in  opposition  to  the  empirical  practice 


MIC 


ME'THODUS.  (From  //era,  andoSoj,  a way.)  The 
method,  or  ratio,  by  which  any  operation  or  cure  is 
conducted. 

Meto'pion.  Meramor.  1.  American  sumach,  a 
species  of  Rhus. 

2.  A name  of  the  bitter  almond. 

3.  An  oil,  or  an  ointment,  made  by  Dioscorides, 
which  was  thus  called  because  it  had  galbanum  in  it, 
which  was  collected  from  a plant  called  Metopium. 

Meto'fium.  M eriomov.  An  ointment  made  of 
galbanum. 

Meto'pum.  (From  //era,  after,  and  unp,  the  eye.) 
The  forehead.  j 

Meto'sjs.  A kind  of  amaurosis,  from  an  excess  of 
short-sightedness. 

ME'TRA.  (From  pr/Trjp,  a mother.)  The  womb. 
See  Uterus. 

METRE'NCH  YTA.  (From  prjrpa,  the  womb,  and 
syxvu,  to  pour  into.)  Injections  into  the  womb. 

METRE'NCHYTES.  (From  prirpa,  the  womb,  and 
syxv a),  to  pour  in.)  A syringe  to  inject  fluids  into  the 
womb. 

METRI'TIS.  (From  pyrpa,  the  womb.)  Inflamma- 
tion of  the  womb.  See  Hystentis. 

METROCE'LIS.  ( Metrocelis , idis.  f. ; from  prjrrip, 
a mother,  and  kt)\is,  a blemish.)  A mole,  or  mark, 
impressed  upon  the  child  by  the  mother’s  imagina- 
tion. 

METROMA'NIA.  A rage  for  reciting  verses.  In 
the  Acta  Societatis  Medic®  Havniensis,  published  1779, 
is  an  account  of  a tertian  attended  with  remarkable 
symptoms;  one  of  which  was  the  metro-mania , by 
which  the  patient  spoke  verses  extempore,  having 
never  before  had  the  least  taste  for  poetry  ; when  the 
fit  was  off,  the  patient  became  stupid,  and  remained  so 
till  the  return  of  the  -paroxysm,  when  the  poetical 
powers  returned  again. 

METROPTO'SIS.  (From  pyrpa,  the  uterus,  and 
tutt'Ju),  to  fall  down.)  Prolapsus  uteri.  The  descent 
of  the  uterus  through  the  vagina. 

Metrorrha'gia.  (From  pyrpa,  the  womb,  and 
pr/yvvfju , to  break  out.)  An  excessive  discharge  from 
the  womb. 

ME'U.  See  JEtliusa  meum. 

ME'UM.  (From  peuov,  less:  so  called,  according  to 
Minshew,  from  its  diminutive  size.)  See  JEthusa 
meum. 

Meum  athamanticum.  See  JEthusa  meum. 

Mexico  seed.  See  Ricinus. 

Mexico  tea.  See  Chenopodium  ambrosioides. 

MEZEREON.  See  Daphne  meiereum. 

MEZE'REUM.  (A  word  of  some  barbarous  dialect.) 
Mezereon.  See  Daphne  meiereum. 

Mezereum  acetatum.  Thin  slices  of  the  bark  of 
fresh  mezereon  root  are  to  be  steeped  for  twenty-four 
hours  in  common  vinegar.  Some  practitioners  direct 
this  application  to  issues,  when  a discharge  from  them 
cannot  be  encouraged  by  the  common  means.  It  ge- 
nerally answers  this  purpose  very  effectually  in  the 
course  of  one  night,  the  pea  being  removed,  and  a 
small  portion  of  the  bark  applied  over  the  opening. 
See  Daphne  gnidium. 

MIA'SMA.  ( Miasma , tis.  n. ; from  piaivco,  to  in- 
fect.) Miasma  is  a Greek  word,  importing  pollution, 
corruption,  or  defilement  generally;  and  contagion  a 
Latin  word,  importing  the  application  of  such  miasm 
or  corruption  to  the  body  by  the  medium  of  touch. 
There  is,  hence,  therefore,  says  Dr.  Good,  neither  pa- 
rallelism nor  antagonism,  in  their  respective  significa- 
tions ; there  is  nothing  that  necessarily  connects  them 
either  disjunctively,  or  conjunctively.  Both  equally 
apply  to  the  animal  and  vegetable  worlds,  or  to  any 
source  whatever  of  defilement  or  touch;  and  either 
may  be  predicated  of  the  other ; for  we  tnay  speak  cor- 
rectly of  the  miasm  of  contagion,  or  of  contagion  pro- 
duced by  miasm.  See  Contagion. 

MICA.  A species  of  mineral  which  Professor  Jame- 
son subdivides  into  ten  sub-specie*,  viz.  mica,  pinite, 
lepidolite,  chlorite,  green  earth,  talc,  nacrite,  potstone, 
steatite,  and  figure  stone. 

Mica  comes  in  abundance  from  Siberia,  where  it  is 
used  for  window  glass. 

Microco'smic  bezoar.  See  Calculus. 

Microcosmic  salt.  A triple  salt  of  soda,  ammonia, 
and  phosphoric  acid  obtained  from  urine,  and  much 
used  in  assays  with  the  blow-pipe. 

Microleuconvmph/e'a.  (From  pi xpos,  small,  \cvkos, 


MIL 

white,  and  vvpQaia,  the  water-lily.)  The  small  wntte 
water-lily. 

MICRONYMPHAE'A.  (From  ptupos,  small,  and 
vvuipaia,  the  water-lily.)  The  smaller  water-lily. 

MlCRO'RCHIS.  (From  puepos,  small,  and  opxm,  a 
testicle.)  One  whose  testicles  are  unusually  small. 

MICROSPH Y'XIA.  (From  pucpos , small,  and 
a(t>v\ii.  the  pulse.)  A debility  and  smallness  of  the 
pulse. 

[MIDDLETON,  Peter,  M.D.  This  gentleman,  a 
native  of  Scotland,  flourished  in  the  profession  of 
medicine  in  the  city  of  New-York  about  the  middle  of 
j the  last  century,  and  was  one  of  the  very  few  medical 
men  of  this  country,  who,  at  that  early  period,  were 
distinguished  equally  for  various  and  profound  learn- 
ing and  great  professional  talents.  He,  with  Dr.  J. 
Bard,  in  1750,  dissected  a human  body,  and  injected 
the  blood-vessels,  which  was  the  first  attempt  of  the 
kind  to  be  found  on  medical  record  in  America,  and  in 
1767  he  proffered  his  services  for  carrying  into  effect 
the  establishment  of  a new  medical  school  in  the  city 
of  New-York,  of  which  he  was  appointed  first  pro- 
fessor of  Physiology  and  Pathology,  and  afterward  was 
the  instructer  in  Materia  Medica. 

In  his  profession  he  was  learned  and  liberal,  and  his 
whole  life  was  a practical  illustration  of  his  doctrines. 
He  wrote  an  able  letter  on  the  croup,  addressed  to  Dr. 
Richard  Bayley,  which  was  published  in  the  Medica! 
Repository,  Volume  IX.  He  was  also  author  of  a 
Medical  Discourse,  or  Historical  Inquiries  into  the  an- 
cient and  present  slate  of  Medicine,  the  substance  of 
which  was  delivered  at  the  opening  of  the  Medical 
School  of  New-York  ; it  was  published  in  1769,  and  is 
an  honourable  specimen  of  his  talents  and  attain- 
ments. 

This  highly  respectable  man,  for  a considerable 
period,  struggled  with  an  impaired  state  of  health,  in- 
duced by  the  toils  of  a laborious  practice,  and  after 
enduring  the  severest  bodily  suffering  for  more  than  ten 
months,  from  a stricture  and  scirrhous  state  of  the 
pylorus,  died  in  the  city  of  New-York,  in  1781.” — 
7 hack-  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

MIDRIFF.  See  Diaphragma. 

MIEM1TE.  A mineral  found  atMiemo  in  Tuscany, 
and  other  places.  There  are  two  kinds,  the  granular 
and  prismatic. 

Mi'gma.  (From  uiyvv o>,  to  mix.)  A confection,  or 
ointment. 

Migra'na.  A corruption  of  hemicrania. 

MILFOIL.  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

MILIA'RIA.  (From  milium,  millet:  so  called  be 
cause  the  small  vesicles  upon  the  skin  resemble  millet- 
seed.)  Miliary  fever.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Pyrexia,  and  order  Exanthemata,  of  Cullen,  charac- 
terized by  synochus ; cold  stage  considerable : hot 
stage  attended  with  anxiety  and  frequent,  sighing;  per- 
spiration of  a strong  and  peculiar  smell ; eruption,  pre- 
ceded by  a sense  of  pricking,  first  on  the  neck  and 
breast, of  small  red  pimples,  which  in  two  days  become 
white  vesicles,  desquamate,  and  are  succeeded  by 
fresh  pimples.  Miliary  fever  has  been  observed  to  af- 
fect both  sexes,  and  persons  of  all  ages  and  constitu- 
tions : but  females,  of  a delicate  habit,  are  most  liable 
to  it,  particularly  in  child-bed.  Moist  variable  weather 
is  most  favourable  to  its  appearance,  and  it  occurs 
most  usually  in  the  spring  and  autumn.  It  is  by  some 
said  to  he  a contagious  disease,  and  has  been  known  to 
prevail  epidemically. 

Very  violent  symptoms,  such  as  coma,  delirium,  and 
convulsive  fits,  now  and  then  attend  miliary  fever,  in 
which  case  it  is  apt  to  prove  fatal.  A numerous  erup- 
tion indicates  more  danger  than  a scanty  one.  The 
eruption  being  steady  is  to  be  considered  as  more  fa- 
vourable than  its  frequently  disappearing  and  coming 
out  again,  and  it  is  more  favourable  when  the  places 
covered  with  the  eruption  appear  swelled  and  stretched 
than  when  they  remain  flaccid.  According  to  the  se- 
verity of  the  symptoms,  and  depression  of  spirits,  is  the 
danger  greater.  See  also  Sudamina. 

Mili'olum.  (Diminutive  of  milium,  millet.)  Asmall 
tumour  on  the  eyelids,  resembling  in  size  a millet-seed. 

MILITA'RIS.  (From  miles,  a soldier:  so  called  from 
its  efficacy  in  curing  fresh  wounds.)  See  Achillea  mil 
lefolium. 

Militaris  herba.  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

MEDIUM.  (From  millc,  a thousand.  An  ancient 
name  for  a sort  of  corn  or  grass,  remarkable  for  the 


MIL 


MIL 


abundance  of  its  seeds.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Triandria. 
Order,  Digynia. 

2.  (From  milium , a millet-seed.)  A very  white  and 
hard  tubercle,  in  size  and  colour  resembling  a millet- 
seed.  Its  seat  is  immediately  under  the  cuticle,  so  that, 
when  pressed,  the  contents  escape  appearing  of  an 
atheromatous  nature. 

Milium  solis.  See  Lithospermum. 

MILK.  Lac.  A fluid  secreted  by  peculiar  glands, 
and  designed  to  nourish  animals  in  the  early  part  of 
their  life.  It  is  of  an  opaque  white  colour,  a mild  sac- 
charine taste,  and  a slightly  aromatic  smell.  It  is  se- 
parated immediately  from  the  blood,  in  the  breasts  or 
udders  of  female  animals.  Man,  quadrupeds,  and  ce- 
taceous animals,  are  the  only  creatures  which  afford 
milk.  All  other  animals  are  destitute  of  the  organs 
which  secrete  this  fluid.  Milk  differs  greatly  in  the 
several  animals. 

The  following  are  the  general  Properties  of  animal 
and  human  milk: — 

Milk  separates  spontaneously  into  cream , cheese , and 
serum  of  milk ; and  that  sooner  in  a warm  situation 
than  in  a cold  one.  In  a greater  temperature  than  that 
of  the  air,  it  acesces  and  coagulates,  but  more  easily 
and  quicker  by  the  addition  of  acid  salts,  or  coagula- 
ting plants.  Lime-water  coagulates  milk  imperfectly. 
It  is  not  coagulated  by  pure  alkali ; which  indeed  dis- 
solves its  caseous  part.  With  carbonated  alkali  the 
caseous  and  cremoraceous  parts  of  milk  are  changed 
into  a liquid  soap,  which  separates  in  the  form  of 
white  flakes;  such  milk,  by  boiling,  is  changed  into  a 
yellow  and  then  into  a brown  colour.  Milk,  distilled  to 
dryness,  gives  out  an  insipid  water,  and  leaves  a 
whitish  brown  extract,  called  tne  extract  of  milk; 
which,  dissolved  in  water,  makes  a milk  of  less  value. 
Milk  fresh  drawn,  and  often  agitated  in  a warm  place, 
by  degrees  goes  into  the  vinous  fermentation,  so  that 
alkohol  may  be  drawn  over  by  distillation,  which  is 
called  spirit  of  milk.  It  succeeds  quicker  if  yest  be 
added  to  the  milk.  Mares’  milk,  as  it  contains  the 
greatest  quantity  of  the  sugar  of  milk,  is  best  calculated 
for  vinous  fermentation. 

The  Principles  of  milk,  or  its  integral  parts,  are, 

1.  The  Aroma , or  odorous  volatile  principle,  which 
flies  off  from  fresh-drawn  milk  in  the  form  of  visible 
vapour. 

2.  Water , which  constitutes  the  greatest  part  of 
milk.  From  one  pound  eleven  ounces  of  water  may 
be  extracted  by  distillation.  This  water,  with  the 
sugar  of  milk,  forms  the  serum  of  the  milk. 

3.  Bland  oil , which,  from  its  lightness,  swims  on  the 
surface  of  milk  after  standing,  and  forms  the  cream  of 
milk. 

4.  Cheese , separated  by  coagulating  milk,  falls  to  the 
bottom  of  the  vessel,  and  is  the  animal  gluten. 

5.  Sugar,  obtained  from  the  serum  of  milk  by  evapo 
ration.  It  unites  the  caseous  and  butyraceous  part 
with  the  water  of  the  milk. 

6.  Some  neutral  salts , as  the  muriate  of  potassa 
and  muriate  of  lime,  which  are  accidental,  not  being 
found  at  all  times,  nor  in  every  milk.  These  princi- 
ples of  milk  differ  widely  in  respect  to  quantity  and 
quality,  according  to  the  diversity  of  ihe  animals. 

The  aroma  of  the  milk  is  of  so  different  an  odour, 
that  persons  accustomed  to  the  smell,  and  those  whose 
olfactory  nerves  are  very  sensible,  can  easily  distin- 
guish whether  milk  be  that  of  the  cow,  goat,  mare,  ass, 
or  human.  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  serum  of  the 
milk,  which  is  properly  the  seat  of  the  aroma.  The 
serum  of  milk  is  thicker  and  more  copious  in  the  milk 
of  the  sheep  and  goat,  than  in  that  of  the  ass,  mare,  or 
human  milk.  The  butter  of  goats’  and  cows’  milk  is 
easily  separated,  and  will  not  again  unite  itself  with 
the  butter-milk.  Sheep’s  butter  is  soft,  and  not  of  the 
consistence  of  that  obtained  from  the  cow  and  goat. 
Asses’,  mares’,  and  human  butter,  can  only  be  sepa- 
rated in  the  form  of  cream  ; which  cream,  by  the  as- 
sistance of  heat,  is  with  ease  again  united  to  the  milk 
from  which  it  is  separated.  The  cheese  of  cows’  and 
goats’  milk  is  solid  and  elastic,  that  from  asses  and 
mares  soft,  and  that  from  sheep’s  milk  almost  as  soft 
as  gluten.  It  is  never  separated  spontaneously  from 
the  milk  of  a woman  but  only  by  art,  and  is  wholly 
fluid.  The  serum  abounds  most  in  human,  asses’,  and 
mares’  milk.  The  milk  of  the  cow  and  goat  contain 
less,  and  that  of  the  sheep  least  of  all.  The  sugar  of 


milk  is  in  the  greatest  quantity  in  the  mares*  and 
asses’,  and  somewhat  less  in  the  human  milk. 

When  milk  is  left  to  spontaneous  decomposition,  at 
a due  temperature,  it  is  found  to  be  capable  of  passing 
through  the  vinous,  acetous,  and  putrefactive  fermen- 
tations. It  appears,  however,  probably  on  account  of 
the  small  quantity  of  alkohol  it  affords,  that  the  vinous 
fermentation  lasts  a very  short  time,  and  can  scarcely 
be  made  to  take  place  in  every  part  of  the  fluid  at 
once,  by  the  addition  of  any  ferment.  This  seems  to 
be  the  reason  why  the  Tartars,  who  make  a fermented 
liquor,  or  wine,  from  mares’  milk,  called  koumiss,  suc- 
ceed by  using  large  quantities  at  a time,  and  agitating 
it  very  frequently.  They  add,  as  a ferment,  a sixth 
part  of  water,  and  an  eighth  part  of  the  sourest  cow’s 
milk  they  can  get,  or  a smaller  portion  of  koumiss 
already  prepared  : cover  the  vessel  with  a thick  cloth, 
and  let  it  stand  in  a moderate  warmth  for  24  hours  : 
then  beat  it  with  a stick,  to  mix  the  thicker  and  thinner 
parts,  which  have  separated  ; let  it  stand  again  24 
hours,  in  a high  narrow  vessel,  and  repeat  the  heating, 
till  the  liquor  is  perfectly  homogeneous.  This  liquor 
will  keep  some  months,  in  close  vessels,  and  a cold 
place;  but  must  be  well  mixed  by  beating,  or  shaking, 
every  time  it  is  used.  They  sometimes  extract  a spirit 
from  it  tgjfr'distillation.  The  Arabs  prepare  a similar 
liquor  bythe  name  of  leban,  and  the  Turks  by  that  of 
yaourt.  Eaton  informs  us,  that,  when  properly  pre- 
pared, it  may  be  left  to  stand  till  it  becomes  quite  dry  : 
and  in  this  state  it  is  kept  in  bags,  and  mixed  with 
water  when  wanted  for  use. 

The  saccharine  substance,  upon  which  the  ferment- 
ing property  of  milk  depends,  is  held  in  solution  by  the 
whey,  which  remains  after  the  separation  of  the  curd 
in  making  cheese.  This  is  separated  by  evaporation 
in  the  large  way,  for  pharmaceutical  purposes,  in  va 
rious  parts  of  Switzerland.  When  the  whey  has  been 
evaporated  by  heat,  to  the  consistence  of  honey,  it  is 
poured  into  proper  moulds,  and  exposed  to  dry  in  the 
sun.  If  this  crude  sugar  of  milk  be  dissolved  in  water, 
clarified  with  whites  of  eggs,  and  evaporated  to  the 
consistence  of  syrup,  white  crystals,  in  the  form  of 
rhomboidal  parallelopipedons,  are  obtained. 

Sugar  of  milk  has  a faint  saccharine  taste,  and  is 
soluble  in  three  or  four  parts  of  water.  It  yields  by 
distillation  the  same  products  that  other  sugars  do, 
only  in  somewhat  different  proportions.  It  is  remarka- 
ble, however,  that  the  empyreumatic  oil  has  a smell 
resembling  flowers  of  benzoin.  It  contains  an  acid 
frequently  called  the  saccolactic ; but  as  it  is  common 
to  all  mucilaginous  substances,  it  is  more  generally 
termed  mucic.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Milk,  according  to  Berzelius,  consists  of, 

Water 928.75 

Curd,  with  a little  cream 28  00 

Sugar  of  milk 35.00 

Muriate  of  potassa  1.70 

Phosphate  of  potassa 0.25 

Lactic  acid,  acetate  of  potassa,  with  ) ()0 

a trace  of  lactate,  of  iron ) 

Earthy  phosphates 0.30 

1000.00 


Milk,  asses’.  Asses’  milk  has  a very  strong  re- 
semblance to  human  milk  in  colour,  smell,  and  con- 
sistence. When  left  at  rest  for  a sufficient  time,  a 
cream  forms  upon  its  surface,  but  by  no  means  in  such 
abundance  as  on  women’s  milk.  Asses’  milk  differs 
from  cows’  milk,  in  its  cream  being  less  abundant  and 
more  insipid;  in  its  containing  less  curd;  and  in  its 
possessing  a greater  proportion  of  sugar. 

Milk,  cows’.  The  milk  of  women,  mares,  and 
asses,  nearly  agree  in  their  qualities;  that  of  cows, 
goats,  and  sheep,  possess  properties  rather  different. 
Of  those,  cows’  milk  approaches  nearest  to  that 
yielded  by  the  female  breast,  but  differs  very  much  in 
respect  to  the  aroma ; it  contains  a larger  proportion 
of  cream  and  cheese,  and  less  serum  than  hu- 
man inilk;  also  less  sugar  than  mares’  and  asses’ 
milk. 

Cows’  milk  forms  a very  essential  part  of  human 
sustenance,  being  adapted  to  every  state  and  age  of 
the  body;  but  particularly  to  infants,  after  being 
weaned. 

Milk,  ewes’.  This  resembles  almost  precisely  that 
of  the  cow ; its  cream,  however,  is  more  abuildant, 

69 


MIL 


MIL 


and  yields  a butter  not  so  consistent  as  cows’  milk 
butter.  It  makes  excellent  cheese. 

Mick,  goats’.  It  resembles  cows’,  except  in  its 
greater  consistence  : like  that  milk,  it  throws  up  abun- 
dance of  cream,  from  which  butter  is  easily  ob- 
tained. 

Milk,  human.  The  white,  sweetish  fluid,  secreted 
by  the  glandular  fabric  of  the  breasts  of  women.  The 
secretory  organ  is  constituted  by  the  great  conglome- 
rate glands  situated  in  the  fat  of  both  breasts,  above 
the  inusculus  pectoralis  major.  From  each  acinus, 
composing  a mammary  gland,  there  arises  a radical  of 
a lactiferous  or  galactiferous  duct.  All  these  canals, 
gradually  converging,  are  terminated  without  anasto- 
mosis, in  the  papillae  of  the  breasts,  by  many  orifices, 
which,  upon  pressure,  pour  forth  milk.  The  smell  of 
fresh-drawn  milk  is  peculiar,  animal,  fatuous,  and  not 
disagreeable.  Its  taste  sweetish,  soft,  bland,  agreea- 
ble. The  specific  gravity  is  greater  than  that  of  wa- 
ter, but  it  is  lighter  than  blood ; hence  it  swims  on  it. 
t Its  colour  is  white  and  opaque.  Inconsistence  it  is 
oily  and  aqueous.  A drop,  put  on  the  nail,  flows 
slowly  down,  if  the  milk  be  good. 

Tune  of  Secretion. — The  milk  most  frequently  be- 
gins to  be  secreted  in  the  last  months  of  pregnancy ; 
but,  on  the  third  day  after  delivery,  a serous  milk, 
~alled  Colostrum , is  separated;  and  at  length  pure 
milk  is  secreted  very  copiously  into  the  breasts,  that, 
from  its  abundance  often  spontaneously  drops  from 
the  nipples. 

If  the  secretion  of  milk  be  daily  promoted  by  suck- 
ling an  infant,  it  often  continues  many  years,  unless  a 
fresh  pregnancy  supervene.  The  quantity  usually 
secreted  within  twenty-four  hours,  by  nurses,  is  va- 
rious, according  as  the  nourishment  may  be  more  or 
less  chylous.  It  appears  that  not  more  than  two 
pounds  of  milk  are  obtained  from  five  or  six  pounds 
of  meat.  But  there  have  been  known  nurses  who 
have  given  from  their  breasts  two,  or  even  more  than 
three  pounds,  in  addition  to  that  which  their  child  has 
sucked.  That  the  origin  of  the  milk  is  Derived  from 
chyle  carried  with  the  blood  of  the  mammary  arteries 
into  the  glandular  fabric  of  the  breasts,  is  evident  from 
its  more  copious  secretion  a little  after  meals ; its  di- 
minished secretion  from  fasting ; from  the  smell  and 
taste  of  food  or  medicines  in  the  secreted  milk ; and, 
lastly,  from  its  occasional  spontaneous  acescence;  for 
humours  perfectly  animal  become  putrid. 

The  milk  of  a woman  differs:  1.  In  respect  to  food. 
The  milk  of  a woman  who  suckles,  living  upon  vegeto- 
animal  food,  never  acesces  nor  coagulates  spontane- 
ously, although  exposed  for  many  weeks  to  the  heat 
of  a furnace.  But  it  evaporates  gradually  in  an  open 
vessel,  and  the  last  drop  continues  thin,  sweet,  and 
bland.  The  reason  appears  to  be,  that  the  caseous 
and  cremoraceous  parts  cohere  together  by  means  of 
the  sugar,  more  intimately  than  in  the  milk  of  ani- 
mals, and  do  not  so  easily  separate ; hence  its  aces- 
cence is  prevented.  It  does  acesce,  if  mixed  or  boiled 
with  vinegar,  juice  of  lemons,  supertartrate  of  potassa, 
dilute  sulphuric  acid,  or  with  the  human  stomach.  It 
is  coagulated  by  the  acid  of  salt,  or  nitre,  and  by  an 
acid  gastric  juice  of  the  infant;  for  infants  often  vomit 
up  the  coagulated  milk  of  the  nurse.  The  milk  of  a 
suckling  woman,  who  lives  upon  vegetable  food  only, 
like  cows’  milk,  easily  and  of  its  own  accord  acesces, 
and  is  acted  upon  by  all  coagulating  substances  like 
the  milk  of  animals.  2.  In  respect  of  the  time  of  di- 
gestion. During  the  first  hours  of  digestion,  the  chyle 
is  crude,  and  the  milk  less  subacted ; but  towards  the 
twelfth  hour  after  eating,  the  chyle  is  changed  into 
blood,  and  then  the  milk  becomes  yellowish  and  nau- 
seous, and  is  spit  out  by  the  infant.  Hence  the  best 
time  for  giving  suck  is  about  the  fourth  or  fifth  hour 
after  meals.  3.  In  respect  of  the  time  after  delivery. 
The  milk  secreted  immediately  after  delivery  is  serous, 
purges  the  bowels  of  the  infant,  and  is  called  colos- 
trum. But  in  the  following  days  it  becomes  thicker 
and  more  pure,  and  the  longer  a nurse  suckle^, 
the  thicker  the  milk  is  secreted ; thus  new-born  infants 
cannot  retain  the  milk  of  a nurse  who  has  given  suck 
for  a twelvemonth,  on  account  of  its  spissitude.  4. 
In  respect  of  food  and  medicines.  Thus,  if  a nurse 
eat  garlic,  the  milk  becomes  highly  impregnated  with 
its  odour,  and  is  disagreeable.  If  she  indulge  too  freely 
in  the  use  of  wine  or  beer,  the  infant  becomes  ill. 
From  giving  a purging  medicine  to  a nurse,  the  child 


also  is  purged ; and,  lastly,  children  affected  with  tor- 
mina of  the  bowels,  arising  from  acids,  are  often  cured 
by  giving  the  nurse  animal  food.  5.  In  respect  of  the 
affections  of  the  mind.  There  are  frequent  examples  of 
infants  being  seized  with  convulsions,  from  sucking 
mothers  irritated  by  anger.  An  infant  of  one  year  old, 
while  he  sucked  milk  from  hie  enraged  mother,  on  a 
sudden  was  seized  with  a fatal  hremorrhage,  and  died. 
Infants  at  the  breast  in  a short  time  pine  away,  if  the 
nurse  be  afflicted  with  grievous  care;  and  there  are 
also  infants  who,  after  every  coition  of  the  mother, 
or  even  if  she  menstruate,  are  taken  ill. 

The  use  of  the.  mother’s  milk  is,  1.  It  affords  the 
natural  aliment  to  the  new-born  infant,  as  milk  differs 
little  from  chyle.  Those  children  are  the  stronge  t 
who  are  nourished  the  longest  by  the  mother’s  miik. 
2.  The  colostrum  should  not  be  rejected ; for  it  relaxes 
the  bowels,  which,  in  new-born  infants,  ought  to  be 
open,  to  clear  them  of  the  meconium.  3.  Lactation 
defends  the  mother  from  a dangerous  reflux  of  the 
milk  into  the  blood,  whence  lacteal  metastasis,  and 
leucorrhcea,  are  so  frequent  in  lying-in  women,  who 
do  not  give  suck.  The  motion  of  the  milk  also  being 
hastened  through  the  breast  by  the  sucking  of  the 
child,  prevents  the  very  common  induration  of  the 
breast,  which  arises  in  consequence  of  the  milk  being 
stagnated.  4.  Men  may  live  upon  milk,  unless  they 
have  been  accustomed  to  the  drinking  of  wine.  For 
all  nations,  the  Japanese  alone  excepted,  use  milk,  and 
many  live  upon  it  alone. 

Milk,  mares’.  This  is  thinner  than  that  of  the 
cow,  but  scarcely  so  thin  as  human  milk.  Its  cream 
cannot  be  converted  into  butter  by  agitation.  Th« 
whey  contains  sugar. 

Milk-blotches.  An  eruption  of  white  vesicles, 
which  assume  a dark  colour,  resembling  the  blacken- 
ing of  the  small-pox,  and  are  succeeded  by  scabs  pro- 
ducing an  ichorous  matter,  attended  with  considerable 
itching.  It  generally  appears  on  the  forehead  and 
scalp, "extending  half  over  the  face,  and  at  times  even 
proceeding  farther.  The  period  of  its  attack  is  th* 
time  of  teething ; and  it  is  probably  the  same  disease 
as  the  crusta  laclea. 

Milk-fever.  See  Puerperal  fever. 

Milk-teeth.  See  Teeth. 

Milk-thistle.  See  Carduus  marianus. 

MILK-VETCH.  See  Astragalus  excapus 

MILK- WORT.  See  Poly  gala  vulgaris. 

Milk  wort , rattle-snake  root.  See  Poly  gala  senega. 

MILLEFO  LIUM.  (From  mille,  a thousand,  and 
folium,  a leaf : named  from  its  numerous  leaves.)  See 
Achil}ea  millefolium. 

Millemo'rbia.  (From  mille,  a thousand,  and  mor- 
bus, a disease : so  called  from  its  use  in  many  diseases.) 
See  Scrophularia  nodosa. 

Mille'ped.e.  See  Oniscus  asellus. 

MILLE'PES.  (From  mille,  a thousand,  andpes,  a 
foot:  named  from  their  numerous  feet.)  See  Oniscus 
asellus. 

[MILLER,  Edward,  M.D.,  was  a nativeof  Dover, 
in  the  state  of  Delaware.  He  was  born  on  the  9th  of 
May,  1760.  Dr.  Miller,  in  the  year  1784,  commenced 
the  practice  of  medicine  in  the  village  of  Frederica,  a 
short  distance  from  his  native  town,  in  Delaware  ; but 
soon  afterward  removed  to  Somerset  county,  in  Mary- 
land. Here  also  his  stay  was  short.  In  1786  he  re- 
turned to  Dover,  and  entered  on  the  practice  of  his 
profession  in  his  native  place. 

In  1*796  he  removed  from  Dover  to  the  city  of  New- 
York.  Here  he  soon  conciliated  the  esteem  and  confi- 
dence of  his  medical  brethren ; and  notwithstanding  the 
many  disadvantages  under  which  a stranger  engages 
in  the  competition  for  medical  practice  in  a great  city, 
he  succeeded  beyond  his  most  sanguine  expectations. 
His  business,  in  a few  months,  became  such  as  to  afford 
him  an  ample  support,  and  continued  to  become  more 
and  more  extensive  until  his  death. 

In  a few  weeks  after  his  removal  to  New-York,  Dr. 
Miller,  in  connexion  with  his  friends,  Dr.  Mitchill  and 
the  late  Dr.  Elihu  H.  Smith,  formed  the  plan  of  a peri- 
odical publication  to  be  devoted  to  medical  sc»ence. 
Their  prospectus  was  issued  in  November  of  that  year 
(1796);  and  in  the  month  of  August,  1797,  the  first 
number  of  the  work  appeared  under  the  title  of  the 
“ Medical  Repository .”  The  commencement  of  this 
publication  undoubtedly  forms  an  era  in  the  literary 
and  medical  history  of  our  country.  No  work  of  a 


MIN 


MIN 


Bimilar  kind  had  ever  appeared  in  tlie  United  Stated. 
Its  influence  in  exciting  and  recording  medical  inqui- 
ries, and  in  improving  medical  science,  soon  became 
apparent.  It  led  to  the  establishment  of  other  similar 
works  in  different  parts  of  our  own  country  as  well  as 
of  Europe  ; and  may  thus,  with  great  truth,  be  said  to 
have  contributed  more  largely,  than  any  other  single 
publication,  to  that  taste  for  medical  investigation  and 
improvement,  which  has  been  for  a number  of  years 
so  conspicuously  and  rapidly  advancing  on  this  side  of 
the  Atlantic.  Dr.  Miller  lived  to  see  the  fifteenth  vo- 
lume of  this  work  nearly  brought  to  a close,  and  rejoiced 
in  the  generous  competition  which  it  had  been  so  evi- 
dently the  means « oxciting. 

At  the  close  of  c*e  season  of  1805,  in  his  official 
character  as  resident  physician,  he  addressed  to  his 
■ excellency  Governor  Lewis  a report  of  the  rise,  pro- 
gress, and  termination  of  the  yellow  fever.  To  this 
detail  he  added  an  exhibition  and  defence  of  the 
doctrine  concerning  the  origin  of  yellow  fever,  which, 
after  much  inquiry  and  long  experience,  he  had  adopted. 
This  report  was  shortly  afterward  laid  before  the  pub- 
lic; and  has  been  pronounced  by  good  judges  to  be 
one  of  the  most  luminous,  forcible,  comprehensive, 
and  satisfactory  defences  of  the  doctrine  which  it  sup- 
ports, that  ever  appeared,  within  the  same  compass,  in 
any  language. 

He  fell  a victim  to  an  inflammatory  attack  upon  the 
lungs,  which,  after  symptoms  of  convalescence,  de- 
generated into  a typhus  lever,  which  put  an  end  to  his 
valuable  life  on  the  17th  day  of  March,  1812,  in  the 
52d  year  of  his  age. 

Dr.  Miller’s  published  writings  were  not  numerous. 
A lew  of  them  were  originally,  printed  in  detached 
pamphlets  ; but  the  greater  part  first  appeared  in  the 
Medical  Repository.  Since  his  decease  they  have  been 
collected  and  reprinted  in  one  large  octavo  volume. 

The  moral  and  Social  qualities  of  Dr.  Miller  were 
worthy  of  no  less  praise  than  his  talents,  learning,  and 
professional  skill.  His  humanity  and  practical  benefi- 
cence were  no  less  conspicuous.  These  were  mani- 
fested throughout  his  professional  life,  and  especially 
in  his  attendance  on  the  poor  and  friendless,  to  an 
extent  truly  rare. 

His  delicacy  in  conversation  has  been  seldom  equal- 
led, perhaps  never  exceeded.  Nothing  ever  escaped 
from  his  lips,  even  in  his  most  unreserved  moments,  to 
which  the  most  refined  and  scrupulous  might  not  listen 
without  offence. 

Nor  was  his  temperance  less  conspicuous  than  his 
delicacy.  He  not  only  avoided  the  use  of  ardent 
spirits,  with  a scrupulousness  which  to  some  might 
appear  excessive,  but  he  was  unusually  sparing,  and 
even  abstemious,  in  the  use  of  every  kind  of  drink 
stronger  than  water.  He  rejected  the  use  of  tobacco 
in  every  form,  not  only  as  an  odious  and  unhealthy 
practice,  but  also  as  a most  insidious  provocation  to  the 
love  of  drinking. — Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

MILLET.  See  Panicum  miliaceum. 

Millet , Indian.  See  Panicum  italicum. 

MILL-MOUNTAIN.  See  Linum  catharticum. 

Milpho'sis.  MtX0w<«s.  A baldness  of  the  eye- 
brows. 

Mi'ltos.  MtXroj,  Red-lead. 

MILT  WASTE.  See  Asplenium  cetcrach. 

Milzade'lla.  (From  milza,  the  Spanish  for  the 
spleen:  so  called  from  its  supposed  virtues  in  diseases 
of  the  spleen.)  The  herb  archangel.  See  Angelica 
archangelica. 

MIMOSA.  (From  mimus,  an  actor,  or  imitator, 
meaning  a sort  of  imitative  plant,  the  motionsof  which 
mimic  the  sensibility  of  animal  life.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linna>an  system.  Class,  Poly- 
gamia  ; Order,  Monacia.  The  sensitive  plant. 

Mimosa  catechu.  The  former  name  of  the  tree 
which  affords  catechu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

Mimosa  nilotica.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Mimosa  Senegal.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  from  which  the  guin  Senegal  exudes.  The  gum  is 
brought  from  the  country  through  which  the  river 
Senegal  runs,  in  loose  or  single  drops,  much  larger 
than  gum-arabic.  It  is  similar  in  virtue  and  quality 
to  the  gum-arabic,  and  the  gum  which  exudes  in  this 
climate  from  the  cherry-tree.  See  Acacia  vera. 

Minder  crus  spirit.  See  Ammonite  acetatis  liquor. 

MINERAL.  ( Mineralis ; from  mina , a mine  of 
metal.)  A substance  which  does  no,.  possess  organiza- 


tion, or  is  not  produced  by  an  organized  body,  belongs 
to  the  division  of  the  production  of  nature  called  mi- 
nerals. Among  this  varied  class  of  materials,  which 
require  the  attention  of  the  chemist  and  manufacturer, 
many  are  compounded  of  such  principles,  and  formed 
under  such  circumstances  and  situations  in  the  earth, 
that  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  them  without  having 
recourse  to  the  test  of  experiment ; several  are  formed 
with  considerable  regularity  as  to  the  proportion  of 
their  principle,  their  fracture,  their  colour,  specific 
gravity,  and  figure  of  crystallization. 

Mineral  bodies  which  enter  into  the  composition  of 
the  globe,  are  classed  by  mineralogists  under  four 
heads : — 1.  Earths.  2.  Salts.  3.  Inflammable  fossils  ; 
and,  4.  Metals  and  their  ores.  Under  the  term  earths, 
are  arranged  stones  and  earths,  which  have  no  taste, 
and  do  not  burn  when  heated  with  contact  of  air. 

Under  the  second,  salts,  or  those  saline  substances 
which  melt  in  water  and  do  not  burn,  they  require, 
according  to  Kirwan,  less  than  two  hundred  times  their 
weight  of  water  to  dissolve  them. 

By  inflammable  fossils  are  to  be  understood  all  those 
minerals  not  soluble  in  water,  and  exhibiting  a flame 
more  or  less  evident  when  exposed  to  fire  in  contact 
with  air. 

The  fourth  class,  or  ores,  are  compound  bodies.  Na- 
ture has  bestowed  their  proper  metallic  appearance  on 
some  substances,  and  when  this  is  the  case,  or  they  are 
alloyed  with  other  metals,  or  semi-metals,  they  are 
•called  native  metals.  But  such  as  are  distinguished, 
as  they  commonly  are,  in  mines,  in  combination  with 
some  other  unmetallic  substances,  are  said  to  be  mine- 
ralized. The  substance  that  sets  them  in  that  state,  is 
called  the  mineralizer,  and  the  compound  of  both  an 
ore.  For  example,  in  the  common  ore  of  copper,  this 
metal  is  found  oxidized,  and  the  oxide  combined  with 
sulphur.  The  copper  may  be  considered  as  mineral 
ized  with  oxygen  and  sulphur,  and  the  compound  of 
the  three  bodies  forms  an  ore  of  copper. 

[MINERALS,  arrangement  of.  The  systematic 
arrangement  of  minerals  by  writers  on  the  subject 
differs  very  materially.  The  only  elementary  work 
on  mineralogy  published  in  this  country  is  by’Parker 
Cleaveland,  professor  in  Bowdoin  College,  State  of 
Maine.  As  it  is  a work  highly  creditable  to  the  author, 
and  much  approved  as  a standard  work,  we  give  a tabu- 
lar view  of  his  arrangement. 

TABULAR  VIEW.* 

CLASS.  1. — Substances  not  metallic , composed  en- 
tirely, or  in  part,  of  an  Acid. 

This  class  contains  four  orders.  In  the  first  order, 
the  acid  is  free  or  not  combined;  in  the  second,  it  is 
combined  with  an  alkali ; in  the  third,  with  an  earth  or 
earths;  and  in  the  fourth,  with  both  an  alkali  and  an 
earth.  Hence  the  presence  of  an  acid,  provided  it  be 
not  united  to  a metallic  base,  characterizes  this  class. 

ORDER  I. — Acids  not  combined. 

The  base  of  the  acid  determines  the  genus.  All  the 
species  in  this  order  have  oxygen,  as  a common  ingre- 
dient, so  combined  with  a base,  as  to  produce  an  acid 
GENUS  I 

Spec.  1.  Sulphuric  acid. 

2.  Sulphurous  acid. 

GENUS  H. 

Spec.  1.  Muriatic  acid. 

GENUS  III. 

1.  Carbonic  acid. 

GENUS  IV. 

1.  Boracic  acid. 

ORDER  ll.— Alkaline  salts. 

These  salts  are  composed  of  an  alkali,  united  to  an 
acid.  Hence  an  alkali,  so  combined  as  to  form  a salt, 
characterizes  this  order.  Each  alkali  designates  a 
genus. 

GENUS  I. — AMMONIA 
Spec.  1.  Sulphate  of  Ammonia. 

2.  Muriate  of  Ammonia. 

GENUS  II.— POTASH. 

1.  Nitrate  of  Potash. 

•In  the  tabular  view,  subspecies  are  distinguished  from  varieties 
by  their  position  in  the  column.  A number  of  species,  recently 
discovered,  and  concerning  which  little  is  yet  known,  are  alphabeti- 
cally arranged  in  an  appendix  to  the  earthy  class.  Those  specie* 
which  have  never  been  analyzed,  are  marked  by  an  asterisk.  Those 
species  which  arc  prided  in  Italics,  liave  not  hitherto  been  observed 
in  crystals,  fior  even  with  a crystalline  structure. 


MIN 


MIN 


GENUS  III—  SODA. 

Spec.  1.  Sulphate  of  Soda. 

2.  Muriate  of  Soda. 

3.  Carbonate  of  Soda. 

4.  Borate  of  Soda. 

ORDER  III.— Earthy  Salts. 

These  consist  of  an  earth,  or  of  earths,  united  to  an 
acid.  Hence  an  earth,  so  combined  as  to  form  a salt, 
characterizes  this  order.  Each  genus  is  determined  by 
the  earth  it  contains. 

GENUS  I. — Barytes. 

SUBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES 

Spec.  1.  Sulphate  of  Barytes. 

lamellar 

columnar 

radiated 

fibrous 

concreted 

granular 

compact 

earthy 

fetid 

2.  Carbonate  of  Barytes. 

GENUS  U.—STROMTMM. 

Spec.  1.  Sulphate  of  Strontian. 

foliated 

fibrous 

calcareous 

2.  Carbonate  of  Strontian. 

GENUS  III.— LIME. 

Spec.  1.  Arseniateof  Lime. 

2.  Nitrate  of  Lime. 

3.  Phosphate  of  Lime. 

Apatite. 

Asparagus  stone, 
fibrous 
amorphous 
siliceous 

4.  Fluate  of  Lime. 

Fluor  spar, 
compact 
earthy 
argillaceous 

5.  Sulphate  of  Lime. 

Selenite. 

massive 

Gypsum. 

fibrous 

granular 

compact 

branchy 

snowy 

earthy 

Plaster  stone. 

6.  Anhydrous  Sulphate  of  Lime. 

sparry 

compact 

silico-anhydrous 

7 Carbonate  of  Lime. 

calcareous  spar 
crystallized 
laminated 
granular 
fibrous 
compact 

coarse  grained 
Chalk. 

Agaric  Mineral. 

Fossil  Farina, 
concreted 
Pisolite. 

Oolite. 

calcareous  sinter 
Tufa. 

Argentine. 

* Silvery  chalk, 
magnesian 
common 
Dolomite, 
siliceous 
Madreporite. 

Calp. 

fetid 

bituminous 
ferruginous 
Brown  spar. 

IS 


SUBSPECIES 

Spec.  and  varieties. 

Marl. 

indurated 

common 

Bituminous  marlite. 

8.  Arragonite. 

fibrous 

coralloidal 

9.  Siliceous  Borate  of  Lime. 

Botryolite. 

GENUS  TV. — MA  GNESIJ1. 

Spec.  1.  Sulphate  of  Magnesia. 

2.  Carbonate  of  Magnesia. 

3 Borate  of  Magnesia. 

4.  Fluate  of  Magnesia. 

GENUS  V. — AL  UMIJYE. 

Spec.  1.  Mellate  of  Alumine. 

ORDER  IV. — Salts  with  an  alkaline  and  earthy  base. 
Spec.  1.  Alkaline  sulphate  of  Alumine. 

2.  Fluate  of  Soda  and  Alumine. 

3.  Glauberite. 

CLASS  II. — Earthy  compounds , or  stones. 

The  minerals  which  belong  to  this  class,  are  com- 
posed chiefly  of  earths,  combined  with  each  other: 
they  frequently  contain  some  metallic  oxide,  and  some- 
times an  alkali,  or  acid. 

Alumine,  si- 1 

lex  andfluor-<  Spec.  1.  Topaz. 


ic  acid. 


Alumine 
nearly  pure. 


line  and  N 
lesia.  i 


Alumine  and 
water. 
Alumine : 
magnesia. 

Alumine  and  N 
silex.  l 

Alumine,  si-  ( 
lex  and  lime.  < 
Alumine,  si-  t 
lex  and  zinc.  f 
Ittria  & silex.  j 
Zirconia  and  i 
silex.  \ 


Silex  nearly^ 
pure. 


Pyonite. 

2.  Sapphire. 

perfect 

blue 

violet 

red 

yellow 

limpid 

Corundum. 

Adamantine  spra. 
Emery. 

3.  Disaspore. 

4.  Wavellite. 

5.  Spinelle. 

Ruby. 

Ceylanite. 

6.  Fibrolile. 

7.  Cyanite. 

8.  Staurotide. 

9.  Chrysoberyl. 

10.  Gahnite. 

11.  Gadolinite. 

12.  Zircon. 

Jargon, 

Hyacinth. 

13.  Quartz. 

common 
limpid 
smoky 
yellow 
blue 
rose  red 
irrsed 
aventurine 
milky 
greasy 
radiated 
tabular 
granular 
arenaceous 
pseudomorphous 

Amethyst. 

Prase. 

ferruginous 

yellow 

red 

greenish 

fetid 

Cat’s  eye. 

Chalcedony. 

common 

Cacholong 

Carnelian. 

Sardonyx. 

Plasma. 


MIN 


MIN 


Silex,  alu- 
mine,  and  aI-< 
kali. 


Silex,  alu- 
mine,  lime,  < 
and  alkali. 


Silex,  alu- 
mine,  and 
gluctne. 


Silex,  alu- 
mine,  and  < 
lime. 


SUBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES. 

Hyalite. 

Heliotrope. 

Chrysoprase 

Opal. 

precious 

common 

Hydrophane. 

Girasole. 

Semi-opal. 

Flint. 

swimming 

Homstone. 

Silicicalce. 

Buhrstone. 

Jasper. 

common 

striped 

Egyptian 

Spec.  14.  Tripoli. 

15.  Porcellanite. 

16.  Siliceous  Slate. 

Basanite. 

17.  Petro silex. 

18.  Clinkstone. 

19.  Pumice. 

20.  Obsidian. 

vitreous 

Pearlstone. 

21.  Pitchstone. 

22.  Spodumen. 

23.  Lepidolite. 

24.  Mica. 


laminated 

lamellar 

prismatic 

25.  Leucite. 

26.  Fettstein. 

27.  Lapis  Lazuli. 

Lazulite. 

28.  Schor. 


common 

Tourmaline. 

Indicolite. 

Rubellite. 

29.  Andaluzite. 

30.  Feldspar. 

common 

Adularia. 

opalescent 

aventurine 

Petunlze. 

granular 

compact 

31.  Jade. 

Nephrite. 

Saussurite. 

Axestone. 

32.  Emerald. 

precious 

Beryl. 

33.  Euclase. 

34.  Basalt. 

columnar 

tabular 

globular 

amorphous 

35.  * Wacke. 

36.  Dipyre. 

37.  Scapolite. 

38.  Wernerite. 

39.  Axinite. 

40.  Garnet. 


precious 

Pyrope. 

common 

Melanite. 

manganesian 

41.  Aplome. 

42.  Epidote. 

Zoisite. 

Skorza. 

manganesian 

43.  Cinnamon  Stone. 

44.  Allochroite. 

45.  Idocrase. 

46.  *Meionite. 


Silex,  alu- 
mine,  lime,  « 
and  water. 


Silex,  alu-  ' 
mine,  soda,  f 
and  muriatic  £ 
acid.  ' 

Silex,  alu- 
mine,  alkali,  <| 
and  water.  I 

Silex,  lime,  C 
and  cerium.  \ 
Silex,  lime,  J 
and  iron.  \ 
Silex,  lime,  1 
and  water.  < 
Silex,  bary-  I 
tee,  alumine,  < 
and  water.  ( 

Magnesia  ) 
and  silex.  j 


Silex,  mag-  < 
nesia,&.  lime.' 


Silex, magne- 
sia, alumine,  < 
and  lime. 


Silex,  magne- 
sia, and  alu- 
mine. 


Silex  & alu- 
mine. 


SUBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES. 

Spec.  47.  Byssolite. 

48.  Prehnile. 

crystallized 

Koupholite. 

fibrous 

49.  ^Edelite. 

50.  Stilbite. 

51.  Zeolite. 

mealy 

Crocalite. 

Needlestone. 

52.  *Laumonite. 

53.  *Melilite. 


54.  Sodalite. 


55.  Natrolite. 

56.  Analcime. 

57.  Bildstein. 

58.  Nacrite. 

59.  Chabasie. 

60.  Allenite. 

61.  Yenite. 

62.  Schaalstein. 

63.  Ichthyophthalmite 

64.  Harmotome. 

65.  Chrysolite. 

common 

Olivine. 

66.  Labrador  Stone. 

67.  Treinolite. 

common 

fibrous 

Baikalite. 

68.  Asbestus. 

Amianthus., 
common 
Mountain  Cork 
ligniform 
compact 

69.  Diopside. 

70.  Sahlite. 

71.  Amianthoide. 

72.  Augite. 

common 

Coccolke. 

73.  Hornblende. 

common 

Basaltic 

lamellar 

fibrous 

slaty 

Actynolite. 

common 

acicular 

74.  Diallage. 

granular 

resplendent 

Bronzite. 

75.  *Macle. 

76.  Native  Magnesia. 

77.  Magnesite. 

Keffekil. 

Argillo-murite. 

78.  Serpentine. 

precious 

common 

79.  Steatite. 

common 

Potstone. 

80.  Talc. 

common 

indurated 

81.  Chlorite. 

common 
slaty 
foliated 
Green  earth. 

82.  Sommite. 

83.  Anthophyllite. 

84.  Pinite. 


73 


MIN 


MIN 


Spec.  85.  Argillaceous  Slate. 


Gladstone. 

Clay. 


SUBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES. 

Argillite. 

Shale. 
Novaculite. 
Aluminous  Slate, 
graphic 


Native  Argill. 

Collyrite. 

Kaolin. 

Cimolite. 

adhesive 

Potter’s 

Lithcmarge. 

Fuller’s  Earth. 

Bole. 

Reddle. 

Yellow  Earth. 
Umber. 


88.  Alum-stone. 

Appendix. 

89.  *Bergmanite. 

90.  *Chusite. 

91.  *Fuscite. 

92.  * Gabromlc. 

93.  *Haiiyene. 

94.  *Iolite. 

95.  *Petalite. 

9G.  *Pseudo-sornmite.. 

97.  * Siderocleple. 

98.  *Spinellane. 

99.  *Spinthere. 

CLASS  III. — Combustibles. 
Spec.  1.  Hydrogen  Gas. 


Sulphur. 

Bitumen. 


Amber. 

Diamond. 

Anthracite. 


carburetted 

sulphuretted 


Naptha. 

Petrolium. 

Maltha. 

elastic 

Asphattum. 

Retinasphaitum. 


slaty 


granular 

conchoidal 

7.  Graphite. 

columnar 

foliated 

granulat 

8.  Coal. 

cannel 

slaty 

coarse 

9.  Lignite. 

Jet. 

brittle 

Bituminous  Wood. 

brown 

earthy 

10.  Peat. 

fibrous 

compact 

CLASS  IV.— Ores. 
GENUS  I .—GOLD. 
Spec.  1.  Native  Gold. 

GENUS  II .—PLATIMA. 
Spec.  1.  Native  Platina. 

GENUS  IU .—SILVER. 
Spec.  L Native  silver. 

auriferous 

2.  Antimonial  Silver. 

3.  Arsenical  Silver. 

4.  Sulphuret  of  Silver. 

5.  Sulphuretted  Antimonial  Silver. 

brittle 

6.  Black  Silver 

7. 

8. 


Carbonate  of  Silver. 
Muriate  of  Silver. 


71 


argillaceous 


eOBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES. 

GENUS  IV  —MERCURY. 

Spec.  1.  Motive  Mercury. 

2.  Argental  Mercury. 

3.  Sulphuret  of  Mercury. 

common 

fibrous 

bituminous 

4.  Muriate  of  Mercury. 

GENUS  V.— COPPER. 

Spec.  1.  Native  Copper. 

2.  Sulphuret  of  Copper. 

pseudomorphou 

3.  Pyritous  Copper. 

variegated 

4.  Gray  Copper. 

arsenical 

antimonial 

5.  Red  Oxide  of  Copper. 

foliated 

capillary 

compact 

ferruginous 

6.  Azure  Carbonate  of  Copper. 

earthy 

7.  Green  Carbonate  of  Copper. 

fibrous 

compact 

earthy 

ferruginous 

8.  Dioptase. 

9.  Muriate  of  Copper. 

sandy 

JO.  Sulphate  of  Copper. 

11.  Phosphate  of  Copper. 

12.  Arseni  ate  of  Copper. 

obtuse  octaedtal 
acute  cctaedral 
foliated 
prismatic 
fibrous 
ferruginous 
GENUS  Yl.—JROM 
Spec.  1.  Native  Iron. 


2.  Arsenical  Iron. 


argentiferous 


3.  Sulphuret  of  Iron. 

common 

radiated 

hepatic 

magnetic 

arsenical 

4.  Magnetic  Oxide  of  Iron. 

Native  magnet. 
Iron  sand. 

5.  Specular  Oxide  of  Iron. 

micaceous 

6.  Red  Oxide  of  Iron. 

scaly 

Hematite. 

compact 

ochrey 

7 Brown  Oxide  of  Iron. 

scaly  » 

Hematite, 
compact 
ochrey 

8.  Argillaceous  Oxide  of  Iron. 

columnar 
granular 
lenticular 
nodular 
common 
og  ore. 


9.  Carbonate  of  Iron. 

10.  Sulphate  of  Iron. 

11.  Phosphate  of  Iron. 


12.  Arseniate  of  Iron. 

13.  Chromate  of  Iron. 


foliated 

earthy 

Green  iron  earth. 


crystallized 

granular 

amorphous 


MIN 


MIN 


SUBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES. 

GENUS  vn.— LEAD. 

Spec.  1.  Native  Lead. 

2.  Sulphuret  of  Lead. 

common 
compact 
fibrous 
antimonial 
argento  antimonial 
argento-bismuthal 

3.  Oxide  of  Lead. 

earthy 

4.  Carbonate  of  Lead. 

crystallized 

acicular 

columnar 

compact 

black 

5.  Carbonated  Muriate  of  Lead. 

6.  Sulphate  of  Lead. 

7.  Phosphate  of  Lead. 

acicular 

arseniated 

bluish 

8.  Arseniate  of  Lead. 

9.  Chromate  of  Lead. 

10  Molybdate  of  Lead. 

GENUS  VIII.— TIN. 

Spec.  1.  Oxide  of  Tin. 

fibrous 

2.  Pyritous  Tin . 

GENUS  IX.— ZINC. 

Spec.  1.  Sulphuret  of  Zinc. 

yellow 

brown 

black 

fibrous 

2.  Red  Oxide  of  Zinc. 

3.  Siliceous  Oxide  of  Zinc. 

foliated 

common 

4.  Carbonate  of  Zinc. 

5.  Sulphate  of  Zinc. 


GENUS  X.— NICKEL. 
Spec.  I.  Native  Nickel. 

2.  Arsenical  Nickel. 

3.  Oxide  of  Nickel. 

GENUS  XI.— COBALT. 

Spec.  1.  Arsenical  Cobalt. 

dull 

2.  Gray  Cobalt. 

3.  Sulphuret  of  Cobalt. 

4.  Oxide  of  Cobalt. 

black 

brown 

yellow 

5.  Sulphate  of  Cobalt. 

6.  Arseniate  of  Cobalt. 

acicular 

earthy 

argentiferous 

GENUS  XII  — MANGANESE. 
Si  ec.  1.  Oxide  of  Manganese. 

radiated 

compact 

earthy 

ferruginous 

2.  Sulphuret  of  Manganese. 

3.  Carbonate  of  Manganese. 

4.  Phosphate  of  Manganese. 

GENUS  XIII.— ARSENIC. 
Spec.  1.  Native  Arsenic. 

concreted 

specular 

amorphous 

2.  Sulphuret  of  Arsenic. 

Realgar. 

Orpiment. 

Oxide  of  Arsenic. 


SUBSPECIES 

AND  VARIETIES. 

GENUS  XIV.— BISMUTH 
Spec.  1.  Native  Bismuth. 

2.  Sulphuret  of  Bismuth. 

3.  Oxide  of  Bismuth. 

GENUS  XX.— ANTIMONY. 

Spec.  1.  Native  Antimony. 

arsenical 

2.  Sulphuret  of  Antimony. 

radiated 

foliated 

compact 

plumous 

3.  Oxide  of  Antimony. 

earthy 

4.  Sulphuretted  Oxide  of  Antimony. 

GENUS  XVI.—  TELLURIUM. 

Spec.  1.  Native  Tellurium. 

auro-  argent!  ferous. 

auro-plumbiferous. 

GENUS  XVII.— CHROME. 

GENUS  XVIII.— MOLYBDENA. 

Spec.  1.  Sulphuret  of  Molybdena. 

GENUS  XIX.—  TUNGSTEN. 

Spec.  1.  Calcareous  Oxide  of  Tungsten. 

2.  Ferruginous  Oxide  of  Tungsten. 

GENUS  XX.— TITANIUM. 

Spec.  1.  Red  Oxide  of  Titanium. 

2.  Ferruginous  Oxide  of  Titanium. 

Menachanite 

Nigrine. 

Iserine. 

3.  Silico-calcareous  Oxide  of  Titanium 

4.  Octaedral  Oxide  of  Titanium. 

GENUS  XXI. — URANIUM 
Spec.  1.  Black  Oxide  of  Uranium. 

2.  Green  Oxide  of  Uranium. 

crystallized 

earthy 

GENUS  XXII. — COL  UMBIUM. 

Spec.  1.  Oxide  of  Coluinbium. 

ferruginous 

Ittrious 

GENUS  XXIII.— CERIUM. 

Spec.  1.  Oxide  of  Cerium. 

Mineral  caoutchouc.  See  Caoutchouc. 

Mineral  oil.  Petroleum. 

Mineral  pitch.  Bitumen. 

Mineral  poisons.  See  Poisons. 

Mineral  salts.  See  Salts. 

Mineral  waters.  Aquce  minerales.  Aquce  mcdi- 
cinales.  Waters  holding  minerals  in  solution  are 
called  mineral  waters.  But  as  all  water,  in  a mineral 
state,  is  impregnated,  either  more  or  less,  with  some 
mineral  substances,  the  name  mineral  waters , should 
be  confined  to  such  waters  as  are  sufficiently  impreg- 
nated with  mineral  matters  to  produce  some  sensible 
effects  on  the  animal  economy,  and  either  to  cure  or 
prevent  some  of  the  diseases  to  which  the  human  body 
is  liable.  On  this  account,  these  waters  might  be  with 
much  more  propriety  called  medicinal  waters , were  not 
the  name  by  which  they  are  commonly  known  too 
firmly  established  by  long  use. 

The  mineral  waters  which  are  the  most  esteemed, 
and  consequently  the  most  resorted  to  for  the  cure  of 
diseases,  are  those  of, 


1.  Aix. 

2.  Barege. 

3.  Bath. 

4.  Bristol. 

5.  Buxton. 

6.  Borset. 

7.  Cheltenham. 

8.  Carlsbad. 

9.  Epsom. 

10.  Harrowgate; 

11.  Hartfell. 

12.  Holywell. 


13.  Malvern. 

74.  Matlock. 

15.  Moftat. 

16.  Pyrmont. 

17.  Scarborough. 

18.  Spa. 

19.  Seidlitz. 

20.  Sea-water. 

21.  Seltzer. 

22.  Tunbridge. 

23.  Vichy,  and  others  of 
less  note. 


For  the  properties  and  virtues  of  these,  consult  their 
respective  heads. 

75 


A SYNOPTICAL  TABLE,  showing  the  Composition  of  MINERAL  WATERS. 


• Tb»t  it.  2,94  contained  in  tlie  sulphate  of  icon,  (this  salt,  when  crystallized,  containing  28  per  cent,  of  oxide  of  iron,  according  to  Kinvan.l  and  1.875  additional  of  oxide  of  iron. 


MIN 


MIN 


Fourcroy  divides  all  mineral  and  medicinal  waters 
into  nine  orders,  viz. 

] . Cold  acidulous  waters. 

2.  Hot  or  thermal  acidulous  waters. 

3.  Sulphuric  saline  waters. 

4.  Muriatic  saline  waters. 

5.  Simple  sulphureous  waters. 

6.  Sulphurated  gaseous  waters. 

7.  Simple  ferruginous  waters. 

8.  Ferruginous  and  acidulous  waters. 

9.  Sulphuric  ferruginous  waters. 

Dr.  Saunders  arranges  mineral  waters  into  the  fol- 
lowing classes : 

1.  Simple  cold. 

2.  . . thermal. 

3.  . . saline. 

4.  Highly  carbonated  alkaline. 

5.  Simple  carbonated  chalybeate. 

6.  Hot  carbonated  chalybeate. 

7.  Highly  carbonated  chalybeate. 

8.  Saline  carbonated  chalybeate. 

9.  Hot  saline  highly  carbonated  chalybeate. 

10.  Vitriolated  chalybeate. 

11.  Cold,  sulphureous. 

12.  Hot,  alkaline,  sulphureous. 

In  order  to  present  the  reader,  under  one  point  of 
view,  with  the  most  conspicuous  features  in  the  com- 
position of  the  mineral  waters  of  this  and  some  other 
countries,  the  preceding  Synoptical  Table  has  been  sub- 
joined, from  Dr.  Saunders’s  work  on  mineral  waters. 

The  reader  will  please  to  observe,  that  under  the 
head  of  Neutral  Purging  Salts , are  included  the  sul- 
phates of  soda  and  magnesia,  and  the  muriates  of  lime, 
soda,  and  magnesia.  The  power  which  the  earthy 
muriates  may  possess  of  acting  on  the  intestinal  canal, 
is  not  quite  ascertained,  but,  from  their  great  solu- 
bility, and  from  analogy  with  salts,  with  similar  com- 
ponent parts,  we  may  conclude  that  this  forms  a prin- 
cipal part  of  their  operation. 

The  reader  will  likewise  observe,  that  where  the 
spaces  are  left  blank,  it  signifies  that  we  are  ignorant 
whether  any  of  the  substance  at  the  head  of  the  co- 
lumn is  contained  in  the  water;  that  the  word  none, 
implies  a certainty  of  the  absence  of  that  substanoe : 
and  the  term  uncertain , means  that  the  substance  is 
contained,  but  that  the  quantity  is  not  known. 

Dr.  Henry,  in  his  epitome  of  chemistry,  gives  the 
following  concise  and  accurate  account  for  the  analysis 
of  mineral  waters: 

Water  is  never  presented  by  nature  in  a state  of  com- 
plete purity.  Even  when  collected  as  it  descends  in 
the  form  of  rain,  chemical  tests  detect  in  it  foreign  in- 
gredients. And  when  it  has  been  absorbed  by  the 
earth,  has  traversed  its  different  strata,  and  is  returned 
to  us  by  springs,  it  is  found  to  have  acquired  various 
impregnations.  The  readiest  method  of  judging  of 
the  contents  of  natural  waters,  is  by  applying  what  are 
termed  tests,  or  reagents,  i.  e.  substances  which,  on 
being  added  to  a water,  exhibit  by  the  phenomena  they 
produce,  the  nature  of  the  saline  and  other  ingredients. 
For  example,  if,  on  adding  an  infusion  of  litmus  to  any 
water,  its  colour  is  changed  to  red,  we  infer  that  the 
water  contains  an  uncombined  acid;  if  this  change 
ensue  even  after  the  water  has  been  boiled,  we  judge 
that  the  acid  is  a fixed  and  not  a volatile  one ; and  if, 
on  adding  the  muriate  of  barytes,  a precipitate  falls 
down,  we  safely  conclude  that  the  peculiar  acid  present 
in  the  water  is  either  entirely  or  in  part  the  sulphuric 
acid.  Dr.  Henry  first  enumerates  the  tests  generally 
employed  in  examining  mineral  waters,  and  describes 
their  application,  and  afterward  indicates  by  what 
particular  tests  the  substances  generally  found  in  wa- 
ters may  be  detected. 

A.  Infusion  of  Litmus.  Syrup  of  Violets , <$-c. 

As  the  infusion  of  litmus  is  apt  to  spoil  by  keeping, 
some  solid  litmus  should  be  kept.  The  infusion  is  pre- 
pared by  steeping  this  substance,  first  bruised  in  a mor- 
tar, and  tied  up  in  a thin  rag,  in  distilled  water,  which 
extracts  its  blue  colour.  If  the  colour  of  the  infusion 
tends  too  much  to  purple,  it  may  be  amended  by  a drop 
or  two  of  pure  ammonia;  but  of  this  no  more  should 
be  added  than  what  is  barely  sufficient,  lest  the  delicacy 
of  the  test  should  be  impaired.  The  syrup  of  violets 
is  not  easily  obtained  pure.  The  genuine  syrup  may 
be  distinguished  from  the  spurious  by  a solution  of 
corrosive  sublimate,  which  changes  the  former  to 
green,  while  it  reddens  the  latter.  When  it  can  be 


procured  genuiue,  it  is  an  excellent  test  of  acids,  and 
may  be  employed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  infusion 
of  litmus.  Paper  stained  with  the  juice  of  the  marsh 
violet,  or  with  that  of  radishes,  answers  a similar  pur- 
pose. In  staining  paper  for  the  purpose  of  a test,  it 
must  be  used  unsized;  or,  if  sized,  it  must  previously 
be  washed  with  warm  water ; because  the  alum  which 
enters  into  the  composition  of  the  size  will  otherwise 
change  tbe  vegetable  colour  to  a red. 

Infusion  of  litmus  is  a test  of  most  uncombined 
acids. 

If  the  infusion  redden  the  unboiled  but  not  the  boiled 
water  under  examination,  or  if  the  red  colour  occa- 
sioned by  adding  the  infusion  to  a reemit  water,  return 
to  blue  on  boiling,  we  may  infer  that  the  acid  is  a vola- 
tile one,  and  most  probably  the  carbonic  acid.  Sul- 
phuretted hydrogen  gas,  dissolved  in  water,  also  red- 
dens litmus,  but  not  after  boiling.  To  ascertain  whether 
the  change  be  produced  by  carbonic  acid,  or  sulphuuret- 
ted  hydrogen,  when  experiment  shows  that  the  red- 
dening cause  is  volatile,  add  a little  lime-water.  This, 
if  carbonic  acid  be  present,  will  occasion  a precipitate, 
which  will  dissolve  with  effervescence,  on  adding  a 
little  muriatic  acid.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen  may  also 
be  contained  in  the  same  water,  which  will  be  ascer- 
tained by  the  tests  hereafter  to  be  described. 

Paper  tinged  with  litmus  is  also  reddened  by  the 
resence  of  carbonic  acid,  but  regains  its  blue  colour 
y drying.  The  mineral  and  fixed  acids  redden  it  per- 
manently. That  these  acids,  however,  may  produce 
their  effect,  it  is  necessary  that  they  should  be  present 
in  a sufficient  proportion. 

Infusion  of  litmus  reddened  by  vinegar — Spirituous 
tincture  of  Brazil-wood — Tincture  of  turmeric  and 
paper  stained  with  each  of  these  three  substances— 
Syrup  of  violets.  All  these  different  tests  have  one 
and  the  same  object. 

1.  Infusion  of  litmus  reddened  by  vinegar,  or  litmus 
paper  reddened  by  vinegar,  has  its  blue  colour  restored 
by  alkalies  and  pure  earths,  and  by  carbonated  alkalies 
and  earths. 

2.  Turmeric  paper  and  tincture  are  changed  to  a 
reddish  brown  by  alkalies,  whether  pure  or  carbo- 
nated, and  by  pure  earths;  but  not  by  carbonated 
earths. 

3.  The  red  infusion  of  Brazil-wood,  and  paper  stain- 
ed with  it,  become  blue  by  alkalies  and  earths,  and 
even  by  the  latter,  when  dissolved  by  an  excess  of  car- 
bonic acid.  In  the  last-mentioned  case,  however,  the 
change  will  either  cease  to  appear  or  be  much  less  re- 
markable, when  the  water  has  been  boiled. 

4.  Syrup  of  violets,  when  pure,  is  by  the  same  causes 
turned  green,  as  also  paper  stained  with  the  juices  of 
violets,  or  radishes. 

B.  Tincture  of  Galls. 

Tincture  of  galls  is  the  test  generally  employed  for 
discovering  iron,  with  all  the  combinations  of  which 
it  produces  a black  tinge,  more  or  less  intense,  ac- 
cording to  the  quantity  of  iron.  The  iron,  however, 
in  order  to  be  detected  by  this  test,  must  be  in  the  state 
of  red  oxide,  or,  if  oxidated  in  a less  degree,  its  effects 
will  not  be  apparent,  unless  after  standing  some  time 
in  contact  with  air.  By  applying  this  test  before  and 
after  evaporation  or  boiling,  we  may  know  whether 
the  iron  be  held  in  solution  by  carbonic  acid,  or  a fixed 
acid ; for, 

1.  If  it  produce  its  effects  before  the  application  of 
heat,  and  not  afterward,  carbonic  acid  is  the  solvent. 

2.  If  after,  as  well  as  before,  a mineral  acid  is  the 
solvent. 

3.  If,  by  the  boiling,  a yellowish  powder  be  precipi- 
tated, and  yet  galls  continue  to  strike  the  water  black 
afterward,  the  iron,  as  often  happens,  is  dissolved  both 
by  carbonic  acid  and  a fixed  acid.  A neat  mode  of  ap- 
plying the  gall  test  was  used  by  Klaproth,  in  his  analy- 
sis of  the  Carlsbad  water.  A slice  of  the  gall-nut  was 
suspended  by  a silken  thread,  in  a large  bottle  of  the  re- 
cent water;  and  so  small  was  the  quantity  of  iron, 
that  it  could  only  be  discovered  in  water  fresh  from  the 
spring. 

C.  Sulphuric  Acid. 

1.  Sulphuric  acid  discovers,  by  a slight  effervescence, 
the  presence  of  carbonic  acid,  whether  unComblned  or 
united  with  alkalies,  or  earths. 

2.  If  lime  be  present,  whether  pure  or  uncombined 
the  addition  of  sulphuric  acid,  occasions,  after  a few 
days,  a white  precipitate. 

77 


MIN 


MIN 


3.  Barytes  is  precipitated  instantly  in  the  form  of  a 
white  powder. 

4.  Nitrous  and  muriatic  salts,  on  adding  sulphuric 
acid  and  applying  heat,  are  decomposed ; and  if  a stop- 
per, moistened  with  pure  ammonia,  be  held  over  the 
vessel,  white  clouds  appear.  For  distinguishing  whe- 
ther nitric  or  muriatic  acid  be  present,  rules  will  be 
given  hereafter. 

Nitric  and  Nitrous  Acid. 

These  acids,  if  they  occasion  effervescence,  give  the 
same  indications  as  the  sulphuric.  The  nitrous  acid 
has  been  lecommended  as  a test  distinguishing  between 
hepatic  waters  that  contain  sulpliuret  of  potassa,  and 
those  that  only  contain  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  In 
the  former  case  a precipitate  ensues  on  adding  nitrous 
acid,  and  a very  foetid  smell  arises ; in  the  latter,  a slight 
cloudiness  only  appears,  and  the  smell  of  the  water  be- 
comes less  disagreeable. 

D.  Oxalic  Acid  and  Oxalates. 

This  acid  is  a most  delicate  test  of  lime,  which  it  se- 
parates from  all  its  combinations. 

1.  If  a water  which  is  precipitated  by  oxalic  acid, 
becomes  milky  on  adding  a watery  solution  of  carbonic 
acid  gas,  or  by  blowing  air  through  it  by  means  of  a 
quill,  or  glass  tube,  we  may  infer  that  pure  lime  (or 
bdryt.es,  which  has  never  yet  been  found  pure  in  water) 
is  present. 

2.  If  the  oxalic  acid  occasion  a precipitate  before  but 
not  after  boiling,  the  lime  is  dissolved  by  an  excess  of 
carbonic  acid. 

3.  If,  after  boiling,  by  a fixed  acid : a considerable 
excess  of  any  of  the  mineral  acids,  however,  prevents 
the  oxalic  acid  from  occasioning  a precipitate,  even 
though  lime  be  present;  because  some  acids  decompose 
the  oxalic,  and  others,  dissolving  the  oxalate  of  lime, 
prevent  it  from  appearing. 

The  oxalates  of  ammonia,  or  of  potassa,  (which  may 
easily  be  formed  by  saturating  their  respective  carbo- 
nates with  a solution  of  oxalic  acid,)  are  not  liable  to 
the  above  objections,  and  are  preferable,  as  reagents, 
to  the  uncombined  acid.  Yet  even  these  oxalates  fail 
to  detect  lime  when  supersaturated  with  muriatic  or 
nitric  acids ; and  if  such  an  excess  be  present,  it  must 
oe  saturated  before  adding  the  test  with  pure  ammonia. 
Fluate  of  ammonia  is  the  best  test  of  lime.  It  is  made 
by  adding  carbonate  of  ammonia  to  diluted  fluoric  acid. 

E.  Pure  Alkalies  and  Carbonated  Alkalies. 

1.  The  pure  fixed  alkalies  precipitate  all  earths  and 
metals,  whether  dissolved  by  volatile  or  fixed  menstrua, 
but  only  in  certain  states  of  dilution : for  example, 
sulphate  of  alumine  may  be  present  in  water,  in  the 
proportion  of  4 grains  to  500,  without  being  discovered 
by  puie  fixed  alkalies.  As  the  alkalies  precipitate  so 
many  substances,  it  is  evident  they  cannot  afford  any 
precise  information  when  employed  as  reagents.  From 
!he  colour  of  the  precipitate,  as  it  approaches  to  pure 
white,  or  recedes  from  it,  an  experienced  eye  will  judge 
that  the  precipitated  earth  contains  less  or  more  of  the 
metallic  admixture. 

2.  Pure  fixed  alkalies  decompose  all  salts  with  basis 
of  ammonia,  which  becomes  evident  by  its  smell,  and 
also  by  the  white  fumes  it  exhibits  when  a stopper  is 
brought  near  it,  moistened  with  muriatic  acid. 

3.  Carbonates  of  potassa  and  soda  have  similar  ef- 
fects. 

4.  Pure  ammonia  precipitates  all  earthy  and  metallic 
salts.  Besidek  this  property,  it  also  imparts  a deep  blue 
colour  to  any  liquid  that  contains  copper  in  a state  of 
solution. 

Carbonate  of  ammonia  has  the  same  properties,  ex- 
cept that  it  does  not  precipitate  magnesia  from  its  com- 
binations. Hence,  to  ascertain  whether  this  earth  be 
present  in  any  solution,  add  the  carbonate  of  ammonia 
till  no  further  precipitation  ensues,  filter  the  liquor,  and 
then  add  pure  ammonia.  If  any  precipitation  now  oc- 
curs, we  may  infer  the  presence  of  magnesia. 

F.  Civic-  Water. 

1.  Lime-water  is  applied  for  the  purposes  of  a test, 
chiefly  for  detecting  carbonic  acid.  Let  any  liquor, 
supposed  to  contain  this  acid,  be  mixed  with  an  equal 
bulk  of  lime-water.  If  carbonic  acid  be  present,  either 
free  or  combined,  a precipitate  will  immediately  ap- 
pear, which,  on  adding  a few  drops  of  muriatic  acid, 
will  immediately  dissolve  with  effervescence. 

2.  Lime-water  will  immediately  show  the  presence 
of  corrosive  sublimate,  by  a brickdust-coloured  sedi- 
ment. Jlf  arsenic  be  present  in  any  liquid,  lime-water, 


when  added,  will  occasion  a precipitate,  consisting'  of 
iime  and  arsenic,  which  is  very  difficultly  soluble  in 
water.  This  precipitate,  when  mixed  up  with  oil,  and 
laid  on  hot  coals,  yields  the  well-known  garlic  smell  of 
arsenic. 

G.  Pure  Barytes , and  its  Solution  in  Water. 

1.  A solution  of  pure  barytes  is  even  more  effectual 
than  lime-water,  in  detecting  the  presence  of  carbonic 
acid,  and  is  much  more  portable  and  convenient;  since 
from  the  crystals  of  this  earth,  the  solution  may  at  any 
time  be  prepared.  In  discovering  fixed  air,  the  solution 
of  barytes  is  used  similarly  to  lime-water ; and,  if  this 
acid  be  present,  gives,  in  like  manner,  a precipitate  so- 
luble with  effervescence  in  muriatic  acid. 

Pure  strontites  has  similar  virtues  as  a test. 

H.  Metals. 

1.  Of  the  metals,  silver  and  mercury  are  tests  of  the 
presence  of  sulphurets,  and  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
gas.  If  a little  quicksilver  be  put  into  a bottle,  contain- 
ing water  impregnated  with  either  of  these  substances, 
its  surface  soon  acquires  a black  film,  and,  on  shaking, 
a blackish  powder  separates  from  it.  Silver  is  imme- 
diately tarnished  from  the  same  cause. 

2.  The  metals  also  may  be  used  as  tests  of  each 
other,  and  on  the  principle  of  elective  affinity.  Thus, 
for  example,  a polished  iron  plate,  immersed  in  a solu- 
tion of  sulphate  of  copper,  soon  acquires  a coat  of  this 
metal,  and  the  same  in  other  similar  examples. 

I.  Sulphate  of  Iron. 

This  is  the  only  one  of  the  sulphates,  except  that 
of  silver,  applicable  to  the  purposes  of  a test.  When 
used  in  this  view,  it  is  generally  employed  to  ascertain 
the  presence  of  oxygenous  gas,  of  which  a natural  wa- 
ter may  contain  a small  quantity. 

A water  suspected  to’* contain  this  gas,  may  be  mixed 
with  a little  recently  dissolved  sulphate  of  iron,  and 
kept  corked  up.  If  an  oxide  of  iron  be  precipitated  in 
the  course  of  a' few  days,  the  water  may  be  inferred  to 
contain  oxygenous  gas. 

Sulphate,  Nitrate,  and  Acetate  of  Silver. 

These  solutions  are,  in  some  measure,  applicable  to 
the  same  purpose. 

1.  They  are  peculiarly  adapted  to  the  discovery  of 
muriatic  acid  and  muriates.  For  the  silver,  quitting 
the  nitric  or  other  acid,  combines  with  the  muriatic, 
and  forms  a flaky  precipitate,  which  at  first  is  white, 
but,  on  exposure  to  the  sun’s  light,  acquires  a violet  co- 
lour. This  precipitate  Dr.  Black  states  to  contain,  in 
1000  parts,  as  much  muriatic  acid  as  would  form  425 
parts  and  a half  of  crystallized  muriate  of  soda,  which 
estimate  scarcely  differs  at  all  from  that  of  Klaproth. 
A precipitation,  however,  may  arise  from  other  causes, 
which  it  may  be  proper  to  state. 

2.  The  solutions  of  silver  in  acids  are  precipitated  by 
carbonated  alkalies  and  earths.  The  agency  of  these 
may  be  prevented  by  previously  adding  a few  drops  of 
the  same  acid  in  which  the  silver  is  dissolved. 

3.  The  nitrate  and  acetate  of  silver  are  decomposed 
by  the  sulphuric  and  sulphurous  acids ; but  this  may 
be  prevented  by  adding  previously  a few  drops  of  nitrate 
or  acetate  of  barytes,  and  after  allowing  the  precipitate 
to  subside,  the  clear  liquor  may  be  decanter!,  and  the 
solution  of  silver  added.  Should  a precipitation  now 
take  place,  the  presence  of  muriatic  acid,  or  some  one 
of  its  combinations,  may  be  suspected.  To  obviate 
uncertainty,  whether  a precipitation  be  owing  to  sul- 
phuric or  muriatic  acid,  a solution  of  sulphate  of  silver 
may  be  employed,  which  is  affected  only  by  the  latter 
acid. 

4.  The  solutions  of  silver  are  precipitated  by  extract- 
ive matters  ; but  in  this  case  also  the  precipitate  is  dis- 
coloured, and  is  soluble  in  nitrous  acid. 

K.  Nitrate  and  Acetate  of  Lead. 

1.  Acetate  of  lead,  the  most  eligible  of  these  two 
tests,  is  precipitated  by  sulphuric  and  muriatic  acids; 
but  as,  of  both  these,  we  have  much  better  indicators, 
it  is  not  necessary  to  enlarge  on  its  application  to  tins 
purpose. 

2.  The  acetate  is  also  a test  of  sulphuretted  hydro- 
gen and  sulphurets  of  alkalies,  which  occasion  a black 
precipitate ; and  if  a paper,  on  which  characters  are 
traced  with  a solution  of  acetate  of  lead,  be  held  over 
a portion  of  water  containing  a sulphuretted  hydrogen, 
they  are  soon  rendered  visible. 

3.  The  acetate  of  lead  is  employed  in  the  discovery 
of  uncombiued  boracic  acid,  a very  rare  ingredient  of 
waters.  To  ascertain  whether  this  be  present,  some 


MIN 


MIS 


cautions  are  necessary.  Tlie  unconibined  alkalies  and 
earths  (if  any  be  suspected)  must  be  saturated  with 
acetic  acid.  The  sulphates  must  be  decomposed  by 
acetate  or  nitrate  of  barytes,  and  the  muriates  by  ace- 
tate or  nitrate  of  silver.  The  filtered  liquor,  if  boracic 
acid  be  contained  in  it,  will  give  a precipitate  soluble 
in  nitric  acid  of  the  specific  gravity  of  1.3. 

L.  Nitrate  of  Mercury , prepared  with  and  without 
heat. 

This  solution,  differently  prepared,  is  sometimes  em- 
ployed as  a test.  But,  since  other  tests  answer  the 
same  purposes  more  effectually,  it  is  not  absolutely  ne- 
cessary to  have  these  tests. 

M .  Muriate , Nitrate,  and  Acetate  of  Barytes. 

1.  These  solutions  are  all  most  delicate  tests  of  sul- 
phuric acid,  and  of  its  combinations,  with  which  they 
give  a white  precipitate,  insoluble  in  dilute  muriatic 
acid.  They  are  decomposed,  however,  by  carbonates 
of  alkalies  ; but  the  precipitate  occasioned  by  these  is 
soluble  in  dilute  muriatic  and  nitric  acid  with  efferves- 
cence, and  may  even  be  prevented  by  adding  pre- 
viously a few  drops  of  the  acid  contained  in  the  bary- 
tic  sait. 

One  hundred  grains  of  dry  sulphate  of  barytes  (ac- 
cording to  Klaproth,  p.  168,)  contain  about  45  one-fifth 
of  sulphuric  acid  of  the  specific  gravity  1850,  according 
to  Olayfield,  33  of  acid  of  sp.  gr.  2240 ; according  to 
Thenard,  after  calcination  about  25.  These  estimates 
differ  very  considerably.  From  Klaproth’s  experiments, 
it  appears  that  1000  grains  of  sulphate  of  barytes  indi- 
cate 595;  desiccated  sulphate  of  soda,  or  1415  of  the 
crystallized  salt.  The  same  chemist  has  shown  that 
100  grains  of  sulphate  of  barytes  are  produced  by  the 
precipitation  of  71  grains  of  sulphate  of  lime. 

2.  Phosphoric  salts  also  occasion  a precipitate  with 
these  tests,  which  is  soluble  in  muriatic  acid  without 
effervescence. 

N.  Prussiates  of  Potassa  and  Lime. 

Of  these  two  the  prussiate  of  potassa  is  the  most  eli- 
gible. When  pure  it  does  not  speedily  assume  a blue 
colour  on  the  addition  of  acid,  nor  does  it  immediately 
precipitate  muriatic  barytes.  Prussiate  of  potassa  is  a 
very  sensible  test  of  iron,  with  the  solutions  of  which 
in  acids  it  produces  a Prussian  blue  precipitate,  in 
consequence  of  a double  elective  affinity.  To  render 
its  effect  moi’e  certain,  however,  it  may  be  proper  to 
add  previously,  to  any  water  suspected  to  contain  iron, 
a little  muriatic  acid,  with  a view  to  the  saturation  of 
unconibined  alkalies,  or  earths,  which,  if  present,  pre 
vent  the  detection  of  any  minute  portions  of  iron. 

1.  If  a water,  after  boiling  and  filtration,  does  not 
afford  a blue  precipitate  on  the  addition  of  prussiate  of 
potassa,  the  solvent  of  the  iron  maybe  inferred  to  be  & 
volatile  one,  and  probably  the  carbonic  acid. 

2.  Should  the  precipitation  ensue  in  the  boiled  water, 
the  solvent  is  a fixed  acid,  the  nature  of  which  must 
be  ascertained  by  other  tests. 

O.  Solutions  of  Soap  in  Alkohol. 

This  solution  may  be  used  to  ascertain  the  compara- 
tive hardness  of  waters.  With  distilled  water  it  may 
be  mixed  without  producing  any  change  ; but,  if  added 
to  a hard  water,  it  produces  a milkiness,  more  or  less 
considerable  as  the  water  is  less  pure:  and  from  the 
degree  of  milkiness,  an  experienced  eye  will  judge  of 
its  quality.  The  acids,  alkalies,  and  all  earthy  and 
metallic  salts,  decompose  soap,  and  occasion  that  pro- 
perty in  water  termed  hardness. 

Alkohol. 

Alkohol,  when  mixed  with  any  water  in  the  propor- 
tion of  about  an  equal  bulk,  precipitates  all  the  sorts 
which  it  is  not  capable  of  dissolving. 

P.  Hydro- sulphured  of  Ammonia. 

This  and  other  sulphurets,  as  well  as  water  saturated 
with  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  may  be  employed  in  de- 
tecting lead  and  arsenic,  with  tlieformerof  which  they 
give  a black,  and  with  the  latter  a yellowish  precipi- 
tate. As  lead  and  arsenic,  however,  are  never  found 
in  natural  waters,  these  tests  are  not  required. 

MINERA'LfA.  >3ee  Mineral. 

MINERALIZE.  Metallic  substances  are  said  to  be 
mineralized  when  deprived  of  their  usual  properties 
by  combination  with  some  other  substance. 

MINERA'LOGY.  Mincralogia.  That  part  of  natu- 
ral liistorj  which  relates  to  minerals. 

Minim,  rice  Minimum. 

MINIMUM.  A minim.  The  sixtieth  part  of  a fluid 
drachm.  An  important  change  has  been  adopted  in 


the  last  London  Pharmacopoeia,  for  the  mensuration 
of  liquids,  and  the  division  of  the  wine  pint,  to  ensure 
accuracy  in  the  measurement  of  quantities  of  liquids 
below  one  drachm.  The  number  of  drops  contained 
in  one  drachm  has  been  assumed  to  be  sixty : and 
taking  water  as  a standard,  this  number,  though  by  no 
means  accurate,  would  still  be  sufficient  for  ordinary 
purposes  ; but  when  other  liquids  of  less  specific  gravity 
are  used,  a much  larger  number  is  required  to  till  the 
same  measure,  as  of  proof  spirit,  140  drops  are  required 
to  equal  the  bulk  of  60  of  water,  dropped  from  the 
same  vessel.  If,  therefore,  in  the  composition  of  me- 
dicines, measures  suited  to  the  standard  of  water  were 
used  occasionally  only,  and  it  was  generally  assumed 
that  60  drops  were  equal  to  one  fluid-draclnn,  and  one 
fluid-drachm  was  substituted  for  60  drops  prescribed, 
twice  the  dose  intended  would  be  given.  There  are 
further  objections  to  the  use  of  drops  ; that  their  bulk 
is  influenced  by  the  quantity  of  liquid  contained  in  the 
bottle  from  which  they  fall,  by  the  thickness  of  the  lip, 
and  even  by  the  inequalities  on  tire  surface  of  the  lip 
of  the  same  bottle;  that  volatile  liquids,  to  which  tins 
mode  is  most  commonly  applied,  are  thus  exposed  with 
extensive  surfaces,  and  their  evaporation  promoted; 
and  on  all  these  accounts  the  adoption  of  some  deci- 
sive, convenient,  and  uniform  substitute  became  neces- 
sary. The  subdivision  of  the  wine  pint  has,  therefore, 
been  extended  to  the  sixtieth  part  of  the  fluid-drachm, 
which  is  termed  minim  : and  glass  measures  expres- 
sive of  such  subdivision,  have  been  adopted  by  the 
college. 

MI  NIUM.  Red  oxide  of  lead.  See  Lead. 

Minium  grjecorum.  Native  cinnabar 

MINT.  See  Mentha. 

Mint , pepper.  See  Mentha  piperita. 

Mint , water.  See  Mentha  aquatica. 

MISCARRIAGE.  See  Abortion. 

Misere'rk  mei.  (Have  compassion  on  me:  so  called 
from  its  uTihappy  torments.)  The  iliac  passion.  See 
Iliac  passion. 

MISLAW.  See  Musa  par adisiaca. 

MISLETOE.  See  Viscum. 

Misochy'micus.  An  enemy  to  the  chemists  and 
their  enthusiastic  conceits. 

MISPICKLE.  Common  arsenical  pyrites.  A white, 
brilliant,  granulated  iron  ore,  composed  of  iron  in  com- 
bination with  arsenic. 

MISTURA.  A mixture.  A fluid  composed  of  two 
or  more  ingredients.  It  is  mostly  contracted  in  pre- 
scriptions thus,  mist.  e.  g.  — f.  mist,  which  means,  let 
a mixture  be  made. 

Mistura  ammoniaci.  Lac  ammoniaci.  Mixture  of 
ammoniacum. — Take  of  ammoniacum, two  drachms; 
of  water,  half  a pint;  rub  the  ammoniacum  with  the 
water  gradually  added,  till  they  are  thoroughly  mixed 

Mistura  amygdala;.  Lac  amygdala:.  Almond 
mixture,  or  emulsion. — Take  of  almond  confection, 
two  ounces;  distilled  water,  a pint:  grade  ally  add  the 
water  to  the  almond  confection,  rubbing  them  together, 
till  properly  mixed  ; then  strain. 

Mistura  asaf<etid.e.  Lac  asafatidee.  Mixture 
of  asafoetida. — Take  of  asafpetida,  two  drachms ; 
water,  half  a pint ; rub  the  asafoetida  with  the  water, 
gradually  added,  till  they  are  thoroughly  mixed. 

Mistura  camphor®*  Camphor  mixture. — Take  of 
camphor,  half  a drachm  ; rectified  spirit,  ten  minims  ; 
water,  a pint.  First  rub  the  camphor  with  the  spirit, 
then  with  the  water  gradually  added,  and  strain  the 
liquor.  A very  elegant  preparation  of  canfphor,  for 
delicate  stomachs,  and  those  who  cannot  bear  it  in 
substance,  as  an  antispasmodic  and  nervine.  There  is 
a great  loss  of  camphor  in  making  it  as  directed  by  the 
pharmacopoeia.  Water  can  only  take  up  a certain 
quantity.  For  its  virtues,  see  Laurus  camphora. 

Mistura  cornu  usti.  Decoctum  album.  Decoc 
tion  of  hartshorn.  Take  of  hartshorn,  burnt  and  pre 
pared,  two  ounces;  acacia  gum,  powdered,  an  ounce; 
water,  three  pints.  Boil  down  to  two  pints,  constantly 
stirring,  and  strain.  This  is  a much  weaker  absorbent 
than  the  mistura  cretie,  but  is  much  more  agreeable  to 
most  people.  It  forms  an  excellent  drink  in  fevers  at- 
tended with  diarrhoea,  and  acidities  of  the  prirnac  viie. 

Mistura  cret®.  Chalk  mixture. — Take  of  pre 
pared  chalk,  half  an  ounce;  refined  sugar,  three 
drachms ; gum-arabic,  powdered,  half  an  ounce;  water, 
a pint.  Mix.  A very  useful  and  pleasant  form  of  ad- 
ministering chalk  ns  an  adstringent  and  antacid.  It  is 

79 


MOF 


Mol 


particularly  calculated  for  children,  in  whom  it  allays 
the  many  deranged  actions  of  the  primae  vise,  which 
are  produced  by  acidities.  Dose,  one  ounce  to  three, 
frequently.  See  Creta  and  Carbunas  calcis. 

Mistura  fkrri  composite. — Take  of  myrrh,  pow- 
dered, a drachm  ; subcarbonate  of  potassa,  twenty-five 
grains;  rose-water,  seven  fluid  ounces  and  a half; 
sulphate  of  iron,  powdered,  a scruple ; spirit  of  nutmeg, 
half  a fluid  ounce  ; refined  sugar,  a drachm.  Rub  to- 
gether the  myrrh,  the  subcarbonate  of  potassa  and 
sugar;  and,  during  the  trituration,  add  gradually,  first, 
the  rose-water  and  spirit  of  nutmegs,  and  last,  the  sul- 
phate of  iron.  Pour  the  mixture  immediately  into  a 
proper  glass  bottle,  and  stop  it  close.  This  preparation 
is  the  celebrated  mixture  of  Dr.  Grifliths.  A chemical 
decomposition  is  effected  in  forming  this  mixture,  a 
subcarbonate  of  iron  is  formed,  and  a sulphate  of 
potassa. 

Mistura  guaiaci.  Take  of  guaiacum  gum-resin,  a 
drachm  and  a half ; refined  sugar,  two  drachms  ; muci- 
lage of  acacia  gum,  two  fluid  drachms;  cinnamon 
water,  eight  fluid  ounces.  Rub  the  guaiacum  with  the 
sugar,  then  with  the  mucilage ; and,  when  they  are 
mixed,  pour  on  the  cinnamon-watet  gradually,  rubbing 
them  together.  For  its  virtues,  see  Guaiacum. 

Mistura  moschi.  Take  of  musk,  acacia  gum,  pow- 
dered, refined  sugar,  of  each  adrachm  : rose-water,  six 
fluid  ounces.  Rub  the  musk  first  with  the  sugar,  then 
with  the  gum,  and  add  the  rose-water  by  degrees.  An 
excellent  diaphoretic  and  antispasmodic.  It  is  by  far 
the  best  way  of  administering  musk,  when  boluses  can- 
not be  swallowed.  Dose,  one  ounce  to  three,  frequently. 

Mithridate  mustard.  See  Thlaspi  campestre. 

MITHRIDATIUM  The  electuary  called  Mithridate , 
from  Mithridates,  king  of  Pontus  and  Biihynia,  who, 
experiencing  the  virtues  of  the  simples  separately,  af- 
terward combined  them ; but  then  the  composition 
consisted  of  but  few  ingredients,  viz.  twenty  leaves  of 
rue,  two  walnuts,  two  figs,  and  a little  salt : of  this  he 
took  a dose  every  morning,  to  guard  himself  against  the 
effects  of  poison. 

MITRAL.  CMitralis ; from mitra,  a mitre.)  Mitre- 
like : applied  by  anatomists  to  parts  which  were  sup- 
posed to  resemble  a bishop’s  mitre. 

Mitral  valves.  Valvulae  mitrales.  The  valves 
of  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart. 

Mi'va.  An  ancient  term  for  the  form  of  a medicine, 
not  unlike  a thick  syrup,  now  called  Marmalade. 

MIXTURE.  1.  See  Mistura. 

2.  Mixture  in  chemistry  should  be  distinguished  from 
solution;  in  the  former,  the  aggregate  particles  can 
again  be  separated  by  mechanical  means,  and  the  pro- 
portion of  the  different  particles  determined : but,  in 
solution,  no  mechanical  power  whatsoever  can  sepa- 
rate them. 

Mocha  stone.  A species  of  agate. 

Mo'chila.  (From  poxhos,  a lever.)  A reduction 
of  the  bones  from  an  unnatural  to  a natural  situation. 

Mo'chlica.  (From  pox^tv w,  to  move.)  Violent 
purges. 

MODI’OLUS.  (Diminutive  of  Modus , a measure.) 
The  nucleus,  as  it  were,  of  the  cochlea  of  the  ear  is  so 
termed.  It  ascends  from  the  basis  of  the  cochlea  to  the 
apex. 

Mofette.  See  Nitrogen. 

MOFFAT.  A village  situated  about  fifty-six  miles 
southwest  of  Edinburgh.  It  affords  a cold  sulphureous 
water,  of  a very  simple  composition  ; when  first  drawn, 
it  appears  rather  milky  and  bluish  ; the  smell  is  exactly 
similar  to  that  of  Harrovvgate ; the  smell  is  sulphureous 
and  saline,  without  any  thing  bitter.  It  sparkles  some- 
what on  being  poured  from  one  glass  to  another. 

According  to  Dr.  Garnett’s  analysis,  a wine  gallon 
of  Moffat  water  contains  thirty-six  grains  of  muriate 
of  soda,  five  cubic  inches  of  carbonic  acid  gas,  four  of 
azotic  gas,  and  ten  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  making 
altogether  nineteen  cubic  inches  of  gas.  Moffat  water 
is,  therefore,  very  simple  in  its  composition,  and  hence 
it  produces  effects  somewhat  similar  to  those  of  Har- 
rowgate.  It  is,  perhaps,  on  this  account  also  that  it  so 
soon  loses  the  hepatic  gas,  on  which  depends  the  great- 
est part  of  its  medicinal  power.  The  only  sensible 
effect  of  this  water  is  that  of  increasing  the  flow  of 
urine  ; when  it  purges,  it  appears  rather  to  take  place 
from  the  excessive  dose  than  from  its  mineral  ingre- 
dients. This  water  appears  to  be  useful  chiefly  in  cu- 
taneous eruptions,  and  as  an  external  application  at  an 


increased  temperature,  scrofula  in  its  early  stage 
appears  to  be  elevated  by  it ; it  is  also  used  as  an  ex- 
ternal application  to  irritable  ulcers,  and  is  recom- 
mended in  dyspepsia,  and  wheie  there  is  inaction  of 
the  alimentary  canal. 

Mogila'lia.  (From  poyis,  difficulty,  and  XaXcoi,  to 
speak.)  A difficulty  of  speech. 

MO  LA.  (Hebrew.)  1.  The  knee-pan:  so  named 
because  it  is  shaped  like  a millstone. 

2.  A mole,  or  shapeless  mass  of  flesh  in  the  uterus 
See  Mole. 

MOLA'RIS.  (From  molaris,  a grindstone ; because 
they  grind  the  food.)  A double-tooth.  See  Teeth. 

Molares  glandul.®.  Molar  glands.  Two  salival 
glands  situated  on  each  side  of  the  mouth,  between  the 
masseter  and  buccinator  muscles,  the  excretory  ducts 
of  which  open  near  the  last  dens  molaris. 

Molares  dentes.  See  Teeth. 

MOLASSES.  See  Saccharum. 

Molda'vica.  See  Dracocephalum. 

MOLE.  Mola.  By  this  term  authors  have  intended 
to  describe  different  productions  of,  or  excretions  from, 
the  uterus. 

By  some  it  has  been  used  to  signify  every  kind  of 
fleshy  substance,  particularly  those  which  are  properly 
called  polypi ; by  others,  those  only  which  are  the  con- 
sequence of  imperfect  conception,  or  when  the  ovum 
is  in  a morbid  or  decayed  state ; and  by  many,  which 
is  the  most  popular  opinion,  every  coagulum  of  blood 
which  continues  long  enough  in  the  uterus  to  assume 
somewhat  of  an  organized  form,  to  have  only  the 
fibrous  part,  as  it  has  been  called,  remaining,  is  de- 
nominated a mole.  There  is  surely  much  impropriety, 
says  Dr.  Denham,  in  including,  under  one  general 
name,  appearances  so  contrary  and  substances  so 
different. 

1 For  an  account  of  the  first  kind,  see  Polypus. 

2.  Of  the  second  kind,  which  has  been  defined  as  an 
ovum  deforme , as  it  is  the  consequence  of  conception, 
it  might  more  justly  be  arranged  under  the  class  of 
monsters ; for  though  it  has  the  appearance  of  a shape- 
less mass  of  flesh,  if  examined  carefully  with  a knife, 
various  parts  of  a child  may  be  discovered,  lying  to- 
gether in  apparent  confusion,  but  in  actual  regularity 
The  pedicle  also  by  which  it  is  connected  to  the  uterus, 
is  not  of  a fleshy  texture,  like  that  of  the  polypus,  but 
has  a regular  series  of  vessels  like  the  umbilical  cord, 
and  there  is  likewise  a placenta  and  membranes  con- 
taining water.  The  symptoms  attending  the  formation, 
growth,  and  expulsion  of  this  apparently  confused 
mass  from  the  uterus,  correspond  with  those  of  a well- 
formed  child. 

3.  With  respect  to  the  third  sort  of  mole,  an  incision 
into  its  substance  will  discover  its  true  nature;  for, 
although  the  external  surface  appears  at  the  first  view 
to  be  organized  flesh,  the  internal  part  is  composed 
merely  of  coagulated  blood.  As  substances  of  this  kind, 
which  mostly  occur  after  delivery,  would  always  be 
expelled  by  the  action  of  the  uterus,  there  seems  to  be 
no  reason  for  a particular  inquiry,  if  popular  opinion 
had  not  annexed  the  idea  of  mischief  to  them,  and  at- 
tributed their  formation  or  continuance  in  the  uterus 
to  the  negligence  or  misconduct  of  the  practitioner. 
Hence  the  persuasion  arose  of  the  necessity  of  extract- 
ing all  the  coagula'of  blood  out  of  the  uterus,  immedi 
ately  after  the  expulsion  of  the  placenta,  or  of  giving 
medicines  to  force  them  away:  but  abundant  ex- 
perience hath  proved,  that  the  retention  of  such 
coagula  is  not,  under  any  circumstances,  productive 
of  danger,  and  that  they  are  most  safely  expelled  by  the 
action  of  the  uterus,  though  at  very  difl’erent  periods 
after  their  formation. 

Mo'lle.  Indian  mastich. 

MOLLIFICA'TIO.  A softening:  formerly  applied 
to  a palsy  of  the  muscles  in  any  particular  part. 

MOLLI'TIES.  (From  mollis,  soft.)  A softness: 
applied  to  bones,  nails,  and  other  parts. 

Mollitiks  ossium.  See  Malacosteon. 

Mollit  es  unguium.  A preternatural  softness  of  the 
nails : it  often  accompanies  chlorosis. 

Molucce'.nse  lignum.  See  Croton  liglium. 

MOLYBDATE.  Molybdas.  A salt  formed  by  the 
union  of  the  molybdic  acid  with  salifiable  bases  : thus 
molijbdate  of  antimony,  &.C. 

MOLYBDENUM.  (From  po\v6Sof,  lead.)  Molyb- 
ditis.  A metal  which  exists  mineralized  by  Btilphur  in 
the  ore,  called  sulpkurct  of  mulybdena.  This  ore.. 


MOl. 


MON 


tthith  is  very  scarce,  is  so  similar  in  several  of  its  pro- 
perties to  plumbago,  that  they  were  long  considered  as 
varieties  of  the  same  substance.  It  is  of  a light  lead- 
gray  colour  ; its  surface  is  smooth,  and  feels  unctuous; 
its  texture  is  lamellated  ; it  soils  the  fingers,  and  marks 
paper  bluish-black,  or  silver-gray.  It  may  be  cut 
with  a knife.  It  is  generally  found  in  compact  masses ; 
seldom  in  particles,  or  crystallized.  It  is  met  with  in 
Sweden,  Spain,  Saxony,  Siberia,  and  Iceland.  Scheele 
showed  that  a peculiar  metallic  acid  might  be  obtained 
from  it ; and  later  chemists  have  succeeded  in  reducing 
this  acid  to  the  metallic  state.  We  are  indebted  to 
Hatchett  for  a full  and  accurate  analysis  of  this  ore. 

The  native  sulpkuret  of  molybdena , is  the  only  ore 
hitherto  known  which  contains  this  metal. 

Properties  of  molybdena. — Molybdena  is  either  in  an 
agglutinated  blackish  friable  mass,  having  little  metal- 
lic brillancy,  or  in  a black  powder.  The  mass  slightly 
united,  shows,  by  a magnifying  glass,  small,  round, 
brilliant  grains.  Its  weight  is  about  8.  It  is  one  of  the 
most  infusible  of  the  metals.  It  is  capable  of  com- 
bining with  a number  of  metals  by  fusion.  It  forms 
with  sulphur  an  artificial  sulphuret  of  molybdena 
analogous  to  its  ore.  It  unites  also  to  phosphorus. 
The  affinity  of  molybdena  for  oxygen  is  very  feeble, 
according  to  Hatchett.  The  alkalies  have  no  action 
on  molybdena  in  the  moist  way,  but  it  enters  readily 
into  fusion  with  potassa  and  soda.  It  is  oxidisable  by 
boiling  sulphuric  acid,  and  acidifiable  by  the  nitric 
acid.  Muriatic  acid  does  not  act  upon  it.  It  is  capa- 
ble of  existing  in  not  less  than  four  different  degrees 
of  oxygenation. 

Method  of  obtaining  molybdena. — To  obtain  molyb- 
dena is  a task  of  the  utmost  difficulty.  Few  chemists 
have  succeeded  in  producing  this  metal,  on  account  of 
its  great  infusibility.  The  method  recommended  in 
general  is  the  following : — Molybdic  acid  is  to  be 
formed  into  a paste  with  oil,  dried  at  the  fire,  and  then 
exposed  to  a violent  heat  in  a crucible  lined  with  char- 
coal. By  this  means  the  oxide  becomes  decomposed ; 
a black  agglutinated  substance  is  obtained,  very  brittle 
under  the  finger,  and  having  a metallic  brilliancy. 
This  is  the  metal  called  molybdena. 

MOLYBDIC  ACID.  ( Acidum , molybdicum ; from 
Molybdenum , its  base.)  The  native  sulphuret  of  molyb- 
denum being  roasted  for  some  time,  and  dissolved  in 
water  of  ammonia,  when  nitric  acid  is  added  to  this 
solution,  the  molybdic  acid  precipitates  in  fine  white 
scales,  which  become  yellow  on  melting  and  subliming 
them.  It  changes  the  vegetable  blues  to  red,  but  less 
readily  and  powerfully  than  the  molybdous  acid. 

Molybdic  acid  has  a specific  gravity  of  3.460.  In  an 
open  vessel  it  sublimes  into  brilliant  yellow  scales ; 960 
parts  of  boiling  water  dissolve  one  of  it,  affording  a pale 
yellow  solution,  which  reddens  litmus,  but  has  no  taste. 
Sulphur,  charcoal,  and  several  metals,  decompose  the 
molybdic  acid.  Molybdate  of  potassa  is  a colourless 
salt.  Molybdic  acid  gives,  with  nitrate  of  lead,  a 
white  precipitate,  soluble  in  nitric  acid;  with  the  ni- 
trates of  mercury  and  silver,  a white  flaky  precipitate ; 
With  nitrate  of  copper,  a greenish  precipitate ; with 
solutions  of  the  neutral  sulphate  of  zinc,  muriate  of 
bismuth,  muriate  of  antimony,  nitrate  of  nickel,  mu- 
riates of  gold  and  platinum,  it  produces  white  precipi- 
tates. When  melted  with  borax,  it  yields  a bluish 
colour;  and  paper  dipped  in  its  solution  becomes,  in 
the  sun,  of  a beautiful  blue. 

The  neutral  alkaline  molybdates  precipitate  all  me- 
tallic solutions.  Gold,  muriate  of  mercury,  zinc,  and 
manganese,  are  precipitated  in  the  form  of  a white 
powder ; iron  and  tin,  from  their  solutions  in  muriatic 
acid,  of  a brown  colour  ; cobalt,  of  a rose  colour ; cop- 
per, blue ; and  the  solutions  of  alum  and  quicklime, 
white.  If  a dilute  solution  of  recent  muriate  of  tin  be 
precipitated  by  a dilute  solution  of  molybdate  of  po- 
tassa, a beautiful  blue  powder  is  obtained. 

The  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  dissolves  a con- 
siderable quantity  of  the  molybdic  acid,  the  solution 
becoming  of  a fine  blue  colour  as  it  cools,  at  the  same 
time  that  it  thickens ; the  colour  disappears  again  on 
the  application  of  heat,  but  returns  again  by  cooling. 

A strong  heat  expels  the  sulphuric  acid.  The  nitric 
acid  has  no  effect  on  it;  but  the  muriatic  dissolves  it  in 
considerable  quantity,  and  leaves  a dark  blue  residuum 
when  distilled.  With  a strong  heat  it  expels  a portion 
of  sulphuric  acid  from  sulphate  of  potassa.  It  also 
disengages  the  acid  from  nitre  and  common  salt  by 


I distillation.  It  has  some  action  upon  the  filings  of  the 
metals  in  the  moist  way. 

Molybdi'tis.  See  Molybdenum. 

Moly'bdos.  (Ort  uoXa  as  PaQos;  from  its  gravity.) 
Lead. 

MOLYBDOUS  ACID.  Acidum  molybdosum.  The 
deut-oxide  of  molybdenum  is  of  a blue  colour,  and 
possesses  acid  properties.  Triturate  2 parts  of  molyb- 
dic acid;  with  one  part  of  the  metal,  along  with  a little 
hot  water,  in  a porcelain  mortar,  till  the  mixture  as- 
sumes a blue  cdlour.  Digest  in  10  parts  of  boiling 
water,  filter  and  evaporate  the  liquid  in  a heat  of  about 
120°.  The  blue  oxide  separates.  It  reddens  vegetable 
blues,  and  forms  salts  with  the  bases.  Air  or  water, 
when  left  for  some  time  to  act  on  molybdenum,  con- 
vert it  into  this  acid.  It  consists  of  about  100  metal  to 
34  oxygen. 

Moly'za.  (Diminutive  of  puXv,  moly.)  Garlic  ; 
the  head  of  which,  like  moly,  is  not  divided  into 
cloves. 

Momiscus.  (From  pupos,  a blemish.)  That  part  of 
the  teeth  which  is  next  the  gums,  and  which  is  usually 
covered  with  a foul  tartareous  crust. 

MOMORDICA.  ( Momordicu ; from  mordeo,  to 

bite ; from  its  sharp  taste.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Moncccia;  Or- 
der, Syngenesia. 

Momordica  elaterium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  squirting  cucumber.  Elaterium ; Cucumis  agres- 
tis;  Cucumis  asininus ; Cucumis  sy Ives  iris  ; Elate- 
rium officin arum ; B oub alios  ; Charantia;  Guarerba 
orba.  Wild,  or  squirting  cucumber.  Momordica — 
pomis  liispidis  cirrhisnullis  of  Linnseus.  The  dried 
sediment  from  the  juice  of  this  plant  is  the  elaterium 
of  the  shops.  It  has  neither  smell  nor  taste,  and  is 
the  most  powerful  cathartic  in  the  whole  Materia 
Medica.  Its  efficacy  in  dropsies  is  said  to  be  consider* 
ahle ; it,  however,  requires  great  caution  in  the  exhi* 
bition.  From  the  eighth  to  the  half  of  a grain  should 
be  given  at  first,  and  repeated  at  proper  intervals  until 
it  operates.  The  cathartic  power  of  this  substance 
is  derived  from  a small  portion  of  a very  active  prin- 
ciple, which  Dr.  Paris,  in  his  Pharmacologia,  has 
called  Elatin.  From  ten  grains  of  elaterium  he  ob- 
tained, 

Water 0.4 

Extractive 2.6 

Fecula 2.8 

Gluten  0.5 

Woody  matter 2.5 

Elatin 

Bitter  principle 

10. 

MONA'RDA.  (So  called  in  honour  of  Nicholas 
Monardes,  a Spanish  physician  and  botanist.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  LinnEean  system. 
Class,  Diandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Monarda  fistulosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
purple  monarda.  The  leaves  of  this  plant  have  a fra- 
grant smell,  and  an  aromatic  and  somewhat  bitter 
taste,  possessing  nervine,  stomachic,  and  deobstruent 
virtues.  An  infusion  is  recommended  in  the  cure  of 
intermittent  fevers. 

1“  The  Monarda  is  a very  pungent  aromatic,  growing 
native  in  the  United  States,  with  various  other  species, 
some  of  which  resemble  it  in  efficacy.  In  different 
parts  of  the  country  it  is  known  by  the  names  of 
mountain-balm  and  horsemint.  It  is  a warm  diapho- 
retic, anti-emetic,  and  carminative;  used  in  flatulent 
colics,  rheumatism,  &c.  The  distilled  oil,  according 
to  Dr,  Atlee,  is  one  of  the  most  powerful  rubefacients.’* 
— Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

MONADE'LPHIA.  (From  povoj,  alone,  and  aSeX 
< pia , a brotherhood.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in 
the  sexual  system  of  Linnaius,  consisting  of  plants 
with  hermaphrodite  flowers,  in  which  all  the  stamina 
are  united  below  into  one  body  or  cylinder,  through 
which  the  pistil  passes. 

MONA'NDRIA.  (From  uovos , alone,  and  avyp,  a 
husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual 
system  of  LinntEus,  consisting  of  plants  with  her* 
maphrodite  flowers,  which  have  only  one  stamen. 
Mone'lli.  A species  of  Anagallis. 
MONEY-WORT.  See  Lysimachia  nummularia. 
MONILIFORMIS.  ( Monilc , an  ornament  for  any 

81 


1.2 


MON 


MON 


part  of  the  body,  especially  a necklace  or  collar.) 
Moniliform : applied  to  the  pod  of  the  Hedysarum 
moniliferum  from  its  necklace  appearance. 

Monk's  rhubarb.  See  Rumex  alpinus. 

MONKSHOOD.  See  Aconitum  napellus. 

MONOCOTYLEDON.  (From  povos,  one,  and  ko- 
tv\t}8u)v , a cotyledon.)  Having  one  cotyledon. 

MONOCOT  YLEDONES.  A tribe  of  plants  which 
are  supposed  to  have  only  one  cotyledon  ; as  the  grass 
and  corn  tribe,  palms,  and  the  orchis  family.  See 
Cotyledon. 

MONOCULUS.  (From  povos,  one,  and  oculus , an 
eye.)  Monopia.  1.  A very  uncommon  species  of. 
monstrosity,  in  which  there  is  but  one  eye,  and  that 
mostly  above  the  root  of  the  nose. 

2.  Intestinum  monoculum  is  the  name  given  to  the 
caecum,  or  blind  gut,  by  Paracelsus,  because  it  is  per- 
forated only  at  one  end. 

[3.  A genus  of  Crustacea,  to  which  belongs  the  great 
horse-foot  of  America,  or  the  Monoculus  Polyphe- 
mus. AJ 

MONCE'CIA.  (From  povos,  alone,  and  oucta , a 
house.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual 
system  of  Linnaeus,  consisting  of  those  which  have 
male  and  female  organs  in  separate  flowers,  but  on  the 
same  plant. 

MONOGY'NIA.  (From  povos,  alone,  and  yvvrt,  a 
woman,  or  wife.) — The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
the  sexual  system  of  Linnaeus.  It  contains  those  plants 
which,  besides  their  agreement  in  the  classic  character, 
have  only  one  style. 

Monohe'mera.  (From  povos,  single,  and  tjpepa,  a 
day.)  A disease  of  one  day’s  continuance. 

MONOICUS  (From  povos,  one,  and  ouaa,  a 
house.)  Linnajus  calls  flowers  monoid , monceceous, 
when  the  stamens  and  pistils  are  situated  in  different 
flowers,  on  the  same  individual  plant;  because  they 
are  confined  to  one  house,  as  it  were,  or  dwelling  ; and 
if  the  barren  and  fertile  flowers  grow  from  separate 
roots,  fores  dioid , or  dioecious  flowers. 

Mono'machon.  The  intestinum  ctecum. 

Monope'gia.  (From  povos,  single,  and  zsrjywpi,  to 
compress.)  A pain  in  only  one  side  of  the  head. 

MONOPHYLLUS.  (From  povos,  one,  and  0vAXov, 
a leaf.)  One-leafed  : having  only  one  leaf  applied  to 
the  perianthium  of  flowers ; thus  the  flower-cup  of 
the  Datura  stramonium  is  monophyllous,  or  formed 
of  one  leaf. 

Mono'pia.  (From  povos , single,  and  o>t|/,  the  eye.) 
See  Monoculus. 

MONO'RCHIS.  (From  povos,  one,  and  opxis , a 
testicle.)  An  epithet  for  a person  that  has  but  one 
testicle. 

MONRO,  Alexander,  was  born  in  London,  of 
Scotch  parents,  in  1697.  His  father,  who  was  an  army 
surgeon,  settled  afterward  at  Edinburgh,  and  took  great 
interest  in  his  education.  At  a proper  age,  he  sent  him 
to  attend  Cheselden  in  London,  where  he  displayed 
great  assiduity,  and  laid  the  foundation  of  his  cele- 
brated work  on  the  bones  ; he  then  went  to  Paris,  and 
in  1718  to  Leyden,  where  he  received  the  particular 
commendation  of  Boerhaave.  Returning  to  Edinburgh 
the  following  year,  he  was  appointed  professor  and 
demonstrator  of  anatomy  to  the  Company  of  Surgeons, 
and  soon  after  he  began  to  give  public  lectures  on  that 
subject,  Dr.  Alston  at  the  same  time  taking  up  the 
Materia  Medica  and  Botany.  This  may  be  regarded  as 
the  opening  of  that  medical  school,  which  has  since  ex- 
tended its  fame  throughout  Europe  and  even  to  America. 
The  two  lectureships  were  placed  upon  the  university 
establishment  in  1720,  and  others  shortly  added  to  com- 
plete the  system  of  medical  education  ; but  an  oppor- 
tunity of  seeing  practice  being  still  wanting,  Dr.  Monro 
pointed  out  in  a pamphlet  the  advantages  of  such  an 
institution ; the  Royal  Infirmary  was  therefore  estab- 
lished, and  he  commenced  Clinical  Lecturer  on  Sur- 
gery ; and  Dr.  Rutherford  afterward  extended  the  plan 
to  Medical  cases.  None  of  the  new  professors  contri- 
buted so  much  to  the  celebrity  of  this  school  as  Dr. 
Monro,  not  only  by  the  diligent  and  skilful  execution 
of  the  duties  of  his  office,  but  also  by  various  ingenious 
and  useful  publications.  He  continued  his  lectures 
during  upwards  of  six  months  annually  for  nearly  forty 
years,  and  acquired  such  reputation,  that  students 
flocked  to  him  from  the  most  distant  parts  of  tire 
kingdom.  His  first  and  chief  work  was  his  “ t>s*e- 
oio?.v  ’V  in  1726,  intended  for  his  pupils ; but  which 


became  very  popular,  passed  through  numerous  edi- 
tions, and  was  translated  into  most  European  lan- 
guages : he  afterward  added  a concise  description  of 
the  nerves,  and  a very  accurate  account  of  the  lacteal 
system  and  thoracic  duct.  He  was  also  the  father  and 
active  supporter  of  a society,  to  which  the  public  was 
indebted  for  six  volumes  of  “Medical  Essays  and 
Observations.”  he  acted  as  secretary,  and  had  the 
chief  labour  in  the  publication  of  these,  besides  having 
contributed  many  valuable  papers,  especially  an  elabo- 
rate “Essay  on  the  Nutrition  of  the  Foetus.”  The 
plan  of  the  society  was  afterward  extended,  and  three 
volumes  of  “ Essays  Physical  and  Literary”  were 
published,  in  which  Dr.  Monro  has  several  useful 
papers.  His  last  publication  was  an  “Account  of  the 
Success  of  Inoculation  in  Scotland.”  He  left,  how- 
ever, several  works  in  manuscript ; of  which  a short 
“ Treatise  on  Comparative  Anatomy,"  and  his  oration 
“ De  Cuticula,”  have  been  since  given  to  the  public. 
In  1759,  Dr.  Monro  resigned  his  anatomical  chair  to  his 
son,  but  continued  his  Clinical  lectures ; he  exerted 
himself  also  in  promoting  almost  every  object  of  public 
utility.  He  was  chosen  a fellow  of  the  Royal  Society 
of  London,  and  an  honorary  member  of  the  Royal 
Academy  of  Surgery  at  Paris.  He  died  in  1767. 

MONS.  A mount,  or  hill. 

Mons  veneris.  The  triangular  eminence  immedi- 
ately over  the  os  pubis  of  women,  that  is  covered  with 
hair. 

MONSTER.  Lusus  natures.  Dr.  Denman  divides 
monsters  into,  1st,  Monsters  from  redundance  or  mul- 
tiplicity of  parts;  2d,  Monsters  from  deficiency  or 
want  of  parts  ; 3d,  Monsters  from  confusion  of  parts. 
To  these  might  perhaps  be  added,  without  impropriety, 
another  kind,  in  which  there  is  neither  redundance, 
nor  deficiency,  nor  confusion  of  parts,  but  an  error  of 
place,  as  in  transposition  of  the  viscera.  But  children 
born  with  diseases,  as  the  hydroeephalus,  or  tlicir 
effects,  as  in  some  cases  of  blindness,  from  previous 
inflammation,  cannot  be  properly  considered  as  mon- 
sters, though  they  are  often  so  denominated. 

Of  the  first  order  there  may  be  two  kinds ; redun- 
dance or  multiplicity  of  natural  parts,  as  of  two  heads 
and  one  bodv,  of  one  head  and  two  bodies,  an  increased 
number  of  limbs,  as  legs,  arms,  fingers,  and  toes : or 
excrescences  or  additions  to  parts  of  no  certain  form,  as 
those  upon  the  head  and  other  parts  of  the  body.  It 
is  not  surprising  that  we  should  be  ignorant  of  the 
manner  in  which  monsters  or  irregular  births  are 
generated  or  produced  ; though  it  is  probable  that  the 
laws  by  which  these  are  governed  are  as  regular,  both 
as  to  cause  and  effect,  as  in  common  or  natural  pro- 
ductions. Formerly,  and  indeed  till  within  these  few 
years,  it  was  a generally  received  opinion,  that  mon- 
sters were  not  primordial  or  aboriginal,  but  that  they 
were  caused  subsequently,  by  the  power  of  the  imagi- 
nation of  the  mother,  transferring  the  imperfection  of 
some  external  object,  or  the  mark  of  something  for 
which  she  longed,  and  with  which  she  was  not 
indulged,  to  the  child  of  which  she  was  pregnant ; 
or  by  some  accident  which  happened  to  her  during  her 
pregnancy.  Such  opinions,  it  is  reasonable  to  think, 
were  permitted  to  pass  current,  in  order  to  protect 
pregnant  women  from  all  hazardous  and  disagreeable 
occupations,  to  screen  them  from  severe  labour,  and  to 
procure  for  them  a greater  share  of  indulgence  and 
tenderness  than  could  be  granted  to  them  in  the  com- 
mon occurrences  of  life.  The  laws  and  customs  of 
every  civilized  nation  have,  in  some  degree,  established 
a persuasion  that  there  was  something  sacred  in  the 
person  of  a pregnant  woman : and  this  may  be  right 
in  several  points  of  view ; but  these  only  go  a little 
way  towards  justifying  the  opinion  of  monsters  being 
caused  by  the  imagination  of  the  mother.  Theopinion 
has  been  disproved  by  common  observation,  and  by 
philosophy,  not  perhaps  by  positive  proofs,  but  by  many 
strong  negative  facts:  as  the  improbability  of  any 
child  being  born  perfect,  had  such  a power  existed ; 
the  freedom  of  children  from  any  blemish,  their  mo- 
thers being  in  situations  most  exposed  to  objects  likely 
to  produce  them ; the  ignorance  of  the  mother  of  any 
thing  heing  wrong  in  the  child,  till,  from  information 
of  the  fact,  she  begins  to  recollect  every  accident  which 
happened  during  her  pregnancy,  and  assigns  the  worst 
or  the  most  plausible,  as  the  cause;  the  organization  and 
colour  of  these  adventitious  substances:  the  frequent 
• occurrence  of  monsters  in  the  brute  creation,  in  which 


MON 


MGR 


the  power  of  the  imagination  cannot  be  great;  and 
the  analogous  appearances  in  the  vegetable  system, 
where  it  does  not  exist  in  any  degree.  Judging,  how- 
ever, from  appearances,  accidents  may  perhaps  be 
allowed  to  have  considerable  influence  in  the  pro- 
duction of  monsters  of  some  kinds,  either  by  actual 
injury  upon  parts,  or  by  suppressing  or  deranging  the 
principle  of  growth,  because,  when  an  arm,  for  in- 
stance, is  wanting,  the  rudiments  of  the  deficient  parts 
may  generally  be  discovered. 

MONTH ARTR1TE.  A mineral  compound  of  sul- 
phate and  carbonate  of  lime,  that  stands-  the  weather, 
which  common  gypsum  does  not.  It  is  found  at  Mont- 
martre, near  Paris. 

MOONSTONE.  A variety  of  adularia. 

[il  MOORE,  William^  M.  L).  This  ornament  of  the 
profession  and  of  Christianity,  was  born  at  Newtown, 
on  Long-Island,  state  of  New-York,  in  1754.  His  father 
Samuel,  and  his  grandfather  Benjamin,  Moore,  were 
agriculturists.  He  received  the  rudiments  of  a clas- 
sical education  under  the  tuition  of  his  elder  brother, 
afterward  bishop  Moore,  and  president  for  many  years 
of  Columbia  college.  He  attended  the  lectures  on 
medicine  delivered  by  Drs.  Clossey  and  Samuel  Bard. 

In  1778 he  went  to  London,  and  thence  to  Edinburgh. 
In  1789  he  was  graduated  doctor  of  medicine,  on 
which  occasion  he  published  his  dissertation  De  Bile. 
For  more  than  forty  years  he  continued  unremittingly 
engaged  in  the  arduous  duties  of  an  extensive  practice, 
particularly  in  midwifery,  estimating  his  number  of 
cases  at  about  three  thousand.  He  died  in  the  seventy- 
first  year  of  his  age,  in  April,  1824. 

The  medical  papers  of  Dr.  Moore  may  be  found  in 
the  American  Medical  and  Philosophical  Register,  the 
New-York  Medical  Repository,  and  the  New-York 
Medical  and  Physical  Journal.  For  many  years  Dr. 
Moore  was  president  of  the  Medical  Society  of  the 
county  of  New-York,  and  an  upright  and  vigiiant 
trustee  of  the  College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons. 
Orrhis  death  the  College  recorded  their  testimony  to  his 
pre-eminent  worth.”—  Tkach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

MORBI'LLI.  (Diminutive  of  morbus , a disease.) 
See  Rubeola. 

MORBUS.  A disease. 

Morbus  arquatus.  The  jaundice. 

Morbus  attonitus.  The  epilepsy,  and  apoplexy. 

Morbus  coxarius.  See  Arthropuosis. 

Morbus  gallicus.  The  venereal  disease. 

Morbus  herculeus.  The  epilepsy. 

Morbus  indicits.  The  venereal  disease. 

Morbus  Infantilis.  The  epilepsy. 

Morbus  magnus.  The  epilepsy. 

Morbus  niger.  The  black  disease.  So  Hippo- 
crates named  it,  and  thus  described  it.  This  disorder 
is  known  by  vomiting  a concrete  blood  of  a blackish 
red  colour,  and  mixed  with  a large  quanty  of  insipid 
acid,  or  viscid  phlegm.  This  evacuation  is  generally 
preceded  by  a pungent  tensive  pain,  in  both  the  hypo- 
chondria ; and  the  appearance  of  ilie  disease  is  attend- 
ed with  anxiety,  a compressive  pain  in  the  praecordia, 
and  fainting,  which  last  is  more  frequent  and  violent, 
when  the  blood  which  is  evacuated  is  foetid  and  cor- 
rupt. The  stomach  and  the  spleen  are  the  principal, 
if  not  the  proper  seat  of  this  disease. 

Moreus  regius.  The  jaundice. 

Morbus  sackr.  Th^epilepsy. 

MORDANT.  In  dying,  the  substance  combined 
with  the  vegetable  or  animal  fibre,  in  order  to  fix  the 
dye-stuff. 

Morel.  See  Phallus  csculentus. 

More'tus.  (From  moruia , the  mulberry.)  A de- 
coction of  mulberries. 

MORGAGNI,  Giambatista,  was  born  at  Forli  in 
1682.  He  commenced  his  medical  studies  at  Bologna, 
and  displayed  such  ardour  and  talent,  that  Valsalva 
availed  himself  of  his  assistance  in  his  researches  into 
the  organ  of  hearing,  and  in  drawing  up  his  memoirs 
on  that  subject.  He  also  performed  the  professorial 
duties  during  the  temporary  absence  of  Valsalva,  and 
by  his  skill  and  obliging  manners  procured  general  es- 
teem. He  afterward  prosecuted  his  studies  at  Venice 
and  Padua,  and  then  settled  in  his  native  place.  He 
soon,  however,  perceived  that  this  was  too  contracted  a 
sphere  for  1) is  abilities;  wherefore  he  returned  to  Pa- 
dua, where,  a vacancy  soon  occ  irring,  he  was  nomi- 
nated, in  1711,  to  teach  the  theory  of  physic.  He  had 
already  distinguished  himself  by  the  publication  five 

N n 2 


years  before  of  the  first  part  of  bis  “ Adversaria  Ana- 
tomica,”  a work  remarkable  for  its  accuracy,  as  well 
as  originality;  of  which,  subsequently,  five  other  parts 
appeared.  He  assisted  Lancisi  in  preparing  for  publi- 
cation the  valuable  drawings  of  Eustachius,  which 
came  out  in  1714.  The  following  year  he  was  appoint- 
ed to  the  first  anatomical  professorship  in  Padua ; and 
from  that  period  ranked  at  the  head  of  the  anatomists 
of  his  time.  He  was  also  well  versed  in  general  litera- 
ture, and  other  subjects  not  immediately  connected 
with  his  profession  : and  honours  were  rapidly  accu- 
mulated upon  him  from  every  quarter  of  Europe.  He 
was  distinguished  by  the  particular  esteem  of  three 
successive  Popes,  and  by  the  visits  of  all  the  learned 
and  great,  who  came  into  his  neighbourhood  ; and  his 
native  city  placed  a bust  of  him  in  their  public  hall 
during  his  life,  with  an  honorary  inscription.  Though 
he  had  a large  family,  he  accumulated  a considerable 
property  by  his  industry  and  economy  ; and  by  means 
of  a good  constitution  and  regular  habits,  he  attained 
the  advanced  age  of  90.  Besides  the  Adversaria  he 
published  several  other  works,  two  quarto  volumes  of 
anatomical  epistles,  an  essay  mi  the  proper  method  of 
acquiring  medical  science,  which  appeared  on  his  ap- 
pointment to  the  theoretical  chair,  &c.  But  that  which 
has  chiefly  rendered  his  name  illustrious  is  entitled 
“ De  Sedibus  et  Causis  Morborum,”  printed  at  Venice 
in  1760.  It  contains  a prodigious. collection  of  dissec- 
tions of  morbid  bodies,  made  by  Valsalva  and  himself, 
arranged  according  to  the  organs  affected.  He  follow- 
ed the  plan  cf  Bonetus ; but  the  accuracy  of  his  details 
renders  the  collection  far  superior  in  value  to  any  that 
had  preceded  it. 

MO'RIA.  (From  pwpos,  foolish.)*  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Neuro- 
tica; Order,  Phrenica.  Idiotism.  Fatuity.  It  has 
two  species,  Moria  imbecillis , demens. 

Mo'ro.  (From  morum,  a mulberry.)  A small  ab- 
scess resembling  a mulberry. 

Moro'sis.  (From  pwpos,  foolish.)  See  Amentia. 

MOROXYLATE.  A compound  of  moroxylic  acid 
widi  a salifiable  basis. 

MOROXYLIC  ACID.  (Acidttm  moroxylicum ; from 
morus , the  mulberry-tree,  and  \v\ov,  wood ; because 
it  is  found  on  the  bark  or  wood  of  that  tree.)  In  the 
botanic  garden  at  Palermo,  Mr.  Thompson  found  an 
uncommon  saline  substance  on  the  trunk  of  a white 
mulberry-tree.  It  appeared  as  a coating  ori  the  surface 
of  the  bark  in  little  granulous  drops  of  a yellowish  and 
blackish-brown  colour,  and  had  likewise  penetrated  its 
substance.  Klaproth,  who  analyzed  it,  found  that  its 
taste  was  somewhau  like  that  of  succinic  acid ; on 
burning  coals,  it  swelled  up  a little,  emitted  a pungent 
vapour  scarcely  visible  to  the  eye,  and  left  a slight 
earthy  residuum.  Six  hundred  grains  of  the  bark 
loaded  with  it  were  lixiviated  with  water,  and  afford- 
ed 320  grains  of  a light  salt,  resembling  in  colour  a light 
wood,  and  composed  of  short  needles  united  in  radii. 
It  was  not  deliquescent;  and  though  the  crystals  did 
not  form  till  the  solution  was  greatly  condensed  by 
evaporation,  it  is  not  very  soluble,  since  1090  parts  of 
water  dissolve  but  35  with  heat,  and  15  cold. 

This  salt  was  found  to  lie  a compound  of  lime 
and  a peculiar  vegetable  acid,  with  some  extractive 
matter. 

To  obtain  the  acid  separate,  Klaproth  decomposed 
the  calcareous  salt  bv  acetate  of  lead,  and  separated  the 
lead  by  sulphuric  acid.  He  likewise  decomposed  it. 
directly  by  sulphuric  acid.  The  product  was  still  more 
like  succinic  acid  in  taste ; was  not  deliquescent ; easily 
dissolved  both  in  water  and  alkohol : and  did  not  pre- 
cipitate the  metallic  solutions,  as  it  did  in  combination 
with  lime.  Twenty  grains  being  slightly  heated  in  a 
small  glass  retort,  a number  of  drops  of  an  acid  liquor 
first  came  over ; next  a concrete  salt  arose,  that  ad- 
hered flat  against  the  top  and  part  of  the  neck  of  the 
retort  in  the  form  of  prismatic  crystals,  colourless  and 
transparent ; and  a coaly  residuum  remained.  The 
acid  was  then  washed  out,  and  crystallized  by  sponta- 
neous evaporation. — This  sublimation  appears  to  be 
the  best  mode  of  purifying  the  salt,  but  it  adhered  too 
strongly  to  the  lime  to  be  separated  from  it  directly  by 
heat  without  being  decomposed. 

Not  having  a sufficient,  quantity  to  determine  its  spe- 
cific characters,  though  he  conceives  it  to  be  a peculiar 
acid,  coming  nearest  to  the  succinic  both  in  taste  and 
other  qualities,  Klaproth  has  provisionally  given  it  th® 

83 


MOR 


MOT 


name  of  moroxylic,  and  the  calcareous  salt  containing 
it,  that  of  moroxylate  of  lime. 

MORPHE  A ALBA.  (From  popQr),  form.)  A spe- 
cies of  cutaneous  leprosy.  See  Lepra  alphos. 

MORPHIA.  Morphine.  A new  vegetable  alkali, 
extracted  from  opium,  of  which  it  constitutes  the  nar- 
cotic principle.  See  Papaver  somniferum. 

MORPHINE.  See  Morphia. 

Morse'llus.  A lozenge. 

Morsulus.  An  ancient  name  for  that  form  of  me- 
dicine which  was  to  be  chewed  in  the  mouth,  as  a 
lozenge  ; the  word  signifying  a little  mouthful. 

Mo'rsus  diaboli.  The  fimbrise  of  the  Fallopian 
tubes. 

Mo'rta.  See  Pemphigus. 

Mortari'olum.  (Dim.  of  mortarium , a mortar.) 
In  chemistry,  it  is  a sort  of  mould  for  making  cupels 
with  ; also  a little  mortar.  In  anatomy,  it  is  the  sockets 
of  the  teeth. 

MORTIFICATION.  (Mortijicatio ; from  mors, 
death,  and  Jio,  to  become.)  Gangrena;  Sphacelus. 
The  loss  of  vitality  of  a part  of  the  body.  Surgeons 
divide  mortification  into  two  species,  the  one  preceded 
by  inflammation,  the'  other  without  it.  In  inflamma- 
tions that  are  to  terminate  in  mortification,  there  is  a 
diminution  of  power  joined  to  an  increased  action ; 
this  becomes  a cause  of  mortification,  by  destroying 
the  balance  of  power  and  action,  which  ought  to  exist 
in  every  part.  There  are,  however,  cases  of  mortifi- 
cation that  do  not  arise  wholly  from  that  as  a cause : 
of  this  kind  are  the  carbuncle,  and  the  slough,  formed 
in  the  small-pox  pustule.  Healthy  phlegmonous  in- 
flammation seldom  ends  in  mortification,  though  it 
does  so  when  very  vehement  and  extensive.  Erysipe- 
latous inflammation  is  observed  most  frequently  to 
terminate  in  gangrene ; and  whenever  phlegmon  is  in 
any  degree  conjoined  with  an  erysipelatous  affection, 
which  it  not  unfrequently  is,  it  seems  thereby  to  ac- 
quire the  same  tendency,  being  more  difficult  to  bring 
to  resolution,  or  suppuration,  than  the  true  phlegmon, 
and  more  apt  to  run  into  a.  mortified  state. 

Causes  which  impede  the  circulation  of  the  part 
affected,  will  occasion  mortification,  as  is  exemplified 
in  strangulated  hernia,  tied  polypi,  or  a limb  being  de- 
prived of  circulation  from  a dislocated  joint. 

Preventing  the  entrance  of  arterial  blood  into  a 
limb,  is  also  another  cause.  Paralysis,  conjoined  with 
pressure,  old  age,  and  ossification  of  the  arteries,  may 
produce  mortification  ; also  cold,  particularly  if  follow- 
ed by  the  sudden  application  of  warmth  ; and  likewise 
excessive  heat  applied  to  a part. 

The  symptoms  of  mortification  that  take  place  after 
inflammation  are  various,  but  generally  as  follows : — 
the  pain  and  sympathetic  fever  suddenly  diminish, 
the  part  affected  becomes  soft,  and  of  a livid  co- 
Jpur,  losing  at  the  same  time  more  or  less  of  its  sensi- 
bility. 

When  any  part  of  the  body  loses  all  motion,  sensi- 
bility, and  natural  heat,  and  becomes  of  a brown  livid 
or  black  colour,  it  is  said  to  be  affected  with  sphacelus. 
When  the  part  becomes  a cold,  black,  fibrous,  sense- 
less substance,  it  is  termed  a slough.  As  long  as  any 
sensibility,  motion,  and  warmth  continue,  the  state  of 
the  disorder  is  said  to  be  gangrene.  When  the  part 
has  become  quite  cold,  black,  fibrous,  incapable  of 
moving,  and  destitute  of  all  feeling,  circulation,  and 
life ; this  is  the  second  stage  of  mortification,  termed 
sphacelus. 

When  gangrene  takes  place,  the  patient  is  usually 
troubled  with  a kind  of  hiccough : the  constitution 
always  suffers  an  immediate  dejection,  the  counte- 
nance assumes  a wild  cadaverous  look,  the  pulse  be- 
comes small,  rapid,  and  sometimes  irregular;  cold  per- 
spirations come  on,  and  the  patient  is  often  affected 
with  diarrhoea  and  delirium. 

MORTON,  Richard,  was  born  in  Suffolk,  and  after 
taking  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  at  Oxford,  offi- 
ciated for  some  time  as  a chaplain : but  the  intole- 
rance of  the  times,  and  his  own  religious  scruples, 
compelled  him  to  change  for  the  medical  profession. 
He  was  accordingly  admitted  to  his  doctor’s  degree  in 
1670.  having  accompanied  the  Prince  of  Orange  to 
Oxford,  as  physician  to  his  person.  He  afterward  set- 
tled in  London,  became  a Fellow  of  the  College,  and 
obtained  a large  share  of  the  city  practice.  He  died 
in  1698.  His  works  have  had  considerable  reputation, 
and  evince  some  acuteness  of  observation,  and  acti- 


vity of  practice.  They  abound,  however,  with  the 
errors  of  the  humoral  pathology,  which  then  pre 
vailed ; and  sanction  a method  of  treatment  in  acute 
diseases,  which  his  more  able  contemporary,  Syden- 
ham, discountenanced,  and  which  subsequent  experi- 
ence has  generally  discarded.  His  first  publication 
was  an  attempt  to  arrange  the  varieties  of  consump- 
tion, but  not  very  successfully.  His  “ Pyretologia” 
came  out  in  two  volumes,  the  first  in  1691,  the  other  at 
an  interval  of  three  years ; in  this  work,  especially,  the 
stimulant  treatment  of  fevers  is  carried  to  an  unusual 
extent,  and  a more  general  use  of  cinchona  recom- 
mended. 

MO  RUM.  See  Morus  nigra. 

MORUS.  (From  uavpos,  bla6k ; so  called  from  the 
colour  of  its  fruit  when  ripe.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Moncecia  ; 
Order,  Tetrandria.  The  mulberry-tree. 

Morus  nigra.  The  systematic  name  of  the  mul- 
berry-tree. Morus — foliis  cordatis  scabris,  of  Lin- 
naeus. Mulberries  abound  with  a deep  violet-coloured 
juice,  which,  in  its  general  qualities,  agrees  with  that 
of  the  fruits  called  acido-dulces,  allaying  thirst,  partly 
by  refrigerating,  and  partly  by  exciting  an  excretion  of 
mucus  from  the  mouth  and  fauces ; a similar  effect  is 
also  produced  in  the  stomach,  where,  by  correcting 
putrescency,  a powerful  cause  of  thirst  is  removed. 
The  London  College  directs  a syrupus  mori , which  is 
an  agreeable  vehicle  for  various  medicines.  The  bark 
of  the  root  of  this  tree  is  said,  by  Andr^e,  to  be  useful 
in  cases  of  taenia. 

Mosaic  gold.  See  Aurum  musivum. 

Moscha'ta  nux.  See  Myristica  moschata. 

MO'SCHUS.  ( Mosch , Arabian.)  Musk.  See  Mos- 
chus  moschiferus. 

Moschus  moschiferus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  musk  animal,  a ruminating  quadruped,  resembling 
the  antelope.  An  unctuous  substance  is  contained  in 
excretory  follicles  about  the  navel  of  the  male  animal, 
the  strong  and  permanent  smell  of  which  is  peculiar  to 
it.  It  is  contained  in  a bag  placed  near  the  umbilical 
region.  The  best  musk  is  brought  from  Tonquin,  in 
China  ; an  inferior  sort  from  Agria  and  Bengal,  and 
a still  worse  from  Russia.  It  is  slightly  unctuous,  of  a 
black  colour,  having  a strong  durable  smell  and  a bit- 
ter taste.  It  yields  part  of  its  active  matter  to  water, 
by  infusion  ; by  distillation  the  water  is  impregnated 
with  its  flavour  ; alkohol  dissolves  it,  its  impurities 
excepted.  Chewed,  and  rubbed  with  a knife  on  paper, 
it  looks  bright,  yellowish,  smooth,  and  free  from  gritti- 
ness. Laid  on  a red-hot  iron,  it  catches  flame  and 
burns  almost  entirely  away,  leaving  only  an  exceed- 
ingly small  quantity  of  light  grayish  ashes.  If  any 
earthy  substances  have  been  mixed  with  the  musk, 
the  impurities  will  discover  them.  The  medicinal  and 
chemical  properties  of  musk  and  castor  are  very  simi- 
lar : the  virtues  of  the  former  are  generally  believed  to 
be  more  powerful,  and  hence  musk  is  preferred  in 
cases  of  imminent  danger.  It  is  prescribed  as  a pow- 
ful  antispasmodic,  in  doses  of  three  grains  or  upwards, 
even  to  half  a drachm,  in  the  greater  number  of  spas- 
modic diseases,  especially  in  hysteria  and  singultus, 
and  also  in  diseases  of  debility.  In  typhus,  it  is  em- 
ployed to  remove  subsultus  tendinum,  and  other  symp- 
toms of  a spasmodic  nature.  In  cholera,  it  frequently 
stops  vomiting;  and,  combined  with  ammonia,  it  is 
given  to  arrest  the  progress  of  gangrene.  It  is  best 
given  in  the  form  of  bolus.  To  children,  it  is  given  in 
the  form  of  enema,  and  is  an  efficacious  remedy  in 
the  convulsions  arising  from  dentition.  It  is  also  given 
in  hydrophobia,  and  in  some  forms  of  mania. 

Mosqui'ta.  (From  mosq-uila,  a gnat,  Spanish.) 
An  itching  eruption  of  the  skin,  produced  in  hot  cli- 
mates  by  the  bite  of  gnats. 

Mosy'llum.  Mff<rvAXov.  The  best  cinnamon. 

Mother  of  thyme.  See  Thymus  serpyllum. 

MOTHER-WATER.  When  sea-water,  or  any 
other  solution  containing  various  salts,  is  evaporated, 
and  the  crystals  taken  out,  there  always  remains  a 
fluid  containing  deliquescent  salts,  and  the  impurities, 
if  present.  This  is  called  the  mother-water. 

MOTHERWORT.  See  Leonurus  cardiaca. 

MOTION.  See  Muscular  motion. 

Motion , peristaltic.  See  Peristaltic  motion. 

MOTO'RES  OCULORUM.  (Mervi  motor es  ocula- 
rum:  so  called  because  they  supply  the  muscles  which 
move  the  eye.)  The  third  pair  of  nerves  of  the  brain. 


MUC 


They  arise  from  the  crura  cerebri,  and  are  distributed 
on  the  muscles  of  the  bulb  of  the  eye. 

Moto'rii.  See  Motores  oculorum. 

MOULD.  See  Fontanella. 

Mountain  cork.  See  Asbestos. 

Mountain  green.  Common  copper  green,  a car- 
bonate. 

Mountain  leather.  See  Asbestos. 

Mountain  parsley , black.  See  Athamanta  oreose- 
linum. 

Mountain  soap.  See  Soap,  mountain. 

Mountain  wood.  See  Asbestos. 

MOUSE-EAR.  See  Hieracium  pilosella. 
MOUTH.  Os.  The  cavity  of  the  mouth  is  well 
Jtnown.  The  parts  which  constitute  it  are  the  com- 
mon integuments,  the  lips,  the  muscles  of  the  upper 
and  under  jaw,  the  palate,  two  alveolar  arches,  the 
gums,  the  tongue,  the  cheeks,  and  salival  glands.  The 
toonesr oS  the  mouth  are  the  two  superior  maxillary, 
two  palatine,  the  lower  jaw,  and  thirty-two  teeth. 
The  arteries  of  the  external  parts  of  the  mouth  are 
branches  of  the  infra-orbital,  inferior  alveolar,  and 
facial  arteries.  The  veins  empty  themselves  into  the 
external  jugulars.  The  nerves  are  branches  from  the 
fifth  and  seventh  pair.  The  use  of  the  mouth  is  for 
mastieation,  speech,  respiration,  deglutition,  suction, 
and  taste. 

MO'XA.  A Japanese  word.  See  Artemisia  chinensis. 
Moxa  japanica.  See  Artemisia  chinensis. 

MUCIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  mucicum;  from  mucus , 
it  being  obtained  from  gum.)  “ This  acid  has  been 
generally  known  by  the  name  of  saccholactic , because 
it  was  first  obtained  from  sugar  of  milk ; but  as  all  the 
gums  appear  to  afford  it,  and  the  principal  acid  in 
sugar  of  milk  is  the  oxalic,  chemists  in  general  now 
distinguish  it  by  the  name  of  mucic  acid. 

It  was  discovered  by  Scheele.  Having  poured 
twelve  ounces  of  diluted  nitric  acid  on  four  ounces  of 
powdered  sugar  of  milk  in  a glass  retort  on  a sand 
bath,  the  mixture  became  gradually  hot,  and  at  length 
effervesced  violently,  and  continued  to  do  so  for  a con- 
siderable time  after  the  retort  was  taken  from  the  fire. 
It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  use  a large  retort,  and 
not  to  lute  the  receiver  too  light.  The  effervescence 
having  nearly  subsided,  the  retort  was  again  placed  on 
the  sand  heat,  and  the  nitric  acid  distilled  off,  till  the 
mass  had  acquired  a yellowish  colour.  This  exhibit- 
ing no  crystals,  eight  ounces  more  of  the  same  acid 
were  added,  and  the  distillation  repeated,  till  the  yel- 
low colour  of  the  fluid  disappeared.  As  the  fluid  was 
inspissated  by  cooling,  it  was  redissolved  in  eight 
ounces  of  water,  and  filtered.  The  filtered  liquor 
held  oxalic  acid  in  solution,  and  seven  drachms  and  a 
half  of  white  powder  remained  on  the  filter.  This 
powder  was  the  acid  under  consideration. 

If  one  part  of  gum  be  heated  gently  with  two  of 
nitric  acid,  till  a small  quantity  of  nitrous  gas  and  of 
fcarbonic  acid  is  disengaged,  the  dissolved  mass  will 
deposite  on  cooling  the  mucic  acid.  According  to 
Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin,  different  gums  yield  from  14 
to  26  hundredths  of  this  acid. 

This  pulverulent  acid  is  soluble  in  about  sixty  parts 
of  hot  water,  and,  by  cooling,  a fourth  part  separates 
in  small  shining  scales,  that  grow  white  in  the  air.  It 
decomposes  the  muriate  of  barytes,  and  both  the  ni- 
trate and  muriate  of  lime.  It  acts  very  little  on  the 
metals,  but  forms  with  their  oxides  salts  scarcely  solu- 
ble. It  precipitates  the  nitrates  of  silver,  lead,  and 
mercury.  With  potassa  it  forms  a salt  soluble  in  eight 
parts  of  boiling  water,  and  crystallizable  by  cooling. 
That  of  soda  requires  but  five  parts  of  water,  and  is 
equally  crystallizable.  Both  these  salts  are  still  more 
soluble  when  the  acid  is  in  excess.  That  of  ammonia 
is  deprived  of  its  base  by  heat.  The  salts  of  barytes, 
lime,  and  magnesia,  are  nearly  insoluble.” 
MUCILAGE.  Mucilago.  An  aqueous  solution  of 
gum.  See  Gum. 

MUCILAGINOUS.  Gummy. 

Mucilaginous  extracts.  Extracts  that  readily 
dissolve  in  water,  scarcely  at  all  in  spirits  of  wine,  and 
undergo  spirituous  fermentation. 

MUCILA'GO.  { Mucilage .)  See  Gum. 

Mucilago  acaci-e.  Mucilage  of  acacia.  Muci- 
la, fro  gummi  arabici. — Take  of  acacia  gum,  powdered, 
four  ounces;  boiling  water,  half  a pint.  Rub  the  gum 
with  the  water,  gradually  added,  until  it  incorporates 
Into  a mucilage.  A demulcent  preparation,  more  fre- 


MUL 

quently  used  to  combine  medicines,  than  in  any  othei 
form. 

Mucilago  amyli.  Starch  mucilage. — Take  of 
starch,  three  drachms ; water,  a pint.  Rub  the  starch, 
gradually  adding  the  water  to  it;  then  boil  until  it  in- 
corporates into  a mucilage.  This  preparation  is  mostly 
exhibited  with  opium,  in  the  form  of  clyster  in  diar- 
rhoeas and  dysenteries,  where  the  tenesmus  arises  from 
an  abrasion  of  the  mucus  of  the  rectum. 

Mucilago  arabici  gummi.  See  Mucilago  acacice. 

Mucilago  seminis  cydonii.  See  Decoctum  cy- 
donice. 

Mucilago  tragacanthje.  Mucilage  of  traga- 
canth,  joined  with  syrup  of  mulberries,  forms  a plea- 
sant demulcent,  and  may  be  exhibited  to  children,  who 
are  fond  of  it.  This  mucilage  is  omitted  in  the  last 
London  Ph^rmacoposia,  as  possessing  no  superiority 
over  the  mucilage  of  acacia. 

Mucoca'rneus.  In  M.  A.  Severinus,  it  is  an  epithet 
for  a tumour,  and  an  abscess,  which  is  partly  fleshy 
and  partly  mucous. 

MUCOUS.  Of  the  nature  of  mucus. 

Mucoud  acid.  See  Mucic  acid. 

Mucous  glands.  Glandulce  mucosoe.  Mucipalous 
glands.  Glands  that  secrete  mucus,  such  as  the  glands 
of  the  Schneiderian  membrane  of  the  nose,  the  glands 
of  the  fauces,  oesophagus,  stomach,  intestines,  bladder, 
urethra,  &c. 

MUCRONATUS.  (From  macro,  a sharp  point.) 
Sharp-pointed.  See  Cuspidatus. 

MUCUS.  (From  pv\a,  the  mucus  of  the  nose.)  A 
name  given  to  the  two  following  substances. 

1.  Mucus , animal.  One  of  the  primary  fluids  of  an 
animal  body,  perfectly  distinct  from  gelatin,  and  ve- 
getable mucus.  Tannin,  which  is  a delicate  test  for 
gelatin,  does  not  affect  mucus.  “ This  fluid  is  transpa- 
rent, glutinous,  thready,  and  of  a salt  savour ; it  red- 
dens paper  of  turnsole,  contains  a great  deal  of  water, 
muriate  of  potassa  arid  soda,  lactate  of  lime,  of  soda, 
and  phosphate  of  lime.  According  to  Fourcroy  and 
Vauquelin,  the  mucus  is  the  same  in  all  the  mucous 
membranes.  On  the  contrary,  Berzelius  thinks  it  va- 
riable according  to  the  points’  from  which  it  is  ex- 
tracted. 

The  mucus  forms  a layer  of  greater  or  less  thickness 
at  the  surface  of  the  mucous  membranes,  and  it  is  re- 
newed with  more  or  less  rapidity ; the  water  it  con- 
tains evaporates  under  the  name  of  mucous  exhalation  ; 
it  also  protects  these  membranes  against  the  action  of 
the  air,  of  the  aliment,  the  different  glandular  fluids, 
&c. ; it  is,  in  fact,  to  these  membranes  nearly  what 
the  epidermis  is  to  the  skin.  Independently  of  this 
general  use,  it  has  others  that  vary  according  to  the 
parts  of  mucous  membranes.  Thus,  the  mucus  of  the 
nose  is  favourable  to  the  smell,  that  of  the  mouth  gives 
facility  to  the  taste,  that  of  the  stomach  and  the  intes- 
tines assists  in  the  digestion,  that  of  the  genital  and 
urinary  ducts  serves  in  the  generation  and  the  secre- 
tion of  the  urine,  &c. 

A great  part  of  the  mucus  is  absorbed  again  by  the 
membranes  which  secrete  it ; another  part  is  carried 
outwards,  either  alone,  as  in  blowing  the  nose,  or 
spitting,  or  mixed  with  the  pulmonary  transpiration, 
or  else  mixed  with  the  excremental  matter,  or  the 
urine,  &c. 

Animal  mucus  differs  from  that  obtained  from  the 
vegetable  kingdom,  in  not  being  somDle  in  water, 
swimming  on  its  surface,  nor  capable  of  mixing  oil 
with  water,  and  being  soluble  in  mineral  acids,  which 
vegetable  mucus  is  not. 

2.  Mucus , vegetable.  See  Gum. 

MUGWORT.  See  Artemisia  vulgaris. 

Mugwort , China.  See  Artemisia  chinensis. 

Mu'lje.  Pustules  contracted  either  by  heat  or  cold. 

MULBERRY.  See  Morus  Nigra. 

MULLEIN.  See  Verbascum. 

Mu'lsum.  See  Hydromeli. 

MULTI' FIDUS  SPIN  AS.  (From  multus,  many,  and 
findo,  to  divide.)  Transverso- spinalis  lumborum; 

Musculus  sacer ; Semi-spinalis  internus,  sive  trans 
verso  spinalis  dor  si  ; Semi-spinalis,  sive  transverso 
spinalis  colli , pars  interna , of  Winslow.  Transver 
salis  lumborum  vulgo  sacer;  Transversalis  dor  si , 
Transversalis  colli,  of  Douglas.  Lumbo  dorsi  spinal , 
of  Dumas.  The  generality  of  anatomical  writers  have 
unnecessarily  multiplied  the  muscles  of  the  spine,  and 
hence  their  descriptions  of  these  parts  are  confused, 


MUR 


MUR 


and  difficult  to  be  understood.  Under  the  name  of 
viultifidus  spina , Albinus  has,  therefore,  very  pro- 
perly included  those  portions  of  muscular  flesh,  inter- 
mixed with  tendinous  fibres,  which  lie  close  to  the 
posterior  part  of  the  spine,  and  which  Douglas  and 
Winslow  have  described  as  three  distinct  muscles, 
under  the  names  of  transversales , or  tr ansver so- s fi- 
nales, of  the  loins,  back,  and  neck.  The  multifidus 
spina*  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  upper  con- 
vex surface  of  the  os  sacrum,  from  the  posterior  adjoin- 
ing part  of  the  ilium,  from  the  oblique  and  transverse 
processes  of  all  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  from  the  trans- 
verse processes  of  all  the  dorsal  vertebra,  and  from 
those  of  the  cervical  vertebra,  excepting  the  three  first. 
From  all  these  origins  the  fibres  of  the  muscles  run  in 
an  oblique  direction,  and  are  inserted,  by  distinct  ten- 
dons, into  the  spinous  processes  of  all  the  vertebra  of 
the  loins  and  back,  and  likewise  into  those  of  the  six 
inferior  vertebra  of  the  neck.  When  this  muscle  acts 
singly,  it  extends  theback  obliquely,  or  moves  it  to  one 
side  ; when  both  muscles  act,  they  extend  the  vertebra 
backwards. 

MULTIFLORUS.  Many-flowered.  Applied  to  the 
flower-stalk  of  plants,  which  is  so  called  when  it  bears 
many  flowers  ; as  the  Daphne  laureola.  See  Peduncu- 
lus. 

Multifo'rme  os.  See  Ethmoid  bone. 

MU  LT1PES.  (From  multus, many,  and^pes,  a foot.) 

1.  The  wood-louse. 

2.  The  polypus. 

3.  Any  animal  having  more  than  four  feet. 

MUMPS.  See  Cynanche parotidea. 

Mundicati'va.  (From  mundo,  to  cleanse.)  Mun- 

dificantia.  Medicines  which  purify  and  cleanse  away 
foulness. 

Mundifica'ntia.  See  Mundicativa. 

Mu'ngos.  See  Ophiorrhuamungos. 

MURA'LIS.  (From  murus,  a wall ; so  called  be- 
cause it  grows  upon  walls.)  Pellitory.  See  Parietaria. 

MURA'RIA.  (From  murus , a wall:  because  it 
grows  about  walls.)  A species  of  maiden-hair : the 
Asplenium  murale. 

MURIACTTE.  Gypsum. 

MU'RIAS.  A muriate,  or  salt,  formed  by  the  union 
of  the  muriatic  acid  with  salifiable  bases  ; as  muriate 
of  ammonia , &c. 

Murias  ammonite.  See  Sal  ammoniac. 

Murias  antimonii.  Butter  of  antimony.  Formerly 
used  as  a caustic. 

Murias  baryta.  See  Barytes. 

Murias  calcis.  See  Calx. 

Murias  ferri.  Ferrum  salitvm ; Oleum  martis 
per  deliquium.  This  preparation  of  iron  is  styptic  and 
tonic,  and  may  be  given  in  chlorosis,  intermittents, 
rachitis,  &c. 

Murias  ferri  ammoniacalis.  See  Ferrum  ammo- 
niatum. 

Murias  hydrargyri.  There  are  two  muriates  of 
mercury.  See  Hydrargyri  submurias , and  Hydrar- 
gyri oxymurias. 

Murias  hydrargyri  ammoniacalis.  See  Hydrar- 
gyrum preecipitatum  album. 

Murias  hydrargyri  oxygenatus.  See  Hydrar- 
gir-  oxymurias. 

Murias  potass.®.  Alkali  vegetabile  salitum ; Sal 
digestivus ; Sal  febrifugus  Sylvii.  This  salt  is  ex- 
hibited with  " ^ame  intention  as  the  muriate  of  soda, 
and  was  formerly  in  high  estimation  in  the  cure  of  in- 
termittents, &c. 

Murias  potass.e  oxygenatus.  Chlorate  of  potassa. 
The  oxygenated  muriate  of  potassa  has  lately  been  ex- 
tolled in  the  cure  of  the  venereal  disease.  It  is  ex- 
hibited in  doses  of  from  fifteen  to  forty  grains  in  the 
course  of  a day.  It  increases  the  action  of  the  heart 
and  arteries,  is  supposed  to  oxygenate  the  blood,  and 
prove  of  great  service  in  scorbutus,  asthenia,  and 
cachectic  diseases. 

Murias  sodje.  See  Soda:  murias. 

Murias  stibii.  See  Murias  antimonii. 

MURIATIC.  ( Muriaticus  ; from  muria,  brine.) 

Belonging  to  sea  salt. 

Muriatic  acid.  Acidummuriaticum.  lUhe  Hydro- 
chloric of  the  French  chemists.  Let  six  parts  of  pure 
and  well  dried  sea  salt  be  put  into  a glass  retort,  to  the 
beak  of  which  is  luted,  in  a horizontal  direction,  a long 
glass  tube  artificially  refrigerated,  and  containing  a 
quantity  of  ignited  muriate  of  lime.  Upon  the  salt 


pour  at  intervals  five  parts  of  concentrated  oil  of  vitriol, 
through  a syphon  funnel,  fixed  air-tight,  in  the  tubulure 
of  the  retort.  The  free  end  of  the  long  tube  being  re- 
curved, so  as  to  dip  into  the  mercury  of  a pneumatic 
trough,  a gas  will  issue,  which,  on  coining  in  contact 
with  the  air,  will  form  a visible  cloud,  or  haze,  pre- 
senting, when  viewed  in  a vivid  light,  prismatic  colours. 
This  gas  is  muriatic  acid. 

When  received  in  glass  jars  over  dry  mercury,  it  is 
invisible,  and  possesses  all  the  mechanical  properties  of 
air.  Its  odour  is  pungent  and  peculiar.  Its  taste  acid 
and  corrosive.  Its  specific  gravity,  according  to  Sir  H. 
Davy,  is  such,  that  100  cubic  inches  weigh  39  grains, 
while  by  estimation,  he  says,  they  ought  to  be  38.4  gr. 
If  an  inflamed  taper  be  immersed  in  it,  it  is  instantly 
extinguished.  It  is  destructive  of  animal  life ; but  the 
irritation  produced  by  it  on  the  epiglottis  scarcely  per- 
mits its  descent  into  the  lungs.  It  is  merely  changed  in 
bulk  by  alterations  of  temperature  ; it  experiences  no 
change  of  state. 

When  potassium,  tin,  or  zinc,  is  heated  in  contact 
with  this  gas  over  mercury,  one  half  of  the  volume 
disappears,  and  the  remainder  is  pure  hydrogen.  On 
examining  the  solid  residue,  it  is  found  to  be  a metallic 
chloride.  Hence  muriatic  acid  gas  consists  of  chlorine 
and  hydrogen,  united  in  equal  volumes.  This  view  of 
its  nature  was  originally  given  by  Scheele,  though  ob- 
scured by  terms  derived  from  the  vague  and  visionary 
hypothesis  of  phlogiston.  The  French  school  after- 
ward introduced  the  belief  that  muriatic  acid  gas  was 
a compound  of  an  unknown  radical  and  water;  and 
that  chlorine  consisted  of  this  radical  and  oxygen.  Sir 
H.  Davy  has  proved,  by  decisive  experiments,  that  in 
the  present  state  of  our  knowledge,  chlorine  must  be  re- 
garded as  a simple  substance;  and  muriatic  acid  gas, 
as  a compound  of  it  with  hydrogen. 

Muriatic  acid,  from  its  composition,  has  been  termed 
by  Lussac  the  hydrochloric  acid ; a name  objected  to  by 
Sir  H.  Davy.  It  was  prepared  by  the  older  chemists  in 
a very  rude  manner,  and  was  called  by  them  spirit  of 
salt. 

In  the  ancient  method,  common  salt  was  previouslj 
decrepitated,  then  ground  with  dried  clay,  and  kneaded 
or  wrought  with  water  to  a moderately  stitf  consistence, 
after  which  it  was  divided  into  balls  of  the  size  of  a 
pigeon’s  egg  ; these  balls,  being  previously  well  dried, 
were  put  into  a retort,  so  as  to  fill  the  vessel  two-thirds 
full ; distillation  being  then  proceeded  upon,  the  mu- 
riatic acid  came  over  when  the  heat  was  raised  to  igni- 
tion. In  this  process  eight  or  ten  parts  of  clay  to  one 
of  salt  are  to  be  used.  The  retort  must  be  of  stone- 
ware well  coated,  and  the  furnace  must  be  of  that  kind 
called  reverberatory. 

It  was  formerly  thought,  that  the  salt  was  merely  di- 
vided in  this  operation  by  the  clay,  and  on  this  account 
more  readily  gave  out  its  acid  : but  there  can  be*  little 
doubt,  that  the  effect  is  produced  by  the  silicious  earth, 
which  abounds  in  large  proportions  in  all  natural  clays, 
and  detains  the  alkali  of  the  salt  by  combining  with  it. 

Sir  H.  Davy  first  gave  the  just  explanation  of  this  de- 
composition. Common  salt  is  a compound  of  sodium 
and  chlorine.  The  sodium  may  be  conceived  to  com- 
bine with  the  oxygen  of  the  water  in  the  earth,  and 
with  the  earth  itself,  to  form  a vitreous  compound ; 
and  the  chlorine  to  unite  with  the  hydrogen  of  the 
water,  forming  muriatic  acid  gas.  ‘It  is  also  easy,’ 
adds  he,  ‘ according  to  these  new  ideas,  to  explain  the 
decomposition  of  salt  by  moistened  litharge,  the  theory 
of  which  has  so  much  perplexed  the  most  acute  che- 
mists. It  may  be  conceived  to  be  an  instance  of  com- 
pound affinity  ; the  chlorine  is  attracted  by  the  lead, 
and  the  sodium  combines  with  the  oxygen  of  the  li- 
tharge, and  with  water,  to  form  hydrate  of  soda,  which 
gradually  attracts  carbonic  acid  from  the  air.  When 
common  salt  is  decomposed  by  oil  of  vitriol,  it  was 
usual  to  explain  the  phenomenon  by  saying,  that  the 
acid,  by  its  superior  affinity,  aided  by  heat,  expelled  the 
gas,  and  united  to  the  soda.  But  as  neither  muriatic 
acid  nor  soda  exists  in  common  salt,  we  must  now 
modify  the  explanation,  by  saying  that  the  water  of 
the  oil  of  vitriol  is  first  decomposed,  its  oxygen  unites  to 
the  sodium  to  form  soda,  which  is  seized  on  by  the 
sulphuric  acid,  while  the  chlorine  combines  with  the 
hydrogen  of  the  water,  and  exhales  in  the  form  of  mu- 
riatic acid  gas.’ 

As  100  parts  of  dry  sea  salt  are  capable  of  yielding 
62  parts  by  weight  of  muriatic  acid  gas,  these  ought  to 


MUR 


MUR 


afibrd,  by  economical  management,  nearly  221  parts  of 
liquid  acid,  specific  gravity  1.142,  as  prescribed  by  the 
London  College,  or  200  parts  of  acid  sp.  gr.  1.160,  as 
directed  by  the  Edinburgh  and  Dublin  Pharmaco- 
poeias. 

The  ancient  method  of  extracting  the  gas  from  salt 
is  now  laid  aside. 

The  English  manufacturers  use  iron  stills  for  this  dis- 
tillation, with  earthen  heads:  the  philosophical  che- 
mist, in  making  the  acid  of  commerce , will  doubtless 
prefer  glass.  Five  parts  by  weight  of  strong  sulphuric 
acid  are  to  be  added  to  six  of  decrepitated  sea  salt,  in  a 
retort,  the  upper  part  of  which  is  furnished  with  a tube 
or  neck,  through  which  the  acid  is  to  be  poured  upon 
the  salt.  The  aperture  of  this  tube  must  be  closed 
with  a ground  stopper  immediately  after  the  pouring. 
The  sulphuric  acid  immediately  combines  with  the  al- 
kali, and  expels  the  muriatic  acid  in  the  form  of  a pe- 
culiar air,  which  is  rapidly  absorbed  by  water.  As 
this  combination  and  disengagement  take  place  with- 
out tire  application  of  heat,  and  the  aSrial  fluid  escapes 
very  rapidly,  it  is  necessary  to  arrange  and  lute  the  ves- 
sels together  before  the  sulphuric  acid  is  added,  and  not 
to  make  any  fire  in  the  furnace  until  the  disengagement 
begins  to  slacken  ; at  which  time  it  must  be  very  gra- 
dually raised.  Before  the  modern  improvements  in 
chemistry  were  made,  a great  part  of  the  acid  escaped 
for  want  of  water  to  combine  with  ; but  by  the  use  of 
Wolfe’s  apparatus  the  acid  air  is  made  to  pass  through 
water,  in  which  it  is  nearly  condensed,  and  forms  mu- 
riatic acid  of  double  the  weight  of  the  water,  though 
the  bulk  of  this  fluid  is  increased  one-half  only.  The 
acid  condensed  in  the  first  receiver,  which  contains  no 
water,  is  of  a yellow  colour,  arising  from  the  impuri- 
ties of  the  salt. 

The  marine  acia  in  commerce  has  a straw  colour : 
but  this  is  owing  to  accidental  impurity  ; for  it  does  not 
obtain  in  the  acid  produced  by  the  impregnation  of 
water  with  the  afiriform  acid. 

The  muriatic  acid  is  one  of  those  longest  known,  and 
some  of  its  compounds  are  among  those  salts  with 
which  we  are  most  familiar. 

The  muriates , when  in  a state  of  dryness,  are  actu- 
ally chlorides,  consisting  of  chlorine  and  the  metal ; 
yet  they  may  be  conveniently  treated  of  under  the  title 
muriates. 

The  muriate  of  barytes  crystallizes  in  tables  bevelled 
at  the  edges,  or  in  octahedral  pyramids  applied  base  to 
base.  It  is  soluble  in  five  parts  of  water  at  60°,  in  still 
less  at  a boiling  heat,  and  also  in  alkohol.  It  is  not  al- 
tered in  the  air,  and  but  partly  decomposable  by  heat. 
The  sulphuric  acid  separates  its  base ; and  the  alkaline 
carbonates  and  sulphates  decompose  it  by  double  affi- 
nity. It  is  best  prepared  by  dissolving  the  carbonate  in 
dilute  muriatic  acid  ; and  if  contaminated  with  iron 
or  lead,  which  occasionally  happens,  these  may  be  se 
parated  by  the  addition  of  a small  quantity  of  liquid 
ammonia,  or  by  boiling  and  stirring  the  solution  with  a 
little  barytes.  Goettling  recommends  to  prepare  it 
from  the  sulphate  of  barytes;  eight  parts  of  which,  in 
fine  powder,  are  to  be  mixed  with  two  of  muriate  of 
soda,  and  one  of  charcoal  powder.  This  is  to  be 
pressed  hard  into  a Hessian  crucible,  and  exposed  for 
an  hour  and  a half  to  a red  heat  in  a wind  furnace. 
The  cold  mass,  being  powdered,  is  to  be  boiled  a mi- 
nute or  two  in  sixteen  parts  of  water,  and  then  filtered. 
To  this  liquor  muriatic  acid  is  to  be  added  by  little  and 
little,  till  sulphuretted  hydrogen  ceases  to  be  evolved. 
It  is  then  to  be  filtered,  a little  hot  water  to  be  poured 
on  the  residuum,  the  liquor  evaporated  to  a pellicle, 
filtered  again,  and  then  set  to  crystallize.  As  the  mu- 
riate of  soda  is  much  more  soluble  than  the  muriate  of 
barytes,  and  does  not  separate  by  cooling,  the  muriate 
of  barytes  will  crystallize  into  a perfectly  white  salt, 
and  leave  the  muriate  of  soda  in  the  mother  water, 
which  may  be  evaporated  repeatedly  till  no  more  mu- 
riate of  barytes  is  obtained.  This  salt  was  first  em- 
ployed in  medicine  by  Dr.  Crawford,  chiefly  in  scrofu- 
lous complaints  and  cancer,  beginning  with  doses  of  a 
few  drops  of  the  saturated  solution  twice  a day,  and 
increasing  it  gradually,  as  far  as  forty  or  fifty  drops  in 
some  instances.  In  large  doses  it  excites  nausea,  and 
has  deleterious  effects.  Fourcroy  says  it  has  been 
found  very  successful  in  scrofula  in  France.  It  has 
likewise  been  recommended  as  a vermifuge ; and  it  has 
been  given  with  much  apparent  advantage  even  to  very 
young  children  where  the  usual  symptoms  of  worms 


occurred,  though  none  were  ascertained  to  be  present. 
As  a test  of  sulphuric  acid  it  is  of  great  use. 

The  muriate  of  potassa,  formerly  known  by  the 
names  of  febrifuge  salt  of  Sylvius , digestive  salt , and 
regenerated  sea  salt , crystallizes  in  regular  cubes,  or  in 
rectangular  parallelopipedons ; decrepitating  on  the 
fire,  without  losing  much  of  their  acid,  and  acquiring  a 
little  moisture  from  damp  air,  and  giving  it  out  again  in 
dry.  Their  taste  is  saline  and  bitter.  They  are  solu- 
ble in  thrice  their  weight  of  cold  water,  and  in  but  little 
less  of  boiling  water,  so  as  to  require  spontaneous 
evaporation  for  crystallizing.  Fourcroy  recommends, 
to  cover  the  vessel  with  gauze,  and  suspend  hairs  in  it, 
for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  regular  crystals. 

It  is  sometimes  prepared  in  decomposing  sea  salt  by 
common  potassa  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  soda ; 
and  may  be  formed  by  the  direct  combination  of  its 
constituent  parts. 

It  is  decomposable  by  the  sulphuric  and  nitric  acids. 
Barytes  decomposes  it,  though  not  completely;  and 
both  silex  and  alumina  decomposed  it  partially  in  the 
dry  way.  It  decomposes  the  earthy  nitrates,  so  that  it 
might  be  used  in  saltpetre  manufactories  to  decompose 
the  nitrate  of  lime. 

Muriate  of  soda  or  common  salt,  is  of  considerable 
use  in  the  arts,  as  well  as  a necessary  ingredient  in  our 
food.  It  crystallizes  in  cubes,  which  are  sometimes 
grouped  together  in  various  ways,  and  not  unfrequently 
form  hollow  quadrangular  pyramids.  In  the  fire  it  de- 
crepitates, melts,  and  is  at  length  volatilized.  When 
pure,  it  is  not  deliquescent.  One  part  is  soluble  in  2£ 
of  cold  water,  and  in  little  less  of  hot,  so  that  it  cannot 
be  crystallized  but  by  evaporation. 

Common  salt  is  lound  in  large  masses,  or  in  rocks 
under  the  earth,  in  England  and  elsewhere.  In  the 
solid  form  it  is  called  sal  gem,  or  rock  salt.  If  it  be 
pure  and  transparent,  it  may  be  immediately  used  in 
' the  state  in  which  it  is  found ; but  if  it  contain  any  im- 
pure earthy  particles,  it  should  be  previously  freed  from 
them.  In  some  countries  it  is  found  in  incredible  quan- 
tities, and  dug  up  like  metals  from  the  bowels  of  the 
earth.  In  this  manner  has  this  sail  been  dug  out  of  the 
celebrated  salt  mines  near  Bochnia  and  Wieliczka,  in 
Poland,  ever  since  the  middle  of  the  13th  century,  con- 
sequently above  these  500  years,  in  such  amazing  quan- 
tities, that  sometimes  there  have  been  20,000  tons  ready 
for  sale.  In  these  mines,  which  are  said  to  reach  to 
the  depth  of  several  hundred  fathoms,  500  men  are 
constantly  employed.  The  pure  and  transparent  salt 
needs  no  other  preparation  than  to  be  beaten  to  small 
pieces  or  ground  in  a mill.  But  that  which  is  more  im- 
pure must  be  elutriated,  purified,  and  boiled.  That 
which  is  quite  impure,  and  full  of  small  stones,  is  sold 
under  the  name  of  rock  salt,  and  is  applied  to  ordinary 
uses.  It  may  likewise  be  used  for  strengthening  weak 
and  poor  brine-springs. 

The  waters  of  the  ocean  every  where  abound  with 
common  salt,  though  in  different  proportions.  The 
water  of  the  Baltic  sea  is  said  to  contain  one  sixty- 
fourth  of  its  weight  of  salt ; that  of  the  sea  between 
England  and  Flanders  contains  one  thirty- second  part; 
that  on  the  coast  of  Spain  one-sixteenth  part:  and 
between  the  tropics  it  is  said,  erroneously,  to  contain 
from  an  eleventh  to  an  eighth  part. 

The  water  of  the  sea  contains,  besides  the  common 
salt,  a considerable  proportion  of  muriate  of  magnesia, 
and  some  sulphate  of  lime,  of  soda,  and  potassa.  The 
former  is  the  chief  ingredient  of  the  remaining  liquid 
which  is  left  after  the  extraction  of  the  common  salt, 
and  is  called  the  mother  water.  Sea  water,  if  taken 
up  near  the  surface,  contains  also  the  putrid  remains 
of  animal  substances,  which  render  it  nauseous,  and 
in  a long-continued  calm  cause  the  sea  to  stink. 

The  whole  art  of  extracting  salt  from  waters  which 
contain  it,  consists  in  evaporating  the  water  in  the 
cheapest  and  most  convenient  manner.  In  England,  a 
brine  composed  of  sea-water,  with  the  addition  of  rock 
salt,  is  evaporated  in  large  shallow  iron  boilers ; and  the 
crystals  of  salt  are  taken  out  in  baskets.  In  Russia, 
and  probably  in  other  northern  countries,  the  sea-wa- 
ter  is  exposed  to  freeze ; and  the  ice,  which  is  almost 
entirely  fresh,  being  taken  out,  the  remaining  brine  is 
much  stronger,  and  is  evaporated  by  boiling.  In  the 
southern  parts  of  Europe,  the  salt-makers  take  advan 
tage  of  spontaneous  evaporation.  A flat  piece  of 
ground  near  the  sea  is  chosen,  and  banked  round,  to 
prevent  its  being  overflowed  at  high  water.  The  space 


MUR 


MUR 


within  the  banks  is  divided  by  low  walls  into  several 
compartments,  which  successively  communicate  with 
each  other.  At  flood  tide,  the  first  of  these  is  filled 
with  sea-water,  which,  by  remaining  a certain  time, 
deposites  its  impurities,  and  loses  part  of  its  aqueous 
fluid.  The  residue  is  then  suffered  to  run  into  the  next 
compartment,  and  the  former  is  again  filled  as  before. 
Prom  the  second  compartment,  after  a due  time,  the 
water  is  transferred  into  a third,  which  is  lined  with 
clay,  well  rammed  and  levelled.  At  this  period,  the 
evaporation  is  usually  brought  to  that  degree,  that  a 
crust  of  salt  is  formed  on  the  surface  of  the  water, 
which  the  workmen  break,  and  it  immediately  falls  to 
the  bottom.  They  continue  to  do  this  until  the  quan- 
tity is  sufficient  to  be  raked  out,  and  dried  in  heaps. 
This  is  called  bay  salt. 

Besides  its  use  in  seasoning  our  food,  and  preserving 
meat  both  for  domestic  consumption  and  during  the 
longest  voyages,  and  in  furnishing  us  with  the  muriatic 
acid  and  soda,  salt  forms  a glaze  for  coarse  pottery,  by 
being  thrown  into  the  oven  where  it  is  baked ; it  im- 
proves the  whiteness  and  clearness  of  glass  ; it  gives 
greater  hardness  to  soap ; in  melting  metals  it  preserves 
their  surface  from  calcination,  by  defending  them  from 
the  air,  and  is  employed  with  advantage  in  some  as- 
says ; it  is  used  as  a mordant,  and  for  improving  certain 
colours,  and  enters  more  or  less  into  many  other  pro- 
cesses of  the  arts. 

The  muriate  of  strontian  has  not  long  been  known. 
Dr.  Hope  first  distinguished  it  from  muriate  of  barytes. 
It  crystallizes  in  very  slender  hexagonal  prisms ; has 
a cool  pungent  taste,  without  the  austerity  of  the 
muriate  of  barytes,  or  the  bitterness  of  the  muriate  of 
lime : is  soluble  in  0.75°  of  water  at  60°,  and  to  almost 
any  amount  in  boiling  water ; is  likewise  soluble  in 
alkohol,  and  gives  a blood-red  colour  to  its  flame. 

It  has  never  been  found  in  nature,  but  may  be  pre- 
pared in  the  same  way  as  the  muriate  of  barytes. 

The  muriate  of  lime  has  been  known  by  the  names 
of  marine  selenite , calcareous  marine  salt , muria,  and 
fixed  sal  ammoniac.  It  crystallizes  in  hexahedral 
prisms  terminated  by  acute  pyramids.  Its  taste  is 
acrid,  bitter,  and  very  disagreeable.  It  is  soluble  in 
half  its  weight  of  cold  water,  and  by  heat  in  its  own 
water  of  crystallization.  It  is  one  of  the  most  deli- 
quescent salts  known ; and,  when  deliquesced,  has 
been  called  oil  of  lime.  It  exists  in  nature,  but  neither 
very  abundantly  nor  very  pure.  It  is  formed  in  che- 
mical laboratories,  in  the  decomposition  of  muriate  of 
ammonia  ; and  Homberg  found,  that  if  it  were  urged 
by  a violent  heat  till  it  condensed,  on  cooling  into  a 
vitreous  mass,  it  emitted  a phosphoric  light  upon  being 
struck  by  any  hard  body,  in  which  state  it  was  called 
Homberg' s phosphorus. 

Hitherto  it  has  been  little  used  except  for  frigorific 
mixtures;  and  with  snow  it  produces  a very  great 
degree  of  cold.  Fourcroy,  indeed,  says  he  has  found 
it  of  great  utility  in  obstructions  of  the  lymphatics,  and 
in  scrofulous  affections. 

The  muriate  of  ammonia  has  long  been  known  by 
the  name  of  sal  ammonia , or  ammoniac.  It  Is  found 
native  in  the  neighbourhood  of  volcanoes,  where  it  is 
sublimed  sometimes  nearly  pure,  and  in  different  parts 
of  Asia  and  Africa.  A great  deal  is  carried  annually 
to  Russia  and  Siberia  from  Bucharian  Tartary  ; and 
we  formerly  imported  large  quantities  from  Egypt,  but 
now  manufacture  it  at  home.  See  Sal  Ammoniac. 

The  salt  is  usually  in  the  form  of  cakes,  with  a 
convex  surface  on  one  side,  and  concave  on  the  other, 
from  being  sublimed  into  large  globular  vessels ; but  by 
solution  it  may  be  obtained  in  regular  quadrangular 
crystals.  It  is  remarkable  for  possessing  a certain 
degree  of  ductility,  so  that  it  is  not  easily  pulverable. 
Its  is  soluble  in  3£  parts  of  water  at  60°,  and  in  little 
more  than  its  own  weight  of  boiling  water.  Its  taste  is 
cool,  acrid,  and  bitterish.  Its  specific  gravity  is  1.42. 
It  attracts  moisture  from  the  air  but  very  slightly. 

Muriate  of  ammonia  has  been  more  employed  in 
medicine  than  it  is  at  present.  It  is  sometimes  useful 
as  an  auxiliary  to  the  bark  in  intermittenfs  ; in  gargles 
it  is  beneficial,  and  externally  it  is  a good  discutient. 
In  dying,  it  improves  or  heightens  different  colours. 
In  tinning  and  soldering,  it  is  employed  to  preserve  the 
surface  of  the  metals  from  oxidation.  In  assaying,  it 
discovers  iron,  and  separates  t from  some  of  its  com- 
binations. 

The  muriate  of  magnesia  is  extremely  deliquescent, 


soluble  in  an  equal  weight  of  water,  and  difficultly 
crystallizable.  It  dissolves  also  in  five  parts  of  alkohol. 
It  is  decomposable  by  heat,  which  expels  its  acid.  Its 
taste  is  intensely  bitter. 

With  ammonia  this  muriate  forms  a triple  salt,  crys- 
tallizable in  little  polyhedrons,  which  separate  quickly 
from  the  water,  but  are  not  very  regularly  formed.  Its 
taste  partakes  of  that  of  both  the  preceding  salts. 
The  best  mode  of  preparing  it  is  by  mixing  a solution  of 
27  parts  of  muriate  of  ammonia  with  a solution  of  73  of  ^ 
muriate  of  magnesia  ; but  it  may  be  formed  by  a semi- 
decomposition of  either  of  these  muriates  by  the  base 
of  the  other.  It  is  decomposable  by  heat,  and  requires 
six  or  seven  times  its  weight  of  water  to  dissolve  it. 

Of  the  muriate  of  glucine  we  know  but  little.  It 
appears  to  crystallize  in  very  small  crystals  ; to  be  de- 
composable by  heat;  and,  dissolved  in  alkohol  and  di- 
luted with  water,  to  form  a pleasant  saccharine  liquor 
Muriate  of  alumina  is  scarcely  crystallizable,  as  or 
evaporation  it  assumes  the  state  of  a thick  jelly.  I. 
has  an  acid,  styptic,  acrid  taste.  It  is  extremely  solu- 
ble in  water,  and  deliquescent.  Fire  decomposes  it 
It  may  be  prepared  by  directly  combining  the  muriatic 
acid  with  alumina;  but  the  acid  always  remains  in 
excess. 

The  muriate  of  zircon  crystallizes  in  small  needles 
which  are  very  soluble,  attract  moisture,  and  lose  their 
transparency  in  the  air.  It  has  an  austere  taste,  with 
somewhat  of  acrimony.  It  is  decomposable  by  heat. 
The  gallic  acid  precipitates  from  its  solution,  if  it  be 
free  from  iron,  a white  powder.  Carbonate  of  ammo- 
nia, if  added  in  excess,  redissolves  the  precipitate  it 
had  before  thrown  down. 

Muriate  of  yttria  does  not  crystallize  when  evapo- 
rated, but  forms  a jelly.  It  dries  with  difficulty,  and 
deliquesces. 

Fourcroy  observes,  that  when  sjlicious  stones,  pre- 
viously fused  with  potassa,  are  treated  with  muriatic 
acid,  a limpid  solution  is  formed,  which  may  be  reduced 
to  a transparent  jelly  by  slow  evaporation.  But  a 
boiling  heat  decomposes  the  silicious  muriate,  and  the 
earth  is  deposited.  The  solution  is  always  acid.” 

This  acid  possesses  active  tonic  powers.  In  typhus, 
or  nervous  fevers,  although  employed  on  the  continent 
with  success,  it  has  not  proved  so  beneficial  in  this 
country ; and  when  freely  used  it  is  apt  to  determine  to 
the  bowels.  Externally,  the  muriatic  acid  has  been 
applied  in  the  form  of  a bath,  to  the  feet,  in  gout.  In 
a late  publication,  there  are  accounts  of  its  successful 
application  as  a lithontriptic. 

Muriatic  acid,  oxygenized.  This  supposed  acid 
was  lately  described  by  Thenard.  He  saturated  com- 
mon muriatic  acid  of  moderate  strength  with  deutoxide 
of  barium,  reduced  it  into  a soft  paste  by  trituration 
with  water.  He  then  precipitated  the  barytes  from 
the  liquid,  by  adding  the  requisite  quantity  of  sulphuric 
acid.  He  next  took  his  oxygenized  muriatic  acid,  and 
treated  it  with  deutoxide  of  barium  and  sulphuric  acid, 
to  oxygenate  it  anew.  In  this  way  he  charged  it  with 
oxygen  as  often  as  15  times.  He  thus  obtained  a 
liquid  acid  which  contained  32  times  its  volume  of 
oxygen  at  the  temperature  of  68°  Fahr.  and  at  the 
ordinary  atmospherical  pressure,  and  only  4£  times  its 
volume  of  muratic  acid,  which  gives  about  28  equiva- 
lent primes  of  oxygen  to  one  of  muriatic  acid. 

This  oxygenized  acid  leaves  no  residuum  when 
evaporated.  It  is  a very  acid,  colourless  liquid,  almost 
destitute  of  smell,  and  powerfully  reddens  turnsole. 
When  boiled  for  some  time,  its  oxygen  is  expelled. 

We  ought,  however,  to  regard  this  apparent  oxyge- 
nation of  the  acid'merely  as  the  conversion  of  a portion 
of  its  combined  water  into  deutoxide  of  hydrogen. 

MURICATUS.  Sharp-pointed:  applied  to  seeds, 
as  those  of  the  Ranunculus  parviflorus  and  Sida 
ciliaris. 

MURRAY,  John  Andrew,  was  born  at  Stockholm, 
of  a Scotch  family,  in  1740.  At  16  he  was  sent  to 
Upsal,  and  had  the  benefit  of  the  instructions  of  Lin- 
naeus, for  whom  he  ever  after  entertained  the  highest 
esteem.  In  1759  he  took  a journey  through  the 
southern  provinces  of  Sweden,  and  thence  to  Copen- 
hagen ; and  in  the  following  year  he  went  to  Gottingen, 
where  his  brother  was  professor  of  philosophy.  In 
1763  he  took  his  degree  of  doctor  in  medicine,  and  by 
a special  license  from  the  Hanoverian  government, 
gave  lectures  in  botany : and  in  the  following  spring 
lie  was  appointed  extraordinary  professor  of  medicine 


MUS 


MUS 


In  that  university.  From  this  period  his  reputation 
rapidly  extended;  he  was  elected  a member  in  the 
course  of  a few  years  of  most  of  the  learned  societies 
in  Europe.  In  1769  he  succeeded  to  the  actual  profes- 
sorship of  medicine,  and  was  made  doctor  of  the 
botanic  garden.  He  was  still  farther  honoured  by 
receiving  the  title  of  the  Order  of  Vasa  from  the  King 
of  Sweden  in  1780  : and  two  years  afterward  by  being 
raised  to  the  rank  of  privy  counsellor  by  his  Britannic 
Majesty.  In  1791  he  was  attacked  with  a spurious 
peripneumony,  which  shortly  terminated  his  existence. 
He  was  a man  of  sound  judgment,  great  activity,  and 
-extensive  information.  He  composed  a great  number 
of  tracts  on  various  subjects  in  botany,  natural  history, 
medicine,  pharmacy,  and  medical  literature.  His 
principal  work,  which  occupied  a large  portion  of  his 
time  and  attention,  was  on  the  Materia  Medica,  under 
the  title  of  “Apparatus  Medicaminum,”  in  six  octavo 
volumes : indeed,  he  was  employed  in  correcting  the 
last  for  the  press  the  day  before  his  death.  In  the 
Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Gottingen,  there 
are  many  valuable  papers  by  him,  chiefly  botanical ; 
and  his  descriptions  are  deemed  models  of  elegance 
and  accuracy. 

MU'SA.  (This  word  is  corrupted,  or  rather  refined, 
from  Maui , the  Egyptian  appellation  of  this  valuable 
plant;  and  is  made  classical  in  the  works  of  Linnaeus, 
by  an  allusion  to  Musa,  a muse ; or,  with  much  greater 
propriety,  to  A ntonius  Musa , the  physician  of  Augus- 
tus, who,  having  written  on  some  botanical  subjects, 
may  justly  be  commemorated  in  the  above  name.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Polygamia; 
Order,  Monxcia.  The  plantain  and  badana-tree. 

Musa  paradisiaca.  Musa ; Palma  humilis ; Ficus 
Indie  a ; Bala;  Platanus.  The  plantain- tree.  It 

grows  spontaneously  in  many  parts  of  India,  but  has 
been  immemorially  cultivated  by  the  Indians  in  every 
part  of  the  continent  of  South  America.  It  is  an 
herbaceous  tree,  growing  to  the  height  of  fifteen  or 
twenty  feet.  The  fruit  are  nearly  of  the  size  and 
shape  of  ordinary  cucumbers,  and  when  ripe,  of  a pale 
yellow  colour,  of  a mealy  substance,  a little  clammy, 
with  a sweetish  taste,  and  will  dissolve  in  the  mouth 
without  chewing.  The  whole  spike  of  fruit  often 
weighs  forty  or  fifty  pounds.  When  they  are  brought 
to  table  by  way  of  dessert,  they  are  either  raw,  fried, 
or  roasted ; but,  if  intended  for  bread,  they  are  cut 
before  they  are  ripe,  and  are  then  either  roasted  or 
boiled.  The  trees  being  tall  and  slender,  the  Indians 
cut  them  down  to  get  at  the  fruit ; and  in  doing  this 
they  suffer  no  loss,  for  the  stems  aie  only  one  year’s 
growth,  and  would  die  if  not  cut ; but  the  roots  con- 
tinue, and  new  stems  soon  spring  up,  which  in  a year 
produce  ripe  fruit  also.  From  the  ripe  plantains  they 
make  a liquor  called  mistaw.  When  they  make  this, 
they  roast  the  fruit  in  their  husks,  and,  after  totally 
beating  them  to  a mash,  they  pour  water  upon  them, 
and,  as  the  liquor  is  wanted,  it  is  drawn  off.  But  the 
nature  of  this  fruit  is  such,  that  they  will  not  keep  long 
without  running  into  a state  of  putrefaction;  and 
therefore,  in  order  to  reap  the  advantage  of  them  at 
all  times,  tbby  make  cakes  of  the  pulp,  and  dry  them 
over  a slow  fire,  and,  as  they  stand  in  need  of  mistaw, 
they  mash  the  cakes  in  water,  and  they  answer  all 
the  purposes  of  fresh  fruit.  These  cakes  are  exceed- 
ingly convenient  to  make  this  liquor  in  their  journeys, 
and  they  never  fail  to  carry  them  for  that  purpose. 
The  leaves  of  the  tree  being  large  and  spacious,  serve 
the  Indians  for  tablecloths  and  napkins. 

Musa  sapikntum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
banana-tree. — Banana,  Bananeira ; Ficoides  ; Ficus 
indica  ; Musa  fructu  cucumerino  breviori ; Senoria ; 
Paccpira.  This  and  the  plantain-tree  are  among  the 
most  important  productions  of  the  earth.  The  banana- 
tree  is  cultivated,  on  a very  extensive  scale,  in  Jamaica; 
without  the  fruit  of  which,  Dr.  Wright  says,  the  island 
would  scarcely  be  habitable,  as  no  species  of  provision 
would  supply  their  place.  Even  flour,  or  bread  itself, 
would  be  less  agreeable,  and  less  able  to  support  the 
laborious  negro,  so  as  to  enable  him  to  do  his  business, 
or  to  keep  in  health.  Plantains  also  fatten  horses, 
cattle,  swine,  dogs,  fowls,  and  other  domestic  animals. 
The  leaves,  being  smooth  and  soft,  are  employed  as 
dressings  after  blisters.  The  water  from  the  soft  trunk 
is  astringent,  and  employed  by  some  to  check  diar. 
rhoeas.  Every  other  part  of  the  tree  is  useful  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  rural  economy.  The  leaves  are  used  as 


I napkins  and  tablecloths,  and  are  food  for  hogs.  The 
second  sort,  musa  sapientum,  or  banana-tree,  differs 
from  the  paradisiaca,  in  having  its  stalks  marked  with 
dark  purple  stripes  and  spots.  The  fruit  is  shorter, 
straighter,  and  rounder;  the  pulp  is  softer,  and  of  a 
more  luscious  taste.  It  is  never  eaten  green  ; but  when 
ripe,  it  is  very  agreeable,  either  eaten  raw  or  fried  in 
slices,  as  fritters,  and  is  relished  by  all  ranks  of  people 
in  the  West  Indies.  Both  the  above  plants  were  car- 
ried to  the  West  Indies  from  the  Canary  Islands; 
whither,  it  is  believed,  they  had  been  brought  from 
Guinea,  where  they  grow  naturally. 

Musadi.  Sal  ammoniac. 

MUSCI'PULA.  (From  mus,  a mouse,  and  capio,  to 
take,  being  originally  applied  to  a mousetrap ; after- 
ward to  a plant ; so  called  from  its  viscidity,  by  which 
flies  are  caught  as  with  birdlime.)  A species  of  lychnis. 

MUSCLE.  Musculus.  The  parts  that  are  usually 
included  under  this  name  consist  of  distinct  portions 
of  flesh,  susceptible  of  contraction  and  relaxation  ; the 
motions  of  which,  in  a natural  and  healthy  state,  are 
subject  to  the  will,  and  for  this  reason  they  are  called 
voluntary  muscles.  Besides  these,  there  are  other  parts 
of  the  body  that  owe  their  power  of  contraction  to  their 
muscular  fibres  : thus  the  heart  is  a muscular  texture, 
forming  what  is  called  a hollow  muscle ; and  the  urinary 
bladder,  stomach,  intestines,  &c.  are  enabled  to  act 
upon  their  contents,  merely  because  they  are  provided 
with  muscular  fibres;  these  are  called  involuntary 
muscles,  because  their  motions  are  not  dependent  on 
the  will.  The  muscles  of  respiration  being  in  some 
measure  influenced  by  the  will,  are  said  to  have  a 
mixed  motion.  The  names  by  which  the  voluntary 
muscles  are  distinguished,  are  founded  on  their  size, 
figure,  situation,  use,  or  the  arrangement  of  their  fibres, 
or  their  origin  and  insertion ; but,  besides  these  parti- 
cular distinctions,  there  are  certain  general  ones  that 
require  to  be  noticed.  Thus,  if  the  fibres  of  a muscle 
are  placed  parallel  to  each  other,  in  a straight  direc- 
tion, they  form  what  anatomists  term  a rectilinear 
muscle ; if  the  fibres  cross  and  intersect  each  other, 
they  constitute  a compound  muscle ; when  the  fibres 
are  disposed  in  the  manner  of  rays,  a radiated  muscle ; 
when  they  are  placed  obliquely  with  respect  to  the 
tendon,  like  the  plume  of  a pen,  a penniform  muscle. 
Muscles  that  act  in  opposition  to  each  other  are  called 
antagonists ; thus  every  extensor  has  a flexor  for  his 
antagonist,  and  vice  versa.  Muscles  that  concur  in  the 
same  action  are  termed  congeneres.  The  muscle  being 
attached  to  the  bones,  the  latter  may  be  considered  as 
levers,  that  are  moved  in  different  directions  by  the 
contraction  of  those  organs.  That  end  of  the  muscle 
which  adheres  to  the  most  fixed  part  is  usually  called 
the  origin  ; and  that  which  adheres  to  the  more  move- 
able  part,  the  insertion  of  the  muscle.  In  almost 
every  muscle,  two  kinds  of  fibres  are  distinguished  ; 
the  one  soft,  of  a red  colour,  sensible,  and  irritable, 
called  fleshy  fibres,  see  Muscular  Fibre ; the  other  of 
a firmer  texture,  of  a white  glistening  colour,  insensible, 
without  irritability  or  the  power  of  contracting,  and 
named  tendinous  fibres.  They  are  occasionally  inter- 
mixed, but  the  fleshy  fibres  generally  prevail  in  the 
belly,  or  middle  part  of  the  muscle,  and  the  tendinous 
ones  in  the  extremities.  Tf  these  tendinous  fibres  are 
formed  into  a round  slender  eord,  they  form  what  is 
called  the  tendon  of  the  muscle  ; on  the  other  hand,  if 
they  are  spread  into  a broad  flat  surface,  it  is  termed  an 
aponeurosis. 

Each  muscle  is  surrounded  by  a very  thin  and  deli- 
cate covering  of  cellular  membrane,  which  encloses  it  as 
it  were  like  a sheath,  and,  dipping  down  into  its  sub- 
stance, surrounds  the  most  minute  fibres  we  are  able 
to  trace,  connecting  them  to  each  other,  lubricating 
them  by  means  of  the  fat  which  its  cells  contain  in 
more  or  less  quantity  in  different  subjects,  and  serving 
as  a support  to  the  blood-vessels,  lymphatics,  and 
nerves  which  are  so  plentifully  distributed  through  the 
muscles.  This  cellular  membrane,  which  in  no  re- 
spect differs  from  what  is  found  investing  and  connect 
ing  the  other  parts  of  the  body,  has  been  sometimes 
mistaken  for  a membrane,  peculiar  to  the  muscles; 
and  hence  we  often  find  writers  giving  it  the  name  of 
membrana  propria  musculosa.  The  muscles  owe  the 
red  colour  which  so  particularly  distinguishes  their 
belly  part,  to  an  infinite  number  of  arteries,  which  are 
every  where  dispersed  through  the  whole  of  their  re- 
. ticular  substance ; for  their  fibres,  after  having  been 


MTJS 


macerated  in  water,  are  (like  all  other  parts  of  the 
body  divested  of  their  blood)  found  to  he  of  a white 
colour.  These  arteries  usually  enter  the  muscles  by 
several  considerable  branches,  and  ramify  so  minutely 
through  their  substance,  that  we  are  unable,  even  with 
the  best  microscopes,  to  trace  their  ultimate  branches, 
luysch  fancied  that  the  muscular  fibre  was  hollow, 
and  a production  of  a capillary  artery ; but  this  was 
merely  conjectural.  The  veins,  for  the  most  part,  ac- 
company the  arteries,  but  are  found  to  be  larger  and 
more  numerous.  The  lymphatics,  likewise,  are  nu- 
merous, as  might  be  expected  from  the  great  propor- 
ionof  reticular  substance,  which  is  every  where  found 
investing  the  muscular  fibres.  The  nfrves  are  dis- 
ributed  in  such  abundance  to  every  muscle,  that  the 
muscles  of  the  thumb  alone  are  supplied  with  a greater 
proportion  of  nervous  influence  than  the  largest  vis- 
cera, as  the  liver  for  instance.  They  enter  the  gene 
rality  of  muscles  by  several  trunks,  the  branches  of- 
which,  like  those  of  the  blood-vessels,  are  so  minutely 
dispersed  through  the  cellular  substance,  that  their 
number  and  minuteness  soon  elude  the  eye,  and  the 
knife  of  the  anatomist.  This  has  given  rise  to  a con- 
jecture, as  groundless  as  all  the  other  conjectures  on 
this  subject,  that  the  muscular  fibre  is  ultimately  ner- 
vous. 

A table  of  the  Muscles. — The  generality  of  anatomi- 
cal writers  have  arranged  muscles  according  to  their 
several  uses;  but  this  method  is  evidently  defective,  as 
the  same  muscle  may  very  often  have  different  and 
opposite  uses.  The  method  here  adopted  is  that  more 
usually  followed  at  present ; they  are  enumerated  in 
the  order  in  which  they  are  situated,  beginning  with 
those  that  are  placed  nearest  the  integuments,  and  pro- 
ceeding from  these  to  the  muscles  that  are  more  deeply 
seated. 

TThe  reader  will  observe,  that  all  the  muscles  are  in 
pairs,  except  those  marked  thus.*] 

Muscles  of  the  integuments  of  the  cranium : 

1.  Occipito  frontalis.* 

2.  Corrugator  supercilii. 

Muscles  of  the  eyelids  : 

3.  Orbicularis  palpebrarum. 

4.  Levator  palpebrce  superioris. 

Muscles  of  the  eyeball : 

5.  Rectus  superior. 

6.  Rectus  inferior. 

7.  Rectus  internus 

8.  Rectus  externus. 

9.  Obliquus  superior. 

10.  Obliquus  inferior. 

Muscles  of  the  nose  and  mouth ; 

11.  Levator  palpebrce  superioris  alceque  nasi. 

12.  Levator  labii  superioris  proprius. 

13.  Levator  anguli  oris. 

14.  Zygomaticus  major. 

15.  Zygomaticus  minor. 

16.  Buccinator. 

17.  Depressor  anguli  oris. 

18.  Depressor  labii  ivferioris. 

19.  Orbicularis  oris.* 

20.  Depressor  labii  superioris  alceque  nasi. 

21.  Constrictor  nasi. 

22.  Levator  menti  vel  labii  inferioris. 

Muscles  of  the  external  ear : 

23.  Superior  auris. 

24.  Anterior  auris. 

25.  Posterior  auris. 

26.  Helicis  major. 

27.  Helicis  minor. 

28.  Tragicus. 

29.  Antitragicus. 

30.  Transversus  auris. 

Muscles  of  the  internal  ear : 

31.  Laxator  tympani. 

32.  Membrana  tympani. 

33.  Tensor  tympani. 

34.  Stapedius. 

Muscles  of  the  lower  jaw : 

35.  Temporalis. 

36.  Masseter. 

37.  Pterygoideus  externus. 

38.  Pterygoideus  internus. 

Muscles  about  the  anterior  part  of  the  neck : 

39.  Platysma  myoides. 

40.  Stcrno-cleidomastoideus. 

90 


MUS 

Muscles  between  the  lower  jaw  and  os  hyoides : 

41.  Digaslricus. 

42.  Mylo-hyoideus. 

43  Genio-hyoideus. 

44.  Genio-glossus. 

45.  Hyo-glossus. 

46.  Lingualis. 

Muscles  situated  between  the.os  hyoides  and  trunk : 

47.  Sterno-hyoideus. 

48.  Crico-hyoideus. 

49.  Sterno-thyroideus. 

50.  Thyro-hyoideus. 

51.  Crico-thyroideus. 

Muscles  between  the  lower  jaw  and  os  hyoides  laterally . 

52.  Stylo-glossus. 

53.  Stylo-hyoideus. 

54.  Stylo-pharyngeu8. 

55.  Circumjlexus. 

56.  Levator  palati  mollis. 

Muscles  about  the  entry  of  the  fauces : 

57.  Constrictor  isthmi  faucium. 

58.  P alatopharyngeus. 

59.  Azygos  uvulce.* 

Muscles  situated  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  pharynx : 

60.  Constrictor  pharyngis  superior. 

61.  Constrictor  pharyngis  inedius. 

62.  Constrictor  pharyngis  inferior. 

Muscles  situated  about  the  glottis » 

63.  Crico-arytcenoideus  posticus. 

64.  Crico-arytcenoideus  lateralis. 

65.  Thyro-arytcenoideus. 

66.  Arylcenoideus  obliquus.* 

67.  Arytcenoideus  transversus.* 

68.  Thyro-epiglottideus. 

69.  Arytceno-cpiglottideus. 

Muscles  situated  about  the  anterior  part  of  the  abdomen: 

70.  Obliquus  descendens  externus. 

71.  Obliquus  ascendens  internus. 

72.  Transversalis  abdominis. 

73.  Rectus  abdominis. 

74.  Pyramidalis. 

Muscles  about  the  male  organs  of  generation : 

75.  Dartos.* 

76.  Cremaster. 

77.  Erector  penis. 

78.  Accelerator  urince. 

79.  Transversus  perinei. 

Mascles  of  the  anus. 

80.  Sphincter  ani.* 

81.  Levator  ani.* 

Muscles  of  tiie  female  organs  of  generation : 

82.  Erector  clitoridis. 

83.  Sphincter  vaginae. 

Muscles  situated  within  the  pelvis : 

84.  Obturator  internus. 

85.  Coccygeus. 

Muscles  situated  within  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen : 

86.  Diaphragma.* 

87.  Quadratus  lumborum. 

88.  Psoas  parvus. 

89.  Psoas  magnus. 

90.  Iliacus  internus. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  anterior  part  of  the  thorax: 

91.  Pectoralis  major. 

92.  Subclavius. 

93.  Pectoralis  minor. 

94.  Serratus  major  anticus. 

Muscles  situated  between  the  ribs,  and  within  the 
thorax : 

95.  Intercostales  extemi. 

' 96.  Intercostales  intemi. 

97.  Triangularis. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  anterior  part  of  the  neck,  close 
to  the  vertebrae : 

98.  Longus  colli. 

99.  Rectus  internus  capitis  major. 

100.  Rectus  capitis  internus  minor. 

101.  Rectus  capitis  lateralis. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  trunk : 

102.  Trapezius. 

103.  Latissimus  dor  si. 

104.  Serratus  posticus  inferior. 

105.  Rhomboideus. 

106.  Splenius. 

107.  Serratus  superior  posticus. 

108.  Spinalis  dorsi. 

109.  Levatores  costarum. 


MUS 


MUS 


110.  Saero  lumbalis. 

111.  Longissmus  dor  si. 

112.  Complexus. 

113.  Traclielo  mastoideus. 

114.  Levator  scapula. 

115.  Semi-spinalis  dorsi. 

1 16.  Multifidus  spina. 

117.  Semi-spinalis  colli. 

118.  Transversalis  colli. 

119.  Rectus  capitis  posticus  minor. 

120.  Obliquus  capitis  superior. 

121.  Obliquus  capitis  inferior. 

122.  Scalenus. 

123.  Inter  spindles. 

124.  Intertransver sales. 

Muscles  of  the  superior  extremities: 

125.  Supra-spinatus. 

126.  Infra  spinatus. 

127.  Teres  minor. 

128.  Teres  major. 

129.  Deltoides. 

130.  Coracobrachialis. 

131.  Subscapularis. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  os  humeri : 

132.  Biceps  flexor  cubiti. 

133.  Brachialis  internus. 

134.  Biceps  extensor  cubiti. 

135.  Anconeus. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  forearm : 

136.  Supinator  radii  longus. 

137.  Extensor  carpi  radialis  longior. 

138.  Extensor  carpi  radialis  brevior. 

139.  Extensor  digitorum  communis. 

140.  Extensor  minimi  digiti. 

141.  Extensor  carpi  ulnaris. 

142.  Flexor  carpi  ulnaris. 

143.  Palmaris  longus. 

144.  Flexor  carpi  radialis. 

145.  Pronator  radii  teres. 

146.  Supinator  radii  brevis. 

147.  Extensor  ossis  metacarpi  pollicis  manus. 

148.  Extensor  primi  internodii. 

149.  Extensor  secundi  internodii. 

150.  Indicator.  % 

151.  Flexor  digitorum  sublimis. 

152.  Flexor  digitorum  profundus . 

153.  Flexor  longus  pollicis. 

154.  Pronator  radii  quadratus. 

Muscles  situated  chiefly  on  the  hand : 

155.  Lumbricales. 

156.  Flexor  brevis  pollicis  manus. 

157.  Opponens  pollicis. 

158.  Abductor  pollicis  manus. 

159.  Adductor  pollicis  manus. 

160.  Abductor  indicis  manus. 

161.  Palmaris  brevis. 

162.  Abductor  minimi  digiti  manus. 

163.  Abductor  minimi  digiti. 

164.  Flexor  parvus  minimi  digiti. 

165.  Inter ossei  interni. 

166.  Interossei  externi. 

Muscles  of  the  inferior  extremities : 

167.  Pectinalis. 

168.  Triceps  adductor  femoris. 

169.  Obdurator  externus. 

170.  Gluteus  maximus. 

171.  Gluteus  minimus. 

172.  Gluteus  medius. 

173.  Pyriformis. 

174.  Gemini. 

17§e  Quadratus  femoris. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  thigh : 

176.  Tensor  vagina  femoris. 

177.  Sartorius. 

178.  Rectus  femoris. 

179.  Vastus  externus. 

180.  Vastus  internus. 

181.  Cruralis. 

182.  Semi-tendinosus. 

183.  Semi-membranosus. 

184.  Biceps  flexor  cruris. 

185.  Popliteus. 

Muscles  situated  on  the  leg: 

186.  Gastrocnemius  externus. 

187.  Gastrocnemius  internus. 

188.  Plantaris. 

189.  Tibialis  anticus. 


190.  Tibialis  posticus. 

191.  Peroneus  longus. 

192.  Peroneus  brevis. 

193.  Extensor  longus  digitorum  pedis. 

194.  Extensor  proprius  pollicis  pedis. 

195.  Flexor  longus  digitorum  pedis. 

196.  Flexor  longus  pollicis  pedis. 

Muscles  chiefly  situated  on  the  foot : 

197.  • Extensor  brevis  digitorum  pedis . 

198.  Flexor  brevis  digitorum  pedis. 

199.  Lumbricales  pedis. 

200.  Flexor  brevis  pollicis  pedis. 

201.  Abductor  pollicis  pedis. 

202.  Adductor  pollicis  pedis. 

203.  Abductor  minimi  digiti  pedis. 

204.  Flexor  brevis  minimi  digiti  pedis. 

205.  Transversales  pedis. _ 

205.  Interossei  pedis  externi. 

207.  Interossei  pedis  interni. 

MUSCULAR.  (Muscularis ; from  mus cuius,  a mus- 
cle.) Belonging  to  a muscle. 

Muscular  fibre.  The  fibres  that  compose  the 
body  of  a muscle  are  disposed  in  fasciculi,  or  bundles, 
which  are  easily  distinguishable  by  the  naked  eye ; but 
these  fasciculi  are  divisible  into  still  smaller  ones;  and 
these  again  are  probably  subdivisible  ad  infinitum. 
The  most  minute  fibre  we  are  able  to  trace  seems  to  be 
somewhat  plaited ; these  plaits  disappearing  when  the 
fibre  is  put  upon  the  stretch,  seem  evidently  to  be  the 
effect  of  contraction,  and  have  probably  induced  some 
writers  to  assert,  that  the  muscular  fibre  is  twisted  or 
spiral.  Various  have  been  the  opinions  concerning  the 
structure  of  these  fibres,  their  form,  size,  position,  and 
the  nature  of  the  atoms  which  compose  them.  A 
fibre  is  essentially  composed  of  fibrine  and  ozma- 
zome,  receives  a great  deal  of  blood,  and,  at  last,  one 
nervous  filament.  The  other  suppositions  are  all  of 
them  founded  only  on  conjecture,  and  therefore  we 
shall  mention  only  the  principal  ones,  and  this  with  a 
view  rather  to  gratify  the  curiosity  of  the  reader,  than 
to  afford  him  information.  Borelli  supposes  them  to  be 
so  many  hollow  cylinders,  filled  with  a spongy  me- 
dullary substance,  which  he  compares  to  the  pith  of 
elder,  spongiosa  ad  instar  sambuci.  These  cylinders, 
he  contends,  are  intersected  by  circular  fibres,  which 
form  a chain  of  very  minute  bladders.  This  hypo- 
thesis has  since  been  adopted  by  a great  number  of 
writers,  with  certain  variations.  Thus,  for  instance, 
Bellini  supposes  the  vesicles  to  be  of  a rhomboidal 
shape ; whereas  Bernouilli  contends  that  they  are  oval. 
Cowper  went  so  far  as  to  persuade  himself  that  he  had 
filled  these  cells  with  mercury  ; a mistake,  no  doubt, 
which  arose  from  its  insinuating  itself  into  some  of  the 
lymphatics.  It  is  observable,  however,  that  Leeu- 
wh^noeck  says  nothing  of  any  such  vesicles.  Here,  as 
well  as  in  many  other  of  her  works,  Nature  seems  to 
have  drawn  a boundary  to  our  inquiries,  beyond  which 
no  human  penetration  will  probably  ever  extend.  By 
chemical  analysis  muscle  is  found  to  consist  chiefly  of 
fibrine,  with  albumen,  gelatine,  extractive,  phosphate 
of  soda,  phosphate  of  ammonia,  phosphate  and  carbo- 
nate of  lime,  and  sulphate  of  potassa. 

Muscular  motion.  Muscular  motions  are  of  three 
kinds:  namely,  voluntary,  involuntary,  and  mixed. 
The  voluntary  motions  of  muscles  are  such  as  proceed 
from  an  immediate  exertion  of  the  active  powers  of  the 
will : thus  the  mind  directs  the  arm  to  be  raised  or  de- 
pressed, the  knee  to  be  bent,  the  tongue  to  move,  &c. 
The  involuntary  motions  of  muscles  are  those  which 
are  performed  by  organs,  seemingly  of  their  own  ac- 
cord, without  any  attention  of  the  mind,  or  conscious- 
ness of  its  active  power : as  the  contraction  and  dilata- 
tion of  the  heart,  arteries,  veins,  ansorbents,  stomach, 
intestines,  &c.  The  mixed  motions  are  those  which 
are  in  part  under  the  control  of  the  will,  but  which 
ordinarily  act  without  our  being  conscious  of  their  act- 
ing; and  is  perceived  in  the  muscles  of  respiration,  the 
intercostals,  the  abdominal  muscles,  and  the  diaphragm. 

When  a muscle  acts,  it  becomes  shorter  and  thicker ; 
both  its  origin  and  insertion  are  drawn  towards  its 
middle.  The  sphincter  muscles  are  always  in  action: 
and  so  likewise  are  antagonist  muscles,  even  when 
they  seem  at  rest.  When  two  antagonist  muscles 
move  with  equal  force,  the  part  which  they  are  de- 
signed to  move  remains  at  rest ; but  if  one  of  the  an- 
tagonist muscles  remains  at  rest,  while  the  other  acts, 
the  cart  is  moved  towards  the  centre  of  motion- 


MUS 


MUS 


When  a muscle  is  divided,  it  contracts.  If  a muscle 
be  stretched  to  a certain  extent,  it  contracts,  and  en- 
deavours to  acquire  its  former  dimensions,  as  soon  as 
the  stretching  cause  is  removed : this  takes  place  in  the 
dead  body ; in  muscles  cut  out  of  the  body,  and  also  in 
parts  not  muscular,  and  is  called  by  the  immortal 
Haller  vis  mortua,  and  by  some  vis  elastica.  It  is 
greater  in  living  than  in  dead  bodies,  and  is  called  the 
tone  of  the  muscles. 

When  a muscle  is  wounded,  or  otherwise  irritated, 
it  contracts  independent  of  the  will:  this  power -is 
called  irritability , and  by  Haller  vis  insita;  it  is  a 
property  peculiar  to,  and  inherent  in,  the  muscles. 
The  parts  of  our  body  which  possess  this  property  are 
called  irritable,  as  the  heart,  arteries,  muscles,  &c.  to 
distinguish  them  from  those  parts  which  have  no  mus- 
cular fibres.  With  regard  to  the  degree  of  this  pro- 
perty, peculiar  to  various  parts,  the  heart  is  the  most 
iritable,  then  the  stomach  and  intestines;  the  dia- 
phragm, the  arteries,  veins,  absorbents,  and  at  length 
the  various  muscles  follow  ; but  the  degree  of  irritabi- 
lity depends  upon  the  age,  sex,  temperament,  mode  of 
living,  climate,  state  of  health,  idiosyncrasy,  and  like- 
wise upon  the  nature  of  the  stimulus. 

When  a muscle  is  stimulated,  either  through  the 
medium  of  the  will  or  any  foreign  body,  it  contracts, 
and  its  contraction  is  greater  or  less,  in  proportion  as 
the  stimulus  applied  is  greater  or  less.  The  contrac- 
tion of  muscles  is  different  according  to  the  purpose  to 
be  served  by  their  contraction : thus,  the  heart  con- 
tracts with  a jerk ; the  urinary  bladder,  slowly  and 
uniformly ; puncture  a muscle,  and  its  fibres  vibrate ; 
and  the  abdominal  muscles  act  slowly  in  expelling  the 
contents  of  the  rectum.  Relaxation  generally  succeeds 
the  contraction  of  muscles,  and  alternates  with  it. 

“ Muscular  contraction,  such  as  takes  place  in  the 
ordinary  state  of  life,  supposes  the  free  exercise  of  the 
brain,  of  the  nerves  which  enter  the  muscles,  and  of 
the  muscles  themselves  Every  one  of  these  organs 
'ought  to  receive  arterial  blood,  and  the  venous  blood 
ought  not  to  remain  too  long  in  its  tissue.  If  one  of 
these  conditions  is  wanting,  the  muscular  contraction 
is  weakened,  injured,  or  rendered  impossible. 

Phenomena  of  Muscular  Contraction.— When  a 
muscle  contracts,  its  fibres  shorten,  become  hard,  with 
more  or  less  rapidity,  without  any  preparatory  oscilla- 
tion or  hesitation ; they  acquire  all  at  once  such  an 
elasticity,  that  they  are  capable  of  vibrating,  or  pro- 
ducing sounds.  The  colour  of  the  muscle  does  not 
appear  to  change  in  the  instantof  contraction  ; but  there 
is  a certain  tendency  to  become  displaced,  which  the 
aponeuroses  oppose. 

There  have  been  discussions  about  the  size  of  a 
muscle,  in  its  contracted  and  relaxed  state : the  ques- 
tion does  not  seem  to  be  resolved,  in  which  of  these 
states  it  is  most  voluminous ; it  is  happily  of  small 
consequence. 

The  whole  of  the  sensible  phenomena  of  muscular 
contraction  passes  in  the  muscles ; but,  to  a certainty, 
•no  action  can  take  place  without  the  immediate  action 
-of  the  brain  and  the  nerves. 

If  the  brain  of  a man,  or  of  an  animal,  is  com- 
pressed | the  faculty  of- contracting  the  muscles  ceases; 
>the  nerves  of  a muscle  being  cut,  it  loses  all  power. 

What  change  happens  in  the  muscular  tissue  during 
the  state  of  contraction  ? This  is  totally  unknown. 
In  this  respect  there  is  no  difference  between  muscular 
contraction  and  the  vital  actions,  of  which  no  explana- 
tion can  be  given.  There  is  no  want  of  attempts  to 
•explain  the  action  of  the  muscles,  as  well  as  that  of 
the  nerves  and  the  brain,  in  muscular  contraction ; 
but  none  of  the  proposed  hypotheses  can  be  received. 

Instead  of  following  such  speculations,  which  can 
be  easily  invented  or  refuted,  and  which  ought  to  be 
banished  from  physiology,  it  is  necessary  to  study  in 
muscular  contraction,  1st,  the  intensity  of  the  con- 
traction; 2dly,  its  duration;  3dly,  its  rapidity;  4thly, 
its  extent. 

The  intensity  of  muscular  contraction,  that  is,  the 
degree  of  power  with  which  the  fibres  draw  them- 
selves together,  is  regulated  by  the  action  of  the  brain ; 
it  is  generally  regulated  by  the  will  according  to  cer- 
tain limits,  which  are  different  in  different  individuals. 
A particular  organization  of  the  muscles  is  favourable 
to  the  intensity  of  their  contraction:  this  organization 
is  a considerable  volume  of  fibres,  strong,  of  a deep 
red,  and  striated  transversely.  With  an  equal  power 


of  the  will,  these  will  produce  much  more  powerfu 
effects  than  muscles  whose  fibres  are  fine,  colourless, 
and  smooth.  However,  should  a very  powerful  cere- 
bral influence,  or  a great  exertion  of  the  will,  be  joined 
to  such,  fibres,  the  contraction  will  acquire  great  in- 
tensity ; so  that  the  cerebral  influence,  and  the  dispo- 
sition of  the  muscular  tissue,  are  the  two  elements  of 
the  intensity  of  muscular  contraction. 

A very  great  cerebral  energy  is  rarely  found  united 
in  the  same  individual,  with  that  disposition  of  the 
muscular  fibres  which  is  necessary  to  produce  intense 
contractions ; these  elements  are  almost  always  in  an 
inverse  ratio.  When  they  are  united,  they  produce 
astonishing  effects.  Perhaps  this  union  existed  in  the 
athletes  of  antiquity;  in  our  times  it  is  observed  in 
certain  mountebanks. 

The  muscular  power  may  be  carried  to  a wonderful 
degree  by  the  action  of  the  brain  alone : we  know  the 
strength  of  an  enraged  person,  of  maniacs,  and  of  per- 
sons in  convulsions. 

The  will  governs  the  duration  of  the  contraction ; it 
cannot  be  carried  beyond  a certain  time,  however  it 
may  Vary  in  different  individuals.  A feeling  of  weari- 
ness takes  place,  not  very  great  at  first,  but  which 
goes  on  increasing  until  the  muscle  refuses  contrac- 
tion. The  quick  developeinent  of  this  painful  feeling 
depends  on  the  intensity  of  the  contraction  and  the 
weakness  of  the  individual. 

To  prevent  this  inconvenience,  the  motions  of  the 
body  a-re  so  calculated  that  the  muscles  act  in  succes- 
sion, the  duration  of  each  being  but  short:  our  not  be- 
ing able  to  rest  long  in  the  same  position  is  thus  ex- 
plained, as  an  attitude  which  causes  the  contraction  of 
a small  number  of  muscles  cannot  be  preserved  but 
for  a very  short  time. 

The  feeling  of  fatigue  occasioned  by  muscular  con- 
traction soon  goes  off,  and  in  a short  time  the  muscles 
recover  the  power  of  contracting. 

The  quickness  of  the  contractions  are,  to  a certain 
degree,  subject  to  cerebral  influence : we  have  a proof 
of  this  in  our  ordinary  motions;  but  beyond  this  de- 
gree, it  depends  evidently  on  habit.  In  respect  of  the 
rapidity  of  motion,  there  is  an  immense  difference  be- 
tween that  of  a man  who  touches  a piano  for  the  first 
time,  and  that  which  the  same  man  prpduces  after 
several  years’  practice.  There  is,  besides,  a very  great 
difference  in  persons,  with  regard  to  the  quickness  of 
contractions,  either  in  ordinary  motions  or  in  those 
which  depend  on  habit. 

As  to  the  extent  of  the  contractions,  it  is  directed  by 
the  will ; but  it  must  necessarily  depend  on  the  length 
of  the  fibres,  long  fibres  having  a greater  extent  of  con- 
traction than  those  that  are  short. 

After  what  has  been  said,  we  see  that  the  will  has 
generally  a great  influence  on  the  contraction  of  mus- 
.cles ; it  is  not,  however,  indispensable : in  many  cir- 
cumstances motions  take  place,  not  only  without  the 
participation  of  the  will,  but  even  contrary  to  it ; we 
find  very  striking  examples  of  this  in  the  effects  of 
habit,  of  the  passions,  and  of  diseases.” 

Muscular  power.  See  Iiritability. 

MU'SCULUS.  (A  diminutive  of  mus,  a mouse  ; 
from  its  resemblance  to  a flayed  mouse.)  See  Muscle. 

Musculus  cutaneus.  See  Platysmamyoides. 

Musculus  fasci®  lat®.  See  Tensor  vagina 
femoris. 

Musculus  patienti®.  See  Levator  scapula.  „ 

Musculus  stapedius.  See  Stapedius. 

Musculus  supercilii.  See  Corrugator  superciliu 

Musculus  tub.®  nov®.  See  Clrcumftexus . 

MUSCUS.  ( Muscus,  i.  m. ; the  moss  of  a tree.)  A 
moss.  A cryptogamous  plant,  which  has  its  fructifica- 
tion contained  in  a capsule.  . 

Mosses  are  distinguished,  according  to  the  splitting 
of  the  capsule,  into, 

1.  Musci  frondosi , the  capsule  of  which  is  opercu- 
late , having  a lid  and  the  fronds  very  small. 

2.  Musci  hcpatici , liverworts ; the  capsules  of  which 
split  into  valves,  and  the  herbage  is  frondose  and 
steinless. 

The  parts  of  the  capsule  of  frondose  mosses,  which 
are  distinguished  by  particular  names,  are, 

1.  The  surculus , which  bears  the  leaves. 

2.  The  seta,  or  fruitstalk,  which  goes  from  the  sur- 
culus, and  supports  the  theca.  . 

3.  The  theca , or  capsule ; the  dry  fructification  ad- 
hering to  the  apex  of  the  frondose  stein. 


MUS 


MYD 


4.  The  operculum , or  lid,  found  in  the  fringe. 

5.  The  peristoma , peristomium , or  fringe,  which  in 
most  mosses  borders  the  opening  of  the  theca. 

6.  The  calyptra,  the  veil,  placed  on  the  capsule  like 
an  extinguisher  on  a candle;  as  in  Bryum  caispi- 
titium. 

7.  The  perichcelium , a slender  or  squamous  mem- 
brane at  the  base  of  the  fruitstalk. 

8.  The  fimbria , or  fringe,  a dentate  ring  of  the  oper- 
culum, by  the  elastic  force  of  which  the  operculum  is 
displaced. 

9.  The  epiphragma , a slender  membrane  which 
shuts  the  fringe ; as  in  Polytricum. 

10.  The  sphrongidium , or  columnula;  the  last  co- 
lumn or  filament  which  passes  the  middle  of  the  cap- 
sule, and  to  which  the  seeds  are  attached. 

Mosses  are  found  in  the  hottest  and  coldest  climates. 
They  are  extremely  tenacious  of  life,  and,  after  being 
long  dried,  easily  recover  their  health  and  vigour  by 
moisture.  Their  beautiful  structure  cannot  be  too 
much  admired.  Their  species  are  numerous,  and  diffi- 
cult to  determine. 

MU'SCUS.  (From  poaxos,  lender ; so  called  from 
its  delicate  and  tender  consistence.)  Moss. 

Muscus  arborkus.  See  Lichen  plicatus. 

Muscus  caninus.  See  Lichen  caninus. 

Muscus  clavatus.  See  Lycopodium. 

Muscus  cranii  humani.  See  Lichen  jaxatilis. 

Muscus  cumatilis.  See  Lichen  apthosus. 

Muscus  erectus.  See  Lycopodium  selago. 

Muscus  islandicus.  Iceland  moss.  See  Lichen 
islandicus. 

Muscus  maritimus.  See  Corallina. 

Muscus  pulmonarius  quercinus.  See  Lichen 
pulmonarius. 

Muscus  pyxidatus.  Cup-moss.  See  Lichen  pyxi- 
datus. 

Muscus  squamosus  terrestris.  See  Lycopo- 
dium. 

MUSGRAVE,  William,  was  born  in  Somerset- 
shire, 1657.  He  went  to  Oxford  with  the  intention  of 
studying  the  law ; but  he  afterward  adopted  the  medical 
profession,  and  became  a Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society, 
of  which  body  he  was  appointed  secretary,  in  1684.  In 
this  capacity  he  edited  the  Philosophical  Transactions 
for  setne  time;  be  likewise  communicated  several 
papers  on  anatomical  and  physiological  subjects.  In 
1089  he  took  his  doctor’s  degree,  and  became  a Fellow 
of  the  College  of  Physicians.  Not  long  after  this  he 
settled  at  Exeter,  where  he  practised  his  profession 
with  considerable  success  for  nearly  30  years,  and  died 
in  1721.  Beyond  the  circle  of  his  practice,  he  made 
himself  known  principally  by  his  two  treatises  on  gout, 
which  are  valuable  works,  ana  were  several  times  re- 
printed. He  was  also  a distinguished  antiquary,  and 
author  of  several  learned  tracts  on  the  subjects  of  his 
researches  in  this  way. 

MUSHROOM.  See  Jlgaricus  campestris. 

Mu'sia  pattr.*.  A name  for  moxa. 

MUSK.  See  Mosckus. 

Musk,  artificial.  Let  three  fluid  drachms  and  a 
half  of  nitric  acid  be  gradually  dropped  on  one  fluid 
drachm  of  rectified  oil  of  amber,  and  well  mixed.  Let 
it  stand  twenty-four  hours,  then  wash  it  well,  first  in 
cold,  and  then  in  hot  water.  One  drachm  of  this 
resinous  substance,  dissolved  in  four  ounces  of  rectified 
spirit,  forms  a good  tincture,  of  which  the  mean  dose 
is  twenty  minims.  In  preparing  the  above,  great  atten- 
tion.should  be  given  to  the  washing  the  resin,  otherwise 
it  is  offensive  to  the  stomach. 

Mush- crane  shill.  See  Geranium  moschatum. 

Musk-melon.  See  Cucumis  melo. 

Mush-seed.  See  Hibiscus  abelmoschus. 

Musquitto.  A variety  of  our  common  gnat,  the 
Culex  pipens  of  Linnaeus,  which,  in  the  West  Indies, 
produce  small  tumours  on  whatever  part  they  settle 
and  bite,  attended  with  so  high  a degree  of  itching  and 
inflammation,  that  the  person  cannot  refrain  from 
scratching;  by  a frequent  repetition  of  which  he  not 
uncommonly  occasions  them  to  ulcerate,  particularly 
if  he  i3  of  a robust  and  full  habit. 

MUSSITE.  Diopside. 

MUSSENDA.  (The  vernacular  name  of  the  ori- 
ginal species,  in  the  island  of  Ceylon,  wlTich,  though  of 
barbarous  origin,  has  obtained  unusual  suffrage.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pcntandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 


Mussenda  pondosa.  Ray  attributes  a cooling  pto- 
perty  to  an  infusion  or  decoction  of  this  plant,  which 
the  Indians  drink  by  the  name  of  beleson. 

MUST.  The  juice  of  the  grape,  composed  of  water, 
sugar,  jelly,  gluten,  and  bitartrite  of  potassa.  By  fer- 
mentation it  forms  wine. 

MUSTARD.  See  Sinapis. 

Mustard , hedge.  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 

Mustard , mithridrate.  See  Thlaspi. 

Mustard , treacle.  See  Thlaspi. 

Mustard , yellow.  See  Sinapis. 

MUTICUS.  (From  mutilus,  without  horns.)  Beard- 
less, as  applied  to  the  arista  or  awn  of  plants.  Glumce 
muticce , beardless  husks.  See  Gluma. 

MU'TITAS.  (From  mutus,  dumb.)  Dumbness. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and  order, 
Dyscinesice  of  Cullen,  which  lie  defines  an  inability  of 
articulation.  He  distinguishes  three  species,  viz. 

1.  Mutitas  organica , when  the  tongue  is  removed  or 
injured. 

2.  Mutitas  atonica , arising  from  an  affection  of  the 
nerves  of  the  organ. 

3.  Mutitas  surdorum , depending  upon  being  born 
deaf,  or  becoming  so  in  their  infantile  years. 

MUYS,  Wyer-William,  was  born  at  Steenwyk,  in 
1682.  His  father  being  a physician,  he  was  led  to  fol- 
low the  same  profession,  and  at  16  commenced  his 
studies  at  Leyden,  whence  he  went  to  Utrecht,  and 
took  his  degree  of  doctor  in  1701.  He  settled  at  first 
in  his  native  town,  and  afterward  removed  to  Arn- 
heim,  where  he  practised  with  reputation.  In  1709, 
he  was  elected  to  the  mathematical  chair  at  Franeker, 
where  he  subsequently  filled  also  those  of  medicine, 
chemistry  and  botany.  The  House  of  Orange  after- 
ward retained  him  as  consulting  physician,  with  a 
considerable  salary,  which  he  received  to  the  end  of 
his  life  in  1744.  He  had  been  five  times  rector  of  the 
university  of  Franeker,  and  was  a member  of  the 
Royal  Academy  of  Sciences  of  Berlin.  His  writings 
were  partly  medical,  partly  philosophical.  Of  the 
former  kind  was  a dissertation,  highly  commending 
the  use  of  sal  ammoniac  in  intermittents : also  a very 
elaborate  investigation  of  the  structure  of  muscles, 
comprehending  an  account  of  all  that  had  been  previ- 
ously discovered  on  the  subject. 

Mu'za.  See  Musa. 

MYACA'NTH  A.  (From  /m?,  a mouse,  and  aicavda , 
a thorn : so  called  because  its  prickly  leaves  are  used 
to  cover  whatever  is  intended  to  be  preserved  from 
mice.)  See  Ruscus. 

Mya'gro.  See  Myagrum. 

Mya'grum.  (From  pvia,  a fly,  and  aypsvu),  to  seize, 
because  flies  are  caught  by  its  viscidity.)  A species  of 
wild  mustard. 

My'ce.  (From  pva,  to  wink,  shut  up,  or  obstruct.) 
1.  A winking,  closing,  or  obstruction.  An  obsolete 
term,  formerly  applied  to  the  eyes,  to  ulcers,  and  to  the 
viscera,  especially  the  spleen,  where  it  imports  ob- 
structions. 

2.  In  surgery,  it  is  a fungus,  such  as  arises  in  ulcers 
and  wounds. 

3.  Some  writers  speak  of  a yellow  vitriol,  which  is 
called  Myce. 

Mychthi'smos.  (From  pu$o>,  to  mutter,  or  groan.) 
In  Hippocrates,  it  is  a sort  of  sighing,  or  groaning 
during  respiration,  while  the  air  is  forced  out  of  the 
lungs. 

Mycono'ides.  (From  pvKt],  a noise,  and  ciSof,  a 
likeness.)  Applied  to  an  ulcer  full  of  mucus,  and  which 
upon  pressure  emits  a wheezing  sound. 

MY'CTER.  The  nose. 

MYCTE'RES.  Muxr»7p£j.  The  nostrils. 

Myde'sis.  (From  pvdau),  to  abound  with  moisture.) 
It  imports,  in  general,  a corruption  of  any  part  from  a 
redundant  moisture.  But  Galen  applies  it  particularly 
to  the  eyelids. 

My'don.  (From  pvSaw,  to  grow  putrid.)  Fungus 
or  putrid  flesh  in  a fistulous  ulcer. 

MYDRI'ASIS.  (From  pvSaw,  to  abound  in  moist 
ure:  so  named  because  it  was  thought  to  originate  in 
redundant  moisture  ) A disease  of  the  iris.  Too  great 
a dilatation  of  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  with  or  without  a 
defect  of  vision.  It  is  known  by  the  pupil  always  ap- 
pearing of  the  same  latitude  or  size  in  the  light.  The 
species  of  mydriasis  are, 

1.  Mydriasis  amaurotica , which,  for  the  most  pari, 
but  not  always,  accompanies  an  amaurosis. 


93 


MYO 


MYR 


2.  'h Mydriasis  hydrocephalica , which  owes  its  origin 
to  a hydrocephaius  internus,  or  dropsy  of  the  ventri- 
cles of  the  ■cerebrum.  It  is  not  uncommon  among 
children,  and  is  the  most  certain  diagnostic  of  the 
disease. 

3.  Mydriasis  verminosa,  or  a dilatation  of  the  pupilj 
from  saburra  and  worms  in  the  stomach  or  small  in- 
testines. 

4.  Mydriasis  a synechia , or  a dilatation  of  the  pupil, 

with  a concretion  of  the  uvea  with  the  capsula  of  the 
crystalline  lens.  ' 

5.  Mydriasis  paralytica , or  a dilated  pupil,  from  a 
paralysis  of  the  orbicular  fibres  of  the  iris:  it  is  ob- 
served in  paralytic  disorders,  and  from  the  application 
of  narcotics  to  the  eye. 

6.  Mydriasis  sp  as  modica,  from  a spasm  of  the  recti- 
lineal fibres  of  the  iris,  as  often  happens  in  hysteric 
and  spasmodic  diseases. 

7.  Mydriasis.,  from  atony  of  the  iris,  the  most  fre- 
quent cause  of  which  is  a large  cataract  distending 
the  pupil  in  its  passing  when  extracted.  It  vanishes 
in  a few  days  after  the  operation,  in  general ; how- 
ever, it  may  remain  so  from  over  and  long-continued 
distention. 

Myla'cris.  (From  pvXy,  a grindstone:  so  called 
from  its  shape.)  The  patella,  or  knee-pan. 

My'le.  MvXy-  1.  The  knee-pan. 

2.  A mole  in  the  uterus. 

MY'LO.  (From  pv\rj,  a grinder  tooth.)  Names 
compounded  with  this  word  belong  to  muscles,  which 
are  attached  near  the  grinders ; such  as, 

Mylo-glossi.  Small  muscles  of  the  tongue. 

Mylo-hyoideus.  Mylo-hyoidien,  of  Dumas.  This 
muscle,  which  was  first  described  by  Fallopius,  is  so 
called  from  its  origin  near  the  dentes  molares , and  its 
insertion  into  the  os  hyoides.  It  is  a thin,  flat  muscle, 
situated  between  the  lower  jaw  and  the  os  hyoides,  and 
is  covered  by  the  anterior  portion  of  the  digastricus. 

It  arises  fleshy,  and  a little  tendinous,  from  all  theinner 
surface  of  the  lower  jaw,  as  far  back  as  the  insertion 
of  the  pterygoideus  internus,  or,  in  other  words,  from 
between  the  last  dens  molaris  and  the  middle  of  the 
chin,  where  it  joins  its  fellow,  to  form  one  belly,  with 
an  intermediate  tendinous  streak,  or  linea  alba,  which 
extends  from  the  chin  to  the  os  hyoides,  where  both 
muscles  are  inserted  into  the  lower  edge  of  the  basis 
of  that  bone.  This  has  induced  Riolanus,  Winslow, 
Albinus,  and  others,  to  consider  it  as  a single  penni- 
form  muscle.  Its  use  is  to  pull  the  os  hyoides  upwards, 
forwards,  and  to  either  side. 

Myi.o-pharyngbus.  See  Constrictor  -pharyngis 
superior. 

My' lon.  See  Staphyloma. 

MYOOE  PHALUM.  (From  pvia,  a fly,  and  /«0- 
a\y,  a head : from  its  resemblance  to  the  head  of  a fly.) 

A tumour  in  the  uvea  of  the  eye. 

MYOOOtLI'TIS.  (From  pvs,  a muscle,  and  KoiXia , 
a belly.)  Inflammation  of  the  mustles  of  the  belly. 

MYODESOPSIA.  (From  pvia,  a fly,  ados , resem- 
blance, and  oipi ?,  vision.)  A disease  of  the  eyes,  in 
which  the  person  sees  black  spots,  an  appearance  of 
flies,  cobwebs,  or  black  wool,  before  his  eyes. 

MYOLOGY.  ( Myologia ; from  pvs,  a muscle,  and 
Aoyos,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  muscles. 
See  Muscle. 

MYO'PIA.  (From  paw,  to  wink,  and  a >ip,  the  eye.) 
Near-sighted,  purblind.  The  myopes  are  considered 
those  persons  who  cannot  see  distinctly  above  twenty 
inches.  The  myopia  is  likewise  adjudged  to  all  those 
who  cannot  see  at  three,  six,  or  nine  inches.  The 
proximate  cause  is  the  adunation  of  the  rays  of  light 
in  a focus  before  the  retina.  The  species  are, 

1.  Myopia , from  too  great  a convexity  of  the  cornea. 
The  cause  of  this  convexity  is  either  from  nativity, 
or  a greater  secretion  of  the  aqueous  humour : hence, 
on  one  day  there  shall  be  a greater  myopia  than  on 
another  An  incipient  hydrophthalmia  is  the  origin 
of  this  myopia. 

2.  Myopia , from  too  great  a longitude  of  the  bulb. 
This  length  of  the  bulb  is  native,  or  acquired  from  a 
congestion  of  the  humours  in  the  eye;  hence  artificers 
occupied  in  minute  objects,  as  the  engravers  of  seals, 
and  persons  reading  much,  frequently  after  puberty  be- 
come myopes. 

3.  Myopia , from  too  great  a convexity  of  the  anterior 
superficies  of  the  crystalline  lens.  This  is  likewise 
from  birth.  The  image  will  so  much  sooner  be  formed 

94 


as  the  cornea  or  lens  is  more  convex.  This  perfectly 
accounts  for  short-sightedness;  but  an  anterior  too 
great  convexity  of  the  cornea  is  the  most  common 
cause. 

4.  Myopia , from  too  great  a density  of  the  cornea, 
or  humours  of  the  eye.  Optics  teach  us,  by  so  much 
sooner  the  rays  of  light  are  forced  into  a focus,  as  the 
diaphanous  body  is  denser. 

5.  Myopia , from  mydriasis,  or  too  dilated  a pupil. 

6.  Myopia  infantilis.  Infants,  from  the  great  con- 
vexity of  the  cornea,  are  often  myopes;  but  by  de- 
grees, as  they  advance  in  years,  they  perceive  objects 
more  remotely,  by  the  cornea  becoming  less  convex. 

MY'OPS.  (From  pvw,  to  wink,  and  wip,  the  eye.) 
One  who  is  near-sighted. 

MYO'SIS.  A disease  of  the  eye  which 

consists  in  a contraction  or  too  small  perforation  of  the 
pupil.  It  is  known  by  viewing  the  diameter  of  the  pu 
pil,  which  is  smaller  than  usual,  and  remains  so  in  an 
obscure  place,  where,  naturally,  if  not  diseased,  it  di 
lates.  It  occasions  weak  sight,  or  a vision  that  re- 
mains only  a certain  number  of  hours  in  the  day  ; but, 
if  wholly  closed,  total  blindness.  The  species  of  this 
disorder  are, 

1.  Myosis  spasmodica , which  is  observed  in  the 
hysteric,  hypochondriac,  and  in  other  spasmodic  and 
nervous  affections ; it  arises  from  a spasm  of  the  or- 
bicular fibres  of  the  iris. 

2.  Myosis  paralytica  arises  in  paralytic  disorders. 

3.  Myosis  bsflammatoria , which  arises  from  an  in- 
flammation of  the  iris  or  uvea,  as  in  the  internal  oph 
thalmia,  hypopium,  or  wounded  eye. 

4.  Myosis , Horn  an  accustomed  contraction  of  the 
pupil.  This  frequently  is  experienced  by  those  who 
contemplate  very  minute  objects;  by  persons  who 
write ; by  the  workers  of  fine  needlework ; and  by 
frequent  attention  to  microscopical  inquiries. 

5.  Myosis,  from  a defect  of  the  aqueous  humour,  as 
after  extraction. 

6.  Myosis  nativa,  with  which  infants  are  born. 

7.  Myosis  naturalis,  is  a coarctation  of  tlie  pupil  by 
light,  or  from  an  intense  examination  of  the  minutest 
objects.  These  coarctations  of  the  pupil  are  tempo- 
rary, and  spontaneously  vanish. 

MYOSl'TIS.  (From  pvs,  a muscle.)  Inflammation 
of  a muscle.  It  is  the  term  given  by  Sagar  to  acute 
rheumatism. 

MYOSO'TIS.  (Muj,  a muscle,  and  ovj,  wroj,  an 
ear:  so  called  because  its  leaves  are  hairy,  and  grow 
longitudinally  like  the  ear  of  a mouse.)  See  Hieracium 
pilosella. 

MYOTOMY.  (Myotomia ; from  pvs,  a muscle,  and 
TcuviO,  to  cut.)  The  dissection  of  the  muscles. 

MY'RICA.  (A  name  borrowed  from  the  ancient 
Greeks,  whose  pvpitcy,  however,  appears  to  be  the 
Tamarix  gallica.)  The  name  of  a genus  or  family  of 
plants.  Class,  IJicecia ; Order,  Telrandria. 

Myrica  gale.  The  systematic  name  of  the  Dutch 
myrtle  or  sweet  willow.  Myrtus  brabantica  ; Myrtus 
anglica;  Myrtifolia  belgica ; Gale;  Gag  el ; Rus 
sijlvestris  ; Id  car  on;  Elceagnus  ; Elceagnus  cordo  : 
Chameelffiagnvs  ; Dodonao.  The  leaves,  flowers,  and 
seeds  of  this  plant,  have  a strong,  fragrant  smell,  and  a 
bitter  taste.  They  are  said  to  be  used  among  the 
common  people  for  destroying  moths  and  cutaneous  in- 
sects, and  the  infusion  is  given  internally  as  a stoma- 
chic and  vermifuge. 

[Myrica  cerifera.  See  Cera  regetabilis.  A.] 

MYRICIN.  The  ingredient  of  wax  which  remains 
after  digestion  in  alkohol.  It  is  insoluble  also  in  water 
and  tether ; but  very  soluble  in  fixed  and  volative  oils. 

MYRIOPHY'LLON.  (From  pvpios,  infinite,  and 
<f>v\Xov , a leaf,  named  from  the  number  of  its  leaves.) 
The  milfoil  plant,  a species  of  Achillsea.  See  Achillea 
millefolium. 

MYRI'STICA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Diaecia  ; Order,  Mona- 

delphia. 

Myristica  aromatica.  Swart’s  name  of  the  nut 

meg-tiee. 

Myristica  moschata.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  produces  the  nutmeg  and  mace. 

1.  The  nutmeg,  Myristica  nucleus ; Muz  moschata  ; 
Mucista  ; Mux  myristica  ; Chrysobalanus  Galeni , 
Unguentaria ; Assala ; Mux  aromatica.  The  seed, 
or  kernel,  of  the  Myristica— foliis  lanceolahs.  fructu 
glabro,  of  Linuarus.  It  is  a spice  that  is  well  known, 


MYR 


MYR 


and  has  been  long  used  both  for  culinary  and  medical 
purposes.  Distilled  with  water  they  yield  a large 
quantity  of  essential  oil,  resembling  in  flavour  the 
spice  itself;  after  the  distillation,  an  insipid  sebaceous 
matter  is  found  swimming  on  the  water ; the  decoc- 
tion, inspissated,  gives  an  extract  of  an  unctuous,  very 
slightly  bitterish  taste,  and  with  little  or  no  astringency. 
Rectified  spirit  extracts  the  whole  virtue  of  nutmegs, 
by  infusion,  and  elevates  very  little  of  it  in  distillation; 
hence  the  spirituous  extract  possesses  the  flavour  of  the 
spice  in  an  eminent  degree.  Nutmegs,  when  heated, 
vield  to  the  press  a considerable  quantity  of  limpid, 
yellow  oil.  There  are  three  kinds  of  unctuous  sub- 
stances, called  oil  of  mace,  though  really  expressed 
from  the  nutmeg.  The  best  is  brought  from  the  East 
Indies,  in  stone  jars ; this  is  of  a thick  consistence,  of 
the  colour  of  mace,  and  has  an  agreeable  fragrant 
smell ; the  second  sort,  which  is  paler-coloured,  and 
much  inferior  in  quality,  comes  from  Holland,  in  solid 
masses,  generally  flat,  and  of  a square  figure  ; the 
third,  which  is  the  worst  of  all,  and  usually  called 
common  oil  of  mace,  is  an  artificial  composition  of 
suet,  palm-oil,  and  the  like,  flavoured  with  a little 
genuine  oil  of  nutmeg.  The  medicinal  qualities  of  nut- 
meg are  supposed  to  be  aromatic,  anodyne,  stomachic, 
and  astringent ; and  hence  it  has  been  much  used  in 
diarrhoeas  and  dysenteries.  To  many  people,  the  aro- 
matic flavour  of  nutmeg  is  very  agreeable ; they,  how- 
ever, should  be  cautioned  not  to  use  it  in  large  quan- 
tities, as  it  is  apt  to  affect  the  head,  and  even  to  mani- 
fest an  hypnotic  power  in  such  a degree  as  to  prove  ex- 
tremely dangerous.  Bontius  speaks  of  this  as  a fre- 
quent occurrence  in  India ; and  Dr.  Cullen  relates  a 
remarkable  instance  of  this  soporific  effect  of  nutmeg, 
which  fell  under  his  own  observation:  and  hence 
concludes  that,  in  apoplectic  and  paralytic  cases,  this 
spice  may  be  very  improper.  The  officinal  prepara- 
tions cf  nutmeg  are  a spirit  and  an  essential  oil,  and 
the  nutmeg,  in  substance,  roasted  to  render  it  more  as- 
tringent: both  the  spice  itself  and  the  essential  oil 
enter  several  compositions,  as  the  confectio  aromatica , 
spiritus  ammonia!  aromaticus , &c. 

2.  Mace  is  the  middle  bark  of  the  nutmeg.  A thick, 
tough,  reticulated,  unctuous  membrane,  of  a lively, 
reddish-yellow  colour,  approaching  to  that  of  saffron, 
which  envelopes  the  shell  of  the  nutmeg.  The  mace, 
when  fresh,  is  of  a blood-red  colour,  and  acquires  its 
yellow  hue  in  drying.  It  is  dried  in  the  sun,  upon 
hurdles  fixed  above  one  another,  and  then,  it  is  said, 
sprinkled  with  sea-water,  to  prevent  its  crumbling  in 
carrying.  It  has  a pleasant,  aromatic  smell,  and  a 
warm,  bitterish,  moderately  pungent  taste.  It  is  in 
common  use  as  a grateful  spice,  and  appears  to  be  in 
its  general  qualities  nearly  similar  to  the  nutmeg.  The 
principal  difference  consists  in  the  mace  being  much 
warmer,  more  bitter,  less  unctuous,  and  sitting  easier  on 
weak  stomachs.  Mace  possesses  qualities  similar  to 
those  of  nutmeg,  but  is  less  astringent,  and  its  oil  is 
supposed  to  be  more  volatile  and  acrid. 

Myristica  nux.  See  Myristica  moschata. 

Myrme'cia.  (From  pvpprjL  a pismire.)  A small 
painful  wart,  of  the  size  and  shape  of  a pismire.  See 
Myrmecium. 

Myrmk'cium.  A moist  soft  wart  about  the  size  of  a 
lupine,  with  a broad  base,  deeply  rooted,  and  very 
painful.  It  grows  on  the  palms  of  the  hands  and  soles 
of  the  feet. 

Myro'copum.  (From  pvpov,  an  ointment,  and  kotos, 
labour.)  An  unguent  to  remove  lassitude. 

MYROBALAN.  See  Myrobalanus. 

MYROBA'LANUS.  (From  pvpos,  an  unguent,  and 
6a\avos,  a nut : so  called  because  it  was  formerly  used 
in  ointments.)  A myrobalan.  A dried  fruit  of  the 
plum  kind,  brought  from  the  East  Indies.  All  the  my- 
robalans  have  an  unpleasant,  bitterish,  very  austere 
taste,  and  strike  an  inky  blackness  with  a solution  of 
steel.  They  are  said  to  have  a gently  purgative  as 
well  as  an  astringent  and  corroborating  virtue.  In 
this  country  they  have  been  long  expunged  from 
the  pharmacopoeias.  Of  this  fruit  there  are  several 
Bpecies. 

Myrobalanus  bellirica.  The  belliric  myrobalan. 
The  fruit  is  of  a yellowish-gray  colour,  and  an  irregular 
roundish  or  oblong  figure,  about  an  inch  in  length,  and 
three  quarters  of  an  inch  thick. 

Myrobalanus  chebula.  The  chebule  myrobalan. 
This  resembles  the  yellow  in  figure  and  ridges,  but  is 


larger,  of  a darker  colour,  inclining  to  brown  or  black- 
ish, and  has  a thicker  pulp. 

Myrobalanus  citrina.  Yellow  myrobalan.  This 
fruit  is  somewhat  longer  than  the  belliric,  with  gene- 
rally five  large  longitudinal  ridges,  and  as  many  smaller 
between  them,  somewhat  pointed  at  both  ends. 

Myrobalanus  emblica.  The  emblic  myrobalan  is 
of  a dark  blackish-gray  colour,  roundish,  about  half  an 
inch  thick,  with  six  hexagonal  faces,  opening  from  one 
another. 

Myrobalanus  indica.  The  Indian  or  black  myro- 
balan, of  a deep  black  colour,  oblong,  octangular,  dif- 
fering from  all  the  others  in  having  no  stone,  or  only 
the  rudiments  of  one,  from  which  circumstance  they 
are  supposed  to  have  been  gathered  before  maturity. 

My'ron.  (From  pvpu),  to  flow.)  An  ointment,  me- 
dicated oil,  or  unguent. 

Myrophy'llum.  Millefolium  aquaticum.  Water- 
fennel.  It  is  said  to  be  vulnerary. 

MYRO'XYLON.  (From  pvpov,  an  ointment,  and 
}[vAov,  wood.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Limuean  system.  Class,  Diandria;  Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

Myroxylon  peruiferum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  tree  which  gives  out  the  Peruvian,  balsam.  Bal- 
samum  peruvianum ; Putzochill ; Indian , Mexican , 
and  American  balsam  ; Carbareiba , is  the  name  of  the 
tree  from  which,  according  to  Piso  and  Ray,  it  is  taken. 
It  is  the  Myroxylon  peruiferum , of  Linnteus,  which 
grows  in  the  warmest  provinces  of  South  America, 
and  is  remarkable  for  its  elegant  appearance.  Every 
part  of  the  tree  abounds  with  a resinous  juice ; even 
the  leaves  being  full  of  transparent  resinous  points,  like 
those  of  the  orange-tree. 

Balsam  of  Peru  is  of  three  kinds  : or  rather,  it  is  one 
and  the  same  balsam,  having  three  several  names : 1. 
The  balsam  of  incision ; 2.  The  dry  balsam  ; 3.  The 
balsam  of  lotion.  The  virtues  of  this  balsam,  as  a 
cordial,  pectoral,  and  restorative,  stimulant,  and  tonic, 
are  by  some  thought  to  be  very  great.  It  is  given  with 
advantage  from  5 to  10  or  15  drops  for  a dose,  in  dys- 
pepsia, atonic  gout,  in  consumptions,  asthmas,  ne- 
phritic complaints,  obstructions  of  the  viscera,  and 
suppressions  of  the  menses.  It  is  best  taken  dropped 
upon  sugar.  The  yelk  of  an  egg,  or  mucilage  of  gum- 
arabic,  will,  indeed,  dissolve  it;  it  may,  by  that  way, 
be  made  into  an  emulsion  ; and  it  is  less  acrid  in  that 
form  than  when  taken  singly.  It  is  often  made  an  in- 
gredient in  boluses  and  electuaries,  and  enters  into  two 
of  the  officinal  compositions ; the  tinctura  balsami  Pe- 
ruviani  composita,  and  the  trochisci  glycyrrhizie.  Ex- 
ternally, it  is  recommended  as  a useful  application  to 
relaxed  ulcers,  not  disposed  to  heal. 

MY'RRHA.  (A  Hebrew  word.  Also  called  stacte, 
and  the  worst  sort  ergasma.)  A botanical  specimen 
of  the  tree  which  affords  this  gum  resin  has  not  yet 
been  obtained ; but  from  the  account  of  Bruce,  who 
says  it  very  much  resembles  the  Acacia  vera  of  Lin- 
naeus, there  can  be  little  doubt  in  referring  it  to  that 
genus,  especially  as  it  corresponds  with  the  description 
of  the  tree  given  by  Dioscorides.  The  tree  that  affords 
the  myrrh,  which  is  obtained  by  incision,  grows  on  the 
eastern  coast  of  Arabia  Felix,  and  in  that  part  of  Abys- 
sinia which  is  situated  near  the  Red  Sea,  and  is  called 
by  Bruce,  Troglodyte.  Good  myrrh  is  of  a turbid 
black-red  colour,  solid  and  heavy,  of  a peculiar  smell, 
and  bitter  taste.  Its  medicinal  effects  are  warm,  cor- 
roborant, and  antiseptic  ; it  has  been  given  a 5 an  em- 
menagogue  in  doses  from  5 to  20  grains  : U is  also 
given  in  cachexies,  and  applied  externally  as  an  anti- 
septic and  vulnerary.  In  doses  of  half  a drachm.  Dr. 
Cullen  remarks  that  it  heated  the  stomach,  produced 
sweat,  and  agreed  with  the  balsams  in  affecting  the 
urinary  passages.  It  has  lately  come  more  into  use  as 
a tonic  in  hectical  cases,  and  is  said  to  piove  less  heat- 
ing than  most  other  medicines  of  that  class.  Myrrh 
dissolves  almost  totally  in  boiling  water,  but  as  the 
liquor  cools,  the  resinous  matter  subsides.  Rectified 
spirit  dissolves  less  of  this  concrete  than  water  ; but  ex- 
tracts piore  perfectly  that  part  in  which  its  bitterness, 
virtues,  and  flavour  reside ; the  resinous  matter  which 
water  leaves  undissolved  is  very  bitter,  but  the  gummy 
matter  which  spirit  leaves  undissolved  is  insipid,  the 
spirituous  solution  containing  all  the  active  part  of  the 
myrrh : it  is  applied  to  ulcers,  and  other  external  affec- 
tions of  a putrid  tendency ; and  also  as  a wash,  when 
diluted,  for  the  teeth  and  gums.  There  are  several 

95 


NAN 

reparations  of  this  drug  in  the  London  and  Edinburgh 

harmacopoeis. 

Myrrhi'ne.  (From  pvppa,  myrrh:  so  called  be- 
cause it  smells  like  myrrh.)  The  common  myrtle. 
See  Myrtus  communis. 

My'rrhis.  (From  pvppa,  myrrh:  so  named  from 
its  myrrh-like  smell.)  Sweet  cicely  See  Scandix 
odorata. 

Myrsinel^e'um.  (From  pvpaivt],  the  myrtle,  and 
sXaiov,  oil.)  Oil  of  myrtle. 

Myrtaca'ntha.  (From  pvpros,  a myrtle,  and 
aitavda , a thorn  : so  called  from  its  likeness  to  myrtle, 
and  from  its  prickly  leaves.)  Butcher’s  broom.  See 
Ruscus. 

Myrti'danum.  (From  pvpros,  the  myrtle.)  An  ex- 
crescence growing  on  the  trunk  of  the  myrtle,  and 
used  as  an  astringent. 

Myrtiform  caruncles.  See  Carunculce  myrtiformes. 

Myrtiform  glands.  See  Carunculce  myrtiformes. 

MYRTI'LLUS.  See  Vaccinium  myrtillus. 

MYRTLE.  See  Myrtus. 

Myrtle , Dutch.  See  Myrica  gale. 

Myrto  cheilides.  (From  pvprov,  the  clitoris, 
and  x«Aoj,  a lip.)  The  nymphae  of  the  female  pudenda. 

My'rton.  The  clitoris. 

My'rtum.  (From  pvpros,  a myrtle.)  A little  pro- 
minence in  the  pudenda  of  women,  resembling  a 
myrtle-berry.  It  also  means  the  clitoris. 

MY'RTUS.  (From  poppa,  myrrh,  because  of  its 
smell,  or  from  Myrrha , a virgin,  who  was  fabled  to 
have  been  turned  into  this  tree.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Ico- 
sandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  myrtle.  See 
Myrtus  communis. 

Myrtus  brabantica.  See  Myrica  gale. 

Myrtus  caryophyllata.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  tree  which  affords  the  clove  bark.  Cassia  cary- 
ophyllata. The  bark  of  this  tree,  Myrtus— pcduncu- 
lis  trifido-multifloris,  foliis  ovatis , of  Linnaeus,  is  a 
warm  aromatic,  of  the  smell  of  clove  spice,  but 


NAf 

weaker,  and  with  a little  admixture  of  ihe  cinnamon 
flavour.  It  may  be  used  with  the  same  views  as 
cloves,  or  cinnamon. 

Myrtus  communis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  myrtle. 

Myrtus  communis  italica.  Oxymyrrhme;  Ozy- 
myrsine.  The  berries  of  this  plant  are  recommended 
in  alvine  and  uterine  fluxes,  and  other  disorders  from 
relaxation  and  debility.  They  have  a roughish,  and 
not  unpleasant  taste,  and  appear  to  be  moderately  as- 
tringent and  corroborant,  partaking  also  of  aromatic 
qualities. 

Myrtus  pimenta.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  bears  the  Jamaica  pepper,  or  allspice. 
Pimento;  Piper  caryophyllatum ; Cocculi  Indi  aroma- 
tici ; Piper  chiapce ; Amomum pimenta;  Caryophyllus 
aromaticus ; Caryophyllus  americanus ; Piper  odora- 
tum  jamaicense.  Myrtus— floribus  trichotoma-pani- 
culatis , foliis  oblongo-lanceolatis,  of  Linnaeus.  This 
spice,  w’hicli  was  first  brought  over  for  dietetic  uses, 
has  been  long  employed  in  the  shops  as  a succedaneurn 
to  the  more  costly  oriental  aromatics : it  is  moderately 
warm,  of  an  agreeable  flavour,  somewhat  resembling 
that  of  a mixture  of  cloves,  cinnamon,  and  nutmegs. 
Both  pharmacopoeias  direct  an  aqueous  and  spirituous 
distillation  to  be  made  from  these  berries ; and  the 
Edinburgh  College  orders  the  Oleum  essentiale  piperis 
jamaicensis. 

MY'STAX.  The  hair  which  forms  the  beard  in 
man,  on  each  side  the  upper  lip.  See  Capillus. 

Myu'rus.  An  epithet  for  a sort  of  sinking  pulse, 
when  the  second  stroke  is  less  than  the  first,  the  third 
than  the  second,  &c.  Of  this  there  are  two  kinds : 
the  first  is  when  the  pulse  so  sinks  as  not  to  rise  again  ; 
the  other,  when  it  returns  again,  and  rises  in  some  de- 
gree. Both  are  esteemed  bad  presages. 

Myxosarco'ma.  (From  pv\a,  mucus,  and  cap\, 
flesh.)  Mucocarneus.  A tumour  which  is  partly 
fleshy  and  partly  mucous. 

My'xter.  (From  pv%a,  the  mucus  of  the  nose.) 
The  nose  or  nostril. 


N 


In  prescriptions  this  letter  is  a contraction  for 
• nume.ro , in  number. 

NACRITE.  See  Talcite. 

Na'cta  An  abscess  of  the  breast. 

NADLESTEIN.  An  ore  of  Titanium. 

Na'ducem.  A uterine  mole. 

NiE'VUS.  ( Noevus , i.  m.)  A natural  mark,  spot, 
or  blemish. 

N.e'vus  maternus.  Macula  matricis ; Stigma, 
Metrocelis.  A mother’s  mark.  A mark  on  the  skin 
of  children,  which  is  born  with  them,  and  which  is 
said  to  be  produced  by  the  longing  of  the  mother  for 
particular  things,  or  her  aversion  to  them  ; hence  these 
marks  resemble  mulberries,  strawberries,  grapes,  pines, 
bacon,  &c. 

Na'i  corona.  A name  of  the  cowage. 

NAIL.  See  Unguis. 

Na'kir.  According  to  Schenkius  this  means  wan- 
dering pains  of  the  limbs. 

NANCEIC  ACID.  Acidum  nanceicum.  Zumic 
acid.  “An  acid  called  by  Braconnot,  in  honour  of  the 
town  of  Nancy,  where  he  lives.  He  discovered  it  in 
many  acescent  vegetable  substances  ; in  sour  rice  ; in 
putrefied  juice  of  beet-Toot;  in  sour  decoction  of  car- 
rots, pease,  &c.  He  imagines  that  this  acid  is  generated 
at  the  same  time  as  vinegar  in  organic  substances, 
when  they  become  sour.  It  is  without  colour,  does 
not  crystallize,  and  has  a very  acid  taste. 

He  concentrates  the  soured  juice  of  the  beet-root  till 
it  becomes  almost  solid,  digests  it  with  alkohol,  and 
evaporates  the  alkoliolic  solution  to  the  consistence  of 
S3rrup.  He  dilutes  this  with  water,  and  throws  into  it 
carbonate  of  zinc  till  it  be  saturated.  He  passes  the 
liquid  through  a filter,  and  evaporates  till  a pellicle  ap- 
pears. The  combination  of  the  new  acid  with  oxide 
of  zinc  crystallizes.  After  a second  crystallization, 
he  redissolves  it  in  water,  pours  in  an  excess  of  water 


of  barytes,  decomposes  by  sulphuric  acid  the  barytie 
salt  formed,  separates  the  deposite  by  a filter,  and  ob- 
tains, by  evaporation,  the  new  acid  pure. 

It  forms  with  alumina  a salt  resembling  gum,  and 
with  magnesia  one  unalterable  in  the  air,  in  little  gra- 
pular  crystals,  soluble  in  25  parts  of  water  at  66° 
Fahr. ; with  potassa  and  soda  it  forms  uncrystallizable 
salts,  deliquescent  and  soluble  in  alkohol ; with  lime 
and  strontites,  soluble  granular  salts ; with  barytes,  an 
uncrystallizable  nondeliqnescent  salt,  having  the  aspect 
of  gum  ; with  white  oxide  of  manganese,  a salt  which 
crystallizes  in  tetrahedral  prisms,  soluble  in  12  parts  of 
water  at  66°;  with  oxide  of  zinc,  a salt  crystallizing  in 
square  prisms,  terminated  by  summits  obliquely  trun- 
cated, soluble  in  50  parts  of  water  at  66°  ; with  iron,  a 
salt  crystallizing  in  slender  four-sided  needles,  of  spar- 
ing solubility,  and  not  changing  in  the  air ; with  red 
oxide  of  iron,  a white  noncrystallizing  salt ; with  oxide 
of  tin,  a salt  crystallizing  in  wedge-forin  octahedrons  ; 
with  oxide  of  lead,  an  uncrystallizable  salt,  not  deli- 
quescent, and  resembling  a gum ; with  black  oxide 
of  mercury,  a very  soluble  salt,  which  crystallizes  in 
needles.” 

NAPE'LLUS.  (A  diminutive  of  napus : so  called 
because  it  has  a bulbous  root  like  that  of  the  napus.  > 

See  Aconitum. 

Na'ph.e  flores.  Orange  flowers  are  sometimes  so 
called.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

NA'PHTHA.  ( Naptha , as.  f. ; vacpda.)  A native 
combustible  liquid  of  a yellowish  white  colour,  per- 
fectly fluid  and  shining.  It  feels  greasy,  and  exhales 
an  agreeable  bituminous  smell.  It  occurs  in  consider- 
able springs  on  the  shores  of  the  Caspian  Sea,  in  Sicily, 
and  Italy.  It  is  used  instead  of  oil,  and  differs  from 
petroleum  obtained  by  distilling  coal  only  by  its  greater 
purity  and  lightness.  This  fluid  has  been  used  as  an 
external  application  for  removing  old  piaine,  nervous 


NAS 

disorders,  such  as  cramps,  contractions  of  the  limbs, 
paralytic  affections,  &c. 

Naphtha  vitrioli.  See  JEther  sulphuricus. 

Nafifo'lia.  Bore  cole.  See  Brassica. 

Na'pium.  See  Lapsana  communis. 

[“NAPTHALINE  This  substance  is  one  of  the 
products  of  the  decomposition  of  coal.  If  the  distil- 
lation be  conducted  at  a very  gentle  heat,  naptha,  from 
its  greater  volatility,  first  passes  over,  and  afterward 
napthaline  rises  in  vapour,  and  condenses  in  the  neck 
of  the  retort,  as  a white  crystalline  solid. 

“Pure  napthaline  is  heavier  than  water,  has  a pun- 
gent aromatic  taste,  and  a peculiar  odour  not  unlike 
that  of  the  narcissus.  It  is  smooth  and  unctuous  to 
the  touch,  is  perfectly  white,  and  has  a silvery  lustre. 
It  fuses  at  180°  Fah.,  volatilizes  slowly  at  common 
temperatures,  and  boils  at  410°  Fah.  It  is  not  very 
readily  inflamed,  but  when  set  on  fire  it  burns  rapidly, 
and  emits  a large  quantity  of  smoke.  It  is  soluble  in 
cold,  and  dissolves  very  sparingly  in  hot  water.  Its 
proper  solvents  are  alkohol  and  ether. 

“ Sulphuric  acid  enters  into  direct  combination  with 
napthaline,  and  forms  a new  and  peculiar  acid,  which 
Mr.  Faraday  has  described  under  the  name  of  sulpho- 
napthalic  acid. 

“ Napthaline,  according  to  Dr.  Thompson,  is  a sesqui- 
carburet  of  hydrogen , that  is,  a compound  of  9,  or  an 
atom  and  a half,  of  carbon,  and  1 atom  of  hydrogen.” 
— Webs.  Man.  Chem.  A.] 

NA'PUS.  See  Brassica  napus. 

Napus  dulcis.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

Napus  sylvestris.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

Narca'phthum.  A name  of  the  cordial  confection. 

NARCI'SSUS.  A genus  of  plants  in  the  Limuean 
system.  Class,  Hexandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

NARCO'SIS.  (From  vapKoui,  to  stupify.)  Stupe- 
faction, stupor,  numbness. 

NARCOTIC.  (Narcotictis  ; from  vapKoio,  to  stu- 
pify.) A medicine  which  has  the  power  of  procuring 
sleep.  See  Anodyne. 

NARCOTINE.  The  active  principle  of  narcotic 
vegetables.  See  Opium. 

NARD.  See  Valeriana  celtica. 

Nard,  Indian.  See  Andropogon  nardus. 

Nardo'stachys.  (From  vapSos,  spikenard,  and 
S' axvs,  sage.)  A species  of  wild  sage  resembling  spike- 
nard in  its  leaves  and  smell. 

NA'RDUS.  (From  nard , Syrian.)  Spikenard. 

Nardus  celtica.  Valeriana  celtica. 

Nardus  indica.  See  Andropogon  nardus. 

Nardus  italica.  The  lavendula  spica  of  Lin- 
naeus. 

Nardus  Montana.  An  old  name  of  asarabacca. 
See  As  arum  europeum. 

Nardus  rustica.  An  old  name  of  the  asarabacca. 
See  Asarum  europeum. 

Narifuso'ria.  (From  nacres,  the  nostrils,  and  fundo 
to  pour.)  Medicines  dropped  into  the  nostrils. 

NA'RIS.  The  nostril.  The  cavity  of  the  nostrils 
is  of  a pyramidal  figure,  and  is  situated  under  the 
anterior  part  of  the  cranium,  in  the  middle  of  the  face. 
The  two  nostrils  are  composed  of  fourteen  bones,  viz. 
the  frontal,  two  maxillary,  two  nasal,  two  lachrymal, 
two  inferior  spongy,  the  sphenoid,  the  vomer,  the 
ethmoid,  and  two  palatine  bones,  which  form  several 
eminences  and  cavities.  The  eminences  are  the  sep- 
tum narium,  the  cavernous  substance  of  the  ethmoid 
bone,  called  the  superior  concha;,  and  the  inferior 
spongy  bones.  The  cavities  are  three’ pair  of  pituitary 
sinuses,  namely,  the  frontal,  sphenoid,  and  maxillary ; 
the  anterior  and  posterior  foramina  of  the  nostrils  ; 
the  ductus  nasalis,  the  sphenopalatine  foramina,  and 
anterior  palatine  foramina.  All  these  parts  are  covered 
with  periosteum,  and  a pituitary  membrane  which 
secretes  the  mucus  of  the  nostrils.  The  arteries  of  this 
cavity  are  branches  of  the  internal  maxillary.  The 
veins  empty  themselves  into  the  internal  jugulars. 
The  nerves  are  branches  of  the  olfactory,  ophthalmic, 
and  superior  maxillary.  The  use  of  the  nostrils  is  for 
smelling,  respiration,  and  speech. 

Naris  compressor.  See  Compressor  naris. 

Na'rta.  (Napra,  ex  nardi  odore , from  its  smell.) 
A plant  used  in  ointments. 

Narthe'cia.  (From  Narthecis , the  island  where 
t flourished.)  Narthez.  A kind  of  fennel. 

NASALIS.  (From  nasus , the  nose.)  Appertain- 
ing to  the  nose. 


NAT 

Nasalis  labii  superioris.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

Nas<a'rium.  (From  nasus,  the  nose.)  The  mucus 
of  the  nose. 

Nasca'le.  (From  nasus , the  nose.)  A wood'  or 
cotton  pessary  for  the  nose. 

Nasca'phthum.  Cordial  confection. 

Nasi  depressor.  See  Depressor  labii  superioris 
alcequc  nasi. 

Nasi  ossa.  The  two  small  bones  of  the  nose  that 
are  so  termed  frotn  the  bridge  of  the  nose.  In  figure 
they  are  quadrangular  and  oblong. 

NASTU'RTIUM.  ( Quod  nasum  torqueat , because 
the  seed,  when  bruising,  irritates  the  nose.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Tetradynamia ; Order,  Siltquosa. 

Nasturtium  aquaticum.  See  Sisymbrium  nastur - 
tium. 

Nasturtium  hortense.  See  Lepidium  sativum. 

Nasturtium  indicum.  See  Tropceolum  majus. 

NA'SUS.  The  nose. 

Na'ta.  Natta.  A species  of  wen  with  slender 
pendent  neck.  Linnaeus  speaks  of  it  as  rooted  in  a 
muscle. 

NATANS.  (From  nato , to  swim.)  Floating  on 
the  surface  of  the  water : applied  to  leaves,  in  opposi- 
tion to  those  which  are  naturally  under,  and  different, 
and  are  called  demersed,  immersed,  and  submersed  ; 
as  in  Potamogeton  natans. 

NA'TES.  (From  nato , to  flow ; because  the  excre- 
ments are  discharged  from  them.)  1.  The  buttocks, 
or  the  fleshy  parts  upon  which  we  sit. 

2.  Two  of  the  eminences,  called  turbercula  quadrige- 
mina,  of  the  brain,  are  so  named  from  their  resem- 
blance. 

Nates  cereeri.  See  Tubercula  quadrigemina. 

NATROLITE.  A subspecies  of  prismatic  zeolite 
or  mesotype. 

[“  This  substance  has  usually  occurred  in  small,  re- 
niform,  rounded,  or  irregular  masses,  composed  of  very 
minute  fibres.  The  fibres  are  divergent,  or  even  radi- 
ate from  a centre ; and  are  sometimes  so  very  minute 
and  close,  that  the  fracture  appears  almost  or  quite  com- 
pact. It  has  little  or  no  lustre.  Sometimes  also  it  pre- 
sents minute  crystals,  especially  on  the  surface  of  its 
masses,  whose  forms  appear  to  he  similar  to  those  of 
the  Zeolite. 

Before  the  blow-pipe  it  easily  melts  into  a white 
glass,  which  often  contains  small  bubbles.  In  nitric 
acid  it  is  reduced,  in  the  course  of  a few  hours,  with- 
out effervescence,  into  a jelly  somewhat  thick.  It 
contains  silex  48.0,  alumine  24.25,  soda  16.5,  water  9.0, 
oxide  of  iron  1.75;=99.5  (according  to  Klaproth). 
This  result  is  very  similar  to  that  obtained  by  Smith 
son  Tennant,  from  the  Zeolite. — Clean.  Min.  A.] 

NA'TRON.  (So  called  from  Matron,  a lake  in 
Judaea,  where  it  was  produced.)  Natrum.  1.  The 
name  formerly  given  to  the  alkali,  now  called  soda. 
See  Soda. 

2.  A native  salt,  which  is  found  crystallized  in 
Egypt,  in  the  lake  called  Natron,  and  in  the  other  hot 
countries,  in  sands  surrounding  lakes  of  salt  water. 
It  is  an  impure  subcarbonate  of  soda,  and  there  are 
two  kinds  of  it,  the  common  and  the  radiated. 

3.  The  name  of  an  impure  subcarbonate  of  soda, 
obtained  by  burning  various  marine  plants.  See  Soda. 

Natron  muriatum.  See  Sodce  murias. 

Natron  pr^paratum.  See  Sodce  subcarbonas. 

Natron  tartarisatum.  See  Soda  tartarizata. 

Natron  vitriolatum.  See  Sodce  sulphas. 

Na'tul®.  (Diminutive  of  nates , the  buttocks:  so 
called  from  their  resemblance.)  The  two  uppermost 
of  four  small  eminences  of  the  brain.  See  Tubercula 
quadrigemina. 

NATURAL.  Appertaining  to  nature 

Natural  actions.  Those  functions  ny  which  the 
body  is  preserved  ; as  hunger,  thirst,  &c.  See  Actions. 

Natural  history.  A description  of  the  natural 
products  of  the  earth,  water,  or  air ; ex.  gr.  beasts, 
birds,  fish,  insects,  worms,  plants,  metals,  minerals,  and 
fossils;  together  with  such  extraordinary  phenomena 
as  at  any  time  appear  in  the  material  world,  as  meteors, 
monsters,  &c. 

Natural  orders.  A division  or  arrangement  of 
plants,  from  their  external  habits  or  characters.  They 
are 

1.  Conifer <e.  3.  Composites. 

2.  Amentaccce.  4.  Aggregatcc. 

97 


Oo 


NAT 


NEC 


5.  Conglomerates. 

31. 

Columniferce. 

6.  UmbellattB. 

32. 

Gruinales. 

7.  Hederacece. 

33. 

Caryophyllce. 

8.  Sarmentacece. 

34. 

Colycanthemce. 

9.  Stellatw. 

35. 

Ascirodeee. 

10.  Cymoste. 

36. 

Coadunatce. 

11.  Cucurbitacew. 

37. 

Dumosce. 

12.  Luridce. 

38. 

Trihilatce. 

13.  Campanacece. 

39. 

Tricoccce. 

14.  Conlortw. 

40. 

Oleracece. 

15.  Rotacece. 

41. 

Scabridee. 

16.  Sepiacice. 

42. 

Vapicculce. 

17.  Bicomes. 

43. 

Pipiritce. 

18.  Asperifolice. 

44. 

Scetaminece. 

19.  Vs rticillatw. 

45. 

Liliaceoe. 

20.  Personates. 

46. 

Ensatce. 

21.  Rhoeadece. 

47. 

Tripetaloideas. 

22.  PutaminctB. 

48. 

Orchidem. 

23.  Siliquoscs. 

49. 

Culmarice. 

24.  P apilionacece 

50. 

Gramina. 

25.  Tomentacece. 

51. 

Palmce. 

26.  Multisiliquce. 

52. 

Filices. 

27.  Senticosw. 

53. 

Musci. 

28.  Pomacece. 

54. 

Algce. 

29.  Hesperidcs. 

55. 

Fungi. 

30.  Succulenta:. 

Natural  philosophv. 

Physics.  The  si 

which  considers  the  properties  of  natural  bodies,  and 
their  mutual  actions  on  one  another,  being  contrasted 
with  moral  philosophy  or  ethics,  which  treat  of  the 
phenomena  of  mind  and  rules  of  morality. 

NATURA'LIA.  (From  natura,  nature.)  The 
parts  of  generation. 

NATURE.  Natura;  itomnascor,natus.)  A term 
variously  used. 

1.  It  is  most  frequently  employed  to  express  the  sys- 
tem of  the  world,  the  assemblage  of  all  created  beings, 
and  in  this  case  is  synonymous  with  world,  or  universe. 

2.  That  power  which  is  said  to  be  diffused  through- 
out the  creation,  moving  and  acting  in  all  bodies,  and 
giving  them  certain  properties.  In  this  last  sense, 
when  a personified  being  is  meant,  nature  is  nothing 
else  but  God,  acting  himself,  and  according  to  certain 
laws  which  he  himself  has  fixed.  According  to  the 
supposition  of  some,  however,  the  principle  called 
nature  is  a power  delegated  by  the  Creator ; as  it  were, 
a middle  being  between  God  and  created  things,  which 
has  been  styled  Anima  mundi ; but  it  does  not  appear 
that  there  is  any  foundation  for  this  hypothesis,  or  that 
any  thing  is  explained  by  referring  the  whole  series  of 
second  causes  to  an  intermediate  principle,  instead  of 
to  one  universal  agent. 

3.  In  medical  writings,  the  expression  nature  is 
usually  taken  for  the  aggregate  of  powers  belonging  to 
any  body,  especially  a living  one ; as  when  physicians 
say  that,  in  such  a disease  nature,  left  to  herself,  will 
perform  the  cure.  It  may  be  proper  here  to  observe, 
with  regard  to  this  phrase  of  leaving  the  cure  to  nature, 
that  there  is  a wide  difference  between  suspending  for 
a time  all  interference  with  the  vital  processes,  and 
neglecting  a disease  ; although  to  those  who  are  igno- 
rant of  the  principles  of  medicine,  these  appear  to  be 
the  same  thing. 

It  would  be  the  perfection  of  this  science  to  ascertain 
upon  what  causes  healthy  and  diseased  actions  depend, 
and  to  what  extent  either  can  be  affected  by  human 
agency : but  at  present  the  judicious  physician  never 
aims  at  a cure  independently  of  the  original  powers  of 
the  system,  but  rather  seeks  to  call  them  into  action, 
or,  at  most,  to  assist  when  the  inherent  elasticity  of 
the  vital  functions  is  insufficient  to  recover  them  from 
the  oppression  of  disease.  As,  for  example,  when 
we  allow  a wound  to  heal  by  the  first  intention,  or 
restore  the  digestive  functions  by  obliging  a man  to 
attend  to  the  rules  of  diet  and  exercise,  &c.  upon  which 
health  depends ; we  call  upon  the  restorative  powers 
of  Nature,  because  art,  that  is  to  say,  human  incenuity, 
can  supply  nothing  equivalent.  Or,  again,  when,  in 
the  treatment  of  a diseased  joint,  rest  is  enjoined  at 
one  period  on  account  of  inflammation,  and  perhaps 
motion  is  ordered  at  another,  to  keep  up  the  proper 
uses  of  the  part,  we  show  the  importance  of  alternately 
interfering  and  looking  on,  as  we  judge  it  proper  to 
check  the  tendency  of  vital  actions,  or  to  trust  entirely 
to  them.  While  to  those  who  are  ignorant  of  these 
principles,  the  practitioner,  when  really  exercising  his 
greatest  skill,  is  supposed  to  be  idle. 


NAU'SEA.  (Nawra;  from  vavs,  a ship:  because 
it  is  a, sensation  similar  to  that  which  people  experi- 
ence upon  sailing  in  a ship.)  Nausiosis ; Nautia. 
An  inclination  to  vomit  without  effecting  it ; also  a 
disgust  of  food  approaching  to  vomiting.  It  is  an  at- 
tendant on  cardialgia,  and  a variety  of  other  disorders, 
pregnancy,  &c.  occasioning  an  aversion  for  food,  an 
increase  of  saliva,  disgusted  ideas  at  the  sight  of  vari- 
ous objects,  loss  of  appetite,  debility,  &c. 

Nausio'sis.  See  Nausea. 

Nau'tia.  See  Nausea.  • 

NAU'TICUS.  ( Nauticus , a sailor:  so  called  from 
the  use  which  sailors  make  of  it  in  climbing  ropes.) 
A muscle  of  the  leg,  exerted  in  climbing  up. 

NAVEW.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

Navew , garden.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

Navew , sweet.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

NAVICULA'RE  OS.  Naviformis ; Navicularis  ; 
Os  scaphoides ; Cymba.  A bone  of  the  carpus  and 
tarsus  is  so  called,  from  its  supposed  resemblance  to  a 
boat. 

Navicula'ris.  (From  navicula,  a little  boat.)  See 
Naviculare  os. 

Navifo'rmis.  See  Naviculare  os. 

NEAPOLITAN.  (From  Neapolis,  or  Naples,  be- 
cause it  was  said  to  have  been  first  discovered  at 
Naples,  when  the  French  were  in  possession  of  it.) 
The  venereal  disease  was  once  so  called. 

NE'BULA.  (From  vepe^rj.)  1.  A cloudy  spot  in 
the  cornea  of  the  eye. 

2.  TJte  cloud-like  appearance  in  the  urine,  after  it 
has  been  a little  time  at  rest. 

NECK.  Collum.  The  parts  which  form  the  neck 
are  divided  into  external  and  internal.  The  external 
parts  are  the  common  integuments,  several  muscles, 
eight  pair  of  cervical  nerves,  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves 
of  the  cerebrum,  and  the  great  intercostal  nerve  ; the 
two  carotid  arteries,  the  two  external  jugular  veins, 
and  the  two  internal ; the  glands  of  the  neck,  viz.  the 
jugular,  submaxillar}',  cervical,  and  thyroid.  The  in- 
ternal parts  are  the  fauces,  pharynx,  oesophagus,  larynx, 
and  trachea.  The  bones  of  the  neck  are  the  seven 
cervical  vertebra. 

NECRO'SIS.  (From  vskow,  to  destroy.)  This  word, 
the  strict  meaning  of  which  is  only  mortification,  is, 
by  the  general  consent  of  surgeons,  confined  to  an  af- 
fection of  the  bones.  The  death  of  parts  of  bones  was 
not  distinguished  from  caries,  by  the  ancients.  How- 
ever, necrosis  and  caries  are  essentially  different ; for 
in  the  first,  the  affected  part  of  the  bone  is  deprived  of 
the  vital  principle  ; but  this  is  not  the  case  when  it  is 
simply  carious.  Caries  is  very  analogous  to  ulcera- 
tion, while  necrosis  is  exactly  similar  to  mortification 
of  the  soft  parts. 

Necrosis  ustilaginea.  A painful  convulsive  con- 
traction of  the  limbs.  See  Raphania. 

NE'CTAR.  Nt/crap.  A wine  made  of  honey. 

NECTA'RIUM.  The  nectary.  An  accidental  part 
of  a flower  which  does  not  come  under  the  description 
of  any  of  its  organs.  It  may  be  defined  that  part  of 
the  corolla  which  contains  or  which  secretes  honey, 
though  it  is  not  necessary  to  a nectary  that  honey  be 
present. 

Scarce  a flower  can  be  found  that  has  not  more  or 
less  honey,  though  it  is  far  from  being  universally,  or 
even  generally  formed,  by  an  apparatus  separate  from 
the  petals. 

In  monopetalous  flowers,  as  the  Lamium  album,  the 
dead  nettle,  the  tube  of  the  corolla  contains,  and  pro- 
bably secretes,  the  honey  without  any  evident  nectary. 

Sometimes  the  part  under  consideration  is  a produc- 
tion or  elongation  of  the  corolla,  as  in  the  violet : some- 
times indeed  of  the  calyx,  as  in  the  garden  nasturtium, 
TropEeolum,  the  coloured  calyx  of  which  partakes  much 
of  the  nature  of  the  petals. 

Sometimes  it  is  distant  from  both,  either  resembling 
the  petals;  as  in  Aquilegia;  or  more  different,  as  in 
Epimedium,  Aconituin,  Helleborus,  Delphinium.  Such 
at  least  is  the  mode  in  which  Linnseus  and  his  followers 
understand  the  four  last  numbered  flowers. 

The  most  indubitable  of  all  nectaries,  as  actually  se- 
creting honey,  are  those  of  a glandular  kind  In  the 
natural  order  of  crucifirvm  plants,  composing  the  class 
Tetradyvamin , there  are  generally  four  green  glands  at 
the  base  of  the  stamens,  as  in  Dentaria,  and  Sisym- 
brium ; while  in  Pelargonium,  the  nectary  is  a tube 
running  down  one  side  of  the  flower-stalk.  The  eie- 


NEP 


NEP 


gant  Parnassia  has  a most  elaborate  apparatus  or  jhee- 
tary. — Smith. 

From  the  figure  of  the  nectary  it  is  said  to  be,  j 

1.  Calcurale,  or  spur-like;  as  in  Aquilegia  vulgaris, 
Delphinium  ajax,  and  Antirrhinum  linaria. 

2.  Cucullate , hooded ; as  in  Impatiens  balsarnina, 
Aconitum,  and  Asclepias  vincetoxicum. 

3.  Foveate , a little  depression  in  the  claw  of  the  pe- 
tal ; as  in  Fritillaria  imperialis. 

4.  Campanulate  ; as  in  Narcissus  jonquilla  and  Pseu- 
donarcissus. 

5.  Croton-like;  as  in  Passiflora  caerulea. 

6.  Pedicellate , resting  on  a partial  flower-stalk ; as 
in  Aconitum  napellus. 

7.  A bilabiate  tube;  as  in  Helleborus  feetidusi  and 
Nigella. 

8.  Poriform,  there  being  three  pores  in  the  germen  ; 
as  in  the  Hyacinths. 

9.  Squamate , a little  scale  in  the  claw;  as  in  Ranunculus. 

10.  Glandular , little  nectiferous  glands  between  the 
stamens  and  pistils  ; as  in  Sinapis  alba. 

11.  Stellate,  a double  star  covering  the  internal  or- 
gans ; as  in  Stapelia. 

12.  Pilous,  fine  hairy  fascicles  at  the  base  of  the  sta- 
mina ; as  in  Parnassia  palustris. 

13.  Bearded ; as  in  Iris  germanica. 

14.  Fomiciform , arched  ; small  prolongations  at  the 
opening  of  the  corolla,  and  covering  the  internal  organs ; 
as  in  Symphatum  officinale,  and  Myosotis  scorpioides. 

15.  Bristle-like , fine  horn-like  filaments  around  the 
internal  organs ; as  in  Periploca  grteca. 

16.  Rotate  ; as  in  Cissampelos. 

17.  Scrotiforme , behind  the  flower ; as  in  Satyrium. 

18.  Horn-like,  behind  the  flower;  as  in  Orchis. 

19.  Sandaliform,  slipper-like;  as  in  Cypripedium 
calceolus. 

20.  Globose , inverting  the  germen ; as  in  Mirabilis 
jalappa. 

21.  Cyathiform,  cup-like ; as  in  Urticaurens. 

22.  Conical;  as  in  Utricularia foliosa. 

23.  Acidiforme , pitcher-like,  a membraneous  tube, 
containing  water,  and  behind  the  flower ; as  in  Ascium 
and  Ruyschia, 

24.  Calycine,  adhering  to  the  calyx,  by  a spur ; as  in 
Tropjeoluin  majus. 

Neoy'ia.  (Nedys ; from  vtjSvs,  the  belly.)  The 
intestines. 

NEEDLE  ORE.  Acicular  bismuth  glance. 
Needle-shaped  leaf.  See  Acerosus. 

Needle  zeolite.  See  Zeolite. 

NEGRO  CACHEXY.  Cachexia  africana.  A pro- 
pensity for  eating  earth,  common  to  males  as  well  as 
females,  in  the  West  Indies  and  Africa. 

Nel.e'ra.  (From  vetapof,  furthermost. ) The  lower 
part  of  the  belly 

NEMORO'SA.  (From  nemus , a grove:  so  called 
because  it  grows  in  woods.)  A species  of  wind-flower, 
the  Anemone  nemerosa,  of  Linnaeus. 

NEP.  See  Nepeta. 

Ne'pa  theophrasti.  See  Spartium  scop arium. 
Nepe'nthos.  (From  vy,  neg.  and  vsevOos,  grief : so 
called  from  their  exhilarating  qualities.)  1.  A prepara- 
tion of  opium. 

2.  A kind  of  bugloss. 

NE'PETA.  (From  nepte , German.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Di- 
dynamia;  Order,  Gymnospermia. 

Nepeta  cataria.  The  systematic  name  of  the  caf- 
mint.  Hcrba  felis ; Mentha  felina;  Calamintha ; 
Nepetella;  Mentha  cataria.  The  leaves  of  this  plant, 
Nepeta— floribus  spicatis  ; verticillis  ; subpedicellatis ; 
foliis petiolatis,  cordatis , dentato-serratis,  of  Linnasus, 
have  a moderately  pungent  aromatic  taste,  and  a strong 
smell,  like  an  admixture  of  spearmint  and  pennyroyal. 
The  herb  is  recommended  in  uterine  disorders,  dyspep- 
sia, and  flatulency 

Nepkte'lla.  (Dim.  of  nepeta.)  The  lesser  catmint. 
Ne’piiela.  (Dim.  of  veQos,  a cloud.)  A cloud  like 
spot  on  the  cornea  of  the  eye. 

NEPHELOI'DES.  (From  vc<f>t\y,  a cloud,  and  eiSos, 
a likeness.)  Cloudy.  Applied  to  the  urine. 

NEPHRA'LGIA.  (From  veeftpos,  the  kidney,  and 
aXyof,  pain.)  Pain  in  the  kidney. 

NEPHRELINE.  Rhomboidal  felspar.  This  occurs 
in  drusy  cavities  along  with  ceylanite,  vesuvian,  and 
meionite,  at  Monte  Somma,  near  Naples,  in  drusy  ca- 
vities in  granular  limestone. 


NEPHRITE.  Of  this  mineral  there  are  two  species, 
common  nephrite,  and  axe-stone.  The  former  is  of  a 
leek-green  colour,  and  occurs  in  granite  and  gneiss,  in 
Switzerland.  The  most  beautiful  come  from  Persia 
and  Egypt.  See  Axe-stone. 

NEPHRITIC.  ( Nepliriticus ; from  vetppos , the  kid- 
ney.) Of  or  belonging  to  the  kidney. 

2.  Medicine  is  so  termed  that  is  employed  in  the 
cure  of  diseases  of  the  kidneys. 

N ephritic  wood.  See  Guilandina  moringa. 

Nephritica  aqua.  Spirituous  distillation  of  nut 
meg  and  hawthorn  flowers. 

Nephriticum  lignum.  See  Guilandina  moringa. 

NEPHRI'TIS.  ( Nephritis , idis.  f. ; from  veeppo;,  a 
kidney.)  Inflammation  of  the  kidney.  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  class  Pyrexice  and  order  Phlegmasiae , of 
Cullen  ; known  by  pyrexia,  pain  in  the  region  of  the 
kidneys,  and  shooting  along  the  course  of  the  ureter; 
drawing  up  of  the  testicles  ; numbness  of  the  thigh ; 
vomiting ; urine  high-coloured,  and  frequently  dis- 
charged; costiveness,  and  colic  pains.  Nephritis  is 
symptomatic  of  calculus,  gout,  &c. 

This  inflammation  may  be  distinguished  from  the 
colic  by  the  pain  being  seated  very  far  back,  and  by  the 
difficulty  of  passing  urine,  which  constantly  attends  it ; 
and  it  may  be  distinguished  from  rheumatism,  as  the 
pain  is  but  little  influenced  or  increased  by  motion. 

I Nephritis  is  to  be  distinguished  from  a calculus  in 
the  kidney  or  ureter,  by  the  symptoms  of  fever  accom- 
panying, or  immediately  following  the  attack  of  pain, 
and  these  continuing  without  any  remarkable  intermis- 
sion ; whereas,  in  a calculus  of  the  kidney  or  ureter, 
they  do  not  occur  until  a considerable  time  after  vio- 
lent pain  has  been  felt.  In  the  latter  case,  too,  a numb- 
ness of  the  thigh,  and  a retraction  of  the  testicle  on  the 
affected  side,  usually  takes  place. 

The  causes  which  give  rise  to  nephritis  are  external 
contusions,  strains  of  the  back,  acrids  conveyed  to  the 
kidneys  in  the  course  of  the  circulation,  violent  and 
severe  exercise,  either  in  riding  or  walking,  calculous 
concretions  lodged  in  the  kidneys  or  ureters,  and  expo- 
sure to  cold.  In  some  habits  there  is  an  evident  predis- 
position to  this  complaint,  particularly  the  gouty,  and 
in  these  there  are  often  translations  of  the  matter  to 
the  kidneys,  which  very  much  imitate  nephritis. 

An  inflammation  of  the  kidney  is  attended  with  a 
sharp  pain  on  the  affected  side,  extending  along  the  course 
of  the  ureter ; and  there  is  a frequent  desire  to  make 
water,  with  much  difficulty  in  making  it.  The  body  is 
costive,  the  skin  is  dry  and  hot,  the  patient  feels  great 
uneasiness  when  he  endeavours  to  walk,  or  sit  upright ; 
he  lies  with  most  ease  on  the  affected  side,  and  is  ge- 
nerally troubled  with  nausea  and  frequent  vomiting. 

When  the  disease  is  protracted  beyond  the  seventh 
or  eighth  day,  and  the  patient  feels  an  obtuse  pain  in 
the  part,  has  frequent  returns  of  chillness  and  sliiver- 
ings,  there  is  reason  to  apprehend  that  matter  is  form- 
ing in  the  kidney,  and  that  a suppuration  will  ensue. 

Dissections  of  nephritis  show  the  usual  effects  of  in- 
flammation on  the  kidney  ; and  they  likewise  often  dis- 
cover the  formation  of  abscesses,  which  have  destroyed 
its  whole  substance.  In  a few  instances,  the  kidney 
has  been  found  in  a scirrhous  state.  . 

The  disease  is  to  be  treated  by  bleeding,  general  and 
local,  the  warm  bath,  or  fomentations' to  the  loins, 
emollient  clyster,  mucilaginous  drinks,  and  the  general 
antiphlogistic  plan.  The  bowels  should  be  effectually 
cleared  at  first  by  some  sufficiently  active  formula  ; but 
the  saline  cathartics  are  considered  not  so  proper,  as 
they  may  add  to  the  irritation  of  the  kidney.  Calomel 
with  antimonial  powder,  followed  by  the  infusion  of 
senna,  or  the  ol  ricini,  may  be  given  in  preference,  and 
repeated  occasionally.  It  will  be  right  also  to  endea- 
vour to  promote  diaphoresis,  by  moderate  doses  of  an- 
timonials  especially.  Blisters  are  inadmissible  in  this 
disease;  but  the  linimentum  ammonitE,  or  oilier  rube- 
facient application,  may  in  some  measure  supply  their 
place.  Opium  will  often  prove  useful,  particularly 
where  the  symptoms  appear  to  originate  from  calculi, 
given  in  the  form  of  clyster,  or  by  the  mouth ; in  which 
iatter  mode  of  using  it,  however,  it  will  be  much  better 
joined  with  other  remedies,  which  may  obviate  its 
heating  effect,  and  determine  it  rather  to  pass  off  by  the 
skin.  A decoction  of  the  dried  leaves  of  the  peach 
tree  is  said  to  have  been  serviceable  in  many  cases  of 
this  disease.  In  affections  of  a more  chronic  nature 
where  there  is  a discharge  of  mucus  or  pus,  by  urine 

99 


NER 


NER 


in  addition  to  suitable  tonic  medicines,  the  uva  ursi  in 
moderate  doses,  or  some  of  the  terebintliinate  remedies 
may  be  given  with  probability  of  relief. 

NE'PHROS.  (From  vcu),  to  flow,  and  0fpa>,  to 
bear ; as  conveying  the  urinary  fluid.)  The  kidney. 
See  Kidney. 

NEPHRO'TOMY.  (Ncphrotomia ; from  v£0ppj,  a 
kidney,  and  reyvo),  to  cut.)  The  operation  of  extract- 
ing a stone  from  the  kidney.  A proceeding  which, 
perhaps,  has  never  been  actually  put  in  practice.  The 
cutting  into  the  kidney,  the  deep  situation  of  this  vis- 
cus,  and  the  want  of  symptoms  by  which  the  lodg- 
ment of  a stone  in  it  can  be  certainly  discovered,  will 
always  be  strong  objections  to  the  practice. 

NE'RIUM.  (From  vypos,  humid:  so  called  because 
it  grows  in  moist  places.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Nerium  antibysentericum.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  tree  which  affords  the  Codaga  pala  bark. 
Cones  si  cortex ; Codaga  pala;  Cortex  Bela-aye ; Cor- 
tex profiuvii.  The  bark  of  the  Nerium ; — foliis  ova- 
tis,  acuminatis , petiolatis,  of  Linnaeus.  It  grows  on 
the  coast  of  Malabar.  It  is  of  a dark  black  colour  ex- 
ternally, and  generally  covered  with  a white  moss,  or 
scurf.  It  is  very  little  known  in  the  shops ; has  an 
austere,  bitter  taste  ; and  is  recommended  in  diarrhoeas, 
dysenteries,  <fcc.  as  an  adstringent. 

Nerium  tinctorium.  This  tree  grows  in  Hindos- 
tan,  and,  according  to  Dr.  Roxburg,  afiords  indigo. 

Ne'roli  oleum.  Essential  oil  of  orange  flowers. 
See  Citrus  aurantinm. 

Nerva'lli  ossa.  (From  nervus,  a nerve.)  The 
bones  through  which  the  nerves  pass. 

NERVE.  ( J\Tervus , i.  m.  from  vevpov.) 

A.  In  anatomy.  Formerly  it  meant  a sinew. 
This  accounts  for  the  opposite  meanings  of  the  word 
nervous , which  sometimes  means  strong,  sinewy,  and 
sometimes  weak  and  irritable.  Nerves  are  long,  white, 
medullary  cords,  that  serve  for  sensation.  They  ori- 
ginate from  the  brain  and  spinal  marrow ; hence  they 
are  distinguished  into  cerebral  and  spinal  nerves,  and 
distributed  upon  the  organs  of  sense,  the  viscera,  ves- 
sels, muscles,  and  every  part  that  is  endowed  with 
sensibility.  The  cerebral  nerves  are  the  olfactory, 
optic,  motores  oculorum,  pathetici,  or  Irochleatores, 
trigemini,  or  divisi,  abducent,  auditory,  or  acoustic, 
par  vagum,  and  lingual.  Heister  has  drawn  up  the 
use  of  these  nerves  in  the  two  following  verses: 

Olfaciens,  cemens , oculosque  movens,  patiensque , 

Gustans,  abducens,  audiensque , vagansque,  lo- 
quensque. 

The  spinal  nerves  are  thirty  pairs,  and  are  divided 
into  eight  pair  of  cervical,  twelve  pair  of  dorsal,  five 
pair  of  lumbar,  and  five  of  sacral  nerves.  In  the 
course  of  the  nerves  there  are  a number  of  knots : 
these  are  called  ganglions ; they  are  commonly  of  an 
oblong  shape,  and  of  a grayish  colour,  somewhat  in- 
clining to  red,  which  is  perhaps  owing  to  their  being 
extremely  vascular.  Some  writers  have  considered 
these  little  ganglions  as  so  many  little  brains.  Lan- 
cisi  fancied  he  had  discovered  muscular  fibres  in  them; 
but  they  certainly  are  not  of  an  irritable  nature.  A 
late  writer  (Dr.  Johnson)  imagines  they  are  intended 
to  deprive  us  of  the  power  of  the  will  over  certain 
parts,  as  the  heart,  for  instance;  but  if  this  hypothesis 
were  well  founded,  they  should  be  met  with  only  in 
nerves  leading  to  involuntary  muscles;  whereas  it  is 
certain  that  the  voluntary  muscles  receive  nerves 
through  ganglions.  Dr.  Monroe,  from  observing  the 
accurate  intermixture  of  the  minute  nerves  which 
compose  them,  considers  them  as  new  sources  of  ner- 
vous energy.  The  nerves,  like  the  bjood- vessel^  in 
their  course  through  the  body,  communicate  with  each 
other,  and  each  of  these  communications  constitutes 
what  is  called  a plexus , from  whence  branches  are 
again  detached  to  different  parts  of  the  body.  The 
use  of  the  nerves  is  to  convey  impressions  to  the  brain 
from  all  parts  of  the  system,  and  the  principles  of  mo- 
tion and  sensibility  from  the  brain  to  every  part  of  the 
system.  The  manner  in  which  this  operation  is 
effected  is  not  yet  determined.  The  inquiry  has  been 
a constant  source  of  hypothesis  in  all  ages,  and  has 
produced  some  ingenious  ideas,  and  many  erroneous 
positions,  but  without  having  hitherto  afforded  much 
satisfactory  information.  Some  physiologists  have 
considered  a trunk  of  nerves  as  a solid  cord,  capable 
100 


of  being  divided  into  an  infinite  number  of  filaments, 
by  means  of  which  the  impressions  of  feeling  are  con- 
veyed to  the  common  sensorium.  Others  have  sup- 
posed each  fibril  to  be  a canal,  carrying  a volatile  fluid, 
which  they  term  the  nervous  fluid.  Those  who  con- 
tend for  their  being  solid  bodies,  are  of  opinion  that 
feeling  is  occasioned  by  vibration;  so  that,  for  in- 
stance, according  to  this  hypothesis,  by  pricking  the 
finger,  a vibration  would  be  occasioned  in  the  nerve 
distributed  through  its  substance ; and  the  effects  of 
this  vibration,  when  extended  to  the  sensorium,  would 
be  an  excital  of  pain ; but  the  inelasticity,  the  soft- 
ness, the  connexion,  and  the  situation  of  the  nerves, 
are  so  many  proofs  that  vibration  has  no  share  in  the 
cause  of  feeling. 

Ji  Table  of  the  Nerves. 

Cerebral  Nerves. 

1.  The  first  pair , called  olfactory. 

2..  The  second  pair , or  optic  nerves. 

3.  The  third  pair , or  oculorum  motores. 

4.  The  fourth  pair , or  pathetici. 

5.  The  fifth  pair,  or  trigemini , which  gives  off, 

a.  The  ophthalmic,  or  orbital  nerve,  which  sends, 

1.  A branch  to  unite  with  one  from  the  sixth 
pair,  and  form  the  great  intercostal  nerve. 

2.  The  frontal  nerve. 

3.  The  lachrymal. 

4.  The  nasal. 

b.  The  superior  maxillary,  which  divides  into-, 

1.  The  spheno-palatine  nerve. 

2.  Th e posterior  alveolar. 

3.  The  infra  orbital. 

c.  The  inferior  maxillary  nerve,  from  which  arise, 

1.  The  internal  lingual. 

2.  The  inferior  maxillary , properly  so  called. 

6.  The  sixth  pair,  or  abducentcs , which  send  off, 

1.  A branch  to  unite  with  one  from  the  fifth,  and 
form  the  great  intercostal. 

7.  The  seventh  pair,  or  auditory  nerves  : these 
arise  by  two  separate  beginnings,  viz. 

The  portio  dura , a nerve  going  to  tire  face. 

The  pbrtio  mollis , which  is  distributed  on  the 
ear. 

The  portio  dura,  or  facial  nerve,  gives  off  the 
chorda  tympani , and  then  proceeds  to  the  face. 

8.  The  eighth  pair,  or  par  vagum,  arise  from  the 
medulla  oblongata,  and  join  with  the  accessory  of 
Willis.  The  par  vagum  gives  off, 

1.  The  right  and  left  recurrent  nerve. 

2.  Several  branches  in  the  chest,  to  form  the  car- 
diac plexus. 

3.  Several  branches  to  form  the  pulmonic  plexus. 

4.  Several  branches  to  form  the  oesophageal 
plexus. 

5.  It  then  forms  in  tire  abdomen  the  stomachic 
plexus. 

6.  The  hepatic  plexus. 

7.  The  splenic  plexus. 

8 The  renal  plexus,  receiving  several  branches 
from  the  great  intercostal,  which  assists  in 
their  formation. 

9.  The  ninth  pair,  or  lingual  nerves , which  go- 
from  the  medulla  oblongata  to  the  tongue. 

Spinal  Nerves. 

Those  nerves  are  called  spinal,  which  pass'  out 
through  the  lateral  or  intervertebral  foramina  of  the 
spine. 

They  are  divided  into  cervical,  dorsal , lumbar , and 
sacral  nerves. 

Cervical  Nerves. 

The.  cervical  nerves  are  eight  pairs. 

The  first  are  called  the  occipital : they  arise  from- 
the  beginning  of  the  spinal  marrow,  pass  out  between- 
the  margin  of  the  occipital  foramen  and  atlas,  form  a 
ganglion  on  its  transverse  process,  and  are  disuibuted 
about  the  occiput  and  neck. 

The  second  pair  of  cervical  nerves  send  a branch  to- 
the  accessory  lierve  of  Willis,  and  proceed  to  the  par 
rotid  gland  and  external  ear. 

The  third  cervical  pair  supply  the  integuments  of 
the  scapula,  the  cucullaris,  and  triangularis  muscles, 
and  send  a branch  to  form,  with  others,  the  diaphrag- 
matic nerve. 

The  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth  pair, 
all  converge  to  form  the  brachial  plexus , from  which 
arise  the  six  following 


NER 


Nerves  of  the  upper  Extremities. 

' 1.  The  axillary  nerve,  which  sometimes  arises  from 
the  radial  nerve.  It  runs  backwards  and  outwards 
around  the  neck  of  the  humerus,  and  ramifies  in  the 
muscles  of  the  scapula. 

2.  The  external  cutaneal , which  perforates  the  ca- 
raco-brachialis  muscle,  to  the  bend  of  the  arm,  where 
it  accompanies  the  median  vein  as  far  as  the  thumb, 
and  is  lost  in  its  integuments. 

3.  The  internal  cutaneal , which  descends  on  the 
inside  of  the  arm,  where  it  bifurcates.  From  the  bend 
of  the  arm  the  anterior  branch  accompanies  the  ba- 
silic vein,  to  be  inserted  into  the  skin  of  the  palm  of 
the  hand ; the  posterior  branch  runs  down  the  internal 
part  of  the  forearm,  to  vanish  in  the  skin  of  the  little 
finger. 

4.  The  median  nerve,  which  accompanies  the  bra- 
chial artery  to  the  cubit,  then  passes  between  the  bra- 
chialis  interims,  pronator  rotundus,  and  the  perforalus 
and  perforans,  under  the  ligament  of  the  wrist  to  the 
palm  of  the  hand,  where  it  sends  off  branches  in  every 
direction  to  the  muscles  of  the  hand,  and  then  supplies 
the  digital  nerves,  which  go  to  the  extremities  of  the 
thumb,  fore,  and  middle  fingers. 

5.  The  ulnar  nerve,  which  descends  between  the 
brachial  artery  and  basilic  vein,  between  the  internal 
condyle  of  the  humerus,  and  the  olecranon,  and  di- 
vides in  the  forearm  into  an  internal  and  external 
branch.  The  former  passes  over  the  ligament  of  the 
wrist  and  sesamoid  bone,  to  the  hand,  where  it  divides 
into  three  branches,  two  of  which  go  to  the  ring  and 
little  finger,  and  the  third  forms  an  arch  towards  the 
thumb,  in  the  palm  of  the  hand,  and  is  lost  in  the  con- 
tiguous muscles.  The  latter  passes  over  the  tendon 
of  the  extensor  carpi  ulnaris  and  back  of  the  hand,  to 
supply  also  the  two  last  fingers. 

6.  The  radial  nerve  which  sometimes  gives  off  the 
axillary  nerve.  It  passes  backwards,  about  the  os 
humeri,  descends  on  the  outside  of  the  arm,  between 
the  brachialis  externus  and  internus  muscles  to  the 
cubit:  then  proceeds  between  the  supinator  longus 
and  brevis,  to  the  superior  extremity  of  the  radius, 
giving  otf  various  branches  to  adjacent  muscles.  At 
this  place  it  divides  into  two  branches ; one  goes  along 
the  radius,  between  the  supinator  longus  and  radialis 
internus  to  the  back  of  the  hand,  and  terminates  in  the 
ntei  osseous  muscles,  the  thumb  and  first  three  fingers ; 
the  other  passes  between  the  supinator  brevis  and  head 
of  the  radius,  and  is  lost  in  the  muscles  of  the  fore- arm. 

Dorsal  Nerves. 

The  Dorsal  nerves  are  twelve  pairs  in  number. 
The  first  pair  gives  off  a branch  to  the  brachial  plexus. 
All  the  dorsal  nerves  are  distributed  to  the  muscles  of 
the  back,  intercostals,  serrati,  pectoral,  abdominal  mus- 
cles, and  diaphragm.  The  five  inferior  pairs  go  to  the 
cartilages  of  the  ribs,  and  are  called  costal. 

Lumbar  nerves. 

The  five  pairs  of  Lumbar  nerves  are  bestowed  about 
the  loins  and  muscles,  skin  of  the  abdomen  and  loins, 
scrotum,  ovaria,  and  diaphragm.  The  second,  third, 
and  fifth  pairs  unite  and  form  the  obturator  nerve , 
which  descends  over  the  psoas  muscle  into  the  pelvis, 
and  passes  through  the  foramen  thyroideum  to  the  ob- 
turator muscle,  triceps,  pectineus,  &c. 

The  third  and  fourth,  with  some  branches  of  the 
second  pair,  form  the  crural  nerve , which  passes  under 
Poupart’s  ligament  with  the  femoral  artery,  sends  off 
branches  to  the  adjacent  parts,  and  descends  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  sartorius  muscle  to  the  internal  condyle 
of  the  femur,  from  whence  it  accompanies  the  saphena 
vein  to  the  internal  ankle,  to  be  lost  in  the  skin  of  the 
great  toe. 

The  fifth  pair  is  joined  to  the  first  pair  of  the  sacral 
nerves. 

Sacral  Nerves. 

There  are  five  pairs  of  sacral  nerves,  ail  of  which 
arise  from  the  cauda  equina , or  termination  of  the 
medulla  spinalis,  so  called  from  the  nerves  resembling 
the  tail  of  a horse.  The  first  four  pairs  give  off  branches* 
to  the  pelvic  viscera,  and  are  afterward  united  to  the 
last  lumbar,  to  form  a larg e plexus,  which  gives  off 

The  ischiatic  nerve , the  largest  in  the  body.  The 
ischiatic  nerve,  immediately  at  its  origin,  sends  off 
branches  to  tire  bladder,  rectum,  and  parts  of  genera- 
tion ; proceeds  from  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis  through  the 
ischiatic  notch,  between  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium 
and  great  trochanter,  to  the  ham,  where  it  is  called  the 


NER 

popliteal  nerve.  In  the  ham  it  divides  into  two 
branches. 

1.  The  peroneal,  which  descends  on  the  fibula,  and 
distributes  many  branches  to  the  muscles  of  the  leg  and 
*back  of  the  foot. 

2.  The  tibial,  which  penetrates  the  gastrocnemii 
muscles  to  the  internal  ankle,  passes  through  a notch 
i n the  os  calcis  to  the  sole  of  the  foot,  where  it  divides 
intp  an  internal  and  external  plantar  nerve,  which 
s upply  the  muscles  and  aponeurosis  of  the  foot  and  the 
toes. 

Physiology  of  the  Nervous  system. 

The  nervous  system,  as  the  organ  of  sense  and  mo- 
tion, is  connected  with  so  many  functionsof  the  animal 
economy,  that  the  study  of  it  must  be  of  the  utmost 
importance,  and  a fundamental  part  of  the  study  of  the 
whole  economy.  The  nervous  system  consists  of  the 
medullary  substance  of  the  brain,  cerebellum,  medulla 
•oblongata,  and  spinalis ; and  of  the  same  substance  con- 
tinued into  the  nerves  by  which  it  is  distributed  to  many 
different  parts  of  the  body.  The  whole  of  this  system 
seems  to  be  properly  distinguished  into  these  four  parts. 

1.  The  medullary  substance  contained  in  the  cranium 
and  vertebral  cavity ; the  whole  of  which  seems  to 
consist  of  distinct  fibres,  but  without  the  smaller  fibres 
being  separated  from  each  other  by  any  evident  enve- 
loping membranes. 

2.  Connected  with  one  part  or  other  of  this  substance 
are,  the  nerves,  in  which  the  same  medullary  substance 
is  continued;  but  here  more  evidently  divided  into 
fibres,  each  of  which  is  separated  from  the  others  by 
an  enveloping  membrane,  derived  from  the  pia  mater. 

3.  Parts  of  the  extremities  of  certain  nerves,  in 
which  the  medullary  substance  is  divested  of  the  en- 
veloping membranes  from  the  pia  mater,  and  so  situ- 
ated as  to  be  exposed  to  the  action  of  certain  external 
bodies,  and  perhaps  so  framed  as  to  be  affected  by  the 
action  of  certain  bodies  only ; these  are  named  the 
sentient  extremities  of  the  nerves. 

4.  Certain  extremities  of  the  nerves,  so  framed  as  to  be 
capable  of  a peculiar  contractility ; and,  in  consequence 
of  their  situations  and  attachments  to  be,  by  their  con- 
traction, capable  of  moving  most  of  the  solid  and  fluid 
parts  of  the  body.  These  are  named  the  moving  ex- 
tremities of  the  nerves. 

These  several  parts  of  the  nervous  system  are  every 
where  the  same  continuous  medullary  substance,  which 
is  supposed  to  be  the  vital  solid  of  animals,  so  constituted 
in  living  animals,  and  in  living  systems  only,  as  to  admit 
of  motions  being  readily  propagated  from  any  one 
part  to  every  other  part  of  the  nervous  system,  so  long 
as  the  continuity  and  naturally  living  state  of  the  me- 
dullary substance  remains.  In  the  living  man  there  is 
an  immaterial  thinking  substance,  or  mind,  constantly 
present,  and  every  phenomenon  of  thinking  is  to  be 
considered  as  an  affection  or  faculty  of  the  mind  alone. 
But  this  immaterial  and  thinking  part  of  man  is  so  con- 
nected with  the  material  and  corporeal  part  of  him, 
and  particularly  with  the  nervous  system,  that  motions 
excited  in  this  give  occasion  to  thought,  and  thought, 
however  occasioned,  gives  occasion  to  new  motions  in 
the  nervous  system.  This  mutual  communication,  or 
influence,  is  assumed  with  confidence  as  a fact : but  the 
mode  of  it  we  do  not  understand,  nor  pretend  to  ex- 
plain ; and  therefore  are  not  bound  to  obviate  the  dif- 
ficulties that  attend  any  of  the  suppositions  which  have 
been  made  concerning  it.  The  phenomena  of  the  ner- 
vous system  appear  commonly  in  the  following  order : 
The  impulse  of  external  bodies  acts  upon  the  sentient 
extremities  of  the  nerves;  and  this  gives  occasion  to 
perception  or  thought,  which,  as  first  arising  in  the 
mind,  is  termed  sensation.  This  sensation,  according 
to  its  various  modifications,  gives  occasion  to  volition , 
or  the  willing  of  certain  ends  to  be  obtained  by  the 
motion  of  certain  parts  of  the  body ; and  this  volition 
gives  occasion  to  the  contraction  of  muscular  fibres,  by 
which  the  motion  of  the  part  requiredis  produced.  As 
the  impulse  of  bodies  on  the  sentient  extremities  of  a 
nerve  does  not  occasion  any  sensation,  unless  the  nerve 
between  the  sentient  extremity  and  the  brain  be  free; 
and  as,  in  like  manner,  violition  does  not  produce  any 
contraction  of  muscles,  unless  the  nerve  between  the 
brain  and  muscle  be  also  free;  it  is  concluded  from 
both  these  facte  that  sensation  and  volition,  so  far  as 
they  are  connected  with  corporeal  motions,  are  func 
tions  of  the  brain  alone ; and  it  is  presumed  that  sensa- 
tion arises  only  in  consequence  of  external  impulse 


NER 


NIC 


producing  motion  in  the  sentient  extremities  of  thei 
nerves,  and  of  that  motion  being  thence  propagated/ 
along  the  nerves  of  the  brain  ; and,  in  like  manner,  that 
the  will  operating  in  the  brain  only,  by  a motion  begun 
there,  and  propagated  along  the  nerves,  produces  the 
contraction  of  muscles.  From  what  is  now  said,  we 
perceive  more  distinctly  the  different  functions  of  the 
several  parts  of  the  nervous  system.  1.  The  sentient 
extremities  seem  to  be  particularly  fitted  to  receive  the 
impressions  of  external  bodies ; and  according  to  tlife 
difference  of  these  impressions,  and  of  the  condition  Of 
the  sentient  extremity  itself,  to  propagate  along  the 
nerves  motions  of  a determined  kind,  which  commu- 
nicated to  the  brain,  give  occasion  to  sensation.  2* 
The  brain  seems  to  be  a part  fitted  for,  and  susceptible 
of,  those  motions  with  which  sensation,-  and  the  whole 
consequent  operations  of  thought,  are  connected : and 
thereby  is  fitted  to  form  a communication  between  the 
motions  excited  in  the  sentient,  and  those  in  conse-i 
q uence  arising  in  the  moving  extremities  of  the  nerves, 
which  are  often  remote  and  distant  from  each  other. 
3.  The  moving  extremities  are  so  framed  as  to  be  ca- 
pable of  contraction,  and  of  having  this  contraction 
eXcited  by  motion  propagated  from  the  brain,  and  com- 
municated to  the  contractile  fibre.  4.  The  nerves, 
more  strictly  so  called,  are  to  be  considered  as  a collec- 
tion of  medullary  fibres,  each  enveloped  in  its  proper 
membrane,  and  thereby  so  separated  from  every  other, 
as  hardly  to  admit  of  any  communication  of  motion 
from  any  one  to  the  others,  and  to  admit  only  of  motion 
along  the  continuous  medullary  substance  of  the  same 
fibre,  from  its  origin  to  the  extremities,  or  contrary  wise. 
From  this  view  of  the  parts  of  the  nervous  system,  of 
their  several  functions  and  communication  with  each 
other,  it  appears  that  the  beginning  of  motion  in  the 
animal  economy  is  generally  connected  with  sensation : 
and  that  the  ultimate  effects  of  such  motion  are  chiefly 
actions  depending  immediately  upon  the  contraction 
of  moving  fibres,  between  which  and  the  sentient  ex- 
tremities, the  communication  is  by  means  of  the  brain. 

B.  In  botany  : the  term  nerve  is  applied  to  a cluster 
of  vessels  that  runs  like  a rib  or  chord  on  certain  leaves ; 
as  that  of  the  Laurus  cinnamomum,  and  Arctium,  lappa. 

Ne'rvea  spongiosa.  The  cavernous  part  of  the 
penis. 

NERVINE.  (Nervinus  ; from  nervus,  a nerve.) 
Neurotic.  That  which  relieves  disorders  of  the  nerves. 
All  the  antispasmodics,  and  the  various  preparations 
of  bark  and  iron 

Nervo  rum  resolutio.  Apoplexy  and  palsy  have 
been  so  considered. 

NERVOSUS.  Nervous.  1.  Applied,  in  medicine , 
to  fevers  and  affections  of  the  nervous  system 

2.  In  anatomy : to  the  structure  of  parts  being  com- 
posed of,  or  resembling  a nerve. 

3.  In  botany  : to  leaves  which  have  nervelike  cords. 

Nervosum  os.  The  occipital  bone. 

NERVOUS.  See  Nervosus. 

J\Tervous  consumption.  See  Atrophia. 

Nervous  diseases.  See  Neuroses. 

Nervous  fever.  See  Febris  nervosa. 

Nervous  headache.  See  Cephalalgia. 

Nervous  fluid.  Nervous  principle.  The  vascu- 
larity of  the  cortical  part  of  the  brain,  and  of  the 
nerves  themselves,  their  softness,  pulpiness,  and 
’ natural  humid  appearance,  give  reason  to  believe  that 
between  the  medullary  particles  of  which  they  are 
principally  composed,  a fine  fluid  is  constantly  secreted 
which  may  be  fitted  to  receive  and  transmit,  even 
more  readily  than  other  fluids  do,  all  impressions  which 
are  made  on  it.  It  appears  to  exhale  from  the  extre- 
mities of  the  nerves.  The  lassitude  and  debility  of 
muscles  from  too  great  exercise,  and  the  dulness  of  the 
sensorial  organs  from  excessive  use,  would  seem  to 
prove  this.  It  has  no  smell  nor  taste ; for  the  cerebrine 
medulla  is  insipid  and  inodorous.  Nor  has  it  any 
colour , for  the  cerebrum  and  nerves  are  white.  It  is  of 
so  subtile  a consistence , as  never  to  have  been  detected. 
Its  mobility  is  stupendous , for  in  less  than  a moment, 
with  the  consent  of  the  mind,  it  is  conveyed  from  the 
cerebrum  to  the  muscles,  like  the  electric  matter.  Whe- 
ther the  nervous  fluid  be  carried  from  the  organ  of 
sense  in  the  sensorial  nerves  to  the  cerebrum,  and  from 
thence  in  the  motory  nerves  to  the  muscles,  cannot  be 
positively  affirmed.  The  constituent  principles  of 
this  liquid  are  perfectly  unknown,  as  they  cannot  be 
tendered  visible  by  art,  or  proved  by  experiment. 

102 


Upon  making  a ligature  upon  a nerve,  the  motion  of 
the  fluid  is  interrupted,  which  proves  that  something 
corporeal  flows  through  it.  It  is  therefore  a weak  ar- 
gument to  deny  its  existence  because  we  cannot  see  it ; 
for  who  has  seen  the  matter  of  heat,  oxygen,  azote,  and 
other  elementary  bodies,  the  existence  of  which,  no 
physician  in  the  present  day  doubts  1 The  electric 
matter , whose  action  on  the  nerves  is  very  great,  does 
not  appear  to  constitute  the  nervous  fluid  ; for  nerves 
exhibit  no  signs  of  spontaneous  electricity;  nor  can 
it  be  the  magnetic  matter , as  the  experiment  of  Gavian 
with  the  magnet  demonstrates : nor  is  it  oxygen , nor 
hydrogen , nor  azote ; for  the  first  very  much  irritates 
the  nerves,  and  the  other  two  suspend  their  action. 
The  nervous  fluid,  therefore,  is  an  element  sui  generis, 
which  exists  and  is  produced  in  the  nerves  only ; hence, 
like  other  elements,  it  is  only  to  be  known  by  its  ef- 
fects. The  pulpous  softness  of  some  nerves,  and  their 
lax  situation,  does  not  allow  them  and  the  brain  to  act 
on  the  body  and  soul  only  by  oscillation.  Lastly,  a 
tense  chord,  although  tied,  oscillates.  The  use  of  the 
nervous  fluid  is,  1.  It  appears  to  be  an  intermediate  sub- 
stance between  the  body  and  the  soul,  by  means  of 
which  the  latter  thinks,  perceives,  and  moves  the  mus- 
cles subservient  to  the  will.  Hence,  the  body  acta 
upon  the  soul,  and  the  soul  upon  the  body.  2.  It  ap 
pears  to  differ  from  the  vital  principle;  for  parts  live 
and  are  irritable  which  want  nerves,  as  bones,  tendons 
plants,  and  insects. 

Nei-vous  principle.  See  Nervous  fluid. 

Ne'stis.  (Fromv»7,  neg.  and  eodio),  to  eat;  so  called 
because  it  is  generally  found  empty.)  The  jejunum. 

NETTLE.  See  Urtica. 

Nettle , dead.  See  Lamium  album 

Nettle-rash.  See  Urticaria. 

NEURALGIA.  (From  vevpov,  a nerve,  and  aXyo?, 
pain.)  1.  A pain  in  a nerve. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases,  in  Good’s  No- 
sology. Class,  Neurotica:  Order,  Asthelica ; nerve- 
ache.  It  has  three  species,  Neuralgia  faciei pedis , 


Neurochondro'des.  (From  vevpov,  a sinew,  ^ov^poj, 
a cartilage,  and  eiSos,  resemblance.)  A hard  substance 
betweeu  a sinew  and  a cartilage. 

NEUROLOGY.  (Neurologia ; from  vevpov,  a nerve, 
and  Xoyos , a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  nerves. 

Neurome'tores.  (From  vevpov,  a nerve,  and  prj- 
rpa,  a matrix.)  The  psoas  muscles  are  so  called  by 
Fallopius,  as  being  the  repository  of  many  srrfall  nerves. 

NEURO'SES.  (The  plural  of  neurosis;  from  vev- 
pov, a nerve.)  Nervous  diseases.  The  second  class 
of  Cullen’s  Nosology  is  so  called ; it  comprehends 
affections  of  sense  and  motion  disturbed;  without 
either  idiopathic  pyrexia,  or  topical  diseases. 

NEUROTICA.  (From  vevpov,  a nerve.)  The  name 
of  a class  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases  of 
the  nervous  system.  It  compiehends  four  orders,  viz. 
Phrenica;  JEslhetica;  Cinetica;  Systatica. 

Neuro'tica.  (From  vevoov , a nerve.)  Nervous 
medicines. 

NEURO'TOMY.  ( Neurotomia ; from  vevpov,  a 
nerve,  and  repvuj,  to  cut.1  1.  A dissection  of  the 
nerves. 

2.  A puncture  pf  a nerve. 

NEUTRAL.  A term  applied  to  saline  compounds 
of  an  acid  and  an  alkali,  which  are  so  called,  because 
they  do  not  possess  the  characters  of  acid  or  alkaline 
salts;  such  are  Epsom  salts,  nitre,  and  all  the  com 
pounds  of  the  alkalies  with  the  acids. 

NEUTRALIZATION.  When  acid  and  alkaline 
matter  are  combined  in  such  proportions,  that  the  com- 
pound does  not  change  the  colour  of  litmus  or  violets, 
they  are  said  to  be  neutralized. 

Ne'xus.  (From  necto , to  wind.)  A complication 
of  substances  in  one  part,  as  the  membrane  which  in- 
volves the  foetus. 

NICHOLS,  Frank,  was  born  in  London,  where  his 
father  was  a barrister,  in  1699.  After  passing  through 
the  usual  academical  exercises  at  Oxford  with  great 
assiduity,  he  chose  medicine  for  his  profession  ; and 
pursued  a course  of  dissections  with  so  much  diligence 
and  perseverance,  as  to  render  himself  highly  skilful  in 
this  branch  of  his  art.  Hence  he  was  chosen  reader  of 
anatomy  in  the  university,  where  he  used  his  utmost 
endeavours  to  introduce  a zeal  for  this  pursuit,  and 
obtained  a high  reputation.  At  the  close  of  his  course 
he  made  a short  trial  of  practice  in  Cornwall,  and  sub 


NIC 


NIG 


sequent.y  paid  a visit  to  the  principal  schools  of  France 
and  Italy.  On  his  return  he  resumed  his  anatomical 
and  physiological  lectures  in  London,  which  were  fre- 
quented, not  only  by  students  from  the  universities, 
but  also  by  many  surgeons,  apothecaries,  and  others. 
In  1728  lie  was  chosen  a fellow  of  the  Royal  Society, 
to  which  he  communicated  several  papers ; and  shortly 
after  he  received  his  doctor’s  degree  at  Oxford,  and 
became  a fellow  of  the  College  of  Physicians.  In  1734, 
he  was  appointed  to  read  the  Gulstonian  lectures,  and 
chose  the  Heart  and  Circulation,  for  his  subjects.  In 
1743,  lie  married  one  of  the  daughters  of  the  celebrated 
Dr.  Mead.  About  five  years  after  he  was  appointed 
lecturer  on  surgery  to  the  college,  and  began  his  course 
with  a learned  and  elegant  dissertation  on  the  “ Anima 
Medica,”  which  was  afterward  published.  On  the 
death  of  Sir  Hans  Sloane  in  1753,  Dr.  Nichols  was  ap- 
pointed his  successor  as  one  of  the  King’s  physicians ; 
which  oliice  he  held  till  the  death  of  liis  Majesty,  seven 
years  after.  To  a second  edition  of  the  treatise,  “ De 
Anima  Medica,”  in  1772,  he  added  a dissertation,  “ De 
Motu  Cordis  et  Sanguinis  in  Ilomine  natoet  non  nato.” 
Weary  at  length  with  his  profession,  and  wishing  to 
superintend  the  education  of  his  son  at  Oxford,  he  re- 
moved to  that  city:  and  when  the  study  of  the  law 
recalled. his  son  to  London,  the  Doctor  took  a fiouse  at 
Epsom,  where  he  passed  the  remainder  of  his  life  in 
literary  retirement.  He  died  in  1778. 

JYic/ied  leaf.  See  Emarginatus. 

NICKEL.  A metal  discovered  by  Cronstedt  in  1751. 
though  the  substance  from  which  he  extracted  it  was 
known  in  the  year  1694.  Nickel  is  found  in  nature 
generally  in  the  metallic  state,  more  rarely  in  that  of 
an  oxide.  Its  ores  have  a coppery-red  colour,  generally 
covered  more  or  less  with  a greenish-gray  efflorescence. 
The  most  abundant  ore  is  that  termed  sulphuret  of 
nickel , or  kupfernickel,  which  is  a compound  of  nickel, 
arsenic,  sulphuret  of  iron,  and  sometimes  cobalt  and 
copper.  This  ore  occurs  either  massive,  or  dissemi- 
nated, but  never  crystallized  ; it  is  of  a copper  colour, 
sometimes  yellowish,  white,  or  gray.  It  exists  also 
combined  with  oxygen,  and  a little  carbonic  acid,  in 
what  is  called  native  oxide  of  nickel  ( nickel  ochre ) ; it 
then  has  an  earthy  appearance,  and  is  very  friable ; it 
is  found  coating  kupfernickel , and  seems  to  originate 
from  the  decomposition  of  this  ore.  It  is  found  con- 
taminated with  iron  in  the  mineral  substance  called 
martial  nickel;  this  native  combination,  when  fresh 
broken,  has  a lamellated  texture ; when  exposed  to  the 
air,  it  soon  turns  black,  and  sometimes  exhibits  thin 
rhomboidal  plates  placed  irregulariy  over  each  other. 
It  is  also  found  united  to  arsenic,  cobalt,  and  alumine 
in  the  ore,  called  arseniatc  of  nickel. 

}-  Nickel  is  a metal  of  great  hardness,  of  a uniform 
texture,  and  of  a colour  between  silver  and  tin  ; very 
difficult  to  be  purified,  and  magnetical.  It  even  ac- 
quires polarity  by  the  touch.  It  is  malleable,  both  cold 
and  redhot;  and  is  scarcely  more  fusible  than  manga- 
nese. Its  oxides,  when  pure,  are  reducible  by  a suf- 
ficient heat  without  combustible  matter ; and  it  is  little 
more  tarnished  by  heating  in  contact  with  air,  than 
platina,  gold,  and  silver.  Its  specific  gravity,  when 
cast,  is  8.279  ; when  forged,  8.666. 

Nickel  is  commonly  obtained  from  its  sulphuret,  the 
kupfernickel  of  the  Germans,  in  which  it  is  generally 
mixed  also  with  arsenic,  iron,  and  cobalt.  This  is 
first  roasted,  to  drive  off  the  sulphur  and  arsenic,  then 
mixed  with  two  parts  of  black  flux,  put  into  a crucible, 
covered  with  muriate  of  soda,  and  heated  in  a forge 
furnace.  The  metal  thus  obtained,  which  is  still  very 
impure,  must  be  dissolved  in  dilute  nitric  acid,  and 
then  evaporated  to  dryness ; and  after  this  process  has 
been  repeated  three  o>r  four  times,  the  residuum  must 
be  dissolved  in  a solution  of  ammonia,  perfectly  free 
from  carbonic  acid.  Being  again  evaporated  to  dry- 
ness, it  is  now  to  be  well  mixed  with  two  or  three 
parts  of  black  flux,  and  exposed  to  a violent  heat  in  a 
crucible  for  half  an  hour  or  more. 

There  are  two  oxides  of  nickel ; the  dark  ash-gray, 
and  the  black.  If  potassabe  added  to  the  solution  of 
the  nitrate  or  sulphate,  and  the  precipitate  dried,  we 
obtain  the  protoxide.  The  peroxide  was  formed  by 
Thenard,  by  passing  chlorine  through  the  protoxide 
diffused  in  water.  A black  insoluble  peroxide  remains 
at  the  bottom. 

Little  is  known  of  the  chloride,  iodide  sulphuret,  or 
phosphuret  of  this  metal. 


The  salts  of  nickel  possess  the  following  general 
characters.  They  have  usually  a green  colour,  and 
yield  a white  precipitate  with  ferroprussiateof  potassa. 
Ammonia  dissolves  the  okide  of  nickel.  Sulphuretted 
hydrogen  and  infusion  of  galls  occasion  no  precipitate. 
The  hydrosulphuret  of  potassa  throws  down  a black 
precipitate.  Their  composition  has  been  very  imper- 
fectly ascertained. 

Nico'phorus.  (From  viuy,  victory,  and  0epw,  to 
bear : so  called  because  victors  were  crowned  with  it.) 
A kind  of  ivy. 

NICGTIA'NA.  (From  Nicott,  who  first  brought  it 
into  Europe.)  Tobacco. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  former  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  tobacco. 
See  Nicotiana  tabacum. 

Nicotiana  americana.  American  or  Virginian 
tobacco.  See  Nicotiana  tabacum. 

Nicotiana  minor.  See  Nicotiana  rustica. 

Nicotiana  rustica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
English  tobacco.  Nicotiana  minor;  Priapeia;  Hy- 
oscyamus  Ivteus.  This  plant  is  much  weaker  than  the 
Virginian  tobacco,  the  leaves  are  chiefly  used  to  smoke 
vermin,  though  they  promise,  from  their  more  gentle 
operation,  to  be  a^afer  remedy  in  some  cases  than  the 
former. 

Nicotiana  tabacum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Virginian  tobacco-plant.  Petum,  by  the  Indians ; Ta 
bacum;  Hyoscyamus  peruvianus ; Picelt.  Nicotiana 
—foliis  lanceolato-ovatis  sessilibus  decurrentibus  flo- 
rentibus  acutis , of  Linnams,  is  the  plant  employed 
medicinally.  It  is  a very  active  narcotic  and  sternu- 
tatory. A decoction  of  the  leaves  is  much  esteemed  in 
some  diseases  of  the  skin,  and  is  by  some  said  to  be 
a specific  against  the  itch.  The  fumes  and  the  decoc- 
tion are  employed  in  obstinate  constipations  of  the 
bowels,  and  very  frequently  with  success;  it  is  neces- 
sary, however,  to  caution  the  practitioner  against  an 
effect  mostly  produced  by  its  exhibition,  namely,  syn- 
cope, with  cold  sweats ; and,  in  some  instances,  death. 
Vauquelin  has  obtained  a peculiar  principle  from  this 
plant,  in  which  its  active  properties  reside.  Sec  Ni- 
cotin. 

NICOTIN.  A peculiar  principle  obtained  by  Vau- 
quelin, from  tobacco.  It  is  colourless,  and  has  the  pe- 
culiar taste  and  smell  of  the  plant.  It  dissolves  both 
in  water  and  alkohol:  it  is  volatile  and  poisonous. 

£“  Evaporate  the  expressed  juice  to  one-fourth  its 
bulk;  and,  when  cold,  strain  it  through  fine  linen; 
evaporate  nearly  to  dryness ; digest  the  residue  in  al- 
kohol, filter  and  evaporate  to  dryness;  dissolve  this 
again  in  alkohol,  and  again  reduce  it  to  a dry  state. 
Dissolve  the  residue  in  water,  saturate  the  acid  which 
it  contains  with  weak  solution  of  potassa,  introduce 
the  whole  into  a retort,  and  distil  to  dryness,  redissolve, 
and  again  dissolve  three  or  four  times  successively. 
The  nicotin  will  thus  pass  into  the  receiver,  dissolved 
in  water,  from  which  solution  it  may  be  obtained  by 
very  gradual  evaporation.” — Webs.  Man.  of  Chcm.  A.l 

N1CTITATIO.  Twinkling,  or  winking  of  the 
eyes. 

NIDULANS.  (From  nidulor , to  place  in  a nest.) 
Nidulate  : applied  to  the  seeds  of  some  fruits,  which 
are  imbedded  on  their  surface ; as  those  of  the  straw- 
berry. 

NIGE'LLA.  ( Quasi  nigrella  ; from  niger,  black : 
so  named  from  its  black  seed.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order,  Pentagynia. 

2.  The  pharifiacopceial  name  of  the  plant  called 
devil-in-a-bush,  or  fennel-flower. 

Nigella  officinarum.  See  Jlgrostemma  githago. 

Nigella  sativa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  devil 
in-a-bush.  Fennel-flower.  Melanthium ; Jl Telasper- 
mum.  It  was  formerly  employed  medicinally  as  an 
expectorant  and  deobstruent,  but  is  now  fallen  into 
disuse. 

Nigella'strum.  (From  nigella , fennelflower.) 
See  Jigrostemma  githago. 

NIGER.  Black.  Applied  to  some  parts  and  dis- 
eases from  their  colour ; as  Pigmentum  nigrum ; 
morbus  niger. 

NIGHT.  Nox.  Many  diseases  and  plants  have 
this  for  their  trivial  name,  because  of  some  peculiar 
circumstance  connected  with  the  period ; as  night- 
mare nightshade,  &x 

103 


NIT 


NIT 


Night-blindness.  See  Nyctalopia. 

Nightmare.  See  Oneirodynia  gravans. 

NIGHTSHADE.  See  Solanum , Phytolacca , and 
Atropa. 

Nightshade , American.  See  Phytolacca  decandria. 

Nightshade,  deadly.  See  Atropa  belladonna. 

Nightshade,  Palestine.  See  Solanum  sanctum. 

Nightshade,  woody.  See  Solanum  dulcamara. 

NIGRINE.  An  ore  of  titanium. 

Nigri'ties.  (From  niger , blaek.)  A caries  is 
called  nigrities  ossium , a blackness  of  the  bone. 

Ni'hilum  album.  Nihil  album.  A name  formerly 
given  to  the  flowers,  or  oxide  of  zinc. 

Ni'nzi  radix.  See  Siam  ninsi. 

Ni'nzin.  See  Sium  ninsi. 

NIPPLE.  Papilla.  The  small  projecting  propor- 
tion in  the  middle  of  the  breasts  of  men  and  women. 
It  is  much  larger  in  the  latter,  and  has  several  open- 
ings in  it,  the  excretory  ducts  of  the  lacteal  glands. 

NIPPLE- WORT.  See  Laps  ana. 

NISUS  FORMATIVUS.  ( Nisus , us.  m.)  A cre- 
ative or  formative  efiort. 

NITIDUS.  Polished,  smooth,  shining:  applied  in 
botany  to  stems,  Sec. ; as  in  the  Chserophyllum  syl-  ' 
vfcstre.  See  Caulis. 

Nitras  ammoni®.  See  Ammoniee  nitras. 

Nitras  argenti.  See  Argenti  nitras. 

Nitras  potass®.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Nitras  potass.®  fusus.  Sal  prunella;  Nitrum 
tabulatum.  This  salt,  besides  the  nitric  acid  and  po- 
tassa,  contains  a little  sulphuric  acid.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Nitras  sod®.  Alkali  miner  ale  nitratum ; Nitrum 
cubicum.  Its  virtues  are  similar  to  those  of  nitrate  of 
potassa,  for  which  it  may  be  safely  substituted. 

NITRATE.  ( Nitras , atis , f. ; from  nitrum,  nitre.) 
A salt  formed  by  the  union  of  the  nitric  acid,  with 
salifiable  bases ; as  the  nitrate  of  potassa,  soda,  silver, 
&c. 

Nitrate  of  potassa.  See  Nitric  acid. 

Nitrate  of  silver.  See  Argenti  nitras. 

NITRE.  N(7pov.  Nitrum;  Potasses  nitras ; Salt- 
petre ; Alaurat ; Algali ; Atac ; Baurack ; Acusto ; 
Halinitrum.  The  common  name  for  saltpetre  or  the 
nitrate  of  potassa.  A perfect  neutral  salt,  formed  by 
the  union  of  the  nitric  acid  with  the  vegetable  alkali, 
thence  called  nitrate  of  potassa.  Its  taste  is  cooling, 
and  it  does  not  alter  the  colour  of  the  syrup  of  violets. 
Nitre  exists  in  large  quantities  in  the  earth,  and  is  con- 
tinually formed  in  inhabited  places;  it  is  found  in  great 
quantities  upon  walls  which  are  sheltered  from  the 
rain.  It  is  of  great  use  in  the  arts ; it  is  the  principal 
ingredient  in  gunpowder;  and,  burned  with  different 
proportions  of  tartar,  forms  the  substances  called 
fluxes.  It  is  of  considerable  importance  in  medicine, 
as  a febrifuge,  diuretic,  and  antiphlogistic  remedy, 
in  doses  of  from  five  to  twenty  grains.  See  Nitric 
acid. 

NITRIC  ACID.  Acidum  nitricum.  “The  two 
principal  constituent  parts  of  our  atmosphere,  when 
in  certain  proportions,  are  capable,  under  particular 
circumstances,  of  combining  chemically  into  one  of 
the  most  powerful  acids,  the  nitric.  If  these  gases 
be  mixed  in  a proper  proportion  in  a glass  tube  about 
a line  in  diameter,  over  mercury,  and  a series  of  elec- 
tric shocks  be  passed  through  them  for  some  hours, 
they  will  form  nitric  acid ; or,  if  a solution  of  potassa 
be  present  with  them,  nitrate  of  potassa  will  be  obtain- 
ed. The  constitution  of  this  acid  may  bo  further 
proved,  analytically,  by  driving  it  through  a red-hot 
porcelain  tube,  as  thus  it  will  be  decomposed  into  oxy- 
gen and  nitrogen  gases.  For  all  practical  purposes, 
however,  the  nitric  acid  is  obtained  from  nitrate  of 
potassa.  from  which  it  is  expelled  by  sulphuric  acid. 

Three  parts  of  pure  nitrate  of  potassa,  coarsely 
powdered,  are  to  be  put  into  a glass  retort,  with  two  of 
strong  sulphuric  acid.  This  must  be  cautiously  added, 
taking  care  to  avoid  the  fumes  that  arise.  Join  to  the 
retort”  a tubulated  receiver  of  large  capacity,  with  an 
adopter  interposed,  and  lute  the  junctures  with  glazier’s 
putty.  In  the  tubulure  fix  a glass  tube,  terminating  in 
another  large  receiver,  in  which  is  a small  quantity  of 
water ; and  if  you  wish  to  collect  the  gaseous  pro- 
ducts, let  a bent  glass  tube  from  this  receiver  commu- 
nicate with  a pneumatic  trough.  Apply  heat  to  the 
receiver  by  means  of  a sand  bath.  The  first  product 
that  passes  into  the  receiver  is  generally  red  and  fum- 
ing ; but  the  appearances  gradually  diminish,  till  the 


acid  comes  over  pale,  and  even  colourless,  if  the  mate 
rials  used  were  clean.  After  this  it  again  becomes 
more  and  more  red  and  fuming,  till  the  end  of  the  ope- 
ration ; and  the  whole  mingled  together  will  be  of  a 
yellow  or  orange  colour. 

Empty  the  receiver,  and  again  replace  it.  Then  in 
troduce  by  a small  funnel,  very  cautiously,  one  part  of 
boiling  water  in  a slender  stream,  and  continue  the 
distillation.  A small  quantity  of  a weaker  acid  will 
thus  be  obtained,  which  can  be  kept  apart.  The  first 
will  have  a specific  gravity  of  about  1.500,  if  the  heat 
have  been  properly  regulated,  and  if  the  receiver  was 
refrigerated  by  cold  water  or  ice.  Acid  of  that  den- 
sity, amounting  to  two-thirds  of  the  weight  of  the 
nitre,  may  thus  be  procured.  But  commonly  the  heat 
is  pushed  too  high,  whence  more  or  less  of  the  acid  is 
decomposed,  and  its  proportion  of  water  uniting  to  the 
remainder,  reduces  its  strength.  It  is  not  profitable  to 
use  a smaller  proportion  of  sulphuric  acid,  when  a 
concentrated  nitric  is  required.  But  when  only  a di- 
lute acid,  called  in  commerce  aquafortis,  is  required, 
then  less  sulphuric  acid  will  sulfice,  provided  a portion 
of  water  be  added.  One  hundred  parts  of  good  nitre, 
sixty  of  strong  sulphuric  acid,  and  twenty  of  water, 
form  economical  proportions. 

In  the  large  way,  and  for  the  purposes  of  the  arts, 
extremely  thick  cast  iron  or  earthen  retorts  are  employ- 
ed, to  which  an  earthen  head  is  adapted,  and  connect- 
ed with  a range  of  proper  condensers.  The  strength 
of  the  acid  too  is  varied,  by  putting  more  or  less  water 
in  the  receivers.  The  nitric  acid  thus  made  generally 
contains  sulphuric  acid,  and  also  muriatic,  from  the 
impurity  of  the  nitrate  employed.  If  the  fqrmer,  a 
solution  of  nitrate  of  barytes  will  occasion  a white 
precipitate ; if  the  latter,  nitrate  of  silver  will  render 
it  milky.  The  sulphuric  acid  may  be  separated  by  a 
second  distillation  from  very  pure  nitre,  equal  in  weight 
to  an  eighth  of  that  originally  employed ; or  by  preci- 
pitating with  nitrate  of  barytes,  decanting  the  clear 
liquid,  and  distilling  it.  The  muriatic  acid  may  be 
separated  by  proceeding  in  the  same  way  with  nitrate 
of  silver,  or  with  litharge,  decanting  the  clear  liquid, 
and  redistilling  it,  leaving  an  eighth  or  tenth  part  in  the 
retort.  The  acid  for  the  last  process  should  be  con- 
densed as  much  as  possible,  and  the  redistillation  con- 
ducted very  slowly ; and  if  it  be  stopped  when  half  is 
come  over,  beautiful  crystals  of  muriate  of  lead  will 
be  obtained  on  cooling  the  remainder,  if  litharge  be 
used,  as  Steinacher  informs  us ; who  also  adds,  that 
the  vessel  should  be  made  to  fit  tight  by  grinding,  as 
any  lute  is  liable  to  contaminate  the  product. 

As  this  acid  still  holds  in  solution  more  or  less  ni- 
trous gas,  it  is  not  in  fact  nitric  acid,  but  a kind  of 
nitrous.  It  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  put  it  into  a re- 
tort, to  which  a receiver  is  added,  the  two  vessels  not 
being  luted,  and  to  apply  a very  gentle  heat  for  several 
hours,  changing  the  receiver  as  soon  as  it  is  filled  with 
red  vapours.  The  nitrous  gas  will  thus  be  expelled, 
and  the  nitric  acid  will  remain  in  the  retort  as  limpid 
and  colourless  as  water.  It  should  be  kept  in  a bottle 
and  secluded  from  the  light,  otherwise  it  will  lose  part 
of  its  oxygen. 

What  remains  in  the  retort  is  a bisulphate  of  po- 
tassa, from  which  the  superfluous  acid  may  be  expelled 
by  a pretty  strong  heat,  and  the  residuum,  being  dis 
solved  and  crystallized,  will  be  sulphate  of  potassa. 

As  nitric  acid  in  a fluid  state  is  always  mixed  with 
water,  different  attempts  have  been  made  to  ascertain 
its  strength,  or  the  quantity  of  real  acid  contained 
in  it. 

The  nitric  acid  is  of  considerable  use  in  the  arts. 
It  is  employed  for  etching  on  copper ; as  a solvent  of 
tin  to  form  with  that  metal  a mordant  for  some  of  the 
finest  dyes  ; in  metallurgy  and  assaying  ; in  various 
chemical  processes,  on  account  of  the  facility  with 
which  it  parts  with  oxygen,  and  dissolves  metals;  in 
medicine  as  a tonic,  and  as  a substitute  for  mercurial 
preparations  in  syphilis  and  affections  of  the  liver,  as 
also  in  form  of  vapour  to  destroy  contagion.  For  th« 
purposes  of  the  arts  it  is  commonly  used  in  a diluted 
state,  and  contaminated  with  the  sulphuric  and  muri- 
atic acids,  by  the  name  of  aquafortis.  This  is  gene 
rally  prepared  by  mixing  common  nitre  with  an  equal 
weight  of  sulphate  of  iron,  and  half  its  weight  of  the 
same  sulphate  calcined,  and  distilling  the  mixture  ; or 
by  mixing  nitre  with  twice  its  weight  of  dry  powdere  I 
clay,  and  distilling  in  a reverberatory  furnace  Two 


NIT 


NIT 


kinds  are  found  in  the  shops,  one  called  double  aqua- 
fortis, which  is  about  half  the  strength  of  nitric  acid  ; 
the  other  simply  aquafortis , which  is  half  the  strength 
of  the  double. 

A compound  made  by  mixing  two  parts  of  the  nitric 
acid  with  one  of  muriatic,  known  formerly  by  the 
name  of  aqua  regia , and  now  by  that  of  nitro-muriatic 
acid,  has  the  property  of  dissolving  gold  and  platina. 
On  mixing  the  two  acids,  heat  is  given  out,  an  effer- 
vescence takes  place,  and  the  mixture  acquires  an 
orange  colour.  This  is  likewise  made  by  adding  gradu- 
ally to  an  ounce  of  powdered  muriate  of  ammonia  four 
ounces  of  double  aquafortis,  and  keeping  the  mixture 
in  a sand  heat  till  the  salt  is  dissolved ; taking  care  to 
avoid  the  fumes,  as  the  vessel  must  be  left  open  ; or  by 
distilling  nitric  acid  with  an  equal  weight,  or  rather 
more,  of  common  salt. 

On  this  subject  we  are  indebted  to  Sir  H.  Davy  for 
some  excellent  observations,  published  by  him  in  the 
first  volume  of  the  Journal  of  Science.  If  strong  nitrous 
acid,  saturated  with  nitrous  gas,  be  mixed  with  a sa- 
turated solution  of  muriatic  acid  gas,  no  other  effect  is 
produced  than  might  be  expected  from  the  action  of 
nitrous  acid  of  the  same  strength  on  an  equal  quantity 
of  water ; and  the  mixed  acid  so  formed  has  no  power 
of  action  on  gold  or  platina.  Again,  if  muriatic  acid 
gas,  and  nitrous  gas,  in  equal  volumes,  be  mixed  to- 
gether over  mercury,  and  half  a volume  of  oxygen  be 
added,  the  immediate  condensation  will  be  no  more 
than  might  be  expected  from  the  formation  of  nitrous 
acid  gas.  And  when  this  is  decomposed,  or  absorbed 
by  the  mercury,  the  muriatic  acid  gas  is  found  unalter- 
ed, mixed  with  a certain  portion  of  nitrous  gas. 

It  appears  then  that  nitrous  acid,  and  muriatic  acid 
gas,  have  no  chemical  action  on  each  other.  If  colour- 
less nitric  acid  and  muriatic  acid  of  commerce  be 
mixed  together,  the  mixture  immediately  becomes  yel- 
low, and  gains  the  power  of  dissolving  gold  and  plati- 
num. If  it  be  gently  heated,  pure  chlorine  arises  from 
it,  and  the  colour  becomes  deeper.  If  the  heat  be 
longer  continued,  chlorine  still  rises,  but  mixed  with  ni- 
trous acid  gas.  When  the  process  has  been  very  long 
continued  till  the  colour  becomes  very  deep,  no  more 
chlorine  can  be  procured,  and  it  loses  its  power  of 
acting  upon  platinum  and  gold.  It  is  now  nitrous  and 
muriatic  acids.  It  appears  then  from  these  observa- 
tions, which  have  been  very  often  repeated,  that  nitro- 
muriatic  acid  owes  its  peculiar  properties  to  a mutual 
decomposition  of  the  nitric  and  muriatic  acids;  and 
that  water,  chlorine,  and  nitrous  acid  gas,  are  the  re- 
sults. Though  nitrous  gas  and  chlorine  have  no  action 
on  each  other  when  perfectly  dry,  yet  if  water  be 
present,  there  is  an  immediate  decomposition,  and  ni- 
trous acid  and  muriatic  acid  are  formed.  118  parts  of 
strong  liquid  nitric  acid  being  decomposed  in  this  case, 
yield  67  of  chlorine.  Aqua  regia  does  not  oxidise  gold 
and  platina.  It  merely  causes  their  combination  with 
chlorine. 

A bath  made  of  nitro-muriatic  acid,  diluted  so  much 
as  to  taste  no  sourer  than  vinegar,  or  of  such  a strength 
as  to  prick  the  skin  a little,  after  being  exposed  to  it  for 
twenty  minutes  or  half  an  hour,  has  been  introduced 
by  Dr.  Scott  of  Bombay  as  a remedy  in  chronic  syphilis, 
a variety  of  ulcers  and  diseases  of  the  skin,  chronic 
hepatitis,  bilious  dispositions,  general  debility,  and  lan- 
guor. He  considers  every  trial  as  quite  inconclusive 
where  a ptyalism,  some  affection  of  the  gums,  or  some 
very  evident  constitutional  effect,  has  not  arisen  from 
it.  The  internal  use  of  the  same  acid  has  been  recom- 
mended to  be  conjoined  with  that  of  the  partial  or  ge- 
neral bath. 

With  the  different  bases  the  nitric  acid  forms  ni- 
trates. 

The  nitrate  of  barytes , when  perfectly  pure,  is  in  re- 
gular octahedral  crystals,  though  it  is  sometimes  ob- 
tained in  small  shining  scales. 

The  nitrate  of  potassa  is  the  salt  well  known  by  the 
name  of  nitre  or  saltpetre.  It  is  found  ready  formed  in 
the  East  Indies,  in  Spain,  in  the  kingdom  of  Naples, 
and  elsewhere,  in  considerable  quantities;  but  nitrate 
of  lime  is  still  more  abundant.  Far  the  greater  part  of 
the  nitrate  made  use  of  is  produced  by  a combination 
of  circumstances  which  tend  to  compose  and  condense 
nitric  acid.  This  acid  appears  to  be  produced  in  all 
situations  where  animal  matters  are  completely  de- 
composed with  access  of  air,  and  of  proper  substances 
with  which  it  can  readily  combine.  Grounds  fre- 


quently trodden  by  cattle,  and  impregnated  with  their 
excrements,  or  the  walls  of  inhabited  places,  where  pu- 
trid animal  vapours  abound,  such  as  slaughter-houses, 
drains,  or  the  like,  afford  nitre  by  long  exposure  to  the 
air.  Artificial  nitre  beds  are  made  by  an  attention  to 
the  circumstances  in  which  this  salt  is  produced  by 
nature.  Dry  ditches  are  dug,  and  covered  with  sheds, 
open  at  the  side,  to  keep  off  the  rain.  These  are  filled 
with  animal  substances,  such  as  dung,  or  other  excre- 
ments, with  the  remains  of  vegetables,  and  old  mortar, 
or  other  loose  calcareous  earth ; this  substance  being 
found  to  be  the  best  and  most  convenient  receptacle 
for  the  acid  to  combine  with.  Occasional  watering, 
and  turning  up  from  time  to  time,  are  necessary  to  ac- 
celerate the  process,  and  increase  the  surfaces  to  which 
the  air  may  apply  ; but  too  much  moisture  is  hurtful. 
When  a certain  portion  of  nitrate  is  formed,  the  pro- 
cess appears  to  go  on  more  quickly ; but  a certain 
quantity  stops  it  altogether;  and  after  this  cessation, 
the  materials  will  go  on  to  furnish  more,  if  what  is 
formed  be  extracted  by  lixiviation.  After  a succession 
of  many  months,  more  or  less,  according  to  the  ma- 
nagement of  the  operation,  in  which  the  action  of  a re- 
gular current  of  fresh  air  is  of  the  greatest  importance, 
nitre  is  found  in  the  mass.  If  the  beds  contained  much 
vegetable  matter,  a considerable  portion  of  the  nitrous 
salt  will  be  common  saltpetre;  but  if  otherwise,  the 
acid  will,  for  the  most  part,  be  combined  with  the  cal- 
careous earth.  It  consists  of  6.75  acid  -f-  6 potassa. 

To  extract  the  saltpetre  from  the  mass  of  earthy 
matter,  a number  of  large  casks  are  prepared,  with  a 
cock  at  the  bottom  of  each,  and  a quantity  of  straw 
within,  to  prevent  its  being  stopped  up.  Into  these  the 
matter  is  put,  together  with  wood-ashes,  either  strewed 
at  top,  or  added  during  the  filling.  Boiling  water  is 
then  poured  on,  and  suffered  to  stand  for  some  time  ; 
after  which  it  is  drawn  off,  and  another  water  added 
in  the  same  manner,  as  long  as  any  saline  matter  can 
be  thus  extracted.  The  weak  brine  is  heated,  and 
passed  through  other  tubs,  until  it  becomes  of  consi- 
derable strength.  It  is  then  carried  to  the  boiler,  and 
contains  nitre  and  other  salts;  the  chief  of  which  is 
common  culinary  salt,  and  sometimes  muriate  of  mag- 
nesia. It  is  the  property  of  nitre  to  be  much  more  so- 
luble in  hot  than  cold  water  ; but  common  salt  is  very 
nearly  as  soluble  in  cold  as  in  hot  water.  Whenever, 
therefore,  the  evaporation  is  carried  by  boiling  to  a 
certain  point,  much  of  the  common  salt  will  fall  to  the 
bottom,  for  want  of  water  to  hold  it  in  solution,  though 
the  nitre  will  remain  suspended  by  virtue  of  the  heat. 
The  common  salt  thus  separated  is  taken  out  with  a 
perforated  ladle,  and  a small  quantity  of  the  fluid  is 
cooled,  from  time  to  time,  that  its  concentration  may 
be  known  by  the  nitre  which  crystallizes  in  it.  When 
the  fluid  is  sufficiently  evaporated,  it  is  taken  out  and 
cooled,  and  a great  part  of  the  nitre  separates  in  crys- 
tals ; while  the  remaining  common  salt  continues  dis- 
solved, because  equally  soluble  in  cold  and  in  hot 
water.  Subsequent  evaporation  of  the  residue  will 
separate  more  nitre  in  the  same  manner.  By  the  sug- 
gestion of  Lavoisier,  amucffsimpler  plan  was  adopted ; 
reducing  the  crude  nitre  to  powder,  and  washing  it 
twice  with  water. 

This  nitre,  which  is  called  nitre  of  the  first  boiling, 
contains  some  common  salt,  from  which  it  may  be  pu- 
rified by  solution  in  a small  quantity  of  water,  and 
subsequent  evaporation ; for  the  crystals  thus  obtained 
are  much  less  contaminated  with  common  salt  than 
before;  because  the  proportion  of  water  is  so  much 
larger,  with  respect  to  the  small  quantity  contained  by 
the  nitre,  that  very  little  of  it  will  crystallize.  For  nice 
purposes,  the  solution  and  crystallization  of  nitre  are 
repeated  four  times.  The  crystals  of  nitre  are  usually 
of  the  form  of  six-sided  flattened  prisms,  with  dihedral 
summits.  Its  taste  is  penetrating;  but  the  cold  pro- 
duced by  placing  the  salt  to  dissolve  in  the  mouth,  is 
such  as  to  predominate  over  the  real  taste  at  first. 
Seven  parts  of  water  dissolve  two  of  nitre,  at  the  tem- 
perature of  sixty  degrees ; but  boiling  water  dissolves 
its  own  weight.  100  parts  of  alkohol,  at  a heat  of 
176°,  dissolve  only  2.9. 

On  being  exposed  to  a gentle  heat,  nitre  fuses  ; and 
in  this  state,  being  poured  into  moulds,  so  as  to  form 
little  round  cakes,  or  balls,  it  it  called  sal  prunella , or 
crystal  mineral.  This  at  least  is  the  way  in  which 
this  salt  is  now  usually  prepared,  conformably  to  the 
directions  of  Boerhaave,  though  in  most  dispensatories 

105 


NIT 


NIT 


a twenty-fourth  part  of  sulphur  was  directed  to  be  de- 
flagrated on  the  nitre  before  it  was  poured  out.  This 
salt  should  not  be  left  on  the  fire  after  it  has  entered 
into  fusion,  otherwise  it  will  be  converted  into  a ni- 
trate of  potassa.  If  the  heat  be  increased  to  redness, 
the  acid  itself  is  decomposed,  and  a considerable  quan- 
tity of  tolerably  pure  oxygen  gas  is  evolved,  succeeded 
by  nitrogen. 

This  salt  powerfully  promotes  the  combustion  of  in- 
flamm able  substances.  Two  or  three  parts  mixed  with 
one  of  charcoal,  and  set  on  fire,  burn  rapidly ; azote 
and  carbonic  acid  gas  are  given  out,  and  a small  por- 
tion of  the  latter  is  retained  by  the  alkaline  residuum, 
which  was  formerly  called  clyssus  of  nitre.  Three 
parts  of  nitre,  two  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  and  one 
of  sulphur,  mixed  together  in  a warm  mortar,  form  the 
fulminating  powder ; a small  quantity  of  which,  laid 
on  a fire  shovel,  and  held  over  the  fire  till  it  begins  to 
melt,  explodes  with  a loud  sharp  noise.  Mixed  with 
sulphur  and  charcoal,  it  forms  gunpowder. 

Three  parts  of  nitre,  one  of  sulphur,  and  one  of  fine 
saw-dust,  well  mixed,  constitute  what  is  called  the 
powder  of  fusion.  If  a bit  of  base  copper  be  folded  up 
and  covered  with  this  powder  in  a walnut-shell,  and 
the  powder  be  set  on  fire  with  a lighted  paper,  it  will 
detonate  rapidly,  and  fuse  the  metal  into  a globule  of 
sulphuret  without  burning  the  shell. 

Silex,  alumina,  and  barytes,  decompose  this  saltin  a 
high  temperature,  by  uniting  with  its  base.  The  alu- 
mina will  effect  this  even  after  it  has  been  made  into 
pottery. 

The  uses  of  nitre  are  various/  Beside  those  already 
indicated,  it  enters  into  the  composition  of  fluxes,  and 
is  extensively  employed  in  metallurgy ; it  serves  to  pro- 
mote the  combustion  of  sulphur  in  fabricating  its  acid  ; 
it  is  used  in  the  art  of  dying;  it  is  added  to  common- 
salt  for  preserving  meat,  to  which  it  gives  a red  hue  ; 
it  is  an  ingredient  in  some  frigorific  mixtures ; and  it  is 
prescribed  in  medicine,  as  cooling,  febrifuge,  and  di- 
uretic ; and  some  have  recommended  it  mixed  with 
vinegar  as  a very  powerful  remedy  for  the  sea  seurvy. 

Nitrate  of  soda , formerly  called  cubic  or  quadran- 
gular nitre , approaches  in  its  properties  to  the  nitrate 
of  potassa ; but  differs  from  it  in  being  somewhat  more 
soluble  in  cold  water,  though  less  in  hot,  which  takes 
up  little  more  than  its  own  weight ; in  being  inclined 
to  attract  moisture  from  the  atmosphere  ; and  in  crys- 
tallizing in  rhombs,  or  rhomboidal  prisms.  It  may  be 
prepared  by  saturating  soda  with  the  nitric  acid ; by 
precipitating  nitric  solutions  of  the  metals,  or  of  the 
earths,  except  barytes,  by  soda;  by  lixiviating  and 
crystallizing  the  residuum  of  common  salt  distilled  with 
three-fourths  its  weight  of  nitric  acid  ; or  by  saturating 
the  mother  waters  of  nitre  with  soda  instead  of  po- 
tassa. 

Nitrate  of  strontian  may  be  obtained  in  the  same 
manner  as  that  of  barytes,  with  which  it  agrees  in  the 
shape  of  its  crystals,  and  most  of  its  properties. 

Nitrate  of  lime , the  calcareous  nitre  of  older  writers, 
abounds  in  the  mortar  of  old  buildings,  particularly 
those  that  have  been  much  exposed  to  animal  effluvia, 
or  processes  in  which  azote  is  set  free.  Hence  it 
abounds  in  nitre  beds,  as  was  observed  when  treating 
of  the  nitrate  of  potassa.  It  may  also  be  prepared  arti- 
ficially by  pouring  dilute  nitric  acid  on  carbonate  of 
lime. 

The  nitrate  of  ammonia  possesses  the  property  of  ex- 
ploding, and  being  totally  decomposed,  at  the  tempera- 
ture of  600° ; whence  it  acquired  the  name  of  nitrum 
flammans.  The  readiest  mode  of  preparing  it  is  by 
adding  carbonate  of  ammonia  to  dilute  nitric  acid  till 
saturation  takes  place.  If  this  solution  be  evaporated 
in  a heat  between  70°  and  100°,  and  the  evaporation 
not  carried  too  far,  it  crystallizes  in  hexahedral  prisms, 
terminating  in  very  acute  pyramids.  If  the  heat  rise  to 
212°,  it  will  afford,  on  cooling,  long  fibrous  silky  crys- 
tals: if  the  evaporation  be  carried  so  far  as  for  ths  salt 
to  concrete  immediately  on  a glass  rod  by  cooling,  it 
will  form  a compact  mass.  According  to  Sir  H.  Davy, 
these  differ  but  little  from  each  other,  except  in  the 
water  they  contain. 

When  dried  as  much  as  possible  without  decompo- 
sition, it  consists  of  6.75  acid+  2.125  ammonia + 1.125 
water. 

The  chief  use  of  this  salt  is  for  affording  nitrous 
oxide  on  being  decomposed  by  heat. 

Nitrate  of  magnesia,  magnesian  nitre,  crystallizes 

106 


in  four-sided  rhomboidal  prisms,  with  oblique  or  trun- 
cated summits,  and  sometimes  in  bundles  of  small  nee- 
dles. Its  taste  is  bitter,  and  very  similar  to  that  of 
nitrate  of  lime,  but  less  pungent.  It  is  fusible,  and  de- 
composable by  heat,  giving  out  first  a little  oxygen  gas, 
then  nitrous  oxide,  and  lastly  nitric  acid.  It  deliquesces 
slowly.  It  is  soluble  in  an  equal  weight  of  cold  water, 
and  in  but  little  more  hot,  so  that  it  is  scarcely  crystal- 
lizable  but  by  spontaneous  evaporation. 

The  two  preceding  species  are  capable  of  combining 
into  a triple  salt,  un  ammoniaco-magnesian  nitrate, 
either  by  uniting  the  two  in  solution,  or  by  a partial  de- 
composition of  either  by  means  of  the  base  of  the  other. 
This  is  slightly  inflammable  when  suddenly  heated; 
and  by  a lower  heat  is  decomposed,  giving  out  oxygen, 
azote,  more  water  than  it  contained,  nitrous  oxide,  and 
nitric  acid.  The  residuum  is  pure  magnesia. 

From  the  activity  of  the  nitric  acid  as  a solvent  of  earths 
in  analyzation,  the  nitrate  of  glucine  is  better  known 
than  any  other  of  the  salts  of  this  new  earth.  Its  form 
is  either  pulverulent,  or  a tenacious  or  ductile  mass. 
Its  taste  is  atfirst  saccharine,  and  afterward  astringent. 
It  grows  soft  by  exposure  to  heat,  soon  melts,  its  acid 
is  decomposed  into  oxygen  and  azote,  and  its  base 
alone  is  left  behind.  It  is  very  soluble  and  very  deli- 
quescent. 

Nitrate,  or  rather  supernitrate  of  alumina,  crystal- 
lizes, though  with  difficulty,  in  thin,  soft,  pliable  flakes. 
It  is  of  an  austere  and  acid  taste,  and  reddens  blue  ve- 
getable colours.  It  may  be  formed  by  dissolving  in 
diluted  nitric  acid,  with  the  assistance  of  heat,  fresh 
precipitated  alumina,  well  washed  but  not  dried.  It  is 
deliquescent,  and  soluble  in  a very  small  portion  of 
water.  Alkohol  dissolves  its  own  weight.  It  is  easily 
decomposed  by  heat. 

Nitrate  of  zircone  crystallizes  in  small,  capillary, 
silky  needles.  Its  taste  is  astringent.  It  is  easily  de- 
composed by  fire,  very  soluble  in  water,  and  deliques- 
cent. It  may  be  prepared  by  dissolving  zircone  in  strong 
nitric  acid ; but,  like  the  preceding  species,  the  acid  is 
always  in  excess. 

Nitrate  of  yttria  may  be  prepared  in  a similar  man- 
ner. Its  taste  is  sweetish  and  astringent.  It  is  scarcely 
to  be  obtained  in  crystals;  and  if  it  be  evaporated  by 
too  strong  a heat,  the  salt  becomes  soft  like  honey,  and 
on  cooling,  concretes  into  a stony  mass.”  Ure's  Chem. 
Diet. 

NITRIC  ACID  OXYGENIZED.  The  apparent 
oxygenation  of  nitric  acid  by  Thenard,  ought  to  be  re- 
garded merely  as  the  conversion  of  a portion  of  its 
combined  water  into  deutoxide  of  hydrogen. 

Nitric  oxide.  See  Nitrogen , deutoxide  of. 

Nitric  oxide  of  Mercury.  See  Hydrargyri  nitrico- 
oxidum. 

Nitrico-oxidum  hydrargyri.  See  Hydrargyri 

nitrico-oxydum. 

NITROGEN.  (From  virpov,  nitre,  and  yevvaco,  to 
generate  : so  called  because  it  is  the  generator  of  nitre.) 
Azot ; Azote.  “ An  important  elementary  or  undecom- 
posed principle.  As  it  constitutes  four-fifths  of  the 
volume  of  atmospheric  air,  the  readiest  mode  of  pro 
curing  azote  is  to  abstract  its  oxygenous  associate,  by 
the  combustion  of  phosphorus  or  hydrogen.  It  may 
also  be  obtained  from  animal  matters,  subjected  in  a 
glass  retort  to  the  action  of  nitric  acid,  diluted  with  8 
or  10  times  its  weight  of  water. 

Azote  possesses  all  the  physical  properties  of  air.  It 
extinguishes  flame  and  animal  life.  It  is  absorbable  by 
about  100  volumes  of  water.  Its  spec,  gravity  is 
0.9722.  100  cubic  inches  weigh  29.65  grains.  It  has 
neither  taste  nor  smell.  It  unites  with  oxygen  in  four 
proportions,  forming  four  important  compounds.  These 
are, 

I.  Protoxide  of  azote,  called  also  nitrous  oxide,  pro- 
toxide of  nitrogen,  and  gaseous  oxide  of  azote. 

This  combination  of  nitrogen  and  oxygen  was  for- 
merly called  the  dephlogisticated  nitrous  gas,  but  now 
gaseous  oxide  of  nitrogen  or  nitrous  oxide.  It  was  first 
discovered  by  Priestley.  Its  nature  and  properties  have 
since  been  investigated  (though  not  very  accurately)  by 
a society  of  Dutch  chemists. 

Sir  Humphrey  Davy  has  examined  with  uncommon 
accuracy  the  formation  and  properties  of  all  the  sub 
stances  concerned  in  its  production.  He  has  detected 
the  sources  of  error  in  the  experiments  of  Priestley,  and 
the  Dutch  chemists,  and  to  him  we  are  indebted  for  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  this  gas.  We  shall,  therefore, 


NIT 


NIT 


exhibit  the  philosophy  of  this  gaseous  fluid,  as  we  find 
it  in  his  researches  concerning  the  nitrous  oxide. 

Properties.  It  exists  in  the  form  of  a permanent 
gas.  A candle  burns  with  a brilliant  flame  and  crack- 
ling noise  in  it;  before  its  extinction  the  white  inner 
flame  becomes  surrounded  with  a blue  one.  Phosphorus 
introduced  into  it,  in  a state  of  actual  inflammation, 
burns  with  increased  splendour,  as  in  oxygen  gas.  Sul- 
phur introduced  into  it  when  burning  with  a feeble  blue 
flame  is  instantly  extinguished ; but  when  in  a state  of 
vivid  inflammation , it  burns  with  a rose-coloured  flame. 
Ignited  charcoal  burns  in  it  more  brilliantly,  than  in  at- 
mospheric air.  Iron  wire,  with  a small  piece  of  wood 
affixed  to  it,  when  inflamed,  and  introduced  into  a ves- 
sel filled  with  this  gas,  burns  vehemently,  and  throws 
out  bright  scintillating  sparks.  No  combustible  body, 
however,  burns  in  it,  unless  it  be  previously  brought  to 
a state  of  vivid  inflammation.  Hence  sulphur  may  be 
melted,  and  even  sublimed  in  it,  phosphorus  may  be 
liquefied  in  it  without  undergoing  combustion.  N itrous 
oxide  is  pretty  rapidly  absorbed  by  water  that  has  been 
boiled ; a quantity  of  gas  equal  to  rather  more  than  half 
the  bulk  of  the  water  may  be  thus  made  to  disappear, 
the  water  acquires  a sweetish  taste,  but  its  other  pro- 
perties do  not  differ  perceptibly  from  common  water. 
The  whole  of  the  gas  may  be  expelled  again  by  heat. 
It  does  not  change  blue  vegetable  colours.  It  has  a dis- 
tinctly sweet  taste,  and  a faint  but  agreeable  odour.  It 
undergoes  no  diminution  when  mingled  with  oxygen  or 
nitrous  gas.  Most  of  the  liquid  inflammable  bodies, 
such  as  aether,  alkohol,  volatile  and  fat  oils,  absorb  it 
rapidly  and  in  great  quantity.  Acids  exert  but  little 
action  on  it.  The  affinity  of  the  neutro-saline  solutions 
for  gaseous  oxide  of  nitrogen  is  very  feeble.  Green 
muriate  and  green  sulphate  of  iron,  whether  holding 
nitrous  gas  in  solution,  or  not,  do  not  act  upon  it. 
None  of  the  gases,  when  mingled  with  it,  sutler  any 
perceptible  change  at  common  temperatures;  the  mu- 
riatic and  sulphurous  acid  gases  excepted,  which  un- 
dergo a slight  expansion.  Alkalies  freed  from  carbonic 
acid,  exposed  in  the  dry  or  solid  form,  have  no  action 
upon  it ; they  may,  however,  be  made  to  combine  with 
it  in  the  nascent  state,  and  then  constitute  saline  com- 
pounds of  a peculiar  nature.  These  combinations  de- 
flagrate when  heated  with  charcoal,  and  are  decom- 
posed by  acids;  the  gaseous  oxide  of  nitrogen  being  dis- 
engaged. It  undergoes  no  change  whatever  from  the 
simple  effect  of  light.  The  action  of  the  electric  spark, 
for  a long  while  continued,  converts  it  into  a gas,  ana- 
logous to  atmospheric  air  and  nitrous  acid ; the  same  is 
the  case  when  it  is  made  to  pass  through  an  ignited 
earthen  tube.  It  explodes  with  hydrogen  in  a variety 
of  proportions,  at  very  high  temperatures ; for  instance, 
when  electric  sparks  are  made  to  pass  through  the  mix- 
ture. Sulphuretted,  heavy,  and  light  carburetted  hy- 
drogen gases,  and  gaseous  oxide  of  carbon,  likewise 
burn  with  it  when  a strong  red  heat  is  applied.  100 
parts  by  wreight  of  nitrous  oxide,  contain  36.7  of  oxy- 
gen and  63.3  of  nitrogen ; 100  cubic  inches  weigh  50 
grains  at  55°  temperature  and  30  inches  atmospheric 
pressure.  Animals,  when  wholly  confined  in  gaseous 
oxide  of  nitrogen,  give  no  signs  of  uneasiness  for  some 
moments,  bbt  they  soon  become  restless  and  then  die. 
When  gaseous  oxide  of  nitrogen  is  mingled  with  at- 
mospheric air,  and  then  received  into  the  lungs,  it  ge- 
nerates highly  pleasurable  sensations ; the  effects  it  pro- 
duces on  the  animal  system  are  eminently  distinguished 
from  every  other  chemical  agent.  It  excites  every  fibre 
to  action,  and  rouses  the  faculties  of  the  mind,  inducing 
a state  of  great  exhilaration,  an  irresistible  propensity 
to  laughter,  a rapid  flow  of  vivid  ideas,  and  unusual 
vigour  and  fitness  for  muscular  exertions,  in  some  re- 
spects resembling  those  attendant  on  the  pleasantest 
period  of  intoxication,  without  any  subsequent  languor, 
depression  of  the  nervous  energy,  or  disagreeable  feel- 
ings; but  more  generally  followed  by  vigour,  and  a 
pleasurable  disposition  to  exertion,  which  gradually 
subsides. 

Sir  H.  Davy  first  showed,  that  by  breathing  a few 
quarts  of  it,  contained  in  a silk  bag,  for  two  or  three 
minutes,  effects  analogous  to  those  occasioned  by  drink- 
ing fermented  liquors  were  produced.  Individuals,  who 
differ  in  temperament,  are,  however,  as  we  might  ex- 
pect, differently  affected. 

Sir  H.  Davy  describee  the  effect  it  had  upon  him  as 
follows: — ‘Having  previously  closed  my  nostrils,  and 
exhausted  my  lungs,  I breathed  four  quarts  of  nitrous 


oxide  from  and  into  a silk  bag.  The  first  feelings  wera 
similar  to  those  produced  in  the  last  experiment  (gid- 
diness) ; but  in  less  than  half  a minute,  the  respiration 
being  continued,  they  diminished  gradually,  and  were 
succeeded  by  a sensation  analogous  to  gentle  pressure 
on  all  the  muscles,  attended  by  a highly  pleasurable 
thrilling,  particularly  in  the  chest  and  the  extremities. 
The  objects  around  me  became  dazzling,  and  my  hear- 
ing more  acute.  Towards  the  last  inspiration  the 
thrilling  increased,  the  sense  of  muscular  power  be- 
came greater,  and  at  last  an  irresistible  propensity  to 
action  was  indulged  in.  I recollect  but  indistinctly 
what  followed : I know  that  my  motions  were  various 
and  violent. 

‘These  effects  very  soon  ceased  after  respiration.  In 
ten  minutes  I had  recovered  my  natural  state  of  mind. 
The  thrilling  in  the  extremities  continued  longer  than 
the  other  sensations. 

‘ The  gas  has  been  breathed  by  a very  great  number 
of  persons,  and  almost  every  one  has  observed  the 
same  things.  On  some  few,  indeed,  it  has  no  effect 
whatever,  and  on  others  the  effects  are  always  painful. 

‘ Mr.  J.  W.  Tobin,  (after  the  first  imperfect  trials,) 
when  the  air  was  pure,  experienced  sometimes  sub- 
lime emotions  with  tranquil  gestures,  sometimes  vio- 
lent muscular  actum,  with  sensations  indescribably  ex 
quisite;  no  subsequent  debility — no  exhaustion — his 
trials  have  been  very  numerous!  Of  late  he  has  only 
felt  sedate  pleasure.  In  Sir  H.  Davy  the  effect  is  not 
diminished. 

‘ Mr.  James  Thomson.  Involuntary  laughter,  thrill- 
ing in  his  toes  and  fingers,  exquisite  sensations  of  plea- 
sure. A pain  in  the  back  and  knees,  occasioned  by 
fatigue  the  day  before,  recurred  a few  minutes  after- 
ward. A similar  observation,  we  think,  we  have 
made  on  others;  and  we  impute  it  to  the  undoubted 
power  of  the  gas  to  increase  the  sensibility  of  nervous 
power,  beyond  any  other  agent,  and  probably  in  a pecu- 
liar manner. 

‘Mr.  Thomas  Pople.  At  first  unpleasant  feelings 
of  tension ; afterward  agreeable  luxurious  languor, 
with  suspension  of  muscular  power;  lastly,  powers 
increased  both  of  body  and  mind. 

‘ Mr.  Stephen  Hammick,  surgeon  of  the  Royal  Hos- 
pital, Plymouth.  In  a small  dose,  yawning  and  lan- 
guor. It  should  be  observed  that  the  first  sensation 
has  often  been  disagreeable,  as  giddiness;  and  a few 
persons,  previously  apprehensive,  have  left  off  inhaling 
as  soon  as  they  felt  this.  Two  larger  doses  produced 
a glow',  unrestrainable  tendency  to  muscular  action, 
high  spirits,  and  more  vivid  ideas.  A bag  of  common 
air  was  first  given  to  Mr.  Hammiqk,  and  he  observed 
that  it  produced  no  effect.  The  same  precaution  against 
the  delusions  of  imagination  was  of  course  frequently 
taken. 

Mr.  Robert  Southey  could  not  distinguish  between 
the  first  effects  and  an  apprehension  of  which  he  w'as 
unable  to  divest  himself.  His  first  definite  sensations 
were,  a fulness  and  dizziness  in  the  head,  such  as  to 
induce  a fear  of  falling.  This  was  succeeded  by  a 
laugh  which  was  involuntary,  but  highly  pleasurable, 
accompanied  with  a peculiar  thrilling  in  the  extremi- 
ties; a sensation  perfectly  new  and  delightful.  For 
many  hours  after  this  experiment,  he  imagined  that  his 
taste  and  smell  were  more  acute,  and  is  certain  that 
he  felt  unusually  strong  and  cheerful.  In  a second  ex- 
periment, he  felt  pleasure  still  superior,  and  has  once 
poetically  remarked,  that  he  supposes  the  atmosphere 
of  the  highest  of  all  possible  heavens  to  be  composed 
of  this  gas. 

‘ Robert  Kinglake,  M.D.  Additional  freedom  and 
power  of  respiration,  succeeded  by  an  almost  delirious, 
but  highly  pleasurable  sensation  in  the  head,  which 
became  universal  with  increased  tone  of  the  muscles. 
At  last,  an  intoxicating  placidity  absorbed  for  five  mi- 
nutes all  voluntary  power,  and  left  a cheerfulness  and 
alacrity  for  several  hours.  A second  stronger  dose  pro- 
duced a perfect  trance  for  about  a minute ; then  a glow 
pervaded  the  system.  The  permanent  effects  were 
an  invigorated  feeling  of  vital  power,  and  improved 
spirits.  By  both  trials,  particularly  by  the  former, 
old  rheumatic  feelings  seemed  to  be  revived  for  the 
moment. 

‘ Mr.  Wedgewood  breathed  atmospheric  air  first, 
without  knowing  it  was  so.  He  declared  it  to  have  no 
effect,  which  confirmed  him  in  his  disbelief  of  the 
power  of  the  gas.  After  breathing  this  some  time. 

107 


NIT 


NIT 


however,  he  threw  the  bag  from  him,  kept  breathing 
on  laboriously  with  an  open  mouth,  holding  his  nose 
with  his  left  hand,  without  power  to  take  it  away, 
though  aware  of  the  ludicrousness  of  his  situation : 
all  his  muscles  seemed  to  be  thrown  into  vibrating 
motions ; he  had  a violent  inclination  to  make  antic 
gestures,  seemed  lighter  than  the  atmosphere,  and 
as  if  about  to  mount.  Before  the  experiment,  he 
was  a good  deal  fatigued  after  a long  ride,  of  which 
he  permanently  lost  all  sense.  In  a second  experiment, 
nearly  the  same  effect,  but  with  less  pleasure.  In  a 
third,  much  greater  pleasure. 

Such  are  the  properties  that  characterize  the  nitrous 
oxide. 

The  Dutch  chemists  and  some  French  and  German 
philosophers  assert  that  it  cannot  be  respired;  that 
burning  phosphorus,  sulphur,  and  charcoal,  are  ex- 
tinguished in  it,  &c.  It  is  probable  they  did  not  ex- 
amine it  in  a state  of  purity,  for  it  is  otherwise  diffi- 
cult to  account  for  these,  and  many  other  erroneous 
opinions. 

Method  of  obtaining  the  protoxide  of  nitrogen. — 
Gaseous  oxide  of  nitrogen  is  produced,  when  sub- 
stances, having  a strong  affinity  with  oxygen,  are 
brought  into  contact  with  nitric  acid,  or  with  nitrous 
gas.  It  may  therefore  be  obtained  by  various  processes, 
in  which  nitrous  gas  or  nitric  aeid  is  decomposed  by 
substances  capable  of  attracting  the  greater  part  of 
their  oxygen.  The  most  commodious  and  expeditious, 
as  well  as  the  cheapest  mode  of  obtaining  it,  is  by  de- 
composing nitrate  of  ammonia  at  a certain  temperature , 
in  the  following  manner : — 

1.  Introduce  iuto  a glass  retort  some  pure  nitrate  of 
ammonia,  and  apply  the  heat  of  an  Argand’s  lamp ; 
the  salt  will  soon  liquefy,  and,  when  it  begins  to  boil, 
gas  will  be  evolved.  Increase  the  heat  gradually  till 
the  body  and  neck  of  the  retort  become  filled  with  a 
semi-transparent  milky  white  vapour.  In  this  state 
the  temperature  of  the  fused  nitrate  is  between  340° 


and  480°.  After  the  decomposition  has  proceeded  for 
a few  minutes,  so  that  the  gas  evolved  quickly  enlarges 
the  flame  of  a taper  held  near  the  orifice  of  the  retort, 
it  may  be  collected  over  water,  care  being  taken  during 
the  whole  process,  never  to  suffer  the  temperature  of 
the  fused  nitrate  to  rise  above  500°  Falir.  which  may 
easily  be  judged  of,  from  the  density  of  the  vapours  in 
the  retort,  and  from  the  quiet  ebullition  of  the  fused 
nitrate ; for,  if  the  heat  be  increased  beyond  this  point, 
the  vapours  in  the  retort  acquire  a reddish  and  more 
transparent  appearance ; and  the  fused  nitrate  begins 
to  rise,  and  occupy  twice  the  bulk  it  did  before.  The 
nitrous  oxide  after  its  generation,  is  allowed  to  stand 
over  water,  for  at  least  six  hours,  and  is  then  fit  for 
respiration  or  other  experiments. 

Explanation. — Nitrate  of  ammonia  consists  of  nitric 
acid  and  ammonia ; nitric  acid  is  composed  of  nitrous 
gas  and  oxygen : and  ammonia  consists  of  hydrogen 
and  nitrogen : At  a temperature  of  about  480°  the 

attractions  of  hydrogen  for  nitrogen  in  ammonia,  and 
that  of  nitrous  gas  for  oxygen  in  nitric  acid,  are  dimi- 
nished: while,  on  the  contrary,  the  attractions  of  the 
hydrogen  of  ammonia  for  the  oxygen  of  the  nitric  acid, 
and  that  of  the  nitrogen  of  the  ammonia  for  the  nitrous 
gas  of  the  nitric  acid,  are  increased;  hence,  all  the 
former  affinities  are  broken,  and  new  ones  produced, 
namely,  the  hydrogen  of  the  ammonia  attracts  the 
oxygen  of  the  nitric  acid,  the  result  of  which  is  water  ; 
the  nitrogen  of  the  ammonia  combines  with  the  libe- 
rated nitrous  gas,  and  forms  nitrous  oxide.  The  water 
and  nitrous  oxide  produced,  probably  exist  in  binary 
combination  in  the  adriform  state,  at  the  temperature 
of  the  decomposition. 

Such  is  the  philosophy  of  the  production  of  protox- 
ide of  nitrogen,  by  decomposing  nitrate  of  ammonia 
at  that  temperature,  given  by  Davy. 

To  illustrate  this  complicated  play  of  affinity  more 
fully,  the  following  sketch  may  not  be  deemed  super- 
fluous. 


A Diagram  exhibiting  the  production  of  Gaseous  Oxide  cf  Nitrogen,  by  decomposing  Nitrate  of 
Ammonia , at  480°  Fahr. 


Sir  Humphrey  Davy  has  likewise  pointed  out,  that, 
when  the  heat  employed  for  decomposing  nitrate  of 
ammonia  is  raised  above  the  before-stated  temperature, 
another  play  of  affinities  takes  place,  the  attractions  of 
nitrogen  and  hydrogen  for  each  other  and  of  oxygen 
for  nitrous  gas  are  6till  more  diminished,  while  that  of 
nitrogen  for  nitrous  gas  is  totally  destroyed,  and  that 
of  hydrogen  for  oxygen  increased  to  a greater  extent. 
A new  attraction  likewise  takes  place,  namely,  that  of 
nitrous  gas  for  nitric  acid  to  form  nitrous  acid  vapour, 
108 


and  a new  arrangement  of  principles  is  rapidly  pro- 
duced: the  nitrogen  of  the  ammonia  having  no  affinity 
for  any  of  the  single  principles  at  this  temperature, 
enters  into  no  binary  compound;  the  oxygen  of  the 
nitric  acid  forms  water  with  the  hydrogen,  and  tire 
nitrous  gas  combines  with  the  nitric  acid  to  form  ni- 
trous acid  vapour. 

All  these  substances  most  probably  exist  in  combina 
tion,  at  the  temperature  of  their  production  : and  at  a 
lower  temperature  assume  the  form  of  nitrous  acid 


NIT 


NIT 


nitrous  gas,  nitrogen,  and  water ; and  lienee  we  see 
the  necessity  of  not  heating  the  nitrate  of  ammonia 
above  the  before-stated  temperature. 

On  account  of  the  rapid  absorption  of  gaseous  oxide 
of  nitrogen  by  water,  it  is  economical  to  preserve  the 
fluid  which  has  been  used  to  confine  this  gas,  and  to 
make  use  of  it  for  collecting  other  quantities  of  it.  In 
order  to  hasten  its  production,  the  nitrate  of  ammonia 
may  be  previously  freed  from  its  water  of  crystalliza- 
tion by  gently  fusing  it  in  a glass  of  Wedgwood’s  bason 
for  a few  minutes,  and  then  keeping  it  for  use  in  a well- 
stopped  bottle. 

2.  Nitrous  oxide  may  likewise  be  obtained  by  expos- 
ing common  nitrous  gas  to  alkaline  sulphites,  particu- 
larly to  sulphite  of  potassa  containing  its  full  quantity 
of  water  of  crystallization.  The  nitrous  oxide  pro- 
duced from  nitrous  gas  by  sulphite  of  potassa  has  all 
the  properties  of  that  generated  from  the  decomposi- 
tion of  nitrate  of  ammonia. 

The  conversion  of  nitrous  gas  into  nitrous  oxide,  by 
these  bodies,  depends  on  the  abstraction  of  a portion  of 
its  oxygen  by  the  greater  affinity  of  the  sulphite  pre- 
sented to  it.  The  nitrogen  and  remaining  oxygen  as- 
sume a more  condensed  state  of  existence,  and  consti- 
tute nitrous  oxide. 

3.  Nitrous  oxide  may  also  be  obtained  by  mingling 
together  nitrous  gas  and  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas. 
The  volume  of  gases  in  this  case  is  diminished,  sulphur 
deposited,  ammonia,  water,  and  nitrous  oxide  are 
formed. 

The  change  of  principles  which  take  place  in  this 
experiment,  depends  upon  the  combination  of  the  hy- 
drogen of  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas,  with  different 
portions  of  the  oxygen  and  nitrogen  of  the  nitrous  gas, 
to  form  water  and  ammonia,  while  it  deposites  sulphur. 
The  remaining  oxygen  and  nitrogen  being  left  in  due 
proportion  constitute  nitrous  oxide. 

Remark. — This  singular  exertion  of  attraction  by  a 
simple  body  appears  highly  improbable  a priori;  but 
the  formation  of  ammonia,  and  the  non-oxygenation  of 
the  sulphur,  elucidate  the  fact.  In  performing  this  ex- 
periment, care  should  be  taken  that  the  gases  should  be 
rendered  as  dry  as  possible ; for  the  presence  of  water 
considerably  retards  the  decomposition. 

4.  Nitrous  oxide  may  also  be  produced  by  preventing 
alkaline  sulphurets  to  nitrous  gas.  Davy  observed  that 
a solution  of  sulphuret  of  strontian,  or  barytes,  an- 
swers this  purpose  best. 

This  decomposition  of  nitrous  gas  is  not  solely  pro- 
duced by  the  abstraction  of  oxygen  from  the  nitrous 
gas,  to  form  sulphuric  acid.  It  depends  equally  on  the 
decomposition  of  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  dissolved 
in  the  solution  or  liberated  from  it.  In  this  process, 
sulphur  is  deposited  and  sulphuric  acid  formed. 

5.  Nitrous  oxide  is  obtained  in  many  circumstances 
similar  to  those  in  which  nitrous  gas  is  produced.  Dr. 
Priestley  found  that  nitrous  oxide  was  evolved,  toge- 
ther with  nitrous  gas,  during  the  solution  of  iron,  tin, 
and  zinc  in  nitric  aeid. 

It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  exact  rationale  of  these 
processes,  for  very  complicated  agencies  of  affinities 
take  place.  Either  the  nascent  hydrogen  arising  from 
the  decomposition  of  the  water  by  the  metallic  sub- 
stance may  combine  with  portions  of  the  oxygen  and 
nitrogen  of  the  nitrous  gas  ; and  thus  by  forming  water 
and  ammonia,  convert  it  into  nitrous  oxide ; or  the  me- 
tallic substance  may  attract  at  the  same  time  oxygen 
from  the  water  and  nitrous  gas,  while  the  nascent  hy- 
drogen of  the  water  seizes  upon  a portion  of  the  nitro- 
gen of  the  nitrous  gas,  to  form  ammonia.  The  analogy 
between  this  process  and  the  decomposition  of  nitrous 
gas  by  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  renders  the  first  opinion 
most  probable. 

Such  are  the  principal  methods  of  obtaining  nitrous 
oxide.  There  are  no  reasons,  Davy  thinks,  for  sup- 
posing that  nitrous  oxide  is  formed  in  any  of  the  pro- 
cesses of  nature,  and  the  nice  equilibrium  of  affinity 
by  which  it  is  constituted  forbids  us  to  hope  for  the 
power  of  composing  it  from  its  simple  principles.  We 
must  be  content  to  produce  it  artificially. 

II.  Deutozide  of  azote,  termed  likewise  nitrous  gas, 
or  nitric  oxide. 

The  name  of  nitrous  gas  is  given  to  an  aSriform 
fluid,  consisting  of  a certain  quantity  of  nitrogen  and 
oxygen,  combined  with  caloric.  It  is  an  elastic,  colour- 
less fluid,  having  no  sensible  taste ; it  is  neither  acid 
nor  alkaline ; it  is  exceedingly  hurtful  to  animals,  pro- 


ducing Instant  suffocation  whenever  they  attempt  to 
breathe  it.  The  greater  number  of  combustible  bodies 
refuse  to  burn  in  it.  It  is  nevertheless  capable  of  sup- 
porting the  combustion  of  some  of  these  bodies.  Phos- 
phorus burns  in  nitrous  gas  when  introduced  into  it  ira 
a state  of  inflammation : pyrophorus  takes  fire  in  it 
spontaneously. 

It  is  not  decomposable  by  water,  though  100  cubic 
inches  of  this  fluid,  when  freed  from  air,  absorb  about 
five  cubic  inches  of  the  gas.  This  solution  is  void  of 
taste ; it  does  not  redden  blue  vegetable  colours  ; the 
gas  is  expelled  again  when  the  water  is  made  to  boil  or 
suffered  to  freeze.  Nitrous  gas  has  no  action  on  nitro 
gen  gas  even  when  assisted  by  heat.  It  is  decomposed 
by  several  metals  at  high  temperatures. 

Its  specific  gravity,  when  perfectly  pure,  is  to  that  of 
atmospheric  air  as  about  1.04  to  1. 

Ardent  spirits,  saccharine  matters,  hydro-carbonates, 
sulphurous  acid,  and  phosphorus,  have  no  action  on  it 
at  the  common  temperature.  It  is  not  sensibly  changed 
by  the  action  of  light.  Heat  dilates  it.  It  rapidly  com- 
bines with  oxygen  gas  at  common  temperatures,  and 
converts  it  into  nitrous  acid.  Atmospheric  air  pro- 
duces the  same  effect,  but  with  less  intensity.  It  is  ab- 
sorbable with  green  sulphate,  muriate  and  nitrate  of 
iron,  and  decomposable  by  alkaline,  terrene,  and  me- 
tallic sulphurets,  and  other  bodies,  that  have  a strong 
affinity  for  oxygen ; but  it  is  not  capable  of  combining 
with  them  chemically,  so  as  to  form  saline  compounds 
From  the  greatest  number  of  bodies  which  absorb  it, 
it  may  be  again  expelled  by  the  application  of  heat. 

It  communicates  to  flame  a greenish  colour  before 
extinguishing  it ; when  mixed  with  hydrogen  gas  this 
acquires  the  property  of  burning  with  a green  flame.  It 
is  absorbable  by  nitric  acid  and  renders  it  fuming. 

When  exposed  to  the  action  of  caloric  in  an  ignited 
porcelain  tube,  it  experiences  no  alteration,  but  when 
electric  sparks  are  made  to  pass  through  it,  it  is  decom- 
posed and  converted  into  nitrous  acid,  and  nitrogen 
gas.  Phosphorus  does  not  shine  in  it.  It  is  composed 
of  about  eight  parts  of  oxygen,  and  seven  of  nitrogen. 

Methods  of  obtaning  deutozide  of  nitrogen. — 1.  Put 
into  a small  proof,  or  retort,  some  copper  wire  or  pieces 
of  the  same  metal,  and  pour  on  it  nitric  acid  of  com- 
merce diluted  with  water,  an  effervescence  takes  place, 
and  nitrous  gas  will  be  produced.  After  having  suf- 
fered the  first  portions  to  escape  on  account  of  the  at- 
mospheric air  contained  in  the  retort,  collect  the  gas  in 
the  water-apparatus  as  usual.  In  order  to  obtain  the 
gas  in  a pure  state,  it  must  then  be  shook  for  some  time 
in  contact  with  water.  The  water  in  this  instance 
suffers  no  alteration ; on  the  contrary,  the  acid  under- 
goes a partial  decomposition ; the  metal  robs  some  of 
the  nitric  acid  of  the  greatest  part  of  its  oxygen,  and 
becomes  oxidised ; the  acid  having  lost  so  much  of  its 
oxygen,  becomes  thereby  so  altered,  that  at  the  usual 
temperature  it  can  exist  no  longer  in  the  liquid  state, 
but  instantly  expands  and  assumes  the  form  of  gas 
ceasing  af  the  same  time  to  act  as  an  acid,  and  exhibit- 
ing different  properties:  but  the  acid  remaining  unde- 
composed combines  with  the  oxide  of  copper,  and  forms 
nitrate  of  copper. 

Instead  of  presenting  copper  to  nitric  acid,  iron,  zinc, 
mercury,  or  silver,  may  be  made  use  of.  The  metals 
best  suited  for  the  production  of  nitrous  gas  are  silver, 
mercury,  and  copper. 

2.  Deutoxide  of  nitrogen  may  likewise  be  obtained 
by  synthesis.  This  method  of  obtaining  it  we  owe  to 
Dr.  Milner  of  Cambridge. 

Into  the  middle  of  an  earthern  tube  about  20  inches 
long  and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide,  open  at  both 
ends,  put  as  much  coarsely-powdered  manganese  as  is 
sufficient  nearly  to  fill  it.  Let  this  tube  traverse  a fur- 
nace having  two  openings  opposite  to  each  other.  To 
one  end  of  the  tube  lute  a retort  containing  water 
strongly  impregnated  with  ammonia,  and  to  the  other 
adapt  a bent  glass  tube  which  passes  into  the  pneu- 
matic trough.  Let  a fire  be  kindled  in  the  furnace,  and 
when  the  manganese  may  be  supposed  to  be  red  hot, 
apply  a gentle  heat  to  the  retort,  and  drive  over  it  the 
vapour  of  the  ammonia;  the  consequence  will  be  that 
nitrous  gas  will  be  delivered  at  the  farther  end  of  the 
tube,  while  the  ammonia  enters  the  other-  end ; and 
this  effect  does  not  take  place  without  the  presence  of 
the  alkali. 

Explanation. — Ammonia  consists  of  hydrogen  and 
nitrogen ; its  hydrogen  combines  with  the  oxygen 

100 


NIT 


NIT 


Which  is  given  out  by  the  ignited  manganese,  and  forms 
water ; its  nitrogen  unites  at  the  same  time  to  an- 
other portion  of  the  oxygen,  and  constitutes  the  ni- 
trous gas. 

There  is  a cause  of  deception  in  this  experiment, 
against  which  the  operator  ought  to  be  on  his  guard, 
lest  he  should  conclude  no  nitrous  gas  is  formed,  when, 
in  reality,  there  is  a considerable  quantity.  The  am- 
monia, notwithstanding  every  precaution,  will  fre- 
quently pass  over  undecomposed.  If  the  receiver  in 
the  pneumatic  trough  is  filled  with  water,  great  part  of 
this  will  indeed  be  presently  absorbed ; but  still  some 
portion  of  it  will  mix  with  the  nitrous  gas  formed  in 
the  process.  U pon  admitting  the  atmospheric  air,  the 
nitrous  gas  will  become  decomposed,  and  the  red  ni- 
trous fumes  instantly  unite  with  the  alkali.  The  re- 
ceiver is  presently  filled  with  white  clouds  of  nitrate 
of  ammonia;  and  in  this  manner  a wrong  conclusion 
may  easily  be  drawn  from  the  want  of  the  orange  co- 
lour of  the  nitrous  fumes.  A considerable  quantity  of 
nitrous  gas  may  have  been  formed,  and  yet  no  orange 
colour  appear,  owing  to  this  circumstance;  and  there- 
fore it  is  easy  to  understand  how  a small  quantity  of 
nitrous  gas  may  be  most  effectually  disguised  by  the 
same  cause. 

Dr.  Milner  also  obtained  nitrous  gas,  by  passing  am- 
moniacal  gas  over  sulphate  of  iron  deprived  of  its 
water  of  crystallization. 

III.  Nitrous  acid.  See  Nitric  acid. 

IV.  Nitric  acid.  See  Nitrous  acid. 

Azote  combines  with  chlorine  and  iodine,  to  form 
two  very  formidable  compounds : — 

1.  The  chloride  of  azote  was  discovered  about  the 
beginning  of  1812,  by  Dulong;  but  its  nature  was  first 
investigated  and  ascertained  by  Sir  H.  Davy. 

Put  into  an  evaporating  porcelain  basin  a solution 
of  one  part  of  nitrate  or  muriate  of  ammonia  in  10 
of  water,  heated  to  about  100°,  and  invert  into  it  a 
wide-mouthed  bottle,  filled  with  chlorine.  As  the 
liquid  ascends,  by  the  condensation  of  the  gas,  oily- 
looking  drops  are  seen  floating  on  its  surface,  which 
collect  together,  and  fall  to  the  bottom  in  large  globules. 
This  is  chloride  of  azote.  By  putting  a thin  stratum 
of  common  salt  into  the  bottom  of  the  basin,  we  pre- 
— vent  the  decomposition  of  the  chloride  of  azote,  by 

* ' the  ammoniacal  salt.  It  should  be  formed  only  in 
very  small  quantities.  The  chloride  of  azote , thus  ob- 
tained, is  an  oily-Iooking  liquid,  of  a yellow  colour, 
and  a very  pungent  intolerable  odour,  similar  to  that 
of  chlorocarbonous  acid.  Its  sp.  gr.  is  1.653.  When 
tepid  water  is  poured  into  a glass  containing  it,  it  ex- 
pands into  a volume  of  elastic  fluid,  of  an  orange  co- 
lour, which  diminishes  as  it  passes  through  the 
water. 

1 1 attempted,’  says  Sir  H.  Davy,  ‘ to  collect  the  pro- 
ducts of  the  explosion  of  the  new  substance,  by  apply- 
ing the  heat  of  a spirit-lamp  to  a globule  of  it,  confined 
in  a curved  glass  tube  over  water;  a little  gas  was  at 
first  extricated ; but  long  before  the  water  had  attained 
the  temperature  of  ebullition,  a violent  flash  of  light 
was  perceived,  with  a sharp  report;  the  tube  and  gliiss 
were  broken  into  small  fragments,  and  I received  a 
severe  wound  in  the  transparent  cornea  of  the  eye, 
which  has  produced  a considerable  inflammation  of 
the  eye,  and  obliges  me  to  make  this  communication 
by  an  amanuensis.  This  experiment  proves  what 
extreme  caution  is  necessary  in  operating  on  this  sub- 
stance, for  the  quantity  I used  was  scarcely  as  large  as 
a grain  of  mustard-seed.’— It  evaporates  pretty  rapidly 
in  the  air;  and  in  vacuo  it  expands  into  a vapour, 
which  still  possesses  the  power  of  exploding  by  heat. 
When  it  is  cooled  artificially  in  water,  or  the  ammo- 
niacal  solution,  to  40°  F.,'  the  surrounding  fluid 
congeals;  but  when  alone,  it  may  be  surrounded 
with  a mixture  of  ice  and  muriate  of  lime,  without 
freezing. 

It  gradually  disappears  in  water,  producing  azote; 
while  the  water  becomes  acid,  acquiring  the  taste  and 
smell  of  a weak  solution  of  nitro-muriatic  acid. 

With  muriatic  and  nitric  acids,  it  yields  azote ; and, 
with  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  a mixture  of  azote  and  oxy- 
gen. In  strong  solutions  of  ammonia  it  detonates; 
with  weak  ones,  it  affords  azote. 

When  it  was  exposed  to  pure  mercury,  out  of  the 
contact  of  water,  a white  powder  (calomel)  and  azote 
were  the  results.  ‘ The  action  of  mercury  on  the  com- 
pound,’ says  Sir  II.  ‘ appeared  to  offer  a more  correct 

no 


and  less  dangerous  mode  of  attempting  its  analysis; 
but  on  introducing  two  grains  under  a glass  tube  filled 
with  mercury,  and  inverted,  a violent  detonation  oc- 
curred, by  which  I was  slightly  wounded  in  the  head 
and  hands,  and  should  have  been  severely  wounded, 
had  not  iny  eyes  and  face  been  defended  by  a plate  of 
glass,  attached  to  a proper  cap ; a precaution  very  ne- 
cessary in  all  investigations  of  this  body.’  In  using 
smaller  quantities,  and  recently  distilled  mercury,  he 
obtained  the  results  of  the  experiments,  without  any 
violence  of  action. 

A small  globule  of  it,  thrown  into  a glass  of  olive 
oil,  produced  a most  violent  explosion ; and  the  glass, 
though  strong,  was  broken  into  fragments.  Similar 
effects  were  produced  by  its  action  on  oil  of  turpentine 
and  naphtha.  When  it  was  thrown  into  ether  or  alko- 
hol,  there  was  a very  slight  action.  When  a particle 
of  it  was  touched  under  water  by  a particle  of  phos- 
phorus, a brilliant  light  was  perceived  under  the  water, 
and  permanent  gas  was  disengaged,  having  the  cha- 
racters of  azote. 

When  quantities  larger  than  a grain  of  mustard- 
seed  were  used  for  the  contact  with  phosphorus,  the 
explosion  was  always  so  violent  as  to  break  the  vessel 
in  which  the  experiment  was  made.  On  tinfoil  and 
zinc  it  exerted  no  action ; nor  on  sulphur  and  resin. 
But  it  detonated  most  violently  when  thrown  into  a 
solution  of  phosphorus  in  ether  or  alkohol. 

The  mechanical  force  of  this  compound  in  detona- 
tion, seems  superior  to  that  of  any  other  known,  not 
even  excepting  the  ammoniacal  fulminating  silver. 
The  velocity  of  its  action  appears  to  be  likewise 
greater. 

2.  Iodide  of  azote.  Azote  does  not  combine  directly 
with  iodine.  We  obtain  the  combination  only  by 
means  of  ammonia.  It  was  discovered  by  Courtois, 
and  carefully  examined  by  Colin.  When  ammoniacal 
gas  is  passed  over  iodine,  a viscid  shining  liquid  is  im- 
mediately formed,  of  a brownish-black  colour,  which, 
in  proportion  as  it  is  saturated  with  ammonia,  loses  its 
lustre  and  viscosity.  No  gas  is  disengaged  during  the 
formation  of  this  liquid,  which  may  be  called  iodide 
of  ammonia.  It  is  not  fulminating.  When  dissolved 
in  water,  a part  of  the  ammonia  is  decomposed;  its 
hydrogen  forms  hydriodic  acid ; and  its  azote  com- 
bines with  a portion  of  the  iodine,  and  forms  the  ful- 
minating powder.  We  may  obtain  the  iodide  of  azote 
directly,  by  putting  pulverulent  iodine  into  common 
water  of  ammonia.  This  indeed  is  the  best  way  of 
preparing  it ; for  the  water  is  not  decomposed,  and 
seems  to  concur  in  the  production  of  this  iodide,  only 
by  determining  the  formation  of  hydriodate  of  am- 
monia. 

The  iodide  of  azote  is  pulverulent,  and  of  a brown- 
ish-black colour.  It  detonates  from  the  smallest  shock, 
and  from  heat,  with  a feeble  violet  vapour.  When 
properly  prepared,  it  often  detonates  spontaneously. 
Hence,  after  the  black  powder  is  formed,  and  the 
liquid  ammonia  decanted  off,  we  must  leave  the  cap- 
sule containing  it  in  perfect  repose. 

When  this  iodide  is  put  into  potassa  water,  azote  is 
disengaged,  and  the  same  products  are  obtained  as 
when  iodine  is  dissolved  in  that  alkaline  lixivium. 
The  hydriodate  of  ammonia,  which  has  the  property 
of  dissolving  a great  deal  of  iodine,  gradually  decom- 
poses the  fulminating  powder,  while  azote  is  set  at 
liberty.  Water  itself  has  this  properly,  though  in  a 
much  lower  degree.  As  the  elements  of  iodide  of 
azote  are  so  feebly  united,  it  ought  to  be  prepared  with 
great  precautions,  and  should  not  be  preserved.  In 
the  act  of  transferring  a little  of  it  from  a platina  cap- 
sule to  a piece  of  paper,  the  whole  exploded  in  my 
hands,  though  the  friction  of  the  particles  on  each 
other  was  inappreciably  small. 

The  strongest  arguments  for  the  compound  nature 
of  azote  are  derived  from  its  slight  tendency  lo  com- 
bination, and  from  its  being  found  abundantly  in  the 
organs  of  animals  which  feed  on  substances  that  do 
not  contain  it. 

Its  uses  in  the  economy  of  the  globe  are  little  under- 
stood. This  is  likewise  favourable  to  the  idea  that 
the  real  chemical  nature  is  as  yet  unknown,  and  leads 
to  the  hope  of  its  being  decomposable. 

It  would  appear  that  the  atmospheric  azote  and  oxy- 
gen spontaneously  combine  in  other  proportions,  under 
certain  circumstances,  in  natural  operations.  Thus 
we  find,  that  mild  calcareous  or  alkaline  matter  favours 


NIT 


NOS 


the  formation  of  nitric  acid,  in  certain  regions  of  the 
earth;  and  that  they  are  essential  to  its  production  in 
our  artificial  arrangements,  and  forming  nitre  from  de- 
composing animal  and  vegetable  substances.” 

Nitrogen,  protoxide  of.  See  Nitrogen. 

Nitrogen,  deutoxide  of.  See  Nitrogen. 

NITROLEUCIC  ACID.  {Acidum  nitro-leucicum : 
bo  called  from  its  being  obtained  by  the  action  of  nitric 
acid  on  leucine.)  Leucine  is  capable  of  uniting  to  ni- 
tric acid,  and  forming  a compound,  which  Braconnot 
has  called  the  nitro-leucic  acid.  When  we  dissolve 
leucine  in  nitric  acid,  and  evaporate  the  solution  to  a 
certain  point,  it  passes  into  a crystalline  mass,  without 
any  disengagement  of  nitrous  vapour,  or  of  any  gase- 
ous matter;  if  we  press  this  mass  between  blotting 
paper,  and  redissolve  it  in  water,  we  shall  obtain  from 
this  by  concentration,  fine,  divergent,  and  nearly  co- 
lourless needles.  These  constitute  the  new  acid.  It 
unites  to  the  bases,  forming  salts  which  fuse  on  red- 
hot  coals.  The  nitro-leucates  of  lime  and  magnesia 
are  unalterable  in  the  air. 

NITRO-MURIATIC  ACID.  Aqua  regia.  When 
nitric  and  muriatic  acids  are  mixed,  they  become  yel- 
low, and  acquire  the  power  of  readily  dissolving  gold, 
which  neither  of  the  acids  possessed  separately.  This 
mixture  evolves  chlorine,  a partial  decomposition  of 
both  acids  having  taken  place;  and  water,  chlorine, 
and  nitrous  acid  gas  are  thus  produced,  that  is,  the  hy- 
drogen of  the  muriatic  acid  abstracts  oxygen  from  the 
nitric  to  form  water.  The  result  must  be  chlorine  and 
nitrous  acid. — Brande. 

NITRO-SACCHARIC  ACID.  Acidum  nitro-sac- 
charicum.  Nitro-saccharine  acid.  When  we  heat 
the  sugar  of  gelatine  with  nitric  acid,  they  dissolve 
without  any  appareut  disengagement  of  gas,  and  if 
we  evaporate  this  solution  to  a proper  degree,  it  forms, 
on  cooling,  a crystalline  mass.  On  pressing  this  mass 
between  the  folds  of  blotting-paper,  and  recrystallizing 
them,  we  obtain  beautiful  prisms,  colourless,  transpa- 
rent, and  slightly  striated.  These  crystals  are  very 
different  from  those  which  serve  to  produce  them  ; and 
constitute,  according  to  Braconnot,  a true  acid,  which 
results  from  the  combination  of  the  nitric  acid  itself, 
with  the  sweet  matter  of  which  the  first  crystals  are 
formed.  Thenard  conceives  it  is  the  nitrous  acid 
which  is  present. 

Nitro-saccharic  acid  has  a taste  similar  to  that  of  the 
tartaric  ; only  it  is  a little  sweetish.  Exposed  to  the 
fire  in  a capsule,  it  froths  much,  and  is  decomposed 
with  the  diffusion  of  a pungent  smell.  Thrown  on 
burning  coals,  it  acts  like  saltpetre.  It  produces  no 
change  in  saline  solutions.  Finally,  it  combines  with 
the  bases,  and  gives  birth  to  salts  which  possess  pecu- 
liar properties.  For  example,  the  salt  which  it  forms 
with  lime  is  not  deliquescent,  and  is  very  little  soluble 
in  strong  alkohol.  That  which  it  produces  with 
the  oxide  of  lead  detonates  to  a certain  degree  by 
the  action  of  heat. — Ann.  de  Chimie  et  de  Pkys.  xiii 
113. 

NITRO-SULPHURIC  ACID.  A compound,  con- 
sisting of  one  part  nitre  dissolved  in  about  ten  of  sul- 
phuric acid. 

NITROUS.  Nitrosus.  Of  or  belonging  to  nitre. 

Nitrous  acid.  Acidum  nitrosum.  Fuming  ni- 
trous acid.  It  appears  to  form  a distinct  genus  of  salts, 
that  may  be  termed  nitrites.  But  these  cannot  be 
made  by  a direct  union  of  their  component  parts,  being 
obtainable  only  by  exposing  a nitrate  to  a high  tempe- 
rature, which  expels  a portion  of  its  oxygen  in  the 
state  of  gas,  and  leaves  the  remainder  in  the  state  of  a 
nitrate,  if  the  heat  be  not  urged  so  far,  or  continued  so 
Ions,  as  to  effect  a complete  decomposition  of  the  salt. 
In  this  way  the  nitrates  of  potassa  and  soda  may  be 
obtained,  and  perhaps  those  of  barytes,  strontian,  lime, 
and  magnesia.  The  nitrites  are  particularly  charac- 
terized, by  being  decomposable  by  all  the  acids  except 
the  carbonic,  even  by  the  nitric  arid  itself,  all  of  which 
expel  them  from  nitrous  acid.  We  are  little  acquainted 
with  any  one  except  that  of  potassa,  which  attracts 
moisture  from  the  air,  changes  blue  vegetable  colours 
to  green,  is  somewhat  acrid  to  the  taste,  and  when 
powdered  emits  a smell  of  nitric  oxide. 

The  acid  itself  is  best  obtained  by  exposing  nitrate 


of  lead  to  heat  in  a glass  retort.  Pure  nitrous  acid 
comes  over  in  the  form  of  an  orange-coloured  liquid 
It  is  so  volatile  as  to  boil  at  the  temperature  of  82°. 
Its  specific  gravity  is  1.450.  When  mixed  with  water 
it  is  decomposed,  and  nitrous  gas  is  disengaged,  occa- 
sioning effervescence.  It  is  composed  of  one  volume 
of  oxygen  united  with  two  of  nitrous  gas.  It  there- 
fore consists  ultimately,  by  weight,  of  1.75  nitrogen  -f- 
4 oxygen ; by  measure,  of  2 oxygen  -f-  1 nitrogen. 
The  variously  coloured  acids  of  nitre  are  not  nitrous 
acids,  but  nitric  acid  impregnated  with  nitrous  gas,  the 
deutoxide  of  nitrogen  or  azote. 

Nitrous  oxide.  See  Nitrogen. 

NI'TRUM.  This  name  was  anciently  given  to  na 
tron,  but  in  modern  times  to  nitre.  See  Nitre. 

Nitrum  purificatum.  See  Nitre. 

Nitrum  vitriolatum.  Sulphuric  acid  and  soda. 
See  Sodce  sulphas. 

NO'BILIS.  ( Quasi  noscibilis ; from  nosco , to 
know.)  Noble.  Some  parts  of  animals,  and  of  plants, 
are  so  named  by  way  of  eminence  ; as  a valve  of  the 
heart,  and  the  more  perfect  metals,  as  gold  and  silver. 

NOCTAMBULATION.  Noctambulatio ; from  nox, 
night,  and  ambulo , to  walk.)  Noctisurgium.  Walk- 
ing in  theiaight,  when  asleep.  See  Oneirodynia  activa. 

Noctisu'rgium.  See  Noctambulation. 

Nocturnal  emission.  See  Gonorrhcea  dormientium. 

Nodding  cnicus.  See  Cnicus  cernuus. 

NODE.  Nodus.  A hard  circumscribed  tumour, 
proceeding  from  a bone,  and  caused  by  a swelling  of 
the  periosteum  ; they  appear  on  every  part  of  the  body, 
but  are  more  common  on  such  as  are  thinly  covered 
with  muscles,  as  the  os  frontis,  forepart  of  the  tibia, 
radius,  and  ulna.  As  they  increase  in  size,  they  be- 
come more  painful  from  the  distention  they  occasion 
in  the  periosteum.  When  they  continue  long,  the  bone 
becomes  completely  cariods. 

NODOSUS.  Knotty:  nodose.  Applied  to  the  form 
of  the  seed-vessel  of  the  Cucurbita  melopepo. 

NODUS.  (From  anad , to  tie,  Hebrew.)  A node  or 
swelling  upon  a bone.  See  Node. 

No'li  me  tangere.  A species  of  herpes  affecting 
the  skin  and  cartillages  of  the  nose,  very  difficult  to 
cure,  because  it  is  exasperated  by  most  applications. 
The  disease  generally  commences  with  small,  superfi- 
cial spreading  ulcerations  of  the  alas  of  the  nose,  which 
become  more  or  less  concealed  beneath  fufuraceous 
scabs.  The  whole  nose  is  frequently  destroyed  by  the 
progressive  ravages  of  this  peculiar  disorder,  which 
sometimes  cannot  be  stopped  or  retarded  by  any  treat- 
ment, external  or  internal. 

NO'MA.  (From  v£po>,  to  eat.)  An  ulcer  that 
sometimes  attacks  the  cheek  or  vulva  of  young  girls. 
It  appears  in  the  form  of  red  and  somewhat  livid 
spots;  is  not  attended  with  pyrexia,  pain,  or  tumour, 
and  in  a few  days  becomes  gangrenous. 

NON-NATURAL.  Res  non-naturales.  Under 
this  term,  ancient  physicians  comprehend  air,  meat 
and  drink,  sleep  and  watching,  motion  and  rest,  the 
retentions  and  excretions,  and  the  affections  of  the 
mind ; or,  in  other  words,  those  principal  matters  which 
do  not  enter  into  the  composition  of  the  body,  but  at 
the  same  time  are  necessary  to  its  existence. 

NO'NUS.  ( Quasi  novenus  ; from  novem , nine.) 
The  ninth.  Sometimes  applied  to  the  coracoid  muscle 
of  the  shoulder. 

No'pal.  Nopalnochetzth.  The  plant  that  feeds  the 
cochineal  insect. 

Norla'ndic.e  baccx:.  See  Rubus  arcticus.  ; 

NOSE.  Nasus.  See  Narcs. 

Nose , bleeding  nf.  See  Epistaxis. 

NOSOCO'MIUM.  (From  voaos,  a disease,  and 
ko/xe to,  to  take  care  of.)  Nosodochium.  An  hospital 
or  infirmary  for  the  sick. 

Nosodo'chium.  See  Nosocomium. 

NOSOLOGY.  (Nosologia  ; from  voaos,  a disease, 
and  Xoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  names  of 
diseases.  Modern  physicians  understand  by  nosology 
the  arrangement  of  diseases  in  classes,  orders,  genera, 
species,  &c.  The  following  are  the  approved  arrange- 
ments of  the  several  nosologists.  That  of  Dr.  Cullen 
is  generally  adopted  in  this  country,  and  next  to  it  the 
arrangement  of  Sauvages. 


Ill 


NOSOLOGY. 


Synoptical 


Order  I. 
FEBRES. 

§1.  Intermittentes . 

1.  Tertiana 

2.  Quartana 

3.  Quotidiana. 

§2.  Continues. 

4.  Synocha 

5.  Typhus 

6.  Synochus. 

ORDER  II. 
PHLEGMASIA. 

7.  Phlogosis 


Order  I. 
COM  AT  A. 

41.  Appoplexia 

42.  Paralysis. 

Order  II. 
ADYNAMIA. 

43.  Syncope 

44.  Dyspepsia 

45.  Hypochondriasis 


Order  I. 
MARCORES. 

67.  Tabes 

68.  Atrophia. 

Order  II. 

LNTUMESCENTIA. 
§ 1.  Adiposes. 

69.  Polysarcia 


Order  I. 

DYSASTHESIA. 

30.  Caligo 

91.  Amaurosis 

92.  Dysopia 

93.  Pseudoblepsis 

94.  Dysecoea 

95.  Paracusis 

96.  Anosmia 

97.  Agheustia 

98.  Anaesthesia. 

Order  II. 
DYSOREXIA. 

§ 1.  Appetitus  erronei. 

99.  Bulimia 

100.  Polydipsia 

101.  Pica 

102.  Satyriasis 

103.  Nymphomania 

104.  Nostalgia. 


Order  I. 
MACULAE. 
Genus  1.  Leucoma 

2.  Vitiligo 

3.  Ephelis 

4.  Gutta  rosea 

5.  Nsevus 

6.  Ecchymoma. 

Order  II. 
EFFLORESCENTLE. 

7.  Herpes 

8.  Epinyctis 

9.  Psvdracia 

10.  Hydroa. 

Order  III. 
HYMATA. 

11.  Erythema 

12.  CEdema 

13.  Emphysema 

14.  Scirrhus 

15.  Phlegmone 

16.  Bubo 

17.  Parotis 
112 


o of  the  Classes , Orders , 

CLASS 

8.  Ophthalmia 

9.  Phrenitis 

10.  Cynanche 

11.  Pneumonia 

12.  Carditis 

13.  Peritonitis 

14.  Gastritis 

15.  Enteritis 

16.  Hepatitis 

17.  Splenitis 

18.  Nephritis 

19.  Cystitis 

20.  Hysteritis 

CLASS  II.- 

46.  Chlorosis. 

Order  III. 
SPASMI. 

47.  Tetanus 

48.  Convulsio 

49.  Chorea 

50.  Raphania 

51.  Epilepsia 

52.  Palpitatio 

CLASS  III.- 
§2.  Flatuosee. 

70.  Pneumatosis 

71.  Tympanites 

72.  Physometra. 

§ 3.  Aquosee. 

73.  Anasarca 

74.  Hydrocephalus 

75.  Hydrorachitis 

76.  Hydrothorax 

CLASS  IV 
§ 2.  Appetitus  deficientes. 

105.  Anorexia 

106.  Adipsia 

107.  Anaphrodisia. 

Order  III. 
DYSCINESLE 

108.  Aphonia 

109.  Mutitas 

110.  Paraphonia 

111.  Psellismus 

112.  Strabismus 

113.  Dysphagia 

114.  Contractura. 

Order  IV. 
APOCENOSES. 

115.  Profusio 
116  Ephidrosis 

117.  Epiphora 

118.  Ptyalismus 

119.  Enuresis 

Synoptical  V iew  of 
CLASS 

18.  Furunculus 

19.  Anthrax 

20.  Cancer 

21.  Paronychia 

22.  Phimosis. 

ORDER  IV. 
EXCRESCENTLE. 

23.  Sarcoma 

24.  Condyloma 

25.  Verruca 

26.  Pterygium 

27.  Hordeolum 

28.  Bronchocele 

29.  Exostosis 

30.  Gibbositas 

31.  Lordosis. 

Order  V. 
CYSTIDES. 

32.  Aneurisma 

33.  Varix 

34.  Hydatis 

35.  Marisca 

36-  Staphyloma 


and  Genera , according  to  th 

I. — PYREXLE. 

21.  Rheumatismus 

22.  Odontalgia 

23.  Podagra 

24.  Arthropuosis. 

Order  III. 
EXANTHEMATA. 

25.  Variola 

26.  Varicella 

27.  Rubeola 

28.  Scarlatina 

29.  Pestis 

30.  Erysipelas 

31.  Miliaria 

-NEUROSES. 

53.  Asthma 
54  Dyspnoea 

55.  Pertussis 

56.  Pyrosis 

57.  Colica 

58.  Cholera 

59.  Diarrhoea 

60.  Diabetes 

61.  Hysteria 

-CACHEXLE. 

77.  Ascites 

78.  Hydrometra 

79.  Hydrocele. 

§ 4.  Solidee. 

80.  Physconia 

81.  Rachitis. 

Order  III. 
IMPETIGINES. 

82.  Scrofula 

—LOCALES. 

120.  Gonorrhoea. 

Order  V. 
EPISCHESES. 

121.  Obstipatio 

122.  Ischuria 

123.  Dysuria 

124.  Dyspermatismus 

125.  Amenorrhcea. 

Order  VI. 
TUMORES. 

126.  Aneurisma 

127.  Varix 

128.  Ecchymoma 

129.  Scirrhus 

130.  Cancer 

131.  Bubo 

132.  Sarcoma 

133.  Verruca 

134.  Clavus 

135.  Lupia 

ihe  System  of  Sauvages. 

I. — VITIA. 

37.  Lupia 

38.  Hydarthrus 

39.  Apostema 

40.  Exomphalus 

41.  Oscheocele. 

Order  VI. 
ECTOPLE. 

42.  Exophthalmia 

43.  Blepharoptosis 

44.  Hypostaphyle 

45.  Paraglossa 

46.  Proptoma 

47.  Exania 

48.  Exocyste 

49.  Hysteroptosis 

50.  Enterocele 

51.  Epiplocele 

52.  Gasterocele 

53.  Hepatocele 

54.  Splenocele 

55.  Hysterocele 

56.  Cystocele 

57.  Eucephalocele 


Ccllenian  System. 

32.  Urticaria 

33.  Pemphigus 

34.  Aphtha. 

Order  IV. 
HAMORRHAGLE 

35.  Epistaxis 

36.  Haemoptysis 

37.  Ilaemorrhois 

38.  Menorrhagia. 

Order  V. 
PROFLUVIA. 

39.  Catarrhus 

40.  Dysenteria. 


62.  Hydrophobia. 

Order  IV. 
VESANLE. 

63.  Amentia. 

64.  Melancholia 

65.  Mania 

66.  Oneirodynia. 


83.  Syphilis 

84.  Scorbutus 

85.  Elephantiasis 

86.  Lepra 

87.  Frambossia 

88.  Trichoma 

89.  Icterus. 


136.  Ganglion 

137.  Hydatis 

138.  Hydarthrus 

139.  Exostosis. 

Order  VII. 
ECTOPIA. 

140.  Hernia 

141.  Prolapsus 

142.  Luxatio. 

Order  VHI. 
DYALYSES. 

143.  Vulnus 

144.  Ulcus 

145.  Herpes 

146.  Tinea 

147.  Psora 

148.  Fractura 

149.  Caries. 


58.  Hysteroloxia 

59.  Parochidium 

60.  Exarthrema 

61.  Diastasis 

62.  Laxarthrus. 

Order  VII. 
PLAGUE. 

63.  Vulnus 

64.  Punctura 

65.  Excoriatio 

66.  Contusio 

67.  Fractura 

68.  Fissura 

69.  Ruptura 

70.  Amputatura 

71.  Ulcus 

72.  Exulceratio 

73.  Sinus 

74.  Fistula 

75.  Rhagas 

76.  Eschara 

77.  Carie9 

78.  Arthrocace. 


NOSOLOGY. 


Order  I.  * 
CQNTINUA. 

79.  Ephemera 

80.  Synocha 

81.  Synochus 


Order  I. 

EXANTHEMATICA. 

91.  Pestis 

92.  Variola 

93.  Pemphigus 

94.  Rubeola 

95.  Miliaris 

96.  Purpura 


Order  I. 

TONICI  PARTIALES. 

116.  Strabismus 

117.  Trismus 

118.  Obstipitas 

119.  Contractura 

120.  Grampus 

121.  Priapismus. 


Order  I. 
SPASMODIC.®. 

138.  Ephialtes 

139.  Sternutatio 

140.  Oscedo 


Order  I. 

DYSESTHESIA. 

152.  Cataracta 

153.  Caligo 
154  Amblyopia 
155.  Amaurosis 
156  Anosmia 

157.  Agheustia 

158.  Dysecoea 
150.  Paracusis 

160.  Cophosis 


Order  I. 
VAGI. 

183.  Arthritis 

184.  Osiocopus 

185.  Rheumatismus 

186.  Catarrhus 

187.  Anxietas 

188.  Lassitudo 

189.  Stupor 

190.  Pruritus 

191.  Algor 

192.  Ardor. 


Order  1. 

HALLUCINATIONES. 
216  Vertigo 

217.  Suffusio 

218.  Diplopia 

219.  Syrigmos 

220.  Hypochondriasis 

221.  Somnambulismus. 


Order  I. 

SANGUIFLUXUS. 

239.  Heemorrhagia 

240.  Haemoptysis 

241.  Stomacace 

242.  Haematemesis 

243.  Haematuria 

244.  Menorrhagia 

245.  Abortus. 

Order  II. 
ALVIFLUXUS. 

246.  Hepatirrhoea 


Order  I. 
MACIES. 
275.  Tabes 


CLASS  II.— FEBRES. 

2.  Typhus  85.  Tritaeophya 


83.  Hectica. 

Order  II. 
REMITTENTES. 

84.  Amphimerina 


3.  Tetartophya. 

On  njrn  TT1 

INTERMITTENTES. 
87.  Quotidiana 


CLASS  III.— PHLEGMASIA. 


97.  Erysipelas 

98.  Scarlatina 

99.  Essera 

100.  Aphtha. 

Order  II. 

MEMBRANACEA. 

101.  Phrenitis 

102.  Paraphrenesis 


103.  Pleuritis 

104.  Gastritis 

105.  Enteritis 

106.  Epiploitis 

107.  Metritis. 

Order  III. 

PARENCHYMATOSA. 

108.  Cystitis 


88.  Tertiana 

89.  Quartana 

90.  Erratica. 


109.  Cephalitis 

110.  Cynanche 

111.  Carditis 

112.  Peripneumonia 

113.  Hepatitis 

114.  Splenitis 

115.  Nephritis. 


CLASS  IV.— SPASMI. 
Order  II.  126.  Pandiculatio 

TONICI  GENERALES.  127.  Apomyttosis 

122.  Tetanus  128.  Convulsio 

123.  Catochus.  129.  Tremor 

Order  III.  130.  Palpitatio 

CLONICI  PARTIALES.  131.  Claudicatio. 

124.  Nystagmus 

125.  Carpliologia 


Order  IV. 

CLONICI  GENERALES 

132.  Rigor 

133.  Eclampsia 

134.  Epilepsia 

135.  Hysteria 

136.  Scelotyrbe 

137.  Beriberia. 


CLASS  V. — ANHELATIONES. 

141.  Singultus  144.  Dyspnoea 

142.  Tussis.  145.  Asthma 

Order  II.  146.  Orthopnoea 

OPPRESSIVA.  147.  Angina 

143.  Stertor  148.  Pleurodyne 


149.  Rheuma 

150.  Hydrothorax 

151.  Empyema. 


CLASS  VI.— DEBILITATES. 


161.  Anaesthesia. 

Order  II. 
ANEPITHYMIA. 

162.  Anorexia 

163.  Adipsia 

164.  Anaphrodisia. 

Order  III. 
DYSC1NESIA. 

165.  Mutitas 

166.  Aphonia 

167.  Pscllismus 


168.  Paraphonia 

169.  Paralysis 

170.  Hemiplegia 

171.  Paraplexia. 

Order  IV. 
LEIPOPS  Y CHIA. 

172.  Asthenia 

173.  Leipothymia 

174.  Syncope 

175.  Asphyxia. 


Order  V. 
COMATA. 

176.  Catalepsis 

177.  Ecstasis 

178.  Typhomania 

179.  Lethargus 

180.  Cataphora 

181.  Carus 

182.  Apoplexia. 


CLASS  VII.— DOLORES. 


Order  II. 
CAPITIS 

193.  Cephalalgia 

194.  Cephalaea 

195.  Hemicrania 

196.  Ophthalmia 

197.  Otalgia 

198.  Odontalgia. 

Order  III. 
PECTORIS. 

199.  Dysphagia 
200  Pyrosis 


201.  Cardiogmus. 

Order  IV. 

ABDOMINALES  IN- 
TERNE 

202.  Cardialgia 

203.  Gastrodynia 

204.  Colica 

205.  Hepatalgia 

206.  Splenalgia 

207.  Nephralgia 

208.  Dystocia 

209.  Hysteralgia. 


Order  V. 

EXTERNI  ET  ARTUUM 

210.  Mastodynia 

211.  Rachialgia 

212.  Lumbago 

213.  Ischias 

214.  Proctalgia 

215.  Pudendagra. 


CLASS  VHI. — VESANIA. 


Order  II. 
MOROSITATES. 

222.  Pica 

223.  Bulimia 

224.  Polydipsia 

225.  Antipathia 

226.  Nostalgia 

227.  Panopbobia 

228.  Satyriasis 


229.  Nymphomania 

230.  Tarantismus 

231.  Hydrophobia. 

Order  III. 
DELIRIA. 

232.  Paraphrosyne 

233.  Amentia 

234.  Melancholia 

235.  Mania 


236.  Daemonomania. 

Order  IV. 

VESANIA  ANOMALA 

237.  Amnesia 

238.  Agrypnia. 


CLASS 

247.  Hiemorrhois 

248.  Dysenteria 

249.  Meltena 

250.  Nausea 

251.  Vomitus 

252.  Ileus 

253.  Cholera 

254.  Diarrhoea 

255.  Cceliaca 

256.  Lienteria 

257.  Tenesmus 


:.— FLUXUS. 

Order  III. 
SERIFLUXUS. 

258.  Ephidrosis 

259.  Epiphora 

260.  Coryza 

261.  Ptyalismus 

262.  Anacatharsis 

263.  Diabetes 

264.  Enuresis 

265.  Dysuria 

266.  Pyuria 


267.  Leucorrhoea 

268.  Gonorrhoea 

269.  Dyspermatismus 

270.  Galactirrhcea 

271.  Otorrhoea. 

Order  IV. 
AERIFLUXUS 

272.  Flatulentia 

273.  Adopsophia 

274.  Dysodia. 


CLASS  X.— CACHEXIA. 

276.  Phthisis  Order  II.  280.  Pneumatosis 

277.  Atrophia  INTUMESCENTIA.  281.  Anasarca 

278.  Aridura.  279.  Polysarcia  282.  Phlegmatia 

P D 


113 


NOSOLOGY. 


283.  Fhysconia  . 

284.  Graviditas. 

Order  III. 

HYDROFES  PARTIA- 
LES. 

285.  Hydrocephalus 

286.  Physocephalus 

287.  Hydrorachitis 

288.  Ascites 

289.  Hydrometra 

290.  Physometra 


Order  I. 
CONTAGIOSI. 

1.  Morta 

2.  Pestis 


CONTmENTES. 
11.  Diaria 
1?.  Synocha 

13.  Synochus 

14.  Lenta. 


Order  I. 

MEMBRAN  ACEI. 

25.  Phrenitis 

26.  Paraphrenesis 

27.  Pleuritis 

28.  Gastritis 


Order  I. 
INTRINSECI. 

40.  Cephalalgia 

41.  Hemicrania 

42.  Gravedo 
48.  Ophthalmia 

44.  Otalgia 

45.  Odontalgia 


Order  I. 
IDEALES. 

65.  Delirium 

66.  Paraphrosyne 

67.  Amentia 

68.  Mania 

69.  D;emonia 

70.  Vesania 


Order  I. 
DEFECTIVE 

90.  Lassitudo 

91.  Languor 

92.  Asthenia 

93.  Lipothymia 

94.  Syncope 

95.  Asphyxia. 


Order  I. 
SPASTICI. 
12E  Spasmus 

122.  Priapismus 

123.  Borborygmos 

124.  Trismos 

125.  Sardiasis 

126.  Hysteria 


Order  I. 

SUFFOCATORII. 

146.  Raucedo 

147.  Vociferatio 

148.  Risus 

149.  Fletus 

150.  Suspirium 

151.  Oscitatio 

114 


291.  Tympanites 

292.  Meteorismus 

293.  Ischuria. 

Order  IV. 
TUBERA. 

294.  Rachitis 

295.  Scrofula 

296.  Carcinoma 

297.  Leontiasis 

298.  Malis 

299.  Framboesia. 


Order  V. 
IMPETIGINE3 

300.  Syphilis 

301.  Scorbutus 

302.  Elephantiasis 

303.  Lepra 

304.  Scabies 

305.  Tinea. 

Order  VI. 
ICTERITLE 

306.  Aurigo 

307.  Melasicterus 


308.  Phaenigmus 

309.  Chlorosis. 

Order  VIL 

CACHEXLE  ANOMA- 
hJE. 

310.  Phthiriasis 

311.  Trichoma 

312.  Alopecia 

313.  Elcosis 

314.  Gangrena 

315.  Necrosis 


Synoptical  View  of  the  System  of  Linnaeus. 
CLASS  I. — EXANTHEMATICI. 

3.  Variola  Order  II. 

4.  Rubeola  SPORADICI 

5.  Petechia  7.  Miliaria 

6.  Syphilis.  8.  Uredo 

CLASS  IE— CRITICI. 

Order  II.  18.  Duplicana 

INTERMITTENTES.  19.  Etrana. 

15.  Quotidiana  O rder  III. 

16.  Tertiana  EX  ACERB  ANTES. 

17.  Quartana  20.  Amphimfivua 


9.  Aphtha. 

Order  III. 
SOLITARII 

10.  Erysipelas. 


21.  Tritasus 

22.  Tetartophia 

23.  Hemitritsa 

24.  Hectica. 


CLASS  III. — 

29.  Enteritis 

30.  Proctitis 

31.  Cystitis. 

Order  II. 

PARENCHYMATICI. 

32.  Sphacelismus 


PHLOGlSTtCI. 

33.  Cynanche 

34.  Peripneumonia 

35.  Hepatitis 

36.  Splenitis 

37.  Nephritis 

38.  Hysteritis. 


CLASS  IV.— DOLOROSI. 

46.  Angina  54.  Pneumonica 

47.  Soda  55.  Hysteralgia 

48.  Cardialgia  56.  Nephritica 

49.  Gastrica  57.  Dysuria 

50.  Colica  58.  Pudendagra 

51.  Hepatica  59.  Proctica. 

52.  Splenica 

53.  Pleuritica 


Order  111. 
MUSCULOSI. 
30.  Phlegmone. 


Order  II. 
EXTRINSECI 

60.  Arthritis 

61.  Ostocopus 

62.  Rheumatismus 

63.  Volatica 

64.  Pruritus. 


CLASS  V.- 

-MENTALES. 

71.  Melancholia 

77.  Somnambulismus. 

83.  Nostalgia 

Order  II. 

Order  III. 

84.  Tarantismus 

IMAGINARIE 

PATHETECI. 

85.  Rabies 

72.  Syringmos 

78.  Citta 

86.  Hydrophobia 

73.  Phantasma 

79.  Bulimia 

87.  Cacositia 

74.  Vertigo 

80.  Polydipsia 

88.  Antipathia 

75.  Panophobia 

81.  Satyriasis 

89.  Anxietas. 

76.  Hypochondriasis 

82.  Erotomania 

CLASS  VI- 

-QUIET  ALES. 

Order  II. 

104.  Paralysis 

112.  Cophosis 

SOPOROSI. 

105.  Stupor 

113.  Anosmia 

96.  Somnolentia 

Odrer  III. 

114  Ageustia 

97.  Typhomania 

PRIVATIVE 

115.  Aphonia 

98.  Lethargus 

106.  Morosis 

116.  Anorexia 

99.  Cataphora 

107.  Oblivio 

117.  Adipsia 

100.  Carus 

108.  Amblyopia 

118.  Anesthesia 

101.  Apoplexia 

109.  Cataracta 

119.  Atecnia 

102.  Paraplegia 

110.  Amaurosis 

120.  Atonia. 

-03.  Hemiplegia 

111.  Scotomia 

CLASS 

VIE— MOTORII. 

127.  Tetanus 

133.  Orgasmus 

Order  111. 

128.  Catochus 

134.  Subsultus 

AGITATORH 

129.  Catalepsis 

135.  Carpologia 

141.  Rigor 

130.  Agrypnia. 

136.  Stridor 

142.  Convulsio 

Order  II. 

137.  Hippos 

143.  Epilepsia 

AG1TATORII. 

138.  Psellismus 

144.  Hieranosos 

131.  Tremor 

139.  Chorea 

145.  Raphania 

132.  Palpitatio 

140.  Beriberi. 

CLASS  VIII.— SUPPRESSORII. 

152.  Pandiculatio 

160.  Dyspnoea 

166.  Obstipatio 

153.  Singultus 

161.  Asthma 

167.  Ischuria 

154.  Sternutatio 

162.  Orthopncea 

168.  Dysmenorrhcea 

155.  Tussis 

163.  Ephialtes. 

169.  Dyslochia 

156.  Stertor 

Order  II. 

170.  Aglactatio 

157.  Anhelatio 

CONSTRICTORIE 

171.  Sterilitas. 

158.  Suffocatio 

164-  Anglutitio 

159.  Empyema 

185.  Flatulentia 

NOSOLOGY. 


Order  I. 
CAPITIS. 

172.  Otorrhoea 

173.  Epiphora 

174.  Hemorrhagia 

175.  Coryza 

176.  Stomacace 

177.  Ptyalismus. 

Order  II. 
THORACIS. 

178.  Screatus 

179.  Expectoratio 

Order  I. 
EMACIANTES. 
209.  Phthisis 
810.  Tabes 

211.  Atrophia 

212.  Marasmus 

213.  Rachitis. 


Order  1. 
HUMORALIA. 
£27.  Aridura 
128.  Digitium  * 

1229.  Emphysema 
230.  Oedema 
831.  Sugillatio 
232.  Inflammatio 
833.  Abscessus 

234.  Gangrena 

235.  Sphacelus. 

Order  II. 


CLASS  IX.- 

180.  Hemoptysis 

181.  Vomica. 

Order  III. 
ABDOMINIS. 

182.  Ructus 

183.  Nausea 

184.  Vomica 

185.  Hematemesis 

186.  Iliaca 

187.  Cholera 

188.  Diarrhoea 

189.  Lienteria 

CLASS  X. 
Order  II. 
TUMIDOSI. 

214.  Polysarcia 

215.  Leucophlegmatia 

216.  Anasarca 

217.  Hydrocephalus 

218.  Ascites 


251.  Cacoethes 

252.  Noma 


CLASS 


253. 

254. 

255. 

256. 

257. 

258. 

259. 

260. 
261. 
262. 


Carcinoma 

Ozena 

Fistula 

Caries 

Arthrocace 

Cocyta 

Paronychia 

Pernio 

Pressura 

Arctura. 

Order  IV. 


-EVACUATORII. 

190.  Cceliaca 

191.  Cholirica 

192.  Dysenteria 

193.  Hemorrhois 

194.  Tenesmus 

195.  Crepitus. 

Order  IV. 
GENITALIUM. 

196.  Enuresis 

197.  Stranguria 

198.  Diabetes 

199.  Hematuria 

—DEFORMES. 

219.  Hyposarca 

220.  Tympanites 

221.  Graviditas. 

Order  III. 
DECOLORES. 

222.  Cachexia 

223.  Chlorosis 

XI.— VITIA. 

279.  Clavus 

280.  Myrmecium 

281.  Eschara. 

Order  V. 


200.  Glus 

201.  Gonorrhoea 

202.  Leucorrhcea 

203.  Menorrhagia 

204.  Parturitio 

205.  Abortus 

206.  MoIel 

Order  V. 

CORPORIS  EXTERNI 

207.  Galactia 

208.  Sudor. 


224.  Scorbutus 

225.  Icterus 

226.  Plethora. 


302. 

303. 

304. 

305. 


Lordosis 

Distortio 

Tortura 

Strabismus 


TUMORES  PROTUBE-  306.  Lagophthalmia 


RANTES. 

282.  Aneurisma 

283.  Varix 

284.  Scirrhus 

285.  Struma 

286.  Atheroma 

287.  Anchylosis 


307.  Nyctalopia 

308.  Presbytia 

309.  Myopia 

310.  Labarium 

311.  Lagostoma 

312.  Apella 

313.  Atreta 

314.  Plica 


236.  Fractura 

SCABIES. 

289.  Natta 

315.  Hirsuties 

237.  Luxatura 

263.  Lepra 

290.  Spinola 

316.  Alopecia 

238.  Ruptura 

264.  Tinea 

291.  Exostosis. 

317.  Trichiasis. 

•239.  Contusura 

265.  Achor 

Order  VI. 

Order  VIII 

240.  Profusio 

266.  Psora 

PROCIDENTLE. 

MACULC. 

241.  Vulnus 

267.  Lippitudo 

292.  Hernia 

318.  Cicatrix 

242.  Amputatura 

268.  Serpigo 

293.  Prolapsus 

319.  Nevus 

243.  Laceratura 

269.  Herpes 

294.  Condyloma 

320.  Morphea 

244.  Punctura 

270.  Varus 

295.  Sarcoma 

321.  Vibex 

245.  Morsura 

271.  Bacchia 

296.  Pterygium 

322.  Sudamen 

246.  Combustura. 

272.  Bubo 

297.  Ectropium 

323.  Melasma 

247.  Excoriatura 

273.  Anthrax 

298.  Phimosis 

324.  Hepatizon 

248.  Intertrigo 

274.  Phlyctena 

299.  Clitorismus. 

325.  Lentigo 

249.  Rhagas. 

275.  Pustula 

Order  VII. 

326.  Ephelis. 

Order  III. 

276.  Papula 

DEFORMATIONES. 

EXULCERATIONES. 

277.  Hordeolum 

300.  Contractura 

250.  Ulcus 

278.  Verruca 

301.  Gibber 

* 

Synoptical  View  of  the  System  of  Vogel. 

CLASS  I. 

— FEBRES. 

Order  I. 

19.  Epiala 

40.  Urtica 

62.  Peritonitis 

INTERMITTENTES. 

20.  Causos 

41.  Bullosa 

63.  Mycolitis 

1.  Quotidiana 

21.  Elodes 

42.  Varicella 

64.  Pancreatica 

2.  Tertiana 

3.  Quartana 

4.  Quintana 

5.  Sextana 

6.  Septana 

7.  Octana 

8.  Nonana 

9.  Decimana 

10.  Vaga 

11.  Menstrua 

12.  Tertiana  duplex 

13.  Quartana  duplex 

14.  Quartana  triplex. 

Order  II. 
CONTINUE. 

§ 1.  Simplices. 

15.  Quotidiana 

16.  Synochus 

17.  Amatoria 

18.  Phrenitis 

Order  I. 

HAEMORRHAGIC. 

81.  Hemorrhagia 

82.  Epistaxis 

83.  Hemoptoe 


22.  Lethargus 

23.  Typhomania  ✓ 

24.  Leipyria 

25.  Phricodes 

26.  Lyngodes 

27.  Assodes 

28.  Cholerica 

29.  Syncopalis 

30.  Hydrophobia 

31.  Oscitans 

32.  Ictericodes 

33.  Pestilentialis 

34.  Siriasis. 

$ 2.  Composites. 

IT  1.  Exanlhematicee. 

35.  Variolosa 

36.  Morbillosa 

37.  Miliaris* 

38. 

39. 


Petechialis 

Scarlatina 


43.  Pemphigodes 

44.  Aphthosa. 

IT  2.  Inflammatorice. 

45.  Phrenismus 

46.  Chemosis 

47.  Ophthalmites 

48.  Otites 

49.  Angina 

50.  Pleuritis 

51.  Peripneumonia 

52.  Mediaslina 

53.  Pericarditis 

54.  Carditis 

55.  Paraphrenitis 

56.  Gastritis 

57.  Enteritis 

58.  Hepatitis 

59.  Splenitis 

60.  Mesenteritis 

61.  Omentitis 


CLASS  II.— PROFLUVIA. 


84.  Hemoptysis 

85.  Stomacace 

86.  Odontirrhoea 

87.  Otorrhoea 

88.  Ophthalmorrhagia 

P V 2 


89.  Ilematemesis 

90.  Hepatirrhoea 

91.  Catarrhexis 

92.  Hematuria 

93.  Cystirrhagia 


65.  Nephritis 

66.  Cystitis 

67.  Hysteritis 

68.  Erysipelacea 

69.  Podagrica 

70.  Panaritia 

71.  Cyssotis. 

IT  3.  Symptomatict s 

72.  Apoplectica 

73.  Catarrhalis 

74.  Rheuraatica 

75.  Hemorrhoidalis 

76.  Lactea 

77.  Vulneraria 

78.  Suppuratoria 
70*  Lenta 

80.  Hectica. 


94.  Stymatosis 

95.  Hematopedesis 

96.  Menorrhagia 

97.  Abortio. 


115 


NOSOLOGY, 


Order  II. 

104.  Vomica 

112.  Leucorrhois 

120.  Exoneirosis 

APOCENOSES 

105.  Diarrhoea 

113.  Eneuresis 

121.  Hydropedesia 

98.  Catarrhus 

103.  Puorrhcea 

114.  Diuresis 

122.  Galactia 

99.  Epiphora 

107.  Dysenteria. 

115.  Diabetes 

123.  Hypercatharsi 

100.  Coryza 

108.  Lienteria 

116.  Puoturia 

124.  Ecphyse 

101.  Otopuosis 

109.  Coeliaca 

117.  Chylaria 

125.  Dysodia. 

102.  Otoplatos 

110.  Cholera 

118.  Gonorrhoea 

103  Ptyalismus 

111.  Pituitaria 

119.  Leucorrhma 

CLASS  ni.- 

-EPISCHESES. 

126  Gravedo 

128.  Obsti  patio 

130.  AmenorrhoBa 

132.  Deuteri  a 

127.  Flatulentia 

129.  Ischuria 

131.  Dyslochia 

133.  Agalaxis. 

CLASS  IV.— DOLORES. 

134.  Anxietas 

146.  Htemodia 

158.  Encausis 

170.  Dysmenorrhea 

135.  Blestrismug 

147.  Odaxismus 

159.  Nausea 

171.  Dystochia 

136.  Pruritus 

148.  Otalgia 

160.  Colica 

172.  Atocia 

137.  Catapsyxis 

149.  Acataposis 

161.  Eilema 

173.  Priapismus 

138.  Rheumatismus 

150.  Cionis 

162.  Ileus 

174.  Psoriasis 

139.  Arthritis 

151.  Himantesis 

163.  Stranguria 

175.  Podagra 

140.  Cephalalgia 

152.  Cardiogmus 

164.  Dysuria 

176.  Osteocopus 

141.  Cephalaea 

153.  Mastodynia 

165.  Lithiasis 

177:  Psophos 

342.  Clavus 

154.  Soda 

166.  Tenesmus 

178.  Volatica 

143.  Hemicrania 

155.  Periadynia 

167.  Ciunesia 

179.  Epiphlogisma. 

144.  Carebaria 

156.  Pneumatosis 

168.  Cedma 

145.  Odontalgia 

157  Cardialgia 

169.  Hysteralgia 

CLASS  V.— SPASMI. 

t 

380.  Tetanus 

191.  Convulsio] 

202.  Cataclasis 

213.  Palpitatio 

181.  Opisthotonus 

192.  Raphania 

203.  Cillosis 

214.  Vomitus 

182.  Episthotonus 

193.  Chorea 

204.  Sternutatio 

215.  Ructus 

183.  Catochus 

194.  Crampus 

205.  Tussis 

216.  Ruminatio 

184.  Tremor 

195.  Scelotyrbe 

206.  Clamor 

217.  Oesophagismus 

185.  Frigus 

196.  Angone 

207.  Trismus 

218.  Hypochondriasis 

186.  Horror 

197.  Glossocele 

208.  Capistrum 

219.  Hysteria 

187.  Rigor 

198.  Glossocoma 

209.  Sardiasis 

220.  Phlogosis 

188.  Epilepsia 

199.  Hippos 

210.  Gelasmus 

221.  Digitium. 

189.  Eclampsia 

200.  Illosis 

211.  Incubus 

190.  Ilieranosos 

201.  Cinclesis 

212.  Singultus 

CLASS  VI.- 

-ADYNAMLE. 

222.  Lassitudo 

238.  Amaurosis 

254.  Leptophonia 

270.  Pnigma 

223.  Asthenia 

239.  Cataracta 

255.  Oxyphonia 

271.  Renchus 

224.  Torpor 

240.  Synizezis 

256.  Rhenophonia 

272.  Rhochmos 

225.  Adynamia 

241.  Glaucoma 

257.  Mutitas 

273.  Lipothymia 

226.  Paralysis 

242.  Achlys 

258.  Traulotis 

274.  Syncope 

227.  Paraplegia 

243.  Nyctalopia 

259.  Psellotis 

275.  Asphyxia 

228.  Hemiplegia 

244.  Hemeralopia 

260.  Ichnophonia 

276.  Apepsia 

229.  Apoplexia 

245.  Hemalopia 

261.  Battarismus 

277.  Dyspepsia 

230.  Catalepsis 

246.  Dysicoia 

262.  Suspirium 

278.  Diapthora 

231.  Carus 

247.  Surditas 

263.  Oscitatio 

279.  Anorexia 

232.  Coma 

248.  Anosmia 

264.  Pandiculatio 

230.  Anatrope 

233.  Somnolentia 

249.  Apogeusis 

265.  Apnaea 

281.  Adipsia 

234.  Hypophasis 

250.  Asaphia 

266.  Macropnoea 

282.  Acyisis 

235.  Ptosis 

251.  Clangor 

267.  Dyspnoea 

283.  Agenesia 

236.  Amblyopia 

252.  Raucitas 

268.  Asthma 

284.  Anodynia. 

237.  Mydriasis 

253.  Aphonia 

269.  Orthopncea 

CLASS  VII. — HYPA2RESTHESES. 

285.  Antipathia 

290.  Marmaryge 

295.  Polydipsia 

300.  Malacia 

286  Agrypnia 

291.  Dysopia 

296.  Bulimus 

301.  Pica 

287.  Phantasma 

292.  Susurrus 

297.  Addephagia 

302.  Bombus 

288.  Caligo 

293.  Vertigo 

298.  Cynorexia 

303.  Celsa. 

289.  Htemalopia 

294.  Apogeusia 

299.  Allotriophagia 

CLASS  VHL— CACHEXLE. 

304.  Cachexia 

311.  Hydrothorax 

318.  Scorbutus 

325.  Physconia 

305.  Chlorosis 

312.  Rachitis 

319.  Syphilis 

326.  Pavacyisis 

306.  Icterus 

313.  Anasarca 

320.  Lepra 

327.  Gangrena 

307.  Melanchlorus 

314  Ascites 

321.  Elephantiasis 

328.  Sphacelus. 

308.  Atrophia 

315.  Hydrocystis 

322.  Elephantia 

309.  Tabes 

316.  Tympanites 

323.  Plica 

310.  Phthisis 

317.  Hysterophyse 

324.  Phthiriasis 

CLASS  IX. 

— PARANOLE. 

320.  Athymia 

332.  Melancholia 

335.  Enthusiasmus 

338.  Oblivio 

330.  Delirium 

333.  Ecstasis 

336.  Stupiditas 

339.  Somnium 

331.  Mania 

334.  Ecplexis 

337.  Amentia 

340.  Hypnobatasis 

CLASS  X.— VITIA. 

Order  I. 

347.  Encausis 

353.  Anthrax 

361.  Urticaria 

INFLAMMATIONES 

348.  Phimosis 

354.  Abscissus 

362.  Parulis 

341.  Ophthalmia 

349.  Paraphimosis 

355.  Onyx 

363.  Epulis 

342.  Blepbarotis 

350.  Pernio. 

356.  Hippopyon 

364.  Anchylops 

343.  Erysipelas 

Order  II. 

357.  Phygethlon 

3C5.  Paraglossa 

344.  Hieropyr 

HUMORES. 

358.  Empyema 

366.  Chilon 

345.  Paronychia 

351.  Phlegmone 

359.  Phyma 

367.  Scrofula 

346.  Onychia 

352.  Furunculus 

360.  Ecthym&ta 

368.  Bubon 

116 


NOSOLOG1 


369.  Bronchocele 

408.  Aneurisma 

443.  Herpes 

478,  Anapleusis 

370.  Parotis 

409.  Cirsocele 

444.  Scabies 

479.  Spasma 

371.  Gongrona 

410.  Gastrocele 

445.  Aquula 

480.  Contusio 

372.  Sparganosis 

411.  Hepatocele 

446.  Hydroa 

481.  Diabroeis 

373.  Coilima 

412.  Splenocele 

447.  Variola 

482.  Agomphiasis 

374.  Scirrhus 

413.  Hysterocele 

448.  Varicella 

483.  Eschara 

375.  Cancer 

414.  Hygrocirsocele 

449.  Purpura 

484.  Piptonychia 

376.  Sarcoma 

415.  Sarcocele 

450.  Encauma. 

485.  Cacoethes 

377.  Polypus 

378.  Condyloma 

416.  Physocele 

Order  V. 

486.  Therioma 

417.  Exostosis 

MACULAE. 

487.  Carcinoma 

379.  Ganglion 

418.  Hyperostosis 

451.  Ecchymoma 

488.  Phagedtena 

380.  Ranula 

419.  Paedarthrocace 

452.  Petechise 

489.  Noma 

381.  Terminthus 

490.  Encystis 

453.  Morbilli 

490.  Sycosis 

382.  Oedema 

421.  Staphyloma 

454.  Scarlatae 

491.  Fistula 

383.  Encephalocele 

422.  Staphylosis 

455.  Lentigo 

492.  Sinus 

384.  Hydrocephalum 

493.  Fungus 

456.  Urticaria 

493.  Caries 

385.  Hydropthalmia 

424.  Tofus 

457.  Stigma 

494.  A chores 

386.  Spina  bifida 

425.  Flemen. 

458.  Vibex 

495.  Crusta  lactea 

387.  Hydromphalus 

Order  III. 

459.  Vitiligo 

496.  Favus  « 

388.  Hydrocele 

EXTUBERANTLE. 

460.  Leuce 

497.  Tinea 

389.  Hydrops  scroti 

426.  Verruca 

461.  Cyasma 

498.  Argemon 

390.  Steatites 

427.  Porrus 

402.  Lichen 

499.  rEgilops 

391.  Pneumatosis 

428.  Clavus 

463.  Selina 

500.  Oztena 

392.  Emphysema 

429.  Callus 

464.  Nebula. 

501.  Aphtha? 

393.  Hysteroptosis 

430.  Encanthis 

Order  VI. 

502.  Intertrigo 

394.  Cystoptosis 

431.  Pladarotis 

DISSOLUTIONS. 

503.  Rhacosis. 

395.  Archoptoma 

432.  Pinnula 

465.  Vulnus 

Order  VIT. 

396.  Bubonocele 

433.  Pterygium 

466.  Ruptura 

CONCRETIONES 

397.  Oscheocele 

434.  Hordeolum 

467.  Rhagas 

504.  Ancyloblepharon 

398.  Omphalocele 

435.  Grando 

468.  Fractura 

505.  Zynizesis 

399.  Merocele 

436.  Varus 

469.  Fissura 

506.  Dacrymoma 

400.  Enterocele  ovularis 

437.  Gutta  rosacea 

470.  Plicatio 

507.  Ancyloglossum 

401.  Ischiatocele 

438.  Ephelis 

471.  Thlasis 

508.  Ancylosis 

402.  Elytrocele 

439.  Esoche 

472.  Luxatio 

500.  Cicatrix 

403.  Hypogastrocele 

440.  Exoche. 

473.  Subluxatio 

510.  Dactylion 

404.  Cystocele 

Order  IV. 

474.  Diachalasis 

405.  Cyrtoma 

PUSTULiE  & PAPUL.<E.475.  Attritis 

406.  Hydrenterocele 

441.  Epinyctis 

476.  Porrigo 

407.  Varix 

442.  Phlyctaena  477.  Aposyrma 

CLASS  XI.— DEFORMITATES. 

511.  Phoxos 

524.  Hirsuties 

537.  Gryposis 

550.  Saniodes 

512.  Gibber 

525.  Canities 

538.  Nbbvus 

551.  Cripsorchis 

513.  Caput  obstipum 

526.  Distrix 

539.  Montrositas 

552.  Hermaphrodites 

514.  Strabismus 

527.  Xirasia 

540.  Polysarcia 

553.  Dionysiscus 

515.  Myopiasis 

528.  Phalacrotis 

541.  Ichnotis 

554.  Artetiscus 

516.  Lagophthalmus 

529.  Alopecia 

542.  Rhicnosis 

555.  Nefrendis 

517.  Trichiasis 

530.  Madarosis 

543.  Varus 

556.  Spanopogon 

518.  Ectropium 

531.  Ptilosis 

544.  Valgus 

557.  Hyperartetisci 

519.  Entropium 

539.  Rodatio 

545.  Leiopodes 

558.  Galiancon 

520.  Rhoeas 

533.  Phalangosis 

546.  A pell  a 

559.  Galbulus 

521.  Rhyssemata 

534.  Coloboma 

547.  HypospadiaBOS 

548.  Uro rhoeas* 

560.  Mola. 

522.  Lagocheilos 

535.  Cercosis 

523.  Malachosteon 

536.  Cholosis 

A Synoptical  View  i 
CLASS 

549.  Atreta 

of  the  System  of  Sagar. 
I.— VITIA. 

Order  I. 

18.  Emphysema 

37.  Marisca 

58.  Bubonocele 

MACULAE. 

19.  Scirrhus 

38.  Hydatis 

59.  Opodeocele 

1.  Leucoma 

20.  Inflammatio 

39.  Staphyloma 

60.  Ischiocele 

2.  Vitiligo 

21.  Bubo 

40.  Lupia 

61.  Colpocele 

3.  Ephelis 

22.  Parotis 

41.  Hydarthrus 

62.  Perinseocele 

4.  Naevus 

23.  Furunculus 

42.  Apostema 

63.  Periton<Eorixis 

5.  Ecchvmoma. 

24.  Anthrax 

43.  Exomphalus 

64.  Encephalocele 

Order  II. 

25.  Cancer 

44.  Oscheophyma. 

65.  Hysteroloxia 

EFFLORESCENTLE. 

26.  Paronychia 

Order  VI. 

66.  Parorchidium 

6.  Pustula 

27.  Phimosis. 

ECTOPIAE. 

67.  Exarthrema 

7.  Papula 

Or6er  IV. 

45.  Exophthalmia 

68.  Diastasis 

8.  Phlycthaena 

EXCRESCENTLE. 

46.  Blepharoptosis 

69.  Loxarthrus 

9.  Bacchia 

28.  Sarcoma 

47.  Hypostaphyle 

70.  Gibbositas 

10.  Varus 

29.  Condyloma 

48.  Paraglossa 

71.  Lordosis. 

11.  Herpes 

30.  Verruca 

49.  Proptoma 

Order  VII. 

12.  Epinycti9 

31.  Pterygium 

50.  Exania 

DEFORMITATES, 

13.  Hemeropathos 

32.  Hordeolum 

51.  Exocystis 

72.  Lagostoma 

14.  Psydracia 

33.  Trachglophyma 

52.  Histeroptosis 

73.  Apella 

15.  Hydroa. 

34.  Exostosis. 

53.  Colpoptosis 

74.  Polymerisma 

Order  III. 

Order  V. 

54.  Gastrocele 

75.  Epidosis 

PHYMATA. 

CYSTIDES. 

55.  Omphalocele 

76.  Anchylomerisma 

16.  Erythema 

35.  Aneurysma 

56.  Hepatocele 

77.  Hirsuties. 

17.  Oedema 

36.  Varix 

CLASS  IL- 

57.  Merocele 
-PLAGrE. 

Order  I. 

81.  Morsus 

Order  H. 

87.  Sutura 

SOLUTIONES. 

82.  Excoriatio 

SOLUTIONES. 

88.  Paracentesis. 

recentesy  cruenta. 

83.  Contusio 

recentes,  cruenta , artifi 

Order  III. 

78.  Vulnus 

84.  Ruptura. 

dales. 

SOLUTIONES. 

79.  Punctura 

85.  Operatio 

incruenta. 

80.  Sclopetoplaga 

86.  Amputatio 

89.  Ulcus 

117 

NOSOLOGY. 


90.  Exulceratio 

91.  Fistula 

92.  Sinus 


Order  I. 
MACIES. 

100.  Tabes 

101.  Phthisis 

102.  Atrophia 

103.  Hsemataporia 

104.  Aridura. 

Order  II. 

INTUMESCENTLE. 

105.  Plethora 

106.  Polysarcia 

107.  Pneumatosis 

108.  Anasarca 

109.  Phlegmatia 

110.  Physconia 


Order  I. 
VAGI. 

142.  Arthritis 

143.  Ostocopus 

144.  Rheumatismus 

145.  Catarrhus 

146.  Anxietas 

147.  Lassitudo 

148.  Stupor 

149.  Pruritus 

150.  Algor 


Order  I. 

SANGUIFLUXUS. 

174.  Haemorrhagia 

175.  Haemoptysis 

176.  Stomacace 

177.  Haematemesis 

178.  Hcematuria 

179.  Metrorrhagia 

180.  Abortus. 

Order  II. 
ALVIFLUXUS. 
sanguinolenti. 

181.  Hepatirrhcea 


Order  I. 

EGERENDORUM. 

210.  Adiapneustia 

211.  Sterilitas 

212.  Ischuria 

213.  Dysuria 


TONIC?  PARTiALES. 

222.  Strabismus 

223.  Trismus 

224.  Obstipitas 

225.  Contractura 

226.  Crampus 

227.  Priapismus. 


Order  I. 
SPASMODIC.®. 

245.  Ephialtes 

246.  Sternutalio 

247.  Oscedo 


Order  I. 
DYS®STHESI®. 

258.  Amblyopia 

259.  Caligo 
280.  Cataracta 

261.  Amaurosis 

262.  Anosmia 

263.  Agheustia 

264.  Dysecooa 

265.  Paracusis 
366.  Cophosis 

118 


93.  Eschara  Order  IV. 

94.  Caries  SOLUTIONES. 

95.  Arthrocace.  anomala. 

96.  Rhagas 


111.  Graviditas. 

Order  III. 

IIYDROPES  partiales. 

112.  Hydrocephalus 

113.  Physocephalus 

114.  Hydrorachitis 

115.  Ascites 

116.  Hydrometra 

117.  Physometra 

118.  Tympanites 

119.  Meteorismus. 

Order  IV. 
TUBER  A. 

120.  Rachitis 

121.  Scrofula 


122.  Carcinoma 

123.  Leontiasis 

124.  Malis 

125.  Framboesia. 

Order  V. 
IMPETIGINES. 

126.  Syphilis 

127.  Scorbutus 

128.  Elephantiasis 

129.  Lepra 

130.  Scabies 

131.  Tinea. 

Order  VI. 
ICTERITIE. 

132.  Aurigo 


CLASS  III. — CACHEXLE. 


CLASS 

151.  Ardor. 

Order  II. 
CAPITIS. 

152.  Cephalalgia 

153.  Cephalaea 

154.  Hemicrania 

155.  Ophthalmia 

156.  Otalgia 

157.  Odontalgia. 


IV.— DOLORES. 

Order  III. 
PECTORIS. 

158.  Pyrosis 

159.  Cardiogmus. 

Order  IV. 
ABDOMINIS. 

160.  Cardialgia 

161.  Gastrodynia 

162.  Colica 

163.  Hepatalgia 

164.  Splenalgia 


CLASS  V.— FLUXUS. 


182.  Haemorrhois 

183.  Dysenteria 

184.  Melaena. 

Order  III. 
ALVIFLUXUS. 
non  sanguinolenti. 

185.  Nausea 

186.  Vomitus 

187.  Ileus 

188.  Cholera 

189.  Diarrhoea 

190.  Coeliaca 

191.  Lienteria 


192.  Tenesmus 

193.  Proctorrhoea. 

Order  IV. 
SERIFLUXUS. 

194.  Ephidrosis 

195.  Epiphora 

196.  Coryza 

197.  Ptyalismus 

198.  Anacatharsis 

199.  Diabetes 

200.  Enuresis 

201.  Pyuria 

202.  Leucorrhcea 


CLASS  VI.— SUPPRESSIONES. 

214.  Aglactatio  Order  II. 

215.  Dyslochia.  INGERENDORUM. 

216.  Dysphagia 

217.  Angina. 


CLASS  VII— SPASMI. 
Order  II.  232.  Subsultus 

TONICI  GENERALES.  233.  Pandiculatio 

228.  Tetanus  234.  Apomistosis 

229.  Catochus.  235.  Convulsio 

Order  III.  236.  Tremor 

CHRONICI  PARTIA-  237.  Palpitatio 
LES.  238.  Claudicatio. 

230.  Nystagmus 

231.  Carphologia 

CLASS  VHI. — ANHELATIONES. 

248.  Singultus  251.  Dyspnoea 

249.  Tussis.  252.  Asthma 

Order  H.  253.  Orthopnoea 

SUPPRESSIVE.  254.  Pleurodyne 

250.  Stertor  255.  Rheuma 


CLASS  IX. 

267.  Antesthesia. 

Order  II. 
ANEPYTHYMLE. 

268.  Anorexia 

269.  Adipsia 

270.  Anaphrodisia. 

Order  III. 
DYSCINESLE. 

271.  Mutitas 

272.  Aphonia 

273.  Psellismus 


-DEBILITATES. 

274.  Cacophonia 

275.  Paralysis 

276.  Hemiplegia 

277.  Paraplexia. 

Order  IV. 
LEIPOPSYCHLE. 

278.  Asthenia 

279.  Lipothymia 

280.  Syncope 

281.  Asphyxia. 


97.  Ambustlo 

98.  Fractura 

99.  Fissura. 


133.  Melasicterus 

134.  Phcenigmus 

135.  Chlorosis. 

Order  VII. 
ANOMAL® 

136.  Phthiriasis 

137.  Trichoma 

138.  Alopecia 

139.  Elcosis 

140.  Grangraena 

141.  Necrosis. 


4 

165.  Nephralgia 

166.  Hysteralgia. 

Order.  V. 
EXTERN  ARUM. 

167.  Mastodynia 

168.  Rachialgia 

169.  Lumbago 

170.  Ischias 

171.  Proctalgia 

172.  Pudendagra 

173.  Digitium. 


203.  Lochiorrhoea 

204.  Gonorrhoea 

205.  Galactirrlioea 

206.  Otorrhaea. 

Order  V. 
AERIFLUXUS. 

207.  Flatulentia 

208.  ®dopsophia 

209.  Dysodia 


Order  III. 
IMI  VENTRIS. 

218.  Dysmenorrhcea 

219.  Dystocia 

220.  Dyshaemorrhois 

221.  Obstipatio. 


Order  IV. 

CHRONICI  GENERA 
LES. 

239.  Phricasmus 

240.  Eclampsia 

241.  Epilepsia 

242.  Hysteria 

243.  Scelotyrbe 

244.  Beriberia. 


256.  Hydrothorax 

257.  Empyema. 


Order  V. 
COMATA. 

282.  Catalepsis 

283.  Ectasis 

284.  Typhomania 
235.  Lethargus 
286.  Cataphora 
297.  Carus 

288.  Apoplexia. 


Order  I. 
CONTAGIOSA. 

289.  Pestia 

290.  Variola 


Order  I. 
MUSCULOSAE. 

299.  Phlegmone 

300.  Cynanche 

301.  Myositis 
302  Carditis. 


Order  I 
CONTINUE. 

316.  Judicatoria 

317.  Humoraria 

318.  Frigeraria 

Order  I. 

HALLUCINATIONES. 

328.  Vertigo 

329.  Suffusio 

330.  Diplopia 

331.  Syrigmos 

332.  Hypochondriasis 

333.  Somnambulismus. 


Order  I. 
FEVERS. 

1.  Continued 

2.  Intermittent 

3.  Remittent 

4.  Eruptive 

5.  Hectic. 

Order  II. 

INFLAMMATIONS. 

6.  External 

7.  Internal. 

Order  III. 
FLUXES. 

8.  Alvine 

9.  Haemorrhage 

10.  Humoral  discharge. 

Order  IV. 

PAINFUL  DISEASES. 

11.  Gout 


NOSOLOQY. 

CLASS  X.— EXANTHEMATA. 

291.  Pemphigus  Order  II.  297.  Essera 

292.  Purpura  NON-CONTAGIOSA.  298.  Aphtha. 

293.  Rubeola  295.  Miliares 

294.  Scarlatina.  296.  Erysipelas 

CLASS  XI.— PHLEGM ASLE. 


Order  II. 
MEMBRANACiE. 

303.  Phrenitis 

304.  Diaphragmitis 
305  Pleuritis 

306.  Gastritis 


307.  Enteritis  311.  Peripneumonia 

308.  Epiploitis  312.  Hepatitis 

309.  Cystitis.  313.  Splenitis 

Order  III.  314.  Nephritis 

PAREN CH  YM  ATOSAE.  315.  Metritis. 

310.  Cephalitis 


CLASS  XII.— FEBRES. 

319.  Typhus  322.  Tritaeophya 

320.  Hectica. 

Order  II. 

REMITTENTES. 

321.  Amphimerina 


323.  Tetartophya. 

Order  III. 

INTERMITTENTES. 

324.  Quotidiana 


CLASS  XIH. — VESANLE. 


Order  II. 
MOROSITATES. 

334.  Pica 

335.  Bulimia 

336.  Polydipsia 

337.  Antipathia 

338.  Nostalgia 

339.  Panophobia 


340.  Satyriasis 

341.  Nymphomania 

342.  Tarantismus 

343.  Hydrophobia 

344.  Rabies. 

Order  III. 
DELIRIA. 

345.  Paraphrosyne 


Synoptical  View  of  the  System  of  Dr.  Macbride. 
CLASS  I.— UNIVERSAL  DISEASES. 


12.  Rheumatism 

13.  Ostocopus 

14.  Headache 

15.  Toothache 

16.  Earache 

17.  Pleurodyne 

18.  Pain  in  the  stomach 

19.  Colic 

20.  Lithiasis 

21.  Ischuria 

22.  Proctalgia. 

Order  V. 

SPASMODIC  DISEASES. 35.  Orthopnoea 

23.  Tetanus  36.  Asthma 

24.  Catochus  37.  Hydrothorax 

25.  Locked  jaw  38.  Empyema. 

26.  Hydrophobia  Order  VIII. 

27.  Convulsion  MENTAL  DISEASES, 

28.  Epilepsy  39.  Mania 


29.  Eclampsia 

30.  Hieranosos: 

Order  VI. 

WEAKNESSES  AND 
PRIVATIONS. 

31.  Coma 

32.  Palsy 

33.  Fainting. 

Order  VII. 
ASTHMATIC  DISOR- 
DERS. 

34.  Dyspnoea 


325.  Tertiana 

326.  Ouartana 

327.  Erratica. 


346.  Amentia 

347.  Melancholia 

348.  Deemonomania 

349.  Mania. 

Order  IV. 
ANOMALA3. 

350.  Amnesia 

351.  Agrypnia 


40.  Melancholia. 

Order  IX. 

CACHEXIES, or  Humoral 
Diseases. 

41.  Corpulency 

42.  Dropsy 

43.  Jaundice 

44.  Emphysema 

45.  Tympany 

46.  Physconia 

47.  Atrophia 

48.  Osteosarcosis 

49.  Sarcostosis 

50.  Mortification 

51.  Scurvy 

52.  Scrofula 

53.  Cancer 

54.  Lues  Venerea. 


Order  I. 

OF  TEE  INTERNAL 
SENSES. 

55.  Loss  of  memory 

56.  Hypochondriasis 

57.  Loss  of  judgment. 

Order  II. 

OF  THE  EXTERNAL 
SENSES. 


CLASS  II.— LOCAL  DISEASES. 
Order  IV.  95.  Hiccup 

OF  THE  SECRETIONS  96.  Cough 
AND  EXCRETIONS. 

74.  Epiphora 

75.  Coryza 

76.  Ptyalism 

77.  Anacatharsis 

78.  Otorrhoea 


58.  Blindness 

59.  Depraved  sight 

60.  Deafness 

61.  Depraved  hearing 

62.  Loss  of  smell 

63.  Depraved  smell 

64.  Loss  of  taste 

65.  Depraved  taste 

66.  Loss  of  feeling. 

Order  III. 

OF  THE  APPETITES. 

67.  Anorexia 

68.  Cynorexia 

69.  Pica 

70.  Polydipsia 

71.  Satyriasis 

72.  Nymphomania 

73.  Anaphrodisia. 


79.  Diarrhoea 

80.  Incontinence  of  urine. 

81.  Pyuria 

82.  Dysuria 

83.  Constipation 

84.  Tenesmus 

85.  Dysodia 

86.  Flatulence 

87.  ASdopsophia. 

Order  V. 

IMPEDING  DIFFER- 
ENT ACTIONS. 

88.  Aphonia 

89.  Mutitas 

90.  Paraphonia 

91.  Dysphagia 

92.  Wry  neck 

93.  Angone 

94.  Sneezing 


97.  Vomiting 

98.  Palpitation  of  the 

heart 

99.  Chorea 

100.  Trismus 

101.  Nystagmus 

102.  Cramp 

103.  Scelotyrbe 

104.  Contraction 

105.  Paralysis 

106.  Anchylosis 

107.  Gibbositas 

108.  Lordosis 

109.  Hydarthrus. 

Order  VI. 

OF  THE  EXTERNAL 
HABIT. 

110.  Tumour 

111.  Excrescence 

112.  Aneurism 

113.  Varix 

114.  Papulce 

115.  Phlyctaenae 

116.  Pustulffi 

117.  Scabies,  or  Psora 


118.  Impetigo 

119.  Leprosy 

120.  Elephantiasis 

121.  Frambcesia 

122.  Herpes 

123.  Macula 

124.  Alopecia 

125.  Trichoma 

126.  Scald  head 

127.  Phthiriasis. 

Order  VII. 
DISLOCATIONS. 

128.  Hernia 

129.  Prolapsus 

130.  Luxation. 

Order  VIII. 
SOLUTIONS  OF  CON 
TINUITY. 

131.  Wound 

132.  Ulcer 

133.  Fissure 

134.  Fistula 

135.  Burn,  or  scald 

136.  Excoriation 

137.  Fracture 

138.  Caries. 


147.  Crystalline 

148.  Hernia  humoralis 

149.  Hydrocele 

150.  Sarcocele 


CLASS  III— SEXUAL  DISEASES. 
Order  I.  Order  II.  143.  Gonorrhoea  virulenta 

GENERAL,  proper  to  Men.  LOCAL,  proper  to  Men.  144.  Priapism 

139.  Febris  testicularis  141.  Dyspermatismus  145.  Phimosis 

140.  Tabes  dorsalis.  142.  Gonorrhoea  simplex  146.  Paraphimosis  > 


119 


NOSOLOGY 


151.  Cirsocele.  155.  Menorrhagia 

Order  in.  GENERAL,  156.  Hysteralgia 

proper  to  Women.  157.  Graviditas 

152.  Amenorrhcea  158.  Abortus 

153.  Chlorosis  159.  Dystochia 

154.  Leucorrhosa  160.  Febris  puerperalis 


161.  Mastodyuia.  165.  Physometra 

Order  IV.  166.  Prolapsus  uteri 

LOCAL,  proper  to  Women.  167. vagin® 

162.  Hydrops  ovarii  168.  Polypus  uteri. 

163.  Scirrhus  ovarii 

164.  Hydrometra 


Order  I.  GENERAL. 

169.  Colica  meconialis 

170.  Colica  lactentium 

171.  Diarrhoea  infantum 


CLASS  IV.— INFANTILE  DISEASES. 

172.  Aphthae  Order  II.  LOCAL. 

173.  Eclampsia  176.  Imperforation 

174.  Atrophia  177.  Anchyloglossum 

175.  Rachitis.  178.  Aurigo 


179.  Purpura 

180.  Crusta  lactea. 


Synoptical  view  of  Dr.  Good’s  System. 


CLASS  I.  CCELIACA.  Diseases  of  the  Digestive 
Function. 

Order  1.  Enterica.  Affecting  the  alimentary  canal. 
Genus  1.  Odontia.  Misdentition. 

Species  1.  O.  dentitionis.  Teething. 

2.  O.  dolorosa.  Toothache. 

3.  O.  stuporis.  Tooth-edge. 

4.  O.  deformls.  Deformity  of  the  teeth. 

5.  O.  edentula.  Toothlessness. 

,6.  O.  incrustans.  Tartar  of  the  teeth. 

7.  O.  excrescens.  Excrescent  gums. 

Genus  2.  Ptyalismus.  Ptyalism. 

Species  1.  P.  acutus.  Salivation. 

2.  P.  cbronicus.  Chronic  ptyalism. 

3.  P.  iners.  Drivelling. 

Genus  3.  Dysphagia.  Dysphagy. 

Species  1.  D.  constricta.  Constrictive  dysphagy. 

2.  D.  atonica.  Atonic  dysphagy. 

3.  D.  globosa.  Nervous  quinsy. 

4.  D.  uvulosa.  Uvula  dysphagy. 

5.  D.  linguosa.  Lingual  dysphagy. 

Genus  4.  Dipsosis.  Morbid  thirst. 

Species  1.  D.  avens.  Immoderate  thirst. 

2.  D.  expers.  Thirstlessness. 

Genus  5.  Limosis.  Morbid  appetite. 

Species  1.  L.  avens.  Voracity. 

2.  L.  expers.  Long  fasting. 

3.  L.  pica.  Depraved  appetite. 

4.  L.  cardlalgica.  Heartburn.  Waterbrash. 

5.  L.  flatus.  Flatulency. 

6.  L.  emesis.  Sickness.  Vomiting. 

7.  L.  dyspepsia.  Indigestion. 

Genus  6.  Colica.  Colic. 

Species  1.  C.  ileus.  Iliac  passion. 

2.  C.  rhachialgica.  Painter’s  colic. 

3.  C.  cibaria.  Surfeit. 

4.  C.  flatulenta.  Wind-colic. 

5.  C.  constipata.  Constipated  colic. 

6.  C.  constricta.  Constrictive  colic. 

Genus  7.  Copostatris.  Costiveness. 

Species  1.  C.  constipata.  Constipation. 

2.  C.  obstipata.  Obstipation. 

Genus  8.  Diarrhcea.  Looseness. 

Species  1.  D.  fusa.  Feculent  looseness. 

2.  D.  biliosa.  Bilious  looseness. 

3.  D.  mucosa.  Mucous  looseness. 

4.  D.  chylosa.  Chylous  looseness. 

5.  D.  lienleria.  Lientery. 

6.  D.  serosa.  Serous  looseness. 

7.  D.  tabulosa.  Tabular  looseness. 

8.  D . gypsata.  Gypseous  looseness. 

Genus  9.  Cholera.  Cholera. 

Species  1.  C.  biliosa.  Bilious  cholera. 

2.  C.  flatulenta.  Flatulent  cholera. 

3.  C.  spasmodica.  Spasmodic  cholera. 

Genus  10.  Enterolithus.  Intestinal  concretions. 
Species  1.  E.  bezoardus.  Bezoar. 

2.  E.  calculus.  Intestinal  calculus. 

3.  E.  scybalum.  Scybalum. 

G'enusll.  Helminthia.  Worms. 

Species  1.  H.  alvi.  Alvine  worms. 

2.  H.  podicis.  Anal  worms. 

3.  erratica.  Erratic  worms. 

Genus  12.  Proctica.  Proctica. 

Species  1.  P.  simplex.  Simple  proctica. 

2.  P.  spasmodica.  Spasmodic  stricture  of  the 

rectum. 

3.  P.  callosa.  Callous  stricture  of  the  rectum. 

4.  P.  tenesmus.  Tenesmus. 

5.  P.  marica.  Piles. 

6.  P.  exania.  Prolapse  of  the  fundament. 
Order  2.  Splanchnica.  Affecting  the  collatitious 

viscera. 

* \ 


Genus  1.  Icterus.  Yellow  jaundice. 

Species  1.  I.  cholseus.  Biliary  jaundice. 

2.  chololithicus.  Gallstone  jaundice. 

3.  I.  spasmodicus.  Spasmodic  jaundice. 

4.  I.  hepaticus.  Hepatic  jaundice. 

5.  I.  infantum.  Jaundice  of  Infants. 

Genus  2.  Melasna.  Melena. 

Species  1.  M.  cholcea.  Black  or  green  jaundice. 

2.  M.  cruenta.  Black  vomit 
Genus  3.  Chololithus.  Gall-stone. 

Species  1.  C.  quiescens.  Quiescent  gall-stone. 

2.  C.  means.  Passing  of  gall-stones. 

Genus  4.  Paradisma.  Visceral  turgescence. 

Species  1.  P.  hepaticum.  Turgescence  of  the  liver. 

2.  P.  splenicum.  Turgescence  of  the  spleen. 

3.  P.  pancreaticum.  Turgescence  of  the  pan 

creas. 

4.  P.  mesentericum.  Turgescence  of  the  me- 

sentery. 

5.  P.  intestinale.  Turgescence  of  the  intestines. 

6.  P.  omentale.  Turgescence  of  the  omentum. 

7.  P.  complicatum.  Turgescence  compounded 

of  various  organs. 

CLASS  II  PNEUMATICA.  Diseases  of  the  Respi- 
ratory Function. 

Order  1.  Phonica.  Affecting  the  vocal  avenues. 
Genus  1.  Coryza.  Running  at  the  nose. 

Species  1.  C.  entonica.  Entonic  coryza. 

2.  C.  atonica.  Atonic  coryza. 

Genus  2.  Polypus.  Polypus. 

Species  1.  P.  elasticus.  Compressible  polypus 
2.  P.  coriaceus.  Cartilaginous  polypus. 
Genus  3.  Rhonchus.  Rattlingin  the  throat. 

Species  1.  R.  stertor.  Snoring. 

2.  R.  cerchnus.  Wheezing. 

Genus  4.  Aphonia.  Dumbness. 

Species  1.  A.  elinguium.  Elingual  dumbness 

2.  A.  atonica.  Atonic  dumbness. 

3.  A.  surdorum.  Deaf  dumbness. 

Genus  5.  Dysphonia.  Dissonant  voice. 

Species  1.  D.  susurrans.  Whispering  voice. 

2.  D.  puberum.  Voice  of  puberty. 

3.  D.  immodulata.  Immelodious  voice. 

Genus  6.  Psellismus.  Dissonant  speech. 

Species  1.  P.  bambalia.  Stammering. 

2.  P.  blaesitas.  Misenunciation. 

Order  2.  Pneumonica.  Affecting  the  lungs,  their 
membranes,  or  motive  power. 

Genus  1.  Bex.  Cough. 

Species  1.  B.  humida.  Common  or  humid  cough. 

2.  B.  sicca.  Dry  cough. 

3.  B.  convulsiva.  Hooping-cough. 

Genus  2.  Laryngismus.  Laryngic  suffocation. 
Species  1.  L.  stridulus.  Stridulus  construction  of  the 

larynx. 

Genus  3.  Dyspniea.  Anhelation. 

Species  1.  D.  chronica.  Short-breath. 

2.  D.  exacerbans.  Exacerbating  anhelation. 
Genus  4.  Asthma.  Asthma.  . 

Species  1.  A.  siccum.  Dry  or  nervous  asthma. 

2.  A.  humidum.  Humid  or  common  asthma. 
Genus  5.  Ephialtes.  Incubus. 

Species  1.  E.  vigilantium.  Day- mare. 

2.  E.  nocturnus.  Night-mare. 

Genus  6.  Sternalgia.  Suffocative  breast-pang. 
Species  ] . S.  ambulantium.  Acute  breast-pang. 

2.  S.  chronica.  Chronic  breast-pang. 

Genus  7.  Pleuralgia.  Pain  in  the  side. 

Species  1.  P.  acuta.  Stitch. 

2i  P.  chronica.  Chronic  pain  in  the  side. 
CLASS  III.  HjEMATICA.  Diseases  of  the  San- 
guinous  Function. 

Order  1.  Pyrktica.  Fevers 


120 


NOSOLOGY. 


Genus  1.  Ephemera.  Diary  fever. 

Species  1.  E.  mitis.  Mild  diary  fever. 

2.  E.  acuta.  Acute  diary  fever. 

3.  E.  sudatoria.  Sweating  fever. 

Genus  2.  Anetus.  Intermitting  fever.  Ague. 
Species  1.  A.  quotidianus.  Quotidian  ague. 

2.  A.  tertianus.  Tertian  ague. 

3.  A.  quartanus.  Quartan  ague. 

4.  A.  erraticus.  Irregular  ague. 

5.  A.  complicatus.  Complicated  ague. 

Genus  3.  Epanktus.  Remittent  fever. 

Species  1 . E.  mitis.  Mild  remittent. 

2.  E.  malignus.  Malignant  remittent. 

3.  E.  hectica.  Hectic  fever. 

Genus  4.  Enecia.  Continued  fever. 

Species  1.  E.  cauma.  Inflammatory  fever. 

2.  E.  typhus.  Typhous  fever. 

3.  E.  synochus.  Synochal  fever. 

Order  2.  Phlogistica.  Inflammations. 

Genus  1.  Apostema.  Aposteme. 

Species  1.  A.  commune.  Common  aposteme. 

2.  Apsoaticum.  Psoas  abscess. 

3.  A.  hepaticum.  Abscess  of  the  liver. 

4.  A.  empyema.  Lodgment  of  matter  in  the 

chest. 

5.  A vomica.  Vomica. 

Genus  2.  Phlegmone.  Phlegmon 

Snecies  1.  P.  communis.  Common  phlegmon. 

2.  P.  parulis.  Gum-boil. 

3.  P.  auris.  Imposthume  of  the  ear. 

4.  P.  parotidea.  Parotid  phlegmon. 

5.  P.  mammae.  Abscess  of  the  breast. 

6.  P.  bubo.  Bubo. 

7.  P.  phimotica.  Phimotic  phlegmon. 

Genus  3.  Phyma.  Tubercle. 

Species  1.  P.  hordeolum.  Sty. 

2.  P.  furunculus.  Boil. 

3.  P.  sycosis.  Ficous  phyma. 

4.  P.  anthrax.  Carbuncle. 

Genus  4.  Ionthus.  Whelk. 

Species  1.  I.  varus.  Stone  pock. 

2.  I.  corymbyfer.  Carbunculated  face.  Rosy 
drop. 

Genus  5.  Phlysis.  Phlysis. 

Species  1.  P.  paronychia.  Whitlow. 

Genus  6.  Erythema.  Inflammatory  blush. 

Species  1.  E.  oedematosum.  CEdematous  inflamma- 
tion. 

2.  E.  erysipelatosum.  Esysipelatous  inflam- 

mation. 

3.  E.  gangrenosum.  Gangrenous  inflamma- 

tion. 

4.  E.  vesiculare.  Vesicular  inflammation. 

5.  E.  pernio.  Chilblain. 

6.  E.  entertrigo.  Fret. 

Genus  7.  Empresma.  Visceral  inflammation. 

Species  1.  E.  cephalites.  Inflammation  of  the  brain. 

2.  E.  otitis.  Inflammation  of  the  ear. 

3.  E.  parotitis.  Mumps. 

4 E.  parithmitis.  Quincy. 

5.  E.  laryngitis.  Inflammation  of  the  larynx 

6.  E.  bronchitis.  Croup. 

7.  E.  pneumonitis.  Peripneumony. 

8.  E.  pleuritis.  Pleurisy 

9.  E.  carditis.  Inflammation  of  the  heart. 

10.  E.  peritonitis.  Inflammation  of  the  perito- 

neum. 

11.  E.  gastritis.  Inflammation  of  the  stomach. 

12.  E.  enteritis.  Inflammation  of  the  bowels. 

13.  E.  hepatitis.  Inflammation  of  the  liver. 

14.  E.  splenitis.  Inflammation  of  the  spleen. 

15.  E.  nephritis.  Inflammation  of  the  kidney. 

16.  E.  cystitis.  Inflammation  of  the  bladder. 

17.  E.  hysteritis.  Inflammation  of  the  womb. 

18.  E.  orchitis  Inflammation  of  the  testicles. 
Genus  8.  Ophthalmia.  Ophthalmy. 

Species  1.  O.  taraxis.  Lachrymose  ophthalmy. 

2.  O.  iridis.  Inflammation  of  the  iris. 

3.  O.  purulenta.  Purulent  ophthalmy. 

4.  O.  glutinosa.  Glutinous  ophthalmy. 

5.  O.  chronica.  Lippitude.  Blear-eye. 

Genus  9.  Catarrhus.  Catarrh. 

Species  1.  C.  communis.  Cold  in  the  head  or  chest. 

2.  C.  epidemicus.  Influenza. 

Genus  10.  Dysenteria.  dysentery. 

Species  1.  D.  simplex.  Simple  Dysentery. 

2.  D.  pyretica.  Dysenteric  fever. 


Genus  ll.  Bucnemia.  Tumid  leg. 

Species  1.  B.  sparganosis.  Puerperal  tumid  leg. 

2.  B.  tropica.  Tumid  leg  of  hot  climates. 
Genus  12.  Arthrosia.  Articular  inflammation. 
Species  1.  A.  acuta.  Acute  rheumatism. 

2.  A.  chronica.  Chronic  inflammation. 

3.  A.  podagra.  Gout. 

4.  A.  hydarthrus.  White-swelling. 

Order  3.  Exanthematica.  Eruptive  fevers.  Ex 

anthems. 

Genus  1.  Exanthesis.  Rash  exanthem. 

Species  1.  E.  rosalia.  Scarlet  fever 

2.  rubeola.  Measles. 

3.  E.  urticaria.  Nettle-rash. 

Genus  2.  Emphlysis.  Achorous  exanthem. 

Species  1.  E.  miliaria.  Miliary  fever. 

2.  E.  aphtha.  Thrush. 

3.  E.  vaccina.  Cow-pox. 

4.  E.  varicella.  Water-pox. 

5.  E.  pemphigus  Vesicular  fever. 

6.  E.  erysipelas.  St.  Anthony’s  fire. 

Genus  3.  Empyesis.  Pustulous  exanthem. 

Species  1.  E.  variola.  Smallpox. 

Genus  4.  Anthracia.  Carbuncular  exanthem. 
Species  1.  A.  pestis.  Plague. 

2.  A.  rubula.  Yaws. 

Order  4.  Dysthetica.  Cachexies. 

Genus  1.  Plethora.  Plethora. 

Species  1.  P.  entenica.  Sanguineous  plethora. 

2.  P.  atonica.  Serous  plethora. 

Genus  2.  HjEmorrhagia.  Hemorrhage. 

Species  1.  H.  entonica.  Entonic  haemorrhage. 

2.  II.  atonica.  Atonic  haemorrhage. 

Genus  3.  Marasmus.  Emaciation. 

Species  1.  M.  atrqphia.  Atrophy. 

2.  M.  climactericus.  Decay  of  nature. 

3.  M.  Tabes.  Decline. 

4.  M.  phthisis.  Consumption 
Genus  4.  Struma.  Scrofula. 

Species  1.  S.  vulgaris.  King’s  evil. 

Genus  5.  Carcinus  Cancer. 

Species  1.  C.  vulgaris.  Common  cancer. 

Genus  6.  Lues.  Venereal  disease. 

Species  I.  L.  syphilis.  Pox. 

2.  L.  syphilodes.  Bastard  pox. 

Genus  7.  Elephantiasis.  Elephant-skin. 

Species  1.  E.  arabica.  Arabian  elephantiasis.  Black 
leprosy. 

2.  E.  italica.  Italian  elephantiasis. 

3.  E.  asturiensis.  Asturian  elephantiasis. 
Genus  8.  Catacausis.  Catacaasis. 

Species  1.  C.  ebriosa.  Enebriate  catacausis. 

Genus  9.  Porphyra.  Scurvy. 

Species  1.  P.  simplex.  Petechial  scurvy. 

2.  P.  haemorrhagica.  Land-scurvy. 

3.  P.  nautica.  Sea-scurvy. 

Genus  10.  Exangia.  Exangia. 

Species  1.  E.  aneurisma.  Aneurism. 

2.  E.  varix.  Varix. 

3.  E.  cyania.  Blue-skin. 

Genus  11.  Gangr^na.  Gangrene. 

Species  1.  G.  sphacelus.  Mortification. 

2.  G.  ustilaginea.  Mildew-mortification. 

3.  G.  necrosis.  Dry- gangrene. 

4.  G.  caries.  Caries. 

GenusYZ.  Ulcus.  Ulcer. 

Species  l.  U.  incarnans.  Simple  healing  ulcer. 

2.  U.  vitiorum.  Depraved  ulcer.. 

3.  U.  sinuosum.  Sinuous  ulcer. 

4.  U.  tuberculosum.  Warty.  Excrescent 

ulcer. 

5.  U.  cariosum.  Carious  ulcer. 

CLASS  IV.  NEUROTICA.  Diseases  of  the 

Nervous  Function. 

Order  1.  Phrenica.  Affecting  the  intellect. 

Genus  1.  Ecphronia.  Insanity.  Craziness. 

Species  1.  E.  melancholia.  Melancholy 
2.  E.  mania.  Madness. 

Genus  2.  Empathema.  Ungovernable  passion. 
Species  1.  E.  entonicum.  Empassioned  excitement. 

2.  E.  atonicum.  Empassioned  depression. 

3.  E.  inane.  Hair-brained  passion. 

Genus  3 Alusia.  Illusion.  Hallucination. 

Species  1.  A.  elatio.  Sentimentalism.  Mental  ex- 
travagance. 

2.  A. hypochondriasis.  Hypochondrism.  Low- 
spiritedness. 


m 


NOSOLOGY. 


Genus  4.  Aphlixia.  Revery. 

Species  1.  A.  socors.  Absence  of  mind. 

2.  A.  intenda.  Abstraction  of  mind. 

3.  A.  otiosa.  Brown  study. 

Genus  5.  Paroniria.  Sleep-disturbance. 

Species  1.  P.  ambulans.  Sleep-walking. 

2.  P.  loquens.  Sleep-talking. 

3.  P.  salax.  Night  pollution. 

Genus  6.  Moria.  Fatuity. 

Species  1.  M.  imbecillis.  Imbecility. 

2.  M.  demens.  Irrationality. 

Order  2.  jEsthktica.  Affecting  the  sensation. 
Genus  1.  Paropsis.  Morbid-sigbt. 

Species  1.  P.  lucifuga.  Night-sight. 

2.  P.  noctifuga.  Day-sight. 

3.  P.  longinqua.  Long-sight. 

4.  P.  propinqua.  Short-sight. 

5.  P.  lateralis.  Skew-sight. 

6.  P.  illusoria.  False-sight. 

7.  P.  caligo.  Opaque  cornea. 

8.  P.  glaucosis.  Humeral  opacity. 

9.  P.  cataracta.  Cataract. 

10.  P.  synizesis.  Closed  pupil. 

11.  P.  amaurosis.  Drop  serene. 

12.  P.  staphyloma.  Protuberant  eye. 

13.  P.  stabismus.  Squinting. 

Genus  2.  Paracusis.  Morbid  hearing. 

Species  1.  P.  acris.  Acute  hearing. 

2.  P.  obtusa.  Hardness  of  hearing. 

3.  P.  perversa.  Perverse  hearing. 

4.  P.  duplicata.  Double  hearing. 

5.  P.  illusoria.  Imaginary  sounds. 

6.  P.  surditas.  Deafness. 

Genus  3.  Parosmis.  Morbid  smell. 

Species  1.  P.  acris.  Acute  smell.  . 

2.  P.  obtusa.  Obtuse  smell. 

3.  P.  expers.  Want  of  smell. 

Genus  4.  Parageusis.  Morbid  taste. 

Species  1.  P.  acute.  Acute  taste. 

2.  P.  obtusa.  Obtuse  taste. 

3.  P.  expers.  Want  of  taste. 

Genus  5.  Parapsis.  Morbid  touch. 

Species  1.  P.  acris.  Acute  sense  of  touch  or  general 
feeling. 

2.  P.  expers.  Insensibility  of  touch  or  general 

feeling. 

3.  P.  illusoria.  Illusory  sense  of  touch  or 

general  feeling. 

Genus  6.  Neuralgia.  Nerve-ache. 

Species  1.  N.  faciei.  Nerve-ache  of  the  face. 

2.  N.  pedis.  Nerve- ache  of  the  foot. 

3.  N.  mammae.  Nerve-ache  of  the  breast. 
Order  3.  Cinetica.  Affecting  the  muscles. 

Genus  1.  Entasia.  Constrictive  spasm. 

Species  1.  E priapismus.  Priapism 

2.  E.  loxia.  Wry  neck. 

3.  E.  articularis.  Muscular  stiff-joint. 

4.  E.  systremma.  Cramp. 

5.  E.  trismus.  Hooked-jaw. 

6.  E.  tetanus.  Tetanus. 

7.  E.  lyssa.  Rabies.  Canine  madness. 

8.  E.  acrostimus.  Suppressed  pulse. 

Genus  2.  Clonicus.  Clonic  spasm. 

Species  1.  C.  singultus.  Hiccough. 

2.  C.  sternutatio.  Sneezing. 

3.  Palpitatio.  Palpitation. 

4.  C.  nectitatio.  Wrinkling  of  the  eyelids. 

5.  C.  subsultus.  Twitching  of  the  tendons. 

6.  C.  pandiculatio.  Stretching. 

Genus  3.  Synclonus.  Synclonic  spasm 
Species  1.  S.  tremor.  Trembling. 

2.  S.  chorea.  St.  Vitus’s  dance. 

3.  S.  ballismus.  Shaking  palsy. 

4.  S.  raphania.  Raphania. 

5.  S.  beriberia.  Barbiers. 

Order  4.  Systatica.  Affecting  several,  or  all  the 
sensorial  powers,  simultaneously. 

Genus  1.  Agrypnia.  Sleeplessness. 

Species  1.  A.  excitata.  Irritative  wakefulness. 

2.  A.  pertesa.  Chronic  wakefulness. 

Genus  2.  Dysphoria.  Restlessness. 

Species  1.  D.  simplex.  Fidgets. 

2.  D.  anxietas.  Anxiety. 

Genus  3.  Antipathia.  Antipathy 
Species  1.  A.  sensilis.  Sensile  antipathy. 

2.  A.  insensilis.  Insensile  antipathy. 

Genus  4.  Cephal-la.  Headache 
122 


Species  1.  C.  gravans.  Stupid  headache. 

2.  C.  intensa.  Chronic  headache. 

3.  C.  hemicrania.  Megrim. 

4.  C.  pulsatilis.  Throbbing  headache. 

5.  C.  nauseosa.  Sick  headache. 

Genus  5.  Dinus.  Dizziness. 

Species  1.  D.  vertigo.  Vertigo. 

Genus  6.  Syncope.  Syncope. 

Species  1.  S.  simplex.  Swooning. 

2.  S.  recurrens.  Fainting  fit. 

Genus  7.  Syspasia.  Comatose  spasm. 

Species  1.  S.  convulsio.  Convulsion. 

2.  S.  hysteria.  Hysterics. 

3.  S.  epilepsia.  Epilepsy. 

Genus  8.  Carus.  Torpor. 

Species  1.  C.  asphyxia.  Asphyxy.  Suspended  ani- 
mation. 

2.  C.  ecstasis.  Ecstacy. 

3.  C.  catalepsia.  Catalepsy. 

4.  C.  lethargus.  Lethargy. 

5.  C.  apoplexia.  Apoplexy. 

6.  C.  paralysis.  Palsy. 

CLASS  V.  GENETICA. — Diseases  of  the  Sexual 
Function . 

Order  1.  Cenotica.  Affecting  the  fluids. 

Genus  1.  Paramenia.  Mismenstruation. 

Species  1.  P.  obstructionis.  Obstructed  menstruation. 

2.  P.  difficilis.  Laborious  menstruation. 

3.  P.  superflua.  Excessive  menstruation. 

4.  P.  erroris.  Vicarious  menstruation. 

5.  P.  cessationis.  Irregular  cessation  of  the 

menses. 

Genus  2.  Lecorrh^ea.  Whites. 

Species  1.  L.  communis.  Common  whites. 

2.  L.  nabothi.  Labour-show. 

3.  L.  senescentium.  Whites  of  advaned  life. 
Genus  3.  Blenorrhcee.  Gonorrhoea. 

Species  1.  B.  simplex.  Simple  urethral  running. 

2.  B.  luodes.  Clap. 

3.  B.  chronica.  Gleet. 

Genus  4.  Spermorrhiea.  Seminal  flux. 

Species  l.  S.  entonica.  Entonic  seminal  flux. 

2.  S.  atonica.  Atonic  seminal  flux. 

Genus  5.  Galactia.  Mislactation. 

Species  1.  G.  praematura.  Premature  milkflow. 

2.  G.  defectiva.  Deficient  milkflow. 

3.  G.  depravata.  Depraved  milkflow. 

4.  G.  erratica.  Erratic  milkflow. 

5.  G.  virorum.  Milkflow  in  males. 

Order  2.  Orgastica.  Affecting  the  orgasm. 

Genus  1.  Chlorosis.  Green-sickness. 

Species  1.  C.  entonica.  Entonic  green-sickness. 

2.  C.  atonica.  Atonic  green-sickness. 

Genus  2.  Procotia.  Genital  precocity. 

Species  1.  P.  masculina.  Male  precocity. 

2.  P.  feminina.  Female  precocity 
Genus  3.  Lagnesis.  Lust. 

Species  1.  L.  salacitas.  Salacity. 

2.  L.  furor.  Lascivious  madness. 

Genus  4.  Agenesia.  Male  sterility. 

Species  1.  A.  impotens.  Male  impotency. 

2.  A.  dyspermia.  Seminal  misemission. 

3.  A.  incongrua.  Copulative  incongruity. 
Genus  5.  Amphoria.  Female  sterility.  Barrenness. 
Species  1.  A.  impotens.  Barrennessof  impotency. 

2.  A.  paramenica.  Barrenness  of  mismen 

struation. 

3.  A.impercita.  Barrenness  of  irrespondence. 

4.  A.  incongrua.  Barrenness  of  incongruity. 
Genus  6.  A3doptosis.  Genital  prolapse. 

Species  1.  JE.  uteri.  Falling  down  of  the  womb. 

2.  JE.  vagina.  Prolapse  of  the  vagina. 

3.  JE.  vesica.  Prolapse  of  the  bladder 

4.  JE.  complicata.  Complicated  genita.  pro- 

lapse. 

5.  JE.  polyposa.  Genital  excrescence. 

Order  3.  Carpotica.  Affecting  the  impregnation. 
Germs  1.  Paracyesis.  Morbid  pregnancy. 

Speciesl.  F.  irritativa.  Constitutional  derangement 

of  pregnancy. 

2.  P.  uterina.  Local  derangement  of  preg- 

nancy. 

3.  P.  abortus.  Abortion. 

Genus  2.  Parodynia.  Morbid  labour. 

Species  1.  P.  atonica.  Atonic  labour. 

2.  P.  implastica.  Unpliant  labour. 

3.  P.  sympathetica.  Complicated  labour. 


NOSOLOGY. 


Species 4.  P.  perversa.  Preternatura  presentation. 

5.  P.  amorphica.  Impracticable  labour. 

6.  P.  pluralis.  Multiplicate  labour 

7.  P.  secundaria.  Sequential  labour. 

Oenus  3.  Eocyesis.  Extra- uterine  foetation. 

Species  1.  E.  ovaria.  Ovarian  exfoetation. 

2.  E.  tubalis.  Tubal  exfoetation. 

3.  E.  abdominalis.  Abdominal  exfoetation. 
Oenus  4.  Pseudocyesis.  Spurious  pregnancy. 
Species  1.  P.  molaris.  Mole. 

2.  P.  inanis.  False  conception. 

CLASS  VI.  ECCRITICA. — Diseases  of  the  Excer- 
nent  Functions. 

Order  1.  Mesotica.  Affecting  the  parenchyma. 
Genus  1.  Polysarchia.  Corpulency 
Species  1.  P.  adiposa.  Obesity. 

Oenus  2.  Emphyma.  Tumour. 

Species  1.  E.  sarcoma.  Sarcomatous  tumour. 

2.  E.  encystis.  Encysted  tumour. 

3.  E.  exostosis.  Bony  tumour. 

Genus  3.  Parostia.  Mis-ossification. 

Species  1.  P.  fragils.  Fragility  of  the  bones. 

2.  P.  flexilis.  Flexility  of  the  bones. 

Oenus  4.  Cyrtosis.  Contortion  of  the  bones. 
Species  1.  C.  rhachia.  Rickets. 

2.  C.  cretinismus.  Cretinismus. 

Oenus  5.  Osthexia.  Osthexy. 

Species  1.  O.  infarciens.  Parenchymatous  orthexy. 

2.  O.  implexa.  Vascular  osthexy. 

Order  2.  Catotica.  Affecting  internal  surfaces. 
Oenus  1.  Hydrops.  Dropsy. 

Species!.  H.  cellularis.  Cellular  dropsy. 

2.  H.  capitis.  Dropsy  of  the  head. 

3.  H.  spins.  Dropsy  of  the  spine. 

4.  H.  thoracis.  Dropsy  of  the  chest. 

5.  H.  abdominis.  Dropsy  of  the  belly. 

6.  H.  ovarii.  Dropsy  of  the  ovaries. 

7.  H.  tubalis.  Dropsy  of  the  Fallopian  tubes. 

8.  H.  uteri.  Dropsy  of  the  womb. 

9.  H.  scroti.  Dropsy  of  the  scrotum. 

Oenus  2.  Emphysema.  Inflation,  wind  dropsy. 
Species  1.  E.  cellulare.  Cellular  inflation. 

2.  E.  abdominis.  Tympany. 

Oenus  3.  Paruria.  Mismicturition. 

Species  1.  P.  inops.  Destitution  of  urine. 

2.  P.  retentionis.  Stoppage  of  urine. 

3.  P.  stillatitia.  Strangury. 

4.  P.  mellita.  Saccharine  urine.  Diabetes. 

5.  P.  incontinens.  Incontinence  of  urine. 

6.  P.  incocta.  Unassimulated  urine. 

7.  P.  erratica.  Erratic  urine. 

Oenus  4.  Lithia.  Urinary  calculus. 

Species  1.  L.  renalis.  Renal  alculus. 

2.  L.  vesicalis.  Stone  in  the  bladder. 

Order  3.  Acrotica.  Affecting  the  external  surface. 
Genus  1.  Ephidrosis.  Morbid  sweat. 

Species  1.  E.  profusa.  Profuse  sweat. 

2.  E.  cruenta.  Bloody  sweat. 

3.  E.  partialis.  Partial  sweat. 

4.  E.  discolor.  Coloured  sweat. 

5.  E.  olens.  Scented  sweat. 

6.  E.  arenosa.  Sandy  sweat. 

Oenus  2.  Exanthesis.  Cutaneous-blush. 

Species  1.  E.  roseola.  Rose-rash. 

Oenus  3.  Exormia.  Papulous  skin. 

Species  1.  E.  strophulus.  Gum-rash. 

2.  E.  lichen.  Lichenous-rash. 

3.  E.  prurigo.  Pruriginous-rash. 

4.  E.  milium.  Millet-rash. 

Oenus  4.  Lepidosis.  Scale-skin. 

Species  1.  L.  pityriasis.  Dandrift. 

2.  L.  lepriasis.  Leprosy. 

3.  L.  psoriasis.  Pry-scall. 

4.  L.  icthyiasis.  Fish-skin. 

Oenus  5.  Ecphlysis.  Blains. 

Species  1.  E.  pompholyx  Water-blebs. 

2.  E.  herpes.  Tetter. 

3.  E.  rhypea.  Sordid  blain. 

4.  E.  eczema.  Heat  eruption. 

Oenus  6.  Eopyksis.  Humid  scall. 

Species  1.  E.  impetigo.  Running  scall. 

2.  E.  porrigo.  Scabby  scall. 

3.  E.  ecthyma.  Papulous  scall. 

4.  E.  scabies.  Itch. 

Oenus  7.  Malis.  Cutaneous  vermination 
Species  1.  M.  pediculi.  Lousiness. 

2.  M.  pulicis.  Flea-bites. 


Species  3.  M.  acari.  Tick -bite. 

4.  M.  filatise.  Guinea-worm. 

5.  M.  cestri.  Gadfly-bite. 

6.  M.  gordii.  Hair-worm. 

Oenus  8.  Ecphyma.  Cutaneous  excrescence. 

Species  1.  E,  caruncula.  Caruncle. 

2.  E.  verruca.  Wart. 

3.  E.  clavus.  Corn. 

4.  E.  callus.  Callus. 

Oenus  9.  Trichosis.  Morbid  hair. 

Species  1.  T.  setosa.  Bristly  hair. 

2.  T.  plica.  Platted  hair. 

3.  T.  hirsuties.  Extraneous  hair. 

4.  T.  distrix.  Forky  hair. 

5.  T.  poliosis.  Gray  hairs. 

6.  T.  arthrix.  Baldness. 

7.  T.  area.  Arcated  hair. 

8.  T.  decolor.  Miscoloured  hair. 

Oenus  10.  Epichrosis.  Macular  skin. 

Species  1.  E.  leucasmus.  Veal-skin. 

2.  E.  spilus.  Mole. 

3.  E.  lenticula.  Freckles. 

4.  E.  ephelis.  Sun-burn. 

5.  E.  aurigo.  Orange-skin. 

6.  E.  paecilia.  Pyeballed-skin. 

7.  E.  alphosis.  Albino-skin: 

NOSTA'LGIA.  (From  to  return,  and  aXyos, 

pain.)  A vehement  desire  for  revisiting  one’s  country. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and  order  Dy- 
sorexice,  of  Cullen,  known  by  impatience  when  absent 
from  one’s  native  home,  and  a vehement  desire  to  re- 
turn, attended  with  gloom  and  melancholy,  loss  of  ap- 
petite, and  want  of  sleep. 

NOSTRUM.  This  word  means  our  own , and  is 
very  significantly  applied  to  all  quack  medicines,  the 
composition  of  which  is  kept  a secret  from  the  public, 
and  known  only  to  the  inventor. 

Notched  leaf.  See  Erosus. 

NO  THUS.  (Nofloj,  spurious.)  Spurious.  1.  Those 
ribs  which  are  not  attached  to  the  sternum  are  called 
costoe  nothce,  the  spurious  ribs. 

2.  Diseases  are  so  called  which  only  resemble  others 
which  they  really  are  not : as  peripneumonia  notha , &c. 

Notije'us.  (From  vwrov,  the  back.)  An  epithet  of 
the  spinal  marrow. 

Notio'des.  (From  vortj,  moisture.)  Applied  to  a 
fever,  attended  with  a vitiation  of  the  fluids,  or  a col- 
liquative wasting. 

NOVACULITE.  See  TVhetslate. 

NUBE'CULA.  (Dini.  of  nubes,  a cloud.)  A little 
cloud.  1.  A cloud  in  the  urine. 

2.  A white  speck  in  the  eye. 

NUCAMENTUM.  See  Amentum. 

Nuces  gallje.  Common  galls. 

Nuces  pu  gantes.  See  Ricinus. 

Nucesta.  See  Myristica  moschata. 

NU'CHA.  Nucha  capitis.  The  hind  part  or  nape 
of  the  neck.  The  part  is  so  called  where  the  spinal 
marrow  begins. 

Nuci'sta.  The  nutmeg. 

NUCK,  Anthony,  a distinguished  Dutch  physician 
and  anatomist,  flourished  at  the  Hague,  and  subse- 
quently at  Leyden,  in  the  latter  part  of  the  17th  cen- 
tury. He  filled  the  office  of  professor  of  anatomy  and 
surgery  in  the  latter  university,  and  was  also  president 
of  the  college  of  surgeons.  He  pursued  his  dissections 
with  great  ardour,  cultivating  both  human  and  com- 
parative anatomy  at  every  opportunity.  He  contri- 
buted some  improvements  also  to  the  practice  of  sur- 
gery. He  died  about  the  year  1692. 

NU'CLEUS.  (E  nuce,  from  the  nut.)  1.  A kernel 
or  fruit  enclosed  in  a hard  shell. 

2.  When  the  centre  of  a tumour  or  morbid  concretion, 
as  a stone  of  the  bladder,  has  an  obvious  difference  from 
the  surrounding  parts,  that  is  called  the  nucleus : thus  a 
cherry-stone  and  other  things  have  been  found  in  calculi 
of  the  bladder,  forming  the" nucleus  of  that  concretion. 
Nu'cul*  sapona'rxss.  See  Sapindus  saponaria. 
NUDUS.  Naked.  Applied  to  flowers,  leaves,  stems, 
receptacles,  seeds,  &c.  of  plants.  A flower  is  said  to 
be  naked  when  the  calyx  is  wanting,  as  in  the  tulip, 
and  white  lily ; and  a leaf  when  it  is  destitute  of  all 
kinds  of  clothing  or  hairiness,  as  in  the  genus  orchis  : 
the  stem  is  naked  that  bears  no  leaves,  scales,  or  any 
other  vesture,  as  Cuscuta  europea:  the  receptacle  of 
the  Leontodon  taraxacum  and  Lactuca , the  seeds  of 
the  gymnospermal  plants,  &c. 


123 


NUT 


NUX 


NUMMULA'RIA.  (From  nummus,  money-  so 
called  because  its  leaves  are  round,  and  of  the  size  of 
the  old  silver  twopence.)  See  Lysimachia  nummularia. 

NUT.  See  Nuz. 

Nut,  Barbadoes.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Nut,  cocoa.  See  Cocos  nucifera. 

Nut,  Pis-tachia.  See  Pistacia  vera. 

Nut,  purging.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

NUTMEG.  See  Myristica  moschata. 

NUTRITION.  Nutritio.  Nutrition  may  be  con- 
sidered the  completion  of  the  assimilating  functions. 
The  food  changed  by  a series  of  decompositions  ani- 
malized  and  rendered  similar  to  the  being  which  it  is 
designed  to  nourish,  applies  itself  to  those  organs,  the 
loss  of  which  it  is  to  supply ; and  this  identification  of 
nutritive  matter  to  our  organs  constitutes  nutrition. 

The  living  body  is  continually  losing  its  constituent 
'parts. 

“ From  the  state  of  the  embryo  to  the  most  advanced 
old  age,  the  weight  and  volume  of  the  body  are  almost 
continually  changing ; the  different  organs  and  tissues 
present  infinite  variations  in  their  consistence,  colour, 
elasticity,  and  sometimes  their  chemical  composition. 
The  volume  of  the  organs  augments  when  they  are 
often  in  action ; on  the  contrary,  their  size  diminishes 
when  they  remain  long  at  rest.  By  the  influence  of 
one  or  other  of  these  causes,  their  chemical  and  phy- 
sical properties  present  remarkable  variations.  Many 
diseases  often  produce  in  a very  short  time,  remarkable 
changes  in  the  exterior  conformation,  and  in  the  struc- 
.fure  of  a great  number  of  organs. 

If  madder  is  mixed  with  the  food  of  an  animal,  in 
fifteen  or  twenty  days  the  bones  present  a red  tint, 
which  disappears  when  the  use  of  it  is  left  off. 

There  exists,  then,  in  the  organs,  an  insensible  mo- 
tion of  the  particles  which  produce  all  these  modifica- 
tions. It  is  this  that  is  called  nutrition,  or  nutritive 
action. 

This  phenomenon,  which  the  observing  spirit  of  the 
ancients  had  not  permitted  to  escape,  was  to  them  the 
object  of  many  ingenious  suppositions  that  are  still  ad- 
mitted. For  example,  it  is  said  that,  by  means  of  the 
nutritive  action,  the  whole  body  is  renewed,  so  that,  at 
a certain  period,  it  does  not  possess  a single  particle  of 
the  matter  that  composed  it  formerly.  Limits  have 
even  been  assigned  to  this  total  renewal : some  have 
fixed  the  period  of  three  years;  others  think  it  not  com- 
plete till  seven : but  there  is  nothing  to  give  probability 
to  these  conjectures;  on  the  contrary,  certain  well- 
tJfoved  facts  seem  to  render  them  of  no  avail. 

It  is  well  known  that  soldiers,  sailors,  and  several 
savage  people  colour  their  skins  with  substances  which 
they  introduce  into  the  tissue  of  this  membrane  itself: 
the  figures  thus  traced  preserve  their  form  and  colour 
during  their  lives,  should  no  particular  circumstances 
occur.  How  can  this  phenomenon  agree  with  the  re- 
newal of  the  skin  according  to  these  authors  1 The  re- 
cent use  of  nitrate  of  silver  internally,  in  the  cure  of 
epilepsy,  furnishes  a new  proof  of  this  kind.  After 
some  months’  use  of  this  substance,  some  sick  persons 
have  had  their  skin  coloured  of  a grayish  blue,  proba- 
bly by  a deposition  of  the  salt  in  the  tissue  of  this  mem- 
brane, where  it  is  immediately  in  contact  with  the  air. 
Several  individuals  have  been  in  this  state  for  some 
years  without  the  tint  becoming  weaker ; while  in  others 
it  has  diminished  by  degrees,  and  disappeared  in  two  or 
three  years.  4 

In  resting  on  the  suppositions  which  we  have  spoken, 
it  is  admitted,  in  the  metaphorical  language  now  nsed 
in  physiology,  that  the  atoms  of  the  organs  can  only 
serve  for  a certain  period  in  their  composition ; that  in 
time  they  wear,  and  become  at  last  improper  to  enter 
into  their  composition;  and  that  they  are  then  absorbed 
and  replaced  by  new  atoms  proceeding  from  the  food. 

It  is  added,  that  the  animal  matters  of  which  our  ex- 
cretions are  composed  are  the  detritus  of  the  organs, 
and  that  they  are  principally  composed  of  atoms  that 
can  no  longer  serve  in  their  composition,  &c.  Sec. 

Instead  of  discussing  these  hypotheses,  we  shall  men- 
tion a few  facts  from  which  we  have  some  idea  of  the 
nutritive  movement. 

A.  In  respect  to  the  rapidity  with  which  the  organs 
change  their  physical  and  chemical  properties  by  sick- 
ness or  age,  it  appears  that  nutrition  is  more  or  less 
rapid  according  to  the  tissues.  The  glands,  the  mus- 
cles, the  skin,  Sec.,  change  their  volume,  colour,  con- 
sistence, with  great  quickuess  the  tendons,  the  fibrous 

1CM 


membranes,  the  bones,  the  cartilages,  appear  to  have  a 
much  slower  nutrition,  for  their  physical  properties 
change  but  slowly  by  the  effect  of  age  and  disease. 

B.  If  we  consider  the  quantity  of  food  consumed 
proportionably  to  the  weight  of  the  body,  the  nutritive 
movement  seems  more  rapid  in  infancy  and  youth,  than 
in  the  adult  and  in  old  age ; it  is  accelerated  by  the  re- 
peated action  of  the  organs,  and  retarded  by  repose. 
Indeed,  children  and  young  people  consume  more  food 
than  adults  and  old  people : these  last  can  preserve  all 
their  faculties  by  the  use  of  a very  small  quantity  of 
food.  All  the  exercises  of  the  body,  hard  labour,  re- 
quire necessarily  a greater  quantity,  or  more  nutritive 
food;  on  the  contrary,  perfect  repose  permits  of  longer 
abstinence. 

C.  The  blood  appears  to  contain  most  of  the  princi 
jtles  necessary  to  the  nutrition  of  the  organs;  the 
fibrine,  the  albumen,  the  fat,  the  salts,  Sec.,  that  enter 
into  the  composition  of  the  tissues,  are  found  in  the 
blood.  They  appear  to  be  deposited  in  their  parenchy- 
ma at  the  instant  when  the  blood  traverses  them ; the 
manner  in  which  this  deposite  takes  place  is  entirely 
unknown.  There  is  an  evident  relation  between  the 
activity  of  the  nutrition  of  an  organ  and  the  quantity 
of  blood  it  receives.  The  tissues  that  have  a rapid  nu- 
trition have  larger  arteries ; when  the  action  of  an  or- 
gan has  determined  an  acceleration  of  its  nutrition,  the 
arteries  increase  in  size. 

Many  proximate  principles  that  enter  into  the  com- 
position of  the  organs  are  not  found  in  the  blood:  as 
osmazome,  the  cerebral  matter,  gelatine,  Sec.  They 
are,  therefore,  formed  from  other  principles  in  the  pa- 
renchyma of  the  organs,  in  some  chemical  but  un- 
known manner 

D.  Since  chemical  analysis  has  made  known  the  na 
ture  of  the  different  tissues  of  the  animal  economy, 
they  have  been  all  found  to  contain  a considerable  por- 
tion of  azote.  Our  food  being  also  partly  composed  of 
this  simple  body,  the  azote  of  our  organs  likewise  pro- 
bably comeS  from  them ; but  several  eminent  authors 
think  that  it  is  derived  from  respiration ; others  believe 
that  it  is  formed  by  the  influence  of  life  solely.  Both 
parties  insist  particularly  upon  the  example  of  the  her- 
bivorous animals,  which  are  supported  exclusively 
upon  non-azotized  matter;  upon  the  history  of  certain 
people  that  live  entirely  upon  rice  and  maize;  upon 
that  of  negroes  who  can  live  a long  time  withont  eating 
anything  but  sugar;  lastly,  upon  what  is  related  of 
caravans,  which,  in  traversing  the  deserts,  have  for  a 
long  time  had  only  gum  in  place  of  every  sort  of  food. 
Were  it  indeed  proved  by  these  facts,  that  men  can  live 
a long  time  without  azotized  food,  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  acknowledge  that  azote  has  an  origin  different 
from  the  food ; but  the  facts  cited  by  no  means  prove 
this.  In  fact,  almost  all  the  vegetables  upon  whicii  man 
and  the  animals  feed  contain  more  or  less  azote ; for 
example,  the  impure  sugar  that  the  negroes  eat  presents 
a considerable  portion  of  it ; and  with  regard  to  the 
people,  as  they  say,  who  feed  upon  rice  or  maize,  it  is 
well  known  that  they  eat  milk  or  cheese : now  casein 
is  the  most  azotized  of  all  the  nutritive  proximate  prin- 
ciples. 

E.  A considerable  number  of  tissues  in  the  economy 
appear  to  have  no  nutrition,  properly  so  called : as 
the  epipermis,  the  nails,  the  hair,  the  teeth,  the  co- 
louring matter  of  the  skin,  and,  perhaps,  the  carti- 
lages. 

These  different  parts  are  really  secreted,  by  particu- 
lar organs,  as  the  teeth  and  the  hair ; or  by  parts  which 
have  other  functions  at  the  same  time,  as  the  nails  and 
epidermis.  The  most  of  the  parts  formed  in  this  mode 
wear  by  the  friction  of  exterior  bodies,  and  are  con- 
stantly renewed  if  they  are  entirely  carried  away, 
they  are  capable  of  reproduction.  A very  singular 
fact  is,  that  they  continue  to  grow  several  days  after 
death .-^Magendie's  Physiology. 

Nutri'tum  unguentum.  A composition  of  litharge, 
vineear,  and  oil. 

NUX.  (Nux,  cis.  f.)  A nut,  or  fruit,  which  has  a 
hard  shell. 

Botanists  consider  this  as  distinct  from  the  dmpa, 
and  define  it  a pericarp,  the  seed  being  contained  in  a 
hard  bony  shell. 

From  the  number  of  seeds  it  contains,  it  is  called, 

L Monosperm,  having  one;  as  in  Corylus  avellana. 

2.  Disperm,  with  two ; as  in  Halasia. 

From  its  loculaments: 


NYM 


NYS 


1.  UnilocUiJtr , bilocular , trilocular , witfl  one,  two, 
or  three  ; as  in  Corylus , Lygeum , and  Elais. 

From  its  figure: 

1.  Mate , winged ; as  in  Pinus  thuja. 

2.  Angulate ; as  in  Cypressus. 

3.  Ovate;  as  in  Corylus  and  Carp inus. 

4.  Quadrangular ; as  in  Halesia. 

5.  Tetragone ; as  in  Peladium  and  Mesua. 

6.  Reniform ; as  in  Anacardium. 

7.  Spinous ; as  in  Trapa  nutans. 

Nux  aquatica.  See  Trapa  natans. 

Nox  arctmatica.  The  nutmeg. 

Nux  barbadensis.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Nux  basilica.  The  walnut. 

Nux  ben.  See  Guilandina  moringa. 

Nux  cathartic  a.  The  garden  spurge. 

Nux  cathartica  Americana.  See  Jatropha 
curcas. 

Nux  indica.  The  cocoa-nut. 

Nux  juglans.  See  Juglans. 

Nux  medica.  The  maldivian  nut. 

Nux  metella.  The  nux  vomica. 

Nux  moschata.  See  Mijrystica  moschata. 

Nux  myristica.  See  Myristica  moschata. 

Nux  i'ersica.  The  walnut. 

Nux  pistacia.  See  Pistacia  vera. 

Nux  purgans.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Nux  serapionis.  St.  Ignatius’s  bean. 

Nux  vomica.  See  Strychnos. 

NYCTALO'PIA.  (From  vv%,  the  night,  and  wip, 
an  eye.)  Imbecillitas  oculorum , of  Celsus.  A defect 
in  vision,  by  which  the  patient  sees  little  or  nothing  in 
the  day,  but  in  the  evening  and  night  sees  tolerably 
well.  The  proximate  cause  is  various: 

1.  From  a periodical  amaurosis,  or  gutta  serena, 
when  the  blind  paroxysm  begins  in  the  morning  and 
terminates  in  the  evening. 

2.  From  too  great  a sensibility  of  the  retina,  which 
cannot  bear  the  meridian  light.  See  Photophobia. 

3.  From  an  opaque  spot  in  the  middle  of  the  crystal- 
line lens.  When  the  light  of  the  sun  in  the  meridian 
contracts  the  {>upil,  there  is  blindness  : about  evening, 
or  in  more  obscure  places,  the  pupil  dilates,  hence  the 
rays  of  light  pass  through  the  limbus  of  the  crystal- 
line lens. 

4.  From  a disuse  of  light;  thus  persons  who  are 
educated  in  obscure  prisons  see  nothing  immediately 
in  open  meridian  light ; but  by  degrees  their  eyes  are 
accustomed  to  distinguish  objects  in  daylight. 

5.  From  an  immoveable  mydriasis;  for  in  this  in- 
stance the  pupil  admits  too  great  a quantity  of  light, 
which  the  immobile  pupil  cannot  moderate ; hence  the 
patient,  in  a strong  light,  sees  little  or  nothing. 

6.  From  too  great  a contraction  of  the  pupil.  This 
admits  not,  a sufficiency  of  lucid  rays,  in  bright  light, 
but  towards  night  the  pupil  dilates  more,  and  the  pa- 
tient sees  better. 

7.  Nyctalopia  endemica.  A whole  people  have  been 
nyctalopes,  as  the  ^Ethiopians,  Africans,  Americans, 
and  Asiatics.  A great  flow  of  tears  are  excreted  all 
the  day  from  their  eyes ; at  night  they  see  objects. 

8.  From  a commotion  of  the  eye;  from  which  a man 
in  the  night  saw  all  objects  distinctly. 

Nycto'basis.  (From  the  night,  and  (jaivu >,  to 
goj  Walking  in  the  sleep. 

NY'MPHA.  (From  wppa,  a water-nymph:  so 
called  because  it  stands  in  the  water-course.)  Alee 
internee  minores  clitoridis ; Culliculum;  Collicvla; 
Myrtucheilides ; Eabia  minora.  The  membranous 
fold,  situated  within  the  labia  majora,  on  each  side  of 
the  entrance  of  the  vagina  uteri. 

NYMPH^E'A.  (From  vvpcba,  a water-nymph ; be- 
cause it  grows  in  watery  places.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Lirmaean  system.  Class,  Poly- 
andria ; Order,  Monogynia.  The  water-lily. 

Nymphjea  alba.  Leuconymphtra.  Nenuphar. 
Micro-leuconymphcea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
white  water-lily.  This  beautiful  plant  was  formerly 


employed  medicinally  as  a demulcent,  and  slightly 
anodyne  remedy.  It  is  now  laid  aside. 

Nymphjea  glandifera.  See  Nymphcea  nelumboi 

Nymph^a  lotus.  The  Egyptian  lotus.  An  aqua 
tic  plant,  a native  of  both  Indies.  The  root  is  conical, 
firm,  about  the  size  of  a middling  pear,  covered  with 
a blackish  bark,  and  set  round  with  fibres.  It  has  a 
sweetish  taste,  and,  when  boiled  or  roasted,  becomes 
as  yellow  within  as  the  yelk  of  an  egg.  The  plant 
grows  in  abundance  on  the  banks  of  the  Nile,  and  is 
there  nn/ch  sought  after  by  the  poor,  who,  in  a short 
time,  collect  enough  to  supply  their  families  with  food 
for  several  days. 

Nymph.ua  lutea.  Nymphcea  major  lutea , of  Cas- 
par Bauhin.  The  systematic  name  of  the  yellow 
water-lily.  This  beautiful  plant  was  employed  for- 
merly with  the  same  intention  as  the  white  water-lily, 
and,  like  it,  is  now  fallen  into  disuse.  Lindestolpe  in- 
forms uS,  that,  in  some  parts  of  Sweden,  the  roots, 
which  are  the  strongest  part,  were,  in  times  of  scarcity, 
used  as  food,  and  did  not  prove  unwholesome. 

Nymph^a  nelumbo.  Faba  cegyptiaca;  Cycrnus 
cegyptiacus ; Nymphcea  indica  ; Nymphcea  glandifera. 
The  pontic,  or  Egyptian  bean.  This  plant  grows  on 
marshy  grounds  in  Egypt,  and  some  of  the  neighbour- 
ing countries.  The  fruit  is  eaten  either  raw  or  boiled, 
and  is  a tonic  and  astringent. 

NYMPHOI'DES.  (Fromrup0aia,  the  water-lily,  and 
u8os,  likeness.)  Resembling  the  water-lily ; as  Meny- 
anthes  nymplioidcs. 

NYMPIIOMA'NIA.  (From  vvpcpa,  nymp'ha,  and 
pavia,  madness.)  Furor  uterinus.  Called  by  the 
Arabians,  Acrai ; Brachuna ; Arascon  ; Arsatum ; 
(Estromania.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , 
and  order  Dysorexice,  of  Cullen,  characterized  by  ex- 
cessive and  violent  desire  for  coition  in  women.  The 
effects,  as  described  by  Juvenal,  in  his  sixth  satire,  are 
most  humiliating  to  human  nature.  It  acknowledges 
the  same  causes  as  satyriasis ; but  as  females,  more 
especially  in  warm  climates,  have  a more  irritable 
fibre,  they  are  apt  to  suffer  more  severely  than  the 
males. 

It  is  a species  of  madness,  or  a high  degree  of  hys- 
terics. Its  immediate  cause  is  a preternatural  irritabi- 
lity of  the  uterus  and  pudenda  of  women,  or  an  un- 
usual acrimony  of  the  fluids  m these  parts.  Its  pre- 
sence is  known  by  the  wanton  behaviour  of  the  pa- 
tient ; she  speaks  and  acts  with  unrestrained  obscenity, 
and,  as  the  disorder  increases,  she  scolds,  cries,  and 
laughs,  by  turns.  While  reason  is  retained,  she  is 
silent,  and  seems  melancholy,  but  her  eyes  discover  an 
unusual  wantonness.  The  symptoms  are  better  or 
worse,  until  the  greatest  degree  of  the  disorder  ap- 
proaches, and  then,  by  every  word  and  action,  her  con- 
dition is  too  manifest. 

NYMPHOTOMIA.  (From  vvppa,  the  nympha,  and 
tclivu),  to  cut.)  The  operation  of  removing  the  nympha 
when  too  large. 

NYSTA'GMUS.  (From  vvg-au),  to  sleep.)  A twink- 
ling of  the  eyes,  such  as  happens  when  a person  is 
very  sleepy.  Authors  also  define  nystagmus  to  be  an 
involuntary  agitation  of  the  oculary  bulb.  It  is  known 
by  the  instability  or  involuntary  and  constant  motions 
of  the  globe  of  the  eye,  from  one  canthus  lo  another, 
or  in  some  other  directions. . Sometimes  it  is  accom- 
panied with  a hippus,  or  an  alternate  and  repeated 
dilatation  and  constriction  of  the  pupil.  The  species 
are,  1.  Nystagmus,  from  fear.  This  agitation  is  ob- 
served under  the  operation  for  the  cataract;  and  it  is 
checked  by  persuasion,  and  waiting  a short  space  of 
time.  2.  Nystagmus,  from  sand  or  small  gravel  fall 
ing  in  the  eye.  3.  Nystagmus,  from  a catarrh,  which 
is  accompanied  with  much  inflammation.  4.  Nystag 
mus,  from  saburra  in  the  primse  viie,  as  is  observed  in 
infants  afflicted  with  worms,  and  is  known  by  the 
signs  of  saburra.  5.  Nystagmus  syrnptomaticus, 
which  happens  in  hysteric,  epileptic,  and  sometimes  in 
pregnant  persons,  and  is  a common  symptom  accom- 
panying St.  Vitus’s  dance. 


125 


OBL 


O 


OBL 


% 


tf")AK.  See  Quercus. 

Oak,  Jerusalem.  See  Chcnopodium  botrys. 

Oak , sea.  See  Fdcus  vesiculosus. 

Oak , willow-leaved.  See  Quercus  pliellos. 

[ Oaks , American.  See  Quercus.  A.] 

OAT.  See  Avena. 

Obeljb'a.  (From  o6e\os,  a dart,  or  a spit.)  Obelwa 
sagittalis , an  epithet  for  the  sagittal  suture  of  the 
skull. 

Obeliscothe'ca.  (From  ofoAtcrxoj,  an  obelisk,  and 
drjKa,  a bag : so  called  from  the  shape  of  its  seed-bags.) 
The  dwarf  sunflower.  Cyst  us  hdianthemum. 

1 OBESITY.  See  Polysarcia. 

Oblesion.  (From  ob , against,  and  Icedo , to  hurt.) 
An  injury  done  to  any  part. 

OBLI'Q,UUS.  Oblique.  1.  In  anatomy.  A term 
applied  to  parts  from  their  direction. 

2.  In  botany,  it  means  the  same  as  radix  obliquus, 
but  sometimes  it  means  twisted.  Folium  obliquum, 
for  example,  is  a leaf,  one  part  of  which  is  vertical,  the 
other  horizontal ; as  in  Fritillaria  obliqua. 

Obliquus  ascendens  abdominis.  See  Obliquus 
internus  abdominis. 

Obliquus  ascendens  internus.  See  obliquus  in- 
ternus abdominis. 

Obliquus  auris.  See  Laxator  tympani. 

Obliquus  capitis  inferior.  See  Obliquus  infe- 
rior capitis. 

Obliquus  capitis  superior  See  Obliquus  supe- 
rior capitis. 

Obliquus  descendens  abdominis.  See  Obliquus 
externus  abdominis. 

Obliquus  descendens  externus.  See  Obliquus 
ezternis  abdominis. 

Obliquus  externus.  See  Obliquus  externus  ab- 
dominis. 

Obliquus  externus  abdominis.  A muscle  of  the 
abdomen : so  named  by  Morgagni,  Albinus,  and  Wins- 
low. It  is  the  Obliquus  descendens  of  Vesalius  and 
Douglas,  and  the  Obliquus  major  of  Haller,  and  some 
others.  By  Dumas  it  is  named  Rio-pubicosto-abdomi- 
nal.  It  is  a broad,  thin  muscle,  fleshy  posteriorly,  and 
tendinous  in  the  middle  and  lower  part,  and  is  situated 
immediately  under  the  integuments, covering  all  the  other 
muscles  of  the  lower  belly.  It  arises  from  the  lower  edges 
of  the  eight,  and  sometimes,  though  rarely,  of  the  nine  in- 
ferior ribs,  not  far  from  their  cartilages,  by  as  many  dis- 
tinct fleshy  portions,  which  indigitate  with  correspond- 
ing parts  of  the  serratus  major  anticus,  and  the  latissi- 
mus  dorsi.  From  these  several  origins,  the  fibres  of  the 
muscle  descend  obliquely  forwards,  and  soon  degene- 
rate into  abroad  and  thin  aponeurosis,  which  terminates 
in  the  linea  alba.  About  an  inch  and  a half  above  the 
pubes,  the  fibres  of  this  aponeurosis  separate  from  each 
other,  so  as  to  form  an  aperture,  which  extends  obliquely 
inwards  and  forwards,  more  than  an  inch  in  length, 
and  is  wider  above  than  below,  being  nearly  of  an  oval 
figure.  This  is  what  is  sometimes,  though  erroneously, 
called  the  ring  of  the  abdominal  muscles,  annulus  ab- 
dominis, for  it  belongs  only  to  the  external  oblique, 
there  being  no  such  opening  either  in  the  obliquus  in- 
ternus, or  in  the  transversalis,  as  some  writers,  and  par- 
ticularly Douglas  and  Cheselden,  would  give  us  to  un- 
derstand. This  opening,  or  ring,  serves  lor  the  passage 
of  the  spermatic  vessels  in  men,  and  of  the  round  liga- 
ment of  the  uterus  in  women,  and  is  of  ' a larger  size  in 
the  former  than  in  the  latter.  The  two  tendinous  por- 
tions, which,  by  their  separation,  form  this  aperture, 
are  called  the  columns  of  the  ring.  The  anterior,  su- 
perior, and  inner  column,  which  is  the  broadest  and 
thickest  of  the  two,  passes  over  the  symphysis  pubis, 
and  is  fixed  to  the  opposite  os  pubis ; so  that  the  ante- 
rior column  of  the  right  obliquus  externus  intersects 
that  of  the  left,  and  is,  as  it  were,  interwoven  with  it, 
by  which  means  their  insertion  is  strengthened,  and 
their  attachment  made  firmer.  The  posterior,  inferior, 
and  exterior  column,  approaches  the  anterior  one  as  it 
descends,  and  is  fixed  behind  and  below  it  to  the  os  pu- 
bis of  the  same  side.  The  fibres  of  that  part  of  the 


obliquus  extemus,  which  arises  from  the  two  inferiot 
ribs,  descend  almost  perpendicularly,  and  are  inserted, 
tendinous  and  fleshy,  into  the  outer  edge  of  the  ante- 
rior half  of  the  spine  of  the  ilium.  From  the  anterior  su- 
perior spinous  process  of  that  bone,  the  external  oblique 
is  stretched  tendinous  to  the  os  pubis,  •forming  what  is 
called  Poupart's  and  sometimes  Fallopius's  ligament, 
Fallopius  having  first  described  it.  Winslow,  and 
many  others,  name  it  the  inguinal  ligament.  But, 
after  all,  it  has  no  claim  to  this  name,  it  being  nothing 
more  than  the  tendon  of  the  muscle,  which  is  turned  or 
folded  inwards  at  its  interior  edge.  It  passes  over  the 
blood-vessels-  of  the  lower  extremity,  and  is  thickest 
near  the  pelvis ; and  in  women,  from  the  greater  size 
of  the  pelvis,  it  is  longer  and  looser  than  in  men.  Hence 
we  find  that  women  are  most  liable  to  crural  hernias ; 
whereas  men,  from  the  greater  size  of  the  ring  of  the 
external  oblique,  "are  most  subject  to  the  inguinal. 
From  this  ligament,  and  from  that  part  of  the  tendon 
which  forms  the  ring,  we  observe  a detachment  of  ten- 
dinous fibres,  which  are  lost  in  the  fascia  lata  of  the 
thigh.  This  may,  in  some  measure,  account  for  the 
pain  which,  incases  of  strangulated  hernias,  is  felt  when 
the  patient  stands  upright,  and  which  is  constantly  re- 
lieved upon  bending  the  thigh  upwards.  This  muscle 
serves  to  draw  down  the  ribs  in  expiration ; to  bend  the 
trunk  forwards  when  both  muscles  act,  or  to  bend  it 
obliquely  in  one  side,  and,  perlraps,  to  turn  it  slightly 
upon  its  axis,  when  either  acts  singly ; it  also  raises  the 
pelvis  obliquely  when  the  ribs  are  fixed ; it  supports 
and  compresses  the  abdominal  viscera,  assists  in  the 
evacuation  of  the  urine  and  faeces,  and  is  likewise  use- 
ful in  parturition. 

Obliquus  inferior.  See  Obliquus  inferior  capitis, 
and  Obliquus  inferior  oculi. 

Obliquus  inferior  capitis.  This  muscle  of  the 
head,  the  obliquus  inferior  sive  major , of  Winslow, 
and  the  Spini  aroido-tracheli-altoidien , of  Dumas,  is 
larger  than  the  obliquus  superior  capitis.  It  is  very 
obliquely  situated  between  the  two  first  vetebrae  of  the 
neck.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  middle 
and  outer  side  of  the  spinous  process  of  the  second  ver- 
tebra of  the  neck,  and  is  inserted  tendinous  and  fleshy 
into  the  lower  and  posterior  part  of  the  transverse  pro- 
cess of  the  first  vertebra.  Its  use  is  to  turn  the  first 
vertebra  upon  the  second,  as  upon  a pivot,  and  to  draw 
the  face  towards  the  shoulder. 

Obliquus  inferior  oculi.  Obliquus  minor  oculi , 
of  Winslow,  and  Maxillo , scleroticien,  of  Dumas.  An 
oblique  muscle  of  the  eye,  that  draws  the  globe  of  the 
eye  forwards,  inwards,  and  downwards.  It  arises  by 
a narrow  beginning  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  orbitar 
process  of  the  superior  maxillary  bone,  near  its  junction 
with  the  lachrymal  bone,  and  running  obliquely  out- 
wards, is  inserted  into  the  sclerotic  membrane  of  the  eye. 

Obliquus  inferior  sive  major.  See  Obliquus  in- 
ferior capitis. 

Obliquus  internus.  See  Obliqiius  internus  abdo- 
minis. 

Obliquus  internus  abdominis.  Musculus  acclivis. 
A muscle  of  the  abdomen.  The  Obliquus  ascendens , 
of  Vesalius,  Douglas,  andCowper;  the  Obliquus  minor, 
of  Haller;  the  Obliquus  internus,  of  Winslow ; the 
Obliquus  ascendens  internus , of  Innes ; and  the  Iilio- 
lumbo-costi  abdominal , of  Dumas.  It  is  situated  im- 
mediately under  the  external  oblique,  and  is  broad  and 
thin  like  that  muscle,  but  somewhat  less  considerable  in 
its  extent.  It  arises  from  the  spinous  processes  of  the 
three  inferior  lumbar  vertebrae,  and  from  the  posterior 
and  middle  part  of  the  os  sacrum,  by  a thin  tendinous 
expansion,  which  is  common  to  it  and  to  the  serratus 
posticus  inferior;  by  short  tendinous  fibres,  from  the 
whole  spine  of  the  ilium,  between  its  posterior  tube- 
rosity and  its  anterior  and  superior  spinous  process  ; 
and  front  two-thirds  of  the  posterior  surface  of  what  is 
called  Fallopius’s  ligament,  at  the  middle  of  which  we 
find  the  round  ligament  of  the  uterus  in  women,  and 
the  spermatic  vessels  in  men,  passing  under  the  thir 
edge  of  tliis  muscle ; and  in  the  latter,  it  likewise  sends 


OBL 


OBT 


off  some  fibres,  which  descend  upon  the  spermatic 
chord,  as  far  as  the  tunica  vaginalis  of  the  testis,  and 
constitute  what  is  called  the  cremaster  muscle,  which 
surrounds,  suspends,  and  compresses  the  testicle.  From 
these  origins,  the  fibres  of  the  internal  oblique  run  in 
different  directions;  those  of  the  posterior  portion 
ascend  obliquely  forwards,  the  middle  ones  become  less 
and  less  oblique,  and  at  length  run  in  a horizontal  di- 
rection, and  those  of  the  anterior  portion  extend 
obliquely  downwards.  The  first  of  these  are  inserted, 
by  very  short  tendinous  fibres,  into  the  cartilages  of  the 
fifth,  fourth,  and  third  of  the  false  ribs ; the  fibres  of 
the  second,  or  middle  portion,  form  a broad  tendon, 
which,  after  being  inserted  into  the  lower  edge  of  the 
cartilage  of  the  second  false  rib,  extends  towards  the 
linea  alba,  and  separates  into  two  layers ; the  anterior 
layer,  which  is  the  thickest  of  the  two,  joins  the  tendon 
of  the  obliquus  externus,  and  runs  over  the  two  upper 
thirds  of  the  rectus  muscle,  to  be  inserted  into  the  linea 
alba ; the  posterior  layer  runs  under  the  rectus,  adheres 
to  the  anterior  surface  of  the  tendon  of  the  trans- 
versalis,  and  is  inserted  into  the  cartilages  of  the  first 
of  the  false,  and  the  last  of  the  true  ribs,  and  likewise 
into  the  linea  alba.  By  this  structure  we  may  perceive 
that  the  greater  part  of  the  rectus  is  enclosed,  as  it 
were,  in  a sheath.  The  fibres  of  the  anterior  portion 
of  the  internal  oblique,  or  those  which  arise  from  the 
spine  of  the  ilium  and  the  ligamentum  Fallopii,  like- 
wise form  a broad  tendon,  which,  instead  of  separating 
into  two  layers,  like  that  of  the  other  part  of  the  mus- 
cle, runs  over  the  lower  part  of  the  rectus,  and  adhering 
to  the  under  surface  of  the  tendon  of  the  external 
oblique,  is  inserted  into  the  forepart  of  the  pubes. 
This  muscle  serves  to  assist  the  obliquus  externus ; but 
it  seems  to  be  more  evidently  calculated  than  that  mus- 
cle is  to  draw  the  ribs  downwards  and  backwards.  It 
likewise  serves  to  separate  the  false  ribs  from  the  true 
ribs,  and  from  each  other. 

Obliquus  major  abdominis.  See  Obliquus  exter- 
nus abdominis. 

Obliquus  major  capitis.  See  Obliquus  inferior 
capitis. 

Obliquus  major  oculi.  See  Obliquus  superior 
oculi. 

Obliquus  minor  abdominis.  See  Obliquus  inter- 
nus  abdominis. 

Obliquus  minor  capitis.  See  Obliquus  superior 
capitis. 

Obliquus  minor  oculi.  See  Obliquus  inferior 
oculi. 

Obliquus  superior  capitis.  Riolanus,  who  was 
the  first  that  gave  particular  names  to  the  oblique 
muscles  of  the  head,  called  this  muscle  obliquus  minor , 
to  distinguish  it  from  the  inferior,  which,  on  account  of 
its  being  much  larger,  he  named  obliquus  major.  Spi- 
gelius  afterward  distingu  ished  the  two,  from  their  situa- 
tion with  respect  to  each  other,  into  superior  and  infe- 
rior ; and  in  this  he  is  followed  by  Cpwper  and  Douglas. 
Winslow  retains  both  names.  Dumas  calls  it  Trachelo- 
altoi do-occipital.  That  used  by  Albinus  is  here  adopted. 
This  little  muscle,  which  is  nearly  of  the  same  shape  as 
the  recti  capitis , is  situated  laterally  between  the  occi- 
put and  the  first  vertebra  of  the  neck,  and  is  covered 
by  the  complexus  and  the  upper  part  of  the  splenius. 
It  arises,  by  a short  thick  tendon,  from  the  upper  and 
posterior  part  of  the  transverse  process  of  the  first  ver- 
tebra of  the  neck,  and,  ascending  obliquely  inwards  and 
backwards,  becomes  broader,  and  is  inserted,  by  a 
broad  flat  tendon,  and  some  few  fleshy  fibres,  into  the 
os  occipitis,  behind  the  back  part  of  the  mastoid  pro- 
cess, under  the  insertion  of  the  complexus  and  splenius, 
and  a little  above  that  of  the  rectus  major.  The  use  of 
this  muscle  is  to  draw  the  head  backwards,  and  per- 
haps to  assist  in  its  rotatory  motion. 

Obliquus  superior  oculi.  Trochlearis ; Lon- 
gissimus  oculi.  Obliquus  major , of  Winslow;  and 
Optico-trochlei-scleroticicn,  of  Dumas.  An  oblique 
muscle  of  the  eye,  that  rolls  the  globe  of  the  eye,  and 
turns  the  pupil  downwards  and  outwards.  It  arises 
like  the  straight  muscles  of  the  eye  from  the  edge  of  the 
foramen  opticum  at  the  bottom  of  the  orbit,  between 
the  rectus  superior  and  rectus  intemus;  from  thence 
runs  straight  along  the  papyraceous  portion  of  the  eth- 
moid bone  to  the  upper  part  of  the  orbit,  where  a car- 
tilaginous trochlea  is  fixed  to  the  inside  of  the  internal 
angular  process  of  the  os  frontis,  through  which  its 
tendon  passes,  and  runs  a little  downwards  and  out- 


wards, enclosed  in  a loose  membranaceous  sheath,  to 
be  inserted  into  the  sclerotic  membrane. 

Obliquus  superior  sive  minor.  See  Obliquus  su~ 
perior  capitis. 

Obliquus  superior  sive  trochlearis.  See  Ob- 
liquus superior  oculi. 

OBLONGUS.  In  botany  applied  to  leaves,  petals, 
seeds,  &c.  which  are  three  or  four  times  longer  than 
broad.  This  term  is  used  with  great  latitude,  and 
serves  chiefly  in  a specific  character  to  contrast  a leaf, 
which  has  a variable,  or  not  very  decided  form,  with 
others  that  are  precisely  round,  ovate,  linear,  &c. 

The  petals  of  the  genus  Citrus  and  Hedera,  and 
those  of  the  Narcissus  moschatus,  are  oblong , and  the 
seeds  of  the  Boerhaavia  diffusa. 

OBOVATUS.  Obovate.  Used  in  botany  to  desig- 
nate leaves,  &c.  which  are  ovate  with  a broader  end 
uppermost : as  those  of  the  primrose  and  daisy.  Lin 
naeus  at  first  used  the  words  obsersi  ovatum. 

OBSIDIAN.  A mineral,  of  which  there  are  two 
kinds,  the  translucent  and  transparent. 

1.  The  translucent  obsidian.  This  is  of  a velvet 
black  colour,  and  occurs  in  beds  in  porphyry  and  va- 
rious secondary  trap  rocks  in  Iceland  and  Tokay. 

2.  The  transparent  is  of  a duck-blue  colour,  im- 
bedded in  pearl-stone  porphyry  in  Siberia  and  Mexico. 

Obsidia'num.  (So  called  from  its  resemblance  to  a 
kind  of  stone,  which  one  Obsidius  discovered  in  Ethi- 
opia, of  a very  black  colour,  though  sometimes  pellu- 
cid, and  of  a muddy  water.)  1.  A species  of  glass. 
See  Obsidian. 

2.  Pliny  says  that  obsidianum  was  a sort  of  colour 
with  which  vessels  were  glazed.  Hence  the  name  is 
lied,  by  Libavius,  to  glass  of  antimony. 
BSTETRIC.  ( Obstetricus : from  obstetrix,  a 
nurse.)  Belonging  to  midwifery. 

OBSTIPA'TIO.  (From  obstipo , to  stop  up.)  Cos- 
tiveness. A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Locales , and 
order  Epischeses  of  C ullen,  comprehending  three  species: 

1.  Obstipatio  deb  ilium,  in  weak  and  commonly  dys- 
peptic persons. 

2.  Obstipatio  rigidorum,  in  persons  of  rigid  fibres, 
and  a melancholic  temperament. 

3.  Obstipatio  obstructorum.  from  obstructions.  See 
Colica. 

Obstrue'noa.  (From  obstruo,  to  shut  up.)  What- 
ever closes  the  orifices  of  the  ducts  or  vessels. 

Obstupefacie'ntia.  (From  obstupefacio,  to  stu- 
pefy.) Narcotics. 

Obtunde'ntia.  (From  obtundo , to  make  blunt.) 
Substances  which  sheath  or  blunt  irritation,  and  are 
much  the  same  as  demulcents.  They  consist  chiefly 
of  bland,  oily,  or  mucilaginous  matters,  which  form  a 
covering  on  inflamed  and  irritable  surfaces,  particularly 
those  of  the  stomach,  lungs,  and  anus. 

OBTURA'TOR.  A stopper  up,  or  that  which  co- 
vers any  thing. 

Obturator  externus.  Extra-pelvio-pubi-trochan- 
terien , of  Dumas.  This  is  a small  flat  muscle,  situa- 
ted obliquely  at  the  upper  and  anterior  part  of  the 
thigh,  between  the  pectinalis  and  the  forepart  of  the 
foramen  thyroideum,  and  covered  by  the  abductor  bre- 
vis femoris.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  all  the 
inner  half  of  the  circumference  of  the  foramen  thy- 
roideum, and  likewise  from  part  of  the  obturator  liga- 
ment. Its  radiated  fibres  collect  and  form  a strong 
roundish  tendon,  which  runs  outwards,  and,  after  ad- 
hering to  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  joint,  is  inserted 
into  a cavity  at  the  inner  and  back  part  of  the  root  of 
the  great  trochanter.  The  chief  uses  of  this  muscle 
are  to  turn  the  thigh  obliquely  outwards,  to  assist  in 
bending  the  thigh,  and  in  drawing  it  inwards.  It  like- 
wise prevents  the  capsular  ligament  from  being  pinched 
in  the  motions  of  the  joint. 

Obturator  internus.  MarsUpialis,  seu  obtura- 
tor intemus , of  Douglas.  MarsvpialiS  seu  bursalis , 
of  Cowper;  and  Intrap elvio-trochanterien,  of  Dumas. 
A considerable  muscle,  a great  part  of  which  is  situ- 
ated within  the  pelvis.  It  arises,  by  very  short  tendi- 
nous fibres,  from  somewhat  more  than  the  upper  half 
of  the  internal  circumference  of  the  foramen  thyroi- 
deum of  the  os  innominatum.  It  is  composed  of  seve- 
ral distinct  fasciculi,  which  terminate  in  a roundish 
tendon  that  passes  out  of  the  pelvis,  through  the  niche 
that  is  between  the  spine  and  the  tuberosity  of  the  is- 
chium, and,  after  running  between  the  two  portions  of 
the  gemini,  which  enclose  it  as  in  a sheath,  is  inserted 

127 


occ 


ocu 


into  the  cavity  at  the  root  of  the  great  trochanter,  after 
adhering  to  the  adjacent  part  of  the  capsular  ligament 
of  the  joint.  This  muscle  rolls  the  os  femoris  obliquely 
Outwards,  by  pulling  it  towards  the  ischiatic  niche, 
upon  the  cartilaginous  surface  of  which  its  tendon, 
which  is  surrounded  by  a membraneous  sheath,  moves 
as  upon  a pulley. 

Obturator  nerve.  A nerve  of  the  thigh,  that  is 
lost  upon  the  muscles  situated  on  the  inside  of  the 
thizh. 

OBTUSUS.  Blunt.  Applied  to  a leaf  which  termi- 
nates in  a segment  of  a circle;  as  that  of  the  Linum 
catharticum.  This  formed  leaf  has  a small  point  obtu- 
sion cum  acumine,  in  the  Statyce  limonium.  The  pe- 
tals of  the  Tropceolum  majus  are  obtuse. 

OCCIPITAL.  Occipitalis.  Belonging  to  the  occi- 
put or  back  part  of  the  head. 

Occipital  bone.  Os  occipitis  ; Os  memories;  Os 
nervosum;  Os  basilare.  This  bone,  which  forms  the 
posterior  and  inferior  part  of  the  skull,  is  of  an  irregu- 
lar figure,  convex  on  the  outside  and  concave  inter- 
nally. Its  external  surface,  which  is  very  irregular, 
serves  for  the  attachment  of  several  muscles.  It  af- 
fords several  inequalities,  which  sometimes  form  two 
semicircular  hollows  separated  by  a scabrous  ridge. 
The  inferior  portion  of  the  bone  is  stretched  forwards 
in  form  of  a wedge,  and  hence  is  called  the  cuneiform 
process,  or  basilary  process.  At  the  base  of  this  pro- 
cess, situated  obliquely  on  each  side  of  the  foramen 
magnum,  are  two  flat,  oblong  protuberances,  named 
condyles.  They  are  covered  with  cartilage,  and  serve 
for  the  articulation  of  the  head  with  the  first  vertebra 
of  the  neck.  In  the  inferior  portion  of  this  bone,  at 
the  basis  of  the  cranium,  and  immediately  behind  the 
cuneiform  process,  we  observe  a considerable  hole, 
through  which  the  medulla  oblongata  passes  into  the 
spine.  The  nervi  accessorii,  the  vertebral  ^arteries, 
and  sometimes  the  vertebral  veins  likewise,  pass 
through  it.  Man  being  designed  for  an  erect  posture, 
this  foramen  magnum  is  found  nearly  in  the  middle  of 
the  basis  of  the  human  cranium,  and  at  a pretty  equal 
distance  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  occiput,  and 
thg  anterior  part  of  the  lower  jaw  ; whereas  in  quad- 
rupeds it  is  nearer  the  back  part  of  the  occiput.  Be- 
sides this  hole,  there  are  four  other  smaller  foramina, 
viz.  two  before,  and  two  behind  the  condyles.  The 
former  serve  for  the  transmission  of  the  ninth  pair  of 
nerves,  and  the  two  latter  for  the  veins  which  pass 
from  the  external  parts  of  the  head  to  the  lateral  sinu- 
ses. On  looking  over  the  internal  surface  of  the  os  oc- 
cipitis, we  perceive  the  appearance  of  a cross,  formed 
by  a very  prominent  ridge,  which  rises  upwards  from 
near  the  foramen  magnum,  and  by  two  transverse  sinu- 
osities, one  on  each  side  of  the  ridge.  This  cross  occa- 
sions the  formation  of  four  fossae,  two  above  and  two 
below  the  sinuosities.  In  the  latter  are  placed  the 
lobes  of  the  cerebellum,  and  in  the  former  the  posterior 
lobes  of  the  brain.  The  two  sinuosities  serve  to  re- 
ceive the  lateral  sinuses.  In  the  upper  part  of  this 
bone  is  seen  a continuation  of  the  sinuosity  of  the  lon- 
gitudinal sinus ; and  at  the  basis  of  the  cranium  we  ob- 
serve the  inner  surface  of  the  cuneiform  process  made 
concave,  for  the  reception  of  the  medulla  oblongata. 
The  occipital  bone  is  thicker  and  stronger  than  any  of 
the  other  bones  of  the  head,  except  the  petrous  part  of 
the  ossa  temporum ; but  it  is  of  unequal  thickness. 
At  its  lateral  and  inferior  parts,  where  it  is  thinnest,  it 
is  covered  by  a great  number  of  muscles.  The  reason 
for  so  much  thickness  and  strength  in  this  bone,  seems 
to  be,  that  it  covers  the  cerebellum,  in  which  the  least 
wound  is  of  the  utmost  consequence ; and  that  it  is, 
by  its  situation,  more  liable  to  be  fractured  by  falls 
than  any  other  bone  of  the  cranium.  For  if  we  fall 
forwards,  the  hands  are  naturally  put  out  to  prevent 
the  forehead’s  touching  the  ground ; and  if  on  one  side, 
the  shoulders  in  a great  measure  protect  the  sides  of 
the  head  ; but  if  a person  fall  backwards,  the  hind  part 
of  the  head  consequently  strikes  against  the  earth,  and 
that  too  with  considerable  violence.  Nature  therefore 
has  wisely  constructed  this  bone  so  as  to  be  capable  of 
the  greatest  strength  at  its  upper  part,  where  it  is  the 
most  exposed  to  injury.  The  os  occipitis  is  joined,  by 
means  of  the  cuneiform  process,  to  the  sphenoid  bone, 
with  which  it  often  ossifies,  and  makes  but  one  bone  in 
those  who  are  advanced  in  life.  It  is  connected  to  the 
parietal  bones  by  the  Iainl«doidal  suture,  and  to  the 
temporal  bones  by  the  additanientum  of  the  temporal 
128 


suture.  The  head  is  likewise  united  to  the  trunk  by 
means  of  this  bone.  The  two  condyles  of  the  occipi- 
tal bone  are  received  into  the  superior  oblique  processes 
of  the  atlas,  or  first  vertebra  of  the  neck,  and  it  is  by 
means  of  this  articulation  that  a certain  degree  of  mo- 
tion of  the  head  backwards  and  forwards  is  performed. 
But  it  allows  only  very  little  motion  to  either  side  ; and 
still  less  of  a circular  motion,  which  the  head  obtains 
principally  by  the  circumvolution  of  the  atlas  on  the 
second  vertebra,  as  is  described  more  particularly  in 
the  account  of  the  vertebras.  In  the  foetus,  the  os  oc- 
cipitis is  divided  by  an  unossified  cartilaginous  sub- 
stance, into  four  parts.  One  of  these,  which  is  the 
longest,  constitutes  all  that  portion  of  the  bone  which  is 
above  the  foramen  magnum ; two  others,  which  are 
much  smaller,  compose  the  inside  of  the  foramen  mag- 
num, and  include  the  condyloid  processes ; and  the 
fourth  is  the  cuneiform  process.  This  last  is  some- 
times not  completely  united  with  the  rest,  so  as  to  form 
one  bone,  before  the  sixth  or  seventh  year. 

OCCIPITA'LIS.  See  Occipito-frontalis  and  Occi- 
pital. 

OCCIPITO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  be- 
long to  the  occiput. 

Occipito-frontalis.  Digastricus  cranii ; Epi- 
cranius , of  Albinus.  Frontalis  et  occipitalis , of  Wins- 
low and  Cowper ; and  Occipito-frontal , of  Dumas.  A 
single,  broad,  digastric  muscle,  that  covers  the  cranium, 
pulls  the  skin  of  the  head  backwards,  raises  the  eye- 
brows upwards,  and  at  the  same  time,  draws  up  and 
wrinkles  the  skin  of  the  forehead.  It  arises  from  the 
posterior  part  of  the  occiput,  goes  over  the  upper  part 
of  the  os  parietale  and  os  frontis,  and  is  lost  in  the 
eyebrows. 

O'CCIPUT.  The  hinder  part  of  the  head.  See 

Caput. 

OCCLUSUS.  Shut  up.  Applied  to  the  florets  of  the 
fig,  which  are  shut  up  in  the  fleshy  receptacle  that  forms 
the  fruit. 

OCCULT.  Occultus.  Hidden.  A term  that  has 
been  much  used  by  writers  that  had  not  clear  ideas  of 
what  they  undertook  to  explain;  and  which  served 
therefore  only  for  a cover  to  their  ignorance:  hence, 
occult  cause,  occult  quality,  occult  disease. 

Oche'ma.  (From  o%£w,  to  carry.)  A vehicle,  or 
thin  fluid. 

Ocheteu'ma.  (From  oxrroj,  a duct.)  The  nostril. 

O'chetus.  (From  ox£<*>,  to  convey.)  A canal  or 
duct.  The  urinary  or  abdominal  passages. 

O'cheus.  (From  ox£w,  to  carry.)  The  bag  of  the 
scrotum. 

O'CHRA.  (From  uxpos,  pale:  so  named  because  it 
is  often  of  a pale  colour.) 

1.  Ochre.  An  argillaceous  earth  impregnated  with 
iron  of  a red  or  yellow  colour.  The  Armenian  bole, 
and  other  earths,  are  often  adulterated  with  ochre. 

2.  The  forepart  of  the  tibia. 

OCHROITS.  See  Cerite. 

O'chrus.  (From  uxpog , pale:  so  called  from  the 
pale  muddy  colour  in  its  flowers.)  A leguminous  plant, 
or  kind  of  pulse. 

Ochtho'des.  (From  oxOog , importing  the  tumid 
lips  of  ulcers,  callous,  tumid.)  An  epithet  for  ulcers, 
whose  lips  are  callous  and  tumid,  and  consequently 
difficult  to  heal. 

Ocima'strum.  (Diminutive  of  ocimum,  basil.) 
Wild  white  campion,  or  basil. 

OCREA.  A term  used  by  Rottball,  to  the  mem 
brane  that  enfolds  the  flower-stalks  in  Cyperus,  and 
which  Sir  J.  Smith  thinks  is  a species  of  bractea. 

Octa'na.  (From  octo,  eight.)  An  erratic  intermit- 
ting fever,  which  returns  every  eighth  day. 

OCTANDRIA.  (From  oktio,  eight,  and  av»7.o,  a 
husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the 
sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  consisting  of  those  which 
have  hermaphrodite  flowers,  furnished  with  eight 
stamina. 

Octa'vus  humeri.  The  Teres  minor. 

Octa'vus  humeri  plackntini.  The  Teres  minor. 

Ocula'res  communes.  A name  for  the  nerves 
called  Motores  ocvlorum. 

OCULA'RIA.  (From  oculus , the  eye:  so  called 
from  its  uses  in  disorders  of  the  eye.)  See  Euphrasia. 

O'CULUS.  The  eye.  See  Eye. 

Oculus  bovtnus.  See  Hydrophthalmia. 

Oculus  bovis.  See  Chrysanthemum  Uucanthe- 
mum. 


ODO 


CEDE 


Occlus  bubulus.  See  Hy  dr  ophthalmia 

Oculus  christi.  Austrian  flea-bane:  a species 
of  Inula , sometimes  used  as  an  adstringent  by  conti- 
nental physicians. 

Oculus  elephantinus.  A name  given  to  Hy- 
drophthalmia. 

Oculus  genu.  The  knee-pan. 

Oculus  lachrymans.  The  Epiphora. 

Oculus  mundi.  A species  of  Opal,  generally  of  a 
yellowish  colour.  By  lying  in  water  it  becomes  of  an 
amber  colour,  and  also  transparent. 

Oculi  adductor.  See  Rectus  internus  oculi. 

Oculi  attollens.  See  Rectus-superior  oculi. 

Oculi  cancrorum.  See  Cancer. 

Oculi  depressor.  See  Rectus  inferior  oculi. 

Oculi  elevator.  See  Rectus  superior  oculi. 

Oculi  levator.  See  Rectus  superior  oculi. 

Oculi  obliquus  inferior.  See  Obliquus  inferior 
oculi. 

Oculi  obliquus  major.  See  Obliquus  superior 
oculi. 

Oculi  obliquus  minor.  See  Obliquus  inferior 
oculi. 

O'CYMUM.  (From  wavs,  swift:  so  called  from  its 
quick  growth.)  Ocymum.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia ; 
Order,  Gymnospermia. 

Ocymum  basilicum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  or  citron  basil.  Basilicum.  Ocimum — foliis 
uoatis  glabris ; calycibus  ciliatis,  of  Linnaeus.  This 
plant  is  supposed  to  possess  nervine  qualities,  but  is 
seldom  employed  but  as  a condiment  to  season  high 
dishes,  to  which  it  imparts  a grateful  odour  and  taste. 

Ocymum  caryophyllatum.  Ocimum  minimum  of 
Caspar  Bauhin.  Small  or  bush  basil.  This  plant  is 
mildly  balsamic.  Infusions  are  drank  as  tea,  in  catar- 
rhous  and  uterine  disorders,  and  the  dried  leaves  are 
made  into  cephalic,  and  sternutatory  powders.  They 
are,  when  fresh,  very  juicy,  of  a weak  aromatic  and 
very  mucilaginous  taste,  and  of  a strong  and  agreeable 
smell  improved  by  drying. 

Odaxi'smos.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth.)  A biting  sen- 
sation, pain,  or  itching  in  the  gums. 

ODONTAGO'GOS.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth,  and  ayco, 
to  draw.)  The  name  of  an  instrument  to  draw  teeth, 
one  of  which,  made  of  lead,  Forrestus  relates  to  have 
been  hung  up  in  the  temple  of  Apollo,  denoting,  that 
such  an  operation  ought  not  to  be  made,  but  when  the 
tooth  was  loose  enough  to  draw  with  so  slight  a force 
as  could  be  applied  with  that. 

ODONTA'GRA.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth,  and  ay  pa, 
a seizure.)  1.  The  toothache. 

2.  The  gout  in  the  teeth. 

3.  A tooth-drawer. 

ODONTA'LGIA.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth,  and  aXyoj, 
pain.)  Odontia;  Odaxismus.  The  toothache.  This 
well-known  disease  makes  its  attack  by  a most  violent 
pain  in  the  teeth,  most  frequently  in  the  molares,  more 
rarely  in  the  incisorii,  reaching  sometimes  up  to  the 
eyes,  and  sometimes  backwards  into  the  cavity  of  the 
ear.  At  the  same  time,  there  is  a manifest  determina- 
tion to  the  head,  and  a remarkable  tension  and  infla- 
tion of  the  vessels  takes  place,  not  only  in  the  parts 
next  to  that  where  the  pain  is  seated,  but  over  the 
whole  head. 

The  toothache  is  sometimes  merely  a rheumatic 
affection,  arising  from  cold,  but  more  frequently  from 
a carious  tooth.  It  is  also  a symptom  of  pregnancy, 
and  takes  place  in  some  nervous  disorders.  It  may 
attack  persons  at  any  period  of  life,  though  it  is  most 
frequent  in  the  young  and  plethoric.  From  the  variety 
of  causes  which  may  produce  this  affection,  it  has 
been  named  by  authors  odontalgia  cariosa,  scorbutica, 
catarrhalis,  arthritica,  gravidarum  hysterica,  stomach- 
ica,  .and  rheumatica. 

O'DONTALGKJ.  ( Odontalgicus ; from  oSovraX- 
yia , the  toothache.)  Medicines  which  relieve  the 
toothache. 

Many  empirical  remedies  have  been  proposed  for  the 
cure  of  the  toothache,  but  have  not  in  any  degree  an- 
swered the  purpose.  When  the  affection  is  purely 
rheumatic,  blistering  behind  the  ear  will  almost  always 
remove  it;  but  when  it  proceeds  from  a carious  tooth, 
the  pain  is  much  more  obstinate.  In  this  case  it  has 
been  recommended  to  touch  the  pained  part  with  a hot 
iron,  or  with  oil  of  vitriol,  in  order  to  destroy  the  aching 
nerve ; to  hold  spirits  in  the  mouth ; to  put  a drop  of  . 


oil  of  cloves  into  the  hollow  of  the  tooth,  or  a pill  made 
of  camphor,  opium,  and  oleum  caryophylli.  Others 
recommend  gum  mastich,  dissolved  in  oleum  terebih- 
thince,  applied  to  the  tooth  upon  a little  cotton.  The 
great  Boerhaave  is  said  to  have  applied  camphor, 
opium,  oleum  caryophylli,  and  alkohol,  upon  cotton. 
The  caustic  oil  which  may  be  collected  from  writing 
paper,  rolled  up  tight,  and  set  fire  to  at  the  end,  will 
sometimes  destroy  the  exposed  nervous  substance  of  a 
hollow  tooth.  The  application  of  radix  pyrethri,  by 
its  power  of  stimulating  the  salivary  glands,  either  in 
substance  or  in  tincture,  has  also  been  attended  with 
good  effects.  But  one  of  the  most  useful  applications 
of  this  kind,  is  strong  nitrous  acid,  diluted  with  three 
or  four  times  its  weight  of  spirit  of  wine,  and  intro- 
duced into  the  hollow  of  the  tooth,  either  by  means  of 
a hair  pencil  or  a little  cotton.  When  the  constitution 
has  had  some  share  in  the  disease,  the  Peruvian  bark 
has  been  recommended,  and  perhaps  with  much  jus- 
tice, on  account  of  its  tonic  and  antiseptic  powers. 
When  the  pain  is  not  fixed  to  one  tooth,  leeches  ap- 
plied to  the  gum  are  of  great  service.  But  very  often 
all  the  foregoing  remedies  will  fail,  and  the  only  infal- 
lible cure  is  to  draw  the  tooth. 

ODONTIA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in 
Good’s  Nosology.  Class  Caliaca;  Order,  Enterica . 
Pain,  or  derangement  of  the  teeth  or  their  involucres. 
It  has  seven  species,  viz.  Odontia  dentitionis ; dolo- 
rosa; stupor es ; deformis;  edentula;  incrustans ; ex- 
crescens. 

ODONTIASIS.  (From  oSovnaw,  to  put  forth  the 
teeth.)  Dentition,  or  cutting  teeth.  See  Dentition 
and  Teeth. 

Odo'ntioa.  (From  oSovs,  a todth.)  Remedies  for 
pains  in  the  teeth. 

ODONTIRRHCE'A.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth,  and  pm, 
to  flow.)  Bleeding  from  the  socket  of  the  jaw,  after 
drawing  a tooth. 

ODO'NTIS.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth : so  called  be 
cause  its  decoction  was  supposed  useful  in  relieving 
the  toothache.)  A species  of  lychnis. 

ODONTI  TIS.  Inflammation  of  a tooth.  See 
Odontalgia. 

ODONTOGLY'PHUM.  (From  oSov s,  a tooth,  and 
yXv(Jxo,  to  scrape.)  An  instrument  for  scaling  and 
scraping  the  teeth. 

ODONTOID.  (Odontoides  ; from  oSovs,  a tooth, 
and  ados,  form;  because  it  is  shaped  like  a tooth.) 
Tooth-like.  See  Dentatus. 

ODONTOLI'THOS.  (From  o5ou?,  a tooth,  and 
A i6os,  a stone.)  The  tartar,  or  stony  crust  upon  the 
teeth. 

ODONTOPHY'IA.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth,  and  <pvo), 
to  grow.)  Dentition,  or  cutting  teeth, 

Odontotri'mma.  (From  oSovs,  a tooth,  and  rpifiw, 
to  wear  away.)  A dentifrice,  or  medicine,  to  clean 
the  teeth. 

ODORIFEROUS.  (From  the  smell  which  the  se- 
cretion from  them  has.)  Some  glands  are  so  called. 

Odoriferous  glands.  Glandules odorif erce.  These 
glands  are  situated  around  the  corona  glandis  of  the 
male,  and  under  the  skin  of  the  labia  majora  and  nym- 
ph® of  females.  They  secrete  a sebaceous  matter, 
which  emits  a peculiar  odour. 

ODOUR.  Smell.  This,  which  is  the  emanation  of 
an  odoriferous  body,  is  generally  ascribed  to  a portion 
of  the  body  itself,  converted  into  vapour:  but  from 
some  experiments  lately  instituted  it  would  seem  pro- 
bable, that  in  many  cases  the  odour  is  owing  not  to 
the  substance  itself,  but  to  a gas  or  vapour  resulting 
from  its  combination  with  an  appropriate  Vehicle,  ca- 
pable of  diffusion  in  space. 

CE'a.  (Oiy:  from  oiw , to  bear;  so  named  from 
its  fruitfulness.)  The  servioe  tree,  Crataegus  termi- 
nalis. 

CECONOMY.  ( CEconomia : from  oiko s,  a house, 

and  vo/xos , a law.)  lEconomia  animalis.  The  con- 
duct of  nature  in  preserving  bodies  and  following  her 
usual  order;  hence  animal  ceconomy  and  vegetable 
(Economy,  &c. 

CEDE'MA.  (From  oiSeco,  to  swell.)  A synonyme 
of  anasarca.  See  Anasarca. 

CEDEMATO'DES.  (From  oiSew,  to  swell,  and 
siSos , resemblance.)  Like  to  an  oedema. 

CEdemosa'rca.  (From  oiSypa,  a swelling,  and 
capl,  flesh.)  A tumour  mentioned  by  Severinus,  of  a 
middle  nature,  between  an  oedema  and  sarcoma. 

m 


GENO 


OFF 


CENA'NTHE.  (From  oivos,  wine,  and  avdos,A 
flower : so  called  because  its  flowers  siuell  like  the 
vine.) 

1.  The  botanical  name  of  a genus  of  the  umbelli- 
ferous plants.  Class,  Pentandria  ; Order,  JJigynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoBial  name  of  the  hemlock  drop- 
wort.  See  CEnanthe  crocata. 

CEnanthe  crocata.  The  hemlock  dropwort. 
CEyianthe — chcerophylli  foliisoi  Linnaeus.  An  active 
poison  that  has  too  often  proved  fatal,  by  being  eaten 
in  mistake  instead  of  water-parsnip.  The  juice, 
nevertheless,  cautiously  exhibited,  promises  to  be  an 
efficacious  remedy  in  inveterate  scorbutic  eruptions. 
Tiie  root  of  this  plant  is  not  unpleasant  to  the  taste, 
and  esteemed  to  be  most  deleterious  of  all  the  vege- 
tables which  this  country  produces.  Mr.  Howel,  Sur- 
geon at  Haverfordwest,  relates,  that  “ eleven  French 
prisoners  had  the  liberty  of  walking  in  and  about  the 
town  of  Pembroke.  Three  of  them  being  in  the  fields 
a little  before  noon,  dug  up  a large  quantity  of  this 
plant,  which  they  took  to  be  wild  celery,  to  eat  with 
their  bread  and  butter  for  dinner.  After  washing  it, 
they  all  three  ate,  or  rather  tasted  of  the  roots.  As 
they  wrere  entering  the  town,  without  any  previous  no- 
tice of  sickness  at  the  stomach,  or  disorder  in  the 
head,  one  of  them  w as  seized  with  convulsions.  The 
other  two  ran  home,  and  sent  a surgeon  to  him.  The 
surgeon  endeavoured  first  to  bleed,  and  then  to  vomit 
him  ; but  those  endeavours  were  fruitless,  and  he  died 
presently.  Ignorant  of  the  cause  of  their  comrade’s 
death,  and  of  their  own  danger,  they  gave  of  these 
roots  to  the  other  eight  prisoneis,  who  ate  of  them  with 
their  dinner.  A few  minutes  afterward  the  remain- 
ing two  who  gathered  the  plants  were  seized  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  first,  of  which  one  died  ; the  other 
was  bled,  and  a vomit,  with  great  difficulty,  forced 
down,  on  account  of  his  jaw's  being,  as  it  were,  locked 
together.  This  operated,  and  he  recovered,  but  was 
some  time  affected  with  dizziness  in  his  head,  though 
not  sick,  or  the  least  disordered  in  the  stomach.  The 
other  eight  being  bled  and  vomited  immediately,  were 
soon  well.”  At  Clonmell,  in  Ireland,  eight  boys  mis- 
taking this  plant  for  water-parsnip,  ate  plentifully  of 
its  roots.  About  four  or  five  hours  after  the  eldest  boy 
became  suddenly  convulsed,  and  died  : and  before  the 
next  morning  four  of  the  other  boys  died  in  a similar 
manner.  Of  the  other  three,  one  W'as  maniacal  se- 
veral hours,  another  lost  his  hair  and  nails,  but  the 
third  escaped  unhurt.  Stalpaart  Vander  Wiel  men- 
tions two  cases  of  tne  fatal  effects  of  this  root ; these, 
however,  were  attended  with  great  heat  in  the  throat 
and  stomach,  sickness,  vertigo,  and  purging;  they 
both  died  in  the  course  of  two,or  three  hours  after  eat- 
ing the  root.  Allen,  in  his  Synopsis  Medicinae,  also 
relates,  that  four  children  suffered  greatly  by  eating 
this  poison.  In  these  cases  great  agony  was  experi- 
enced before  the  convulsion  supervened:  vomitings 
likewise  came  on,  which  were  encouraged  by  large 
draughts  of  oil  and  warm  water,  to  w'hich  their  reco- 
very is  ascribed.  The  late  Sir  William  Watson,  who 
refers  to  the  instances  here  cited,  also  says,  that  a 
Dutchman  was  poisoned  by  the  leaves  of  the  plant 
boiled  in  pottage.  It  appears,  from  various  authori- 
ties, that  most  brute  animals  are  not  less  affected  by 
this  poison  than  man : and  Lightfoot  informs  us,  that 
a spoonful  of  the  juice  of  this  plant  given  to  a dog, 
rendered  him  sick  and  stupid : but  a goat  was  observ- 
ed to  eat  the  plant  with  impunity.  The  great  viru- 
lence of  this  plant  has  not,  however,  prevented  it  from 
being  taken  medicinally.  In  a letter  from  Dr.  Poulte- 
ney  to  Sir  William  Watson,  we  are  told  that  a severe 
and  inveterate  cutaneous  disorder  w as  cured  by  the 
juice  of  the  root,  though  not  without  exciting  the  most 
alarming  symptoms.  Taken  in  the  dose  of  a spoonful, 
in  two  hours  afterward,  the  head  was  affected  in  a 
very  extraordinary  manner,  followed  with  violent  sick- 
ness and  vomiting,  cold  sweats,  and  rigors;  but  this 
did  not  deter  the  patient  from  continuing  the  medicine, 
in  somewhat  less  doses,  till  it  effected  a cure. 

(Ena'rea.  (O ivapey:  from  oivapa , the  cuttings  of 
vines.)  The  ashes  prepared  of  the  twigs,  &c.  of 
vines. 

(Enelje'um.  (From  oivos,  wine,  and  eXaiov,  oil.) 
A mixture  of  oil  and  wine. 

CENO'GALA.  (From  oivos,  wine,  and  yaXa,  milk.) 
A sort  of  potion  made  of  wdne  and  milk.  According 
to  some,  it  is  wine  as  warm  as  new  milk 
130 


O5N0  OARuitr.  ■prom  oivos, wine,  and  yapov,  garum.i 
A mixture  of  wine  and  garum. 

CENO'MELI.  (From  oivos,  wine,  and  peXi,  honey.) 
Mead,  or  wine,  made  of  honey,  or  sweetened  with 
honey.  ; 

CEno'pli.  (From  oivos,  wine.)  The  great  jubeb- 
tree.  The  juice  of  the  fruit  is  like  that  of  the  grape. 

(ENOSTA'GMA.  (From  oivos,  wine,  and  j-aCw,  to 
distil.)  Spirit  of  wine. 

CEno'thera.  (From  oivos,  wine : so  called  because 
its  dried  roots  smell  like  wine.)  A species  of  lysiraa- 
chia. 

CENOTHIONIC  ACID.  (CEnolhionicus ; from 
oivos,  wine.)  An  acid  produced  during  the  distillation 
of  sulphuric  affher,  and  found  in  the  residue  according 
to  Sertuerner. 

CENUS.  (From  oivos,  wine.)  Wine. 

CEnus  anthinos.  Flowery  wine.  Galen  says  it  is 
( Enos  anthosmias,  or  wine  impregnated  with  flowers, 
in  which  sense  it  is  an  epithet  for  the  Cyceon. 

CEnus  anthosmias.  (From  avdos,  a flower,  and 
oopy,  a smell.)  Sweet-scented  wine. 

CEnus  apezesmenus.  A wine  heated  to  a great 
degree,  and  prescribed  with  other  things,  as  garlic,  salt, 
milk,  and  vinegar. 

CEnus  apodsedus.  Wine  in  which  the  dais,  or 
treda,  hath  been  boiled. 

CEnus  deuterus.  Wines  of  the  second  pressing. 

CEnus  diacheomenus.  Wine  diffused  in  larger 
vessels,  cooled  and  strained  from  the  lees,  to  render  it 
thinner  and  weaker  ; wines  thus  drawn  off  are  called 
saccus,  and  saccata , from  the  bag  through  which  they 
are  strained. 

CEnus  galactodes.  Wine  with  milk,  or  wine 
made  as  warm  as  new  milk. 

CEnus  malacus.  CEnus  malthacus.  Soft  wine. 
Sometimes  it  means  weak  and  thin,  opposed  to  strong 
wine ; or  mild  in  opposition  to  austere. 

CEnus  melichroo3.  Wine  in  which  is  honey. 

CEnus  (Enodes.  Strong  wine. 

CEnus  straphidios  leucos.  White  wine  made 
from  raisins. 

CEnus  tethalasmenos.  Wine  mixed  with  sea- 
water. 

CESOPH AGiE'US.  (From  oioo<f>ayos , the  gullet.) 
The  muscle  forming  the  sphincter  oesophagi. 

CEsophagi'smus.  (From  oioofyayos,  the  gullet.) 
Difficult  swallowing,  from  spasm. 

. CESO'PHAGUS.  (CEsophagus,  i.  m. ; from  oiw,  to 
carry,  and  <J>ayu),  to  eat:  because  it  carries  the  food 
into  the  stomach.)  The  membranous  and  muscular 
tube  that  descends  in  the  neck,  from  the  pharynx  to 
the  stomach.  It  is  composed  of  three  tunics,  or  mem- 
branes, viz.  a common,  muscular,  and  mucous.  Its 
arteries  are  branches  of  the  oesophageal,  which  arises 
from  the  aorta.  The  veins  empty  themselves  into  the 
vena  azygos.  Its  nerves  are  from  the  eighth  pair  and 
great  intercostal ; and  it  is  every  where  under  the  in- 
ternal or  mucous  membrane  supplied  with  glands  that 
separate  the  mucus  of  the  oesophagus,  in  order  that  the 
masticated  bole  may  readily  pass  down  into  the  sto- 
mach. 

CESTROM  A'NIA.  (From  otg-pos,  the  pudenda  of  a 
woman,  and  paivopai,  to  rage.)  A furor  uterinus.  See 
Nymphomania. 

CE'STRUM.  (From  mstrus , a gad-bee  : because  by 
its  bite,  or  sting,  it  agitates  cattle.)  CEstrum  venereum. 
The  orgasm,  or  pleasant  sensation,  experienced  during 
coition. 

(Estrum  venereum.  1.  The  clitoris  is  so  called, 
as  being  the  seat  of  the  sensation. 

2.  The  sensation  is  also  so  called. 

CE'sype.  (From  ois,  a sheep,  and  pviros,  sordes.) 
(Esypos ; (Esypum;  (Esypus.  It  frequently  is  met 
with  in  the  ancient  Pharmacy,  for  a certain  oily  sub- 
stance, boiled  out  of  particular  parts  of  the  fleeces  of 
wool,  as  what  grows  on  the  flank,  neck,  and  parts  most 
used  to  sweat. 

O'ffa  alba.  (From  phath , a fragment,  Hebrew.) 
Van  Hehnontthus  calls  the  white  coagulation  which 
arises  from  a mixture  of  a rectified  spirit  of  wine,  and 
of  urine  ; but  the  spirit  of  urine  must  be  distilled  from 
well-fermented  urine ; and  that  must  be  well  dephleg- 
mated,  else  it  will  not  answer. 

OFFICINAL.  (Officinalis ; from  officina.  a shop.j 
Any  medicine,  directed  by  the  colleges  of  physicians 
to  be  kept  in  the  shops,  is  so  termed. 


OLD 


OLE 


Offusca'tio.  The  same  as  Amaurosis. 

OIL.  {Oleum;  from  olea,  the  olive  : this  name  be- 
ing at  first  confined  to  the  oil  expressed  from  the  olive.) 
Oil  is  defined,  by  modern  chemists,  to  be  a proper  juice 
of  a fat  or  unctuous  nature,  either  solid  or  fluid,  indis- 
soluble in  water,  combustible  with  flame,  and  volatile 
in  different  degrees.  Oils  are  never  formed  but  by 
organic  bodies  ; and  all  the  substances  in  the  mineral 
kingdom,  which  present  oily  characters,  have  origi- 
nated from  the  action  of  vegetable  or  animal  life. 
They  are  distinguished  into  fat,  and  essential  oils ; 
under  the  former  head  are  comprehended  oil  of  olives, 
almonds,  rape,  ben,  linseed,  hemp,  cocoa,  &c.  Essen- 
tial oils  differ  from  fat  oils  by  the  following  characters ■. 
their  smell  is  strong  and  aromatic ; their  volatility  is 
such  that  they  rise  with  the  heat  of  boiling  water,  and 
their  taste  is  very  acrid  ; they  are  likewise  much  more 
combustible  than  fat  oils ; they  are  obtained  by  pres- 
sure, distillation,  &c.  from  strong-smelling  plants,  as 
that  of  peppermint,  aniseed,  caraway,  &c.  The  use 
of  fat  oils  in  the  arts,  and  in  medicine,  is  very  consi- 
derable ; they  are  medicinally  prescribed  as  relaxing, 
softening,  and  laxative  remedies  ; they  enter  into  many 
medical  compounds,  such  as  balsams,  unguents,  plas- 
ters, &c.  and  they  are  often  used  as  food  on  account 
of  the  mucilage  they  contain.  See  Olea.  Essential 
oils  are  employed  as  cordial,  stimulant,  and  antispas- 
modic  remedies. 

[“  Oil , animal.  The  proximate  principles  of  the  ani- 
mal creation  consist,  like  those  of  vegetables,  of  a few 
elementary  substances,  which,  by  combination  in  va- 
rious proportions,  give  rise  to  their  numerous  varieties. 
Carbon,  hydrogen,  oxygen,  and  nitrogen,  are  the  prin- 
cipal ultimate  elements  of  animal  matter ; and  phos- 
phorus and  sulphur  are  also  often  contained  in  it. 
The  presence  of  nitrogen  constitutes  the  most  striking 
peculiarity  of  animal,  compared  with  Vegetable  bodies ; 
but  as  some  vegetables  contain  nitrogen,  so  there  are 
certain  animal  principles,  into  the  composition  of  which 
it  does  not  enter. 

The  presence  of  nitrogen  stamps  a peculiarity  upon 
the  products  obtained  by  the  destructive  distillation  of 
animal  matter,  and  which  are  characterized  by  the  pre- 
sence of  ammonia,  formed  by  the  union  of  hydrogen 
with  the  nitrogen.  It  is  sometimes  so  abundantly  ge- 
nerated as  to  be  the  leading  product;  thus,  when  horns, 
hoofs,  or  bones,  are  distilled  per  se , a quantity  of  solid 
carbonate  of  ammonia,  and  of  the  same  substance 
combined  with  empyreumatic  oil,  and  dissolved  in  wa- 
ter, are  obtained ; hence  the  pharmaceutical  prepara- 
tions called  spirit  and  salt  of  hartshorn,  and  Dipel’s 
animal  oil.  Occasionally  the  acetic,  benzoic,  and  some 
other  acids,  are  formed  by  the  operation  of  heat  on  ani- 
mal bodies,  and  these  are  found  united  to  the  ammo- 
nia; cyanogen  and  hydrocyanic  acid  frequently  oc- 
cur.”— Webs.  Man.  Chem. — A.] 

Oil , cetherial.  See  Oleum  cethereum. 

Oil,  almond.  See  Amygdalus. 

Oil  of  allspice.  See  Oleum  pimento:. 

Oil  of  amber.  See  Oleum  succini. 

Oil  of  caraway.  See  Oleum  carui. 

Oil , castor.  See  Ricimis  communis. 

Oil  of  chamomile.  See  Oleum  anthemidis. 

Oil  of  juniper.  See  Oleum  juniperi. 

Oil  of  lavender.  See  Oleum  lavendulee. 

Oil  of  linseed.  See  Oleum  lini. 

Oil  of  mace.  See  Oleum  mads. 

Oil , olive.  See  Olea  europcea. 

Oil  of  origanum.  See  Oleum  origani. 

Oil,  palm.  See  Cocos  butyracea. 

Oil  of  pennyroyal.  See  Oleum  pulegit. 

Oil  of  peppermint.  See  Oleum  menthce  piperitee. 

Oil,  rock.  See  Petroleum. 

Oil  of  spearmint.  See  Oleum  menl/ue  viridis. 

Oil,  sulphurated.  See  Oleum  sulphuratum. 

Oil  of  turpentine.  See  Oleum  terebinthince  rectiji- 
catum. 

Oil  of  vitriol.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

OINTMENT.  See  Ungucntum. 

OISANITE.  Pyramidal  ore  of  titanium. 

OLDENLANDIA.  (In  honour  of  II.  II.  Oldenland, 
a Dane,  who  made  a visit  to  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope, 
about  the  year  1695,  for  the  purpose  of  collecting  plants, 
where  he  soon  after  died.  Linnteua  described  many 
plants  from  his  Herbarium.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants.  Class  Pentandria ; Order,. Digynia. 

Oldenlandia  umbellata.  The  roots  of  this  plant 

Qq2 


which  grows  wild  on  the  coast  of  Coromandel,  and  is 
also  cultivated  there,  are  used  by  dyers,  and  calico 
printers,  for  the  same  purpose  as  madder  with  us, 
giving  the  beautiful  red  so  much  admired  in  the  Madras 
cottons. 

O LEA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  Monandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Olea  europ®.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
from  which  the  olive  oil  is  obtained.  Oliva ; Olea 
sativa.  Olsa—foliis  lanceolatis  integerrimis  racemis 
axillaribus  coarctatis,  of  Linn® us.  The  olive-tree  in 
all  ages  has  been  greatly  celebrated,  and  held  in  pe- 
culiar estimation,  as  the  bounteous  gift  of  heaven  ; it 
was  formerly  exhibited  in  the  religious  ceremonies  of 
the  Jew  s,  and  is  still  continued  as  emblematic  of  peace 
and  plenty.  The  varieties  of  this  tree  are  numerous, 
distinguished  not  only  by  the  form  of  the  leaves,  but 
also  by  the  shape,  size,  and  colour  of  the  fruit ; as  the 
large  Spanish  olive,  the  small  oblong  Provence  olive, 
&c.  &c.  These,  when  pickled,  are  well  known  to  us 
by  the  names  of  Spanish  and  French  olives,  which- 
are  extremely  grateful  to  many  stomachs,  and  s^id  ta 
excite  appetite  and  promote  digestion ; they  are  pre- 
pared from  the  green  unripe  fruit,  which  is  repeatedly 
steeped  in  water,  to  which  some  quicklime  or  alkaline 
salt  is  added,  in  order  to  shorten  the  operation  : after 
this,  they  are  washed  tmd  preserved  in  a pickle  of 
common  salt  and  water,  to  which  an  aromatic  is  some- 
times added.  The  principal  consumption,  however,  of 
this  fruit  isin  the  preparation  of  the  common  salad  oil, 
or  oleum  olives  of  the  pharmacopoeias,  which  is  ob* 
tained  by  grinding  and  pressing  them  when  thoroughly 
ripe  : the  finer  and  purer  oil  issues  first  by  gentle  pres- 
sure, and  the  inferior  sorts  on  heating  what  is  left,  and 
pressing  it  more  strongly.  The  best  olive  oil  is  of  a 
bright  pale  amber  colour,  bland  to  the  taste,  and  with 
out  any  smell : it  becomes  rancid  by  age,  and  sooner 
if  kept  in  a warm  situation.  With  regard  to  its  utility, 
oil,  in  some  shape,  forms  a considerable  part  of  our 
food,  both  animal  and  vegetable,  and  affords  much 
nourishment.  With  some,  however,  oily  substances  do 
not  unite  with  the  contents  of  the  stomach,  and  are 
frequently  brought  up  by  eructation ; this  happens 
more  especially  to  those  whose  stomachs  abopnd  with 
acid. — Oil,  considered  as  a medicine,  is  supposed  to 
correct  acrimony,  and  to  lubricate  and  relax  the  fibres; 
and,  therefore,  has  been  recommended  internally  to 
obviate  the  effects  of  various  stimuli,  which  produce 
irritation,  and  consequent  inflammation : on  this 
ground  it  has  been  generally  prescribed  in  coughs, 
catarrhal  affections,  and  erosions.  The  oil  of  olives 
is  successfully  used  in  Switzerland  against  the  tceniu 
osculis  superficialibus , and  itis  in  very  high  estimation 
in  this  and  other  countries  against  nephritic  pains, 
spasms,  colic,  constipation  of  the  bowels,  &c.  Ex- 
ternally it  has  been  found  a useful  application  to  bites 
and  stings  of  various  poisonous  animals,  as  the  mad 
dog,  several  serpents,  &c.  also  to  bums,  tumours,  and 
other  affections,  both  by  itself,  or  mixed  in  liniments 
or  poultices.  Oil  rubbed  over  the  body  is  said  to  be  of 
great  service  in  dropsies,  particularly  ascites.  Olive 
oil  enters  several  officinal  compositions,  and  when 
united  with  water,  by  the  intervention  of  alkali,  is 
usually  given  in  coughs  and  hoarsenesses. 

Olea'men.  (From  oleum,  oil.)  A thin  liniment 
composed  of  oils. 

Olea'nder.  (From  olea,  the  olive-tree,  which  it 
resembles.)  The  rose-bay. 

Olea'ster.  (Diminutive  of  olea,  the  olive-tree.) 
The  wild  olive. 

OLECRANON.  (From  w’Xevy,  the  ulna,  and 
Kpavov,  the  head.  The  elbow,  or  process  of  the  ulna, 
upon  which  a person  leans.  See  Ulna. 

OLEFIANT  GAS.  See  Carbur  etled  hydrogen  gas. 

OLEIC  ACID.  “When  potassa  and  hog’s  lard  are 
saponified,  the  margarate  of  the  alkali  separates  in  the 
form  of  a pearly  looking  solid,  while  the  fluid  fat 
remains  in  solution,  combined  with  the  potassa. 
When  the  alkali  is  separated  by  tartaric  acid,  the  oily 
principle  of  fat  is  obtained,  which  Chevreuil  purifies 
by  saponifying  it  again  and  again,  recovering  it  two- 
or  three  times;  by  which  means  the  whole  of  the 
margarine  is  separated.  As  this  oil  has  the  property 
of  saturating  bases  and  forming  neutral  compounds,  he 
has  called  it  oleic  acid.” 

O'lenk.  {SlXevt].)  The  cubit,  or  ulna 

OLEOSA'CCIIARUM.  (From  oleum,  oil,  and  sac- 

131 


OLE 


OLE 

charum , sugar.  An  essential  oil  ground  up  with 
ugar.  ^ 

OLERACEUS.  (From  oleo , to  grow.)  Holeraceus. 
Partaking  of  the  nature  of  pot-herbs. 

Olerace®.  (From  olus,  a pot-herb.)  The  name 
of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnasus’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  such  as  have  incomplete 
inelegant  flowers,  heaped  together  in  the  calyces  ; as 
beta,  chenopodium,  spinacia.  &c. 

O'LEUM.  See  Oil. 

Oleum  abietinum.  The  resinous  juice  which  exudes 
spontaneously  from  the  silver  and  fed  firs.  It  is  sup- 
posed to  be  superior  to  that  obtained  by  wounding  the 
tree. 

Oleum  ®thereum.  iEthereal  oil.  Oleum  vini. 
After  the  distillation  of  sulphuric  aether,  carry  on  the 
distillation  with  a less  degree  of  heat  until  a black  froth 
begins  to  rise;  then  immediately  remove  the  retort 
from  the  fire.  Add  sufficient  water  to  the  liquor  in  the 
retort,  that  the  oily  part  may  float  upon  the  surface. 
Separate  this,  and  add  to  it  as  much  lime-water  as  may 
be  necessary  to  neutralize  the  adherent  acid,  and  shake 
them  together.  Lastly,  collect  the  aethereal  oil  which 
separates.  This  oil  is  used  as  an  ingredient  in  the 
compound  spirit  of  aether.  It  is  of  a yellow  colour, 
less  volatile  than  aether,  soluble  in  alkohol,  and  inso- 
luble in  water. 

Oleum  amygdala.  See  Amygdalus  communis. 

Oleum  amygdalarum.  See  Amygdalus  communis. 

Oleum  animale.  Oleum  animate  Dippelii.  An 
empyreumatic  oil  obtained  by  distillation  from  bones 
and  animal  substances.  It  is  sometimes  exhibited  as  an 
antispasmodic  and  diaphoretic,  in  the  dose  of  from  ten 
to  forty  drops. 

Oleum  animale  dippelii.  See  Oleum  animale. 

Oleum  anisi.  Formerly  Oleum  essentiale  anisi ; 
Oleum  e seminibus  anisi.  Oil  of  anise.  The  essential 
oil  of  aniseed  possesses  all  the  virtues  attributed  to  the 
anisum,  and  is  often  given  as  a stimulant  and  carmi- 
native, in  the  dose  of  from  five  to  eight  drops  mixed 
with  an  appropriate  vehicle.  See  Pimpinella  anisum. 

Oleum  anthemidis.  Oil  of  chamomile,  formerly 
called  oleum  e floribus  chamaemeli.  See  Anthemis 
nobilis. 

Oleum  camphoratum.  See  Linimentum  camphorce. 

Oleum  carpathicum.  A fine  essential  oil,  distilled 
from  the  fresh  cones  of  the  tree  which  affords  the  com- 
mon turpentine.  See  Finns  sylvestris. 

Oleum  carui.  Formerly  called  Oleum  essentiale 
oarui ; Oleum  essentiale  e seminibus  carui.  The  oil 
of  caraways  is  an  admirable  carminative,  diluted  with 
rectified  spirit  into  an  essence,  and  then  mixed  with 
any  proper  fluid.  See  Carum. 

Oleum  caryophylli  aromatici.  A stimulant  and 
aromatic  preparation  of  the  clove.  See  Eugenia  cary- 
ophyllata. 

Oleum  cedrinum.  Essentia  ae  cedro.  The  oil  of 
the  peel  of  citrons,  obtained,  without  distillation,  in 
Italy. 

Oleum  cinnamomi.  A warm,  stimulant,  and  deli- 
cious stomachic.  Given  in  the  dose  of  from  one  to 
three  drops,  rubbed  down  with  some  yelk  of  egg,  in  a 
little  wine,  it  allays  violent  emotions  of  the  stomach 
from  morbid  irritability,  and  is  particularly  serviceable 
in  debility  of  the  primaj  vise,  after  cholera. 

Oleum  cornu  cervi.  This  is  applied  externally  as 
a stimulant  to  paralytic  affections  of  the  limbs. 

Oleum  gabianum.  See  Petroleum  rubrum. 

Oleum  juniperi.  Formerly  called  Oleum  essentiale 
juniperi  baccce ; Oleum  essentiale  c baccis  juniperi. 
Oil  of  juniper.  Oil  of  juniper- berries  possesses  stimu- 
lant, carminative,  and  stomachic  virtues,  in  the  dose 
of  from  two  to  four  drops,  and  in  a larger  dose  proves 
highly  diuretic.  It  is  often  administered  in  the  cure  of 
dropsical  complaints,  when  the  indication  is  to  provoke 
the  urinary  discharge.  See  Juniperus  communis. 

Oleum  lavendul®.  Formerly  called  Oleum  essen- 
tiale lavendulcB ; Oleum  essentiale  e floribus  lavendulce. 
Oil  of  lavender.  Though  mostly  used  as  a perfume, 
this  essential  oil  may  be  exhibited  internally,  in  the 
dose  of  from  one  to  five  drops,  as  a stimulant  in  ner- 
vous headaches,  hysteria,  and  debility  of  the  stomach. 
See  JLavenda  spica. 

Oleum  lauri.  Oleum  launnum.  An  anodyne  and 
antispasmodic  application,  generally  rubbed  on  sprains 
and  bruises  unattended  with  inflammation. 

Oleum  limonis.  The  essential  oil  of  lemons  pos- 
132 


sesses  stimulant  and  stomachic  powers,  but  Is  prlnci* 
pally  used  externally,  mixed  with  ointments,  as  a 
perfume. 

Oleum  lini.  Linseed  oil  is  emollient  and  demulcent, 
in  the  dose  of  from  half  an  ounce  to  an  ounce.  It  is 
frequently  given  in  the  form  of  clyster  in  colics  ?.nd 
obstipation.  Cold-drawn  linseed-oil,  with  lime-water 
and  extract  of  lead,  forms,  in  many  instances,  the  best 
application  for  burns  and  scalds.  See  Linumusitatis- 
simum. 

Oleum  lucii  piscis.  See  Esox  tucius. 

Oleum  macis.  Oleum  myristicce  expressum.  Oil 
of  mace.  A fragrant  sebaceous  substance,  expressed 
in  the  East  Indies  from  the  nutmeg.  There  are  two 
kinds.  The  best  is  brought  in  stone  jars,  is  somewhat 
soft,  of  a yellow  colour,  and  resembles  in  smell  the 
nutmeg.  The  other  is  brought  from  Holland,  in  flat 
square  cakes.  The  weak  smell  and  faint  colour  war- 
rants our  supposing  it  to  be  the  former  kind  sophisti- 
cated. Their  use  is  chiefly  external,  in  form  of  plaster, 
unguent,  or  liniment.  See  Myristicce  moschata. 

Oleum  malabathri.  An  oil  similar  in  flavour  to 
that  of  cloves,  brought  from  the  East  Indies,  where  it 
is  said  to  be  drawn  from  the  leaves  of  the  cassia-tree. 

Oleum  menthje  piperita.  Formerly  called  Oleum 
essentiale  menthce  piperitidis.  Oil  of  peppermint.  Oil 
of  peppermint  possesses  all  the  active  principle  of  the 
plant.  It  is  mostly  used  to  make  the  simple  water. 
Mixed  with  rectified  spirit  it  forms  an  essence,  which 
is  put  into  a variety  of  compounds,  as  sugar  drops  and 
troches,  which  are  exhibited  as  stimulants,  carmina- 
tives, and  stomachics.  See  Mentha  piperita. 

Oleum  menth®  viridis.  Formerly  called  Oleum 
essentiale  menthce  sativee.  Oil  of  spearmint.  This 
essential  oil  is  mostly  in  use  for  making  the  simple 
water,  but  may  be  exhibited  in  the  dose  of  from  two  to 
five  drops  as  a carminative,  stomachic,  and  stimulant. 
See  Mentha  viridis. 

Oleum  myristic®.  The  essential  oil  of  nutmeg  is 
an  excellent  stimulant  and  aromatic,  and  may  be  ex- 
hibited in  every  case  where  such  remedies  are  indi- 
cated, with  advantage.  See  Myristica  moschata. 

Oleum  myristic®  expressum.  This  is  commonly 
called  oil  of  mace.  See  Oleum  macis. 

Oleum  neroli.  Essentia  neroli.  The  essential  oil 
of  the  flowers  of  the  Seville  orange-tree.  It  is  brought 
to  us  from  Italy  and  France. 

Oleum  oliv®.  See  Olea  europea. 

Oleum  origani.  Formerly  called  Oleum  essentiale 
origani.  Oil  of  origanum.  A very  acrid  and  stimu- 
lating essential  oil.  It  is  employed  for  alleviating  the 
pain  arising  from  caries  of  the  teeth,  and  for  making 
the  simple  water  of  marjoram.  See  Origanum  vulgare. 

Oleum  palm®.  See  Cocos  butyracea. 

Oleum  petr®.  See  Petroleum. 

Oleum  piMENT®.  Oil  of  allspice.  A stimulant  and 
aromatic  oil.  See  Myrtus pimento. 

Oleum  pulegii.  Formerly  called  Oleum  essentiale 
pulegii.  Oil  of  penny-royal.  A stimulant  and  anti- 
spasmodic oil,  which  may  be  exhibited  in  hysterical  and 
nervous  affections.  See  Mentha  pulegium. 

Oleum  ricini.  See  Ricinus  communis. 

Oleum  rosmarini.  Formerly  called  Oleum  essen- 
tiale rosis  marini.  Oil  of  rosemary.  The  essential  oil 
of  rosemary  is  an  excellent  stimulant,  and  may  be 
given  with  great  advantage  in  nervous,  and  spasmodic 
affections  of  the  stomach.  See  Rosmarinus  officinalis. 

Oleum  sabin®.  A stimulating  emmenagogue : it  is 
best  administered  with  myrrh,  in  the  form  of  bolus. 
See  Junipcris  communis. 

Oleum  sassafras.  An  agreeable  stimulating  car 
minative  and  sudorific. 

Oleum  sinapeos.  This  is  an  emollient  oil,  the  acrid 
principle  of  the  mustard  remaining  in  the  seed.  See 

Sinapis  alba. 

Oleum  succini.  Oleum  succini  rectificalum.  Put 
timber  in  an  alembic,  and  with  the  heat  of  a sand-bath, 
gradually  increased,  distil  over  an  acid  liquor,  an  oil, 
and  a salt  contaminated  with  oil.  Then  redistil  the 
oil  a second  and  a third  time.  Oil  of  amber  is  mostly 
used  externally,  as  a stimulating  application  to  para- 
lytic limbs,  or  those  affected  with  cramp  and  rheuma- 
tism. Hooping-cough,  and  other  convulsive  diseases, 
are  said  to  be  relieved  also  by  rubbing  the  spine  with 
this  oil.  See  Succinum. 

Oleum  sulpiiuratum.  Formerly  called  Balsamum 
sulphur  is  simplex.  Sulphurated  oil.  Take  of  washed 


OME 


OME 


sulphur,  two  ounces ; olive  oil,  a pint.  Having  heated 
the  oil  in  a very  large  iron  pot,  and  the  sulphur  gra- 
dually, stir  the  mixture  after  each  addition,  until  they 
have  united.  This,  which  was  formerly  called  simple 
balsam  of  sulphur,  is  an  acrid  stimulating  preparation, 
and  much  praised  by  some  in  the  cure  of  coughs  and 
other  phthisical  complaints. 

Oleum  syri^e.  A fragrant  essential  oil,  obtained  by 
distillation  from  the  balm  of  Gilead  plant.  See  Draco- 
cephalum  tnoldavica. 

Olkum  templinum.  Oleum  templinum  verum.  A 
terebinthinate  oil  obtained  from  the  fresh  cones  of  the 
Pinus  abies  of  Linnaeus. 

Oleum  terebinthinje  rectificatum.  Take  of 
oil  of  turpentine,  a pint;  water,  four  pints.  Distil  over 
the  oil.  Stimulant,  diuretic,  and  sudorific  virtues  are 
attributed  to  this  preparation,  in  the  dose  of  from  ten 
drops  to  twenty,  which  are  given  in  rheumatic  pains  of 
the  chronic  kind,  especially  sciatica.  Its  chief  use  in- 
ternally, however,  is  as  an  anthelmintic  and  styptic. 
Uterine,  pulmonic,  gastric,  intestinal,  and  other  hae- 
morrhages, when  passive,  are  more  effectually  relieved 
by  its  exhibition  than  by  any  other  medicine  Exter- 
nally it  is  applied,  mixed  with  ointments  and  other  ap- 
plications, to  bruises,  sprains,  rheumatic  pains,  indolent 
ulcers,  burns,  and  scalds. 

Oleum  tkrRjE.  See  Petroleum. 

Oleum  vini.  Stimulant  and  anodyne,  in  the  dose  of 
from  one  to  four  drops. 

Oleum  vitrioli.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

OLFACTOR  Y.  (Olfactorius ; from  olf actus,  the 
sense  of  smelling.)  Belonging  to  the  organ  or  sense  of 
smelling. 

Olfactory  nerve.  The  first  pair  of  nerves  are  so 
termed,  because  they  are  the  organs  of  smelling.  They 
arise  from  the  corpora  striata,  perforate  the  ethmoid 
bone,  and  are  distributed  very  numerously  on  the  pitui- 
tary membrane  of  the  nose. 

OLI'BANUM.  (From  lebona , Chaldean.)  See  Ju- 
niperus  lycia. 

OLIGOTRO'PHIA.  (From  oXiyo?,  small,  andrps^w, 
to  nourish.)  Deficient  nourishment. 

OLISTHE'MA.  (From  oXioQaivu),  to  fall  out.)  A 
luxation. 

OLI'VA.  See  Olea  europea. 

OLIVA'RIS.  (From  oliva,  the  olive.)  Oliviformis. 
Resembling  the  olive ; applied  to  two  eminences  on  the 
lower  part  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  called  corpora 
ulivaria. 

OLIVE.  See  Olea  europea. 

Olive , spurge.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Olive-tree.  See  Olea  europea. 

OLIVE'NITE.  An  ore  of  copper. 

OLI'VILE.  The  name  given  by  Pelletier  to  the 
substance  which  remains  after  gently  evaporating  the 
alkoholic  solution  of  the  gum  which  exudes  from  the 
olive-tree.  It  is  a white,  brilliant,  starchy  powder. 

OLI'VINE.  A subspecies  of  prismatic  chrysolite. 
Its  colour  is  olive-green.  It  occurs  in  basalt,  green- 
stone, porphyry,  and  lava,  and  generally  accompanied 
with  augite.  It  is  found  in  Scotland,  Ireland,  France, 
Bohemia,  &c. 

Olla'ris  lapis.  Pot-stone. 

Olophly'ctis.  (From  oXo?,  whole,  and  0Xv/m?,  a 
pustule.)  A small  hot  eruption  covering  the  whole 
body. 

Olusa'trum.  {Id  est  olus  atrum , the  black  herb, 
from  its  black  leaves.)  See  Smyrnium  olusalrum. 

OMA.  This  Greek  final  usually  imports  external 
protuberance;  as  in  sarcoma , staphyloma , carcino- 
ma, &c. 

OMA'GRA.  (From  wpos,  the  shoulder,  and  aypa,  a 
seizure.)  The  gout  in  the  shoulder. 

OMENTI'TIS.  ( Omentitis  : from  omentum,  the 
caul.)  Inflammation  of  the  omentum,  a species  of  pe- 
ritonitis. 

OME'NTUM.  (From  omen , a guess:  so  called  be- 
cause the  soothsayers  prophesied  from  an  inspection  of 
this  part.)  Epiploon.  The  caul.  An  adipose  mem- 
branous viscus  of  the  abdomen,  that  is  attached  to  the 
stomach,  and  lies  on  the  anterior  surface  of  the  intes- 
tines. It  is  thin  and  easily  torn,  being  formed  of  a du- 
plicature  of  the  peritoneum,  with  more  or  less  of  fat  in- 
terposed. It  is  distinguished  into  the  great  omentum 
and  the  little  omentum. 

1.  The  omentum  majus , which  is  also  termed  omen- 
tum gastrocolicum , arises  from  the  whole  of  the  great 


curvature  of  the  stomach,  and  even  as  far  as  the  spleen, 
from  whence  it  descends  loosely  behind  the  abdominal 
parietes,  and  over  the  intestines  to  the  navel,  and  some- 
times into  the  pelvis.  Having  descended  thus  far,  its 
inferior  aaprgin  turns  inwards  and  ascends  again,  and 
is  fastened  to  the  colon  and  the  spleen,  where  its  ves- 
sels enter. 

2.  Theomentum  minus,  or  omentum  hepatico-gastri 
cum,  arises  posteriorly  from  the  transverse  fissure  of 
the  liver.  It  is  composed  of  a duplicature  of  perito 
neum,  passes  over  the  duodenum  and  small  lobe  of  the 
liver:  it  also  passes  by  the  lobulus  spigelii  and  pan- 
creas, proceeds  into  the  colon  and  small  curvature  of 
the  stomach,  and  is  implanted  ligamentous  into  the 
oesophagus.  It  is  in  this  omentum  that  Winslow  dis- 
covered a natural  opening,  which  goes  by  his  name.  If 
air  be  blown  in  at  this  foramen  of  Winslow,  which  is 
always  found  behind  the  lobulus  spigelii,  between  the 
right  side  of  the  liver  and  hepatic  vessels,  the  duode- 
num, the  cavity  of  the  omentum,  and  all  its  sacs,  may 
be  distended. 

The  omentum  is  always  double,  and  between  its'  la- 
mellae, clos'ely  connected  by  very  tender  cellular  sub- 
stance, the  vessels  are  distributed  and  the  fat  collected. 
Where  the  top  of  the  right  kidney,  and  the  lobulus  spi- 
gelii of  the  liver,  with  the  subjacent  large  vessels,  form  ' 
an  angle  with  the  duodenum,  there  the  external  mem- 
brane of  the  colon,  which  comes  from  the  peritoneum 
joining  with  the  membrane  of  the  duodenum,  which 
also  rises  immediately  from  the  peritoneum  lying  upon 
the  kidney,  enters  the  back  into  the  transverse  fissure 
of  the  liver  for  a considerable  space,  is  continuous  with 
its  external  coat,  contains  the  gall-bladder,  supports  the 
hepatic  vessels,  and  is  very  yellow  and  slippery.  Be- 
hind this  membranous  production,  between  the  right 
lobe  of  the  liver,  hepatic  vessels,  vena  portarum,  biliary 
ducts,  aorta,  and  adjacent  duodenum,  there  is  the  na- 
tural opening  just  mentioned,  by  which  air  may  be 
blown  extensively  into  all  the  cavity  of  the  omentum. 
From  thence,  in  a course  continuous  with  this  mem 
brane  from  the  pyloris  and  the  smaller  curvature  of  the 
stomach,  the  external  membrane  of  the  liver  joins  in 
such  a manner  with  that  of  the  stomach,  that  the  thin 
membrane  of  the  li,ver  is  continued  out  of  the  fossa  of 
the  venal  duct,  across  the  little  lobe  into  the  stomach 
stretched  before  the  lobe  and  before  the  pancreas.  This 
little  omentum,  or  omentum  hepatico-gastricum,  when 
inflated,  resembles  a cone,  and,  gradually  becoming 
harder  and  emaciated,  it  changes  into  a true  ligament, 
by  which  the  oesophagus  is  connected  to  the  diaphragm. 
But  the  larger  omentum,  the  omentum  gastrocolicum,  is 
of  a much  greater  extent.  It  begins  at  the  first  acces- 
sion of  the  right  gastro-epiploic  artery  to  the  stomach, 
being  continued  there  from  the  upper  plate  of  the 
transverse  mesocolon,  and  then  from  the  whole  great 
curve  of  the  stomach,  as  ,far  as  the  spleen,  and  also 
from  the  right  convex  end  of  the  stomach  towards  the 
spleen,  until  it  also  terminates  in  a ligament  that  ties 
the  upper  and  back  part  of  the  spleen  to  the  stomach. 
This  is  the  anterior  lamina.  Being  continued  down- 
wards, sometimes  to  the  navel,  sometimes  to  the  pel- 
vis, it  hangs  before  the  intestines,  and  behind  the  mus- 
cles of  the  abdomen,  until  its  lower  edge,  being  reflect- 
ed upon  itself,  ascends,  leaving  an  intermediate  vacuity 
between  it  and  the  anterior  lamina,  and  is  continued  to 
a very  great  extent,  into  the  external  membrane  of  the 
transverse  colon,  and,  lastly,  into  the  sinus  of  the  spleen, 
by  which  the  large  blood-vessels  are  received,  and  it 
ends  finally  on  the  oesophagus,  under  the  diaphragm. 
Behind  the  stomach,  and  before  the  pancreas,  its  cavity 
is  continuous  with  that  of  the  smaller  omentum.  To 
this  the  omentum-colicum  is  connected,  which  arises 
farther  to  the  right  than  the  first  origin  of  the  omentum 
gastrocolicum  from  the  mesocolon,  with  the  cavity  of 
which  it  is  continuous,  but  produced  solely  from  the 
colon  and  its  external  membrane,  which  departs  double 
from  the  intestine.  It  is  prolonged,  and  terminates  by 
a conical  extremity,  sometimes  of  longer,  sometimes  of 
shorter  extent,  above  the  intestinum  ca>cum ; for  all  the 
blood  which  returns  from  the  omentum  and  mesocolon 
goes  into  the  vena  portarum,  and  by  that  into  the  liver 
itself.  The  omentum  gastrocolicum  is  furnished  with 
blood  from  each  of  the  gastro-epiploic  arteries,  by  many 
descending  articulated  branches,  of  which  the  most 
lateral  are  the  longest,  and  the  lowest  anastomose  by 
minute  twigs  with  those  of  the  colon.  It  also  has 
branches  from  the  splenic,  duodenal,  and  adipose  arte- 

vu» 


OMF 


ONO 


ries.  The  omentum  colicum  has  its  arteries  from  the 
colon,  as  also  the  smaller  appendices,  and  also  from 
the  duodenal  and  right  epiploic.  The  arteries  of  the 
small  omentum  come  from  the  hepatics,  and  from  the 
right  and  left  coronaries.  The  omentum  being  fat 
and  indolent,  has  very  small  nerves.  They  arise  from 
the  nerves  of  the  eighth  pair,  both  in  the  greater  and 
less  curvatures  of  the  stomach.  The  arteries  of  the 
mesentery  are  in  general  the  same  with  those  which  go 
to  the  intestine,  and  of  which  the  smaller  branches  re- 
main in  the  glands  and  fat  of  the  mesentery.  V arious 
small  accessory  arteries  go  to  both  mesocolons,  from 
the  intercostals,  spermatics,  lumbars,  and  caspular  to 
the  transverse  portion  from  the  splenic  artery,  and 
pancreato-duodenalis,  and  to  the  left  mesocolon,  from 
the  branches  of  the  aorta  going  to  the  lumbar  glands. 
The  veins  of  the  omentum  in  general  accompany  the 
arteries,  and  unite  into  similar  trunks ; those  of  the 
left  part  of  the  gastrocolic  omentum  into  the  splenic, 
and  also  those  of  the  hepatico-gastric,  which  likewise 
sends  its  blood  to  the  trunk  of  the  vena  portarum : 
those  from  the  larger  and  right  part  of  the  ga&tro-colic 
omentum,  from  the  omentum  colicum,  and  from  the 
appendices  epiploicae  into  the  mesenteric  trunk.  All 
the  veins  of  the  mesentery  meet  together,  and  end  in 
the  vena  portarum,  being  collected  first  into  two  large 
branches,  of  which  the  one,  the  mesenteric,  receives 
the  gastro-epiploic  vein,  the  colicae  mediae,  the  ilioco- 
lica,  and  all  those  of  the  small  intestines,  as  far  as  the 
duodenum : the  other,  which  going  transversely,  in- 
serts itself  into  the  former,  above  the  origin  of  the  duo- 
denum, carries  back  the  blood  of  the  left  gastric  veins, 
and  those  of  the  rectum,  except  the  lowermost,  which 
belongs  partly  to  those  of  the  bladder  and  partly  to  the 
hypogastric  branches  of  the  pelvis.  The  vein  which  is 
called  haemorrhoidalis  interna  is  sometimes  inserted 
rather  into  the  splenic  than  into  the  mesenteric  vein. 
Has  the  omentum  also  lymphatic  vessels  1 Certainly 
there  are  conglobate  glands,  both  in  the  little  omentum 
and  in  the  gastrocolicum ; and  ancient  anatomists  have 
observed  pellucid  vessels  in  the  omentum  ; and  a mo- 
dern has  described  them  for  lacteals  of  the  stomach. 

Omentum  colicum.  See  Omentum. 

Omentum  gastro-colicum.  See  Omentum. 

Omentum  hepatico-gastricum.  See  Omentum. 

OMO.  (From  wpof,  the  shoulder.)  Names  com- 
pounded with  this  word  belong  to  muscles  which  are 
attached  to  the  scapula. 

OMOCO'TYLE.  (From  topos,  the  shoulder,  and 
kotv\t),  a cavity.)  The  cavity  in  the  extremity  of  the 
neck  of  the  scapula,  in  which  the  head  of  the  humerus 
is  articulated. 

OMO-HYOIDEUS.  A muscle  situated  between  the 
os  liyoides  and  shoulder,  that  pulls  the  os  hyoides  ob- 
liquely downwards.  Coraco  hyoideus  of  Albinus  and 
Douglas.  Scapulo  hyodien  of  Dumas.  It  arises  broad, 
thin,  and  fleshy,  from  the  superior  costa  of  the  scapula, 
near  the  semilunar  notch,  and  from  the  ligament  that 
runs  across  it ; thence  ascending  obliquely,  it  becomes 
tendinous  below  the  sternocleido-mastoideus,  and, 
growing  fleshy  again,  is  inserted  into  the  base  of  the  os- 
hyoides. 

OMOPLA'TA.  <From  copos,  the  shoulder,  and 
scXaruj,  broad.)  The  bladebone.  See  Scapula. 

Omoplato-hyoideus.  The  same  as  Omo-liyoideus. 

Omo'tocos.  (From  wpoj,  crude,  and  tiktlj,  to  bring 
forth.)  A miscarriage; 

Omo'tribes.  (From  upog,  crude,  and  TptjSu,  to 
bruise.)  Oil  expressed  from  unripe  olives. 

Ompiia'cinum.  (From  opcpaiciov,  the  juice  of  unripe 
grapes.)  Oil  expressed  from  unripe  olives. 

Ompha'cion.  (From  opcpaKog,  an  unripe  grape.) 
Omphacium.  The  juice  of  unripe  grapes  ; and  by 
some  applied  to  that  of  wild  apples.,  or  crabs,  com- 
monly called  Verjuice. 

OMPHACITE.  A variety  of  augite  of  a pale  leek- 
green  colour.  It  occurs  in  primitive  rocks,  with 
precious  garnet,  in  Carinthia. 

Omphaci'tis.  (From  opipaicos,  an  unripe  grape.) 
A small  kind  of  gall-nut,  which  resembles  an  unripe 
grape. 

Omphaco'meli.  (From  op<}>aKos,  an  unripe  grape, 
and  prXi,  honey.)  An  oxymel  made  of  the  juice  of 
unripe  grapes  and  honey. 

Omphaloca'rpus.  (From  op(f>a\og,  the  navel,  and 
Kapirog,  fruit : so  called  because  its  fruit  resembles  a 
navel.)  Cleavers.  The  Galium  aperine  of  Linnaeus. 

134 


OMPHALOCE'LE.  (From  opipaAOS)  the  navel,  and 
kt/Xt],  a tumour.)  An  umbilical  hernia.  See  Her- 
nia. 

Omphalo'des.  (From  op<Pa\og,  a navel,  and  eidog, 
resemblance : so  named  because  the  calyx  is  excavated 
in  the  middle  like  the  human  navel.)  A plant  re- 
sembling the  navel,  which  the  leaf  of  the  cotyledon 
and  hydrocotyle  does. 

Omphaloma'ntia.  (From  opQaXog,  the  navel,  and 
yvvTsa w,  to  prophesy.)  The  foolish  vaticination  of 
midwives,  who  pretend  to  foretell  the  number  of  the 
future  offspring  from  the  number  of  knots  in  the  navel. 

OMPHALOS.  (From  opcpteXioicu),  to  roll  up.)  The 
navel.  See  Umbilicus. 

OMPHALOTO'MIA.  (From  op<j>a\og,  the  navel, 
and  tejuvw,  to  cut.)  The  division  or  separation  of  the 
navel-string 

Ona'gra.  (From  ovaypog,  the  wild  ass.)  1.  An 
American  plant:  so  called  because  it  is  said  to  tame 
wild  beasts. 

2.  A name  for  the  rheumatism  in  the  elbow. 

ONEIRODY'NIA.  (From  oveipov,  a dream,  and 
oSvvrj,  anxiety.)  Disturbed  imagination  during  sleep. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Neuroses ; and  order 
Vesanice,  of  Cullen,  containing  two  species. 

1.  Oneirodynia  activa , walking  in  the  sleep. 

2.  Oneirodynia  gravans , the  incubus,  or  nightmare. 
The  nervous  or  indisposed  persons  are  oppressed  during 
sleep  with  a heavy  pressing  sensation  on  the  chest,  by 
which  respiration  is  impeded,  or  the  circulation  of 
blood  intercepted,  to  such  a degree,  as  to  threaten  suf- 
focation. Frightful  ideas  are  recollected  on  waking, 
which  occupied  the  dreaming  mind.  Frequent  at- 
tempts are  made  to  cry  out , but  often  without  effect, 
and  the  horrors  and  agitations  felt  by  the  patient,  are 
inexpressibly  frightful.  The  sensations  generally 
originate  in  a large  quantity  of  wind,  or  indigestible 
matter  in  the  stomach  of  supper-eaters , which,  press- 
ing the  stomach  against  the  diaphragm,  impede  respi- 
ration, or  render  it  short  and  convulsed.  Inflated  in- 
testines may  likewise  produce  similar  effects,  or  mental 
perturbations. 

There  is  another  species  of  nightmare  mentioned  by 
authors,  which-  has  a more  dangerous  tendency  ; and 
this  arises  from  an  impeded  .circulation  of  blood  in  the 
lungs,  when  lying  down,  or  two  great  relaxation  of  the 
heart  and  its  impelling  powers.  Epilepsy,  apoplexy,  or 
sudden  death,  are  sometimes  among  the  consequences 
of  this  species  of  disturbed  sleep.  Diseased  states  of 
the  large  vessels,  aneurisms,  water  in  the  pleura,  pe- 
ricardium, or  lungs,  empyema,  &c.  are  among  the  most 
dangerous  causes. 

ONEIRO'GMOS.  (From  oveipiorjoa,  to  dream.) 
Venereal  dreams. 

ONEJRO'GONOS.  (From  ovcipog,  a dream,  andyow;, 
the  seed.)  So  the  Greeks  cad  an  occasional  emission 
of  the  semen  in  sleep,  when  it  only  happens  rarely. 

ONION.  See  Allium  cepa. 

Onion  sea.  See  Scilla. 

ONI'SCUS.  (From  ovog,  an  ass:  so  called  because 
like  the  ass  it  requires  much  beating  before  it  is  useful.) 
1.  The  stockfish. 

2.  The  slow- worm. 

3.  The  name  of  a genus  of  insects  of  the  order  Aptera. 

Oniscus  asellus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 

woodlouse.  Millepedes ; Millepeda.  These  insects, 
though  they  obtain  a place  in  the  pharmacopoeias,  are 
very  seldom  used  medicinally  in  this  country ; they 
appear  to  act  as  stimulants  and  slight  diuretics,  and 
for  this  purpose  they  ought  to  be  administered  in  a 
much  greater  dose  than  is  usually  prescribed.  The 
expressed  juice  of  forty  or  fifty  living  millepedes,  given 
in  a mild  drink,  has  been  said  to  cure  very  obstinate 
jaundices. 

ONI'TIS.  (From  ovos,  an  ass,  because  asses  covet 
it.)  The  Origanum  vvlgare,  or  wild  maijoram. 

ONOBRY'CHIS.  (Fromovoj,  an  ass,  and  ($pvx<a,  h> 
bray : so  called,  according  to  Blahchard,  because  the 
smell  or  taste  makes  asses  bray.)  See  Hedysarum 
onobrychis. 

ONO  NIS.  (From  ovos,  an  ass:  because  it  interrupts 
asses  when  at  plough.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaian  system.  Class,  Diadclphia ; 
Order,  Decandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  rest-harrow  Se« 

Ononis  spinosa. 

Ononis  arvensis.  See  Ononis  spinosa. 


OPH 


OPH 


Ononis  spinosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  rest- 
harrow.  Resta  bovis ; Arrest  a bovis ; Remora  aratri. 
The  roots  of  this  plant  have  a faint  unpleasant  smell, 
and  a sweetish,  bitterish,  somewhat  nauseous  taste. 
Their  active  matter  is  confined  to  the  cortical  jpart, 
which  has  been  sometimeg  given  in  powder,  or  other 
forms,  as  an  aperient  and  diuretic. 

ONOPO'RDIUM.  (OvonopSov ",  from  ovos , an  ass, 
and  rrepSw,  to  break  wind  : so  named  from  its  being 
much  coveted  by  asses,  and  from  the  noise  it  makes 
upon  pressure.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Po- 
lygamia  cequalis. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  cotton- thistle. 
See  Onopordium  acanthium. 

Onopordium  acanthium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  cotton-thistle.  Carduus  tomentosus.  The  plant 
distinguished  by  this  name  is  thus  described  by  Lin- 
naeus, Onopordium — calycibus  squamosis  squamis  pa- 
tentibus ; foliis  ovato-oblongis , sinuatis.  Its  ex- 
pressed juice  has  been  recommended  as  a cure  for 
cancer,  either  applied  by  moistening  lint  with  it,  or 
mixing  some  simple  farinaceous  substance,  so  as  to 
form  a poultice,  which  should  be  in  contact  with  the 
disease,  and  renewed  twice  a day. 

ONO'SMA.  (From  oaprj,  a sweet  smell  or  savour.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Onosma  echioides.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant,  the  root  of  which  is  called  Anchusa  lutea  in 
some  pharmacopoeias.  It  is  supposed  to  possess  emme- 
nagogue  virtues. 

ONY'CHIA.  (From  owl,  nail-)  A whitlow  at 
the  side  of  the  fingernail. 

O'NYX.  Ow£.  In  surgery.  Unguis.  An  abscess, 
or  collection  of  pus  between  the  lamell®  of  the  cor- 
nea; so  called  from  its  resemblance  to  the  stone  called 
onyx.  The  diagnostic  signs  are,  a white  spot  or  speck, 
prominent,  soft,  and  fluctuating.  The  species  are  : 

1.  Onyx  superficialis,  arising  from  inflammation,  not 
dangerous,  for  it  vanishes  when  the  inflammation  is  re- 
solved by  the  use  of  astringent  collyria. 

2.  Onyx  profundus , or  a deep  abscess,  which  is 
deeper  seated  between  the  lamellaj  of  the  cornea, 
sometimes  breaking  internally,  and  forming  an  hypo- 
pium : when  it  opens  externally,  it  leaves  a fistula  upon 
the  cornea ; whenever  the  pus  is  exsiccated,  there  re- 
mains a leucoma. 

In  mineralogy,  Calcedony,  in  which  there  is  an  alter- 
nation of  white,  black,  and  dark  brown  layers. 

Ooei'des.  (From  oov,  an  egg,  and  aSos,  a likeness.) 
An  epithet  for  the  aqueous  humour  of  the  eye. 

OPACITY.  Opacilas.  The  faculty  of  obstructing 
the  passage  of  light. 

OPAL.  Of  this  silicious  stone  there  are  seven  kinds, 
according  to  Professor  Jameson. 

1.  Precious  opal.  Of  a milk-white  colour,  inclining 
to  blue.  It  occurs  in  small  veins  in  clay-porphyry,  in 
Hungary. 

2.  Common  opal,  of  a milk-white  colour,  found  in 
Cornwall. 

3.  Fire  opal ; the  colour  of  a hyacinth-red,  found 
only  in  Mexico. 

4.  Mother  of  pearl  opal , or  cacholong , a variety  of 
calcedony. 

5.  Semi  opal,  of  a white,  brown,  or  gray  colour, 
found  in  Greenland,  Iceland,  and  Scotland. 

4>.  Jasper  opal, or  ferruginous  oval.  This  is  of  a scar- 
let, or  gray  colour,  and  comes  from  Tokay,  inHungary. 

7.  Wood  opal,  of  various  colours,  and  found  in  allu- 
vial land  at  Zatravia,  in  Hungary. 

■OPERCULUM.  {Operculum,  i.  n. ; a cover  or  lid.) 
The  lid  or  cover  of  the  fringe,  called  peristomum,  of 
mosses.  It  is  either  convex,  accuminate,  flat,  or  per- 
manent, never  leaving  the  fringe  : as  in  Phascum. 

OPHI'ASIS.  (From  o<f>is,  a serpent;  so  called  from 
the  serpentine  direction  in  which  the  disease  travels 
round  the  head.)  A species  of  baldness  which  com- 
mences at  the  occiput,  and  winds  to  each  ear,  and 
sometimes  to  the  forehead. 

OPHIOGLOSSOl'DES.  (From  o^inyXoacrov,  ophio- 
glossum,  and  eifio s,  a likeness.)  A fungus  resembling 
the  Ophioglossum,  or  adder’s  tongue. 

OPHIOGLO'SSUM.  (From  o0(f,  a serpent,  and 

?'\a)ooa,  a tongue ; so  called  from  the  resemblance  of 
ts  fruit.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Cryptogamia  ; Order,  Filiccs.  Adder’s  tongue. 


OPHIOSRHI'ZA.  (From  o<pt?,  a serpent,  and  piga 
a root;  because  the  plant,  says  Hermann,  is  regarded 
in  Ceylon,  as  a grand  specific  for  the  bite  of  the  najaor 
riband  snake.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Ophiorrhiza  mungos.  The  systematic  name  of  thg 
plant,  the  root  of  which  is  called  Radix  scrpentum  in 
the  pharmacopoeias.  Mungos  radix.  This  bitter  root 
is  much  esteemed  in  Java,  Sumatra,  &c.  as  preventing 
the  effects  which  usually  follow  the  bite  of  the  nuja,  a 
venomous  serpent,  with  which  view  it  is  eaten  by  them 
It  is  also  said  to  be  exhibited  medicinally  in  the  cure  of 
intestinal  worms. 

OPHIOSCO'RODON.  (From  o(/>is,  a serpent,  and 
( TKopoSov , garlic ; so  named  because  it  is  spotted  like  a 
serpent.)  Broad-leaved  garlic. 

OPHIOSTA'PHYLUM.  (From  ofis,  a septent,  and 
<fa(t>v\y,  a berry ; so  called  because  serpents  feed  upon 
its  berries.''  White  bryony.  See  Bryonia  alba. 

OPHIOXYLUM.  (From  ocpis,  and  ; because 
its  root  spreads  in  a zigzag  manner  like  the  twisting  of 
a serpent.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Pentandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  Serpentine-wood  plant. 

Ophioxylum  serpentinum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  tree,  the  wood  of  which  is  termed  lignum  ser- 
pentum.  The  nature  of  this  root  does  not  appear  to 
be  yet  ascertained.  It  is  very  bitter.  In  the  cure  of 
the  bite  of  venomous  serpents  and  malignant  diseases, 
it  is  said  to  be  efficacious. 

[“Ophites,  or  Green  Porphyry.  This  is  a green 
stone,  which  to  the  naked  eye  appears  homogeneous, 
and  varies  in  colour  from  blackish  green  to  pistachio 
green.  It  contains  greenish  white  crystals  of  feldspar, 
which,  on  the  polished  surface,  often  appear  in  paral- 
lelograms, and  are  sometimes  cruciform.  Its  texture  is 
very  compact,  and  its  fracture  often  splintery.  In 
many  cases  its  fine  green  colour  is  undoubtedly  pro- 
duced by  epidote.  This  belongs  to  the  green  porphyry 
of  the  ancients.” — Clear.  Min.  A.] 

OTIIRYS.  Ocppvs-  1.  The  lowest  part  of  the  fore- 
head, where  the  eyebrows  grow. 

2.  An  herb,  so  called  because  its  juice  was  used  to 
make  the  hair  of  the  eyebrows  black. 

OPHTHA'LMIA.  (From  ocpOaXyo;,  the  eye.  Oph- 
thalmitis. An  inflammation  of  the  membranes 
of  the  eye,  or  of  the  whole  bulb  of  the  eye.  The 
symptoms  which  characterize  this  disease  are  a pre- 
ternatural redness  of  the  tunica  conjunctiva,  owing 
to  a turgesceuce  of  its  blood-vessels;  pain  and 
heat  over  the  whole  surface  of  the  eye,  often  attended 
with  a sensation  of  some  extraneous  body  between  the 
eye  and  eyelid,  and  a plentiful  effusion  of  tears.  All 
these  symptoms  are  commonly  increased  by  motion  of 
the  eye,  or  its  coverings,  and  likewise  by  exposure  to 
light.  We  judge  of  the  depth  of  the  inflammation  by 
the  degree  of  pain  produced  by  light  thrown  upon  the 
eye.  When  the  pain  produced  by  light  is  considerable, 
we  have  much  reason  to  imagine  that  the  parts  at  the 
bottom  of  the  eye,  and  especially  the  retina,  are  chiefly 
affected ; and,  vice  versa , when  the  pain  is  not  much 
increased  by  this  exposure,  we  conclude  with  great 
probability  that  the  inflammation  is  confined  perhaps 
entirely  to  the  external  covering  of  the  eye.  In  super- 
ficial affections  of  this  kind  too,  the  symptoms  are  in 
general  local ; but,  whenever  the  inflammation  is  deep- 
seated,  it  is  attended  with  severe  shooting  pains  through 
the  head,  and  fever  to  a greater  or  less  degree  com- 
monly takes  place.  During  the  whole  course  of  the 
disease  there  is  for  the  most,  part  a very  plentiful  flow 
of  tears,  which  frequently  become  so  hot  and  acrid  as 
to  excoriate  the  neighbouring  parts;  but  it  often  hap- 
pens after  the  disease  has  been  of  some  duration,  that 
together  with  the  tears  a considerable  quantity  of  a 
yellow  purulent  like  matter  is  discharged,  and  when 
the  inflammation  has  either  spread  to  the  eyelids,  or 
has  been  seated  there  from  the  beginning,  as  soon  as 
the  tarsi  become  affected,  a discharge  takes  place  of  a 
viscid  glutinous  kind  of  matter,  which  greatly  adds  to 
the  patient’s  distress,  as  it  tends  to  increase  the  inflam- 
mation, by  cementing  the  eyelids  so  firmly  together  as 
to  render  it  extremely  difficult  to  separate  them. 

Ophthalmia  is  divided  into  external,  when  the  in- 
flammation is  superficial,  and  internal,  when  the 
inflammation  is  deep-seated,  and  the  globe  of  the  eye 
is  much  affected. 

In  severe  ophthalmia  two  distinct  stages  are  com- 
, monly  observable  the  first  is  attended  with  a greaj 


OPH 


ORB 


deal  of  heat  and  pain  in  the  eye  and  considerable  fe- 
brile disorder ; the  second  is  comparatively  a chronic 
affection  without  pain  and  fever.  The  eye  is  merely 
weakened,  moister  than  in  the  healthy  state,  and  more 
or  less  red. 

Ophthalmia  may  be  induced  by  a variety  of  exciting 
causes,  such  as  operate  in  producing  inflammation  in 
other  situations.  A severe  cold  in  which  the  eyes  are 
affected  at  the  same  time  with  the  pituitary  cavities, 
fauces,  and  trachea : change  of  weather ; sudden  transi- 
tion from  heat  to  cold ; the  prevalence  of  cold  winds  ; 
residence  in  damp  or  sandy  countries,  in  the  hot  sea- 
son exposure  of  the  eyes  to  the  vivid  rays  of  the  sun ; 
are  causes  usually  enumerated  ; and  considering  these 
it  does  not  seem  extraordinary  that  ophthalmia  should 
often  make  its  appearance  as  an  epidemic,  and  afflict 
persons  of  every  age  and  sex.  Besides  these  exciting 
causes,  writers  also  generally  mention  the  suppression 
of  some  habitual  discharge,  as  of  the  menses,  bleed- 
ings from  the  nose,  from  haemorrhoids,  &c.  Besides 
which,  inflammation  of  the  eyes  may  be  occasioned  by 
the  venereal  and  scrofulous  virus. 

OPHTHA'LMIC.  Ophthalmicus.  Belonging  to  the 
eye. 

Ophthalmic  ganglion.  Ganglion  ophtlialmicum. 
Lenticular  ganglion.  This  ganglion  is  formed  in  the 
orbit,  by  the  union  of  a branch  of  the  third  or  fourth 
pair  with  the  first  branch  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves. 

Ophthalmic  nerve.  Nervus  ophthalmicus.  Or- 
bital nerve.  The  first  branch  of  the  ganglion  or  ex- 
pansion of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves.  It  is  from  this 
nerve  that  a branch  is  given  off,  to  form,  with  a branch 
of  the  sixth,  the  great  intercostal  nerve. 

Ophthalmici  externi.  See  Motores  oculorum. 

OPHTHALMODY'NIA.  (From  ocpdaXyos,  an  eye, 
and  odvvrj,  pain.)  A vehement  pain  in  the  eye,  with- 
out, or  with  very  little  redness.  The  sensation  of  pain 
is  various,  as  itching,  burning,  or  as  if  gravel  were 
between  the  globe  .of  the  eye  and  lids.  The  spe- 
cies are : 

1.  Ophthalmodynia  rheumatica,  which  is  a pain  in 
the  muscular  expansions  of  the  globe  of  the  eye,  with- 
out redness  in  the  albuginea.  The  rheumatic  inflam- 
mation is  serous,  and  rarely  produces  redness. 

2.  Ophthalmodynia  periodica.,  is  a periodical  pain  in 
the  eye,  without  redness. 

3.  Ophthalmodynia  spasmodica,  is  a pressing  pain  in 
the  bulb  of  the  eye,  arising  from  spasmodic  contrac- 
tions of  the  muscles  of  the  eye,  in  nervous,  hysteric, 
and  hypochondriac  persons.  It  is  observed  to  termi- 
minate  by  a flow  of  tears. 

4.  Ophthalmodynia  from  an  internal  inflammation 
of  the  eye.  In  this  disorder,  there  is  a pain  and  sensa- 
tion as  if  the  globe  was  pressed  out  of  the  orbit. 

5.  Ophthalmodynia  hydrophthalmica.  After  a great 
pain  in  the  inferior  part  of  the  os  frontis,  the  sight  is 
obscured,  the  pupil  is  dilated,  and’ the  bulb  of  the  eye 
appears  larger,  pressing  on  the  lid.  This  species  is 
likewise  perceived  from  an  incipient  hydroptlialmia 
of  the  vitreous  humour. 

6.  Ophthalmodynia  arenosa , is  an  itching  and  sensa- 
tion of  pain  in  the  eye,  as  if  sand  or  gravel  were  lodged 
between  the  globe  and  lid. 

7.  Ophthalmodynia  symptomatica , which  is  a symp- 
tom of  some  other  eye-disease,  and  is  to  be  cured  by 
■removing  the  exciting  cause. 

8.  Ophthalmodynia  cancrosa,  which  arises  from  can- 
cerous acrimony  deposited  in  the  eye,  and  is  rarely 
curable. 

OPHTHALMOPO'NIA.  (From  o<t>da\pos,  the  eye, 
and  novea,  to  labour.)  An  intense  pain  in  the  eye, 
whence  the  light  is  intolerable. 

OPHTHALMOPTOSIS.  (From  ocpdaXpos,  an  eye, 
and  7t7 u>etf,  a fall.)  A falling  down  of  the  globe  of  the 
eye  on  the  cheek,  canthus,  or  upwards,  the  globe  itself 
being  scarce  altered  in  magnitude.  The  cause  is  a re- 
laxation of  the  muscles,  and  ligamentous  expansions 
of  the  globe  of  the  eye.  The  species  are : 

1.  Ophthalmoptosis  violenta , which  is  generated  by 
a violent  contusion  or  strong  stroke,  as  happens  some- 
times in  boxing.  The  eye  falls  out  of  the  socket  on 
the  cheek  or  canthus  of  the  eye,  and  from  the  elon- 
gation and  extension  of  the  optic  nerve  occasions  im- 
mediate blindness. 

2.  Ophthalmoptosis,  from  a tumour  within  the  orbit. 
An  expstosis,  toph,  abscess,  encysted  tumours,  as 
atheroma,  hygroma ; or  scirrhus,  forming  within  the 
orbit,  or  induration  of  the  orbital  adeps,  may  throw 

13G 


the  bulb  of  the  eye  out  of  the  socket  upwards,  dowi}- 
wards,  or  towards  either  canthus.  , 

3.  Ophthalmoptosis  paralytica,  or  the  paralytic 
ophthalmoptosis,  which  arises  from  a palsy  of  the  recti 
muscles,  whence  a stronger  power  in  the  oblique 
muscles  of  the  bulb. 

4.  Ophthalmoptosis  staphylomatica , when  the  sta- 
phyloma depresses  the  inferior  eyelid,  and  extends  on 
the  cheek. 

OPIATE.  ( Opiatum ; from  the  effects  being  like 
that  of  opium.)  A medicine  that  procures  sleep,  &c. 

See  Anodyne. 

O'PION.  O itiov.  Opium. 

Opi'smus.  (From  omov,  opium.)  An  opiate  con- 
fection. 

Opisthenar.  (From  onurdev,  backwards,  andfcJap, 
the  palm.)  The  back  part  of  the  hand. 

OPISTHOCRA'NIUM.  (From  or nadev,  backward, 
and  icpaviov,  the  head.)  The  occiput,  or  hinder  part 
of  the  head. 

Opisthocypho'sis.  (From  omadev,  backward,  and 
Kvc/Homs,  a gibbosity.)  A curved  spine. 

OPISTHOTONOS.  (From  omadev,  backward,  and 
reivo),  to  draw.)  A fixed  spasm  of  several  muscles,  so 
as  to  keep  the  body  in  a fixed  position,  and  bent  back- 
wards. Cullen  considers  it  as  a variety  of  tetanus. 
See  Tetanus. 

O PIUM.  (Probably  from  ojroj,  juice  ; or  from  opi , 
Arabian.)  The  inspissated  juice  of  the  poppy.  See 
Papaver  somniferum. 

OPOBA'LSAMUM.  (From  otto?,  juice,  and  Sa\aa- 
pov,  balsam.)  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 

OPOCA'LPASON.  (From  ottos,  juice, and  KaXiraoov, 
a tree  of  that  name.)  Opocarpason.  A kind  of  bdel- 
lium which  resembles  myrrh,  but  is  poisonous. 

OPODELDOC.  A term  of  no  meaning,  frequently 
mentioned  by  Paracelsus.  Formerly  it  signified  a plas- 
ter for  all  external  injuries,  but  now  is  confined  to  a 
camphorated  soap  liniment. 

Opodeoce'le.  A rupture  through  the  foramen 
ischii,  or  into  the  labia  pudendi. 

OPO'PANAX.  ( Opopanax , acis.  f. ; from  ottos, 
juice,  and  naval,  the  panacea.)  See  Pastinaca  opo- 
panax. 

Opo'pia.  (From  onropai,  to  see.)  The  bones  of  the 

eyes. 

Opo'rice.  (From  onwpa,  autumnal  fruits.)  A con- 
serve made  of  ripe  fruits." 

OPPILA'TIO.  (From  oppilo,  to  shut  up.)  Oppi- 
lation  is  a close  kind  of  obstruction ; for,  according  to 
Rhodius,  it  signifies,  not  only  to  shut  out,  but  also  to  fill. 

Oppilati'va.  (From  to  shut  up.)  Medicines 

or  substances  which  shut  up  the  pores  of  the  skin. 

OPPO'NENS.  Opposing.  A name  given  to  some 
muscles  from  their  office. 

Opponens  pollicis.  See  Flexor  ossis  metacarpi 

pollicis. 

OPPOSITIFOLIUS.  Applied  to  a flower-stalk, 
when  opposite  to  a leaf;  the  Geranium  molle,  arid 
Sium  angustifolium,  afford  examples  of  the  Peduncu - 
lus  oppositifolius. 

OPPOSITUS.  Opposite  to  each  other;  as  the  leaves 
of  Saxifraga  oppositifolia , and  Ballote  nigra. 

OPPRE  SSION.  Oppressio.  The  catalepsy,  or  any 
pressure  upon  the  brain.  See  Compression. 

Ofsi'gonos.  (From  oifsi,  late,  and  yivopat,  to  be 
born.)  A dens  sapientiae,  or  late  cut  tooth. 

OPTIC.  ( Opticus;  from  on'Jopat,  to  see.)  Relating 
to  the  eye. 

Optic  nerve.  Nervus  opticus.  The  second  pair 
of  nerves  of  the  brain.  They  arise  from  the  thalami 
nervorum  opticorum,  perforate  the  bulb  of  the  eye,  and 
in  it  form  the  retina. 

OPU'NTIA.  ( Ab  Opunte , from  the  city  Opus,  near 
which  it  flourished.)  See  Cactus. 

ORACHE.  See  Atriple x hortensis , and  Cheno- 

podium. 

ORANGE.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Orange , Seville.  See  Citrus  aurantium. 

Orange,  shaddock.  See  Shaddock. 

Orbicula're  os.  Os  pisiforme.  The  name  of  a 
bone  of  the  carpus.  Also  a very  small  round  bone, 
not  larger  than  a pin-head,  that  belongs  to  the  internal 
ear. 

ORBICULA'RIS.  (From  orbiculus,  a little  ring: 
so  called  from  its  shape.)  This  name  is  given  to  some 
muscles  which  surround  the  part  like  a ring. 

Orbicularis  ORig.  Sphincter  labiorum,  of  Douglas: 


ORC 


ORC 


■scmi-orbicularis,  of  Winslow  ; constrictor  oris  of 
Cowper;  and  labial , of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the 
mouth,  formed  in  a great  measure  by  those  of  the  lips ; 
the  fibres  of  the  superior  descending,  those  of  the  in- 
ferior ascending  and  decussating  each  other  about  the 
corner  of  the  mouth,  they  run  along  the  lip  to  join  those 
of  the  opposite  side,  so  that  the  fleshy  fibres  appear  to 
surround  the  mouth  like  a sphincter.  Its  use  is  to  shut 
the  mouth,  by  contracting  and  drawing  both  lips  to- 
gether, and  to  counteract  all  the  muscles  that  assist  in 
opening  it. 

Orbicularis  palpebrarum.  A muscle  common 
to  both  the  eyelids.  Orbicularis  palpebrarum  ciliaris, 
of  authors ; and  maxillo  palpebral , of  Dumas.  It 
arises  by  a number  of  fleshy  fibres  from  the  outer  edge 
of  the  orbitar  process  of  the  superior  maxillary  bone, 
and  from  a tendon  near  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye ; 
these  fibres  run  a little  downwards  and  outwards,  over 
the  upper  part  of  the  cheek,  below  the  orbit,  covering 
the  under  eyelid,  and  surround  the  external  angle, 
being  closely  connected  only  to  the  skin  and  fat ; they 
then  run  over  the  superciliary  ridge  of  the  os  frontis, 
towards  the  inner  canthus,  where  they  mix  with  the 
fibres  of  the  occipito-frontalis  and  corrugator  supercilii : 
then  covering  the  upper  eyelid,  they  descend  to  the 
inner  angle  opposite  to  their  inferior  origin,  and  firmly 
adhere  to  the  internal  angular  process  of  the  os  frontis, 
and  to  the  short  round  tendon  which  serves  to  fix  the 
palpebrae  and  muscular  fibres  arising  from  it.  It  is  in- 
serted into  the  nasal  process  of  the  superior  maxillary 
bone,  by  a short  round  teudon,  covering  the  anterior 
and  upper  part  of  the  lachrymal  sac,  which  tendon  can 
be  easily  felt  at  the  inner  canthus  of  the  eye.  The  use 
of  this  muscle  is  to  shut  the  eye,  by  drawing  both  lids 
together,  the  fibres  contracting  from  the  outer  angle 
towards  the  inner,  press  the  eyeball,  squeeze  the  lach- 
rymal gland,  and  convey  the  tears  towards  the  puncta 
lachrymalia. 

Orbicularis  palpebrarum  ciliaris.  See  Orbicu- 
laris palpebrarum. 

ORBICULATUS.  Orbiculate.  Applied  to  a leaf 
that  is  circular  or  orbicular,  the  length  and  breadth 
being  equal,  and  the  circumference  an  even  circular 
line.  Precise  examples  of  this  are  scarcely  to  be  found. 
Some  species  of  pepper  approach  it,  and  the  leaf  of 
the  Hedysarum  styracifolium  is  perfectly  orbicular,  ex- 
cept a notch  at  the  base. 

ORBIT.  Orbitum.  The  two  cavities  under  the 
forehead,  in  which  the  eyes  are  situated,  are  termed 
orbits.  The  angles  of  the  orbits  are  called  cant/d. 
Each  orbit  is  composed  of  seven  bones,  viz.  the  frontal, 
maxillary,  jugal,  lachrymal,  ethmoid,  palatine,  and 
sphenoid.  The  use  of  this  bony  socket  is  to  maintain 
and  defend  the  organ  of  sight,  and  its  adjacent  parts. 

O'rchea.  Galen  says  it  is  the  scrotum. 

ORCHIDEAL  (From  orchis , a plant  so  called.) 
The  name  of  an  order  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  those  which  have  fleshy 
roots  and  orchideal  corolls. 

ORCHIDEUS.  Orchideal : resembling  the  orchis. 

ORCHIS.  (Opxis,  a testicle ; from  opeyopai , to  de- 
sire.) 1.  A testicle. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Oynandria ; Order,  Diandria. 

Orchi3  bifolia.  The  systematic  name  of  the  but- 
terfly orchis,  the  root  of  which  is  used  indifferently 
with  that  of  the  male  orchis.  See  Orchis  mascula. 

Orchis  mascula.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
male  orchis.  Dog’s  stones.  Male  .orchis.  Satyrion. 
Orchis — bulbis  indivisis , nectarii  labio  quadrilobo 
crenulatOy  cornu  obtuso  pctalis  dorsalibus  rejlexus  of 
Linnaeus.  The  root  has  a place  in  the  Materia  Medica 
of  the  Edinburgh  pharmacopoeia,  on  account  of  the 
glutinous  slimy  juice  which  it  contains.  The  root  of 
the  orchis  bifolia  is  also  collected.  Satyrion  root  has 
a sweetish  taste,  a faint  and  somewhat  unpleasant 
smell.  Its  mucilaginous  or  gelatinous  quality  has 
recommended  it  as  a demulcent.  Salep,  which  is  im- 
ported here  from  the  East,  is  a preparation  of  an  analo- 
gous root  which  is  considered  as  an  article  of  diet,  is 
accounted  extremely  nutritious,  as  containing  a great 
quantity  of  farinaceous  matter  in  a small  bulk.  The 
supposed  aphrodisiac  qualities  of  this  root,  which  have 
been  noticed  ever  since  the  days  of  Dioscorides,  seems, 
says  Dr.  Woodville,  to  be  founded  on  the  fanciful  doc- 
trine of  signatures ; thus,  orchis , i.  e.  opx is,  testiculus 
habet  radices , instar  testiculorum. 


Orchis  morio.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
orchis,  from  the  root  of  which  the  salep  is  made. 
Salep  is  a farinaceous  powder  imported  from  Turkey 
It  may  be  obtained  from  several  other  species  of  the 
same  genus  of  plants.  It  is  an  insipid  substance,  of 
which  a small  quantity,  by  proper  management,  con- 
verts a large  portion  of  water  into  a jelly,  the  nutritive 
powers  of  which  have  been  greatly  overrated.  Salep 
forms  a considerable  part  of  the  diet  of  the  inhabitants 
of  Turkey,  Persia,  and  Syria.  The  method  of  pre- 
paring salep  is  as  follows:— The  new  root  is  to  be 
washed  in  water,  and  the  fine  brown  skin  which 
covers  it  is  to  be  separated  by  means  of  a small  brush, 
or  by  dipping  the  root  in  warm  water,  and  rubbing  it 
with  a coarse  linen  cloth.  The  roots  thus  cleaned 
are  to  be  spread  on  a tin  plate,  and  placed  in  an  oven, 
heated  to  the  usual  degree,  where  they  are  to  remain 
six  or  ten  minutes.  In  this  time  they  will  have  lost 
their  milky  whiteness,  and  acquired  a transparency 
like  horn,  without  any  diminution  of  bulk.  Being 
arrived  at  this  state,  they  are  to  be  removed  in  order 
to  dry  and  harden  in  the  air,  which  will  require  several 
days  to  effect;  or  they  may  be  dried  in  a few  hours, 
by  using  a very  gentle  heat.  Salep,  thus  prepared, 
contains  a great  quantity  of  vegetable  aliment ; as  a 
wholesome  nourishment  it  is  much  superior  to  rice ; 
and  has  the  singular  property  of  concealing  the  taste  of 
salt  water.  Hence,  to  prevent  the  dreadful  calamity  of 
famine  at  sea,  it  has  been  proposed  that  the  powder  of 
it  should  constitute  part  of  the  provisions  of  every 
ship’s  comnany.  With  regard  to  its  medicinal  proper- 
ties, it  may  be  observed,  that  its  restorative,  mucila- 
ginous, and  demulcent  qualities,  render  it  of  consider- 
able use  in  various  diseases,  when  employed  as  aliment, 
particularly  in  sea-scurvy,  diarrhoea,  dysentery,  symp- 
tomatic fever,  arising  from  the  absorption  of  pus,  and 
the  stone  or  gravel. 

ORCHI'TIS.  (From  op%£ a testicle.)  Hernia  hit 
moralis.  Swelled  testicle.  A very  common  symptom 
attending  a gonorrhoea  is  a swelling  of  the  testicle, 
which  is  only  sympathetic,  and  not  venereal,  because 
the  same  symptoms  follow  every  kind  of  irritation  on 
the  urethra,  whether  produced  by  strictures,  injections, 
or  bougies.  Such  symptoms  are  not  similar  to  the  ac- 
tions arising  from  the  application  of  venereal  matter, 
for  suppuration  seldom  occurs,  and,  when  it  does,  the 
matter  is  not  venereal.  The  swelling  and  inflamma- 
tion appear  suddenly,  and  as  suddenly  disappear,  or  go 
from  one  testicle  to  the  other.  The  epididymis  re- 
mains swelled,  however,  even  for  a considerable  time 
afterward. 

The  first  appearance  of  swelling  is  generally  a soft 
pulpy  fulness  of  the  body  of  the  testicle,  which  is  ten- 
der to  the  touch;  this  increases  to  a hard  swelling  ac- 
companied with  considerable  pain.  The  epididymis, 
towards  the  lower  end  of  the  testicle,  is  generally  the 
hardest  part.  The  hardness  and  swelling,  however, 
often  pervade  the  whole  of  the  epididymis.  The  sper- 
matic cord,  and  especially  the  vas  deferens,  are  often 
thickened,  and  sore  to  the  touch.  The  spermatic 
veins  sometimes  become  varicose.  A pain  in  the  loins, 
and  sense  of  weakness  there,  and  in  the  pelvis,  are 
other  casual  symptoms.  Colicky  pains ; uneasiness  in 
the  stomach  and  bowels;  flatulency;  sickness,  and 
even  vomiting ; are  not  unfrequent.  The  whole  testi- 
cle is  swelled,  and  not  merely  the  epididymis,  as  has 
been  asserted. 

The  inflammation  of  the  part  most  probably  arises 
from  its  sympathizing  with  the  urethra.  The  swelling 
of  the  testicle  coming  on,  either  removes  the  pain  in 
making  water,  and  suspends  the  discharge,  which  does 
not  return  till  such  swelling  begins  to  subside,  or  else 
the  irritation  in  the  urethra,  first  ceasing,  produces  a 
swelling  of  the  testicle,  which  continues  till  the  pain 
and  discharge  return ; thus  rendering  it  doubtful 
which  is  the  cause  and  which  the  effect.  Occasionally, 
however,  the  discharge  has  become  more  violent, 
though  the  testicle  has  swelled ; and  such  swelling  has 
even  been  known  to  occur  after  the  discharge  has 
ceased ; yet  the  latter  has  returned  with  violence,  and 
remained  as  long  as  the  hernia  humoralis. 

Hernia  humoralis,  with  stoppage  of  the  discharge,  is 
apt  to  be  attended  with  strangury.  A very  singula* 
thing  is,  that  the  inflammation  more  frequently  comes 
on  when  the  irritation  in  the  urethra  is  going  off,  than 
when  at  its  height. 

The  enlargement  of  the  testicle,  from  cancer  and 

137 


ORI 


ORM 


scrofula,  are  generally  slow  in  their  progress : that  of 
a hernia  humoralis  very  quick. 

O'rchos.  (From  op%os,  a plantation  or  orchard : so 
called  from  the  regularity  with  which  the  hairs  are  in- 
serted.) The  extremities  of  the  eyelids,  where  the  eye- 
lashes grow. 

ORCHO'TOMY.  ( Orchotomia ; from  opx‘S,  a tes- 
ticle, and  re/xvw,  to  cut.)  Castration.  The  operation 
of  extracting  a testicle. 

ORDER.  A term  applied  by  naturalists  and  noso- 
logists  to  designate  a division  that  embraces  a number 
of  genera  which  have  some  circumstances  common  to 
them  all.  See  Genus , Plants , sexual  system  of , and 
Nosology. 

Orders , natural , of  plants.  See  JY atural. 

ORE.  The  mineral  substance  from  which  metals 
are  extracted. 

OREOSELI'NUM.  (From  opos,  a mountain,  and 
oxA ivov,  parsley : so  named  because  it  grows  wild  upon 
mountains.)  Mountain  parsley.  .See  Athamanta. 

Ore'stion.  (From  opoj,  a mountain.)  In  Diosco- 
rides  it  is  the  Helenium,  or  a kind  of  elecampane, 
growing  upon  mountains. 

OREXIA.  (From  opeyopai,  to  desire.)  Orexis.  A 
desire  or  appetite. 

ORE'XIS.  See  Orexia. 

ORGAN.  Ooyavov.  Organum.  A part  of  the 
body  capable  of  the  performance  of  some  perfect  act 
or  operation.  They  are  distinguished  by  physiologists 
by  their  functions,  as  organs  of  sense,  organs  of  mo- 
tion, organs  of  sensation,  digestive  organs,  &c. 

ORGANIC.  Of  or  belonging  to  an  organ.  In  the 
present  day  this  term  is  in  general  use  to  distinguish  a 
disease  of  structure  from  a functional  disease ; thus, 
when  the  liver  is  converted  into  a hard  tuberculated  or 
other  structure,  it  is  called  an  organic  disease;  but 
when  it  merely  furnishes  a bad  bile,  the  disease  is  said 
to  be  functional. 

[“  Organic  relics.  These  fossil  relics  are  of  two 
kinds,  Petrifactions  and  Conservatives. 

Petrifactions , or  Substitutions,  are  those  relics, 
which  are  entirely  made  up  of  mineral  substances, 
which  have  gradually  run  into  the  places  occupied  by 
organized  bodies  as  those  bodies  decayed,  and  assumed 
their  forms. 

Conservatives , or  Preservatives , are  those  relics,  or 
parts  thereof,  which  still  consist  of  the  very  same  sub- 
stances, which  originally  composed  the  living  organized 
being. 

An  organic  relic  may  partake  of  both  kinds.  The 
shell  of  an  oyster,  being  chiefly  carbonate  of  lime,  may 
still  remain,  which  would  be  a conservative.  While 
the  enclosed  animal  matter  will  be  entirely  decayed, 
and  mineral  matter  occupy  its  place  and  imitate  its 
form,  which  would  be  a.  petrifaction. 

Organic  relics  ate  named  by  annexing  the  termina- 
tion lithos  (a  stone)  to  the  scientific  name  of  the  living 
organized  being.  As  ichthyolithos  is  composed  of 
txOvs  (a  fish)  and  \160s  (a  stone).  That  is,  a fish  be- 
coming stone.  In  English,  lithos  is  changed  to  lite,  as 
ichthyolite.  Sometimes  the  letter  l is  left  out,  as  lacerta 
(lizard)  would  make  lacertit,  (a  petrified  lizard). 
This  abridged  method  has  now  come  intogeneial  use.” 
’—Eat.  Geol.  A.] 

ORGASM.  See  Orgasmus. 

ORGASMUS.  (From  opyaw,  “ appeto  impati enter ; 
proprie  de  anemantibus  dicitur,  qute  turgent  libidine.” 
Scapula.)  Salacity. 

ORGASTIC  A.  The  name  of  an  order  of  the  class 
Genetica,  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases  affecting  the 
orgasm.  Its  genera  are,  chlorosis , prceotia , lagnesis , 
agenesia , aphnrea.  aedoptosis. 

ORIBASIUS,  an  eminent  physician  of  the  4th  cen- 
tury, was  born  at  Pergamus,  or,  according  to  others,  at 
Sardes,  where  he  resided  for  some  time.  He  is  men- 
tioned as  one  of  the  most  learned  and  accomplished 
men  of  his  age,  and  the  most  skilful  in  his  profession  ; 
and  he  not  only  obtained  great  public  reputation,  but 
also  the  friendship  of  the  Emperor  Julian,  who  ap- 
pointed him  quaestor  of  Constantinople.  But  after  the 
death  of  that  prince  he  suffered  a severe  reverse ; he 
was  stripped  of  his  property,  and  sent  into  banishment 
among  the  Barbarians.  He  sustained  his  misfortunes, 
however,  with  great  fortitude ; and  the  dignity  of  his 
character,  with  his  professional  skill  and  kindness, 
gained  him  the  veneration  of  these  rude  people,  among 
whom  he  was  adored  as  a tutelary  god.  At  length  he 


was  recalled  to  the  imperial  court,  and  regained  the 
public  favour.  He  was  chiefly  a compiler;  but  some 
valuable  practical  remarks  first  occur  in  his  writings. 
He  made,  at  the  request  of  Julian,  extensive  “Collec 
tions”  from  Galen,  and  other  preceding  authors,  in 
about  seventy  books,  of  which  only  seventeen  now 
remain  ; and  afterward  made  a “ Synopsis  of  this  vast 
work  for  the  use  of  hi3  son,  in  nine  books : there  are 
also  extant  four  books,  in  medicines  and  diseases,  en- 
titled “ Euporistorum  Libri.”  He  praises  highly  local 
evacuations  of  blood,  especially  by  scarifications, 
which  had  been  little  noticed  before : and  he  affirms, 
that  he  was  himself  cured  of  the  plague  by  it,  having 
lost  in  this  way  two  pounds  of  blood  from  the  thighs 
on  the  second  day  of  the  disease.  He  first  described  a 
singular  species  of  insanity,  under  the  name  of  lycan- 
thropia,  in  which  the  patient  wanders  about  by  night 
among  the  tombs,  as  if  changed  into  a wolf ; though 
such  a disease  is  noticed  in  the  New  Testament. 

ORICHALCUM.  The  brass  of  the  ancients. 

Ori'cia.  (From  Oricus,  a city  of  Epirus,  near 
which  it  grows.)  A species  of  fir  or  turpentine-tree, 
from  Oricus. 

Orientalia  folia.  The  leaves  of  senna  were  so 
called. 

ORl'GANUM.  (From  opos,  a mountain,  and  yavoto, 
to  rejoice : so  called  because  it  grows  upon  the  side  of 
mountains.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean 
system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Order,  Gymnospermia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  wild  marjoram. 
See  Origanum  vulgare. 

Origanum  creticum.  See  Origanum  diclamnvs. 

Origanum  dictamnus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  dittany  of  Crete.  Dictamnus  creticus ; Origa- 
num creticum;  Onitis.  The  leaves  of  this  plant,  Ori- 
ganum— foliis  inferioribus  tomentosis , spicis  nutanti- 
bus  of  Linnaeus,  are  now  rarely  used  ; they  have  been 
recommended  as  emmenagogue  and  alexipharmic. 

Origanum  marjorana.  The  systematic  name  of 
sweet  marjoram.  Marjorana.  This  plant,  Origanum 
— foliis  ovatis  obtusis,  spicis  subrotundis  compactis 
pubescentibus  of  Linnaeus,  has  been  long  cultivated  in 
our  gardens,  and  is  in  frequent  use  for  culinary  pur- 
poses. The  leaves  and  tops  have  a pleasant  smell,  and 
a moderately  warm,  aromatic,  bitterish  taste.  They 
yield  their  virtues  to  aqueous  and  spirituous  liquors, 
by  infusion,  and  to  water  in  distillation,  affording  a 
considerable  quantity  of  essential  oil.  The  medicinal 
qualities  of  the  plant  are  similar  to  those  of  the  wild 
plant  (see  Origanum  vulgare ) ; but  being  much  more 
fragrant,  it  is  thought  to  be  more  cephalic,  and  better 
adapted  to  those  complaints  known  by  the  name  of 
nervous;  and  may  therefore  be  employed  with  the 
same  intentions  as  lavender.  It  was  directed  inbfKe 
pulvis  sternutatorius , by  both  pharmacopoeias,  with  a 
view  to  the  agreeable  odour  which  it  communicates  to 
the  asarabacca,  rather  than  to  itsenhine  power,  which 
is  very  inconsiderable  ; but  it  is  now  wholly  omitted  in 
the  Pharm.  Lond.  In  its  recent  state,  it  is  said  to  have 
been  successfully  applied  to  scirrhous  tumours  of  the 
breast. 

Origanum  syriacum.  The  Syrian  herb  mastich. 

See  Teucrium  marum. 

Origanum  vulgare.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
wild  marjoram.  Marjorana;  Mancurana ; Origa- 
num her  aclcoticum  ; Onitis;  Zazarhendi  herba.  Ori- 
ganum— spicis  subrotundis  paniculatis  conglomeratis, 
bractis  calyce  lorfgioribus  ovatis  of  Linnaeus.  This 
plant  grows  wild  in  many  parts  of  Britain.  It  has  an 
agreeable  aromatic  smell,  approaching  to  that  of  mar- 
joram, and  a pungent  taste,  much  resembling  thyme, 
to  which  it  is  likewise  thought  to  be  more  allied  in  its 
medicinal  qualities,  and  therefore  deemed  to  be  em 
menagogue,  tonic,  stomachic,  Sec.  The  dried  leaves, 
used  instead  of  tea,  are  said  to  be  exceedingly  grateful. 
They  are  employed  in  medicated  baths  and  fomenta- 
tions. 

Oris  constrictor.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

Orleana  terra.  ( Orleana , so  named  from  the 
place  where  it  grows.)  See  Bixa  orleana. 

ORMSKIRK.  The  name  of  a place  in  which  Hill 
lived,  who  invented  a medicine  for  the  cure  of  hydro- 
phobia, and  died  without  making  known  its  composi- 
tion. The  analysis  of  Drs.  Black  and  Hepburn  de- 
monstrates it  to  be  half  an  ounce  of  powder  of 
chalk ; three  drachms  of  Armenian  bole ; ten  grams 


ORY 


OSB 


of  alum ; one  drachm  of  powder  of  elecampane  root ; 
six  drops  of  oil  of  anise.  This  dose  is  to  be  taken 
every  morning  for  six  times  in  a glass  of  water,  with  a 
small  proportion  of  fresh,  milk. 

ORNITHO'GALUM.  (From  opvtf,  a bird,  and 
yaAa,  milk : so  called  from  the  colour  of  its  flowers, 
which  are  like  the  milk  found  in  eggs.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Hex- 
andria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

Ornithogalum  maritimum,  a kind  of  wild  onion. 
See  Scilla. 

ORNITHOGLOSSUM.  (From  opvtf,  a bird,  and 
y.Xcoaaa,  a tongue  : so  called  from  its  shape.)  Bird’s 
tongue.  The  seeds  of  the  ash-tree  are  sometimes  so 
called. 

ORNITHOLOGY.  (Ornithologia ; from  opvtf,  a 
bird,  and  Aoyof,  a discourse.)  That  part  of  natural 
history  which  treats  of  birds. 

QRNITHOPO'DIUM.  (From  opvtf,  a bird,  and 
ttovs,  a foot:  so  called  from  the  likeness  of  its  pods  to 
a bird’s  claw.)  Bird’s  foot;  scorpion  wort.  The  Or- 
nithropus  perpusillus , and  Scorpioides , of  Linnaeus, 
ate  so  called. 

O'RNUS.  (From  orn,  Ileb.)  The  ash- tree  which 
affords  manna. 

OROBA'NCHE.  (From  opoSof,  the  wild  pea,  and 
ay%w,  to  suffocate:  so  called  because  it  twines  round 
tite  orobus  and  destroys  it.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Gynandria  and 
Didynamia ; Order,  Angiospermia. 

Orobry'chis.  (From  opo6os,  the  wood-pea,  and 
./?pv%w,  to  eat.)  The  same  as  orobance. 

O ROBUS.  (From  epe-rr'Ju),  to  eat.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Diadelphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  ervum.  See 
Ervum. 

Orobus  tuberosus.  The  heath-pea.  The  root 
of  this  plant  is  said  to  be  nutritious.  The  Scotch  isl- 
anders hold  them  in  great  esteem,  and  chew  them  like 
tobacco. 

Oroseli'num.  See  Athamanta. 

ORPIMENT.  Orpimentum.  A sulphuret  of  arse- 
nic. Native  orpiment  is  found  in  yellow,  brilliant, 
and,  as  it  were,  talky  masses,  often  mixed  with  realgar, 
and  sometimes  of  a greenish  colour.  See  Arsenic. 

ORPINE.  See  Sedum  telephium. 

Orrhopy'gium.  (From  opof,  the  extremity,  and 
iruyt],  the  buttocks.)  The  extremity  of  the  spine, 
which  is  terminated  by  the  os  coccygis. 

O'rrhos.  (From  peco,  to  flow.)  1.  Serum,  whey. 

2.  The  raphe  of  the  scrotum. 

3.  The  extremity  of  the  sacrum. 

ORRIS.  See  Iris. 

Orris , Florentine.  See  Iris  Jlorentina. 

Orseille.  See  Lichen  rocella. 

ORTHITE.  A mineral ; so  named  because  it  always 
occurs  in  straight  layers,  generally  in  felspar.  It  re- 
sembles gadolinite.  It  is  found  in  the  mine  of  Fimbo 
in  Sweden. 

ORTHOCO'LON.  (From  op0of,  straight,  and  xwAov, 
a limb.)  It  is  a species  of  stiff  joint,  when  it  cannot 
be  bended,  but  remains  straight. 

ORTHOPNCE'A.  (From  op0oj,  erect,  and  irvoy, 
breathing.)  A very  quick  and  laborious  breathing, 
during  which  the  person  is  obliged  to  be  in  an  erect 
posture. 

Orva'le.  C Orvale,  French.)  A species  of  clary  or 
horminum. 

Orvieta'num,  a medicine  that  resists  poisons;  from 
a mountebank  of  Orvieta,  in  Italy,  who  first  made  him- 
self famous  by  taking  such  things  upon  the  stage, 
after  doses  of  pretended  poisons;  though  some  say  its 
inventor  was  one  Orvietanus,  and  that  it  is  named 
after  him. 

ORY'ZA.  (From  orez,  Arabian.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tri- 
andria.  Order,  Digynia.  The  rice  plant. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  for  rice.  See  Oryza 
sativa. 

Oryza  sativa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
which  affords  the  rice,  which  is  the  principal  food  of  the 
inhabitants  in  all  parts  of  the  East,  where  it  is  boiled, 
and  eaten  either  alone  or  with  their  meat.  Large  quan- 
tities of  it  are  annually  sent  into  Europe,  and  it  meets 
with  a general  esteem  for  family  purposes.  The  people 
of  Java  have  a method  of  making  puddings  of  rice, 


which  seems  to  be  unknown  here ; but  it  is  not  difficult 
to  put  in  practice  if  it  should  merit  attention.  They 
take  X conical  earthen  pot,  which  is  open  at  the  large 
end,  and  perforated  all  over.  This  they  fill  about  half 
full  with  rice,  and  putting  it  into  a large  earthen  pot  of 
the  same  shape,  filled  with  boiling  water,  the  rice  in 
the  first  pot  soon  swells,  and  stops  the  perforations,  so 
as  to  keep  out  the  water.  By  this  method  the  rice  is 
brought  to  a firm  consistence,  and  forms  a pudding, 
whieh  is  generally  eaten  with  butter,  oil,  sugar,  vine- 
gar, and  spices.  The  Indians  eat  stewed  rice  with  good 
success  against  the  bloody  flux ; and  in  most  inflam- 
matory disorders  they  cure  themselves  with  only  a de- 
coction of  it.  The  spirituous  liquor  called  arrack  is 
made  from  this  grain.  Rice  grows  naturally  in  moist 
places,  and  will  not  come  to  perfection,  when  culti- 
vated, unless  the  ground  be  sometimes  overflowed  or 
plentifully  watered.  The  grain  is  of  a gray  colour 
when  first  reaped  ; but  the  growers  have  a method  of 
whitening  it  before  it  is  sent  to  market.  The  manner 
of  performing  this,  and  beating  it  out  in  Egypt,  is  thus 
described  by  Hasselquist:  They  have  hollow  iron  cy- 
lindrical pestles,  about  an  inch  diameter,  lifted  by  a 
wheel  worked  with  oxen.  A person  sits  between  the 
pestles,  and,  as  they  rise,  pushes  forward  the  rice,  while 
another  winnows  and  supplies  fresh  parcels.  Thus 
they  continue  working  until  it  is  entirely  free  from 
chaff.  Having  in  this  manner  Cleaned  it,  they  add 
one-thirtieth  part  of  salt,  and  rub  them  both  together, 
by  which  the  grain  acquires  a whiteness ; then  it  is 
passed  through  a sieve,  to  separate  the  salt  again  from 
it.  In  the  island  of  Ceylon  they  have  a much  more 
expeditious  method  of  getting  out  the  rice ; for,  in  the 
field  where  it  is  reaped,  they  dig  a round  hole,  with  a 
level  bottom,  about  a foot  deep,  and  eight  yards  diame- 
ter, and  fill  it  with  bundles  of  corn.  Having  laid  it 
properly,  the  women  drive  about  half  a dozen  oxen 
continually  round  the  pit;  and  thus  they  will  tread  out 
forty  or  fifty  bushels  a day.  This  is  a very  ancient 
method  of  treading  out  corn,  and  is  still  practised  in 
Africa  upon  other  sorts  of  grain. 

OS.  1.  (Os,  ossis.  n.)  A bone.  See  Bone. 

2.  (Os,  oris,  n.)  The  mouth. 

Os  externum.  The  entrance  into  the  vagina  is  so 
named  in  opposition  to  the  mouth  of  the  womb,  which 
is  called  the  os  internum. 

Os  internum.  The  orifice  or  mouth  of  the  uterus. 

Os  leonis.  The  Antirrhinum  linaria. 

Os  spongiosum.  The  spongy  bones  are  two  in 
number,  and  are  called  ossa  spongiosa  inferiora.  The 
ethmoid  bone  has  two  turbinated  porlions,  which  are 
sometimes  called  the  superior  spongy  bones.  These 
bones,  which,  from  their  shape,  are  sometimes  called 
ossa  turhinata , have,  by  some  anatomists,  been  de- 
scribed as  belonging  to  the  ethmoid  bone ; and  by 
others,  as  portions  of  the  ossa  palati.  In  young  sub- 
jects, however,  they  are  evidently  distinct  bones.  They 
consist  of  a spongy  lamella  in  each  nostril.  The  con- 
vex surface  .of  this  lamina  is  turned  towards  the  sep- 
tum narium,  and  its  concave  part  towards  the  maxil- 
lary bone,  covering  the  opening  of  the  lachrymal  duct 
into  the  nose.  From  their  upper  edge  arise  two  pro- 
cesses : the  posterior  of  these,  which  is  the  broadest, 
hangs  as  it  were  upon  the  edge  of  the  antrum  high- 
morianum ; the  anterior  one  joins  the  os  unguis,  and 
forms  a part  of  the  lachrymal  duct.  These  bones  are 
complete  in  the  foetus.  They  are  lined  with  the  pitui- 
tary membrane ; and,  besides  their  connexion  with  the 
ethmoid  bone,  are  joined  to  the  ossa  maxillaria  supe- 
riora,  ossa  palati,  and  ossa  unguis.  Besides  these  ossa 
spongiosa  inferiora  there  are  sometimes  two  others, 
situated  lower  down,  one  in  each  nostril.  These  are 
very  properly  considered  as  a production  of  the  sides 
of  the  maxillary  sinus  turned  downwards.  In  many 
subjects,  likewise,  we  find  other  smaller  bones  standing 
out  into  the  nostrils,  which,  from  their  shape,  might 
also  deserve  the  name  of  turhinata , but  they  are  un- 
certain in  their  size,  situation,  and  number. 

Os  tinc/e.  See  TinctB  os. 

[OSBORN,  John  C.  M.D.  the  eldest  son  of  Dr.  John 
Osborn,  was  born  at  Middletown,  Connecticut,  Sep- 
tember, 1766.  He  received  his  classical  education  at 
Middletown,  under  the  Rev.  Enoch  Huntington,  an 
eminent  scholar ; and  his  medical  education  exclu- 
sively under  his  father.  He  was  not  distinguished  by 
any  academic  honour  till  he  became  eminent  in  liia 
profession  in  North  Carolina,  to  which  state  he  re 


OSS 


OST 


moved  in  1787.  Here  he  was  well  known  as  a success- 
ful practitioner,  and  was  repeatedly  placed  at  the  head 
of  the  Medical ’Society  of  the  district.  He  came  to  the 
city  of  New- York  in  1807,  and  was  shortly  after  intro- 
duced to  a large  scene  of  practice.  He  was  created 
Professor  of  the  Institutes  of  Medicine,  in  the  Medi- 
cal Faculty  of  Columbia  College,  and  upon  the  union 
of  that  Faculty  with  the  College  of  Physicians  and 
Surgeons,  he  was  appointed  Professor  of  Obstetrics 
and  the  Diseases  of  Women  and  Children.  He  died 
of  a pulmonary  disorder  in  the  island  of  St.  Croix, 
upon  the  day  of  his  landing,  March  5th,  1819. 

With  his  professional  erudition,  Dr.  Osborn  united 
great  literary  acquirements,  and  his  knowledge  of  books 
was  varied  and  extensive.  These  acquisitions  he  often 
displayed  in  his  course  of  public  instruction.  His  view 
of  the  Materia  Mediea  as  a science  was  equalled  by 
few,  and  his  knowledge  of  the  actual  medical  quali- 
ties of  the  native  productions  of  our  soil,  was  a sub- 
ject which  he  delighted  to  investigate,  and  in  his  prac- 
tice, and  by  his  instructions,  he  earnestly  enjoined  an 
acquaint  ance  with  these  important  remedial  agents. 

Dr.  Osborn  was  a man  of  much  more  science  and 
eminence  in  his  profession  than  either  his  father  or 
grandfather,  and  possessed  a very  fine  taste  for  poetry, 
belles  lettres,  and  painting.  While  he  was  quite  a 
young  man,  Mr.  Barlow  submitted  to  him  and  his 
friend,  the  late  Richard  Alsop,  Esq.  the  manuscript  of 
the  Vision  of  Columbus,  for  their  correction  and  revi- 
sion, previous  to  its  publication.  His  taste  in  painting 
was  highly  cultivated,  and  he  might  have  attained  to 
great  eminence  as  an  artist.” — Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

OSCE'DO.  A yawning. 

Oscheoce  le.  (From  oaxtov,  the  scrotum,  and 
KrjXr),  a tumour.)  1.  Any  tumour  of  the  scrotum. 

2.  A scrotal  hernia. 

O'SCHEON.  Ooxzov.  The  scrotum.  Galen  gives 
the  name  to  the  os  uteri. 

OSCHEO’PHYMA.  (From  ouxtov , the  scrotum, 
and  <f>\ i/jia,  a tumour.)  A swelling  of  the  scrotum. 

OSCILLATION.  Vibration.  See  Irritability. 

O'SCITANS.  (From  oscito,  to  gape.)  Yawning. 
Gaping. 

OSCITA'TIO.  (From  oscito,  to  gape.)  Yawning. 
Gaping. 

OSCULATO'RIUS.  (From  osculo , to  kiss : so  call- 
ed because  the  action  of  kissing  is  performed  by  it.) 
The  sphincter  muscle  of  the  lips. 

O'SCULUM.  (Diminutive  of  os , a mouth.)  A lit- 
tle mouth. 

OSMAZOME.  If  cold  water,  which  has  been  di- 
gested for  a few  hours  on  slices  of  raw  muscular  fibre, 
with  occasional  pressure,  be  evaporated,  filtered,  and 
then  treated  with  pure  alkohol,  a peculiar  animal  prin- 
ciple will  be  dissolved,  to  the  exclusion  of  the  salts. 
By  dissipating  the  alkohol  with  a gentle  heat,  the  os- 
raazonie  is  obtained.  It  has  a brownish-yellow  colour, 
and  the  taste  and  smell  of  soup.  Its  aqueous  solution 
affords  precipitates,  with  infusion  of  nut-galls,  nitrate 
of  mercury,  and  nitrate  and  acetate  of  lead. 

OSMIUM.  A new  metal  lately  discovered  by  Ten- 
nant among  platina,  and  so  called  by  him  from  the  pun- 
gent and  peculiar  smell  of  its  oxide. 

OSMUND.  See  Osmunda  regalis. 

OSMU'NDA.  (From  Osmund , who  first  used  it.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Cryptogamia ; 
Order,  Filices. 

Osmunda  regalis.  Filix  florida.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  osmund-royal.  Its  root  possesses  astrin- 
gent and  emraenagogue  virtues. 

O'SPHYS.  Ocrtpvs-  The  loins. 

Ossa  spongeosa.  See  Os  spongiosum. 

OSSI'CULUM.  A little  bone. 

Ossicula  auditus.  The  small  bones  of  the  inter- 
nal ear  are  four  in  number,  viz.  the  malleus,  incus, 
stapes,  and  os  orbiculare ; and  are  situated  in  the  cavity 
of  the  tympanum.  See  Malleus , Incus,  Stapes,  and 
Orbiculare  os. 

OSSIFICATION.  (Ossificatio ; from  os,  a bone, 
and  facio , to  make.)  See  Osteogeny. 

OSSI'FRAGA.  (From  os,  a bone,  and  frango , to 
break.)  A petrified  root,  called  the  bone-binder,  from 
its  supposed  virtues  in  uniting  fractured  bones. 

OSSI'FRAGUS.  See  Osteocolla. 

OSSI'VORUS.  (From  os,  a bone,  and  voro , to  de- 
vour.) Applied  to  a species  of  tumour  or  ulcer  which 
destroys  the  bone. 

HO 


Osta'gra.  (From  oartov,  a bone,  and  aypa,  a lay 
ing  hold  of.)  A forceps  to  take  out  bones  with. 

Ostei'tes.  (Fromos-£ov,  a bone.)  The  bone-binder. 
See  Osteocolla. 

OSTEOCO'LLA.  (From  og-eov,  a bone,  and  xoXAau, 
to  glue.)  Ossifraga;  Holosteus ; Osteites;  Amos- 
teus ; Osteolithos ; Stelochites.  Glue-bone,  stone,  or 
bone-binder.  A particular  carbonate  of  lime  found  in 
some  parts  of  Germany,  particularly  in  the  Marcln§  of 
Brandenburg,  and  in  other  countries.  It  is  met  with 
in  loose  sandy  grounds,  spreading  from  near  the  sur- 
face to  a considerable  depth,  into  a number  of  ramifi- 
cations like  the  roots  of  a tree.  It  is  of  a whitish  co- 
lour, soft  while  under  the  earth,  friable  when  dry, 
rough  on  the  surface,  for  the  most  part  either  hollow 
within,  or  filled  with  a solid  wood,  or  with  a powdery 
white  matter.  It  was  formerly  celebrated  for  pro- 
moting the  coalition  of  fractured  bones,  and  the  forma- 
tion of  callus,  which  virtues  are  not  attributed  to  it  in 
the  present  day. 

OSTEO'COPUS.  (From  o^eov,  a bone,  afid  kottos, 
uneasiness.)  A very  violent  fixed  pain  in  any  part  of 
the  bone. 

Osteoge'nica.  (From  os"£ov,  a bone,  and  yevvaw, 
to  beget.)  Medicines  which  promote  the  generation  of 
a callus. 

OSTEOGENY.  (Osteogenia ; from  os"£ov,  a bone, 
and  yevcia,  generation.)  The  growth  of  bones.  Bones 
are  either  formed  between  membranes,  or  in  the  sub- 
stance of  cartilage  ; and  the  bony  deposition  is  effected 
by  a determined  action  of  arteries.  The  secretion  of 
bone  takes  place  in  cartilage  in  the  long  bones,  as  those 
of  the  arm,  leg,  &c. ; and  between  two  layers  of  mem- 
brane, as  in  the  bones  of  the  skull,  where  true  cartilage 
is  never  seen.  Often  the  bony  matter  is  formed  in  dis- 
tinct bags,  and  there  it  grows  into  form,  as  in  the  teeth ; 
for  each  tooth  is  formed  in  its  little  bag,  which,  by  in 
jection,  can  be  filled  and  covered  with  vessels.  An 
artery  of  the  body  can  assume  this  action,  and  deposite 
bone,  which  is  formed  also  where  it  should  not  be,  in 
the  tendons  and  in  the  joints,  in  the  great  arteries  and 
in  the  valves,  in  the  flesh  of  the  heart  itself,  or  even  in 
the  soft  and  pulpy  substance  of  the  brain. 

Most  of  the  bones  in  the  foetus  are  merely  cartilage 
before  the  time  of  birth.  This  cartilage  is  never 
hardened  into  bone,  but  from  the  first  it  is  an  organized 
mass.  It  has  its  vessels,  which  are  at  first  transparent, 
but  which  soon  dilate  ; and  whenever  the  red  colour  of 
the  blood  begins  to  appear  in  them,  ossification  very 
quickly  succeeds,  the  arteries  being  so  far  enlarged  as 
to  carry  the  coarser  parts  of  the  blood.  The  first  mark 
of  ossification  is  an  artery  which  is  seen  running  into 
the  centre  of  the  jelly  which  is  formed.  Other  arteries 
soon  appear,  and  a net-work  of  vessels  is  formed,  and 
then  a centre  of  ossification  begins,  stretching  its  rays 
according  to  the  length  of  the  bone,  and  then  the  carti- 
lage begins  to  grow  opaque,  yellow,  brittle  : it  will  no 
longer  bend,  and  a bony  centre  may  easily  be  discover- 
ed. Other  points  of  ossification  are  successively  form- 
ed, preceded  by  the  appearance  of  arteries.  The  ossi- 
fication follows  the  vessels,  and  buries  and  hides  those 
vessels  by  which  it  is  formed.  The  vessels  advance 
towards  the  end  of  the  bone,  the  whole  body  of  the 
bone  becomes  opaque,  and  there  is  left  a small  vascu- 
lar circle  only  at  either  end.  The  heads  are  separated 
from  the  body  of  the  bone  by  a thin  cartilage,  and  the 
vessels  of  the  centre,  extending  still  towards  the  extre- 
mities of  the  bone,  perforate  the  cartilage,  pass  into  the 
head  of  the  bone,  and  then  its  ossification  also  begins, 
and  a small  nucleus  of  ossification  is  formed  in  its 
centre.  Thus  the  heads  and  the  body  are  at  first  dis- 
tinct bones,  formed  apart,  joined  by  a cartilage,  and 
not  united  till  the  age  of  fifteen  or  twenty  years.  Then 
the  deposition  of  bone  begins  ; and  while  the  bone  is 
laid  by  the  arteries,  the  cartilage  is  conveyed  away  by 
the  absorbing  vessels ; and  while  they  convey  away  the 
superfluous  cartilage,  they  model  the  bone  into  its  due 
form,  shape  out  its  cavities,  cancelli  and  holes,  remove 
the  thinner  parts  of  the  remaining  cartilage,  and  harden 
it  into  due  consistence.  The  earth  which  constitutes 
the  hardness  of  bone,  and  all  its  useful  properties,  is 
inorganized,  and  lies  in  the  interstices  of  bone,  where 
it  is  made  up  of  gelatinous  matter  to  give  it  consist- 
ence and  strength,  furnished  with  absorbents  to  keep 
it  in  health,  and  carry  off  its  wasted  parts;  and  per- 
vaded by  blood-vessels  to  supply  it  with  new  matter. 
During  all  the  process  of  ossification,  the  absorbent* 


OVA 


OVO 


proportion  their  action  to  the  stimulus  which  is  applied 
to  them:  they  carry  away  the  serous  fluid,  when  jelly 
is  to  take  its  place ; they  remove  the  jelly  as  the  bone 
is  laid;  they  continue  removing  the  bony  particles  also, 
which  (as  in  a circle)  the  arteries  continually  renew. 
This  renovation  and  change  of  parts  goes  on  even  in 
the  hardest  bones,  so  that  after  a bone  is  perfectly 
formed,  its  older  particles  are  continually  being  remov- 
ed, and  new  ones  are  deposited  in  their  place.  The 
bony  particles  are  so  deposited  in  the  flat  bones  of  the 
skull  as  to  present  a radiated  structure,  and  the  vacan- 
cies between  the  fibres  which  occasion  this  appearance, 
are  found  by  injection  to  be  chiefly  passages  for  blood- 
vessels. As  the  foetus  increases  in.  size,  the  osseous 
fibres  increase  in  number,  till  a lamina  is  produced  ; 
and  as  the  bone  continues  to  grow,  more  laminae  are 
added,  till  the  more  solid  part  of  a bone  is  formed. 
The  ossification  which  begins  in  cartilage  is  consider- 
ably later  than  that  which  has  its  origin  between  mem- 
branes. The  generality  of  bones  are  incomplete  until 
the  age  of  puberty,  or  between  the  fifteenth  and 
twentieth  years,  and  in  some  few  instances  not  until  a 
later  period.  The  small  bones  of  the  ear,  however, 
are  completely  formed  at  birth. 

OSTEOGRAPHY.  ( Osteographia ; from  og-eov,  a 
bone,  and  ypadw,  to  describe.)  The  description  of  the 
bones.  See  Bone. 

Osteoli'thos.  (From  o$eov,  a bone,  and  A iQos,  a 
stone.)  See  Osteocolla. 

OSTEOLOGY.  ( Osteologia ; from  o^eov,  a bone, 
and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  bones. 
See  Bone. 

OSTEOPCEDION.  (From  o^eov,  a bone,  and  zsais, 
vsaiSos,  an  infant.)  LithopcecLion.  A term  given  to 
the  mass  of  an  extra-uterine  foetus,  which  had  become 
osseous,  or  of  an  almost  stony  consistence. 

OSTHEXIA.  (From  og-wdris,  osseous  or  bony,  and 
e^is,  habit.)  The  name  in  Good’s  Nosology  of  a genus 
of  diseases.  Class,  Eccritica  ; Order,  Mesotica.  Os- 
thexy  or  ossific  diathesis.  It  has  two  species,  Osthexia 
infarciens ; impltxa. 

Ostia'rius.  (From  ostium,  a door.)  The  pylorus 
has  been  so  called. 

Osti'ola.  (Diminutive  of  ostium,  a door.)  The 
valves  or  gates  of  the  heart. 

OSTIUM.  A door  or  opening.  Applied  to  small 
foramina  or  openings. 

O'strea.  (From  og-paKov,  a shell.)  The  oyster. 
The  shell  of  this  fish  is  occasionally  used  medicinally ; 
its  virtues  are  similar  to  those  of  the  carbonate  of 
lime.  See  Creta. 

OSTRU'THIUM.  See  Imperatoria. 

OSY'RIS.  (Oovpn  of  Dioscorides,  which  he  de- 
scribes as  a small  shrub  with  numerous,  dark,  tough 
branches ; and  Professor  Martyn  conjectures  its  deri- 
vation from  ofof,  a branch.  Some  take  the  antirrhi- 
num linaria  for  the  true  Osyris.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Dia- 
na; Order,  Triandria. 

Osyris  alba.  Cas-sia  poetica  lobelli ; Cassia  lati- 
norum ; Cassia  lignea  monspeliensium ; Cassia  mons- 
peliensium.  Poet’s  cassia  or  gardrobe ; Poet’s  rose- 
mary. The  whole  shrub  is  astringent.  It  grows  in 
the  southern  parts  of  Europe. 

OTA'LGIA.  (From  ovs,  the  ear,  and  aXyoy,  pain,) 
The  earache. 

Otenchy'tes.  (From  wros,  the  genitive  of  ovs,  an 
ear,  and  tyxevw,  to  pour  in.)  A syringe  for  the  ears. 

Otho'nna.  (From  odovy.  lint : so  called  from  the 
softness  of  its  leaves.)  A species  of  celandine. 

O'tica.  (From  ovs,  the  ear.)  Medicines  against 
diseases  of  the  ear. 

Oti'tes.  (From  ovs,  the  ear.)  An  epithet  of  the 
little  finger,  because  it  is  commonly  made  use  of  in 
scratching  the  ear. 

OTITIS.  (From  ovs,  the  ear.)  Inflammation  of 
the  internal  ear.  It  is  known  by  pyrexia,  and  an  ex- 
cruciating and  throbbing  pain  in  the  internal  ear,  that, 
is  sometimes  attended  with  delirium. 

Otopla'tcs.  (From  ovs,  the  ear.)  A stinking 
ulcer  behind  the  ear. 

OTOPYO'SIS.  (From  ovs,  the  ear,  and7ruov,  pus.) 
A purulent  discharge  from  the  ear. 

OTORRHAS'A.  (From  ovs,  the  ear,  and  pea,  to 
flow.)  A discharge  from  the  ear. 

Ova'le  foramen.  See  Foramen  ovale. 

OYALIS.  Oval.  Some  parts  of  animals  and  ve- 


getables receive  this  name  from  being  of  this  shape; 
as  foramen  ovale,  centrum  ovale,  folium  ovale,  recep* 
taculum  ovale. 

OVARIAN.  Ovarial.  Belonging  to  the  ovarium/ 

OVA'RIUM.  (Diminutive  of  ovum,  an  egg.)  The 
ovaria  are  two  flat  oval  bodies,  about  one  inch  in 
length,  and  rather  more  than  half  in  breadth  and  thick- 
ness, suspended  in  the  broad  ligaments,  about  the  dis- 
tance of  one  inch  from  the  uterus  behind,  and  a little 
below  the  Fallopian  tubes.  To  the  ovaria,  according 
to  the  idea  of  their  structure  entertained  by  different 
anatomists,  various  uses  have  been  assigned,  or  the 
purpose  they  answer  has  been  differently  explained. 
Some  have  supposed  that  their  texture  was  glandular, 
and  that  they  secreted  a fluid  equivalent  to,  and  similar 
to  the  male  semen ; but  others,  .who  have  examined 
them  with  more  care,  assert,  that  they  are  ovaria  in 
the  literal  acceptation  of  the  term,  and  include  a num- 
ber of  vesicles,  or  ova,  to  the  amount  of  twenty-two 
of  different  sizes,  joined  to  the  internal  surface  of  the 
ovaria  by  cellular  threads  or  pedicles;  and  that  they 
contain  a fluid  which  has  the  appearance  of  thin 
lymph.  These  vesicles  are,  in  fact,  to  be  seen  in  the 
healthy  ovaria  of  every  young  woman.  They  differ 
very  much  in  their  number  in  different  ovaria,  but  are 
very  seldom  so  numerous  as  has  just  been  stated.  All 
have  agreed  that  the  ovaria  prepare  whatever  the  fe- 
male supplies  towards  the  formation  of  the  foetus;  and 
this  is  proved  by  the  operation  of  spaying,  which  con- 
sists in  the  extirpation  of  the  ovaria,  after  which  the 
animal  not  only  loses  the  power  of  conceiving,  but  de- 
sire is  for  ever  extinguished.  The  outer  coat  of  the 
ovaria,  together  with  that  of  the  uterus,  is  given  by 
the  peritoneum  ; and  whenever  an  ovum  is  passed  into 
the  Fallopian  tube,  a fissure  is  observed  at  the  part 
through  which  it  is  supposed  to  have  been  transferred. 
These  fissures  healing,  leave  small  longitudinal  cica- 
trices on  the  surface,  which  are  said  to  enable  us  to 
determine,  whenever  the  ovarium  is  examined,  the 
number  of  times  a woman  has  conceived.  The  cor- 
pora lutea  are  oblong  glandular  bodies  of  a yellowish 
colour,  found  in  the  ovaria  of  all  animals  when  preg- 
nant, and,  according  to  some,  when  they  are  salacious. 
They  are  said  to  be  calyces,  from  which  the  impreg- 
nated ovum  has  dropped  ; and  their  number  is  always 
in  proportion  to  the  number  of  conceptions  found  in 
the  uterus.  They  are  largest  and  most  conspicuous  in 
the  early  state  of  pregnancy,  and  remain  for  some  time 
after  delivery,  when  they  gradually  fade  and  wither 
till  they  disappear.  The  corpora  lutea  are  very  vascu- 
lar, except  at  their  centre,  which  is  whitish;  and  in 
the  middle  of  the  white  partis  a small  cavity,  from 
which  the  impregnated  ovum  is  thought  to  have  imme- 
diately proceeded.  The  ovaria  are  the  seat  of  a parti- 
cular kind  of  dropsy,  which  most  commonly  happens 
to  women  at  the  time  of  the  final  cessation  of  the 
menses,  though  not  unfrequently  at  a more  early  period 
of  life.  It  is  of  the  encysted  kind,  the  fluid  being 
sometimes  limpid  and  thin,  and  at  others  discoloured 
and  gelatinous.  In  some  cases  it  has  been  found  con- 
tained in  one  cyst,  often  in  several ; and  in  others  the 
whole  tumefaction  has  been  composed  of  hydatids  not 
larger  than  grapes.  The  ovaria  are  also  subject,  espe- 
cially a short  time  after  delivery,  to  inflammation,  ter- 
minating in  suppuration,  and  to  scirrhous  and  can- 
cerous diseases,  with  considerable  enlargement.  In  the 
former  state,  they  generally  adhere  to  some  adjoining 
part,  as  the  uterus,  rectum,  bladder,  or  external  inte- 
guments, and  the  matter  is  discharged  from  the  vagina 
by  stool,  by  urine,  or  by  an  external  abscess  of  the  in- 
teguments of  the  abdomen. 

OVATIJS.  Ovate.  Leaves,  petals,  seeds,  See.  are 
so  called  when  of  the  shape  of  an  egg  cut  lengthwise, 
the  base  being  rounded,  and  broader  than  the  extremity, 
a very  common  form  of  leaves ; as  in  Vinca  major, 
and  Urtica  pilulifera,  and  the  petals  of  the  Allium  fla- 
vum,  and  Narcissus  psuedo-narcissus ; the  receptacle 
of  the  Omphalea,  and  seeds  of  the  Q.uercus. 

OVIDUCT.  (OvidUctus ; from  ovum,  an  egg,  and 
ductus,  a canal.)  The  duct  or  canal  through  which 
the  ovum,  or  egg,  passes.  In  the  human  species,  the 
Fallopian  tube  is  so  called,  which  runs  from  the  ovary 
to  the  bottom  of  the  womb. 

OVIPAROUS.  (From  ovum,  an  egg,  and  pario , to 
bring  forth.)  Animals  which  exclude  their  young  in 
the  egg,  which  are  afterward  hatched. 

Ovo'rum  TESTiE.  Egg-shells.  A testaceous  absorbent 

141 


ovu 


ovu 


OYULUM.  A little  egg*  See  Ovum. 

O'VUM.  1.  An  egg.  See  Egg. 

2.  Tlie  vesicles  in  the  ovarium  of  females  are  called 
the  ova,  or  ovula.  When  fecundation  takes  place  in 
one  or  more  of  these,  they  pass,  after  a short  time, 
along  the  Fallopian  tube  into  the  uterus. 

“ Dev  elopement  of  the  ovum  in  the  uterus. — The 
ovum,  in  the  first  moments  of  its  abode  in  the  uterus, 
is  free  and  unattached;  its  volume  is  nearly  that 
which  it  had  in  quitting  the  ovarium ; but,  in  the 
course  of  the  second  month,  its  dimensions  increase,  it 
becomes  covered  with  filaments  of  about  a line  in 
length,  which  ramify  in  the  manner  of  blood-vessels, 
and  are  implanted  into  the  decidua.  In  the  third-month, 
they  are  seen  only  on  one  side  of  the  ovum,  tiie  others 
have  nearly  disappeared ; but  those  which  remain 
have  acquired  a greater  extent,  thickness,  and  consist- 
ence, and  are  more  deeply  implanted  into  the  decidu- 
ous membrane  ; taken  together  they  form  the  placenta. 
The  ovum,  in  the  rest  of  its  surface,  presents  only  a 
soft  flocculent  layer  called  decidua  reflex  a.  The  ovum 
continues  to  increase  until  the  end  of  pregnancy,  in 
which  its  volume  is  nearly  equal  to  that  of  the  uterus ; 
but  its  structure  suiters  important  changes  which  we 
will  examine. 

At  first  its  two  membranes  have  yielded  to  its  en- 
largement, while  becoming  thicker  or  more  resisting: 
the  exterior  is  called  chorion  ; the  other  amnion.  The 
liquid  contained  by  the  latter  augments  in  proportion 
to  the  volume  of  the  ovum.  In  the  second  month  of 
pregnancy,  there  exists  also  a certain  quantity  of  liquid 
between  the  chorion  and  amnion,  but  it  disappears 
during  the  third  month. 

Up  to  the  end  of  the  third  week,  the  ovum  presents 
nothing  indicative  of  the  presence  of  the  germ ; the 
contained  liquid  is  transparent,  and  partly  coagulable 
as  before.  At  this  period  there  is  seen,  on  the  side 
where  the  ovum  adheres  to  the  uterus,  something 
slightly  opaque,  gelatinous,  all  the  parts  of  which  ap- 
ear  homogeneous ; in  a short  time,  certain  points 
ecome  opaque,  two  distinct  vesicles  are  formed,  nearly 
equal  in  volume,  and  united  by  a pedicle,  one  of  which 
adheres  to  the  amnion  by  a small  filament.  Almost  at 
the  same  time  a red  spot  is  seen  in  the  midst  of  this 
last,  from  which  yellowish  filaments  are  seen  to  take 
their  rise:  this  is  the  heart,  and  the  principal  sangui- 
ferous vessels.  At  the  beginning  of  the  second  month, 
the  head  is  very  visible,  the  eyes  form  two  black  points, 
very  large  in  proportion  to  the  volume  of  the  head; 
small  openings  indicate  the  place  of  the  ears  and  nos- 
trils; the  mouth,  at  first  very  large,  is  contracted  after- 
ward by  the  developement  of  the  lips,  which  happens 
about  the  sixtieth  day,  with  that  of  the  ears,  nose, 
extremities,  &c. 

The  developement  of  all  the  principal  organs  happens 
successively  until  about  the  middle  of  the  fourth 
month  ; then  the  state  of  the  embryo  ceases,  and  that 
of  the  foetus  begins,  which  is  continued  till  the  termi- 
nation of  pregnancy.  All  the  parts  increase  with  more 
or  less  rapidity  during  this  time,  and  draw  towards  the 
form  which  they  must  present  after  birth.  Before  the 
sixth  month,  the  lungs  are  very  small,  the  heart  large,  but 
its  four  cavities  are  confounded,  or  at  least  difficult  to 
distinguish ; the  liver  is  large,  and  occupies  a great  part 
of  the  abdomen  ; the  gall-bladder  is  not  full  of  bile,  but 
of  a colourless  fluid  not  bitter  : the  small  intestine,  in 
its  lower  part,  contains  a yellowish  matter,  in  small 
quantity,  called  meconium;  the  testicles  are  placed- 
upon  the  sides  of  the  superior  lumbar  vertebra} ; the 
ovaria  occupy  the  same  position.  At  the  end  of  the 
seventh  month,  the  lungs  assume  a reddish  tint 
which  they  had  not  before  ; the  cavities  of  the  heart 
become  distinct ; the  liver  preserves  its  large  dimen- 
sions, but  removes  a little  from  the  umbilicus;  the  bile 
shows  itself  in  the  gall-bladder ; the  meconium  is  more 
abundant,  and  descends  lower  in  the  great  intestine  ; 
the  ovaria  tend  to  the  pelvis,  the  testicles  are  directed 
to  the  inguinal  rings.  At  this,  period  the  foetus  is  ca- 
pable of  life,  that  is,  it  could  live  and  breathe  if  ex- 
pelled from  the  uterus.  Every  thing  becomes  more 

erfect  in  the  eighth  and  ninth  months.  We  cannot 

ere  follow  the  interesting  details  of  this  increase  of 
the  organs ; they  belong  to  anatomy : we  shall  consider 
the  physiological  phenomena  that  relate  to  them. 

Functions  of  the  ovum,  and  of  the  foetus. — The  ovum 
begins  to  grow  as  soon  as  it  arrives  in  the  cavity  of  the 
uterus;  its  surface  is  covered  with  asperities  that  are 
142 


quickly  transformed  into  sanguiferous  vessels : there  is 
then  life  in  the  ovum.  But  we  have  no  idea  of  this 
mode  of  existence ; probably  the  surface  of  the  ovum 
absorbs  the  fluids  with  which  it  is  in  contact,  and  these, 
after  having  undergone  a particular  elaboration  by  the 
membranes,  are  afterward  poured  into  the  cavity  of  the 
amnion. 

What  wras  the  germ  before  its  appearance?  Did  it 
exist,  or  was  it  formed  at  that  instant  ? Does  the  little 
almost  opaque  mass  that  composes  it  contain  the  rudi- 
ments of  all  the  organs  of  the  foetus  and  the  adult,  or 
are  these  created  the  instant  they  begin  to  show  them- 
selves? What  can  be  the  nature  of  a nutrition  so 
complicated,  so  important,  performed  without  vessels, 
nerves,  or  apparent  circulation  ? How  does  the  heart 
move  before  the  appearance  of  the  nervous  system  ? 
Whence  comes  the  yellow  blood  that  it  contains  at 
first?  &c.  &.c.  No  reply  can  be  given  to  any  of  these 
questions  in  the  present  state  of  science. 

We  know  very  little  of  what  happens  in  the  embryo, 
whose  organs  are  only  yet  rudely  delineated;  never- 
theless, there  is  a kind  of  circulation  recognised.  The 
heart  sends  blood  into  the  large  vessels,  and  into  the  ru  • 
dimentary  placenta ; probably  blood  returns  to  the 
heart  by  veins,  &.c. — But  when  the  new  being  lias 
niched  the  foetal  state,  as  most  of  the  organs  are  very 
apparent,  then  it  is  possible  to  recognise  some  of  the 
functions  peculiar  to  that  state. 

The  circulation  is  the  best  known  of  the  functions 
of  the  foetus:  it  is  more  complicated  than  that  of  the 
adult,  and  is  performed  in  a manner  quite  different 

In  the  first  place,  it  cannot  be  divided  into  venous  and 
arterial ; for  the  foetal  blood  has  sensibly  eveiy  where 
the  same  appearance,  that  is,  a brownish  red  tint : in 
other  respects  it  is  much  the  same  as  the  blood  of  the 
adult ; it  coagulates,  separates  into  clot,  and  serum,  &c 
I do  not  know  why  some  learned  chemists  have  be- 
lieved that  it  does  not  contain  fibrin. 

The  placenta  is  the  most  singular  and  one  of  the 
most  important  organs  of  the  circulation  of  the  foetus  • 
it  succeeds  to  those  filaments  which  cover  the  ovum 
during  the  first  months  of  pregnancy.  Very  small  at 
first,  it  soon  acquires  a considerable  size.  It  adheres, 
by  its  exterior  surface,  to  the  uterus,  presents  irregular 
furrows,  which  indicate  its  division  into  several  lobes 
or  cotyledons , the  number  and  form  of  which  are  not 
determined.  Its  foetal  surface  is  covered  by  the  cho- 
rion and  amnion,  except  at  its  centre,  into  w'hieh  the 
umbilical  cord  is  inserted.  Its  parenchyma  is  formed 
of  sanguiferous  vessels,  divided  and  subdivided.  They 
belong  to  the  divisions  of  the  umbilical  arteries,  and  to 
the  radicles  of  the  vein  of  the  same  name.  The  ves- 
sels of  one  lobe  do  not  communicate  with  those  of  the 
adjoining  lobes ; but  those  of  the  same  cotyledon  anas- 
tomose frequently,  for  nothing  is  more  easy  than  to 
make  injections  pass  from  one  to  another. 

The  umbilical  cord  extends  from  near  the  centre  of 
the  placenta  to  the  umbilicus  of  the  child ; its  length  is 
often  near  two  feet;  it  is  formed  by  the  two  umbilical 
arteries  and  the  vein,  connected  by  a very  close  cellular 
tissue,  and  is  covered  by  the  two  membranes  of  the 
ovum. 

In  the  first  months  of  pregnancy,  a vesicle,  which 
receives  small  vessels,  being  a prolongation  of  the  me- 
senteric artery  and  tlie  meseraic  vein,  is  found  in  the 
body  of  the  cord,  between  the  chorion  and  the  amnion, 
near  the  umbilicus.  This  vesicle  is  not  analagous  to 
the  allantoid;  it  represents  the  membranes  of  the  yelk 
of  birds  and  reptiles,  and  the  umbilical  vesicle  of  tlie 
mammalia.  It  contains  a yellowish  fluid  which  seems 
to  be  absorbed  by  the  veins  of  its  parietes. 

The  umbilical  vein,  arising  from  the  placenta,  and 
then  arriving  at  the  umbilicus,  enters  the  abdomen,  and 
reaches  the  inferior  surface  of  the  liver ; there  it  di- 
vides into  twro  large  branches,  one  of  which  is  distri- 
buted to  the  liver,  along  with  the  vena  porta , while  the 
other  scon  terminates  in  the  vena  cava  under  the  name 
of  ductus  venosus.  This  vein  has  two  valves,  one  at 
the  place  of  its  bifurcation,  and  the  other  at  the  junc- 
tion with  tlie  vena  cava. 

The  heart  and  the  large  vessels  of  the  foetus  capable 
of  life,  are  very  different  from  what  they  become  after 
birth  ; the  valve  of  the  vena  cava  is  large  ; the  parti- 
tion of  the  auricles  presents  a large  opening  provided 
with  a semilunar  valve,  called  foramen  ovale.  The 
pulmonary  artery,  after  having  sent  two  small  branches 
to  the  lungs,  terminates  almost  immediately  in  the 


■ovu 


OXA 


aorta,  in  the  eoncave  aspect  of  the  arch ; it  is  called  in 
this  place  ductus  arteriosus. 

The  last  character  proper  to  the  circulating  organs 
of  the  foetus,  is  the  existence  of  the  umbilical  arteries , 
which  arise  from  the  internal  iliacs,  are  directed  over 
the  sides  of  the  bladder,  attach  themselves  to  the  ura- 
chus, pass  out  of  the  abdomen  by  the  umbilicus,  and  go 
to  the  placenta,  where  they  are  distributed  as  has  been 
mentioned  above. 

According  to  this  disposition  of  the  circulating  ap- 
paratus of  the  foetus,  it  is  evident  that  the  motion  of 
the  blood  ought  to  be  different  in  it  from  that  in  the 
adult.  If  we  suppose  that  the  blood  sets  out  from  the 
placenta,  it  evidently  passes  through  the  umbilical  vein 
as  far  as  the  liver ; there,  one  part  of  the  blood  passes 
into  the  liver,  and  the  other  into  the  vena  cava : these 
two  directions  carry  it  to  the.  heart  by  the  inferior  vena 
cava;  being  arrived  at  this  organ,  it  penetrates  into  the 
right  auricle,  and  into  the  left  by  the  foramen  ovale,  at 
the  instant  in  which  the  auricles  are  dilated.  At  this 
instant,  the  blood  of  the  inferior  vena  cava  is  inevita- 
bly mixed  with  that  of  the  superior.  How,  indeed, 
could  two  liquids  of  the  same  nature,  or  nearly  so,  re- 
main isolated  in  a cavity  in  which  they  arrive  at  the 
same  time,  and  which  contracts  to  expel  them.  I am 
not  ignorant  that  Sebatier,  in  his  excellent  Treatise  on 
the  Circulation  of  the  Fce.tus , has  maintained  the  con- 
trary, but  his  arguments  do  not  change  my  opinion  in 
this  respect.  However  it  may  be,  the  contraction  of 
the  auricle  succeeds  their  dilatation;  the  blood  is 
thrown  into  the  two  ventricles  the  instant  they  dilate ; 
these,  in  their  turn,  contract,  ami  drive  out  the  blood, 
the  left  into  the  aorta,  and  the  right  into  the  pulmonary 
artery;  but  as  this  artery  terminates  in  the  aorta,  it  is 
clear  that  all  the  blood  of  the  two  ventricles  passes  into 
the  aorta,  except  a very  small  portion  that  goes  to  the 
lungs.  Under  the  influence  of  these  two  agents  of 
impulsion,  the*  blood  is  made  to  flow  through  all  the 
divisions  of  the  aorta,  and  returns  to  the  heart  by  the 
venae  cavae.  Lastly,  it  is  carried  to  the  placenta  by  the 
umbilical  arteries,  and  returns  to  the  foetus  by  the  vein 
of  the  chord. 

It  is  easy  to  conceive  the  use  of  the  foramen  ovale, 
and  the  ductus  arteriosus:  the  left  auricle,  receiving 
little  or  no  blood  from  the  lungs,  could  not  furnish  any 
to  the  left  ventricle  if  it  did  not  receive  it  from  the 
opening  in  the  partition  of  the  auricles.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  lungs  have  no  functions  to  fulfil,  if  all  the 
blood  of  the  pulmonary  artery  were  distributed  in  them, 
the  impulsive  force  of  the  right  ventricle  would  have 
been  vainly  consumed ; while,  by  means  of  the  ductus 
arteriosus,  the  force  of  both  ventricles  is  employed  to 
move  the  blood  of  the  aorta;  without  the  joint  action 
of  both  ventricles,  probably  the  blood  could  not  have 
reached  the  placenta,  and  returned  again  to  the  heart. 

The  motions  of  the  heart  are  very  rapid  in  the  ftetus  ; 
they  generally  exceed  120  in  a minute : the  circulation 
possesses  necessarily  a proportionate  rapidity. 

A delicate  question  now  presents  itself  for  examina- 
tion. What  are  the  relations  of  the  circulation  of  the 
mother  with  that  of  the  foetus  1 In  order  to  arrive  at 
some  precise  notion  on  this  poin.t,  the  mode  of  junction 
of  the  uterus  and  placenta  must  first  be  examined. 

Anatomists  differ  in  this  respect.  It  was  long  be- 
lieved that  the  uterine  arteries  anastomosed  directly 
with  the  radicles  of  the  umbilical  vein,  and  that  the 
last  divisions  of  the  arteries  of  the  placenta  opened  into 
the  veins  of  the  uterus ; but  the  acknowledged  impos- 
sibility of  making  matters  injected  into  the  uterine 
veins  pass  into  the  umbilical  veins,  and  reciprocally  to 
cause  liquid  matters  injected  into  the  umbilical  arte- 
ries to  reach  the  veins  of  the  uterus,  caused  this  idea 
to  be  renounced.  It  is  at  present  generally  admitted, 
that  the  vessels  of  the  placenta  and  those  of  the  uterus 
do  not  anastomose. 

Notwithstanding  the  high  authority'of  Boerhaave,  it 
cannot  be  admitted  that  the  foetus  continually  swallows 
the  waters  of  the  amnion,  and  digests  it  for  its  nourish- 
ment. Its  stomach,  indeed,  contains  a viscid  matter  in 
considerable  quantity  : but  it  has  no  resemblance  to  the 
liquor  amnii ; it  is  very  acid  and  gelatinous;  towards 
the  pylorus,  it  is  somewhat  gray,  and  opaque  ; it  ap- 
pears to  be  converted  into  chyme  in  the  stomach,  in 
order  to  pass  into  the  small  intestine,  where,  after  hav- 
ing been  acted  upon  by  the  bile,  and  perhaps  by  the 
pancreatic  juice,  it  furnishes  a peculiar  chyle.  The 
remainder  descends  afterward  into  the  lar  e intestine, 


where  it  forms  the  meconium,  which  is  ’evidently  the 
result  of  digestion  during  gestation.  Whence  does  the 
digested  matter  come  1 It  is  probably  secreted  by  the 
stomach  itself,  or  descends  from  the  oesophagus;  there 
is  nothing,  however,  to  prevent  the  foetus  from  swal- 
lowing in  certain  cases,  a few  mouthfuls  of  the  liquor 
amnii ; and  this  seems  to  be  proved  by  certain  hairs, 
like  those  of  the  skin,  being  found  in  the  meconium. 
It  is  important  to  remark,  that  the  meconium  is  a sub- 
stance containing  very  little  azote.  Nothing  is  yet 
known  regarding  the  use  of  this  digestion  of  the  foetus; 
it  is  probably  not  essential  to  its  growth,  since  infants 
have  been  born  without  a stomach,  or  any  thing  similar. 
Some  persons  say  they  have  seen  chyle  in  the  thoracic 
duct  of  the  former. 

Exhalations  seem  to  take  place  in  the  foetus ; for  all 
its  surfaces  are  lubricated  nearly  in  the  same  manner 
as  afterward:  fat  is  in  abundance;  the  humours  of 
the  eye  exist : cutaneous  transpiration  very  probably 
takes  place  also,  and  mixes  continually  with  the  liquor 
amnii.  With  regard  to  this  last  liquor,  it  is  difficult  to 
say  whence  it  derives  its  origin  ; no  sanguiterous  ves- 
sels appear  to  be  directed  to  the  amnion,  and  it  is  never- 
theless probable  that  this  membrane  is  its  secreting  organ. 

The  cutaneous  and  mucous  follicles  are  developed, 
and  seem  to  possess  an  energetic  action,  especially  from 
the  seventh  month ; the  skin  is  then  covered  by  a pretty 
thick  layer  of  fatty  matter,  secreted  by  the  follicles: 
several  authors  have  improperly  considered  it  as  a de- 
posite  of  the  liquor  amnii.  The  mucus  is  also  abundant 
in  the  last  two  months  of  gestation. 

All  the  glands  employed  indigestion  have  a'consider 
able  volume,  and  seem  to  possess  some  activity;  the 
action  of  the  others  is  little  known.  It  is  not  known, 
for  example,  whether  the  kidneys  form  urine,  or 
whether  this  fluid  is  injected  by  the  urethra  into  the 
cavity  of -the  amnion.  The  testicles  and  mammae  seem 
to  form  a fluid  that  resembles  neither  milk  nor  semen, 
and  which  is  found  in  the  vesiculm  seminales  and  lac- 
tiferous canals. 

What  can  be  said  about  the  nutrition  of  the  foetus  ? 
Physiological  works  contain  only  vague  conjectures  on 
this  point;  it  appears  certain  that  the  placenta  draws 
from  the  mother  the  materials  necessary  for  the  deve- 
lopementof  the  organs,  but  what  these  materials  are,  or 
how  they  are  directed,  we  do  not  know.” — Magendie's 
Physiology. 

Ovum  philosophicum.  Ovum  chymicum.  A glass 
body,  round  like  an  egg. 

Ovum  ruffum.  An  obsolete  alchemistic  term  used 
in  the  transmutation  of  metals. 

Ox-eye-daisy.  See  Chrysanthemum  leucanthemum. 
Ox's  tongue.  See  Picris  echiodes. 

OXALATE.  Oxalas.  A salt  formed  by  the  com- 
bination of  the  oxalic  acid  with  a salifiable  basis;  thus, 
oxalate  of  ammonia. 

OXALIC  ACID.  Acidum  oxalicum.  “ This  acid, 
which  abounds  in  wood  sorrel,  and  which,  combined 
with  a small  portion  of  potassa,  as  it  exists  in  that 
plant,  has  been  sold  under  the  name  of  salt  of  lemons , 
to  be  used  as  a substitute  for  the*  juice  of  that  fruit, 
particularly  for  discharging  ink-spots  and  iron  moulds, 
was  long  supposed  to  be  analagous  to  that  of  tartar. 
In  the  year  1776,  however,  Bergman  discovered  that  a 
powerful  acid  might  be  extracted  from  sugar  by  means 
of  the  nitric  ; and  a few  years  afterward  Scheele  found 
this  to  be  identical  with  the  acid  existing  naturally  in 
sorrel.  Hence  the  acid  began  to  be  distinguished  by 
the  name  of  saccharine , but  has  since  been  known  in 
the  new  nomenclature  by  that  of  oxalic. 

It  may  be  obtained,  readily  and  economically,  from 
sugar  in  the  following  way : to  six  ounces  of  nitric 
acid  in  a stoppered  retort,  to  which  a large  receiver  is 
luted,  add,  by  degrees,  one  ounce  of  lump  sugar  coarsely 
powdered.  A gentle  heat  may  be  applied  during  the 
solution,  and  nitric  oxide  will  be  evolved  in  abun- 
dance. When  the  whole  of  the  sugar  is  dissolved, 
distil  off  a part  of  the  acid,  till  what  remains  in  the 
retort  has  a syrupy  consistence,  and  this  will  form 
regular  crystals,  amounting  to  58  parts  from  100  of 
sugar.  These  crystals  must  be  dissolved  in  water,  re- 
crystallized, and  dried  on  blotting  paper. 

Oxalic  acid  crystallizes  in  quadrilateral  prisms,  the 
sides  of  which  are  alternately  broad  and  narrow,  and 
summits  dihedral ; or,  if  crystallized  rapidly,  in  small 
irregular  needles.  They  are  efflorescent  in  dry  air, 
but  attract  a little  humidity  if  it  be  damp ; are  soluble 
143 


OXA 


OXY 


In  one  part  of  hot  and  two  of  cold  water;  and  are  de- 
composable by  a red  heat,  leaving  a small  quantity  of 
coaly  residuum.  100  parts  of  alkohol  take  up  near 
56  at  a boiling  heat,  but  not  above  40  cold.  Their 
acidity  is  so  great,  that  when  dissolved  in  3600  times  their 
weight  of  water,  the  solution  reddens  litmus  paper,  and 
is  perceptibly  acid  to  the  taste. 

The  oxalic  acid  is  a good  test  for  detecting  lime, 
which  it  separates  from  ail  the  other  acids,  unless  they 
are  present  in  excess.  It  has  likewise  a greater  affinity 
for  lime  than  for  any  other  of  the  bases,  and  forms 
with  it  a pulverulent,  insoluble  salt,  not  decomposable 
except  by  lire,  and  turning  syrup  of  violets  green. 

Oxalic  acid  acts  as  a violent  poison  when  swallowed 
in  the  quantity  of  2 or  3 drachms ; and  several  fatal 
accidents  have  lately  occurred  in  London,  in  conse- 
quence of  its  being  improperly  sold  instead  of  Epsom 
salts.  Its  vulgar  name  of  salts,  under  which  the  acid 
is  bought  for  the  purpose  of  whitening  boot-tops,  occa- 
sion these  lamentable  mistakes.  But  the  powerfully 
acid  taste  of  the  latter  substance,  joined  to  its  prismatic 
or  needle-tormed  crystallization,  are  sufficient  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  every  thing  else.  The  immediate  re- 
jection from  the  stomach  of  this  acid  by  an  emetic, 
aided  by  copious  draughts  of  warm  water  containing 
bicarbonate  of  potassa,  or  soda,  chalk,  or  carbonate  of 
magnesia,  are  the  proper  remedies. 

With  barytes  it  forms  an  insoluble  salt;  but  this  salt 
will  dissolve  in  water  acidulated  with  oxalic  acid,  and 
afford  angular  crystals.  If,  however,  we  attempt  to 
dissolve  these  crystals  in  boiling  water,  the  excess  of 
acid  will  unite  with  the  water,  and  leave  the  oxalate, 
which  will  be  precipitated. 

The  oxalate  of  stronlian  too  is  a nearly  insoluble 
compound. 

Oxalate  of  magnesia  too  is  insoluble,  unless  the  acid 
be  in  excess. 

The  oxalate  of  potassa  exists  in  two  states,  that  of  a 
neutral  salt,  and  that  of  an  acidule.  The  latter  is 
generally  obtained  from  the  juice  of  the  leaves  of  the 
oxalis  acetosella , wood-sorrel,  or  rumexacelosa , com- 
mon sorrel.  The  expressed  juice,  being  diluted  with 
water,  should  be  set  by  for  a few  days,  till  the  feculent 
parts  have  subsided,  and  the  supernatant  fluid  is  be- 
come clear ; or  it  may  be  clarified,  when  elpressed, 
with  the  whites  of  eggs.  It  is  then  to  be  strained  off, 
evaporated  to  a pellicle,  and  set  in  a cool  place  to  crys- 
tallize. The  first  product  of  crystals  being  taken  out, 
the  liquor  may  be  further  evaporated,  and  crystallized ; 
and  the  same  process  repeated  till  no  more  can  be  ob- 
tained. In  this  way  Schlereth  informs  us  about  nine 
drachms  of  crystals  may  be  obtained  from  two  pounds 
of  juice,  which  are  generally  afforded  by  ten  pounds  of 
wood-sorrel.  Savary,  however,  says,  that  ten  parts  of 
wood-sorrel  in  full  vegetation  yield  five  parts  of  juice, 
which  give  little  more  than  a two-hundredth  of  tole- 
rably pure  salt.  He  boiled  down  the  juice,  however,  in 
the  first  instance,  without  clarifying  it;  and  was 
obliged  repeatedly  to  dissolve  and  recrystallize  the  salt 
to  obtain  it  white. 

This  salt  is  in  small,  white,  needley,  or  lamellar 
crystals,  not  alterable  in  the  air.  It  unites  with  barytes, 
magnesia,  soda,  ammonia,  and  most  of  the  metallic 
oxides,  into  triple  salts.  Yet  its  solution  precipitates 
the  nitric  solutions  of  mercury  and  silver  in  the  state  of 
insoluble  oxalates  of  these  metals,  the  nitric  acid  in 
this  case  combining  with  the  potassa.  It  attacks  iron, 
lead,  tin,  zinc,  and  antimony. 

This  salt,  besides  its  use  in  taking  out  ink-spots,  and 
as  a test  of  lime,  forms  with  sugar  and  water  a pleasant, 
cooling  beverage ; and,  according  to  Berthollet,  it  pos- 
sesses considerable  powers  as  an  antiseptic. 

The  neutral  oxalate  of  potassa  is  very  soluble,  and 
assumes  a gelatinous  form,  but  may  be  brought  to  - 
crystallize  in  hexahedral  prisms  with  dihedral  summits, 
by  adding  more  potassa  to  the  liquor  than  is  sufficient 
to  saturate  the  acid. 

Oxalate  of  soda  likewise  exists  in  two  different 
states,  those  of  an  acidulous  and  a neutral  salt,  which 
in  their  properties  are  analogous  to  those  of  potassa. 

The  acidulous  oxalate  of  ammonia  is  crystallizable, 
not  very  soluble,  and  capable,  like  the  preceding  aci- 
difies, of  combining  with  other  bases,  so  as  to  form 
triple  salts.  But  if  the  acid  be  saturated  with  ammonia, 
we  obtain  a neutral  oxalate,  which  on  evaporation 
yields  very  fine  crystals  in  tetrahedral  prisms  with  di- 
hedral summits,  one  of  the  planes  of  which  cuts  off 


three  sides  of  the  prism.  This  salt  is  decomposable  by 
fire,  which  raises  from  it  carbonate  of  ammonia,  and 
leaves  only  some  slight  traces  of  a coaly  residuum. 
Lime,  barytes,  and  strontian  unite  with  its  acid,  and 
the  ammonia  flies  off  in  the  form  of  gas 

The  oxalic  acid  readily  dissolves  alumina , and  the 
solution  gives,  on  evaporation,  a yellowish  transparent 
mass,  sweet  and  a little  astringent  to  the  taste,  deli- 
quescent, and  reddening  tincture  of  litmus,  but  not 
syrup  of  violets.  This  salt  swells  up  in  the  fire,  loses 
its  acid,  and  leaves  the  alumina  a little  coloured.” 

OX'ALIS.  (From  o% us,  sharp  : so  called  from  the 
sharpness  of  its  juice.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Decandria;  Order, 
Pentagynia.  Wood-sorrel. 

Oxalis  acetosella.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
wood-sorrel.  Lujula;  Alleluja.  Oxalis— foliis  ter- 
natis , scapo  unifioro , flore  albo , capsulis  pentagonis 
elasticis,radicesquamoso-articulata,o(  Linnaeus.  This 
plant  grows  wild  in  the  woods,  and  flowers  in  April 
and  May.  The  leaves  are  shaped  like  a heart,  standing 
three  together  on  one  stalk.  The  acetosella  is  totally 
inodorous,  but  has  a grateful  acid  taste,  on  which  ac- 
count it  is  used  in  salads.  Its  taste  is  more  agreeable 
than  the  common  sorrel,  and  approaches  nearly  to  that 
of  the  juice  of  lemons,  or  the  acid  of  tartar,  with  which 
it  corresponds  in  a great  measure  in  its  medical  effects, 
being  esteemed  refrigerant,  antiscorbutic,  and  diuretic. 
It  is  recommended  by  Bergius,  in  inflammatory,  bi- 
lious, and  putrid  fevers.  The  principal  use,  however, 
of  the  acetosella,  is  to  allay  inordinate  heat,  and  to 
quench  thirst;  for  this  purpose,  a pleasant  whey  may 
be  formed  by  boiling  the  plant  in  milk,  which  under 
certain  circumstances  may  be  preferable  to  the  con- 
serve directed  by  the  London  College,  though  an  ex- 
tremely grateful  and  useful  medicine.  Many  have 
employed  the  root  of  Lujula,  probably  on  account  of 
its  beautiful  red  colour  rather  than  for  its  superior  effi- 
cacy. A salt  is  prepared  from  this  plant,  known  by  the 
name  of  essential  salt  of  lemons,  which  is  an  acidulous 
oxalate  of  potassa,  and  commonly  used  for  taking  ink- 
stains  out  of  linen.  What  is  sold  under  the  name  of 
essential  salt  of  lemons  in  this  country,  is  said  by  some 
to  consist  of  cream  of  tartar,  with  the  addition  of  a 
small  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid.  The  leaves  of  wood- 
sorrel  when  employed  externally  in  the  form  of  poul- 
tices, are  powerful  suppurants,  particularly  in  indolent 
scrofulous  humours. 

Oxa'lme.  (From  0^115,  sharp,  and  oXj,  salt)  A 
mixtqre  of  vinegar  and  salt. 

Oxid.  See  Oxide. 

OXIDATION.  The  process  of  converting  metals 
and  other  substances  into  oxides,  by  combining  with 
them  a certain  portion  of  oxygen.  It  differs  from  aci- 
dification in  the  addition  of  oxygen  not  being  sufficient 
to  form  an  acid  with  the  substance  oxided. 

OXIDE.  ( Oxydum , i,  n. ; formed  of  oxygen,  with 
the  terminal  ide.  See  Ide.)  Oxyd.  Oxid.  Oxyde.  A 
substance  combined  with  oxygen  without  being  in  the 
state  of  an  acid.  Many  substances  are  susceptible  of 
several  stages  of  oxidizement,  on  which  account  che- 
mists have  employed  various  terms  to  express  the 
characteristic  distinctions  of  the  several  oxides.  The 
specific  name  is  often  derived  from  some  external  cha- 
racter, chiefly  the  colour ; thus  we  have  the  black  and 
red  oxides  of  iron,  and  of  mercury  : the  white  oxide  of 
zinc : but  in  most  instances  the  denominations  proposed 
by  Dr.  Thompson  are  adopted.  When  there  are  se- 
veral oxides  of  the  same  substance,  he  proposes  the 
terms  protoxyde , deutoxyde , tritoxyde , signifying  the 
first,  second,  and  third  stage  of  oxidizement.  Or  if  two 
oxides  only  are  known,  he  proposes  the  appellation  of 
protoxyde  for  that  at  the  minimum,  and  of  peroxyde 
for  that  at  the  maximum  of  oxidatiou.  The  compounds 
of  oxides  and  water  in  which  the  water  exists  in  a con- 
densed state,  are  termed  hydrates , or  hydroxures. 

Oxide  of  carbon , gaseous.  See  Carbon , gaseous  ox- 
ide of. 

Oxide , nitric.  See  Nitrogen. 

Oxide , nitrous.  See  Nitrogen* 

OXYCA'NTHA.  (From  sharp,  and  aicavOa,  a 
thorn : so  called  from  the  acidity  of  its  fruit.)  The 
barberry. 

Oxycantha  galeni.  See  Berberis. 

OXYCE'DRUS.  (From  ofv,  acutely,  and  ucSpof,  a 
cedar:  so  called  from  the  sharp  termination  of  ita 
leaves.)  1.  A kind  of  cedar. 


OXY 


OXY 


2.  Spanish  juniper,  a species  of  juniperus. 

OXYCO'CCOS.  (From  o£us,  acid,  and  kokkoSi  a 
berry:  so  named  from  its  acidity.)  See  Vaccinium 
oxycoccos. 

OXY'CRATUM.  (From  oipif,  acid,  and  Kepavvvpi, 
to  mix.)  Oxycrates.  Vinegar  mixed  with  such  a por- 
tion of  water  as  is  required,  and  rendered  still  milder 
by  the  addition  of  a little  honey. 

Oxycro'ceum  emplastrum.  (From  o£«s,  acid,  and 
KpoKoSi  crocus , saffron.)  A plaster  in  which  there  is 
much  saffron,  but  no  vinegar  necessary,  unless  in  dis- 
solving some  gums. 

Ozyd.  See  Oxide. 

Oxyde.  See  Oxide. 

Oxyde'rcica.  (From  ojjus,  acute,  and  SepKio,  to  see.) 
Medicines  which  sharpen  the  sight. 

OXYDULE.  Synonymous  with  protoxide. 

O'XYDUM.  (So  called  from  oxygen,  which  enters 
into  its  composition.)  See  Oxide. 

Oxydum  antimonii.  See  Antimonii  oxydum. 

Oxydum  arsenici  album.  See  Arsenic. 

Oxydum  cupri  viride  acetatum.  See  Verdigris. 

Oxydum  ferri  luteum.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

Oxydum  ferri  nigrum.  Black  oxide  of  iron.  The 
scales  which  fall  from  iron,  when  heated,  consist  of 
iron  combined  with  oxygen.  These  have  been  em- 
ployed medicinally,  producing  the  general  effects  of 
chalybeates,  but  not  very  powerfully. 

Oxydum  ferri  rubrum.  Red  oxide  of  iron.  In  this 
the  metal  is  more  highly  oxidized  than  in  the  black.  It 
may  be  formed  by  long  continued  exposure  to  heat  and 
air.  Its  properties  in  medicine  are  similar  to  other 
preparations  of  iron.  It  is  frequently  given  internally. 

Oxydum  hydrargyri  cinereum.  See  Hydrargyri 
oxydum  cinereum. 

Oxydum  hydrargyri  nigrum.  See  Hydrargyri 
oxydum  cinereum. 

Oxydum  hydrargyri  rubrum.  See  Hydrargyri 
oxydum rubrum. 

Oxydum  plumbi  album.  See  Plumbi  subcarbonas. 

Oxydum  plumbi  rubrum.  See  Lead. 

Oxydum  plumbi  semivitreum.  See  Lythargyrus. 

Oxydum  stibii  album.  See  Antimonii  oxydum. 

Oxydum  stibii  semivitreum.  A vitreous  oxide  of 
antimony.  It  was  formerly  called  Vitrum  antimonii 
and  consists  of  an  oxide  of  antimony  with  a little  sul- 
phur ; it  is  employed  to  make  antimonial  wine. 

Oxydum  stibii  sulpiiuratum.  This  is  an  oxide  of 
antimony  with  sulphur,  and  was  formerly  called  Hc- 
par  antimonii ; Crocus  metallorum ; Crocus  antimonii. 
It  was  formerly  exhibited  in  the  cure  of  fevers  and 
atonic  diseases  of  the  lungs.  Its  principal  use  now  is 
in  preparing  other  medicines. 

Oxydum  zinci.  S ee  Zinci  oxydum. 

Oxydum  zinci  sublimatum.  See  Zinci  oxydum. 

OXYGARUM.  (From  ofys,  acid,  and  yapov , garum.) 
A composition  of  garum  and  vinegar. 

OXYGEN.  ( Oxygenium ; from  o£uff,  acid,  and 
yswam,  to  generate ; because  it  is  the  generator  of  aci- 
dity.) This  substance,  although  existing  sometimes  in 
a solid  and  sometimes  in  an  agriform  state,  is  never 
disti  nctly  perceptible  to  the  human  senses,  but  in  com- 
bination. 

We  know  it  only  in  its  combination,  by  its  effects. 
Nature  never  presents  it  solitary:  chemists  do  not 
know  how  to  insulate  it.  It  is  a principle  which  was 
long  unknown.  It  is  absorbable  by  combustible  bodies, 
and  converts  them  into  oxides  or  acids.  It  is  an  indis- 
pensable condition  of  combustion,  uniting  itself  always 
to  bodies  which  burn,  augmenting  their  weight,  and 
changing  their  properties.  It  may  be  disengaged  in  the 
state  of  oxygen  gas,  from  burned  bodies,  by  a joint  accu- 
mulation of  caloric  and  light.  It  is  highly  necessary  for 
the  respiration  of  animals.  It  exists  universally  dis- 
persed through  nature,  and  is  a constituent  part  of  at- 
mospheric air,  of  watei,  of  acids,  and  of  all  bodiesof 
the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms. 

One  of  the  most  remarkable  combinations  into  which 
it  is  capable  of  entering,  is  that  which  it  forms  with 
light  and  caloric.  The  nature  of  that  mysterious  union 
has  not  been  ascertained,  but  it  is  certain  that,  in  that 
state,  it  constitutes  the  gaseous  fluid  called  oxygen 

fcAS. 

Properties  of  oxygen  gas. — Oxygen  gas  is  an  elastic 
invisible  fluid,  like  common  air,  capable  of  indefinite 
expansion  and  compression.  It  has  neither  taste  nor 
odour,  nor  does  it  show  any  traces  of  an  acid.  Its  spe- 

Rr 


cific  gravity,  as  determined  by  Kinvan.  is  0.00135,  tliaC 
of  water  being  1.0000;  it  is,  therefore,  740  times  lighter 
than  the  same  bulk  of  water.  Its  weight  is  to  atmos- 
pheric air  as  1103  to  1000.  One  hundred  and  sixteen 
cubic  inches  of  oxygen  gas  weigh  39.38  grains.  It  is  not 
absorbed  by  water,  but  entirely  absorbable  by  combus- 
tible bodies,  which,  at  the  same  time,  disengage  its  ca- 
loric and  light,  producing  in  consequence  a strong  heat 
and  flame.  It  rekindles  almost  extinct  combustible 
bodies.  It  is  indispensable  to  respiration,  and  is  the 
cause  of  animal  heat.  It  hastens  germination.  It  com- 
bines with  every  combustible  body,  with  all  the  metals, 
and  with  the  greater  number  of  vegetable  and  animal 
substances.  It  is  considered  as  the  cause  of  acidity  ‘f 
and  from  this  last  property  is  derived  the  name  oxygen t 
a word  denoting  the  origin  of  acidity. 

The  act  of  its  combining  with  bodies  is  called  oxi- 
disement , or  oxygenation ; and  the  bodies  with  which 
it  is  combined  are  called  oxides , or  acids. 

Oxygen  gas  is  the  chief  basis  of  the  pneumatic  doc- 
trine of  chemistry. 

Methods  of  obtaining  oxygen  gas. — We  are  at  pre- 
sent acquainted  with  a great  number  of  bodies  from 
which  wc  may,  by  art,  produce  oxygen  gas.  It  is  most 
amply  obtained  from  the  oxides  of  manganese,  lead, 
or  mercury ; from  nitrate  of  potassa ; from  the  green 
leaves  of  vegetables,  and  from  oxychlorate  of  potassa 
or  soda.  Besides  these,  there  are  a great  many  other 
substances  from  which  oxygen  gas  may  be  procured* 

1.  In  order  to  procure  oxygen  gas  in  a state  of  great 
purity,  pure  oxychlorate  of  potassa  or  soda  must  be 
rtiade  use  of.  With  this  view,  put  some  of  the  salt 
into  a small  earthen  or  glass  retort,  the  neck  of  which 
is  placed  under  the  shelf  of  the  pneumatic  trough,  filled 
with  water ; and  heat  the  retort  by  means  of  a lamp. 
The  salt  will  begin  to  melt,  and  oxygen  gas  will  be  ob- 
tained in  abundance,  and  of  great  purity,  which  may 
be  collected  and  preserved  over  water. 

Explanation. — Oxychlorate  of  potassa  consists  of 
oxygen,  chlorine,  and  potassa.  At  an  elevated  tem- 
perature, a decomposition  takes  place,  the  oxygen 
unites  to  the  caloric,  and  forms  oxygen  gas.  The  oxy- 
chlorate becomes  therefore  converted  into  simple  chlo- 
rate of  potassa. 

2.  Oxygen  gas  may  likewise  be  obtained  from  the 
green  leaves  of  vegetables. 

For  this  purpose  fill  a bell-glass  with  water,  intro- 
duce fresh- gathered  green  leaves  under  it,  and  place 
the  bell,  or  receiver,  inverted  in  a vessel  containing 
the  same  fluid ; expose  the  apparatus  to  the  rays  of  the 
sun,  and  very  pure  oxygen  gas  will  be  liberated. 

The  emission  of  oxygen  gas  is  proportioned  to  the 
vigour  of  the  plant  and  the  vivacity  of  the  light ; the 
quantity  differs  in  different  plants,  and  under  different 
conditions. 

Explanation. — It  is  an  established  fact,  that  plants 
decompose  carbonic  acid,  and  probably  water,  which 
serve  for  their  nourishment ; they  absorb  the  hydro- 
gen and  carbon  of  these  fluids,  disengaging  a part  of 
the  oxygen  in  a state  of  purity.  Light,  however,  fa- 
vours this  decomposition  greatly  ; in  proportion  as  the 
oxygen  becomes  disengaged,  the  hydrogen  becomes 
fixed  in  the  vegetable,  and  combines  partly  with  the 
carbon  and  partly  with  the  oxygen,  to  form  the  oil,.&c. 
of  the  vegetable. 

3.  Nitrate  of  potassa  is  another  substance  frequently 
made  use  of  for  obtaining  oxygen  gas,  in  the  following 
manner : 

Take  any  quantity  of  this  salt,  introduce  it  into  a 
coated  earthen  or  glass  retort,  and  fit  to  it  a tube, 
which  must  be  plunged  into  the  pneumatic  trough,  un- 
der the  receiver  filled  with  water.  When  the  appara- 
tus lias  been  properly  adjusted,  heat  the  retort  gra- 
dually, till  it  becomes  red-hot;  the  oxygen  gas  will 
then  be  disengaged  rapidly. 

Explanation. — Nitrate  of  potassa  consists  of  nitric 
acid  and  potassa.  Nitric  acid  consists  again  of  oxy- 
gen and  nitrogen.  On  exposing  the  salt  to  ignition,  a 
partial  decomposition  of  the  acid  takes  place;  the 
greatest  part  of  the  oxygen  of  the  nitric  acid  unites  to 
caloric,  and  appears  under  the  form  of  oxygen  gas. 
The  other  part  remains  attached  to  the  potassa  in  the 
state  of  nitrous  acid.  The  residue  in  the  retort  is, 
therefore,  nitrate  of  potassa,  if  the  process  has  been 
carried  only  to  a certain  extent. 

Remark. — If  too  much  heat  be  applied,  particularly 
towards  the  end  of  the  process,  a total  decomposition 

145 


OXY 


OZY 


of  the  nitric  acid  takes  place : the  oxygen  gas,  in  that 
case,  will  therefore  be  mingled  with  nitrogen  gas. 
The  weight  of  the  two  gases,  when  collected,  will  be 
found  to  correspond  very  exactly  with  the  weight  of 
the  acid  which  had  been  decomposed.  The  residue 
then  left  in  the  retort  is  potasca. 

4.  Black  oxide  of  manganese,  however,  is  generally 
made  use  of  for  obtaining  oxygen  gas,  on  account  of 
its  cheapness.  This  native  oxide  is  reduced  to  a coarse 
powder-  a stone,  or  rather  an  iron  retort,  is  then 
charged  with  it  and  heated.  As  soon  as  the  retort  be- 
comes ignited,  oxygen  gas  is  obtained  plentifully. 

Explanation. — Black  oxide  of  manganese  is  the 
metal  called  manganese  fully  saturated  with  oxygen, 
together  with  many  earthy  impurities;  on  applying 
heat,  part  of  the  solid  oxygen  quits  the  metal  and 
unites  to  caloric,  in  order  to  form  oxygen  gas  ; the  re- 
mainder of  the  oxygen  remains  united  to  the  metal 
with  a forcible  affinity:  the  metal,  therefore,  ap- 
proaches to  the  metallic  state,  or  is  found  in  the  state 
of  a gray  oxide  of  manganese. 

One  pound  of  the  best  manganese  yields  upwards  of 
1400  cubic  inches  of  oxygen  gas,  nearly  pure.  If  sul- 
phuric acid  be  previously  added  to  the  manganese,  the 
gas  is  produced  by  a less  heat,  and  in  a larger  quan- 
tity ; a glass  retort  may  then  be  used,  and  the  heat  of 
a lamp  is  sufficient. 

5.  Red  oxide  of  mercury  yields  oxygen  gas  in  a man- 
ner similar  to  that  of  manganese. 

Explanation.— This  oxide  consists  likewise  of  solid 
oxygen  and  mercury,  the  combination  of  which  takes 
place  on  exposing  mercury  to  a heat  of  about  610° 
Fahr.  At  this  degree  it  attracts  oxygen,  and  becomes 
converted  into  an  oxide;  but  if  the  temperature  be  in- 
creased, the  attraction  of  oxygen  is  changed.  The 
oxygen  then  attracts  caloric  stronger  than  it  did  the 
mercury ; it  therefore  abandons  it,  and  forms  oxygen 
gas.  The  mercury  then  reappears  in  its  metallic  state. 

6.  Red  oxide  of  lead  yields  oxygen  gas  on  the  same 
principle. 

Oxygenated  muriatic  acid.  See  Chlorine. 
OXYGENATION.  Oxygenatio.  This  word  is 
often  used  instead  of  oxidation,  and  frequently  con- 
founded with  it:  but  it  differs  in  being  of  more  general 
import,  as  every  union  with  oxygen,  whatever  the  pro- 
duct may  be,  is  an  oxygenation ; but  oxidation  takes 
place  only  when  an  oxide  is  formed. 

Oxygenized  muriatic  acid.  See  Muriatic  acid  oxy- 
genized. 

Oxygenized  nitric  acid.  See  Nitric  acid  oxy- 
genized. 

Oxygly'cum.  (From  acid,  and  yXercaj,  sweet.) 
Honey  mixed  with  vinegar. 

OXYIODE.  A term  applied  by  Sir  H.  Davy  to  the 
triple  compounds  of  oxygen,  iodine,  and  the  metallic 
bases.  Lussac  calls  them  iodates. 

OXYLA'PATHUM.  (From  ofry,  acid,  and  \ana- 
0ov,  the  dock:  so  named  from  its  acidity.)  See  Ru- 
mex  acutus. 

O'XYMEL.  ( Oxymel , llis.  n. ; from  o\vs,  acid,  and 
prXr,  honey.)  Apomeli.  Adipson.  Honey  and  vine- 
gar boiled  to  a syrup.  Mel  acetatum.  Now  called 
Oxymel  simplex.  Take  of  clarified  honey,  two  pounds ; 
acetic  acid  a pint.  Boil  them  down  to  a proper  con- 
sistence, in  a glass  vessel,  over  a slow  fire.  This  pre- 
paration of  honey  and  vinegar  possesses  aperient  and 
expectorating  virtues ; and  is  given,  with  these  inten- 
tions, in  the  cure  of  humoral  asthma,  and  other  dis- 
eases of  the  chest,  in  doses  of  one  or  two  drachms.  It 
is  also  employed  in  the  form  of  gargle,  when  diluted 
with  water. 

Oxymel  jeruginis.  See  Linimentum  ceruginis. 
Oxymel  colchici.  Oxymel  of  meadow  saffron  is 
an  acrid  medicine,  but  is  nevertheless  employed,  for  its 
diuretic  virtues,  in  dropsies. 

Oxymsl  scillje.  Take  of  clarified  honey,  three 
pounds;  vinegar  of  squills,  two  pints.  Boil  them  in  a 
glass  vessel,  with  a slow  fire,  to  the  proper  thickness. 
Aperient,  expectorant,  and  detergent  virtues,  are  attri- 
14K 


jfbuted  to  the  honey  of  squills.  It  is  given  in  doses  of 
two  or  three  drachms,  along  with  some  aromatic  wa- 
ter, as  that  of  cinnamon,  to  prevent  the  great  neusoa 
which  it  would  otherwise  be  apt  to  excite.  In  large 
doses  it  proves  emetic. 

Oxymu'rias  hydrargyri.  See  Hydrargyri  oxy 

murias. 

OXY  MURIATIC  ACID.  See  Chlorine. 
Oxymyrrhi'ne.  (From  o\v f,  acute,  and  pvppivrj, 
the  myrtle : so  called  from  its  resemblance  to  myrtle, 
and  its  pointed  leaves.)  Oxymyrsine.  See  Myrtus 

communis. 

Oxymyrsine.  See  Oxymyrrhme. 

OXYODIC  ACID.  See  Iodic  acid. 

Oxyni'trum.  (From  o\vs , acid,  and  virpov,  nitre.) 

A composition  chiefly  of  vinegar  and  nitre. 

OXYOPIA.  (From  acute,  and  un|/,  the  eye.) 
The  faculty  of  seeing  more  acutely  than  usual.  Thus 
there  have  been  instances  known  of  persons  who  could 
see  the  stars  in  the  daytime.  The  proximate  cause  is 
a preternatural  sensibility  of  the  retina.  It  has  been 
known  to  precede  the  gutta  serena ; and  it  has  been 
asserted  that  prisoners,  who  have  been  long  detained 
in  darkness,  have  learned  to  read  and  write  in  dark- 
ened places. 

OXYPHLEGM A'SI A . (From  acute,  and  tpht - 

yw,  to  burn.)  An  acute  inflammation. 

Oxyphce'nicon.  (From  o£vy,  acid,  and  0oml[,  the 
tamarind ; a native  of  Phoenicia.)  See  Tamarindus. 

OXYPHO'NIA.  (From  o£uy,  sharp,  and  (/xovtj,  the 
voice.)  An  acuteness  o£  voice.  See  Paraphonia. 
OXYPRUSSIC  ACID.  See  Chlorocyanic  acid. 
OXYRE'GMA.  (From  o^vg,  acid,  and  epevyoo,  to 
break  wind.)  An  acid  eructation. 

Oxyrrho  dinon.  (From  o%vs,  acid,  and  poSivov , 
oil  of  roses.)  A composition  of  the  oil  of  roses  and 
vinegar. 

OXYSACCHA'RUM.  (From  o£vs,  acid,  and  oan- 
Xaoov,  sugar.)  A composition  of  vinegar  and  sugar. 

Oxysal  diaphoreticum.  A preparation  of  Angelo 
Sala.  It  is  a fixed  salt,  loaded  with  more  acid  than  is 
necessary  to  saturate  it. 

Oxy'toca.  (From  o ljus,  quick,  and  tiktw,  to  bring 
forth.)  Medicines  which  promote  delivery. 

OXYTRIPHY'LLUM.  (From  o$vy,  acid,  and  rpi- 
< pvWov , trefoil;  so  named  from  its  acidity.)  See 
Oxalis  acetosella. 

OYSTER.  See  Ostrea. 

Oyster-shell.  See  Ostrea. 

OZiE'NA.  (From  o^,  a stench.)  An  ulcer  situated 
in  the  nose,  discharging  a foetid  purulent  matter,  and 
sometimes  accompanied  with  caries  of  the  bones. 
Some  authors  have  signified  by  the  term,  an  ill-condi- 
tioned ulcer  in  the  antrum.  The  first  meaning  is  the 
original  one.  The  disease  is  described  as  coming  on 
with  a trifling  tumefaction  and  redness  about  the  ala 
rfasi,  accompanied  with  a discharge  of  mucus,  with 
which  the  nostril  becomes  obstructed.  The  matter 
gradually  assumes  the  appearance  of  pus,  is  most  co 
pious  in  the  morning,  and  is  sometimes  attended  with 
sneezing,  and  a little  bleeding.  The  ulceration  occa- 
sionally extends  round  the  ali  nasis  to  the  cheek,  but 
seldom  far  from  the  nose,  the  ala  of  which  also  it 
rarely  destroys.  The  ozsena  is  often  connected  with 
scrofulous  and  venereal  complaints.  In  the  latter 
cases,  portions  of  the  ossa  spongiosa  often  come  away. 
After  the  complete  cure  of  all  venereal  complaints,  an 
exfoliating  dead  piece  of  bone  will  often  keep  up 
symptoms  similar  to  those  of  the  ozsna,  until  it  is  de- 
tached. Mr.  Pearson  remarks,  that  the  ozsena  fre- 
quently occurs  as  a symptom  of  the  cachexia  syphiloi- 
dea.  It  may  perforate  the  septum  nasi,  destroy  the 
ossa  spongiosa,  and  even  the  ossa  nasi.  Such  mis- 
chief is  now  more  frequently  the  effect  of  the  cachexia 
syphiloidea,  than  of  lues  venerea.  The  ozaena  must 
not  be  confounded  with  abscesses  in  the  upper  jaw- 
bone. 

O'zymum.  (From  o$w,  to  smell : so  called  from  its 
fragrance.)  See  Ocymum. 


PjEO 


p 


PAL 


'D  A contraction  of  pugillus,  a pupil,  or  eighth  part 
• of  a handful,  and  sometimes  a contraction  of 
pars  or  partes , a part  or  parts. 

P.  A3.  A contraction  of  partes  cequalis. 

P.  P.  A contraction  of  pulvis  patrurn , Jesuit’s 
powder ; the  Cinchona  lancif.  lia. 

PAAW,  Peter,  was  born  at  Amsterdam,  in  1564. 
After  studying  four  years  at  Leyden,  he  went  to  Paris, 
and  other  celebrated  schools,  for  improvement;  and 
took  his  degree  at  Rostock.  Thence  he  repaired  to 
Padua,  and  attended  the  dissections  of  Fabricius  ab 
Aquapendente ; and,  possessing  a good  memory,  as 
well  as  great  assiduity,  he  evinced  such  respcctable.ac- 
quirements,  that  he  was  appointed  to  a medical  pro- 
fessorship on  his  return  to  Leyden  in  1589.  His  whole 
ambition  was  centred  in  supporting  the  dignity  and 
utility  of  this  office  ; and  he  obtained  general  esteem. 
Anatomy  and  botany  were  his  favourite  pursuits;  and 
Leyden  owes  to  him  the  establishment  of  its  botanic 
garden.  He  died  in  1617.  Besides  some  commen- 
taries on  parts  of  Hippocrates  and  other  ancient  au- 
thors, he  left  a treatise  on  the  Plague,  and  several  other 
works,  chiefly  anatomical. 

PA'BULUM.  (From  pasco , to  feed.)  Food,  ali- 
ment. 

Pabulum  vit®:.  The  food  of  life.  Such  are  the 
different  kinds  of  aliment.  The  animal  heat  and  spi- 
rits are  also  so  called. 

PACCHIONI,  Anthonio,  was  born  at  Reggio,  in 
1664.  After  studying  there  for  some  time  he  went  to 
complete  himself  at  Rome  under  the  celebrated  Mal- 
pighi ; who  subsequently  introduced  him  into  practice 
at  Tivoli,  where  he  resided  six  years  with  considerable 
reputation.  He  then  returned  to  Rome,  and  assisted 
Lancisi  in  his  explanation  of  the  plates  of  Eustachius. 
He  devoted  also  great  attention  to  dissection,  particu- 
larly of  the  membranes  of  the  brain.  In  his  first  work, 
he  assigned  to  the  dura  mater  a contractile  power, 
whereby  it  acted  upon  the  brain  ; this  notion  obtained 
temporary  celebrity,  but  it  was  confuted  by  Baglivi, 
and  other  anatomists.  Ho  afterward  announced  the 
discovery  of  glands  near  the  longitudinal  sinus,  from 
which  he  alleged  lymphatics  pass  to  the  pia  mater ; this 
involved  him  in  farther  controversies.  He  was  a 
member  of  several  learned  academies,  and  died  in 
1726.  Among  his  posthumous  works  is  one  on  the 
mischief  of  epispastics  in  many  diseases. 

Pacchionian  glands.  See  Glandules  Pacchioniae. 

Pachy'ntica.  (From  Zoaxwu),  to  incrassate.)  Me- 
dicines which  incrassate  or  thicken  the  fluids. 

Pa'chys.  Ilaxuf)  thick.  The  name  of  a disorder 
described  by  Hippocrates,  but  not  known  by  us. 

PA'DUS.  A name  borrowed  from  Theophrastus, 
who  gives  no  other  account  of  his  nados,  than  that  it 
greatly  delights  in  a shady  situation,  like  the  yew. 
The  term  is  now  applied  to  the  bird-cherry.  See  Pru- 
nus  padus. 

[“  Pagodite  (or  Bildstein  of  Werner).  Nothing  is 
known  of  the  natural  situation  or  associations  of  this 
mineral.  It  is  brought  from  China,  and  always  under 
some  artificial  form  ; and  hence  it  is  sometimes  called 
Figure  or  Sculpture  stone,  or  Bildstein.  These  figures 
are  supposed  often  to  represent  the  idols  or  pagodas  of 
the  Chinese.  The  Bildstein  is  susceptible  of  a polish.” 
— Clean.  Min.  A.] 

P®dancho'ne.  (From  zsats , a child,  and  ayxoo,  to 
strangulate.)  A species  of  quinsy  common  among 
children. 

PASDARTIIRO'CACE.  (From  zsais,  a boy,  apdpov, 
a joint,  and  kokov,  an  evil.)  The  joint  evil.  A scro- 
fulous affection  producing  an  ulceration  of  the  bones 
which  come  ajoint. 

PA3NEA.  See  Penoea. 

PA30NIA.  (From  Peeon,  who  first  applied  it  to 
medicinal  purposes.)  Pteony. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Polyandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  Thepharmacopoeialnaineof  the  common  parnny. 
See  Peeonia  officinalis. 

P&ONIA  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  pteony ; male  and  female  pseony.  This  plant, 

R r 2 


Peeonia  .—foliis  oblongis , of  Linnaeus,  has  long  been 
considered  as  a powerful  medicine;  and,  till  lately, 
had  a place  in  the  catalogue  of  the  Materia  Medica ; in 
which  the  two  common  varieties  of  this  plant  are  indis- 
criminately directed  for  use : and,  on  the  authority  of 
G.  Bauhin,  improperly  distinguished  into  male  and 
female  pteony. 

The  roots  and  seeds  of  pamny  have,  when  fresh,  a 
faint,  unpleasant  smell,  somewhat  of  the  narcotic  kind, 
and  a mucilaginous  subacrid  taste,  with  a slight  degree 
of  bitterness  and  astringency.  In  drying,  they  lose 
their  smell  and  part  of  their  taste.  Extracts  made 
from  them  by  water  are  almost  insipid,  as  well  as  in- 
odorous ; but  extracts  made  by  rectified  spirits  are  ma- 
nifestly bitterish,  and  considerably  adstringent.  The 
flowers  have  rather  more  smell  than  any  of  the  other 
parts  of  the  plant,  and  a rough  sweetish  taste,  which 
they  impart,  together  with  their  colour,  both  to  water 
and  spirit. 

The  roots,  flowers,  and  seeds  of  pseony  have  been 
esteemed  in  the  character  of  an  anodyne  and  corro- 
borant, but  more  especially  the  roots;  which,  since 
the  days  of  Galen,  have  been  very  commonly  employed 
as  a-  remedy  for  the  epilepsy.  For  this  purpose,  it 
was  usual  to  cut  the  root  into  thin  slices,  which  were 
to  be  attached  to  a string,  and  suspended  about  the 
neck  as  an  amulet ; if  this  failed  of  success,  the  patient 
was  to  have  recourse  to  the  internal  use  of  this  root, 
which  Willis  directs  to  be  given  in  the  form  of  a pow- 
der, and  in  the  quantity  of  a drachm,  two  or  three 
times  a day,  by  which,  as  we  are  informed,  both  infants 
and  adults  were  cured  of  this  disease.  Other  authors 
recommended  the  expressed  juice  to  be  giv^n  in  wine, 
and  sweetened  with  sugar,  as  the  most  effectual  way 
of  administering  this  plant.  Many  writers,  however, 
especially  in  modern  times,  from  repeated  trials  of  the 
pseony  in  epileptic  cases,  have  found  it  of  no  use  what- 
ever ; though  Professor  Home,  who  gave  the  radix 
pceoniae  to  two  epileptics  at  the  Edinburgh  infirmary, 
declares  that  one  received  a temporary  advantage  from 
its  use.  Of  the  good  effects  of  this  plant,  in  other  dis- 
orders, we  find  no  instances  recorded. 

PAIGIL.  See  Primula  veris. 

PAIN.  A.'hyy.  OSvpy.  Dolor.  Any  unpleasant 
sensation,  or  irritation. 

Painter's  colic.  See  Colica  pictonum. 

PAKFONG.  The  white  copper  of  the  Chinese,  said 
to  be  an  alloy  of  copper,  nikel.  and  zinc. 

PALATE.  See  Palatum. 

Palati  circumflex  us.  See  Circumflexus  palati. 

Palati  levator.  See  Levator  palati. 

Palati  os.  The  palate  bone.  The  palate  is  formed 
by  two  bones  of  very  irregular  figure.  They  are 
placed  between  the  ossa  maxiliaria  superiora  and  the 
os  sphenoides  at  the  back  part  of  the  roof  of  the 
mouth,  and  extend  from  thence  to  the  bottom  of  the 
orbit.  Each  of  these  bones  may  be  divided  into  four 
parts,  viz.  the  inferior,  or  square  portion,  the  pterygoid 
process,  the  nasal  lamella,  and  orbitar  process.  The 
first  of  these,  or  the  square  part  of  the  bone,  helps  to 
form  the  palate  of  the  mouth.  The  upper  part  of  its 
internal  edge  rises  into  a spine,  which  makes  part  of 
the  septum  narium.  The  pterygoid  process,  which  is 
smaller  above  than  below,  is  so  named  from  its  being 
united  with  the  pterygoid  process  of  the  sphenoid  bone, 
with  which  it  helps  to  form  the  pterygoid  fossae.  It  is 
separated  from  the  square  part  of  the  bone,  and  from 
the  nasal  lamella,  by  an  oblique  fossa,  which,  applied 
to  such  another  in  the  os  maxillare,  forms  a passage  for 
a branch  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves.  The  nasal  la- 
mella is  nothing  more  than  a very  thin  bony  plate, 
which  arises  from  the  upper  side  of  the  external  edge 
of  the  square  part  of  the  bone.  Its  inner  surface  i» 
concave,  and  furnished  with  a ridge,  which  supports- 
the  back  part  of  the  os  spongiosum  inferius.  Exter- 
nally it  is  convex,  and  firmly  united  to  the  maxillary 
bone.  The  orbitar  process  is  more  irregular  than  any 
other  part  of  the  bone.  It  has  a smooth  surface,  when 
it  helps  to  form  the  orbit ; and,  when  viewed  in  its 
place,  we  see  it  contiguous  to  that  part  of  the  orbit 
which  is  formed  by  the  os  maxillare,  and  appearing  aa 


PAL 


PAL 


a small  triangle  at  the  inner  extremity  of  the  orbitar 
process  of  this  last-mentioned  bone.  This  fourth  part 
of  the  os  palati  likewise  helps  to  form  the  zygomatic 
fossa  on  each  side,  and  there  its  surface  is  concave. 
Between  this  orbitar  process  and  the  sphenoid  bone,  a 
hole  is  formed,  through  which  an  artery,  vein,  and 
nerve  are  transmitted  to  the  nostrils.  The  ossa  palati 
are  complete  in  the  foetus.  They  are  joined  to  the  ossa 
maxillai  ia  superiora,  os  sphenoides,  os  ethmoides,  ossa 
spongiosa  inferiora,  and  vomer. 

Palati  tensor.  See  Circumflexus. 

PALATO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  be- 
long to  muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  palate. 

Palato- pharyngeus.  (So  called  from  its  origin  in 
the  palate  and  insertion  in  the  pharynx.)  A muscle 
situated  at  the  side  of  the  entry  of  the  fauces.  Thyro- 
staphilinus,  of  Douglas.  Thyro-pharyngo-staphilinus , 
of  Winslow  ; and  palato-pharyngien,  of  Dumas.  It 
arises  by  a broad  beginning  from  the  middle  of  the 
velum  pendulum  palati  at  the  root  of  the  uvula  poste- 
riorly, and  from  the  tendinous  expansion  of  the  cir- 
cumflexus palati.  The  fibres  are  collected  within  the 
posterior  arch  behind  the  tonsils,  and  run  backwards  to 
the  top  and  lateral  part  of  the  pharynx,  where  the 
fibres  are  scattered  and  mixed  with  those  of  the  stylo- 
pharyngeus.  It  is  inserted  into  the  edge  of  the  upper 
and  back  part  of  the  thyroid  cartilage.  Its  use  is  to 
draw  the  uvula  and  velum  pendulum  palati  down- 
wards and  backwards,  and  at  the  same  time  to  pull 
the  thyroid  cartilage  and  pharynx  upwards,  and  shorten 
it ; with  the  constrictor  superior  pharyngis  and  tongue, 
it  assists  in  shutting  the  passage  into  the  nostrils ; and 
in  swallowing,  it  thrusts  the  food  from  the  fauces  into 
the  pharynx. 

Palato-salpingeus.  (From  palatum , the  palate, 
and  aa\myh  a trumpet ; so  called  from  its  origin  in  the 
palate,  and  its  trumpet-like  shape.)  See  Circumflexus. 

Palato- staphilinus.  See  Azygos  uvula. 

PALATUM.  ( Palatum , i.  n.;  from  palo,  to  hedge 
in  ; because  it  is  staked  in,  as  it  were,  by  the  teeth.) 
1.  The  palate  or  roof  of  the  mouth. 

2.  An  eminence  of  the  inferior  lip  of  the  corolla  of 
personate  flowers  which  closes  them  ; as  in  Antirrhi- 
num. See  Corolla. 

Palatum  molle.  The  soft  palate.  This  lies  be- 
hind the  bony  palate ; and  from  the  middle  of  it  the 
uvula  hangs  down. 

PALEA.  (Palae,  ce.  f.;  chaff.)  Chaff,  or  short,  linear, 
obtuse  dry  scales. 

Palea  de  mecha.  A name  given  by  some  to  the 
Juncus  odoratus. 

PALEACEUS  (From  palea , chaff.)  Chaffy,  or 
covered  with  chaff.  Applied  by  botanists  to  the  recep- 
tacles of  plants  ; as  those  of  the  Xeranthemum.  Zin 
nia , Anthemis , &c.  See  Receptaculum. 

Palimpi'ssa.  (From  iraXiv,  repetition,  and  maaa, 
pitch.)  Dioscorides  says,  that  dry  pitch  is  thus  named, 
because  it  is  prepared  of  pitch  twice  boiled. 

Palindro'mia.  (IlnXtv,  again,  and  Spopos,  a course.) 
This  term  is  used  by  Hippocrates  for  any  regurgitation 
of  humours  to  the  more  noble  parts : and  sometimes 
for  the  return  of  a distemper. 

Paliu'rus.  (From  7raXXw,  to  move,  and  ovpov, 
urine ; so  called  from  its  diuretic  qualities.)  The  Rham- 
nus  paliurus. 

PALLADIUM.  A new  metal,  first  found  by  Dr. 
Wollaston,  associated  with  platina,  among  the  grains 
of  which  he  supposes  its  ores  to  exist,  or  an  alloy  of  it 
with  iridium  and  osmium;  scarcely  distinguishable 
from  the  crude  platina,  though  it  is  harder  and  heavier. 

PALLAS,  Peter  Simon,  was  bom  at  Berlin,  where 
his  father  was  professor  of  Surgery,  in  1741.  He  ap- 
plied early  and  assiduously  to  his  studies,  particularly 
to  dissection,  insomuch  that  he  was  enabled,  at  the  age 
of  17,  to  read  a public  course  on  anatomy.  He  then 
went  to  Halle,  and  in  1759  to  Gottingen,  where  a severe 
illness  for  some  time  interrupted  his  pursuits;  blithe 
afterward  made  numerous  experiments  on  poisons, 
and  dissections  of  animals ; and  composed  a very  inge- 
nious treatise  on  those  which  are  found  within  others, 
particularly  the  worms  occurring  in  the  human  body. 
In  the  following  year,  he  took  his  degree  at  Leyden, 
then  travelled  through  Holland  and  England,  directing 
his  attention  almost  entirely  to  natural  history.  In 
1762,  his  father  recalled  him  to  Berlin ; but  allowed 
him  soon  after  to  settle  at  the  Hague,  where  he  could 
better  prosecute  his  favourite  studies;  the  fruit  of  I 


which  shortly  appeared  in  a valuable  treatise  on  zoo- 
phytes, and  some  other  publications  : and  he  was  ad- 
mitted into  the  Royal  Society  of  London,  and  the 
Academy  Naturae  Curiosorum,  to  which  he  had  sent 
interesting  papers.  About  this  period  he  meditated  a 
voyage  to  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  and  other  Dutch 
settlements;  but  his  father  again  recalled  him  in  1766. 
However,  in  the  following  year,  he  was  induced  by 
Catharine  II.  to  become  professor  of  natural  history  at 
St.  Petersburgh.  Thence,  in  1768,  he  set  out,  with 
some  other  philosophers,  on  a scientific  tour,  as  far  as 
Siberia,  which  occcupied  six  years.  Of  this  he  after- 
ward published  a most  interesting  account  in  five 
quarto  volumes  comprehending  every  thing  memorable 
in  the  several  provinces  which  he  had  visited.  This 
was  followed  by  a particular  history  of  the  Mongul 
tribes,  who  had,  at  different  periods,  overrun  the  greater 
part  of  Asia,  and  whom  he  clearly  proved  to  be  a dis- 
tinct race  from  the  Tartars.  In  1777  he  read  before  the 
academy  a dissertation  on  the  formation  of  mountains, 
and  the  changes  which  this  globe  has  undergone,  par- 
ticularly in  the  Russian  empire.  He  also  published, 
from  time  to  time,  numerous  works  relative  to  zoology, 
botany,  agriculture,  and  geography.  About  the  year 
1784,  he  received  signal  proofs  of  the  empress’s  favour  ; 
who  not  only  considerably  increased  his  salary,  and 
conferred  upon  him  the  order  of  St.  Vladimir,  but 
learning  that  he  wished  to  dispose  of  his  collection  of 
natural  history,  gave  him  a greater  price  than  he  had 
valued  it  at,  and  allowed  him  the  use  of  it  during  his 
life.  In  1794,  he  travelled  to  the  Crimea,  of  which  he 
published  an  account  on  his  return  : and  his  health 
now  beginning  to  decline,  the  empress  presented  him 
an  estate  in  that  province,  with  a liberal  sum  for  his 
establishment.  Unfortunately,  however,  the  situation 
was  particularly  unhealthy,  and  proved  very  injurious 
to  his  family.  At  length  he  determined  to  visit  his 
brother,  and  his  native  city,  where  he  diedshortly  after, 
in  1811. 

PALLIATIVE.  (Palliativus ; from  pallio,  to  dis- 
semble.) A medicine  given  only  with  an  intent  to 
palliate  or  relieve  pains  in  a fatal  disease. 

Palm  oil.  See  Cocos  butyracea. 

Palma  christi.  See  Ricinus. 

PAL'MA.  (From  sjaXXw,  to  move.) 

1.  The  palm  of  the  hand. 

• 2.  A palm-tree.  See  Palma. 

PALMAS.  (From  palma , the  hand:  so  called  be- 
cause the  leaves  are  extended  from  the  top  like  the  fin- 
ger upon  the  hand.)  Palms.  One  of  the  natural  fami- 
lies of  plants  which  have  trunks  similar  to  trees,  but 
come  under  the  term  stipes,  the  tops  being  frondescent, 
that  is,sendingoffleaves.  Palms  are  the  most  lofty,  and 
in  some  instances,  the  most  Jong-livedof  plants,  and  have 
therefore  justly  acquired  the  name  of  trees.  Yet  Sir 
James  Smith  observes,  paradoxical  as  it  may  seem, 
they  are  rather  perennial  herbaceous  plants,  having 
nothing  in  common  with  the  growth  of  trees  in  general. 
Palms  are  formed  of  successive  circular  crowns  of 
leaves,  w’hich  spring  directly  from  the  root.  These 
leaves  and  their  footstalks  are  furnished  with  bundles 
of  large  sap-vessels,  and  returning- vessels,  like  the 
leaves  of  trees,  when  one  circle  of  them  has  performed 
its  office,  another  is  formed  within  it,  which,  being 
confined  below,  necessarily  rises  a little  above  the  for- 
mer. Thus,  successive  circles  grow  one  above  the 
other ; by  which  the  vertical  increase  of  the  plant  is 
almost  without  end.  Each  circle  of  leaves  is  inde- 
pendent of  its  predecessor,  and  has  its  own  cluster  of 
vessels  ; so  that  there  can  be  no  aggregation  of  woody 
circles. 

PALMARIS.  (Palmaris  ; from  palma,  the  hand.) 
Belonging  to  the  hand. 

Pamaris  brevis.  Palmaris  brevis  vel  caro  quad- 
rata,  of  Douglas  ; and  Palmare  cutaniy  of  Dumas.  A 
small,  thin,  cutaneous  flexor  muscle  of  the  hand,  situ- 
ated between  the  wrist  and  the  little  finger.  Fallopius 
tells  us  that  it  was  discovered  by  Cananus.  Winslow 
names  it  palmaris  cutaneus.  It  arises  from  a small 
part  of  the  internal  annular  ligament,  and  inner  edge 
of  the  aponeurosis  palmaris,  and  is  inserted  by  small 
bundles  of  fleshy  fibres  into  the  os  pisiforme,  and  into 
the  skin  and  fat  that  cover  the  abductor  minimi  digiti. 
This  muscle  seems  to  assist  in  contracting  the  palm  of 
the  hand. 

Palmaris  cutaneus.  See  Palmaris  brevis. 
Palmaris  longus.  A flexor  muscle  of  the  arm 


PAN 


situated  on  the  fore-arm,  immediately  under  the  integu- 
ments. Ulnaris  gracilis , of  Winslow ; and  Epitro- 
c/ilo  carpi  palmaire , of  Dumas.  It  arises  tendinous 
from  the  inner  condyle  of  the  os  humeri,  bui  soon  be- 
comes fleshy,  and  after  continuing  so  about  three 
inches,  terminates  in  a long  slender  tendon,  which, 
near  the  wrist,  separates  into  two  portions,  one  of 
which  is  inserted  into  the  internal  annular  ligament, 
and  the  other  loses  itself  in  a tendinous  membrane, 
that  is  nearly  of  a triangular  shape,  and  extends  over 
the  palm  of  the  hand,  from  the  carpal  ligaments  to  the 
roots  of  the  fingers,  and  is  called  aponeurosis  palmaris. 
Some  of  the  fibres  of  this  expansion  adhere  strongly  to 
the  metacarpal  bones,  and  separate  the  muscles  and 
tendons  of  each  finger.  Several  anatomical  writers 
have  considered  this  aponeurosis  as  a production  ofthe 
tendon  of  this  muscle,  but  seemingly  without  reason, 
because  we  now  and  then  find  the  latter  wholly  in- 
serted into  the  carpal  ligament,  in  which  case  it  is  per- 
fectly distinct  from  the  aponeurosis  in  question  ; and, 
in  some  subjects,  the  palmaris  longus  is  wanting,  but 
the  aponeurosis  is  always  to  be  found.  Rhodius,  in- 
deed, says  that  the  latter  is  now  and  then  deficient : but 
there  is  good  reason  to  think  that  he  was  mistaken. 
This  muscle  bends  the  hand,  and  may  assist  in  its  pro- 
nation : it  likewise  serves  to  stretch  the  aponeurosis 
palmaris. 

PALMATUS.  Palmate.  Applied  to  leaves,  cut,  as 
it  were,  into  several  oblong,  nearly  equal  segments, 
about  half-way,  or  rather  more,  towards  the  base, 
leaving  an  entire  space  like  the  palm  of  the  hand ; as 
in  Passifiora  ccerulea. 

PA'LMOS.  (From  zsa\\u),  to  beat.)  A palpitation 
of  the  heart. 

Pa'lmula.  (Diminutive  of  palma , the  hand:  so 
called  from  its  shape.)  1.  A date. 

2.  The  broad  and  flat  end  of  a rib. 

PA'LPEBRA.  (A  palpitando , from  their  frequent 
motion.)  The  eyelid,  distinguished  into  upper  and 
under;  at  each  end  they  unite  and  form  the  canthi. 

Palpebrce  superioris , levator.  See  Levator palpe- 
bree  superioris. 

Palpebrarum  aperiens  rectus.  See  Levator  palpe- 
brce superioris. 

PALPITA'TIO.  1.  A palpitation  or  convulsive 
motion  of  a part. 

2.  Palpitation  of  the  heart.  A genus  of  diseases  in 
the  class  J\Teuroses , and  order  Spasmi , of  Cullen. 

PALSY.  See  Paralysis.  . 

Paluda'pium.  (From  Palus  a lake,  and  apium , 
smallage:  so  named  because  it  grows  in  and  about 
rivulets.)  A species  of  smallage. 

Pa'lus  sanctus.  A name  of  guaiacum. 

Pamphi'lium.  (From  eras,  all,  and  <pi\og , grateful : 
so  called  from  its  extensive  usefulness.)  A piaster  de- 
scribed by  Galen. 

PAMPINIFORM.  ( Pampiniformis  ; from  pampi- 
nus,  a tendril,  and  forma , a likeness.)  Resembling  a 
tendril ; applied  to  the  spermatic  chord  and  the  tho- 
racic duct. 

PANA'CEA.  (From  rsav,  the  neuter  of  zsag,  all,  and 
aiccopai , to  cure.)  An  epithet  given  by  the  ancients  to 
those  remedies  which  they  conceived  would  cure 
every  disease.  Unfortunately  for  men  of  the  present 
day  there  are  no  such  remedies. 

Panacea  ducis  holsati/E.  The  sulphateof  potassa. 

Panacea  duplkata.  Sulphate  of  potassa. 

Panacea  vegetabius.  Saffron. 

PANADA.  (Diminutive  of  pane,  bread,  Ital.)  Pa- 
nata ; Panatella.  Bread  boiled  in  water  to  the  con- 
sistence of  pap.  Dry  biscuits  soaked  are  the  best  for 
this  purpose. 

Panale'thes.  (From  zsav,  all,  and  a\yQvg,  true.) 
A name  of  a cephalic  plaster,  from  its  universal  efficacy. 

PA'NARIS.  (Corrupted  from  paronychia.)  See 
Paronychia. 

Panari'tia.  (Corrupted  from  paronychia.)  See 
Paronychia. 

PANAX.  (A  name  borrowed  from  the  old  Greek 
botanists,  whose  nava\,  or  navau w,  was  so  denomi- 
nated from  nav,  all,  and  atcog,  medicine,  because  of  its 
abundant  virtues.  The  name  being  unoccupied,  Lin- 
nteus  adopted  it  for  the  Chinese  ginseng,  that  famous 
restorative  and  panacea,  the  reputed  virtues  of  which 
Yield  in  no  respect  to  the  ancient  panax.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Polygamia ; Order,  Diaecia. 


PAN 

2.  A name  of  the  Hercules’  all-heal.  See  LaserpL 

tium  chironium. 

Panax  quinqcefolium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  affords  the  ginseng  root.  Oinscng: 
Panax — foliis  ternis  quinalis  of  Linnaeus.  The  root 
is  imported  into  this  country  scarcely  the  thickness  of 
the  little  finger,  about  three  or  four  inches  long,  fre- 
quently forked,  transversely  wrinkled,  of  a horny  tex- 
ture, and  both  internally  and  externally  of  a yellowish- 
white  colour.  To  the  taste  it  discovers  a mucilaginous 
sweetness,  approaching  to  that  of  liquorice,  accompa- 
nied with  some  degree  of  bitterness,  and  a slight  aro- 
matic warmth.  The  Chinese  ascribe  extraordinary 
virtues  to  the  root  of  ginseng,  and  have  no  confidence 
in  any  medicine  unless  in  combination  with  it.  In 
Europe,  however,  it  is  very  seldom  employed. 

Panchre'stos.  (From  nav,  all,  and  X9V?og,  use- 
ful: so  named  from  its  general  usefulness.)  Pan- 
chreston.  1.  An  epithet  of  a collyrium  described  by 
Galen. 

2.  It  has  the  same  signification  as  Panacea. 

Panchymago'ga.  (From  zsav , all,  xvP°Si  succust 
humour,  and  ayw,  duco , to  lead  or  draw.)  This  term 
is  ascribed  to  such  medicines  as  are  supposed  to  purge 
all  humours  equally  alike ; but  this  is  a conceit  now 
not  minded. 

Pancge'nus.  (From  nag,  all,  and  Koivog,  common.) 
Epidemic.  Applied  to  popular  diseases,  which  attack 
all  descriptions  of  persons. 

Pancra'tium.  (From  nag,  all,  and  Kparew,  to  con- 
quer : so  called  from  its  virtues  in  overcoming  all  ob- 
structions.) See  Scilla. 

PA'NCREAS.  (From  nag,  all,  and  icpeag,  flesh : so 
called  from  its  fleshy  consistence.)  A glandular  viscus 
of  the  abdomen,  of  a long  figure,  compared  to  a dog’s 
tongue,  situated  in  the  epigastric  region  under  the  sto- 
mach. It  is  composed  of  innumerable  small  glands, 
the  excretory  ducts  of  which  unite  and  form  one  duct, 
called  the  pancreatic  duct,  which  perforates  the  duo- 
denum with  the  ductus  communis  choledochus,  and 
conveys  a fluid,  in  its  nature  similar  to  saliva,  into  the 
intestines.  The  pancreatic  artery  is  a branch  of  the 
splenic.  The  veins  evacuate  themselves  into  the  sple- 
nic vein.  Its  nerves  are  from  the  par  vagum  and  great 
intercostal.  The  use  of  the  pancreas  is  to  secrete  the 
pancreatic  juice,  which  is  to  be  mixed  with  the  chyle 
in  the  duodenum.  The  quantity  of  the  fluid  secreted 
is  uncertain ; but  it  must  be  very  considerable,  if  we 
compare  it  with  the  weight  of  the  saliva,  the  pancreas 
being  three  times  larger,  and  seated  in  a warmer  place. 
It  is  expelled  by  the  force  of  the  circulating  blood,  and 
the  pressure  of  the  incumbent  viscera  in  the  full  abdo- 
men. Its  great  utility  appears  from  its  constancy,  be- 
ing found  in  almost  all  animals;  nor  is  this  refuted  by 
the  few  experiments  in  which  a part  of  it  was  cut  out 
from  a robust  animal,  without  occasioning  death ; be- 
cause the  whole  pancreas  cannot  be  removed  without 
the  duodenum:  for  even  a part  ofthe  lungs  maybe 
cut  out  without  producing  death,  but  they  are  not, 
therefore,  useless.  It  seems  principally  to  dilute  the 
viscid  cystic  bile,  to  mitigate  its  acrimony,  and  to  mix 
it  with  the  food.  Hence,  it  is  poured  into  a place  re- 
mote from  the  duct  from  the  liver,  as  often  as  there  is 
no  gall-bladder.  Like  the  rest  of  the  intestinal  hu- 
mours it  dilutes  and  resolves  the  mass  of  aliments,  and 
performs  every  other  office  of  the  saliva. 

PANCREATIC.  (Pancreaticus ; from  pancreas , 

the  name  of  a viscus.)  Of  or  belonging  to  the  pan- 
creas. 

Pancreatic  duct.  See  Ductus  pancreaticics. 

Pancreatic  juice.  See  Pancreas. 

Pancre'ne.  (From  nag,  all,  and  Kpyvy,  a fountain.) 
A name  of  the  pancreas  from  its  great  secretion. 

Pandali'tium.  A whitlow. 

PANDEMIC.  (Pandemicus ; from  nav,  all,  and 
dripog,  the  people.)  A disease  is  so  termed  which  at- 
tacks all  or  a great  many  persons  in  the  same  place  and 
at  the  same  time.  A pandemic  disease  is  one  which  is 
very  general. 

PANDICULA'TIO.  (From  pandiculo,  to  gape  and 
stretch.)  Pandiculation,  or  a restless  stretching  or 
gaping,  such  as  accompanies  the  cold  fit  of  an  ague. 

PANDURIFORMIS.  Fiddle-shaped;  applied  to  a 
leaf,  which  is  oblong,  broad  at  the  two  extremities,  and 
contracted  in  the  middle,  as  in  the  fiddle  dock,  Rumex 
pulcher. 

PANICULA.  A panicle.  A species  of  compound 

149 


PAP 


PAP 


inflorescence  which  bears  the  flowers  in  a sort  of  loose, 
subdivided,  bunch  or  cluster,  without  any  order,  ap- 
pearing like  a branched  spike.  The  flowers  of  the 
JEs cuius  hippo-castanum , Rhus  cotinus,  Gypsophylla 
paniculata,  and  Syringa  vulgaris , are  good  examples 
of  a panicle;  but  this  species  of  inflorescence  occurs 
most  in  grasses,  as  in  Poa  aquatica. 

1.  When  the  stalks  are  distant,  lax,  or  spreading, 
it  is  called  Panicula  patula ; as  in  Campanula  patula. 

2.  Panicula  coarlata,  is  a dense  or  crowded  one,  ob- 
served in  Campanula  rapunculus. 

3.  P.  dichotoma,  forked ; as  in  Linum  Jlavum. 

4.  P.  brachiata,  crossing  each  other  in  pairs;  as  in 
Salvia  paniculala. 

5.  P.  (livaricata,  a more  spreading  one  than  the  pa- 
tulous ; as  in  the  Pnenanthes  muralis. 

PA'NICUM.  (^9  paniculis,  from  its  many  panicles; 
the  spike  consisting  of  innumerable  thick  seeds,  dis- 
posed in  many  panicles.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Triandria; 
Order,  Digynia. 

Panicum  italicum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  Indian  millet-seed,  which  is 
much  esteemed  in  Italy,  being  a constant  ingredient 
in  soups,  and  made  into  a variety  of  forms  for  the 
table. 

Panicum  miliaceum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  the  millet-seed.  They  are  esteem- 
ed as  a nutritious  article  of  diet,  and  are  often  made 
into  puddings  in  this  country. 

PA'NIS.  Bread.  See  Bread. 

Pants  cuculi.  See  Oxalis  acetosella. 

Panis  forcinus.  A species  of  cyclamen. 

PANNI'CULUS.  (From  pannus,  cloth.)  1.  A 
piece  of  fine  cloth. 

2.  The  cellular  and  carnous  membranes  are  so  called 
from  their  resemblance  to  a piece  of  fine  cloth. 

Panno'nica.  (From  pannus,  a rag:  so  called  be- 
cause its  stalk  is  divided  into  many  uneven  points, 
like  the  end  of  a piece  of  rag.)  Hawk-weed,  or  Hy- 
pochceris. 

PA  NNUS.  (From  nevo),  to  labour.) 

1.  A piece  of  cloth. 

2.  A tent  for  a wound. 

3.  A speck  in  the  eye,  resembling  a bit  of  rag. 

4.  An  irregular  mark  upon  the  skin. 

Pano'ctia.  A bubo  in  the  groin. 

PANOPHO'BIA.  (From  nav,  all,  and  <f>o6og,  fear.) 

Pantophobia.  That  kind  of  melancholy  which  is  prin- 
cipally characterized  by  groundless  fears. 

PANSY.  See  Viola  tricolor. 

Pantago'ga.  (From  nag,  all,  and  ayw,  to  drive  out.) 
Medicines  which  expel  all  morbid  humours. 

Panto  lmius.  (From  nag,  all,  and  roXpaw,  to  dare: 
so  named  from  its  general  uses.)  Amedicine  described 
by  iEgineta. 

Pantopho'bia.  See  Panophobia. 

PA'NUS.  (From  nevoo,  to  work.)  1.  A weaver’s 
roll. 

2.  A soft  tumour,  like  a weaver’s  roll. 

PAPA'VER.  ( Papaver , eris.  n. ; from  pappa,  pap: 
so  called  because  nurses  used  to  mix  this  plant  in  chil- 
dren’s food  to  relieve  the  colic  and  make  them  sleep.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Polyandria;  Order,  Monogynia.  The 
poppy. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  white  poppy. 
See  Papaver  somniferum. 

Papaver  erraticum.  See  Papaver  rhceas. 

Papaver  nigrum.  The  black  poppy.  This  is  mere- 
ly a variety  of  the  white  poppy,  producing  black  seeds. 
See  Papaver  somniferum. 

Papaver  rhceas.  The  systematic  and  pharmaco- 
poeial  name  of  the  red  corn  poppy.  Papaver  errati- 
cum. Papaver — capsulis  glabris  globosis,  caule-piloso 
multifloro  ;—foliis  pennat.ijidis  incisis  of  Linnaeus. 
The  heads  of  this  species,  like  those  of  the  somnife- 
rum, contain  a milky  juice  of  a narcotic  quality ; from 
which  an  extract  is  prepared,  that  has  been  success- 
fully employed  as  a sedative.  The  flowers  have  some- 
what of  the  smell  of  opium,  and  a mucilaginous  taste, 
accompanied  with  a slight  degree  of  bitterness.  A 
syrup  of  these  flowers  is  directed  in  the  London  Phar- 
macopoeia, which  has  been  thought  useful  as  an  ano- 
dyne and  pectoral,  and  is  prescribed  in  coughs  and 
catarrhal  affections.  See  Syrupus  rhueados. 

Papaver  somniferum-  The  systematic  name  of 
150 


the  white  poppy,  from  which  opium  is  obtained.  Lin- 
nseus  describes  the  plant: — Papaver — calycibus , cap - 
sulisque  glabris,  foliis  ampler, icaulibus  incisis.  This 
drug  is  also  called  opium  thebaicum,  from  being  an- 
ciently prepared  chiefly  at  Thebes : Opion  and  manus 
Dei,  from  its  extensive  medical  virtues,  &c.  The  Ara- 
bians called  it  affion  and  afium.  It  is  the  concreted 
milky  juice  of  the  capsule  or  head  of  the  poppy.  It  is 
brought  from  Turkey,  Egypt,  the  East  Indies,  and 
other  parts  of  Asia,  where  poppies  are  cultivated  for 
this  use  in  fields,  as  corn  among  us.  The  manner  in 
which  it  is  collected  has  been  described  long  ago  by 
Ksempfer,  and  others;  but  the  most  circumstantial  de- 
tail .of  the  culture  of  the  poppy,  and  the  method  of 
procuring  the  opium,  is  that  given  by  Kerr,  as  prac- 
tised in  the  province  of  Bahar.  He  says,  “The  field 
being  well  prepared  by  the  plough  and  harrow,  and 
reduced  to  an  exact  level  superficies,  it  is  then  divided 
into  quadrangular  areas  of  seven  feet  long,  and  five 
feet  in  breadth,  leaving  two  feet  of  interval,  which  is 
raised  five  or  six  inches,  and  excavated  into  an  aque- 
duct for  conveying  water  to  every  area,  for  which  pur- 
pose they  have  a well  in  every  cultivated  field.  The 
seeds  are  sown  in  October  or  November.  The  plants 
are  allowed  to  grow  six  or  eight  inches  distant  from 
each  other,  and  are  plentifully  supplied  with  water  ; 
when  the  young  plants  are  six  or  eight  inches  high, 
they  are  watered  more  sparingly.  But  the  cultivator 
spreads  all  over  the  areas  a nutriment  compost  of 
ashes,  human  excrements,  cow  dung,  and  a large  por- 
tion of  nitrous  earths,  scraped  from  the  highways  and 
old  mud  walls.  • Whdn  the  plants  are  nigh  flowering, 
they  are  watered  profusely,  to  increase  the  juice. 
When  the  capsules  are  half  grown,  no  more  water  is 
given,  and  they  begin  to  collect  the  opium.  At  sunset 
they  make  two  longitudinal  double  incisions  upon  each 
half-ripe  capsule,  passing  from  below  upwards,  and 
taking  care  not  to  penetrate  the  internal  cavity  of  the 
capsule.  The  incisions  are  repealed  every  evening 
until  each  capsule  has  received  six  or  eight  wounds; 
then  are  they  allowed  to  ripen  their  seeds.  The  ripe 
capsules  affoid  little  or  no  juice.  If  the  wound  was 
made  in  the  heat  of  the  day,  a cicatrix  would  be  too 
soon  formed.  The  night  dews,  by  their  moisture,  fa- 
vour the  exstillation  of  the  juice.  Early  in  the  morn- 
ing, old  women,  boys,  and  girls,  collect  the  juice  by 
scraping  it  otf  the  wounds  with  a small  iron  scoop,  and 
deposite  the  whole  in  an  earthen  pot,  where  it  is  work- 
ed by  the  hand  in  the  open  sunshine^  until  it  becomes 
of  a considerable  spissilude.  It  is  then  formed  into 
cakes  of  a globular  shape,  and  about  four  pounds  in 
weight,  and  laid  into  little  earthen  basins  to  be  fur- 
ther exsiccated.  These  cakes  are  covered  over  with 
the  poppy  or  tobacco  leaves,  and  dried  until  they  are 
fit  for  sale.  Opium  js  frequently  adulterated  with  cow 
dung,  the  extract  of  the  poppy  plant  procured  by  boil- 
ing, and  various  other  substances  which  they  keep  in 
secrecy.”  This  process,  however,  is  now  but  rarely 
practised,  the  consumption  of  this  drug  being  too  great 
to  be  supplied  by  that  method  of  collection. 

The  best  sort  of  the  officinal  opium  is  the  expressed 
juice  of  the  heads,  or  of  the  heads  and  the  upper  part 
of  the  stalks  inspissated  by  a gentle  heat.  This  was 
formerly  called  meconium,  in  distinction  from  the  true, 
opium,  which  issues  spontaneously. 

The  inferior  sorts  (for  there  are  considerable  differ 
ences  in  the  quality  of  this  drug,)  are  said  to  be  pre- 
pared by  boiling  the  plant  in  water,  and  evaporating 
the  strained  decoction;  but  as  no  kind  of  our  opium 
will  totally  dissolve  in  w’ater,  the  juice  is  most  proba- 
bly extracted  by  expression.  Newman  was  informed 
by  some  Turks  at  Genoa  and  Leghorn,  that  in  some 
places  the  heads,  stalks,  and  leaves  are  committed  to 
the  press  together,  and  that  this  juice  inspissated  af- 
fords a very  good  opium. 

On  this  head  Dr.  Lewis  remarks,  that  the  point  has 
not  yet  been  fully  determined.  It  is  commonly  sup- 
posed, that  whatever  preparations  the  Turks  may 
make  from  the  poppy  for  their  own  use,  tlic  opium 
brought  to  us  is  really  the  milky  juice  collected  from 
incisions  made  in  the  heads,  as  described  by  Ka*nipfer. 
It  is  certain  that  an  extract  made  by  boiling  the  heads, 
or  the  heads  and  stalks  in  water,  is  much  weaker  than 
opium;  but  it  appears  also,  that  the  pure  milky  tears 
are  considerably  stronger. 

The  principles  separable  from  opium  are,  a resin, 
gum,  besides  a minute  portion  of  saline  matter,  and 


PAP 


PAP 


water  and  earth,  which  are  intimately  combined  to- 
gether, insomuch  that  all  the  three  dissolve  almost 
equally  in  water  and  in  spirit. 

Four  ounces  of  opium,  treated  with  alkohol,  yielded 
three  ounces  and  four  scruples  of  resinous  extract ; five 
drachms  and  a scruple  of  insoluble  impurities  remain- 
ing. On  taking  four  ounces  more,  and  applying  water 
at  first,  Newman  obtained  two  ounces  live  drachms 
and  one  scruple  of  gummy  extract;  the  insoluble  part 
amounting  here  to  seven  drachms  and  a scruple.  In 
distillation,  alkohol  brought  over  little  or  nothing;  but 
the  distilled  water  was  considerably  impregnated  with 
the  peculiar  ill  smell  of  opium. 

From  this  analysis  may  be  estimated  the  effects  of 
different  solvents  upon  it.  Alkohol  and  proof  spirit 
dissolving  its  resin,  afford  tinctures  possessing  all  its 
virtues.  Water  dissolves  its  gummy  part,  which  is 
much  less  active  ; but  a part  of  the  resin  is  at  the  same 
time  taken  up  by  the  medium  of  the  gum.  Wines  also 
afford  solutions  possessing  the  virtues  of  opium.  Vine- 
gar dissolves  its  active  matter,  but  greatly  impairs  its 
power. 

A new  vegetable  alkali,  to  which  the  name  of  mor- 
phia is  given,  has  also  been  extracted  from  opium.  It 
is  in  this  alkali  that  the  narcotic  principle  resides.  It 
was  first  obtained  pure  by  Sertiirner,  in  the  year  1817. 
Two  somewhat  different  processes  for  procuring  it 
have  been  given  by  Robiquet  and  Choulant.  Accord- 
ing to  the  former,  a concentrated  infusion  of  opium  is 
to  be  boiled  with  a small  quantity  of  common  magne- 
sia for  a quarter  of  an  hour.  A considerable  quantity 
of  a grayish  deposite  falls.  This  is  to  be  washed  on  a 
filter  with  cold  water;  and,  when  dry,  acted  on  by 
weak  alkohol  for  some  time,  at  a temperature  beneath 
ebullition.  In  this  way,  very  little  morphia,  but  § great 
quantity  of  colouring  matter,  is  separated.  The  mat- 
ter is  then  to  be  drained  on  a filter,  washed  with  a little 
cold,  alkohol,  and  afterward  boiled  with  a large  quan- 
tity of  highly  rectified  alkohol.  This  liquid  being  fil- 
tered while  hot,  on  cooling,  it  deposites  tiie  morphia  in 
crystals,  and  very  little  coloured.  The  solution  in  al- 
kohol, and  crystallization  being  repeated  two  or  three 
times,  colourless  morphia  is  obtained. 

The  theory  of  this  process  is  the  following : Opium 
contains  a meconiate  of  morphia.  The  magnesia  com- 
bines with  the  meconic  acid,  and  the  morphia  is  dis- 
placed. 

Choulant  directs  us  to  concentrate  a dilute  watery 
infusion  of  opium,  and  leave  it  at  rest  till  it  sponta- 
neously let  fall  its  sulphate  of  lime  in  minute  crystals. 
Evaporate  to  dryness;  dissolve  in  a little  water,  and 
throw  down  any  remaining  lime  and  sulphuric  acid, 
by  the  cautious  addition,  first  of  oxalate  of  ammonia, 
and  then  of  muriate  of  barytes.  Dilute  the  liquid 
with  a large  body  of  water,  and  add  caustic  ammonia 
to  it  as  long  as  any  precipitate  falls.  Dissolve  this  in 
vinegar,  and  throw  it  down  again  with  ammonia.  Di- 
gest on  the  precipitate  about  twice  its  w eight  of  sul- 
phuric aether,  and  throw  the  whole  upon  a filter.  The 
dry  powder  is  to  be  digested  three  times  in  caustic  am- 
monia, and  as  often  in  cold  alkohol.  The  remaining 
powder  being  dissolved  in  twelve  ounces  of  boiling  al- 
kohol, and  the  filtered  hot  solution  being  set  aside  for 
18  hours,  deposites  colourless  transparent  crystals,  con- 
sisting of  double  pyramids.  By  concentrating  the  su- 
pernatant alkoholic  solution,  more  crystals  may  be  ob- 
tained. 

Dr.  Thomson  directs  us  to  pour  caustic  ammonia  into 
a strong  infusion  of  opium,  and  to  separate  the  brown- 
ish-white precipitate  by  the  filter ; to  evaporate  the 
infusion  to  about  one-sixth  of  its  volume,  and  mix  the 
concentrated  liquid  with  more  ammonia.  A new  de- 
posite of  impure  morphia  is  obtained.  Let  the  whole 
of  the  deposites  be  collected  on  the  filter,  and  washed 
with  cold  water.  When  well  drained,  pour  a little 
alkohol  on  it,  and  let  the  alkoholic  liquid  pass  through 
the  filter.  It  will  carry  off  a good  deal  of  the  colouring 
matter,  and  very  little  of  the  morphia.  ‘Dissolve  the 
impure  morphia  thus  obtained,  in  acetic  acid,  and  mix 
the  solution  which  has  a very  deep  brown  colour,  with 
a sufficient  quantity  of  ivorv-black.  This  mixture  is 
to  be  frequently  agitated  for  24  hours,  and  then  thrown 
on  the  filter.  The  liquid  passes  through  quite  colour- 
less. If  ammonia  be  now  dropped  into  it,  pure  mor- 
phia falls  in  the  state  of  a white  powder.  If  we  dis- 
solve this  precipitate  in  alkohol,  and  evaporate  that 
liquid  slowly  we  obtain  the  morphia  in  pretty  regular 


crysta  . It  is  perfectly  white,  has  a pearly  lustre,  la 
destitute  of  smell,  but  has  an  intensely  bitter  taste; 
and  the  shape  of  the  crystals  in  all  my  trials  was  a 
four-sided  rectangular  prism.’ — Annals  of  Phil.,  June, 
1820.  On  the  above  process,  it  should  be  observed, 
that  the  acetic  solution  must  contain  a good  deal  of 
phosphate  of  lime,  derived  from  the  ivory-black ; and 
that  therefore  those  who  have  used  that  precipitate  for 
morphia  in  medicine,  have  been  disappointed.  The 
subsequent  solution  in  alkohol,  however,  and  crystalli- 
zation, render  it  pure. 

Choulant  says,  it  crystallizes  in  double  four-sided 
pyramids,  whose  bases  are  squares  or  rectangles; 
sometimes  in  prisms  with  trapezoidal  bases. 

It  dissolves  in  82  times  its  weight  of  boiling  water; 
and  the  solution  on  cooling  deposites  regular,  colourless, 
transparent  crystals.  It  is  soluble  in  -16  times  its  weight 
of  boiling  alkohol,  and  in  42  times  its  weight  of  cold 
alkohol,  of  0.92.  It  dissolves  in  eight  times  its  weight 
of  sulphuric  aether.  All  these  solutions  change  the  in- 
fusion of  brazil-wood  to  violet,  and  the  tincture  of 
rhubarb  to  brown.  The  saturated  alkoholic  and  aethe- 
reous  solutions,  when  rubbed  on  the  skin,  leave  a red 
mark 

Sulphate  of  morphia  crystallizes  in  prisms,  which 
dissolve  in  twice  their  weight  of  distilled  water. 

Nitrate  of  morphia  yields  needle-form  crystals  in 
stars,  which  are  soluble  in  14  times  their  weight  of  dis- 
tilled water. 

Muriate  of  morphia  is  in  feather-shaped  crystals  and 
needles.  It  is  soluble  in  104  times  its  weight  of  distil- 
led water. 

The  acetate  crystallizes  in  needles,  the  tartrate  in 
prisms,  and  the  carbonate  in  short  prisms. 

Morphia  acts  with  great  energy  on  the  animal  eco- 
nomy. A grain  and  a half  taken  at  three  different 
times,  produced  such  violent  symptoms  upon  three 
young  men  of  17  years  of  age,  that  Sertiirner  was 
alarmed  lest  the  consequences  should  have  proved 
fatal. 

Morphia,  according  to  its  discoverer,  melts  in  a gen- 
tle heat ; and  in  that  state  has  very  much  the  appear- 
ance of  melted  sulphur.  On  cooling,  it  again  crys- 
tallizes. It  burns  easily ; and,,  when  heated  in  close 
vessels,  leaves  a solid  resinous  black  matter,  having  a 
peculiar  smell. 

The  use  of  this  celebrated  medicine,  though  not  un- 
known to  Hippocrates,  can  be  clearly  traced  to  Diago- 
ras,  who  was  nearly  his  cotemporary ; and  its  impor- 
tance has  ever  since  been  gradually  advanced  by  suc- 
ceeding physicians  of  different  nations.  Its  extensive 
practical  utility,  however,  has  not  been  long  well  un- 
derstood ; and  in  this  country  perhaps  may  be  dated 
from  the  time  of  Sydenham.  Opium  is  the  chief  nar- 
cotic now  employed;  it  acts  directly  upon  the  nervous 
power,  diminishing  the  sensibility,  irritability,  and  mo- 
bility of  the  system ; and,  according  to  Cullen,  in  a 
certain  manner  suspending  the  motion  of  the  nervous 
fluid  to  and  from  the  brain,  and  thereby  inducing  sleep, 
one  of  its  principal  effects  From  this  sedative  power 
of  opium,  by  which  it  allays  pain,  inordinate  action, 
and  restlessness,  it  naturally  follows  that  it  may  be  em- 
ployed with  advantage  in  a great  variety  of  diseases. 
Indeed,  there  is  scarcely  any  disorder  in  which,  under 
some  circumstances,  its  use  is  not  found  proper  ; and 
though  in  many  cases  it  fails  of  producing  sleep,  yet, 
if  taken  in  a full  dose,  it  occasions  a pleasant  tranquil- 
lity of  mind,  and  a drowsiness  which  approaches  to 
sleep,  and  which  always  refreshes  the  patient.  Besides 
the  sedative  power  of  opium,  it  is  known  to  act  more 
or  less  as  a stimulant,  exciting  the  motion  of  the  blood. 
By  a certain  conjoined  effort  of  this  sedative  and 
stimulant  effect,  opium  has  been  thought  to  produce  in- 
toxication, a quality  for  which  it  is  much  used  in  east- 
ern countries. 

The  principal  indications  which  opium  is  capable 
of  fulfilling  are,  supporting  the  actions  of  the  system, 
allaying  pain  and  irritation,  relieving  spasmodic  action, 
inducing  sleep,  and  checking  morbidly  increased  secre- 
tions. It  is  differently  administered,  as  it  is  designed 
to  fulfil  one  or  other  of  these  indications. 

Where  opium  is  given  as  a stimulus,  it  ought  to  be 
administered  in  small  doses,  frequently  repeated,  and 
slowly  increased,  as  by  this  mode  tne  excitement  it 
produces  is  best  kept  up.  But  where  the  design  is  to 
mitigate  pain  or  irritation,  or  the  symptoms  arising 
from  these,  it  ought  to  be  given  in  a full  dose,  and  at 


PAP 


PAP 


distant  intervals,  by  -which  the  state  of  diminished 
power  and  sensibility  is  most  completely  induced. 

One  other  general  rule,  with  respect  to  the  adminis- 
tration of  opium,  is,  that  it  ought  not  to  be  given  in  any 
pure  inflammatory  affection,  at  least  uutil  evacuations 
have  been  used,  or  unless  means  are  employed  to 
determine  it  to  the  surface,  and  produce  a diapho- 
resis. 

In  continued  fevers,  not  of  the  pure  inflammatory 
kind,  opium  is  administered  sometimes  as  a general 
stimulus,  and  at  other  times  to  allay  irritation.  The 
great  practical  rule  in  such  cases  is,  that  it  ought  to  be 
given  iu  such  quantities  only,  that  the  pulse  becomes 
slower  and  fuller  from  its  operation.  Its  exhibition  is 
improper  where  local  inflammation,  especially  of  the 
brain,  or  of  its  membranes,  exists. 

An  intermittent  fever,  an  opiate  renders  the  parox- 
ysms milder,  and  facilitates  the  cure.  Dr.  Cullen 
recommends  the  union  of  opium  with  bark,  which 
enables  the  stomach  to  bear  the  latter  in  larger  doses, 
and  adds  considerably  to  its  efficacy. 

In  the  profluvia  and  cholera,  opium  is  employed  to 
lessen  the  discharge,  and  is  frequently  the  principal 
remedy  in  effecting  the  cure.  In  passive  haetnorrhagy, 
it  is  useful  by  its  stimulant  power.  In  retrocedent 
gout  it  is  used  as  a powerful  stimulant. 

In  convulsive  and  spasmodic  diseases  it  is  advanta- 
geously administered,  with  the  view  of  relieving  symp- 
toms, or  even  of  effecting  a cure;  and  in  several  of 
them  it  requires  to  be  given  to  a very  great  extent. 

In  lues  venerea  it  promotes  the  action  of  mercury, 
and  relieves  the  irritation  arising  either  from  that  re- 
medy, or  the  disease. 

in  the  year  1779,  opium  was  introduced  into  prac- 
tice as  a specific  against  the  lues  venerea.  It.  was  em- 
ployed in  several  of  the  military  hospitals,  where  it 
acquired  the  reputation  of  a most  efficacious  remedy  ; 
and  Dr.  Michaelis,  physician  of  the  Hessian  forces, 
published  an  account  of  a great  number  of  successful 
experiments  made  with  it,  in  the  first  volume  of  the 
Medical  Communications,  in  the  year  1784.  Opium 
was  afterward  given  as  an  anti-venereal  remedy  in 
some  foreign  hospitals.  Many  trials  were  also  made 
of  its  virtues  in  several  of  the  London  hospitals,  and 
in  the  Royal  Infirmary  at  Edinburgh.  Very  favourable 
reports  of  its  efficacy  in  removing  venereal  complaints 
were  published  by  different  practitioners ; but,  at  the 
same  time,  so  many  deductions  were  to  be  made,  and 
so  many  exceptions  were  to  be  admitted,  that  it  re- 
quired little  sagacity  to  discover,  that  most  of  the  advo- 
cates for  this  medicine  reposed  but  a slender  and  fluc- 
tuating confidence  in  its  anti- venereal  powers.  Mr. 
Pearson  made  several  experiments  on  the  virtues  of 
opium  in  lues  venerea,  at  the  Lock  Hospital,  in  the 
years  1784  and  1785  ; and  published  a narrative  of  its 
effects,  in  the  second  volume  of  the  Medical  Commu- 
nications. “The  result  of  my  experiments,”  says  lie, 
“ was  very  unfavourable  to  the  credit  of  this  new  re- 
medy ; and  I believe  that  no  surgeon  in  this  country 
relies  on  opium  as  a specific  against  the  venereal  virus. 

I have  been  long  accustomed  to  administer  opium  with 
great  freedom  during  the  mercurial  course;  and  the 
experience  of  nearly  twenty  years  has  taught  me,  that, 
when  it  is  combined  with  mercury,  the  proper  efficacy 
of  the  latter  is  not  in  any  measure  increased ; that  it 
would  not  be  safe  to  rely  upon  a smaller  quantity  of 
the  mineral  specific,  nor  to  contract  the  mercurial 
course  within  a shorter  limit  than  where  no  opium  has 
been  employed.  This  representation  will  not,  I pre- 
sume, admit  of  controversy;  yet  we  frequently  hear 
people  expressing  themselves  upon  this  head,  as  if  opi- 
um manifested  some  peculiar  qualities  in  venereal 
complaints,  of  a distinct  nature  from  its  well-known 
narcotic  properties,  and  thus  afforded  an  important  aid 
to  mercury  in  the  removal  of  lues  venerea.”  Perhaps 
it  may  not  be  useful  to  disentangle  this  subject  from 
the  perplexity  in  which  such  indefinite  language  neces- 
sarily involves  it.  Opium,  when  given  in  conjunction 
with  mercury,  by  diminishing  the  sensibility  of  the 
stomach  and  bowels,  prevents  many  of  those  incon- 
veniences which  this  mineral  is  apt  to  excite  in  the 
prims  vis ; and  thus  its  admission  into  the  general 
system  is  facilitated.  Mercury  will  likewise  often  pro- 
duce a morbid  irritability,  accompanied  with  restless- 
ness and  insomnolescence  ; and  it  sometimes  renders 
venereal  sores  painful,  and  disposed  to  spread.  These 
accidental  evils,  not  necessarily  connected  with  the 


venereal  disease,  may  be  commonly  alleviated,  ana 
often  entirely  removed,  by  a judicious  administration 
of  opium;  and  the  patient  will  consequently  be 
enabled  to  persist  in  using  the  mineral  specific.  It, 
however,  must  be  perfectly  obvious,  that  opium,  in 
conferring  this  sort  of  relief,  communicates  no  addi- 
tional virtues  to  mercury ; and  that,  in  reality,  it  as- 
sists the  constitution  of  the  patient,  not  the  operation 
of  the  medicine  with  which  it  is  combined.  The  salu- 
tary effects  of  mercury  as  an  antidote  may  be  dimi- 
nished or  lost  by  the  supervention  of  vomiting,  dysen- 
tery, &c.  Opium  will  often  correct  these  morbid  ap- 
pearances, and  so  will  spices,  wine,  and  appropriate 
diet,  &c.  ; yet  it  would  be  a strange  use  of  words  to 
urge,  wherever  these  articles  of  food  were  beneficial 
to  a venereal  patient,  that  they  concurred  in  augment- 
ing the  medicinal  virtues  of  mercury.  It  may  be  sup- 
posed that  the  majority  of  medical  men  would  under- 
stand by  the  terms,  “ to  assist  a medicine  in  curing 
a contagious  disease,”  that  the  drug  conjoined  with 
the  specific  actually  increased  its  medicinal  efficacy; 
whereas,  in  the  instances  before  us,  it  is  the  human 
body  only  which  has  been  aided  to  resist  the  operation 
of  certain  noxious  powers,  which  would  render  a per- 
severance in  the  antidote  prejudicial  or  impossible. 
The  soothing  qualities  of  this  admirable  medicine  can 
scarcely  be  estimated  too  highly.  Yet  we  must  be 
ware  of  ascribing  effects  to  them  which  have  no  ex- 
istence ; since  a confidence  in  the  anti-venereal  virtue 
of  opium  would  be  a source  of  greater  mischief  than 
its  most  valuable  properties  would  be  able  to  coin 
pensate. 

Opium  is  employed  with  laxatives  in  colic,  and  often 
prevents  ileus  and  inflammation,  by  relieving  the 
spasm. 

It  is  given  also  to  promote  healthy  suppuration,  and 
is  a principal  remedy  in  arresting  the  progress  of  gan- 
grene. 

The  sudorific  property  of  opium  is  justly  considered 
of  considerable  power,  more  especially  in  combination 
with  ipecacuan  or  antimony.  The  compound  powder 
of  ipecacuan,  consisting  of  one  part  of  ipecacuan,  one 
part  of  opium,  and  eight  of  sulphate  of  potassa,  is  a 
very  powerful  sudorific,  given  in  a dose  from  15  to  25 
grains.  The  combination  of  opium  with  antimony  is 
generally  made  by  adding  30  to  40  drops  of  antimonial 
wine  to  25  or  30  drops  of  tincture  of  opium,  and  form- 
ing them  into  a draught. 

Opium,  taken  into  the  stomach  in  immoderate  doses, 
proves  a narcotic  poison,  producing  vertigo,  tremors, 
convulsions,  delirium,  stupor,  stertor,  and,  finally,  fatal 
apoplexy. 

Where  opium  has  been  taken  so  as  to  produce  these 
dangerous  consequences,  the  contents  of  the  stomach 
are  first  to  be  evacuated  by  a powerful  emetic,  as  a so- 
lution of  the  sulphate  of  zinc  Large  draughts  of 
vinegar,  or  any  of  the  native  vegetable  acids,  are  then 
to  be  swallowed.  Moderate  doses  of  brandy,  or  a 
strong  infusion  of  coffee,  have  also  been  found  useful. 

Respecting  the  external  application  of  opium,  authors 
seem  not  sufficiently  agreed.  Some  allege,  that  when 
applied  to  the  skin  it  allays  pain  and  spasm,  procures 
sleep,  and  produces  all  the  salutary  or  dangerous  ef- 
fects which  result  from  its  internal  use  ; while  others 
say,  that  thus  applied  it  has  little  or  no  effect  whatever. 
It  has  also  been  asserted,  that  when  mixed  with  caustic 
it  diminishes  the  pain  which  would  otherwise  ensue ; 
and  if  this  be  true,  it  is  probably  by  decreasing  the 
sensibility  of  the  part.  Injected  by  the  rectum,  it  has 
all  the  effect  of  opium  taken  into  the  stomach ; but  to 
answer  this  purpose,  double  the  quantity  is  to  be  em- 
ployed. Applied  to  the  naked  nerves  of  animals,  it 
produces  immediate  torpor  and  loss  of  power  in  all  the 
muscles  with  which  the  nerves  communicate. 

The  requisite  dose  of  opium  varies  in  different  per- 
sons and  iu  different  states  of  the  same  person.  A 
quarter  of  a grain  will  in  one  adult  produce  effects 
which  ten  times  the  quantity  will  not  do  in  another  < 
and  a dose  that  might  prove  fatal  in  cholera  or  colic, 
would  not  be  perceptible  in  many  cases  of  tetanus,  or 
mania.  The  lowest  fatal  dose  to  those  unaccustomed 
to  take  it,  seems  to  be  about  four  grains ; but  a dan- 
gerous dose  is  so  apt  to  produce  vomiting,  that  it  has 
seldom  time  to  occasion  death.  When  given  in  too 
small  a dose,  it  often  produces  disturbed  sleep,  and 
other  disagreeable  consequences ; and  in  some  cases  it 
seems  impossible  to  be  made  to  agree  in  any  dose  or 


PAR 


PAR 


form.  Often,  on  the  other  hand,  from  a small  dose 
sound  sleep  and  alleviation  of  pain  will  be  produced  ; 
while  a larger  one  occasions  vertigo  and  delirium. 
Some  prefer  the  repetition  5f  small  doses  ; others  the 
giving  a full  dose  at  once ; its  operation  is  supposed  to 
last  about  eight  hours ; this,  however,  must  depend 
upon  circumstances.  The  usual  dose  is  one  grain. 
The  officinal  preparations  of  this  drug  are  numerous. 
The  following  are  among  the  principal : Opium  puri- 
ficatum,  pilula  saponis  cum  opio,  pulvis  cornu  usti  cum 
opto , tinctura  opii , tinctura  camp  kora  compos  ita,  and 
confectio  opii : it  is  also  an  ingredient  in  the  pulvis 
ipecacuanha:  compositus , elcctuarium j aponicum  pulvis 
crette  compositus  cum  opio,  &c.  The  capsules  of  the 
poppy  are  also  directed  for  medicinal  use  in  the  form 
of  fomentation  ; and  in  the  syrup  us  pap  averis,  a use- 
ful anodyne,  which  often  succeeds  in  procuring  sleep 
where  opium  fails ; it  is,  however,  more  especially 
adapted  to  children.  The  seeds  of  this  species  of 
poppy  contain  a bland  oil,  and  in  many  places  are 
eaten  as  food;  as  a medicine,  they  have  been  usually 
given  in  the  form  of  emulsion  in  catarrlis,  strangu- 
ries, &.C. 

Pap'aw.  The  fruit  of  a species  of  carica.  See 
Carica  papaya. 

PAPILIONACEUS.  Papilionaceous.  A term 
applied  to  the  corolla  of  plants  when  they  are  irregular 
and  spreading,  and  thus  resemble  somewhat  the  butter- 
fly. The  various  petals  which  compose  such  a flower 
are  distinguished  by  appropriate  names : vexillum,  the 
standard,  the  large  one  at  the  back ; ala,  the  two  side 
petals ; and  carina,  the  heel,  consisting  of  two  petals 
united  or  separate,  embracing  the  internal  organs. 

PAPI'LLA.  (From  pappus,  down.  See  Ulla.) 
1.  The  nipple  of  the  breast.  See  Nipple. 

2.  The  fine  terminations  of  nerves,  &c.  as  the  ner- 
vous papillae  of  the  tongue,  skin,  <fcc. 

Papillae  medullares.  Small  eminences  on  the 
medulla  oblongata. 

Papilla'ris  herba.  See  Lapsana. 

PAP1LLOSUS.  Papillose.  Applied  to  stalks  con- 
nected with  soft  tubercles ; as  the  ice  plant,  Mesembry- 
anthemum  crystallinum. 

PAPPOSUS.  Pappose:  furnished  with  a pappus 
or  seed -down ; as  the  seeds  of  the  Leontodon  ta- 
raxacum. 

PAPPUS.  1.  The  hair  on  the  middle  of  the  chin. 
See  Capillus. 

2.  Th e seed-down.  This  is  restrained  by  Gaertner  to 
the  chaffy,  feathery,  or  bristly  crown  of  many  seeds 
that  have  no  pericarpium,  and  which  originates  in  a 
partial  calyx  crowning  the  summits  of  each  of  these 
seeds,  and  remaining  after  the  flower  is  fallen;  as  in 
the  seeds  of  dandelion,  goats-beard. 

The  same  term  is  used  by  the  generality  of  botanists 
for  the  feathery  crown  of  seeds  furnished  with  a cap- 
sule, as  well  as  for  a similar  appendage  to  the  base  or 
sides  of  any  seeds,  neither  of  which  can  originate  from 
a calyx.  For  the  former  of  these,  Gasrtner  adopts  the 
term  coma;  for  the  latter,  pubes;  which  last  also 
serves  for  any  downiness  or  wool  about  the  testa  of  a 
seed  ; as  in  the  cotton  plant,  and  Blandfordia  no- 
bilis. 

The  varieties  of  the  pappus  are, 

1.  P.  fessilis,  on  the  apex  of  the  seed,  without  any 
footstalk ; as  in  Asclepias  syriaca,  Nerium  oleander , 
and  Epilobium. 

2.  P.  stipitatus,  elevated  on  a footstalk ; as  in  Le- 
ontodon taraxacum. 

3.  P.  plumosus,  when  the  radii  of  the  footstalked 
pappus  are  hairy  laterally ; as  in  Tragopogon  pra- 
tense. 

The  lana  pappiformis  of  authors  is  not  a pappus, 
but  hairs  which  only  surround  the  seed ; as  in  Eryo- 
pkorum. 

PA'PULA.  ( Papula , ce.  f. ; diminutive  of  pappa,  a 
dug  or  nipple.  See  Ulla.)  A very  small  and  acumi- 
nated elevation  of  the  cuticle,  with  an  inflamed  base, 
not  containing  a fluid,  nor  tending  to  suppuration. 
The  duration  of  papuhe  is  uncertain,  but  they  termi- 
nate for  the  most  part  in  scurf. 

PARABYSMA.  (Parabysma,  atis.  ii.  ; from  zsapa- 
6voj,  congestion,  infarction,  coacervation.)  Dr.  Good 
has  applied  this  term  to  a genus  of  diseases,  (compre- 
hended by  Cullen  and  others  under  that  of  physconia,) 
Class,  Cceliaca;  Order,  Splanchnica.  Visceral  tur- 
gescence.  It  has  seven  species.  Parabysma  hepati- 


cum;  splenicum;  pancreaticum ; mesentericum ; in - 
testinale;  omentale;  complicatum. 

PA'R.  (Par,  aris.  n ; a pair.)  A pair. 

Par  cucullare.  So  Casserius  calls  the  Crieo-ary - 
taenoid  muscle. 

Par  vagum.  The  eighth  parr  of  nerves.  They 
arise  from  the  corpora  olivaria  of  the  medulla  ob- 
longata, and  proceed  into  the  neck,  thorax,  and  abdo- 
men. In  the  neck  the  par  vagum  gives  off  two 
branches,  the  lingual  and  superior  laryngeal ; and,  in 
the  thorax,  four  branches,  the  recurrent  laryngeal,  the 
cardiac,  the  pulmonary,  and  the  oesophageal  plexuses. 
At  length  the  trunks  of  the  nervi  vagi,  adjacent  to  the 
mediastinum,  run  into  the  stomach,  and  there  form 
the  stomachic  plexus,  which  branches  to  the  abdomi- 
nal plexuses. 

PARACELSUS,  a native  of  Switzerland,  born 
about  the  year  J493.  His  father  is  said  to  have  been  a 
practitioner  in  medicine,  and  inspired  him  with  a taste 
for  chemistry.  He  very  early  commenced  a sort  of 
rambling  life,  assuming  the  pompous  names  of  Phil- 
lipus,  Aureolus,  Theophrastus,  Paracelsus,  Bombas- 
tus  de  Huhniheim ; and  after  visiting  the  schools  of 
France,  Italy,  and  Germany,  he  sought  for  informa- 
tion during  several  years  among  quacks  of  every  de- 
scription, pretending  that  he  had  found  the  principles 
of  the  medical  art  altogether  erroneous.  He  appears 
to  have  possessed  the  talent  of  imposing  upon  man- 
kind in  an  eminent  degree ; for  even  the  learned  Eras- 
mus is  said  to  have  consulted  him.  It  cannot  be  a 
matter  of  surprise,  that,  by  the  bold  use  of  active  me- 
dicines, especially  mercury,  antimony,  and  opium,  he 
should  have  effected  some  remarkable  cures:  these 
cases  were  displayed  with  the  usual  exaggeration, 
while  those,  in  which  he  failed,  or  did  mischief,  passed 
unnoticed.  His  reputation,  however,  became  so  great, 
that  the  magistrates  of  Basle  engaged  him,  at  a large 
salary,  to  fill  the  chair  of  medicine  in  their  university 
Accordingly,  in  1527,  he  began  delivering  lectures, 
sometimes  in  barbarous  Latin,  oftener  in  German ; 
but,  though  he  gained  at  first  some  enthusiastic  adhe- 
rents, the  ridiculous  vanity  which  he  displayed,  de- 
spising every  other  authority  in  medicine,  whether 
ancient  or  modern,  soon  created  such  disgust,  that  he 
was  left  without  an  audience.  A quarrel  with  the 
magistrates,  on  account  of  a decision  against  his  de- 
mand of  fees,  which  was  deemed  exorbitant,  decided 
him  in  the  following  year  to  leave  the  place.  He  sub- 
sequently resided  in  Alsace,  and  other  parts  of.  Ger 
many,  leading  a life  of  extreme  intemperance,  in  the 
lowest  company ; yet  occasional  instances  of  extraor- 
dinary success  in  his  practice  still  preserved  him  some 
reputation,  notwithstanding  numerous  failures.  But 
the  most  striking  proof  of  the  folly  of  his  pretensions 
was  given  in  his  own  person;  for,  after  announcing 
that  he  was  in  possession  of  an  elixir  which  would 
prolong  human  life  to  an  indefinite  period,  he  died  at 
Saltzburg,  in  1541,  of  a fever.  It  must  be  acknow- 
ledged, however,  that  Paracelsus  was  of  material  ser- 
vice to  medicine,  by  showing  that  many  active  medi- 
cines might  be  safely  employed;  and  particularly  as 
having  been  one  of  the  first  to  exhibit  mercury  in  the 
cure  of  syphilis,  which  had  been  in  vain  attempted  by 
the  Galenical  remedies  then  in  use.  He  published 
little  during  his  life,  but  a great  number  of  posthumous 
treatises  appeared  under  his  name,  which  are  too  re- 
plete with  absurdities  to  deserve  enumeration. 

PARACENTE'SIS.  (From  rzapaKevreio,  to  pierce 
through.)  The  operation  of  tapping  to  evacuate  the 
water  in  ascites,  dropsy  of  the  ovarium,  &c. 

Paracma'sticos.  (From  7r apa/cya^o),  to  decline.) 
Paracmc.  The  declension  of  any  distemper ; also,  ac- 
cording to  Galen,  that  part  of  life  where  a person  is 
said  to  grow  old,  and  which  he  reckons  from  35  to  49, 
when  he  is  said  to  be  old. 

PARA'COE.  (From  trapa,  diminutive,  and  axovto, 
to  hear.)  Dulness  of  hearing. 

Paracolle'tica.  (From  irapaKoWaoyai,  to  glue 
together.)  Agglutinants,  or  substances  which  unite 
parts  preternaturally  separated. 

Para'cope.  (From  napaKonrw,  to  be  delirious.)  In 
Hippocrates,  it  is  a slight  delirium. 

Paracrusis.  (From  n apaupovu),  to  deprecate.)  A 
slight  disarrangement  of  the  faculties,  where  the  pa- 
tient is  inattentive  to  what  is  said  to  him. 

PARACU'SIS.  (From  napa,  wrong,  and  aicoveo,  to 
hear.)  Depraved  hearing.  Deafness.  A genus  oi 


PAR 


PAR 


disease  ia  the  class  Locales , and  order  Dysesthesia, 
of  Cullen.  It  is  occasioned  by  any  thing  that  proves 
injurious  to  the  ear,  as  loud  noises  from  the  firing  of 
cannon,  violent  colds,  particularly  affecting  the  head, 
inflammation  or  ulceration  of  the  membrane,  hard 
wax,  or  other  substances  interrupting  sounds,  too  great 
a dryness,  or  too  much  moisture  in  the  parts ; or  by 
atony,  debility,  or  paralysis  of  the  auditory  nerves. 
In  some  instances  it  ensues  in  consequence  of  pre- 
ceding diseases,  such  as  fever,  syphilis,  &c.  and  in 
others  it  depends  upon  an  original  defect  in  the  struc- 
ture or  formation  of  the  ear.  In  the  last  instance,  the 
person  is  usually  not  only  deaf,  but  likewise  dumb. 
There  are  two  species. 

1.  Paracusis  imperfecta;  Surditas.  When  existing 
sounds  are  not  heard  as  usual. 

2 Paracusis  imaginaria,  called  also  Sussurus ; Sy- 
rigmus ; Syringmos ; Tinnitus  aurium.  When  ima- 
ginary sounds  are  heard,  not  from  without,  but  excited 
within  the  ear. 

PARACYESIS.  (From  napa,  male;  and  icvyms, 
graviditas.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in 
Good’s  Nosology;  Class,  Genetica;  Order  . Carp  otic  a. 
Morbid  pregnancy.  It  has  three’  species,  viz.  Para- 
cyesis  irritativa,  utcrina,  abortus. 

Paracyna'nche.  (From  napa,  kvcov,  a dog,  and 
a\x <*b  t0  strangle.)  A species  of  quinsy.  See  Cy- 
nanciie. 

PARADI'SUS.  (Hebrew.)  A pungent  seed  re- 
sembling the  cardamom,  named  from  its  virtues.  See 
Amomum. 

Paradisi  grana.  See  Amomum. 

PARAGEUSIS.  (From  napa,  male,  yevto,  gustum 
prebeo.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s 
Nosology:  Class,  Neurotica;  Order,  JEsthetica.  Mor- 
bid taste.  It  comprehends  three  species,  viz.  Parageu- 
sis  acuta , obtusa,  expers. 

Paraglo'ssa.  (From  napa,  and  y\waaa,  the 
tongue.)  A prolapsus  of  the  tongue,  a swelled  tongue. 

Parago'ge.  (From  napayw,  to  adduce.)  This 
term  signifies  that  fitness  of  the  bones  to  one  another, 
which  is  discernible  in  their  articulation;  and  bones 
which  are  thereby  easier  of  reduction,  when  dislocated, 
are  by  Hippocrates  called  napaytoyorepa. 

Parala'mpsis.  (From  napaXapnu),  to  shine  a little.) 
Some  writers  use  this  word  to  express  a cicatrix  in  the 
transparent  part  of  the  cornea  of  the  eye. 

Paralla'gma.  (From  napaWarro),  to  change.  Pa- 
rallaxis.  The  transmutation  of  a solid  part  from  its 
proper  place,  as  where  one  part  of  a broken  bone  lies 
over  another. 

Paralla'xis.  See  Parallagma. 

Paralle'la.  (From  napaXXy'Xos,  parallel.)  A sort 
of  scurf  or  leprosy,  -affecting  only  the  palms  of  the 
hands,  and  running  down  them  in  parallel  lines. 

PARALO'GIA.  (From  n apaXcyu),  to  talk  absurdly.) 
A delirium  in  which  the  patient  talks  wildly. 

Paralo'phia.  (From  napa,  near,  and  \o(f>ia,  the 
first  vertebra  of  the  back.)  The  lower  and  lateral  part 
of  the  neck  near  the  vertebrae,  according  to  some  anato- 
mical writers,  as  Keil,  &c. 

PARA'LYSIS.  (From  napa^vco,  to  loose,  or  weak- 
en.) Catalysis;  Atlonitus  morbus;  Tremor.  The 
palsy.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Neuroses, 
and  Order  Cantata,  of  Cullen,  known  by  a loss  or  di- 
minution of  the  power  of  voluntary  motion,  affecting 
certain  parts  of  the  body,  often  acompanied  with  drow- 
siness. In  some  instances,  the  disease  is  confined  to  a 
particular  part ; but  it  more  usually  happens  that  one 
entire  side  of  the  body  from  the  head  downwards  is 
affected.  The  species  are : 

1.  Paralysis  partialis,  partial,  or  palsy  of  some  par- 
ticular muscle. 

2.  Paralysis  hemiplegica , palsy  of  one  side  longitu- 
dinally. 

3.  Paralysis  paraplegica,  palsy  of  one  half  of  the 
body,  taken  transversely,  as  both  legs  and  thighs. 

4.  Paralysis  venenata,  front  the  sedative  effects  of 
poisons.  Paralysis  is  also  symptomatic  of  several  dis- 
eases, as  worms,  scrofula,  syphilis,  &. c. 

It  may  arise  in  consequence  of  an  attack  of  apo- 
plexy. It  may  likewise  be  occasioned  by  any  thing 
that  prevents  the  flow  of  the  nervous  power  from  the 
brain  into  the  organs  of  motion;  hence  tumours,  over- 
distention, and  effusion,  often  give  rise  to  it.  It  may 
also  be  occasioned  by  translations  of  morbid  matter  to 
tire  head,  by  the  suppression  of  usual  evacuations,  and 


by  tne  pressure  made  on  the  nerves  by  uxations,  frac- 
tures, wounds,  or  other  external  injuries.  The  long- 
continued  application  of  sedatives  will  likewise  pro- 
duce palsy,  as  we  find  those,  whose  occupations  sub- 
ject them  to  the  constant  handling  of  white  lead,  and 
those  who  are  much  exposed  to  the  poisonous  fumes  of 
metals  or  minerals,  are  very  apt  to  be  attacked  with  it. 
Whatever  tends  to  relax  and  enervate  the  system,  may 
likewise  prove  an  occasional  cause  of  this  disease. 

Palsy  usually  comes  on  with  a sudden  and  imme- 
diate loss  of  the  motion  and  sensibility  of  the  parts ; 
but,  in  a few  instances,  it  is  preceded  by  a numbness, 
coldness,  and  paleness,  and  sometimes  by  slight  convul- 
sive twitches.  When  the  head  is  much  affected,  the 
eye  and  mouth  are  drawn  on  one  side,  the  memory  and 
judgment  are  much  impaired,  and  the  speech  is  indis- 
tinct and  incoherent.  If  the  disease  affects  the  extre- 
mities, and  has  been  of  long  duration,  it  not  only  pro- 
duces a loss  of  motion  and  sensibility,  but  likewise  a 
considerable  flaccidity  and  wasting  away  in  the  mus- 
cles of  the  parts  affected. 

When  palsy  attacks  any  vital  part,  such  as  the  brain, 
heart,  or  lungs,  it  soon  terminates  fatally.  When  it 
arises  as  a consequence  of  apoplexy,  it  generally  proves 
very  difficult  to  cure.  Paralytic  affections  of  the  lower 
extremities  ensuing  from  any  injury  done  to  the  spinal 
marrow,  by  blows  and  other  accidents,  usually  prove 
incurable.  Palsy,  although  a dangerous  disease  in 
every  instance,  particularly  at  an  advanced  period  of 
life,  is  sometimes  removed  by  the  occurrence  of  a 
diarrhoea  or  fever. 

The  morbid  appearances  to  be  observed  on  dissec- 
tions in  palsy  are  pretty  similar  to  those  which  are  to 
be  met  with  in  apoplexy ; hence  collections  of  blood, 
and  of  serous  fluids,  are  often  found  effused  on  the 
brain,  but  more  frequently  the  latter ; and  in  some  in- 
stances the  substance  of  this  organ  seems  to  have  suf- 
fered an  alteration.  In  palsy,  as  well  as  in  apoplexy 
the  collection  of  extravasaled  fluid  is  generally  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  brain  to  that  which  is  affected. 

The  general  indications  are,  to  remove,  as  far  as  pos- 
sible, any  compressing  cause,  and  to  rouse  gradually 
the  torpid  portion  of  the  nervous  system.  It  will  some- 
times be  proper,  where  the  attack  is  sudden,  the  dis- 
ease originating  in  the  head,  with  great  determination 
of  blood  to  that  part,  particularly  in  a plethoric  habit, 
to  open  the  temporal  artery,  or  jugular  vein,  or  apply 
cupping  glasses  to  the  neck,  and  exhibit  active  purges, 
with  the  other  means  pointed  out  under  apoplexy. 
But  where  the  patient  is  advanced  in  life,  of  a debili- 
tated constitution,  and  not  too  full  of  blood,  the  object 
should  rather  be  to  procure  regular  and  healthy  dis- 
chaiges  from  the  bowels,  obviate  irritation  in  the  brain 
by  blisters  in  the  neighbourhood,  and  procure  a steady 
determination  to  the  skin  by  gently  stimulant  diapho- 
retics, as  ammonia,  guaiacum,  &c.  in  moderate  doses 
regularly  persevered  in.  Emetics  have  been  sometimes 
very  useful  under  these  circumstances,  but  would  be 
dangerous  where  congestion  in  the  brain  existed. 
Certain  narcotic  substances  have  been  found  occasion- 
ally successful,  as  aconite,  arnica,  toxicodendron,  nux 
vomica,  and  opium;  but  the  tendency  of  the  latter  to 
produce  fulness  of  the  vessels  of  the  head  must  greatly 
limit  its  use.  Various  local  means  of  increasing  the 
circulation,  and  nervous  energy  in  the  affected  parts, 
are  resorted  to  in  this  complaint,  often  with  decided 
benefit.  In  all  cases  it  is  proper  to  keep  up  sufficient 
warmth  in  the  limb,  or  the  disease  may  be  rendered  in- 
curable. But  in  addition  to  this,  in  tedious  cases,  fo- 
mentations, the  vapour  bath,  friction,  electricity,  and  a 
variety  of  stimulant,  rubefacient,  or  even  vesicatory, 
embrocations,  liniments,  and  plasters,  may  assist  mate- 
rially in  the  recovery  of  the  patient.  In  the  use  of 
some  of  these  it  should  be  a rule  to  begin  near  the 
boundary  of  the  disease,  and  carry  them  onward,  as  the 
amendment  proceeds,  not  only  as  they  will  be  more  likely 
to  answer  a good  purpose,  but  also  because  there  would 
be  some  risk  in  stimulating  too  powerfully  an  extreme 
part.  A suitable  diet,  according  to  the  habit  of  the  pa- 
tient, warm  clothing,  the  prudent  use  of  the  bath,  aud 
other  means  calculated  to  strengthen  the  system,  must 
not  be  neglected. 

Paralysis  herba.  (From  napa\vo>,  to  weaken : so 
called  from  its  use  in  paralytic  disorders.)  The  cow 
slip  and  primrose  are  sometimes  so  termed.  See  Pri- 
mula veris,  and  Primula  vulgaris. 

PARAMENIA.  (From  napa,  wrong,  and  ptjv,  tha 


PAR 

menses.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s 
Nosology.  Class,  Genetica;  Order,  Cenotica.  Mis- 
mensiruation.  It  has  live  species,  viz.  Paramenia  ob- 
structionism difficilis , superjluus,  erroris , cessationis. 

Parame'ria.  (From  napa,  near,  and  prjpog,  the 
Jiigh.)  The  inward  parts  of  the  thigh. 

Para'mesus.  (From  irapa,  near,  and  pcaog,  the 
middle.)  The  ring-finger,  or  that  which  is  between 
the  middle  and  the  little  fingers. 

PARAMO  RPHIA3.  (From  irapa,  wrong,  and poprprf, 
form.)  The  name  of  a class  of  diseases  of  the  nutri- 
tive powers  in  Dr.  Young’s  Nosology.  Diseases  of 
Structure. 

PARANEURISMT.  (From  irapa,  wrong,  and  vevpov, 
a nerve.)  The  name  given  by  Dr.  Young  to  a class  of 
diseases.  Nervous  diseases. 

[“  Paranthine  of  Hauy,  or  Scapolite  of  Jameson. 
This  rare  mineral,  sometimes  massive,  usually  appears 
in  long  prismatic  crystals,  having  four  or  eight  sides. 
The  latter  form,  which  may  be  called  a four-sided 
prism,  truncated  on  its  lateral  edges,  is  sometimes  ter- 
minated by  four-sided  summits,  whose  faces  are  in- 
clined to  the  alternate  lateral  planes,  on  which  they 
stand,  at  angles  of  120°.  The  primitive  form  is  a four- 
sided prism,  which  is  very  easily  divisible,  parallel  to 
the  diagonals  of  its  bases,  which  are  squares.  The 
crystals,  usually  long,  sometimes  cylindrical  or  acicu- 
lar,  are  often  in  groupes,  composed  of  parallel,  diverg- 
ing, or  intermingled  prisms. 

The  longitudinal  fracture  is  foliated;  indeed,  some 
crystals  might  be  mistaken  for  little  plates  of  mica,  ar- 
ranged in  the  direction  of  its  axis.  The  cross  fracture 
is  often  uneven. 

The  Scapolite  presents  a considerable  diversity  of 
colour,  lustre,  and  hardness,  which  appears  to  arise  in 
part  from  a partial  decomposition,  perhaps  the  loss  of 
the  water  of  crystallization.” — Clean.  Min.  A.] 

Paran<e'a.  (Front  irapa,  diminutive,  and  voew,  to 
understand.)  Paranoia.  Alienation  of  mind;  defect 
of  judgment. 

Parafe'chyum.  (From  irapa , near,  and  irnxvg,  the 
cubit.)  - That  part  of  the  arm  from  the  elbow  to  the  wrist. 

PARAPHIMO'SIS.  (From  rzapa , about,  and  ejnpoco , 
to  bridle.)  A disorder  wherein  the  prepuce,'  being  re- 
tracted to  wards  the  root  of  the  penis,  cannot  be  returned 
again  over  the  glans,  but  makes  a sort  of  ligature  be- 
hind the  corona.  It  is  easily  known;  the  glans  is  un- 
covered, the  skin  tumefied  on  the  corona,  and  above  it 
forms  a circular  collar  or  stricture,  which,  from  the 
skin  being  unequally  extended,  becomes  indented,  and 
makes  several  rings  round  the  part.  This  disease  may 
proceed  from  two  causes ; as  first  front  the  imprudence 
of  young  people,  and  sometimes  also  of  grown  persons, 
who  having  the  end  of  their  prepuce  too  straight,  can- 
not uncover  their  glans  without  pain,  and  when  they 
have  done  it,  neglect  returning  it  so  soon  as  they  ought ; 
and  thus  the  contracted  part  of  the  prepuce  forms  a 
constriction  behind  the  glans.  Soon  after,  the  glans 
and  penis  swell,  and  the  prepuce,  being  consequently 
very  much  distended,  is  affected  in  the  same  manner  ; 
an  inflammation  seizes  upon  both,  and  swellings  quickly 
appear  upon  the  stricture  formed  by  the  prepuce,  so 
that  the  whole  may  be  liable  to  a gangrene,  if  not 
speedily  relieved.  The  second  thing  that  may  produce 
a paraphimosis,  is  a venereal  virus.  In  adults,  whose 
glans  is  uncovered,  there  frequently  arise  venereal 
chancres  in  the  prepuce  after  impure  coition,  which 
before  they  digest,  are  generally  attended  with  inflam- 
mation, mote  or  less  considerable.  This  inflammation 
is  alone  sufficient  to  render  the  prepuce  too  straight  for 
the  size  of  the  penis,  in  consequence  of  which  a swell- 
ing or  inosculation  may  ensue  like  that  before  men- 
tioned ; and  this  is  what  is  termed  a paraphimosis. 

PARAPHO'NIA.  (From  rsapa,  wrong,  and  (fioivy, 
sound.)  Alteration  of  the  voice.  A genus  of  disease 
in  the  Class  Locales,  and  Order  Dyscincsice,  of  Cullen, 
comprehending  six  species,  viz. 

1.  Par  aphonia  puberum.  About  the  age  of  puberty 
the  change  of  voice  from  an  acute  and  soft  to  a grave 
and  harsh  tone. 

2.  Paraphonia  rauca.  The  voice  hoarse  and  rough 
from  dryness  of  flaccid  tumour  of  the  fauces. 

3.  Paraphonia  resonans.  Rough  voice  from  obstruc- 
tion of  the  nares,  with  hissing  sound  in  the  nose. 

4.  Paraphonia  palatina.  From  the  uvula  wanting, 
or  divided,  and  commonly  attended  with  hare-lip,  the 
voice  rough,  obscure,  and  disagreeable. 


PAR  * 

5.  Paraphonia  clangens.  An  acute,  shrill,  and  weak 
toned  voice. 

6.  Paraphonia  comatosa.  A sound  emitted  at  inspi- 
ration from  relaxation  of  the  velum  palati,  and  of  the 
glottis. 

Para'phora.  (From  iraparpepu),  to  transfer.)  A 
slight  kind  of  delirium,  or  liglu-headedness  in  a fever. 
Some  use  this  word  for  a delirium  in  general. 

Paraphrene'sis.  A delirium  ; also  a paraphrenitis. 

PARAPHRENTTIS.  (From  7rapa,  male,  not  rightly, 
and  phrenitis,  inflammation  of  the  brain  : so  called  be- 
cause its  symptoms  resemble  those  of  the  phrenitis,  or 
inflammation  of  the  brain,  which  it  is  not.)  Paraphre- 
nesis; Diaphragmatitis.  An  inflammation  of  the  dia- 
phragm. A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Pyrexiee , and 
Order  Phlegmasice , of  Cullen,  known  by  delirium, 
with  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  pain  in  the  region  of 
the  diaphragm,  and  which  requires  the  same  treatment 
as  inflammation  of  the  lungs. 

P ARAPIIRO'SYNE.  (From  irapacppoveo),  to  be  es- 
tranged in  mind.)  The  same  as  Mania. 

Paraphymo'sis.  See  Paraphimosis. 

PARAPLE'GIA.  (From  irapairXriaao),  to  strike 
inharmoniously.)  Palsy  of  one  half  of  the  body  taken 
transversely.  A species  of  paralysis.  See  Paralysis. 

Parapople'xia.  (From  irapa,  diminutive,  and  airo- 
nXi/lia,  an  apoplexy.)  A slight  apoplexy. 

PARAPSIS.  (From  irapa,  and  airropat,  perperam 
tango.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good's 
Nosology,  Class  Neurotica ; Order  JEsthetica.  Mor- 
bid touch.  It  embraces  three  species,  Parapsis  acris , 
expers,  illusoria. 

Pararthre'ma.  (From  irapa,  and  apdpov,  a joint.) 
A slight  luxation.  A tumour  from  protrusion,  as  in 
hernia. 

Pararthre'mata.  (The  plural  of  pararthrema.) 
See  Pararthrema. 

Parary'tiimos.  (From  irapa,  and  pvOpog,  number.) 
A pulse  not  suitable  to  the  age  of  the  person 

Parascepa'stra.  (From  irapa,  and  aKtra^w,  to 
cover.)  A cap  or  bandage  to  go  round  the  whole 
head. 

Para'schide.  (From  irapa,  and  o-%igu>,  to  cleave.) 
A fragment  or  fissure  in  a broken  bone. 

Parasit.se.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Lin- 
naeus’s Fragments  of  a Natural  Method. 

I ARASITIC.  {Parasiticus ; from  irapacirog , a 
parasite  or  hanger  on.)  An  animal  is  so  termed  that 
receives  its  nourishment  in  the  bodies  of  others ; as 
worms,  polypes,  hydatids,  & c. 

A plant  is  so  called  which  sends  its  roots  into  other 
plants,  from  which  it  draws  its  nourishment;  as  the 
Epidendrum  vanilla.  See  Jirrhitus. 

PARASITICUS.  Parasitical. 

PARASITUS.  (HaparnTos,  a parasite.)  A parasite: 
applied  to  animals  and  vegetables  which  draw  their 
nourishment  from  others  of  the  same  kingdom,  living 
within  the  interior  of  animals,  or  having  their  roots 
fixed  in  the  barks  of  vegetables. 

Para'sphagis.  (From  irapa,  near,  and  a<f>ayri,  the 
throat.)  The  part  of  the  neck  contiguous  to  the  cla- 
vicles. 

Para'stata.  (From  irapigxipi,  to  stand  near.)  It 
signifies  any  thing  situated  near  another. 

Para'stata.  (From  irapiarrjpi,  to  stand  near.) 
The  Epididymis  of  Hippocrates.  Herophilus  and 
Galen  called  these  the  Varicosce , Parastatcc , to  distin- 
guish them  from  the  Glandules  Parastatcc,  now  called 
Prostates.  Rufus  Ephesius  called  the  tub*  Fallopian® 
by  the  name  of  Parastatce  Varicosp}. 

Parastre'mma.  (From  zzapaarpeepo),  to  distort,  or 
pervert.)  A perversion,  or  convulsive  distortion  of  the 
mouth,  or  any  part  of  the  face. 

Parasyna'nche.  See  Paracynanche. 

PARA'THENAR.  (From  irapa,  near,  and  Swap, 
the  sole  of  the  foot.)  A muscle  situated  near  the  sole 
of  the  foot. 

Parathenar  minor.  See  Flexor  brevis  minimi 
digiti  pedis. 

PARANTHINE.  See  Scapolite. 

Parda'uum.  (From  irapoog,  the  panther.)  An 
ointment  smelling  like  the  panther. 

PARE',  Ambrose,  a French  surgeon,  was  born  at 
Lavel,  in  1509.  He  commenced  the  study  of  the  sur- 
gical profession  early  in  life,  and  practised  it  with 
great  zeal  both  in  hospitals  and  in  the  army.  His  re- 
putation at  length  rose  very  high,  and  he  was  appoinl- 

155 


PAR 


PAR 


ed  surgeon  in  ordinary  to  Henry  II.  in  1552  ; which 
office  he  held  also  under  the  three  succeeding  kings. 
Charles  IX.  derived  material  assistance  from  his  pro 
fessional  skill,  and  gave  a signal  proof  of  his  gratitude  ; 
for  Par£,  being  a Huguenot,  would  have  been  included 
tn  the  horrible  massacre  of  St.  Bartholomew’s,  had  not 
the  king  sent  for  him  on  the  preceding  night,  and  or- 
dered him  not  to  leave  the  royal  chamber..  After  hav- 
ing been  long  esteemed  as  the  first  surgeon  of  his  time, 
and  beloved  for  his  private  virtues,  he  died  in  the  year 
1590.  He  was  the  author  of  some  works,  which  were 
universally  read,  and  translated  into  most  of  the  lan- 
guages of  Europe,  containing  a body  of  surgical  sci- 
ence. He  was  a man  of  original  mind,  and  a real  im- 
prover of  his  art,  especially  in  the  treatment  of  gun- 
shot wounds  ; adopting  a lenient  method,  instead  of 
the  irritating  and  cauterizing  applications  previously 
in  use.  He  was  also  a bold  and  successful  operator 
and  displayed  on  many  occasions  all  the  resources  of 
an  enlightened  surgeon.  He  appears,  however,  to 
have  borrowed  freely  from  the  Italian  writers  and  prac- 
titioners, especially  in  anatomy.  There  is  also  an 
affectation  of  reference  to  the  works  of  the  ancients  in 
his  writings,  for  he  was  by  no  means  well  versed  in 
these,  and  indeed  obliged  to  request  another  to  translate 
into  French  some  of  the  books  of  Galen,  which  he 
wished  to  consult. 

PAREC'CRISES.  (Fromirapa,  wrong,  and  ekkpivo), 
to  secern  or  secrete.)  The  name  of  a class  of  diseases 
in  Dr.  Young’s  Nosology. — Diseases  of  secretion. 

PAREGORIC.  ( Paregoricus  ; from  rsapayopeuf,  to 
mitigate,  to  assuage.)  That  which  allays  pain. 

Paregoric  elixir.  See  Tinctura  camphor  ce  composita. 

Parei'a.  II apeia.  That  part  of  the  face  which  is 
between  the  eyes  and  chin. 

Parei'ra  brava.  See  Cissampelos. 

Parence'phalis.  (From rsapa,  near,  and  eyiceepaXos, 
the  brain.)  See  Cerebellum. 

PARE'NCHYMA.  (From  ir apeyxvo),  to  strain 
through ; because  the  ancients  believed  the  blood  was 
strained  through  it.)  1.  The  spongy  and  cellular  sub- 
stance or  tissue,  that  connects  parts  together.  It  is  ap- 
plied to  the  connecting  medium  of  the  substance  of 
the  viscera. 

2.  The  green  juicy  layer  of  barks  which  lies  immedi- 
ately under  the  epidermis  of  trees. 

PA'RESIS.  (From  iraprrjp.i,  to  relax.)  An  imper- 
fect palsy. 

PARGASITE.  Common  actynolite. 

PARHAEMA'SLE.  (From  irapa,  wrong,  and  aipa, 
blood.)  The  name  of  a class  of  diseases  in  Dr. 
Young’s  Nosology.  Sanguine  diseases. 

Parie'ra  brava.  (A  Spanish  word.)  See  Cis- 
sampelos. 

PARIETALE  OS.  ( Parietalis  ; from  paries , a 
wall:  because  they  defend  the  brain  like  walls.)  Ossa 
verticis.  Ossa  sincipitis.  Ossa  verticalia  vel  breg- 
matis.  The  parietal  bones  are  two  arched  and  some- 
what quadrangular  bones,  situated  one  on  each  side  of 
the  superior  part  of  the  cranium.  Each  of  these 
bones  forms  an  irregular  square.  They  are  thicker 
above  than  below  ; but  are  somewhat  thinner,  and  at 
the  same  time  more  equal  and  smooth  than  the  other 
bones  of  the  cranium.  The  only  foramen  we  observe 
in  them,  is  a small  one  towards  the  upper  and  posterior 
part  of  each.  It  has  been  named  the  parietal  foramen, 
and  serves  for  the  transmission  of  a small  vein  to  the 
longitudinal  sinus.  In  many  subjects  this  foramen  is 
wanting.  On  the  inner  surface  of  these  bones  are  the 
marks  of  the  vessels  of  the  dura  mater,  and  of  the 
convoluted  surface  of  the  brain.  On  the  inside  of 
their  upper  edge  we  may  likewise  observe  a consider- 
able furrow,  which  corresponds  with  the  longitudinal 
sinus  of  the  dura  mater ; and  lower  down,  towards 
their  posterior  and  inferior  angle,  is  a smaller  one  for 
part  of  the  lateral  sinuses.  These  bones  are  joined  to 
each  other  by  the  sagittal  suture;  to  the  os  sphenoides, 
and  ossa  temporum,  by  the  squamous  suture  ; to  the  os 
occipitis  by  the  lambdoidal  suture;  and  to  the  os 
frontis  by  the  coronal  suture.  Their  connexion  with 
this  latter  bone  is  well  worthy  our  attention.  We 
shall  find,  that  in  the  middle  of  the  suture,  where  the 
os  frontis  from  its  size  and  flatness  is  the  most  in  dan- 
ger of  being  injured,  it  rests  upon  the  arch  formed  by 
the  parietal  bones  ; whereas,  at  the  sides,  the  parietal 
tones  are  found  resting  upon  the  os  frontis,  because 
this  same  arch  is  there  in  the  greatest  danger  from 
156 


pressure.  In  new-lrorn  infants,  the  ossa  parietalia  are 
separated  from  the  middle  of  the  divided  os  frontis  by 
a portion  of  the  cranium,  then  unossified.  When  the 
finger  is  applied  to  this  part,  the  motion  of  the  brain, 
and  the  pulsation  of  the  arteries  of  tHe  dura  mater, 
may  be  easily  distinguished.  In  general,  the  whole  of 
this  part  is  completely  ossified  before  we  are  seven 
years  of  age. 

PARIETA'RIA.  (From  paries , a wall;  because 
it  grows  upon  old  walls,  among  rubbish.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaran  system. 
Class,  Polygamia ; Order,  Moncecia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  wall  pellitory. 
See  Parictaria  officinalis. 

Parietaria  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  wall  pellitory.  Parietaria ; foliis  lanceolato-ova- 
tis,  pedunculis  dichotomis , calycibus  diphylhs , of  Lin- 
neeus.  This  plant  has  no  smell,  and  its  taste  is  simply 
herbaceous.  In  the  practice  of  the  present  day,  it  is 
wholly  laid  aside,  although  it  was  formerly  in  high 
estimation  as  a diuretic. 

PA  RIS.  (So  called  in  reference  to  the  youth  of 
that  name,  who  adjudged  the  golden  apple  to  Venus, 
this  herb  bearing  but  one  seed.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Octan- 
dria;  Order,  Tetragynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  herb  Paris.  See 

Paris  quadrifolia.  j 

Paris  quadrifolia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
herb  Paris,  or  true  love.  The  colour  and  smell  of  this 
plant  indicate  its  possessing  narcotic  powers.  The 
leaves  and  berries  are  said  to  be  efficacious  in  the  cure 
of  hooping-cough,  and  to  act  like  opium.  Great  cau- 
tion is  requisite  in  their  exhibition,  as  convulsions  and 
death  are  caused  by  an  overdose.  The  root  possesses 
emetic  qualities. 

Pari'sthmia.  (From  rsapa,  and  loOpiov,  the  part  of 
the  throat  where  the  tonsils  are.  A part  of  the  throat 
near  the  tonsils,  or  disorders  of  the  tonsils. 

Paristhmio'tomus.  (From  rsapiodpia,  the  tonsils, 
and  repvu),  to  cut.)  An  instrument  with  which  the 
tonsils  were  formerly  scarified. 

Paristhmitis.  Inflammation  of  parts  about  the 
fauces. 

Parodo'ntis.  (From  rsapa,  near,  and  oSovs,  a tooth.) 
A painful  tubercle  upon  the  gums. 

PARODYNIA.  (From  rsapa,  male , and  w5tv,  or 
w<5tc.  ivos,  dolor  parturientis.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  disease  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Genetica;  Or- 
der, Carpotica.  Morbid  labour.  It  embraces  seven 
species,  viz.  Parodynia  atonica;  implastica ; sympa- 
thetica; perversa;  amorphica ; pleuralis  ; secundaria. 

PARONIR1A.  (From  irapa,  and  oveipov,  a dream, 
i.  e.  depraved,  disturbed,  or  morbid  dreaming.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class, 
Neurotica;  Order,  Phrenica.  Sleep,  disturbance.  It 
has  three  species,  viz.  Paroniria  anibulans ; loquens , 
and  salax. 

PARONY'CHIA.  (From  rsapa,  about,  and  owl, 
the  nail.)  Panaris ; Panaritium.  A whitlow,  or 
whitloe.  Any  collection  of  pus  formed  in  the  fingers 
is  termed  by  authors,  panaris,  or  whitloe,  and  is  an  ab- 
scess of  the  same  nature  with  those  arising  in  other 
parts  of  the  body.  These  abscesses  are  situated  more 
or  less  deep,  which  has  induced  the  ivriters  upon  the 
subject  to  divide  them  into  several  species:  accord- 
ingly they  have  ranged  them  under  four  heads,  agree- 
ably to  tlie  places  where  they  are  formed.  The  first 
kind  of  panaris  is  formed  under  the  cutiile,  on  one 
side  of  the  nail,  and  sometimes  all  round  It.  The 
second  is  seated  in  the  fat  lying  under  the  skin,  between 
that  and  the  sheath  which  involves  the  flexor  tendons. 
The  third  is  described  by  authors  to  be  formed  within 
the  sheath  ; and  they  still  add  a fourth  species,  arising 
between  the  periosteum  and  the  bone. 

Paro'pi  f..  (From  rsapa,  near,  and  attp,  the  eye.) 
The  external  angles  of  the  eyes. 

PAROPSIS.  (From  irapa,  male,  and  oipig,  visus, 
sight.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’ 
Nosology.  Class,  Neurotica;  Order,  Phrenica.  Mor 
bid  sight.  It  has  thirteen  species;  viz . Paropsis  luei. 
fuga ; noctifuga  ; longingua  ; propingua  ; lateralis; 
dlusoria ; caligo ; glaucosis ; catarracti ; synizesis  ; 
amaurosis  ; staphyloma ; and  strabismus. 

Paropte'sis.  (From  irapa,  and  oir^aai,  to  roast.) 
A provocation  of  sweat,  by  making  a patient  approach 
the  fire,  or  by  placing  him  in  a bagnio 


PAR 


PAS 


Parora'sis.  (From  tsapa , diminutive,  and  opaw,  to 
see.)  An  imbecility  of  sight. 

PARORCHI'DIUM.  (From  napa,  and  opxtf,  a tes- 
ticle.) A tumour  in  the  groin,  occasioned  by  the  tes- 
ticle, which  is  passing  into  the  scrotum. 

PAROSMIS.  (From  irapa,  male,  bad;  a*d  o£o>, 
elfacio,  to  smell.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in 
Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  JYeurotica;  Order,  (Esthe - 
tica;  Morbid  smell.  It  has  three  species;  viz.  Paros- 
mis  acris,  obtusa , and  expers. 

PAROSTIA.  (From  itapa,  and  ooreov,  a bone.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Class,  Eccritica ; Order,  Mesotica.  Misossification. 
Its  species  are  two,  viz.  Parostia  fragilis , and  flexus. 

PAROTID  GLAND.  (Parotideus ; from  napa, 
about,  and  ovsi  the  ear.)  Glandula  parotidea ; Paru- 
tis.  A large  conglomerate  and  salival  gland,  situated 
under  the  ear,  between  the  mamillary  process  of  the 
temple  bone  and  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw.  The  ex- 
cretory duct  of  this  gland  opens  in  the  mouth,  and  is 
called,  from  its  discoverer,  the  Stenonian  duct. 

Parotide'a.  (From  zsapums,  the  parotid  gland.) 
The  trivial  name  of  a species  of  quinsy,  in  which  the 
parotid  gland,  neck,  and  throat,  are  considerably  affect- 
ed. See  Cynanche  parotidea. 

PARO'TIS.  (f  rom  zsapa,  near,  and  ovs,  the  ear.) 
See  Parotid  gland. 

PAROTITIS.  Inflammation  of  the  parotid  gland. 
See  Cynanche  parotidea. 

PAROXYSM.  (Paroxysmus  ; from  zsapo\vvo),  to 
aggravate.)  1.  An  obvious  increase  of  the  symp- 
toms of  a disease  which  lasts  a certain  time  and  then 
declines. 

2.  A periodical  attack  or  fit  of  a disease. 

Parsley , black  mountain.  See  Athamanta  oreose- 
linum. 

PARSLEY.  See  Apium  petroselinum. 

Parsley,  Macedonian.  See  Bubon  macedonicum. 

PARSNIP.  See  Pastinaca  sativa. 

Parsnip,  water.  See  Siam  modiflorum. 

Parthenia'strum.  (Diminutive  of  parthenium , 
tansy.)  A species  of  parthenium. 

Pa'rthenis.  The  same  as  parthenium. 

PARTHENIUM.  (From  wapdevos,  a virgin:  so 
called  because  of  its  uses  in  diseases  of  young  women.) 
See  Matricaria  parthenium. 

Parthenium  mas.  See  Tanacetum. 

Partitus.  A botanical  term:  partite,  cut,  as  it 
were,  almost  to  the  base,  and  according  to  the  number 
of  incisions;  bipartite  when  two,  tripartite  when 
three,  quadripartite  when  four,  quinquepartite  when 
five,  &cc. 

[Partridge  berry.  See  Gaultheria.  A.] 

PARTURITION.  Parturitio;  from  pario.  The 
expulsion  of  the  foetus  from  the  uterus. 

After  seven  months  of  pregnancy,  the  foetus  has  all 
the  conditions  for  breathing,  and  exercising  its  diges- 
tion ; it  may  then  be  separated  from  its  mother,  and 
change  its  mode  of  existence  ; childbirth  rarely,  how- 
ever, happens  at  this  period  : most  frequently  the  foetus 
remains  two  months  longer  in  the  uterus,  and  it  does 
not  pass  out  of  this  organ  till  after  the  revolution  of 
nine  months. 

Examples  are  related  of  children  being  born  after 
ten  full  months  of  gestation,  but  these  cases  are  very 
doubtful,  for  it  is  very  difficult  to  know  exactly  the 
period  of  conception.  The  legislation,  in  France,  how- 
ever, has  fixed  the  principle,  that  childbirth  may  take 
place  the  299th  day  of  pregnancy. 

Nothing  is  more  curious  than  the  mechanism  by 
which  the  foetus  is  expelled ; every  thing  happens  with 
wonderful  precision;  all  seems  to  have  been  foreseen, 
and  calculated  to  favour  its  passage  through  the  pelvis, 
and  the  genital  parts. 

The  physical  causes  that  determine  the  exit  of  the 
feetus  are  the  contraction  of  the  uterus,  and  that  of  the 
abdominal  muscles;  by  their  force  the  liquor  amnii 
flows  out,  the  head  of  the  foetus  is  engaged  in  the  pel- 
vis, it  goes  through  it,  and  soon  passes  out  by  the  valve, 
the  folds  of  which  disappear;  these  different  phenome- 
na take  place  in  succession,  and  continue  a certain 
time:  they  are  accompanied  with  pains  more  or  less 
severe,  with  swelling  and  softening  of  the  soft  parts 
of  the  pelvis,  and  external  genital  parts,  and  with  an 
abundant  mucous  secretion  in  the  cavity  of  the  vagina. 
All  these  circumstances,  each  in  its  own  way,  favour 
the  passage  of  the  foetus. 


To  facilitate  the  study  of  this  complicated  action,  it 
must  be  divided  into  several  periods. 

like  first  period  of  childbirth. — It  is  constituted  by 
the  precursory  signs.  Two  or  three  days  before  child- 
birth, a flow  of  mucus  takes  place  from  the  vagina, 
the  external  genital  parts  swell,  and  become  softer ; it 
is  the  same  with  the  ligaments  that  unite  the  bones  of 
the  pelvis ; the  cervix  uteri  flattens,  its  opening  is  en- 
larged, its  edges  become  thinner ; slight  pains,  known 
under  the  name  of  flying  pains , are  felt  in  the  loins 
and  abdomen. 

Second  period. — Pains  of  a peculiar  kind  come  on : 
they  begin  in  the  lumbar  region,  and  seem  to  be  propa- 
gated towards  the  cervix  uteri , or  the  rectum ; they 
are  renewed  only  after  considerable  intervals,  as  a 
quarter,  or  half  an  hour.  Each  of  them  is  accompa- 
nied with  an  evident  contraction  of  the  body  of  the 
uterus,  with  tension  of  its  neck,  and  dilatation  of  the 
opening ; the  linger  directed  into  the  vagina  discovers 
that  the  envelopes  of  the  feetus  are  pushed  outward, 
and  that  there  is  a considerable  tumour  which  is  called 
the  waters : the  pains  very  soon  become  stronger,  and 
the  contractions  of  the  uterus  more  powerful ; the 
membranes  break,  and  a part  of  the  liquid  escapes ; 
the  uterus  contracts  on  itself,  and  is  applied  to  the  sur- 
face of  the  feetus. 

Third  period. — The  pains  and  contractions  of  the 
uterus  increase  considerably ; they  are  instinctively 
accompanied  by  the  contraction  of  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles. The  woman  who  is  aware  of  their  effect  is  in- 
clined to  favour  them,  in  making  all  the  muscular 
efforts  of  which  she  is  capable : her  pulse  then  becomes 
stronger  and  more  frequent;  her  face  is  animated,  her 
eyes  shine,  her  whole  body  is  in  extreme  agitation, 
perspiration  flows  in  abundance.  The  head  is  then 
engaged  in  the  pelvis;  the  occiput,  placed  at  first  above 
the  left  acetabulum,  is  directed  inward  and  down- 
ward, and  comes  below  and  behind  the  arch  of  the 
pubis. 

Fourth  period. — After  some  instants  of  repose,  the 
pains  and  expulsive  contractions  resume  all  their  ac- 
tivity; the  head  presents  itself  at  the  vulva,  makes  an 
effort  to  pass,  and  succeeds  when  there  happens  to  be  a 
contra  on  sufficiently  strong  to  produce  this  effect. 
The  Head  being  once  disengaged,  the  remaining  parts 
of  the  body  easily  follow  on  account  of  their  smaller 
volume.  The  section  of  the  umbilical  cord  is  then 
made,  and  a ligature  is  put  round  it  at  a short  distance 
from  the  umbilicus. 

Fifth  period. — If  the  accoucheur,  has  not  proceeded 
immediately  to  the  extraction  of  the  placenta  after  the 
birth  of  the  child,  slight  pains  are  felt  in  a short  time, 
the  uterus  contracts  freely,  but  with  force  enough  to 
throw  off  the  placenta,  and  the  membranes  of  the 
ovum:  this  expulsion  bears  the  name  of  delivery. 
During  the  twelve  or  fifteen  days  that  follow  child- 
birth, the  uterus  contracts  by  degrees  upon  itself,  the 
woman  suffers  abundant  perspirations,  her  mamnice 
are  extended  by  the  milk  that  they  secrete;  a flow  of 
matter,  which  takes  place  from  the  vagina,  called 
lochia,  first  sanguiferous,  then  whitish,  indicates  that 
the  organs  of  the  woman  resume,  by  degrees,  the  dispo- 
sition that  they  had  before  conception.” — Magendic. 

PARU'LIS.  (From  aapa,  near,  and  ovXov,  the 
gutn.)  An  inflammation,  boil,  or  abscess  in  the  gums. 

PARURIA.  (From  napu),  perperam,  and  ovpeu),  to 
make  water.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in 
Good’s  Nosology.  Class , Eccritica;  Order,  C'atotica. 
Misuiicturition.  It  embraces  seven  species,  viz.  Paru- 
ria  inops;  retentionis ; stillatitia;  mcllita;  inconti- 
nrns ; incocta , and  erratica 

Pary'gron.  (From  zzapa,  and  vypos,  humid.)  A 
liquid  or  moist  preparation  for  allaying  a topical  in- 
flammation. 

Pasi'philus.  (From  ts ag,  all,  and  ^uAoj,  grateful,, 
from  its  general  usefulness.)  A name  given  to  a 
plaster. 

Pa'sma.  (From  zsaotro),  to  sprinkle  over.)  See 
Catapasma. 

PA'SSA.  (From  'pando,  to  spread.). 

1.  A grape  or  raisin. 

2.  In  Paracelsus  it  is  a whitloe. 

Passa  minor.  See  Uv  a pass  a minor. 

Passxva'nticus.  (From  zsag,  all,  and  avaivw,  to- 

dry  up.)  An  epithet  given  by  Schroder  to  a powder, 
which  dries  up,  and  evacuates  morbid  humours. 

PASSIFLO'RA.  (Altered  by  Linmeus,  from  floo 

157 


PAS 


PAT 


passionis  of  preceding  botanists  : a term  applied  to  the 
beautiful  genus  in  question,  because  the  instruments 
of  Christ’s  passion  were  thought  to  be  represented  in 
the  parts  of  the  fructification.)  The  nanie  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Liumean  system.  Class,  Gyandria  ; 
Order,  Pentandria. 

Passiflora  laurifolia.  Bay-leaved  passion- 
flower. A native  of  Surinam.  The  fruit  of  this  tree 
grows  to  the  size  of  a small  lemon,  which  it  greatly 
resembles.  It  has  a delicious  smell  and  flavour,  and  is 
excellent  for  quenching  thirst,  abating  heat  of  the  sto- 
mach, increasing  the  appetite,  recruiting  the  spirits,  and 
allaying  the  heat  in  fevers. 

Passiflora  maliformis.  Apple-shaped  granadilla. 
The  fruit  of  this  species  of  passion-flower  is  esteemed 
a delicacy  in  the  West  Indies,  where  it  is  served  up  at 
table  in  desserts.  They  are  not  unwholesome. 

PASSION.  ( Passio , onis.  f. ; from  patio r,  to  suffer.) 
By  passion,  is  generally  understood  an  instinctive  feel- 
ing become  extreme  and  exclusive.  A man  of  strong 
passion  neither  hears,  sees,  nor  exists,  but  through  the 
feeling  which  agitates  him ; and  as  the  violence  of 
his  feeling  is  such  that  it  is  extremely  painful,  it  has 
oeen  called  passion  or  suffering.  The  passions  have 
the  same  end  as  instinct;  like  them,  they  incline  ani- 
mals to  act  accoiding  to  the  general  laws  of  animated 
nature. 

We  see  in  man  passions  which  he  has  in  common 
with  the  animals,  and  which  consist  of  animal  wants, 
become  excessive;  but  he  has  others  which  are  dis- 
played only  in  the  social  state.  These  are  social  wants 
grown  to  excess. 

The  animal  passions  have  a twofold  design,  the  pre- 
servation of  the  individual,  and  of  the  species. 

To  the  preservation  of  the  individual  belong  fear, 
anger,  sorrow,  hatred,  excessive  hunger,  &c.  To  the 
preservation  of  the  species,  excessive  venerehl  desires, 
jealousy;  the  fury  which  is  felt  when  the  young  ones 
are  in  danger,  &c. 

Nature  has  made  this  sort  of  passions  very  powerful, 
and  which  are  equally  so  in  a state  of  civilization. 

The  passions  which  belong  to  the  social  state  are 
only  the  social  wants  carried  to  an  excess.  Ambition 
is  the  inordinate  love  of  potver ; avarice,  th  'ove  of 
riches,  become  excessive;  hatred  and  revenge,  that 
natural  and  impetuous  desire  to  injure  whoever  hurts 
us;  the  passion  of  gaming,  and  almost  all  the  vices, 
which  are  also  passions,  are  violent  inclinations  to  in- 
crease the  feeling  of  existence ; violent  love  is  an  ele- 
vation of  the  venereal  desires,  &c. 

Some  of  the  passions  are  allayed,  or  extinguished 
by  gratification ; others  become  more  irritated  by  it. 
The  first  sort  are  therefore  often  the  cause  of  happi- 
ness, as  is  seen  in  philanthropy  and  love;  while  the 
latter  sort  necessarily  causes  misery.  Misers,  ambi- 
tious and  envious  people,  are  examples  of  the  last. 

If  our  necessities  develope  the  intellect,  the  passions 
are  the  principle  or  the  cause  of  every  thing  great 
which  man  performs,  whether  good  or  bad.  Great 
poets,  heroes,  great  criminals,  and  conquerors,  are  men 
of  strong  passions.” 

Passion , cceliac . See  Diarrhoea  caliaca. 

Passion , hysteric.  See  Hysteria. 

Passion,  iliac.  See  Iliac  Passion. 

PASSU'LA.  A small  raisin. 

Passula:  majores.  See  Uvapassa  major. 

Passula'tum.  (From  passula , a fig,  or  raisin.) 
This  is  a term  given  by  Dispensatory  writers  to  some 
medicines  where  raisins  are  the  chief  ingredient ; as 
the  electuarium  passulatum,  & c. 

PA'SSUM.  (From passa,  a grape,  or  raisin.)  Rai- 
sin wine. 

PA'STA.  ‘ A round  cake  or  lozenge. 

Pasta  regia.  (From  Gaoana,  to  sprinkle.)  A lo- 
zenge, or  small  cake,  sprinkled  bver  with  some  dry 
powdered  substance. 

PASTi'LLUM.  (Diminutive  of  pasta , a lozenge.) 
Pastillus.  A troch  or  pastil.  A little  lump  of  paste, 
or  ball,  made  to  take  like  a lozenge. 

PASTINA'CA.  (j2  pasta  ; from  its  usefulness  as  a 
food.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
ntean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Digynia. 
Parsnip. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  parsnip.  See 
Pastinaca  sativa. 

Pastinaca  opopanax.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  yields  opopanax.  The  plant  from  whence 


this  gum  resin  is  procured  is  known  by  the  names  or 
opoponacum  ; panax  heracleum  ; panax  costinum  ; pa- 
nax  pastinacea  ; kyna.  Hercules’  all  heal ; and  opo- 
panax-wort.  Pastinaca— foliis  pinnatis , foliolis  bast 
antica  excisis,  of  Linnaeus.  Opopanax  is  the  gummi- 
resinodfc  juice,  obtained  by  means  of  incisions  made  at 
the  bottom  of  the  stalk  of  the  plant,  from  which  it 
gradually  exudes,  and  by  undergoing  spontaneous  con- 
cretion, assumes  the  appearance  under  which  we  have 
it  imported  from  Turkey  and  the  East  Indies,  viz. 
sometimes  in  little  drops  or  tears,  more  commonly  in 
irregular  lumps,  of  a reddish  yellow  colour  on  the  out- 
side, with  specks  of  white ; internally  of  a paler  colour, 
and  frequently  variegated  with  large  white  pieces. 
Opopanax  has  a strong,  disagreeable  smell,  and  a bitter, 
acrid,  somewhat  nauseous  taste.  It  is  only  employed 
in  the  present  practice  as  an  antispasmodic,  in  combi- 
nation with  other  medicines,  although  it  was  formerly 
in  high  estimation  as  an  attenuant,  deobstruent,  and 
aperient.  Its  antispasmodic  virtues  are  less  powerful 
than  galbanum,  and  more  so  than  amrnoniacum.  It 
has  no  place  in  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia,  but  is 
directed  by  the  London  College. 

Pastinac  a sativa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
parsnip.  The  cultivated  or  garden  parsnip  is  the  Pas- 
tinaca : — foliolis  simpliciter  pinnatis , of  Linnaeus. 
Elaphoboscum,  of  the  ailcients.  Its  roots  are  sweet 
and  nutritious,  and  in  high  esteem  as  an  article  of  food. 
They  possess  an  aromatic  flavour,  more  especially 
those  of  the  wild  plant,  and  are  exhibited  in  calculous 
complaints  for  their  diuretic  and  sheathing  qualities. 

PATE'LLA.  (Diminutive  of  patina , a dish:  so 
named  from  its  shape.)  Rotula.  The  knee-pan.  A 
small  fiat  bone,  which,  in  some  measure,  resembles  the 
common  figure  of  the  heart,  with  its  point  downwards, 
and  is  placed  at  the  forepart  of  the  joint  of  the  knee- 
It  is  thicker  in  its  middle  part  than  at  its  edge.  Ante- 
riorly it  is  a little  convex,  and  rough  for  the  insertion 
of  muscles  and  ligaments:  posteriorly  it  is  smooth,  co- 
vered with  cartilage,  and  divided  by  a middle  longi- 
tudinal ridge,  into  two  slightly  concave  surfaces,  of 
which  the  external  one  is  the  largest  and  deepest. 
They  are  bo’ll  exactly  adapted  to  the  pulley  of  the  os 
femoris.  The  edges  of  this  posterior  surface  are  rough 
and  prominent  where  the  capsular  ligament  is  attached, 
and  below  is  a roughness  at  the  point  of  the  bone, 
where  the  upper  extremity  of  a strong  tendinous  liga- 
ment is  fixed,  which  joins  this  bone  to  the  tuberosity 
at  the  upper  end  of  the  tibia.  This  ligament  is  of  con- 
siderable thickness,  about  an  inch  in  breadth,  and  up- 
wards of  two  inches  in  length.  The  patella  is  com- 
posed internally  of  a cellular  substance,  covered  by  a 
thin  bony  plate  ; but  its  cells  are  so  extremely  minute, 
that  the  strength  of  the  bone  is,  upon  the  whole,  very 
considerable.  In  new-boni  children  it  is  entirely  car- 
tilaginous. The  use  of  this  bone  seems  to  be,  to  defend 
tlie  articulation  of  the  joint  of  the  knee  from  external 
injury.  It  likewise  tends  to  increase  the  power  of  the 
muscles  which  act  in  the  extension  of  the  leg,  by  re 
moving  their  direction  farther  from  the  centre  of  mo- 
tion, in  the  manner  of  a pulley.  When  we  consider 
the  manner  in  which  it  is  connected  with  the  tibia,  we 
find  that  it  may  very  properly  be  considered  as  an  ap- 
pendix to  the  latter,  which  it  follows  in  all  its  motions, 
so  as  to  be  to  the  tibia  what  the  olecranon  is  to  the  ulna ; 
with  this  difference,  how'ever,  that  the  patella  is  move- 
able,  whereas  the  olecranon  is  a fixed  process.  With- 
out this  mobility,  the  rotatory  motion  of  the  leg  would 
have  been  prevented. 

PATENS.  Spreading.  Applied  to  leaves,  metals, 
&c. ; as  the  stem  of  the  Jltriplex  portulacoides. 

PATHE'TICI.  (Patheticvs ; from  zsados,  an  af- 
fection ; because  they  direct  the  eyes  to  express  the 
passions  of  the  mind.)  JVervipathetici;  Troc.hleatores. 
The  fourth  pair  of  nerves.  They  arise  from  the  crura 
of  the  cerebellum  laterally,  and  are  distributed  in  the 
musculus  obliquus  superior,  sea  trochlearis. 

PATHOGNOMONIC.  ( Pathogvomonicus  ; from 

zsadni,  a disease,  and  yirwoA-w,  to  know.)  A term  given 
to  those  symptoms  which  are  peculiar  to  a disease. 
They  are  also  termed  proper  or  characteristic  symp- 
toms. 

PATHOLOGY.  ( Pathologia ; from  Gado v,  a dis- 
ease, and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  diseases. 
It  comprehends  nosology,  (etiology , symptomatology 
semantics,  and  therapeia. 

PATIE'NTLA.  (From  patior , to  bear,  or  suffer.) 


PEC 


PEC 


The  name  of  the  herb  monk’s  rhubarb,  from  its  gentle 
purging  qualities.  See  Rumexpatientia. 

PATIENCE.  See  Rumex  patient? a. 

Pa'tor  narium.  (From  pateo,  to  be  opened.)  The 
sinus,  cavity,  or  chasm  of  the  nose. 

Pa'trum  cortex.  (So  called  from  the  Jesuits, 
termed  fathers  in  the  church  of  Rome,  who  first  spread 
its  use  in  Europe.)  See  Cinchona. 

Patu'rsa.  The  venereal  disease. 

Paul's  hetony.  See  Veronica. 

Pauli'na  confectio.  (From  zsavu),  to  rest.)  A 
warm  opiate,  similar  to  the  Confectio  opii;  so  called 
by  Aristarchus,  which  is  the  same  with  the  Confectio 
arcliigenis. 

PAULITE.  See  Hypersthene. 

Pau'lus.  See  JEgineta. 

Pava'na.  See  Croton  tiglium. 

Pa  vor.  (From  paveo,  to  fear : so  called  from  the 
dread  there  is  of  approaching  or  touching  a person  af- 
fected with  it.)  The  itch. 

PEA.  The  pisum  sativum  of  Linnaeus.  A species 
of  pulse  of  great  variety,  and  much  in  use  as  a nourish- 
ing article  of  diet. 

PEA-STONE.  A variety  of  limestone. 

PEACH.  See  Amygdalus  persica. 

PEAGLE.  See  Primula  veris. 

PEAR.  See  Pyrus  communis.  Of  pears  there  are 
many  varieties,  affording  a wholesome  nourishment. 

PEARL.  See  Margarita. 

PEARL-ASH.  An  impure  potassa  obtained  by  lixi- 
viation  from  the  ashes  of  plants.  See  Potassa. 

Pearl  barley.  See  Hordeum. 

PEARL  SINTER.  Fiorite.  A variety  of  silicious 
sinter,  of  a white  and  gray  colour,  and  found  on  volca- 
nic tuff  on  the  Vicentine. 

PEARLSTONE.  A sub-species  of  indivisible  quartz 
of  Jameson  and  Mohs.  It  is  generally  of  a gray  colour, 
and  occurs  in  great  beds  in  clay  porphyry,  near  Tokay 
in  Hungary,  and  in  Ireland. 

PECHBLENDE.  An  ore  of  uranium. 

Pechk'dion.  Urix^ov.  The  perinseum. 

Pkchu'rim  cortex.  A highly  aromatic  bark,  the 
produce  of  a species  of  Laurus.  It  is  extremely  fra- 
grant, like  unto  that  of  cinnamon,  which  it  greatly  re- 
sembles in  its  properties.  In  Lisbon  it  is  much  esteem- 
ed in  the  cure  of  dysenteries,  and  for  allaying  obstinate 
vomitings. 

Pechu'ri.m  faba.  See  Faba  pecliurim. 

Peciiu'ris.  See  Faba  pecliurim. 

Peciiya'gra.  (From  zsrjxvSt  the  cubit,  and  aypa,  a 
seizure.)  The  "out  in  the  elbow. 

Pk'chys.  nWff-  The  cubit,  or  elbow. 

Peohvty'rbe.  An  epithet  for  the  scurvy. 

PECQUET,  John,  was  a native  of  Dieppe,  and  gra- 
duated at  Montpelier.  He  pursued  the  study  of  ana- 
tomy with  great  ardour  and  ingenuity,  which  he  evinced 
by  the  discovery  of  the  thoracic  duct,  and  the  recepta- 
culum  chyli,  while  yet  a student,  in  1647.  He  then 
settled  to  practise  in  his  native  town;  but  soon  after 
repaired  to  Paris,  with  a view  of  demonstrating  com- 
pletely the  important  Vessels  which  he  had  discovered  ; 
and  he  succeeded  in  tracing  the  progress  of  the  chyle 
into  the  left  subclavian  vein.  He  published  an  account 
of  this  discovery,  with  a Dissertation  on  the  Circulation 
of  the  Blood,  and  Motion  of  the  Chyle,  in  1651;  and 
his  fame,  in  consequence,  speedily  extended  throughout 
Europe,  though  some  denied  the  truth,  others  the  ori- 
ginality, of  it.  Besides  his  anatomical  skill,  he  was  a 
man  of  considerable  acquirements,  andbecamea  Mem- 
ber of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences.  He  is  said, 
however,  to  have  shortened  his  life  by  an  unfortunate 
attachment  to  spirituous  liquors,  and  died  in  1674. 

Pecquet's  duct.  See  Thoracic  duct. 

PE'CTEN.  The  pubes,  or  share-bone. 

[“  Pectic  add.  M.  H.  Braconnot  has  given  the  name 
of  pectic  acid  to  a principle  found  by  him  in  several 
plants  which  have  the  property  of  being  coagulated  by 
alkohol,  metallic  solutions,  the  acids,  &c.  It  appears 
to  be  the  same  substance  discovered  by  Prof.  Torrey, 
of  New-York,  in  the  Tuckahoe,  Sclerotium  giganteum , 
a fungus  common  in  the  sandy  barrens  of  the  southern 
states,  and  to  which  he  gave  the  name  of  Sclerat.in.  It 
is  readily  soluble  in  a solution  of  caustic  potassa,  and 
this  solution  is  gelatinized  by  almost  every  known 
body.” — IVebs.  Man.  Chem.  A.] 

PECTINA'LIS.  (So  named  from  its  arising  at  the 
pectent  or  pubes.)  Pectinaus,  of  authors,  and  Pubio 


femoral , of  Dumas.  A small  flat  muscle,  situated  ob* 
liquely  between  the  pubes  and  the  little  trochanter,  at 
the  upper  and  anterior  part  of  the  thigh.  It  arises 
broad  and  fleshy  from  all  the  anterior  edge  of  the  os 
pectinis,  or  pubis,  as  it  is  more  commonly  called,  as  far 
as  its  spine,  and  descending  obliquely  backwards  and 
outwards,  is  inserted  by  a short  and  broad  tendon,  into 
the  upper  and  anterior  part  of  the  linea  aspera  of  the 
os  femoris,  a little  below  the  lesser  trochanter.  This 
muscle  serves  to  bend  the  thigh,  by  drawing  it  upwards 
and  inwards,  and  likewise  assists  in  rolling  it  out- 
wards. 

PECTINATUS.  (From  pecten,  a comb.)  Pectinate. 
1.  A term  applied  to  a pennatifid  leaf,  the  segments  of 
which  are  remarkably  narrow  and  parallel,  like  the 
teeth  of  a comb ; as  the  loWer  leaves  of  the  Hottonia 
palustris , and  Meriophyllum  verticillatum. 

2.  The  fasciculated  muscular  fibres  of  the  right  au- 
ricle of  the  heart  are  called  musculi  pectinati. 

Pectin.eus.  See  Pectinalis. 

PECTORAL.  (Pectoralis ; lrompcct«s,thebrcast.) 
Of  or  belonging  to,  or  that  which  relieves  disorders  of 
the  chest. 

PECTORA'LIS.  Mus cuius  pectoralis.  S ee  Pecto- 
ralis major. 

Pectoralis  ma'jor.  A broad,  thick,  fleshy,  and 
radiated  muscle,  situated  immediately  under  the  inte- 
guments, and  covering  almost  the  whole  anterior  part 
of  the  breast.  Pectoralis , of  authors ; and  sierno-costo- 
clavio-liumeral , of  Dumas.  Winslow  calls  it  pectora- 
lis major , to  distinguish  it  from  the  serralus  anticus, 
which  he  has  named  pectoralis  minor.  It  arises  from 
the  cartilaginous  extremities  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  ribs, 
from  the  last  of  which  its  tendinous  fibres  descend  over 
the  upper  part  of  the  obliquus  externus  and  rectus  ab 
doininis,  helping  to  form  a part  of  the  sheath  in  which 
the  latter  is  included.  It  likewise  springs  from  almost 
the  whole  length  of  the  sternum  by  short  tendinous 
fibres,  which  evidently  decussate  those  on  the  other 
side  ; and  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  more  than  a third 
of  the  anterior  part  of  the  clavicle.  Prom  these  origins 
the  fibres  run  in  a folding  manner  towards  the  axilla, 
and  are  inserted  by  a broad  tendon  into  the  os  humeri, 
above  the  insertion  of  the  deltoid  muscle,  and  at  the 
outer  side  of  the  groove  which  lodges  the  tendon  of  the 
long  head  of  the  biceps.  Some  cf  its  fibres  likewise 
extend  into  that  groove  ; and,  from  the  lower  part  of 
this  tendon,  which  is  spread  near  two  inches  along  the 
os  humeri,  we  find  it  sending  otf  other  fibres,  which 
help  to  form  the  fascia  that  covers  the  muscles  of  the 
arm.  It  often  happens  that  that  part  of  the  pectoralis 
which  arises  from  the  clavicle,  is  separated  from  the 
inferior  portion,  so  as  to  appear  like  a distinct  muscle. 
This  has  induced  Winslow  to  divide  it  into  parts, 
one  of  which  he  calls  the  clavicular , and  the  other  the 
thoracic  portion.  Sometimes  these  two  poitions  are 
inserted  by  separate  tendons,  which  cross  one  another 
at  the  upper  and  inner  part  of  the  os  humeri,  the  tendon 
of  the  thoracic  portion  being  inserted  at  the  outer  edge 
of  the  bicipital  groove,  immediately  behind  the  other. 
This  muscle,  a id  the  latissimus  dorsi,  Conn  the  cavity 
of  the  axilla,  or  arm-pit.  The  use  of  the  pectoralis  is 
to  move  the  arm  forwards,  or  to  raise  it  obliquely  to- 
wards the  sternum.  It  likewise  occasionally  assists  in 
moving  the  trunk  upon  the  arm,  thus,  when  we  exert 
any  efforts  with  the  hand,  as  in  raising  ourselves  from 
oft-  an  arm-chair,  or  in  sealing  a letter,  the  contraction 
of  this  muscle  is  particularly  observable.  To  these 
uses  Haller  adds  that  of  assisting  in  respiration,  by 
raising  the  sternum  and  ribs.  He  teils  us  he  well  re- 
members, that,  when  this  muscle  was  affected  by  rheu- 
matism, bis  breathing  was  incommoded ; and  that, 
when  troubled  with  difficulty  of  respiration,  he  had 
often  found  himself  greatly  relieved  by  raising  and 
drawing  back  his  shoulders,  keeping  his  arms  at  the 
same  time  firmly  fixed.  Winslow,  however,  has  de- 
nied this  use,  and  Albinus  has  omitted  it,  probably  be- 
cause it  does  not  take  place  in  a natural  state. 

Pectoralis  ^iinor.  Serratus  avtious  of  Albinus. 
A fleshy  and  pretty  considerable  muscle,  situated  at  the 
anterior  and  lateral  part  of  the  thorax,  immediately 
under  the  pectoralis  major.  Douglas  and  Cowper  call 
this  muscle  Serratus  minor  anticus;  and  Winslow 
gives  it  the  name  of  Pectoralis  minor ; and  Dumas 
calls  it  Costo  coracoidien.  It  arises  from  the  upper 
edges  of  the  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  ribs,  near  where 
they  join  with  their  cartilages  by  an  equal  number  of 


PED 


tendinous  and  fleshy  digitations,  which  have  been  com- 
pared to  the  teeth  of  a saw,  whence  this  and  some 
other  muscles,  from  their  having  a similar  origin,  of 
insertion,  have  gotten  the  name  of  serrati.  From  these 
origins  it  becomes  thicker  and  narrower  as  it-ascends, 
and  is  inserted  by  a fiat  tendon  into  the  upper  part  of 
the  coracoid  process  of  the  scapula.  The  principal  use 
of  this  muscle  is  to  draw  the  scapula  forwards  and 
downwards;  and  when  that  is  fixed,  it  may  likewise 
serve  to  elevate  the  ribs. 

PectoTus  os.  See  Sternum. 

PE'CTUS.  ( Pectus , oris,  n.)  Tire  breast.  See 
Thorax. 

Pectu'sculum.  (Diminutive  of  pectus , tho  breast : 
so  named  from  its  shape.)  The  metatarsus. 

PEDATUS.  (From  pes,  a foot.)  Pedate.  A term 
applied  to  a particular  kind  of  leaf,  which  is  ternate 
with  its  lateral  leaflets  compounded  in  their  forepart ; 
as  in  Hell.eborus  niger  and  fatidus , and  Arum  dra- 
cunculus. 

PEDE'THMUS.'  (From  n ySace,  to  leap.)  The  mo- 
tion of  the  arteries  from  the  impulse  of  the  blood.  The 
pulse. 

Pedia'smus.  (From  tteSiov,  a field.)  Anepithetof 
a species  of  wild  myrrh. 

PEDICELLATUS.  (From  pedicellus , a partial 
flower-stalk.)  Having  a small  stalk : applied  to  a nec- 
tary which  rests  on  a stalk : as  in  Aconitum  napellus. 

PEDICELLUS,  A partial  flower-stalk.  See  Pe- 
dunculus. 

PEDICULA'RIA.  (From  pediculus,  a louse ; so 
called  from  its  use  in  destroying  lice.)  See  Delphinium 
staphisagria. 

PEDICULA'TIO.  Morbus  pedicularis.  ^daptacig. 
That  disease  of  the  body  in  which  lice  are  continually 
bred  on  the  skin. 

PEDI'CULUS.  (Diminitutive  of  pes,  a foot:  so 
named  from  its  many  small  feet.) 

1.  A louse.  The  name  of  a genus  of  insects,  of  the 
order  Aptera.  Two  species  are  found  on  the  human 
body,  the  Pediculus  humanus,  the  common  louse  ; and 
the  P.  pubis,  or  crab-louse. 

2.  A pedicle  or  footstalk  of  a flower,  or  leaf.  See 
Pedunculus. 

Pedicus.  See  Extensor  brevis  digitorum  pedis. 

PEDILU'VIUM.  (From  pes  the  foot,  and  lavo , to 
wash.)  A bath  for  the  feet. 

Pe'dion.  (From  aouj,  the  foot.)  Thesoleofthefoot. 

Pe'dora.  (From  pes,  a foot.)  The  sordes  of  the 
eyes,  ears,  and  feet. 

PEDUNCULUS.  A peduncle,  or  a flower-stalk,  or 
that  which  springs  from  the  stem,  and  bears  the  flowers 
and  fruit,  and  not  the  leaves. 

Pedicellus  is  a partial  flower-stalk,  the  ultimate 
subdivision  of  a general  one,  as  in  the  cowslip. 

The  pedunculus  is, 

1.  Caulinus,  cauline,  when  it  grows  immediately  out 
of  the  main  stem,  especially  of  a tree  ; as  in  Averrhoa 
bilimbi. 

2.  Rameus,  growing  out  of  the  main  branch ; as  in 
Eugenia  mulaccensis. 

3.  Axillaris , growing  either  from  the  bosom  of  a 
leaf,  that  is,  between  it  and  the  stem,  as  in  Anchusa 
sempervirens ; or  between  a branch  and  a stem,  as  in 
Ruppia  maritima. 

4.  Oppositifolius,  opposite  to  a leaf;  as  in  Geranium 
vyrenacum. 

5.  Internodis,  proceeding  from  the  intermediate  part 
of  a branch  between  two  leaves  ; as  in  Ehretia  inter- 
nodis. 

6.  Gemmaceus,  growing  out  of  a leaf  bud ; as  in 
Berberis  vulgaris. 

7.  Terminalis,  when  it  terminates  a stem  or  branch ; 
as  in  Centaurea  scabiosa. 

8.  Lateralis,  when  situated  on  the  side  of  a stem  or 
branch;  as  in  Erica  vagans. 

9.  Solitarius,  either  single  on  a plant ; as  in  Rubus 
chaiiuemorus : or  only  one  in  the  same  place,  as  in  An- 
tirrhinum spurium. 

10.  Pedunculi  aggregati,  clustered  flower-stalks, 
when  several  grow  together;  as  in  Verbascum  nigrum. 

11.  Sparsi,  dispersed  irregularly  over  the  plant  or 
branches ; as  in  Ranunculus  seleratus. 

12.  Unijlori,  bijlori , triflori,  be.  bearing  one,  two, 
three,  or  more  flowers. 

13.  Multiflori,  many-flowered;  as  Daphne  laureola. 

When  there  is  no  flower-stalk,  the  flowers  are  said  to 

160 


PEL 

be  sessiles ; as  in  Centaurea  calc ' rapa,  and  the  do<3 
ders. 

Peganelje'um.  (From  (oyyavov , rue,  and  thaiw 
oil.)  Oil  of  rue. 

Pegane'rum.  (From  nrjyavov,  rue.)  A plaster 
composed  of  rue. 

PE'GANUM.  (From  zsrjyvvu),  to  compress:  so 
called,  because,  by  its  dryness,  it  condenses  the  seed.) 
Rue.  See  Ruta. 

PE'GE.  (Tlr/yt],  a fountain.)  The  internal  angles  of 

the  eyes  are  called  pegae. 

Pelada.  A species  of  baldness,  a shedding  of  the 
hair  from  a venereal  cause. 

PELA'GRA.  Elephantiasis  italica.  This  disease 
does  not  appear  to  have  been  noticed  by  any  of  our  no- 
sologists,  except  Dr.  Good.  Indeed,  few  accounts  of  it 
have  hitherto  been  published,  although  the  peculiar 
symptoms  with  which  it  is  attended,  and  the  fatal  con- 
sequences which  generally  ensue  from  it,  render  it 
equally  curious  and  important.  In  certain  districts,  as 
Milan  and  Padua,  in  Italy,  where  it  is  peculiarly  pre- 
valent, it  is  computed  to  attack  five  inhabitants  out  of 
every  hundred.  The  following  account  of  this  singular 
disease  is  extracted  from  Dr.  Jansen’s  treatise  on  the 
subject,  who  had  seen  the  disease  at  Milan : 

About  the  month  of  March  or  April,  when  the  season 
invites  the  farmers  to  cultivate  their  fields,  it  often 
happens  that  a shining  red  spot  suddenly  arises  on  the 
back  of  the  hand,  resembling  the  common  erysipelas, 
but  without  much  itching  or  pain,  or  indeed  any  other 
particular  inconvenience.  Both  men  and  women,  girls 
and  boys,  are  equally  subject  to  it.  Sometimes  this 
spot  affects  both  hands,  without  appearing  on  any  other 
part  of  the  body.  Not  uncommonly  it  arises  also  on 
the  shins,  sometimes  on  the  neck,  and  now  and  then, 
though  very  rarely,  on  the  face.  It  is  sometimes  also 
seen  on  the  breasts  of  women,  where  they  are  not 
covered  by  the  clothes,  but  such  parts  of  the  body  as 
are  not  exposed  to  the  air,  are  very  seldom  affected; 
nor  has  it  ever  been  observed  to  attack  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  or  the  sole  of  the  foot.  This  red  spot  elevates 
the  skin  a little,  producing  numerous  small  tubercles  of 
different  colours ; the  skin  becomes  dry  and  cracks,  and 
the  epidermis  sometimes  assumes  a fibrous  appearance. 
At  length  it  falls  off' in  white  furfuraceous  scales;  but 
the  shining  redness  underneath  still  continues,  and,  in 
some  instances,  remains  through  the  following  winter. 
In  the  mean  time,  excepting  this  mere  local  affection, 
the  health  is  not  the  least  impaired,  the  patient  performs 
all  his  rural  labours  as  before,  enjoys  a good  appetite, 
eats  heartily,  and  digests  well.  The  bowels  are  gene- 
rally relaxed  at  the  very  commencement  of  the  disease, 
and  continue  so  throughout  its  whole  course.  All  the 
other  excretions  are  as  usual ; and,  in  females,  the 
menses  return  at  their  accustomed  periods,  and  in  their 
proper  quantity.  But  what  is  most  surprising  is,  that 
in  the  month  of  September,  when  the  heat  of  the  sum- 
mer is  over,  in  some  cases  sooner,  in  others  later,  the 
disorder  generally  altogether  disappears,  and  the  skin 
resumes  its  natural  healthy  appearance.  This  change 
has  been  known  to  tal’SJ  place  as  early  as  the  latter  end 
of  May  or  June,  when  the  disease  has  only  been  in  its 
earliesfstage.  The  patients,  however,  are  not  now  to 
be  considered  as  well ; the  disease  hides  itself,  but  is 
not  eradicated  : for  no  sooner  does  the  following  spring 
return,  but  it  quickly  reappears,  and  generally  is  accom- 
panied with  severer  symptoms.  The  spot  grows  larger, 
the  skin  becomes  more  unequal  and  hard,  with  deeper 
cracks.  The  patient  now  begins  to  feel  uneasiness  in 
the  head,  becomes  fearful,  dull,  less  capable  of  labour, 
and  much  wearied  with  his  usual  exertions.  He  is  ex- 
ceedingly affected  with  the  changes  of  the  atmosphere, 
and  impatient  both  of  cold  and  heat.  Nevertheless  he 
generally  gets  through  his  ordinary  labour,  with  less 
vigour  and  cheerfulness  indeed  than  formerly,  but  still 
without  being  obliged  to  take  to  his  bed ; and  as  he  has 
no  fever,  his  appetite  continues  good,  and  the  chylo- 
poietic  viscera  perform  their  proper  functions.  When 
the  pelagralias  even  arrived  at  this  stage,  the  returning 
winter,  nevertheless,  commonly  restores  the  patient  to 
apparent  health ; but  the  more  severe  the  symptoms 
have  been,  and  the  deeper  root  the  disease  has  taken, 
the  more  certainly  does  the  return  of  spring  produce  it 
with  additional  violence.  Sometimes  the  disease  in 
the  skin  disappears,  but  the  other  symptoms  remain 
notwithstanding.  The  powers  both  of  the  mind  and 
body  now  become  daily  more  enfeebled ; peevishness, 


PEL 


watchings,  vertigo,  and,  at  length,  complete  melan 
clioly,  supervene.  Nor  is  there  a more  distressing  kind 
of  melancholy  any  where  to  be  seen,  than  takes  plac» 
in  this  disease.  “ On  entering  the  hospital  at  Legna 
no,”  says  Dr.  Jansen,  “ I was  astonished  at  the  mourn- 
ful spectable  I beheld,  especially  in  the  women’s  ward. 
There  they  all  sat,  indolent,  languid,  with  downcast 
looks,  their  eyes  expressing  distress,  weeping  without 
cause,  and  scarcely  returning  an  answer  when  spoken 
to ; so  that  a person  would  suppose  himself  to  be  among 
fools  and  mad  people : and,  indeed,  with  very  good 
reason  ; for  gradually  this  melancholy  increases,  and  at 
length  ends  in  real  mania. 

“ Many,  as  I had  an  opportunity  of  observing  in  this 
hospital,  were  covered  with  a peculiar  and  character- 
istic sweat,  having  a very  offensive  smell,  which  I 
know  not  how  better  to  express  than  by  comparing  it 
to  the  smell  of  mouldy  bread.  A person  accustomed 
to  see  the  disease  would  at  once  recognise  it  by  this 
single  symptom.  Many  complained  of  a burning  pain 
at  night  in  the  soles  of  the  feet,  which  often  deprived 
them'  of  sleep.  Some  with  double  vision : others  with 
fatuity;  others  with  visceral  obstructions;  others  with 
additional  symptoms.  Nevertheless,  fever  still  keeps 
off,  the  appetite  is  unimpaired,  and  the  secretions  are 
regularly  carried  on.  But  the  disease  goes  on  increas- 
ing, the  nerves  are  more  debilitated,  the  legs  and  thighs 
lose  the  power  of  motion,  stupor  or  delirium  comes  on, 
and  the  melancholy  terminates  in  confirmed  mania. 
In  the  hospital  at  Legnano,  I saw  both  men  and  women 
in  this  maniacal  state.  Some  lay  quiet ; others  were 
raving,  and  obliged  to  be  tied  down  to  the  bed,  to  pre- 
vent them  from  doing  mischief  to  themselves  and 
others.  In  almost  all  these  the  pulse  was  small,  slow, 
and  without  any  character  of  fever.  One  woman  ap- 
peared to  have  a slight  degree  of  furor  uterinus ; for, 
at  the  sight  of  men  she  became  merry,  smiled,  offered 
kisses,  and  by  her  gestures  desired  them  to  come  to- 
wards her.  Some  were  occupied  in  constant  prayers ; 
some  pleased  themselves  with  laughter,  and  others 
with  other  things.  But  it  was  remarkable,  that  all  who 
were  in  this  stage  of  the  disease,  had  a strong  propen- 
sity to  drown  themselves.  They  now  begin  to  grow 
emaciated,  and  the  delirium  is  often  followed  by  a 
species  of  tabes.  A colliquative  diarrhoea  comes  on, 
which  no  remedy  can  stop,  as  also  has  been  observed 
in  nostalgia.  Sometimes,  in  the  pelagra,  the  diarrhoea 
comes  on  before  the  delirium,  and  the  delirium  and 
stupor  mutually  interchange  with  each  other.  The 
appetite  often  suddenly  failed,  so  that  the  sick  will 
sometimes  go  for  near  a week  without  tasting  food. 
Not  uncommonly  it  returns  as  suddenly,  so  that  they 
eagerly  devoured  whatever  was  offered  them,  and  this 
even  at  times  when  they  are  horridly  convulsed.  The 
convulsions  with  which  they  are  attacked,  are  most 
shocking  to  see,  and  are  of  almost  every  kind,  catalepsy 
excepted,  which  has  been  described  by  writers.  I saw 
one  girl  in  bed,  who  was  violently  distorted  by  opistho- 
tonos every  time  she  attempted  to  rise.  Some  are 
seized  with  emprosthotonos ; and  others  with  other 
species  of  tetanus.  At  length,  syncope  and’death  close 
the  tragedy,  often  without  any  symptom  of  fever  oc- 
curring through  the  whole  course  of  the  disease.”  The 
first  stage  of  the  pelagra,  in  which  the  local  affection 
only  takes  place,  Dr.  Jansen  observes,  continues  in 
some  instances  for  a great  length  of  time;  persons 
being  occasionally  met  with  in  whom  it  has  lasted  six 
or  eight,  or  even  fifteen  years,  disappearing  regularly 
every  winter,  and  returning  again  in  the  spring.  This 
occasions  some  of  the  inhabitants  to  pay  little  attention 
to  it;  although,  in  other  cases,  it  reaches  its  greatest 
height  after  the  seconder  third  attack.  It  appears  that 
this  disease  is  not  infectious,  and  that  the  causes  pro- 
ducing it  are  yet  unascertained.  It  has  been  supposed, 
by  some,  to  arise  from  the  heat  of  the  sun’s  rays ; ana 
hence  it  is  now  and  then  called  mal  de  sole ; but  this 
does  not  produce  any  similar  disease  in  other  parts  of 
the  world,  where  it  is  in  an  equal  or  even  much  greater 
degree  than  at  Milan;  no  disease  in  any  respect  re- 
sembling it,  having  hitherto  been  noticed  in  such  re- 
gions, except  the  lepra  asturiensis  described  by  Thiery, 
and  after  him  by  Sauvages.  In  this,  a tremour  of  the 
head  and  trunk  of  the  body  takes  place,  which  does  not 
happen  in  the  pelagra.  This,  however,  is  the  principal 
difference  in  the  two  diseases. 

Pela'rium.  (From  kj??Aoj,  mud:  so  called  from  it» 
muddy  consistence.)  A collyriuin.  | 


PEL 

Peleca'nus.  (From  zseXsKaw,  to  perforate.)  1.  The 

ird  called  the  pelican. 

2.  An  instrument  to  draw  teeth : so  named  from  its 
curvature  at  the  end  resembling  the  beak  of  a pelican. 

Peleci'num.  (From  zseXeKvs,  a hatchet : so  called 
because  its  seeds  are  shaped  like  a two-edged  hatchet.) 
The  hatchet-vetch. 

PELIOM.  A blue-coloured  mineral,  very  similar  to 
iolite,  found  in  Bodenmais,  in  Bohemia. 

Pelio'ma.  (From  zzeXos,  black.)  An  extravasation 
of  blood  of  a livid  colour. 

PELLICULA.  A pellicle  or  slender  skin.  In  me 
dicine,  it  is  applied  to  such  an  appearance  of  the  sur 
face  of  urine,  and  to  very  delicate  membraneous  pro 
ductions.  In  botany,  to  the  delicate  skin  which  covers 
some  seeds ; as  the  almond,  &c. 

PELLITORY.  See  Parietaria. 

Pellitory,  bastard.  See  Achillea  ptarinica. 

Pellitory  of  Spain.  See  Anthemis  pyrethrum. 

Pe'lma.  (From  sjfAw,  to  move  forwards.)  The 
sole  of  the  foot,  or  a sock  adapted  to  the  sole  of  the  foot. 

PELTA.  {Pelta,  a shield  or  buckler.)  A variety  of 
the  calyculus,  called  the  shield,  which  is  the  fruit,  of 
an  oblong,  flat,  and  obtuse  form,  observed  in  the  lichen 
tribe. 

Pelta' lis  cartilago.  (From  pelta,  a buckler  : so 
called  from  its  shape.)  The  scutiform  cartilage  of  the 
larynx. 

PELTATUS.  (From  pelta , a shield.)  Peltate : 
applied  to  leaves  which  have  the  stalk  inserted  into 
their  middle,  like  the  arm  of  a man  holding  a shield  ; 
as  in  Tropceolum  majus , and  Hydrocotule  vulgaris. 

PELVIC.  (Pelvicus  ; from  pelvis,  the  lower  part  of 
the  trunk  of  the  body.)  Pertaining  to  the  pelvis. 

Pelvic  ligaments.  The  articulation  of  the  os  sa- 
crum with  the  last  lumbar  vertebra,  and  with  the  ossa 
innominata,  is  strengthened  by  means  of  a strong  trans- 
verse ligament,  which  passes  from  the  extremity  and 
lower  edge  of  the  last  lumbar  vertebra,  to  the  posterior 
and  internal  surface  of  the  spine  of  the  ilium.  Other 
ligaments  are  extended  posteriorly  from  the  os  sacrum 
to  the  ossa  ilia  on  each  side,  and,  from  the  direction  of 
their  fibres,  may  be  called  the  lateral  ligaments.  Be- 
sides these,  there  are  many  shorter  ligamentous  fibres, 
which  are  seen  stretched  from  the  whole  circumference 
of  the  articulating  surfaces  of  these  two  bones.  But 
the  most  remarkable  ligaments  of  the  pelvis  are  the  two 
sacro-ischiatic  ligaments,  which  are  placed  towards 
the  posterior  and  inferior  part  of  the  pelvis.  One  of 
these  may  be  called  the  greater,  and  the  other  the  lesser 
sacro-ischiatic  ligament.  The  first  of  these  is  attached 
to  the  posterior  edge  of  the  os  sacrum,  to  the  tuberosity 
of  the  ilium,  and  to  the- first  of  the  three  divisions  of 
the  os  coccygis.  Its  other  extremity  is  inserted  into  the 
inner  surface  of  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium.  At  its 
upper  part  it  is  of  considerable  breadth,  after  which  it 
becomes  narrower,  but  expands  again  before  its  inser- 
tion into  the  ischium,  and  extending  along  the  tubero- 
sity of  that  bone  to  the  lower  branch  of  the  os  pubis, 
where  it  terminates  in  a point,  forms  a kind  of  falx, 
one  end  of  which  is  loose,  while  the  other  is  fixed  to 
the  bone.  The  lesser  sac-ischiatic  ligament  is  some- 
what thicker  than  the  former,  and  is  placed  obliquely 
before  it.  It  extends  from  the  transverse  processes  of 
the  os  sacrum,  and  the  tuberosity  of  the  spine  of  the 
ilium,  on  each  side,  to  the  spine  of  the  ischium.  These 
two  ligaments  not  only  serve  to  strengthen  the  articu 
lation  of  the  ossa  innominata  with  the  os  sacrum,  but 
to  support  the  weight  of  the  viscera  contained  in  the 
pelvis,  the  back  and  lower  part  of  which  is  closed  by 
these  ligaments.  The  posterior  and  external  surface 
of  the  greater  ligament  likewise  serves  for  the  attach- 
ment of  some  portions  of  the  gluteus  inaximus  and  ge- 
mini  muscles.  The  symphysis  pubis  is  strengthened 
internally  by  a transverse  ligament,  some  of  the  fibres 
of  which  are  extended  to  the  obturator  ligament. 

PE'LVIS.  (From  vsc\vs,  a basin ; because  it  is 
shaped  like  a basin  used  in  former  times.)  The  cavity 
below  the  belly.  It  contains  the  rectum  and  urinary 
bladder,  the  internal  organs  of  generation,  and  has  its 
muscles  and  bones. 

Pelvis,  bones  of.  The  pelvis  consists,  in  the  child, 
of  many  pieces,  but  in  the  adult,  it  is  formed  of  four 
bones,  of  the  os  sacrum  behind,  the  ossa  innominata  on 
either  side,  and  the  os  coccygis  below.  See  Sacrum , 
Innominatum  os,  and  Coccygis  os.  It  is  wide  and  ex- 
panded at  its  upper  part,  and  contracted  at  its  inferior 


PEM 


PEN 


aperture  The  upper  part  of  the  pelvis,  properly  so 
called,  is  bounded  by  an  oval  ring,  which  parts  the  ca- 
vity of  the  pelvis  from  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  This 
circle  is  denominated  the  brim  of  the  pelvis ; it  is 
formed  by  a continued  and  prominent  line  along  the 
upper  part  of  the  sacrum,  the  middle  of  the  ilium,  and 
the  upper  part,  or  crest,  of  the  os  pubis.  The  circle  of 
the  brim  supports  the  impregnated  womb ; keeps  it  up 
against  the  pressure  of  labour-pains ; and  sometimes 
this  line  has  been  “ as  sharp  as  a paper-folder,  and  has 
cut  across  the  segment  of  the  womb  ;”  and  so  by  sepa- 
rating the  womb  from  the  vagina,  has  rendered  deli- 
very impossible ; and  the  child  escaping  into  the  abdo- 
men the  woman  has  died.  The  lower  part  of  the 
pelvis  is  denominated  the  outlet.  It  is  composed  by  the 
arch  of  the  ossa  pubis,  and  by  the  sciatic  ligaments  ; it 
is  wide  and  dilateable,  to  permit  the  delivery  of  the 
child ; but  being  sometimes  too  wide,  it  permits  the 
child’s  head  to  press  so  suddenly,  and  with  such  vio- 
lence upon  the  soft  parts,  that  the  perineum  is  torn. 

The  marks  of  the  female  skeleton  have  been  sought 
for  in  the  skull,  as  in  the  continuation  of  sagittal 
suture ; hut  the  truest  marks  are  those  which  relate  to 
that  great  function  by  which  chiefly  the  sexes  are  dis- 
tinguished; for  while  the  male  pelvis  is  large  and 
strong,  with  a small  cavity,  narrow  openings,  and 
bones  of  greater  strength,  the  female  pelvis  is  very 
shallow  and  wide,  with  a large  cavity  and  slender 
bones,  and  every  peculiarity  which  may  conduce  to  the 
easy  passage  of  the  child. 

The  office  of  the  pelvis  is  to  give  a steady  bearing  to 
the  trunk,  and  to  connect  it  with  the  lower  extremities, 
by  a sure  and  firm  joining,  to  form  the  centre  of  all  the 
great  motions  of  the  body,  to  contain  the  internal  organs 
of  generation,  the  urinary  bladder,  the  rectum,  and 
occasionally  part  of  the  small  intestines,  and  to  give 
support  to  the  gravid  uterus. 

Pelvis  aurium.  The  cochlea  of  the  ear. 

Pelvis  cerebri.  The  infundibulum. 

PEMPHIGO'DES.  (From  zzeptyl,  a blast  of  wind.) 
A fever  distinguished  by  flatulencies  and  inflations,  in 
which  a sort  of  aerial  vapour  was  said  to  pass  through 
the  skin. 

PEMPHIGUS.  (From  ae/Mpil,  a bubble,  or  vesi- 
cle.) Fcbris  bullosa;  Exanthemata  serosa ; Morta; 
Pemphigus  helveticus ; Pemphigus  major ; Pemphigus 
vtinor.  The  vesicular  fever.  A fever  attended  by 
successive  eruptions  of  vesicles  about  the  size  of 
almonds,  which  are  filled  with  a yellowish  serum,  and 
in  three  or  fout  days  subside.  The  fever  may  be  either 
synoch  or  typhus.  It  is  a genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Pyrexia , and  order  Exanthemata , of  Cullen.  The 
latest  writers  on  this  disease  contend,  that  it  is  some- 
times acute  and  sometimes  a chronic  affection ; that 
the  former  is  constantly  attended  with  fever,  the  latter 
is  constantly  without ; that  in  neither  case  is  it  an 
acrimonious  or  contagious  matter  thrown  out  by  the 
constitution,  but  pure  serum,  secreted  by  the  cutaneous 
exhalent  arteries.  So  rare  was  the  disease  when  Dr. 
Cullen  wrote,  that  he  never  saw  it  but  once,  in  a case 
which  was  shown  to  him  by  Dr.  Home.  Dr.  David 
Stuart,  then  physician  to  the  hospital  of  Aberdeen,  pub- 
lished an  account  of  it  in  the  Edinburgh  Medical  Com- 
mentaries. The  patient  was  a private  soldier  of  the 
73d  regiment,  aged  18,  formerly  a pedler,  and  naturally 
of  a healthy  constitution.  About  twenty  days  before, 
he  had  been  seized  with  the  meazles,  when  in  the 
country;  and  in  marching  to  town  on  the  second  day 
of  their  eruption,  he  was  exposed  to  cold  ; upon  which 
they  suddenly  disappeared.  On  his  arrival  at  Aber- 
deen, he  was  quartered  in  a damp  under  ground  apart- 
ment. He  then  complained  of  sickness  at  stomach, 
great  oppression  about  the  praecordia,  headache,  lassi- 
tude, and  weariness  on  the  least  exertion,  with  stiffness 
and  rigidity  of  his  knees  and  other  joints.  He  had  been 
purged,  but  with  little  benefit.  About  ten  days  before, 
he  observed  on  the  inside  of  his  thighs,  a number  of 
very  small,  distinct  red  spots,  a little  elevated  above 
the  surface  of  the  skin,  and  much  resembling  the  first 
appearance  of  the  small-pox.  This  eruption  gradually 
spread  itself  over  his  whole  body,  and  the  pustules  con- 
tinued every  day  to  increase  in  size. 

Upon  being  received  into  the  hospital,  he  complained 
of  headache,  sickness  at  stomach,  oppression  about  the 
pracordia,  thirst,  sore  throat,  with  difficulty  of  swal- 
lowing ; his  tongue  was  foul,  his  skin  felt  hot  and  fever- 
ish, pulse  from  110  to  120  rather  depressed,  belly  costive 
162 


eyes  dull  and  languid,  but  without  delirium.  The 
whole  surface  of  the  skin  was  interspersed  with  vesi- 
cles, or  phlyctaenae,  of  the  size  of  an  ordinary  walnut; 
many  of  them  were  larger,  especially  on  the  arms  and 
breast.  In  the  interstices,  between  the  vesicles,  the 
appearance  of  the  skin  was  natural,  nor  was  there  any 
redness  round  their  base;  the  distance  from  one  to 
another  was  from  half  an  inch  to  a handbreath,  or 
more.  In  some  places  two  or  three  were  joined  to- 
gether, like  the  pustules  in  the  confluent  smail-pox.  A 
few  vesticles  had  burst  of  themselves,  and  formed  a 
whitish  scab  or  crust.  These  were  mostly  on  the  neck 
and  face;  others  showed  a tolerable  laudable  pus. 
However,  by  far  the  greatest  number  were  perfectly 
entire,  turgid,  and  of  a bluish  colour.  Upon  opening 
them,  it  was  evident  that  the  cuticle  elevated  above 
the  cutis,  and  distended  with  a thin,  yellowish,  semi- 
pellucid  serum,  formed  this  appearance.  Nor  was  the 
surface  of  the  cutis  ulcerated,  or  livid ; but  of  a red 
florid  colour,  as  when  the  cuticle  is  separated  by  a 
blister,  or  superficial  burning.  No  other  person  la- 
boured under  a similar  disease,  either  in  the  part  of 
the  country  from  which  he  came,  or  where  he  resided, 
in  Aberdeen. 

Since  the  publication  of  this  case  of  pemphigus, 
by  Dr.  Stuart,  observations  on  this  disease  have  been 
published  by  Dr.  Dickson,  of  Dublin,  by  Mr.  Gaitskell 
and  Mr.  Upton,  in  the  Mem.  of  the  Medical  Society  of 
London.  Some  subsequent  observations  on  pemphigus 
were  published  in  the  London  Med.  Journal,  by  Mr. 
Thomas  Christie.  From  a case  which  Mr.  Christie 
describes,  he  is  disposed  to  agree  with  Dr.  Dickson,  in 
thinking,  that  sometimes,  at  least,  pemphigus  is  not 
contagious.  He  remarks,  however,  that  the  pemphigus 
described  by  some  foreign  writers  was  extremely  in- 
fectious; circumstances  which,  he  thinks,  may  lead  to 
a division  of  the  disease  into  two  species,  the  pem- 
pigiius  simplex,  and  complicatus,  both  of  which,  but 
especially  the  last,  seem  to  vary  much  with  respect  to 
mildness  and  malignity. 

Pemphigus  major.  A title  under  which  pemphigus 
is  spoken  of  by  Sauvages,  who  defines  it  an  eruption 
of  phlyetasnae,  about  the  size  of  a hazel-nut,  filled  with 
a thin  yellow  serum.  See  Pemphigus. 

Pemphigus  minor.  In  this  species  the  vesicles  are 
no  larger  than  garden  peas. 

Pe'mphis.  A species  of  Lythrum. 

PEMPHIX.  A vesicle,  or  bubble.  See  Pemphigus , 

Pemptje'us.  (From  zsepirros,  the  fifth.)  An  ague, 
the  paroxysm  of  which  returns  every  fifth  day. 

PEN  AS' A.  (A  name  given  by  Linnaeus  in  memory 
of  the  learned  Peter  Pena,  a native  of  France,  and  an 
excellent  scientific  botanist.)  1.  A genus  of  plants  in 
the  Class  Tetrandria ; Order  Monogynia. 

2.  The  name  of  a species  of  polygala. 

Penjea  mucronata.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  is  said  to  afford  the  sarcocolla.  This  is 
brought  from  Persia  and  Arabia  in  small  grains  of  a 
pale  yellow  colour,  having  also  sometimes  mixed  with 
them  a few  of  a deep  red  colour.  Its  taste  is  bitter, 
but  followed  with  some  degree  of  sweetness.  It  lias 
been  chiefly  used  for  external  purposes,  and,  as  its 
name  imports,  has  been  thought  to  agglutinate  wounds 
and  ulcers ; but  this  opinion  now  no  longer  exists. 

PENDULUS.  Pendulous.  Hanging.  Applied  to 
roots,  leaves,  flowers,  seeds,  &c.  as  the  root  of  the 
Spircea  Jilipendula,  and  Pceonia  officinalis,  which  con- 
sits  of  knobs  connected  by  filaments ; and  the  seeds  of 
the  Magnolia  grandiflora,  which  are  suspended  by 
their  filaments. 

Penetra'ntia.  fFrom  penelro , to  pierce  through.) 
Medicines  which  pass  through  the  pores  and  stimulate. 

PENICILLIFO'RMIS.  (From  penicillus,  a pencil- 
brush, and  forma,  likeness.-)  Penicilliform.  1.  Applied 
to  the  stigma  of  milium  paspalium. 

2.  The  extremities  of  the  arteries  which  secrete  the 
bile,  are  so  called. 

PENICl'LLUS.  (Dim.  of  peniculum,  a brush.) 
Penicilhim.  1.  A tent,  or  pledget. 

2.  The  secreting  extremities  of  the  vena  port®  are 
called  penicilli.  See  Liver. 

Peni'dium.  A kind  of  clarified  sugar,  with  a mixture 
of  siarcli,  made  up  into  small  rolls.  The  confectioners 
call  it  barley-sugar. 

PE'NIS.  (A  pendendo , from  its  hanging  down.) 
Membrum  virile.  The  cylindrical  part  that  hangs  down 
under  the  mons  veneris,  before  the  scrotum  of  males. 


£P 


PER 


I is  divided  by'  anatomists  into  the  root,  body,  and 
nead,  called  the  glans  penis.  It  is  composed  of  com- 
mon integuments,  two  corpora  cavernosa,  and  one  cor- 
pus spongiosum,  which  surrounds  a canal,  the  urethra , 
that  proceeds  from  the  bladder  to  the  apex  of  the  penis, 
where  it  opens  by  the  meatus  urinarius.  See  Urethrq,. 
The  fold  of  the  skin  that  covers  the  glans  penis  is 
termed  the  prepuce.  The  arteries  of  the  penis  are  from 
the  hypogastric  and  ischiatic.  The  vein  of  the  penis, 
vena  magna  ipsius  penis , empties  itself  into  the  hypo- 
gastric vein.  The  absorbents  of  this  organ  are  very 
numerous,  and  run  under  the  common  integuments  to 
the  inguinal  glands  : absorbents  also  are  found  in  great 
plenty  in  the  urethra.  The  glands  of  the  penis  are, 
Cowper’s  glands,  the  prostate,  muciparous,  and  odori- 
ferous glands.  The  nerves  of  the  penis  are  branches 
of  the  sacral  and  ischiatic. 

Penis  cerebri.  The  pineal  gland. 

Penis  erector.  S ee  Erector  penis. 

Penis  muliebris.  See  Clitoris. 

PENNYROYAL.  See  Mentha  pulegium. 

Pennyroyal , hart's.  See  Mentha  cervina. 

PENTADA  CTYLON.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and 
SaKTvXos,  a finger : so  called  because  it  has  five  leaves 
upon  each  stalk,  like  the  fingers  upon  the  hand.)  1. 
The  herb  cinquefoil. 

2.  A name  for  the  ricinus,  the  leaf  of  which  resem- 
bles a hand. 

PENTAGONUS.  (From  nevre,  five,  and  ywvia,  an 
angle.)  Five-sided : applied  to  leaves  synonymously 
with  quinqueangular,  as  in  Geranium  pellatum. 

Pentamy'rum.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  pvpov,  oint- 
ment. ) An  ointment  composed  of  five  ingredients. 

PENTA'NDRIA.  (From  nevre , five,  and  avrjp,  a 
husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual 
system  of  Linnaeus,  embracing  those  which  have  her- 
maphrodite flowers  and  five  stamens. 

PENTANEU'RON.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  vevpov, 
a string : so  called  because  it  has  five-ribbed  leaves.) 
Pentapleurum.  Ribwort.  See  Plantago  lanceolata. 

Pentapha'rmacon.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  (f>app.a- 
kov,  remedium,  remedy.)  Any  medicine  consisting  of 
five  ingredients. 

PENTAPHYLLOI'DES.  (From  zsevratpvWov, 
cinquefoil,  and  eiSog,  likeness : so  called  from  its  re- 
semblance to  cinquefoil.)  See  Fragaria  sterilis. 

PENTAPHY'LLUM.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  (pv\ - 
Aov,  a leaf : so  named  because  it  has  five  leaves  on  each 
stalk.)  See  Potentilla  reptans. 

PENTAPHYLLUS.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  $v\- 
Aov,  a leaf.)  Pentaphyllous,  or  five-leaved : applied  to 
leaves,  calyces,  &c.  as  the  flower-cup  of  the  Ranuncu- 
lus bulbosus. 

Pentapleu'rum.  See  Pentaneuron. 

Penta'tomum.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  repvu),  to 
cut : so  called  because  its  leaves  are  divided  into  five 
segments.)  Cinquefoil.  The  Potentilla  reptans. 

Pento'robus.  (From  zsevre,  five,  and  opo6os,  the 
wood-pea : so  called  because  it  has  five  seeds  resem- 
bling the  wood-pea.)  The  herb  peony.  See  Pceonia 
officinalis. 

PEONY.  See  Pceonia. 

Pepa'nsis.  (From  zsevatvu),  to  concoct.)  Pepas- 
mus.  The  maturation  or  concoction  of  humours. 

Pepa'smus.  The  sajno  as  pepansis. 

Pepa'stica.  (From  zseiraivw,  to  concoct.)  Diges- 
tive medicines. 

PEPERINE.  A fatty  resinous  matter,  obtained  by 
Pelletier  from  black  pepper,  by  digesting  it  in  alkohol, 
and  evaporating  the  solution. 

Pe'pita  ncx.  St.  Ignatius’s  bean. 

Pe'plion.  (From  zsexXog,  the  herb  devil’s-milk.) 
Peplos ; Peplus.  The  Euphorbia  peplus. 

PEPO.  (From  zseirro,  to  ripen. 

I.  In  botanical  definitions,  a fleshy  succulent  peri- 
carpium,  or  seed-vessel,  the  seeds  of  which  are  inserted 
into  the  sides  of  the  fruit. 

From  its  figure,  the  pepo  is  called, 

1.  Globosus ; as  in  Cucumis  colocynthus. 

2.  Oblongus ; as  Cucumis  sativ  is. 

3.  Lagenwformis ; as  Cucurbit  l lagenaria. 

4.  Curvatus ; as  Cucumis  flexuosus. 

5.  Modosus ; as  Cucumis  melopepo. 

6.  Fusiformis ; as  Cucumis  chale. 

7.  Ec/unatus ; as  Cucumis  anguria. 

8.  Verrucosus;  as  Cucurbita  verrucosa. 

9.  Scaber  ; as  Cucumis  sativus. 

S s 2 


II.  See  CuMrbita. 

PEPPER.  See  Piper  nigrum. 

Pepper,  black.  See  Piper  nigrum. 

Pepper,  Guinea.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Pepper,  Jamaica.  See  Myrtus  pimenta. 

Pepper , long.  See  Pipef-  longum. 

Pepper,  poorman's.  See  Polygonum  hydropiper. 

Pepper , wall.  See  Sedum  acre. 

Pepper,  water  See  Polygonum  hydropiper. 

PEPPERMINT  See  Mentha  piperita. 

PEPPERWORT.  See  Lepidiumiberus. 

PE'PTIC.  (Pepticus  ; from  zseirro),  to  ripen.)  That 
which  promotes  digestion,  or  is  digestive. 

PERACUTE.  Very  sharp.  Diseases  are  thus 
called  when  very  severe,  or  aggravated  beyond  mea- 
sure ; as  subacute  is  applied  to  such  as  are  not  very 
acute,  or  so  severe  as  they  generally  are. 

PERCHLORIC  ACID.  Acidum  pcrchtoricum. 
Oxychloric  acid.  If  about  3 parts  of  sulphuric  acid  be 
poured  on  one  of  chlorate  of  potassa  in  a retort,  and 
after  the  first  violent  action  is  over,  heat  be  gradually 
applied,  to  separate  the  deutoxide  of  chlorine,  a saline 
mass  will  remain,  consisting  of  bisulphate  of  potassa 
and  perchlorate  of  potassa.  By  one  or  two  crystalliza- 
tions, the  latter  salt  may  be  separated  from  the  former. 
It  is  a neutral  salt,  with  a taste  somewhat  similar  to 
the  common  muriate  of  potassa.  It  is  very  sparingly 
soluble  in  cold  water,  since  at  60°,  only  l-55th  is  dis- 
solved; but  in  boiling  water  it  is  more  soluble.  Its 
crystals  are  elongated  octahedrons.  It  detonates  feebly 
when  triturated  with  sulphur  in  a mortar.  At  the 
heat  of  412°,  it  is  resolved  into  oxygen  and  muriate  of 
potassa,  in  the  proportion  of  46  of  the  former  to  54  of 
the  latter.  Sulphuric  acid,  at  280°,  disengages  the 
perchloric  acid.  For  these  facts  science  is  indebted  to 
Count  Von  Stadion.  It  seems  to  consist  of  7 primes 
of  oxygen,  combined  with  one  of  chlorine,  or  7.0  4.5. 

These  curious  discoveries  have  been  lately  verified  by 
Sir  H.  Davy.  The  other  perchlorates  are  not  known. 

Mr.  Wheeler  describes  an  ingenious  method  which 
he  employed  to  procure  chloric  acid  from  the  chlorate 
of  potassa.  He  mixed  a warm  solution  of  this  salt 
with  one  of  fluosilicic  acid.  He  kept  the  mixture  mo- 
derately hot  for  a few  minutes,  and  to  ensure  the  per- 
fect decomposition  of  the  salt,  added  a slight  excess  of 
the  acid.  Aqueous  solution  of  ammonia  will  show, 
by  the  separation  of  silica,  whether  any  of  the  fiuosi- 
licic  acid  be  left  after  the  decomposition  of  the  chlo- 
rate. Thus  we  can  effect  its  complete  decomposition. 
The  mixture  becomes  turbid,  and  fluosilicate  of  po- 
tassa is  precipitated  abundantly  in.  the  form  of  a gela- 
tinous mass.  The  supernatant  liquid  will  then  con- 
tain nothing  but  chloric  acid,  contaminated  with  a 
small  quantity  of  fluosilicic.  This  may  be  removed 
by  the  cautious  addition  of  a small  quantity  of  solution 
of  chlorate.  Or,  after  filtration,  the  whole  acid  may 
be  neutralized  by  carbonate  of  barytes,  and  the  chlo- 
rate of  that  earth,  being  obtained  in  crystals,  is  em- 
ployed to  procure  the  acid,  as  directed  by  Gay  Lussac. 

PERCIVAL,  Thomas,  was  born  at  Warrington,  in 
1740.  He  studied  for  three  years  with  great  assiduity, 
at  Edinburgh  : then  came  to  London,  and  was  chosen 
a Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society ; after  which  he  visited 
different  places  on  the  Continent,  and  took  his  degree 
at  Leyden.  In  1767,  he  settled  at  Manchester,  and  con 
tinued  there  till  the  period  of  his  death,  in  1804,  in  the 
unremitting  exercise  of  his  medical  duties.  Dr.  Perci- 
val  possessed,  in  an  eminent  degree,  those  moral  and 
intellectual  endowments,  which  are  calculated  to 
form  a distinguished  physician.  He  has  been  well  cha- 
racterized as  an  author  without  vanity,  a philosopher 
without  pride,  a scholar  without  pedantry,  and  a 
Christian  without  guile.  His  earlier  inquiries  were 
directed  to  medical,  chemical,  and  philosophical  sub- 
jects, which  he  pursued  with  great  judgment,  com- 
bining the  cautious  but  assiduous  use  of  experiment 
with  scientific  observation,  and  much  literary  research. 
His  papers  were  published  collectively,  under  the  title 
of  “ Essays,  Medical  and  Experimental,”  in  three  vo- 
lumes ; which  have  passed  through  many  editions,  and 
obtained  him  considerable  reputation.  Bis  subsequent 
publications  were  of  a moral  nature,  and  originally 
conceived  for  the  improvement  of  his  children.  But  his 
last  work,  entitled  “ Medical  Ethics,”  which  appeared 
in  1803,  is  adapted  for  the  use  of  the  profession,  and 
will  form  a lasting  monument  of  his  integrity  and  wis- 
dom. He  contr  buted  also  numerous  papers  on  vari- 

163 


PER 


ous  subjects  to  the  Memoirs  of  the  Literary  and  Philo- 
sophical Society  of  Manchester  which  lie  had  been 
mainly  instrumental  in  establishing,  and  which  did  not 
cease  to  manifest  a grateful  sense  of  his  merits,  by  the 
continued  appointment  of  him  to  the  presidency. 

PERCOLATION.  ( Percolatio , strained  through  ; 

from  per , through,  and  colo,  to  strain.)  It  is  generally 
applied  to  animal  secretion,  from  the  office  of-the 
glands  being  thought  to  resemble  that  of  a strainer  in 
transmitting  the  liquors  that  pass  through  them. 

Perde'tum.  In  Paracelsus  it  is  the  root  of  skirret, 
or  Sium  sis  arum. 

Perdi'cium.  (From  zstp5i\,  a partridge:  so  called 
because  partridges  were  said  to  feed  upon  it.)  The 
Parietaria  officinalis , or  pellitory  of  the  wall. 

PERENNIAL.  See  Perennis. 

PERENNIS.  Perennial ; lasting  for  years : applied 
to  plants  in  opposition  to  those  which  live  only  one  or 
two  years ; thus  the  elm,  oak,  fir,  &c.  are  perennial. 

Perennial  worm-grass.  See  Spigelia. 

Perete'rion.  (From  zsepam , to  dig  through.)  The 
perforating  part  of  the  trepan. 

PERFOLIA'TA.  (From  per , and  folium : so  called 
because  the  leaves  surround  the  stem,  like  those  of 
a cabbage.)  See  Bupleurum  perfoliatum. 

PERFOLIATUS.  (From  per,  through,  and  folium, 
a leaf.)  Perfoliate  : applied  to  leaves  when  the  stem 
runs  through  them,  as  in  Bupleurum  rotundifolium , 
and  Chlora  perfoliata. 

PE'RFORANS.  See  Flexor  profundus  forans. 

Pkrforans,  seu  flexor  profundus.  See  Flexor 
longus  digitorum  pedis  profundus  perforans. 

Perforans,  seu  flexor  tertii  internodii  digi- 
torum pedis.  See  Flexor  longus  digitorum  pedis 
profundus  perforans. 

Perforans,  vulgo  profundus.  See  Flexor  pro - 

^ PERFORATA.  (From  perforo , to  pierce  through  : 
so  called  because  its  leaves  are  full  of  holes.)  See 
Hypericum. 

PERFORA'TUS.  See  Flexor  brevis  digitoMm 
pedis,  and  Flexor  sublimis  perforatus. 

Perforatus,  seu  flexor  secundi  internodii  di- 
gitorum  pedis.  See  Flexor  brevis  digitorum  pedis 
perforatus  sublimis. 

Peria'mma.  (From  vstpianro,  to  hang  round.)  An 
amulet,  or  charm,  which  was  hung  round  the  neck  to 
prevent  infection. 

PEllIA'NTHIUM.  (From  irepi,  and  avdog,  a 
flower.)  The  calyx  properly  and  commonly  so  called, 
when  it  is  contiguous  to  and  makes  a part  of  the 
flower,  as  the  five  green  leaves  which  encompass  a 
rose,  including  their  urn-shaped  base;  the  tubular  part 
comprehending  the  scales  in  the  pinks,  or  the  globular 
scaly  cup  in  Centaurea.  The  tulip  is  a naked  flower, 
having  no  calyx  at  all.  The  perianth  is  of  infinite  va- 
riety of  forms. 

From  its  number  of  leaves,  it  is, 

1.  Monophyllous , formed  of  one  only;  as  in  Datura 
stramonium. 

2.  Diphyllous ; as  in  Papaver  rhceas. 

3.  Triphyllous;  as  in  Canna  indica. 

4.  T 'etr aphyllous ; as  Lunaria  annua. 

5.  Pent  aphyllous  ; as  Ranunculus. 

From  the  division  of  its  edge, 

1.  Undivided ; without  any  irregularity ; as  in  the 
female  of  the  Onerous  robur. 

2.  Partite , or  divided  almost  to  the  base ; hence  bi- 
partite or  bilabeate , in  Salvia  officinalis;  tripartite , in 
Stratiotes  aloides;  quadripartite , in  CEnothera  biennis: 
quinquepartite , in  Nerium  oleander;  duodecempartite , 
in  Sempervivum  tectorum. 

3.  Cloven , cut  as  it  were  to  the  middle  only ; hence, 
bifid,  in  Adoxa  moschatellina ; trifid,  in  Asarum  cana- 
delise ; quinquefid , in  CEsculus  hippocastanum. 

4.  Dentate,  in  Marrubium  vulgare;  quinque  dentate, 
in  Cucumis  and  Cucurbita,  the  female  flowers. 

5.  Serrate,  in  Centaurea  cyanus. 

From  its  figure, 

1.  Tubulosum;  as  in  Datura  stramonium. 

2.  Patens,  with  spreading  leaflets ; as  in  Borago  offi- 
cinalis. 

3.  Reflexum,  its  laciniated  portions  turned  back- 
ward ; as  in  CEnothera  biennis. 

4.  Infiatum , pouched  and  hollow  ; as  in  Cucubalus 
behen,  and  Physalis  alkekengi  in  fruit. 

From  its  colour 
164 


PER 

Color  alum,  when  of  any  other  than  green , as  m 
Gomphrena  globosa. 

From  the  disposition  of  the  germon, 

1.  Superum,  when  the  perianth  and  corols  are  above. 
Hence  the  remains  are  visible  on  the  fruit,  as  in  roses, 
pears,  &c. 

2.  Inferum,  when  below  the  germen;  as  in  the 
poppy  and  water-lily. 

From  the  number  on  each  flower, 

1.  Simplex,  when  one  ; as  in  Nicotiana  tabacum. 

2.  Duplex , double;  as  in  Malva,  Althaea,  Hibis- 
cus, &c. 

3.  Calyculatum,  or  acutum,  having  a lesser  one,  or 
scales  down  to  the  base ; as  in  Dianthus  caryopliyllus. 

Nullum,  when  wanting ; as  in  tulips. 

From  its  situation  with  respect  to  the  fructification, 

1.  Perianthum  floris,  when  belonging  to  the  male. 

2.  P.  fructus,  when  with  the  pistils. 

3.  P.  fructificationis , containing  both  stamina  and 
postils  in  the  flower. 

From  its  duration, 

1.  Caducum,  falling  off  early ; as  in  Papaver 

2.  Deciduus,  very  late ; as  in  Tilia  Europcea. 

3.  Peristens  ; as  in  Hyosciamus. 

4.  Marescens,  withered,  but  yet  conspicuous  on  the 
fruit;  as  in  Pyrus,  Mespilus,  &c. 

PERIBLE'PSIS.  (From  vstpiSXtnw,  to  stare  about.) 
That  kind  of  wild  look  which  is  observed  in  delirious 
persons. 

PERI'BOLE.  (From  Z3epi6a\\w,  to  surround.)  A 
word  used  frequently  by  Hippocrates  in  different  senses. 
Sometimes  it  signifies  the  dress  of  a person ; at  others 
a translation  of  the  morbific  humours  from  the  centre 
to  the  surface  of  the  body. 

PERIBRO'SIS.  An  ulceration  or  erosion,  at  the 
corners  or  uniting  parts  of  the  eyelids.  This  disor- 
der most  frequently  affects  the  internal  commissure  of 
the  eyelids.  The  species  are,  1.  Peribrosis,  from  the 
acrimony  of  the  tears,  as  may  be  observed  in  the  epi- 
phora. 

2.  Peribrosis,  from  an  aegylops,  which  sometimes  ex- 
tends to  the  commissure  of  the  eyelids. 

PERICARDI'TIS.  (From  zsepiicapSiov,  the  pericar 
dium.)  Inflammation  of  the  pericardium.  See  Car 

ditis. 

PERICA'RDIUM.  (From  aepi,  about,  and  icapdia, 
the  heart.)  The  membranous  bag  that  surrounds  the 
heart.  Its  use  is  to  secrete  and  contain  the  vapour  of 
the  pericardium,  which  lubricates  the  heart,  and  thus 
preserves  it  from  concreting  with  the  pericardium. 

PERICA'RPIA.  (From  aepi,  about,  and  carpus , 
the  wrist.)  Medicines  that  are  applied  to  the  wrist. 

PERICARPIALIS.  Belonging  to  the  pericarpium 
of  plants : thus  the  spines  of  the  Datura  stramonium 
on  the  fruit,  are  called  pericarpial. 

PERICARPIUM.  The  seed-vessel  or  covering  of 
the  seed  of  plants,  which  is  mostly  membranous,  lea- 
thery, woody,  pulpy,  or  succulent.  The  membranous 
are, 

1.  Capsula.  5.  Lomentum. 

2.  Silt  qua.  6.  Folliculus. 

3.  Silicula.  7.  Samara. 

4.  Legumen. 

The  woody  seed-vessels  are 

8.  Strobulus.  9.  Nux. 

The  fleshy  ones, 

10.  Pomum.  12.  Drupa. 

11.  Pepo. 

The  succulent, 

13.  Bacca. 

The  seed-vessel  is  extremely  various  in  different 
plants,  and  is  formed  of  the  germen  enlarged.  It  is  not 
an  essential  part  of  a plant,  the  seeds  being  frequently 
naked,  and  guarded  only  by  the  calyx,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  plants  of  the  order  Gymnospcrmia,  also  in  the 
great  class  of  compound  flowers,  Syngenesia. 

The  use  of  the  seed-vessel  is  to  protect  the  seeds  till 
ripe,  and  then,  in  some  way  or  other,  to  promote[their 
dispersion,  either  scattering  them  by  its  elastic  power, 
or  serving  for  the  food  of  animals,  in  the  dung  of  which 
the  seeds  vegetate,  or  promoting  the  same  end  by  va- 
rious other  means.  The  same  organ  which  remains 
closed  so  long  as  it  is  juicy  or  moist,  splits  or  flies  asun- 
der when  dry,  thus  scattering  the  seeds  in  weather 
most  favourable  for  their  success.  By  an  extraordinary 
provision  of  nature,  however,  in  some  annual  species 
of  Mescmbryanthemum,  natives  of  sandy  deserts  in 


PER 


PER 


Africa,  the  seed-vessel  opens  only  in  rainy  weather ; 
otherwise  the  seeds  might,  in  that  country,  lie  long  ex- 
posed before  they  met  with  sufficient  moisture  to 
vegetate. 

PERICIIAETIUM.  (From  irepi,  about,  and  xailrt ? a 
hair  or  bristle.)  A scaly  sheath,  investing  the  fertile 
flower,  and  consequently  the  base  of  the  fruit-stalk,  of 
some  mosses.  In  the  genus  Hypnum  it  is  of  great  con- 
sequence, not  only  by  its  presence,  constituting  a part 
of  the  generic  character,  but  by  its  differences  in  shape, 
proportion,  and  structure,  serving  frequently  to  discri- 
minate species.  Linnams  appears  by  his  manuscripts, 
Sir  James  Smith  informs  us,  to  have  intended  adding 
this  to  the  different  kinds  of  calyx,  though  it  is  not  one 
of  the  seven  enumerated  in  his  printed  works. 

PERICHO  NDRIUM.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and 
XovSpog,  a cartilage.)  The  membrane  that  covers  a 
cartilage. 

PERICHRI'SIS.  (From  zsepi , about,  and  xpiu,  to 
anoint.)  A liniment. 

Perichri'sta.  (From  irepi,  around,  and  %ptw,  to 
anoipt.)  Any  medicines  with  which  the  eyelids  are 
anointed,  in  an  ophthalmia. 

Pericla'sis.  (From  zsep i,  about,  and  ic\aw,  to 
break.)  It  is  a term  used  by  Galen  for  such  a fracture 
of  the  bone  as  quite  divides  it,  and  forces  it  through 
the  flesh  into  sight  Or  a fracture  with  a great  wound, 
wherein  the  bone  is  laid  bare. 

PERICLY'MENUM.  (From  zsepi  k\v&,  to  roll 
round:  so  called  because  it  twists  itself  round  what- 
ever is  near  it.)  The  honeysuckle  or  woodbine.  See 
Lonicera. 

PERICNE'MIA.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and  Kvtjpy, 
the  tibia.)  The  parts  about  the  tibia. 

PERICRA'NIUM.  (From  rapt,  about,  and  Kpaviov, 
the  cranium.)  The  membrane  that  is  closely  connected 
to  the  bones  of  the  head  or  cranium. 

Peride'smica.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and  Seopog,  a 
ligature.)  1.  Parts  about  a ligament. 

2.  A suppression  of  urine,  from  stricture  in  the  ure- 
thra. 

PERIDIUM.  The  name  given  by  Person  to  the 
round  membranous  dry  case  of  the  seeds  of  some  of 
the  angiosperm  mushrooms. 

PERIDOT.  See  Chrysolite. 

Peri'dromos.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and  Spopos,  a 
course.)  The  extreme  circumference  of  the  hairs  of 
the  head. 

Perie'rgia.  Uepiepyia.  Any  needless  caution  or 
trouble  in  an  operation,  as  zsepiepyog  is  one  who  de- 
spatches it  with  unnecessary  circumstances : both  the 
terms  are  met  with  in  Hippocrates,  and  others  of  the 
Greek  writers. 

Perieste'cos.  (From  zsepii^ypi,  to  surround,  or  to 
guard.)  An  epithet  for  diseases,  signs,  or  symptoms, 
importing  their  being  salutary,  and  that  they  prognosti- 
cate the  recovery  of  the  patient. 

Pkri'graphe.  (From  zsepiypaifxo,  to  circumscribe.) 
1.  An  inaccurate  description,  or  delineation. 

2.  In  Vesalius,  perigraphe  signifies  certain  white 
lines  and  impressions,  observable  in  the  musculus  rec- 
tus of  the  abdomen. 

Pe'rin.  (From  zsypa,  a bag.)  A testicle.  Some 
explain  it  the  Perinasum ; others  say  it  is  the  Anus. 

PERINAEOCE'LE.  (From  zsepivaiov , the  perinaeum, 
and  a rupture.)  A rupture  in  the  perinaeum. 

PERINAEUM.  (From  zsepiveu),  to  flow  round,  be- 
cause that  part  is  generally  moist.)  The  space  between 
the  anus  and  organs  of  generation. 

Perin^us  transversus.  See  Transversus  pe- 
rincei. 

PERINYCTIS.  ( Perinyctis , idis,  f.;  from  zsepi  and 
vv$,  the  night.  Little  swellings  like  nipples;  or,  as 
others  relate,  pustules,  or  pimples,  which  break  out  in 
the  night. 

PERIO'STEUM.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and  o<pzov,  a 
bone.)  The  membrane  which  invests  the  external  sur- 
face of  all  the  bones,  except  the  crowns  of  the  teeth. 
It  is  of  a fibrous  texture,  and  well  supplied  with  arte- 
ries, veins,  nerves,  and  absorbents.  It  is  called  pericra- 
nium, on  the  cranium  ; periorbita , on  the  orbits ; peri- 
chondrium, when  it  covers  cartilage;  and  peridesmium, 
when  it  covers  ligament.  Its  use  appears  to  be  to  dis- 
tribute the  vessels  on  the  external  surfaces  of  bones. 

Periphimo'sis.  See  Phimosis. 

Peripleumo'nia.  See  Pneumonia. 

PERIPNEUMO  NIA.  (From  zsipi,  and  zsvevpuv, 


the  lung.)  Peripneumony,  or  inflammation  of  the 
lungs.  See  Pneumonia. 

Peripneumonia  notha.  Bastard  or  spurious  pe- 
ripneumony. Practitioners,  it  would  appear,  do  not  all 
affix  this  name  to  the  same  disease ; some  affirming  it 
to  be  a rheumatic  affection  of  the  respiratory  muscles, 
while  others  consider  it  as  a inild  peripneumony.  It 
is  characterized  by  difficulty  of  breathing,  great  oppres- 
sion at  the  chest,  with  obscure  pains,  coughs,  and  oc- 
casionally an  expectoration.  Spurious  peripneumony 
is  sometimes  so  slight  as  to  resemble  only  a violent 
catarrh ; and,  after  the  employment  of  a few  proper 
remedies,  goes  oft’  by  a free  and  copious  expectoration  ; 
but  sometimes  the  symptoms  run  high,  and  an  effusion 
of  serum  into  the  bronchia  takes  place,  which  destroys 
the  patient. 

PERIPYE'MA.  (From  nept,  about,  and  zsvov,  pus  ) 
A collection  of  matter  about  any  part,  as  round  a tooth, 
in  the  gums. 

Perirrhe'xis.  (From  nepi,  about,  and  pyywpi,  to 
break.)  A breaking  off,  or  a separation  round  about, 
either  of  corrupted  bones,  or  of  dead  flesh. 

Perirrhie'a.  (From  nepippeoj,  to  flow  about.)  A 
reflux  of  humours  in  a dropsical  case  to  any  of  the 
larger  emunctories  for  its  excretion. 

Periscyphi'smus.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and  Kvipos, 
gibbous.)  An  incision  made  across  the  forehead,  or 
from  one  temple  to  another,  over  the  upper  part  of  the 
os  frontis.  It  was  formerly  made  to  cover  a considera- 
ble inflammation  or  defluxion  from  the  eyes. 

PERISTALTIC.  (Peristalticus ; from  zsepi^e AAo>, 
to  contract.)  The  vermicular  motion  of  the  intestines, 
by  which  they  contract  and  propel  their  contents,  is 
called  peristaltic.  A similar  motion  takes  place  in  the 
Fallopian  tubes,  after  conception,  by  means  of  which 
the  ovum  is  translated  from  the  ovarium  into  the 
uterus. 

Peristaphyli'nus.  (From  zsepi,  about,  and  $■ aipvXrj , 
the  uvula.)  A muscle  which,  is  connected  with  the 
uvula. 

Periste'rium.  (From  zsepi^epos,  a pigeon:  so 

called  because  pigeons  covet  it.)  See  Verbena  offici- 
nalis. 

Peristoma.  See  Peristomium. 

PERISTOMIUM.  (From  nepi,  around,  and  $ -opa, 
the  mouth  or  opening  of  the  capsule.)  Peristoma 
The  fringe-like  membranous  margin  which,  in  many 
mosses,  borders  the  orifice  of  the  theca  or  capsule.  It 
is  either  simple  or  double,  and  consists  either  of  sepa 
rate  teeth,  or  of  a plated  or  jagged  membrane.  The 
external  fringe  is  mostly  of  the  former  kind ; the  inner, 
when  present,  of  the  latter.  The  number  of  teeth,  re- 
markably constant  in  each  genus  and  species,  is  either 
four,  eight,  sixteen,  thirty- two,  or  sixty-four.  On 
these  Hedwig  and  his  followers  have  placed  great  de- 
pendence. 

Peristro'ma.  (From  zsepitrvpevvvo),  to  strew  about.) 
Properly  signifies  any  covering. 

PERISY  STOLE.  (From  zzcpis-eAAw,  to  compress.) 
The  pause  or  time  between  a contraction  and  dilata- 
tion of  the  heart. 

Perite'rion.  (From  zsepi,  and  rypeco,  to  preserve.) 
The  perforating  part  of  the  trepan. 

Periton^ore'xis.  (From  nepijovaiov,  the  perito- 
naeum, and  prjoooj , to  break.)  A bursting  of  the  peri- 
tonaeum. 

PERITONAEUM.  (From  zsepireivo),  to  extend 
round.)  A strong  simple  membrane,  by  which  all  the 
viscera  of  the  abdomen  are  surrounded.  It  has  an  ex- 
ceedingly smooth,  exhaling,  and  moist  internal  sur- 
face. Outwardly,  it  is  evely  where  surrounded  by  cel- 
lular substance,  which,  towards  the  kidneys,  is  very 
loose  and  very  fat ; but  is  very  short  at  the  lower  ten- 
don'of  the  transverse  muscles.  It  begins  from  the  dia- 
phragm, which  it  completely  lines,  and  at  the  last  fleshy 
fibres  of  the  ribs,  and  the  external  lumbar  fibres,  it 
completes  the  septum,  in  conjunction  with  the  pleura, 
with  which  it  is  continuous  through  the  various  inter- 
vals of  the  diaphragm.  Posteriorly,  it  descends  before 
the  kidneys;  anteriorly,  behind  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles. It  dips  into  the  pelvis  from  the  bones  of  the 
pubes,  passes  over  the  bladder,  and  descends  behind ; 
and  being  again  carried  backwards  at  the  entrance  of 
the  ureters,  in  two  lunar  folds,  it  rejoins  upon  the  intes- 
tinum  rectum  that  part  of  itself  which  invests  the 
loins,  and  in  this  situation  lies  before  the  rectum.  The 
cellular  texture,  which  covers  the  peritonaeum  on  the 


PER 


PER 


outside,  is  continued  into  sheaths  in  very  many  places  ; 
of  which,  one  receives  the  testicle  on  each  side,  an- 
other the  iliac  vessels  of  the  pelvis,  viz.  the  obturatoria, 
those  of  the  penis  and  bladder,  and  the  aorta,  and,  as- 
cending to  the  breast,  accompanies  the  oesophagus  and 
vertebra ; by  means  of  which,  there  is  a communica- 
tion between  the  whole  body  and  the  peritonaeum,  well 
known  in  dropsical  people.  It  has  various  prolonga- 
tions for  covering  the  viscera.  The  shorter  productions 
of  this  membrane  are  called  ligaments ; and  are  formed 
by  a continuous  reduplication  of  the  peritonaeum,  re- 
ceding from  its  inner  surface,  enclosing  cellular  sub- 
stance, and  extending  to  some  viscus,  where  its  plates 
separate,  and,  having  diverged,  embrace  the  viscus ; 
but  the  intermediate  cellular  substance  always  accom- 
panies this  membranaceous  coat,  and  joins  it  with  the 
true  substance  of  the  viscus.  Of  this  short  kind  of  pro- 
duction, three  belong  to  the  liver,  one  or  two  to  the 
spleen,  and  others  to  the  kidneys,  and  to  the  sides  of  the 
uterus  and  vagina.  By  these  means,  the  tender  sub- 
stance of  the  viscera  is  defended  from  injury  by  tiny 
motion  or  concussion,  and  their  whole  mass  is  pre- 
vented from  being  misplaced  by  their  own  weight,  and 
from  injuring  themselves,  being  securely  connected 
with  the  firm  sides  of  the  peritonaeum. 

PERITONI'TIS.  (From  aepirovai,  the  peritonaeum.) 
An  inflammation  of  the  peritonaeum.  A genus  of  dis- 
ease in  the  Class  Pyrexia , and  Order  Phlegmasia,  of 
Cullen,  known  by  the  presence  of  pyrexia,  with  pain  in 
the  abdomen,  that  is  increased  when  in  an  erect  posi- 
tion, but  without  other  proper  signs  of  inflammation  of 
the  abdominal  viscera.  When  the  inflammation  at- 
tacks the  peritoneum  of  the  viscera,  it  takes  the  name 
of  the  viscus;  thus,  peritonitis,  hepatitis,  peritonitis  in- 
testinalis,  peritonitis  omentalis,  or  epiploitis,  or  omen- 
titis, peritonitis  mesenterii,  &c. 

All  these  Dr.  Cullen  considers  under  the  general  head 
of  peritonitis,  as  there  are  no  certain  signs  by  which 
they  can  be  distinguished  from  each  other,  and  the 
method  of  cure  must  be  the  same  in  all.  He  however 
distinguishes  three  species. 

1.  Peritonitis  propria ; when  the  peritonaeum,  strict- 
ly so  called,  is  inflamed. 

2.  Peritonitis  omentalis.  Omentitis.  Epiploitis, 
when  the  omentum  is  affected. 

3.  Peritonitis  mesenterica,  when  the  mesentery  is 
inflamed. 

Perizo'ma.  (From  nepiguvvvpi,  to  gird  round.) 
This  term  strictly  signifies  a girdle ; but  by  Hildanus, 
and  some  other  chirurgical  writers,  it  is  applied  to  those 
instruments  for  supporting  ruptures,  which  we  com- 
monly call  trusses.  Some  also  express  by  it  the  dia- 
phragm. 

PE'RLA.  (Ital.  and  Span,  perl,  Welch,  perlen, 
Germ.)  See  Margarita. 

Perlate  acid.  A name  given  by  Bergman  to  the 
acidulous  phosphate  of  soda,  Haupt  having  called  the 
phosphate  of  soda  Sal  mirabile  perlatum. 

PE'RNIO.  A kibe  or  chilblain.  A species  of 
erythema , of  Cullen.  Chilblains  are  painful  inflam- 
matory swellings,  of  a deep  purple  or  leaden  colour,  to 
which  the  fingers,  toes,  heels,  and  other  extreme  parts 
of  the  body  are  subject,  on  being  exposed  to  a severe 
degree  of  cold.  The  pain  is  not  constant,  but  rather 
pungent  and  shooting  at  particular  times,  and  an  in- 
supportable itching  attends.  In  some  instances  the 
skin  remains  entire,  but  in  others  it  breaks  and  dis- 
charges a thin  fluid.  When  the  degree  of  cold  has 
been  very  great,  or  the  application  long  continued,  the 
parts  affected  are  apt  to  mortify  and  slough  off,  leaving 
a foul  ill-conditioned  ulcer  behind.  Children  and  old 
people  are  more  apt  to  be  troubled  with  chilblains 
than  those  of  a middle  age  ; and  such  as  are  of  a scro- 
fulous habit  are  remarked  to  suffer  severely  from  them. 

PE'RONE.  (From  xcipu,  to  fasten-,  so  called  be- 
cause it  fastens  together  the  tibia  and  the  muscles.) 
The  fibula. 

PERONE'US.  ( Peroneus , nepovaios  ; from  perone , 
the  fibula.)  Belonging  to  the  fibula. 

Peroneus  anticus.  See  Peroneus  brevis. 

Peroneus  brevis.  This  muscle  is  the  peroneus  se- 
wU-ndi/s,  seu  anticus,  of  Douglas;  the  peroneus  medius , 
seu  anticus  of  Winslow ; the  psronaus  sccundus  of 
Cowper;  and  petit-peroneo  sus-metatarsicn,  of  Dumas. 
It  arises,  by  an  acute,  thin,  and  fleshy  origin,  from  the 
anterior  and  outer  part  of  the  fibula,  its  fibres  con- 
tinuing to  adhere  to  the  lower  half  of  that  bone.  Its 
166 


round  tendon  passes  through  the  groove  in  the  mallei 
lus  externus,  along  with  that  of  the  peroneus  longus, 
after  which  it  runs  in  a separate  groove  to  be  inserted 
into  the  upper  and  posterior  part  of  the  tubercle  at  the 
basis  of  the  metatarsal  bone  that  supports  the  little  toe. 
Its  use  is  to  assist  the  peroneus  longus. 

Peroneus  longus.  This  muscle,  which  is  the  pe- 
roneus primus,  seu  posticus,  of  Douglas ; peroneus 
maximus , seu  posterior,  of  Winslow ; peronaus  pri- 
mus, of  Cowper ; and  tibi  peroneo-tarsien,  of  Dumas, 
is  situated  somewhat  anteriorly  along  the  outer  side  of 
the  leg.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  exter- 
nal lateral  part  of  the  head  of  the  tibia,  and  likewise 
from  the  upper  anterior  surface  and  outer  side  of  the 
perone  or  fibula,  its  fibres  continuing  to  adhere  to  the 
outer  surface  of  the  latter,  to  within  three  or  four 
inches  of  the  malleolus  externus.  It  terminates  in  a long 
round  tendon,  which  runs  obliquely  behind  the  mal- 
leolus internus,  where  it  passes  through  a cartilaginous 
groove  in  common  with  the  peroneus  brevis,  being 
bound  down  by  an  annular  ligament.  When  it  has 
reached  the  os  calcis,  it  quits  the  tendon  of  the  peroneus 
brevis,  and  runs  obliquely  inwards  along  a groove  in 
the  os  cuboides,  under  the  muscles  on  the  sole  of  the 
foot,  to  be  inserted  into  the  outside  of  the  posterior  ex- 
tremity of  the  metatarsal  bone  that  supports  the  great 
toe.  Near  the  insertion  of  this  muscle  we  find  a small 
bursa  mucosa.  This  muscle  draws  the  foot  outwards, 
and  likewise  assists  in  extending  it. 

Peroneus  maximus.  See  Peroneus  longus. 

Peroneus  medius.  See  Peroneus  brevis. 

Peroneus  posticus.  See  Peroneus  longus. 

Peroneus  primus.  See  Peroneus  longus. 

Peroneus  secundus.  See  Peroneus  brevis. 

Peroneus  tertius.  This  is  the  name  given  by  AI 
binus  to  a muscle  which,  by  some  writers,  is  called 
nonus  Vesalii,  or  Vesalins’s  ninth  muscle  of  the  foot; 
but  by  most  considered  in  the  present  day  as  a portion 
of  the  extensor  longus  digitorunj.  pedis.  It  is  situated 
at  the  anterior,  inferior,  and  outar  part  of  the  leg,  along 
the  outer  edge  of  the  last  described  muscle,  to  which  it 
is  intimately  united.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  anterior 
surface  of  the  lower  half  of  the  fibula,  and  from  the  ad- 
jacent part  of  the  interosseous  ligament.  Its  fibres  run 
obliquely  downwards,  towards  a tendon  which  passes 
under  the  annular  ligament,  and  then  running  obliquely 
outwards,  it  is  inserted  into  the  root  of  the  metatarsal 
bone  that  supports  the  little  toe.  This  muscle  assists  in 
bending  the  foot. 

PERPENDICULARIS.  Applied  to  parts  of  plants, 
as  the  root  of  the  Daucus  carota,  which  goes  straight 
down  into  the  earth. 

PE'RSICA.  (From  Persia,  its  native  soiL)  The 
peach.  See  Jlmygdalus  persica. 

PERSIC A'RIA.  (From  Persica,  the  peach-tree : so 
called  because  its  blossoms  are  'ike  those  of  the  peach.) 
See  Polygonum  persicaria. 

Persicaria  mitis.  See  Polygonum  persicaria. 

Persicaria  urens.  See  Polygonum  hydropiper. 

Pe'rsicus  ignis.  A carbuncle.  Avicenna  says,  it 
is  that  species  of  carbuncle  which  is  attended  with 
pustules  and  vesications. 

[Persimmon.  See  Diospyros.  A.] 

PERSISTENS.  Permanent.  Applied  to  flower-cups 
remaining  a long  time  after  the  flower , as  that  of  the 
Hyosciamus  niger. 

Persi'stens  febris.  A regular  intermitting  fever, 
the  paroxysms  of  which  return  at  constant  and  stated 
hours. 

Persona'ta.  (From  persona,  a mask ; because, 
says  Pliny,  the  ancient  actors  used  to  mask  themselves 
with  the  leaves  of  this  plant.)  See  Jirctium  lappa. 

PERSONATUS.  Personate.  A term  applied  to  a 
monopetalous  corolla,  when  irregular,  and  closed  by  a 
kind  of  palate ; as  in  Antirrhinum. 

PERSPIRATION.  Perspiralio.  The  vapour  that 
is  secreted  by  the  extremities  of  the  cutaneous  arteries 
from  the  external  surface  of  the  body.  It  is  distinguish- 
ed into  sensible  and  insensible.  The  former  is  sepa- 
rated in  the  form  of  an  invisible  vapour,  the  latter  so  as 
to  be  visible  in  the  form  of  very  little  drops  adhering  to 
the  epidermis.  The  secretory  organ  is  composed  of  the 
extremities  of  the  cutaneous  arteries.  The  smell  of  the 
perspirable  fluid,  in  a healthy  man,  is  fatuous  and 
animal;  its  taste  manifestly  salt  and  ammoniacal.  In 
consistence  it  is  vaporous  or  aqueous ; and  its  speeijit 
j gravity  in  the  latter  state  is  greater  tlian  that  of  water 


PER 


For  the  most  part  it  is  yellowish,  from  the  passage  of 
the  subcutaneous  oil,  and  sebaceous  matter  of  the  sub- 
cutaneous glands. 

Whatever  form  it  takes,  the  liquid  that  escapes  from 
the  skin  is  composed,  according  to  Thenard,  of  a great 
deal  of  water,  a small  quantity  of  acetic  acid,  of  muri- 
ate of  soda  and  potassa,  a small  quantity  of  earthy 
phosphate,  an  atom  of  oxide  of  iron,  and  a trace  of 
animal  matter.  Berzelius  considers  the  acid  of  sweat 
not  the  same  as  acetic  acid,  but  like  the  lactic  acid  of 
Scheele.  The  skin  exhales,  besides,  an  oily  matter,  and 
some  carbonic  acid. 

Many  experiments  have  been  made  to  determine  the 
quantity  of  transpiration  which  is  formed  in  a given 
time,  and  the  variations  that  this  quantity  undergoes 
according  to  circumstances.  The  first  attempts  are  due 
to  Sanctorius,  who,  during  thirty  years,  weighed  every 
day,  with  extreme  care,  and  an  indefatigable  patience, 
his  food  and  his  drink,  his  solid  and  liquid  excretions, 
and  even  himself.  Sanctorius,  in  spite  of  his  zeal  and 
perseverance,  arrived  at  results  that  were  not  very 
exact.  Since  his  time,  several  philosophers  and  phy- 
sicians have  been  employed  on  the  same  subject  with 
more  success ; but  the  most  remarkable  labour  in  this 
way  is  that  of  Lavoisier  and  Seguin.'  These  philoso- 
phers were  the  first  who  distinguished  the  loss  that 
takes  place  by  pulmonary  transpiration  from  that  of 
the  skin.  Seguin  shut  himself  up  in  a bag  of  gummed 
silk , tied  above  his  head,  and  presenting  an  opening, 
the  edges  of  which  were  fixed  round  his  mouth  by  a 
mixture  of  turpentine  and  pitch.  In  this  manner  only, 
the  humour  of  the  pulmonary  transpiration  passed  into 
the  air.  In  order  to  know  the  quantity,  it  was  sufficient 
to  weigh  himself,  with  the  bag,  at  the  beginning  and 
end  of  the  experiment,  in  a very  fine  balance.  By  re- 
peating the  experiment  out  of  the  bag,  he  determined 
the  whole  quantity  of  humour  transpired ; so  that,  by 
deducting  from  this  the  quantity  that  he  knew  had 
passed  out  from  the  lungs,  he  had  the  quantity  of  hu- 
mour exhaled  by  the  skin.  Besides,  he  took  into  ac- 
count the  food  that  he  had  used,  his  excretions  solid 
and  liquid,  and  generally  all  the  causes  that  could  have 
any  influence  upon  the  transpiration.  By  following  this 
plan,  the  results  of  Lavoisier  and  Seguin  are  these : — 

1st,  The  greatest  quantity  of  insensible  transpira- 
tion (the  pulmonary  included)  is  25.6  grains  troy  per 
minute;  consequently,  3 ounces,  1 drachm,  36  grains, 
per  hour;  and  6 pounds,  4 ounces,  6 drachms,  24 
grains,  in  24  hours. 

2d,  The  least  considerable  loss  is  8.8  grains  per  mi- 
nute ; consequently,  2 pounds,  2 ounces,  3 drachms,  in 
24  hours. 

3d,  It  is  during  the  digestion  that  the  loss  of  weight 
occasioned  by  insensible  transpiration  is  at  its  mi- 
nimum. 

4th,  The  transpiration  is  at  its  maximum  imme- 
diately after  dinner. 

5th,  The  mean  of  the  insensible  transpiration  is  14.4 
grains  per  minute;  in  the  mean  14.4  grains,  8.8  depend 
on  cutaneous  transpiration,  and  5.6  upon  the  pul- 
monary. 

6th,  The  cutaneous  transpiration  alone  varies  during 
and  after  repasts. 

7th,  Whatever  quantity  cf  food  is  taken,  or  what- 
ever are  the  variations  of  the  atmosphere,  the  same 
individual,  after  having  augmented  in  weight  by  all  the 
food  that  he  has  taken,  returns,  in  24  hours,  to  the 
same  weight  nearly  that  he  was  the  day  before,  pro- 
vided he  is  not  growing,  or  has  not  eaten  to  excess. 

It  is  much  to  be  wished  that  this  interesting  labour 
had  been  continued,  and  that  authors  had  not  limited 
their  studies  to  insensible  transpiration,  but  had  ex- 
tended their  observations  to  the  sweat. 

Whenever  the  humour  of  transpiration  is  not  evapo- 
rated, as  soon  as  it  is  in  contact  with  the  air,  it  appears 
at  the  surface  of  the  skin  in  the  form  of  a layer  of 
liquid  of  variable  thickness.  Now,  this  effect  may 
happen  because  the  transpiration  is  too  copious,  or 
because  of  the  diminution  of  the  dissolvent  force  of 
the  air.  We  perspire  in  an  air  hot  and  humid,  by  the 
influence  of  the  two  causes  joined ; we  would  perspire 
with  more  difficulty  in  an  air  of  the  same  heat,  but 
dry.  Certain  parts  of  the  body  transpire  more  co- 
piously, and  sweat  with  more  facility,  than  others; 
such  are  the  hands  and  the  feet,  the  armpits,  the 
groins,  the  brow,  &cc.  Generally  the  skin  of  these 
parts  receives  a greater  proportional  quantity  of  blood ; 


PE  iv 

and,  in  some  people,  the  armpit,  the  sole  of  the  foot, 
and  the  intervals  between  the  toes,  do  not  come  so 
easily  in  contact  with  the  air. 

The  sweat  does  not  appear  to  have  every  where  the 
same  composition  ; every  one  knows  that  its  odour  is 
variable  according  to  the  different  parts  of- the  body. 
It  is  the  same  with  its  acidity,  which  abpears  much 
stronger  in  the  armpits  and  feet  than  elsewhere. 

The  cutaneous  transpiration  has  numerous  uses  in 
the  animal  economy,  keeps  up  the  suppleness  of  the 
epidermis,  and  thus  favours  the  exercise  of  the  tact 
and  the  touch.  It  is  by  evaporation  along  with  that  of 
the  lungs,  the  principal  means  of  coffiing,  by  which 
the  body  maintains  itself  within  certain  limits  of  tem- 
perature ; also  its  expulsion  from  the  economy  appears 
very  important,  for  every  time  that  it  is  diminished  or 
suspended,  derangements  of  more  or  less  consequence 
follow,  and  many  diseases  are  not  arrested  until  a con- 
siderable quantity  of  sweat  is  expelled. 

Beside  water,  it  cannot  be  doubted  that  carbon  is 
also  emitted  from  the  skin  ; but  in  what  state,  the  ex- 
periments hitherto  made  do  not  enable  us  to  decide. 
Cruickshanks  found,  that  the  air  of  the  glass  vessel  in 
which  his  hand  and  foot  had  been  confined  for  an 
hour,  contained  carbonic  acid  gas ; for  a candle  burned 
dimly  in  it,  and  it  rendered  lime-water  turbid.  And 
Jurine  found,  that  air  which  had  remained  for  some 
time  in  contact  with  the  skin,  consisted  almost  entirely 
of  carbonic  acid  gas.  The  same  conclusion  may  be 
drawn  from  the  experiments  of  Ingenhousz  and  Milly. 
Trousset  has  lately  observed,  that  air  was  separated 
copiously  from  a patient  of  his,  while  bathing. 

Besides  water  and  carbon,  or  carbonic  acid  gas,  the 
skin  emits  also  a particular  odorous  substance.  That 
every  animal  has  a peculiar  smell,  is  well  known : the 
dog  can  discover  his  master,  and  even  trace  him  to  a 
distance  by  the  scent.  A dog,  chained  up  several 
hours  after  his  master  had  set  out  on  a journey  of 
some  hundred  miles,  followed  his  footsteps  by  the 
smell.  But  it  is  needless  to  multiply  the  instances  of  this 
fact;  they  are  too  well  known  to  everyone.  Now, 
tins  smell  must  be  owing  to  some  peculiar  matter  which 
is  constantly  emitted;  and  this  matter  must  differ 
somewhat,  either  in  quantity  or  some  other  property, 
as  we  see  that  the  dog  easily  distinguishes  the  indivi- 
dual by  means  of  it.  Cruickshanks  has  made  it  pro- 
bable, that  this  matter  is  an  oily  substance,  or  at  least 
that  there  Is  an  oily  substance  emitted  by  the  skin. 
He  wore  repeatedly,  night  and  day,  for  a month,  the 
same  under  waistcoat  of  fleecy  hosiery,  during  the 
hottest  part  of  the  summer.  At  the  end  of  this  time, 
he  always  found  an  oily  substance  accumulated  in  con- 
siderable masses  on  the  nap  of  the  inner  surface  of 
the  waistcoat,  in  the  form  of  black  tears.  When 
rubbed  on  paper,  it  rendered  it  transparent,  and  hard- 
ened on  it  like  grease.  It  burned  with  a white  flame, 
and  left  behind  it  a charry  residuum. 

Berthollet  has  observed  the  perspiration  acid ; and 
he  has  concluded,  that  the  acid  which  is  present  is  the 
phosphoric ; but  this  has  not  been  proved.  Fourcroy 
and  Vauquelin  have  ascertained,  that  the  scurf  which 
collects  upon  the  skins  of  horses,  consists  chiefly  of 
phosphate  of  lime,  and  urea  is  even  sometimes  mixed 
with  it. 

According  to  Thenard,  however,  who  has  lately  en- 
deavoured more  particularly  to  ascertain  this  point, 
the  acid  contained  in  sweat  is  the  acetous  ; which,  he 
likewise  observes,  is  the  only  free  acid  contained  in 
urine  and  in  milk,  this  acid  existing  in  both  of  them 
when  quite  fresh.  His  account  of  his  examination  of 
it  is  as  follows: — 

The  sweat  is  more  or  less  copious  in  different  indi- 
viduals ; and  its  quantity  is  perceptibly  in  the  inverse 
ratio  of  that  of  the  urine.  All  other  circumstances 
being  similar,  much  more  is  produced  during  digestion 
than  during  repose.  The  maximum  of  its  production 
appears  to  be  twenty-six  grains  and  two-thirds  in  a 
minute ; the  minimum  nine  grains,  troy  weight.  It  is 
much  inferior,  however,  to  the  pulmonary  transpira- 
tion ; and  there  is  likewise  a great  difference  between 
their  nature  and  manner  of  formation.  The  one  is  a 
product  of  a particular  secretion,  similar  in  some  sort 
to  that  of  the  urine;  the  other,  composed  of  a great 
deal  of  water  and  carbonic  acid,  is  the  product  of  a 
combustion  gradually  effected  by  the  atmospheric  air. 

The  sweat,  in  a healthy  state,  very  sensibly  reddens 
litmus  paper  or  infusion.  In  certain  diseases,  and  par- 

167 


PER 


PER 


ticiilarly  in  putrid  fevers,  it  is  alkaline ; yet  its  taste  is 
always  rather  saline,  and  more  similar  to  that  of  salt 
than  acid.  Though  colourless,  it  stains  linen.  Its 
smell  is  peculiar,  and  insupportable  when  it  is  concen- 
trated, which  is  the  case  in  particular  during  distilla- 
tion. But  before  he  speaks  of  the  trials  to  which  he 
subjected  it,  and  of  which  he  had  occasion  for  a great 
quantity,  he  describes  the  method  he  adopted  for  pro- 
curing it,  which  was  similar  to  that  of  Cruickshanks. 

Human  sweat,  according  to  Thenard,  is  formed  of 
a great  deal  of  water,  free  acetous  acid,  muriate  of 
soda,  an  atom  of  phosphate  of  lime  and  oxide  of  iron, 
and  an  inappreciable  quantity  of  animal  matter,  which 
approaches  much  nearer  to  gelatin  than  to  any  other 
substance. 

Perspiration  varies  in  respect  to,  1.  The  temperature 
of  the  atmosphere.  Thus  men  have  a more  copious, 
viscid,  and  higher-coloured  sweat  in  summer  than  in 
winter,  and  in  warm  countries  than  in  colder  regions. 
2.  Sex.  The  sweat  of  a man  is  said  to  smell  more 
acrid  than  that  of  a woman.  3.  Age.  The  young  are 
more  subject  to  sweat  than  the  aged,  who,  during  the 
excessive  heat  of  the  summer,  scarcely  sweat  at  all. 
4.  Ingesta.  An  alliacious  sweat  is  perceived  from 
eating  garlick ; a leguminous  from  pease  ; an  acid  from 
acids ; a foetid  from  animal  food  only ; and  a rancid 
sweat  from  fat  foods,  as  is  observed  in  Greenland.  A 
long  abstinence  from  drink  oauses  a more  acrid  and 
coloured  sweat ; and  the  drinking  a great  quantity 
of  cold  water  in  summer,  a limpid  and  thin  sweat.  5. 
Medicines.  The  sweat  of  those  who  have  taken 
musk,  even  moderately,  and  asafoetida,  or  sulphur, 
smells  of  their  respective  natures.  6.  Region  of  the 
body.  The  sweat  of  the  head  is  greasy ; on  the  fore- 
head it  is  more  aqueous ; under  the  axilla  very  ungui- 
nous ; and  in  the  interstices  of  the  toes,  it  is  very' 
foetid,  forming  in  the  most  healthy  man  blackish  sordes. 
7.  Diseases.  In  this  respect  it  varies  very  much  in 
regard  to  quantity,  smell,  and  colour ; for  the  sweat  of 
gouty  persons  is  said  to  turn  blue  vegetable  juices  to  a 
red  colour.  Some  men  also  have  a lucid  sweat,  others 
a sweat  tinging  their  linen  of  a cerulean  colour. 

The  uses  of  the  insensible  perspiration  are,  1.  To 
liberate  the  blood  from  superfluous  animal  gas,  azote, 
and  water.  2.  To  eliminate  the  noxious  and  hetero- 
geneous excrements ; hence  the  acrid,  rancid,  legumi- 
nous, or  putrid  perspiration  of  some  men.  3.  To 
moisten  the  external  surface  of  the  body,  lest  the  epi- 
dermis, cutis,  and  its  nervous  papillae,  be  dried  up  by 
the  atmospheric  air.  4.  To  counterbalance  the  sup- 
pressed pulmonary  transpiration  of  the  lungs ; for 
when  it  is  suppressed,  the  cutaneous  is  increased  ; 
hence  the  nature  of  both  appears  to  be  the  same. 

The  use  of  the  sensible  perspiration,  or  sweat,  in  a 
healthy  man,  is  scarcely  observable,  unless  from  an 
error  of  the  non-naturals.  Its  first  effect  on  the  body 
is  always  prejudicial,  by  exhausting  and  drying  it, 
although  it  is  sometimes  of  advantage.  1.  By  supply- 
ing a watery  excretion : thus  when  the  urine  is  defi- 
cient, the  sweat  is  often  more  abundant.  In  this  man- 
ner an  aqueous  diarrhoea  is  frequently  cured  by  sweat- 
ing. 2.  By  eliminating,  at  the  same  time,  any  morbid 
matter.  Thus  various  miasmata  are  critically  ex- 
pelled, in  acute  and  chronic  diseases,  with  the  sweat. 

PERTU'SSIS . (From  per , much,  and  tussis , cough.) 
The  hooping-cough.  A genus  of  diseases  in  the  class 
Neuroses,  and  order  Spasmi , of  Cullen,  known  by  a 
convulsive  strangulating  cough,  with  hooping,  return- 
ing by  fits,  that  are  usually  terminated  by  a vomiting ; 
and  by  its  being  contagious. 

Children  are  most  commonly  the  subjects  of  this 
disease,  and  it  seems  to  depend  on  a specific  contagion, 
which  affects  them  but  once  in  their  life.  The  disease 
being  once  produced,  the  fits  of  coughing  are  often  re- 
peated without  any  evident  cause  ; but,  in  many  cases, 
the  contagion  may  be  considered  as  only  giving  the 
predisposition,  and  the  frequency  of  the  fits  may  depend 
upon  various  exciting  causes,  such  as  violent  exercise, 
a full  meal,  the  having  taken  food  of  difficult  digestion, 
and  irritation  of  the  lungs  by  dust,  smoke,  or  disagree- 
able odours.  Emotions  of  the  mind  may  likewise  prove 
an  exciting  cause. 

Its  proximate  or  immediate  cause  seems  to  be  a vis- 
cid matter  or  phlegm  lodged  about  the  bronchia, 
trachea,  and  fauces,  which  sticks  so  close  as  to  be 
expectorated  with  the  greatest  difficulty.  Some  have 
supposed  it  to  be  a morbid  irritability  of  the  stomach, 


with  increased  action  of  its  mucous  glands ; but  the 
affection  of  the  stomach  which  takes  place  in  the  dis- 
ease, is  clearly  only  of  a secondary  nature,  so  that  this 
opinion  must  be  erroneous. 

The  hooping-cough  usually  comes  on  with  a difficulty 
of  breathing,  some  degree  of  thirst,  a quick  pulse,  and 
other  slight  febrile  symptoms,  which  are  succeeded  by 
a hoarseness,  cough,  and  difficulty  of  expectoration. 
These  symptoms  continue  perhaps  for  a fortnight  or 
more,  at  the  end  of  which  time  the  disease  puts  on  its 
peculiar  and  characteiistic  form,  and  is  now  evident, 
as  the  cough  becomes  convulsive,  and  is  attended  with 
a sound,  which  has  been  called  a hoop. 

When  the  sonorous  inspiration  has  happened,  the 
coughing  is  again  renewed,  and  continues  in  the  same 
manner  as  before,  till  either  a quantity  of  mucus  is 
thrown  up  from  the  lungs,  or  the  contents  of  the 
stomach  are  evacuated  by  vomiting.  The  fit  is  then 
terminated,  and  the  patient  remains  free  from  any 
other  for  some  time,  and  shortly  afterward  returns  to 
the  amusements  he  was  employed  in  before  the  fit, 
expresses  a desire  for  food,  and  when  it  is  given  to  him, 
takes  it  greedily.  In  those  cases,  however,  where  the 
attack  has  been  severe,  he  often  seems  much  fatigued, 
makes  quick  inspirations,  and  falls  into  a faint. 

On  the  first  coming  on  of  the  disease,  there  is  little  or 
no  expectoration ; or  if  any,  it  consists  only  of  thin 
mucus ; and  as  long  as  this  is  the  case,  the  fits  of 
coughing  are  frequent,  and  of  considerable  duration  ; 
but  on  the  expectoration  becoming  free  and  copious, 
the  fits  of  coughing  are  less  frequent,  as  well  as  of 
shorter  duration. 

By  the  violence  of  coughing,  the  free  transmission 
of  blood  through  the  lungs  is  somewhat  interrupted,  as 
likewise  the  free  return  of  the  blood  from  the  head, 
which  produces  that  turgescence  and  suffusion  of  the 
face,  which  commonly  attend  the  attack,  and  in  some 
instances  brings  on  a htemorrhage  either  from  the  nose 
or  ears. 

The  disease  having  arrived  at  its  height,  usually  con- 
tinues for  some  weeks  longer,  and  at  length  goes  off 
gradually.  In  some  cases  it  is,  however,  protracted  for 
several  months,  or  even  a year. 

Although  the  hooping-cough  often  proves  tedious, 
and  is  liable  to  return  with  violence  on  any  fresh  ex- 
posure to  cold,  when  not  entirely  removed,  it  neverthe- 
less is  seldom  fatal,  except  to  very  young  children,  who 
are  always  likely  to  suffer  more  from  it  than  those  of  a 
more  advanced  age.  The  danger  seems  indeed  always 
to  be  in  proportion  to  the  youth  of  the  person,  and  the 
degree  of  fever,  and  difficulty  of  breathing,  which  ac- 
company the  disease,  as  likewise  the  state  of  debility 
which  prevails. 

It  has  been  known  in  some  instances  to  terminate  in 
apoplexy  and  suffocation.  If  the  fits  are  put  an  end  to 
by  vomiting,  it  may  be  regarded  as  a favourable  symp- 
tom, as  may  likewise  the  taking  place  of  a moderate 
and  free  expectoration,  or  the  ensuing  of  a slight 
haemorrhage  from  the  nose  or  ears. 

Dissections  of  those  who  die  of  the  hooping-cough 
usually  show  the  consequence  of  the  organs  of  respira- 
tion being  affected,  and  particularly  tho.-e  parts  which 
are  the  seat  of  catarrh.  When  the  disease  has  been 
long  protracted,  it  is  apt  to  degenerate,  into. pulmonary 
consumption,  asthma,  or  visceral  obstructions,  in  which 
last  case  the  glands  of  the  mesentery  are  found  in  a 
hard  and  enlarged  state. 

In  the  treatment  of  this  disease  it  must  be  borne  in 
mind,  that  in  the  early  period  palliative  measures  can 
only  be  employed  ; but  when  it  continues  merely  from 
habit,  a variety  of  means  will  often  at  once  put  a stop 
to  it.  In  the  first  stage  in  mild  cases  very  little  is  re- 
quired, except  obviating  occasional  irritation,  keeping 
the  bowels  regular,  &c.  But  where  it  puts  on  a more 
serious  character,  the  plan  will  differ  accordingly  as  it 
is  attended  with  inflammatory  symptoms,  or  exhibits  a 
purely  spasmodic  form.  In  the  former  case,  it  may 
be  sometimes  proper  in  plethoric  habits  to  begin  by  a 
full  bleeding,  or  leeches  to  the  chest,  if  the  patient  be 
very  young,  then  clear  the  bowels  effectually,  apply  a 
blister,  and  exhibit  antimonials,  or  squill,  in  nauseating 
doses,  assisted  perhaps  by  opium,  to  promote  diaphore- 
sis and  expectoration.  An  occasional  emetic,  where 
the  breathing  is  much  oppressed  with  wheezing,  in 
young  children  particularly,  may  afford  material  telief 
When  the  disorder  is  more  of  the  spasmodic  character, 
some  of  these  means  may  still  be  useful,  as  blisters,  and 


VET 


pE3 

nauseating  medicines,  so  far  as  the  strength  tvfll  ad- 
mit; but  the  remedies  of  greatest  efficacy  are  the  nar- 
cotics, as  opium,  conium,  &c.  exhibited  in  adequate 
doses.  In  the  chronic  or  habitual  stage  of  the  disease, 
almost  any  thing,  which  produces  a considerable  im- 
pression on  the  constitution,  will  occasionally  succeed  : 
but  we  chiefly  rely  on  sedative  and  antispasmodic,  or 
on  tonic  remedies,  accordingly  as  there  are  marks  of 
irritability,  or  of  mere  debility  in  the  system.  Of  the 
former  description,  opium  is  perhaps  the  best,  especially 
in  conjunction  with  squill,  given  in  a full  dose  at  night, 
and  in  small  quantities  swallowed  slowly  from  time  to 
time  during  the  day.  Conium,  asafoetida,  &c.  may 
however  occasionally  answer  better  in  particular  con- 
stitutions. Among  the  tonics  the  cinchona  is  often  high- 
ly efficacious,  where  no  appearances  of  local  disease 
attend ; some  of  the  metallic  preparations  also,  par- 
ticularly sulphate  of  zinc,  may  be  much  relied  upon. 
Sometimes  stimulant  applications  to  the  chest,  but  still 
more  certainly  opiate  frictions,  will  be  found  to  cure 
this  disorder.  The  same  is  very  often  accomplished 
by  a change  of  air,  indeed  occasionally  after  the  failure 
of  most  remedies.  The  cold  bath  also,  where  there  is 
no  local  disease,  may  have  an  excellent  effect ; assisted 
by  warm  clothing;  especially  wearing  some  kind  of  fur 
over  the  chest.  Fear  and  other  emotions  of  the  mind, 
strangury  induced  by  the  use  of  the  lytta,  &c.  &c.  rank 
also  among  the  remedies  of  pertussis. 

Peruvian  balsam.  See  Myroxylon  peruiferum. 

Peruvian  bark.  See  Cinchona. 

Peruvia'nus  cortex.  See  Cinchona. 

Peruvianus  cortex  flavus.  See  Cinchona  cordi- 
folia. 

Peru vi anus  cortex  ruber.  See  Cinchona  oblon- 
gifolia. 

PERVIGI'LIUM.  (From  per,  much,  and  vigilo , to 
watch.)  Watching,  or  a want  of  sleep.  See  Vigilance. 

PERVI'NCA.  (From  pervincio , to  tie  together.) 
So  called  because  its  stringy  roots  were  used  for  bind- 
ing substances  together.  See  Vinca  minor. 

PES.  {Pcs,  dis.  m. ; a foot.)  The  foot. 

Pes  alexandrinus.  See  Anthemis  pyrethrum. 

Pes  capr.e.  Goat’s  foot,  a species  of  Oxalis ; also 
a species  of  Convolvulus. 

Pes  cati.  See  Onaphalium  dioicum. 

Pes  colombinus.  See  Geranium  rotundifolium. 

Pes  hippocampi.  The  name  of  two  columns  at  the 
end  of  the  fornix  of  the  brain,  which  diverge  posteriorly. 

Pes  leonis.  See  Alchemilla. 

Pes  tigridis.  Tiger’s  foot.  A species  of  Ipomcea. 

PESSARY.  ( Pessarium ; from  aeaaoj,  to  soften.) 
An  instrument  that  is  introduced  into  the  vagina  to 
support  the  uterus. 

PESTILENCE.  A plague. 

PESTILENTIAL.  (Pestilentialis ; from  pestes, 
the  plague.)  An  epidemic,  malignant,  and  contagious 
disease,  approaching  to  the  nature  of  the  plague. 

PESTILENTWORT.  See  Tussilago  petasites. 

Pestii.ochia.  See  Aristolochia  virginiana. 

PE'STIS.  The  plague.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
class  Pyrexia , and  order  Exanthemata , of  Cullen, 
characterized  by  typhus,  which  is  contagious  in  the 
extreme,  prostration  of  strength,  buboes,  and  carbun- 
cles, petechi®,  haemorrhage,  and  colliquative  diarrhoea. 

By  some  writers  the  disease  has  been  divided  into 
three  species ; that  attended  with  buboes ; that  attended 
with  carbuncles ; and  that  accompanied  with  petechiae. 
This  division  appears  wholly  superfluous.  Dr.  Russel, 
in  his  elaborate  treatise  on  the  plague,  makes  mention 
of  many  varieties ; but  when  these  have  arisen,  they 
seem  to  have  depended  in  a great  measure  on  the  tem- 
perament and  constitution  of  the  air  at  the  time  fhe  dis- 
ease became  epidemical,  as  likewise  on  the  patient’s 
habit  of  body  at  the  time  of  his  being  attacked  with  it. 

The  plague  is  by  most  writers  considered  as  the  con- 
sequence of  a pestilential  contagion,  which  is  propa 
gated  from  one  person  to  another  by  association,  or  by 
coming  near  infected  materials. 

It  has  been  observed,  that  it  generally  appears  as 
early  as  the  fourth  or  fifth  day  after  infection:  but  it 
has  not  yet  been  ascertained  how  long  a person  who 
has  laboured  under  the  disease  is  capable  of  infecting 
others,  nor  how  long  the  contagion  may  lurk  in  an  un- 
favourable habit  without  producing  the  disease,  and 
may  yet  be  communicated,  and  the  disease  excited,  in 
habits  more  susceptible  of  the  infection.  It  has  gene- 
rally been  supposed,  however,  that  a quarantine  of  40 


days  is  much  longer  than  is  necessary  for  persons,  and 
probably  for  goods  also.  Experience  has  not  yet  deter 
mined  how  much  of  this  term  may  be  abated.  “ If  I 
am  not  much  mistaken,”  observes  Dr.  Thomas,  “ the 
Board  of  Trade  has,  however,  very  lately,  under  the 
sanction  of  the  College  of  Physicians,  somewhat 
abridged  it.” 

It  sometimes  happens,  that  after  the  application  of 
the  putrid  vapour,  the  patient  experiences  only  a con- 
siderable degree  of  languor  and  slight  headache  for 
many  days  previous  to  a perfect  attack  of  the  disease : 
but  it  more  usually  comes  to  pass,  that  he  is  very  soon 
seized  with  great  depression  of  strength,  anxiety,  palpi- 
tions,  syncope,  stupor,  giddiness,  violent  headache,  and 
delirium,  the  pulse  becoming  at  the  same  time  very 
weak  and  irregular. 

These  symptoms  are  shortly  succeeded  by  nausea, 
and  a vomiting  of  a dark  bilious  matter,  and  in  the 
further  progress  of  the  disease,  carbuncles  make  their 
appearance ; buboes  arise  in  different  glands,  such  as 
the  parotid,  maxillary,  cervical,  axillary,  and  inguinal ; 
or  petechiae  hremorrhagiesand  a colliquative  diarrhoea, 
ensue,  which  denote  a putrid  tendency  prevailing  to  a 
great  degree  in  the  mass  of  the  blood. 

Such  are  the  characteristic  symptoms  of  this  malig- 
nant disease,  but  it  seldom  happens  that  they  are  all  to 
be  met  with  in  the  same  person.  Some,  in  the  ad- 
vanced state  of  the  disease,  labour  under  buboes,  others 
under  carbuncles,  and  others  again  are  covered  with 
petechiae. 

The  plague  is  always  to  be  considered  as  attended 
with  ‘imminent  danger,  and  when  it  prevailed  in  this 
country  about  200  years  ago,  proved  fatal  to  most  of 
those  who  were  attacked  with  it.  It  is  probable,  how- 
ever, that  many  of  them  died  from  want  of  care  and 
proper  nourishment,  as  the  infected  were  forsaken  by 
their  nearest  friends;  because  in  Turkey  and  other 
countries,  where  attention  is  paid  to  the  sick,  a great 
many  recover. 

When  the  disease  is  unattended  by  buboes,  it  runs 
its  course  more  rapidly,  and  is  more  generally  fatal, 
than  when  accompanied  by  such  inflammations.  The 
earlier  they  appear,  the  milder  usually  is  the  disease. 
When  they  proceed  kindly  to  suppuration,  they  always 
prove  critical,  and  ensure  the  patient’s  recovery.  A 
gentle  diaphoresis,  arising  spontaneously,  has  been 
known  in  many  instances  likewise  to  prove  critical. 
When  carbuncles  show  a disposition  to  gangrene,  the 
event  will  be  fatal.  Petechia,  hemorrhages,  and  colli- 
quative diarrhoea,  denote  the  same  termination. 

Dissections  of  the  plague  have  discovered  the  gall- 
bladder full  of  black  bile,  the  liver  very  considerably 
enlarged,  the  heart  much  increased  in  size,  and  the 
lungs,  kidneys,  and  intestines  beset  with  carbuncles. 
They  have  likewise  discovered  all  the  other  appear- 
ances of  putrid  fever. 

PET  ALUM.  A petal.  The  name  of  the  coloured 
leaflets  of  the  corolla  of  a flower.  The  great  variety 
of  form,  duration,  &;c.  of  the  petals,  give  rise  to  the 
following  names. 

From  their  duration, 

1.  Petalo  patentia  ; as  in  Rosa  canina. 

2.  Patentissima  ; very  spreading. 

3.  Erecta ; as  in  Allium  nigrum. 

4.  Conniventia ; as  in  Rumex. 

5.  Distantia  ; as  in  Cucubalus  bacciferus. 

From  the  figure  of  the  border, 

6.  Acuminata ; as  in  Saxifraga  stellaris. 

7.  Setacea;  as  in  Tropeolurn  minus. 

8.  Apice  cohcerentia ; as  in  Yitis  vinifera. 

9.  Apice  reflexa ; as  in  Anemone  pratensia 

10.  Aristata ; as  in  Galium  aristatum. 

11.  Bifida;  as  in  Silene  nocturna. 

12.  Bipartita ; as  in  Alsine  media. 

13.  Biloba ; as  in  Geranium  striatum 

14.  Carinata ; as  in  Carum  carui. 

15.  Concava;  as  in  Ruta  graveolens. 

16.  Cordata  ; as  in  Sium  selinum. 

17.  Hirsuta  ; as  in  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

18.  Ciliata;  as  in  Asclepias  undulata. 

19.  Crenata ; as  in  Linum  usitatissimum 

20.  Dentata;  as  in  Silene  lucitanica. 

21.  Serrata;  as  in  Dianthus  arboreus. 

22.  Cuneiforma;  as  in  Epidendrum  cordatum. 

23.  F.marginata;  as  in  Allium  roseuin. 

24.  Infiexa;  as  in  Pimpinella. 

25.  Reflexa ; as  in  Pancratium  zelanicum. 

169 


PET 


PET 


26.  Involuta ; as  in  Anethum. 

27.  Integra  ; as  in  Nigella  arvensis. 

28.  Laciniata ; as  in  Reseda. 

29.  Lanceolata;  as  in  Narcissus  minor. 

30.  Linearia;  as  in  Tussilago  farfara. 

31.  I Aneata ; as  Scilla  lucitanica. 

32.  Punctata ; as  in  Melanthium  capense. 

33.  Maculata ; as  in  Digitalis  purpurea. 

34.  Oblong  a;  as  in  Citrus  and  Hedera. 

35.  Obtusa ; as  in  Tropreolum  majus. 

36.  Orata  ; as  in  Allium  flavum. 

37.  Plana;  as  in  Pancratium  maritimum. 

38.  Subrotunda ; as  in  Rosa  centifolia. 

39.  Truncata ; as  in  Hura  crepitans. 

40.  Coronata;  as  in  Nerium  oleander. 

The  claw  of  the  petal  is  very  long,  in  Dianthus  and 
Saponaria ; and  connate , in  Malva  sylvestris  and 
oxalis. 

PETALIFORMIS.  Petaliform,  like  a petal ; applied 
to  the  stigma  of  the  Iris  germanica. 

PETALITE.  A mineral  found  in  the  mine  of  Uts, 
in  Sweden,  interesting  from  its  analysis  having  led  to 
the  knowledge  of  a new  alkali. 

PETALO'DES.  (From  ireraXov , a leaf,  or  thin 
scale.)  This  term  is  by  Hippocrates  applied  to  a 
urine  which  hath  in  it  flaky  substances  resembling 
leaves. 

PETASI'TES.  (From  n craws,  a hat : so  named 
because  its  leaves  are  shaped  like  a hat.)  See  Tussi- 
lago petasites. 

PETE'CHIA.  (From  the  Italian  peiechio , a flea- 
bite,  because  they  resemble  the  bites  of  fleas.)  A red 
or  purple  spot,  which  resembles  a flea-bite. 

PETIOLATUS.  Petiolate:  applied  to  leaves 
which  are  formed  with  a stalk,  whether  long  or  short, 
simple  or  compound,  as  most  leaves  are : as  in  Verbas- 
cum  nigrum,  &c. 

PETIOLUS.  (From  pes,  a foot.)  A petiole.  The 
footstalk  or  leafstalk  of  a plant.  The  term  is  applied 
exclusively  to  the  stalk  of  the  leaf. 

It  is  distinguished  into  the  apex , which  is  inserted 
into  the  leaf,  and  the  base,  which  comes  from  the 
stem. 

From  its  figure  it  is  called, 

1.  Linearis , equal  in  breadth  throughout;  as  in 
Citrus  medica. 

2.  Alatus ; as  in  Citrus  aurantium. 

3.  Appendiculatus , when  furnished  with  leaflets  at 
its  base ; as  in  Dipsacus  pilosus. 

4.  Teres , round  throughout ; as  in  Pisum  sativum. 

5.  Scmiteres,  round  on  one  side,  and  flat  on  the 
other. 

6.  Triquetrus , three-sided. 

7.  Angulatus,  having  angles. 

8.  Cuniliculatus,  channelled  to  its  very  base,  where 
it  is  sometimes  greatly  dilated  and  concave ; as  in 
Angelica  sylvestris. 

9.  Compressus , compressed  towards  its  base ; as  in 
Populus  tremula. 

i.0.  Clavatus,  thicker  towards  the  apex ; as  in  Caca- 
lia  suaveoleris. 

11.  Spinescens,  becoming  a spine  after  the  fall  of 
the  leaf ; as  in  Rhamnus  catharticus. 

From  its  insertion  the  petiolus  is  called, 

12.  Insertus,  as  in  most  trees,  and  the  Pirus  com- 
munis. 

13.  Articulatus ; as  in  Oxalis  acetocella. 

14.  Adnatus , adhering  so  to  the  stem,  that  it  cannot 
be  displaced  without  injuring  the  bark. 

15.  Decurrens , adhering  at  its  base,  and  going  some 
little  way  down  the  stem ; as  in  Pisum  ochrus. 

16.  Amplexicaulis , surrounding  the  stem  at  its  base  ; 
as  in  Senecio  hastatus. 

17.  Vaginans , surrounding  the  stem  with  a perfect 
tube  ; as  in  Canna  indica. 

From  its  length  with  respect  to  the  leaf,  it  is  said  to 
be  brevissimus,  when  much  shorter,  and  longissimus , 
when  longer ; as  in  Anemone  hepatica,  and  Geranium 
terebinthinatum. 

It  is  distinguished  also  into  simple , when  not  divided ; 
as  in  most  leaves : and  compound , when  divided  into 
lateral  branches ; as  in  all  compound  leaves. 

PETIT,  John  Lewis,  was  bom  at  Paris  in  1674. 
From  his  childhood  he  displayed  a remarkable  degree 
of  penetration,  which  gained  him  the  attachment  of 
M.  de  Littre,  a celebrated  anatomist,  who  resided  in 
his  father’s  house.  He  took  a pleasure,  even  at  the 


age  of  seven,  in  witnessing  the  process  of  dissection  > 
and  being  allowed  to  attend  the  demonstrations  of  that 
gentleman,  he  made  such  progress,  that  when  scarcelj 
twelve  years  old,  the  superintendence  of  the  anatomi 
cal  theatre  was  confided  to  him.  He  afterward  stu- 
died surgery,  and  was  admitted  master  atParis  in  1700 
He  became,  as  it  were,  the  oracle  in  his  profession  ic 
that  city,  and  his  fame  extended  throughout  Europe 
He  was  sent  for  to  the  kings  of  Poland  and  Spain, 
whom  he  restored  to  health  : they  endeavoured  to  re- 
tain him  near  their  persons  by  liberal  offers,  but  he  pre- 
ferred his  native  place.  He  became  a member  of  the 
Academy  of  Sciences  ; and  was  appointed  Director  of 
the  Academy  of  Surgery,  and  Censor  and  Royal  Pro- 
fessor at  the  schools.  He  was  likewise  chosen  a Fel- 
low of  the  Royal  Society  of  London.  He  died  in  1750. 
Many  memoirs  were  communicated  by  him  to  the 
French  academies.  His  only  separate  publication  was 
a Treatise  on  the  Diseases  of  the  Bones,  which  passed 
through  several  editions,  but  involved  him  in  much 
controversy.  Some  posthumous  works,  relating  to  sur- 
gical diseases  and  operations,  likewise  appeared  under 
his  name. 

Petra'pium.  (From  petra , a rock,  and  apium , pars- 
ley : so  called  because  it  grows  in  stony  places.)  See 
Bubon  macedonicum. 

Petrel.se'um.  (From  ntrpa , a rock,  and  eXmov, 
oil.)  An  oil  or  liquid  bitumen  which  distils  from  rocks. 

PETRIFACTIONS.  Stony  matters  deposited  either 
in  the  way  of  incrustation,  or  within  the  cavities  of 
organized  substances,  are  called  petrifactions.  Calca 
reous  earth  being  universally  diffused  and  capable  of 
solution  in  water,  either  alone,  or  by  the  medium  of 
carbonic  acid  or  sulphuric  acid,  which  are  likewise 
very  abundant,  is  deposited  whenever  the  water  or  the 
acid  becomes  dissipated.  In  this  way  we  have  incrust- 
ations of  limestone  or  of  selenite  in  the  form  of  stalac- 
tites or  dropstones  from  the  roofs  of  caverns,  and  in 
various  other  situations. 

The  most  remarkable  observations  relative  to  petri- 
factions are  thus  given  by  Kirwan  : — 

1.  That  those  of  shells  are  found  on,  or  near,  the 
surface  of  the  earth ; those  of  fish  deeper  ; and  those 
of  wood  deepest.  Shells  in  specie  are  found  in  im- 
mense quantities  at  considerable  depths. 

2.  That  those  organic  substances  that  resist  putre- 
faction most,  are  frequently  found  petrified  ; such  as 
shells,  and  the  harder  species  of  woods : on  the  con- 
trary, those  that  are  aptest  to  putrefy  are  rarely 
found  petrified ; as  fish,  and  the  softer  parts  of  ani- 
mals, &c. 

3.  That  they  are  most  commonly  found  in  strata  of 
marl,  chalk,  limestone,  or  clay,  seldom  in  sandstone, 
still  more  rarely  in  gypsum ; but  never  in  gneiss,  gra- 
nite, basaltes,  or  shorle;  but  they  sometimes  occur 
among  pyrites,  and  ores  of  iron,  copper,  and  silver 
and  almost  always  consist  of  that  species  of  earth, 
stone,  or  other  mineral  that  surrounds  them,  sometimes 
of  silex,  agate,  or  camelion. 

4.  That  they  are  found  in  climates  where  their  ori- 
ginals could  not  have  existed. 

5.  That  those  found  in  slate  or  clay  are  compressed 
and  flattened. 

PETRO'LEUM.  (From  petra,  a rock,  and  oleum , 
oil.)  The  name  of  petroleum  is  given  to  a liquid 
bituminous  substance  which  flows  between  rocks,  or 
in  different  places  at  tlifi  surface  of  the  earth.  See  Bi- 
tumen. 

[“In  the  United  Stales  it  is  found,  sometimes  abun- 
dantly, in  Kentucky , the  western  parts  of  Pennsylvania , 
and  in  New-  York,  at  Seneca  Lake,  &c.  It  usually 
floats  on  the  surface  of  springs,  which,  in  many  cases, 
are  known  to  be  in  the  vicinity  of  coal.  R is  some- 
times called  Seneca  or  Genesee  oil.” — Cltav.  Min.  A.] 

Petroleum  barbadense.  Barbadoes  tar.  This  is 
chiefly  obtained  from  the  island  of  Barbadoes,  and  is 
sometimes  employed  externally  in  paralytic  diseases. 
See  Bitumen. 

Petroleum  rubrum.  Oleum  gabianum.  Red  pe- 
troleum. A species  of  rock-oil  of  a blackish-red  colour, 
of  thicker  consistence,  with  a less  penetrating  and  more 
disagreeable  smell  than  the  other  kinds  of  petroleum. 
It  abounds  about  the  village  of  Gabian  in  Languedoc 
It  is  a species  of  bitumen.  See  Bitumen. 

Petroleum  sulphuratum.  A stimulating  balsa- 
mic remedy  given  in  coughs,  asthmas,  and  other  affec- 
tions of  the  chest 


PHA 


PE  2 

Pktkopharyng/e'us.  A muscle  which  arises  in  the 
petrose  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  and  is  inserted 
into  the  pharynx. 

Petro-salpingo  staphylinus.  See  Levator  palati. 

PETROSELI'NUM.  (From  nerpa,  a rock,  and 
fftXtvov,  parsley.)  See  Apium  petroselinum. 

Petroselinum  macedonicum.  See  Bubon. 

Petroselinum  vulgare.  See  Apium  petroseli- 
num. 

PETRD'SILEX.  Compact  felspar.  A species  of 
coarse  flint,  of  a deep  blue  or  yellowish  green  colour. 
It  is  interspersed  in  veins  through  rocks ; and  from  this 
circumstance  derives  its  name. 

[“Petuntze.  This  would  probably  be  arranged 
under  the  common  variety  of  felspar,  had  it  not  re- 
ceived some  additional  importance  from  its  use  in  the 
manufacture  of  porcelain.  It  appears,  in  fact,  to  be 
that  variety  of  felspar,  which  the  Chinese  call  Pe- 
tuntze. 

“ It  is  nearly  or  quite  opaque,  and  its  colour  is  usu- 
ally whitish  or  gray.  It  has  in  most  cases  less  lustre 
than  common  felspar.  Its  fracture  is  lamellar,  although 
its  masses  often  have  a coarse  granular  structure. 

“ It  most  frequently  occurs  in  beds,  and  usually  con- 
tains a little  quartz.  Its  powder  is  said  to  have  a 
slightly  saline  taste. 

“It  is  employed  in  the  enamel  of  porcelain  ware, 
and  enters,  in  certain  proportions,  into  the  composi- 
tion of  the  porcelain  itself.  Any  variety  of  felspar, 
which  contains  very  little  or  no  metallic  oxide,  would, 
undoubtedly,  answer  the  same  purpose.”— Cleav. 
Min.  A.] 

PEUCE'DANUM.  (From  zrevicr},  the  pine-tree:  so 
called  from  its  leaves  resembling  those  of  the  pine-tree.) 
•1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentan- 
dria;  Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  hog’s  fennel. 
See  Peucedanum  officinale. 

Peucedanum  officinale.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  hog’s  fennel.  Marathrum  sylvestre ; Marathrc- 
phyllum;  Pinastellum;  Faeniculum  porcinum.  The 
plant  which  bears  these  names  in  the  pharmacopoeias 
is  the  Peucedanum : — foliis  quinquepartitis,  filiformi- 
bus  linearibus , of  Linnreus.  The  root  is  the  officinal 
part ; it  has  a strong  foetid  smell,  somewhat  resembling 
that  of  sulphureous  solutions,  and  an  acrid,  unctuous, 
bitterish  taste.  Wounded  when  fresh,  in  the  spring  or 
autumn,  particularly  in  the  former  season,  in  which 
the  root  is  most  vigorous,  it  yields  a considerable  quan- 
tity of  yellow  juice,  which  soon  dries  into  a solid 
gummy  resin,  which  retains  the  taste  and  strong  smell 
of  the  root.  This,  as  well  as  the  root,  is  recommended 
as  a nervine  and  anti-hysteric  remedy. 

Peucedanum  silaus.  The  systematic  najne  of  the 
meadow  saxifrage.  Saxifraga  vulgaris  , Saxifraga 
anglica;  Hippomcur athrum ; Feeniculum  erraticum. 
English  or  meadow  saxifrage.  The  roots,  leaves,  and 
seeds  of  this  plant  have  been  commended  as  aperients, 
diuretics,  and  carminatives  ; and  appear,  from  their  aro- 
matic smell,  and  moderately  warm,  pungent,  bitterish 
taste  to  have  some  claim  to  these  virtues.  They  are 
rarely  used. 

PEWTER.  A compound  metal,  the  basis  of  which 
is  tin.  The  best  sort  consists  of  tin  alloyed  with  about 
a twentieth  or  less  of  copper  or  other  metallic  bodies, 
as  the  experience  of  the  workmen  has  shown  to  be 
the  most  conducive  to  the  improvement  of  its  hardness 
and  colour,  such  as  lead,  zinc,  bismuth,  and  antimony. 
There  are  three  sorts  of  pewter,  distinguished  by  the 
names  of  plate,  trifle,  and  ley-pewter.  The  first  was 
formerly  much  used  for  plates  and  dishes;  of  the 
second  are  made  the  pints,  quarts,  and  other  measures 
of  beer ; and  of  the  ley-pewter,  wine  measures  and 
large  vessels. 

The  best  sort  of  pewter  consists  of  17  parts  of  anti- 
mony to  100  parts  of  tin ; but  the  French  add  a little 
copper  to  this  kind  of  pewter.  A very  fine  silver- 
looking metal  is  composed  of  100  pounds  of  tin,  eight 
of  antimony,  one  of  bismuth,  and  four  of  copper.  On 
the  contrary,  the  ley-pewter,  by  comparing  its  specific 
gravity  with  those  of  the  mixtures  of  tin  and  lead, 
must  contain  more  than  a fifth  part  of  its  weight  of 
lead. 

Peye'ri  glandule.  Peyer’s  glands.  The  small 
glands  situated  under  the  villous  coat  of  the  intestines. 

PEZIZA.  (Somewhat  altered  from  the  Greek  ireCt/cy, 
which  is  derived  from  n-r^a,  the  sole  of  the  foot.  Piiov 


speaks  of  the  pezizoe , as  the  Greek  appellation  of  such 
fungi,  as  grow  without  any  stalk  or  apparent  root.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Oryptogamia ; 
Order,  Fungi. 

Pezi'za  auriculae.  Auricula  judce  ; Fungus  sam- 
bucinus  ; Agaricus  auricula  forma.  Jew’s  ears.  A 
membranaceous  fungus.  Peziza  concava  rugosa  auri- 
formis , of  Linnaeus,  which  resembles  the  human  ear. 
Its  virtues  are  adstringent,  and  when  employed  (by 
some  its  internal  use  is  not  thought  safe),  it  is  made 
into  a decoction,  as  a gargle  for  relaxed  sore  throats. 

PHACIA.  (^afcta,  a lentil.)  A cutaneous  spot  or 
blemish,  called  by  the  Latins  lentigo  and  lenticula. 

PHENOMENON.  (From  <paivu),  to  make  appear.) 
An  appearance  which  is  contrary  to  the  usual  process 
of  nature. 

PHAGEDENA.  (From  to  eat.)  A species 
of  ulcer  that  spreads  very  rapidly. 

PHAGEDENIC.  (Phagedcenicus  ; from  0avw,  to 
eat.)  1.  An  ulceration  which  spreads  very  rapidly. 

2.  Applications  that  destroy  fungous  flesh. 

Phalacrotis.  (From  $aXaxpos,  bald.)  Baldness. 

Pha'lacrum.  (From  (paXaupos , bald.)  A surgical 
instrument,  with  a blunt,  smqptli  top ; as  a probe. 

Phala'nges.  The  plural  of  Phalanx. 

Phalango'sis.  (From  cpaXayl,,  a row  of  soldiers.) 
1.  An  affection  of  the  eyelids,  where  there  are  two  or 
more  rows  of  hairs  upon  them. 

2.  A morbid  inversion  of  the  eyelids. 

PHA'LANX.  ( Phalanx , gis.  f.;  from  <pa\ay\,  a 
battalion.)  The  small  bones  of  the  fingers  and  toes, 
which  are  distinguished  into  the  first,  second,  and 
third  phalanx. 

PHA'LARIS.  (From  <pa\os,  white,  shining:  so 
named -from  its  white  shining  seed,  supposed  to  be  the 
( paXapos  of  Dioscorides.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants.  Class,  Triandria;  Order..  Digynia.  Canary 


Phalaris  canariensis.  Canary  grass.  The  seed 
of  this  plant  is  well  known  to  be  the  common  food  of 
canary-birds.  In  the  Canary  islands,  the  inhabitants 
grind  it  into  meal,  and  make  a coarse  sort  of  bread 
with  it. 

PHA'LLUS.  (Named  after  the  0aXXoj  of  the 
Greeks,  to  which  it  bears  a striking  resemblance.)  The 
name  of  a genus,  of  the  Order  Fungi ; Class,  Crypto- 
gamia. 

Phallus  esculentus.  The  systematic  name  of 
morel  fungus.  It  grows  on  moist  banks  and  wet  pas 
tures,  and  springs  up  in  May.  It  is  used  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  truffle,  for  gravies  and  stewed  dishes,  but 
gives  an  inferior  flavour. 

Phallus  impudicus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  called  Fungus  phalloidcs,  stink-homs.  A fungus 
which  is,  at  a distance,  intolerably  foetid,  so  that  it  is 
oftener  smelled  than  seen,  being  supposed  to  be  some 
carrion,  and  therefore  avoided ; when  near  it  has  only 
the  pungency  of  volatile  alkali.  It  is  applied  to  allay 
pain  in  the  limbs. 

PHANTA'SMA.  (From  (pavragco , to  make  appear.) 
Imagination. 

Pha'ricum.  (From  Pharos , the  island  from  whence 
it  was  brought)  A violent  kind  of  poison. 

PHARM ACEU'TIC.  ( Pharmaceuticus ; from  0ap- 
paKevu,  to  exhibit  medicines.)  Belonging  to  pharmacy. 
See  Pharmacy. 

PH  ARMACOCHY'MIA.  (From  (pappauov , a medi- 
cine, and  %upta,  chemistry.)  Pharmaceutic  chemistry, 
or  that  part  of  chemistry  which  respects  the  prepara 
tion  of  medicines. 

PHARMACOLITE.  Native  arseniate  of  lime. 

PHARMACOPOEIA.  (From  (pappaKov , a medicine, 
and  zsoieu),  to  make.)  A dispensatory,  or  book  of 
directions  for  the  composition  of  medicines  approved 
of  by  medical  practitioners,  or  published  by  authority. 
The  following  are  the  most  noted,  viz. 


P.  Amstelodamensis. 
P.  Argentoratensis. 

P.  Augetoratensis. 

P.  Bateana. 

P.  Brandenburgensis. 
P.  Brandenburgica. 

P.  Bruxellensis. 


P.  Edinburg ensis. 
P.  Hafniensis. 

P.  Londinensis. 

P.  Nor  imb  erg  ensis. 
P.  Parisiensis. 

P.  Ratisbonensis. 

P.  Regia. 


PIIARMACOPO'L  A.  (From  (pappaKov,  a medicine, 
and  sJwAew,  to  sell.)  An  apothecary  or  vender  of  me- 
dicines. 

PHARMACOPO'LIUM.  (From  <pappaicov,  a medi- 

171 


PHA 

cine,  and  gjoAew,  to  sell.)  A druggist’s  or  apothecary’s 
shop. 

Pharmacopoeia..  (From  (papyaKov,  a medicine, 
and  zsouis,  a potion.)  A liquid  medicine. 

PHARMACOTHE'CA.  (From  <pappaicov,  a medi- 
cine, and  ridrjpi,  to  place.)  A medicine-chest. 

PHARMACY.  ( Pharmacia ; from  (papgaKov , a 

medicine.)  The  art  of  preparing  remedies  for  the 
treatment  of  diseases. 

The  articles  of  the  Materia  Medica,  being  generally 
unfit  for  administration  in  their  original  state,  are  sub- 

{ected  to  various  operations,  mechanical  or  chemical, 
>y  which  they  become  adapted  to  this  purpose.  Herein 
consists  the  practice  of  pharmacy,  which  therefore  re- 
quires a previous  knowledge  of  the  sensible  and 
chemical  properties  of  the  substances  operated  on. 
The  qualities  of  many  bodies  are  materially  changed 
by  heat,  especially  in  conjunction  with  air  and  other 
chemical  agents  ; the  virtues  of  others  reside  chiefly  in 
certain  parts,  which  may  be  separated  by  the  action  of 
various  menstrua,  particularly  with  the  assistance  of 
heat ; and  the  joint  operation  of  remedies  on  the  hu- 
man body  is  often  very  different  from  what  would  be 
anticipated,  from  that  which  they  exert  separately ; 
hence  in  the  preparations  and  compositions  of  the 
Pharmacopoeias,  we  are  furnished  with  many  powerful 
as  well  as  elegant  forms  of  medicine. 

[ Pharmacy , College  of.  A College  of  Pharmacy 
was  instituted  in  the  City  of  New-York,  in  1829,  by 
the  Druggists  and  Apothecaries,  with  the  following 
provisions : 

“No  person  hereafter  engaging  in  such  business, 
shall  be  admitted  as  a member,  unless  he  has  been  re- 
gularly educated  as  a Druggist  or  Apothecary,  or  has 
received  a diploma  from  this  college,  and  is  of  correct 
moral  deportment. 

“It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  beard  of  Trustees,  to 
recommend  suitable  persons  as  Lecturers  on  Materia 
Medica,  Chemistry,  and  Pharmacy,  and  on  such  other 
branches  of  science  as  may  be  useful  in  the  instruc- 
tion of  Apothecaries,  who  shall  be  elected  by  a majo- 
rity, at  a general  meeting  of  the  college. 

“ The  Trustees  shall  have  power  to  publish  in  a pam- 
phlet form,  from  time  to  time,  such  original  essays  or 
extracts  from  books  of  science,  as  may  in  their  opinion 
be  deemed  useful  for  the  advancement  of  knowledge, 
connected  with  the  business  of  Druggists  or  Apotheca- 
ries.— Extr.  from  circular.  A.1 
PHARYNGE'THRON.  Qapvyycdpov-  The  pha- 
rynx, or  fauces. 

PHARYNGE'US.  (From  (f>apvy\ , the  pharynx.) 
Belonging  to  or  affecting  the  pharynx  ; thus  cynanche 
pharyngea,  &c. 

Pharyngostaphyli'nus.  A muscle  originating  in 
the  pharynx,  and  terminating  in  the  uvula. 

PH  ARYNGOTO'MIA.  (From  <papvy\ , the  pharynx, 
and  repvo),  to  cut.)  The  operation  of  cutting  the  pha- 
rynx. 

PHA'RYNX.  (Airo  rou  tiepu),  because  it  conveys 
the  food  into  the  stomach.)  The  muscular  bag  at  the 
back  part  of  the  mouth.  It  is  shaped  like  a funnel, 
adheres  to  the  fauces  behind  the  larynx,  and  terminates 
in  the  oesophagus.  Its  use  is  to  receive  the  masticated 
food,  and  to  convey  it  into  the  oesophagus. 

PHASE'OLUS.  (From  <paorj\os , a little  ship,  or 
galliot,  which  its  pods  were  supposed  to  resemble.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Diadelphia ; 
Order,  Decandria. 

Phaseolus  creticus.  A decoction  of  the  leaves  of 
this  plant,  called  by  the  Americans  Cajan  and  Cayan, 
is  said  to  restrain  the  bleeding  from  piles  when  exces- 
ei  ve.—Ray. 

Phaseolus  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
kidney-bean.  This  is  often  called  the  French  bean ; 
when  young  and  well  boiled  it  is  easy  of  digestion,  and 
delicately  flavoured.  They  are  less  liable  to  produce 
flatulency  than  pease. 

Phasga'nium.  (From  <Patryovov,  a knife : so  called 
because  its  leaves  are  shaped  like  a knife,  or  sword.) 
The  herb  swordgrass. 

PHASIANUS.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  birds, 
of  the  order  Oallince. 

2.  The  pheasant. 

Phasianus  colchicus.  Tl  e common  pheasant. 
Phasianus  gallus.  The  common  or  wild  cock. 

Pn  at'nium.  (From  Aarvy,  a stall.)  The  socket  of 
a tooth. 

172 


PHI 

PHELLA'NDRIUM.  (From  <pe\Xos , the  cork-tree, 
and  avdpios,  male  : so  called  because  it  floats  upon  the 
water  like  cork.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Digynia. 

Phellandrium  aquaticum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  water-fennel,  or  fine-leaved  water  hemlock. 
Fceniculum  aquaticum  ; Cicutaria  aquatica.  The  plant 
which  bears  this  name  in  the  pharmacopoeias  is  the 
Phellandrium — foliorum  rarnificationibus  divaricatis , 
of  Linnaeus.  It  possesses  vertiginous  and  poisonous 
qualities,  which  are  best  counteracted  by  acids,  alter 
clearing  the  primae  vise.  The  seeds  are  recommended 
by  some,  in  conjunction  with  Peruvian  bark,  in  the 
cure  of  pulmonary  phthisis. 

Phe'mos.  (From  0ipow,  to  shut  up.)  A medicine 
against  a dysentery. 

v[“  Phenicin  is  produced  by  stopping  the  action  of 
the  sulphuric  acid  on  indigo  before  it  is  converted  into 
cerulin ; diluting,  filtering,  and  washing  the  mixture 
with  water,  when  it  becomes  of  a bottle-green  colour : 
muriate  of  potassa  is  added  to  the  blue  washings  which 
are  finally  obtained,  when  the  phenicin  is  precipitated 
of  a fine  reddish  purple  colour.  It  is  soluble  in  water, 
and  in  alkohol,  forming  blue-coloured  solutions,  and  is 
easily  converted  into  cerulin  by  the  action  of  water. 
From  its  ultimate  analysis,  Mr.  Crum  is  disposed  to 
consider  phenicin  as  constituted  of  I indigo-}-  2 wa- 
ter.”— Webs.  Man.  Chem.  A.l 

PHILADE'LPHUS.  (From  0(Aew,  to  love,  and 
aSeXcpos,  a brother:  so.called  because,  by  its  roughness, 
it  attaches  itself  to  whatever  is  near  it.)  See  Galium 
aparine. ' 

PHILANTHRO'PUS.  (From  (pi Acw,  to  love,  and 
avQpwnos,  a man : so  called  from  its  uses.)  1.  A medi 
cine  which  relieves  the  pain  of  the  stone. 

2.  The  herb  goose-grass,  because  it  sticks  to  the  gar- 
ments of  those  who  touch  it.  See  Galium  aparine. 

PHILO'NIUM.  (From  Philo,  its  inventor.)  A 
warm  opiate. 

Philonium  londinknse.  An  old  name  of  the  Con 
fectio  opii. 

PHI'LTRUM.  (From  <pi\tw,  to  love.)  1.  A philtre 
or  imaginary  medicine,  to  excite  love. 

2.  The  depression  on  the  upper  lip,  where  lovers  sa 
lute. 

PH  ILLY' R I A.  (ILAAepto  of  Dioscorides,  supposed 
to  be  so  called  from  Phillyria , the  mother  of  Chiron, 
who  first  applied  it  medicinally.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants,  Class,  Diandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  Mock 
privet. 

PHIMO'SIS.  (From  (Pipco,  to  bind  up.)  A con- 
striction or  straitness  of  the  extremity  of  the  pre- 
puce, which,  preventing  the  glans  from  being  unco- 
vered, is  often  the  occasion  of  many  troublesome  com- 
plaints. It  may  arise  from  different  causes,  both  in 
children  and  grown  persons.  Children  have  naturally 
the  prepuce  very  long;  and  as  it  exceeds  the  extremity 
of  the  glans,  and  is  not  liable  to  be  distended,  it  is  apt 
to  contract  its  orifice.  This  often  occasions  a lodgment 
of  a small  quantity  of  urine  between  that  and  the  glans, 
which,  if  it  grows  corrosive,  may  irritate  the  parts  so 
as  to  produce  an  inflammation.  In  this  case,  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  prepuce  becomes  more  contracted,  and 
consequently  the  urine  more  confined.  Hence  the 
whole  inside  of  the  prepuce  excoriates  and  suppurates ; 
the  end  of  it  grows  thick  and  swells,  and  in  some 
months  becomes  callous.  At  other  times  it  does  not 
grow  thick,  but  becomes  so  strait  and  contracted  as 
hardly  to  allow  the  introduction  of  a probe.  The  only 
way  to  remove  this  disorder  is  by  an  operation.  A 
phimosis  may  affect  grown  persons  from  the  same 
cause  as  little  children  ; though  there  are  some  grown 
persons  who  cannot  uncover  their  glans,  or  at  least  not 
without  pain,  and  yet  have  not  the  extremity  of  the 
prepuce  so  contracted  as  to  confine  the  urine  from  pass- 
ing, we  notwithstanding  find  them  sometimes  troubled 
with  a phimosis,  which  might  be  suspected  to  arise 
from  a venereal  taint,  but  has,  in  reality,  a much  more 
innocent  cause.  There  are,  we  know,  sebaceousglands, 
situated  in  the  prepuce,  round  the  corona,  which  se- 
crete an  unctuous  humour,  which  sometimes  becomes 
acrimonious,  irritates  the  skin  that  covers  the  glans, 
and  the  irritation  extended  to  the  internal  membrane  of 
the  prepuce,  they  both  become  inflamed,  and  yield  a 
purulent  serum,  which  cannot  be  discharged,  because 
the  glans  is  swelled,  and  the  orifice  of  the  prepuce  con- 
tracted. We  find  also  some  grown  persons,  who, 


PHL 


PHL 


though  they  never  uncovered  the  glans,  have  been  sub- 
ject to  phimosis  from  a venereal  cause.  In  some,  it  is 
owing  to  gonorrhoea,  where  the  matter  lodged  between 
the  prepuce  and  the  glans  occasioned  the  same  excoria- 
tion as  the  discharge  before  mentioned  from  the  seba- 
ceous glands.  In  others,  it  proceeds  from  venereal 
chancres  on  the  prepuce,  the  glans,  or  the  fraenum; 
which  producing  an  inflammation  either  on  the  pre- 
puce or  glans,  or  both,  the  extremity  of  the  foreskin 
contracts,  and  prevents  the  discharge  of  the  matter. 
The  parts,  in  a very  little  time,  are  greatly  tumefied, 
and  sometimes  a gangrene  comes  on  in  less  than  two 
days. 

PHLEBORRHA  GIA.  (From  <p\etp,  a vein,  and 
priYwpi,  to  break  out.)  A rupture  of  a vein. 

PHLEBOTOMY.  ( Phlebotomia ; QXeip,  a vein,  and 
repvi i),  to  cut.)  The  opening  of  a vein. 

PHLEGM.  ( Phlegma , atis.  n.;  from  to  burn 

or  to  excite.)  In  chemistry  it  means  water  from  distil- 
lation, but,  in  the  common  acceptation  of  the  word,  it 
is  a thick  and  tenacious  mucus  secreted  in  the  lungs. 

Phleomago'ga.  (From  d»Xty/ra,  phlegm,  and  ayw, 
to  drive  out.)  Medicines  which  promote  the  discharge 
of  phlegm. 

PHLEGMA'SIA.  (From  <p\ syw,  to  burn.)  An  in- 
flammation. 

Phlegmasia  dolens.  A very  improper  name  given 
by  Dr.  Hull  to  a disease  noticed  by  some  of  the  French 
writers,  under  the  name  of  the  L'mjlure  desjambes  et 
des  cuisses  de  la  femme  accouclii ; while  others  have 
called  it  diptt  du  lait , from  its  supposed  cause.  By 
the  Germans  it  is  called  (Edema  lacteum , and  by  the 
English  the  white  leg.  This  disease  principally  affects 
women  in  the  puerperal  state;  in  a few  instances  it 
has  been  observed  to  attack  pregnant  women ; and,  in 
one  or  two  cases,  nurses,  on  losing  their  children,  have 
been  affected  by  it.  Women  of  all  descriptions  are 
liable  to  be  attacked  by  it  during  and  soon  after  child- 
bed; but  those,  whose  limbs  have  been  pained  or  ana- 
sarcous  during  pregnancy,  and  who  do  not  suckle  their 
offspring,  are  more  especially  subject  to  it.  It  has 
rarely  occurred  oftener  than  once  to  the  same  female. 
It  supervenes  to  easy  and  natural,  as  well  as  to  diffi- 
cult and  preternatural  births.  It  sometimes  makes  its 
appearance  in  twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours  after 
delivery,  and  at  other  times,  not  till  a month  or  six  weeks 
after ; but,  in  general,  the  attack  takes  place  from  the 
tenth  to  the  sixteenth  day  of  the  lying-in.  It  has,  in  many 
instances,  attacked  women  who  were  recovering  from 
puerperal  fever ; and,  in  some  cases,  has  supervened  or 
succeeded  to  thoracic  inflammation.  It  not  uncommonly 
begins  with  coldness  and  rigors ; these  are  succeeded  by 
heat,  thirst,  and  other  symptoms  of  pyrexia ; and  then 
pain,  stiffness,  and  other  symptoms  of  topical  inflam- 
mation supervene.  Sometimes  the  local  affection  is 
fromthefirst  accompanied  with,  but  is  not  preceded  by, 
febrile  symptoms.  Upon  other  occasions,  the  topical 
affection  is  neither  preceded  by  puerperal  fever,  nor 
rigors,  &c.;  but  soon  after  it  has  taken  place,  the  pulse 
becomes  more  frequent,  the  heal  of  the  body  is  in- 
creased, and  the  patient  is  affected  with  thirst,  head- 
ache, & c.  The  pyrexia  is  very  various  in  degree  in 
different  patients,  and  sometimes  assumes  an  irre- 
gular remittent  or  intermittent  type.  The  complaint 
generally  takes  place  on  one  side  only  at  first,  and  the 
part  where  it  commences  is  various ; but  it  most  com- 
monly begins  in  the  lumbar,  hypogastric,  or  inguinal 
region,  on  one  side,  or  in  the  hip,  or  top  of  the  thigh, 
and  corresponding  labium  pudendi.  In  this  case,  the 
patient  first  perceives  a sense  of  pain,  weight,  and  stiff- 
ness, in  some  of  the  above-mentioned  parts,  which  are 
increased  by  every  attempt  to  move  the  pelvis,  or  lower 
limb.  If  the  part  be  carefully  examined,  it  generally  is 
found  rather  fuller  or  hotter  than  natural,  and  tender 
to  the  touch,  but  not  discoloured.  The  pain  increases, 
always  becomes  very  severe,  and,  in  some  cases,  is  of 
the  most  excruciating  kind.  It  extends  along  the  thigh, 
and  when  it  has  subsisted  for  some  time,  longer  or 
shorter  in  different  patients,  the  top  of  the  thigh  and 
the  labium  pudendi  become  greatly  swelled,  and  the 
pain  is  then  sometimes  alleviated,  but  accompanied 
with  a greater  sense  of  distention.  The  pain  next  ex- 
tends down  to  the  knee,  and  is  generally  the  most  se- 
vere on  the  inside  and  back  of  the  thigh,  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  internal  cutaneous  and  the  crural  nerves  ; 
when  it  has  continued  for  some  time,  the  whole  of  the 
thigh  becomes  swelled,  and  the  pain  is  somewhat  re- 


lieved. The  pain  then  extends  down  the  leg  to  the 
foot,  and  is  commonly  the  most  severe  in  the  direction 
of  the  posterior  tibial  nerve;  after  some  time,  the 
part  last  attacked  begins  to  swell,  and  the  pain  abates 
in  violence,  but  is  still  very  considerable,  especially  on 
any  attempt  to  move  the  limb.  The  extremity  being 
now  swelled  throughout  its  whole  extent,  appears  per- 
fectly or  nearly  uniform,  and  it  is  not  perceptibly  les- 
sened by  an  horizontal  position,  like  an  cedematose 
limb.  It  is  of  the  natural  colour,  or  even  whiter,  is 
hotter  than  natural ; excessively  tense,  and  exquisitely 
tender  when  touched.  When  pressed  by  the  finger  in 
different  parts,  it  is  found  to  be  elastic,  little,  if  any,  im- 
pression remaining,  and  that  onlyfor  a very  short  time. 
If  a puncture,  or  incision,  be  made  into  the  limb,  in 
some  instances,  no  fluid  is  discharged ; in  others,  a 
small  quantity  only  issues  out,  which  coagulates  soon 
after ; and  in  others  a large  quantity  of  fluid  escapes, 
which  does  not  coagulate  ; but  the  whole  of  the  effused 
matter  cannot  be  drawn  off  in  this  way.  The  swelling 
of  the  limb  varies  both  in  degree  and  in  the  space  of 
time  requisite  for  its  full  formation.  In  most  instances, 
it  arrives  at  double  the  natural  size,  and  in  some  cases 
at  a much  greater.  In  lax  habits,  and  in  patients 
whose  legs  have  been  very  much  affected  with  ana- 
sarca during  pregnancy,  the  swelling  takes  place  more 
rapidly  than  in  those  who  are  differently  circumstanced ; 
it  sometimes  arrives,  in  the  former  class  of  patients,  at 
its  greatest  extent  in  twenty-four  hours,  or  less,  from  the 
first  attack. 

Instead  of  beginning  invariably  at  the  upper  part  of 
the  limb,  and  descending  to  the  lower,  this  complaint 
has  been  known  to  begin  in  the  foot,  the  middle  of  the 
leg,  the  ham,  and  the  knee.  In  whichsoever  of  these 
parts  it  happens  to  begin,  it  is  generally  soon  diffused 
over  the  whole  of  the  limb,  and,  when  this  has  taken 
place,  the  limb  presents  the  same  phenomena,  exactly, 
that  have  been  stated  above,  as  observable  when  the 
inguen,  &c.  are  first  affected. 

After  some  days,  generally  from  two  to  eight,  the 
febrile  symptoms  diminish,  and  the  swelling,  heat,  ten- 
sion, weight,  and  tenderness  of  the  lower  extremity, 
begin  to  abate,  first  about  the  upper  part  of  the  thigh, 
or  about  the  knee,  and  afterward  in  the  leg  and  foot. 
Some  inequalities  are  found  in  the  limb,  which,  at  first, 
feel  like  indurated  glands,  but,  upon  being  more  nicely 
examined,  their  edges  are  not  so  well  defined  as  those 
of  conglobate  glands;  and  they  appear  to  be  occasion- 
ed by  the  effused  matter  being  of  different  degrees  of 
consistence  in  different  points.  The  conglobate  glands 
of  the  thigh  and  leg  are  sometimes  felt  distinctly,  and 
are  tender  to  the  touch,  but  are  seldom  materially  en- 
larged: and  as  the  swelling  subsides,  it  has  happened, 
that  an  enlargement  of  the  lymphatic  vessels,  in 
some  part  of  the  limb,  has  been  felt,  or  been  supposed 
to  be  felt. 

The  febrile  symptoms  having  gradually  disappeared, 
the  pain  and  tenderness  of  the  limb  being  much  re- 
lieved, and  the  swelling  and  tension  being  considerably 
diminished,  the  patient  is  debilitated  and  much  re- 
duced, and  the  limb  feels  stiff,  heavy,  benumbed,  and 
weak.  When  the  finger  is  pressed  strongly  against  it 
for  some  time,  in  different  points,  it  is  found  to  be  less 
elastic  than  at  first,  in  some  places  retaining  the  im- 
pression of  the  finger  for  a longer,  in  other  places  for 
a shorter  time,  or  scarcely  at  all.  And,  if  the  limb  be 
suffered  to  hang  down,  or  if  the  patient  walk  much,  it 
is  found  to  be  more  swelled  in  the  evening,  and  as- 
sumes more  of  an  cedematose  appearance.  In  this 
state  the  limb  continues  for  a longer  or  shorter  time, 
and  is  commonly  at  length  reduced  wholly,  or  nearly, 
to  the  natural  size. 

Hitherto  the  disease  has  been  described  as  affecting 
only  one  of  the  inferior  extremities,  and  as  terminating 
by  resolution,  or  the  effusion  of  a fluid  that  is  removed 
by  the  absorbents;  but,  unfortunately,  it  sometimes 
happens,  that  after  it  abates  in  one  limb,  the  other  is 
attacked  in  a similar  way.  It  also  happens,  in  some 
cases,  that  the  swelling  is  not  terminated  by  resolution ; 
for  sometimes  a suppuration  takes  place  in  one  or  both 
legs,  and  ulcers  are  formed  which  are  difficult  to  heal. 
In  a few  cases,  a gangrene  has  supervened.  In  some 
instances,  the  patient  has  been  destroyed  by  the  vio- 
lence of  the  disease,  before  either  suppuration  or  gan- 
grene have  happened. 

The  predisposing  causes  of  this  disease,  when  it 
occurs  during  the  pregnant  or  puerperal  state,  or  in  a 

173 


PHL 


PHO 


short  time  afterward,  appear  to  be,  1st,  The  increased 
irritability  and  disposition  to  inflammation  which  pre- 
vail during  pregnancy , and  in  a still  higher  degree  for 
some  time  after  parturition.  2dly,  The  over-distend- 
ed, or  relaxed  state  of  the  blood-vessels  of  the  inferior 
part  of  the  trunk  and  of  the  lower  extremities,  produced 
during  the  latter  months  of  utero- gestation. 

Among  the  exciting  causes  of  this  disease  may  be 
enumerated,  1st,  Contusions,  or  violent  exertions  of 
the  lower  portions  of  the  abdominal  and  other  muscles 
inserted  in  the  pelvis,  or  thighs,  or  of  the  muscles  of 
the  inferior  extremities,  and  contusions  of  the  cellular 
texture  connected  with  these  muscles,  during  a tedious 
labour.  2dly,  The  application  of  cold  and  moisture t 
which  are  known  to  act  very  powerfully  upon  every 
system  in  changing  the  natural  distribution  of  the  cir- 
culating fluids,  and,  consequently,  in  a system  predis- 
posed by  parturition,  may  assist  in  producing  the  dis- 
ease, by  occasioning  the  fluids  to  be  impelled,  in  unu- 
sual quantity,  into  the  weakened  vessels  of  the  lumbar, 
hypogastric,  and  inguinal  regions,  and  of  the  inferior 
extremities.  3dly,  Suppression , or  diminution  of  the 
lochia,  and  of  the  secretion  or  milk,  which,  by  inducing 
a plethoric  state  of  the  sanguiferous  system,  may  occa- 
sion an  inflammatory  diathesis,  may  favour  congestion, 
and  the  determination  of  an  unusual  quantity  of  blood 
to  the  vessels  of  the  parts  just  mentioned,  and  thus  con- 
tribute to  the  production  of  an  inflammation  of  these 
parts.  4thly,  Food  taken  in  too  large  quantity , and  of 
a too  stimulating  quality , especially  when  the  patient 
does  not  give  suck.  This  cause  both  favours  the  pro- 
duction of  plethora,  and  stimulates  the  heart  and  arte- 
ries to  more  frequent  and  violent  action ; the  effects  of 
which  may  be  expected  to  be  particularly  felt  in  the 
lumbar,  hypogastric,  or  inguinal  regions,  and  in  the 
lower  extremities,  from  the  state  of  their  blood-vessels. 
5thly,  Standing,  or  walking  too  much,  before  the  arte- 
ries and  veins  of  the  lower  half  of  the  body  have  re- 
covered sufficiently  from  the  effects  of  the  distention 
which  existed  during  the  latter  months  of  pregnancy. 
This  must  necessarily  occasion  too  great  a determina- 
tion of  blood  to  these  parts,  and  consequently  too  great 
a congestion  in  them ; whence  they  will  be  more  stimu- 
lated than  the  upper  parts  of  the  body,  and  inflamma- 
tion will  sometimes  be  excited  in  them. 

From  an  attentive  consideration  of  the  whole  of 
the  phenomena  observable  in  this  disease,  and  of  its 
remote  causes  and  cure,  no  doubt  remains,  Dr.  Hull 
thinks,  that  the  proximate  cause  consists  in  an  inflam- 
matory affection,  producing  suddenly  a considerable 
effusion  of  serum  and  coagulating  lymph  from  the  ex- 
halants  into  the  cellular  membrane  of  the  lymph. 

Phlegma'sije.  The  plural  of  phlegmasia.  Inflam- 
mations. The  name  of  the  second  order  in  the  class 
Pyrexia:,  of  Cullen’s  Nosological  arrangement,  charac- 
terized by  pyrexia,  with  topical  pain  and  inflammation ; 
the  blood,  after  venesection,  exhibiting  a buffy  coat. 

PHLEGM ATORRHA'GIA.  (From  Qktypa,  mucus, 
and  pyyvvpi,  to  break  out.)  A discharge  of  thin  mu- 
cous phlegm  from  the  nose,  through  cold. 

PHLE'GMON.  ( Phlegmon , onis.  m. ; from  (fheyw, 
to  burn.)  Phlegmone.  An  inflammation  of  a bright 
red  colour,  with  a throbbing  and  pointed  tumour,  tend- 
ing to  suppuration. 

PHLOGISTON.  (From  (fAoyi^w,  to  burn.)  The 
supposed  general  inflammable  principle  of  Stahl,  who 
imagined  it  was  pure  fire,  or  the  matter  of  fire  fixed 
in  combustible  bodies,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from 
fire  in  action,  or  in  a state  of  liberty. 

Phlogisticated  air.  See  Nitrogen. 

Phlogisticated  alkali.  See  Alkali  phlogisticated. 

Phlogisticated  gas.  See  Nitrogen. 

PHLOGO'SIS.  (From  <f>\oyow,  to  inflame.)  In- 
flammation. See  Inflammation. 

PHLOGOTICA.  (Phlogoticus ; from  (f>\tyw,  to 
burn.)  The  name  of  the  second  order  ol  the  class 
Haimatica,  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Inflammation.  Its 
genera  are  Apostema;  Phlegmone;  Phyma ; Ionthus ; 
Phlysis ; Erythema;  Empresma;  Ophthalmia ; Catar- 
rhus ; Dyscntcria;  Bucnemia;  Arthrosia. 

l’HLYCTAS'NA.  (<I> hvKraivai , small  bladders.) 
Phlyctis ; Phlysis.  A small  pellucid  vesicle,  that  con- 
tains  a serous  fluid. 

PHLYSIS.  (From  6\vlo),  to  burn.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Class,  Hcema- 
tica ; Order,  Phlogotica.  It  has  only  one  species, 
Phlysis  paronychia.  Whitlow. 

174 


PHLYZA'CIUM.  (From  <p\v^o>,  to  be  hot.)  A 
pustule  on  the  skin,  excited  by  fire  or  heat.  Sec 

Pustule. 

PHtENIGMUS.  (From  <poivii,  red.)  1.  A redness 
of  the  skin,  such  as  is  produced  by  stimulating  sub- 
stances. 

2.  That  which  reddens  the  skin  when  applied  to  it. 

PHCE'NIX.  ($om£,  of  the  ancient  Greeks,  the  date 
palm-tree ; from  which,  as  a primitive  word , Phoenicia, 
the  land  of  palm-trees,  seems  to  have  derived  its  name, 
as  likewise  the  red  colour  phoeniceus.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Dirncia;  Order,  Triandria. 
The  date  palm-tree. 

Ph<enix  dactylifera.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  date-tree.  Phoenix- - frondibus  pinnatis ; foliolis 
ensiformibus  complicatis,  of  Linnreus.  The  fruit  is 
called  dactylus  or  date.  Dates  are  oblong.  Before 
they  are  ripe,  they  are  rather  rough  and  astringent ; 
but  when  perfectly  matured,  they  are  much  of  the  na- 
ture of  the  fig.  See  Ficus  carica.  Senegal  dates  are 
much  esteemed,  they  having  a more  sugary,  agreeable 
flavour  than  those  of  iEgypt  and  other  places.  Dates 
are  aperient. 

PHONICA.  (Phonicus ; from  <pu>vrj,  the  voice.) 
The  name  of  the  first  order  of  the  class  Pneumatica, 
in  Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases  affecting  the  vocal 
avenues.  It  has  six  genera,  viz.  Coryza ; Polypus  ; 
Rhonchus  ; Aphonia ; Dysphonia ; Psellismus. 

PHOSGENE  GAS.  {Phosgene : so  called  by  its 
discoverer,  Doctor  John  Davy,  from  its  mode  of  pro- 
duction.) Chloro-carbonaceous  acid,  a combination 
of  carbonic  oxide  and  chlorine,  made  by  exposing  a 
mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  chlorine,  and  carbonic 
oxide,  to  the  action  of  light.  It  has  a peculiar  pungent 
odour,  is  soluble  in  water,  and  is  resolved  into  carbonic 
and  muriatic  acid  gas. 

PHOSPHATE.  ( Phosphas ; from  phosphorus .)  A 
salt  formed  by  the  union  of  phosphoric  acid  with  sali- 
fiable bases;  thus,  phosphate  of  ammonia,  phosphate 
of  lime,  &c.  . 

PHOSPHATIC  ACID.  Acidum  phosphaticum. 
“ This  acid  is  obtained  by  the  slow  combustion  of  cy- 
linders of  phosphorus  in  the  air.  For  which  purpose, 
it  is  necessary  that  the  air  be  renewed  to  support  the 
combustion ; that  it  be  humid,  otherwise  the  dry  coat 
of  phosphatic  acid  would  screen  the  phosphorus  from 
farther  action  of  the  oxygen;  and  that  the  different 
cylinders  of  phosphorus  be  insulated,  to  prevent  the 
heat  from  becoming  too  high,  which  would  melt  or  in- 
flame them,  so  as  to  produce  phosphoric  acid.  The 
acid,  as  it  is  formed,  must  be  collected  in  a vessel,  so 
as  to  lose  as  little  of  it  as  possible.  All  these  condi- 
tions may  be  thus  fulfilled : We  take  a parcel  of  glass 
tubes,  which  are  drawn  out  to  a point  at  one  end ; we 
introduce  into  each  a cylinder  of  phosphorus  a little 
shorter  than  the  tube ; we  dispose  of  these  tubes  along- 
side of  one  another,  to  the  amount  of  30  or  40,  in  a 
glass  funnel,  the  beak  of  which  passes  into  a bottle 
placed  on  a plate,  covered  with  water.  We  then 
cover  the  bottle  and  its  funnel  with  a large  bell-glass,; 
having  a small  hole  in  its  top,  and  another  in  its  side. 

A film  of  phosphorus  first  evaporates,  then  combines 
with  the  oxygen  and  the  water  of  the  air,  giving  birth 
to  phosphatic  acid,  which  collects  in  small  drops  at  the 
end  of  the  glass  tubes,  and  falls  through  the  funnel 
into  the  bottle.  A little  phosphatic  acid  is  also  found 
on  the  sides  of  the  bell-glass,  and  in  the  water  of  the 
plate.  The  process  is  a very  slow  one. 

The  phosphatic  acid  thus  collected  is  very  dilute. 
We  reduce  it  to  a viscid  consistence,  by  heating  it 
gently ; and  better  still,  by  putting  it,  at  the  ordinary 
temperature,  into  a capsule  over  another  capsule  full 
of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  under  the  receiver  of 
an  air-pump,  from  which  we  exhaust  the  air. 

The  acid  thus  formed  is  a viscid  liquid,  without  co- 
lour, having  a faint  smell  of  phosphorus,  a strong  taste, 
reddening  strongly  the  tincture  of  litmus,  and  denser 
than  water  in  a proportion  not  well  determined  Every 
thing  leads  to  the  belief  that  this  acid  would  be  solid, 
could  we  deprive  it  of  water.  When  it  is  heated  in  a 
retort,  phosphuretted  hydrogen  gas  is  evolved,  and 
phosphoric  acid  remains.  The  oxygen  and  hydrogen 
of  the  water  concur  to  this  transformation.  Phosphatic 
acid  has  no  action,  either  on  oxygen  gas,  or  on  the  at- 
mospheric air  at  ordinary  temperatures.  In  com- 
bining with  water,  a slight  degree  of  heat  is  occasion- 
ed. The  phosphatic  acid  in  its  action  on  the  sal  ilia 


PHO 


PHO 


t)!e  bases  is  transformed  into  phosphorous  and  phos- 
phoric acids,  whence  proceed  phosphites  and  phos- 
phates.” 

PHOSPHITE.  Phosphis.  A salt  formed  by  the 
combination  of  phosphorous  acid  with  salifiable  bases ; 
thus,  ammoniacal  phosphite , &c. 

Phosphorated  hydrogen.  See  Phosphorus. 

PHOSPHORESCENCE.  The  luminous  appearance 
which  is  given  off  by  phosphorescent  bodies. 

PHOSPHORIC  ACID.  Acidum  phosphoricum. 
“The  base  of  this  acid,  or  the  acid  itself,  abounds  in 
the  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms.  In  the 
mineral  kingdom  it  is  found  in  combination  with  lead, 
in  the  green  lead  ore;  with  iron,  in  the  bog  ores, 
which  afford  cold  short  iron,  and  more  especially  with 
calcareous  earth  in  several  kinds  of  stone.  Whole 
mountains  in  the  province  of  Estremadura  in  Spain  are 
composed  of  this  combination  of  phosphoric  acid  and 
lime.  Bowles  affirms,  that  the  stone  is  whitish  and 
tasteless,  and  affords  a blue  flame  without  smell  when 
thrown  upon  burning  coals.  Prout  describes  it  as  a 
dense  stone,  not  hard  enough  to  strike  fire  with  steel ; 
and  says  that  it  is  found  in  strata,  which  always  lie 
horizontally  upon  quartz,  and  which  are  intersected 
with  veins  of  quartz.  When  this  stone  is  scattered 
upon  burning  coals,  it  does  not  decrepitate,' but  burns 
with  a beautiful  green  light,  which  lasts  a considerable 
time.  It  melts  into  a white  enamel  by  the  blow-pipe  ; 
is  soluble  with  heat,  and  some  effervescence  in  the  ni- 
tric acid,  and  forms  sulphate  of  lime  with  the  sulphu- 
ric acid,  while  the  phosphoric  acid  is  set  at  liberty  in 
the  fluid. 

The  vegetable  kingdom  abounds  with  phosphorus, 
or  its  acid.  It  is  principally  found  in  plants  that  grow 
in  marshy  places,  in  turf,  and  several  species  of  the 
white  woods.  Various  seeds,  potatoes,  agaric,  soot, 
and  charcoal,  afford  phosphoric  acid,  by  abstracting 
the  nitric  acid  from  them,  and  lixiviating  the  residue. 
The  lixivium  contains  the  phosphoric  acid,  which  may 
either  be  saturated  with  lime  by  the  addition  of  lime- 
water,  in  which  case  it  forms  a solid  compound ; or  it 
may  be  tried  by  examination  of  its  leading  properties 
by  other  chemical  methods- 

In  the  animal  kingdom  it  is  found  in  almost  every 
part  of  the  bodies  of  animals  which  are  not  considera- 
bly volatile.  There  is  not,  in  all  probability,  any  part 
of  these  organized  beings  which  is  free  from  it.  It  has 
been  obtained  from  blood,  flesh,  both  of  land  and  water 
animals ; from  cheese  ; and  it  exists  in  large  quantities 
in  bones,  combined  with  calcareous  earth.  Urine  con- 
tains it,  not  only  in  a disengaged  state,  but  also  com- 
bined with  ammonia,  soda,  and  lime.  It  was  by  the 
evaporation  and  distillation  of  this  excrementitious 
fluid  with  charcoal  that  phosphorus  was  first  made ; 
the  charcoal  decomposing  the  disengaged  acid  and  the 
ammoniacal  salt.  But  it  is  more  cheaply  obtained  by 
the  process  of  Scheele,  from  bones,  by  the  application 
of  an  acid  to  their  earthy  residue  after  calcination. 

In  this  process  the  sulphuric  acid  appears  to  be  the 
mbst  convenient,  because  it  forms  a nearly  insoluble 
compound  with  the  lime  of  the  bones.  Bones  of  beef, 
mutton,  or  veal,  being  calcined  to  whiteness  in  an  open 
fire,  lose  almost  half  of  their  weight.  This  must  be 
pounded,  and  sifted ; or  the  trouble  may  be  spared  by 
buying  the  powder  that  is  sold  to  make  cupels  fofr  the 
assayers,  and  is,  in  fact,  the  powder  of  burned  bones 
ready  sifted.  To  three  pounds  of  the  powder  there 
may  be  added  about  two  pounds  of  concentrated  sul- 
phuric acid.  Four  or  five  pounds  of  water  must  be  af- 
terward added  to  assist  the  action  of  the  acid;  and 
during  the  whole  process  the  operator  must  remember 
to  place  himself  and  his  vessels  so  that  the  fumes  may 
be  blown  from  him.  The  whole  may  be  then  left  on  a 
gentle  sand  bath  for  twelve  hours  or  more,  taking  care 
to  supply  the  loss  of  water  which  happens  by  evapora- 
tion. The  next  day  a large  quantity  of  water  must  be 
added,  the  whole  strained  through  a sieve,  and  the  re- 
sidual matter,  which  is  sulphate  of  lime,  must  be  edul- 
corated by  repeated  affusions  of  hot  water,  till  it  passes 
tasteless.  The  waters  contain  phosphoric  acid  nearly 
free  from  lime;  and  by  evaporation,  first  in  glazed 
earthen,  and  then  in  glass  vessels,  or  rather  in  vessels  of 
platina  or  silver,  for  the  hot  acid  acts  upon  glass,  afford 
the  acid  in  a concentrated  state,  which,  by  the  force  of 
strong  heat  in  a crucible,  may  be  made  to  acquire  the 
form  of  a transparent  consistent  glass,  though  it  is 
usually  of  a milky,  opaque  appearance. 


For  making  phosphorus,  it  is  not  necessary  o evapo- 
rate the  water  further  than  to  bring  it  to  the  consis- 
tence of  syrup  ; and  the  small  portion  of  lime  it  con- 
tains is  not  an  impediment  worth  the  trouble  of  remov- 
ing, as  it  affects  the  produce  very  little.  But  when  the 
acid  is  required  in  a purer  state,  it  is  proper  to  add  a 
quantity  of  carbonate  of  ammonia,  which,  by  double 
elective  attraction,  precipitates  the  lime  that  was  held 
in  solution  by  the  phosphoric  acid.  The  fluid,  being 
then  evaporated,  affords  a crystallized  ammoniacal 
salt,  which  may  be  melted  in  a silver  vessel,  as  the  acid 
acts  upon  glass  or  earthen  vessels.  The  ammonia  is 
driven  off  by  the  heat,  and  the  acid  acquires  the  form 
of  a compact  glass,  as  transparent  as  rock  crystal,  acid 
'to  the  taste,  soluble  in  water,  and  deliquescent  in 
the  air. 

This  acid  is  commonly  pure,  but  nevertheless  may 
contain  a small  quantity  of  soda,  originally  existing  in 
the  bones,  and  not  capable  of  being  taken  away  by 
this  process,  ingenious  as  it  is.  The  only  unequivocal 
method  of  obtaining  a pure  acid  appears  to  consist  in 
first  converting  it  into  phosphorus  by  distillation  of  the 
materials  with  charcoal,  and  then  converting  it  again 
into  acid  by  rapid  combustion,  at  a high  temperature, 
either  in  oxygen  or  atmospheric  air,  or  some  other  equi- 
valent process. 

Phosphorus  may  also  be  converted  into  the  acid  state 
by  treating  it  with  nitric  acid.  In  this  operation,  a 
tubulated  retort  with  a ground  stopper,  must  be  half 
filled  with  nitric  acid,  and  a gentle  heat  applied.  A 
small  piece  of  phosphorus  being  then  introduced 
through  the  tube,  will  be  dissolved  with  effervescence, 
produced  by  the  escape  of  a large  quantity  of  nitric 
oxide.  The  addition  of  phosphorus  must  be  continued 
until  the  last  piece  remains  undissolved.  The  fire 
being  then  raised  to  drive  over  the  remainder  of 
the  nitric  acid,  the  phosphoric  acid  will  be  found  in 
the  retort,  partly  in  the  concrete  and  partly  in  the  li- 
quid form. 

Sulphuric  acid  produces  nearly  the  same  effect  as  the 
nitric  ; a large  quantity  of  sulphurous  acid  flying  off. 
But  as  it  requires  a stronger  heat  to  drive  off  the  last 
portions  of  this  acid,  it  is  not  so  well  adapted  to  the 
purpose.  The  liquid  chlorine  likewise  acidifies  it. 

When  phosphorus  is  burned  by  a strong  heat,  suffi- 
cient to  cause  it  to  flame  rapidly,  it  is  almost  perfectly 
converted  into  dry  acid,  some  of  which  is  thrown  up 
by  the  force  of  the  combustion,  and  the  rest  remains 
upon  the  supporter. 

This  substance  has  also  been  acidified  by  the  direct 
application  of  oxygen  gas  passed  through  hot  water 
in  which  the  phosphorus  was  liquefied  or  fused. 

The  general  characters  of  phosphoric  acid  are:  1. 
It  is  soluble  in  water  in  all  proportions,  producing  a 
specific  gravity,  which  increases  as  the  quantity  of  acid 
is  greater,  but  does  not  exceed  2.687,  which  is  that  of 
the  glacial  acid.  2.  It  produces  heat  when  mixed  with 
water,  though  not  very  considerable.  3.  It  has  no 
smell  when  pure,  and  its  taste  is  sour,  but  not  corro- 
sive. 4.  When  perfectly  dry,  it  sublimes  in  close  ves- 
sels ; but  loses  this  property  by  the  addition  of  water; 
in  which  circumstance  it  greatly  differs  from  the  bora- 
cic  acid,  which  is  fixed  when  dry,  but  rises  by  the  help 
of  water.  5.  When  considerably  diluted  with  water, 
and  evaporated,  the  aqueous  vapour  carries  up  a small 
portion  of  the  acid.  6.  With  charcoal  or  inflammable 
matter,  in  a strong  heat,  it  loses  its  oxygen,  and  be- 
comes converted  into  phosphorus. 

Phosphoric  acid  is  difficult  of  crystallizing. 

Though  the  phosphoric  acid  is  scarcely  corrosive, 
yet,  when  concentrated,  it  acts  upon  oils,  which  it  dis 
colours,  and  at  length  blackens,  producing  heat,  and  a 
strong  smell  like  that  of  ether  and  oil  of  turpentine ; 
but  does  not  form  a true  acid  soap.  It  has  most  effect 
on  essential  oils,  less  on  drying  oils,  and  least  of  all  on 
fat  oils.  Spirit  of  wine  and  phosphoric  acid  have  a 
weak  action  on  each  other.  Some  heat  is  excited  by 
this  mixture,  and  the  product  which  comes  over  in  dis- 
tillation of  the  mixture  is  strongly  acid,  of  a pungent 
arsenical  smell,  inflammable  with  smoke,  missible  in 
all  proportions  with  water,  precipitating  silver  and 
mercury  from  their  solutions,  but  not  gold ; and  al- 
though not  an  ether,  yet  it  seems  to  be  an  approxima 
tion  to  that  kind  of  combination. 

Phosphoric  acid,  united  with  barytes , produces  an 
insoluble  salt,  in  the  form  of  a heavy  white  powder, 
fusible  at  a high  temoerature  into  a gray  enamel.  The 

175 


PHO 


PHO 


best  mode  of  preparing  it  is  by  adding  an  alkaline  phos- 
phate to  the  nitrate  or  muriate  of  barytes. 

The  phosphate  of  strontian  differs  from  the  preced- 
ing in  being  soluble  in  an  excess  of  its  acid. 

Phosphate  of  lime  is  very  abundant  in  the  native 
state. 

The  phosphate  of  lime  is  very  difficult  to  fuse,  but 
in  a glasshouse  furnace  it  softens,  and  acquires  the  se- 
mi-transparency and  grain  of  porcelain.  It  is  insolu- 
ble in  water,  but  when  well  calcined,  forms  a kind  of 
paste  with  it,  as  in  making  cupels.  Besides  this  use  of 
it,  it  is  employed  for  polishing  gems  and  metals,  for  ab- 
sorbing grease  from  cloth,  linen,  or  paper,  and  for  pre- 
paring phosphorus.  In  medicine  it  has  been  strongly 
recommended  against  the  rickets  by  Dr.  Bonhomme  of 
Avignon,  either  alone  or  combined  with  phosphate  of 
soda.  The  burnt  hartshorn  of  the  shops  is  a phosphate 
of  lime. 

An  acidulous  phosphate  of  lime  is  found  in  human 
urine,  and  may  be  crystallized  in  small  silky  filaments, 
or  shining  scales,  which  unite  together  into  something 
like  the  consistence  of  honey,  and  have  a perceptibly 
acid  taste.  It  may  be  prepared  by  partially  decom- 
posing the  calcareous  phosphate  of  bones  by  the  sul- 
phuric, nitric,  or  muriatic  acid,  or  by  dissolving  that 
phosphate  in  phosphoric  acid.  It  is  soluble  in  water, 
and  crystallizable.  Exposed  to  the  action  of  heat,  it 
softens,  liquefies,  swells  up,  becomes  dry,  and  may  be 
fused  into  a transparent  glass,  which  is  insipid,  insolu- 
ble, and  unalterable  in  the  air.  In  these  characters  it 
differs  from  the  glacial  acid  of  phosphorus.  It  is  partly 
decomposable  by  charcoal,  so  as  to  afford  phosphorus. 

The  phosphate  of  potass  a is  very  deliquescent,  and 
not  crystallizable,  but  condensing  into  a kind  of  jelly. 
Like  the  preceding  species,  it  first  undergoes  the  aque- 
ous fusion,  swells,  dries,  and  may  be  fused  into  a glass ; 
but  this  glass  deliquesces.  It  has  a sweetish  saline 
taste. 

The  phosphate  of  soda  was  first  discovered  com- 
bined with  ammonia  in  urine,  by  Schockwitz,  and  was 
called  fusible  or  microcosmic  salt.  Margraft' obtained 
it  alone  by  lixiviating  the  residuum  left  after  preparing 
phosphorus  from  this  triple  salt  and  charcoal.  Haupt, 
who  first  discriminated  the  two,  gave  the  phosphate  of 
soda  the  name  of  sal  mirabile  perlatum.  Rouelle  very 
properly  announced  it  to  be  a compound  of  soda  and 
phosphoric  acid.  Bergman  considered  it,  or  rather  the 
acidulous  phosphate,  as  a peculiar  acid,  and  gave  it  the 
name  of  perlate  acid.  Guyton-Morveau  did  the  same, 
but  distinguished  it  by  the  name  of  ouretic : at  length 
Klaproth  ascertained  its  real  nature  to  be  "as  Bouelle 
had  affirmed. 

This  phosphate  is  now  commonly  prepared  by  adding 
to  the  acidulous  phosphate  of  lime  as  much  carbonate 
of  soda  in  solution  as  will  fully  saturate  the  acid.  The 
carbonate  of  lime  which  precipitates,  being  separated 
by  filtration,  the  liquid  is  duly  evaporated  so  as  to  crys- 
tallize the  phosphate  of  soda;  but  if  there  be  not  a 
t slight  excess  of  alkali,  the  crystals  will  not  be  large  and 
regular.  Funcke,  of  Linz,  recommends,  as  a more 
economical  and  expeditious  mode,  to  saturate  the  ex- 
cess of  lime  in  calcined  bones  by  dilute  sulphuric  acid, 
and  dissolve  the  phosphate  of  lime  that  remains  in 
nitric  acid.  To  this  solution  he  adds  afi  equal  quan- 
tity of  sulphate  of  soda,  and  recovers  the  nitric  acid  by 
distillation.  He  then  separates  the  phosphate  of  soda 
from  sulphate  of  lime  by  elutriation  and  crystallization, 
as  usual.  The  crystals  are  rhomboidal  prisms  of  dif- 
ferent shapes ; efflorescent ; soluble  in  3 parts  of  cold, 
and  li  of  hot  water.  They  are  capable  of  being  fused 
into  an  opaque  white  glass,  which  may  be  again  dis- 
solved and  crystallized.  It  may  be  converted  into  an 
acidulous  phosphate  by  an  addition  of  acid,  or  by  either 
of  the  strong  acids,  which  partially,  but  not  wholly, 
decompose  it.  As  its  taste  is  simply  saline,  without 
any  thing  disagreeable,  it  is  much  used  as  a purgative, 
chiefly  in  broth,  in  which  it  is  not  distinguishable  from 
common  salt.  For  this  elegant  addition  to  our  phar- 
maceutical preparations,  we  are  indebted  to  Dr.  Pear- 
son. In  assays  with  the  blow-pipe  it  is  of  great  utility ; 
and  it  has  been  used  instead  of  borax  for  soldering. 

The  phosphateof  ammonia  crystallizes  in  prisms  with 
four  regular  sides,  terminating  in  pyramids,  and  some- 
times in  bundles  of  small  needles.  Its  taste  is  cool, 
saline,  pungent,  and  urinous.  On  the  fire  it  comports 
itself  like  the  preceding  species,  except  that  the  whole 
of  its  base  may  be  driven  off  by  a continuance  of  the 
176 


heat,  leaving  only  the  acid  behind.  It  is  but  little  more 
soluble  in  hot  water  than  in  cold,  which  takes  up  a 
fourth  of  its  weight.  It  is  pretty  abundant  in  human 
urine,  particularly  after  it  has  become  putrid.  It  is  an 
excellent  flux  both  for  assays  and  the  blow-pipe,  and  in 
the  fabrication  of  coloured  glass  and  artificial  gems. 

Phosphate  of  magnesia  crystallizes  in  irregular 
hexahedral  prisms,  obliquely  truncated;  but  is  com 
monly  pulverulent,  as  it  effloresces  very  quickly.  It 
requires  fifty  parts  of  water  to  dissolve  it.  Its  taste  is 
cool  and  sweetish.  This  salt  too  is  found  in  urine. 

An  ammoniaco-magnesian  phosphate  has  been  dis- 
covered in  an  intestinal  calculus  of  a horse  by  Four 
croy,  and  since  by  Bartholdi,  and  likewise  by  the  for- 
mer, in  some  human  urinary  calculi. 

The  phosphate  of  glucine  has  been  examined  by 
Vauquelin,  who  informs  us,  that  it  is  a white  powder, 
or  mucilaginous  mass,  without  any  perceptible  taste ; 
fusible  but  not  decomposable  by  heat ; unalterable  in 
the  air,  and  insoluble  unless  in  an  excess  of  its  acid. 

It  has  been  observed,  that  the  phosphoric  acid, 
aided  by  heat,  acts  upon  silex ; and  we  may  add,  that 
it  enters  into  many  artificial  gems  in  the  state  of  a 
silicious  phosphate.” — Ure’s  Chemical  Dictionary. 

PHOSPHORITE.  A subspecies  of  apatite.  1.  Com- 
mon phosphorite.  This  is  of  a yellowish  white  colour, 
when  rubbed  in  an  iron  mortar,  or  thrown  on  red-hot 
coals.  It  emits  a green-coloured  phosphoric  light.  It 
is  found  in  Estremadura,  in  Spain. 

2.  Earthy  phosphorite.  Of  a grayish  white  colour, 
and  consists  of  dull  dusty  particles,  which  phospho- 
resce on  glowing  coals._  It  is  found  in  Hungary. 

PHOSPHOROUS  ACID.  Acidum  phosphorosum. 
“ This  acid  was  discovered  in  1812  by  Sir  H.  Davy. 
When  phosphorus  and  corrosive  sublimate  act  on 
each  other  at  an  elevated  temperature,  a liquid  called 
protochloride  of  phosphorus  is  formed.  Water  added 
to  this,  resolves  it  into  muriatic  and  phosphorous  acids. 
A moderate  heat  suffices  to  expel  the  former,  and  the 
latter  remains  associated  with  water.  It  has  a very 
sour  taste,  reddens  vegetable  bluee,  and  neutralizes 
bases.  When  heated  strongly  in  open  vessels,  it  in- 
flames. Phospburetted  hydrogen  flies  off,  and  phos- 
phoric acid  remains.  Ten  parts  of  it  heated  in  close 
vessels  give  off  one-half  of  bihydroguret  of  phosphorus, 
and  leave  8£  of  phosphoric  acid.  Hence  the  liquid  acid 
consists  of  80.7  acid  -j-  19.3  water.  Its  prime  equiva- 
lent is  2.5.” 

PHOSPHORUS.  (From  <f>w j,  light,  and  <pep<o , to 
carry.)  Autophosphorus.  A simple  substance  which 
has  never  been  found  pure  in  nature.  It  is  always 
met  with  united  to  oxygen,  or  in  the  state  of  phosphoric 
acid.  In  that  state  it  exists  very  plentifully,  and  is 
united  to  different  animal,  vegetable,  and  mineral  sub- 
stances. 

“ If  phosphoric  acid  be  mixed  with  l-5th  of  its  weight 
of  powdered  charcoal,  and  the  mixture  distilled  at  a 
moderate  red  heat,  in  a coated  earthen  retort,  whose 
beak  is  partially  immersed  in  a basin  of  water,  drops 
of  a waxy-looking  substance  will  pass  over,  and,  fall- 
ing into  the  water,  will  concrete  into  the  solid  called 
phosphorus.  It  must  be  purified,  by  straining  it  through 
a piece  of  chamois  leather,  under  warm  water.  It  is 
yellow  and  semitransparent.  It  is  as  soft  as  wax,  but 
fully  more  cohesive  and  ductile,  ’its  sp.  gr.  is  1.77. 
It  melts  at  90°  F.  and  boils  at  550°. 

In  the  atmosphere,  at  common  temperatures,  it  emits 
a white  smoke,  which,  in  the  dark,  appears  luminous. 
This  smoke  is  acidulous,  and  results  from  the  slow 
oxygenation  of  the  phosphorus'.  In  air  perfectly  dry, 
however,  phosphorus  does  not  smoke,  because  the  acid 
which  is  formed  is  solid,  and,  closely  incasing  the  com- 
bustible, screens  it  from  the  atmospherical  oxygen. 

When  phosphorus  is  heated  in  the  air  to  about  148°, 
it  takes  fire,  and  burns  with  a splendid  white  light, 
and  a copious  dense  smoke.  If  the  combustion  take 
place  within  a large  glass  receiver,  the  smoke  becomes 
condensed  into  snowy  looking  particles,  which  fall  in 
a successive  showier,  coating  the  bottom  plate  with 
a spongy  efflorescence  of  phosphoric  acid.  This  acid 
snow  soon  liquefies  by  the  absorption  of  aqueous  va- 
pour from  the  air. 

When  phosphorus  is  inflamed  in  oxygen,  the  light 
and  heat  are  incomparably  more  intense ; the  former 
dazzling  the  eye,  and  the  latter  cracking  the  glass  ves- 
sel. Solid  phosphoric  acid  results ; consisting  of  1.5 
phosphorus  4-  2.0  oxvgen. 


PHO 


PHD 


When  phosphorus  is  heated  in  highly  rarefied  air, 
three  products  are  formed  from  it : one  is  phosphoric 
acid  ; one  is  a volatile  white  powder  ; and  the  third  is 
a red  solid  of  comparative  fixity,  requiring  a heat  above 
that  of  boiling  water  for  its  fusion.  The  volatile  sub- 
stance is  soluble  in  water,  imparting  acid  properties  to 
it.  It  seems  to  be  phosphorous  acid.  The  red  sub- 
stance is  probably  an  oxide  of  phosphorus,  since,  for 
its  conversion  into  phosphoric  acid  it  requires  less 
oxygen  than  phosphorus  does.  See  Phosphoric , Phos- 
phorous, and  Hypophosphorous  Acids. 

Phosphorus  and  chlorine  combine  with  great  facili- 
ty, when  brought  in  contact  with  each  other  at  common 
temperatures. 

1.  When  chlorine  is  introduced  into  a retort  ex- 
hausted of  air,  and  containing  phosphorus,  the  phos- 
phorus takes  fire,  and  burns  with  a pale  flame,  throw- 
ing off  sparks  ; while  a white  substance  rises  and  con- 
denses on  the  sides  of  the  vessel. 

If  the  chlorine  be  in  considerable  quantity,  as  much  as 
12  cubic  inches  to  a grain  of  phosphorus,  the  latter  will 
entirely  disappear,  and  nothing  but  the  white  powder 
will  be  formed,  into  which  about  9 cubic  inches  of  the 
chlorine  will  be  condensed.  No  new  gaseous  matter 
is  produced. 

The  powder  is  a compound  of  phosphorus  and  chlo- 
rine, first  described  as  a peculiar  body  by  Sir  H.  Davy 
in  1810  ; and  various  analytical  and  synthetical  experi- 
ments which  he  made  with  it,  prove  that  it  consists  of 
about  1 phosphorus,  and  6.8  chlorine  in  weight.  It  is 
the  bichloride  of  phosphorus. 

Its  properties  are  very  peculiar.  It  is  snow-  white, 
extremely  volatile,  rising  in  a gaseous  form  at  a tem- 
perature much  below  that  of  boiling  water.  Under 
pneumatic  pressure  it  may  be  fused,  and  then  it  crystal- 
lizes in  transparent  prisms. 

It  acts  violently  on  water,  decomposing  it,  whence 
result  the  phosphoric  and  muriatic  acids  ; the  former 
from  the  combination  of  the  phosphorus  with  the 
oxygen,  and  the  latter  from  that  of  the  chlorine  with 
the  hydrogen  of  the  water.  It  produces  flame  when 
exposed  to  a lighted  taper.  If  it  be  transmitted 
through  an  ignited  glass  tube,  along  with  oxygen,  it  is 
decomposed,  and  phosphoric  acid  and  chlorine  are  ob- 
tained. The  superior  fixity  of  the  acid  above  the  chlo- 
ride, seems  to  give  that  ascendancy  of  attraction  to  the 
oxygen  here,  which  the  chlorine  possesses  in  most  other 
cases.  Dry  litmus  paper  exposed  to  its  vapour  in  a 
vessel  exhausted  of  air,  is  reddened.  When  introduced 
into  a vessel  containing  ammonia,  a combination  takes 
place,  accompanied  with  much  heat,  and  there  results 
a compound,  insoluble  in  water,  undecomposable  by 
acid  or  alkaline  solutions,  and  possessing  characters 
analogous  to  earths. 

2.  The  protochloride  of  phosphorus  was  first  obtained 
in  a pure  state  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  in  the  year  1809.  If 
phosphorus  be  sublimed  through  corrosive  sublimate, 
in  powder  in  a glass  tube,  a limpid  fluid  comes  over  as 
clear  as  water,  and  having  a specific  gravity  of  1.45. 
It  emits  acid  fumes  when  exposed  to  the  air,  by  decom- 

osing  the  aqueous  vapour.  If  paper,  imbued  with  it, 
e exposed  to  the  air,  it  becomes  acid  without  inflam- 
mation. It  does  not  redden  dry  litmus  paper  plunged 
into  it.  Its  vapour  burns  in  the  flame  of  a candle. 
When  mixed  with  water,  and  heated,  muriatic  acid 
flies  oflT,  and  phosphorous  acid  remains.  If  it  be  intro- 
duced into  a vessel  containing  chlorine,  it  is  converted 
into  the  bichloride ; and  if  made  to  act  upon  ammonia, 
phosphorus  is  produced,  and  the  same  earthy-like  com- 
pound results  as  that  formed  by  the  bichloride  and 
ammonia. 

The  compounds  of  iodine  and  phosphorus  have  been 
examined  by  Sir  H.  Davy  and  Gay  Lussac. 

Phosphorus  unites  to  iodine  with  the  disengagement 
of  heat,  but  no  light.  One  part  of  phosphorus  and 
eight  of  iodine  form  a compound  of  a red  orange-brown 
colour,  fusible  at  about  212°,  and  volatile  at  a higher 
temperature. 

One  part  of  phosphorus  and  16  of  iodine  produce  a 
crystalline  matter  of  a grayish-black  colour,  fusible 
at  84°. 

One  part  of  phosphorus,  and  24  of  iodine,  produce  a 
black  substance  partially  fusible  at  115°. 

Phosphuretted  hydrogen.  Of  this  compound  there 
are  two  varieties ; one  consisting  of  a prime  of  each 
constituent,  and  therefore  to  be  called  phosphuretted 
hydrogen  ; another,  in  which  the  relation  of  phospho- 

Tt 


rus  is  one  half  less,  to  be  called  therefore  subphosptm 
retted  hydrogen. 

1.  Phosphuretted  hydrogen.  Into  a small  retort 
filled  with  milk  of  lime,  or  potassa  water,  let  some 
fragments  of  phosphorus  be  introduced,  and  let  the 
heat  of  an  Argand  flame  be  applied  to  the  bottom  of 
the  retort,  while  its  beak  is  immersed  in  the  water  of  a 
pneumatic  trough.  Bubbles  of  gas  will  come  over, 
which  explode  spontaneously  with  contact  of  air.  It 
may  also  be  procured  by  the  action  of  dilute  muriatic 
acid  on  pliosphuret  of  lime.  In  order  to  obtain  the  gas 
pure,  however,  we  must  receive  it  over  mercury.  Its 
smell  is  very  disagreeable.  Its  sp.  grav.  is  0.9022.  100 
cubic  inches  weigh  27.5  gr.  In  oxygen,  it  inflames 
with  a brilliant  white  fight.  In  common  air,  when  the 
gaseous  bubble  bursts  the  film  of  water,  and  explodes, 
there  rises  up  a ring  of  white  smoke,  luminous  in  the 
dark.  Water  absorbs  about  l-40th  of  its  bulk  of  this 
gas,  and  acquires  a yellow  colour,  a bitter  taste,  and 
the  characteristic  smell  of  the  gas.  When  brought  in 
contact  with  chlorine  it  detonates  with  a brilliant  green 
light ; but  the  products  have  never  been  particularly 
examined. 

2.  Subphosphuretted  hydrogen.  It  was  discovered 
by  Sir  H.  Davy  in  1812.  When  the  crystalline  hydrate 
of  phosphorous  acid  is  heated  in  a retort  out  of  the 
contact  of  air,  solid  phosphoric  acid  is  formed,  and  a 
large  quantity  of  subphosphuretted  hydrogen  is  evolved. 
Its  smell  is  foetid,  but  not  so  disagreeably  so  as  that  of 
the  preceding  gas.  It  does  not  spontaneously  explode 
like  it  with  oxygen ; but  at  a temperature  of  300°  a 
violent  detonation  takes  place.  In  chlorine  it  explodes 
with  a white  flame.  Water  absorbs  one-eighth  of  its 
volume  of  this  gas. 

It  is  probable  that  phosphuretted  hydrogen  gas  some- 
times contains  the  subphosphuret  and  common  hydro 
gen  mixed  with  it. 

‘ There  is  not,  perhaps,’  says  Sir  H.  Davy, 1 in  the 
whole  series  of  chemical  phenomena,  a more  beautiful 
illustration  of  the  theory  of  definite  proportions,  than 
that  offered  in  the  decomposition  of  liydrophosphoroua 
acid  into  phosphoric  acid,  and  hydrophosphoric  gas. 

‘ Four  proportions  of  the  acid  contain  four  propor- 
tions of  phosphorus  and  four  of  oxygen ; two  propor- 
tions of  water  contain  four  proportions  of  hydrogen 
and  two  of  oxygen  (all  by  volume.)  The  six  propor- 
tions of  oxygen  unite  to  three  proportions  of  phospho- 
rus to  form  three  of  phosphoric  acid,  and  the  four  pro- 
portions of  hydrogen  combine  with  one  of  phosphorus 
to  form  one  proportion  of  hydrophosphoric  gas  (that  is, 
subphosphuretted  hydrogen) ; and  there  are  no  other 
products.' — Elements , p.  297. 

Phosphorus  and  sulphur  are  capable  of  combining. 
They  may  be  united  by  inciting  them  together  in  a tube 
exhausted  of  air,  or  under  water.  In  this  last  case, 
they  must  be  used  in  small  quantities ; as,  at  the  mo- 
ment of  their  action,  water  is  decomposed,  sometimes 
with  explosions.  They  unite  in  many  proportions. 
The  most  fusible  compound  is  that  of  one  and  a half 
of  sulphur  to  two  of  phosphorus.  This  remains  liquid 
at  40°  Fahrenheit.  When  solid,  its  colour  is  yellowish- 
white.  It  is  more  combustible  than  phosphorus,  and 
distils  undecompounded  at  a strong  heat.  Had  it 
consisted  of  2 sulphur — 3 phosphorus,  we  should  have 
had  a definite  compound  of  1 prime  of  the  first — 2 of 
the  second  constituent.  This  proportion  forms  the 
best  composition  for  phosphoric  fire-matches  or  bottles. 
A particle  of  it  attached  to  a brimstone  match,  inflames 
when  gently  rubbed  against  a surface  of  cork  or  wood. 
An  oxide  made  by  heating  phosphorus  in  a narrow- 
mouthed phial  with  an  ignited  wire,  answers  the  same 
purpose.  The  phial  must  be  kept  closely  corked,  other- 
wise phosphorous  acid  is  speedily  formed. 

Phosphorus  is  soluble  in  oils,  and  communicates  to 
them  the  property  of  appearing  luminous  in  the  dark. 
Alkohol  and  ether  also  dissolve  it,  but  more  spa- 
ringly.” 

The  earliest  account  we  have  concerning  the  medi- 
cinal use  of  phosphorus,  is  in  the  seventh  volume  of 
Haller’s  Collection  of  Theses,  relating  to  the  history 
and  cure  of  diseases.  The  original  dissertation  is  en- 
titled, De  Phosphori  Loco  Medicamenti  adsumpti  vir- 
tute  medica , aliquot  casibus  singularibus  conjirmata , 
Auctore  J.  Gabi  Mentz.  There  are  three  cases  of  sin- 
gular cures  performed  by  means  of  phosphorus,  nar- 
rated in  this  thesis;  the  history  of  these  cases  and 
cures  was  sent  to  Dr.  Gabi  Mentz,  by  his  father. 

177 


PHR 


PHR 

The  first  instance  is  of  a man  who  laboured  under  a 
putrid  fever. 

The  second,  is  that  of  a man  who  laboured  under  a 
bilious  fever. 

The  third  case  is  entitled  a malignant  catarrhal  fever, 
with  petechiae. 

The  dangerous  consequences  which  are  likely  to 
follow  the  injudicious  administration  of  phosphorus 
cannot  be  impressed  on  the  mind  more  strongly  than 
by  reading  the  cases  and  experiments  which  are  men- 
tioned by  Weickard,  in  the  fourth  part  of  his  miscella- 
neous writings,  (Vermischte  Medicineche  Schrifften, 
von  M.  A.  Weickard.) 

PHOSPHURET.  ( Phosphuretum , from  phosphorus.) 

A combination  of  phosphorus,  with  a combustible  or 
metallic  oxide. 

Phosphurettcd  hydrogen.  See  Phosphorus. 
PHOSPHURETUM.  See  Phosphuret. 

PHOTICITE.  A mixture  of  the  silicate  and  carbo- 
silicate  of  manganese. 

PHOTOPHO'BIA.  (From  </>wf,  light,  and  (poBeui , to 
dread.)  Such  an  intolerance  of  light,  that  the  eye,  or 
rather  the  retina,  can  scarcely  bear  its  irritating  rays. 
Such  patients  generally  wink,  or  close  their  eyes  in 
light,  which  they  cannot  bear  without  exquisite  pain, 
or  confused  vision.  The  proxknate  cause  is  too  great 
a sensibility  in  the  retina.  The  species  are, 

1.  Photophobia  inflammatoria , or  dread  of  light  from 
an  inflammatory  cause,  which  is  a particular  symptom 
of  the  internal  ophthalmia. 

2.  Photophobia , from  the  disuse  of  light,  which  hap- 
pens to  persons  long  confined  in  dark  places  or  prisons  ; 
on  the  coming  out  of  which  into  light  the  pupil  con- 
tracts, and  the  persons  cannot  bear  light.  The  depres- 
sion of  the  cataract  occasions  this  symptom,  which  ap- 
pears as  though  fire  and  lightning  entered  the  eye,  not 
being  able  to  bear  the  strong  rays  of  light. 

3.  Photophobia  nervea,  or  a nervous  photophobia, 
which  arises  from  an  increased  sensibility  of  the  ner- 
vous expansion  and  optic  nerve.  It  is  a symptom  of 
the  hydrophobia,  and  many  disorders,  both  acute  and 
nervous. 

4.  Photophobia , from  too  great  light,  as  looking  at  the 
sun,  or  at  the  strong  light  of  modern  lamps. 

PHOTO'PSIA.  (Front  0o>s,  light,  and  o^tj,  vision.) 
Lucid  vision.  An  affection  of  the  eye  in  which  the 
patient  perceives  luminous  rays,  ignited  lines,  or  co- 
ruscations. 

Piira'gmus.  (From  <f>paoa w,  to  enclose,  or  fence:  so 
called  from  their  being  set  round  like  a fence  of  stakes.) 
The  rows  of  teeth. 

PHRE'NES.  ( Phren , from  (f>prjv,  the  mind ; because 
the  ancients  imagined  it  was  the  seat  of  the  mind  ) 
The  diaphragm. 

PHRENE'SIS.  See  Phrenitis. 

PHRENIC.  ( Phrenicus  ; from  </>peves,  the  dia- 

phragm.) Belonging  to  the  diaphragm. 

Phrenic  artery.  The  arteries  going  to  the  dia- 
phragm. 

Phrenic  nerve.  Diaphragmatic  nerve.  It  arises 
from  a union  of  the  branches  of  the  third,  fourth,  and 
fifth  cervical  pairs,  on  each  side,  passes  between  the 
clavicle  and  subclavian  artery,  and  descends  from 
thence  by  the  pericardium  to  the  diaphragm. 

Phrenic  vein.  The  veins  coming  from  the  dia- 
phragm. 

PIIRENICA.  ( Phrenicus  ; from  (J>pr]v,  the  mind, 
or  intellect.)  The  name  of  the  first  order  of  diseases 
of  the  class  J\Teurotica,  in  Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases 
affecting  the  intellect.  Its  genera  are,  Ecphoronia ; 
Empathema  ; Alusia ; Aphlexia ; Paroniria ; Moria. 

PHRENI'TIS.  ( Phrenitis , idis.  f.  <$>peviris  ; from 
(pprjv,  the  mind.)  Phrenesis  : Phrenetiasis ; Plirenis- 
mus  ; Cephalitis  ; Sphacelismus  ; Cephalalgia  in- 
flammatoria. By  the  Arabians,  karabitus.  Phrenzy 
or  inflammation  of  the  brain.  A genus  of  disease  in 
the  Class  Pyrexia,  and  Order  Phlegmasia , of  Cullen ; 
characterized  by  strong  fever,  violent  headache,  red- 
ness of  the  face  and  eyes,  impatience  of  light  and  noise, 
watchfulness,  and  furious  delirium.  It  is  symptomatic 
of  several  diseases,  as  worms,  hydrophobia,  &c.  Phre- 
nitis often  makes  its  attacks  with  a sense  of  fulness  in 
the  head,  flushing  of  the  countenance,  and  redness  of 
the  eyes,  the  pulse  being  full,  but  in  other  respects  na- 
tural. As  these  symptoms  increase,  the  patient  be- 
comes restless,  his  sleep  is  disturbed,  or  wholly  for- 
sakes him.  It  sometimes  comes  on,  as  in  the  epidemic, 
178 


of  which  Saalman  gives  an  account,  with  pain,  or  a 
peculiar  sense  of  uneasiness  of  the  head,  back,  loins, 
and  joints ; in  some  cases,  with  tremor  of  the  limbsy 
and  intolerable  pains  of  the  hands,  feet,  and  legs.  It 
now  and  then  attacks  with  stupor  and  rigidity  of  the 
whole  body,  sometimes  with  anxiety  and  a sense  of 
tension  referred  to  the  breast,  often  accompanied  with 
palpitation  of  the  heart.  Sometimes  nausea  and  a 
painful  sense  of  weight  in  the  stomach,  are  among  the 
earliest  symptoms.  In  other  cases,  the  patient  is  at- 
tacked with  vomiting,  or  complains  of  the  heart  burn, 
and  griping  pains  in  the  bowels.  When  the  intimate 
connexion  which  subsists  between  the  brain  and  every 
part  of  the  system  is  considered,  the  variety  of  the 
symptoms  attending  the  commencement  of  phrenitis  is 
not  so  surprising,  nor  that  the  stomach  in  particular 
should  suffer,  which  so  remarkably  sympathizes  with 
the  brain.  These  symptoms  assist  in  forming  the  diag- 
nosis between  phrenitis  and  synocha.  The  pain  of 
the  head  soon  becomes  more  considerable,  and  some- 
times very  acute.  “ If  the  meninges,”  says  Dr.  For- 
dyce,  “ are  affected,  the  pain  is  acute ; if  the  substance 
only,  obtuse,  and  sometimes  but  just  sensible.”  And 
Dr.  Cullen  remarks,  “ 1 am  here,  as  in  other  analogous 
cases,  of  opinion,  that  the  symptoms  above  mentioned 
of  an  acute  inflammation,  always  mark  inflammations 
of  membraneous  parts,  and  that  an  inflammation  of 
parenchyma,  or  substance  of  viscera,  exhibits,  at  least 
commonly,  a more  chronic  inflammation.” 

The  seat  of  the  pain  is  various : sometimes  it  seems 
to  occupy  the  whole  head ; sometimes,  although  more 
circumscribed,  it  is  deep-seated,  and  ill-defined.  Ia 
other  cases,  it  is  felt  principally  in  the  forehead  or  oc- 
ciput. The  redness  of  the  face  and  eyes  generally  in- 
creases with  the  pain,  and  there  is  often  a sense  of 
heat  and  throbbing  in  the  head,  the  countenance  ac- 
quiring a peculiar  fierceness.  These  symptoms,  for  the 
most  part,  do  not  last  long  before  the  patient  begins  to 
talk  incoherently,  and  to  show  other  marks  of  delirium 
Sometimes,  however,  Saalman  observes,  delirium  did 
not  come  on  till  the  fifth,  sixth,  or  seventh  day.  The 
delirium  gradually  increases,  till  it  often  arrives  at  a 
state  of  phrenzy.  The  face  becomes  turgid,  the  eyes 
stare,  and  seem  as  if  bursting  from  their  sockets,  tears, 
and  sometimes  even  blood,  flowing  from  them  : the  pa-  • 
tient,  in  many  cases,  resembling  a furious  maniac,  from 
whom  it  is  often  impossible  to  distinguish  him,  except 
by  the  shorter  duration  of  his  complaint  The  delirium 
assists  in  distinguishing  phrenitis  and  synocha,  as  it  is 
not  a common  symptom  in  the  latter.  When  delirium 
(Jpes  attend  synocha,  however,  it  is  of  the  same  kind  as 
in  phrenitis. 

We  should,  a priori,  expect  in  phrenitis  considerable 
derangement  in  the  different  organs  of  sense,  which  so 
immediately  depend  on  the  state  of  the  brain.  The 
eyes  are  incapable  of  bearing  the  light,  and  false  vision, 
particularly  that  termed  musca  volitantes,  and  flashes 
of  light  seeming  to  dart  before  the  eyes,  are  frequent 
symptoms.  The  hearing  is  often  so  acute,  that  the 
least  noise  is  intolerable : sometimes,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  patient  becomes  deaf ; and  the  deafness, 
Saalman  observes,  and  morbid  acuteness  of  hearing, 
sometimes  alternate.  Affections  of  the  smell,  taste, 
and  touch,  are  less  observable. 

As  the  organs  of  sense  are  not  frequently  deranged 
in  synocha,  the  foregoing  symptoms  farther  assist  the 
diagnosis  between  this  complaint  and  phrenitis. 

The  pulse  is  not  always  so  much  disturbed  at  an 
earlier  period,  as  we  should  expect  from  the  violence 
of  the  other  symptoms,  compared  with  what  we  ob- 
serve in  idiopathic  fevers.  When  this  circumstance  is 
distinctly  marked,  it  forms,  perhaps,  the  best  diagnosis 
between  phrenitis  and  synocha,  and  gives  to  phrenitis 
more  of  the  appearance  of  mania.  In  many  cases, 
however,  the  fever  runs  as  high  as  the  delirium ; then 
the  case  often  almost  exactly  resembles  a case  of  vio- 
lent synocha,  from  which  it  is  the  more  difficult  to  dis 
tinguish  it  if  the  pulse  be  full  and  strong.  In  general, 
however,  the  hardness  is  more  remarkable  than  in 
synocha,  and  in  many  cases  the  pulse  is  small  and  hard, 
which  may  be  regarded  as  one  of  the  best  diagnostics 
between  the  two  complaints,  the  pulse  in  synocha 
being  alwavs  strong  and  full.  In  phrenitis  it  is  some- 
times, though  rarely,  intermitting.  The  respiration  is 
generally  deep  and  slow,  sometimes  difficult,  now  and 
then  interrupted  with  hiccough,  seldom  hurried  and 
frequent ; a very  unfavourable  symptom.  In  manv  of 


pHrr 


priR 

the  Cases  mentioned  by  Saalman,  pneumonia  super- 
vened. 

The  deglutition  is  often  difficult,  sometimes  convul- 
sive. The  stomach  is  frequently  oppressed  with  bile, 
which  is  an  unfavourable  symptom  ; and  complete 
jaundice,  the  skin  and  urine  being  tinged  yellow,  some- 
times supervenes.  Worms  in  the  stomach  and  bowels 
are  also  frequent  attendants  on  phrenitis,  and  there  is 
reason  to  believe,  may  have  a share  in  producing  it. 
The  hydrocephalus  internus,  which  is  more  allied  to 
phrenitis  than  dropsy  of  the  brain,  properly  so  called, 
seems  often,  in  part  at  least,  to  arise  from  derange- 
ment of  the  prims  vise,  particularly  from  worms.  We 
cannot  otherwise  account  for  the  frequent  occurrence 
of  these  complaints. 

Instead  of  a superabundance  of  bile  in  the  primae 
viaj,  there  is  sometimes  a deficiency,  which  seems  to 
afford  even  a worse  prognosis.  The  alvine  faces  be- 
ing of  a white  colour,  and  a black  cloud  in  the  urine, 
are  regarded  by  Lobb  as  fatal  symptoms.  The  black 
cloud  in  the  urine  is  owing  to  an  admixture  of  blood  ; 
when  unmixed  with  blood,  it  is  generally  pale. 

There  is  often  a remarkable  tendency  to  the  worst 
species  of  haemorrhagies,  towards  the  fatal  termination 
of  phrenitis.  Haemorrhagy  from  the  eyes  has  already 
been  mentioned.  Haemorrhagy  from  the  intestines 
also,  tinging  the  stools  with  a black  colour,  is  not  un- 
common. These  haemorrhagies  are  never  favourable  ; 
but  the  haemorrhagies  characteristic  of  synocha,  parti- 
cularly that  from  the  nose,  sometimes  occur  at  an 
earlier  period,  and,  if  copious,  generally  bring  relief. 
More  frequently,  however,  blood  drops  slowly  from  the 
nose,  demonstrating  the  violence  of  the  disease,  with- 
out relieving  it.  In  other  cases,  there  is  a discharge  of 
thin  mucus  from  the  nose. 

Tremours  of  the  joints , convulsions  of  the  muscles 
of  the  face,  grinding  of  the  teeth,  the  face  from  being 
florid  suddenly  becoming  pale,  involuntary  tears,  a dis- 
charge of  mucus  from  the  nose,  the  urine  being  of  a 
dark  red  or  yellow  colour,  or  black,  or  covered  with  a 
pellicle,  the  faeces  being  either  bilious  or  white,  and 
very  foetid,  profuse  sweat  of  the  head,  neck,  and 
shoulders,  paralysis  of  the  tongue,  general  convulsions, 
much  derangement  of  the  internal  functions,  and  the 
symptoms  of  other  visceral  inflammations,  particularly 
of  the  pneumonia,  supervening,  are  enumerated  by 
Saalman  as  affording  the  most  unfavourable  prognosis. 
The  delirium  changing  to  coma,  the  pulse  at  the  same 
time  becoming  weak,  and  the  deglutition  difficult,  was 
generally  the  forerunner  of  death.  When,  on  the 
contrary,  there  is  a copious  haemorrhagy  from  the 
hffimorrhoidal  vessels,  from  the  lungs,  mouth,  or  even 
from  the  urinary  passages,  when  the  delirium  is  reliev- 
ed by  sleep,  and  the  patient  remembers  his  dreams, 
when  thb  sweats  are  free  and  general,  the  deafness  is 
diminished  or  removed,  and  the  febrile^  symptoms  be- 
come milder,  there  are  hopes  of  recovery. 

In  almost  all  diseases,  if  we  except  those  which  kill 
suddenly,  as  the  fatal  termination  approaches,  nearly 
the  same  train  of  symptoms  supervenes,  viz.  those  de- 
noting extreme  debility  of  all  the  functions.  Saalman 
remarks,  that  the  blood  did  not  always  show  the  buffy 
coat. 

Phrenitis,  like  most  other  complaints,  has  sometimes 
assumed  an  intermitting  form,  the  fits  coming  on  daily, 
sometimes  every  second  day.  When  phrenitis  termi- 
nates favourably,  the  typhus,  which  succeeds  the  in- 
creased excitement,  is  generally  less  in  proportion  to 
that  excitement,  than  in  idiopathic  fevers  ; a circum- 
stance which  assists  in  distinguishing  phrenitis  from 
synocha. 

The  imperfect  diagnosis  between  these  complaints  ia 
further  assisted  by  the  effects  of  the  remedies  employ 
ed.  For  in  phrenitis,  in  removing  the  delirium  and 
other  local  symptoms,  the  febrile  symptoms  in  general 
soon  abate.  Whereas  in  synocha,  although  'he  deli- 
rium and  headache  be  removed,  yet  the  pulse  conti- 
nues frequent,  and  other  marks  of  indisposition  remain 
for  a much  longer  time. 

It  will  be  of  use  to  present,  at  one  view,  the  circum- 
stances which  form  the  diagnosis  between  phrenitis  and 
synocha. 

Synocha  generally  makes  its  attack  in  the  same  man- 
ner ; its  symptoms  are  few  and  little  varied.  The 
symptoms  at  the  commencement  of  phrenitis  are  often 
more  complicated,  and  differ  considerably  in  different 
eases.  Derangement  of  the  internal  functions  is  com- 


paratively rare  in  synocha.  In  phrenitis  it  almost 
constantly  attends,  and  often  appears  very  early.  The 
same  observation  applies  to  the  derangement  of  the 
organs  of  sense.  In  synocha,  the  pulse  from  the  com1 
mencement  is  frequent  and  strong.  In  phrenitis,  symp- 
toms, denoting  the  local  affection  often  become  consi- 
derable before  the  pulse  is  much  disturbed.  In  phre- 
nitis, we  have  seen  that  the  pulse  sometimes  very  sud- 
denly loses  its  strength,  the  worst  species  of  hamor- 
rhagies,  and  other  symptoms  denoting  extreme  debility, 
showing  themselves ; and  such  symptoms  aregenerally 
the  forerunners  of  death : but  that  when  the  termina- 
tion is  favourable,  the  degree  of  typhus  which  succeeds 
it  is  less  in  proportion  to  the  preceding  excitement  than 
in  synocha.  Lastly,  if  we  succeed  in  removing  the 
delirium  and  other  symptoms  affecting  the  head,  the 
state  of  the  fever  is  found  to  partake  of  this  favourable 
change  more  immediately  and  completely  than  in 
synocha,  where,  although  we  succeed  in  relieving  the 
headache  or  delirium,  the  fever  often  suffers  little 
abatement. 

With  regard  to  the  duration  of  phrenitis,  Eller  ob- 
serves, that  when  it  proves  fatal,  the  patient  generally 
dies  within  six  or  seven  days.  In  many  fatal  cases, 
however,  it  is  protracted  for  a longer  time,  especially 
where  the  remissions  have  been  considerable.  Upon 
the  whole,  however,  the  longer  it  is  protracted,  pro- 
viding the  symptoms  do  not  become  worse,  the  better 
is  the  prognosis. 

On  the  first  attack  of  the  disease  we  must  begin  by 
bleeding  the  patient  as  largely  as  his  strength  will  per- 
mit: it  may  be  productive  of  more  relief  to  the  head, 
where  the  patient  cannot  spare  much  blood,  if  the 
temporal  artery,  or  the  jugular  vein  be  opened ; and  in 
the  progress  of  the  complaint  occasional  cupping  or 
leeches  may  materially  assist  the  other  means  employ- 
ed. Active  cathartics  should  be  given  directly  after 
taking  blood,  calomel  with  jalap,  followed  by  some 
saline  compound  in  the  infusion  of  senna,  until  the 
bowels  are  copiously  evacuated.  The  head  should  be 
shaved,  and  kept  constantly  cool  by  some  evaporating 
lotion.  Antimonial  and  mercurial  preparations  may 
then  be  given  to  promote  the  several  discharges,  and 
diminish  arterial  action  : to  which  purpose  digitalis 
also  may  powerfully  concur.  Blisters  to  the  back  of 
the  neck,  behind  the  ears,  or  to  the  temples, .each  per- 
haps successively,  when  the  violence  of  the  disorder  is 
lessened  by  proper  evacuations,  may  contribute  very 
much  to  obviate  internal  mischief.  The  head  should 
be  kept  raised,  to  counteract  the  accumulation  of  blood 
there  ; and  the  antiphlogistic  regimen  must  be  observed 
in  the  fullest  extent.  Stimulating  the  extremities  by 
the  pediluvium,  sinapisms,  &c.  may  be  of  some  use  in 
the  decline  of  the  complaint,  where  an  irritable  state 
of  the  brain  appears. 

Phreneti'asis.  See  Phrenitis. 

PHRENSY.  See  Phrenitis. 

PHTHEIRI'ASIS.  (From  <pOup,  a louse.)  See 
Phthiriasis. 

Phthei'rium.  See  Phtheiroctonum. 

PHTHEIRO'CTONUM.  (From  <p&eipf  a louse,  and 
kteiv w,  to  kill ; because  it  destroys  lice.)  Phlhcirium. 
The  herb  Staves-acre.  See  Delphinium  staphisagriu. 

PHTHIRI'ASIS.  (From  Qdcipi  a louse.)  Morbus 
pediculosus  ; pediculatio ; phtheiriasis.  A disease  in 
which  several  parts  of  the  body  generate  lice,  which 
often  puncture  the  skin,  and  produce  little  sordid 
ulcers. 

PHTHISIS.  (From  <pdiu),  to  consume.)  Tabes  pvl- 
monalis.  Pulmonary  consumption.  A disease  repre- 
sented by  Dr.  Cullen  as  a sequel  of  hamioptysis : it  is 
known  by  emaciation,  debility,  cough,  hectic  fever,  and 
purulent  expectoration. 

Species:  1.  Phthisis  incipiens,  incipient,  without  an 
expectoration  of  pus. 

2.  Phthisis  humida , with  an  expectoration  of  pus. 

3.  Phthisis  strophulosa,  from  scrofulous  tubercles 
in  the  lungs,  &c. 

4.  Phthisis  hoemoptoica,  from  haemoptysis. 

5.  Phthisis  exanthematica,  from  exanthemata. 

6.  Phthisis  chlorolica , from  chlorosis. 

7.  Phthisis  syphilitica , from  a venereal  ulcer  in  the 
lungs. 

The  causes  which  predispose  to  this  disease  are  very 
numerous.  The  following  are,  however,  the  most  ge- 
neral: hereditary  disposition  ; particular  formation  of 
the  body,  obvious  by  a long  neck ,. prominent  shoulders. 

17b 


PHT 


PHT 


and  narrow  chest ; scrofulous  diathesis,  indicated  by 
a tine  clear  skin,  fair  hair,  delicate  rosy  complexion, 
large  veins,  thick  upper  lip,  a weak  voice,  and  great 
sensibility ; certain  diseases,  such  as  syphilis,  scrofula, 
the  small-pox,  and  measles ; particular  employments, 
exposing  artificers  to  dust,  such  as  needle-pointers, 
stone-cutters,  millers,  &c.  or  to  the  fumes  of  metals  or 
minerals  under  a confined  and  unwholesome  air ; vio- 
lent passions,  exertions,  or  affections  of  the  mind,  as 
grief,  disappointment,  anxiety,  or  close  application  to 
study,  without  using  proper  exercise;  frequent  and 
excessive  debaucheries,  late  watching,  and  drinking 
freely  of  strong  liquors:  great  evacuations,  as  diar- 
rhoea, diabetes,  excessive  venery,  fluor  albus,  immo- 
derate discharge  of  the  menstrual  flux,  and  the  conti- 
nuing to  suckle  too  long  under  a debilitated  state ; and, 
lastly,  the  application  of  cold,  either  by  too  sudden  a 
change  of  apparel,  keeping  on  wet  clothes,  lying  in 
damp  beds,  or  exposing  the  body  too  suddenly  to  cool 
air,  when  heated  by  exercise;  in  short,  by  any  thing 
that  gives  a considerable  check  to  the  perspiration. 
The  more  immediate  or  occasional  causes  of  phthisis 
are,  haemoptysis,  pneumonic  inflammation  proceeding 
to  suppuration,  catarrh,  asthma,  and  tubercles,  the  last 
of  which  is  by  far  the  most  general.  The  incipient 
symptoms  usually  vary  with  the  cause  of  the  disease ; 
but  when  it  arises  from  tubercles,  it  is  usually  thus 
marked:  it  begins  with  a short  dry  cough,  that  at 
length  becomes  habitual,  but  from  which  nothing  is 
spit  up  for  some  time,  except  a frothy  mucus  that 
seems  to  proceed  from  the  fauces.  The  breathing  is 
at  the  same  time  somewhat  impeded,  and  upon  the 
least  bodily  motion  is  much  hurried : a sense  of  strait- 
ness,  with  oppression  at  the  chest,  is  experienced : the 
body  becomes  gradually  leaner,  and  great  languor, 
with  indolence,  dejection  of  spirits,  and  loss  of  appe- 
tite, prevail.  In  this  state  the  patient  frequently  con- 
tinues a considerable  length  of  time,  during  which  he 
is,  however,  more  readily  affected  than  usual  by  slight 
colds,  and  upon  one  or  other  of  these  occasions  the 
cough  becomes  more  troublesome  and  severe,  particu- 
larly by  night,  and  it  is  at  length  attended  with  an  ex- 
pectoration, which  towards  morning  is  more  free  and 
copious.  By  degrees  the  matter  which  is  expectorated 
becomes  more  viscid  and  opaque,  and  now  assumes  a 
greenish  colour  and  purulent  appearance,  being  on 
many  occasions  streaked  with  blood.  In  some  cases,  a 
more  severe  degree  of  haemoptysis  attends,  and  the 
patient  spits  up  a considerable  quantity  of  florid,  frothy 
blood.  The  breathing  at  length  becomes  more  difficult, 
and  the  emaciation  and  weakness  go  on  increasing. 
With  these,  the  person  begins  to  be  sensible  of  pain  in 
some  part  of  the  thorax,  which,  however,  is  usually 
felt  at  first  under  the  sternum,  particularly  on  cough- 
ing. At  a more  advanced  period  of  the  disease,  a pain 
is  sometimes  felt  on  one  side,  and  at  times  prevails  in 
so  high  a degree,  as  to  prevent  the  person  from  lying 
easily  on  that  side ; but  it  more  frequently  happens, 
that  it  is  felt  only  on  making  a full  inspiration,  or 
coughing.  Even  where  no  pain  is  felt,  it  often  hap- 
pens that  those  who  labour  under  phthisis  cannot  lie 
easily  on  one  or  other  of  their  sides,  without  a fit  of 
coughing  being  excited,  or  the  difficulty  of  breathing 
being  much  increased.  At  the  first  commencement  of 
the  disease,  the  pulse  is  often  natural,  or  perhaps  is 
soft,  small,  and  a little  quicker  than  usual ; but  when 
the  symptoms  which  have  been  enumerated  have  sub- 
sisted for  any  length  of  time,  it  then  becomes  full,  hard, 
and  frequent.  At  the  same  time  the  face  flushes,  par- 
ticularly after  eating ; the  palms  of  the  hands,  and 
soles  of  the  feet,  are  affected  with  burning  heat ; the 
respiration  is  difficult  and  laborious ; evening  exacer- 
bations become  obvious,  and,  by  degrees,  the  fever 
assumes  the  hectic  form.  This  species  of  fever  is  evi- 
dently of  the  remittent  kind,  and  has  exacerbations 
twice  every  day.  The  first  occurs  usually  about  noon, 
and  a slight  remission  ensues  about  five  in  the  after- 
noon. This  last  is,  however,  soon  succeeded  by  an- 
other exacerbation,  which  increases  gradually  until 
after  midnight ; but,  about  two  o’clock  in  the  morning, 
a remission  takes  place,  and  this  becomes  more  appa- 
rent as  the  morning  advances.  During  the  exacerba- 
tions the  patient  is  very  sensible  to  any  coolness  of  the 
air,  and  often  complains  of  a sense  of  cold  when  his 
skin  is,  at  the  same  time,  preternaturally  warm.  Of 
.nese  exacerbations,  that  of  the  evening  is  by  far  the 
most  considerable.  From  the  first  appearance  of  the 


hectic  symptoms,  the  urine  is  high  coloured,  and  depo- 
sites  a copious  branny  red  sediment.  The  appetite, 
however,  is  not  greatly  impaired,  the  tongue  appears 
clean,  the  mouth  is  usually  moist,  and  the  thirst  is  in- 
considerable. As  the  disease  advances,  the  fauces  put 
on  rather  an  inflamed  appearance,  and  are  beset  with 
aphthas,  and  the  red  vessels  of  the  tunica  adnata  be- 
come of  a pearly  white.  During  the  exacerbations,  a 
florid  circumscribed  redness  appears  on  each  cheek  ; 
but  at  other  times  the  face  is  pale,  and  the  countenance 
somewhat  dejected.  At  the  commencement  of  hectic 
fever,  the  belly  is  usually  costive ; but  in  the  more  ad- 
vanced stages  of  it  a diarrhoea  often  comes  on,  and 
this  continues  to  recur  frequently  during  the  remain- 
der of  the  disease ; colliquative  sweats  likewise  break 
out,  and  these  alternate  with  each  other,  and  induce 
vast  debility.  In  the  last  stage  of  the  disease  the  ema- 
ciation is  so  great,  that  the  patient  has  the  appearance 
of  a walking  skeleton ; his  countenance  is  altered,  his 
cheeks  are  prominent,  his  eyes  look  hollow  and  lan- 
guid, his  hair  falls  off,  his  nails  are  of  a livid  colour, 
and  much  incurvated,  and  his  feet  are  affected  with 
cedematous  swellings.  To  the  end  of  the  disease  the 
senses  remain  entire,  and  the  mind  is  confident  and 
full  of  hope.  It  is,  indeed,  a happy  circumstance  at- 
tendant on  phthisis,  that  those  who  labour  under  it  are 
seldom  apprehensive  or  aware  of  any  danger;  and  it 
is  no  uncommon  occurrence  to  meet  with  persons 
labouring  under  its  most  advanced  stage,  flattering 
themselves  with  a speedy  recovery,  and  forming  dis- 
tant projects  under  that  vain  hope.  Some  days  before 
death  the  extremities  become  cold.  _ In  some  cases  a 
delirium  precedes  that  event,  and  continues  until  life 
•is  extinguished. 

As  an  expectoration  of  mucus  from  the  lungs  may 
possibly  be  mistaken  for  purulent  matter,  and  may 
thereby  give  us  reason  to  suspect  that  the  patient 
labours  under  a confirmed  phthisis,  it  may  not  be  amiss 
to  point  out  a sure  criterion,  by  which  we  shall  always 
be  able  to  distinguish  the  one  from  the  other.  The 
medical  world  are  indebted  to  the  late  Mr.  Charles 
Darwin  for  the  discovery,  who  has  directed  the  experi- 
ment fo  be  made  in  the  following  manner: 

Let  the  expectorated  matter  be  dissolved  in  vitrio- 
lic acid,  and  in  caustic  lixivium,  and  add  pure  water 
to  both  solutions.  If  there  is  a fair  precipitation  in 
each,  it  is  a certain  sign  of  the  presence  of  pus ; but 
if  there  is  not  a precipitate  in  either,  it  is  certainly 
mucus. 

Sir  Everard  Home,  in  his  dissertation  on  the  proper- 
ties of  pus,  informs  us  of  a curious,  but  not  a decisive 
mode  of  distinguishing  accurately  between  pus  and 
animal  mucus.  The  property  he  observes,  which  cha- 
racterizes pus,  and  distinguishes  it  from  most  other 
substances,  is,  its  being  composed  of  globules,  which 
are  visible  when  viewed  through  a microscope; 
whereas  animal  mucus,  and  all  chemical  combina- 
tions of  animal  substances,  appear  in  the  microscope 
to  be  made  up  of  flakes.  This  property  was  first  no- 
ticed by  the  late  Mr.  John  Hunter. 

Pulmonary  consumption  is  in  every  case  to  be  con- 
sidered as  attended  with  much  danger ; but  it  is  more 
so  when  it  proceeds  from  tubercles,  than  when  it  arises 
in  consequence  either  of  haemoptysis,  or  pneumonic 
suppuration.  In  the  last  instance,  the  risk  will  be 
greater  where  the  abscess  breaks  inwardly,  and  gives 
rise  to  empyema,  than  when  its  contents  are  discharged 
by  the  mouth.  Even  cases  of  this  nature  have,  how- 
ever, been  known  to  terminate  in  immediate  death. 
The  impending  danger  is  generally  to  be  judged  of, 
however,  by  the  hectic  symptoms ; but  more  particu- 
larly by  the  foetor  of  the  expectoration,  the  degree  of 
emaciation  and  debility,  the  colliquative  sweats,  and 
the  diarrhoea.  The  disease  has,  in  many  cases,  been 
found  to  be  considerably  retarded  in  its  progress  by 
pregnancy ; and  in  a few  has  been  alleviated  by  an 
attack  of  mania. 

The  morbid  appearance  most  frequently  to  be  met 
with,  on  the  dissection  of  those  who  die  of  phthisis,  is 
the  existence  of  tubercles  in  the  cellular  substance  of 
the  lungs.  These  are  small  tumours  which  have  the 
appearance  of  indurated  glands,  are  of  different  sizes, 
and  are  often  found  in  clusters.  Their  firmness  is 
usually  in  proportion  to  their  size,  and  when  laid  open 
in  this  state  they  are  of  a white  colour,  and  of  a con- 
sistence nearly  approaching  to  cartilage.  Although  in- 
dolent at  first,  they  at  length  become  inflamed,  and 


PHY 


PHY 


lastly  form  little  abscesses  or  vomicae,  which  breaking, 
and  pouring  their  contents  into  the  bronchia,  give  rise 
to  a purulent  expectoration,  and  thus  lay  the  founda- 
tion of  phthisis.  Such  tubercles  or  vomicae  are  most 
usually  situated  at  the  upper  and  back  part  of  the 
lungs ; but  in  some  instances  they  occupy  the  outer 
part,  and  then  adhesions  to  the  pleura  are  often 
formed. 

When  the  disease  is  partial,  only  a,bout  a fourth  of 
the  upper  and  posterior  part  of  the  lungs  is  usually 
found  diseased;  but,  in  some  cases,  life  has  been  pro- 
tracted till  not  one-twentieth  part  of  them  appeared,  on 
dissection,  fit  for  performing  their  function.  A singu- 
lar observation,  confirmed  by  the  morbid  collections  of 
anatomists,  is,  that  the  left  lobe  is  much  oftener  af- 
fected than  the  right.  The  indications  are, 

1.  To  moderate  inflammatory  action. 

2.  To  support  the  strength,  and  promote  the  healing 
of  ulcers  in  the  lungs. 

3.  To  palliate  urgent  symptoms. 

The  first  object  may  require  occasional  small  bleed- 
ings, where  the  strength  will  permit,  in  the  early  pe- 
riod of  the  disease ; but  in  the  scrofulous  this  measure 
is  scarcely  admissible.  Local  pain  will  more  fre- 
quently lead  to  the  use  of  cupping,  with  or  without  the 
scarificator,  leeches,  blisters,  and  other  modes  of  de- 
riving the  nervous  energy,  as  well  as  blood,  from  the 
seat  of  the  disease.  The  bowels  must  be  kept  soluble 
by  gentle  laxatives,  as  cassia,  manna,  sulphate  of  mag- 
nesia, &.c. : and  diaphoresis  promoted  by  saline  medi- 
cines, or  the  pulvis  ipecacuanha  compositus.  The 
occasional  use  of  an  emetic  may  benefit  the  patient 
by  promoting  the  function  of  the  skin,  and  expectora- 
tion, especially  where  there  is  a wheezing  respiration. 
The  inhalation  of  steam,  impregnated,  perhaps,  with 
hemlock,  or  ether,  may  be  useful  as  soothing  the  lungs, 
and  facilitating  expectoration.  Certain  sedative  reme- 
dies, particularly  digitalis,  and  hemlock,  have  been 
much  employed  in  this  disease;  and  in  so  far  as  they 
moderate  the  circulation,  and  relieve  pain,  they  are 
clearly  beneficial : but  too  much  reliance  must  not  be 
placed  upon  them.  Certain  sedative  gases  have  been 
also  proposed  to  be  respired  by  the  patient,  as  hydro- 
gen, &c. ; but  their  utility  is  very  questionable. 
Among  the  tonic  medicines,  the  mineral  acids  are,  per- 
haps, the  most  generally  useful ; however,  myrrh  and 
chalybeates,  in  moderate  doses,  often  answer  a good 
purpose.  But  a great  deal  will  depend  on  a due  regu- 
lation of  the  diet,  which  should  be  of  a nutritious 
kind,  but  not  heating,  or  difficult  of  digestion : milk, 
especially  that  of  the  ass ; farinaceous  vegetables ; 
acescent  fruits;  the  different  kinds  of  shell-fish;  the. 
lichen  islandicus,  boiled  with  milk,  &c.,  are  of  this 
description.  Some  mode  of  gestation,  regularly  em- 
ployed, particularly  sailing ; warm  clothing;  removal 
to  a warm  climate,  or  to  a pure  and  mild  air  in  this, 
may  materially  concur  in  arresting  the  progress  of  the 
disease,  in  its  incipient  stage.  With  regard  to  urgent 
symptoms,  requiring  palliation,  the  cough  may  be 
allayed  by  demulcents,  but  especially  mild  opiates 
swallowed  slowly ; colliquative  sweats,  by  acids,  par- 
ticularly the  mineral : diarrhoea,  by  chalk  and  other 
astringents,  but  most  effectually  by  small  doses  of 
opium. 

Phthisis  pztpillje.  An  amaurosis. 

Phtho'ria.  (From  <pQopa,  an  abortion.)  Medicines 
which  promote  abortion. 

PHU.  (0ov,  or  to;  from  phua , Arabian.)  The 
name  of  a plant.  See  Valeriana  phu. 

PHYGE'THLON.  (From  0vw,  to  grow.)  A red 
and  painful  tubercle  in  the  arm-pits,  neck,  and  groins. 

PH  YL  ACTE'RIUM.  (From  (ftvXaae o>,  to  preserve.) 
An  amulet  or  preservative  against  infection. 

PHYLLA'NTHUS.  (From  0uAAov,  a leaf,  and 
avdos , a flower;  because  the  flowers  in  one  of  the 
original  species,  now  a Hylophytta,  grow  out  of  the 
leaves.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Mo- 
ncecia ; Order,  Monadelphia. 

Phyllanthus  emblica.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Indian  tree  from  which  the  emblic  myrobalan  is 
obtained. 

PH  YLLI'TIS.  (From  0vAA ov,  a leaf  : so  called  be- 
cause the  leaves  only  appear.  See  Asplenium  scolo- 
pendrium. 

PHYMA.  (From  0uo>,  to  produce.)  A tubercle  on 
any  external  part  of  the  body. 

PHY'SALIS.  (From  </>v<xa«,  to  inflate  : so  called 


because  its  seed  is  contained  in  a kind  of  bladder.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria , 
Order,  Monagynia. 

Physalis  alkekengi.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
winter  cherry.  Alkekengi ; Halicaeabum.  This 
plant,  Physalis — foliis  geminis  integris  acutis  caule 
herbaceo , inferni  subramosa , of  Linnreus,  is  cultivated 
in  our  gardens.  The  berries  are  recommended  as  a 
diuretic,  from  six  to  twelve  for  a dose,  in  dropsical  and 
calculous  diseases. 

PHYSALITE.  Prophysalite.  A sub-species  of  pri- 
mitive topaz  of  Jameson.  A greenish  white  mineral 
found  in  granite  in  Finbo,  in  Sweden. 

PHYSCO'NIA.  (From  (pvoicuv,  a big-bellied  fellow.) 
Hyposarca;  Hyper sarchidios.  Enlargement  of  the 
abdomen.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Cachexies , 
and  order  Intumescentice , of  Cullen  ; known  by  a tu- 
mour occupying  chiefly  one  part  of  the  abdomen, 
increasing  slowly,  and  neither  sonorous  nor  fluctuating. 
Species:  I.  Hepatica.  2.  Splenica.  3.  Renalis.  4. 
Uterina.  5.  Ab  ovario.  6.  Mesenterica.  7.  Omen- 
talis.  8.  Visceralis. 

PHYSE'MA.  (From  (pvcrao),  to  inflate.)  Physests 
A windy  tumour. 

PHYSE'TER.  (Physeter,  from  6x maw,  to  inflate  : 
so  named  from  its  action  of  blowing  and  discharging 
water  from  its  nostrils.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
whaJe-fish  in  the  Linnaean  system. 

Physeter  macrocepiialus.  The  spermaceti  whale 
Spermaceti, nowcalled  in  the  pharmacopoeia  Cetaceum , 
is  an  oily,  concrete,  crystalline,  semi-transparent  mat- 
ter, obtained  from  the  cavity  of  the  cranium  of  several 
species  of  whales,  but  principally  from  the  Physeter 
macro  cep  halus,  or  spermaceti  whale.  It  was  formerly 
very  highly  esteemed,  and  many  virtues  were  attributed 
to  it ; but  it  is  now  chiefly  employed  in  affections  of 
the  lungs,  primae  viae,  kidneys,  &c.  as  a softening  remedy 
mixed  with  mucilages.  It  is  also  employed  by  sur- 
geons as  an  emollient  in  form  of  cerates,  ointments,  &c 
See  also  Ambergris , and  Balcena  macrocephala. 

PHYSIOGNOMY.  (Physiognomia ; from  Qvaris, 
nature,  and  yiviooko),  to  know.)  The  art  of  knowing 
the  disposition  of  a person  from  the  countenance. 

PHYSIOLOGY.  (Physiologia ; from  <pvms,  na- 
ture, and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  That  science  which  has 
for  its  object  the  knowledge  of  the  phenomena  proper 
to  living  bodies.  It  is  divided  into  Vegetable  Physio- 
logy, which  is  employed  in  the  consideration  of  vege- 
tables ; into  Animal  or  Comparative  Physiology,  which 
treats  of  animals;  and  into  Human  Physiology,  ol 
which  the  special  object  is  man. 

PHYSIS.  Nature. 

PHYSOCE'LE.  (From  (pwa,  wind,  and  Kr/h],  a 
tumour.)  A species  of  hernia,  the  contents  of  which 
are  distended  with  wind. 

PHYSOCE'PHALUS.  (From  <pvoa,  wind,  and 
x£0aX?7,  the  head.)  Emphysema  of  the  head.  See 
Pneumatosis. 

PHYSOME'TRA.  (From  (pvcrao),  to  inflate,  and 
pr/rpa,  the  womb.)  Hysterophyse.  A windy  swelling 
of  the  uterus.  A tympany  of  the  womb.  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  class  Cachexice , and  order  Intumescentice , 
of  Cullen  ; characterized  by  a permanent  elastic  swell- 
ing of  the  hypogastrium,  from  flatulent  distention  of  the 
womb.  It  is  a rare  disease,  and  seldom  admits  of  a 
cure. 

PHYTEU'MA.  (Phyteuma,  atis.  n.;  from  (pvrev u), 
to  generate:  so  called  from  its  great  increase  and 
growth.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  • 

Phyteuma  orbiculare.  Rapunculus  cornicula- 
tus.  Horned  rampions.  By  some  supposed  effica- 
cious in  the  cure  of  syphilis. 

PHYTOLA'CCA.  ( Phytolacca ; from  (pvrov,  a 
plant,  and  Aaxxa,  gum  lac  : so  called  because  it  is  of 
the  colour  of  lacca.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Decandria ; Order,  Decagynia. 

Phytolacca  decandria.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  Pork-physic  ; Pork- weed ; Poke-weed ; Red- 
weed  of  Virginia;  Red  night-shade ; American  night- 
shade. Solatium  racemosum  americanum;  Solanum 
magnum  virginianum  rubrum.  In  Virginia  and  other 
parts  of  America,  the  inhabitants  boil  the  leaves,  and 
eat  them  in  the  manner  of  spinach.  They  are  said  to 
have  an  anodyne  quality,  and  the  juice  of  the  root  is 
violently  cathartic.  The  Portuguese  had  formerly  a 
trick  of  mixing  the  juice  of  the  berries  with  their  red 

181 


PIG 


wine3,  in  order  to  give  them  a deeper  colour : but  it 
was  found  to  debase  the  flavour.  This  was  repre- 
sented to  his  Portuguese  majesty,  who  ordered  all  the 
stems  to  be  cut  down  yearly  before  they  produced 
flowers,  thereby  to  prevent  any  further  adulteration. 
This  plant  has  been  used  as  a cure  for  cancers,  but  to 
no  purpose. 

PHYTOLOGY.  {Pliytologia.  From  (pvrov , an 
herb,  and  Aoyof,  a discourse.)  That  part  of  the  science 
of  natural  history,  which  treats  on  plants. 

PHYTOMINERA'LIS.  (From  (pvrov , a plant,  and 
minerals,  a mineral.)  A substance  of  a vegetable  and 
mineral  nature ; as  amber. 

PI'A  MATER.  ( Pia  mater , the  natural  mother ; 
so  called  because  it  embraces  the  brgin,  as  a good  mo- 
ther folds  her  child.)  Localis  membrana;  Meninx 
tenuis.  A thin  membrane,  almost  wholly  vascular, 
that  is  firmly  accreted  to  the  convolutions  of  the  cere- 
brum, cerebellum,  medulla  oblongata,  and  medulla 
spinalis.  Its  use  appears  to  be,  to  distribute  the  vessels 
to,  and  contain  the  substance  of,  the  cerebrum. 

PI  CA.  {Pica,  the  magpie:  so  named  because  it  is 
said  the  magpie  is  subject  to  this  affection.)  Picatio  ; 
JYIalacia ; Mlotriophagia ; Citla ; Cissa.  Longing. 
Depraved  appetite,  with  strong  desire  for  unnatural 
food.  It  is  very  common  to  pregnant,  women  and 
chlorotic  girls,  and  by  some  it  is  said  to  occur  in  men 
who  labour  under  suppressed  haemorrhoids. 

PI'CEA.  (Iliriij,  pitch.)  The  common  or  red  fir 
or  pitch-tree  is  so  termed.  The  cones,  branches,  and 
every  part  of  the  tree,  affords  the  common  resin  called 
frankincense.  See  Pinus  abies. 

Pichu'rim.  See  Pechurim. 

PICNITE.  Pyenite.  See  Schorlite. 

PI'CRIS.  (From  niKpos,  bitter.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants.  Class,  Syngenesia ; Order,  Polyga- 
viia  aquales. 

Picris  echoides.  The  name  of  the  common  ox- 
tongue. The  leaves  are  frequently  used  as  a pot-bet b 
by  the  country  people,  who  esteem  it  good  to  relax  the 
bowels. 

PICROMEL.  (From  micpos,  bitter,  and  peyi,  honey  : 
so  called  from  its  taste.)  The  characteristic  principle 
of  bile.  If  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  five  parts  of 
water,  be  mixed  with  fresh  bile,  a yellow  precipitate 
will  fall.  Heat  the  mixture,  then  leave  it  in  repose,  and 
decant  off  the  clear  part.  What  remains  was  formerly 
called  resin  of  bile;  but  it  is  a greenish  compound  of 
sulphuric  acid  and  picromel.  Edulcorate  it  with  wa- 
ter, and  digest  with  carbonate  of  barytes.  The  picro- 
mel now  liberated  will  dissolve  in  the  water.  On 
evaporating  the  solution,  it  is  obtained  in  a solid  state. 
Or  by  dissolving  the  green  sulphate  in  alkohol,  and 
digesting  the  solution  over  carbonate  of  potassa  till  it 
cease  to  redden  litmus  paper,  we  obtain  the  picromel 
combined  with  alkohol. 

It  resembles  inspissated  bile.  Its  colour  is  greenish- 
yellow;  i*s  taste  is  intensely  bitter  at  first,  with  a suc- 
ceeding impression  of  sweetness.  It  is  not  affected  by 
infusion  of  galls ; but  the  salts  of  iron  and  subacetate 
of  lead  precipitate  it  from  its  aqueous  solution.  It 
affords  no  ammonia  by  its  destructive  distillation. 
Hence  the  absence  of  azote  is  inferred,  and  the  pecu- 
liarity of  picromel. 

PICROTOXIA.  Picrotoxine.  The  poisonous  prin- 
ciple of  the  cocculus  indicus.  See  Menispermum 
eocculus,  and  Cocculus  indicus. 

PICTO'NIUS.  (From  the  Pictones,  who  were  sub- 
ject to  this  disease.)  Applied  to  a species  of  colic. 
It  should  be  rather  called  colica  pictorum,  the  painter’s 
colic,  beeause,  from  their  use  of  lead,  they  are  much 
afflicted  with  it. 

Pie'strum.  (From  nuga),  to  press.)  An  instrument 
to  compress  the  head  of  a dead  foetus,  for  its  more  easy 
extraction  from  the  womb. 

Pig-nut.  The  bulbous  root,  of  the  Bunium  bulbo- 
castanum , of  Linnams : so  called  because  pigs  are  very 
fond  of  them,  and  will  dig  with  their  snouts  to  some 
depth  for  them.  See  Bunium  bulbocpstanum. 

PIGME'NTUM.  (From  pivgo,  to  paint.)  Pigment. 
This  name  is  given  by  anatomists  to  a mucous  sub- 
stance found  in  the  eye,  which  is  of  two  kinds.  The 
pigment  of  the  iris  is  that  which  covers  the  anterior 
and  posterior  surface  of  the  iris,  and  gives  the  beau- 
tiful variety  of  colour  in  the  eyes.  The  pigment  of 
the  choroid  membrane  is  a black  or  brownish  mucus, 
,which  covers  the  anterior  surface  of  the  choroid  mem- 
132 


V1L 

brane,  contiguous  to  the  retina  and  the  anterior  surface 
of  the  ciliary  processes. 

Pila  hystricis.  The  bezoar  hystricis. 

Pila  marina.  A species  of  alcyonium  found  on 
sea-coasts  among  wrack.  It  is  said  to  kill  worms,  and, 
when  calcined,  to  be  useful  in  scrofuia. 

PILE.  See  Hcemorrhois. 

PILE-WORT.  See  Ranunculus  Jicari a. 

PILEUS.  ( Pileus , a hat.)  That  part  of  a gymnos- 
perm  fungus  or  mushroom,  which  forms  the  upper 
round  part  or  head  ; as  in  Boletus,  and  Agancus. 

Pi'li  congeniti.  The  hair  of  the  head,  eyebrows, 
and  eyelids,  are  so  termed,  because  they  grow  in 
utcro. 

Pi'li  postgeniti.  The  hair  which  grows  from  the 
surface  of  the  body  after  birth  is  so  termed,  in  contra- 
diction to  that  which  appears  before  birth  ; as  the  hair 
of  the  head,  eyebrows,  and  eyelids. 

PILOSE'LLA.  (From  pilus,  hair : because  its 
leaves  are  hairy.)  See  Hieracium  pilocella. 

Pill,  aloetic , with  myrrh.  See  Pilulce  aloes  cum 
myrrha. 

Pill,  compound  aloStic.  See  Pilulce  aloes  composite. 
Pill,  compound  calomel.  See  Pilulce  hydrargyri 
submuriatis  composite. 

Pili,  compound  galbanum.  See  Pilulce  galbani  com- 
posite. 

Pill,  compound  gamboge.  See  Pilulce  cambogice  com- 
posites. 

Pill,  compound  squill.  See  Pilules  scillce  composites. 
Pill  of  iron  with  myrrh.  See  Pilulce  ferri  composites. 
Pill,  mercurial.  See  Pilules  hydrargyri. 

PHI,  snap,  with  opium.  See  Pilules  saponis  cum  opio. 
PI  LOSES.  Hairy.  Applied  to  the  stems,  leaves, 
and  receptacles  of  plants,  as  that  of  the  Cerastium 
alpinum  ; and  to  the  nectary  of  the  Parnassus  palus- 
tris,  which  is  in  form  of  five  hairy  fascules  at  the  base 
of  the  stamina.  The  receptacle  of  the  Carthamus  tinc- 
torius. 

PI'LULA.  {Pilula,  as,  f. ; diminutive  of  pila.)  A 
pill.  A small  round  form  of  medicine,  the  size  of  a 
pea.  The  consistence  of  pills  is  best  preserved  by 
keeping  the  mass  in  bladders,  and  occasionally  moist- 
ening it.  In  the  direction  of  masses  to  be  thus  divided, 
the  proper  consistence  is  to  be  looked  for  at  first,  as  well 
as  its  preservation  afterward  ; tor  if  the  mass  then 
become  hard  and  dry,  it  is  unfit  for  that  division  for 
which  it  was  originally  intended;  and  this  is  in  many 
instances  such  an  objection  to  the  form,  that  it  is  doubt- 
ful whether,  for  the  purposes  of  the  pharmacopoeia, 
the  greater  number  of  articles  had  not  better  be  kept  in 
powder,  and  their  application  to  the  formation  of  pills, 
left  to  extemporaneous  direction. 

Pilule  aloes  composite.  Compound  alofltic  pills. 
Take  of  extract  of  spike-aloe,  powdered,  an  ounce ; ex- 
tract of  gentian,  naif  an  ounce ; oil  of  caraway,  forty 
minims;  simple  syrup,  as  much  as  is  sufficient.  Beat 
them  together,  until  they  form  a uniform  mass.  From 
fifteen  to  twenty -five  grains  prove  moderately  purga 
tive  and  stomachic. 

Pilule  aloes  cum  myrrha.  Alottic  pills  with 
myrrh.  Take  of  extract  of  spike  aloe,  two  ounces ; 
saffron,  myrrh,  of  each  an  ounce ; simple  syrup,  as 
much  as  is  sufficient.  Powder  the  aloes  and  myrrh 
separately ; then  beat  them  all  together  until  they  form 
a uniform  mass.  From  ten  grains  to  a scruple  of  this 
pill,  substituted  for  the  pilulo.  Rufi,  prove  stomachic 
and  laxative,  and  are  calculated  for  delicate  females, 
especially  where  there  is  uterine  obstruction. 

Pilule  ammoniareti  cupri.  An  excellent  tonic 
and  diuretic  pill,  which  may  be  given  with  advantage 
in  dropsical  diseases,  where  tonics  and  diuretics  are 
indicated. 

Pilul.se  cambogijE  composit*.  Compound  gam- 
boge pills.  Take  pf  gamboge  powdered,  extract  of 
spike-aloe,  powdered,  compound  cinnamon  powder,  of 
each  a drachm ; soap,  two  drachms.  Mix  the  powders 
together ; then  having  added  the  soap,  beat  the  whole 
together  until  they  are  thoroughly  incorporated.  These 
pills  are  now  first  introduced  into  the  London  pharma- 
copeia, as  forming  a more  active  purgative  pill  than 
the  pil.  alo£s  cum  myrrha,  and  in  this  way  supplying 
an  article  very  commonly  necessary  in  practice.  The 
dose  is  from  ten  grains  to  a scruple. 

Pilule  ferri  composite.  Compound  iron  pills. 
Pills  of  iron  and  myrrh.  Take  of  myrrh,  powdered, 
two  drachms ; subcarbonate  of  soda,  sulphate  of  iron, 


PIL 


PIM 


sugar,  of  each,  a drachm.  Rub  the  myrrh  with  the 
subcarbonate  of  soda ; add  the  sulphate  of  iron,  and 
rub  them  again ; then  beat  the  whole  together  until 
they  are  thoroughly  incorporated.  These  pills  answer 
the  same  purpose  as  the  mistura  ferri  composita.  The 
dose  is  from  ten  grains  to  one  scruple. 

Pilul*  galbani  composite.  Compound  galbanum 
pills.  Formerly  called  pilulot  gummosa.  Take  of 
galbanum  gum  resin,  an  ounce;  myrrh,  sagapenum,  of 
each  an  ounce  and  half ; asafoetida  gum  resin,  half 
an  ounce ; simple  syrup,  as  much  as  is  sufficient.  Beat 
them  together  until  they  form  a uniform  mass.  A 
stimulating  antispasmodic  and  emmenagogue.  From 
half  a scruple  to  half  a drachm  may  be  given  three 
times  a day  in  nervous  disorders  of  the  stomach  and  in- 
testines, in  hysterical  affections  and  hypochondriasis. 

Pilul.e  hydrargyri.  Mercurial  pills.  Often  from 
its  colour  called  the  blue  pill.  Take  of  purified  mer- 
cury, two  drachms;  confection  of  red  roses,  three 
drachms ; liquorice-root,  powdered,  a drachm.  Rub 
the  mercury  with  the  confection,  until  the  globules  dis- 
appear ; then  add  the  liquorice-root,  and  beat  the  whole 
together,  until  they  are  thoroughly  incorporated.  An 
alterative  and  anti-venereal  pill,  which  mostly  acts 
upon  the  bowels  if  given  in  sufficient  quantity  to  at- 
tempt the  removal  of  the  venereal  disease,  and  there- 
fore requires  the  addition  of  opium.  The  dose  is  from 
five  grains  to  a scruple.  Three  grains  of  the  mass 
contain  one  of  mercury.  Joined  with  the  squill  pill,  it 
forms  an  excellent  expectorant  and  alterative,  calcu- 
lated to  assist  the  removal  of  dropsical  diseases  of  the 
chest,  and  asthmas  attended  with  visceral  obstruction. 

PlLULiE  HYDRARGYRI  SUBMURIATIS  COMPOSITE. 

Compound  pills  of  submuriate  of  mercury.  Take  of 
submuriate  of  mercury,  precipitated  sulphuret  of  anti- 
mony, of  each  a drachm ; guaiacum  resin,  powdered, 
two  drachms.  Rub  the  submuriate  of  mercury,  first 
with  the  precipitated  sulphuret  of  antimony,  then  with 
the  guiacum  resin,  and  add  as  much  acacia  mucilage 
as  may  be  requisite  to  give  the  mass  a proper  consist- 
ence. This  is  intended  as  a substitute  for  the  famed 
Plummer’s  pill.  It  is  exhibited  as  a alternative  in  a 
variety  of  diseases,  especially  cutaneous  eruptions, 
pains  of  the  venereal  or  rheumatic  kind,  cancerous  and 
schirrous  affections,  and  chronic  ophthalmia.  The 
dose  is  from  five  to  ten  grains.  In  about  five  grains  of 
the  mass  there  is  one  grain  of  the  submuriate  of  mer- 
cury. 

Pilule  saponis  cum  opio.  Pills  of  soap  and  opium. 
Formerly  called  pilulce  saponacese.  Take  of  hard 
opium  powdered,  half  an  ounce;  hard  soap,  two 
ounces.  Beat  them  together  until  they  are  thoroughly 
incorporated.  The  dose  is  from  three  to  ten  grains. 
Five  grains  of  the  mass  contain  one  of  opium. 

Pilule  scill.e  composit.*.  Compound  squill 
pills.  Take  of  squill  root,  fresh  dried  and  powdered,  a 
drachm;  ginger-root,  powdered,  hard  soap,  of  each 
three  drachms:  ammoniacum,  powdered,  twodrachms. 
Mix  the  powders  together : then  beat  them  with  the 
soap,  adding  as  much  simple  syrup  as  may  be  sufficient 
to  give  a proper  consistence.  An  attenuant,  expecto- 
rant, and  diuretic  pill,  mostly  administered  in  the  cure 
of  asthma  and  dropsy.  The  dose  is  from  ten  grains  to 
a scruple. 

PI'LOS.  (IliXof,  wool  carded.) 

1.  In  anatomy  the  short  hair  which  is  found  all 
over  the  body.  See  Capillus. 

2.  In  botany,  a hair : which,  according  to  Linnaeus, 
is  an  excretory  duct  of  a bristle-like  form.  They  are 
fine,  slender,  cylindrical,  flexible  bodies,  found  on  the 
surfaces  of  the  herbaceous  parts  of  plants.  Some  of 
them  are  the  excretory  ducts  of  giands,  but  many  of 
them  are  not : and  it  is  not  easy  to  conceive  any  satis- 
factory opinion  of  their  use  to  the  plant. 

When  placed  under  the  microscope  they  appear  to  be 
membraneous  tubes,  articulated  in  the  majority  of  in- 
stances, often  punctured,  and  in  some  plants,  as  the 
Borago  laxiflora,  covered  with  warts.  They  are  either 
simple  or  undivided,  compound  or  branched. 

1.  Pili  simplices , the  most  common  form  of  a simple 
hair  is  that  of  a jointed  thread,  generally  too  flexible  to 
support  itself,  and  thus  most  commonly  found  bent  and 
waved.  According  to  its  degree  of  firmness,  its  quan- 
tity, and  the  mode  of  its  application  to  the  surfaces  of 
stems  and  leaves,  it  constitutes  the  characteristic  of 
surfaces : thus,  the  surface  is  termed  pilosus , or  hairy, 
when  the  hairs  are  few  and  scattered,  but  conspicuous, 


as  in  Hieracium  pilocella ; — lanatus , woolly,  when  they 
are  complicated,  but  nevertheless  the  single  hairs  are 
distinguishable,  as  in  Verbascum; — tomentosus,  shaggy, 
when  they  are  so  thickly  matted  that  the  individual 
hairs  cannot  be  distinguished,  and  when  the  position 
of  the  hair  is  nearly  paiallel  with  the  disk,  being  at  the 
same  time  straight,  or  very  slightly  curved,  and  thick 
although  unmatted:  it  constitutes  the  silky  surface, 
as  is  seen  on  the  leaves  of  Potentilla  anserina,  and 
Achemilla  alpina.  In  some  instances  the  simple  hair 
is  firm  enough  to  support  itself  erect , in  which  case  it 
is  usually  awl-shaped,  and  the  articulations  are  shorter 
towards  the  base,  as  in  Bryonia  alba.  It  does  not 
always,  however,  terminate  in  a point,  but  sometimes 
in  a small  knob,  as  in  the  newly-evolved  succulent 
shoots  of  ligneous  plants,  Belladonna,  &c.  In  some  in- 
stances also,  as  on  the  under  disk  of  the  leaves  of  the 
Symphitum  officinale,  the  simple  hair  is  hooked  towards 
apex;  which  occasions  the  velvety  feeling  when  the 
finger  is  passed  over  the  surface  of  those  leaves,  the 
convex  part  of  the  curve  of  the  hair  being  that  only 
which  comes  in  contact  with  the  finger.  Another  va- 
riety of  the  simple  hair  is  that  which  has  given  rise  to 
the  term  glanduloso-ciliata:  it  is  a slender  hollow 
thread,  supporting  a small,  cup-shaped, glandular  body, 
and  is  rather  to  be  regarded  as  a stipate  gland. 

2.  Pdi  compositi  are  either,  plurnosus , feathery, 
which  is  a simple  hair  with  other  hairs  attached  to  it 
Interally,  as  in  Hieracium  undulatuin  ; or  it  is  ramosus , 
branched,  that  is,  lateral  hairs  are  given  off  from  com- 
mon stalks,  as  on  the  petiole  of  the  gooseberry  leaf,  or 
it  consists  of  an  erect  firm  stem,  from  the  summit  of 
which  smaller  hairs  diverge  in  every  direction,  as  in 
Marrubium  peregrinum ; or  it  is  stellatus , star-like, 
being  composed  of  a number  of  simple  diverging,  awl- 
shaped  hairs,  springing  from  a common  centre,  which 
is  a small  knob  sunk  in  the  cutis,  as  on  the  leaves  of 
marsh-mallow.  Some  authors  have  applied  the  term 
ramenta  to  small,  flat,  or  stroplike  hairs  which  are 
found  on  the  leaves  of  some  of  the  genus  Begonia. — 
Thomson.  See  Pubescence. 

PIMELITE.  A variety  of  steatite  found  at  Kose- 
mutz,  in  Silesia. 

PIME'NTA.  (From  Pimienta , the  Spanish  fir  i 
Pepper.  See  Myrtvs  pimenta. 

Pime'nto.  See  Myrtus  pimenta. 

PIMPERNEL.  See  Anagallis  arvensis. 

Pimpernel , water.  See  Veronica  beccabunga. 

PIMPINE'LLA.  ( Quasi  bipinella , or  bipenula; 
from  the  double  pennate  order  of  its  leaves.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Penrtandria ; Order,  Digynia.  Pintpinella. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  Pimpinella  alba 
and  magna. 

Pimpinella  alba.  A variety  of  the  pimpinella 
magna,  the  root  of  which  is  indifferently  used  with 
that  of  the  greater  pimpinell.  The  pimpinella  saxi- 
fraga  was  also  so  called. 

Pimpinella  anisum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
anise  plant.  Anisum  ; Anisum  vulgare.  Pimpinella 
—foliis  radicalibus  triftdis  incisis,  of  Linnteus.  A 
native  of  Egypt.  Anise  seeds  have  an  aromatic  smell, 
and  a pleasant,  warm,  and  sweetish  taste.  An  essen 
tial  oil  and  distilled  water  are  prepared  from  them, which 
are  employed  in  flatulencies  and  gripes,  to  which  child- 
ren are  more  especially  subject ; also  in  weakness  of 
the  stomach,  diarrhoeas,  and  loss  of  tone  in  the  pri- 
jnai  viae. 

Pimpinella  italica.  The  root  which  bears  this 
name  in  some  pharmacopoeias  is  now  fallen  into  dis- 
use. See  Sanguisorba  officinalis. 

Pimpinella  magna.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
greater  pimpinella.  Pimpinella  nigra.  The  root  of 
this  plant  has  been  lately  extolled  in  the  cure  of  erysi- 
pelatous ulcerations,  tinea,  capitis,  rheumatism,  and 
other  diseases. 

Pimpinella  nigra.  See  Pimpinella  magna. 

Pimpinella  nostras.  See  Pimpinella. 

Pimpinella  saxifraga.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Burnet  saxifrage.  Tragoselinum  Several  species 
of  pimpinella  were  formerly  used  officinally ; but  the 
roots  which  obtain  a place  in  the  Materia  Medica  of 
the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia,  are  those  of  this  species 
k>f  saxifrage,  the  Pimpinella— foliis  pinnatis , folioliq 
radicalibus  snbrotundis,  ummis  lincaribus,  of  Lin- 
naeus. They  have  an  unpleasant  smell ; and  a hot, 
pungent,  bitterish  taste ; they  are  recommended  by  eq- 


PIN 


PIP 


veral  writers  as  a stomachic:  in  the  way  of  gargle, 
they  have  been  employed  for  dissolving  viscid  mucus, 
and  to  stimulate  the  tongue  when  that  organ  becomes 
paralytic. 

Pinaste'llum.  (From  pinus,  the  pine-tree;  so 
called  because  its  leaves  resemble  those  of  the  pine- 
tree.)  Hog’s  fennel.  See  Peucedanum  silans. 

Pi'nea.  See  Pinus  pinea. 

PINEAL.  ( Pinealis ; from  pinea,  a pine-apple, 

from  its  supposed  resemblance  to  that  fruit.)  Formed 
like  the  fruit  of  the  pine. 

Pineal  gland.  Glandula  pinealis ; Conarium.  A 
small  heart-like  substance,  about  the  size  of  a pea, 
situated  immediately  over  the  corpora  quadrigemina, 
and  hanging  from  the  thalami  nervorum  opticorum  by 
two  crura  or  peduncles.  Its  use  is  not  known.  It 
was  formerly  supposed  to  be  the  seat  of  the  soul. 

PINE-APPLE.  See  Bromelia  ananus. 

Pine-thistle.  See  Atrcctylis  gummifera. 

Pi'neus  purgans.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

PINGUE'DO.  (From  pinguis,  fat.)  Fat.  See 
Fat. 

PINGUI'CULA.  (From  pinguis , fat : so  called  be- 
cause its  leaves  are  fat  to  the  touch.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants.  Class,  Diandria;  Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

Pinguicula  vulgaris.  Sanicula  montana  ; Sani- 
cula  eboracensis ; Viola  palustris : Liparis  ; Cucul- 
lata;  Dodecatheon ; Plinii.  Butterwort.  Yorkshire 
sanicle.  The  remarkable  unctuosity  of  this  plant  has 
caused  it  to  be  applied  to  chaps,  and  as  a pomatum  to 
the  hair.  Decoctions  of  the  leaves  in  broths  are  used 
by  the  common  people  in  Wales  as  a cathartic. 

Pinho'nks  indici.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

PINITE.  Micarelle  of  Kirwan.  A blackish  green 
mineral,  consisting  of  silica,  alumina,  and  oxide  of 
iron,  found  in  the  granite  of  St.  Michael’s  Mount,  Corn- 
wall, and  in  porphyry  in  Scotland. 

PINK,  INDIAN.  See  Spigelia. 

PINNA.  (Tltvva,  a wing.)  1.  The  name  of  the  late- 
ral and  inferior  part  of  the  nose,  and  the  broad  part  of 
the  ear 

3.  The  leaflet  of  a pinnate  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

Pinna' culum.  (Dim.  of  pinna , a wing.)  A pinna- 
cle. A name  of  the  uvula  from  its  shape. 

PINNATIFIDUS.  Pinnatifid:  applied  to  leaves 
which  are  cut  transversely  into  several  oblong  paral- 
lel segments ; as  in  Ipomosis,  and  Myriophyllum  verli- 
cillatum. 

PINNATUS.  Applied  to  a leaf  which  has  several 
leaflets  proceeding  laterally  from  one  stalk,  and  imi- 
tates a pinnatifid  leaf.  Of  this  there  are  several  kinds. 

1.  Folium  pinnatum  cum  impari , with  an  odd  nr  ter- 
minal leaflet ; as  in  roses. 

2.  F.  p.  cirrosum , with  a tendril,  when  furnished 
with  a tendril  instead  of  the  odd  leaflet;  as  in  the  pea 
and  vetch  tribe. 

3.  F.  abrupt}  pinnatum , abruptly,  without  either  a 
terminal  leaflet  or  a tendril;  as  in  the  genus  Mimosa. 

4.  F.  opposite  pinnatum , oppositely  , when  the  leaflets 
are  opposite  or  in  pairs ; as  in  saintfoin,  roses,  and  sium 
angustifolium. 

5.  F.  alternatim  pinnatum , alternately,  when  they 
are  alternate ; as  in  Viscia  dumetorum. 

6.  F.  interrupt i pinnatum , interruptedly,  when  the 
principal  leaflets  are  ranged  alternately  with  an  inter- 
mediate series  of  smaller  ones ; as  in  Spiraea  filipen- 
dula  and  ulmaria. 

7.  F.  articulati  pinnatum,  joiutedly,  with  apparent 
joints  in  the  common  foot-stalk ; as  in  Weinmannia 
pinnata. 

8.  F.  decursivi  pinnatum,  decurrently,  when  the 
leaflets  are  decurrent ; as  in  Eryngium  campestre. 

9.  F.  lyrato  pinnatum,  in  a lyrate  manner,  having 
the  terminal  leaflet  largest,  and  the  rest  gradually 
smaller  as  they  approach  tne  base ; as  in  Erysimum 
pnecox:  and  with  intermediate  smaller  leaflets;  as  in 
Geum  rivale,  and  the  common  turnip. 

10.  F.  verticillato  pinnatum , in  a whirled  manner, 
the  leaflets  cut  into  five  divaricated  segments,  embra- 
cing the  foot-stalk  : as  in  Sium  verticillatum. 

PINNULA.  The  leaflet  of  bi  and  tripinnate 
leaves. 

PI'NUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Moncecia;  Order,  Monadel- 
phia.  The  pine-tree. 

Pinus  abies.  Elate ; Thelna.  The  Norway 
184 


spruce  fir,  which  affords  the  Burgundy  pitch  and  com- 
mon frankincense. 

1.  Pix  arida.  Formerly  called  Fix  burgundica, 
from  the  place  it  was  made  at.  The  prepared  resin  of 
Pinus  abies — foliis  solitariis,  subtetragonis  acutius 
culis  distichis,  rumis  infra  nudis  conis  cylindraceis, 
of  Linnaeus.  It  is  of  a solid  consistence,  yet  somewhat 
soft,  of  a reddish  brown  colour,  and  not  disagreeable 
smell.  It  is  used  externally  as  a stimulant  in  form  of 
plaster  in  catarrh,  pertussis,  and  dyspnoea. 

2.  Abietis  resina;  Thus.  Common  frankincense 
This  is  a spontaneous  exudation,  and  is  brought  in 
small  masses,  or  tears,  chiefly  from  Germany,  but  partly 
and  purest  from  France.  It  is  applicable  to  the  same 
purposes  as  Burgundy  pitch,  but  little  used  at  present. 

Pinus  balsamea.  The  systematic  name  of  the  tree 
which  affords  the  Canada  balsam.  Abies  canadensis 
The  Canada  balsam  is  one  of  the  purest  turpentines, 
procured  from  the  Pinus  Balsamea  of  Linmeus,  and  im- 
ported from  Canada.  For  its  properties,  see  Turpentine 

Pinus  cedrus.  The  wood  of  this  species,  cedar 
wood,  is  very  odorous,  more  fragrant  than  that  of  the 
fir,  and  it  possesses  similar  virtues. 

Pinus  cembra.  This  affords  the  Carpathian  bal- 
sam. Oleum  germanis ; Carpathicum.  This  balsam 
is  obtained  both  by  wounding  the  young  branches  of 
the  Pinus — foliis  quinus,  levibus  of  Linmeus,  and  by 
boiling  them-.  It  is  mostly  diluted  with  turpentine,  and 
comes  to  us  in  a very  liquid  and  pellucid  state,  rathei 
white. 

Pinus  larix.  The  systematic  name  of  the  tree 
which  gives  us  the  agaric  and  Venice  turpentine.  The 
larch-tree.  The  Venice  turpentine  issues  spontane- 
ously through  the  bark  of  the  Pinus— foliis  fascicu- 
latis  mollibus  obtusiusculi s bracteis  extra  squamas 
strobilorum  extantibns.  Hort.  Kew.  It  is  usually 
thinner  than  any  of  the  other  sorts;  of  a clear  whitish 
or  pale  yellowish  colour ; a hot,  pungent,  bitterish,  dis- 
agreeable taste ; and  a strong  smell,  without  any  thing 
of  the  aromatic  flavour  of  the  Chian  kind.  For  its 
virtues,  see  Turpentine.  See  also  Boletus  laricis. 

Pinus  picea.  The  systematic  name  of  the  silver  fir. 

Pinus  pinea.  The  systematic  name  of  the  stone 
pine-tree.  The  young  and  fresh  fruit  of  this  plant  is 
eaten  in  some  countries  in  the  same  manner  as  almonds 
are  here,  either  alone  or  with  sugar.  They  are  nutri- 
tive, aperient,  and  diuretic. 

Pinus  sylvestris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Scotch  fir.  Pinus — foliis  geminis  rigidis,  conis , ovato- 
conicis  longitudine  foliorum  subgeminis  basi  rotunda- 
tis  of  Linmpus,  which  affords  the  following  oflicinals. 

1.  Common  turpentine  is  the  juice  which  flows  out 
on  the  tree  being  wounded  in  hot  weather.  See  Tur- 
pentine. 

2.  From  this  the  oil  is  obtained  by  distillation,  mostly 
with  water,  in  which  case  yellow  resin  is  left ; but  if 
without  addition,  the  residuum  is  common  resin,  or 
colophony.  The  oil  is  ordered  to  be  purified  in  the 
pharmacopoeia.  See  Oleum  terebinthince  rectificatum. 

3.  When  the  coal  begins  to  check  the  exudation  of  the 
juice,  part  of  this  concretes  in  the  wounds ; which  is 
collected,  and  termed  galipot  in  Provence,  barras  in 
Guienne,  sometimes  also  white  resin,  when  thoroughly 
hardened  by  long  exposure  to  the  air.  See  Resina 
fiava , and  alba. 

4.  The  Pix  liquida,  or  tar,  is  produced  by  cutting  the 
wood  into  pieces,  which  are  enclosed  in  a large  oven 
constructed  for  the  purpose.  It  is  well  known  for  its 
economical  uses.  Tar-water,  or  water  impregnated 
with  the  more  soluble  parts  of  tar,  was  some  time  ago 
a very  fashionable  remedy  in  a variety  of  complaints, 
but  is  in  the  present  practice  fallen  into  disuse. 

5.  Common  pitch  is  tar  inspissated ; it  is  now  termed 
in  the  pharmacopoeia,  Resina  nigra. 

PI'PER.  (HeTTcpi ; from  irenrui,  to  concoct;  because 
by  its  heat  it  assists  digestion.)  Pepper.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Diandria ; Order,  Trigynia. 

Piper  album.  See  Piper  nigrum. 

Piper  brasilianum.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Piper  calecuticum.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Piper  caryophyllatum.  See  Myrtus  pimenta 

Piper  caudatum.  See  Piper  cubeba. 

Piper  cubeba.  The  plant,  the  berries  of  which  are 
called  cubebs.  Piper  caudatum ; Cumamus.  Piper — 
foliis  oblique  ovaiis,  seu  oblongus  venosis  acutis,spica 
solitaria  pcdunculala  oppositifolia,  fructibus  pedicel • 


PIS 


PIS 


fait*,  of  Linnaeus.  The  dried  berries  are  of  an  ash- 
brown  colour,  generally  wrinkled,  and  resembling  pep- 
per, but  furnished  each  with  a slender  stalk.  They 
are  a warm  spice,  of  a pleasant  smell,  and  moderately 
pungent  taste,  imported  from  Java:  and  may  be  ex- 
hibited in  all  cases  where  warm  spicy  medicines  are 
indicated,  but  they  are  inferior  to  pepper.  Of  late  they 
have  been  successfully  given  internally  in  the  cure  of 
venereal  gonorrhoea. 

Piper  decorticatum.  White  pepper. 

Piper  favasci.  The  clove-berry  tree. 

Piper  guineense.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Piper  hispanicum.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Piper  indicum.  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Piper  jamaicense.  See  Myrtus  pimenta. 

Piper  longum.  Macropiper ; Acapatli;  Catu-tri- 
pali:  Pimpilim.  Long  pepper.  Piper— foliis  cor- 
datis  petiolatis  sessilib usque,  of  Linnaeus.  The  ber- 
ries or  grains  of  this  plant  are  gathered  while  green,  and 
dried  in  the  heat  of  the  sun,  when  they  change  to  a 
blackish  or  dark-|ray  colour.  They  possess  precisely 
the  same  qualities  as  the  Cayenne  pepper,  only  in  a 
weaker  degree. 

Piper  lusitanicum-  See  Capsicum  annuum. 

Piper  murale.  See  Sedum  acre. 

Piper  nigrum.  Melanopiper ; Molagocodi ; Lada ; 
Piper  aromaticum.  Black  pepper.  This  species  of' 
pepper  is  obtained  in  the  East  Indies,  from  the  Piper 
—foliis  ovatis  septem-nerviis  glabris,  petiolis  simpli- 
eissimis , of  Linmeus.  Its  virtues  are  similar  to  those  of 
the  other  peppers.  The  black  and  white  pepper  are 
both  obtained  from  the  same  tree,  .the  difference  de- 
pending on  their  preparation  and  degrees  of  maturity. 
Pelletier  has  extracted  a new  vegetable  principle  from 
black  pepper,  in  which  the  active  part  of  the  grain  re- 
sides, to  which  the  name  of  piperine  is  given.  To  ob- 
tain it,  black  pepper  was  digested  repeatedly  in  alko- 
hol,  and  the  solution  evaporated  until  a fatty  resinous 
matter  was  left.  This,  on  being  washed  in  warm 
water,  became  of  a good  green  colour.  It  had  a hot 
and  burning  taste;  dissolved  readily  in  alkohol,  less  so 
in  aether.  Concentrated  sulphuric  acid  gave  it  a fine 
scarlet  colour.  The  alkoholic  solution  after  some  days 
deposited  crystals ; which  were  purified  by  repeated 
crystallization  in  alkohol  and  aether.  They  then  form- 
ed colourless  four-sided  prisms,  with  single  inclined 
terminations.  They  have  scarcely  any  taste.  Boiling 
water  dissolves  a small  portion;  but  not  cold  water. 
They  are  soluble  in  acetic  acid,  from  which  combina- 
tion feather-formed  crystals  are  obtained.  This  sub- 
stance fuses  at  212°  F.  The  fatty  matter  left  after  ex- 
tracting the  piperine,  is  solid  at  a temperature  near 
32°,  but  liquefies  at  a slight  heat.  It  has  an  extremely 
bitter  and  acrid  taste,  is  very  slightly  volatile,  tending 
rather  to  decompose  than  to  rise  in  vapour.  It  may  be 
considered  as  composed  of  two  oils,  one  volatile  and 
balsamic ; the  other  more  fixed,  and  containing  the  ac- 
rimony of  the  pepper. 

PIPERINE.  The  active  principle  of  pepper.  See 
Piper  nigrum. 

Piperi'tis.  (From  piper,  pepper : so  called  because 
its  leaves  and  roots  are  biting  like  pepper  to  the  taste.) 
The  herb  dittany  or  lepidium  and  peppermint. 

PIPERITUS.  (From piper,  pepper.)  Peppered. 

PIPERIT^E.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting 
of  the  Piper,  and  such  as,  like  it,  have  flowers  in  a 
thick  spike. 

Piramidalia  corpora.  See  Corpus  pyramidale. 

PIRAMIDA'LIS.  (So  called  from  its  form.)  Of  a 
pyramidal  figure. 

Piss-a-licd.  See  Leontodon  taraxacum. 

PISIFORM.  (Pisiformis ; from  pisum,  a pea,  and 
forma,  likeness.)  Pea-like. 

PISIFO'RME  OS.  The  fourth  bone  of  the  first  row 
of  the  carpus. 

[“Pisolite.  This  variety  of  carbonate  of  lime 
occurs  in  globular  or  spheroidal  concretions,  usually 
about  the  size  of  a pea,  though  sometimes  larger. 
These  concretions  are  composed  of  distinct,  concentric 
layers,  and  almost  invariably  contain  a grain  of  sand, 
or  some  other  foreign,  substance,  as  a nucleus.  The 
pisolite  is  nearly  or  quite  opaque,  and  has  a dull  frac- 
ture. Its  colour  is  usually  white,  often  dull  or  with  a 
shade  of  yellow,  &c. 

“These  concretions,  sometimes  detached  and  scat- 
tered are  more  frequently  united  by  a calcareous 


cement.  Thus  united,  they  form  masses  of  varioui 
sizes,  and  also  continuous  beds,  which  are  sometimes 
covered  with  alluvial  deposites. 

“The  pisolite  has  been  found  chiefly  near  the  warm 
springs  of  Carlsbad  in  Bohemia,  and  the  baths  of  St. 
Philip  in  Tuscany. 

“ The  structure  of  the  pisolite,  and  the  situation  in 
which  it  is  found,  seem  to  indicate  the  mode  of  forma- 
tion. The  particles  of  sand,  or  nuclei  of  these  concre- 
tions, were  probably  raised  and  suspended  by  an  agi- 
tated or  rotary  motion  of  certain  springs  or  streams, 
strongly  impregnated  with  calcareous  particles.  These 
particles  were  then  deposited  around  the  floating  nu- 
clei, which,  being  thus  incrusted  with  a series  of 
layers,  became  sufficiently  heavy  to  fall  through  the 
fluid.”— Clear.  Min.  A.] 

PISMIRE.  See  Formica  rufa. 

Pissaspha'ltus.  (From  niaca,  pitch,  and  aacpaXros, 
bitumen.)  The  thicker  kind  of  rock-oil. 

PISTA'CIA.  (Iltj-a/cia,  supposed  to  be  a Syrian 
word.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan 
system.  Class,  Dieecia  ; Order,  Pentandria. 

Pistacia  lentiscus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  affords  the  mastich.  Mastiche ; Mastix. 
Pistacia — foliis  abrupti  pinnatis,  foliolis  lanceolatis, 
of  Linnaeus.  A native  of  the  south  of  Europe.  In  the 
island  of  Chio,  the  officinalmastich  is  obtained  most 
abundantly ; and,  according  to  Tournefort,  by  making 
transverse  incisions  in  the  bark  of  the  tree,  from  whence 
the  mastich  exudes  in  drops,  which  are  suffered  to  run 
down  to  the  ground,  when,  after  sufficient  time  is  al- 
lowed for  their  concretion,  they  are  collected  for  use. 
Mastich  is  brought  to  us  in  small,  yellowish,  trans- 
parent, brittle  tears,  or  grains ; it  has  a light  agreeable 
smell,  especially  when  rubbed  or  heated ; on  being 
chewed,  it  first  crumbles,  soon  after  sticks  together, 
and  becomes  soft  and  white,  like  wax,  without  impress- 
ing any  considerable  taste.  No  volatile  oil  is  obtained 
from  this  substance  when  distilled  with  water.  Pure 
alkohol  and  oil  of  turpentine  dissolve  it ; water  scarcely 
acts  upon  it ; though  by  mastication  it  becomes  soft  and 
tough,  like  wax.  When  chewed  a little  while,  how- 
ever, it  is  white,  opaque,  and  brittle,  so  as  not  to  be 
softened  again  by  chewing.  The  part  insoluble  in  al- 
kohol much  resembles  in  its  properties  caoutchouc.  It 
is  considered  to  be  a mild  corroborant  and  adstringent ; 
and  as  possessing  a balsamic  power,  it  has  been  recom- 
mended in  haemoptysis,  proceeding  from  ulceration, 
leucorrhcea,  debility  of  the  stomach,  and  in  diarrhoeas 
and  internal  ulcerations.  Chewing  this  drug  has  like- 
wise been  said  tohave  been  of  use  in  pains  of  the  teeth 
and  gums,  an<fin  some  catarrhal  complaints;  it  is,  how- 
ever, in  the  present  day,  seldom  used  either  externally 
or  internally.  The  wood  abounds  with  the  resinous 
principle,  and  a tincture  may  be  obtained  from  it, 
which  is  esteemed  in  some  countries  in  the  cure  of 
haemorrhages,  dysenteries,  and  gout. 

Pistacia  nux.  See  Pistacia  vera. 

Pistacia  terebinthus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  tree  which  gives  out  the  Cyprus  turpentine.  Tere- 
bintliina  de  Chio.  Chio  or  Chian  turpentine.  This 
substance  is  classed  among  the  resins.  It  is  procured 
by  wounding  the  bark  of  the  trunk  of  the  tree.  The 
best  Chio  turpentine  is  about  the  consistence  of  honey, 
very  tenacious,  clear,  and  almost  transparent;  of  a 
white  colour,  inclining  to  yellow,  and  a fragrant  smell, 
moderately  warm  to  the  taste,  but  free  from  acrimony 
and  bitterness.  Its  medicinal  qualifies  are  similar  to 
those  of  the  other  turpentines.  See  Turpentines. 

Pistacia  vera.  The  systematic  name  of  a large 
tree,  which  affords  the  pistachio-nut.  Pistacia  vera — 
foliis  impari  pinnatis — foliolis  subovatis  recurvis,  of 
Linmeus.  An  oblong  pointed  nut,  about  the  size  and 
shape  of  a filbert,  including  a kernel  of  a pale  greenish 
colour,  covered  with  a yellow  or  greenish  skin.  Pista- 
chio-nuts have  a sweetish  unctuous  taste,  resembling 
that  of  sweet  almonds,  and,  like  the  latter,  afford  an  oil, 
and  may  be  formed  into  an  emulsion. 

Pistachio-nut.  See  Pistacia  vera. 

Pistacite.  See  F.pidote. 

PISTILLUM.  ( Pistillum , a pestle,  from  its  like- 
ness.) A pistil  or  pointal : the  female  genital  organ  of 
a flower,  which,  being  no  less  essential  than  the  male, 
stands  within  them  in  the  centre  of  the  flower.  Lin- 
naeus conceived  the  pistil  originated  from  the  pith,  and 
the  stamens  from  the  wood,  and  hence  constructed  an 
ingenious  hypothesis  relative  to  the  propagation  of 


PIT 


PLA 


vegetables,  which  is  not  destitute  of  observations  and 
analogies  to  support  it,  but  not  countenanced  by  the 
anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  parts. 

A pistil  consists  of  three  parts. 

1.  The  germen , or  rudiment  of  the  young  fruit  and 
seed,  which  of  course  is  essential. 

2.  The  stylus , or  style,  various  in  length  and  thick- 
ness, sometimes  wanting,  and,  when  present,  serving 
merely  to  elevate  the  third  part. 

3.  The  stigma , which  is  indispensable.  The  JVico- 
tiana  tabacum  ha?  these  organs  well  displayed. 

Pistolo'chia.  (From  nts’os,  faithful,  and  Xoj££ta, 
parturition : so  called  because  it  was  thought  to  pro- 
mote delivery.)  Birthwort.  See  Aristolochia. 

PISUM.  (An  ancient  name,  the  origin  of  which  is 
lost  in  its  antiquity.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  Decandria.  The  pea. 

Pisum  sativum.  The  common  pea.  A very  nutri- 
tious, but  somewhat  flatulent  article  of  food. 

PITCAIRN,  Archibald,  was  born  at  Edinburgh,  in 
1652.  He  applied  to  the  study  of  divinity,  and  after- 
ward of  the  law,  in  that  university,  with  such  intensity, 
that  he  was  threatened  with  symptoms  of  consumption, 
for  the  removal  of  which  he  went  to  Montpelier,  where 
his  attention  was  diverted  to  medicine ; on  his  return, 
he  applied  himself  zealously  to  the  mathematics,  which 
appearing  to  him  capable  (ff  elucidating  medical  sub- 
jects, he  was  determined  in  consequence  to  adopt  this 
profession.  After  attending  diligently  to  the  various 
branches  at  Edinburgh,  he  went  to  complete  his  me- 
dical studies  at  Paris,  and  then  returned  to  settle  in  his 
native  place,  where  he  quickly  obtained  a large  prac- 
tice and  extensive  reputation.  In  1688  he  published  a 
little  tract  to  establish  Harvey’s  claim  to  the  Discovery 
of  the  Circulation.  About  four  years  after  he  was  in- 
vited to  become  professor  of  physic  at  Leyden,  which 
he  accepted  accordingly ; and  he  ranked  among  his 
pupils  the  celebrated  Boerhaave.  However,  his  ma- 
thematical illustrations  of  medicine  not  being  favour- 
ably received,  he  relinquished  the  appointment  in  about 
a year.  He  returned  then  to  practise  at  Edinburgh, 
where  his  life  terminated  in  1713.  He  published  while 
at  Leyden,  and  subsequently,  several  dissertations  to 
prove  the  utility  of  mathematics  in  medical  discussion  ; 
which  were  more  than  once  reprinted.  After  his 
death,  his  lectures  were  made  public,  under  the  title  of 
“ Elementa  Medicine  Physico-Mathematica.” 

PITCH.  Fix.  See  Resina. 

Pitch , Burgundy.  See  Pinus  abies. 

Pitch , Jews'.  See  Bitumen  judaicum. 

Pitch-tree.  See  Pinus  abies. 

PITCHSTONE.  A subspecies  of  indivisible  quartz 
of  a green  colour,  and  vitreo-resinous  lustre  found  in 
Scotland  and  Ireland. 

Pitta'cium.  (From  rnTra , pitch.)  A pitch  plaster. 

Pittizite.  Pitchy  iron  ore. 

Pitto  ta.  (From itiTra,  pitch.)  Medicines  in  which 
pitch  is  the  principal  ingredient. 

PITUI'TA.  Phlegm,  that  is,  viscid  and  glutinous 
mucus. 

PITUITARY.  Of  or  belonging  to  phlegm. 

Pituitary  gland.  Olandula  pituitaria.  A gland 
situated  within  the  cranium,  between  a duplicature 
of  the  dura  mater,  in  the  sella  turcica  of  the  sphenoid 
bone. 

Pituitary  membrane.  Membrana  pituitaria. 
Schneiderian  membrane.  The  mucous  membrane 
that  lines  the  nostrils  and  sinuses,  communicating  with 
the  nose,  is  so  called,  because  it  secretes  the  mucus  of 
those  parts,  to  which  the  ancients  assigned  the  name 
of  pituita. 

PITYRI'ASIS.  (From  niTvpov , bran:  so  named 
from  its  branny-like  appearance.)  A genus  in  the  se- 
cond order,  or  scaly  diseases,  of  Dr.  Willan’s  cutaneous 
diseases.  The  pityriasis  consists  of  irregular  patches 
of  small  thin  scales,  which  repeatedly  form  and  sepa- 
rate, but  never  collect  into  crusts,  nor  are  attended  with 
redness  or  inflammation,  as  in  the  lepra  and  scaly  tet- 
ter. Dr.  Willan  distinguishes  pityriasis  from  the  por- 
rigo  of  the  Latins,  which  has  a more  extensive  signifi- 
cation, and  comprehends  a disease  of  the  scalp,  ter- 
minating in  ulceration;  whereas  the  former  is,  by  the 
ben  Greek  authors,  represented  as  always  dry  and 
scaly.  Thus,  according  to  Alexander  and  Paulus,  pity- 
riasis is  characterized  by  “ the  separation  of  slight  fur- 
furaceous  substances  from  the  surface  of  the  head,  or 
other  parts  of  the  body,  without  ulceration.”  Their 


account  of  this  appearance  is  conformable  to  expert 
ence , and  the  two  varieties  of  it  which  they  have 
pointed  out  may  be  denominated,  Pityriasis  capitis , 
and  Pityriasis  versicolor. 

1.  Pityriasis  capitis , when  it  affects  very  young  in- 
fants, is  termed  by  nurses  the  daudrifF.  It  appears  at 
the  upper  edge  of  the  forehead  and  temples,  as  a slight 
whitish  scurf  set  in  the  form  of  a horse-shoe;  on  other 
parts  of  the  head  there  are  large  scales,  at  a distance 
from  each  other,  flat,  and  semipellucid.  Sometimes, 
however,  they  nearly  cover  the  whole  of  the  hairy 
scalp,  being  close  together,  and  imbricated.  A similar 
appearance  may  take  place  in  adults;  but  it  is  usually 
the  effect  of  lepra,  scaly  tetter,  or  some  general  disease 
of  the  skin. 

Elderly  persons  have  the  pityriasis  capitis  in  nearly 
the  same  form  as  infants ; the  only  difference  is,  that 
this  complaint  in  old  people  occasions  larger  exfolia- 
tions of  the  cuticle. 

2.  The  pityriasis  versicolor  chiefly  affects  the  arms, 
breast,  and  abdomen.  It  is  diffused  very  irregularly ; 
and  being  of  a different  colour  from  the  usual  skin 
colour,  it  exhibits  a singular  chequered  appearance. 
These  irregular  patches,  which  are  at  first  small,  and 
of  a brown  or  yellow  hue,  appear  at  the  scrobiculus 
cordis,  about  the  mammae,  clavicles,  &c.  Enlarging 
gradually,  they  assume  a tesselated  form;  in  other 
cases  they  are  branched,  so  as  to  resemble  the  foliace- 
ous  lichens  growing  on  the  bark  of  trees ; and  some- 
times when  the  discoloration  is  not  continuous,  they 
suggest  the  idea  of  a map  being  distributed  on  the  skin 
like  islands,  continents,  peninsulas,  &c.  All  the  dis- 
coloured parts  are  slightly  rough,  with  minute  scales, 
which  soon  fall  off,  but  are  constantly  replaced  by 
others.  This  scurf,  or  scaliness,  is  most  conspicuous 
on  the  sides  and  epigastric  region.  The  cuticular  lines 
are  somewhat  deeper  in  the  patches  than  on  the  con- 
tiguous parts ; but  there  is  no  elevated  border,  or  dis- 
tinguishing boundary  between  the  discoloured  part  of 
the  skin,  and  that  which  retains  its  natural  colour 
The  discoloration  rarely  extends  over  the  whole  body. 
It  is  strongest  and  fullest  round  the  umbilicus,  on  the 
breasts,  and  sides;  it  seldom  appears  in  the  skin  over 
the  sternum,  or  along  the  spine  of  the  back.  Inter- 
stices of  proper  skin  colour  are  more  numerous,  and 
largest  at  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen  and  back, 
where  the  scales  are  often  small,  distinct,  and  a little 
depressed.  The  face,  nates,  and  lower  extremities  are 
least  affected ; the  patches  are  found  upon  the  arms, 
but  mostly  on  the  inside,  where  they  are  distinct  and 
of  different  sizes.  The  pityriasis  versicolor  is  not  a 
cuticular  disease;  for  when  the  cuticle  is  abraded  from 
any  of  the  patches,  the  sallow  colour  remains  as  be- 
fore in  the  skin  or  rete  mucosum.  This  singular  ap- 
pearance is  not  attended  with  any  internal  disorder, 
nor  with  any  troublesome  symptom,  except  a little 
itching  or  irritation  felt  on  getting  into  bed,  and  after 
strong  exercise,  or  drinking  warm  liquors.  There  is 
in  some  cases  a slight  exanthema,  partially  distributed 
among  the  discoloured  patches ; and  sometimes  an  ap- 
pearance like  the  lichen  pilaris ; but  eruptions  of  this 
kind  are  not  permanent,  neither  do  they  produce  any 
change  in  the  original  form  of  the  complaint.  The 
duration  of  the  pityriasis  versicolor  is  always  consider- 
able. Dr.  Willan  has  observed  its  continuance  in  some 
persons  for  four,  five,  or  six  years.  It  is  not  limited  to 
any  age  or  sex.  Its  causes  are  not  pointed  out  with 
certainty.  Several  patients  have  referred  it  to  fruit 
taken  in  too  great  quantities ; some  have  thought  it 
was  produced  by  eating  mushrooms ; others  by  expo- 
sure to  sudden  alterations  of  cold  and  heat.  In  some 
individuals,  who  had  an  irritable  skin,  and  occasion- 
ally used  violent  exercise,  the  complaint  has  been  pro- 
duced, or  at  least  much  aggravated,  by  wearing  flannel 
next  to  the  skin.  It  is  likewise  often  observed  in  per- 
sons who  had  resided  for  a length  of  time  in  a tropical 
climate. 

PIX.  (Ptz,  picis,  f. ; from  maaa.)  Pitch.  See 
Resina. 

Pix  arida.  See  Pinus  abies. 

Pix  burbundica.  See  Pinus  abies. 

Pix  li  quid  a.  Tar  or  liquid  pitch.  See  Pinus  syl- 

vestris. 

PLACE'BO.  I will  please:  an  epithet  given  to  any 
medicine  adapted  more  to  please  than  benefit  the  pa- 
tient. „ . 

PLACE'NTA.  (From  *Xa* ovj,  a cake,  so  callefl 


fr  om  its  resemblance  to  a cake.)  The  afterbirth.  The 
membranes  of  the  ovum  have  usually  been  mentioned 
as  two,  the  amnion  and  the  chorion;  and  the  latter 
has  again  been  divided  into  the  true  and  the  false. 
The  third  membrane  (which,  from  its  appearance,  has 
likewise  been  called  the  villous  or  spongy,  and  from 
the  consideration  of  it  as  the  inner  lamina  of  the  ute- 
rus, cast  off  like  the  exuviae  of  some  animals,  the  de- 
cidua,) has  been  described  by  Harvey,  not  as  one  of 
the  membranes  of  the  ovum,  but  as  a production  of 
the  uterus.  The  following  is  the  order  of  the  mem- 
branes of  the  ovum,  at  the  full  period  of  gestation : 1st, 
There  is  the  outer  or  connecting,  which  is  flocculent, 
spongy,  and  extremely  vascular,  completely  investing 
the  whole  ovum,  and  lining  the  uterus.  2dly,  The 
middle  membrane,  which  is  nearly  pellucid,  with  a 
very  few  small  blood-vessels  scattered  over  it,  and 
which  forms  a covering  to  the  placenta  and  funis,  but 
does  not  pass  between  the  placenta  and  uterus.  3dly, 
The  inner  membrane,  which  is  transparent,  of  a firmer 
texture  than  the  others,  and  lines  the  whole  ovum, 
making,  like  the  middle  membrane,  a covering  for  the 
placenta  and  funis  with  the  two  last.  The  ovum  is 
clothed  when  it  passes  from  the  ovarium  into  the  ute- 
rus, where  the  first  is  provided  for  its  reception. 

These  membranes,  in  the  advanced  state  of  preg- 
nancy, cohere  slightly  to  each  other,  though,  in  some 
ova,  there  is  a considerable  quantity  of  fluid  collected 
between  them,  which,  being  discharged  when  one  of 
the  outer  membranes  is  broken,  forms  one  of  the  cir- 
cumstances which  have  been  distinguished  by  the 
name  of  by  or  false  waters. 

Between  the  middle  and  inner  membrane,  upon  or 
near  the  funis,  there  is  a small,  flat,  and  oblong  body, 
which,  in  the  early  part  Of  pregnancy,  seems  to  be  a 
vesicle  containing  milky  lymph,  which  afterward  be- 
comes of  a firm,  and  .apparently  fatty  texture.  This 
is  called  the  vesicula  umbilicalis  ; but  its  use  is  not 
known. 

The  placenta  is  a circular,  flat,  vascular,  and  appa- 
rently fleshy  substance,  different  in  its  diameter  in  dif- 
ferent subjects,  but  usually  extending  about  six  inches, 
or  upwards,  over  about  one-fourth  part  of  the  outside 
of  the  ovum  in  pregnant  women.  It  is  more  than  one 
inch  in  thickness  in  the  middle,  and  becomes  gradually 
thinner  towards  the  circumference  from  which  the 
membranes  are  continued.  The  placenta  is  the  prin- 
cipal medium  by  which  the  communication  between 
the  parent  and  child  is  preserved;  but,  though  all  have 
allowed  the  importance  of  the  office  which  it  performs, 
there  has  been  a variety  of  opinions  on  the  nature  of 
that  office,  and  of  the  manner  in  which  it  is  executed. 

The  surface  of  the  placenta,  which  is  attached  to 
the  uterus  by  the  intervention  of  the  connecting  mem- 
brane, is  tabulated  and  convex ; but  the  other,  which 
is  covered  with  the  amnion  and  chorion,  is  concave 
and  smooth,  except  the  little  eminence  made  by  the 
blood-vessels.  It  is  seldom  found  attached  to  the  same 
part  of  the  uterus  in  two  successive  births ; and,  though 
it  most  frequently  adheres  to  the  anterior  part,  it  is  oc- 
casionally fixed  to  any  other,  even  to  the  os  uteri,  in 
which  state  it  becomes  a cause  of  a dangerous  haemor- 
rhage at  the  time  of  parturition.  The  placenta  is  com- 
posed of  arteries  and  veins,  with  a mixture  of  pulpy 
or  cellular  substance.  Of  these  vessels  there  are  two 
orders,  very  curiously  interwoven  with  each  other. 
The  first  is  a continuation  of  those  from  the  funis, 
which  ramify  on  the  internal  surface  of  the  placenta, 
the  arteries  running  over  the  veins,  which  is  a circum- 
stance peculiar  to  the  placenta  ; and  then,  sinking  into 
its  substance,  anastomose  and  divide  into  innumerable 
small  branches.  The  second  order  proceeds  from  the 
uterus ; and  these  ramify  in  a similar  manner  with 
those  from  the  funis,  as  appears  wheu  a placenta  is  in- 
jected from  those  of  the  parent.  The  veins,  in  their 
ramifications,  accompany  the  arteries  as  in  other  parts. 
There  have  been  many  different  opinions  with  respect 
to  the  manner  in  which  the  blood  circulates  between 
the  parent  and  child,  during  its  continuance  in  the 
uterus.  For  a long  time  it  was  believed  that  the  inter- 
course between  them  was  uninterrupted,  and  that  the 
blood  propelled  by  the  powers  of  the  parent  pervaded, 
by  a continuance  of  the  same  force,  the  vascular  sys- 
tem of  the  foetus  ; but  repeated  attempts  having  been 
made,  without  success,  to  inject  the  whole  placenta, 
funis  and  foetus,  from  the  vessels  of  the  parent,  or  any 
part  of  the  uterus,  from  the  vessels  of  the  funis  it  is 


now  generally  allowed,  that  the  two  systems  of  vessels 
in  the  placenta,  one  of  which  may  be  called  maternal, 
the  other  foetal,  are  distinct.  It  is  also  admitted,  that 
the  blood  of  the  foetus  is,  with  regard  to  its  formation, 
increase,  and  circulation,  unconnected  with,  and  total 
ly  independent  of  the  parent ; except  that  the  matter 
by  which  the  blood  of  the  foetus  is  formed  must  be  de 
rived  from  the  parent.  It  is  thought  that  which  has 
probably  undergone  some  preparatory  changes  in  its 
passage  through  the  uterus,  is  conducted  by  the  uterine 
or  maternal  arteries  of  the  placenta  to  some  cells  or 
small  cavities,  in  which  it  is  deposited : and  that  some 
part  of  it,  or  something  secreted  from  it,  is  absorbed 
by  the  foetal  veins  of  the  placenta,  and  by  them  con- 
veyed to  the  foetus  for  its  nutriment.  When  the  blood 
which  circulates  in  the  foetus  requires  any  alteration 
in  its  qualities,  or  when  it  has  gone  through  the  course 
of  the  circulation,  it  is  carried  by  the  arteries  of  the 
funis  to  the  placenta,  in  the  cells  of  which  it  is  depo- 
sited, and  then  absorbed  by  the  maternal  veins  of  the 
placenta,  and  conducted  to  the  uterus,  whence  it  may 
enter  the  common  circulation  of  the  parent.  Thus  it 
appears,  according  to  the  opinion  of  Harvey,  that  the 
placenta  performs  the  office  of  a gland,  conveying  air, 
or  secreting  the  nutritious  juices  from  the  blood  brought 
from  the  parent  by  the  arteries  of  the  uterus,  and  car- 
ried to  the  foetus  by  the  veins  of  the  funis,  in  a manner 
probably  not  unlike  to  that  in  which  milk  is  secreted 
and  absorbed  from  the  breasts.  The  veins  in  the  pla- 
centa are  mentioned  as  the  absorbents,  because  no  lym- 
phatic vessels  have  yet  been  found  in  the  placenta  or 
funis;  nor  are  there  any  nerves  in  these  parts;  so  that 
the  only  communication  hitherto  discovered  between 
the  parent  and  child,  is  by  the  sanguineous  system. 
The  proofs  of  the  manner  in  which  the  blood  circulates 
between  the  parent  and  child  are  chiefly  drawn  from 
observations  made  upon  the  funis.  When  it  was  sup- 
posed that  the  child  was  supplied  with  blood  in  a di- 
rect stream  from  the  parent,  it  was  asserted  that,  on 
the  division  of  the  funis,  if  that  part  next  to  the  pla- 
centa was  not  secured  by  a ligature,  the  parent  would 
be  brought  into  extreme  danger  by  the  hasmorrhage 
which  must  necessarily  follow.  But  this  opinion, 
which  laid  the  foundation  of  several  peculiarities  in 
the  management  of  the  funis  and  placenta,  is  proved 
not  to  be  true : for,  if  the  funis  be  compressed  imme- 
diately after  the  birth  of  the  child,  and  while  the  circu- 
lation in  it  is  going  on,  the  arteries  between  the  part 
compressed  and  the  child  throb  violently,  but  those  be- 
tween the  compression  and  the  placenta  have  no  pulsa- 
tion ; but  the  vein  between  the  part  compressed  and 
the  placenta  swells,  and  that  part  next  to  the  foetus 
becomes  flaccid ; but  if,  under  the  same  circumstances, 
the  funis  be  divided,  and  that  part  next  the  child  be 
not  secured,  the  child  would  be  in  danger  of  losing  its 
life  by  the  haemorrhage ; yet  the  mother  would  suffer 
no  inconvenience  if  the  other  part  was  neglected.  It 
is,  moreover,  proved,  that  a woman  may  die  of  an 
haemorrhage  occasioned  by  a separation  of  the  pla- 
centa, and  the  child  be  nevertheless  born,  after  her 
death,  in  perfect  health.  But  if  the  placenta  be  in 
jured,  without  separation,  either  by  the  rupture  of  the 
vessels  which  pass  upon  its  inner  surface,  or  in  any 
other  way,  the  child  being  deprived  of  its  proper  blood, 
would  perish,  yet  the  parent  might  escape  without 
injury. 

The  receptacle  of  the  fructification  of  plants  has 
been  called  placenta.  See  Reccptaculum 

Place'ntula.  (Diminutive  of  placenta.)  A small 
placenta. 

Pladaro'tis.  (From  n XaJapoj,  moist,  flaccid.)  A 
fungous  and  flaccid  tumour  within  the  eyelid. 

Plaited  leaf.  See  Plicatus. 

PLANT A'GO.  (From  plavta,  the  sole  of  the  feet : 
so  called  from  the  shape  of  its  leaves,  or  because  its 
leaves  lie  upon  the  ground  and  are  trodden  upon.)  1. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnasan  sys- 
tem. Class,  Telrandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  The 
plantain. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  Plantago  major. 

Plantago  coro  no  pus.  The  systematic  “name  of 
the  buck’s-horn  plantain.  Coronopodium  ; Cornu  cer- 
vinum;  Stella  terree.  Its  medicinal  virtues  aie  the 
same  as  those  of  the  other  plantains. 

Plantago  latifolia.  See  Plantago  major. 

Plantago  major.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
broad-leaved  plantain.  Centincrvia ; Heptapleurum  ; 


PLA 


PLA 


Polyneuron  ; Plantago  latifolia.  Plantago — foliis 

vvatis  glabris,  scapo  tereti , spica  flosculis  imbricatis , 
of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  was  retained  until  very  lately 
in  the  Materia  Medica  of  the  Edinburgh  College,  in 
which  the  leaves  are  mentioned  as  the  pharmaceutical 
part  of  the  plant;  they  have  a weak  herbaceous  smell, 
an  austere,  bitterish,  subsaline  taste  ; and  their  quali- 
ties are  said  to  be  refrigerant,  attenuating,  substyptic, 
and  diuretic. 

Plantago  psyllium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
branching  plantain.  Psyllium;  Pulicaris  lierba; 
Crvstallion , and  Cynomoia , of  Oribasius.  Flea-wort. 
The  seeds  of  this  plant,  Plantago — caule  ramoso  her- 
baceo,  folds  subdentatis , recurvatis  ; capitulis  aphyl- 
lis,  of  Linnaeus,  have  a nauseous  mucilaginous  taste, 
and  no  remarkable  smell.  The  decoction  of  the  seeds 
is  recommended  in  hoarseness  and  asperity  of  the  fauces. 

PLANTAIN.  See  Plantago. 

PLANTAIN-TREE.  See  Musa paradisiaca. 

PLANTARIS.  (From  planta,  the  sole  of  the  foot.) 
Tibialis  gracilis , vulgo  plantaris,  of  Winslow.  Ex- 
tmsor  tarsi  minor , vulgo  plantaris , of  Douglas.  A 
muscle  of  the  foot,  situated  on  the  leg,  that  assists  the 
soleus,  and  pulls  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  knee 
from  between  the  bones.  It  is  sometimes,  though  sel- 
dom, found  wanting  on  both  sides.  This  long  and 
slender  muscle,  which  is  situated  under  the  gastrocne- 
mius externus,  arises,  By  a thin  fleshy  origin,  from  the 
upper  and  back  part  of  the  outer  condyle  of  the  os 
femori^.  It  adheres  to  the  capsular  ligament  of  the 
mint ; and  after  running  obliquely  downwards  and  out- 
wards, for  the  space  of  three  or  four  inches,  along  the 
second  origin  of  the  gastrocnemius  internus,  and  under 
the  gastrocnemius  externus,  terminates  in  a long,  thin, 
and  slender  tendon,  which  adheres  to  the  inside  of  the 
tendo  Achilles,  and  is  inserted  into  the  inside  of  the 
posterior  part  of  the  os  calcis.  This  tendon  sometimes 
sends  off  an  aponeurosis  that  loses  itself  in  the  capsular 
ligament,  but  it  does  not  at  all  contribute  to  form  the 
aponeurosis  that  is  spread  over  the  sole  of  the  foot,  as 
was  formerly  supposed,  and  as  its  name  would  seem  to 
imply.  Its  use  is  to  assist  the  gastrocnemii  in  extend- 
ing the  foot.  It  likewise  serves  to  prevent  the  capsular 
ligament  of  the  knee  from  being  pinched. 

PLANTS,  sexual  system  of.  The  sexual  system 
> of  plants  was  invented  by  the  immortal  Linnaeus,  pro- 
: lessor  of  physic  and  botany  at  Upsal,  in  Sweden.  It  is 
founded  on  the  parts  of  fructification,  viz.  the  stamens 
and  pistils;  these  having  been  observed  with  more 
accuracy  since  the  discovery  of  the  uses  for  which  na- 
ture has  assigned  them,  a new  set  of  principles  has 
been  derived  from  them,  by  means  of  which  the  distri- 
bution of  plants  has  been  brought  to  a greater  preci- 
sion, and  rendered  more  conformable  to  true  philo- 
sophy, in  this  system,  than  in  any  one  of  those  which 
preceded  it.  The  author  does  not  pretend  to  call  it  a 
natural  system,  he  gives  it  as  artificial  only,  and  mo- 
destly ovyns  his  inability  to  detect  the  order  pursued  by 
nature  in  her  vegetable  productions;  but  of  this  he 
seems  confident,  that  no  natural  order  can  ever  be 
framed  without  taking  in  the  materials  out  of  which 
he  has  raised  his  own  ; and  urges  the  necessity  of  ad- 
mitting artificial  systems  for  convenience,  till  one  truly 
natural  shall  appear.  Linnaeus  has  given  us  his  Frag- 
menta  methodi  naturalis^  in  which  he  has  made  a dis- 
tribution of  plants  under  various  orders,  putting  toge- 
ther in  each  such  as  appear  to  have  a natural  affinity 


to  each  other ; this,  after  a long  and  fruitless  search 
after  the  natural  method,  he  gives  as  the  result  of  his 
own  speculation,  for  the  assistance  of  such  as  may 
engage  in  the  same  pursuit. 

Not  able  to  form  a system  after  the  natural  method. 
Linnaeus  was  more  fully  convinced  of  the  absolute 
necessity  *>f  adopting  an  artificial  one.  For  the  stu- 
dent to  enter  into  the  advantages  this  system  maintains 
over  all  others,  it  is  necessary  that  Jie  be  instructed  in 
the  science  of  botany,  which  will  amply  repay  him  for 
his  inquiry.  The  following  is  a short  outline  of  the 
sexual  system. 

The  parts  of  fructification  of  a plant  are, 

1.  The  calyx,  called  also  the  empalement,  or  flower- 
cup.  See  Calyx , and  Anthodium. 

2.  The  corolla,  or  foliation,  which  is  the  gaudy  part 
of  the  flower,  called  vulgarly  the  leaves  of  the  flower. 
See  Corolla. 

3.  The  stamens,  or  threads,  called  also  the  chives  ; 
these  are  considered  as  the  male  parts  of  the  flower. 
See  Stamen. 

4.  The  pistil,  or  pointal,  which  is  the  female  part 

See  Pistillum. 

5.  The  seed-vessel.  See  Pericarpiuni. 

6.  The  seed.  See  Semen. 

7.  The  receptacle , or  base,  on  which  these  parts  are 
sweated.  See  Receptaculum. 

The  first  four,  are  properly  parts  of  the  flower,  and 
the  last  three  parts  of  the  fruit.  It  is  from  the  number 
proportion,  position,  and  other  circumstances  attending 
these  parts  of  the  fructification,  that  the  classes  and 
orders,  and  the  genera  they  contain,  are  to  be  charac- 
terized, according  to  the  sexual  system. 

Such  flowers  as  want  the  stamens,  and  have  the 
pistil,  are  termed  female. 

Those  flowers  which  have  the  stamens,  and  want 
the  pistils,  are  called  male. 

Flowers  which  have  both  stamens  and  pistils  are 
said  to  be  hermaphrodite. 

Neuter  flowers  are  such  as  have  neither  stamens 
nor  pistils. 

Hermaphrodite  flowers  are  sometimes  distinguished 
into  male  hermaphrodites  and  female  hermaphrodites. 
This  distinction  takes  place  when,  although  the  flower 
contains  the  parts  belonging  to  each  sex,  one  of  them 
proves  abortive  or  ineffectual ; if  the  defect  be  in  the 
stamina,  it  is  a female  hermaphrodite,  if  in  the  pistil, 
a male  one. 

Plants,  in  regard  to  sex,  take  also  their  denomina- 
tions in  the  following  manner : 

1.  Hermaphrodite  plants  are  such  as  bear  flowers 
upon  the  same  root  that  are  all  hermaphrodite. 

2.  Androgynous  plants  are  such  as,  upon  the  same 
root,  bear  both  male  and  female  flowers,  distinct  from 
each  other,  that  is,  in  separate  flowers. 

3.  Male  plants,  such  as  bear  male  flowers  only  upon 
the  same  root. 

4.  Female  plants , such  as  bear  female  flowers  only 
upon  the  same  root. 

5.  Polygamous  plants,  such  as,  either  on  the  same 
or  on  difterent  roots,  bear  hermaphrodite  flowers,  and 
flowers  of  either  or  both  sexes. 

The  first  general  division  of  the  whole  body  of  vege- 
tables is,  in  the  sexual  system,  into  twenty-four  classes  ; 
these  again  are  subdivided  into  orders  ; the  orders  into 
genera;  the  genera  into  species;  and  the  species  into 
varieties,  where  they  are  worthy  of  note. 


A Table  of  the  Classes  and  Orders. 


Classes. 

1.  Monandria. 

2.  Diandria. 

3.  Triandria. 

4. *Tetrandria. 

5.  Pentandria. 

6 Hexandria. 

7.  Heptandria. 

8.  Octandria. 

9.  Enneandria. 

10.  Decandria. 

11.  Dodecandria. 

12.  Icosandria. 

13.  Polyandria. 

14.  Didynamia. 

15.  Tetradynamia. 

16.  Monadelphia. 

188 


Orders. 

Monogynia.  Digynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Tetragvnia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Tetragynia.  Pentagynia.  Polygynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Tetragynia.  Polygynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Tetragynia.  Heptagynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Tetragynia. 

Monogynia.  Trigynia.  Hexagynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Pentagynia.  Decagynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Pentagynia.  Dodecagynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Pentagynia.  Polygynia. 

Monogynia.  Digynia.  Trigynia.  Tetragynia.  Pentagynia.  Hexagynia.  Polygynia 

Gymnospermia.  Angiospermia. 

Siliculosa.  Siliquosa. 

Tentandria.  Decandria.  Enneandria.  Dodecandria.  Polyandria. 


PLA 


PLA 


Classes. 
17  Diadelphia. 

18.  Polyadelphia. 

19.  Syngenesia. 

20.  Gynandria. 

21.  Monoecia. 

22.  Dioecia. 


Orders, 

Pentandria.  Hexandria. 

Pentandria.  Icosandria.  Polyandria. 

Polygamia  sequalis.  Polygamla  superflua.  Polygamia  frustranea.  Polygamia  necessaria, 
Polygamia  segregata.  Monogamia. 

Diandria.  Triandria.  Tetrandria.  Pentandria.  Hexandria.  Decandria.  Dodecandria. 
Polyandria. 

Monandria.  Diandria.  Triandria.  Tetrandria.  Pentandria.  Hexandria.  Heptandria. 

Polyandria.  Monadelphia.  Syngenesia.  Gynandria. 

Monandria.  Diandria.  Triandria.  Tetrandria.  Pentandria.  Hexandria.  Octandria. 
Enneandria.  Decandria.  Dodecandria.  Polyandria.  Monadelphia.  Syngenesia. 
Gynandria. 

Monoecia.  Dioecia.  Trioecia. 

Filices.  Musci.  Algae.  Fungi. 

Palmae. 


23.  Polygamia. 

24.  Cryptogamia. 

Appendix. 

PLA'NUM  OS.  (Planus,  soft,  smooth  ; applied  to 
a bone  whose  surface  is  smooth  or  flat)  The  papy- 
raceous or  orbital  portion  of  the  ethmoiawone  was  for- 
merly so  called. 

PLANUS.  Flat.  Applied  to  the  receptacle  of  the 
fruit  of  plants  ; as  that  of  the  Helianthus  annuus. 

PLASMA.  A mineral  of  grass  or  leek-green  colour. 
It  occurs  in  beds  associated  with  common  calcedony, 
and  found  also  among  the  ruins  at  Rome. 

PLASTER.  See  Emplastrum. 

Plaster , ammoniacum.  See  Emplastrum.  ammo- 
niaci. 

Plaster , ammoniacum , with  mercury.  See  Emplas- 
trum ammoniaci  cum  hydrargyro. 

Plaster , blistering  fly.  See  Emplastrum  cantha- 
ridis. 

Plaster , compound  galbanum.  See  Emplastrum 
galbani  compositum. 

Plaster , compound  pitch.  See  Emplastrum  picis 
compositum. 

Plaster , cumin.  See  Emplastrum  cumini. 

Plaster , lead.  See  Emplastrum  plumbi. 

Plaster,  mercurial.  See  Emplastrum  hydrargyri. 

Plaster  of  opium.  See  Emplastrum  opii. 

blaster  of  Paris.  See  Gypsum. 

Plaster,  resin.  See  Emplastrum  resince. 

Plaster , soap.  See  Emplastrum  saponis. 

Plaster,  wax.  See  Emplastrum  cent. 

PLA'TA.  (FroniirXrmif,  broad.)  The  shoulder-blade. 

PLATER,  Felix,  was  borne  at  Basle,  in  1536,  his 
father  being  principal  of  the  College  there.  He  went  to 
complete  his  medical  studies  at  Montpelier,  where  he 
distinguished  himself  at  an  early  age,  and  obtained  his 
doctor’s  degree  at  twenty.  He  then  settled  in  his  native 
place,  and  four  years  after  was  appointed  to  the  chair 
of  medicine,  and  became  the  confidential  physician  of 
the  princes  and  nobles  of  the  Upper  Rhine.  He  pos- 
sessed an  extensive  knowledge  of  the  branches  of 
science  connected  with  medicine,  and  contributed 
much  to  the  reputation  of  the  University,  where  he 
continued  a teacher  upwards  of  fifty  years.  He  died 
in  1614,  extremely  regretted  by  his  countrymen.  The 
following  are  his  principal  works:  “De  Corporis  Hu- 
mani  Structura  et  Usu,”  in  three  books;  “DeFebri- 
bus  “ Praxeos  Medic®,  tomi  tres;”  “ Observationum 
Medicinalium,  libri  tres.” 

PLATIA'SMUS.  (From  irXarvg,  broad.)  A defect 
in  the  speech  in  consequence  of  too  broad  a mouth. 

PLA'TINUM.  (The  name  platina  was  given  to 
this  metal  by  the  Spaniards,  from  the  word  plata, 
which  signifies  silver  in  their  language,  by  way  of 
comparison  with  that  metal,  whose  colour  it  imitates : 
or  from  the  river  Plata,  near  which  it  is  found.)  Pla- 
tina. A metal  which  exists  in  nature,  only  in  a metal- 
lic state.  Its  ore  has  recently  been  found  to  contain, 
likewise,  four  new  metals,  palladium, iridium,  osmium , 
and  rhodium,  besides  iron  and  chrome.  The  largest 
mass  of  which  we  have  heard,  is  one  of  the  size  of  a 
pigeon’s  egg,  in  possession  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Ber- 
gara.  It  is  found  in  the  parishes  of  Novita  and  Cita- 
ria,  north  from  Choco  in  Peru,  and  near  Carthagena  in 
South  America.  In  was  unknown  in  Europe  before 
the  year  1748.  Don  Antonio  Ulloa  then  gave  the  first 
information  concerning  its  existence,  in  the  narrative 
of  his  voyage  with  the  French  academicians  to  Peru. 

“The  crude  platina  is  to  be  dissolved  in  nitro-mu- 
riatic  acid,  precipitated  by  muriate  of  ammonia,  and 
exposed  to  a very  violent  heat.  Then  the  acid  and 
alkali  are  expelled,  and  the  metal  reduced  in  an  ag- 
glutinated state,  which  is  rendered  more  compact  by 
pressure  while  red-hot. 


Pure  or  refined  platina  is  by  much  the  heaviest  body 
in  nature.  Its  sp.  gr.  is  21.5.  It  is  very  malleable, 
though  considerably  harder  than  either  gold  or  silver ; 
and  it  hardens  much  under  the  hammer.  Its  colour  on 
the  touchstone  is  not  distinguishable  from  that  of  sil- 
ver. Pure  platina  requires  a very  strong  heat  to  melt 
it;  but  when  urged  by  a white  heat,  its  parts  will  ad- 
here together  by  hammering.  This  property,  which  is 
distinguished  by  the  name  of  welding,  is  peculiar  to 
platina  and  iron,  which  resemble  each  other  likewise 
in  their  infusibility. 

Platina  is  not  altered  by  exposure  to  air  ; neither  is 
it  acted  upon  by  the  most  concentrated  simple  acids, 
even  when  boiling,  or  distilled  from  it. 

The  aqua  regia  best  adapted  to  the  solution  of  plati- 
na, is  composed  of  one  part  of  the  nitric  and  three  of 
the  muriatic  acid.  The  solution  does  not  take  place  with 
rapidity.  A small  quantity  of  nitric  oxide  is  disengaged, 
the  colour  of  the  fluid  becoming  first  yellow,  and  after- 
ward of  a deep  reddish-brown,  which,  upon  dilution 
with  water,  is  found  to  be  an  intense  yellow.  This  so- 
lution is  very  corrosive,  and  tinges  animal  matters  of  a 
blackish-brown  colour, it  affords  crystals  by  evaporation. 

Muriate  of  tin  is  so  delicate  a test  of  platina,  that  a 
single  drop  of  the  recent  solutionof  tin  in  muriatic  acid 
gives  a bright  red  colour  to  a solution  of  muriate  of 
platina,  scarcely  distinguishable  front  water. 

If  the  muriatic  solution  of  platina  be  agitated  with 
ether,  the  ether  will  become  impregnated  with  the 
metal.  The  ethereal  solution  is  of  a fine  pale  yellow, 
does  not  stain  the  skin,  and  is  precipitable  by  ammonia 

If  the  nitro-muriatic  solution  of  platina  be  precipi- 
tated by  lime,  and  the  precipitate  digested  in  sulphuric 
acid,  a sulphate  of  platinum  will  be  formed.  A sub- 
nitrate may  be  formed  in  the  same  manner.  Accord- 
ing to  Chenevix,  the  insoluble  sulphate  contains  54.5 
oxideof  platinum,  and  45.5  acid  and  water  ; the  insolu- 
ble muriate,  70  of  oxide ; and  the  subnitrate,  89  of 
oxide ; but  the  purity  of  the  oxide  of  platinum  in  these 
is  uncertain. 

Platinum  does  not  combine  with  sulphur  directly, 
but  is  soluble  by  the  alkaline  sulphurets,  and  precipi- 
tated from  its  nitro-muriatic  solution  by  sulphuretted 
hydrogen. 

Pelletier  united  it  with  phosphorus,  by  projecting 
small  bits  of  phosphorus  on  the  metal  heated  to  redness 
in  a crucible ; or  exposing  to  a strong  heat  four  parts 
each  of  platinum  and  concrete  phosphoric  acid  with 
one  of  charcoal  powder.  The  phosphuret  of  platinum 
is  of  a silvery-white,  very  brittle,  and  hard  enough  to 
strike  fire  with  steel. 

Platinum  unites  with  most  other  metals.  Added  in 
the  proportion  of  one-twelfth  to  gold,  it  forms  a yellow- 
ish white  metal,  highly  ductile,  and  tolerably  elastic. 

Platinum  renders  silver  more  hard,  but  its  colour 
more  dull. 

Copper  is  much  improved  by  alloying  with  platinum 

Alloys  of  platinum  with  tin  and  lead  are  very  apt  to 
tarnish. 

From  its  hardness,  infusibility,  and  difficulty  of 
being  acted  upon  by  most  agents,  platinum  is  of  great 
value  for  making  various  chemical  vessels.  These 
have,  it  is  true,  the  inconvenience  of  being  liable  to- 
erosion  from  the  caustic  alkalies  and  some  of  the  neu- 
tral salts. 

Platinum  is  now  hammered  in  Paris  into  leaves  of 
extreme  thinness.  By  enclosing  a wire  of  it  in  a little 
tube  of  silver,  and  drawing  this  through  a steel  plate  in 
the  usual  way,  Dr.  Wollaston  has  succeeded  in  pro- 
ducing platinum  wire  not  exceeding  l-3000th  of  an 
inch  in  diameter. 

1S9 


PLE 


PLE 


There  are  two  oxides  of  platinum. 

1.  When  100  parts  of  the  protochloride,  or  muriate 
of  platinum  are  calcined,  they  leave  73.3  of  metal ; 26.7 
of  chlorine  escape.  Hence  tne  prime  equivalent  of  the 
metal  would  seem  to  be  12.3.  When  the  above  pro- 
tochloride is  treated  with  caustic  potassa,  it  is  resolved 
into  a black  oxide  of  platinum  and  chloride  of  potas- 
sium. Tliis  oxide  should  consist  of  12.3  metal  + 1 
oxygen. 

2.  The  peroxide  appears  to  contain  three  prime  pro- 
portions. Berzelius  obtained  it  by  treating  the  muriate 
of  platinum  with  sulphuric  acid,  at  a distilling  heat, 
and  decomposing  the  sulphate  by  aqueous  potassa. 
The  precipitated  oxide  is  a yellowish- brown  powder, 
easily  reducible  by  a red  heat  to  the  metallic  state. 

According  to  E.  Davy,  there  are  two  phosphurets 
and  three  sulphurets  of  platinum. 

The  salts  of  platinum  have  the  following  general 
characters : — 

1.  Their  solution  in  water  is  yellowish-brown. 

2.  Potassa  and  ammonia  determine  the  formation  of 
small  orange-coloured  crystals. 

3.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen  throws  down  the  metal  in 
a black  powder. 

Ferro  prussiate  of  potassa  and  infusion  of  galls  occa- 
sion no  precipitate.” 

PLATYCO'RIA.  (From  n\arvs,  broad,  and  /copy , 
the  pupil  of  the  eye.)  An  enlarged  pupil. 

Platyophtha'lmum.  (From  irXaruf,  broad,  and 
otpOaApos,  the  eye:  so  called  because  it  is  used  by 
women  to  enlarge  the  appearance  of  the  eye.)  An- 
timony. 

PLATYPHY'LLUM.  (From  jrX arvs,  broad,  and 
< ivXXov , a leaf.)  Broad-leaved. 

PLATY'SMA-MYOLDES.  (From  irXarus,  broad, 
pv s,  a muscle,  and  eiSog,  resemblance.)  Musculus  cu- 
taneus , of  Winslow.  Quadratus  gence  vel  latissimus 
colli,  of  Douglas.  Latissimus  colli,  of  A Ibinus.  Quad- 
ratus gence, seu  tetragonus,  of  Winslow';  and  thoraco 
maxilli  facial,  of  Dumas.  A thin  muscle  on  the  side 
of  the  neck,  immediately  under  the  skin,  that  assists 
in  drawing  the  skin  of  the  cheek  downwards ; and 
when  the  mouth  is  shut,  it  draws  all  that  part  of  the 
skin  to  which  it  is  connected  below  the  lower  jaw,  up- 
wards. 

Ple'ctai*#.  (From  v:\ektm,  to  fold.)  The  horns 
of  the  uterus. 

Ple'ctrum.  (From  to  strike:  so  named 

from  their  resemblance  to  a drum-stick.)  The  styloid 
process  of  the  temporal  bone,  and  the  uvula. 

PLEMPIUS,  Vopiscus  Fortunatus,  was  born  at 
Amsterdam  in  1601.  lie  commenced  his  medical  stu- 
dies at  Leyden,  then  travelled  for  improvement  to 
Italy,  and  took  his  degree  at  Bologna.  He  settled  as  a 
physician  in  his  native  city,  and  acquired  a high  repu- 
tation there;  whence  he  was  invited  to  a professor- 
ship at  Louvain,,  whither  he  repaired  in  1633.  He 
adopted,  on  this  occasion,  the  Catholic  religion,  and 
took  a new  degree,  in  conformity  with  the  rules  of  the 
university.  He  was  soon  after  nominated  principal 
of  the  college  of  Breugel.  His  death  happened  in 
1671.  He  increased  the  reputation  of  Louvain  by  the 
extent  of  his  attainments,  and  distinguished  himself  in 
all  the  public  questions  that  came  under  discussion. 
He  was  author  of  many  works  in  Latin  and  Dutch; 
in  one  of  which,  entitled  “ Fundamenta,.  seu  Institu- 
tiones  Medicinae,”  he  gave  a satisfactory  proof  of  his 
candour,  by  strenuously  advocating  the  circulation  of 
the  blood,  of  which  he  had  previously  expressed 
doubts. 

PLEONASTE.  See  Celanite. 

Plero'sis.  See  Plethora. 

Plk'smone.  See  Plethora. 

PLETHO  RA.  (From  u\rjQ<a,  to  fill.)  Plesmone. 
Plerosis.  1.  An  excessive  fulness  of  vessels,  or  a re- 
dundance of  blood. 

2.  A fulness  of  habit  or  body. 

Pleumo'nia.  See  Pneumonia. 

PLEU'RA.  nXeupa.  A membrane  which  lines  the 
internal  surface  of  tne  thorax,  and  covers  its  viscera. 
It  forms  a great  process,  the  mediastinum,  which  di- 
vides the  thorax  into  two  cavities.  Its  use  is  to  ren- 
der the  surface  of  the  thorax  moist  by  the  vapour  it 
exhales.  The  cavity  of  the  thorax  is  every  where 
lined  by  this  smooth  and  glistening  membrane,  which 
is  in  reality  two  distinct  portions  or  bags,  which,  by 
being  applied  to  each  other  laterally,  form  the  septum 


called  mediastinum : thus  divides  the  cavity  into  two 
parts,  and  is  attached  posteriorly  to  the  vertebra;  of 
the  back;  and  anteriorly  to  the  sternum.  But  the  two 
laminae,  of  which  this  septum  is  formed,  do  not  every 
where  adhere  to  each  other ; for  at  the  lower  part  of 
the  thorax  they  are  separated,  to  afford  a lodgment 
to  the  heart ; and  at  the  upper  part  of  the  cavity  they 
receive  between  them  the  thymus  gland.  The  pleura 
is  plentifully  supplied  with  arteries  and  veins  from  the 
internal  mammary,  and  the  intercostals.  Its  nerves, 
which  are  very  inconsiderable,  are  derived  chiefly 
from  the  dorsal  and  intercostal  nerves.  The  surface 
of  the  pleura,  like  that  of  the  peritonaeum  and  other 
membranes  lining  cavities,  is  constantly  bedewed  with 
a serous  moisture,  which  prevents  adhesions  of  the 
viscera.  The  mediastinum,  by  dividing  the  breast  into 
two  cavities,  obviates  many  inconveniences  to  which 
we  should  otherwise  be  liable.  It  prevents  the  two 
lobes  of  the  lungs  from  compressing  each  other  when 
we  lie  on  one  side,  and  consequently  contributes  to  the 
freedom  of  respiration,  which  is  disturbed  by  the  least 
pressure  on  the  lungs.  If  the  point  of  a sword  pene- 
trates between  the  ribs  into  the  cavity  of  the  thorax, 
the  lungs  on  that  side  cease  to  perform  their  office, 
because  the  air  being  admitted  through  the  wound, 
prevents  the  dilatation  of  that  lobe,  while  the  other 
lobe,  which  is  separated  from  it  by  the  mediastinum, 
remains  unhurt,  and  continues  to  perform  its  functions 
as  usual. 

PLEURALGIA.  (From  nXcvpa,  and  a\yog,  pain.) 
Pain  in  the  pleura,  or  side. 

[“Pleurisy  root.  This  species  of  root  is  found 
from  Maine  to  Georgia,  and  is  readily  distinguished 
from  other  roots,  by  its  bright  orange-coloured  flowers. 
The  root  when  dry  is  brittle,  and  easily  reduced  to 
powder.  Its  taste  is  moderately  bitter,  and  its  chief 
soluble  proportions  are  extractive  matter  and  fmcula 
It  acts  medicinally  as  a mild  diaphoretic,  expectorant, 
and  subtonic.  It  has  been  much  used  in  the  United 
States  in  catarrh,  bronchitis,  the  secondary  stages  of 
pneumonia,  and  in  phthisis  as  a palliative.  From 
some  associations  of  this  kind,  it  is  known  in  many 
places  as  pleurisy  root.  It  has  the  property  of  pro- 
ducing diaphoresis  with  less  previous  heat  and  excite- 
ment than  attends  the  use  of  most  vegetable  sudorifics. 
Twenty  or  thirty  grains  can  be  given  three  times  a 
day,  or  a gill  of  the  infusion,  prepared  like  that  of 
serpentaria.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

PLEURI'TIS.  ( Pleuritis , idis.  f. ; from  rrXevpa,  the 
pleura.)  Pleurisy,  or  inflammation  of  the  pleura.  A 
specir.s  of  pneumonia,  of  Cullen.  See  Pneumonia. 
In  some  instances  the  inflammation  is  partial,  or  affects 
one  place  in  particular,  which  is  commonly  on  the 
right  side ; but,  in  general,  a morbid  affection  is  com- 
municated throughout  its  whole  extent.  The  disease 
is  occasioned  by  exposure  to  cold,  and  by  all  the  causes 
which  usually  give  rise  to  all  inflammatory  com- 
plaints ; and  it  attacks  chiefly  those  of  a vigorous  con- 
stitution and  plethoric  habit.  In  consequence  of  the 
previous  inflammation,  it  is  apt,  at  its  departure,  to 
leave  behind  a thickening  of  the  pleura,  or  adhesions 
to  the  ribs  and  intercostal  muscles,  which  either  lay  the 
foundation  of  future  pneumonic  complaints,  or  render 
the  patient  more  susceptible  of  the  changes  in  the 
state  of  the  atmosphere  than  before. 

It  comes  on  with  an  acute  pain  in  the  side,  which  is 
much  increased  by  making  a full  inspiration,  and  is 
accompanied  by  flushing  in  the  face,  increased  heat 
over  the  whole  body,  rigors,  difficulty  of  lying  on 
the  side  affected,  together  with  a cough  and  nausea, 
and  the  pulse  is  hard,  strong,  and  frequent,  and  vi- 
brates under  the  finger  when  pressed  upon,  not  unlike 
the  tense  string  of  a musical  instrument.  If  blood  is 
drawn,  and  allowed  to  stand  for  a short  time,  it  will 
exhibit  a thick,  sizy,  or  buffy  coat  on  its  surface.  If 
the  disease  be  neglected  at  its  onset,  and  the  inflam- 
mation proceeds  with  great  violence  and  rapidity,  the 
lungs  themselves  become  affected,  the  passage  of  the 
blood  through  them  is  stopped,  and  the  patient  is  suffo- 
cated ; or,  from  the  combination  of  the  two  affections, 
the  inflammation  proceeds  on  to  suppuration,  and  an 
abscess  is  formed.  The  prognostic  in  pleurisy  must 
be  drawn  from  the  severity  of  the  symptoms.  If  the 
fever  and  inflammation  have  run  high,  and  the  pain 
should  cease  suddenly,  with  a change  of  countenance, 
and  a sinking  of  the  pulse,  great  danger  may  be  appre- 
hended; but  if  the  heat  and  other  febrile  sympton* 


PLU 


abate  gradually,  if  respiration  is  performed  with 
greater  ease  and  less  pain,  and  a free  and  copious  ex- 
pectoration ensues,  a speedy  recovery  may  he  expected. 

The  appearances  on  dissection  are  much  the  same 
as  those  mentioned  under  the  head  of  pneumonia,  viz. 
an  inflamed  state  of  the  pleura,  connected  with  the 
lungs,  having  its  surface  covered  with  red  vessels,  and 
a layer  of  coagulated  lymph  lying  upon  it,  adhesions, 
too,  of  the  substance  of  the  lungs  to  the  pleura.  Be- 
sides these,  the  lungs  themselves  are  often  found  in  an 
inflamed  state,  with  an  extravasation  either  of  blood 
or  coagulated  lymph  in  their  substance.  Tubercles 
and  abscesses  are  likewise  frequently  met  with.  See 
Pneumonia. 

Pleurocolle'sis.  (From  nXsvpa,  the  pleura,  and 
KoXXau),  to  adhere.)  An  adhesion  of  the  pleura  to  the 
lungs,  or  some  neighbouring  part. 

PLEURODY'NIA.  (From  nXsvpa,  and  oSvvtj,  pain.) 
A pain  in  the  side,  from  a rheumatic  affection  of  the 
pleura. 

PLEURO-PNEUMO'NIA.  (From  n\evpa,  and  irvtv- 
povia,  an  inflammation  of  the  lungs.)  An  inflamma- 
tion of  the  lungs  and  pleura. 

PLEURORTHOPNAS'A.  (From  7rXevpa,thepleura, 
op0oj,  upright,  and  nveui,  to  breathe.)  A pleurisy  in 
which  the  patient  cannot  breathe  without  keeping  his 
body  upright. 

PLEUROSTHO'TONOS.  (From  tt Xevpov,  the  side, 
and  retvu),  to  stretch.)  A spasmodic  disease,  in  which 
the  body  is  bent  to  one  side. 

PLE  XUS.  (From  plector,  to  plait  or  knit.)  A 
net-work  of  vessels.  The  union  of  two  or  more  nerves 
is  also  called  a plexus. 

Plexus  cardiacus.  The  caidiac  plexus  of  nerves 
is  the  union  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves  and  great 
sympathetic. 

Plexus  choroides.  The  choroid  plexus  is  a net- 
work of  vessels  situated  in  the  lateral  ventricle  of  the 
brain. 

Plexus  pampiniformis.  The  plexus  of  vessels 
about  the  spermatic  chord. 

Plexus  pulmonicus.  The  pulmonic  plexus  is 
formed  by  the  union  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves  with 
the  great  sympathetic. 

Plexus  reticularis.  A net-work  of  vessels  un- 
der the  fornix  of  the  brain. 

PLI'CA  (From  plico,  to  entangle.  This  disease  is 
commonly  distinguished  by  the  adjective  Pvlonica , it 
being  almost  peculiar  to  the  inhabitants  of  Poland.) 
Helotis ; Kolto  ; Rhopalosis ; Plica  polonica.  Tri- 
choma. Plaited  hair.  A disease  of  the  hairs,  in  which 
they  become  long  and  coarse,  and  matted  and  glued 
into  inextricable  tangles.  It  is  peculiar  to  Poland,  Li- 
thuania, and  Tartary,  and  generally  appears  during 
the  autumnal  season. 

PLICA'RIA.  (From  plico,  to  entangle:  so  called 
because  its  leaves  are  entangled  together  in  one  mass.) 
Wolf's-claw,  or  club  moss.  See  Lycopodium. 

PLICATUS.  Plaited,  folded.  A term  applied  to 
leaves,  when  the  disk,  especially  towards  the  margin, 
is  acutely  folded  up  and  down ; as  in  Malva  crispa. 

Pli  nthius.  IIAtvrfltoj.  The  fourfold  bandage. 

PLUM.  Pruna.  Three  sorts  of  plums  are  ranked 
among  the  articles  of  the  materia  meaica;  they  are  all 
met  with  in  the  gardens  of  this  country,  but  the  shops 
are  supplied  with  them  moderately  dried,  from  abroad. 
1.  The  pruna  brignolensia ; the  Brignole  plum,  or 
prunello,  brought  from  Brignole,  in  Provence ; it  is  of  a 
reddish  yellow  colour,  and  has  a very  grateful,  sweet, 
eubacid  taste.  2.  The  pruna  gallica;  the  common 
or  French  prune.  3.  The  pruna  damascena , or  dam- 
son. All  these  fruits  possess  the  same  general  quali- 
ties with  the  other  summer  fruits.  The  prunelloes,  in 
which  the  sweetness  has  a greater  mixture  of  acidity 
than  in  the  other  sorts,  are  used  as  mild  refrigerants  in 
fevers  and  other  hot  indispositions.  The  French 
prunes  and  damsons  are  the  most  emollient  and  laxa- 
tive; they  are  often  taken  by  themselves,  to  gently 
move  the  belly,  where  there  is  a tendency  to  inflam- 
mations. Decoctions  of  them  afford  a useful  basis  for 
laxative  or  purgative  mixtures,  and  the  pulp,  in  sub- 
stance, for  electuaries. 

Plum , Malabar.  See  Eugenia  jambos. 

PLUMB A'GO.  (From  plumbum , lead:  so  called 
because  it  is  covered  with  lead-coloured  spots.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria ; Or- 
der, Monogynia.  I 


PLtJ 

2.  Lead-wort.  See  Polygonum  persicaria. 

3.  Black  lead.  An  ore  of  a shining  blue-black  co- 
lour,  a greasy  feel,  and  turberculated  when  fractured. 
See  Graphite. 

Plumbago  europ,sea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tooth-wort.  Dentaria;  Dentillaria.  This  plant  is  to 
be  distinguished  from  the  pellitory  of  Spain,  which  is 
also  called  dentaria.  It  is  the  Plumbago— foliis  am- 
plexicaulibus , lanceolatis  scabrisf  of  Linnams.  The 
root  was  formerly  esteemed,  prepared  in  a variety  of 
ways,  as  a cure  for  the  toothache,  arising  from  caries. 

Plumbi  acetas.  Ceruesa  acetata.  Plumbi  super- 
acetas.  Saccliarum  saturni,  or  sugar  of  lead,  from  its 
sweet  taste.  It  possesses  sedative  and  astringent  quali- 
ties in  a very  high  degree,  and  is  perhaps  the  most 
powerful  internal  medicine  in  profuse  hremorrhages, 
especially  combined  with  opium ; but  its  use  is  not 
entirely  without  hazard,  as  it  has  sometimes  produced 
violent  colic  and  palsy  ; wherefore  it  is  better  not  to 
continue  it  unnecessarily.  The  dose  may  be  from  one 
to -three  grains.  It  has  been  also  recommended  to 
check  the  expectoration,  and  colliquative  discharges  in 
phthisis,  but  will  probably  be  only  of  temporary  service. 
Externally  it  is  used  for  the  same  purposes  as  the 
liquor  plumbi  subacetatis. 

Plumbi  acetatis  liquor.  Solution  of  acetate  of 
lead,  formerly  called  aqua  lithargyri  acetati.  Gou- 
lard’s extract.  Take  of  semi- vitrified  oxide  of  lead, 
two  pounds ; acetic  acid,  a gallon.  Mix,  and  boil 
down  to  six  pints,  constantly  stirring  ; then  set  it  by, 
that  the  feculencies  may  subside,  and  strain.  It  is 
principally  employed  in  a diluted  state,  by  surgeons,  as 
a resolvent  against  inflammatory  affections. 

Plumbi  acetatis  liquor  diiutus.  Diluted  solu- 
tion of  acetate  of  lead.  Aqua  lithargyri  acetati  com- 
posita.  Take  of  solution  of  sub-acetate  of  lead,  a 
fluid  drachm;  distilled  water,  a pint;  weak  spirit,  a 
fluid  diaclim.  Mix.  The  virtues  of  this  water,  the 
aqua  vegeto-mineralis  of  former  pharmacopoeias,  ap- 
plied externally,  are  resolvent,  refrigerant,  and  seda- 
tive. 

Plumbi  carbonas.  See.  Plumbi  subcarbonas. 

Plumbi  oxydum  semivitreum.  See  Lithargyrus. 

Plumbi  subcarbonas.  Carbonas  plumbi.  Subcar- 
bonate of  lead  commonly  called  cerusse,  or  white  lead 
This  article  is  made  in  the  large  way  in  white  lead 
manufactories,  by  exposing  thin  sheets  of  lead  to  the 
vapour  of  vinegar.  The  lead  is  curled  up  and  put 
into  pots  of  earthenware,  in  which  the  vinegar  is,  in 
such  a way  as  to  rest  just  above  the  vinegar.  Hun- 
dreds of  these  are  arranged  together,  and  surrounded 
with  dung,  the  heat  from  which  volatilizes  the  acetic 
acid,  which  is  decomposed  by  the  lead,  and  all  imper- 
fect carbonate  of  lead  is  formed,  which  is  of  a white 
colour.  This  preparation  is  seldom  used  in  medicine 
or  surgery  but  for  the  purpose  of  making  other  prepa- 
rations, as  the  superacetate.  It  is  sometimes  employed 
medicinally  in  form  of  powder  and  ointment,  to  chil- 
dren whose  skin  is  fretted.  It  should,  however,  be 
cautiously  used,  as  there  is  great  reason  to  believe  that 
complaints  of  the  bowels  of  children  originate  from  its 
absorption.  See  Pulvis  cerussce  compositus 

PLU'MBUM.  See  Lead. 

Plumbum  candidum.  See  Tin. 

Plumbum  cinereum.  Bismuth.  1- 

Plumbum  nigrum.  Black-lead. 

Plumbum  rubeum.  The  philosopher’s  stone. 

Plumbum  ustum.  Burnt  lead. 

Plumme'ri  pilulj2.  Plummer’s  pills.  A composi- 
tion of  calomel,  antimony,  and  guaiacum.  See  Pilulce 
hydrargyri  submuriatis  compositce. 

PLUMULA.  (A  diminutive  of  pluma,  a feather.) 
A little  feather.  The  expanding  embryo  or  germ  of  a 
plant  within  the  seed,  resembling  a little  feather.  It 
soon  becomes  a tuft  of  young  leaves,  with  which  the 
young  stem,  if  there  be  any,  ascends.  See  Corculum 
and  Cotyledon. 

Plunket’s  cancer  remedy.  Take  crow’s  foot, 
which  grows  in  low  grounds,  one  handful ; dog’s  fen- 
nel, three  sprigs,  both  well  pounded;  crude  brim- 
stone in  powder,  three  middling  thimblefuls ; white 
arsenic  the  same  quantity ; incorporated  all  in  a mor 
tar,  and  made  into  small  balls  the  size  of  a nutmeg, 
and  dried  in  the  sun.  These  balls  must  be  powdered 
and  mixed  with  the  yelk  of  an  egg,  and  laid  qver  the 
sore  or  cancer  on  a piece  of  pig’s  bladder,  or  stripping 
I of  a calf  when  dropped,  which  must  be  cut  to  the  size 


PNE 


PNE 


■ of  the  sore,  and  smeared  with  the  yelk  of  an  egg. 
This  must  be  applied  cautiously  to  the  lips  or  nose  lest 
any  part  of  it  get  down ; nor  is  it  to  be  laid  on  too 
broad  on  the  face,  or  too  near  the  heart,  nor  to  exceed 
the  breadth  of  half-a-crown  ; but  elsewhere  as  far  as 
the  sore  goes.  The  plaster  must  not  be  stirred  until  it 
drops  off  of  itself,  which  will  be  in  a week.  Clean  ban- 
dages are  often  to  be  put  on. 

PNEUMATIC.  ( Pneumaticus  ; from  itvevpa,  wind, 
relating  to  air.)  Of  or  belonging  to  air  or  gas. 

Pneumatic  apparatus.  See  Apparatus,  pneu- 
matic. 

PNEUMATIC^.  (From  mzvpmv,  the  lung.)  The 
name  given  by  Dr.  Good,  to  the  second  class  of  dis- 
eases in  his  Nosology.  Diseases  of  the  respiratory 
function.  It  has  two  orders,  Phonica  and  Pneumonica. 

PNEUMATOCE'LE.  (From  nvsvpa,  wind,  and 
Kr/Xrj,  a tumour.)  Any  species  of  hernia,  that  is  dis- 
tended with  flatus. 

PNEUMATO'MPHALUS.  (From  irvevpa , wind, 
and  op<pa\o$ , the  navel.)  A flatulent,  umbilical 
hernia. 

PNEUMATO'SIS.  (From  irvevuaTOe),  to  inflate.) 
Emphysema.  Windy  swelling,  A genus  of  disease 
in  the  Class  Cachexia , and  Order  Intumescentiee , of 
Cullen,  known  by  a collection  of  air  in  the  cellular 
texture  under  the  skin,  rendering  it  tense,  elastic,  and 
crepitating.  Air  in  the  cellular  membrane  is  confined 
to  one  place  ; but  in  a few  cases,  it  spreads  universally 
over  the  whole  body,  and  occasions  a considerable 
degree  of  swelling.  It  sometimes  arises  spontaneously, 
which  is,  however,  a very  rare  occurrence,  or  comes 
on  immediately  after  delivery,  without  any  evident 
cause ; but  it  is  most  generally  induced  by  some 
wound  or  injury  done  to  the  thorax,  and  which  affects 
the  Jungs  ; in.  which  case  the  air  passes  from  these, 
through  the  wound,  into  the  surrounding  cellular  mem- 
brane, and  from  thence  spreads  over  the  whole  body. 

Pneumatosis  is  attended  with  an  evident  crackling 
noise,  and  elasticity  upon  pressure ; and  sometimes 
with  much  difficulty  of  breathing,  oppression,  and 
anxiety. 

We  are  to  consider  it  as  a disease  by  no  means  unat- 
tended with  danger ; but  more  probably  from  the 
causes  which  give  rise  to  it,  than  any  hazard  from  the 
complaint  itself. 

The  species  of  pneumatosis  are : 

1'.  Pneumatosis  spontanea , without  any  manifest 
cause. 

2.  Pneumatosis  traumatica , from  a wound. 

3.  Pneumatosis  venenata , from  poisons. 

4.  Pneumatosis  hysterica , with  hysteria. 
PNEUMONIA.  (From  zsvcvpwv,  a lung.)  Pneu- 
monitis; Peripneumonia;  Peripneumonia  vera.  In- 
flammation of  the  lungs.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
Class  Pyrexia , and  Order  Phlegmasia , of  Cullen; 
characterized  by  pyrexia,  difficult  respiration,  cough, 
and  a sense  of  weight  and  pain  in  the  thorax.  The 
species  of  pneumonia,  according  to  the  above  nosolo- 
gist,  are, 

1 Peripneumonia.  The  pulse  not  always  hard,  but 
sometimes  soft:  an  obtuse  pain  in  the  breast:  the 
respiration  always  difficult;  sometimes  the  patient 
cannot  breathe,  unless  in  an  upright  posture ; the  face 
swelled,  and  of  a livid  colour;  the  cough  for  the  most 
part  with  expectoration,  frequently  bloody. 

2.  Pleuritis.  The  pulse  hard : a pungent  pain  in 
one  side ; aggravated  during  the  time  of  inspiration ; 
an  uneasiness  when  lying  on  one  side  ; a very  painful 
cough,  dry  in  the  beginning  of  the  disease,  afterward 
with  expectoration,  and  frequently  bloody.  See 
Pleuritis. 

With  respect  to  pneumonia,  the  most  general  cause 
of  this  inflammation  is  the  application  of  cold  to  the 
body,  which  gives  a check  to  the  perspiration,  and  de- 
termines a great  flow  of  blood  to  the  lungs.  It  attacks 
principally,  those  of  a robust  constitution  and  plethoric 
habit,  and  occurs  most  frequently  in  the  winter  season 
and  spring  of  the  year:  but  it  may  arise  in  either  of 
the  other  seasons,  when  there  are  sudden  vicissitudes 
from  heat  to  cold. 

Other  causes,  such  as  violent  exertions  in  singing, 
speaking,  or  playing  on  wind  instruments,  by  producing 
an  increased  action  of  the  lungs,  have  been  known  to 
occasion  peripneumony.  Those  who  have  laboured 
under  p former  attack  of  this  complaint,  are  much  pre- 
disposed to  returns  of  it. 

192 


The  true  peripneumony  comes  on  with  an  obtuse 
pain  in  the  chest  or  side,  great  difficulty  of  breathing, 
(particularly  in  a recumbent  position,  ov  when  lying 
on  the  side  affected,)  together  with  a cough,  dryness  of 
the  skin,  heat,  anxiety,  and  thirst.  At  the  first  com- 
mencement of  the  disease  the  pulse  is  usually  full, 
strong,  hard,  and  frequent;  but  in  a more  advanced 
stage  it  is  commonly  w'eak,  soft,  and  often  irregular. 
In  the  beginning,  the  cough  is  frequently  dry  and  with- 
out expectoration  ; but  in  some  cases  it  is  moist,  even 
from  the  first,  and  the  matter  spit  up  is  various  both 
in  colour  and  in  consistence,  and  is  often  streaked  with 
blood. 

If  relief  is  not  afforded  in  time,  and  the  inflammation 
proceeds  with  such  violence  as  to  endanger  suffocation, 
the  vessels  of  the  neck  will  become  turgid  and  swelled ; 
the  face  will  alter  to  a purple  colour  ; an  effusion  of 
blood  will  take  place  into  the  cellular  substance  of  the 
lungs,  so  as  to  impede  the  circulation  through  that 
organ,  and  the  patient  will  soon  be  deprived  of  life. 

If  these  violent  symptoms  do  not  arise,  and  the  pro- 
per means  for  carrying  off  the  inflammation  have  either 
been  neglected,  or  have  proved  ineffectual,  although 
adopted  at  an  early  period  of  the  disease,  a suppura- 
tion may  ensue,  which  event  is  to  be  known  by  fre- 
quent slight  quiverings,  and  an  abatement  of  the  pain 
and  sense  of  fulness  in  the  part,  and  by  the  patient 
being  able  to  lie  on  the  side  which  was  affected,  with- 
out experiencing  great  uneasiness. 

When  peripneumony  proves  fatal,  it  is  generally  by 
an  effusion  of  blood  taking  place  in  the  cellular  texture 
of  the  lungs,  so  as  to  occasion  suffocation,  which  usu- 
ally happens  between  the  third  and  seventh  days  ; but 
it  may  likewise  prove  fatal,  by  terminating  either  in 
suppuration  or  gangrene. 

When  it  goes  off  by  resolution,  some  very  evident 
evacuation  always  attends  it ; such  as  a great  flow  of 
urine,  with  a copious  sediment,  diarrhoea,  a sweat  dif- 
fused over  the  whole  body,  or  a haemorrhage  from  the 
nose ; but  the  evacuation  which  most  frequently  ter- 
minates the  complaint,  and  which  does  it  with  the 
greatest  effect,  is  a free  and  copious  expectoration  of 
thick  while  or  yellow  matter,  slightly  streaked  with 
blood  ; and  by  this  the  disease  is  carried  off  generally 
in  the  course  of  ten  or  twelve  days. 

Our  opinion  as  to  the  event  is  to  be  drawn  from  the 
symptoms  which  are  present.  A high  degree  of  fever, 
attended  with  delirium,  great  difficulty  of  breathing, 
acute  pain,  and  dry  cough,  denote  great  danger ; on 
the  contrary,  an  abatement  of  the  febrile  symptoms, 
and  of  the  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  pain,  taking 
place  on  the  coming  on  of  a free  expectoration,  or  the 
happening  of  any  other  critical  evacuation,  promises 
fair  for  the  recovery  of  the  patient.  A termination  of 
the  inflammation  in  suppuration  is  always  to  be  con- 
sidered as  dangerous. 

On  dissection,  the  lungs  usually  appear  inflamed  ; 
and  there  is  often  found  an  extravasation,  either  of 
blood,  or  of  coagulable  lymph,  in  their  cellular  sub- 
stance. The  same  appearances  likewise  present  them- 
selves in  the  cavity  of  the  thorax,  and  within  the  peri- 
cardium. The  pleura,  connected  with  the  lungs,  is 
also  in  an  inflated  state,  having  its  surface  every  where 
crowded  with  red  vessels.  Besides  these,  abscesses  are 
frequently  found  in  the  substance  of  the  lungs,  as  like- 
wise tubercles  and  adhesions  to  the  l ibs  are  formed.  A 
quantity  of  purulent  matter  is  often  discovered  also  in 
the  bronchia.  In  the  early  period  of  this  disease  we 
may  hope,  by  active  measures,  to  bring  about  imme- 
diate resolution;  but  when  it  is  more  advanced,  we 
must  look  for  a discharge  by  expectoration,  as  the 
means  of  restoring  the  part  to  a healthy  state.  We 
should  begin  by  large  and  free  bleeding,  not  deterred 
by  the  obscure  pulse  sometimes  found  in  peripneu- 
mony, carrying  this  evacuation  to  faintness,  or  to  the 
manifest  relief  of  the  breathing.  In  the  subsequent 
use  of  this  measure,  we  must  be  guided  by  the  violence 
of  the  disease  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  strength  of  the 
patient  on  the  other;  the  scrofulous,  in  particplar, 
cannot  bear  it  to  any  extent ; and  it  Is  more  especially 
in  the  early  part  of  the  complaint,  that  it  produces  a 
full  and  decisive  effect.  Under  doubtful  circumstances 
it  will  be  better  to  take  blood  locally,  particularly  when 
there  are  pleuritic  symptoms;  with  which  blisters  may 
co-operate.  The  bowels  must  be  well  evacuated  in 
the  first  instance,  and  subsequently  kept  regular  : and 
I antimonials  may  be  given  with  great  advantage  com 


POD 


POD 


bmeii  often  with  mercurials  to  promote  the  discharges, 
especially  from  the  skin  and  lungs.  Digitalis  is  proper 
also,  us  lessening  the  activity  of  the  circulation.  The 
antiphlogistic  regimen  is  to  be  observed,  except  that  the 
patient  will  not  bear  too  free  exposure  to  cold.  To 
quiet  the  cough,  demulcents  may  be  of  some  use  or 
cooling  sialagogues:  but  where  the  urgency  of  the 
symptoms  is  lessened  by  copious  depletion,  opiates  are 
more  to  be  relied  upon  ; a little  syrup  of  poppy,  for  in- 
stance, swallowed  slowly  from  time  to  time;  or  a fall 
dose  of  opium  may  be  given  at  night  to  procure  sleep, 
joined  with  calomel  and  antimony,  that  it  may  not 
heat  the  system,  but,  on  the  contrary,  assist  them  in 
promoting  the  secretions.  Inhaling  steam  will  occa- 
sionally assist  in  bringing  about  expectoration;  or, 
where  there  is  a wheezing  respiration,  squill  in  nau- 
seating or  sometimes  even  emetic,  doses  may  relieve 
the  patient  from  the  viscid  matter  collected  in  the  air 
passages.  When  the  expectoration  is  copious  in  the 
decline  of  the  complaint,  tonic  medicines,  particularly 
rnyrrh,  with  a more  nutritious  diet,  become  necessary 
to  support  the  strength : and  the  same  means  will  be 
proper,  if  it  should  go  on  to  suppuration.  Where  ad- 
hesions have  occurred,  or  other  organic  change,  though 
the  symptoms  may  appear  trifling,  much  caution  is  re- 
quired to  prevent  the  patient  falling  into  Phthisis ; on 
which  subject  see  the  management  of  that  disease : 
and  should  serous  effusion  happen,  see  Hydrothorax. 

PNEUMONICA.  (From  nvevixuv,  the  lung.)  The 
name  of  the  second  order  of  diseases  in  the  Class 
Pncumatica  of  Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases  affecting 
the  lungs,  their  membranes,  or  motive  power.  It  has 
six  genera,  viz.  Bex;  Dyspnea  a ; Asthma  ; Ephialtis  ; 
Stemalgia  ; Pleuraigia. 

PNEUMOPLEURI'TIS.  (From  zsvevpuv,  thelungs, 
and  zsXevpins , an  inflammation  of  the  pleura.)  An  in- 
flammation of  the  lungs  and  pleura. 

PNIGA'LIUM.  (From  zzvtyw,  to  suffocate.)  The 
nightmare.  A disorder  in  which  the  patient  appears 
to  be  suffocated. 

Pnix.  (From  zsviyu,  to  suffocate.)  A sense  of  suf- 
focation. 

POD.  See  Siliqua. 

PODA'GRA.  (From  rzov?,  the  foot,  and  aypa,  a 
taking,  or  seizure.)  Febris  podagrica.  Arthritis; 
Dolor  podagricus ; The  gout.  A genus  of  disease  in 
the  Class  Pyrexitp. , and  Order  Phlegmasice,  of  Cullen; 
known  by  pyrexia,  pain  in  the  joints,  chiefly  of  the 
great  toe,  or  at  any  rate  of  the  hands  and  feet,  return- 
ing at  intervals : previous  to  the  attack,  the  functions 
of  the  stomach  are  commonly  disturbed.  The  species 
are, 

1.  Podagra  regularis.  Arthritis  podagra;  Arthri- 
tis rachialgica;  Arthritis  oestiva^  of  Sauvages.  The 
regular  gout. 

2.  Podagra  atonica.  Arthritis  melancholica ; hie- 
malis  ; cldorotica ; and  asthmatica , of  Sauvages.  The 
atonic  gout. 

■*3.  Podagra  relrograda.  The  retrocedent. 

4.  Podagra  aberrans.  Misplaced  or  wandering 
gout. 

The  gout  is  a very  painful  disease,  preceded  usually 
by  flatulency,  and  indigestion,  and  accompanied  by 
fever  pains  in  the  joints  of  the  hands  and  feet,  particu- 
larly in  that  of  the  great  toe,  and  which  returns  by 
paroxysms,  occurring  chiefly  in  the  spring  and  begin- 
ning of  winter.  The  only  disorder  for  which  the  regu- 
lar gout  can  possibly  be  mistaken,  is  the  rheumatism  ; 
and  cases  may  occur  wherein  there  may  be  some  diffi- 
culty in  making  a just  discrimination : but  the  most 
certain  way  of  distinguishing  them  will  be,  to  give 
due  consideration  to  the  predisposition  in  the  habit,  the 
symptoms  which  have  preceded,  the  parts  affected,  the 
recurrences  of  the  disease,  and  its  connexion  with 
other  parts  of  the  system.  Its  attacks  are  much  con- 
fined to  the  male  sex,  particularly  those  of  a corpulent 
habit,  and  robust  body  ; but  every  now  and  then  we 
meet  with  instances  of  it  in  robust  females.  Those 
who  are  employed  in  constant  bodily  labour,  or  who 
live  much  upon  vegetable  food,  as  likewise  those  who 
make  no  use  of  wine,  or  other  fermented  liquors,  are 
seldom  afflicted  with  the  gout.  The  disease  seldom 
appears  at  an  earlier  period  of  life  than  from  five-and- 
thirly  to  forty ; and,  when  it  does,  it  may  be  presumed 
to  arise  from  an  hereditary  disposition.  Indolence,  in- 
activity, and  too  free  a use  of  tartareous  wines,  fer- 
mented liquors,  and  animal  food,  are  the  principal 


causes  which  give  rise  to  the  gout ; but  it  may  likewise 
be  brought  on  by  great  sensuality  and  excess  in  venery, 
intense  and  close  application  to  study,  long  want  of 
rest,  grief,  or  uneasiness  of  mind,  exposure  to  cold,  loo 
free  a use  of  acidulated  liquors,  a sudden  change  from 
a full  to  a spare  diet,  the  suppression  of  any  accus- 
tomed discharge,  or  by  excessive  evacuations ; and 
that  it  sometimes  proceeds  from  an  hereditary  disposi- 
tion, is  beyond  all  doubt,  as  females  who  have  been 
remarked  for  their  great  abstemiousness,  and  youths 
of  a tender  age,  have  been  attacked  with  it. 

1.  Podagra  regularis.  - A paroxysm  of  regular  gout 
sometimes  comes  on  suddenly,  without  any  previous 
warning;  at  otlier  times  it  is  preceded  by  an  unusual 
coldness  of  the  feet  and  legs,  a suppression  of  perspi- 
ration in  them,  and  numbness,  or  a sense  of  prickling 
along  the  whole  of  the  flower  extremities : and  with 
these  symptoms  the  appetite  is  diminished,  the  stomach 
is  troubled  with  flatulency  and  indigestion,  a degree  of 
torpor  and  languor  is  felt  over  the  whole  body,  great 
lassitude  and  fatigue  are  experienced  after  the  least  ex- 
ercise, the  body  is  costive,  and  the  urine  pallid.  On 
the  night  of  the  attack,  the  patient  perhaps  goes  to  bed 
in  tolerable  health,  and  after  a few  hours  is  awakened 
by  the  severity  of  the  pain,  most  commonly  in  the  first 
joint  of  the  great  toe ; sometimes,  however,  it  attacks 
other  parts  of  the  foot,  the  heel,  calf  of  the  leg,  or  per 
haps  the  whole  of  the  foot.  The  pain  resembles  that 
of  a dislocated  bone,  and  is  attended  with  the  sensa- 
tion as  if  cold  water  was  poured  upon  the  part;  and 
this  pain;  becoming  more  violent,  is  succeeded  by  rigors 
and  other  febrile  symptoms,  together  with  a severe 
throbbing  and  inflammation  in  the  part.  Sometimes 
both  feet  become  swelled  and  inflamed,  so  that  neither 
of  them  can  be  put  to  the  ground;  nor  can  the  patient 
endure  the  least  motion  without  suffering  excruciating 
pain.  Towards  morning,  he  falls  asleep,  and  a gentle 
sweat  breaks  out,  and  terminates  the  paroxysm,  a 
number  of  which  constitutes  what  is  called  a fit  of  the 
gout.  The  duration  of  the  fit  will  be  longer  or  shorter, 
according  to  the  disposition  of  the  body  to  the  disease, 
the  season  of  the  year,  and  the  age  and  strength  of 
the  patient.  When  a paroxysm  has  thus  taken  place, 
although  there  is  an  alleviation  of  pain  at  the  expira- 
tion of  some  hours,  still  the  patient  is  not  entirely  re- 
lieved from  it ; and,  for  some  evenings  successively,  he 
has  a return  both  of  pain  and  fever,  which  continue, 
with  more  or  less  violence,  until  morning.  The  pa- 
roxysms, however,  prove  usually  more  mild  every  day, 
till  at  length  the  disease  goes  oft’  either  by  perspiration, 
urine,  or  some  other  evacuation  ; the  parts  which  have 
been  affected  becoming  itchy,  the  cuticle  falling  off’  in 
scales  from  them,  and  some  slight  degree  of  lameness 
remaining.  At  first,  an  attack  of  gout  occurs,  perhaps, 
only  once  in  two  or  three  years;  it  then  probably 
comes  on  every  year,  and  at  length  it  becomes  more 
frequent,  and  is  moie  severe,  and  of  longer  duration, 
each  succeeding  fit.  In  the  progress  of  the  disease, 
various  parts  of  the  body  are  affected,  and  translations 
take  place  from  one  joint,  or  limb,  to  another;  and, 
after  frequent  attacks,  the  joints  lose  their  strength  and 
flexibility,  and  become  so  stiff  as  to  be  deprived  of  all 
motion.  Concretions,  of  a chalky  appearance,  are 
likewise  formed  upon  the  outside  of  the  joints,  and 
nephritic  affections  of  the  kidneys  arise  from  a depo- 
site  of  the  same  kind  of  matter  in  them,  which,  al- 
though fluid  at  first,  becomes  gradually  dry  and  firm. 
This  matter  is  partly  soluble  in  acids,  but  without  ef- 
fervescence ; and  Dr.  Wollaston  discovered  it  not  to  be 
carbonate  of  lime,  but  a compound  of  the  uric  or  lithic 
acid  and  soda. 

2.  Podagra  atonica.  Atonic  gout.  It  sometimes 
happens  that,  although  a gouty  diathesis  prevails  in 
the  system,  yet,  from  certain  causes,  no  inflammatory 
affection  of  the  joints  is  produced  ; in  which  case,  the 
stomach  becomes  particularly  affected,  and  the  patient 
is  troubled  with  flatulency,  indigestion,  loss  of  appe- 
tite, eructations,  nausea,  vomiting,  and  severe  pains ; 
and  these  affections  are  often  accompanied  with  much 
dejection  of  spirits,  and  other  hypochondriacal  symp- 
toms. In  some  cases,  the  head  is  affected  with  pain  and 
giddiness,  and  now  and  then  with  a tendency  to  apo- 
plexy ; and  in  other  cases,  the  viscera  of  the  thorax 
suffer  from  the  disease,  and  palpitations,  faintings,  and 
asthma  arise.  This  is  what  is  called  atonic  gout. 

3.  Fodagraretrograda.  Retrocedent  gout.  It  some- 
times happens,  that,  after  the  inflammation  has  oecu- 

103 


POD 


POl 


pied  a joint,  instead  of  its  continuing  the  usual  time, 
and  so  going  off  gradually,  it  ceases  suddenly,  and  is 
translated  to  some  internal  part.  The  term  retroce- 
dent gout  is  applied  to  occurrences  of  this  nature. 
When  it  falls  on  the  stomach,  it  occasions  nausea, 
vomiting,  anxiety,  or  great  pain  ; when  on  the  heart, 
it  brings  on  syncope  ; when  on  the  iungs,  it  produces 
an  affection  resembling  asthma : and,  when  it  oc- 
cupies the  head,  it  is  apt  to  give  rise  to  apoplexy,  or 
palsy. 

4.  Podagra  aberrans,  or  misplaced  gout,  is  when  the 
gouty  diathesis,  instead  of  producing  the  inflammatory 
affection  of  the  joints,  occasions  an  inflammatory  af- 
fection of  some  internal  parts,  and  which  appears 
from  the  same  symptoms  that  attend  the  inflammation 
of  those  parts  from  other  causes.  All  occurrences  of 
this  nature,  as  well  as  of  the  two  former,  are  to  be  re- 
garded as  attacks  of  irregular  gout,  and  are  to  be  guarded 
against  as  much  as  possible. 

In  the  regular  gout,  generally,  little  medical  interfe- 
rence is  necessary.  The  antiphlogistic  regimen  should 
be  observed,  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of  the  patient, 
the  bowels  kept  regular,  and  the  part  of  a moderate 
temperature,  by  covering  it  with  flannel,  &c.;  it  may 
be  useful  too  to  promote  a gentle  diaphoresis.  In  young 
and  robust  constitutions,  where  there  is  no  hereditary 
tendency  to  the  disease,  and  the  inflammation  and  fever 
run  high,  more  active  evacuations  may  sometimes  be 
required  ; and,  on  the  contrary,  in  persons  advanced 
in  life,  who  have  suffered  much  from  the  disease,  and 
been  accustomed  to  a generous  diet,  this  must  be  in 
some  degree  allowed,  even  during  the  paroxysm,  to 
obviate  a metastasis ; recommending  fish  in  preference 
to  other  animal  food,  and  madeira  as  the  least  acescent 
wine.  The  application  of  cold  to  the  part  is  a danger- 
ous practice ; and  it  is  better  to  abstain  from  any  local 
measures,  lest  the  favourable  progress  of  the  disease 
should  be  interrupted.  When  the  paroxysm  is  termi- 
nated, any  remaining  stiffness  of  the  joint  will  probably 
De  gradually  removed  by  friction,  &c.  With  respect  to 
the  means  of  obviating  future  attacks,  the  chief  de- 
pendence is  to  be  placed  on  abstemiousness,  with  regu- 
lar moderate  exercise.  Proper  medicines  may  be  occa- 
sionally prescribed  to  remove  any  dyspeptic  symptoms, 
keep  the  bowels  regular,  the  skin  perspirable,  <fcc.  If 
the  disease  appear  to  hang  about  the  patient  in  the 
atonic  form,  a more  nutritious  diet,  with  tonic  or  even 
stimulant  medicines,  may  be  required  to  re-establish 
the  health,  which  will  probably  not  be  accomplished 
without  a paroxysm  intervening.  The  Bath  waters  have 
often  been  found  useful  under  these  circumstances.  In 
the  retrocedent  gout,  the  object  is  to  bring  back  the  in- 
flammation to  the  joint  as  soon  as  possible:  for  which 
purpose  a sinapism,  or  other  stimulant  application, 
should  be  put  upon  the  part;  while  ammonia,  aroma- 
tics, either  warm  wine,  or  brandy  and  water,  &c.,  are 
administered  internally,  in  proportion  to  the  urgency 
of  the  symptoms;  but  in  general  the  best  form  of  me- 
dicine is  the  combination  of  opium  with  some  of  the 
stimulants  just  mentioned,  unless  where  congestion 
appears  in  the  head.  Sometimes  blisters  or  rubefacients 
may  be  properly  applied  over  the  internal  part  affected,' 
where  this  is  of  importance  to  life,  or  even  the  local 
abstraction  of  blood  becomes  necessary.  This,  how- 
ever, holds  more  especially  where  the  attack  is  inflam- 
matory, constituting  the  misplaced  gout,  and  a more 
antiphlogistic  plan  must  then  be  pursued  : but  evacu- 
ations cannot  be  borne  to  the  same<extent  as  in  the  idi- 
opathic phlegmasia. 

PODAGRA'RIA.  (From  podagra , the  gout:  so 
called  because  it  was  thought  to  expel  the  gout.)  See 
JEgopodium  podagraria. 

PODECIUM.  (From  7r£f,  a foot.)  The  name  given 
by  Acharius  to  the  peculiar  foot-stalk  of  the  tubercles 
in  the  cup  lichens. 

PODONI'PTRUM.  (From  zsovs , a foot,  and  vin'jos, 
to  wash.)  A bath  for  the  feet. 

PODOPHY'LLUM.  (From  zsovs,  a foot,  and  QvWov, 
a leaf ; so  named  from  its  shape.)  A species  of  wolf’s 
bane. 

[“Podophyllum  peltatum.  Stem  erect,  two 
leaved;  leaves  peltate.  Inhabits  woods,  flowers  in 
May,  is  perennial.  Stem  one  foot  high";  leaves  lobed  ; 
flowers,  solitary,  white ; fruit  ovate. — Torrey's  Com- 
pendium. 

“The  podophyllum  peltatum  is  an  American  plant, 
growin»  in  low  shady  situations,  from  New-England 
194 


to  Georgia.  The  plant  has  only  two  leaves,  with  a 
flower  in  the  fork,  followed  by  a yellow  acid  fruit. 

“ The  root  is  creeping  and  jointed,  and,  when  dry, 
it  is  brittle  and  easily  reduced  to  powder.  Its  taste  is 
unpleasant,  and,  when  chewed  for  some  timefbecomes 
intensely  bitter.  Water  and  alkohoi  extract  its  bitter- 
ness. It  contains  resin,  fcecula,  bitter  extractive,  and 
a portion  of  gummy  substance. 

“ Podophyllum  is  one  of  the  most  certain  and  effica- 
cious of  the  cathartic  vegetables,  which  have  been 
examined  in  this  country.  It  very  nearly  resembles 
jalap  in  its  operation,  but  is  somewhat  slower,  and 
continues  its  effects  for  a longer  time.  In  irritable  sto- 
machs it  sometimes  occasions  nausea,  but  not  more 
than  other  medicines  of  its  class.  In  small  doses,  it 
proves  a gradual  and  easy  laxative;  in  large  ones,  a 
powerful  and  long  continued  purge.  It  has  been  par- 
ticularly recommended  in  dropsy,  to  which  disease 
it  seems  well  adapted,  by  the  large  evacuations  it  oc- 
casions. 

“It  is  best  given  in  powder.  Ten  grains  taken  at 
night,  produce  a free  operation  on  the  following  morn- 
ing, and  twenty  grains  purge  with  activity.  If  calo- 
mel be  combined  with  it,  it  operates  sooner  and  with 
less  griping.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.l 
PODOTHE'CA.  (From  zsovs,  a foot,  and  ridtjpi,  to 
put.)  A shoe  or  stocking.  An  anatomical  prepara- 
tion, consisting  of  a kind  of  shoe  of  the  scarf-skin, 
with  the  nails  adhering  to  it,  taken  from  a dead  subject. 

POECILIA.  (II oiKiXia,  from  ttoikiXos,  versicolor.) 
The  specific  name  of  a species  of  Epichrosis  in  Good’s 
Nosology,  to  designate  the  pye-bald  skin,  or  that  affection 
found  among  negroes,  in  which  it  is  marbled  generally 
with  alternate  spots,  or  patches  of  black  and  white. 
Pointed  leaf.  See  Acuminatus. 

POISON.  Venenum.  That  substance  which,  when 
applied  externally,  or  taken  into  the  human  body,  uni- 
formly effects  such  a derangement  in  the  animal 
economy  as  to  produce  disease,  may  be  defined  a 
poison.  It  is  extremely  difficult,  however,  to  give  a 
definition  of  a poison  ; and  the  above  is  subject  to  great 
inaccuracy.  Poisons  are  divided,  with  respect  to  the 
kingdom  to  which  they  belong,  into  animal,  vegetable, 
mineral,  and  lialituous,  or  aSrial. 

Poisons,  in  general,  are  only  deleterious  in  certain 
doses ; for  the  most  active,  in  small  doses,  form  the 
most  valuable  medicines.  There  are  nevertheless, 
certain  poisons,  which  are  really  such  in  the  smallest 
quantity,  and  which  are  never  administered  medici- 
nally ; as  the  poison  of  hydrophobia  or  the  plague 
There  are  likewise  substances  which  are  innocent  when 
taken  into  the  stomach,  but  which  prove  deleterious 
when  taken  into  the  lungs,  or  when  applied  to  an 
abraded  surface ; thus  carbonic  acid  is  continually 
swallowed  with  fermented  liquors,  and  thus  the  poison 
of  the  viper  may  be  taken  with  impunity ; while  in 
spiring  carbonic  acid  kills,  and  the  poison  of  the  viper, 
inserted  into  the  flesh,  often  proves  fatal. 

Several  substances  also  act  as  poisonous  when  ap 
plied  either  externally  or  internally ; as  arsenic. 

When  a substance  produces  disease,  not  only  in 
mankind,  but  in  all  animals,  it  is  distinguished  by  the 
term  common  poison;  as  arsenic,  sublimate,  &c.; 
while  that  which  is  poisonous  to  man  only,  or  to  ani- 
mals, and  often  to  one  genus  merely,  is  said  to  be  a 
relative  poison ; thus  aloes  are  poisonous  to  dogs  and 
wolves:  the  Phellandrium  aquaticum  kills  horses, 
while  oxen  devour  it  greedily,  and  with  impunity.  It 
appears,  then,  that  substances  act  as  poisonous  only  in 
regard  to  their  dose , the  part  of  the  body  they  are  ap- 
plied to,  and  the  subject. 

Poisons  enter  the  body  in  the  following  ways : 

1.  Through  the  oesophagus  alone,  or  with  the  food 

2.  Through  the  anus  by  clysters. 

3.  Through  the  nostrils. 

4.  Through  the  lungs  with  the  air. 

5.  Through  the  absorbents  of  the  skin,  either  whole, 
ulcerated,  cut,  or  torn. 

Poisons  have  been  arranged  in  six  classes : 

I. — Corrosive  or  escharotic  poisons. 

They  are  so  named  because  they  usually  irritate,  in- 
flame, and  corrode  the  animal  texture  with  which  they 
come  into  contact.  Their  action  is  in  general  more 
violent  and  formidable  than  that  of  the  other  poisons. 
The  following  list  from  Orfila  contains  the  principal 
bodies  of  this  class : — 

1.  Mercurial  preparations ; corrosive  sublimate, 


POI 


POI 


red  oxide  of  mercury ; turbeth  mineral,  or  yellow  sub- 
sulphate of  mercury ; pernitrate  of  mercury ; mercu- 
rial vapours. 

2.  Arsenical  preparations ; such  as  white  oxide  of 
arsenic,  and  its  combination  with  the  bases,  called  ar- 
seniates  ; arsenic  acid,  and  the  arseniates ; yellow  and 
red  sulphuret  of  arsenic ; black  oxide  of  arsenic,  or  fly- 
powder. 

3.  Antimonial  preparations  ; such  as  tartar  emetic, 
or  cream  tartrate  of  antimony ; oxide  of  antimony ; 
kerines  mineral;  muriate  of  antimony;  and  antimo- 
nial wine. 

4.  Cupreous  preparations ; such  as  verdigris ; ace- 
tate of  copper ; the  cupreous  sulphate,  nitrate,  and  mu- 
riate ; ammoniacal  copper ; oxide  of  copper ; cupreous 
soaps,  or  grease  tainted  with  oxide  of  copper  ; and  cu- 
preous wines  or  vinegars. 

5.  Muriate  of  tin. 

6.  Oxide  and  sulphate  of  zinc. 

7.  Nitrate  of  silver. 

8.  Muriate  of  gold. 

9.  Pearl-white , or  the  oxide  of  bismuth , and  the 
subnitrate  of  this  metal. 

10.  Concentrated  acids;  sulphuric,  nitric,  phospho- 
ric, muriatic,  hydriodic,  acetic,  See. 

11.  Corrosive  alkalies,  pure  or  subcarbonated  po- 
tassa,  soda,  and  ammonia. 

12.  The  caustic  earths , lime  and  barytes. 

13.  Muriate  and  carbonate  of  barytes. 

14.  Glass  and  enamel  powder. 

IS  Cantharides. 

II. — Astringent  poisons. 

1.  Preparations  of  lead,  such  as  the  acetate,  carbo- 
nate, wines  sweetened  with  lead,  water  impregnated 
with  its  oxide,  food  cooked  in  vessels  containing  lead, 
syrups  clarified  with  subacetate  of  lead,  plumbean  va- 
pours. 

III. — Acrid  poisons. 

1.  The  gases ; chlorine,  muriatic  acid,  sulphurous 
acid,  nitrous  gas,  and  nitro-muriatic  vapours. 

2.  Jatropha  manihot,  the  fresh  root,  and  its  juice, 
from  which  cassava  is  made. 

3.  The  Indian  ricinus,  or  Molucca  wood. 

4.  Scammony. 

5.  Gamboge. 

6.  Seeds  of  Palma  Christi. 

7.  Elaterium. 

8.  Colocynth. 

9.  White  hellebore  root. 

10.  Black  hellebore  root. 

11.  Seeds  of  Stavesacre. 

12.  The  wood  and  fruit  of  the  Ahovdi  of  Brazil. 

13.  Rhododendron  chrysanthum. 

14.  Bulbs  of  Colchicum , gathered  in  summer  and 
autumn. 

15.  The  milky  juice  of  the  Convolvulus  arvensis. 

16.  Asclepias. 

17.  (Enanthe  fistulosa  and  crocata. 

18.  Some  species  of  clematis. 

19.  Anemone  pulsatilla. 

20.  Root  of  Wolf's-bane. 

21.  Fresh  roots  of  Arum  maculatum. 

22.  Berries  and  bark  of  Daphne  mezereum. 

23.  The  plant  and  emanations  of  the  Rhus  toxico- 
dendron. 

24.  Euphorbia  officinalis. 

25.  Several  species  of  Ranunculus,  particularly  the 
dquatilis. 

26.  Nitre,  in  a large  dose. 

27.  Some  muscles  and  other  shell-fish. 

IV. — Narcotic  and  stupifying  poisons. 

1.  The  gases;  hydrogen,  azote,  and  oxide  of  azote. 

2.  Poppy  and  opium. 

3.  The  roots  of  the  Solanum  somnifernm ; berries 
and  leaves  of  the  Solanum  nigrum;  those  of  the  Morel 
with  yellow  fruit. 

4.  The  roots  and  leaves  of  the  Atropa  mandragora. 

5.  Datura  stramonium. 

6.  Hyociamns , or  henbane. 

7.  Lactucavirosa. 

8.  Paris  quadrifolia,  or  herb  Paris. 

9.  Laurocerasus , or  bay  laurel  and  prussic  acid. 

10.  Berries  of  the  yew-tree. 

11.  Ervum  ervilia ; the  seeds. 

12.  The  seeds  of  Lathyrus  cicera. 

13.  Distilled  water  of  bitter  almonds. 

14.  The  effluvia  of  many  of  the  above  plants. 

U u 2 


V. — Narcotico- acrid  poisons. 

1.  Carbonic  acid ; the  gas  of  charcoal  stoves  and 
fermenting  liquors. 

2.  The  manchineel. 

3.  Fab  a Sancti  Ignatii. 

4.  The  exhalations  and  juice  of  the  poison  tree  of 
Macassar,  or  Upas-Antiar. 

5.  The  Ticunas. 

6.  Certain  species  of  Strychnos. 

7.  The  whole  plant,  Lauro-cerasus. 

8.  Belladonna , or  deadly  nightshade. 

9.  Tobacco. 

10.  Roots  of  white  bryony. 

11.  Roots  of  the  Chcerophyllum  sylvestre. 

12.  Conium  maculatum,  or  spotted  hemlock. 

13.  JEthusa  cynapium. 

14.  Cicuta  virosa. 

15.  Anagallis  arvensis. 

16.  Mercurialis  percnnvs. 

17.  Digitalis  purpurea. 

18.  The  distilled  waters  and  oils  of  some  of  the 
above  plants. 

19.  The  odorant  principle  of  some  of  them. 

20.  Woorara  of  Guiana. 

21.  Camphor. 

22.  Cocculus  indicus. 

23.  Several  mushrooms. 

24.  Secale  corimtum. 

25.  Lolium  temulentum. 

26.  Sium  latifolium. 

27.  Coriaria  myrtifolia. 

VI. — Septic  or  putrescent  poisons. 

1.  Sulphuretted  hydrogen. 

2.  Putrid  effluvia  of  animal  bodies. 

3.  Contagious  effluvia,  or  fomites  and  miasmata. 

4.  Venomous  animals;  the  viper,  rattlesnake,  scor- 
pion, mad  dog,  &c. 

Antidote  for  vegetable  poisons.  Drapiez  has  ascer- 
tained, by  numerous  experiments,  that  the  fruit  of  the 
Feuillea  cordifolia  is  a powerful  antidote  against  the  ve- 
getable poisons.  He  poisoned  dogs  with  the  rhus  toxi- 
codendron, hemlock,  and  nux  vomica ; and  all  those 
which  were  left  to  the  effects  of  the  poison  died,  but 
those  to  which  the  above  fruit  was  administered  reco- 
vered completely,  after  a short  illness.  To  see  whether 
the  antidote  would  act  in  the  same  way,  applied  exter- 
nally to  wounds,  into  which  vegetable  poisons  had 
been  introduced,  he  took  two  arrows,  which  had  been 
dipped  into  the  juice  of  the  manchenille , and  slightly 
wounded  with  them  two  cats ; to  one  of  these  wounds 
he  applied  a poultice,  composed  of  the  fruit  of  the  feu- 
illea cordifolia,  while  the  other  was  left  without  any 
application.  The  former  suffered  no  inconvenience, 
except  from  the  pain  of  the  wound,  which  speedily 
healed ; while  the  other,  in  a short  time,  fell  into  con 
vulsions,  and  died.  This  fruit  loses  these  valuable 
virtues,  if  kept  two  years  after  it  is  gathered. 

Dr.  Chisholm  states,  that  the  juice  of  the  sugar  cane 
is  the  best  antidote  for  arsenic. 

Dr.  Lyman  Spalding,  of  New-York,  announces  in  a 
small  pamphlet,  that,  for  above  these  fifty  years,  the 
Scutellaria  lateriflora  has  proved  to  be  an  infallible 
means  for  the  prevention  and  cure  of  the  hydrophobia, 
after  the  bite  of  rabid  animals.  It  is  better  applied  as 
a dry  powder  than  fresh.  According  to  the  testimo- 
nies of  several  American  physicians,  this  plant,  not 
yet  received  as  a remedy  into  any  European  Materia 
Medica,  afforded  perfect  relief  in  above  a thousand 
cases,  as  well  in  the  human  species  as  in  the  brute 
creation  (dogs,  swine,  and  oxen). 

[From  a personal  acquaintance  with  Dr.  Spalding 
we  are  enabled  to  state,  that  his  pamphlet  of  cases  of 
hydrophobia,  said  to  have  been  cured  by  the  scute! 
laria,  has  led  both  the  French  and  English  physicians 
into  a mistake,  in  relation  to  the  curative  virtues  of 
this  plant.  There  are  few  physicians  in  the  United 
States  who  place  any  reliance  upon  it.  At  the  time 
of  the  publication  of  Dr.  Spalding’s  pamphlet,  there 
was  great  excitement  about  rabid  dogs,  and  much 
newspaper  discussion  on  the  virtues  of  Scutellaria 
lateriflora , as  a remedy  in  the  cure  of  hydrophobia. 
The  subject  being  very  popular,  Dr.  Spalding,  by  means 
of  the  newspapers,  collected  all  the  cases  of  alleged 
cure,  and  published  them  in  a pamphlet,  without 
vouching  for  their  authenticity,  or  knowing  whether 
they  could  be  relied  on  as  correct.  Having  led  physi- 
cians into  a belief  that  these  were  all  well  autlien 

J95 


OI 


P01 


tlcated  cases,  the  Doctor  afterward  corrected  the 
mistake,  by  publishing  a proper  explanation.  The 
writer  hereof  was  invited  by  the  attending  physician, 
to  see  a patient  in  the  last  stage  of  hydrophobia,  who 
had  taken  the  Scutellaria  in  great  quantity,  from  the 
time  he  was  bitten  until  the  fatal  symptoms  occur- 
red. A.] 

Method  of  detecting  poisons. 

“ When  sudden  death  is  suspected  to  have  been  oc- 
casioned by  the  administration  of  poison,  either  wil- 
fully or  by  accident,  the  testimony  of  the  physician  is 
occasionally  required  to  confirm  or  invalidate  this  sus- 
picion. He  may  also  be  sometimes  called  upon  to 
ascertain  the  cause  of  the  noxious  effects  arising  from 
tire  presence  of  poisonous  substances  in  articles  of 
diet ; and  it  may,  therefore,  serve  an  important  purpose 
to  point  out  conci^ply  the  simplest  and  most  practica- 
ble modes  of  obtaining,  by  experiment,  the  necessary 
information. 

The  only  poisons,  however,  that  can  be  clearly  and 
decisively  detected,  by  chemical  means,  are  those  of 
the  mineral  kingdom.  Arsenic  and  corrosive  subli- 
mate are  most  likely  to  be  exhibited  with  the  view  of 
producing  death ; and  lead  and  copper  may  be  intro- 
duced undesignedly,  in  several  ways,  into  our  food 
and  drink.  The  continued  and  unsuspected  operation 
of  the  last  two  may  often  produce  effects  less  sudden 
and  violent,  but  not  less  baneful  to  health  and  life  than 
the  more  active  poisons ; and  their  operation  generally 
involves,  in  the  pernicious  consequences,  a greater 
number  of  sufferers. 

Method  of  discovering  arsenic. — When  the  cause 
of  sudden  death  is  believed,  from  the  symptoms  pre- 
ceding it,  to  be  the  administration  of  arsenic,  the  con- 
tents of  the  stomach  must  be  attentively  examined. 
To  effect  this,  let  a ligature  be  made  at  each  orifice,  the 
stomach  removed  entirely  from  the  body,  and  its  whole 
contents  washed  out  into  an  earthen  or  glass  vessel. 
The  arsenic,  on  account- of  its  greater  specific  gravity, 
will  settle  to  the  bottom,  and  may  be  obtained  sepa- 
rate, after  washing  off  the  other  substances  by  repeated 
effusions  of  cold  water.  These  washings  should  not 
be  thrown  away,  till  the  presence  of  arsenic  has  been 
clearly  ascertained.  It  may  be  expected  at  the  bottom 
of  the  vessel  in  the  form  of  a white  powder,  which 
must  be  carefully  collected,  dried  on  a filter,  and  sub- 
mitted to  experiment. 

A.  Boil  a small  portion  of  the  powder  with  a few 
ounces  of  distilled  water,  in  a. clean  Florence  flask, 
and  filter  the  solution. 

B.  To  this  solution  add  a portion  of  water,  saturated 
with  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  If  arsenic  be  present, 
a golden  yellow  sediment  will  fall  down,  which  will 
appear  sooner,  if  a few  drops  of  acetic  acid  be  added 

C.  A similar  effect  is  produced  by  the  addition  of 
eulphuret  of  ammonia,  or  hydrosulpliuret  of  potassa. 

It  is  necessary,  however,  to  observe,  that  these  tests 
are  decomposed  not  only  by  all  metallic  solutions,  but 
by  the  mere  addition  of  any  acid.  But  among  these 
precipitates,  Dr.  Bostock  assures  us,  the  greatest  part 
are  so  obviously  different  as  not  to  afford  a probability 
of  being  mistaken;  the  only  two  which  bear  a close 
resemblance  to  it,  are  the  precipitate  from  tartarized 
antimony,  and  that  separated  by  an  acid.  In  the  latter, 
however,  the  sulphur  preserves  its  peculiar  yellow  co- 
lour, while  the  arsenic  presents  a dee;)  shade  of  orange ; 
but  no  obvious  circumstance  of  discrimination  can  be 
■pointed  out  between  the  hydrosulphurets  of  arsenic 
and  of  antimony.  Hence  Dr.  Bostock  concludes^  that 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  and  its  compounds  merit  our 
confidence  only  as  collateral  tests.  They  discover 
arsenic  with  great  delicacy  : sixty  grains  of  water,  to 
which  one  grain  only  of  liquid  sulpburet  (hydroguret- 
ted  su’phuret  ?)  had  been  added,  was  almost  instantly 
rendered  completely  opaque  by  one -eightieth  of  a grain 
of  the  white  oxide  of  arsenic  in  solution. 

D.  To  a little  of  the  solution  A,  add  a single  drop  of 
a weak  solution  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  and  after- 
ward a few  drops  of  a solution  of  sulphate  of  copper. 
The  presence  of  arsenic  will  be  manifested  by  a yel- 
lowish-green precipitate.  Or  boil  a portion  of  the  sus- 
pected powder  with  a dilute  solution  of  pure  potassa, 
and  with  this  precipitate  the  sulphate  of  copper,  when 
a similar  appearance  will  ensue  still  more  remarkably, 
if  arsenic  be  present.  The  colour  of  this  precipitate 
is  perfectly  characteristic.  It  is  that  of  the  piement 
called  Bciieele’s  green.  To  identify  the  arsenic  with 


still  greater  certainty,  it  may  be  proper,  at  the  time  of 
making  the  experiments  on  a suspected  substance,  to 
perform  similar  ones,  as  a standard  of  comparison,  on 
what  is  actually  known  to  be  arsenic.  Let  the  colour, 
therefore,  produced  by  adding  an  alkaline  solution  of 
the  substance  under  examination,  to  a solution  of  sui 
phate  of  copper,  be  compared  with  that  obtained  by  a 
similar  admixture  of  a solution  of  copper  with  one  of 
real  arsenic  in  alkali. 

The  proportions  in  which  the  different  ingredients 
are  employed,  Dr.  Bostock  has  found  to  have  consider- 
able influence  on  the  distinct  exhibition  of  the  effect. 
Those  which  he  has  observed  to  answer  best,  were  one 
of  arsenic,  three  of  potassa,  (probably  the  subcarboa- 
ate  of,  or  common  salt  of  tartar,)  and  five  of  sulphate 
of  copper.  For  instance,  a solution  of  one  grain  of 
arsenic,  and  three  grains  of  potassa,  in  two  drachms 
of  water,  being  mingled  with  another  solution  of  five 
grains  of  sulphate  of  copper  in  the  same  quantity  of 
water,  the  whole  was  converted  into  a beautiful  grass 
green,  from  which  a copious  precipitate  of  the  same 
hue  slowly  subsided,  leaving  the  supernatant  liquor 
transparent  and  nearly  colourless.  The  same  mate- 
rials, except  with  the  omission  of  the  arsenic,  being 
employed  in  the  same  manner,  a delicate  sky-blue  re- 
sulted, so  different  from  the  former  as  not  to  admit  of 
the  possibility  of  mistake.  In  this  way,  one-fortieth  of 
a grain  of  arsenic,  diffused  through  sixty  grains  ofwa 
ter,  afforded,  by  the  addition  of  sulphate  of  copper  and 
potassa  in  proper  proportions,  a distinct  precipitate  of 
Scheele’s  green.  In  employing  this  test,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  view  the  fluid  by  reflected  and  not  by  transpa- 
rent light,  and  to  make  the  examination  by  daylight. 
To  render  the  effect  more  apparent,  a sheet  of  white 
paper  may  be  placed  behind  the  glass  in  which  the 
mixed  fluids  are  contained ; or  the  precipitation  may 
be  effected  by  mixing  the  fluids  on  a piece  of  writing- 
paper. 

E.  The  sediments,  produced  by  any  of  the  foregoing 
experiments,  may  be  collected,  dried,  and  laid  on  red- 
hot  charcoal.  A smell  of  sulphur  will  first  arise,  and 
will  be  followed  by  that  of  garlic. 

F.  A process  for  detecting  arsenic  has  been  proposed 
by  Hume,  of  London,  in  the  Philosophical  Magazine , 
for  May,  1809,  vol.  xxxiii.  The  test  which  he  has  sug- 
gested, is  the  fused  nitrate  of  silver,  or  lunar  caustic, 
which  he  employs  in  the  following  manner: — 

Into  a clean  Florence  oil-flask,  introduce  two  or 
three  grains  of  any  powder  suspected  to  be  arsenic ; 
add  not  less  than  eight  ounce-measures  of  either  rain 
or  distilled  water ; and  heat  this  gradually  over  a lamp, 
or  a clear  coal  fire,  till  the  solution  begins  to  boil. 
Then,  while  it  boils,  frequently  shake  the  flask,  which 
may  be  readily  done  by  wrapping  a piece  of  leather 
round  its  neck,  or  putting  a glove  upon  the  band.  To 
the  hot  solution,  add  a grain  or  two  of  subcarbonate  of 
potassa  or  soda,  agitating  the  whole  to  make  the  mix- 
ture uniform. 

In  the  next  place,  pour  into  an  ounce-phial,  or  a 
small  wine-glass,  about  two  table  spoonfuls  of  thi3 
solution,  and  present  bp  the  mere  surface  of  the  fluid  a 
stick  of  dry  nitrate  of  silver  or  lunar  caustic.  If  there 
be  any  arsenic  present,  a beautiful  yellow  precipitate 
will  instantly  appeal',  which  will  proceed  from  the 
point  of  contact  of  the  nitrate  with  the  fluid ; and  set- 
tle towards  the  bottom  of  the  vessel  as  a flocculent  and 
copious  precipitate. 

The  nitrate  of  silver,  Hume  finds,  also,  acts  very 
sensibly  upon  arsenate  of  potassa,  and  decidedly  dis- 
tinguishes this  salt  from  the  above  solution  or  arsenite 
of  potassa : the  colour  of  the  precipitate,  occasioned  by 
the  arsenate , being  much  darker  and  more  inclined  to 
brick-red.  In  both  cases,  he  is  of  opinion,  that,  the  test 
of  nitrate  of  silver  is  greatly  superior  to  that  of  sulphate 
of  copper;  inasmuch  as  it  produces  a much  more 
copious  precipitate,  when  equal  quantities  are  sub- 
mitted to  experiment.  The  tests  he  recommends  to  be 
employed  in  their  dry  state,  in  preference  to  that  of 
solution ; and  that  the  piece  of  salt  he  held  on  the  sur- 
face only. 

A modified  application  of  this  test  has  since  been 
proposed  by  Dr.  Marcet,  whose  directions  are  as  fol- 
low : — Let  the  fluid,  suspected  to  contain  arsenic,  be 
filtered  ; let  the  end  of  a glass  rod,  wetted  with  a solu- 
tion of  pure  ammonia,  be  brought  into  contact  wim 
this  fluid,  and  let  the  end  of  a clean  rod,  similarly 
wetted  with  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver,  be  immerud 


POI 


POI 


in  the  mixture.  If  the  minutest  quantity  of  arsenic 
be  present,  a precipitate  of  a bright-yellow  colour,  in- 
clining to  orange,  will  appear  at  the  point  of  contact, 
and  will  readily  subside  at  the  bottom  of  the  vessel. 
As  this  precipitate  is  soluble  in  ammonia,  the  greatest 
care  is  necessary  not  to  add  an  excess  of  that  alkali. 
The  acid  of  arsenic,  with  the  same  test,  affords  a brick- 
red  precipitate. — Huine,  it  may  be  added,  now  prepares 
his  test  by  dissolving  a few  grains,  say  ten,  of  lunar 
caustic  in  nine  or  ten  times  its  weight  of  distilled  water ; 
precipitating  by  liquid  ammonia : and  adding  cautious- 
ly, and  by  a few  drops  at  once,  liquid  ammonia,  till  the 
precipitate  is  redissolved,  and  no  longer.  To  obviate 
the  possibility  of  any  excess  of  ammonia,  a small  quan- 
tity of  the  precipitate  may  be  left  undissolved.  To 
apply  this  test,  nothing  more  is  required  than  to  dip  a 
rod  of  glass  into  this  liquor,  and  then  touch  with  it  the 
surface  of  a solution  supposed  to  contain  arsenic,  which 
will  be  indicated  by  a yellow  precipitate. 

Sylvester  has  objected  to  this  test,  that  it  will  not 
produce  the  expected  appearance,  when  common  salt 
is  present.  He  has,  therefore,  proposed  the  red  acetate 
of  iron  as  a better  test  of  arsenic,  with  which  it  forms 
a bright-yellow  deposite ; or  the  acetate  of  copper,  which 
affords  a green  precipitate.  Of  the  two,  he  recom- 
mends the  latter  in  preference,  but  advises  that  both 
should  be  resorted  to  in  doubtful  cases.  Dr.  Marcet, 
however,  has  replied,  that  the  objection  arising  from 
the  presence  of  common  salt  is  easily  obviated  ; for  if 
a little  diluted  nitric  acid  be  added  to  the  suspected 
liquid,  and  then  nitrate  of  silver  very  cautiously  till  the 
precipitate  ceases,  the  muriate  acid  will  be  removed, 
but  the  arsenic  will  remain  in  solution,  and  the  ad- 
dition of  ammonia  will  produce  the  yellow  precipitate 
in  its  characteristic  form.  It  is  scarcely  necessary  to 
add,  that  the  quantity  of  ammonia  must  be  sufficient  to 
saturate  any  excess  of  nitric  acid,  which  the  fluid  may 
contain. 

A more  important  objection  to  nitrate  of  silver  as  a 
test  of  arsenic  is,  that  it  affords,  with  the  alkaline  phos- 
phates, a precipitate  of  phosphate  of  silver,  scarcely 
distinguishable  by  its  colour  from  the  arseniate  of  that 
metal.  In  answer  to  this,  it  is  alleged  by  Hume,  ffiat 
the  arsenite  of  silver  may  be  discriminated  by  a curdy 
or  flocculent  figure,  resembling  that  of  fresh  precipi- 
tated muriate  of  silver,  except  that  its  colour  is  yellow ; 
while  the  phosphate  is  smooth  and  homogeneous.  The 
better  to  discriminate  these  two  arsenites,  he  advises 
two  parallel  experiments  to  be  made,  upon  separate 
pieces  of  clean  writing-paper,  spreading  on  the  one  a 
little  of  the  fresh  prepared  arsenite,  and  on  the  other  a 
little  of  the  phosphate.  When  these  are  suffered  to 
dry,  the  phosphate  will  gradually  assume  a black 
colour,  or  nearly  so,  while  the  arsenite  will  pass  from 
its  original  vivid  yellow  to  an  Indian  yellow,  or  nearly 
a fawn  colour. 

Dr.  Paris  conducts  the  trial  in  the  following  manner : 
Drop  the  suspected  fluid  on  a piece  of  white  paper, 
making  with  it  a broad  line;  along  this  line  a stick  of 
lunar  caustic  is  to  be  slowly  dravvn  several  times  suc- 
cessively, when  a streak  will  appear  of  the  colour  re- 
sembling that  known  by  the  name  of  Indian  yellow. 
This  is  equally  produced  by  arsenic  and  by  an  alkaline 
phosphate,  but  the  one  from  arsenic  is  rough,  curdy, 
and  flocculent,  like  that  from  a crayon;  that  from  a 
phosphate  is  homogeneous  and  uniform,  resembling  a 
water  colour  laid  smoothly  on  with  a brush.  Bui  a 
more  important  and  distinctive  peculiarity  soon  suc- 
ceeds ; for  in  less  than  two  minutes  the  phosphoric  yel- 
low fades  into  a sad  green,  and  becomes  gradually 
darker,  and  ultimately  quite  black,  while  on  the  other 
hand  the  arsenic  yellow  continues  permanent,  or  nearly 
so,  for  some  time,  and  then  becomes  brown.  In  per- 
forming this  experiment,  the  sunshine  should  be 
avoided,  or  the  change  of  colour  will  take  place  too 
rapidly.  (Ann.  of  Phil.  x.  GO.)  The  author  of  the 
London  Dispensatory  adds,  that  the  test  is  improved 
by  brushing  the  streak  lightly  over  with  liquid  ammo- 
nia immediately  after  the  application  of  the  caustic, 
when,  if  arsenic  be  present,  a bright  queen’s  yellow  is 
produced,  which  remains  permanent  for  nearly  an 
hour ; but  that  when  lunar  caustic  produces  a white 
yellow  before  the  ammonia  is  applied,  we  may  infer 
the  presence  of  some  alkaline  phosphate  rather  than 
of  arsenic. 

G.  Smithson  proposes  to  fuse  any  powder  suspected 
to  contain  arsenic  with  nitre;  this  produces  arseniate 


of  potassa,  of  which  the  solution  affords  a brick-red 
precipitate  with  nitrate  of  silver.  In  cases  where  any 
sensible  portion  of  the  alkali  of  the  nitre  has  been  set 
free,  it  must  be  saturated  with  acetous  acid,  and  the 
saline  mixture  dried  and  redissolved  in  water.  So 
small  is  the  quantity  of  arsenic  required  for  this  mode 
of  trial,  that  a drop  of  solution  of  oxide  of  arsenic  in 
water  (which,  at  54°  of  Fahr.  may  be  estimated  to 
contain  one-eightieth  its  weight  of  the  oxide),  mixed 
with  a Rule  nitrate  of  potassa,  and  fused  in  a platinum 
spoon,  affords  a very  sensible  quantity  of  arseniate  of 
silver.  (Ann.  of  Phil.  JV.  6’.  iv.  127.) 

H.  Dr.  Cooper,  President  of  Columbia  College,  finds 
a solution  of  chromate  of  potassa  to  be  one  of  the  best 
tests  of  arsenic.  One  drop  is  turned  green  by  the 
fourth  of  a grain  of  arsenic,  by  two  or  three  drops  of 
Fowler’s  mineral  solution,  or  any  other  arsenite  of  po- 
tassa. The  arsenious  acid  takes  oxygen  from  the 
chromic,  which  is  converted  into  oxide  of  chrome. 
To  exhibit  the  effect,  take  five  watch-glasses ; put  on 
one,  two  or  three  drops  of  a watery  solution  of  white 
arsenic;  on  the  second,  as  much  arsenite  of  potassa; 
on  the  third,  one-fourth  of  a grain  of  white  arsenic  in 
substance  ; on  the  fourth,  two  or  three  drops  of  a so- 
lution of  corrosive  sublimate  ; on  the  fifth,  two  or  three 
drops  of  a solution  of  copper.  Add  to  each  three  or  four 
drops  of  a solution  of  chromate  of  potassa.  In  half  an 
hour,  a bright,  clear,  grass-green  colour  will  appear  in 
numbers  1,  2,  3,  unchangeable  by  ammonia ; number 
4 will  instantly  exhibit  an  orange  precipitate ; and  num- 
ber 5 a green,  which  a drop  of  ammonia  will  instantly 
change  to  blue.  (Silliman’s  American  Journal , iii.) 

I.  But  the  most  decisive  mode  of  determining  the 
presence  of  arsenic  (which,  though  not  absolutely  in- 
dispensable, should  always  be  resorted  to,  when  the 
suspected  substance  can  be  obtained  in  sufficient  quan- 
tity) is  by  reducing  it  to  a metallic  state ; for  its  charac- 
ters are  then  clear  and  unequivocal.  For  this  purpose, 
let  a portion  of  the  white  sediment,  collected  from  the 
contents  of  the  stomach,  be  dried  and  mixed  with  three 
times  its  weight  of  black  flux ; or  if  this  cannot  be  pro- 
cured, with  two  parts  of  very  dry  carbonate  of  potassa 
(the  salt  of  tartar  of  the  shops),  and  one  of  powdered 
charcoal.  Dr.  Bostock  finds,  that  for  this  mixture  we 
may  advantageously  substitute  one  composed  of  half  a 
grain  of  charcoal,  and  two  drops  of  oil,  to  a grain  of  the 
sediment.  Procure  a tube  eight  or  nine  inches  long, 
and  one-fourth  or  one-sixth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  of 
thin  glass,  sealed  hermetically  at  one  end.  Then  put 
into  the  tube  the  mixture  of  the  powder  and  its  flux, 
and  if  any  should  adhere  to  the  inner  surface,  let  it  be 
wiped  off  by  a feather,  so  that  the  inside  of  all  the 
upper  part  of  the  tube  may  be  quite  clean  and  dry. 
Stop  the  end  of  the  tube  loosely*,  with  a little  paper,  and 
heat  the  sealed  end  only,  on  a chafing-dish  of  red-hot 
coals,  taking  care  to  avoid  breathing  the  fumes.  The 
arsenic,  if  present,  will  rise  to  the  upper  part  of  the 
tube,  on  the  inner  surface  of  which  it  will  form  a thin 
brilliant  coating.  Break  the  tube,  and  scrape  off  the 
reduced  metal.  Lay  a little  on  a heated  iron,  when,  if 
it  be  arsenic',  a dense  smoke  will  arise,  and  a strong 
smell  of  garlic  will  be  perceived.  The  arsenic  may  be 
further  identified,  by  putting  a small  quantity  between 
two  polished  plates  of  copper,  surrounding  it  by  pow- 
dered charcoal,  to  prevent  its  escape,  binding  these 
tightly  together  by  iron  wire,  and  exposing  them  to  a 
low  red  heat.  If  the  included  substances  be  arsenic,  a 
White  stain  will  be  left  on  the  copper. 

K:  It  may  be  proper  to  observe,  that  neither  the  stain 
on  copper,  nor  the  odour  of  garlic,  is  produced  by  the 
white  oxide  of  arsenic,  when  heated  without  the  ad- 
dition of  some  inflammable  ingredient.  The  absence 
of  arsenic  must  not,  therefore,  be  inferred,  if  no  smell 
should  be  occasioned  by  laying  the  white  powder  on  a 
heated  iron. 

Dr.  Black  ascertained  that  all  the  necessary  experi- 
ments, for  the  detection  of  arsenic,  may  be  made  on  a 
single  grain  of  the  white  oxide;  this  small  quantity 
having  produced,  when  heated  in  a tube  with  its  proper 
flux,  as  much  of  the  metal  as  clearly  established  its 
presence. 

1 f the  quantity  of  arsenic  in  the  stomach  should  be  so 
small,  which  is  not  very  probable,  as  to  occasion  death, 
and  yet  to  remain  suspended  in  the  washings,  the 
whole  contents,  and  the  water  employed  to  wash  them 
must  be  filtered,  and  the  clear  liquor  assayed  for  arse- 
nic Gy  the  tests  B,  C,  D,  and  E. 


197 


POT 


POl 


In  this  case,  it  is  necessary  to  be  careful  that  the 
colour  of  the  precipitate  is  not  modified  by  that  of  the 
liquid  found  in  the  stomach.  If  this  be  yellow,  the 
precipitate  by  sulphate  of  copper  and  carbonate  of  po- 
tassa  will  appear  green,  even  though  no  arsenic  be 
present ; but  on  leaving  it  to  settle,  decanting  otf  the 
fluid,  and  replacing  it  with  water,  it  will  evidently  be 
blue  without  any  tinge  of  green,  being  no  longer  seen 
through  a yellow  medium. — {Dr.  Paris.) 

The  liquid  contents  of  the  stomach  may  also  be 
evaporated  to  dryness  below  250°  Fahr.  and  the  dry 
mass  be  exposed  to  heat  at  the  bottom  of  a Florence 
flask,  to  sublime  the  arsenic.  If  dissolved  in  an  oily 
fluid,  Dr.  Ure  proposes  to  boil  the  solution  with  dis- 
tilled water,  and  afterward  to  separate  the  oil  by  the 
capillary  action  of  wick  threads.  The  watery  fluid 
may  then  be  subjected  to  the  usual  tests 

In  an  investigation,  the  event  of  which  is  to  affect  the 
life  of  an  accused  person,  it  is  the  duty  of  every  one 
who  may  prepare  himself  to  give  evidence,  not  to  rest 
satisfied  with  the  appearances  produced  by  any  one 
test  of  arsenic;  but  to  render  its  presence  quite  un- 
equivocal by  the  concurring  results  of  several. 

Discovery  of  corrosive  sublimate , baryta , &c. — 
Corrosive  sublimate  (the  bichloride  or  oxymuriate  of 
mercury,)  next  to  arsenic,  is  the  most  virulent  of  the 
metallic  poisons.  It  may  be  collected  by  treating  the 
contents  of  the  stomach  in  the  manner  already  de- 
scribed ; but  as  it  is  more  soluble  than  arsenic,  viz. 
in  about  nineteen  times  its  weight  of  water,  no  more 
water  must  be  employed  than  is  barely  sufficient,  and 
the  washings  must  be  carefully  preserved  for  examina- 
tion. 

If  a powder  should  be  collected  by  this  operation, 
which  proves,  on  examination,  not  to  be  arsenic,  it 
may  be  known  to  be  corrosive  sublimate  by  the  follow- 
ing characters : 

A.  Expose  a small  quantity  of  it,  without  any  ad- 
mixture, to  heat  in  a coated  glass  tube,  as  directed  in 
the  treatment  of  arsenic.  Corrosive  sublimate  will  be 
ascertained  by  its  rising  to  the  top  of  the  tube,  lining 
tiie  inner  surface  in  the  form  of  a shining  white  crust. 

B.  Dissolve  another  portion  in  distilled  water  ; and 
it  may  be  proper  to  observe  how  much  of  the  salt  the 
water  is  capable  of  taking  up. 

C.  To  the  watery  solution  add  a little  lime-water. 
A precipitate  of  an  orange  yellow  colour  will  instantly 
appear. 

D.  To  another  portion  of  the  solution  add  a single 
drop  of  a dilute  solution  of  sub-carbonate  of  potassa 
(salt  of  tartar).  A white  precipitate  will  appear  ; but, 
on  a still  further  addition  of  alkali,  an  orange-coloured 
sediment  will  be  formed. 

E.  The  carbonate  of  soda  has  similar  effects. 

F.  Sulphuretted  water  throws  down  a dark-colour- 
ed sediment,  which,  when  dried  and  strongly  heated, 
is  wholly  volatilized,  without  any  odour  of  garlic. 

For  the  detection  of  corrosive  sublimate,  Sylvester 
has  recommended  the  application  of  galvanism,  which 
exhibits  the  mercury  in  a metallic  state.  A piece  of 
zinc  wire,  or  if  that  cannot  be  had,  of  iron  wire  about 
three  inches  long,  is  to  be  twice  bent  at  right  angles,  so 
as  to  resemble  the  Greek  letter  IL  The  two  legs  of 
this  figure  should  be  distant  about  the  diameter  of  a 
common  gold  wedding-ring  from  each  other,  and  the 
two  ends  of  the  bent  wire  must  afterward  be  tied  to  a 
ring  of  this  description.  Let  a plate  of  glass,  not  less 
than  three  inches  square,  be  laid  as  nearly  horizontal 
ns  possible,  and  on  one  side  drop  some  sulphuric  acid, 
diluted  with  about  six  times  its  weight  of  water,  till  it 
spreads  to  the  size  of  a halfpenny.  At  a little  distance 
from  this,  towards  the  other  side,  next  drop  some  of 
the  solution  supposed  to  contain  corrosive  sublimate, 
till  the  edges  of  the  two  liquids  join  together;  and  let 
the  wire  and  ring  prepared  as  above  be  laid  in  such  a 
way  that  the  wire  may  touch  the  acid,  while  the  gold 
ring  is  in  contact  with  the  suspected  liquid.  If  the 
minutest  quantity  of  corrosive  sublimate  be  present, 
the  ring  in  a few  minutes  will  be  covered  with  mer- 
cury on  the  part  which  touched  the  fluid. 

Smithson  remarks,  that  all  the  oxides  and  saline 
compounds  of  mercury,  if  laid  in  a drop  of  marine 
acid  on  gold,  with  a bit  of  tin,  quickly  amalgamate  the 
gold.  In  this  way,  a very  minute  quantity  of  corro- 
sive sublimate,  or  a drop  of  its  solution  may  be  tried, 
and  no  addition  of  muriatic  acid  is  then  required. 
Quantities  of  mercury  may  thus  >be  rendered  evident, 


which  could  not  be  so  by  any  other  means.  Even  the 
mercury  of  cinnabar  may  be  exhibited ; but  it  must 
previously  be  boiled  with  a little  sulphuric  acid  in  a 
platinum  spoon,  to  convert  it  into  sulphate.  An  ex 
ceedingly  minute  quantity  of  metallic  mercury  in  any 
powder  may  be  discovered  by  placing  it  in  nitric  acid 
on  gold,  drying,  and  adding  muriatic  acid  and  tin. 

The  only  mineral  poison  of  great  virulence  that  has 
not  been  mentioned,  and  which,  from  its  being  little 
known  to  act  as  such,  it  is  very  improbable  we  should 
meet  with,  is  the  carbonate  of  baryta.  This,  in  the 
country  where  it  is  found,  is  employed  as  a poison  for 
rats,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  would  be  equally  de- 
structive to  human  life.  It  may  be  discovered  by  dis- 
solving it  in  muriatic  acid,  and  by  the  insolubility  of 
the  precipitate  which  this  solution  yields  on  adding  sul- 
phuric acid,  or  sulphate  of  soda.  Soluble  barytic  salts, 
if  these  have  been  the  means  of  poison,  will  be  con- 
tained in  the  water  employed  to  wash  the  contents  of 
the  stomach,  and  will  be  detected,  on  adding  sulphuric 
acid,  by  a copious  precipitate. 

It  may  be  proper  to  observe,  that  the  failure  of  at- 
tempts to  discover  poisonous  substances  in  the  alimen- 
tary canal  after  death,  is  by  no  means  a sufficient  proof 
that  death  has  not  been  occasioned  by  poison.  For  it 
has  been  clearly  established,  by  experiments  made  on 
animals,  that  a poison  may  be  so  completely  evacuated, 
that  no  traces  of  it  shall  be  found,  and  yet  that  death 
may  ensue  from  the  morbid  changes  which  it  has 
occasioned  in  the  alimentary  canal,  or  in  the  genera) 
system. 

Method  of  detecting  copper  or  lead. — Copper  and 
lead  sometimes  gain  admission  into  articles  of  food,  in 
consequence  of  the  employment  of  kitchen  utensils  of 
these  materials. 

1.  If  copper  be  suspected  in  any  liquor,  its  presence 
will  be  ascertained  by  adding  a solution  of  pure  am- 
monia, which  will  strike  a beautiful  blue  colour.  If 
the  solution  be  very  dilute,  it  may  be  concentrated  by 
evaporation ; and  if  the  liquor  contain  a considerable 
excess  of  acid,  like  that  used  to  preserve  pickles,  as 
much  of  the  alkali  must  be  added  as  is  more  than  suf- 
ficient to  saturate  the  acid.  In  this,  and  all  other  ex- 
periments of  the  same  kind,  the  fluid  should  be  viewed 
by  reflected,  and  not  by  transmitted  light. 

If  into  a newly  prepared  tincture  of  guaiacum  wood 
we  drop  a concentrated  solution  of  a salt  of  copper, 
the  mixture  instantly  assumes  a blue  colour.  This 
effect  does  not  take  place  when  the  solution  is  very 
weak,  for  example,  when  there  is  not  above  half  a 
grain  of  the  salt  to  an  ounce  of  water;  but  then,  by  the 
addition  of  a few  drops  of  prussic  acid,  the  blue  colour 
is  instantly  developed  of  great  purity  and  intensity. 
This  colour  is  not  permanent,  but  soon  passes  to  a 
green,  and  at  length  totally  disappears.  For  want  of 
prussic  acid,  distilled  laurel-water  may  be  employed. 
The  test  produces  its  effect,  even  when  the  proportion 
of  the  salt  of  copper  to  the  water  does  not  exceed 
l-45000th.  In  this  minute  proportion  no  other  test, 
whether  the  prussiate  of  potassa,  soda,  or  ammonia, 
gives  the  least  indication  of  copper. — ( Quart.  Joum. 
x.  182.) 

2.  Lead  is  occasionally  found,  in  sufficient  quantity 
to  be  injurious  to  health,  in  water  that  has  passed 
through  leaden  pipes,  or  been  kept  in  leaden  vessels, 
and  sometimes  even  in  pump-water,  in  consequence  of 
that  metal  having  been  used  in  the  construction  of  the 
pump.  Acetate  of  lead  has  also  been  known  to  be 
fraudulently  added  to  bad  wines,  with  the  view  of  con- 
cealing their  defects. 

Lead  may  be  discovered  by  adding,  to  a portion  of 
the  suspected  water,  about  half  its  bulk  of  water  im- 
pregnated with  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  If  lead  be 
present,  it  will  be  manifested  by  a dark  brown,  or 
blackish,  tinge.  This  test  is  so  delicate,  that  water, 
condensed  by  the  leaden  worm  of  a still-tub,  is  sensi- 
bly affected  by  it.  Lead  is  also  detected  by  a similar 
effect  ensuing  on  the  addition  of  sulphuret  of  ammo- 
nia, or ‘potassa. 

The  adequacy  of  this  method,  however,  to  the  dis- 
covery of  very  minute  quantities  of  lead,  has  been  set 
aside  by  the  experiments  of  Dr.  Lambe,  the  author  of 
a skilful  analysis  of  the  springs  of  Leamington  Priors, 
near  Warwick.  By  new  methods  of  examination,  be 
has  detected  the  presence  of  lead  in  several  spring- 
waters,  that  manifest  no  change  on  the  addition  of  the 
sulphuretted  test;  and  has  found  that  metal  in  the  pre- 


POI 


POL 


cipitate,  sepai  ated  from  such  waters  by  the  carbonate 
of  potassa  or  of  soda.  In  operating  on  these  waters, 
Dr  Lambe  noticed  the  following  appearances  : 

a.  The  test  forms  sometimes  a dark  cloud,  with  the 
precipitate  affected  by  alkalies,  which  has  been  redis- 
solved in  nitric  acid. 

b.  Though  it  forms,  in  other  cases,  no  cloud,  the  pre- 
cipitate itself  becomes  darkened  by  the  sulphuretted  test. 

c.  The  test  forms  a white  cloud,  treated  with  the 
precipitate  as  in  a.  These  two  appearances  may  be 
united. 

d.  The  test  neither  forms  a cloud,  nor  darkens  the 
precipitate. 

e.  In  the  cases  b,  c,  d,  heat  the  precipitate,  in  con- 
tact with  an  alkaline  carbonate,  to  redness ; dissolve 
out  the  carbonate  by  water ; and  treat  the  precipitate 
as  in  a.  The  sulphuretted  test  then  forms  a dark  cloud 
with  the  solution  of  the  precipitate.  In  these  experi- 
ments, it  is  essential  that  the  acid,  used  to  redissolve 
the  precipitate,  shall  not  be  in  excess ; and  if  it  should 
so  happen,  that  excess  must  be  saturated  before  the 
test  is  applied.  It  is  better  to  use  so  little  acid,  that 
some  of  the  precipitate  may  remain  undissolved. 

/.  Instead  of  the  process  e,  the  precipitate  may  be 
exposed,  without  addition,  to  a red  heat,  and  then 
treated  as  in  a.  In  this  case,  the  test  will  detect  the 
metallic  matter ; but  with  less  certainty  than  the  fore- 
going one. 

The  nitric  acid,  used  in  these  experiments,  should  be 
perfectly  pure ; and  the  test  should  be  recently  pre- 
pared by  saturating  water  with  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
*as.  A few  drops  of  nitric  acid  added  to  a water  con- 
taining lead,  whicn  has  been  reduced  to  l-8th  or  l-10th 
its  bulk  by  evaporation,  and  then  followed  by  the  addi- 
tion of  a few  drops  of  hydriodate  of  potassa,  produces 
a yellow  insoluble  precipitate. 

Another  mode  of  analysis,  employed  by  Dr.  Lambe, 
consists  in  precipitating  the  lead  by  solution  of  com- 
mon salt;  but  as  muriate  of  lead  is  partly  soluble  in 
water,  this  test  cannot  be  applied  to  small  portions  of 
suspected  water.  The  precipitate  must  be,  therefore, 
collected,  from  two  or  three  gallons,  and  heated  to  red- 
ness with  twice  its  weight  of  carbonate  of  soda.  Dis- 
solve out  the  soda;  add  nitric  acid,  saturating  any 
superfluity ; and  then  apply  the  sulphuretted  tast. 
Sulphate  of  soda  would  be  found  more  effectual  in  this 
process  than  the  muriate,  on  account  of  the  greater  in- 
solubility of  sulphate  of  lead.  This  property,  indeed, 
renders  sulphate  of  soda  an  excellent  test  of  the  pre- 
sence of  lead,  when  held  in  solution  by  acids,  for  it 
throws  down  that  metal,  even  when  present  in  very 
small  quantity,  in  the  form  of  a heavy  white  precipi- 
tate, which  is  not  soluble  by  acetic  acid. 

The  third  process,  which  is  the  most  satisfactory  of 
all,  and  is  very  easy,  except  for  the  trouble  of  collect- 
ing a large  quantity  of  precipitate,- is  the  actual  reduc- 
tion of  the  metal,  and  its  exhibition  in  a separate  form. 
The  precipitate  may  be  mixed  with  its  own  weight  of 
alkaline  carbonate,  and  exposed  either  with  or  without 
the  addition  of  a small  proportion  of  charcoal,  to  a 
heat  sufficient  to  melt  the  alkali.  On  breaking  the 
crucible,  a small  globule  of  lead  will  be  found  reduced 
at  the  bottom.  The  precipitate  from  about  fifty  gallons 
of  water  yielded  Dr.  Lambe,  in  one  instance,  about 
two  grains  of  lead. 

For  discovering  the  presence  of  lead  in  wine,  a test 
invented  by  Dr.  Hahnemann,  and  known  by  the  title  of 
Hahnemann’s  wine  test,  may  be  employed.  This  test 
is  prepared  by  putting  together,  in*o  a small  phial,  six- 
teen grains  of  sulphuret  of  lime,  prepared  in  the  dry 
way  (by  exposing  to  a red  heat,  in  a covered  crucible, 
equal  weights  of  powdered  lime  and  sulphur,  accurate- 
ly mixed),  and  twenty  grains  of  bitartrate  of  potassa 
(cream  of  tartar).  The  phial  is  to  be  filled  with  water, 
well  corked,  and  occasionally  shaken  for  the  space  of 
ten  minutes.  When  the  powder  has  subsided,  decant 
the  clear  liquor,  and  preserve  it,  in  a well-stopped  bot- 
tle, for  use.  The  liquor,  when  fresh  prepared,  dis- 
covers lead  by  a dark  coloured  precipitate.  A further 
proof  of  the  presence  of  lead  in  wines  is  the  occurrence 
of  a precipitate  on  adding  a solution  of  the  sulphate  of 
soda. 

Sylvester  has  proposed  the  gallic  acid  as  an  excellent 
test  of  the  presence  of  lead. 

The  quantity  of  lead,  which  has  been  detected  in  so- 
phisticated wine,  may  be  estimated  at  forty  grains  of 
the  metal  in  every  fifty  gallons. 


When  a considerable  quantity  of  acetate  of  lead  has 
been  taken  into  the  stomach  (as  sometimes,  owing  to 
its  sweet  taste,  happens  to  children),  after  the  exhibi- 
tion of  an  active  emetic,  thehydro-sulphuretof  potassa 
or  of  ammonia  may  be  given  ; or  probably  a solution  of 
sulphate  of  soda  (Glauber’3  salt)  would  render  it  in- 
noxious.”— Henry's  Chem. 

Poison-oak.  See  Rhus  toxicodendron. 

POLEMO'NIUM.  (An  ancient  name  derived  from 
7 roXepos,  wax : because,  according  to  Pliny,  kings  had 
contended  for  the  honour  of  its  discovery.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  LinnEean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  Wild  sage,  or  Teucrium  scorodonia  of  Linnaeus. 

Poi.emonium  cjeruleum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Greek  valerian,  or  Jacob’s  ladder,  the  root  of  which 
is  esteemed  by  some  as  a good  astringent  against  diar- 
rhoeas and  dysentery. 

POLEY-MOUNTAIN.  See  Teucrium. 

POLIOSIS  .(From  iroXos,  candidus , white  or  hoary.) 
The  specific  name  of  a species  of  Trichosis  in  Good’s 
arrangement,  in  which  the  hairs  are  prematurely  gray 
or  hoary. 

PO'LIUM.  (From  ajoAioj,  white : so  called  from  its 
white  capillaments.)  Poley.  Teucrium  of  Linnaeus. 

Polium  creticum.  See  Teucrium  creticum. 

Polium  montanum.  See  Teucrium  capitatum. 

POLLEN.  ( Pollen , inis.  n. ; fine  flour,  or  dust.) 
The  powder  which  adheres  to  the  anthers  of  the  flow- 
ers of  plants,  and  which  is  contained  in  the  anther,  and 
is  thrown  out  chiefly  in  warm,  dry  weather,  when  the 
coat  of  the  latter  contracts  and  bursts.  The  pollen, 
though  to  the  naked  eye  a fine  powder,  and  light 
enough  to  be  waf(ed  along  by  the  air,  is  so  curiously 
formed,  and  so  various  in  different  plants,  as  to  be  an 
interesting  and  popular  object  for  the  microscope. 
Each  grain  of  it  is  commonly  a membranous  bag,  round 
or  angular,  rough  or  smooth,  which  remains  entire  till 
it  meets  with  any  moisture,  being  contrary  in  this  re- 
spect to  the  nature  of  the  anther  ; then  it  bursts  with 
great  force,  discharging  its  subtile  and  vivifying  vapour. 

In  the  Helianthus  annuus , the  pollen  is  echinate. 

In  Geraniums , perforate. 

The  pollen  of  Symphatum  is  didymous 

That  of  the  Mallow , dentate. 

It  is  angulate  in  Viola  odorata. 

Reniforme  in  Narcissus  ; and 

In  Bor  ago,  convolute. 

POLLENIN.  The  pollen  of  tulips  has  been  ascer- 
tained by  Professor  John  to  contain  a peculiar  sub- 
stance, insoluble  in  alkohol,  a2ther,  water,  oil  of  tur- 
pentine, naphtha,  carbonated  and  pure  alkalies;  ex- 
tremely combustible,  burning  with  great  rapidity  and 
flame ; and  hence  used  at  the  theatres  to  imitate  light- 
ning. 

POLLEX.  The  thumb,  or  great  toe. 

POLY ADELPHIA.  (From  ttoXvs,  many,  and  aSe\- 
4>ia,  a brotherhood.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in 
the  sexual  system  of  Linnteus,  embracing  plants  with 
hermaphrodite  flowers,  in  which  several  stamina  are 
united  by  their  filaments  into  three  or  more  distinct 
bundles. 

POLYA'NDRIA.  (From  iroXvs,  many,  and  avr/o,  a 
husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the  sexual 
system  of  LinriEeus.  It  consists  of  plants  with  hermaph- 
rodite flowers,  furnished  with  several  stamina,  that 
are  inserted  into  the  common  receptacle  of  the  flower  ; 
by  which  circumstance  this  class  is  distinguished  from 
Icosandria , in  which  the  striking  character  is  the  situa- 
tion of  the  stamina  on  the  calyx  or  petals. 

POLYCHRE'STUS.  (From  zsoXvs , much,  and 
XQVTos , useful.)  Having  many  virtues,  or  uses.  Ap- 
plied to  many  medicines  from  their  extensive  useful- 
ness. 

POLYCHROITE.  The  colouring  matter  of  saffron. 

POLYDI'PSIA.  (From  zsoXvs,  much,  and  dopy, 
thirst.)  Excessive  thirst.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
Class  Locales , and  Order  Dysorexice , of  Cullen.  It  is 
mostly  symptomatic  of  fever,  dropsy,  excessive  dis- 
charges, or  poisons. 

POLY'GALA.  (From  sjoAus, much, and yaXa, milk: 
so  named  from  the  abundance  of  its  milky  juice.)  1. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnasan  system. 
Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  Octandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  milk 
wort.  See  Polygala  vulgaris. 

Polygala  amara.  This  is  a remarkably  bitter  plant 

199 


POL 


POL 


and,  tliough  not  used  in  this  country,  promises  to  be  as 
efficacious  as  those  in  greater  repute.  It  has  been  given 
freely  in  phthisis  pulmonalis,  and,  like  other  remedies, 
failed  in  producing  a cure ; yet,  as  a palliative,  it  claims 
attention.  Its  virtues  are  balsamic,  demulcent,  and 
corroborant. 

Polygala  senega.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
rattlesnake  milk-wort.  Seneka.  Polygala— floribus 

vnperbibus  spicatis,  caule  credo  herbaceo  simplicis- 
siiao,  foliis  ovato  lanceolatis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  root 
of  this  plant  was  formerly  much  esteemed  as  a specific 
against  the  poison  of  the  rattlesnake,  and  as  an  anti- 
phlogistic in  pleurisy,  pneumonia,  &c. ; but  it  is  now 
very  much  laid  aside.  Its  dose  is  from  ten  to  twenty 
grains ; but  when  employed,  it  is  generally  used  in  the 
form  of  decoction,  which,  when  prepared  according  to 
the  formula  of  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia,  may  be 
given  every  second  or  third  hour, 
f*  Polygala  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  milk-wort.  The  root  of  this  plant  is  some- 
what similar  in  taste  tp  that  of  the  seneka,  but  much 
weaker.  The  leaves  are  very  bitter,  and  a handful  of 
them,  infused  in  wine,  is  said  to  be  a safe  and  gentle 
purge. 

POLYGA'MIA.  (From  ttoXvs,  many,  and  yapos,  a 
marriage.)  Polygamy.  The  name  of  a class  of  plants 
in  the  sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  consisting  of  poly- 
gamous plants,  or  plants  having  hermaphrodite  flow- 
ers, and  likewise  male  and  female  flowers,  or  both. 
The  orders  of  this  division  are  according  to  the  beauti- 
ful uniformity  or  plan  which  runs  through  this  inge- 
nious system,  distinguished  upon  the. principles  of  the 
Classes  Monacia,  Diceda , and  Triad  a.  It  has  the 
five  following  orders : 

1.  Polygamia  cequalis.  The  name  of  an  order  of 
Class  Syngenesia,  of  the  sexual  system  of  plants.  The 
florets  are  all  perfect  or  united,  that  is,  each  furnished 

..with  perfect" stamens. 

2.  Polygamia  frustranea.  Florets  of  the  disk,  with 
stamens  and  pistil : those  of  the  radius  with  merely  an 
abortive  pistil,  or  with  not  even  the  rudiments  of  any. 

3.  Polygamia  necessaria.  Florets  of  the  disk  with 
stamens  only,  those  of  the  radius  with  pistils  only. 

4.  Polygamia  segregata.  Several  flowers,  either  sim- 
ple or  compound,  but  with  united  anthers,  and  with  a 
proper  calyx,  included  in  one  common  calyx. 

5.  Polygamia  superflua.  Florets  of  the  disk,  with 
stamens  and  pistil : those  of  the  radius  with  pistil  only, 
but  each,  of  both  kinds,  forming  perfect  seed. 

POLyGONA'TUM.  (From  noAuj,  many,  and  yovv, 
a joint : so  named  from  its  numerous  joints  or  knots.) 
Solomon's  seal.  See  Convallariapolygonatum. 

POLY'GONUM.  (From  zzoAuf,  many,  and  yovv , a 
joint:  so  named  from  its  numerous  joints.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin.ncean  system.  Class, 
Octandria ; Order,  Trigynia.  Knot-grass. 

Polygonum  aviculare.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  knot-grass.  Centumnodia;  Polygonum  latifolium ; 
Polygonum  mas  ; Sanguinaria.  This  plant  is  never 
used  in  this  country;  it  is  said  to  be  useful  in  stopping 
haemorrhages,  diarrhoeas,  &.c. ; but  little  credit  is  to  be 
given  to  this  account. 

Polygonum  bacciferum.  A species  of  equisetum, 
or  horse-tail. 

Polygonum  bistorta.*  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  bistort.  Bistorta.  Polygonum — caule  sim- 
plicissimo  movostachio , foliis  ovati.s  in  petiolum  decur- 
rentibus , of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  is  a native  of  Bri- 
tain. Every  part  manifests  a degree  of  stypticity  to  the 
taste,  and  the  root  is  esteemed  to  be  one  of  the  most 
powerful  of  the  vegetable  astringents,  and  frequently 
made  use  of  as  such,  in  disorders  proceeding  from  a 
laxity  and  debility  of  the  solids,  for  restraining  alvine 
fluxes,  after  due  evacuations,  and  other  preternatural 
discharges,  both  serous  and  sanguineous.  It  lias  been 
sometimes  given  in  intermitting  fevers ; and  sometimes 
also,  in  small  doses,  as  a corroborant  and  antiseptic,  in 
acute  malignant  and  colliquative  fevers;  in  which  in- 
tentions Peruvian  bark  has  now  deservedly  superseded 
both  these  and  all  other  adstringents.  The  common 
dose  of  bistort  root  in  substance,  is  fifteen  or  twenty 
grains : in  urgent  cases  it  is  extended  to  a drachm.  Its 
astringent  matter  is  totally  dissolved  both  by  water  and 
rectified  spirits. 

Polygonum  divaricatum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  eastern  buckwheat  plant.  The  roots,  reduced 
to  a coarse  meal,  are  the  ordinary  food  of  the  Siberians. 

200 


Polygonum  fagopyrum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  buckwheat.  The  grain  of  this  plant  constitutes 
the  principal  food  of  the  inhabitants  of  Russia,  Ger- 
many, and  Switzerland. 

Polygonum  hydropiper.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  poor  man’s  pepper.  Hydrppiper.  Biting  arse-smart; 
Lake- weed  ; Water-pepper.  This  plant  is  very  com- 
mon in  our  ditches ; the  leaves  have  an  acrid,  burning 
taste,  and  seem  to  be  nearly  of  the  same  nature  with 
those  of  the  arum.  They  have  been  recommended  as 
possessing  antiseptic,  aperient,  diuretic  virtues,  and 
given  in  scurvies  and  cachexies,  asthmas,  hypochon- 
driacal and  nephritic  complaints,  and  wandering  gout. 
The  first  leaves  have  been  applied  externally,  as  a sti- 
mulating cataplasm. 

Polygonum  latifolium.  Common  knot-grass.  See 
Polygonum  aviculare. 

Polygonum  mas.  See  Polygonum  aviculare. 

Polygonum  minus.  Rupture-wort.  See  Hernia- 
ria  glabra. 

Polygonum  persicaria.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Persicaria  of  the  old  pharmacopoeias.  Persicaria 
mitis ; Plumbago.  Arse-smart.  This  plant  is  said  to 
possess  vulnerary  and  antiseptic  properties;  with 
which  intentions  it  is  given  iu  wine  to  restrain  the  pro- 
gress of  gangrene. 

Polygonum  selenoides.  Parsley  breakstone. 

POLYPO'DIUM.  (From  zso\vi,  many,  and  novs, 
a foot : so  called  because  it  has  many  roots.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Limnean  system. 
Class,  Cryptogamia ; Older,  Filices.  Fern,  or  poly- 
pody. 

Polypodium  aculeatum.  Filix  dculeata.  Spear- 
pointed  fern.  Fallen  into  disuse. 

Polypodium  filix  mas.  Aspidium  filix  mas,  of 
Dr.  Smith  ; Pteris ; Blancnon  ; Orbasii;  Pouchitis. 
Male  polypody,  or  fern.  The  root  of  this  plant  has 
been  greatly  celebrated  for  its  effects  upon  the  taenia 
osculis  supcrficialibus , or  broad  tape-  worm.  Madame 
Noufer  acquired  great  celebrity  by  employing  it  as  a 
specific.  This  secret  was  thought  of  such  importance 
by  some  of  the  principal  physicians  at  Paris,  who  were 
deputed  to  make  a complete  trial  of  its  efficacy,  that 
it  was  purchased  by  the  French  king,  and  afterward 
published  by  his  order.  The  method  of  cure  is  the 
following: — After  the  patient  has  been  prepared  by  an 
emollient  glyster,  and  a supper  of  panada,  with  butter 
and  salt,  he  is  directed  to  take  in  the  morning,  while 
in  bed,  a dose  of  two  or  three  drachms  of  the  powder- 
ed root  of  the  male  fern.  The  powder  must  be  washed 
down  with  a draught  of  water,  and,  two  hours  after,  a 
strong  cathartic,  composed  of  calomel  and  scammony, 
is  to  be  given,  proportioned  to  the  strength  of  the  pa- 
tient. If  this  does  not  operate  in  due  time,  it  is  to  be 
followed  by  a dose  of  purging  salts,  and  if  the  worm 
be  not  expelled  in  a few  hours,  this  process  is  to  be  re- 
peated at  proper  intervals.  Of  the  success  of  this,  or 
a similar  mode  of  treatment,  in  cases  of  taenia,  there 
can  be  no  doubt,  as  many  proofs  in  this  country  afford 
sufficient  testimony ; but  whether  the  fern-root  or  the 
strong  cathartic  is  the  principal  agent  in  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  worm,  may  admit  of  a question;  and  the 
latter  opinion,  Dr.  Woodville  believes,  is  the  more 
generally  adopted  by  physicians.  It  appears,  however, 
from  some  experiments  made  in  Germany,  that  the 
taenia  lias,  in  several  instances,  been  expelled  by  the 
repealed  exhibition  of  the  root,  without  the  assistance 
of  any  purgative. 

[Polypodium  barometz.  See  Jlgnus  tartari- 
cus.  A.] 

PO'LYPUS.  (From  rtoAuj,  many,  and  zsovs,  a foot : 
from  its  sending  off  many  ramifications,  like  legs.)  1. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  zoophytes. 

2.  A species  of  sarcoma  in  Cullen’s  Nosology.  A 
polypus  is  a tumour,  which  is  generally  narrow  where 
it  originates,  and  then  becomes  wider,  somewhat  like 
a pear.  It  is  most  commonly  met  with  in  the  nose, 
uterus,  or  vagina  ; and  has  received  its  name  from  an 
erroneous  idea,  that  it  usually  had  several  roots,  or 
feet,  like  zoophyte  polypi. 

Polypi  vary  from  each  other  according  to  the  differ- 
ent causes  that  produce  them,  and  the  alterations  that 
happen  in  thun.  Sometimes  a polypus  of  the  nose  is 
owing  to  a swelling  of  the  pituitary  membrane,  which 
swelling  may  possess  a greater  or  less  space  ol  the 
membrane,  as  also  its  cellular  substance,  and  may  affect 
either  one  or  both  nostrils.  At  other  times  it  arises 


POM 


POR 


from  an  ulcer  produced  by  a caries  of  some  of  the 
bones  which  form  the  internal  surface  of  the  nostrils. 
Polypuses  are  sometimes  so  soft,  that  upon  the  least 
touch  they  are  lacerated,  and  bleed;  at  other  times 
they  are  very  compact,  and  even  scirrhous.  Some 
continue  small  a great  while ; others  increase  so  fast 
as,  in  a short  time,  to  push  out  at  the  nostrils,  or  ex- 
tend backwards  towards  the  throat.  Le  Dran  men- 
tions, that  he  has  known  them  fill  up  the  space  behind 
the  uvula,  and,  turning  towards  the  mouth,  have  pro- 
truded the  fleshy  arch  of  the  palate  so  far  forwards  as 
to  make  it  parallel  with  the  third  dentes  molares. 
There  are  others  which,  though  at  first  free  from  any 
malignant  disposition,  become  afterward  carcinoma- 
tous, and  even  highly  cancerous.  Of  whatever  nature 
the  polypus  is,  it  intercepts  the  passage  of  the  air 
through  the  nostril,  and,  when  large,  forces  the  septum 
narium  into  the  other  nostril,  so  that  the  patient  is 
unable  to  breathe,  unless  through  the  mouth.  A large 
polypus  pressing  in  like  manner  upon  the  spongy  bones, 
gradually  forces  them  down  upon  the  maxillary  bones, 
and  thus  compresses  and  stops  up  the  orifice  of  the 
ductus  lachrymalis ; nor  is  it  impossible  for  the  sides 
of  the  canalis  nasnlis  to  be  pressed  together.  In  which 
case,  the  tears,  having  no  passage  through  the  nose,  the 
eye  is  kept  constantly  watering,  and  the  sacclms  lachry- 
malis., not  being  able  to  discharge  its  contents,  is  some- 
times so  much  dilated  as  to  form  what  is  called  a flat 
Jistula.  The  above  writer  has  seen  instances  of  poly- 
puses so  much  enlarged  as  to  force  down  the  ossa  palati. 

The  polypus  of  the  uterus  is  of  three  kinds,  in  re- 
spect to  situation.  It  either  grows  from  the  fundus, 
the  inside  of  the  cervix,  or  from  the  lower  edge  of  the 
os  uteri.  The  first  case  is  the  most  frequent,  the  last 
the  most  uncommon.  Polypi  of  the  uterus  are  always 
shaped  like  a pear,  and  have  a thin  pedicle.  They  are 
almost  invariably  of  that  species  which  is  denomi- 
nated fleshy,  hardly  ever  being  scirrhous,  cancerous, 
or  ulcerated. 

3.  The  coagulated  substance  which  is  found  in  the 
cavities  of  the  heart  of  those  who  are  some  time  in 
articulo  mortis , is  improperly  called  a polypus. 

POLYSA'RCIA.  (.From  zsoXvi,  much,  and  aap^, 
flesh.)  Polysomatia ; Obesitas ; Corpulentia ; Stea- 
tites. Troublesome  corpulency,  obesity,  or  fatness. 
A genus  of  diseases  in  the  Class  Cachexies,  and  Order  i 
Intumescentia , of  Cullen. 

POLYSOMA'TIA.  (From  zsoXvs,  much,  and  awpa, 
a body.)  See  Polysarcia. 

Polyspa'stum.  (From  aoXvs,  muph,  and  craw, 
to  draw.)  A forcible  instrument  for  reducing  luxa- 
tions. 

POLYTRI'CHUM.  (From  zsoXvq,  many,  and  6pi%, 
hair;  so  called  from  its  resemblance  to  a woman’s 
hair,  or  because,  in  ancient  times,  women  used  to  dye 
the  hair  with  it,  to  keep  it  from  sheddihg.)  Polytry- 
con.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Class,  Cryptogamia ; Order,  Jfiusci. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  golden  maiden- 
hair. See  Polytricum  commune. 

Polytricum  commune.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  golden  maidenhair.  Adiantlium  aureum.  It  pos- 
sesses, in  an  inferior  degree,  astringent  virtues : and 
was  formerly  given  in  diseases  of  the  lungs  and  calcu- 
ous  complaints. 

POMACEA3.  (From  pomum , an  apple.)  The  name 
of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnams’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  those  which  have  a 
fruit  of  a pulpy,  esculent,  apple,  berry,  or  cherry  kind. 

POMA'CEUM.  (From  pomum , an  apple.)  Cider, 
or  the  fermented  juice  of  apple. 

POMEGRANATE.  See  Punica granatum. 
POMPHOLYGO'DES.  (FVom  esopepoXv^,  a bubble, 
and  eiSos,  resemblance.)  Urine,  with  bubbles  on  the 
surface. 

PO'MPHOLYX.  (From  wop0oj,  a bladder.)  1.  A 
small  vesicle,  or  bubble. 

2.  The  whitish  oxide  of  zinc,  which  adheres  to  the 
covers  of  the  crucibles  in  making  brass,  in  the  form  of 
small  bubbles. 

PO'MPHOS.  (From  zsepefxa , to  put  forth.)  Pom- 
pkus.  A bladder,  or  watery  pustule. 

PQMUM.  1.  An  apple. 

2.  In  botanical  distinctions  and  language  this  is  a 
fleshy  pericarpium  or  seed-vessel,  containing  a capsule 
within  it,  with  several  seeds.  Its  species  are, 

1.  Pomum  oblongum;  as  in  Pyrus  communis. 


2.  P.  baccatum ; as  in  Pyrus  baccata. 

3.  P.  muricatum ; as  in  Momordica  trifoliala. 

4.  P.hispidum;  as  in  Momordica  elaterium. 

The  navel-like  remains  is  part  of  the  calyx. 

The  pomum  is  comprehended  by  Gaertner  under  the 
different  kinds  of  bacca,  it  being’sometmies  scarcely  pos- 
sible to  draw  the  line  between  them.  See  Pyrus  malus. 

Pomum  adami.  {Pomum,  an  apple:  so  called  in 
consequence  of  a whimsical  supposition,  that  part  of 
tlie  forbidden  apple  which  Adam  ate,  stuck  in  the 
throat)  and  thus  became  the  cause.)  The  protuberance 
in  the  anterior  part  of  the  neck,  formed  by  the  forepart 
of  the  thyroid  gland. 

Pomum  amoris.  See  Solanum  lycopersicum. 
Ponderous  spar.  See  Heavy  spar  and  Barytes. 

PO  NS.  A bridge.  A part  of  the  brain  is  so  called 
from  its  arched  appearance. 

Pons  varolii.  Corpus  annulare;  Processus  annu- 
laris ; Eminentia  annularis.  Varolius’s  bridge.  An 
eminence  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  first  described  by 
Varolius.  It  is  formed  by  the  two  exterior  crura  of 
the  cerebellum  becoming  flattened  and  passing  over 
the  crura  of  the  cerebrum. 

Po'ntica  vina.  Acid,  feculent,  and  tartarous  wines. 
Ponticum  mel.  A poisonous  honey. 

Poor  man's  pepper.  See  Polygonum  hydropiper% 
and  Lepidium. 

POPLAR.  See  Populus. 

PO'PLES.  The  ham,  or  joint  of  the  knee. 
POPLITE'AL-  ( Pupliteus ; from poples,  the  ham.) 
A small  triangular  muscle  lying  across  the  back  part 
of  the  knee-joint,  is  so  called. 

Popliteal  artery.  Arteria  poplitea.  The  con 
thmation  of  the  crural  artery,  through  the  hollow  of 
the  ham. 

POPPY.  See  Papaver. 

Poppy,  red  corn.  See  Papaver  rhaas. 

Poppy,  white.  See  Papaver  somniferum. 
POPULA'GO.  (From  populus,  the  poplar;  because 
its  leaves  resemble  those  of  the  poplar.)  See  Caltha 
palustris. 

PO'PULUS.  (From  sjoAvj,  many;  because  of  the 
multitude  of  its  shoots.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Dicecia;  Order, 
Octandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  black  poplar. 

See  Populus  nigra. 

Populus  balsamifera.  See  Fagara. 

Populus  nigra.  The  systematic  name  of  the  black 
poplar.  JEgciros.  The  young  buds,  oculi,  or  rudi- 
ments of  the  leaves,  which  appear  in  the  beginning  of' 
the  spring,  were  formerly  employed  in  an  officinal  oint- 
ment. At  present  they  are  almost  entirely  disregarded, 
though  they  should  seem,  from  their  sensible  qualities, 
to  be  applicable  to  purposes  of  some  importance.  They 
have  a yellow,  unctuous,  odorous,  balsamic  juice 
Po'rcus.  A name  for  the  pudendum  muliebre. 

Pori  biliarii.  The  biliary  pores  or  ducts,  that  re- 
ceive the  bile  from  the  penicilli  of  the  liver,  and  con- 
vey it  to  the  hepatic  duct.  See  Liver. 

PORIFORMIS.  Resembling  a pore:  applied  to  a 
nectary,  when  of  that  appearance,  as  that  of  the  hya- 
cinth, which  has  three  like  pores  in  the  germen. 

Poroce'le.  (From  awpos,  a callus,  and  KtjXrj,  a 
tumour.)  A hard  tumour  of  any  part,  but  especially 
of  the  testicle.  7 

Poro'mphalum  (From  zswpos,  a callus,  and  oud>a - 
Aoj,  the  navel.)  A hard  tumour  of  the  navel. 

PORPHYRA.  Dr.  Good’s  name  for  scurvy.  Seo 
Scorbutxis. 

PORPHYRY.  A compound  rock,  having  a basis, 
in  which  the  other  contemporaneous  constituent  parts 
are  imbedde^.  The  base  is  sometimes  clay-stone, 
sometimes  hornstone,  sometimes  compact  felspar ; or 
pitchstone,  pearlstone,  and  obsidian.  The  imbedded 
parts  are  most  commonly  felspar  and  quartz,  which 
are  usually  crystallized  more  or  less  perfectly,  and 
hence  they  appear  sometimes  granular.  According  to 
Werner,  there  are  two  distinct  porphyry  formations  * 
the  oldest  occurs  in  gneiss,  in  beds  of  great  magnitude ; 
and  also  in  mica-slate  and  clay-slate.  Between  Blaif 
in  Athole  and  Dalnacardoch,  there  is  a very  fine  ex- 
ample of  a bed  of  porphyry-slate  in  mica.  The  second 
porphyry  formation  is  much  more  widely  extended. 

It  consists  principally  of  clay  porphyry,  while  the 
former  consists  chiefly  of  hornstone  porphyry  and  fel 
•spar  porphyry. 

201 


POT 


POT 


t sometimes  contains  considerable  repositories  of 
ore,  in  veins.  Gold,  silver,  lead,  tin,  copper,  iron,  and 
manganese  occur  in  it ; but  chiefly  in  the  newer  por- 
phyry, as  happens  with  the  Hungarian  mines.  It  oc- 
curs in  Arran,  and  in  Perthshire  between  Dalnacardoch 
and  Tummel-bridge. 

PORRET.  See  Allium  porrum. 

PORRI'GO.  (A  porrigendo ; from  its  spreading 
abroad.)  A disease  very  common  among  children,  in 
which  the  skin  of  the  hairy  part  of  the  head  becomes 
dry  and  callous,  and  comes  off’  like  bran  upon  combing 
the  head. 

PO'RRUM.  See  Allium  porrum. 

PO'RTA.  ( A portando,  because  through  it  the  blood 
is  carried  to  the  liver.)  That  part  of  the  liver  where 
its  vessels  enter. 

Port.®  vena.  See  Vena  porta. 

Portaiguille.  The  acutenaculum. 

PORTIO.  A portion  or  branch  : applied  to  a nerve. 

Portio  dura.  (One  branch  of  the  seven  pair  of 
nerves  is  called  portio  dura , the  hard  portion,  either 
from  its  being  more  firm  than  the  other,  or  because  it 
runs  into  the  hard  part  of  the  skull;  and  the  other  the 
portio  mollis,  or  soft  portion.)  Facial  nerve.  This 
nerve  arises  near  the  pons,  from  the  crus  of  the  brain, 
enters  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  gives 
off  a branch  into  the  tympanum,  which  is  called  the 
chorda  tympani,  and  then  proceeds  to  form  the  pes  an- 
serinus  on  the  face,  from  whence  the  integuments  of 
the  face  are  supplied  with  nerves.  See  Facial  nerve. 

Portio  mollis.  Auditory  nerve.  Acoustic  nerve. 
This  nerve  arises  from  the  medulla  oblongata  and 
fourth  ventricle  of  the  brain,  enters  the  petrous  portion 
of  the  temporal  bone,  and  is  distributed  on  the  internal 
ear,  by  innumerable  branches,  not  only  to  the  cochlea, 
but  also  to  the  membrane  lining  the  vestibulum  and 
semicircular  canals,  and  is  the  immediate  organ  of 
hearing. 

Portland  powder.  A celebrated  gout  remedy.  It 
consists  of  various  bitters  ; principally  of  hoarhound, 
bithwort,  the  tops  and  leaves  of  germander,  ground- 
pine,  and  centaury,  dried,  powdered,  and  sifted.  It  is 
now  fallen  into  disuse. 

Portora'rium.  (From  porta , a door ; because  it 
is,  as  it  were,  the  door  or  entrance  of  the  intestines.) 
The  right  orifice  of  the  stomach. 

PORTULA'CA.  (From  porto,  to  carry,  and  lac, 
milk  ; because  it  increases  the  animal  milk.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Dodecandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  purslane.  See 
Portulaca  oleracea. 

Portulaca  oleracea.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  eatable  purslane.  Andrachne ; Allium  gallicum. 
The  plant  which  is  so  called  in  dietetical  and  medical 
writings,  abounds  with  a watery  and  somewhat  acid 
j uice,  and  is  often  put  into  soups,  or  pickled  with  spices. 
It  is  said  to  be  antiseptic  and  aperient. 

PO'RUS.  A pore  or  duct.  A term  used  in  anatomy, 
and  botany;  the  pores  of  the  skin;  and  particularly 
applied  in  botany  to  the  small  puncture-like  openings 
in  the  inferior  surface  of  the  genus  Boletus. 

Po'sca.  Vinegar  and  water  mixed. 

POSSE'TUM.  Posset.  Milk  curdled  with  wine, 
treacle,  or  any  acid. 

POSTE'RIOR.  Parts  are  so  named  from  their  re- 
lative situation. 

Posterior  annularis.  Musculus  posterior  annu- 
laris. An  external  interosseal  muscle  of  the  hand, 
that  extends  and  draws  the  ring-finger  inwards. 

Posterior  auris.  See  Retrahentes  auris. 

Posterior  indicis.  Musculus  posterior  indicis. 
An  internal  interosseal  muscle  of  the  hand,  that  ex- 
tends the  fore-finger  obliquely,  and  draws  it  outwards. 

Posterior  medii.  An  external  interosseal  muscle 
of  the  hand,  that  extends  the  middle  finger,  and  draws 
it  outwards. 

POTAMOGEI'TON.  (From  zsorapos,  a river,  and 
yrtrwv,  adjacent:  so  named  because  it  grows  about 
rivers.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean system.  Class,  Tetrandria;  Order,  Tetragynia. 

POTASH.  See  Potassa. 

POTA'SSA.  ( Potassa , a.  f. ; so  called  from  the 
pots,  or  vessels,  in  which  it  was  first  made.)  Vegetable 
alkali : so  called  because  it  is  obtained  in  an  impure 
state  by  the  incineration  of  vegetables.  Potass ; | 
Potash ; Kali.  An  hydrated  protoxide  of  potassium. 

902 


Table  of  the  saline  product  of  one  thousand  pounds  of 
ashes  of  the  following  vegetables : — 

Saline  products. 

Stalks  of  Turkey  wheat  or  l , na  ,, 

rnaise, } 198  lbs- 

Stalks  of  sun-flower, 349 

Vine  branches, 162.6 

Elm, 166 

Box, 78 

Sallow, 102 

Oak, Ill 

Aspen, 61 

Beeeh, 219 

Fir, 132 

Fern  cut  in  August, 116 

Wormwood, 748 

Fumitory, 360 

Heath, 115  Wildenheim. 

On  these  tables  Kirwan  makes  the  following  re- 
marks : — 

1.  That  in  general  weeds  yield  more  ashes,  and 
their  ashes  much  more  salt,  than  woods  ; and  that,  con- 
sequently, as  to  salts  of  the  vegetable  alkali  kind,  as 
potassa,  pearl  ash,  cashup,  &c.  neither  America,  Trieste, 
nor  the  northern  countries  have  any  advantage  over 
Ireland. 

2.  That  of  all  weeds  fumitory  produces  more  salt, 
and  next  to  it  wormwood.  But  if  we  attend  only  to 
the  quartity  of  salt  in  a given  weight  of  ashes,  the 
ashes  of  wormwood  contain  most.  Trifolium  fibri- 
num  also  produces  more  ashes  and  salt  than  fern. 

The  process  for  obtaining  pot  and  pearlash  is  given 
by  Kirwan,  as  follows 

1.  The  weeds  should  be  cut  just  before  they  seed, 
then  spread,  well  dried,  and  gathered  clean. 

2.  They  should  be  burned  within  doors  on  a grate, 
and  the  ashes  laid  in  a chest  as  fast  as  they  are  pro- 
duced. If  any  charcoal  be  visible,  it  should  be  picked 
out,  and  thrown  back  into  the  fire.  If  the  weeds  be 
moist,  much  coal  will  be . found.  A close  smothered 
fire,  which  has  been  recommended  by  some,  is  very 
prejudicial. 

3.  They  should  be  lixiviated  with  twelve  times  their 
weight  of  boiling  water.  A drop  of  the  solution  of 
corrosive  sublimate  will  immediately  discover  when 
the  water  ceases  to  take  up  any  more  alkali  The 
earthy  matter  that  remains  is  said  to  be  a good  manure 
for  clayey  soils. 

4.  The  ley  thus  formed  should  be  evaporated  to 
dryness  in  iron  pans.  Two  or  three  at  least  of  these 
should  be  used,  and  the  ley,  as  fast  as  it  is  concreted, 
passed  from  the  one  to  the  other.  Thus,  much  time  is 
saved,  as  weak  leys  evaporate  more  quickly  than  the 
stronger.  The  salt  thus  produced  is  of  a dark  colour, 
and  contains  much  extractive  matter,  and  being  formed 
in  iroivpots  is  called  potassa. 

5.  This  salt  should  then  be  carried  to  a reverberatory 
furnace,  in  which  the  extractive  matter  is  burned  off, 
and  much  of  the  water  dissipated : hence  it  generally 
loses  from  ten  to  fifteen  per  cent,  of  its  weight.  Par- 
ticular care  should  be  taken  to  prevent  its  melting,  as 
the  extractive  matter  would  not  then  be  perfectly  con- 
sumed, and  the  alkali  would  fprm  such  a union  with 
the  earthy  parts  as  could  not  easily  be  dissolved.  Kir- 
wan adds  this  caution,  because  Dr.  Lewis  and  Dossie 
have  inadvertently  directed  the  contrary.  This  salt 
thus  refined  is  called  pearlash,  and  must  be  the  same 
as  the  Dantzic  pearlash. 

To  obtain  this  alkali  pure,  Bethollet  recommends,  to 
evaporate  a solution  of  potassa,  made  caustic  by  boil- 
ing with  quicklime,  till  it  becomes  of  a thickish  con- 
sistence ; to  add  about  ar*  equal  weight  of  alkohol,  and 
let  the  mixture  stand  some  time  in  a close  vessel. 
Some  solid  matter  partly  crystallized  will  collect  at 
the  bottom  ; above  this  will  be  a small  quantity  of  n 
dark -coloured  fluid:  and  on  the  top  another  lighter. 
The  latter,  separated  by  decantation,  is  to  be  evaporated 
quickly  in  a silver  basin  in  a sand-heat.  Glass,  or 
almost  any  other  metal,  would  be  corroded  by  the  po- 
tassa. Before  the  evaporation  has  been  carried  far, 
the  solution  is  to  be  removed  from  the  fire,  and  suf 
fered  to  stand  at  rest;  when  it  will  again  separate  into 
two  fluids.  The  lighter  being  poured  off,  is  again  to  be 
evaporated  with  a quick  heat;  and  on  standing  a day 
or  two  in  a close  vessel,  it  will  deposite  transparent 
j crystals  of  pure  potassa.  If  the  liquor  be  evaporated 


( or  125  according 
( to  Wildenheim 


POT 


POT 


to  a pellicle,  the  potassa  will  concrete  without  regular 
crystallization.  In  both  cases  a high-coloured  liquor  is 
separated,  which  is  to  be  poured  off ; and  the  potassa 
must  be  kept  carefully  secluded  from  air. 

A perfectly  pure  solution  of  potassa  will  remain  trans- 
parent on  the  addition  of  lime-water,  show  no  effer- 
vescence with  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  and  not  give  any 
precipitate  on  blowing  air  from  the  lungs  through  it  by 
means  of  a tube. 

Pure  potassa  for  experimental  purposes  may  most 
easily  be  obtained  by  igniting  cream  of  tartar  in  a cru- 
cible, dissolving  the  residue  in  water,  filtering,  boiling 
with  a quantity  of  quicklime,  and  after  subsidence, 
decanting  the  clear  liquid,  and  evaporating  in  a loosely 
covered  silver  capsule,  till  it  flows  like  oil,  and  then 
pouring  it  out  on  a clean  iron  plate.  A solid  white 
cake  of  pure  hydrate  of  potassa  is  thus  obtained,  with- 
out the  agency  of  alkohol.  It  must  be  immediately 
broken  into  fragments,  and  kept  in  a well  stoppered 
phial. 

As  100  parts  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa  are  equiva- 
lent to  about  70  of  pure  concentrated  oil  of  vitriol,  if 
into  a measure  tube,  graduated  into  100  equal  parts, 
we  introduce  the  70  grains  of  acid,  and  fill  up  the  re- 
maining space  with  water,  then  we  have  an  alkalimeter 
for  estimating  the  value  of  commercial  pearlashes, 
which,  if  pure,  will  require  for  100  grains  one  hundred 
divisions  of  the  liquid  to  neutralize  them.  If  they  con- 
tain only  60  per  cent,  of  genuine  subcarbonate,  then 
100  grains  will  require  only  60  divisions,  and  so  on. 
When  the  alkalimeter  indications  are  required  in  pure 
or  absolute  potassa,  such  as  constitutes  the  basis  of 
nitre,  then  we  must  use  102  grains  of  pure  oil  of  vitriol, 
along  with  the  requisite  bulk  of  water  to  fill  up  the 
volume  of  the  graduated  tube. 

The  hydrate  of  potassa,  as  obtained  by  the  preceding 
process,  is  solid,  white,  and  extremely  caustic  ; in  mi- 
nute quantities,  changing  the  purple  of  violets  and  cab- 
bage to  a green,  reddened  litmus  to  purple,  and  yellow 
tumeric  to  a reddish-brown.  It  rapidly  attracts  humi- 
dity from  the  air,  passing  into  the  oil  of  tartar  per  deli- 
quium  of  the  chemists ; a name,  however,  also  given  to 
the  deliquesced  subcarbonate.  Charcoal  applied  to 
the  hydrate  of  potassa  at  a cherry-red  heat,  gives  birth 
tocarburetted  hydrogen,  and  an  alkaline  subcarbonate ; 
but  at  a heat  bordering  on  whiteness,  carburetted  hy- 
drogen, carbonous  oxide,  and  potassium,  are  formed. 
Several  metals  decompose  the  hydrate  of  potassa,  by 
the  aid  of  heat ; particularly  potassium,  sodium,  and 
iron.  The  fused  hydrate  of  potassa  consist  of  6 deu- 
toxide  of  potassium  + 1.125  water  = 7.125,  which 
number  represents  the  compound  prime  equivalent.  It 
is  used  in  surgery,  as  the  potential  cautery  for  forming 
eschars;  and  it  was  formerly  employed  in  medicine 
diluted  with  broths  as  a lithontriptic.  In  chemistry,  it 
is  very  extensively  employed,  both  in  manufactures  and 
as  a reagent  in  analysis.  It  is  the  basis  of  all  the  com- 
mon soft  soaps.  The  oxides  of  the  following  metals 
are  soluble  in  aqueous  potassa; — Lead,  tin,  nickel, 
arsenic,  cobalt,  manganese,  zinc,  antimony,  tellurium, 
tungsten,  molybdenum. 

The  preparations  of  this  alkali  that  are  used  in  medi- 
cine are : 

1.  Potassa  fusa. 

2.  Liquor  potass®. 

3.  Potassa  cum  calce. 

4.  Subcarbonas  potass®. 

5.  Carbonas  potass®. 

6.  Sulphas  potass®. 

7.  Super-sulphas  potass®. 

8.  Tartras  potass®. 

9.  Acelas  potass®. 

10.  Citras  potass®. 

11.  Oxychloras  potass®. 

12.  Arsenias  potass®. 

13.  Sulphuretum  potass®. 

Potassa , acetate  of.  See  Potassee  acetas. 

Potassa , carbonate  of.  See  Potasses  carbonas. 

Potassa,  fused.  See  Potassa  fusa. 

Potassa , solution  of.  See  Potassee  liquor. 

Potassa , subcarbonate  of.  See  Potassee  subcarbonas. 

Potassa , subcarbonate  of,  solution  of.  See  Potassee 
aubcarbonatis  liquor. 

Potassa,  sulphate  of.  See  Potassee  sulphas. 

Potassa,  sulphuret  of.  See  Potassee  sulphuretum. 

Potassa,  supersulphate  of.  See  Potassee  super- 

sulphas. 


Potassa,  supertartrate  of.  See  Tartarum. 

Potassa,  tartrate  of.  See  Potassee  tartras. 

Potassa  with  lime.  See  Potassa  cum  calce. 

Potassa  com  calce.  Potassa  with  lime.  Calx  cum 
kali  puro  ; Causticum  commune  fortius  ; Lapis  infer- 
nalis  sive  sepiicus.  Take  of  solution  of  potassa  three 
pints  ; fresh  lime,  a pound.  Boil  the  solution  of  po- 
tassa down  to  a pint,  then  add  the  lime,  previously 
slaked  by  the  addition  of  water,  and  mix  them  together 
intimately.  This  is  in  common  use  with  surgeons,  as 
a caustic,  to  produce  ulcerations,  and  to  open  abscesses. 

Potassa  fusa.  Fused  potassa.  Kali  purum;  al- 
kali vegetable  fixum  causticum.  Take  of  solution  of 
potassa  a gallon.  Evaporate  the  water,  in  a clean  iron 
pot,  over  the  fire,  until,  when  the  ebullition  has  ceased, 
the  potassa  remains  in  a state  of  fusion ; pour  it  upon 
a clean  iron  plate,  into  pieces  of  convenient  form.  This 
preparation  of  potassa  is  violently  caustic,  destroying 
the  living  animal  fibre  with  great  energy. 

Potassa  impura.  See  Potassa. 

Potassee  acetas.  Acetate  of  potassa.  Acetated 
vegetable  alkali.  Kali  acetatum ; Sal  diureticus ; 
Terra  foliata  tartari ; Sal  sennerti.  Take  of  subcar 
bonate  of  potassa  a pound.  Strong  acetic  acid,  two 
pints.  Distilled  water,  two  pints.  Mix  the  acid  with 
the  water,  and  add  it  gradually  to  the  subcarbonate  of 
potassa  so  long  as  may  be  necessary  for  perfect  satura- 
tion. Let  the  solution  be  further  reduced  to  one-half 
by  evaporation,  and  strain  it:  then  by  means  of  a 
water-bath  evaporate  it,  so  that  on  being  removed  from 
the  fire,  it  shall  crystallize.  The  acetate  of  potassa  is 
esteemed  as  a saline  diuretic  and  deobstruent.  It  is 
given  in  the  dose  of  from  gr.  x.  to  3 ss.  three  times  a 
day  in  any  appropriate  vehicle  against  dropsies,  he- 
patic obstructions,  and  the  like. 

Potass®  arsenias.  See  Liquor  arsenicalis. 

Potass®  carbonas.  Carbonate  of  potassa.  This 
preparation,  which  has  been  long  known  by  the  name 
of  Kali  aeratum,  appeared  in  the  last  London  Pharma- 
copoeia for  the  first  time.  It  is  made  thus : — Take  of 
subcarbonate  of  potassa  made  from  tartar,  a pound: 
subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  three  ounces;  distilled 
water,  a pint.  Having  previously  dissolved  the  sub 
carbonate  of  potassa  in  the  water,  add  the  subcarbo 
nate  of  ammonia;  than,  by  means  of  a sand  bath,  apply 
a heat  of  180°  for  three  hours,  or  until  the  ammonia 
shall  be  driven  off;  lastly,  set  the  solution  by,  to  crys- 
tallize. The  remaining  solution  may  be  evaporated  in 
the  same  manner,  that  crystals  may  again  form  when 
it  is  set  by. 

This  process  was  invented  by  Berthollet.  The  po- 
tassa takes  the  carbonic  acid  from  the  ammonia,  which 
is  volatile,  and  passes  off  in  the  temperature  employed. 
It  is,  however,  very  difficult  to  detach  the  ammonia  en- 
tirely. Potassa  is  thus  saturated  with  carbonic  acid, 
of  which  it  contains  double  the  quantity  that  the  pure 
subcarbonate  of  potassa  does ; it  gives  out  this  propor- 
tion on  the  addition  of  muriatic  acid,  and  may  be  con- 
verted into  the  subsalt,  by  heating  it  a short  time  to  red- 
ness. It  is  less  nauseous  to  the  taste  than  the  sub- 
carbonate ; it  crystallizes,  and  does  not  deliquesce. 
Water,  at  the  common  temperature,  dissolves  one- 
fourth  its  weight,  and  at  212°,  five-sixths;  but  this  latter 
heat  detaches  some  of  the  carbonic  acid. 

The  carbonate  of  potassa  is  now  generally  used  for 
the  purpose  of  imparting  carbonic  acid  to  the  stomach, 
by  giving  a scruple  in  solution  with  a table-spoonful  of 
lemon  juice,  in  the  act  of  effervescing. 

Potass ® celoras.  Formerly  called  oxymuriate  of 
potassa. 

Potass®  liquor.  Solution  of  potassa.  Aqua  kali 
puri  ; Lixivium  saponarium.  Take  of  subcarbonate 
of  potassa  a pound,  lime  newly  prepared  half  a pound. 
Boiling  distilled  water,  a gallon.  Dissolve  the  potassa 
in  two  pints  of  the  water ; add  the  remaining  water  to 
the  lime.  Mix  the  liquors  while  they  are  hot,  stir  them 
together,  then  set  the  mixture  by  in  a covered  vessel ; 
and  after  it  has  cooled,  strain  the  solution  through  a 
cotton  bag. 

If  any  diluted  acid  dropped  into  the  solution  occasion 
the  extrication  of  bubbles  of  gas,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
add  more  lime,  and  to  strain  it  again  A pint  of  this 
solution  ought  to  weigh  sixteen  ounces. 

Potass.®  nitras.  See  Nitre. 

Potass®  subcarbonas.  Subcarbonate  of  potassa, 
formerly  called,  Kali  preeparatum ; Sal  absinthii ; Sal 
. tartari;  Sal  plantarum.  Take  of  impure  potassa 

203 


POT 


POT 


powdered,  three  pounds ; boiling  water,  three  pints  and 
a half.  Dissolve  the  potassa  in  water,  and  filter ; then 
pour  the  solution  into  a clean  iron  pot,  and  evaporate 
the  water  over  a moderate  fire,  until  the  liquor  thickens  ; 
then  let  the  fire  be  withdrawn  and  stir  the  liquor  con- 
stantly with  an  iron  rod,  until  the  salt  concretes  into 
granular  crystals. 

A purer  subcarbonateof  potassa  may  be  prepared  in 
the  same  manner  from  tartar,  which  must  be  first  burned 
ui'.til  it  becomes  ash-coloured. 

This  preparation  of  potassa  is  in  general  use  to  form 
the  citrate  of  potassa  for  the  saline  draughts.  A scru- 
pie  is  generally  directed  to  be  saturated  with  lemon 
juice.  In  this  process,  the  salt  which  is  composed  of 
jiotassa  and  carbonic  acid  is  decomposed.  The  citric 
acid  having  a greater  affinity  for  the  potassa  than  the 
carbonic,  seizes  it  and  forms  the  citrate  of  potassa  while 
the  carbonic  acid  flies  off  in  the  form  of  air.  The  sub- 
carbonate  of  potassa  possesses  antacid  virtues,  and  may 
be  exhibited  with  advantage  in  convulsions  and  other 
spasms  of  the  intestines  arising  from  acidity,  in  calcu- 
lous and  gouty  complaints,  leucorrhoea,  scrofula,  and 
aphthous  affections.  Tlie  dose  is  from  ten  grains  to 
half  a drachm. 

Potass.®  subcarbonatus  liquor.  Solution  of 
subcarbonate  of  potassa.  Aqua  kali  prceparati;  Lix- 
ivium tartari ; Oleum  tartari  per  deliquium.  Take 
of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  a pound  ; distilled  water, 
twelve  fluid-ounces.  Dissolve  the  subcarbonate  of  po- 
tassa in  the  water,  and  then  strain  the  solution  through 
paper. 

Potass®  sulphas.  Formerly  called  Kali  vitriola- 
tum ; Alkali  vegetabile  vitriolatum - Sal  de  duobus ; 
Arcanum  duplicatum  ; Sal  poly chrestus ; JVitrum  vit- 
riolatum ; Tartarian  vitriolatum.  Take  of  the  salt 
which  remains  after  the  distillation  of  nitric  acid,  two 
pounds;  boiling  water,  two  gallons.  Mix  them  that 
the  salt  may  be  dissolved  ; next  add  as  much  subcarbo- 
nate of  potassa  as  may  be  requisite  for  the  saturation 
of  the  acid;  then  boil  the  solution,  until  a pellicle  ap- 
pears upon  the  surface,  and,  after  straining,  set  it  by, 
that  crystals  may  form.  Having  poured  away  the 
water,  dry  the  crystals  on  bibulous  paper.  Its  virtues 
are  cathartic,  diuretic,  and  deobstruent ; with  which 
intentions  it  is  administered  in  a great  variety  of  dis- 
eases, as  constipation,  suppression  of  the  lochia,  fevers, 
icterus,  dropsies,  milk  tumours,  &.c.  The  dose  is  from 
one  scruple  to  half  an  ounce. 

Potass®  sulphuretum.  Sulphuret  of  potassa. 
Kali  sulphur  alum  ; Hepar  sulphuris.  Liver  of  sul- 
phur. Take  of  washed  sulphur,  an  ounce;  subcarbo- 
nate of  potassa,  two  ounces ; mb  them  together,  and  put 
them  in  a covered  crucible,  which  is  to  be  kept  on  the 
fire  till  they  unite.  In  this  process  the  carbonic  acid  is 
drawn  off-,  and  a compound  formed  of  potassa  and 
sulphur.  This  preparation  lias  been  employed  in  se- 
veral cutaneous  diseases  with  advantage,  both  inter- 
nally and  in  the  form  of  bath  or  ointment.  It  lias  also 
been  recommended  in  diabetes.  The  dose  is  from  five 
to  twenty  grains. 

Potass®  superarsenias.  See  Superarsenias  po- 
tassa:. 

Potass®  supersulphas.  Supersulphate  of  potassa. 
Take  of  the  salt  which  remains  after  the  distillation  of 
nitric  acid,  two  pounds ; boiling  water  four  pints.  Mix 
them  together,  so  that  the  salt  may  be  dissolved,  and 
strain  the  solution;  then  boil  it  to  one-half,  and  set  it 
by,  that  crystals  may  form.  Having  poured  away  the 
water,  dry  these  crystals  upon  bibulous  paper. 

Potass®  supertartras.  See  Tartarum. 

Potass®  tartras.  Tartrate  of  potassa,  formerly 
called  Kali  tar  tar  is  atum;  Tartarum solubile  ; Tarta- 
rus tartarisatus  ; Sal  vegetabilis ; Alkali  vegetabile 
tartarisatum.  Take  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  six- 
teen ounces;  supertartrate  of  potassa,  three  pounds; 
boiling  water,  a gallon.  Dissolve  the  subcarbonate  of 
potassa  in  the  water;  next  add  the  supertartrate  of  po- 
tassa, previously  reduced  to  powder,  gradually,  until 
bubbles  of  gas  shall  cease  to  arise.  Strain  the  solution 
through  paper,  then  boil  it  until  a pellicle  appear  upon 
the  eurface,  and  set  it  by,  that  crystals  may  form.  Hav- 
ing poured  away  the  water,  dry  the  crystals  upon  bibu- 
lous paper.  Diuretic,  deobstruent,  and  eccoprotic  vir- 
tues are  attributed  to  this  preparation. 

POTASSIUM.  The  metallic  basis  of  potassa.  “If 
a thin  piece  of  solid  hydrate  of  potassa  be  placed  be- 
tween two  discs  of  platinum,  connected  with  the  ex- 
204 


tremities  of  a Voltaic  apparatus  of  200  double  plates, 
four  inches  square,  it  will  soon  undergo  fusion ; oxy- 
gen will  separate  at  the  positive  surface,  and  small  me- 
tallic globules  will  appear  at  the  negative  surface. 
These  form  the  marvellous  metal  potassium,  first  re- 
vealed to  the  world  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  early  in  October, 
1807. 

If  iron-turnings  be  heated  to  whiteness  in  a curved 
gun-barrel,  and  potassa  be  melted'and  made  slowly  to' 
come  in  contact  with  the  turnings,  air  being  excluded, 
potassium  will  be  formed,  and  will  collect  in  the  cool 
part  of  the  tube.  This  method  of  procuring  it  was  dis- 
covered by  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  in  1808.  It  may 
likewise  be  produced,  by  igniting  potassa  with  char- 
coal, as  Curaudau  showed  the  same  year. 

Potassium  is  possessed  of  very  extraordinary  proper- 
ties. It  is  lighter  than  water ; its  sp.  gr.  being  0.865  to 
water  1.0.  At  common  temperatures  it  is  solid,  soft, 
and  easily  moulded  by  the  fingers.  At  150°  F.  it  fuses, 
and  in  a heat  a little  below  redness  it  rises  in  vapour. 
It  is  perfectly  opaque.  When  newly  cut,  its  colour  is 
splendent  white,  like  that  of  silver,  but  it  rapidly  tar- 
nishes in  the  air.  To  preserve  it  unchanged,  we  must 
enclose  it  in  a small  phial,  with  pure  naphtha.  It  con- 
ducts electricity  like  the  common  metals.  When 
thrown  upon  water,  it  acts  with  great  violence,  and 
swims  upon  the  surface,  burning  with  a beautiful  light 
of  a red  colour,  mixed  with  violet.  The  water  be- 
comes a solution  of  pure  potassa.  When  moderately 
heated  in  the  air,  it  inflames,  burns  with  a red  light, 
and  throws  off  alkaline  fumes.  Placed  in  chlorine,  it 
spontaneously  burns  with  great  brilliancy. 

On  all  fluid  bodies  which  contain  water,  or  much 
oxygen  or  chlorine,  it  readily  acts  ; and  in  its  general 
powers  of  chemical  combination,  says  its  illustrious 
discoverer,  potassium  may  be  compared  to  the  alka- 
hest, or  universal  solvent,  imagined  by  the  alchemists. 

Potassium  combines  with  oxygen  in  different  propor- 
tions. When  potassium  is  gently  heated  in  common 
air  or  in  oxygen,  the  result  of  its  combustion  is  an 
orange-coloured  fusible  substance.  For  every  grain  of 
the  metal  consumed,  about  1 7-10  cubic  inches  of  oxy- 
gen are  condensed.  To  make  the  experiment  accu- 
rately, tlie  metal  should  be  burned  in  a tray  of  platina 
covered  with  a coating  of  fused  muriate  of  potassa. 

Tlie  substance  procured  by  the  combustion  of  potas- 
sium at  a low  temperature,  was  first  observed  in  Octo- 
ber, 1807,  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  who  supposed  it  to  be  the 
protoxide ; but  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  in  1810, 
showed  that  it  was  in  reality  the  deutoxide  or  peroxide. 
When  it  is  thrown  into  water,  oxygen  is  evolved,  and 
a solution  of  the  protoxide  results,  constituting  com- 
mon aqueous  potassa.  When  it  is  fused  and  brought 
in  contact  with  combustible  bodies,  they  burn  vividly, 
by  tlie  excess  of  its  oxygen.  If  it  be  heated  in  carbo- 
nic acid,  oxygen  is  disengaged,  and  common  subcar- 
bonate of  potassa  is  formed. 

When  it  is  heated  very  strongly  upon  platina,  oxy- 
gen gas  is  expelled  from  it,  and  there  remains  a diffi 
cultly  fusible  substance  of  a gray  colour,  vitreous  frac 
ture,  soluble  in  water  without  effervescence,  but  with 
much  heat.  Aqueous  potassa  is  produced.  The  above 
ignited  solid  is  protoxide  of  potassium,  which  becomes 
pure  potassa  by  combination  with  the  equivalent  quan- 
tity of  water.  When  we  produce  potassium  with  ig 
nited  iron-turnings  and  potassa,  much  hydrogen  is  dis- 
engaged from  the  water  of  tlie  hydrate,  while  the  iron 
becomes  oxidized  from  the  residuary  oxygen.  By  heat 
ing  together  pure  hydrate  of  potassa  and  boracic  acid, 
Sir  H.  Davy  obtained  from  17  to  18  of  water  from  100 
parts  of  the  solid  alkali. 

By  acting  on  potassium  with  a very  small  quantity 
! of  water,  or  by  heating  potassium  witli  fused  potassa, 
the  protoxide  may  also  be  obtained.  The  proportion 
of  oxygen  in  the  protoxide  is  determined  by  the  action 
of  potassium  upon  wajer.  8 grains  of  potassium  pro- 
duce from  water  about  9£  cubic  inches  of  hydrogen ; 
I and  from  these  the  metal  must  have  fixed  4$  cubic 
i inches  of  oxygen.  But  as  100  cubic  inches  of  oxygen 
i weigh  33.9  gr.  4$  will  weigh  1.61.  Thus,  9.61  gr.  of 
the  protoxide  will  contain  8 of  metal ; and  100  will 
■ contain  83.25  metal  -j-  16.75  oxygen.  From  these  data, 

• the  prime  of  potassium  comes  out  4.969 ; and  that  of 
the  protoxide  5.969.  Sir  H.  Davy  adopts  the  number 
75  for  potassium,  corresponding  to  50  on  the  oxygen 

• scale. 

When  potassium  is  heated  strongly  in  a small  quan- 


POT 


PQU 


tity  of  common  air,  the  oxygen  of  which  is  not  sufli-  j 
cient  for  its  conversion  into  potassa,  a substance  is 
formed  of  a grayish  colour,  which,  when  thrown  into 
water,  effervesces  without  taking  tire.  It  is  doubtful  | 
whether  it  be  a mixture  of  the  protoxide  and  potas- 
siui'n,  or  a combination  of  potassium  with  a smaller 
proportion  of  oxygen  than  exists  in  the  protoxide.  In 
this  case  it  would  be  a suboxide,  consisting  of  2 primes 
of  potassium  = 10  + 1 of  oxygen  = 11. 

When  thin  pieces  of  potassium  are  introduced  into 
chlorine,  the  inflammation  is  very  vivid ; and  then  po- 
tassium is  made  to  acton  chloride  of  sulphur,  there  is 
an  explosion.  The  attraction  of  chlorine  for  potas- 
sium is  much  stronger  than  the  attraction  of  oxygen 
for  the  metal.  Both  of  the  oxides  of  potassium  are 
immediately  decomposed  by  chlorine,  with  the  forma- 
tion of  a fixed  chloride,  and  the  extrication  of  oxygen. 

The  combination  of  potassium  and  chlorine  is  the 
substance  which  has  been  improperly  called  muriate 
of  potassa,  and  which,  in  common  cases,  is  formed  by 
causing  liquid  muriatic  acid  to  saturate  solution  of  po- 
tassa, and  then  evaporating  the  liquid  to  dryness  and 
igniting  the  solid  residuum.  The  hydrogen  of  the  acid 
here  unites  to  the  oxygen  of  the  alkali,  forming  water, 
which  is  exhaled  ; while  the  remaining  chlorine  and 
potassium  combine.  It  consists  of  5 potassium  + 4.5 
chlorine. 

Potassium  combines  with  hydrogen  to  form  potassu- 
retted  hydrogen,  a spontaneously  inflammable  gas, 
which  comes  over  occasionally  in  the  production  of  po- 
tassium by  the  gun-barrel  experiment.  Gay  Lussac 
and  Thenard  describe  also  a solid  compound  of  the 
same  two  ingredients,  which  they  call  a hydruret  of 
potassium.  It  is  formed  by  heating  the  metal  a long 
while  in  the  gas,  at  a temperature  just  under  ignition. 
They  describe  it  as  a grayish  solid,  giving  out  its  hy- 
drogen on  contact  with  mercury. 

When  potassium  and  sulphur  are  heated  together, 
they  combine  with  great  energy,  with  disengagement 
of  heat  and  light  even  in  vacuo.  The  resulting  sul- 
phuret  of  potassium,  is  of  a dark  gray  colour.  It  acts 
with  great  energy  on  water,  producing  sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen, and  burns  brilliantly  when  heated  in  the  air, 
becoming  sulphate  of  potassa.  It  consists  of  2 sulphur 
+ 5 potassium,  by  Sir  H.  Davy’s  experiments.  Potas- 
sium has  so  strong  an  attraction  for  sulphur,  that  it 
rapidly  separates  it  from  hydrogen.  If  the  potassium 
be  heated  in  the  sulphuretted  gas,  it  takes  fire  and  burns 
with  great  brilliancy ; sulphuret  of  potassium  is  formed, 
and  pure  hydrogen  is  set  free. 

Potassium  and  phosphorus  enter  into  union  with  the 
evolution  of  light;  but  the  mutual  action  is  feebler 
than  in  the  preceding  compound.  The  phosphuret  wf 
potassium,  in  its  common  form,  is  a substance  of  a 
dark  chocolate  colour,  but  when  heated  with  potassium 
in  great  excess,  it  becomes  of  a deep  gray  colour,  with 
considerable  lustre.  Hence  it  is  probable,  that  phos- 
phorus and  potassium  are  capable  of  combining  in 
two  proportions.  The  phosphuret  of  potassium  burns 
with  great  brilliancy,  when  exposed  to  air,  and  when 
thrown  into  water  produces  an  explosion,  in  conse- 
quence of  the  immediate  disengagement  of  phosphu- 
retted  hydrogen. 

Charcoal  which  has  been  strongly  heated  in  contact 
with  potassium,  effervesces  in  water,  rendering  it  alka- 
line, though  the  charcoal  may  be  previously  exposed  to 
a temperature  at  which  potassium  is  volatilized. 
Hence,  there  is  probably  a compound  of  the  two  formed 
by  a feeble  attraction. 

Of  all  known  substances,  potassium  is  that  which 
has  the  strongest  attraction  for  oxygen ; and  it  produces 
such  a condensation  of  it,  that  the  oxides  of  potassium 
are  denser  than  the  metal  itself.  Potassium  has  been 
skilfully  used  by  Sir  H.  Davy  and  Gay  Lussac  and 
Thenard,  for  detecting  the  presence  of  oxygen  in  bo- 
dies. A number  of  substances,  undecomposable  by 
other  chemical  agents,  are  readily  decomposed  by 
this  substance.” — Lire's  Chem.  Diet. 

Potassium , oxide  of.  The  potassa  of  the  shops. 

POTATO.  The  word  potato  is  a degeneration  of 
batatas , the  provincial  name  of  the  root  in  that  part  of 
Peru  from  which  it  was  first  obtained.  See  Solanum 
tuberosum. 

Potato , Spanish.  See  Convolvulus  batatas. 

[ Potato  flics.  See  Cantharides  vittatce.  A.] 

[Potato,  joild.  See  Convolvulus  panduratus.  A.] 

POTENTIAL.  Potentials.  1.  Qualities  which 


are  supposed  to  exist  in  the  body  in  potentia  only ; oy 
which  they  are  capable,  in  some  measure,  of  effecting 
and  impressing  on  us  the  ideas  of  such  qualities, 
1 though  not  really  inherent  in  themselves : in  this  sense 
we  say,  potential  heat,  potential  cold,  <fcc. 

2.  In  a medical  sense  it  is  opposed  to  actual : hence 
we  say,  an  actual  and  potential  caustic.  A red-hot 
iron  is  actually  caustic;  whereas  potassa  pur  a,  and  ni- 
tras  argentiaare  potentially  so,  though  cold  to  the  touch. 

Potential  cautery.  See  Potassa  fusa , and  A r genii 
nitras. 

POTENTI'LLA.  {A  potential  from  its  efficacy.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Polygynia. 

2.  The  phartnacopceial  name  of  the  wild  tansy.  See 
Potentilla  anserina. 

Potentilla  anserina.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  silver-weed,  or  wild  tansy.  Argentina;  J$nserina. 
The  leaves  of  this  plant,  Potentilla— foliis  dentatis , 
serratis , caule  repente , penduncul is  unifloris , of  Lin- 
nasus,  possess  mildly  adstringent  and  corroborant  qua- 
lities; but  are  seldom  used,  except  by  the  lower  orders. 

Potentilla  reptans.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  cinquefoil,  or  five-leaved  grass.  Pentaphyl- 
lum.  The  roots  of  this  plant,  Potentilla— foliis  quiua- 
tis , caule  repente , pedunculis  unifloris , of  Linnaeus, 
have  a bitterish  styptic  taste.  They  were  used  by  the 
ancients  in  the  cure  of  intermittents : but  the  medi- 
cinal quality  of  cinquefoil  is  confined,  in  the  present 
day,  to  stop  diarrhmas  and  other  fluxes. 

POTE'RIUM.  (From  zsornpiov , a cup:  so  named 
from  the  shape  of  its  flowers.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Jlloncecia  ; 
Order,  Polyandria. 

Poterium  SANGUisoRBA.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Burnet  saxifrage,  the  leaves  of  which  are  often  put 
into  cool  tankards;  they  have  an  adstringent  quality. 

POTSTONE.  Lapis  ollaris.  A greenish-gray  mi- 
neral, found  abundantly  on  the  shores  of  the  lake 
Como,  in  Lombardy,  in  thick  beds  of  primitive  slate, 
and  fashioned  into  culinary  vessels  in  Greenland.  It 
is  a subspecies  of  rhomboidal  mica  of  Jameson. 

POTT,  Percival,  was  born  in  London,  in  1713.  It 
was  the  wish  of  his  friends  to  bring  him  up  to  the 
church,  in  which  he  might  have  obtained  good  patron- 
age ; but  he  had  an  irresistible  inclination  to  the  sur- 
gical profession.  He  was  accordingly  apprenticed  to 
Mr.  Nourse,  of  St.  Bartholomew’s  Hospital,  who  gave 
anatomical  lectures;  for  which  he  was  employed  in 
preparing  the  subjects,  and  thus  laid  the  best  founda- 
tion for  chirurgical  skill.  In  1744,  he  was  elected  as- 
sistant-surgeon; and,  five  years  after,  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal surgeons  at  the  hospital.  He  had  the  merit  of 
chiefly  bringing  about  a great  improvement  in  his  pro- 
fession, availing  himself  of  the  resources  of  nature 
under  a lenient  mode  of  treatment,  and  exploding  the 
frequent  use  of  the  cautery,  and  other  severe  methods 
formerly  resorted  to.  In  1756,  he  had  the  misfortune 
to  receive  a compound  fracture  of  the  leg;  but  the 
confinement  occasioned  by  this  accident  led  him  to 
compose  his  “ Treatise  on  Ruptures ;”  which  was 
soon  followed  by  an  account  of  the  Hernia  Congenita. 
In  1758,  he  produced  a judicious  essay  on  “Fistula 
Lachrymalis;”  and,  two  years  after,  an  elaborate  dis- 
sertation “ On  Injuries  of  the  Head ;”  which  was  soon 
followed  by  “ Practical  Remarks  on  the  Hydrocele,” 
& c.  In  1764,  he  was  elected  a Fellow  of  the  Royal 
Society;  and  about  the  same  period  he  instituted  a 
course  of  lectures  on  surgery.  In  the  following  year, 
his  treatise  “On  Fistula  in  Ano”  appeared,  in  which 
he  effected  a very  great  improvement ; and,  in  1768, 
some  remarks  “ On  Fractures  and  Dislocations”  were 
added  to  a new  edition  of  his  work  on  Injuries  of  the 
Head.  Seven  years  after  this,  he  published  “ Chirur- 
gical Observations”  on  Cataract,  Polypus  of  the  Nose, 
Cancer  of  the  Scrotum,  Ruptures,  and  Mortification  of 
the  lower  Extremities  : this  was  soon  succeeded  by  a 
“Treatise  on  the  Necessity  of  Amputation  in  some 
Cases;”  and  by  “Remarks  on  the  Palsy  of  the  lower 
Limbs,”  from  Curvature  of  the  Spine.  He  had  now 
attained  the  greatest  eminence  in  his  profession  ; but, 
towards  the  close  of  the  year  1788,  a severe  atttack  of 
fever,  neglected  at  first,  terminated  his  active  and  va- 
luable life. 

POUCH.  1.  Sacculus.  In  anatomy,  a morbid  dila- 
tation of  any  part  of  a canal,  as  the  intestine. 

2.  In  botany,  see  Silicula. 


205 


PRE 


PRE 


Poupart’s  ligament.  Ligamentum  Poupartii. 
Fallopian  ligament.  Inguinal  ligament.  A strong 
ligament,  or  rather  a tendinous  expansion  of  the  exter- 
nal oblique  muscle,  going  across  from  the  inferior  and 
anterior  spinous  process  of  the  ilium  to  the  crista  of 
the  os  pubis.  It  is  under  this  ligament  that  the  femoral 
vessels  pass ; and,  when  the  intestine  or  omentum 
passes  underneath  it,  the  disease  is  called  a femoral 
hernia. 

Powder , antimonial.  See  Antimonialis  pulvis. 

Powder  of  burnt  hartshorn  with  opium.  See  Pul- 
vis cornu  usti  cum  opio. 

Powder}  compound , of  aloes.  See  Pulvis  aloes  com- 
posite. 

Powder , compound,  of  chalk.  See  Pulvis  creta 
composite. 

Powder , compound,  of  chalk , with  opium.  See  Pul- 
vis creta  composite  cum  opio. 

Powder,  compound , of  cinnamon.  See  Pulvis  cin- 
namomi  composilus. 

Powder , compound,  of  contrayerva.  See  Pulvis  con- 
trayervw  compositus. 

Powder,  compound,  of  ipecacuanha.  See  Pulvis 
ipecacuanha  compositus. 

Powder,  compound,  of  kino.  See  Pulvis  kino  com- 
positus. 

Powder,  compound,  of  scammony.  See  Pulvis  scam- 
moneoe  compositus. 

Powder,  compound,  of  senna.  See  Pulvis  senna 
compositus. 

Powder,  compound,  of  tragacanth.  See  Pulvis  tra- 
gacant.ha  compositus. 

Power,  muscular.  See  Irritability,  and  Muscular 
motion. 

Power , tonic.  See  Irritability. 

Pracipitate,  red.  See  Hydrargyri  nitrico-oxydum. 

Pracipitate , white.  See  Hydrargyrum  pracipitatum 
album. 

PRADCO'RDIA.  ( Pracordia , orum.  n. ; from  pra, 
before,  and  cor,  the  heart.)  The  forepart  of  the  re- 
gion of  the  thorax. 

Pr.efu'rnium.  (From  pra,  before,  and  furnus,  a 
furnace.)  The  mouth  of  a chemical  furnace. 

PRiEMORSUS.  (From  pramordeo,  to  bite  off) 
Bitten  off.  In  botany,  this  term  is  differently  applied : 
the  radix  pramorsa  is  an  abrupt  root,  naturally,  it  is 
supposed,  inclined  to  a taper  root;  but,  from  some 
decay  or  interruption  in  its  descending  point,  it  be- 
comes abrupt,  or,  as  it  were,  bitten  off ; as  in  the  Sca- 
biosa  succisa , and  Hedypnois  hirla. 

The  old  opinion  of  this  formed  root  is  thus  described 
in  Gerald’s  Herbal : “ The  great  part  of  the  root  seem- 
eth  to  be  bitten  away : old  fantasticke  charmers  report, 
that  the  divel  did  bite  it  for  envie,  because  it  is  an 
herbe  that  hath  so  many  good  vertues,  and  is  so  benefi- 
cial to  mankinde.” 

The  folium  pr  amor  sum  is  jagged,  pointed,  very 
blunt,  with  various  irregular  notches,  as  in  Epiden- 
drum  pr  amor  sum,  &c. 

Pr.epara'ntia  medicamenta.  Medicines  which 
were  supposed  to  prepare  the  peccant  fluids  to  pass  off 

Pr*parantia  vasa.  The  spermatic  vessels  of  the 
testicles. 

PR^EPUCE.  See  Praputium: 

PRiEPU'TIUM.  (From  praputo,  to  cut  off  before, 
because  some  nations  used  to  cut  it  off  in  circumci- 
sion.) Epagogion  of  Dioscorides.  Posthe.  The  pre- 
puce. The  membranous  or  cutaneous  fold  that  covers 
the  glans  penis  and  clitoris. 

PRASE.  A green  leek-coloured  mineral,  found  in 
the  island  of  Bute,  and  in  Borrodale. 

Pra'sium.  (From  rr pama,  a square  border:  so 
called  from  its  square  stalks.)  Hoarhound.  See  Mar- 
rub  ium  vulgare. 

Pra'sum.  (From  irpaw,  to  burn;  because  of  its  hot 
taste.)  The  leek. 

PRA'XIS.  (From  irpaffca),  to  perform.)  The  prac- 
tice of  any  thing,  as  of  medicine. 

PRECIPITA'TION.  (Pracipitatio ; from  pracipito, 
to  cast  down.)  When  two  bodies  are  united,  for  in- 
stance, an  acid  and  an  oxide,  and  a third  body  is 
added,  such  as  an  alkali,  which  has  a greater  affinity 
with  the  acid  than  the  metallic  oxide  has,  the  conse- 
quence is,  that  the  alkali  combines  with  the  acid,  and 
tne  oxide,  thus  deserted,  appears  in  a separate  state  at 
the  bottom  of  the  vessel  in  which  the  operation  is  per- 
formed. This  decomposition  is  commonly  known  by 


the  name  of  precipitation,  and  the  substance  that 
sinks  is  named  a precipitate.  The  substance,  by  the 
addition  of  which  the  phenomenon  is  produced,  is  de- 
nominated the  precipitant. 

PRE' DISPOSING.  {Pradisponens ; from  pradis- 

pono,  to  predispose.)  Causa  proSgumena.  That 
which  renders  the  body  susceptible  of  disease.  The 
most  frequent  predisposing  causes  of  diseases  are,  the 
temperament  and  habit  of  the  body,  idiosyncrasy,  age, 
sex,  and  structure  of  the  part. 

PREDISPOSITION.  ( Pradispositio . That  con- 
stitution, or  state  of  the  solids,  or  fluids,  or  of  both, 
which  disposes  the  body  to  the  action  of  disease. 

PREGNANCY.  Utero  gestation.  The  particular 
manner  in  which  pregnancy  takes  place  has  hitherto 
remained  involved  in  obscurity,  notwithstanding  the 
laborious  investigation  of  the  most  eminent  philoso- 
phers of  all  ages.  Although  in  a state  which  (with 
a few  exceptions)  is  natural  to  all  women,  it  is  in  ge 
neral  the  source  of  many  disagreeable  sensations,  and 
often  the  cause  of  diseases  which  might  be  attended 
with  the  worst  consequences,  if  not  properly  treated. 

It  is  now,  however,  universally  acknowledged,  that 
those  women  who  bear  children  enjoy,  usually,  more 
certain  health,  and  are  much  less  liable  to  dangerous 
diseases,  than  those  who  are  unmarried,  or  who  prove 
barren. 

Signs  of  pregnancy. — The  womb  has  a very  exten- 
sive influence,  by  means  of  its  nerves,  on  many  other 
parts  of  the  body ; hence,  the  changes  which  are  pro 
duced  on  it  by  impregnation,  must  be  productive  of 
changes  on  the  state  of  the  general  system.  These 
constitute  the  signs  of  pregnancy. 

During  the  first  fourteen  or  fifteen  weeks,  the  signs 
of  pregnancy  are  very  ambiguous,  and  cannot  be  de- 
pended on  ; for,  as  they  proceed  from  the  irritation  of 
the  womb  on  other  parts,  they  may  be  occasioned  by 
every  circumstance  which  can  alter  the  natural  state 
of  that  organ. 

The  first  circumstance  which  renders  pregnancy  pro- 
bable, is  the  suppression  of  the  periodical  evacuation, 
which  is  generally  accompanied  with  fulness  in  the 
breasts,  headache,  flushings  in  the  face,  and  heat  in 
the  palms  of  the  hands. 

These  symptoms  are  commonly  the  consequences  of 
suppression,  and  therefore  are  to  be  regarded  as  signs 
of  pregnancy,  in  so  far  only  as  they  depend  on  it. 

As,  however,  the  suppression  of  the  periodical  eva- 
cuation often  happens  from  accidental  exposure  to 
cold,  or  from  the  change  of  life  in  consequence  of  mar- 
riage, it  can  never  be  considered  as  an  infallible  sign. 

The  belly,  some  weeks  after  pregnancy,  becomes 
flat,  from  the  womb  sinking,  and  hence  drawing  down 
the  intestines  along  with  it ; but  this  cannot  be  looked 
upon  as  a certain  sign  of  pregnancy,  because  an  en- 
largement of  the  womb  from  any  other  cause  will  pro- 
duce the  same  effect. 

Many  women,  soon  after  they  are  pregnant,  become 
veiy  much  altered  in  their  looks,  aud  have  peculiar 
irritable  feelings,  inducing  a disposition  of  mind  which 
renders  their  tempers  easily  ruffled,  and  inciting  an 
irresistible  propensity  to  actions  of  which,  on  other 
occasions,  they  would  be  ashamed. 

In  such  cases,  the  features  acquire  a peculiar  sharp- 
ness, the  eyes  appear  larger,  and  the  mouth  wider,  than 
usual ; and  the  woman  has  a particular  appearance, 
which  cannot  be  described,  but  with  which  women  are 
well  acquainted. 

These  breeding  symptoms,  as  they  are  called,  origi- 
nate from  the  irritation  produced  on  the  womb  by  im- 
pregnation ; and,  as  they  may  proceed  from  any  other 
circumstance  which  can  irritate  that  organ,  they  can- 
not be  depended  on  when  the  woman  is  not  young,  or 
where  there  is  not  a continued  suppression  for  at  least 
three  periods. 

The  irritations  on  the  parts  contiguous  to  the  womb 
are  equally  ambiguous;  and  therefore  the  signs  of 
pregnancy,  in  the  first  four  months,  are  always  to  be 
considered  as  doubtful,  unless  every  one  enumerated  be 
distinctly  and  equivocally  present. 

From  the  fourth  month,  the  signsof  pregnancy  are  less 
ambiguous,  especially  after  the  womb  has  ascended 
into  the  cavity  of  the  belly.  In  general,  about  the 
fourth  month,  or  a short  time  after,  the  child  becomes 
so  much  enlarged,  that  its  motions  begin  to  be  felt  by 
the  mother;  and  hence  a sign  is  furnished  at. that 
period  called  quickening.  Women  very  improperly 


P RE 


PRI 


tonslder  this  sign  as  the  most  unequivocal  proof  of 
pregnancy ; for  though,  when  it  occurs  about  the  pe- 
riod described,  preceded  by  the  symptoms  formerly  enu- 
merated, it  may  be  looked  upon  as  a sure  indication 
that  the  woman  is  with  child,  yet,  when  there  is  an  ir- 
regularity, either  in  the  preceding  symptoms  or  in  its 
appearance,  the  situation  of  the  woman  must  be 
doubtful. 

This  fact  will  be  easily  understood ; for  as  the  sensa- 
tion of  the  motion  of  the  child  cannot  be  explained,  or 
accurately  described,  women  may  readily  mistake  other 
sensations  for  that  of  quickening.  Flatus  has  often 
been  so  pent  up  in  the  bowels,  that  the  natural  pulsa- 
tion of  the  great  arteries,  of  which  people  are  conscious 
only  in  certain  states  of  the  body,  has  frequently  been 
mistaken  for  this  feeling. 

After  the  fourth  month,  the  womb  rises  gradually 
from  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis,  enlarges  the  belly,  and 
pushes  out  the  navel : hence  the  protrusion  of  the  navel 
has  been  considered  one  of  the  most  certain  signs  of 
pregnancy  in  latter  hionths.  Every  circumstance, 
however,  increases  the  bulk  of  the  belly  occa- 

sions this  s^^toin  ; and  therefore  it  cannot  be  trusted 
to,  unless  othePpigns  concur. 

The  progressive  increase  of  the  belly,  along  with  sup- 
pression, after  having  been  formerly  regular,  and  the 
consequent  symptoms,  together  with  the  sensation  of 
quickening  at  the  proper  period,  afford  the  only  true 
marks  of  pregnancy. 

These  signs,  however,  are  not  to  be  entirely  depend- 
ed on  ; for  the  natural  desire  which  every  woman  has 
to  be  a mother,  will  induce  her  to  conceal,  even  from 
herself,  every  symptom  which  may  render  her  situation 
doubtful,  and  to  magnify  every  circumstance  which 
can  tend  to  prove  that  she  is  pregnant. 

Besides  quickening  and  increase  of  bulk  of  the  belly, 
another  symptom  appears  in  the  latter  months,  which, 
when  preceded  by  the  ordinary  signs,  renders  pregnancy 
certain  beyond  a doubt.  It  is  the  presence  of  milk  in 
the  breasts.  When,  however,  there  is  any  irregularity 
in  the  preceding  symptoms,  this  sign  is  no  longer  to  be 
considered  of  any  consequence. 

As  every  practitioner  must  naturally  wish  to  distin- 
guish pregnancy  from  disease,  the  disorders  which  re- 
semble it  should  be  thoroughly  understood,  and  also 
their  diagnostics.  It  Is,  however,  necessary  to  remark, 
that  wherever  any  circumstance  occurs  which  aflords 
the  most  distant  reason  to  doubt  the  case,  recourse 
ought  to  be  had  to  the  advice  of  an  experienced  practi- 
tioner, and  every  symptom  should  be  unreservedly  de- 
scribed to  him. 

Prehe'nsio.  (Fxomprelicndo,  to  surprise : so  named 
from  its  sudden  seizure.)  The  catalepsy. 

PREHN1TE.  Of  prismatic  prehnite  there  are  two 
subspecies,  the  foliated , and  the  fibrous.  The  first  is 
of  an  apple-green  colour,  found  in  France,  the  Savoy 
and  Tyrol,  and  beautiful  varieties  in  the  interior  of 
southern  Africa.  The  fibrous  is  of  a siskin  green  co- 
lour, and  occurs  in  Scotland. 

PRESBYO'PIA.  (From  ir pecrSvs,  old,  and  aip,  the 
eye;  because  it  is  frequent  with  old  men.)  That  de- 
fect of  the  sight  by  which  objects  close  are  seen  con- 
fusedly, but,  at  remoter  distances,  distinctly.  As  the 
myopia  is  common  to  infants,  so  the  presbyopia  is  a 
malady  common  to  the  aged.  The  proximate  cause  is 
a rardy  adunation  of  the  rays  in  a focus,  so  that  it  falls 
beyond  the  retina.  The  species  are, 

1.  Presbyopia  from  a flatness  of  the  cornea.  By  so 
much  the  cornea  is  flatter,  so  much  the  less  and  more 
..ardy  it  refracts  the  rays  into  a focus.  This  evil  arises, 
1st,  From  a want  of  aqueous  or  vitreous  humour,  which 
is  common  to  the  aged ; or  may  arise  from  some  dis- 
ease; 2d,  From  a cicatrix,  which  diminishes  the  con- 
vexity of  the  cornea : 3d,  From  a natural  conformation 
of  the  cornea. 

2.  Presbyopia  from  too  flat  a crystalline  lens.  This 
evil  is  most  common  to  the  aged,  or  it  may  happen  from 
a wasting  of  the  crystalline  lens. 

3.  Presbyopia  from  too  small  density  of  the  cornea 
or  humours  of  the  eye.  By  so  much  more  these  hu- 
mours are  thin  or  rarified,  so  much  the  less  they  refract 
the  rays  of  light.  Whosoever  is  affected  from  this 
cause  is  cured  in  older  age ; for  age  induces  a greater 
density  of  the  cornea  and  lens.  From  this  it  is  an  ob- 
served fact,  that  the  presbyopes  are  often  cured  spon- 
taneously, and  throw  away  their  glasses,  which  younger 
persons  in  this  disease  are  obliged  to  use. 


4.  Presbyopia  from  a custom  of  viewing  continually 
remote  objects;  hence  artificers  who  are  occupied  in 
remote  objects  are  said  to  contract  this  malady.  The 
reason  of  this  phenomenon  is  not  very  clear. 

5.  Presbyopia  senilis.  From  a multitude  of  causes 
aged  persons  are  presbyopes ; from  a penury  of  hu- 
mours, which  render  the  cornea  and  lens  flatter,  and 
the  bulb  shorter.  When  in  senile  age,  from  dryness, 
the  bulb  of  the  eye  becomes  flatter  and  shorter,  and  the 
cornea  flatter,  those  who  were  short-sighted  or  myopes 
before,  see  now  without  their  concave  glasses. 

6.  Presbyopia , from  too  close  a proximity  of  objects. 
The  focus  is  shorter  of  distant,  but  longer  of  nearer 
objects. 

7.  Presbyopia  from  a coarctated  pupil. 

8.  Presbyopiamercurialis,  which  arises  from  the  use 
of  mercurial  preparations.  The  patient  feels  a pressing 
pain  in  the  eye,  which,  from  beingtouched,  is  increased, 
and  the  bulb  of  the  eye  appears  as  if  rigid,  and  with 
difficulty  can  be  moved.  Near  objects  the  patient  can 
scarcely  distinguish,  and  distant  only  in  a confused 
manner.  Many  have  supposed  this  disorder  an  imper- 
fect amaurosis. 

Pre'sbyt.®.  See  Presbyopia. 

PRESBY  TIA.  (From  apsoSvs,  old ; because  it  is 
usual  to  old  people.)  See  Presbyopia. 

Presu'ra.  (From  npyOu),  to  inflame.)  Inflamma- 
tion at  the  ends  of  the  fingers  from  cold. 

Priapei'a.  See  Nicotiana  rustica. 

Priapi'scus.  (From  npianos,  the  penis.)  1.  A tent 
made  in  the  form  of  a penis. 

2.  A bougie. 

PRIAPISM.  See  Priapismus. 

PRIAPI'SMUS.  (From  nptairos,  a heathen  god, 
whose  penis  is  always  painted  erect.)  Priapism.  A 
continual  erection  of  the  penis. 

PRIA'PUS.  (Ilptairof,  a heathen  god,  remarkable 
for  the  largeness  of  his  genitals.) 

1.  The  penis  or  membrum  virile. 

2.  A name  of  the  nepenthes , or  wonderful  plant, 
from  the  appendages  at  the  end  of  the  leaves  resem 
bling  an  erected  penis. 

PRICKLE.  See  Aculeus. 

Prickly-heat.  See  Lichen  tropicus. 

[“Prickly  ash.  Xanthoxylum  fraxineum.  The 
Xanthoxylum  fraxineum  is  a prickly  shrub,  found  in 
the  northern,  middle,  and  western  parts  of  the  United 
States,  in  woods  and  moist  shady  declivities. 

“The  leaves  and  rind  of  the  fruit  resemble  those  of 
the  lemon  in  their  taste  and  smell,  and  possess  a similar 
volatile  oil.  The  bark  possesses  a separate  acrid  prin- 
ciple, which  is  communicated  to  water  and  alkohol, 
but  does  not  come  over  in  distillation.  The  acrimony 
is  not  perceived  when  the  bark  or  liquid  is  first  taken 
into  the  mouth,  but  gradually  developes  itself  by  a 
burning  sensation  on  the  tongue  and  fauces. 

“Prickly  ash  has  acquired  much  reputation  as  a 
remedy  in  chronic  rheumatism.  In  that  disease  it  has 
an  operation  analogous  to  that  of  mezereon  and  guaia- 
cum,  which  it  resembles  in  its  sensible  properties. 
Taken  in  full  doses,  it  produces  a sense  of  heat  in  the 
stomach,  a tendency  to  perspiration,  and  a relief  to 
rheumatic  pains. 

“ Twenty  grains  can  be  taken  three  times  a day  in 
powder,  or  an  ounce  may  be  boiled  in  a quart  of  water, 
and  the  decoction  taken  during  twenty- four  hours.” — 
Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

PRI'MrE  VLE.  The  first  passages.  The  stomach 
and  the  intestinal  tube  are  so  called,  because  they  are 
the  first  passages  of  what  is  taken  into  the  stomach  ; 
the  lacteals  the  secundce  vice,  because  the  nourishment 
next  goes  into  them ; and  lastly,  the  blood  vessels, 
which  are  supplied  by  the  lacteals,  are  called  via 
tertice. 

PRIMARY.  Primarius.  A term  in  very  general 
use  in  medicine  and  surgery.  It  is  applied  to  diseases, 
to  their  symptoms,  causes,  Sec.  and  denotes  priority  in 
opposition  to  what  follows,  which  is  secondary  ; thus, 
when  inflammation  of  the  diaphragm  produces  furious 
delirium,  the  primary  disease  is  the  paraphrenitis  ; so 
when  gallstones  produce  violent  pain,  vomiting,  &c. 
which  are  followed  by  jaundice,  white  faeces,  porter- 
coloured  urine,  &c ; the  pain  and  vomiting  are  primary 
symptoms,  the  jaundice  and  white  stools  are  second- 
ary, &c. 

Primary  teeth.  See  Teeth. 

Primrose.  See  Primula  vulgaris. 


307 


PRI'MULA.  (From  primulas,  the  beginning:  so 
called  because  it  flowers  in  the  beginning  of  the  spring.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia.. 

Primula  veris.  (From  prim-ulus , the  beginning; 
so  called  because  it  flowers  in  the  beginning  cf  the 
spring.)  Verbasculum.  The  cowslip,  paigil,  or  peagle. 
The  flowers  of  this  plant  have  a moderately  strong  and 
pleasant  smell,  and  a somewhat  roughish  bitter  taste. 
Vinous  liquors  impregnated  with  their  flavour  by  ma- 
ceration or  fermentation,  and  strong  infusions  of  them 
drank  as  tea,  are  supposed  to  be  mildly  corroborant, 
antispasrnodic,  and  anodyne.  An  infusion  of  three 
pounds  of  the  fresh  flowers  in  five  pints  of  boiling 
water  is  made  in  the  shops  into  a syrup  of  a fine  yellow 
colour,  and  agreeably  impregnated  with  the  flavour  of 
the  cowslip. 

Primula  vulgaris.  The  primrose.  The  leaves  and 
root  of  this  common  plant  possess  sternutatory  pro- 
perties. 

Pri'nceps  alexipiiarmacorum.  The  Angelica  was 
formerly  so  much  esteemed  as  to  obtain  this  name. 

PRINCIPLES.  Principia.  Primary  substances. 
Substances  or  particles  which  are  composed  of  two  or 
more  elements ; thus  water,  gelatine,  sugar,  fibrine,  &c. 
are  the  principles  of  many  bodies.  These  principles 
are  composed  of  elementary  bodies,  as  oxygen,  hydro 
gen,  azote,  &c.  which  are  undecomposable. 

PRINGLE,  Sir  John,  was  born  in  Scotland  in  1707, 
Having  determined  to  make  medicine  his  profession,  he 
went  to  Edinburgh  for  a year,  and  then  to  Leyden,  to 
profit  by  the  instructions  of  the  celebrated  Boerhaave, 
where  he  took  his  degree  in  1730.  Then  settling  at 
Edinburgh,  he  obtained  four  years  after  the  appoint- 
ment of  professor  of  moral  philosophy  jointly  with  Mr. 
Scott.  In  1742  he  was  made  physician  to  the  Earl  of 
Stair,  who  then  commanded  the  British  army,  and  soon 
after  physician  to  the  military  hospital  in  Flanders. 
He  acquitted  himself  with  so  much  credit,  that  the 
Duke  of  Cumberland,  who  succeeded  to  the  command, 
appointed  him,  in  1745,  physician-general  to  the  forces, 
and  subsequently  to  the  royal  hospitals,  in  the  Low 
Countries,  when  he  resigned  his  Scotch  professorship. 
He  soon  after  accompanied  the  same  nobleman  in  his 
expedition  against  the  rebels  in  Scotland : but  in  1747, 
went  again  to  the  army  abroad,  where  he  continued 
till  the  treaty  of  Aix-la-Cliapelle.  The  Duke  of  Cum- 
berland then  appointed  him  his  physician,  and  he  set- 
tled in  London ; but  the  war  of  1755  called  him  again 
to  the  army,  which,  however,  he  finally  quitted  three 
yeare  after.  He  had  been  elected  a fellow  of  the  Royal 
Society  in  1745,  and  on  settling  in  London,  contributed 
many  papers  to  their  Transactions,  particularly  his 
Experiments  on  Septic  and  Antiseptic  Substances,  for 
which  he  was  presented  with  the  Copleian  medal.  In 
1752  his  “Observations  on  the  Diseases  of  the  Army” 
first  appeared,  and  rapidly  passed  through  several  edi- 
tions, and  was  translated  into  other  languages:  the 
utility  of  the  work,  indeed,  equalled  the  reputation  it 
acquired,  and  which  it  still  preserves,  especially  from 
the  importance  of  the  prophylactic  measures  suggested. 
After  quitting  the  army,  he  was  admitted  a licentiate, 
and  his  fame  as  a physician,  as  well  as  philosopher, 
speedily  attained  a high  pitch ; he  received  successively 
various  appointments  about  the  royal  family,  was  elect- 
ed a fellow  of  the  College,  and  in  1766  raised  to  the 
dignity  of  a baronet.  Among  numerous  literary  ho- 
nours from  various  academies  of  science  in  Europe, 
the  highest  was  conferred  upon  him  in  1770,  being  then 
elected  president  of  the  Royal  Society : the  duties  of 
which  office  he  zealously  fulfilled  for  eight  years,  when 
declining  health  compelled  his  resignation.  His  dis- 
courses on  the  annual  presentation  of  the  Copleian 
medals  displayed  so  much  learning  and  general  infor- 
mation, that  their  publication  was  requested.  In  1780 
he  went  to  Edinburgh  for  the  improvement  of  his 
health ; but  the  want  of  his  accustomed  society,  and 
the  sharpness  of  the  air,  compelled  him  to  return  in  the 
following  year;  he  presented,  however,  to  the  College 
of  Physicians  there  before  his  departure  ten  folio 
volumes,  in  manuscript,  of  “Medical  and  Physical 
Observations,”  with  the  restriction  that  they  should 
not  be  published,  nor  lent  out  of  the  library.  His  death 
happened  soon  after  his  return  to  London,  namely,  in 
the  beginning  of  1782. 

PRIONO'DES.  (From  -n ptwr,  a saw.)  Serrated: 
applied  in  old  writings  to  the  sutures  of  the  skull. 

208 


PRI  OR.  The  first ; a term  applied  to  some  muscle* 
from  their  order. 

Prior  annularis  Afusculus  prior  annularis « 
Fourth  inter osseus , of  Winslow.  An  internal  in- 
terosseus  muscle  of  the  hand.  See  Interossei  manus. 

Prior  indicis.  Extensor  tertii  intcrnodii  indicia , 
of  Douglas.  Seu-metacarpo-lateriphalangien , of  Du- 
mas. An  internal  interosseal  muscle  of  the  hand, 
which  draws  the ' fore-finger  inwards  towards  the 
thumb,  and  extends  it  obliquely. 

Prior  medii.  Musculus  prior  medii ; Second  inter- 
osseus,  of  Douglas,  and  seu-metacarpo-latcri  phalan- 
gien,  of  Dumas.  An  external  interosseous  muscle  of 
the  hand.  See  Interossei  manus. 

Pro  re  nata.  A term  frequently  used  in  extempo- 
raneous prescriptions,  and  implies  occasionally,  as 
the  occasion  may  require ; thus,  an  aperient  dose  is 
directed  to  be  taken  pro  re  nata. 

PROBANG.  A flexible  piece  of  whalebone  with 
sponge  fixed  at  the  end. 

PROBE.  (From  probo,  to  try;  "because  surgeon’s 
try  the  depth  and  extent  of  woundgJktf.  with  it.) 
Stylus.  A surgical  instrument  of  a J^nmd  slender 
form.  W 

Pro'bole.  (npogoXr/,  a prominence  ; from  rr po6a\- 
X or,  to  project.)  See  Apophysis. 

PROBO'SCIS.  (From  npo,  before,  and  /3o<r/co),  to 
feed.)  A snout  or  trunk,  as  that  of  an  elephant,  by 
which  it  feeds  itself. 

PROCA'RDIUM.  (From  npo,  before,  and  KapSia,  the 
stomach  or  heart.)  The  pit  of  the  stomach. 

PROCATARCTIC.  (Procatarcticvs ; from  irpoKa- 
rapxu),  to  go  before.)  See  Exciting  cause. 

PROCESS.  {Processus ; from  procedo , to  go  be- 
fore.) An  eminence  of  a bone ; as  the  spinous  and 
transverse  processes  of  the  vertebrae. 

PROCESSUS.  See  Process. 

Processus  ciEci  vermiformis.  See  Intestine. 

Processus  caudatus.  See  Lobulus  caudatus. 

Processus  ciliaris.  See  Ciliar  ligament. 

Processus  mamillares.  A name  formerly  applied 
to  the  olfactory  nerves. 

PROClDE'NTIA.  (From  procido,  to  fall  down.) 
A falling  down  of  any  part ; thus,  procidentia  ani, 
uteri , vagina,  &c. 

Proco'ndylus.  (From  7rpo,  before,  and  KovfoXt/f, 
the  middle  joint  of  the  finger.)  The  first  joint  of  a fin- 
ger next  the  metacarpus. 

PROCTA'LGIA.  (From  npwKTos,  the  fundament, 
and  aXyo?,  pain.)  A violent  pain  of  the  anus.  It  is 
mostly  symptomatic  of  some  disease,  as  piles,  scirrhus, 
prurigo,  cancer,  Sec. 

PROCTI'CA.  (From  npioKros,  the  fundament.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology ; 
Class,  Cceliaca;  Order,  Enterica.  Pain  or  derange- 
ment about  the  anus,  without  primary  inflammation. 
It  has  six  species,  viz.  Proctica  simplex , spasmodica, 
callosa,  tenesmus,  marisca,  exenia. 

PROCTl'TIS.  (From  it pwxroff,  the  anus.)  Clune- 
sia , Cyssxtis.  Inflammation  of  the  internal  or  mucous 
membrane  of  the  lower  part  of  the  rectum. 

Proctoleucorrhce'a.  (From  upm/cros,  the  anus, 
Xeuxoj,  white,  and  pern,  to  flow.)  Proctorrhae.a.  A 
purging  of  white  mucus. 

Proctorrhce'a.  (From  npcoKTOg,  the  anus,  and  peat, 
to  flow.)  See  Proctoleucorrhaa. 

PRODUCTIO.  See  Apophysis. 

PRCEOTIA.  (From  irpwt,  premature.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology  Class  Ge- 
-netica;  Order,  Orgastica.  Genital  precocity.  It  has 
two  species,  viz.  Praotia  masculina,  and  feminina. 

PROCUMBENS.  Procumbent.  Applied  to  stems, 
as  that  of  Lysimachia  nemo-rum. 

PROFLUVlUM.  (From  profiuo,  to  run  down.)  A flux. 

Profluvia.  Fluxes.  The  fifth  order  in  the  class 
Pyrexia,  of  Cullen’s  Nosology,  characterized  by  py- 
rexia, with  increased  excretions. 

Profluvii  cortex.  See  JVerium  antidysentericum. 

PROFUNDUS.  See  Flexor  profundus  per for ans. 

PROFU'SIO.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class  Lo- 
cales, and  order  Apocenoses , of  Cullen.  A passive  loss 
of  blood. 

Proglo'ssis.  (From  npo,  before,  and  yXaxnr a,  the 
tongue.)  The  tip  of  the  tongue. 

PROGNO'SIS.  (From  npo,  before,  and 
to  know.)  The  foretelling  the  event  of  diseases  from 
particular  symptoms. 


PRO 


PRO 


PROGNOSTIC.  (Prognosticus  ; from  upoyivwaKio, 
to  know  beforehand.)  Applied  to  those  symptoms 
which  enable  the  physician  to  form  his  judgment  or 
prognosis  of  the  probable  cause  or  event  of  a disease. 
Projectura.  See  Apophysis. 

PROLA'PSUS.  (From  prolabor , to  slip  down.) 
Procidentia;  Delapsio;  Exania ; Proptoma;  Prop- 
tosis. A protrusion.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  class 
Locales , and  order  Ectopia,  of  Cullen  ; distinguished 
by  the  falling  down  of  a part  that  is  uncovered. 

Prole'pticus.  (.From  7r po\ap6avo,  to  anticipate.) 
Applied  to  those  diseases,  the  paroxysms  of  which  an- 
ticipate each  other,  or  return  after  less  and  less  inter- 
vals of  intermission. 

PROLIFER.  (E'rom  proles , an  offspring,  and  fero, 
to  bear.)  Prolific,  or  proliferous:  applied  to  those 
stems  which  shoot  out  new  branches  from  the  summit 
of  the  former  ones,  as  in  the  Scotch  fir;  Pinus  syl- 
vestris. 

Promalacte'rium.  (From  irpo,  before,  and  p.aXaa- 
ffw,  to  soften.)  The  room  where  the  body  is  softened 
previous  to  bathing. 

Prometopi'dium.  (From  irpo,  before,  and  perwirov, 
the  forehead.)  Prometopis.  The  skin  upon  the  fore- 
head. 

Prometo'pis.  See  Prometopidium. 

PRONATION.  Pronatio.  The  act  of  turning  the 
palm  of  the  hand  downwards.  It  is  performed  by  rota- 
ting the  radius  upon  the  ulna,  by  means  of  several 
muscles  which  are  termed  pronators. 

PRONA'TOR.  A name  given  to  two  muscles  of  the 
hand,  the  pronator  radii  quadratus,  and  pronator  radii 
teres  ; the  use  of  which  is  to  perform  the  opposite  ac- 
tion to  that  of  the  supinators,  viz.  pronation. 

Pronator  quadratus.  See  Pronator  radii  quad- 
ratus. 

Pronator  radii  brevis.  See  Pronator  radii  quad- 
ratus. 

Pronator  radii  quadratus.  Pronator  quadratus, 
of  Douglas  and  Albinus;  Pronator  quadratus  sive 
transversus,  of  Winslow  ; Pronator  radii  brevis  seu 
quadratus , of  Cowper;  Cubito  radial,  of  Dumas. 
This,  which  has  gotten  its  name  from  its  use  and  its 
shape,  is  a small  fleshy  muscle,  situated  at  the  lower 
and  inner  part  of  the  forearm,  and  covered  by  the  ten- 
dons of  the  flexor  muscles  of  the  hand.  It  arises  ten- 
dinous and  fleshy  from  the  lower  and  inner  part  of  the 
ulna,  and  runs  nearly  in  a transverse  direction,  to  be 
inserted  into  that  part  of  the  radius  which  is  opposite 
to  its  origin,  its  inner  fibres  adhering  to  the  interosseous 
ligament.  This  muscle  assists  in  the  pronation  of  the 
hand,  by  turning  the  radius  inwards. 

Pronator  radii  teres.  Pronator  teres,  of  Albi- 
nus and  Douglas;  Pronator  teres,  sive  obliquus,  of 
Winslow ; Epitrochloradial,  of  Dumas.  A small 
muscle  situated  at  the  upper  and  anterior  part  of  the 
forearm.  It  is  called  teres,  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
pronator  quadratus.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy 
from  the  anterior  and  inferior  part  of  the  outer  condyle 
of  the  os  humeri ; and  tendinous  from  the  coronoid  pro- 
cess of  the  ulna,  near  the  insertion  of  the  brachialis 
internus.  The  median  nerve  passes  between  these  two 
portions.  From  these  origins  the  muscle  runs  obliquely 
downwards  and  outwards,  and  is  inserted,  tendinous 
and  fleshy,  into  the  anterior  and  convex  edge  of  the 
radius,  about  the  middle  of  that  bone.  This  muscle, 
as  its  name  indicates,  serves  to  turn  the  hand  in- 
wards. 

Pronerva'tio.  (From  pro,  before,  and  nervus , a 
string.)  A tendon  or  string,  like  the  end  of  a muscle. 
PROPAGO.  A slip,  layer,  or  cutting  of  the  vine. 
PROPHYLACTIC.  ( Prophylacticus ; from  irpo, 
.and  QvXaat rw,  to  defend.)  Any  means  made  use  of  to 
preserve  health  and  prevent  disease. 

Proprikta'tis  elixir.  See  Tinctura  aloes  com- 
posite. 

PROPTO'MA.  (From  irpoiwr'Ja),  to  fall  down.)  Pro- 
cidentia. A relaxation,  such  as  that  of  the  scrotum, 
of  the  under  lip,  of  the  breasts  in  females,  of  the  pre- 
puce, or  of  the  ears. 

Prcpye'ma.  (From  rzpo,  before,  and  irvov,  pus.)  A 
premature  collection  of  pus. 

PRO'RA.  (From  irpupa,  the  prow  of  a vessel.)  The 
occiput. 

Prosarthro'sis.  (From  ir pog,  to,  and  ap0pow,  to 
articulate.)  The  articulation  which  has  manifest 
motion. 


Prospe  gma.  (From  npocnriYvvpi,  to  fix  near.;  A 
fixing  of  humours  in  one  spot. 

Pro'stasis.  (From  irpoi^r/pi,  to  predominate.)  An 
abundance  of  morbid  humours. 

PROSTATE.  (Glandula  prostata;  from  7rpo,  be- 
fore, and  icrr/pi,  to  stand : because  it  is  situated  before 
the  urinary  bladder.)  Corpus  glandulosum ; Ade- 
noides.  A very  large,  heart-like,  firm  gland,  situated 
between  the  neck  of  the  urinary  bladder  and  the  bul- 
bous part  of  the  urethra.  It  secretes  tire  lacteal  fluid, 
which  is  emitted  into  the  urethra  by  ten  or  twelve 
ducts,  that  open  near  the  verumontanum,  during  coi- 
tion. This  gland  is  liable  to  inflammation  and  its  con- 
sequences. 

Prostate  inferior  muscle.  See  Transversis  perinei 
alter. 

PROSTRATUS.  Prostrate.  Applied  synonymously 
with  depressus,  depressed,  to  a stem  which  lies  natu- 
rally remarkably  flat,  spreading  horizontally  over  the 
ground ; as  in  Coldenia  procumbens , and  Coronopus 
Ruelli , swine’s  cress. 

PROTO7 GALA.  (From  7rpwroj,  first,  and  ya\a, 
milk.)  The  first  milk  after  delivery. 

PROTOXYDE.  See  Oxide. 

PROTUBERANTIA.  I.  A protuberance  on  any 
part. 

2.  An  apophysis. 

PROXIMATE.  (Cans  a proximo:  so  called  because 
when  the  exciting  cause  begins  to  have  effect  it  is  the 
proximum , or  next  thing  that  happens.)  The  proxi- 
mate cause  of  a disease  may  be  said  to  be  in  reality 
the  disease  itself.  All  proximate  causes  are  either 
diseased  actions  of  simple  fibres,  or  an  altered  state  of 
the  fluids. 

PRUI'NA.  (A  perurendo,  quod  fruges  peruent.) 
The  powder-like  appearance  after  the  bloom  observed 
on  ripe  fruit,  especially  plums. 

PRUNA.  (Pruna,ee.  f. ; a live  coal.)  The  carbun- 
cle. See  Anthrax. 

PRUNE.  See  Plums. 

PRUNE'LLA.  (From  pruno , a burn;  because  it 
heals  burns.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia;  Order, 
Gymnospermia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  self-heal.  See 

Prunella  vulgaris. 

3.  The  name  used  by  Paracelsus  for  sore  throat,  or' 
cynanche. 

Prunella  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
self-heal.  Prunella;  Consolida  minor;  Symphitum 
minus.  Prunella— foliis  omnibus  ovato  oblongis , ser- 
ratis , petiolatis , of  Linnaeus  ; it  is  recommended  as  an 
adstringent  in  haemorrhages  and  fluxes,  as  also  in  gar- 
gles against  aphthae  and  inflammation  of  the  fauces. 

PRUNUM.  ( Prunum , i.  n. ; from  prunus.)  A plum 
or  prune.  See  Plums. 

Prunelloe.  See  Plum. 

Prunum  gallicum.  See  Prunus  domestica. 

Prunum  sylvestre.  See  Prunus  spinosa. 

PRU'NUS.  ( Prunus , i.  f.)  1.  A plum. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  or  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Prunus  armeniaca.  Apricots,  which  are  the  fruit 
of  this  plant,  are,  when  ripe,  easily  digested,  and  are 
considered  as  a pleasant  and  nutritious  delicacy. 

Prunus  avium.  The  systematic  name  of  the  black 
cherry-tree.  Primus — umbellis  sessilibus,  foliis  ovato- 
lanceolatis.  subtus  pubescentibus,  conduplicatis,  of  Lin- 
naeus. The  flavour  of  the  ripe  fruit  is  esteemed  by 
many,  and  if  not  taken  in  too  large  quantities,  they 
are  extremely  salutary.  A gum  exudes  from  the  tree, 
whose  properties  are  similar  to  those  of  gum-arabic. 

Prunus  cerasus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
red  cherry-tree.  Prunus — umbellis  subpedunculatis, 
foliis  ovato-lanceolatis,  glabris  conduplicatis,  of  Lin- 
naeus. The  fruit  of  this  tree,  Cerasa  rubra,  anglica , 
sativa,  possess  a pleasant,  acidulated,  sweet  flavour, 
and  are  proper  in  fevers,  scurvy,  and  bilious  obstruc- 
tions. Red  cherries  are  mostly  eaten  as  a luxury,  and 
are  very  wholesome,  except  to  those  whose  bowels  are 
remarkably  irritable. 

Prunus  domestica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plum  or  damson-tree.  Prunus — pcdunculis  subsoli- 
tariis,  foliis  lanceolato  ovatis  convolutis,  ramis  muti- 
cis ; gemma  ftorifcrce  aphyllce , of  Linnams.  Prunes 
are  considered  as  emollient,  cooling,  and  laxative,  espe 
cially  the  French  prunes,  which  are  directed  in  the 

209 


Xx 


c PRU 


PRU 


decoction  of  senna,  and  other  purgatives ; and  the  pulp 
is  ordered  in  the  electuarium  £ senna.  The  damson 
is  only  a variety,  which,  when  perfectly  ripe,  affords 
a wholesome  article  for  pies,  tarts,  &c.  gently  opening 
the  body:  but  when  damsons  are  not  perfectly  mature, 
they  produce  colicky  pains,  diarrhoea,  and  convulsions 
in  children.  See  Plums. 

Prunus  lauro-cerasus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  poison  laurel.  Lauro-cerusus.  Common  or  cherry 
laurel.  Prunus— floribus  raccmosis  foliis  sempervi- 

rentibus  dorso  biglandulosis , of  Linnaeus.  The  leaves 
of  the  lauro-cerasus  have  a bitter  styptic  taste,  accom- 
panied with  a flavour  resembling  that  of  bitter-almonds, 
or  other  kernels  of  the  drupaceous  fruits : the  flowers 
also  manifest  a similar  flavour.  The  powdered  leaves, 
applied  to  the  nostrils,  excite  sneezing,  though  not  so 
strongly  as  tobacco.  The  kernel-like  flavour  which 
these  leaves  impart  being  generally  esteemed  grateful, 
has  sometimes  caused  them  to  be  employed  for  culinary 
purposes,  and  especially  in  custards,  puddings,  blanc- 
mange, Sec. ; and  as  the  proportion  of  this  sapid  mat- 
ter of  the  leaf  to  the  quantity  of  the  milk  is  commonly 
inconsiderable,  bad  effects  have  seldom  ensued.  But, 
as  the  poisonous  quality  of  this  laurel  is  now  indubita- 
bly proved  and  known  to  be  the  prussic  acid  which 
can  be  obtained  in  a separate  form  (See  Prussic 
acid),  the  public  ought  to  be  cautioned  against  its  in- 
ternal use. 

The  following  communication  to  the  Royal  Society, 
by  Dr.  Madden,  of  Dublin,  contains  the  first  and  prin- 
cipal proofs  of  the  deleterious  effects  of  this  vegetable 
upon  mankind : — “ A very  extraordinary  accident  that 
fell  out  here  some  months  ago,  has  discovered  to  us  a 
most  dangerous  poison,  which  was  never  before  known 
to  be  so,  though  it  has  been  in  frequent  use  among  us. 
The  thing  I mean  is  a simple  water,  distilled  from  the 
leaves  of  the  lauro-cerasus ; the  water  is  at  first  milky, 
but  the  oil  which  comes  over  being,  in  a good  measure, 
separated  from  the  phlegm,  by  passing  it  through  a 
flannel  bag,  it  becomes  as  clear  as  common  water.  It 
has  the  smell  of  bitter  almonds,  or  peach  kernel,  and 
has  been  for  many  years  in  frequent  use  among  our 
housewives  and  cooks,  to  give  that  agreeable  flavour 
to  their  creams  and  puddings.  It  has  also  been  much 
in  use  among  our  drinkers  of  drams ; and  the  propor- 
tion they  generally  use  it  in  has  been  one  part  of  laurel- 
water  to  four  of  brandy.  Nor  has  this  practice,  how- 
ever frequent,  ever  been  attended  with  any  apparent 
ill  consequences,  till  some  time  in  the  month  of  Sep- 
tember, 1728,  when  it  happened  that  one  Martha  Boyse, 
a servant,  who  lived  with  a person  who  sold  great 
quantities  of  this  water,  got  a bottle  of  it  from  her 
mistress,  and  gave  it  to  her  mother.  Ann  Boyse  made 
a present  of  it  to  Frances  Eaton,  her  sister,  who  was 
a shopkeeper  in  town,  and  who,  she  thought,  might 
oblige  her  customers  with  it.  Accordingly,  in  a few 
days,  she  gave  about  two  ounces  to  a woman  called 
Mary  Whaley,  who  drank  about  two-thirds  of  what 
was  filled  out,  and  went  away.  Frances  Eaton  drank 
the  rest.  In  a quarter  of  an  hour  after  Alary  Whaley 
had  drunk  the  water,  (as  I am  informed,)  she  com- 
plained of  a violent  disorder  in  her  stomach,  soon  after 
lost  her  speech,  and  died  in  about  an  hour,  without  any 
vomiting  or  purging,  or  any  convulsion.  The  shop- 
keeper, F.  Eaton,  sent  word  to  her  sister,  Ann  Boyse, 
of  what  had  happened,  who  came  to  her  upon  the 
message,  and  affirmed  that  it  was  not  possible  the  cor- 
dial (as  she  called  it)  could  have  occasioned  the  death 
of  the  woman ; and,  to  convince  her  of  it,  she  filled 
out  about  three  ounces  and  drank  it.  She  continued 
talking  with  F.  Eaton  about  two  minutes  longer,  and 
was  so  earnest  to  persuade  her  of  the  liquor’s  being 
inoffensive,  that  she  drank  about  two  spoonfuls  more, 
but  was  hardly  well  seated  in  her  chair  when  she  died 
without  the  least  groan,  or  convulsion.  Frances 
Eaton,  who,  as  before  observed,  had  drank  somewhat 
more  than  a spoonful,  found  no  disorder  in  her  sto- 
mach, or  elsewhere;  but  to  prevent  any  ill  conse- 
quences, she  took  a vomit  immediately,  and  has  been 
well  ever  since.” — Dr.  Madden  mentions  another  case, 
of  a gentleman  at  Kilkenny,  who  mistook  a bottle  of 
laurel-water  for  a bottle  of  ptisan.  What  quantity  he 
drank  is  uncertain,  but  he  died  in  a few  minutes,  com- 
plaining of  a violent  disorder  in  the  stomach.  In  ad- 
dition to  this,  we  may  refer  to  the  unfortunate  case  of 
Sir  Theodosius  Boughton,  whose  death,  in  1780,  an 
English  jury  declared  to  be  occasioned  by  this  poison 
210 


In  this  case,  the  active  principle  of  the  lauro-cerasus 
was  concentrated  by  repeated  distillations,  and  given 
to  the  quantity  of  one  ounce ; the  suddenly  fatal  effects 
of  which  must  be  still  in  the  recollection  of  the  public. 
To  brute  animals  this  poison  is  almost  instantaneously 
mortal,  as  amply  appears  by  the  experiments  of  Mad- 
den, Mortimer,  Nicholls,  Fontana,  Langrish,  Vater, 
and  others.  The  experiments  conducted  by  these  gen- 
tlemen, show  that  the  laurel-water  is  destructive  to 
animal  life,  not  only  when  taken  into  the  stomach,  but 
also  on  being  injected  into  the  intestines,  or  applied 
externally  to  different  organs  of  the  body.  It  is  re- 
marked, by  Abb6  Fontana,  that  this  poison,  even 
“ when  applied  in  a very  small  quantity  to  the  eyes,  or 
to  the  inner  part  of  the  mouth,  without  touching  the 
oesophagus,  or  being  carried  into  the  stomach,  is  capa- 
ble of  killing  an  animal  in  a few  minutes : while,  ap- 
plied in  a much  greater  quantity  to  wounds,  it  has  so 
little  activity,  that  the  weakest  animals,  such  as  pigeons, 
resist  its  action.” 

The  poisonous  quality  of  the  species  of  laurel  is  the 
prussic  acid ; and  if  we  judge  from  its  sensible  quali- 
ties, an  analogous  principle  seems  to  pervade  many 
other  vegetable  substances,  especially  the  kernels  of 
drupaceous  fruits : and  in  various  species  of  the  amyg- 
dalus,  this  sapid  principle  extends  to  the  flowers  and 
leaves.  It  is  of  importance  to  notice,  that  this  is  much 
less  powerful  in  its  action  upon  human  subjects  than 
upon  dogs,  rabbits,  pigeons,  and  reptiles.  To  poison 
man,  the  essential  oil  of  the  lauro-cerasus  must  be 
separated  by  distillation,  as  in  the  spirituous  or  common 
laurel-water ; and  unless  this  is  strongly  imbued  with 
the  oil,  or  given  in  a large  dose,  it  proves  innocent. 
Dr.  Cullen  observes,  that  the  sedative  power  of  the 
lauro-cerasus,  acts  upcm  the  nervous  system  in  a dif- 
ferent manner  from  opium  and  other  narcotic  sub- 
stances, whose  primary  action  is  upon  the  animal  func- 
tions; for  the  lauro-cerasus  doe3  not  occasion  sleep, 
nor  does  it  produce  local  inflammation,  but  seems  to 
act  directly  upon  the  vital  powers.  Abb£  Fontana 
supposes  that  this  poison  destroys  animal  life,  by  ex- 
erting its  effects  upon  the  blood  ; but  the  experiments 
and  observations  from  which  he  draws  this  opinion 
are  evidently  inconclusive.  It  may  also  be  remarked, 
that  many  of  the  Abbd’s  experiments  contradict  each 
other.  Thus,  it  appears  from  the  citation  given  above, 
that  the  poison  of  this  vegetable,  when  applied  to 
wounds,  does  not  prove  fatal;  but  future  experiments 
led  the  Abb6  to  assert,  that  the  oil  of  the  lauro-cerasus, 
whether  given  internally,  or  applied  to  the  wounds  of 
animals,  is  one  o£  the  most  terrible  and  deadly  poisons 
known.  Though  this  vegetable  seems  to  have  escaped 
the  notice  of  Stoerck,  yet  it  is  not  without  advocates 
for  its  medical  use.  Linnaeus  informs  us,  that  in 
Switzerland  it  is  commonly  and  successfully  used  in 
pulmonary  complaints.  Langrish  mentions  its  efficacy 
in  agues ; and  as  Bergius  found  bitter  almonds  to  have 
this  effect,  we  may,  by  analogy,  conclude  that  this 
power  of  the  lauro-cerasus  is  w ell  established.  Bay- 
lies  found  that  it  possessed  a remarkable  power  of  di- 
luting the  blood,  and  from  experience,  recommended 
it  in  all  cases  of  disease  supposed  to  proceed  from  too 
dense  a state  of  that  fluid  ; adducing  particular  in- 
stances of  its  efficacy  in  rheumatisms,  asthmas,  and 
scirrhous  affections.  Nor  does  this  author  seem  to 
have  been  much  afraid  of  the  deleterious  quality  of 
lauro-cerasus,  as  he  directs  a pound  of  its  leaves  to  be 
macerated  in  a pint  of  water,  of  which  he  gives  from 
thirty  to  sixty  drops  three  or  four  times  a-day. 

Prunus  padus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  wild 
cluster,  or  bird  cherry-tree.  Padus.  The  bark  and 
berries  of  this  shrub  are  used  medicinally.  The  former, 
w'hen  taken  from  the  tree,  has  a fragrant  smell,  and  a 
bitter,  subastringent  taste,  somewhat  similar  to  that  of 
bitter  almonds.  Made  into  a decoction,  it  cures  inter- 
mittents,  and  it  has  been  recommended  in  the  cure  of 
several  forms  of  syphilis.  The  latter  are  said  to  cure 
the  dysentery. 

Prunus  spinosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  sloe 
tree.  Prunus  sylvestris ; Prunus — pedunculis  solita 
riis,  foliis  lanceolatis , glabris , ramis  spinosis,  of 
Linnceus.  It  is  sometimes  employed  in  gargles,  to 
tumefactions  of  the  tonsils  and  uvula,  and  from  its 
adstringent  taste  was  formerly  much  used  in  heinor- 
l hages,  Sec. 

PRURI'GO.  (From  prurio,  to  itch.)  Pruritus; 
Scabies;  Psora;  P>arta ; Libido:  Paver.  The  pru- 


PR  U 


PRU 


rigo  is  a genus  of  disease  in  the  order  Papulous  erup- 
tions of  Dr.  Willan’s  cautaneous  diseases.  As  it 
arises  from  different  causes,  or  at  different  periods  of 
life,  and  exhibits  some  varieties  in  its  form,  he  describes 
it  under  the  titles  of  prurigo  mitis,  prurigo  formicans, 
and  prurigo  senilis.  In  these,  the  whole  surface  of  the 
skin  is  usually  affected ; but  there  are  likewise  many 
cases  of  local  prurigo,  which  will  be  afterward  noticed 
according  to  their  respective  situations. 

1.  The  Prurigo  mitis  originates  without  any  pre- 
vious indisposition,  generally  in  spring,  or  the  beginning 
of  summer.  It  is  characterized  by  soft  and  smooth 
elevations  of  the  cuticle,  somewhat  larger  than,  the 
papula;  of  the  lichen,  from  which  they  also  differ  by 
retaining  the  usual  colour  of  the  skin  ; for  they  seldom 
appear  red,  or  much  inflamed,  except  from  violent 
friction.  They  are  not,  as  in  the  other  case,  accom- 
panied with  tingling,  but  with  a sense  of  itching  almost 
incessant.  This  is,  however,  felt  more  particularly  on 
undressing,  and  often  prevent  rest  for  some  hours  after 
getting  into  a bed.  When  the  tops  of  the  papulae  are 
removed  by  rubbing  or  scratching,  a clear  fluid  oozes 
out  from  them,  and  gradually  concretes  into  thin  black 
scabs. 

This  species  of  prurigo  mostly  affects  young  per- 
sons ; and  its  cause  may,  I think,  says  Dr.  Willan,  in 
general  be  referred  to  sordes  collected  on  the  skin,  pro- 
ducing some  degree  of  irritation,  and  also  peventing 
the  free  discharge  of  the  cutaneous  exhalation ; the 
bad  consequences  of  which  must  necessarily  by  felt  at 
that  season  of  the  year  when  perspiration  is  the  most 
copious.  Those  who  have  originally  a delicate  or 
irritable  skin,  must  likewise,  in  the  same  circumstances, 
be  the  greatest  sufferers. 

The  eruption  extends  to  the  arms,  breast,  back,  and 
thighs,  and  often  continues  during  two  or  three  months 
of  the  summer,  if  not  relieved  by  proper  treatment. 
When  persons  affected  with  it  neglect  washing  the 
skin,  or  are  uncleanly  in  their  apparel,  the  eruption 
grows  more  inveterate,  and  at  length,  changing  its 
form,  often  terminates  in  the  itch.  Pustules  arise 
among  the  papulae,  some  filled  with  lymph,  others  with 
pus.  The  acarus  scabiei  begins  to  breed  in  the  furrows 
of  the  cuticle,  and  the  disorder  becomes  contagious. 

2.  The  Prurigo  formicans  is  a much  more  obstinate 
and  troublesome  disease  than  the  foregoing.  It  usually 
affects  persons  of  adult  age,  commencing  at  all  seasons 
of  the  year  indifferently;  and  its  duration  is  from 
four  months  to  two  or  three  years,  with  occasional 
short  intermissions.  The  papula;  are  sometimes 
larger,  sometimes  more  obscure,  than  in  the  preceding 
species ; but  are,  under  every  form,  attended  with  an 
incessant,  almost  intolerable  itching.  They  are  dif- 
fused over  the  whole  body,  except  the  face,  feet,  and 
palms  of  the  hands ; they  appear,  however,  in  the 
greatest  number  on  those  parts  which,  from  the  mode 
of  dress,  are  subjected  to  tight  ligatures ; as  about  the 
neck,  loins,  and  thighs. 

The  itching  is  complicated  with  other  sensations, 
which  are  variously  described  by  patients.  They 
sometines  feel  as  if  small  insects  were  creeping  on  the 
skin ; sometimes  as  if  stung  all  over  by  ants ; some- 
times as  if  hot  needles  were  piercing  the  skin  in  divers 
places.  On  standing  before  a fire,  or  undressing,  and 
more  particularly  on  getting  into  bed,  these  sensations 
become  most  violent,  and  usually  preclude  all  rest 
during  the  greatest  part  of  the  night.  The  prurigo 
formicans  is  by  most  practitioners  deemed  contagious, 
and  confounded  with  the  itch.  In  endeavouring  to 
ascertain  the  justness  of  this  opinion,  Dr.  Willan  has 
been  led  to  make  the  following  remarks;  1.  The  erup- 
tion is,  for  the  most  part,  connected  with  internal  dis- 
order, and  arises  when  no  source  of  infection  can  be 
traced.  2.  Persons  affected  may  have  constant  inter- 
course with  several  others,  and  yet  never  communicate 
the  disease  to  any  of  them.  3.  Several  persons  of  one 
family  may  have  the  prurigo  formicans  about  the  same 
time;  but  he  thinks  tins  should  be  referred  rather  to  a 
common  predisposition  than  to  contagion,  having  ob- 
served that  individuals  of  a family  are  often  so  affected 
at  certain  seasons  of  the  year,  even  when  they  reside 
at  a distance  from  each  other. 

Although  the  prurigo  formicans  is  never,  like  the 
former  species,  converted  into  the  itch,  yet  it  does  oc- 
casionally terminate  in  a pustular  disease,  not  con- 
tagious. 

3.  Prurigo  sepilis.  This  affection  does  not  differ  | 

Xx2 


much  in  its  symptoms  and  external  appearances  from 
the  prurigo  formicans ; but  has  been  thought  by  medical 
writers  to  merit  a distinct  consideration  on  account  of 
its  peculiar  inveteracy.  The  prurigo  is  perhaps  aggra- 
vated, or  becomes  more  permanent  in  old  age  from  the 
dry,  condensed  state  of  the  skin  and  cuticle  which 
often  takes  place  at  that  period.  Those  who  are  af 
fected  with  it  in  a high  degree  have  little  more  comfort 
to  expect  during  life,  being  incessantly  tormented  with 
a violent  and  universal  itching.  The  state  of  the 
skin  in  the  prurigo  senilis,  is  favourable  to  the  produc- 
tion of  an  insect,  the  pediculus  humanus,  more 
especially  to  the  variety  of  it  usually  termed  body-lice. 

These  insects,  it  is  well  known,  are  bred  abundantly 
among  the  inhabitants  of  sordid  dwellings,  of  jails, 
work-houses,  &c.  and  in  such  situations  prey  upon 
persons  of  all  ages  indiscriminately.  But  in  the  prurigo 
senilis  they  arise,  notwithstanding  every  attention  to 
cleanliness  or  regimen,  and  multiply  so  rapidly  that  the 
patient  endures  extreme  distress,  from  their  perpetual 
irritation.  The  nits  or  eggs  are  deposited  on  the  small 
hairs  of  the  skin,  and  the  pediculi  are  only  found  on 
the  skin,  or  on  the  linen,  not  under  the  cuticle,  as  some 
authors  have  represented.  In  connexion  with  the 
foregoing  series  of  complaints,  Dr.  Willan  mentions 
some  pruriginous  affections  which  are  merely  local. 
He  confines  his  observations  to  the  most  troublesome 
of  these,  seated  in  the  podex,  prasputium,  urethra, 
pubes,  scrotum,  and  pudendum  muliebre.  Itching  of 
the  nostrils,  eyelids,  lips,  or  of  the  external  ear,  being 
generally  symptomatic  of  other  diseases,  do  not  require 
a particular  consideration. 

1.  Prurigo  podicis.  Ascarides  in  the  rectum  excite 
a frequent  itching  and  irritation  about  the  sphincter  ani, 
which  ceases  when  the  cause  is  removed  by  proper 
medicines.  A similar  complaint  often  arises,  indepen 
dently  of  worms,  ha;morrhoidaI  tumours,  or  other 
obvious  causes,  which  is  mostly  found  to  affect  persons 
engaged  in  sedentary  occupations  ; and  may  be  referred 
to  a morbid  state  of  secretion  in  the  parts,  founded, 
perhaps,  on  a diminution  of  constitutional  vigour. 
The  itching  is  not  always  accompanied  with  an  ap- 
pearance of  papula;  or  tubercles ; it  is  little  troublesome 
during  the  day-time,  but  returns  every  night  soon  after 
getting  into  bed,  and  precludes  rest  for  several  hours. 
The  complaint  continues  in  this  form  during  three  or 
four  months,  and  has  then  an  intermission,  till  it  is  pro- 
duced again  by  hot  weather,  fatigue,  watching,  or  some 
irregularity  in  diet.  The  same  disease  occurs  at  the 
decline  of  life,  under  a variety  of  circumstances. 

Women,  after  the  cessation  of  the  catamenia,  are 
liable  to  be  affected  with  this  species  of  prurigo,  more 
especially  in  summer  or  autumn.  The  skin  between 
the  nates  is  rpuglx  and  papulated,  sometimes  scaly,  and 
a little  humour  is  discharged  by  violent  friction. 
Along  with  this  complaint,  there  is  often  an  eruption 
of  itching  papula  on  the  neck,  breast,  and  back ; 
a swelling  and  inflammation  of  one  or  both  ears,  and  a 
discharge  of  matter  from  behind  them,  and  from  the 
external  meatus  auditorius.  The  prurigo  podicis 
sometimes  occurs  ats  a symptom  of  the  lues  venerea. 

2.  The  prurigo  preeputii  is  owing  to  an  altered  state 
of  secretion  on  the  glans  penis,  and  inner  surface  of 
the  prseputium.  During  the  heat  of  summer  there  is 
also,  in  some  persons,  an  unusual  discharge  of  mucus, 
which  becomes  acrimonious,  and  produces  a trouble- 
some itching,  and  often  an  excoriation  of  these  parts. 
Washing  of  them  with  water,  or  soap  and  water,  em- 
ployed from  time  to  time,  relieves  the  complaint,  and 
should  indeed  be  practised  as  an  ordinary  point  of 
cleanliness,  where  no  inconvenience  is  immediately 
felt.  If  the  fluid  be  secreted  in  too  large  a quantity, 
that  excess  may  be  restrained,  by  washes  made  with 
the  liquor  plumbi  subacetatis,  or  by  applying  the  un 
guentum  plumbi  superacetatis. 

3.  Prurigo  uretkralis.  A very  troublesome  itching 
sometimes  takes  place  at  the  extremity  of  the  urethra 
in  females,  without  any  manifest  cause.  It  occurs  as 
well  in  young  women  as  in  those  who  are  of  an  ad- 
vanced age.  On  examination,  no  stricture  or  tumour 
has  been  found  along  the  course  of  the  urethra.  Pro- 
bably, however,  the  itching  may  be  occasioned  by  a 
morbid  state  of  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  being  in  some 
instances  connected  with  pain  and  difficulty  of  making 
water. 

An  itching  at  the  extremity  of  the  urethra  in  men  is 
produced  by  calculi,  and  by  some  diseases  of  the  blad 

211 


PRU 


PRU 


der.  In  cases  of  stricture  an  itching  is  also  felt,  but 
near  tlie  place  where  the  stricture  is  situated.  An- 
other cause  of  it  is  small  broken  hairs,  which  are 
sometimes  drawn  in  from  the  pubes,  between  the  pne- 
putium  and  glans,  and  which  afterward  becoming  fixed 
in  the  entrance  of  the  urethra,  occasion  an  itching,  or 
slight  stinging,  particularly  on  motion.  J.  Pearson, 
surgeon  of  the  Lock  Hospital,  has  seen  five  cases  of 
this  kind,  and  gave  immediate  relief  by  extracting  the 
small  hair  from  the  urethra. 

4.  Prurigo  pubis.  Itching  papuke  often  arise  on  the 
pubes,  and  become  extremely  sore  if  their  tops  are  re- 
moved by  scratching.  They  are  occasioned  sometimes 
by  neglect  of  cleanliness,  but  more  commonly  by  a 
species  of  pediculus,  which  perforates  the  cuticle,  and 
thus  derives  its  nourishment,  remaining  fixed  in  the 
same  situation. , These  insects  are  termed  by  Linnaeus, 
&.c.  pcdiculi  pubis ; they  do  not,  however,  affect  the 
pubes  only,  but  often  adhere  to  the  eyebrows,  eyelids, 
and  axillae.  They  are  often  found,  also,  on  the  breast, 
abdomen,  thighs,  and  legs,  in  persons  of  the  sanguine 
temperament,  who  have  those  parts  covered  with 
strong  hairs.  It  is  remarkable  that  they  seldom  or 
never  fix  upon  the  hairy  scalp.  The  great  irritation 
produced  by  them  on  the  skin,  solicits  constantly 
scratching,  by  which  they  are  torn  from  their  attach- 
ments : and  painful  tubercles  arise  at  the  places  where 
they  had  adhered.  When  the  pediculi  are  diffused 
over  the  greater  part  of  the  surface  of  the  body,  the 
patient’s  linen  often  appears  as  if  sprinkled  with  drops 
of  blood. 

5.  Prurigo  scroti.  The  scrotum  is  affected  with  a 
troublesome  and  constant  itching  from  ascarides  within 
the  rectum,  from  friction  by  violent  exercise  in  hot 
weather,  and  very  usually  from  the  pediculi  pubis. 
Another  and  more  important  form  of  the  complaint  ap- 
pears in  old  men,  sometimes  connected  with  the  pru- 
rigo podicis,  and  referrible  to  a morbid  state  of  the 
6kin,  or  superficial  gland  of  the  part.  The  scrotum,  in 
this  case,  assumes  a brown  colour,  often  also  becoming 
thick,  scaly,  and  wrinkled.  The  itching  extends  to  the 
skin  covering  the  penis,  more  especially  along  the 
course  of  the  urethra;  and  has  little  respite,  either  by 
day  or  night. 

6.  The  Prurigo  pudendi  muliebris , is  somewhat 
analogous  to  the  prurigo  scroti  in  men.  It  is  often  a 
symptomatic  complaint  in  the  lichen  and  lepra  ; it  like- 
wise originates  from  ascarides  irritating  the  rectum, 
and  is  in  some  cases  connected  with  a discharge  of  the 
fluor  albus. 

A similar  affection  arises  in  consequence  of  a 
change  of  state  in  the  genital  organs  at  the  time  of  pu- 
berty, attended  with  a series  of  most  distressing  sensa- 
tions. Dr.  Willan  confines  his  attention'to  one  case  of 
the  disorder,  which  maybe  considered  as  idiopathic, 
and  which  usually  affects  women  soon  after  the  cessa- 
tion of  the  catamenia.  It  chiefly  occurs  in  those  who 
are  of  the  phlegmatic  temperament,  and  inclined  to 
corpulency.  Its  seat  is  the  labia  pudendi,  and  entrance 
to  the  vagina.  It  is  often  accompanied  with  an  ap- 
pearance of  tension  or  fulness  of  those  parts,  and 
sometimes  with  inflamed  itching  papulae  on  the  labia 
and  mons  veneris.  The  distress  arising  from  a strong 
and  almost  perpetual  itching  in  the  above  situation, 
may  be  easily  imagined.  In  order  to  allay  it  in  some  de- 
gree, the  sufferers  have  frequent  recourse  to  friction, 
and  to  cooling  applications  ; whence  they  are  neces- 
sitated to  forego  the  enjoyment  of  society.  An  excite- 
ment of  venereal  sensations  also  takes  place  from  the 
constant  direction  of  the  mind  to  the  parts  affected,  as 
well  as  from  the  means  employed  to  procure  allevia- 
tion. The  complicated  distress  thus  arising,  renders 
existence  almost  insupportable,  and  often  produces  a 
state  of  mind  bordering  on  frenzy. 

Deep  ulcerations  of  the  parts  seldom  take  place  in 
tire  prurigo  pudendi : but  the  appearance  of  aphtha;  on 
the  labia  and  nymplue,  is  by  no  means  unusual.  From 
intercourse  with  females  under  these  circumstances, 
men  are  liable  to  be  affected  with  aphthous  ulcerations 
on  the  glans,  and  inside  of  the  prieputium,  which 
prove  troublesome  for  a length  of  time,  and  often  ex- 
cite an  alarm,  being  mistaken  for  chancres. 

Women,  after  the  fourth  month  of  their  pregnancy, 
often  suffer  greatly  from  the  prurigo  pudendi,  attended 
with  aphtha;.  These,  in  a few  cases,  have  been  suc- 
ceeded by  extensive  ulcerations,  which  destroyed  the 
nymphx',  and  produced  a fatal  hectic  : such  instances 

t 212 


are,  however,  extremely  rare.  The  complaint  has,  in 
general,  some  intervals  or  remissions ; and  the  aphthae 
usually  disappear  soon  after  delivery,  whether  at  the 
full  time,  or  by  a miscarriage. 

PRURI  TUS.  (From  prurio,  to  itch.)  See  Prurigo. 

Prussian  alkali.  See  Alkali , phlogisticated. 

Prussian  blue.  See  Blue,  Prussian. 

PRUSSIATE.  A salt  formed  by  the  union  of  the 
prussic  acid,  or  colouring  matter  of  Prussian  blue,  with 
a salifiable  basis  : thus,  prussiate  of  potassa , &c. 

PRUSSIC  ACID.  Acidum  prussicum.  Acidum 
kydrocyanicum.  Hydrocyanic  acid.  “The  combina- 
tion of  this  acid  with  iron  was  long  known,  and  used 
as  a pigment  by  the  name  of  Prussian  blue,  before  its 
nature  was  understood.  Sclieele’s  method  of  obtaining  it 
is  this  : — Mix  four  ounces  of  Prussian  blue  with  two  of 
red  oxide  of  mercury  prepared  by  nitric  acid,  and  boil 
them  in  twelve  ounces  by  weight  of  water,  till  the 
whole  becomes  colourless ; filter  the  liquor,  and  add  to 
it  one  ounce  of  clean  iron  filings,  and  six  or  seven 
drachms  of  sulphuric  acid.  Draw  off  by  distillation 
about  a fourth  of  the  liquor,  which  will  be  prussic 
.acid ; though,  as  it  is  liable  to  be  contaminated  with  a 
portion  of  sulphuric,  to  render  it  pure,  it  may  be  recti- 
fied by  redistilling  it  from  carbonate  of  lime. 

This  prussic  acid  has  a strong  smell  of  peach-blos- 
soms, or  bitter  almonds ; its  taste  is  at  first  sweetish, 
then  acrid,  hot,  and  virulent,  and  excites  coughing ; it 
has  a strong  tendency  to  assume  the  form  of  gas ; it 
has  been  decomposed  in  a high  temperature,  and  by  the 
contact  of  light,  into  carbonic  acid,  ammonia,  and  car- 
buretted  hydrogen.  It  does  not  completely  neutralize 
alkalies,  and  is  displaced  even  by  the  carbonic  acid  ; it 
has  no  action  upon  metals,  but  unites  with  their  oxides, 
and  forms  salts  for  the  most  part  insoluble ; it  likewise 
unites  into  triple  salts  with  these  oxides  and  alkalies ; 
the  oxygenated  muriatic  acid  decomposes  it. 

The  peculiar  smell  of  the  prussic  acid  could  scarcely 
fail  to  suggest  its  affinity  with  the  deleterious  principle 
that  rises  in  the  distillation  of  the  leaves  of  the  lauro- 
cerasus,  bitter  kernels  of  fruits,  and  some  other  vege- 
table productions ; and  Schrader,  of  Berlin,  has  ascer- 
tained the  fact,  that  these  vegetable  substances  do  con- 
tain a principle  capable  of  forming  a blue  precipitate 
with  iron  ; and  that  with  lime  they  afford  a test  of  the 
presence  of  iron  equal  to  the  prussiate  of  that  earth. 
Dr.  Bucholz,  of  Weimar,  and  Roloff,  of  Magdeburg, 
confirm  this  fact.  The  prussic  acid  appears  to  come 
over  in  the  distilled  oil. 

Prussic  acid  and  its  combinations  have  been  lately 
investigated  by  Gay  Lussac  and  Vauquelin  in  France, 
and  Porrett  in  England. 

To  a quantity  of  powdered  Prussian  blue  diffused  in 
boiling  water,  let  red  oxide  of  mercury  be  added  in 
successive  portions  till  the  blue  colour  is  destroyed. 
Filter  the  liquid,  and  concentrate  by  evaporation  till  a 
pellicle  appears.  On  cooling,  crystals  of  prussiate,  or 
cyanide  of  mercury,  will  be  formed.  Dry  these,  and 
put  them  into  a tubulated  glass  retort,  to  the  beak  of 
which  is  adapted  a horizontal  tube  about  two  feet  long, 
and  fully  half  an  inch  wide  at  its  middle  part.  The 
first  third-part  of  the  tube  next  the  retort  is  filled  with 
small  pieces  of  white  marble,  the  two  other  thirds 
with  fused  muriate  of  lime.  To  the  end  of  this  tube 
is  adapted  a small  receiver,  which  should  b«  artificially 
refrigerated.  Pour  on  the  crystals  muriatic  acid,  in 
rather  less  quantity  than  is  sufficient  to  saturate  the 
oxide  of  mercury  which  formed  them.  Apply  a very 
gentle  heat  to  the  retort.  Prussic  acid,  named  hydro- 
cyanic by  Gay  Lussac,  will  be  evolved  in  vapour,  and 
will  condense  in  the  tube.  Whatever  muriatic  acid 
may  pass  over  with  it,  will  be  abstracted  by  the  mar- 
ble, while  the  water  will  be  absorbed  by  the  mu- 
riate of  lime.  By  means  of  moderate  heat  applied  to 
the  tube,  the  prussic  acid  may  be  made  to  pass  succes- 
sively along;  and  after  being  left  some  time  in  contact 
with  the  muriate  of  lime,  it  may  be  finally  driven  into 
tire  receiver.  As  the  carbonic  acid  evolved  from  mar- 
ble by  the  muriatic  is  apt  to  carry  off  some  of  the  prus- 
sic acid,  care  should  be  taken  to  conduct  the  heat  so  as 
to  prevent  the  distillation  of  this  mineral  acid. 

Prussic  acid  thus  obtained  has  the  following  proper- 
ties : — It  is  a colourless  liquid,  possessing  a strong 
odour;  and  the  exhalation,  if  incautiousjy  snuffed  up 
the  nostrils,  may  produce  sickness  or  fainting.  Its 
taste  is  cooling  at  first,  then  hot,  asthenic  in  a ligh 
degree,  and  a tr  ue  poison. 


PRU 


PRU 


This  acid,  when  compared  with  the  other  animal  | 
products,  is  distinguished  by  the  great  quantity  of  ni- 
trogen it  contains,  by  its  small  quantity  of  hydrogen, 
and  especially  by  the  absence  of  oxygen. 

When  this  acid  is  kept  in  well-closed  vessels,  even 
though  no  air  be  present,  it  is  sometimes  decomposed 
in  less  than  an  hour.  It  has  been  occasionally  kept  15 
days  without  alteration ; but  it  is  seldom  that  it  can  be 
kept  longer,  without  exhibiting  signs  of  decomposition. 
It  begins  by  assuming  a reddish-brown  colour,  which 
becomes  deeper  and  deeper;  and  it  gradually deposites 
a considerable  carbonaceous  matter,  which  gives  a 
deep  colour  to  both  water  and  acids,  and  emits  a strong 
smell  of  ammonia.  If  the  bottle  containing  the  prus- 
sic acid  be  not  hermetically  sealed,  nothing  remains 
but  a dry  charry  mass,  which  gives  no  colour  to  water. 
Thus  a prussiate  of  ammonia  is  formed  at  the  expense 
of  a part  of  the  acid,  and  an  azoturet  of  carbon.  When 
potassium  is  heated  in  prussic  acid  vapour  mixed  with 
hydrogen  or  nitrogen,  there  is  absorption  without  in- 
flammation, and  the  metal  is  converted  into  a gray 
spongy  substance,  which  melts,  and  assumes  a yellow 
colour. 

Supposing  the  quantity  of  potassium  employed  capa- 
ble of  disengaging  from  water  a volume  of  hydrogen 
equal  to  50  parts,  we  find  after  the  action  of  the  po- 
tassium, 

1.  That  the  gaseous  mixture  has  experienced  a dimi- 
nution of  volume  amounting  to  50  parts. 

2.  On  treating  this  mixture  with  potassa  and  ana- 
lyzing the  residue  by  oxygen,  that  50  parts  of  hydrogen 
have  been  produced. 

3.  And  consequently  that  the  potassium  has  absorbed 
100  parts  of  prussic  vapour  ; for  there  is  a diminution 
of  50  parts  which  would  obviously  have  been  twice  as 
great  had  not  50  parts  of  hydrogen  been  disengaged. 
The  yellow  matter  is  prussiate  of  potassa ; properly  a 
prusside  of  potassium,  analogous  in  Us  formation  to  the 
chloride  and  iodide,  when  muriatic  and  hydriodic  gases 
are  made  to  act  on  potassium. 

The  base  of  prussic  acid  thus  divested  of  its  acidi- 
fying hydrogen,  should  be  called,  agreeably  to  the  same 
chemical  analogy,  prussine.  Gay  Lussac  styles  it  cy- 
anogen, because  it  is  the  principle  which  generates 
blue ; or,  literally,  the  blue-maker. 

Like  muriatic  and  hydriodic  acids  also,  it  contains 
half  its  volume  of  hydrogen.  The  only  difference  is, 
that  the  former  have  in  the  present  state  of  our  know- 
ledge simple  radicals,  chlorine  and  iodine,  while  that 
of  the  latter  is  a compound  of  one  volume  vapour  of 
carbon,  and  half  a volume  of  nitrogen.  This  radical 
forms  true  prussides  with  metals. 

If  the  term  cyanogen  be  objectionable  as  allying  it  to 
oxygen,  instead  of  chlorine  and  iodine,  the  term  hydro- 
cyanic acid  must  be  equally  so,  as  implying  that  it 
contains  water.  Thus  we  say,  hydronitric,  hydromuri- 
atic,  and  hydrophosphoric,  to  denote  the  aqueous  com- 
pounds of  the  nitric,  muriatic,  and  phosphoric  acids. 
As  the  singular  merit  of  Gay  Lussac,  however,  has 
commanded  a very  general  compliance  among  chemists 
with  his  nomenclature,  we  shall  use  the  terms  prussic 
acid  and  hydrocyanic  indiflerently,  as  has  long  been 
done  with  the  words  nitrogen  and  azote. 

The  prusside  or  cyanide  of  potassium  gives  a very 
alkaline  solution  in  water,  even  when  a great  excess 
of  hydrocyanic  vapour  has  been  present  at  its  forma- 
tion. In  this  respect  it  differs  from  the  chlorides 
and  iodides  of  that  metal,  which  are  perfectly  neutral. 

Barytes,  potassa,  and  soda  combine  with  prussine, 
forming  true  prussides  of  these  alkaline  oxides;  ana- 
logous to  what  are  vulgarly  called  oxymuriates  of 
lime,  potassa,  and  soda.  The  red  oxide  of  mercury 
acts  so  powerfully  on  prussic  acid  vapour,  when  as- 
sisted by  heat,  that  the  compound  which  ought  to  re- 
sult is  destroyed  by  the  heat  disengaged.  The  same 
thing  happens  when  a little  of  the  concentrated  acid  is 
poured  upon  the  oxide.  A great  elevation  of  tempe- 
rature takes  place,  which  would  occasion  a dangerous 
explosion  if  the  experiment  were  made  upon  consider- 
able quantities.  When  the  acid  is  diluted,  the  oxide 
dissolves  rapidly,  with  a considerable  heat,  and  with- 
out the  disengagement  of  any  gas.  The  substance 
formerly  called  prussiate  of  mercury  is  generated, 
which  when  moist  may,  like  the  muriates,  still  re-  l 
tain  that  name ; but  when  dry  is  a prusside  of  the 
metal. 

When  the  cold  oxide  is  placed  in  contact  with  the  ' 


| acid,  dilated  into  a gaseous  form  by  hydrogen,  its  va- 
pour is  absorbed  in  a few  minutes.  The  hydrogen  is 
unchanged.  When  a considerable  quantity  of  vapour 
has  thus  been  absorbed,  the  oxide  adheres  to  the  side 
of  the  tube,  and  on  applying  heat,  water  is  obtained. 
The  hydrogen  of  the  acid  has  here  united  with  the 
oxygen  of  the  oxide  to  form  the  water,  while  their  two 
radicals  combine.  Red  oxide  of  mercury  becomes  an 
excellent  reagent  for  detecting  prussic  acid. 

By  exposing  the  dry  prusside  of  mercury  to  heat 
in  a retort,  the  radical  cyanogen  or  prussine  is  ob- 
tained. 

From  the  experiments  of  Magendie  it  appears  that 
the  pure  hydrocyanic  acid  is  the  most  violent  of  all 
poisons.  Wli^ji  a rgd  dipped  into  it  is  brought  in  con- 
tact with  the  tongue  of  an  animal,  death  ensues  before 
the  rod  can  be  withdrawn.  If  a bird  be  held  a mo 
ment  over  the  mouth  of  a phial  containing. this  acid,  it 
dies.  In  the  Annales  de  Chimie'for  1814,  we  find  this 
notice: — M.  B.,  Professor  of  Chemistry,  left  by  accident 
on  a table  a flask  containing  alkohol  impregnated  with 
prussic  acid  ; the  servant,  enticed  by  the  agreeable  fla- 
vour of  the  liquid,  swallowed  a small  glass  of  it.  In 
two  minutes  she  dropped  down  dead* as  if  struck  with 
apoplexy.  The  body  was  not  examined. 

“ Scharinger,  a professor  at  Vienna,”  says  Orfila, 
“ prepared,  six  or  seven  months  ago,  a pure  and  concen- 
trated prussic  acid  ; he  spread  a certain  quantity  of 
it  on  his  naked  arm,  and  died  a little  time  thereafter.” 

Dr.  Magendie  has,  however,  ventured  to  introduce 
its  employment  into  medicine.  He  found  it  beneficial 
against  phthisis  and  chronic  catarrhs.  His  formulae  is 
the  following  ; — 

Mix  one  part  of  the  pure  prussic  or  hydrocyanic  acid 
of  Gay  Lussac  with  8£  of  water  by  weight.  To 
this  mixture  he  gives  the  name  of  medicinal  prussic 
acid. 

Of  this  he  takes  1 gros.  or  59  grs.  Troy. 

Distilled  water,  1 lb.  or  7560  grs. 

Pure  sugar,  li  oz.  or  708|  grs. 

And  mixing  the  ingredients  well  together,  he  adminis- 
ters a table-spoonful  every  morning  and  evening.  A 
well-written  report  of  the  use  of  the  prussic  acid  in 
certain  diseases,  by  Dr.  Magendie,  was  communicated 
by  Dr.  Granville  to  Mr.  Braude,  and  is  inserted  in  the 
fourth  volume  of  the  Journal  of  Science. 

For  the  following  ingenious  and  accurate  process  for 
preparing  prussic  acid  for  medicinal  uses,  I am  indebt 
ed  to  Dr.  Nimmo  of  Glasgow. 

“ Take  of  the  ferroprussiate  of  potassa  100  grains, 
of  the  protosulphate  of  iron  84J  grains,  dissolve  them 
separately  in  four  ounces  of  water,  and  mingle  them. 
After  allowing  the  precipitate  of  the  protoprussiate  of 
iron  to  settle,  pour  off  the  clear  part,  and  add  water  to 
wash  the  sulphate  of  potassa  completely  away.  To 
the  protoprussiate  of  iron,  mixed  with  four  ounces  of 
pure  water,  add  135  grains  of  the  peroxide  of  mercury, 
and  boil  the  whole  till  the  oxide  is  dissolved..  With 
the  above  proportions  of  peroxide  of  mercury,  the  pro- 
toprussiate of  iron  is  completely  decomposed.  The 
vessel  being  kept  warm,  the  oxide  of  iron  will  fall  to 
the  bottom  ; the  clear  part  may  be  poured  off  to  be  fil- 
tered through  paper,  taking  care  to  keep  the  funnel 
covered,  so  that  crystals  may  not  form  in  it  by  refri- 
geration. The  residuum  may  be  .treated  with  more 
water,  and  thrown  upon  .the  .filter,  upon  which  warm 
water  ought  to  be  poured,  until  all  the  soluble  part  is 
washed  away.  By  evaporation,  and  subsequent  rest 
in  a cool  place,  145  grains  of  crystalsnf  the  prusside, 
or  cyanide  of  mercury  will  be  procured  in  quadrangu- 
lar prisms. 

“The  following  process  for  eliminating  the  hydrocy- 
anic acid  I believe  to  be  new : — Take  of  the  cyanide  of 
mercury  in  fine  powder  one  ounce,  diffuse  it  in  two 
ounces  of  water,  and  to  it,  by  slow  degrees,  add  a solu- 
tion of  hydrosulphuret  of  barytes,  made  by  decompos- 
ing sulphate  of  barytes  with  charcoal  in  the  common 
way.  Of  the  sulplmret  of  barytes  take  an  ounce,  boil 
it  with  six  ounces  of  water,  and  filter  it  as  hot  as  possi- 
ble. Add  this  in  small  portions  to  the  cyanide  of  mer- 
cury, agitating  the  whole  very  Well,  and  allowing  suf- 
ficient time  for  the  cyanide  to  dissolve,  while  the  de- 
composition is  going  on  between  it  and  the  hydrosul- 
phuret, as  it  is  added.  Continue  the  addition  of  the 
I hydrosulphuret  so  long  as  a dark  precipitate  of  sulphu- 
rel  of  mercury  falls  down,  and  even  allowing  a small 
1 excess.  Let  the  whole  be  thrown  upon  a filter,  and 

213 


PRU 


PSA 


kept  warm  till  the  fluid  drops  through ; add  more  water 
to  wash  the  sulphuret  of  mercury,  until  eight  ounces 
of  fluid  have  passed  through  the  filtei,  and  it  has  be- 
come tasteless.  To  this  fluid,  which  contains  the  prus- 
6iate  of  barytes,  with- a small  excess  of  hydrosulphuret 
of  barytes,  add  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  an  equal 
weight  of  water,  and  allowed  to  become  cold,  so  long 
as  sulphate  of  barytes  falls  down.  The  excess  of  sul- 
phuretted hydrogen  will  be  removed  by  adding  a suffi- 
cient portion  of  carbonate  of  lead,  and  agitating  very 
well.  The  whole  may  now  be  put  upon  a filter,  which 
must  be  closely  covered  ; the  fluid  which  passes  is  the 
hydrocyanic  acid  of  what  is  called  the  medical  stand- 
ard strength.” 

Scheele  found  that  prussic  acid  occasioned  precipi- 
tates with  only  the  following  three  metallic  solutions  : 
nitrates  of  silver  and  mercury,  and  carbonate  of  silver. 
The  first  is  white,  the  second  black,  the  third  green, 
becoming  blue. 

The  hydrocyanates  are  all  alkaline,  even  when  a 
great  excess  of  acid  is  employed  in  their  formation,  and 
they  are  decomposed  by  the  weakest  acids.” — Ure's 
Chem.  Diet. 

PRUSSINE.  Prussie  gas.  Cyanogen.  This  is  ob- 
tained by  decomposing  the  prusside  or  cyanide  of  mer- 
cury by  heat. 

When  the  simple  mercurial  prusside  is  exposed  to 
heat  in  a small  glass  retort,  or  tube,  shut  at  one  extre- 
mity, it  soon  begins  to  blacken.  It  appears  to  melt  like 
an  animal  matter,  and  then  the  prussine  is  disengaged 
in  abundance.  This  gas  is  pure  from  the  beginning 
of  the  process  to  the  end,  provided  always  that  the 
heat  be  not  very  high ; for  if  it  were  not  sufficiently 
intense  to  melt  the  glass,  a little  azote  would  be  evolv- 
ed. Mercury  is  volatilized  with  a considerable  quan- 
tity of  prusside,  and  there  remains  a charry  matter  of 
the  colour  of  soot,  and  as  light  as  lampblack.  The 
prusside  of  silver  gives  out  likewise  prussine  when 
heated  ; but  the  mercurial  prusside  is  preferable  to 
every  other. 

Prussine  or  cyanogen  is  a permanently  elastic  fluid. 
Its  smell,  which  it  is  impossible  to  describe,  is  very 
strong  and  penetrating.  Its  solution  in  water  has  a 
very  sharp  taste.  The  gas  burns  with  a bluish  flame 
mixed  with  purple.  Its  sp.  gr.,  compared  to  that  of 
air,  is  1.80G4. 

Prussine  is  capable  of  sustaining  a pretty  high  heat, 
without  being  decomposed.  Water,  agitated  with  it 
for  some  minutes,  at  the  temperature  of  68°,  absorbed 
about  4g  times  its  volume.  Pure  alkobol  absorbs  23 
times  its  volume.  Sulphuric  tether  and  oil  of  turpen- 
tine dissolve  at  least  as  much  as  water.  Tincture  of 
litmus  is  reddened  by  prussine.  The  carbonic  acid 
proceeds,  no  doubt,  from  the  decomposition  of  a small 
quantity  of  prussine  and  water.  It  deprives  the  red 
sulphate  of  manganese  of  its  colour,  a property  which 
prussic  acid  does  not  possess. 

Phosphorus,  sulphur,  and  iodine  may  be  sublimed 
by  the  heat  of  a spirit-lamp  in  prussine,  without  occa- 
sioning any  change  on  it.  Its  mixture  with  hydrogen 
was  not  altered  by  the  same  temperature,  or  by  passing 
electrical  sparks  through  it.  Copper  and  gold  do  not 
combine  with  it;  but  iron,  when  heated  almost  to 
whiteness,  decomposes  it  in  part. 

In  the  cold,  potassium  acts  but  slowly  on  prussine, 
because  a crust  is  formed  on  its  surface,  which  presents 
an  obstacle  to  the  mutual  action.  On  applying  the 
spirit-lamp,  the  potassium  becomes  speedily  incan- 
descent ; the  absorption  of  the  gas  begins,  the  inflamed 
disc  gradually  diminishes,  and  when  it  disappears  en- 
tirely, which  takes  place  in  a few  seconds,  the  absorp- 
tion is  likewise  at  an  end. 

The  compound  of  prussine  and  potassium  is  yellow- 
ish. It  dissolves  in  water  without  effervescence,  and 
the  solution  is  strongly  alkaline.  Its  taste  is  the  same 
as  that  of  hydrocyanate  or  simple  prussiate  of  potassa, 
of  which  it  possesses  all  the  properties. 

When  a pure  solution  of  potassa  is  introduced  into 
this  gas,  the  absorption  is  rapid.  If  the  alkali  be  not 
too  concentrated,  and  be  not  quite  saturated,  it  is 
scarcely  tinged  of  a lemon-yellow  colour.  But  if  the 
prussine  be  in  excess,  we  obtain  a brown  solution, 
apparently  carbonaceous.  On  pouring  potassa  com- 
bined with  prussine  into  a saline  solution  of  a black 
oxide  of  iron,  and  adding  an  acid,  we  obtain  Prussian 
blue. 

The  instant  an  acid  is  poured  into  the  solution  of 
214 


prussine  in  potassa,  a strong  effervescence  of  carbonic 
acid  is  produced,  and  at  the  same  time  a strong  smell  of 
prussic  acid  becomes  perceptible.  Ammonia  is  like- 
wise formed,  which  remains  combined  with  the  acid 
employed  and  which  may  be  rendered  very  sensible  to 
the  smell  by  the  addition  of  quicklime.  Since,  there- 
fore, we  are  obliged  to  add  an  acid  in  order  to  form 
Prussian  blue,  its  formation  occasions  no  farther  diffi- 
culty. 

Soda,  barytes,  and  strontites  produce  the  same  effect 
as  potassa.  We  must,  therefore,  admit  that  prussine 
forms  particular  combinations  with  the  alkalies,  which 
are  permanent  till  some  circumstance  determines  the 
formation  of  new  products.  These  combinations  are 
true  salts,  which  may  be  regarded  as  analagous  to  those 
formed  by  acids.  In  fact,  prussine  possesses  acid  cha- 
racters. It  contains  two  elements,  azote  and  carbon, 
the  first  of  which  is  strongly  acidifying,  according  to 
Gay  Lussac.  Prussine  reddens  the  tincture  of  litmus, 
and  neutralizes  the  bases.  On  the  other  hand,  it  acts 
as  a simple  body  when  it  combines  with  hydrogen ; and 
it  is  this  double  function  of  a simple  and  compound 
body,  which  renders  its  nomenclature  so  embarrassing. 

Be  this  as  it  may,  the  compounds  of  prussine  and  the 
alkalies,  which  may  be  distinguished  by  the  term  prus- 
sides , do  not  separate  in  water  like  the  alkaline  chlo- 
rurets  (oxymuriates),  which  produce  chlorates  and  mu 
riates. 

The  metallic  oxides  do  not  seem  capable  of  pro- 
ducing the  same  changes  on  prussine  as  the  alkalies. 

Prussine  rapidly  decomposes  the  carbonates  at  a dull 
red  heat,  and  prussides  of  the  oxides  are  obtained. 
When  passed  through  sulphuret  of  barytes,  itcombines 
without  disengaging  the  sulphur,  and  renders  it  very 
fusible  and  of  a brownish-black  colour.  When  put 
into  water,  we  obtain  a colourless  solution,  but  which 
gives  a deep  brown  (maroon)  colour  to  muriate  of 
iron.  What  does  not  dissolve  contains  a good  deal  of 
sulphate,  which  is  doubtless  formed  during  the  prepa- 
ration of  the  sulphuret  of  barytes. 

On  dissolving  prussine  in  the  sulphuretted  hydrosul- 
phuret of  barytes,  sulphur  is  precipitated,  which  is 
again  dissolved  when  the  liquor  is  saturated  with  prus- 
sine, and  we  obtain  a solution  having  a very  deep 
brown  maroon  colour.  This  gas  does  not  decompose 
sulphuret  of  silver,  nor  of  potassa. 

Prussine  and  sulphuretted  hydrogen  combine  slowly 
with  each  other.  A yellow  substance  is  obtained  in 
fine  needles,  which  dissolves  in  water,  does  not  precipi- 
tate nitrate  of  lead,  produces  no  Prussian  blue,  and  is 
composed  of  1 volume  prussine  (cyanogen),  and  1£ 
volumes  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen. 

Ammoniaoal  gas  and  prussine  begin  to  act  on  each 
other  whenever  they  come  in  contact ; but  some  hours 
are  requisite  to  render  the  effect  complete.  We  per- 
ceive at  first  a white  thick  vapour,  which  soon  disap- 
pears. The  diminution  of  volume  is  considerable,  and 
the  glass  in  which  the  mixture  is  made  becomes  opaque, 
its  inside  being  covered  with  a solid  brown  matter. 
On  mixing  90  parts  of  prussine,  and  227  ammonia,  they 
combined  nearly  in  the  proportion  of  1 to  1£.  This 
compound  gives  a dark  orange-brown  colour  to  water, 
but  dissolves  only  in  a very  small  proportion.  The 
liquid  produces  no  Prussian  blue  with  the  salts  of 
iron. 

In  the  first  volume  of  the  Journal  of  Science  and  the 
Arts,  Sir  H.  Davy  has  stated  some  interesting  particu- 
lars relative  to  prussine.  By  heating  prusside  of  mer- 
cury in  muriatic  acid  gas,  he  obtained  pure  liquid 
prussic  acid  and  corrosive  sublimate.  By  heating 
iodine,  sulphur,  and  phosphorus,  in  contact  with  prus- 
side of  mercury,  compounds  of  these  bodies  with  prus- 
sine or  cyanogen  may  be  formed.  That  of  iodine  is  a 
very  curious  body.  It  is  volatile  at  a very  moderate 
heat ; and  on  cooling  collects  in  flocculi,  adhering  to- 
gether like  oxide  of  zinc  formed  by  combustion.  It  has 
a pungent  smell,  and  very  acrid  taste. 

PSALLOI'DES.  (From  xpaXXoc,  a stringed  instru- 
ment, and  eiSoi,  a likeness  : because  it  appears  os  if 
stringed  like  a dulcimer.)  Applied  by  the  ancients  to 
the  inner  surface  of  the  fornix  of  the  brain. 

PSALTE'RIUM.  (A  harp:  beeause  it  is  marked 
with  lines  that  give  ifcthe  appearance  of  a harp.)  Lyra. 
The  medullary  body  that  unites  the  posterior  crura  of 
the  fornix  of  the  brain. 

PSAMMI'SMUS.  (From  \papuos,  sand.)  An  ap 
; plication  of  hot  sand  to  any  part  of  the  body. 


PSO 


PSO 


PSAMMO'DES.  (From  xpaypog,  sand.)  Applied  to 
urine  which  depositee  a sandy  sediment. 

PSELLI'SMUS.  (From  to  have  a hesita- 

tion of  speech.)  Psellotis.  Defect  of  speech.  A ge- 
nus of  disease  in  the  Class  Locales , and  Order  Dysci- 
nesiw , of  Cullen. 

Psello'tis.  See  Psellismus. 

PSEUDA'CORUS.  (From  ifevSris,  false,  and  ano- 
pov,  the  acorus  plant : because  it  resembled  and  was 
substituted  for  that  plant.)  See  Iris  Pseudacorus. 

PSEUDO.  (tcvSys,  false.)  Spurious.  This  word 
is  fixed  to  the  name  of  several  diseases,  because  they 
resemble  them,  but  are  not  those  diseases  ; as  Pseudo- 
pneumonia , Pseudo-phrenitis.  It  is  also  prefixed  to 
many  substances  which  are  only  fictitious  imitations ; 
as  Pseudamomum , a spurious  kind  of  amomum,  &c. 

PSEUDOBLE'PSIS.  (From  ipcvSys,  false,  and 
fiXeipig,  sight.)  Phantasma;  Suffusio.  Imaginary 
vision  of  objects.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Lo- 
cales, and  Order  Dyscethesix,  of  Cullen;  characterized 
by  depraved  sight,  creating  objects,  or  representing  them 
different  from  what  they  are.  Species 

1.  Pseudoblepsis  imaginaria,  in  which  objects  are 
perceived  that  are  not  present. 

2.  Pseudoblepsis  mutans , in  which  objects  that  are 
present  appear  somewhat  changed. 

PSEUDOCYESIS.  (From  xpevSyg,  false,  and  Kvycis, 
pregnancy.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  disease  in  Good’s 
Nosology.  Class,  Genetica ; Order,  Carpotica.  False 
conception.  It  has  two  species,  viz.  Pseudocyesis  mo- 
laris,  and  inanis. 

PSEUDOM ELANTHIUM.  (From  xpevSy s,  false, 
and  melanthium , the  name  of  a plant.)  See  Agro- 
stemma  gilhago. 

PSEUDOPYRETHRUM.  (From  i^evSys,  false,  and 
pyrethrum,  the  name  of  a plant : so  called,  because 
when  the  flowers  are  chewed  they  impart  a warmth 
somewhat  like  that  of  pyrethrum  root.)  See  Achillaa 
ptarmica. 

PSI'DIUM.  (Altered  by  Linnaeus  from  xpiSiai  of 
the  ancient  Greeks.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Icosandria;  Order,  Me- 
nogynia. 

Psidium  pomiferum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
apple  guava.  This  plant,  and  the  pyriferum , bear 
fruits,  the  former  like  apples,  the  latter  like  pears.  The 
apple  kind  is  most  cultivated  in  the  Indies,  on  account 
of  the  pulp  having  a fine  acid  flavour,  whereas  the  pear 
species  is  sweet,  and  therefore  not  so  agreeable  in  warm 
dimates.  Of  the  inner  pulp  of  either,  the  inhabitants 
make  jellies ; and  of  the  outer  rind  they  make  tarts, 
marmalades,  &c.  The  latter  they  also  stew  and  eat 
with  milk,  and  prefer  them  to  any  other  stewed  fruits. 
They  have  an  astringent  quality,  which  exists  also  in 
every  part  of  the  tree,  and  abundantly  in  the  leaf-buds, 
which  are  occasionally  boiled  with  barley,  and  liquor- 
ice, as  an  excellent  drink  against  diarrhoeas.  A sim- 
ple decoction  of  the  leaves,  used  as  a bath,  is  said  to 
cure  the  itch,  and  most  cutaneous  eruptions. 

Psidium  pyriferum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
pear  guava.  See  Psidium  pomiferum. 

Psilo'thra.  (From  i/nAow,  to  denudate.)  Appli- 
cations to  remove  the  hair. 

Psilo'thrum.  (From  ipiXoo),  to  depilate : so  called 
because  it  was  used  to  remove  the  hair.)  The  white 
briony. 

Psimmy'thium.  (From  i/nw,  to  smooth : so  called 
because  of  its  use  as  a cosmetic.)  Cerusse,  or  white 
lead. 

PSO'AL  (¥oat,  the  loins.)  Alopeces ; Kefrometra  ; 
Neurometeres.  1.  The  loins. 

2.  The  name  of  two  pair  of  muscles  in  the  loins. 

PSO' AS.  (From  \poai,  the  loins.)  Belonging  to  the 
loins. 

Psoas  abscess.  See  Lumbar  abscess. 

Psoas  magnus.  Psoas,  seu  lumbaris  internus , of 
Winslow.  Pre-lumbo-trochantin , of  Dumas.  This  is 
a long,  thick,  and  very  considerable  muscle,  situated 
close  to  the  forepart  and  sides  of  the  lumbar  vertebra. 
It  arises  from  the  bodies  of  the  last  vertebra  of  the  back, 
and  of  all  the  lumbar  vertebra  laterally,  as  well  as  from 
the  anterior  surfaces  of  their  transverse  processes  by 
distinct  tendinous  and  fleshy  slips,  that  are  gradually 
collected  into  one  mass,  which  becomes  thicker  as  it 
descends,  till  it  reaches  the  last  of  the  lumbar  vertebra, 
where  it  grows  narrower  again,  and  uniting  its  outer 
and  posterior  edge  (where  it  begins  to  become  tendi- 


nous) with  the  iliacus  internus,  descends  along  with 
that  muscle  under  the  ligamentum  Fallopii,  and  goes  to 
be  inserted  tendinous  at  the  bottom  of  the  trochanter 
minor,  of  the  os  femoris,  and  fleshy  into  the  bone  a 
little  below  that  process.  Between  the  tendon  of  this 
muscle  and  the  ischium,  we  find  a considerable  bursa 
mucosa.  This  muscle,  at  its  origin,  has  some  connex 
ion  with  the  diaphragm,  and  likewise  with  the  quadra- 
tus  lumborum.  It  is  one  of  the  most  powerful  flexors 
of  the  thighs  forwards,  and  may  likewise  assist  in 
turning  it  outwards.  When  the  inferior  extremity  is 
fixed,  it  may  help  to  bend  the  body  forwards,  and  in  an 
erect  posture  it  greatly  assists  in  preserving  the  equili- 
brium of  the  trunk  upon  the  upper  part  of  the  thigh. 

Psoas  parvus.  Pre-lumbo-pubien,  of  Dumas.  This 
muscle,  which  was  first  described  by  Riolanus,  is  situ- 
ated upon  the  psoas  magnus,  at  the  anterior  part  of  the 
loins.  The  psoas  parvus  arises  thin  and  fleshy  from 
the  side  of  the  uppermost  vertebra  of  the  loins,  and 
sometimes  also  from  the  lower  edge  of  the  last  vertebra 
of  the  back,  and  from  the  transverse  processes  of  each 
of  these  vertebrae : it  then  extends  over  part  of  the 
psoas  magnus,  and  terminates  in  a thin,  flat  tendon, 
which  is  inserted  into  that  part  of  the  brim  of  the  pel- 
vis, where  the  os  pubis  joins  the  ilium.  From  this 
tendon  a great  number  of  fibres  are  sent  off,  which  form 
a thin  fascia,  that  covers  parts  of  the  psoas  magnus  and 
iliacus  internus,  and  gradually  loses  itself  on  the  fore 
part  of  the  thigh.  In  the  human  body,  this  muscle  is 
very  often  wanting  ; but  in  a dog,  according  to  Douglas, 
it  is  never  deficient.  Riolanus  was  of  opinion,  that  it 
occurs  oftener  in  men  than  in  women.  Winslow  as- 
serts just  the  contrary  ; but  the  truth  seems  to  be,  that 
it  is  as  often  wanting  in  one  sex  as  in  the  other.  Its 
use  seems  to  be  to  assist  the  psoas  magnus  in  bending 
the  loins  forwards ; and  when  we  are  lying  upon  our 
back,  it  may  help  to  raise  the  pelvis. 

Psoas  sive  lumbaris  internus.  See  Psoas  mag 
nus. 

PSO'RA.  tcopa.  Scabies.  The  itch.  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  Class  Locales,  and  Order  Dyalyses,  of 
Cullen  : appearing  first  on  the  wrists,  and  between  the 
fingers,  in  small  pustules  with  watery  heads.  It  is  con- 
tagious. 

PSORALE  A.  (From  xpwpaXeos,  scabby ; because  the 
calyx,  and  other  parts  of  the  plant,  are  more  or  less 
besprinkled  with  glandular  dots,  giving  a scurfy  rough 
ness.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Dia- 
delphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

Psoralea  pentaphylla.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Chexicum  contrayerva,  Contrayerva  nova,  which 
is  by  many  as  much  esteemed  as  the  Dorstenia.  It  was 
introduced  into  Europe  soon  after  the  true  plant,  from 
Guiana  as  well  as  Mexico. 

PSORI'ASIS.  (From  \pupa,  the  itch.)  The  disease 
to  which  Dr.  Willan  gives  this  title  is  characterized  by 
a rough  and  scaly  state  of  the  cuticle,  sometimes  con- 
tinuous, sometimes  in  separate  patches,  of  various 
sizes,  but  of  an  irregular  figure,  and  for  the  most  part 
accompanied  with  rhagades  or  fissures  of  the  skin. 
From  the  lepra  it  may  be  distinguished,  not  only  by  the 
distribution  of  the  patches,  but  also  by  its  cessation 
and  recurrence  at  certain  seasons  of  the  year,  and  by 
the  disorder  of  the  constitution  with  which  it  is  usually 
attended.  Dr.  Willan  gives  the  following  varieties : 

1.  Psoriasis  guttata.  This  complaint  appears  in 
small,  distinct,  but  irregular  patches  of  laminated 
scales,  with  little  or  no  inflammation  round  them. 
The  patches  very  seldom  extend  to  the  size  of  a six- 
pence. They  have  neither  an  elevated  border,  nor  the 
oval  or  circular  form  by  which  all  the  varieties  of 
lepra  are  distinguished  ; but  their  circumference  is 
sometimes  angular,  and  sometimes  goes  into  small  ser- 
pentine processes.  The  scale  formed  upon  each  of 
them  is  thin,  and  maybe  easily  detached,  leaving  a red, 
shining  base.  The  patches  are  often  distributed  over 
the  greatest  part  of  the  body,  but  more  particularly  on 
the  back  part  of  the  neck,  the  breasts,  arms,  loins, 
thighs,  and  legs.  They  appear  also  upon  the  face, 
which  rarely  happens  in  lepra.  In  that  situation,  they 
are  red  and  more  rough  than  the  adjoining  cuticle,  but 
not  covered  with  scales.  The  psoriasis  guttata  often 
appears  on  children  in  a sudden  eruption,  attended 
\ with  a slight  disorder  of  the  constitution,  and  spreads 
oyer  the  body  within  two  or  three  days.  In  adults  it 
commences  with  a few  scaly  patches  on  the  extremi- 
ties, proceeds  very  gradually,  and  has  a longer  duration 


rso 


PSO 


than  in  children.  Its  first  occurrence  is  usually  in  the 
spring  season,  after  violent  pains  in  the  head,  stomach, 
and  limbs.  During  the  summer  it  disappears  sponta- 
neously, or  may  be  soon  removed  by  proper  applica- 
tions, but  it  is  apt  to  return  again  early  in  the  ensuing 
spring,  and  continues  so  to  do  for  several  successive 
years.  When  the  scales  have  been  removed,  and  the 
disease  is  about  to  go  off,  the  small  patches  have  a 
Bhining  appearance,  and  they  retain  a dark  red,  inter- 
mixed with  somewhat  of  a bluish  colour,  for  many 
days,  or  even  weeks,  before  the  skin  is  restored  to  its 
usual  state.  In  the  venereal  disease  there  is  an  erup- 
tion which  very  much  resembles  the  psoriasis  guttata, 
the  only  difference  being  a slighter  degree  of  scaliness, 
and  a different  shade  of  colour  in  the  patches,  approach- 
ing. to  a livid  red,  or  very  dark  rose  colour.  The 
patches  vary  in  their  extent,  from  the  section  of  a pea, 
to  the  size  of  a silver  penny,  but  are  not  exactly  cir- 
cular. They  rise  at  first  very  little,  if  at  all,  above  the 
cuticle.  As  soon,  however,  as  the  scales  appear  on 
them,  they  become  sensibly  elevated ; and  sometimes 
the  edge  or  circumference  of  the  patch  is  higher  than 
the  little  scales  in  its  centre.  This  eruption  is  usually 
seen  upon  the  forehead,  breast,  between  the  shoulders, 
or  in  the  inside  of  the  forearms,  in  the  groins,  about 
the  inside  of  the  thighs,  and  upon  the  skin  covering  the 
lower  part  of  the  abdomen.  The  syphilitic  psoriasis 
guttata  is  attended  with,  or  soon  followed  by,  an  ul- 
ceration of  the  throat.  It  appears  about  six  or  eight 
weeks  after  a chancre  has  been  healed  by  an  ineffectual 
course  of  mercury.  A similar  appearance  takes  place 
at  nearly  the  same  period,  in  some  cases  where  no  local 
symptoms  had  been  noticed.  When  a venereal  sore  is 
in  a discharging  state,  this  eruption,  or  other  secondary 
symptoms,  often  appear  much  later  than  the  period 
above  mentioned.  They  may  also  be  kept  back  three 
months,  or  even  longer,  by  an  inefficient  application  of 
mercury.  If  no  medicine  be  employed,  the  syphilitic 
form  of  the  psoriasis  guttata  wrill  proceed  during  several 
months,  the  number  of  the  spots  increasing,  and  their 
bulk  being  somewhat  enlarged,  but  without  any  other 
material  alteration.' 

2.  The  Psoriasis  diffusa  spreads  into  large  patches 
irregularly  circumscribed,  reddish,  rough,  and  chappv, 
with  scales  interspersed.  It  commences,  in  general, 
with  numerous  minute  asperities,  or  elevations  of  the 
cuticle,  more  perceptible  by  the  touch  than  by  sight. 
Upon  these,  small  distinct  scales  are  soon  after  formed, 
adhering  by  a dark  central  point,  while  their  edges  may 
be  seen  white  and  detached.  In  the  course  of  two  or 
three  weeks  all  the  intervening  cuticle  becomes  rough 
and  chappy,  appears  red,  and  raised,  and  wrinkled,  the 
lines  of  the  skin  sinking  into  deep  furrows.  The  scales 
which  form  among  them  are  often  slight,  and  repeat- 
edly exfoliate.  Sometimes,  without  any  previous  erup- 
tion of  papulae,  a large  portion  of  the  skin  becomes  dry, 
harsh,  cracked,  reddish,  and  scaly,  as  above  described. 
In  other  cases,  the  disorder  commences  with  separate 
atches  of  an  uncertain  form  and  size,  some  of  them 
eing  small,  like  those  in  the  psoriasis  guttata,  some 
much  larger.  The  patches  gradually  expand  till  they 
become  confluent,  and  nearly  cover  the  part  or  limb  af- 
fected. Both  the  psoriasis  guttata  and  diffusa  like- 
wise occur  as  a sequel  of  the  lichen  simplex.  This 
transition  takes  place  more  certainly  after  frequent  re- 
turns of  the  lichen.  The  parts  most  affected  by  psori- 
asis diffusa  are  the  cheeks,  chin,  upper  eyelids,  and 
corners  of  the  eyes,  the  temples,  the  external  ear,  the 
neck,  the  fleshy  parts  of  the  lower  extremities,  and  the 
forearm,  from  the  elbow  to  the  back  of  the  hand,  along 
the  supinator  muscle  of  the  radius.  The  fingers  are 
sometimes  nearly  surrounded  with  a loose  scaly  in- 
crustation ; the  nails  crack  and  exfoliate  superficially. 
The  scaly  patches  likewise  appear,  though  less  fre- 
quently, on  the  forehead  and  scalp,  on  the  shoulders, 
back,  and  loins,  on  the  abdomen,  and  instep.  This 
disease  occasionally  extends  to  all  the  parts  above  men- 
tioned at  the  same  time ; but,  in  general,  it  affects  them 
successively,  leaving  one  place  free,  and  appearing  in 
others  ; sometimes  again  returning  to  its  first  situation. 
The  psoriasis  diffusa  is  attended  with  a sensation  of 
heat,  and  with  a very  troublesome  itching,  especially 
at  night.  It  exhibits  small,  slight,  distinct  scales, 
having  less  disposition  than  the  lepra  to  form  thick 
crusts.  The  chaps  or  fissures  of  the  skin,  which  usually 
make  a part  of  this  complaint,  are  very  sore  and  pain- 
ful, but  seldom  discharge  any  fluid.  When  the  scales 
216 


are  removed  by  frequent  washing,  or  by  the  application 
of  unguents,  the  surface,  though  raised  and  uneven, 
appears  smooth  and  shining ; and  the  deep  furrows  of 
the  cuticle  are  lined  by  a slight  scaliness.  Should  any 
portion  of  the  diseased  surface  be  forcibly  excoriated, 
there  issues  out  a thin  lymph,  mixed  with  some  drops 
of  blood,  which  slightly  stains  and  stiffens  the  iinen, 
but  soon  concretes  into  a thin  dry  scab ; this  is  again 
succeeded  by  a white  scaliness,  gradually  increasing, 
and  spreading  in  various  directions.  As  the  complaint 
declines,  the  roughness,  chaps,  scales,  &c.  disappear, 
and  a new  cuticle  is  formed,  at  first  red,  dry,  and 
shrivelled,  but  which,  ii\  two  or  three  weeks,  acquires 
the  proper  texture.  The  duration  of  the  psoriasis  dif- 
fusa is  from  one  to  four  months.  If,  in  some  constitu- 
tions, it  does  not  then  disappear,  but  becomes,  to  a cer- 
tain degree,  permanent,  there  is,  at  least,  an  aggrava- 
tion or  extension  of  it,  about  the  usual  periods  of  its 
return.  In  other  cases,  the  disease,  at  the  vernal  re- 
turns, differs  much  as  to  its  extent,  and  also  with  re- 
spect to  the  violence  of  the  preceding  symptoms.  The 
eruption  is,  indeed,  often  confined  to  a single  scaly 
patch,  red,  itching,  and  chapped,  of  a moderate  size, 
but  irregularly  circumscribed.  This  solitary  patch  is 
sometimes  situated  on  the  temple,  or  upper  part  of  the 
cheek,  frequently  on  the  breast,  the  calf  of  the  leg, 
about  the  wrist,  or  within  and  a little  below  the  elbow 
joint,  but  especially  at  the  lower  part  of  the  thigh,  be1- 
hind.  It  continues  in  any  of  these  situations  several 
months,  without  much  observable  alteration.  The 
complaint,  denominated  with  us  the  bakers’  itch,  is  an 
appearance  of  psoriasis  diffusa  on  the  back  of  the 
hand,  commencing  with  one  or  two  small,  rough,  scaly 
patches,  and  finally  extending  from  the  knuckles  to  the 
wrist.  The  rhagades,  or  chaps,  and  fissures  of  the 
skin,  are  numerous  about  the  knuckles  and  ball  of  the 
thumb,  and  where  the  back  of  the  hand  joins  the  wrist. 
They  are  often  highly  inflamed,  and  painful,  but  have 
no  discharge  of  fluid  from  them.  The  back  of  the  hand 
is  a little  raised  or  tumefied,  and,  at  an  advanced 
period  of  the  disorder,  exhibits  a reddish,  glossy  surface, 
without  crusts  or  numerous  scales.  However,  the 
deep  furrows  of  the  cuticle  are,  for  the  most  part, 
whitened  by  a slight  scaliness.  This  complaint  is  not 
general  among  bakers ; that  it  is  only  aggravated  by 
their  business,  and  affects  those  who  are  otherwise 
disposed  to  it,  may  be  collected  from  the  following  cir- 
cumstances: 1.  It  disappears  about  midsummer,  and 
returns  in  the  cold  weather  at  the  beginning  of  the 
year ; 2.  Persons  constantly  engaged  in  the  business, 
after  having  been  once  affected  with  the  eruption, 
sometimes  enjoy  a respite  from  it  for  two  or  three 
years ; 3.  When  the  business  is  discontinued,  the  com- 
plaint does  not  immediately  cease.  The  grocers’  itch 
has  some  affinity  with  the  bakers’  itch,  or  letter ; but, 
being  usually  a pustular  disease  at  its  commencement, 
it  properly  belongs  to  another  genus.  W asher- women, 
probably  from  the  irritation  of  soap,  are  liable  to  be  af- 
fected with  a similar  scaly  disease  on  tire  hands,  and 
arms,  sometimes  on  the  face  and  neck,  which,  in  par- 
ticular constitutions,  proves  very  troublesome,  and  of 
long  duration. 

3.  The  Psoriasis  gyrala  is  distributed  in  narrow 
patches  or  stripes,  variously  figured ; some  of  them  are 
nearly  longitudinal ; some  circular,  or  semicircular, 
with  verniform  appendages ; some  are  tortuous,  or  ser- 
pentine; others  like  earth-worms  or  leeches:  the  fur- 
rows of  the  cuticle  being  deeper  than  usual,  make  the 
resemblance  more  striking,  by  giving  to  them  an  annu- 
lated  appearance.  There  is  a separation  of  slight  scales 
from  the  diseased  surface,  but  no  thick  incrustations 
are  formed.  The  uniform  disposition  of  these  patches 
is  singular.  I have  seen  a large  circular  one  situated 
on  each  breast  above  the  papillaj ; and  two  or  three 
others  of  a serpentine  form,  in  analogous  situations 
along  the  sides  of  the  chest.  The  back  is  often  varie- 
gated in  like  manner,  with  convoluted  tetters,  similarly 
arranged  on  each  side  of  the  spine.  They  likewise  ap- 
pear,.in  some  cases,  on  the  arms  and  thighs,  intersect- 
ing each  other  in  various  directions.  A slighter  kind 
of  this  complaint  affects  delicate  young  women  and 
children  in  small  scaly  circles  or  rings,  little  discolour- 
ed ; they  appear  on  the  cheeks,  neck,  or  upjier  part  of 
the  breast,  and  are  mostly  confounded  with  the  herpe- 
tic, or  pustular  ringworm.  The  psoriasis  gyrata  has 
its  remissions  and  returns,  like  the  psoriasis  diffusa  ; U 
also  oxliibits,  in  some  cases,  patches  of  the  latter  dis 


PSO 


PTE 


order  on  the  face,  scalp,  or  extremities,  while  the  trunk 
of  the  body  is  chequered  with  the  singular  figures  above 

described. 

4.  Psoriasis  palmaria.  This  very  obstinate  species 
of  tetter  is  nearly  confined  to  the  palm  of  the  hand.  It 
commences  with  a small,  harsh,  or  scaly  patch,  which 
gradually  spreads  over  the  whole  palm,  and  sometimes 
appears  in  a slight  degree  on  the  inside  of  the  fingers 
and  wrist.  The  surface  feels  rough  from  the  detached 
and  raised  edges  of  the  scaly  laminae;  its  colour  often 
changes  to  brown  or  black,  as  if  dirty  ; yet  the  most 
diligent  washing  produces  no  favourable  effect.  The 
culicular  furrows  are  deep,  and  cleft  at  the  bottom 
longitudinally,  in  various  places,  so  as  to  bleed  on 
stretching  the  fingers.  A sensation  of  heat,  pain,  and 
stiffness  in  the  motions  of  the  hand,  attends  this  com- 
plaint. It  is  worse  in  winter  or  spring,  and  occa- 
sionally disappears  in  autumn  or  summer,  leaving  a 
soft,  dark-red  cuticle ; but  many  persons  are  troubled 
with  it  for  a series  of  years,  experiencing  only  very 
slight  remissions.  Every  return  or  aggravation  of  it  is 
preceded  by  an  increase  of  heat  and  dryness,  with  in- 
tolerable itching.  Shoemakers  have  the  psoriasis  pa- 
maria  locally,  from  the  irritation  of  the  wax  they  so 
constantly  employ.  In  braziers,  tinmen,  silversmiths, 
&c.  the  complaint  seems  to  be  produced  by  handling 
cold  metals.  A long  predisposition  to  it  from  a weak, 
languid,  hectical  state  of  the  constitution,  may  give 
effect  to  different  occasional  causes.  Dr.  Willan  has 
observed  it  in  women  after  lying-in  ; in  some  persons 
it  is  connected  or  alternates  with  arthritic  complaints. 
When  the  palms  of  the  hands  are  affected  as  above 
stated,  a similar  appearance  often  takes  place  on  the 
soles  of  the  feet ; but  with  the  exception  of  rhagades  or 
fissures,  which  seem  less  liable  to  form  there,  the  feet 
being  usually  kept  warm  and  covered.  Sometimes, 
also,  the  psoriasis  palmaria  is  attended  with  a thickness 
of  the  praeputium,  with  scaliness  and  painful  cracks. 
These  symptoms  at  last  produce  a phimosis,  and  ren- 
der connubial  intercourse  difficult  or  impracticable ; 
so  great,  in  some  cases,  is  the  obstinacy  of  them,  that 
remedies  are  of  no  avail,  and  the  patient  can  only  be 
relieved  by  circumcision.  This  affection  of  the  pra?pu- 
tium  is  not  exactly  similar  to  any  venereal  appearance ; 
but  rhagades  or  fissures,  and  indurated  patches  within 
the  palm  of  the  hand,  take  place  in  syphilis,  and  some- 
what resemble  the  psoriasis  palmaria.  The  venereal 
patches  are,  however,  distinct,  white,  and  elevated, 
having  nearly  the  consistence  of  a soft  corn.  From  the 
rhagades  there  is  a slight  discharge,  very  offensive  to 
the  smell.  The  soles  of  the  feet  are  likewise,  in  this 
case,  affected  with  the  patches,  not  with  rhagades. 
When  the  disease  yields  to  the  operation  of  mercury, 
the  indurated  portions  of  cuticle  separate,  and  a smooth 
new  cuticle  is  found  formed  underneath.  The  fingers 
and  toes  are  not  affected  with  the  patches,  &c.  in 
venereal  cases. 

5.  Psoriasis  labialis.  The  psoriasis  sometimes  af- 
fects the  lip  without  appearing  on  any  other  part  of  the 
body.  Its  characteristics  are,  as  usual,  scaliness,  in- 
termixed with  chaps  and  fissures  of  the  skin.  The 
scales  are  of  a considerable  magnitude,  so  that  their 
edges  are  often  loose,  while  the  central  points  are 
attached;  anew  cuticle  gradually  forms  beneath  the 
scales,  but  is  not  durable.  In  the  course  of  a few 
hours  it  becomes  dry,  shrivelled,  and  broken ; and, 
while  it  exfoliates,  gives  way  to  another  layer  of  tender 
cuticle,  which  soon,  in  like  manner,  perishes.  These 
appearances  should  be  distinguished  from  the  light 
chaps  and  roughness  of  the  lips  produced  by  very 
cold  or  frosty  weather,  but  easily  removed.  The 
psoriasis  labialis  may  be  a little  aggravated  by  frost  or 
sharp  winds,  yet  it  receives  no  material  alleviation  from 
an  opposite  temperature.  It  is  not,  indeed,  confined 
within  any  certain  limit,  or  period  of  duration,  having, 
in  several  instances,  been  protracted  through  all  the 
seasons.  The  under  lip  is  always  more  affected  than 
the  upper;  and  the  disease  takes  place  more  especially 
in  those  persons  whose  lips  are  full  and  prominent. 

6.  Psoriasis  ecrotalis.  The  skin  of  the  scrotum 
may  be  affected  in  the  psoriasis  diffusa  like  other  parts 
of  the  surface  of  the  body ; but  sometimes  a roughness 
and  scaliness  of  the  scrotum  appears  as  an  independent 
complaint,  attended  with  much  heat,  itching,  tension, 
and  redness.  The  above  symptoms  are  succeeded  by 
a hard,  thickened,  brittle  texture  of  the  skin,  and  by 
painful  chaps  or  excoriations,  which  are  not  easily  to 


be  healed.  This  complaint  is  sometimes  produced 
under  the  same  circumstances  as  the  prurigo  scroti, 
and  appears  to  be  in  some  cases  a sequel  of  it.  A 
species  of  the  psoriasis  scrotalis  likewise  occurs  in  the 
lues  venerea,  but  merits  no  particular  attention,  being 
always  combined  with  other  secondary  symptoms  of 
the  disease. 

7.  Psoriasis  infantilis.  Infants  between  the  ages 
of  two  months  and  two  years,  are  occasionally  subject 
to  the  dry  tetter.  Irregular  scaly  patches,  of  various 
sizes  appear  on  the  cheeks,  chin,  breast,  back,  nates, 
and  thighs.  They  are  sometimes  red,  and  a little  rough 
or  elevated ; sometimes  excoriated,  then  again  covered 
with  a thin  incrustation ; and,  lastly,  intersected  by 
chaps  or  fissures.  The  general  appearances  nearly  coin- 
cide with  those  of  the  psoriasis  diffusa:  but  there  are 
several  peculiarities  in  the  tetters  of  infants,  which 
require  a distinct  consideration. 

8.  The  Psoriasis  inveterata  is  characterized  by  an 
almost  universal  scaliness,  with  a harsh,  dry,  and 
thickened  state  of  the  skin.  It  commences  from  a few 
irregular,  though  distinct  patches  on  the  extremities. 
Others  appear  afterward  on  different  parts,  and,  be- 
coming confluent,  spread  at  length  over  all  the  surface 
of  the  body,  except  a part  of  the  face,  or  sometimes  the 
palms  of  the  hands,  and  soles  of  the  feet.  The  skin  is 
red,  deeply  furrowed,  or  wrinkled,  stiff  and  rigid,  so  as 
somewhat  to  impede  the  motion  of  the  muscles,  and 
of  the  joints.  So  quick,  likewise,  is  the  production 
and  separation  of  scales,  that  large  quantities  of  them 
are  found  in  the  bed  on  which  a person  affected  with 
the  disease  has  slept.  They  fall  off  in  the  same  pro- 
portion by  day,  and  being  confined  within  the  linen, 
excite  a troublesome  and  perpetual  itching. 

Pso'rica.  (From  rpojpa,  the  itch.)  Medicines  to 
cure  the  itch. 

PSOROPHTHA'LMIA.  (From  rptopa,  the  itch,  and 
ofyOcAaosi  an  eye.)  An  inflammation  of  the  eyelids, 
attended  with  ulcerations,  which  itch  very  much.  By 
psorophthalmy,  Mr.  Ware  means  a case  in  which  the 
inflammation  of  the  eyelids  is  attended  with  an  ulcera- 
tion of  their  edges,  upon  which  a glutinous  matter 
lodges,  and  becomes  hard,  so  that  in  sleep,  when  they 
have  been  long  in  contact,  they  become  so  adherent, 
that  they  cannot  be  separated  without  pain.  The 
proximate  cause  is  an  acrimony  deposited  in  the  glands 
of  the  eyelids.  The  species  of  the  psorophthalmia  are, 

1.  Psorophthalmia  crustosa,  which  forms  dry  or  hu- 
mid crusts  in  the  margins  of  the  eyelids. 

2.  Psorophthalmia  herpetica,  in  which  small  papula?, 
itching  extremely,  and  terminating  in  scurf,  are  ob- 
served. 

Psychago'gxca.  (From  ipvxn,  the  mind,  and  ay o>, 
to  move.)  Medicines  which  recover  in  syncope  or 
apoplexy. 

PS Y CHO'TROPHUM.  (From  rpvXos,  cold:  be- 

cause it  grows  in  cold  places.  A name  altered  by  Lin- 
naeus from  the  Psychotrophum  of  Browne,  which 
alludes  to  the  shady  place  of  growth  of  most  of  the 
species.  Vvxorpuipov  is  an  ancient  name  for  an  herb- 
loving  shade.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Jilono- 
gynia. 

Psy chotria  emktica.  See  Callicocca  ipecacuanha. 

Psycho'trophum.  (From  ipvXos,  cold,  and  rpcipw, 
to  nourish : so  called  because  it  grows  in  places  ex- 
posed to  the  cold.)  The  herb  betony.  See  Beto idea 
officinalis. 

Psychrolu'trum.  (From  xpvxos,  cold,  and  Xovui. 
to  wash.)  A cold  bath. 

Psy'chtica.  (From  t0  refrigerate.)  Refri- 

gerating medicines. 

PSYDRA'CIA.  (From  t/njxoff>  cold.)  Red  and 
somewhat  elevated  spots,  which  soon  form  broad  and 
superficial  vesicles,  such  as  those  produced  by  the 
stinging-nettle,  the  bites  of  insects,  &c.  See  Pustule. 

PSYLLI  UM.  (From  xpvXXos,  a flea:  so  called  be- 
cause it  was  thought  to  destroy  fleas.)  See  Plantago 
psyllium. 

PTARMICA.  (From  irraipu),  to  sneeze : so  called 
because  it  irritates  the  nose,  and  provokes  sneezing.) 
Sneezewort.  See  Achillcea  ptarmica. 

PTE'RIS.  (From  xrepov , a wing:  so  called  from 
the  likeness  of  its  leaves  to  wings.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linneean  system.  Class,  Cryp 
logamia;  Order,  Pilices. 

Pterib  aquilina.  The  systematic  name  of  the 

217 


PTE 


PUB 


common  Giake,  or  female  fern.  Filix  fazmina.  The 
plant  which  is  thus  called,  in  the  pharmacopoeias,  is 
not  the  Polypodium  filix  fazmina , but  the  Ptcns — fr  on- 
dibus  supradecompositis,  foliolis  pinnatis,  pinnis 
lanceolatis,  infimis , pinnat/fidis,  superioribus  minori- 
bus , of  Linnseus.  The  root  is  esteemed  as  an  anthel- 
mintic, and  is  supposed  to  be  as  efficacious  in  destroy- 
ing the  tapeworm  as  the  root  of  the  male  fern. 

PTEROCA'RPUS.  (From  vsjepov,  a wing,  and 
/capnos,  fruit.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnsean  system. 

Pterocarpus  santalinus.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  red  saunders-tree.  Santalum  rubrum.  There 
is  some  reason  to  believe  that  several  red  woods,  capa- 
ble of  communicating  this  colour  to  spirituous  liquors, 
are  sold  as  red  saunders ; but  the  true  officinal  kind 
appears,  on  the  best  authority,  to  be  of  this  tree,  which 
is  extremely  hard,  of  a bright  garnet-red  colour,  and 
bears  a fine  polish.  It  is  only  the  inner  substance 
of  the  wood  that  is  used  as  a colouring  matter,  and  the 
more  florid  red  is  mostly  esteemed.  On  being  cut,  it 
is  said  to  manifest  a fragrant  odour,  which  is  more 
especially  observed  in  old  trees.  According  to  Lewis, 
this  wood  is  of  a dull  red,  almost  blackish  colour  on 
the  outside,  and  a deep  brighter  red  within  ; its  fibres 
are  now  and  then  curled,  as  in  knots.  It  has  no  mani- 
fest smell,  and  little  or  no.  taste;  even  of  extracts 
made  from  it  with  water,  or  with  spirit,  the  taste  is 
not  considerable. 

To  watery  liquors,  it  communicates  only  a yellowish 
tinge,  but  to  rectified  spirit  a fine  deep  red.  A small 
quantity  of  an  extract,  made  with  this  menstruum, 
tinges  a large  one  of  fresh  spirit  of  the  same  colour ; 
though  it  does  not,  like  most  other  resinous  bodies,  dis- 
solve in  expressed  oils.  Of  distilled  oils,  there  are 
some,  as  that  of  lavender,  which  receive  a red  tincture 
from  the  wood  itself,  and  from  its  resinous  extract,  but 
the  greater  number  do  not.  Red  saunders  has  been 
esteemed  as  a medicine ; but  its  only  use  attaches  to  its 
colouring  property.  The  juice  of  this  tree,  like  that 
of  some  others,  affords  a species  of  sanguis  draconis. 

PTERY'GIUM.  (Ujepvl,  a wing.)  A membra- 
neous excrescence  which  grows  upon  the  internal  can- 
thus  of  the  eye  chiefly,  and  expands  itself  over  the 
albuginea  and  cornea  towards  the  pupil.  It  appears 
to  be  an  extension  or  promulgation  of  the  fibres  and 
vessels  of  the  caruncula  lachrymalis,  or  semi-lunar 
membrane,  appearing  like  a wing.  The  species  of 
pterygium  are  four : 

1.  Pterygium  tenue , seu  ungula,  is  a pellucid  pelli- 
cle, thin,  of  a cineritious  colour,  and  unpainful ; grow- 
ing out  from  the  caruncula  lachrymalis,  or  membrana 
semilunaris. 

2.  Pterygium  eras  sum,  scup  annus,  differs  from  the 
ungula  by  its  thickness,  red  colour,  and  fulness  of  the 
red  vessels  on  the  white  of  the  eye,  and  it  stretches 
over  the  cornea  like  fasciculi  of  vessels. 

3.  Pterygium  malignum , is  a pannus  of  various  co- 
lours, painful,  and  arising  from  a cancerous  acrimony. 

4.  Pterygium  pingue,  seu  pinguicula,  is  a molecule 
like  lard  or  fat,  soft,  without  pain,  and  of  a light  yel- 
low colour,  which  commonly  is  situated  in  the  external 
angle  of  the  eye,  and  rarely  extends  to  the  cornea ; but 
often  remaips  through  life. 

PTERYGO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  be- 
long to  muscles  which  are  connected  with  the  ptery- 
goid process  of  the  sphenoid  bone  ; as  pterygo-pharyn- 
geus , &c. 

Pterygo-pharyngeus.  See  Constrictor  pharyngis 
superior. 

Pterygo-staphilinus  externus.  See  Levator 
palati. 

PTERYGOID.  (Ptcriygoides  ; from  n'Jepv\,  a wing, 
and  ei5os,  resemblance.)  Resembling  the  wing  of  a 
bird. 

Pterygoid  process.  A wing-like  process  of  the 
sphenoid  bone. 

Pterygoide'um  os.  See  Ethmoid  bone. 

Pterygoideus  externus.  ( Pterygoideus , from 

its  belonging  to  the  processus  pterygoides.)  Pterygoi- 
deus minor , of  Winslow.  Pterygo-colli-maxillaire , 
of  Dumas.  Musculus  alaris  externus.  A muscle 
placed,  as  it  were,  horizontally  along  the  basis  of  the 
skull,  between  the  pterygoid  process  and  the  condyle 
of  the  lower  jaw.  It  usually  arises  by  two  distinct 
heads ; one  of  which  is  thick,  tendinous,  and  fleshy, 
♦tom  the  outer  wing  of  the  pterygoid  process  of  the  os 


sphenoides,  and  from  a small  part  of  the  os  maxillare 
adjoining  to  it ; the  other  is  thin  and  fleshy,  from  a 
ridge  in  the  temporal  process  of  the  sphenoid  bone,  just 
behind  the  slit  that  transmits  the  vessels  to  the  eye. 
Sometimes  this  latter  origin  is  wanting,  and,  in  that 
case,  part  of  the  temporal  muscle  arises  from  this 
ridge.  Now  and  then  it  affords  a common  origin  to 
both  these  muscles.  From  these  origins  the  muscle 
forms  a strong,  fleshy  belly,  which  descends  almost 
transversely  outwards  and  backwards,  and  is  inserted, 
tendinous  and  fleshy,  into,  a depression  in  the  forepart 
of  the.f  ondyloid  process  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  into  the 
anterior  surface  of  the  capsular  ligament  that  sur- 
rounds the  articulation  of  that  bone.  All  that  part  of 
this  muscle,  which  is  not  hid  by  the  pterygoideus  in- 
ternus,  is  covered  by  a ligamentous  expansion,  which 
is  broader  than  that  belonging  to  the  pterygoideus 
intemus,  and  originates  from  the  inner  edge  of  the 
glenoid  cavity  of  the  lower  jaw,  immediately  before 
the  styloid  process  of  the  temporal  bone,  and  extends 
obliquely  downwards,  forwards,  and  outwards,  to  the 
inner  surface  of  the  angle  of  the  jaw.  When  these 
muscles  act  together,  they  bring  the  jaw  horizontally 
forwards.  When  they  act  singly,  the  jaw  is  moved 
forwards,  and  to  the  opposite  side.'  The  fibres  that 
are  inserted  into  the  capsular  ligament,  serve  likewise 
to  bring  the  moveable  cartilage  forwards. 

Pterygoideus  internus.  Pterygoideus  major , 
of  Winslow.  Pterygo-anguli-maxillaire , of  Dumas. 
This  muscle  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  whole 
inner  surface  of  the  external  ala  of  the  pterygoid  pro- 
cess, filling  all  the  space  between  the  two  wings ; and 
from  that  process  of  the  os  palati  that  makes  part  of 
the  pterygoid  fossa.  From  thence,  growing  larger,  it 
descends  obliquely  downwards,  forwards,  and  out- 
wards, and  is  inserted,  by  tendinous  and  fleshy  fibres, 
into  the  inside  of  the  lower  jaw,  near  its  angle.  This 
muscle  covers  a great  part  of  the  pterygoideus  exter- 
nus ; and  along  its  posterior  edge  we  observe  a liga- 
mentous band,  which  extends  from  the  back  part  of 
the  styloid  process  to  the  bottom  of  the  angle  of  the 
lower  jaw.  The  use  of  this  muscle  is  to  raise  the 
lower  jaw,  and  to  pull  it  a little  to  one  side. 

Pterygoideus  major.  See  Pterygoideus  internus. 

Pterygoideus  minor.  See  Pterygoideus  externus. 

PTILO'SIS.  (From  njihos,  bald.)  See  Madarosis. 

PTI'SANA.  (From  nuaao),  to  decorticate,  bruise, 
or  pound.)  Ptissana.  1.  Barley  deprived  of  its  husks, 
pounded,  and  made  into  balls. 

2.  A drink  is  so  called  by  the  French,  made  mostly 
of  farinaceous  substances ; as  barley,  rice,  grits,  and 
the  like,  boiled  with  water,  and  sweetened  to  the 
palate. 

PTO'SIS.  (From  nin'Jw,  to  fall.)  Blcpharoptosis 
An  inability  of  raising  the  upper  eyelid.  The  affec- 
tion may  be  owing  to  several  causes,  the  chief  of 
which  are  a redundance  of  the  skin  on  the  eyelid  ; ? 
paralytic  state  of  the  levator  muscle,  and  a spasm  of 
the  orbicularis. 

Ptosis  iridis.  Prolapsus  iridis.  A prolapsus  of 
the 'iris  through  a wound  of  the  cornea.  It  is  known 
by  a blackish  tubercle,  which  projects  a little  from  the 
cornea  in  various  forms.  The  species  of  the  ptosis  of 
the  iris  are, 

1.  Ptosis  recens , or  a recent  ptosis  from  a side  wound 
of  the  cornea,  as  that  which  happens,  though  rarely, 
in  or  after  the  extraction  of  the  cataract. 

2.  Ptosis  inveterata,  in  which  the  incarcerated  pro 
lapsed  iris  is  grown  or  attached  to  the  wound  or  ulcer, 
and  has  become  callous  or  indurated. 

PTYALAGO'GUE.  (From  n'Jva’hov,  spittle,  ahd 
ayw,  to  excite.)  Medicines  which  promote  a discharge 
of  the  saliva,  or  cause  salivation. 

PTYALI'SMOS.  See  Ptyalismus. 

PTYALI'SMUS.  (From  njva\i^u,  to  spit.)  A 
ptyalism  or  salivation,  or  increased  secretion  of  6aliva 
from  the  mouth. 

PTY'ALUM.  (From  n'Jvo),  to  spit  up.)  - The  saliva 
or  mucus  from  the  bronchia.  . 

Ptyasmago'ga.  (From  n'Jvaarpa,  sputum,  and  ayo>, 
to  expel.)  Medicines  which  promote  the  secretion  of 
saliva. 

PU'BES.  1.  The  external  part  of  the  organs  of 
generation  of  both  sexes,  which  after  puberty  is  covered 
with  hair. 

2 The  down  or  pubescence  on  leaves,  seeds,  Set  of 
some  plants. 


PUL 


PUL 


Pubes  sbminis.  See  Pappus. 

PUBESCENCE.  Pubescentia.  Under  this  term  is 
Included  nil  kinds  of  down,  hairs,  and  bristle-like  bo- 
dies found  on  the  surface  of  the  leaves,  stems,  pods, 
&c.  of  plants.  They  differ  considerably  in  form  and 
texture,  but  consist  of  small,  slender  bodies,  which  are 
either  soft  and  yielding  to  the  slightest  impression,  or 
rigid  and  comparatively  unyielding:  the  former  are, 
properly  speaking,  pili,  or  hairs ; the  latter  bristles, 
seta ; and,  therefore,  under  these  two  heads  every 
kind  of  pubescence  may  be  arranged.  See  Pilus  and 
Seta. 

PUBESCENS.  Pubescent:  applied  to  the  stigma 
of  the  genus  Vida. 

Pubis  os.  A separate  bone  of  the  foetal  pelvis.  See 
Innominatum  os. 

, PUDE'NDUM.  (From  pudor,  shame.)  The  parts 
of  generation. 

PUDENDA'GRA.  (From  pudenda , the  private 
parts,  and  aypa,  a seizure.)  Cedma.  The  venereal  dis- 
ease has  been  so  named  by  some.  A pain  in  the  private 
parts. 

Pudendum  muliebre.  The  female  parts  of  gene- 
ration. 

PUDI'CAL.  (Pudicus ; from  pudor,  shame.)  Be- 
longing to  the  pudenda. 

PUdical  artery.  Artena  pudica.  Pudendal  ar- 
tery. A branch  of  the  internal  iliac  distributed  on  the 
organs  of  generation. 

Pueri'lis  morbus.  The  epilepsy. 

PUERPERAL.  Puerperalis.  Appertaining  to 
child-bearing ; as  puerperal  convulsions,  fever,  See. 

PUFFBALL.  See  Lycoperdon. 

PUGI'LLUS.  (From  pugnus,  the  fist.)  Dragmis. 
A pugil,  or  handful. 

PULE'GIUM.  (From  pulex , a flea;  because  the 
smell  of  its  leaves,  burned,  destroys  fleas.)  See  Mentha 
pulegium. 

Pulegium  cervinum.  Hart’s  pennyroyal.  The 
Mentha  cervina , of  Linnaeus. 

PULICA'RIA.  (From  pulex , a flea : so  named  be- 
cause it  was  thought  to  destroy  fleas  if  hung  in  a 
chamber.)  See  Plantago  psyllium. 

* PU'LMO.  ( Pulmo , onio  m.  Plin.  nvevpwv-  Attice 
ttXcv/xwv,  unde,  per  metathesin  pulmo.)  The  lung. 
See  Lung. 

PULMONA'RIA.  (From pulmo,  the  lung ; so  called 
because  of  its  virtues  in  affections  of  the  lungs.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  Lungwort. 

Pulmonaria  arborea.  See  Lichen  pulmonarius. 

Pulmonaria  maculata.  See  Pulmonaria  offici- 
nalis. 

Pulmonaria  officinalis.  The  systematic  name 
Qf  the  spotted  lungwort.  Pulmonaria  maculata ; 
Symphitum  maculosum.  Jerusalem  cowslips ; Jerusa- 
lem sage.  This  plant  is  rarely  found  to  grow  wild  in 
England  ; but  is  very  commonly  cultivated  in  gardens, 
where  its  leaves  become  broader,  and  approach  more 
to  a cordate  shape.  The  leaves,  which  are  the  part 
medicinally  used,  have  no  peculiar  smell ; but,  in  their 
recent  state,  manifest  a slightly  adstringent  and  muci- 
laginous taste:  hence  it  seems  not  wholly  without 
foundation  tffat  they  have  been  supposed  to  be  demul- 
cent and  pectoral.  They  have  been  recommended  in 
haemoptoes,  tickling  coughs,  and  catarrhal  defluxions 
upon  the  lungs.  The  name  pulmonaria,  however, 
seems  to  have  arisen  rather  from  the  speckled  appear- 
ance of  these  leaves  resembling  that  of  the  lungs,  than 
from  any  intrinsic  quality  which  experience  discovered 
to  be  useful  in  pulmonary  complaints. 

PULMONARY.  Pulmonaris.  Belonging  to  the 
lungs. 

Pulmonary  artery.  The  pulmonary  artery,  ar- 
teria  pulmonalis,  arises  from  the  right  ventricle  of  the 
heart,  and  soon  divides  into  the  right  and  left,  which 
ramify  throughout  the  lungs,  and  form  a beautiful  net- 
work on  the  air  vesicles,  where  they  terminate  in  the 
veins,  venapulmonales,  whose  branches  at  length  form 
four  trunks,  which  empty  themselves  into  the  left  au- 
ricle of  the  heart. 

Pulmonary  consumption.  See  Phthisis. 

Pulmonary  vein.  See  Pulmonary  artery. 

Pulmo'nica.  (From  pulmo,  the  lungs.)  Medicines 
for  the  lungs. 

PULMONI'TIS.  (From  pulmo,  the  lungs.)  An  in- 
flammation of  the  lungs. 


Pulsati'lla  nigricans.  (From  pulso,  to  beat 
about : so  called  from  its  being  perpetually  agitated 
by  the  air.)  See  Anemone pratensis. 

PULSE.  Pulsus.  The  beating  of  the  heart  and 
arteries.  The  pulse  is  generally  felt  at  the  wrist,  by 
pressing  the  radial  artery  with  the  fingers.  The  action 
depends  upon  the  impulse  given  to  the  blood  by  the 
heart ; hence  physicians  feel  the  pulse,  to  ascertain  the 
quickness  or  tardiness  of  the  blood’s  motion,  the 
strength  of  the  heart,  &c.  See  Circulation. 

PULSILE'GIUM.  (From  pulsus,  the  pulse,  and 
lego,  to  tell.)  An  instrument  for  measuring  the  pulse. 

Pulvi'nar.  (From  pulvis,  dust  or  chaff",  with  which 
they  are  filled.)  A medicated  cushion. 

Pulvina'rium.  See  Pulvinar. 

PU'LVIS.  (• Pulvis , veris.  m.)  A powder.  Pulvi- 
narium.  This  form  of  medicine  is  either  coarse  or 
very  fine,  simple  or  compound.  In  the  compounded 
powders,  the  intimate  and  complete  admixture  of  the 
several  ingredients,  and  more  especially  in  those  to 
which  any  of  the  more  active  substances,  as  opium, 
scammony,  &c.  are  added,  cannot  be  too  strongly  re- 
commended, and  for  this  purpose  it  may  be  proper  to 
pass  them,  after  they  are  mixed  mechanically,  through 
a fine  sieve. 

Pulvis  aloes  compositus.  Compound  powder  of 
aloes.  Formerly  called  pulvis  aloes  cum  guaiaco. 
j Take  of  extract  of  spiked  aloe,  an  ounce  and  a half ; 
guaiacum  resin,  an  ounce  ; compound  powder  of  cinna- 
mon, half  an  ounce.  Powder  the  extract  of  aloe  and 
guaiacum  resin  separately ; then  mix  them  with  the 
compound  powder  of  cinnamon.  The  dose  [is  from 
gr.  x.  to  3j.  It  is  a warm,  aperient,  laxative  powder, 
calculated  for  the  aged,  and  those  affected  with  dys- 
peptic gout  attended  with  costiveness  and  spasmodic 
complaints  of  the  stomach  and  bowels. 

Pulvis  aloes  cum  canella.  A cathartic,  deob- 
stiuent  powder,  possessing  stimulating  and  alofitic  pro- 
perties omitted  in  the  last  London  Pharmacopoeia,  as 
rather  suited  to  the  purpose  of  extemporaneous  pre- 
scription. 

Pulvis  aloes  cum  ferro.  This  possesses  aperient 
and  deobstruent  virtues;  and  is  mostly  given  in  chlo- 
rosis and  constipation.  In  the  London  Pharmacopoeia 
this  prescription  is  omitted  for  the  same  reason  as  pul- 
vis aloes  cum  canella. 

Pulvis  aloes  cum  guaiaco.  See  Pulvis  aloes  com- 
joositus. 

Pulvis  antimonialis.  See  Antimonialis  pulvis. 

Pulvis  aromaticus.  See  Pulvis  cinnamomi  com- 
positus. 

Pulvis  ceruss®  compositus.  This  is  mostly  used 
in  the  form  of  collyrium,  lotion,  or  injection,  as  a mu- 
cilaginous sedative. 

Pulvis  chelarum  cancri  compositus.  An  anta- 
cid and  adstringent  powder,  mostly  given  to  children 
with  diarrhoea  and  acidity  of  the  prim®  vi®. 

Pulvis  cinnamomi  compositus.  Compound  pow- 
der of  cinnamon.  Formerly  called  pulvis  aromaticus  : 
species  aromatica:  species  diambree  sine  odoratis. 
Take  of  common  cinnamon  bark,  two  ounces ; carda- 
mom-seeds, an  ounce  and  a half ; ginger-root,  an  ounce ; 
long  pepper,  half  an  ounce.  Rub  them  together,  so 
as  to  make  a very  fine  powder.  The  dose  is  from  five 
to  ten  grains.  An  elegant  stimulant,  carminative,  and 
stomachic  powder. 

Pulvis  cobbii.  Pulvis  tunguinensis.  This  once 
celebrated  powder  consists  of  sixteen  grains  of  musk, 
and  forty-eight  grains  of  cinnabar.  It  is  directed  to  be 
mixed  in  a gill  of  arrack. 

Pulvis  contrajerv®  compositus.  Take  of  con- 
trajerva  root  powdered,  five  ounces ; prepared  shells,  a 
pound  and  a half.  Mix.  A febrifuge  diaphoretic,  mostly 
given  in  the  dose  of  from  one  tp  two  scruples ;in  slight 
febrile  affections. 

Pulvis  cornu  usti  cum  opio.  Powder  of  burnt 
hartshorn  with  opium.  Pulvis  opiatus.  Take  of  hard 
opium,  powdered,  a drachm ; hartshorn,  burned  and 
prepared,  an  ounce : cochineal,  powdered,  a drachm. 
Mix.  This  preparation  affords  a convenient  mode  of 
exhibiting  small  quantities  of  opium,  ten  grains  con- 
taining one  of  the  opium.  It  is  absorbent  and  ano- 
dyne. 

Pulvis  cret®  compositus.  Compound  powder  of 
chalk.  Pulvis  e bolo  compositus  spine  opio.  Species 
e scordio  sine  opio.  Diascordium , 1720.  Take  of  pre- 
pared chalk,  half  a pound;  cinnamon  bark,  four 

210 


PUL 


PUL 


ounces:  tormentil  root,  acacia  gum,  of  each  tiiree 
ounces:  long  pepper,  half  an  ounce.  Reduce  them 
separately  into  a very  line  powder  and  then  mix.  The 
dose  is  from  3 ss.  to  3 i.  An  astringent,  carminative, 
and  stomachic  powder,  exhibited  in,  the  cure  of  diar- 
rhoea, pyrosis,  and  diseases  arising  from  acidity  of  the 
bowels,  inducing  much  pain. 

Pulvis  creta  compositus  cum  opio.  Compound 
powder  of  chalk  with  opium.  Pulvis  e bolo  composi- 
tus cum,  opio.  Species  e cordio  cum  opio.  Take  of 
compound  powder  of  chalk,  six  ounces  and  a half. 
Hard  opium,  powdered,  four  scruples.  Mix.  The 
dose  from  one  scruple  to  two.  The  above  powder, 
with  the  addition  of  opium,  in  the  proportion  of  one 
grain  to  two  scruples. 

Pulvis  ipecacuanha  compositus.  Compound  pow- 
der of  ipecacuanha.  Take  of  ipecacuanha  root,  pow- 
dered, hard  opium  powdered,  of  each  a drachm;  sul- 
phate of  potassa,  powdered,  an  ounce.  Mix.  A dia- 
phoretic powder,  similar  to  that  of  Dr.  Dover,  which 
gained  such  repute  in  the  cure  of  rheumatisms,  and 
other  diseases  arising  from  obstructed  perspiration  and 
spasm.  The  dose  is  from  five  grains  to  a scruple. 

Pulvis  kinq  compositus.  Compound  powder  of 
kino.  Take  of  kino  15  drachms ; cinnamon  bark,  half 
an  ounce  ; hard  opium,  a drachm.  Reduce  them  sepa- 
rately to  a very  fine  powder ; and  then  mix.  The  pro- 
portion of  opium  this  astringent  contains  is  one  part 
to  twenty.  The  dose  is  from  five  grains  to  a scruple. 

Pulvis  myrrha  compositus.  A stimulant,  anti- 
spasmodic,  and  emmenagogue  powder,  mostly  exhi- 
bited in  the  dose  of  from  fifteen  grains  to  two  scruples, 
in  uterine  obstructions  and  hysterical  affections. 

Pulvis  opiatus.  See  Pulvis  cornu  usti  cum  opio. 

Pulvis  scammonea  compositus.  Compound  pow- 
der of  scammony.  Pulvis  comitis  Warwicensis. 
Take  of  scammony  gum  resin,  hard  extract  of  jalap, 
of  each  two  ounces;  ginger-root,  half  an  ounce.  Re- 
duce them  separately  to  a very  fine  powder,  and  then 
mix.  From  ten  to  fifteen  grains  or  a scruple  are  exhi- 
bited as  a stimulating  cathartic. 

Pulvis  scammonii  cum  aloe.  A stimulating  cathar- 
tic, in  the  dose  of  from  ten  to  fifteen  grains. 

Pulvis  scammonii  cum  calomelane,  A vermi- 
fugal cathartic,  in  the  dose  of  from  ten  to  fifteen 
grains. 

Pulvis  senna  compositus.  Compound  powder  of 
senna.  Pulvis  diasenncc.  Take  of  senna  leaves,  su- 
pertartrate of  potassa,  of  each  two  ounces ; scammony 
gum  resin,  half  an  ounce;  ginger-root,  two  drachms. 
Reduce  the  scammony  gum  resin  separately,  the  rest 
together,  to  a very  fine  powder  ; and  then  mix.  The 
dose  is  from  one  scruple  to  one  drachm.  A saline  sti- 
mulating eathartic. 

Pulvis  tragacantha  compositus.  Compound  pow- 
der of  tragacanth.  Species  diatragacanthce  frig- idee. 
Take  of  tragacanth  powdered,  acacia  gum  powdered, 
starch,  of  each  an  ounce  and  a half,  refined  sugar  three 
ounces.  Powder  the  starch  and  sugar  together  ; then 
add  the  tragacanth  and  acacia  gum,  and  mix  the  whole. 
Tragacanth  is  very  difficultly  reduced  to  powder.  The 
dose  is  from  ten  grains  to  a drachm.  A very  useful 
demulcent  powder,  which  may  be  given  in  coughs,  diar- 
rhoeas, strangury,  &c. 

[Pulvis  parturiens.  In  a letter  from  Dr.  John 
Stearns,  of  Saratoga  county,  to  Dr.  S.  Akerly,  dated 
Waterford,  January  25th,  1807,  is  the  following  nar- 
ration : — 

“ In  compliance  with  your  request,  I hereby  trans- 
mit you  a sample  of  the  pulvis  parturiens , which  I 
have  been  in  the  habit  of  using  for  several  years  with 
the  most  complete  success.  It  expedites  lingering  par- 
turition, and  saves  to  the  accoucheur  a considerable 
portion  of  time,  without  producing  any  bad  effects  on 
the  patient.  The  cases  in  which  I have  generally 
found  this  powder  to  be  useful,  are  when  the  pains  are 
lingering,  have  wholly  subsided,  or  are  in  any  way  in- 
competent to  exclude  the  foetus.  Previous  to  its  exhibi- 
tion, it  is  of  the  utmost  consequence  to  ascertain  the 
presentation,  and  whether  any  preternatural  obstruc- 
tion prevents  the  delivery : as  the  violent  and  almost 
incessant  action  which  it  induces  in  the  uterus  pre- 
cludes the  possibility  of  turning.  The  pains  produced 
by  it  are  peculiarly  forcing , though  not  accompanied 
with  that  distress  and  agony  of  which  the  patients  fre- 
quently complain  when  the  action  is  much  less.  My 
method  of  administering  it  is  either  in  decoction  or 


powder.  Boil  half  a drachm  of  the  powder  in  half  a 
pint  of  water,  and  give  one-third  every  twenty  mi- 
nutes, till  the  pains  commence.  In  powder,  1 give 
from  five  to  ten  grains ; some  patients  require  larger 
doses,  though  I have  generally  found  these  sufficient. 

“ If  the  dose  is  large,  it  will  produce  nausea  and 
vomiting.  In  most  cases,  you  will  be  surprised  with 
the  suddenness  of  its  operation ; it  is,  therefore,  neces- 
sary to  be  completely  ready  before  you  give  the  medi- 
cine,.as  the  urgency  of  the  pains  will  allow  you  but  a 
short  time  afterward.  Since  I have  adopted  the  use 
of  this  powder,  I have  seldom  found  a case  that  de- 
tained me  more  than  three  hours.  Other  physicians, 
who  have  administered  it,  concur  with  me  in  the  suc- 
cess of  its  operation. 

“ The  modus  operandi  I feel  incompetent  to  explain. 
At  the  same  time  that  it  augments  the  action  of  the 
uterus,  it  appears  to  relax  the  rigidity  of  the  muscular 
fibres.  May  it  not  produce  the  beneficial  effects  of 
bleeding,  without  inducing  that  extreme  debility  which 
is  always  consequent  upon  copious  depletion?  This 
appears  to  be  corroborated  by  its  nauseating  effects  on 
the  stomach,  and  the  known  sympathy  between  this 
vise  us  and  the  uterus. 

“It  is  a vegetable,  and  appears  to  be  a spurious 
growth  of  rye.  On  examining  a granary,  where  rye 
is  stored,  you  will  be  able  to  procure  a sufficient  quan- 
tity from  among  that  grain.  Rye,  which  grows  in  low, 
wet  ground,  yields  it  in  greatest  abundance.” — New- 
York  Med.  Repos. 

This  substance,  which  Dr.  Stearns  called  pulvis  par- 
turiens, (more  correctly  pulvis  ad  parturandum)  is  the 
ergot,  or  spurred  rye,  or  the  secale  cornutum.  The 
above  notice,  from  the  Med.  Rep.,  was  the  first  publica- 
tion in  the  United  States,  in  relation  to  the  use  of  spur- 
red rye  in  cases  of  parturition.  Since  then,  to  the  present 
time  (1829),  many  trials  have  been  made,  and  many 
cases  reported  of  its  efficacy  in  difficult  labours.  Some 
physicians  have  condemned  its  use,  asoften  proving  fatal 
to  the  life  of  the  child  in  delivery.  Dr.  Bigelow,  of 
Boston,  however,  has  introduced  it  into  his  Materia 
Medica,  and  given  the  following  account  of  its  use. 

“ V arious  species  of  grain  and  grasses  are  subject  to 
a morbid  excrescence  on  some  part  of  the  ear  or  spike, 
to  which  the  French  name  ergot  has  been  applied. 
Rye  is  more  frequently  affected  with  this  appendage 
than  any  other  grain.  Different  conjectures  have  been 
offered  relative  to  the  nature  of  this  excrescence,  the 
most  probable  of  which  is  that  of  Decandolle,  who 
considers  the  ergot  to  be  a parasitic  vegetable,  of  the 
tribe  of  fungi , and  genus  sclerotium. 

“Ergot  resembles  a grain  of  rye,  elongated  to  seve- 
ral times  the  common  length,  of  an  irregular  form,  and 
a dark  colour.  It  has  a light  and  brittle  texture,  and 
an  unpleasant  taste.  According  to  Vauquelin,  it  con- 
tains a pale-yellow  colouring  matter;  an  oily  matter; 
a violet  colouring  matter ; an  acid,  probably  phospho- 
ric ; and  a vegelo-animal  matter. 

“ This  substance  was  formerly  suspected  of  pro- 
ducing certain  epidemic  diseases — the  dry  gangrene, 
and  rapliania.  but  the  suspicion  was  probably  un- 
founded. In  regard  to  its  immediate  effect  on  the  sys- 
tem, the  reports  of  medical  authors  differ  widely,  some 
considering  it  highly  deleterious.  From  my  own  ob- 
servations, I have  found  that  it  produces  nausea  and 
vomiting,  in  doses  of  from  a scruple  to  a drachm  ; that 
it  seldom  operates  upon  the  bowels;  and  that  large 
doses  produce  headache  and  temporary  febrile  symp- 
toms. It  has  very  little  acrimony,  and  does  not  prove 
sternutatory  when  snuffed  up  the  nostrils. 

“ Besides  these  more  general  effects,  ergot  has  a spe- 
cific power  of  stimulating  the  uterus  during  the  pro- 
cess of  parturition,  in  a manner  that  is  not  known  to 
be  produced  by  any  other  medicinal  agent.  This  effect 
is  wholly  unequivocal,  and  cannot  be  confounded  with 
the  common  uterine  efforts.  It  is  moreover  certain,  or 
at  least  its  failures  are  not  more  frequent  than  those  of 
any  of  our  most  common  operative  drugs.  This  ope- 
ration consists  in  a powerful,  incessant,  and  unremit- 
ting contraction  of  the  uterus,  not  alternating  with  in- 
tervals of  ease,  as  in  common  labour,  but  continuing 
without  intermission  until  the  child  is  expelled.  When 
ergot  is  prematurely  or  injudiciously  administered,  the 
child  does  not  breathe  at  birth,  is  difficult  to  resusci- 
tate, and  is  sometimes  irrecoverably  dead.  This  effect 
has  been  attributed  to  a poisonous  quality  in  the  ergot, 
but  is  obviously  the  consequence,  simply,  of  long-con 


PUR 


} UR 


tinued  and  unremitting  pressure  on  the  child,  a fact 
pointed  out  in  the  New- England  Journal,  as  early  as 
1812. 

“ A few  medical  writers,  principally  in  Europe, 
in  consequence,  probably,  of  not  being  furnished 
with  a genuine  article,  in  an  unimpaired  state, 
have  doubted  the  power  of  ergot  to  effect  or  alter  the 
action  of  the  uterus.  But  I may  safely„assert,  that, 
after  fifteen  years,  during  which  this  drug  has  attracted 
notice  among  us,  there  is  scarcely  an  article  of  the  ma- 
teria medica,  upon  the  character  of  which  the  minds 
of  the  profession  in  this  country  are  more  fully  made 
up,  than  upon  this.  Indeed  our  medical  journals,  and 
books  of  materia  medica,  have  teemed  with  evidences 
of  its  activity. 

“ For  obvious  reasons,  ergot  should  never  be  given 
in  natural  and  favourable  cases  of  labour.  It  is 
strongly  contraindicated,  at  all  times,  by  earliness  of 
the  stage,  rigidity  of  the  soft  parts,  any  unfavourable 
conformation,  or  any  presentation  which  requires 
changing.  It  is  admissible  in  lingering  cases  of  chil- 
dren ascertained  to  be  dead,  and  in  lingering  cases  of 
abortion.  It  is  useful  in  retained  placenta;  and,  from 
its  power  of  causing  contraction  of  the  uterus,  it  ar- 
rests flooding  after  delivery.  In  females  habitually 
subject  to  profuse  haemorrhage  at  this  period,  there  is 
perhaps  no  better  preventive  than  a full  dose  of  ergot, 
administered  just  before  delivery.  Its  efficacy  has 
been  repeatedly  attested. 

“ Spurred  rye  has  been  administered  as  an  emmena- 
gogue  with  various  success.  Its  action  on  the  impreg- 
nated uterus  is  much  less  than  it  displays  in  labour; 
yet  the  result  of  many  trials  has  been,  on  the  whole, 
in  favour  of  its  emmenagogue  power. 

“Ergot  is  commonly  given  in  powder,  boiled  or  in- 
fused in  hot  water.  A drachm  may  be  prepared  in  this 
way  for  a puerperal  patient,  and  one  quarter  of  the 
mixture,  while  turbid,  given  every  twenty  minutes,  till 
its  effect  becomes  perceptible.  In  amenorrhcea,  ten  or 
fifteen  grains  may  be  given,  three  times  a day,  and 
increased  if  nausea  does  not  ensue.” — Bigelow's  Ma- 
teria Medica.  A.] 

PUMICE.  A mineral  of  which  there  are  three  spe- 
cies, the  glossy,  common,  and  porphyritic,  found  in  the 
Lipari  islands  and  Hungary. 

PUMPION.  See  Oucurbita. 

PUNCTATUS.  Dotted.  Applied  to  petals  of  the 
Melanthium  capense : receptacle  of  the  Leontodon  ta 
raxacum. 

PU'NCTUM.  A point.  The  opening  or  commence 
ment  of  a duct  of  the  eye  has  received  this  name, 
because  its  projection  gives  it  the  appearance  of  a spot. 

Punctum  aureum.  Formerly,  when  a hernia  of 
the  intestines  was  reduced  by  an  incision  made  through 
the  skin  and  membrana  adiposa,  quite  down  to  the 
upper  part  of  the  spermatic  vessels,  a golden  wire  was 
fixed  and  twisted,  so  as  to  prevent  the  descent  of  any 
thing  down  the  tunica  vaginalis. 

Punctum  lachrimale.  Lachrymal  point.  Two 
small  orifices,  one  of  which  is  conspicuous  in  each  eye- 
lid, at  the  extremity  of  the  tarsus,  near  the  internal  can- 
thus,  are  called  puncta  lachrymalia. 

PU'NICA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

Punxca  granatum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
pomegranate.  Granatum.  Punica — foliis  lunceola- 
tis , caulc  arboreo,  of  Linnaeus.  The  rind  of  the  fruit 
and  the  flowers  called  Balaustine  flowers , are  the 
parts  directed  for  medicinal  use.  In  their  smell  there 
is  nothing  remarkable,  but  to  the  taste  they  are  very 
adstringent,  and  have  successfully  been  employed  as 
such,  in  diseases  both  internal  and  external. 

PUPIL.  ( Pupilla ; from  pupa , a babe : because  it 
reflects  the  diminished  image  of  the  person  who  looks 
upon  it  like  a puppet.)  The  round  opening  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  iris,  in  which  we  see  ourselves  iu  the  eye  of 
another. 

PUPI  LLA.  See.  Pupil. 

PUPILLA'RIS.  Of  or  belonging  to  the  pupil. 

Pupillaris  membrana.  (From  pupilla , the  pupil.) 
See  Membrana  pupillaris. 

Pupim.jE  velum.  See  Membrana  pupillaris. 

PURGAME'NTUM.  A purge. 

PURGATIVE.  Whatever  increases  the  peristaltic 
motion  of  the  bowels,  so  as  to  considerably  increase 
the  alvine  evacuations.  See  Cathartic. 


Purging  flax.  See  Linum  catharlicum 

Purging-nut.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

PURIFORM.  * (Puriformis ; from  pus,  and  forma 
resemblance.)  Like  unto  the  secretion  called  pus. 

PURPURA.  (II opQvpa,  the  name  of  a shell  of  a 
purple  colour : hence  purpura,  a purple  colour.)  An 
efflorescence  consisting  of  small,  distinct,  purple-specks 
and  patches,  attended  with  general  debility,  but  not  al- 
ways with  fever,  which  are  caused  by  an  extravasa- 
tion of  the  vessels  under  the  cuticle.  It  is  divided  into 
the  five  following  species : 

1.  Purpura  simplex.  This  has  the  appearance  of 
petechias,  without  much  disorder  of  the  constitution, 
except  languor,  pain  in  the  limbs,  and  a sallow  com 
plexion.  The  petechias  are  most  numerous  on  the 
breast,  inside  of  the  arms  and  legs,  and  are  of  various 
sizes,  and  commonly  circular.  There  is  no  itching  ox 
other  sensation  attending  the  petechise. 

2.  Purpura  hemorrhagica  is  considerably  more  se- 
vere ; the  petechiae  are  of  larger  size,  and  interspersed 
with  vibices  and  ecchymoses,  resembling  the  marks 
left  by  the  strokes  of  a whip,  or  by  violent  bruises. 
They  appear  first  on  the  legs,  afterward  on.  the  thighs, 
arms,  and  trunk  of  the  body;  the  hands  being  more 
rarely  spotted  with  them,  and  the  face  generally  free. 
They  are  of  a bright  red  colour  when  they  first  appear, 
but  soon  become  purple  or  livid ; and  when  about  to 
disappear  they  change  to  a brown  or  yellowish  hue ; 
the  cuticle  over  them  appears  smooth  and  shining,  but 
is  not  sensibly  elevated ; in  a few  cases,  however,  it 
has  been  seen  raised  into  a sort  of  vesicle,  containing 
black  blood.  This  more  particularly  happens  in  the 
spots  which  appear  on  the  tongue,  gums,  and  palate, 
and  inside  of  the  cheeks  and  lips  where  the  cuticle  is 
extremely  thin ; the  gentlest  pressure  on  the  skin,  even 
feeling  of  the  pulse,  will  often  produce  a purple  blotch, 
like  that  which  is  left  after  a severe  bruise. 

The  same  state  of  habit,  which  gives  rise  to  these 
effusions  under  the  cuticle,  produces  likewise  copious 
discharges  of  blood,  especially  from  the  internal  parts ; 
they  are  often  very  profuse,  and  suddenly  prove  fatal ; 
but  in  other  cases  they  are  less  copious  ; sometimes 
returning  every  day  at  stated  periods,  and  sometimes 
less  frequent,  and  at  regular  intervals ; and  sometimes 
there  is  a slow  and  almost  incessant  oozing  of  blood. 
The  bleeding  occurs  from  the  gums,  nostrils,  throat, 
inside  of  the  cheeks,  tongue,  and  lips,  and  sometimes 
from  the  lining  membrane  of  the  eyelids,  the  urethra, 
and  external  ear ; and  aiso  from  the  internal  cavities 
of  the  lungs,  stomach,  bowels,  uterus,  kidneys,  and 
bladder. 

This  disease  is  often  preceded  by  great  lassitude, 
faintness,  and  pains  in  the  limbs ; but  not  untrequently 
it  appears  suddenly  in  the  midst  of  apparent  good 
health.  It  is  always  accompanied  with  extreme  de- 
bility and  depression  of  spirits ; the  pulse  is  commonly 
feeble,  and  sometimes  quickened ; and  heat,  flushing, 
perspiration,  and  other  symptoms  of  febrile  irritation, 
occasionally  attend.  When  the  disease  has  con- 
tinued for  some  time,  the  patient  becomes  sallow,  and 
much  emaciated  ; and  some  degree  of  oedema  appears 
on  the  lower  extremities,  which  afterward  extends  to 
other  parts  of  the  body.  This  disease  is  extremely 
uncertain  in  its  duration ; in  some  instances  it  has  ter- 
minated in  a few  days,  while  in  others  it  has  continued, 
not  only  for  many  months,  but  even  for  years. 

The  causes  of  this  disease  are  by  no  means  clearly 
ascertained : it  occurs  at  every  period  of  life,  and  in  both 
sexes,  but  especially  in  women  and  in  boys  before  the 
age  of  puberty,  particularly  those  who  are  employed  in 
sedentary.occupations,  and  who  live  in  close  and  crowd- 
ed situations.  It  has  sometimes  occurred  as  a sequ$la, 
of  small-pox,  and  of  measles,  and  sometimes  in  the 
third  or  fourth  week  of  puerperal  confinement.  It  is 
supposed  that  some  local  visceral  obstruction  is  the 
cause  of  the  disease  in  different  instances,  as  artificial 
bleeding,  and  purging,  tend  greatly  to  relieve  it.  The 
ancient  physicians  attributed  the  hajmorrhagies  from 
the  nose,  gums,  and  other  parts,  to  the  morbid  enlarge- 
ment of  the  spleen. 

In  the  slighter  degrees  of  purpura  occurring  in  cliil 
dren  who  are  ill  fed  and  nursed,  and  who  reside  in 
close  places,  or  in  women  shut  up  in  similar  situations, 
and  debilitated  by  anxiety  of  mind,  want  of  proper 
I food,  and  by  fatigue,  the  use  of  tonics,  with  the  mineral 
acids,  and  wine,  will  doubtless  be  adequate  to  the  cu  e 
i of  the  disease,  especially  where  exercise  in  the  open 


PUR 


PUS 


air  can  be  employed  at  the  same  time.  But  when  it 
occurs  in  adults,  especially  those  who  already  have  the 
oenefit  of  exercise  in  the  air  of  the  country,  and  who 
have  suffered  no  privation  with  respect  to  diet,  when 
it  is  accompanied  with  a white  and  loaded  tongue,  a 
quick  and  somewhat  small  though  sharp  pulse,  oc- 
casional chills  and  heats,  and  other  symptoms  of 
feverishness,  however  moderate,  and  if  there  be  at 
the  same  time  fixed  internal  pains,  a dry  cough,  and  an 
irregular  state  of  the  bowels  (symptoms  which  may  be 
presumed  to  indicate  some  local  congestion);  then  the 
administration  of  tonic  medicines,  particularly  wine, 
cinchona,  and  other  warmer  tonics  will  be  found  inef- 
ficacious, if  not  decidedly  injurious.  In  such  cases,  free 
and  repeated  doses  of  medicines  containing  the  sub- 
muriate of  mercury,  and  regulated  by  their  effects  on 
the  symptoms  of  the  complaint,  and  by  the  appearance 
of  the  excretions,  from  the  intestines,  will  be  found 
most  beneficial. 

If  the  pains  are  fixed,  the  marks  of  febrile  irritation 
considerable,  and  the.  spontaneous  haemorrhage  not 
profuse,  local  or  general  blood-letting  may  be  employed 
with  great  benefit,  especially  in  robust  adults.  When 
the  urgency  of  haemorrhagic  tendency  has  been  dimi- 
nished by  these  means,  the  constitution  rallies,  though 
not  rapidly,  with  the  assistance  of  the  mineral  acids, 
and  cinchona  or  cascarilla,  or  some  preparation  of  iron, 
together  with  moderate  exercise  and  nutritious  diet. 

3.  Purpura  urticans  is  distinguished  by  commencing 
in  the  form  of  rounded  and  reddish  elevations  of  the 
cuticle,  resembling  wheals,  which  are  not  accompanied 
like  the  wheals  of  urticaria  by  any  sensation  of  tingling 
and  itching.  These  tumours  gradually  dilate,  but 
within  one  or  two  days  they  subside  to  a level  of  the 
surrounding  cuticle,  and  their  hue  becomes  darker, 
and  at  length  livid.  They  are  most  common  on  the 
legs  where  they  appear  with  petechiie,  but  also  appear 
on  the  arms,  thighs,  breast,  &c. 

It  usually  occurs  in  summer  and  autumn,  and  lasts 
from  three  to  five  weeks.  Some  oedema  of  the  ex- 
tremities usually  accompanies  it,  and  it  is  occasionally 
preceded  by  a stiffness  and  weight  of  the  limbs.  The 
same  rules  of  treatment  apply  to  this  as  to  the  pre- 
ceding varieties  of  the  disease. 

4.  Purpura  senilis  appears  principally  along  the  out- 
side of  the  forearm,  in  elderly  women,  in  successive 
dark  purple  blotches,  of  an  irregular  form,  and  various 
magnitude ; each  of  these  continues  from  a week  to 
ten  days,  when  the  extravasated  blood  is  absorbed. 

Tonics  or  any  other  expedient  do  not  appear  to  exert 
any  influence  over  the  eruption. 

5.  Purpura  contagiosa.,  is  an  eruption  of  petechia 
which  occasionally  accompanies  typhoid  fevers ; where 
they  occur  in  close  situations,  they  are  merely  symp- 
tomatic, and  are  very  rarely  seen. 

Purpura  alba.  Purpura  rubra.  Many  writers 
term  the  miliary  fever,  when  the  pustules  are  white, 
purpura  alba ; and  when  they  are  red,  purpura  rubra. 
Purpura  scorbutica.  Petechial  eruptions  in  scurvy. 
PURPURIC  ACID.  Acidum  purpuricum  : so  called 
from  its  fine  red  colour.  The  excrements  of  the  ser- 
pent, Boa  constrictor , consist  of  pure  lithic  acid. 
Dr.  Prout  found  that  on  digesting  this  substance  thus 
obtained,  or  from  urinary  calculi,  in  dilute  nitric  acid, 
an  effervescence  takes  place,  and  the  lithic  acid  is  dis- 
solved, forming  a beautiful  purple  liquid.  The  excess 
of  nitric  acid  being  neutralized  with  ammonia,  and  the 
whole  concentrated  by  slow  evaporation,  the  colour  of  1 
the  solution  becomes  of  a deeper  purple  ; and  dark  red 
granular  crystals,  sometimes  of  a greenish  hue  exter-  < 
nally,  soon  begin  to  separate  in  abundance.  These 
crystals  are  a compound  of  ammonia  with  the  acid  i 
principle  in  question.  The  ammonia  was  displaced 
by  digesting  the  salt  in  a solution  of  caustic  potassa,  i 
till  the  red  colour  entirely  disappeared.  This  alkaline  : 
solution  was  then  gradually  dropped  into  dilute  sulphu-  < 
ric  acid,  which,  uniting  with  the  potassa,  left  the  acid  i 
principle  in  a state  of  purity. 

This  acid  principle  is  likewise  produced  from  lithic  1 
acid  by  chlorine,  and  also,  but  with  more  difficulty,  by  t 
iodine.  Dr.  Prout,  the  discoverer  of  this  new  acid,  has,  i 
at  the  suggestion  of  Dr.  Wollaston,  called  it  purpuric  l 
acid,  because  its  saline  compounds  have  for  the  most 
part  a red  or  purple  colour.  i 

This  acid,  as  obtained  by  the  preceding  process,  \ 
usually  exists  in  the  form  of  a very  fine  powder,  of  a 
slightly  yellowish  or  cream  colour ; and  when  examined  i 
222 


l with  a magnifier,  'especially  under  water,  appears  to 

> possess  a pearly  lustre.  It  has  no  smell,  nor  taste.  Its 

> spec.  grav.  is  considerably  above  water.  It  is  scarcely 
soluble  in  water.  One-tenth  of  a grain,  boiled  for  a 
considerable  time  in  1000  grains  of  water  was  not  en- 
tirely dissolved.  The  water,  however,  assumed  a 
purple  tint,  probably,  Dr.  Prout  thinks,  from  the  forma- 
tion of  a little  purpurate  of  ammonia.  Purpuric  acid 
is  insoluble  in  alkohol  and  rether.  The  mineral  acids 
dissolve  it  only  when  they  are  concentrated. 

PURSLANE.  See  Portulaca. 

PURULENT.  ( Purulens , from  pus.)  Having  the 
appearance  of  pus. 

PUS.  Matter.  A whitish,  bland,  creamlike  fluid, 
heavier  than  water,  found  in  phlegmonous  abscesses, 
or  on  the  surface  of  sores.  It  is  distinguished,  accord- 
ing to  its  nature,  into  laudable  or  good  pus,  scrofulous, 
serous,  and  ichorous  pus,  &c. 

Pus  taken  from  a healthy  ulcer,  near  the  source  of 
circulation,  as  on  the  arm  or  breast,  Sir  Everard  Home 
observes,  readily  separates  from  the  surface  of  the 
sore,  the  granulations  underneath  being  small,  pointed, 
and  of  a florid  red  colour,  and  has  the  following  pro- 
perties : it  is  nearly  of  the  consistence  of  cream ; is  of 
a white  colour ; has  a mawkish  taste ; and,  when  cold, 
is  inodorous ; but,  w7hen  warm,  has  a peculiar  smell. 
Examined  in  a microscope,  it  is  found  to  consist  of 
two  parts,  of  globules,  and  a transparent  colourless 
fluid  ; the  globules  are  probably  white,  at  least  they 
appear  to  have  some  degree  of  opacity.  Its  specific 
gravity  is  greater  than  that  of  water.  It  does  not 
readily  go  into  putrefaction.  Exposed  to  heat,  it 
evaporates  to  dryness ; but  does  not  coagulate.  It  does 
not  unite  with  water  in  the  heat  of  the  atmosphere, 
but  falls  to  the  bottom ; yet,  if  kept  in  a considerable 
degree  of  heat,  it  rises  and  diffuses  itself  through  the 
water,  and  remains  mixed  with  it,  even  after  having 
been  allowed  to  cool,  the  globules  being  decomposed. 

Pus  varies  in  its  appearance,  according  to  the  dif- 
ferent circumstances  which  affect  the  ulcer  that  forms 
it ; such  as,  the  degree  of  violence  of  the  inflammation, 
also  its  nature,  whether  healthy  or  unhealthy ; and 
these  depend  upon  the  state  of  health,  and  strength  of 
the  parts  yielding  pus.  These  changes  arise  more 
from  indolence  and  irritability,  than  from  any  absolute 
disease ; many  specific  diseases,  in  healthy  constitu- 
tions, producing  no  change  in  the  appearance  of  the 
matter  from  their  specific  quality.  Thus,  the  matter 
from  a gonorrhoea,  from  the  small-pox  pustules,  or  the 
chicken-pock,  has  the  same  appearance,  and  seems  to 
be  made  up  of  similar  parts,  consisting  of  globules 
floating  in  a transparent  fluid,  like  common  pus  ; the 
specific  properties  of  each  of  these  poisons  being  su- 
peradded  to  those  of  pus.  Matter  from  a cancer  may 
be  considered  as  an  exception ; but  a cancerous  ulcer 
is  never  in  a healthy  state. 

In  indolent  ulcers,  whether  the  indolence  arise  from 
the  nature  of  the  parts,  or  the  nature  of  the  inflamma- 
tion, the  pus  is  made  of  globules  and  flaky  particles, 
floating  in  a transparent  fluid  ; and  globules  and  flakes 
are  in  different  proportions,  according  to  the  degree  of 
indolence:  this  is  particularly  observable  in  scrofulous 
abscesses,  preceded  by  a small  degree  of  inflammation. 
That  this  flaky  appearance  is  no  part  of  true  pus,  is 
well  illustrated  by  observing,  that  the  proportion  it 
bears  to  the  globules  is  greater  where  there  is  the  least 
inflammation  ; and  in  those  abscesses  that  sometimes 
occur,  which  have  not  been  preceded  by  any  inflamma- 
tion at  all,  the  contents  are  wholly  made  up  of  a curdy 
or  flaky  substance  of  different  degrees  of  consistence, 
which  is  not  considered  to  be  pus,  from  its  not  having 
the  properties  stated  in  the  definition  of  that  fluid. 

The  constitution  and  part  must  be  in  health  to  form 
good  pus ; for  very  slight  changes  in  the  general  health 
are  capable  of  producing  an  alteration  in  it,  and  even 
of  preventing  its  being  formed  at  all,  and  substituting 
in  its  place  coagulating  lymph. 

This  happens  most  readily  in  ulcers  in  the  lower  ex- 
tremities, owing  to  their  distance  from  the  source  of 
the  circulation  rendering  them  w eaker.  And  it  is  cu- 
rious to  observe  the  influence  that  distance  alone  has 
upon  the  appearance  of  pus. 

Pus  differs  from  chyle  in  its  globules  being  larger, 
not  coagulating  by  exposure  to  the  air,  nor  by  heat, 
which  those  of  chyle  do. 

The  pancreatic  juice  contains  globules,  but  they  are 
much  smaller  than  those  of  pus. 


PUZ 


PYil 


Milk  is  composed  of  globules,  nearly  of  the  same 
size  as  those  of  pus,  but  much  more  numerous.  Milk 
coagulates  by  runnet,  which  pus  does  not ; and  con- 
tains oil  and  sugar,  which  are  not  to  be  discovered  in 
pus. 

The  cases  in  which  pus  is  formed,  are,  properly 
speaking,  all  reducible  to  one,  which  is,  the  state  of 
parts  consequent  to  inflammation.  For  as  far  as  we 
yet  know,  observes  Sir  E.  Home,  pus  has  in  no  in- 
stance been  met  with,  unless  preceded  by  inflamma- 
tion ; and  although,  in  some  cases,  a fluid  has  been 
formed  independent  of  preceding  inflammation,  it  dif- 
fers from  pus  in  many  of  its  properties. 

In  considering  the  time  required  for  the  formation  of 
pus,  it  is  necessary  to  take  notice  of  the  periods  which 
are  found,  under  different  circumstances,  to  intervene 
between  a healthy  or  natural  state  of  the  parts,  and 
the  presence  of  that  fluid  after  the  application  of  some 
irritating  substance  to  the  skin. 

In  cases  of  wounds  made  into  muscular  parts,  where 
blood-vessels  are  divided,  the  first  process  which  takes 
place  is  the  extravasation  of  red  blood  ; the  second  is 
the  exudation  of  coagulating  lymph,  which  afterward 
becomes  vascular ; and  the  third,  the  formation  of 
matter,  which  last  does  not,  in  common,  take  place  in 
less  than  two  days ; the  precise  time  will,  however, 
vary  exceedingly,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  con- 
stitution, and  the  state  of  the  parts  at  the  time. 

If  an  irritating  substance  is  applied  to  a cuticular 
surface,  upon  which  it  raises  a blister,  pus  will  be 
formed  in  about  twenty-four  hours. 

PUSTULA.  A little  pustule.  See  Pustule. 

Pustula  oris.  See  Aphtha. 

PUSTULE.  ( Pustula , a little  pustule;  from  pus , 
matter.)  Ecthyma;  Eczema.  Dr.  Willan  defines  a 
pustule  to  be  an  elevation  of  the  cuticle,  sometimes 
globate,  sometimes  conoidal  in  its  form,  and  containing 
pus,  or  a lymph  which  is  in  general  discoloured.  Pus- 
tules are  various  in  their  size,  but  the  diameter  of  the 
largest  seldom  exceeds  two  lines.  There  are  many 
different  kinds  of  pustules,  properly  distinguished  in 
medical  authors  by  specific  appellations ; as,  1.  Phly- 
zacium,  a small  pustule  containing  pus,  and  raised  on  a 
hard,  circular,  inflamed  base,  of  a vivid  red  colour.  It 
is  succeeded  by  a thick,  hard,  dark-coloured  scab.  2. 
Psydracium,  according  to  Dr.  Willan,  a minute  pus- 
tule, irregularly  circumscribed,  producing  but  a slight 
elevation  of  the  cuticle,  and  terminating  in  a laminated 
scab.  Many  of  these  pustules  usually  appear  toge- 
ther, and  beoome  confluent.  When  mature,  they  con- 
tain pus;  and,  after  breaking,  discharge  a thin  watery 
humour. 

PUTA'MEN.  (From  puto,  to  cut.)  The  bark  or 
paring  of  any  vegetable,  as  the  walnut.  Bee  Juglans 

regia. 

PUTAMINEA3.  The  name  of  an  order  in  Lin- 
naius’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  embracing 
those  which  have  an  outer  shell,  or  putamen,  over  a 
hard  fruit ; as  in  Capparis  and  Merisoma. 

PUTREFACTION.  (Putref  actio  ; from  putrefacio, 
to  become  rotten,  to  dissolve.)  Putrid  fermentation. 
Putrefactive  fermentation.  The  spontaneous  decom- 
position of  such  animal  and  vegetable  matters  as  ex- 
hale a foetid  smell.  The  solid  and  the  fluid  matters 
are  resolved  into  gaseous  compounds  and  vapours, 
which  escape  and  unite  an  earthy  residuum.  Thp  re- 
quisites to  this  process  are,  1.  A certain  degree  of  hu- 
midity. 2.  The  access  of  atmospheric  air.  3.  A cer- 
tain degree  of  heat:  hence  the  abstraction  of  the  air 
and  water,  or  humidity,  by  drying,  or  its  fixation 
by  cold,  by  salt,  sugar,  spices,  &c.,  will  counteract  the 
process  of  putrefaction,  and  favour  the  preservation  of 
food,  on  which  principle  some  patents  have  been  ob- 
tained. See  Fermentation. 

[“  Puzzolana.  This  usually  occurs  in  small  frag- 
ments, or  friable  masses,  which  have  a dull,  earthy 
aspect  and  fracture,  and  seem  to  have  been  baked.  Its 
solidity  does  not  exceed  that  of  chalk.  It  is  seldom 
tumefied ; and  its  pores  are  neither  so  large  nor  nume- 
rous as  those  of  scoria.  Its  colours  are  gray,  or  whitish, 
reddish,  or  nearly  black. 

“ By  exposure  to  heat,  it  loses  its  power  of  affecting 
the  needle,  and  melts  into  a black  slag.  A variety, 
examined  by  Bergman,  yielded  silex,  55  to  60;  alu- 
mine,  19  to  20;  iron,  15  to  20;  lime,  5 to  6.  It  often 
contains  distinct  articles  of  pumice,  quartz,  and 
scoria. 


“Some  mineralogists  suppose  the  black  puzzolana 
to  be  altered  scoria ; the  white  to  be  pumice,  and 
has  proceeded  from  argillaceous  minerals,  baked  or 
calcined  in  the  interior  of  the  volcano. 

“ But,  whatever  may  have  been  its  origin,  it  is  ex- 
tremely useful  in  the  preparation  of  a mortar,  which 
hardens  quickly,  even  under  water.  When  thus  em- 
ployed, it  is  mixed  with  a small  proportion  of  lime, 
perhaps  one-third.  Mr.  Kirwan  supposes,  that  the 
rapid  induration  of  this  mortar  arises  from  the  very 
low  oxidation  of  the  iron.  If  the  mortar  be  a long 
time  exposed  to  the  air,  previous  to  its  use,  it  will 
not  harden. 

“ The  best  puzzolana  is  said  to  occur  in  old  currents 
of  lava  ; but,  when  too  earthy,  it  loses  its  peculiar  pro- 
perties. That  which  comes  from  Naples  is  generally 
gray." — Clear.  Min.  A.] 

Putrid  Fever.  See  Typhus  gravior. 

PYLORIC.  (Pyloricus  ; from  pylorus.)  Belong- 
ing to  the  pylorus. 

Pyloric  artery.  Arteria  pylorica.  A branch  of 
the  hepatic  artery. 

PYLO  RUS.  (From  ttvXtj,  an  entrance,  and  ovpog, 
a guard ; because  it  guards,  as  it  were,  the  entrance 
of  the  bowels.)  Janitor;  Portorarium ; Ostiarius. 
The  inferior  aperture  of  the  stomach,  which  opens 
into  the  intestines. 

Pyofoe'tic.  (From  jtvov,  pus,  and  7r oteoo,  to  make.) 
Suppurative. 

Pyorrhce'a.  (From  n vov,  pus,  and  pew,  to  flow.) 
A purulent  discharge  from  the  belly. 

Pyotu'ria.  (From  irvov,  pus,  and  ovpov,  urine.) 
Pyuria.  A mucous  or  purulent  urine. 

PYRAMIDA'LIS.  (From  nvpapts,  a pyramid.)  A 
muscle  in  the  front  of  the  belly.  Fallopius,  who  is 
considered  as  the  first  accurate  describer  of  this  mus 
cle,  gave  it  the  name  of  pyramidalis,  from  its  shape: 
hence  it  is  called  pyramidalis  Fallopii , by  Douglas. 
But  Vesalius  seems  to  have  been  acquainted  with  it, 
and  to  have  described  it  as  a part  of  the  rectus.  It  is 
called  pyramidalis  vcl  succenturiatus , by  Cowper ; and 
pubio-ombilical,  by  Dumas.  It  is  a very  small  muscle, 
situated  at  the  bottom  of  the  forepart  of  the  rectus, 
and  is  covered  by  the  same  aponeurosis  that  forms  the 
anterior  part  of  the  sheath  of  that  muscle.  It  arises 
by  short,  tendinous  fibres,  from  the  upper  and  forepart 
of  the  os  pubis.  From  this  origin,  which  is  seldom 
more  than  an  inch  in  breadth,  its  fibres  ascend  some- 
what obliquely,  to  be  inserted  into  the  linea  alba,  and 
inner  edge  of  the  rectus,  commonly  at  about  the  dis- 
tance of  two  inches  from  the  pubes,  and  frequently  at 
a greater  or  less  distance,  but  always  below  the  umbi- 
licus. In  some  subjects,  the  pyramidalis  is  wanting  on 
one  or  both  sides ; and,  when  this  happens,  the  inter- 
nal oblique  is  usually  found  to  be  of  greater  thickness 
at  its  lower  part.  Now  and  then,  though  rarely,  there 
are  two  at  one  side,  and  only  one  at  the  other,  and  Sa- 
batier has  even  seen  two  on  each  side.  Fallopius,  and 
many  others  after  him,  have  considered  it  as  the  con- 
gener of  the  internal  oblique ; but  its  use  seems  to  be 
to  assist  the  lower  part  of, the  rectus. 

Pyramidalis  faciei.  See  Levator  labii  svperioris 
alteque  nasi. 

PYRENEITE.  A grayish-black  coloured  mineral, 
found  in  the  Pyrenees. 

Pyrenoi'des.  (From  zsvpr/v , a kernel,  and  tiSo j, 
likeness:  so  called  from  its  kernel-like  shape.)  Ap- 
plied to  the  odontoid  process  of  the  second  vertebra. 

Pyrete'rium.  (From  zsvp,  fire,  and  rypco),  to  keep.) 
The  fire-hole  of  a furnace. 

PYRE'TI-IRUM.  (From  zsvp,  fire,'  because  of  the 
hot  taste  of  its  root.)  See  Anthcmis  pyrethrum. 

Pyrethrum  sylvestre.  See  Achillea  ptarmica. 

PYRETICA.  The  name  given  by  Dr.  Good  to  an 
order  of  his  class  Hcematica.  Fevers.  It  has  four 
genera:  Ephemera;  Anetus ; Epanetus ; Enecia. 

PYRETOLOGY.  (Pyretologia ; from  irvpflos, 
fever,  and  Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  A discourse,  or  doc- 
trine on  fevers. 

PYRE'XIA.  (From  zsvp,  fire.)  Fever. 

Pyrexi*.  Febrile  diseases.  The  first  class  of  Cul- 
len’s Nosology ; characterized  by  frequency  of  pulse 
after  a cold  shivering,  with  increase  of  heat,  and  espe- 
cially, among  other  impaired  functions,  a diminution 
of  strength. 

PYREXIAL.  (From  pyrexia , fever.)  Appertain 
ing  to  fever. 

223 


PYR 


PYR 


PYRIFORMIS.  (From  piyrus,  a pear,  and  forma, 
a shape ; shaped  like  a pear.)  A small  radiated  mus- 
cle of  the  pelvis,  situated  under  the  glutaeus  maximus, 
along  the  inferior  edge  of  the  glutajus  maximus.  Py- 
riformis, seu  iliacus  externus , of  Douglas  and  Cowper. 
Spigelius  was  the  first  who  gave  a name  to  this  muscle, 
which  he  called  pyriformis , from  its  supposed  resem- 
blance to  a pear.  It  is  the  pyriformis  sive  pyramida- 
lis  of  Winslow ; and  sacrotrochanterien  of  Dumas.  It 
arises  by  three,  and  sometimes  four,  tendinous  and 
fleshy  origins,  from  the  anterior  surface  of  the  second, 
third,  and  fourth  pieces  of  the  os  sacrum,  so  that  this 
part  of  it  is  within  the  pelvis.  From  these  origins,  the 
muscle  grows  narrower,  and  passing  out  of  the  pelvis, 
below  the  niche  in  the  posterior  part  of  the  ilium,  from 
which  it  receives  a few  fleshy  fibres,  is  inserted  by  a 
roundish  tendon,  of  an  inch  in  length,  into  the  upper 
part  of  the  cavity,  at  the  root  of  the  trochanter  major. 
The  use  of  this  muscle  is  to  assist  in  moving  the  thigh 
outwards,  and  moving  it  a little  upwards. 

PYRI'TES.  (From  roup,  fire : so  called  because  it 
strikes  fire  with  steel.)  Native  compounds  of  metal 
with  sulphur. 

Pyrites  arsenicalis.  Sulphuret  of  iron  with 
arsenic. 

PYRMONT.  The  name  of  a village  in  the  circle 
of  Westphalia,  in  Germany,  in  which  is  a celeprated 
mineral  spring.  Pyrmont  water.  Aqua  pyrmontana 
is  of  an  agreeable,  though  strongly  acidulated  taste, 
and  emits  a large  portion  of  gas;  which  affects  the 
persons  who  attend  at  the  well,  as  well  as  those  who 
drink  the  fluid,  with  a sensation  somewhat  resembling 
that  produced  by  intoxication.  A general  view  of  the 
analysis  of  this  water  will  show  that  it  stands  the  first 
in  rank  of  the  highly  carbonated  chalybeates,  and  con- 
tains such  an  abundance  of  carbonic  acid,  as  not  only 
to  hold  dissolved  a number  of  carbonic  salts,  but  to 
show  all  the  properties  of  this  acid  uncombined,  and 
in  its  most  active  form.  Pyrmont  water  is  likewise  a 
strong  chalybeate,  with  regard  to  the  proportion  of 
iron ; and  it  is,  besides,  a very  hard  water,  containing 
much  selenite  and  earthy  carbonates.  The  diseases  to 
which  this  mineral  water  may  be  advantageously  ap- 
plied, are  the  same  as  those  for  which  the  Spa,  and 
others  of  the  acidulated  chalybeates,  are  resorted  to ; 
that  is,  in  all  cases  of  debility  that  require  an  active 
tonic  that  is  not  permanently  heating  ; as  various  dis- 
orders in  the  alimentary  canal,  especially  bilious  vo- 
miting, and  diarrhoea,  and  complaints  that  originate 
from  obstructed  menstruation.  At  Pyrmont,  the  com- 
pany generally  drink  this  water  by  glassfuls,  in  a morn- 
ing, to  the  quantity  of  two,  three,  or  more  English 
pints.  Its  common  operation  is  by  urine ; but,  if  taken 
copiously,  it  generally  proves  laxative ; and  when  it 
has  not  this  effect,  and  that  effect  is  wanted,  they  com- 
monly mix,  with  the  first  glass  drank  in  the  morning, 
from  one  to  five  or  six  drachms  of  some  purging  salts. 

PYROACETIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  pycitricum  ; so 
called  because  it  is  obtained  by  the  action  of  fire  on  the 
acetic  acid.)  Pyroacetic  spirit.  Obtained  by  the  de- 
structive distillation  of  the,flcetates,  from  which  a mo- 
dified vinegar  escapes,  called  pyroacetic  or  spirit. 

PYROCITRIC  ACID.  Acidum  pyrocitricum.  A 
new  acid  obtained  by  distilling  citric  acid. 

“ When  citric  acid  is  put  to  distil  in  a retort,  it  begins 
at  first  by  melting ; the  water  of  crystallization  sepa- 
rates almost  entirely  from  it  by  a continuance  of  the 
fusion  ; then  it  assumes  a yellowish  tint,  which  gradu- 
ally deepens.  At  the  same  time  there  is  disengaged  a 
white  vapour  which  goes  over,  to  be  condensed  in  the 
receiver.  Towards  the  end  of  the  calcination  a brown- 
ish vapour  is  seen  to  form,  and  there  remains  in  the 
bottom  of  the  retort  a light  very  brilliant  charcoal. 

The  product  contained  in  the  receiver  consists  of  two 
different  liquids.  One  of  an  amber  yellow  colour,  and 
anoily aspect, occupies thelower part;  another, colour- 
less and  liquid  like  water,  of  a very  decided  acid  taste, 
floats  above.  After  separating  them  from  one  another, 
we  perceive  that  the  first  has  a very  strong  bituminous 
odour,  and  an  acid  and  acrid  taste ; that  it  reddens 
powerfully  the  tincture  of  litmus,  but  that  it  may  be 
deprived  almost  entirely  of  that  acidity  by  agitation 
with  water,  in  which  it  divides  itself  into  globules, 
which  soon  fall  to  the  bottom  of  the  vessel,  and  are  not 
long  in  uniting  to  one  mass,  in  the  manner  of  oils  hea- 
vier than  water. 

In  this  state  it  possesses  some  of  the  properties  of 
224 


these  substances ; it  is  soluble  in  alkohol,  rother,  and 
the  caustic  alkalies.  However,  it  does  not  long  con- 
tinue thus ; it  becomes  acid,  and  sometimes  even  it  is 
observed  to  deposite  at  the  end  of  some  days,  white 
crystals,  which  have  a very  strong  acidity ; if  we  then 
agitate  it  anew  with  water,  it  dissolves  in  a great  mea 
sure,  and  abandons  a yellow  or  brownish  pitchy  mat 
ter,  of  a very  obvious  empyreumatic  smell,  and  which 
has  much  analogy  with  the  oil  obtained  in  the  distilla- 
tion of  other  vegetable  matters.  The  same  effect  takes 
place  when  we  keep  it  under  water;  it  diminishes 
gradually  in  volume,  the  water  acquires  a sour  taste, 
and  a thick  oil  remains  at  the  bottom  of  the  vessel. 

This  liquid  may  be  regarded  as  a combination  (of 
little  permanence  indeed)  of  the  peculiar  acid  with  the 
oil  formed  in  similar  circumstances. 

As  to  the  liquid  and  colourless  portion  which  floated 
over  this  oil,  it  was  ascertained  to  contain  no  citric 
acid  carried  over , nor  acetic  acid ; first,  because  on 
saturating  it  with  carbonate  of  lime,  a soluble  calca- 
reous salt  was  obtained ; and,  secondly,  because  this  salt, 
treated  with  sulphuric  acid,  evolved  no  odour  of  acetic 
acid. 

From  this  calcareous  salt  the  lime  was  separated  by 
oxalic  acid ; or  the  salt  itself  was  decomposed  with 
acetate  of  lead,  and  the  precipitate  treated  with  sul- 
phuretted hydrogen.  By  these  two  processes,  this  new 
acid  was  separated  in  a state  of  purity. 

Properties  of  the  pyrocitric  acid. — This  acid  is  white, 
inodorous,  of  a strongly  acid  taste.  It  is  difficult  to 
make  it  crystallize  in  a regular  manner,  but  it  is  usually 
presented  in  a white  mass,  formed  by  the  interlacement 
of  very  fine  small  needles.  Projected  on  a hot  body  it 
melts,  is  converted  into  white  very  pungent  vapours, 
and  leaves  some  traces  of  carbon.  When  heated  in  a 
retort,  it  affords  an  oily-looking  acid,  and  yellowish 
liquid,  and  is  partially  decomposed.  It  is  very  soluble 
in  water  and  in  alkohol ; water  at  the  temperature  of 
10°  C.  (50°  F.)  dissolves  one-thiru  of  its  weight.  The 
watery  solution  has  a strongly  acid  taste,  it  does  not 
precipitate  lime  or  barytes  water,  nor  the  greater  part 
of  metallic  solutions,  with  the  exception  of  acetate  of 
lead  and  protonitrate  of  mercury.  With  the  oxides  it 
forms  salts  possessing  properties  different  from  the  ci- 
trates. 

The  pyrocitrate  of  potassa  crystallizes  in  small  nee 
dies,  which  are  white,  and  unalterable  in  the  air.  It 
dissolves  in  about  4 parts  of  water.  Its  solution  gives 
no  precipitate  with  the  nitrate  of  silver,  or  of  barytes ; 
while  that  of  the  citrate  of  barytes  forms  precipitates 
with  these  salts. 

The  pyrocilrate  of  lime  directly  formed,  exhibits  a 
white  crystalline  mass,  composed  of  needles,  opposed 
to  each  other,  in  a ramification  form.  This  salt  has  a 
sharp  taste.  It  dissolves  in  25  parts  of  water  at  50° 
Fahr. 

The  solution  ’of  the  pyrocitric  acid  saturated  with 
barytes  water,  lets  falL,  at  the  end  of  some  hours,  a very 
white  crystalline  powder,  which  is  pyrocitrate  of  ba- 
rytes. This  salt  is  solunie  in  150  parts  of  cold  water, 
and  in  50  of  boiling  water. 

The  pyrocitrate  of  lead  is  easily  obtained  by  pouring 
pyrocitrate  of  potassa  into  a solution  of  acetate  of  lead. 
The  pyrocitrate  of  lead  presents  itself  under  the  form 
of  a white  gelatinous  semitransparent  mass,  winch  be- 
comes dry  jn  the  air.” 

PYROGOM.  A variety  of  diopside. 

PYROLA.  (From  pyrus , a pear : so  named  be- 
cause its  leaves  resemble  those  of  a pear-tree.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Liiintean  system  Class, 
Decandria ; Order,  JUonogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  wintergreen.  See 
Pyrola  rotundifolia. 

Pyrola  rotundifoua.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  round-leaved  wintergreen.  This  elegant  little 
plant,  common  in  our  woods,  is  now  forgotten  in  the 
practice  of  medicine.  It  possesses  gently  adstringent 
qualities,  and  has  a somewhat  bitter  taste. 

[“Pyrola  umbellata  The  pyrola  umbellata,  or 
wintergreen , is  a common  plant  of  the  American 
forest.  Its  leaves  have  a taste  intermediate  between 
sweet  and  bitter,  which  in  the  stalk  and  roots,  is  com- 
bined with  some  pungency.  Spirit  extracts  these  pro- 
perties ; likewise  water,  though  less  perfectly.  This 
plant  has  been  formerly  used  in  rheumatism.  More 
recently  it  has  been  found  a very  useful  palliative  in 
strangury  and  nephritis,  both  in  this  country  and  in 


PYR 


PYR 


Europe,  In  dropsy  it  has  sometimes  exhibited  striking 
effects  as  a diuretic,  a pint  of  the  saturated  infusion 
being  taken  every  twenty-four  hours.  It  has  the  ad- 
vantage, over  the  more  common  diuretics,  that  it  does 
not  offend  the  stomach,  but,  on  the  contrary,  invigo- 
rates that  organ,  and  assists  digestion.  The  bruised 
leaves,  externally  applied,  act  as  a rubefacient  and  a 
discutient  to  indolent  swellings.” — Bigelow's  Materia 
Medic  a.  A.] 

P YROLIGNEOUS  ACID.  (Acidum  pyrolignosum  ; 
so  called  because  it  is  procured  by  distilling  wood.) 
“ In  the  destructive  distillation  of  any  kind  of  wood,  an 
acid  is  obtained,  which  was  formerly  called  acid  spirit 
of  wood , and  since,  pyroligneous  acid.  Fourcroy  and 
Vauqueliu  showed  that  the  acid  was  merely  the  acetic, 
contaminated  with  empyreumatic  oil  and  bitumen.  See 
Gertie  acid. 

Under  Acetic  Acid  will  be  found  a full  account  of 
the  production  and  purification  of  pyroligneous  acid. 
Monge  discovered  about  two  years  ago,  that  this  acid 
has  the  property  of  preventing  the  decomposition  of 
animal  substances.  Mr.  William  Dinsdale,  of  Field 
Cottage,  Colchester,  three  years  prior  to  the  date  of 
Monge’s  discovery  did  propose  to  the  Lords  Commis- 
sioners of  the  Admiralty,  to  apply  a pyroligneous  acid, 
(prepared  out  of  the  contact  of  .iron  vessels,  which 
blacken  it,)  to  the  purpose  of  preserving  animal  food, 
wherever  their  ships  might  go.  As  this  application 
may  in  many  cases  aft'ord  valuable  anti-scorbutic  arti- 
cles of  food,  and  thence  be  eminently  conducive  to  the 
health  of  seamen,  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  their  Lordship’s 
will,  ere  long,  carry  into  effect  Mr.  Dinsdale’s  ingenious 
plan,  as  far  as  shall  be  deemed  necessary.  It  is  suffi- 
cient to  plunge  meat  for  a few  moments  into  this  acid, 
even  slightly  empyreumatic,  to  preserve  it  as  long  as 
you  please.  ‘ Putrefaction,’  it  is  said,  1 not  only  stops, 
but  retrogrades.’  To  the  empyreumatic  oil  a part  of 
this  effect  has  been  ascribed ; and  hence  has  been  ac- 
counted for,  the  agency  of  smoke  in  the  preservation  of 
tongues,  hams,  herrings,  &c.  Dr.  Jorg  of  Leipsic  has 
entirely  recovered  several  anatomical  preparations 
from  incipient  corruption  by  pouring  this  acid  over 
them.  With  the  empyreumatic  oil  or  tar  he  has 
smeared  pieces  of  flesh  already  advanced  in  decay,  and 
notwithstanding  that  the  weather  was  hot,  they  soon 
became  dry  and  sound.  To  the  above  statements  Mr. 
Ramsay  of  Glasgow,  an  eminent  manufacturer  of  py- 
roligneous acid,  and  well  known  for  the  purity  of  his 
vinegar  from  wood,  has  recently  added  the  following 
facts  in  the  5th  number  of  the  Edinburgh  Philosophical 
Journal.  If  fish  be  simply  dipped  in  redistilled  pyroligne- 
ous acid,  of  the  specific  gravity  of  1.012,  and  afterward 
dried  in  the  shade,  they  preserve  perfectly  well.  On 
boiling  herrings  treated  in  this  manner,  they  were  very 
agreeable  to  the  taste,  and  had  nothing  of  the  disagree- 
able empyreuma  which  those  of  his  earlier  experiments 
had,  which  were  steeped  for  three  hours  in  the  acid. 
A number  of  very  fine  haddocks  were  cleaned,  split, 
and  slightly  sprinkled  with  salt  for  six  hours.  After 
being  drained,  they  were  dipped  for  about  three  seconds 
in  pyroligneous  acid,  then  hung  up  in  the  shade  for  six 
days.  On  being  broiled,  the  fish  were  of  an  uncom- 
monly fine  flavour,  and  delicately  white.  Beef  treated 
in  the  same  way  had  the  same  flavour  as  Hamburgh 
beef,  and  kept  as  well.  Mr.  Ramsay  has  since  found, 
that  his  perfectly  purified  vinegar,  specific  gravity 
1.034,  being  applied  by  a cloth  or  sponge  to  the  surface 
of  fresh  meat,  makes  it  keep  sweet  and  sound  for  se- 
veral days  longer  in  summer  than  it  otherwise  would. 
Immersion  for  a minute  in  his  purified  common  vinegar, 
specific  gravity  1.009,  protects  beef  and  fish  from  all 
taint  in  summer,  provided  they  be  hung  up  and  dried 
in  the  shade.  When,  by  frequent  use,  the  pyroligneous 
acid  has  become  impure,  it  may  be  clarified  by  beating 
up  twenty  gallons  of  it  with  a dozen  of  eggs  in  the  usual 
manner,  and  heating  the  mixture  in  an  iron  boiler. 
Before  boiling,  the  eggs  coagulate,  and  bring  the  impu- 
rities to  the  surface  of  the  boiler,  which  are  of  course  to 
he  carefully  skimmed  off.  The  acid  must  be  imme- 
diately withdrawn  from  the  boiler,  as  itactson  iron.” 

PYROLITHIC  ACID.  “When  uric  acid  concre- 
tions are  distilled  in  a retort,  silvery  white  plate  sub- 
lime. These  are  pyrolithate  of  ammonia.  When  their 
solution  is  poured  into  that  of  subacelate  of  lead,  a py 
rolilhateof  lead  falls,  which,  after  proper  washing,  i»  to 
he  shaken  with  water,  and  decomposed  by  sulphuretted 
hydrogen  gas.  The  supernatant  liquid  is  now  a solu- 


tion of  pyrolithic  acid,  which  yields  small  acicular 
crystals  by  evaporation.  By  heat,  these  melt  and  sub- 
lime in  white  needles.  They  are  soluble  in  four  parts 
of  cold  water,  and  the  solution  reddens  vegetable  blues. 
Boiling  alkohol  dissolves  the  acid,  but  on  cooling  it 
deposites  it,  in  small  white  grains.  Nitric  acid  dissolves 
without  changing  it.  Hence,  pyrolithic  is  a different 
acid  from  the  lithic,  which,  by  nitric  acid,  is  convert- 
ible into  purpurate  of  ammonia.  The  pyrolithate  of 
lime  crystallizes  in  stalactites  which  have  a bitter  and 
slightly  acrid  taste.  It  consists  of  UJ.4  acid  -f-  8.6  lirnc. 
Pyrolithate  of  barytes  is  a nearly  insoluble  powder. 
The  salts  of  potassa,  soda,  and  ammonia,  are  soluble, 
and  the  former  two  crystallizable.  At  a red  heat,  and 
by  passing  it  over  ignited  oxide  of  copper,  it  is  decom- 
posed, into  oxygen  44.32,  carbon  28.29,  azote  16.84,  hy- 
drogen 10.” 

P YROMALIC  ACID.  “ When  malic  or  sorbic  acid 
for  they  are  the  same,  is  distilled  in  a retort,  an  acid 
sublimate,  in  white  needles,  appears  in  the  neck  of  the 
retort,  and  an  acid  liquid  distils  into  the  receiver.  This 
liquid,  by  evaporation,  affords  crystals,  constituting  a 
peculiar  acid  to  which  the  above  name  has  been  given. 

They  are  permanent  in  the  air,  melt  at  118°  Fahr.,  and 
on  cooling,  form  a pearl-coloured  mass  of  diverging  nee- 
dles. When  thrown  on  red-hot  coals,  they  completely 
evaporate  in  an  acrid,  c^ugh-exciting  smoke.  Exposed 
to  a strong  heat  in  a retort,  they  are  partly  sublimed  in 
needles,  and  are  partly  decomposed.  They  are  very 
soluble  in  strong  alkohol,  and  in  double  their  weight  of 
water,  at  the  ordinary  temperature.  The  solution 
reddens  vegetable  blues,  and  yields  white  flocculent 
precipitates  with  acetate  of  lead  and  nitrate  of  mer- 
cury ; but  produces  no  precipitate  with  lime-water. 
By  mixing  it  with  barytes  water,  a white  powder  falls, 
which  is  redissolved  by  dilution  with  water,  after 
which,  by  gentle  evaporation,  the  pyroinalate  of  bary- 
tes may  be  obtained  in  silvery  plates.  These  consist  of 
100  acid,  and  185.142  barytes,  or  in  prime  equivalents, 
of  5.25  + 9.75.” 

PYROMETER.  (FromnJup,  fire,  and  ysrpov,  mea- 
sure.) To  measure  those  higher  degrees  of  heat  to 
which  the  thermometer  cannot  be  applied,  there  have 
been  other  instruments  invented  by  different  philoso- 
phers : these  are  called  pyrometers.  The  most  cele- 
brated instrument  of  this  kind,  and  which  has  been 
adopted  into  general  use,  is  that  invented  by  the  late 
ingenious  Mr.  Wedgwood. 

This  instrument  is  also  sufficiently  simple.  It  con- 
sists of  two  pieces  of  brass  fixed  on  a plate,  so  as  to  be 
6-10ths  of  an  inch  asunder  at  one  end,  and  3-10ths  at 
the  other  ; a scale  is  marked  upon  them,  which  is  di- 
vided into  240  equal  parts,  each  1-lOth  of  an  inch  ; and 
with  this  his  gauge,  are  furnished  a sufficient  number 
of  pieces  of  baked  clay,  which  must  have  been  pre- 
pared in  a red  heat,  and  must  be  of  given  dimensions. 
These  pieces  of  clay,  thus  prepared,  are  first  to  be  ap- 
plied cold,  to  the  rule  of  the  gauge,  that  there  may  no 
mistake  take  place  in  regard  to  their  dimensions.  Then 
any  one  of  them  is  to  be  exposed  to  the  heat  which  is 
to  be  measured,  till  it  shall  have  been  completely  pene- 
trated by  it.  It  is  then  removed  and  applied  to  the 
gauge.  The  difference  between  its  former  and  its  pre- 
sent dimensions  will  show  how  much  it  has  shrunk; 
and  will  consequently  indicate  to  what  degree  the  in- 
tensity of  the  heat  to  which  it  was  exposed  amounted. 

High  temperatures  can  thus  be  ascertained  with  ac- 
curacy. Each  degree  of  Wedgwood’s  pyrometer  is 
equal  to  130°  of  Fahrenheit’s. 

PYROMUCIC  ACID.  (Acidum  pyromucicum ; be- 
cause it  was  obtained  from  the  distillation  of  gum.) 
Pyronmcous  acid.  “ This  acid,  discovered  in  1818,  by 
Ilouton  Labillardiere,  is  one  of  the  products  of  the  dis- 
tillation of  mucic  acid.  When  we  wish  to  procure  it, 
the  operation  must  be  performed  in  a glass  retort  fur- 
nished with  a receiver.  The  acid  is  formed  in  the 
brown  liquid,  which  is  produced  along  with  it,  and 
which  contains  water,  acetic  acid,  and  empyreumatic 
oil ; a very  small  quantity  of  the  pyromucic  acid  re- 
maining attached  to  the  vault  of  the  retort,  under  the 
form  of  crystals.  These  crystals  being  coloured,  are 
added  to  the  brown  liquor,  which  is  then  diluted  with 
three  or  four  times  its  quantity  of  water,  in  order  to 
throw  down  a certain  portion  of  oil.  The  whole  is 
next  filtered,  and  evaporated  to  a suitable  degree.  A 
great  deal  of  acetic  acid  is  volatilized,  and  then  the 
new  acid  crystallizes.  On  decanting  the  mother  wa- 


QUA. 

Mrs,  and  concentrating  them  farther,  they  yield  crys- 
tals anew ; but  as  these  are  small  and  yellowish,  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  make  them  undergo  a second  distillation  to 
render  them  susceptible  of  being  perfectly  purified  by 
crystallization.  150  parts  of  mucic  acid  furnish  about 
60  of  brown  liquor,  from  which  we  can  obtain  8 to  10 
of  pure  pyromucic  acid. 

This  acid  is  white,  inodorous,  of  a strongly  acid 
taste,  and  a decided  action  on  litmus.  Exposed  to  heat 
in  a retort  it  melts  at  the  temperature  of  266°  F.,  then 
volatilizes,  and  condenses  into  a liquid,  which  passes 
on  cooling  into  a crystalline  mass,  covered  with  very 
fine  needles.  It  leaves  very  slight  traces  of  residuum 
in  the  bottom  of  the  retort. 

On  burning  coals,  it  instantly  diffuses  white,  pun- 
gent vapours.  Ak  has  no  action  on  it.  Water  at  60° 
dissolves  one  twenty-eighth  of  its  weight.  Boiling  wa- 
ter dissolves  it  much  more  abundantly,  and  on  cooling 
abandons  a portion  of  it,  in  small  elongated  plates, 
which  cross  in  every  direction.” 

Pyro-mucoua  acid.  See  Pyromucic  acid. 

PY ROPE.  A subspecies  of  dodecahedral  garnet,  of 
a dark  blood-red  colour.  It  comes  from  Saxony,  and 
is  highly  esteemed  as  a gem. 

PYROPHORUS.  An  artificial  product,  which  takes 
fire  or  becomes  ignited,  on  exposure  to  the  air.  It  is 
prepared  from  alum  by  calcination,  with  the  addition 
of  various  inflammable  bodies. 

PYROPHYSALITE.  See  Physalite. 

PYRO'SIS.  (From  zsvpou),  to  burn.)  Pyrosis  sue- 
cica , of  Sauvages.  Cardialgia  spuiatoria,  of  Lin- 
naeus. A disease  called  in  Scotland  the  water-brash ; 
in  England,  black-water.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
class  Neuroses , and  order  Spasmi , of  Cullen  ; known 
by  a burning  pain  in  the  stomach,  attended  with  co- 
pious eructation,  generally  of  a watery  insipid  fluid. 

PYROSMALITE.  A liver-eoloured  mineral,  which 
comes  from  Wermeland. 

PYROTARTARIC  ACID.  {Acidum  pyro-tartari- 
eum ; so  called  because  obtained  by  the  destructive 
distillation  of  tartaric  acid.)  “ Into  a coated  glass  re- 
tort introduce  tartar,  or  rather  tartaric  acid,  till  it  is 
half  full,  and  fit  to  it  a tubulated  receiver.  Apply 
heat,  which  is  to  be  gradually  raised  ft)  redness.  Pyro- 
tartarie  acid  of  a brown  colour,  from  impurity,  is  found 
in  the  liquid  products.  We  must  filter  these  through 
paper  previously  wetted,  to  separate  the  oily  matter. 
Saturate  the  liquid  with  carbonate  of  potassa ; evapo- 
rate to  dryness ; redissolve,'  and  filter  through  clean 
moistened  paper.  By  repeating  this  process  of  evapo- 
ration, solution,  and  filtration,  several  times,  we  suc- 
ceed in  separating  all  the  oil.  The  dry  salt  is  then  to 
be  treated  in  a glass  retort,  at  a moderate  heat,  with 
dilute  sulphuric  acid.  There  passes  over  into  the  re- 
ceiver, first  of  all,  a liquor  containing  evidently  acetic 
acid ; but  towards  the  end  of  the  distillation,  there  is 
condensed  in  the  vault  of  the  retort,  a white  and  fo- 


QUA 

Hated  sublimate,  which  is  the  pyrotartaric  acid,  per 
fectly  pure. 

It  has  a very  sour  taste,  and  reddens  powerfully  the 
tincture  of  turnsole.  Heated  in  an  open  vessel,  the 
acid  rises  in  a white  smoke,  without  leaving  the  char- 
coaly  residuum  which  is  left  in  a retort.  It  is  very  so- 
luble in  water,  from  which  it  is  separated  in  crystals 
by  spontaneous  evaporation.  The  bases  combine  with 
it,  forming  pyrotartarates,  of  which  those  of  potassa, 
soda,  ammonia,  barytes,  strontites,  and  lime,  are  very 
soluble.  That  of  potassa  is  deliquescent,  soluble  in 
alkohol,  capable  of  crystallizing  in  plates,  like  the  ace- 
tate of  potassa.  This  pyrotartarate  precipitates  both 
acetate  of  lead  and  nitrate  of  mercury,  while  the  acid 
itself  precipitates  only  the  latter.  Rose  is  the  disco- 
verer of  this  acid,  which  was  formerly  confounded 
with  the  acetic.” 

Pyro-tartarous  acid.  See  Pyro-tartaric  acid. 

Pyrote'chnia.  (From  zsvp,  fire,  and  t£%v>7,  an  art.) 
Chemistry,  or  that  art  by  which  the  properties  of  bo- 
dies are  examined  by  fire. 

Pyro'tica.  (From  raupou,  to  burn.)  Caustics. 

PYROXENE.  See  Augite. 

PY'RUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  lcosandria;  Order,  Penta- 
gynia. 

Pyrus  communis.  The  pear-tree.  The  fruit  is 
analagous  to  that  of  the  apple,  but  more  delicately  fla- 
voured. Its  juice,  when  fermented,  forms  perry. 

Pyrus  cydonia.  The  systematic  name  of  the  quince- 
tree.  The  fruit  is  termed  Cydonium  malum , or  quince. 
The  tree  which  affords  this  fruit  is  the  Pyrus— foliis 
integcrrimis,  floribus , solitariis,  of  Linnams.  Quince 
seeds  are  directed  by  the  London  College  to  be  made 
into  a decoction,  which  is  recommended  in  aph- 
thous affections,  and  excoriations  of  the  mouth  and 
fauces. 

Pyrus  malus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  apple- 
tree.  The  common  crab-tree  is  the  parent  of  all  the 
vast  variety  of  apples  at  present  cultivated.  Apples, 
in  general,  when  ripe,  afford  a pleasant  and  easily  di- 
gestible fruit  for  the  table  ; but,  when  the  stomach  is 
weak,  they  are  very  apt  to  remain  unaltered  for  some 
days,  and  to  produce  dyspepsia.  Sour  fruits  are  to 
be  considered  unwholesome,  except  when  boiled  or 
baked,  and  rend  red  soft  and  mellow  with  the  addition 
of  sugar. 

Pyu'lcum.  (From  zsvov , pus,  and  eA/cw,  to  draw.) 
An  instrument  to  extract  the  pus  from  the  cavity  of 
any  sinuous  ulcer. 

Pyu'ria.  See  Pyoturia. 

Pyxaca'ntha.  (From  zsvlos , box,  and  aicavda , a 
thorn.)  The  barberry,  orthorny  box-tree. 

PY'XIS.  {Pyxis,  idis.  f. ; so  called  because  it  was 
made  with  the  iru^os,  or  box-tree.)  Properly  a box ; 
but,  from  its  resemblance,  the  cavity  of  the  hip-bone, 
or  acetabulum,  has  been  sometimes  so  called. 


QP.  An  abbreviation  of  quantum  placet , as  much 
• as  you  please. 

Q.  S.  The  contraction  for  quantum  sufficit , a suffi- 
cient quantity. 

Q.  V.  An  abbreviation  of  quantum  vis , as  much  -as 
you  will. 

QUADRANGULUS.  Quadrangular.  Often  used 
to  express  form  of  muscles,  leaves,  &.*  The  recepta- 
cle of  the  Dorstenia  houstonii , and  contrayerva,  is 
quadrangulara. 

QUADRA'TUS.  (From  quadra , square  : so  called 
from  its  figure.)  See  Depressor  laJbii  inferioris. 

Quadratus  femoris.  Tuber-ischiotrockanterien, 
of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  thigh,  situated  on  the 
eutside  of  the  pelvis.  It  is  a flat,  thin,  and  fleshy 
muscle,  but  not  of  the  shape  its  name  would  seem  to 
indicate.  It  is  situated  immediately  betow  the  gemini. 
It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  external  sur- 
face and  lower  edge  of  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium, 
and  is  inserted  by  short  tendinous  fibres  into  a ridge 
which  is  seen  extending  from  the  bases  of  the  trochan- 


ter major  to  that  of  the  trochanter  minor.  Its  use  is  to 
bring  the  os  femoris  outwards. 

Quadratus  gen*:.  See  Platysma-myoides. 

Quadratus  labii  inferioris.  See  Depressor 
labii  inferioris. 

Quadratus  lumborum.  Quadratus,  seu  lumbaris 
externus,  of  Winslow.  Ilio-lumbicostal,  of  Dumas.  A 
muscle  situated  within  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  This 
is  a small,  flat,  and  oblong  muscle,  that  has  gotten  the 
name  of  quadratus , from  its  shape,  which  is  that  of  an 
irregular  square.  It  it  situated  laterally,  at  the  lower 
part  of  the  spine.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from 
about  two  inches  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  spine 
of  the  ilium.  From  this  broad  origin  it  ascends 
obliquely  inwards,  and  is  inserted  into  the  transverse 
processes  of  the  four  superior  lumbar  vertebra;,  into 
the  lower  edge  of  the  last  rib,  and,  by  a small  tendon, 
that  passes  up  under  the  diaphragm  into  the  side  of  the 
last  vetebra  of  the  back.  When  this  muscle  acts  singly, 
it  draws  the  loins  to  one  side ; when  both  muscles  act, 
they  serve  to  support  the  spina,  and  perhaps  to  bend  it 


QUA 

fbrwards.  In  laborious  respiration,  the  quadratus  lum- 
borum  may  assist  in  pulling  down  the  ribs. 

Quadratus  maxillae  inferiors.  See  Platysma- 
ruyoides. 

Quadratus  radii.  See  Pronator  radii- quadratus. 

Quadri'ga.  (From  quatuor,  four,  and  jugum,  a 
yoke.)  A bandage  which  resembles  the  trappings  of  a 
four- horse  cart. 

[“  Quadroxalate  of  potassa.  Tiffs  may  be  com- 
posed by  several  methods.  It  was  formed  by  Dr. 
Wollaston  by  digesting  the  bin-oxalate  in  nitric  or  mu- 
riatic acid.  The  alkali  is  divided  into  two  parts,  one 
of  which  unites  with  the  mineral  acid,  and  the  other 
half  remains  in  combination  with  the  oxalic  acid.  It 
forms  beautiful  crystals,  which  may  be  obtained  pure 
by  solution,  and  a second  crystallization. 

“If  three  parts  by  weight  of  the  quadroxalate  be 
decomposed  by  burning,  and  the  alkali,  which  is  thus 
disengaged,  be  mixed  with  a solution  of  one  part  of 
the  crystallized  salt,  the  latter  is  exactly  neutralized. 
Hence  the  quadroxalate  contains  four  times  the  acid 
that  exists  in  the  oxalate.  The  analysis  of  this  class 
of  salts,  from  which  Dr.  Wollaston  drew  a striking  ex- 
emplification of  the  law  of  simple  multiples  discovered 
by  Mr.  Dalton,  may  be  recapitulated  as  follows : 

Atoms  of  Atoms  Equiv. 

base.  of  acid.  Base.  Acid.  num . 

The  oxalate  consists  of  1+  1 48  + 36  = 84 

The  bin-oxalate 1 + 2 48  + 72  = 120 

The  quadroxalate. ..  1 + 4 48  + 144  = 192 

. “ Estimating,  therefore,  from  the  weights  of  their 
atoms,  100  of  potassa  should  be  united,  in  the  oxalate, 
with  75  of  acid ; in  the  bin-oxalate  with  150 ; and  in 
the  quadroxalate  with  300.” — Web's  Manual  of  Che- 
mistry. A.] 

QUARTA'NA.  Febris  quartana.  A fourth-day 
ague.  Of  this  species  of  ague,  as  well  as  the  other 
kinds,  there  are  several  varieties  noticed  by  authors. 
The  most  frequent  of  these  are,  1.  The  double  quar- 
tan, with  two  paroxysms,  or  fits,  on  the  first  day,  none 
on  the  second  and  third,  and  two  again  on  the  fourth 
day.  2.  The  double  quartan,  with  a paroxysm  on  the 
first  day,  another  on  the  second,  but  none  on  the  third. 
3.  The  triple  quartan,  with  three  paroxysms  every 
fourth  day.  4.  The  triple  quartans  with  a slight 
paroxysm  every  day,  every  fourth  paroxysm  being 
similar.  See  also  Febris  intermittens. 

QUARTATION.  An  operation,  in  assaying,  by 
which  the  quantity  of  one  thing  is  made  equal  to  a 
fourth  part  of  the  quantity  of  another  thing. 

QUARTZ.  This  name  is  given  to  a genus  of  min- 
erals which  Jameson  divides  into  two  species,  rhom- 
boidal  quartz,  and  indivisible  quartz. 

The  rhomboidal  contains  fourteen  subspecies.  1. 
Amethyst.  2.  Rock  crystal.  3.  Milk  quartz,  which  is 
of  a rose  red,  and  milk-white  colour.  It  is  found  in  Ba- 
varia. 4.  Common  quartz  of  many  colours,  and  is 
one  of  the  most  abundant  minerals  in  nature.  6.  Cat’s 
eye.  7.  Fibrous  quartz  of  a grayish  or  yellowish  white 
colour,  found  on  the  banks  of  the  Moldau,  in  Bohemia. 
8.  Iron  flint.  9.  Hornstone.  10.  Flinty  slate.  11. 
Flint.  12.  Calcedony.  13.  Heliotrope.  14.  Jasper. 

The  indivisible  quartz  has  nine  subspecies  1.  Float- 
stone.  2.  Quartz  or  siliceous  sinter,  of  which  there 
are  three  kinds,  the  common,  opaline,  and  pearly.  3. 
Hyalite.  4.  Opal.  5.  Menilite.  6.  Obsidian.  7. 
Pitchstone.  8.  Pearlstone.  9.  Pumicestone. 

[Quartz  resinite  commune.  SeeHalb-opal.  A.] 

QUA'SSIA.  (From  a slave  of  the  name  of  Quassi , 
who  first  used  it  with  uncommon  success  as  a secret 
remedy  in  the  malignant  endemic  fevers  which  fre- 
quently prevailed  at  Surinam.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  De- 
candria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  bitter  quassia. 
See  Quassia  amara. 

Quassia  amara.  The  systematic  name  of  the  bit- 
ter quassia-tree.  The  root,  bark,  and  wood  of  this 
tree,  Quassia— floribus  hermaphroditis , foliis  impari- 
piruiatis,  foliolis  oppositis,  sessilibus,pctiolo  articulato 
alato , floribus  racemosis,  of  Linnaius,  are  all  compre- 
hended in  the  catalogues  of  the  materia  medica.  The 
tree  is  a native  of  South  America,  particularly  of  Suri- 
nam, and  also  of  some  of  the  West  India  islands. 

The  roots  are  perfectly  ligneous ; they  may  be  medi- 
cally considered  in  the  same  light  as  the  wood,  which 
Is  now  most  generally  employed,  and  seems  to  differ 

Yy  2 


QUA 

from  the  bark  in  being  less  intensely  bitter ; the  latter 
is  therefore  thought  to  be  a more  powerful  medicine. 
Quassia  has  no  sensible  odour ; its  taste  is  that  of  a 
pure  bitter,  more  intense  and  durable  than  that  of 
almost  any  other  known  substance ; it  imparts  its 
virtues  more  completely  to  watery  than  to  spirituous 
menstrua,  and  its  infusions  are  not  blackened  by  the  ad- 
dition of  sulphate  of  iron.  The  watery  extract  is  from  a 
sixth  to  a ninth  of  the  weight  of  the  wood,  the  spirituous 
about  a twenty-fourth.  Quassia,  as  before  observed, 
derived  its  name  from  a negro  named  Quassi,  who 
employed  it  with  uncommon  success  as  a secret  remedy 
in  the  malignant  endemic  fevers,  which  frequently 
prevailed  at  Surinam.  In  consequence  of  a valuable 
consideration,  this  secret  was  disclosed  to  Daniel  Ro- 
lander,  a Swede,  who  brought  specimens  of  the  quassia 
wood  to  Stockholm,  in  the  year  1756  ; and  since  then 
the  effects  of  this  drug  have  been  generally  tried  in 
Europe,  and  numerous  testimonies  of  its  efficacy  puh1 
lished  by  many  respectable  authors.  Various  experi- 
ments with  quassia  have  likewise  been  made,  with  a 
view  to  ascertain  its  antiseptic  powers;  from  which  it 
appears  to  have  considerable  influence  in  retarding  the 
tendency  to  putrefaction  ; and  this,  Professor  Murray 
thinks,  cannot  be  attributed  to  its  sensible  qualities,  as  it 
possesses  no  adstringency  whatever ; nor  can  it  depend 
upon  its  bitterness,  as  gentian  is  much  bitterer,  yet  less 
antiseptic.  The  medicinal  virtues  ascribed  to  quassia 
are  those  of  a tonic,  stomachic,  antiseptic,  and  febri- 
fuge. It  has  been  found  very  effectual  in  restoring 
digestion,  expelling  flatulencies,  and  removing  habitual 
costiveness,  produced  from  debility  of  the  intestines* 
and  common  to  a sedentary  life.  Dr.  Lettsom,  whose 
extensive  practice  gave  him  an  opportunity  of  trying 
the  effects  of  quassia  in  a great  number  of  cases,  says, 
“ In  debility,  succeeding  febrile  diseases,  the  Peruvian 
bark  is  most -generally  more  tonic  and  salutary  than 
any  other  vegetable  hitherto  known  ; but  in  hysterical 
atony,  to  which  the  female  sex  is  so  prone,  the  quassia 
affords  more  vigour  and  relief  to  the  system  than  the 
other,  especially  when  united  with  the  vitriolum 
album,  and  still  more  with  the  aid  of  some  absorbent.’' 
In  dyspepsia,  arising  from  hard  drinking,  and  also  in 
diarrhoeas,  the  doctor  exhibited  the  quassia  with  great 
success.  But  with  respect  to  the  tonic  and  febrifuge 
qualities  of  quassia,  he  says,  “ I by  no  means  subscribe 
to  the  Linmean  opinion,  where  the  author  declares, 
‘me  quidern  judice  chinchinam  longe  superat.”’  It 
is  very  well  known,  that  there  are  certain  peculiarities 
of  the  air,  and  idiosyncrasies  of  constitution,  unfa- 
vourable to  the  exhibition  of  Peruvian  bark,  even  in  the 
most  clear  intermissions  of  fever ; and  writers  have 
repeatedly  noticed  it.  But  this  is  comparatively  rare. 
About  midsummer,  1785,  Dr.  L.  met  with  several  in- 
stances of  low  remittent  and  nervous  fevers,  wherein 
the  bark  uniformly  aggravated  the  symptoms,  though 
given  in  intermissions ihe  most  favourable  to  its  success, 
and  wherein  quassia,  or  snakeroot,  was  successfully 
substituted.  In  such  cases,  he  mostly  observed,  that 
there  was  great  congestion  in  the  hepatic  system,  and 
the  debility  at  the  same  time  discouraged  copious  eva- 
cuations. And  in  many  fevers,  without  evident  remis- 
sions to  warrant  the  use  of  the  bark,  while  at  the  time 
increasing  debility  began  to  threaten  the  life  of  the 
patient,  the  Doctor  found  that  quassia,  or  snakeroot, 
singly  or  combined,  upheld  the  vital  powers,  and  pro- 
moted a critical  intermission  of  fever,  by  which  an 
opportunity  was  afforded  for  the  bark  to  effect  a cure. 
It  may  be  given  in  infusion,  or  in  pills  made  from  the 
watery  extract ; the  former  is  generally  preferred,  in 
the  proportion  of  three  or  four  scruples  of  the  wood  ter 
twelve  ounces  of  water. 

Quassia  simarouba.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
simarouba  quassia.  Simarouba;  Simaraba;  Euony- 
mus ; Quassia— floribus  monoids , foliis  abrupte  pm- 
nati.s , foliolis  alternis  subpetiolatis  petiolo  nude  flori- 
bus paniculatis , of  Linmeus.  The  bark  of  this  tree, 
which  is  met  with  in  the  shops,  is  obtained  from  the 
roots  ; and,  acccording  to  Dr.  Wright  of  Jamaica,  it  is 
rough,  scaly,  and  waited  ; the  inside,  when  fresh,  is  a 
full  yellow,  but  when  dried,  paler:  it  has  but  little 
smell ; the  taste  is  bitter,  but  not  disagreeable  It  is 
esteemed  in  the  West  Indies,  in  dysenteries  and  other 
fluxes,  as  restoring  tone  to  the  intestines,  allaying  their 
spasmodic  motions,  promoting  the  secretions  by  urine 
and  perspiration,  and  removing  lowness  of  spirits  at- 
tending those  diseases.  It  is  said  also  that  it  soon 


QUE 

disposes  the'patient  to  sleep ; takes  off  tlie  gripes  and 
tenesmus,  and  changes  the  stools  to  their  natural  colour 
and  consistence. 

Qua'trio.  (From  quatuor , four : so  called  because 
it  has  four  sides.)  The  astragalus. 

Queen  of  the  meadow.  See  Spircea  ulmaria 

Quercera.  See  Epiahts. 

[Quercitron.  See  Qucrcus  tinctoria.  A.] 

Que'rcula.  (Quercula  ; diminutive  of  quercus , 
the  oak  : so  called  because  it  has  leaves  like  the  oak.) 
An  antiquated  name  of  the  germander.  See  Teucrium 
chamcedrys. 

QUE'RCUS.  (From  quero , to  inquire;  because 
divinations  were  formerly  given  from  oaks  by  the 
Druids.)  The  oak. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class  Moncecia;  Order , Polyandria. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  oak.  See  Quer- 
cus robur. 

Quercus  cerris.  The  systematic  name  of  the  tree 
which  affords  the  JVuxgalla.  Galla  maxima  orbicu- 
lata.  The  gall-nut.  By  this  name  is  usually  denoted 
any  protuberance,  tubercle,  or  tumour,  produced  by 
the  puncture  of  insects  on  plants  and  trees  of  different 
kinds.  These  galls  are  of  various  forms  and  sizes, 
and  no  less  different  with  regard  to  their  internal  struc- 
ture. Some  have  only  one  cavity,  and  others  a num- 
ber of  small  cells,  communicating  with  each  other. 
Some  of  them  are  as  hard  as  the  wood  of  the  tree  they 
grow  on,  while  others  are  soft  and  spongy ; the  first 
bQng  termed  gall-nuts,  and  the  latter  berry-galls,  or 
apple-galls. 

The  gall  used  in  medicine  is  thus  produced the 
cynips  quercus  folii,  an  insect  of  the  fly-kind,  deposites 
its  eggs  in  the  leaves  and  other  tender  parts  of  the  tree. 
Around  each  puncture  an  excrescence  is  presently 
formed,  within  which  the  egg  is  hatched,  and  the  worm 
passes  through  all  the  stages  of  its  metamorphosis, 
until  it  becomes  a perfect  insect,  when  it  eats  its  way 
out  of  its  prison.  The  best  oak-galls  are  heavy,  knotted, 
and  of  a bluish  colour,  and  are  obtained  from  Aleppo. 
They  are  nearly  entirely  soluble  in  water,  with  the 
assistance  of  heat.  From  500  grains  of  Aleppo  galls, 
Sir  Humphry  Davy  obtained  by  infusion  185  grains  of 
solid  matter,  which  on  analysis  appeared  to  consist  of 
tannin  130;  mucilage,  and  matter  rendered  insoluble 
by  evaporation,  12 ; gallic  acid,  with  a little  extractive 
matter,  31  ; the  remainder,  calcareous  earth  and  saline 
matter,  12.  Another  sort  comes  from  the  south  of 
Europe,  of  a light  brownish  or  whitish  colour,  smooth, 
round,  easily  broken,  less  compact,  and  of  a much 
larger  size.  The  two  sorts  differ  only  in  size  and 
strength,  two  of  the  blue  galls  being  supposed  equiva- 
lent in  this  respect  to  three  of  the  others. 

Oak-galls  are  supposed  to  be  the  strongest  adstringent 
in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  Both  water  and  spirit  take 
up  nearly  all  their  virtue,  though  the  spirituous  extract 
is  the  strongest  preparation.  The  powder  is,  however, 
the  best  form  ; and  the  dose  is  from  a few  grains  to 
half  a drachm. 

They  are  not  much  used  in  medicine,  though  they 
are  said  to  be  beneficial  in  intermittents.  Dr.  Cullen 
has  cured  agues,  by  giving  half  a drachm  of  the  pow- 
der of  galls  every  two  or  three  hours  during  the  inter- 
mission ; and  by  it  alone,  or  joined  with  camomile 
flowers,  has  prevented  the  return  of  the  paroxysms. 
But  the  Doctor  states  the  amount  of  his  results  only  to 
be  this : that,  “ in  many  cases,  the  galls  cured  the  inter 
luittents  ; but  that  it  failed  also  in  many  cases  in  which 
the  Peruvian  bark  afterward  proved  successful.”  A 
fomentation,  made  by  macerating  half  an  ounce  of 
bi  uised  galls  in  a quart  of  boiling  water  for  an  hour,  has 
been  found  useful  for  the  piles,  the  prolapsus  ani,  and 
the  fluor  albus,  applied  cold.  An  injection,  simply  ad- 
stringent, is  made  by  diluting  this  fomentation,  and 
used  in  gleets  and  leucorrhcea.  The  camphorated 
ointment  of  galls  has  been  found  also  serviceable  in 
piles,  after  the  use  of  leeches ; and  is  made  by  incor- 
porating half  a drachm  of  camphor  with  one  ounce  of 
hog’s  lard,  and  adding  two  drachms  of  galls  in  very  fine 
powder.  In  fact,  galls  may  be  employed  for  the  same 
purposes  as  oak-bark,  and  are  used  under  the  same 
forms. 

Quercus  esculus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Italian  oak,  whose  acorns  are,  in  times  of  scarcity,  said 
to  afford  a meal  of  which  bread  is  made. 

Quercus  marina.  See  Fucus  vcsiculosus. 

228 


QUE 

Quercus  phellos.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
willow-leaved  oak,  the  acorns  of  which  are  much 
sweeter  than  chesnuts,  and  much  eaten  by  the  Indians. 
They  afford,  by  expression,  an  oil  little  inferior  to  oil 
of  almonds. 

Quercus  robur.  The  oak-tree.  Balanos.  Quercus 
— foliis  oblongis,  glabris  sinuatis , lobis  rotundis , 
glandibus  oblongis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  valuable  tree  is 
indigenous  to  Britain.  Its  adstringent  effects  were 
sufficiently  known  to  the  ancients,  but  it  is  the  bark 
which  is  now  directed  for  medicinal  use  by  our  phar- 
macopoeias. Oak-bark  manifests  to  the  taste  a strong 
adstringency,  accompanied  with  a moderate  bitterness. 
Like  other  adstringents,  it  has  been  recommended  in 
agues,  and  for  restraining  haemorrhages,  alvine  fluxes, 
and  other  immoderate  evacuations.  A decoction  of  it 
has  likewise  been  advantageously  employed  as  a 
gargle,  and  as  a fomentation  or  lotion  in  procidentia 
recti  el  uteri. 

The  fruit  of  this  tree  was  the  food  of  the  first  ages ; 
but  when  corn  was  cultivated,  acorns  were  neglected. 
They  are  of  little  use  with  us,  except  for  fattening  hogs 
and  other  cattle  and  poultry.  Among  the  Spaniards, 
the  acorn,  or  glans  iberica,  is  said  to  have  long  remain- 
ed a delicacy,  and  to  have  been  served  up  in  the  form 
of  a dessert.  In  dearths,  acorns  have  been  sometimes 
dried,  ground  into  meal,  and  baked  as  bread.  Bar- 
tholin relates  that  they  are  used  in  Norway  for  this 
purpose.  The  inhabitants  of  Chio  held  out  a long 
siege  without  any  other  food  ; and  in  a time  of  scarcity 
in  France,  A.  D.  1709,  they  recurred  to  this  food.  But 
they  are  said  to  be  hard  of  digestion,  and  to  occasion 
headaches,  flatulency,  and  colics.  In  Smoland,  how- 
ever, many  instances  occur,  in  which  they  have  sup- 
plied a salutary  and  nutritious  food.  With  this  view 
they  are  previously  boiled  in  water  and  separated  from 
their  husks,  and  then  dried  and  ground;  and  the  pow- 
der is  mixed  with  about  one-half,  or  one-third  of  corn 
flour.  A decoction  of  acorns  is  reputed  good  against 
dysenteries  and  colics : and  a pessary  of  them  is  said 
to  be  useful  in  immoderate  fluxes  of  the  menses.  Some 
have  recommended  the  powder  of  acorns  in  intermit- 
tent fever ; and  in  Brunswick,  they  mix  it  with  warm 
ale,  and  administer  it  for  producing  a sweat  in  cases  of 
erysipelas.  Acorns  roasted  and  bruised  have  restrain- 
ed a violent  diarrhoea.  For  other  medical  uses  to 
which  they  have  been  applied,  see  Murray’s  Appar 
Medic,  voi.  i.  page  100. 

From  some  late  reports  of  the  Academy  of  Sciences, 
at  Petersburg!!,  we  learn  that  acorns  are  the  best  sub- 
stitute to  coffee  that  has  been  hitherto  known.  To 
communicate  to  them  the  oily  properties  of  coffee,  the 
following  process  is  recommended.  When  the  acorns 
have  been  toasted  brown,  add  fresh  butter  in  small 
pieces  to  them,  while  hot  in  the  ladle,  and  stir  them 
with  care,  cover  the  ladle  and  shake  it,  that  the  whole 
may  be  well  mixed.  The  acorns  of  the  Holm  oak  are 
formed  at  Venice  into  cups  about  one  inch  and  a hah 
in  diameter,  and  somewhat  less  in  depth.  They  are 
used  for  dressing  leather,  and  instead  of  galls  for  dying 
woollen  cloth  black. 

Quercus  suber.  The  systematic  name  of  the  cork- 
tree. Suber.  The  fruit  of  this  tree  is  much  more  nu- 
tritious than  our  acorns,  and  is  sweet  and  often  eaten 
when  roasted  in  some  parts  of  Spam.  The  bark, 
called  cork,  when  burned,  is  applied  as  an  astringent  ap- 
plication to  bleeding  piles,  and  to  allay  the  pain  usually 
attendant  on  liaunorrhoids,  when  mixed  with  an  oint- 
ment. Pessaries  and  other  chirurgical  instruments  are 
also  made  of  this  useful  bark. 

[“Quercus  alba.  White  oak.  Most,  and  perhaps 
all  the  species  of  oak,  have  a high  degree  of  astrin- 
gency,  depending  upon  tannin,  which  they  possess  in 
great  quantities,  and  on  account  of  which  they  are  ex- 
tensively used  in  the  preparation  of  leather.  The 
white  oak  is  one  of  the  American  species,  which  is 
most  esteemed  for  this  property.  The  bark  of  the 
young  branches  is  probably  more  astringent  than  that 
of  the  trunk,  on  account  of  the  mass  of  dead  cortical 
layers,  which  constitutes  a part  of  the  thickness  of  the 
latter.  Oak-bark  has  been  given  in  some  instances  as 
a substitute  for  cinchona,  to  which,  however,  it  is 
greatly  inferior.  Its  chief  use  is  an  external  astrin- 
gent and  antiseptic.  A strong  decoction  is  employed 
with  advantage  as  a gargle  in  cvnanche,  and  as  a lotion 
in  gangrenous  ulcers  and  offensive  discharges  of  differ- 
ent kinds.” — Big-  J\fat.  Med.  A.l 


RAB 


RAC 


L"  Quercus  tinctoria.  Black  oak.  This  is  also 
a native  species,  the  bark  of  which  affords  the  extract 
known  to  dyers,  by  the  name  of  quercitron.  Its  pro- 
perties are  similar  to  those  of  the  preceding.  Botli  are 
very  common  trees,  and  are  properly  substituted  for 
the  quercus  robur , of  European  Dispensatories,  which 
is  not  found  here.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

[Querci  Americans.  American  oaks.  These  have 
been  described  and  delineated  by  Andrew  Michaux,  in 
his  history  of  the  oaks  of  America.  He  describes 
twenty-nine  species  and  varieties  of  oaks  growing 
spontaneously  in  North  America.  He  arranges  them 
in  the  following  manner,  viz. 

“ Methodical  disposition  of  American  oaks. 
SECTION  I. 

Quercus,  foliis  adults  plants  muticis ; fructu  pedun- 
culato ; fructificatione  annua : — Specie  6ta  bienni. 
Division  1. 

Foliis — lobatis. 

Species  1.  Quercus  obtusiloba,  upland  white  oak,  iron 
oak. 

. . 2.  Q.  macrocarpa,  over  cup,  white  oak. 

• . 3.  Q.  lyrata,  water  white  oak. 

. . 4.  Q.  alba-variety,  pennatifida , ) whk  kg 

repanda , J 

Division  2. 

Foliis — dentatis. 

Species  5.  d.  Prinus— var.  palustris— swamp  chesnut 
oak. 

monticola — mountain  ches- 
nut oak,  rock  oak. 
acuminata  — narrow  leaf 
chesnut  oak. 

pumila — Chinquapin  oak. 
tomentosa — Illinois  oak. 
Division  3. 

Foliis — integris. 

Species  6.  duercus  virens. — Live  oak  of  Carolina. 
SECTION  II. 

duercus,  foliis  adults  plants  setaceo-mucronatis ; 
fructu  subsessili  •,  fructificatione  bienni. 

Division  1. 

Foliis  integris. 

Species  7.  d.  Phellos — var.  sylvatica,  willow  oak. 

maritima,  sea  willow  oak. 
pumila,  dwarf  willow  oak. 
Species  8.  d.  Cinerea — upland  willow  oak, 

. . 9.  d.  Imbricaria— shingle  willow  oak. 

. 10.  Q.  Laurifolia — swamp  willow  oak. 

obtusiloba. 

Division  2. 

Foliis — breviter  lobatis. 

Species  11.  d.  Aquatica — water  oak. 

..  12.  d.  Nigra— black  oak. 

. . 13.  d-  Tinctoria — var.  angulosa,  great  black 

cak,  Champlain  black 
oak. 

sinuosa — quercitron  oak. 
Species  14.  d.  Triloba — downy  black  oak. 


Division  3. 

Foliis  profunde  multifidis. 

Species  15.  d.  Banisteri — runuing  downy-oak. 

. . 16.  d.  Falcata — downy  red-oak. 

. . 17.  d.  Catesbuei— sandy  red-oak. 

. . 18.  d.  Coccinea — scarlet-oak. 

. . 19.  d.  Palustris — swamp  red-oak. 

. . 20.  d.  Rubra — red-oak. 

“We  have  been  the  more  particular  to  exhibit  this 
systematic  arrangement  of  the  oaks,  because  we  be- 
lieve it  will  be  welcome  to  our  readers,  and  enable 
them  better  to  understand  this  difficult  genus  of  plants.” 
— Med.  Repos.  A.] 

dUESNAY,  Francis,  was  born  near  Paris  in  1694. 
Though  of  humble  parentage,  and  almost  without  edu- 
cation, he  displayed  an  extraordinary  zeal  for  know- 
ledge, and  after  studying  medicine  in  the  French  me- 
tropolis, he  settled  at  Mantes.  Having  ably  controvert- 
ed the  doctrines  of  Silva  respecting  blood-letting,  he 
was  appointed  secretary  to  the  Academy  of  Surgery ; 
but  the  duties  of  this  office  having  impaired  his  health, 
he  graduated  in  physic,  and  was  made  consulting  phy- 
sician to  the  king.  He  was  subsequently  honoured 
with  letters  of  nobility,  and  other  marks  of  royal  fa- 
vour ; and  became  a member  of  several  learned  socie- 
ties. He  died  in  1774.  He  left  several  works,  which 
display  much  research  and  observation,  but  with  too 
great  partiality  to  hypothesis.  Besides  the  essays  in 
favour  of  bleeding  in  many  diseases,  his  preface  to  the 
Memoirs  of  the  Academy  of  Surgery,  gained  him  con- 
siderable applause : as  likewise  his  Researches  into  the 
Progress  of  Surgery  in  France,  though  the  accuracy  of 
some  of  his  statements  was  controverted. 

Quick-grass.  See  Triticum  repens. 

Quick-lime.  See  Lime. 

QUICKSILVER.  See  Mercury. 

Quid  pro  quo.  These  words  are  applied  the  same 
as  succedaneum,  when  one  thing  is  made  use  of  to  sup- 
ply the  defect  of  another. 

QUIESCENT.  Quiescens.  At  rest. 

Quiescent  affinity.  See  Affinity  quiescent. 

Quina  quina.  The  Peruvian  bark. 

QUINCE  See  Pyrus  cydonia. 

Quince , Bengal.  See  Erateva  marmelos. 

QUINCY.  See  Cynanche. 

QUINIA.  See  Cinchonina. 

QUININA.  See  Cinchonina. 

Quinin.e  sulphas.  Sulphate  of  quinine.  Sulphate 
of  cinchonina.  A saline  combination  of  sulphuric 
acid,  with  the  active  principle  of  cinchona  bark.  See 
Cinchonina. 

Quinine , sulphate  of.  See  Quinines  sulphas. 

QUINQUEFO'LIUM.  (From  quinque,  five,  and 
folium , a leaf : so  called  because  it  has  five  leaves  on 
each  foot-stalk.)  Pentaphyllum.  Cinquefoil,  or  five- 
leaved grass.  See  Potentilla  reptans. 

Quinquina.  See  Cinchona. 

QUOTIDIAN.  See  Febris  intermittens. 


JR 


T?  or  R.  This  letter  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
-a*'*  a prescription,  as  a contraction  of  recipe , take: 
thus,  R Magnes , 3 j.  signifies,  Take  a drachm  of  mag- 
nesia. “ In  ancient  times,  such  was  the  supposed  im- 
portance,” says  Dr.  Paris,  in  his  most  excellent  work 
on  pharmacology,  “of  planatory  influence,  that  it  was 
usual  to  prefix  a symbol  of  the  planet  under  whose 
reign  the  ingredients  were  to  be  collected  ; and  it  is  not 
perhaps  generally  known,  that  the  character  which  we 
at  this  day  place  at  the  head  of  our  prescriptions,  and 
which  is  understood  and  is  supposed  to  mean  recipe , 
i3  a relict  of  the  astrological  symbol  of  Jupiter,  as 
may  be  seen  in  many  of  the  older  works  on  phar- 
macy.” 

RABBIT.  A well  known  animal  of  the  hare  kind : 
the  I.epus  cuniculus  of  Linnreus,  the  flesh  of  which  is 
tender,  and  easy  of  digestion. 

RA'BIES.  (From  rabio,  to  be  mad.)  Madness. 
Generally  applied  to  that  disease  of  a dog,  under  which 


the  saliva  has  the  property  of  producing  hydrophobia 
in  man.  See  Hydrophobia. 

Rabies  canina.  See  Hydrophobia. 

RACE'MUS.  ( Racemus , i.  m. ; from  ramus.)  A 
raceme  or  cluster.  A species  of  inflorescence,  consist- 
ing of  a cluster  of  flowers,  rather  distant  from  each 
other,  each  on  its  own  proper  stalk,  the  tops  of  the 
lower  ones  not  coming  near  to  the  tops  of  the  upper 
ones,  as  in  a corymb,  and  all  connected  by  one  com- 
mon stalk  ; as  a bunch  of  currants.  It  is  therefore  a 
kind  of  pedunculated  spike. 

From  the  division  of  the  common  stalk,  it  is  deno- 
minated, 

1.  Simple,  not  having  any  branches;  as  in  Ribes 
rubra,  and  Acer  pseudo-platanus. 

2.  Compound , being  branched;  as  in  Vitis  vini- 
fera. 

3.  Conjugate , two  clusters  going  from  the  end  of  the 
common  peduncle. 


229 


RAD 


RAC 

4.  Aggregate , several  being  gathered  together ; as  in 
Actaea  racemosa. 

5.  Unilateral,  the  proper  stalks  of  the  flowers  pro- 
ceeding from  one  side  only  of  the  (jimraon  stalk  ; as  in 
Pyrola  secunda. 

6.  Second,  the  proper  stalks  of  the  flowers  come  from 
every  part  of  the  common  stalk,  yet  they  all  look  to  one 
side  only  ; as  in  Andromeda  racemosa,  Teucrium  sco- 
rodonia,  &c. 

From  the  direction  of  the  racemus, 

7.  Erectus ; as  in  Chenopodium  album,  Ribes  alpi- 
num,  and  Astragalus  austriacus. 

8.  Pendulus  ; as  in  Cytisus  laburnum. 

9.  Laxus , easily  bent ; as  in  Celosia  trigynia,  and 
Solanum  carolinense. 

10.  Strictus,  bent  with  difficulty;  as  in  Ononis 
cemua. 

From  its  vesture, 

11.  Nudus ; as  inVaccinium  legustrinum. 

12.  Pilusus;  as  in  Ribes  nigrum. 

13.  Foliatus  ; as  in  Chenopodium  ambrosioides. 

14.  Bracteatus ; as  in  Andromeda. racemosa. 

RACHIA'LGIA.  (From  pax‘S>  tiie  sPinei  and 

aXyof,  pain.)  A pain  in  the  spine.  It  was  formerly 
applied  to  several  species  of  colic  which  induced  pain 
in  the  back. 

RACHIS.  See  Rhachis. 

RACHI'TIS.  ( Rachitis , idis.  f. ; from  pa%tj,  the 
spine  of  the  back : so  called  because  it  was  supposed 
to  originate  in  a fault  of  the  spinal  marrow.)  Cyrto- 
nosus.  The  English  disease.  The  rickets.  A genus 
of  disease  in  the  Class  Cachexia,  and  Order  Intumes- 
centice,  of  Cullen  ; known  by  a large  head,  prominent 
forehead,  protruded  sternum,  flattened  ribs,  big  belly, 
and  emaciated  limbs,  with  great  debility.  It  is  usually 
confined  in  its  attack  between  the  two  periods  of  nine 
months  and  two  years  of  age,  seldom  appearing  sooner 
than  the  former,  or  showing  itself  for  the  first  time,  after 
the  latter  period.  The  muscles  become  flaccid,  the 
head  enlarges,  the  carotids  are  distended,  the  limbs 
waste  away,  and  their  epiphyses  increase  in  bulk. 
The  bones  and  spine  of  the  back  are  variously  dis- 
torted ; disinclination  to  muscular  exertion  follows ; the 
abdomen  swells  and  grows  hard;  the  stools  are  fre- 
quent and  loose ; a slow  fever  succeeds,  with  cough 
and  difficulty  of  respiration;  atrophy  is  confirmed,  and 
death  ensues.  Frequently  it  happens  that  nature  re- 
stores the  general  health,  and  leaves  the  limbs  dis- 
torted. 

After  death,  the*  liver  and  the  spleen  have  been 
found  enlarged  and  scirrhous ; the  mesenteric  glands  in- 
durated, and  the  lungs  either  charged  with  vomicte,  or 
adhering  to  the  pleura;  the  bones  soft,  the  brain  flac- 
cid, or  oppressed  with  lymph,  and  the  distended  bowels 
loaded  most  frequently  with  slime,  sometimes  with 
worms. 

It  is  remarkable,  that  in  the  kindred  disease,  which 
Hoffman  and  Sauvages  call  the  atrophy  of  infants,  we 
have  many  of  the  same  symptoms  and  the  same  ap- 
pearances nearly  after  death.  They  who  perish  by 
this  disease,  says  Hoflman,  have  the  mesenteric  glands 
enlarged  and  scirrhous;  the  liver  and  spleen  obstructed, 
and  increased  in  size ; the  intestines  are  much  inflated, 
and  are  loaded  with  black  and  foetid  matters,  and  the 
muscles,  more  especially  of  the  abdomen,  waste  away. 

In  the  treatment  of  rickets,  besides  altering  any  im- 
proprieties in  the  regimen,  which  may  have  co-operated 
in  producing  it,  those  means  should  be  employed,  by 
which  the  system  may  be  invigorated.  Tonic  medi- 
cines are  therefore  proper,  particularly  chalybeates, 
which  are  easily  given  to  children;  and  the  cold- bath 
may  be  essentially  beneficial.  The  child  should  be 
regularly  well  exercised, kept  clean  and  dry,  and  a pure 
air  selected ; the  food  nutritious  and  easy  of  digestion. 
When  the  appetite  is  much  impaired,  an  occasional 
gentle  emetic  may  do  good;  more  frequently  tonic 
aperients,  as  rhubarb,  will  be  required  to  regulate  the 
bowels ; or  sometimes  a dose  of  calomel  in  gross  habits. 
Of  late,  certain  compounds  of  lime  have  been  strongly 
recommended,  particularly  the  phosphate,  which  is  the 
eartl.v  basis  of  the  bones ; though  it  does  not  appear 
likely  to  enter  the  system,  unless  rendered  soluble  by 
an  excess  of  acid.  Others  have  conceived  the  disease 
to  arise  from  an  excess  of  acid,  and  therefore  recom- 
mended alkalies;  which  may  certainly  be  useful  in 
correcting  the  morbid  prevalence  of  acid  in  the  primse 
vise,  so  frequent  in  children.  When  the  bones  are 


inclined  to  bend,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  throw  the 
weight  of  the  body  too  much  upon  them. 

Racka'sira  balsamum.  See  Balsamum.  rackasira • 

RAOO'SIS.  (Fiom  paieos,  a rag.)  A ragged  exco- 
riation of  the  relaxed  scrotum. 

RADCLIFFE,  John,  was  born  at  Wakefield,  York- 
skire,  in  1650.  He  went  to  Oxford  at  the  age  of  15 ; 
and  having  determined  upon  the  medical  profession,  he 
passed  rapidly  through  the  preliminary  studies,  though 
with  very  little  profoundness  of  research ; and  having 
taken  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  medicine  in  1675,  he 
immediately  began  to  practise  there.  He  professed  to 
pay  very  little  regard  to  the  rules  generally  followed, 
-which  naturally  drew  upon  him  the  enmity  of  the  old 
practitioners;  yet  his  vivacity  and  talents  procured 
him  a great  number  of  patients,  even  of  the  highest 
rank.  In  1684,  he  removed  to  London,  having  taken 
his  doctor’s  degree  two  years  before,  and  his  success 
was  unusually  rapid ; in  the  second  year  he  was  ap- 
pointed physician  to  the  princess  Anne  of  Denmark  ; 
and  after  the  Revolution,  he  was  consulted  by  king 
William.  By  his  rough  independence  of  spirit  and 
freedom  of  language,  however,  he  ultimately  lost  all 
favour  at  court ; though  he  is  said  to  have  been  still 
privately  consulted  in  cases  of  emergency.  In  1703, 
he  had  an  attack  of  pleurisy,  which  had  nearly  proved 
fatal  from  his  own  imprudence.  He  continued,  after 
his  recovery,  in  very  extensive  practice,  notwithstand- 
ing the  caprice  which  he  continually  displayed  : but  his 
declining  to  attend  queen  Anne  in  her  last  illness, 
though  it  does  not  appear  that  he  was  sent  for  officially, 
excited  the  popular  resentment  strongly  against  him ; 
and  his  apprehensions  of  the  consequences  are  sup- 
posed to  have  accelerated  his  own  death,  which  hap- 
pened about  three  months  after,  in  1714.  He  was 
buried  in  St.  Mary’s  church  at  Oxford.  He  founded  a 
noble  library  and  infirmary  at  that  university;  and 
also  endowed  two  travelling  medical  fellowships,  with 
an  annual  income  of  3(XW.  attached  to  each.  It  does 
not  appear  that  he  ever  attempted  to  write;  and, 
indeed,  he  is  believed  to  have  been  very  little  conver- 
sant with  books  ; yet  the  universal  reputation  which  he 
acquired  and  maintained,  notwithstanding  his  capri- 
cious conduct,  seem  to  sanction  the  testimony  of  Dr. 
Mead,  that  “he  was  deservedly  at  the  head  of  his 
profession,  on  account  of  his  great  medical  penetration 
and  experience.” 

RADIAL.  ( Radialis ; from  radius,  the  name  of  a 
bone.)  Belonging  to  the  radius. 

Radial  artery.  Arteria  radialis.  A branch  of 
the  humeral  artery  that  runs  down  the  side  of  the 
radius. 

Radialis  externus  brevior.  See  Extensor  carpi 

radialis  brevior. 

Radialis  externus  longior.  See  Extensor  carpi 
radialis  longior. 

Radialis  externus  primus.  See  Extensor  carpi 
radialis  longior. 

Radialis  internus.  See  Flexor  carpi  radialis. 

Radialis  secundus.  See  Extensor  caipi  radialis 
brevior. 

RADICAL.  In  chemistry,  this  term  is  applied  to 
that  which  is  considered  as  constituting  the  distin- 
guishing part  of  an  acid,  by  its  union  with  the  acidi- 
fying principle  or  oxygen,  which  is  common  to  all 
acids.  Thus  sulphur  is  the  radical  of  the  sulphuric 
and  sulphurous  acids.  It  is  sometimes  called  the  base 
of  the  acid ; but  base  is  a term  of  more  extensive 
application. 

Radical  vinegar.  See  Acetum. 

RADICALIS.  Radical:  applied  to  leaves.  Folia 
radicalia  are  such  as  spring  from  the  root,  like  those 
of  the  cowslip. 

RAD1CANS.  A botanical  term,  applied  to  a stem 
which  clings  to  any  other  body  for  support,  by  means 
of  fibres  which  do  not  imbibe  nourishment ; as  the  ivy, 
Hedera  helix. 

RADI'CULA.  (Diminutive  of  radix,  a root.)  1.  A 
radicle,  rootlet,  or  little  root.  It  probably  means  the 
fibres  w’hich  come  from  the  main  root,  and  which  are 
the  most  essential  to  the  life  of  the  plant,  they  only 
imbibing  the  nourishment. 

2.  Applied  to  the  origin  of  vessels  and  nerves. 

3.  The  common  radish  is  sometimes  so  called.  See 
Raphanus  sativus. 

RADISH.  See  Cochlearia  and  Raphanus. 

Radish,  garden.  See  Raphanus  sativus. 


RAD 


RAD 


Radish , horse.  See  Cochlcaria  armoracia. 

RA'DIUS,  1.  A bone  of  the  forearm,  which  has 
gotten  its  name  from  its  supposed  resemblance  to  the 
spoke  of  a wheel,  or  to  a weaver’s  beam  ; and  some- 
times, from  its  supporting  the  hand,  it  has  been  called 
manubrium  manus.  Like  the  ulna,  it  is  of  a triangular 
figure,  but  it  differs  from  that  bone,  in  growing  larger 
as  it  descends,  so  that  its  smaller  part  answers  to  the 
larger  part  of  the  ulna,  and  vice  versa.  Of  its  two 
extremities,  the  uppermost  and  smallest  is  formed  into 
a small  rounded  head,  furnished  with  cartilage,  and 
hollowed  at  its  summit,  for  an  articulation  with  the 
little  head  at  the  side  of  the  pulley  of  the  os  humeri. 
The  round  border  of  this  head,  next  the  ulna,  is  formed 
for  an  articulation  with  the  ’/ess  sigmoid  cavity  of 
that  bone.  This  little  head  of  the  radius  is  supported 
by  a neek,  at  the  bottom  of  which,  laterally,  is  a con- 
siderable tuberosity,  into  the  posterior  half  of  which  is 
inserted  the  posterior  tendon  of  the  biceps,  while  the 
interior  half  is  covered  with  cartilage,  and  surrounded 
with  a capsular  ligament,  so  as  to  allow  this  tendon  to 
slide  upon  it  as  upon  a pulley.  Immediately  below 
this  tuberosity,  the  body  of  the  bone  may  be  said  to 
begin.  We  find  it  slightly  curved  throughout  its 
whole  length,  by  which  means  a greater  space  is 
formed  for  the  lodgment  of  muscles,  and  ft  is  enabled 
to  cross  the  ulna  without  compressing  them.  Of 
the  three  surfaces  to  be  distinguished  on  the  body 
of  the  bone,  the  external  and  internal  ones  are  the 
broadest  and  flattest.  The  anterior  surface  is  nar- 
rower and  more  convex.  Of  its  angles,  the  external 
and  internal  ones  are  rounded;  but  the  posterior 
angle,  which  is  turned  towards  the  ulna,  is  formed  into 
a sharp  spine,  which  serves  for  tho attachment  of  the 
interosseous  ligament,  of  which  mention  is  made  in 
the  description  of  the  ulna.  This  strong  ligament, 
which  is  a little  interrupted  above  and  below,  serves 
not  only  to  connect  the  bones  of  the  forearm  to  each 
other,  but  likewise  to  afford  a greater  surface  for  the 
lodgment  of  muscles.  On  the  forepart  of  the  bone, 
and  at  about  one-third  of  its  length  from  its  upper 
end,  we  observe  a channel  for  vessels,  slanting  ob- 
liquely upwards.  Towards  its  lower  extremity,  the 
radius  becomes  broader,  of  an  irregular  shape,  and 
somewhat  flattened,  affording  three  surfaces,  of  which 
the  posterior  one  is  the  smallest ; the  second,  which  is 
a continuation  of  the  internal  surface  of  the  body  of 
the  bone,  is  broader  and  flatter  than  the  first ; and  the 
third,  which  is  the  broadest  of  the  three,  answers  to 
the  anterior  and  external  surface  of  the  body  of  the 
bone.  On  this  last,  we  observe  several  sinuosities, 
covered  with  a thin  layer  of  cartilage,  upon  which 
slide  the  tendons  of  several  muscles  of  the  wrist  and 
fingers.  The  lowest  part  of  the  bone  is  formed  into  an 
oblong  articulating  cavity,  divided  into  two  by  a slight 
transverse  rising.  This  cavity  is  formed  for  an  articu- 
lation with  the  bones  of  the  wrist.  Towards  the  an- 
terior and  convex  surface  of  the  bone,  this  cavity  is 
defended  by  a remarkable  eminence,  called  the  styloid 
process  of  the  radius,  which  is  covered  with  a carti- 
lage that  is  extended  to  the  lower  extremity  of  the 
ulna ; a ligament  is  likewise  stretched  from  it  to  the 
wrist.  Besides  this  large  cavity,  the  radius  has 
another  much  smaller  one,  opposite  its  styloid  process, 
which  is  lined  with  cartilage,  and  receives  the  rounded 
surface  of  the  ulna.  The  articulation  of  the  radius 
with  the  less  sigmoid  cavity  of  the  ulna,  is  strength- 
ened by  a circular  ligament  which  is  attached  to  the 
two  extremities  of  that  cavity,  and  from  thence  sur- 
rounds the  head  of  the  radius.  This  ligament  is  nar- 
rowest, but  thickest  at  its  middle  part.  But,  besides 
this  ligament,  which  connects  the  two  bones  of  the 
forearm  with  each  other,  the  ligaments  which  secure 
the  articulation  of  the  radius  with  the  os  humeri,  are 
common  both  to  it  and  to  the  ulna,  and  therefore  can- 
not* well  be  understood  till  both  these  bones  are  de- 
scribed. These  ligaments  are  a capsular  and  two 
lateral  ligaments.  The  capsular  ligament  is  attached 
»o  the  anterior  and  posterior  surface  of  the  lower  ex- 
tremity of  the  os  humeri,  to  the  uppefedges  and  sides 
of  the  cavities,  we  remarked,  at  the  bottom  of  the 
pulley  and  little  head,  and  likewise  to  some  part  of  the 
condyles  : from  thence  it  is  spread  over  the  ulna,  to  the 
edges  of  the  greater  sigmoid  cavity,  so  as  to  include  in 
it  the  end  of  the  olecranon  and  of  the  coronoid  process ; 
and  it  is  likewise  fixed  round  the  neck  of  the  radius, 
so  as  to  include  the  head  of  that  bone  within  it.  The 


lateral  ligaments  may  be  distinguished  into  external 
and  internal,  or,  according  to  Winslow,  into  brachio- 
radialis  and  brachio-cubitalis . They  both  descend 
laterally  from  the  lowest  part  of  each  condyle  of  the 
os  humeri,  and,  from  their  fibres  spreading  wide  as  they 
descend,  have  been  compared  to  a goose’s  foot.  The 
internal  ligament  or  brachio-cubitalis,  which  is  the 
longest  and  thickest  of  the  two,  is  attached  to  the  co- 
ronoid process  of  the  ulna.  The  external  ligament,  or 
brachio-radialis,  terminates  in  the  circular  ligament  of 
the  radius.  Both  these  ligaments  adhere  firmly  to  the 
capsular  ligament,  and  to  the  tendons  of  some  of  the 
adjacent  muscles.  In  considering  the  articulation  of 
the  forearm  with  the  os  humeri,  we  find  that  when 
both  the  bones  are  moved  together  upon  the  os  humeri, 
the  motion  of  the  ulna  upon  the  pulley  allows  only  of 
flexion  and  extension ; whereas,  when  the  palm  of  the 
hand  is  turned  downwards  or  upwards,  or,  in  other 
words,  in  pronation  and  supination,  we  see  the  radius 
moving  upon  its  axis,  and  in  these  motions  its  head 
turns  upon  the  little  head  of  the  os  humeri  at  the  side 
of  the  pulley,  while  its  circular  edge  Mis  in  the  less 
sigmoid  cavity  of  the  ulna.  At  the  lower  end  of  the 
forearm  the  edge  of  the  ulna  is  received  into  a super- 
ficial cavity  at  the  side  of  the  radius.  This  articula- 
tion, which  is  surrounded  by  a loose  capsular  ligament, 
concurs  with  the  articulation  above,  in  enabling  the 
radius  to  turn  with  great  facility  upon  its  axis ; and  it 
is  chiefly  with  assistance  of  this  bone  that  we  are 
enabled  to  turn  the  palm  of  the  hand  upwards  or 
downwards,  the  ulna  having  but  a very  inconsiderable 
share  in  these  motions. 

2.  The  term  radius,  in  botany,  is  applied  to  the 
marginal  part  of  the  corolla  of  compound  flowers; 
thus,  in  the  daisy,  the  marginal  white  flowrets  form 
the  rays  or  radius,  and  the  yellow  central  ones  the  dis- 
cus or  disk.  See  Discus. 

The  radii  of  a peduncle  of  a compound  umbel  are 
the  common  stalks  of  the  umbel,  and  pedicelli  are  the 
stalks  of  the  flowrets. 

RA'DIX.  ( Radix , dicis.  f.)  A root.  I.  In  botany, 
that  part  of  a plant  which  imbibes  its  nourishment, 
producing  the  herbaceous  part  and  the  fructification, 
and  which  consists  of  the  caudex , or  body,  and  radi- 
cles.— Linnaeus. 

That  part  of  the  plant  by  which  it  attaches  itself  to 
the  soil  in  which  it  grows,  or  to  the  substance  on 
which  it  feeds,  and  is  the  principal  organ  of  nutrition. 
—Keith. 

In  all  plants,  the  primary  root  is  a simple  elongation 
of  that  part  which,  during  the  germination  of  the  seed, 
is  first  protruded,  and  is  denominated  the  radicle;  and 
as  the  plant  continues  to  grow,  the  root  gradually  as- 
sumes a determinate  form  and  structure,  which  differs 
materially  in  different  plants,  but  always  is  found  simi- 
lar in  all  the  individuals  of  the  same  species.  From 
the  figure,  duration,  direction,  and  insertion,  roots  are 
arranged  into,  % 

From  their  figure , 

1.  Radix  fusif or  mis,  spindle-shaped,  of  an  oblong, 
tapering  form,  pointed  at  its  extremity;  as  in  Daucue 
ca.rota , the  carrot;  Beta  vulgaris , beet;  Pastinaca 
sativa , parsnip,  &c. 

2.  Radix  ramosa,  branched,  which  consists  of  a 
caudex , or  main  root,  divided  into  lateral  branches, 
which  are  again  subdivided  ; so  that  it  resembles  in  its 
divisions  the  stem  and  branches  inverted.  Most  trees, 
shrubs,  and  many  herbaceous  plants,  have  this  form  of 
root. 

3.  Radix  fibrosa,  fibrous,  consisting  wholly  of  small 
radicles ; as  the  Hordeum  vulgare , common  barley, 
and  most  grasses. 

4.  Radix  prcemorsa,  abrupt  or  truncated,  appearing 
as  if  bitten  off  close  to  the  top  ; as  in  Scabiosa  succisa , 
the  devil’s  bite ; Plantago  major,  larger  plantain  ; Hie- 
racium  prtemorsum,  &c. 

5.  Radix  globosa , globose,  having  the  caudex  round, 
or  subrotund,  sending  off  radicles  in  many  places;  as 
in  Cyclamen  europeum , sow-bread;  Brasica  rap  a, 
turnip,  &c. 

6.  Radix  tuberosa,  tuberose,  furnished  with  farina- 
ceous tubers;  as  in  Solajium  tuberosum,  the  potato: 
Helianthus  tuberosus , Jerusalem  artichoke,  & c. 

7.  Radix  pendula , pendulous,  consisting  of  tubers 
connected  to  the  plant  by  thin,  or  filiform  portions ; as 
in  Spirma  filipendula , common  dropwort;  vaonia 
officinalis,  pa:ony, 


RAM 


RAN 


8.  Radix  granulata , granulated,  formed  of  many 
small  globules;  as  in  Saxifraga  granulata,  meadow 
saxifrage,  &c. 

9.  Radix  articulata,  articulated,  or  jointed,  appa- 
rently formed  of  distinct  pieces  united,  as  if  one  piece 
grew  out  of  another,  with  radicles  proceeding  from 
each  joint : as  in  Oxalis  acelocella , woodsorrel ; Asa- 
rum  canadense,  wild  ginger,  &c. 

10.  Radix  dentata,  toothed,  which  has  a fleshy  cau- 
dex,  with  teeth  like  prolongations;  as  in  Ophrys  coral- 
lorhiza. 

11.  Radix  squamosa , scaly,  covered  with  fleshy 
scales;  as  in  Lathrcea  squamarta,  toothwort,  &c. 

12.  Radix  fascicularis , bundled,  or  fasciculate : as 
in  Ophrys , nidus  avis , &c. 

13.  Radix  cava , hollow;  as  in  Fumaria  cava. 
There  are  other  distinctions  of  modern  botanists  de- 
rived from  the  form ; as  conical,  subrotund,  napiform, 
placentiform,  filiform,  capillary,  tufted,  funiliform,  ge- 
niculate, contorted,  moniliform,  &c. 

From  the  direction , roots  are  distinguished  into, 

14.  Radix  perpendicuiaris , perpendicular,  which 
descends  in  a straight  direction ; as  in  Daucus  corota , 
Beta  vulgaris , Scorzonera  hispanica,  Sec. 

15.  Radix  horizontalis,  horizontal,  which  is  extended 
under  the  earth  transversely  ; as  in  Laserpitium  pru- 
thenium , &c. 

16.  Radix  obliqua,  oblique,  descending  obliquely ; as 
in  Iris  germanica,  &c. 

17.  Radix  repens , creeping,  descending  transversely, 
but  here  and  there  sending  off  new  plants ; as  in  Sam- 
bucus  ebulus ; Glycyrrhiza  glabra;  Ranunculus  re- 
pens, &e. 

The  duration  affords, 

18.  Radix  annua , yearly,  which  perishes  the  same 
year  with  the  plant ; as  Dr  aba  verna , and  all  annuals. 

19.  Radix  biennis , biennial,  which  vegetates  the  first 
year,  flowers  the  next,  and  then  perishes ; as  the  (Eno - 
thera  biennis , Beta  vulgaris , &c. 

20.  Radix  perennis,  perennial,  which  lives  for  many 
years ; as  trees  and  shrubs. 

Roots  are  also  distinguished  from  their  situation  into, 

21.  Terrena , earth- root,  which  grow  only  in  the 
cirth ; as  the  roots  of  most  plants. 

22.  Aquatica , water-root,  which  grow  only  in  the 
water,  and  perish  when  out  of  it;  as  Trapa  natans, 
Nymphaa  alba. 

23.  Paralitica,  parasitical,  which  inserts  the  root 
into  another  plant ; as  in  Epidendrum  vanilla,  &c. 

24.  Arrihza,  which  does  not  insert  radicles,  but  co- 
heres toother  plants  by  an  anastomosis  of  vessels;  as 
in  Viscum  album,  Horanthus  europceus , &x. 

II.  In  anatomy,  the  term  radix  is  applied  to  some 
parts  which  are  inserted  into  others,  as  the  root  of  a 
plant  is  in  the  earth ; as  the  fangs  of  the  teeth,  the 
origin  of  some  of  the  nerves,  &c. 

Radix  bengale.  See  Cassumuniar. 

Radix  brasilien^js.  See  Callico'cca  ipecacuanha. 

Radix  dulcjs.  See  Glycyrrhiza. 

Radix  Indiana.  See  Callieocca  ipecacuanha. 

Radix  rosea.  See  Rhodiola. 

Radix  rubra.  See  Rubia  tinctorum. 

Radix  ursina.  See  JEthusa  meum. 

RA'DULA.  (From  rado,  to  scrape  off. ) A wooden 
spatula,  or  scraper. 

RAGWORT.  See  Scnecio  Jacobcea. 

RAISIN.  See  Vitis  vinifera. 

Rama'lis  vena.  (From  ramale,  a dead  bough.) 
Applied  to  the  vena  portae,  from  its  numerous  ramifi- 
cations, which  resemble  a bough  stripped  of  its  leaves. 

RAMAZZINI,  Bernardin,  was  born  at  Carpi,  in 
Italy,  in  1633.  He  graduated  at  Parma  at  the  age  of 
26,  and,  after  studying  some  time  longer  at  Rome,  set- 
tled in  the  dutcliy  of  Castro : but  ill  health  obliged  him 
speedily  to  return  to  his  native  place.  His  reputation 
increasing,  he  removed  to  Modena  in  1671,  where  he 
met  with  considerable  success;  and,  in  1682,  he  was 
appointed  professor  of  the  theory  of  medicine  in  the 
university  recently  established  there,  which  office  he 
filled  for  eighteen  years  with  great  credit.  He  was 
then  invitea  to  a similar  appointment  at  Padua,  and 
exerted  himself  with  laudable  ardour  for  three  years ; 
when  he  was  attacked  with  a disease  of  the  eyes, 
which  ultimately  deprived  him  of  sight.  In  1708,  the 
senate  of  Venice  appointed  him  President  of  the  Col- 
lege of  Physicians  of  that  capital,  and  in  the  following 
year  raised  him  to  the  first  professorship  of  the  prac- 
232 


tice  of  medicine.  He  continued  to  perform  the  duties 
of  these  offices  with  great  diligence  and  reputation  till 
his  death,  in  1714.  He  was  a member  of  many  of  the 
academies  of  science,  established  in  Germany,  &c. ; 
and  left  several  works  in  the  Latin  language,  lemark- 
able  for  the  elegance  of  their  style,  and  other  merits. 
The  principal  of  these,  and  which  will  be  ever  held  in 
estimation,  is  entitled  “ De  Morbus  Artificum  Diatri- 
ba,”  giving  an  account  of  the  diseases  peculiar  to  dif- 
ferent artists  and  manufacturers. 

RAMENTUM.  A species  of  pubescence  of  plants, 
consisting  of  hairs  in  form  of  fiat,  strap-like  portions, 
resembling  shavings,  seen  on  the  leaves  of  some  of  the 
genus  Bigonia.  See  Pilus. 

RAMEUS.  Of  or  belonging  to  a bough  or  branch; 
applied  to  branch  leaves,  which  are  so  distinguish- 
ed, because  they  sometimes  differ  from  those  of  the 
main  stem;  as  is  the  case  in  Melampyrum  arvense ; 
and  also  to  a leaf-stalk  when  it  comes  directly  from  the 
main  branch ; as  in  Eugenia  malaccensis. 

Ra'mex.  (From  ramus , a branch:  from  its  pro- 
truding forwards,  like  a bud.)  An  obsolete  term  for  a 
rupture. 

RAMOSISSIMUS.  Much  branched.  Applied  to  a 
stem  which  is  repeatedly  subdivided  into  a great  many 
branches,  without^rder ; as  those  of  the  apple,  pear, 
and  gooseberry -tree. 

RAMOSUS.  Branched.  Applied  to  the  roots,  and 
especially  those  of  trees. 

RAMUS.  A branch,  or  primary  division  of  a stem 
into  lateral  stems.  In  the  language  of  botanists  rami, 
or  branches,  are  denominated, 

1.  Oppositi , when  they  go  off,  or  pair  opposite  to 
each  other,  as  they  do  in  Mentha  arvensis. 

2.  Altemi,  one  after  another,  alternately ; as  in  Al- 
thaea officinalis. 

3.  Verticillati , when  more  than  two  go  from  the 
stem  in  a whirlwind  manner ; as  in  Pinus  abies. 

4.  Sparsi,  without  any  order. 

5.  Erecti,  rising  close  to  the  stem;  as  in  Populus  dJ 
latata. 

6.  Patentes , descending  from  the  stalk  at  an  ob- 
tuse angle  ; as  in  Galium  mollugo,  and  Cistus  italicus 

7.  Patentissimi,  descending  at  a right  angle ; as  in 
Ammania  ramosior. 

8.  Brachiati,  the  opposite  spreading  branches  cross- 
ing each  other ; as  in  Pisonia  aculeata,  and  Panisteria 
bracliiata. 

9.  Dejlexi , arched,  with  the  apex  downwards ; as  in 
Pinus  larix. 

10.  Reflexi,  hanging  perpendicularly  from  the  trunk, 
as  in  the  Salix  babylonica. 

11.  Retrofiexi , turned  backwards ; as  in  Solanum 
dulcamara. 

12.  Fastigiati,  forming  a kind  of  pyramid ; as  in 
Chrysanthemum  corymbosum. 

13.  Vergati,  twig-like,  long  and  weak  ; as  in  Salix 
vimialis. 

RA'NA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  animals.  Class, 
Amphibia;  Order,  Reptilia.  The  frog. 

Rana  esculenta.  The  French  frog.  The  flesh  of 
this  species  of  frog,  very  common  in  France,  is  highly 
nutritious  and  easily  digested. 

RANCID.  Oily  substances  are  said  to  have  become 
rancid,  when,  by  keeping,  they  acquire  a strong,  offen 
sive  smell,  and  altered  taste. 

RANCIDITY.  The  change  which  oils  undergo  by 
exposure  to  air,  which  is  probably  an  effect  analogous 
to  the  oxidation  of  metals. 

RANINE.  (Raninus,  from  rana,  a frog.)  1.  Apper- 
taining to  a frog. 

2.  The  name  of  an  artery,  called  also  Arteria  ra- 
nina.  Sublingual  artery.  The  second  branch  of  the 
external  carotid. 

RA'NULA.  (From  rana,  a frog : so  called  from  its 
resemblance  to  a frog,  or  because  it  makes  the  patient 
croak  like  a frog.)  Batrachos  ; Hypoglossus ; Hypo- 
glossum ; Rana.  An  inflammatory  or  indolent  tu- 
mour, under  the  tongue.  These  tumours  are  of  va- 
rious sizes  and ‘degrees  of  consistence,  seated  on  either 
side  of  the  fraenum.  Children,  as  well  as  adults,  are 
sometimes  affected  with  tumours  of  this  kind  ; in  the 
former,  they  impede  the  action  of  sucking ; in  the  latter 
of  mastication,  and  even  speech.  The  contents  of 
them  are  various  ; in  some,  they  resemble  the  saliva, 
in  others,  the  glairy  matter  found  in  the  cells  of  swelled 
joints.  Sometimes  it  is  said  that  a fatty  matter  haa 


RAN 


RAP 


been  found  in  them ; but  from  the  nature  and  structure 
of  the  parts,  we  are  sure  that  this  can  seldom  happen  ; 
and,  in  by  far  the  greatest  number  of  cases,  we  find 
that  the  contents  resemble  the  saliva  itself.  This,  in- 
deed, might  naturally  be  expected,  for  the  cause  of 
these  tumours  is  universally  to  be  looked  for  in  an  ob- 
struction of  the  salivary  ducts.  Obstructions  here 
may  arise  from  a cold,  inflammation,  violent  fits  of 
the  toothache,  attended  with  swelling  in  the  inside  of 
the  mouth  ; and,  in  not  a few  cases,  we  find  the  ducts 
obstructed  by  a stony  matter,  seemingly  separated  from 
the  saliva,  as  the  calculous  matter  is  from  the  urine ; 
but  where  inflammation  has  been  the  cause,  we  always 
find  matter  mixed  with  the  other  contents  of  the  tu- 
mour. As  these  tumours  are  not  usually  attended  with 
much  pain,  they  are  sometimes  neglected,  till  they 
burst  of  themselves,  which  they  commonly  do  when 
arrived  at  the  bulk  of  a large  nut.  As  they  were  pro- 
duced originally  from  an  obstruction  in  the  salivary 
duct,  and  this  obstruction  cannot  be  removed  by  the 
bursting  of  the  tumour,  it  thence  happens  that  they 
eave  an  ulcer  extremely  difficult  to  heal,  nay,  which 
cannot  be  healed  at  all  till  the  cause  is  removed. 

RANUNCULOT'DES.  (From ranunculus,  and  stSog, 
resemblance : so  named  from  its  resemblance  to  the 
ranunculus.)  The  marsh  marigold.  See  Caltha  pa- 
lustris. 

RANUNCULUS.  (Diminutive  of  rana , a frog: 
because  it  is  found  in  fenny  places,  where  frogs 
abound.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
nxan  system.  Class,  Polyandria;  Order,  Polygynia. 

The  great  acrimony  of  most  of  the  species  of  ranuncu- 
lus is  such,  that,  on  being  applied  to  the  skin,  they  excite 
itching,  redness,  and  inflammation,  and  even  produce 
blisters,  tumefaction,  and  ulceration  of  the  part.  On 
being  chewed,  they  corrode  the  tongue  ; and,  if  taken 
into  the  stomach,  bring  on  all  the  deleterious  effects  of 
an  acrid  poison.  The  corrosive  acrimony  which  this 
family  of  plants  possesses,  was  not  unknown  to  the 
ancients,  as  appears  from  the  writings  of  Dioscorides ; 
but  its  nature  and  extent  had  never  been  investigated 
by  experiments,  before  those  instituted  by  C.  Krapf,  at 
Vienna,  by  which  we  learn  that  the  most  virulent  of 
the  Linnaean  species  are  the  bulbosus,  sceleratus,  acris, 
arvensis,  thora,  and  illyricus. 

The  effects  of  these  were  tried,  either  upon  himself 
or  upon  dogs,  and  show  that  the  acrimony  of  the  dif- 
ferent species  is  often  confined  to  certain  parts  of  the 
plants,  manifesting  itself  either  in  the  roots,  stalks, 
leaves,  flowers,  or  buds ; the  expressed  juice,  extract, 
decoction,  and  infusion  of  the  plants,  were  also  sub 
jected  to  experiments.  In  addition  to  these  species 
mentioned  by  Krapf,  we  may  also  notice  the  R.  Flam- 
mula,  and  especially  the  R.  Alpestris,  which,  accord- 
ing to  Haller,  is  the  most  acrid  of  this  genus.  Curtis 
observes,  that  even  pulling  up  the  ranunculus  acris,  the 
common  meadow  species,  which  possesses  the  active 
principle  of  this  tribe,  in  a very  considerable  degree, 
throughout  the  whole  herb,  and  carrying  it  to  some 
little  distance,  excited  a considerable  inflammation  in 
the  palm  of  the  hand  in  which  it  was  held.  It  is  ne- 
cessary to  remark,  that  the  acrimonious  quality  of 
these  plants  is  not  of  a fixed  nature;  for  it  maybe 
completely  dissipated  by  heat  ; and  the  plant,  on  being 
thoroughly  dried,  becomes  perfectly  bland.  Krapf  at- 
tempted to  counteract  this  venomous  acrimony  of  the 
ranunculus  by  means  of  various  other  vegetables,  none 
of  which  was  found  to  answer  the  purpose,  though  he 
thought  that  the  juice  of  sorrel,  and  that  of  unripe  cur- 
rants, had  some  effect  in  this  way;  yet  these  were 
much  less  availing  than  water  ; while  vinegar,  honey, 
sugar,  wine,  spirit,  mineral  acids,  oil  of  tartar,  p.  d. 
and  other  sapid  substances,  manifestly  rendered  the 
acrimony  more  corrosive.  It  may  be  also  noticed,  that 
the  virulency  of  most  of  the  plants  of  this  genus  de- 
pends much  upon  the  situation  in  which  they  grow, 
and  is  greatly  diminished  in  the  cultivated  plant. 

Ranunculus  abortivus.  The  systematic  name  of 
a species  of  ranunculus,  which  possesses  acrid  and  ve- 
sicating properties. 

Ranunculus  acris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
meadow  crow-foot.  Ranunculus  pratensis.  This, 
and  some  other  species  of  ranunculus,  have,  for  me- 
dical purposes,  been  chiefly  employed  externally  as  a 
vesicatory,  and  are  said  to  have  the  advantage  of  a 
common  blistering  plaster,  in  producing  a quicker  ef- 
fect, and  never  causing  a strangury ; but,  on  the  other 


hand,  it  has  been  observed,  that  the  ranunculus  is  less 
certain  in  its  operation,  and  that  it  sometimes  occasions 
ulcers,  which  prove  very  troublesome  and  difficult  to 
heal.  Therefore  their  use  seems  to  be  applicable  only 
to  certain  fixed  pains,  and  such  complaints  as  require 
a long-continued  topical  stimulus  or  discharge  from  the 
part,  in  the  way  of  an  issue,  which,  in  various  cases, 
has  been  found  to  be  a powerful  remedy. 

Ranunculus  albus.  The  plant  which  bears  this 
name  in  the  pharmacopoeias  is  the  Anemone  nemorosa , 
of  Linnaeus.  See  Anemone  nemorosa. 

Ranunculus  bulbosus.  Bulbous-rooted  crow-foot. 
The  roots  and  leaves  of  this  plant,  Ranunculus — caly 
cibus  retroflexis,  pedunculis  sulcatis , caule  erecto  rnul- 
tifloro,  foliis  compositis , of  Linnaeus,  have  no  consider- 
able smell,  but  a highly  acrid  and  fiery  taste.  Taken 
internally,  they  appear  to  be  deleterious,  even  when  so 
far  freed  from  the  caustic  matter  by  boiling  in  water,  as 
to  discover  no  ill  quality  to  the  palate.  The  effluvia, 
likewise,  when  freely  inspired,  are  said  to  occasion 
headaches,  anxieties,  vomitings,  &c.  The  leaves  and 
roots,  applied  externally,  inflame  and  ulcerate,  or  vesi- 
cate the  parts,  and  are  liable  to  affect  also  the  adjacent 
parts  to  a considerable  extent. 

Ranunculus  ficaria.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
pilewort.  Chelidonium  minus ; Scrophularia  minor; 
Chelidonia  rolundifolia  minor  • Cursuma  hcemorrhoi- 
dalis  herba ; Ranunculus  vernus.  Less  celandine, 
and  pilewort.  The  leaves  and  root  of  this  plant,  Ra- 
'nunculus— foliis  cordatis  angulatis  petiolatis,  caule 
unifloro,  of  Linnaeus,  are  used  medicinally.  The 
leaves  are  deemed  anti-scorbutic,  and  the  root  reck- 
oned a specific,  if  beat  into  cataplasms,  and  applied  to 
the  piles. 

Ranunculus  flammula.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  smaller  water  crow-foot,  or  spearwort.  Surrecta 
alba.  The  roots  and  leaves  of  this  common  plant,  Ra- 
nunculus— foliis  ovatis-lanceolatis , petiolatis , caule 
declinato,  of  Linnaeus,  taste  very  acrid  and  hot,  and 
when  taken  in  a small  quantity,  produce  vomiting, 
spasms  of  the  stomach,  and  delirium.  Applied  exter- 
nally, they  vesicate  the  skin.  The  best  antidote,  after 
clearing  the  stomach,  is  cold  water  acidulated  with 
lemon-juice,  and  then  mucilaginous  drinks. 

Ranunculus  palustris.  Water  crow-foot.  See 
Ranunculus  sceleratus. 

Ranunculus  pratensis.  Meadow  crow-foot.-  See 
Ranunculus  acris. 

Ranunculus  sceleratus.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  marsh  crow- foot.  Rammculus  palustris.  The 
leaves  of  this  species  of  crow-foot  are  so  extremely 
acrid,  that  the  beggars  in  Switzerland  are  said,  by  rub- 
bing their  legs  with  them,  to  produce  a very  foetid  and 
acrimonious  ulceration. 

RA'PA.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

RAPE.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

RAPHA'NIA  (From  raphanus,  the  radish,  or 
charlock ; because  the  disease  is  said  to  be  produced 
by  eating  the  seeds  of  a species  of  raphanus.)  Con- 
vulsio  ah  ustilagine ; Convulsio  raphania;  Eclamp- 
sia typkodes  ; Convulsio  soloniensis  ; Necrosis  usti- 
laginca.  Cripple  disease.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
class  Neuroses,  and  order  Spasmi,  of  Cullen  ; charac- 
terized by  a spasmodic  contraction  of  the  joints,  with 
convulsive  motions,  and  a most  violent  pain  return- 
ing at  various  periods.  It  begins  with  cold  chills  and 
lassitude,  pain  in  the  head,  and  anxiety  about  the 
prtecordia.  These  symptoms  are  followed  by  spas- 
modic twitchings  in  the  tendons  of  the  fingers  and  of 
the  feet,  discernible  to  the  eye,  heat,  fever,  stupor,  de- 
lirium, sense  of  suffocation,  aphonia,  and  horrid  con- 
vulsions of  the  limbs.  After  these,  vomiting  and  diar- 
rhoea come  on,  with  a discharge  of  worms,  if  there  are 
any.  About  the  eleventh  or  the  twentieth  day,  co- 
pious sweats  succeed,  or  purple  exanthema,  or  tabes,  or 
rigidity  of  all  the  joints. 

RAPHANISTRUM.  The  trivial  name  of  a species 
of  raphanus. 

RA'PHANUS.  (P a(j>avop  TSapa  to  paSico;  cpaiveadat  : 
from  its  quick  growth.)  1.  A genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linmean  system.  Class,  Tetradynamia  ; Order,  Sili- 
culosa. 

2.  The  radish.  See  Raphanus  sativus. 

Raphanus  hortensis.  See  Raphanus  sativus. 

Raphanus  Niger.  See  Raphanus  sativus. 

Raphanus  rusticanus.  See  Cochlearia  armoraeia 

Raphanus  sativus.  The  systematic  name  of  the, 

233 


REA 


radish  plant.  Raphanus  hortensis ; Radicula ; Rapha- 
nus mger.  The  radish.  The  several  varieties  of  this 
plant,  are  said  to  be  employed  medicinally  in  the  cure 
of  calculous  affections.  The  juice,  made  into  a syrup, 
is  given  to  relieve  hoarseness.  Mixed  with  ho- 
ney or  sugar,  it  is  administered  in  pituitous  asthma ; 
and  as  antiscorbutics,  their  efficacy  is  generally  ac- 
knowledged. 

Raphanus  sylvestris.  See  Lepidium  sativum. 

RA'PHE.  (Pa0>7,  a suture.)  A suture.  Applied 
to  parts  which  appear  as  if  they  were  sewed  together ; 
as  the  Raphe  scroti , cerebri , See. 

Raphe  cerebri.  The  longitudinal  eminence  of  the 
corpus  callosum  of  the  brain  is  so  called,  because  it  ap- 
pears somewhat  like  a suture. 

Raphe  scroti.  The  rough  eminence  which  divides 
the  scrotum,  as  it  were,  in  two.  It  proceeds  from  the 
root  of  the  penis  inferiorly  towards  the  perinaeum. 

RAPI'STRUM.  (From  rapa,  the  turnip;  because 
its  leaves  resemble  those  of  turnip.  Originally,  the 
wild  turnip:  so  called  from  its  affinity  to  Rapa,  the 
cultivated  one.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Tetr adynamia ; Order,  Siliculosa. 

2.  The  name  of  two  species  of  Crambe , the  orientalis 
and  hispanica. 

RA'PUM.  ( Etymology  uncertain.) 

1.  The  turnip.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

2.  The  Campanula  rapunculus. 

RAPUNCULUS.  (Diminutive  of  rapa , the  turnip.) 

The  trivial  name  of  a species  of  Campanula. 

Rapunculub  corniculatus.  See  Phyteuma  orbi- 
culare. 

Rapunculus  virginianus.  The  name  given  by 
Morrison  to  the  blue  cardinal  flower.  See  Lobelia. 

RA’PUS.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

RASH.  See  Exanthema. 

Raspato'rium.  (From  rado , to  scrape.)  A sur- 
geon’s rasp. 

RASPBERRY.  See  Rubus  ideeus. 

RASU'RA.  (From  rado,  to  scrape.) 

1.  A rasure  or  scratch. 

2.  The  raspings  or  shavings  of  any  substance. 

RATIFI  A.  A liquor  prepared  by  imparting  to  ardent 

spirits  the  flavour  of  various  kinds  of  fruits. 

RATTLESNAKE.  See  Orotalus  horridus 

Rattlesnake-root.  See  Polygala  senega. 

RAUCE'DO.  (From  raucus,  hoarse.)  Raucitas. 
Hoarseness.  It  is  always  symptomatic  of  some  other 
disease. 

Ray  of  a flower.  See  Radius. 

REAGENT.  Test.  A substance  used  in  chemis- 
try to  detect  the  presence  of  other  bodies.  In  the  ap- 
plication of  tests  there  are  two  circumstances  to  be  at- 
tended to,  viz.  to  avoid  deceitful  appearances,  and  to 
have  good  tests. 

The  principal  tests  are  the  following : 

1.  Litmus.  The  purple  of  litmus  is  changed  to 
red  by  every  acid ; so  that  this  is  the  test  generally 
made  use  of  to  delect  excess  of  acid  in  any  fluid.  It 
may  be  used  either  by  dipping  into  the  water  a paper 
stained  with  litmus,  or  by  adding  a drop  of  the  tincture 
to  the  water  to  be  examined,  and  comparing  its  hue 
with  that  of  an  equal  quantity  of  the  tincture  in  dis- 
tilled water. 

Litmus  already  reddened  by  an  acid  will  have  its 
purple  restored  by  an  alkali ; and  thus  it  may  also  be 
used  as  a test  for  alkalies,  but  it  is  much  less  active  than 
other  direct  alkaline  tests. 

2.  Red  cabbage  has  been  found  by  Watt  to  furnish 
as  delicate  a test  for  acids  as  Litmus,  and  to  be  still 
more  sensible  to  alkalies.  The  natural  colour  of  an 
infusion  of  this  plant  is  blue,  which  is  changed  to  red 
by  acids,  and  to  green  by  alkalies  in  very  minute  quan- 
tities. 

3.  Brazil  wood.  When  chips  of  this  wood  are  in- 
fused in  warm  water  they  yield  a red  liquor,  which  rea- 
dily turns  blue  by  alkalies,  either  caustic  or  carbonated. 
It  is  also  rendered  blue  by  the  carbonated  earths  held 
in  solution  by  carbonic  acid,  so  that  it  is  not  an  une- 
quivocal test  of  alkalies  till  the  earthy  carbonates  have 
been  precipitated  by  boiling.  Acids  change  to  yellow 
the  natural  red  of  Brazil  wood,  and  restore  the  red  when 
changed  by  alkalies. 

4.  Violets.  The  delicate  blue  of  the  common  scented 
violet  is  readily  changed  to  green  by  alkalies,  and  this 
affords  a delicate  test  for  these  substances.  Syrup  of 
violets  is  generally  used  os  it  is  at  hand,  being  used  in 

234 


REA 

medicine.  But  a tincture  of  the  flower  will  answer  as 
well. 

5.  Turmeric.  This  is  a very  delicate  lest  for  alka- 
lies, and  on  the  whole,  perhaps,  is  the  best.  The  na- 
tural colour  either  in  watery  or  spirituous  infusion  is 
yellow,  which  is  changed  to  a brick  or  orange-red  by 
alkalies,  caustic  or  carbonated,  but  not  by  carbonated 
earths,  on  which  account  it  is  preferable  to  Brazil 
wood. 

The  pure  earths,  such  as  lime  and  barytes,  produce 
the  same  change. 

6.  Rhubarb.  Infusion  or  tincture  of  rhubarb  under- 
goes a similar  change  with  turmeric,  and  is  equally 
delicate. 

7.  Sulphuric  acid.  A drop  or  two  of  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid,  added  to  water  that  contains  carbonic 
acid,  free  or  in  combination,  causes  the  latter  to  escape 
with  a pretty  brisk  effervescence,  whereby  the  presence 
of  this  gaseous  acid  may  be  detected. 

8.  Nitric  and  oxy muriatic  acid.  A peculiar  use  at- 
tends the  employment  of  these  acids  in  the  sulphuretted 
waters,  as  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  decomposed  by 
them,  its  hydrogen  absorbed,  and  the  sulphur  separated 
in  its  natural  form. 

9.  Oxalic  acid  and  oxalate  of  ammonia.  These  are 
the  most  delicate  tests  for  lime  and  all  soluble  calca- 
reous salts.  Oxalate  of  lime,  though  nearly  insoluble  in 
water,  dissolves  in  a moderate  quantity  in  its  own  or 
any  other  acid,  and  hence  in  analysis  oxalate  of  am- 
monia is  often  preferred,  as  no  excess  of  'this  salt  can 
redissolve  the  precipitated  oxalate  of  lime.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  ammonia  should  not  exceed,  otherwise 
it  might  give  a false  indication. 

10.  Gallic  acid  and  tincture  of  galls.  These  are 
tests  of  iron.  Where  the  iron  is  in  very  minute  quan- 
tities, and  the  water  somewhat  acidulous,  these  tests 
do  not  always  produce  a precipitate,  but  only  a slight 
reddening,  but  their  action  is  much  heightened  by  pre- 
viously adding  a few  drops  of  any  alkaline  solution 

1 1.  Prussiate  of  potassa  or  lime.  The  presence  of 
iron  in  water  is  equally  well  indicated  by  these  prus- 
siates,  causing  a blue  precipitate : and  if  the  prussiate  of 
potassa  is  properly  prepared,  it  will  only  be  precipi- 
tated by  a metallic  salt,  so  that  manganese  and  copper 
will  also  be  detected,  the  former  giving  a white  precipi- 
tate, the  latter  a red  precipitate. 

12.  Lime-water  is  the  common  test  for  carbonic  acid ; 
it  decomposes  all  the  magnesian  salts,  and  likewise  the 
aluminous  salts  ; it  likewise  produces  a cloudiness  with 
most  of  the  sulphates,  owing  to  the  formation  of  sele 
nite. 

13.  Ammonia.  This  alkali  when  perfectly  caustic 
serves  as  a distinction  between  the  salts  of  iime  and 
those  of  magnesia,  as  it  precipitates  the  earth  from  the 
latter  salts,  but  not  from  the  former.  There  are  two 
sources  of  error  to  be  obviated,  one  is  that  of  carbonic 
acid  being  present  in  the  water,  the  other  is  the  pre- 
sence of  aluminous  salts. 

14.  Carbonated  alkalies.  These  are  used  to  precipi- 
tate all  the  earths ; where  carbonate  of  potassa  is  used, 
particular  care  should  be  taken  of  its  purity,  as  it  gene- 
rally contains  silex. 

15.  Muriated  alumine.  This  test  is  proposed  by  Mr. 
Kirwan  to  detect  carbonate  of  magnesia,  which  cannot, 
like  carbonated  lime,  be  separated  by  ebullition,  but  re- 
mains till  the  whole  liquid  is  evaporated 

16.  Barytic  salts.  The  nitrate,  muriate,  and  ace- 
tate of  barytes  are  all  equally  good  tests  of  sulphuric 
acid  in  any  combination. 

17.  Salts  of  silver.  The  salts  of  silver  are  the  most 
delicate  tests  of  muriatic  acid,  in  any  combination, 
producing  the  precipitated  luna  cornea.  AH  the  salts 
of  silver  likewise  give  a dark-brown  precipitate  with 
the  sulphuretted  waters,  which  is  as  delicate  a test  as 
any  that  we  possess. 

18.  Salts  of  lead.  The  nitrate  and  acetate  of  lead 
are  the  salts  of  this  metal  employed  as  tests.  They 
will  indicate  the  sulphuric,  muriatic,  and  boracic  acids, 
and  sulphuretted  hydrogen  or  suiphuret  of  potassa. 

19.  Soap.  A solution  of  soap  in  distilled  water  or  in 
alkohol  is  curdled  by  water  containing  any  earthy  or 
metallic  salt. 

20.  Tartaric  acid.  This  acid  is  of  use  in  distin- 
guishing the  salts  of  potassa  (with  which  it  forms  a 
precipitate  of  cream  of  tartar),  from  those  of  soda,  from 
which  it  does  not  precipitate.  The  potassa,  however, 

. must  exist  in  some  quantity  to  be  detected  by  the  test 


REC 


21.  Nitro  muriate  of  platinum.  This  sort  is  still 
more  discriminative  between  potassa  and  the  other 
alkalies,  than  acid  of  tartar,  and  will  produce  a precipi- 
tate with  a very  weak  solution  of  any  salt  with  po- 
tassa. 

22.  Alkohol.  This  most  useful  reagent  is  applicable 
in  a variety  of  ways  in  analysis.  As  it  dissolves  some 
substances  found  in  fluids,  and  leaves  others  untouched, 
it  is  a rrieans  of  separating  them  into  two  classes,  which 
saves  considerable  trouble  in  the  further  investigation. 
Those  salts  which  it  does  not  dissolve,  it  precipitates 
from  their  watery  solution,  but  more  or  less  completely 
according  to  the  salt  contained,  and  the  strength  of  the 
alkohol,  and  as  a precipitant  it  also  assists  in  many  de- 
compositions. 

REA'LGAR.  Arlada;  Arladar ; Auripigmentum 
rubrum;  Arsenicum  rubrum  factitium ; Abessi.  A 
native  ore  of  sulpliuret  of  arsenic. 

RECEIVER.  A chemical  vessel  adapted  to  the 
neck  or  beak  of  a retort,  alembic  and  other  distilla- 
tory vessel,  to  receive  and  contain  the  product  of  dis- 
tillation. 

RECEPTA'CULUM.  (From  recipio , to  receive.) 

1.  A name  given  by  the  older  anatomists  to  a part  of 
the  thoracic  duct.  See  Receptaculum  chyli. 

2.  In  botany,  the  common  basis  or  point  of  connexion 
of  the  other  parts  of  the  fructification  of  plants;  by 
some  called  the  Thalamus  and  the  Placenta. 

It  is  distinguished  by  botanists  into  proper  and  com- 
mon ; one  flower  only  belongs  to  the  former , and  it  is 
formed  mostly  from  the  apex  of  the  peduncle  or  scape ; 
as  in  Tulipa  gesneriana,  and  Lilium  candidum.  The 
latter  has  many  flowers;  as  in  Helianthus  annuus. 

The  proper  receptacle  or  apex  of  the  peduncle  swells 
in  some  flowers,  and  becomes  the  fruit : thus  the  Fra- 
garia  vesca  is  not  a berry,  but  a fleshy  receptacle.,  with 
its  naked  seeds  nestling  on  its  surface:  so,  in  the  Ho- 
venia  dulcis,  the  peduncles  swell  into  a thick  fleshy  re- 
ceptacle on  which  there  are  small  capsules ; and,  in  the 
Anacardium  occidental,  the  peduncle  swells  into  a re- 
ceptacle, on  which  the  nut  rests. 

The  varieties  of  the  common  receptacle  are, 

1.  Planum ; as  in  Helianthus  annuus. 

2.  Convexum;  as  in  Leonto don  taraxacum. 

3.  Conicum ; as  in  Billis  perennis. 

4.  Punctatum  ; as  in  Leontodon  taraxacum. 

5.  Globosum ; as  in  Cephalanthus. 

6.  Ovale ; as  in  Dorstenia  drakenia. 

7.  Ovatum  ; as  in  Omphalea. 

8.  Favosum , cellular  on  the  surface,  honeycomb- 
like  ; as  in  Onopordium. 

1).  Scrobiculatum , having  round  and  deep  holes  ; as 
in  Helianthus  annuus. 

10.  Subulatum  ; as  in  Scabiosa  atropurpurea. 

11.  Quadrangulum : as  in  Dorstenia  houstonii,  and 
Contrayerva. 

12.  Turbinatum  ; as  in  Ficus  carica. 

13.  Digitiforme  ; as  in  Arum  maculatum , and  Calla 
i vthiopica . 

14.  Filiforme,  thread-like ; as  in  the  catkins  and 
corylus. 

15.  Occlusum.  The  Ficus  carica  is  a connivent 
fleshy  receptacle  enclosing  the  florets. 

16.  Nudum,  without  any  vesture ; as  in  Lactuca,  and 
Leontodon  taraxacum. 

17.  Pilosum  ; as  in  Carthamus  tinctorius. 

18.  Villosum  ; as  in  Artemisia  absynthium. 

19.  Setosum  ; as  in  Echynops  sphcerocephalus , and 
Centaurea. 

20.  Paleaceum,  covered  with  chaffy  scales ; as  in  Ze- 
ranthemum,  Dipsacus,  &.C. 

On  the  receptacle  and  seed-down  are  founded  the 
most  solid  generic  characters  of  syngenesious  plants, 
admirably  illustrated  by  the  inimitable  Gaertner. 

The  term  receptacle  is  sometimes  extended  by  Lin- 
naeus to  express  the  base  of  a flower,  or  even  its  inter- 
nal part  between  the  stamens  and  pistils,  provided 
there  be  any  thing  remarkable  in  such  parts,  without 
reference  to  the  foundation  of  the  whole  fructification. 
It  also  expresses  the  part  to  which  the  seeds  are  attach- 
ed in  a seed  vessel,  and  the  common  stalk  of  a spike, 
or  spikelet,  in  grasses. 

Receptaculum  chvli.  Receptaculum  pecqueti , 
because  Pecquet  first  attempted  to  demonstrate  it;  Di- 
ver sorium;  Sacculus  chyliferus.  The  existence  of 
such  a receptacle  in  the  human  body  is  doubted.  In 
t>rpte  animals  the  receptacle  of  the  chyle  is  situated  on 


REC 


the  dorsal  vertebrae  where  the  lacteals  all  meet*  See 
Absorbents. 

Reciprocal  affinity.  See  Affinity,  reciprocal. 

RECLINATUS.  Reclining  : applied  to  stems,  leaves, 
&c.  which  are  curved  towards  the  ground ; as  the 
stem  of  the  bramble,  and  leaves  of  the  Leonurus  car- 
diaca. 

RECTIFICATION  ( Rectificatio  ; from  rectifico, 

to  make  clear.)  A second  distillation,  in  which  sub- 
stances are  purified  by  their  more  volatile  parts  being 
raised  by  heat  carefully  managed  ; thus,  spirit  of  wine, 
aether,  &c.  are  rectified  by  their  separation  from  the 
less  volatile  and  foreign  matter  which  altered  or  de- 
based their  properties. 

Re'ctor  spiritus.  The  aromatic  part  of  plants. 
See  Aroma. 

RE'CTUM.  ( Rectum  intestinum : so  named  from 
an  erroneous  opinion  that  it  was  straight.)  Apeuthys- 
menos ; Longanon ; Longaon ; Archos ; Cyssaros. 
The  last  portion  of  the  large  intestines  terminating  in 
the  anus.  See  Intestine. 

RE'CTUS.  Straight.  Several  parts  of  the  body, 
particularly  muscles,  are  so  called  from  their  direction. 

Parts  of  plants  also  have  this  term  ; as  Caulis  rectus, 
the  straight  stem  of  the  garden-lily,  spinarecta,  &c. 

Rectus  abdominis.  Pubio-sternal, , of  Dumas.  A 
long  and  straight  muscle  situated  near  its  fellow,  at  the 
middle  and  forepart  of  the  abdomen,  parallel  to  the 
linea  alba,  and  between  the  aponeuroses  of  the  other 
abdominal  muscles.  It  arises  sometimes  by  a single 
broad  tendon  from  the  upper  and  inner  part  of  the  os 
pubis,  but  more  commonly  by  two  heads,  one  of  which 
is  fleshy,  and  originates  from  the  upper  edge  of  the 
pubis,  and  the  other  tendinous,  from  the  inside  of  the 
symphysis  pubis,  behind  the  pyramidalis  muscle. 
From  these  beginnings,  the  muscle  runs  upwards  the 
whole  length  of  the  linea  alba,  and  becoming  broader 
and  thinner  as  it  ascends,  is  inserted  by  a thin  aponeu- 
rosis into  the  edge  of  the  cartilago  ensiformis,  and  into 
the  cartilages  of  the  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh  ribs. 
This  aponeurosis  is  placed  under  the  pectoral  muscle, 
and  sometimes  adheres  to  the  fourth  rib.  The  fibres  of 
this  muscle  are  commonly  divided  by  three  tendinous 
intersections,  which  were  first  noticed  by  Berenger,  or 
as  he  is  commonly  called,  darpi,  an  Italian  anatomist, 
who  flourished  in  the  sixteenth  century.  One  of  these 
intersections  is  usually  where  the  muscle  runs  over  the 
cartilage  of  the  seventh  rib ; another  is  at  the  umbili- 
cus ; and  the  third  is  between  these  two.  Sometimes 
there  is  one,  and  even  two,  between  the  umbilicus  and 
the  pubes.  When  one  or  both  of  these  occur,  how- 
ever, they  seldom  extend  more  than  half  way  across 
the  muscle.  As  these  intersections  seldom  penetrate 
through  the  whole  substance  of  the  muscle,  they  are 
all  of  them  most  apparent  on  its  anterior  surface, 
where  they  firmly  adhere  to  the  sheath ; the  adhesions 
of  the  rectus  to  the  posterior  layer  of  the  internal  ob- 
lique, are  only  by  means  of  cellular  membrane,  and  of 
a few  vessels  which  pass  from  one  to  another. 

Albinus  and  some  others  have  seen  this  muscle  ex- 
tending as  far  as  the  upper  part  of  the  sternum. 

The  use  of  the  rectus  is  to  compress  the  forepart  of 
the  abdomen,  but  more  particularly  the  lower  part; 
and  according  to  the  different  positions  of  the  body,  it 
may  likewise  serve  to  bend  the  trunk  forwards,  or  to 
raise  the  pelvis.  Its  situation  between  the  two  layers 
of  the  internal  oblique,  and  its  adhesions  to  this  sheath, 
secure  it  in  its  place,  and  prevent  it  from  rising  into  a 
prominent  form  when  in  action : and,  lastly,  its  ten- 
dinous intersections  enable  it  to  contract  at  any  of  the 
intermediate  spaces. 

Rectus  abducens  oculi.  See  Rectus  externus 
oculi. 

Rectus  adducens  oculi.  See  Rectus  internus 
oculi. 

Rectus  anterior  brevis.  See  Rectus  capitis  in- 
ternus minor. 

Rectus  anterior  longus.  See  Rectus  capitis  in- 
ternus major. 

Rectus  attollens  oculi.  See  Rectus  superior 
oculi. 

Rectus  capitis  anticus  longus.  See  Rectus  ca- 
pitis internus  major. 

Rectus  capitis  internus  major.  A muscle  situ- 
ated on  the  anterior  part  of  the  neck,  close  to  the  ver- 
tebra?. Rectus  internus  major,  ot  Albinus,  Douglas, 
and  Cowper  Trachclobasilaire,  of  Dumas^Rcetus 


REC 


REG 


anterior  longus,  of  Winslow.  It  was  known  to  most 
of  the  ancient  anatomists,  but  was  not  distinguished  by 
any  particular  name  until  Cowper  gave  it  the  present 
appellation,  and  which  has  been  adopted  by  most 
writers  except  Winslow.  It  is  a long  muscle,  thicker 
and  broader  above  than  below,  where  it  is  thin,  and 
terminates  in  a point.  It  arises,  by  distinct  and  flat 
tendons,  from  the  anterior  points  of  the  transverse  pro- 
cesses of  the  five  inferior  vertebra;  of  the  neck,  and  as- 
cending obliquely  upwards  is  inserted  into  the  anterior 
part  of  the  cuneiform  process  of  the  occipital  bone. 
The  use  of  this  muscle  is  to  bend  the  head  forwards. 

Rectus  capitis  internus  minor.  Cowper,  who 
was  the  first  accurate  describer  of  this  little  muscle, 
gave  it  the  name  of  rectus  internus  minor , which  has 
been  adopted  by  Douglas  andAlbinus.  Winslow  calls 
it  rectus  anterior  brevis , and  Dumas  petit-trachelo- 
basilaire.  It  is  in  part  covered  by  the  rectus  major.  It 
arises  fleshy  from  the  upper  and  forepart  of  the  body 
of  the  first  vertebra  of  the  neck,  near  the  origin  of  its 
transverse  process,  and,  ascending  obliquely  inwards, 
is  inserted  near  the  root  of  the  condyloid  process  of  the 
occipital  bone,  under  the  last  described  muscle.  It  as- 
sists in  bending  the  head  forwards. 

Rectus  capitis  lateralis.  Rectus  lateralis  Fal- 
lopii , of  Douglas.  I'ransver sails  anticus  primus , of 
Winslow.  Rectus  lateralis , of  Cowper ; and  Tra- 
cheli-altoido  basilaire , of  Dumas.  This  muscle  seems 
to  have  been  first  described  by  Fallopius.  Winslow 
calls  it  transversalis  anticus  primus.  It  is  somewhat 
larger  than  the  rectus  minor,  but  resembles  it  in  shape, 
and  is  situated  immediately  behind  the  internal  jugular 
vein,  at  its  coming  out  of  the  cranium.  It  arises  fleshy 
from  the  upper  and  forepart  of  the  transverse  process 
of  the  first  vertebra  of  the  neck,  and,  ascending  a little 
obliquely  upwards  and  outwards,  is  inserted  into  the 
occipital  bone,  opposite  to  the  stylo-mastoid  hole  of  the 
os  temporis.  This  muscle  serves  to  pull  the  head  to 
one  side. 

Rectus  capitis  posticus  major.  This  muscle, 
which  is  the  rectus  major  of  Douglas  and  Winslow,  the 
rectus  capitis  posticus  minor  of  Albinus,  and  the  spine- 
azoido-occipital  of  Dumas,  is  small,  short,  and  flat, 
broader  above  than  below,  and  is  situated,  not  in  a 
straight  direction,  as  its  name  would  insinuate,  but  ob- 
liquely, between  the  occiput  and  the  second  vertebra 
of  the  neck,  immediately  under  the  complexus.  It 
arises,  by  a short,  thick  tendon,  from  the  upper  and 
posterior  part  of  the  spinous  process  of  the  second  ver- 
tebra of  the  neck ; it  soon  becomes  broader,  and,  as- 
cending obliquely  outwards,  is  inserted,  by  a flat  ten- 
don, into  the  external  lateral  part  of  the  lower  semi- 
circular ridge  of  the  os  occipitis.  The  use  of  this  is  to 
extend  the  head,  and  pull  it  backwards. 

Rectus  capitis  posticus  minor.  This  is  the  rectus 
minor  of  Douglas  and  Winslow,  and  the  tuber-altoido- 
occipital  of  Dumas.  It  is  smaller  than  the  last-described 
muscle,  but  resembles  it  in  shape,  and  is  placed  close 
by  its  fellow,  in  the  space  between  the  recti  majores. 
It  arises,  by  a short,  thick  tendon,  from  the  upper  and 
lateral  part  of  a little  protuberance  in  the  middle  of  the 
back  part  of  the  first  vertebra  of  the  neck,  and,  be- 
coming broader  and  thinner  as  it  ascends,  is  inserted, 
by  a broad,  flat  tendon,  into  the  occipital  bone,  imme- 
diately under  the  insertion  of  the  last-described  muscle. 
The  use  of  it  is  to  assist  the  rectus  major  in  drawing 
the  head  backwards. 

Rectus  cruris.  See  Rectus  few  oris. 

Rectus  deprimens  oculi.  See  Rectus  inferior 

4)CUll. 

Rectus  externus  oculi.  The  outer  straight  mus- 
cle of  the  eye.  Abductor  oculi ; Iracundus ; Indigna- 
bundus.  It  arises  from  the  bony  partition  between  the 
foramen  opticum  and  lacerum,  being  the  longest  of  the 
straight  muscles  of  the  eye,  and  is  inserted  into  the 
sclerotic  membrane,  opposite  to  the  outer  canthus  of 
the  eye.  Its  use  is  to  move  the  eye  outwards. 

Rectus  femoris.  A straight  muscle  of  the  thigh, 
situated  immediately  at  the  forepart.  Rectus  cive  Gra- 
cilis anterior , of  Winslow.  Rectus  cruris , of  Albinus ; 
and  Ilio-rotulien , of  Dumas.  It  arises  from  the  os 
ilium  by  two  tendons.  The  foremost  and  shortest  of 
these  springs  from  the  outer  surface  of  the  inferior  and 
anterior  spinous  process  of  the  ilium  ; the  posterior  ten- 
don, which  is  thicker  and  longer  than  the  other,  arises 
from  the  posterior  and  outer  part  of  the  edge  of  the 
cotyloid  cavity,  and  from  the  adjacent  capsular  liga- 


ment. These  two  tendons  soon  unite,  and  form  an 
aponeurosis,  which  spreads  over  the  anterior  surface 
of  the  upper  part  of  the  muscle ; and  through  its  whole 
length  vve  observe  a middle  tendon,  towards  which  its 
fleshy  fibres  run  on  each  side  in  an  oblique  direction, 
so  that  it  may  be  styled  a penniform  muscle.  It  is  in- 
serted tendinous  into  the  upper  edge  and  anterior  sur- 
face of  the  patella,  and  from  thence  sends  off  a thin 
aponeurosis,  which  adheres  to  the  superior  and  lateral 
part  of  the  tibia.  Its  use  is  to  extend  the  leg. 

Rectus  inferior  oculi.  The  inferior  of  the  straight 
muscles  of  the  eye.  Depressor  oculi ; Deprimens ; 
Humilis ; Amatorius.  It  arises  within  the  socket, 
from  below  the  optic  foramen,  and  passes  forwards  to 
be  inserted  into  the  sclerotic  membrane  of  the  bulb  on 
the  under  part.  It  pulls  the  eye  downwards. 

Rectus  internus  femoris.  See  Gracilis. 

Rectus  internus  oculi.  The  internal  straight 
muscle  of  the  eye.  Adducens  oculi;  Adductor  oculi; 
Bibitorius.  It  arises  from  the  inferior  part  of  the  fora- 
men opticum,  between  the  obliquus  superior,  and  the 
rectus  inferior,  being,  from  its  situation,  the  shortest 
muscle  of  the  eye,  and  is  inserted  into  the  sclerotic 
membrane  opposite  to  the  inner  angle.  Its  use  is  to 
turn  the  eye  towards  the  nose 

Rectus  lateralis  fallopii.  See  Rectus  capitis 
lateralis. 

Rectus  major  capitis.  See  Rectus  capitis  posti- 
cus major. 

Rectus  superior  oculi.  The  uppermost  straight 
muscle  of  the  eye.  Attollens  oculi.  Levator  oculi. 
Superbus.  It  arises  from  the  upper  part  of  the  foramen 
opticum  of  the  sphenoid  bone  below  the  levator  palpe- 
brag  superioris,  and  runs  forward  to  be  inserted  into  the 
superior  and  forepart  of  the  sclerotic  membrane  by  a 
broad  and  thin  tendon. 

RECURRENT.  (Recurrens : so  named  from  its 
direction.)  Reflected. 

Recurrent  nerve.  Two  branches  of  the  par  va- 
gum  in  the  cavity  of  the  thorax  are  so  called.  The 
right  is  given  off  near  the  subclavian  artery,  which  it 
surrounds,  and  is  reflected  upwards  to  the  thyroid 
gland  ; the  left  a little  lower,  aud  reflected  around  the 
aorta  to  the  oesophagus,  as  far  as  the  larynx.  They 
are  both  distributed  to  the  muscles  of  the  larynx  and 
pharynx. 

RECURVUS.  Recurved  ; reflexed  ; turned  back- 
ward : applied  to  the  leaves  of  the  Erica  retorta. 

Red  saunders.  See  Pterocarpus  santalinus. 

REDDLE.  A species  of  ochre  or  argillaceous  earth, 
of  a dark  red  colour,  which  has  been  used  medicinally 
as  a tonic  and  antacid. 

REDUCTION.  Revivification.  This  word,  in  its 
most  extensive  sense,  is  applicable  to  all  operations  by 
which  any  substance  is  restored  to  its  natural  state,  or 
which  is  considered  as  such  : but  custom  confines  it  to 
operations  by  which  metals  are  restored  to  their  metal- 
icstate,  after  they  have  been  deprived  of  this,  either  by 
combustion,  as  the  metallic  oxides,  or  by  the  union  of 
some  heterogeneous  matters  which  disguise  them,  as 
fulminating  gold,  luna  cornea,  cinnabar,  and  other 
compounds  of  the  same  kind.  These  reductions  are 
also  called  revivifications. 

REFLEXUS.  Reflected;  recurved;  bent  backward : 
applied  to  the  leaves  of  plants,  as  the  Erica  retorta , and 
to  the  border  of  the  flower-cup  of  the  (Enothera  bien- 
nis, and  the  petals  of  the  Pancratium  zeylanicum. 

REFRIGERANT.  ( Rcfrigeravs ; from  refriuero, 
to  cooL)  Medicines  which  allay  the  heat  of  the  body 
or  of  the  blood. 

REFRIGERATO'RIUM.  (From  refrigero,  to  cool.) 
A vessel  filled  with  water  to  condense  vapours,  or  to 
make  cool  any  substance  which  passes  through  it. 

RE'GIMEN.  (From  rego,  to  govern.)  A term  em- 
ployed in  medicine  to  express  the  plan  or  regulation  of 
the  diet. 

REGI'NA.  A queen.  A name  given  by  way  of 
excellence  to  some  plants. 

Regina  prati.  See  Spireca  ulmaria. 

REGION.  (Regie,  onis.  f.  a rego.)  A part  of  the 
body  ; generally  applied  to  external  parts,  under  which 
is  some  particular  viscus,  that  the  particular  place  may 
be  known.  Anatomists  have  divided  the  regions,  or 
several  parts  of  the  body  when  entire,  as  follows: 

Into  caput , or  head  ; truncus,  or  trunk ; and  eztremi- 
tates , or  extremities. 

A.  The  head  in  divided  into, 


REG 


REN 


1.  Facies , the  face. 

2.  Pars  capillata , the  scalp. 

The  regions  of  the  scalp  are, 

a Vertex  the  top  or  crown  of  the  head. 

b.  Synciput,  the  forepart  of  the  scalp. 

c.  Occiput , the  back  part  of  the  head. 

d.  Partes  latcrales , the  sides. 

The  regions  of  the  face  are, 

a.  Frons,  the  forehead. 

b.  Tempora,  the  temples. 

c.  JVasus , the  nose,  on  which  are,  the  radix , or  root; 
the  dorsum,  or  bridge ; the  apex , or  lip ; and  the  alee , 
or  sides. 

d.  Oculus , the  eye. 

e.  Os,  the  mouth,  the  external  parts  of  which  are, 
labia,  the  lips ; anguli  oris,  where  the  lips  meet;  phil- 
trum,  an  oblong  depression  in  the  middle  of  the  upper 
lip. 

f.  Mentum , the  chin,  the  hair  of  which  is  called 
barba,  whereas  that  of  the  upper  lip  is  termed  mistax. 

g.  Buccce,  the  cheeks. 

h.  Auris,  the  ear,  on  which  are  the  auricula , helix, 
antihelix , tragus,  antitragus , concha , scapha,  and  lo- 
bulus. 

B.  The  trunk  is  divided  into  the  collum , or  neck ; 
the  thorax , or  chest;  the  abdomen,  or  belly. 

1.  Collum,  the  neck,  which  has, 

a.  Pars  antica,  in  which  is  the  pomum  adami,  or 
larynx. 

b.  Pars  postica,  in  which  is  the  fossa,  and  nucha , or 
nape  of  the  neck. 

2.  Thorax,  the  chest,  which  is  divided  into, 

a.  The  front,  on  which  is  mamma,  the  breasts,  and 
scrobiculus  cordis,  the  pit  of  the  stomach. 

b.  The  back  part,  or  dorsum. 

c.  The  sides. 

3.  Abdomen,  is  divided  into  the  forepart,  which  is 
strictly  the  abdomen,  or  belly ; the  hindpart,  or  lumbi, 
the  loins  ; the  lateral  parts  or  sides. 

On  the  abdomen,  or  forepart,  are  the  following  re- 
gions : — 

The  Epigastric , the  sides  of  which  are  termed  hypo- 
chondria. 

The  Umbilical,  the  sides  of  which  are  termed  the 
epicolic  regions. 

The  Hypogastric , the  sides  of  which  are  the  ilia. 

The  Pubes  is  the  region  below  the  abdomen,  covered 
with  hair ; in  women,  termed  mons  veneris  : the  sides 
are  inguina , or  groins. 

Below  the  pubes  are  the  parts  of  generation  in  men, 
the  scrotum  and  penis  ; in  women,  the  labia  pudendi, 
and  the  rima  vulva.  The  space  between  the  genitals 
and  anus  is  called  perinaum , or  fork. 

C.  The  extremities  are  the  superior  and  the  inferior. 

The  upper  extremity  has, 

1.  The  shoulder  or  top,  under  which  is  the  axilla,  or 
arm-pit. 

2.  The  brachium , or  arm. 

3.  The  antibrachium,  or  fore-arm,  in  which  are  the 
bend,  or flexura,  and  elbow. 

4.  The  manus,  or  hand,  which  has  vola,  the  palm  ; 
and  dorsum , the  back  ; and  is  divided  into  the  carpus , 
or  wrist,  the  metacarpus,  and  fingers. 

The  lower  extremity  embraces, 

1.  The  femur,  or  thigh,  the  upper  and  outer  part  of 
which  is  called  coxa , or  the  regio  ischiadica. 

2.  The  crus,  or  leg,  in  which  are  the  genu,  or  knee, 
cavurn  popletis,  or  ham,  and  the  sura,  or  calf. 

3.  Thepes,  or  foot,  which  is  divided  into  the  tarsus, 
metatarsus,  and  toes. 

The  upper  part  of  the  tarsus  laterally  has  the  mal- 
leolus externus  and  internus , or  the  inner  and  outer 
ankle. 

RE  GIUS.  (From  rex,  a king.)  Royal : applied  to 
a disease,  and  to  a chemical  preparation  ; to  the  former, 
the  jaundice,  because  in  it  the  colour  of  the  skin  is  like 
gold  ; and  to  the  latter,  because  it  dissolves  gold. 

REGULAR.  Regularis.  A term  applied  to  dis- 
eases, which  observe  their  usual  course,  in  opposition 
to  irregular,  in  which  the  course  of  symptoms  deviate 
from  what  is  usual,  as  regular  gout,  regular  small- 
pox, See. 

Regular  gout.  See  Arthritis. 

RE'GULUS.  (Diminutive  of  rex,  a king : so  called 
because  the  alchemist  expected  to  find  gold,  the  king  of 
metals,  collected  at  the  bottom  of  the  crucible  after 
fusion.)  The  name  regulus  was  given  by  chemists  to 


metallic  matters  when  separated  from  other  substance® 
by  fusion.  This  name  was  introduced  by  alchemists, 
who,  expecting  always  to  find  gold  in  the  metal  col- 
lected at  the  bottom  of  their  crucibles  after  fusion, 
called  this  metal,  thus  collected,  regulus,  as  containing 
gold,  the  king  of  metals.  It  was  afterward  applied  to 
the  metal  extracted  from  the  ores  of  the  semi-metals, 
which  formerly  bore  the  name  that  is  now  given  to  the 
semi-metals  themselves.  Thus  we  had  regulus  of  air 
timony,  regulus  of  arsenic,  and  regulus  of  cobalt. 

Regulus  of  antimony.  See  Antimony. 

Regulus  of  arsenic.  See  Arsenic. 

REME'DIUM.  {A  re,  and  medeor , to  cure.)  A re- 
medy, or  that  which  is  employed  with  a view  to  pre- 
vent., palliate,  or  remove  a disease. 

Rkmedium:  divinum.  See  Imperatoria. 

REMEDY.  See  Remedium. 

REMINISCENCE.  See  Memory. 

REMITTENT.  ( Remittens  ; from  remitto , to  as- 
suage or  lessen.)  Any  disorder,  the  symptoms  of  which 
diminish  very  considerably,  and  return  again,  so  as  not 
to  leave  the  person  ever  free. 

Remittent  fever.  See  Febris  inter  mittens. 

Re'mora  aratri.  (From  resnoror,  to  hinder,  and 
aratrum , a plough.)  See  Ononis  spinosa. 

Remote  cause.  See  Exciting  cause. 

REN.  {Ren,  i us,  m.  P*en,  ano  tov  peiv ; because 
through  them  the  urine  flows.)  The  kidney.  See 
Kidney. 

RENAL.  ( Renalis ; from  ren,  the  kidney.)  Ap- 
pertaining to  the  kidney. 

Renal  artery.  See  Emulgcnt  artery. 

Renal  gland.  Glandula  renalis.  Renal  capsule. 
Supra-renal  gland.  The  supra  renal  glands  are  two 
hollow  bodies,  like  glands  in  fabric,  and  placed,  one  on 
each  side,  upon  the  kidney.  They  are  covered  by  a 
double  tunic,  and  their  cavities  are  filled  with  a liquor 
of  a brownish  red  colour.  Their  figure  is  triangular ; 
and  they  are  larger  in  the  foetus  than  the  kidneys  ; but, 
in  adults,  they  are  less  than  the  kidneys.  The  right  is 
affixed  to  the  liver,  the  left  to  the  spleen  and  pancreas, 
and  both  to  the  diaphragm  and  kidneys.  They  have 
arteries,  veins,  lymphatics,  and  nerves;  their  arteries 
arise  from  the  diaphragmatic,  the  aorta,  and  the  renal 
arteries.  The  vein  of  the  right  supra-renal  gland 
empties  itself  into  the  vena  cava;  that  of  the  left  into 
the  renal  vein;  their  lymphatic  vessels  go  directly  into 
the  thoracic  duct;  they  have  nerves  common  alike  to 
these  glands  and  the  kidneys.  They  have  no  excre- 
tory duct,  and  their  use  is  at  present  unknown.  It  is 
supposed  they  answer  one  use  in  the  foetus,  and  an- 
other in  the  adult,  but  what  these  uses  are  is  uncertain. 
Boerhaave  supposed  their  use  to  consist  in  their  fur- 
nishing lymph  to  dilute  the  blood  returned,  after  the 
secretion  of  the  urine,  in  the  renal  vein ; but  this  is 
very  improbable,  since  the  vein  of  the  right  supra-re- 
nal gland  goes  to  the  vena  cava,  and  the  blood  carried 
back  by  the  renal  vein  wants  no  dilution.  It  has  also 
been  said,  that  these  glands  not  only  prepare  lymph,  by 
which  the  blood  is  fitted  for  the  nutrition  of  the  deli- 
cate foetus ; but  that  in  adults  they  serve  -to  restore  to 
the  blood  of  the  vena  cava  the  irritable  parts  which 
it  loses  by  the  secretion  of  bile  and  urine.  Some, 
again,  have  considered  them  as  diverticula  in  the  foe- 
tus, to  divert  the  blood  from  the  kidneys,  and  lessen 
the  quantity  of  urine.  The  celebrated  Morgagni  be- 
lieved their  office  to  consist  in  conveying  something  to 
the  thoracic  duct.  It  is  singular,  that  in  children  who 
are  born  without  the  cerebrum,  these  glands  are  ex- 
tremely small,  and  sometimes  wanting. 

Renal  vein.  See  Emulgcnt  vein. 

Renal  vessels.  See  Emulgent. 

RENIFORMIS.  Kidney-shaped.  1.  In  anatomy, 
this  term  is  applied  to  any  deviations  of  parts  as- 
suming a kidney-like  form. 

2.  In  botany,  leaves,  seeds,  &c.  are  so  called  from 
their  shape ; it  is  a short,  broad,  roundish  leaf,  the 
base  of  which  is  hollowed  out,  as  that  of  the  Asarum 
europaum , and  Sibthorpia  europaa,  and  the  seeds  of 
Beta  and  Phaseolus. 

RENNET.  Runnet.  The  gastric  juice  and  con- 
tents of  the  stomach  of  calves.  It  is  much  employed 
in  preparing  cheese,  and  in  pharmacy,  for  making 
whey.  To  about  a pound  of  milk,  in  a silver  or 
earthen  basin,  placed  on  hot  ashes,  add  three  or  four 
grains  of  rennet,  diluted  with  a little  water;  as  it  be- 
comes cold,  the  milk  curdles,  and  the  whey,  or  serous 


hep 


RES 


part,  separates  itself  from  the  caseous  part.  When 
these  parts  appear  perfectly  distinct,  pour  the  whole 
upon  a strainer,  through  which  the  whey  will  pass, 
while  the  curds  remain  behind.  This  whey  is  always 
rendered  somewhat  whitish,  by  a very  small  and 
much  divided  portion  of  the  caseous  part;  but  it  may 
be  separated  in  such  a manner,  that  the  whey  will  re- 
main limpid  and  colourless,  and  this  is  what  is  called 
clarifying  it.  Put  into  a basin  the  white  of  an  egg,  a 
glass  of  the  serum  of  milk,  and  a few  grains  of  tar- 
taric acid  in  powder;  whip  the  mixture  with  an  ozier 
twig,  and,  having  added  the  remainder  of  the  unclari- 
fied whey,  place  the  mixture  again  over  the  fire  until 
it  begins  to  boil.  The  tartaric  acid  completes  the  co- 
agulation of  the  white  part  of  the  milk  which  remains; 
the  white  of  egg,  as  it  becomes  hot,  coagulates  and  en- 
velopes the  caseous  part.  When  the  whey  is  clear, 
filter  it  through  paper : what  passes  will  be  perfectly 
limpid,  and  have  a greenish  colour.  This  is  clarified 
whey. 

Re'ntjens.  (From  renuo,  to  nod  the  head  back  in 
sign  of  refusal : so  called  from  its  office  of  jerking  back 
the  head.)  A muscle  of  the  head. 

REPANDUS.  Repand  ; wavy:  a leaf  is  so  called 
which  is  bordered  with  many  acute  angles,  and  small 
segments  of  circles  alternately ; as  that  of  the  Meny- 
anthes  nympheeoides. 

REPELLE'NT.  ( Repellens  ; from  repello , to  drive 
back.)  Applications  are  sometimes  so  named  which 
make  diseases  recede,  as  it  were,  from  the  surface  of 
the  body. 

REPENS.  Creeping;  often  used  in  botany:  caulis 
repens , one  that  creeps  along  the  earth,  as  that  of  the 
Ranunculus  repens.  Applied  to  a root,  it  means  run- 
ning transversely,  and  here  and  there  giving  off  new 
plants  ; as  that  of  the  Glycyrrhiza  glabra,  and  Sambu- 
cus  ebulus. 

REPULSION.  All  matter  possesses  a power  which 
is  in  constant  opposition  to  attraction.  This  agency, 
which  is  equally  powerful  and  equally  obvious,  acts 
an  important  part  in  the  phenomena  of  nature,  and  is 
'called  the  power  of  repulsion. 

That  such  a force  exists,  which  opposes  the  approach 
of  bodies  towards  each  other,  is  evident  from  number- 
less facts. 

Newton  has  shown,  that  when  a convex  lens  is  put 
upon  a flat  glass,  it  remains  at  a distance  of  the  one- 
hundred-and-thirty-seventh  part  of  an  inch,  and  a 
very  considerable  pressure  is  required  to  diminish  this 
distance;  nor  does  any  force  which  can  be  applied 
bring  them  into  actual  mathematical  contact.  A force 
may  indeed  be  applied  sufficient  to  break  the  glasses 
into  pieces,  but  it  may  be  demonstrated  that  it  does 
not  diminish  their  distance  much  beyond  the  one-thou- 
sandth part  of  an  inch.  There  is,  therefore,  a repul- 
sive force,  which  prevents  the,  two  glasses  from  touch- 
ing each  other. 

Boscovich  has  shown,  that  when  an  ivory  billiard- 
ball  sets  another  in  motion,  by  striking  against  it,  an 
equal  quantity  of  its  own  motion  is  lost,  and  the  ball 
at  rest  begins  to  move  while  the  other  is  still  at  a 
distance. 

There  exists,  therefore,  a repulsion  between  bodies ; 
this  repulsion  takes  place  while  they  are  yet  at  a dis- 
tance from  each  other  ; and  it  opposes  their  approach 
towards  each  other. 

The  cause  or  the  nature  of  this  force  is  equally  in- 
scrutable with  that  of  attraction,  but  its  existence  is 
undoubted : it  increases,  as  far  as  has  been  ascertained, 
inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance,  consequently 
at  the  point  of  contact  it  is  infinite. 

The  following  experiments  will  serve  to  prove  the 
energy  of  repulsion  more  fully. 

Experiment. — When  a glass  tube  is  immersed  in 
water,  the  fluid  is  attracted  by  the  glass,  and  drawn  up 
into  the  tube;  but,  if  we  substitute  mercury  instead  of 
water,  we  shall  find  a different  effect.  If  a glass  tube 
of  any  bore  be  immersed  in  this  fluid,  it  does  not  rise, 
but  the  surface  of  the  mercury  is  considerably  below 
the  level  of  that  which  surrounds  it,  when  the  diame- 
ter of  the  tube  is  very  small. 

In  this  case,  therefore,  a repulsion  takes  place  be- 
tween the  glass  and  the  mercury,  which  is  even  consi- 
derably greater  than  the  attraction  existing  between 
the  particles  of  the  mercury;  and  hence  the  latter  can- 
not rise  in  the  tube,  but  is  repelled,  and  becomes  de- 
pressed. 

239 


Expenment. — When  we  present  the  north  pole  of  a 
magnet  A,  to  the  same  pole  of  another  magnet  B,  sus- 
pended on  a pivot,  and  at  liberty  to  move,  the  magnet 
B will  recede  as  the  other  approaches ; and,  by  follow- 
ing it  with  A,  at  a proper  distance,  it  may  be  made  to 
turn  round  on  its  pivot  with  considerable  velocity. 

In  this  case,  there  is  evidently  some  agency,  which 
opposes  the  approach  of  the  north  poles  of  A and  B, 
which  acts  as  an  antagonist,  and  causes  the  moveable 
magnet  to  retire  before  the  other.  There  is,  therefore, 
a repulsion  between  the  two  magnets,  a repulsion 
which  increases  with  the  power  of  the  magnets, 
which  may  be  made  so  great,  that  all  the  force  of  a 
strong  man  is  insufficient  to  make  the  two  north  poles 
touch  each  other.  The  same  repulsion  is  equally  ob- 
vious in  electrical  bodies,  for  instance: 

Experiment. — If  two  small  cork  balls  be  suspended 
from  a body,  so  as  to  touch  one  another,  and  if  we 
charge  the  body  in  the  usual  manner  with  electricity, 
the  two  cork  balls  separate  from  each  other,  and  stand 
at  a distance  proportional  to  the  quantity  of  electricity 
with  which  the  body  is  charged ; the  balls,  of  course, 
repel  each  other. 

Experiment. — If  we  rub  over  the  surface  of  a sheet 
of  paper  the  fine  dust  of  lycopodium,  or  puff-ball,  and 
then  let  water  fall  on  it  in  small  quantities,  the  water 
will  instantly  be  repelled,  and  form  itself  into  distinct 
drops,  which  do  not  touch  the  lycopodium,  but  roll 
over  it  with  uncommon  rapidity.  That  the  drops  do 
not  touch  the  lycopodium,  but  are  actually  kept  at  a 
distance  above  it,  is  obvious  from  the  copious  reflection 
of  white  light. 

Experiment. — If  he  surface  of  water  contained  in  a 
basin  be  covered  over  with  lycopodium,  a solid  suo 
stance,  deposited  at  the  bottom  of  the  fluid,  may  be 
taken  out  of  if  with  the  hand,  without  wetting  it.  In 
this  case,  the  repulsion  is  so  powerful  as  to  defend  tire 
hand  completely  from  the  contact  of  the  fluid. 

RES.  A thing. 

Res  naturales.  The  naturals.  According  to  Boer- 
haave,  these  are  life,  the  cause  of  life,  and  its  effects 
These,  he  says,  remain  in  some  degree,  however  disor 
dered  a person  may  be. 

Res  non-naturales.  See  Non-naturals. 

RESE'DA.  (From  resedo , to  appease:  so  called 
from  its  virtue  of  allaying  inflammation.)  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  system.  Class, 
Dodecandria;  Order,  Trigynia. 

2.  The  name,  in  some  pharmacopoeias,  of  the  dyers’ 
weed.  See  Reseda  luteola. 

Reseda  luteola.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
dyers’  weed.  Dioscorides  mentions  it  as  useful  in 
jaundice. 

RESIN.  Resina.  The  name  resin  is  used  to  de- 
note solid  inflammable  substances,  of  vegetable  origin, 
soluble  in  alkohol,  usually  affording  much  soot  by  their 
combustion.  They  are  likewise  soluble  in  oils,  but  not 
at  all  in  water ; and  are  more  or  less  acted  upon  by  the 
alkalies. 

All  the  resins  appear  to  be  nothing  else  but  volatile 
oils  rendered  concrete  by  their  combination  with  oxy- 
gen. The  exposure  of  these  to  the  open  air,  and  the 
decomposition  of  acids  applied  to  them,  evidently  prove 
tins  conclusion. 

There  are  some  among  the  known  resins  which  are 
very  pure,  and  perfectly  soluble  in  alkohol,  such  as  the 
balsam  of  Mecca  and  of  Capivi,  turpentines,  tacama- 
haca,  elemi : others  are  less  pure,  and  contain  a small 
portion  of  extract,  which  renders  them  not  totally  solu- 
ble in  alkohol ; such  are  mastic,  sandarach,  guaiacum, 
labdanum,  and  dragon’s  blood. 

The  essential  properties  of  resin  are,  being  in  the 
solid  form,  insoluble  in  water,  perfectly  soluble  in  alko- 
hol, and  in  essential  and  expressed  oils,  and  being  in- 
capable of  being  volatilized  without  decomposition. 

Resins  are  obtained  chiefly  from  the  vegetable  king- 
dom, either  by  spontaneous  exudation,  or  from  inci- 
sions made  into  vegetables  affording  juices  which  con- 
tain this  principle.  These  juices  contain  a portion  of 
essential  oil,  which,  from  exposure  to  the  air,  is  either 
volatilized  or  converted  into  resinous  matter,  or  some- 
times the  oil  is  abstracted  by  distillation.  In  some 
plants  the  resin  is  deposited,  in  a concrete  state,  in  the 
interstices  of  the  wood,  or  other  parts  of  the  plant. 

Resins,  when  concrete,  are  brittle,  and  have  gene- 
rally a smooth  and  conchoidal  fracture;  their  lustre  is 
peculiar,  they  are  more  or  less  transparent  and  of  a 


RES 


colour  which  Is  usually  some  shade  of  yellow,  or 
brown;  they  are  of  a greater  specific  gravity  than 
water ; they  are  often  odorous  and  sapid,  easily  fusi- 
ble, and,  on  cooling,  become  solid. 

Resin,  black.  See  Resina  nigra. 

Resin , elastic.  See  Caoutchouc. 

Resin-tree , elastic.  See  Caoutchouc. 

Resin , white.  See  Resina  alba. 

Resin , yellow.  See  Resina  flava. 

RESINA.  (From  pew,  to  flow:  because  it  flows 
spontaneously  from  the  tree.)  See  Resin. 

Resina  alba.  The  inspissated  juice  of  the  Pinus 
sylvestris,  &c.  is  so  called ; and  sometimes  the  resi- 
duum of  the  distillation  of  oil  of  turpentine.  See 
Resina  flava. 

Resina  elastica.  See  Caoutchouc. 

Resina  flava.  Resina  alba.  Yellow  resin,  what 
remains  in  the  still  after  distilling  oil  of  turpentine,  by 
adding  water  to  the  common  turpentine.  It  is  of  very 
extensive  use  in  surgery  as  an  active  detergent,  and 
forms  the  base  of  the  unguentum  resince  flava:. 

Resina  nigra.  Colophonia.  What  remains  in  the 
retort  after  distilling  the  oil  of  turpentine  from  the 
common  turpentine.  This  name  is  also  given,  in  the 
London  Pharmacopoeia,  to  pitch. 

Resina  novi  belgii.  See  Botany-bay. 

RESOLUTION.  (Resolutio ; from  resolvo , to 
loosen.)  A termination  of  inflammation  in  which  the 
disease  disappears  without  any  abscess,  mortification, 
&c.  being  occasioned. 

The  term  is  also  applied  to  the  dispersion  of  swell- 
ings, indurations,  &c. 

RESOLVENT.  ( Rcsolvens ; from  resolvo,  to 
loosen.)  This  term  is  applied  by  surgeons  to  such 
substances  as  discuss  inflammatory  and  other  tumours. 

RESPIRATION.,  (Respiratio ; from  respiro,  to 
take  breath.)  To  comprehend  the  important  function 
of  breathing  or  respiration,  it  is  not  only  necessary  to 
have  a knowledge  of  the  structure  of  the  thoracic 
viscera,  the  form  of  the  parietes,  of  the  chest,  and  to 
comprehend  the  mechanism  by  which  the  air  enters 
and  passes  out  of  it,  but  also  to  be  well  acquainted 
with  the  chemical  and  physical  properties  of  the  air, 
and  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

The  lungs  are  two  spongy  and  vascular  organs  of  a 
considerable  size,  situated  in  the  lateral  parts  of  the 
chest.  Their  parenchyma  is  divided  and  subdivided 
into  lobes  and  lobules,  the  forms  and  dimensions  of 
which  it  is  difficult  to  determine. 

We  learn,  by  the  careful  examination  of  a pulmo- 
nary lobule,  that  it  is  formed  of  a spongy  tissue,  the 
areolce  of  which  are  so  small  that  a strong  lens  is  ne- 
cessary to  observe  them  distinctly;  these  areolce  all 
communicate  with  each  other,  and  they  are  surrounded 
by  a thin  layer  of  cellular  tissue  which  separates  them 
from  the  adjoining  lobules. 

Into  each  lobule  enters  one  of  the  divisions  of  the 
bronchia,  and  one  of  the  pulmonary  artery ; this  last  is 
distributed  in  the  body  of  the  lobule  in  a manner  that 
is  not  well  known  ; it  seems  to  be  transformed  into  nu- 
merous radicles  of  the  pulmonary  veins.  Dr.  Magen- 
die  believes  that  these  numerous  small  vessels,  by 
which  the  artery  terminates  and  the  pulmonary  veins 
begin,  by  crossing  and  joining  in  different  manners, 
form  the  areolce  of  the  tissue  of  the  lobules.  The 
small  bronchial  division  that  ends  in  the  lobule,  does 
not  enter  into  the  interior  of  it,  but  breaks  off  as  soon 
as  it  has  arrived  at  the  parenchyma. 

This  last  circumstance  appears  remarkable : • be- 
cause, since  the  bronchia  do  not  penetrate  into  the 
spongy  tissue  of  the  lungs,  it  is  not  probable  that  the 
surface  of  the  cells  with  which  the  air  is  in  contact  is 
covered  by  the  mucous  membrane.  The  most  minute 
anatomy  cannot  prove  its  existence  in  this  place. 

A part  of  the  nerve  of  the  eighth  pair,  and  some 
filaments  of  the  sympathetic,  are  expended  on  the 
lungs,  but  it  is  not  known  how  they  are  distributed ; 
the  surface  of  the  organ  is  covered  by  the  pleura,  a 
serous  membrane,  similar  to  the  peritonaeum  in  its 
structure  and  functions. 

Round  the  bronchia , and  near  the  place  where  they 
enter  into  the  tissue  of  the  lungs,  a certain  number  of 
lymphatic  glands  exist,  the  colour  of  which  is  almost 
black,  and  to  which  the  small  number  of  lymphatic 
vessels  which  spring  from  the  surface  and  from  the 
interior  of  the  pulmonary  tissue  are  directed. 

With  regard  to  the  lungs,  we  receive  from  the  art  of 


RES 

delicate  injections  some  information  that  we  ought  not 
to  neglect. 

If  we  inject  mercury,  or  even  coloured  water,  into 
the  pulmonary  artery,  the  injected  matter  passes  im- 
mediately into  the  pulmonary  veins,  but  at  the  same 
time  a part  enters  the  bronchia , and  goes  out  by  the 
trachea.  If  the  matter  be  injected  into  a pulmonary 
vein,  it  passes  partly  into  the  artery  and  partly  into  the 
bronchia.  Lastly,  if  it  be  introduced  into  the  trachea, 
it  very  soon  penetrates  into  the  artery,  into  the  pulmo- 
nary veins,  and  even  into  the  bronchial  artery  and 
vein. 

The  lungs  fill  up  a great  part  of  the  cavity  of  the 
chest,  and  enlarge  and  contract  with  it ; and  as  they 
communicate  with  the  external  air  by  the  trachea  and 
the  larynx,  every  time  that  the  chest  enlarges  it  is  dis- 
tended by  the  air,  which  is  again  expelled  when  the 
chest  resumes  its  former  dimensions.  We  must  then 
necessarily  stop  to  examine  this  cavity. 

The  breast,  or  the  thorax,  is  of  the  form  of  a cone, 
the  summit  of  which  is  above,  and  the  base  below. 

The  apparent  form  and  dimensions  of  the  breast  are 
determined  by  the  length,  disposition,  and  motions  qf 
the  ribs  upon  the  vertebra. 

The  chest  is  capable  of  being  dilated  vertically, 
transversely,  forward  and  backward,  that  is,  in  the 
direction  of  its  principal  diameters. 

The  principal,  and  almost  the  only,  agent  of  the 
vertical  dilatation,  is  the  diaphragm,  which,  in  contract- 
ing, tends  to  lose  its  vaulted  form,  and  to  become  a 
plane  ; amotion  which  cannot  take  place  without  the 
pectoral  motion  of  the  thorax  increasing,  and  the  ab- 
dominal portion  diminishing. 

The  sides  of  this  muscle,  which  are  fleshy,  and  cor- 
respond with  the  lungs,  descend  farther  than  the  cen- 
tre, which,  being  aponeurotic,  can  make  no  effort  by 
itself,  and  which  is,  besides,  retained  by  its  union  with 
the  sternum  and  the  pericardium. 

In  most  cases  this  lowering  of  the  diaphragm  is  suffi- 
cient for  the  dilatation  of  the  breast ; but  it  often  hap- 
pens that  the  sternum  and  the  ribs,  in  changing  the  po- 
sition between  them  and  the  vertebral  column,  produce 
a sensible  augmentation  in  the  pectoral  cavity. 

In  the  general  eievation  of  the  thorax,  its  form  ne- 
cessarily changes,  as  well  as  the  relations  of  the  bones 
of  which  it  is  composed : the  cartilages  of  the  ribs 
seem  particularly  intended  to  assist  these  changes ; as 
soon  as  they  are  ossified,  and  consequently  lose  their 
elasticity,  the  breast  becomes  immoveable. 

While  the  sternum  is  carried  upwards,  its  inferior 
extremity  is  directed  a little  forward : it  thus  undergoes 
a slight  swinging  motion ; the  ribs  become  less  oblique 
upon  the  vertebral  column  ; they  remove  a little  from 
each  other,  and  their  inferior  edge  is  directed  outward 
by  a small  tension  of  the  cartilage.  All  these  pheno- 
mena are  not  very  apparent  except  in  the  superior  ribs 

A general  enlargement  of  the  thorax  takes  place  by 
its  elevation,  as  well  from  front  to  back,  as  trans- 
versely, and  upwards. 

This  enlargement  is  called  inspiration.  It  presents 
three  degrees  : 1st,  ordinary  inspiration , which  takes 
place  by  the  depression  of  the  diaphragm,  and  an  al- 
most insensible  elevation  of  the  thorax ; 2dly,  the  great 
inspiration,  in  which  there  is  an  evident  elevation  of 
the  thorax,  and,  at  the  same  time,  a1  depression  of  the 
diaphragm  ; 3dly,  forced  inspiration,  in  which  the  di- 
mensions of  the  thorax  are  augmented  in  every  direc- 
tion, as  far  as  the  physical  disposition  of  this  cavity 
will  permit. 

Expiration  succeeds  to  the  dilatation  of  the  thorax ; 
that  is,  the  return  of  the  thorax  to  its  ordinary  position 
and  dimensions. 

The  mechanism  of  this  motion  is  the  reverse  of 
what  we  have  just  described.  It  is  produced  by  the 
elasticity  of  the  cartilages,  and  by  the  ligaments  of  the 
ribs,  which  have  a tendency  to  resume  their  former 
shape,  by  the  relaxation  of  the  muscles  that  had 
raised  the  thorax,  and  by  the  contraction  of  a great 
number  of  muscles,  so  disposed  that  they  lower  and 
contract  the  chest. 

The  contraction  of  the  thorax,  or  expiration,  pre- 
sents also  three  degrees:  1st,  ordinary  expiration; 
2d,  great  expiration  ; 3d,  forced  expiration. 

In  ordinary  expiration,  the  relaxation  of  the  dia- 
phragm, pressed  upwards  by  the  abdominal  viscera, 
which  are  themselves  urged  by  the  anterior  muscles  of 
this  cavity,  produces  the  diminution  of  the  vertical 

23'J 


RES 


RES 


diameter;  vehement  expiration  is  produced  by  the 
relaxation  of  the  inspiring  muscles,  and  a slight  con- 
traction of  those  of  expiration,  which  permits  the  ribs 
to  assume  their  ordinary  relations  with  the  vertebral 
column.  But  the  contraction  of  the  chest  may  go  still 
farther.  If  the  abdominal  and  other  expiratory  mus- 
cies  contract  forcibly,  a greater  depression  of  the  dia- 
phragm takes  place,  the  ribs  descend  lower,  the  base 
of  the  conoid  shrinks,  and  there  is,  consequently,  a 
greater  diminution  of  the  capacity  of  the  thorax. 
This  is  called  forced  expiration. 

We  shall  now  consider  the  air  as  an  elastic  fluid, 
which  possesses  the  property  of  exerting  pressure 
upon  the  bodies  it  surrounds,  and  upon  the  sides  of  the 
vessels  that  contain  it.  This  property  supposes,  in  the 
particles  of  air,  a continual  tendency  to  repulse  each 
other. 

Another  property  of  the  air  is  compressibility  ; thatis, 
its  volume  changes  with  the  pressure  which  it  supports. 

The  air  expands  by  heat  like  all  other  bodies ; its 
volume  augments  1-480,  by  an  increase  of  one  degree 
of  Fahrenheit’s  thermometer. 

The  air  has  weight : this  is  ascertained  by  weighing 
a vessel  full  of  air,  and  then  weighing  the  same  vessel 
after  the  air  has  been  taken  out  by  the  air-pump. 

The  air  is  more  or  less  charged  with  humidity.  '*■ 

Air,  notwithstanding  its  thinness  and  transpareffcy, 
refracts,  intercepts,  and  reflects  the  light. 

The  air  is  composed  of  two  gases  that  are  very  dif- 
ferent in  their  properties. 

1st,  Oxygen : this  gas  is  a little  heavier  than  air,  in 
the  proportion  of  11  to  10,  and  it  combines  with  all  the 
simple  bodies  ; it  is  an  element  of  water,  of  vegetable 
and  animal  matters,  and  of  almost  all  known  bodies  ; 
it  is  essential  for  combustion  and  respiration.  2dly, 
Azote : this  gas  is  a little  lighter  than  air  ; it  is  an  ele- 
ment of  ammonia  and  of  animal  substances  ; it  extin- 
guishes bodies  in  combustion. 

It  has  been  thus  found  that  100  parts  in  weight  of  air 
contain  21  parts  of  oxygen  and  79  of  azote.  These 
proportions  are  the  same  in  evary  place  and  at  all 
heights,  and  have  not  sensibly  changed  for  these  fifteen 
years,  since  they  were  positively  established  by  che- 
mistry. 

Besides  oxygen  and  azote,  the  air  contains  a variable 
quantity  of  the  vapour  of  water,  as  we  have  already 
observed,  and  a small  quantity  of  carbonic  acid, 
the  proportion  of  which  has  not  yet  been  positively 
ftixed. 

The  air  is  decomposed  by  almost  all  combustible 
bodies,  at  a temperature  which  is  peculiar  to  each.  In 
this  decomposition  they  combine  with  the  oxygen,  and 
set  the  azote  at  liberty. 

Of  inspiration  and  expiration. — If  we  call  to  mind 
the  disposition  of  the  pulmonary  lobules,  the  extensi- 
bility of  their  tissue,  their  communication  with  the 
external  air  by  means  of  the  bronchia,  of  the  trachea, 
and  of  the  larynx,  we  will  easily  conceive  that  every 
time  the  breast  dilates,  the  air  immediately  enters  the 
pulmonary  tissue,  in  a quantity  proportionate  to  the 
degree  of  dilatation.  When  the  breast  contracts,  a 
part  of  the  air  that  it  contains  is  expelled,  and  passes 
out  by  the  glottis. 

In  order  to  arrive  at  the  glottis  in  inspiration,  or  to 
go  outwards  in  expiration,  the  air  sometimes  traverses 
the  nasal  canal  and  sometimes  the  mouth  : the  position 
of  the  velum  of  the  palate,  in  these  two  cases,  de- 
serves to  be  described.  When  the  air  traverses  the 
nasal  canals  and  the  pharynx  to  enter  or  to  pass  out 
of  the  larynx,  the  velum  of  the  palate  is  vertical,  and 
placed  with  its  anterior  surface  against  the  posterior 
part  of  the  base  of  the  tongue,  so  that  the  mouth  has 
no  communication  with  the  larynx.  When  the  air  tra- 
verses the  mouth  in  inspiration  or  expiration,  the 
velum  of  the  palate  is  horizontal,  its  posterior  edge  is 
embraced  by  the  concave  surface  of  the  pharynx,  and 
all  communication  is  cut  off  between  the  inferior  parts 
of  the  pharynx  and  the  superior  part  of  this  canal,  as 
well  as  with  the  nasal  canals.  Thence  the  necessity  of 
making  the  sick  breathe  by  the  mouth,  if  it  is  necessary 
to  examine  the  tonsils  or  the  pharynx. 

These  two  ways  for  the  air  to  arrive  at  the  glottis 
were  necessary,  for  they  assist  each  other : thus  when 
the  mouth  is  full  of  food,  the  respiration  takes  place 
by  the  nose ; it  takes  place  by  the  mouth  when  the 
nasal  canals  are  obstructed  by  mucus,  by  a slight 
•welling  of  the  membrane,  or  any  other  cause.  The 


glottis  opens  in  the  instant  of  inspiration,  and,  on  tha 
contrary,  it  shuts  in  the  expiration. 

It  appears  that  in  a given  time  the  number  of  in- 
spirations made  by  one  person  are  very  different  from 
those  of  another.  Haller  thinks  there  are  twenty  in  the 
space  of  a minute.  A man  upon  whom  Menzies  made 
experiments  respired  only  fourteen  times  in  a minute 
Sir  H.  Davy  informs  us  that  he  respires  in  the  same 
period  twenty-six  or  twenty-seven  times  , Dr.  Thomson 
says  that  he  respires  generally  nineteen  times ; and  Dr. 
Magendie  only  respires  fifteen  times.  Taking  twenty 
times  in  a minute  for  the  mean,  this  will  give  28,800 
inspirations  in  twenty-four  hours.  But  this  number 
probably  varies  according  to  many  circumstances,  such 
as  the  state  of  sleep,  motion,  distention  of  the  sto- 
mach by  food,  the  capacity  of  the  chest,  moral  affec- 
tions, &c.  What  quantity  of  air  enters  the  chest  at 
each  inspiration  7 What  quantity  goes  out  at  each 
expiration  7 How  much  generally  remains  7 

According  to  Menzies,  the  mean  quantity  of  air  that 
enters  the  lungs  at  each  inspiration,  is  40  cubic  inches. 
Goodwin  thinks  that  the  quantity  remaining  after  a 
complete  expiration  is  109  cubic  inches;  Menzies  af- 
firms that  this  quantity  is  greater,  and  that  it  amounts 
to  179  cubic  inches. 

According  to  Davy,  after  a forced  expiration,  his 


lungs  contained  41  cubic  inches. 

A fter  a natural  expiration 118 

After  a natural  inspiration 135 

After  a forced  inspiration 254 

By  a forced  expiration,  after  a forced  in- 
spiration, there  passed  out  of  the  lungs  190 

After  a natural  inspiration 78.5 

After  a natural  expiration 67.5  c.  i. 


Dr.  Thomson  thinks  that  we  should  not  be  far  fro» 
the  truth  in  supposing  that  the  ordinary  quantity  of 
air  contained  in  the  lungs  is  280,  and  that  there  entei 
or  go  out  at  each  inspiration,  or  expiration,  40  inches 
Thus,  supposing  20  inspirations  in  a minute,  the  quan 
tity  of  air  that  would  enter  and  pass  out  in  this  time 
would  be  800  inches ; which  makes  48,000  in  the 
hour,  and  in  24  hours  1,152,000  cubic  inches.  A great 
number  of  experiments  have  been  made  by  chemists 
to  determine  if  the  volume  of  air  diminishes  while  it 
remains  in  the  lungs.  In  considering  the  latest  expe- 
riments, it  appears,  that  in  most  cases  there  is  no 
diminution ; that  is,  a volume  of  expired  air  is  exactly 
the  same  as  one  of  inspired  air.  When  this  diminu- 
tion takes  place  it  appears  to  be  only  accidental. 

By  successively  traversing  the  mouth  or  the  mrsflS* 
cavities,  the  pharynx,  the  larynx,  the  trachia,  and  tlx. 
bronchia,  the  inspired  air  becomes  of  a similar  tem 
perature  with  the  body.  It  most  generally  become* 
heated,  and  consequently  rarified,  so  that  the  sam& 
quantity  in  weight  of  air  occupies  a much  greater 
space  in  the  lungs  than  it  occupied  before  it  entered 
them.  Besides  this  change  of  volume,  the  inspired  air 
is  charged  with  the  vapour  that  it  carries  awTay  from 
the  mucous  membranes  of  the  air-passages,  and  in 
this  state  always,  hot  and  humid,  it  arrives  in  the 
pulmonary  lobules ; also  this  portion  of  air  of  which 
we  treat  mixes  with  that  which  the  lungs  contained 
before. 

But  expiration  soon  succeeds  to  inspiration:  an 
interval,  only  of  a few  seconds,  passes  in  general  be- 
tween them  ; the  air  contained  by  the  lungs,  pressed 
by  the  powers  of  expiration,  escapes  by  the  expiratory 
canal  in  a contrary  direction  to  thatof  the  inspired  air. 

We  must  here  remark  that  the  portion  of  air  expired 
is  not  exactly  that  which  was  inspired  immediately 
before,  but  a portion  of  the  mass  which  the  lungs  con- 
tained after  inspiration ; and  if  the  volume  of  air  that 
the  lungs  usually  contain  is  compared  with  that  which 
is  inspired  and  expired  at  each  motion  of  respiration, 
we  will  be  inclined  to  believe  that  inspiration  and 
expiration  are  intended  to  renew  in  part  the  consider- 
able mass  of  air  contained  by  the  lungs. 

This  renewal  will  be  so  much  more  considerable  a a 
the  quantity  of  air  expired  is  greater,  and  as  the  fol- 
lowing inspiration  is  more  complete. 

Physical  and  chemical  changes  that  the  air  under- 
goes in  the  lungs. — The  air,  in  its  passage  from  the 
lungs  has  a temperature  nearly  the  same  as  that  of  the 
body;  there  escapes  with  it  from  the  breast  a great 
quantity  of  vapour  called  pulmonary  transpiration  ; 
besides,  its  chemical  composition  is  different  from  that 
of  the  inspired  air.  Hie  proportion  of  azote  is  much 


RES 


RES 

the  same,  but  that  of  oxygen  and  earbonic  acid  is 
quite  difterent. 

In  place  of  0.21  of  oxygen,  and  a trace  of  carbonic 
acid,  which  the  atmospheric  air  presents,  the  expired 
air  gives  0.18  or  0.19  of  oxygen,  and  0.3  to  0.4  of  car- 
bonic acid : generally,  the  quantity  of  carbonic  acid 
exactly  represents  the  quantity  of  oxygen  which  has 
disappeared ; nevertheless,  the  last  experiments  of  Gay 
Lussac  and  Davy  give  a small  excess  of  acid ; that  is, 
there  is  a little  more  acid  formed  than  the  oxygen  ab- 
sorbed. 

In  order  to  determine  the  quantity  of  oxygen  con- 
sumed by  an  adult  in  24  hours,  we  have  only  to  know 
the  quantity  of  air  respired  in  this  time.  According  to 
Lavoisier,  and  Sir  H.  Davy,  32  cubic  inches  are  con- 
sumed in  a minute,  which  gives  for  24  hours  46,037 
cubic  inches. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  appreciate  the  quantity  of  car- 
bonic acid  that  passes  out  of  the  lungs  in  the  same 
time,  since  it  nearly  represents  the  volume  of  oxygen 
that  disappears.  Thomson  values  it  at  40,000  cubic 
inches,  though  he  says  it  is  probably  a little  less : now 
this  quantity  of  carbonic  acid  represents  nearly  12 
ounces  avoirdupois  of  carbon. 

Some  chemists  say  that  a small  quantity  of  azote 
disappears  during  respiration;  others  think,  on  the 
contrary,  that  its  quantity  is  sensibly  augmented ; but 
there  is  nothing  positive  in  this  respect. 

We  are  informed  of  the  degree  of  alteration  that 
the  air  undergoes  in  our  lungs  by  a feeling  which  in- 
clines us  to  renew  it:  though  this  is  scarcely  sensible 
in  ordinary  respiration,  because  we  always  continue  it, 
it  nevertheless  becomes  very  painful  if  we  do  not 
satisfy  it  quickly;  carried  to  this  degree,  it  is  accom- 
panied with  anxiety  and  fear,  an  instinctive  warning 
of  the  importance  of  respiration. 

While  the  air  contained  in  the  lungs  is  thus  modified 
in  its  physical  and  chemical  properties,  the  venous 
blood  traverses  the  ramifications  of  the  pulmonary 
artery,  of  which  the  tissue  of  the  lobules  of  the  lungs 
is  partly  formed:  it  passes  into  the  radicles  of  the  pul- 
monary veins,  and  very  soon  into  these  veins  them- 
selves ; but  in  passing  from  the  one  to  the  other,  it 
changes  its  nature  from  venous  to  arterial  blood. 

Rest-harrow.  See  Ononis  spinosa. 

Re'sta  bovis.  The  plant  named  in  English  rest- 
harrow  : so  called  because  it  hinders  the  plough  ; and 
hence  resta  bovis.  See  Ononis  spinosa. 

RESUPINATUS.  Resupinatv.  Reversed : applied 
to  leaves,  See.  when  the  upper  surface  is  turned  down- 
wards ; as  in  the  leaf  of  the  Pharus  latifolius. 

RESUSCITATION.  (Rcsuscitatio  ; from  resuscito, 
to  rouse  and  awake.)  Revivification.  The  restoring 
of  persons,  apparently  dead,  to  life.  Under  this  head, 
strictly  speaking,  is  considered  the  restoring  of  those 
who  faint,  or  have  breathed  noxious  air ; yet  it  is 
chiefly  confined  to  the  restoring  of  those  who  are  ap- 
parently dead  from  being  immersed  in  a fluid,  or  by 
hanging.  Dr.  Curry  has  written  a very  valuable  treatise 
on  this  subject ; from  which  the  following  account  is 
taken. 

“ From  considering,”  he  observes,  “ that  a drowned 
person  is  surrounded  by  water  instead  of  air,  and  that 
in  this  situation  he  makes  strong  and  repeated  efforts 
to  breathe,  we  should  expect  that  the  water  would 
enter  and  completely  fill  the  lungs.  "*  This  opinion,  in- 
deed, was  once  very  general,  and  it  still  continues  to 
prevail  among  the  common  people.  Experience,  how- 
ever, has  shown,  that  unless  the  body  lies  so  long  in  the 
water  as  to  have  its  living  principle  entirely  destroyed, 
the  quantity  of  fluid  present  in  the  lungs  is  inconsider- 
able ; and  it  would  seem  that  some  of  this  is  the  natu- 
ral moisture  of  the  part  accumulated ; for,  upon  drown- 
ing kittens,  puppies,  &c.  in  ink,  or  other  coloured  li 
quors,  and  afterward  examining  the  lungs,  it  is  found 
that  very  little  of  the  coloured  liquor  has  gained  admit 
tance  to  them.  To  explain  the  reason  why  the  lungs 
of  drowned  animals  are  so  free  from  water,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  observe,  that  the  muscles  which  form  the  open- 
ing into  the  wind-pipe  are  exquisitely  sensible,  and  con- 
tract violently  upon  the  least  irritation,  as  we  frequent 
ly  experience  when  any  part  of  the  food  or  drink  hap- 
pens to  touch  that  part.  In  the  efforts  made  by  a 
drowning  person,  or  animal,  to  draw  in  air,  the  water 
rushes  into  the  mouth  and  throat,  and  is  applied  to 
these  parts,  which  immediately  contract  in  such  a man- 
ner as  to  shut  up  the  passage  into  the  lungs.  This  con- 


tracted state  continues  as  long  as  the  muscles  retain  the 
principle  of  life,  upon  which  the  power  of  muscular 
contraction  depends ; when  that  is  gone,  they  become 
relaxed,  and  the  water  enters  the  wind-pipe,  and  com 
pletely  fills  it.  On  dissecting  the  body  of  a recently 
drowned  animal,  no  particular  fulness  of  the  vessels 
within  the  skull,  nor  any  disease  of  the  brain  or  its 
membranes,  are  visible.  The  lungs  are  also  sound,  and 
the  branches  of  the  wind-pipe  generally  contain  more 
or  less  of  a frothy  matter,  consisting  chiefly  of  air, 
mixed  with  a small  quantity  of  colourless  fluid.  The 
right  cavity  of  the  heart,  and  the  trunks  of  the  large 
internal  veins  which  open  into  it,  and  also  the  trunk 
and  larger  branches  of  the  artery  which  carries  the 
blood  from  this  cavity  through  the  lungs,  are  all  dis- 
tended with  dark-coloured  blood,  approaching  almost 
to  blackness.  The  left  cavity  of  the  heart,  on  tne  con- 
trary, is  nearly,  or  entirely  empty,  as  are  likewise  the 
large  veins  of  the  lungs  which  supply  it  with  bloodr 
and  the  trunk  and  principal  branches  of  the  great  arte- 
ry which  conveys  the  blood  from  hence  to  the  various 
parts  of  the  body.  The  external  blood-vessels  are 
empty  ; and  the  fleshy  parts  are  as  pale  as  if  the  ani- 
mal had  been  bled  to  death.  When  a body  has  lain  in 
the  water  for  some  time,  other  appearances  will  also 
We  observable  ; such  as,  the  skin  livid,  the  eyes  blood- 
sflot,  and  the  countenance  bloated  and  swoln  ; but 
these  appearances,  though  certainly  unfavourable,  do 
not  absolutely  prove  that  life  is  irrecoverably  gone.  It 
is  now  known,  that  in  the  case  of  drowning,  no  injury 
is  done  to  any  of  the  parts  essential  to  life  ; but  that 
the  right  cavity  of  the  heart,  together  with  the  veins 
and  arteries  leading  to  and  from  that  cavity,  are  tur  gid 
with  blood,  while  every  other  part  is  almost  drained  of 
this  fluid.  The  practice  of  holding  up  the  bodies  of 
drowned  persons  by  the  heels,  or  rolling  them  over  a 
cask,  is  unnecessary  ; the  lungs  not  being  filled  with 
any  thing  that  can  be  evacuated  in  this  way.  There- 
fore such  a practice  is  highly  dangerous,  as  the  violence 
attending  it  may  readily  burst  some  of  those  vessela 
which  are  already  overcharged  with  blood,  and  thus 
convert  what  was  only  suspended  animation,  into  abso- 
lute and  permanent  death.  The  operation  of  inflating 
the  lungs  is  a perfectly  safe,  and  much  more  effectual 
method  of  removing  any  frothy  matter  they  may  con- 
tain ; and  while  it  promotes  the  passage  of  the  blood 
through  them,  aiso  renders  it  capable  of  stimulating 
the  left  cavity  of  the  heart,  and  exciting  it  to  contrac- 
tion. As  soon  as  the  body  is  taken  out  of  the  water,  it 
should  be  stripped  of  any  clothes  it  may  have^n,  and 
be  immediately  well  dried.  It  should  then  bo  wrapped 
in  dry,  warm  blankets,  or  in  the  spare  clothes  taken 
from  some  of  the  by-standers,  and  be  removed  as 
quickly  as  possible  to  the  nearest  house  that  can  be  got 
convenient  for  the  purpose.  The  fittest  will  be  one 
that  has  a tolerably  large  apartment,  in  which  a fire  is 
ready  or  can  be  made.  The  body  may  be  carried  in 
men’s  arms,  or  laid  upon  a door ; or,  in  case  the  house 
be  at  a distance  .from  the  place,  if  a cart  can  be  pro1- 
cured,  let  the  body  be  placed  in  it,  on  one  side,  upon 
some  straw,  with  the  head  and  upper  part  somewhat 
raised  ; and  in  this  position  a brisk  motion  will  do  no 
harm  Whatever  be  the  mode  of  conveyance  adopt 
ed,  particular  care  should  be  taken  that  the  head  be 
neither  suffered  to  hang  backwards,  nor  to  bend  down 
with  the  chin  upon  the  breast.  When  arrived  at  the 
house,  lay  the  body  on  a matrass,  or  a double  blanket, 
spread  upon  a low  table,  or  upon  a door  supported  by 
stools  ; the  head  and  chest  being  elevated  by  pillows. 
As  the  air  of  a room  is  very  soon  rendered  impure  by 
a number  of  people  breathing  in  it,  for  this  reason,  as 
well  as  fo  avoid  the  confusion  and  embarrassment  at- 
tending a crowd,  no  more  persons  should  be  admitted 
into  the  apartment  where  the  body  is  placed,  than  are 
necessary  to  assist  immediately  in  the  recovery : in 
general  six  will  be  found  sufficient  for  this  purpose,  and 
these  should  be  the  most  active  and  intelligent  of  the 
by-standers.  It  will  be  found  most  convenient  to  di- 
vide the  assistants  into  two  sets ; one  set  being  em- 
ployed in  restoring  the  heat  of  the  body,  while  the 
other  institutes  an  artificial  breathing  in  the  best  man- 
ner they  are  able.  Every  skilful  person  should  be  pro 
vided  with  a flexible  tube  made  of  elastic  gum,  half  n 
yard  in  length,  to  introduce  into  the  wind-pipe,  ami 
also  with  a similar  tube  to  which  a syringe  can  be 
affixed,  to  be  put  into  the  oesophagus.  Should  these, 
not  be  at  hand,  air  should  be  thrown  into  the  lungs  in 


RES 


RES 


the  best  manner  that  can  be  suggested  at  the  time. 
Should  it  still  be  found  that  the  air  does  not  pass  readi- 
ly into  the  lungs,  immediate  recourse  must  be  had  to 
another  and  more  effectual  method  for  obtaining  that 
object.  As  this  method,  however,  requires  address, 
and  also  somq  knowledge  of  the  parts  about  the  throat, 
we  would  recommend  that  when  there  is  not  a medi- 
cal gentleman  present,  the  mode  already  described,  be 
tried  repeatedly  before  this  be  attempted.  As  a quan- 
tity of  frothy  matter  occupying  the  branches  of  the 
wind-pipe,  and  preventing  the  entrance  of  the  air  into 
the  lungs,  is  generally  the  circumstance  which  renders 
this  mode  of  inflation  necessary!  the  mouth  should  be 
opened  from  time  to  time  to  remove  this  matter  as  it  is 
discharged.  While  one  set  of  the  assistants  are  en- 
gaged in  performing  artificial  respiration,  the  other 
should  be  employed  in  communicating  heat  to  the 
body.  The  warm  bath  has  been  usually  recommended 
for  this  purpose ; but  wrapping  the  body  in  blankets, 
or  woollen  cloths,  strongly  wrung  out  of  warm  water, 
and  renewing  them  as  they  grow  cold,  besides  being  a 
speedier  and  more  practicable  method  of  imparting 
heat,  has  this  great  advantage,  that  it  admits  of  the 
operation  of  inflating  the  lungs  being  carried  on  with- 
out interruption.  Until  a sufficient  quantity  of  warm 
water  can  be  got  ready,  other  methods  of  restoring 
warmth  may  be  employed ; 6uch  as  the  application  of 
dry  warm  blankets  round  the  body  and  limbs  ; bags  of 
warm  grains  or  sand,  bladders  or  bottles  of  hot  water, 
or  hot  bricks  applied  to  the  hands,  feet,  and  under  the 
arm-pits,  the  bottles  and  bricks  being  covered  with  flan- 
nel : or  the  body  may  be  placed  before  the  fire,  or  in 
the  sunshine,  if  strong  at  the  time,  and  be  gently  rubbed 
by  the  assistants  with  their  warm  hands,  or  with 
cloths  heated  at  the  fire  by  a warming-pan.  The  re- 
storation of  heat  should  always  be  gradual,  and  the 
warmth  applied  ought  never  to  be  greater  than  can  be 
comfortably  borne  by  the  assistants.  If  the  weather 
happen  to  be  cold,  and  especially  if  the  body  has  been 
exposed  to  it  for  some  time,  hdht  should  be  applied  in  a 
very  low  degree  at  first:  and  if  the  weather  be  under 
the  freezing  point,  and  the  body,  when  stripped,  feel 
cold  and  nearly  in  the  same  condition  with  one  that  is 
frozen,  it  will  be  necessary  at  first  t r rub  it  well  with 
snow,  or  wash  it  with  cold  water;  the  sudden  applica- 
tion of  heat  in  such  cases  having  been  found  very  per- 
nicious. In  a short  time,  however,  warmth  must  be 
gradually  applied.  To  assist  in  rousing  the  activity  of 
the  vital  principle,  it  has  been  customary  to  apply  va- 
rious stimulating  matters  to  different  parts  of  the  body. 
But  as  some  of  these  applications  are  in  themselves 
hurtful,  and  the  others  serviceable  only  according  to  the 
time  and  manner  of  their  employment,  it  will  be  pro- 
per to  consider  them  particularly.  The  application  of 
all  such  matters  in  cases  of  apparent  death,  is  founded 
upon  the  supposition  that  the  skin  still  retains  sensibi- 
lity enough  to  be  affected  by  them.  It  is  well  known, 
however,  that  even  during  life,  the  skin  loses  sensibi- 
lity in  proportion  as  it  is  deprived  of  heat,  and  does 
not  recover  it  again  until  the  natural  degree  of  warmth 
be  restored.  Previous  to  the  restoration  of  heat,  there- 
fore, to  a drowned  body,  all  stimulating  applications 
are  useless,  and  so  far  as  they  interfere  with  the  other 
measures,  are  also  prejudicial.  The  practice  of  rubbing 
the  body  with  salt  or  spirits  is  now  justly  condemned. 
The  salt  quickly  frets  the  skin,  and  has,  in  some  cases, 
produced  sores,  which  were  very  painful  and  difficult 
to  heal  after  recovery.  Spirits  of  all  kinds  evaporate 
fast,  and  thereby,  instead  of  creating  warmth,  as  they 
are  expected  to  do,  carry  off  a great  deal  of  heat  from 
the  body.  Spirit  of  hartshorn,  or  of  sal  volatile,  are 
liable  to  the  same  objection  as  brandy  or  other  distilled 
spirits,  and  are  besides  very  distressing  to  the  eyes  of 
the  assistants.  When  there  is  reason  to  think  the  skin 
has  in  any  degree  recovered  its  sensibility,  let  an  assist- 
ant moisten  his  hand  with  spirit  of  hartshorn,  or  eau 
dc  luce , and  hold  it  closely  applied  to  one  part : in  this 
way  evaporation  is  prevented,  and  the  full  stimulant 
effect  of  the  application  obtained.  A liniment  com- 
posed of  equal  parts  of  spirit  of  hartshorn  and  sallad 
oil,  well  shaken  together,  would  appea  r to  be  sufficiently 
stimulating  for  the  purpose,  and  as  it  evaporates  very 
slowly,  will  admit  of  being  rubbed  on  without  producing 
cold.  The  places  to  which  such  remedies  are  usually 
applied,  are,  the  wrists,  ankles,  temples,  and  the  parts 
opposite  the  stomach  and  heart.  The  intestines,  from 
their  internal  situation  and  peculiar  constitution, 
24*2 


retain  their  irritability  longer  than  the  other  pari* 
of  the  body,  and,  accordingly,  various  means  have 
been  proposed  for  increasing  the  action  of  their  fibres 
in  order  to  restore  the  activity  of  the  whole  system. 
Tobacco-smoke,  injected  by  way  of  clyster,  is  what 
has  been  generally  employed  with  this  view,  and  the 
fumigator , or  instrument  for  administering  it,  makes  a 
part  of  the  apparatus  which  is  at  present  distributed  by 
the  different  societies  established  for  the  recovery  of 
drowned  persons.  Of  late,  however,  the  use  of  tobac- 
co-smoke has  been  objected  to,  and  upon  very  strong 
grounds  ; for  when  we  consider  that  the  same  remedy 
is  successfully  employed  with  the  very  opposite  inten- 
tion, namely,  that  of  lessening  the  power  of  contrac- 
tion in  the  muscles,  and  occasioning  the  greatest  relaxa- 
tion consistent  with  life,  it  must  be  acknowledged  to  be 
a very  doubtful,  if  not  dangerous  remedy,  where  the 
powers  of  life  are  already  nearly  exhausted.  Instead 
of  tobacco-smoke,  then,  we  would  recommend  a clyster, 
consisting  of  a pint  or  more  of  water,  moderately 
warmed,  with  the  addition  of  one  or  two  table-spoon- 
fuls of  spirit  of  hartshorn,  a heaped  tea-spoonful  of 
strong  mustard,  or  a table-spoonfui  of  essence  of  pep- 
permint ; in  defect  of  one  or  other  of  these,  half  a gill  or 
more  of  rum,  brandy,  or  gin  may  be  added,  or  the  warm 
water  given  alone.  This  step,  however,  need  not  be 
taken,  until  artificial  respiration  has  been  begun ; for  it 
will  answer  but  little  purpose  to  stimulate  the  heart 
through  the  medium  of  the  intestines,  unless  we  at  the 
same  time  supply  the  left  cavity  with  blood  fitted  to 
act  upon  it;  which  we  cannot  do  without  first  re- 
moving the  collapsed  state  of  the  lungs,  and  promoting 
the  passage  of  the  blood  through  them  by  a regular  in- 
flation. As  the  stomach  is  a highly  sensible  part,  and 
intimately  connected  with  the  heart  and  brain,  the  in- 
troduction of  some  moderately  warm  and  stimulating 
liquor  into  it,  seems  well  calculated  to  rouse  the  dor- 
mant powers  of  life.  This  is  very  conveniently  done 
by  means  of  the  syringe  and  flexible  tube.  The  quanti- 
ty of  fluid  thrown  in  ought  not  to  exceed  half  a pint, 
and  may  be  either  warm  negus,  or  water  with  the  addi- 
tion of  one  or  other  of  the  stimulating  matters  recom- 
mended above,  using,  however,  only  half  the  quantities 
mentioned  there.  As  soon  as  the  pulse  or  beating  of 
the  heart  can  be  felt,  the  inside  of  the  nostrils  may  be 
occasionally  touched  with  a feather  dipped  in  spirit  of 
hartshorn,  or  sharp  mustard  ; it  being  found  by  experi- 
ence, that  any  irritation  given  to  the  nose,  has  consi- 
derable influence  in  exciting  the  action  oY  the  muscles 
concerned  in  respiration.  When  the  natural  breathing 
commences,  the  flexible  tube  and  canula  should  be 
withdrawn,  and  any  farther  inflation  that  may  be  ne- 
cessary, performed  by  blowing  into  the  nostril.  Let- 
ting blood  has  been  generally  thought  requisite  in  every 
case  of  suspended  animation.  The  practice,  however, 
does  not  appear  to  have  been  founded  upon  any  ra- 
tional principle  at  first,  and  it  has  been  continued  from 
the  force  of  custom,  rather  than  from  any  experience 
of  its  good  effects.  In  the  case  of  drowned  persona 
there  is  not,  as  in  those  who  suffer  from  hanging  or 
apoplexy,  any  unusual  fulness  of  the  vessels  of  the 
brain ; and  the  quantity  of  blood  that  can  be  drawn 
from  the  external  veins,  will  not  sensibly  diminish  the 
accumulation  of  it  in  those  near  the  heart.  Besides, 
blood-letting,  which  always  tends  to  lessen  the  action 
of  the  heart  and  arteries  in  the  living  body,  cannot  be 
supposed  to  have  a directly  opposite  effect  in  cases  of 
apparent  death ; on  the  contrary,  if  employed  here,  it 
will  hazard  the  entire  destruction  of  those  feeble  powers 
which  yet  remain,  and  to  increase  and  support  which 
all  our  endeavours  should  be  directed.  When  the  se- 
veral measures  recommended  above  have  been  steadily 
pursued  for  an  hour  or  more,  without  any  appearance 
of  returning  life,  electricity  should  be  tried ; experi- 
ence having  shown  it  to  be  one  of  the  most  powerful 
stimuli  yet  known,  and  capable  of  exciting  contraction 
in  the  heart  and  other  muscles  of  the  body,  after  every 
other  stimulus  had  ceased  to'produce  the  least  effect. 
Moderate  shocks  are  found  to  answer  best,  and  these 
should,  at  intervals,  be  passed  through  the  chest  in  dif- 
ferent directions,  in  order,  if  possible,  to  rouse  the  heart 
to  act.  Shocks  may  likewise  be  sent  through  the  limbs, 
and  along  the  spine  ; but  we  are  doubtful  how  far  it  is 
safe  or  useful  to  pass  them  through  the  brain,  as  some 
have  recommended.  The  body  may  be  conveniently 
insulated,  by  placing  it  on  a door,  supported  by  a num- 
ber of  quart- bottles,  whose  sides  aro  previously  wiped 


RES 


RET 


with  a towel,  to  remove  any  moisture  they  may  have 
contracted.  By  experiments  made  on  different  animals, 
it  is  found  that  the  blood  passes  through  the  lungs  most 
readily  when  they  are  fully  distended  with  air;  conse- 
quently, that  if  the  lungs  of  a drowned  person  are  in- 
flated, and  kept  in  the  expanded  state  while  the  elec- 
tric shock  is  passed  through  the  chest,  the  blood  accu- 
mulated in  the  right  cavity  of  the  heart  and  its  vessels 
will  move  forward  without  any  resistance,  should  the 
heart  be  brought  to  contract  upon  it.  As  soon  as  the 
shock  is  given,  let  the  lungs  be  emptied  of  the  air  they 
contain,  and  filled  again  with  fresh  air ; then  pass 
another  shock,  and  repeat  this  until  the  heart  is  brought 
into  action,  or  until  it  appear  that  all  farther  attempts 
are  useless.  In  order  more  certainly  to  pass  the  shock 
through  the  heart,  place  the  knob  of  one  discharging 
rod  above  the  collar-bone  of  the  right  side,  and  the 
knob  of  the  other  above  the  short  ribs  of  the  left : the 
position  of  the  discharging  rods,  however,  may  be 
changed  occasionally,  so  as  to  vary  the  direction  of  the 
shock.  Two  thick  brass  wires,  each  about  eighteen 
inches  long,  passed  through  two  glass  tubes,  or  wooden 
cases,  well  varnished,  and  having  at  one  end  a knob, 
and  at  the  other  a ring  to  fasten  the  brass  chain  to,  form 
very  convenient  discharging  rods ; and  by  means  of 
them,  the  shock  may  be  administered  without  the  risk 
of  its  being  communicated  to  the  assistants,  or  carried 
off-  by  the  skin  being  wet.  When  the  patient  is  so  far 
recovered  as  to  be  able  to  swallow,  he  should  be  put 
into  a warm  bed,  with  his  head  and  shoulders  some- 
what raised  by  means  of  pillows.  Plenty  of  warm 
wine-whey,  ale-posset,  and  other  light  and  moderately 
nourishing  drink,  should  now  be  given,  and  gentle 
sweating  promoted,  by  wrapping  the  feet  and  legs,  in 
flannels  well  wrung  out  of  hot  water.  If  the  stomach 
and  bowels  feel  distended  and  uneasy,  a clyster,  con- 
sisting of  a pint  of  warm  water,  with  a table-spoonful 
of  common  salt,  or  an  ounce  or  more  of  Glauber’s  or 
Epsom  salt,  dissolved  in  it,  may  be  administered.  The 
general  practice  in  this  case,  is  to  give  an  emetic  ; but 
considering  that  the  powers  of  the  machine  are  still 
very  weak,  the  agitation  of  vomiting  is  certainly  ha- 
zardous. The  patient  should  on  no  account  be  left 
alone,  until  the  senses  are  perfectly  restored,  and  he  be 
able  to  assist  himself;  several  persons  having  relapsed 
and  been  lost  from  want  of  proper  attention  to  them, 
after  the  vital  functions  were,  to  all  appearance,  com- 
pletely estabtehed.  Either  from  the  distention  which 
the  arteries  ofthe  lungs  have  suffered,  or  from  the  sudden 
change  from  great  coldness  to  considerable  warmth,  it 
now  and  then  happens,  that  the  patient  is  attacked  soon 
after  recovery,  with  inflammation  of  some  of  the  parts 
within  the  chest.  This  occurrence  is  pointed  out  by 
pain  in  the  breas't’lir  side,  increased  on  inspiration,  and 
accompanied  with  frequent,  and  full  or  hard  pulse,  and 
sometimes  with  cough.  Here  the  taking  away  some 
blood  from  the  arm,  or  the  application  of  cupping- 
glasses,  leeches,  or  a blister,  over  the  seat  of  the  pain, 
will  be  very  proper;  but  the  necessity  for  these  mea- 
sures, as  well  as  the  times  for  putting  them  in  practice, 
should  be  left  to  the  judgment  and  discretion  of  a medi- 
cal person.  Dull  pain  in  the  head,  lasting  sometimes 
for  two  or  three  days,  is  by  no  means  an  unfrequent 
complaint  in  those  who  are  recovered  from  this  and 
from  the  other  states  of  suspended  animation ; and 
here  also  a moderate  bleeding  from  the  neck,  either 
with  the  lancet  or  with  cupping-glasses,  may  prove 
serviceable. 

In  hanging,  the  external  veins  of  the  neck  are  com- 
pressed by  the  cord,  and  the  return  of  the  blood  from 
the  head  thereby  impeded,  from  the  moment  that  sus- 
pension takes  place  ; b'ut  as  the  heart  continues  to  act 
for  a few  seconds  after  the  wind-pipe  is  closed,  the 
blood  which  is  sent  to  the  head  during  this  interval,  is 
necessarily  accumulated  there.  Hence  it  is,  that  in 
hanged  persons  the  face  is  greatly  swoln,  and  of  a dark 
red  or  purple  colour : the  eyes  are  commonly  suffused 
with  blood,  enlarged,  arid  prominent.  On  dissection, 
the  blood-vessels  of  the  brain  are  found  considerably 
distended;  but,  in  general,  no  further  marks  of  dis- 
ease appear  within  the  skull.  The  lungs  are  found 
generally  quite  collapsed,  and  free  from  frothy  matter. 
The  heart,  and  the  large  blood-vessels  adjoining  to  it 
exhibit  the  same  apoearances  as  in  the  bodies  of 
drowned  persons.  From  the  great  accumulation  of 
blood  in  the  vessels  of  the  head,  many  have  been  of 
opinion,  that  hanging  kills  chiefly  by  inducing  apo- 


plexy ; hut  the  following  experiment  made  at  Edin- 
burgh several  years  ago,  by  an  eminent  medical  pro- 
fessor there,  clearly  proves  that  in  hanging  as  well  as  in 
drowning,  the  exclusion  of  air  from  the  lungs  is  the 
immediate  cause  of  death.  A dog  was  suspended  by 
the  neck  with  a cord,  an  opening  having  been  previ- 
ously made  in  the  wind  pipe,  below  the  place  where  the 
cord  was  applied  so  as  to  admit  air  into  the  lungs.  In 
this  state  he  was  allowed  to  hang  for  three-quarters  of 
an  hour,  during  which  time  the  circulation  and  breath- 
ing went  on.  lie  was  then  cut  down  without  appear- 
ing to  have  suffered  much  from  the  experiment.  The 
cord  was  now  shifted  below  the  opening  into  the  wind- 
pipe, so  as  to  prevent  the  ingress  of  air  to  the  lungs  ; 
and  the  animal  being  again  suspended,  he  was  com- 
pletely dead  in  a few  minutes.  Upon  the  whole,  then, 
it  appears,  that  the  same  measures  recommended  for 
drowned  persons,  are  also  necessary  here ; with  this 
addition,  that  opening  the  jugular  veins,  or  applying 
cupping-glasses  to  the  neck,  will  tend  considerably  to 
facilitate  the  restoration  of  life,  by  lessening  the  quan- 
tity of  blood  contained  in  the  vessels  of  the  head, 
and  thereby  taking  off  the  pressure  from  the  brain. 
Except  in  persons  who  are  very  full  of  blood,  the 
quantity  taken  away  need  seldom  exceed  an  ordinary 
tea-cupful,  which  will  in  general  be  sufficient  to  un- 
load the  vessels  of  the  head  without  weakening  the  pow- 
ers of  life.” 

RE'TE.  A net.  Applied  to  cellular  membranes, 
vessels,  nerves,  parts  of  plants,  &c.  which  are  formed 
of  meshes,  like  a net. 

Rete  malpighii.  The  fine  net-work  of  the  extre- 
mities of  the  pulmonary  arteries. 

Rete  mirabile.  A network  of  blood-vessels  in  the 
basis  of  the  brain  of  quadrupeds. 

Rete  mucosum.  Corpus  reliculare ; Corpus  muco 
sum;  Mucus  rnalpigii.  A mucous  substance,  depo- 
sited in  a net-like  form,  between  the  epidermis  and 
cutis,  which  covers  the  sensible  cutaneous  papilla1, 
connects  the  epidermis  with  the  cutis,  and  gives  the 
colour  to  the  body  : in  Europeans  it  is  of  a white  co- 
lour, in  Ethiopians  black.  See  Skin. 

RETICULAR.  ( Reticularis ; from  rete,  a net.) 

Interwoven  like  a net. 

RETIFORM.  ( Retiformis  ; from  rete , a net,  and 
forma , resemblance.)  Net-like. 

RE'TINA.  (From  rete)  a net.)  Jlmphiblsstroides. 
The  third,  or  innermost  membrane  of  the  eye,  ex 
panded  round  the  choroid  coat,  to  the  ciliary  ligament. 
It  is  the  true  organ  of  vision,  and  is  formed  by  an  ex- 
pansion of  the  pulp  of  the  optic  nerve.  See  Vision. 

Retina'culum.  (From  retineo , to  prop  or  re- 
strain.) An  instrument  for  keeping  the  bowels  in  their 
olace. 

RETTN-ASrHALTUM.  See  Retinite. 

RETINITE.  Retin-asphalt  of  Hatchet.  A yellow- 
ish and  reddish-brown  coloured  mineral,  composed  of 
resin,  asphalt,  and  earth ; found  at  Bovey  Tracy,  in 
Devonshire,  adhering  to  coal. 

RETORT.  ( Relorta ; from  retorqueo , to  bend  back 
again  : probably  so  called,  because  its  neck  was  curved 
and  bent  back  again.)  A chemical  vessel  em ployed  for 
many  distillations,  and  most  frequently  for  those  which- 
require  a degree  of  heat  superior  to  that  of  boiling  water. 
They  differ  in  form  and  materials : when  pierced  with  a 
little  hole  in  their  roof,  they  are  called  tubulated  re- 
torts. They  are  made  of  common  glass,  stone-ware, 
and  iron. 

RETRA'CTOR.  A muscle,  the  office  of  which  is 
to  retract  the  part  into  which  it  is  inserted. 

Retractor  angum  oris.  See  Buccinator. 

RETRAHENS.  Drawing  back. 

Retrahens  auris.  Posterior  auris , of  Winslow. 
Retrahens  auricula , of  Albinas.  IJcprimens  auricula, 
of  Douglas.  Retrahens  auriculam,  of  Cowper ; and 
Mastoido-conrhisiien,  of  Dumas.  Two  small  bundles 
of  muscular  fibres  which  arise  from  the  external  and 
postei  ior  part  of  the  mastoid  process  of  the  temporal 
bone  immediately  above  the  insertion  of  the  sterno- 
cleido-mastokleus  muscle.  They  are  inserted  into 
that  part  of  the  back  of  the  ear  which  is  opposite  to 
the  septum  which  divides  the  concha  and  scapha. 
Their  use  is  to  draw  the  ear  backwards,  and  stretch 
the  concha. 

RETROCEDENT.  Retrocedens.  Retrogradus 
When  a disease  that  moves  about  from  one  part  to 
another,  and  is  sometimes  fixed,  has  been  some  time  in 

343 


RHE 


RHA 


its  more  common  situation,  and  retires  from  it,  it  is 
said  to  be  retrocedent. 

RETROGRADE.  See  Retrocedent. 

Retrocedent  gout.  See  Arthritis. 
RETROVERSION.  Retroversio.  See  Uterus , re- 
troversion of. 

RETUSUS.  Retuse.  Applied  to  a leaf,  which  ends 
in  a broad  shallow  notch,  as  in  the  Rumex  digynus. 

REUSSITE.  A vegetable  compound  saline,  found 
as  an  efflorescence  on  the  surface,  in  the  country  round 
Seidlitz  and  Seidschutz. 

REVERBERATORY.  See  Furnace. 
REVOLUTUS.  Revolute,  rolled  back.  Applied  to 
a leaf,  the  margin  of  which  is  turned  or  rolled  back- 
wards, as  in  Andromeda  polifolia. 

REVULSION.  ( Revulsio ; from  revello,  to  draw 
away.)  An  old  term  used  by  the  humoral  patholo- 
gists, signifying  the  drawing  of  humours  a contrary 
way. 

RHABA'RBARUM.  (From  Rha , and  barbarus , 
wild  : so  called  because  it  was  brought  from  the  banks 
of  the  Rha,  now  called  the  Wolga,  in  Russia.)  See 
Rheum. 

Rhabarbarum  album.  See  Convolvulus  mechoa- 
canna. 

Rhabarbarum  antiquorum.  See  Rheum  rhapon- 

ticum. 

Rhabarbarum  dioscoridis.  See  Rheum  rhapon- 
ticum. 

Rhabarbarum  monachorum.  See  Rumex  pa- 
tientia. 

Rhabarbarum  rhaponticum.  See  Rheum  rhapon- 
ticum. 

Rhabarbarum  sibericum.  See  Rheum  undulatum. 
Rhabarbarum  tartaricum.  See  Rheum. 
Rhabarbarum  verum.  See  Rheum. 
RHACHIA'LGIA.  (From  paxi £>  the  spine  of  the 
back,  and  aXyos,  pain.)  A pain  in  the  spine  of  the  back. 

RHA'CHIS.  (Pa%tj,  the  spine  of  the  back.)  1.  In 
anatomy,  the  spine. 

2.  In  botany,  the  common  stalk  or  receptacle  of  the 
florets  in  the  spikelets  of  grasses,  or  of  the  spikelets 
themselves;  as  in  Folium,  Triticum , Hordeum , &c. 
It  also  means  the  rib  or  leaf  stalk  of  ferns,  which  is 
often  winged  or  bordered. 

RHACHISA'GRA,  (From  i the  spine  of  the 
back,  and  aypa,  a prey.)  A sudden  pain  in  the  spine, 
applied  to  gout  fixed  in  the  spine  of  the  back. 

Rhachita.  (From  paxiSt  the  spine  of  the  back.)  A 
muscle  belonging  to  the  spine  of  the  back. 

Rhachitis.  See  Rachitis. 

RHACO'SIS.  (From  pa/coj,  a rag.)  A ragged  ex- 
coriation. 

RHA'GAS.  ( Rhagas , adis.  f. ; from  pyyvvpi,  to 

break  or  bruise.)  Fissura.  A chap  or  cleft.  A malig- 
nant, dry,  and  deep  cutaneous  fissure. 

Rhagoidks.  (From  pa%,  a grape-stone,  and  uSos, 
a likeness : so  called  from  its  likeness  in  colour  to  a 
grape-seed.)  Applied  to  the  retiform  tunic  of  the  eye. 

RHA'MNUS.  (From  paiio,  to  destroy ; because  of 
its  many  thorns.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linneean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order, 
Monogynia..  Buckthorn. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  purging  buck- 
thorn. See  Rhamnus  catharticus. 

Rhamnus  catharticus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  buckthorn.  Spina  cervina;  Rhamnus  solutivus ; 
Spina  infectoria;  Cervispina.  Purging  buckthorn. 
The  fruit  or  berries  of  this  shrub,  Rhamnus — spinis 
terminalibus  floribus  quadrifidis  dioicis,  foliis  ovatis, 
caule  erecto,  of  Lin  nseus,  have  been  long  received  into  the 
materia  medica:  they  contain  a pulpy,  deep  green  juice, 
of  a faint  unpleasant  smell,  a bitterish,  acrid,  nauseous 
taste,  which  operates  briskl}  by  stool,  producing  thirst, 
dryness  of  the  mouth  and  fauces,  and  severe  gripings, 
unless  some  diluting  liquor  be  drank  plentifully  after 
it:  at  present  it  is  rarely  prescribed  except  as  a drastic 
purge.  The  dose  is  said  to  be  about  twenty  of  the 
fresh  berries  in  substance;  twice  or  thrice  that  number 
in  decoction  ; a drachm  or  a drachm  and  a half  of  the 
dried  berries;  an  ounce  of  the  expressed  juice,  or  half 
an  ounce  of  the  rob  or  extract,  obtained  by  inspissating 
the  juice. 

Rhamnus  frangula.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
black  alder.  Frangula  alnus ; Alnus  nigra ; Rham- 
nus— incrmis  floribus  monogynis  her maphroditis, foliis 
integerrimis,  of  Linneeus. 

244 


All  the  parts  of  this  tree,  as  well  as  of  the  common 
alder,  are  astringent  and  bitter.  The  bark  is  most  as- 
tringent ; a decoction  of  it  has  cured  agues,  and  is 
often  used  to  repel  inflammatory  tumours  of  the  throat, 
by  way  of  gargle.  The  inner  yellow  bark  of  the  trunk, 
or  root,  given  to  3 ij,  vomits,  purges,  and  gripes ; but 
joined  with  aromatics,  it  operates  more  agreeably.  An 
infusion,  or  decoction  in  water,  inspissated  to  an  ex- 
tract, acts  yet  more  mildly  than  these.  It  is  mostly 
employed  by  the  common  people  in  dropsy  and  other 
disorders.  The  berries  of  aider  are  purgative.  They 
are  not  in  use  under  their  own  name,  but  are  often 
substituted  for  buckthorn  berries  ; to  discover  which,  it  * 
should  be  observed,  that  the  berries  of  the  black  alder 
have  a black  skin,  a blue  juice,  and  two  seeds  in  each 
of  them;  whereas  the  buckthorn  berries  have  a green 
juice,  and  commonly  four  seeds.  The  substitution  of 
one  for  the  other  is  not  of  material  consequence,  as  the 
plants  belong  to  the  same  genus,  and  the  berries  do  not 
differ  greatly. 

Dr.  Murray,  of  Gottingen,  recommends,  from  his 
own  experience,  the  leaves  of  alder  chopped  in  small 
pieces,  and  heated  over  the  fire,  as  the  best  remedy 
with  which  he  is  acquainted  for  dispersing  milk  in  the 
breasts. 

Rhamnus  zizyphus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  affords  the  jujubs.  A half-dried  fruit  of 
the  plum  kind,  about  the  size  and  shape  of  an  olive. 
Jujubes,  when  in  perfection,  have  an  agreeable,  sweet 
taste,  and  in  the  southern  parts  of  Europe,  where  they 
are  common,  they  make  an  article  of  food  in  their  re- 
cent state,  and  of  medicine  when  half  dried. 

RHA'PHANUS.  See  Raphanus. 

RHAPO'NTICUM.  (The  Rha  of  Pontus,  i.  e.  the 
Rha,  in  Russia,  a river  on  the  banks  of  which  it  grew.) 
See  Rheum  rhaponticum. 

Rhapontic  rhubarb.  See  Rheum  rhaponticum. 

Rhaponticum  vulgare  officinarum.  See  Cen- 
taurea. 

RHATA'NIA.  See  Krameria. 

RHAZES,  was  born  at  Rhei,  in  the  province  of 
Khorasan,  about  the  year  852.  He  is  said  not  to  have 
commenced  the  study  of  medicine  till  more  than  thirty 
years  old,  having  previously  removed  to  Bagdad  : but 
by  indefatigable  application  he  obtained  the  highest  re- 
putation ; and  was  selected  to  superintend  the  cele- 
brated hospital  of  that  city.  He  has  been  considered  as 
the  Galen  of  the  Arabians  ; and  from  hi&assiduous  at- 
tention during  the  rest  of  a long  life,  to  the  varieties  of 
disease,  he  obtained  the  appellation  of  the  experienced. 
He  travelled  much  in  pursuit  of  knowledge,  particu- 
larly into  his  native  country;  and  was  much  consulted 
by  Almanzor,  the  chief  of  that  pro^pce,  to  whom  se- 
veral of  hi*  writings  are  dedicated,  as  well  as  by  other 
princes.  Abi  Osbaia  enumerated  226  treatises  com- 
posed by  Rhazes,  but  only  a few  of  these  are  preserved 
through  the  medium  of  Latin  translations.  The  ten 
books  dedicated  to  Almanzor,  were  designed  by  him  as 
a complete  body  of  physic,  and  indeed  may  be  regarded 
as  the  great  magazine  of  ail  the  Arabian  medicine; 
the  ninth  book  in  particular,  treating  of  the  cure  of 
diseases,  was  in  such  general  estimation  for  several 
centuries,  as  to  be  used  as  a text-book  by  professors. 
However,  they  contain  little  more  than  the  substance 
of  the  writings  of  the  Greek  physicians;  though  cer- 
tainly thesinall-pox,  and  a few  other  diseases,  are  first 
distinctly  described  by  Rhazes.  He  was  author  also 
of  the  first  treatise  on  the  diseases  of  children.  The 
use  of  chemical  preparations  in  medicine  appears  like- 
wise to  have  originated  with  him,  or  at  least  with  some 
of  the  Arabians.  He  died  in  the  year  932.  Besides 
the  ten  books  above  mentioned,  and  the  tract  on  small- 
pox, there  are  extant  by  him  a sort  of  commonplace 
book,  entitled  “Continens;”  and  six  books  of  Apho- 
risms, under  the  title  of  “De  Secretis.” 

RHE'UM.  (From  Rha,  a river  in  Russia,  now  called 
the  Wolga,  from  the  banks  of  which  it  was  first 
brought.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linmean  system.  Class,  Enneandria;  Order,  Tri- 
gynia.  Rhubarb. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  officinal  rhu 
barb.  See  Rheum  palmatum. 

Rheum  palmatum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  rhubarb.  Rhabarbarum  ; Rheon ; Rhceum  ; 
Barbaria  ; Lapathum  orientate  ; Lapathum  chinense; 
Rhabarbarum  verum  ; Rhabarbarum  tartaricum.  Rhu- 
barb.  It  was  not  until  the  year  1732  that  naturalita 


RHE 


RHE 


became  acquainted  with  any  plant  which  seemed  to 
afford  the  rhabarbarum  officinale;  when  some  plants 
received  from  Russia  by  Jussieu  at  Paris,  and  Rhaud 
at  Chelsea,  were  said  to  supply  this  important  desidera- 
tum, and  as  such  were  adopted  by  Linnaeus,  in  his  first 
edition  of  the  Species  Plantarum,  under  the  name  of 
Rheum  rhabarbarum.  This,  however,  was  not  gene- 
rally received  as  the  genuine  rhubarbplant ; and  with  a 
view  to  ascertain  this  matter  more  completely  Kaw  Boer- 
haave  procured  from  a Tartarian  rhubarb  merchant  the 
seeds  of  those  plants  whose  roots  he  annually  sold,  and 
which  were  admitted  at  Petersburgh  to  be  the  true  rhu- 
barb. These  seeds  were  soon  propagated,  and  were 
discovered  by  De  Gorter  to  produce  two  distinct  spe- 
cies, viz.  the  Rheum  rhabarbarum  of  Linnarus,  or  as  it 
has  since  been  called,  the  Rheum  undulatum , and  an- 
other species,  a specimen  of  which  was  presented  to 
Linnaeus,  who  declared  it  to  be  a new  one ; and  it  was 
first  mentioned  in  the  second  edition  of  the  Species 
Plantarum,  in  1762,  by  the  name  of  Rheum  palmatum. 
Previous  to  this  time,  De  Gorter  had  repeatedly  sent  its 
seeds  tp  Linnaeus,  but  the  young  plants  which  they 
produced  constantly  perished ; at  length  he  obtained 
the  fresh  root,  which  succeeded  very  well  at  Upsal, 
and  afterward  enabled  the  younger  Linnaeus  to  describe 
this  plant,  ann.  1767.  But  two  years  antecedent  to 
this,  Dr.  Hope’s  account  of  the  Rheum  palmatum , as  it 
grew  in  the  Botanic  Garden  near  Edinburgh,  had  been 
read  before  the  Royal  Society  at  London  ; and  of  the 
great  estimation  in  which  this  plant  was  held  by  him, 
we  have  the  following  proof: — “From  the  perfect  simi- 
larity of  this  root  with  the  best  foreign  rhubarb,  in 
taste,  smell,  colour,  and  purgative  qualities,  we  cannot 
doubt  of  our  being  at  last  possessed  of  the  plant  which 
produces  the  true  rhubarb,  and  may  reasonably  enter- 
tain the  agreeable  expectation  of  its  proving  a very  im- 
portant acquisition  to  Britain.” 

But  from  the  relation  we  have  given,  it  appears  that 
both  the  seeds  of  the  R.  palmatum,  and  the  R.  undula- 
tum, were  transmitted  to  Petersburgh,  as  those  of  the 
true  rhubarb;  we  are  therefore  to  conclude,  that  the 
former  species  has  an  equal  claim  to  this  importance 
with  the  latter ; and  from  further  inquiries  made  in 
Russia,  there  is  the  best  authority  for  believing  that  the 
R.  compactum  also  affords  this  very  useful  drug.  The 
seeds  of  the  R.  palmatum  were  first  introduced  into 
Britain  in  17*2,  by  Dr.  Hounsy  (who  sent  them  from 
Russia),  and  were  supposed  to  be  a part  of  that  already 
mentioned ; and  since  their  prosperous  cultivation  by 
the  late  professor  of  botany  at  Edinburgh,  the  propa- 
gation of  this  plant  has  been  gradually  extended  to 
most  of  our  English  gardens,  and  with  a degree  of  suc- 
cess which  promises,  in  time,  to  supersede  the  importa- 
tion of  the  foreign  root.  Two  sorts  of  rhubarb  roots 
are  usually  imported  into  this  country  for  medical  use  ; 
viz.  the  Chinese  and  the  Tartary  rhubarb  ; the  first  is 
in  oblong  pieces,  flattish  on  one  side,  and  convex  on  the 
other;  compact,  hard,  heavy,  internally  of  a dull-red 
colour,  variegated  with  yellow  and  white,  and  when 
recently  powdered,  appears  yellow,  but  on  being  kept 
becomes  gradually  redder.  The  second  is  the  most 
valuable,  and  is  brought  to  us  in  roundish  pieces,  with 
a large  hole  through  the  middle  of  each ; it  is  more 
soft  and  friable  than  the  former  sort,  and  exhibits,  when 
broken,  many  streaks  of  a bright  red  colour.  “The 
marks  of  the  goodness  of  rhubarb  are,  the  liveliness  of 
its  colour  when  cut;  its  being  firm  and  solid,  but  not 
flinty  or  hard  ; its  being  easily  pulverable,  and  appear- 
ing when  powdered  of  a fine  bright  yellow  colour  ; its 
imparting  to  the  spittle  when  chewed  a deep  saffron 
tinge,  and  not  proving  slimy  or  mucilaginous  in  the 
mouth  ; its  taste  is  subacrid,  bitterish,  and  somewhat 
styptic ; the  smell  lightly  aromatic.” 

The  purgative  qualities  of  rhubarb  are  extracted 
more  perfectly  by  water  than  by  rectified  spirit:  the 
part  remaining  after  the  action  of  water  is  almost,  if 
not  wholly,  inactive  ; whereas  after  repeated  digestion 
in  spirit,  it  proves  still  very  considerably  purgative. 
The  virtue  of  a watery  infusion,  on  being  inspissated 
by  a gentle  heat,  is  so  much  diminished,  that  a drachm 
of  the  extract  is  said  to  have  scarcely  any  greater  effect 
than  a scruple  of  the  root  in  substance.  The  spirituous 
tincture  loses  less ; half  a drachm  of  this  extract  proving 
moderately  purgative.  The  qualities  of  this  root,  says 
Dr.  Cullen,  are  that  of  a gentle  purgative,  and  so  gentle 
that  it  is  often  inconvenient  on  account  of  the  bulk  of 
the  dose  required,  which  in  adults,  must  be  from  3 ss. 


to  3 j.  When  given  in  a large  dose  it  will  occasion 
some  griping,  as  other  purgatives  do ; but  it  is  hardly 
ever  heating  to  the  system,  or  shows  the  other  effects 
of  the  more  drastic  purgatives.  The  purgative  quality 
is  accompanied  with  a bitterness,  which  is  often  useful 
in  restoring  the  tone  of  the  stomach  when  it  has  been 
lost;  and,  for  the  most  part,  its  bitterness  makes  it  sit 
better  on  the  stomach  than  many  other  purgatives  do. 
Its  operation  joins  well  with  neutral  laxatives ; and 
both  together  operate  in  a less  dose  than  either  of 
them  would  singly.  Some  degree  of  stypticity  is  always 
evident  in  this  medicine ; and  as  this  quality  acts 
when  that  of  the  purgative  has  ceased,  so  in  cases  of 
diarrhoea,  when  any  evacuation  is  proper,  rhubarb  has 
been  considered  as  the  most  proper  remedy  to  be  em- 
ployed. It  must,  however,  be  remarked  here,  that,  in 
many  cases  of  diarrhoea,  no  further  evacuation  than 
what  is  occasioned  by  the  disease,  is  necessary  or 
proper.  The  use  of  rhubarb,  in  substance,  for  keeping 
the  belly  regular,  for  which  it  is  frequently  employed, 
is  by  no  means  proper,  as  the  astringent  quality  is  ready 
to  undo  what  the  purgative  has  done ; but  it  is  found 
that  the  purpose  mentioned  may  be  obtained  by  it,  if 
the  rhubarb  is  chewed  in  the  mouth,  and  no  more  is 
swallowed  than  what  the  saliva  has  dissolved.  And  it 
must  be  remarked,  that  in  this  way  employed  it  is  very 
useful  to  dyspeptic  persons.  Analogous  to  this,  is  the 
use  of  rhuharb  in  solution,  in  which  it  appears  to  me, 
that  the  astringent  quality  is  not  so  largely  extracted  as 
to  operate  so  powerfully  as  when  the  rhubarb  was  em- 
ployed in  substance. 

The  officinal  preparations  of  this  drug  are,  a watery 
and  a vinous  infusion,  a simple  and  a compound  tinc- 
ture. It  is  also  an  ingredient  in  different  compositions. 

Rheum  rhaponticum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
rhapontic  rhubaib.  Rhaponticum ; Rhabarbarum  dios- 
coridis ; Rhabarbarum  antiquorum.  The  root  of 
this  species  appears  to  have  been  the  true  rhubarb  of 
the  ancients.  By  some  it  is  confounded  with  the  mo- 
dern rhubarb,  though  considerably  different  from  that 
root  in  appearance,  as  well  as  in  quality.  The  rha- 
pontic is  of  a dusky  colour  on  its  surface,  and  a loose 
spongy  texture  ; is  more  adstringent  than  rhubarb,  and 
less  purgative;  in  this  last  intention,  two  or  three 
drachms  are  required  for  a dose. 

Rheum  undulatum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Siberian  rhubarb.  The  Rheum — foliis  subvillosis  un- 
dulatis  petiolis  cequalibus , of  Linnaeus.  It  possesses 
similar  virtues  to  those  of  the  palmate  species,  and  is 
in  common  use  in  Russia. 

RHE'UMA.  (From  pew,  to  flow.)  The  discharge 
from  the  nostrils  or  lungs  arising  from  cold  ; hence  the 
following  lines  of  the  school  of  Salernum : 

Si  jluit  ad  pectus,  dicatur  rheuma  catarrhus , 

Ad  fauces  branchus,  ad  nares  esto  coryza! 

RHEUMATI'SMUS.  (From  pevpan^w,  to  be  af- 
flicted with  defluxions.)  Dolores  rlieumatici  et  arthri- 
tici,  of  Hoffman.  Myositis,  of  Sagar.  This  is  a genus 
of  disease  in  the  Class  Pyrexia , and  Order  Plegmasice, 
of  Cullen ; characterized  by  pyrexia,  pains  in  the  joints, 
increased  by  the  action  of  the  muscles  belonging  to  the 
joint,  and  heat  of  the  part.  The  blood,  after  venesec- 
tion, exhibits  an  inflammatory  crust.  Rheumatism  is 
distinguished  into  acute  and  chronic.  The  acute  is  pre- 
ceded by  shivering,  heat,  thirst,  and  frequent  pulse; 
after  which  the  pain  commences,  and  soon  fixes  on  the 
joints.  The  chronic  rheumatism  is  distinguished  by 
pain  in  the  joints,  without  pyrexia,  and  is  divided  into 
three  species;  lumbago , affecting  the  loins;  sciatica , 
affecting  the  hip;  and  arthrodynia,  or  pains  in  the 
joints.  The  acute  rheumatism  mostly  terminates  in 
one  of  these  species. 

Rheumatism  may  arise  at  all  times  of  the  year,  when 
there  are  frequent  vicissitudes  of  the  weather,  from 
heat  to  cold,  but  the  spring  and  autumn  are  the  seasons 
in  which  it  is  most  prevalent;  and  it  attacks  persons 
of  all  ages ; but  very  young  people  are  less  subject  to  it 
than  adults. 

Obstructed  perspiration,  occasioned  either  % wear- 
ing wet  clothes,  lying  in  damp  linen,  or  damp  rooms,  or 
by  being  exposed  to  cool  air  when  the  body  has  been 
much  heated  by  exercise,  is  the  cause  which  usually 
produces  rheumatism.  Those  who  are  much  afflicted 
with  this  complaint,  are  very  apt  to  be  sensible  of  the 
approach  of  wet  weather,  by  finding  wandering  pains 
about  them  at  that  period. 

Acute  rheumatism  usually  comes  on  with  lassitude 

245 


RHI 


RHO 


and  rigours,  succeeded  by  heat,  thirst,  anxiety,  restless- 
ness, and  a hard  pulse ; soon  after  which,  excruciating 
pains  are  felt  in  different  parts  of  the  body,  but  more 
particularly  in  the  joints  of  the  shoulder,  wrist,  knees, 
and  ankles,  or  perhaps  in  the  hip ; and  these  keep 
shifting  from  one  joint  to  another,  leaving  a redness 
and  swelling  in  every  part  they  have  occupied,  as  like- 
wise a great  tenderness  to  the  touch.  Towards  eve- 
ning there  is  usually  an  exacerbation,  or  increase  of 
fever;  and  during  the  night,  the  pains  become  more 
severe,  and  shift  from  one  joint  to  another. 

Early  in  the  course  of  the  disease,  some  degree  of 
sweating  usually  occurs ; but  it  is  seldom  so  copious  as 
either  to  remove  the  pains  or  to  prove  critical.  In  the 
beginning,  the  urine  is  without  sediment ; but  as  the 
disease  advances  in  its  progress,  and  the  fever  admits 
of  considerable  remissions,  a lateritious  sediment  is  de- 
posited ; but  this  by  no  means  proves  critical. 

Chronic  rheumatism  is  attended  with  pains  in  the 
head,  shoulders,  knees,  and  other  large  joints,  which, 
at  times,  are  confined  to  one  particular  part,  and  at 
others  shift  from  one  joint  to  another,  without  occa- 
sioning any  fever ; and  in  this  manner  the  complaint 
continues  often  for  a considerable  time,  and  at  length 
goes  off. 

No  danger  is  attendant  on  chronic  rheumatism ; but 
a person  having  been  once  attacked  with  it,  is  ever 
afterward  more  or  less  liable  to  returns  of  it ; and  an 
incurable  anchylosis  is  sometimes  formed,  in  conse- 
quence of  very  frequent  relapses.  Neither  is  the  acute 
rheumatism  frequently  accompanied  with  much  dan- 
ger ; but,  in  a few  instances,  the  patient  has  been  de- 
stroyed by  general  inflammation,  and  now  and  then  by 
a metastasis  to  some  yital  part,  such  as  the  head  and 
lungs.  Acute  rheumatism,  although  accompanied  with 
a considerable  degree  of  inflammation  in  particular 
parts,  has  seldom  been  known  to  terminate  in  suppu- 
ration ; but  a serous  or  gelatinous  effusion  takes  place. 

Rheumatism  seldom  proving  fatal,  very  few  oppor- 
tunities have  offered  for  dissections  of  the  disease,  tn 
the  few  which  have  occurred,  the  same  appearances 
have  been  observed  as  in  inflammatory  fever,  effusion 
within  the  cranium,  and  now  and  then  affections  of 
some  of  the  viscera. 

In  the  acute  rheumatism  the  general  antiphlogistic 
plan  of  .treatment  is  to  be  pursued,  so  long  as  the  fe- 
brile and  inflammatory  symptoms  are  severe.  It  may 
be  sometimes  proper  to  begin  by  a moderate  abstraction 
of  blood,  where  the  patient  is  young  and  plethoric; 
and  if  the  disease  attacks  any  important  part,  this 
measure  must  be  more  actively  pursued;  but  in  general 
it  does  not  appear  necessary.  Even  the  1 ocal  abstrac- 
tion of  blood  is  hardiy  advisable,  unless  the  affection 
be  very  much  fixed  to  one  part,  and  the  symptoms 
urgent : and  it  may  be  said,  that  most  local  applica- 
tions are  rather  likely  to  drive  the  disease  from  one 
part  to  another,  than  to  afford  permanent  relief.  After 
freely  opening  the  bowels,  the  chief  object  is  to  en- 
deavour to  procure  a general  and  mild  diaphoresis  by 
antimonial  and  mercurial  preparations,  assisted  by 
opium,  or  other  narcotic,  which  may  also  alleviate  the 
pain,  and  occasionally  by  the  warm  bath,  where  the 
skin  is  particularly  harsh  and  dry.  Digitalis,  by  mo- 
derating the  circulation,  will  sometimes  be  usefully 
conjoined  with  these  medicines.  As  the  fever  abates, 
and  the  strength  appears  impaired,  tonics  should  be 
given  to  promote  the  convalescence  of  the  patient,  and 
obviate  a relapse : and  where  the  inflammation  re-, 
mains  fixed  in  a particular  joint, .after  the  pyrexia  has 
ceased,  fomentations  and  other  local  measures,  ac- 
cording to  the  state  of  the  part,  may  be  employed  for 
its  removal.  In  the  arthrodynia , or  chronic  rheuma- 
tism, as  it  is  commonly  called,  the  remedies  of  chief 
efficacy  are  stimulant  diaphoretics  in  moderate  doses 
regularly  persevered  in,  assisted  by  various  lodal 
means  of  promoting  the  circulation  through  the  affected 
part.  Anodynes  may  be  also  used  with  advantage 
both  internally  and  locally:  and  attention  should  be 
paid  to  support  the  strength,  and  correct  any  observa- 
ble deficiency  in  the  several  functions. 

RHE'UME.  (From  prw,  to  flow.)  A defluxion,  a 
common  cold  or  catarrh. 

RHEUMIC  ACID.  An  acid  said  to  be  peculiar  to 
rhubarb,  but  not  yet  sufficiently  examined. 

Rhibe'sia.  (From  ribes,  a currant.)  See  Ribes. 

RHINiE'US.  (. Rliinceus , sc.  mus cuius ; from  ptv 
the  nose.)  See  Compressor 
246 


Rhinenchy'tes.  (Frpm  ptr,  the  nose,  and  eyxvoa, 
to  pour  in.)  A syringe  for  the  nose. 

RHINOPHO'NIA.  (From  ptv,  the  nose,  and  <f>oyvi, j, 
the  voice.)  A nasal  voice. 

Rhiza'gra.  (From  ptga,  the  root,  and  ayptva,  to 
seize.)  An  instrument  for  taking  out  the  roots  or 
stumps  of  teeth. 

RHODIA.  See  Rhodiola. 

RHODIOLA.  (A  diminutive  of  Rhodia;  from 
oodov,  a rose  ; so  called  because  its  root  smells  like  the 
damask  rose  ) The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Dicecia  ; Order,  Octandria. 

Rhodiola  rosea.  The  radix  rhodite  of  some 
pharmacopoeias  is  the  produce  of  the  Rhodiola  rosea , 
of  Linnaeus,  called  rosewort.  When  dry,  it  has  a very 
pleasant  smell,  resembling  that  of  the  damask  rose. 
In  this  odorous  matter  the  medical  virtue  of  the  root 
resides.  Poultices  in  which  this  root  enters  as  a chief 
ingredient  are  said  to  allay  violent  pains  of  the  head. 

RHO  DIUM.  (From  po<5ov,  arose;  a wood  which 
smells  like  roses.)  1.  Rhodium,  or  rosewood. 

2.  A new  metal  discovered  among  the  grains  of  crude 
platina,  by  Dr.  Wollaston.  The  mode  of  obtaining  it 
in  the  state  of  a triple  salt  combined  with  muriatic  acid 
and  soda,  has  been  given  under  the  article  Palladium. 
This  may  be  dissolved  in  water,  and  the  metal  preci- 
pitated from  it  in  a black  powder  by  zinc. 

This  powder,  exposed  to  heat,  continues  black ; but 
with  borax  it  acquires  a white  metallic  lustre,  though 
it  remains  infusible.  Sulphur,  or  arsenic,  however, 
renders  it  fusible,  and  may  afterward  be  expelled  by 
continuing  the  heat.  The  button,  however,  is  not 
malleable.  Its  specific  gravity  appears  not  to  ex- 
ceed 11. 

Rhodium  unites  easily  with  every  metal  that  has 
been  tried  except  mercury.  With  gold  or  silver  it 
forms  a very  malleable  alloy,  not  oxidated  by  a high 
degree  of  heat,  but  becoming  incrusted  with  a black 
oxide  when  slowly  cooled.  One-sixth  of  it  does  not 
perceptibly  alter  the  colour  of  gold,  but  renders  it  much 
less  fusible.  Neither  nitric  nor  nitro-muriatic  acid 
acts  on  it  in  either  of  these  alloys;  but  if  it  be  fused 
with  three  parts  of  bismuth,  lead,  or  copper,  the  alloy 
is  entirely  soluble  in  a mixture  of  nitric  acid  with  two 
parts  of  muriatic. 

The  oxide  was  soluble  in  every  acid  Dr.  Wollaston 
tried.  The  solution  in  muriatic  acid  did  not  crystal- 
lize by  evaporation.  Its  residuum  formed  a rose- 
coloured  solution  with  alkohol.  Muriate  of  ammonia 
and  of  soda,  and  nitrate  of  potassa,  occasioned  no  pre- 
cipitate in  the  muriatic  solution,  but  formed  with  the 
oxide  triple  salts,  which  were  insoluble  in  alkohol. 
Its  solution  in  nitric  acid  likewise  did  not  crystallize, 
but  silver,  copper,  and  other  metals  precipitated  it. 

The  solution  of  the  triple  salt  with  muriate  of  soda 
was  not  precipitated  by  muriate,  carbonate,  or  hydro- 
sulphuret  of  ammonia,  by  carbonate  or  ferroprussiate 
of  potassa,  or  by  carbonate  of  soda.  The  caustic 
alkalies  however  throw  down  a yellow  oxide,  soluble 
in  excess  of  alkali ; and  a solution  of  platina  occasions 
in  it  a yellow  precipitate. 

The  title  of  this  product  to  be  considered  as  a dis- 
tinct metal  was  at  first  questioned ; but  the  experi- 
ments of  Dr.  Wollaston  have  since  been  confirmed  by 

Descotils. 

Rhodium  lignum.  See  Aspulathus  canariensis. 

RHODODE  NDRON.  (From  po<5ov,  a rose,  and 
cevdpov,  a tree : so  called  because  its  flowers  resemble 
the  rose.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnse'an  system.  Class,  Dccandria;  Order,  Jlono- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  oleander.  See 
Rhododendron  chrysanthemum. 

Rhododendron  chrysanthemum.  The  systema- 
tic name  of  the  oleander,  rosebay,  or  yellow*  rhodo- 
dendron. This  species  of  rhododendron,  foliis  oblon- 
gis  impunctis  supra  scabris  venosissimis,  corolla  ro- 
tata  irregular i gemma  Jlorif era  fcrruginco-lomentosa, 
has  not  yet  been  introduced  in  Britain ; it  is  a native 
of  Siberia,  affecting  mountainous  situations,  and  flow- 
ering in  June  and  July. 

This  plant  and  its  medical  virtues  were  first  de- 
scribed in  1747,  by  Gmelin  and  Haller.  Litile  atten- 
tion, however,  was  paid  to  it,  till  the  year  1779,  when 
it  was  strongly  recommended  by  Koelpin  as  an  effica- 
cious medicine,  not  only  in  rheumatism  and  gout,  but 
even  in  venereal  cases ; and  it  is  now  very  generally 


RHU 


RHU 


employed  in  chronic  rheumatisms,  in  various  parts  of 
Europe.  The  leaves,  which  are  the  part  directed  for 
medicinal  use,  have  a bitterish  subadstringent  taste. 
Taken  in  a large  dose,  they  prove  a narcotic  poison ; 
and,  in  moderate  doses  they  are  said  to  occasion  heat, 
thirst,  a degree  of  delirium,  and  a peculiar  sensation 
of  the  parts  affected. 

As  a powerful  and  active  medicine,  this  shrub,  says 
Dr.  Woodville,  may  probably  be  found  an  addition  to 
the  materia  medica.  Dr.  Home,  who  tried  it  unsuc- 
cessfully in  some  cases  of  acute  rheumatism,  says, 
“It  appears  to  be  one  of  the  most  powerful  sedatives 
which  we  have,  as,  in  most  of  the  trials,  it  made  the 
pulse  remarkably  slow,  and  in  one  patient  reduced  it  to 
thirty-eight  beats.  And  in  other  cases,  in  which  the 
rhododendron  has  been  used  at  Edinburgh,  it  has  been 
productive  of  good  effects,  and  accordingly  it  is  now 
introduced  into  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia.  The 
manner  of  using  this  plant  by  the  Siberians,  was  by 
putting  two  drachms  of  the  dried  leaves  in  an  earthen 
pot,  with  about  ten  ounces  of  boiling  water,  keeping 
it  near  a boiling  heat  for  a night ; and  this  they  took  in 
the  morning,  and  by  repeating  it  three  or  four  times, 
generally  effected  a cure. 

Rhqdo'meli.  (From  podov,  the  rose,  and  pe\t, 
honey.)  Honey  of  roses. 

RHCEA'DEiE.  (From  rhaas,  the  red  poppy.)  The 
name  of  an  order  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natu- 
ral Method,  consisting  of  poppy  and  similar  plants, 
the  calyx  of  which  is  caducous,  and  the  fruit  a capsule 
or  selyna. 

RHCE'AS.  ( Rhxas , ados.  m. ; from  pro,  to  flow.) 
The  wild  poppy  is  sometimes  so  called.  See  Papaver 
rhxas. 

RHCETIZITE.  A glistening  and  pearly  white 
mineral,  which  is  found  in  primitive  rocks,  with 
quartz  Psitzsci,  in  the  Tyrol. 

RHOMBOIDE'US.  (From  pop6o$,  a geometrical 
fieure,  whose  sides  are  equal  but  not  right-angled,  and 
eiSos,  resemblance.)  Rhomboideus  major  and  minor. 
Rliomboidcs , of  Douglas,  Winslow,  and  Cowper;  and 
Cervici  dorso  scapulaire,  of  Dumas.  This  muscle, 
which  is  so  named  from  its  shape,  is  situated  imme- 
diately under  the  trapezius.  We  find  it  usually,  though 
not  always,  divided  into  two  portions,  which  Albinus 
describes  as  two  distinct  muscles.  The  uppermost  of 
these,  or  rhomboideus  minor , arises  tendinous  from  the 
spinous  processes  of  the  three  inferior  vertebra  of  the 
neck,  and  from  the  ligamentum  colli ; the  lowermost, 
or  rhomboideus  major , arises  tendinous  from  the 
spinous  processes  of  the  back  : the  former  is  inserted 
into  the  basis  of  the  scapula,  opposite  to  its  spine  ; the 
latter  into  all  the  basis  of  the  scapula,  below  its  spine. 
Its  use  is  to  draw  the  scapula  obliquely  upwards,  and 
directly  backwards. 

RHOMP.SPAR.  See  Bitterspar. 

RHOMBUS.  Diamond-shaped,  approaching  to  a 
square:  applied  to  leaves,  &c. ; as  those  of  the  Cheno- 
podium  oliduni,  and  to  the  pod  of  Cicer  arientinum. 

RHONCHUS.  (Poy/cof,  rhonchus,  stertor.)  Snoring. 

RHOPALO'SIS.  (From  pona\ov,  a club.)  A disor- 
der in  which  the  hair  cleaves  together,  and  hangs  down 
in  clusters  resembling  clubs.  The  plaited  hair.  See 
Plica. 

RHUBARB.  See  Rheum. 

Rhubarb,  monk's.  See  Rumcx  patientia. 

Rhubarb,  rhapontic.  See  Rheum,  rhaponticum. 

R1UJS.  (From  pear,  to  flow:  so  called  because  it 
stops  fluxes.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnsean  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; Order,  Trigy- 
nia.  The  sumach-tree. 

Rhus  beugica.  The  Dutch  myrtle  is  sometimes  so 
termed.  See  Myrica  gale. 

Riius  coriaria.  Sumach.  Ehn-leaved  sumach. 
This  plant,  Rhus—foliispivnatis  obtusiuscule  serratus 
ovalibus  subtus  villosis,  of  Linnaeus,  is  a small  tree,  a 
nativtf  of  the  south  of  Europe.  It  is  singular  that  this 
is  the  only  species  of  the  genus  t hus  which  is  per- 
fectly innocent ; the  others  being  active  poisons.  Both 
the  leaves  and  berries  of  thi?  plant  are  used  medici- 
nally, ns  astringents  and  tonics;  the  former  are  the 
most  powerful,  and  have  been  long  in  common  use, 
where  they  may  be  easily  obtained  in  various  com- 
plaints indicating  this  class  of  remedies.  The  berries, 
which  are  red,  and  of  a roundish  compressed  figure, 
contain  a pulpy  matter,  in  which  is  lodged  a brown, 
Hard,  oval  seed,  manifesting  a considerable  degree  of 


adstringency.  The  pulp,  even  when  dry,  is  grateful, 
and  has  been  discovered  to  contain  an  essential  salt, 
similar  to  that  of  wood-sorrel.  An  infusion  of  the 
dried  fruit  is  not  rendered  black  by  a solution  of  iron  ; 
hence  it  appears  to  be  destitute  of  adstringency.  But 
its  acidity  is  extremely  grateful ; therefore,  like  many 
other  fruits,  these  berries  may  be  advantageously  taken 
to  allay  febrile  heat,  and  to  correct  bilious  putrescency. 

[Rhus  glabrum.  The  berries  of  this,  and  several 
other  American  species  of  sumach,  have  a strong,  acid 
taste,  and  at  times  exhibit  crystallized  or  saline  parti- 
cles on  their  surface.  Dr.  Harsefield  supposes  the  acid 
they  contain  to  be  tartaric  ; but  it  is,  not  improbably, 
an  acid  sui  generis.  The  acidulous  infusion  of  these 
berries  is  used  as  a refrigerant  in  fevers,  and  a gargle 
in  sore  throats.  The  bark  and  leaves  of  the  shrub  are 
highly  astringent,  and  are  used" in  tanning  leather. — 
Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Rhus  radicans.  See  Rhus  vernix. 

Rhus  tipiiinum.  The  systematic  name  of  theVir- 
ginian  sumach,  the  seeds  of  which  are  said  to  be  useful 
in  stopping  haemorrhages. 

Rhus  toxicodendron.  Poison  oak,  or  sumach. 
This  plant  is  a native  ol  North  America.  The  stems, 
if  cut,  exude  a milky  juice,  which  inflames  the  skin. 
The  leaves,  now  inserted  in  the  pharmacopoeia,  are  in- 
odorous, and  have  a mawkish,  subacrid  taste.  Their 
virtues  are  extracted  more  perfectly  by  water  than  by 
alkohol.  They  prove  stimulant  and  narcotic,  when 
taken  internally.  Dr.  Alderson,  of  Hull,  found  them 
successful  in  several  cases  of  paralysis.  They  excite 
a sense  of  heat  and  pricking,  and  irregular  twitches  in 
the  affected  limbs.  They  have  been  sometimes  useful, 
also,  in  herpetic  eruptions.  The  dose  may  be  from 
half  a grain,  gradually  increased,  to  four  grains,  two 
or  three  times  a-day. 

Rhus  vernix.  Rhus  radicans.  The  systematic 
name  of  a poisonous  plant,  the  efficacy  of  which  Dr. 
Fresnoi  has  endeavoured  to  prove,  in  the  disease  called 
paralysis,  and  herpetic  affections.  He,  in  order  that 
others  should  not  suffer  by  his  experiments,  began  by 
taking  an  infusion  of  one  of  the  three  foliola  of  which 
each  leaf  of  this  plant  consists;  and,  as  this  dose  pro- 
duced no  sensible  effect,  he  increased  the  number  to 
twelve.  His  urine  and  perspiration  were  increased  in 
quantity,  and  lie  had  some  pains  in  his  belly.  He  re- 
lates seven  cases,  in  which  he  thinks  he  can  remove 
all  doubt  of  the  efficacy  of  this  infusion,  in  herpetic 
affections.  From  these,  the  following  are  selected  : 

“ A countrywoman,”  says  Dr.  Fresnoi,  “ came  to 
me  in  the  month  of  July,  1780,  to  consult  me  about  the 
herpes  farinosa,  with  which  her  face  had  been  covered 
for  more  than  a year.  She  was  ordered  to  take  an  in- 
fusion of  this  plant ; and,  in  six  weeks,  was  entirely 
free  from  the  disease.” 

He  likewise  relates  five  cases  of  paralysis,  which 
were  cured  by  the  use  of  this  plant. 

The  leaves  of  this  plant  are  to  be  cut  when  in  the 
greatest  vigour,  about  the  month  of  June.  “ Those 
who  cut  this  plant,”  says  Dr.  F.,  “wear  leathern 
gloves,  on  account  of  its  poisonous  qualities.”  The 
same  gentleman  observes,  he  saw  one  case  in  which 
inflammation  of  the  eyelids  was  produced  by  the  va- 
pour from  the  plant.  Four  pounds  of  the  leaves,  being 
distilled  with  thirty-two  pounds  of  water,  give  it  a 
slight  odour,  although  the  plant  is  entirely  free  from  it. 
Its  taste  is  pungent,  and  inflames  the  mouth.  .The  de- 
coction which  remains  in  the  still  is  brown,  and  is 
generally  covered  with  a light  brown  pellicle.  When 
strained  and  evaporated,  it  gives  a shining  black  ex- 
tract. The  leaves  inflame  and  swell  the  hands  and 
aims  of  those  who  take  them  out  of  the  still,  and 
bring  on  an  itching,  which  remains  for  several  days. 
Forty-two  pounds  of  the  leaves  afford  twenty  ounces 
of  extract,  of  a proper  consistence  for  pills. 

“A  girl,  in  Flanders,”  says  Dr.  Fresnoi,  “already 
subject,  to  fits,  laid  down  some  flowers  in  her  bedroom. 
Next  day  she  told  me  that  she  had  undergone  a great 
change : that  she  had  had  no  fits,  and  slept  much  bet- 
ter. It  occurred  to  me,”  says  Dr.  F.  “ that  the  flowers 
occasioned  this  change.  Next  day,  the  flowers  being 
removed,  and  the  window  opened,  the  convulsions  re- 
appeared ; on  their  being  again  introduced,  the  fiis  dis- 
appeared; which  proved  plainly  it  was  the  effect  of 
the  flowers.  The  success  of  the  extract,  in  tussis 
convulsiva,  exceeded  my  hopes;  forty-two  children 
being  cured  of  this  disorder  in  Valenciennes,  during 


RIB 


RIC 


the  end  of  the  year  1786.  Four  grains  of  extract  are 
to  be  dissolved  in  four  ounces  of  syrup,  of  which  one 
table-spoonful,  given  to  the  child  every  third  hour,  ge- 
nerally abates  the  cough,  and  mostly  leaves  them.” 

RHY'AS.  (fPvaf,  adiseaseof  the  eye.)  A decrease 
or  defect  of  the  lachrymal  caruncle.  The  proximate 
cause  is  a native  defect ; or  it  may  originate  from  exci- 
sion, erosion,  or  acrimony.  This  disorder  is  commonly 
incurable,  and  it  induces  an  incurable  epiphora , or  a 
continual  weeping. 

RHYPIA.  (From  rPupof,  sordes.)  Foul,  sordid, 
ill-conditioned. 

Rhytido'sis.  See  Rutidosis. 

RIB.  Costa.  The  ribs  are  the  long  curved  bones 
which  are  placed  in  an  oblique  direction  at  the  sides  of 
the  chest.  Their  number  is  generally  twelve  on  each 
side  ; but,  in  some  subjects,  it  has  been  found  to  be 
thirteen,  and  in  others,  though  more  rarely,  only  ele- 
ven. They  are  distinguished  into  true  and  false  ribs. 
The  seven  upper  ribs,  which  are  articulated  to  the  ster- 
num, are  called  true  ribs;  and  the  five  lower  ones, 
which  are  not  immediately  attached  to  that  bone,  are 
called  false  ribs.  At  the  posterior  extremity  of  each 
rib,  we  observe  a small  head,  divided  by  a middle 
ridge  into  two  articulating  surfaces,  covered  with  car- 
tilage, which  are  received  into  two  cavities,  contiguous 
to  each  other,  and  formed  in  the  upper  and  lower  part 
of  each  dorsal  vertebra,  as  we  have  observed  in  our 
description  of  the  spine.  This  articulation,  which  is 
secured  by  a capsular  ligament,  is  a species  of  gingly- 
mus,  and  allows  only  of  motion  upwards  and  down- 
wards. The  head  of  each  rib  is  supported  by  a short 
neck,  and  iinmediate'y  beyond  this  we  find  a flattened 
tubercle,  affording  an  oblong  and  slightly  convex  sur- 
face. which  is  articulated  with  the  transverse  process 
of  the  lowest  of  the  turn  dorsal  vertebrae,  with  which 
its  head  is  articulated.  At  some  little  distance  from 
this  tuberosity,  the  rib  makes  a considerable  curve, 
which  is  usually  called  its  angle.  From  the  tubercle  to 
the  angle,  the  ribs  are  of  considerable  thickness,  and 
approaching  to  a cylindrical  shape;  but,  from  the  an- 
gle to  their  anterior  extremity,  they  become  thinner  and 
flatter.  To  this  anterior  extremity  is  fixed  a long, 
broad,  and  strong  cartilage,  which,  in  each  of  the  true 
ribs,  reaches  to  the  sternum,  where  its  articulation  is 
secured  by  a capsular  ligament,  and  by  other  ligamen- 
tous fibres.  The  cartilages  of  the  sixth  and  seventh 
ribs  being  longer  than  the  rest,  are  extended  upwards, 
in  order  to  reach  the  sternum,  the  inferior  portion  of 
which  is  about  on  a level  with  the  fifth  rib.  The  carti- 
lages of  these  two  ribs  are  usually  united  into  one,  so 
as  to  leave  no  space  between  them.  The  false  ribs  are 
supported  in  a different  manner;  their  cartilages  ter- 
minate in  an  acute  point  before  they  reach  the  sternum, 
the  eighth  rib  being  attached  by  its  cartilage  to  the 
lower  edge  of  the  cartilage  of  the  seventh,  or  last  of 
the  true  ribs;  the  ninth  in  the  same  manner  to  the 
eighth ; and  the  tenth  to  the  ninth  ; the  cartilages  of 
each  rib  being  shorter  than  that  of  the  rib  above  it. 
The  eleventh  and  twelfth,  which  are  the  two  lower- 
most ribs,  are  not  fixed  at  their  anterior  extremities 
like  the  other  ribs,  but  hang  loose,  and  are  supported 
only  by  their  ligamentous  fibres,  and  by  muscles  and 
other  soft  parts. 

The  external  surface  of  each  rib  is  somewhat  con- 
vex, and  its  internal  surface  slightly  concave.  On  the 
inferior  and  interior  surface  of  these  bones  we  observe 
a long  fossa,  for  the  lodgment  of  the  intercostal  vessels 
and  nerves.  This  channel,  however,  does  not  extend 
through  the  whole  length  of  the  rib,  being  observable 
neither  at  the  posterior  extremity,  where  the  vessels 
have  not  yet  reached  the  bone,  nor  at  the  fore-end, 
where  they  are  distributed  to  the  parts  between  the 
ribs.  We  seldom  see  any  marks  of  it  in  the  short  ribs, 
as  in  the  first,  second,  eleventh,  and  twelfth. 

Thus  far  we  have  given  a description  which  is  ap- 
plicable to  the  ribs  in  general ; but,  as  we  find  them 
differing  from  each  other  in  shape,  length,  situation, 
and  other  respects,  it  will  be  right  to  speak  of  each  rib 
in  particular. 

The  first  rib,  which  is  the  shortest  of  any,  is  like- 
wise the  most  curved.  It  is  broader  than  the  other 
ribs,  and,  instead  of  being  placed,  as  they  are,  ob- 
liquely, and  with  its  edges  upwards  and  downwards, 
it  is  situated  nearly  in  a transverse  direction,  one  of 
its  edges  being  placed  inwards,  or  nearly  so.  Of  these 
edges,  the  inner  one  is  sharp,  and  the  outer  one 


somewnat  rounded.  Its  inner  surface  is  smooth,  and 
its  superior  surface  is  sometimes  slightly  depressed 
anterior  y by  the  clavicle.  The  head  of  this  rib,  in- 
stead of  being  angular,  is  flattened,  and  slightly  con 
vex,  being  received  into  a cavity,  which  is  formed 
wholly  in  the  first  vertebra,  and  not  by  two  vertebrae, 
as  in  the  case  with  the  other  ribs. 

The  second  rib  is  longer  than  the  first,  but  shorter 
than  the  ribs  below  it.  Its  angle  is  placed  at  a small 
distance  rom  its  tuberosity,  and  its  head  is  articulated 
with  two  vertebrae,  like  the  other  ribs.  The  other  ten 
ribs,  the  last  two  only  excepted,  differ  from  the  general 
description  we  have  given,  chiefly  in  the  difference  of 
their  length,  which  goes  on  gradually  increasing,  from 
the  first  or  uppermost,  to  the  seventh  or  last  of  the  true 
ribs,  and  as  gradually  diminishing  from  that  to  the 
twelfth.  Their  obliquity,  in  respect  to  the  spine,  like- 
wise increases  as  they  descend,  as  does  the  distance 
between  the  head  and  angle  of  each  rib,  from  the  first 
rib  to  the  ninth.  The  two  lowest  ribs  differ  from  all  the 
rest  in  the  following  particulars: — Their  heads,  like 
that  of  the  first  rib,  are  rounded,  and  received  into  a 
cavity  formed  entirely  in  the  body  of  one  vertebra ; 
they  have  no  tubercle  for  their  articulation  with  the 
transverse  processes,  to  whifli  they  are  only  loosely 
fixed  by  ligaments,  and,  in  this  respect,  the  tenth  rib  is 
sometimes  found  to  agree  with  them:  they  are  much 
shorter  than  the  rest  of  the  false  ribs,  and  the  twelfth 
is  still  shorter  than  the  eleventh.  The  length  of  the 
latter,  however,  is  different  in  different  subjects,  and  is 
not  always  found  to  be  the  same  on  both  sides.  Ante- 
riorly, as  we  have  already  observed,  their  cartilages 
are  short  and  loose,  not  being  attached  to  the  cartilages 
of  the  other  ribs ; and  this  seems  to  be,  because  the 
most  considerable  motions  of  the  trunk  are  not  per- 
formed on  the  lumbar  vertebrae  alone,  but  likewise  on 
the  lower  vertebrae  of  the  back  ; so  that  if  these  two 
ribs  had  been  confined  anteriorly,  like  the  rest,  and 
likewise  united  to  the  bodies  of  two  vertebrae,  and  to 
the  transverse  process,  this  disposition  would  have  im- 
peded the  motion  of  the  two  last  vertebrae  of  the  back, 
and  consequently  would  have  affected  the  motion  of 
the  trunk  in  general. 

The  use  of  the  ribs  is  to  give  form  to  the  thorax, 
and  to  cover  and  defend  the  lungs ; also  to  assist  in 
breathing ; for  they  are  joined  to  the  vertebras  by  regu- 
lar hinges,  which  allow  of  short  motions,  and  to  the 
sternum  by  cartilages,  which  yield  to  the  motion  of  the 
ribs,  and  return  again  when  the  muscles  cease  to  act. 

Ribbed-leaf.  S eeNervosus. 

RI'BES.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Older,  Mono- 
gynia.  The  currant-tree. 

Ribes  nigrum.  Black  .currant.  This  indigenous 
plant,  Ribes — racemis  pilosis , floribus  oblongis,  of 
Linnaeus,  affords  larger  berries  than  those  of  the  red, 
which  are  said  to  be  peculiarly  useful  in  sor  e throats, 
and  to  possess  a diuretic  power  in  a very  considerable 
degree.  The  leaves  of  the  black  currant  are  extremely 
fragrant,  and  have  been  likewise  recommended  for 
their  medicinal  virtue,  which  Bersius  states  to  be 
mundificans,  pellens,  diuretica.  The  officinal  prepara- 
tions of  the  berries  are  the  syrupus  ribis  nigri,  and  the 
succus  ribis  nigri  inspissatus. 

Ribes  rubrum.  Grossularia  non  spinosa.  The 
red  currant.  Ribes — inerme ; racemis  glabris  pendu- 
lis , floribus  planiusculis , of  Linnaeus.  The  white 
currant-tree  is  merely  a variety  of  the  red,  the  fruit 
of  both  is  perfectly  analogous ; therefore,  what  is  said 
of  the  one  applies  to  the  other.  The  red  currant  is  abun- 
dantly cultivated  in  gardens,  and,  from  its  grateful  aci- 
dity, is  universally  acceptable,  either  as  nature  presents 
it,  or  variously  prepared  by  art,  with  the  addition  of 
sugar.  Considered  medicinally,  it  is  esteemed  to  be 
moderately  refrigerant,  antiseptic,  attenuant,  and  ape- 
rient. It  may  be  used  with  considerable  advantage  to 
allay  thirst,  in  most  febrile  complaints,  to  lessen  an  in- 
creased secretion  of  bile,  and  to  correct  a putrid  and 
scorbutic  state  of  the  fluids,  especially  in  sanguine 
temperaments ; but,  in  constitutions  of  a contrary 
kind,  it  is  apt  to  occasion  flatulency  and  indigestion. 

RIBWORT.  See  Plantago  lanccolata. 

RICE.  See  Oryza. 

RI  CINUS.  (Quasi,  piv  kvvos,  a dog’s  nose:  be- 
cause they  stick  to  the  noses  of  dogs.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Mo 
nacia;  Order,  Monadelphia. 


RIM 


ROC 


2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  plant  that  affords 
the  seed  from  which  the  castor-oil  is  prepared. 

Ricinus  communis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
castor-oil  plant.  Cataputia  major;  Kerva;  Ricinus 
vulgaris;  Palma  christi  Ricinus — foliis  peltatis  sub - 
palmatis  serrat.is , of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  appears  to 
he  the  K net,  or  Kpormv,  of  Dioscorides,  who  observes, 
that  the  seeds  are  powerfully  cathartic  ; it  is  also  men- 
tioned by  Actius,  Paul  us  ASgineta,  and  Pliny.  The 
ricinus  was  first  cultivated  in  England,  in  the  time  of 
Turner,  and  is  now  annually  reared  in  many  gardens 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  London ; and  in  that  of  Dr. 
Saunders,  at  Highbury,  the  plant  grew  to  a state  of 
great  perfection.  An  oil  extracted  from  the  seeds  of 
this  plant,  and  known  by  the  name  of  oleum  ricini, 
palrna  christi,  or  castor-oil,  is  the  drug  to  which  the 
pharmacopoeias  refer,  and  which  has  lately  come  into 
frequent  use,  as  a quick  but  gentle  purgative.  The 
London  College  directs  this  oil  to  be  expressed  from  the 
seeds  in  the  same  way  as  that  of  the  oil  of  almonds, 
and  without  the  assistance  of  heat,  by  which  the  oil 
would  seem  to  be  obtained  in  the  purest  state.  How- 
ever, we  have  some  reason  to  believe  that  this  method 
is  seldom  practised,  and  that  the  oil  usually  employed 
here  is  imported  from  the  West  Indies,  where  it  is 
commonly  prepared  in  the  following  manner  : — “ The 
seeds  being  freed  from  the  husks,  or  pods,  which  are 
gathered  upon  their  turning  brown,  and  when  begin- 
ning to  burst  open,  are  first  bruised  in  a mortar,  after- 
ward tied  up  in  a linen  bag,  and  then  thrown  into  a 
large  pot,  with  a sufficient  quantity  of  water  (about 
eight  gallons,  to  one  gallon  of  the  seeds),  and  boiled  till 
the  oil  is  risen  to  the  surface,  when  it  is  carefully 
skimmed  off,  strained,  and  kept  for  use.  Thus  pre- 
pared, the  oil  is  entirely  free  from  acrimony,  and  will 
stay  upon  the  stomach  when  it  rejects  all  other  medi- 
cines.” Mr.  Long  remarks,  that  the  oil  intended  for 
medicinal  use,  is  more  frequently  cold  drawn,  or  ex- 
tracted from  the  bruised  seeds  by  means  of  a hand- 
press.  But  this  is  thought  more  acrimonious  than  that 
Y/repared  by  coction.  Dr.  Brown  is  also  of  this  opi- 
nion, and  prefers  the  oil  prepared  by  coction  to  that  by 
expression  ; he  attributes  its  greater  mildness  to  the 
action  of  the  fire,  observing  that  the  expressed  oil,  as 
well  as  the  mixed  juices  of  the  seeds,  are  far  more  ac- 
tive and  violent  in  their  operation. 

Dr. Cullen  observes,  that  “this  oil,  when  the  sto- 
mach can  be  reconciled  to  it,  is  one  of  the  most  agree- 
able purgatives  we  can  employ.  It  has  this  particular 
advantage,  that  it  operates  sooner  after  its  exhibition 
than  any  other  purgative  I know  of,  as  it  commonly 
operates  in  two  or  three  hours.  It  seldom  gives  any 
griping,  and  its  operation  is  generally  moderate,  pro- 
ducing one,  two,  or  three  stools  only.  It  is  particularly 
suited  to  cures  of  costiveness,  and  even  to  cases  of 
spasmodic  colic. 

In  the  West  Indies,  it  is  found  to  be  one  of  the  most 
certain  remedies  in  the  dry  belly-ache,  or  colica  picto- 
num.  It  is  seldom  found  heating  or  irritating  to  the 
rectum ; and,  therefore,  is  sufficiently  well  suited  to 
hasmorrhoidal  persons. 

The  only  inconvenience  attending  the  use  of  this 
medicine  is,  that  as  an  oil  it  is  nauseous  to  some  per- 
sons ; and  that,  when  the  dose  is  large,  it  occasions 
sickness  at  the  stomach  for  some  time  after  it  is  taken. 
To  obviate  these  inconveniences,  several  means  have 
been  tried ; and  it  is  found  that  the  most  effectual  means 
is  the  addition  of  a little  ardent  spirit.  In  the  West 
Indies,  they  employ  rum  ; but  that  I might  not  with- 
draw any  part  of  the  purgative,  I employed  the  Tine, 
sennee  comp.  This,  added  in  the  proportion  of  one  to 
three  parts  of  the  oil,  and  very  intimately  mixed,  by 
being  shaken  together  in  a phial,  both  makes  the  oil 
less  nauseous  to  the  taste,  and  makes  it  sit  more  easy 
on  the  stomach.  The  common  dose  of  this  oil  is  a 
table  spoonful,  or  half  an  ounce ; but  many  persons  re- 
quire a double  quantity.” 

Ricinus  major.  See  Jatropha  curcas. 

Ricinus  vulgaris.  See  Ricinus. 

RICKETS.  See  Rachitis. 

RICTUS.  This  term  is  applied  by  botanists  to  the 
grinning  mouth  or  opening  between  the  two  lips  of  a 
ringent  or  personate  flower. 

RI'GOR.  A sudden  coldness,  attended  by  a shiver- 
ing, more  or  less  perfect. 

RI'MA.  A fissure,  or  opening ; as  the  rima  laryngis , 

rima  vulva. 


Rima  glottidis.  The  opening  of  the  larynz,. 
through  which  the  air  passes  in  and  out  of  the  lungs. 

RI'MULA.  (Diminutive  of  rima,  a fissure.)  A 
small  fissure. 

RINAS'US.  (From  piv,  the  nose.)  See  Compressor 
naris. 

RING-WORM.  A species  of  herpes.  See  Herpes. 

R1NGENS.  Ringent:  a term  applied  to  flowers  or 
their  corolla,  which  are  irregular  and  gr-ping,  like  the 
mouth  of  an  arnimal ; as  those  of  the  nettle;  &c. 

A ringent  flower  is  also  called  a lipped  or  labiate  by 
some  botanists. 

Ri'sagon.  See  Cassumuniar. 

Risigallum.  The  auripigmentum  was  so  called. 
See  Jlrsenious  acid. 

RI'SUS.  Laughter;  laughing. 

Risus  caninus.  A kind  of  laughter  in  which  the 
lips  are  contracted,  so  as  to  show  all  the  teeth. 

Risus  sardonicus.  .See  Sardonic  laugh. 

RIVERIUS,  Lazarus,  was  born  at  Montpelier,  in 
1589.  Being  naturally  slow  in  his  attainments,  he 
failed  in  his  first  examinations  for  a degree  ; but  this 
only  stimulated  him  to  redoubled  exertions,  so  that  in 
the  following  spring  he  accomplished  his  object  at  the 
age  of  22.  His  attachment  to  study  became  then  very 
great,  and  eleven  years  after  that  period  he  was  ap- 
pointed to  the  professorship  of  medicine  in  the  univer- 
sity; which  office  he  filled  with  great  honour  till  his 
death  in  1655.  Riverius  published  some  valuable 
works,  especially  one,  entitled  “ Praxis  Medica;” 
which  appeared  at  first  in  a concise  form,  as  a sort  of 
text-book ; but  finding  it  very  favourably  received  by 
the  public,  he  enlarged  and  improved  it  considerably  : 
and  it  added  greatly  to  his  reputation,  having  passed 
through  numerous  oditions,  as  well  in  the  original,  as 
translated  into  French  and  English. 

RIVINUS,  Augustus  Quirinus,  was  son  of  a 
learned  physician  and  critic,  Andrew  Bachmann, 
whose  name  was  Latinized  into  Rivinus,  and  born  at 
Leipsic,  in  1652.  He  graduated  at  the  age  of  24,  and 
fifteen  years  after  obtained  the  professorships  of  physi- 
ology and  botany  in  his  native  university  ; he  was  also 
associated  with  many  learned  bodies  ; and  he  filled 
these  appointments  with  honour  to  himself  till  his 
death,  in  1723.  Rivinus  distinguished  himself  chiefly 
as  a systematic  botanist ; but  his  arrangement  was  very 
defective,  being  founded  on  the  number  of  the  petals, 
and  their  being  regulator  irregular.  Though  by  no 
means  eminent  as  a practical  anatomist,  he  is  said  to 
have  discovered  a new  salivary  duct.  As  a medical 
Writer,  he  has  the  merit  of  faithful  observation  and 
description  in  his  treatise  “ De  PesteLipsiensi,”  pub- 
lished in  1680.  He  wrote  also  on  dyspepsia,  on  inter- 
mittents,  and  various  other  subjects.  His  “ Censura 
Medicarnenforum  officinalium,”  ranks  very  high,  ou 
account  of  the  freedom  with  which  he  attacked  opi- 
nions, however  generally  received,  which  he  believed 
erroneous;  and  to  the  prevalence  of  this  spirit  we  owe 
the  great  simplification,  and  other  improvements,  which 
the  Materia  Medica  exhibits  at  present. 

ROASTING.  A chemical  process,  generally  per- 
formed in  crucibles,  by  which  mineral  substances  are 
divided,  some  of  their  principles  being  volatilized,  and 
others  changed,  so  as  to  prepare  them  for  other  opera 
tioris. 

ROB.  {Rob,  dense,  Arabian.)  An  old  term  for  an 
inspissated  juice. 

ROBOR  ANT.  ( Roborans ; from  roboro , to  strength- 
en.) That  which  is  strengthening.  See  Tonic. 

ROCCE'LLA.  See  Lichen  roccella. 

Rochelle-salt.  See  Soda  tartarisata. 

ROCKAMBOLE.  The  Jlllium  scorodoprasum,  of 
Linnseus.  The  root  is  used  for  pickles  and  high-sea- 
soned dishes. 

ROCK-BUTTER.  A greasy  mineral  which  oozes 
out  of  rocks  that  contain  alum,  at  the  Hurlet  alum- 
work,  near  Paisley. 

Rock  cork.  See  Asbestos. 

ROCK-CRYSTAL.  A white  and  brown-coloured 
crystallized  silicious  mineral,  found  of  great  size  and 
beauty  in  some  parts  of  Scotland,  and  Dauphiny  affords 
most  magnificent  groupes. 

Rock-oil.  See  Petroleum. 

ROCK-SALT.  Of  this  there  are  two  kinds,  the 
foliated  and  the  fibrous.  The  principal  deposite  of  this 
salt  in  Great  Britain  is  in  Cheshire.  In  1000  parts  are 
contained,  according  to  Henry,  983  of  muriate  of  soda, 

249 


ROS 


ROS 


6|  sulphate  of  lime,  a little  muriate  of  lime  and  mu- 
riate of  magnesia,  and  10  parts  insoluble  matter. 

Rock-samphire.  See  Crithmum  maritimum. 

Rock,  wood.  The  ligniform  abestos. 

ROCKET.  See  Brassica  eruca. 

Rocket,  Roman.  See  Brassica  eruca. 

Rocket,  wild.  See  Brassica,  erucastrum. 

[ROMAYNE,  Nicholas,  M.  D.  was  born  in  the  city 
of  New-York  in  September,  1756,  and  obtained  his 
elementary  education  at  Hackensack  in  New-Jersey, 
under  the  instruction  of  Dr.  Peter  Wilson,  the  late  pro- 
fessor of  languages  in  Columbia  College.  About  the 
commencement  of  the  revolutionary  war  he  went 
abroad,  and  completed  his  medical  studies  at  Edin- 
burgh. He  also  visited  the  continent,  and  spent  two 
years  in  Paris..  Upon  his  return  to  New-York  he  com- 
menced his  professional  career.  He  was  advantage- 
ously known  as  an  able  private  lecturer  on  many 
branches  of  medical  science,  and  it  is  with  pleasure  I 
bear  witness  to  his  efficient  instrumentality,  in  the 
foundation  of  the  College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons. 
He  was  its  first  president,  and  gave  instructions  in  that 
institution  on  Anatomy  and  the  Institutes  of  Medicine. 
His  address  as  president,  delivered  at  the  first  opening 
of  the  college  in  November,  1807,  is  an  honourable 
specimen  of  his  diversified  attainments  and  talent. 
He  died  in  New-York  in  1817. 

“ Dr.  Romayne,”  says  Dr.  M‘Leod,  “ was  a man  of 
strong  mind,  well  cultivated  and  much  improved  by 
reading,  by  the  society  of  learned  men,  and  by  travel- 
ling. I knew  him  in  health  and  in  the  midst  of  disease; 
in  affluence  and  in  adversity.  He  had  much  self-com- 
mand, though  naturally  of  powerful  passions,  and  very 
tender  sensibilities.  Bereaved  of  all  his  children  in 
their  infancy,  he  could  not  endure  the  recollection  of 
their  endearment.  On  the  last  evening  of  his  life  he 
gave  testimony  to  a dear  friend,  of  his  respect  for  the 
Scriptures.  He  departed  too  suddenly  for  me  to  see 
him  on  his  death  bed.” — Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

Rore'lla.  See  Drosera  rotundifolia. 

ROS.  Dew. 

Ros  calabrinus.  The  official  manna  is  sometimes 
so  termed. 

Ros  solis.  See  Drosera  rotundifolia. 

RO  SA.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnsean  system.  . Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Poly- 
gynia.  The  rose. 

2.  A name  sometimes  given  to  the  erysipelas,  be- 
cause it  begins  with  a redness  like  that  of  a rose. 

Rosa  alba.  The  white  rose.  The  flowers  of  this 
species  possess  similar  but  inferior  virtues  to  those  of 
the  damask. 

Rosa  canina.  Rosa  sylvestris ; Cynorrhodon;  Cy- 
nosbatos.  The  dog  rose,  or  wild-brier,  or  liip-tree. 
Rosa — germinibus  ovatis  pedunculisque  glabris,  caule 
petiolisque  aculeatis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  fruit  of  this 
tree,  called  heps,  or  hips,  has  a sourish  taste,  and  -ob- 
tains a place  in  the  London  pharmacopoeia,  in  the 
form  of  conserve.  It  is  seldom  employed  but  to  give 
form  to  more  active  remedies,  in  pills,  boluses,  linc- 
tuses,  & c. 

Rosa  centifolia.  The  pharmacopoeial  and  syste- 
matic name  of  the  damask  rose.  Rosa  damasceda  ; 
Rosa  pallida.  The  damask  rose.  The  pharmaco- 
poeias direct  a syrup  to  be  prepared  from  the  petals  of 
this  rose,  Rosa — germinibus  ovatis  pedunculisque  his- 
pidis,  caule  hispido  aculeato  petiolis  inermibus,  of  Lin- 
narns;  which  is  found  to  be  a pleasant  and  useful  laxa- 
tive for  children,  or  to  obviate  costiveness  in  adults. 
Most  of  the  roses,  though  much  cultivated  in  our  gar- 
dens, are  far  from  being  distinctly  characterized. 
Those  denominated  varieties  are  extremely  numerous, 
and  often  permanently  uniform  ; and  the  specific  dif- 
ferences, as  hitherto  pointed  out,  are  in  many  respects 
so  inadequate  to  the  purpose  of  satisfactory  discrimi- 
nation, that  it  becomes  a difficult  matter  to  distinguish 
which  are  species  and  which  are  varieties  only.  The 
damask  rose  seems  to  be  another  species  widely  dif- 
ferent from  the  centifolia,  as  appears  from  the  descrip- 
tion given  of  it  by  Du  Roi  and  Miller. 

The  petals  are  directed  for  medical  use ; they  are  of 
a pale  red  colour,  and  of  a very  fragrant  odour,  which, 
to  most  people,  is  extremely  agreeable ; and  therefore 
this  and  most  of  the  other  roses  are  much  used  as 
nosegays.  We  may  remark,  however,  that  in  some 
instances,  they  have,  under  certain  circumstances, 
produced  alarming  symptoms.  The  petals  “impart 


theii  odorous  matter  to  watery  liquors,  both  by  infusion 
and  distillation.  Six  pounds  of  fresh  roses  impregnate, 
by  distillation,  a gallon,  or  more,  of  water,  strongly  with 
their  fine  flavour.  On  distilling  large  quantities,  there 
separates  from  the  watery  fluid  a small  portion  of  a 
fragrant  butyraceous  oil,  which  liquefies  by  heat,  and 
appears  yellow,  but  concretes  in  the  cold  into  a white 
mass.  A hundred  pounds  of  the  flowers,  according 
to  the  experiments  of  Tachenius  and  Hoffman,  af- 
forded scarcely  half  an  ounce  of  oil.”  The  smell  of 
the  oil  exactly  resembles  that  of  roses,  and  is  therefore 
much  used  as  a perfume.  It  possesses  very  little  pun- 
gency, and  has  been  highly  recommended  for  its  cordial 
and  analeptic  qualities.  These  flowers  also  contain  a 
bitterish  substance,  which  is  extracted  by  water  along 
with  the  odorous  principle,  and  remains  entire  in  the 
decoction  after  the  latter  has  been  separated  by  distil- 
lation, or  evaporation. 

This  fixed  sapid  matter  of  the  petals  manifests  a pur- 
gative quality ; and  it  is  on  this  account  that  the  flowers 
are  received  in  the  Materia  Medica. 

Rosa  damascena.  See  Rosa  centifolia. 

Rosa  gallica.  The  pharmacopoeial  and  systematic 
name  of  the  red  rose.  Rosa  rubra.  The  flowers  of 
this  species,  Rosa — germinibus  ovatis  pedunculisque 
hispidis,  caule  petiolisque  hispido  aculeatis,  of  Lin- 
meus,  are  valued  for  their  adstringent  qualities,  which 
are  most  considerable  before  the  petals  expand  ; and 
therefore  in  this  state  they  are  chosen  for  medicinal  use, 
and  ordered  by  the  pharmacopoeias  in  different  prepa- 
rations, as  those  of  a conserve,  or  confection,  a honey, 
an  infusion,  and  a syrup.  The  infusion  of  roses  is  a 
grateful  cooling  subadstringent,  and  useful  in  haemop- 
tysis, and  other  luemorrhagic  complaints  : its  efficacy, 
however,  depends  chiefly  on  the  sulphuric  acid  added. 

Rosa  pallida.  See  Rosa  centifolia. 

RosAFi  BRA.  See  Rosa  gallica. 

Rosa  sylvestris.  See  Rosa  canina. 

ROSA'CEUS.  Rose-like.  1.  Applied  to  corolla 
which  spread  like  a rose,  as  those  of  the  Dry  as. 

2.  The  term  gutta  rosacea  is  applied  to  little  rosy- 
coloured  spots  upon  the  face  and  nose. 

ROSACIC  ACID.  There  is  deposited  from  the  urine 
of  persons,  labouring  under  gout  and  inflammatory  fe- 
vers, a sediment  of  a rose  colour,  occasionally  in  red- 
dish crystals.  This  was  first  discovered  to  be  a peculiar 
acid  by  M.  Proust,  and  afterward  examined  by  M. 
Vauquelin.  This  acid  is  solid,  of  a lively  cinnabar 
hue,  without  smell,  with  a faint  taste,  but  reddening 
litmus  very  sensibly.  On  burning  coal  it  isdecomposed 
into  a pungent  vapour,  which  has  not  the  odour  of 
burning  animal  matter.  It  is  very  soluble  in  water, 
and  it  even  softens  in  the  air.  It  is  soluble  in  alkohol. 
It  forms  soluble  salts  with  potassa,  soda,  ammonia,  ba- 
rytes, stroutites,  and  lime.  It  gives  a slight  rose-co- 
loured precipitate  with  acetate  of  lead.  It  also  com- 
bines with  lithic  acid,  forming  so  intimate  a union,  that 
the  lithic  acid  in  precipitating  from  urine,  carries  the 
other,  though  a deliquescent  substance,  down  along 
with  it.  It  is  obtained  pure  by  acting  on  the  sediment 
of  urine  with  alkohol. 

ROSALIA.  A name  in  some  authors  for  the  mea- 
sles, or  a disease  very  like  the  measles. 

ROSE.  See  Rosa. 

Rose,  damask.  See  Rosa  centifolia. 

Rose,  dog.  See  Rosa  canina. 

Rosea  radix.  See  Rhodiola. 

Rose,  red.  See  Rosa  gallica. 

ROSE  ROOT.  See  Rhodiola. 

Rose,  white.  Sec  Rosa  alba. 

Roseba.y  willow  herb.  See  Epilobium  an gusti folium. 

ROSEMARY.  See  Rosmarinus. 

ROSEOLA.  (From  rosa,  a rose : so  called  from  the 
colour  of  the  rash.)  A rose-coloured  efflorescence, 
variously  figured,  without  wheals,  or  papul®,  and  not 
contagious.  It  is  mostly  symptomatic,  occurring  in 
connexion  with  different  febrile  complaints,  and  re- 
quiring no  deviation  from  the  treatment  respectively 
adapted  to  them. 

Its  principal  varieties  are  comprised  under  the  seven 
following  heads : 

1.  The  Roseola  csstiva  appears  first  on  the  face  and 
neck,  and  in  the  course  of  a day  or  two  is  distributed 
over  the  whole  body,  producing  a considerable  degree 
of  itching  and  tingling.  It  is  distributed  into  separate 
small  patches,  of  various  figure,  but  larger  and  more 
irregular  forms  than  in  the  measles.  It  is  at  first  red, 


ROS 


but  soon  assumes  its  deep  roseate  hue.  The  fauces 
are  tinged  with  the  same  colour,  and  a slight-  rough- 
ness of  the  tonsils  is  felt  in  swallowing. 

The  rash  continues  vivid  through  the  second  day ; 
after  which  it  declines  in  brightness,  slight  specks  only 
remaining  of  a dark  hue,  on  the  fourth  day ; which, 
with  the  constitutional  affection,  wholly  disappear  on 
the  fifth. 

The  efflorescence  sometimes  is  partial,  extending 
only  over  portions  of  the  face,  neck,  and  upper  part  of 
the  breast  and  shoulders,  in  patches,  slightly  elevated, 
and  itching  considerably,  but  in  this  form  the  disease 
continues  a week  or  longer,  the  rash  appearing  and  dis- 
appearing several  times ; sometimes  from  taking  warm 
liquors,  and  sometimes  without  any  apparent  cause. 
The  retrocession  is  usually  accompanied  with  disorder 
of  the  stomach,  headache,  and  faintness ; which  are 
immediately  relieved  on  its  appearance.  It  commonly 
occurs  in  females  of  irritable  constitution  in  summer. 
Light  diets  and  acidulated  drinks,  with  occasional  lax- 
atives, palliate  the  symptoms. 

2.  The  Roseola  autumnalis  occurs  in  children,  in  the 
autumn,  in  distinct  circular  or  oval  patches,  which 
gradually  increase  to  the  size  of  a shilling,  and  are  of 
a dark  damask  rose  hue.  Tt  appears  chiefly  on  the 
arms,  sometimes  desquamating,  and  its  decline  seems 
to  be  expedited  by  the  internal  use  of  sulphuric  acid. 

3.  The  Roseola  annulata  occurs  on  almost  every 
part  of  the  body,  in  rose-coloured  rings,  with  central 
areas  of  the  usual  colour  of  the  skin.  When  accom- 
panied with  fever  its  duration  is  short : at  other  times, 
without  any  constitutional  disorder,  it  continues  for  a 
considerable  and  uncertain  period.  The  rings  are,  at 
first,  from  a line  to  two  lines  in  diameter,  but  gradually 
dilating  leave  a larger  central  space,  sometimes  of  the 
diameter  of  half  an  inch.  The  efflorescence  is  less : 
vivid  (and  in  the  chronic  form  usually  fades)  in  the 
morning,  but  increases  in  the  evening  or  night,  and 
produces  a heat  and  itching  in  the  skin.  When  it  be- 
comes very  faint  in  colour  for  several  days,  the  sto- 
mach is  disordered,  and  languor,  giddiness,  and  pains 
of  the  limbs  ensue,  which  are  relieved  by  the  use  of 
the  warm  bath. 

Sea-bathing  and  the  mineral  acids  afford  much  relief 
in  the  chronic  forms  of  this  rash. 

4.  Roseola  infantilis  is  a closer  rash  occurring  in  in- 
fants during  the  irritation  of  dentition,  of  disordered 
bowels,  and  in  fevers.  It  is  very  irregular  in  its  ap- 
pearances, sometimes  continuing  only  for  a night, 
sometimes  appearing  and  disappearing  for  several  suc- 
cessive days  with  violent  disorder,  and  sometimes 
arising  in  single  patches  in  different  parts  of  the  body 
successively.  It  is  alleviated  by  the  remedies  adapted 
to  relieve  bowel  complaints,  painful  dentition  and 
other  febrile  affections  with  which  it  is  connected. 

5.  Roseola  variolosa  occurs  previously  to  the  erup- 
tion both  of  the  natural  and  inoculated  small-pox,  but 
seldom  before  the  former.  It  appears  in  the  inoculated 
disease,  on  the  second  day  of  the  eruptive  fever,  which 
is  generally  the  ninth  or  tenth  after  inoculation.  It  is 
first  seen  on  the  arms,  breast,  and  face ; and  on  the  fol- 
lowing day  it  extends  over  the  trunk,  and  extremities. 

Sometimes  it'  is  distributed  in  oblong  irregular 
patches,  sometimes  diffused  with  numerous  interstices, 
and  sometimes  it  forms  an  almost  continuous  redness 
over  the  whole  body,  being  in  some  parts  slightly  ele- 
vated. It  continues  about  three  days,  on  the  second  or 
last  of  which,  the  variolous  pustules  may  be  distin- 
guished, in  the  general  redness,  by  their  rounded  eleva- 
tion, hardness,  and  whiteness  of  their  tops. 

6.  Roseola  vaccina  appears  generally  in  a congeries 
of  dots  and  small  patches,  but  sometimes  diffuse  like 
the  former;  takes  place  on  the  ninth  or  tenth  day  after 
vaccination,  at  the  place  of  inoculation,  and  at  the 
same  time  with  the  areola  that  is  formed  round  the  ve- 
sicle, from  whence  it  spreads  irregularly  over  the  whole 
surface  of  the  body. 

It  is  usually  attended  with  a veiy  quick  pulse,  white 
tongue,  and  great  restlessness. 

7.  Roseola  miliaris  often  accompanies  an  eruption  of 
miliary  vesicles  after  fever.  It  is  sometimes  connected 
with  attacks  of  the  gout  and  of  the  febrile  rheumatism, 
accompanied  with  considerable  fever,  extreme  languor 
and  depression  of  spirits,  total  loss  of  appetite,  and  tor- 
pid bowels,  and  terminates  on  the  seventh  day  by  des- 
quamation. 

ROSEWOOD.  See  Rhodium  lignum. 


RUB 

• 

ROSEWORT.  See  Rhodiola 

ROSIN.  See  Resina. 

ROSMARI'NUS.  ( Quasi  rosa,  opvpva,  because  it 
smells  like  myrrh.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  planta 
in  the  Linnajan  system.  Class,  Diandria ; Order, 
Monognyia.  ' 

2.  The  pharmacopaeial  name  of  the  common  rose- 
mary. 

Rosmarinus  hortensis.  See  Rosmarinus  offici- 
nalis. 

Rosmarinus  officinalis.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  common  rosemary.  Rosmarinus  hortensis ; 
IAbanotis  coronaria ; Dendroliba.nus ; Rosmarinus , of 
Linnaeus.  The  leaves  and  tops  of  this  plant  have  a 
fragrant  aromatic  smell,  and  a bitterish  pungent  taste. 
Rosemary  is  reckoned  one  of  the  most  powerful  of 
those  plants  which  stimulate  and  corroborate  the 
nervous  system ; it  has  therefore  been  recommended  in 
various  affections  supposed  to  proceed  from  debility,  or 
defective  excitement  of  the  brain  and  nerves,  as  in 
certain  headaches,  deafness,  giddiness,  and  in  some 
hysterical  and  dyspeptic  symptoms.  The  officinal  pre- 
parations of  rosemary  are,  an  essential  oil  from  their 
leaves,  or  from  the  herb  in  flower,  a conserve  of  the 
flowers,  and  a spirit  formerly  called  Hungary  water, 
from  the  flowery  tops.  The  tops  are  also  used  in  the 
compound  spirit  of  Lavender,  and  soap  liniment. 

Rosmarinus  sylvestris.  See  Ledum  palustre. 

ROSTELLUM.  A little  beak.  Applied  to  that 
part  of  the  seed  which  is  pointed,  penetrates  the  earth, 
and  becomes  the  root.  See  Corculum. 

ROSTRATUS.  Rostrate.  Applied  to  the  pod  of 
the  Sinapis  alba. 

ROSTRUM.  (From  rodo , to  gnaw ; because  birds 
use  it  to  tear  their  food  with.)  1.  A beak. 

2.  The  piece  of  flesh  which  hangs  between  the  di 
vision  of  the  hare-lip  is  called  rostrum  leporinum. 

3.  Applied  in  botany  to  some  elongation  of  a seed- 
vessel,  originating  from  the  permanent  style ; as  in 
Geranium:  though  it  is  also  used  for  naked  seeds  ; as 
Scandix. 

ROTACE/E.  (From rota,  awheel.)  Thenamenf 
an  order  of  plants  in  Linnteus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural 
Method,  consisting  of  those  which  have  one  flat  wheel- 
shaped petal. 

ROTACISMUS.  The  harsh  or  asperated  vibration 
of  the  letter  r or  po,  which  is  very  common  in  the 
northern  parts  of  England. 

ROTANG.  See  Calamus  rotang. 

ROTA'TOR.  (From  roto , to  turn.)  A muscle  the 
office  of  which  is  to  wheel  about  the  thigh. 

ROTATUS.  Rotate,  or  wheel-like ; salver-shaped 
Applied  to  the  corolls,  nectary,  &c.;  as  the  nectary  of 
the  Cyssampelos , the  corolla  of  the  Borago  officinalis. 

RO'TULA.  (Diminutive  of  rota,  a wheel : so  called 
from  its  shape.)  See  Patella. 

ROTUNDUS.  See  Round. 

ROUGE.  See  Carthamiis  tinctorius. 

ROUND.  Rotundus.  Many  parts  of  animals  and 
vegetables  receive  this  trivial  name  from  their  shape  ; 
as  round  ligaments,  round  foramen,  &c.;  and  leaves, 
stems,  seeds,  &c.  as  the  seed  of  the  Pisum  Brassica,  &c. 

Round-leaved  sorrel.  See  Rumex  scutatus. 

Round  ligaments.  Ligamcnta  rotunda.  A bun- 
dle of  vessels  and  fibres  contained  in  a duplicature  of 
the  peritonaeum,  that  proceed  from  the  sides  of  the 
uterus,  through  the  abdominal  rings,  and  disappear  in 
the  pudenda. 

RUBE'DO.  (From  ruber , red.)  A diffused,  but  not 
spotted,  redness  in  any  part  of  the  skin  ; such  as  that 
which  arises  from  blushing. 

RUBEFACIENT.  ( Rubefaciens ; from  rubefacio , 
to  make  red.)  That  substance  which,  when  applied 
a certain  time  to  the  skin,  induces  a redness  without 
blistering. 

RUBELITE.  Red  tourmalin. 

RUBE'OLA.  (From  ruber , red  ; or  from  rubeo,  to 
become  red.)  Morbili.  The  measles.  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  Class  Pyrexia , and  Order  Exanthemata , 
of  Cullen;  known  by  synocha,  hoarseness,  dry  cough, 
sneezing,  drowsiness ; about  the  fourth  day,  eruption 
or  small  red  points,  discernible  by  the  touch,  which, 
after  three  days,  ends  in  mealy  desquamation.  The 
blood,  after  venajsection,  exhibits  an  inflammatory 
crust.  In  addition  to  the  symptoms  already  related,  it 
is  remarkable,  that  the  eyes  and  eyelids  always  show 
the  presence  of  this  disease,  being  somewhat  inflamed 


RUB 


RUB 


end  suffused  with  tears.  The  synoclia  continues  dur- 
ing the  whole  progress  of  the  disease.  In  systems  of 
nosology,  several  varieties  of  measles  are  mentioned, 
but  they  may  be  all  comprehended  under  two  heads ; 
the  one  attended  with  more  or  less  of  the  symptoms 
of  general  inflammation  ; the  other  accompanied  by  a 
putrid  diathesis. 

The  measles  may  prevail  at  all  seasons  of  the  year 
as  an  epidemic,  but  the  middle  of  winter  is  tjie  time 
they  are  usually  most  prevalent ; and  they  attack  per- 
sons of  all  ages,  but  children  are  most  liable  to  them. 
They  prove  most  unfavourable  to  such  as  are  of  a 
plethoric  or  scrofulous  habit.  Like  the  small-pox,  they 
never  affect  persons  but  once  in  their  life  ; their  con- 
tagion appears  to  be  of  a specific  nature.  The  eruption 
is  usually  preceded  by. a general  uneasiness,  chilliness, 
and  shivering,  pain  in  the  head,  in  grown  persons  ; 
but  in  children  a heaviness  and  soreness  in  the  throat ; 
sickness  and  vomiting,  with  other  affections,  such  as 
nappen  in  most  fevers;  but  the  chief  characteristic 
symptoms  are,  a . heaviness  about  the  eyes,  with 
swelling,  inflammation,  and  a defluxion  of  sharp  tears, 
and  great  acuteness  of  sensation,  so  that  they  cannot 
bear  the  light  without  pain,  together  with  a discharge 
of  such  serous  humour  from  the  nostrils,  which  pro- 
duce sneezing.  The  heat  and  other  febrile  symptoms, 
increase  very  rapidly  ; to  which  succeeds  a frequent 
and  dry  cough,  a stuffing,  great  oppression,  and  often- 
times retching  to  vomit,  with  violent  pains  in  the  loins, 
and  sometimes  a looseness  ; at  other  limes  there  is 
great  sweating,  the  tongue  foul  and  white,  the  thirst 
very  great,  and,  in  general,  the  fever  runs  much  higher 
than  in  the  milder  sort  of  the  regular  small-pox.  The 
eruptions  appear  about  the  fourth  or  fifth  day,  and 
sometimes  about  the  end  of  the  third.  On  the  third  or 
fourth  day  from  their  first  appearance,  the  redness  di- 
minishes, the  spots,  or  very  small  papulae,  dry  up,  the 
cuticle  peels  off,  and  is  replaced  by  a new  one.  The 
symptoms  do  not  go  off  on  the' eruption,  as  in  the  small- 
pox, except  the  vomiting;  the  cough  and  headache 
continue,  with  the  weakness  and  defluxion  on  the 
eyes,  and  a considerable  degree  of  fever.  On  the 
ninth  or  eleventh  day,  no  trace  of  redness  is  to  be 
found,  but  the  skin  assumes  its  wonted  appearance ; 
yet,  without  there  have  been  some  considerable  eva- 
cuations either  by  the  skin,  or  by  vomiting,  the  patient 
will  hardly  recover  strength,  but  the  cough  will  con- 
tinue, the  fever  return  with  new  violence,  and  bring 
on  great  distress  and  danger. 

In  the  more  alarming  cases,  spasms  of  the  limbs, 
subsultus,  tendinum,  delirium,  or  what  more  frequently 
happens,  coma,  supervene.  This  last  symptom  so  fre- 
quently attends  the  eruptive  fever  of  measles,  that  by 
some  practitioners  it  is  regarded  as  one  of  its  diag- 
nostics. 

In  measles,  as  in  other  febrile  diseases,  the  symp- 
toms generally  suffer  some  remission  towards  the 
morning,  returning  however  towards  the  evening  with 
increased  severity. 

The  measles,  even  when  violent,  are  not  usually 
attended  with  a putrid  tendency ; but  it  sometimes 
happens,  that  such  a disposition  prevails  both  in  the 
course  of  the  disease  and  at  its  termination.  In  such 
cases,  petechias  are  to  be  observed  interspersed  among 
the  eruptions,  and  these  last  become  livid,  or  assume 
almost  a black  colour.  Hemorrhages  break  out  from 
different  parts  of  the  body,  the  pulse  becomes  frequent, 
feeble,  and  perhaps  irregular,  universal  debility  en- 
sues, and  the  patient  is  destroyed. 

In  those  cases  where  there  is  much  fever,  with  great 
difficulty  of  breathing,  and  other  symptoms  of  pneu- 
monic inflammation,  or  where  there  is  great  debility, 
.with  a tendency  to  putrescency,  there  will  always  be 
considerable  danger  ; but  the  consequences  attendant 
on  the  measles  are  in  general  more  to  be  dreaded  than 
the  immediate  disease  ; for  although  a person  may  get 
through  it,  and  appear  for  a time  to  be  recovered,  still 
hectic  symptoms  and  pulmonary  consumption  shall 
afterward  arise,  and  destroy  him,  or  an  ophthalmia 
shall  ensue. 

Measles,  as  well  as  smallpox,  not  unfrequently  call 
into  action  a disposition  to  scrofula,  Where  such  hap- 
pens to  exist  in  the  habit.  Another  bad  consequence 
of  the  measles  is,  that  the  bowels  are  often  left  by  them 
in  a very  weak  state  ; a chronic  diarrhoea  remaining, 
which  has  sometimes  proved  fatal.  Dropsy  has  also 
been  known  as  a consequence  of  measles. 

252 


The  morbid  appearances  to  be  observed  on  dissec- 
tions of  those  who  die  of  measles  are  pretty  much 
confined  to  the  lungs  and  intestines : the  former  of 
which  always  show  strong  marks  of  inflammation,  and 
sometimes  a tendency  to  sphacelus.  Where  the  pa- 
tient dies  under  the  eruption,  the  trachea  and  larger 
branches  of  the  bronchia,  as  in  the  small-pox,  are  often 
covered  with  it,  which  may  account  for  the  increase  ol 
the  cough  after  the  appearance  of  the  erujrtion. 

In  the  treatment  of  this  disorder,  as  it  usually  ap- 
pears, the  object  is  to  moderate  the  accompanying 
synocha  fever,  and  attend  to  the  state  of  certain  or- 
gans, particularly  the  lungs  and  the  bowels.  When 
there  are  no  urgent  local  symptoms,  it  will  be  com- 
monly sufficient  to  pursue  the  general  antiphlogistic 
plan,  (avoiding,  however,  too  free  or  sudden  exposure 
to  cold,)  keeping  the  bowels  open,  and  encouraging 
diaphoresis  by  mild  antimonials,  Sec.  Sometimes, 
however,  in  plethoric  habits,  especially  where  the  lungs 
are  weak,  it  will  be  proper  to  begin  by  a moderate 
abstraction  of  blood.  Where  the  eruption  has  been 
imprudently  checked,  much  distress  usually  follows, 
and  it  will  be  advisable  to  endeavour  to  bring  it  out 
again  by  the  warm  bath,  with  other  means  of  increas- 
ing the  action  of  the  cutaneous  vessels.  Should  an 
inflammatory  determination  of  the  lungs  occur,  more 
active  evacuations  must  be  practised,  as  explained 
under  the  bead  of  Pneumonia.  The  cough  may  be  pal- 
liated by  opium,  joined  with  expectorants,  demulcents, 
&c. : and  an  occasional  emetic  will  be  proper,  when 
there  is  much  wheezing.  Where  diarrhosa  takes 
place,  it  is  better  not  to  attempt  to  suppress  it  at  once ; 
butif  troublesome,  moderate  it  by  small  doses  of  opium, 
assisted  perhaps  by  astringents.  At  the  decline  of  the 
disorder,  much  attention  is  often  required  to  prevent 
phthisis  pulmonalis  supervening.  Should  the  disorder 
ever  put  on  a putrid  character,  the  general  plan  pointed 
out  under  Typhus  must  be  pursued. 

RUBIA.  (From  ruber , red:  so  called  from  its  red 
roots.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
nsean  system.  Class,  Tetrandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  madder  plant, 
Rubia  tinclorum. 

Rubia  tinctorum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
madder  plant.  Erythrodamim ; Rubia  major  ; Radix 
rubra.  Dyers’  madder.  Rubia— foliis  annuls,  caule 
aculeato , of  Linnaeus.  The  roots  of  this  plant  have  a 
bitterish,  somewhat  austere  taste,  and  a slight  smell, 
not  of  the  agreeable  kind.  It  was  formerly  considered 
as  a deobstruent,  detergent,  and  diuretic,  but  it  is  now 
very  seldom  used. 

RUBIGO.  ( Rubigo , inis.  f. ; d colore  rubro,  from 
its  red  colour.)  Rust. 

Rubigo  cupri.  See  Verdigris. 

Rubigo  ferri.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

Rubi'nus.  (From  ruber , red:  so  named  from  its 
colour.)  A carbuncle.  See  Anthrax. 

Rubinus  verus.  See  Anthrax. 

RUBULI.  (From  rubus , a blackberry  or  raspberry.) 
The  specific  name  in  Good’s  Nosology  of  the  yaws. 

RUBUS.  (From  rafter,  red:  so  called  from  its  red 
fruit.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean 
system.  Class,  Icosandria ; Order,  Polygynia. 

Rubus  arcticus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
shrubby  strawberry.  Rubus— foliis  alternatis , caule 
inerrni  uniflora.  The  berries,  Baccce  norlandicce , are 
recommended  by  Linnceus  as  possessing  antiseptic,  re- 
frigerant, and  antiscorbutic  qualities. 

Rubus  cxisius.  The  systematic  name  of  the  dew- 
berry plant,  the  fruit  of  which  resembles  the  blackberry 
in  appearance  and  qualities. 

Rubus  cham.emorus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
cloudberry-tree.  Chamannorus;  Chanuerubus  foliis  ribis 
Ang lica:;  Rubus  palustris  humilis;  Vaccinium  Eaucas- 
trense ; R ubus  alp  in  us  humilis  Anglicus.  Cloudberries 
and  knotberries.  The  ripe  fruit  of  this  plant,  Rubus 
— foliis  simplieibus  lobatis,  caule  interno  unifioro , of 
Linnsus,  is  prepared  into  a jam  ; and  is  recommended 
to  allay  thirst,  &c.  in  fevers,  phthisical  diseases,  h®- 
moptysis,  &c.  As  an  antiscorbutic,  it  is  said  to  excel 
the  scurvy-grass  and  other  vegetables  of  that  tribe  in 
common  use. 

Rubus  fruticosus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  bramble,  which  affords  blackberries.  The 
beriies  are  eaten  in  abundance  by  children,  and  are 
wholesome  and  gently  aperient.  Too  large  quantities, 
how'ever,  when  the  stomach  is  weak,  produce  vomit 


RUS 


RUM 


Ing  and  great  distention  of  the  belly,  from  flatus.  See 
Fruits , summer. 

Rubus  idjEUs.  The  systematic  name  of  the  rasp- 
berry. Batinon;  Moron.  Rubus — foliis  quinato-pin- 
natis  ternatisque,  caide  aculeato,  petiolis  canaliculatis, 
of  Linnaeus.  The  fruit  of  this  plant  has  a pleasant 
sweet  taste,  accompanied  with  a peculiar  grateful  fla- 
vour, on  account  of  which  it  is  chiefly  valued;  Its 
virtues  consist  in  allaying  heat  and  thirst,  and  promot- 
ing the  natural  excretions.  A grateful  syrup  prepared 
from  the  juice,  is  directed  for  officinal  use. 

[Rubus  triviai.is.  See  Blackberry.  A.] 

[Rubus  villosus.  See  Blackberry.  A.] 

RUBY.  See  Sapphire. 

RU'CTUS.  An  eructation. 

RUE.  See  Rata  graveolens. 

Rue , goats.  See  Galega. 

Rufi  pilule.  Rufus’s  pills.  A compound  very 
similar  to  the  alo^tic  pills  with  myrrh.  See  Pilula 
aloes  cum  myrrha. 

RUFUS,  the  Ephesian,  a physician  and  anatomist 
of  considerable  eminence  in  the  reign  of  Trajan,  es- 
teemed by  Galen  one  of  the  most  able  of  his  prede- 
cessors. He  traced  the  origin  of  the  nerves  in  the 
brain  by  dissecting  brutes,  and  considered  some  of  them 
as  contributing  to  motion,  others  to  sensation.  He  even 
observed  the  capsule  of  the  crystalline  lens  in  the  eye. 
He  considered  the  heart  as  the  seat  of  life,  and  of  the 
animal  heat,  and  as  the  origin  of  the  pulse,  which  he 
ascribed  to  the  spirit  of  its  left  ventricle  and  of  the 
arteries.  There  is  a very  respectable  treatise  by  him 
on  the  Diseases  of  the  Urinary  Organs,  and  the  Method 
of  curing  them.  He  also  wrote  a good  work  on  Pur- 
gative Medicines;  and  a little  treatise  on  the  Names 
given  by  the  Greeks  to  the  different  Parts  of  the  Body. 
Galen  affirms  also,  that  Rufus  was  the  author  of  an 
Essay  on  the  Materia  Medica,  in  verse ; and  Suidas 
mentions  others  on  the  Atra  bilis,  &c c.,  but  these  are 
all  lost. 

R U G O S U S.  Rugged.  A term  applied  to  a 
leaf,  when  the  veins  are  tighter  than  the  surface  be- 
tween them,  causing  the  latter  to  swell  into  little  ine- 
qualities, as  the  various  species  of  sage.  The  seeds  of 
the  Lithospernrum  arvense  are  rugose. 

RUM.  A spirituous  liquor,  well  known,  the  pro- 
duce of  the  sugar-cane. 

RU'MEX.  (. Rumex , ids.  fn. ; a sort  of  pike,  spear,  or 
halberd,  which  the  shape  of  the  leaves  in  various  spe- 
cies much  resembles.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Hexandria  ; Order, 
Trigynia.  The  dock. 

Rumex  acetosa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  sorrel.  Acetosa;  Acetosa  vulg aris ; Acetosa 
pratensis ; Acetosa  arvensis.  Sorrel;  sour-dock.  Ru- 
mex— foliis  oblongis  sagittatis , Jloribus  diasciis,  of 
Linnams.  The  leaves  of  this  plant  are  sour,  but  not 
the  root,  which  is  bitter.  Jt  grows  in  the  meadows  and 
common  fields. 

Rumex  acutus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  sharp- 
pointed  wild-dock.  Oxijlapathum  ; Lapa.thum.  Ru- 
mex—floribus  hermaphroditis ; valvulis  dentatis  gra- 
niferis , foliis  corduto  oblongis  acuminatis,  of  Lin- 
nceus.  The  decoction  of  the  root  of  this  plant  is  used 
in  Germany  to  cure  the  itch;  and  it  appears  to  have 
been  used  in  the  time  of  Dioscorides,  in  the  cure  of 
leprous  and  impetiginous  affections,  both  alone  and 
boiled  with  vinegar. 

Rumex  alpinus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
which  affords  the  monk’s  rhubarb.  See  Rumex  pa- 
tientia. 

Rumex  aquaticus.  See  Rumex  hydrolapnthum. 

[“Rumex  britannica.  The  common  American 
water-dock,  which  grows  in  wet,  boggy  soils,  and 
upon  the  margin  of  ditches,  is  a moderately  stimulating 
and  astringent  plant.  It  is  esteemed  by  many  coun- 
try practitioners  as  a local  application  to  indolent  and 
ill-conditioned  ulcers.  A strong  decoction  of  the  root  is 
usually  employed  as  a wash  in  these  cases.  Some- 
times an  ointment,  formed  by  simmering  the  root  in 
hog’s  lard,  is  beneficially  applied  in  herpes.  The  use 
of  this  plant,  according  to  Golden,  was  learned  from  the 
Indians.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Rumex  crispus.  The  systematic  name  of  the  crisp- 
leaved dock. 

Rumex  hydrolapathum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  water-dock.  Hydrolapathum;  Rumex  aquaticus ; 
Hcrba  Britannica ; Lapathum  aquaticum.  The  wa- 


ter-dock. Rumex— Jloribus  hermaphroditis , valvulis 
integris  graniferis , foliis  lanceolatis,  of  Linnreus. 
The  leaves  of  this  plant  manifest  considerable  acidity, 
and  are  said  to  possess  a laxative  quality.  The  root  is 
strongly  adstringent,  and  has  been  much  employed, 
both  externally  and  internally,  for  the  cure  of  some 
diseases  of  the  skin,  as  scurvy,  lepra,  lichen,  &c.  The 
root  powdered  is  said  to  be  an  excellent  dentifrice. 

[“  Rumex  obtusifolius.  This  species  of  dock  is  a 
foreign  plant,  naturalized  as  a weed  in  the  cultivated 
grounds  in  this  country.  The  root  is  bitterish  and  as- 
tringent. A decoction,  taken  internally,  is  laxative 
Externally  it  is  applied  for  the  cure  of  ulcers  and  cuta- 
neous diseases,  and  sometimes  with  very  good  effect. 
The  Rumex  crispus , or  curled  dock , another  important 
weed,  resembles  this  in  its  qualities,  and,  in  the  form 
of  ointment  or  decoction,  is  found  to  cure  mild  cases  of 
psora  and  other  eruptions.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Rumex  patientia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
garden  patience.  Rliabarbarum  monachorum ; Hip- 
po lapathum;  Patientia.  Monk’s  rhubarb.  The  root 
of  this  plant,  and  thr.J  of  the  Rumex  alpinus , accord- 
ing to  Professor  Murray,  is  supposed  to  possess  the 
virtues  of  rhubarb,  but  in  an  inferior  degree.  It  is  ob- 
viously more  adstringent  than  rhubarb,  but  comes  very 
far  short  of  its  purgative  virtue. 

Rumex  sanguineus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
bloody  dock,  the  root  of  which  has  an  austere  and  ad- 
stringent taste,  and  is  sometimes  given  by  the  vulgar 
in  the  cure  of  dysentery. 

Rumex  scutatus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
French  sorrel,  sometimes  called  acetosa  rutund'ifolia , 
in  the  shops.  Acetosa  romana;  Acetosa  rotundifolia 
hortensis.  Roman,  or  garden  sorrel.  Rumex — foliis 
cordato-hastatis , ramis  diver gentibus,  Jloribus  her- 
maphroditis, of  Linnseus.  It  is  common  in  our  gar- 
dens, and  in  many  places  is  known  by  the  culinary 
name  of  Green-sauce.  Its  virtues  are  similar  to  those 
of  common  sorrel.  See  Rumex  acetosa. 

RUNCINATUS.  Runcinate:  applied  to  leaves 
which  are  shaped  like  the  tooth  of  a lion:  that  is,  cut 
into  several  transverse,  acute  segments,  pointing  back- 
wards ; as  in  Leoutodon  taraxacum , called  from  the 
shape  of  its  leaf,  dens  de  iion,  and  hence  Dandelion. 

Rupellensis  sal.  (From  Rupella , Rochella,  where 
it  was  first  made.)  Rochelle  salt.  See  Soda  tartari- 
zata. 

RUPTU'RA.  See  Hernia. 

RUPTURE.  See  Hernia. 

RUPTURE- WORT.  See  Herniaria. 

RU'SCUS.  {A  russo  colore , from  the  carnation  co- 
lour of  its  berries.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linna;an  system.  Class,  Dioecia;  Order,  Syn- 
genesia. 

2.  Thepharmacopoeial  name  of  the  butcher’s  broom. 
Ruscus  aculealus. 

Ruscus  aculeatus.  The  systematic  name  of 
butcher’s  broom,  or  knee  holly.  Bruscus ; Oxymyr- 
rhine ; Oxymyr  sine  ; Myrtacantha ; Myacantlia  ; Sco- 
pa  regia.  Wild  myrtle.  A small  evergreen  shrub, 
the  Rucus  foliis  supra  Jloriferis  nudis  of  Linnteus. 
It  grows  in  woods  and  thickets  in  this  country.  The 
root,  which  is  somewhat  thick,  knotty,  and  furnished 
with  long  fibres,  externally  brown,  internally  white, 
and  of  a bitterish  taste,  has  been  recommended  as  an 
aperient  and  diuretic  in  dropsies, urinary  obstructions, 
and  nephritic  cases.  It  is  seldom  used  in  this  country. 
See  Ruscus. 

Ruscus  hypoglossum.  The  systematic  name  of 
he  uvularia.  This  plant  was  formerly  used  against 
relaxation  of  the  uvula,  but  isnowiaid  aside  for  more 
adstringent  remedies. 

RUSH.  See  Arundo. 

[“‘RUSH,  Benjamin,  M.  D.,  was  born  in  December, 
1745,  near  the  city  of  Philadelphia,  in  Pennsylvania, 
and  he  died  in  that  city  in  April,  1813,  aged  68  years. 
Dr.  Rush  was  a man  of  small  stature,  but  of  a strong 
and  vigorous  mind.  During  the  eventful  period  of  his 
life,  he  occupied  the  distinguished  consideration  of  his 
countrymen,  as  one  of  the  patriots  of  the  American  Re- 
volution, as  an  able  physician,  as  a professor  in  the  me- 
dical school  of  Philadelphia,  as  a philanthropist,  and  as 
an  exemplary  Christian.  His  writings,  on  subjects  con- 
nected with  his  professional  pursuits,  are  numerous, 
and  worthy  the  attention  of  members  of  the  profession. 
Such  as  were  printed  during  his  life-time,  treat  on  the 
following  subjects,  viz. “ An  Inquiry  into  the  Natu- 


ral  History  of  Medicine  among  the  Indians  of  North 
America,  and  a comparative  View  of  their  Diseases 
and  Remedies,  with  those  of  civilized  Nations.” — “ An 
Account  of  the  Climate  of  Pennsylvania,  and  its  Influ- 
ence upon  the  Human  Body.” — “ An  Account  of  the 
Bilious  Remitting  Fever,  as  it  appeared  in  Philadelphia 
in  the  Summer  and  Autumn  o;  J /80.”— An  Account 
of  the  Scarlatina  Anginosa,  as  it  appeared  in  Phila- 
delphia in  1783  and  1784.”--“  An  Inquiry  into  the 
Cause  and  Cure  of  the  Cholera  Infantum.” — “ Obsert 
vations  on  the  Cynanche  Trachealis.” — “ An  Accoun- 
of  the  Efficacy  of  Blisters  and  Bleeding  in  the  Cure  of 
obstinate  Intermitting  Fevers.” — “ An  Account  of  the 
Disease  occasioned  by  drinking  Cold  Water  in  Warm 
Weather,  and  the  Method  of  curing  it.” — “ An  Account 
of  the  Efficacy  of  common  Salt  in  the  cure  of  Hamiop- 
tysis.” — “Thoughts  on  the  Cause  and  Cure  of  Pul- 
monary Consumption.” — “Observations  upon  Worms 
in  the  alimentary  Canal,  and  upon  anthelmintic  Medi- 
cines.”— “An  Account  of  the  external  use  of  Arsenic 
in  the  cure  of  Cancers.” — “ Observations  on  the  Te- 
tanus.”— “ The  Result  of  Observations  made  upon  the 
Diseases  which  occurred  in  the*Military  Hospitals  of 
the  United  States,  during  the  Revolutionary  War.” — 
“ An  Account  of  the  Influence  of  military  and  political 
Events  of  the  American  Revolution  upon  the  Human 
Body.” — “ An  Inquiry  into  the  Relations  of  Tastes  and 
Aliments  on  each  other,  and  upon  the  Influence  of  this 
Relation  upon  Health  and  Pleasure.”— “ The  new  Meth- 
od of  inoculating  for  the  Smallpox.” — “ An  Inquiry  into 
the  Effects  of  ardent  Spirits  upon  the  Human  Mind  and 
Body,  with  an  Account  of  the  Means  of  preventing, 
and  the  Remedies  for  curing  them.” — “Observations  on 
the  Duties  of  Physicians,  and  the  Methods  of  improving 
Medicines  ; accommodated  to  the  present  State  of  So- 
ciety and  Manners  in  the  United  States.” — “An  In- 
quiry into  the  Causes  and  Cure  of  sore  Legs.” — “An 
Account  of  the  State  of  the  Body  and  Mind  in  Old  Age, 
with  Observations  on  its  Diseases  and  their  Reme- 
dies.”— “An  Inquiry  into  the  Influence  of  Physical 
Causes  upon  the  Moral  Faculty.”—1 11  Observations  upon 
tne  Cause  and  Cure  of  Pulmonary  Consumption.”— 
“ Observations  upon  the  Symptoms  and  Cure  of  Drop- 
sies.”—“ Inquiry  into  the  Cause  and  Cure  of  Gout.”— 
“Observations  'on  the  Nature  and  Cure  of  Hydro- 
phobia.”—11 An  Account  of  the  Measles  as  they  ap- 
peared in  Philadelphia  in  the  Spring  of  1789.”— “An 
Account  of  the  Influenza,  as  it  appeared  in  Philadel- 
phia in  the  years  17S0  and  1791.”— “An  Inquiry  into  the 
Cause  of  Animal  Life.”— “ Outlines  of  a Theory  of 
Fever/’—u  An  Account  of  the  Bilious  Yellow  Fever, 
as  it  appeared  in  Philadelphia  in  1793,  and  of  each  suc- 
cessive year  till  1805.”—“  An  Inquiry  into  the  various 
Sources  of  the  usual  Forms  of  the  Summer  and  Au- 
tumnal Diseases  in  the  United  States,  and  the  Means 
of  preventing  them.”— “ Facts  intended  to  prove  the 
Yellow  Fever  not  contagious.”— “ Defence  of  Blood- 
letting, as  a Remedy  in  certain  Diseases.— “ An  Inquiry 
into  the  comparative  States  of  Medicine  in  Philadel- 
phia, between  the  years  1760  and  1766  and  1805.” — 
“ A Volume  of  Essays : Literary,  Moral,  and  Philo- 
sophical, in  which  the  following  Subjects  are  dis- 
cussed:— A Plan  for  establishing  Public  Schools  in 
Philadelphia,  and  for  conducting  Education  agreeably 
to  a Republican  Form  of  Government.  Addressed  to 
the  Legislature  and  Citizens  of  Pennsylvania,  in  the 
year  1786.— Of  the  Mode  of  Education  proper  in  a Re- 
public.—Observations  upon  the  Study  of  the  Latin  and 
Greek  Languages,  as  a Branch  of  liberal  Education  ; 
with  Hints  of  a Plan  of  liberal  Instruction  without 
them,  accommodated  to  the  present  State  of  Society, 
Manners,  and  Government,  in  the  United  States.— 
Thoughts  upon  the  Amusements  and  Punishments 
which  are  proper  for  Schools— Thoughts  upon  Female 
Education,  accommodated  to  the  present  State  of  So- 
ciety, Manners,  and  Government,  in  the  United  States 
of  America.— A Defence  of  the  Bible  as  a School-book. — 
An  Address  to  the  Ministers  of  the  Gospel  of  every  de- 
nomination in  the  United  States,  upon  Subjects  interest- 
ing to  Morals.— An  Inquiry  into  the  Consistency  of  the 
Punishment  of  Murder  by  Death,  with  Reason  and 
Revelation.— A Plan  of  a Peace  Office  for  the  United 
States.— Information  to  Europeans  who  are  disposed  to 
emigrate  to  the  United  States  of  America.—  An  Account 
of  the  Progress  of  Population,  Agriculture,  Manners, 
and  Government,  in  Pennsylvania.— An  Account  of 
the  Maimers  of  the  German  Inhabitants  of  Pennsyl- 
254 


vania.— Thoughts  on  Common  Sense— An  Account  of 
the  Vices  peculiar  to  the  Indians  of  North  America. — 
Observations  upon  the  Influence  of  the  Habitual  Use  of 
Tobacco,  upon  Health,  Morals,  and  Property. — An  Ac- 
count of  the  Sugar  Maple-tree  of  the  United  States. — An 
Account  of  the  Life  and  Death  of  Edward  Drinker,  who 
died  on  the  17th  of  November,  1782,  in  the  one  hundred 
and  third  year  of  his  age. — Remarkable  Circumstances 
in  the  Constitution  and  Life  of  Aim  Woods,  an  old 
Woman  of  ninety-six  years  of  age.— Biographical 
Anecdotes  of  Benjamin  Lay. — Biographical  Anec- 
dotes of  Anthony  Benezet. — Paradise  of  Negro  Slaves, 
a Dream.— Eulogium  upon  Dr.  William  Cullen.— Eu- 
logium  upon  David  Rittenhouse.” — “A  Volume  of 
Lectures,”  most  of  which  were  introductory  to  his 
annual  Course  of  Lectures  on  the  Institutes  and  Prac- 
tice of  Medicine. — “Medical  Inquiries  and  Observa- 
tions on  the  Diseases  of  the  Mind.” — Tkach,  Med. 
Biog.  A.] 

Rash-nut.  See  Cypcrus  esculentus. 

Rush , sweet.  See  Andropogon  schcenanthus , and 
Acorus  calamy. 

RUSSELL,  Alexander,  was  a native  of  Edinburgh,, 
where  he  received  his  medical  education,  and  after- 
ward became  physician  to  the  English  factory  at 
Aleppo,  rvhere  he  resided  several  years.  He  soon  ob- 
tained a proud  pre-eminence  above  all  the  practitioners 
there,  and  was  consulted  by  persons  of  every  descrip- 
tion. The  pacha  particularly  distinguished  him  by  his 
friendship,  and  sought  his  advice  on  every  act  of  im- 
portance. In  1755,  he  published  his  “ Natural  History 
of  Aleppo,”  a valuable  and  interesting  work,  contain- 
ing especially  some  important  observations  relative 
to  the  Plague.  On  his  return  to  England  four  years 
after,  he  settled  in  London,  and  was  elected  physician 
to  St.  Thomas’s  hospital,  which  office  he  retained  till 
his  death  in  1770.  He  presented  several  valuable  com- 
munications to  the  Royal  Society,  as  also  to  the  Medi- 
cal Society. 

RUSSELL,  Patrick,  was  brother  of  the  preceding, 
and  his  successor  as  physician  to  the  English  factory 
at  Aleppo.  He  published  a copious  treatise  on  the 
Plague,  having  had  ample  opportunities  of  treating  that 
disease  during  1760,  and  the  two  follow’ing  years.  In 
this  work  he  has  fully  discussed  the  important  subject 
of  Quarantine,  Lazarettoes,  and  the  Police  to  be 
adopted  in  times  of  Pestilence.  He  likewise  gave  to 
the  public  a new  edition  of  his  brother’s  work  oa  a 
very  enlarged  scale. 

Russia  ashes.  The  impure  potassa,  as  imported 
from  Russia. 

Rust.  A carbonate  of  iron. 

RU'TA.  (From  puw,  to  preserve,  because  it  pre- 
serves health.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linncean  system.  Class,  Decandria ; Order,  Mo- 
no gyma. 

2.  The  pharmacopteial  name  of  the  common  rue. 

See  Ruta  graveolens. 

Ruta  graveolens.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  rue.  Ruta — foliis  decompositis,  Jloribus  la- 
ter alibus  quadrifidis , of  Linnaeus.  Rue  lias  a strong 
ungrateful  smell,  and  a bitter,  hot,  penetrating  taste ; 
the  leaves  are  so  acrid,  that  by  much  handling  they 
have  been  known  to  irritate  and  inflame  the  skin  ; and 
the  plant,  in  its  natural  or  uncultivated  state,  is  said  to 
possess  these  sensible  qualities  still  more  powerfully. 
The  imaginary  quality  of  the  rue,  in  resisting  and  ex- 
pelling contagion,  is  now  disregarded.  It  is  doubtless  a 
powerful  stimulant,  and  is  considered,  like  other  me- 
dicines of  the  foetid  kind,  as  possessing  attenuating,  de- 
obstruent, and  antispasmodic  powers.  In  the  former 
London  Pharmacopoeia  it  was  directed  in  the  form  of 
an  extract ; and  was  also  an  ingredient  in  the  pulvis  e 
myrrha  comp  , but  these  are  now  omitted.  The  dose 
of  the  leaves  is  from  fifteen  grains  to  two  scruples. 

Ruta  muraria.  See  Asplenium  ruta  muraria. 

RUTIDOSIS.  A corrugation  and  subsiding  of  the 
cornea  of  the  eye.  The  species  are, 

1.  Rutidosis,  from  a wound  or  puncture  penetrating 
the  cornea. 

2.  Rutidosis , from  a fistula  penetrating  the  cornea. 

3.  Rutidosis , from  a deficiency  of  the  aqueous  hu- 
mour, which  happens  from  old  age,  fevers,  great  and 
continued  evacuations,  and  in  extreme  dryness  of  the 
air.  # 

4.  Rutidosis , of  dead  persons,  when  the  aqueous 
humour  exhales  through  the  cornea,  and  no  fresh  hu- 


SAC 


SAC 


mour  is  secreted  ; so  that  the  cornea  becomes  obscure 
and  collapsed:  this  is  a most  certain  sign  of  death. 

RUTILE.  An  ore  of  titanium. 

Rui  ula.  (From  ruta,  rue.)  A small  species  of 
rue. 

RUYSCH,  Frederick,  was  born  at  the  Hague,  in 
1638.  After  going  through  the  preliminary  studies  with 
great  zeal,  he  graduated  at  Leyden  in  1664,  and  then 
settled  in  his  native  city.  In  the  following  year  he 
published  his  treatise  on  the  lacteal  and  lymphatic 
vessels ; in  consequence  of  which  he  Was  invited  to 
the  chair  of  anatomy  at  Amsterdam.  From  that  pe- 
riod his  attention  was  chiefly  devoted  to  anatomical 
researches,  both  human  and  comparative;  and  he  con- 
tributed materially  to  the  improvement  of  the  art  of  in- 
jecting, for  the  purpose  of  demonstrating  minute  struc- 
ture, and  preserving  the  natural  appearance  of  parts. 
His  museum  became  ultimately  the  most  magnificent 
that  any  private  individual  had  ever  accumulated; 
and  being  at  length  purchased  by  the  czar  Peter  for 
thirty  thousand  florins,  he  immediately  set  about  a new 
collection.  He  appears  not  to  have  paid  sufficient  at- 
tention to  inform  himself  of  the  writings  of  others, 
whence  he  sometimes  arrogated  to  himself  what  was 


really  before  known,  which  led  him  into  several  con- 
troversies ; but  his  indefatigable  researches  in  anatomy 
were  certainly  rewarded  with  many  discoveries.  In 
1685,  he  was  appointed  professor  of  physic,  and  re- 
ceived subsequently  several  marks  of  distinction,  as 
well  in  his  own  as  from  foreign  countries.  In  1728,  he 
had  the  misfortune  to  break  his  thigh  by  a fall  in  his 
chamber,  and  the  remainder  of  Ins  life,  tor  about  three 
years,  was  chiefly  occupied  in  proceeding  with  his  new 
museum,  in  which  his  youngest  daughter  assisted  him. 
Besides  his  controversial  tracts,  he  published  several 
other  works,  chiefly  anatomical  ; “ Observationum 
Anat.  Chirtlrg.  Centuria ;”  twelve  essays  under  the 
title  of  “ Thesaurus  Anatomicus,”  at  different  periods, 
tire  last  containing  Remarks  on  the  Anatomy  of  Vege- 
tables ; a “ Thesaurus  Animalium,”  with  plates  ; 
three  decades  of  “ Adversaria  Anat.  Chirurg.  Me- 
dica,”  &c. 

Ruyschiana  tunica.  The  internal  surface  of  the 
choroid  membrane  of  the  human  eye,  which  this  cele- 
brated anatomist  imagined  was  a distinct  lamina  from 
the  external  surface. 

Ryas.  See  Rhoeas. 

RYE.  See  Secale  cereale. 


s 


A.  The  contraction  of  secundum  artem. 

S , or  ss.  Immediately  following  any  quantity, 
imports  semis,  or  half. 

Sabadilla.  See  Cevadilla. 

SABI  NA.  Named  from  the  Sabines,  whose  priests 
used  it  in  their  religious  ceremonies.  See  Juniperus 
sabina. 

SABULOUS.  ( Sabulosis ; f rom  sabulum,  fine  gravel ) 
Gritty,  sandy.  Applied  to  the  calcareous  matter  in 
urine. 

SABU'RRA.  Dirt,  sordes,  filth.  Foulness  of  the 
stomach,  of  which  authors  mention  several  kinds,  as 
the  acid,  the  bitter,  the  empyreumatic,  the  insipid,  the 
putrid. 

SACCATED.  ( Saccatus , encysted.)  Encysted  or 
contained  in  a bay-like  membrane,  applied  to  tumours, 
&c.  See  Ascites  saccatus. 

Sacchari  acidum.  See  Music  acid. 

SA'CCHARUM.  (2ax%«pov,  from  sachar , Ara- 
bian.) 1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
jupan  system.  Class,  Triandria ; Order,  Digynia. 
The  sugar-cane. 

2.  The  sweet  substance  called  sugar.  See  Saccha- 
rum officinale. 

Saccharum  acernum.  See  Acer  saccharinum. 

Saccharum  album.  Refined  sugar. 

Saccharum  aluminis.  Alum  mixed  with  dragon’s 
blood  and  dried. 

Saccharum  canadense.  See  Acer  pseudo  platanus. 

Saccharum  candidum.  Sugar-candy. 

Saccharum  non  purificatum.  Brown  sugar. 

Saccharum  officinale.  ( Arundo  saccharifera  of 
Sloane.  The  systematic  name  of  the  cane  from  which 
sugar  is  obtained.  Suchar ; Succhar  ; Sutter;  Zu- 
char ; Zucaro ; Zozar  of  the  Arabians.  2a/c%ap  r\ 
craicxapov , of  the  Greeks.)  Sugar  is  prepared  in  the 
West  and  East  Indies  from  the  expressed  juice  of  this 
plant  boiled  with  the  addition  of  quicklime  or  common 
vegetable  alkali.  It  may  be  extracted  also  from  a 
number  of  plants,  as  the  maple,  birch,  wheat,  corn, 
beet-root,  skirret,  parsnips,  and  dried  grapes,  &c.  by 
digesting  in  alkohol.  The  alkohol  dissolves  the  sugar, 
and  leaves  the  extractive  matter  untouched,  which 
falls  to  the  bottom.  It  may  be  taken  into  the  stomach 
in  very  large  quantities,  without  producing  any  bad 
consequences,  although  proofs  are  not  wanting  of  its 
mischievous  effects,  by  relaxing  the  stomach,  and  thus 
inducing  disease.  It  is  much  used  in  pharmacy,  as  it 
forms  the  basis  of  syrups,  lozenges,  and  other  prepara- 
tions. It  is  very  useful  as  a medicine,  although  it 
cannot  be  considered  to  possess  much  power,  to  favour 
the  solution  or  suspension  of  resins,  oils,  &c.  in  water, 
and  is  given  as  a purgative  for  infants.  Dr.  Cullen 
classes  it  with  the  attenuantia,  and  Bergius  states  it  to 


be  saponacea,  edulcorans,  relaxans,  pectoralis,  vulne- 
raria,  antiseptica,  nutriens.  In  catarrhal  affections, 
both  sugar  and  honey  are  frequently  employed : it  has 
also  been  advantageously  used  in  calculous  complaints ; 
and  from  its  known  power  in  preserving  animal  and 
vegetable  substances  from  putrefaction,  it  has  been 
given  with  a view  to  its  antiseptic  effects.  Sugar 
candy,  by  dissolving  slowly  in  the  mouth,  is  well  suited 
to  relieve  tickling  coughs  and  hoarseness.  Sugar  is 
every  where  the  basis  of  that  which  is  called  sweetness. 
Its  presence  is  previously  necessary  in  order  to  the 
taking  place  of  vinous  fermentation.  Its  extraction 
from  plants,  which  aftbrd  it  in  the  greatest  abundance, 
and  its  refinement  for  the  common  uses  of  life,  in  a pure 
state,  are  among  the  most  important  of  the  chemical 
manufactures. 

The  following  is  the  mode  of  its  manufacture  in  the 
West  Indies : The  plants  are  cultivated  in  rows,  on 
fields  enriched  by  such  manures  as  can  most  easily  be 
procured,  and  tilled  with  the  plough.  They  are  an- 
nually cut.  The  cuttings  are  carried  to  the  mill.  They 
are  cut  into  short  pieces,  and  arranged  in  small  bundles. 
The  mill  is  wrought  by  water,  wind,  or  cattle.  The 
parts  which  act  on  the  canes  are  uptight  cylinders. 
Between  these  the  canes  are  inserted,  compressed  till 
all  their  juice  is  obtained  from  them,  and  themselves, 
sometimes,  even  reduced  to  powder.  One  of  these 
mills,  of  the  best  construction,  bruises  canes  to  such  a 
quantity  as  to  afford,  in  one  day,  10,000  gallons  of 
juice,  when  wrought  with  only  ten  mules.  The  ex- 
pressed juice  is  received  into  a leaden  bed.  It  is  thence 
conveyed  into  a vessel  called  the. receiver.  The  juice 
is  found  to  consist  of  eight  parts  of  pure  water,  one  part 
of  sugar,  one  part  of  oil  and  gummy  mucilage.  From 
the  greener  parts  of  the  canes  there  is  apt  to  be  at  times 
derived  an  acid  juice,  which  tends  to  bring  the  whole 
unseasonably  into  a state  of  acid  fermentation.  Frag- 
ments of  the  ligneous  part  of  the  cane,  some  portions  of 
mud  or  dirt  which  unavoidably  remain  on  the  canes, 
and  a blackish  substance  called  the  crust,  which  coated 
the  canes  at  the  joints,  are  also  apt  to  enter  into  conta- 
minating mixture  with  the  juice.  From  the  receiver 
the  juice  is  conducted  along  a wooden  gutter  lined  with 
lead,  to  the  boiling-house.  In  the  boiling-house  it  is 
received  into  copper  pans  or  caldrons,  which  have  the 
name  of  clarifiers.  Of  these  clarifiers  the  number  and 
the  capacity  must  be  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of 
canes,  and  the  extent  of  the  sugar  plantation  on  which 
the  work  is  carried  on.  Each  clarifier  has  a syphon  or 
cock,  by  which  the  liquor  is  to  be  drawn  off.  Each 
hangs  over  a separate  fire;  and  this  fire  must  be  so 
confined,  that  by  the  drawing  of  an  iron  slider  fitted  to 
the  chimney,  the  fire  may  be  at  any  time  put  out.  If 
i the  progress  of  the  operations  the  stream  of  juice  from 

255 


SAC 


SAC 


the  receiver  fills  the  clarifiers  with  fresh  liquor.  Lime 
in  powder  is  added  in  order  to  take  up  the  oxalic  acid, 
and  the  carbonaceous  matters  which  are  mingled  with 
the  juice.  The  lime  also  in  the  new  salts,  into  the 
composition  of  which  it  now  enters,  adds  itself  to  the 
sugar,  as  a part  of  that  which  is  to  be  obtained  from 
the  process.  The  lime  is  to  be  put  in  the  proportion  of 
somewhat  less  than  a pint  of  lime  to  every  hundred  gal- 
lons of  liquor.  When  it  is  in  too  greatquantities,  how- 
ever, it  is  apt  to  destroy  a part  of  the  pure  saccharine 
matter.  Some  persons  employ  alkaline  ashes,  as  pre- 
ferable to  lime,  for  the  purpose  of  extracting  the  extra- 
neous matter ; but  it  is  highly  probable  that  lime,  judi- 
ciously used,  might  answer  better  than  any  other  sub- 
stance whatsoever.  The  liquor  is  now  to.  be  heated 
almost  to  ebullition.  The  heat  dissolves  the  mecha- 
nical union,  and  thus  favours  the  chemical  changes  in 
its  different  parts.  When  the  proper  heat  appears  from 
a rising  scum  on  the  surface  of  Ihe  liquor  to  have  been 
produced,  the  fire  is  then  extinguished  by  the  applica- 
tion of  the  damper.  In  this  state  of  the  liquor,  the 
greater  part  of  the  impurities,  being  different  in  spe- 
cific gravity  from  the  pure  saccharine  solution,  and 
being  also  of  such  a nature  as  to  yield  more  readily  to 
the  chemical  action  of  heat,  are  brought  up  to  the  sur- 
face in  a scum.  After  this  scum  has  been  sufficiently 
formed  on  the  cooling  liquor,  this  liquor  is  carefully 
drawn  ofF,  either  by  a syphon,  which  raises  a pure 
stream  through  the  scum,  or  by  a cock  drawing  the 
liquor  at  the  bottom  from  under  the  scum.  The  scum, 
in  either  case,  sinks  down  unbroken,  as  the  liquor 
flows ; and  is  now,  by  cooling,  of  such  tenacity,  as  not 
to  tend  to  any  intermixture  with  the  liquor.  The  liquor 
drawn,  after  this  purification  from  the  boiler,  is  re- 
ceived into  a gutter  or  channel,  by  which  it  is  convey- 
ed to  the  grand  copper,  or  evaporating  boiler.  If  made 
from  good  canes,  and  properly  clarified,  it  will  now  ap- 
pear almost  transparent.  In  this  copper  the  liquor  is 
heated  to  actual  ebullition.  The  scum  raised  to  the 
surface  by  the  boiling  is  skimmed  off  as  it  rises.  The 
ebullition  is  continued  till  there  be  a considerable  di- 
minution in  the  quantity  of  the  liquor.  The  liquor  now 
appears  nearly  of  the  colour  of  Madeira  wine.  It  is  at 
last  transferred  into  a second  and  smaller  copper. . An 
addition  of  lime-water  is  here  made,  both  to  dilute  the 
thickening  liquor,  to  detach  the  super-abundant  acid, 
and  to  favour  the  formation  of  the  sugar.  If  the  liquor 
be  now  in  its  proper  state,  the  scum  rises  in  large  bub- 
bles, with  very  little  discoloration.  The  skimmingand 
the  evaporation  together  produce  a considerable  dimi- 
nution in  the  quantity  of  the  liquor.  It  is  then  trans- 
ferred into  another  smaller  boiler.  In  this  last  boiler, 
the  evaporation  is  renewed,  and  continued  till  the  li- 
quor is  brought  to  that  degree  of  thickness  at  which  it 
appears  fit  to  be  finally  cooled.  In  the  cooler,  (a  shal- 
low wooden  vessel  of  considerable  length  and  wideness, 
commonly  of  such  h size  as  to  contain  a hogshead  of 
sugar,)  the  sugar,  as  it  cools,  granulates,  or  runs  into  an 
imperfect  crystallization,  by  which  it  is  separated  from 
the  molasses,  a mixed  saccharine  matter  too  impure  to 
be  capable  even  of  this  imperfect  crystallization.  To 
determine  whether  the  liquor  be  fit  to  be  taken  from 
the  last  boiler  to  be  finally  cooled,  it  is  necessary  to 
take  out  a portion  from  the  boiler,  and  try  separately, 
whether  it  does  not  separate  into  granulated  sugar  and 
melasses.  From  the  cooler,  the  sugar  is  removed  to 
the  curing-house.  This  is  a spacious,  airy  building. 
It  is  provided  with  a capaciouscistern  for  the  reception 
of  melasses,  and  over  the  cistern  is  erected  a frame  of 
strong  joist-work,  unfilled  and  uncovered.  Empty 
hogsheads  open  at  the  head,  bored  at  the  bottom  with 
a few  holes,  and  having  a stalk  of  plantain  leaf  thrust 
through  each  of  the  holes,  while  it  rises  at  the  same 
time  through  the  inside  of  the  hogshead,  are  disposed 
upon  the  frames.  The  mass  of  the  saccharine  matter 
from  the  coolers  is  put  into  these  hogsheads.  The  me- 
lasses drip  into  the  cistern  through  the  spongy  plantain 
stalks  in  the  holes.  Within  the  space  of  three  weeks 
the  melasses  are  sufficiently  drained  otf,  and  the  sugar 
remains  dry.  By  this  process  it  is  at  last  brought  into 
the  state  of  what  is  called  muscovado  or  raw  sugar. 
This  is  the  general  process  in  the  British  West  Indies. 
In  this  state  our  West  India  sugar  is  imported  into 
Britain.  The  formation  of  loaves  of  white  sugar  is  a 
subsequent  process.  In  the  French  West  India  isles 
it  has  long  been  customary  to  perform  the  last  part  of  j 
this  train  of  processes  in  a manner  somewhat  different,  ! 

256 


and  which  affords  the  sugar  in  a state  of  greater  purity 
This  preparation,  taking  the  sugar  from  the  coole- 
then  puts  it,  not  into  hogsheads  with  holes  in  the  bot 
tom  as  above,  but  into  conical  pots,  each  of  which  has 
at  its  bottom  a hole  half  an  inch  in  diameter,  that  is,  in 
the  commencement  of  the  process,  stopped  with  a plug 
After  remaining  sometime  in  the  pot,  the  sugar  be- 
comes perfectly  cool  and  fixed.  The  plug  is  then  re- 
moved out  of  the  hole ; the  pot  is  placed  over  a large 
jar,  and  the  melasses  are  suffered  to  drip  away  from  it. 
After  as  much  of  the  melasses  as  will  easily  .run  off 
lias  been  thus  drained  away,  the  surface  of  the  sugar 
in  the  jar  is  covered  with  a stratum  of  fine  clay,  and 
water  is  poured  upon  the  clay.  The  water  oozing 
gently  through  the  pores  of  the  clay,  pervades  the 
whole  mass  of  sugar  redissolves  the  melasses,  still  re- 
maining in  it,  with  some  parts  of  the  sugar  itself,  and 
carrying  these  oft' by  the  holes  in  the  bottom  of  the  pot, 
renders  that  which  resists  the  solution  much  purer 
than  the  muscovado  Sugar  made  in  the  English  way. 
The  sugar  prepared  in  this  manner  is  called  clayed 
sugar.  It  is  sold  for  a higher  price  in  the  European 
market  than  the  muscovado  sugar;  but  there  is  a loss 
of  sugar  in  the  process  by  claying,  which  deters  the 
British  planters  from  adopting  this  practice  so  gene- 
rally as  do  the  French. 

The  raw  sugars  are  still  contaminated  and  debased 
bv  a mixture  of  acid,  carbonaceous  matter,  oil,  and 
colouring  resin.  To  free  them  from  these  is  the  busi- 
ness of  the  European  sugar-bakers.  A new  solution ; 
clarification  with  alkaline  substances  fitted  to  attract 
away  the  oil,  acid,  and  other  contaminating  matters; 
slow  evaporation ; and  a final  cooling  in  suitable 
moulds,  are  the  processes  which  at  last  produce  loaves 
of  white  sugar. 

The  melasses  being  nothing  else  but  a very  impure 
refuse  of  the  sugar  from  which  they  drip,  are  suscepti- 
ble of  being  employed  in  a new  ebullition,  by  which  a 
second  quantity  of  sugar  may  be  obtained  from  them 
The  remainder  of  the  melasses  is  employed  to  yield  rum 
by  distillation.  In  rum,  alkohol  is  mixed  with  oil,  water, 
oxalic  acid,  and  a mixture  of  empyreumatic  matter. 
The  French  prepare,  from  the  mixture  of  melasses  with 
water,  a species  of  wine  of  good  quality.  In  its  pre- 
paration, the  solution  is  brought  into  fermentation,  then 
passed  through  strainers  to  purify  it,  then  put  in  casks ; 
after  clearing  itself  in  these,  transferred  into  others, 
in  which  it  is  to  be  preserved  for  use.  The  ratio  of 
these  processes  is  extremely  beautiful ; they  are  all  di- 
rected to  purify  the  sugar  from  contaminating  mixtures, 
and  to  reduce  it  into  that  state  of  dryness  or  crystalli- 
zation, in  which  it  is  susceptible  of  being  the  most  con- 
veniently preserved  for  agreeable  use.  The  heat  in 
general  acts  both  mechanically  to  effect  a sufficient  dis- 
solution of  the  aggregation  of  the  parts  of  the  cane  juice, 
and  chemically  to  produce  in  it  new  combinations  into 
which  caloric  must  enter  as  an  ingredient.  The  first 
gentle  heat  is  intended  chiefly  to  operate  with  the 
mechanical  influence,  raising  to  the  surface  impurities, 
which  are  more  easily  removed  by  skimming,  than  by 
any  other  means ; a gentle,  not  a violent  heat,  is  in  this 
instance  employed,  because  a violent  heat  would  pro- 
duce empyreumatic  salts,  the  production  of  which  is  to 
be  carefully  avoided.  A boiling  heat  is,  in  the  conti- 
nuation of  the  processes,  made  use  of,  because,  after 
the  first  impurities  have  been  skimmed  off,  contami- 
nating empyreumatic  salts  are  less  readily  formed, 
because  a boiling  heat  is  necessary  to  effect  the  com- 
plete developement  of  the  saccharine  matter,  and  be- 
cause the  gradual  concentration  of  the  sugar  is,  by  such 
a heat,  to  be  best  accomplished.  Lime  is  employed,  be- 
cause it  has  a stronger  affinity  than  sugar  with  all  the 
contaminating  matters,  and  particularly  because  it  at- 
tracts into  a neutral  combination  that  excess  of  oxalic 
acids  which  is  apt  to  exist  in  the  saccharine  solution. 
Skimming  removes  the  new  salts,  which  the  most  easily 
assume  a solid  form.  The  drippings  carries  away  a mix- 
ture of  water,  oil,  earth,  and  sugar,  from  the  crystallized 
sugar : for,  in  all  our  crystallizations,  we  can  never  jier- 
form  the  process  in  the  great  way,  with  such  nicety  as 
to  preserve  it  free  from  an  inequality  of  proportions  that 
must  necessarily  occasion  a residue.  Repeated  solu- 
tion, clarification,  evaporation,  are  requisite  to  produce 
pure  white  sugar  from  the  brown  and  raw  sugars ; 
because  the  complete  purification  of  this  matter  from 
acid  and  colouring  matter,  is  an  operation  of  great 
difficulty,  and  not  to  be  finally  completed  without  pro- 


toAC 


cesses  which  are  longer  than  can  be  conveniently  per- 
formed, at  the  first,  upon  the  sugar  plantation.  From 
vegetables  of  European  growth,  sugar  is  not  to  be 
easily  obtained,  unless  the  process  of  germination  be 
first  produced  in  them  ; or  unless  they  have  been  pene- 
trated by  intense  frost.  Germination,  or  thorough 
freezing,  developes  sugar  into  all  vegetables  in  which 
its  principles  of  hydrogen  and  carbon,  with  a small  pro- 
portion of  oxygen,  exist  in  any  considerable  plenty.  It 
is  not  improbable,  but  that  if  penetration  by  a freezing 
cold  could  be  commanded  at  pleasure  with  sufficient 
cheapness,  it  would  enable  us  to  obtain  saccharine  mat- 
ter in  a large  proportion,  from  a variety  of  substances, 
from  which  even  generation  does  not  yield  a sufficient 
quantity.  In  the  beet,  and  some  other  European  vege- 
tables, sugar  is  naturally  formed  by  the  functions  of 
vegetation  to  perfect  combination.  From  these  the 
sugar  is  obtained  by  rasping  down  the  vegetable,  ex- 
tracting by  water  its  saccharine  juice,  evaporating  the 
water  charged  with  the  juice  to  the  consistency  of 
syrup,  clarifying,  purifying,  and  crystallizing  it,  just  in 
the  same  manner  as  sugar  from  the  sugar-cane.  It  is 
afforded  by  the  maple,  the  birch,  wheat,  and  Turkey 
corn.  Margraaf  obtained  it  from  the  roots  of  beet,  red 
beet,  skirrit,  parsnips,  and  dried  grapes. 

In  Canada,  the  inhabitants  extract  sugar  from  the 
maple.  At  the  commencement  of  spring,  they  heap 
snow  in  the  evening  at  the  foot  of  the  tree,  in  which 
they  previously  make  apertures  for  the  passage  of  the 
returning  sap.  Two  hundred  pounds  of  this  juice 
afford,  by  evaporation,  fifteen  of  a brownish  sugar. 
The  quantity  prepared  annually  amounts  to  fifteen 
thousand  weight. 

The  Indians  likewise  extract  sugar  from  the  pith  of 
the  bamboo. 

The  beet  has  lately  been  much  cultivated  in  Germany, 
for  the  purpose  of  extracting  sugar  from  its  root.  For 
this  the  roots  are  taken  up  in  autumn,  washed  clean, 
wiped,  sliced  lengthwise,  strung  on  threads,  and 
hung  up  to  dry.  From  these  toe  sugar  is  extracted  by 
maceration  in  a small  quantity  of  water ; drawing  off 
this  upon  fresh  roots,  and  adding  fresh  water  to  the 
fresh  roots,  which  is  again  to  be  employed  the  same 
way,  so  as  to  get  out  all  their  sugar,  and  saturate  the 
water  as  much  as  possible  with  it.  This  water  is  to  be 
strained  and  boiled  down  for  the  sugar. 

Some  merely  express  the  juice  from  the  fresh  roots, 
and  boil  this  down  ; others  boil  the  roots ; but  the  sugar 
extracted  in  either  of  these  ways  is  not  equal  in  quality 
to  the  first. 

Professor  Lampadius  obtained  from  110  lbs.  of  the 
roots,  4 lbs.  of  well-grained  white  powder  sugar ; and 
the  residuums  afforded  7 pints  of  a spirit  resembling 
rum.  Achard  says,  that  about  a ton  of  roots  produced 
him  100  lbs.  of  raw  sugar,  which  gave  55  lbs.  of  refined 
sugar,  and  25  lbs.  of  treacle. 

Sugar  is  very  soluble  in  water,  and  is  a good  medium 
for  uniting  that  fluid  with  oily  matters.  It  is  much 
used  for  domestic  purposes,  and  appears  on  the  whole 
to  be  a valuable  and  wholesome  article  of  food,  the 
uses  of  which  are  most  probably  restricted  by  its  high 
price. 

It  appears  that  sugar  has  the  property  of  rendering 
some  of  the  earths  soluble  in  water. 

The  union  of  sugar  with  the  alkalies  has  been  long 
known  ; but  this  is  rendered  more  strikingly  evident, 
by  carbonated  potassa  or  soda,  for  instance,  decom- 
posing the  solutions  of  lime  and  strontia  in  sugar,  by 
double  affinity. 

In  making  solutions  of  unrefined  sugar  for  culinary 
purposes,  a gray-coloured  substance  is  found  fre- 
quently precipitated.  It  is  probable  that  this  proceeds 
from  a superabundance  of  lime  which  has  been  used 
in  clarifying  the  juice  of  the  sugar-cane  at  the  planta- 
tions abroad.  Sugar  with  this  imperfection  is  known 
among  t^e  refiners. of  this  article  by  the  name  of  weak. 
And  it  is  justly  termed  so,  the  precipitated  matter 
being  nothing  but  lime  which  has  attracted  carbonic 
acid  from  the  sugar  (of  which  there  is  a great  proba- 
bility),  or  from  the  air  of  the  atmosphere.  A bottle,  in 
which  Dr.  Ure  kept  a solution  of  lime  in  sugar  for  at 
least  four  years,  closely  corked,  was  entirely  incrusted 
with  a yellowish-coloured  matter,  which  on  examina- 
tion was  found  to  be  entirely  carbonate  of  lime. 

KirchofF,  an  ingenious  Russian  chemist,  accidentally 
discovered,  that  starch  is  convertible  into  sugar,  by 
being  boiled  for  some  time  with  a very  dilute  sulphuric 

Aaa 


SAC 

acid.  Saussure  showed,  that  100  parts  of  starch  yield 
110  of  sugar. 

Braconnot  has  recently  extended  our  views  concern- 
ing the  artificial  production  of  sugar  and  gum.  Sul- 
phuric acid  (sp.  gr.  1.827)  mixed  with  well-dried  elm- 
dust,  became  very  hot,  and  on  being  diluted  with 
water,  and  neutralized  with  chalk,-  afforded  a liquor 
which  became  gummy  on  evaporation.  Shreds  of 
linen,  triturated  in  a glass  mortar,  with  sulphuric  acid, 
yield  a similar  gum.  Nitric  acid  has  a similar  power. 
If  the  gummy  matter  from  linen  be  boiled  for  some 
time  with  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  we  obtain  a crystal- 
lizable  sugar,  and  an  acid,  which  Braconnot  calls  the 
vegeto-sulphuric  acid.  The  conversion  of  wood  also 
into  sugar,  will  no  doubt  appear  remarkable;  and 
when  persons  not  familiarized  with  chemical  specula- 
tions are  told,  that  a pound  weight  of  rags  can  be  con- 
verted into  more  than  a pound  weight  of  sugar,  they 
may  regard  the  statement  as  a piece  of  pleasantry, 
though  nothing,  says  Braconnot,  can  be  more  real. 

Silk  is  also  convertible  into  gum  by  sulphuric  acid 
Twelve  grammes  of  glue,  reduced  to  powder,  were 
digested  with  a double  weight  of  concentrated  sul 
phuric  acid  without  artificial  heat.  In  twenty  hours 
the  liquid  was  not  more  coloured  than  if  mere  water 
had  been  employed.  A decilitre  of  water  was  then 
added,  and  the  whole  was  boiled  for  five  hours,  with 
renewal  of  the  water,  from  time  to  time,  as  it  wasted. 
It  was  next  diluted,  saturated  with  chalk,  filtered,  and 
evaporated  to  a syrupy  consistence,  and  left  in  repose 
for  a month.  In  this  period  a number  of  granular 
crystals  had  separated,  which  adhered  pretty  strongly 
to  the  bottom  of  the  vessel,  and  had  a very  decided 
saccharine  taste.  This  sugar  crystallizes  much  more 
easily  than  cane  sugar.  The  crystals  are  gritty  under 
the  teeth,  like  sugarcandy ; -and  in  the  form  of  flat- 
tened prisms  or  tabular  groupes.  Its  taste  is  nearly 
as  saccharine  as  grape  sugar;  its  solubility  in  water 
scarcely  exceeds  that  of  sugar  of  milk.  Boiling  alko- 
hol,  even  when  diluted,  has  no  action  on  this  sugar 
By  distillation  it  yields  ammonia,  indicating  the  pre- 
sence of  azote.  This  sugar  combines  intimately  with 
nitric  acid,  without  sensibly  decomposing  it,  even  with 
the  assistance  of  heat,  and  there  results  a peculiar 
crystallized  acid,  to  which  the  name  nitro-saccharine 
has  been  given.  Annales  de  Chimie , xii.,  or  Tillock's 
Magazine , vols.  Iv.  and  Ivi. 

The  varieties  of  sugar  are;  cane  sugar,  maple  sugar, 
liquid  sugar  of  fruits,  sugar  of  figs,  sugar  of  grapes, 
starch  sugar,  the  mushroom  sugar  of  Braconnot,  man 
na,  sugar  of  gelatin,  sugar  of  honey,  and  sugar  of 
diabetes. 

Sugar  of  grapes  does  not  affect  a peculiar  form.  It 
is  deposited,  from  its  alkoliolic  solution,  in  small  grains, 
which  have  little  consistence,  are  grouped  together, 
and  which  constitute  tubercles,  similar  to  those  of 
cauliflowers.  When  put  in  the  mouth,  it  produces  at 
first  a sensation  of  coolness,  to  which  succeeds  a sac- 
charine taste,  not  very  strong.  Hence  to  sweeten  to 
an  equal  degree  the  same  quantity  of  water,  we  must 
employ  two  and  a half  times  as  much  sugar  of  grapes 
as  of  that  Qf  the  cane.  In  other  respects,  it  possesses 
all  the  properties  of  cane  sugar.  Its  extraction  is  very 
easy.  The  expressed  juice  of  the  grapes  is  composed 
of  water,  sugar,  mucilage,  bitartrate  of  potassa,  tar- 
trate of  lime,  and  a small  quantity  of  other  saline  mat- 
ters. We  pour  into  it  an  excess  of  chalk  in  powder, 
or  rather  of  pounded  marble.  There  results,  especially 
on  agitation,  an  effervescence,  due  to  the  uusaturated 
tartaric  acid.  The  liquor  is  then  clarified  with  whites 
of  eggs  or  blood.  It  is  next  evaporated  in  copper  pans, 
till  it  marks  a density  of  1.32  at  the  boiling  tempera 
ture.  It  is  now  allowed  to  cool.  At  the  end  of  some 
days,  it  concretes  into  a crystalline  mass,  which,  when 
drained,  washed  with  a little  cold  water,  and  strongly 
compressed,  constitutes  sugar. 

In  the  south  of  France,  where  this  operation  was 
some  years  back  carried  on  on  the  great  scale,  to  pre- 
vent fermentation  of  the  must , there  was  added  to 
this  a little  sulphate  of  lime,  or  it  was  placed  in  tuns, 
in  which  sulphur  matches  had  been  previously  made 
to  burn.  The  oxygen  of  the  small  quantity  of  air  left 
in  the  tuns  being  thus  abstracted  by  the  sulphurous 
acid,  fermentation  did  not  take  place.  By  this  means 
the  must  can  be  preserved  a considerable  time;  where- 
as, in  the  ordinary  way,  it  would  lose  its  saccharine 
taste  at  the  end  of  a few  days  and  become  vinous 

257 


SAC 


SAC 


Must  thus  treated,  is  said  to  be  muted.  The  syrup  was 
evaporated  to  the  density  of  only  1.285. — Proust.  Ann. 
de  Chimie,  lvii.  131. ; and  the  Collection  of  Memoirs 
published  by  Parmentier  in  1813. 

It  is  this  species  of  sugar  which  is  obtained  from 
starch  and  woody  fibre  by  the  action  of  dilute  sul 
phuric  acid. 

Sugar  of  diabetes  has  sometimes  the  sweetening 
force  of  sugar  of  grapes ; occasionally  much  less. 

Braconnot's  mushroom  sugar  is  much  less  sweet 
than  that  of  the  cane.  It  crystallizes  with  remarkable 
facility,  forming  long  quadrilateral  prisms  with  square 
bases.'  It  yields  alkohol  by  fermentation. 

All  horteys  contain  two  species  of  sugar;  one  simi- 
lar to  sugar  of  the  grape,  another  like  the  uncrystal- 
lizable  sugar  of  the  cane  (melasses).  These  combined 
and  mingled  in  different  proportions  with  an  odorant 
matter,  constitute  the  honeys  of  good  quality.  Those 


The  above  compounds  appear  to  be  formed  by  the 
union  of  more  simple  compounds  ; as  sugar,  of  carbon 
and  water ; urea,  of  carburetted  hydrogen  and  ni- 
trous oxide  ; lithic  acid,  of  cyanogen  and  water,  &c. ; 
whence  it  is  inferred,  that  their  artificial  formation 
falls  within  the  limits  of  chemical  operations. 

Saccharum  officinarum.  The  systematic  name 
in  some  pharmacopoeias  of  the  sugar-cane.  See  Sac- 
charum. 

Saccharum  purificatum.  Double  refined,  or  loaf- 
sugar.  See  Saccharum. 

Saccharum  saturni.  See  Plumbi  acetas. 

SACCHO-LACTIC.  So  called,  because  it  is  sugar 
prepared  from  milk. 

Saccho-lactic  acid.  Acidum  saccholacticum.  See 
Mucic  acid. 

SACCHOLATE.  Saccholas.  A salt  formed  by 
the  combination  of  the  saccholactic  acid  with  salifia- 
ble bases,  as  saccholate  of  iron,  saccholate  of  ammo- 
nia, &c.  &c. 

SACCULUS.  (Dim.  of  saccus , a bag.)  A little 
bag. 

Sacculus  adiposus.  The  bursae  mucosae  of  the 
joints. 

Sacculus  chylifertts.  See  Receptaculum  chyli. 

Sacculus  cordis.  The  pericardium. 

Sacculus  lachrymalis.  See  Saccus  lachrymalis. 

SA'CCUS.  A bag. 

Saccus  lachrymalis.  The  lachrymal  sac  is  situ- 
ated in  the  internal  canthus  of  the  eye,  behind  the 
lachrymal  caruncle,  in  a cavity  formed  by  the  os 
unguis.  It  receives  the  tears  from  the  puncta  lach- 
rymalia,  and  conveys  them  into  the  ductus  lachry- 
malis. 

SA'CER.  (From  sagur , secret,  Heb.)  Sacred. 
Applied  to  some  diseases  which  were  supposed  to  be 
immediately  inflicted  from  heaven  ; as  sacer  morbus , 
the  epilepsy,  sacer  ignis,  erysipelas , &c.  A bone  is 
called  the  os  sacrum,  because  it  was  once  offered  in 
sacrifices.  Sacer  also  means  belonging  to  the  os 
sacrum. 

SACK.  A wine  used  by  our  ancestors,  which  some 
have  taken  to  be  Rhenish,  and  others  Canary  wine. 
Probably  it  was  what  is  called  dry  mountain,  or  some 
Spanish  wine  of  that  sort.  Hovvel,  in  his  French  and 
English  Dictionary,  1650,  translates  sack  by  the  words 
vin  d’Espagne.  Vin.  sec. 

SACLACTATE.  A combination  of  saccholactic 
acid  with  a salifiable  basis. 

SACLACTIC  ACID.  See  Mucic  acid. , 

Sacra  iierba.  Common  vervain. 

Sacra  tinctura.  Made  of  aloes,  canella,  alba,  and 
mountain  wine 
258 


of  inferior  quality  contain,  besides,  a certain  quantity 
of  wax  and  acid  : the  honeys  of  Britanny  contain  even 
an  animal  secretion  ( couvain ) to  which  they  owe  their 
putrescent  quality.  A slight  washing  with  a little 
alkohol  separates  the  uncry stallizable  sugar,  and  leaves 
the  other,  which  may  be  purified  by  washing  with  a 
very  little  more  alkohol. 

“The  relation,”  says  Dr.  Prout,  “which  exists  be- 
tween urea  and  sugar,  seems  to  explain  in  a satisfac- 
tory manner  the  phenomena  of  diabetes,  which  may  be 
considered  as  a depraved  secretion  of  sugar.  The 
weight  of  the  atom  of  sugar,  is  just  half  that  of  the 
weight  of  the  atom  of  urea  ; the  absolute  quantity  of 
hydrogen  in  a given  weight  of  both  is  equal ; while  the 
absolute  quantities  of  carbon  and  oxygen  in  a given 
weight  of  sugar, ‘are  precisely  twice  those  of  urea.” 

The  constituents  of  these  two  bodies  and  lithic  acid, 
are  thus  expressed  by  that  ingenious  philosopher : — 


SACRAL.  Of  or  belonging  to  the  sacrum ; as  sacra 
arteries,  veins,  nerves,  &c. 

SA'CRO.  Words  compounded  of  this  belong  to  the 
sacrum. 

Sacro-coccygjeus.  A muscle  arising  from  the 
sacrum,  and  inserted  into  the  os  coccygis. 

Sacro-lumbalis.  Sacro -lumbaris,  of  authors. 
Lumbo-costo  trachclien  of  Dumas.  A long  muscle, 
thicker  and  broader  below  than  above,  and  extending 
from  the  os  sacrum  to  the  lower  part  of  the  neck,  under 
the  serrati  postici  rhomboideus,  trapezius,  and  latissi- 
mus  dorsi.  It  arises  in  common  with  the  longissimus 
dorsi,  tendinous  without,  and  fleshy  within,  from  the 
posterior  part  of  the  os  saerunj ; from  the  posterior 
edge  of  the  spine  of  the  ilium ; from  all  the  spinous 
process;  and  from  near  the  roots  of  the  transverse 
processes  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae.  At  the  bottom  of 
the  back  it  separates  from  the  longissimus  dorsi,  wit! 
which  it  had  before  formed,  as  it  were,  only  one  mus 
cle,  and  ascending  obliquely  outwards,  gradually  di 
minis  lies  in  thickness,  and  terminates  above  in  a very 
narrow  point.  From  the  place  where  it  quits  the 
longissimus  dorsi,  to  that  of  its  termination,  we  find  it 
fleshy  at  its  posterior,  and  tendinous  at  its  anterior 
edge.  This  tendinous  side  sends  off  as  many  long  and 
thin  tendons  as  there  are  ribs.  The  lowermost  of  these 
tendons  are  broader,  thicker,  and  shorter  than  those 
above ; they  are  inserted  into  the  inferior  edge  of  each 
rib,  where  it  begins  to  be  curved  forwards  towards  the 
sternum,  excepting  only  the  uppermost  and  last  tendon, 
which  ends  in  the  posterior  and  inferior  part  of  the 
transverse  process  of  the  last  vertebra  of  the  neck. 
From  the  upper  part  of  the  five,  six,  seven,  eight,  nine, 
ten,  or  eleven  lower  ribs,  (for  the  number,  though  most 
commonly  seven  or  eight,  varies  in  different  subjects,) 
arise  as  many  thin  bundles  of  fleshy  fibres,  which, 
after  a very  short  progress,  terminate  in  the  inner  side 
of  this  muscle,  and  have  been  named  by  Steno,  musculi 
ad  sacro  lumbalem  acccssorii.  Besides  these  we  find 
the  muscle  sending  off  a fleshy  slip  from  its  upper  part, 
which  is  inserted  into  the  posterior  and  inferior  part 
of  the  transverse  processes  of  the  five  inferior  vettebra 
of  the  neck,  by  as  many  distinct  tendons.  This  is 
generally  described  as  a distinct  muscle.  Diemer- 
broeck,  and  Douglas,  and  Albinus  after  him,  call  it 
cervicatis  deseendevs.  Winslow  names  it  transver- 
salis  collateralis  colli.  Morgagni  considers  it  as  an 
appendage  to  the  sacro  lumbalis.  The  uses  of  this 
muscle  are'  to  assist  in  erecting  the  trunk  of  the  body, 
in  turning  it  upon  its  axis  or  to  one  side,  and  in  draw- 
ing the  ribs  downwards.  By  means  of  its  upper  slip, 
it  serves  to  turn  the  neck  obliquely  backwards  or  u* 
one  side. 


Urea. 

Sugar. 

Lithic  Acid. 

Elements 

No. 

Per. 

Per 

No. 

Per 

Per 

No. 

Per 

Per 

Atom. 

Cent. 

Atom. 

Cent. 

Atom. 

Cent. 

Hydrogen 

2 

2.5 

6.66 

1 

1.25 

6.66 

1 

1.25 

2.85 

Carbon  . . 

1 

7.5 

19.99 

1 

7.50 

39.99 

2 

15.00 

34.28 

Oxygen  . . 

1 

10.0 

26.66 

1 

10.00 

53.33 

1 

10.00 

22.85 

Azote  . . 

1 

17.5 

46.66 

1 

17.50 

40.00 

5 

37.5 

100.10 

3 

18.75 

100.10 

5 

43.75 

100.10 

SAG 


SAL 


Sacro-sciatic  ligaments.  The  ligaments  which 
Connect  the  ossa  innominata  with  the  os  sacrum. 

SA'CRUM.  (So  called  from  sacer,  sacred  ; because 
it  was  formerly  offered  in  sacrifices.)  Os  sacrum ; 
Os  basilare.  The  os  sacrum  derives  its  name  from  its 
being  offered  in  sacrifice  by  the  ancients,  or  perhaps 
from  its  supporting  the  organs  of  generation,  which 
they  considered  as  sacred.  In  young  subjects  it  is 
composed  of  five  or  six  pieces,  united  by  cartilage ; 
but  in  more  advanced  age  it  becomes  one  bone,  in 
which,  however,  we  may  still  easily  distinguish  the 
marks  of  the  former  separation.  Its  shape  has  been 
sometimes  compared  to  an  irregular  triangle ; and 
sometimes,  and  perhaps  more  properly,  to  a pyramid, 
flattened  before  and  behind,  with  its  basis  placed 
towards  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  and.its  point  terminating 
in  the  coccyx.  We  find  it  convex  behind,  and  slightly 
concave  before,  with  its  inferior  portion  bent  a little 
forwards.  Its  anterior  surface  is  smooth,  and  affords 
four,  and  sometimes  five  transverse  lines,  of  a colour 
different  from  the  rest  of  the  bone.  These  are  the  re- 
mains of  the  intermediate  cartilages  by  which  its 
several  pieces  were  united  in  infancy.  Its  posterior 
convex  surface  has  several  prominences,  the  most  re- 
markable of  which  are  its  spinous  processes ; these  are 
usually  three  in  number,  and  gradually  become  shorter, 
so  that  the  third  is  not  so  long  as  the  second,  nor  the 
second  as  the  first.  This  arrangement  enables  us  to 
sit  with  ease.  Its  transverse  processes  are  formed  into 
one  oblong  process,  which  becomes  gradually  smaller 
as  it  descends.  At  the  superior  part  of  the  bone  we 
observe  two  oblique  processes,  of  a cylindrical  shape, 
and  somewhat  concave,  which  are  articulated  with  the 
last  of  the  lumbar  vertebra?.  At  the  base  of  each  of 
these  oblique  processes  is  a notch,  which,  with  such 
another  in  the  vertebra  above  it,  forms  a passage  for 
the  twenty-fourth  spinal  nerve.  In  viewing  this  bone, 
either  before  or  behind,  we  observe  four,  and  some- 
times five  holes  on  each  side,  situate  at  each  extremity, 
of  the  transverse  lines  which  mark  the  divisions  of  the 
bone.  Of  these  holes,  the  anterior  ones,  and  of  these 
again  the  uppermost,  are  the  largest,  and  afford  a pas- 
sage to  the  nerves.  The  posterior  holes  are  smaller, 
covered  with  membranes,  and  destined  for  the  same 
purpose  as  the  former.  Sometimes  at  the  bottom  of 
the  bone  there  is  only  a notch,  and  sometimes  there  is 
a hole  common  to  it  and  the  os  coccygis.  The  cavity 
between  the  body  of  this  bone  and  its  processes,  for 
the  lodgment  of  the  spinal  marrow,  is  triangular,  and 
becomes  smaller  as  it  descends,  till  at  length  it  termi- 
nates obliquely  on  each  side  at  the  lower  part  of  the 
bone.  Below  the  third  division  of  the  bone,  however, 
the  cavity  is  no  longer  completely  bony,  as  in  the  rest 
of  the  spine,  but  is  defended  posteriorly  only  by  a 
very  strong  membrane;  hence  a wound  in  this  part 
may  be  attended  with  the  most  dangerous  conse- 
quences. This  bone  is  articulated  above,  with  the  last 
lumbar  vertebra : laterally  it  is  firmly  united,  by  a 
broad  irregular  surface,  to  the  ossa  innominata,  of  hip- 
bones: and  below  it  is  joined  to  the  os  coccygis.  In 
women  the  os  sacrum  is  usually  shorter,  broader  and 
more  curved  than  in  men,  by  which  means  the  cavity 
of  the  pelvis  is  more  enlarged. 

SAFFLOWER.  See  Carthamus. 

SAFFRON.  See  Crocus. 

Saffron,  bastard.  See  Carthamus. 

Saffron,  meadow.  See  Colchicum. 

Saffron  of  steel.  A red  oxide  of  iron. 

SAGAPE'NUM.'  (The  name  is  derived  from  some 
eastern  dialect.)  Serapinum.  It  is  conjectured  that 
this  concrete  gummi-resinous  juice  is  the  produc- 
tion of  an  oriental  umbelliferous  plant.  Sagapenum 
is  brought  from  Persia  and  Alexandria  in  large  masses, 
externally  yellowish,  internally  paler,  and  of  a horny 
clearness.  Its  taste  is  hot  and  biting,  its  smell  of  the 
alliaceous  and  foetid  kind,  and  its  virtues  are  similar 
to  those  which  have  been  ascribed  to  asafoetida,  but 
weaker,  and  consequently  it  is  less  powerful  in  its  effects. 

SAGE.  See  Salvia. 

Sage  of  Bethlehem.  See  Pulmonaria. 

Sage  of  Jerusalem.  See  Pulmonaria  officinalis. 

Sage  of  virtue.  See  Salvia  hortensis  minor. 

SAGENITE.  Acicular  rutile. 

SAGITTAL.  ( Sagittalis ; from  sagitta,  an  arrow.) 
Shaped  like  an  arrow. 

Sagittal  suture.  Satura  sagittalis,  virgata, 
pbeleea,  rhabdoides.  The  suture  which  unites  the  two 

A aa2 


parietal  bones.  It  has  been  named  sagittal,  from  its 
lying  between  the  coronal  and  lambdoidal  sutures,  as 
an  arrow  between  the  string  and  the  bow. 

SAGITTA’ RI A.  (So  called  from  sagitta,  an  arrow, 
in  allusion  to  the  shape  of  the  leaves  in  the  original 
species  and  some  others.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linmean  system.  Class,  Monacia ; 
Order,  Polyandria. 

Sagittaria  alexipiiarmica.  Malacca ; Canna 
indica ; Arundo  indica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  cultivated  with  great  care  in  the  West  Indies,  for 
its  root,  which  is  supposed  to  be  a remedy  for  the 
wounds  of  poisonous  arrows.  The  root  of  this  species, 
called  radix,  malacca,  is  sometimes  used  medicinally. 

Sagittaria  sagittifolia.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  common  arrow-head,  the  roots  of  which  are  es- 
culent, but  not  very  nutritious. 

SAGITTATUS.  (From  sagittas,  an  arrow.)  Ar- 
row-shaped : applied  to  leaves,  &c.  which  are  triangular 
and  hollowed  out  very  much  at  the  base ; as  the  leaves 
of  the  Sagittaria  sagittifolia. 

SAGO.  See  Cycas  circinalis. 

Sagu.  See  Cycas  circinalis. 

SAHLITE.  Malacholite.  A sub-species  of  oblique- 
edged  augite,  of  a greenish  colour,  and  found  in  Unst 
in  Shetland,  in  Tiree,  and  Glentilt.  • 

Saint  Anthony's  fire.  See  Erysipelas. 

Saint  Ignatius' s bean.  See  Ignalia  amara. 

Saint  Janies' s wort.  See  Senecio  jacobcea. 

Saint  John's  wort.  See  Hypericum. 

Saint  Vitus's  dance.  See  Chorea  sancti  viti. 

SAL.  (Sal,  salis.  m.  and,  rarely,  neut.  from  the 
Greek,  a\ s,  salt.)  Salt.  See  Saline. 

Sal  absinthii.  See  Potasses  subcarbonas. 

Sal  acetosell-e.  See  Oxalis  acetocella. 

Sal  alembroth.  A compound  muriate,  of  mercury 
and  ammonia. 

Sal  alkalinus  fixus.  See  Alkali  fixum. 

Sal  alkalinus  volatilis.  See  Ammonia. 

Sal  ammoniac.  (So  called  because  it  was  found  in 
Egypt,  near  the  temple  of  Jupiter  Ammon.)  Marias 
ammonia.  A saline  concrete  formed  by  the  combina- 
tion of  the  muriatic  acid  with  ammonia.  This  salt  is 
obtained  from  several  sources. 

1.  It  is  found  in  places  adjacent  to  volcanoes.  It 
appears  in  the  form  of  an  efflorescence,  or  groupes  of 
needles,  separate  or  compacted  together,  generally  of  a 
yellow  or  red  colour,  and  mixed  with  arsenic  and 
orpimer* ; but  no  use  is  made  of  that  which  is  procured 
in  this  way.  This  native  sal  ammoniac  is  distin- 
guished by  mineralogists,  into,  1.  Volcanie , which 
occurs  in  efflorescences,  imitative  shapes,  and  crystal- 
lized in"  the  vicinity  of  burning  beds  of  coal,  both  in 
Scotland  and  England,  at  Solfaterra,  Vesuvius,  ^Etna, 
•fee.  2.  Conchoidal , which  occurs  in  angular  pieces, 
it  is  said,  along  with  sulphur,  in  beds  of  indurated  clay, 
or  clay-slate,  in  the  country  of  Bucharia. 

2.  In  Egypt  it  is  made  in  great  quantities  from  the 
soot  of  camel’s  dung,  which  is  burned  at  Cairo  instead 
of  wood.  This  soot  is  put  into  large  round  bottles,  a 
foot  and  a hhlf  in  diameter,  and  terminating  in  a neck 
two  inches  long.  The  bottles  are  filled  up  with  this 
matter  to  within  four  inches  of  the  neck.  Each  bottle 
holds  about  forty  pounds  of  soot,  and  affords  nearly 
six  pounds  of  salt.  The  vessels  are  put  into  a furnace 
in  the  form  of  an  oven,  so  that  only  the  necks  appear 
above.  A fire  of  camel’s  dung  is  kindled  beneath  it, 
and  continued  for  three  days  and  three  nights.  On 
the  second  and  the  third  days  the  salt  is  sublimated. 
The  bottles  are  then  broken,  and  the  salt  is  taken  out 
in  cakes.  These  cakes,  which  are  sent  just  as  they 
have  been  taken  out  of  the  bottles  in  Egypt,  are  con- 
vex, and  unequal  on  the  one  side;  on  the  middle  of 
this  side  they  exhibit  each  a turbercle  corresponding 
to  the  neck  of  the  bottle  in  which  it  was  prepared. 
The  lower  side  is  concave,  and  both  are  sooty. 

3.  In  this  country,  sal  ammoniac  is  likewise  pre- 
pared in  great  quantities.  The  volatile  alkali  is  ob- 
tained from  soot,  bones,  and  other  substances  known  to 
contain  it.  To  this  the  sulphuric  acid  is  added,  and 
the  sulphate  of  ammonia  so  formed,  is  decomposed  by 
muriate  of  soda,  or  common  salt,  through  a double 
affinity.  The  liquor  obtained  in  consequence  of  this 
decomposition  contains  sulphate  of  soda  and  muriate 
of  ammonia.  The  first  is  crysatllized,  and  the  second 
sublimated  so  as  to  form  cakes,  which  are  then  exposed 
to  sale. 


259 


e 


SAL 

Aiiiniumaca]  muriate  has  a poignant,  acid,  and  urinous 
taste.  Its  crystals  are  in  the  form  of  long  hexahedral 
pyramids ; a number  of  them  are  sometimes  united 
together  in  an  acute  angular  direction,  so  as  to  exhibit 
the  form  of  feathers.  Rome  de  Lille  thinks  the  crys- 
tals of  ammoniacal  muriate  to  be  octahedrons  bundled 
together.  This  salt  is  sometimes,  but  not  frequently, 
found  in  cubic  crystals  in  the  middle  of  the  concave 
hollow  part  of  the  sublimated  cakes.  It  possesses  one 
singular  physical  property,  a kind  of  ductility  or  elas- 
ticity, which  causes  it  to  yield  under  the  hammer,  or 
even  the  fingers,  and  makes  it  difficult  to  reduce  to  a 
powder.  Muriate  of  ammonia  is  totally  volatile,  but 
a very  strong  fire  is  requisite  to  sublime  it.  It  is  liable 
to  no  alteration  from  air;  it  may  be  kept  for  a long 
time  without  suffering  any  change ; it  dissolves  very 
readily  in  water.  Six  parts  of  cold  water  are  sufficient 
to  dissolve  one  of  the  salt.  A considerable  cold  is  pro- 
duced as  the  solution  takes  place,  and  this  cold  is  still 
keener  when  the  salt  is  mixed  with  ice.  This  ar- 
tificial cold  is  happily  applied  to  produce  several  phe- 
nomena, such  as  the  congelation  of  water  on  certain 
occasions,  the  crystallization  of  certain  salts,  the  fix- 
ation and  preservation  of  certain  liquids,  naturally  very 
subject  to  evaporation,  &e. 

Sai.  ammoniacum  acetosum.  See  Ammonia  acetatis 
liquor. 

Sal  ammoniacum  liquidum.  See  Ammonia  aceta- 
tis liquor. 

Sal  ammoniacum  martiale.  See  Ferrum  ammo- 
niatum. 

Sal  ammoniacum  secretum  glauberi.  See  Sul- 
phas ammonia. 

Sal  ammoniacum  vegetabile.  See  Ammonia  ace- 
tatis liquor. 

Sal  ammoniacus  fixus.  The  muriate  of  lime  was 
formerly  so  termed. 

Sal  ammoniacus  nitrosus.  See  Nitras  ammonia. 

Sal  antimonii.  Tartar  emetic. 

Sal  argenti.  See  Argenti  nitras. 

Sal  catharticus  amarus.  See  Magnesia  sul- 
phas. 

Sal  catharticus  anglicanus.  See  Magnesia  sul- 
phas. 

Sal  catharticus  glauberi.  See  Soda  sulphas. 

Sal  communis.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  cornu  cervi  volatile.  See  Ammonia  subcar- 
bonas. 

Sal  culinaris.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  de  duobus.  See  Potassa  sulphas 

Sal  diureticus.  See  Potassa  acetas. 

Sal  digestivus  sylvii.  See  Murias  potassa. 

Sal  epsomensis.  See  Magnesia  sulphas. 

Sal  febrifugus  Sylvii.  See  Murias  potassa. 

Sal  fontiClm.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  fossilis.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  gemmjE.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  glauberii/  See  Soda  sulphas. 

Sal  herbarum.  See  Potassa  subcarbonas. 

Sal  marinus.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  martis.  See  Ferri  sulphas. 

Sal  martis  muriaticum  sublimatum.  See  Fer- 
rum ammoniatum. 

Sal  microcosmicus.  The  compound  saline  matter 
obtained  by  inspissating  human  urine. 

Sal  mirabilis  glauberi.  See  Soda  sulphas. 

Sal  muriaticus.  See  Soda  murias. 

Sal  plantarum.  See  Potassa  subcarbonas. 

Sal  polychrestus.  See  Potassa  sulphas. 

Sal  polychrestus  glaseri.  See  Potassa  sul- 
phas. 

Sal  polychrestus  seignetti.  See  Soda  tartari- 
zata. 

Sal  prunella.  Nitrate  of  potassa  cast  into  flat 
cakes  or  round  balls. 

Sal  rupellensis.  See  Soda  tartarizala. 

Sal  saturni.  See  Plumbi  acetas. 

Sal  sedativus.  See  Boracic  acid. 

Sal  s e id  lice  n sis.  See  Magnesia  sulphas. 

Sal  seignetti.  See  Soda  tartarizata. 

Sal  succini.  See  Succinic  acid. 

Sal  tartari.  See  Tartaric  acid. 

Sal  thermarum  carolinarum.  See  Magnesia 
sulphas. 

Sal  vegetabilis.  See  Potassa  tartras. 

Sal  volatile.  See  Spiritus  ammonia  aromaticus, 
and  Ammonia  subcarbonas. 

2G0 


SAL 

| Sal  volatilis  salis  ammoniaci.  See  Ammonia, 

subcarbonas. 

SALEP.  Salap.  See  Orchis  morio. 

SALICARIA.  (From  salix,  a willow  ; from  the  re- 
semblance of  its  leaves  to  those  of  the  willow.)  See 
Ly thrum  salicaria. 

SALICO'RNIA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class, Monandria ; Order, Monogynia. 

Salicornia  europjea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
jointed  glass-wort,  winch  is  gathered  by  the  country 
people  and  sold  for  samphire.  It  forms  a good  pickle 
with  vinegar,  and  is  little  inferior  to  the  samphire. 

SALIFIABLE.  Having  the  property  of  forming  a 
salt.  The  alkalies,  and  those  earths,  and  metallic  ox- 
ides, which  have  the  power  of  neutralizing  acidity,  en- 
tirely or  in  part,  and  producing  salts,  are  called  salifi- 
able bases. 

SALINE.  ( Salinus ; from  sal,  salt.)  Of  a salt 
nature.  The  number  of  saline  substances  is  very  con- 
siderable; and  they  possess  peculiar  characters  by  whigh 
they  are  distinguished  from  other  substances.  These 
characters  are  founded  on  certain  properties,  which,  it 
must  be  confessed,  are  not  accurately  distinctive  of  their 
true  nature.  All  such  substances,  however,  as  possess 
several  of  the  four  following  properties,  are  considered 
as  saline:  1.  A strong  tendency  to  combination,  or  u 
very  strong  affinity  of  composition;  -2.  A greater  or 
less  degree  of  sapidity;  3.  A greater  or  less  decree 
of  solubility  in  water ; 4.  Perfect  incombustibility. 

SALINUS.  See  Saline. 

Salinuca.  See  Valeriana  celtica. 

SALI'VA.  (So  called,  a salino  saporc,  from  its  salt 
taste,  or  from  aiaXos,  spittle.)  The  fluid  which  is 
secreted  by  the  salivary  glands  into  the  cavity  of  the 
mouth.  The  secretory  organ  is  composed  of  three 
pair  of  salivary  glands.  1.  The  parotid  glands,  which 
evacuate  their  saliva  by  means  of  the  Stenonian  duct , 
behind  the  middle  dens  molaris  of  the  upper  jaw.  2. 
The  submaxillary  glands,  which  pour  out  their  saliva 
through  the  Warthonian  ducts  on  each  side  of  the  fre- 
nulum of  the  tongue  by  a narrow  osculum.  3.  The 
sublingual  glands,  situated  between  the  internal  sur- 
face of  the  maxilla  and  the  tongue,  which  pour  out 
their  saliva  through  numerous  Iiivinian  ducts  at  the 
apex  of  the  tongue. 

The  saliva  in  the  cavity  of  the  mouth  has  mixed 
with  it,  1.  The  mucus  of  the  mouth , which  exhales  from 
the  labial  and  genal  glands.  2.  The  roscid  vapour, 
from  the  whole  surface  of  the  cavity  of  the  mouth. 
The  saliva  is  continually  swallowed  with  or  without 
masticated  food,  and  some  is  also  spit  out.  It  has  no 
colour  nor  smell ; it  is  tasteless,  although  it  contains  a 
little  salt,  to  which  the  nerves  of  the  tongue  are  accus- 
tomed. Its  specific  gravity  is  somewhat  greater  than 
wrater.  Its  consistence  is  rather  plastic  and  spumous, 
from  the  entangled  atmospheric  air.  The  quantity  of 
twelve  pounds  is  supposed  to  be  secreted  in  twelve 
hours.  During  mastication  and  speaking,  the  secretion 
is  augmented,  from  the  mechanical  pressure  of  the 
muscles  upon  the  salivary  glands.  Those  who  are 
hungry  secrete  a great  quantity,  from  the  sight  of 
agreeable  food.  It  is  imperfectly  dissolved  by  water, 
somewhat  coagulated  by  alkohol ; and  congealed  with 
more  difficulty  than  water.  It  is  inspissated  by  a small 
dose,  and  dissolved  in  a large  dose,  of  mineral  acids. 
It  is  also  soluble  in  carbonated  alkali.  Caustic  alkali 
and  quick-lime  extract  volatile  alkali  from  saliva.  It  cor 
rodes  copper  and  iron ; and  precipitates  silver  and  lead 
from  containing  muriatic  acid.  It  assists  the  spirituous 
fermentation  of  farinaceous  substances;  hence,  barbar- 
ousnations  prepare  an  inebriating  drink  from  the  chewed 
roots  of  the  Jatropha  manihot  and  Piper  mcthisticum. 
It  possesses  an  antiseptic  virtue,  according  to  the  ex- 
periments of  the  celebrated  Pringle.  It  easily  becomes 
putrid  in  warm  air,  and  gives  ofF  volatile  alkali. 

Constituent  Principles.  Saliva  appears  to  consist, 
in  a healthy  state  of  the  body,  of  water,  which  consti- 
tutes at  least  four-fifths  of  its  bulk,  mucilage,  albumen, 
muriate  of  soda,  phosphate  of  lime,  and  phospha  e of 
ammonia. 

The  use  of  the  saliva  is,  1.  It  augments  the  taste  of  the 
the  food,  by  evolution  of  sapid  matter.  2.  During  mas- 
tication ii  fixes  with,  dissolves,  and  resolves  into  its 
principles,  the  food  ; and  changes  it  into  a pultaceous 
mass,  fit  to  be  swallowed : hence  it  commences  chy- 
mification.  3.  It  moderates  thirst,  by  moistening  the 
cavity  of  the  mouth  and  fauces. 


SAL 


SAL 


SALIVAL.  (Salivalis ; from  saliva , the  spittle.) 
Of  or  belonging  to  the  saliva. 

Salival  ducts.  The  excretory  ducts  of  the  salival 
glands.  That  of  the  parotid  gland  is  called  the  Steno- 
nian  duct ; those  of  the  submaxillary  glands,  the  War- 
thonian  ducts;  and  those  of  the  sublingual,  the  Rivi- 
nian  ducts. 

Salival  glands.  Those  glands  which  secrete  the 
saliva  are  so  termed.  See  Saliva. 

SALIVA'NS.  (From  saliva , spittle.)  That  which 
excites  salivation. 

SALIVA'RIA.  (From  saliva,  the  spittle  . so  called 
because  it  excites  a discharge  of  saliva.)  See  Anthemis 
pyrethrum. 

Salivaris  he rea.  See  Anthemis  pyrethrum. 

SALIVA'TIO.  An  increased  secretion  of  saliva. 
See  Ptyalismus. 

SA'LIX.  (From  sala,  Heb.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linrisean system.  Class,  Dixcia ; 
Order,  Diandria.  The  willow. 

2.  The  pharmacopffiial  name  of  Salix.  See  Salix 
fragilis. 

Salix  alba.  See  Salix  fragilis. 

Salix  caprea.  The  systematic  name  of  a species 
of  willow,  the  bark  of  the  branches  of  which  possess 
the  same  virtues  with  that  of  the  fragilis.  See  Salix 
fragilis. 

Salix  fragilis.  The  systematic  name  of  the  com- 
mon crack  willow.  Salix.  The  bark  of  the  branches 
of  this  species  manifests  a considerable  degree  of  bit- 
terness to  the  taste,  and  is  very  adstringent.  It  is  re- 
commended as  a good  substitute  for  Peruvian  bark, 
antf  is  said  to  cure  intermittents  and  other  diseases  re- 
quiring tonic  and  adstringent  remedies.  Not  only  the 
bark  of  this  species  of  salix,  but  those  also  of  several 
others,  possess  similar  qualities,  particularly  of  the 
Salix  alba  and  Salix  pentandria,  both  of  which  are 
recommended  in  the  foreign  pharmacopoeias.  But  Dr. 
Woodville  is  of  opinion  that  the  bark  of  the  Salix  tri- 
andria  is  more  effectual  than  that  of  any  other  of  this 
genus ; at  least  its  sensible  qualities  give  it  a decided 
preference.  The  trials  Dr.  Cullen  made  were  with  the 
bark  of  the  Salix  pentandria,  taken  from  its  branches, 
the  third  of  an  inch  diameter,  and  of  four  or  five  years1 
growth.  Nevertheless,  he  adds,  in  intermittent  fevers, 
Bergius  always  failed  with  this  bark. 

Salix  pentandria.  The  bark  of  the  branches  of 
this  species  of  u illow  possesses  the  same  virtues  as 
that  of  the  fragilis.  See  Salix  fragilis. 

Salix  vitulina.  The  bark  of  the  branches  of  this 
species  of  willow  may  be  substituted  for  the  fragilis. 
See  Salix  fragilis 

SALMO.  The  name  of  a genus  of  fishes  of  the  or- 
der Abdominales.  The  salmon. 

Salmo  alpinus.  The  red  charr.  This  beautiful 
and  delicate  little  fish,  and  the  Palmo  carpio,  or  gilt 
charr,  are  found  in  our  lakes  of  Westmoreland,  in 
Wales,  and  Scotland.  They  are  very  rich,  and  hard 
of  digestion. 

Salmo  eperlanus.  The  smelt.  A beautiful  little 
fish,  found  in  great  abundance  in  the  Thames  and  river 
Dee,  and  in  the  European  seas,  between  November  and 
February. 

Salmo  fario.  The  common  fresh-water  trout,  the 
flesh  of  which  is  very  delicate  and  rich. 

Salmo  lacustris.  The  lake-trout. 

Salmo  salar.  The  systematic  name  of  the  com- 
mon salmon.  This  fish  is  considered  as  one  of  the 
greatest  delicacies.  It  is  rich,  and  of  difficult  digestion 
to  weak  stomachs,  and  with  some,  whose  stomachs  are 
* not  particularly  feeble,  it  uniformly  disagrees.  The 
pickled,  salted,  and  smoked,  though  much  eaten,  are 
only  fitted  for  the  very  strong  and  active. 

Salmo  salmulus.  The  samlet:  the  least  of  the 
British  species  of  the  salmo-genus.  It  is  found  in  the 
river  Wye,  and  up  the  Severn. 

Salmo  thymallus.  The  graling  salmon,  which  is 
somewhat  like  our  trout.  It  inhabits  the  rivers  of 
Derbyshire,  and  some  of  the  north,  and  near  Christ- 
church in  Hampshire.  It  is  much  esteemed  for  the  de ! 
licacy  of  its  flesh,  which  is  white,  firm,  and  of  a fine 
flavour;  and  is  considered  as  in  the  highest  season  in 
the  depth  of  winter. 

Salmo  trutta.  The  systematic  name  of  the  sal- 
mon trout,  or  bill  trout. 

SALMON.  See  Salmo. 

SALPINGO.  tFrom  2aA7riyi;,  bucciva,  a trumpet.) 


Names  compounded  of  this  word  belong  to  the  palate, 
and  are  connected  with  the  Eustachian  tube. 

Salpingo-pharyngeus.  This  muscle  is  composed 
of  a few  fibres  of  the  palatopharyngeus,  which  it  as- 
sists in  dilating  the  mouth  of  the  Eustachian  tube. 

Salpingo-staphilinus.  See  Levator  palati. 

Salpingo-staphilinus  internus.  See  Levator 
palati. 

SALSAFY.  See  Tragopogonpraten.se. 

SALSO'LA.  (So  called  from  its  saline  properties ; 
hence  the  English  word  saltwort,  most  of  the  species 
affording  the  fossile  alkali.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system  Class,  Pentandria ; 
Order,  Digynia. 

Salsola  kali.  Kali  spinosum  cochleatum ; Tra- 
gus, sive  Tragum  Matthioli.  Snail-seeded  glass- 
wort  or  salt-wort.  The  systematic  name  of  a plant 
which  affords  the  mineral  alkali.  See  Soda. 

Salsola  sativa.  The  systematic  name  of  a plant, 
which  affords  the  mineral  alkali.  See  Soda. 

Salsola  soda.  The  systematic  name  of  a plant 
which  affords  mineral  alkali.  See  Soda. 

SALT.  This  term  has  been  usually  employed  to 
denote  a compound,  in  definite  proportions,  of  acid 
matter,  with  an  alkali,  earth,  or  metallic  oxide.  When 
the  proportions  of  the  constituents  are  so  adjusted,  that 
the  resulting  substance  does  not  affect  the  colour  of 
infusion  of  litmus,  or  red  cabbage,  it  is  then  called  a 
neutral  salt.  When  the  predominance  of  acid  is 
evinced  by  the  reddening  of  these  infusions,  the  salt  is 
said  to  be  acidulous,  and  the  prefix,  super , or  bi,  is  used 
to  indicate  this  excess  of  acid.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the 
acid  matter  appears  to  be  in  defect,  or  short  of  the 
quantity  necessary  for  neutralizing  the  alkalinity  of  the 
base,  the  salt  is  then  said  to  be  with  excess  of  base,  and- 
the  prefix  sub  is  attached  to  its  name.  The  discoveries 
of  Sir  H.  Davy  have,  however,  taught  chemists  to 
modify  their  opinions  concerning  saline  constitution. 
Many  bodies,  such  as  culinary  salt,  and  muriate  of 
lime,  to  which  the  appellation  of  salt  cannot  be  re- 
fused, have  not  been  proved  to  contain  either  acid  or 
alkaline  matter ; but  must,  according  to  the  strict  logic 
of  chemistry,  be  regarded  as  compounds  of  chlorine 
with  metals. 

Salt,  acid  This  is  distinguished  by  its  sour  taste 
when  diluted  with  water.  See  Acid. 

Salt,  alkaline.  Possesses  a urinous,  burning,  and 
caustic  taste,  turns  the  syrup  of  violets  to  a green,  has 
a strong  affinity  for  acids,  dissolves  animal  substances, 
unites  readily  with  water,  combines  with  oils  and  fat, 
and  renders  them  miscible  with  water,  dissolves  sul- 
phur, and  is  crystallizable.  See  Alkali. 

Salt,  ammoniacal , fixed.  Muriate  of  lime. 

Salt,  bitter  purging.  Sulphate  of  magnesia. 

Salt,  cathartic.  See  Magnesia  sulpha a,  and  Sodce 
sulphas. 

Salt,  common.  See  Sodce  murias. 

Salt,  digestive  Acetate  of  potassa. 

Salt,  diuretic.  Acetate  of  potassa. 

Salt,  Epsom.  See  Magnesice  sulphas 

Salt,  febrifuge,  of  Sylvius.  Muriate  of  potassa. 

Salt,  fossil.  A salt  found  in  the  earth. 

Salt,  fusible.  Phosphate  of  ammonia. 

Salt,  fusible , of  urine.  Triple  phosphate  of  soda 
and  ammonia. 

Salt,microcosmic.  Triple  phosphate  of  soda  and 
ammonia. 

Salt , nitrous  ammoniacal.  Nitrate  of  ammonia. 

Salt,  neutral.  Secondary  salt.  Under  the  name  of 
neutral  or  secondary  salts  are  comprehended  such  mat- 
ters as  are  composed  of  two  primitive  saline  substances 
combined  together  in  a certain  proportion.  These  salts 
are  called  neutral,  because  they  do  not  possess  the  cha- 
racters of  primitive  salts;  that  is  to  say,  they  are  nei- 
ther acid  nor  alkaline : such  as  Epsom  salts,  nitre,  &c. 
But  in  many  secondary  salts  the  qualities  of  one  ingre- 
dient predominate ; as  tartar,  or  supertartrate  of  po 
tassa,  has  an  excess  of  acid  ; borax,  or  subborate  of 
soda,  an  excess  of  base.  The  former  are  termed  aci- 
dulous, the  latter  sub-alkaline  salts. 

SALT-PETRE.  See  Mitre. 

Salt  of  amber.  Succinic  acid. 

Salt  of  benzoin.  Benzoic  acid. 

Salt  of  colcothar.  Sulphate  of  iron. 

Salt  of  lemons.  Superoxylate  of  potassa. 

Salt  of  Saturn.  Acetate  of  lead. 

Salt  of  Scidlitz.  Sulphate  of  magnesia. 


261 


SAM 


SAN 


Salt  of  sorrel.  Superoxylate  of  potassa. 

Salt,  Rochelle.  See  Soda  tartarizata. 

Salt,  sea.  See  Sodce  murias. 

Salt  of  steel.  See  Ferri  sulphas. 

Salt,  polychrest.  Sulphate  of  potassa. 

Salt,  secondary.  See  Neutral  salt. 

Salt,  sedative.  Boracic  acid. 

Salt,  spirit  of.  Muriatic  acid. 

Salt  of  vitriol.  Purified  sulphate  of  zinc. 

Salt  of  wisdom.  Sal  alembroth. 

Salt,  primitive.  Simple  salt.  Under  this  order  is 
comprehended  those  salts  which  were  formerly  thought 
to  be  simple  or  primitive,  and  which  are  occasionally 
called  simple  salts.  The  accurate  experiments  of  the 
moderns  have  proved  that  these  are  for  the  most  part 
compounded  ; but  the  term  is  retained  with  greater 
propriety  when  it  is  observed,  that  these  salts  com- 
posed, when  united,  salts  which  are  termed  secondary. 
These  salts  are  never  met  with  perfectly  pure  in  na- 
ture, but  require  artificial  processes  to  render  them  so. 
This  order  is  divided  into  three  genera,  comprehending 
saline  terrestrial  substances,  alkalies,  and  acids. 

SALTWORT.  See  Salsola  kali. 

SALVATE'LLA.  (From  salus,  health,  because 
the  opening  of  this  vein  was  formerly  thought  to  be  of 
singular  use  in  melancholy.)  This  vein  runs  along  the 
little  finger,  unites  upon  the  back  of  the  hand  With  the 
cephalic  of  the  thumb,  and  empties  its  blood  into  the 
internal  and  external  cubical  veins. 

SA  LVIA.  ( A saloendo .)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Diandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia.  Sage. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  sage. 
See  Salvia  officinalis. 

Salvia  hortensis  minor  The  small  sage,  or  sage 
of  virtue.  A variety  of  the  officinal  sage,  possessing 
similar  virtues. 

Salvia  officinalis.  • The  systematic  name  of  the 
garden  sage.  F.lelisphacos.  Salvia— foliis  lanceolato 
ovatis  integris  crenulatis,  floribus  spicatis,  calycibus 
acutis,  of  Liniueus.  In  ancient  times  sage  was  cele- 
brated as  a remedy  of  great  efficacy,  as  would  appear 
from  the  following  lines  of  the  school  of  Salernum  : 

“ Cur  moriatur  homo,  cui  salvia  crescit  in  horto  ? 

Contra  vim  mortis,  non  est  medicamen  in  hortis  ? 

Salvia  salvatrix,  naturce  conciliatrix. 

Salvia  cum  ruta  faciunt  tibi  pocula  tuta." 

But  at  present  it  is  not  considered  as  an  article  of 
much  importance.  It  has  a fragrant,  strong  smell;  and 
a warm,  bitterish,  aromatic  taste,  like  other  plants  con- 
taining an  essential  oil.  It  has  a remarkable  property 
in  resisting  the  putrefaction  of  animal  substances,  and 
is  in  frequent  use  among  the  Chinese  as  a tonic,  in  the 
form  of  tea,  in  debility  of  the  stomach  and  nervous 
system. 

Salvia  sclarea.  The  systematic  name  of  the  gar- 
den clary,  called  horminum  in  the  pharmacopoeias. 
Sclarea  hispanica.  The  leaves  and  seeds  are  recom- 
mended as  corroborants  and  anlispasmodics,  particu- 
larly in  leucorrhoeas  and  hysterical  weaknesses.  They 
have  a bitterish,  warm  taste,  and  a strong  smell  of  the 
aromatic  kind.  The  seeds  are  infused  in  white  wine, 
and  imitate  muscadcl. 

SAMARA.  (The  name,  according  to  Pliny,  of  the 
fruit  of  the  elm.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tetrandriu  ; Order,  Mo- 
no gynia. 

2.  A species  of  capsule  of  a compressed  form,  and 
dry  coriaceous  texture,  with  one  or  two  cells,  never 
bursting,  but  falling  off  entire,  and  dilated  into  a kind 
of  wing  at  the  summit  or  sides.  In  Fraxinus,  it  goes 
from  the  summit  of  the  seed:  in  Acer  and  Batula , 
from  the  side : in  Uhnus  carnpestris,  it  goes  all  round. 

SAMBU'CUS.  (From  sabucca,  Heb.  a musical  in- 
strument formerly  made  of  this  tree.)  Elder. 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnasan 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Trigynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  elder-tree.  See 
Sambucus  nigra. 

Sambucus  ebulus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
dwarf-elder.  Ebulus;  Chamwacte ; Sambucus  humi- 
lis  ; Sambucus  herbacea.  Dwarf  elder,  or  dane-wort. 
The  root,  interior  bark,  leaves,  flowers,  berries,  and 
seeds  of  this  herbaceous  plant,  Sambucus — cymis  tri- 
Jidis,  stipulis  foliaccis,  caule  hcrbaceo , of  Linnaeus, 
iiave  all  been  administered  medicinally,  in  moderate 
262 


doses,  as  resolvents  and  deobstruents,  and,  in  larger 
doses,  as  hydragogues.  The  plant  is  chiefly  employed 
by  the  poor  of  this  country,  among  whom  it  is  in  com- 
mon use  as  a purgative,  but  Dr.  Cullen  speaks  of  it  as 
a violent  remedy. 

Sambucus  nigra.  The  systematic  name  of  the  el- 
der-tree. Sambucus  vulgaris  ; Sambucus  arborea , 
Acte  ; Jnfelix  lignum.  Sambucus — cymis  quinque- 

partitis,  foliis  pinnalis,  caule  arboreo,  of  Linnaeus. 
This  indigenous  plant  has  an  unpleasant  narcotic 
smell,  and  some  authors  have  reported  its  exhalations 
to  be  so  noxious,  as  to  render  it  unsafe  to  sleep  under 
its  shade.  The  parts  of  this  tree  that  are  proposed  for 
medicinal  use  in  the  pharmacopoeias  are  the  inner 
bark,  the  flowers,  and  the  berries.  The  first  has 
scarcely  any  smell,  and  very  little  taste  ; on  first  chew- 
ing, it  impresses  a degree  of  sweetness,  which  is  fol- 
lowed by  a very  slight  but  durable  acrimony,  in  which  its 
powers  seem  to  reside.  From  its  cathartic  property  it 
is  recommended  as  an  effectual  hydragogue  by  Syden- 
ham and  Boerhaave : the  former  directs  three  handfuls 
of  it  to  be  boiled  in  a quart  of  milk  and  water,  till  only 
a pint  remains,  of  which  one  half  is  to  be  taken  night 
and  morning,  and  repeated  for  several  days;  it  usually 
operates  both  upwards  an  I downwards,  and  upon  the 
evacuation  it  produces,  its  utility  depends.  Boerhaave 
gave  its  expressed  juice  in  doses  from  a drachm  to  half 
an  ounce.  In  smaller  doses  it  is  said  to  be  a useful 
aperient  and  deobstruent  in  various  chronic  disorders. 
The  flowers  have  an  agreeable  flavour;  and  infusions 
of  them,  when  fresh,  are  gently  laxative  and  aperient. 
When  dry,  they  are  said  to  promote  chiefly  the  cuticu- 
lar  excretion,  and  to  be  particularly  serviceable  in  ery- 
sipelatous and  eruptive  disorders.  Externally  they  are 
used  in  fomentations,  &c.  and  in  the  London  pharma- 
copoeia are  directed  in  the  form  of  an  ointment.  The 
berries  in  taste  are  somewhat  sweetish,  and  not  un- 
pleasant ; on  expression  they  yield  a fine  purple  juice, 
which  proves  a useful  aperient  and  resolvent  in  sun- 
dry chronic  diseases,  gently  loosening  the  belly,  and 
promoting  the  urine  and  perspiration. 

Samphire.  See  Crithmum  maritimum. 

Sampsuchus.  See  Thymus  mastichina. 

Sampsychum.  (From  oau>,  to  preserve,  and  ^vxni 
the  mind;  because  of  its  cordial  qualities.)  Mar- 
joram. 

SANATI'VE.  (From  sano,  to  cure.)  That  which 

heals  diseases. 

Sancti  antonii  ignis.  See  Erysipelas. 

SANCTORIUS,  Sanctorius,  was  born  in  1561,  at 
Capo  d’lstria.  He  studied  medicine  at  Padua,  where 
he  took  his  degree,  and  then  settled  at  Venice,  and 
practised  with  considerable  success.  At  the  age  of 
fifty,  however,  he  was  appointed  professor  of  the  the- 
ory of  medicine  at  Padua;  in  which  office  he  distin- 
guished himself  for  thirteen  years.  He  was  then  al- 
lowed to  retire  on  his  salary,  finding  his  health  im- 
paired by  the  fatigue  of  the  visits,  which  he  was  fre- 
quently obliged  to  make  in  his  professional  capacity,  to 
Venice,  where  he  passed  the  remainder  of  his  life  in 
great  reputation.  On  his  death,  in  1636,  a statue  of 
marble  was  raised  to  his  memory ; and  an  annual  ora- 
tion was  instituted  by  the  College  of  Physicians,  to 
whom  he  had  bequeathed  an  annuity,  in  commemora- 
tion of  his  benevolence.  Sanctorius  first  called  the 
attention  of  physicians  to  the  cutaneous  and  pulmo- 
nary transpiration,  which  he  proved  to  exceed  the  other 
excretions  considerably  in  weight ; and  he  maintained 
that  this  function  must  have  a material  influence  on 
tiie  system,  and  was  deserving  of  great  consideration 
in  the  treatment  of  diseases.  There  is,  no  doubt,  much 
truth,  in  this  general  observation ; but  in  its  applica- 
tion to  practice,  he  appears  to  have  gone  to  an  extra- 
vagant length,  and  to  have  contributed  much  to  pro- 
long the  reputation  of  the  humoral  pathology.  His 
treatise,  entitled  “ Ars  de  Statica  Medicina,”  was  first 
published  in  1614,  and  passed  through  more  than 
twenty  editions,  including  translations,  with  various 
commentaries:  it  is  written  in  an  elegant  and  per- 
spicuous Latin  style.  He  was  also  author  of  a Method 
of  avoiding  Errors  in  Medicine,  to  which  was  after 
ward  added  an  essay  “ De  Inventione  Remediorum  ;” 
and  of  Commentaries  on  some  of  the  ancient  physi- 
cians. Besides  the  statical  chair,  by  which  he  con- 
trived to  determine  the  weight  of  the  Ingesta  and 
Egesta,  he  invented  an  instrument  for  measuring  the 
force  of  the  pulse,  and  several  others  for  surgical  use ; 


SAN 


SAN 


and  he  was  the  first  who  attempted  to  determine  the 
temperature  of  the  body  by  a thermometer,  of  which, 
indeed,  he  is  considered  as  the  inventor. 

■Sanctum  semen.  The  worm-seed,  or  santo- 
riicum.  ♦ ' - 

SA'NCTUS.  Holy.  A term  formerly  applied  to 
diseases,  herbs,  &c.  See  Chorea , Carduus  benedic- 

SANDALIFORMIS.  Sandal  or  slipper-like.  Ap- 
plied to  the  nectary  of  the  Cypripedium  calceolus. 

SANDARA'CHA.  (From  sagkad  nwrak , Arabian.) 
1.  A gummy  resin. 

2.  A sort  of  arsenic. 

Sandaracha  arabum.  Arabian  sandarach.  This 
resinous  juice  appears  to  have  been  the  produce  of  a 
large  species  of  juniper-tree. 

Sandbath.  See  Bath. 

SANDERS.  See  Pterocarpus  santalinus. 

Sandrack.  (An  Arabian  word.)  See  Juniperus 
communis. 

Sandyx.  (From  sahi  duk,  red,  Arabian.)  Cerusse 
burnt  till  it  becomes  red. 

SANGUIFICATION.  (Sanguificatio ; from  san- 
guis, blood,  and  faceo,  to  make.)  A natural  function 
of  the  body,  by  which  the  chyle  is  changed  into  blood. 
The  uses  of  sanguification  are  the  generation  of  blood, 
which  serves  to  fill  the  blood-vessels,  to  irritate  and 
stimulate  the  heart  and  arteries,  to  generate  or  cause 
heat,  to  secrete  the  humours,  and  to  excite  the  vital 
actions. 

Sanguinalis.  (From  sanguis , blood:  so  named 
from  its  use  in  stopping  bleedings.)  The  Polygonum 
aviculare , or  knot-grass,  is  sometimes  so  called. 

Sanguinaria.  (From  sanguis , blood:  so  named 
from  its  use  in  stopping  bleedings.)  See  Pohjgonum 
aviculare. 

[Sanguinaria  canadensis.  See  Blood-root.  A.] 

SANGUINEOUS.  Bloody.  Appertaining  to  the 
blood.  Applied  to  certain  conditions  of  the  body  and 
diseases,  and  appearances  of  solids  and  fluids;  as  san- 
guineous temperament,  sanguineous  apoplexy. 

Sanguineous  apoplexy.  See  Jipoplcxy. 

Sanguipurgium.  (From  sanguis , blood,  and  pur  go , 
to  purge.)  A gentle  fever,  or  such  a one  as  by  its  dis- 
charges is  supposed  to  purify  the  blood. 

SA'NGUIS.  (Sanguis,  guinis.  m.)  See  Blood. 

Sanguis  draconis.  See  Calamus  rolang. 

Sanguis  iierculis.  A name  for  the  crocus. 

SANGUISO'RBA.  (Probably  so  named  originally 
from  the  blood-red  colour  of  its  flowers,  although  the 
juices  of  this  plant,  being  astringent,  the  medicinal 
properties  it  possesses  of  stopping  hcemorrhages  may 
be  a better  warrant  for  its  name.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Triandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Sanguisorba  officinalis.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  Italian  pimpinel,  which  was  formerly  much  es- 
teemed as  an  astringent,  but  is  not  now  in  use. 

SANGUISU'GA.  (.From  sanguis,  blood,  and  svgo, 
to  suck.)  The  leech  or  blood-sucker.  See  Leech. 

SANICLE.  See  Sanicula. 

Sanicle,  Yorkshire.  See  Pinguicula. 

SANI'CULA.  (From  sano , to  heal : so  called  from 
its  virtues  in  healing.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  sanicle. 

Sanicula  eboracensis.  See  Pinguicula  vulgaris. 

Sanicula  europea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 

sanicle.  Cucullata;  Dodecat’ieon ; Symphytum  pe- 
trceum ; Sanicula  mas;  Diapensia  corlusa.  This 
herb  was  formerly  recommended  as  a mild  adstringent, 
and  is  supposed  to  have  received  its  name  from  its  sa- 
native power.  Its  sensible  qualities  are  a bitterish  and 
somewhat  austere  taste,  followed  by  an  acrimony 
which  chiefly  affects  the  throat.  It  is  only  in  use  in 
♦he  present  day  among  the  country  people. 

Sanicula  mas.  See  Sanicula  europea. 

SA'NIES.  Ichor.  This  term  is  sometimes  applied 
to  a thin,  limpid,  and  greenish  discharge;  and  at  other 
times  to  a thick  and  bloody  kind  of  pus. 

SA'NTALUM.  (From  zandal , Arabian.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Tetrandria ; Order,  Monogynia.  Saunders. 

Santalum  album.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
yellow  saunders.  Santalum  citrinum ; Santalum  pal- 
lidum. Yellow  saunders.  White  saunders  wood  is 


of  a pale  white  colour,  often  with  a yellowish  tinge, 
and,  being  destitute  of  taste  or.  odour,  it  is  superseded 
by  the  santalum  citrinum,  which  is  of  a brownish  yel- 
low colour,  of  a bitterish  aromatic  taste,  and  of  & 
pleasant  smell,  .approaching  to  that  of  the  rose.  Both 
kinds  are  brought  from  the  East  Indies  in  billets,  con- 
sisting of  large  thick  pieces,  which,  according  to  Rum- 
phius,  are  sometimes  taken  from  the  same,  and  some- 
times from  different  trees.  For  tliough  the  white  and 
yellow  saunders  are  tiie  wood  of  the  same  species  of 
tree,  yet  the  latter,  which  forms  the  central  part  of  the 
tree,  is  not  always  to  be  found  in  sufficient  quantity  to 
repay  the  trouble  and  expense  of  procuring  it,  espe- 
cially, unless  the  trees  be  old;  while  the  white,  which 
is  the  exterior  part  of  the  wood,  is  always  more  abun- 
dant, and  is  consequently  much  cheaper. 

Yellow  saunders,  distilled  with  water,  yields  a fra- 
grant essential  oil,  which  thickens  in  the  cold  into  the 
consistence  of  a balsam,  approaching  in  smell  to  am- 
bergris, or  a mixture  of  ambergris  and  roses;  the 
remaining  decoction,  inspissated  to  the  consistence 
of  an  extract,  is  bitterish,  and  slightly  pungent. 
Rectified  spirit  extracts,  by  digestion,  considerably 
more  than  water;  the  colour  of  the  tincture  is  a 
rich  yellow.  The  distilled  spirit  is  slightly  impreg- 
nated with  the  flavour  of  the  wood;  the  remaining 
brownish  extract  has  a weak  smell,  and  a moderate 
balsamic  pungency.  The  wood  is  valued  highly  on 
account  of  its  fragrance ; hence  the  Chinese  are  said 
to  fumigate  their  clothes  with  it,  and  to  burn  it  in  their 
temples  in  honour  of  their  gods.  Though  still  retained 
in  the  Materia  Medica,  it  cannot  be  thought  to  possess 
any  considerable  share  of  medicinal  power.  Hoffman 
considers  its  virtues  as  similar  to  those  of  ambergris; 
and  some  others  have  esteemed  it  in  the  character  of  a 
corroborant  and  restorative. 

[“  The  sandal-wood,  which  is  found  on  some  of  the 
islands  of  the  South  Sea,  has  been  a great  article  of  com- 
merce for  the  Chinese  market.  The  following  extract  of 
a letter  from  Coles  Fanning  & Co.  to  Dr.  Mitchill  gives 
an  accountof  the  trade  and  employment  of  this  wood  as 
a perfume. 

“ In  the  month  of  August,  1806,  we  despatched  the 
ship  Hope,  Capt.  Brumley,  from  New-York,  on  a 
voyage  to  the  Fejee  islands,  to  procure  a cargo  of  San- 
dal-wood,  for  the  Canton  market.  The  Hope  having 
succeeded  at  the  island  of  Toconroba,  in  procuring  a 
full  cargo  for  herself,  and  in  part  freighting  an  English 
brig  that  she  met  with  at  said  island,  arrived  in  No- 
vember 1807,  at  Canton,  where  both  cargoes  were  sold 
at  about  25  cents  per  pound.  While  at  the  Fejee 
islands  the  Captain  of  the  Hope  contracted  and  paid  iu 
part  to  the  chief  of  the  island  for  about  270  tons  more 
of  sandal-wood,  (this  being  about  the  whole  quantity 
of  good  wood  remaining  on  the  islands)  to  be  taken 
away  in  a certain  time.  In  order  therefore  to  seize  so 
profitable  a speculation  while  there  were  so  few  to  par- 
ticipate in  it,  we  built  and  sent  the  ship  Tonquin,  com- 
manded by  E.  Fanning,  in  May,  1807,  to  meet  the  Hope 
at  Canton;  but  the  Hope  not  having  arrived  in  time 
for  Capt.  Fanning  to  fulfil  our  original  intentions,  the 
season  was  so  far  wasted  as  to  compel  him  to  load  the 
Tonquin  for  New-York,  and  he  met  the  Hope  in  the 
mouth  of  the  Tigris  or  (Canton  river).  Both  vessels 
will,  therefore,  return  to  the  United  States  under  no 
expectations  that  the  trespasses  of  European  nations 
would  compel  our  government  to  inhibit  their  depar- 
ture again  on  said  voyage.  Being  thus  situated  we 
have  taken  the  liberty  to  address  you  for  your  advice, 
whether,  under  the  embargo  law,  or  the  supplements, 
the  Executive  will  not  have  sufficient  authority  to 
permit  us  to  proceed  immediately  with  a ship  sufficient 
to  bring  the  above  quantity  of  wood,  and  by  that 
means  save  to  ourselves  and  our  country  at  least 
$130,000,  which  will  probably,  if  such  permission  is  re- 
fused, fall  into  English  hands;  for  you  will  please  to 
observe,  that  there  was  in  the  first  place  but  a small 
patch  of  the  wood  on  one  of  the  islands,  that  the  Hope 
left  four  English  vessels  there,  selecting  from  the  refuse 
a little  of  very  inferior  quality,  and  in  expectation  too 
that  some  accident  would  prevent  our  ship  from  re- 
turning within  the  limited  time,  which  would  release 
tire  chief  from  his  engagement,  and  leave  him  at  liberty 
to  sell  the  good  wood  purchased  by  Capt.  Brumley  to 
them.  From  the  knowledge  Capt.  Brumley  has  of  the 
chief’s  conduct,  we  rely  as  confidently  on  his  keeping 
his  engagement  for  the  time  limited  as  we  would  on  the 


SAP 


SAP 


chief  of  the  most  civilized  nation.  You  will  no  doubt 
recollect  that  the  Chinese  have  long  considered  sandal- 
wood as  possessing  religious  properties ; they  are  ac- 
customed to  burn  it  on  their  altars  as  incense ; their 
god  Josh  is  supposed  always  out  of  humour,  unless  his 
nose  is  regaled  with  its  delightful  effftivia.  We  have 
enclosed  a small  piece  of  the  wood,  that  you  may  have 
an  opportunity  of  judging  how  far  a Pagan  god’s  taste 
may  be  deemed  exquisite.  The  Hope  is  the  first  vessel, 
to  the  best  of  our  knowledge,  that  ever  proceeded  from 
tiie  United  States  on  this  voyage,  and  on  her  return,  we 
presume  she  will  pay  about  $40,000  into  the  Treasury 
for  duties  from  the  proceeds  of  the  wood,  which  origi- 
ginally  cost  only  about  nine  hundred  dollars.’  ” — Med. 
Repos.  A.] 

Santa  on m citrinum.  See  Santalum  album. 

Santalum  pallidum.  See  Santalum  album. 

Santalum  rubrum.  Red  saunders.  See  Plerocar- 
pus  suntalinus. 

SANTOLl'NA.  (From  santalum,  saunders;  be- 
cause it  smells  like  the  saunders-wood.)  See  Artemisia 
santonica. 

Santolina  cham.®:-cyparissus.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  lavender  cotton. 

Santonicum.  (From  Santonio,  its  native  place.) 
See  Artemisia  santonica. 

SAPHE'NA.  (From  caepys,  visible.)  Vena  saphena. 
The  large  vein  of  the  leg,  which  ascends  along  the  little 
toe  over  the  external  ankle,  and  evacuates  part  of  the 
blood  from  the  foot  into  the  popliteal  veins. 

Sapienti.'e  dentes.  ( Sapientia , wisdom,  discre- 

tion : so  called  because  they  appear  when  the  person  is 
supposed  to  be  at  years  of  discretion.)  See  Teeth. 

SAPI'NBUS.  (That  is,  Sapo  Indus , Indian  soap: 
the  rind  of  the  fruit  serving  instead  of  soap  to  cleanse 
linen,  but  not  without  hazard  of  injury  to  the  texture 
of  the  cloth.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Octandria  ; Order,  Digynia.  The  soap-tree. 

Sapindus  saponaria.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  affords  soap- nuts.  Saponarice  nucules ; 
Baccce  bermudensis.  Soap-berries.  A spherical  fruit, 
about  the  size  of  a cherry,  the  cortical  part  of  which  is 
yellow,  glossy,  and  so  transparent  as  to  show  the  sphe- 
rical black  nut  which  rattles  within,  and  which  includes 
a white  kernel.  The  tree  grows  in  Jamaica.  It  is  said 
that  the  cortical  part  of  this  fruit  has  a bitter  taste,  and 
no  smell ; that  it  raises  a soapy  froth  with  water,  and 
has  similar  effects  with  soap  in  washing  ; that  it  is  a 
medicine  of  singular  and  specific  virtue  in  chlorosis. 
They  are  not  known  in  the  shops  of  this  country. 

SA'PO.  (Sapo,  nis.  nr.)  Soap.  A compound,  in 
definite  proportions,  of  certain  principles  in  oils,  fats,  or 
resin,  with  a salifiable  base.  When  this  base  is  potassa 
or  soda,  the  compound  is  used  as  a detergent  in  wash- 
ing clothes.  When  an  alkaline  earth,  or  oxide  of  a 
common  metal,  as  litharge,  is  the  salifiable  base,  the 
compound  is  insoluble  in  water.  The  first  of  these 
combinations  is  scarcely  applied  to  any  use,  if  we  ex- 
cept that  of  linseed  oil  with  lime-\vater,  sometimes  pie- 
scribed  as  a liniment  against  burns ; and  the  last  is 
known  only  in  surgery  as  the  basis  of  certain  plasters. 
Concerning  the  chemical  constitution  of  soaps  and 
saponification,  no  exact  ideas  were  entertained  prior  to 
Chevreuil’s  researches. 

Fats  are  compounds  of  a solid  and  a liquid  substance ; 
the  former  called  stearine,  the  latier  resembling  vegeta- 
ble oil,  and  therefore  called  elaine.  When  fat  is  treated 
with  a hot  ley  of  potassa  or  soda,  the  constituents  react 
on  one  another,  so  as  to  generate  the  solid  pearly  mat- 
ter margaric  acid,  and  the  fluid  matter  oleic  arid , both 
of  which  enter  into  a species  of  saline  combination 
with  the  alkali;  while  the  third  matter  that, is  pro- 
duced, the  sweet  principle,  remains  free.  We  must 
therefore  regard  our  common  soap  as  a mixture  of  an 
alkaline  margarate  and  oleate,  in  proportions  deter- 
mined by  the  relative  proportions  of  the  two  acids  pro- 
ducible from  the  peculiar  species  of  fat.  It  is  probable, 
on  the  other  hand,  that  the  soap  formed  from  vegetable 
oil  is  chiefly  an  oleate.  No  chemical  researches  have 
hitherto  been  made  known,  on  the  compounds  of  resin 
with  alkalies,  though  these  constitute  the  brown  soaps 
so  extensively  manufactured  in’  this  country.  All  oils 
or  fats  do  not  possess  in  an  equal  degree  the  property 
of  saponification.  Those  which  saponify  best,  are, 

1.  Oil  of  olives,  and  of  sweet  almonds. 

2.  Animal  oils;  as  hog’s-lard,  tallow,  butter,  and 
horse-oil. 

264 


S.  Oil  of  colza,  or  rape-seed  oil. 

4.  Oil  of  beech-mast  and  poppy-seed,  when  mixed 
wirh  olive-oil  or  tallow. 

5.  The  several  fish-oils,  mingled  like  the  preceding. 

6.  Hempseed-oil. 

7.  Nut-oil  and  linseed-oil. 

8.  Palm  oil. 

9.  Rosin. 

In  general,  the  only  soaps  employed  in  commerce, 
are  those  of  olive-oil,  tallow,  laid,  palm-oil,  and  rosin. 
A species  of  soap  can  also  be  formed  by  the  union  of 
beeswax  with  alkali ; but  this  has  no  detergent  appli 
cation,  being  used  only  for  painting  in  encausto. 

The  specific  gravity  of  soap  is  in  general  greater  than 
that  of  water.  Its  taste  is  faintly  alkaline.  When  sub 
jected  to  heat  it  speedily  fuses,  swells  up,  and  is  then 
decomposed.  Exposed  to  the  air  in  thin  slices,  it  soon 
becomes  diy;  but  the  whole  combined  water  does  not 
leave  it,  even  by  careful  desiccation  on  a sand-bath. 

Soap  is  much  more  soluble  in  hot  than  in  cold  water. 
This  solution  is  instantly  disturbed  by  the  greater  num 
ber  of  acids,  which  seizing  the  alkali,  either  separate 
the  fatty  principles,  or  unite  with  them  into  an  acido- 
soapy  emulsion.  The  solution  is  likewise  decomposed 
by  almost  ail  the  earthy  and  metallic  salts,  which  give 
birth  to  insoluble  compounds  of  the  oleic  and  margaric 
acids,  with  the  salifiable  bases. 

Soap  is  soluble  in  alkohol,  and  in  large  quantity  by 
the  aid  of  heat.  When  boiling  alkohol  is  saturated 
with  soap,  the  liquid,  on  cooling,  forms  a consistent 
transparent  mass  of  a yellow  colour.  When  this  mass 
is  dried,  it  still  retains  its  transparency,  provided  the 
soap  be  a compound  of  tallow  and  soda ; and  in  this 
state  it  is  sold  by  the  perfumers  in  this  country. 

Good  soap  possesses  the  property  of  removing  from 
linen  and  cloth  the  greater  part  of  fatty  substances 
which  may  have  been  applied  to  them. 

The  medicinal  soap,  sapo  amygdolinus,  is  made  with 
oil  of  sweet  almonds,  and  half  its  weight  of  caustic 
alkali.  Common  or  soft  soap,  sapo  mollis , is  made  of 
potassa  and  oil,  or  tallow.  Spanish,  or  Castile  soap, 
sapo  durus , of  oil  of  olives  and  soda,  or  barilla.  Black 
soap  is  a composition  of  train  oil  and  an  alkali ; and 
green  soap  of  hemp,  linseed,  or  rape  oil,  with  an  alkali. 
The  white  Spanish  soap,  being  made  of  the  finer  kinds 
of  olive  oil,  is  the  best,  and  therefore  preferred  for  in- 
ternal use.  Soap  was  imperfectly  known  to  the  an- 
cients. It  is  mentioned  by  Pliny  as  made  of  fat  and 
ashes,  and  as  an  invention  of  the  Gauls.  Aretseus  and 
others  inform  us,  that  the  Greeks  obtained  their  know- 
ledge of  its  medical  use  from  the  Romans.  Its  virtues, 
according  to  Bergius,  are  detergent,  resolvent,  and 
aperient,  and  its  use  recommended  in  jaundice,  gout, 
calculous  complaints,  and  obstruction  of  the  viscera. 
The  efiicacy  of  soap,  in  the  first  of  these  diseases,  was 
experienced  by  Sylvius,  and  since  recommended  very 
generally  by  various  authors  who  have  written  on  this 
complaint;  and  it  has  also  been  thought  of  use  in  sup- 
plying the  place  of  bile  in  the  print®  vise.  The  utility 
of  this  medicine  in  icterical  cases  was  inferred  chiefly 
from  its  supposed  power  of  dissolving  biliary  concre- 
tions ; but  this  medicine  has  lost  much  of  its  reputation 
in  jaundice,  since  it  is  now  known,  that  gall-stones 
have  been  found  in  many  after  death  who  had  been 
daily  taking  soap  for  several  months,  and  even  years. 
.Of  its  good  effects  in  urinary  calculous  affections,  we 
have  the  testimonies  of  several,  especially  when  dis- 
solved in  lime-water,  by  which  its  efficacy  is  considera- 
bly increased  ; for  it  thus  becomes  a powerful  solvent 
of  mucus,  which  an  ingenious  modern  author  supposes 
to  be  the  chief  agent  in  the  formation  of  calculi  ; it  is, 
however,  only  in  the  incipient  state  of  the  disease  that 
these  remedies  promise  effectual  benefit,  though  they 
generally  abate  the  more  violent  symptoms  where  they 
cannot  remove  the  cause.  With  Boerhaave,  soap  was 
a general  medicine;  for  as  he  attributed  most  Com- 
plaints to  viscidity  of  the  fluids,  he,  and  most  of  the 
Boerhaavian  school,  prescribed  it,  in  conjunction  with 
different  resinous  and  other  substances,  in  gout,  rheu- 
matism. and  various  visceral  complaints.  Soap  is  also 
externally  employed  as  a resolvent,  and  gives  name  to 
several  officinal  preparations. 

[“  The  history  of  personal  cleanliness  is  very  impor- 
tant, and  has  been  lamentably  neglected.  Pliny,  in  his 
Natural  History,  treating  of  strumous  swellings,  makes 
mention  of  Soap:  Prodet  est  sapo.  Onlliarum  hoc 
inventum  rutilandis  capillis ■ Fit  sz  sebo  tl  enters. 


SAP 


S4R 


Optimus  ex  fagino  et  caprino  : duobis  modis , spissus 
ac  liquidus  : uterque  apud  Germanus  majure  in  us u 
viris  quam  fceminis.  “Soap  is  good  for  them.  This 
was  invented  in  Gaul , and  used  for  reddening  the 
hair.  It  is  made  of  fat  and  ashes.  The  best  is  pre- 
pared from  the  ashes  of  the  beach-tree  and  the  suet  of 
the  goat.  There  are  two  sorts,  the  thick  and  the  liquid. 
Among  the  Germans,  both  kinds  are  more  used  by  the 
men  than  by  the  women .”  Priscian  writes  of  “ Sapo 
Gallicus,”  or  Gaulish  soap ; and  Martial  of  “ Spuma 
Batava,”  or  Dutch  lather,  and  “ Spuma  Caustica,”  or 
Caustic  foam.  The  German  soap  was  reckoned  the 
best  and  cleanest.  The  Gaulish  was  next  in  quality 
and  value. 

It  is  clear,  and  President  Gog-uet  is  of  the  same 
opinion,  (in  his  history  of  the  origin  of  laws,  & c.)  that 
the  ancient  Hebrews,  Greeks,  and  Romans  knew  no- 
thing of  soap.  These  nations  used  to  supply  the  want 
of  it  by  various  other  means.  From  the  barbarous 
people  of  the  north,  the  knowledge  and  employment 
of  soap  passed  to  the  Romans ; and  from  the  Romans 
was  made  known  to  the  Greeks.  A very  remarkable 
fact! 

When  the  Romans  first  became  acquainted  with 
soap,  they  called  it  “ Unguentum  Cineris,”  or  Ointment 
of  ashes.  So  prevalent  was  the  idea  of  its  origin,  that 
several  writers  have  treated  of  it  under  the  denomina- 
tion of  “ Cinis,”  or  ashes,  itself.  And  those  who  con- 
sumed soap  were  in  those  days  called  “ Cinerarii,”  or 
Ashes  users. 

After  a while,  however,  this  detergent  ointment  was 
distinguished  among  the  Romans  by  the  word  “ Sapo.” 
This  term  probably  is  of  Gothic  or  Barbarian  origin. 
Some  of  the  Parthian  and  other  nations  bordering  on 
the  frontier  provinces  of  the  Roman  Empire,  distin- 
guished their  rulers  or  chiefs  by  the  name  “ Sapor”  or 
“ Sapores.”  The  good  they  derived  from  the  Unguen- 
tum Cineris  was  so  great  and  excellent,  and  it  was  so 
powerful  in  overcoming  bodily  inconveniences,  and  so 
conducive  to  personal  comfort,  that  they  called  this 
preserver  of  private  health,  by  a name  corresponding 
to,  and  derived  from  the  sovereigns  who  presided  over 
their  public  safety.  From  Sapor,  thus  was  derived 
Sapo ; two  terms  significant  of  the  powers  which  pro- 
tected the  political  and  the  individual  bodies  of  the 
people.  The  Romans  adopted  Sapo,  and  naturalized 
it  to  their  language.  From  them  the  Greeks  borrowed 
their  oaitwv.  The  French  have  derived  their  “ savon” 
from  the  same  source,  and  so  have  the  English  their 
“soap.” 

But  if  soap  was  so  late  an  invention,  and  learned 
from  the  rougher  nations  of  the  north  of  Europe  at  so 
advanced  a period  of  the  history  of  their  southern 
neighbours,  how  comes  it  to  pass  the  Hebrews  were  ac- 
quainted with  it,  as  we  read  in  the  English  version  of 
the  Bible,  translated  under  the  auspices  of  king  James? 
The  term  “ soap”  does  indeed  occur  there  in  Jeremiah , 
chap.  ii.  v.  22,  and  in  Malachi,  chap.  iii.  v.  2.  Yet 
there  can  scarcely  be  entertained  a doubt,  that  the 
translators  were  mistaken.  This  opinion  of  their  having 
misinterpreted  the  text  is  supported  by  the  Latin  Vul- 
gate version,  which  expresses  the  former  of  these  pas- 
sages by  the  words,  “ herbam  borith,”  and  the  latter 
by  “herba  fullonum.”  What,  now,  is  the  plant  Bo- 
rith, and  what  is  the  Fuller" s herb  ? Calmet,  in  his 
Dictionary  of  the  Bible,  states,  that  it  is  the  kali  or  sa- 
line vegetable,  of  whose  ashes  “ ley  and  soap  are  made.” 
Goguet  thinks  it  was  salt-wort,  a plant  very  common 
in  Syria,  Judea,  Egypt,  and  Arabia;  which,  if  burned 
to  ashes,  and  the  ashes  mingled  with  water,  formed  a 
strong  ley  fit  for  cleansing  and  whitening  cloths,  and 
doubtless  they  were  light. 

Notwithstanding  all  this  authority,  Bcza  evidently 
missed  the  true  meaning  of  the  original,  which  he  ex- 
presses in  both  the  before-mentioned  texts,  by  the  sub- 
stantive “smegma.”  But  John  Jacob  Schmidt,  in  his 
Biblischer  Medicus , mentions  this  cleansing  article  by 
the  Hebrew  name  of  “ Bor.”  This  substantive  being 
derived  from  the  root  “ ur  "fire,  plainly  indicates  that 
the  purifying  material  in  question  was  obtained  by  or 
through  fire.  Borith  would  thus  seem  to  be  the  plant 
which,  by  the  action  of  the  fire,  yielded  Bor,  that  is, 
the  detergent  article  of  the  washers  and  fullers.  On 
the  two  words  might  be  used  indifferently  to  signify 
the  plant  both  before  and  after  incineration.  Hence, 
it  may  be  inferred,  the  plant  was  a species  of  Salsola  or 
Glass-wort,  and  that  the  saline  residuum,  after  burn- 


ing, was  kelp  or  barilla;  a material  possessing  qualities 
similar  to  the  oriental  natron  or  mineral  alkali.  The 
same  thing  has  been  latterly  called  Soda,  whence  comes 
La  Soude  of  the  French,  and  the  Suds  or  Alkaline 
lixivium  of  the'English.” — New-  York  Med.  Repos.  A.] 

Sapo  terebinth  in.®.  Starkey’s  soap. 

R.  kali  preparati  calidi,  |j.  Olei  terebinth,  5 iij. 
The  hot  kali  preparatum  is  to  have  the  oil  of  turpen- 
tine gradually  blended  with  it,  in  a heated  mortar. 
Indolent  swellings  were  formerly  rubbed  with  this  ap- 
plication, and  perhaps  some  chronic  affections  of  the  • 
joints  might  still  be  benefited  by  it. 

SAPONARIA.  (From  sapo,  soap:  so  called  be 
cause  its  juice,  like  soap,  cleans  cloths.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class, 
Decandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmucopceial  name  of  the  soap-wort.  See 
Saponaria  officinalis. 

Saponaria  nucula.  See  Sapindus  saponaria. 

Saponaria  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  soap-wort,  called  also  bruise- wort.  Struthium ; 
Lanavia ; Lychnis  sylvestris ; Ibixuma.  The  root 
of  this  plant,  Saponaria — calycibus  cylindricis,  foliis 
ovato-lanceolatis,  of  Linnaeus,  is  employed  medicin- 
ally; it  has  no  peculiar  smell;  its  taste  is  sweetish, 
glutinous,  and  somewhat  bitter.  On  being  chewed  for 
some  lime,  it  is  said  to  discover  a degree  of  acrimony, 
which  continues  to  affect  the  mouth  for  a considerable 
time.  According  to  Neuman,  two  ounces  of  the  root 
yielded  eleven  drachms  of  watery  extract ; but  Cartheu- 
ser,  from  a like  quantity,  only  obtained  six  drachms, 
and  twenty-four  grains.  This  extract  manifested  a 
sweetish  taste,  followed  by  an  acrid  quality.  The 
spirituous  extract  is  less  in  quality,  but  of  a more  pene- 
trating acrid  taste.  Decoctions  of  the  root,  on  being 
sufficiently  agitated,  produces  a saponaceous  froth  ; a 
similar  soapy  quality  is  observable  also  in  the  extract, 
and  still  more  manifestly  in  the  leaves,  insomuch  that 
they  have  been  used  by  the  mendicant  monks  as  a sub- 
stitute for  soap  in  washing  of  their  clothes;  and  Ber- 
gius,  who  made  several  experiments  with  the  saponaria, 
declares  that  it  had  all  the  effects  of  soap  itself. 

From  these  peculiar  qualities  of  the  saponaria,  there 
can  be  little  doubt  of  its  possessing  a considerable  share 
of  medical  efficacy,  which  Dr.  Woodville  says  he  could 
wish  to  find  faithfully  ascertained. 

The  diseases  for  which  the  saponaria  is  recommend- 
ed, as  syphilis,  gout,  rheumatism,  and  jaundice,  are 
not,  perhaps,  the  complaints  in  which  its  use  is  most 
availing;  for  a fancied  resemblance  of  the  roots  of  sa- 
ponaria with  those  of  sarsaparilla,  seems  to  have  led 
physicians  to  think  them  simitar  in  their  effects ; and 
hence  they  have  both  been  administered  with  the  same 
intentions,  particularly  in  fixed  pains,  and  venereal  af- 
fections. Bergius  says,  “in  arthritide,  cura  mercuri- 
ale,  &c.  nullum  aptiorem  potum  novi.”  However,  ac- 
cording to  several  writers,  the  most  inveterate  cases  of 
syphilis  were  cured  by  a decoction  of  this  plant,  with- 
out the  use  of  mercury. 

Haller  informs  us  that  Boerhaave  entertained  a high 
opinion  of  its  efficacy  in  jaundice  and  other  visceral 
obstructions! 

SAPONULE.  Saponulus.  A combination  of  a vo- 
latile or  essential  oil  with  different  bases ; as  saponule 
of  ammonia,  &c. 

Sapota.  (The  West  Indian  name  of  several  sorts 
of  fruits  of  the  plum  kind.)  See  Acras  sapota. 

Sappan  lignum.  See  Hcematoxylon  campcchianum. 

SAPPHIRE.  Telesie  of  Haiiy.  Perfect  corundum 
of  Bournon.  The  oriental  ruby  and  topaz  are  sap- 
phires. Sapphire  is  a subspecies  of  rhomboidal  corun- 
dum. It  is  one  of  the  esteemed  precious  stones,  a sap- 
phire of  ten  carats’  weight  being  worth  fifty  guineas. 
Its  colours  are  blue,  red,  and  also  gray,  while,  green, 
and  yellow.  It  is  found  in  blunt-edged  pieces,  in 
roundish  pebbles,  and  crystallized  after  tho  diamond. 

It  is  the  hardest  substance  in  nature. 

Safphirina  aqua.  (So  called  from  its  sapphire  or 
blue  colour.)  Aqua  cupri  ammoniati.  Made  by  a so- 
lution of  sal  ammoniac  in  lime-water,  standing  in  & 
copper  vessel. 

Saracens  consound.  See  Solidago  virga  aurea. 

SARATOGA.  The  name  of  a county  in  the  State 
of  New-York,  in  America,  celebrated  for  its  springs  of 
mineral  water,  which  are  numerous  throughout  a cir- 
cuit of  several  miles  near  the  centre  of  that  county. 
The  ground  throughout  this  circuit  is,  generally  speak- 

265 


SAR 


SAR 


frig,  fiat,  and  in  two  or  three  places  is  covered  with  ex- 
tensive sheets  of  limpid  water,  which  are  fed  by 
streams  that  take  their  origin  in  the  neighbouring  moun- 
tains of  granite  and  gneiss.  The  soil  in  which  the 
springs  rise  is  sandy,  and  rests  upon  a bed  of  compact 
limestone,  or  argillaceous  slate,  or  gray  wacke ; and 
they  are  apparently  more  numerous  where  these  spe- 
cimens of  the  transition  and  secondary  formation  are 
ascertained  to  meet.  There  is  more  variety  in  the  de- 
gree of  mineral  impregnation  at  two  points,  about 
seven  miles  distant  from  each  other,  where  accommo- 
dation has  been  more  liberally  provided  for  visiters, 
and  which  have  taken  the  names  of  Saratoga  and 
Ballston  Spa.  The  formerof  these  seems  to  have  been 
known  to  the  Indians  before  the  formation  of  European 
settlements,  and  was  pointed  out  by  them  to  Sir  Wil- 
liam Johnson,  in  1767.  It  was  called  in  their  language 
the  Spring  of  Life , and  is  in  temperature  about  50°  of 
Fahrenheit.  Most  of  the  American  chemists  have 
made  the  analysis  of  the  Saratoga  water  an  object  of 
inquiry  and  publication,  and  though  one  or  two  of 
them  differ  as  to  the  existence  of  some  of  the  more  tri- 
fling impregnations,  they  agree  generally  that  it  con- 
tains carbonic  acid  gas,  muriate  of  soda,  carbonate  of 
soda,  carbonate  of  lime,  carbonate  of  iron,  and  carbo- 
nate of  magnesia. 

In  two  or  three  of  the  springs,  there  is,  besides,  sul- 
phuretted hydrogen  gas,  and  in  one  at  least  traces  of 
silica  and  alumina.  These  incidental  varieties  give 
rise  to  slight  differences  in  the  medicinal  effects  of  the 
springs ; but,  as  a general  rule  for  guiding  strangers  in 
their  selection,  it  may  be  stated,  that  the  more  abun- 
dant the  muriate  of  soda,  and  carbonates  of  soda,  lime, 
and  magnesia,  the  more  aperient  and  diuretic  will  be 
the  water ; while  the  greater  the  quantity  of  carbonic 
acid  and  of  iron,  in  proportion  to  the  former  ingre- 
dients, the  more  powerful  will  be  its  tonic  effects. 

The  great  superiority  of  these  American  mineral 
waters  over  every  thing  of  the  kind  to  be  found  in 
Europe,  consists, 

1st,  In  their  containing  a greater  quantity  of  carbo- 
nic acid,  or  fixed  air,  by  which  they  are  capable  of  re- 
taining in  solution  a much  larger  proportion  of  useful 
saline  matter,  of  a particular  character,  than  any  Euro- 
pean mineral  water. 

2dly,  In  their  possessing  more  efficient  purgative  pro- 
perties than  any  of  the  springs  of  Europe,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  Harrowgate,  and  perhaps  Cheltenham,  which 
are  both  not  only  destitute  of  the  refreshing  taste  given 
by  the  carbonic  acid,  but  contain  (Harrowgate  in  par- 
ticular) matters  which,  render  them  to  the  palate  in 
some  degree  offensive. 

3dly,  In  containing  such  a combination  of  materials, 
in  the  most  eligible  form,  as  fit  them  to  become  at  once 
a most  refreshing  beverage  to  all,  and  to  those  suffering 
from  the  diseases  about  to  be  mentioned  in  particular, 
a more  perfect  union  of  what  is  agreeable  with  that 
which  is  necessary  and  useful  in  the  way  of  medicine, 
than  any  that  has  hitherto  been  provided,  either  by  na- 
ture or  art. 

The  diseases  in  which  the  Saratoga  waters  have 
been  found  to  be  productive  of  the  best  effects,  are, 
dyspepsia,  cutaneous  diseases,  scrofulous  affections, 
dropsy,  chlorosis,  and  other  affections  peculiar  to  the 
female  sex,  nephritic  affections  and  gravel. 

SARCI'TES.  (From  aapSj,  flesh.)  See  Anasarca. 

SA'RCIUM.  (Diminutive  of  o-ap|,  flesh.)  A carun- 
cle, or  small  fleshy  excrescence. 

SARCOCE'LE.  (From  oarf,  flesh,  and  kt/X t),  a tu- 
mour.) Hernia  carnosa.  This  is  a disease  of  the 
body  of  the  testicle,  and  as  the  term  implies,  consists, 
in  general,  in  such  an  alteration  made  in  the  structure 
of  it,  as  produces  a resemblance  to  a hard  fleshy  sub- 
stance, instead  of  that  fine,  soft,  vascular  texture,  of 
which  it  is,  in  a natural  and  healthy  state,  composed. 

The  ancient  writers  have  made  a great  number  of 
distinctions  of  the  different  kinds  of  this  disease,  ac- 
cording to  its  different  appearances,  and  according  to 
the  mildness,  or  malignity  of  the  symptoms  with  which 
it  may  chance  to  be  attended.  Thus,  the  sarcocele , the 
hydro-sarcocele,  the  scirrhus , the  cancer , the  caro  ad- 
nata ad  testem , and  the  caro  adnata  ad  vasa,  which 
are  really  little  more  than  descriptions  of  different 
states  and  circumstances  of  the  same  disease,  are 
reckoned  as  so  many  different  complaints,  requiring  a 
variety  of  treatment,  and  deriving  their  origin  from  a 
variety  of  different  humours. 


[ Every  species  of  sarcocele  consists  primarily  in  an 
enlargement,  induration,  and  obstruction  of  the  vas- 
cular part  of  the  testicle;  but  this  alteration  is,  in  dif- 
ferent people,  attended  with  such  a variety  of  circum- 
stances, as  to  produce  several  different  appearances, 
and  to  occasion  the  many  distinctions  which  have 
been  made. 

If  the  body  of  the  testicle,  though  enlarged,  and  indu- 
rated to  some  degree,  be  perfectly  equal  in  its  surface, 
vjid  of  pain,  has  no  appearance  of  fluid  in  its  tunica 
vaginalis,  and  produces  very  little  uneasiness,  except 
what  is  occasioned  by  its  mere  weight,  it  is  usually 
called  a simple  sarcocele,  or  an  indolent  scirrhus  ; if, 
at  the  same  time  that  the  testis  is  enlarged  and  harden- 
ed, there  be  a palpable  accumulation  of  fluid  in  the  va- 
ginal coat,  the  disease  has  by  many  been  named  a 
hydro-sarcocele  ; if  the  lower  part  of  the  spermatic  ves- 
sels, and  the  epididymus  were  enlarged,  hard,  and 
knotty,  they  supposed  it  to  be  a fungous,  or  morbid  ac- 
cretion, and  called  it  the  caro  adnata  ad  vasa;  if  the 
testicle  itself  was  unequal  in  its  surface,  but  at  the 
same  time  not  painful,  they  distinguish  it  by  the  title  of 
caro  adnata  ad  testem:  if  it  was  tolerably  equal,  not 
very  painful,  nor  frequently  so,  but  at  the  same  time 
hard  and  large,  they  gave  it  the  appellation  of  an  occult 
or  benign  cancer  ; if  it  was  ulcerated,  subject  to  fre- 
quent acute  pain,  tojisemorrhage,  & c.  it  was  known  by 
that  of  a malignant  or  confirmed  cancer.  These  dif- 
ferent appearances,  though  distinguished  by  different 
titles,  are  really  no  more  than  so  many  stages  (as  it 
were)  of  the  same  kind  of  disease,  and  depend  a great 
deal  on  several  accidental  circumstances,  such  as  age, 
habit,  manner  of  living,  &c.  It  is  true,  that  many  peo- 
ple pass  several  years  with  this  disease,  under  its  most 
favourable  appearances,  and  without  encountering  any 
of  its  worst ; but,  on  the  other  hand,  there  are  many, 
who,  in  a very  short  space  of  time,  run  through  all  its 
stages.  They  who  are  most  conversant  with  it,  know 
how  very  convertible  its  mildest  symptoms  are  into  its 
most  dreadful  ones,  and  how  very  short  a space  of  time 
often  intervenes  between  the  one  and  the  other. 

There  is  hardly  any  disease  affecting  the  human 
body,  which  is  subject  to  more  variety  than  this  is,  both 
with  regard  to  its  first  manner  of  appearance,  and  the 
changes  which  it  may  undergo. 

Sometimes  the  first  appearance  is  a mere  simple  en- 
largement and  induration  of  the  body  of  the  testicle ; 
void  of  pain,  without  inequality  of  surface,  and  pro- 
ducing no  uneasiness,  or  inconvenience,  except  what 
is  occasioned  by  its  mere  weight.  And  some  people 
are  so  fortunate  to  have  it  remain  in  this  state  for  a 
very  considerable  length  of  time  without  visible  or  ma- 
terial alteration.  On  the  other  hand,  it  sometimes 
happens  that  very  soon  after  its  appearance  in  this 
mild  manner,  it  suddenly  becomes  unequal  and  knotty, 
and  is  attended  with  very  acute  pains  darting  up  to  the 
loins  and  back,  but  still  remaining  entire,  that  is,  not 
bursting  through  the  integuments.  Sometimes  the  fury 
of  the  disease  brooks  no  restraint,  but  making  its  way 
through  all  the  membranes  which  envelope  the  testicle, 
it  either  produces  a large,  foul,  stinking,  phagedenic 
ulcer,  with  hard  edges,  or  it  thrusts  forth  a painful 
gleeting  fungus,  subject  to  frequent  hremorrhage. 

Sometimes  an  accumulation  of  water  is  made  in  the 
tunica  vaginalis,  producing  that  mixed  appearance, 
called  the  hydro-sarcocele. 

Sometimes  there  is  no  fluid  at  all  in  the  cavity  of  the 
tunica  vaginalis:  but  the  body  of  the  testicle  itself  is 
formed  into  cells,  containing  either  a turbid  kind  of 
water,  a bloody  sanies,  or  a purulent  feetid  matter. 
Sometimes  the  disorder  seems  to  be  merely  local,  that 
is,  confined  to  the  testicle,  not  proceeding  from  a taint- 
ed habit,  nor  accompanied  with  diseased  viscera,  the 
patient  having  all  the  general  appearances  and  cir- 
cumstances of  health,  and  deriving  his  local  mischief 
from  an  external  injury.  At  other  times,  a pallid, 
leaden  countenance,  indigestion,  frequent  nausea,  co- 
licky pains,  sudden  purgings,  &c.  sufficiently  indicate 
a vitiated  habit,  and  diseased  viscera,  which  diseased 
viscera  may  also  sometimes  be  discovered  and  felt. 

The  progress  also  which  it  makes  from  the  testis  up- 
ward, toward  the  process,  is  very  uncertain ; the  dis- 
ease occupying  the  testicle  only,  without  affecting  the 
spermatic  process,  in  some  subjects,  for  a great  length 
of  time ; while,  in  others,  it  totally  spoils  the  testicle 
very  soon,  and  almost  as  soon  seizes  on  the  spermatic 
chord. 


SAS 


SAU 


SARCOCOLLA.  (From  a ap?,  flesh,  and  xoAAa, 
glue;  because  of  its  supposed  power  of  gluing  together 
wounds.)  A spontaneous  exudation  from  a tree  of 
the  fur  kind,  which  grows  in  Persia,  supposed  to  be 
similar  to  olibanum  or  frankincense. 

SARCOEPIPLOCE'LE.  Enlarged  testicle,  with 
rupture, .containing  omentum. 

SARCOLITE.  A variety  of  analcime. 

SARCO'LOGY.  ( Sarcologia ; from  cap?,  flesh,  and 
Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  muscles  and 
soft  parts. 

SARCO’MA.  ( Sarcoma , atis.  n.;  from  <rap?,  flesh.) 
Sarcosis  ; Pnrrus  ; Sarcophyia ; Ncevus.  A fleshy 
excrescence.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Locales , 
and  Order  Tumores,  of  Cullen. 

SARCO'MPHAEUS.  (From  trap?,  flesh,  and  ou<pa- 
Acf,  the  navel.)  A fleshy  excrescence  about  the  navel. 

Sarcophyia.  (From  trap?,  flesh,  and^uw,  to  grow.) 
A fleshy  excrescence. 

Sarcopyodes.  (From  trap?,  flesh,  and  zsvov,  pus.) 
Applied  to  the  purulent,  fleshy  discharge,  which  is 
thrown  up  in  some  stages  of  consumption. 

SARCO'SIS.  (From  trap?,  flesh.)  1.  A fleshy  tu- 
mour. 

2.  The  generation  of  flesh. 

Sarcotica.  (From  trap?,  flesh.)  Medicines  which 
promote  the  generation  of  flesh  in  wounds. 

SARDE.  Sardoin.  A variety  of  cornelian  of  a 
deep  blood-red  colour. 

Sardiasis.  (From  aapSwuiij,  the  sardonia,  or  herb, 
which,  being  eaten,  causes  convulsive  laughter.)  See 
Sardonic  laugh. 

Sardonia.  (From  Sardonia,  its  native  soil.)  A 
kind  of  smallage. 

SARDONIC  LAUGH.  ( Risus  sardonicus : so 
called  from  the  herb  sardonia , which  being  eaten  is 
said  to  cause  a deadly  convulsive  laughter.)  A kind 
of  convulsive  laugh,  or  spasmodic  grin.  See  Spasmus 
cytiicus. 

Sardonicus  risus.  See  Sardonic  laugh. 

SARDONYX.  A variety  of  cornelian  composed  of 
layers  of  white  and  red. 

SARMENTACEA3.  The  name  of  a natural  order 
of  Linnaeus’s  Fragmenta : embracing  the  plants  with 
twining  or  trailing  stems. 

SARMENTOSUS.  (From  sarmentum,  a twig,  or 
trailing  stalk.)  Trailing.  Applied  to  a creeping  stem, 
barren  of  flowers,  thrown  out  from  the  root  for  the 
purpose  of  increase. 

SARMENTUM.  {Sarmen ; from  sarpio,  to  prune, 
lop,  or  cut  off.)  A twig,  a runner. 

SAESAPARI'LLA.  (This  word  is  of  Spanish 
origin,  signifying  a red  tree.)  See  Smilax  sarsapa- 
rilla. 

Sarsaparilla  germanica.  See  Carex  arenaria. 

SAR'TORIUS.  (From  sartor , a tailor;  because 
tailors  cross  their  legs  with  it.)  Sartorius  seu  longis- 
simus  femoris , of  Cowper  ; Jlio  cresti  tibial  of  Dumas. 
This  flat  and  slender  muscle,  which  is  the  longest  of 
the  human  body,  and  from  an  inch  and  a half  to  two 
inches  in  breadth,  is  situated  immediately  under  the 
integuments,  and  extends  obliquely  from  the  upper 
and  anterior  part  of  the  thigh,  to  the  upper,  anterior, 
and  inner  part  of  the  tibia,  being  enclosed  by  a thin 
membraneous  sheath,  which  is  derived  from  the  adja- 
cent fascia  lata.  It  arises,  by  a tendon  of  about  half 
an  inch  in  breadth,  from  the  outer  surface  and  inferior 
edge  of  the  anterior  superior  spinous  process  of  the 
ilium,  but  soon  becomes  fleshy,  and  runs  down  a little 
way  obliquely  inwards,  and  then  for  some  space  upon 
the  rectus,  nearly  in  a straight  direction,  after  which 
it  passes  obliquely  over  the  vastus  internus,  and  the 
lower  part  of  the  adductor  longus,  and  then  running 
down  between  the  tendons  of  the  adductor  magnus, 
and  the  gracilis,  is  inserted,  by  a thin  tendon,  into  the 
inner  part  of  the  tibia,  near  the  inferior  part  of  its  tu 
berosity,  and  for  the  space  of  an  inch  or  two  below  it. 
This  tendon  sends  off  a thin  aponeurosis,  which  is 
spread  over  the  upper  and  posterior  part  of  the  leg. 
This  muscle  serves  to  hend  the  leg  obliquely  inwards, 
or  to  roll  the  thigh  outwards,  and  at  the  same  time 
to  bring  one  leg  across  the  other,  on  which  account 
Spigelius  first  gave  it  the  name  of  sartorius,  or  the 
tailor’s  muscle. 

SA'SSAFRAS.  (Qwasi  saxifraga;  from  saxum , 
a stone,  and  frango,  to  break ; so  called  because 
a decoction  of  its  wood  was  supposed  good  for  the 


stone ; 01,  which  is  most  probable,  from  the  river  Sas- 
safras, in  America,  on  the  banks  of  which  it  grows  in 
abundance.)  See  Lauras  sassafras. 

SASSOLINE.  Native  boracic  acid,  found  on  the 
edges  of  hot  springs  near  Sasso  in  Florence.  It  con- 
sists of  boracic  acid  86,  ferruginous  sulphate  of  man- 
ganese 11,  and  sulphate  offline  3. 

SATELLITE.  The  veins  which  accompany  the 
brachial  artery  as  far  as  the  hend  of  the  cubit,  are  so 
called. 

SATIN  SPAR.  A species  of  fibrous  limestone. 

Saturantia.  Medicines  which  neutralize  the  acid 
in  the  stomach. 

SATURATION.  Saturatio.  A term  employed  in 
pharmacy  and  chemistry  to  express  the  state  of  a body 
which  has  a power  of  dissolving  another,  to  a certain 
extent  only,  in  which  it  has  effected  that  degree  of  so- 
lution. Some  substances  unite  in  all  proportions. 
Such,  for  example,  are  acids  in  general,  and  some  other 
salts  with  water;  and  many  of  the  inetals  with  each 
other.  But  there  are  likewise  many  substances  which 
cannot  be  dissolved  in  a fluid,  at  a certain  temperature, 
in  any  .quantity  beyond  a certain  proportion.  Thus 
water  will  dissolve  only  about  one-third  of  its  weight 
of  common  salt,  and,  if  more  be  added,  it  will  remain 
solid.  A fluid,  which  holds  in  solution  as  much  of  any 
substance  as  it  can  dissolve,  is  said  to  be  saturated  with 
it.  But  saturation  with  one  substance  does  not  de- 
prive the  fluid  of  its  power  of  acting  on  and  dissolving 
some  other  bodies,  and  in  many  cases  it  increases  this 
power.  For  example,  water  saturated  with  salt  will 
dissolve  sugar  ; and  water  saturated  with  carbonic  acid 
will  dissolve  iron,  though  without  this  addition  its  ac- 
tion on  this  metal  is  scarcely  perceptible. 

The  word  saturation  is  likewise  used  in  another 
sense  by  chemists : The  union  of  two  principles  pro- 
duces a body,  the  properties  of  which  differ  from  those 
of  its  component  parts,  but  resemble  those  of  the  pre 
dominating  principle.  When  the  principles  are  in 
such  proportion  that  neither  predominates,  they  are 
said  to  be  saturated  with  each  other ; but  if  otherwise, 
the  most  predominant  principle  is  said  to  be  subsaturated 
or  undersaturated,  and  the  other  supersaturated  or  over 
saturated. 

SATUREI'A.  (From  satyri,  the  lustful  satyrs ; be- 
cause it  makes  those  who  eat  it  lascivious.  Blanch.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin  naan  sys- 
tem. Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Gymnospermia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoBial  name  of  the  summer  savory. 

Satureia  capitata.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
ciliated  savory.  Thymus  creticus.  It  possesses  simi- 
lar virtues  to  our  thyme,  but  in  a stronger  degree. 

Satureia  hortensis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  summer  savory.  Satureia  saliva ; Culina  saliva 
Plinii;  Thymbra.  This  low  shrub  is  cultivated  in 
our  gardens  for  culinary  purposes.  It  has  a warm, 
aromatic,  penetrating  taste,  and  smells  like  thyme,  but 
milder.  It  is  an  ingredient  in  most  of  the  warm  stews 
and  made  dishes. 

Satureia  sativa.  See  Satureia  hortensis. 

SATU'RNUS.  (From  the  planet  or  heathen  god,  of 
that  name.)  The  chemical  name  of  lead, 

SATYRI'ASIS.  (Fiorn  oarvpos,  a satyr;  because 
they  are  said  to  be  greatly  addicted  to  venery.)  Saty- 
riasmus ; Priapismvs ; Salacitas ; Brachuna  ; Jlras- 
con.  Excessive  and  violent  desire  for  coition  in  men. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Locales,  and  Order 
Dysorexiai , of  Cullen. 

SATY'RION.  (From  oarvpo s,  an  animal  given  to 
venery  : so  called  because  it  was  supposed  to  excite 
venery  if  only  held  in  the  hand.)  Sec  Orchis  mascula. 

SATYRIUM.  See  Orchis  mascula. 

Sauce  alone.  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 

SAUNDERS.  See  Santalum  album. 

Saunders,  red.  See  Pterocarpus. 

Saur  kraut.  Cabbage  preserved  in  brine.  An  ar- 
ticle of  food  common  in  Germany,  like  our  pickled 
cabbage.  • 

SAUSSURITE.  A hard  mineral,  placed  by  Jameson 
near  Andalusite,  of  white  and  gray  or  green  colour, 
found  at  the  foot  of  Mount  Rosa. 

SAUVAGES,  Francis  Boissier  de,  was  born  at 
Ala:s  in  Lower  Languedoc,  in  1706.  He  graduated 
at  Montpelier  when  only  20,  but  still  continued  his 
studies,  and  four  years  after  went  for  farther  im- 
provement to  Paris.  On  his  return  to  Montpelier  lie 
obtained  a professorship  in  1734;  but  his  reputati  ,n 

2 61 


SCA 


SCA 


for  ingenuity  of  speculation  is  said  to  have  obstructed 
his  success  in  practice.  In  1752  he  was  made  professor 
of  botany,  having  for  twelve  years  before  officiated  as 
demonstrator  of  the  plants  in  the  botanic  garden.  His 
death  occurred  in  1767.  He  was  a member  of  several 
of  the  learned  societies  of  Europe,  and  obtained  the 
prizes  given  by  many  public  bodies  for  the  best  essays 
on  given  subjects.  Among  his  earlier  publications 
was  one,  entitled  “Nouvelles  Classes  des  Maladies,” 
the  outline  of  the  system  of  Nosology,  which  has  ren- 
dered his  name  illustrious,  but  which  did  not  appear  in 
its  complete  form,  till  after  an  additional  labour  of 
thirty  years  had  been  bestowed  upon  it.  This  work, 
consisting  of  five  octavo  volumes,  contains  an  immense 
body  of  information,  indeed,  almost  every  thing  then 
known  concerningthe  species  of  disease ; but  the  whole 
is  very  loosely  arranged.  He  had  collected  many  new 
observations  and  descriptions,  with  a view  to  incorpo- 
rate them  in  a second  edition ; which,  however,  he  did 
not  live  to  accomplish.  These  materials  were  used  by 
Dr.  Cramer  after  his  death.  Besides  this  valuable 
work,  Sauvages  was  author  of  numerous  others  on 
different  subjects  relating  to  medicine. 

SAVIN.  See  Juniperus  sabina. 

Savin  ointment.  See  Ceratum  salines. 

Savina.  See  Juniperus  sabina. 

SAVOURY.  See  Satureia. 

SAXI'FRAG  A.  (From  saxum,  a stone,  and  frango , 
to  break  : so  called  because  it  was  supposed  to  be  good 
against  the  stone,  in  the  bladder.)  The  name  of  a ge- 
nus of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Decan- 
uria ; Order,  Digynia. 

Saxifraga  alba.  See  Saxifraga  granulata. 

Saxifraga  anglica.  See  Peucedanum. 

Saxifraga  crassifolia.  The  root  of  this  speciesof 
saxifrage  is  extolled  by  professor  Pallas  as  an  antiseptic. 

Saxifraga  granulata.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  white  saxifrage.  Saxifraga  alba.  Called  by  Ori- 
basius  Besto.  Sanicula  sedum.  Linnteus  describes 
the  taste  of  this  plant  to  be  acrid  and  pungent,  which 
we  have  not  been  able  to  discover ; neither  the  tuber- 
cles of  the  root  nor  the  leaves  manifest  to  the  organs 
of  taste  any  quality  likely  to  be  of  medicinal  use,  and 
therefore,  though  this  species  of  saxifrage  has  been 
long  employed  as  a popular  jemedy  in  nephritic  and 
gravelly  disorders,  yet  we  do  not  find  either  from  its 
sensible  qualities,  or  from  any  published  instances  of 
its  efficacy,  that  it  deserves  a place  in  the  Maftria  Me- 
dica.  The  superstitious  doctrine  of  signatures  sug- 
gested the  use  of  the  root,  which  is  a good  example  of 
what  Linnaeus  has  termed  radix  granulata.  The  bulbs 
or  tubercles  of  such  roots  answer  an  important  pur- 
pose in  vegetation,  by  supplying  the  plants  with  nou- 
rishment and  moisture,  and  thereby  enabling  them  to 
resist  the  effects  of  that  drought  to  which  the  dry  soils 
they  inhabit  peculiarly  expose  them. 

Saxifraga  rubra.  See  Spircza  filipendula. 

Saxifraga  vulgaris.  See  Peucedanum  silaus. 

SAXIFRAGE.  See  Saxifraga. 

Saxif  rage , burnet.  See  Pimpinella  saxifraga. 

Saxifrage , English.  See  Peucedanum  silaus. 

Saxifrage , meadow.  See  Peucedanum  silaus. 

Saxifrage , white.  See  Saxifraga  granulata. 

Saxon  blue.  See  Blue , saxon. 

SCAB.  A hard  substance  covering  superficial  ulcera- 
tions, and  formed  by  a concretion  of  the  fluid  dis- 
charged from  them. 

SCABER.  Rough  to  the  touch  from  any  little  rigid 
inequalities  : applied  to  several  parts  of  plants. 

SCA  BIES.  (Scabies,  ei.  f.;  from  scabo,  to  scratch.) 
See  Psora. 

SCABIO'SA.  (From  scaber , rough : so  called  from 
its  rough  hairy  surface.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tetrandria; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacoptEial  name  of  the  common  scabi- 
ous. See  Scabiosa  arvensis. 

Scabiosa  arvensis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  field  scabious.  This  herb,  Scabiosa — corollis 
quadrifidis  radiantibus  ; foliis  pinnati fib  is,  incisis ; 
caule  hispido,  of  Linnaeus,  and  its  flowers  are  some- 
times used  medicinally.  The  whole  plant  possesses  a 
bitter  andsubadstringent  taste,  and  was  formerly  much 
employed  in  the  cure  of  some  leprous  affections  and 
diseases  of  the  lungs. 

Scabiosa  succisa.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
devil’s  bit  scabious. 

268 


SCABRIDEAE.  (From  scaler , rough.)  The  name 
of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  plants  with  rough  leaves, 
incomplete  and  inelegant  flowers. 

SCA'LA.  A ladder  or  staircase. 

Scala  tympani.  The  superior  spiral  cavity  of  the 
cochlea. 

Scala  vestibuli.  The  inferior  spiral  cavity  of  the 
cochlea. 

SCALD.  See  Ambustio. 

Scald  head.  See  Tinea  capitis. 

SCALE.  Squama.  A lamina  of  morbid  cuticle, 
hard,  thickened,  whitish,  and  opake,  of  a very  small 
size,  and  irregular,  often  increasing  into  layers,  deno- 
minated crusts.  Both  scales  and  crusts  repeatedly  fall 
off,  and  are  reproduced  in  a short  time. 

SCALE'NUS.  (Scalenus,  sc.  Musculus  ; from  crxa- 
\rjvoi,  irregular  or  unequal.)  A muscle  about  which 
anatomical  writers  have  differed  greatly  in  their  de- 
scriptions. It  is  situated  at  the  side  of  the  neck,  be- 
tween the  transverse  processes  of  the  cervical  vertebrae 
and  the  upper  part  of  the  thorax.  The  ancients  who 
gave  it  its  name  from  its  resemblance  to  an  irregular 
triangle,  considered  it  as  one  muscle.  Vesalius  and 
Winslow  divide  it  into  two,  Fallopius  and  Cowper  into 
three,  Douglas  into  four,  and  Albinils  into  five  portions, 
which  they  describe  as  distinct  muscles.  Without 
deviating  in  the  least  from  anatomical  accuracy,  it  may 
be  considered  as  one  muscle  divided  into  three  portions. 
The  anterior  portion  arises  commonly  from  the  trans- 
verse processes  of  the  six  inferior  vetebrae  of  the  neck, 
by  as  many  short  tendons,  and  descending  obliquely 
outward,  is  inserted  tendinous  and  fleshy,  into  the 
upper  side  of  the  first  rib,  near  its  cartilage.  The 
axillary  artery  passes  through  this  portion,  and  some- 
times divides  it  into  two  slips,  about  an  inch  and  a 
half  above  its  insertion.  The  middle  portion  arises  by 
distinct  tendons,  from  the  transverse  processes  of  the 
four  last  vertebras  of  the  neck,  and  descending  obliquely 
outwards  and  a little  backwards,  is  inserted  tendinous 
into  the  outer  and  upper  part  of  the  first  rib,  from  its 
root  to  within  the  distance  of  an  inch  from  its  cartilage. 
The  space  between  this  and  the  anterior  portion,  af- 
fords a passage  to  the  nerves  going  to  the  upper  ex- 
tremities. It  is  in  part  covered  by  the  third  or  posterior 
portion,  which  is  the  thinnest  and  longest  of  the  three. 
This  arises  from  the  transverse  processes  of  the 
second,  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  vertebrae  of  the  neck, 
by  distinct  tendons,  and  is  inserted  into  the  upper  edge 
of  the  second  rib,  at  the  distance  of  about  an  inch  and 
a half  from  its  articulation,  by  a broad  flat  tendon. 
The  use  of  the  scalenus  is  to  move  the  neck  to  one 
side,  when  it  acts  singly,  or  to  bend  it  forwards,  when 
both  muscles  act ; and  when  the  neck  is  fixed,  it  serves 
to  elevate  the  ribs,  and  diiate  the  chest 

Scalenus  prtmus.  See  Scalenus. 

Scalenus  secundus.  See  Scalenus. 

Scalenus  tertius.  See  Scalenus. 

SCALPE'LLUM.  A scalpel  or  common  dissecting 
knife. 

Scalfrum.  A denticular  raspetory,  used  in  tie 
panning. 

Scaly.  See  Squamosus. 

SCAMMO'NIUM.  (A  corruption  of  the  Arabian 
word  chamozah.)  See  Convolvulus  scammonia. 

SCAMMONY.  See  Convolvulus  scammonia. 

SCANDENS.  Climbing,  either  with  spiral  tendrils 
for  its  support,  or  by  adhesive  fibres.-  Applied  to  stems, 
&c.  as  that  of  the  Vitis  vinifera , and  Bryonia  dioica. 

SCA'NDIX.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

Scandix  cerefolium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  officinal  chervil.  Cerefolium;  Chcerophyllum ; 
Ckcerefolium.  Chervil.  This  plant,  Scandix — semi- 
nibus  nitidis , ovato-subvlatis  ; umbellis  sessilibus  late- 
ralibus,  of  Linnaeus,  is  a salubrious  culinary  herb, 
sufficiently  grateful  both  to  the  palate  and  stomach, 
slightly  aromatic,  gently  aperient,  and  diuretic. 

Scandix  odorata.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sweet  cicely,  myrrhis , which  possesses  virtues  similar 
to  the  common  chervil.  See  Scandix  cerefolium. 

SCATIIA.  (A  skiff,  or  cock-boat;  from  auanuo, 
to  make  hollow:  because  formerly  it  was  made  by 
excavating  a large  tree.)  1.  The  excavation  or  cavity 
of  the  auricula,  or  external  ear,  between  the  helix  and 
antihelix. 

2.  The  name  of  a double  headed  roller. 


SCA 


SCA 


SCAPHOID.  See  Scaphoidcs. 

SCAPHOI'DES.  (From  oKa<pri,  a little  vessel,  or 
boat,  and  eidos , resemblance.)  Boat-like.  See  Navi- 
culare  os. 

SCAPOLITE.  Pyramidal  felspar.  Professor  Jame- 
son divides  this  into  four  subspecies  : 

1.  Radiated,  of  a gray  colour,  resinous,  and  pearly 
in  distinct  coycretions,  and  crystallized,  found  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  Arendal,  in  Norway,  associated  with 
magnetic  ironstone,  an<^  felspar. 

2.  Foliated  scapolite , crystallized  and  of  a gray, 
green,  and  black  colour,  found  in  granular  granite,  or 
whitestone,  in  the  Saxon  Erzegebirge. 

3.  Compact  scapolite , of  a red  colour,  found  with 
Hie  former  species. 

4.  Elaolite. 

SCA'PCLA.  (From  the  Hebrew  schipha.)  Omo- 
plata ; Os  homoplatce ; Scoptula;  Epinotion.  The 
shoulder-blade.  This  bone,  which  approaches  nearly 
to  a triangular  figure,  is  fixed,  not  unlike  a buckler,  to 
the  upper,  posterior,  and  lateral  part  of  the  thorax, 
extending  from  the  first  to  about  the  seventh  rib.  The 
anterior  and  internal  surface  is  irregularly  concave, 
from  the  impression,  not  of  the  ribs,  as  the  generality 
of  anatomists  have  supposed,  but  of  the  subscapularis 
muscle.  Its  posterior  and  external  surface  is  convex 
and  divided  into  two  unequal  fosste  by  a considerable 
spine,  which,  rising  small  from  the  posterior  edge  of 
the  scapula,  becomes  gradually  higher  and  broader,  as 
it  approaches  the  anterior  and  superior  angle  of  the 
bone,  till  at  length  it  terminates  in  a broad  and  flat 
process,  at  the  top  of  the  shoulder,  called  the  processus 
acromion.  On  the  anterior  edge  of  this  processus 
acromion,  we  observe  an  oblong,  concave,  articulating 
surface  covered  with  cartilage,  for  the  articulation  of 
the  scapula  with  the  clavicle.  At  its  lower  part,  the 
acromion  is  hollowed,  to  allow  a passage  to  the  supra 
and  infra  spinali  muscles.  The  ridge  of  the  spine  af- 
fords two  rough,  flat  surfaces,  for  the  insertion  of  the 
trapezius  and  deltoid  muscles.  Of  the  two  fossae  into' 
which  the  external  surface  of  the  bone  is  divided  by 
the  spine,  the  superior  one,  which  is  the  smallest,  serves 
to  lodge  the  supra  spiuatus  muscle;  and  the  inferior 
fossa,  which  is  much  larger  than  the  other,  gives  origin 
to  the  infra  spinatus.  The  triangular  shape  of  the 
scapula  leads  us  to  consider  its  angles  and  its  sides. 
The  upper  posterior  angle  is  neither  so  thick,  nor  has 
so  rough  a surface,  as  the  inferior  one  ; but  the  most 
remarkable  of  the  three  angles  of  this  bone  is  the  an- 
terior one,  which  is  of  great  thickness,  and  formed 
into  a glenoid  cavity  of  an  oval  shape,  the  greatest 
diameter  of  which  is  from  below  upwards.  This 
cavity,  in  the  recent  subject,  is  furnished  with  cartilage, 
and  receives  the  head  of  the  os  humeri.  The  cartila- 
ginous crust,  which  surrounds  its  brims,  makes  it  ap- 
pear deeper  in  the  fresh  subject  than  in  the  skeleton. 
A little  beyond  this  glenoid  cavity,  the  bone  becomes 
narrower,  so  as  to  give  the  appearance  of  a neck  : and 
above  this  rises  a considerable  process,  which,  from 
being  thick  at  its  origin,  becomes  thinner,  and,  in  some 
degree,  flattened  at  its  extremity.  This  process  projects 
considerably,  and  is  curved  downwards.  From  its 
supposed  resemblance  to  a beak  of  a bird,  it  is  called 
the  coracoid  process.  From  the  whole  external  side 
of  this  process,  a strong  and  broad  ligament  is  stretched 
to  the  processus  acromion,  becoming  narrower  as  it 
approaches  the  latter  process,  so  as  to  be  of  a some- 
what triangular  shape.  This  ligament,  and  the  two 
processes  with  which  it  is  connected,  are  evidently  in- 
tended for  the  protection  of  the  joint,  and  to  prevent  a 
luxation  of  the  os  humeri  upwards.  Of  the  three 
sides  of  the  scapula,  the  posterior  one,  which  is  the 
longest,  is  called  the  basis.  This  side  is  turned  towards 
the  vertebrae.  Us  other  two  sides  are  called  costa. 
The  superior  costa,  which*  is  the  upper  and  shortest 
side,  is  likewise  thinner  than  the  other  two,  having  a 
sharp  edge.  It  is  nearly  horizontal,  and  parallel  with 
the  second  rib  ; and  is  interrupted  near  the  basis  of  the 
coracoid  process,  by  a semicircular  niche,  which  is 
closed  by  a ligament  that  extends  from  one  end  of  it  to 
the  other,  and  alfords  a passage  to  vessels  and  nerves. 
Besides  this  passage,  there  are  other  niches  in  the 
scapula  for  the  transmission  of  vessels  ; viz.  one  be- 
tween the  coracoid  process  and  the  head  of  the  bone, 
and  another  between  its  neck  arid  the  processus  acro- 
mion. The  third  side  of  the  scapula,  or  the  inferior 
costa,  as  it  is  called,  is  of  considerable  thickness,  aqd 


extends  obliquely  from  the  neck  of  the  hone  to  its 
inferior  angle,  reaching  from  about  the  third  to  the 
eighth  rib.  The  scapula  has  but  very  little  cellular 
substance,  and  is  of  unequal  thickness,  being  very 
thin  at  its  middle  part,  where  it  is  covered  by  a great 
number  of  muscles,  and  having  its  neck,  the  acromion, 
and  coracoid  process,  of  considerable  strength.  In  the 
foetus,  the  basis  and  the  neck  of  the  scapula,  together 
with  its  glenoid  cavity,  acromion,  coracoid  process, 
and  the  ridge  of  the  spine,  are  so  many  epiphyses  with 
respect  to  the  rest  of  the  bone,  to  which  they  are  not 
completely  united  till  a considerable  time  after  birth. 
The  scapula  is  articulated  to  the  clavicle  and  os  hu- 
meri, n which  last  it  serves  as  a fulcrum  ; and,  by 
altering  its  position,  it  alfords  a greater  scope  to  the 
bones  of  the  arm  in  their  different  motions.  It  likewise 
affords  attachment  to  a great  number  of  muscles,  and 
posteriorly  serves  as  a defence  to  the  thorax. 

SCAPULAR.  ( Scapularis ; from  scapula , the 
shoulder  bone.)  Belonging  to  the  scapula  ; as  the  sca- 
pulary  arteries  and  veins,  which  are  branches  of  the 
subclavian  and  axillary. 

SCAPULA'RIA.  (From  scapula,  the  shoulder- 
bone.)  A scapulary.  A bandage  for  the  shoulder- 
blade. 

SCAPUS.  ( Scapus , i.  m.  ; from  aicanra,  to  lean  or 
rest  upon : because  it  rests  as  it  were  on  the  root  or 
base.)  A stalk  which  springs  from  the  root,  and  bears 
the  flowers  and  fruit,  but  not  the  leaves.  The  prim 
rose  and  cowslip  are  good  examples  of  it. 

The  following  are  the  principal  varieties : 

1.  Teres  ; as  in  Plantago  major. 

2.  Angulosus  ; as  in  Plantago  lanceolata. 

3.  Ventricosus , hollow  at  the  bottom ; as  in  Allium 
cepa. 

4.  Flexuosus ; as  in  Orchis  flexuosa. 

5.  Anceps;  as  Alium  angulosum. 

6.  Filiformis ; as  Beilis  bellidoides. 

7.  Triquctrus  ; as  Allium  triquetrum. 

8.  Spiralis;  as  Anthericum  spirale,  and  that  won- 
derful plant,  Valisneria  spiralis. 

9.  Pentagonus ; as  Ophris  paludosa. 

10.  Articulatus  ; as  Statice  echioides. 

11.  Erectus  ; in  Tulipa  gesneriana. 

12.  Ascerulens  ; in  Silymbrium  vimin^um. 

13.  Declinatus ; as  Astragalus  incanus. 

14.  Decumbens  ; as  Potentilla  sabacaulis. 

15.  Dichotomus ; as  Statice  tartarica. 

16.  JVudus;  as  Convallariamajalis. 

17.  Foliosus  ; as  Ophris  insectifera. 

18.  Bracteatus,  and  most  of  the  Orchides. 

19.  Imbricatus  ; as  Tussilago  farfara. 

20.  Sctaceus ; as  Schaenus  bulbosus. 

21.  Vaginatus;  as  Aretbusa  buibosa. 

When  several  species  of  the  same  plant  have  a sea 
pus,  and  it  is  wanting  in  one  of  the  same  species,  it  is 
termed  exscapus ; as  in  Astragalus  exscapus. 

SCARBOROUGH.  1.  The  name  of  a town  in  York- 
shire, noted  for  its  ferruginous  spring.  There  are  two 
species  of  chalybeate  water  found-  in  this  spot,  and 
they  differ  considerably  in  their  composition,  though 
they  rise  nearly  contiguous  to  each  other.  The  one  is 
a simple  carbonated  chalybeate,  similar  to  the  Tun- 
bridge water ; the  other,  which  is  better  known  and 
more  frequented,  and  more  particularly  distinguished 
as  Scarborough  water,  has,  in  conjunction  with  the 
iron,  a considerable  admixture  of  a purging  salt,  which 
adds  much  to  its  value.  The  diseases  in  which  it  is 
ordered  are  similar  to  those  in  which  Cheltenham 
water  is  prescribed,  only  it  is  necessary  to  increase  the 
purgative  effect  of  this  water  by  adding  similar  salts. 
It  is,  therefore,  chiefly  as  an  alterative  that  this  water 
can  he  employed  in  its  natural  state. 

Scarborough  has  an  advantage  belonging  to  its  situ- 
ation which  Cheltenham  does  not  possess,  that  of  af- 
fording an  opportunity  for  sea-bathing,  the  use  of 
which  will,  in  many  cases,  much  assist  in  the  plan  of 
cure  for  many  of  the  disorders  for  which  the  mineral 
water  is  resorted  to. 

2.  The  name  of  a physician.  Sir  Charles,  born 
about  the  year  1616.  Intending  to  follow  the  medical 
profession,  he  went  to  study  at  Cambridge,  and  applied 
himself  particularly  to  the  mathematics,  in  which  he 
made  great  proficiency.  During  the  civil  wars  he  was 
obliged  to  remove  to  Oxford,  where  lie  entered  under 
the  celebrated  Harvey,  then  warden  of  Merton  Col- 
lege, who,  being  employed  in  writing  his  treatise  “ De 

o«a 


SCA 


SCA 


Oeneratione  Animalium,”  gladly  accepted  the  assist- 
ance of  Mr.  Scarborough.  Upon  taking  the  degree  of 
doctor  of  medicine,  he  settled  in  the  metropolis,  where 
he  practised  with  great  reputation.  He  became  a fel- 
low of  the  college  of  physicians,  in  which  he  was  much 
respected  for  his  talents ; and  being  appointed  to  intro- 
duce the  Marquis  of  Dorchester,  who  was  admitted 
into  that  body  in  1658,  he  made  an  elegant  Latin  speech 
on  that  occasion.  In  the  mean  time  he  began  to  deli- 
ver anatomical  lectures  at  Surgeons’  Hall,  which  were 
highly  approved,  and  continued  for  sixteen  or  seventeen 
years.  In  1669  the  order  of  knigluhood  was  conferred 
upon  him  by  Charles  II.,  who  also  appointed  him  his 
chief  physician ; and  he  enjoyed  the  same  office  under 
the  two  succeeding  monarchs.  He  was  likewise  made 
physician  to  the  Tower  of  London,  which  appoint- 
ment he  retained  till  his  death  about  the  year  1702. 
The  works  left  by  him  were  chiefly  mathematical. 

SCARF-SKIN.  See  Cuticle  and  Skin. 

SCARIFICATION.  (Scarijicatio ; from  scarifico , 
to  scarify.)  A superficial  incision  made  with  a lancet, 
or  a chirurgical  instrument  called  a scarificator,  for  the 
purpose  of  taking  away  blood,  or  letting  out  fluids,  &c. 

SCARIFICATOR.  An  instrument  used  by  sur- 
geons and  cuppers  to  evacuate  blood.  It  is  made  in 
form  of  a box,  in  which  are  fitted,  ten,  twelve,  or  more 
lancets,  all  perfectly  in  the  same  plane  ; which  being, 
as  it  were,  cocked,  by  means  of  a spring  are  all  dis- 
charged at  the  same  time,  by  pulling  a kind  of  trigger, 
and  driven  equally  within  the  skin. 

SCARI'OLA.  See  Lactuca scanola. 

Scariola  gallorum.  See  Lactuca  scariola. 

SCARLATI'NA.  (From  scarlatto , the  Italian  for 
a deep  red.)  The  scarlet  fever.  A genus  of  disease 
in  the  Class  Pyrexia , and  Order  Exanthemata , of 
Cullen  ; characterized  by  contagious  synocha;  the 
fourth  day  the  face  swells ; a scarlet  eruption  appears 
on  the  skin  in  patches  ; which,  after  three  or  four  days, 
ends  in  the  desquamation  of  the  cuticle,  and  is  often 
succeeded  by  anasarca.  It  has  two  species : 

1.  Scarlatina  simplex , the  mild. 

2.  Scarlatina  cynanchica , or  anginosa , with  ulcerated 
sore  throat. 

Dr.  Willan  has  added  to  these  a third,  called  malig- 
na, agreeing  with  the  cynanche  maligna,  of  Cullen. 

Some  have  flsserted  that  scarlatina  never  attacks  the 
same  person  a second  time ; more  extensive  observa- 
tion has  confuted  this  opinion.  It  seizes  persons  of  all 
ages,  but  children  and  young  persons  are  most  subject 
to  it,  and  it  appears  at  all  seasons  of  the  year ; but  it  is 
mot  e frequently  met  with  towards  the  end  of  autumn, 
or  beginning  of  winter,  than  at  any  other  periods,  at 
which  time  it  very  often  becomes  a prevalent  epi- 
demic. It  is,  beyond  afi  doubt,  a very  contagious  dis- 
ease. 

The  one  to  which  it  bears  the  greatest  resemblance 
is  the  measles ; but  from  this  it  is  readily  to  be  distin- 
guished by  the  absence  of  the  cough,  watery  eye,  run- 
ning at  the  nose  and  sneezing,  which  arc  the  predo- 
minant symptoms  in  the  early  stage  of  the  measles,  but 
which  do  not  usually  attend  on  the  scarlatina,  or  at 
least  in  any  high  degree. 

It  begins,  like  other  fevers,  with  languor,  lassitude, 
confusion  of  ideas,  chills,  and  shiverings,  alternated  by 
fits  of  heat.  The  thirst  is  considerable,  the  skin  dry, 
and  the  patient  is  often  incommoded  with  anxiety, 
nausea,  and  vomiting.  About  the  third  day,  the  scar- 
let efflorescence  appears  on  the  skin,  which  seldom  pro- 
duces, however,  any  remission  of  the  fever.  On  the 
departure  of  the  efflorescence,  which  usually  continues 
out  only  for  three  or  four  days,  a gentle  sweat  comes 
on,  the  fever  subsides,  the  cuticle  or  scarf-skin  then 
falls  off  vn  small  scales,  and  the  patient  gradually  re- 
gains his  former  strength  and  health. 

On  the  disappearance  of  the  efflorescence  in  scarla- 
tina, it  is,  however,  no  uncommon  occurrence  for  an 
anasarcous  swelling  to  affect  the  whole  body,  but  this 
is  usually  of  a very  short  continuance. 

Scarlatina  anginosa,  in  several  instances,  approaches 
very  near  to  the  malignant  form.  The  patient  is  seized 
not  only  with  a coldness  and  shivering,  but  likewise 
with  great  languor,  debility,  and  sickness,  succeeded 
by  heat,  nausea,  vomiting  of  bilious  matter,  soreness 
of  the  throat,  inflammation,  and  ulceration  in  the  ton- 
sils, &c.,  a frequent  and  laborious  breathing,  and  a 
quick  and  small  depressed  pulse.  When  the  efflores- 
cence appears,  which  is  usually  on  the  third  day,  it 
o-n 


brings  no  relief ; on  the  contrary,  the  symptoms  are 
much  aggravated,  and  fresh  ones  arise. 

In  the  progress  of  the  disease,  one  universal  redness 
unattended,  however,  by  any  pustular  eruption,  per- 
vades the  face,  body,  and  limbs,  which  parts  appear 
somewhat  swollen.  The  eyes  and  nostrils  partake 
likewise  more  or  less  of  the  redness,  and,  in  proportion 
as  the  former  have  an  inflamed  appearance,  so  does  the 
tendency  to  delirium  prevail. 

On  the  first  attack,  the  fauces  are  often  much  in- 
flamed; but  this  is  usually  soon  succeeded  by  grayish 
sloughs,  which  give  the  parts  a speckled  appearance, 
and  render  the  breath  more  or  less  foetid.  The  patient 
is  often  cut  off  in  a few  days  : and  even  if  he  reco- 
vers, it  will  be  by  slow  degrees  ; dropsical  swellings,  or 
tumours  of  the  parotid,  and  other  glands,  slowly  sup- 
purating, being  very  apt  to  follow.  In  the  malignant 
form  of  the  disease  the  symptoms  at  first  are  pretty 
much  the  same;  but  some  of  the  following  peculiari- 
ties are  afterward  observable.  The  pulse  is  small,  in- 
distinct, and  irregular;  the  tongue,  teeth,  and  lips, 
covered  with  a brown  or  black  incrustation  ; a dull 
redness  of  the  eyes,  with  a dark-red  flushing  of  the 
cheeks,  deafness,  delirium,  or  coma ; the  breath  is  ex- 
tremely foetid  ; the  respiration  rattling  and  laborious, 
partly  from  viscid  phlegm  clogging  the  fauces  ; the  de- 
glutition is  constricted  and  painful ; and.there  is  a ful- 
ness and  livid  colour  of  the  neck,  with  retraction  of 
the  head.  Ulcerations  are  observed  on  the  tonsils  and 
adjoining  parts,  covered  with  dark  sloughs,  and  sur- 
rounded by  a livid  base ; and  the  tongue  is  often  so  ten- 
der as  to  be  excoriated  by  the  slightest  touch.  A n acrid 
discharge  flows  from  the  nostrils,  causing  soreness,  or 
chaps,  nay,  even  blisters,  about  the  nose  and  lips  ; the 
fluid  discharged  being  at  first  thin,  but  afterward  thick 
and  yellowish.  The  rash  is  usually  faint,  except  in  a 
few  irregular  patches ; and  it  presently  changes  to  a 
dark,  or  livid  red  colour : it  appears  late,  is  very  uncer- 
tain in  its  duration,  and  often  intermixed  with  pete- 
chias ; it  sometimes  disappears  suddenly  a few  hours 
after  it  is  formed,  and  comes  out  again  at  the  expira- 
tion of  two  or  three  days.  In  an  advanced  stage  of 
the  disease,  where  petechias,  and  other  symptoms  cha- 
racteristic of  putrescency,  are  present,  hasmorrhages 
frequently  break  forth  from  the  nose,  mouth,  and  other 
parts. 

When  scarlatina  is  to  terminate  in  health,  the 
fiery  redness  abates  gradually,  and  is  succeeded  by  a 
brown  colour,  the  skin  becomes  rough,  and  peels  off  in 
small  scales,  the  tumefaction  subsides,  and  health  is 
gradually  restored.  On  the  contrary,  when  it  is  to  ter- 
minate fatally,  the  febrile  symptoms  run  very  high  from 
the  first  of  its  attack,  the  skin  is  intensely  hot  and  dry, 
the  pulse  is  very  frequent  but  small,  great  thirst  pre- 
vails, the  breath  is  very  foetid,  the  efflorescence  makes 
its  appearance  on  the  second  day,  or  sooner,  and  about 
the  third  or  fourth  is  probably  interspersed  with  large 
livid  spots;  and  a high  degree  of  delirium  ensuing,  or 
haemorrhages  breaking  out,  the  patient  is  cut  off  about 
the  sixth  or  eighth  day.  In  some  cases  a severe  purging 
arises,  which  never  fails  to  prove  fatal.  Some,  again, 
where  the  symptoms  do  not  run  so  high,  instead  of  re- 
covering, as  is  usual,  about  the  time  the  skin  begins  to 
regain  its  natural  colour,  become  dropsical,  fall  into  a 
kind  of  lingering  way,  and  are  carried  off  in  the  course 
of  a few  weeks. 

Scarlatina,  in  its  inflammatory  form,  is  not  usually 
attended  with  danger,  although  a considerable  degree 
of  delirium  sometimes  prevails  for  a day  or  two  ; but 
when  it  partakes  much  of  the  malignant  character,  or 
degenerates  into  typhus  putrida,  which  it  is  apt  to  do, 
it  often  proves  fatal.  On  dissection  of  those  who  die 
of  this  disease,  the  fauces  are  inflamed,  suppurated, 
and  gangrenous;  and  the  trachea  and  larynx  are  like- 
wise in  a state  ofinflammation,  and  lined  with  a viscid 
foetid  matter.  In  many  instances  the  inflammatory 
affection  extends  to  the  lungs  themselves.  Large 
swellings  of  the  lymphatic  glands  about  the  neck,  oc- 
casioned by  an  absorption  of  the  acrid  matter  poured 
out  in  the  fauces,  are  now  and  then  to  be  found.  The 
same  morbid  appearances  which  are  to  be  met  with  in 
putrid  fever,  present  themselves  in  other  parts  of  the 
body. 

The  plan  to  be  pursued  will  differ  according  to  the 
form  of  the  disease.  In  the  scarlatina  simplex  little  is 
required,  except  clearing  the  bowels,  and  observing  the 
antiphlogistic  regimen.  But  where  the  throat  is  af- 


SCH 


SCI 


fected,  and  the  fever  runs  higher,  more  active  means 
become  necessary,  varying  according  to  the  type  of 
this,  whether  synochal,  or  typhoid.  In  general,  we 
may  begin  by  exhibiting  a nauseating  emetic,  which, 
besides  its  effect  on  the  fever,  may  be  useful  in  check- 
ing inflammation  in  the  throat ; and  occasionally  the 
repetition,  of  such  a remedy  after  a time,  may  answer  a 
good  purpose : but  commonly  it  will  be  better  to  follow 
up  the  first  by  some  cathartic  remedy  of  sufficient  ac- 
tivity. Then,  so  long  as  the  strength  will  allow,  we 
may  endeavour  to  moderate  the  fever  by  mercurial  and 
antimonial  preparations,  or  other  medicines  promoting 
the  several  secretions,  by  steadily  pursuing  the  anti- 
phlogistic regimen,  and  occasionally  applying  cold 
water  to  the  skin,  when  this  is  very  hot  and  dry. 
Sometimes  severe  inflammation  in  the  throat  at  an 
early  period  may  render  it  advisable  to  apply  a few 
leeches  externally,  or  blisters  behind  the  ears ; and  gar- 
gles of  nitrate  of  potassa,  the  mineral  acids,  &c.  should 
be  used  from  time  to  time.  But  where  the  disorder 
exhibits  the  typhoid  character,  with  ulcers  in  the  throat, 
tending  peihaps  to  gangrene,  it  is  necessary  to  support 
the  system  by  a nutritious  diet,  with  a moderate  quan- 
tity of  wine,  and  tonic  or  stimulant  medicines,  as  the 
cinchona,  calumba,  ammonia,  capsicum,  &c. ; the 
acids  will  also  be  very  proper  from  their  antiseptic,  as 
well  as  tonic  power;  and  stimulant  antiseptic  gargles 
should  be  frequently  employed,  as  the  mineral  acids  suf- 
ficiently diluted,  with  the  addition  of  tincture  of  myrrh, 
or  these  mixed  with  the  decoction  of  bark,  &c.  Be- 
sides the  general  measures,  thus  varied  according  to 
the  character  of  the  disease,  particular  alarming  symp- 
toms may  require  to  be  palliated  ; as  vomiting  by  the 
effervescing  draught,  and  occasionally  a blister  to  the 
stomach,  if  there  be  tenderness  on  pressure  ; diarrhoea 
by  small  doses  of  opium,  &c.  The  management  of 
these,  however,  as  well  as  of  the  dropsical  swellings, 
and  other  sequels  of  the  disease,  will  be  understood 
from  what  is  said  under  those  heads  respectively. 

Scarlatina  anginosa.  See  Scarlatina. 

Scarlatina  cynanchica.  See  Scarlatina. 

Scarlatina  simplex.  See  Scarlatina. 

Scarlet  fever.  See  Scarlatina. 

Scelotyrbe.  (From  okcXos,  the  leg,  and  rvp&if, 
riot,  intemperance.)  A debility  oif  the  legs  from  scurvy, 
or  an  intemperate  way  of  life. 

Schaalstein.  See  Tabular  spar. 

Schaum  earth.  See  Aphrite. 

SCHERO  M A.  A dryness  of  the  eye  from  the  want 
of  the  lachrymal  fluid.  The  effects  of  this  lachrymal 
fluid  being  deficient  are,  the  eyes  become  dry,  and  in 
their  motions  produce  a sensation  as  though  sand,  or 
some  gritty  substances,  were  between  the  eye  and  the 
eyelid ; the  vision  is  obscured,  the  globe  of  the  eye  ap- 
pears foulish  and  dull,  which  is  a bad  omen  in  acute 
diseases.  The  species  are, 

1.  Scheroma  febrile,  or  a dryness  of  the  eyes,  which 
is  observed  in  fevers  complicated  with  a phlogistic  den- 
sity of  the  humours. 

2.  Scheroma  exhaustorum,  which  happens  after  great 
evacuations,  and  in  persons  dying. 

3.  Scheroma  inflammatorum,  which  is  a symptom  of 
the  ophthalmia  sicca. 

4.  Scheroma  itinerantium,  or  the  dryness  of  the  eyes, 
which  happens  in  sandy  places,  to  travellers,  as  in  hot 
Syria,  or  from  dry  winds,  which  dry  up  the  humidity 
necessary  for  the  motion  of  the  eyes. 

Schid  ace'don.  (From  axiSa\,  a splinter.)  A lon- 
gitudinal fracture  of  the  bone. 

SCHILLER  SPAR.  This  mineral  contains  two 
subspecies : 

1.  See  Bronzite. 

2.  The  common  Schiller  spar , which  is  of  an  olive 
green  colour,  and  occurs  imbedded  in  serpentine  in 
Shetland,  Cornwall,  &c. 

Schinel*um.  (From  axivos,  mastich,  and  zXaiov, 
oil.)  Oil  of  mastich. 

SCHNEIDER,  Conrad  Victor,  was  born  at  Bitter- 
feld,  in  Misnia.  He  filled  the  offices  of  professor  of 
anatomy,  botany,  and  medicine,  at  Wittemberg,  with 
great  reputation  : and  was  father  of  the  faculty  when 
he  died  in  1(580.  He  wrote  many  treatises  ; those  on 
anatomical  subjects  relating  chiefly  to  the  bones  of  the 
cranium,  and  to  the  pituitary  membrane  of  the  nostrils, 
to  which  his  name  is  still  attached.  He  refuted  an 
ancient  error,  that  the  mucus  in  catarrh  distilled  through 
tlte  cribriform  bone  from  the  brain,  showing  that  it  was 


secreted  by  the  pituitary  membrane.  In  other  respect#, 
his  writings,  except  in  anatomy,  are  diffuse  and  ob* 
scure,  and  full  of  ancient  hypothetical  doctrines. 

Schneider’s  membrane.  So  called  from  its  dis- 
coverer. See  Mcmbrana  Schneideriana. 

SCHCENA'NTHUS.  (From  <r%otvos,  a rush,  and 
avQos , a flower.)  See  Andropogon  schcenanthus. 

Schcenolagurus.  (From  a'xotvos,  a rush,  Xaywf,  a 
hare,  and  ovpa , a tail : so  called  from  its  resemblance 
to  a hare’s-tail.)  Hare’s-tail.  The  Trifolium  ar- 
vense. 

SCHORL.  A sub-species  of  rhomboidal  tourmdline, 
of  a velvet  black  colour,  found  imbedded  in  granite, 
gneiss,  &c.  in  Scotland  and  Cornwall, 

Schorl , blue.  A variety  of  Haiiyne. 

Schorl , red  and  titanic.  Rutile. 

SCHORLITE.  Schorlous  topaz.  Pycnite  of  Wer- 
ner. This  mineral  is  of  a straw-yellow  colour,  and 
becomes  electric  by  heating.  It  is  found  at  Altenberg 
in  Saxony,  in  a rock  of  quartz  and  mica  in  porphyry. 

SCIATIC.  (Sciaticus  ; from  ischialicus .)  Belong- 
ing to  the  ischium. 

Sciatic  artery.  Arteria  sciatica.  Ischiatic  re- 
tery.  A branch  of  the  internal  iliac. 

Sciatic  nerve.  Nervus  sciaticus.  Ischiatic  nerve. 
A branch  of  a nerve  of  the  lower  extremity,  formed  by 
the  union  of  the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves.  It  is 
divided  near  the  popliteal  cavity  into  the  tibial  and 
peroneal,  which  are  distributed  to  the  leg  and  foot. 

Sciatic  notch.  Ischiatic  notch.  See  Innomina- 
tum  os. 

Sciatic  vein.  Vena  sciatica.  The  vein  which  ac- 
companies the  sciatic  arterj'  in  the  thigh. 

SCIATICA.  A rheumatic  affection  of  the  hip- 
joint. 

Sciatica  cresses.  See  Lepidium  iberis. 

SCI'LLA.  (From  er/aAAw,  to  dry  : so  called  from 
its  property  of  drying  up  humours.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Hex- 
andria  ; Order  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  medicinal  squid 
See  Scilla  maritima. 

Scilla  hispanica.  The  Spanish  squill. 

Scilla  maritica.  The  systematic  name  of  tit* 
officinal  squill.  Ornithogalum  maritimum;  Squilla 
Scilla — nudiflora , bracteis  refractis,  of  Linnams.  A 
native  of  Spain,  Sicily,  and  Syria,  growing  on  the  sea 
coast.  The  red-rooted  variety  has  been  supposed  to  bo 
more  efficacious  than  the  white,  and  is,  therefore,  still 
preferred  for  medicinal  use.  The  root  of  the  squill, 
which  appears  to  have  been  known  as  a medicine  in 
the  early  ages  of  Greece,  and  has  so  well  maintained  its 
character  ever  since,  as  to  be  deservedly  in  great  esti- 
mation, and  of  very  frequent  use  at  this  lime,  seems  to 
manifest  a poisonous  quality  to  several  animals.  In 
proof  of  this,  we  have  the  testimonies  ofHillefield,  Ber- 
gius,  Vogel,  and  others.  Its  acrimony  is  so  great,  that 
even  if  much  handled,  it  exuleerates  the  skin,  and  if 
given  in  large  doses,  and  frequently  repeated,  it  not 
only  excites  nausea,  tormina,  and  violent  vomiting, 
but  it  has  been  known  to  produce  strangury,  bloody 
urine,  hypercatharsis,  cardialgia,  haemorrhoids,  con- 
vulsions, with  fatal  inflammation,  and  gangrene  of  the 
stomach  and  bowels.  But  as  many  of  the  active  arti- 
cles of  the  Materia  Medica,  by  injudicious  administra- 
tion, become  equally  deleterious,  these  effects  of  the 
scilla  do  not  derogate  from  its  medicinal  virtues ; on 
the  contrary,  we  feel  onrselves  fully  warranted,  says 
Dr.  Woodville,  in  representing  this  drug,  under  proper 
management,  and  in  certain  cases  and  constitutions,  to 
be  a medicine  of  great  practical  utility  and  real  im 
portance  in  the  cure  of  many  obstinate  diseases.  Its 
effects,  as  stated  by  Bergius,  are  incidens,  diuretica, 
emetica,  subpurgans,  hydragoga,  expectorans,  ernme- 
nagoga.  In  dropsical  cases  it  has  long  been  esteemed 
the  most  certain  and  effectual  diuretic  with  which  we 
are  acquainted  ; and  in  asthmatic  affections,  or  dysp- 
noea, occasioned  by  the  lodgement  of  tenacious  phlegm, 
it  has  been  the  expectorant  usually  employed.  The 
squill,  especially  in  large  doses,  is  apt  to  stimulate  the 
stomach,  and  to  prove  emetic  ; and  it  sometimes  acts 
on  the  intestines,  and  becomes  purgative ; but  whenr 
these  operations  take  place,  the  medicine  is  prevented 
from  reaching  the  blood  vessels  and  kidneys,  and  the 
patient  is  deprived  of  its  diuretic  effects,  which  are  to 
be  obtained  by  giving  the  squill  in  smaller  doses,  re- 
peated at  more  distant  intervals,  or  by  the  joining  of  sut 


SCI 


SCI 


opiate  to  this  medicine,  which  was  found  by  Dr.  Cullen 
to  answer  the  same  purpose.  The  Doctor  further  ob- 
serves, that  from  a continued  repetition  of  the  squill,  the 
dose  may  be  gradually  increased,  and  the  interval  of 
its  exhibitions  shortened  ; and  when  in  this  way  the 
dose  becomes  to  be  tolerably  large,  the  opiate  may  be 
most  conveniently  employed  to  direct  the  operation  of 
the  squill  more  certainly  in  the  kidneys.  “ In  cases  of 
dropsy,  that  is,  when  there  is  an  effusion  of  water  into 
the  cavities,  and  therefore  less  water  goes  to  Lire  kid- 
neys, we  are  of  opinion  that  neutral  salt,  accompany- 
ing the  squill,  may  be  of  use  in  determining  this  fluid 
more  certainly  to  the  kidneys  ; and  whenever  it  can  be 
perceived  that  it  takes  this  course,  we  are  persuaded 
that  it  will  be  always  useful,  and  generally  safe,  during 
the  exhibition  of  the  squills,  to  increase  the  usual  quan- 
tity of  drink.” 

The  diuretic  effects  of  squills  have  been  supposed  to 
be  promoted  by  the  addition  of  some  mercurial  ; and 
the  less  purgative  preparations  of  mercury,  in  the  opi- 
nion of  Dr.  Cullen,  are  best  adapted  to  this  purpose; 
he  therefore  recommends  a solution  of  corrosive  subli- 
mate, as  being  more  proper  than  any  other,  because 
most  diuretic.  Where  the  prim®  vhe  abound  with 
mucous  matter,  and  the  lungs  are  oppressed  with  viscid 
phlegm,  this  medicine  is  likewise  in  general  estima- 
tion. 

As  an  expectorant,  the  squill  may  be  supposed  not 
only  to  attenuate  the  mucus  in  the  follicles,  but  also  to 
excite  a more  copious  secretion  of  it  from  the  Jungs, 
and  thereby  lessen  the  congestion,  upon  which  the 
difficulty  of  respiration  very  generally  depends.  There- 
fore in  all  pulmonic  affections,  excepting  only  those  of 
actual  or  violent  inflammation,  ulcer,  and  spasm,  the 
squill  has  been  experienced  to  be  a useful  medicine. 
The  officinal  preparations  of  squills  are,  a conserve, 
dried  squills,  a syrup,  and  vinegar,  an  oxymel,  and 
pills.  Practitioners  have  not,  however,  confined  them- 
selves to  these.  When  this  root  was  intended  as  a 
diuretic,  it  has  most  commonly  been  used  in  powder, 
as  being,  in  this  state,  less  disposed  to  nauseate  the  sto- 
mach ; and  to  the  powder  it  has  been  the  practice  to 
add  neutral  salts,  as  nitre,  or  crystals  of  tartar,  espe- 
cially if  the  patient  complained  of  much  thirst;  others 
recommend  calomel ; and  with  a view  to  render  the 
squills  less  offensive  to  the  stomach,  it  has  been  usual 
to  conjoin  an  aromatic.  The  dose  of  dried  squills  is 
from  one  to  four  or  six  grains  once  a day,  or  half  this 
quantity  twice  a day ; afterward  to  be  regulated  ac- 
cording to  its  effects.  The  dose  of  the  other  prepara- 
tions of  this  drug,  when  fresh,  should  be  five  times  this 
weight;  for  this  root  loses  in  the  process  of  drying 
four-fifths  of  its  original  weight,  and  this  loss  is  merely 
a watery  exhalation. 

Scillites.  (From  <rxtXXa,  the  squill.)  A wine 
impregnated  with  squills. 

SCILLITIN.  A white  transparent,  acrid  substance, 
extracted  by  Vosel  from  squills. 

SCI'NCUS.  (From  shequc,  Hebrew.)  The  skink. 
This  amphibious  animal  is  of  the  lizard  kind,  and 
caught  about  the  Nile,  and  thence  brought  dried  into 
this  country,  remarkably  smooth  and  glossy,  as  if  var- 
nished. The  flesh  of  the  animal,  particularly  of  the 
belly,  has  been  said  to  be  diuretic,  alexipharmic,  aphro- 
disiac, and  useful  in  leprous  disorders. 

SCIRRHO'MA.  (From  <nappow,  to  harden.)  See 
Scirrhus. 

SCIRRHUS.  (From  cxippow,  to  harden.)  Scir- 
rhoma ; Scirrhosis.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class 
Locales , and  Order  Tumores , of  Cullen ; known  by  a 
hard  tumour  of  a glandular  part,  indolent,  and  not 
readily  suppurating.  The  following  observations  of 
Pearson  are  deserving  of  attention.  A scirrhus,  he 
says,  is  usually  defined  to  be  a hard,  and  almost  insen- 
sible tumour,  commonly  situated  in  a glandular  part, 
and  accompanied  with  little  or  no  discoloration  of  the 
surface  of  the  skin.  This  description  agrees  with  the 
true  or  exquisite  scirrhus : but  when  it  has  proceeded 
from  the  indolent  to  the  malignant  state,  the  tumour  is 
then  unequal  in  its  figure,  it  becomes  painful,  the  skin 
acquires  a purple  or  livid  hue,  and  the  cutaneous  veins 
are  often  varicose.  Let  us  now  examine  whether  this 
enumeration  of  symptoms  be  sufficiently  accurate  for 
practical  purposes. 

It  is  probable,  that  any  gland  in  the  living  body  may 
be  the  seat  of  a cancerous  disease,  but  it  appears  more 
frequently  as  an  idiopathic  affection  in  those  glands 
o-o 


that  form  the  several  secretions  than  in  the  absorbent 
glands;  and  of  the  secreting  organs,  those  which  sepa- 
rate fluids  that  are  to  be  employed  in  the  animal  eco- 
nomy, suffer  much  oftener  than  the  glands  which 
secrete  the  excrementitious  parts  of  the  blood.  In- 
deed, it  may  be  doubted  whether  an  absorbent  gland 
be  ever  the  primary  seat  of  a true  scirrhus.  Daily 
experience  evinces,  that  these  glands  may  suffer  con- 
tamination from  their  connexion  with  a cancerous 
part ; but  under  such  circumstances,  this  morbid  altera- 
tion being  the  effect  of  a disease  in  that  neighbouring 
part,  it  ought  to  be  regarded  as  a secondary  or  conse- 
quent affection.  I never  yet  met  with  an  unequivocal 
proof  of  a primary  scirrhus  in  an  absorbent  gland  ; and 
if  a larger  experience  shall  confirm  this  observation, 
and  establish  it  as  a general  rule,  it  will  afford  material 
assistance  in  forming  the  diagnosis  of  this  disease. 
The  general  term  scirrhus  hath  been  applied,  with  too 
little  discrimination,  to  indurated  tumours  of  lymphatic 
glands.  When  these  appendages  of  the  absorbent  sys- 
tem enlarge  in  the  early  part  of  life,  the  disease  is  com- 
monly treated  as  strumous  ; but  as  a similar  alteration 
of  these  parts  may,  and  often  does,  occur  at  a more 
advanced  period,  there  ought  to  be  some  very  good 
reasons  for  ascribing  malignity  to  one  rather  than  the 
other.  In  old  people  the  tumour  is  indeed  often  larger, 
more  indurated,  and  less  tractable  than  in  children , 
but  when  the  alteration  originated  in  the  lyinphytic 
glands,  it  will  very  rarely  be  found  to  possess  any  thing 
cancerous  in  its  nature. 

If  every  other  niorbid  alteration  in  a part  were  at 
tended  with  pain  and  softness,  then  induration  and 
defective  sensibility  might  point  out  the  presence  of  a 
scirrhus.  But  this  is  so  far  from  being  the  case,  that 
even  encysted  tumours,  at  their  commencement,  fre- 
quently excite  the  sensation  of  impenetrable  hardness. 

All  glands  are  contained  in  capsulas,  not  very  elas- 
tic, so  that  almost  every  species  of  chronic  enlarge- 
ment of  these  bodies  must  be  hard ; hence  this  indura- 
tion is  rather  owing  to  the  structure  of  the  part,  than 
to  the  peculiar  nature  of  the  disease;  and  as  glands  in 
their  healthy  state  are  endowed  with  much  sensibility, 
every  disease  that  gradually  produces  induration,  will 
rather  diminish  than  increase  their  perceptive  powers. 
Induration  and  insensibility  may,  therefore,  prove  that 
the  affected  part  does  not  labour  under  an  acute  dis- 
ease ; but  these  symptoms  alone  can  yield  no  certain 
information  concerning  the  true  nature  of  the  morbid 
alteration.  Those  indolent  affections  of  the  glands 
that  so  frequently  appear  after  the  meridian  of  life, 
commonly  manifest  a hardness  and  want  of  sensation, 
not  inferior  to  that  which  accompanies  a true  scirrhus  ; 
and  yet  these  tumours  will  often  admit  of  a cure  by  the 
same  mode  of  treatment  which  we  find  to  be  success- 
ful in  scrofula;  and  when  they  prove  unconquerable 
by  the  powers  of  medicine,  we  generally  see  them  con- 
tinue stationary  and  innocent  to  the  latest  period  of 
life.  Writers  have  indeed  said  much  about  certain 
tumours  changing  their  nature,  and  assuming  a new 
character ; but  I strongly  suspect  that  the  doctrine  of 
the  mutation  of  diseases  into  each  other,  stands  upon  a 
very  uncertain  foundation.  Improper  treatment  may, 
without  doubt,  exasperate  diseases,  and  render  a com- 
plaint, which  appeared  to  be  mild  and  tractable,  dan- 
gerous, or  destructive ; but  to  aggravate  the  symptoms, 
and  to  change  the  form  of  the  disease,  are  things  that 
ought  not  to  be  confounded.  I do  not  affirm,  that  a 
breast  which  has  been  the  seat  of  a mammary  abscess, 
or  a gland  that  has  been  affected  with  scrofula,  may 
not  become  cancerous : for  tltey  might  have  suffered 
from  this  disease  had  no  previous  complaint  existed  ; 
but  these  morbid  alterations  generate  no  greater  ten- 
dency to  cancer  than  if  the  parts  had  always  retained 
their  natural  condition.  There  is  no  necessary  con- 
nexion between  the  cancer  and  any  other  disease,  nor 
has  it  been  proved  that  one  is  convertible  into  the 
other. 

Chirurgical  writers  have  generally  enumerated  tu- 
mour as  an  essential  symptom  of  the  scirrhus;  and  it 
is  very  true,  that  this  disease  is  often  accompanied 
with  an  increase  of  bulk  in  the  part  affected.  From 
long  and  careful  observation,  I am  however  induced  to 
think,  that  an  addition  to  the  quantity  of  matter  is 
rather  an  accidental  than  a necessary  consequence  of 
the  presence  of  this  affection. 

When  the  breast  is  the  seat  of  a scirrhus,  the  altered 
part  is  hard,  perhaps  unequal  in  its  figure,  and  definite ; 


SCO 


SCO 


hut  these  symptoms  are  not  always  connected  with  an 
actual  increase  in  the  dimensions  of  the  breast.  On 
the  contrary,  the  true  scirrhus  is  frequently  accompa- 
nied with  a contraction  and  diminution  of  bulk,  a re- 
traction of  the  nipple,  and  a puckered  state  of  the 
skin. 

The  irritation  produced  by  an  indurated  substance 
lying  in  the  breast,  will  very  often  cause  a determina- 
tion of  blood  to  that  organ,  and  a consequent  enlarge- 
ment of  it ; but  I consider  this  as  an  inflammatory  state 
of  the  surrounding  parts,  excited  by  the  scirrhus,  act- 
ing as  a remote  cause,  and  by  no  means  essential  to  the 
original  complaint.  From  the  evident  utility  of  topical 
blood-letting  under  these  circumstances,  a notion  has 
prevailed  that  the  scirrhus  is  an  inflammatory  disease  ; 
but  the  strongly-marked  dissimilarity  of  a phlegmon 
and  an  exquisite  scirrhus,  in  their  appearances!  pro- 
gress, and  mode  of  termination,  obliges  me  to  dissent 
from  that  opinion.  That  one  portion  of  the  breast  may 
be  in  a scirrhous  state,  while  the  other  parts  are  in  a 
state  of  inflammation,  is  agreeable  to  reason  and  ex- 
perience ; but  that  an  inflammation,  which  is  an  acute 
disease,  and  a scirrhus,  whose  essential  characters  are 
almost  directly  the  reverse  of  inflammation,  shall  be 
coexistent  in  the  same  part,  is  not  a very  intelligible 
proposition.  Tumour  and  inflammation  are  commonly 
met  with  on  a variety  of  other  occasions,  and  in  this 
particular  instance  they  may  be  the  effects  of  the  dis- 
ease, but  are  not  essentially  connected  with  its  presence. 

An  incipient  scirrhus  is  seldom  accompanied  with  a 
discoloration  of  the  skin  ; and  a dusky  redness,  purple, 
or  even  livid  appearance  of  the  surface,  is  commonly 
seen  when  there  is  a malignant  scirrhus.  The  pre- 
sence or  absence  of  colour  can,  however,  at  the  best, 
afford  us  but  a very  precarious  criterion  of  the  true 
nature  of  the  complaint.  When  the  disease  is  clearly 
known,  an  altered  state  of  the  skin  may  assist  us  in 
judging  of  the  progress  it  has  made ; but  as  the  skin 
may  suffer  similar  variations  in  a number  of  very  dis- 
similar diseases,  it  would  be  improper  to  found  an  opi- 
nion upon  so  delusive  a phenomenon. 

SCITAMINEA2.  (From  scitamentum , a dainty.) 
The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Frag- 
ments of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of  those  which 
have  an  herbaceous  stalk,  broad  leaves,  and  the  ger- 
men  obtusely  angled  under  an  irregular  corolla;  as 
amomum,  canna,  musa,  &c. 

SCLA'REA.  (From  oic\r)pos,  hard;  because  its 
stalks  are  hard  and  dry,  Blanch.)  See  Salvia  sclarea. 

Sclarea  hispanica.  See  Salvia  sclarca. 

SCLERt'ASIS.  (From  <tkXj7P0O),  to  harden.)  Scle- 
roma; Sclerosis.  A hard  tumour  or  induration;  a 
scirrhus. 

SCLEROPHTHA'LMTA.  (From  cK^ypos,  hard, 
and  o<p9a\pos,  the  eye.)  A protrusion  of  the  eyeball. 
An  inflammation  of  the  eye,  attended  with  hardness 
of  the  parts. 

Sclkrosarcoma.  (From  <r uXripos,  and  aapKwpa,  a 
fleshy  tumour.)  A hard  fleshy  excrescence  on  the 
gums. 

Sclerosis.  See  Scleriasis. 

SCLERO'TIC.  (Scleroticus  ; from  cK^rjpoio,  to 
harden.)  The  name  of  one  of  the  coats  of  the  eye. 
See  Sclerotic-  acid. 

Sclerotic  coat.  Tunica  sclerotica ; Membrana 
sclerotica;  Sclerotis.  The  outermost  coat  of  the  eye, 
of  a white  colour,  dense,  and  tenacious.  Its  anterior 
part,  which  is  transparent,  is  termed  the  cornea  trans- 
parens.  It  is  into  this  coat  of  the  eye  that  the  muscles 
of  the  bulb  are  inserted. 

SCLERO'TIS.  See  Sclerotic  coat. 

Sclopetaria  aqua.  (From  sclopctum,  a gum:  so 
called  from  its  supposed  virtues  in  healing  gun-shot 
wounds.)  Arquebusade.  It  is  made  of  sage,  mug- 
wort,  and  mint,  distilled  in  wine. 

SCLOPETOPLA'GA.  (From  sclopctum , a gun, 
and  plaga,  a wound.)  A gun-shot  wound. 

SCOLI'ASIS.  (From  otcoAiow,  to  twist.)  A dis- 
tortion of  the  spine. 

SCOLOPE'NDRIA.  See  Asplenium  ceterach. 

SCOLOPE'NDIUUM.  (From  aKo\onev5pa,  the  ear- 
wig: so  called  because  its  leaves  resemble  the  earwig.) 
See  Jisplenium  ceterach. 

Scolopomach cerium.  (From  GKo\u>iral,  the  wood- 
cock, and  uaxaipa , a knife:  so  called  because  it  is  bent 
a little  at  tne  end  like  a woodcock’s  bill.)  An  incision  - 
knife. 


SCO'LYMUS.  (.From  ctcoAoj,  a thorn : so  named 
from  its  prickly  leaves.)  See  Cinara  scolymus. 

SCOMBER.  The  name  of  a genus  of  lishcs,  of  the 
order  Thoracici. 

Scomber  scomber.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  mackarel,  a beautiful  fish,  of  easy  digestion, 
which  frequents  our  shore  in  vast  shoals,  between  the 
months  of  April  and  July. 

Scomber  thynnus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tunny-fish,  which  frequents  the  shore  of  the  Mediterra- 
nean, and,  though  a coarse  fish,  was  much  esteemed 
by  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  and  is  still  considered  a de- 
licacy by  some. 

Scopa  regia.  See  Ruscus  aculeatus. 

Scorbu'tia.  (From  scorbutus,  the  scurvy.)  Me 
dicines  for  the  scurvy. 

SCORBU'TUS.  (From  schorboct , Germ.)  Gingi 
brachium,  when  the  gums  and  arms,  and  gingipedium, 
when  the  gums  and  legs,  are  affected  by  it.  The  scurvy. 
A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Cachexias , and  Order 
Impetigines,  of  Cullen  ; characterized  by  extreme  de- 
bility ; complexion  pale  and  bloated ; spongy  gums ; 
livid  spots  on  the  skin ; breath  offensive;  oedematous 
swellings  in  the  legs  ; haemorrhages;  foul  ulcers;  foetid 
urine;  and  extremely  offensive  stools.  The  scurvy  is 
a disease  of  a putrid  nature,  much  more  prevalent  in 
cold  climates  than  in  warm  ones,  and  which  chiefly 
affects  sailors,  and  such  as  are  shut  up  in  besieged 
places,  owing,  as  is  supposed,  to  their  being  deprived 
of  fresh  provisions,  and  a due  quantity  of  acescent 
food,  assisted  by  the  prevalence  of  cold  and  moisture, 
and  by  such  other  causes  as  depress  the  nervous 
energy,  as  indolence,  confinement,  want  of  exercise, 
neglect  of  cleanliness,  much  labour  and  fatigue,  sad- 
ness, despondency,  &c.  These  several  debilitating 
causes,  with  the  concurrence  of  a diet  consisting  prin- 
cipally of  salted  or  putrescent  food,  will  be  sure  to  pro- 
duce this  disease.  It  seems,  however,  to  depend  more 
on  a defect  of  nourishment,  than  on  a vitiated  state; 
and  the  reason  that  salted  provisions  are  so  productive 
of  the  scurvy,  is,  most  probably,  because  they  are 
drained  of  their  nutritious  juices,  which  are  extracted 
and  run  off  in  brine.  As  the  disease  is  apt  to  become 
pretty  general  among  the  crew  of  a ship  when  it  has 
once  made  its  appearance,  it  has  been  supposed  by 
many  to  be  of  a contagious  nature ; but  the  conjecture 
seems  by  no  means  well  founded 

A preternatural  saline  state  of  the  blood  has  been 
assigned  as  its  proximate  cause.  It  has  bgen  con- 
tended, by  some  physicians,  that  the  primary  morbid 
affection  in  this  disease  is  a debilitated  state  of  the 
solids,  arising  principally  from  the  want  of  aliment. 
The  scurvy  comes  on  gradually,  with  heaviness,  wea- 
riness, and  unwillingness  to  move  about,  together  with 
dejection  of  spirits,  considerable  loss  of  strength,  and 
debility.  As  it  advances  in  its  progress,  the  counte- 
nance becomes  sallow  and  bloated,  respiration  is  hur- 
ried ffi  the  least  motion,  the  teeth  become  loose,  the 
gums  are  spongy,  the  breath  is  very  offensive,  livid 
spots  appear  on  different  parts  of  the  body,  old  wounds 
which  have  been  long  healed  up  break  out  afresh,  se- 
vere wandering  pains  are  felt,  particularly  by  night,  the 
skin  is  dry,  the  urine  small  in  quantity,  turning  blue 
vegetable  infusions  of  a green  colour ; and  the  pulse  is 
small,  frequent,  and,  towards  the  last,  intermitting; 
but  the  intellects  are,  for  the  most  part,  clear,  and  dis- 
tinct. By  an  aggravation  of  the  symptoms,  the  disease, 
in  its  last  stage,  exhibits  a most  wretched  appearance. 
The  joints  become  swelled  and  stiff,  the  tendons  of  the 
legs  are  rigid  and  contracted,  general  emaciation  en- 
sues, haemorrhages  break  forth  from  different  parts, 
foetid  evacuations  are  discharged  by  stool,  and  a diar- 
rl«ea  or  dysentery  arises,  which  soon  terminates  the 
tragic  scene.' 

Scurvy,  as  usually  met  with  on  shore,  or  where  the 
person  has  not  been  exposed  to  the  influence  of  the  re- 
mote causes  before  enumerated,  is  unattended  by  any 
violent  symptoms,  as  slight  blotches,  with  scaly  erup- 
tions on  different  parts  of  the  body,  and  a sponginess 
of  the  gums,  are  the  chief  ones  to  be  observed. 

In  forming  our  judgment  as  to  the  event  of  the  dis- 
ease, we  are  to  be  directed  by  the  violence  of  the  symp- 
toms, by  the  situation  of  the  patient  with  respect  to  a 
vegetable  diet,  or  other  proper  substitutes,  by  his  for- 
mer state  of  health  and  by  his  constitution,  not  having 
been  impaired  by  previous  diseases. 

Dissections  of  scurvy  have  always  discovered  the 

273 


B b b 


SCR 


SCR 


blood  to  be  in  a very  dissolved  state;  The  thorax 
usually  contains  more  or  less  of  a watery  fluid,  which, 
in  many  cases,  possesses  so  high  a degree  of  acrimony, 
as  to  excoriate  the  hands  by  coming  in  contact  with  it ; 
the  cavity  of  the  abdomen  contains  the  same  kind  of 
fluid  ; the  lungs  are  black  and  putrid  ; and  the  heart 
itself  has  been  found  in  a similar  state,  with  its  cavity 
filled  with  a corrupted  fluid.  In  many  instances,  the 
epiphyses  have  been  found  divided  from  the  bones,  the 
cartilages  separated  from  the  ribs,  and  several  of  the 
bones  themselves  dissolved  by  caries.  The  brain  sel- 
dom shows  any  disease. 

In  the  cure,  as  well  as  the  prevention  of  scurvy,  much 
more  is  to  be  done  by  regimen,  than  by  medicines,  ob- 
viating as  far  as  possible  the  several  remote  causes  of 
the  disease,  but  particularly  providing  the  patient  with 
a more  wholesome  diet,  a large  proportion  of  fresh 
vegetables ; and  it  has  been  found  that  those  articles 
are  especially  useful,  which  contain  a native  acid,  as 
oranges,  lemons,  &c.  Where  these  cannot  be  procured, 
various  substitutes  have  been  proposed,  of  which  the 
best  appear  to  be  the  inspissated  juices  of  the  same 
fruits,  or  the  crystallized  citric  acid.  Vinegar,  sour 
crout,  and  farinaceous  substances  made  to  undergo  the 
acetous  fermentation,  have  likewise  been  used  with 
much  advantage:  also  brisk  fermenting  liquors,  as  spruce 
beer,  cider,  and  the  like  Formerly  many  plants  of  the 
Class  Tetradynamia , as  mustard,  horse-raddish,  &c. 
likewise  garlic,  and  others  of  a stimulant  quality,  pro- 
moting the  secretions,  were  much  relied  upon,  and,  no 
doubt,  proved  useful  to  a certain  extent.  The  spongy 
state  of  the  gums  may  be  remedied  by  washing  the 
mouth  with  some  of  the  mineral  acids  sufficiently  di- 
luted, or  perhaps  mixed  with  decoction  of  cinchona. 
The  stiffness  of  the  limbs  by  fomentations,  cataplasms, 
and  friction ; and  sometimes  in  hot  climates,  the  earth- 
bath  has  afforded  speedy  relief  to  this  symptom. 

SCO  RDIUM.  (From  aicopodov,  garlic:  so  called 
because  it  smells  like  garlic.)  See  Teucrium  scor- 
dium. 

SCO'RLE.  (Scoria ; from  <7/ca>,  excrement.)  Dross. 
The  refuse  or  useless  parts  of  any  substance. 

Scobodoprasum.  (From  o-KopoSov, garlie,  audn-pacov, 
the  leek.)  The  wild  garlic,  or  leek  shalot. 

SCO'RODUM.  (Atto  tov  cku>p  ofyiv,  from  its  filthy 
smell.)  Garlic. 

Scorpiaca.  (From  aKopiriog,  a scorpion.)  Medi- 
cines against  the  bite  of  serpents. 

SCORPIOIDES.  (From  cKopmos,  a scorpion,  and 
£(5oj,  a likeness:  so  called  because  its  leaves  resemble 
the  tail  of  a scorpion.)  Scorpiurus.  The  Myosurus 
scorpioides. 

SOORPIU'RUS.  See  Scorpioides. 

SCORZA.  A variety  of  epidote. 

SCORZONE'RA.  (From  escorza,  a serpent, 
Spanish : so  called  because  it  is  said  to  be  effectual 
against  the  bite  of  all  venomous  animals.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system. 
Class,  Syngenesia  ; Order,  Polygamia  cequalis. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  viper  grass.  See 
Scorzonera  humilis. 

Scorzonera  hispanica.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  esculent  vipers’  grass.  Serpentaria  hispanica. 
The  root  of  this  plant  is  mostly  sold  for  that  of  the 
humilis. 

Scorzonera  humilis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  vipers’ grass.  Escorzonera;  Viperaria;  Ser- 
pentaria  hispanica.  Goats’ grass;  Vipers’ grass.  The 
roots  of  this  plant,  Scorzonera — caule  subnudo , vni- 
floro ; foliis  lato-lanceolatis , nervosis , planis>  of  Lin- 
nseus,  have  been  sometimes  employed  medicinally  as 
alexipharmics,  and  in  hypochondriacal  disorders  and 
obstructions  of  the  viscera.  The  Scorzonera  hispanica 
- mostly  supplies  the  shops,  whose  root  is  esculent,  olera- 
ceous,  and  against  diseases  inefficacious. 

SCOTODINE.  See  Scotodinus. 

SCOTODI'NUS.  (From  cxoros,  darkness,  and  Sivos, 
a giddiness.) . Scotodivia  ; Scotodinos  ; Scotoma  ; Sco- 
todine  ; Scotomia.  Giddiness,  with  impaired  sight. 

SCOTOMA.  (From  axoros, .darkness.)  Blindness. 
See  Scotodinus. 

SCRIBONIUS,  Largus,  a Roman  physician  in  the 
reign  of  Claudius,  who  wrote  a treatise,  “De  Compo- 
sitione  Medicamentoruin.”  Many  of  these  formulas 
are  perfectly  trifling  and  superstitious;  and  the  whole 
work  displays  a great  attachment  to  empiricism.  The 
style  is  also  very  deficient  in  elegance  for  the  time  in 
274 


which  he  lived,  whence  he  appears  to  have  been  a per- 
son of  inferior  education. 

SCROBICTJLATUS.  ( Scrobiculus , a ditch,  or  fur- 
row.) Hollowed;  having  a deep,  round  foramina: 
applied  to  the  receptacle  of  the  Helianthus  annuus. 

SCROBI'CULUS  CO  RDIS.  (Diminutive  of  scrobs, 
a ditch.)  The  pit  of  the  stomach. 

SCRO'FULA.  (From  scrofa,  a swine;  because  this 
animal  is  said  to  be  much  subject  to  a similar  disorder.) 
Scrophula ; Struma;  Coir  as ; Clirceas;  Ecruelles ; Fr. 
Scrofula.  The  king’s  evil.  A genus  of  disease  in  the 
Class  CachexitB , and  Order  Impetigines , of  Cullen.  He 
distinguishes  four  species.  1.  Scrofula  vulgaris,  when 
it  is  without  other  disorders  external  and  permanent. 
2.  Scrofula  mesenterica,  when  internal,  with  loss  of 
appetite,  pale  countenance,  swelling  of  the  belly,  and 
an  unusual  fcetor  of  the  excrements.  3.  Scrofula 
fugax.  This  is  of  the  most  simple  kind;  it  is  seated 
only  about  the  neck,  and  for  the  most  part  is  caused 
by  absorption  from  sores  on  the  head.  4.  Scrofula 
americana,  when  it  is  joined  with  the  yaws.  Scrofula 
consists  in  hard  indolent  tumours  of  the  conglobate 
glands  in  various  parts  of  the  body;  but  particularly 
in  the  neck;  behind  the  ears,  and  under  the  chin,  which, 
after  a time,  suppurate  and  degenerate  into  ulcers,  from 
which,  instead  of  pus,  a white  curdled  matter,  some- 
what resembling  the  coagulum  of  milk  is  discharged. 

The  first  appearance  of  the  disease  is  most  usually 
between  the  third  and  seventh  year  of  the  child’s  age ; 
but  it  may  arise  at  any  period  between  this  and  the 
age  of  puberty;  after  which  it  seldom  makes  its  first 
attack.  It  most  commonly  affects  children  of  a lax 
habit,  with  smooth,  fine  skins,  fair  hair,  and  rosy 
cheeks.  It  likewise  is  apt  to  attack  such  children  as 
show  a disposition  to  rachitis,  marked  by  a protuberant 
forehead,  enlarged  joints,  and  a tumid  abdomen.  Like 
this  disease,  it  seems  to  be  peculiar  to  cold  and  variable 
climates,  being  rarely  met  with  in  warm  ones.  Scro- 
fula is  by  no  means  a contagious  disease,  but,  beyond 
all  doubt,  is  of  an  hereditary  nature,  and  is  often  entailed 
by  parents  on  their  children.  There  are,  indeed,  some 
practitioners  who  wholly  deny  that  this,  or  any  other 
disease,  can  be  acquired  by  an  hereditary  right;  but 
that  a peculiar  temperament  of  body,  or  predisposition 
in  the  constitution  of  some  diseases,  may  extend  from 
both  father  and  mother  to  their  offspring,  is,  observes 
Dr.  Thomas,  very  clearly  proved.  For  exathple,  we 
very  frequently  meet  with  gout  in  young  persons  of 
both  sexes,  who  could  never  have  brought  it  on  by 
intemperance,  sensuality,  or  improper  diet,  but  must 
have  acquired  the  predisposition  to  it  in  this  way. 

Where  there  is  any  predisposition  in  the  constitution 
to  scrofula,  and  the  person  happens  to  contract  a 
venereal  taint,  this  frequently  excites  into  action  the 
causes  of  the  former;  as  a venereal  bubo  not  unfre- 
quently  becomes  scrofulous,  as  soon  as  the  virus  is 
destroyed  by  mercury.  The  late  Dr.  Cullen  supposed 
scrofula  to  depend  upon  a peculiar  constitution  of  the 
lymphatic  system.  The  attacks  of  the  disease  seem 
much  affected  or  influenced  by  the  periods  of  the  sea- 
sons. They  begin  usually  some  time  in  the  winter  and 
spring,  and  often  disappear,  or  are  greatly  amended  in 
summer  and  autumn.  The  first  appearance  of  the  dis- 
order is  commonly  in  that  of  small  oval,  or  spherical 
tumours  under  the  skin,  unattended  by  any  pain  or 
discoloration.  These  appear,  in  general,  upon  the 
sides  of  the  neck,  below  the  ear,  or  under  the  chin  ; 
but,  in  some  cases,  the  joints  of  the  elbows  or  ankles, 
or  those  of  the  fingers  and  toes,  are  the  parts  first 
affected.  In  these  instances,  we  do  not,  however,  find 
small  moveable  swellings;  but,  on  the  contrary,  a 
tumour  almost  uniformly  surrounding  the  joint,  and 
interrupting  its  motion. 

After  some  length  of  time  the  tumours  become  larger 
and  more  fixed,  the  skin  which  covers  them  acquires 
a purple*a*>r  livid  colour,  and,  being  much  inflamed, 
they  at  last  suppurate,  and  break  into  little  holes,  from 
which,  at  first,  a matter  somewhat  puriform  oozes  out ; 
but  this  changes  by  degrees  into  a kind  of  viscid  serous 
discharge,  much  intermixed  with  small  pieces  of  a white 
substance,  resembling  the  curd  of  milk. 

The  tumours  subside  gradually,  while  the  ulcers  at 
the  same  time  open  more,  and  spread  unequally  in 
various  directions.  After  a time  some  of  the  ulcers 
heal ; but  other  tumours  quickly  form  in  different  parts 
of  the  body,  and  proceed  on,  in  the  same  slow  manner 
as  the  former  ones;  to  suppuration.  In  this  maiuitr 


SO  ft 


SEA 


vhe  disease  goes  on  for  some  years,  ana  appearing  at 
last  to  have  exhausted  itself,  all  the  ulcers  heal  up, 
without  being  succeeded  by  any  fresh  swellings ; but 
leaving  behind  them  an  ugly  puckering  of  the  skin, 
and  a scar  of  considerable  extent.  This  is  the  most 
mild  form  under  which  scrofula  ever  appears.  In 
more  virulent  cases,  the  eyes  are  particularly  the  seat 
of  the  disease,  and  are  affected  with  ophthalmia,  giving 
rise  to  ulcerations  in  the  tarsi,  and  inflammation  of  the 
tunica  adnata,  terminating  not  unfrequently  in  an 
opacity  of  the  transparent  cornea. 

In  similar  cases,  the  joints  become  affected,  they 
swell  and  are  incommoded  by  excruciating  deep-seated 
pain,  which  is  much  increased  upon  the  slightest  mo- 
tion. The  swelling  and  pain  continue  to  increase,  the 
muscles  of  the  limb  become  at  length  much  wasted. 
Matter  is  soon  afterward  formed,  and  this  is  dis- 
charged at  small  openings  made  by  the  bursting  of  the 
skin.  Being,  however,  of  a peculiar  acrimonious  na- 
ture, it  erodes  the  ligaments  and  cartilages,  and  pro- 
duces a caries  of  the  neighbouring  bones.  By  an  ab- 
sorption of  the  matter  into  the  system,  hectic  fever  at 
last  arises,  and,  in  the  end,  often  proves  fatal. 

When  scrofula  is  confined  to  the  external  surface, 
it  is  by  no  means  attended  with  danger,  although  on 
leaving  one  part,  it  is  apt  to  be  renewed  in  others  ; but 
when  the  ulcers  are  imbued  with  a sharp  acrimony, 
spread,  erode,  and  become  deep,  without  showing  any 
disposition  to  heal ; when  deep-seated  collections  of 
matter  form  among  the  small  bones  of  the  hands  and 
feet,  or  in  the  joints,  or  tubercles  in  the  lungs,  with 
hectic  fever,  arise,  the  consequences  will  be  fatal. 

On  opening  the  bodies  of  persons  who  have  died  of 
this  disease,  many  of  the  viscera  are  usually  found  in 
a diseased  state,  but  more  particularly  the  glands  of  the 
mesentery , which  are  not  only  much  tumified,  but  often 
ulcerated.  The  lungs  are  frequently  discovered  beset 
with  a number  of  tubercles  or  cysts,  which  contain 
matter  of  various  kinds.  Scrofulous  glands,  on  being 
examined  by  dissection,  feel  somewhat  softer  to  the 
touch  than  in  their  natural  state,  and  when  laid  open, 
they  are  usually  found  to  contain  a soft  curdy  matter, 
mixed  with  pus.  The  treatment  consists  chiefly  in  the 
use  of  those  means,  which  are  calculated  to  improve 
the  general  health ; a nutritious  diet,  easy  of  digestion, 
a pure  dry  air,  gentle  exercise,  friction,  cold  bathing, 
especially  in  the  sea,  and  strengthening  medicines,  as 
the  preparations  of  iron,  myrrh,  &c. ; but,  particu- 
larly the  Peruvian  bark,  with  soda.  Various  mineral 
waters,  and  other  remedies  which  moderately  pro- 
mote the  secretions,  appear  also  to  have  been  often 
useful.  In  irritable  states  of  the  system,  hemlock  has 
been  employed  with  much  advantage.  Mercury  is 
generally  injurious  to  scrofulous  persons,  when  carried 
so  far  as  to  affect  the  mouth;  yet  they  have  sometimes 
improved  under  the  use  of  the  milder  preparations  of 
that  metal,  determined  principally  towards  the  skin. 
Moderate  antimoriials  also,  decoctions  of  sarsaparilla, 
mezereon,  guaiacum,  &c.,  burnt  sponge,  muriate  of 
lime,  and  other  such  remedies,  have  been  serviceable 
in  many  cases,  perhaps  chiefly  in  the  same  way.  The 
application  to  scrofulous  tumours  and  ulcers  must  vary 
according  to  the  state  of  the  parts,  whether  indolent  or 
irritable : where  the  tumours  show  no  disposition  to 
enlarge,  or  become  inflamed,  it  is,  perhaps,  best  to  in- 
terfere little  with  them  ; but  their  inflammation  must 
be  dhecked  by  leeches,  &c.,  and  when  ulcers  exist, 
stimulant  lotions  or  dressings  must  be  used  to  give 
them  a disposition  to  heal ; but  if  they  are  in  an  irrita- 
ble state,  a cataplasm,  made,  perhaps,  with  hemlock, 
or  other  narcotic. 

SCROPHULA.  See  Scrofula. 

SCROPHULARIA.  (From  scrofula , the  king’s 
evil : so  called  from  the  unequal  tubercles  upon  its 
roots,  like  scrofulous  tumours.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  iu  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia  ; 
Order,  Angiospermia.  The  fig-wort. 

Scrophularia  aquatioa.  Betonica aquatica.  Great- 
er water  fig-wort.  Water-betony.  The  leaves  of  this 
plant,  Scrophularia — foliis  cor  Antis  obtusis,  petiolatis , 
decurrentibus ; caule  membrunis  angulato  ; racemis 
terminalibus , of  Linnaeus,  are  celebrated  as  correctors 
of  the  ill-flavour  of  senna.  They  were,  also,  formerly 
in  high  estimation  against  piles,  tumours  of  a scrofu- 
lous nature,  inflammations,  &c. 

Scrophularia  minGr.  The  pile-wort  is  sometimes 
so  called.  See  Ranunculus  ficaria. 


Scrophularia  nodosa.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  fig-wort.  Scrophularia  vulgaris  ; Millcmorbia  ; 
Scrophularia.  Common  fig-wort  or  kernel-wort.  The 
root  and  leaves  of  this  plant,  Scrophularia— foliis  cor- 
datis , trinervatis ; caule  obtusangulo , of  Linmeus, 
have  been  celebrated  both  as  an  internal  and  external 
remedy  against  inflammations,  the  piles,  scrofulous 
tumours  and  old  ulcers;  but  they  are  now  only  used  in 
this  country  by  the  country  people. 

Scrophularia  vulgaris.  See  Scrophularia  nodosa. 

SCROTAL.  Belonging  to  the  scrotum. 

Scrotal  hernia.  Scrotocele.  A protrusion  of  any 
part  of  an  abdominal  viscus  or  viscera  into  the  scrotum. 
See  Hernia. 

SCROTIFORMIS.  Bag-like : applied  to  thenectary 
of  the  genus  Satyrium. 

SCROTOCE'LE.  (From  scrotum , and  a tu- 
mour.) A rupture  or  hernitFin  the  scrotum.  ■ 

SCRO'TUM.  ( Quasi  scrotum , a skin  or  hide.) 
Bursa  testium ; Oscheus  ; Oscheon;  Orchea,  of  Galen 
The  common  integuments  which  cover  the  testicles. 

SCRU'PULUS.  (Dim.  of  scrupus , a small  stone.) 
A scruple  or  weight  of  20  grains. 

SCULTETUS,  John,  w as  bornatUlm,  in  1595,  and, 
after  the  requisite  studies,  graduated  at  Padua.  He 
then  practised  with  considerable  reputation  in  his 
native  city,  as  weil  in  surgery  as  in  physic,  and  he  ap- 
pears to  have  been  very  bold  in  his  operations.  He 
was  carried  off  by  an  apoplectic  stroke,  in  1645.  His 
principal  work  is  entitled,  “ Armamentarium  Chirur- 
gicum,”  with  plates  of  the  instruments;  which  was 
published  after  his  death,  and  has  passed  through 
many  editions,  and  been  translated  into  most  European 
languages. 

SCURF.  Furfura.  Small  exfoliations  of  the  cuti- 
cle, which  take  place  after  some  eruptions  on  the 
skin,  a new  cdticle  being  formed  underneath  during 
the  exfoliation. 

SCURVY.  See  Scorbutus. 

Scurvy-grass.  See  Cochlearia  officinalis. 

Scurvy-grass , lemon.  See  Cochlearia  officinalis. 

Scurvy-grass , Scotch.  See  Convolvulus  soldanella. 

SCUTIFORM.  ( Scutiformis ; from  c/curoj,  a shield, 
and  ados,  resemblance.)  Shield-like.  See  Thyroid 
cartilage. 

Scutiform  cartilage.  See  Thyroid  cartilage . 

SCUTELLA.  A little  dish  or  cup.  Applied  to  the 
round,  flat,  or  shallow  fruit,  of  the  calyculate  algae, 
seen  in  Tickei i stellaris. 

SCUTELLA'RIA.  (From  scutella , a small  dish  or 
saucer,  apparently  in  allusion  to  the  little  concave  ap- 
pendage which  crowns  the  calyx.  Some  have  thought 
it  to  be  more  directly  derived  from  scutellum , a little 
shield,  to  which  they  have  compared  the  shield.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Didynamia ; Order,  Gymnospermia. 

Scutellaria  galericulata.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  skull-cap.  Tertianaria.  The  Scutellaria,  foliis 
cordato  lanceolatis , crenatis  ; floribus  axillaribus , of 
Linnaeus,  which  is  common  in  the  hedges  and  ditches 
of  this  country.  It  has  a bitter  taste  and  a garlic 
smell,  and  is  said  to  be  serviceable  against  that  species 
of  ague  which  attacks  the  patient  every  other  day. 

SCY'BALUM.  Hicv6a\a  Dry  hard  excrement, 
rounded  like  nuts  or  marbles. 

Scythicus.  (From  Scythia , its  native  soil.)  An 
epithet  of  the  liquorice  root,  or  any  thing  brought  from 
Scythia. 

SEA.  Mare.  The  air  of  the  sea,  the  motion  of  the 
vessels,  the  exhalation  from  the  tar  as  well  as  the 
water  of  the  ocean,  and  its  contents  all  come  under  the 
attention  of  the  physician. 

1.  Sea- air  is  prescribed  in  a variety  of  complaints, 
being  considered  as  more  medicinal  and  salubrious  than 
that  on  land,  though  not  known  to  possess  in  its  com- 
position a greater  quantity  of  oxygen.  This  is  a most 
powerful  and  valuable  remedy.  It  is  resorted  to  with 
the  happiest  success  against  most  cases  ot  d;  bility,  and 
particularly  against  scrofulous  diseases  affecting  the 
external  parts  of  the  body.  See  Bath , cold. 

2.  Sca-sic/cness.  A nausea  or  tendency  to  vomit, 
which  varies,  in  respect  of  duration,  in  different  per- 
sons upon  their  first  going  to  sea.  With  some  it  con- 
tinues only  for  a day  or  two;  while  with  others  it  re- 
mains throughout  the  voyage.  The  diseases  in  which 
sea-sickness  is  principally  recommended  are  asthma 
and  consumption. 


275 


SEB 


SEC 


3.  Sea-water.  This  is  arranged  among  the  simple 
saline  waters.  Its  chemical  analysis  gives  a propor- 
tion of  one  of  saline  contents  to  about  twenty-three 
and  one-fourth  of  water ; but  on  our  shores  it  is  not 
greater  than  one  of  salt  to  about  thirty  of  water.  Sea- 
water on  the  British  coast  may  therefore  be  calculated 
to  contain  in  the  wine  pint  of  muriated  soda  186.5 
grains,  of  muriated  magnesia  fifty-one,  of  selenite  six 
grains : total  243  one-half  grains ; or  half  an  ounce  and 
three  and  one-half  grains  of  saline  contents.  The  dis- 
orders for  which  the  internal  use  of  sea-water  has 
been  and  may  be  resorted  to,  are  in  general  the  same 
for  which  all  the  simple  saline  waters  may  be  used. 
The  peculiar  power  of  sea-water  and  sea-salt  as  a dis- 
cutient,  employed  either  internally  or  externally  in 
scrofulous  habits,  is  well  known,  and  is  attended  with 
considerable  advantage  wheti  judiciously  applied. 

Sea-liolly.  See  Eryngium. 

Sea-moss.  See  Fucus  helminthocorton. 

Sea- oak.  See  Fucus  vesiculosus. 

Sea-onion.  See  Scilla. 

SEA-SALT.  Muriate  of  Soda.  See  Sodce  murias. 

SEA- WAX.  Maltha.  A white,  solid,  tallowy- 
looking  fusible  substance,  soluble  in  aikohol,  found  on 
the  Baikal  lake,  ip  Siberia. 

Sea-wrack.  See  Fucus  vesiculosus. 

Sealed  earths.  See  Sigillata  terra . 

SEARCHING.  The  operation  of  introducing  a 
metallic  instrument  through  the  urethra  into  the  blad- 
der for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  whether  the  patient 
has  the  stone  or  not. 

SEBACEOUS.  (Sebaceus ; from  sebum,  suet.)  A 
term  applied  to  glands,  which  secrete  a suelty  hu- 
mour. 

SEB  ACIC  ACID.  Subject  to  a considerable  heat,  7 
or  8 pounds  of  hog’s  lard,  in  a stoneware  retort  capa- 
ble of  holding  double  the  quantity,  and  connect  its 
beak  by  an  adopter  with  a cooled  receiver.  The  con- 
densible products  are  chiefly  fat,  altered  by  the  fire, 
mixed  with  a little  acetic  and  sebacic  acids.  Treat 
ibis  product  with  boiling  water  several  times,  agitating 
the  liquor,  allowing  it  to  cool,  and  decanting  each 
time.  Pour  at  last  into  the  watery  liquid,  solution  of 
acetate  of  lead  ift  excess.  A white  flocculent  precipi- 
tate of  sebate  of  lead  will  instantly  fall,  which  must  be 
collected  on  a filter,  washed,  and  dried.  Put  the  sebate 
of  lead  into  a phial,  and  pour  upon  it  its  own  weight 
of  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  five  or  six  times  its 
weight  of  water.  Expose  this  phial  to  a heat  of  about 
212b.  The  sulphuric  acid  combines  with  the  oxide  of 
lead,  and  sets  the  sebacic  acid  at  liberty.  Filter  the 
whole  while  hot.  As  the  liquid  cools,  the  sebacic  acid 
crystallizes,  which  must  be  washed  to  free  it  com- 
pletely from  the  adhering  sulphuric  acid.  Let  it  be 
then  dried  at  a gentle  heat. 

The  sebacic  acid  is  inodorous ; its  taste  is  slight,  but 
it  perceptibly  reddens  litmus  paper  ; its  specific  gravity 
is  above  that  of  water,  and  its  crystals  are  small  white 
needles  of  little  coherence.  Exposed  to  heat,  it  melts 
like  fat,  is  decomposed,  and  partially  evaporated.  The 
air  has  no  effect  upon  it.  It  is  much  more  soluble  in 
hot  than  in  cold  water ; hence  boiling  water  saturated 
with  it,  assumes  a nearly  solid  consistence  on  cooling. 
Aikohol  dissolves  it  abundantly  at  the  ordinary  tempe- 
rature. 

With  the  alkalies  it  forms  soluble  neutral  salts ; but 
if  we  pour  into  their  concentrated  solutions,  sulphuric, 
nitric,  or  muriatic  acids,  the  sebacic  is  immediately  de- 
posited in  large  quantity.  It  affords  precipitates  with 
the  acetates  and  nitrates  of  lead,  mercury,  and  silver. 

Such  is  the  account  given  by  Thenard  of  this  acid, 
in  the  third  volume  of  his  Traits  de  Chimie,  published 
in  1815.  Berzelius,  in  1806,  published  an  elaborate  dis- 
sertation, to  prove  that  Thenard’s  new  sebacic  acid 
was  only  the  benzoic  contaminated  by  the  fat,  from 
which  however  it  may  be  freed,  and  brought  to  the 
state  of  common  benzoic  acid.  Thenard  takes  no  no- 
tice of  Berzelius  whatever,  but  concludes  his  account 
by  stating  that  it  has  been  known  only  for  twelve  or 
thirteen  years,  and  that  it  must  not  be  confounded 
with  the  acid  formerly  called  sebacic,  which  possesses 
a strong  disgusting  odour,  and  was  merely  acetic  or 
muriatic  acid ; or  fat  which  had  been  changed  in  some 
way  or  other  according  to  the  process  used  in  the  pre- 
paration. 

Sebadilla.  See  Cevadilla. 

SEBATE.  ISebas ; from  sebum,  suet.)  The  name 
276 


in  the  neutral  compound  of  the  acid  of  fat,  with  a sali 
liable  base. 

Sebesten.  (An  Egyptian  word.)  SeeCordiamyza. 
SECA'LE.  ( Secale , i.  neut.  A name  in  Pliny, 

which  some  etymologists,  among  whom  is  De  Tlieis,  de- 
rive from  the  Celtic  segal.  This,  says  he,  comes  from 
sega,  a sickle  in  the  same  language,  and  thence  seges, 
the  Latin  appellation  of  all  grain  that  is  cut  with  a si- 
milar instrument.  Those  who  have  looked  no  farther 
for  an  etymology  than  the  Latin  seco,  to  cut  or  mow, 
have  come  to  the  same  conclusion.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tri- 
andria ; Order,  Digynia.  Rye. 

2.  The  common  name  of  the  seed  of  the  Secale  ce- 
reale , of  Linnaeus. 

Secale  cereale.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
rye-plant.  Rye-corn  is  principally  used  as  an  ar- 
ticle of  diet,  and  in  the  northern  countries  of  Europe  is 
employed  for  affording  an  ardent  spirit.  Rye-bread  is 
common  among  the  northern  parts  of  Europe ; it  is 
less  nourishing  than  wheat,  but  a sufficiently  nutritive 
and  wholesome  grain.  It  is  more  than  any  other  grain 
strongly  disposed  to  acescency ; hence  it  is  liable  to  fer- 
ment in  the  stomach,  and  to  produce  purging,  which 
people  on  the  first  using  it  commonly  experience. 

Secale  Cornutum.  Secale  corniculatum ; Clavius 
secalinus.  Mutterkom  kornzapfeu , of  the  Germans. 
Ergot;  Seigle  ergote  of  the  French.  A black,  curved, 
morbid  excrescence,  like  the  spur  of  a fowl,  which  is 
found  in  the  spike  of  the  Secale  cereale  of  Linnteus,  es- 
pecially in  hot-  climates,  when  a great  heat  suddenly 
succeeds  to  much  moisture.  The  seed,  which  has  this 
diseased  growth,  gives  off,  when  powdered,  an  odour 
which  excites  sneezing,  and  titllales  the  nose,  like  to- 
bacco. It  has  a mealy,  and  then  a rancid,  nauseous, 
and  biting  taste,  which  remains  a long  time,  and 
causes  the  mouth  and  fauces  Hi  become  dry ; which 
sensation  is  not  removed  by  watery  fluids,  but  is  soon 
relieved  by  milk.  The  cause  of  this  excrescential  dis- 
ease in  rye  appears  to  be  an  insect  which  penetrates 
the  grain,  feeds  on  its  amylaceous  part,  and  leaves  its 
poison  in  the  parenchyma  ; hence  it  is  full  of  small 
foramina  or  perforations  made  by  the  insect. 

The  secale  cornutum  has  a singular  effect  on  the 
animal  economy.  The  meal  or  flour  sprinkled  on  a 
wound  coagulates  the  blood,  excites  a heat  and  then  a 
numbness  in  the  part,  and  soon  after  in  the  extremities. 
Bread  which  contains  some  of  it,  does  not  ferment 
well,  nor  bake  well,  and  is  glutinous  and  nauseous. 
The  bread  when  eaten  produces  intoxication,  lassitude, 
a sense  of  something  creeping  on  the  skin,  weakness 
of  the  joints,  with  convulsive  movements  occurring  pe- 
riodically. This  state  is  what  is  called  raphanio,  and 
convulsiones  cerealice.  Of  those  so  affected,  some  can 
only  breathe  in  an  upright  posture,  some  become  ma- 
niacal, others  epileptic,  or  tabid,  and  some  have  a thirst 
not  to  be  quenched ; and  livid  eruptions  and  cutaneous 
ulcers  are  not  uncommon.  The  disease  continues 
from  ten  days  to  two  or  three  months  and  longer. 
Those  who  have  formication,  pain,  and  numbness  of 
the  extremities  in  the  commencement,  generally  lose 
the  feeling  in  these  parts,  and  the  skin,  from  the  fin- 
gers to  the  fore-arm,  or  from  the  toes  to  the  middle  of 
the  tibia,  becomes  dry,  hard,  and  black,  as  if  covered 
with  soot.  This  species  of  mortification  is  called 
JYecrosis  ccrealis. 

As  a medicine,  the  secale  cornutum  is  given  internally 
to  excite  the  action  of  the  uterus  in  an  atonic  state  of 
that  organ,  producing  amenorrhoea,  &c.  and  during 
parturition.  Given  in  the  dose  of  ten  grains,  it  soon 
produces  a desire  to  make  water,  and  the  labour  pains 
quickly  follow;  but  it  is  a dangerous  medicine,  the 
effect  not  being  controllable. 

The  antidote  to  the  ill  effects  produced  in  the  mouth 
and  fauces  by  eating  bread  which  has  this  poison,  is 
milk.  Against  the  convulsions,  vomits,  saline  purga- 
tives, clysters,  submuriate  of  mercury  as  a puigative, 
are  first  to  be  given,  and  after  the  primae  vite  have  been 
duly  cleaned,  stimulants  of  camphire,  ammonia,  and 
aether  with  opium.  To  the  necrosis,  rectified  oil  of 
turpentine  is  very  beneficial  in  stopping  its  progress, 
and  then  warm  stimulating  fomentations  and  poultices. 
[Seepulvis  pavturie7)s.  A.] 

SECONDARY.  This  term  denotes  something  that 
acts  as  second  or  in  subordination  to  another.  Thus, 
in  diseases,  we  have  secondary  symptoms.  Sec  Pri- 
mary. 


SEC 


SEC 


Secondary  fever.  That  febrile  affection  which 
arises  after  a crisis,  or  the  discharge  of  some  morbid 
matter,  as  after  the  declension  of  the  small-pox  or  the 
measles. 

SECRETION.  Secretio.  “The  generic  name  of 
secretion  is  given  to  a function,  by  which  a part  of  the 
blood  escapes  from  the  organs  of  circulation,  and  dif- 
fuses itself  without  or  within  ; either*  preserving  its 
chemical  properties,  or  dispersing  after  its  elements 
have  undergone  another  order  of  combinations. 

The  secretions  are  generally  divided  into  three  sorts  ; 
the  exhalations , the  follicular  secretions , and  the 
glandular  secretions. 

Exhalations. — The  exhalations  take  place  as  well 
within  the  body  as  at  the  skin,  or  in  the  mucous  mem- 
branes ; thence  their  divisions  into  external  and  in- 
ternal. 

Internal  exhalations. — Wherever  large  or  small  sur- 
faces are  in  contact,  an  exhalation  takes  place ; 
wherever  fluids  are  accumulated  in  a cavity  without 
any  apparent  opening,  they  are  deposited  there  by  ex- 
halations : the  phenomenon  of  exhalation  is  also  mani- 
fested in  almost  every  part  of  the  animal  economy.  It 
exists  in  the  serous,  the  synovial,  the  mucous  mem- 
branes ; in  the  cellular  tissue,  the  interior  of  vessels, 
the  adipose  cells,  the  interior  of  the  eye,  of  the  ear,  the 
parenchyma  of  many  of  the  organs,  such  as  the  thymus, 
thyroid  glands,  the  capsulce  suprarenales , &c.  &c.  It  is 
by  exhalation  that  the  watery  humour,  the  vitreous 
humour,  the  liquid  of  the  labyrinth,  are  formed  and 
renewed.  The  fluids  exhaled  in  these  different  parts 
have  not  all  been  analyzed  ; among  those  that  have 
been,  several  approach  more  or  less  to  the  elements  of 
the  blood,  and  particularly  to  the  serum  ; such  are  the 
fluids  of  the  serous  membranes  of  the  cellular  tissue, 
of  the  chambers  of  the  eye ; others  differ  more  from  it, 
as  the  synovia,  the  fat,  &c. 

Serous  exhalation. — All  the  viscera  of  the  head,  of 
the  chest,  and  the  abdomen,  are  covered  with  a serous 
membrane,  which  also  lines  the  sides  of  these  cavities, 
so  that  the  viscera  are  not  in  contact  with  the  sides,  or 
with  the  adjoining  viscera,  except  by  the  intermedia- 
tion of  the  same  membrane ; and  as  its  surface  is  very 
smooth,  the  viscera  can  easily  change  their  relation 
with  each  other,  and  with  the  sides.  The  principal 
circumstance  which  keeps  up  the  polish  of  their  sur- 
face is  the  exhalation  of  which  they  are  the  seat;  a 
very  thin  fluid  constantly  passes  out  of  every  point  of 
the  membrane,  and  mixing  with  that  of  the  adjoining 
parts,  forms  with  it  a humid  layer  that  favours  the 
frictions  of  the  organs. 

It  appears  that  this  facility  of  sliding  upon  each 
other  is  very  favourable  to  the  action  of  the  organs, 
for  as  soon  as  they  are  deprived  of  it  by  any  malady 
of  the  serous  membrane,  their  functions  are  disordered, 
and  they  sometimes  cease  entirely. 

In  the  state  of  health,  the  fluid  secreted  by  the  serous 
membranes  appears  to  be  the  serum  of  the  blood,  a 
certain  quantity  of  albumen  excepted. 

Serous  _ exhalation  of  the  cellular  tissue. — This 
tissue,  which  is  called  cellular , is  generally  distributed 
through  animal  bodies ; it  is  useful  at  once  to  separate 
and  unite  the  different  organs,  and  the  parts  of  the 
organs.  The  tissue  is  every  where  formed  of  a great 
number  of  small  thin  plates,  which,  crossing  in  a 
thousand  different  ways,  form  a sort  of  felt.  The 
size  and  arrangement  of  the  plates  vary  according  to 
the  different  parts  of  the  body.  In  one  place  they  are 
larger,  thicker,  and  constitute  large  cells;  in  another, 
they  are  very  narrow  and  thin,  and  form  extremely 
small  cells;  in  some  points  the  tissue  is  capable  of 
extension  ; in  others,  it  is  little  susceptible  of  it,  and 
presents  a considerable  resistance.  But  whatever  is 
the  disposition  of  the  cellular  tissue,  its  plates,  by  their 
two  surfaces,  exhale  a fluid  which  has  the  greatest 
analogy  with  that  of  the  serous  membranes,  and  which 
appears  to  have  the  same  uses  ; these  are  to  render  the 
frictions  of  the  plates  easy  upon  each  other,  and  there- 
fore to  favour  the  reciprocal  motions  of  the  organs, 
and  even  the  relative  changes  of  the  different  parts  of 
which  they  are  composed. 

Fatty  exhalation. — Independently  of  the  serosity,  a 
fluid  is  found  in  many  parts  of  the  cellular  tissue  of  a 
very  different  nature,  which  is  the  fat. 

Under  the  relation  of  the  presence  of  the  fat,  the 
cellular  tissue  may  be  divided  into  three  sorts ; that 
which  contains  it  always,  that  which  contains  it  some- 


times, and  that  which  never  contains  it.  The  orbit, 
the  sole  of  the  foot,  the  pulp  of  the  fingers,  that  of  the 
toes,  always'  present  fat ; the  subcutaneous  cellular 
tissue,  and  that  which  covers  the  heart,  veins,  &c. 
present  it  often ; lastly,  that  of  the  scrotum,  of  the  eye- 
lids, of  the  interior  of  the  skull,  never  contain  it. 

The  fat  is  contained  in  distinct  cells  that  never  com- 
municate with  the  adjoining  ones.  It  has  been  sup- 
posed, from  this  circumstance,  that  the  tissue  that 
contains,  and  that  forms  the  fat,  was  not  the  same  as 
that  by  which  the  serosity  is  formed ; but  as  these  fatty 
cells  have  never  been  shown,  except  when  full  of  fat, 
this  anatomical  distinction  seems  doubtful.  The  size, 
the  form,  the  .disposition  of  these  cells,  are  not  less 
variable  than  the  quantity  of  fat  which  they  contain. 
In  some  individuals  scarcely  a few  ounces  exist,  while 
in  others  there  are  several  hundred  pounds. 

According  to  the  last  researches,  the  human  fat  is 
composed  cf  two  parts,  the  one  fluid,  the  other  con- 
crete, which  arc  themselves  compounded,  but  in  dif- 
ferent proportions,  of  two  new  proximate  principles. 

Synovial  exhalations. — Round  the  moveable  articu 
lations  a thin  membrane  is  found,  which  has  much 
analogy  with  the  serous  membranes  ; but  which,  how- 
ever, differs  from  them  by  having  small  reddish 
prolongations  that  contain  numerous  blood-vessels. 
These  are  called  synovial  fringes;  they  are  very 
visible  in  the  great  articulations  of  the  limbs. 

Internal  exhalation  of  the  eye. — The  different  hu- 
mours of  the  eye  are  also  formed  by  exhalation ; they 
are  each  of  them  separately  enveloped  in  a membrane 
that  appears  intended  for  exhalation  and  absorption. 

The  humours  of  the  eye  are,  the  aqueous  humour, 
the  formation  of  which  is  at  present  attributed  to  the 
ciliary  processes;  the  vitreous  humour,  secreted  by 
the  hyaloid ; the  crystalline,  the  black  matter  of  the 
choroid;  and  that  of  the  posterior  surface  of  the  iris. 

Bloody  exhalations. — In  all  the  exhalations  of  which 
we  have  spoken,  it  is  only  a part  of  the  principle  of 
the  blood  that  passes  out  of  the  vessels;  the  blood 
itself  appears  to  spread  in  several  of  the  organs,  and  fill 
in  them  the  sort  of  cellular  tissue  which  forms  their 
parenchyma;  such  are  the  cavernous  bodies  of  the 
penis  and  of  the  clitoris,  the  urethra  and  the  glans, 
the  spleen,  the  mamilla,  &c.  The  anatomical  exami- 
nation of  these  different  issues  seems  to  show  that 
they  are  habitually  filled  with  venous  blood,  the 
quantity  of  which  is  variable  according  to  different 
circumstances,  particularly  according  to  the  state  of 
action  or  inaction  of  the  organs. 

Many  other  interior  exhalations  exist  also,  among 
those  of  the  cavities  of  the  internal  ear,  of  the  paren- 
chyma, of  the  thymus,  of  the  thyroid  gland  ; that  of 
the  cavity  of  the  capsulce  suprarenales , &c. : but  the 
fluids  formed  in  these  different  parts  are  scarcely  un 
derstood ; they  have  never  been  analyzed,  and  their 
uses  are  unknown. 

External  exhalations. — These  are  composed  en- 
tirely of  the  exhalations  of  the  mucous  membranes , and 
of  that  of  the  skin,  or  cutaneous  transpiration. 

Exhalation  of  the  mucous  membranes. — There  are 
two  mucous  membranes ; the  one  covers  the  surface 
of  the  eye,  the  lachrymal  ducts,  the  nasal  cavities,  the 
sinuses,  the  middle  ear,  the  mouth,  all  the  intestinal 
canal,  the  excretory  canals  which  terminate  in  it ; 
lastly,  the  larynx,  the  trachea,  and  the  bronchia. 

The  other  mucous  membrane  covers  the  organs  of 
generation  and  of  the  urinary  apparatus. 

Cutaneous  transpiration. — A transparent  liquid,  of 
an  odour  more  or  less  strong,  salt,  acid,  usually  passes 
through  the  innumerable  openings  of  the  epidermis 
See  Perspiration.  This  liquid  is  generally  evapo- 
rated as  soon  as  it  is  in  contact  with  the  air,  and  at 
other  times  it  flows  upon  the  surface  of  the  skin.  In 
the  first  case  it  is  imperceptible,  and  bears  the  name 
of  insensible  transpiration ; in  the  second  it  is  called 
sweat. 

Follicular  secretions. — The  follicles  are  small  hollow 
organs  lodged  in  the  skin  or  mucous  membranes,  and 
which  on  that  account  are  divided  into  mucous  and 

cutaneous . 

The  follicles  are,  besides,  divided  into  simple  and 
compound.  The  simple  mucous  follicles  are  seen 
upon  nearly  the  whole  extent  of  the  mucous  mem- 
branes, where  they  are  more  or  less  abundant;  how- 
ever, there  are  points  of  considerable  extent  of  these 
membranes  where  they  are  not  seen. 


277 


SEC 


SEC 


The  bodies  that  bear  the  name  of  fungous  papilla 
of  the  tongue  the  amygdalae,  the  glands  of  the  cardia, 
the  prostate,  &c.  are  considered  by  anatomists  as 
collections  of  simple  follicles.  Perhaps  this  opinion  is 
not  sufficiently  supported. 

The  fluid  that  they  secrete  is  little  known  ; it  appears 
analogous  to  the  mucous,  and  to  have  the  same  uses. 
In  almost  all  the  points  of  the  skin,  little  openings 
exist,  which  are  the  orifices  of  small  hollow  organs, 
with  membranous  sides,  generally  filled  with  an  al- 
buminous and  fatty  matter,  the  consistence,  the  colour, 
the  odour,  and  even  the  savour  of  which  are  variable, 
according  to  the  different  parts  of  the  body,  and  which 
is  continually  spread  upon  the  surface  of  the  skin. 

These  small  organs  are  called  the  follicles  of  the 
skin  ; one  of  them  at  least  exists  at  the  base  of  each 
hair,  and  generally  the  hairs  traverse  the  cavity  of  a 
follicle  in  their  direction  outwards. 

The  follicles  form  that  mucous  and  fatty  matter 
which  is  seen  upon  the  skin  of  the  cranium,  and  on  that 
of  the  pavillion  of  the  ear ; the  follicles  also  secrete 
the  cerumen  in  the  auditory  canal ; that  whitish  mat- 
ter, of  considerable  consistence,  that  is  pressed  out  of 
the  skin  of  the  face,  in  the  form  of  small  worms,  is 
also  contained  in  follicles  ; it  is  the  same  matter  which, 
by  its  surface  being  in  contact  with  the  air,  becomes 
black,  and  produces  the  numerous  spots  that  are  seen 
upon  some  persons’  faces,  particularly  on  the  sides  of 
the  nose  and  cheeks. 

The  follicles  also  appear  to  secrete  that  odorous, 
whitish  matter,  which  is  always  renewed  at  the  ex- 
ternal surface  of  tip?  genital  parts. 

By  spreading  on  the  surface  of  the  epidermis,  of  the 
hair  of  the  head,  of  the  skin,  &c.,  the  matter  of  the 
follicles  supports  the  suppleness  and  elasticity  of  those 
parts,  renders  their  surface  smooth  and  polished, ffavou  rs 
their  frictions  upon  one  another.  On  account  of  its 
unctuous  nature,  it  renders  them  less  penetrable  by 
humidity,  &c. 

Glandular  Secretions. — The  name  of  gland  is  given 
to  a secreting  organ  which  sheds  the  fluid  that  it  forms 
upon  the  surface  of  a mucous  membrane,  or  of  the 
skin,  by  one  or  more  excretory  glands. 

The  number  of  glands  is  considerable , the  action  of 
each  bears  the  name  of  glandular  secretion.  There 
are  six  secretions  of  this  sort,  that  of  the  tears,  of  the 
saliva,  of  the  bile,  of  the  pancreatic  fluid,  of  the  urine, 
of  the  semen,  and  lastly,  that  of  the  milk.  We  may 
add  the  action  of  the  mucous  glands,  and  of  the  glands 
of  Cowper. 

Secretion  of  Tears— The  gland  that  forms  the  tears 
is  very  small ; it  is  situated  in  the  orbit  of  the  eye, 
above  and  a little  outward;  it  is  composed  of  small 
grains,  united  by  cellular  tissues;  its  excretory  canals, 
small  and  numerous,  open  behind  the  external  angle  of 
the  upper  eyelid:  it  receives  a small  artery,  a branch 
of  the  ophthalmic,  and  a nerve,  a division  of  the  fifth 
pair. 

In  a state  of  health,  the  tears  are  in  small  quantity ; 
the  liquid  that  forms  them  is  limpid,  without  odour,  of 
a salt  savour.  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin,  who  ana- 
lyzed it,  found  it  composed  of  much  water,  of  some  cen- 
tesimals  of  mucus,  muriate  and  phosphate  of  soda, 
and  a little  pure  soda  and  lime.  What  are  called  tears , 
are  not,  however,  the  fluid  secreted  entirely  by  the 
lachrymal  gland ; it  is  a mixture  of  this  fluid  with  the 
matter  secreted  by  the  conjunctiva,  and  probably  with 
that  of  the  glands  of  Meibomius. 

The  tears'  form  a layer  before  the  conjunctiva  of  tbe- 
eye,  and  defend  it  from  the  contact  of  air;  they  facili- 
tate the  frictions  of  the  eyelids  upon  the  eye,  favour 
the  expulsion  of  foreign  bodies,  and  prevent  the  action 
of  irritating  bodies  upon  the  conjunctiva  ; in  this  case 
the  quantity  rapidly  augments.  They  are  also  a means 
of  expressing  the  passions : the  tears  flow  from  vex- 
ation, pain,  joy,  and  pleasure.  The  nervous  system 
has  therefore  a particular  influence  upon  their  secre- 
tion. This  influence  probably  takes  place  by  means 
of  the  nerve  that  the  fifth  pair  of  cerebral  nerves  sends 
to  the  lachrymal  gland. 

Secretion  of  the  Saliva.— The  salivary  glands  are, 
1st,  the  two  parotids,  situated  before  the  ear  and  behind 
the  neck,  and  the  branch  of  the  jaw  ; 2d,  the  submax- 
illaries,  situated  below  and  on  the  front  of  the  body  of 
this  bone ; 3d,  lastly,  the  sublinguals,  placed  immedi- 
ately below  the  tongue.  The  parotids  and  the  sub- 
inaillxaries  have  onlv  one  excretory  canal ; the  sublin- 
278 


guals  have  several.  All  these  glands  are  formed  by 
the  union  of  the  granulations  of  different  forms  and 
dimensions ; they  receive  a considerable  quantity  of 
arteries  relatively  to  their  mass.  Several  nerves  are 
distributed  to  them,  which  proceed  from  the  brain  or 
the  spinal  marrow. 

The  saliva  which  these  glands  secrete  flows  con- 
stantly into  the  mouth,  and  occupies  the  lower  part  of 
it ; it  is  at  first  placed  between  the  anterior  and  lateral 
part  of  the  tongue  and  the  jaw  ; and  when  the  space  is 
filled,  it  passes  into  the  space  between  the  lower  lip,  the 
cheek,  and  the  external  side  of  thqjaw.  Being  thus 
deposited  in  the  mouth,  it  mixes  with  the  fluids  se- 
creted by  the  membranes  and  the  mucous  follicles. 

Secretion  of  the  Pancreatic  Juice. — The  pancreas  is 
situated  transversely  in  the  abdomen,  behind  the  sto- 
mach. It  has  an  excretory  canal,  which  opens  into  the 
duodenum,  beside  that  of  the  liver.  The  granulous 
structure  of  this  gland  has  made  it  be  considered  a 
salivary  gland ; but  it  is  different  from  them  by  the 
smallness  of  the  arteries  that  it  receives,  and  by  not 
appearing  to  receive  any  cerebral  nerve. 

It  is  impossible  to  explain  the  use  of  the  pancreatic 
juice. 

Secretion  of  the  Bile. — The  liver  is  the  largest  of  all 
the  glands ; it  is  also  distinguished  by  the  singular  cir- 
cumstance among  the  secretory  organs,  that  it  is  con- 
stantly traversed  by  a great  quantity  of  venous  blood, 
besides  the  arterial  blood,  which  it  receives  as  well  as 
every  other  part.  Its  parenchyma  does  not  resemble, 
in  any  respect,  that  of  the  other  glands,  and  the  fluid 
formed  by  it  is  not  less  different  from  that  of  the  other 
glandular  fluids. 

The  excretory  canal  of  the  liver  goes  to  .the  duode- 
num ; before  entering  it,  it  communicates  with  a small 
membranous  bag,  called  vesicula  fellis , and  on  this 
account,  that  it  is  almost  always  filled  with  bile. 

Few  fluids  are  so  compound,  and  so  different  from 
the  blood,  as  the  bile.  Its  colour  is  greenish,  its  taste 
very  bitter ; it  is  viscous,  thready,  sometimes  limpid, 
and  sometimes  muddy.  It  contains  water,  albumen,  a 
matter  called  resinous  by  some  chemists,  a yellow  co- 
louring principle,  soda,  and  some  salts,  viz.  muriate, 
phosphate,  and  sulphate  of  soda,  phosphate  of  lime 
and  oxide  of  iron.  These  properties  belong  to  the  bile 
contained  in  the  gall  bladder.  That  which  goes  out 
directly  from  the  liver,  called  hepatic  bile , has  never 
been  analyzed : it  appears  to  be  of  a less  deep  colour, 
less  viscous,  and  less  bitter  than  the  cystic  bile.  The 
formation  of  the  bile  appears  constant. 

The  liver  receiving  venous  blood  at  the  same  time  by 
the  vena  porta,  and  arterial  blood  by  the  hepatic  artery, 
physiologists  have  been  very  eager  to  know  which  of 
the  two  it  is  that  forms  the  bile.  Several  have  said 
that  the  blood  of  the  vena  porta,  having  more  carbon 
and  hydrogen  than  that  of  the  hepatic  artery,  is  more 
proper  for  furnishing  the  elements  of  the  bile.  Bichat 
lias  successfully  contested  this  opinion ; he  has  shown, 
that  the  quantity  of  arterial  blood  which  arrives  at  the 
liver  is  more  in  relation  with  the  quantity  of  bile 
formed  that  that  of  the  venous  blood ; that  the  volume 
of  the  hepatic  canal  is  not  in  proportion  with  the  vena 
porta;  that  the  fat,  a fluid  much  hydrogenated,  is  secre- 
ted by  the  arterial  blood,  &c.  He  might  have  added, 
that  there  is  nothing  to  prove  that  the  blood  of  the  vena 
porta  has  more  analogy  with  the  bile  than  the  arterial 
blood.  We  shall  take  no  part  in  this  discussion  ; both 
opinions  are  equally  destitute  of  proof.  Besides,  no- 
thing repels  the  idea,  that  both  sorts  of  blood  serve  in 
the  secretion.  This  seems  even  to  be  indicated  by 
anatomy ; for  injections  show  that  all  the  vessels  of  the 
liver,  arterial,  venous,  lymphatic,  and  excretory,  com- 
municate with  each  other. 

The  bile  contributes  very  usefully  in  digestion,  but 
the  manner  is  unknown.  In  our  present  ignorance 
relative  to  the  causes  of  diseases,  we  attribute  noxious 
properties  to  the  bile,  which  it  is  probably  far  from 

possessing. 

Secretion  of  the  Urine. — This  secretion  is  different 
in  several  respects  from  the  preceding.  The  liquid 
which  results  from  it  is  much  more  abundant  than  that 
of  any  other  gland  ; in  place  of  serving  in  any  internal 
uses,  it  is  expelled  ; its  retention  would  be  attended  by 
the  most  dangerous  consequences.  We  are  advertised 
of  the  necessity  of  its  expulsion  by  a particular  feel- 
ing, which,  like  the  instinctive  phenomena  of  this 
sort,  becomes  very  painful  if  not  quickly  attended  to. 


SED 


SEL 


In  explaining  the  glandular  secretions,  physiologists 
have  given  full  scope  to  their  imagination.  The  glands 
have  been  successively  considered  as  sieves,  filters,  as 
a focus  of  fermentation.  Bordeu,  and,  more  recently, 
Bichat,  have  attributed  a peculiar  motion  and  sensibi- 
lity to  their  particles,  by  which  they  choose,  in  the 
blood  which  traverses  them,  the  particles  that  are  fit  to 
enter  into  the  fluids  that  they  secrete.  Atmospheres 
and  compartments  have  been  allotted  to  them ; they 
have  been  supposed  susceptible  of  erection,  of  sleep, 
&c.  Notwithstanding  the  efforts  of  many  learned 
men,  the  truth  is,  that  what  passes  in  a gland  when  it 
acts,  is  entirely  unknown.  Chemical  phenomena  ne- 
cessarily take  place. 

Several  secreted  fluids  arf*acid,  while  the  blood  is 
alkaline.  The  most  of  them  contain  proximate  prin- 
caples  which  do  not  exist  in  the  blood,  and  which  are 
formed  in  the  glands  , but  the  particular  mode  of  these 
combinations  is  unknown. 

We  must  not,  however,  confound  among  these  sup- 
positions upon  the  action  of  the  glands,  an  ingenious 
conjecture  of  Dr.  Wollaston.  This  learned  man  sup- 
poses that  very  weak  electricity  may  have  a marked 
influence  upon  the  secretions.  He  rests  his  opinion 
upon  a curious  experiment,  of  which  we  will  here  give 
an  account. 

Dr.  Wollaston  took  aglass  tube,  two  inches  long,  and 
three  quarters  of  an  inch  diameter : he  closed  one  of 
its  extremities  with  a bit  of  bladder.  He  poured  a lit- 
tle water  into  the  tube,  with  1-240  parts  of  its  weight 
of  muriate  of  soda.  He  wet  the  bladder  on  the  out- 
side, and  placed  it  on  a piece  of  silver.  He  then  bent 
a zinc  wire,  so  that  one  of  its  ends  touched  the  silver, 
and  the  other  entered  the  tube  the  length  of  an  inch. 
In  the  same  instant  the  external  face  of  the  bladder 
gave  indications  of  the  presence  of  pure  soda;  so  that, 
under  the  influence  of  this  very  weak  electricity,  there 
was  a decomposition  of  muriate  of  soda,  and  a pas- 
sage of  the  soda,  separated  from  the  acid,  through  the 
bladder.  ' Dr.  Wollaston  thinks  it  is  not  impossible  that 
something  analogous  may  happen  in  the  secretions ; 
but,  before  admitting  this  idea,  many  other  proofs  are 
necessary. 

Several  organs,  such  as  the  thyroid  and  thymus  bo- 
dies, the  spleen,  the  supra-renal  capsules,  have  been 
called  glands  by  many  anatomists.  Professor  Chaus- 
siei  has  substituted  for  this  denomination  that  of  the 
glandiform  ganglions.  The  use  of  these  parts  is  en- 
tirely unknown.  As  they  are  generally  more  nume- 
rous in  the  foetus,  they  are  supposed  to  have  important 
functions,  but  there  exists  no  proof  of  it.  Works  of 
physiology  contain  a great  many  hypotheses  intended 
to  explain  their  functions.” — Magendie's  Physiology. 

Sectio  ctesarea.  See  Ocesarian  operation. 

Sectio  franconia.  See  Lithotomy. 

SECUNDINES.  The  after-birth,  and  membranes 
which  are  expanded  from  its  edge,  and  which  form  a 
complete  involucrum  of  the  foetus  and  its  waters,  go 
under  the  term  of  secundines.  See  Placenta. 

SECUNDUM  ARTEM.  According  to  art.  A term 
frequently  used  in  prescription,  and  denoted  by  the  let- 
ters S.  A.,  which  are  usually  affixed,  when  the  making 
up  of  the  recipe  in  perfection  requires  some  uncommon 
care  and  dexterity. 

SECUNDUS.  Applied  by  botanists  to  leaves  and 
parts  of  the  fructification  which  are  unilateral,  all 
leaning  towards  one  side ; as  the  leaves  and  flowers  of 
the  Convallaria  majalis. 

Securidaca.  (From  securis,  an  axe : so  called  be- 
cause its  leaves  resemble  a small  axe.)  S eeHyoscy- 
amus  niger. 

SEDATIVE.  (Sedativus ; from  sedo , to  ease  or 
assuage.)  Sedantia.  Medicines  which  have  the  power 
of  diminishing  the  animal  energy,  without  destroying 
life.  They  are  divided  into  sedativa  soporifica , as 
opium,  papaver,  hyoscyamus;  and  sedativa  refrige- 
rantia , as  neutral  salts,  acids,  &c. 

Sedative  salt.  See  Boracic  acid. 

Sedentaria  ossa.  The  bones  on  which  we  sit. 
The  os  coccygis  and  ischia. 

SEDGE.  See  Ms  pseudacorus. 

SEDIMENT.  The  heavy  parts  of  liquids  which  fall 
to  the  bottom. 

Sediment , laterilious.  See  Latcritious  sediment. 

SEDLITZ.  Seydschutz.  The  name  of  a village 
of  Bohemia,  in  the  circle  of  Saartz,  where  Hoffman 
discovered  a simple  mineral  water,  Aqua  Sedlitziana. 


From  chemical  analysis  it  appears,  that  it  is  strongly 
impregnated  with  sulphate  of  magnesia  or  Epsom  salt, 
and  it  is  to  this,  along  with,  probably,  the  small  quan- 
tity of  muriate  of  magnesia,  that  it  owes  its  bitter  and 
saline  taste,  and  its  purgative  properties.  The  diseases 
in  which  this  water  is  recommended  are,  crudities  of 
the  stomach,  hypochondriasis,  amenorrhcea,  and  the 
anomalous  complaints  succeeding  the  cessation  of  the 
catamenia,  cedematous  tumours  of  the  legs  in  literary 
men,  htemorrhoidal  affections,  and  scorbutic  erup- 
tions. 

SEDUM.  (From  sedo,  to  assuage : so  called  because 
it  allays  inflammation.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class.  Decandria  ; 
Order,  Pcntagynia. 

Sedum  acre.  Illecebra ; Vermicularis  ; Piper  mu- 
rale ; Sedum  minus.  Wall-pepper;  Stone-crop.  The 
plant  thus  called  is,  in  ils  recent  state,  extremely  acrid, 
like  the  hydropiper;  hence,  if  taken  in  large  doses,  it 
acts  powerfully  on  the  primae  via?,  proving  both  emetic 
and  cathartic ; applied  to  the  skin  as  a cataplasm,  it 
frequently  produces  vesications  and  erosions.  Boer- 
haave  therefore  imagines,  that  its  internal  employment 
must  be  unsafe;  but  experience  has  discovered,  that  a 
decoction  of  this  plant  is  not  only  safe,  but  of  great  effi- 
cacy in  scorbutic  complaints.  For  which  purpose,  a 
handful  of  the  herb  is  directed,  by  Below,  to  be  boiled 
in  eight  pints  of  beer,  till  they  are  reduced  to  four,  of 
which  three  or  four  ounces  are  to  be  taken  every,  or 
every  other  morning.  Milk  has  been  found  to  answer 
this  purpose  better  than  beer.  Not  only  ulcers  simply 
scorbutic,  but  those  of  a scrofulous  or  even  cancerous 
tendency,  have  been  cured  by  the  use  of  this  plant;  of 
which  Marquet  relates  several  instances.  He  likewise 
found  it  useful  as  an  external  application  in  destroying 
fungous  flesh,  and  in  promoting  a discharge  in  gan- 
grenes and  carbuncles.  Another  effect  for  which  this 
plant  is  esteemed,  is  that  of  stopping  intermittent 
fevers. 

Sedum  luteum  murale.  Navel-wort. 

Sedum  majus.  See  Sempervivum  tectorum. 

Sedum  minus.  See  Sedum  acre. 

Sedum  telephium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
orpine.  Fabacrassa;  Telephium ; Fab  aria  crassula; 
Anacampseros.  The  plant  which  bears  these  names  in 
various  pharmacopoeias,  is  the  Sedum— foliis  planius- 
culis  serratis , corymbo  folioso,  caule  credo , of  Lin 
naeus.  It  was  formerly  ranked  as  an  antiphlogistic,  but 
now  forgotten. 

SEED.  See  Semen. 

Seed  vessel.  See  Pericarpium. 

SEEING.  See  Vision. 

Seignette’s  salt.  A neutral  salt : first  prepared 
and  made  known  by  Peter  Seignette,  who  lived  at 
Rochelle,  in  France,  towards  the  end  of  the  seventeenth 
century.  See  Soda  tartarizata. 

SELENI'TES.  (From  ae\rivri,  the  moon.)  1.  Sparry 
gypsum,  a sulphate  of  lime. 

2.  A white  stone  having  a figure  on  it  resembling  a 
moon. 

SELENIUM.  (From  aeXyvri,  the  moon:  so  called 
from  its  usefulness  in  lunacy.)  1.  A kind  of  peony. 

2.  A new  elementary  body  extracted  by  Berzelius 
from  the  pyrites  of  Fahlun,  which,  from  its  chemical 
properties,  he  places  between  sulphur  and  tellurium, 
though  it  has  more  properties  in  common  with  the  for- 
mer, than  with  the  latter  substance. 

SELF-HEAL.  See  Prunella. 

SELINE.  (From  (teXtjvtj,  the  moon  ; because  they 
are  opake,  and  look  like  little  moons.)  A disease  of 
the  nails,  in  which  white  spots  are  occasionally  seen  in 
their  substance. 

SELINIC  ACID.  Acidum  selinicum.  If  selinium 
be  heated  to  dryness  it  forms  with  nitric  acid,  a vola- 
tile and  crystallizable  compound,  called  selinic  acid, 
which  unites  to  some  of  the  metallic  oxides  producing 
salts,  called  seleniates. 

SELI'NUM.  (The  ancient  generic  name  of  The- 
ophrastus and  Dioscorides,  whose  EeA iov  is  said  to  be 
derived  from  irapa  to  ev  e\ei  (pveadai,  on  account  of  its 
growing  in  mud ; whence  Homer’s  c\coQpen'lov  ocXivov. 
De  Theis  says,  that  selinum  is  derived  from  oeXrivri, 
the  moon,  because  of  the  shape  of  its  growing  seeds; 
and  that  it  is  the  foundation  of  many  other  compound 
names  of  umbelliferous  plants  among  the  Greeks,  as 
opcoocXivov,  ircrpooeXivov,  &c.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Digynia. 


SEM 


SEM 

SELLA.  {Sella,  quasi  sedda  ; from  sedeo,  to  sit.) 
A saddle. 

Se'lla  turcica.  (So  called  from  its  supposed  re- 
semblance to  a Turkish  saddle.)  Ephippium.  A cavity 
in  the  sphenoid  bone,  containing  the  pituitary  gland, 
surrounded  by  the  four  clinoid  processes. 

SELTZER.  The  name  of  a place  in  Germany, 
Neider  Seltzer,  about  ten  miles  from  Frankfort  on  the 
Mayne,  where  a saline  mineral  water  rises,  which  is 
slightly  alkaline,  highly  acidulated  with  carbonic  acid, 
containing  more  of  this  volatile  principle  than  is  suf- 
ficient to  saturate  the  alkali,  and  the  earths  which  it 
holds  in  solution.  It  is  particularly  serviceable  in  re- 
lieving some  of  the  symptoms  that  indicate  a morbid 
affection  of  the  lungs ; in  slow  hectic  fever,  exanthe- 
matous eruptions  of  the  skin,  foulness  of  the  stomach, 
bilious  vomiting,  acidity,  and  heartburn,  spasmodic 
pains  in  any  part  of  the  alimentary  canal,  and  bloody 
or  highly  offensive  stools.  On  account  of  its  property 
in  relieving  spasmodic  pains,  and  from  its  rapid  deter- 
mination to  the  kidneys,  and  perhaps  its  alkaline  con- 
tents, it  has  been  sometimes  employed  with  great  advan- 
tage in  diseases  of  the  urinary  organs,  especially  those 
that  are  attended  with  the  formation  of  calculus.  A large 
proportion  of  the  Seltzer  water,  either  genuine  or  arti- 
ficial, that  is  consumed  in  this  country,  is  for  the  relief 
of  these  disorders.  Even  in  gonorrhoea,  either  simple 
or  venereal,  Hoffmann  asserts,  that  advantage  is  to 
be  derived  from  this  medicine.  The  usual  dose  is  from 
half  a pint  to  a pint. 

SEMECA'RPLS.  (From  aypeio),  to  mark,  and  uap- 
ttos,  a fruit:  a name  evidently  derived  from  the  use 
that  is  made  of  its  nut  in  the  East  Indies  to  mark  table 
linen  and  articles  of  apparel.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants,  Class  Pentandria ; Order,  Trigynia. 

Semecarpus  anacardhjm.  The  marking  nut-tree. 
The  systematic  name,  according  to  some,  of  the  tree 
which  is  supposed  to  afford  the  Malacca  bean.  See 
Avicenna  tomentosa. 

Semeio'sis.  (From  aypeiou),  to  notify.)  See  Se- 

miotice. 

SE'MEN.  {Semen,  inis.  n. ; sero , to  sow.)  A.  The 
seed  or  prolific  liquor  of  animals  secreted  in  the  testi- 
cles, and  carried  through  the  epididymis  and  vas  defe- 
rens into  the  vesiculee  seminales,  to  be  emitted  sub 
coitu  hi  to  the  female  vagina,  and  there,  by  its  aura,  to 
penetrate  and  impregnate  the  ovulum  in  the  ovarium. 

In  castrated  animals,  and  in  eunuchs,  the  vesicul® 
seminales  are  small,  and  contracted;  and  a little  lym- 
phatic liquor,  but  no  semen,  is  found  in  them.  The 
semen  is  detained  for  some  time  in  the  vesiculas  semi- 
nales, and  rendered  thicker  from  the  continual  absorp- 
tion of  its  very  thin  part,  by  the  oscula  of  the  lym- 
phatic vessels.  In  lascivious  men,  the  semen  is  some- 
times, though  rarely,  propelled  by  nocturnal  pollution 
from  the  vesiculte  seminales,  through  the  ejaculatory 
ducts  (which  arise  from  the  vesiculae  seminales,  per- 
forate the  urethra  transversely,  and  open  themselves 
by  narrow  and  very  nervous  mouths  at  the  sides  of  the 
caput  gallinaginis),  into  the  urethra,  and  from  it  to 
some  distance.  But  in  chaste  men,  the  greatest  part  is 
again  gradually  absorbed  from  the  vesiculae  seminales 
through  the  lymphatic  vessels,  and  conciliates  strength 
to  the  body.  The  smell  of  semen  is  specific,  heavy, 
affecting  the  nostrils,  yet  not  disagreeable.  The  same 
odour  is  observed  in  the  roots  of  the  orchis,  the  iuli  of 
chesnuts,  and  the  antherae  of  many  plants.  The  smell 
of  the  semen  of  quadrupeds,  when  at  heat,  is  so  pene- 
trating, as  to  render  their  flesh  foetid  and  useless,  unless 
castrated.  Thus  the  flesh  of  the  stag,  tempore  coitus, 
is  unfit  to  eat.  The  taste  of  semen  is  fatuous,  and 
somewhat  acrid.  In  the  testes,  its  consistence  is  thin 
and  diluted  ; but  in  the  vesicuke  seminales,  viscid, 
dense,  and  rather  pellucid;  and  by  venery  and  debility 
it  is  rendered  thinner. 

Specific  gravity.  The  greatest  part  of  the  semen 
sinks  to  the  bottom  in  water,  yet  some  part  swims  on 
its  surface,  which  it  covers  like  very  fine  threads  mu- 
tually connected  together  in  the  form  of  a cobweb. 

Colour.  In  the  testicles  it  is  somewhat  yellow,  and 
in  the  vesiculee  seminales  it  acquires  a deeper  hue. 
That  emitted  by  pollution  or  coition,  becomes  white 
from  its  mixture  with  the  whitish  liquor  of  the  prostate 
gland  during  its  passage  through  the  urethra.  In  those 
people  who  labour  under  jaundice,  and  from  the  abuse 
of  saffron,  the  semen  has  been  seen  yellow,  and,  in  an 
atrabilary  young  man  black. 


Quality.  Semen,  exposed  to  the  atmospheric  air,- 
loses  its  pellucidity,  and  becomes  thick,  but  after  a few 
hours  it  is  again  rendered  more  fluid  and  pellucid  than 
it  was  immediately  after  its  emission.  This  phenome- 
non cannot  arise  from  water  or  oxygen  attracted  from 
the  air.  At  length  it  deposites  phosphate  of  lime,  and 
forms  a corneous  crust. 

Experiments  with  semen  prove,  that  it  turns  the  syrup 
of  violets  green,  and  dissolves  earthy,  neutral,  and  me- 
tallic salts.  Fresh  semen  is  insoluble  in  water,  until  it 
has  undergone  the  above  changes  in  atmospheric  air. 
It  is  dissolved  by  alkaline  salts.  By  aethereal  oil  it  is 
dried  into  a pellucid  pellicle,  like  the  cortex  of  the  brain. 

It  is  dissolved  by  all  acids,  except  the  oxymuriatic, 
by  which  it  is  coagulated  in  the  form  of  white  flakes. 
It  is  also  acted  upon  by  alkohol  of  wine. 

Vauquelin,  who  analyzed  it,  found  it  composed  of 


1.  Water 900 

2.  Animal  mucilage 60 

3.  Soda 10 

4.  Phosphate  of  lime 30 


5.  Examined  by  the  microscope,  a multitude  of  ani- 
malcula  are  observed  in  it,  which  appear  to  have  a 
round  head  and  a long  tail ; these  animalcula  move 
with  considerable  rapidity  ; they  seem  to  fly  the  light, 
and  to  seek  the  shade.  6.  The  odorous  principle , 
which  flies  off  immediately  from  fresh  semen.  It  ap- 
pears to  consist  of  a peculiar  vital  principle,  and  by  the 
ancients  was  called  aura  seminis. 

Use.  1.  Emitted  into  the  female  vagina,  sub  coitu, 
it  possesses  the  wonderful  and  stupendous  power  of 
impregnating  the  ovulum  in  the  female  ovarium.  The 
odorous  principle,  or  aura  spermatica  only,  appears  to 
penetrate  through  the  cavity  of  the  uterus  and  Fallopian 
tubes  to  the  female  ovarium,  and  there  to  impregnate 
the  albuminous  latex  of  the  mature  ovulum  by  its  vital 
power.  The  other  principles  of  the  semen  appear  to 
be  only  a vehicle  of  the  seminal  aura.  2.  In  chaste 
men,  the  semen  returning  through  the  lymphatic  ves- 
sels into  the  mass  of  the  blood,  gives  strength  to  the 
body  and  mind ; hence  the  bull  is  so  fierce  and  brave, 
the  castrated  ox  so  gentle  and  weak;  hence  every 
animal  languishes  post  coitum  ; and  hence  tabes  dor- 
salis from  onanism.  3.  It  is  by  the  stimulus  of  the 
semen  absorbed,  at  the  age  of  puberty,  into  the  mass 
of  the  humours,  that  the  beard  and  hair  of  the  pubes, 
but  in  animals,  the  horns,  are  produced  ; and  the  weep- 
ing voice  of  the  boy  changed  into  that  of  a man. 

B.  The  seed  of  plants  or  nucleus  formed  in  the  ger- 
men  of  a plant,  for  the  purpose  of  propagating  its  spe- 
cies, the  sole  “ end  and  aim”  of  all  the  organs  of  fruc- 
tification. Every  other  part  is  in  some  manner  subser- 
vient to  the  forming,  perfecting,  or  dispersing  of  these. 

A seed  consists  of  several  parts,  some  of  which  are 
more  essential  than  others,  viz. 

1.  The  hilum , or  scar. 

2.  The  funiculus  umbilicalis , or  filament,  by  which 
the  immature  seed  is  connected  to  the  receptacle. 

3.  The  testa,  or  tunica  seminis. 

4.  The  seed  lobes,  or  cotyledons.  These  parts  are 
beautifully  seen  by  macerating  the  seeds  of  a kidney 
or  other  bean,  or  gourd,  in  water. 

The  less  essential  parts  are, 

1.  The  arillus.  4.  The  capsula. 

2.  The  pappus.  5.  The  ala. 

3.  The  cauda. 

From  the  difference  in  the  form,  surface,  situation, 
and  number,  rise  the  following  distinctions  of  seeds. 

1.  Semina  arillata  ; as  in  Jasminum. 

2.  Paposa;  as  in  Leontodon  taraxacum. 

3.  Caudata ; as  in  Clematis  vitalba. 

4.  Calyculata,  covered  with  a bony  calyx ; as  in  Coix 
lachryma. 

5.  Alata ; as  in  Bignonia. 

6.  Hamosa,  furnished  with  one  or  three  hooks;  aa 
in  Daucus  muricatus. 

7.  Lanata,  covered  with  wool ; as  in  Bombax,  Goa- 
sipium , and  Anemone  hortensis. 

8.  Rotuda ; as  in  Pisum,  and  Brassica. 

9.  Rotunda-compressa  ; as  Ervum  lens. 

10.  Oblonga ; as  in  Boerhavia  diffusa. 

11.  Conica ; as  in  Bcllium- 

12.  Grata  ; as  in  Quercus  robur. 

13.  Triquetra  ; as  in  Rheum , and  Rumex. 

14.  Eanceolata ; as  in  Fraxinus. 

15.  Acuminata ; as  Cucumis  sativus. 

H>.  Reniformia  ; as  in  Pkuseolus. 


SEM 


SEM 


17.  A culeata;  as  Ranunculus  arvensis. 

18.  Cochleata ; as  in  Salsola. 

19.  Cymbiformia  ; as  in  Calendula  officinalis. 

20.  Linearia ; as  in  Crucianella. 

21.  Aristata  ; as  in  Holcus  saccharatus. 

22.  Echinata;  as  in  Verbena  layulacea. 

23.  Hispida ; as  Daucus  carota. 

24.  Hirsuta  ; as  in  Scandix  trichosperma. 

25.  Muricata;  as  Ranunculus  parviflorus. 

26.  Glabra ; as  in  Galium  montanum. 

27.  Rugosa ; as  in  Lithosp emium  arvense. 

28.  Callosa  ; as  i*n  Citrus  medica. 

29.  Lapidea  ; as  in  Lithospermum. 

30.  Color ata ; as  in  Charophyllum  aureum. 

31.  Striata ; as  in  Conium  maculatum. 

32.  Sulcata ; as  in  Scandix  odorata. 

33.  Transversim  sulcatu  ; as  Picris. 

34.  Nuda  ; as  in  the  Gymnosperinial  plants. 

35.  Tecta;  as  in  Angiospermial  plants. 

36.  Nidulantia,  adhering  to  the  external  surface  ; as 
in  Fragaria  vesca. 

37.  Pendula,  suspended  by  a filament  external  to  the 
seed  vessel ; as  in  Magnolia  grandijlora. 

38.  Pauca,  when  few  in  number. 

39.  Plurima , many ; as  in  Papaver. 

The  parts  of  a seed  when  germinating  are, 

1.  Colyledones. 

2.  Corculum. 

The  variety  of  forms  of  seeds  are  not  without  their 
uses,  and  the  various  modes  by  which  seeds  are  dis- 
persed, cannot  fail  to  strike  an  observing  mind  with 
admiration.  “ Who  has  not  listened,”  says  Sir  James 
Smith,  “in  a calm  and  sunny  day,  to  the  crackling  of 
furze  bushes,  caused  by  the  explosion  of  their  little 
elastic  pods ; nor  watched  the  down  of  innumerable 
seeds  floating  on  the  summer  breeze,  till  they  are  over- 
taken by  a shower,  which,  moistening  their  wings, 
stops  their  further  flight,  and  at  the  same  time  accom- 
plishes its  final  purpose,  by  immediately  promoting  the 
germination  of  each  seed  in  the  moist  earth  1 How  little 
are  children  aware,  as  they  blow  away  the  seeds  of 
dandelion,  or  stick  burs,  in  sport,  on  each  other’s 
clothes,  that  they  are  fulfilling  one  of  the  greatest  ends 
of  nature.  Sometimes  the  calyx,  beset  with  hooks, 
forms  the  bur;  sometimes  hooks  encompass  the  fruit 
itself.  Pulpy  fruits  serve  quadrupeds  and  birds  as 
food,  while  their  seeds,  often  small,  hard,  and  indigesti- 
ble, pass  uninjured  by  them  through  the  intestines,  and 
are  deposited  far  from  their  original  place  of  growth, 
in  a condition  peculiarly  fit  for  vegetation.  Even  such 
seeds  as  are  themselves  eaten,  like  the  various  sorts  of 
nuts,  are  hoarded  up  in  the  cracked  ground,  and  occa- 
sionally forgotten,  or  the  earth  swells  and  encloses 
them.  The  ocean  itself  serves  to  waft  the  larger 
kinds  of  seeds  from  their  native  soil  to  far  distant 
shores.” 

Semen  adjowaen.  A seed  imported  from  the  East, 
df  a pleasant  smell,  a grateful  aromatic  taste,  some- 
what like  savory.  It  possesses  exciting,  stimulating, 
and  carminative  virtues,  and  is  given  in  the  East  in 
nervous  weakness,  dyspepsia,  flatulency,  and  heartburn. 

Semen  agave.  An  East  Indian  seed,  exhibited 
there  in  atonic  gout. 

Semen  contra.  See  Artemisia  santonica. 

Semen  sanctum.  See  Artemisia  santonica. 

SEMI,  (From  ripiirv,  half.)  Semi , in  composition, 
universally  signifies  half ; as  semicupium , a half-bath, 
or  bath  up  to  the  navel ; semilunaris , in  the  shape  of  a 
half- moon. 

SEMICIRCULAR.  Semicircularis.  Of  the  shape 
of  half  a circle. 

Semicircular  canals.  These  canals  are  three  in 
number,  and  take  their  name  from  their  figure.  They 
belong  to  the  organ  of  hearing,  and  are  situated  in  the 
petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  and  open  into 
the  vestibulum. 

SEMICU'PIUM.  A half-bath,  or  such  as  receives 
only  the  hips,  or  extremities. 

SEMICYLINDRACEUS.  Semicylindrical ; flat  on 
one  side,  round  on  the  other,  as  the  leaves  of  the  Con- 
cilium gibbosum. 

Semi  interosseus  indicis.  See  Abductor  indicis 
manus. 

SEMILUNAR.  Semilunaris.  Half-moon  shaped. 

Semilunar  valves.  The  three  valves  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  pulmonary  artery  and  aorta  are  so 
termed,  from  their  half-moon  shape. 


SEMI-  MEMBRA  NCVSUS.  Ischio-popiiti-f cmoral , 
of  Dumas.  This  muscle  arises  from  the  outer  surface 
of  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium,  by  a broad  flat  ten- 
don which  is  three  inches  in  length.  From  this  tendon 
it  has  gotten  the  name  of  semi-membranosus.  It  then 
begins  to  grow  fleshy,  and  runs  at  first  under  the  long 
head  of  the  biceps,  and  afterward  between  that  mus- 
cle and  the  semi-tendinosus.  At  the  lower  part  of  the 
thigh  it  becomes  narrower  again,  and  terminates  in  a 
short  tendon,  which  is  inserted  chiefly  into  the  upper 
and  back  part  of  the  head  of  the  tibia,  but  some  of 
its  fibres  are  spread  over  the  posterior  surface  of  the 
capsular  ligament  of  the  knee.  Between  this  cupsular 
ligament  and  the  tendon  of  the  muscle,  we  find  a small 
bursa  mucosa.  The  tendons  of  this  and  the  last- 
described  muscle  form  the  inner  ham-string.  This 
muscle  bends  the  leg,  and  seems  likewise  to  prevent  the 
capsular  ligament  from  being  pinched. 

Semi-nervosus.  See  Semitendinosus. 

Seminis  cauda.  See  Cauda  seminis. 

Seminis  ejaculator.  See  Accelerator  urinee. 

Semiopal.  See  Opal. 

Semi-orbicularis  oris.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

SEMIO'TICE.  (From  aypeiov,  a sign.)  Cemciosis. 
That  part  of  pathology  which  treats  on  the  signs  of 
diseases. 

Semi-spinalis  coldi.  Semi-spinalis  sive  trans- 
verso-spinalis  colli , of  Winslow  ; Spinalis  cervicis , of 
Albinus  ; Spinalis  colli , of  Douglas  ; Transversalis 
colli , of  Cowper ; and  Transversospinal , of  Dumas. 
A muscle  situated  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  neck, 
which  turns  the  neck  obliquely  backwards,  and  a little 
to  one  side.  It  arises  from  the  transverse  processes  of 
the  uppermost  six  vertebrae  of  the  back  by  as  many 
distinct  tendons,  ascending  obliquely  under  the  coin- 
plexus,  and  is  inserted  into  the  spinous  processes  of  all 
the  vertebrae  of  the  neck,  except  the  first  and  last. 

Semi-spinalis  dorsi.  Semi-spinalis  externus  seu 
transverso -spinalis  dorsi,  of  Winslow.  Semi-spina 
tus,  of  Cowper;  and  Transversospinal , of  Dumas. 
A muscle  situated  on  the  back,  which  extends  the 
spine  obliquely  backwards.  It  arises  from  the  trans- 
verse processes  of  the  seventh,  eighth,  ninth,  and 
tenth  vertebrae  of  the  back,  by  as  many  distinct  ten- 
dons, which  soon  grow  fleshy,  and  then  become  tendi- 
nous again,  and  are  inserted  into  the  spinous  pro- 
cesses of  all  the  vertebrae  of  the  back  above  the  eighth, 
and  into  the  lowermost  of  the  neck,  by  as  many  ten- 
dons. 

Semi-spinalis  externus.  See  Semi-spinalis  dorsi. 

Semi-spinatus.  See  Semi-spinalis  dorsi. 

Semi-tendinosus.  This  muscle,  which  is  the  semi- 
nervosus,  of  Douglas  and  Winslow ; and  Ischio-creti- 
tibial , of  Dumas,  is  situated  obliquely  along  the  back 
part  of  the  thigh.  It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from 
the  inferior,  posterior,  and  outer  part  of  the  tuberosity 
of  the  ischium,  in  common  with  the  long  head  of  the 
biceps  cruris,  to  the  posterior  edge  of  which  it  conti- 
nues to  adhere,  by  a great  number  of  oblique  fibres,  for 
the  space  of  two  or  tliree  inches.  Towards  the  lower 
part  of  the  os  femoris,  it  terminates  in  a round  ten- 
don, which  passes  behind  the  inner  condyle  of  the  thigh’ 
bone,  and,  becoming  flat,  is  inserted  into  the  upper  and 
inner  part  of  the  ridge  of  the  tibia,  a little  below  its 
tuberosity.  This  tendon  sends  off  an  aponeurosis,, 
which  helps  to  form  the  tendinous  fascia  that  covers 
the  muscles  of  the  leg.  This  muscle  assists  in  bend- 
ing the  leg,  and  at  the  same  time  draws  it  a little  in- 
wards. 

SEMPERVIRENS.  Evergreen.  Applied  to  leaves 
which  are  permanent  through  one,  two,  or  more  win- 
ters, so  that  the  branches  are  never  stripped  ; as  the 
ivy,  fir,  laurel,  bay,  &c. 

SEMPERVI'VUM.  (From  semper , always,  and 
vivo , to  live : so  called  because  it  is  always  green.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnean 
system.  Class,  Dodecandria ; Order,  Polygynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  some  plants. 

Sempervivum  acre.  The  stone-crop  is  occasionally 
so  termed.  See  Cedum  acre. 

Sempervivum  tectorum.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  houseleek.  Cedum  majus ; JEonion ; Aizovm  ’ 
Aizoon ; Barba  jovis.  Houseleek,  or  sengreen.  The 
leaves  of  this  plant  have  no  remarkable  smell,  but  dis- 
cover to  the  taste  a mild  subacid  austerity  ; they  are 
frequently  applied  by  the  vulgar  to  bruises  and  old 
ulcers. 


281 


SEN 


SEN 


BEN  AC,  John,  was  bom  in  Gascony,  about  the 
close  of  the  seventeenth  century.  He  is  stated  to  have 
received  the  degree  of  doctor  at  Rheims,  and  that  of 
bachelor  of  physic  at  Paris.  He  was  a man  'of  pro- 
found erudition,  united  with  great  modesty;  and  by 
his  industry  acquired  much  experience.  His  merits 
procured  him  the  favour  of  Louis  XV.  who  appointed 
him  his  consulting,  and  afterward  his  chief  physician, 
which  office  he  retained  till  his  death  in  1770.  He  was 
also  a member  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences  at 
Paris,  and  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Nancy.  He  left 
some  works,  which  will  probably  maintain  a lasting 
reputation,  particularly  his  treatise  on  the  Structure, 
Function,  and  Diseases  of  the  Heart.  An  edition  of 
Heister’s  Anatomy,  with  some  interesting  Observa- 
tions, was  published  by  him  when  young.  A paper 
on  Drowning,  in  the  Memoirs  of  the  Academy  of 
Sciences,  refuting  certain  erroneous  opinions  respecting 
the  Cause  of  Death,  and  the  Treatmen  founded  upon 
them,  is  also  due  to  him ; as  well  as  some  other  minor 
publications. 

SENE'CIO.  ( Sehecio  ; from  senesco , to  grow  old  : 
so  called  because  it  has  a grayish  down  upon  it,  like 
the  beard  of  old  men.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Polygamia  su- 
per jlua. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  also  of  the  groundsel. 
See  Senecio  vulgaris. 

Senecio  jacob^a.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Jacobcea , of  old  writers.  St.  James’s  wort.  Ragwort. 
The  leaves  of  this  common  plant  have  a roughish, 
bitter,  sub-acrid  taste,  extremely  nauseous.  A decoc- 
tion is  said  to  have  been  of  infinite  service  in  the  cure 
of  epidemic  camp  dysentery.  A poultice  made  of  the 
fresh  leaves  is  said  to  have  a surprising  effect  in  re- 
moving pains  of  the  joints,  and  to  remove  the  sciatica, 
or  hip  gout,  in  two  or  three  applications  when  ever  so 
violent.  The  root  is  of  an  adstringent  nature.  A de- 
coction of  it  was  formerly  good  for  wounds  and 
bruises. 

Senecio  madraspatanus.  See  Senecio  pseudo- 
china. 

Senecio  pseudo-china.  China  supposita;  Sene- 
cio madraspat.anus.  Bastard  China.  It  grows  in 
Malabar.  The  root  greatly  resembles  the  China  root 
in  appearance  and  qualities. 

Senecio  vulgaris.  Erigerum;  Senecio;  Erige- 
ron.  Groundsel.  This  very  common  plant  is  fre- 
quently applied  bruised  to  inflammations  and  ulcers,  as 
a refrigerant  and  antiscorbutic. 

Senecta  anguium.  The  cast  skin  of  a serpent ; its 
decoction  is  said  to  cure  deafness. 

SENECTUS.  See  Age. 

[Seneca  oil.  See  Genessee  oil.] 

SE'NEGA.  (So  called  because  the  Seneca  or  Sene- 
gaw  Indians  use  it  against  the  bite  of  the  rattlesnake.) 
See  Polygala  senega. 

Senegal  gum.  See  Jllimosa  Senegal. 

Senegaw  milkwort.  See  Polygala  senega. 

SE'NEKA.  See  Senega. 

SENGREEN.  See  Scmpervivum  tectorum. 

SE'NNA.  (From  senna , an  Arabian,  word,  signi- 
fying acute;  so  called  from  its  sharp-pointed  leaves.) 
See  Cassia  senna. 

Senna  alexandrina.  See  Cassia  senna. 

Senna  italica.  Pee  Cassia  senna 

Senna  pauperum.  Bastard  senna,  or  milk-vetch. 

Senna  scorpium.  The  scorpion  senna. 

Senn®  extractum.  Extract  of  senna. 

SENNERTUS,  Daniel,  was  born  at  Breslaw  in 
1572.  He  was  sent  to  Wittemberg  at  the  age  of  twen- 
ty-one, and  exhibited  such  marks  of  talent,  that  every 
opportunity  was  afforded  him  of  visiting  the  other  ce- 
lebrated universities  of  Germany.  On  his  return  in 
1601,  he  received  the  degree  of  doctor,  and  the  next 
year  was  appointed  to  a professorship  of  medicine.  He 
distinguished  himself  greatly  by  his  eloquence  and 
sound  knowledge,  and  his  publications  concurred  in 
raising  his  fame,  insomuch  that  he  was  consulted  by 
patients  from  all  parts  of  the  world ; towards  whom 
he  evinced  great  disinterestedness.  The  plague  pre- 
vailed seven  times  at  Wittemberg,  while  he  was  pro- 
fessor there,  yet  he  never  quitted  his  post,  nor  declined 
bis  services,  even  to  the  poorest  sick  ; however,  he  was 
at  last  a victim  to  that  disease  in  1637.  Sennertus  was 
a voluminous  writer,  and  has  been  represented  by 


some  as  a mere  compiler;  but  his  works  are  valuable, 
as  containing  a full  and  clear  epitome  of  ancient  learn- 
ing; and  besides,  display  much  judgment,  and  free 
dom,  in  criticising  their  doctrines,  which  indeed  in- 
volved him  in  many  controversies.  He  first  introduced 
the  study  of  chemistry  at  Wittemberg;  and  in  his 
writings  he  maintained  the  propriety  of  admitting  che- 
mical as  well  as  Galenical  theories  and  remedies  into 
medicine. 

SENSATION.  Sensatio.  Sensation,  or  feeling,  is 
the  consciousness  of  a change  taking  place  in  any  part, 
from  the  contact  of  a foreign  body  with  the  extremi- 
ties of  our  nerves.  The  seat  of  sensation  is  in  the  pulp 
of  the  nerves. 

The  impression  produced  on  any  organ  by  the  action 
of  an  external  body  constitutes  sensation.  This  sen- 
sation, transmitted  by  nerves  to  the  brain,  is  perceived, 
that  is,  felt  by  the  organ  ; the  sensation  then  becomes 
perception  ; and  this  first  modification  implies,  as  must 
be  evident,  the  existence  of  a central  organ,  to  which 
impressions  produced  on  the  senses  are  conveyed.  The 
cerebral  fibres  are  acted  on  with  greater  or  less  force 
by  the  sensations  propagated  by  all  the  senses  influ- 
enced at  the  same  time ; and  we  could  only  acquire 
confused  notions  of  all  bodies  that  produce  them,  if 
one  particular  and  stronger  perception  did  not  oblite- 
rate the  others,  and  fix  our  attention.  In  this  collective 
state  of  the  mind  on  the  same  subject,  the  brain  is  weakly 
affected,  by  several  sensations  which  leave  no  trace 
behind.  It  is  on  this  principle  that,  having  read  a book 
with  great  attention,  we  forget  the  different  sensations 
produced  by  the  paper  and  character. 

When  a sensation  is  of  short  duration,  the  knowledge 
we  have  of  it  is  so  w'eak,  that  soon  afterward  there 
does  not  remain  any  knowledge  of  having  experienced 
it.  In  proportion  as  a sensation,  or  an  idea,  which  is 
only  a sensation  transformed  or  perceived  by  the  cere- 
bral organ,  has  produced  in  the  fibres  of  this  organ  a 
stronger  or  weaker  impression,  the  remembrance  of  it 
becomes  more  or  less  lively  and  permanent.  Thus  we 
have  a reminiscence  of  it,  that  is,  call  to  mind  that  we 
have  already  been  affected  in  the  same  manner;  a 
memory , or  the  act  of  recalling  the  object  of  the  sensa- 
tion with  some  of  its  attributes,  as  colour,  volume,  &c. 

When  the  brain  is  easily  excitable,  and,  at  the  same 
time,  accurately  preserves  impressions  received,  it  pos- 
sesses the  power  of  representing  to  itself  ideas  with 
all  their  connexions,  and  all  the  accessory  circum- 
stances by  which  they  are  accompanied,  of  reproducing 
them  in  a certain  degree,  and  of  recalling  an  entire  ob- 
ject, while  the  memory  only  gives  us  an  idea  of  its 
qualities.  This  creative  faculty  is  called  imagination. 
When  two  ideas  are  brought  together,  compared,  and 
their  analogy  considered,  we  are  said  to  form  a judg- 
ment; several  judgments  connected  together  consti- 
tute reasoning.  Besides  the  sensations  that  are  carried 
from  the  organs  of  sense  to  the  brain,  there  are  others, 
internal,  that  seem  to  be  transmitted  to  it  by  a kind  of 
sympathetic  reaction.  It  is  well  known  what  uneasi- 
ness the  affection  of  certain  organs  conveys  to  the 
mind,  how  much  an  habitual  obstruction  of  the  liver  is 
connected  with  a certain  order  of  ideas ; these  internal 
sensations  are  the  origin  of  our  moral  faculties,  in  the 
same  manner  as  impressions  that  are  conveyed  by  the 
organs  of  sense  are  the  source  of  intellectual  faculties. 
We  are  not  on  that  account  to  place  the  seat  of  the 
passions  of  the  mind  in  the  viscera ; it  is  only  neces 
sary  to  remember  that  the.  appetites,  whence  arise  the 
passions,  reside  in  their  respective  organs,  and  are  a 
phenomenon  purely  physical,  while  passion  consists, 
at  the  same  time,  in  the  intellectual  exertion.  Thus 
an  accumulation  of  semen  in  the  cavities  that  are  em- 
ployed as  a reservoir  for  it,  excites  the  appetite  for 
venery,  very  distinct  from  the  passion  of  love,  although 
it  may  be  frequently  the  determinate  cause  of  it. 

The  senses  may  be  enumerated  under  the  following 
heads,  viz.  the  sense  of  vision,  hearing,  smelling, 
tasting,  touching. 

SENSIBILITY.  Sensibilitas.  That  action  of  the 
brain  by  which  we  receive  impressions,  either  from 
within,  or  from  without. 

“What  is  said  of  sensation  generally,  is  applicable 
to  sensibility ; for  this  reason,  we  only  mention  here 
that  this  faculty  exerts  itself  in  two  ways  very  dif- 
ferent. In  the  first,  the  phenomena  happens,  unknown 
to  us ; in  the  second,  we  are  aware  of  it,  we  perceive 
the  sensation.  It  is  not  enough  that  a body  may  act 


SEP 


upon  one  of  our  senses,  that  a nerve  transmits  to  the 
brain  the  impression  which  is  produced — it  is  not 
enough  that  this  organ  receive  the  impression : in  order 
that  there  may  be  really  a sensation,  the  brain  must 
perceive  the  impression  received.  An  impression  thus 
perceived  is  called,  in  Ideology , a Perception,  or  an 
Idea. 

These  two  modes  of  sensibility  may  be  easily  verified 
upon  ourselves.  For  example,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  a 
number  of  bodies  have  a continual  action  upon  our 
senses  without  our  being  aware  of  it : this  depends'  in 
a great  measure  upon  habit. 

Sensibility  is  infinitely  variable : in  certain  persons 
it  is  very  obtuse ; in  others  it  is  very  elevated : gene- 
rally a good  organization  keeps  between  the  extremes. 

Sensibility  is  vivid  in  infancy  and  youth ; it  con- 
tinues in  a degree  something  less  marked  until  past  the 
age  of  manhood  ; in  old  age  it  suffers  an  evident  dimi- 
nution ; and  very  old  persons  appear  quite  insensible 
to  all  the  ordinary  causes  of  sensations.” 

All  parts  possessed  of  a power  of  producing  a change, 
so  as  to  excite  a sensation,  are  called  sensible;  those 
which  are  not  possessed  of  this  property,  insensible. 
To  the  insensible  parts  by  nature  belong  all  our  fluids, 
the  blood,  bile,  saliva,  &c.  and  many  of  the  solids,  the 
hair,  epidermis,  nails,  &c. ; but  the  sensible  parts  are 
the  skin,  eyes,  tongue,  ear,  nose,  muscles,  stomach,  in- 
testines, &c. 

SENSO'RIUM.  The  organ  of  any  of  the  senses. 
See  Cerebrum. 

Sensorium  commune.  See  Cerebrum. 

SENSUS.  ( Sensus , ms.  m. ; d sentiendo.)  The 
senses  are  distinguished  into  external  and  internal. 
The  external  senses  are  seeing,  hearing,  tasting,  smell- 
ing, and  feeling.  The  internal,  imagination,  memory, 
judgment,  attention,  and  the  passions. 

SENTICOSA2.  (From  sentis,  a brier.)  The  name 
of  an  order  of  plants  in  Linnams’s  Fragments  of  a 
Natural  Method,  consisting  of  such  as  resemble  the 
bramble,  rose,  &c. 

SENTIENT.  This  term  is  applied  to  those  parts 
which  are  more  susceptible  of  feeling  than  others,  as 
the  sentient  extremities  of  the  nerves,  &c. 

Sentis  caninus.  ( Sentis , a thorn ; from  its  being 
prickly  like  a thorn.)  See  Rosa  canina. 

Separato'rium.  (From  separo , to  separate.)  An 
instrument  for  separating  the  pericranium  from  the 
skull,  and  a chemical  vessel  for  separating  essential 
parts  of  liquids. 

SE'PIA.  The  name  of  a genus  of  fish,  of  the  Class, 
Vernes;  Order,  Molusca.  The  cuttle-fish. 

Sepia  officinalis.  Sepium;  Prcecipitans  magnum. 
The  cuttle-fish.  The  systematic  name  of  the  fish,  the 
shell  of  which  is  a phosphate  of  lime,  and  is  often 
mixed  into  tooth-powders. 

Sepi*  os.  See  Sepia  officinalis. 

SEPIARIA5.  (From  sepes,  a hedge.)  Thenameof 
an  order  of  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragmentsof  a Natural 
Method,  consisting  of  woody  plants,  which  form  a 
hedge-like  appearance  ; the  flowers  are  mostly  a thy- 
mus or  panicle. 

'SE'PIUM.  See  Sepia  officinalis. 

SEPTARIA.  Ludi  helmontii.  Spheroidal  concre- 
tions that  vary  from  a few  inches  to  a foot  in  diameter. 
When  broken  in  a longitudinal  direction,  the  interior 
of  the  mass  is  observed  intersected  by  a number  of  fis- 
sures, sometimes  empty,  sometimes  filled  with  calcare- 
ous spar.  The  body  of  the  concretion  is  ferruginous 
marie.  From  these  septaria  is  manufactured  that  ex- 
cellent material  for  building  under  water,  called  Parke’s 
cement,  or  Roman  cement. 

Septenary  years.  Climacteric  years.  A period,  or 
succession  of  years  in  human  life,  at  which,  important 
constitutional  changes  are  supposed  to  take  place ; and 
the  end  of  this  period  is  therefore  judged  critical.  This 
period  is  fixed  at  every  seventh  year.  The  grand  cli- 
macteric is  fixed  at  63,  and,  passing  that  time,  age,  it  is 
considered,  may  be  protracted  to  90.  So  general  is  this 
belief,  that  the  passing  of  60  generally  gives  much 
anxiety  to  most  people. 

SEPT  FOIL.  See  Tormentilla. 

SEPTIC.  (Scpticus;  from  arjiru),  to  putrefy.)  Re- 
lating to  putrefaction. 

SEPTIFO'LIA.  (From  septem,  seven,  and  folium. 
a leaf : so  named  from  the  number  of  its  leaves.)  Co- 
ralwort,  orseptfoil  toothwort. 

SEPTINE^RVIA.  (From  septem , seven,  and  nervus, 


SER 

a string : so  called  from  the  seven  strings  upon  its  leaf.) 
A species  of  plantain. 

SE'PTUM.  A partition. 

Septum  cerebelli.  A process  of  the  dura  mater, 
dividing  the  cerebellum  perpendicularly  into  two  prin 
cipal  parts. 

Septum  cerebri.  The  falciform  process  of  the  dura 
mater  is  sometimes  so  called.  See  Falciform  process. 

Septum  cordis.  ( Septum ; from  sepio,  to  separate.) 
The  partition  between  the  two  ventricles  of  the  heart. 

Septum  lucidum.  Septum  pellucidum.  The  thin 
and  tender  portion  of  the  brain,  dividing  the  lateral 
ventricles  from  each  other. 

Septum  narium.  Interseptum.  The  partition  be- 
tween the  nostrils. 

Septum  palati.  The  partition  of  the  palate. 

Septum  pellucidum.  See  Septum  lucidum. 

Septum  thoracis.  See  Mediastinum. 

Septum  transversum.  See  Diaphragm. 

SERA'PIAS.  (From  Serapis.  a lascivious  idol : so 
called  because  it  was  thought  tc  promote  venery  ; or 
from  the  testiculated  shape  of  its  roots.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnoean  system.  Class,  Oy- 
nandria ; Older,  Diandria. 

Serapi'num.  The  gum-resin  sagapenum  is  some- 
times so  called.  See  Sagapenum. 

SERAPION,  of  Alexandria,  lived  about  280  years 
before  Christ,  and  is  affirmed  by  Celsus  to  have  been 
the  founder  of  the  empiric  sect  of  physicians;  though 
others  have  attributed  the  origin  of  this  sect  to  Phi- 
linus. 

SERAPION,  John,  an  Arabian  physician  who  lived 
between  the  time  of  Mesue  and  Rhazes,  towards  the 
middle  of  the  ninth  century,  and  is  supposed  to  have 
been  the  first  writer  on  physic  in  the  Arabic  language. 
Haly  Abbas  describes  his  writings  as  containing  only 
the  cure  of  diseases,  without  any  precepts  concerning 
the  preservation  of  health,  or  relating  to  surgery  : and 
they  are  frequently  quoted  by  Rhazes.  He  often  tran- 
scribes the  remarks  of  Alexander  Trallian,  with  whom 
the  other  Arabians  appear  to  be  little  acquainted. 
Some  confusion  appears  to  exist  respecting  another  Se- 
rapion,  who  is  supposed  to  have  lived  180  years  later, 
and  to  have  been  the  author  of  a work  on  the  Materia 
Medica,  entitled  “De  Medicamentistam  simplicibus, 
quam  compositis in  which  authors  are  quoted,  much 
posterior  to  Rhazes,  Avenzoar  for  instance,  so  that  it 
must  have  been  written  towards  the  latter  part  of  the 
eleventh  century. 

SERICUM.  Silk.  A species  of  hairy  pubescence 
of  plants,  which  consists  of  a white  shining  silkiness: 
hence  the  leaves  of  the  Potentilla  anserina,  Alche- 
rnilla  slpina,  &c.  are  called  Folia  sericea. 

SERl’PHIUM.  (Seems  to  have  been  applied  to  this 
genus  on  account  of  the  analogy  in  its  habit  and  foliage 
with  the  Artemisia,  pontica  of  Pliny,  called  by  the 
Greeks  SepeQiov.  The  origin  of  this  name  may  be 
traced  to  Seriphion , or,  as  it  is  now  called,  Scrpho , an 
island  in  the  iEgean  sea,  the  soil  of  which  is  of  so  dry 
and  sterile  a nature,  as  only  to  abound  in  plants  of  this 
rough  kind.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class 
Syngenesia;  Order,  Polygamia segrcgata.)  Flix-weed. 

SE'RIS.  Yepig.  Endive. 

SERMOUNTAIN.  See  Lascrpitium  siler. 

SEROUS.  (Serosus ; from  serum.)  Relating  to 
serum. 

Serous  apoplexy.  See  Apoplexia. 

SERPENTA'RIA.  ( Serpentaria , e.  f. : so  called 
from  the  resemblance  of  the  roots  of  the  plant  which 
first  bore  this  name  to  the  tail  of  the  rattle-snake.)  See 
Aristolochia  serpentaria. 

Serpentaria  oallorum.  See  Arum  dracunculus. 

Serpentaria  hispanica.  The  viper’s  grass.  See 
Scorzonera  hispanica. 

Serpentaria  virginiana.  See  Aristolochia.  ser- 
pentaria. 

SERPENTINE.  A hard  mineral,  of  which  there 
are  two  kinds,  the  common  and  precious.  The  corn 
mon  is  of  a green  colour,  and  is  found  in  various  moun- 
tains in  Scotland  and  Ireland.  Of  the  precious,  there 
are  two  species  ; the  splintery,  found  in  Corsica,  and 
is  cut  into  snuff  boxes ; and  the  conchoidal,  which  is  of 
a leek  green  colour. 

Serpentum  lignum.  See  Ophioxylum  serpenti - 
num. 

Serpentum  radix.  See  Ophiorrhiza  muvgos. 

SERPI'GO.  (From  serpo,  to  creep  ; because  it 

283 


SER 


SES 


creeps  on  the  surface  of  the  skin  by  degrees.)  A ring- 
worm, or  tetter.  See  Herpes. 

SERPY'LLUM.  (From  epnu),  to  creep,  or  a ser- 
pendo,  by  reason  of  its  creeping  nature.)  See  Thymus 
serpyllum. 

t Serpyllum  citratum.  See  Thymus  serpyllum. 

Serpyllum  vulgare  minus.  See  Thymus  ser- 
pyllum. 

SERRATA.  (From  serra , a saw:  so  called  from 
its  serrated  leaves.)  See  Serratula. 

SERRA'TULA.  (From  serra,  a saw:  so  called 
from  its  serrated  leaves.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaea'n  system.  Class,  Syngenesia ; 
Order,  Polygamia  cequalis. 

Serratula  amara.  The  systematic  name  of  a spe- 
cies of  saw-wort,  which  is  said  to  cure  agues. 

Serratula  arvensis.  The  common  creeping  way- 
thistle.  Carduus  arvensis;  Carduus  heemorrhoidalis ; 
Circium  arvense.  This  plant  was  formerly  used  in  an 
application  to  resolve  scirrhous  tumours,  and  is  now 
considered  useful  against  piles. 

SERRA'TUS.  (From  serra , a saw.)  Serrated  ; a 
botanical  term  applied  to  leaves  when  the  teeth  are 
sharp,  and  resemble  those  of  a saw,  pointing  towards 
the  extremity  of  the  leaf,  as  in  Urtica  ; and  the  petals 
of  the  Dianthus  arboreus,  and  Cystus  polyfolius. 

Some  leaves  are  called  duplicato- serrate  ; these  are 
doubly  serrate,  having  a series  of  smaller  serratures  in- 
termixed with  the  larger;  as  in  Campanula  trachelium. 

Serratus  anticus.  See  Pectoralis  minor. 

Serratus  magnus..  (So  called  from  its  saw-like 
appearance.)  Serratus  major  anticus , of  Douglas  and 
Cowper.  Serratus  major , of  Winslow ; and  Costo 
basi-scapulaire,  of  Dumas.  This  muscle  is  so  named 
by  Albinus.  Douglas  calls  it  Serratus  major  anticus , 
but  improperly,  as  it  is  seated  at  the  side,  and  not  at  the 
anterior  part  of  the  thorax.  It  is  a broad  fleshy  muscle, 
of  a very  irregular  shape,  and  is  in  part  covered  by  the 
subscapularis,  pectoralis,  and  latissimus  dorsi.  It 
arises,  by  fleshy  digitations,  from  the  eight  superior 
ribs,  and  is  inserted  fleshy  into  the  whole  basis  of  the 
scapula  internally,  between  the  insertion  of  the  rhom- 
boides,  and  the  origin  of  the  sub-scapularis,  being  fold- 
ed, as  it  were,  about  the  two  angles  of  the  scapula. 
This  muscle  may  easily  be  divided  into  two  and  even 
three  portions.  The  latter  division  has  been  adopted 
by  Winslow.  The  first  of  these  portions  is  the  thick 
and  short  part  of  the  muscle  that  arises  from  the  first 
and  second  ribs,  and  is  inserted  into  the  upper  angle  of 
the  scapula,  its  fibres  ascending  obliquely  backwards. 
The  second  portion  arises  from  the  second  rib,  behind 
the  origin  of  the  first  portion,  and  likewise  from  the 
third  and  fourth  ribs ; this  portion  is  thin  and  short, 
and  its  fibres  run  nearly  in  a horizontal  direction,  to  be 
inserted  into  the  basis  of  the  scapula.  The  third,  and 
most  considerable  portion,  is  that  which  arises  from 
the  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth  ribs,  and  is  inserted 
into  the  lower  angle  of  the  scapula.  The  serratus  mag- 
nus serves  to  move  the  scapula  forwards,  and  it  is 
chiefly  by  the  contraction  of  this  muscle  that  the  shoul- 
der issupported,  when  loaded  with  any  heavy  weight. 
The  ancients,  and  even  many  of  the  moderns,  particu- 
larly Douglas  and  Cowper,  supposed  its  chief  use  to  be 
to  dilate  the  thorax,  by  elevating  the  ribs ; hut  it  can 
only  do  this  when  the  scapula  is  forcibly  raised. 

Serratus  major  anticus.  'See  Serratus  magnus. 

Serratus  minor  anticus.  See  Pectoralis  minor. 

Serratus  posticus  inferior.  Dorso-lumbo-costal, 
of  Dumas.  This  is  a thin  muscle  of  considerable 
breadth,  situated  at  the  bottom  of  the  back,  under  the 
middle  part  of  the  latissimus  dorsi.  It  arises  by  a 
broad  thin  tendon,  in  common  with  that  of  the  last- 
mentioned  muscle  from  the  spinous  processes  of  the 
two,  and  sometimes  of  the  three  inferior  dorsal  verte- 
brae, and  from  three,  and  sometimes  four  of  those  of  the* 
lumbar  vertebrae.  It  then  becomes  fleshy,  and,  ascend- 
ing a little  obliquely  outwards  and  forwards,  divides 
into  three,  and  sometimes  four  fleshy  slips,  which  are 
inserted  into  the  lower  edges  of  the  three  or  four  infe- 
rior ribs,  at  a little  distance  from  their  cartilages.  Its 
use  seems  to  be  to  pull  the  ribs  downwards,  backwards, 
and  outwards. 

Serratus  superior  posticus.  Cervici-dorso-cos 
tal , of  Dumas.  This  is  a small,  flat,  and  thin  muscle, 
situated  at  the  upper  part  of  the  back,  immediately 
under  the  rhomboideus.  It  arises,  by  a broad  thin 
tendon,  from  the  lower  part  of  the  ligamentum  colli, 
284 


from  the  spinous  process  of  the  last  vertebrae  of  the 
neck,  and  the  two  or  three  uppermost  of  the  back,  and 
is  inserted  into  the  second,  third,  fourth,  and  some- 
times fifth  ribs,  by  as  many  distinct  slips.  Its  use  is  to 
expand  the  thorax,  by  pulling  the  ribs  upwards  and 
outwards. 

SERIIULATUS.  Minutely  serrate : applied  to  such 
saw- like  edged  leaves  which  have  their  teeth  very  fine ; 
as  in  Polygonum  amphibium. 

Sertula  campana.  See  Trifoliummclilotus. 

’SE'RUM.  (From  serus,  late  ; because  it  is  the  re- 
mainder of  the  milk,  after  its  better  parts  have  been 
taken  from  it.) 

1.  Whey. 

2.  The  yellow  and  somewhat  greenish  fluid,  which 
separates  from  the  blood  when  cold  and  at  rest.  See 

Blood. 

Serum  aluminosum.  Alum  whey. 

Serum  lactis.  Whey. 

SERVETUS,  Michael,  was  born  at  Villanueva,  In 
Arragon,  in  1509.  He  first  studied  the  law  at  Tou- 
louse ; but  his  attention  was  drawn  to  theology  by  the 
discussions  of  the  reformers;  and  as  he  was  disposed 
to  carry  his  dissent  from  the  church  of  Rome  even  to  a 
greater  length,  he  judged  it  prudent  to  retire  into  Swit- 
zerland, where  he  published  his  opinions  concerning 
the  Trinity.  He  afterward  went  to  study  physic  at 
Paris,  where  he  took  his  degree,  and  then  gave  mathe- 
matical lectures,  while  he  followed  the  profession  of  a 
physician : but  having  quarrelled  with  the  faculty,  and 
his  “ Apology”  being  suppressed  by  the  parliament,  he 
removed  to  Charlieu,  and  soon  after  to  Vienna,  at  the 
invitation  of  the  archbishop.  Here  he  published  a 
more  full  account  of  his  religious  opinions  under  a 
feigned  name ; but  Calvin,  the  reformer,  in  whom  he 
had  confided,  betrayed  him  to  the  magistrates,  so  that 
he  was  thrown  into  prison,  from  which,  however,  he 
escaped.  But  as  he  was  passing  through  Geneva, 
Calvin,  whose  treachery  he  did  not  suspect,  procured 
his  arrest,  and  a charge  of  blasphemy  and  heresy  to  be 
brought  against  him;  of  which,  being  found  guilty,  he 
was  cruelly  burnt  alive  in  1553.  Servetus  is  num- 
bered among  those  anatomists  who  made  the  nearest 
approach  to  the  doctrine  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  : 
in  the  work  already  mentioned,  which  led  to  his  death, 
the  passage  of  the  blood  through  the  lungs  is  clearly 
stated.  He  was  a man  of  great  learning  and  unfeigned 
piety,  and  generally  admired  for  his  worth  and  talents, 
and  the  discoveries  which  he  made  in  medicine,  as 
well  as  other  branches  of  knowledge. 

Service-tree.  See  Sorbus  aucuparia. 

SESAMOID.  (Os  sesamoideum;  from  orjoapr),  an 
Indian  grain,  and  aSos,  likeness.)  This  term  is  ap- 
plied to  the  little  bones,  which,  from  their  supposed 
general  resemblance  to  the  seeds  of  the  sesamum,  are 
called  Ossa  sesamoidea.  They  are  found  at  the  articu- 
lation of  the  great  toes,  and  sometimes  at  the  joints  of 
the  thumbs ; now  and  then  we  meet  with  them  upon 
the  condyles  of  the  os  femoris,  at  the  lower  extremity 
of  the  fibula,  under  the  os  cuboides  of  the  tarsus,  &c. 
They  do  not  exist  in  the  foetus  ; but  as  we  advance  in 
life,  begin  first  to  appear  in  a cartilaginous  state,  and,  at 
length,  in  adult  subjects,  are  completely  ossified.  Age 
and  hard  labour  seem  to  add  to  the  number  and  size  of 
these  bones,  and  being  most  commonly  found  wherever 
the  tendons  and  ligaments  are  most  exposed  to  pressure 
from  the  action  of  the  muscles,  they  are  now  generally 
considered  by  anatomists  as  the  ossified  parts  of  ten- 
dons and  ligaments.  These  bones  are  usually  smooth 
and  flat  on  the  side  of  the  bone  on  which  they  are 
placed  : their  upper  surface  is  convex,  and,  in  general, 
adheres  to  the  tendon  that  covers  it,  and  of  which  it 
may,  in  some  measure,  be  considered  as  a part.  Al- 
though their  formation  seems  to  be  owing  toaccidental 
circumstances  ; yet,  as  the  two  at  the  first  joint  of  the 
great  toe  are  much  larger  than  the  rest,  and  are  seldom 
wanting  in  an  adult,  it  would  seem  as  if  these  bones 
were  of  some  utility;  perhaps  by  removing  the  ten- 
dons farther  from  the  centre  of  motion,  and  thus  in  ■ 
creasing  the  power  of  the  muscles.  The  ossa  sesa- 
moidea of  the  great  toe  and  thumb  seem  likewise  to  be 
of  use,  by  forming  a groove  for  lodging  the  flexor  ten- 
dons secure  from  compression. 

Sesamoidal  bones.  See  Sesamoid. 

SE  SAMUM.  (An  Egyptian  word.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system. 


SET 


SHA 


2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  oriental  sesa- 
mum.  See  Sesamum  orientale. 

Sesamum  orientale.  Sesamum.  The  seeds  of 
this  plant  are  in  much  esteem  in  South  Carolina,  where 
they  are  called  oily  grain ; they  are  made  into  soups 
and  puddings,  after  the  manner  of  rice.  Toasted  over 
the  fire,  they  are  mixed  with  other  ingredients,  and 
stewed  into  a delicious  food.  The  fresh  seed  affords 
a considerable  quantity  of  a warm  pungent  oil,  other- 
wise not  unpalatable.  In  a year  or  two  the  pungency 
leaves  it  when  the  oil  is  used  for  salad,  &c.  The  seeds 
of  the  Sesamum  indicum  are  used  in  the  same  manner. 
The  leaves  are  also  used  medicinally  in  some  countries, 
being  of  a mucilaginous  quality.  [See  Benne  seed  and 
Benne  oil.  A.] 

SESELI.  (Ilapa  ra  oaoxjai  tAXov;  because  it  is 
salutary  for  young  fawns.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentan- 
dria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  An  old  name  of  the  hart-wort.  See  Laserpitium 
siler. 

Seseli  creticum.  There  is  great  confusion  among 
the  species  of  the  seseli.  The  plant  which  bears  this 
epithet  in  the  pharmacopoeias  is  the  Tordylium  offici- 
nale, of  Linnams.  The  seeds  are  said  tS  be  diu- 
retic. 

Seseli  massiliense.  See  Seseli  tortuosum. 

Seseli  tortuosum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
hart-wort  of  Marseilles.  Seseli  masiliense.  The  seeds 
of  this  plant  are  directed  for  medicinal  use,  and  have 
a warm  biting  taste,  and  a greater  degree  of  pungency 
than  those  of  the  Laserpitium. 

SESQ.UI.  This  word,  joined  with  any  number, 
weight,  measure,  &c.  signifies  one  integer  and  a half  ; 
as  scsqui  granum , a grain  and  a half. 

SESSILIS.  (Sessilis,  thatsitteth,  as  it  were.)  Ses- 
sile. This  term  is  applied  to  many  parts  of  plants,  as 
flowers,  leaves,  and  parts  of  the  fructification,  and  im- 
plies that  they  are  without  footstalk,  flowerstalk,  or 
what  often  supports  them  : hence,  jlores  sessilis , as  in 
Centaurea  calciptrapa ; folia  sessilia , as  in  Pinguicula 
vulgaris;  stigma  sessile,  Tulipagesneriana,  &c. 

SETA.  (Seta,  ce.  f.;  from  xniTai  a bristle.)  A.  The 
fruitstalk  of  mosses,  which  is  either  solitary,  aggregate, 
terminal,  axillary,  or  lateral. 

B.  A bristle,  as  applied  in  botanical  language  to  a 
hollow,  rigid,  sharp-pointed  pubescence,  which  either 
wounds  the  finger  when  it  is  pressed  upon  it,  or  gives 
a very  harsh  scabrous,  or  prickly  character  to  the  sur- 
face of  the  stem,  or  of  the  leaves  when  the  finger  is 
rubbed  over  them. 

Bristles  are  often  arranged  into  aculei  in  elementary 
works,  but  they  have  more  affinity  to  hairs.  They 
are  simple  and  compound. 

1.  Setce  simplices  are  of  two  kinds,  awl-shaped  and 
spindle-shaped. 

a.  The  subulate  is  the  most  common  of  the  simple 
bristles;  it  is  slightly  curved,  and  gradually  tapering 
from  the  base  to  the  apex,  which  is  rigid  and  very 
sharp.  These  bristles,  when  they  all  incline  in  the 
same  direction,  produce  the  scabrous  character  of  some 
leaves,  as  in  s.ymphitum  orientale.  A variety  of  the 
awl-shaped  bristle,  found  on  the  stem  and  branches  of 
the  sensitive  plant,  is  barbed  on  its  sides ; and  another 
variety,  as  exemplified  on  the  leaves  of  the  Bo- 
rago  officinalis , is  seated  on  a vesicular  tubercle  con- 
taining a fluid,  which  is  ejected  through  the  bristle 
when  it  is  compressed,  so  as  to  wound  the  finger,  and 
which  being  left  in  the  wound  excites  inflammation 
in  the  part.  But  the  sting  of  the  nettle  is  the  best  ex- 
ample of  this  form  of  bristle. 

b.  The  fusiform  is,  as  its  name  implies,  thickest  in 
the  centre,  and  accumulated  at  each  end.  It  lies  pa- 
rallel to  the  surface  of  the  leaf,  to  which  it  is  affixed  by 
a very  small  footstalk,  is  hollow,  and  contains  a co- 
loured liquid,  which  apparently  enters  it  through  the 
footstalk.  This  form  of  bristle  is  peculiar  to  the  genus 
Malphigia. 

2.  Setce  composite.  These  are  almost  always  solid. 
The  term  comprehends  two  species  of  bristles,  furcalce 
and  fasciculatce. 

a.  The  forked  are,  in  some  instances,  merely  rigid 
hair-like  bodies  terminating  in  two  or  three  diverging 
points,  as  in  Thrincia  hispida  : but  in  other  instances, 
as  the  stems  and  leaves  of  the  hop  plant,  the  stalk  of 
thebristle,  which  is  supported  on  a firm  cellular  tubercle, 
i3  very  short,  and  its  forking  extremities  resemble  two 


I flatfish,  awl-shaped  bristles,  pointing  in  opposite  direc- 
tions. 

b.  The  fasciculated  consist  of  a number  of  simple, 
straight  bristles,  diverging  from  a papillary  knob ; as  in 
Cactus  flagill  if ormis. 

There  is  still  another  species  of  pubescence  which 
cannot  properly  be  arranged  with  the  pilus  or  seta:  it 
is  found  on  a species  of  house-leek,  extending  like  a 
very  fine  thread,  stretching  from  the  tip  of  one  leaf  to 
that  of  another,  and  resembling  so  exactly  a spider’s 
web,  that  the  plant  has  been  named  Arachnoideum. — 
Thompson. 

Bristles  are  also  distinguished  into  erect,  as  in  Leon- 
todon  hirtum  ; hamose , as  in  the  pericarp  of  the  Arcti- 
cum  lappa;  stellate  and  plumose.  The  bristles  of 
plants  have  received  other  denominations. 

1.  Striga , that  variety  of  the  subulate  which  is  seen 
in  Borago  officinalis. 

2. '  Hnmus,  that  which  is  hooked  at  its  extremity  ; as 
in  Galium  aperine,  Caucalis  daucoides,  &c. 

3.  Glochis  when  several  sharp  tooth-like  processes 
are  turned  back  from  the  apex  of  the  bristle. 

5.  Arista,  a long  bristle  proceeding  from  the  husk  of 
grasses  ; as  in  Hordeum  vulgare. 

SETACEUM.  (From  seta,  a bristle ; because  horse- 
hairs were  first  used  to  keep  open  the  wound.)  A se- 
ton.  See  Seton. 

SETACEUS.  Bristly.  Applied  to  the  petals  of 
Trapaeolum  majus. 

SETIFORMIS.  Setiform : bristly.  Applied  to  the 
nectary,  as  that  of  the  Periploea  grceca. 

SETON.  Setaceum.  An  artificial  ulcer  made  un- 
der the  skin  by  means  of  an  instrument  called  the 
seton  needle,  which  carries  with  it  a portion  of  thread 
or  silk,  that  is  moved  backwards  or  forwards,  and  thus 
keeps  up  a constant  irritation. 

SETOSUS.  Setose  : bristly  ; applied  to  the  recepta- 
cle of  the  Echynops  sphaerocephalus,  and  of  Centaurea. 

SETTERWQRT.  See  Helleborous fcetidus. 

SEVERINUS,  Marcus  Aurelius,  was  born  in 
Calabria,  in  1580.  He  graduated  at  Naples,  where  he 
became  one  of  the  most  celebrated  professors  in  anato- 
my and  surgery.  He  was,  however,  somewhat  harsh 
in  his  practice;  and  in  his  work,  “De  Efficaci  Medi- 
cinal’ condemned  his  contemporaries  for  neglecting  the 
use  of  the  cautery,  and  of  the  knife,  as  practised  by 
the  ancients.  He  died  in  1656.  Many  publications 
were  written  by  him,  evincing  much  boldness  and  ori- 
ginality of  thought,  but  too  great  attachment  to  para- 
dox. His  treatise  on  abscesses,  in  eight  books,  passed 
through  many  editions.  He  paid  considerable  atten- 
tion to  comparative  anatomy,  on  which  subject  some 
of  his  works  are  composed. 

SE'VUM.  Suet.  See  Fat. 

Sevum  ceti.  See  Physeter  macrocephalus. 

Sevum  ovile.  Sevum  ovillum.  Mutton  suet. 

SEXUAL.  Appertaining  to  the  sexes. 

Sexual  actions.  Sexual  functions.  Those  func- 
tions proper  to  each  sex,  by  which  the  species  is  pro- 
pagated, as  the  excretion  of  semen  in  men ; menstru- 
ation, conception,  the  evolution  of  the  foetus,  parturi- 
tion, &c.  in  women. 

Sexual  organs.  See  Generation,  organs  of,  Sta- 
men, and  Pistillum. 

Sexual  system.  See  Plants. 

SEYDSCHUTZ.  See  Scdlitz. 

[SHAD.  See  Clvpea  alosa.  A.] 

SHADDOCK.  A variety  of  orange 

SHALLOT.  A species  of  allium. 

SHARP.  1.  See  Acutus. 

2.  Samuel,  an  able  and  distinguished  surgeon  in  tne 
middle  of  the  last  century,  was  a pupil  of  Cheselden, 
and  afterward  studied  with  great  zeal  at  Paris.  He  is 
said  to  have  commenced  his  profession  rather  late  in 
life  ; nevertheless,  after  settling  in  London,  and  becom- 
ing surgeon  to  Guy’s  hospital,  his  genius  and  assiduity 
soon  procured  him  great  celebrity  and  extensive  prac- 
tice. He  was  elected  a Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society 
and  a Member  of  the  Academy  of  Surgery  at  Paris. 
He  contributed  to  the  improvement  of  his  art  by  two 
valuable  publications,  which  passed  through  many  edi- 
tions, and  were  translated  into  several  foreign  lan 
guages.  The  first  of  these  was  a “Treatise  on  the 
Operations  of  Surgery,”  with  an  Introduction  on  the 
Nature  and  Treatment  of  Wounds,  &c.  The  other 
work  was  entitled  “A  Critical  Inquiry  into  the  pre- 
sent State  of  Surgery,”  first  printed  in  1750. 

285 


SIL 


sia 

Sharp-pointed  dock.  See  Rumex  acutus. 

SHAW,  Peter,  a physician  of  considerable  reputa- 
tion in  the  early  part  of  the  last  century.  His  first 
publication  was  entitled  “New  Practice  of  Physic,”  in 
two  volumes,  1726,  containing  a brief  Description  of 
Diseases,  and  their  Treatment.  He  then  published  an 
“ Inquiry  into  the  Virtues  of  the  Scarborough  Spa 
Waters;”  and  about  the  same  time  his  “Chemical 
Lectures,”  which  was  deemed  a scientific  work,  and 
translated  into  French.  He  also  edited  the  Edinburgh 
Dispensatory  ; and  gave  to  the  world  some  other  minor 
publications. 

SHEATH.  See  Vagina  ; and  Spatha. 

Sheathing  leaves.  See  Vaginans. 

Shedding-teeth.  The  primary  or  milk-teeth.  See 
Teeth. 

SHELL.  See  Testce  preparalce. 

SHERBET.  A compound  liquor  prepared  for  punch 
before  the  spirit  is  added. 

SHINGLES.  See  Erysipelas. 

Shistus , argillaceous.  Clay-slate. 

SHRUB.  1.  A low-bushy  tree. 

2.  A spirituous  liquor  composed  of  the  juice  of 
oranges,  mixed  with  brandy  and  rum. 

SI' AGON.  Staywv.  The  jaw. 

Siagona'gra.  (From  oiayuv,  the  jaw,  and  aypa,  a 
seizure.)  The  gout  in  the  jaw. 

SIALAGOGUE.  (Sialagogus ; from  aiaXov,  sali- 
va, and  ayu),  to  expel.)  Those  medicines  are  so  called, 
which  excite  an  uncommon  flow  of  saliva  : such  are 
mercurial  preparations,  pyrethrum,  &c.  They  are 
divided  into  sialagoga  topica,  as  scilla,  nicotiana,  pi- 
per, &c. ; and  sialagoga  interna,  as  the  various  pre- 
parations of  mercury. 

SIBBENS.  A disease  resembling  syphilis. 

SIBERITE.  Red  tourmaline. 

Sicca' ntia.  (From  sicco,  to  dry.)  Drying  medicines. 

Siccha'sia.  (From  o-ix%o?,  weak,  weary.)  An  un- 
pleasant lassitude  and  debility  peculiar  to  women  with 
child. 

Si'cula.  (Dim.  of  sica,  a short  sword : so  called 
from  its  dagger-like  root.)  The  beet. 

Sicye'don.  (From  <wcvos,  a cucumber.)  A trans- 
verse fracture  like  a cucumber  broken  in  two  parts. 

Sicyo'ne.  (From  oikvos,-  a cucumber  or  gourd:  so 
named  from  its  resemblance  to  a gourd.)  A cucurbit. 

SIDERA'TIO.  (From  sidus , a planet;  because 
it  was  thought  to  be  produced  by  the  influence  of  the 
planets.)  An  apoplexy  ; a blast ; a slight  erysipelas. 

SIDE'RIUM.  (From  mSypos,  iron.)  An  herb  so 
called  from  its  supposed  virtues  in  healing  wounds 
made  by  iron  instruments. 

SIDERUM.  Phosphuret  of  iron. 

SIENITE.  Syenite.  A compound  granular  aggre- 
gated rock,  composed  of  felspar  and  hornblende,  and 
sometimes  quartz  and  black  mica.  The  hornblende  is 
the  characteristic  ingredient,  and  distinguishes  it  per- 
fectly from  granite,  with  which  it  is  often  confounded  ; 
but  the  felspar,  which  is  almost  always  red,  and  sel- 
dom inclines  to  green,  forms  the  most  abundant  and 
essential  ingredient  of  the  rock.  Some  varieties  con- 
tain a very  considerable  portion  of  quartz  and  mica, 
but  little  hornblende.  This  is  particularly  the  case 
with  the  Egyptian  varieties,  and  henpe  these  are  often 
confounded  with  real  granite. 

SIGESBE'CKIA.  (So  named  by  Linnaeus  himself, 
in  memory  of  his  antagonist,  Dr.  J.  G.  Siegesbeck, 
Superintendent  of  the  Physic  Garden  at  Petersburgh, 
who  raised  various  objections  against  the  sexes  of 
plants.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants,  Class,  Syn- 
gcnesia  ; Order,  Polygamia  superfi.ua. 

Sigesbeckia  orientalis.  The  systematic  name 
of  a plant  which  is  said  to  be  useful  in  removing 
strangury,  and  in  calculous  diseases,  gout,  and  fluor 
albus. 

SIGHT.  See  Vision. 

Sigilla'ta  terra.  Sealed  earth ; a species  of  bo- 
lar  earth  made  into  cakes. 

SIGI'LLUM.  (Diminutive  of  signum , a sign.) 

Sigillum  beat.®  Mari  a:.  Black  briony,  or  Tamus 
communis. 

Sigillum  hermeticum.  An  hermetic  seal,  made 
by  closing  the  end  of  a glass  tube  by  melting  it. 

Sigillum  solomonis.  (Called  Solomon’s  seal,  be 
cause  it  has  upon  its  root  the  resemblance  of  an  im- 
pression made  by  a seal.)  See  Convallaria  pclygo- 
nutum. 

286 


SIGMOID.  (Sigmoides ; from  the  Greek  leltet 
cnypa,  anciently  written  C,  and  uSos , a likeness.)  Re- 
sembling the  Greek  letter  sigma.  Applied  to  several 
parts,  as  the  valves  of  the  heart,  the  cartilages  of  the 
trachea,  the  semilunar  apophysis  of  the  bones,  and  the 
flexure  or  turn  of  the  colon. 

Sigmoide'a  flexura.  The  sigmoid  flexure,  or  turn 
of  the  colon. 

Sigmoi'des  processus.  Valves  of  the  heart. 

Signa  critica."  Signs  of  the  crisis  of  disease. 

Signa  diagnostica.  Diagnostic  or  distinguishing 
signs. 

SI'GNUM.  A sign:  applied  to  symptoms.  See 

Semiotice. 

Si'ler  montanum.  Common  hartwort.  See  La- 
ser pitium  siler. 

[Silex,  resinite.  See  Halb-opal.  A.] 

SI'LICA.  ( Selag , Hebrew.)  Silex.  One  of  the 
primitive  earths  is  the  principal  constituent  part  of  a 
very  great  number  of  the  compound  earths  and  stones 
forming  the  immense  mass  of  the  solid  nucleus  of  the 
globe.  It  is  the  basis  of  almost  all  the  scintillating 
stones,  such  as  flint,  rock  crystal , quartz , agate,  calce- 
dony,  jasper,  &c.  The  sand  of  rivers,  and  of  the  sea- 
shore, chiefly  consist  of  it.  It  is  deposited  in  vegetable 
substances  forming  petrified  wood,  &c.  It  is  likewise 
precipitated  from  certain  springs  in  a stalactical  form. 
It  has  been  discovered  in  several  waters  in  a state  of 
solution,  and  is  found  in  many  plants,  particularly 
grasses  and  equlsetums.  Professor  Davy  has  proved 
that  it  forms  a part  of  the  epidermis  of  these  vegeta- 
bles. It  is  never  met  with  absolutely  pure  in  nature. 

Properties. — Silica,  when  perfectly  pure,  exists  in 
the  form  of  a white  powder.  It  is  insipid  and  inodo- 
rous. It  is  rough  to  the  touch,  cuts  glass,  and  scratches 
or  Wears  away  metals.  Its  specific  gravity  is  about 
2.66.  It  is  unalterable  by  the  simple  combustible  bodies. 
When  mixed  with  water  it  does  not  form  a cohesive 
mass.  Its  moleculae,  when  diffused  in  water,  are  pre- 
cipitated with  the  utmost  facility.  It  is  not  acted  on 
by  any  acid,  except  the  fluoric.  When  in  a state  of 
extreme  division  it  is  soluble  in  alkalies;  fused  with 
them  it  forms  glass.  It  melts  with  the  phosphoric  and 
boracic  acids.  It  is  unchangeable  in  the  air,  and  unal- 
terable by  oxygen  and  the  rest  of  the  gaseous  fluids.  It 
has  been  considered  as  insoluble  in  water,  but  it  ap- 
pears when  in  a state  of  extreme  division  to  be  soluble 
in  a minute  quantity. 

Method  of  obtaining  Silex. — Silex  may  be  obtained, 
tolerably  pure,  from  flints,  by  the  following  process : 
Procure  some  common  gun-flints ; expose  them  in  a 
crucible  to  a red  heat,  and  then  plunge  them  into  cold 
water ; by  this  treatment  they  will  become  brittle,  and 
easily  reducible  to  powder.  Mix  them,  when  pulve- 
rized, with  three  or  four  times  their  weight  of  carbo- 
nate of  potassa,  and  let  the  mixture  be  fused,  in  a dull 
red  heat,  in  a silver  crucible.  We  shall  thus  obtain  a 
compound  of  alkali  and  silex,  called  silicious  potassa. 
Dissolve  this  compound  in  water,  filter  the  solution, 
and  add  to  it  dilute  sulphuric  or  muriatic  acid.  An 
immediate  precipitation  now  ensues,  and  as  long  as 
this  continues,  add  fresh  portions  of  acid.  Let  the  pre- 
cipitate subside;  pour  oft'  the  fluid  that  floats  above  it; 
and  wash  the  precipitate  with  hot  water  till  it  comes 
off  tasteless.  This  powder  when  dry  is  silica. 

In  this  process  the  acid  added  to  the  solution  of  flint 
unites  to  the  potassa,  and  forms  sulphate  or  mnriate  of 
potassa  ; the  silicious  earth  is  therefore  precipitated. 

It  is  necessary  to  add  an  excess  of  acid,  in  order  that 
all  the  foreign  earths  which  are  present  may  be  sepa- 
rated. 

If  the  solution  of  flints  be  diluted  with  a great  quan- 
tity of  water,  as  for  instance,  in  the  proportion  of  24 
parts  to  one,  and  in  this  state  an  acid  be  poured  upon 
it,  no  perceptible  precipitation  will  ensue  ; the  silex 
continues  suspended  in  the  fluid,  and  is  invisible  on 
account  of  its  transparency ; but  it  may  be  made  to 
appear  by  evaporating  part  of  the  water. 

The  solution  of  flint,  on  account  of  its  affinity  with 
the  carbonic  acid,  is  also  in  course  of  time  decomposed 
by  mere  contact  with  air. 

‘ Another  method  of  obtaining  silica  exceedingly  pure 
is  to  separate  it  from  fluoric  acid.  In  consequence  of 
Sir  H.  Davy’s  researches  on  the  metallic  bases  of  the 
alkalies  and  earths,  this  earth  has  (been  recently  re- 
garded as  a compound  of  a peculiar  combustible  prin 
ciple  with  oxygen.  If  we  ignite  powdered  quartz  with 


SIL 


SIL 


three  parts  of  pure  potassa  in  a silver  crucible,  dissolve 
the  fused  compound  in  water,  add  to  the  solution  a 
quantity  of  acid,  equivalent  to  saturate  the  alkali,  and 
evaporate  to  dryness,  we  shall  obtain  a fine  gritty  pow- 
der, which  being  well  washed  with  hot  water,  and 
ignited,  will  leave  pure  silica.  By  passing  the  vapour 
of  potassium  over  silica  in  an  ignited  tube,  Sir  H.  Davy 
obtained  a dark-coloured  powder,  which  apparently 
contained  silicon,  or  silicium,  the  basis  of  the  earth. 
Like  boron  and  carbon,  it  is  capable  of  sustaining  a 
high  temperature  without  suffering  any  change. 

SILICON.  The  base  of  silica. 

SILICULA.  A pouch,  or  pod,  that  is  scarcely 
longer  than  it  is  broad.  It  is, 

1.  Orbiculate , in  Tklaspi  arvense. 

2.  Cordate , in  Isatis  armena. 

3.  Obcordate , in  Tklaspi  bursts  partoris , alpestre, 
and  Myagrum  perfoliatam. 

4.  Lanceolate , in  Lepedium  alpinum , and  Isatis 
tinctoria. 

5.  Angulate , in  Myagrum  cegyptiacum. 

C.  Emarginate,  in  Jilyssum , and  Cochlearia. 

7.  Drupaceous , if  the  membrane  is  double,  soft 
externally,  and  hard  within ; as  in  Erucago  and 
Bunias. 

SILIGO.  StAtyvtf.  Fine  wheat  or  rye. 

SI'LIQ,UA.  (From  silo , a nose  turned  up,  a hooked 
nose.)  A long,  dry,  membranaceous  pericarpimn,  or 
seed-vessel,  of  two  valves,  separated  by  a linear  recep- 
tacle, along  the  edges  of  each  of  which,  the  seeds  are 
arranged  alternately.  The  dissepiment  is  a partition 
dividing  a siliqua  and  silicula  into  two  loculaments,  or 
cells.  Botanists  distinguish, 

1.  The  round  pod  in  Fumaria  lutea,  and  Ckeiran- 
thus  tricus  pidatus. 

2 The  compressed , with  level  valves,  in  Cheiranthus 
annuus. 

3.  The  four-edged.,  in  Erysimum ; Cheiranthus  ery- 
simoides,  and  Brassica  orientalis. 

4.  Articulate , in  Raphanus  rapho.nistrum. 

5.  The  tortulose,  which  has  elevated  nodes  here  and 
there,  in  Raphanus  sativus. 

6.  Rostrate , having  the  partition  very  prominent  at 
the  apex;  as  in  «S inapis  alba. 

Siliqua  dulcis.  See  Ceratonia  siliqua. 

Siliqua  iiirsuta.  See  Dolickos  pruriens. 

Siliqua'strum.  (From  siliqua,  a pod : named 
from  its  pods.)  Judas-tree.  The  Capsicum,  or  Guinea- 
pepper,  was  so  termed  by  Pliny.  See  Capsicum. 

SILIGUO'S^E.  (From  siliqua,  a pod.)  Crucifor- 
mis.  The  name  of  an  older  of  plants  in  -LinnBeus’s 
Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of  such  as 
have  a siliqua  or  silicula,  the  flower  tetradynamous 
and  cruciate. 

Soliquosa  indica.  An  American  plant ; its  juice 
is  alexipharmic. 

SILK-WORM.  See  Bombyx. 

Silk-worm , acid  of.  See  Bombic  acid. 

Si'lphium.  ( Zalapli,  Arabian.)  Asafcetida,  or  the 
plant  which  affords  it. 

SILVER.  Argentum.  This  metal  is  found  both 
native  and  mineralized,  and  combined  with  lead,  cop- 
per, mercury,  cobalt,  sulphur,  arsenic,  Sec.  The 
principal  ores  of  this  metal  are  the  following  : Native 
silver;  antimoniated  silver;  sulphuret  of  silver; 
sulphuretted  oxide  of  silver  and  antimony  ; muriate  of 
silver ; native  oxide  of  silver,  See.  It  is  found  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  earth.  The  mines  of  the  Erzge- 
biirge  or  the  metalliferous  rocks  of  Mexico  and  Potosi, 
Bohemia,  Norway,  Transylvania,  &c.  are  the  richest. 

Native  silver  possesses  all  the  properties  of  this 
metal,  and  it  appears  in  series  of  octahedra  inserted  in 
one  another ; in  small  capillary  flexible  threads  in- 
twined  together ; in  plates;  or  in  masses.  The  colour 
of  native  silver  is  white,  often  tarnished.  Silver  al- 
loyed v/ith  gold  forms  the  aturif erous  native  silver  ore. 
The  colour  of  this  ore  is  a yellowish  white.  It  has 
much  metallic  lustre.  The  antimoniated  silver  ore 
belongs  to  this  class.  Silver,  combined  with  sulphur, 
forms  the  sulphuretted  oxide  of  silver , or  vitreous 
silver  ore.  This  ore  occurs  in  masses,  sometimes  in 
threads,  and  sometimes  crystallized  in  cubes  or  regular 
< ctahedra.  Its  colour  is  dark  bluish  gray,  inclined  to 
black.  Its  fracture  is  uneven,  and  its  lustre  metallic. 
It  issoftenough  to  be  cut  with  a knife.  It  is  sometimes 
found  alloyed  with  antimony  (gfay  silver  ore;.  Silver 
united  with  muriatic  acid  foimsthe  corneous  silver  ore 


0 muriate  of  silver ),  which  appears  under  differenf 
colours  and  shapes.  Silver  united  to  oxygen  consti- 
tutes the  calif  or m silver  ore,  of  which  there  are  several 
varieties.  The  colour  of  these  ores  is  a lead  gray,  or 
grayish  black.  They  occur  massive,  disseminated,  and 
crystallized. 

Germany,  and  other  countries  of  Europe,  but  more 
especially  Peru  and  Mexico  in  South  America,  contain 
the  principal  silver  mines.  There  are,  however,  silver 
mines  in  Ireland,  Norway,  France,  and  many  other 
parts  in  the  world. 

Method  of  obtaining  silver. — Different  methods  are 
employed  in  different  countries  to  extract  silver  from 
its  ores.  In  Mexico,  Peru,  Sec.  the  mineral  is  pounded, 
roasted,  washed,  and  then  triturated  with  mercury 
in  vessels  filled  with  water.  A mill  is  employed  to 
keep  the  whole  in  agitation.  The  silver  combines  by 
that  means  with  the  mercury.  The  alloy  thus  obtained 
is  afterward  washed,  to  separate  any  foreign  matters 
from  it,  and  then  strained  and  pressed  through  leather 
This  being  done,  heat  is  applied  to  drive  off  the  mer- 
cury from  the  silver,  which  is  then  melted  and  cast  into 
bars  or  ingots. 

In  order  to  extract  silver  from  sulphuretted  or  vit- 
reous silver  ore,  the  mineral  is  roasted,  and  then  melted 
with  lead  and  borax,  or  some  other  flux  to  assist  the 
fusion.  By  the  first  operation  the  sulphur  is  volatilized, 
and  by  the  second  the  silver  is  obtained,  though  for 
the  most  part  alloyed  with  other  metals,  from  which 
it  is  separated  by  cupellation,  or  fusion  with  lead  or 
bismuth. 

“ Silver  is  the  whitest  of  all  metals,  considerably 
harder  than  gold,  very  ductile  and  malleable,  but  less 
malleable  than  gold  ; for  the  continuity  of  its  parts 
begins  to  break  when  it  is  hammered  out  into  leaves 
of  about  the  hundred  and  sixty  thousandth  of  an  inch 
thick,  which  is  more  than  one- third  thicker  than  gold 
leaf;  in  this  state  it  does  not  transmit  the  light.  Its 
specific  gravity  is  from  10.4  to  10.5.  It  ignites  be- 
fore melting,  and  requires  a strong  heat  to  fuse  it.  The 
heat  of  common  furnaces  is  insufficient  to  oxidize  it; 
but  the  heat  of  the  most  powerful  burning  lenses 
vitrifies  a portion  of  it,  and  causes  it  to  emit  fumes  \ 
which  when  received  on  a plate  of  gold,  are  found  to 
be  silver  in  the  metallic  state.  It  has  likewise  been 
partly  oxidized  by  twenty  successive  exposures  to  the 
heat  of  the  porcelain  furnace  at  Sevres.  By  passing  a 
strong  electric  shock  through  a silver  wire,  it  may  be 
converted  into  a black  oxide ; and  by  a powerful  gal- 
vanic battery,  silver  leaf  may  be  made  to  burn  with  a 
beautiful  green  light.  Lavoisier  oxidized  it  by  the 
blow-pipe  and  oxygen  gas;  and  a fine  silver  wire 
burns  in  the  kindled  united  stream  of  oxygen  and 
hydrogen  gases.  The  air  alters  it  very  little,  though  it 
is  disposed  to  obtain  a thin  purple  or  black  coating 
from  the  sulphureous  vapours  which  are  emitted  from 
animal  substances,  drains,  or  putrifying  matters. 
This  coating,  after  a long  series  of  years,  has  been  ob- 
served to  scale  off  from  images  of  silver  exposed  in- 
churches;  and  was  found,  on  examination,  to  consist 
of  silver  united  with  sulphur. 

There  seems  to  he  only  one  oxide  of  silver,  which  is 
formed  either  by  intense  ignition  in  an  open  vessely 
when  an  olive-coloured  glass  is  obtained  ; or  by  adding 
a solution  of  caustic  barytes  to  one  of  the  nitrate  oF 
silver,  and  beating  the  precipitate  to  dull  redness.  Sir 
H.  Davy  found  that  100  of  silver  combined  with  7.3  of 
oxygen  in  the  above  oxide;  arid  if  we  suppose  it  to- 
consist  of  a prime  equivalent  of  each  constituent,  we 
shall  have  13.7  for  the  prime  of  silver.  Silver  leaf 
burned’ with  a voltaic  battery,  affords  the  same  olive- 
coloured  oxide. 

Silver  combines  with  chlorine,  when  the  metal  is; 
heated  in  contact  with  the  gas.  This  chloride  is,  how- 
ever, usually  prepared  by  adding  muriatic  acid  or 
a muriate,  to  nitrate  of  silver.  It  has  been  long  knowrr 
by  the  name  of  luna-cornea,  or  horn  silver,,  because 
though  a white  powder,  as  it  falls  down  from  the 
nitrate  solution,  it  fuses  at  a moderate  heat,  and  forms 
a homy-looking  substance  when  it  cools.  It  consists 
of  13.875  silver  -f-  4.5  chlorine. 

The  sulphuret  of  silver  is  a brittle  substance,  of  a 
black  colour  and  metallic  lustre.  It  is  formed  by  heat- 
ing to  redness  thin  plates  of  silver  stratified  witii  sul- 
phur. It  consists  of  13.875  silver  + 2 sulphur. 

Silver  is  soluble  in  the  sulphuric  acid  when  concen- 
trated and  boiling,  and  the  metal  in  a state  of  division* 

987 


SIL 


SIN 


The  muriatic  acid  does  not  act  upon  it,  but  the  nitric 
acid,  if  somewhat  dilated,  dissolves  it  with  great  ra- 
pidity, and  with  a plentiful  disengagement  of  nitrous 
gas  ; which,  during  its  extrication,  gives  a blue  or  green 
colour  to  the  acid,  and  entirely  disappears  if  the  silver 
made  use  of  be  pure;  if  it  contain  copper,  the  solu- 
tion remains  greenish  ; and  if  the  acid  contain  either 
sulphuric  or  muriatic  acid,  these  combine  with  a por- 
tion of  the  silver,  and  form  scarcely  soluble  compounds, 
which  fall  to  the  bottom.  If  the  silver  contain  gold, 
this  metal  separates  in  blackish-coloured  flocks. 

The  nitric  acid  dissolves  more  than  half  its  weight 
of  silver  ; and  the  solution  is  very  caustic,  that  is  to 
say,  it  destroys  and  cofrodes  animal  substances  very 
powerfully. 

The  solution  of  silver,  when  fully  saturated,  deposites 
thin  crystals  as  it  cools,  and  also  by  evaporation. 
These  are  called  lunar  nitre , or  nitrate  of  silver.  A 
gentle  heat  is  sufficient  to  fuse  them,  and  drive  oft' their 
water  of  crystallization.  In  this  situation  the  nitrate, 
or  rather  subnitrate,  for  the  heat  drives  off  part  of  the 
acid,  is  of  a black  colour,  may  be  cast  into  small  sticks 
in  a mould,  and  then  forms  the  lapis  infernahs,  or 
lunar  caustic  used  in  surgery.  A stronger  heat  decom- 
poses nitrate  of  silver,  the  acid  flying  off,  and  the  silver 
remaining  pure.  It  is  obvious  that,  for  the  purpose  of 
forming  the  lunar  caustic,  it  is  not  necessary  to  suffer 
the  salt  to  crystallize,  but  that  it  may  be  made  by  eva- 
porating the  solution  of  silver  at  once  to  dryness;  and 
as  soon  as  the  salt  is  fused,  and  ceases  to  boil,  it  may  be 
poured  out.  The  nitric  acid  driven  off  from  nitrate  of 
silver  is  decomposed,  the  products  being  oxygen  and 
nitrogen. 

The  sulphate  of  silver,  which  is  formed  by  pouring 
sulphuric  acid  into  the  nitric  solution  of  silver,  is 
sparingly  soluble  in  water : and  on  this  account  forms 
crystals,  which  are  so  small,  that  they  compose  a white 
powder.  The  muriatic  acid  precipitates  from  nitric 
acid  the  saline  compound  called  luna-cornea,  or  horn- 
silver  ; which  has  been  so  distinguished,  because, 
when  melted  and  cooled,  it  forms  a semitransparent 
and  partly  flexible  mass,  resembling  horn.  It  is  sup- 
posed that  a preparation  of  this  kind  has  given  rise  to 
the  accounts  of  malleable  glass.  This  effect  takes  place 
with  aqua  regia,  which  acts  strongly  on  silver,  but 
precipitates  it  in  the  form  of  muriate,  as  fast  as  it  is 
dissolved. 

If  any  salt  with  base  of  alkali,  containing  the  muriatic 
acid,  be  added  to  the  nitric  solution  of  silver,  the  same 
effect  takes  place  by  double  affinity ; the  alkaline  base 
uniting  with  the  nitric  acid,  and  the  silver  falling  down 
in  combination  with  the  muriatic  acid. 

Sulphur  combines  very  easily  with  silver,  if  thin 
plates  imbedded  in  it,  be  exposed  to  a heat  sufficient  to 
melt  the  sulphur.  The  sulphuret  is  of  a deep  violet 
colour,  approaching  to  black,  with  a degree  of  metallic 
lustre,  opake,  brittle,  and  soft.  It  is  more  fusible  than 
silver,  and  this  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of  sulphur 
combined  with  it.  A strong  heat  expels  part  of  the 
sulphur. 

Sulphuretted  hydrogen  soon  tarnishes  the  surface  of 
polished  silver,  and  forms  on  it  a thin  layer  of  sul- 
phuret. 

The  alkaline  sulphurets  combine  with  it  by  heat,  and 
form  a compound,  soluble  in  water.  Acids  precipitate 
sulphuret  of  silver  from  this  solution. 

Phosphorus  left  in  a nitric  solution  of  silver,  becomes 
•covered  with  the  metal  in  a dendritic  form.  By  boil- 
ing this  becomes  first  white,  then  a light  black  mass, 
and  is  ultimately  converted  into  a light  brown  phos- 
phuret.  The  best  method  of  forming  a phosphuret  of 
silver  is  Pelletier’s,  which  consists  in  mixing  phos- 
phoric acid  and  charcoal  with  the  metal,  and  exposing 
the  mixture  to  heat. 

Most  metallic  substances  precipitate  silver  in  the 
metallic  state  from  its  solution. 

Silver  unites  with  gold  by  fusion,  and  forms  a pale 
alloy,  as  has  been  already  mentioned  in  treating  of  that 
metal.  With  platina  it  forms  a hard  mixture,  rather 
yellower  than  silver  itself,  and  of  difficult  fusion. 

Silver  very  readily  combines  with  mercury.  A very 
sensible  degree  of  heat  is  produced,  when  silver  leaf 
and  mercury  are  kneaded  together  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand.  With  lead  it  forms  a soft  mass,  less  sonorous 
than  pure  silver.  With  copper  it  becomes  harder  and 
more  sonorous,  at  the  same  time  that  it  remains  suf- 
ficiently ductile : this  mixture  Is  used  in  the  British 
288 


coinage.  12A  parts  of  silver,  alloyed  with  one  of  cop* 
per,  form  the  compound  called  standard  silver.  The 
mixture  of  silver  and  iron  has  been  little  examined. 
With  tin  it  forms  a compound,  which,  like  that  of  gold 
with  the  same  metal,  has  been  said  to  be  brittle,  how- 
ever small  the  proportion ; though  there  is  probably  as 
little  foundation  for  the  assertion  in  the  one  case  as  in 
the  other.  With  bismuth,  arsenic,  zinc,  and  antimony, 
it  forms  brittle  compounds,  [t  does  not  unite  with 
nickel.  The  compound  of  silver  and  tungsten,  in  the 
proportion  of  two  of  the  former  to  one  of  the  latter,  was 
extended  under  the  hammer  during  a few  strokes ; but 
afterward  split  in  pieces. 

The  uses  of  silver  are  well  known : it  is  chiefly  ap- 
plied to  the  forming  of  various  utensils  for  domestic 
use,  and  as  the  medium  of  exchange  in  money.  Its 
disposition  to  assume  a black  colour  by  tarnishing,  and 
its  softness,  appear  to  be  the  chief  objection  to  its  use 
in  the  construction  of  graduated  instruments  for  astro- 
nomical and  other  purposes,  in  which  a good  white 
metal  would  be  a desirable  acquisition.  The  nitrate 
of  silver,  besides  its  great  use  as  a caustic,  has  been 
employed  as  a medicine.” 

SILVER-WEED.  See  Potentilla  anserina. 

SIMAROU'BA.  (A  patronymic  name  of  America.) 
See  Quassia  simarouba. 

Si  mile  lapis.  See  Bezoar  simice. 

Simple  affinity.  See  Affinity  simple. 

Simple  attraction.  See  Affinity  simple . 

Simple  leaf.  See  Leaf. 

Simple  substance.  See  Element. 

SIMPLEX.  Simple : applied  very  generally  in 
every  department  of  nature  to  designate  that  which  is 
not  compound. 

Simplex  oculcs.  A bandage  for  the  eye. 

SIN  APE.  See  Sinapis. 

SINAPEL/E'UM.  (From  civam,  mustard,  and 
ehatov,  oil.)  Oil  of  mustard. 

SINA'PI.  See  Sinapis. 

SINA'PIS.  (On  viva  tov;  aura?,  because  it  hurts 
the  eyes.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tetr adynamia ; Order,  Sili- 
quosa.  Mustard. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  black  mustard. 

See  Sinapis  nigra. 

Sinapis  alba.  The  systematic  name  of  the  white 
mustard  plant,  which  is  directed  for  medicinal  use  in  tlia 
Edinburgh  pharmacopoeia.  It  is  somewhat  less  pun- 
gent than  the  black  species.  See  Sinapis  nigra. 

Sinapis  nigra.  The  systematic  name  of  the  com- 
mon black  mustard.  J\Tapus ; Eruca ; Sinape ; Si 
napi.  Common  black  mustard.  Sinapis — siliquis 

glabris  racemo  appressis,  of  Linnaeus.  The  seeds  of 
this  species  of  mustard,  which  are  directed  by  the  Lon- 
don College,  and  those  of  the  Sinapis  alba,  which  are 
preferred  by  that  of  Edinburgh,  manifest  no  remark- 
able difference  to  the  taste,  nor  in  their  effects,  and 
therefore,  answer  equally  well  for  medicinal  and  culi 
nary  purposes.  They  have  an  acrid  pungent  taste, 
and,  when  bruised,  this  pungency  shows  its  volatility 
by  powerfully  affecting  the  organs  of  smell.  Mustard 
is  considered  as  capable  of  promoting  appetite,  assist 
ing  digestion,  attenuating  viscid  juices,  and,  by  stimu 
lating  the  fibres,  it  proves  a general  remedy  in  paralytic 
affections.  Joined  to  its  stimulant  qualities,  it  fre- 
quently, if  taken  in  considerable  quantity,  opens  the 
body,  and  increases  the  urinary  discharge,  and  hence  il 
has  been  found  useful  in  dropsical  complaints.  Exter- 
nally, flower  of  mustard  is  frequently  used  mixed  with 
vinegar,  as  a stimulant  or  sinapism. 

SINAPI'SMUS.  Sinapismum;  Cataplasma  sina- 
pios.  A sinapism  or  mustard  poultice.  A term  given 
to  a mixture  of  mustard  and  vinegar  in  form  of  poultice, 
generally  applied  to  the  calvesof  the  legs,  or  60les  of  the 
feet,  as  a stimulant,  and  employed  in  low  states  of 
fevers  and  other  diseases,  and  intended  to  supercede 
the  use  of  a blister.  See  Cataplasma  sinapis. 

SINA'PIUM.  (From  atvam,  mustard.)  An  in 
fusion  or  decoction  of  mustard-seed. 

SI  NCIPUT.  The  forepart  of  the  head.  See  Caput.. 

SI'NE  PARI.  Several  muscles,  veins,  arteries, 
&c.  are  so  called  which  are  without  a fellow.  See 
Azygos. 

Single  elective  attraction.  See  Affinity  simple. 

SINGU'LTUS.  Lygrnos.  The  hiccough.  A con- 
vulsive motion  of  the  diaphragm  and  parts  adjacent.  ( 

SINUATUS.  Sinuated:  applied  to  leaves  which 


SKI 


SIU 

are  cut  into  rounded  or  wide  openings ; as  in  Statice 
sinuata. 

SI'NUS.  1.  A cavity  or  depression. 

2.  In  surgery  it  means  a long,  narrow,  hollow  track, 
leading  from  some  abscess,  diseased  bone,  &c. 

3.  The  veins  of  the  dura  mater  are  termed  sinuses. 
They  are  several  in  number,  the  principal  of  which  are, 
1.  The  longitudinal  sinus,  which  rises  anteriorly 
from  the  crista  galii,  ascends  and  passes  between  the 
two  lamina)  of  the  falciform  process  to  w'here  this  pro- 
cess ends.  It  then  opens  mto,  2.  7 'wo  lateral  sinuses, 
distinguished  into  right  and  left,  which  lie  in  the  cru- 
cial spine  of  the  os  occipitis : 3.  The  inferior  longitu- 
dinal, which  is  a small  sinus  situated  at  the  acute  in- 
ferior margin  of  the  falx. 

Sinus  cox®.  The  acetabulum. 

Sinus  gen.®  tituitarius.  See  Antrum  of  High- 
more. 

Sinus  lateral.  See  Lateral  sinuses. 

Sinus  longitudinalis.  See  Longitudinal  sinus. 

Sinus  maxillaris.  See  Antrum  of  Highmore. 

Sinus  muliebris.  The  vagina. 

Sinus  ven®  portarum.  The  entrance  into  the 
liver. 

Si'philis.  See  Syphilis. 

SIPHO'NIA.  (From  otijxnv,  a pipe;  alluding  to  the 
uses  made  of  the  exudation  of  the  tree,  called  Indian 
rubber.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  Moncccia  ; Older,  Monadelphia. 

Siphonia  elastica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
elastic  resin-tree.  See  Caoutchouc. 

SIItl'ASIS.  (From  mpos,  a cavity.)  An  inflamma- 
tion of  the  brain  peculiar  to  children,  and  attended 
with  a hollowness  of  the  eyes  and  depression  of  the 
fontanella. 

Si'rium  myrtifolium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  tree  which  is  supposed  by  some  to  afford  the  yellow 
saunders.  See  Santalum  album. 

SI'SA  RUM.  (Sisa,  Hebrew.)  Siser  or  skirret.  See 
Siam  sis  arum. 

SI'SER.  See  Slum  sisarum. 

Sl'SON.  (Znr wv.  A name  adopted  by  Dioscorides.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria, 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Sison  ammi.  'The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
which  affords  the  ammi  verum  of  the  shops.  The 
seeds  of  this  plant,  Sison — foliis  tripinnatis , radicali- 
bus  linearibus.  caulinis  setaceis  stipularibus  longio- 
ribus,  of  Linnaeus,  have  a grateful  smell,  somewhat 
like  that  of  origanum,  and  were  formerly  administered 
as  a carminative. 

SISY  MBRIUM.  (From  ourvSos,  fringe : so  named 
from  its  fringed  roots.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linmcan  system.  Class,  Tetr adynamia  ; Order, 
Siliquosa. 

Sisymbrium  nasturtium.  The  systematic  name 
of  the  water-cress.  Nasturtium  aquaticum ; Laver 
odoratum;  C’ralevce  slum ; Cressi ; Cardamines.  Water- 
cress. This  indigenous  plant,  Sisymbrium — siliquis 
declinatis , foliis  pinnatis,  foliolis  subcordatis,  of 
Linnaius,  grows  plentifully  in  brooks  and  stagnant 
waters.  The  leaves  have  a moderately  pungent  taste, 
emit  a quick  penetrating  smell,  like  that  of  mustard- 
seed,  but  much  weaker.  Water-cresses  obtain  a place 
in  the  Materia  Medica,  for  their  antiscorbutic  quali- 
ties, which  have  been  long  very  generally  acknowledged 
by  physicians.  The  most  pleasant  way  of  administer- 
ing them  is  in  form  of  a salad. 

Sisymbrium  sophia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
herb  sophia.  Sophia  chirurgorum.  This  plant  is  now 
almost  banished  from  practice.  It  was  formerly  in  high 
estimation  in  the  cure  of  wounds.  It  has  been  given 
internallv  in  hysterical  affections  and  uterine  haemor- 
rhages, and  the  seeds  are  said  to  be  efficacious  in  de- 
stroying intestinal  worms. 

StTIOLOGY.  (Sitiologia : from  ai^os,  aliment, 
and  Xoyos,  a.  discourse  or  treatise.)  A doctrine  or  trea- 
tise on  aliment. 

SI'UM.  (From  aeiou,  to  move ; from  its  agitation  in 
water.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
ntean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  creeping  water- 
parsnip. 

Sium  aromaticum.  The  amomum  is  sometimes  so 
called. 

Sium  ninsi.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant,  the 
root  of  which  is  called  radix  ninsi;  Ninzin:  Nindsin. 

Cc  c 


This  root  was  long  supposed  to  be  the  same  as  ginseng 
It  now  appears,  however,  to  be  the  produce  of  this  plant. 
It  possesses  similar,  though  weaker  properties,  than 
ginseng. 

Sium  nodiflorum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
creeping  water-parsnip.  This  plant  was  admitted  into 
the  Loudon  pharmacopoeia  in  the  character  of  an  anti* 
scorbutic.  It  is  not  nauseous,  and  children  take  it  rea* 
dily  if  mixed  with  milk. 

Sium  sisarum.  The  siser  or  skirret.  The  root  of 
this  plant  is  eatable,  but  now  out  of  use,  though  culti- 
vated  in  the  days  of  Gerarde  and  Parkinson.  Its  flavour 
is  said  to  be  aromatic,  with  a sweetness  not  acceptable 
to  every  palate,  and  of  a flatulent  and  indigestible? 
quality. 

SKELETON.  ( Sceletus , from  aKtfkar,  to  dry.) 
Sceleton.  When  the  bones  of  the  body  are  preserved 
in  their  natural  situation,  and  deprived  of  the  flesh,  the 
assemblage  is  called  a skeleton.  See  Bone. 

Skeleton,  artificial.  The  assemblage  of  all  the 
bones  of  the  animal,  when  hung  in  their  respective 
situations  by  means  of  wire.  See  Bone. 

Skeleton,  natural.  A skeleton  is  so  termed  in 
opposition  to  an  artificial  one,  when  the  bones  are  re- 
tained in  their  proper  places  by  means  of  their  natural 
ligaments. 

SKIN.  A cpjus.  Pellis;  Cutis.  The  skin,  thoagh? 
apparently  a simple  membrane,  is  in  reality  laminated, 
consisting  of  several  subdivisions ; the  outermost  lamina 
is  termed  with  us  scarf  skin,  or  cuticle ; the  second  has* 
no  English  name,  is  known  only  to  anatomists,  and  is 
called  reie  mucosum.  After  these  two  are  removed,  We 
come  to,  as  is  commonly  thought,  the  surface  of  the  skin 
itself. 

When  a blister  has  been  applied  to  the  skin  of  a ne- 
gro,  if  it  has  not  been  very  stimulating,  in  twelve  hours 
after  a thin  transparent  grayish  membrane  is  raised? 
under  which  we  find  a fluid.  This  membianeis  the 
cuticle  or  scarf  skin.  When  this,  with  the  fluid,  is  re- 
moved, the  surface  under  them  appears  black ; but  if 
the  blister  had  been  very  stimulating,  another  mem- 
brane, in  which  this  black  colour  resides,  would  also 
have  been  raised  with  the  cuticle.  This  is  the  rete 
mucosum,  which  is  itself  double,  consisting  of  another 
gray  transparent  membrane,  and  of  a black  web,  very 
much  resembling  the  nigrum  pigmenlum  of  the  eye. 
When  this  membrane  is  removed,  the  surface  of  the 
true  skin  (as  has  hitherto  been  believed)  comes  in  view, 
and  is  white,  like  that  of  a European.  The  rete  mu~ 
cosum  gives  the  colour  to  the  skin  ; is  black  in  the  Ne- 
gro ; white,  brown,  or  yellowish,  in  the  European.  The 
reason  why  this  membrane  is  black  in  the  Negro,  is, 
perhaps,  that  his  body  may  be  better  able  to  defend  itself 
against  the  sun’s  rays,  and  that  the  heat  may  be  pre- 
vented from  penetrating.  The  intention  of  a similar 
membrane  behind  the  retina  in  the  eye,  appears  to  be 
not  only  that  of  absorbing  the  superfluous  rays  of  light, 
but,  like  the  amalgam  behind  the  looking-glass,  it  mav 
enable  the  retina  to  reflect  the  rays,  in  order  to  perfect 
vision.  It  is  not  very  improbable  that  some  such  pur- 
pose, as  enabling  the  cuticle  to  reflect  the  sun’s  rays  in 
those  warm  climates,  where  the  inhabitants  originally 
go  naked,  may  be  the  intention  of  nature,  in  giving 
them  the  black  membrane.  Perhaps,  too,  the  circum- 
stance of  the  countenance  becoming  brown,  when  ex- 
posed to  the  sun’s  rays  in  summer,  in  our  own  climate, 
may  be  a process  of  nature  to  defend  herself  against  the 
access  of  external  heat  into  the  body. 

Both  cuticle  and  rete  mucosum  send  innumerable  pro- 
cesses into  the  pores  of  the  true  skin.  The  process  of 
the  rete  mucosum  is  always  within  that  of  the  cuticle, 
and  in  contact  with  the  sides  of  the  pore,  as  formed  by 
the  true  skin.  These  processes  are  remarkable  in  the 
cuticle  and  rete  mucosum  of  the  elephant,  some  of  them 
are  almost  an  inch  long  ; the  cuticle,  or  rete  mucosum , 
or  a membrane  very  similar,  having  the  same  proper 
ties  with  these,  appears  to  be  also  continued  into  the 
inside  of  the  mouth,  over  the  tongue,  internal  surface 
of  the  lungs,  oesophagus,  stomach,  and  intestinal  tube. 
In  most  of  the  last-named  parts,  the  cuticle,  however, 
forms  sheaths  for  villi,  and  not  processes  which  line 
pores.  On  viewing  the  surface  of  the  skin,  even  with 
the  naked  eye,  we  find  it  porous ; more  so  in  some  places 
than  in  others ; and  the  pores  are  also  larger  in  some 
part3  than  others.  Some  of  these  pores  are  ducts  of 
sebaceous  glands,  and  others  serve  not  only  to  transmit 
hairs,  but,  it  is  supposed,  the  greatest  part  of  the  per 


SLE 


Epirable  matter  itself.  Absorption  on  the  skin  also,  in 
all  probability,  begins  on  the  sides  of  these  pores.  They 
are  particularly  remarkable  about  the  inouth,  nose, 
palms  of  the  hands,  soles  of  the  feet,  external  ear, 
scalp,  mons  veneris , and  around  the  nipple  in  women. 

The  skin  itself  was  given  to  man  not  only  for  feeling 
in  a general  sense,  but  for  perspiration,  absorption,  and 
particularly  for  touch , in  which  he  excels  all  other  ani- 
mals, and  which  resides  principally  in  the  tips  of  the 
fingers.  He  was  intended  for  examining,  reasoning, 
forming  a judgment,  and  acting  accordingly ; he  was 
fitted  by  this  sense  to  examine  accurately  the  properties 
of  surrounding  bodies,  not  capable  of  being  examined 
by  his  other  senses.  This,  among  other  reasons,  was 
one  why  he  was  made  erect,  that  the  point  of  his  fin- 
gers should  not  be  made  callous,  or  less  sensible,  by 
walking  on  them. 

When  carefully  dissected  off  and  separated  from  all 
adventitious  matter  in  a middle-sized  man,  the  skin 
weighs  about  four  pounds  and  a half. 

The  skin  of  human  bodies  is  always  of  a white  colour, 
in  the  dead  body,  let  the  colour  of  the  rete  mucosum  be 
what  it  may  ; it  is  extremely  full  of  pores,  and  ex- 
tremely vascular ; a child  in  full  vigour  comes  into  the 
world  from  this  circumstance,  scarlet ; it  is  endowed 
with  intense  sensibility.  Almost  all  the  pain,  in  the 
different  operations  of  surgery,  is  past  when  we  have 
divided  the  skin.  Some  parts  of  the  skin  have  more 
feeling  than  others;  the  lips,  for  example,  as  Haller 
says,  “ ad  basia  destinata."  The  glans  clitoridis,  and 
the  glans  penis , with  a similar  intention ; there,  though 
the  nerves  are  not  so  large  as  in  some  other  parts,  they 
are  longer,  more  numerous,  and  endowed  with  more 
exquisite  feeling  ; but  where  the  common  offices  of  life 
merely  are  intended,  the  marks  of  superior  feeling  or 
touch,  in  the  skin,  are  the  projections,  above  the  com- 
mon surface,  of  those  packets  of  arteries,  veins,  and 
absorbents,  called  villi.  The  nerves  are  there  not  only 
also  longer,  but  larger,  as  in  the  points  of  the  fingers  and 
toes. 

We  are  not  certain  that  the  skin  is  muscular,  but  it 
has  properties  very  like  those  of  muscle ; it  contracts, 
relaxes,  and  even  vibrates  in  some  places,  on  certain 
occasions.  Tt  is  extremely  distensible  ; the  skin  of  the 
pcrinteum  lias  stretched  in  labour  from  a quarter  of  an 
inch  to  six  inches.  It  is  also  extremely  elastic,  and  in- 
stantly after  labour  has  returned  again  to  the  original 
quarter  of  an  inch  ; it  is  thickest  on  those  parts  intend- 
ed by  nature  to  bear  weight  or  pressure  ; of  course  it  is 
thickest  on  the  back,  on  the  soles  of  the  feet,  and  palms 
of  the  hands.  It  is  thinner  on  the  forepart  of  the  body, 
on  the  insides  of  the  arms  and  logs,  and  where  its  sur- 
faces touch  opposite  surfaces.  It  is  extremely  thin  on 
the  lips,  and  allows  the  colour  of  the  blood  to  shine 
through  it.  It  is  also  extremely  thin  on  the  glans  penis 
in  men,  glans  clitoridis  in  women,  and  on  the  inside 
of  the  labia  pudendi.  Skin  dried  and  dressed  is  ex- 
tremely strong  and  durable,  and  therefore  employed  in 
making  harness  for  horses,  clothing  for  men,  and  a va- 
riety of  other  purposes. 

Skin,  scarf.  See  Cuticle , and  Skin. 

SKINK.  See  Scincus. 

SKORODITE.  An  arsenate  of  iron,  without  cop- 
per, of  a green  colour,  found  in  quartz  and  homstone 
in  primitive  rocks  in  Saxony. 

SKULL.  Cranium.  The  skull,  or  that  bony  box 
which  contains  the  brain.  It  forms  the  forehead,  and 
every  part  of  the  head,  except  the  face.  It  consists  of 
eight  bones,  namely,  one  os  frontis,  one  os  occipitis,  one 
os  sphenoides,  one  os  ethmoideum,  two  ossa  tempora- 
lia,  and  two  ossa  parietalia. 

[Skunk  cabbage.  See  Dracontium.  A.] 

Slaters.  See  Oniscus  asellus. 

SLEEP.  Somnus.  That  state  of  the  body  in  which 
the  internal  and  external  senses  and  voluntary  motions 
are  not  exercised.  The  end  and  design  of  sleep  is  both 
to  renew,  during  the  silence  and  darkness  of  the  night, 
the  vital  energy  which  has  been  exhausted  through  the 
day,  and  to  assist  nutrition. 

“ When  the  time  of  being  awake  has  continued  for 
sixteen  or  eighteen  hours,  we  have  a general  feeling  of 
fatigue  and  weakness  f our  motions  become  more  diffi- 
cult, our  senses  lose  their  activity,  the  mind  becomes 
confused,  receives  sensations  indistinctly,  and  governs 
muscular  contraction  with  difficulty.  We  recognise, 
by  these  signs,  the  necessity  of  sleep  ; we  choose  such 
a position  as  can  be  preserved  with  little  effort ; we 


SLE 

seek  obscurity  and  silence,  and  sink  into  the  arms  of 
oblivion. 

The  man  who  slumbers  loses  successively  the  use  of 
his  senses.  The  sight  first  ceases  to  act  by  the  closing 
of  the  eyelids,  the  smell  becomes  dormant  only  after 
the  taste,  the  hearing  after  the  smell,  and  the  touch 
after  the  hearing : the  muscles  of  the  limbs,  being 
relaxed,  cease  to  act  before  those  that  support  the 
head,  and  these  before  those  of  the  spine.  In  propor- 
tion as  these  phenomena  proceed,  the  respiration  be- 
comes slower  and  more  deep ; the  circulation  dimi- 
nishes ; the  blood  proceeds  in  greater  quantity  to  the 
head ; animal  heat  sinks  ; the  different  secretions  be- 
come less  abundant.  Man,  although  plunged  in  this 
sopor,  has  not,  however,  lost  the  feeling  of  his  existence ; 
he  is  conscious  of  most  of  the  changes  that  happen  in 
him,  and  which  are  not  without  their  charms  ; ideas, 
more  or  less  incoherent,  succeed  each  other  in  his  mind ; 
he  ceases,  finally,  to  be  sensible  of  existence:  he  is 
asleep. 

During  sleep,  the  circulation  and  respiration  are  re- 
tarded, as  well  as  the  different  secretions,  and,  in  conse- 
quence, digestion  becomes  less  rapid. 

I know  not  on  what  foundation  the  most  part  of  au- 
thors say  that  absorption  alone  acquires  more  energy. 
Since  the  nutritive  functions  continue  in  sleep,  it  is  evi- 
dent that  the  brain  has  ceased  to  act,  only  with  regard 
to  muscular  contraction,  and  as  an  organ  of  intelligence ; 
and  that  it  continues  to  influence  the  muscles  of  respi- 
ration, the  heart,  the  arteries,  the  secretions,  and  nu- 
trition. 

Sleep  is  profound  when  strong  excitants  are  neces- 
sary to  arrest  it ; it  is  light  when  it  ceases  easily. 

Sleep,  such  as  it  has  been  described,  is  perfect,  that 
is,  it  results  from  the  suspension  of  the  action  of  the 
relative  organs  of  life,  and  from  the  diminution  of  the 
action  of  the  nutritive  functions ; but  it  is  not  extraor- 
dinary for  some  of  the  relative  organs  of  life  to  preserve 
their  activity  during  sleep,  as  it  happens  when  one  sleeps 
standing;  it  is  also  frequent  for  one  or  more  of  the  senses 
to  remain  awake,  and  transmit  the  impressions  which 
it  perceives  to  the  brain  ; it  is  still  more  common  for  the 
brain  to  take  cognizance  of  different  internal  sensations 
that  are  developed  during  sleep,  as  wants,  desires,  pain, 
&c.  The  understanding  itself  may  be  in  exercise  in 
man  during  sleep,  either  in  an  irregular  and  incoherent 
manner,  as  in  most  dreams,  or  in  a consequent  and  re- 
gular manner,  as  it  happens  in  some  persons  happily 
organized. 

The  turn  which  the  ideas  assume  during  sleep,  oi 
the  nature  of  dreams,  depends  much  on  the  slate  of  the 
organs.  If  the  stomach  is  overcharged  with  indigested 
food,  the  respiration  difficult  on  account  of  position,  or 
other  causes,  dreams  are  painful,  fatiguing ; if  hunger 
is  felt,  the  person  dreams  of  eating  agreeable  food ; if 
it  is  the  venereal  appetite,  the  dreams  are  erotic,  &c. 
The  character  of  dreams  is  no  less  influenced  by  ha- 
bitual occupations  of  the  mind  ; the  ambitious  dream 
of  success  or  disappointment,  the  poet  makes  verses, 
the  lover  sees  his  mistress,  See.  It  is  because  the  judg- 
ment is  sometimes  correctly  exercised  in  dreams,  with 
regard  to  future  events,  that  in  times  of  ignorance  the 
gift  of  divination  was  attributed  to  them. 

Nothing  is  more  curious  in  the  study  of  sleep  than 
the  history  of  sleep-walkers. 

Those  individuals  being  first  profoundly  asleep,  rise 
all  at  once,  dress  themselves,  see,  hear,  speak,  employ 
their  hands  with  ease,  perform  certain  exercises,  write, 
compose,  then  go  to  bed,  and  preserve,  when  they 
awake,  no  recollection  of  what  happened  to  them. 
What  difference  is  there,  then,  between  a sleep-walker 
of  this  kind,  and  a man  awake  l A very  evident  dif- 
ference,— the  one  is  conscious  of  his  existence,  and  the 
other  is  not. 

Many  hypotheses  have  been  offered  on  the  proximate 
cause  of  sleep,  as  the  depression  of  the  laminae  of  the 
cerebrum,  the  afflux  of  blood  to  the  brain,  &c.  Sleep, 
which  is  the  immediate  effect  of  the  laws  of  organiza- 
tion, cannot  depend  on  any  physical  cause  of  this 
kind.  Its  regular  return  is  one  of  the  circumstances 
that  contributes  the  most  to  the  preservation  of  health ; 
its  suppression,  even  for  a short  time,  is  often  attended 
with  serious  inconvenience,  and  in  no  case  can  it  be 
carried  beyond  certain  limits. 

The  ordinary  duration  of  sleep  is  variable ; generally, 
it  is  from  six  to  eight  hours.  Fatigue  of  the  muscular 
system,  strong  exertions  of  the  mind,  lively  and  multi- 


SME 


SME 


plied  sensations,  prolong  it,  as  well  as  habits  of  Idle- 
ness, the  immoderate  use  of  wine,  and  of  too  strong 
aliments.  Infancy  and  youth,  whose  life  of  relation  is 
very  active,  have  need  of  longer  repose.  Riper  age, 
more  frugal  of  time,  and  tortured  with  cares,  devotes 
to  it  but  a small  portion.  Very  old  people  present  two 
opposite  modifications  ; either  they  are  almost  always 
slumbering,  or  their  sleep  is  very  light ; but  the  reason 
of  this  latter  is  not  to  be  found  in  the  foresight  they 
have  of  their  approaching  end. 

By  uninterrupted  peaceable  sleep,  restrained  within 
proper  limits,  the  powers  are  restored,  and  the  organs 
recover  the  facility  of  action ; but  if  sleep  is  troubled 
by  disagreeable  dreams,  and  painful  impressions,  or 
even  prolonged  beyond  measure,  very  far  from  repair- 
ing, it  exhausts  the  strength,  fatigues  the  organs,  and 
sometimes  becomes  the  occasion  of  serious  diseases, 
as  idiotism  and  madness.” 

SLICKENSIDES.  The  specular  variety  of  galena 
is  so  called  in  Derbyshire. 

SLOE.  See  Prunus  sylvestris. 

SMALLAGE.  See  Apium  graveolens. 

SMALL  POX.  See  Variola. 

SMALT.  See  Zaffre. 

SMARAGD1TE:  See  Diallage. 

SMARAGDUS.  See  Emerald. 

SMELLIE,  William,  was  born  in  Scotland,  where 
he  practised  midwifery  for  nineteen  years,  and  then 
settled  in  London.  He  attained  considerable  reputa- 
tion as  a lecturer,  which  he  appears  to  have  merited  by 
his  assiduity  and  talents.  He  introduced  many  im- 
provements in  the  instruments  employed  in  that 
branch  of  the  profession,  and  established  some  useful 
rules  for  their  application.  He  was  the  first  writer 
who,  by  accurately  determining  the  shape  and  size  of 
the  pelvis,  and  of  the  head  of  the  foetus,  and  consider- 
ing its  true  position  in  utero,  clearly  pointed  out  the 
whole  progress  of  paturition : and  his  opinions  were 
subsequently  confirmed,  especially  by  his  pupil,  the 
celebrated  Dr.  W.  Hunter.  He  abolished  many  super- 
stitious notions,  and  erroneous  customs,  that  prevailed 
in  the  management  of  parturient  women,  and  of  the 
children  ; and  had  the  satisfaction  of  seeing  most  of 
these  improvements  adopted,  as  well  in  this  as  in  other 
countries  of  Europe.  In  1752,  he  published  the  sub- 
stance of  his  lectures  in  an  octavo  volume ; to  which 
he  added,  two  years  after,  a second  volume  of  cases ; 
and  a third  appeared  about  five  years  after  his  death, 
in  1768.  In  1754,  he  also  published  a set  of  anatomi- 
cal plates,  of  a large  folio  size,  to  elucidate  his  doctrines 
farther. 

SMELL.  “ There  escapes  from  almost  every  body 
in  nature  certain  particles  of  an  extreme  tenuity, 
which  are  carried  by  the  air  often  to  a great  distance. 
These  particles  constitute  odours.  There  is  one  sense 
destined  to  perceive  and  appreciate  them.  Thus  an 
important  relation  between  animals  and  bodies  is  esta- 
blished. 

All  bodies  of  which  the  atoms  are  fixed  are  called 
inodorous. 

The  difference  of  bodies  is  very  great  relative  to  the 
manner  in  which  odours  are  developed.  Some  permit 
them  to  escape  only  when  they  are  heated  ; others  only 
when  rubbed.  Some  again  produce  very  weak  odours, 
while  others  produce  only  those  which  are  highly  pow- 
erful. Such  is  the  extreme  tenuity  of  odoriferous  par- 
ticles, that  a body  may  produce  them  for  a very  long 
time  without  losing  weight  in  any  sensible  degree. 

Every  odoriferous  body  has  an  odour  peculiar  to 
itself. 

As  these  bodies  are  very  numerous,  there  have  been 
attempts  made  to  class  them,  which  have  nevertheless 
all  failed. 

Odours  can  be  distinguished  only  into  weak  and 
strong,  agreeable  and  disagree'able.  We  can  recognise 
odours  which  are  musky,  aromatic,  foetid,  rancid,  sper- 
matic, pungent,  muriatic,  &c.  Some  are  fugitive,  others 
tenacious.  In  most  cases  an  odour  cannot  be  distinguish- 
ed but  by  comparing  it  with  some  known  body.  There 
have  been  attributed  to  odours  properties  which  are 
nourishing,  medical,  and  even  venomous;  but  in  the 
cases  which  have  given  rise  to  these  opinions,  might 
not  the  influence  of  odours  have  been  confounded  with 
the  effects  of  absorption?  A man  who  pounds  jalap 
for  some  time  will  be  purged  in  the  same  manner  as  if 
he  had  actually  swallowed  part  of  it.  This  ought  not 
to  be  attributed  to  the  effects  of  odours,  but  rather  to 

Ccc  2 


the  particles  which,  being  spread  around,  float  In  the 
air,  and  are  introduced  either  with  the  saliva  or  with 
the  breath.  We  ought  to  attribute  to  the  same  cause 
the  drunkenness  of  persons  who  are  exposed  for  some 
time  to  the  vapours  of  spirituous  liquors.  The  air  is 
the  only  vehicle  of  odours ; it  transports  them  to  a 
distance  ; they  are  also  produced,  however,  in  vacuo , 
and  there  are  bodies  which  project  odoriferous  parti- 
cles with  a certain  force.  This  matter  has  not  yet 
been  carefully  studied ; it  is  not  known  if,  in  the  pro- 
pagation of  odours,  there  be  any  thing  analogous  to 
the  divergence,  the  convergence,  to  the  reflection,  or 
the  refraction  of  the  rays  of  light.  Odours  mix  or 
combine  with  many  liquids,  as  well  as  solids.  This  is 
the  means  employed  to  fix  or  preserve  them.  Liquids, 
gases,  vapours,  as  well  as  many  solid  bodies  reduced 
to  powder,  possess  the  property  of  acting  on  the  organs 
of  smell. 

Apparatus  for  smelling. — The  olfactory  apparatus 
ought  to  be  represented  as  a sort  of  sieve,  placed  in  the 
passage  of  the  air,  as  it  is  introduced  into  the  chest, 
and  intended  to  stop  every  foreign  body  that  may  be 
mixed  with  the  air,  particularly  the  odours. 

This  apparatus  is  extremely  simple ; it  differs  essen- 
tially from  that  of  the  sight  and  the  hearing  ; since  it 
presents  no  part  anterior,  to  the  nerve,  destined  for  the 
physical  modification  of  the  external  impulse,  the 
nerve  is  to  a certain  degree  exposed.  The  apparatus 
is  composed  of  the  pituitary  membrane,  which  covers 
the  nasal  cavities,  of  the  membrane  which  covers  the 
sinuses , and  of  the  olfactory  nerve. 

The  pituitary  membrane  covers  the  whole  extent  of 
the  nostrils,  increases  the  thickness  of  the  spongy  bones 
very  much,  is  continued  beyond  their  edges  and  their 
extremities,  so  that  the  air  cannot  traverse  the  nostrils 
but  in  a long  narrow  direction.  This  membrane  is 
thick,  and  adheres  strongly  to  the  bones  and  cartilages 
that  it  covers.  Its  surface  presents  an  infinity  of  small 
projections,  which  have  been  considered  by  some  as 
nervous  papilla,  by  others  as  mucous  follicles,  but 
which,  according  to  all  appearance,  are  vascular. 

These  small  projections  give  to  the  membrane  an 
appearance  of  velvet.  The  pituitary  is  agreeable  and 
soft  to  the  touch,  and  it  receives  a great  number  of 
vessels  and  nerves.  The  passages  through  which  the 
air  proceeds  to  arrive  at  the  fauces  deserve  attention. 

These  are  three  in  number.  They  are  distinguished  in 
anatomy  by  the  names  of  inferior,  middle,  and  superior 
meatus.  The  inferior  is  the  broadest  and  the  longest, 
the  least  oblique  and  least  crooked  ; the  middle  one  i& 
the  narrowest,  almost  as  long,  but  of  greater  extent 
from  top  to  bottom.  The  superior  is  much  shorter, 
more  oblique,  and  narrower.  It  is  necessary  to  add  to 
these  the  interval,  which  is  very  narrow,  and  which 
separates  the  partition  of  the  external  side  of  the  nos- 
trils in  its  whole  extent.  These  canals  are  so  narrow, 
that  the  least  swelling  of  the  pituitary  renders  the  pas- 
sage of  the  air  in  the  nostrils  difficult,  and  sometimes 
impossible. 

The  two  superior  meatus  communicate  with  certain 
cavities,  of  dimensions  more  or  less  considerable, 
which  are  hollowed  out  of  the  bones  of  the  head,  and 
are  called  sinuses.  These  sinuses  are  the  maxillary , 
the  palatine , the  sphenoidal , the  frontal ; and  those 
which  are  hollowed  out  of  the  ethmoid  bone , better 
known  by  the  name  of  ethmoidal  cells. 

The  sinuses  communicate  only  with  the  two  supe- 
rior meatus. 

The  frontal , the  maxillary  sinus,  the  anterior  cells 
of  the  ethmoid  bone,  open  into  the  middle  meatus  ; the 
sphenoidal,  the  palatine  sinus , the  posterior  cells  of 
the  ethmoid,  open  into  the  superior  meatus.  The 
sinuses  are  covered  by  other  soft  membranes,  very  lit- 
tle adherent  to  the  sides,  and  which  appear  to  be  of  the 
mucous  kind.  It  secretes  more  or  less  abundantly  a 
matter  called  nasal  mucus,  which  is  continually  spread 
over  the  pituitary,  and  seems  very  useful  in  smelling. 
A more  considerable  extent  of  the  sinus  appears  to  co- 
incide with  a greater  perfection  of  the  smell.  This  is 
at  least  one  of  the  most  positive  results  of  comparative 
physiology. 

The  olfactory  nerve  springs,  by  three  distinct  roots, 
from  the  posterior,  inferior,  and  internal  parts  of  the 
anterior  lobe  of  the  brain.  Prismatic  at  first,  it  pro- 
ceeds towards  the  perforated  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone - 
Tt  swells  all  at  once,  and  then  divides  itself  into  a- 
great  number  of  small  threads,  which  spread  them- 


SMI 


SME 

selves  upon  the  pituitary  membrane,  principally  on  tlie 
superior  part  of  it. 

it  is  important  to  remark,  that  the  filaments  of  the  ol- 
factory nerves  have  never  been  traced  upon  the  infe- 
rior spongy  bones , upon  the  internal  surface  of  the 
middle  meatus , nor  in  any  of  the  sinuses.  The  pitui- 
tary membrane  receives  not  only  the  nerves  of  the  first 
pair,  but  also  a great  number  of  threads,  which  spring 
from  the  internal  aspect  of  the  spheno-palatine  gan- 
glion. These  threads  are  distributed  in  the  meatus. 
and  in  the  inferior  part  of  the  membrane.  It  covers 
also,  for  a considerable  length,  the  ethmoidal  thread  of 
the  nasal  nerve,  and  receives  from  it  a considerable 
number  of  filaments.  The  membrane  which  covers 
the  sinus  receives  also  a number  of  nervous  ramifi- 
cations. 

The  nasal  fossce  communicate  outwardly  by  means 
of  the  nostrils,  the  form  and  size  of  which  are  very  va- 
riable. The  nostrils  are  covered  with  hair  on  the  in- 
side, and  are  capable  of  being  increased  in  size  by 
muscular  action.  The  pasal  fossae  open  into  the  pha- 
rynx by  the  posterior  nostrils. 

Mechanism  of  Smelling. — Smell  is  exerted  essen- 
tially at  the  moment  when  the  air  traverses  the  nasal 
fossae  in  proceeding  towards  the  lungs.  We  very  rarely 
perceive  any  odour  when  the.  air  proceeds  from  the 
lungs ; it  happens  sometimes,  however,  particularly  in 
organic  diseases  of  the  lungs. 

The  mechanism  of  smell  is  extremely  simple.  It  is 
only  necessary  that  the  odoriferous  particles  should  be 
stopped  upon  the  pituitary  membrane,  particularly  in 
the  places  where  it  receives  the  threads  of  the  olfac- 
tory nerves. 

As  it  is  exactly  in  the  superior  part  of  the  nasal 
fossae,  where  the  extremes  are  so  narrow,  that  they  are 
covered  with  mucus,  it  is  also  natural  that  the  parti- 
cles should  stop  there. 

We  may  conceive  the  utility  of  mucus.  Its  physical 
properties  are  such  that  it  appears  to  have  a much 
greater  affinity  with  the  odoriferous  particles  than  with 
air;  it  is  also  extremely  important  to  the  olfactory 
sense,  that  the  nasal  mucus  should  always  preserve  the 
same  physical  properties.  Whenever  they  are  changed, 
as  it  is  observed  in  different  degrees  of  coryza , the 
smell  is  either  not  exerted  at  all,  or  in  a very  imperfect 
manner. 

After  what  has  been  said  of  the  distribution  of  the  ol- 
factory nerves,  it  is  evident  that  the  odours  that  reach 
the  upper  part  of  the  nasal  cavities  will  be  perceived 
with  greater  facility  and  acuteness : for  this  reason, 
when  we  wish  to  feel  more  acutely,  and  with  greater 
exactness,  the  odour  of  any  body,  we  modify  the  air  in 
such  a manner  that  it  may  be  directed  towards  this 
point.  For  the  same  reason,  those  who  take  snuff  en- 
deavour also  to  make  it  reach  the  upper  part  of  the 
nasal  fossce.  The  internal  face  of  the  ossa  spongiosa 
appears  well  disposed  to  stop  the  odours  at  the  instant 
the  air  passes.  And,  as  there  is  an  extreme  sensibility 
in  this  point," we  are  inclined  to  believe  that  here  the 
smell  is  exerted,  though  the  filaments  of  the  first  pair 
have  not  been  traced  so  far. 

Physiologists  have  not  yet  determined  the  use  of  the 
external  nose  in  smelling;  it  appears  intended  to  direct 
the  air  charged  with  odours  towards  the  superior  part 
of  the  nasal  cavities. 

Those  persons  who  have  their  noses  deformed,  par- 
ticularly if  broken  ; those  who  have  small  nostrils,  di- 
rected forward,  have  in  general  almost  no  smell.  The 
loss  of  the  nose,  either  by  sickness  or  accident,  causes 
almost  entirely  the  loss  of  smell.  Such  people  recover 
the  benefit  of  this  sense  by  the  use  of  an  artificial 
nose. 

The  only  use  of  the  sinuses  which  is  generally  ad- 
mitted, is  that  of  furnishing  the  greater  part  of  the 
nasal  mucus.  The  other  uses  which  are  attributed  to 
them  are,  to  serve  as  a depdt  to  the  air  charged  with 
odoriferous  particles,  to  augment  the  extent  of  the  sur- 
face which  is  sensible  to  odours,  and  to  receive  a por- 
tion of  the  air  that  we  inspire  for  the  purpose  of  putting 
the  power  of  smell  in  action,  &c.  These  are  far  from 
being  certain. 

Vapours  and  gases  appear  to  act  in  the  same  manner 
upon  the  pituitary  membrane  as  odours.  The  mecha- 
nism of  it  ought,  however,  to  be  a little  different. 
Bodies  reduced  to  a coarse  powder  have  a very  strong 
action  on  this  membrane;  even  their  first  contact  is 
painful ; but  habit  changes  the  pain  into  pleasure,  as  is 


seen  in  the  case  of  taking  snuff.  In  medicine,  this  pro- 
perty of  the  pituitary  membrane  is  employed  for  the 
purpose  of  exciting  a sharp  instantaneous  pain. 

In  the  history  of  smell,  the  use  of  those  hairs  with 
which  the  nostrils  and  the  nasal  fossa;  are  provided, 
must  not  be  forgotten.  Perhaps  they  are  intended  to 
prevent  the  entrance  of  foreign  bodies  along  with  the 
air  into  the  nasal  fossae.  In  this  case,  they  would  bear 
a strong  analogy  to  the  eyelashes,  and  the  hairs  with 
which  the  ear  is  provided. 

It  is  generally  agreed  that  the  olfactory  nerve  is  es- 
pecially employed  in  transmitting  to  the  brain  the  im- 
pressions produced  by  odoriferous  bodies ; but  there  is 
nothing  to  prove  that  the  other  nerves,  which  are 
placed  upon  the  pituitary,  as  well  as  those  near  it,  may 
not  concur  in  the  same  function.” — Magendie's  Phy- 
siology. 

SMELT.  See  Salmo  eperlanus. 

SMI'LAX.  (From  ayihevu),  to  cut:  so  called  from 
the  roughness  of  its  leaves  and  stalk.)  The  name  of  a 
eenus  of  plants  ir,  the  Lianrean  system.  Class,  Bicecia  ; 
Order,  Octandria.  Rough  bind-weed. 

Smilax  china.  The  systematic  name  of  the  China 
root  tree.  China;  China  orientalis  ; Sankira ; Oua- 
quara  ; Smilax  aspera  Chinensis.  China  root.  It  was 
formerly  in  esteem,  as  sarsaparilla  now'  is,  in  the  cure 
of  the  venereal  disease,  and  cutaneous  disorders. 

Smilax,  Chinese.  See  Smilax  china. 

Smilax  sarsaparilla.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
plant  which  afi’ords  the  sarsaparilla.  Sarsaparilla; 
Smilax  aspera  Peruviana  ; Sarsa ; Carivillandi ; Iva 
ptcanga  ; Macapatli ; Zar za,\  Zariaparilla  ; Sulsa- 
parilla;  Zarcaparilla.  The  root  of  this  plant,  Smilax 
— caule  aculeato  angulato , foliis  inermibus  ovatis  re- 
iuso  mucronatis  trinerviis , of  Linnaeus,  has  a farina- 
ceous, somewhat  bitter  taste,  and  no  smell.  About  two 
centuries  ago  it  wms  introduced  into  Spain,  as  an  un- 
doubted specific  in  syphilitic  disorders;  but  owing  to 
difference  of  climate,  or  other  causes,  it  has  not  an- 
swered the  character  which  it  had  acquired  in  the 
Spanish  West  Indies.  It  is  now  considered  as  capable 
of  improving  the  general  habit  of  body,  after  it  has  been 
reduced  by  the  continued  use  of  mercury. 

To  refute  the  opinion  that  sarsaparilla  possesses  an- 
tisyphilitic virtue;?,  Mr.  Pearson,  of  the  Lock  Hospital, 
divides  the  subject  into  two  distinct  questions.  1.  Is 
the  sarsaparilla  root,  when  given  alone,  to  be  safely  re- 
lied on  in  the  treatment  of  lues  venerea  1 The  late  Mr. 
Bloomfield,  his  predecessor,  and  during  some  years  his 
colleague  at  the  Lock  Hospital,  has  given  a very  de- 
cided answer  to  this  question : “I  solemnly  declare,’' 
says  lie,  “ l never  saw  a single  instance  in  my  life 
where  it  cured  that  disorder  without  the  assistance  of 
mercury,  either  at  the  same  time  with  it,  or  when  it 
had  been  previously  taken  before  the  decoction  was  di- 
rected.” Pearson’s  experience,  during  many  years,  co- 
incides entirely  with  the  observations  of  Bloomfield. 
He  has  employed  the  sarsaparilla,  in  powder  and  in  de- 
coctions, in  an  almost  infinite  variety  of  cases,  and 
feels  himself  fully  authorized  to  assert,  that  this  plant 
has  not  the  power  of  curing  any  one  form  of  the  lues 
venerea.  The  sarsaparilla,  indeed,  like  the  guaiacum, 
is  capable  of  alleviating  symptoms  derived  from  the 
venereal  virus;  and  it  sometimes  manifests  the  pow’er 
of  suspending,  for  a time,  the  destructive  ravages  of 
that  contagion  ; but  where  the  poison  has  not  been  pre- 
viously subdued  by  mercury,  the  symptoms  will  quick- 
ly return ; and,  in  addition  to  them,  wre  often  see  the 
most  indubitable  proofs  that  the  disease  is  making  an 
actual  progress,  during  the  regular  administration  of 
the  vegetable  remedy. 

2.  When  the  sarsaparilla  root  is  given  in  conjunc- 
tion with  mercury,  does  it  render  the  mercurial  course 
more  certain  and  efficacious  ? In  replying  to  this  query, 
it  is  necessary  to  observe  that  the  phrase,  “ to  increase 
the  efficacy  of  mercury,”  may  imply,  that  a smaller 
quantity  of  this  mineral  antidote  will  confer  security 
on  an  infected  person,  when  sarsaparilla  is  added  to  it ; 
or  it  may  mean,  that  mercury  would  be  sometimes  un- 
equal to  the  cure,  without  the  aid  of  sarsaparilla.  If  a 
decoction  of  this  root  did  indeed  possess  so  admirable 
a quality,  that  the  quantity  of  mercury,  necessary  to 
effect  a cure,  might  be  safely  reduced,  whenever  it  was 
given  during  a mercurial  course,  it  would  form  a most 
valuable  addition  to  our  Materia  Medica.  This  opi- 
nion has  been,  however,  unfortunately  falsified  by  the 
most  ample  experience,  and  whoever  shall  be  so  un 


SMI 


SOD 


wary  as  to  act  upon  such  a presumption,  will  be  sure  to 
find  his  own  and  his  patient’s  expectations  egregiously 
disappointed. 

If  the  sarsaparilla  root  be  a genuine  antidote  against 
the  syphilitic  virus,  it  ought  to  cure  the  disease  ad- 
ministered alone ; but,  if  no  direct  proof  can  be  ad- 
duced of  its  being  equal  to  this,  any  arguments  founded 
on  histories  where  mercury  has  been  previously  given, 
or  where  both  the  medicines  were  administered  at  the 
same  time,  must  be  ambiguous  and  undecisive. 

It  appears  probable,  that  Sir  William  Fordyce,  and 
some  other  persons,  entertained  a notion,  that  there 
were  certain  venereal  symptoms  which  commonly  re- 
sisted the  potency  of  mercury,  and  that  the  sarsapa- 
rilla was  an  appropriate  remedy  in  these  cases.  This 
opinion,  it  is  presumed,  is  not  correct,  for  it  militates 
against  all  Mr.  P.  has  ever  observed  of  the  progress 
and  treatment  of  lues  venerea.  Indeed,  those  patients 
who  have  lately  used  a full  course  of  mercury,  often 
complain  of  nocturnal  pains  in  their  limbs;  they  are 
sometimes  afflicted  with  painful  enlargements  of  the 
elbow  and  knee-joints;  or  they  have  membranous 
nodes, cutaneous  exulcerations,  and certainother  symp- 
toms, resembling  those  which  are  the  offspring  of  the 
venereal  virus. 

It  may  and  does  often  happen,  that  appearances  like 
these  are  mistaken  for  a true  venereal  affection,  and,  in 
consequence  of  this  error,  mercury  is  administered, 
which  never  fails  to  exasperate  the  disease.  Now,  ifa 
strong  decoction  of  sarsaparilla  root  be  given  to  per- 
sons under  these  circumstances,  it  will  seldom  fail  of 
producing  the  most  beneficial  effects;  hence  it  has  been 
contended,  that  symptoms  derived  from  the  contagion 
of  lues  venerea,  which  could  not  be  cured  by  mercury, 
have  finally  yielded  to  this  vegetable  remedy.  It  must 
be  acknowledged,  that  representations  of  this  kind 
have  a specious  and  imposing  air;  nevertheless,  Mr. 
Pearson  endeavours  to  prove,  that  they  are  neither  ex- 
act nor  conclusive.  If  any  of  the  above-named  symp- 
toms should  appear  near  the  conclusion  of  a course  of 
mercury,  when  that  medicine  was  operating  power- 
fully on  the  whole  system,  it  would  be  a strange  and 
inexplicable  thing  jf  they  could  possibly  be  derived  im- 
mediately from  the  uncontrolled  agency  of  the  vene- 
real virus. 

This  would  imply  something  like  a palpable  contra-  j 
diction  that  the  antidote  should  be  operating  with  suffi- 
cient efficacy  to  cure  the  venereal  symptoms,  for  which 
it  was  directed,  while,  at  the  same  time  the  venereal 
virus  was  proceeding  to  contaminate  new  parts,  and  to 
excite  a new  order  of  appearances. 

One  source,  and  a very  common  one,  to  which  some 
of  the  mistakes  committed  upon  this  subject  may  be 
traced,  is  a persuasion  that  every  morbid  alteration 
which  arises  in  an  infected  person  is  actually  tainted 
with  the  venereal  virus,  and  ought  to  be  ascribed  to  it 
as  its  true  cause. 

Every  experienced  surgeon  must,  however,  be  aware, 
that  very  little  of  truth  and  reality  exists  in  a represen- 
tation of  this  kind.  The  contagious  matter,  and  the 
mineral  specific  may  jointly  produce,  in  certain  habits 
of  body,  a new  series  of  symptoms,  which,  strictly 
speaking,  are  not  venereal,  which  cannot  be  cured  by 
mercury,  and  which  are  sometimes  more  to  be  dreaded 
than  the  simple  and  natural  effects  of  the  venereal  virus. 

Some  of  the  most  formidable  of  these  appearances 
may  be  sometimes  removed  by  sarsaparilla,  the  vene- 
real virus  still  remaining  in  the  system  ; and,  when  the 
force  of  that  poison  has  been  completely  subdued  by 
mercury,  the  same  vegetable  is  also  capable  of  freeing 
the  patient  from  what  may  be  called  the  sequela?  of  a 
mercurial  course. 

The  root  of  the  sarsaparilla  is  sometimes  employed 
in  rheumatic  affections,  scrofula,  and  cutaneous  com- 
plaints. where  an  acrimony  of  the  fluids  prevails. 

[“SMITH,  Eliiiu  H.,  M.  D.  Dr.  Smith  was  one  of 
the  first  projectors  of  the  New-York  Medical  Reposi- 
tory, uniting  with  Drs.  MitchifI  and  Miller  in  establish- 
ing one  of  the  first  Medical  ;ihd  Scientific  Journals  in 
this  country.  lie,  however,  survived  but  a short  time 
after  its  commencing,  having  died  of  the  Yellow-Fever 
in  New-York,  in  1798.  Dr.  E.  H.  Smith  was  born  in 
Litchfield,  in  Connecticut,  in  1771,  and  died  in  the 
27th  year  of  his  age. 

“ In  announcing  the  death  of  Dr.  Smith,  the  sur- 
viving editors  of  the  Medical  Repository  thus  speak: 
As  a Physician  his  loss  is  irreparable.  He  had  explored 


(at  his  early  age  an  extent  of  Medical  learning,  for  which 
the  longest  lives  are  seldom  found  sufficient.  The 
love  of  science,  atid  the  impulse  of  philanthropy,  di- 
rected his  whole  professional  career,  and  left  little  room 
for  the  calculations  of  emolument.  He  had  formed 
vast  designs  of  medical  improvement,  which  embraced 
the  whole  family  of  mankind ; was  animated  by  the 
soul  of  benevolence,  and  aspired  after  every  object  of  a 
liberal  and  a dignified  ambition.  He  was  ripe  for  the 
highest  honours  of  his  profession  ; his  merits  were  every 
day  becoming  more  conspicuous,  and  nothing  but  his 
premature  fate  deprived  him  of  that  extraordinary  de- 
gree of  public  confidence  which  awaited  a longer  con- 
tinuance of  his  life.” — JV\  Y.  Med.  Repos.  A.] 

Smy'rnion  HORTeNSE.  Sec  Imperaturia  ostruthium. 
SMY'RNIUM.  (So  called  from  apvpva,  myrrh,  the 
smell  of  the  seed  resembling  that  of  myrrh  very  much.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Rentandria ; 
Order,  Digynia. 

Smyrnium  olusatrum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  called  Alexanders.  Hipposelinum  ; Smyr- 
nium ; Macerona ; Macedonisium ; Herba  alezan- 
drina ; Grielum;  Agrioselinum.  Common  Alexan- 
ders. This  plant  was  formerly  cultivated  in  our  gar- 
dens, for  culinary  use,  but  is  now  superseded  by  scelery. 
The  seeds  are  bitter  and  aromatic,  and  the  roots  are 
more  powerfully  bitter.  They  stand  recommended  as 
resolvents,  diuretics,  andemmenagogues,  though  seldom 
used  in  medical  prescriptions. 

Smxrnium  rotundifolium.  The  blanched  leaves 
of  this  species  are  said  to  be  more  agreeable  than  those 
of  the  olusatrum. 

SNAIL.  See  Limax. 

Snail-seeded  glasswort.  See  Salsola  kali. 

SNAKE.  Anguis.  The  flesh  was  formerly  made 
into  broth  as  a restorative. 

Snake , common.  The  Coluber  nalrixy  of  Linnteus. 
Snake , rattle.  See  Coluber. 

SNAKE  ROOT.  See  Aristolochia  serpentaria , and 
Polygala  senega. 

[ Snake-root , black.  See  Cimicifuga.  A. 
SNAKEWEED.  See  Polygonum bistorta. 

SNAKE  WOOD.  See  Colubrinum  lignum. 
Snake-killing  birthwort.  See  Aristolochia  anguicida . 
SNAP-DRAGON.  See  Antirrhinum. 

| SNEEZE  WORT.  (So  called,  because  the  dried 

flowers  and  roots,  when  powdered,  cause  sneezing  when 
applied  to  the  nose.)  See  Achillea  ptarmica. 

SNEEZING.  Snernutatio.  A convulsive  action 
of  the  muscles  of  the  chest  from  irritation  of  the  nos- 
trils. 

SNUFF.  See  Nicotiana. 

SOAP.  See  Sapo. 

SOAP-BERRY.  See  Saponaria  officinalis. 

SOAP,  MOUNTAIN.  A pale  brownish  black  mi- 
neral, which  has  a greasy  feel ; writes,  but  does  not 
soil : and  occurs  in  trap  rocks  in  the  IsJe  of  Skye.  It  is 
used  in  crayon  painting. 

SOAP-STONE.  See  Steatite. 

SOAP-TREE.  See  Saponaria. 

SOAP-WORT.  See  Saponaria. 

Socotorine  aloes.  Aloes  brought  from  Socotora 
See  Aloe. 

SO'DA.  (An  Arabian  word.)  The  name  now 
universally  given  by  chemists  and  physicians  to  the 
mineral  alkali. 

It  is  obtained  from  several  sources,  but  principally 
from  plants  growing  on  the  sea  coast.  It  occurs  in  the 
mineral  kingdom,  united  with  sulphuric,  muriatic,  and 
boracic  acids;  it  is  also  found  in  large  quantities  in 
Egypt,  combined  with  carbonic  acid,  ft  appears  to  be 
deposited  in  large  impure  masses,  under  the  surface  of 
the  earth,  in  various  countries,  from  which  it  is  ex- 
tracted by  running  waters.  Thus  it  is  found,  after  the 
spontaneous  evaporation  of  the  water,  mixed  with  sand 
in  the  bottom  of  lakes  in  Hungary;  in  the  neighbour- 
hood of  Bilin  in  Bohemia ; and  in  Switzerland.  It 
occurs  also  in  China,  and  near  Tripoli ; in  Syria,  Egypt, 
Persia,  and  India.  It  frequently  oozes  out  of  walls  and 
crystallizes  on  their  surface.  Like  potassa,  it  is  pio- 
cured  by  lixiviation  from  the  ashes  of  burnt  plants,  but 
only  from  those  which  grow  upon  the  sea-shores.  The 
variety  of  plants  employed  for  this  purpose  is  very 
considerable.  In  Spain,  soda  is  procured  from  different 
species  of  the  Salsola  and  Salicornia , and  the  Batis 
maritima.  The  Zostera  maritima  is  burnt  in  some 
places  on  the  borders  of  the  Baltic.  In  this  country 


SOD 


SOD 


we  burn  the  various  species  of  fuci;  and  in  France 
they  burn  the  Chenopodium  maritimum.  See  Soda 
impura. 

The  alkaJi  thus  procured  is  more  or  less  pure,  ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  particular  plant  from  which 
it  is  obtained.  The  greatest  part,  however,  is  a sub- 
carbonate of soda 

“ To  procure  pure  soda,  we  must  boil  a solution  of 
the  pure  carbonate  with  half  its  weight  of  quicklime, 
and  after  subsidence  decant  the  clear  ley,  and  evapo- 
rate in  a clean  iron  or  silver  vessel,  till  the  liquid  flows 
quietly  like  oil.  It  must  then  be  poured  out  on  a po- 
lished iron  plate.  It  concretes  into  a hard  white  cake, 
which  is  to  be  immediately  broken  in  pieces,  and  put 
up,  while  still  hot,  in  a phial,  which  must  be  well 
corked.  If  the  carbonate  of  soda  be  somewhat  im- 
pure, then,  after  the  action  of  lime,  and  subsequent 
concentration  of  the  ley,  alkohol  must  be  digested  on 
it,  which  will  dissolve  only  the  caustic  pure  soda,  and 
leave  the  heterogeneous  salts.  By  distilling  of  the  al- 
kohol in  a silver  alembic,  the  alkali  may  then  be  ob- 
tained pure. 

This  white  solid  substance  is,  however,  not  absolute 
soda,  but  a hydrate,  consisting  of  about  100  soda  -f-  28 
water ; or  of  nearly  77  + 23,  in  100.  If  a piece  of  this 
soda  be  exposed  to  the  air,  it  softens  and  becomes 
pasty ; but  it  never  deliquesces  into  an  oily  looking  li- 
quid, as  potassa  does.  The  soda  in  fact  soon  becomes 
drier,  because  by  absorption  of  carbonic  acid  from 
the  air  it  passes  into  an  efflorescent  carbonate.  Soda 
is  distinguishable  from  potassa  by  sulphuric  acid, 
which  forms  a very  soluble  salt  with  the  former,  and  a 
sparingly  soluble  one  with  the  latter ; by  muriate  of 
platina  and  tartaric  acid,  which  occasions  precipitates 
with  potassa  salts,  but  not  with  those  of  soda. 

The  basis  of  soda  is  a peculiar  metal,  called  sodium , 
discovered  by  Sir  H.  Davy  in  1807,  a few  days  after  he 
discovered  potassium.  It  may  be  procured  in  exactly 
the  same  manner  as  potassium,  by  electrical  or  chemi- 
cal decomposition  of  the  pure  hydrate.  A rather  higher 
degree  of  heat,  and  greater  voltaic  power,  are  required 
to  decompose  soda  than  potassa.  Sodium  resembles 
potassium  in  many  of  its  characters.  It  is  as  white  as 
silver,  possesses  great  lustre,  and  is  a good  conductor 
of  electricity.  It  enters  into  fusion  at  about  280°  Fahr., 
and  rises  in  vapour  at  a strong  red  heat.  Its  sp.  gr.  is, 
according  to  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  0.972,  at  the 
temperature  of  59°  Fahr.  In  the  cold,  it  exercises 
scarcely  any  action  on  dry  air,  or  oxygen.  But  when 
heated  strongly  in  oxygen  or  chlorine,  it  burns  with 
great  brilliancy.  When  thrown  upon  water,  it  effer- 
vesces violently,  but  does'not  inflame,  swims  on  the 
surface,  gradually  diminishes  with  great  agitation,  and 
renders  the  water  a solution  of  soda.  It  acts  upon 
most  substances  in  a manner  similar  to  potassium,  but 
with  less  energy.  It  tarnishes  in  the  air,  but  more 
slowly ; and,  like  potassium,  it  is  best  preserved  under 
naphtha. 

Sodium  forms  two  distinct  combinations  with  oxy- 
gen ; one  is  pure  soda,  whose  hydrate  is  above  de- 
scribed ; the  other  is  the  orange  oxide  of  sodium,  ob- 
served, like  the  preceding  oxide,  first  by  Sir  H.  Davy  in 
1807,  but  of  which  the  true  nature  was  pointed  out,  in 
1810,  by  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard. 

Pure  soda  may  be  formed  by  burning  sodium  in  a 
quantity  of  air,  containing  no  more  oxygen  than  is 
sufficient  for  its  conversion  into  this  alkali ; i.  e.  the 
metal  must  be  in  excess : a strong  degree  of  heat  must 
be  employed. 

Pure  soda  is  of  a gray  colour,  it  is  a non-conductor  of 
electricity,  of  a vitreous  fracture,  and  requires  a strong 
red  heat  for  its  fusion.  When  a little  water  is  added 
to  it,  there  is  a violent  action  between  the  two  bodies ; 
the  soda  becomes  white,  crystalline  in  its  appearance, 
and  much  more  fusible  and  volatile.  It  is  then  the 
substance  commonly  called  pure  or  caustic  soda ; but 
properly  styled  the  hydrate. 

The  other  oxide  or  peroxide  of  sodium  may  be  formed 
by  burning  sodium  in  oxygen,  in  excess.  It  is  of  a deep 
orange  colour,  very  fusible,  and  a non-conductor  of 
electricity.  When  acted  on  by  water,  it  gives  off 
oxygen,  and  the  water  becomes  a solution  of  soda.  It 
deflagrates  when  strongly  heated  with  combustible 
bodies 

The  proportions  of  oxygen  in  soda,  and  in  the  orange 
peroxide  of  sodium,  are  easily  learned  by  the  action  of 
sodium  on  water  and  on  oxygen.  If  a given  weight  of 
294 


sodium,  in  a little  glass  tube,  be  thrown  by  means  of 
the  finger  under  a graduated  inverted  jar  filled  with 
water,  the  quantity  of  hydrogen  evolved  will  indicate 
the  quantity  of  oxygen  combined  with  the  metal  to 
form  soda and  when  sodium  is  slowly  burned  in  a 
ray  of  platina  (lined  with  dry  common  salt),  in 
oxygen  in  great  excess,  from  the  quantity  of  oxygen  ab 
sorbed  the  composition  of  the  peroxide  may  be  learned. 
From  Sir  II.  Davy’s  experiments,  compared  with  those 
of  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  it  appears  that  the  prime 
equivalent  of  sodium  is  3.0,  and  that  of  dry  soda,  or 
protoxide  of  sodium,  4.0 ; while  the  orange  oxide  or 
deutoxide  is  5.0.  The  numbers  given  by  Thenard  are, 
for  the  first,  100  metal  + 33.995  oxygen ; and  for  the 
second,  100  metal  -f-  67.990  oxygen. 

Another  oxide  is  described  containing  less  oxygen 
than  soda ; it  is  therefore  a sub-oxide.  When  sodium 
is  kept  for  some  time  in  a small  quantity  of  moist  air, 
or  when  sodium  in  excess  is  heated  with  hydrate  of 
soda,  a dark  grayish  substance  is  formed,  more  inflam- 
mable than  sodium,  and  which  affords  hydrogen  by  its 
action  upon  water. 

Only  one  combination  of  sodium  and  chlorine  is 
known.  This  is  the  important  substance,  common  salt. 
It  may  be  formed  directly  by  combustion,  or  by  decom- 
posing any  compound  of  chlorine  by  sodium.  Sodium 
has  a much  stronger  attraction  for  chlorine  than  for 
oxygen : and  soda,  or  its  hydrate,  is  decomposed  by 
chlorine,  oxygen  being  expelled  from  the  first,  and 
oxygen  and  water  from  the  second. 

Potassium  has  a stronger  attraction  for  chlorine  than 
sodium  has ; and  one  mode  of  procuring  sodium  easily, 
is  by  heating  together  to  redness  common  salt  and  po- 
tassium. The  chloride  of  sodium,  improperly  called 
the  muriate,  consists  of  4.5  chlorine  + 3.0  sodium. 
There  is  no  known  action  between  sodium  and  hydro- 
gen or  azote. 

Sodium  combines  readily  with  sulphur  and  with 
phosphorus,  presenting  similar  phenomena  to  those 
presented  by  potassium.  The  sulphurets  and  phos- 
phurets  of  sodium  agree  in  their  general  properties 
with  those  of  potassium,  except  that  they  are  rather 
less  inflammable.  They  form,  by  burning,  acidulous 
compounds  of  sulphuric  and  phosphoric  acid  and  soda. 

Potassium  and  sodium  combine  with  great  facility, 
and  form  peculiar  compounds,  which  differ  in  their 
properties,  according  to  the  proportions  of  the  constitu- 
ents. By  a small  quantity  of  sodium,  potassium  is 
rendered  fluid  at  common  temperatures,  and  its  sp.  gr. 
is  considerably  diminished.  Eight  parts  of  potassium, 
and  one  of  sodium,  form  a compound  that  swims  in 
naphtha,  and  that  is  fluid  at  the  common  temperature 
of  the  air.  Three  parts  of  sodium,  and  one  of  potas- 
sium, make  a compound  fluid  at  common  tempera- 
tures. A little  potassium  destroys  the  ductility  of  so- 
dium, and  renders  it  very  brittle  and  soft.  Since  the 
prime  of  potassium  is  to  that  of  sodium  as  5 to  3,  it 
will  require  the  former  quantity  of  potassium  to  elimi- 
nate the  latter  quantity  of  sodium  from  the  chloride. 
The  attractions  of  potassium,  for  all  substances  that 
have  been  examined,  are  stronger  than  those  of  so- 
dium. 

Soda  is  the  basis  of  common  salt,  of  plate  and 
crown-glass,  and  of  all  hard  soaps.” 

The  compounds  of  soda  used  in  medicine  are  the 
following: 


1.  Sodce  acetas. 

2.  - — boras. 

3.  carbonas. 

4.  subcarbonas. 

5.  

siccata. 


6.  Sodce  murias. 

7.  phosphas 

8.  sulphas. 

9.  tartras. 

ex-  10.  Soda  tartarizaXa. 

11.  Sapo  durus. 


Soda  acetata.  A neutral  salt  formed  of  a combi- 
nation of  acetic  acid  with  the  mineral  alkali.  Its  vir- 
tues are  similar  to  those  of  the  acetate  of  potassa. 
Soda  boraxata.  See  Borax. 

Soda,  carbonate  of.  See  Sod<B  carbonas. 

Soda  hispanica.  See  Soda  impura. 

Soda  hispanica  purificata.  See  Sodce  subcar- 


bonas. 

Soda  impura.  Impure  soda.  Soda  ; Barilla ; Ba- 
riglia  ; Barillor;  Anatron  ; J\Tatron;  Anaton ; JSTi- 
trum  antiquorum  ; Aphronitrum  ; Batirach  ; Sal  alka- 
linus  fixus  fossilus  ; Carbonas  soda  impurus  ; Sub- 
carbonas soda  impura.  Soda.  Barilla  is  the  terra 
given,  in  commerce,  to  the  impure  mineral  alkali,  or 
imperfect  carbonate  of  soda,  imported  from  Spain  and 


SOD 


SOD 


the  Levant.  Tt  is  made  by  burning  to  ashes  different 
plants  that  grow  on  the  sea-shore,  chiefly  of  the  genus 
Salsola.  Many  have  referred  it  to  the  Salsola  kali , of 
Linnseus ; but  various  other  plants,  on  being  burned, 
are  found  to  afford  this  alkali,  and  some  in  a greater 
proportion  than  this : these  are, 

1.  The  Salsola  sativa , of  Linnaeus.  Salsola-  sonda, 
of  Lofling.  Kali  hispanicum  supinum  annuum  sedi- 
foliis  brevibus.  Kali  d'alicante.  This  grows  abun- 
dantly on  that  part  of  the  Spanish  coast  which  is 
washed  by  the  Mediterranean  sea.  This  plant  is  de- 
servedly first  enumerated  by  Professor  Murray,  as  it 
supplies  all  the  best  soda  consumed  in  Europe,  wltich 
by  us  is  called  Spanish  or  Alicant  soda,  and  by  the 
Spanish  merchants  Barilla  de  Alicante. 

2.  Salsola  soda,  of  Linnaeus.  Kali  majus  cochlealo 
semine;  Le  Salicor.  This  species,  which  grows  on 
the  French  Mediterranean  coast,  is  much  used  in  Lan- 
guedoc for  the  preparation  of  this  salt,  which  is  usually 
exported  to  Sicily  and  Italy. 

3.  Salsola  tragus,  of  Linnaeus,  affords  an  ordinary 
kind  of  soda,  with  which  the  French  frequently  mix 
that  made  in  Languedoc.  This  adulteration  is  also 
practised  by  the  Sicilians,  who  distinguish  the  plant  by 
the  term  salvaggia. 

4.  Salicomia  herbacea,  of  Linnaeus,  is  common  in 
salt  marshes,  and  on  the  sea-shore  all  over  Europe. 
Linnaeus  prefers  the  soda  obtained  from  this  plant  to 
that  of  all  the  others ; but  though  the  quantity  of  al- 
kali which  it  yields  is  very  considerable,  it  is  mixed 
with  much  common  salt. 

5.  Salicomia  arabica,  of  Linnaeus,  and  also  the  Me- 
sembryanthemum  nodiflorum,  and  Plantago  squarrosa. 
All  these,  according  to  Alpinus,  afford  this  alkali.  It 
has  also  been  procured  from  several  of  the  fuci,  espe- 
cially F.  vesicolosus,  and  distinguished  here  by  the 
name  kelp.  Various  other  marine  plants  might  also 
be  noticed  as  yielding  an  impure  soda  by  combustion ; 
but  the  principal  are  confined  to  the  genus  salsola,  and 
that  of  salicomia.  The  salsola  kali,  on  the  authority 
of  Rawolf,  is  the  species  from  which  the  salt  is  usually 
obtained  in  eastern  countries ; which  is  brought  to  us 
in  hard  porous  masses,  of  a speckled  brown  colour. 
Kelp,  a still  more  impure  alkali,  made  in  this  country  by 
burnjng  various  sea-weeds,  is  sometimes  called  British 
barilla.  The  marine  plants,  collected  for  the  purpose  of 
procuring  barilla  in  this  country,  are  the  Salsola  kali, 
Salicomia  europce,  Zostera  maritima,  Triglochen  ma- 
ritimum,  Chenopodium  maritimum , Atriplex  portula- 
coides  el  littoralis,  Plantago  maritima , Tamarix  gal- 
lica,  Eryngium  maritimum , Sedum  telcphium,  Dipsa- 
cus  fullonum,  Sec.  &c. 

It  is  to  be  regretted,  that  the  different  kinds  of  soda 
which  are  brought  to  European  markets  have  not  been 
sufficiently  analyzed  to  enable  us  to  ascertain  with  tole- 
rable certainty  the  respective  value  of  each ; and,  in 
deed,  while  the  practice  of  adulterating  this  salt  con- 
tinues, any  attempts  of  this  kind  are  likely  to  prove 
fruitless.  The  best  information  on  tils  subject  is  to  be 
had  from  Jessica,  Mascorelle,  Cadet,  Bolarc,  and  Ses- 
tini.  In  those  places  where  the  preparation  of  soda 
forms  a considerable  branch  of  commerce,  as  on  the 
coast  of  tire  Mediterranean,  seeds  of  the  salsola  are  re- 
gularly sown  in  a proper  situation  near  the  sea,  which 
usually  shoot  above  ground  in  the  course  of  a fortnight. 
About  the  time  the  seeds  become  ripe,  the  plants  are 
pulled  up  by  the  roots,  and  exposed  in  a suitable  place 
to  dry,  where  their  seeds  are  collected;  this  being 
done,  the  plan's  are  tied  up  in  bundles,  and  burned  in 
an  oven  constructed  for  the  purpose,  where  the  ashes 
are  then,  while  hot,  continually  stirred  with  long  poles. 
The  saline  matter,  on  becoming  cold,  forms  a hard 
solid  mass,  which  is  broken  in  pieces  of  a convenient 
size  for  exportation. 

According  to  chemical  analysis,  the  impure  sodas  of 
commerce  generally  contain  a portion  of  vegetable  al- 
kali, and  neutral  salts,  as  muriate  of  soda  and  sulphate 
of  potassa,  and  not  unfrequently  some  portion  of  iron 
is  contained  in  the  mass;  they  are,  therefore,  to  be 
considered  as  more  or  less  a compound,  and  their  good- 
ness to  be  estimated  accordingly.  The  Spanish  soda, 
of  the  best  sort,  is  in  dark-coloured  masses,  of  a bluish 
tinge,  very  ponderous,  sonorous,  dry  to  the  touch,  and 
externally  abounding  with  small  cavities,  without  any 
offensive  smell,  and  very  salt  to  the  taste;  if  long  ex- 
posed to  the  air,  it  undergoes  a degree  of  spontaneous 
calcination.  The  best  French  soda  is  also  dry,  sono-  I 


rous,  brittle,  and  of  a deep  blue  colour,  approaching  to 
black.  The  soda  which  is  mixed  with  small  stones, 
which  gives  out  a foetid  smell  on  solution,  and  is  white, 
soft,  and  deliquescent,  is  of  the  worst  kind. 

Soda  muriata.  See  Soda;  murias. 

So'da  muriatica.  See  Soda;  murias. 

Soda  phosphorata.  Phosphorated  soda.  Alkali 
mineralc  phosphoratum,  of  Bergman.  This  prepara- 
tion is  a compound  of  phosphoric  acid  and  soda.  It  is 
cathartic  in  the  dose  of  half  an  ounce  to  an  ounce ; 
dissolved  in  gruel  it  is  not  unpleasant,  and  it  is  said  to 
be  useful  in  scrofula,  bronchocele,  rachitis,  and  gout, 
in  small  doses. 

Soda,  subcarbonate  of.  See  Soda;  subcarbonas. 

Soda,  subcarbonate  of,  dried.  See  Sodce  subcarbo- 
nas exsiccata. 

Soda,  sulphate  of.  See  Sodce  sulphas. 

Soda  tartarizata.  Tartarized  soda,  formerly 
known  by  the  names  of  sal  rupellensis,  sal  polychres- 
tum  Seignetti,  and  lately  by  that  of  natron  tartari- 
zatum.  Take  of  subcarbonate  of  soda  twenty  ounces ; 
supertartrate  of  potassa,  powdered,  two  pounds ; boil- 
ing water  ten  pints.  Dissolve  the  subcarbonate  of  soda 
in  the  water,  and  add  gradually  the  supertartrate  of  po- 
tassa ; filter  the  solution  through  paper,  and  evaporate 
it  until  a pellicle  forms  upon  the  surface;  then  set  it 
by  that  crystals  may  form.  Having  poured  away  the 
water,  dry  these  ^crystals  upon  bibulous  paper.  This 
salt  consists  of  tartaric  acid,  soda,  and  potassa,  the  soda 
only  combining  with  the  superabundant  acid  of  the 
super  salt ; it  is  therefore  a triple  salt,  and  it  has  been 
judged  by  the  London  College  more  convenient  to  ex- 
press this  difference  by  the  adjective  tartarizata , than 
to  introduce  the  three  words  necessary  to  its  descrip- 
tion. It  possesses  mildly  cathartic,  diuretic,  and  deob 
struent  virtues,  and  is  administered  in  doses  from  one 
drachm  to  an  ounce,  as  a cathartic,  and  in  the  dose  of 
twenty  to  thirty  grains  in  abdominal  physconia,  and 
torpidity  of  the  kidneys. 

Soda  tartarized.  See  Soda  tartarizata. 

Sod®  boras.  See  Borax. 

Sod.®  carbonas.  Carbonate  of  soda.  Take  of 
subcarbcnate  of  soda,  a pound ; subcarbonate  of  am- 
monia, three  ounces ; distilled  water,  a pint.  Having 
previously  dissolved  the  soda  in  water,  add  the  ammo- 
nia, then  by  means  of  a sand  bath  apply  a heat  of 
180°  for  three  hours,  or  until  the  ammonia  be  driven 
off.  Lastly,  set  the  solution  by  to  crystallize.  The  re 
maining  solution  may  be  evaporated  and  set  by  in  the 
same  manner,  that  crystals  may  again  form.  This  salt, 
which  is  called  also  aSrated  soda , and  natron,  bears  to 
the  subcarbonate  of  soda  the  same  relation  that  the  car- 
bonate of  potassa  does  to  its  subcarbonate.  It  is  pre- 
pared in  the  same  way,  possesses  the  same  compara- 
tive advantages,  and  contains,  in  like  manner,  double 
the  quantity  of  carbonic  acid. 

Sod®  murias.  Muriate  of  soda.  Alkali  minerals 
salinum  ; Sal  communis ; Sal  culinaris  ; Sal  fontium ; 
Sal  gemmee;  Sal  marinus ; Natron  muriatum ; Soda 
muriata.  Common  culinary  salt.  This  salt  is  more 
abundant,  in  nature  than  any  other.  It  is  found  in  pro- 
digious masses  in  the  internal  part  of  the  earth,  in  Ca- 
labria, in  Hungary,  in  Muscovy,  and  more  especially 
Weilicska,  in  Poland,  near  Mount  Capax,  where  the 
mines  are  very  large,  and  afford  immense  quantities  of 
salt.  It  is  also  obtained  by  several  artificial  means 
from  sea-water.  It  possesses  antiseptic,  diuretic,  and 
resolvent  qualities,  and  is  frequently  employed  in  form 
of  clyster,  fomentation,  lotion,  pediluvium,  and  bath, 
in  obstipation,  against  worms,  gangrene,  scrofulous 
tumours,  herpetic  eruptions,  arthritis,  &c. 

Sod®  subboras.  See  Borax. 

Sod®  subcarbonas.  Subcarbonate  of  soda,  for- 
merly called  natron  preeparatum  and  sal  sodce.  Take 
of  impure  soda,  powdered,  a pound ; boiling  distilled 
water,  half  a gallon.  Boil  the  soda  in  the  water  for 
half  an  hour,  and  strain  the  solution;  let  the  solution 
evaporate  to  two  pints,  and  be  set  by,  that  crystals  may 
form.  Throw  away  the  remaining  solution.  The 
pure  crystals,  thus  formed  of  Alicant  barilla,  are  co- 
lourless, transparent,  lamellated,  of  a-  rhomboidal 
figure;  and  one  hundred  parts  are  found  to  contain 
twenty  of  alkali,  sixteen  of  afirial  acid,  and  sixty-four 
of  water;  but  upon  keeping  the  crystals  for  a length 
of  time,  if  the  air  be  not  excluded,  the  water  evapo- 
rates, and  they  assume  the  form  of  a white  powder. 
According  to  Islin,  one  ounce  of  water,  at  the  tempe- 

295 


SOL 


SOL 


rature  62°  of  Fahr.  dissolves  five  drachms  and  fifteen 
grains  of  the  crystals.  This  salt  consists  of  soda  im- 
perfectly saturated  with  carbonic  acid,  and  is  there- 
fore called  soda  subcarbonas.  It  is  given  in  doses  of 
from  ten  grains  to  half  a drachm  as  an  attendant  and 
antacid;  and  joined  with  bark  and  aromatics,  it  is 
highly  praised  by  some  in  the  cure  of  scrofula.  It  is 
likewise  a powerful  solvent  of  mucus,  a deobstruent 
and  diuretic ; and  has  been  thought  an  antidote  against 
oxide  of  arsenic  and  corrosive  sublimate.  The  other 
diseases  in  which  it  is  administered  are  those  arising 
from  an  abundance  of  mucus  in  the  primte  vise,  calcu- 
lous complaints,  gout,  some  affections  of  the  skin, 
rickets,  tinea  capitis,  crusta  lactea,  and  worms.  Exter- 
nally it  is  recommended  by  some  in  the  form  of  lotion, 
to  be  applied  to  scrofulous  ulcers. 

Sod/E  subcarbonas  exsiccata.  Dried  subcarbon- 
ate of  soda.  Take  of  subcarbonate  of  soda,  a pound. 
Apply  a boiling  heat  to  the  soda  in  a clean  iron  vessel, 
until  it  becomes  perfectly  dry,  and  constantly  stir  it 
with  an  iron  rod.  Lastly,  reduce  it  into  powder.  Its 
virtues  are  similar  to  those  of  the  subcarbonate. 

SoDiE  sulphas.  Sulphate  of  soda,  commonly  known 
by  the  name  of  natron  vitriolatum , and  formerly  sal 
ealkarticus  glauberi.  Take  of  the  salt  which  remains 
after  the  distillation  of  muriatic  acid,  two  pounds.  Boil- 
ing water,  two  pints  and  a half.  Dissolve  the  salt  in 
the  water,  then  add  gradually  as  much  subcarbonate 
of  soda  as  may  be  required  to  satuAte  the  acid  ; boil 
the  solution  away  until  a pellicle  forms  upon  the  sur- 
face, and,  after  having  strained  it,  set  it  by,  that  crys- 
tals may  form.  Having  poured  away  the  water,  dry 
these  crystals  upon  bibulous  paper.  It  possesses  cathar- 
tic and  diuretic  qualities,  and  is  in  high  esteem  as  a mild 
cathartic.  It  is  found  in  the  mineral  kingdom  formed 
by  nature,  but  that  which  is  used  medicinally  is  pre- 
pared by  art.  The  dose  is  from  one  drachm  to  one  ounce. 

SODA  LITE.  A green-coloured  mineral  discovered 
in  a bed  of  mica  slate  in  West  Greenland. 

SODIUM.  See  Soda. 

SOL.  The  sun.  Gold  was  so  called  by  the  older 
chemists. 

SOLA'MEN.  (From  solor,  to  comfort.)  Anise- 
seed  is  named  solamen  intestinorum,  from  the  comfort 
it  affords  in  disorders  of  the  intestines. 

SOLANO'IDES.  (From  solanum , night-shade,  and 
ei<5oj,  likeness.)  Bastard  night-shade. 

SOLA'NUM.  (From  solor , to  comfort,  because  it 
gives  ease  by  its  stupifying  qualities.)  1.  The  name 
of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnscan  system.  Class, 
Pentandria : Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  solanum.  nigrum. 

Solanum  dulcamara.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  bitter-sweet.  Dulcamara  ; Solanum  scandens ; 
Glycypicros , sive  amaradulcis ; Solanum  lignosum. 
Svpaxvof  of  Theophrastus.  Woody  night  shade.  So- 
lanum— caulc  inermi  frutescente  Jlexuosa;  foliis  supe- 
rioribus  liastatis ; racemis  cymosis , of  Linnams.  The 
roots  and  stalks  of  this  night  shade,  upon  being  chewed, 
first  cause  a sensation  of  bitterness,  which  is  soon  fol- 
lowed by  a considerable  degree  of  sweetness;  and 
hence  the  plant  obtained  the  name  of  bitter-sweet.  The 
berries  have  not  yet  been  applied  to  medical  use  ; they 
seem  to  act  powerfully  upon  the  primte  vise,  exciting 
violent  vomiting  and  purging.  Thirty  of  them  were 
given  to  a dog,  which  soon  became  mad,  and  died  in 
the  space  of  three  hours;  and,  upon  opening  his  sto- 
mach, the  berries  were  discovered  to  have  undergone 
no  change  by  the  powers  of  digestion ; there  can,  there- 
fore, be  little  doubt  of  the  deleterious  effects  of  these 
berries  ; and,  as  they  arc  very  common  in  the  hedges, 
and  may  be  easily  mistaken,  by  children,  for  red  cur- 
rants, which  they  somewhat  resemble,  this  circumstance 
is  the  more  worthy  of  notice.  The  stipites,  or  younger 
branches,  are  directed  for  use  in  the  Pliarm.,  and  they 
may  be  employed  either  fresh  or  dried,  making  a pro- 
portionate allowance  in  the  dose  of  the  latter  for  some 
diminution  of  its  powers  by  drying.  In  autumn,  when 
the  leaves  are  fallen,  the  sensible  qualities  of  tire  plant 
are  said  to  be  the  strongest ; and,  on  this  account,  it 
should  be  gathered  in  autumn  rather  than  spring.  Dul- 
camara does  not  manifest  those  strong  narcotic  quali- 
ties which  are  common  to  many  of  the  night-shades ; it 
is,  horvever,  very  generally  admitted  to  be  a medicine 
of  considerable  efficacy.  Murray  says  it  promotes  all 
the  secretions  ; Haller  observes,  that  it  partakes  of  the 
milder  powers  of  the  night-shade  joined  to  a resolvent 


and  saponaceous  quality ; and  the  opinion  of  Bergius 
seems  to  coincide  with  that  of  Murray  : — 11  Vil  lus  : pel- 
lens  urinam,  sudorum,  menses,  lochia,  sputa  ; mundifi- 
cans.”  The  diseases  in  which  we  find  it  recommended 
by  different  authors,  are  extremely  various ; but  Ber- 
gius confines  its  use  to  rheumatisms,  retentio  mensium, 
et  lochiorum.  Dulcamara  appears,  also,  by  the  e.\peri- 
ments  of  Razoux  and  others,  to  have  been  used  with 
advantage  in  some  obstinate  cutaneous  affections.  Dr. 
Cullen  says,  “ We  have  employed  only  the  stipites,  or 
slender  twigs  of  this  shrub ; but,  as  we  have  collected 
them,  they  come  out  very  unequal,  some  parcels  of 
them  being  very  mild  and  inert,  and  others  of  them  con- 
siderably acrid.  In  the  latter  state,  we  have  employed 
a decoction  of  them  in  the  cure  of  rheumatism,  some- 
times with  advantage,  but  at  other  times  without  any 
effect.  Though  the  dulcamara  is  here  inserted  in  the 
catalogue  of  diuretics,  it  has  never  appeared  to  us  a3 
powerful  in  this  way  ; for,  in  all  the  trials  made  here, 
it  has  hardly  ever  been  observed  to  be  in  any  measure 
diuretic.”  This  plant  is  generally  given  in  decoction, 
or  infusion,  and,  to  prevent  its  exciting  nausea,  it  is 
ordered  to  be  diluted  with  milk,  and  to  begin  with  small 
doses,  as  large  doses  have  been  found  to  produce  very 
dangerous  symptoms.  Razoux  directs  the  following : 
R.  Stipitum  dulcam.  rec.  drac.  ss  in  aqua;  font.  unc. 
18  coquater  ad  uric.  8.  This  was  taken  in  the  dose  of 
three  or  four  drachms,  diluted  with  an  equal  quantity 
of  milk,  every  four  hours.  Linnaeus  -directs  two 
drachms,  or  half  an  ounce  of  the  dried  stipites,  to  be 
infused  half  an  hour  in  boiling  water,  and  then  to  be 
boiled  ten  minutes ; and  of  this  decoction,  he  gives  two 
teacups  full  morning  and  evening.  For  the  formula  of 
a decoction  of  this  plant,  according  to  the  London 
Pliarm.  See  Dccoclum  dulcamara. 

Solanum  foetidum.  The  thorn-apple  plant.  See 
Datura  stramonium. 

Solanum  lethale.  See  Jltropa  belladonna. 

Solanum  lignosum.  See  Solanum  dulcamara. 

Solanum  lycopkrsioum.  The  love-apple  plant. 
The  fruit  of  this,  called  Tomato  and  love-apple,  is  so 
mnch  esteemed  by  the  Portuguese  and  the  Spaniards, 
that  it  is  an  ingredient  in  almost  all  their  soups  and 
sauces,  and  is  by  them  considered  as  cooling  and  nu- 
tritive. 

Solanum  melongena.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
mad-apple  plant.  Its  oblong  egg-shaped  fruit  is  often 
boiled  in  their  native  places,  in  soups  and  fauces,  the 
same  as  the  love-apple ; is  accounted  very  nutritive, 
and  is  much  sought  after  by  the  votaries  of  Venus. 

Solanum  nigrum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
garden  night-shade,  which  is  highly  deleterious. 

Solanum  sanctum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Palestine  night-shade.  The  fruit  of  which  is  globular, 
and  in  Egypt  much  eaten  by  the  inhabitants. 

Solanum  tuberosum.  Batatas ; Solanum  escu- 
lent um  ; Kippa;  Kelengu  ; Papas  Jlmericanus  ; Pap- 
pus Jlmericanus ; Convolvulus  Indicus.  The  potato 
plant,  a native  of  Peru,  first  brought  into  Europe  by 
Sir  Francis  Drake,  1488,  and  planted  in  London.  See 
Potato. 

Solanum  vesicarium.  The  winter-cherry  plant  is 
so  called  by  Cfaspar  Bauhin.  See  Pliysalis  alkekengi. 

SOLDANELLA.  (Jl  solidando ; from  its  uses  in 
healing  fresh  wounds.)  The  sea  convolvulus.  See 
Convolvulus  soldanella. 

SO'LEN.  'Zu)\r]v.  A tube  or  channel.  A cradle 
for  a broken  limb. 

SOLENA'RIUM.  (Diminutive  of  aw\yv,  a tube.) 

A catheter. 

SO'LEUS.  (From  solea , a sole:  from  its  shape 
being  like  the  sole-fish.)  See  Gastrocnemius  interims. 

SOLIDA'GO.  (From  solido , to  make  firm : so  called 
from  its  uses  in  consolidating  wounds.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Syn 
genesia;  Order,  Polygamia  superfi.ua.  The  herb 
coinfrcy. 

Solidago  virgaurea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
golden  rod.  Virga  aurea;  Herba  dorca ; Conyza  coma 
a urea;  Symphytum;  Petraum  ; Eiichrysum  ; Conso- 
lida  saracenica  and  aurea.  Golden  rod.  The  leaves 
and  flowers  of  this  plant  are  recommended  as  aperients 
and  corroborants  in  urinary  obstructions,  ulcerations 
of  the  kidneys  and  bladder,  and  it  is  said  by  some  to  be 
particu'arly  useful  in  s’opping  internal  haemorrhages. 

SOLIDS.  In  anatomy,  are  the  bones,  ligaments, 
membranes,  muscles,  nerves,  and  vessels. 


SOM 


SOP 


SOLITARIUS.  Solitary.  Applied  to  worms  in  the 
body,  and  to  leaves,  steins,  footstalk,  &c.  when  either 
single  on  a plant,  or  only  one  in  the  same  place. 

SO'LIUM.  (From  solus,  alone : so  called  because  it 
infests  the  body  singly.)  The  tape-worm.  See  Tania. 
Solomon's  seal.  See  Cqnvallaria  polygonatum. 
SOLSEQ.UIUM.  (From  sol,  the  sun,  and  sequor , 
to  follow : so  called  because  it  turns  its  flowers  toward 
the  sun.)  Marigold  or  turnsole.  See  Heliotropium. 
SOLVENT.  See  Menstruum. 

SOLUTION.  Solutio.  An  intimate  commixture 
of  solid  bodies  with  fluids,  into  one  seemingly  homoge- 
neous liquor.  The  dissolving  fluid  is  called  a men- 
struum or  solvent. 

SOLTJTI'VA.  (From  solvo,  to  loosen.)  Laxative 
medicines,  gentle  purgatives. 

SOMMITE.  See  Nepheline. 

SOMNAMBULISM.  See  Oneirodynia. 
SOMNI'FEROUS.  (Somniferus ; from  somnus, 
sleep,  and  fero,  to  bring.)  Having  the  power  of  inducing 
sleep. 

[Somnium.  This  is  a term  introduced  by  Dr. 
Mitchili,  to  designate  the  state  between  sleeping  and 
waking,  in  which  persons  perform  acts  of  which  they 
are  unconscious.  It  includes  all  those  states  of  the 
system  in  which  persons  walk,  talk,  sing,  dream,  &c. 
during  which  they  are  neither  perfectly  asleep  nor 
awake.  This  state  of  Somnium  may  be  divided  into 
Symptomatic,  and  Idiopathic, 

I.  Symptomatic  Somnium. 

1.  Somnium,  from  indigestion  (a  dyspepsia),  when 
from  loo  much  food,  or  too  feeble  a condition  of  the 
stomach,  there  is  a fermentation  with  acidity,  eructa- 
tions, and  pain  or  uneasiness,  followed  by  troublesome 
dreams. 

2.  Somnium  from  the  nightmare  (ab  incubo),  sup- 
posed to  arise  from  some  impediment  to  the  free  circu- 
lation of  the  blood  through  the  heart  and  lungs ; always 
unpleasant  and  sometimes  frightful.  The  memory 
here  is  active,  but  the  will  is  suspended,  and  the  efforts 
to  exert  it  fails.  Persons  are  supposed  to  have  died  in 
fits  of  incubus. 

3.  Somnium  from  effusions  of  water  in  the  chest  (ab 
hydrothorace),  believed  to  proceed  from  anxiety  about 
the  vital  parts,  caused  by  lymph  in  the  pericardium  or 
thorax.  Terrifying  dreams  rousing  the  patientsuddenly 
are  the  common  consequences  of  this  disorder.  This 
and  the  preceding  are  the  Oneirodynia  of  Nosologists. 

4.  Somnium  from  a feverish  state  of  the  body  (a 
febre),  caused  by  an  undue  and  irregular  excitement  of 
the  brain.  This  is  known  by  the  name  of  high  deliri- 
um, or  sometimes  furor. 

5.  Somnium  from  debility  (cum  debilitate),  where 
there  is  not  excitement  enough  to  embody  ideas  in 
steady  trains.  Memory  and  imagination  act  in  a con- 
fused and  irregular  manner.  Low  delirium. 

6.  Somnium  from  fainting  (cum  asphyxia),  where, 
though  there  is  an  exhaustion  of  vital  power,  and  the 
individual  appears  to  be  dead,  there  is  life  enough  in 
the  body  to  prevent  putrefaction.  The  animal  func- 
tions do  not  seem  to  be  so  much  depressed  as  the  vital ; 
for,  on  recovery,  the  individual  relates  what  he  witness- 
ed during  the  trance  in  which  he  lay,  while  in  the 
very  lowest  ebb  of  life. 

7.  Somnium  from  fresh  and  vivid  occurrences  (a  re- 
centibus),  as  when  dreams  can  be  traced  to  some  con- 
versation or  occurrence  of  the  day,  or  to  some  actual 
condition  of  the  body.  Common  dreaming. 

8.  Somnium  from  old  and  forgotten  occurrences  (ab 
obsoletis),  when  long-lost  images  are  renewed  to  the 
memory,  and  dead  friends  are  brought  before  us. 

9.  Somnium  from  an  overloaded  brain  (a  plethora), 
with  symptoms  bordering  on  epilepsy,  apoplexy,  and 
catalepsy.  Sometimes  called  typhomania. 

10.  Somnium  of  a prospective  character  (a  prophe- 
tia),  when  the  dreamer  is  engaged  in  seeing  funeral  pro- 
cessions, and  foretelling  events  by  a sort  of  second 
sight,  as  it  is  called.  This  disease  is  symptomatic  of  a 
peculiar  state  of  body,  running  in  families  like  gout, 
consumption  and  insanity. 

11.  Somnium,  from  vivid  impressions  on  the  inter- 
nal organ  of  sight  (a  visione),  where  visual  images  are 
so  strong,  that  the  dreamers  are  called  Seers,  because 
they  see  so  much,  and  their  sights  are  termed  Visions , 
inasmuch  as  the  eyes  are  so  peculiarly  concerned. 

12.  Somnium  from  the  conditions  of  other  corporeal 
organs  (a  sexu  velpruritu),  causing  dreams. 


13.  Somnium  (a  respiratione)  from  inhaling  nitrous 
oxide  gas,  depriving  the  person  of  consciousness  and 
will,  and  inspiring  delightful  sensations. 

14.  Somnium  (a  toxico)  from  doses  of  opium,  hyos- 
cyamus  datura,  and  other  narcotic  plants,  taken  into 
the  stomach,  disturbing  the  will  and  exciting  strange 
fancies. 

15.  Somnium  from  drunkenness  (ab  ebrietate), caused 
by  drinking  spirituous  liquors,  overcoming  conscious- 
ness and  spontaneity. 

II.  Idiophalhic  Somnium. 

1.  Somnium,  from  abstraction,  where  the  internal 
senses  are  so  engaged  that  there  is  no  knowledge,  or  an 
imperfect  one,  of  the  passing  events,  constituting  what 
is  termed  Reverie ; where  fanciful  trains  of  the  thought 
are  indulged  at  considerable  length. 

2.  Somnium,  with  partial  or  universal  lunacy  (cum 
insanitate),  vitiating  the  mind  with  some  fundamental 
error  on  a particular  subject,  or  disturbing  and  con- 
founding all  the  operations  of  the  animal  mind.  This 
characterizes  some  forms  of  madness  and  melancholy. 

3.  Somnium,  with  talking  (cum  sermone),  where 
the  ideas  of  the  inind  are  uttered  in  audible  words,  as 
in  a wakeful  state  : called  frequently,  Somniloquism,  or 
sleep  talking  on  ordinary  subjects. 

4.  Somnium,  with  walking  (cum  ambulatione), 
where  tire  person  rises  from  bed,  walks  about,  fre- 
quently goes  abroad,  without  the  smallest  recollection 
that  any  volition  had  been  exerted  on  the  occasion : 
the  whole  affair  is  forgotten,  and  not  a trace  left  in  the 
memory  : this  is  called  somnambulism. 

5.  Somnium,  with  invention  (cum  invenlione),  as 
when  unbidden  ideas  rise  in  the  mind  in  a methodical 
series,  and  form  a poetical  sonnet,  different  from  any- 
thing known  before,  and  unattainable  by  the  waking 
powers.  These  are  sometimes  reduced  to  writing  at 
the  time  and  found  afterward,  though  the  act  of  com- 
mitting them  to  paper  is  generally  forgotten.  On  other 
occasions  the  memory  preserves  the  particulars  of  such 
dreams. 

6.  Somnium,  (cum  hallucinatione)  with  mistaken 
impressions  of  sight,  and  sometimes  of  hearing,  so 
strong  as  to  enforce  a conviction  of  their  reality.  Many 
visions,  conversations,  and  mistaken  representations 
gain  currency  in  this  way.  The  patients  being  unwit- 
tingly deceived  themselves,  propagate  with  an  honest 
zeal  their  delusions,  and  labour  to  gain  the  assent  of 
their  friends  and  acquaintances. 

7.  Somnium,  with  singing  (cum  musica),  wherein 
the  person,  though  unable  to  raise  a note  when  awake, 
becomes  capable  in  the  somnial  condition  of  uttering 
sounds  in  most  melodious  accents. 

8.  Somnium,  with  ability  to  pray  and  preach  (cum  re- 
ligione),  or  to  address  the  Supreme  Being  and  human 
auditors  in  an  instructive  and  eloquent  manner,  with- 
out any  recollection  of  having  been  so  employed,  and 
with  utter  incompetency  to  perform  such  exercises  of 
devotion  and  instruction  when  awake. 

See  these  states  of  Somnium,  illustrated  by  cases, 
published  in  New-York,  in  1815,  under  the  titie  of 
“ Devotional  Somnium,”  &c.  containing  the  account 
of  Rachel  Baker,  &c.  Notes  from  Dr.  M.’s  lectures 
on  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

SONCHl'TES.  (From  troy%oj,  the  sow-thistle  : so 
named  from  its  resemblance  to  the  sonclius.)  The 
herb  hawkweed. 

SO'NCHUS.  (Ilapa  to  crcoov,  xetiv ; from  its  whole, 
some  juice.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaran  system.  Class,  Syngcnesia;  Order,  Poly  ga- 
min cequalis.  The  sow-thistle. 

Sonchus  oLERACEus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sow-thistle.  Most  of  the  species  of  sonchus  abound 
with  a milky  juice,  which  is  very  bitter,  and  said  to 
possess  diuretic  virtues.  This  is  sometimes  employed 
with  that  intention.  Boiled  it  may  be  eaten  as  a sub 
stitute  for  cabbage. 

SOOT.  See  Fuligo. 

SO  PHIA.  (From  tro^oj,  wise:  so  named  from  its 
great  virtues  in  stopping  fluxes.)  Flix-weed  or  flux- 
weed.  See  Sisymbrium. 

Sophia  chirurgorum.  See  Sisymbrium  sophia. 
SOPHISTICATION.  A term  employed  in  phar- 
macy. to  signify  the  counterfeiting  or  adulterating  any 
medicine.  This  practice  unhappily  obtains  with  most 
dealers  in  drugs,  &c. ; and  the  cheat  is  carried  on  so 
artificially  by  many  as  to  prevent  a discovery  even  by 
pet  sons  of  the  most  discerning  faculties. 

29? 


SOR 


SPA 


SOPHO'RA.  (A  name  of  most  whimsical  origin. 
Sophera  is,  according  to  Prosper  Alpinus,  the  Egyptian 
denomination  of  a species  of  cassia,  the  Cassia  so- 
phera of  Linnaeus,  nearly  related  to  this  genus.  Lin- 
naeus, spelling  it  sophora,  calls  it  a genus  sophorum , 
or  of  wise  men  ; as  teaching  that  separate  stamens,  in 
the  papilionaceous  family,  if  ever  the  limits  of  that 
family  can  be  determined,  afford  so  decisive  a mark  of 
discrimination,  as  almost  to  exclude  the  plants  furnish- 
ed with  such,  from  the  same  natural  class,  or  order, 
with  those  the  filaments  of  which  are  combined.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Decandna ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Sophora  heptaphylla.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  shrub,  the  root  and  seeds  of  which  are  sometimes 
called  anticholerica  they  are  both  intensely  bitter, 
and  said  to  be  useful  in  cholera,  colic,  and  dysury. 

SOPHRONISTE'RES.  (From  auxppovigu),  to  be- 
come wise : so  called  because  they  do  not  appear  till 
after  puberty.)  The  last  of  the  grinding-teeth. 

SOPIE'NTIA.  (From  sopio,  to  make  sleep.)  Me- 
dicines which  procure  sleep. 

SO'POR.  Profound  sleep. 

SOPORIFEROUS.  (Soporiferus ; from  sopor , 
sleep,  and  fero , to  hear.)  A term  given  to  whatever 
induces  sleep.  See  Anodyne. 

So'ra.  (Arabian.)  The  nettle-rash. 

Sorbastre'lla.  (From  sorbeo , to  suck  up ; be- 
cause it  stops  hemorrhages.)  The  herb  burnet.  See 
Pimpinella  saxifraga. 

SORB  ATE.  A compound  of  sorbic  or  malic  acid, 
with  the  salifiable  basis. 

SORBIC  ACID.  (Acidum  sorbicum ; from  sorbus , 
the  mountain  ash,  from  the  berries  of  which  it  is  ob- 
tained.) “ The  acid  of  apples  called  malic,  may  be 
obtained  most  conveniently  and  in  greatest  purity  from 
the  berries  of  the  mountain  ash,  called  sorbus,  or  pyrus 
aucuparia,  and  hence  the  present  name,  sorbic  acid. 
This  was  supposed  to  be  a new  and  peculiar  acid  by 
Donovan  and  Vauquelin,  who  wrote  good  disserta- 
tions upon  it.  But  it  now  appears  that  the  sorbic  and 
pure  malic  acids  are  identical. 

Bruise  the  ripe  berries  in  a mortar,  and  then  squeeze 
them  in  a linen  bag.  They  yield  nearly  half  their 
weight  of  juice,  of  the  specific  gravity  ofl.077.  This  vis- 
cid juice,  by  remaining  for  about  a fortnight  in  a warm 
temperature,  experiences  the  vinous  fermentation,  and 
would  yield  a portion  of  alkohol.  By  this  change,  it 
has  become  bright,  clear,  and  passes  easily  through  the 
filter,  while  the  sorbic  aci  \ itself  is  not  altered.  Mix 
the  clear  juice  with  filtered  solution  of  acetate  of  lead. 
Separate  the  precipitate  on  a filter,  and  wash  it  with 
cold  water.  A large  quantity,  of  boiling  water  is  then 
to  be  poured  upon  the  filter,  and  allowed  to  drain  into 
glass  jars.  At  the  end  of  some  hours,  the  solution  de- 
posites  crystals  of  great  lustre  and  beauty.  Wash  these 
with  cold  wafer,  dissolve  them  in  boiling  water,  filter, 
and  crystallize.  Collect  the  new  crystals,  and  boil 
them  for  half  an  hour  in  2.3  times  their  weight  of  sul- 
phuric acid,  specific  gravity  1.090,  supplying  water  as 
fast  as  it  evaporates,  and  stirring  the  mixture  diligently 
with  a glass  rod.  The  clear  liquor  is  to  be  decanted 
into  a tall  narrow  glass  jar,  and  while  still  hot,  a stream 
of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  to  be  passed  through  it. 
When  the  lead  has  been  all  thrown  down  in  a sulphu- 
ret,  the  liquor  is  to  be  filtered,  and  then  boiled  in  an 
open  vessel  to  dissipate  the  adhering  sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen. It  is  now  a solution  of  sorbic  acid. 

When  it  is  evaporated  to  the  consistence  of  a syrup, 
it  forms  mammelated  masses  of  a crystalline  structure. 
It  still  contains  a considerable  quantity  of  water,  and 
deliquesces  when  exposed  to  the  air.  Its  solution  is. 
transparent,  colourless,  void  of  smell,  but  powerfully’ 
acid  to  the  taste.  Lime  and  barytes  waters  are  not 
precipitated  by  solution  of  the  sorbic  acid,  although  the 
sorbate  of  lime  is  nearly  insoluble.  One  of  the  most 
characteristic  properties  of  this  acid,  is  the  precipitate 
which  it  gives  with  the  acetate  of  lead,  which  is  at  first 
white  and  flocculent,  but  afterward  assumes  a bril 
liant  crystalline  appearance.  With  potassa,  soda,  and 
ammonia,  it  forms  crystallizable  salts  containing  an 
excess  of  acid.” 

SO'RBUS.  (From  sorbeo,  to  suck  up;  because  its 
fruit  stops  fluxes.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  fcosandria;  Order,  Tri- 
gynia.  The  service-tree. 

Sorbus  aucuparia.  The  wild  service-tree.  The 
1298 


berries  of  this  plant  are  adstringent,  and,  it  is  said, 
have  been  found  serviceable  in  allaying  the  pain  of 
calculous  affections  in  the  kidneys. 

SO'RDES.  When  the  matter  discharged  from  ul- 
cers is  rather  viscid,  glutinous,  of  a brownish-red  co- 
lour, somewhat  resembling  the  grounds  of  coffee,  or 
grumous  blood  mixed  with  water,  it  is  thus  named. 
Sordes,  Saines,  and  Ichor,  are  all  of  them  much  more 
foetid  than  purulent  matter,  and  none  of  them  are  alto- 
gether free  from  acrimony  ; but  that  which  is  generally 
termed  Ichor,  is  by  much  the  most  acrid  of  them,  being 
frequently  so  sharp  and  corrosive  as  to  destroy  large 
quantities  of  the  neighbouring  parts. 

Sore,  bay.  A disease  which  Dr.  Mosely  considers  as 
a true  cancer,  commencing  with  an  ulcer.  It  is  ende- 
mic at  the  Bay  of  Honduras. 

SORE-THROAT.  See  Cynanche. 

SORREL.  See  Rumcx  acetosa. 

Sorrel,  French.  See  Rumex  scutatus. 

Sorrel , round-leaved.  See  Rumex  scutatus. 

Sorrel , wood.  See  Oxalis  acetosella. 

SOUND.  1.  An  instrument  which  surgeons  intro- 
duce through  the  urethra  into  the  bladder,  to  discover 
whether  there  is  a stone  in  this  viscus  or  not. 

2.  See  Hearing. 

SOUR  DOCK.  See  Rutnez  acetosa. 

SOUTHERNWOOD.  See  Artemisia  abrotanum. 

SOW-BREAD.  See  Cyclamen. 

SPA.  A town  in  France,  in  the  department  of  the 
Ourte,  famous  for  its  mineral  water,  which  appears  to 
be  a very  strongly  acidulous  chalybeate,  containing 
more  iron  and  carbonic  acid  than  any  other  mineral 
spring.  What  applies  to  the  use  of  chalybeates  will 
apply  to  this  water. 

SPADIX.  An  elongated  receptacle  or  flower-bearing 
column,  which  emerges,  mostly,  from  a spatbeor  sheath, 
as  it  does  in  Arum  maculatum , Calla  wlhiopica,  and 
palustris  ; but  the  Acorus  calamus  has  a spadix  with- 
out any  sheath. 

The  inflorescence  of  palms,  and  some  other  plants, 
is  a branched  spadix  ; as  the  Chamcerops  humilis , Mu- 
sa, &c. 

Spain,  pellitory  of.  See  Anthcmis  pyrethrum. 

Spanish  fly.  See  Cantharis. 

Spanish  liquorice.  See  Glycyrrhiza. 

Spar,fluor.  See  Fluor. 

Spar,  ponderous.  See  Heavy-spar,  and  Barytes. 

Spar,  tabular.  See  Tabular  spar. 

SPARGANO'SIS.  (From  oirapyaw,  to  swell.)  A 
milk  abscess. 

Sparry  anhydrite.  A sulphate  of  lime.  See  Anhy- 
drite. 

SPARRY  IRON.  A carbonate  of  iron,  of  a pale 
yellowish  gray  colour,  found  in  limestoue  in  Eng- 
land, Scotland,  and  Ireland,  and  in  large  quantities  in 
Hessia. 

SPARSUS.  Dispersed,  irregularly  scattered.  Fre- 
quently used  in  medicine,  anatomy,  and  botany,  to 
eruptions,  glands,  leaves,  flower-stalks. 

SPA'RTIUM.  {’LnapZiov  of  Dioscorides  : so  called 
from  citap']*!,  a rope  ; because  of  the  use  of  the  long, 
slender,  tough  branches,  or  bark,  in  making  cordage.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  theLinna:an  system. 
Class,  Diadelphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

Spartium  scoparium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  broom.  Genista.  The  tops  and  leaves  of 
this  indigenous  plant,  Spartium— foliis  tematis  solita- 
riisque , ramis  inermibus  angulatis , of  Linneeus,  are 
the  parts  that  are  employed  medicinally  ; they  have  a 
bitter  taste,  and  are  recommended  for  their  purgative 
and  diuretic  qualities,  in  hydropic  cases. 

SPASM1  Spasmodic  diseases.  The  third  order  of 
the  Class  Neuroses,  of  Cullen ; characterized  by  a 
morbid  contraction  or  motion  of  muscular  fibres. 

SPASMODIC.  Spasmodicus.  Belonging  to  a spasm, 
or  convulsion. 

Spasmodic  colic.  See  Colica. 

SPASMOLOGY.  ( Spasmologia  ; from  trtraapos,  a 
spasm,  and  Xoyos,  a discourse.)  A treatise  on  convul- 
sions. 

SPASMUS.  ( Spasmus  ; from  anaio,  to  draw.)  A 
cramp,  spasm,  or  convulsion.  An  involuntary  con- 
traction of  the  muscular  fibres,  or  that  state  of  the  con- 
traction of  muscles  which  is  not  spontaneously  dis- 
posed to  alternate  with  relaxation,  is  properly  termed 
spasm.  When  the  contractions  alternate  with  relax- 
ation, and  are  frequently  and  preternaturally  repeated, 


SPE 


. SPH 


they  are  called  convulsions.  Spasms  are  distinguished 
by  authors  into  clonic  and  tonic  spasms.  In  clonic 
spasms,  which  are  the  true  convulsions,  the  contrac 
tions  and  relaxations  are  alternate,  as  in  epilepsy  ; but 
in  tonic  spasms  the  member  remains  rigid,  as  in 
locked  jaw.  See  Convulsion , Tonic  spasm,  and  Te- 
tanus. 

Spasmus  cynicus.  Sardonic  laugh.  A convulsive 
affection  of  the  muscles  of  the  face  and  lips  on  both 
sides,  which  involuntarily  forces  the  muscles  of  those 
parts  into  a species  of  grinning  distortion.  If  one  side 
only  be  affected,  the  disorder  is  nominated  tortura  oris. 
When  the  masseter,  buccinator,  temporal,  nasal,  and 
labial  muscles,  are  involuntarily  excited  to  action,  or 
contorted  by  contraction  or  relaxation,  they  form  a 
species  of  malignant  sneer.  It  sometimes  arises  from 
eating  hemlock,  or  other  acrid  poisons,  or  succeeds  to 
an  apoplectic  stroke. 

SPATHA.  (From  oiraQri,  a slice,  or  ladle.)  A bota- 
nical term.  A sheath,  or  covering  of  an  immature 
flower  which  bursts  longitudinally,  and  is  more  or  less 
remote  from  the  flower.  From  the  number  of  mem- 
branes, which  are  called  valves,  and  of  the  flowers, 
and  their  duration,  it  is  named, 

1.  Spatha  univalvis,  having  only  one  membranous 
leaf;  as  in  Arum  maculutum,  and  Crocus  sativus. 

2.  Bivalvis,  in  Stratiates  alioides. 

3.  Dimidiata,  or  lacera,  there  being  only  one  valve, 
and  that  covering  the  flower  only  partially ; as  in  Izia 
uniflora,  and  africana. 

4.  Vaga,  the  common  sheath  enclosing  several  par- 
tial ones  ; as  in  Iris  germanica,  and  helonica. 

5.  Uniflora,  containing  only  one  flower ; as  the  Nar- 
cissus poeticus,  Pseudo-narcissus,  and  Amaryllis 
formosissima. 

6.  Biflora,  with  two ; as  in  Alpina  racemosa,  and 
Morwa  vegeta. 

7.  Mult  flora  ; as  in  Allium , Narcissus  jonquilla , 
and  Pancreatium  carabeum. 

8.  Spatha  persistens , remaining  with  the  fruit;  as 
in  Heliconia  bibai. 

9.  Marcescens,  withering  before  or  soon  after  the 
flowering ; as  in  Allia  and  Leucojum  vernum. 

SPATHOME'LE.  (From  oiradt],  a sword,  and 
priKy,  a probe.)  An  edged  probe. 

SPA'TULA.  (Diminutive  of  spatha,  a broad  in- 
strument.) An  instrument  for  spreading  salve.  Also 
a name  of  the  herb  spurgewort,  from  its  broad  leaves. 

SPATULATUS.  Spatulate : applied  to  leaves,  Sec. 
of  a roundish  figure,  tapering  into  an  oblong  base ; as 
in  Silene  otiles. 

SPEARMINT.  See  Mentha  viridis. 

Spearwort,  water.  See  Ranunculus  flammula. 

SPECIFIC.  Specificus.  A remedy  that  has  an  in- 
fallible efficacy  in  the  cure  of  disorders.  The  exist- 
ence of  such  remedies  is  doubted. 

Specific  gravity.  See  Gravity , specific. 

SPECI'LLUM.  (From  specio , to  examine.)  A 
probe. 

SPE'CULUM.  (From  specio,  to  view.)  An  instru- 
ment for  opening  or  obtaining  a view  of  parts  within 
each  other ; as  Speculum  oculi , Speculum  oris , Specu- 
lum ani,  Sec. 

Speculum  ani.  An  instrument  for  distending  the 
anus,  while  an  operation  is  performed  upon  the  parts 
within. 

Speculum  matricis.  An  instrument  to  assist  in 
any  manual  operation  belonging  to  the  womb. 

Speculum  oculi.  An  instrument  used  by  oculists 
to  keep  the  eyelids  open  and  the  eye  fixed. 

Speculum  oris.  An  instrument  to  force  open  the 
mouth. 

Speculum  veneris.  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

SPEECH.  See  Voice. 

SPEEDWELL.  See  Veronica. 

Speedwell , female.  See  Antirrhinum  elatine. 

Speedwell,  mountain.  See  Veronica. 

SPERMA-CETI.  (From  oireppa,  seed,  and  cete,  or 
cetus,  the  whale/)  See  Physcter  macrocephalns. 

SPERM  A'TIC.  (Spermaticus ; from  aneppa,  seed.) 
Belonging  to  the  testicle  and  ovary ; as  the  sperma 
tic  artery,  chord,  and  veins. 

SPERMATOCE'LE.  (From  oiztppa,  seed,  and 
107X17,  a tumour.)  Epididymis  distensa.  A swelling 
of  the  testicle  or  epididymis  from  an  accumulation  of 
semen.  It  is  known  by  a swelling  of  those  organs, 
pain  extending  to  the  loins  without  inflammation. 


Spermatopoe'tica.  (From  aneppa,  and  iroicu),  to 
make.)  Medicines  which  increase  the  generation  of 

seed. 

SPERMORRHCE'A.  (From  oireppa,  semen,  and 
pew,  fluo.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s 
Nosology.  Class,  Genetica;  Order,  Cenotica.  Semi 
nal  flux.  It  has  two  species,  viz.  Spermorrhcea  ento 
nica , and  atonica. 

SPHACELI'SMUS.  (From  o<paice\igu>,  to  gan- 
grene.) 1.  A gangrene. 

2.  A phrenitis. 

SPHA'CELUS.  (From  otyauo),  to  destroy.)  A 
mortification  of  any  part.  See  Gangrene. 

SPH^E'NOIDES.  See  Sphenoides. 

SPHASRI'TIS.  (From  ocpaipa , a globe : so  called 
from  its  round  head.)  Sphcerocephalia  elatior.  Sphce- 
rocephalus.  The  globe-thistle. 

SPH^EROCETHALUS.  See  Sphceritis. 

SPHASRO'MA.  (From  aepaipa,  a globe.)  A fleshy, 
globular  protuberance. 

SPILERULITE.  A brown  and  gray-coloured  mi- 
neral, found  in  imbedded  roundish  balls  and  grains, 
in  pearlstone  and  pitchstone  porphyries,  near  Schem- 
nitz. 

SPHE'NO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  be- 
long to  the  sphenoid  bone. 

Spheno-maxillaris.  An  artery,  and  a fissure  of 
the  orbit  of  the  eye,  is  so  called. 

Spheno-salpingo-staphylinus.  See  Circumflexus. 

Spheno.-stafhylinus.  See  Levator  palati. 

SPHENOIDAL.  Sphenoidalis.  Belonging  to  the 
sphenoid  bone. 

Sphenoidal  suture.  Sutura  sphenoidalis.  The 
sphenoidal  and  ethmoidal  sutures  are-  those  which 
surround  the  many  irregular  processes  of  these  two 
bones,  and  join  them  to  each  other  and  to  the  rest. 

SPHENOI'DES  OS.  (From  o^yv,  a wedge,  and 
eiSos,  a likeness;  because  it  is  fixed  in  the  cranium 
like  a wedge.)  Os  cuneiforme  ; Os  multiforme;  Os 
azygos;  Papillare  os  ; Basilare  os  ; Os  polymorphos. 
Pterygoid  bone.  The  os  sphenoides,  or  cuneiforme,  as 
it  is  called  from  its  wedge-like  situation  amidst  the 
other  bones  of  the  head,  is  of  a more  irregular  figure 
than  any  other  bone.  It  has  been  compared  to  a bat 
with  its  wings  extended.  This  resemblance  is  but 
faint,  but  it  would  be  difficult  perhaps  to  find  any  thing 
it  resembles  more. 

We  distinguish,  in  this  bone,  its  body  or  middle  part, 
and  its  wings  or  sides,  which  are  much  more  extensive 
than  its  body. 

Each  of  its  wings  or  lateral  processes  is  divided  into 
two  parts.  Of  these,  the  uppermost  and  most  consi 
derable  portion,  helping  to  form  the  deepest  part  of  the 
temporal  fossa  on  each  side,  is  called  the  temporal  pro- 
cess. The  other  portion  makes  a part  of  the  orbit,  and 
is  therefore  named  the  orbitar  process.  The  back 
part  of  each  wing,  from  its  running  out  sharp  to  meet 
the  os  petrosum,  has  been  called  the  spinous  process  ; 
and  the  two  processes,  which  stand  out  almost  perpen- 
dicular to  the  basis  of  the  skull,  have  been  named  pte- 
rygoid or  aliform  processes,  though  they  may  be  said 
rather  to  resemble  the  legs  than  the  wings  of  the  bat. 
Each  of  these  processes  has  two  plates  and  a middle 
fossa  facing  backwards;  of  these  plates,  the  externa! 
one  is  the  broadest,  and  the  internal  one  the  longest. 
The  lower  end  of  the  internal  plate  forms  a kind  of 
hook,  over  which  passes  the  round  tendon  of  the  mus- 
culus  circumflexus  palati.  Besides  these,  we  observe 
a sharp  middle  ridge,  which  stands  out  from  the  mid- 
dle of  the  bone.  The  forepart  of  it,  where  it  joins  the 
nasal  lamella  of  the  ethmoidal  bone,  is  thin  and 
straight ; the  lower  part  of  it  is  thicker,  and  is  re- 
ceived into  the  vomer. 

The  cavities,  observable  on  the  external  surface  of 
the  bone,  are  where  it  helps  to  form  the  temporal, 
nasal,  and  orbitar  fossae. 

It  has  likewise  two  fossae  in  its  pterygoid  processes. 
Behind  the  edge,  which  separates  these  two  fossae,  we 
observe  a small  groove,  made  by  a branch  of  the  supe- 
rior maxillary  nerve,  in  its  passage  to  the  temporal 
muscle.  Besides  these,  it  has  other  depressions,  which 
serve  chiefly  for  the  origin  of  the  muscles. 

Its  foramina  are  four  on  each  side.  The  three  first 
serve  for  the  passage  of  the  optic,  superior  maxillary, 
and  inferior  maxillary  nerves ; the  fourth  transmits 
the  largest  artery  of  the  dura  mater.  On  each  side  we 
observe  a considerable  fissure,  which,  from  its  eitua- 

299 


SP1 


SPI 


lion,  may  be  called  the  superior  orbitar  fissure. 
Through  it  pass  the  third  and  fourth  pair  of  nerves,  a 
branch  of  the  fifth,  and  likewise  the  sixth  pair. 
Lastly,  at  the  basis  of  each  pterygoid  process,  we  ob- 
serve a foramen  which  is  named  pterygoidean,  and 
sometimes  Vidian , from  Vidius,  who  first  described  it. 
Through  it  passes  a branch  of  the  external  carotid,  to 
be  distributed  to  the  nose. 

The  os  sphenoides,  on  its  internal  surface,  affords 
three  fossae.  Two  of  these  are  considerable  ones; 
they  are  formed  by  the  lateral  processes,  and  make 
part  of  the  lesser  fossa;  of  the  basis  of  the  skull.  The 
third,  which  is  smaller,  is  on  the  lop  of  the  body  of 
the  bone,  and  is  called  sella  turcica , from  its  lesem- 
blance  to  a Turkish  saddle.  In  this  the  pituitary  gland 
is  placed.  At  each  of  its  four  angles  is  a process. 
They  are  called  the  clinoid  processes,  and  are  distin- 
guished by  their  situation  into  anterior  and  posterior 
processes.  The  two  latter  are  frequently  united  into  one. 

Within  the  substance  of  the  os  sphenoides,  imme- 
diately under  the  sella  turcica,  we  find  two  cavities, 
separated  by  a thin  bony  lamella.  These  are  the  sphe- 
noidal sinuses.  They  are  lined  with  the  pituitary 
membrane,  and,  like  the  frontal  sinuses,  separate  a 
mucus  which  passes  into  the  nostrils.  In  some  sub- 
jects, there  is  only  one  cavity ; in  others,  though  more 
rarely,  we  find  three. 

In  infants,  the  os  sphenoides  is  composed  of  three 
pieces,  one  of  which  forms  the  body  of  the  bone  and 
its  pterygoid  processes,  and  the  other  two  its  lateral 
processes.  The  clinoid  processes  may  even  then  be 
perceived  in  a cartilaginous  state,  though  some  writers 
have  asserted  the  contrary  ; but  we  observe  no  appear- 
ance of  any  sinus. 

This  bone  is  connected  with  all  the  bones  of  the 
cranium,  and  likewise  with  the  ossa  maxillaria,ossa 
malarum,  ossa  palati,  and  vomer.  Its  uses  may  be 
collected  from  the  description  we  have  given  of  it. 

SPHI'NCTER.  (From  acpiy'Jo),  to  shut  up.)  The 
name  of  sevoial  muscles,  the  office  of  which  is  to  shut 
or  close  the  aperture  around  which  they  are  placed. 

Sphincter  ani.  Sphincter  externus,  of  Albinus  and 
Douglas.  Sphincter  cutaneus , of  Winslow  ; and  coc- 
cigio-cutani-spliincter , of  Dumas.  A single  muscle 
of  the  anus,  which  shuts  the  passage  through  the  anus 
into  the  rectum,  and  pulls  down  the  bulb  of  the  ure- 
thra, by  which  it  assists  in  ejecting  the  urine  and 
semen.  It  arises  from  the  skin  and  fat  that  surrounds 
the  verge  of  the  anus  on  both  sides,  nearly  as  far  as  the 
tuberosity  of  the  ischium;  the  fibres  are  gradually  col- 
lected into  an  oval  form,  and  surround  the  extremity 
of  the  rectum.  It  is  inserted  by  a narrow  point  into 
the  perineum,  acceleratores  urinse,  and  transversi  pe- 
rinei ; and  behind  into  the  extremity  of  the  os  coccygis, 
by  an  acute  termination. 

Sphincter  ani  cutaneus.  See  Sphincter  am. 

Sphincter  ani  externus.  See  Sphincter  ani. 

Sphincter  ani  internus.  Albinus  and  Douglas 
call  the  circular  fibres  of  the  muscular  coat  of  the 
rectum,  which  surround  its  extremity,  by  this  name. 

Sphincter  cutaneus.  See  Sphincter  ani. 

Sphincter  externus.  See  Sphincter  ani. 

Sphincter  gulje.  The  muscle  which  contracts 
.ihe  top  of  the  throat. 

Sphincter  labiorum.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

Sphincter  oris.  See  Orbicularis  oris. 

Sphincter  vagin.e.  Constrictor  cunni , of  Albinus. 
Second  muscle  of  the  clitoris , of  Douglas ; and  anulo- 
syndesmo-clitoridien , of  Dumas.  This  muscle  arises 
from  the  sphincter  ani  and  from  the  posterior  side  of 
the  vagina,  near  the  perineum;  from  thence  it  runs  up 
the  side  of  the  vagina  near  its  external  orifice,  opposite 
to  the  nymph®,  covers  the  corpus  cavernosum,  and  is 
inserted  into  the  crus  and  body,  or  union  of  the  crura 
clitoridis.  Its  use  is  to  contract  the  mouth  of  the  vagina. 

Spiiingo'nta.  (From  a(f>iy']o),  to  bind.)  Astringent 
medicines. 

SPHONDY'LIUM.  (From  oxovSvXos,  vertebra ; 
named  from  the  shape  of  its  root,  or  probably  because 
it  was  used  against  the  bite  of  a serpent,  called  cnorSv- 
Xtf.)  This  is  supposed  to  be  the  branckursine.  See 
Acanthus  mollis. 

SPHR  AGIDE.  .A  species  of  Lemnian  earth. 

SPHRONGIDIITM.  See  Columnula. 

SPICA.  A spike.  I.  A species  of  inflorescence, 
consisting  of  one  common  stalk  bearing  numerous  flow- 
ers, all  ranged  along  it  without  any,  or  having  very 
300 


j small  partial  stalks,  as  the  flower-stalk  of  the  greater 
plantain.  From  its  figure,  the  situation  of  the  flowers, 
and  its  vesture,  it  is  called, 

1.  Cylindrica ; as  in  Pluntago  media , and  albicans . 

2.  Ovata , in  Sanguisorba  officinalis. 

3.  Articulatu , with  joints;  as  in  Salicornea  herba- 
cea , and  Polygonum  articulatum. 

4.  Conjugata , two  spikes  going  from  the  summit  of 
the  peduncle  ; as  in  Heliotropium  europeeum  and  par- 
viflorum. 

5.  Ramosa , divided  into  branches;  as  in  Chenopo - 
di-uni  bonus  henricus , and  Osmunda. 

6.  Imbricala ; as  in  Salvia  hispanica. 

7.  Secunda , the  flowers  leaning  all  to  one  side;  as  in 
Anchusa  officinalis. 

8.  Jnterrupta , in  separate  groupes ; as  in  Betonica 
officinalis , and  Gomphvena  interrupta. 

9.  Disticlia , two  series  of  spikes;  as  in  Gladiolus 
alopecuroides. 

10.  Terminalis;  as  in  Lavendula. 

11.  Axillarcs ; as  in  Justitia  spinosa. 

12.  Foliosa,  leaflets  between  the  flowers ; as  in  Agri- 
monia  eupatoria. 

13.  Comosa,  having  a leafy  bundle  at  the  apex ; as  in 
Lavendula  staichas,  and  Bromelia  ananas. 

14.  Ciliata,  hairs  between  the  flowers ; as  in  Nardus 

oiliaris. 

II.  An  ear  of  corn. 

III.  A bandage  resembling  an  ear  of  corn. 

Spica  brevis.  The  Alopecuns  pratensis. 

Spica  celtica.  See  Valeriana  celtica. 

Spica  fjemina.  Common  lavender. 

Spica  indica.  See  Nardus  indica. 

Spica  inguinalis.  A bandage  for  ruptures  in  the 
groin. 

Spica  inguinalis  duplex.  Double  bandage  for 
ruptures. 

SncA  mas.  Broad-leaved  ’avender. 

Spica  nardi.  See  Nardus  indica. 

Spica  simplex.  A common  roller  or  bandage. 

SPICULA.  Aspikelet.  A term  applied  exclusively 
to  grasses  that  have  many  florets  on  one  calyx,  such 
florets  ranged  on  a little  stalk,  constituting  the  spikelet, 
which  is  therefore  a part  of  the  flower  itself,  and  not 
of  the  efflorescence ; as  in  Briia  minor , and  Poa  aqua- 
tica.  Locusta  means  the  same  as  spicula. 

SPIGELIA.  (So  called  by  Linnams  in  commemo- 
ration of  an  old  botanist,  Adrian  Spigelius,  who  wrote 
Jsagoge  in  rem  herbarium , in  1606.)  1.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsan  system.  Class,  Pen- 
tan  dr  i a ; Order,  jMonogynia. 

2.  The  name  in  some  pharmacopoeias  for  the  Spi- 
gclia  marilandica. 

Spioelia  anthelmia.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
spigelia  of  some  pharmacopoeias.  It  is  directed  as  an 
anthelmintic;  its  virtues  are  very  similar  to  those  of 
the  Indian  pink.  See  Spige  liamarilandica. 

Spigelia  lonicera.  See  Spigelia  marilandica. 

Spigelia  marilandica.  Spigelia  lonicera.  Pe- 
rennial worm-grass,  or  Indian  pink.  Spigelia — caule 
tetragono , foliis  omnibus , oppositis , of  Linnaeus.  Tire 
whole  of  this  plant,  but  most  commonly  the  root,  is  em 
ployed  as  an  anthelmintic  by  the  Indians,  and  inhabit 
ants  of  America.  Dr.  Hope  has  written  in  favour  of 
this  plant,  in  continued  and  remitting  low  worm  fevers. 
Besides  its  property  of  destroying  the  worms  in  the 
prim®  vise,  it  acts  as  a purgative. 

Spigelion  lobe.  See  Liver. 

SPIGELIUS,  Adrian,  was  born  at  Brussels,  in  1578. 
He  studied  at  Louvain,  and  afrerward  at  Padua, 
where  he  took  his  degree.  He  became  thoroughly 
skilled  in  every  branch  of  his  profession,  particularly 
in  anatomy  and  surgery  and  after  travelling  some 
time  to  the  different  schools  in  Germany,  he  settled  in 
Moravia,  where  lie  was  soon  appointed  nhysician  to 
the  States  of  the  Province.  In  1G16  he  was  invited  to 
occupy  the  principal  professorship  in  anatomy  and  sur- 
gery at  Padua,  where  he  acquitted  himself  with  so 
much  success,  that  he  was  created  a knight  of  St. 
Mark,  and  presented  with  a collar  of  gold.  He  died  in 
1625.  His  writings  evince  him  to  have  possessed  very 
extensive  medical  knowledge.  The  first,  which  he 
published,  contains  some  interesting  information  con- 
cerning the  virtues  of  plants,  respecting  which  he  air- 
pears  to  have  learned  much  from  the  Italian  peasantry 
He  wrote  also  concerning  some  diseases  and  other  mat- 
ters. But  the  most  valuable  of  his  works  arc  those 


SPI 


SP1 


composed  on  anatomical  subjects,  published  after  his 
death,  by  his  son-in-law,  Crenia. 

SPIGNEL.  See  JEthusameum. 

SPIKELET.  See  Spicula. 

SPIKENARD.  See  Nardus  indica. 

SPILA'NTHUS.  (From  oniXos,  a spot,  and  avOos, 
a flower;  because  of  its  dotted  or  speckled  flowers.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Syngenesia ; 
Order,  Polygamia  aqualis. 

Spilanthus  acmklla.  Achmella.  Achamella.  The 
systematic  name  of  the  balm-leaved  spilanthus,  which 
possesses  a glutinous  bitter  taste,  and  a fragrant  smell. 
The  herb  and  seed  are  said  to  be  diuretic  and  emme- 
nagogue,  and  useful  in  dropsies,  jaundice,  fluor  albus, 
and  calculous  complaints,  given  in  infusion. 

SPI'NA.  (Quasi  spiculina , diminutive  of  spica .) 
A thorn. 

A.  The  back-bone:  so  called  from  the  thorn-like 
processes  of  the  vertebra.  See  Vertebra , and  Spine. 

B.  The  shin-bone. 

C.  A thorn  of  a plant.  A prickly  armature  of  plants, 
lot  easily  removed  by  the  finger,  and  proceeding  from 
•the  woody  part  of  the  plant.  It  is  either, 

1.  Culine;  as  in  Prunus  spinosa. 

2.  Terminal , at  the  end  of  a branch  ; as  in  Rhamnus 
catharticus. 

3.  Foliar , ou  the  surface  of  the  leaf ; as  in  Carduus 
marianus. 

4.  Marginal , on  the  margin  of  the  leaf ; as  in  Ilex 
aquifoliuin. 

5.  Axillary , going  from  the  axilla  of  the  leaf;  as  in 
Gleditschia  triacanthos. 

6.  Calycine , on  the  calyx ; as  in  Carduus  marianus. 

7.  Pericarpial,  on  the  pod  ; asin  Datura  stramonium. 

8.  Stipular,  on  the  stipule;  as  in  Mimosa  nilotica, 
and  horrida. 

9.  Straight ; as  in  Mimosa  nigra. 

10.  Recurve ; as  in  Costus  nobilis. 

11.  Decussate;  asin  Genista  lucitanica. 

12.  Setaceous ; as  in  Cactus  opuntia. 

13.  Subulate;  as  in  Cactus  tuna. 

14.  Inerm,  covered  with  soft  and  not  prickly  spines, 
ilso  called  muricate ; as  in  Convolvulus  muricatus,  and 
Mimosa  muricata. 

15.  Simple,  when  not  divided ; as  Genista  anglica. 

16.  Germinal;  as  in  Limonia  trifoliata. 

17.  Temate;  as  in  Zantliium  spinosum. 

18.  Ramose;  as  in  Gleditschia  horrida. 

Spina  acida.  See  Berberis. 

Spina  acuta.  The  hawthorn. 

Spina  jegyptiaca.  The  Egyptian  thorn  or  sloe-tree. 
See  Acacia  vera. 

Spina  alba.  The  white-thorn  tree. 

Spina  arabica.  The  chardon,  or  Arabian  thistle. 

Spina  bifida.  Hydrops  medulla  spinalis ; Hydro- 
cele spinalis ; Hydrorachytis  spinosa.  A tumour  upon 
the  spine  of  new-born  children,  immediately  about  the 
lower  vertebra  of  the  loins,  and  upper  parts  of  the 
sacrum  ; at  first,  it  is  of  a dark  blue  colour  ; but  in  pro- 
portion as  it  increases  in  size,  approaches  nearer  and 
nearer  to  the  colour  of  the  skin,  becoming  perfectly 
diaphanous. 

From  the  surface  of  this  tumour  a pellucid  watery 
fluid  sometimes  exudes,  and  this  circumstance  has  been 
noticed  by  different  authors.  It  is  always  attended 
with  a weakness,  or  more  properly  speaking,  a para- 
lysis of  the  lower  extremities  The  opening  of  it 
rashly  has  proved  quickly  fatal  to  the  child.  Tulpius, 
therefore,  strongly  dissuades  us  from  attempting  this 
operation.  Acrel  mentions  a case  where  a nurse  rashly 
opened  a tumour,  which,  as  he  described  it,  was  a 
blood  bag  on  the  back  of  the  child  at  the  time  of  its 
birth,  in  bigness  equal  to  a hen’s  egg,  in  two  hours  after 
which,  the  child  died.  From  the  dissection  it  ap- 
peared, that  the  bladder  lay  in  the  middle  of  the  os 
sacrum,  and  consisted  of  a coat,  and  some  strong  mem- 
brane, which  proceeded  from  a long  fissure  of  the 
bones.  The  extremity  of  the  spinal  marrow  lay  bare, 
and  the  spinal  duct,  in  the  os  sacrum,  was  uncommon- 
ly wide,  and  distended  by  the  pressure  of  the  waters. 
Upon  tracing  it  to  the  head,  the  brain  was  found  nearly 
in  its  natural  state,  but  the  ventricles  contained  so 
much  water,  that  the  infundibulum  was  quite  dis- 
tended with  it,  and  the  passage  between  the  third  and 
fourth  ventricle  was  greatly  enlarged. 

He  likewise  takes  notice  of  another  case,  where  a 
child  lived  about  eight  years  labouring  under  this  com- 


plaint, during  which  time  it  seemed  to  enjoy  tolerable 
health,  though  pale.  Nothing  seemed  amiss  in  him, 
but  such  a degree  of  debility  as  rendered  him  incapable 
to  stand  on  his  legs. 

The  tumour,  as  in  the  former  case,  was  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  os  sacrum,  of  the  bigness  of  a man’s  fist, 
with  little  discolouring:  and  upon  pressing  it  became 
less.  When  opened  it  was  found  full  of  water,  and  the 
coats  were  the  same  as  in  the  former,  but  the  separa- 
tion of  the  bones  was  very  considerable.  The  spinal 
marrow,  under  the  tumour,  was  as  small  as  a pack- 
thread, and  rigid  ; but  there  were  no  morbid  appear- 
ances in  the  brain. 

Spina  burghi  monspeliensis.  Evergreen  privet. 

Spina  cervina.  (So  called  from  its  thorns  resem- 
bling those  of  the  stag.)  See  Rhamnus  catharticus. 

Spina  hirci.  The  goat’s-thorn  of  France,  yielding 
gum-tragacanth. 

Spina  infectoria.  See  Rhamnus  catharticus. 

Spina  purgatrix.  The  purging  thorn. 

Spina  solstitialis.  The  calcitrapa  officinalis. 
Barnaby’s  thistle. 

Spina  ventosa.  (The  term  of  spina  seems  to  have 
been  applied  by  the  Arabians  to  this  disorder,  because 
it  occasions  a prickling  in  the  flesh  like  the  puncture  of 
thorns ; and  the  epithet  ventosa  is  added,  because, 
upon  touching  the  tumour,  it  seems  to  be  filled  with 
wind,  though  this  is  not  the  cause  of  the  distention.) 
Spina  vevtositas  ; Teredo  ; Fungus  articuli  ; Ar- 
throcace  : sideratio  ossis  ; Cancer  ossis  ; Gangrana 
ossis , and  some  Fienc.h  authors  term  it  exostosis. 
When  children  are  the  subjects  of  this  disease,  Seve- 
rinus calls  it  Padarthrocacc.  A tumour  arising  from 
an  internal  caries  of  a bone.  It  most  frequently  occurs 
in  the  carpus  and  tarsus,  and  is  known  by  a continual 
pain  in  the  bone,  and  a red  swelling  of  the  skin?  which 
has  a spongy  feel. 

Spina'chia.  See  Spinacia. 

SPINA'CIA.  (From  lonavia,  Spain,  whence  it  ori- 
ginally came ; or  from  its  spinous  seed.)  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Diacia  ; Order,  Pentandria. 
Spinage 

Spinacia  oleracea.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Spinachia.  Spinach.  Spinage.  This  plant  is  some- 
times directed  for  medicinal  purposes  in  the  cure  of 
phthisical  complaints ; made  into  a poultice,  by  boiling 
the  leaves  and  adding  some  oil,  it  forms  an  excellent 
emollient.  As  an  article  of  food  it  may  be  considered 
as  similar  to  cabbage  and  other  oleraceous  plants.  See 
Brassica  capitate. 

Spin.®  crates.  The  spine  of  the  back. 

Spin,®  ventositas.  A caries,  or  decay  of  a bone. 
See  Spina  ventosa. 

SPINAL.  Spinalis.  Belonging  to  the  spine  of  the 
back. 

Spinal-marrow.  See  Medulla  spinalis. 

SPINA'LIS.  See  Spinal. 

Spinalis  cervicis.  This  muscle,  which  is  situated 
close  to  the  vertebrae  at  the  posterior  part  of  the  neck 
and  upper  part  of  the  back,  arises,  by  distinct  tendons^ 
from  the  transverse  processes  of  the  five  or  six  upper- 
most vertebrae  of  the  back,  and  ascending  obliquely 
under  the  complexus,  is  inserted,  by  small  tendons,  into 
the  spinous  processes  of  the  sixth,  fifth,  fourth,  third, 
and  second  vertebra  of  the  neck.  Its  use  is  to  extend 
the  neck  obliquely  backwards. 

Spinalis  colli.  See  Semi-spinalis  colli. 

Spinalis  dorsi.  Transversalis  dorsi,  of  Winslow  j 
and  intcr-ipineux , of  Dumas.  This  is  the  name  given 
by  Albinus  to  a tendinous  and  fleshy  mass,  which  is 
situated  along  the  spinous  processes  of  the  back  and  the 
inner  side  of  the  longissimus  dorsi. 

It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  spinous  pro- 
cesses of  the  uppermost  vertebrae  of  the  loins,  and  the 
lowermost  ones  of  the  back,  and  is  inserted  into  the 
spinous  processes  of  the  nine  uppermost  vertebrae  of  the 
back. 

Its  use  is  to  extend  the  vertebrae.,  and  to  assist  in 
raising  the  spine. 

Spinai.es  lumborum.  Muscles  of  the.  oins. 

SPINE.  (Spina ; from  spina , thorn  : so  called  from 
the  spine-like  processes  of  the  vertebra.)  1.  Spina 
dorsi;  Columna  spinalis;  Column  a verlebralis.  A 
bony  column  or  pillar  extending  in  the  posterior  part  of 
the  trunk  from  the  great  occipital  foramen  to  the  sa 
crum.  It  is  composed  of  twenty-four  bones  called 
vertebra.  See  Vertebra. 

5 M 


SPI 


2.  An  armature  of  plants.  See  Spina. 

SPINEL.  A sub-species  of  octohedral  corundum,  of 
a red  colour,  and  equal  value  with  a diamond.  It 
comes  from  Pegu  and  Ceylon. 

SPINELLANE.  A plumb,  blue-coloured  crystal- 
lized mineral,  found  on  the  shores  of  the  lake  of  Laach. 

SPINESCENS.  Spinescent.  Becoming  thorny,  ap- 
plied to  the  leaf-stalk,  when  it  hardens  into  a thorn, 
and  the  leaf  falls,  as  is  the  case  in  Rhamnus  catharti- 
cus,  and  Robinia  spinosa,  and  to  the  slipulae  of  the  Ro- 
binia  pseudacacia,  which  also  become  thorns. 

Spi'nosa.  See  Spina  bifidi. 

Spino'sum  syriacum.  The  Syrian  broom. 

SPINTHERE.  A greenish  gray-coloured  mineral, 
believed  to  be  a variety  of  prismatic  titanium  ore. 

SPIRAL' A.  (From  Spira , a pillar : so  named  from 
its  spiral  stalk.)  Meadow-sweet.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Icosan- 
dria ; Order,  Pentagynia. 

Spiraea  africana.  African  meadow-sweet. 

Si»ir®a  filipendula.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
officinal  dropwort.  Filipendula  ; Saxifraga  rubra. 
Dropwort.  The  root  of  this  plant,  Spirtea—foliis  pen- 
natis , foliolis  uniformibus  serratis  ; caule  herbaceo  ; 
floribus  corymbosis,  of  Linnteus,  possesses  adstringent, 
and,  it  is  said,  lithontriptic  virtues.  It  is  seldom  used 
in  the  practice  of  the  present  day. 

Spir®a  ulmaria.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
meadow-sweet.  Ulmaria;  Regina  prati ; Barba 
capr<e.  Meadow-sweet.  Queen  of  the  meadows.  This 
is  a beautiful  and  fragrant  plant.  The  leaves  are  re- 
commended as  mild  adstringents.  The  flowers  have  a 
strong  smell,  resembling  that  of  May ; they  are  sup- 
posed to  possess  antispasmodic  and  diaphoretic  virtues, 
and  as  they  are  very  rarely  used  in  medicine,  Linnaeus 
suspects  that  the  neglect  of  them  has  arisen  from  the 
plant  being  supposed  to  be  possessed  of  some  noxious 
qualities,  which  it  seemed  to  betray  by  its  being  left 
untouched  by  cattle.  It  may  be  observed,  however, 
that  the  cattle  also  refuse  the  Angelica  and  other  herbs, 
whose  innocence  is  apparent  from  daily  experience. 

[Spir/ea  trifoliata.  See  Gillenia.  A.] 

SPIRITUS.  (Spiritus  ^ us.  m. ; spirit.)  Thisname 
was  formerly  given  to  all  volatile  substances  collected 
by  distillation.  Three  principal  kinds  were  distin- 
guished : inflammable  or  ardent  spirits,  acid  spirits, 
and  alkaline  spirits.  The  word  spirit  is  now  almost 
exclusively  confined  to  alkohol. 

Spiritus  ®theris  nitrici.  Spiritus  atheris  ni- 
trosi  : Spiritus  nitri  dulcis.  Take  of  rectified  spirits, 
two  pints ; nitric  acid,  by  weight,  three  ounces ; add 
the  acid  gradually  to  the  spirit,  and  mix  them,  taking 
care  that  the  heat  do  not  exceed  120° ; then  with  a 
gentle  heat  distil  twenty-four  fluid  ounces.  A febri- 
fuge, diaphoretic,  and  diuretic  compound  mostly  ad- 
ministered in  asthenia,  nervous  affections,  dysuria,  and 
calculous  complaints. 

Spiritus  ®theris  aromaticus.  Take  of  cinna- 
mon-bark, bruised,  three  drachms ; cardamom  seeds 
powdered,  a drachm  and  a half;  long  pepper  powder- 
ed, ginger-root  sliced,  each  a drachm ; spirit  of  sul- 
phuric tether,  a pint ; macerate  for  fourteen  days,  in  a 
closed  glass  vessel,  and  strain.  An  excellent  stimu- 
lating and  stomachic  compound,  which  is  administered 
in  debility  of  the  stomach  and  nervous  affections. 

Spiritus  ®tiieris  sulphurici.  Spiritus  vitrioli 
dulcis;  Spiritus  eetheris  vitriolici.  Take  of  sulphuric 
tether,  half  a pint;  rectified  spirit,  a pint:  mix  them. 
A diaphoretic,  antispasmodic,  and  tonic  preparation, 
mostly  exhibited  in  nervous  debility  and  weakness  of 
the  primte  vite. 

Spiritus  ®theris  sulphurici  compositus.  Take 
of  spirit  of  sulphuric  tether  a pint ; tetherigd  oil,  two 
fluid  drachms;  mix  them.  A stimulating  anodyne, 
supposed  to  be  similar  to  the  celebrated  liquor  mine- 
ralis  anodynus , of  Hoffman.  It  is  exhibited  in  fevers, 
nervous  affections,  hysteria,  &c. ; and  in  most  cases  of 
fever  where  medicines  are  rejected  by  the  stomach, 
this  is  of  infinite  service. 

Spiritus  ammoni®.  Spirit  of  ammonia.  Formerly 
called  Spiritus  salis  ammoniaci  dulcis  ; Spiritus  salts 
ammoniaci.  Take  of  proof  spirit,  three  pints  ; muriate 
of  ammonia,  four  ounces;  subcarbonate  of  potassa,six 
ounces ; mix  them,  and,  with  a gentle  fire,  let  a pint 
and  a half  be  distilled  into  a cooled  receiver.  A stimu- 
lating antispasmodic,  occasionally  exhibited  in  cases  of 
asphyxia,  asthenia,  and  in  nervous  diseases,  but  mostly 


SPI 

used  as  an  external  stimulant  against  rheumatism, 

sprains,  and  bruises. 

Spiritus  ammoni*  aromaticus.  Aromatic  spirit 
of  ammonia.  Formerly  known  by  the  name  of  Spiritus 
ammonia  compositus  . Spiritus  volatilis  aromaticus  : 
Spiritus  salis  volatilis  oleosus.  Take  of  cinnamon- 
bark  bruised,  cloves  bruised,  each  two  drachms ; lemon- 
peel,  four  ounces  ; subcarbonate  of  potassa,  half  a 
pound;  muriate  of  ammonia,  five  ounces;  rectified 
spirit,  four  pints ; water,  a gallon  ; mix  and  distil  six 
pints.  A stimulating  antispasmodic  and  sudorific  in 
very  general  use,  to  smell  at  in  faintings  and  lowness 
of  spirits.  It  is  exhibited  internally  in  nervous  affec- 
tions, hysteria,  and  weakness  of  the  stomach.  The 
dose  is  from  half  a drachm  to  a drachm. 

Spiritus  ammonite  fietidus.  Foetid  spirit  of  am- 
monia. Formerly  called  spiritus  volatilis  fatidus. 
Take  of  spirit  of  ammonia,  two  pints;  asafoetida,  two 
ounces.  Macerate  for  twelve  hours,  then  by  a gentle 
fire  distil  a pint  and  a half  into  a cooled  receiver.  A 
stimulating  antispasmodic,  often  exhibited  to  children 
against  convulsions,  and  to  gouty  and  asthmatic  per- 
sons. The  dose  is  from  half  to  a whole  fluid  drachm. 

Spiritus  ammoni®  succinatus.  Succinated  spirit 
of  ammonia.  Formerly  known  by  the  names  of  Eau 
de  luce  ; Spiritus  salis  ammoniaci  succinatus ; Liquor 
cornu  cervi  succinatus.  Take  of  mastich,  three 
drachms;  rectified  spirit,  nine  fluid  drachms ; oil  of  la- 
vender, fourteen  minims;  oil  of  amber,  four  minims, 
solution  of  ammonia,  ten  fluid  ounces.  Macerate  the 
mastich  in  the  spirit  that  it  may  dissolve,  and  pour  oft 
the  clear  tincture ; to  this  add  the  remaining  articles, 
and  shake  them  together.  This  preparation  is  much 
esteemed  as  a stimulant  and  nervine  medicine,  and  is 
employed  internally  and  externally  against  spasms, 
hysteria,  syncope,  vertigo,  and  the  stings  of  insects. 
The  dose  is  from  ten  minims  to  half  a fluid  drachm. 

Spiritus  anisi.  Spirit  of  aniseed.  Formerly  called 
Spiritus  anisi  compositus  ; Aqua  seminum  anisi  com- 
posita.  Take  of  aniseed,  bruised,  half  a pound  ; proof 
spirit,  a gallon  ; water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma. 
Macerate  for  twenty-four  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by 
a gentle  fire.  A stimulating  carminative  and  stomachic 
calculated  to  relieve  flatulency,  borborygmus,  colic, 
and  spasmodic  affections  of  the  bowels.  The  dose  is 
from  half  to  a whole  fluid  drachm. 

Spiritus  armoraci®  compositus.  Compound 
spirit  of  horse-radish,  formerly  called  Spiritus  raphani 
compositus ; Aqua  raphani  composita.  Take  of  horse- 
radish root,  fresh  and  sliced,  dried  orange-peel,  of  each 
a pound;  nutmegs,  bruised,  half  an  ounce;  proof 
spirit,  a gallon  ; water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma. 
Macerate  for  twenty-four  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a 
gentle  fire.  A very  warm  stimulating  compound, 
given  in  gouty,  rheumatic,  and  spasmodic  affections  of 
the  stomach,  and  in  scorbutic  disorders.  The  dose  is 
from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  half  a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  camphor®.  Spirit  of  camphor.  For- 
merly known  by  the  names  of  Spiritus  camphoratus  ; 
Spiritus  vinosus  camphoratus  ; Spiritus  vim  campho- 
ratus. Take  of  camphor,  four  ounces ; rectified  spirit, 
two  pints.  Mix,  that  the  camphor  may  be  dissolved. 
A stimulating  medicine,  used  as  an  external  application 
against  chilblains,  rheumatism,  palsy,  numbness,  and 
gangrene. 

Spiritus  carui.  Spirit  of  caraway.  Formerly 
called  Aqua  seminum  carui.  Take  of  caraway  seed, 
bruised,  a pound  and  a half;  proof  spirit  a gallon  ; 
water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma.  Macerate  for 
24  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a gentle  fire.  The  dose 
is  from  a fluid  drachm  to  half  a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  cinnamomi.  Spirit  of  cinnamon.  For 
merly  called  Aqua  cinnamomi  spirituosa ; Aqua  cin- 
namomi fortis.  Take  of  cinnamon-bark,  bruised,  a 
pound  ; proof  spirit  a gallon  ; water  sufficient  to  pre 
vent  empyreuma.  Macerate  for  24  hours,  and  distil  a 
gallon  by  a gentle  fire.  Spirit  of  cinnamon  is  mostly 
used  in  conjunction  with  other  carminatives  to  give  a 
pleasant  flavour ; it  may  be  exhibited  alone  as  a car- 
minative and  stimulant.  The  dose  is  from  a fluid 
drachm  to  half  a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  cornu  cervi.  See  Ammonia!  subcar- 
bonas. 

Spiritus  juniperi  compositus.  Compound  spirit 
of  juniper.  Formerly  cnWed  Aqua  juniperi  composita. 
Take  of  juniper-berries,  bruised,  a pound;  caraway- 
seeds,  bruised,  fennel-seeds,  bruised,  of  each  an  ounce 


SPI 


SPL 


and  a half ; proof  spirits,  a gallon  ; water  sufficient  to 
prevent  empyreuma.  Macerate  for  24  hours,  and  distil 
a gallon  by  a gentle  fire. 

Spiritus  lavendjjl/e.  Spirit  of  lavender.  For- 
merly called  Spiritus  lavendulce  simplex.  Take  of 
fresh  lavender  flowers,  two  pounds  ; rectified  spirit,  a 
gallon;  water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma.  Ma- 
cerate for  24  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a gentle  fire. 
Though  mostly  used  as  a perfume,  this  spirit  may  be 
given  internally  as  a stimulating  nervine  and  antispas- 
modic.  The  dose  is  from  a fluid  drachm  to  half  a fluid 
ounce. 

Spiritus  lavendulce  compositus.  Compound 
spirit  of  lavender.  Formerly  called  Spiritus  laven- 
dulce compositus  matthice.  Take  of  spirit  of  lavender, 
three  pints;  spirit  of  rosemary,  a pint;  cinnamon-bark, 
bruised,  nutmegs,  bruised,  of  each  half  an  ounce;  red 
saunders  wood,  sliced,  an  ounce.  Macerate  for  fourteen 
days,  and  strain.  An  elegant  and  useful  antispasmodic 
and  stimulant  in  very  general  use  against  nervous 
diseases,  lowness  of  spirits,  and  weakness  of  the 
stonlach,  taken  on  a lump  of  sugar. 

Spiritus  lumbricorum.  The  spirit  obtained  by 
the  distillation  of  the  earth-worm  is  similar  to  harts- 
horn. 

Spiritus  menth®  piperitje.  Spirit  of  pepper- 
mint. Formerly  called  Spiritus  menlhce  piperitidis ; 
Aqua  menthce  piperitidis  spirituosa.  Take  of  pepper- 
mint, dried,  a pound  and  a half;  proof  spirit,  a gallon  ; 
water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma.  Macerate  for 
24  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a gentle  fire.  This  pos- 
sesses all  the  properties  of  the  peppermint,  with  the 
stimulating  virtues  of  the  spirit.  The  dose  from  one 
fluid  drachm  to  a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  menth*  viridis.  Spirit  of  spearmint. 
Formerly  called  Spiritus  menthce  sativee;  Aqua  menthce 
vulgaris  spirituosa.  Take  of  spearmint,  dried,  a 
pound  and  a half ; proof  spirit,  a gallon ; water  suffi- 
cient to  prevent  empyreuma.  Macerate  for  24  hours, 
and  distil  a gallon.  This  is  most  commonly  added  to 
carminative  or  antispasmodic  draughts,  and  seldom 
exhibited  alone.  The  dose  from  one  fluid  drachm  to 
a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  millepedarum.  A volatile  alkali,  the 
virtues  of  which  are  similar  to  hartshorn. 

Spiritus  mindkreri.  See  Ammonice  acetatis  liquor. 

Spiritus  myristiccE.  Spirit  of  nutmeg.  Formerly 
called  Aqua  nucis  moschatoc.  Take  of  nutmegs, 
bruised,  two  ounces;  proof  spirit,  a gallon ; water  suf- 
ficient to  prevent  empyreuma.  Macerate  for  twenty- 
four  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a gentle  fire.  A 
stimulating  and  agreeable  spirit  possessing  the  virtues 
of  the  nutmeg.  The  dose  from  one  fluid  drachm  to  a 
fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  nitri  dulcis.  See  Spiritus  cetheris  ni- 
trici. 

Spiritus  nitri  duplex.  The  nitrous  acid.  See 
Acidum  nitrosum,  and  Nitric  acid. 

Spiritus  nitri  fumans.  See  Acidum  nitrosum , 
and  Nitric  acid. 

Spiritus  nitri  glauberi.  See  Acidum  nitrosum , 
and  Nitric  acid. 

Spiritus  nitri  simplex.  The  dilute  nitrous  acid. 
See  Acidum  nitricum  dilutum. 

Spiritus  nitri  vulgaris.  This  is  now  called  aci- 
dum nitricum  dilutum. 

Spiritus  pimento.  Spirit  of  pimento.  Formerly 
called  Spiritus  pimento.  Take  allspice,  bruised,  two 
ounces ;.  proof  spirit,  a gallon ; water  sufficient  to  pre- 
vent empyreuma.  Macerate  for  24  hours,  and  distil  a 
gallon  by  a gentle  fire.  A stimulating  aromatic  tincture 
mostly  employed  with  adstringent  and  carminative 
medicines.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to 
half  a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  pulegii.  Spirit  of  pennyroyal.  For- 
merly called  Aqua  pulegii  spirituosa.  Take  of  penny- 
royal, dried,  a pound  and  a half;  proof  spirit,  a gallon  ; 
water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma.  Macerate 
for  24  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a gentle  fire. 
This  is  in  very  general  use  as  an  emmenagogue  among 
the  lowerorders.  Tt  possesses  nervine  and  carminative 
virtues.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  half 
a fluid  ounce. 

Spiritus  rector.  Boerhaave  and  other  chemists 
give  this  name  to  a very  attenuated  principle,  in  which 
the  smell  of  odorant  bodies  peculiarly  reside.  It  is 
now  called  aroma. 


Spiritus  rosmarini.  Spirit  of  rosemary.  Tak« 
of  rosemary  tops,  fresh,  two  pounds ; proof  spirit;  8 
gallon ; water  sufficient  to  prevent  empyreuma.  Ma- 
cerate for  24  hours,  and  distil  a gallon  by  a gentle  fire 
A very  fragrant  spirit,  mostly  employed  for  external 
purposes  in  conjunction  with  other  resolvents. 

SriRiTus  salis  ammoniaci  aquosus.  See  Ammo- 
nice  subcarbonas. 

Spiritus  salis  ammoniaci  dulcis.  See  Spiritus 
ammonice.  , 

Spiritus  salis  ammoniaci  simplex.  See  Ammo- 
nice subcarbonas. 

Spiritus  sai.is  glauberi.  See  Muriatic  acid. 

Spiritus  salis  marini.  See  Muriatic  acid. 

Spiritus  vini  rectificatus.  See  Alkohol.  Rec- 
tified spiritof  wine  is  in  general  use  to  dissolve  resinous 
and  other  medicines.  It  is  seldom  exhibited  internally, 
though  it  exists  in  the  diluted  state  in  all  vinous  and 
spirituous  liquors. 

Spiritus  vini  tenuior.  Proof  spirit,  which  is 
about  half  the  strength  of  rectified,  is  much  employed 
for  preparing  tinctures  of  resinous  juices,  barks, 
roots,  &c. 

Spiritus  vitrioli.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Spiritus  vitrioli  dulcis.  See  Spiritus  cetheris 
sulphurici. 

Spiritus  volatilis  fcetidus.  See  Spiritus  am- 
monice feetidus. 

SPISSAME'NTUM.  (From  spisso , to  thicken.) 
A substance  put  into  oils  and  ointments  to  make  them 
thick. 

Spitting  of  blood.  See  Hoematemesis  and  Hcemop- 
tysis. 

SPLANCHNIC.  [Splanchnicus ; from  airXayxvov, 
an  entrail.)  Belonging  to  the  viscera. 

Splanchnic  nerve.  The  great  intercostal  nerve. 
See  Intercostal  nerve. 

Spla'nchnica.  (From  oirXayxvov,  an  intestine.) 
Remedies  for  diseased  bowels. 

SPLANCHNOLOGY.  (Splanchnologia ; from 
cnrXayxvov , an  entrail,  and  Xoyos,  a discourse.)  The 
doctrine  of  the  viscera. 

SPLEEN.  'EttXtjv.  Lien.  The  spleen  or  milt  is  a 
spongy  viscus  of  a livid  colour,  and  so  variable  in  form, 
situation,  and  magnitude,  that  it  is  hard  to  determine 
either.  Nevertheless,  in  a healthy  man  it  is  always 
placed  on  the  left  side,  in  the  left  hypochondrium,  be- 
tween the  eleventh  and  twelfth  false  ribs.  Its  circum- 
ference is  oblong  and  sound,  resembling  an  oval  figure. 
It  is  larger,  to  speak  generally,  when  the  stomach  is 
empty,  and  smaller  when  it  is  compressed,  or  evacuated 
by  a full  stomach. 

It  should  particularly  be  remembered  of  this  viscus, 
that  it  is  convex  towards  the  ribs,  and  concave  inter- 
nally : also,  that  it  has  an  excavation,  into  which  ves- 
sels are  inserted. 

It  is  connected  with  the  following  parts : 1.  With  the 
stomach  by  a ligament  and  short  vessels.  2.  With  the 
omentum,  and  the  left  kidney.  3.  With  the  diaphragm, 
by  a portion  of  the  peritompum.  4.  With  the  begin- 
ning of  the  pancreas,  by  vessels.  5.  With  a colon,  by 
a ligament. 

In  man  the  spleen  is  covered  with  one  simple,  firm 
membrane,  arising  from  the  peritoniEum,  which  ad- 
heres to  the  spleen,  very  firmly,  by  the  intervention  of 
cellular  structure. 

The  vessels  of  the  spleen  are,  the  splenic  artery  com- 
ing from  the  coeliac  artery,  which,  considering  the  size 
of  the  spleen,  is  much  larger  than  is  requisite  for  the 
mere  nutrition  of  it.  This  goes  by  serpentine  move- 
ments, out  of  its  course,  over  the  pancreas,  and  behind 
the  stomach,  and  after  having  given  off  branches  to  the 
adjacent  parts,  it  is  inserted  into  the  concave  surface  of 
the  spleen.  It  is  afterward  divided  into  smaller 
branches,  which  are  again  divided  into  other  yet 
smaller,  delivering  their  blood  immediately  to  the  veins, 
but  emitting  it  nowhere  else.  The  veins,  at  length, 
come  together  into  one,  called  the  splenic  vein,  and 
having  received  the  larger  coronary  vein  of  the  sto- 
mach, besides  others,  it  constitutes  the  left  principal 
branch  of  the  vena  portae. 

The  nerves  of  the  spleen  are  small ; they  surround 
the  arteries  with  their  branches ; they  come  from  a par- 
tioilar  plexus,  which  is  formed  of  the  posterior  branches 
of* the  eighth  pair,  and  the  great  intercostal  nerve. 

Lymphatic  vessels  are  almost  only  seen  creeping 
along  the  surface  of  the  human  spleen. 


303 


3PL 


SPO 


The  use  of  the  spleen  has  not  hitherto  been  deter- 
mined ; yet  if  the  situation  and  fabric  be  regarded,  one 
would  imagine  its  use  to  consist  chiefly  iu  affording 
some  assistance  to  the  stomach  during  the  progress  of 
digestion. 

SPLEEN- WORT.  See  Jlsplenium  ceterach,  and 

Jisplenium  trichomanes. 

SPLENA'LGIA.  (From  airXrjv,  the  spleen,  and 
aAyos,  pain.)  A pain  in  the  spleen  or  its  region. 

SPLENETIC.  (Spleneticus ; from  anXrjv,  the 
spleen.)  Belonging  to  the  spleen. 

SPLENI  TIS.  (From  o-ttA yv,  the  spleen.)  Inflam- 
mation of  the  spleen.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class 
Pyrexia i,  and  Order  Phlegmasia , of  Cullen  ; charac- 
terized by  pyrexia,  tension,  heat,  tumour,  and  pain  in 
the  left  hypochondrium,  increased  by  pressure.  This 
disease,  according  to  Juncker,  comes  on  with  a re- 
markable shivering,  succeeded  by  a most  intense  heat, 
and  very  great  thirst ; a pain  and  tumour  are  perceived 
in  the  left  hypochondrium,  and  the  paroxysms  for  the 
most  part  assume  a quartan  form;  when  the  patients 
expose  themselves  for  a little  to  the  free  air,  their  extre- 
mities immediately  grow  very  cold  If  a hsemorrhagy 
happen,  the  blood  flows  out  of  the  left  nostril.  The 
other  symptoms  are  the  same  with  those  of  the  hepa- 
titis. Like  the  liver,  the  spleen  is  also  subject  to  a 
chronic  inflammation,  which  often  happens  after  agues, 
and  is  called  the  ague  cake,  though  that  name  is  also 
frequently  given  to  a scirrhous  tumour  of  the  liver  suc- 
ceeding intermittents.  The  causes  of  this  disease  are 
in  general  the  same  with  those  of  other  inflammatory 
disorders ; but  those  which  determine  the  inflammation 
to  that  particular  part  more  than  another,  are  very 
much  unknown.  It  attacks  persons  of  a very  plethoric 
and  sanguine  habit  of  body  rather  than  others. 

During  the  acute  stage  of  splenitis,  we  must  follow 
the  antiphlogistic  plan,  by  general  and  topical  bleedings, 
by  purging  frequently,  and  by  the  application  of  blis- 
ters near  the  part  affected.  If  it  should  terminate  in 
suppuration,  we  must  endeavour  to  discharge  the  pus 
externally,  by  fomentations  or  poultices.  When  the 
organ  is  in  an  enlarged  scirrhous  state,  mercury  may  be 
successful  in  preventing  its  farther  progress,  or  even 
producing  a diminution  of  the  part:  but  proper  cau- 
tion is  required  in  the  use  of  it,  lest  the  remedy  do 
more  harm  than  the  disease. 

Sple'nium.  (From  ojtAiji/,  the  spleen:  so  called 
from  its  efficacy  in  disorders  of  the  spleen.)  1.  Spleen- 
wort. 

2.  A compressed  shape  like  the  spleen. 

SPLE'NIUS.  (From  aitXyv,  the  spleen:  so  named 
from  its  resemblance  in  shape  to  the  spleen, or,  accord- 
ing to  some,  itderivesits  name  from  splenium , a ferula, 
or  splint,  which  surgeons  apply  to  the  sides  of  a frac- 
tured bone.)  Splenius  capitus , and  splenitis  colli , of 
Albinus;  and  cervico-dorsi-mastoidien  el  dorso-trachc- 
lien , of  Dumas.  The  splenius  is  a flat,  broad,  and  , 
oblong  muscle,  in  part  covered  by  the  upper  part  of  the 
trapezius,  and  obliquely  situated  between  the  back  of 
the  ear,  and  the  lower  and  posterior  part  of  the  neck. 

It  arises  tendinous  from  the  four  or  five  superior 
spinous  processes  of  the  dorsal  vertebra;  tendinous 
and  fleshy  from  the  last  of  the  neck,  and  tendinous 
from  the  Iigamentum  colli,  or  rather  the  tendons  of  the 
two  splenii  unite  here  inseparably;  but  about  the 
second  or  third  vertebrae  of  the  neck  they  recede  from 
each  other,  so  that  part  of  the  complexus  may  be 
seen. 

It  is  inserted,  by  two  distinct  tendons,  into  the  trans- 
verse processes  of  the  two  first  vertebra  of  the  neck, 
sending  ofF  some  few  fibres  to  the  complexus  and  le- 
vatorscapulae ; tendinous  and  fleshy  into  the  upper  and 
posterior  part  of  the  mastoid  process,  and  into  a ridge 
on  the  occipital  bone,  where  it  joins  with  the  root  of 
that  process.* 

This  muscle  may  easily  be  separated  into  two  parts. 
Eustachius  and  Fallopius  were  aware  of  this  ; Win- 
slow has  distinguished  them  into  the  superior  and  infe- 
rior portions;  and  Albinus  has  described  them  as  two 
distinct  muscles,  calling  that  part  which  is  inserted  into 
the  mastoid  process  and  os  occipitis,  splenius  capitis, 
and  that  which  is  inserted  into  the  vertebra  of  the 
neck,  splenius  colli.  We  have  here  followed  Douglas, 
and  the  generality  of  writers,  in  describing  these  two 
portions  as  one  muscle,  especially  as  they  are  intimately 
united  near  their  origin. 

When  this  muscle  acts  singly,  it  draws  the  head  and  I 

304 


upper  vertebra  of  the  neck  obliquely  backwards; 
when  both  act,  they  pull  the  head  directly  back- 
wards. 

Splenius  capitis.  See  Splenius. 

Splenius  colli.  See  Splenius. 

SFLENOUE'LE.  (F rom  anXyv,  the  spleen,  and  KtjXrj, 
a tumour.)  A hernia  of  thq  spleen. 

SPLINT.  A long  piece  of  wood,  tin,  or  strong 
pasteboard  employed  for  preventing  the  ends  of  broken 
bones  from  moving,  so  as  to  interrupt  the  process  by 
which  fractures  unite. 

SPO'DILTM.  SrooiJiov.  The  spodium  of  Diosco- 
rides  and  of  Galen  are  now  not  known  in  the  shops. 
It  is  said  to  have  been  produced  by  burning  cadmia 
alone  in  the  furnace ; for  having  thrown  it  in  small 
pieces  into  the  fire,  near  the  nozzle  of  the  bellows,  they 
blow  the  most  fine  and  subtle  parts  against  the  roof  of 
the  furnace:  and  what  was  reflected  from  thence  was 
called  spodium.  It  differed  from  the  pompholyx  in  not 
being  so  pure,  and  in  being  more  heavy.  Pliny  distin- 
guishes several  kinds  of  it,  as  that  of  copper,  silver, 
gold,  and  lead. 

Spodium  arabum.  Burnt  ivory,  or  ivory  black. 

See  Jibaisir. 

Spodium  gr^corum.  The  white  dung  of  dogs. 

SPODUMENE.  Prismatic  triphane  spar  of  Mohs. 
A mineral  of  a greenish  white  colour,  first  found  in 
the  island  of  Uton,  in  Sudermannland,  and  lately  in 
the  vicinity  of  Dublin.  It  contains  the  new  alkali 
called  lethia.  . 

Spolia'rium.  A private  room  at  the  baths. 

SPONDY'LIUM.  (From  trnovdvXos,  a vertebra : so 
named  from  the  shape  of  its  root,  or  probably  because 
it  was  used  against  the  bite  of  a serpent  called  crjrov- 
<5uAt£.)  See  Heracleum  sport dylium. 

SPO'NDYLUS.  2sJ<m5uAos.  Some  have  thought 
fit  to  call  the  spine  or  backbone  thus,  from  the  shape 
and  fitness  of  the  vertebra,  to  move  every  way  upon 
one  another. 

SPONGE.  See  Spongia. 

SPONGE-TENT.  See  Spongia praparata. 

SPONGIA.  S7royyos;  Siroyyia.  Sponge.  See 
Spongia  officinalis. 

Spongia  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sponge.  A sea-production  : the  habitations  of  insects. 
A soft,  light,  very  porous  and  compressible  substance, 
readily  imbibing  water,  and  distending  thereby.  It  is 
found  adhering  to  rocks,  particularly  in  the  Mediterra 
nean  sea,  about  the  islands  of  the  Archipelago.  It  was 
formerly  supposed  to  be  a vegetable  production,  but  is 
now  classed  among  the  zoophytes ; and  analyzed,  it 
yields  the  same  principles  with  animal  substances  in 
general.  Burnt  sponge  is  said  to  cure  effectually  the 
bronchocele,  and  to  be  of  infinite  utility  in  scrofulous 
complaints.  Sponge  tents  are  employed  by  surgeons  to 
dilate  fistulous  ulcers,  &c. 

Spongia  pr.fparata.  Prepared  sponge.  Sponge 
tent.  This  is  formed  by  dipping  pieces  of  sponge  in 
hot  melted  emplastrum  cera  compositum,  and  pressing 
them  between  two  iron  plates.  As  soon  as  cold,  the 
substance  thus  formed  may  be  cut  into  pieces  of  any 
shape.  It  was  formerly  used  for  dilating  small  open- 
ings, for  which  it  was  well  adapted,  as  when  the  wax 
melted,  the  elasticity  of  the  sponge  made  it  expand  and 
distend  the  opening,  in  which  it  had  been  put.  Sir 
Ashley  Cooper  informs  us  that  the  best  modern  sur- 
geons seldom  employ  it. 

Spongia  usta.  Burnt  sponge.  Cut  the  sponge  into 
pieces,  and  beat  it,  that  any  extraneous  matters  may 
be  separated ; then  burn  it  in  a close  iron  vessel  until  it 
becomes  black  and  friable ; lastly,  rub  it  to  a very  fine 
powder.  This  preparation  is  exhibited  with  bark  in 
the  cure  of  scrofulous  complaints,  and  forms  the 
basis  of  a lozenge,  which  has  been  known  to  cure  the 
bronchocele  in  many  instances.  The  dose  is  from  a 
scruple  to  a drachm. 

Spongiosa  ossa.  Ossa  turbinata  inferior  a ; Ossa 
convoluta.  These  bones  are  situated  in  the  under  part 
of  the  side  of  the  nose  ; they  are  of  a triangular  form 
and  spongy  appearance,  resembling  the  os  spongiosum 
superius  ; externally  they  are  convex  ; internally  they 
are  concave ; the  convexity  is  placed  towards  the  sep- 
tum nasi,  and  the  concavity  outwards.  The  under 
edge  of  each  bone  is  placed  horizontally  near  the  outer 
part  of  the  nose,  and  ending  in  a sharp  point  behind. 
At  the  upper  part  of  the  bone  are  two  processes,  the 
anterior  of  which  ascends  and  forms  part  of  the  lachry- 


STA 


STA 


mal  groove,  and  the  posterior  descends  and  forms  a 
hook  to  make  part  of  the  maxillary  sinus. 

The  connexion  of  this  bone  is  to  the  os  maxillare,  os 
palati,  and  os  unguis,  by  a distinct  suture  in  the  young 
subject ; but  in  the  adult,  by  a concretion  of  substance. 

The  ossa  spongiosa  afford  a large  surface  for  extend- 
ing the  organ  of  smell  by  allowing  the  membrane  of  the 
nose  to  be  expanded,  on  which  the  olfactory  nerves  are 
dispersed. 

In  the  foetus,  these  bones  are  almost  complete. 
Spongio'sum  os.  1.  The  ethmoid  bone. 

2.  See  Spongiosa  ossa. 

SPONGIO'SUS.  Spongy. 

SPONGOI'DES.  {XzsoyyosiSyg ; from  crcsoyyog,  a 
sponge,  and  eidos,  forma,  shape : so  called  because  it  is 
hollow  and  porous,  like  a sponge  or  sieve.)  See  Eth- 
moid bone. 

SPORADIC.  (Spor adieus ; from  oireipu),  to  sow.) 
An  epithet  for  such  infectious  and  other  diseases  as 
seize  a few  persons  at  any  time  or  season. 

Spotted  lung-wort.  See  Pulmonaria. 

SPRAIN.  See  Subluxatio. 

SPRAT.  The  Clnpea  sprattus,  of  Linnaeus.  A 
small  herring-like  fish  which  comes  to  U3  between  No- 
vember and  March,  and  are  eaten  fried  and  pickled. 
They  are  strong  and  hard  of  digestion. 
SPRONGIDIUM.  See  Columnula. 

SPRUCE.  1.  A particular  species  of  fir.  See  Pinus 
abies. 

2.  A fermented  liquor  called  spruce  beer  prepared 
from  the  spruce  fir.  From  the  quantity  of  carbonic 
acid  it  contains,  it  is  found  a useful  antiscorbutic. 
Spurge  flax.  See  Daphne  gnidium. 

Spurge  laurel.  See  Daphne  laureola. 

Spurge  olive.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

[Spurge,  large  flowering.  See  Euphorbia  corollata. 
Spurred  rye.  See  Pulvis  parturiens.  A ] 
SPUTA'MEN.  See  Sputum. 

SPU'TUM.  (From  spuo,  to  spit.)  Sputamen.  Sa 
liva.  Any  kind  of  expectoration. 

Squama'ria.  (From  squama , a scale : so  called 
from  its  scaly  roots.)  The  great  tooth-wort,  or  Plum- 
bago europea. 

SQ.UAMATUS.  Scaly : applied  to  the  nectary  of 
the  Ranunculus  genus,  &c.  See  Kectarium. 

SQUAMOSE.  ( Squamosiis ; from  squama,  a scale, 
because  the  bones  lie  over  each  other  like  scales.) 
Scaly. 

Squamose  suture.  The  suture  which  unites  the 
squamose  portion  of  the  temporal  bone  with  the  pa- 
rietal. 

SQUAMOSUS.  Squamose.  Scaled:  applied  to 
roots  which  are  covered  with  fleshy  scales  ; as  in  La- 
thrcea  squamaria. 

SQUARROSUS.  (From  squarra ; rough.)  Squar- 
rose.  Rough,  scabby,  scaly.  Applied  to  plants,  <fcc.; 
as  Juncus  squarrosus. 

SQUILL.  See  Scilla. 

Squi'lla.  See  Scilla. 

Squills,  vinegar  of.  See  Jlcctum  scillce. 
Squina'nthus.  (From  squinanthia , the  quinsy:  so 
named  from  its  uses  in  the  quinsy.)  See  A ndropogon 
schcenanthus. 

STA'CIIYS.  (Eraxu?,  a spike  : so  named  from  its 
spicated  stalk  and  seed.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnasan  system.  Class ,Didynamia; 
Order,  Gymnospermia. 

2.  Some  species  of  wild  sage,  and  hoarhound,  nettle, 
&c.  were  formerly  so  called. 

Stachys  fcetida.  Yellow  archangel.  Hedge-net- 
tle, or  Ballote  nigra. 

Stachys  palustris.  Clown’s  woundwort  or  all- 
heal. 

STA'CTE.  CEraKTtj  from  5 -ago),  to  distil.)  This 
term  signifies  that  kind  of  myrrh  which  distils  or  falls 
in  drops  from  the  trees.  It  is  also  used  by  some  writers 
for  a more  liquid  kind  of  amber  than  what  is  commonly 
met  with  in  the  shops  ; whence  in  Scribonius  Largus, 
Paulas  iEgineta,  and  some  others,  we  meet  with  a col- 
lyrium,  and  several  other  forms,  wherein  this  was  the 
the  chief  ingredient,  distinguished  by  the  name  of 
Stactica. 

Sta'cticon.  Instillation : also  an  eye-water. 
Sta'oma.  (From  5 -agw,  to  distil.)  I.  Any  distilled 
liquor. 

2.  The  vitriolic  acid. 

STAHL,  George  Ernest,  was  born  at  Anspach, 

D dd 


in  1660.  He  graduated  at  Jena,  at  the  age  of  twenty 
four,  and  immediately  commenced  a course  of  private 
lectures  there ; and  about  three  years  after  he  was  made 
physician  to  the  duke  of  Saxe- Weimar.  On  the  esta- 
blishment of  the  university  of  Halle,  in  1694,  he  was 
appointed  to  a medical  professorship,  at  the  solicitation 
of  Hoffman : and  he  became  the  leader  of  a sect  of 
physicians,  in  opposition  to  the  mechanical  theorists, 
in  which  he  was  followed  by  many  eminent  persons, 
as  well  in  Germany  as  in  other  countries,  notwith- 
standing the  very  fanciful  nature  of  the  hypothesis,  on 
which  his  system  was  founded.  It  had  been  always  ob- 
served, that  there  is  a certain  power  in  the  animal  body 
of  resisting  injuries,  and  correcting  some  of  its  disor- 
ders ; and  Van  Helmont  had  ascribed  some  degree  of 
intelligence  to  this  power:  but  it  was  reserved  for 
Stahl  to  refer  it  entirely  to  the  rational  soul,  which,  he 
affirmed,  not  only  Originally  formed  the  body,  but  is 
the  sole  cause  of  all  its  motions,  in  the  constant  ex- 
citement of  which  life  consists.  Whence  diseases 
were  generally  regarded  as  salutary  efforts  of  the  pre- 
siding soul,  to  avert  the  destruction  of  the  body.  This 
hypothesis,  besides  its  visionary  character,  was  justly 
deprecated,  as  leading  to  an  inert  practice,  and  the  ne- 
glect of  the  collateral  branches  of  medical  science,  even 
of  anatomical  researches,  which  Stahl  maintained,  had 
little  or  no  reference  to  the  art  of  healing.  And  in  fact 
both  he  and  his  followers,  trusting  principally  to  the 
operations  of  nature,  zealously  opposed  the  use  of  some 
of  the  most  efficacious  remedies,  as  opium,  cinchona, 
and  mercury ; and  were  extremely  reserved  in  the  em- 
ployment of  bleeding,  vomiting,  &.C.,  although  their 
system  led  them  to  refer  most  diseases  to  plethora. 
This  hypothesis  was  maintained  by  Stahl  with  much 
ingenuity  in  several  publications,  particularly  in  his 
“Theoria  Medica  vera,”  printed  in  1708.  The  merits 
of  Stahl,  as  a chemical  philosopher,  are  of  a much 
higher  character  ; and  the  school,  which  he  founded  in 
this  science,  has  only  been  superseded  of  late  by  far- 
ther discoveries.  He  was  the  inventor  of  the  cele- 
brated theory  of  phlogiston,  which  appeared  to  account 
for  the  phenomenon  of  combustion,  and  was  received 
every  where  with  high  applause.  His  chief  chemical 
work  was  entitled  “ Fundamenta  Che  mice  dogmaticaj 
et  Experimentalis,”  first  printed  in  1729:  but  this  had 
been  preceded  more  than  thirty  years,  by  others,  in 
which  his  doctrine  was  fully  displayed.  Stahl  was 
elected  a member  of  the  Academy  Naturae  Curioso- 
rurn : and  he  was  called,  in  1716,  to  visit  the  king  of 
Prussia  at  Berlin,  whither  he  went  also  on  several  sub- 
sequent occasions,  and  on  one  of  these  he  was  attacked 
with  a disease,  which  proved  fatal,  in  the  74thyeai‘of 
his  age. 

STALACTITES.  ‘ The  calcareous  substancesfound 
suspended  from  vaults,  being  formed  by  the  oozing  of 
water  charged  with  calcareous  particles  gradually  eva- 
porating, and  leaving  these  particles  behind. 

STALAGMI'TIS.  (From  $-a\aygos,  a dropping  or 
distillation,  because  the  gum  which  it  yields  escapes  in 
that  manner.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class, 
Polygamia ; Order,  Moncecia. 

.Stala.gmitis  cambogioioes.  This  is  now  ascer- 
tained to  be  the  tree  which  affords  gamboge.  This 
drug,  from  its  supposed  virtues,  is  also  called  gummi  ad 
podagram;  gummi  gutta;  and,  by  corruption,  gotta; 
gutta  gamba  ; gamon;  germandra ; catagemu;  gam. 
buidea,  &. c. ; and,  from  i^s  gold  colour,  chrysopus ; and, 
from  its  purgative  quality,  succus  laxativus ; succus 
hidicus  pur gans ; and  scammonium  orientale.  Gam- 
boge is  a concrete  vegetable  juice,  which  was  supposed 
to  be  the  produce  of  two  trees,  both  called  by  the  Indians, 
Caracapulli , and  by  Linnaeus,  Gambogia  gutta ; but 
Kcenig  ascertained  its  true  source.  It  is  partly  of  a 
gummy,  and  partly  of  a resinous  nature.  It  is  brought 
to  us  chiefly  from  Gambaja,  in  the  East  Indies,  either 
in  form  of  orbicular  masses,  or  of  cylindrical  rolls  of 
various  sizes ; and  is  of  a dense,  compact,  and  firm 
texture  and  of  a beautiful  yellow  colour.  In  medi- 
cine it  is  chiefly  used  as  a drastic  purge;  it  operates 
powerfully  both  upwards  and  downwards.  Some 
condemn  it  as  acting  with  too  great  violence,  while 
others  are  of  a contrary  opinion.  The  dose  is  from  two 
to  four  grains,  as  a cathartic ; from  four  to  eight  grains 
it  proves  emetic  and  purgative.  The  roughness  of  its 
operation  is  said  to  be  diminished,  by  giving  it  in  a 
liquid  form  sufficiently  diluted.  Rubbed  with  almonds, 
from  its  want  of  taste,  it  is  a good  laxative  for  children. 

305 


i 


STA  * 

It  has  been  given  in  dropsy,  with  cream  of  tartar,  to 
correct  its  operation.  It  has  also  been  recommended 
by  some,  to  the  extent  of  fifteen  grains,  joined  with  an 
equal  quantity  of  vegetable  alkaii,  to  destroy  the  tape- 
worm. This  dose  is  ordered  in  the  morning,  and  if  the 
worm  is  not  expelled  in  two  or  three  hours,  it  is  re- 
peated even  to  the  third  time,  with  safety  and  efficacy. 
It  is  asserted,  that  it  has  been  given  to  this  extent  even 
in  delicate  habits.  This  is  said  to  be  the  remedy  al- 
luded to  by  Dr.  Van  Swieten,  which  was  employed  by 
Dr.  Herenchwand,  and  with  him  proved  so  successful 
in  the  removal  of  the  ttenia  lata.  It  is  an  ingredient, 
and  probably  the  active  one,  in  most  of  the  nostrums 
for  expelling  taeniae. 

Dr.  Cullen  says,  that,  on  account  of  the  quick  pas- 
sage of  gamboge  through  the  intestines,  he  was  induced 
to  give  it  in  small,  and  frequently  repeated  doses,  as 
three  or  four  grains,  rubbed  with  a little  sugar,  every 
three  hours;  and  thus  found  it  operate  without  griping 
or  sickness,  and,  in  three  or  four  exhibitions,  evacuate 
a great  quantity  of  water,  both  by  stool  and  urine. 

STALA'GMUS.  (From  s-aAagw,  to  distil.)  Distil- 
lation. 

Sta'ltica.  (From  $ tAAw,  to  contract.)  Healing 
applications. 

STAMEN.  The  male  genital  organ  of  plants, 
found  generally  within  the  corolla,  near  the  pistil. 
Stamens  were  formerly  called  chives.  They  are  va- 
rious in  number  in  different  flowers,  from  one  to  some 
hundreds.  This  organ  is  essential  to  a plant,  no  one 
having  yet  been  discovered,  after  the  most  careful  re- 
search, that  is  destitute  of  it,  either  in  the  same  flower 
with  the  pistils,  or  a separate  one  of  the  same  species. 

A stamen  consists  of  three  parts. 

1.  The  filamentum,  or  filament , the  part  which  sup- 
ports the  anther. 

2.  The  anther  a,  placed  on  the  filament,  and  the  most 
essential  part  of  all. 

3.  The  pollen,  or  powder  adhering  to  the  anther. 

Stanni  pulvis.  Tin  finely  divided  is  exhibited  in- 
ternally as  a vermifuge.  It  acts  mechanically,  and  the 
fine  filings  are  more  effectual  than  the  powder. 

STANNIC  ACID.  A name  which  has  been  given 
to  the  peroxide  of  tin,  because  it  is  soluble  in  alkalies. 

«TA'NNUM.  See  Tin. 

Stape'dis  musculus.  See  Stapedius. 

STAPE'DIUS.  ( Stapedius , sc.  musculus;  from 

stapes , one  of  the  bones  of  the  ear.)  Musculus  stapes , 
of  Cowper;  and  pyr  amidal- stapedicn , of  Dumas.  A 
muscle  of  the  internal  ear,  which  draws  the  stapes 
obliquely  upwards  towards  the  cavern,  by  which  the 
posterior  part  of  its  base  is  moved  inwards,  and  the 
anterior  part  outwards. 

STATES.  {.In  quo  pes  stat , a stirrup.)  A bone  of 
the  internal  ear,  so  called  from  y,s  resemblance  to  a 
stirrup. 

STAPHILI'NUS.  See  Azygos  uvula:. 

Staphilinus  externus.  See  Circumfiexus . 

STA' PHIS.  is  strictly  a grape,  or  a bunch 

of  grapes ; whence,  from  their  likeness  thereunto,  it  is 
applied  to  many  other  things,  especially  the  glands  of 
the  body,  whether  natural  or  diseased. 

STAPHISA'GRIA.  2ra0ts  aypra,  wild  vine  ; from 
the  resemblance  of  its  leaves  to  those  of  the  vine.)  See 
Delphinium. 

STAPHYLE.  CZraQvh 7.  A grape  or  raisin:  so 
called  from  its  resemblance.)  The  uvula. 

STAPHYLI'NUS.  {Staphylinus ; from  e;a<pv\t], 
the  uvula.)  See  Azygos  uvulae. 

Staphylinus  externus.  See  Circumfiexus. 

Staphylinus  gr/ecorum.  Staphylinus  sylvestris. 
The  wild  carrot. 

STAPHYLO'MA.  (From  s^vA??,  a grape:  so 
named  from  its  being  thought  to  resemble  a grape.). 
Staphylosis.  A disease  of  the  eyeball  in  which  the 
cornea  loses  its  natural  transparency,  rises  above  the 
level  of  the  eye,  and  successively  even  projects  beyond 
the  eyelids,  in  the  form  of  an  elongated,  whitish,  or 
pearl-coloured  tumour,  which  is  sometimes  smooth, 
sometimes  uneven,  and  is  attended  with  a total  loss  of 
slKht.  The  proximate  cause  is  an  effusion  of  thick 
humour  between  the  lamellae  of  the  cornea,  so  that  the 
internal  and  external  superfices  of  the  cornea,  very 
much  protuberates.  The  remote  causes  are,  an  ha- 
bitual ophthalmia,  great  contusion,  and  frequently  a 
deposition  of  the  variolous  humour  in  the  small-pox. 
The  species  are : 

306 


STA 

1st.  Staphyloma  totale , which  occupies  the  whole 
transparent  cornea ; this  is  the  most  frequent  species. 
The  symptoms  are,  the  opaque  cornea  protuberates, 
and  if  in  the  form  of  a cone,  increasing  in  magnitude 
it  pushes  out  and  inverts  the  lower  eyelid  ; and  some- 
times the  morbid  cornea  is  so  elongated,  as  to  lie  on  the 
cheek,.causing  friction  and  excoriation.  The  bulb  of 
the  eye  being  exposed  to  the  air,  sordes  generate,  the 
inferior  palpebra  is  irritated  by  the  cilia,  and  very 
painful  red  and  small  papilla;  are  observable. 

2d.  Staphyloma  racemosum , is  a staphyloma  formed 
by  carnous  tubercles,  about  the  size  of  a small  pin’s 
head. 

3d.  Staphyloma  parliale,  which  occupies  some  part 
of  the  cornea  : it  exhibits  an  opaque  tumour  prominent 
from  the.cornea,  similar  to  a small  bluish  grape. 

4th.  Staphyloma  sclerotica  is  a bluish  tumour  at- 
tached to  some  part  of  the  sclerotica,  but  arises  from 
the  tunica  albuginea. 

5ttl.  Staphyloma  pellucidum,  in  which  the  cornea  is 
not  thickened  or  incrassated,  but  very  much  extended 
and  pellucid. 

6th.  Staphyloma  complicatum , which  is  complicated 
with  an  ulcer,  ectropium,  caruncles,  or  any  other  dis- 
order of  the  eye. 

7th.  Staphyloma  iridis.  For  this  species,  see  Ptosis 
iridis. 

Star  thistle.  See  Carlina  acaulis. 

STARCH.  Amylum.  A white,  insipid,  combusti- 
ble substance,  insoluble  in  cold  water,  but  forming  a 
jelly  with  boiling  water.  It  exists  chiefly  in  the  white 
and  brittle  parts  of  vegetables,  particularly  in  tuberose 
roots,  and  the  seeds  of  the  gramineous  plants.  It  may 
be  extracted  by  pounding  these  parts,  and  agitating 
them  in  cold  water;  when  the  parenchyma,  or  fibrous 
parts,  will  first  subside ; and  these  being  removed,  a 
fine,  white  powder,  diffused  through  the  water,  will 
gradually  subside,  which  is  the  starch.  Or  the 
pounded  or  grated  substance,  as  the  roots  of  arum, 
potatoes,  acorns,  or  horse-chesnuts,  for  instance,  may 
be  put  into  a hair-sieve,  and  the  starch  washed  through 
with  cold  water,  leaving  the  grosser  matters  behind. 
Farinaceous  seeds  may  be  ground  and  treated  in  a 
similar  manner.  Oily  seeds  require  to  have  the  oil  ex- 
pressed from  them  before  the  farina  is  extracted. 

Starch  is  one  of  the  constituent  parts  in  all  mealy 
farinaceous  seeds,  fruits,  roots,  and  other  parts  of 
plants.  Our  common  starch  is  made  from  wheat.  It 
is  not  necessary  that  the  grain  be  first  bruised  in  mills. 
The  entire  corn,  well  cleansed,  is  soaked  in  cold  water 
until  the  husks  separate ; and  the  grains,  having  be- 
come quite  soft,  give  out,  by  pressure,  a milky  fluid. 
The  grains  are  then  taken  out  of  the  water  by  means 
of  a sieve,  put  into  a coarse  linen  sack,  and  transfer- 
red into  the  treading-tub ; where  they  are  trodden, 
after  cold  water  has  been  poured  ujion  them. 

By  this  operation  the  starchy  part  is  washed  put, 
and,  mingling  with  the  wate-,  makes  it  milky.  The 
water  is  now  drawn  off,  running  through  a sieve  into 
the  settling-tub.  Fresh  water  is  again  effused  upon 
the  grains,  and  the  same  operation  is  continued  till  the 
water  in  the  treading-tub  is  no  longer  rendered  milky. 
The  starch  here  precipitates  by  repose  from  the  water 
that  held  it  suspended  ; during  which,  especially  in  a 
warm  season,  the  mucilaginous  saccharine  matter  of 
the  flour,  that  was  dissolved  by  the  water,  goes  into 
the  acetous  fermentation.  From  this  cause  the  starch 
grows  still  purer  and  whiter.  The  water  is  next  let 
off  from  the  starch,  which  is  several  times  more 
washed  with  clear  fresh  water;  the  remaining  part  of 
which  is  suffered  to  drip  through  linen  cloths,  sup- 
ported by  hurdles,  upon  w’hich  the  wet  starch  is  placed. 
When  the  starch  has  fully  subsided,  it  is  wrapped  in, 
wrung  between  these  cloths,  or  pressed,  to  extort  still 
more  of  the  remaining  liquid. 

It  is  afterward  cut  into  pieces,  which  are  laid  in  airy 
places,  on  slightly  burnt  bricks,  to  be  completely  dried, 
partly  by  the  free  currency  of  air,  and  partly  by  the 
bricks  imbibing  their  moisture.  Lastly,  the  outer  crust 
is  scraped  off,  and  they  are  broken  into  smaller 
pieces. 

If  starch  be  subjected  to  distillation,  it  gives  out 
water  impregnated  with  empyreumatic  acetous  acid,  a 
little  red  or  brown  oil,  a great  deal  of  carbonic  acid, 
and  carburetted  hydrogen  gas.  Its  coal  is  bulky,  easily 
burned,  and  leaves  a very  small  quantity  of  potassa 
and  phosphate  of  lime  If  when  diffused  in  w'ater  it 


STA 


STE 


be  exposed  to  a heat  of  60°  F.,  or  upward,  it  will  fer- 
jnent,  and  turn  sour ; but  much  more  so  if  it  be  not 
freed  from  the  gluten,  extract,  and  colouring  matter. 
Thus,  in  starch-making,  the  farina  ferments  and  be- 
comes sour,  but  the  starch  that  does  not  undergo  fer- 
mentation is  rendered  the  more  pure  by  this  process. 
Some  water,  already  soured,  is  mixed  with  the  flour 
and  water,  which  regulates  the  fermentation,  and  pre- 
vents the  mixture  from  becoming  putrid  ; and  in  this 
state  it  is  left  about  ten  days  in  summer,  and  fifteen  in 
winter,  before  the  scum  is  removed,  and  tire  water 
poured  off!  The  starch  is  then  washed  out  from  the 
bran,  and  dried,  first  in  the  open  air,  and  finally  in  an 
oven. 

With  boiling  water,  starch  forms  a nearly  transpa- 
rent mucilage,  emitting  a peculiar  smell,  neither  disa- 
greeable nor  very  powerful.  This  mucilage  may  be 
dried,  and  will  then  be  semitransparent,  and  much 
resembling  gum,  all  the  products  of  which  it  affords. 
When  dissolved,  it  is  much  more  easily  digested  and 
nutritious  than  before  it  has  undergone  thi3  ope- 
ration. 

Both  acids  and  alkalies,  combined  with  water,  dis- 
solve it.  It  separates  the  oxides  of  several  metals  from 
their  solutions,  and  takes  oxygen  from  many  them. 
It  is  found  naturally  combined  with  all  the  immediate 
principles  of  vegetables,  and  may  easily  be  united  with 
most  of  them  by  art. 

When  starch  is  triturated  with  iodine,  it  forms  com- 
binations of  various  colours.  When  the  proportion  of 
iodine  is  small,  these  compounds  are  violet;  when 
somewhat  greater,  blue  ; and,  when  still  greater,  black. 

We  can  always  obtain  the  finest  blue  colour,  by 
treating  starch  with  an  excess  of  iodine,  dissolving  the 
compound  in  liquid  potassa,  and  precipitating  by  a 
vegetable  acid.  The  colour  is  manifested  even  at  the 
instant  of  pouring  water  of  iodine  into  a liquid  which 
contains  starch  diffused  through  it.  Hence  iodine  be- 
comes an  excellent  test  for  detecting  starch  ; and  starch 
for  detecting  iodine.  Besides  these  combinations,  it 
appears  that  there  is  another  of  a white  colour,  in 
which  the  iodine  exists  in  very  small  quantity.  All  of 
them  possess  peculiar  properties. 

Starch  is  not  affected  in  the  cold,  by  water,  alkoliol, 
or  ether.  But  it  dissolves  readily,  when  triturated 
with  potassa  water. 

Starch  is  convertible  into  sugar  by  dilute  sulphuric 
acid.  To  produce  this  change  we  must  take  2000  parts 
of  starch,,  diffuse  them  in  8000  parts  of  water,  con- 
taining 40  parts  of  strong  oil  of  vitriol ; and  boil  the 
mixture  for  36  hours  in  a basin  of  silver  or  lead,  taking 
care  to  stir  the  materials  with  a wooden  rod,  during 
the  first  hour  of  ebullition.  At  the  end  of  this  time, 
the  mass  having  become  liquid,  does  not  require  to  be 
stirred,  except  at  intervals.  In  proportion  as  the 
water  evaporates,  it  ought  to  be  replaced.  When  the 
liquid  has  been  sufficiently  boiled,  we  must  add  to  it 
chalk  and  animal  charcoal,  then  clarify  with  white  of 
egg,  filter  the  mixture  through  a flock  of  wool,  and 
then  concentrate  the  liquid  till  it  has  acquired  a syrupy 
consistence.  After  this,  the  basin  must  be  removed 
from  the  fire,  in  order  that,  by  cooling,  ihe  greater  part 
of  the  sulphate  of  lime  may  fall  down.  The  pure 
syrup  is  now  to  be  decanted  off,  and  evaporated  to  the 
proper  dryness.  The  greater  the  quantity  of  acid  em-. 
ployed,  the  less  ebullition  is  required  to  convert  the 
starch  into  the  saccharine  matter. 

The  discovery  of  the  preceding  process  is  due  to 
Kirchoff,  of  St.  Petersburgh. 

The  presence  of  sulphuric  acid  is  not  indispensable 
for  obtaining  sugar  from  starch.  It  may  also  be  ob- 
tained by  leaving  the  starch  to  itself,  either  with  or 
without  contact  of  air,  or  by  mixing  it  with  dried 
gluten.  At  the  same  time,  indeed,  several  other  pro- 
ducts are  formed.  M.  Theod.  de  Saussurc’s  interest- 
ing observations  on  this  subject  are  published  in  the 
Jhinales  dc  Chemie  ct  de  Physique , xi.  379.  The  starch, 
brought  to  the  state  of  a pulpy  mass,  must  be  left  to 
spontaneous  decomposition.  The  products  are,  1st,  a 
sugar,  like  the  sugar  of  grapes;  2d,  Gum,  like  that 
from  roasted  starch  ; 3d,  Amidine,  a body  whose  pro- 
perties are  intermediate  between  those  of  starch  and 
gum : and  4th,  an  insoluble  substance,  like  ligneous 
matter.  In  these  experiments,  the  mass  on  which  he 
operated  was  made  by  pouring  12  parts  of  boiling 
water  on  1 of  starch.  When  it  was  fermented  by 
dried  gluten,  he  obtained — 


Without  contact  With  contact 
of  air.  of  air. 

Sugar 47.4  49.7 

Gum 23.0  9.7 

Amadine 8.9  5.2 

Amalaceous  lignin 10.3  9.2 

Lignin  with  charcoal  A trace  0.3 

Undecomposed  starch  4.0  3.8 

Potato  starch  differs  perceptibly  from  that  of  wheat ; 
it  is  more  friable ; is  composed  of  ovoid  grains,  about 
twice  the  size  of  the  other. 

As  starch  forms  the  greatest  part  of  flour,  it  cannot 
be  doubted  but  that  it  is  the  principal  alimentary  sub- 
stance contained  in  our  bread.  In  a medical  point  of 
view,  it  is  to  be  considered  as  a demulcent ; and,  ac- 
cordingly, it  forms  the  principal  ingredient  of  an  offi- 
cinal lozenge  in  catarrhs,  and  a mucilage  prepared 
from  it  often  produces  excellent  effects,  both  taken  by 
the  mouth  and  in  the  form  of  clyster,  in  dysenteries 
and  diarrhoea,  from  irritation  of  the  intestines.  Milk 
and  starch,  with  the  addition  of  suet  finely  shred,  and 
incorporated  by  boiling,  was  the  soup  employed  by  Sir 
John  Pringle,  in  dysenteries,  where  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  intestines  had  been  abraded.  Externally, 
surgeons  apply  it  as  an  absorbent  in  erysipelas. 

STA'TICE.  (From  to  stop : so  named  from 

its  supposed  property  of  restraining  haemorrhages.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Pentagynia.  The 
herb  sea-thrift.  . ,, 

Statice  limonium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sea-thrift.  Sea-lavender,  or  red  behen.  Bchen  ru- 
brum ; Limonium:  Limonium  majus  ; -Behen.  The 
roots  possess  astringent  and  strengthening  qualities, 
but  not  in  a very  remarkable  degree. 

Stationa/ria  febris.  A stationary  fever.  So 
Sydenham  called  those  fevers  which  happen  when 
there  are  certain  general  constitutions  of  the  years, 
which  owe  their  origin  neither  to  heat,  cold,  dryness, 
nor  moisture ; but  rather  .depend  on  a certain  secret 
and  inexplicable  alteration  in  the  bowels  of  the  earth, 
whence  the  air  becomes  impregnated  with  such  kinds 
of  effluvia  as  subject  the  body  to  particular  distempers, 
so  long  as  that  kind  of  constitution  prevails,  which, 
after  a certain  course  of  years,  declines  and  gives  way 
to  another. 

STAUROLTTE.  Grenatite,  or  prismatic  garnet. 

STAUROTIDE.  Grenatite.  Prismatic  garnet.  A 
crystallized,  dark,  reddish-brown  garnet,  found  in  Scot- 
land, and  Ireland. 

STAVE8ACRE.  See  Delphinium  staphisagria. 

STEARINE.  See  Fat. 

STEATITE.  Soapstone.  A subspecies  of  rhom- 
boidal  mica. 

STEATOCE'LB.  (From  s-eap,  suet,  and  icrjXy,  a 
tumour.)  A collection  of  a suety  substance  in  the 
scrotum. 

STEATOMA.  (From  g-eap,  suet.)  An  encysted 
tumour,  the  contents  of  which  are  of  a suety  con- 
sistence. 

STEEL.  Chalybs.  The  best,  hardest,  finest,  and 
closest  grained  iron,  combined  with  carbon  by  a parti- 
cular process. 

STEINHEILITE.  The  blue  quartz  of  Finland. 

STELOCHl'TES.  See  Osteocolla. 

STE'LLA.  (From  g-rAXw,  to  arise.)  A star.  A 
bandage  with  many  crossings,  like  a star. 

STELLA'RIA.  (From  Stella , a star:  so  named 
from  the  star-like  appearance  of  its  flowers.)  /The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Decandria ; Or- 
der, Trigynia.  Stitchwort. 

STELLATUS.  (From  Stella , a star.)  Stellate. 
Starlike.  Applied  to  the  nectary  of  the  Stapelia , &c. 

STELLAT.E.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting 
of  such  as  have  stellate  leaves,  and  quadrified  corolla . 
mostly  tetrandrous ; as  Galium,  Asperula,  Rubea  tine 
torum,&c. 

STE'MA.  (From  <rvut,  to  stand.)  The  penis. 

Stemless  milkvctch.  See  Jistrgalus  excapus. 

STENO,  Nicholas,  was  born  at  Copenhagen,  in 
1638.  Having  studied  with  great  diligence,  under  the 
celebrated  Bartholin,  he  passed  several  years  in  visiting 
the  best  schools  in  different  parts  of  Europe.  His  re- 
putation was  then  increased,  so  that  about  the  age  of 
29  he  was  appointed  Physician  to  Ferdinand  II.  Grand 
, Duke  of  Tuscany,  with  a liberal  salary.  He  was 

307 


D d d 2 


STE 


STE 


afterward  honoured  with  the  esteem  of  Cosmo  III.  who 
selected  him  as  preceptor  to  his  son.  He  had  been  led, 
by  the  eloquence  of  Bossuet,  to  change  from  the  Pro- 
testant to  the  Roman  Catholic  persuasion ; which 
proved  an  obstacle  to  his  accepting  the  invitation  of 
Frederick  III.  to  return  to  Copenhagen  ; but  the  suc- 
ceeding King  of  Denmark,  not  imposing  any  religious 
restraint,  he  was  induced  about  the  year  1672  to  go  to 
his  native  city,  where  he  was  appointed  professor  of 
anatomy.  But  finding  his  situation  less  agreeable  than 
he  had  expected,  he  resumed  the  education  of  the 
young  prince  at  Florence.  Some  time  after  this  he 
embraced  the  ecclesiastical  profession,  was  speedily  ap- 
pointed a bishop,  and, then  vicar  apostolical  to  all  the 
states  of  the  north,  in  which  capacity  he  became  a 
zealous  preacher  in  various  parts  of  Germany,  and 
died  in  the  course  of  his  labours  in  1686.  The  works 
extant  by  him  relate  principally  to  medical  subjects. 
He  was  a diligent  cultivator  of  anatomy,  and  made 
some  discoveries  relative  to  the  minute  structure  of  the 
eye,  and  other  parts ; which  are  detailed  in  papers 
communicated  to  the  academy  of  Copenhagen,  and  in 
some  small  works  published  by  himself. 

Stenothora'ces.  (From  grvof.  narrow,  and  6(opa\, 
the  chest.)  Those  who  have  narrow  chests  are  so  called. 

STERILITY.  Sterilitas.  Barrenness.  In  women 
this  sometimes  happens  from  a miscarriage,  or  violent 
labour,  injuring  some  of  the  genital  parts;  but  one  of 
the  most  frequent  causes  is  the  suppression  of  the  men- 
strual flux.  There  are  other  causes,  however,  arising 
from  various  diseases  incident  to  those  parts ; by  which 
the  uterus  may  be  unfit  to  receive  or  retain  the  male 
seed; — from  the  tuba?  Fallopianse  being  too  short,  or 
having  lost  their  erective  power;  in  either  of  which 
cases  no  conception  can  take  place ; — from  universal 
debility  and  relaxation ; or  a local  debility  of  the  ge- 
nital system  ; by  which  means  the  parts  having  lost 
their  tone,  or  contractile  power,  the  semen  is  thrown 
off  immediately  post  coitum ; — from  imperforation  of 
the  vagina,  of  the  uterus,  Or  tub®,  or  from  diseased 
ova,  &c. 

STERNO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word. be- 
long to  muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  sternum  ; as, 

Sterno-cleido-hyoideus.  See  Sterno-hyoideus. 

Sterno-cleido  mastoideus.  Sterno-mastoideus , 

and  cleido-mastoideus , of  Albinus.  Mastoideus , of 
Douglas  and  Cowper;  and  sterno-clavio-mastoidien, 
of  Dumas.  A muscle,  on  the  anterior  and  lateral  part 
of  the  neck,  which  turns  the  head  to  one  side,  and 
bends  it  forward.  It  arises  by  two  distinct  origins ; the 
anterior  tendinous  and  fleshy,  from  the  top  of  the  ster- 
num near  its  junction  with  the  clavicle  ; the  posterior 
fleshy,  from  the  upper  and  anterior  part  of  the  clavicle. 
Both  unite  a little  above  the  anterior  articulation  of  the 
clavicle,  to  form  one  muscle,  which  runs  obliquely  up- 
wards and  outwards  to  be  inserted,  by  a thick  strong 
tendon,  into  the  mastoid  process  of  the  temporal  bone, 
which  it  surrounds ; and  gradually  becoming  thinner, 
is  inserted  as  far  back  as  the  lambdoidal  suture. 

Sterno-costales.  Vesalius  considered  these  as 
forming  a single  muscle  on  each  side  of  a triangulaf 
shape ; hence  we  find  the  name  of  triangularis 
adopted  by  Douglas  and  Albinus;  butVerheyen,  who 
first  taught  that  they  ought  to  be  described  as  four  or 
five  distinct  muscles,  gave  them  the  name  of  sterna 
costales ; and  in  this  he  is  very  properly  followed  by 
Winslow,  Haller,  and  Lieutaud. 

These  muscles  are  situated  at  each  side  of  the  under 
surface  of  the  sternum,  upon  the  cartilages  of  the  third, 
fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  ribs.  Their  number  varies  in 
different  subjects;  very  often  there  are  only  three, 
sometimes  five,  and  even  six,  but  most  usually  we  find 
only  four. 

The  lowermost  of  the  sterno-costales,  or  what  would 
be  called  the  inferior  portion  of  the  triangularis,  arises 
tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  edge  and  inner  surface 
of  the  lower  part  of  the  cartilago  ensiformis,  where  its 
fibres  intermix  with  those  of  the  diaphragm  and  trans- 
versalis  abdominis.  Its  fibres  run  nearly  in  a trans- 
verse direction,  and  are  inserted,  by  a broad  thin  ten- 
don, into  the  inner  surface  of  the  cartilage  of  the  sixth 
rib,  and  lower  edge  of  that  of  the  fifth. 

The  second  and  largest  of  the  sterno-costales,  arises 
tendinous  from  the  cartilago  ensiformis  and  lower  part 
of  the  sternum,  laterally,  and,  running  a little  obliquely 
outwards,  is  inserted  into  the  lower  edge  of  the  car- 
tilage of  the  fifth,  and  sometimes  of  the  fourth  rib. 

3hd 


The  third  arises  tendinous  from  the  sides  of  the 
middle  part  of  the  sternum,  near  the  cartilages  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  ribs,  and  ascending  obliquely  outwards 
is  inserted  into  the  cartilage  of  the  third  rib. 

The  fourth  and  uppermost,  which  is  the  most  fre- 
quently wanting,  arises  tendinous  from  the  beginning 
of  the  cartilage  of  the  third  rib  and  the  adjacent  part 
of  the  sternum,  and  running  almost  perpendicularly 
upwards,  is  inserted  by  a thin  tendon  (which  covers  a 
part  of  the  second  internal  intercostal,)  into  the  car- 
tilage and  beginning  of  the  bony  part  of  the  second 
rib. 

All  these  muscles  are  more  or  less  intermixed  with 
one  another  at  their  origin,  and  this  probably  occa- 
sioned them  to  be  considered  as  one  muscle.  Fallo- 
pius informs  us,  that  the  plate  Vesalius  has  given  of 
them  was  taken  from  a dog,  in  which  animal  they  are 
much  larger  than  in  man.  Douglas  has  endeavoured 
to  account  for  this  difference,  but  his  explanation  is  far 
from  being  satisfactory. 

Sterno-hyoideus.  As  this  muscle  arises  from  the 
clavicle,  as  well  as  from  the  sternum,  Winslow  calls  it 
sterno-cleido-hyoideus.  It  is  a long,  flat,  and  thin  mus- 
cle, situated  obliquely  between  the  sternum  and  os 
hyoides,  behind  the  lower  part  of  the  mastoideus,  and 
covering  the  sterno-thyroideus  and  the  hyo-thyroideus. 
It  arises,  by  very  short  tendinous  fibres,  from  the  car- 
tilaginous part  of  the  first  rib,  from  the  upper  and  inner 
part  of  the  sternum,  from  the  capsular  ligament  that 
connects  that  bone  with  the  clavicle,  and  commonly 
from  a small  part  of  the  clavicle  itself;  from  thence, 
ascending  along  the  anterior  and  lateral  part  of  the 
neck,  we  see  it  united  to  its  fellow,  opposite  to  the  in- 
ferior part  of  the  larynx,  by  means  of  a thin  mem- 
brane, which  forms  a kind  of  linea  alba.  After  this 
the  two  muscles  separate  again,  and  each  passing  over 
the  side  of  the  thyroid  cartilage,  is  inserted  into  the 
basis  of  the  os  hyoides,  immediately  behind  the  inser- 
tion of  the  last  described  muscle. 

Its  use  is  to  draw  the  os  hyoides  downwards. 
^Sterno-mastoideus.  See  Sterno-cleido-mastoideus. 

Sterno-thyroideus.  Sterno-thyroidien,  of  Du- 
mas. This  is  flat  and  thin,  like  the  sterno-hyoideus, 
but  longer  and  broader.  It  is  situated  at  the  forepart 
of  the  neck,  between  the  sternum  and  thyroid  carti- 
lage, and  behind  the  sterno-hyoideus.  It  arises  broad 
and  fleshy  from  the  upper  and  inner  part  of  the  ster- 
num, between  the  cartilages  of  the  first  and  second 
ribs,  from  each  of  which  it  receives  some  few  fibres, 
as  well  as  from  the  clavicle,  where  it  joins  with  the 
sternum.  From  thence,  growing  somewhat  narrower, 
it  ascends,  and,  passing  over  the  thyroid  gland  and  the 
cricoid  cartilage,  is  inserted  tendinous  into  the  lower 
and  posterior  edge  of  the  rough  line  of  the  thyroid  car- 
tilage, immediately  under  the  insertion  of  the  sterno- 
hyoideus.  Now  and  then  a few  of  its  fibres  pass  on 
to  the  os  hyoides.  Its  use  is  to  draw  the  thyroid  car- 
tilage, and  consequently  the  larynx,  downwards. 

STE'RNUM.  Pectoris  os.  The  breast-bone.  The 
sternum,  os  pectoris,  or  breast-bone,  is  the  oblong, 
flat  bone,  placed  at,  the  forepart  of  the  thorax.  The 
ossification  of  this  bone  in  the  foetus  begins  from  many 
different  points  at  the  same  time,  we  find  it,  in  young 
subjects,  composed  of  several  bones  united  by  carti- 
lages ; but  as  we  advance  in  life,  most  of  these  car- 
tilages ossify,  and  the  sternum,  in  the  adult  state,  is 
found  to  consist  of  three,  and  sometimes  only  of  two 
pieces,  the  two  lower  portions  being  united  into  one  ; 
and  very  often,  in  old  subjects,  the  whole  is  formed  into 
one  bone.  But,  even  in  the  latter  case,  we  may  still 
observe  the  marks  of  its  former  divisions ; so  that,  in 
describing  the  bone,  we  may  very  properly  divide  it 
into  its  upper,  middle,  and  inferior  portions. 

The  upper  portion  forms  an  irregular  square, which, 
without  much  reason,  has,  by  many  writers,  been  com- 
pared to  tile  figure  of  a heart  as  it  is  painted  on  cards. 
It  is  of  considerable  thickness,  especially  at  its  upper 
part.  Its  anterior  surface  is  irregular,  and  slightly  con- 
vex : posteriorly,  it  is  somewhat  concave.  Its  upper 
middle  part  is  hollowed,  to  make  way  for  the  trachea. 
On  each  side,  superiorly,  we  observe  an  oblong  articu- 
lating surface,  covered  with  cartilage  in  the  recent  sub- 
ject, for  receiving  the  ends  of  the  clavicles.  Imme- 
diately below  this,  on  each  side,  the  bone  becomes 
thinner,  and  we  observe  a rough  surface  for  receiving 
the  cartilage  of  the  first  rib,  and,  almost  close  to  the  in- 
ferior edge  of  this,  we  find  the  half  of  such  another 


STI 


STI 


surface,  which,  combined  with  a similar  surface  in  the 
middle  portion  of  the  sternum,  serves  for  the  articula- 
tion of  the  cartilage  of  the  second  rib. 

The  middle  portion  is  much  longer,  narrower,  and 
thinner  than  the  former ; but  is  somewhat  broader  and 
thinner  below  than  above,  where  it  is  connected  with 
the  upper  portion.  The  whole  of  its  anterior  surface 
is  slightly  convex,  and  within  it  is  slightly  concave.  Its 
edge,  on  each  side,  affords  four  articulating  surfaces, 
for  the  third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  ribs ; and  parts  of 
articulating  surfaces  at  its  upper  and  lower  parts,  for 
the  second  and  seventh  ribs.  About  the  middle  of  this 
portion  of  the  sternum  we  sometimes  find  a consider- 
able hole,  large  enough  in  some  subjects  to  admit  the 
end  of  the  little  finger.  Sylvius  seems  to  have  been 
the  first  who  described  it.  Riolanus  and  some  others 
after  him  have,  without  reason,  supposed  it  to  be  more 
frequent  in  women  than  in  men.  In  the  recent  subject 
it  is  closed  by  a cartilaginous  substance  ; and,  as  it 
does  not  seem  destined  for  the  transmission  of  vessels, 
as  some  writers  have  asserted,  we  may,  perhaps  very 
properly,  with  Hunauld,  consider  it  as  an  accidental 
circumstance,  occasioned  by  an  interruption  of  the  os- 
sification, before  the  whole  of  this  part  of  the  bone  is 
completely  ossified. 

The  third  and  inferior  portion  of  the  sternum  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  former  by  a line,  which  is  seldom  alto- 
gether obliterated,  even  in  the  oldest  subjects.  It  is 
smaller  than  the  other  parts  of  the  bone,  and  descends 
between  the  ribs,  so  as  to  have  been  considered  as  an 
appendix  to  the  rest  of  the  sternum.  From  its  shape, 
and  its  being  constantly  in  a state  of  cartilage  in  young 
subjects,  it  has  been  commonly  named  cartilago  xi- 
phoides,  ensiformis , or  sword-like  cartilage ; though 
many  of  the  ancients  gave  the  name  of  xiphoides  to  the 
whole  sternum ; comparing  the  first  two  bones  to  the 
handle,  and  this  appendix  to  the  blade  of  the  sword. 
The  shape  of  this  appendix  varies  in  different  subjects ; 
in  some  it  is  longer  and  more  pointed,  in  others  shorter 
and  more  obtuse.  Veslingius  has  seen  it  reaching  as 
low  as  the  navel,  and  incommoding  the  motion  of  the 
trunk  forwards.  In  general  it  terminates  obtusely,  or 
in  a single  point ; sometimes,  however,  it  is  bifurcated, 
and  Eustachius  and  Haller  have  seen  it  trifid.  Very 
often  we  find  it  perforated,  for  the  transmission  of 
branches  of  the  mammary  artery.  In  the  adult  it  is 
usually  ossified  and  tipped  with  cartilage,  but  it  very 
often  continues  cartilaginous  through  life,  and  Haller 
once  found  it  in  this  state  in  a woman  who  died  in  her 
hundredth  year. 

The  substance  of  the  sternum,  internally,  is  of  a 
light,  spongy  texture,  covered  externally  with  a thin 
bony  plate ; hence  it  happens  that  this  bone  is  easily 
fractured.  From  the  description  we  have  given  of  it, 
its  uses  may  be  easily  understood.  We  have  seen  it 
serving  for  the  articulation  of  seven  true  ribs  on  each 
side,  and  hence  we  shall  find  it  of  considerable  use  in 
respiration.  We  likewise  observed,  that  it  is  articu- 
lated with  each  of  the  clavicles.  It  serves  for  the  origin 
and  insertion  of  several  muscles  ; it  supports  the  medi- 
astinum ; and  lastly,  defends  the  heart  and  lungs  ; and 
it  is  observable,  that  we  find  a similar  bone  in  almost 
all  animals  that  have  lungs,  and  even  in  such  as  have 
no  ribs,  of  which  latter  we  have  an  instance  in  the 
frog. 

Sternutamento  ria.  So  called  because  the  pow- 
dered flowers  and  roots  have  the  property  of  exciting 
sneezing.  See  Achillea  ptarmica. 

STE'RTOR.  A noisy  kind  of  respiration,  as  is  ob- 
served in  apoplexy.  A snoring  or  snorting. 

STHE'NIA.  A term  employed  by  the  followers  of 
Dr.  Brown,  to  denote  that  state  of  the  body  which  dis- 
poses to  inflammatory  diseases,  in  opposition  to  those 
of  debility,  which  arise  from  asthenia. 

STIBIA'LIS.  (From  stibium,  antimony.)  An  anti- 
monial  or  medicine,  the  chief  ingredient  of  which  is 
antimony. 

STIBIC  ACID.  Berzelius’s  name  of  the  yellow  oxide 
of  antimony. 

Stibii  essentia.  Antimonial  wine. 

STIBIOUS  ACID.  So  Berzelius  calls  the  white 
oxide  of  antimony. 

STI'BIUM.  (Yn6iov  : from  to  shine.)  An 

ancient  name  of  antimony.  See  Antimony. 

STI'GMA.  CZnyya : from  5 -t^w,  to  inflict  blows.) 

I.  A small  red  speck  in  the  skin,  occasioning  no  eleva- 
tion of  the  cuticle.  Stigmata  are  generally  distinct,  or 


apart  from  each  other.  They  sometimes  assume  a livid 
colour,  and  are  then  termed  petechia. 

II.  A natural  mark  or  spot  on  the  skin.  See  Ncevus 

maternus. 

III.  That  part  of  the  female  organ  of  a plant  which 
is  placed  at  the  summit  of  the  style.  It  is  an  indispen- 
sable part  of  the  fructification,  and  consists  of  a vast 
number  of  absorbing  papillae,  rarely  observable  by  the 
naked  eye,  but  best  seen  in  the  Mirabilis  jalapa.  Bo- 
tanists distinguish  the  following  differences  in  the  form 
of  stigmas: 

1.  Globose;  as  in  Trachelium. 

2.  Capitate , round,  but  flat  below ; as  in  Sorbus  and 

Vinca.  t 

3.  Acute , ending  in  a point ; as  in  Piscidia. 

4.  Obtuse ; as  in  Nigrina. 

5.  Clubbed;  as  in  Genipi. 

6.  Emarginate,  cut ; as  in  Denlaria. 

7.  Peltate ; as  in  Garcinia. 

8.  Uncinate , acute  and  reflected ; as  in  Lantana. 

9.  Triangular  ; as  in  Lilium  candidum. 

10.  Trilobed;  as  in  Tulipa  gesneriana. 

11.  Petaliform ; as  in  Iris  germanica. 

12.  Convolute ; as  in  Crocus. 

13.  Revolute ; as  in  Leontodon. 

14.  Pennicilliform , resembling  a pencil-brush  ; as  in 
Milium  paspalium. 

15.  Perforatum;  as  in  Sloanea 

16.  Concave ; as  in  Viola. 

17.  Bifid ; as  in  Menyanthes. 

18.  Trifid ; as  in  Amaryllis. 

19.  MulUfid ; as  in  Castus. 

20.  Striate ; as  in  Papaver. 

21.  Plumose , on  each  side,  like  a hairy  pen ; as  in 
grasses. 

22.  Four- sided  ; as  in  Amyris. 

23.  Pubescent , covered  with  hair ; as  in  Vida: 

24.  Simple,  not  differing  from  the  stile  at  its  summit ; 
as  in  Galanthus  and  Hippuris. 

25.  Sessile , on  the  germen ; there  being  no  stile. 

The  stigma  is  always  more  or  less  moist  with  a pecu- 
liar viscid  fluid,  which  in  some  plants  is  ^o  conspicu- 
ous as  to  form  a large  drop,  though  never  big  enough  to 
fall  to  the  ground.  This  moisture  is  designed  for  the 
reception  of  the  pollen,  which  explodes  on  meeting  with 
it;  and  hence  the  seeds  are  rendered  capable. of  ripen- 
ing, which,  though  in  many  plants  fully  formed,  they 
would  not  otherwise  be. 

STILBITE.  See  Zeolite. 

STILBO'MA.  (From  g-iASw,  to  polish.)  A cosmetic 

STILLICI'DIUM.  (From  stillo,  to  drop,  and  cado, 
to  fall.)  A strangury,  or  discharge  of  the  urine  drop 
by  drop.  Also  the  pumping  upon  a part. 

STILPNOSIDERITE.  A brownish  black-coloured 
mineral,  said  to  contain  phosphoric  acid.  It  occurs 
along  with  brown  iron  in  Saxony  and  Bavaria. 

STI'MMI.  ’Eriyyi-  Antimony. 

STIMULANT.  (Stimulans  ; from  stimulo,  to  stir 
up.)  That  which  possesses  a power  of  exciting  the 
animal  energy.  Stimulants  are  divided  into, 

1.  Stimulantia  tonica ; as  sinapi , canthandes , Ay- 
drargyri  praparationes. 

2.  Stimulantia  diffusibilia ; as  alkali  volatile , elec 
tricity , heat , &c. 

3.  fitimulantia  cardiaca  ; as  cinnamomum , nux  mos- 
chata , wine , &c. 

STIMULUS.  ( Stimulus , i.  m. ; from  5-nypof,  stig- 
mulus , per  sync,  stimulus , a sting  or  spur.)  That  which 
rouses  the  action  or  energy  of  a part. 

Stinking  lettuce.  See  Lactuca  virosa. 

STINK  STONE.  Swinestone.  A variety  of  com- 
pact lucullite,  a subspecies  of  limestone. 

STIPES.  (Stipes,  itis.  in. ; from  the  Greek,  g-inr off.) 
A stipe,  or  stem  of  a fungus;  fern,  or  palm. 

STIPUL  A.  A leafy  appendage  to  the  proper  leaves, 
or  to  their  footstalks.  In  some  instances  they  are  so 
like  unto  leaves,  that  they  are  believed  to  be  so,  and 
can  only  be  distinguished  from  leaves  by  their  situation 
on  the  footstalk.  Stipulae  are, 

1.  Solitary  ; as  in  Astragalus  onobrychis. 

2.  In  pairs ; as  in  Lathyrus  annuus. 

3.  Lateral , on  the  side  of  the  footstalk ; as  in  Lotus 
tetraphyllus. 

4.  Oppositifoliar,  in  the  side  of  the  opposite  leaves; 
as  in  Trifoliumpratev.se. 

5.  Extrafoliaceous , external  with  resoect  to  the  leaf 
or  footstalk ; as  in  Astragalus  onobrlchte. 


309 


STR 


STO 


6.  Intrafolxaceous , internal ; as  in  Moms  nigra  and 
alba. 

7.  Caducous , falling  off  before  the  leaves  are  ex- 
panded ; as  in  Prunus  avium. 

8.  Persistent , remaining  after  the  fall  of  the  leaf;  as 
In  Trifolium  pratense. 

9.  Deciduous , falling  with  the  leaves ; as  in  many 
stipulated  plants. 

10.  Spines  cent,  becomes  thorns  ; as  in  Robinia  pseu- 
dacacia. 

11.  Sessile ; as  in  Pisum  sativum. 

12.  Adnate ; as  in  Rosa  canina. 

13.  Decurrent ; as  in  Crotullaria  sagittalis. 

14.  Sheathed ; as  in  Hedysum  vaginale. 

la.  Lanceolate  ; as  in  Cistus  helianthemum. 

16.  Subulate;  as  in  Cassia glandulosa. 

17.  Sagittate;  as  in  Pisum  maritimum. 

18.  Lunate ; as  in  Lathyrus  tingitanus. 

19.  Ovate ; in  Ononis  repens. 

20.  Cordate ; in  Ocymum  sanctum. 

21.  Filiform ; in  Ononis  mauritanica. 

22.  Foliaceous  ; in  Sambucus  ebulus. 

23.  Entire  ; in  Vicia  cracca. 

24.  Serrate  ; in  Pisum  sativum. 

25.  Ciliate ; in  Passiflora  feetida. 

26.  Toothed;  in  Or obus  lathy roides. 

27.  Pinnatifid ; in  Viola  tricolor. 

STIPULAR1S.  Stipular:  belonging  to  the  stipula 

of  plants  ; as  the  spina  stipularis  of  the  Mimosa  nilotica 
and  horrida.  * 

STIZOLO'BIUM.  The  cowage.  See  Dolichos. 

STOE'CHAS.  (From  q-oixaSes,  the  islands  on  which 
it  grew.)  See  Lavendula  stcechas. 

Stoechas  arabica.  See  Lavendula  stcechas. 

Stoechas  citrina.  See  Gnaphalium  stachas. 

STOLO.  ( Stolo , onis.  m. ; a shoot,  branch,  or  twig.) 
A sucker  or  scyon.  A runner  which  proceeds  from  the 
roots  of  some  plants,  and  takes  root  in  the  earth.  It  is 
distinguished  into  a supraterraneous , which  runs  on 
the  surface  above  ground ; as  in  Fagaria  vesca,  and 
Potentilla  reptans ; and  subterraneous , which  runs 
under  the  surface,  as  in  Triticurn  repens , the  stolos  of 
which  are  erroneously  taken  for  the  roots. 

STOMACA'CE.  ( Stomacace , es.  f. ; from  5 -opa, 
the  mouth,  and  kokos , evil.)  Canker.  A fetor  in  the 
mouth,  with  a bloody  discharge  from  the  gums.  It  is 
generally  a symptom  of  the  scurvy.  It  is  also  a name 
for  the  scurvy. 

STOMACH.  (Stomachus,  chi.  m. ; from  5 -opa,  the 
mouth,  and  to  pour.)  Ventriculus ; called  also 
Anoccelia ; Gaster  ; JVedys.  A membraneous  recep- 
tacle, situated  in  the  epigastric  region,  which  receives 
the  food  from  the  oesophagus ; its  figure  is  somewhat 
oblong  and  round : it  is  largest  on  the  left  side,  and 
gradually  diminishes  towards  its  lower  orifice,  where 
it  is  the  least.  Its  superior  orifice,  where  the  oesopha- 
gus terminates,  is  called  the  cardia : the  inferior  orifice, 
where  the  intestine  begins,  the  pylorus.  The  anterior 
surface  is  turned  towards  the  abdominal  muscles,  and 
the  posterior  opposite  the  lumbar  vertebra.  It  has  two 
curvatures : the  first  is  called  the  great  curvature  of  the 
stomach,  and  extends  downwards  from  one  orifice  to 
the  other,  having  the  omentum  adhering  to  it;  the 
second  is  the  small  curvature,  which  is  also  between 
both  orifices,  but  superiorly  and  posteriorly.  The  sto- 
mach, like  the  intestinal  canal,  is  composed  of  three 
coats,  or  membranes  : 1.  The  outermost , which  is  very 
firm,  and  from  the  peritonaeum.  2.  The  muscular , 
which  is  very  thick,  and  composed  of  various  muscular 
fibres  ; and,  3.  The  innermost , or  villous  coat , which 
is  covered  with  exhaling  and  inhaling  vessels,  and  mu- 
cus. These  coats  are  connected  together  by  cellular 
membrane  The  glands  of  th£  stomach  which  sepa- 
rate the  mucus  are  situated  between  the  villous  and 
muscular  coat,  in  the  cellular  structure.  The  arteries 
of  the  stomach  come  chiefly  from  the  cceliac  artery, 
and  are  distinguished  into  the  coronary,  gastro  epiploic, 
and  short  arteries ; they  are  accompanied  by  veins 
which  have  similar  names,  and  which  terminate  in  the 
vena  portae.  The  nerves  of  the  stomach  are  very  nu- 
merous, and  come  from  the  eighth  pair  and  intercostal 
nerves.  The  lymphatic  vessels  are  distributed  through- 
out the  whole  substance,  and  proceed  immediately  to 
the  thoracic  duct.  The  use  of  the  stomach  is  to  excite 
hunger  and  partly  thirst,  to  receive  the  food  from  the 
oesophagus,  and  to  retain  it,  till,  by  the  motion  of  the 
stomach,  the  admixture  of  various  fluids,  and  many 


other  changes,  it  is  rendered  fit  to  pass  the  right  orifice 
of  the  stomach,  and  afford  chyle  to  the  intestine* 

Stomach , inflammation  of.  See  Gastritis. 

[Stomach  pump.  This  is  an  instrument  introduced 
of  late  for  the  purpose  of  emptying  the  stomach  of  iis 
contents,  when  poison  has  been  swallowed.  It  is  a 
long  catheter  made  of  gum  elastic,  which  being  intro- 
duced into  the  mouth,  is  passed  into  the  (Esophagus  and 
pressed  forwards,  until  the  point  reaches  the  stomach 
A syringe  adapted  to  the  upper  end  is  then  applied,  and 
the  stomach  is  emptied  of  itstfluid  contents.  If  poison 
be  swallowed  in  a liquid  state,  it  may  thus  be  most  ef- 
fectually removed,  and  rendered  harmless.  A.] 

STOMACHIC.  (Stomachicus ; from  5 -opaxos,  the 
stomach.)  That  which  excites  and  strengthens  the 
action  of  the  stomach. 

Stoma'chica  passio.  A disorder  in  which  there 
is  an  aversion  to  food  ; even  the  thought  of  it  begets  a 
nausea,  anxiety,  cardialgia,  and  effusion  of  saliva,  and 
often  a vomiting.  Fasting  is  more  tolerable  than  eat- 
ing ; if  obliged  to  eat,  a pain  follows  that  is  worse  than 
hunger  itself. 

STO'MACHUS.  See  Stomach. 

STONE.  See  Calculus. 

STONE-CROP.  See  Sedum  acre. 

STO'RAX.  Xropal;.  See  Styrax . 

Storax , liquid.  See  Liquidambra. 

Storax  liquida.  See  Liquidambra. 

Storax  rubra  officinalis.  Cascarilla  barn  was 
so  called. 

Storax , white.  See  Myroxylon  peruiferum. 

STORCK,  Anthony,  a medical  professor  of  con- 
siderable note  at  Vienna,  who  succeeded  the  cele- 
brated Van  Swieten  as  president  and  director  of  the 
faculty  of  medicine  in  that  university,  and  was  also 
honoured  with  the  appointment  of  principal  consulting 
physician  to  the  Empress  Maria  Theresa.  He  distin- 
guished himself  chiefly  by  a long  and  assiduous  course 
of  experiments,  with  various  narcotic  vegetables,  as 
hemlock,  henbane,  stramonium,  aconite,  colchicuru, 
&c. ; of  which,  though  he  appears  to  have  overrated 
the  efficacy,  yet  certainly  he  had  the  merit  of  calling 
the  attention  of  practitioners  to  a class  of  active  reme- 
dies, which  may  often  be  highly  useful  under  prudent 
management.  His  various  tracts  on  these  subjects 
were  printed  between  1760  and  1771,  and  they  have 
since  passed  through  several  editions  and  translations. 
He  was  also  author  of  a collection  of  cases,  which  oc- 
curred under  his  observation  in  the  hospital  at  Vienna ; 
and  this  work  was  afterward  continued  by  his  Suc- 
cessor, Dr.  Collin. 

STRABALI'SMUS.  See  Strabismus. 

STRABI  SMUS.  (From  $ -pafiigw,  to  squint.)  Stra 
balismns : Strabositas.  Squinting.  An  affection  of 
the  eye  by  which  a person  sees  objects  in  an  oblique 
manner,  from  the  axis  of  vision  being  distorted.  Cul- 
len arranges  this  disease  in  the  Class  Locales , and 
Order  Dyscinesice.  He  distinguishes  three  species : — 

1.  Strabismus  habitualis , when  from  a custom  of 
using  only  one  eye. 

2.  Strabismus  commodis,  when  one  eye  in  comparison 
with  the  other,  from  greater  weakness,  or,  mobility, 
cannot  accommodate  itself  to  the  other. 

3.  Strabismus  necessarius , when  some  change  takes 
place  in  the  situation  or  figure  of  the  eye,  or  a part 
of  it. 

STR  A B O'STTA  S.  See  Strabismus. 

STRAHLSTEIN.  See  Actinolite. 

Stra'men  camelorum.  Camel’s  hay.  See  Andro- 
pogon  schcenanthus. 

Strammo'nium.  See  Stramonium. 

STRAMO  NIUM.  (From  stramcn , straw  : so  called 
from  its  fibrous  roots.)  See  Datura  stramonium. 

Stramonium  officinale.  See  Datura  stramonium. 

Stramonium  spinosum.  See  Datura  stramonium. 

Stra'ngalis.  (From  g-payyevu,  to  torment.)  A 
hard,  painful  tumour  in  the  breast,  from  milk. 

STRANGURIA.  See  Strangury. 

STRA'NGURY.  ( Stranguria , ce.  f. ; from  fpayl, 
a drop,  and  ovpov,  urine.)  A difficulty  in  making 
water,  attended  with  pain  and  dripping.  See  Ischuria. 

STRATIO'TES.  (From  rpa7o(,  an  army:  so  named 
from  its  virtues  in  healing  fresh  wounds,  and  its  use- 
fulness to  soldiers.)  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

Stratio'ticum.  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

STRAWBERRY.  See  Fragaria. 

STREATHAM.  A village  in  Surrey,  where  is  a 


STR 


STR 


weak  purging  water,  drunk  to  the  amount  of  one,  two, 
or  more  pints  in  a morning. 

STRE'MMA.  (Srpska:  from  s-ps^w,  to  turn.)  A 
strain  or  sprain  of  the  parts  about  a joint. 

STRIATUS.  Striate.  Applied  to  stems,  seeds,  &c.; 
as  the  stem  of  the  CEnanthe  Vistula,  and  seeds  of  the 
Conium  maculatum. 

STRICTURE.  Strittura.  A diminution,  or  con- 
tracted state  of  some  tube,  or  duct,  of  the  body,  as  the 
(Esophagus,  intestines,  urethra,  vagina,  &x.  They  are 
either  organic  or  spasmodic. 

STRICT  US.  In  botanical  language  it  means  straight, 
as  Caulis  strictus. 

STRI'DOR.  A noise  of  crashing. 

Stridor  dentium.  Grinding  of  the  teeth. 

STRIGA.  A species  of  pubescence  of  plants,  white, 
bristle-like,  with  broad  bases  mostly  decumbent ; as  in 
Borago  officinalis. 

Stri'gil.  Strigilis.  An  instrument  to  scrape  off 
the  sweat  during  the  gymnastic  exercises  of  the 
ancients,  and  in  their  baths:  strigils  were  made  of 
metal,  horn,  or  ivory,  and  were  curved.  Some  were 
made  of  linen. 

Strigme'ntum.  The  strigment,  filth,  or  sordes, 
scraped  from  the  skin,  in  baths  and  places  of  exercises. 

STROBILUS.  A cone.  A species  of  pericarpium, 
or  seed-vessel.  A catkin  hardened  and  enlarged  into  a 
seed-vessel;  an  example  of  which  is  in  the  pinus,  or 
fir.  It  is  either  conic , cylindric , ovate , globose,  squa - 
mose , or  spurious,  consisting  of  membraneous  and  not 
woody  scales ; as  in  Origanum  marjorana. 

STRONTIA.  (So  called  because  it  was  first  found 
in  a lead  mine  at  Strontian,  in  Scotland.)  A grayish 
white-coloured  earth,  found  in  combination  with  car- 
bonic acid  in  the  mineral  called  Strontianite. 

Pure  strontia  is  of  a grayish-white  colour ; a pungent, 
acrid  taste ; and  when  powdered  in  a mortar,  the  dust 
that  rises  irritates  the  lungs  and  nostrils.  Its  specific 
gravity  approaches  that  of  barytes.  It  requires  rather 
more  than  160  parts  of  water  at  60°  to  dissolve  it ; but 
of  boiling  water  much  less.  On  cooling,  it  crystallizes 
in  thin,  transparent,  quadrangular  plates,  generally 
parallelograms,  seldom  exceeding  a quarter  of  an  inch 
in  length,  and  frequently  adhering  together.  The  edges 
are  most  frequently  bevelled  from  each  side.  Some- 
times they  assume  a cubic  form.  These  crystals  con- 
tain about  .68  of  water ; are  soluble  in  51.4  times  their 
weight  of  water  at  60°,  and  in  little  more  than  twice 
their  weight  of  boiling  water.  They  give  a blood-red 
colour  to  the  flame  of  burning  alkohol.  The  solution 
of  strontia  changes  vegetable  blues  to  a green.  Stron- 
tia combines  with  sulphur  either  in  the  wet  or  dry  way, 
and  its  sulphuret  is  soluble  in  water. 

In  its  properties,  strontia  has  a considerable  affinity 
to  barytes.  It  differs  from  it  chiefly  in  being  infusible, 
much  less  soluble,  of  a different  form,  weaker  in  its 
affinities,  and  not  poisonous.  Its  saline  compounds 
afford  differences  more  marked. 

The  basis  of  strontia  is  strontium,  a metal  first  pro- 
cured by  Sir  H.  Davy,  in  1808,  precisely  in  the  same 
manner  as  barium,  to  which  it  is  very  analogous,  but 
has  less  lustre.  It  appeared  fixed,  difficultly  fusible, 
and  not  volatile.  It  became  converted  into  strontia  by 
exposure  to  air,  and  when  thrown  into  water,  decom- 
posed it  with  great  violence,  producing  hydrogen  gas, 
and  making  the  water  a solution  of  strontia.  By  ig- 
niting the  mineral  strontianite  intensely  with  charcoal 
powder,  strontia  is  cheaply  procured. 

Strontianite.  See  Heavy  spar. 

STRONTIUM.  The  metallic  base  of  strotnia.  See 
Strontia. 

STROPHIOLTJM.  A little  curved  gland-like  part 
near  the  scar  or  base  of  some  seeds ; as  that  of  Asarum, 
but  especially  in  several  papilionaceous  genera,  as 
Ulex,  Spartium,  & c. 

Stro'phos.  (From  q-ptcpo),  to  turn.)  A twisting  of 
the  intestines. 

STRO'PHULUS.  A papulous  eruption  peculiar  to 
infants,  and  exhibiting  a variety  of  forms,  which  are 
described  by  Dr.  Willan,  under  the  titles  of  intertmc- 
tus , albidus,  confertus , volaticus,  and  candidus. 

1.  Strophulus  intertinctus , usually  called  the  red 
gum,  and,  by  the  French,  Effloresce  ce  benignc.  The 
papulae  characterizing  this  affection,  rise  sensibly  above 
the  level  of  the  cuticle,  are  of  a vivid  red  colour,  and 
commonly  distinct  from  each  other.  Their  number 
and  extent  vary  much  in  different  cases.  They  ap- 


pear most  constantly  on  the  cheeks,  forearm,  and  back 
of  the  hand,  but  are  sometimes  diff  used  over  the  whole 
body.  The  papulae  are,  in  many  places,  intermixed 
with  stigmata,  and  often  with  red  patches  of  a larger 
size,  which  do  not,  however,  occasion  any  elevation  of 
the  cuticle.  A child’s  skin  thus  variegated,  somewhat 
resembles  a piece  of  red  printed  linen;  and  hence  this 
eruption  was  formerly  called  the  red  gown , a term 
which  is  still  retalned*in  several  counties  of  England, 
and  may  lie  found  in  old  dictionaries.  Medical  writers 
have  changed  the  original  word  for  one  of  a similar 
sound,  but  not  more  significant.  The  strophulus  inter- 
tinctus has  not,  in  general,  any  tendency  to  become  pus 
tular  ; a few  small  pustules,  containing  a straw-coloured 
watery  fluid,  occasionally  appear  on  the  back  of  the 
hand,  but  scarcely  merit  attention,  as  the  fluid  is  al- 
ways reabsorbed  in  a short  time,  without  breaking  the 
cuticle.  The  eruption  usually  terminates  in  scurf,  or 
exfoliation  of  the  cuticle ; its  duration,  however,  is  very 
uncertain ; the  papulae  and  spots  sometimes  remain  for 
a length  of  time  without  an  obvious  alteration ; some- 
times disappear  and  come  out  again  daily  ; but,  for  the 
most  part,  one  eruption  of  them  succeeds  another,  at 
longer  intervals,  and  with  more  regularity.  This  com- 
plaint occurs  chiefly  within  the  first  two  months  of 
lactation.  It  is  not  always  accompanied  with,  or  pre- 
ceded by  any  disorders  of  the  constitution,  but  appears 
occasionally  in  the  strongest  and  most  healthy  children. 
Some  authors  connect  it  with  aphthous  ulcerations 
common  in  children,  supposing  the  latter  to  be  a part 
of  the  same  disease  diffused  along  the  internal  surfaces 
of  the  mouth  and  intestines.  The  fact,  however,  seems 
to  be,  that  the  two  affections  alternate  with  each 
other:  for  those  infants  who  have  the  papulous  erup- 
tion on  the  skin  are  less  liable  to  aphthae ; and  when 
the  aphtha?  take  place  to  a considerable  degree,  the 
skin  is  generally  pale  and  free  from  eruption.  The 
strophulus  intertinctus  is,  by  most  writers,  said  to 
originate  from  an  acidity,  or  acrimonious  quality  of 
the  milk  taken  into  a child’s  stomach,  communicated 
afterward  to  the  blood,  and  stimulating  the  cutaneous 
excretories.  This  opinion  might,  without  difficulty,  be 
proved  to  have  little  foundation.  The  predisposition 
to  the  complaint  may  be  deduced  from  the  delicate  and 
tender  state  of  the  skin,  and  from  the  strong  determi- 
nation of  blood  to  the  surface,  which  evidently  takes 
place  in  infants.  The  papulous  eruption  is,  in  many 
cases,  connected  with  a weak,  irritable  state  of  the 
alimentary  canal,  and  consequent  indigestion.  For  if 
it  be  by  any  means  suddenly  repelled  from  the  surface, 
diarrhoea,  vomiting,  spasmodic  affections  of  the  bowels, 
and  often  general  disturbance  of  the  constitution  suc- 
ceed ; but  as  soon  as  it  reappears,  those  internal  com- 
plaints are  wholly  suspended.  Dr.  Armstrong  and 
others  have  particularly  noted  this  reciprocation,  which 
makes  the  red  gum,  at  times,  a disease  of  some  import- 
ance, though  in  its  usual  form  it  is  not  thought  to  be  in 
any  respect  dangerous.  On  their  remarks  a necessary 
caution  is  founded,  not  to  expose  infants  to  a stream 
of  very  cold  air,  nor  to  plunge  them  unseasonably  in  a 
cold  bath.  The  most  violent,  and  even  fatal  symp- 
toms, have  often  been  the  consequence  of  such  impru- 
dent conduct.  • 

2.  The  Strophulus  albidus,  by  some  termed  the 
white  gum , is  merely  a variety  of  strophulus  intertinc- 
tus, but  deserves  some  notice  on  account  of  the  differ- 
ent appearance  of  its  papulae.  In  place  of  those  de- 
scribed as  characterizing  the  red  gum,  there  is  a num- 
ber of  minute  whitish  specks,  a little  elevated,  and 
sometimes,  though  not  constantly,  surrounded  by  a 
slight  redness.  These  papulae,  when  their  tops  are 
removed,  do  not  discharge  any  fluid  ; it.  is,  however, 
probable,  that  they  are  originally  formed  by  the  depo- 
sition of  a fluid,  which  afterward  concretes  under  the 
cuticle.  They  appear  chiefly  on  the  face,  neck,  and 
breast,  and  are  more  permanent  than  the  papulae  of  the 
red  gum.  In  other  respects,  they  have  the  same  nature 
and  tendency,  and  require  a similar  plan  of  treatment. 
Although  a distinctive  name  has  been  applied  to  this 
eruption,  when  occurring  alone,  yet  it  is  proper  to  ob- 
serve, that,  in  a great  number  of  cases,  there  are  red 
papulae  and  spots  intermixed  with  it,  which  prove  its 
connexion  with  the  strophulus  intertinctus. 

3.  The  Strophulus  confertus.  An  eruption  of  nu- 
merous papulae,  varying  in  their  size,  appears  on  dif 
ferent  parts  of  the  body  in  Infants,  during  dentition, 
and  has  thence  been  denominated  the  tooth-rash.  It 

311 


STR 


STR 


is  sometimes  also  termed  the  rank  red  gum.  About 
the  fourth  or  fifth  month  after  birth,  an  eruption  of 
tliis  kind  usually  takes  place  on  the  cheeks  and  sides 
of  the  nose,  extending  sometimes  to  the  forehead  and 
arms,  but  rarely  to  the  trunk  or  body.  The  papulae  on 
the  face  are  smaller,  and  set  more  closely  together  than 
in  the  red  gum  ; their  colour  is  not  so  vivid,  but  they 
are  generally  more  permanent.  They  terminate  at 
length  with  slight  exfoliations  of  the  cuticle,  and  often 
appear  again  in  the  samp  places,  a short  time  after- 
ward. The  papulae  which,  in  this  complaint,  occasion- 
ally appear  on  the  back  or  loins,  are  much  larger,  and 
somewhat  more  distant  from  each  other,  than  those  on 
the  face.  They  are  often  surrounded  by  an  extensive 
circle  of  inflammation,  and  a few  of  them  contain  a 
semi-pellucid  watery  fluid,  which  is  reabsorbed  when 
the  inflammation  subsides.  In  the  seventh  or  eighth 
month,  the  strophulus  confertus  assumes  a somewhat 
different  form  ; one  or  two  large  irregular  patches  ap- 
pear on  the  arms,  shoulder,  or  neck  ; in  which  the  pa- 
pula: are  hard,  of  a considerable  size,  and  set  so  close 
together,  that  the  whole  surface  is  of  a high  red  co- 
lour. Most  commonly  the  forearm  is  the  seat  of  this 
eruption,  the  papulae  rising  first  on  the  back  of  the 
hand,  and  gradually  extending  upwards  along  the  arm. 
Sometimes,  however,  the  eruption  commences  at  the 
elbow,  and  proceeds  a little  upwards  and  downwards 
on  the  outside  of  the  arm.  It  arrives  at  its  height  in 
about  a fortnight ; the  papulae  then  begin  to  fade,  and 
become  fiat  at  the  top ; afterward  the  cuticle  exfo- 
liates from  the  part  affected,  which  remains  disco- 
loured, rough,  and  irregular,  for  a week  or  two  longer. 

An  obstinate  and  very  painful  modification  of  this 
disease  takes  place,  though  not  often,  on  the,  lower 
extremities.  The  papulae  spread  from  the  calves  of 
the  legs  to  the  thighs,  nates,  loins,  and  round  the  body, 
as  high  as  the  navel : being  very  numerous  and  close 
together,  they  produce  a continuous  redness  over  all 
these  parts. 

The  cuticle,  presently,  however,  shrivelled,  cracks  in 
various  places,  and  finally  separates  from  the  skin  in 
large  pieces.  During  this  process  a new  cuticle  is 
formed,  notwithstanding  which  the  complaint  recurs 
in  a short  time,  and  goes  through  the  same  course  as 
before.  In  this  manner  successive  eruptions  take  place, 
during  tile  course  of  three  or  four  months,  and  perhaps 
do  not  cease  till  the  child  is  one  year  old,  or  somewhat 
more.  Children  necessarily  suffer  great  uneasiness 
from  the  heat  and  irritation  occasioned  by  so  extensive 
an  eruption,  yet  while  they  are  affected  with  it,  they 
often  remain  free  from  any  internal  or  febrile  com- 
plaint. This  appearance  should  be  distinguished  from 
the  intertrigo  of  infants,  which  exhibits  a uniform, 
red,  smooth,  shining  surface,  without  papute ; and 
which  affects  only  the  lower  part  of  the  nates  and  in- 
side of  the  thighs,  being  produced  by  the  stimulus  of 
the  urine,  &c.  with  which  the  child’s  clothes  are  al- 
most constantly  wetted.  The  strophulus  confertus, 
where  the  child  is  otherwise  healthy,  is  generally  as- 
cribed to  a state  of  indigestion,  or  some  feverish  com- 
plaint of  the  mother  or  nurse.  Dr.  Willan,  however, 
asserts,  that  he  has  more  frequently  seen  the  eruption 
when  no  such  cause  was  evident.  It  may,  with  more 
probability,  be  considered  as  one  of  the  numerous  symp- 
toms of  irritation,  arising  from  the  inflamed  and  pain- 
ful state-of  the  gums  in  dentition  ; since  it  always  oc- 
curs during  that  process,  and  disappears  soon  after  the 
first  teeth  have  cut  the  gums. 

4.  The  Strophulus  volaticus  is  characterized  by  an 
appearance  of  small  circular  patches,  or  clusters  of 
papulas,  arising  successively  on  different  parts  of  the 
body.  The  number  of  papulte  in  each  cluster  is  from 
six  to  twelve.  Both  the  papulae;  and  their  interstices 
are  of  a high  red  colour.  These  patches  continue  red, 
with  a little  heat,  or  itching,  for  about  four  days,  when 
they  turn  brown,  and  begin  to  exfoliate.  As  one  patch 
declines,  another  appears  at  a small  distance  from  it ; 
and  in  this  manner  the  complaint  often  spreads  gra- 
dually over  the  face,  body,  and  limbs,  not  terminating 
in  less  than  three  or  four  weeks.  During  that  time  the 
child  has  sometimes  a quick  pulse,  a white  tongue,  and 
seems  uneasy  and  fretful.  In  many  cases,  however, 
the  eruption  takes  place  without  any  symptoms  of  in- 
ternal disorder.  The  above  complaint  has  been  by 
some  w riters  denominated  ignis  volaticus  infantum  ; 
under  this  title  Astruc  and  Lowry  have  described  one 
of  the  forms  of  crusta  lactea,  in  which  a successive 
312 


eruption  of  pustules  takes  place  on  the  same  spot  gene- 
rally about  the  mouth  or  eyes,  in  children  of  different 
ages,  and  sometimes  in  adults.  The  macula  volatica 
infantum  mentioned  by  Wittichius,  Sennertus,  and 
Sebizeus,  agree  in  some  respects  with  the  strophulus 
volaticus ; but  they  are  described  by  other  German  au- 
thors as  a species  of  erysipelas,  or  as  irregular  efflores- 
cences affecting  the  genitals  of  infants,  and  often  prov- 
ing fatal.  The  strophulus  volaticus  is  a complaint  by 
r.o  means  frequent.  In  most  cases  which  have  come 
under  Dr.  Willan’s  observation,  it  appeared  between 
the  third  and  sixth  month ; in  one  instance,  however, 
it  occurred  about  ten  days  after  birth,  and  continued 
three  weeks,  being  gradually  diffused  from  the  cheeks 
and  forehead  to  the  scalp,  afterward  to  the  trunk  of  the 
body  and  to  the  extremities ; when  the  patches  exfoli- 
ated, a red  surface  was  left,  with  a slight  border  of  de- 
tached cuticle. 

5.  Strophulus  candidus.  In  this  form  of  strophulus, 
the  papula  are  larger  than  in  any  of  the  foregoing  spe- 
cies. They  have  no  inflammation  round  their  base  ; 
their  surface  is  very  smooth  and  shining,  whence  they 
appear  to  be  of  a lighter  colour  than  the  adjoining  cuti- 
cle. They  are  diffused,  at  a considerable  distance  from 
each  other,  over  the  loins,  shoulders,  and  upper  part  of 
the  arms  ; in  any  other  situation  they  are  seldom  found. 

This  eruption  affects  infants  about  a year  old,  and 
most  commonly  succeeds  some  of  the  acute  diseases 
to  which  they  are  liable.  Dr.  Willan  has  observed  it 
on  their  recovery  from  a catarrhal  fever,  and  after  in- 
flammation of  the  bowels,  or  lungs.  The  papulae  con- 
tinue hard  and  elevated  for  about  a week,  then  gra- 
dually subside  and  disappear. 

STRU'MA.  ( Struma , ce.  f. ; from  struo,  to  heap 
up,  or  « struendo,  because  they  grow  insensibly.)  This 
term  is  generally,  applied  to  scrofula,  and  by  some 
to  bronchocele,  or  an  induration  of  the  thyroid  gland. 

Stru'men.  (From  struma,  a scrofulous  tumour.) 
An  herb  so  called  from  its  uses  in  healing  strumous 
tumours. 

STRUMOUS.  ( Strumosus  ; from  struma,  a wen  or 
scrofula.)  Of  the  nature  of  scrofula. 

Strumus.  An  obsolete  name  of  the  berry  bearing 
chickweed,  which  was  supposed  to  be  efficacious  in 
the  cure  of  scrofula.  See  Cucubalas  bacciferus. 

STRU'THIUM.  (From  j-puflo s,  a sparrow:  so 
named  from  the  resemblance  of  its  flowers  to  an  un- 
fledged sparrow.)  The  master-wort.  See  Imperatona 
ostruthium. 

STRYCHNIA.  Strychnine . An  alkaline  substance 
obtained  from  the  bean  of  the  strychnos  ignatia  by  the 
following  process  : The  bean  was  rasped  down  as 
small  as  possible.  It  was  then  exposed  to  the  action 
of  nitric  afther  in  a Fapin’s  digester.  The  residue, 
thus  deprived  of  a quantity  of  fatty  matter,  was  di- 
gested in  alkohol  as  long  as  that  reagent  was  capable 
of  dissolving  any  thing.  The  alkoholic  solutions  were 
evaporated  to  dryness,  and  the  residue  redissolved  in 
water.  Caustic  potassa  being  dropped  into  the  solu- 
tion, a white  crystalline  precipitate  fell,  which  was 
strychnia.  It  was  purified  by  washing  it  in  cold  water, 
dissolving  it  in  alkohol,  and  crystallizing  it.  Strychnia 
was  obtained  likewise  from  the  bean  of  the  strychnos 
ignatia,  by  boiling  the  infusion  of  the  bean  with  mag- 
nesia, in  the  same  manner  as  Robiquet  had  obtained 
morphia  from  the  infusion  of  opium. 

The  properties  of  strychnia,  when  in  a state  of  pu 
, rity,  are  as  follows : 

It  is  crystallized  in  very  small  four-sided  prisms,  ter- 
minated by  four-sided  low  pyramids.  It  has  a white 
colour;  its  taste  is  intolerably  bitter,  leaving  a metal- 
lic impression  in  the  mouth.  It  is  destitute  of  smell. 
It  is  not  altered  by  exposure  to  the  air.  It  is  neither 
fusible  nor  volatile,  except  at  temperatures  at  which  it 
undergoes  decomposition.  It  is  charred  at  the  tempe- 
rature at  which  oil  enters  into  ebullition  (about  580°). 
When  strongly  heated,  it  swells  up,  blackens,  gives  out 
empyreumatic  oil,  a little  water,  and  acetic  acid : car- 
bonic acid  and  carburetted  hydrogen  gases  are  disen- 
gaged, and  a bulky  charcoal  remains  behind.  When 
heated  with  peroxide  of  copper,  it  gives  out  only  car- 
bonic acid  gas  and  water.  It  is  very  little  soluble  in 
cold  water,  100,000  parts  of  that  liquor  dissolving  only 
15  parts  of  strychnia ; but  it  dissolves  in  2,500  times  its 
weight  of  boiling  water.  A cold  solution  of  strychnia 
in  water  may  be  diluted  with  100  times  its  volume  of 
that  liquid,  without  losing  its  bitter  taste. 


STR 


STR 


When  strychnia  is  introduced  into  the  stomach,  it 
acts  with  prodigious  energy.  A locked  jaw  is  induced 
in  a very  shorttime,  and  the  animal  is  speedily  destroy- 
ed. Half  a grain  of  strychnia  blown  into  the  throat 
of  a rabbit  proved  fatal  in  five  minutes,  and  brought  on 
locked  jaw  in  two  minutes. 

Sulphate  of  strychnia  is  a salt  which  crystallizes  in 
transparent  cubes,  soluble  in  less  than  ten  times  its 
weight  of  cold  water.  Its  taste  is  intensely  bitter,  and 
the  strychnia  is  precipitated  from  it  by  all  the  soluble 
salifiable  bases.  It  is  not  altered  by  exposure  to  the  air. 

Muriate  of  strychnia  crystallizes  in  very  small 
needles,  which  are  grouped  together,  and  before  the 
microscope  exhibit  the  form  of  quadrangular  prisms. 
When  exposed  to  the  air  it  becomes  opaque.  It  is 
more  soluble  in  water  than  the  sulphate,  has  a similar 
taste,  and  acts  with  the  same  violence  upon  the  animal 
economy  as  all  the  other  salts  of  strychnia. 

Phosphate  of  strychnia  crystallizes  in  four-sided 
prisms.  It  can  only  be  obtained  neutral  by  double  de- 
composition. 

Nitrate  of  strychnia  can  be  obtained  only  by  dissolv- 
ing strychnia  in  nitric  acid,  diluted  with  a great  deal 
of  water.  The  saturated  solution,  when  cautiously 
evaporated,  yields  crystals  of  neutral  nitrate  in  pearly 
needles.  This  salt  is  much  more  soluble  in  hot  than 
in  cold  water.  Its  taste  is  exceedingly  bitter,  and  it 
acts  with  more  violence  upon  the  animal  economy  than 
pure  strychnia.  It  seems  capable  of  uniting  with  an 
excess  of  acid.  When  heated,  it  becomes  yellow,  and 
undergoes  decomposition.  It  is  slightly  soluble  in  alko- 
hol,  but  is  insoluble  in  tether. 

When  concentrated  nitric  acid  is.  poured  upon 
strychnia,  it  immediately  strikes  an  amaranthine  co- 
lour, followed  by  a shade  similar  to  that  of  blood.  To 
this  colour  succeeds  a tint  of  yellow,  which  passes 
afterward  into  green.  By  this  action  the  strychnia 
seems  to  be  altered  in  its  properties,  and  to  be  con- 
verted into  a substance  still  capable  of  uniting  with 
acids. 

Carbonate  of  strychnia  is  obtained  in  the  form  of 
white  flocks,  little  soluble  in  water,  but  soluble  in  car- 
bonic acid. 

Acetic,  oxalic,  and  tartaric  acids  form  with  strychnia 
neutral  salts,  which  are  very  soluble  in  water,  and 
more  or  less  capable  of  crystallizing.  They  crystal- 
lize best  w hen  they  contain  an  excess  of  acid.  The 
neutral  acetate  is  very  soluble,  and  crystallizes  with 
difficulty. 

Hydrocyanic  acid  dissolves  strychnia,  and  forms 
with  it  a erystallizable  salt. 

Strychnia  combines  neither  w ith  sulphur  nor  carbon. 
When  boiled  with  iodine,  a solution  takes  place,  and 
iodate  and  hydriodate  of  strychnia  are  formed.  Chlo- 
rine acts  upon  it  precisely  in  the  same  way. 

Strychnia,  when  dissolved  in  alkohol,  has  the  pro- 
perty of  precipitating  the  greater  number  of  metallic 
oxides  from  their  acid  solutions.  It  is  precipitated  by 
the  alkalies  and  alkaline  earths;  but  the  effect  of  the 
earths  proper  has  not  been  tried. 

STRYCHNINE.  See  Strychnia. 

STRYCHNOMANIA.  (Frctn  rpvxvo?,  nightshade, 
and  pavia,  madness.)  So  the  ancients  called  the  dis- 
order produced  by  eating  the  deadly  nightshade. 

STRYCHNOS.  ( Strychnos , i.  m. ; an  ancient 
name  which  occurs  in  Pliny  and  Dioscorides  derived 
from  uTpuvvvpi,  to  overthrow,  and  applied  most  pro- 
bably from  the  overpowering  narcotic  quality  of  the 
plant  to  which  it  was  assigned,  arpvxvos  of  the  Greeks 
being  a kind  of  nightshade.  Linnaeus  adopted  this 
name  for  the  present  genus,  on  account  of  the  analogy 
of  its  narcotic  properties  with  the  plant  of  the  ancients. 
Some  derive  it  from  g-puxw,  to  torment : from  its  pro- 
perties of  producing  insanity.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Liniiaean  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Strychnos  nux  vomica.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  tree,  the  seed  of  which  is  called  the  poison-nut. 
Nux  vomica;  Nux  melella.  The  nux  vomica,  lignum 
tolubrinum,  and  faba  sancti  Ignatii,  have  been  long 
known  in  the  Materia  Medica  as  narcotic  poisons, 
brought  from  the  East  Indies,  while  the  vegetables 
which  produced  them  were  unknown,  or  at  least  not 
botanically  ascertained. 

By  the  judicious  discrimination  of  Linnaeus,  the  nux 
vomica  was  found  to  be  the  fruit  of  the  tree  described 
and  figured  in  the  Hortus  malabaricus , under  the  name 


of  Caniram  cucurbitifera  malabariensis,  of  Plukenet, 
n ow  called  Strychnos  nux  vomica. 

To  this  genus  also,  but  upon  evidence  less  conclu- 
sive, he  likewise  justly  referred  the  colubrinum.  But 
the  fabi  sancti  Ignatii  he  merely  conjectured  might 
belong  to  this  family,  as  appears  by  the  query,  An 
Slrychni  species  ? which  subsequent  discoveries  have 
enabled  us  to  decide  in  the  negative ; for  in  the  Supp. 
Plant,  it  constitutes  the  new  genus  Ignatia , which 
Loureiro  has  lately  confirmed,  changing  the  specific 
name  amara  to  that  of  philippinica.  The  strychnos 
and  ignatia  are,  however,  nearly  allied,  and  both  rank 
under  the  Order  Solanacece. 

Dr.  Woodville  lias  inquired  thus  far  into  the  botani- 
cal origin  of  these  productions,  from  finding  that,  by 
medical  writers,  they  are  generally  treated  of  under 
the  same  head,  and  in  a very  confused  and  indiscrimi- 
nate manner.  The  seed  of  the  fruit,  or  berry  of  this 
tree,  Strychnos  nux  vomica,  is  the  officinal  nux  vomi- 
ca : it  is  flat,  round,  about  an  inch  broad,  and  near  a 
quarter  of  an  inch  thick,  with  a prominence  in  the 
middle  on  both  sides,  of  a gray  colour,  covered  with  a 
kind  of  woolly  matter;  and  internally  hard  and  tough 
like  horn.  To  the  taste  it  is  extremely  bitter,  but  has 
no  remarkable  smell.  It  consists  chiefly  of  a gummy 
matter,  which  is  moderately  bitter ; the  resinous  part 
is  very  inconsiderable  in  quantity,  but  intensely  bitter; 
hence  rectified  spirit  has  been  considered  as  its  best 
menstruum. 

Nux  vomica  is  reckoned  among  the  most  powerful 
poisons  of  the  narcotic  kind,  especially  to  brute  ani- 
mals ; nor  are  instances  wanting  of  its  deleterious 
effects  upon  the  human  species  It  proves  fatal  to  dogs 
in  a very  short  time,  as  appears  by  various  authorities. 
Hillefield  and  others  found  that  it  also  poisoned  hares, 
foxes,  wolves,  cats,  rabbits,  and  even  some  birds,  as 
crows  and  ducks ; and  Loureiro  relates,  that  a horse 
died  in  four  hours  after  taking  a drachm  of  the  seed  in 
a half-roasted  state. 

The  eflects  of  this  baneful  drug  upon  different  ani- 
mals, and  even  upon  those  of  the  same  species,  appear 
to  be  rather  uncertain,  and  not  always  in  proportion  to 
the  quantity  of  the  poison  given.  With  some  animals 
it  produces  its  eflects  almost  instantaneously;  with 
others,  not  till  after  several  hours,  when  laborious 
respiration,  followed  by  torpor,  tremblings,  coma,  and 
convulsions,  usually  precede  the  fatal  spasms,  or  teta- 
nus, with  which  this  drug  commonly  extinguishes  life. 

From  four  cases  related  of  its  mortal  effects  upon 
human  subjects,  we  find  the  symptoms  corresponded 
nearly  with  those  which  we  have  here  mentioned  of 
brutes;  and  these,  as  well  as  the  dissections  of  dogs 
killed  by  this  poison,  not  showing  any  injury  done  to 
the  stomach  or  intestines,  prove  that  the  nux  vomica 
acts  immediately  upon  the  nervous  system,  and  de- 
stroys life  by  the  virulence  of  its  narcotic  influence. 

The  quantity  of  the  seed  necessary  to  produce  this 
effect  upon  a strong  dog,  as  appears  by  experiments, 
need  not  to  be  more  than  a scruple ; a rabbit  was 
killed  by  five,  and  a cat  by  four,  grains:  and  of  the 
four  persons  to  whom  we  have  alluded,  and  who  un- 
fortunately perished  by  this  deleterious  drug,  one  was 
a girl  ten  years  of  age,  to  whom  fifteen  grains  were 
exhibited  at  twice  for  the  cure  of  an  ague.  Loss,  how- 
ever, tells  us,  that  he  took  one  or  two  grains  of  it  in 
substance,  without  discovering  any  bad  effect ; and 
that  a friend  of  his  swallowed  a whole  seed  without 
injury. 

In  Britain,  where  physicians  seem  to  observe  the 
rule  Saltern  non  nocere,  more  strictly  than  in  many 
other  countries,  the  nux  vomica  has  been  rarely,  if 
ever,  employed  as  a medicine.  On  the  Continent, 
however,  and  especially  in  Germany,  they  have  cer 
tainly  been  guided  more  by  the  axiom,  “ What  is  inca- 
pable of  doing  much  harm,  is  equally  unable  to  do 
much  good.”  The  truth  of  this  remark  was  very  fully 
exemplified  by  the  practice  of  Baron  Stbrck,  and  is 
farther  illustrated  by  the  medicinal  character  given  of 
nux  vomica,  which,  from  the  time  of  GeSher  till  that 
of  a modern  date,  has  been  recommended  by  a succes- 
sion of  authors  as  an  antidote  to  the  plague,  as  a febri- 
fuge, as  a vermifuge,  and  as  a remedy  in  mania,  hypo- 
chondriasis, hysteria,  rheumatism,  gout,  and  canine 
madness.  In  Sweden,  it  has  of  late  years  been  suc- 
cessfully used  in  dysentery  ; but  Berguis,  who  tried 
its  effects  in  this  disease,  says,  that  it  suppressed  the 
flux  for  twelve  hours,  which  afterward  returned 


STY 


again.  A woman  who  took  a scruple  of  this  drug 
night  and  morning,  two  successive  days,  is  said  to  have 
been  seized  with  convulsions  and  vertigo,  notwith- 
standing which  the  dysenteric  symptoms  returned,  and 
the  disorder  was  cured  'ey  other  medicines  ; but  a pain 
in  the  stomach,  the  eti'ect  of  the  nux  vomica,  continued 
afterward  for  a long  time. 

Beigius,  therefore,  thinks  it  should  only  be  adminis- 
tered in  the  character  of  a tonic  and  anodyne,  in  small 
doses  (from  live  to  ten  grains),  and  not  till  after  proper 
laxatives  have  been  employed.  Loureiro  recommends 
it  as  a valuable  internal  medicine  in  fluor  aibus  ; for 
which  purpose  he  roasts  it  till  it  becomes  perfectly 
black  and  friable,  which  renders  its  medicinal  use  safe, 
without  impairing  its  efficacy.  It  is  said  to  have  been 
used  successfully  in  the  cure  of  agues,  and  has  also 
been  reckoned  a specific  in  pyrosis,  or  water-brash. 

Strychnos  volubilis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  tree  which  was  supposed  to  afford  the  Jesuit’s 
bean.  See  Ignatia  aviara. 

STUPEFACIENT.  ( Stupefaciens  ; from  stupefa- 
cio,  to  stupify.)  Of  a stupifying  quality. 

STU'PHA.  (From  gr0w,  to  bind.)  Stupa;  Stuppa. 
A stupe,  or  fomentation. 

STU'POR.  (From  Stupeo,  to  be  senseless.)  Insen- 
sibility. 

Stu'ppa.  See  Stupha. 

STYE.  See  Hordeolum. 

Sty'gia.  (From  Styx,  a name  given  by  the  poets  to 
one  of  the  rivers  in  hell.)  A water  made  from  subli- 
mate, and  directed  in  old  dispensatories,  was  so  called 
from  a supposition  of  its  poisonous  qualities.  A name 
of  the  Aqua  regia  also,  from  its  corrosive  qualities. 

STYLIFORM.  ( Styliformis  ; from  stylus,  a bodkin, 
and  forma , a likeness.)  Shaped  like  a bodkin,  or 
style. 

Styliscus.  (From  gaiXoj,  a bodkin.)  A tent  made 
in  the  form  of  a bodkin. 

STYLO.  Names  compounded  of  this  word  belong 
to  muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  styloid  process  of 
the  temporal  bone;  as, 

Stylo-cerato-hyoideus.  See  Stylo-hyoideus. 

Stylo-chondro-hyoidkus.  See  Stylo-hyoideus. 

Stylo-glossus.  Stylo-glosse , of  Dumas.  A mus- 
cle situated  between  the  lower  jaw  and  os  hyoides 
laterally,  which  draws  the  tongue  aside  and  back- 
wards. It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  the  styloid 
process,  and  from  the  ligament  which  connects  that 
process  to  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  is  inserted 
into  the  root  of  the  tongue,  runs  along  its  sides,  and  is 
insensibly  lost  near  its  tip. 

Stylo-hyoideus.  Stylo-hyoidien,  of  Dumas.  A 
muscle  situated  between  the  lower  jaw,  and  os  liyoides 
laterally,  which  pulls  the  os  hyoides  to  one  side  and  a 
little  upwards.  It  is  a small,  thin,  fleshy  muscle,  situ- 
ated between  the  styloid  process  and  os  hyoides,  under 
the  posterior  belly  and  middle  tendon  of  the  digastri- 
cus,  near  the  upper  edge  of  that  muscle.  It  arises  by  a 
long  thin  tendon,  from  the  basis  and  posterior  edge  of 
the  styloid  process,  and,  descending  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion, is  inserted  into  the  lateral  and  anterior  part  of  the 
os  hyoides,  near  its  horn.  The  fleshy  belly  of  this 
muscle  is  usually  perforated  on  one  or  both  sides,  for 
the  passage  of  the  middle  tendon  of  the  digastricus. 
Sometimes,  though  not  always,  we  find  another  smaller 
muscle  placed  before  the  stylo-hyoideus,  which,  from 
its  having  nearly  the  same  origin  and  insertion,  and 
the  same  use,  is  called  stylo-hyoideus-alter.  It  seems 
to  have  been  first  known  to  Eustachius:  so  that  Doug- 
las was  not  aware  of  this  circumstance  when  he  placed 
it  among  the  muscles  discovered  by  himself.  It  arises 
from  the  apex  of  the  styloid  process,  and  sometimes  by 
a broad  and  thin  aponeurosis,  from  the  inner  and  poste- 
rior part  of  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  is  inserted 
into  the  appendix,  or  little  horn,  of  the  os  hyoides. 
The  use  of  these  muscles  is  to  pull  the  os  hyoides  to 
one  side,  and  a little  upwards. 

Stylo-hyoideus-alter.  See  Stylo-hyoideus. 

Stylo-mastoid  foramen.  Foramen  stylo-m astoi- 
deum.  A hole  between  the  styloid  and  mastoid  pro- 
cess of  the  temporal  bone,  through  which  the  portio 
dura  of  the  auditory  nerve  passes  to  the  temples. 

Stylo-pharyngkus.  Stylo-thyro-pharyngien , of 
Dumas.  A muscle  situated  between  the  lower  jaw  and 
os  hyoides  laterally,  which  dilates  and  raises  the  pha- 
rynx and  thyroid  cartilage  upwards.  It  arises  fleshy 
from  the  root  of  the  styloid  process,  and  is  inserted  into 
314 


ST? 

the  side  of  the  pharynx  ajid  back  part  of  the  thyroid 

cartilage. 

STYLUS.  The  style  of  a flower  is  the  column 
which  proceeds  from  the  germen,  and  bears  the  stigma 
It  is, 

1 . Filiform,  in  Jasminum,  and  Zea  mays. 

2.  Linear,  in  Orobus. 

3.  Subulate , thicker  below  than  towards  apex ; as  in 
Geranium. 

4.  Clavate,  thicker  at  its  summit  than  towards  its 
base ; as  in  Leucojum  vernuin.  " 

5.  Triangular , in  Pisum. 

6k  Bifid,  in  Polygonum  persicaria. 

7.  TV  fid , in  Bryonia  and  Momordica. 

8.  Dichotomous,  divided  into  two,  which  again  bi- 
furcate; as  in  Cordia. 

1).  Long , much  more  so  than  the  stamina;  as  in 
Campanula  and  Dianthus. 

10.  Persistent , not  going  off  after  the  fecundation  of 
the  germen ; as  Synapis. 

STYMATO'SIS.  (From  g-ow,  to  have  a priapism.) 
A violent  erection  of  the  penis,  with  a bloody  discharge. 

Stypte'ria.  (From  sv(f>u>,  to  bind  : so  called  from 
its  astringent  properties.)  Alum. 

STYPTIC.  ( Stypticus ; from  g-u0w,  to  adstringe.) 
A term  given  to  those  substances  which  possess  the 
power  of  stopping  hajmorrhages  such  as  turpentine, 
alum,  &cc. 

Styraci'flua.  (From  styrax , storax,  and  fluo,  to 
flow.)  See  Liquidambra. 

STY'RAX.  ( Styrax , acis.  m.  and  f. ; from  g -upai;, 
a reed  in  which  it  was  used  to  be  preserved.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Decandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  Styrax  ca- 
laniita. 

Styrax  alba.  See  Myroxylon  peruiferum. 

Styrax  benzoin.  The  systematic  name  of  the  tree 
which  affords  the  gum  benzoin.  Benzoe  ; Bevjoinum  ; 
Assa  dulcis ; Assa  odorata ; Liquor  cyreniacus ; Bal- 
zoinum ; Benzoin;  Benjui;  Benjuin.  Gum-benja- 
min. This  substance  is  classed,  by  modern  chemists, 
among  the  balsams.  There  are  two  kinds  of  benzoin ; 
benzoe  amygdaloides , which  is  formed  of  white  tears, 
resembling  almonds,  united  together  by  a brown  mat- 
ter ; and  common  benzoin , which  is  brown  and  without 
tears.  The  tree  which  affords  this  balsam,  formerly 
called  Lauras  benzoin;  Benzoifera;  Arbor  benici,is 
the  Styrax— foliis  oblongis  acumihatis,  subtus  tomen- 
tosis , raccmis  compositis  longitudme  foliorum , of 
Dryander,  from  which  it  is  obtained  by  incisions.  The 
benzoin  of  the  shops  is  usually  in  very  large  brittle 
masses.  When  chewed  it  imparts  very  little  taste,  ex- 
cept that  it  impresses  on  the  palate  a slight  sweetness  ; 
its  smell,  especially  when  rubbed  or  heated,  is  ex- 
tremely fragrant  and  agreeable.  Gum-benjamin  was 
analyzed  by  Brande.  The  products  obtained  by  distil- 
lation were,  from  100  grains,  benzoic  acid,  9 grains; 
acidulated  water,  5.5  ; butyraceous  and  empyreumatic 
oil,  60 ; brittle  coal,  22 ; and  a mixture  of  carburetted 
hydrogen  and  carbonic  acid  gas,  computed  at  3.5.  On 
treating  the  empyreumatic  oil  with  water,  however,  5 
grains  more  of  acid  were  extracted,  making  14  in  the 
whole. 

From  1500  grains  of  benzoin,  Bucholz  obtained  1250 
of  resin;  187  benzoic  acid  ; 25  of  a substance  similar 
to  balsam  of  Peru  ; 8 of  an  aromatic  substance  soluble 
in  water  and  alkoliol ; and  30  of  woody  fibres  and  im 
purities. 

ADther,  sulphuric  and  acetic  acids,  dissolve  benzoin; 
so  do  solutions  of  potassa  and  soda.  Nitric  acid  acts 
violently  on  it,  and  a portion  of  artificial  tannin  is 
formed.  Ammonia  dissolves  it  sparingly.  It  has 
rarely  been  used  medicinally  in  a simple  state,  but  its 
preparations  are  much  esteemed  against  inveterate 
coughs  and  phthisical  complaints,  unattended  with 
much  fever ; it  has  also  been  used  as  a cosmetic,  and  in 
the  way  of  fumigation,  for  the  resolution  of  indolent 
tumours.  The  acid  of  benzoin  is  employed  in  the 
tinctura  camphor  a composita , and  a tincture  is  directed 
to  be  made  of  the  balsam. 

Styrax  calamita.  Storax  in  the  cane,  because  it 
was  formerly  brought  to  us  in  reeds,  or  canes.  See 
Styrax  officinalis. 

Styrax  co lata.  Strained  storax. 

Styrax  liquida.  Liquid  storax.  See  Liquid 
ambra. 


SUB 


SUB 


Styrax  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  affords  the  solid  storax.  Officinal  storax. 
i/Styrax—foliis  ovatis,  subtus  villosis , racemis  simpli- 
cibus  folio  brevioribus,  of  Linnaeus.  There  are  two . 
kinds  of  storax  to  be  found  in  the  shops;  the  one  is! 
usually  in  irregular  compact  masses,  free  from  impuri 
ties,  of  a reddish-brown  appearance,  and  interspersed 
With  whitish  tears,  somewhat  like  gum  ammoniac,  or 
benzoin  ; it  is  extremely  fragrant,  and  upon  the  appli- 
cation of  heat  readily  melts.  This  has  been  called 
storax  in  lump , red  storax,  and,  when  in  separate 
tears,  storax  in  tears.  The  other  kind,  which  is  called 
the  common  storax , is  in  large  masses,  very  light,  and 
bears  no  external  resemblance  whatever  to  the  former 
storax,  as  it  seems  almost  wholly  composed  of  dirty 
saw-dust,  caked  together  by  resinous  matter.  Storax 
was  formerly  used  in  catarrhal  complaints,  coughs, 
asthmas,  obstructions,  &c.  In  the  present  practice  it 
is  almost  totally  disregarded,  notwithstanding  it  is  an 
efficacious  remedy  in  nervous  diseases. 

Styrax  rubra.  Red  storax,  or  storax  in  the  tear. 

SUB.  1.  In  anatomy,  it  is  applied  to  parts  which 
lie  under  the  other  word  or  name,  which  sub  pre- 
cedes ; as  subscapularis,  under  the  scapula,  &c. 

2.  In  pathology,  it  is  used  to  express  an  imperfect 
disease,  or  a feeble  state  of  a disease;  as  subluxation, 
subacute,  &c. 

3.  In  botany,  when  shape,  or  any  other  character, 
cannot  be  precisely  defined,  sub  is  prefixed  to  the  term 
used  ; as  subrotundus , roundish  ; subsessiles,  not 
quite  destitute  of  a footstalk,  &c. 

4.  In  chemistry,  this  term  is  applied,  when  a salifi- 
able base  is  predominant  in  a compound,  there  being  a 
deficiency  of  the  acid ; as  subcarbonate  of  potassa, 
subcarbonate  of  soda. 

Subace'tas  cupri.  See  Verdigris. 

SUBACETATE.  Subacetas.  An  imperfect  ace- 
tate. 

Subacetate  of  copper.  See  Verdigris. 

Subala'ris  vena.  The  vein  of  the  axilla  or 
arm-pit. 

Subcajrbo'nas  potass*.  See  Potasses  subcarbonas. 

Subcarbonas  ferri.  See  Ferri  subcarbonas. 

Subcarbonas  plumbi.  See  Plumbi  subcarbonas. 

SUBCARBONATE.  Subcarbonas.  An  imperfect 
carbonate. 

SUBCARTILAGI'NOUS.  ( Subcartilaginosus  ; 

from  sub,  under,  and  cartilago , a cartilage.)  Of  a 
structure  approaching  to  that  of  cartilage. 

SUBCLAVIAN.  (Subclaviculus ; from  sub,  be- 
neath, and  clavicula,  the  clavicle.)  That  which  is,  or 
passes,  under  the  clavicle; 

Subclavian  artery.  The  right  subclavian  arises 
from  the  arteria  innominata,  and  proceeds  under  the 
clavicle  to  the  axilla.  The  left  subclavian  arises  from 
the  arch  of  the  aorta,  and  ascends  under  the  left  cla- 
vicle to  the  axilla.  The  subclavians  in  their  course 
give  off  the  internal  mammary,  the  cervical,  the  ver- 
tebral, and  the  superior  intercostal  arteries. 

Subclavian  vein.  This  receives  the  blood  from  the 
veins  of  the  arm,  and  runs  into  the  vena  cava  superior. 

SUBCLA'VITJS.  (From  sub,  under,  and  clavicula , 
the  channel  bone  : as  being  situated  under  the  clavicle, 
or  channel  bone.)  Subclavianus.  Coslo-claviculaire, 
of  Dumas.  A muscle,  situated  on  the  anterior  part  of 
the  thorax,  which  pulls  the  clavicle  downwards  and 
forwards.  It  arises  tendinous  from  the  cartilage  that 
joins  the  first  rib  to  the  sternum,  is  inserted  after  be- 
coming fleshy  into  the  inferior  part  of  the  clavicle, 
which  it  occupies  from  within  half  an  inch  of  the  ster- 
num as  far  outwards  as  to  its  connexion,  by  a ligament, 
with  the  coracoid  process  of  the  scapula. 

SUBCRURiE'US.  A name  of  two  little  muscular 
slips  sometimes  found  under  the  crurams ; -they  are  in- 
serted into  the  capsular  ligament  which  they  pull  up. 

SUBCUTANEOUS.  (Subcutaneus ; from  sub,  un- 
der, and  cutis,  the  skin.)  Under  the  skin;  a name 
given  to  some  nerves,  vessels,  glands,  &c.  which  are 
very  superficial. 

Subcutaneous  glands.  Glandules  subcutancce. 
These  are  sebaceous  glands  lying  under  the  skin,  which 
they  perforate  by  their  excretory  ducts. 

SUBCUTA'NEUS.  See  Platysma  myoides. 

SUBER.  Cork.  See  Quercus  suber. 

SUBERIC  ACID.  Jdcidum  subcricum.  This  acid 
was  obtained  by  Brugnatelli  from  cork,  and  afterward 
more  fully  examined  by  Bouillon  la  Grange.  To  pro- 


cure it,  pour  on  cork,  grated  to  powder,  six  times  Its 
weight  of  nitric  acid,  of  the  specific  gravity  of  1.26, 
in  a tubulated  retort,  and  distil  the  mixture  with  a gen- 
tle heat  as  long  as  any  red  fumes  arise.  As  the  distil- 
lation advances,  a yellow  matter,  like  wax,  appears  on 
the  surface  of  the  liquid  in  the  retort.  While  its  con- 
tents continue  hot,  pour  them  into  a glass  vessel,  placed 
on  a sand  heat,  and  keep  them  continually  stirring  wiih 
a glass  rod ; by  which  means  the  liquid  will  gradually 
grow  thicker.  As  soon  as  white  penetrating  vapours 
appear,  let  it  be  removed  from  the  sand  heat,  and  kept 
stirring  till  cold.  Thus  an  orange-coloured  mass  will 
be  obtained,  of  the  consistence  of  honey,  of  a strong 
sharp  smell  while  hot,  and  a peculiar  aromatic  smell 
when  cold.  On  this,  pour  twice  its  weight  of  boiling 
water,  apply  heat  till  it  liquefies,  and  filter.  As  the 
filtered  liquor  cools,  it  deposites  a powdery  sediment, 
and  acquires  a thin  pellicle.  Separate  the  sediment  by 
filtration,  and  evaporate  the  fluid  nearly  to  dryness. 
The  mass  thus  obtained  is  the  suberic  acid,  which 
may  be  purified  by  saturating  with  an  alkali,  and 
precipitating  by  an  acid,  or  by  boiling  it  with  charcoal 
powder. 

Chevreuil  obtained  the  suberic  acid  by  mere  digestion 
of  the  nitric  acid  on  the  grated  cork,  without  distilla- 
tion, and  purified  it  by  washing  with  cold  water.  12 
parts  of  cork  may  be  made  to  yield  one  of  acid.  When 
pure,  it  is  white  and  pulverulent,  having  a feeble  taste, 
and  little  action  on  litmus.  It  is  soluble  in  80  parts  of 
water  at  55£°  F.  and  in  38  parts  at  140°.  It  is  much 
more  soluble  in  alkoliol,  from  which  water  throws  down 
a portion  of  the  suberic  acid.  It  occasions  a white 
precipitate  when  poured  into  acetate  of  lead,  nitrates 
of  lead,  mercury,  and  silver,  muriate  of  tin,  and  pro- 
tosulphate of  iron.  It  affords  no  precipitate  with  solu- 
tions of  copper  or  zinc.  The  suberates  of  potassa, 
soda,  and  ammonia  are  very  soluble.  The  two  latter 
may  be  readily  crystallized.  Those  of  barytes,  lime, 
magnesia,  and  alumina,  are  of  sparing  solubility. 

Sublimame'ntum.  (From  sublimo,  to  lift  up.)  The 
pendulous  substance  which  floats  in  the  middle  of  the 
urine. 

SUBLIMATE.  See  Hydrargyri  oxymurias. 

Sublimate,  corrosive.  See  Hydrargyri  oxymurias. 

SUBLIMATION.  (Sublimatio ; from  sublimo,  to 
raise  or  sublime.)  A process  by  which  volatile  sub- 
stances are  raised  by  heat,  and  again  condensed  in  a 
solid  form.  This  chemical  process  differs  from  evapo- 
ration only  in  being  confined  to  solid  substances.  It  is 
usually  performed  either  for  the  purpose  of  purifying 
certain  substances,  and  disengaging  them  from  extra- 
neous matters ; or  else  to  reduce  into  vapour,  and  com 
bine,  under  that  form,  principles  which  would  have 
united  with  greater  difficulty  if  they  had  not  been 
brought  to  that  state  of  extreme  division. 

As  all  fluids  are  volatile  by  heat,  and  consequently 
capable  of  being  separated,  in  most  cases;  from  fixed 
matters,  so  various  solid  bodies  are  subjected  to  a simi- 
lar treatment.  Fluids  are  said  to  distil,  and  solids  to 
sublime,  though  sometimes  both  are  obtained  in  one 
and  the  same  operation.  If  the  subliming  matter  con- 
cretes into  a solid,  hard  mass,  it  is  commonly  called  a 
sublimate;  if  into  a powdery  form,  flowers. 

The  principal  subjects  of  this  operation  are,  volatile 
alkaline  salts;  neutral  salts,  composed  of  volatile  alkali 
and  acids,  as  sal  ammoniac ; the  salt  of  amber,  and 
flowers  of  benzoin,  mercurial  preparations,  and  sul- 
phur. Bodies  of  themselves  not  volatile  are  frequently 
made  to  sublime  by  the  mixture  of  volatile  ones ; thus 
iron  is  carried  over  by  sal  ammoniac  in  the  preparation 
of  the  flores  martiales,  or  ferrum  ammoniatuin. 

The  fumes  of  solid  bodies  in  close  vessels  rise  but  a 
little  way,  and  adhere  to  that  part  of  the  vessel  where 
they  concrete. 

SUBLl'MIS.  See  Flexor  brevis  digitorum  pedis, 
and  Flexor  sublimis  perforatus. 

SUBLINGUAL.  ( Sublingualis ; from  sub,  under, 
and  lingua,  the  tongue.)  A name  given  to  parts  im- 
mediately under  the  tongue. 

Sublingual  glands.  Glandules  sublinguales,  vel 
Bartholiniavce,  vel  Riviniance.  The  glands  which  are 
situated  under  the  tongue,  and  secrete  saliva.  Their 
excretory  ducts  are  called  Riviman  from  their  dis- 
coverer. 

SUBLUX A'TIO.  A sprain. 

SUBMERSION.  ( Submersio ; from  sub,  under, 
1 and  mergo , to  sink.)  Drowning.  A variety  of  the 

315 


apoptexia  suffocata.  Sauvages  terms  it  asphyxia  im- 
mersoruin. 

SUBMERSUS.  Plunged  under  water:  applied  to 
leaves  which  are  naturally  underwater,  while  others 
of  the  plants  are  above  ; as  in  Ranunculus  aquatilis. 

Submu'rias  hydrargyri.  See  Hydrargyri  sub- 
murias. 

SUBMURIATE.  Submurias.  An  imperfect  mu- 
riate. 

Suborbita'rius.  The  suborbitary  nerve ; a branch 
of  the  fifth  pair. 

Subphosphuretted  hydrogen.  See  Phosphorus. 

SUBROTUNDUS.  Roundish:  applied  to  several 
parts  of  plants.  The  leaf  of  the  Pyrola  is  subrotund. 

SUBSALT.  A salt  having  an  excess  of  base  beyond 
what  is  requisite  for  saturating  the  acid,  as  supersalt 
is  one  with  an  excess  of  the  acid.  The  sulphate  of 
potassa  is  the  neutral  compound  of  sulphuric  acid  and 
potassa;  subsulphate  of  potassa,  a compound  of  the 
same  ingredients,  in  which  there  is  an  excess  of  base  ; 
supersulphate  of  potassa,  a compound  of  the  same 
acid  and  the  same  base,  in  which  there  is  an  excess  of 
acid.  s 

SUBSCAPULA 'Rite.  (From  sub,  under,  and  sca- 
pula, the  shoulder-blade.)  Sous-scapulo-trochinien , 
of  Dumas.  Infra-scapularis.  The  name  of  this  mus- 
cle sufficiently  indicates  its  situation.  It  is  composed 
of  many  fasciculi  of  tendinous  and  fleshy  fibres,  the 
marks  of  which  we  see  imprinted  on  the  under  surface 
of  the  scapula.  These  fasciculi,  which  arise  from  all 
the  basins  of  that  bone  internally,  and  likewise  from  its 
superior,  as  well  as  from  one-half  of  its  inferior  costa, 
unite  to  form  a considerable  flat  tendon  which  adheres 
to  the  capsular  ligament,  and  is  inserted  into  the  upper 
part  of  the  less  tuberosity  at  the  head  of  the  os 
humeri. 

The  principal  use  of  this  muscle  is  to  roll  the  arm 
inwards.  It  likewise  serves  to  bring  it  close  to  the 
ribs ; and,  from  its  adhesion  to  the  capsular  ligament, 
it  prevents  that  membrane  from  being  pinched. 

SUBSU'LTUS.  (From  subsulto,  to  leap.)  Sub- 
sullus  tendinum.  Weak  convulsive  motions  or  twitch- 
ings  of  the  tendons,  rqpstly  of  the  hands,  generally  ob- 
served in  the  extreme  stages  of  putrid  fever. 

SUBU'BERES.  (From  sub,  under,  and  ubera , the 
breasts.)  This  term  hath  been  used  by  some  writers 
for  those  infants  who  yet  suck,  in  distinction  from  those 
who  are  weaned,  and  then  are  called  exuberes. 

SUBULATUS.  Subulate.  Awl-shaped:  applied 
in  botany  to  leaves,  receptacles,  &c.  which  are  tapering 
from  a thick  base  to  a point  like  an  awl ; as  the  leaf  of 
the  Salsola  kali,  and  receptacle  of  the  Scabiosa  atro- 
purpurea. 

Succa'go.  The  rob  of  any  fruit. 

SUCCEDA'NEUM.  A medicine  substituted  for 
another. 

Succenturia'ti  musculi.  The  pyramidal  muscles 
of  the  belly. 

Succenturiati  renes.  Two  glands  lying  above 
the  kidneys. 

Su'cci  scorbutici.  The  juice  of  English  scurvy- 
grass,  &c. 

SUCCINATE.  Succinas.  A salt  formed  by  the 
combination  of  the  acid  of  amber,  or  succinic  acid, 
with  a salifiable  base,  succinate  of  potassa,  succinate 
of  copper,  &c. 

Succi'ngens  membrana.  The  diaphragm. 

? SUCCINIC.  ( Succinicus ; from  Succinum,  amber.) 
Of  or  belonging  to  amber. 

Succinic  acid.  Acidum  succinicum.  Sal  succini. 
It  has  long  been  known  that  amber,  when  exposed  to 
distillation,  affords  a crystallized  substance,  which  sub- 
limes into  the  upper  part  of  the  vessel.  Before  its  na- 
ture was  understood  it  was  called  salt  of  amber  ; but 
it  is  now  known  to  be  a peculiar  acid,  as  Boyle  first 
discovered.  The  crystals  are  at  first  contaminated 
with  a little  oil,  which  gives  them  a brownish  colour ; 
but  they  may  be  purified  by  solution  and  crystalliza- 
tion, repeated  as  often  as  necessary,  when  they  will 
become  transparent  and  shining.  Pott  recommends  to 
put  on  the  filter,  through  which  the  solution  is  passed, 
a little  cotton  previously  wetted  with  oil  of  amber. 
Their  figure  is  that  of  a triangular  prism.  Their  taste 
is  acid,  and  they  redden  the  blue  colour  of  litmus,  but 
not  that  of  violets.  They  are  soluble  in  less  than  two 
parts  of  boiling  alkohol,  in  two  parts  of  boiling  water, 
and  in  twenty-five  of  cold  water. 


Planche,  of  Paris,  observes,  that  a considerable 
quantity  might  be  collected  in  making  amber  varnish, 
as  it  sublimes  while  the  amber  is  melting  for  this  pur- 
pose, and  is  wasted. 

Several  processes  have  been  proposed  for  purifying 
this  acid : that  of  Richter  appears  to  be  the  best.  The 
acid  being  dissolved  in  hot  water,  and  filtered,  is  to  be 
saturated  with  potassa  or  soda,  and  boiled  with  char- 
coal, which  absorbs  the  oily  matter.  The  solution 
being  filtered,  nitrate  of  lead  is  added ; whence  results 
an  insoluble  succinate  of  lead,  from  which,  by  diges- 
tion in  the  equivalent  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid,  pure 
succinic  acid  is  separated.  Nitrate  or  muriate  of  ba- 
rytes will  show  whether  any  sulphuric  acid  remains 
mixed  with  the  succinic  solution;  and  if  so,  it  may  be 
withdrawn  by  digesting  the  liquid  with  a little  more 
succinate  of  lead.  Pure  succinic  acid  may  be  obtained 
by  evaporation,  in  white  transparent  prismatic  crys 
tals.  Their  taste  is  somewhat  sharp,  and  they  redden 
powerfully  tincture  of  turnsole.  Heat  melts,  and  par- 
tially decomposes  succinic  acid.  Air  has  no  effect 
upon  it.  It  is  soluble  in  both  water  and  alkohol,  and 
much  more  so  when  they  are  heated. 

SU'CCINUM.  ( Succinum , i.  n. ; from  succus , 

juice : because  it  was  thought  to  exude  from  a tree.) 
See  Amber. 

Succinum  cinereum.  Ambergris  is  so  called  by 
some  authors.  See  Ambergris. 

Succinum  griseum.  Ambergris  is  sometimes  so 
called.  See  Ambergris. 

Succinum  oleum.  See  Oleum  succini. 

Succinum  preparatum.  Prepared  amber.  See 

Amber. 

SUCCI'SA.  (From  succido , to  cut : so  named  from 
its  being  indented,  and,  as  it  were,  cut  in  pieces.)  Ap- 
plied to  a species  of  the  genus  Scabiosa. 

SUCCORY.  See  Cichorium. 

Su'ccubus.  See  Incubus. 

SUCCULENS.  Succulent,  juicy,  rich.  Applied  to 
fruits,  pods,  soils,  &c. 

SUCCULENTiE.  The  name  of  an  order  of  Lin 
nasus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  containing 
those  which  have  fleshy  and  succulent  leaves ; a Csac- 
tus,  Sedum,  Sempervivum,  &c. 

SUCCULENTUS.  Juicy:  full  of  juice.  Applied 
to  pods,  leaves,  &c. 

SU'CCUS.  Juice. 

Succus  cochlearije  compositus.  A warm  ape- 
rient and  diuretic,  mostly  exhibited  in  the  cure  of  dis- 
eases of  the  skin,  arising  from  scurvy. 

Succus  cyreniacus.  Juice  of  laserwort. 

Succus  gastricus.  See  Gastric  juice. 

Succus  heliotropii.  See  Croton  tinclorium 

Succus  indicus  purgans.  Gamboge. 

Succus  liquoriti#.  See  Glycyrrhiza  glabra. 

SUDA'MINA.  ( Sudamen , inis.  n. ; from  sudor, 
sweat.)  llidroa.  Boa.  Vesicles  resembling  millet- 
seeds,  in  form  and  magnitude,  which  appear  suddenly, 
without  fever,  especially  in  the  summer-time,  after 
much  labour  and  sweating. 

SUDA'TIO.  (From  sudor , sweat.)  A sweating. 
See  Ephidrosis. 

SUDATO'RIUM.  (From  sudo,  to  sweat.)  A stew 
or  sweating-house. 

SUDOR.  Sweat  or  perspiration. 

Sudor  anglicus.  Hydronosus ; Gargeatio.  The 
sweating  sickness  of  England;  and  endemic  fever. 
Dr.  Cullen  thinks  it  a species  of  typhus.  This  disor 
der  is  thus  named  from  its  first  appearing  in  this 
island,  and  acquires  the  title  of  sudor,  from  the  patient 
suddenly  breaking  out  into  a profuse  sweat,  which 
forms  the  great  character  of  the  disease. 

SUDORI'FIC.  (Sudorificus : from  sudor,  sweat, 
and  fasio,  to  make.)  A synonyme  of  diaphoretic.  See 
Diaphoretics. 

SUFFIME'NTUM.  (From  sujfimen,  a perfume ) 
A perfume. 

SUFFI'TUS.  A perfume. 

SUFFOCA'TIO.  Suffocation. 

Suffocatjo  stridula.  The  croup: 

Suffrutices  plant#.  Under  shrubby  T plants 
Such  ligneous  or  somewhat  woody  vegetables  that  are 
of  a nature,  in  some  degree,  between  that  of  the 
shrubby,  and  the  herbaceous ; as  thyme,  sage,  hys- 
sop, &c. 

SUFFUMIGATION.  (Suffumigatio ; from  sub , 
under,  and  fumigo,  to  smoke.)  The  burning  odorous 


SUL 


SUL 


substances  to  remove  'an  evil  smell,  or  destroy  mi- 
asma. 

SUFFUSIO.  (From  suffundo , to  pour  down:  so 
called  because  the  ancients  supposed  the  opacity  pro- 
ceeded from  something  running  under  the  crystalline 
humour.) 

1.  A cataract. 

2.  An  extravasation  of  some  humour,  as  the  blood : 
thus  we  say,  a suffusion  of  blood  in  the  eye,  when  it 
is  what  is  vulgarly  called  bloodshot. 

Suffusio  auriginosa.  A jaundice. 

SUGAR.  See  Saccharum. 

Sugar  of  lead.  See  Plumbi  acctas. 

Sugar  of  milk.  A substance  produced  from  whey, 
which,  if  not  sour,  contains  a saline  substance,  to 
which  this  name  has  been  given. 

SUGILLATION.  ( Sugillatio ; from  sugillo,  to 

stain.)  A bruise.  A spot  or  mark  made  by  a leech  or 
cupping-glass. 

SULCATUS.  Furrowed:  applied  to  stems,  leaves, 
seeds,  &c.  of  plants;  as  the  seeds  of  the  Scandix  odo- 
rata , and  australis. 

SU'LCUS.  A groove  or  furrow ; generally  applied 
to  the  bones. 

SU'LPHAS.  ( Sulphas , atis.  m.;  from  sulphur , 
brimstone.)  A sulphate  or  salt  formed  by  the  union 
of  the  sulphuric  acid  with  a salifiable  base. 

Sulphas  aluminosus.  Alum.  See  Alumen. 

Sulphas  ammonie.  Alkali  volatile  vitriolatum , of 
Bergman.  Sal  ammoniacum  secretum,  of  Glauber. 
Vitriolum  ammoniacale.  This  salt  has  been  found 
native  in  the  neighbourhood  of  some  volcanoes.  It  is 
esteemed  diuretic  and  deobstruent,  and  exhibited  in 
the  same  diseases  as  the  muriate  of  ammonia. 

Sulphas  cupri.  See  Cupri  sulphas. 

Sulphas  ferri.  See  Ferri  sulphas. 

Sulphas  hydrargyri.  See  Hydrargyrus  vitrio- 
latus. 

Sulphas  magnesia  See  Magnesia  sulphas. 

Sulphas  potasse.  See  Potassce  sulphas. 

Sulphas  quinine.  See  Cinchonina. 

Sulphas  sode.  See  Soda  sulphas. 

Sulphas  zinci.  See  Zinci  sulphas. 

SULPHATE.  See  Sulphas. 

SU'LPHITE.  Sulphis.  A salt  formed  by  the  com- 
bination of  a definite  quantity  of  the  sulphurous  acid 
with  a salifiable  base ; as  sulphite  of  polassa , ammo- 
niacal  sulphite , &c. 

SULPHOVINIC  ACID.  Sulphovinous  acid.  The 
name  given  by  Vogel  to  an  acid,  or  a class  of  acids, 
which  may  be  obtained  by  digesting  alkohol  and  sul- 
phuric acid  together  by  heat.  It  seems  probable  that 
this  acid  is  merely  the  hyposulphuric,  combined  with 
a peculiar  oily  matter. — Ure's  Ghem.  Diet. 

SU'LPHUR.  (Sulphur,  uris.  n. ; from  sal  or  sul, 
and  7 rap,  fire : so  named  from  its  great  combustibility.) 
Abric ; Alcubrith;  Anpater ; Appebrioc;  Aquala; 
Aquila ; Chibur;  Chybur ; Cibur.  Sulphur,  which 
is  also  known  by  the  name  of  brimstone,  is  the  only 
simple  combustible  substance  which  nature  offers  pure 
and  in  abundance.  It  was  the  first  known  of  all.  It 
is  found  in  the  earth,  and  exists  externally  In  deposi- 
tions, in  sublimed  incrustations,  and  on  the  surface  of 
certain  waters,  principally  near  burning  volcanoes  It 
is  found  combined  with  many  metals.  It  exists  in  ve- 
getable substances,  and  has  lately  been  discovered  in 
the  albumen  of  eggs. 

Sulphur,  in  the  mineral  kingdom,  is  either  in  a loose 
powder,  or  compact ; and  then  either  detached  or  in 
veins.  It  is  found  in  the  greatest  plenty  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  volcanoes,  or  pseudo-volcanoes,  whether 
modem  or  extinct,  as  at  Solfatara , &c.  and  is  depo- 
sited as  a crust  on  stones  contiguous  to  them,  either 
crystallized  or  amorphous.  It  is  frequently  met  with 
in  mineral  waters,  and  in  caverns  adjacent  to  volca- 
noes; sometimes  also  in  coal-mines.  It  is  found  in 
combination  with  most  of  the  metals.  When  united 
to  iron,  it  forms  the  mineral  called  martial  pyrites , or 
iron  pyrites.  All  the  ores  known  by  the  name  of 
pyrites , of  which  there  are  a vast  variety,  are  combi- 
nations of  sulphur  with  different  metals ; and  hence 
the  names  of  copper,  tin,  arsenical,  &c.  pyrites.  It 
exists  likewise  in  combination  with  alumine  and  lime; 
it  then  constitutes  different  kinds  of  schistus,  or  alum 
ores. 

Method  of  obtaining  Sulphur. — A prodigious  quan- 
tity of  sulphur  is  obtained  from  Solfatara,  in  Italy. 


This  volcanic  country  every  where  exhibits  marks  of 
the  agency  of  subterraneous  fires;  almost  all  the 
ground  is  bare  and  white ; and  is  every  where  sensi- 
bly warmer  than  the  atmosphere,  in  the  greatest  heat 
of  summer ; so  that  the  feet  of  persons  walking  there 
are  burnt  through  their  shoes.  It  is  impossible  not  to 
observe  the  sulphur,  for  a sulphurous  vapour  which 
rises  through  different  apertures  is  every  where  percep 
tible,  and  gives  reason  to  believe  that  there  is  a subter- 
raneous fire  underneath,  from  which  that  vapour  pro- 
ceeds. 

From  pyrites,  sulphur  is  extracted  in  the  large  way 
by  the  following  process : 

Pyrites  is  broken  into  small  pieces,  and  put  into  large 
earthen  tubes,  which  are  exposed  to  the  heat  of  a fur- 
nace. A square  vessel  of  cast  iron,  containing  water, 
is  connected  as  a receiver  with  the  tube  in  the  furnace. 
The  action  of  the  fire  proceeds,  and  the  sulphur,  being 
thus  melted,  is  gradually  accumulated  on  the  water  in 
the  receiver.  It  is  then  removed  from  this  receiver, 
and  melted  in  large  iron  ladies;  in  consequence  of 
which,  the  earthy  parts  with  which  it  was  contami- 
nated are  made  to  subside  to  the  bottom  of  the  ladle, 
leaving  the  purified  sulphur  above.  It  is  then  again 
melted,  and  suffered  to  cool  gradually,  in  order  to  free 
it  from  the  rest  of  the  impurities.  It  is  tlfen  tolerably 
pure,  and  constitutes  the  sulphur  we  meet  with,  in 
large  masses  or  lumps,  in  the  market. 

In  order  to  form  it  into  rolls,  it  is  again  melted,  and 
poured  into  cylindrical  wooden  moulds;  in  these  it 
takes  the  form  in  which  we  usually  see  it  in  com- 
merce, as  roll  sulphur. 

Flowers  of  sulphur,  as  they  are  called,  are  formed 
by  subliming  purified  sulphur  with  a gentle  heat,  in 
close  rooms,  where  the  sublimed  sulphur  is  collected, 
though  the  article  met  with  in  general,  under  that 
name,  is  nothing  but  sulphur  finely  powdered. 

Method  of  purifying  sulphur. — Take  one  part  of 
flowers  of  sulphur,  boil  it  in  twenty  parts  of  distilled 
water,  in  a glass  vessel,  for  about  a quarter  of  an 
hour ; let  the  sulphur  subside,  decant  the  water,  and 
then  wash  the  sulphur  repeatedly  in  distilled  water. 
Having  done  this,  pour  over  it  three  parts  of  pure 
nitro-muriatic  acid,  diluted  with  one  part  of  distilled 
water,  boil  it  again  in  a glass  vessel  for  about  a quar- 
ter of  an  hour,  decant  the  acid,  and  wash  the  sulphur 
in  distilled  water  till  the  fluid  passes  tasteless,  or  till  it 
does  not  change  the  blue  colour  of  tincture  of  cab- 
bage or  litmus.  The  sulphur,  thus  carefully  treated, 
is  pure  sulphur,  fit  for  philosophical  experiments. 

Physical  properties. — “ Sulphur  is  a combustible, 
dry,  and  exceedingly  brittle  body,  of  a pale  lemon-yel- 
low colour.  Its  specific  gravity  is  1.990.  It  is  desti- 
tute of  odour,  except  when  rubbed  or  heated.  It  is  of 
a peculiar  faint  taste.  It  frequently  crystallizes  in  en- 
tire or  truncated  octahedra,  or  in  needles.  If  a piece 
of  sulphur,  of  a considerable  size,  be  very  gently 
heated,  as,  for  example,  by  holding  it  in  the  hand  and 
squeezing  it  firmly,  it  breaks  to  pieces  with  a crackling 
noise.  It  is  a non-conductor  of  electricity,  and  hence 
It  becomes  electric  by  friction.  When  heated,  it  first 
softens  before  it  melts,  and  its  fusion  commences  at 
218°  Fahr. ; it  is  capable  of  subliming  at  a lower  tem- 
perature; and  takes  fire  at  5G0°.  In  the  beginning  of 
fusion  it  is  very  fluid,  but  by  continuing  the  heat  it 
grows  tough,  and  its  colour  changes  to  a reddish- 
brown.  If,  in  this  condition,  it  be  poured  into  water,, 
it  remains  as  soft  as  wax,  and  yields  to  any  impression. 
In  time,  however,  it  hardens  again,  and  recovers  its 
former  consistence.- 

When  a roll  of  sulphur  is  suddenly  seized  in  a warm 
hand,  it  crackles,  and  sometimes  falls  in  pieces.  This 
is  owing  to  the  unequal  action  of  heat  on  a body  which, 
conducts  that  power  slowly,  and  which  has  little  cohe- 
sion. If  a mass  of  sulphur  be  melted  in  a crucible, 
and  after  the  surface  begins  to  concrete,  if  the  liquid 
matter  below  be  allowed  to  run  out,  fine  acicular  crys- 
tals of  sulphur  will  be  obtained. 

Sulphur  is  insoluble  in  water;  but  in  small  quantity 
in  alkohol  and  ether,  and  more  largely  in  oil. 

Sulphur  combines  with  oxygen  in  four  definite  pro- 
portions, constituting  an  interesting  series  of  acids. 
See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Sulphur  combines  readily  with  chlorine.  This  com- 
pound was  first  made  by  Dr.  Thomson,  who  passed 
chlorine  gas  through  flowers  of  sulphur.  It  may  be 
made  more  expeditiously  by  heating  sulphur  in  a 

317 


SUL 


retort  containing  chlorine.  The  sulphur  and  chlorine 
unite,  and  form  a fluid  substance,  which  is  volatile  be- 
low 200°  F.,  and  distils  into  the  cold  part  of  the  retort. 
This  substance,  seen  by  reflected  light,  appears  of  a 
red  colour,  but  is  yellowish-green  when  seen  by  trans- 
mitted light.  It  smokes  when  exposed  to  air,  and  has 
an  odour  somewhat  resembling  that  of  seaweed,  but 
much  stronger;  it  affects  the  eyes  like  the  smoke  of 
peat.  Its  taste  is  acid,  hot,  and  bitter.  Its  sp.  gr 
is  1.7. 

It  does  not  redden  perfectly  dry  paper  tinged  with 
litmus  ; when  it  is  agitated  in  contact  with  water,  the 
water  becomes  cloudy  from  the  appearance  of  sulphur, 
and  strongly  acid,  and  it  is  found  to  contain  oil  of 
vitriol. 

Iodide  of  sulphur  is  easily  formed  by  mixing  the  two 
ingredients  in  a glass  tube,  and  exposing  them  to  such 
a heat  as  melts  the  sulphur.  It  is  grayish-black,  and 
has  a radiated  structure  like  that  of  sulpliuret  of  anti- 
mony. When  distilled  with  water,  iodine  is  disen- 
gaged. 

Sulphur  and  hydrogen  combine.  Their  union  may 
be  effected,  by  causing  sulphur  to  sublime  in  dry  hydro- 
gen in  a retort  There  is  no  change  of  volume ; but 
only  a part  of  the  hydrogen  can  be  united  with  the  sul- 
phur in  this  mode  of  operating. 

The  usual  way  of  preparing  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
is  to  pour  a dilute  sulphuric  or  muriatic  acid  on  the 
black  sulphuret  of  iron  or  antimony  in  a retort.  For 
accurate  experiments  it  should  be  collected  over  mer- 
cury. It  takes  fire  when  a lighted  taper  is  brought  in 
contact  with  it,  and  burns  with  a pale  blue  flame,  de- 
positing sulphur.  Its  smell  is  extremely  foetid,  resem- 
bling that  of  rotten  eggs.  Its  taste  is  sour.  It  reddens 
vegetable  blues.  It  is  absorbable  by  water,  which  takes 
up  more  than  an  equal  volume  of  the  gas.  Its  sp.  gr., 
according  to  Gay  Lussac  and  Thenard,  is  to  that  of  air 
as  1.1912  to  1.0. 

Of  all  the  gases,  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  perhaps  the 
most  deleterious  to  animal  life.  A greenfinch,  plunged 
into  air,  which  contains  only  l-1500th  of  its  volume,  pe- 
rishes instantly.  A dog  of  middle  size  is  destroyed  in 
air  that  contains  l-800th  ; and  a horse  w ould  fall  a vic- 
tim to  an  atmosphere  containing  l-250th. 

Dr.  Chaussier  proves,  that  to  kill  an  animal,  it  is  suf- 
ficient to  make  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  act  on 
the  surface  of  its  body,  when  it  is  absorbed  by  the  inha- 
lants. He  took  a bladder  having  a stop-cock  at  one 
end,  and  at  the  other  an  opening,  into  which  he  intro- 
duced the  body  of  a rabbit,  leaving  its  head  outside,  and 
securing  the  bladder  air-tight  round  the  neck  by  adhe- 
sive plaster.  He  then  sucked  the  air  out  of  the  blad- 
der, and  replaced  it  by  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  A 
young  animal  in  these  circumstances  usually  perishes 
in  15  or  20  minutes.  Old  rabbits  resist  the  poison  much 
longer. 

When  potassium  or  sodium  is  heated,  merely  to 
fusion,  in  contact  with  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  it  be- 
comes luminous,  and  burns  with  extrication  of  hydro- 
gen, while  a metallic  sulphuret  remains,  combined  with 
sulphuretted  hydrogen,  or  a sulphuretted  bydrosul- 
phuret. 

Sulphuretted  hydrogen  coinbines  with  an  equal  vo- 
lume of  ammonia  ; and  unites  to  alkalies  and  oxides, 
so  that  it  has  all  the  characters  of  an  acid.  These  com- 
pounds are  called  hydrosulphurets . 

All  the  hydrosulphurets , soluble  in  water,  have  an 
acrid  and  bitter  taste,  and,  when  in  the  liquid  state,  the 
odour  of  rotten  eggs.  All  those  which  are  insoluble 
are,  on  the  contrary,  insipid,  and  without  smell.  There 
are  only  two  coloured  hydrosulphurets,  that  of  iron, 
which  is  black,  and  of  antimony,  which  is  chestnut- 
brown. 

All  the  hydrosulphurets  are  decomposed  by  the  action 
of  fire.  That  of  magnesia  is  transformed  into  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen  and  oxide  of  magnesium ; those  of 
potassa  and  soda,  into  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  hydro- 
gen, and  sulphuretted  alkalies ; those  of  manganese, 
zinc,  iron,  tin,  and  antimony,  into  water  and  metallic 
sulphurets. 

When  we  put  in  contact  with  the  air,  at  the  ordinary 
temperature,  an  aqueous  solution  of  a hydrosulphuret, 
there  results,  in  the  space  of  some  days,  1st,  water,  and 
a sulphuretted  hydrosulphuret,  which  is  yellow  and 
soluble ; 2d,  water,  and  a colourless  hydrosulphite, 
which,  if  its  base  be  potassa,  soda,  or  ammonia,  re- 
mains in  solution  in  the  water ; but  which  falls  down 
318 


SUL 

in  acicular  crystals,  if  its  base  be  barytes,  strontia,  or 
lime. 

The  acids  in  general  combine  with  the  base  of  the 
hydrosulphurets,  and  disengage  sulphuretted  hydrogen 
with  a lively  effervescence,  without  any  deposition  of 
sulphur,  unless  the  acid  be  in  excess,  and  be  capable, 
like  the  nitric  and  nitrous  acid,  of  yielding  a portion 
of  its  oxygen  to  the  hydrogen  of  the  sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen. 

The  hydrosulphurets  of  potassa,  soda,  ammonia, 
lime,  and  magnesia,  are  prepared  directly,  by  transmit- 
ting an  excess  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  through 
these  bases,  dissolved  or  diffused  in  water. 

The  composition  of  the  hydrosulphurets  is  such,  that 
the  hydrogen  of  the  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  to  the 
oxygen  of  the  oxide  in  the  same  ratio  as  in  water. 
Hence,  when  we  calcine  the  hydrosulphurets  of  iron, 
tin,  &c.  we  convert  them  into  water  and  sulphurets. 

Hydrosulphuret  of  potassa  crystallizes  in  four-sided 
prisms,  terminated  by  four-sided  pyramids.  Its  taste  is 
acrid  and  bitter.  Exposed  to  the  air,  it  attracts  hu- 
midity, absorbs  oxygen,  passes  to  the  state  of  a sulphu- 
retted hydrosulphuret,  and  finally  to  that  of  a hydro- 
sulphite. It  is  extremely  soluble  in  water.  Its  solution 
in  this  liquid  occasions  a perceptible  refrigeration.  Sub- 
jected to  heat,  it  evolves  much  sulphuretted  hydrogen, 
and  the  hydrosulphuret  passes,  to  the  state  of  a sub- 
hydrosulphuret.  1 

Hydrosulphuret  of  soda  crystallizes  with  more  diffi- 
culty than  the  preceding. 

Hydrosulphuret  of  ammonia  is  obtained  by  the  direct 
union  of  the  two  gaseous  constituents  in  a glass  balloon, 
at  a low  temperature'-  As  soon  as  the  gases  mingle, 
transparent  white  or  yellowish  crystals  are  formed. 
When  a mere  solution  of  this  hydrosulphuret  is  wished 
for  medicine  or  analysis,  we  pass  a current  of  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen  through  aqueous  ammonia  till  satu- 
ration. 

The  pure  hydrosulphuret  is  white,  transparent,  and 
crystallized  in  needles  or  fine  plates.  It  is  very  vola- 
tile. Hence,  at  ordinary  temperatures,  it  gradually 
sublimes  into  the  upper  part  of  the  phials  in  which  we 
preserve  d.  We  may  also  by  the  same  means  separate 
it  from  the  yellow  sulphuretted  hydrosulphuret,  with 
which  it  is  occasionally  mixed.  When  exposed  to  the 
air,  it  absorbs  oxygen,  passes  to  the  state  of  a sulphu- 
retted hydrosulphuret,  and  becomes  yellow.  When  it 
contains  an  excess  of  ammonia,  it  dissolves  speediiy  in 
water,  with  the  production  of  a very  considerable  cold. 

Sub-hydrosulphuret.  of  barytes  is  prepared  by  dissolv- 
ing, in  five  or  six  parts  of  boiling  water,  the  sulphuret 
of  the  earth  obtained  by  igniting  the  sulphate  with 
charcoal.  The  solution  being  filtered  while  hot,  will 
deposite,  on  cooling,  a multitude  of  crystals,  which  must 
be  drained,  and  speedily  dried  by  pressure  between  the 
folds  of  blotting-paper.  It  crystallizes  in  white  scaly 
plates.  It  is  much  more  soluble  in  hot  than  in  cold 
water.  Its  solution  is  colourless,  and  capable  of  ab- 
sorbing, at  the  ordinary  temperature,  a very  large  quan- 
tity of  sulphuretted  hydrogen. 

Sub-liydrosulphurct  of  strontites  crystallizes  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  preceding.  The  crystals  obtained 
in  the  same  way  must  be  dissolved  in  water  ; and  the 
solution  being  exposed  to  a stream  of  sulphuretted  hy- 
drogen, and  then  concentrated  by  evaporation  in  a re- 
tort, will  afford,  on  cooling,  crystals  of  pure  sub-hydro- 
sulphuret. 

Hydrosulphurets  of  lime  and  magnesia  have  been 
obtained  only  in  aqueous  solutions.  The  metallic  hy- 
drosulphurets of  any  practical  importance  are  treated 
of  under  their  respective  metals. 

When  we  expose  sulphur  to  the  action  of  a solution 
of  a hydrosulphuret,  saturated  with  sulphuretted  hydro- 
gen, as  much  more  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  evolved  as 
the  temperature  is  more  elevated.  But  when  the  solu- 
tion of  hydrosulphuret,  instead  of  being  saturated,  has 
a sufficient  excess  of  alkali,  it  evolves  no  perceptible 
quantity  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  even  at  a boiling 
heat ; although  it  dissolves  as  much  sulphur  as  in  its 
state  of  saturation.  It  hence  follows,  jst,  That  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen,  sulphur,  and  the  alkalies,  have  the 
property  of  forming  very  variable  triple  combinations; 
2d,  That  all  these  combinations  contain  less  sulphuret- 
ted hydrogen  than  the  hydrosulphurets ; and,  3d,  That 
the  quantity  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  inversely  as 
the  sulphur  they  contain,  and  reciprocally.  These 
compounds  have  been  called,  in  general,  sulphuretted 


SUL 


hydrosulphurets ; but  the  name  of  hydrogenated  sulphu- 
rets  is  more  particularly  given  to  those  combinations 
which  are  saturated  with  sulphur  at  a high  tempera- 
ture, because,  by  treating  them  with  acids,  we  precipi- 
tate a peculiar  compound  of  sulphur  and  hydrogen,  of 
\vhich  we  shall  now  treat. 

This  compound  of  hydrogen  and  sulphur,  the  pro- 
portions of  the  elements  of  which  have  not  yet  been 
accurately  ascertaiped,  is  also  called  hydruret  of  sul- 
phur. It  is  formed  by  putting  flowers  of  sulphur  in 
contact  with  nascent  sulphuretted  hydrogen.  With 
this  view,  we  take  an  aqueous  solution  of  the  hydro- 
genated sulphuret  of  potassa,  and  pour  it  gradually  into 
liquid  muriatic  acid,  which  seizes  the  potassa,  and  forms 
a soluble  salt,  while  the  sulphur  and  sulphuretted  hydro- 
gen unite,  fall  down  together,  collecting  by  degrees  at 
the  bottom  of  the  vessel,  as  a dense  oil  does  in  water. 
To  preserve  this  hydruret  of  sulphur,  we  must  fill  with 
it  a phial  having  a ground  stopper,  cork  it,  and  keep  it 
inverted  in  a cool  place.  We  may  consider  this  sub- 
stance either  as  a combination  of  sulphur  and  hydro- 
gen, or  of  sulphur  and  sulphuretted  hydrogen  ; but  its 
properties,  and  the  mode  of  obtaining  it,  render  the  lat- 
ter the  more  probable  opinion.  The  proportion  of  the 
constituents  is  not  known. 

The  most  interesting  of  the  hydrogenated  sulphurets, 
is  that  of  ammonia.  It  was  discovered  by  the  Hon. 
Robert  Boyle,  and  called  his  fuming  liquor.  To  pre- 
pare it,  we  take  one  part  of  muriate  of.  ammonia  and 
of  pulverized  quicklime,  and  half  a part  of  flowers  of 
sulphur.  After  mixing  them  intimately,  we  introduce 
the  mixture  into  an  earthen  or  glass  retort,  taking  care 
that  none  of  it  remains  in  the  neck.  A dry  cooled  re- 
ceiver is  connected  to  the  retort  by  means  of  a long 
adopter-tube.  The  heat  must  be  urged  slowly  almost 
to  redness.  A yellowish  liquor  condenses  in  the  re- 
ceiver, which  is  to  be  put  into  a phial  with  its  own 
weight  of  flowers  of  sulphur,  and  agitated  with  it  seven 
or  eight  minutes.  The  greater  part  of  the  sulphur  is 
dissolved,  the  colour  of  the  mixture  deepens  remarka- 
bly, and  becomes  thick,  constituting  the  hydrogenated 
sulphuret. 

The  distilled  liquor  diffuses,  for  a long  time,  dense 
vapour  in  a jar  full  of  oxygen  or  common  air,  but 
scarcely  any  in  azote  or  hydrogen  ; and  the  dryness  or 
humidity  of  the  gases  makes  no  difference  in  the  effects. 
It  is  probably  owing  to  the  oxygen  converting  the  liquor 
into  a hydrogenated  sulphuret,  or  perhaps  to  the  state 
of  sulphite,  that  the  vapours  appear. 

Hydrogenated  sulphurets  are  frequently  called  hy- 
droguretted  sulphurets. 

Sulphur  combines  with  carbon,  forming  an  interest- 
ing compound,  to  which  the  name  of  sulphuret  of’ car- 
bon is  sometimes  given.” 

Sulphur  has  been  long  an  esteemed  article  of  the 
Materia  Medica;  it  stimulates  the  system,  loosens  the 
belly,  and  promotes  the  insensible  perspiration.  It 
pervades  the  whole  habit,  and  manifestly  transpires 
through  the  pores  of  the  skin,  as  appears  from  the  sul- 
phurous smell  of  persons  who  have  taken  it,  and  from 
silver  being  stained  in  their  pockets  of  a blackish 
colour.  In  the  stomach  it  is  probably  combined  with 
hydrogen.  It  is  a celebrated  remedy  against  cutaneous 
diseases,  particularly  psora,  both  given  internally  and 
applied  externally.  It  has  likewise  been  recommended 
in  rheumatic  pains,  flying  gout,  rickets,  atrophy,  ! 
coughs,  asthmas,  and  other  disorders  of  the  breast  and 
lungs,  and  particularly  catarrhs  of  the  chronic  kind, 
also  in  solica  pictonum,  worm  cases,  and  to  lessen 
salivation. 

In  luemorrhoidal  affections  it  is  almost  specific;  but 
in  most  of  these  cases  it  is  advantageously  combined 
with  some  cooling  purgative,  especially  supertartrate 
of  potassa. 

The  preparations  of  sulphur  directed  to  be  used  by 
the  London  and  Edinburgh  Colleges,  are  the  Sulphur 
lotum,  Sulphur  praecipitatum,  and  Sulphur  suhlimatum. 

Sulphur  antimonii  praecipitatum.  Sulphur  au- 
ratum  antimonii.  This  preparation  of  antimony  ap- 
pears to  have  rendered  that  called  kermcs  mineral 
unnecessary.  It  is  a yellow  hydrosulphuret  of  anti- 
mony, and  therefore  called  hydro-sulphur etum  stibii 
lute  urn.  As  an  alterative  and  sudorific  it  is  in  high  es- 
timation, and  given  in  diseases  of  the  skin  and  glands  ; 
and  joined  with  calomel,  it  is  one  of  the  most  power- 
ful and  penetrating  alteratives  we  are  in  posses- 
sion of. 


SUL 

Sulphur  auratum  antimonii.  See  Sulphur  anti 
monii  praecipitatum. 

Sulphur  lotum.  Washed  sulphur ; Flores  sul- 
phuris  loti.  Take  of  sublimed  sulphur,  a pound 
Pour  on  boiling  water  so  that  the  acid,  if  there  be  any 
may  be  entirely  washed  away  ; then  dry  it.  The'dose 
is  from  half  a drachm  to  two  drachms. 

Sulphur  praecipitatum.  Fac  sulphuris.  Take 
of  sublimed  sulphur,  a pound ; fresh  lime,  two  pounds; 
water,  four  gallons : boil  the  sulphur  and  lime  together 
in  the  water,  then  strain  the  solution  through  paper, 
and  drop  in  it  as  much  muriatic  acid  as  may  be  neces- 
sary to  precipitate  the  sulphur;  lastly,  wash  this  by 
repeated  effusions  of  water  until  it  is  tasteless.  This 
preparation  is  mostly  preferred  to  the  flowers  of  sul- 
phur, in  consequence  of  its  being  freed  from  its  im- 
purities. The  dose  is  from  half  a drachm  to  three 
drachms. 

Sulphur,  precipitated.  See  Sulphur  praecipitatum. 

Sulphur  sublimatum.  Sublimed  sulphur.  See 
Sulphur. 

Sulphur  vivum.  Native  sulphur. 

Sulphur,  washed.  See  Sulphur  lotum. 

SULPHURWORT.  See  Peucedanum. 

Sulphurated  hydrogen  gas.  See  Hydrogen  gas, 
sulphuretted.  \ 

SULPHURE.  See  Sulphuret. 

Sulphureous  acid.  See  Sulphurous  acid. 

Sulphuretted  chyazic  acid.  See  Sulphur  oprussie 
acid. 

SULPHURETTED  HYDROGEN.  See  Hydrogen , 
sulphuretted. 

SULPHURETUM.  Sulphuret.  Sulphure.  Acorn 
bination  of  sulphur  with  an  alkali,  earth,  or  metal. 

Sulphuretum  ammoniae.  Hcpar  sulphuris  vola- 
tile. Boyle’s  or  Beguine’s  fuming  spirit.  Sulphuret 
of  ammonia  is  obtained  in  the  form  of  a yellow  fuming 
liquor,  by  the  ammonia  and  sulphur  uniting  while  in  a 
state  of  gas  during  distillation.  It  excites  the  action  of 
the  absorbent  system,  and  diminishes  arterial  action, 
and  is  given  internally  in  diseases  arising  from  the  tu-e 
of  mercury,  phthisis,  diseases  of  the  skin,  and  phleg- 
masiae  : externally  it  is  prescribed  in  the  form  of  bath 
in  paralysis,  contractura,  psora,  and  other  cutaneous 
diseases. 

Sulphuretum  antimonii  praecipitatum.  See  An 
timonii  sulphuretum  praecipitatum. 

Sulphuretum  calcis .,  Hep ar  calcis.  Sulphuret 
of  lime.  It  is  principally  jised  as  a bath  in  various  dis- 
eases of  the  skin. 

Sulphuretum  hydrargyri  nigrum.  See  Hydrar- 
gyri  sulphuretum  nigrum. 

Sulphuretum  hydrargyri  rubrum.  See  Hy- 
drargyri sulphuretum  rubrum. 

Sulphuretum  potassae.  See  Potassa  sulphure- 
tum. 

Sulphuretum  sod*.  A combination  of  soda  and 
sulphur. 

Sulphuretum  stibii  nativum.  Sulphuretum  stibii 
nigrum;  Antimonium  crudum.  Native  sulphuret  of 
antimony.  It  is  from  this  ore  that  all  our  preparations 
of  antimony  are  made.  See  Antimony. 

SULPH  URIC.  Sulpliuricus.  Belonging  to  sulphur. 

Sulphuric  acid.  Acidum  sulphuricum.  Oil  of 
vitriol.  Vitriolic  acid.  “ When  sulphur  is  heated  to 
! 180°  or  190°  in  an  open  vessel,  it  melts,  and  soon  after- 
ward emits  a bluish  flame,  visible  in  the  dark,  but 
which,  in  open  daylight,  has  the  appearance  of  a 
white  fume.  This  flame  has  a suffocating  smell,  and 
has  so  little  heat  that  it  will  not  set  fire  to  flax,  or  even 
gunpowder,  so  that  in  this  way  the  sulphur  may  be  en- 
tirely consumed  out  of  it.  If  the  heat  be  still  augmented 
the  sulphur  boils,  and  suddenly  bursts  into  a much 
more  luminous  flame,  the  same  suffocating  vapour  still 
continuing  to  be  emitted. 

The  suffocating  vapour  of  sulphur  is  imbibed  by 
water,  with  which  it  forms  the  fluid  formerly  called 
volatile  vitriolic,  now  sulphurous  acid.  If  this  fluid  be 
exposed  for  a time  to  the  air,  it  loses  the  sulphurous 
smell  it  had  at  first,  and  the  acid  becomes  more  fixed. 
It  is  then  the  fluid  which  was  formerly  called  the  spirit 
of  vitriol.  Much  of  the  water  may  be  driven  off  by 
heat,  and  the  dense  acid  which  remains  is  the  sulphuric 
acid  commonly  called  oil  of  vitriol ; a name  wfiiich 
was  probably  given  to  it  from  the  little  noise  it  makes 
when  poured  out,  and  the  unctuous  feel  it  has  when 
rubbed  between  the  fingers,  produced  by  its  corroding 

319 


SUL 


SUL 

and  destroying  the  skin,  with  which  it  forms  a soapy 
compound. 

The  stone  or  mineral  called  martial  pyrites,  which 
consists  for  the  most  part  of  sulphur  and  iron,  is  found 
to  be  converted  into  the  salt  vulgarly  called  green  vi- 
triol, but  more  properly  sulphate  of  iron,  by  exposure  to 
air  and  moisture.  In  this  natural  pfocess  the  pyrites 
breaks  and  falls  in  pieces;  and  if  the  change  takes 
place  rapidly,  a considerable  increase  of  temperature 
follows,  which  is  sometimes  sufficient  to  set  the  mass 
on  fire.  By  conducting  this  operation  in  an  accurate 
way,  it  is  found  that  oxygen  is  absorbed.  The  sul- 
phate is  obtained  by  solution  in  water  and  subsequent 
evaporation;  by  which  the  crystals  of  the  salt  are 
separated  from  the  earthy  impurities,  which  were  not 
suspended  in  the  water. 

The  sulphuric  acid  was  formerly  obtained  in  this 
country  by  distillation  from  sulphate  of  iron,  as  it  still 
is  in  many  parts  abroad : the  common  green  vitriol  is 
made  use  of  for  this  purpose,  as  it  is  to  be  met  with  at 
a loW  price,  and  the  acid  is  most  easily  to  be  extracted 
from  it.  With  respect  to  the  operation  itself,  the  fol- 
lowing particulars  should  be  attended  to:  First,  the 
vitriol  must  be  calcined  in  an  iron  or  earthen  vessel, 
till  it  appears  of  a yellowish-red  colour : by  this  opera- 
tion it  w ill  lose  half  its  weight.  This  is  done  in  order 
to  deprive  it  of  the  greater  part  of  the  water  which  it 
has  attracted  into  its  crystals  during  the  crystallization, 
and  which  would  otherwise,  in  the  ensuing  distilliza- 
tion,  greatly  weaken  the  acid.  As  soon  as  the  calcina- 
tion is  finished,  tire  vitriol  is  to  be  put  immediately, 
while  it  is  warm,  into  a coated  earthen  retort,  which 
is  to  be  filled  two-thirds  with  it,  so  that  the  ingredients 
may  have  sufficient  room  upon  being  distended  by  the 
heat,  and  thus  the  bursting  of  the  retort  be  prevented. 
It  will  be  most  advisable  to  have  the  retort  immediately 
enclosed  in  brick-work  in  a reverberatory  furnace,  and 
to  stop  up  the  neck  of  it  till  the  distillation  begins,  in 
order  to  prevent  the  materials  from  attracting  fresh 
humidity  from  the  air.  At  the  beginning  of  the  distil- 
lation the  retort  must  be  opened,  and  a moderate  fire 
is  to  be  applied  to  it,  in  order  to  expel  from  the  vitriol 
ail  that  part  of  the  phlegm  which  does  not  taste  strongly 
of  the  acid,  and  which  may  be  received  in  an  open 
vessel  placed  under  the  retort.  But  as  soon  as  there 
appear  any  acid  drops,  a receiver  is  to  be  added,  into 
which  has  been  previously  poured  a quantity  of  the 
acidulous  fluid  which  has  come  over,  in  the  proportion 
of  half  a pound  of  it  to  twelve  pounds  of  the  calcined 
vitriol ; when  the  receiver  is  to  be  secured  with  a 
proper  luting.  The  fire  is  now  to  be  raised  by  little  and 
little  to  the  most  intense  degree  of  heat,  and  the  re- 
ceiver carefully  covered  with  wet  cloths,  and,  in 
winter  time,  with  snow  or  ice,  as  the  acid  rises  in 
the  form  of  a thick  white  vapour,  which  towards  the 
end  of  the  operation  becomes  hot,  and  heats  the  re- 
ceiver to  a great  degree.  The  fire  must  be  continued 
at  this  high  pitch  for  several  days,  till  no  vapour  issues 
from  the  retort,  nor  any  drops  are  seen  trickling  down 
its  sides.  In  the  case  of  a great  quantity  of  vitriol 
being  distilled,  Bernhardt  has  observed  it  to  continue 
emitting  vapours  in  this  manner  for  the  space  of  ten 
days.  When  the  vessels  are  quite  cold,  the  receiver 
must  be  opened  carefully,  so  that  none  of  the  luting 
may  fall  into  it;  after  which  the  fluid  contained  in  it  is 
to  be  poured  in  a bottle,  and  the  air  carefully  excluded. 
The  fluid  that  is  thus  obtained  is  the  German  sulphuric 
acid,  of  which  Bernhardt  got  sixty-four  pounds  from 
six  hundredweight  of  vitriol ; and,  on  the  other  hand, 
when  no  water  had  been  previously  poured  into  the 
receiver,  fifty-two  pounds  only  of  a dry  concrete  acid. 
This  acid  was  formerly  called  glacial  oil  of  vitriol , 
and  its  consistence  isowing  to  a mixture  of  sulphurous 
acid,  which  occasions  it  to  become  solid  at  a moderate 
temperature. 

It  has  been  lately  stated  by  Vogel,  that  when  this 
fuming  acid  is  put  into  a glass  retort,  and  distilled  by  a 
moderate  heat  into  a receiver  cooled  with  ice,  the  fu- 
ming portion  comes  over  first,  and  may  be  obtained  in 
a solid  state  by  stopping  the  distillation  in  time.  This 
has  been  supposed  to  constitute  absolute  sulphuric 
acid,  or  acid  entirely  void  of  water.  It  is  in  silky  fila- 
ments, tough,  difficult  to  cut,  and  somewhat  like  asbes- 
tos. Exposed  to  the  air,  it  fumes  strongly,  and  gradu- 
ally evaporates.  It  does  not  act  on  the  skin  so  rapidly 
as  concentrated  oil  of  vitriol.  Up  to  6fi°  it  continues 
solid,  but  at  temperatures  above  this  it  becomes  a 


colourless  vapour,  which  whitens  on  contact  with  air. 
Dropped  into  water  in  small  quantities,  it  excites  a his- 
sing noise,  as  if  it  were  red-hot  iron  ; in  larger  quan- 
tities it  produces  a species  of  explosion.  It  is  said  to 
be  convertible  into  ordinary  sulphuric  acid,  by  the 
addition  of  a fifth  of  water.  It  dissolves  sulphur,  and 
assumes  a blue,  green,  or  brown  colour,  according  to 
the  proportion  of  sulphur  dissolved.  The  specific 
gravity  of  the  black  fuming  sulphuric  acid,  prepand 
in  large  quantities  from  copperas,  at  Nordhausen,  is 
1.896.  Its  constitution  is  not  well  ascertained. 

The  sulphuric  acid  made  in  Great  Britain  is  pro- 
duced by  the  combustion  of  sulphur.  There  are  three 
conditions  requisite  in  this  operation.  Oxygen  must 
be  present  to  maintain  the  combustion ; the  vessel  must 
be  so  close  as  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  volatile  mut- 
ter which  rises,  and  water  must  be  present  to  imbibe  it. 
For  these  purposes,  a mixture  of  eight  parts  of  sulphur 
with  one  of  nitre  is  placed  in  a proper  vessel  enclosed 
within  a chamber  of  considerable  size,  lined  on  ail 
sides  with  lead,  and  covered  at  bottom  with  a shallow 
stratum  of  water.  The  mixture  being  set  on  fire,  will 
burn  for  a considerable  time  by  virtud  of  the  supply 
of  oxygen  which  nitre  gives  out  when  heated,  and  the 
water  imbibing  the  sulphurous  vapours,  becomes  gra- 
dually more  and  more  acid  after  repeated  combustions, 
and  the  acid  is  afterward  concentrated  by  distillation. 

Such  was  the  account  usually  given  of  this  opera- 
tion, till  Clement  and  Desormes  showed,  in  a very 
interesting  memoir,  its  total  inadequacy  to  account  for 
the  result.  100  parts  of  nitre,  judiciously  managed, 
will  produce,  with  the  requisite-  quantity  of  sulphur, 
2000  parts  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid.  Now  these 
contain  1200  parts  of  oxygen,  while  the  hundred  parts 
of  nitre  contain  only  39*  of  oxygen;  being  not  l-30th 
part  of  what  is  afterward  found  in  the  resulting  sul- 
phuric acid.  But  after  the  combustion  of  the  sulphur, 
the  nitre  is  converted  into  sulphate  and  bisulphate  of 
potassa,  which  mingled  residuary  salts  contain  nearly 
as  much  oxygen  as  the  nitre  originally  did.  Hence  the 
origin  of  the  1200  part6  of  the  oxygen  in  the  sulphuric 
acid  is  still  to  be  sought  for..  The  following  ingenious 
theory  was  first  given  by  Clement  and  Desormes. 
The  burning  sulphur  or  sulphurous  acid,  taking  from 
the  nitre  a portion  of  its  oxygen,  forms  sulphuric 
acid,  which  unites  with  the  potassa,  and  displaces  a 
little  nitrous  and  nitric  acids  in  vapour.  These  vapours 
are  decomposed  by  the  sulphurous  acid,  into  nitrous 
gas,  or  deutoxide  of  azote.  This  gas,  naturally  lit- 
tle denser  than  air,  and  now  expanded  by  the  heat, 
suddenly  rises  to  the  roof  of  the  chamber  : and  might 
be  expected  to  escape  at  the  aperture  there,  which  ma- 
nufacturers were  always  obliged  to  leave  open,  other- 
wise they  fouud  the  acidification  would  not  proceed. 
But  the  instant  that  nitrous  gas  comes  in  contact  with 
atmospherical  oxygen,  nitrous  acid  vapour  is  formed, 
which  being  a very  heavy  aeriform  body,  immedi-'* 
ately  precipitates  on  the  sulphurous  flame,  and  convei  ts 
it  into  sulphuric  acid ; while  itself  resuming  the  state 
of  nitrous  gas,  reascends  for  a new  charge  of  oxygen, 
again  to  redescend,  and  transfer  it  to  the  flaming  sul- 
phur. Thus  we  see,  that  a small  volume  of  nitrous 
vapour,  by  its  alternate  metamorphoses  into  the  states 
of  oxide  and  acid,  and  its  consequent  interchanges, 
may  be  capable  of  acidifying  a great  quantity  of 
sulphur. 

This  beautiful  theory  received  a modification  from 
Sir  H.  Davy.  He  found  that  nitrous  gas  had  no  action 
on  sulphurous  gas,  to  convert  it  into  sulphuric  acid, 
unless  water  be  present.  With  a small  proportion  of 
water,  four  volumes  of  sulphurous  acid  gas,  and  three 
of  nitrous  gas,  are  condensed  into  crystalline  solid, 
which  is  instantly  decomposed  by  abundance  of  wa- 
te:.-;  oil  of  vitriol  is  formed,  and  nitrous  gas  given  off, 
which  with  contact  of  air  becomes  nitrous  acid  gas,  as 
above  described.  The  process  continues,  according  to 
the  same  principle  of  combination  and  decomposition, 
till  the  water  at  the  bottom  of  the  chamber  is  become 
strongly  acid.  It  is  first  concentrated  in  large  leaden 
pans,  and  afterward  in  glass  retorts  heated  in  a sand- 
bath.  Platinum  alembics,  placed  within  pots  of  cast- 
iron  of  a corresponding  shape  and  capacity,  have  been 
lately  substituted  in  many  manufactories  for  glass,  and 
have  been  found  to  save  fuel,  and  quicken  the  process 
of  concentration. 

The  proper  mode  of  burning  the  sulphur  with  the 
nitre,  so  as  to  produce  the  greatest  quantity  of  oil 


SUL 


SUL 


of  vitriol,  is  a problem,  concerning  which  chemists 
hold  a-  variety  of  opinions.  Thenard  describes  the 
following  as  the  best.  Near  one  of  the  sides  of  the 
leaden  chamber,  about  a foot  above  its  bottom,  an  iron 
plate,  furnished  witli  an  upright  border,  is  p’aced  hori- 
zontally over  a furnace,  whose  chimney  passes  across, 
under  the  bottom  of  the  chamber,  without  having  any 
connexion  with  it.  On  this  plate,  which  is  enclosed  in 
a little  chamber,  the  mixture  of  sulphur  and  nitre  is 
laid.  The  whole  being  shut  up,  and  the  bottom  of  the 
large  chamber  covered  with  water,  a gentle  fire  is 
kindled  in  the  furnace.  The  sulphur  soon  takes  fire, 
and  gives  birth  to  the  products  described.  When  the 
combustion  is  finished,  which  is  seen  through  a little 
pane  adapted  to  the  trap-door  of  the  chamber,  this  is 
opened,  the  sulphate  of  potassa  is  withdrawn,  and  is 
replaced  by  a mixture  of  sulphur  and  nitre.  The  air 
in  the  great  chamber  is  meanwhile  renewed  by  opening 
its  lateral  door,  and  a valve  in  its  opposite  side.  Then, 
after  closing  these  openings,  the  furnace  is  lighted 
anew.  Successive  mixtures  are  thus  burned  till  the 
acid  acquires  a specific  gravity  of  about  1.390,  taking 
care  never  to  put  at  once  on  the  plate  more  sulphur 
than  the  air  of  the  chamber  can  acidify.  The  acid  is 
then  withdrawn  by  stop-cocks,  and  concentrated. 

The  following  details  are  extracted  from  a paper  on 
sulphuric  acid,  which  Dr.Ure  published  in  the  fourth 
volume  of  the  Journal  of  Science  and  the  Arts. 

“ The  best  commercial  sulphuric  acid  that  I have 
been  able  to  meet  with,”  says  he,  “ contains  from  one- 
half  to  three  quarters  of  a part  in  the  hundred,  of  solid 
saline  matter,  foreign  to  its  nature.  These  fractional 
parts  consist  of  sulphate  of  potassa  and  lead,  in  the 
proportion  of  four  of  the  former  to  one  of  the  latter. 
Itis,  I believe,  difficult  to  manufacture  itdirectly,  by  the 
usual  methods,  of  a purer  quality.  The  ordinary  acid 
sold  in  the  shops  contains  often  three  or  four  per  cent, 
of  saline  matter.  Even  more  is  occasionally  introduced, 
by  the  employment  of  nitre,  to  remove  the  brown  co- 
lour given  to  the  acid  by  carbonaceous  matter.  The 
amount  of  these  adulterations,  whether  accidental  or 
fraudulent,  maybe  readily  determined  by  evaporating, 
in  a small  capsule  of  porcelain,  or  rather  platinum,  a 
definite  weight  of  the  acid.  The  platinum  cup  placed 
on  the  red  cinders  of  a common  fire,  will  give  an 
exact  result  in  five  minutes.  If  more  than  five  grains 
of  matter  remain  from  five  hundred  of  acid,  we  may 
pronounce  it  sophisticated. 

Distillation  is  the  mode  by  which  pure  oil  of  vitriol 
is  obtained.  This  process  is  described  in  chemical 
treatises  as  both  difficult  and  hazardous;  but  since 
adopting  the  following  plan,  I have  found  it  perfectly 
safe  and  convenient.  I take  a plain  glass  retort,  capa- 
ble of  holding  from  two  to  four  quarts  of  water,  and 
put  into  it  about  a pint-measure  of  the  sulphuric  acid, 
(and  a few  fragments  of  glass,)  connecting  the  retort 
with  a large  globular  receiver,  by  means  of  a glass 
tube  four  feet  long,  and.  from  one  to  two  inches  in 
diameter.  The  tube  fits  very  loosely  at  botli  ends. 
The  retort  is  placed  over  a charcoal  fire,  and  the  flame 
is  made  to  play  gently  on  its  bottom.  When  the  acid 
begins  to  boil  smartly,  sudden  explosions  of  dense 
vapour  rush  forth  from  time  to  time,  which  would  in- 
fallibly break  small  vessels.  Here,  however,  these 
expansions  are  safely  permitted,  by  the  large  capacity 
of  the  retort  and  receiver,  as  well  as  by  the  easy  com- 
munication with  the  air  at  both  ends  of  the  adopter 
tube.  Should  the  retort,  indeed,  be  exposed  to  a great 
intensity  of  flame,  the  vapour  will  no  doubt  be  gene- 
rated with  incoercible  rapidity,  and  break  the  apparatus. 
But  this  accident  can  proceed  only  from  gross  impru- 
dence. It  resembles  in  suddenness,  the  explosion  of 
gunpowder,  and  illustrates  admirably  Dr.  Black’s  ob- 
servation, that,  but  for  the  great  latent  heat  of  steam, 
a mass  of  water,  powerfully  heated,  would  explode  on 
reaching  the  boiling  temperature.  I have  ascertained, 
that  the  specific  caloric  of  the  vapour  of  sulphuric 
acid  is  very  small,  and  hence  the  danger  to  which  rash 
operators  may  be  exposed  during  its  distillation. 
Hence,  also,  it  is  unnecessary  to  surround  the  receiver 
with  cold  water,  as  when  alkohol  and  most  other 
liquids  are  distilled.  Indeed,  the  application  of  cold  to 
the  bottom  of  the  receiver  generally  causes  it,  in  the 
present  operation,  to  crack.  By  the  above  method,  l 
have  made  the  concentrated  oil  of  vitriol  flow  over  in 
a continuous  slender  stream,  without  the  globe  be- 
coming sensibly  hot 

Eec 


I have  frequently  boiled  the  distilled  acid  fill  only 
one-half  remain  in  the  retort ; yet  at  the  temperature 
of  60°  Fahrenheit,  I have  never  found  the  specific 
• gravity  of  acid  so  concentrated,  to  exceed  1.8455.  It 
is,  I believe,  more  exactly  1.8452.  The  number  1.850, 
which  it  has  been  the  fashion  to  assign  for  the  density 
of  pure  oil  of  vitriol,  is  undoubtedly  very  erroneous, 
and  ought  to  be  corrected.  Genuine  commercial  acid 
should  never  surpass  1 8485 ; when  it  is  denser  we  may 
infer  sophistication,  or  negligence,  in  the  manufac- 
ture.” 

The  sulphuric  acid  strongly  attracts  water,  which  it 
takes  from  the  atmosphere  very  rapidly,  and  in  larger 
quantities,  if  suffered  to  remain  in  an  open  vessel,  im- 
bibing one-third  of  its  weight  in  twenty-four  hours, 
and  more  than  six  times  its  weight  in  a twelvemonth. 
If  four  parts  by  weight  be  mixed  with  one  of  water 
at  50°,  they  produce  an  instantaneous  heat  of  300° 
F.  ; and  four  parts  raise  one  of  ice  to  212° : on  the 
contrary,  four  parts  of  ice,  mired  with  one  of  acid, 
sink  the  thermometer  to  4 below  0.  When  pure  it  is 
colourless,  and  emits  no  fumes.  It  requires  a great 
degree  of  cold  to  freeze  it;  and  if  diluted  with  half  a 
part  or  more  of  water,  unless  the  dilution  be  carried 
very  far,  it  becomes  more  and  more  difficult  to  congeal ; 
yet  at  the  specific  gravity  of  1.78,  or  a few  hundredths 
above  or  below  this,  it  may  be  frozen  by  surrounding 
it  with  melting  snow.  Its  congelation  forms  regular 
prismatic  crystals  with  six  sides.  Its  boiling  point, 
according  to  Bergman,  is  540° ; according  to  Dalton, 
590°. 

Pure  sulphuric  acid  is  without  smell  and  colour,  and 
of  an  oily  consistence.  Its  action  on  litmus  is  so 
strong,  that  a single  drop  of  acid  will  give  to  an  im- 
mense quantity  of  water  the  power  of  reddening.  It 
is  a most  violent  caustic  ; and  has  sometimes  been  ad- 
ministered with  the  most  criminal  purposes.  The 
person  who  unfortunately  swallows  it,  speedily  dies 
in  dreadful  agonies  and  convulsions.  Chalk,  or  com- 
mon carbonate  of  magnesia,  is  the  best  antidote  for 
this,  as  well  as  for  the  strong  nitric  and  muriatic  acids 

When  transmitted  through  an  ignited  porcelain  tube 
of  one  fifth  of  an  inch  diameter,  it  is  resolved  into  two 
parts  of  sulphurous  acid  gas,  and  one  of  oxygen  gas, 
with  water.  Voltaic  electricity  causes  an  evolution  of 
sulphur  at  the  negative  pole ; while  a sulphate  of  the 
metallic  wire  is  formed  at  the  positive.  Sulphuric  acid 
has  no  action  on  oxygen  gas  or  air.  It  merely  abstracts 
their  aqueous  vapour. 

If  the  oxygenized  muriatic  acid  of  Thenard  be  put 
in  contact  with  the  sulphate  of  silver,  there  is  imme- 
diately formed  insoluble  chloride  of  silver,  and  oxy- 
genized sulphuric  acid.  To  obtain  sulphuric  acid  in 
the  highest  degree  of  oxygenation,  it  is  merely  neces- 
sary to  pour  barytes  water  into  the  above  oxygenized 
acid,  so  as  to  precipitate  only  a part  of  it,  leaving  the 
rest  in  union  with  the  whole  of  the  oxygen.  Oxy- 
genized sulphuric  acid  partially  reduces  the  oxide  of 
silver,  occasioning  a strong  effervescence. 

All  the  simple  combustibles  decompose  sulphuric 
acid,  with  the  assistance  of  heat.  About  400°  Fahr. 
sulphur  converts  sulphuric  into  sulphurous  acid.  Se- 
veral metals  at  an  elevated  temperature  decompose 
this  acid,  with  evolutions  of  sulphuric  acid  gas,  oxi- 
dizement  of  the  metal,  and  combination  of  the  oxide 
with  the  undecomposed  portion  of  the  acid. 

The  sulphuric  acid  is  of  very  extensive  use  in  the  art 
of  chemistry,  as  well  as  in  metallurgy,  bleaching,  and 
some  of  the  processes  for  dying ; in  medicine,  it  is 
given  as  a tonic  and  stimulant,  and  is  sometimes  used 
externally  as  a caustic. 

The  combinations  of  this  acid  with  the  various  bases 
are  called  sulphates,  and  most  of  them  have  long  been 
known  by  various  names.  With  barytes  it  is  found 
native  and  nearly  pure  in  various  forms,  in  coarse 
powder,  rounded  masses,  stalactites,  and  regular  crys- 
tallizations, which  are  in  some  lamellar,  in  others 
needly,  in  others  prismatic  or  pyramidal. 

This  salt,  if  at  all  deleterious,  is  less  so  than  the  car- 
bonate of.  barytes,  and  is  more  economical  for  preparing 
the  muriate  for  medicinal  purposes.  It  requires 43,000 
parts  of  water  to  dissolve  it  at  60°. 

Sulphate  of  strontian  has  a considerable  resemblance 
to  that  of  barytes  in  its  properties.  It  is  found  native 
in  considerable  quantities  at  Aust  Passage  and  other 
places  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Bristol.  It  requires 
3840  parts  of  boiling  water  to  dissolve  it. 

321 


SUL 


SUL 


Its  composition  is  5 acid  -f-  6.5  base. 

Tbe  sulphate  of  potassa,  vitriolated  kali , formerly 
vitriolated  tariar,  sal  de  duobus , and  arcanum  duplica- 
tum , crystallizes  in  hexahedrai  prisms,  terminated  by 
hexagonal  pyramids,  but  susceptible  of  variations.  Its 
crystallization  by  quick  cooling  is  confused.  Its  taste 
is  bitter,  acrid,  and  a little  saline.  It  is  soluble  in  5 
parts  of  boiling  water,  and  16  parts  at  60°.  In  the  fire 
it  decrepitates,  and  is  fusible  by  a strong  beat.  It  is  de- 
composable by  charcoal  at  a high  temperature.  It  may 
be  prepared  by  direct  mixture  of  its  component  parts ; 
but  the  usual  and  cheapest  mode  is  to  neutralize  the 
acidulous  sulphate  left  after  distilling  nitric  acid,  the 
sal  enixen  of  the  old  chemists,  by  the  addition  of  car- 
bonate of  potassa.  The  sal  polychrest  of  old  dispen- 
satories, made  by  deflagrating  sulphur  and  nitre  in  a 
crucible,  was  a compound  of  the  sulphate  and  sulphite 
of  potassa.  The  acidulous  sulphate  is  sometimes  em- 
ployed as  a flux,  and  likewise  in  the  manufacture  of 
alum.  In  medicine,  the  «-sutral  salt  is  sometimes  used 
as  a deobstruent,  and  in  large  doses  as  a mild  cathartic  ; 
dissolved  in  a considerable  portion  of  water,  and  taken 
daily  in  such  quantity  as  to  be  gently  aperient,  it  has 
been  found  serviceable  in  cutaneous  affections,  and  is 
sold  in  London  for  this  purpose  as  a nostrum ; and  cer- 
tainly it  deserves  to  be  distinguished  from  the  generality 
of  quack  medicines,  very  few  indeed  of  which  can  be 
taken  without  imminent  hazard. 

It  consists  of  5 acid  + 6 base ; but  there  is  a com- 
pound of  the  same  constituents,  in  the  proportion  of 
10  acid  + 6 potassa,  called  the  bisulphate. 

The  sulphate  of  soda  is  the  vitriolated  natron  of  the 
college,  the  well  known  Glauber's  salt,  or  sal  mirabile. 
It  is  commonly  prepared  from  the  residuum  left  after 
distilling  muriatic  acid,  the  superfluous  acid  of  which 
may  be  saturated  by  the  addition  of  soda,  or  precipi- 
tated by  lime;  and  is  likewise  obtained  in  the  manu- 
facture of  the  muriate  of  ammonia.  Scherer  mentions 
another  mode  by  Funcke,  which  is,  malting  8 parts  of 
calcined  sulphate  of  lime,  5 of  clay,  and  5 of  common 
salt,  into  a paste  with  water;  burning  this  in  a kiln; 
and  then  powdering,  lixiviating,  and  crystallizing.  It 
exists  in  large  quantities  under  the  surface  of  the  earth 
in  some  countries,  as  Persia,  Bohemia,  and  Switzer- 
land; is  found  mixed  with  other  substances  in  mineral 
springs  and  sea-water;  and  sometimes  effloresces  on 
walls.  Sulphate  of  soda  is  bitter  and  saline  to  the  taste. 
It  is  soluble  in  2.85  parts  of  cold  water,  and  0.8  at  a boil- 
ing heat.  It  crystallizes  in  hexagonal  prisms  bevelled  at 
the  extremities,  sometimes  grooved  longitudinally,  and 
of  very  large  size,  when  the  quantity  is  great.  These 
effloresce  completely  into  a white  powder  if  exposed  to 
a dry  air,  or  even  if  kept  wrapped  up  in  a paper  in  a dry 
place,  yet  they  retain  sufficient  water  of  crystallization 
to  undergo  the  aqueous  fusion  on  exposure  to  heat,  but 
by  urging  tne  fire,  melt.  Barytes  and  strontian  take 
its  acid  from  it  entirely,  and  potassa  partially ; the  nitric 
and  muriatic  acids,  though  they  have  a weaker  affinity 
for  its  base,  combine  with  a part  of  it  when  digested  on 
it.  Heated  with  charcoal,  its  acid  is  decomposed.  As 
a purgative,  its  use  is  very  general ; and  it  has  been 
employed  to  furnish  soda.  Pajot  des  Charmes  has 
made  some  experiments  on  it  in  fabricating  glass ; with 
sand  alone  it  would  not  succeed,  but  equal  parts  of  car- 
bonate of  lime,  sand,  and  dried  sulphate  of  soda,  pro- 
duced a clear,  solid,  pale  yellow  glass. 

It  is  composed  of  5 acid  -f-  4 base  + 11.25  water  in 
crystals;  when  dry,  the  former  two  primes  are  its  con- 
stituents. 

Sulphate  of  soda  and  sulphate  of  ammonia  form  to- 
gether a triple  salt. 

Sulphate  of  lime,  selenite,  gypsum,  plaster  of  Paris, 
or  sometimes  alabaster,  forms  extensive  strata  in  vari- 
ous mountains.  The  specular  gypsum,  or glacies  Ma- 
ries, is  a species  of  this  salt,  and  affirmed  by  some 
French  travellers  to  be  employed  in  Russia,  where  it 
abounds,  as  a substitute  for  glass  in  windows.  Its 
specific  gravity  is  from  1.872  to  2.311.  It  requires  500 
parts  of  cold  water,  and  450  of  hot,  to  dissolve  it.  When 
calcined,  it  decrepitates,  becomes  very  friable  and  white, 
and  heats  a little  with  water,  with  which  it  forms  a 
solid  mass.  In  this  process  it  loses  its  water  of  crys- 
tallization. In  this  state  it  is  found  native  in  Tyrol, 
crystallized  in  rectangular  parallelopipeds,  or  octahe 
dral  or  hexahedrai  prisms,  and  is  called  anhydrous  sul- 
phate of  lime.  Both  the  natural  and  artificial  anhy- 
drous sulphate  consists  of  56.3  lime,  and  43.6  acid,  ac 


cording  to  Chenevix.  The  calcined  sulphate  is  much 
employed  for  making  casts  of  anatomical  or  orna- 
mental figures  as  one  of  the  bases  of  stucco ; as  a fine 
cement  for  making  close  and  strong  joints  between  stone, 
and  joining  rims  or  tops  of  metal  to  glass;  for  making 
moulds  for  the  Staffordshire  potteries;  for  cornices, 
mouldings,  and  other  ornaments  in  building.  For  these 
purposes,  and  for  being  wrought  into  columns,  chim- 
ney-pieces, and  various  ornaments,  about  eight  hundred 
tons  are  raised  annually  in  Derbyshire,  where  it  is  called 
alabaster.  In  America,  it  is  laid  on  grass  land  as  a 
manure. 

[Sulphate  of  lime,  gypsum,  or  plaster  of  Paris,  is 
extensively  and  beneficially  employed  in  some  parts  of 
the  United  States  as  a manure.  It  is  reduced  to  a fine 
powder,  and  applied  by  the  spoonful  to  a hill  of  Indian 
corn  (maize),  or  it  is  thinly  scattered  over  grass  land, 
and  it  has  a most  powerful  and  fertilizing  effect.  The 
gypsum  of  Nova  Scotia  afforded  the  principal  supply 
for  this  and  other  purposes  some  time  since,  but  the 
states  of  New-York  and  Pennsylvania  now  furnish 
large  quantities,  and  of  an  excellent  quality,  from  their 
own  quarries.  Gypsum,  as  a manure,  will  not  answer 
on  the  sea-coast,  or  within  the  influence  of  a saline 
atmosphere.  It  begins  to  produce  fertilizing  effects 
about  40  or  50  miles  from  the  sea-shore.  A.] 

Ordinary  crystallized  gypsum  consists  of  5 sulphuric 
acid  + 3.5  lime  -j-  2.25  water ; the  anhydrous  variety 
wants  of  course  the  last  ingredient. 

Sulphate  of  magnesia,  the  vitriolated  magnesia  of 
the  late,  and  sal  catharticus  amarus  of  former  London 
Pharmacopoeias,  is  commonly  known  by  the  name  of 
Epsom  salt , as  it  was  furnished  in  considerable  quan- 
tity by  the  mineral  water  at  that  place,  mixed  however 
with  a considerable  portion  of  sulphate  of  soda.  It  is 
afforded,  however,  in  greater  abundance  and  more 
pure  from  the  bittern  left  after  the  extraction  of  salt 
from  sea-water.  It  has  likewise  been  found  efflores- 
cing on  brick  walls,  both  old  and  recently  erected,  and 
in  small  quantity  in  the  ashes  of  coals.  The  capillary 
salt  of  Idria,  found  in  silvery  crystals  mixed  with  the 
aluminous  schist  in  the  mines  of  that  place,  and 
hitherto  considered  as  a feathery  alum,  has  been  ascer- 
tained by  Klaproth  to  consist  of  sulphate  of  magnesia, 
mixed  with  a small  portion  of  sulphate  of  iron.  When 
pure,  it  crystallizes  in  small  quadrangular  prisms,  ter- 
minated by  quadrangular  pyramids  or  dihedral  summits. 
Its  taste  is  cool  and  bitter.  It  is  very  soluble,  requit  ing 
only  an  equal  weight  of  cold  water,  and  three-fourths  its 
weight  of  hot.  It  effloresces  in  the  air,  though  but 
slowly.  If  it  attract  moisture  itcontains  muriate  of  mag- 
nesia, or  of  lime.  Exposed  to  heat  it  dissolves  in  its  own 
water  of  crystallization,  and  dries,  but  is  not  decom- 
posed nor  fused,  but  with  extreme  difficulty.  It  con- 
sists, according  to  Bergman,  of  33  acid,  19  magnesia, 
48  water.  A very  pure  sulphate  is  said  to  be  prepared 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  Genoa,  by  roasting  a pyrites 
found  there ; exposing  it  to  the  air  in  a covered  place 
for  six  months ; watering  it  occasionally,  and  then 
lixiviating. 

Sulphate  of  magnesia  is  one  of  our  most  valuable 
purgatives;  for  which  purpose  only  it  is  used,  and  for 
furnishing  the  carbonate  of  magnesia. 

It  is  composed  of  5 acid  -f-  2.5  magnesia  + 7.875 
water,  in  the  state  of  crystals. 

Sulphate  of  ammonia  crystallizes  in  slender,  flat- 
tened, hexahedrai  prisms,  terminated  by  hexagonal 
pyramids  ; it  attracts  a little  moisture  from  very  damp 
air,  particularly  if  the  acid  be  in  excess ; it  dissolves  in 
two  parts  of  cold  and  one  of  boiling  water.  It  is  not 
used,  though  Glauber,  who  called  it  his  secret  ammo- 
niacal  salt,  vaunted  its  excellence  in  assaying. 

It  consists  of  5 acid  + 2.125  ammonia  -f- 1.125  watei 
in  its  most  desiccated  state;  and  in  its  crystalline  state 
of  5 acid  + 2.125  ammonia  -f-  3.375  water. 

If  sulphate  of  ammonia  and  sulphate  of  magnesia 
be  added  together  in  solution,  they  combine  into  a 
triple  salt  of  an  octahedral  figure,  but  varying  much ; 
less  soluble  than  either  of  its  component  parts;  unal- 
terable in  the  air ; undergoing  on  the  fire  the  watery 
fusion  ; after  which  it  is  decomposed,  part  of  the  am- 
monia flying  off,  and  the  remainder  subwming  with  an 
excess  of  acid.  It  contains,  according  to  Fourcroy,  68 
sulphate  of  magnesia,  and  32  sulphate  of  ammonia. 

Sulphate  of  glucina  crystallizes  with  difficulty,  its 
solution  readily  acquiring  and  containing  a syrupy  eon- 
; sistence;  its  taste  is  sweet,  and  slightly  astringent;  it 


SUL 


SUP 


is  not  alterable  in  the  air;  a strong  heat  expels  its  acid, 
and  leaves  the  earth  pure;  heated  with  charcoal,  it 
forms  a sulphuret ; infusion  of  galls  forms  a yellowish- 
white  precipitate  with  its  solution. 

Yttria  is  readily  dissolved  by  sulphuric  acid  ; and  as 
the  solution  goes  on,  the  sulphate  crystallizes  in  small 
brilliant  grains,  which  have  a sweetish  taste,  but  less 
so  than  sulphate  of  glucina,  and  are  of  a light  ame- 
thyst-red colour.  They  require  30  parts  of  cold  water 
to  dissolve  them,  and  to  give  up  their  acid  when  ex- 
posed to  a high  temperature.  They  are  decomposed 
by  oxalic  acid,  prussiate  of  potassa,  infusion  of  galls, 
and  phosphate  of  soda. 

Sulphate  of  alumina  in  its  pure  state  is  but  recently 
known,  and  it  was  first  attentively  examined  by  Vau- 
quelin.  It  may  be  made  by  dissolving  pure  alumina  in 
pure  sulphuric  acid,  heating  them  for  some  time,  eva- 
porating the  solution  to  dryness,  drying  the  residuum 
with  a pretty  strong  heat,  redissolving  it,  and  crystal- 
lizing. Its  crystals  are  soft,  foliaceous,  shining,  and 
pearly ; but  these  are  not  easily  obtained  without  cau- 
tious evaporation  and  refrigeration.  They  have  an 
astringent  taste ; are  little  alterable  in  the  air ; are 
pretty  soluble,  particularly  in  hot  water ; give  out  their 
acid  on  exposure  to  a high  temperature : are  decom- 
posable by  combustible  substances,  though  not  readily ; 
and  do  not  form  a pyrophorus  like  alum. 

If  the  evaporation  and  desiccation  directed  above  be 
omitted,  the  alumina  will  remain  supersaturated  with 
acid,  as  may  be  known  by  its  taste,  and  by  its  redden- 
ing vegetable  blue.  This  is  still  more  difficult  to  crys- 
tallize than  the  neutral  salt,  and  frequently  thickens 
into  a gelatinous  mass. 

A compound  of  acidulous  sulphate  of  alumina,  with 
potassa  or  ammonia,  has  long  been  known  by  the  name 
of  alum. 

Sulphate  of  zircon  may  be  prepared  by  adding  sul- 
phuric acid  to  the  earth  recently  precipitated,  and  not 
yet  dry.  It  is  sometimes  in  small  needles,  but  commonly  j 
pulverulent ; very  friable  ; insipid  ; insoluble  in  water, 
unless  it  contain  some  acid  ; and  easily  decomposed  by 
heat.” — Ure's  Chem.  Diet. 

Sulphuric  acid  is  a powerful  antiseptic  and  tonic  : 
it  is  given,  properly  diluted,  in  the  dose  of  from  one  to 
three  drops  with  cinchona  and  other  medicines  in  the 
cure  of  fevers  and  debilities,  and  it  is  often  applied  ex- 
ternally, when  very  much  diluted,  against  psora  and 
some  chronic  affections  of  the  skin. 

Sulphuris  florks.  See  Sulphur  sublimatum. 

SULPHUROPRUSSIC  ACID.  The  sulphuretted 
chyazic  acid  of  Porrett. 

Dissolve  in  water  one  part  of  sulphuret  of  potassa, 
and  boil  it  for  a considerable  time  with  three  or  four 
parts  of  powdered  Prussian  blue  added  at  intervals. 
Sulphuret  of  iron  is  formed,  and  a colourless  liquid 
containing  the  new  acid  combined  with  potassa,  mixed 
with  hyposulphate  and  sulphate  of  potassa.  Render 
this  liquid  sensibly  sour,  by  the  addition  of  sulphuric 
acid.  Continue  the  boiling  for  a little,  and  when  it 
cools,  add  a little  peroxide  of  manganese  in  fine  powder, 
which  will  give  the  liquor  a fine  crimson  colour.  To 
the  filtered  liquid  add  a solution  containing  persulphate 
of  copper,  and  protosulphate  of  iron,  in  the  proportion 
of  two  of  the  former  salt  to  three  of  the  latter,  until 
the  crimson  colour  disappears.  Sulphuroprussiate  of 
copper  falls.  Boil  this  with  a solution  of  potassa, 
wdiich  will  separate  the  copper.  Distil  the  liquid 
mixed  with  sulphuric  acid  in  a glass  retort,  and  the 
peculiar  acid  will  come  over.  By  saturation  with  car- 
bonate of  barytes,  and  then  throwing  down  this  by  the 
equivalent  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid,  the  sulphuro- 
prussic  acid  is  obtained  pure. 

It  is  a transparent  and  colourless  liquid,  possessing  a 
strong  colour,  somewhat  resembling  acetic  acid.  Its 
specific  gravity  is  only  1.022.  It  dissolves  a little  sul- 
phur at  a boiling  heat.  It  then  blackens  nitrate  of  sil- 
ver ; but  the  pure  acid  throws  down  the  silver  white. 
By  repeated  distillations  sulphur  is  separated  and  the 
acid  is  decomposed. 

SULPHUROUS  ACID.  “ Sulphur  burned  at  a low 
temperature  absorbs  less  oxygen  than  it  does  when  ex- 
posed to  greater  heat,  and  is  consequently  acidified  in  a 
slighter  degree,  so  as  to  form  sulphurous  acid.  This  in 
the  ordinary  state  of  the  atmosphere  is  a gas;  but  on 
reducing  its  temperature  very  low  by  artificial  cold, 
and  exposing  it  to  strong  compression,  it  becomes  a 
liquid.  To  obtain  it  in  the  liquid  state,  however,  for 

E e e 2 


practical  purposes,  it  is  received  into  water,  by  which 
it  is  absorbed. 

As  the  acid  obtained  by  burning  sulphur  in  this  way 
is  commonly  mixed  with  more  or  less  sulphuric  acid, 
when  sulphurous  acid  is  wanted  it  is  commonly  made 
by  abstracting  part  of  the  oxygen  from  sulphuric  acid 
by  means  of  some  combustible  substance.  Mercury 
or  tin  is  usually  preferred.  For  the  purposes  of  manu- 
factures, however,  chopped  straw  or  saw-dust  may  be 
employed.  If  one  part  of  mercury  and  two  of  concen 
trated  sulphuric  acid  be  put  into  a glass  retort  with  a 
long  neck,  and  heat  applied  till  an  effervescence  is  pro- 
duced, the  sulphurous  acid  Will  arise  in  the  form  of 
gas,  and  may  be  collected  over  quicksilver,  or  received 
into  water,  which,  at  the  temperature  of  61°,  will  absorb 
thirty-three  times  its  bulk,  or  nearly  an  eleventh  of  its 
weight. 

Water  thus  saturated  is  intensely  acid  to  the  taste, 
and  has  the  smell  of  sulphur  burning  slowly.  It  de- 
stroys most  vegetable  colours,  but  the  blues  are  reddened 
by  it  previous  to  their  being  discharged.  A pleasing 
instance  of  its  effect  on  colours  may  be  exhibited  by 
holding  a red  rose  over  the  blue  flame  of  a common 
match,  by  which  the  colour  will  be  discharged  wherever 
the  sulphurous  acid  comes  into  contact  with  it,  so 
as  to  render  it  beautifully  variegated,  or  entirely  white. 
If  it  be  then  dipped  into  water,  the  redness  after  a time 
will  be  restored. 

Sulphurous  acid  is  used  in  bleaching,  particularly  for 
silks.  It  likewise  discharges  vegetable  stains,  andiron- 
moulds  from  linen. 

In  combination  with  the  salifiable  bases,  it  forms 
sulphites  which  differ  from  the  sulphates  in  their  pro- 
perties. The  alkaline  sulphites  are  more  soluble  than 
the  sulphates,  the  earthy  less.  They  are  converted 
into  sulphates  by  an  addition  of  oxygen,  which  they 
acquire  even  by  exposure  to  the  air.” 

Sultan  flower.  The  Centaur  ea  moschata,  of  Linnasus. 

SUMACH.  ( Suma/c ; from  sama/c,  to  be  red;  so 
called  from  its  red  berry.)  See  Rhus  coriaria. 

Sumach , elm-leaved.  See  Rhus  coriaria. 

Su'men.  (Arabian.)  The  lower  or  fat  part  of  the 
belly. 

SUN  DEW.  See  Drosera  rotundifolia. 

SUPER.  1.  This  term  is  applied,  in  chemistry  and 
pharmacy,  to  several  saline  substances,  in  which  there 
is  an  excess  of  one  of  its  constituents  beyond  what  is 
necessary  to  form  the  ordinary  compound  ; as  super- 
sulphate of  potassa,  supercarbonate  of  soda,  &c. 

2.  In  anatomy,  it  regards  situation ; as  superscapula - 
ris,  super genualis. 

3.  In  physiology,  it  means  an  additional ; as  super 
fetation. 

4.  In  medicine,  it  means  excess  ; as  superpurgation. 

Superace'tas  flumbi.  See  Plumbi  acetas. 

Superarce'nias  potassa.  Superarseniate  of  po- 
tassa. A compound  of  potassa  with  excess  of  arsenic 
acid.  It  was  called  Macquer's  Arsenical  Salt , from 
its  discoverer ; and  has  been  sometimes  given  in  medi 
cine,  possessing  similar  properties  to  those  of  the  white 
oxide  of  arsenic. 

SUPE'RBUS.  See  Rectus  superior  oculi. 

SUPERCI'LIUM.  See  Eyebrow. 

Supercilium  veneris.  The  milfoil.  See  Achillea 
millefolium. 

SUPERFCETATION.  ( Superfcetatio ; from  super , 
above  or  upon,  and  foetus,  a foetus.)  The  impregna- 
tion of  a woman  already  pregnant. 

Superoemina'lis.  (From  super , above,  and gemini , 
the  testicles.)  The  epididymis,  or  body  above  the  tes- 
ticles. 

SUPERGENUA'LIS.  (From  super,  above,  and 
genu,  the  knee.)  The  patella,  or  knee-pan. 

SUPERIMPREGNA'TIO.  ( Super  impregna 
tio ; from  super,  above,  and  impregnate,  a concep- 
tion.) Superfcetation. 

SUPE'RIOR.  Some  muscles  were  so  named  from 
their  relative  situation. 

Superior  auris.  See  Attollens  aurem. 

SUPERLI'GUL A . (From  super,  above,  and  ligula , 
a little  tongue,  the  glottis.)  The  epiglottis. 

SUPERPURGA'TIO.  (From  super,  beyond,  and 
pur  go,,  to  purge.)  An  excessive  evacuation  by  stool. 

SUPEItSALT.  See  Subsalt. 

SUPERSCAPULA' RIS.  (From  super,  upon,  and 
scapula,  the  shoulder-blade.)  A muscle  seated  upon 
the  scapula. 


323 


SUP 


SWA 


SUPERUS.  Above:  applied  to  the  perianthium  of 
flowers  when  placed  above  the  germen ; as  in  roses, 
and  the  genus  Pyrus. 

SUPINATION.  (Supinatio ; from  supinus,  placed 
upward.)  The  act  of  turning  the  palm  of  the  hand 
upwards,  by  rotating  the  radius  upon  the  ulna. 

SUPINA'TOR.  (From  supinus,  upwards.)  A name 
given  to  those  muscles  which  turn  the  hand  upwards. 

Supinator  brevis.  See  Supinator  radii  brevis. 

Supinator  longus.  See  Supinator  radii  longus. 

Supinator  radii  brevis.  A supinator  muscle  of 
the  hand,  situated  on  the  forearm.  Supinator  brevis , 
sive  minor , of  Winslow;  and  epicondylo-radial , of 
Dumas.  This  small  muscle,  which  is  tendinous  exter- 
nally, is  situated  at  the  upper  part  of  the  forearm 
under  the  supinator  longus,  the  extensor  carpi  radialis 
brevis,  the  extensor  carpi  ulnaris,  the  extensor  digito- 
rum  communis,  and  the  extensor  minimi  digiti. 

It  arises  tendinous  from  the  lower  and  anterior  part 
of  the  outer  condyle  of  the  os  humeri,  and  tendinous 
and  fleshy  from  the  outer  edge  and  posterior  surface 
of  the  ulna,  adhering  firmly  to  the  ligament  that  joins 
the  radius  to  that  bone.  • From  these  origins  its  fibres 
descend  forwards  and  inwards,  and  are  inserted  into 
the  upper,  inner,  and  anterior  part  of  the  radius  around 
the  cartilaginous  surface,  upon  which  slides  the  ten- 
don of  the  biceps,  and  likewise  into  a ridge  that  runs 
downwards  and  outwards  below  this  surface.  It  as- 
sists in  the' supination  of  the  hand  by  rolling  the  radius 
outwards. 

Supinator  radii  longus.  Supinator  longus , of 
Albinus.  Supinator  longus  sive  major , of  Winslow  ; 
and  humerosus  radial , of  Dumas.  A long  flat  muscle, 
covered  by  a very  thin  tendinous  fascia,  and  situated 
immediately  under  the  integuments  along  the  outer 
convex  surface  of  the  radius.  It  arises,  by  very  short 
tendinous  fibres,  from  the  anterior  surface  and  outer 
ridge  of  the  os  humeri,  about  two  or  three  inches 
above  its  external  condyle,  between  the  brachialis  in- 
ternus  and  the  triceps  brachii ; and  likewise  from  the 
anterior  surface  of  the  external  intermuscular  mem- 
brane, or  ligament,  as  it  is  called.  About  the  middle 
of  the  radius,  its  fleshy  fibres  terminate  in  a flat  tendon, 
which  is  inserted  into  the  inner  side  of  the  inferior  extre- 
mity of  the  radius,  near  the  root  of  its  styloid  process. 

This  muscle  not  only  assists  in  rolling  the  radius 
outwards,  and  turning  the  palm  of  the  hand  upwards, 
on  which  account  Riolanus  first  gave  it  the  name  of 
supinator , but  it  likewise  assists  in  pronation,  and  in 
bending  the  forearm. 

SUPPOSITO'RIUM.  (From  sub,  under,  and  pono, 
to  put.)  A suppository,  i.  e.  a substance  to  put  into  the 
rectum,  there  to  remain  and  dissolve  gradually. 

Suppressed  menses.  See  Amenorrhcea. 

SUPPURATION.  (Suppuratio ; from  suppuro,  to 
suppurate.)  That  morbid  action  by  which  pus  is 
deposited  in  inflammatory  tumours.  See  Pus. 

SUPRA.  Above.  This  word  before  any  other 
name,  implies  its  situation  being  above  it ; as  supra 
spinatus,  above  the  spine  of  the  scapula,  &c. 

Supra-costales.  A portion  of  the  intercostal 
muscles.  See  Intercostal  muscles. 

Supra-decompositus.  See  Decompositus. 

Supra-spina'tus.  Supra-spinatus  seu  super-sca- 
pularis , of  Cowper;  and  sous-spino-scapulo-trockite- 
rien , of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  arm  first  so  named 
by  Riolanus,  from  its  situation.  It  is  of  considerable 
thickness,  wider  behind  than  before,  and  fills  the  whole 
of  the  cavity  or  fossa  that  is  above  the  spine  of  the 
scapula.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  whole  of  the  base 
of  the  scapula  that  is  above  its  spine,  and  likewise 
from  the  spine  itself,  and  from  the  superior  costa.  Op- 
posite to  the  basis  of  the  coracoid  process,  it  is  found 
beginning  to  degenerate  into  a tendon,  which  is  at  first 
covered  by  fleshy  fibres,  and  then  passing  under  the 
acromion,  adheres  to  the  capsular  ligament  of  the  os 
humeri,  and  is  inserted  into  the  upper  part  of  the  large 
tuberosity  at  the  head  of  the  os  humeri.  This  muscle 
is  covered  by  a thin  fascia,  which  adheres  to  the  upper 
edge  and  superior  part  of  the  basis,  as  well  as  to  the 
upper  edge  of  the  spine  of  the  scapula.  The  principal 
use  of  the  supra  spinatus  seems  to  be  to  assist  in  rais- 
ing the  arm  upwards.;  at  the  same  time,  by  drawing 
the  capsular  ligament  upwards,  it  prevents  it  from 
being  pinched  between  the  head  of  the  os  humeri  and 
that  of  the  scapula.  It  may  likewise  serve  to  move 
the  scapula  upon  the  humerus. 

354 


SURA.  (An  Arabian  word.)  1.  The  calf  of  the  lee. 

2.  The  fibula. 

SURCULUS.  A term  applied  by  botanists  to  the 
stem  of  mosses,  or  that  part  which  bears  the  leaves. 
It  is  simple , in  Polytricuin  ; branched , in  Minium  an- 
drogynum  ; with  branches  turned  downward,  in  Sphag- 
num palustre  ; decumbent,  creeping,  or  erect. 

SURDITAS.  Deafness.  See  Paracusis. 

SURFEIT.  The  consequence  of  excess  in  eating 
or  drinking,  or  of  something  unwholesome  or  improper 
in  the  food.  It  consists  in  a heavy  load  or  oppression 
of  the  stomach,  with  nausea,  sickness,  impeded  per- 
spiration, and  at  times  eruptions  on  the  skin. 

SURGERY.  Chirurgia.  A branch  of  the  healing 
art,  having  for  its  object  the  cure  of  external  diseases. 

SURTURBRAND.  Fibrous  brown  coal,  or  bitumi- 
nous wood,  is  so  called  in  Iceland,  whare  it  occurs  in 
great  quantities. 

SUS.  The  name  of  a genus  of  animals.  Class, 
Mammalia;  Order,  Helium.  The  hog.  The  flesh 
called  pork  is  considered  a great  delicacy,  especially 
the  young  and  well  fed,  and  is  much  used  in  most 
countries.  Salted,  it  affords  a harder  food,  still  very 
nutritious  to  hard-working  people,  whose  digestion  is 
good. 

Sus  scrofa.  The  systematic  name  of  the  hog,  the 
fat  of  which  is  called  lard. 

Suspended  animation.  See  Resuscitation. 

SUSPENSO'RIUM.  (From  suspcndeo , to  hang.) 
A suspensory ; a bag,  or  bandage,  to  suspend  any  part. 

Suspensorium  hepatis.  The  broad  ligament  of  the 
liver. 

Suspensorius  testis.  The  cremaster  muscle  of 
the  testicle. 

SUSU'RRUS.  (From  susurro,  to  murmur.)  An 
imaginary  sound  in  the  ear. 

SUTURE.  (Sutura ; from  suo,  to  join  together.) 
1.  In  surgery , this  term  signifies  the  uniting  the  lips  of 
a wound  by  sewing.  Clavata  commissura.  A num- 
ber of  different  kinds  of  sutures  have  been  recom- 
mended by  writers  on  surgery,  but  all  of  them  are  now 
reduced  to  two ; namely,  the  twisted,  and  the  inter- 
rupted, called  also  the  knotted  suture.  The  twisted 
suture  is  made  in  the  following  manner:  having 
brought  the  divided  parts  nearly  into  contact,  a pin  is 
to  be  introduced  from  the  outside  inwards,  and  carried 
out  through  the  opposite  side  to  the  same  distance 
from  the  edge  that  it  entered  at  on  the  former  side  ; a 
firm  wax  ligature  is  then  to  be  passed  around  it,  making 
the  figure  of  8,  by  which  the  wounded  parts  are  drawn 
gently  into  contact.  The  number  of  pins  is  to  be  de- 
termined by  the  extent  of  the  wound  ; half  an  inch,  or 
at  most  three  quarters,  is  the  proper  distance  between 
two  pins.  The  interrupted  suture  is  practised  where  a 
number  of  stitches  is  required,  and  the  interruption  is 
the  only  distance  between  the  stitches. 

2.  In  anatomy,  the  word  suture  is  applied  to  the  union 
of  bones  by  means  of  dentiform  margins,  as  in  the 
bones  of  the  cranium.  See  Temporal,  sphenoidal,  zy- 
gomatic, transverse,  coronal , lambdoidal,  and  sagittal 
sutures. 

3.  In  botany , it  is  applied  to  that  part  of  a capsule, 
which  is  a kind  of  furrow  on  the  external  surface  in 
whieh  the  valves  are  united.  See  Capsula. 

SWALLOW-WORT.  See  Jlsclepias  vincetozicum. 

SWAMMERDAM,  John,  was  born  at  Amsterdam, 
in  1637,  and  displayed  an  early  predilection  for  natural 
history,  particularly  entomology.  At  Leyden,  where 
he  studied  physic,  he  was  distinguished  by  his  skill  and 
assiduity  in  anatomical  experiments  .and  the  art  of 
making  preparations ; and  on  taking  his  degree  there, 
in  1667,  he  published  a thesis  on  Respiration.  At  this 
time  he  began  to  practise  his  invention  of  injecting  the 
vessels  with  ceraceous  matter,  from  which  anatomy 
has  derived  very  important  advantages.  In  the  dissec 
tion  of  insects,  he  was  singularly  dexterous  by  the  aid 
of  instruments  of  his  own  invention.  The  Grand 
Duke  of  Tuscany  invited  him  about  this  period  to 
Florence  on  very  liberal  terms,  but  he  declined  the  offer 
from  aversion  to  a court-life,  and  to  any  religious  re- 
straints. In  1669  he  published  in  his  native  language 
“A  General  History  of  Insects,”  afterward  reprinted 
and  translated  into  French  and  Latin,  the  latter  with 
splendid  figures.  In  1672  another  work  appeared,  en- 
titled “ Miraculum  Naturae,”  detailing  the  structure  of 
the  uterus ; of  which  there  were  man}'  subsequent 
editions.  By  intense  application  he  became  hypochon 


SYD 


SYL 


driacal  and  infatuated  mysticism,  so  as  to  abandon  all 
his  scientific  pursuits ; and  his  constitution  was  worn 
out  by  his  mortifications,  so  that  he  died  in  1680.  Se- 
veral of  his  papers,  which  came  long  after  into  the 
hands  of  Boerhaave,  were  published  under  the  title  of 
“ Biblia  Nature  in  which  the  history  of  bees  is  par- 
ticularly esteemed. 

SWEAT.  See  Perspiration. 

Sweet  flag.  See  Acorus  calamus. 

Sweet  marjoram.  See  Origanum  marjorana. 

Sweet  navew.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

Sweet  rush.  See  Andropogon  sccenanthus,  and  Aco- 
rus  calamus. 

Sweet  sultan.  The  Centaurea  moschata. 

Sweet  willow.  See  Myrica  gale. 

SWIETEN,  Gerard  Van,  was  born  at  Leyden,  in 
1700.  From  the  loss  of  both  his  parents,  his  early  edu- 
cation is  said  to  have  been  somewhat  neglected;  but 
being  sent  at  sixteen  to  the  university  of  Louvain,  he 
soon  distinguished  himself  by  his  superior  attainments. 
He  then  returned  to  his  native  place,  and  became  a fa- 
vourite pupil  of  the  illustrious  Boerhaave ; and  after 
studying  seven  years,  took  the  degree  of  doctor  in 
1725 ; and  so  much  had  he  profited  by  the  instruction 
of  that  great  master,  as  well  as  by  his  own  unwearied 
researches,  that  he  was  immediately  appointed  to  a 
medical  professorship,  which  he  occupied  for  many 
years  with  great  reputation.  At  length,  however,  his 
success  excited  envy,  and  there  being  a law,  which  pro- 
hibited those  not  professing  the  religion  of  the  State 
from  holding  any  public  appointment,  Van  Swieten, 
being  a Roman  Catholic,  was  obliged  to  resign  his 
chair.  He  devoted  the  leisure  thus  acquired  to  the 
composition  of  his  excellent  Commentaries  on  the 
Aphorisms  of  Boerhaave : and  while  engaged  in  this 
work,  he  was  invited  by  the  Empress  Maria  Theresa 
to  settle  at  Vienna,  which  he  accepted  in  the  year 
1745,  after  stipulating,  that  he  should  be  allowed  to 
follow  his  usual  mode  of  life,  which  was  not  well 
adapted  for  a court.  The  intellectual  and  moral  en- 
dowments of  this  physician  qualified  him  in  every 
respect  for  conducting  the  medical  school  at  Vienna ; 
and  that  science  in  Germany  was  ultimately  essentially 
benefitted  by  his  exertions.  He  executed,  during  eight 
years,  the  office  of  professor  with  singular  zeal;  and 
having  obtained  the  full  confidence  of  his  royal  mis- 
tress, he  was  enabled  to  reform  many  abuses,  and  pro- 
cure great  advantages  for  the  study  of  medicine  in  that 
city.  His  extensive  erudition  gained  him  the  farther 
honour  of  being  intrusted  with  the  interests  of  learn- 
ing in  general  in  the  Austrian  dominions ; he  was  ap- 
pointed Imperial  Librarian,  President  of  the  Censor- 
ship of  Books,  &c. ; and  also  created  a Baron  of  the 
Empire.  He  was  likewise  voluntarily  enrolled  in  the 
list  of  almost  all  the  distinguished  literary  societies  of 
Europe.  The  inflexibility  of  his  character  led  him  to 
maintain  a long  opposition  to  small-pox  inoculation. 
He  died  in  1772,  and  a statue  was  erected  to  his  me- 
mory by  the  Empress  at  Vienna.  His  commentaries 
will  always  maintain  their  reputation,  from  the  im- 
mense number  of  facts,  well  selected  and  well  arranged, 
and  the  judicious  summary  of  ancient  and  modern 
medical  knowledge  which  they  contain.  He  also  pub- 
lished another  useful  work  on  the  Diseases  which  pre- 
vail in  Armies. 

SWIETE'NIA.  (Named  after  Van  Swieten.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Decandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Swiktenia  mahagoni.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
mahogany-tree.  The  bark  of  the  wood  of  this  tree  is 
of  a red  colour  internally;  has  an  astringent  bitter 
taste;  and  yields  its  active  matter  to  water.  It  has 
been  prepared  as  a substitute  for  Peruvian  bark,  and 
has  been  used  as  such  with  advantage.  Dose,  half  a 
drachm. 

SWINE-POX.  See  Varicella. 

SWINESTONE.  A variety  of  compact  lucullite,  a 
subspecies  of  limestone. 

SWINGING.  See  JEora. 

Sword-shaped.  See  Lanceolatus. 

SYCO'MA.  (From  ovicrj,  a fig.)  Sycosis.  A wart 
or  excrescence  resembling  a fig  on  the  eyelid,  about  the 
anus,  or  any  other  part. 

SYDENHAM,  Thomas,  was  born  at  Winford-Ea- 
gle,  in  Dorsetshire,  about  the  year  1624.  He  was  en- 
tered at  Oxford  ; but  during  the  civil  war,  when  that 
city  was  occupied  by  the  royal  party,  he  retired  to 


London.  On  this  occasion,  the  illness  of  his  brolner 
brought  him  acquainted  with  Dr.  Coxe,  an  eminent 
physician,  who,  finding  Sydenham  undecided  as  to  the 
choice  of  his  profession,  persuaded  him  to  study  medi- 
cine on  his  return  to  Oxford.  Accordingly,  in  1648, 
he  took  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  physic,  and  about  the 
same  period  obtained  a fellowship ; then  pursuing  his 
studies  a few  years  longer,  he  procured  a doctor’s 
degree  from  Cambridge,  and  settled  as  a physician  in 
Westminster.  The  extensive  practice  which  he  is  said 
to  have  enjoyed  from  1660  to  1670,  must  be  chiefly  as- 
cribed to  the  superior  success  of  the  means  employed 
by  him,  which,  being  so  different  from  those  previously 
in  use,  became  more  readily  a matter  of  notoriety; 
for,  after  the  Restoration,  his  connexions  could  have 
contributed  little  to  his  advancement.  He  appears  to 
have  paid  little  attention  to  the  prevailing  medical 
doctrines,  being  early  persuaded  that  the  only  mode  of 
acquiring  a correct  knowledge  of  his  art  was  to  observe 
diligently  the  progress  of  diseases,  whence  the  natural 
indications  of  cure  might  be  derived ; in  which  opinion 
he  had  the  sanction  of  the  celebrated  Mr.  Locke.  It 
was  to  febrile  diseases  that  he  first  applied  this  in- 
ductive method,  and  it  cost  him  several  years  of  anx- 
ious attention  to  satisfy  himself  as  to  the  proper  mode 
of  treating  them : the  result  of  which  he  published  in 
1666,  under  the  title  of  “ Methodus  curandi  Febres,” 
and  again,  nine  years  after,  with  additional  remarks, 
suggested  by  subsequent  experience.  His  writings  are 
not  altogether  free  from  hypothesis ; but  he  seems  to 
have  been  little  influenced  by  these  in  his  practice;  and 
by  closely  observing  the  operations  of  nature,  and  the 
effects  of  remedies,  he  was  enabled  to  introduce  very 
essential  improvements.  In  small-pox  especially,  by 
checking  the  eruptive  fever  by  means  of  cool  air,  and 
other  antiphlogistic  means,  he  ascertained  that  the 
eruption  and  consequent  danger  were  greatly  dimi- 
nished ; which  plan  applies  likewise  to  other  eruptive 
and  febrile  diseases,  as  has  been  since  determined  by  ge- 
neral experience.  His  sagacity  was  also  manifested  in 
the  correct  histories  which  he  has  left  of  some  diseases,  as 
particularly  small-pox,  measles,  gout,  and  hysteria.  He 
was  likewise  very  attentive  to  the  varieties  occurring, 
especially  in  febrile  disorders  at  different  seasons,  or  in 
different  years;  and  was  led  to  suppose  these  connected 
with  a particular  constitution  of  the  air.  He  had  been 
subject,  for  above  thirty  years,  to  gout,  and  stone  in 
the  kidney,  which  impaired  his  constitution,  and  at 
last  terminated  his  life  in  1689.  After  his  death,  a 
manual  of  practice,  composed  for  his  son,  was  pub- 
lished under  the  title  of  “ Processus  Integri  in  Morbis 
fere  omnibus  curandis.”  Sydenham  ever  maintained 
the  character  of  a generous  and  public-spirited  man ; 
he  conducted  himself  without  that  arrogance  which 
too  often  accompanies  original  talent;  and  he  has  been 
universally  acknowledged  the  first  physician  of  hisage. 
The  numerous  editions  of  his  works,  both  singly  and 
collectively,  in  almost  every  country  of  Europe,  the 
deference  paid  to  his  authority, and  the  commendations 
bestowed  upon  him  by  almost  all  practical  writers 
since,  amply  prove  the  solidity  of  his  title  to  the  high 
reputation  attached  to  his  name.  The  college  of  phy- 
sicians, though  he  was  only  late  in  life  admitted  a 
licentiate,  have  subsequently  placed  his  bust  in  their 
hall,  near  that  of  Harvey. 

Sy'lphium.  Assafetida  is  so  termed  by  some  wri- 
ters. See  Ferula  assafeetida. 

SYLVAN1TE.  Native  tellurium. 

Sylvius , digestive  salt  of.  The  muriate  of  potassa. 

SY'LVIUS,  Francis  de  le  Boe,  was  born  at  Ha- 
nau,  in  1614.  He  took  his  degree  at  Basle,  and  then 
visited,  for  improvement,  some  of  the  chief  universi- 
ties in  France  and  Germany.  He  settled  first  at  his 
native  place,  but  removed  to  Amsterdam,  where  he  en- 
joyed a high  reputation  for  several  years,  till  he  was 
called  to  Leyden,  in  1658,  to  assume  the  office  of  first 
professor  of  medicine.  He  soon  drew  together,  by  his 
genius  and  eloquence,  a numerous  audience  from  all. 
parts  of  Europe.  lie  was  one  of  the  earliest  advocates 
for  Harvey’s  doctrine  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood, 
and  chiefly  effected  its  reception  into  that  school.  But, 
on  the  other  hand,  he  materially  retarded  the  progress 
of  medicine  by  a fanciful  hypothesis,  which  attracted 
much  notice,  referring  all  diseases  to  chemical  changes, 
producing  an  excess  of  acid,  or  of  alkali.  His  works 
were  chiefly  controversial  tracts,  in  which  he  defended 
his  peculiar  notions.  He  died  in  1672. 


325 


SYM 


SYM 


Sylvius  James  du  Bois,  was  born  at  Amiens,  in 
1478.  Having  chosen  the  profession  of  physic,'  he 
studied  diligently  the  writings  of  the  ancients,  espe- 
cially Hippocrates  and  Galen,  and  was  no  less  assi- 
duous in  the  pursuit  of  other  branches  of  medicine, 
particularly  anatomy,  pharmacy,  and  botany.  Before 
taking  a degtee,  he  undertook  a private  course  of  lec- 
tures at  Paris,  in  which  he  so  distinguished  himself, 
that  in  two  years  he  collected  a crowd  of  pupils  from 
various  parts  of  Europe ; but  the  jealousy  of  the  Pa- 
risian physicians  obliged  him  to  go  to  Montpelier,  in 
1520,  for  the  purpose  of  graduation.  His  extreme  par- 
simony, however,  would  not  permit  the  necessary  ex- 
penses ; and  he  was  at  last  successful  in  compromising 
his  differences  with  the  Parisian  faculty.  He  subse- 
quently continued  his  lectures  with  very  great  success ; 
and  in  1550  he  was  appointed  professor  of  medicine  at 
the  royal  college;  but  his  death  occurred  five  years 
afterward.  His  works  were  popular  during  the  reign 
of  the  old  school,  but  are  now  obsolete.  As  an  anato- 
mist, he  merits  great  praise,  having  made  various  dis- 
coveries, notwithstanding  the  few  opportunities  he  had 
of  human  dissection.  He  wrote  with  great  violence 
against  Yesalius,  his  pupil,  because  he  had  presumed 
to  correct  Galen. 

SYMBLE'PHARUM.  (From  ovv,  with,  and  /3Xe<f>a - 
pov , the  eyelid.)  A concretion  of  the  eyelid  to  the 
globe  of  the  eye.  This  chiefly  happens  in  the  supe- 
rior, but  very  rarely  in  the  inferior  palpebra.  The 
causes  of  this  concretion  are  a bad  conformation  of 
the  parts,  or  from  ulcers  of  the  cornea,  the  membrana 
conjunctiva,  or  internal  superficies  of  the  palpebrae,  or 
imprudent  scarifications,  or  burns,  especially  if  the  eye 
remains  long  closed.  There  are  two  species,  the  par- 
tial, or  total ; in  the  former,  the  adhesion  is  partial,  in 
the  latter,  the  membrana  conjunctiva  and  cornea  are 
concreted  to  the  eyelid  together. 

Sy'mbole.  (From  <ru/d>aAXaj,  to  knit  together.)  It 
is  said  either  of  the  fitness  of  parts  with  one  another, 
or  of  the  consent  between  them  by  the  intermediation 
of  nerves,  and  the  like. 

SYMBOLO'GIA.  (From  ovpSvXov,  a sign,  and 
Aoyoj,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  signs  and 
symptoms  of  disease. 

SYMMETRY.  The  exact  and  beautiful  proportion 
of  parts  to  one  another. 

SYMPATHETIC.  Syrup  atheticus. 

1.  Relating  to  sympathy. 

2.  See  Intercostal  nerve. 

Sympathetic  nerve.  See  Intercostal  nerve. 

SYMPATHY.  ( Sympatliia ; from  cvyiraoxw,  to 
suffer  together,  to  sympathize.)  All  the  body  is  sym- 
pathetically connected  together,  and  dependent,  the 
one  part  upon  the  rest,  constituting  a general  sympathy. 
But  sometimes  we  find  particular  parts  more  intimately 
dependent  upon  each  other  than  upon  the  rest  of  the 
body,  constituting  a particular  sympathy.  Action  can 
not  be  greatly  increased  in  any  one  organ,  without  be- 
ing diminished  in  some  other ; but  certain  parts  are 
more  apt  to  be  affected  by  the  derangement  of  particu- 
lar organs  than  others ; and  it  was  the  observance  of 
this  fact  which  gave  foundation  to  the  old  and  well 
known  doctrine  of  sympathy,  which  was  said  to  pro- 
ceed “ turn  ob  communionem  et  similitudincm  generis , 
turn  ob  viciniam .”  It  may  be  thought  that  this  posi- 
tion of  action  being  diminished  in  one  organ,  by  its 
increase,  either  in  the  rest  or  in  some  other  part,  is 
contradicted  by  the  existence  of  general  diseases  or 
actions  affecting  the  whole  system.  But  in  them  we 
find,  in  the  first  place,  that  there  is  always  some  part 
more  affected  than  the  rest.  This  local  affection  is 
sometimes  the  first  symptom,  and  affects  the  constitu- 
tion in  a secondary  way,  either  by  the  irritation  which 
it  produces,  or  by  an  extension  of  the  specific  action. 
At  other  times  the  local  affection  is  coeval  with  the 
general  disease,  and  is  called  sympathetic.  It  is  ob- 
served, in  the  second  place,  that  as  there  is  some  part 
which  is  always  more  affected  than  the  rest,  so  also  is 
there  some  organ  which  has  its  action,  in  consequence 
of  this,  diminished  lower  than  that  of  the  rest  of  the 
system,  and  most  commonly  lower  than  its  natural 
standard.  From  the  extensive  sympathy  of  the  sto- 
mach with  almost  etery  part  of  the  body,  we  find  that 
this  most  frequently  suffers,  and  has  its  action  dimi- 
nished in  every  disease,  whether  general  or  local,  pro- 
vided that  the  diseased  action  arises  to  any  consider- 
able degree.  There  are  also  other  organs  which  may, 
32S 


| in  like  manner,  suffer  from  their  association  or  con 
j nexion  with  others  which  become  diseased.  Thus,  for 
instance,  we  see,  in  the  general  disease  called  puerpe- 
ral fever,  that  the  action  of  the  breasts  is  diminished 
by  the  increased  inflammatory  action  of  the  uterus. 

in  consequence  of  this  balance  of  action,  or  general 
connexion  of  the  system,  a sudden  pain,  consequent  to 
violent  action  of  any  particular  part,  will  so  weaken 
the  rest  as  to  produce  fainting,  and  occasionally  death. 
But  this  dependence  appears  more  evidently  in  what 
may  be  called  the  smaller  systems  of  the  body,  or  those 
parts  which  seem  to  be  more  intimately  connected  with 
each  other  than  they  are  with  the  general  system.  Of 
this  kind  is  the  connexion  of  the  breasts  with  the  ute- 
rus of  the  female;  of  the  urethra  with  the  testicles  of 
the  male  ; of  the  stomach  with  the  liver  ; and  of  the 
intestines  with  the  stomach,  and  of  this  again  with  the 
brain ; of  the  one  extremity  of  the  bone  with  the  other ; 
and  of  the  body  of  the  muscle  with  its  insertion  ; of 
the  skin  with  the  parts  below  it. 

These  smaller  systems,  or  circles,  shall  be  treated 
regularly ; but  first  it  may  be  proper  to  observe,  that 
these  are  not  only  intimately  connected  with  them- 
selves, but  also  with  the  general  system,  a universal 
sympathy  being  thus  established. 

That  there  is  a very  intimate  connexion  between  the 
breasts  and  uterus  has  been  long  known  ; but  it  has  not 
been  very  satisfactorily  explained.  Fallopius,  and  all 
the  other  authors,  declare  plainly  that  the  sympathy 
is  produced  by  an  anastomosis  of  vessels;  Bartholin 
adding  that  the  child  being  born,  the  blood  no  longer 
goes  to  the  uterus,  but  is  directed  to  the  breasts  and 
changed  into  milk.  But  none  of  all  those  who  talk  of 
this  derivation,  assign  any  reasonable  cause  which  may 
produce  it. 

In  pregnancy,  and  at  the  menstrual  periods,  the  ute 
rus  is  active;  but,  when  the  child  is  delivered,  the  ac- 
tion of  the  uterus  subsides,  while  the  breasts  in  their 
turn  become  active,  and  secrete  milk. 

If,  at  this  time,  we  should  again  produce  action  in 
the  uterus,  we  diminish  that  of  the  breasts,  and  destroy 
the  secretion  of  milk,  as  is  well  illustrated  by  the  case 
of  inflammation  of  the  uterus,  which  is  incident  to 
lying-in  women.  When  the  uterus,  at.  the  cessation  of 
the  menses,  ceases  to  be  active,  or  to  secrete,  we  often 
find  that  the  breasts  have  an  action  excited  in  them, 
becoming  slowly  inflamed,  and  assuming  a cancerous 
disposition.  The  uterus  and  breasts  seem  to  be  a set 
of  glands  balancing  each  other  in  the  system,  one  only 
being  naturally  active,  or  secreting  properly,  at  a time ; 
and  accordingly  we  seldom,  if  ever,  find  that  when  the 
uterus  yields  the  menstrual  discharge,  the  milk  is  se- 
creted in  perfection,  during  the  continuance  of  this  dis- 
charge,, nor  do  we  ever  find  them  both  inflamed  at  the 
same  time. 

The  uterus  has  not  only  this  connexion  with  the 
breasts,  but  it  has  also  a very  particular  sympathy  with 
the  stomach,  which  again  sympathizes  with  the  brain; 
and  thus  we  see  how  a disorder  of  the  uterus  may  in- 
duce an  extensive  series  of  affections,  each  dependent 
on  the  other. 

The  organs  of  generation  in  the  male  form  likewise 
a little  system,  in  which  all  the  parts  exhibit  this  sym- 
pathy with  each  other.  They  likewise  give  us  a very 
good  instance  of  the  association  of  action,  or  sympa- 
thy, in  the  common  acceptation  of  that  word. 

Sympathy  is  divided  into,  first,  the  sympathy  of 
equilibrium,  in  which  one  part  is  weakened  by  the  in- 
creased action  of  another;  and,  secondly,  the  sympa- 
thy of  association,  in  which  two  parts  act  together  at 
the  same  time. 

The  sympathy  of  association  is  produced  suddenly, 
and  for  a short  time.  The  sympathy  of  equilibrium  is 
produced  more  slowly,  and  continues  to  operate  for  a 
much  longer  time. 

It  is  curious  enough,  that  most,  or  at  least  many,  of 
those  organs,  which  seem  to  be  connected  by  the  sym- 
pathy of  equilibrium,  exhibit  likewise  more  or  less  of 
the  sympathy  of  association,  when  under  the  circum- 
stances in  which  this  can  take  place. 

The  sympathy  of  equilibrium  is  seen  in  the  effects 
of  inflammation  of  the  end  of  the  urethra  on  the  tes- 
ticle; which  often  diminishes  its  action,  and  produces 
a very  disagreeable  sensation  of  dulness,  or,  if  this  in 
flammation  be  suddenly  diminished,  the  action  of  the 
testicle  is  as  suddenly  increased,  and  swelling  takes 
place.  The  same  is  seen  in  the  connexion  of  the 


SYM 


SYM 


urethra  with  the  bladder  and  prostate  gland,  as  is  men- 
tioned in  all  the  dissertations  on  gonorrhoea.  These 
parts  likewise  affect  the  stomach  greatly,  increased  ac- 
tion in  them  weakening  that  organ  much.  This  is 
seen  in  the  effects  of  swelled  testicle,  or  excessive  ve- 
nery,  or  inflamed  bladder,  and  in  a stone ; all  which 
weaken  the  stomach,  and  produce  dyspepsia.  The 
same  remark  applies  to  the  kidney ; vomiting  and  flatu- 
lence being  produced  by  nephritis. 

The  sympathy  of  association,  or  an  instance  of  sym- 
pathy in  the  common  acceptation  of  the  word,  is  like- 
wise seen  in  the  connexion  between  the  glans  and  tes- 
ticles in  coition ; but  for  this  purpose,  the  action  in  the 
glans  must  be  sudden,  and  of  short  duration;  for,  if 
continued  long,  weakness  of  the  testicles,  or  diminished 
action,  is  induced.  In  those  parts  which  exhibit  this 
natural  association  of  action,  if  the  action  of  one  part 
be  suddenly  and  for  a short  time  increased,  the  action 
of  the  sympathizing  part  will  likewise  be  increased ; 
as  we  see  in  the  instance  already  given  of  coition,  and 
likewise  in  paroxysms  of  the  stone,  in  which  the  glans 
penis,  after  making  water,  becomes  very  painful. 

But  if  the  action  be  more  slowly  induced,  and  con- 
tinued for  a long  time,  then  this  association  is  set 
aside,  by  a stronger  and  more  general  principle  of  the 
equilibrium  of  action,  and  the  sympathizing  part  is 
weakened.  Hence  violent  inflammation  of  the  end  of 
the  urethra  produces  a weakness  and  irritability  of  the 
bladder,  dulness  of  the  testicle,  &c. 

There  is  also  an  evident  sympathy  of  equilibrium 
between  the  stomach  and  lower  tract  of  intestines ; 
which  two  portions  may  be  said  in  general  to  balance 
each  other  in  the  abdomen.  When  the  action  of  the 
intestines  is  increased  in  diarrhoea,  the  stomach  is  often 
weakened,  and  the  patient  tormented  with  nausea. 
This  will  be  cured,  not  so  easily  by  medicines  taken 
into  the  stomach,  as  by  anodyne  clysters,  which  will 
abate  the  action  of  the  intestines.  When  the  intes- 
tines are  inflamed,  as  in  strangulated  hernia,  vomiting 
is  a never-failing  attendant. 

When  again  the  stomach  is  inflamed,  the  intestines 
are  affected,  and  obstinate  costiveness  takes  place; 
even  in  hysterical  affections  of  the  stomach,  the  intes- 
tines are  often  deranged.  Injections  of  cold  water  fre- 
quently relieve  these  affections  of  the  stomach,  by  their 
action  on  the  intestines. 

The  liver  and  stomach  are  also  connected  with  one 
another.  When  the  liver  is  inflamed,  or  has  its  action 
increased,  the  stomach  is  weakened,  and  dyspeptic 
symptoms  take  place.  When  the  stomach  is  weak- 
ened, as,  for  instance,  by  intoxication,  then  the  action 
of  the  liver  is  increased,  and  a greater  quantity  than 
usual,  of  bile  is  secreted.  The  same  takes  place  in 
warm  climates,  where  the  stomach  is  much  debilitated. 

If  the  liver  has  its  action  thus  frequently  increased, 
it  assumes  a species  of  inflammation,  or  becomes,  as 
it  is  called,  scirrhous.  This  is  exemplified  in  the  ha- 
bitual dram-drinkers,  and  in  those  who  stay  long  in 
warm  countries,  and  use  freedoms  with  the  stomach. 
The  liver  likewise  sympathizes  with  the  brain ; for 
when  this  organ  is  injured,  and  its  action  much  im- 
paired, as  in  compression,  inflammation  and  suppura- 
tion have  been  often  known  to  take  place  in  the  liver. 

Besides  this  connexion  of  the  stomach  with  the  liver, 
it  is  also  very  intimately  dependent  on  the  brain,  being 
weakened  when  the  action  of  the  brain  is  increased  ; 
as  we  see  in  an  inflammation  of  that  organ.  The 
brain  again  is  affected  with  pain  when  the  stomach  is 
weakened  by  intoxication  or  other  causes ; and  this 
pain  will  be  often  relieved  by  slowly  renewing  the  ac- 
tion of  the  stomach  by  such  stimuli  as  are  natural  to 
it,  such  as  small  quantities  of  soup  frequently  repeated. 
A slight  increase  of  action  in  the  stomach,  at  least  if 
not  of  a morbid  kind,  affects  the  brain  so  as  to  produce 
sleep,  diminishing  its  action.  This  we  see  in  the 
effects  of  a full  meal,  and  even  of  a draught  of  warm 
water.  The  stomach  likewise  sympathizes  with  the 
throat,  squeamishness  and  anorexia  being  often  pro- 
duced by  inflammation  of  the  tonsils.  This  inflam- 
mation is  frequently  abated  by  restoring  or  increasing 
the  action  of  the  stomach.  Hence  the  throat,  in  slight 
inflammation,  is  frequently  easier  after  dinner;  hence, 
likewise,  the  effects  of  emetics  in  cynanche. 

The  extremities  of  bones  and  muscles  also  sympa- 
thize in  the  same  manner.  When  one  end  of  a bone 
is  inflamed,  the  action  of  the  other  is  lessened,  and 
pain  is  produced ; for  a painful  sensation  may  result 


both  from  increased  and  diminished  action.  When 
the  tendon  of  a muscle  is  inflamed,  the  body  of  that 
muscle  often  is  pained,  and  vice  versa. 

Lastly,  the  external  skin  sympathizes  with  the  parts 
below  it.  If  it  be  inflamed,  as  in  erysipelas,  the  parts 
immediately  beneath  are  weakened,  or  have  their  na- 
tural action  diminished.  If  this  inflammation  aflect 
the  face,  or  scalp,  then  the  brain  is  injured ; and  head- 
ache, stupor,  or  delirium  supervene.  If  it  attack 
the  skin  of  the  abdomen,  then  the  abdominal  viscera 
are  affected,  and  we  have  vomiting  and  purgipg,  or  ob- 
stinate costiveness,  according  to  circumstances.  This 
is  illustrated  by  the  disease  of  children,  which  is  called 
by  the  women  the  bowel-hive,  in  which  the  skin  is  in- 
flamed, as  they  suppose,  from  some  morbid  matter 
within. 

If  the  internal  parts  be  inflamed,  the  action  of  the 
surface  is  diminished,  and,  by  increasing  this  action, 
we  can  lessen  or  remove  the  disease  below  ; as  we  see 
daily  proved  by  the  good  effects  of  blisters.  When 
the  stomach,  intestines,  or  kidney  have  been  very  irri- 
table, a sinapism  has  been  known  to  act  like  a charm ; 
and  in  the  deep-seated  inflammations  of  the  breasts, 
bowels,  or  joints,  no  better  remedy  is  known,  after  the 
use  of  the  lancet,  than  blisters. 

The  utility  of  issues  in  diseases  of  the  lungs,  the 
liver,  and  the  joints,  is  to  be  explained  on  the  same 
principle.  In  these  cases  we  find  that  issues  do  little 
good  unless  they  be  somewhat  painful,  or  be  in  the 
state  of  healthy  ulcers.  An  indolent  flabby  sore,  how- 
ever large  the  discharge  (which  is  always  thin,  and 
accompanied  with  little  action),  does  no  good,  but  only 
adds  to  the  misery  of  the  patient.  We  may,  however, 
err  on  the  other  hand,  by  making  the  issues  too  painful, 
or  by  keeping  them  active  loo  long;  for  after  they 
have  removed  the  inflammatory  disease  below,  they 
will  still  operate  on  these  parts,  lessening  their  action 
and  preventing  the  healing  process  from  going  on  pro- 
perly. This  is  seen  in  cases  of  curvature  of  the  spine, 
where,  at  first,  the  inflammation  of  the  vertebra  is  di 
minished  by  the  issues  ; but  if  they  be  kept  long  open 
after  this  is  removed,  they  do  harm.  We  often  see  the 
patient  recover  rapidly  alter  his  surgeon  has  healed  the 
issue  in  despair,  judging  that  it  could  do  no  farther 
service,  hut  only  increase  the  weakness  of  his  patient. 

It  is  a well-established  fact,  that  when  any  particu- 
lar action  disappears  suddenly  from  a part,  it  will  often 
speedily  affect  that  organ  which  sympathizes  most 
with  the  part  that  was  originally  diseased.  This  is 
best  seen  in  the  inflammatory  action,  which,  as  practi- 
cal writers  have  well  observed,  occasionally  disappears 
quickly  from  the  part  first  affected,  and  then  shows 
itself  in  some  other. 

From  the  united  testimony  of  all  these  facts,  Mr. 
Burns,  of  Glasgow,  maintains  the  doctrine  just  deli- 
vered, and  proposes  to  introduce  it  into  pathological 
reasonings.  In  the  whole  of  the  animal  economy,  we 
discover  marks  of  the  wisdom  of  the  Creator,  but  per- 
haps in  no  part  of  it  more  than  in  this,  of  t'he  existence 
of  the  sympathy  of  equilibrium ; for,  if  a large  part 
of  the  system  were  to  have  its  action  much  increased, 
and  all  the  other  parts  to  continue  acting  in  the  same 
proportionate  degree  as  formerly,  the  whole  must  be 
soon  exhausted ; (for  increased  action  would  require 
for  its  support  an  increased  quantity  of  energy.) 

But  upon  this  principle,  when  action  is  much  in- 
creased in  one  part,  it  is  to  a certain  degree  diminished 
in  some  other,  the  general  sum  or  degree  of  action  in 
the  body  is  thus  less  than  it  otherwise  would  be,  and 
consequently  the  system  suffers  less. 

SY'MPIIYSIS.  (From  avv,  together,  and  to 
grow.)  Mediate  connexion.  A genus  of  the  con- 
nexion of  bones,  in  which  they  are  united  by  means 
of  an  intervening  body.  It  comprehends  four  species, 
viz.  synchondrosis,  syssarcosis,  syneurosis,  and  syn- 
desmosis. 

SY'MPHYTUM.  (From  trv/jKpvu),  to  unite:  so 
called  because  it  is  supposed  to  unite  and  close  the  lips 
of  wounds  together.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Pentaudria ; Order,  JbTonogynia. 

2.  The  pharinacopoeial  name  of  the  comfrey.  See 
Symphytum  officinale. 

Symphytum  maculosum.  feee  Pulmonaria  offici- 
nalis. 

Symphytum  minus.  See  Prunella. 

Symphytum  officinale.  The  systematic  name  of 

H27 


SYN 


the  comfrey.  Consolida  major.  This  plant,  Symphy- 
tum— foliis-ovatis  lanceolatis  decurrentibus , is  admi- 
nistered where  the  althaea  cannot  be  obtained,  its  roots 
abounding  with  a viscid  glutinous  juice,  whose  virtues 
are  similar  to  those  of  the  althaea. 

Symphytum  petr^eum.  ISee  Coris  monspeliensis. 

Syna'nchk.  See  Cynanche. 

Syna'nchica.  (From  ovvayxV)  the  quinsey : so 
called  from  its  uses  in  that  disease.)  Quinseywort. 

SYNARTHRO  SIS.  (From  ovv,  together,  and  a pOpov, 
a joint.)  Immoveable  connexion.  A genus  of  con- 
nexion of  bones,  in  which  they  are  united  together  by 
an  immoveable  union.  It  has  three  species,  viz.  suture, 
harmony,  and  gomphosis. 

SYN  ASTOMO'SIS.  This  is  used  in  the  same  sense 
as  Anastomosis. 

SYNCHONDRO'SIS.  (From  ovv,  with,  and  %ov£po?, 
a cartilage.)  A species  of  symphysis,  in  which  one 
bone  is  united  with  another  by  means  of  an  interven- 
ing cartilage ; as  the  vertebras  and  the  bones  of  the 
pubes. 

SYNCHONDROTO'MIA.  (From  ovvxovSpcvoip, the 
symphysis  of  the  pubes,  and  repvu),  to  cut.)  The  opera- 
tion of  dividing  the  symphysis  of  the  pubes. 

SY'NCHYSUS.  (From  ovyxvu,  to  confound.)  A 
solution  of  the  vitreous  humour  into  a fine  attenuated 
aqueous  fluid.  In  Cullen’s  Nosology,  it  is  a variety  of 
his  species  caligo  pupillce. 

Synci'pitis  ossa.  See  Parietal  bones. 

SY'NCIPUT.  ( Synciput  vel  sinciput , itis.  n.) 
The  forepart  of  the  head  or  cranium. 

SY'NCOPE.  (From  ovv,  with,  and  Konjo),  to  cut, 
or  strike  down.)  Animi  deliguium;  Leipothymia ; 
Defectio  animi ; Dissolutio  ; Exanimatio ; Asphyxia; 
Virium  lapsus;  Apopsychia ; Apsychia ; Ecchysis. 
Fainting  or  swooning.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class 
Neuroses,  and  Order  Adynamice,  of  Cullen,  in  which 
the  respiration  and  action  of  the  heart  either  cease,  or 
become  much  weaker  than  usual,  with  paleness  and 
coldness,  arising  from  diminished  energy  of  the  brain, 
or  from  organic  aflections  of  the  heart.  Species : 1. 
Syncope  cardiaca , the  cardiac  syncope,  arising  without 
a visible  cause,  and  with  violent  palpitation  of  the 
heart,  during  the  intervals,  and  depending  generally  on 
some  organic  affection  of  the  heart  or  neighbouring 
vessels. 

2.  Syncope  occasionalis,  the  exciting  cause  being 
manifest. 

The  disease  is  sometimes  preceded  by  anxiety  about 
the  precordia,  a sense  of  fulness  ascending  from  the 
stomach  towards  the  head,  vertigo  or  confusion  of  ideas, 
dimness  of  sight,  and  coldness  of  the  extremities.  The 
attacks  are  frequently  attended  with,  or  end  in,  vomit- 
ing, and  sometimes  in  epileptic  or  other  convulsions. 
The  causes  are  sudden  and  violent  emotions  of  the 
mind,  pungent  or  disagreeable  odours,  derangement  of 
the  primse  vise,  debility  from  preceding  disorders,  loss 
of  blood  spontaneous  or  artificial,  the  operation  of  para- 
centesis, See.  During  the  paroxysm  the  nostrils  are  to 
be  stimulated  with  some  of  the  preparations  of  ammo- 
nia, or  these  may  be  exhibited  internally,  if  the  patient 
is  capable  of  swallowing ; but  when  the  disease  has 
originated  from  large  loss  of  blood,  such  stimulants  must 
be  used  cautiously.  When  it  is  connected  with  a dis- 
ordered state  of  the  stomach,  if  an  emetic  can  be  given, 
or  vomiting  excited  by  irritating  the  fauces,  it  will  pro- 
bably afford  relief.  Sometimes  sprinkling  the  face  with 
cold  water  will  recover  the  patient.  And  when  there 
is  reason  for  supposing  an  accumulation  .about  the 
heart,  the  disease  not  having  arisen  from  debilitating 
causes,  a moderate  abstraction  of  blood  may  be  made 
with  propriety.  Between  the  fits  we  should  endeavour 
to  strengthen  the  constitution,  where  debility  appears 
concerned  in  producing  them,  and  the  several  exciting 
causes  must  be  carefully  guarded  against.  When 
organic  affections  of  the  heart,  and  parts  connected 
with  it,  exist,  all  that  can  be  done  is,  to  palliate  the 
attacks  of  fainting  ; unless  the  primary  disease  can  be 
removed,  which  is  extremely  rare. 

Syncope  anoinosa.  See  Angina  pectoris. 

SYNDESMOLO'GIA.  (From  ovvSeopog,  a ligament, 
and  Xoyof,  a discourse.)  The  doctrine  of  the  ligamdfcts. 

Syndesmo-pharyngeus.  See  Constrictor  pharyn- 
gis  medtus. 

SYN  DESMO'SIS.  (From  ovvSeopos , a ligament.) 
That  species  of  symphysis  or  mediate  connexion  of 


SYN 

bones  in  which  they  are  united  by  ligament,  as  the 
radius  with  the  ulna. 

SYNDE'SMUS.  (From  ovvSew,  to  bind  together  ) 
A ligament. 

SYNE'CHIA.  YzvzxLa-  A concretion  of  the  iris 
with  the  cornea,  or  with  the  capsule  of  the  crystalline 
lens.  The  proximate  cause  is  adhesion  of  these  parts 
the  consequence  of  inflammation.  The  remote  causes 
are,  a collapse  of  the  cornea,  a prolapse  of  the  iris  a 
swelling  or  tumefied  cataract,  hypopium,  or  original 
formation.  The  species  of  this  disorder  are, 

1.  Synechia  anterior  totalis , or  a concretion  of  the 
iris  with  the  cornea.  This  species  is  known  by  in- 
specting the  parts.  The  pupil  in  this  species  is  dilated 
or  coarctated,  or  it  is  found  concreted ; from  whence 
various  lesions  of  vision. 

2.  Synechia  anterior  partialis,  when  only  some  pari 
of  the  iris  is  accreted.  This  concretion  is  observed  in 
one  or  many  places ; from  hence  the  pupil  is  variously 
disfigured,  and  an  inordinate  motion  of  the  pupil  is  per- 
ceived. 

3.  Synechia  anterior  composita,  when  not  only  the 
whole  iris,  but  also  a prolapse  of  the  crystalline  lens, 
unites  with  the  cornea. 

4.  Synechia  posterior  totalis , or  a concretion  of  the 
whole  uvea,  with  the  ciliary  processes  and  the  capsule 
of  the  crystalline  lens. 

5.  Synechia  posterior  partialis , when  only  some  part 
of  the  capsule  of  the  crystalline  lens  is  concreted  with 
the  uvea  and  cornea.  This  accretion  is  simplex,  du- 
plex, triplex,  or  in  many  places. 

6.  Synechia  complicata,  with  an  amaurosis,  cataract, 
mydriasis,  myosis,  or  synizesis. 

SYNEURO'SIS.  (From  ovv,  with,  and  vcvpov,  a 
nerve,  because  the  ancients  included  membranes,  liga- 
ments, and  tendons  under  the  head  of  nerves.)  A spe- 
cies of  symphysis,  in  which  one  bone  is  united  to  an- 
other by  means  of  an  intervening  membrane. 

SYNGENESIA.  (From  ovv,  together,  and  ysvzois , 
generation.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants,  in  the 
sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  consisting  of  plants  in  which 
the  anthers  are  united  into  a tube,  the  filaments  on  which 
they  are  supported  being  mostly  separate  and  distinct. 
The  flowers  are  compound. 

SYNIZE'SIS.  A perfect  concretion  and  coarctation 
of  the  pupil.  It  is  known  by  the  absence  of  the  pupil, 
and  a total  loss  of  vision.  The  species  are, 

1.  Synizesis  nativa,  with  which  infants  are  some- 
times born.  In  this  case,  by  an  error  of  the  first  con- 
formation of  the  pupil,  there  is  no  perforation ; it  is 
very  rarely  found. 

2.  Synizesis  accidentalis,  a concretion  of  the  pupil, 
from  an  inflammation  or  exulceration  of  the  uvea  or 
iris,  or  from  a defect  of  the  aqueous  or  vitreous  hu- 
mourl 

3.  Synizesis,  from  a secession  of  the  iris  or  cornea. 
From  whatever  cause  it  may  happen,  the  effect  is  cer- 
tain, for  the  pupil  contracts  its  diameter;  the  longitu- 
dinal fibres,  separated  from  the  circle  of  the  cornea, 
cannot  resist  the  orbicular  fibres : from  hence  the  pupil 
is  wholly  or  partially  contracted. 

4.  Synizesis  complicata,  or  that  which  is  complicated 
with  an  amaurosis,  synechia,  or  other  occular  disease. 
The  amaurosis,  or  gutta  serena,  is  known  by  the  total 
absence  of  light  to  the  retina.  We  can  distinguish  this 
not  only  by  the  pupil  being  closed,  but  likewise  the  eye- 
lids ; for  whether  the  eyelids  be  open  or  shut,  all  ia 
darkness  to  the  patient.  The  other  complicated  cases 
are  known  by  viewing  the  eye,  and  considering  th* 
parts  anatomically. 

5.  Synizesis  spuria,  is  a closing  of  the  pupil  by  mu 
cus,  pus,  or  grumous  blood. 

SY'NOCHA.  (From  <rvvs%w,  to  continue.)  Fcbris 
synocha.  Inflammatory  fever.  A species  of  continued 
fever,  characterized  by  increased  heat ; pulse  frequent, 
strong,  hard  ; urine  high-coloured ; senses  not  impaired. 
This  fever  is  so  named  from  its  being  attended  with 
symptoms  denoting  general  inflammation  in  the  system, 
by  which  we  shall  always  be  able  readily  to  distinguish 
it  from  either  the  nervous  or  putrid.  It  makes  its  at- 
tack at  all  seasons  of  the  year,  but  is  most  prevalent  in 
the  spring  ; and  it  seizes  persons  of  all  ages  and  habits, 
but  more  particularly  those  in  the  vigour  of  life,  with 
strong  elastic  fibres,  and  of  a plethoric  constitution.  It 
is  a species  of  fever  almost  peculiar  to  cold  and  tempo 
rate  climates,  being  rarely,  if  ever,  met  with  in  very 


SYN 


SYN 


warm  ones,  except  among  Europeans  lately  arrived ; 
and  even  then,  the  inflammatory  stage  is  of  very  short 
duration,  as  it  very  soon  assumes  either  the  nervous  or 
putrid  type. 

The  exciting  causes  are  sudden  transitions  from  heat 
to  cold,  swallowing  cold  liquors,  when  the  body  is  much 
heated  by  exercise,  too  free  a use  of  vinous  and  spirit- 
uous liquors,  great  intemperance,  violent  passions  of  the 
mind,  the  sudden  suppression  of  habitual  evacuations, 
and  the  sudden  repulsion  of  eruptions.  It  may  be  doubt- 
ed if  this  fever  ever  originates  from  personal  infection ; 
but  it  is  possible  for  it  to  appear  as  an  epidemic  "among 
such  as  are  of  a robust  habit,  from  a peculiar  state  of 
the  atmosphere.  It  comes  on  with  a sense  of  lassitude 
and  inactivity,  succeeded  by  vertigo,  rigors,  and  pains 
over  the  whole  body,  but  more  particularly  in  the  head 
and  back ; which  symptoms  are  shortly  followed  by 
redness  of  the  face  and  eyes,  great  restlessness,  intense 
heat,  and  unquenchable  thirst,  oppression  of  breathing, 
and  nausea.  The  skin  is  dry  and  parched ; the  tongue 
is  of  a scarlet  colour  at  the  sides,  and  furred  with  white 
in  the  centre  ; the  urine  is  red  and  scanty ; the  body  is 
costive ; and  there  is  a quickness,  with  a fhlness  and 
hardness  in  the  pulse,  not  much  affected  by  any  pres- 
sure made  on  the  artery.  If  the  febrile  symptoms  run 
very  high,  and  proper  means  are  not  used  at  an  early 
period,  stupor  and  delirium  come  on,  the  imagination 
becomes  much  disturbed  and  hurried,  and  the  patient 
raves  violently.  The  disease  usually  goes  through  its 
course  in  about  fourteen  days,  and  terminates  in  a crisis, 
either  by  diaphoresis,  diarrhoea,  haemorrhage  from  the 
nose,  or  the  deposite  of  a copious  sediment  in  the  urine ; 
which  crisis  is  usually  preceded  by  some  variation  in 
the  pulse. 

Our  judgment  as  to  the  termination  of  the  disease 
must  be  formed  from  the  violence  of  the  attack,  and 
the  nature  of  the  symptoms.  If  the  fever  runs  high,  or 
continues  many  days  with  stupor  or  delirium,  the  event 
may  be  doubtflil ; but  if  to  these  are  added,  picking  at 
the  bed-clothes,  startings  of  the  tendons,  involuntary 
discharges  by  stool  and  urine,  and  hicpups,  it  will  then 
certainly  be  fatal.  On  the  contrary,  if  the  febrile  heat 
abates,  the  other  symptoms  moderate,  and  there  is  a 
tendency  to  a crisis,  we  may  then  expect  a recovery. 
In  a few  instances,  this  fever  has  been  known  to  ter- 
minate in  mania. 

On  opening  those  who  die  of  an  inflammatory  fever, 
an  effusion  is  often  perceived  within  the  cranium,  and 
now  and  then,  topical  affections  of  some  of  the  viscera 
are  to  be  observed. 

The  chief  indication  in  synocha  is  to  lessen  the  ex- 
cessive vascular  action  by  evacuations,  and  the  anti- 
phlogistic regimen.  Of  the  former,  by  far  the  most  im- 
portant is  blood-letting,  which  should  be  freely  prac- 
tised in  this  disease,  making  a large  orifice  into  the 
vein,  and  taking  from  ten  to  twenty-four  ounces  of 
blood,  according  to  the  violence  of  the  symptoms,  and 
the  strength  of  the  patient.  The  disorder  may  some- 
times be  cut  short  at  once  by  this  active  treatment  in 
the  beginning  ; but  if  it  should  continue  urgent,  and  the 
strength  of  the  pulse  keep  up,  the  repetition  of  it  within 
more  moderate  limits  will  be  from  time  to  time  advisa- 
ble. Purging  is  next  in  efficacy,  especially  with  those 
articles  which  produce  copious  serous  discharges,  and 
thoroughly  clear  out  the  intestines,  as  the  saline  cathar- 
tics, with  infusion  of  senna,  jalap  with  supertartrate  of 
potassa,  &c.  As  the  disease  advances,  however,  we 
must  act  less  on  this  part,  and  attempt  to  promote  the 
other  discharges,  particularly  that  by  the  skin  : for 
which  purpose  calomel,  antimonials,  and  the  saline 
diaphoretics  are  to  be  exhibited.  The  antiphlogistic 
regimen  consists  in  obviating  stimuli  of  every  kind,  so 
far  as  this  can  be  done  safely ; impressions  on  the 
senses,  particularly  the  sight  and  hearing,  bodily  and 
mental  exertion,  &c.  must  be  guarded  against  as  much 
as  possible.  The  diet  should  be  of  the  most  sparing 
kind ; barley-water,  or  other  mild  liquid,  with  some 
acid,  perhaps,  added,  or  a little  nitrate  of  potassa  dis- 
solved in  it,  taken  in  small  quantities  from  time  to 
time,  chiefly  to  quench  the  thirst,  and  cool  the  body, 
will  be  the  most  proper;  strictly  interdicting  animal 
food,  fermented  liquors,  and  the  like.  The  stimulus  of 
heat  must  be  especially  obviated  by  light  clothing,  or 
even  exposing  the. body  to  the  air,  ventilating  the  apart- 
ment, sprinkling  thefloor  with  vinegar  and  water,  &c. 
When  the  head  is  much  affected,  besides  the  general 
treatment,  it  will  be  proper  to  take  blood  locally,  have 


the  head  shaved  and  cooled  by  some  evaporating  lotion, 
apply  a blister  to  the  neck,  and,  perhaps,  stimulate  the 
lower  extremities.  In  like  manner,  any  other  organ 
being  particularly  pressed  upon,  may  require  additional 
means,  which  will  be  sufficiently  understood  by  advert- 
ing to  the  several  phlegmasiae. 

SY'NOCHUS.  (From  <njve%w,  to  continue.)  A 
mixed  fever.  A species  of  continued  fever,  com- 
mencing with  symptoms  of  synocha,  and  terminating  in 
typhus  ; so  that  synocha  and  typhus,  blended  together 
in  a slight  degree,  seem  to  constitute  this  species  of 
fever,  the  former  being  apt  to  preponderate  at  its  com- 
mencement, and  the  latter  towards  its  termination. 

Every  thing  which  has  a tendency  to  enervate  the 
| body,  may  be  looked  upon  as  a remote  cause  of  this 
: fever  ; and  accordingly  we  find  it  often  arising  from 
J great  bodily  fatigue,  too  great  an  indulgence  in  sensual 
pleasures,  violent  exertion,  intemperance  in  drinking, 
and  errors  in  diet,  and  now  and  then  likewise  from  the 
suppression  of  some  long-accustomed  discharge.  Cer- 
tain passions  of  the  mind  (such  as  grief,  fear,  anxiety, 
and  joy,)  have  been  enumerated  aniong  the  causes  of 
fever,  and  in  a few  instances,  it  is  probable,  they  may 
have  given  rise  to  it ; but  the  concurrence  of  some 
other  powers  seems  generally  necessary  to  produce  this 
effect.  The  most  usual  and  universal  cause  of  this 
fever  is  the  application  of  cold  to  the  body ; and  its 
morbid  effect  sseem  to  depend  partly  upon  certain  cir- 
cumstances of  the  cold  itself,  and  partly  upon  certain 
circumstances  of  the  person  to  whom  it  is  applied. 

The  circumstances  which  seem  to  give  the  applica- 
tion of  cold  due  effect,  are  its  degree  of  intensity,  the 
length  of  time  which  it  is  applied ; its  being  applied 
generally,  or  only  in  a current  of  air,  its  having  a degree 
of  moisture  accompanying  it,  and  its  being  a consider- 
able or  sudden  change  from  heat  to  cold.  The  circum- 
stances of  persons  rendering  them  more  liable  to  be 
affected  by  cold,  seem  to  be  debility,  induced  either  by 
great  fatigue,  or  violent  exertions,  by  long  fasting,  by 
the  want  of  natural  rest,  by  severe  evacuations,  by 
preceding  disease,  by  errors  in  diet,  "by  intemperance 
in  drinking,  by  great  sensuality,  by  too  close  an  appli- 
cation to  study,  or  giving  way  to  grief,  fear,  or  great 
anxiety,  by  depriving  the  body  of  part  of  its  accustomed 
clothing,  by  exposing  any  one  particular  part  of  it, 
while  the  rest  is  kept  of  its  usual  warmth,  or  by  ex- 
posing it  generally  or  suddenly  to  cold  when  heated 
much  beyond  its  usual  temperature ; these  we  may, 
therefore,  look  upon  as  so  many  causes  giving  an  effect 
to  cold  which  it  otherwise  might  not  have  produced. 
Another  frequent  cause  of  fever  seems  to  be  breathing 
air  contaminated  by  the  vapours  arising  either  directly 
or  originally  from  the  body  of  a person  labouring  under 
the  disease.  A peculiar  matter  is  supposed  to  generate 
in  the  body  of  a person  affected  with  fever,  and  this 
floating  in  the  atmosphere,  and  being  applied  to  one 
in  health,  will  no  doubt  often  cause  fever  to  take  place 
in  him,  which  has  induced  many  to  suppose,  that  this 
infectious  matter  is  produced  in  all  fevers  whatever, 
and  that  they  are  all,  more  or  less,  contagious. 

The  effluvia  arising  from  the  human  body,  if  long 
confined  to  one  place  without  being  diffused  in  the 
atmosphere,  will,  it  is  well  known,  acquire  a singulat 
virulence,  and  will,  if  applied  to  the  bodies  of  men 
become  the  cause  of  fever.  Exhalations,  arising  from 
animal  or  vegetable  substances  in  a state  of  putrefac- 
tion, have  been  looked  upon  as  another  general  cause 
of  fever:  marshy  or  moist  grounds,  acted  upon  by  heat 
for  any  length  of  time,  usually  send  forth  exhalations 
which  prove  a never-failing  source  of  fever,  but  more 
particularly  in  warm  climates.  Various  hypotheses 
have  been  maintained,  with  respect  to  the  proximate 
cause  of  fever;  some  supposing  it  to  be  a lentor  or 
viscidity  prevailing  in  the  mass  of  blood,  and  stagnating 
in  the  extreme  vessels  ; others,  that  it  is  a noxious  mat- 
ter introduced  into,  or  generated  in,  the  body,  and  that 
the  increased  action  of  the  heart  and  arterjes  is  att 
effort  of  nature  to  expel  the  morbific  matter ; others, 
that  it  consisted  in  an  increased  secretion  of  bile  ; and 
others  again,  that  it  is  to  be  attributed  to  a spasmodic 
constriction  of  the  extreme  vessels  on  the  surface  of  the 
body : which  last  was  the  doctrine  taught  by  the  late 
Dr.  Cullen. 

An  attack  of  this  fever  is  generally  marked  by  the 
patient’s  being  seized  with  a considerable  degree  of 
languor,  or  sense  of  debility,  together  with  a sluggish- 
ness in  motion,  and  frequent  yawning  and  stretching* 

32lJ 


SYN 


SYP 


file  face  and  extremities  at  the  same  time  become  pale, 
and  the  skin  over  the  whole  surface  of  the  body  ap- 
pears constricted ; he  then  perceives  a sensation  of 
cold  in  his  back,  passing  from  thence  over  his  whole 
frame ; and  this  sense  of  cold  continuing  to  increase, 
tremors  in  the  limbs  and  rigors  of  the  body  succeed. 

With  these  there  is  a loss  of  appetite,  want  of  taste 
in  the  mouth,  slight  pains  in  the  head,  back,  and  loins, 
small  and  frequent  respirations.  The  sense  of  cold 
and  its  effects  after  a little  time'becomes  less  violent, 
and  are  alternated  with  flushings,  and  at  last,  going  off 
altogether,  they  are  succeeded  by  great  heat  diffused 
generally  over  the  whole  body ; the  face  looks  flushed, 
the  skin  is  dry,  as  likewise  the  tongue  ; universal  rest- 
lessness prevails,  with  a violent  pain  in  the  head,  op- 
pression at  the  chest,  sickness  at  the  stomach,  and  an 
inclination  to  vomit.  There  is  likewise  a great  thirst 
and  costiveness,  and  the  pulse  is  full  and  frequent, 
beating,  perhaps,  90  or  100  strokes  in  a minute.  When 
the  symptoms  run  very  high,  and  there  is  a consider- 
able determination  of  blood  to  the  head,  a delirium 
will  arise.  In  this  fever,  as  well  as  most  others,  there 
is  generally  an  increase  of  symptoms  towards  evening. 

If  the  disease  is  likely  to  prove  fatal,  either  by  its 
continuing  a long  time,  or  by  the  severity  of  its  symp- 
toms, then  a starting  of  the  tendons,  picking  at  the  bed- 
clothes, involuntary  discharges  by  urine  and  stool, 
coldness  of  the  extremities,  and  hiccoughs,  will  be 
observed ; where  no  such  appearances  take  place,  the 
disease  will  go  through  its  course. 

As  a fever  once  produced  will  go  on,  although  its 
cause  be  entirely  removed,  and  as  the  continued  or 
fresh  application  of  a cause  of  fever  neither  will  in- 
crease that  which  is  already  produced,  nor  occasion  a 
new  one,  there  can  be  no  certainty  as  to  the  duration 
of  fever ; and  it  is  only  by  attending  to  certain  appear- 
ances or  changes,  which  usually  take  place  on  the 
approach  of  a crisis,  that  we  can  form  any  opinion  or 
decision.  The  symptoms  pointing  out  the  approach 
of  a crisis  are,  the  pulse  becoming  soft,  moderate,  and 
near  its  natural  speed;  the  tongue  losing  its  fur  and 
becoming  clean,  with  an  abatement  of  thirst ; the  skin 
being  covered  with  a gentle  moisture,  and  feeling  soft 
to  the  touch;  the  secretory  organs  performing  then- 
several  offices ; and  the  urine  depositing  flaky  crystals 
of  a dirty  red  colour,  and  becoming  turbid  on  being 
allowed  to  stand  any  time. 

Many  physicians  have  been  of  opinion,  that  there 
is  something  in  the  nature  of  all  acute  diseases,  except 
those  of  a putrid  kind,  which  usually  determines  them 
to  be  of  a certain  duration,  and,  therefore,  that  these 
terminations,  when  salutary,  happen  at  certain  periods 
of  the  disease  rather  than  at  others,  unless  disturbed  in 
their  progress  by  an  improper  mode  of  treatment,  or 
the  arising  of  some  accidental  circumstance.  These 
periods  are  known  by  the  appellation  of  critical  days  ; 
and  from  the  time  of  Hippocrates  down  to  the  present, 
have  been  pretty  generally  admitted.  The  truth  of 
them,  Dr.  Thomas  thinks,  can  hardly  be  disputed, 
however  they  may  be  interrupted  by  various  causes. 
A great  number  of  phenomena  show  us,  that  both  in 
the  sound  state  and  the  diseased,  nature  has  a ten- 
dency to  observe  certain  periods;  for  instance,  the 
vicissitudes  of  sleeping  and  watching  occurring  with 
such  regularity  to  every  one  ; the  accurate  periods  that 
the  menstrual  flux  observes,  and  the  exact  time  of 
pregnancy  in  all  viviparous  animals,  and  many  other 
such  instances  that  might  be  adduced,  all  prove  this 
law. 

With  respect  to  diseases,  every  one  must  have 
observed  the  definite  periods  which  take  place  in 
regular  intermittents,  as  well  those  universal  as  topical ; 
in  the  course  of  true  inflammation,  which  at  the  fourth, 
or  at  the  farthest  the  seventh  day,  is  resolved,  or  after 
this  period  changes  into  either  abscess,  gangrene,  or 
scirrhus ; in  exanthematous  eruptions,  which,  if  they 
are  favourable  and  regular,  appear  on  a certain  and 
definite  day ; for  example,  the  small-pox  about  the 
fourth  day.  All  these  appear  to  be  founded  on  im- 
mutable laws,  according  to  which  the  motions  of  the 
body  in  health  and  in  disease  are  governed. 

The  days  on  which  it  is  supposed  the  termination  of 
continued  fevers  principally  happens,  are  the  third, 
fifth,  seventh,  ninth,  eleventh,  fourteenth,  seventeenth, 
and  twentieth. 

A simple  continued  fever  terminates  always  by  a 
regular  crisis  in  the  manner  before  mentioned,  or  from 
390 


the  febrile  matter  falling  on  some  particular  parts,  it 
excites  inflammation,  abscess,  eruption,  or  destroys  the 
patient. 

Great  anxiety,  loss  of  strength,  intense  heat,  stupor, 
delirium,  irregularity  in  the  pulse,  twitchings  in  the 
fingers  and  hands,  picking  at  the  bed-clothes,  startings 
of  the  tendons,  hiccoughs,  involuntary  evacuations 
by  urine  and  stool,  and  such  like  symptoms,  point  out 
the  certain  approach  of  death. 

On  the  contrary,  when  the  senses  remain  clear  and 
distinct,  the  febrile  heat  abates,  the  skin  is  soft  and 
moist,  the  pulse  becomes  moderate  and  is  regular,  and 
the  urine  deposites  flaky  crystals,  we  may  then  expect 
a speedy  and  happy  termination  of  the  disease. 

The  usual  appearances  which  are  to  be  observed  on 
dissection  of  those  who  die  of  this  fever,  are  an  effusion 
within  the  cranium,  and  topical  affections  perhaps  of 
some  viscera. 

This  disease  being  of  a mixed  nature,  the  treatment 
must  be  modified  accordingly.  In  the  beginning,  the 
same  plan  is  to  be  pursued  as  in  synocha,  except  that 
we  must  be  more  sparing  in  the  use  of  the  lancet,  in 
proportion  as  there  is  less  power  in  the  system,  to  main- 
tain the  increased  action  of  the  heart  and  arteries; 
although  if  any  important  part  should  be  much  af- 
fected, we  must  act  more  vigorously,  to  prevent  its 
disorganization,  and  the  consequent  destruction  of  life. 
Wi»n  the  character  of  the  disease  is  changed,  the 
means  proper  will  be  such  as  are  pointed  out  under  the 
head  of  Typhus. 

SYNO’VIA.  (A  term  of  no  radical  meaning, 
coined  by  Paracelsus.)  An  unctuous  fluid  secreted 
from  certain  glands  in  the  joint  in  which  it  is  contained. 
Its  use  is  to  lubricate  the  cartilaginous  surfaces  of  the 
articulatory  bones,  and  to  facilitate  their  motions. 

SYNOVIAL.  Synovicdis.  Of  or  belonging  to  the 
synovia,  or  fluid  of  the  joints. 

Synovial  glands.  Glandules  synoviales.  The 
assemblage  of  a fatty  fimbriated  structure  within  the 
cavities  of  some  joints. 

SYNTENO'SIS.  (From  <rw,  with,  and  revotv,  a 
tendon.)  A species  of  articulation  where  the  bones 
are  connected  together  by  tendons. 

Synte'xis.  (From  awryx^i  to  dissolve.)  A ma- 
rasmus or  wasting  of  the  body. 

SY'NTHESIS.  (From  <r vvrtftj/it,  to  compose.) 
Combination.  See  Analysis. 

Syntheti'smus.  (From  ow0£o>,  to  concur.)  The 
reduction  of  a fracture. 

Synulo'tica.  (From  avvov\oa>,  to  cicatrize.)  Me- 
dicines which  heal  wounds. 

SY'PHILIS.  (The  name  of  a shepherd,  who  fed 
the  flocks  of  king  Alcithous,  who,  proud  of  their  num- 
ber and  beauty,  insulted  the  sun ; as  a punishment  for 
which,  fable  relates,  that  this  disease  was  sent  on 
earth  ; or  from  tn^Aos,  filthy.)  Lues  venerea ; Morbus 
gallicus ; Aphrodisius  morbus  ; Morbus  indicus ; 
Morbus  neapolitanus  ; Patursa.  A genus  of  disease 
in  the  Class  Cachexia’. , and  Order  Impetigines,  of 
Cullen.  Towards  the  close  of  the  memorable  fifteenth 
century,  about  the  year  1494  or  1495,  the  inhabitants 
of  Europe  were  greatly  alarmed  by  the  sudden  ap- 
pearance of  this  disease.  The  novelty  of  its  symptoms, 
and  the  wonderful  rapidity  with  which  it  was  propa- 
gated throughout  every  part  of  the  known  world,  soon 
made  it  an  important  object  of  medical  inquiry. 

In  common  language,  it  is  said  a person  hits  syphilis 
or  is  poxed,  when  the  venereal  poison  has  been  re- 
ceived into,  or  is  diffused  through  the  system,  and  there 
produces  its  peculiar  effects,  as  ulcers  of  the  mouth  or 
fauces,  spots,  tetters,  and  ulcers  of  the  skin,  pains, 
swelling,  and  caries  of  the  bones,  &c.  But  as  long  as 
the  effects  of  the  poison  are  local  and  confined  to  or 
near  the  genitals,  the  disorder  is  not  called  syphilis, 
lues  venerea,  nor  pox ; but  distinguished  by  some  par- 
ticular name,  according  to  its  different  seat  or  appear- 
ance ; such  as  gonorrhoea  venerea,  chancre,  or  bubo. 

The  venereal  disease  is  always  produced  by  a poison. 
Concerning  the  nature  of  this  poison,  we  know  no 
more  than  we  do  about  that  of  the  small-pox  or  any 
other  contagion ; we  know  only  Jhat  it  produces  pecu- 
liar effects.  The  smallest  particle  of  this  poison  is 
sufficient  to  bring  on  the  most  violent  disorder  over  the 
whole  body.  It  seems  to  spread  and  diffuse  itself  by 
a kind  of  fermentation  and  assimilation  of  matter;  and, 
like  other  contagions,  it  requires  some  time  after  being 
applied  to  the  human  body,  before  it  produces  that 


SYP 


SYP 


effect.  It  is  not  known  whether  it  has  different  de- 
grees of  acrimony  and  volatility,  or  whether  it  is 
always  the  same  in  its  nature,  varying  only  with  regard 
to  the  particular  part  to  which  it  is  applied,  or  ac- 
cording to  the  different  habit  and  constitution  or  par- 
ticular idiosyncrasy  of  the  person  who  receives  the 
infection.  We  know  that  mercury  possesses  a certain 
and  specific  power  of  destroying  the  venereal  virus ; 
but  we  are  quite  uncertain  whether  it  acts  by  a sedative, 
adstringent,  or  evacuant  quality  ; or,  which  is  not  un- 
likely, by  a chemical  elective  attraction  whereby  both 
substances  uniting  with  one  another  are  changed  to  a 
third,  which  is  no  more  hurtful,  but  has  some  new 
properties  entirely  distinct  from  those  which  any  of 
them  had  before  they  were  united.  The  variolous 
miasma,  we  know,  produces  its  effects  in  about  twenty 
or  twenty-four  days  after  the  infection  is  received  from 
the  atmosphere,  and  eight  or  ten  days  if  by  inoculation, 
but  the  venereal  virus  seems  to  keep  no  particular 
period.  At  some  times,  and,  perhaps,  in  particular 
persons,  Dr.  Swediaur  has  seen  chancres  arise  in  the 
space  of  twelve  hours,  nay,  in  a still  shorter  time, 
indeed  he  mentions  in  a few  minutes,  after  an  impure 
coition ; whereas  in  most  cases,  they  make  their  ap- 
pearance only  in  so  many  days.  The  generality  of 
men  feel  the  first  symptoms  of  a clap  between  the 
second  and  fifth  days  after  an  impure  coitus  ; but  there 
are  instances  where  they  do  not  appear  till  after  as  many 
weeks  or  months.  Dr.  S.  was  consulted  by  a young 
man,  who  was  seized  with  a violent  discharge  from  the 
glans  along  with  a phimosis,  but  without  any  chancres, 
four  weeks  after  coition  ; and  during  all  the  interval, 
he  felt  not  the  least  symptom  of  the  disease.  Some 
years  ago,  a gentleman  went  out  from  London,  in 
seemingly  perfect  health,  to  the  East  Indies ; but  on 
his  arrival  in  that  hot  climate,  after  a voyage  of  four 
months,  a violent  clap  broke  out  before  he  went  on 
shore,  though  he  could  have  received  no  infection 
during  the  voyage,  as  there  was  not  a woman  on  board. 
There  are  instances  which  render  it  probable  that  the 
virus  may  lie  four,  five,  or  six  weeks,  and  perhaps  longer, 
on  the  surface  of  the  genitals  before  it  is  absorbed  ; 
and  were  it  not  then  to  produce  a chancre,  might  pro- 
bably not  he  absorbed  at  all.  We  see  daily  examples, 
where  common  women  communicate  the  infection  to 
different  men  in  the  space  of  several  weeks,  while  they 
themselves  have  not  the  least  symptom  of  syphilis 
local  or  universal,  the  poison  lying  all  that  time  in  the 
vagina  harmless,  and  generally  without  being  absorbed. 
How  long  the  venereal  virus  may  lurk  in  the  body  itself, 
after  it  has  been  absorbed  into  the  mass  of  blood, 
before  it  produces  any  sensible  effect,  is  a matter  of 
equal  uncertainty.  There  is  scarcely  a practitioner 
who  has  not  observed  instances  of  its  remaining  harm- 
less for  weeks  or  even  months  in  the  body.  Dr.  Swe- 
diaur had  a case,  where,  after  lying  dormant  for  half  a 
year,  it  broke  out  with  unequivocal  symptoms.  But 
the  following  instance,  if  it  be  depended  upon,  is  still 
more  extraordinary : 

Some  years  ago,  says  the  above  writer,  I was  con- 
sulted by  a gentleman  about  a sore  throat,  which  1 
declared  to  be  venereal.  My  patient  was  astonished  ; 
and  assured  me  that  for  nine  years  past  he  had  not  had 
the  least  venereal  complaint,  nor  had  he  any  reason  to 
believe  he  had  since  received  any  infection  ; but  that 
he  had  been  in  the  East  Indies,  where  he  was  affected 
with  a violent  clap.  On  his  return  to  Europe,  being 
to  appearance  in  good  health,  he  married,  and  conti- 
nued perfectly  fre«  of  any  such  complaint  ever  since. 
By  a mercurial  course,  however,  the  complaint  for 
which  he  applied  to  me  was  completely  removed. 
With  regard  to  its  effects,  the  venereal  poison  follows  no 
constant  rule ; for  though,  in  general,  it  affects  first  the 
throat,  where  it  produces  ulcerations,  in  others  it 
exerts  its  virulence  on  the  skin  or  bones.  While  the 
greatest  part  of  mankind  are  thus  easily  affected  by 
this  poison,  there  'are  some  few  who  seem  to  be 
altogether  unsusceptible  of  the  infection  : as  happens 
equally  with  the  variolous  contagion,  though  they  go 
into  infected  places,  and  expose  themselves  to  inocula- 
tion or  every  hazard  by  which  the  disease  is  generally 
communicated. 

Some  persons  are  more  liable  than  others  to  be  in- 
fected who  are  seemingly  of  the  same  habit ; nay,  the 
very  same  person  seems  to  be  more  liable  to  be  infected 
at  one  time  than  another,  and  those  who  have  been 
once  infected  seem  to  be  more  liable  to  catch  the  infee 


tion  a second  time,  than  those  who  never  were  infected 
before  with  the  disease.  The  climate,  season,  age, 
state  of  health,  idiosyncrasy,  are,  perhaps,  as  in  other 
diseases,  the  necessary  predisposing  causes.  The 
same  difference  is  observable  in  the  progress  made  by 
the  disease  after  the  patient  is  infected.  In  some  the 
progress  is  slow,  and  the  disease  appears  scarcely  to  gain 
any  ground  ; while  in  others  it  advances  with  the 
utmost  rapidity,  and  speedily  produces  the  most  ter- 
rible symptoms.  Whether  the  venereal  poison  can  be 
abso.bed  into  the  system,  without  a previous  excoria- 
tion, or  ulceration  of  the  genitals,  or  some  other  parts 
of  the  surface  of  the  body,  is  still  a matter  of  doubt. 
Several  cases,  however,  have  occurred  which  render  it 
highly  probable,  if  not  certain,  that  the  poison  really  is 
now  and  then  absorbed,  without  any  previous  excori- 
ation or  ulceration  whatsoever,  and  thus  produces 
buboes  and  other  venereal  symptoms  in  the  body. 

It  has  been  asserted  by  the  earliest  and  even  by  some 
late  writers,  that  it  may  be  caught  by  lying  in  the  same 
bed  or  living  in  the  same  room  with  or  after  an  in- 
fected person.  What  may  have  been  the  case  at  the 
commencement  of  the  disease,  cannot  be  said,  but  the 
most  accurate  observations  and  experiments  which 
have  been  made  upon  the  subject,  do  not  confirm 
this  to  be  the  case  in  our  times.  Nor  are  nurses  in- 
fected in  the  Lock-Hospital,  where  they  live  night  and 
day  with  patients  in  all  stages  of  the  distemper.  The 
fact  seems  to  be,  that  patients  in  our  times  are  apt  to 
impose  upon  themselves,  or  upon  physicians  and  sur- 
geons, with  regard  to  this  matter ; and  the  above 
opinion  easily  gains  ground  among  the  vulgar,  espe- 
cially in  countries  where  people  are  more  influenced 
by  prejudices,  superstition,  servile  situation  in  life,  or 
other  circumstances.  Hence,  we  sometimes  hear  the 
most  ridiculous  accounts  given  in  those  countries  by 
friars  and  common  soldiers,  of  the  manner  by  which 
they  came  to  this  disorder ; such  as  piles,  gravel,  colics, 
contusions,  fevers,  little-houses,  lying  in  suspected 
beds,  or  lying  in  bed  with  a suspected  person,  retention 
of  the  semen,  coition  with  a woman  in  menstruation, 
the  use  of  cider,  bad  wine,  or  beer,  &c. 

Another  question  undecided  is,  whether  the  vene- 
real poison  ever  infects  any  fluid  of  our  body,  besides 
those  of  thewnucous  and  lymphatic  system.  Does  the 
venereal  poison  in  an  infected  woman  ever  affect  the 
milk,  and  consequently  can  the  infection  be  conveyed 
to  the  infant  by  the  milk  alone,  without  any  venereal 
ulcer  on  or  about  the  nipples  ? It  is  equally  a matter 
of  uncertainty  whether  the  venereal  disease  is  ever 
conveyed  from  an  infected  father  or  mother,  by  coition, 
to  the  foetus,  provided  their  genitals  are  sound  ; or 
whether  a child  is  ever  affected  with  venereal  symp- 
toms in  the  uterus  of  an  infected  mother.  Such  in- 
fected infants  as  came  under  the  observation  of  Dr. 
Swediaur,  or  of  his  friends,  whose  practice  afforded 
them  frequent  opportunities  of  seeing  new-born  infants, 
seemed  rather  to  militate  against  the  opinion.  Neither 
he  nor  any  of  them,  have  ever  been  able  to  observe 
ulcerations  or  other  symptoms  of  a venereal  kind  upon 
newborn  children  ; and  such  as  make  their  appearance 
four,  six,  or  eight,  or  more  days  afterward,  on  the 
genitals,  anus,  lips,  mouth,  &c.  may  rather  be  sup 
posed  to  arise  by  infection  during  the  passage  from 
ulcers  in  the  vagina  of  the  mother,  the  skin  of  the 
infant  being  then  nearly  in  as  tender  a state  as  the  glans 
penis,  or  the  labia  ; and  this  perhaps  at  the  time  when 
an  absorption  of  the  venereal  poison  might  more  easily 
take  place  without  a previous  excoriation,  or  ulceration 
of  the  skin.  All  the  ways,  therefore,  by  which  we 
see,  in  our  days,  the  venereal  poison  communicated 
from  an  unhealthy  to  a healthy  person,  may  be  reduced 
to  the  following  heads: 

1.  By  the  coition  of  a healthy  person  with  another 
who  is  infected  with  venereal  disease  of  the  genitals. 

2.  By  the  coition  of  a healthy  person  with  another, 
apparently  healthy,  in  whose  genitals  the  poison  lies 
concealed,  without  having  yet  produced  any  bad 
symptom.  Thus,  a woman  who  has  perhaps  received 
the  infection  from  a man  two  or  three  days  before,  may 
during  that  time  infect,  and  often  does  infect,  the  man 
or  men  who  have  to  do  with  her  afterward,  without 
having  any  symptoms  of  the  disease  visible  upon  her- 
self; and  vice  versd,  a man  may  infect  a woman  in  the 
same  manner.  Such  instances  occur  in  practice  every 
day. 

3.  By  sucking ; in  this  case  the  nipples  of  the  wet 

331 


SYP 


nurse  may  be  infected  by  venereal  ulcers  in  the  mouth 
of  the  child : or,  vice  versd,  the  nipples  of  the  nurse 
being  infected,  will  occasion  venereal  ulcers  in  the 
child’s  nose,  mouth,  or  lips.  It  is  uncertain,  as  men- 
tioned above,  whether  the  venereal  poison  was  ever 
propagated  by  means  of  the  milk  from  the  breast. 

4.  By  exposing  to  the  contact  of  venereal  poison  any 
part  of  the  surface  of  the  body,  by  kissing,  touching, 
&c.  especially  if  the  parts  so  exposed  have  been  previ- 
ously excoriated,  wounded,  or  ulcerated  by  any  cause 
whatever.  In  this  manner  we  frequently  see  venereal 
ulcers  arise  in  the  scrotum  and  thighs ; and  there  are 
some  well-attested  instances  where  the  infection  took 
place  in  the  fingers  of  midwives  or  surgeons.  Several 
instances  are  recorded  of  venereal  ulcers  in  the  nos- 
trils, eyelids,  and  lips  of  persons  who  had  touched  their 
own  genitals,  or  those  of  others,  affected  at  the  time 
with  local  venereal  complaints,  and  then  rubbed  their 
nostrils,  &c.  with  the  fingers,  without  previously  wash- 
ing the  hands.  There  was,  a few  years,  ago  in  London, 
a melancholy  example  of  a young  lady,  who,  after 
having  drawn  a decayed  tooth,  and  replaced  it  with 
one  taken  immediately  from  a young  woman  appa- 
rently in  perfect  health,  was  soon  after  affected  with 
an  ulcer  in  the  mouth.  The  sore  manifested  symptoms 
of  a venereal  nature ; but  such  was  its  obstinacy,  that 
it  resisted  the  most  powerful  mercurial  remedies,  ter- 
minating at  last  in  a caries  of  the  maxilla,  with  a most 
shocking  erosion  of  the  mouth  and  face,  by- which  the 
unhappy  patient  was  destroyed.  During  all  this,  how- 
ever, we  are  informed  that  not  the  smallest  venereal 
symptom  was  perceived  ih  the  woman  from  whom  the 
sound  tooth  was  procured. 

5.  By  wounding  any  part  of  the  body  with  a lancet 
or  knife  infected  with  the  venereal  virus.  In  this  in- 
stance there  is  a similarity  between  the  venereal  poison 
and  that  of  the  small-pox.  There  are  several  exam- 
ples of  the  latter  being  produced  by  bleeding  with  a 
lancet  which  had  been  previously  employed  for  the 
purpose  of  inoculation,  or  of  opening  variolous  pustules, 
without  being  properly  cleaned  afterward.  In  Mo- 
ravia, in  the  year  1577,  a number  of  persons  who  as- 
sembled in  a house  for  bathing,  had  themselves,  ac- 
cording to  the  custom  of  that  time,  scarified  by  the 
barber,  were  all  of  them  infected  with  the  venereal 
disease,  and  treated  accordingly.  Krafo,  the  physi- 
cian, and  Jordan,  who  gave  a description  of  this  dis- 
temper, are  both  of  opinion  that  it  was  communicated 
by  means  of  the  scarifying  instrument.  And  Van 
Swieten  relates  several  instances  where  the  lues  was 
communicated  by  a similar  carelessness  in  cleaning 
the  instrument  used  in  bleeding  or  scarification. 

The  venereal  poison  applied  to  the  urethra  and  va- 
gina produce  a clap.  See  Gonorrhoea.  Coming  into 
contact  with  other  parts,  it  produces  a chancre  or  bubo 
and  constitutional  symptoms.  Chancre  is  the  primary 
and  immediate  consequence  of  inoculation  with  true 
venereal  matter  in  any  of  the  ways  which  have  been 
mentioned,  and  may  arise  in  any  part  of  the  human 
body : but  it  generally  shows  itself  in  the  pudenda^ 
because  the  infecting  medium  is  there  first  taken  up  in 
the  one  sex,  and  communicated  by  contact  to  the  other. 
It  is  not,  however,  peculiar  to  these  parts,  for  whenever 
the  same  kind  of  fluid  is  applied  to  a scratch  on  the 
hand,  finger,  lip,  or  nipple,  the  same  consequence  will 
follow.  There  can  be  no  doubt  but  that  the  slightest 
abrasion  possible,  or  breach  of  the  cuticle,  is  sufficient 
to  give  a speedy  admission  to  this  destructive  poison. 
A chancre  makes  its  appearance  with  a slight  inflam- 
mation which  afterward  ulcerates,  or  there  arises  a 
small  pimple  or  pustule  filled  with  a transparent  fluid, 
which  soon  breaks  and  forms  into  a spreading  ulcer. 
The  period  at  which  it  makes  its  appearance  after  in- 
fection is  very  various,  being  most  commonly  in  five  or 
six  days,  but  in  some  cases  not  till  after  the  expiration 
of  as  many  weeks.  There  is  both  a local  and  general 
predisposition  to  chancres:  Jews  and  Mahommedans, 
from  the  constant  exposure  of  the  glans  and  loss  of  (he 
prepuce,  have  the  cuticle  of  the  glans  penis  of  much 
firmer  texture  than  those  who  have  not  been  circum- 
cised ; and  they  are,  from  this  circumstance,  much  less 
subject  to  chancres  than  the  rest  of  mankind.  For  the 
same  reason  they  who,  from  the  shortness  of  the  pre- 
puce, generally  keep  the  glans  uncovered,  are  not  so 
liable  to  the  diseases  as  tuose  who  have  long  narrow 
preputia ; for  persons  thus  formed  constantly  keep  the 
surface  of  the  glans  and  prepuce  moist  and  tender, 


SYP 

and  almost  at  every  cohabitation  are  liable  to  abrasions 
and  to  excoriations. 

There  is  an  intermediate  state  of  the  venereal  dis- 
ease between  a local  and  constitutional  affection,  which 
arises  from  the  absorption  of  venereal  matter  front 
'some  surface  to  which  it  has  been  applied.  The  gl  ands 
situated  nearest  the  parts  thus  affected  are  apt  to  be 
come  swelled  and  inflamed,  so  as  to  give  rise  to  what 
is  termed  bubo ; and  the  parts  of  generation  usually 
coming  first  in  contact  with  the  matter,  so  the  glands 
in  the  groin  generally  afford  this  particular  symptom. 
In  most  cases  the  venereal  virus  is  absorbed  from  a 
chancre  or  an  ulcer  in  the  urethra;  but  instances  have 
occurred  where  a bubo  has  arisen  without  either  go- 
norrhoea or  any  kind  of  ulceration,  and  where  the  mat  ■ 
ter  appears  to  have  been  absorbed,  without  any  erosion 
of  the  skin  or  mucous  membrane. 

A bubo  comes  on  with  pain  in  the  groin  accompa- 
nied with  some  degree  of  hardness  and  swelling,  and 
is  at  first  about  the  size  of  a kidney  bean,  but  continu- 
ing to  increase,  it  at  length  becomes  as  large  as  an  egg, 
occasions  the  person  to  experience  some  difficulty  in 
walking,  and  is  attended  with  a pulsation  and  throb- 
bing in  the  tumour,  and  a great  redness  of  the  skin. 
In  some  cases  the  suppuration  is  quickly  completed,  in 
others  it  goes  on  very  slow,  and  in  others  again  the  in- 
flammatory appearances  go  off  without  any  formation 
of  pus.  In  a few  instances  the  glans  have  been  known 
to  become  scirrhous.  The  following  are  the  charac- 
teristics of  a venereal  bubo.  The  swelling  is  usually 
confined  to  one  gland,  the  colour  of  the  skin  where  in- 
flammation prevails  is  of  a florid  red,  the  pain  is  very 
acute,  the  progress  from  inflammation  to  suppuration 
and  ulceration  is  generally  very  rapid,  the  suppuration  is 
large  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  gland,  and  there 
is  only  one  abscess. 

A bubo  is  never  attended  with  danger,  where  the  in- 
flamed.glaud  proceeds  on  regularly  to  suppuration,  but 
in  particular  cases  it  acquires  an  indolence  after  coming 
to  a certain  length,  arising  from  a scrofulous  taint,  or 
by  being  combined  with  erysipelas  it  terminates  in 
gangrene,  and  occasions  a great  loss  of  substance. 
This  termination  is,  however,  more  frequently  met  with 
in  hospitals  than  in  private  practice,  and  may  partly  be 
attributed  to  the  contaminated  state  of  the  air  of  the 
wards  wherein  venereal  patients  are  lodged. 

A constitutional  taint  is  the  third  form  under  which 
it  has  been  mentioned,  that  the  venereal  poison  is  apt 
to  show  itself,  and  which  always  arises  in  consequence 
of  the  matter  being  absorbed  and  carried  into  the  circu- 
lating mass  of  fluids.  The  absorption  of  it  may,  how- 
ever, take  place  in  three  ways  : 

1st,  It  may  be  carried  into  the  circulation,  without 
producing  any  evident  local  effect  on  the  part  to  which 
it  was  first  applied. 

2dly,  It  may  take  place  in  consequence  of  some  local 
affection,  such  as  either  gonorrhoea,  chancre,  or  bubo. 
And, 

3dly,  It  may  ensue  from  an  application  of  the  matter 
to  a common  sore  or  wound,  simiiar  to  what  happens  in 
inoculating  for  the  small-pox. 

The  most  general  way,  however,  in  which  a consti- 
tutional taint  is  produced,  is  by  an  absorption  of  the 
matter,  either  from  a chancre  or  a bubo.  . 

When  venereal  matter  gets  into  the  system,  some 
symptoms  of  it  may  often  be  observed  in  the  course  of 
sLx  or  eight  weeks,  or  probably  sooner ; but  in  some 
cases,  it  will  continue  in  the  circulating  mass  of  fluids 
for  many  months  before  any  visible  signs  of  its  effects 
are  produced.  The  system  being  completely  contami- 
nated, it  then  occasions  many  local  effects  in  different 
parts  of  the  body,  and  shows  itself  under  a variety  of 
forms,  many  of  which  put  on  the  appearance  of  a dis- 
tinct disease.  We  may  presume  that  this  variety  de- 
pends wholly  on  the  difference  of  constitution,  the 
different  kind  of  paas  affected,  and  the  different  state 
these  parts  were  in  at  the  time  the  matter  or  poison  was 
applied. 

The  first  symptoms  usually  show  themselves  on  the 
skin  and  in  the  mouth  or  throat.  When  on  the  skin, 
reddish  and  brownish  spots  appear  here  and  there  on 
the  surface,  and  eruptions  of  a copper  colour  are  dis- 
persed over  different  parts  of  the  body,  on  the  top  of 
which  there  soon  forms  a thick  scurf  or  scale.  This 
scurf  falls  off  after  a short  time,  and  is  succeeded  by 
another,  and  the  same  happening  several  times,  and  at 
length  casting  off  deep  scabs,  an  ulcer  is  formed  which 


SYR 


SYR 


discharges  an  acrid  foetid  matter.  When  the  matter  is 
secreted  in  the  glands  of  the  throat  and  mouth,  the 
tongue  will  often  be  affected  so  as  to  occasion  a thick- 
ness of  speech,  and  the  tonsils,  palate,  and  uvula  will 
become  ulcerated  so  as  to  produce  a soreness  and  diffi- 
culty of  swallowing,  and  likewise  a hoarseness  in  the 
voice.  In  a venereal  ulcer  of  the  tonsil,  a portion  of  it 
seems  as  if  it  was  dug  out ; it  is,  moreover,  very  foul, 
and  has  a thick,  white  matter  adhering  to  it,  which 
cannot  be  washed  pff.  By  these  characteristic  marks 
it  may,  in  general,  readily  be  distinguished  from  any 
other  species  of  ulceration  in  these  parts. 

If  the  disease  affects  the  eyes,  obstinate  inflamma- 
tion, and  sometimes  ulceration,  will  also  attack  these 
organs. 

The  matter  sometimes  falls  on  deep-seated  parts, 
such  as  the  tendons,  ligaments,  and  periosteum,  and 
occasions  hard,  painful  swellings  to  arise,  known  by 
the  name  of  nodes. 

When  the  disease  is  suffered  to  take  its  own  course, 
and  not  counteracted  by  proper  remedies,  the  patient 
will,  in  the  course  of  time,  be  afflicted  with  severe 
pains,  but  more  particularly  in  the  night-time ; his 
countenance  will  become  sallow,  his  hair  will  fall  off, 
he  will  lose  his  appetite,  strength,  and  flesh,  his  rest 
will  be  much  disturbed  by  night,  and  a small  fever  of 
the  hectic  kind  will  arise.  The  ulcers  in  the  mouth  and 
throat  being  likewise  suffered  to  spread,  and  to  occa- 
sion a caries  of  the  bones  of  the  palate,  an  opening  will 
be  made  from  the  mouth  of  the  nose ; and  the  carti- 
lages and  bones  of  the  nose  being  at  length  corroded 
away,  this  will  sink  on  a level  with  the  face.  Some 
constitutions  will  bear  up  for  a considerable  time 
against  the  disease,  while  others  again  will  soon  sink 
under  a general  weakness  and  irritation  produced  by 
it.  If  the  disorder  is  recent,  and  the  constitution  not 
impaired  by  other  diseases,  a perfect  cure  may  easily 
be  affected  ; but  where  it  is  of  long  standing,  and  ac- 
companied with  the  symptoms  of  irritation  which  have 
been  mentioned,  the  cure  will  prove  tedious,  and  in 
many  cases  uncertain,  as  the  constitution  and  strength 
of  the  patient  may  not  admit  of  his  going  through  a 
course  of  medicine  sufficient  to  destroy  the  poison  ; or 
his  health  may  be  in  such  a state,  as  that  only  a very 
small  quantity  of  mercury  can  be  administered  even  at 
considerable  irrtervals. 

The  general  appearances  to  be  observed  on  dissec- 
tion of  those  who  die  of  lues,  are,  caries  of  the  bones, 
but  more  particularly  those  of  the  cranium,  often  com- 
municating ulceration  to  the  brain  itself,  together  with 
enlargements  and  indurations  of  the  lymphatic  glands, 
scirrhus  of  several  of  the  organs,  particularly  the 
liver  and  lungs,  and  exostoses  of  many  of  the  hardest 
bones. 

Syphilis  indica.  The  yaws. 

Syphilis  polonica.  A variety  of  venereal  disease. 

SyrijE  oleum.  A fragrant  essential  oil,  obtained 
by  distilling  th§  canary  balsam-plant,  or  moldavica. 

Syrian  herb  mastich.  See  Teucrium  mar  am. 

SYRI'GMUS.  See  Paracusis. 

SYRI'NGA.  (From  ovpiy%,  a pipe:  so  called  be- 
cause from  its  branches  pipes  were  made  after  the 
removal  of  the  pith.)  The  pipe-tree. 

SYRI'NGMOS.  See  Paracusis. 

Syringo'tomum.  (From  crvpiy^,  a fistula,  and 
repvi i),  to  cut.)  An  instrument  to  cut  fistulas. 

SY'RINX.  (A  Hebrew  word.)  A pipe.  A syringe. 
A fistula. 

Syrmai'smus.  (From  <™ppa«$a>,  to  evacuate.)  A 
gentle  evacuation  by  vomit  or  stool. 

SYRUP.  See  Syrupus. 

Syrup  of  ginger.  See  Syrupus  zingiberis. 

Syrup  of  lemon.  See  Syrupus  limonum. 

Syrup  of  marsh-mallows.  See  Syrupus  althcce . 

Syrup  of  mulberry.  See  Syrupus  mori. 

Syrup  of  orange.  See  Syrupus  aurantii. ' 

Syrup  of  poppy.  See  Syrupus  papaveris. 

Syrup  of  red  poppy.  See  Syrupus  rheeadoe. 

Syrup  of  roses.  See  Syrupus  rosae. 

Syrup  of  saffron.  See  Syrupus  croci. 

Syrup  of  senna.  See  Syrupus  senna. 

Syrup  of  Tolu.  See  Syrupus  tolutanus. 

SYRUPUS.  (Serab,  a potion,  Arabian.)  The  name 
syrup  is  given  to  sugar  dissolved  in  water;  and  in  the 
present  pharmacopoeia  this  is  termed  simple  syrup.  See 
Syrupus  simplex. 

Syrups  are  generally  made  with  the  juice  of  vegeta- 


bles or  fruits,  or  by  adding  vegetable  extracts  or  other 
substances.  To  keep  syrups  without  fermenting,  it  is 
necessary  that  their  temperature  should  be  attended 
to,  and  kept  as  near  55°  as  possible.  A good  cellar  will 
answer  this  purpose,  for  there  are  few  summers  in 
which  the  temperature  of  such  a place  rises  to  60°. 

Syrupus  aceti.  Sugar  and  vinegar.  A refrige- 
rating syrup.  See  Oxymel. 

Syrupus  altheas.  Syrup  of  marsh-mallow.  Sy- 
rupus ex  althcea.  Syrupus  de  althcea.  Take  of  the 
fresh  root  of  marsh-mallow,  bruised,  half  a pound  ; 
refined  sugar,  two  pounds ; water,  a gallon.  Boil  down 
the  water  with  the  marsh-mallow-root  to  half,  and 
press  out  the  liquor  when  cold.  Set  it  by  for  24  hours, 
that  the  feculencies  may  subside ; then  pour  off  the 
liquor,  and  having  added  the  sugar,  boil  it  down  to  a 
proper  consistence.  An  emollient  and  demulcent; 
mostly  given  to  allay  tickling  coughs,  hoarseness,  &c. 
in  conjunction  with  other  remedies. 

Syrupus  aurantii.  Syrup  of  orange.  Syrupus 
corticis  aurantii.  Syrupus  e corticibus  aurantiorum. 
Syrupus  de  cortice  aurantiorum.  Take  of  fresh  orange- 
peel,  two  ounces;  boiling  water,  a pint;  refined  sugar, 
three  pounds.  Macerate  the  orange-peel  in  the  water 
for  12  hours  in  a covered  vessel ; then  pour  off  the 
liquor,  and  add  the  sugar.  A pleasant  bitter  and  sto- 
machic. 

Syrupus  caryophylli  rubri.  A warm  and  sti- 
mulating syrup. 

Syrupus  colchici.  An  acrid  and  diuretic  com- 
pound given  in  dropsies. 

Syrupus  corticis  aurantii.  See  Syrupus  au- 
rantii. 

Syrupus  croci.  Syrup  of  saffron.  Take  of  saf- 
fron, an  ounce  ; boiling  water,  a pound  ; refined  sugar, 
two  pounds  and  a half.  Macerate  the  saffron  in  the 
water  for  12  hours  in  a covered  vessel,  then  strain  the 
liquor,  and  add  the  sugar.  This  imparts  a beautiful 
colour  to  liquids,  and  is  sometimes  employed  as  a cor- 
dial. Among  the  vulgar,  syrup  of  saffron  is  in  high 
esteem  in  measles,  small-pox,  &c. 

Syrupus  limonum.  Syrup  of  lemon.  Syrupus 
sued  limonis.  Syrupus  e succo  limonum.  Syrupus  c 
succo  citrorum.  Take  of  lemon-juice,  strained,  a pint ; 
refined  sugar,  two  pounds.  Dissolve  the  sugar  in  the 
lemon-juice  in  the  manner  directed  for  simple  syrup. 
A very  pleasant,  cooling,  and*acid  syrup  which  may  be 
exhibited  with  advantage,  in  febrile  and  bilious  affec- 
tions. 

Syrupus  mori.  Syrup  of  mulberry.  Syrupus 
mororum.  Take  of  mulberry-juice,  strained,  a pint; 
refined  sugar,  two  pounds.  Dissolve  the  sugar  in  the 
mulberry-juice  in  the  manner  directed  for  simple 
syrup.  Syrup  of  mulberries  is  very  grateful  and  ape- 
rient, and  may  be  given  with  such  intentions  to  chil- 
dren. 

Syrupus  papaveris.  Syrupus  papaveris  albi.  Sy- 
rupus e meconio.  Syrupus  de  meconio , sivediacodium. 
Take  of  capsules  of  white  poppy,  dried  and  bruised, 
the  seeds  being  separated,  14  ounces ; refined  sugar, 
two  pounds ; boiling  water,  two  gallons  and  a half. 
Macerate  the  capsules  in  the  water  for  24  hours,  then 
boil  it  down  by  means  of  a water-bath  to  one  gallon, 
and  press  out  the  liquor  strongly.  Boil  down  the  liquor 
again,  after  being  strained,  to  two  pints,  and  strain  it 
while  hot.  Set  it  by  for  12  hours,  that  the  feculencies 
may  subside : then  boil  down  the  clear  liquor  to  a pint, 
and  add  the  sugar  in  the  manner  directed  for  simple 
syrup.  It  should  be  kept  in  stone  bottles,  and  in  a cel- 
lar. A useful  anodyne  preparation,  which  may  be 
added  with  advantage  to  a vast  variety  of  medicines 
against  diseases  of  the  bowels,  coughs,  &c. 

Syrupus  papaveris  erratici.  See  Syrupus  rhee- 
ados. 

Syrupus  rhamni.  Syrup  of  buckthorn.  Take  of 
the  fresh  juice  of  buckthorn-berries,  four  pints;  ginger- 
root,  sliced,  allspice,  powdered,  of  each  half  an  ounce; 
refined  sugar,  three  pounds  and  a half.  Set  by  the 
juice  for  three  days,  that  the  feculencies  may  subside, 
and  strain.  To  a pint  of  the  clear  juice  add  the  ginger 
and  allspice  ; then  macerate  in  a gentle  heat  four  hours, 
and  strain  ; boil  down  what  remains  to  one  pint  and  a 
half,  mix  the  liquors,  and  add  the  sugar  in  the  manner 
directed  for  simple  syrup. 

This  preparation,  in  doses  of  three  or  four  spoonfuls, 
operates  as  a brisk  cathartic.  The  principal  inconve- 
nience attending  it  is,  that  it  is  very  unpleasant,  and 

333 


TAB 


occasions  a thirst  and  dryness  of  the  mouth  and  fauces, 
and  sometimes  violent  gripes.  These  effects  may  be 
prevented  by  drinking  liberally  of  water-gruel,  or  other 
warm  liquids,  during  the  operation. 

Syrupus  rh<eados.  Syrupus  papaveris  erratici, 
Srjrupus  de  papavere  erratico.  Syrup  of  red-poppy. 
Take  of  red-poppy  petals,  fresh,  a pound;  boiling 
water,  a pint  and  two  fluid  ounces ; refined  sugar,  two 
pounds  and  a half.  Having  heated  the  water  in  a 
water-bath,  add  gradually  the  red-poppy  petals,  fre- 
quently stirring  them  ; then  having  removed  the  vessel, 
macerate  for  twelve  hours ; next  press  out  the  liquor, 
and  set  it  by  to  settle  ; lastly,  add  the  sugar  as  directed 
for  simple  syrup.  This  is  a very  mild  anodyne,  and 
used  more  for  the  colour,  than  for  its  medical  pro- 
perties. 

SyRurus  ribis  nigri.  Syrup  of  black  currants. 
Aperient  and  diuretic  qualities  are  attributed  to  this 
preparation. 

Syrupus  ros*.  Syrup  of  roses.  Syrupus  r os  arum 
solutivus.  Syrupus  erosis  siccis.  Takeofdamask-rose 
petals,  dried,  seven  ounces  ; refined  sugar,  six  pounds ; 
boiling  water,  four  pints.  Macerate  the  rose-pet  als  in  the 
water  for  twelve  hours,  and  strain  ; then  evaporate  the 
strained  liquor,  by  means  of  a water-bath,  to  two  pints 
and  a half ; then  add  the  sugar  in  the  manner  described 
for  simple  syrup.  A useful  laxative  for  children. 
From  3j.  to  ^ss. 

Syrupus  rubi  id*i.  Syrup  of  raspberry.  A plea- 
sant aperient  syrup  for  children. 

Syrupus  scilliticus.  Expectorant  and  diuretic. 
See  Oxymel  scillce. 

Syrupus  senn*.  Syrup  of  senna.  Take  of  senna- 
leaves,  two  ounces ; fennel-seed,  bruised,  an  ounce ; 
manna,  three  ounces  ; refined  sugar,  a pound  ; water, 
boiling,  a pint.  Macerate  the  senna-leaves  and  fennel- 
seeds  in  the  water  for  an  hour,  with  a gentle  heat ; 
strain  the  liquor,  and  mix  with  it  the  manna  and  su- 
gar ; then  boil  to  the  proper  consistence.  A useful 
purgative  for  children. 

Syrupus  simplex.  Syrupus.  Simple  syrup.  Take 
of  refined  sugar,  two  pounds  and  a half ; water,  a pint. 
Dissolve  the  sugar  in  the  water  in  a water-bath,  then 
set  it  aside  for  twenty-four  hours ; take  off  the  scum  ; 


TAL 

and  if  there  be  any  feculencies,  pour  off  the  clear 
liquor  from  them. 

Syrupus  toluntanus.  Syrup  of  Tolu.  Take  of 
balsam  of  Tolu,  an  ounce  ; water,  boiling,  a pint ; re- 
fined sugar,  two  pounds.  Boil  the  balsam  in  the  water 
half  an  hour  in  a covered  vessel,  occasionally  stirring 
it ; strain  the  liquor  when  it  is  cold,  and  then  add  the 
sugar  in  the  manner  directed  for  simple  syrup.  A use- 
ful balsamic  syrup,  calculated  to  allay  tickling  coughs 
and  hoarsenesses. 

Syrupus  viol*.  A pleasant  laxative  for  young 
children. 

Syrupus  zingiberis.  Syrup  of  ginger.  Take  of 
ginger-root,  sliced,  two  ounces  ; water,  boiling,  a pint ; 
refined  sugar,  two  pounds.  Macerate  the  ginger-root 
in  the  water  for  twenty-four  hours,  and  strain  ; then 
add  the  sugar  in  the  manner  directed  for  simple  syrup. 
A carminative  and  stomachic  syrup.  Dose  from  one 
to  three  drachms. 

SYSPASIA.  (From  avanaw , contraho , convello.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  diseases  in  Good’s  Nosology. 
Class,  Neurotica ; Order,  Systatica.  Comatose  spasm. 
It  has  three  species,  viz.  Syspasia  convulsio , hysteria , 
epilepsia. 

SYSSARCO'SIS.  (From  avv,  and  aapl,  flesh.)  A 
species  of  union  of  bones,  in  which  one  bone  is  united 
to  another  by  means  of  an  intervening  muscle.  In 
this  manner  the  os  hyoides  is  connected  with  the  ster- 
i mun  and  other  parts. 

SYSTATICA.  (From  avviarr/pi,  congredior,  con- 
socio.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  diseases  in  Class 
Neurotica,  of  Good’s  Nosology.  Diseases  affecting 
several,  or  all  the  sensorial  powers  simultaneously.  Its 
genera  are,  Jigrypnia,  Dysplionia,  Antipathia,  Ce- 
phalcsa,  Dinus , Syncope,  Syspasia,  Caries. 

System , absorbent.  See  Absorbents  and  Lymphatics. 

System , genital.  The  parts  of  generation. 

System , nervous.  See  Nerve. 

System  of  plants.  See  Plants. 

System , vascular.  The  arteries  and  veins. 

SY'STOLE.  (From  tnjg-eAAw,  to  contract.)  The 
contraction  of  the  heart. 

SYSTREMMA.  (From  owrpe^w,  contorquco,  to 
wind  about,  or  twist.)  The  cramp. 


T 


fSl-BANDAGE.  A bandage  so  named  from  its 
figure.  It  is  principally  used  for  supporting  the  dress- 
ings, after  the  operation  for  fistula  in  ano,  in  diseases 
of  the  perinaeum,  and  those  of  the  groins,  anus,  &c. 

TABA'CUM.  (From  Tobago , the  island  from 
whence  it  was  first  brought.)  Tobacco.  See  Nico- 
tiana. 

TABASHEER.  The  silica  found  in  the  hollow 
stem  of  the  bamboo  cane  is  so  called.  Its  optical  pro- 
perties are  peculiar. 

TABE'LLA.  (Diminutive  of  tabula , a table.)  A 
lozenge. 

TA'BES.  ( Tabes , is,  f. ; from  tabesco,  to  consume 
or  pine  away.)  A wasting  of  the  body.  A genus  of 
disease  in  the  Class,  Cachexies;  and  Order,  Marcores, 
of  Cullen  ; characterized  by  emaciation  and  weakness, 
attended  with  hectic  fever,  but  without  any  cough  or 
spitting,  which  last  symptoms  distinguish  it  from 
phthisis.  It  has  three  species : 1.  Tabes  purulenta, 
from  an  ulcerous  discharge:  2.  Tabes  scrofulosa, 

from  a scrofulous  habit:  3.  Tabes  venenata , from 

poison.  See  Atrophy. 

Tabes  coxaria.  A wasting  of  the  thigli  and  leg 
from  an  abscess,  or  other  cause  in  the  hip. 

Tabes  dorsalis.  Lordosis.  A wasting  of  the 
body,  attended  at  first  with  pain  in  the  back  or  loins, 
and  afterward  also  in  the  neck  and  head,  caused  by  a 
too  early  or  a too  frequent  use  of  venery.  Dr.  Cullen 
makes  it  a variety  of  atrophia  inanitorum.  Hippocrates 
calls  it  tabes  ossis. 

Tabes  ossis  sacri.  See  Tabes  dorsalis. 

Tabes  pulmonalis.  See  Phthisis. 

Tabes  renalis.  A wasting  away  of  the  body  from 
an  abscess  of  the  kidney. 

TABULAR  SPAR.  Table  spar.  Schaalstein  of 
334 


Werner.  Prismatic  augite  of  Jameson.  A mineral 
of  a grayish  white  colour,  found  in  primitive  rocks  at 
Orawicza. 

TACAMAHACCA.  (Indian.)  See  Fagara  oc- 

tandra. 

TA'CTUS.  See  Touch. 

TiE'DA.  (A«£<5a ; from  Saw,  to  bum.)  A torch.  A 
species  of  pine  which  burns  like  a torch.  A medicated 
torch  for  fumigations. 

TiE'NIA.  (Tama,  a Hebrew  word,  signifying  a 
fillet : the  name  of  a worm,  from  its  resemblance  to  a 
fillet  or  tape.)  The  tape-worm.  A genus  of  intestinal 
worms;  characterized  by  a long,  flat,  and  jointed  body. 
See  Worms. 

TAIL.  See  Cauda. 

TALC.  See  Talcum. 

TA'LCUM.  (From  talk,  German.)  Talc.  Of  this 
mineral,  which  is  Jameson’s  sixth  subspecies  of  rhom- 
boidal  mica,  there  are  two  kinds.  1.  Common  talc,  of 
a greenish-white  colour,  greasy  feel,  breaks  into  curved 
plates  or  leaves,  occurs  in  beds  of  mica  slate,  and  clay 
slate,  in  several  parts  of  Scotland.  2.  Indurated  talc , 
or  talc  slate , of  a greenish-gray  colour,  found  in  Scot- 
land, and  abundantly  on  the  Continent.  It  is  used  by 
carpenters,  tailors,  hat  makers,  and  glaziers  for  draw- 
ing lines. 

Talc  is  composed  of  pure  magnesia  mixed  with  near 
twice  its  weight  of  silex  and  less  than  its  weight  of 
alumine.  The  greenish  foliaceous  Venice  talc  was  for- 
merly used  medicinally,  as  possessing  antacid  and  ape- 
rient qualities. 

Tallow.  See  Fat. 

TA'LPA.  (From  rv<f>\os,  blind.)  Talparia.  A 
mole.  Also,  a tumour  resembling  a mole  in  eating,  and 
creeping  under  the  skin. 


TAN 


TAR 


TA'LUS.  See  Astragalus 

TALCITE.  Nacrite  of  Jameson.  Earthly  talc  of 
Werner.  A greenish-white,  scaly  mineral  found  in 
the  mining  district  of  Freyberg. 

Tamalapa'tra.  The  Indian  leaf  Is  so  termed  by 
some  authors.  See  Laurus  cassia. 

TAMARIND.  See  Tamarindus. 

TAMARI'NDDS.  ( Tamarindus , i,  m. ; from  tamar, 
or  tamarindi,  which  is,  in  the  Arabian  language,  a sy- 
nonyme  of  the  dactyl  us  or  date.)  1.  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants.  Class,  Monadclphia ; Order,  Trian- 
dria.  The  tamarind-tree. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  tamarind.  See 
Tamarindus  indica. 

Tamarindus  indica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tamarind-tree.  Oxyphcenicon ; Siliqua  arabica ; Ba- 
lampulli ; Tamar  aa  zecla  ; oxyphasnicia ; Acacia  in- 
dica. The  pulp  of  the  tamarind,  with  the  seeds,  con- 
nected together  by  numerous  tough  strings  or  fibres, 
are  brought  to  us  freed  from  the  outer  shell,  and  com- 
monly preserved  in  syrup.  According  to  Long,  tama- 
rinds are  prepared  for  exportation  at  Jamaica,  in  the 
following  manner : “ The  fruit  or  pods  are  gathered  in 
June,  July,  and  August,  when  full  ripe,  which  is  known 
by  their  fragility  or  easy  breaking  on  small  pressure 
between  the  finger  and  thumb.  The  fruit  taken  out  of 
the  pod,  and  cleared  from  the  shelly  fragments,  is 
placed  in  layers  in  a cask,  and  boiling  syrup,  just  before 
it  begins  to  granulate,  is  poured  in,  till  the  cask  is  filled : 
the  syrup  pervades  every  part  quite  down  to  the  bot- 
tom, and,  when  cool,  the  cask  is  headed  for  sale.”  The 
tamarind  is  employed  as  a laxative,  and  for  abating 
thirst  or  heat  in  various  inflammatory  complaints,  and 
for  correcting  putrid  disorders  especially  of  a bilious  kind, 
in  which  the  cathartic,  antiseptic,  and  refrigerant  qua- 
lities of  the  fruit  have  been  found  equally  useful.  When 
intended  merely  as  a laxative,  it  may  be  of  advantage 
(Dr.  Woodville  observes,)  to  join  it  with  manna  or 
purgatives  of  a sweet  kind,  by  which  its  use  is  rendered 
safer  and  more  effectual.  Three  drachms  of  the  pulp 
are  usually  sufficient  to  open  the  body,  but  to  prove  mo- 
derately cathartic,  one  or  two  ounces  are  required.  It 
is  an  ingredient  in  the  confectio  cassia , and  confectio 
senna. 

TAMARI'SCUS.  See  Tamarix  gallica. 

TA'MARIX.  ( Tamarix , ids,  f. ; from  Tamarik, 
ahstersion,  Heb. : named  from  its  properties  of  cleans- 
ing and  purifying  the  blood.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia.  The 
tamarisk-tree. 

Tamarix  gallica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tamarisk- tree.  Tamariscus.  Tamarisk.  The  bark, 
wood,  and  leaves  of  this  tree,  were  formerly  employed 
medicinally,  though  seldom  used  at  present.  The  for- 
mer for  its  aperient  and  corroborant  virtues  in  obstruc- 
tions of  the  liver ; the  latter  in  icterus,  hremoptysis, 
and  some  affections  of  the  skin. 

TAME-POISON.  See  Asclepias  vincetoxicum. 

TANACE'TUM.  ( Tanacelum , i , n. ; corrupted  from 
tanasia , athanasia,  the  old  name  for  tansy.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system. 
Class,  Syngencsia  ; Order,  Polygamia  superjlua. 
Tansy. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  tansy.  See  Ta- 
nacetum  vulgare. 

Tanacetum  balsamita.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  officinal  alecost.  Balsamita  mas  ; Balsamita  ma- 
jor; Tanacetum  hortense;  Costus  hortorum.  Cost- 
mary,  or  alecost.  The  plant  which  bears  tiiis  name  in 
the  pharmacopoeias,  is  the  Tanacetum  balsamita ; 
foliis  ovatis , integris,  serratis,  of  Linnaeus.  A fra- 
grant smelling  herb,  somewhat  like  that  of  mint;  for- 
merly esteemed  as  a corroborant,  carminative,  and 
emmenagoguc. 

Tanacetum  hortense.  See  Balsamita  mas. 

Tanacetum  vulgare.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  tansy.  Tanasia;  Athanasia;  Parthe- 
nium  mas.  Tanacetum — foliis  bipinnatis  incicis  ser- 
ratis, of  Linnams.  The  leaves  and  flowers  of  tansy 
have  a strong,  not  very  disagreeable  smell,  and  a bitter 
somewhat  aromatic  taste.  The  virtues  oftansy  are  tonic, 
stomachic,  anthelmintic,  emmenagogue,  and  resolvent. 
It  has  been  much  used  as  a vermifuge  ; and  testimo- 
nies of  its  efficacy  are  given  by  many  respectable  phy- 
sicians. Not  only  the  leaves,  but  the  seeds  have  been 
employed  with  this  intention,  and  substituted  for  those 
of  santonicum.  We  are  told  by  l)r.  Clark,  that  in 


Scotland  tansy  was  found  to  be  of  great  service  In 
various  cases  of  gout ; and  Dr.  Cullen,  who  afterward 
was  informed  of  the  effect  it  had  produced  upon  those 
who  had  used  the  herb  for  this  purpose,  says,  “I  have 
known  several  who  have  taken  it  without  any  advan- 
tage, and  some  others  who  reported  that  they  had  been 
relieved  from  the  frequency  of  their  gout.”  Tansy  is 
also  recommended  in  the  hysteria,  especially  when 
this  disease  is  supposed  to  proceed  from  menstrual  ob- 
structions. 

This  plant  may  be  given  in  powder  to  the  quantity 
of  a drachm  or  more  for  a dose ; but  it  has  been  more 
commonly  taken  in  infusion,  or  drank  in  tea. 

TANA'SIA.  See  Tanacetum. 

TANNIN.  This,  which  is  one  of  the  immediate 
principles  of  vegetables,  was  first  distinguished  by  Se- 
guin  from  the  gallic  acid,  with  which  it  had  been  con- 
founded under  the  name  of  the  astringent  principle. 
He  gave  it  the  name  of  tannin,  from  its  use  in  the  tan 
ning  of  leather ; which  it  effects  by  its  characteristic 
property,  that  of  forming  with  gelatin  a tough  insoluble 
matter. 

It  may  be  obtained  from  vegetables  by  macerating 
them  in  cold  water ; and  precipitated  from  this  solution, 
which  contains  likewise  gallic  acid  and  extractive  mat- 
ter, by  liyperoxygenized  muriate  of  tin.  From  this  pre- 
cipitate, immediately  diffused  in  a large  quantity  of 
water,  the  oxide  of  tin  may  be  separated  by  sulphuret- 
ted hydrogen  gas,  leaving  the  tannin  in  solution. 

Professor  Proust  lias  since  recommended  another  me- 
thod, the  precipitation  of  a decoction  of  galls  by  pow- 
dered carbonate  of  potassa,  washing  well  the  greenish- 
gray  flakes  that  fall  down  with  cold  water,  and  drying 
them  in  a stove.  The  precipitate  grows  brown  in  the 
air,  becomes  brittle  and  shining  like  a resin,  and  yet 
remains  soluble  in  hot  water.  The  tannin  in  this  state, 
he  says,  is  very  pure. 

Sir  H.  Davy,  after  making  several  experiments  on 
different  methods  of  ascertaining  the  quantity  of  tannin 
in  astringent  infusions,  prefers  for  this  purpose  the  com- 
mon process  of  precipitating  the  tannin  by  gelatin ; but 
he  remarks,  that  the  tannin  of  different  vegetables 
requires  different  proportions  of  gelatin  for  its  satura- 
tion ; and  that  the  quantity  of  precipitate  obtained  is 
influenced  by  the  degree  in  which  the  solutions  are  con 
centrated. 

Chenevix  observed,  that  coffee-berries  acquired  by 
roasting  the  property  of  precipitating  gelatin;  and 
Hatchett  has  made  a number  of  experiments,  which 
show  that  an  artificial  tannin,  or  substance  having  its 
chief  property,  may  be  formed,  by  treating  with  nitric 
acid  matters  containing  charcoal.  It  is  remarkable  that 
this  tannin,  when  prepared  from  vegetable  substances, 
as  dry  charcoal  of  wood,  yields,  on  combustion,  pro- 
ducts analagous  to  those  of  animal  matters.  From  his 
experiments  it  would  seem,  that  tannin  is,  in  reality, 
carbonaceous  matter  combined  with  oxygen ; and  the 
difference  in  the  proportion  of  oxygen  may  occasion  the 
differences  in  the  tannin  procured  from  different  sub- 
stances, that  from  catechu  appearing  to  contain  most. 

Bouillon  Lagrange  asserts,  that  tannin,  by  absorbing 
oxygen,  is  converted  into  gallic  acid. 

It  is  not  an  unfrequent  practice,  to  administer  medi- 
cines containing  tannin  in  cases  of  debility,  and  at  the 
same  time  to  prescribe  gelatinous  food  as  nutritious. 
But  this  is  evidently  improper,  as  the  tannin,  from 
its  chemical  properties,  must  render  the  gelatin  indi- 
gestible. 

TANSY.  See  Tanacetum. 

Tansy,  wild.  See  Potentilla. 

TANTALUM.  The  metal,  an  account  of  which  is 
given  under  the  article  columbic  acid.  See  Columbic 
acid  and  Columbium. 

TAPE- WORM.  See  Tcenia. 

TAPIOCA.  See  Jatropha  rnanihot. 

TAPPING.  See  Paracentesis. 

Ta'psus  barbatus.  See  Verbascum. 

TAR.  See  Pinus  sylvestris. 

Tar,  Barbadoes . See  Petroleum  barbadense. 

Tar-water.  A once  celebrated  remedy,  but  now 
neglected  more  than  it  deserves.  It  is  made  by  infusing 
tar  in  water,  stirring  it  from  time  to  time,  and  lastly 
pouring  otf  the  clear  liquor  now  impregnated  with  the 
colour  and  virtues  of  the  tar.  It  is  drunk  in  many 
chronic  affections,  particularly  of  the  lungs. 

TARANTI'SMUS.  (From  tarantula , the  animal, 
the  bite  of  which  is  supposed  to  be  cured  only  by  music.) 

333 


TAR 


TAR 

The  desire  of  dancing  which  is  produced  by  the  bite  of 
the  tarantula. 

TARA'NTULA.  (From  Taranta,  a city  in  Naples, 
where  they  abound.)  A kind  of  venomous  spider,  whose 
bite  is  said  to  be  cured  by  music. 

TAR  A'X  ACUM.  (From  r apaaato,  to  alter  or  change : 
because  it  alters  the  state  of  the  blood.)  See  Leon- 
todon. 

TARA'XIS.  (From  rapaaaio,  to  disturb.)  A slight 
inflammation  of  the  eye. 

Ta'rchon  sylvestris.  See  Achillea  ptarmica. 

TARE.  See  Ervum. 

TARRAS.  Terras.  A volcanic  earth,  used  as  a 
cement. 

Tarsi  extensor  minor.  See  Plantaris. 

TA'RSUS.  Taptroj.  L The  instep,  or  that  part  of 
the  foot  which  is  between  the  leg  and  metatarsus  : it  is 
composed  of  seven  bones,  viz.  the  astragalus,  os  calcis, 
os  naviculare,  os  cuboides,  and  three  ossa  cuneiformia. 

2.  The  thin  cartilage  situated  at  the  edges  of  the  eye- 
lids to  preserve  their  firmness  and  shape. 

TARTAR.  See  Tartarian. 

Tartar  cream  of.  The  popular  name  of  the  pulve- 
rized supertartrate  of  potassa. 

Tartar , emetic.  See  Antimonium  tartarizatum. 

Tartar , oil  of.  See  Potassce  subcarbonatis  liquor. 

Tartar , regenerated.  See  Potassce  acetas. 

Tartar , salt  of.  See  Potassce  subcarbonas. 

Tartar , soluble.  See  Potassce  tartras. 

Tartar , spirit  of.  If  the  crystals  of  tartar  be  dis- 
tilled by  a strong  heat,  without  any  additional  body, 
they  furnish  an  empyreumatic  acid,  called  the  pyrotar- 
tareous  acid,  or  spirit  of  tartar,  and  a very  feetid  empy- 
reumatic  oil. 

Tartar , vitriolated.  See  Potassce  sulphas. 

TARTARIC  ACID.  A cidum  tartaric  um;  Sal  ess en- 
tiale  tartari ; Acidum  tartari  cssentiale.  Tartareous 
acid.  “ The  casks  in  which  some  kinds  of  wine  are 
kept  become  incrusted  with  a hard  substance,  tinged 
with  the  colouring  matter  of  the  wine,  and  otherwise 
impure,  which  has  long  been  known  by  the  name  of 
argal,  or  tartar,  and  distinguished  into  red  and  white 
according  to  its  colour.  This  being  purified  by  solution, 
filtration,  and  crystallization,  was  termed  cream , or  crys- 
tals of  tartar.  It  was  afterward  discovered,  that  it  con- 
sisted of  a peculiar  acid  combined  with  potassa ; and  the 
supposition  that  it  was  formed  during  the  fomentation  of 
the  wine,  was  disproved  by  Boerhaave,  Neuman,  and 
others,  who  showed  that  it  existed  ready  formed  in  the 
juice  of  the  grape.  It  has  likewise  been  found  in  other 
fruits,  particularly  before  they  are  too  ripe  ; and  in  the 
tamarind,  sumac,  balm,  carduus  benedictus,  and  the 
roots  of  restharrow,  germander,  and  sage.  The  sepa- 
ration of  tartaric  acid  from  this  acidulous  salt,  is  the 
first  discovery  of  Scheele  that  is  known.  He  saturated 
the  superfluous  acid,  by  adding  chalk  to  a solution  of 
the  supertartrate  in  boiling  water  as  long  as  any  effer- 
vescence ensued,  and  expelled  the  acid  from  the  pre- 
cipitated tartrate  of  lime  by  means  of  the  sulphuric. 
Or  four  parts  of  tartar  may  be  boiled  in  twenty  or 
twenty-four  of  water,  and  one  part  of  sulphuric  acid 
added  gradually.  By  continuing  the  boiling,  the  sul- 
phate of  potassa  will  fall  down.  When  the  liquor  is 
reduced  to  one-half,  it  is  to  be  filtered ; and  if  any  more 
sulphate  be  deposited  by  continuing  the  boiling,  the  fil- 
tering must  be  repeated.  When  no  more  is  thrown 
down,  the  liquor  is  to  be  evaporated  to  the  consistence 
of  a syrup  ; and  thus  crystals  of  tartaric  acid,  equal  to 
half  the  weight  of  the  tartar  employed,  will  be  ob- 
tained. 

The  tartaric  acid  may  be  procured  in  needly  or  lami- 
nated crystals,  by  evaporating  a solution  of  it.  Its  taste 
is  very  acid  and  agreeable,  so  that  it  may  supply  the 
place  of  lemon-juice.  It  is  very  soluble  in  water.  Burnt 
in  an  open  fire,  it  leaves  a coaly  residuum ; in  close 
vessels  it  gives  out  carbonic  acid  and  carburetted  hy- 
drogen gas.  By  distilling  nitric  acid  off  the  crystals, 
they  may  be  converted  into  oxalic  acid,  and  the  nitric 
acid  passes  to  the  state  of  nitrous. 

To  extract  the  whole  acid  from  tartar,  Thenard  re- 
commends, after  saturating  the  redundant  acid  with 
chalk,  to  add  muriate  of  lime  to  the  supernatant  neutral 
tartrate,  by  which  means  it  is  completely  decomposed. 
The  insoluble  tartrate  of  lime  being  washed  with  abun- 
dance of  water,  is  then  to  be  treated  with  three-fifths 
of  its  weight  of  stronc  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  previously 
with  five  parts  of  water.  But  Fourcroy’s  process,  as 


improved  by  Vauquelin,  seems  still  better.  Tartar  is 
treated  with  quicklime  and  boiling  water  in  the  pro- 
portion, by  the  theory  of  equivalents,  of  100  of  tartar  to 
.10  ot  dry  lime,  or  40  of  the  slaked.  A caustic  magma 
is  obtained,  which  must  be  evaporated  to  dryness, and 
gently  heated.  On  digesting  this  in  water,  a solution 
of  caustic  potassa  is  obtained,  while  tartrate  of  lime 
remains ; from  which  the  acid  may  be  separated  by  the 
equivalent  quantity  of  oil  of  vitriol. 

According  to  Berzelius,  tartaric  acid  is  a compound 
of  3.807  hydrogen  -j-  35.980  carbon  -f-  60.213  oxygen 
= 100 ; to  which  result  he  shows  that  of  Gay  Lussac 
and  Thenard  to  correspond,  when  allowance  is  made 
for  a certain  portion  of  water,  which  they  had  omitted 
to  estimate.  The  analysis  of  tartrate  of  lead,  gives 
8.384  for  the  acid  prime  equivalent ; and  it  may  be 
made  up  of  3 hydrogen  = 0.375  4.48 

4 carbon  = 3.000  35.82 

5 oxygen  = 5.000  59.70 


8.375  100.00 

The  crystallized  acid  is  a compound  of  8.375  acid  + 
1.125  water  = 9.5;  or,  in  100  parts,  88.15  acid  -j-  11.85 
water. 

The  tartrates , in  their  decomposition  by  fire,  comport 
themselves  like  all  the  other  vegetable  salts,  except 
that  those  with  excess  of  acid  yield  the  smell  of  caro- 
■ mel  when  heated,  and  afford  a certain  quantity  of  the 
pyrotartaric  acid.  All  the  soluble  neutral  tartrates 
form,  with  tartaric  acid,  bitartrates  of  sparing  solubili- 
ty ; while  all  the  insoluble  tartrates  may  be  dissolved 
in  an  excess  of  their  acid.  Hence,  by  pouring  gradually 
an  excess  of  acid  into  barytes,  strontites,  and  lime-wa- 
ters, the  precipitates  formed  at  first  cannot  fail  to  dis- 
appear ; while  those  obtained  by  an  excess  of  the  same 
acid,  added  to  concentrated  solutions  of  potassa,  soda, 
or  ammonia,  and  the  neutral  tartrates  of  these  bases,  as 
well  asof  magnesia  and  copper,  must  be  permanent.  The 
first  are  ahvays  flocculent ; the  second  always  crystal- 
line; that  of  copper  alone  is  in  a greenish-white  pow- 
der. It  likewise  follows,  that  the  greater  number  of 
acids  ought  to  disturb  the  solutions  of  the  alkaline  neu- 
tral tartrates,  because  they  transform  these  salts  into 
bitartrates;  and,  on  the  contrary,  they  ought  to  affect 
the  solution  of  the  neutral  insoluble  tartrates,  which 
indeed  always  happens,  unless  the  acid  cannot  dissolve 
the  base  of  the  tartrate.  The  order  of  apparent  affini- 
ties of  tartaric  acid  are,  lime,  barytes,  strontites,  potassa, 
soda,  ammonia,  and  magnesia. 

The  tartrates  of  potassa,  soda,  and  ammonia  are 
not  only  susceptible  of  combining  together,  but  also 
with  the  other  tartrates,  so  as  to  form  double , or  triple 
salts.  We  may  thus  easily  conceive  why  the  tartrates 
of  potassa,  soda,  and  ammonia  do  not  disturb  the  so- 
lutions of  iron  and  manganese;  and,  on  the  other 
hand,  disturb  the  solutions  of  the  salts  of  barytes, 
strontites,  lime,  and  lead.  In  the  first  case,  double,  salts 
are  formed,  however  small  a quantity  of  tartrate  shall 
have  been  employed;  in  the  second,  no  double  salt  is 
formed,  unless  the  tartrate  be  added  in  very  great 
excess. 

The  tartrates  of  lime  and  barytes  are  white,  pulve- 
rulent, and  insoluble. 

Tartrate  of  strontian,  formed  by  the  double  decom- 
position of  muriate  of  strontian  and  tartrate  of  po- 
lassa,  according  to  Vauquelin,  is  soluble,  crystalliza- 
ble,  and  consists  of  52.88  strontian,  and  47.12  acid. 

That  of  magnesia  forms  a gelatinous  or  gummy 
mass. 

Tartrate  of  potassa , tartarized  kali , and  vegetable 
salt , of  some,  formerly  called  soluble  tartar , because 
much  more  so  than  the  supertarlrate,  crystallizes  in 
oblong  squares,  bevelled  at  the  extremities.  It  has  a 
bitterish  taste,  and  is  decomposed  by  heat,  as  its  solu- 
tion is  even  by  standing  some  time.  It  is  used  as  a 
mild  purgative. 

The  supertartrate  of  potassa  is  much  used  as  a cool 
ing  and  gently  opening  medicine,  as  well  as  in  several 
chemical  and  pharmaceutical  preparations.  Dissolved 
in  water,  with  the  addition  of  a little  sugar,  and  a 
slice  or  two  of  lemon-peel,  it  forms  an  agreeable  cool- 
ing drink,  by  the  name  of  imperial : and  if  an  infusion 
of  green  balm  be  used,  instead  of  water,  it  makes  one 
of.the  pleasantest  liquors  of  the  kind  with  which  we 
are  acquainted.  Mixed  with  an  equal  weight  of  nitre, 
and  projected  into  a red-hot  crucible,  it  detonates,  and 


TAR 


TAS 


forms  the  white  flux ; treated  in  the  same  way,  with  , 
half  its  weight  of  nitre,  it  forms  the  black  flux;  and 
simply  mixed  with  nitre  in  various  proportions,  it  is 
called  raw  flux-  It  is  likewise  used  in  dying,  in  hat- 
making, in  gilding,  and  in  other  arts. 

The  blanching  of  the  crude  tartar  is  aided  by  boiling 
its  solution  with  one-twentieth  of  pipe-clay. 

According  to  the  analysis  of  Berzelius,  it  consists  of 
70.45  acid  -f-  24.8  potassa  + 4.75  water  = 100 ; or, 

2 primes  acid,  = 16.75  70.30 

1 potassa,  = 5.95  24.95 

1 water,  = 1.125  4.75 

23.825  100.00 


60  parts  of  water  dissolve  4 of  bitartrate,  at  a boiling 
heat;  and  only  1 at  60°  Fahr.  It  is  quite  insoluble  in 
alkohol. 

By  saturating  the  superfluous  acid,  in  this  supertar- 
trate, with  soda,  a triple  salt  is  formed,  which  crystal- 
lizes in  larger  regular  prisms  of  eight  nearly  equal 
sides,  of  a bitter  taste,  efflorescent,  and  soluble  in 
about  five  parts  of  water.  It  consists,  according  to 
Vauquelinj  of  54  parts  tartrate  of  potassa  and  46  tar- 
trate of  soda;  and  was  once  in  much  repute  as  a pur- 
gative, by  the  name  of  Rochelle  salt , or  Sel  de  Seignette. 

The  tartrate  of  soda  is  much  less  soluble  than  this 
triple  salt,  and  crystallizes  in  slender  needles  or  thin 
plates. 

The  tartrate  of  ammonia  is  a very  soluble,  bitter 
salt,  and  crystallizes  easily.  Its  solution  is  sponta- 
neously decomposable. 

This  too  forms,  with  tartrate  of  potassa,  a triple 
salt,  the  solution  of  which  yields,  by  cooling,  fine  pyra- 
midal or  prismatic  efflorescent  crystals.  Though  both 
the  neutral  salts  that  compose  it  are  bitter,  this  is  not, 
but  has  a cooling  taste. 

Take  of  the  supertartrate  of  potassa,  two  pounds 
and  a half ; three  gallons  of  boiling-hot  water ; one 
pound  of  prepared  chalk ; one  pound  of  sulphuric  acid. 
Boil  the  cream  of  tartar  in  two  gallons  of  the  water, 
and  gradually  throw  in  the  chalk,  until  all  efferves- 
cence ceases ; set  the  liquor  aside,  that  the  tartrate  of 
lime  may  subside;  pour  off  the  liquor,  and  wash  the 
tartrate  of  lime  repeatedly  with  distilled  water,  until  it 
is  tasteless.  The  pour  on  it  the  sulphuric  acid,  di 
luted  with  the  remaining  gallon  of  boiling  water,  and 
set  the  whole  aside  for  twenty-four  hours,  stirring  it 
well  now  and  then.  Strain  the  liquor,  and  evaporate 
in  a water-bath  until  crystals  form.  The  virtues  of 
this  acid  are  antiseptic,  refrigerant,  and  diuretic.  It  is 
used  in  acute  fevers,  scurvy^and  haemorrhage.” — Urc's 
Chem.  Diet. 

TARTARINE.  The  name  given  by  Kirwan  to  the 
vegetable  alkali. 

TA'RTARUM.  ( Tartarum , i,  n. ; from  rapjapos , 
infernal : because  it  is  the  sediment  or  dregs.)  Tartar. 
1.  The  concretion  which  fixes  to  the  inside  of  hogs- 
heads containing  wine.  It  is  alloyed  with  much  ex- 
tractive and  colouring  matter,  from  which  it  is  purified 
by  decoction  with  argillaceous  earths  and  subsequent 
crystallization.  By  this  means  it  becomes  perfectly 
white,  and  shoots  out  crystals  of  tartar,  consisting  of  a 
peculiar  acid  called  acid  of  tartar,  imperfectly  satu- 
rated with  potassa;  it  is  therefore  a supertartrate  of 
that  alkali,  which,  when  powdered,  is  the  cream  of 
tartar  of  the  shops.  Its  virtues  are  eccoprotic,  diuretic, 
and  refrigerant,  and  it  is  exhibited  in  abdominal  phys  j 
conia,  dropsy,  inflammatory  and  bilious  fevers,  dyspep- 
sia from  rancid  or  fat  substances,  bilious  diarrhoea 
and  colic,  haemorrhoids  and  obstipation. 

2.  A name  heretofore  given  to  many  officinal  prepa- 
rations, containing  the  acid  of  tartar;  but  in  conse- 
quence of  recent  changes  in  the  chemical  nomencla- 
ture, superseded  by  appellations  more  expressive  of 
the  respective  compositions. 

3.  The  name  of  the  concretion  which  so  frequently 
incrusts  the  teeth,  and  which  is  apparently  phosphate 
of  lime. 

Tartarum  emeticum.  See  Antimonium  tartari- 
zatum. 

Tartarum  reoeneratum.  See  Potassce  acetas. 

Tartarum  solubile.  See  Potassa:  tartras. 

Tartarus  ammoni®.  See  Tartras  ammonia:. 

Tartarus  chalybeatus.  See  Fenum  tartari- 
zatum. 


TARTRAS. 


( Tartras , atis , m 


the  tartaric  being 
F.  f f 


its  acid  base.)  A tartrate,  or  salt,  formed  by  the  com- 
bination of  tartaric  acid  with  salifiable  bases  ; as  tar- 
trate of  soda,  potassa,  &c. 

Tartras  amm*oni®.  Alkali  volatile  tartarizatum, 
of  Bergman.  Sal  ammoniacum  tartareum ; Tartarus 
ammonia.  A salt  composed  of  tartaric  acid  and  am- 
monia ; its  virtues  are  diaphoretic,  diuretic,  and  deob- 
struent. It  is  prescribed  in  fevers,  atonic  exanthe- 
mata, catarrh,  arthritic  and  rheumatic  arthrodynia, 
hysteric  spasms,  &c. 

Tartras  potassa.  See  Potassa  tartras. 

Tartras  potass®  acidulus.  Cream  of  tartar. 
See  Potassa  supertartras. 

Tartras  potass®  acidulus  ferratus.  Globuli 
martiales ; Tartarus  chalybeatus;  Mars  solubilis ; 
Ferrum  potabile.  Its  virtues  are  adstringeut.  It  is 
principally  used  externally  in  the  form  of  fomen- 
tations or  bath  in  contusions,  distortions,  and  lux- 
ations. 

Tartras  potass®  acidulus  stibiatus.  See^3n- 
timonium  tartavizatum. 

Tartras  sod®.  See  Soda  tartarizata. 

TASTE.  Gustus.  “ Savours  are  only  the  impres- 
sion of  certain  bodies  upon  the  organ  of  taste.  Bodies 
which  produce  it  are  called  sapid. 

It  has  been  supposed  that  the  degree  of  sapidity  of  a 
body  could  be  determined  by  that  of  its  solubility ; but 
certain  bodies,  which  are  insoluble,  have  a very  strong 
taste,  while  other  bodies  very  soluble  have  scarcely 
any.  The  sapidity  appears  to  bear  relation  to  the  che- 
mical nature  of  bodies,  and  to  the  peculiar  efforts 
which  they  produce  upon  the  animal  economy. 

Tastes  are  very  numerous,  and  very  variable.  There 
have  been  numerous  endeavours  made  to  class  them, 
though  without  complete  success ; they  are  better  un- 
derstood, however,  than  the  odours,  no  doubt  owing  to 
the  impressions  received  by  the  sense  of  taste  being 
less  fugitive  than  those  received  by  the  smell.  Thus 
we  are  sufficiently  understood,  when  we  speak  of  a 
body  having  a taste  that  is  bitter , acid , sour , sweet , &c. 

There  is  a distinction  of  tastes  which  is  sufficiently 
established,  it  being  founded  on  the  organization  : that 
of  agreeable  and  disagreeable.  Animals  establish  it 
instinctively.  This  is  the  most  important  distinction; 
for  those  things  which  have  an  agreeable  taste  are 
generally  useful  for  nutrition,  while  those  whose  sa- 
vour is  disagreeable,  are,  for  the  most  part,  hurtf  ul. 

Apparatus  of  taste. — The  tongue  is  the  principal 
organ  of*  taste  ; however,  the  lips,  the  internal  surface 
of  the  cheeks,  the  palate,  the  teeth,  the  velum  pendu- 
lum palati,  the  pharynx , oesophagus , and  even  the 
stomach,  are  susceptible  of  receiving  impressions  by 
the  contact  of  sapid  bodies. 

The  salivary  glands,  of  which  the  excretory  ducts 
open  into  the  mouth;  the  follicles  which  pour  into  it 
the  mucus , which  they  secrete,  have  a powerful  effect 
in  forming  the  taste.  Independently  of  the  mucous 
follicles  that  the  superior  surface  of  the  tongue  pre- 
sents, and  which  form  upon  it  fungous  papilla , there 
are  also  little  inequalities  seen,  one  sort  of  which,  very 
numerous,  are  called  villous  papilla ; the  others,  less 
numerous,  and  disposed  on  two  rows  on  the  sides  of 
the  tongue,  are  called  conical  papilla. 

All  the  nerves  with  which  those  parts  are  provided 
that  are  intended  to  receive  the  impressions  of  sapid 
bodies  may  be  considered  as  belonging  to  the  apparatus 
of  taste.  Thus  the  inferior  maxillary  nerves,  many 
branches  of  the  superior,  among  which  it  is  necessary 
to  notice  the  threads  which  proceed  from  the  spheno- 
palatine ganglion,  particularly  the  naso-palatine  nerve 
of  Scarpo,  the  nerve  of  the  ninth  pair,  glosso  pharyn- 
geus , appear  to  be  employed  in  the  exercise  of  taste. 

The  lingual  nerve  of  the  fifth  pair  is  that  which  ana- 
tomists consider  the  principal  nerve  of  taste  ; and  as  a 
reason  they  say  that  its  threads  are  continued  into  the 
villous  and  conical  papilla  of  the  tongue. 

Mechanism  of  taste. — For  the  full  exercise  of  taste, 
the  mucous  membrane  which  covers  the  organs  of 
it  must  be  perfectly  uninjured  ; it  must  be  covered  with 
mucous  fluid , and  the  saliva  must  flow  freely  in  the 
mouth.  When  the  mouth  becomesdry,  the  powers  of 
taste  cannot  be  excited. 

It  is  also  necessary  that  these  liquids  undergo  no 
change:  for  if  the  mucous  become  thick,  yellow,  and 
the  saliva  acid,  bitter,  &c.,  the  taste  will  be  exerted  but 
very  imperfectly. 

Some  authors  have  assured  us  that  the  papilla t or 

337 


TEA 


TEE 


the  tongue  become  really  erect  during  the  time  that  the 
taste  is  exerted.  This  assertion  I believe  to  be  entirely 
without  foundation. 

It  is  quite  enough  that  a body  be  in  contact  with  the 
organs  of  taste,  for  us  to  appreciate  its  savour  immedi- 
ately ; but  if  it  is  solid,  in  most  cases  it  is  necessary  to 
dissolve  in  the  saliva  to  be  tasted ; this  condition  is  not 
necessary  for  liquids  and  gases. 

There  appears  to  be  a certain  chemical  action  of 
sapid  bodies  upon  the  epidermis  of  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  mouth;  it  is  seen  evidently  at  least  in 
some,  as  vinegar,  the  mineral  acids,  a great  number  of 
salts,  &c.  In  these  ditferent  cases  the  colour  of  the 
epidermis  is  changed,  and  becomes  while,  yellow,  &c. 
By  the  6ame  causes,  like  effects  are  produced  upon 
dead  bodies.  Perhaps  to  this  sort  of  combination  may 
be  attributed  the  different  kinds  of  impressions  made 
by  sapid  bodies,  as  well  as  the  variable  duration  of 
those  impressions. 

Hitherto  no  one  has  accounted  for  the  faculty  pos- 
sessed by  the  teeth  of  being  strongly  influenced  by  cer- 
tain sapid  bodies.  According  to  the  researches  of 
Miel,  a distinguished  dentist  of  Paris,  this  effect  ought 
to  be  attributed  to  imbibition.  The  researches  of  Miel 
prove  that  the  teeth  imbibe  very  quickly  liquids  with 
which  they  are  placed  in  contact.  Different  parts  of 
the  mouth  appear  to  possess  different  degrees  of  sensi- 
bility for  sapid  bodies  ; for  they  act  sometimes  on  the 
tongue,  on  the  gums,  on  the  teeth  ; at  other  times  they 
have  an  exclusive  action  on  the  palate,  on  the  pharynx, 
&c.  Some  bodies  leave  their  taste  a long  time  in  the 
mouth ; these  are  particularly  the  aromatic  bodies. 
This  after-taste  is  sometimes  felt  in  the  whole  mouth, 
sometimes  only  in  one  part  of  it.  Bitter  bodies,  for 
example,  leave  an  impression  in  the  pharynx : acids 
upon  the  lips  and  teeth  : peppermint  leaves  an  impres- 
sion which  exists  both  in  the  mouth  and  pharynx. 

Tastes,  to  be  completely  known,  ought  to  remain 
some  time  in  the  mouth  ; when  they  traverse  it  rapidly, 
they  leave  scarcely  any  impression  ; for  this  reason  we 
swallow  quickly  those  bodies  which  are  disagreeable 
to  us;  on  the  contrary,  we  allow  those  that  have  an 
agreeable  savour  to  remain  a long  time  in  the  mouth. 

When  we  taste  a body  which  lias  a very  strong  and 
pertinacious  taste,  such  as  a vegetable  acid,  we  become 
insensible  to  others  which  are  feeble.  This  observation 
lias  been  found  valuable  in  medicine,  in  administering 
disagreeable  drugs  to  the  sick.  We  are  capable  of 
distinguishing  a number  of  tastes  at  the  same  time, 
as  also  their  different  degrees  of  intensity  ; this  is  used 
by  chemists,  tasters  of  wine,  &c.  By  this  means  we 
arrive  sometimes  at  a tolerably  exact  knowledge  of  the 
chemical  nature  of  bodies;  but  such  delicacy  of  taste 
is  not  acquired  until  after  long  practice. 

Is  the  lingual  nerve  that  which  is  essential  to  taste  ? 
Nothing  is  known  which  can  make  us  attribute  this 
property  entirely  to  it. 

The  choice  of  food  depends  entirely  on  the  taste ; 
joined  to  smell,  it  enables  us  to  distinguish  between 
substances  that  are  hurtful  and  those  that  are  useful. 
It  is  this  sense  which  gives  us  the  most  correct  know- 
ledge of  the  composition  of  chemical  bodies.” 

T A'XIS.  An  operation,  by  which  those  parts  which 
have  (fuitted  their  natural  situation  are  replaced  by  the 
hand  without  the  assistance  of  instruments,  as  in  re- 
ducing hernia,  &c. 

TEA.  See  Thea. 

TEAR.  Lachryma  The  limpid  fluid  secreted  by 
the  lachrymal  glands,  and  flowing  on  the  surface  of 
tlie  eyes. 

The  organ  which  secretes  this  liquid  is  the  lachrymal 
gland,  one  of  which  is  situated  in  the  external  canthus 
of  each  orbit,  and  emits  six  or  seven  excretory  ducts, 
which  open  on  the  internal  surface  of  the  upper  eyelid 
above  its  tarsus,  and  pour  forth  the  tears.  The  tears 
have  mixed  with  them  an  arterious  roscid  vapour, 
which  exhales  from  the  internal  surface  of  the  eyelids, 
and  external  of  the  tunica  conjunctiva,  into  the  eye. 
Perhaps  the  aqueous  humour  also  transudes  through 
the  pores  of  the  cornea  on  the  surface  of  the  eye.  ~A 
certain  part  of  this  aqueous  fluid  is  dissipated  in  the 
air ; but  the  greatest  part,  after  having  performed  its 
office,  is  propelled  by  the  orbicular  muscle,  which  so 
closely  constringes  the  eyelid  to  the  ball  of  the  eye  as 
to  leave  no  space  between,  unless  in  the  internal  angle, 
where  the  tears  are  collected.  From  this  collection 
the  tears  are  absorbed  by  the  orifices  of  the  puncta 
333 


lachrymalia ; from  thence  they  are  propelled  through 
the  lachrymal  canals,  into  the  lachrymal  sac,  and  flow 
through  the  ductus  nasalis  into  the  cavity  of  the  nos- 
trils, under  the  inferior  concha  nasalis.  The  lachry- 
mal sac  appears  to  be  formed  of  longitudinal  and 
transverse  muscular  fibres;  and  its  three  orifices  fur- 
nished with  small  sphincters,  as  the  spasmodic  contric- 
tion  of  the  puncta  lachrymalia  proves,  if  examined 
with  a probe. 

The  tears  have  no  smell  but  a saltish  taste,  as  people 
who  cry  perceive.  They  are  of  a transparent  colour 
and  aqueous  consistence. 

The  quantity.,  in  its  natural  state,  is  just  sufficient  to 
moisten  the  surface  of  the  eye  and  eyelids ; but  from 
sorrow,  or  any  kind  of  stimulus  applied  to  the  surface 
of  the  eye,  so  great  is  the  quantity  of  tears  secreted 
that  the  puncta  lachrymalia  are  unable  to  absorb  them 
Thus  the  greatest  part  runs  down  from  the  internal 
angle  of  the  eyelids,  in  the  form  of  great  and  copious 
drops  upon  the  cheeks.  A great  quantity  also  de- 
scends, through  the  lachrymal  passages,  into  the  nos- 
trils ; hence  those  who  cry  have  an  increased  discharge 
from  the  nose. 

Use  of  the  tears. — 1.  They  continually  moisten  the 
surface  of  the  eye  and  eyelids,  to  prevent  the  pellucid 
cornea  from  drying  and  becoming  opaque,  or  the  eye 
from  concreting  with  the  eyelids.  2.  They  prevent 
that  pain,  which  would  otherwise  arise  from  the  fric- 
tion of  the  eyelids  against  the  bulb  of  the  eye  from 
continually  winking.  3.  They  wash  and  clean  away 
the  dust  of  the  atmosphere,  or  any  thing  acrid  that  has 
fallen  into  the  eye.  4.  Crying  unloads  the  head  of 
congestions. 

TEOTUS.  Covered : applied  as  opposed  to  nudus , 
or  naked  ; as  to  the  seeds  of  the  angiosperm  plants. 

TEETH.  (Dens,  a tooth ; quasi  edens,  from  edo, 
to  eat.)  Small  bones  fixed  in  the  alveoli  of  the  upper 
and  under  jaw.  In  early  infancy  Nature  designs  us 
for  the  softest  aliment,  so  that  the  gums  alone  are  then 
sufficient  for  the  purpose  of  manducation ; but  as  we 
advance  in  life,  and  require  a different  food,  she  wisely 
provides  us  with  teeth.  These  are  the  hardest  and 
whitest  of  our  bones,  and,  at  full  maturity,  we  usually 
find  thirty-two  in  both  jaws ; viz.  sixteen  above,  and 
as  many  below.  Their  number  varies  indeed  in  dif- 
ferent subjects  ; but  it  is  seldom  seen  to  exceed  thirty- 
two,  and  it  will  very  rarely  be  found  to  be  less  than 
twenty  ^igiit 

Each  tooth  may  be  divided  into  two  parts;  viz.  its 
body,  or  that  part  which  appears  above  the  gums ; and 
its  fangs  or  root,  which  is-fixed  into  the  socket.  The 
boundary  between  these  two,  close  to  the  edge  of  the 
gum,  where  there  is  usually  a small  circular  depression, 
is  called  the  neck  of  the  tooth.  The  teeth  of  each  jaw 
are  commonly  divided  into  three  classes ; but  before 
each  of  these  is  treated  of  in  particular,  it  will  be  right 
to  say  something  of  their  general  structure. 

Every  tooth  is  composed  of  its  cortex  or  enamel , and 
its  internal  bony  substances.  The  enamel,  or,  as  it  is 
sometimes  called,  the  vitreous  part  of  the  tooth,  is  a 
very  hard  and  compact  substance,  of  a white  colour, 
and  peculiar  to  the  teeth.  It  is  found  only  upon  the 
body  of  the  tooth,  covering  the  outside  of  the  bony  or 
internal  substance.  When  broken  it  appears  fibrous 
or  striated  ; and  all  the  stria)  are  directed  from  the  cir- 
cumference to  the  centre  of  the  tooth.  This  enamel 
is  thickest  on  the  grinding  surface,  and  on  the  cutting 
edges  or  points  of  the  teeth,  becoming  gradually  thinner 
as  it  approaches  the  neck,  where  it  terminates  insen- 
sibly. Some  writers  have  described  it  as  being  vascu- 
lar ; but  it  is  certain  that  no  injection  will  ever  reach 
this  substance,  that  it  receives  no  tinge  from  madder, 
and  that  it  affords  no  appearance  of  a circulation  of 
fluids.  The  bony  part  of  a tooth  resembles  other  bones 
in  its  structure,  but  is  much  harder  than  the  most  com  - 
pact part  of  bones  in  general.  It  composes  the  inner 
part  of  the  body  and  neck,  and  the  whole  of  the  root 
of  the  tooth.  This  part  of  a tooth,  when  completely 
formed,  does  not,  like  the  other  bones,  receive  a tinge 
from  madder,  nor  do  the  minutest  injections  penetrate 
into  its  substance,  although  many  writers  have  asserted 
the  contrary.  Mr.  Hunter  has  been,  therefore,  induced 
to  deny  its  being  vascular,  although  he  is  aware  that 
the  teeth,  like  other  bones,  are  liable  to  swellings,  and 
that  they  are  found  anchylosed  with  their  sockets.  lie 
supposes,  however,  that  both  these  may  be  original 
formations  ; and,  as  the  most  convincing  proof  of  their 


TEE 


TEE 


not  being  vascular,  he  reasons  from  the  analogy  be- 
tween them  and  other  bones.  He  observes,  for  in- 
stance, that  in  a young  animal  that  has  been  fed  with 
madder,  the  parts  of  the  teeth  which  were  formed  be- 
fore it  was  put  on  madder  diet  will  appear  of  their 
natural  colour,  but  that  such  parts  as  were  formed 
while  the  animal  was  taking  the  madder,  will  be  of  a 
red  colour ; whereas,  in  other  bones,  the  hardest  parts 
are  susceptible  of  the  dye,  though  more  slowly  than 
the  parts  which  are  growing.  Again  he  tells  us,  that 
if  you  leave  off  feeding  the  animal  with  madder  a con- 
siderable time  before  you  kill  it,  you  will  find  the  above 
appearances  still  subsisting,  with  this  addition,  that  all 
the  parts  of  the  teeth  which  were  formed  after  leaving 
off  the  madder  will  be  white.  This  experiment  proves 
that  a tooth  once  tinged  does  not  lose  its  colour; 
whereas  other  bones  do  (though  very  slowly)  return 
again  to  their  natural  appearance : and,  as  the  dye  in 
this  case  must  be  taken  into  the  habit  by  absorbents, 
he  is  led  to  suspect  that  the  teeth  are  without  absor- 
bents as  well  as  other  vessels.  These  arguments  are 
very  ingenious,  but  they  are  far  from  being  satisfac- 
tory. The  facts  adduced  by  Mr.  Hunter  are  capable 
of  a different  explanation  from  that  which  he  has 
given  them ; and  when  other  facts  are  added  relative 
to  the  same  subject,  it  will  appear  that  this  bony  part 
of  a tooth  has  a circulation  through  its  substance,  and 
even  lymphatics,  although,  from  the  hardness  of  its 
structure,  we  are  unable  to  demonstrate  its  vessels. 
■The  facts  which  may  be  adduced  are,  1st,  We  find  that 
a tooth  recently  drawn  and  transplanted  into  another 
socket,  becomes  as  firmly  fixed  after  a certain  time, 
and  preserves  the  same  colour  as  the  rest  of  the  set ; 
whereas  a tooth  that  has  been  long  drawn  before  it  is 
transplanted,  will  never  become  fixed.  Mr.  Hunter, 
indeed,  is  aware  of  this  objection,  and  refers  the  suc- 
cess of  the  transplantation,  in  the  first  instance,  to  the 
living  principle  possessed  by  the  tooth,  and  which  lie 
thinks  may  exist  independent  of  a circulation.  But 
however  applicable  such  a doctrine  may  be  to  zoo- 
phytes, it  is  suspected  that  it  will  not  hold  good  in  man, 
and  others  of  the  more  perfect  animals : and  there  does 
not  appear  to  be  any  doubt  but  that,  in  the  case  of  a 
transplanted  tooth,  there  is  a real  union  by  vessels. 
2dly,  The  swellings  of  the  fangs  of  a tooth,  which  in 
many  instances  are  known  to  be  the  effects  of  disease, 
and  which  are  analogous  to  the  swelling  of  other  bones, 
are  a clear  proof  of  a similarity  of  structure,  especially 
its  we  find  them  invested  with  a periosteum.  3dly,  It 
is  a curious  fact,  though  as  yet  perhaps  not  generally 
known,  that,  in  cases  of  phthisis  pulmonalis,  the  teeth 
become  of  a milky  whiteness,  and,  in  some  degree, 
transparent.  Does  not  this  prove  them  to  have  absor- 
bents 1 

Each  tooth  has  an  inner  cavity,  which,  beginning  by 
a small  opening  at  the  point  of  the  fang,  becomes  larger 
and  terminates  in  the  body  of  the  tooth.  This  cavity 
is  supplied  with  blood-vessels  and  nerves,  which  pass 
through  the  small  hole  in  the  root.  In  old  people  this 
‘ hole  sometimes  closes,  and  the  tooth  becomes  then  in- 
sensible. 

The  teeth  are  invested  with  periosteum  from  their 
fangs  to  a little  beyond  their  bony  sockets,  where  it  is 
attached  to  the  gums.  This  membrane  seems  to  be 
common  to  the  tooth  which  it  encloses,  and  to  the  sockets 
which  it  lines.  The  teeth  arelikevvise  secured  in  their 
sockets  by  a red  substance  called  the  gums,  which 
every  where  covers  the  alveolar  processes,  and  has  as 
many  perforations  as  there  are  teeth.  The  gums  are 
exceedingly  vascular,  and  have  something  like  carti- 
laginous hardness  and  elasticity,  but  do  not  seem  to 
have  much  sensibility.  The  gums  of  infants,  which 
perform  the  offices  of  teeth,  have  a hard  ridge  extend- 
ivg  through  their  whole  length  ; but  in  old  people,  who 
have  lost  their  teeth,  this  ridge  is  wanting.  The  three 
classes  into  which  the  teeth  are  commonly  divided  are, 
incisores,  canini , and  molares  or  grinders. 

The  incisores  are  the  four  teeth  in  the  forepart  of 
each  jaw ; they  derive  their  name  from  their  use  in  di- 
viding and  cutting  the  food  in  the  manner  of  a wedge, 
and  have  each  of  them  two  surfaces,  which  meet  in  a 
sharp  edge.  Of  these  surfaces,  the  anterior  one  is  con- 
vex, and  the  posterior  one  somewhat  concave.  In  the 
upper  jaw  they  are  usually  broader  and  thicker,  espe- 
cially the  two  middle  ones,  than  those  of  the  under 
jaw,  over  which  thejfgenerally  fall  by  being  placed  a 
little  obliquely 


The  canini  or  cuspidati  are  the  longest  of  all  the 
teeth,  deriving  their  name  from  their  resemblance  to  a 
dog’s  tusk.  There  is  one  of  these  teeth  on  each  side  of 
the  incisores,  so  that  there  are  two  in  each  jaw.  They 
are  the  longest  of  all  the  teeth.  Their  fangs  differ  from 
that  of  the  incisores  only  in  being  much  larger,  and 
their  shape  may  be  easily  described  to  be  that  of  an  in- 
cisor with  its  edge  worn  off,  so  as  to  end  in  a narrow 
point  instead  of  a thin  edge.  The  canini  not  being 
calculated  for  dividing  like  the  incisores,  or  for  grinding, 
seem  to  be  intended  for  laying  hold  of  substances.  Mr. 
Hunter  remarks  of  these  teeth,  that  we  may  trace  in 
them  a similarity  in  shape,  situation,  and  use,  from  the 
most  imperfect  carnivorous  animal,  which  we  believe 
to  be  the  human  species,  to  the  lion,  which  is  the  most 
perfectly  carnivorous. 

The  molares  or  grinders , of  which  there  are  ten  n 
each  jaw,  are  so  called,  because  from  their  size  and 
figure  they  are  calculated  for  grinding  the  food.  The 
canini  and  incisores  have  only  one  tang,  but  the  last 
three  grinders  in  the  under  jaw  have  constantly  two 
fangs,  and  the  same  teeth  in  the  upper  jaw  three  fangs. 
Sometimes  these  fangs  are  divided  into  two  points  near 
their  base,  and  each  of  these  points  has,  perhaps,  been 
sometimes  considered  as  a distinct  fang.  The  grinders 
likewise  differ  from  each  other  in  their  appearance. 
The  first  two  on  each  side,  which  Mr.  Hunter  appears 
to  have  distinguished  very  properly  by  the  name  of  bi- 
cuspidcs,  seem  to  be  of  a middle  nature  between  the 
incisores  and  grinders ; they  have  in  general  only  one 
root,  and  the  body  of  the  tooth  terminates  in  two  points, 
of  which  the  anterior  one  is  the  highest,  so  that  the 
tooth  has  in  some  measure  the  appearance  of  one  of 
the  canini.  The  two  grinders  beyond  these,  on  each 
side,  are  much  larger.  Their  body  forms  almost  a 
square  with  rounded  angles ; and  their  grinding  surface 
has  commonly  five  points  or  protuberances,  two  of 
which  are  on  the  inner,  and  three  on  the  outer  part  of 
the  tooth.  The  last  grinder  is  shorter  and  smaller  than 
the  rest,  and,  from  its  coming  through  the  gums  later 
than  the  rest,  and  sometimes  not  appearing  till  late  in 
life,  is  called  dens  sapientice.  The  variation  in  the 
number  of  teeth  usually  depends  on  these  dentes  sapi- 
entiffi. 

Having  thus  described  the  appearance  of  the  teeth 
in  the  adult ; the  manner  of  their  formation  and  growth 
in  the  foetus  is  next  to  be  considered.  We  shall  find 
that  the  alveolar  process,  which  begins  to  be  formed  at 
a very  early  period,  appears  about  the  fourth  month 
only  as  a shallow  longitudinal  groove,  divided  by  sligh 
ridges  into  a number  of  intermediate  depressions 
which  are  to  be  the  future  alveoli  or  sockets.  These  de 
pressions  are  at  first  filled  with  small  pulpy  substances 
included  in  a vascular  membrane;  and  these  pulpy 
substances  are  the  rudiments  of  the  teeth.  As  these 
advance  in  their  growth,  the  alveolar  processes  become 
gradually  more  completely  formed.  The  surface  of  the 
pulp  first  begins  to  harden:  the  ossification  proceedin'* 
from  one  or  more  points,  according  to  the  kind  of  tooth 
that  is  to  be  formed.  Tims  in  the  incisores  and  canini 
it  begins  from  one  point ; in  the  bicuspides,  from  two 
points,  corresponding  with  the  future  shape  of  those 
teeth ; and  in  the  molares  from  four  or  five  points.  As 
the  ossification  advances,  the  whole  of  the  pulp  is  frra- 
dually  covered  with  bone,  excepting  its  under  surface 
and  then  the  fang  begins  to  be  formed.  Soon  after  the 
formation  of  this  bony  part,  the  tooth  begins  to  be 
incrusted  with  its  enamel ; but  in  what  manner  this  is 
deposited  we  areas  yet  unable  to  explain.— Perhaps  the 
vascular  membrane  which  encloses  the  pulp,  may  serve 
to  secrete  it.  It  gradually  crystallizes  upon  the  surface 
of  the  bony  part,  and  continues  to  increase  in  thick- 
ness, especially  at  the  points  and  basis  of  the  tooth,  till 
some  time  before  the  tooth  begins  io  pass  through  the 
gum  ; and  when  this  happens,  the  enamel  seems  to  be 
as  hard  as  it  is  afterward,  so  that  the  air  does  not  ap- 
pear to  have  the  least  effect  in  hardening  it,  as  has  been 
sometimes  supposed.  While  the  enamel  is  thus  form- 
ing, the  lower  part  of  the  pulp  is  gradually  lengthened 
out  and  ossified,  so  as  to  form  the  fang.  In  those  teeth 
which  are  to  have  more  than  one  fang,  the  ossification 
begins  at  different  parts  of  the  pulp  at  one  and  the 
same  time.  In  this  manner,  arc  formed  the  incisores 
the  canini,  and  two  molares  on  each  side,  making  in  the 
whole  twenty  teeth,  in  both  jaws,  which  are  sufficient 
for  the  purposes  of  manducation  early  hi  life  As  the 
fangs  of  the  teeth  are  formed,  their  upper  part  is  eradu- 

339” 


Fff  2 


TEE 


TEL 


ally  pushed  upwards,  till  at  length,  about  the  seventh, 
eighth,  or  ninth  month  after  birth,  the  incisores,  which 
are  the  first  formed,  begin  to  pass  through  the  gum. 
The  first  that  appears  is  generally  in  the  lower  jaw. 
The  canini  and  tnolares  not  being  formed  so  soon  as  the 
incisores,  do  not  appear  till  about  the  twentieth  or 
twenty-fourth  month.  Sometimes  one  of  the  canini, 
but  more  frequently  one  of  the  molares,  appears  first. 

The  danger  to  which  children  are  exposed,  during  the 
time  of  dentition,  arises  from  the  pressure  of  the  teeth 
in  the  gum,  so  as  to  irritate  it,  and  excite  pain  and  in- 
flammation. The  effect  of  this  irritation  is,  that  the 
gum  wastes,  and  becomes  gradually  thinner  at  this 
part,  till  at  length  the  tooth  protrudes.  In  such  cases, 
therefore,  we  may,  with  great  propriety,  assist  nature 
by  cutting  the  gum.  These  twenty  teeth  are  called 
temporary  or  milk  teeth,  because  they  are  all  shed  be- 
tween the  age  of  seven  and  fourteen,  and  are  supplied 
by  others  of  a firmer  texture,  with  large  fangs  which 
remain  till  they  become  affected  by  disease,  or  fall  out 
in  old  age,  and  are  therefore  called  the  permanent  or 
adult  teeth.  The  rudiments  of  these  adult  teeth  begin 
to  be  formed  at  different  periods.  The  pulp  of  the  first 
adult  incisor,  and  of  the  first  adult  grinder,  may  be 
perceived  in  a foetus  of  seven  or  eight  months,  and  the 
ossification  bemns  in  them  about  six  months  after  birth. 
Soon  after  birth  the  second  incisor,  and  canine  tooth 
on  each  side,  begin  to  be  formed.  About  the  fifth  or 
sixth  year  the  first  bicuspis,  and  about  the  seventh  the 
second  bicuspi  begin  to  ossify.  These  bicuspides  are 
destined  to  replace  the  temporary  grinders.  All  these 
permanent  teeth  are  formed  in  a distinct  set  of  alveoli; 
so  that  it  is  not  by  the  growing  of  one  tooth  under 
another  in  the  same  socket,  that  the  uppermost  tooth  is 
gradually  pushed  out,  as  is  commonly  imagined  ; but 
the  temporary  teeth,  and  those  which  are  to  succeed 
them,  being  placed  in  separate  alveoli,  the  upper  sockets 
gradually  disappear,  as  the  under  ones  increase  in  size, 
till  at  length  the  teeth  they  contain,  having  no  longer 
any  support,  consequently  fall  out.  But,  besides  these 
twenty  teeth,  which  succeed  the  temporary  ones,  there 
are  twelve  others  to  be  added  to  make  up  the  number 
thirty-two.  These  twelve  are  three  grinders  on  each 
side  in  both  jaws ; and  in  order  to  make  room  for  this 
addition,  we  find  the  jaws  grow  as  the  teeth  grow,  so 
that  they  appear  as  completely  filled  with  twenty  teeth, 
as  they  are  afterward  with  thirty-two.  H^nce,  in 
children  the  face  is  flatter  and  rounder  than  in  adults. 
The  first  adult  grinder  usually  passes  through  the  gum 
about  the  twelfth  year;  the  second,  which  begins  to  be 
formed  in  the  sixth  or  seventh  year,  cuts  the  gum  about 
the  seventeenth  or  eighteenth  ; and  the  third,  or  dens 
sapienti®,  which  begins  to  be  formed  about  the  twelfth 
year,  passes  through  the  gum  between  the  age  of  twenty 
and  thirty.  The  dentes  sapientice  have,  in  some  in- 
stances, been  cut  at  the  age  of  forty,  fifty,  sixty,  and 
even  eighty  yeass  ; and  it  sometimes  happens,  that  they 
do  not  appear  at  all.  Sometimes  likewise  it  happens 
that  a third  set  of  teeth  appear  about  the  age  of  sixty 
or  seventy.  Diemerbroek  tells  us  that  he  himself,  at  the 
age  of  fifty-six,  had  a fresh  canine  tooth  in  the  place 
of  one  he  had  lost  several  years  before;  M.  du  Fay 
saw  two  incisores  and  two  canini  cut  the  gum  in  a man 
aged  eighty-four ; Mr.  Hunter  has  seen  two  foreteeth 
shoot  up  in  the  lower  jaw  of  a very  old  person ; and  an 
account  was  lately  published  of  a man  who  had  a com- 
plete set  of  teeth  at  the  age  of  sixty.  Other  instances 
of  the  same  kind  are  to  be  met  with  in  authors.  The 
circumstance  is  curious,  and  from  the  time  of  life  at 
which  it  takes  place,  and  the  return  of  the  catamenia, 
which  sometimes  happens  to  women  at  the  same  age, 
it  has  been  very  ingeniously  supposed,  that  there  is 
sotne  effort  in  nature  to  renew  the  body  at  that  period. 

The  teeth  are  subject  to  a variety  of  accidents. 
Sometimes  the  gums  become  so  affected  as  to  occasion 
them  to  fall  out,  and  the  teeth  themselves  are  frequently 
rendered  carious  by  causes  which  have  not  hitherto 
been  satisfactorily  explained.  The  disease  usually  be- 
gins on  that  side  of  the  tooth  which  is  not  exposed  to 
pressure,  and  gradually  advances  till  an  opening  is 
made  into  the  cavity : as  soon  as  the  cavity  is  exposed, 
the  tooth  becomes  liable  to  considerable  pain,  from  the 
air  coming  into  contact  with  the  nerve.  Besides  these 
accidental  means  by  which  the  teeth  are  occasionally 
affected,  old  age  seldom  fails  to  bring  with  it  sure  and 
natural  causes  for  their  removal.  The  alveoli  fill  up, 
and  the  teeth  consequently  fall  out.  The  gums  then 
3*0 


no  longer  meet  in  the  forepart  of  the  mouth,  the  chi n 
projects  forwards,  and  the  face  being  rendered  much 
shorter,  the  whole  physiognomy  appears  considerably- 
altered.  Having  thus  described  the  formation,  struc- 
ture, growth,  and  decay  of  the  teeth,  it  remains  to  speak 
of  their  uses;  the  chief  of  which  we  know  to  be  in 
mastication.  And  here  we  cannot  help  observing  the 
great  variety  in  the  structure  of  the  human  teeth,  which 
fits  us  for  such  a variety  of  food,  and  which,  when  com- 
pared with  the  teeth  given  to  other  animals,  may  in 
some  measure  enable  us  to  explain  the  nature  of  the 
aliment  for  which  man  is  intended  by  Nature.  Thus, 
in  ruminating  animals,  we  find  incisores  only  in  the 
lower  jaw,  for  cutting  the  grass,  and  molares  for  grind- 
ing it;  in  graminivorous  animals,  we  see  molares  alone ; 
and  in  carnivorous  animals,  canine  teeth  for  catching 
at  their  prey,  and  incisores  and  molares  for  cutting  and 
dividing  it.  But,  as  man  is  not  designed  to  catch  and 
kill  his  prey  with  his  teeth,  we  observe  that  our  canini 
are  shaped  differently  from  the  fangs  of  beasts  of  prey, 
in  whom  we  find  them  either  longer  than  the  rest  of 
the  teeth,  or  curved.  The  incisores  likewise  are 
sharper  in  those  animals  than  in  man.  Nor  are  the 
molares  in  the  human  subject  similar  to  the  molares  of 
carnivorous  animals;  they  are  flatter  in  man  than  in 
these  animals ; and,  in  the  latter,  we  likewise  find  them 
sharper  at  the  edges,  more  calculated  to  cut  and  tear 
the  food,  and  by  their  greater  strength,  capable  of 
breaking  the  bones  of  animals.  From  these  circum- 
stances, therefore,  we  may  consider  man  as  partaking 
of  the  nature  of  these  different  classes  ; as  approaching 
more  to  the  carnivorous  than  to  the  herbivorous  tribe 
of  animals;  but  upon  the  whole,  formed  for  a mixed 
aliment,  and  fitted  equally  to  live  upon  flesh  and  upon 
vegetables.  Those  philosophers,  therefore,  who  would 
confine  a man  wholly  to  vegetable  food,  do  not  seem 
to  have  studied  nature.  As  the  molares  are  the  last 
teeth  that  are  formed,  so  they  are  usually  the  first  that 
fall  out ; this  would  seem  to  prove,  that  we  require  the 
same  kind  of  aliment  in  old  age  a§  in  infancy.  Besides 
the  use  of  the  teeth  in  mastication,  they  likewise  serve 
a secondary  purpose,  by  assisting  in  the  articulation  ol 
the  voice. 

TEETHING.  See  Dentition  and  Teeth. 

Te'gula  hibernica.  See  Lapis  hibemicus. 

TEGUMENTS.  Under  the  term  common  integu- 
ments, anatomists  comprehended  the  cuticle,  rete  mu- 
cosum,  skin,  and  adipose  membrane,  as  being  the 
covering  to  every  part  of  the  body  except  the  nails. 
See  Skin. 

TE  LA.  A web  of  cloth.  The  cellular  membrane 
is  so  called  from  its  likeness  to  a fine  web.  See  Cel- 
lular membrane. 

Tela  cellulosa.  See  Cellular  membrane. 

TELE'PHIUM.  (Because  it  heals  old  ulcers,  such 
as  that  of  Telephus,  made  by  Ulysses.)  See  Sedum 
telephium. 

TELESIA.  Sapphire. 

TELLUR ETTED  HYDROGEN.  A combination 
of  tellurium  and  hydrogen.  To  make  this  compound, 
hydrate  of  potassa  and  oxide  of  tellurium  are  ignited 
with  charcoal,  and  the  mixture  acted  on  by  dilute  sul- 
phuric acid,  in  a retort  connected  with  a mercurial 
pneumatic  apparatus.  An  elastic  fluid  is  generated, 
consisting  of  hydrogen  holding  tellurium  in  solution. 
It  is  possessed  of  very  singular  properties.  It  is  so- 
luble in  water,  and  forms  11  claret-coloured  solution. 
It  combines  with  the  alkalies.  It  burns  with  a bluish 
flame,  depositing  oxide  of  tellurium.  Its  smell  is  very 
strong  and  peculiar,  not  unlike  that  of  sulphuretted 
hydrogen.  This  elastic  fluid  was  discovered  by  Sir 
H.  Daw,  in  1609. 

TELLURIC  ACID.  Jicidum  telluricum.  The 
oxide  of  tellurium  combines  with  many  of  the  metallic 
oxides,  acting  the  part  of  an  acid,  and  producing  a class 
of  compounds  which  have  been  called  telluratcs. 

TELLU'RIUM  The  name  given  by  Klaproth  to 
a metal  extracted  from  several  Transylvanian  ores. 

Pure  tellurium  is  of  a tin-white  colour,  verging  to 
lead-gray,  with  a high  metallic  lustre ; of  a foliated 
fracture  ; and  very  brittle,  so  as  to  be  easily  pulverized. 
Its  sp.  gr.  is  6.115.  It  melts  before  ignition,  requiring 
little  higher  heat  than  lead,  and  less  than  antimony; 
and,  according  to  Gmelin,  is  as  volatile  as  arsenic. 
When  cooled  without  agitation,  its  surface  has  a crys- 
tallized appearance.  Before  tRe  blowpipe  on  charcoal, 
it  burns  with  a vivid  blue  light,  greenish  on  the  edges 


TEM 


TEM 


and  is  dissipated  in  grayish- white  vapours,  of  a pun 
gent  smell,  which  condense  into  a white  oxide.  This 
oxide  heated  on  charcoal  is  reduced  with  a kind  of 
explosion,  and  soon  again  volatilized.  Heated  in  a 
glass  retort,  it  fuses  into  a straw-coloured  striated  mass. 
It  appears  to  contain  about  16  per  cent,  of  oxygen. 

Tellurium  is  oxidized  and  dissolved  by  the  principal 
acids.  To  sulphuric  acid  it  gives  a deep  purple  colour. 
Water  separates  it  in  black  flocculi,  and  heat  throws 
it  down  in  a white  precipitate. 

With  nitric  acid  it  forms  a colourless  solution,  which 
remains  so  when  diluted,  and  affords  slender  denditric 
crystals  by  evaporation. 

The  muriatic  acid  with  a small  portion  of  nitric, 
forms  a transparent  solution,  from  which  water  throws 
down  a white  submuriate.  This  may  be  redissolved 
almost  wholly  by  repeated  affusions  of  water.  Alko- 
hol  likewise  precipitates  it. 

Sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  two  or  three  parts  of 
water,  to  which  a little  nitric  acid  has  been  added, 
dissolves  a large  portion  of  the  metal,  and  the  solution 
is  not  decomposed  by  water. 

The  alkalies  throw  down  from  its  solutions  a white 
precipitate,  which  is  soluble  in  all  the  acids,  and  by  an 
excess  of  the  alkalies  or  their  carbonates.  They  are 
not  precipitated  by  prussiate  of  potassa.  Tincture  of 
galls  gives  a yellow  flocculent  precipitate  with  them. 
Tellurium  is  precipitated  from  them  in  a metallic  state 
by  zinc,  iron,  tin,  and  antimony. 

Tellurium  fused  with  an  equal  weight  of  sulphur,  in 
a gentle  heat,  forms  a lead  coloured  striated  sulphuret. 
Alkaline  sulphurets  precipitate  it  from  its  solutions  of 
a brown  or  black  colour.  In  this  precipitate,  either 
the  metal  or  its  oxide  is  combined  with  sulphur.  Each 
of  these  sulphurets  burns  with  a pale  blue  flame,  and 
white  smoke.  Heated  in  a retort,  part  of  the  sulphur 
is  sublimated,  carrying  up  a little  of  the  metal  with  it. 
It  does  not  easily  amalgamate  with  quicksilver. 

TEMPERAME'NTUM.  (From  tempero,  to  mix 
together.)  The  peculiar  constitution  of  the  humours. 
Temperaments  have  been  variously  distinguished  : the 
division  most  generally  received  is  into  the  sanguineous, 
phlegmatic,  choleric,  and  melancholic. 

TEMPERATURE.  A definite  degree  of  sensible 
heat,  as  measured  by  the  thermometer.  Thus  we  say, 
a high  temperature,  and  a low  temperature,  to  denote 
a manifest  intensity  of  heat  or  cold  ; the  temperature 
of  boiling  water,  or  212°  Fahr. ; and  a range  of  tem- 
perature, to  designate  the  intermediate  points  of  heat 
between  two  distant  terms  of  thermometric  indication. 

TEMPLE.  ( Tempora , um , n. ; and  tempus,  oris , n.) 
The  lateral  and  flat  parts  of  the  head  above  the  ears. 

TEMPORAL.  ( Temporalis ; from  tempus.)  Be- 
longing to  the  temple. 

Temporal  artery.  Arteria  temp  oralis.  A branch 
of  the  external  carotid,  which  runs  on  the  temples,  and 
gives  off  the  frontal  artery. 

Temporal  bone.  Os  temporis.  Two  bones  situ- 
ated one  on  each  side  of  the  head,  of  a very  irregular 
figure.  They  are  usually  divided  into  two  parts,  one 
of  which,  from  the  manner  of  its  connexion  with  the 
neighbouring  bones,  is  called  os  squamosum , and  the 
other  os  petrosum,  from  its  irregularity  and  hardness. 

In  both  these  parts  there  are  processes  and  cavities 
to  be  described.  Externally  there  are  three  processes  ; 
one  anterior,  called  zygomatic  process,  which  is 
stretched  forwards  to  joyi  with  the  os  malae,  and  thus 
forms  the  bony  jugum  under  which  the  temporal  mus- 
cle passes  ; one  posterior,  called  the  mastoid  or  mamil- 
lary process,  from  its  resemblance  to  a nipple ; and  one 
inferior,  called  the  styloid  process,  from  its  shape, 
which  is  said  to  resemble  that  of  the  ancient  stylus 
scriptorius.  In  young  subjects,  this  process  is  united 
with  the  bone  by  an  intermediate  cartilage,  which 
sometimes,  even  in  adults,  is  not  completely  ossified. 
Three  muscles  have  their  origin  from  this  process,  and 
borrow  half  of  their  names  from  it,  viz.  stylo  glossus, 
stylo-hyoideus,  and  stylo  pharyngeus.  Round  the  root 
of  this  process  there  is  a particular  rising  of  the  os 
petrosum,  which  some  writers  describe  as  a process, 
and,  from  its  appearance  with  the  styloid,  have  named 
it.  vaginalis.  Others  describe  the  semicircular  ridge 
of  the  meatus  auditorius  externus  as  a fifth  process,  to 
which  they  give  the  name  of  auditory.  The  depres- 
sions and  cavities  are,  1.  A large  fossa,  which  serves 
for  the  articulation  of  the  lower  jaw  ; it  is  situated 
between  the  zygomatic  auditory  and  vaginal  processes, 


and  is  separated  in  its  middle  by  a fissure,  into  which 
the  ligament  that  secures  the  articulation  of  the  lower 
jaw  with  this  bone  is  fixed.  The  forepart  of  this 
cavity,  which  receives  the  condyle  of  the  jaw,  is 
covered  with  cartilage ; the  back  part  only  with  the 
periosteum.  2.  A long  fossa  behind  the  mastoid  pro- 
cess, where  the  digastric  muscle  has  its  origin.  3.  The 
meatus  auditorius  externus , the  name  given  to  a large 
funnel-like  canal  that  leads  to  the  organ  of  hearing. 
4.  The  stylo-mastoul  hole , so  called  from  its  situation 
between  the  styloid  and  mastoid  processes.  It  is 
likewise  called  the  aqueduct  of  Fallopius,  and  affords 
a passage  to  the  portio  dura  of  the  auditory,  or  seventh 
pair  of  nerves.  5.  Below  and  on  the  forepart  of  the 
last  foramen,  we  observe  part  of  the  jugular  fossa,  a 
thimble-like  cavity,  in  which  the  beginning  of  the 
internal  jugular  vein  is  lodged.  6.  Befoie  and  a little 
above  this  fossa  is  the  orifice  of  a foramen,  through 
which  pass  the  internal  carotid  artery  and  two  fila- 
ments of  the  intercostal  nerve.  This  conduit  runs 
first  upward  and  then  forward,  forming  a kind  of 
elbow,  and  terminates  at  the  end  of  the  os  petrosum. 
7.  At  this  part  of  the  ossa  temporum  we  observe  the 
orifice  of  a canal  which  runs  outwards  and  backwards 
in  a horizontal  direction,  till  it  terminates  in  a cavity 
of  the  ear  called  tympanum.  This  canal,  which  in 
the  recent  subject  is  continued  from  the  ear  to  the 
mouth,  is  called  the  Eustachian  tube.  8.  A small  hole 
behind  the  mastoid  process,  which  serves  for  the  trans 
mission  of  a vein  to  the  lateral  sinus.  But  this,  like 
other  foramina  in  the  skull  that  serves  only  for  the 
transmission  of  vessels,  is  neither  uniform  in  its  situa- 
tion, nor  to  be  met  with  in  every  subject.  The  internal 
surface  of  these  bones  may  easily  be  divided  into  three 
parts.  The  first,  uppermost,  and  largest  is  the  squa- 
mous part,  which  is  slightly  concave  from  the  impres- 
sion of  the  brain.  Its  semicircular  edge  is  sloping,  so 
that  the  external  lamella  of  the  bone  advances  farther 
than  the  internal,  and  thus  rests  more  securely  on  the 
parietal  bones.  The  second  and  middlemost,  which  is 
the  petrous  part  of  the  bone,  forms  a hard,  craggy  pro- 
tuberance, nearly  of  a triangular  shape.  On  its  pos- 
terior side  we  observe  a large  foramen,  which  is  the 
meatus  auditorius  interims ; it  recoives  the  double 
nerve  of  the  seventh  pair,  viz.  the  portio  dura  and 
portio  mollis  of  that  pair.  About  the  middle  of  its 
anterior  surface  is  a small  foramen,  which  opens  into 
the  aqueduct  of  Fallopius,  and  receives  a twig  of  the 
portio  dura  of  the  seventh  pair  of  nerves.  This  fora- 
men having  been  first  described  by  Fallopius,  and  by 
him  named  hiatus , is  sometimes  called  hiatus  Fallopii. 
Besides  these,  we  observe  other  smaller  holes  for  the 
transmission  of  blood-vessels  and  nerves.  Below  this 
craggy  protuberance  is  the  third  part,  which,  from  its 
shape  and  connexion  with  the  os  occipitis  by  means  of 
the  lambdoidal  suture,  may  be  called  the  lambdoidal 
angle  of  the  temporal  bone.  It  is  concave  from  the 
impression  of  the  brain ; it  helps  to  form  the  posterior 
and  inferior  fossie  of  the  skull,  and  has  a considerable 
furrow,  in  which  is  lodged  part  of  the  lateral  sinus. 
The  temporal  bones  differ  a little  in  their  structure 
from  the  other  bones  of  the  cranium.  At  their  upper 
parts  they  are  very  thin,  and  almost  without  diploe, 
but  below  they  have  great  strength  and  thickness.  In 
the  foetus,  the  thin  upper  part,  and  the  lower  craggy 
part,  are  separated  by  a cartilaginous  substance  ; there 
is  no  appearance  either  of  the  mastoid  or  styloid  pro- 
cesses, and,  instead  of  a long  funnel-like  meatus  audi- 
torius externus,  there  is  only  a smooth  bony  ring, 
within  which  the  membrana  tympani  is  fastened. 
Within  the  petrous  part  of  these  bones  there  are  several 
cavities,  processes,  and  bones,  which  belong  altogether 
to  the  ear,  do  not  enter  into  the  formation  of  the  cra- 
nium, and  are  described  under  the  article  Ear.  The 
ossa  temporum  are  connected  by  suture  with  the 
ossa  parietalfa,  the  os  occipitis,  the  ossa  malarum,and 
the  os  sphenoides,  and  are  articulated  with  the  lower 
jaw 

TEMPORA'LIS.  (From  tempus , the  temple.)  1 
See  Temporal. 

2.  A muscle  of  the  lower  jaw,  situated  in  the  tem- 
ple. Arcardi-temporo-maxillaire , of  Dumas.  Crota- 
phites , of  Winslow.  It  arises  fleshy  from  the  lower, 
lateral,  and  anterior  part  of  the  parietal  bone ; from  all 
the  squamous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone;  from  the 
lower  and  lateral  part  of  the  os  froniis ; from  the  pos- 
terior surface  of  the  os  malae ; from  all  the  temporal  pro- 


TER 


TER 


eess  of  the  sphenoid  bone ; and  sometimes  from  a ridge 
at  the  lower  part  of  this  process.  This  latter  portion, 
however,  is  often  common  to  this  muscle  and  the 
pterygoideus  externus.  It  is  of  a semicircular  shape, 
and  its  radiated  fibres  converge,  so  as  to  form  a strong 
middle  tendon,  which  pastes  under  the  jugum,  and  is 
inserted  into  the  coronoid  process  of  the  lower  jaw,  to 
which  it  adheres  on  every  side,  but  more  particularly 
at  its  forepart,  where  the  insertion  is  continued  down 
to  the  body  of  the  bone.  This  muscle  is  covered  by  a 
pretty  strong  fascia,  which  some  writers  have  erro- 
neously described  as  a part  of  the  aponeurosis  of  the 
occipito-frontalis.  This  fascia  adheres  to  the  bones, 
round  the  whole  circumference  of  the  origin  of  the 
muscle,  and,  descending  over  it,  is  fixed  below  to  the 
ridge  where  the  zygomatic  process  begins,  just  above 
the  meatus  auditorius,  to  the  upper  edge  of  the  zygo- 
matic process  itself,  and  anteriorly  to  the  os  malae. 
This  fascia  serves  as  a defence  to  the  muscles,  and 
likewise  gives  origin  to  some  of  its  fleshy  fibres.  The 
principal  use  of  the  temporal  muscle  is  to  draw  the 
lower  jaw  upwards,'  as  in  the  action  of  biting ; and  as 
it  passes  a little  forwards  to  its  insertion,  it  may  at  the 
same  time  pull  the  condyle  a little  backwards,  though 
not  so  much  as  it  would  have  done  if  its  fibres  had 
passed  in  a direct  line  from  their  origin  to  their  inser- 
tion, because  the  posterior  and  lower  part  of  the  muscle 
passes  over  the  root  of  the  zygomatic  process,  as  over 
a pulley. 

TENDO.  See  Muscle. 

Tendo  achillis.  See  Achillis  tendo. 

TENDON.  (From  tendo , to  stretch.)  The  white 
and  glistening  extremity  of  a muscle.  See  Muscle. 

TENDRIL.  See  Cirrus. 

TENE'SIvIUS.  (From  reive),  to  constringe:  so 
called  from  the  perception  of  a continual  constriction 
or  bound  state  of  the  part.)  A continual  inclination  to 
goto  stool,  without  a discharge. 

TENNANT1TE.  A variety  of  gray  copper  ore 
found  in  Cornwall,  in  copper  veins,  that  intersect 
granite  and  clay  slate,  associated  with  copper  pyrites. 
It  is  of  a lead-gray  or  iron  black  colour,  and  consists 
of  copper,  sulphur,  arsenic,  iron,  and  silica. 

TE'NSOR.  (From  tendo,  to  stretch.)  A muscle, 
the  office  of  which  is  to  extend  the  part  to  which  it  is 
fixed. 

Tensor  palati.  See  Circumflexus. 

Tensor  tympani.  Internits  auris,  of  Douglas  and 
Cowper.  Internus  mallei,  of  Winslow  ; and  salpingo- 
malleen,  of  Dumas.  A muscle  of  the  ear,  which  pulls 
the  malleus  and  the  membrane  of  the  tympanum  to- 
wards the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  by 
which  the  membrana  tympani  is'  made  more  concave 
and  tense. 

Tensor  vaginas  femoris.  Fascialis.  Membra- 
nosus,  of  Douglas.  Membranus  vel  fascia  lata,  of 
Cowper ; and  Ilio  , aponeurosi- femoral,  of  Dumas. 
Musculus  aponeurosis , vel  fasciae  lata:,  of  Winslow. 
A muscle  situated  on  the  outside  of  the  thigh,  which 
stretches  the  membranous  fascia  of  the  thigh,  assists  in 
the  abduction  of  the  thigh,  and  somewhat  in  its  rota- 
tion inwards.  It  arises  by  a narrow,  tendinous,  and 
fleshy  beginning  from  the  external  part  of  the  anterior, 
superior,  spinous  process  of  the  ilium,  and  is  inserted 
a little  below  the  great  trochanter  into  the  membranous 
fascia. 

TENT.  A roll  of  lint  for  dilating  openings,  sinuses, 
&C.  See  Spongia  praeparata. 

TENTO'RIUM.  A process  of  the  dura  mater, 
separating  the  cerebrum  from  the  cerebellum.  It  ex- 
tends from  the  internal  horizontal  spine  of  the  occipital 
bone,  directly  forwards  to  the  sella  turcica  of  the  sphe- 
noid bone. 

Terkbe'lla.  (Diminutive  of  terebra,  a piercer  or 
gimlet.)  A trepan  or  instrument  for  sawing  out  cir- 
cular portions  of  the  skull.  A trephine. 

TEREBI'NTHINA.  (From  reptBivOos,  the  turpen- 
. tine-tree.)  Turpentine,  the  produce  of  pine-trees.  See 
Turpentine. 

Terebinthina  argentoratensis.  Strasburg  tur- 
pentine. This  species  is  generally  more  transparent 
and  less  tenacious  than  either  the  Venice  or  Chio  tur- 
pentines. It  is  of  a yellowish-brown  colour,  and  of  a 
more  agreeable  smell  than  any  of  the  turpentines,  ex- 
cept the  Chio.  It  is  extracted  in  several  parts  of  Ger- 
many, from  the  red  and  silver  fir,  by  cutting  out 
successively  narrow  strips  of  the  bark.  In  some 


| places  a resinous  juice  is  collected  from  under  the 
bark,  called  Lackryma  abiegna,  and  Oleum  abictinum. 

Terebinthina  canadensis.  Canada  turpentine. 
See  Pinus  balsamea. 

Terebinthina  chia.  The  resin  obtained  from  the 
Pistacia  terebinthus. 

Terebinthina  communis.  Common  turpentine. 

See  Pinus  sylvestris. 

Terebinthina  cypria.  Cyprus  turpentine.  See 

Pistacia  terebinthus. 

Terebinthina  vkneta.  Venice  turpentine:  so 
called  because  we  are  supplied  with  it  from  the  Vene 
tians.  See  Pinus  larix. 

Terebinthina  vulgaris.  Common  turpentine. 
The  liquid  resin  of  the  Pinus  sylvestris.  See  Tur 
pentine. 

Terebinthina:  oleum.  The  oil  distilled  from  the 
liquid  resin  of  the  Pinus  sylvestris. 

TE'RES.  Round,  cylindrical. 

1.  The  name  of  some  muscles  and  ligaments. 

2.  The  name  of  the  ascaris  lumbricoides,  or  round 
worm,  whicli  infests  the  intestines.  See  Worms. 

3.  Applied  to  roots,  stems,  leaves,  leafstalks, 
seeds,  &c. 

Teres  ligamentum.  The  ligament  at  the  bottom 
of  the  socket  of  the  hip-joint. 

Teres  major.  Riolanus,  who  was  the  first  that 
distinguished  this  and  the  other  mdfecles  of  the  scapula 
by  particular  appellations,  gave  the  name  of  teres  to 
this  and  the  following  muscle,  on  account  of  their  long 
and  round  shape.  Anguli-scapulo-humeral,  of  Dumas 
This  muscle,  which  is  longer  and  thicker  than  the  teres 
minor,  is  situated  along  the  inferior  costa  of  the 
scapula,  and  is  in  part  covered  by  the  deltoides. 

It  arises  fleshy  from  the  outer  surface  of  the  inferior 
angle  of  the  scapula,  (where  it  covers  some  part  of  the 
infra-spinatus  and  teres  minor,  with  both  which  its 
fibres  intermix,)  and  likewise  from  the  lower  and  pos- 
terior half  of  the  inferior  costa  of  the  scapula.  As- 
cending obliquely  towards  the  os  humeri,  it  passes 
under  the  long  head  of  the  triceps  brachii,  and  then 
becomes  thinner  and  flatter  to  form  a thin  tendon  of 
about  an  inch  in  breadth,  and  somewhat  more  in 
length,  which  runs  immediately  behind  that  of  the 
latissimus  dorsi,  and  is  inserted  along  with  it  into  the 
ridge  at  the  inner  side  of  the  gtoove  that  lodges  the 
long  head  of  the  biceps.  These  two  tendons  are  in- 
cluded in  the  common  capsula,  besides  which  the  ten- 
don of  this  muscle  adheres  to  the  os  humeri  by  two 
other  capsulas  which  we  find  placed  one  above  the 
other. 

This  muscle  assists  in  the  rotatory  muscle  of  the  arm, 
and  likewise  in  drawing  it  downwards  and  back- 
wards ; so  that  we  may  consider  it  as  the  congener  of 
the  latissimus  dorsi. 

Teres  minor.  Marginisus-seapulo-trochiterien , 
of  Dumas.  This  muscle  seems  to  have  been  first  de- 
scribed by  Fallopius.  The  teres  minor  is  a thin  fleshy 
muscle,  situated  along  the  inferior  edge  of  the  infra- 
spinatus, and  is  in  part  covered  by  the  posterior  part 
of  the  deltoides. 

It  arises  fleshy  from  all  the  convex  edge  of  the  inferior 
costa  of  the  scapula ; from  thence  it  ascends  obliquely 
upwards  and  forwards,  and  terminates  in  a flat  tendon, 
which  adheres  to  the  lower  and  posterior  part  of  the 
capsular  ligament  of  the  joint,  and  is  inserted  into  the 
lower  part  of  the  great  tuberosity  of  the  os  humeri,  a 
little  below  the  termination  of  the  infra-spinatus. 

The  tendinous  membrane,  which  is  continued  fVom 
the  infra-spinatus,  and  spread  over  the  teres  minor, 
likewise  forms  a thin  septum  between  the  two  mus- 
cles. In  some  subjects,  however,  they  are  so  closely 
united,  as  to  be  with  difficulty  separated  from  each 
other.  Some  of  the  fibres  of  the  teres  minor  are  inter- 
mixed with  those  of  the  teres  major  and  subscapularis. 

The  uses  of  this  muscle  are  similar  to  those  of  the 
infra-spinatus. 

TE'RETRUM.  (From  repee),  to  pierce.)  The  tre- 
pan. . 

TERMINALIS.  Terminal : applied  to  flower-stalk 
when  it  terminates  a stem  or  branch  ; as  in  Ccntaurea 

scabiosa. 

TERMI'NTHUS.  (From  reppivOos,  the  turpentine 
tree:  so  called  from  their  resemblance  to  the  fruit  of 
the  turpentine-tree.)  Albatis.  Black  and  ardent  pus 
tules,  mostly  attacking  the  legs  of  females. 
TERNARY.  Consisting  of  the  number  three,  which 


TES 


TET 


some  chemical  and  mystical  writers  have  made  strange 
work  with ; but  the  most  remarkable  distinction  of  tl*s 
kind,  and  the  only  one  worth  notice,  is  that  of  Hippo- 
crates, who  divides  the  parts  of  a human  body  into  con- 
tinentes,  contenta,  and  iinpetum  facientes,  though  the 
latter  is  resolvable  into  the  mechanism  of  the  two  for- 
mer, rather  than  any  thing  distinct  in  itself. 

TERNATUS.  Ternate  : applied  in  botany  to  a leaf 
which  consists  of  three  leaflets,  as  that  of  the  trefoil. 

TERNUS.  Ternate  : applied  to  leaves,  when  there 
are  three  together ; as  in  many  of  the  plants  of  Chili 
and  Peru,  which  seem  particularly  disposed  to  this  ar- 
rangement, and  in  Verbena  triphylla. 

TE'RRA.  See  Earth. 

1 Terra  cariosa.  Rotten  stone,  a species  of  non- 
eftervescent  chalk,  of  a brown  colour. 

Terra  catechu.  See  Acacia  catechu. 

Terra  damnata.  See  Caput  mortuum. 

Terra  foliata  tartari.  The  acetate  of  potassa. 
Terra  jafonica.  Japan  earth.  See  Acacia  catechu. 
Terra  lemnia.  See  Bole. 

Terra  livonica.  See  Bole. 

Terra  marita.  The  curcuma,  or  turmeric-root,  is 
sometimes  so  called. 

Terra  mortua.  See  Caput  mortuum. 

Terra  ponderosa.  The  heavy  spar. 

Terra  ponderosa  salita.  See  Murias  baryta. 
Terra  sienna.  A brown  ochre  found  at  Sienna,  in 
Italy,  used  in  painting,  both  raw  and  burnt. 

Terra  sigillata.  See  Bole. 

Terra  verte.  An  ore  used  in  painting,  which 
contains  iron  in  some  unknown  state  mixed  with  clay, 
and  sometimes  with  chalk  and  pyrites. 

Terr/e  oleum.  See  Petroleum. 

Terrea  absorbentia.  Absorbent  earths,  distin- 
guishable from  other  earthy  atid  stony  substances  by 
their  solubility  in  acids ; as  chalk,  crabs’  claws,  oyster- 
shells,  egg-shells,  pearl,  coral,  <fcc. 

TERRENUS.  Terrene,  earthy:  applied-  to  plants 
which  grow  in  the  earth  only,  in  opposition  to  those 
which  live  only  in  water. 

Te'rthra.  (From  repdpov,  a crane.)  The  middle 
and  lateral  parts  of  the  neck. 

TERTIAN.  A third-day  ague.  See  Febris  inter- 
mittens. 

Tertian  ague.  See  Febris  intermittens. 
TERTIA'NA.  See  Febris  intermittens. 

Terttana  duplex.  A tertian  fever  that  returns 
every  day  ; but  the  paroxysms  are  unequal,  every  other 
fit  being  alike. 

Tertiana  duplicata.  A tertian  fever  returning 
every  other  day ; but  there  are  two  paroxysms  in  one 
day. 

Tertiana  febris.  See  Febris  intermittens . 
Tertiana  triplex.  A tertian  fever  returning  every 
day,  every  other  day  there  are  two  paroxysms,  and  but 
one  in  the  intermediate  one. 

TERTIANA'RIA.  (From  tertiana , a species  of  in- 
termittent fever,  which  is  said  to  be  cured  by  this  plant.) 
See  Scutellaria  g alericulata. 

Ter'tium  sal.  (From  tertius , third.)  A neutral  salt, 
as  being  the  product  of  an  acid  and  an  alkali,  making 
a third  body  different  from  either. 

Te'sskra.  (From  Teaoapa,  four.)  A four  square 
bone.  The  cuboid  bone. 

TEST.  Any  reagent  which,  added  to  a substance, 
teaches  us  to  discover  its  chemical  nature  or  composi- 
tion. See  Reagent. 

TE'STA.  {Quasi  losta ; from  torreo , to  burn.) 
1.  A shell.  The  oyster-shell. 

2.  In  botany,  it  is  the  name  of  the  skin  which  con- 
tains all  the  parts  of  a seed,  as  the  embryo,  the  lobes, 
the  vitellus,  and  albumen,  and  which  gives  shape  to 
the  seed,  for  the  skin  is  perfectly  formed  while  they  are 
but  a homogeneous  liquid.  The  testa  differs  in  thick- 
ness and  texture  in  different  plants.  It  is  sometimes 
single,  but  more  frequently  lined  with  a finer  and  very 
delicate  film,  called  by  Gsertner  membrana , as  may  be 
seen  in  a walnut,  and  the  kernel  of  a peach,  almond,  or 
plum. — Smith. 

Testa  probatrix.  A cupel  or  test.  A pot  for  sepa- 
rating baser  metals  from  gold  and  silver. 

TESTA'DO.  (From  testa,  a shell:  because  it  is 
covered  with  a shell.) 

1.  A tortoise,  also  a snail. 

2.  An  ulcer,  which,  like  a snail,  creeps  under  the 
skin. 


TESTye  preparat.e.  Prepared  oyster-shells.  Wash 
theshells,  previously  cleared  of  dirt,  with  boiling  water, 
then  prepare  them  as  is  directed  with  chalk. 

Testes  cerebri.  See  Tubercula  ouadrigemina. 

TESTICLE.  See  Testis. 

Testicle , swelled.  See  Orchitis. 

TESTICULUS.  ( Testiculus , diminutive  of  testis.) 
1.  A small  testicle. 

2.  The  orchis  plant : so  named  from  the  resemblance 
of  its  roots  to  a testicle. 

Testiculus  caninus.  See  Orchis  mascula. 

TE'STIS.  ( Testis , is,  in. ; a witness,  the  testes 
being  the  witnesses  of  our  manhood.)  The  testicle. 
Orchis.  They  are  also  called  didymi , and  by  some 
perin.  Two  little  oval  bodies  situated  within  the  scro- 
tum, and  covered  by  a strong,  white,  and  dense  coat, 
called  tunica  albuginea.  Each  testicle  is  composed  of 
small  vessels,  bent  in  a serpentine  direction,  arising 
from  the  spermatic  artery,  and  convoluted  into  little 
heaps,  separated  from  one  another  by  cellular  partitions. 
In  each  partition  there  is  a duct  receiving  semen  from 
the  small  vessels;  and  all  the  ducts  constitute  a net 
which  is  attached  to  the  tunica  albuginea.  From  this 
net-  work  twenty  or  more  vessels  arise,  all  of  which  are 
variously  contorted,  and,  being  reflected,  ascend  to  the 
posterior  margin  of  the  testis,  where  they  unite  into  one 
common  duct,  bent  into  serpentine  windings,  and  form- 
ing a hard  body  called  the  epididymis.  The  spermatic 
arteries  are  branches  of  the  aorta.  The  spermatic  veins 
empty  themselves  into  the  vena  cava  and  emulgent 
vein.  The  nerves  of  the  testicle  are  branches  of  the 
lumbar  and  great  intercostal  nerve.  The  use  of  the 
testicle  is  to  secrete  the  semen. 

TETANIC..  Tetanicus.  Appertaining  to  tetanus 
or  cramp. 

Tetano'mata.  (From  tetovoo),  to  smooth.)  T eta- 
no  thr  a.  Medicines  which  smooth  the  skin,  and  remove 
wrinkles. 

TETANUS.  {Tetanus,  i,  m. ; from  teivw,  to  stretch. ) 
Spasm  with  rigidity.  Convulsio  indica  ; Holotonicos  ; 
Rigor  nervosus.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Neu- 
roses, and  Order  Spasmi,  of  Cullen  ; characterized  by 
a spasmodic  rigidity  of  almost  the  whole  body.  The 
varieties  of  tetanus  are,  1.  Opisthotonos,  where  the 
body  is  thrown  back  by  spasmodic  contractions  of  the 
muscles.  2.  Emprosthotonos , the  body  being  bent  for- 
wards. 3.  Trismus, , the  locked  jaw.  Tetanus  is  often 
symptomatic  of  syphilis  and  worms. 

These  affections  arise  more  frequently  in  warm  cli- 
mates than  in  cold  ones,  and  are  very  apt  to  occur  when 
much  rain  or  moisture  quickly  succeeds  excessively  dry 
and  sultry  weather.  They  attack  persons  of  all  ages, 
sexes,  temperaments,  and  complexions,  but  the  male 
sex  more  frequently  than  the  female,  and  those  of  a 
robust  and  vigorous  constitution  than  those  of  a weak 
habit.  Ah  idea  is  entertained  by  many,  Dr.  Thomas 
observes,  that  negroes  are  more  predisposed  to  attacks 
of  tetanus  than  white  people : they  certainly  are  more 
frequently  affected  with  it,  but  this  circumstance  does 
not  arise  from  any  constitutional  predisposition,  but 
from  their  being  more  exposed  to  punctures  and  wounds 
in  the  feet,  by  nails,  splinters  of  wood,  pieces  of  broken 
glass,  &c.  from  usually  going  bare-footed. 

Tetanic  affections  are  occasioned  either  by  exposure 
to  cold,  or  by  some  irritation  of  the  nerves,  in  conse- 
quence of  local  injury  by  puncture,  incision,  or  lacera- 
tion. Lacerated  wounds  of  tendinous  parts  prove,  in 
warm  climates,  a never-failing  source  of  these  com- 
plaints. In  cold  climates,  as  well  as  in  warm,  the 
locked  jaw  frequently  arises  in  consequence  of  the 
amputation  of  a limb. 

When  the  disease  has  arisen  in  consequence  of  a 
puncture,  or  any  other  external  injury,  the  symptoms 
show  themselves  generally  about  the  eighth  day;  bu 
when  it  proceeds  from  exposure  to  cold,  they  generally 
make  their  appearance  much  sooner. 

In  some  instances  it  comes  on  suddenly,  and  with 
great  violence  ; but  it  more  usually  makes  its  attack  in 
a gradual  manner  ; in  which  case,  a slight  stiffness  is 
at  first  perceived  in  the  back  part  of  the  neck,  which, 
after  a short  time,  becomes  considerably  increased,  and 
at  length  renders  the  motion  of  the  head  both  difficult 
and  painful. 

With  the  rigidity  of  the  head  there  is  likewise  an 
uneasy  sensation  at  the  root  of  the  tongue,  together  with 
some  difficulty  in  swallowing,  and  a great  tightness  is 
perceived  about  the  chest,  with  a pain  at  the  extremity 

343 


TET 


TEU 


of  the  sternum,  shooting  into  the  back.  A stiffness  also 
takes  place  in  the  jaws,  which  soon  increases  to  such 
a height,  that  the  teeth  become  so  closely  set  together, 
as  not  to  admit  of  the  smallest  opening.  This  is  what 
is  termed  the  locked  jaw,  or  trismus 

In  some  cases,  the  spasmodic  affection  extends  no 
further.  In  others  the  spasms  at  this  stage  of  the  dis- 
ease, returning  with  great  frequency  become  likewise 
more  general,  and  now  affect  not  only  the  muscles  of 
the  neck  and  jaws,  but  likewise  those  of  the  whole 
spine,  so  as  to  bend  the  trunk  of  the  body  very  forcibly 
backwards,  and  this  is  what  is  named  opisthotonos. 
Where  the  body  is  bent  forwards  the  disease  is  called 
emprosthotonos. 

During  the  whole  course  of  the  disorder,  the  abdomi- 
nal muscles  are  violently  affected  with  spasm,  so  that 
the  belly  is  strongly  retracted,  and  feels  very  hard,  most 
obstinate  costiveness  prevails,  and  both  the  flexor  and 
extensor  muscles  of  the  lower  extremities  are  commonly 
affected  at  the  same  time  so  as  to  keep  the  limbs  rigidly 
extended. 

The  flexors  of  the  head  and  trunk  become  at  length 
so  strongly  affected,  as  to  balance  the  action  of  the  ex- 
tensor, and  to  keep  the  head  and  trunk  so  rigidly  ex- 
tended and  straight,  as  to  render  it  incapable  of  being 
moved  in  any  direction.  The  arms,  which  were  little 
affected  before,  are  now  likewise  rigidly  extended,  the 
tongue  also  becomes  affected  with  spasm,  and,  being 
convulsively  darted  out,  is  often  much  injured  by  the 
teeth  at  that  moment  snapping  together.  It  is  to  this 
state  of  the  disease  that  the  term  tetanus  has  been 
strictly  applied. 

The  disorder  continuing  to  advance,  every  organ  of 
voluntary  motion  becomes  affected  ; the  eyes  are  rigid 
and  immoveable,  the  countenance  is  hideously  dis- 
torted, and  expresses  great  distress;  the  strength  is  ex- 
hausted, and  the  pulse  becomes  irregular,  and  one  uni- 
versal spasm  puts  a period  to  a most  miserable  state  of 
existence. 

Attacks  of  tetanus  are  seldom  attended  with  any 
fever,  but  always  with  violent  pain,  and  the  spasms  do 
not  continue  for  a constancy,  but  the  muscles  admit  of 
some  remission  in  their  contraction,  which  is  frequently 
renewed,  especially  if  the  patient  makes  the  least 
attempt  to  speak,  drink,  or  alter  his  position. 

When  tetanic  affections  arise  in  consequence  of  a 
wound,  puncture,  or  laceration,  in  warm  climates,  Dr. 
Thomas  observes,  they  are  almost  sure  to  prove  fatal. 
The  locked  jaw  in  consequence  ef  an  amputation, 
likewise  proves  usually  fatal.  When  these  affections 
are  produced  by  an  exposure  to  cold,  they  may  in  most 
cases  be  removed  by  a timely  use  of  proper  remedies, 
although  a considerable  space  will  probably  elapse  be- 
fore the  patient  will  be  able  to  recover  his  former 
strength. 

On  dissections  of  this  disease,  slight  effusions  within 
the  cranium  have  been  observed  in  a few  instances: 
but  in  by  far  the  greater  number,  nothing  has  been  dis- 
covered, either  in  the  brain,  or  any  other  organ. 

The  general  indications  are,  1.  To  remove  any  local 
irritation,  which  may  appear  to  have  excited  the  dis- 
ease; 2.  To  lessen  the  general  irritability,  and  spas- 
modic tendency;  3.  To  restore  the  tone  of  the  system. 
If  a thorn,  or  other  extraneous  substance,  be  lodged  in 
any  part,  it  must  be  extracted;  any  spicula  of  bone, 
which  may  have  brought  on  the  disease  after  amputa- 
tion, should  be  removed  ; a punctured  wound  ought  to 
be  dilated,  &.c.  Some  have  proposed  dividing  the 
nerve  going  to  the  part,  or  even  amputating  this,  to  cut 
off  the  irritation ; others  paralyzing  the  nerves  by 
powerful  sedatives,  or  destroying  them  by  caustics ; 
others  again  exciting  a new  action  in  the  part  by  active 
stimulants  ; but  the  efficacy,  and  even  propriety  of  such 
measures,  is  doubtful.  To  fulfil  the  second  indication, 
various  means  have  been  proposed.  The  abstraction 
of  blood,  recommended  by  Dr.  Rush,  might  perhaps 
appear  advisable  in  a vigorous  plethoric  habit  in  the 
beginning  of  the  disease,  bat  it  has  generally  proved  of 
little  utility,  or  even  hurtful,  and  is  rather  contra-indi- 
cated by  the  state  of  the  blood.  Purging  is  a less  ques- 
tionable measure,  as  costiveness  generally  attends  the 
disease,  and  in  many  cases  it  has  appeared  very  bene- 
ficial, especially  when  calomel  was  employed.  It  has 
been  found  also,  that  a salivation,  induced  by  mercury, 
has  sometimes  greatly  relieved  the  disorder;  but  in 
other  instances  it  has  failed  altogether.  The  remedy 
which  has  been  oftenest  employed,  and  with  the  most 


decided  aavantage,  is  opium,  and  sometimes  prodigious 
quantities  of  it  have  been  exhibited:  indeed,  small 
doses  are  useless,  and  even  large  ones  have  only  a tem- 
porary effect,  so  that  they  must  be  repeated,  as  the  vio- 
lence of  the  symptoms  is  renewed  ; and  where  the 
patient  cannot  swallow,  it  may  be  tried  in  glyster,  or 
freely  rubbed  into  the  skin.  Other  sedative  and  anti- 
spasmodic  remedies,  have  been  occasionally  resorted 
to,  as  hemlock,  tobacco,  musk,  camphor  &c.  but  for 
the  most  part  with  less  satisfactory  results.  The  warm 
bath  has  sometimes  proved  a useful  auxiliary  in  cold 
climates  ; but  the  cold-bath  is  much  more  relied  upon, 
especially  in  the  West  Indies,  usually  in  conjunction 
with  the  liberal  use  of  opium.  In  Germany,  alkaline 
baths,  and  the  internal  use  of  the  same  remedies,  are 
stated  to  have  been  decidedly  serviceable.  Others 
have  advised  the  large  use  of  bark  and  wine,  which 
seem,  however,  rather  calculated  to  be  preventives,  or 
to  fulfil  the  third  indication ; yet  wine  may  be  employed 
rather  as  nourishment,  since  in  severe  cases  of  the  dis 
ease  little  else  can  be  taken.  Electricity  seems  too 
hazardous  a remedy  to  be  tried  in  a general  affection, 
especially  in  the  muscles  of  respiration ; but  if  con- 
fined to  the  jaw,  it  may  be  useful  in  a mild  form.  At 
the  period  of  convalescence  the  strength  must  be  re- 
stored by  suitable  diet  and  medicines,  the  cold-bath, 
regular  exercise,  &c. ; and  removing  the  patient  from 
the  West  Indies  to  a colder  climate,  till  the  health  is 
fully  established,  would  be  a very  proper  precaution. 

Tetartje'us.  (Teraprato?,  fourth.)  A quartan  fever. 

TETRADYNAMIA.  (From  reoaapes,  four,  and 
dvvapiSi  power.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the 
sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  containing  hermaphrodite 
flowers,  with  six  stamens,  four  of  which  are  long,  and 
two  short. 

TETRAGONUS.  Quadrangular,  square : applied 
to  several  parts  of  plants,  as  Caulis  tetragonus , in  that 
of  the  Lamiurn  album , and  a multitude  of  plants;  Fo- 
lium tetragonium,  with  four  edges,  or  prominent  angles, 
as  that  of  Iris  tuberosa. 

TETRAGYNIA.  (From  reooapts,  four,  and  yvvrj, 
a wife.)  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in  several 
of  the  classes  of  the  sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  con 
sisting  of  plants  which,  to  the  classic  character,  what- 
ever it  is,  add  the  circumstance  of  having  four  pistils. 

Tetramy'rum.  (From  rerpas,  four,  and  pvpov,  an 
ointment.)  An  ointment  of  four  ingredients. 

TETRANDRIA.  (From  reaaapes,  four,  and  avrjp, 
a husband.)  The  name  of  a class  of  plants  in  the 
sexual  system  of  Linnaeus.  To  it  belong  those  which 
have  hermaphrodite  flowers  with  four  stamina  of  equal 
length. 

Tetrangu'ria.  (From  rsrpaf  four,  and  ayyos,  a cup: 
so  called  because  its  fruit  resembles  a cup  divided  into 
four  parts.)  The  citrul. 

TETRAPETALOUS.  Four-petalled : applied  to 
the  flower  that  consists  of  four  single  petals  or  leaves 
placed  around  the  pistil. 

TETRAPHA'RMACUM.  (From  rerpa s,  four,  and 
( pappaKov , a drug.)  A medicine  composed  of  four  in- 
gredients. 

TETRAPHYLLUS.  (From  rerpas,  four,  and  (pvXXov, 
a leaf.)  Four-leaved. 

TETTER.  See  Herpes. 

TEU'CRIUM.  ( Teucrium , it,  n. ; from  Teucer, 

who  discovered  it.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linnrean  system.  Class,  Didynamia ; Order, 
Oymnospcrmia.  The  herb  speedwell. 

Teucrium  capitatum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  poley  mountain  of  Montpellier.  Polium  monta- 
num.  This  plant  bears  the  winter  of  our  climate,  and 
is  generally  substituted  for  the  candy-species. 

Teucrium  CHAMiEDRVS.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  germander.  Chamtedrys ; Cbameedrys 
minor  repens , vulgaris;  Quercula  calamandrina; 
Trissago  ; Chamcedrops,  of  Paulus  A2gineta,  and  Ori 
basins.  This  plant,  called  creeping  germander,  small 
germander,  and  English  treacle  ; Teucrium— foliis  cu- 
neiformi-ovdtis,  incisis,  crenatis , petiolatis  ; fioribuS 
ternis ; caulibus  proenmbenlibus , subpilosis,  of  Lin- 
naeus, has  a moderately  bitter  and  somewhat  aromatic 
taste.  It  was  in  high  repute  among  the  ancients  in  in 
termittent  fevers,  rheumatism,  and  gout;  and  where 
an  aromatic  bitter  is  wanting,  germander  may  be  ad- 
ministered with  success.  The  best  lime  forgathering 
this  herb  is  when  the  seeds  are  formed,  and  the  tops 
are  then  preferable  to  the  leaves.  When  dry,  the  dose 


THA 


THE 


is  from  3ss.  to  3j.  Either  water  or  spirit  will  extract 
their  virtue ; but  the  watery  infusion  is  more  bitter. 
This  plant  is  an  ingredient  in  the  once  celebrated 
powder  called  from  the  Duke  of  Portland,  Portland 
powder. 

Teucrium  champ.epitys.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  ground-pine.  Chamwpitys ; Arthetica ; Arthretica ; 
Ajiiga ; Abiga ; Iva  arthritic  a ; Holocyron;  Ionia; 
Sideritis.  Common  ground-pine.  This  low  hairy 
plant,  Teucrium—foliis  trifidis,  linearibus,  inlcgerri- 
mis  ; floribus  sessilibus , later alibus,  solitariis  ; caule 
diffuso,  of  Linnaeus,  has  a moderately  bitter  taste,  and 
a resinous,  not  disagreeable  smell,  somewhat  like  that 
of  the  pine.  The  tops  of  leaves  are  recommended  as 
aperients  and  corroborants  of  the  nervous  system,  and 
said  to  be  particularly  serviceable  in  female  obstruc- 
tions and  paralytic  disorders. 

Teucrium  creticum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
poley  mountain  of  Candy.  Polium  creticum.  The 
tops  and  whole  herb  enter  the  antiquated  compounds 
mithridale  and  theriaca.  The  plant  is  obtained  from 
the  island  of  Candy  ; has  a moderately  aromatic  smell, 
and  a nauseous  bitter  taste.  It  is  placed  among  the 
aperients  and  corroborants. 

Teucrium  iva.  Chamcepitys  moschata ; Iva  mos- 
chata  monspeliensium ; Chamcepitys  anthyllus.  French 
ground-pine.  It  is  weaker,  but  of  similar  virtues  to 
Chamspitys. 

Teucrium  marum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Marum  syriacum  ; Marum  creticum ; Major  ana  sy- 
riaca ; Marum  verum  ; Marum  cortusi ; Chaemedrys 
incana  maritima ; Marum  germander,  or  Syrian  herb 
mastich.  This  shrub  is  the  Teucrium—foliis  integer- 
rimis  ovatis  acutis  petiolatis , subtus  tomcntosis ; Jiuri- 
bus  racemosis  secundis,  of  Linnaeus.  It  grows  plenti- 
fully in  Greece,  Egypt,  Crete,  and  Syria.  The  leaves 
and  younger  branches,  when  recent,  on  being  rubbed 
between  the  fingers,  emit  a volatile  aromatic  smell, 
which  readily  excites  sneezing ; to  the  taste  they  are 
bitterish,  accompanied  with  a sensation  of  heat  and 
acrimony.  Judging  from  these  sensible  qualities  of  the 
plant,  it  may  be  supposed  to  possess  very  active  powers. 
It  is  recommended  as  a stimulant  aromatic,  and  deob- 
struent; and  Linnaeus,  Rosenstein,  and  Bergius,  speak 
highly  of  its  utility.  Dose,  ten  grains  to  half  a drachm 
of  the  powdered  leaves,  given  in  wine.  At  present, 
however,  marum  is  chiefly  used  as  an  errhine. 

Teucrium  montanum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  poley  mountain. 

Teucrium  folium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
golden  poley  mountain. 

Teucrium  scordium.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Scordium.  Trissago  palustris ; Chameedrys  palus- 
tris ; Allium  redolens.  Water  germander.  The  leaves 
of  this  plant  have  a smell  somewhat  of  the  garlic  kind, 
from  which  circumstance  it  is  supposed  to  take  its 
name,  to  the  taste  they  are  bitterish  and  slightly  pun- 
gent. The  plant  was  formerly  in  high  estimation,  but 
is  now  justly  fallen  into  disuse,  although  recommended 
by  some  in  antiseptic  cataplasms  and  fomentations. 

TEU'THRUM.  T cvdpov.  The  herb  polium.  See 
Teucrium  polium. 

THA'LAMUS.  ( QaXapos',  Thalamus,  i,  m.  abed.) 

A bed  : the  term  applied  to  what  is  supposed  to  be  the 
origin  of  the  optic  nerve,  and  to  the  receptacle  of  parts 
of  fructification  of  plants.  See  Receptaculum. 

Thalamus  nervi  optici.  Two  bodies  which  form 
in  part  the  optic  nerve,  placed  near  to  each  other,  in 
appearance  white,  protruding  at  the  base  of  the  lateral 
ventricles,  and  running  in  their  direction  inwards,  a 


little  downwards,  and  upwards,  are  called  the  Tha 
lami  nervorum  opticorum. 

Thalasso'meli.  (From  daXaaaa,  the  sea,  and  psXi, 
honey  , A medicine  composed  of  sea-water  and  honey. 

THALICTRUM.  ( Thalictrum , ri,  n. ; from  OaX Aw, 
to  flourish.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linntean  system.  Class,  Polyandria;  Order,  Poly- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  poor  man’s 
rhubarb.  See  Thalictrum  flavum. 

Thalictrum  flavum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  poor  man’s  rhubarb.  The  root  of  this  plant  is 
said  to  be  aperient  and  stomachic,  and  to  come  very 
near  in  its  virtues  to  rhubarb.  It  is  a common  plant 
in  this  country,  but  seldom  used  medicinally. 
THALLITE.  Epidote,  orPistacite. 

THALLUS.  (From  SaXXog,  an  olive  bud,  or  green 
bough  ; from  §aX Aw,  to  be  verdant,  to  shoot  forth,  or 
spread  abroad.  A term  applied  by  Acharius,  for  the 
frond  or  foliage  of  a lichen,  whether  that  part  be  of  a 
leafy,  fibrous,  scaly,  or  crustaceous  nature. 

THA'PSIA.  (From  Thapsus,  the  island  where  it 
was  found.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnaeari  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia 
Thapsia  asclepias.  The  deadly  carrot.  The  root 
operates  violently  both  upwards  and  downwards,  and 
is  not  used  in  the  present  practice. 

THA'PSUS.  (From  the  island  Thapsus.)  The 
great  white  mullein,  or  cows’  lungwort. 

THE'A.  Tea.  The  dried  leaves  of  the  tea-tree,  of 
which  there  are  two  species,  viz.  1.  The  Thea  nigra, 
bohea,  or  black  tea ; and  2.  The  viridis,  or  green  tea  ; 
both  of  which  are  natives  of  China  or  Japan,  where 
they  attain  the  height  of  five  or  six  feet. 

Great  pains  are  taken  in  collecting  the  leaves  singly , 
at  three  different  times,  viz.  about  the  middle  of  Feb- 
ruary, in  the  beginning  of  March,  and  in  April.  Al- 
though some  writers  assert,  that  they  are  first  exposed 
to  the  steam  of  boiling  water,  and  then  dried  on  copper- 
plates ; yet  it  is  now  understood  that  such  leaves  are 
simply  dried  on  iron  plates,  suspended  over  a fire,  till 
they  become  dry  and  shrivelled  ; when  cool,  they  are 
packed  in  tin  boxes  to  exclude  the  air,  and  in  that  state 
exported  to  Europe. 

Teas  are  divided  in  Britain  into  three  kinds  o I green, 
and  five  of  bohea.  The  former  class  includes, 

1.  Imperial  or  bloom  tea,  having  a large  leaf,  a faint 
smell,  and  being  of  a light  green  colour. 

2.  Hyson , which  has  small  curled  leaves,  of  a green 
shade  inclining  to  blue. 

3.  Singlo  tea,  thus  termed  from  the  place  where  it 
is  cultivated. 

The  boheas  comprehend, 

1.  Souchong,  which,  on  infusion,  imparts  a yellowish 
green  colour. 

2.  Camho , a fine  tea,  emitting  a fragrant  violet  smelt 
and  yielding  a pale  shade ; it  receives  its  name  from 
the  province  where  it  is  reared. 

3.  Pekoe  tea  is  known  by  the  small  white  flowers  that 
are  mixed  with  it. 

4.  Congo  has  a larger  leaf  than  the  preceding  variety 

and  yields  a deeper  tint  to  water ; and,  * 

5.  Common  bohea,  the  leaves  of  which  are  of  a 
uniform  green  colour.  There  are  besides  other  kinds 
of  tea,  sold  under  the  names  of  gunpowder  tea,  See. 
which  differ  from  the  preceding  only  in  the  minuteness 
of  their  leaves,  and  being  dried  with  additional  care. 

The  following  interesting  results  of  experiments  on 
tea  by  Brande,  have  been  published  by  him  in  his 
Journal. 


One  hundred  parts  of  Tea. 

Soluble 

in 

W ater. 

Soluble 

in 

Alkohol. 

Precipit. 

with 

Jelly. 

Inert 

Residue. 

Green  Hyson, 

41 

44 

31 

56 

Ditto, 

...  12s. 

34 

43 

29 

57 

Ditto, 

...  10s. 

36 

43 

20 

57 

Ditto, 

...  8s. 

36 

42 

25 

58 

Ditto 

...  7s.  • 

31 

41 

24 

59 

Black  Souchong, 

...  12s. 

35 

36 

28 

64 

Ditto, 

...  10s. 

34 

37 

28 

63 

Ditto, 

...  8s. 

37 

35 

28 

63 

Ditto, 

36 

35 

24 

64 

Ditto, 

35 

31 

23 

65 

345 


A ' 


THI 


THE 

Mach  has  been  said  and  written  on  the  medicinal 
properties  of  tea;  in  its  natural  state  it  is  a narcotic 
plant,  cn  which  account  the  Chinese  refrain  from  its 
use  till  it  has  been  divested  of  this  property  by  keeping 
it  at  least  for  twelve  months.  If,  however,  good  tea  be 
drunk  in  moderate  quantities,  with  sufficient  milk  and 
sugar,  it  invigorates  the  system,  and  produces  a tempo- 
rary exhilaration  ; but  when  taken  too  copiously,  it  is 
apt  to  occasion  weakness,  tremor,  palsies,  and  various 
other  symptoms  arising  from  narcotic  plants,  while  it 
contributes  to  aggravate  hysterical  and  hypochondriacal 
complaints.  Tea  has  also  been  supposed  to  possess 
considerable  diuretic  and  sudorific  virtues,  which, 
however,  depend  more  on  the  quantity  of  warm  water 
employed  as  a vehicle,  than  the  quantity  of  tea  itself. 
Lastly,  as  infusions  of  these  leaves  are  the  safest 
refreshment  after  undergoing  great  bodily  fatigue  or 
mental  exertion,  they  afford  an  agreeable  beverage  to 
those  who  are  exposed  to  cold  weather ; at  the  same 
time  tending  to  support  and  promote  perspiration, 
which  is  otherwise  liable  to  be  impeded. 

Thea  germanica.  Fluellin  or  male  speedwell. 
See  Veronica  officinalis. 

THEBA'ICA.  {A  Thebaide  regione , from  the 
country  about  the  ancient  city  of  Thebes  in  Egypt, 
where  it  flourished.)  The  Egyptian  poppy. 

Thebesii  foramina.  The  orifices  of  veins  in  the 
cavities  of  the  heart. 

THE'CA.  (From  tiOtj/jli,  to  place.)  A case,  sheath, 
or  box.  1.  The  canal  of  the  vertebral  column. 

2.  The  capsule  or  dry  fructification  adhering  to  the 
apex  of  a frondose  stem. 

Theca  vertebralis.  The  vertebral  canal.  See 
Spine. 

THELY'PTERIS.  (From  dtjXvs , female,  and 
itrepu,  fern.)  The  female  fern. 

THE'NAR.  See  Flexor  brevis  pollicis  manus. 

THEOBRO'MA.  ( Theobroma , «e,  f. ; from  deoi-.  the 
gods,  and  flpwpa,  food : so  called  from  the  deliciousness 
of  its  fruit.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class’, 
Polyadelphia ; Order,  Decandria. 

Theobroma  cacao.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  which  affords  cocoa  and  chocolate. 

Theodo'ricum.  (From  6eoi,  the  gods,  and  dwpov,  a 
gift.)  The  pompous  name  of  some  antidotes. 

TIIERAPEI'A.  (From  OepaTremo,  to  heal.)  The- 
rapia.  The  art  of  healing  diseases.  See  Thera- 
peutica. 

THERAPEUTIC  A.  (From  S-epanevu),  to  cure.) 
T/icrapia.  Mclhodus  medendi.  Therapeutics.  That 
branch  of  medicine  which  treats  of  the  operation  of 
the  different  means  employed  for  curing  diseases,  and 
of  the  application  of  these  means. 

THERE ACA.  (From  $yp,  a viper,  or  venomous 
wild  beast.)  1.  Treacle,  or  molasses. 

2.  A medicine  appropriated  to  the  cure  of  the  bites 
of  venomous  animals,  or  to  resist  poisons. 

Theriaca  andromachi.  The  Venice  or  Mithridate 
treacle;  a composition  of  sixty- one  ingredients,  pre- 
pared, pulverized,  and  with  honey  formed  into  an 
electuary. 

Theriaca  coelestis.  Liquid  laudanum. 

Theriaca  communis.  Common  treacle,  or  mo- 
lasses. 

Theriaca  damocratis.  The  same  preparation  as 
mithridate.  See  Mithridatium. 

Theriaca  edinensis.  Edinburgh  theriaca.  The 
Confectio  opii. 

Theriaca  germanorum.  A rob  of  juniper-ber- 
ries. 

Theriaca  londinensis.  A cataplasm  of  cummin- 
seed,  bay-berries,  germander,  snake-root,  cloves,  and 
honey. 

Theriaca  rusticorum.  The  roots  of  the  common 
garlic  were  so  called.  See  A Ilium  sativum. 

THERIO'MA.  (From  Oypiou),  to  rage  like  a wild 
beast.)  A malignant  ulcer. 

THE'RMA.  A warm-bath  or  spring.  See  Mineral 
waters , and  Bath. 

THERMOMETER.  ( Thermomctrum ; from  Oeppy, 
heat,  and  perpov,  a measure.)  An  instrument  for  mea- 
suring the  degrees  of  heat.  A thermometer  is  a hollow 
tube  of  glass,  hermetically  sealed,  and  blown  at  one 
end  in  the  shape  of  a hollow  globe.  The  bulb  and 
part  of  the  tube  are  filled  with  mercury,  which  is  the 
only  fluid  that  expands  equally.  When  we  immerse  the 
bulb  of  the  thermometer  in  a hot  body,  the  mercury  I 
346 


expands,  and  of  course  rises  in  the  tube ; but  when 
we  plunge  it  into  a cold  body,  the  mercury  contracts, 
and  of  course  falls  in  the  tube. 

The  rising  of  the  mercury  indicates,  therefore,  an 
increase  of  heat;  its  falling,  a diminution  of  it;  and 
the  quantity  which  it  rises  or  falls,  denotes  the  propor- 
tion of  increase  or  diminution.  To  facilitate  observa- 
tion, the  tube  is  divided  into  a number  of  equal  parts, 
called  degrees. 

Further,  if  we  plunge  a thermometer  ever  so  often 
into  melting  snow  or  ice,  it  will  always  stand  at  the 
same  point.  Hence  we  learn  that  snow  or  ice  always 
begins  to  melt  at  the  same  temperature. 

If  we  plunge  a thermometer  repeatedly  into  water 
kept  boiling,  we  find  that  the  mercury  rises  up  to  a 
certain  point.  This  is  therefore  the  point  at  which 
water  always  boils,  provided  the  pressure  of  the  atmos- 
phere be  the  same. 

There  are  four  different  thermometers  used  at  present 
in  Europe,  differing  from  each  other  in  the  number  of 
degrees  into  which  the  space  between  the  freezing  and 
boiling  points  is  divided.  These  are  Fahrenheit’s 
Reaumur’s,  Celsius’s,  and  Delisle’s. 

The  thermometer  uniformly  used  in  Britain,  is  Fah- 
renheit’s; in  this  the  freezing  point  is  fixed  at  32° — the 
boiling  point,  at  212°  above  0° — or  the  part  at  which 
both  the  ascending  and  descending  series  of  numbers 
commence. 

In  the  thermometer  which  was  first  constructed  by 
Reaumur,  the  scale  is  divided  into  a smaller  number  of 
degrees  upon  the  same  length,  and  contains  not  more 
than  80°  between  the  freezing  and  the  boiling  points. 
The  freezing  point  is  fixed  in  this  thermometer  pre- 
cisely at  0°,  the  term  between  the  ascending  and  the 
descending  series  of  numbers.  Again,  100  is  the  num- 
ber of  the  degrees  between  the  freezing  and  the  boiling 
points  in  the  scale  of  Celsius  ; which  has  been  intro- 
duced into  France,  since  the  revolution,  under  the 
name  of  the  Centigrade  thermometer  ; and  the  freez- 
ing point  is  in  this,  as  in  the  thermometer  of  Reaumur, 
fixed  at  0°.  One  degree  on  the  scale  of  Fahrenheit 
appears,  from  this  account,  to  be  equal  to  4-9ths  of  a 
degree  on  that  of  Reaumur,  and  to  5-9ths  of  a degree 
on  that  of  Celsius. 

The  space  in  Delisle’s  thermometer  between  the 
freezing  and  boiling  points  is  divided  into  150°,  but  the 
graduation  begins  at  the  boiling  point,  and  increases 
towards  the  freezing  point.  The  boiling  point  is 
marked  0,  the  freezing  point  150.  Hence  180  F.  = 150 
D.,  or  6 F.  = 5 D.  To  reduce  the  degrees  of  Delisle’s 
thermometer  under  the  boiling  point  to  those  of  Fah- 
renheit, we  have  F.  = 212  — 6-5  D. ; to  reduce  those 
above  the  boiling,  point  F.  = 212  + 6-5  D.  Upon  the 
knowledge  of  this  proportion  it  is  easy  for  the  student 
to  reduce  the  degrees  of  any  of  these  thermometers  into 
the  degrees  of  any  other  of  them. 

Thieves-vinegar.  See  Acetum  aromaticum. 

THIGH.  See  Femur. 

THIGH-BONE.  See  Femur. 

THIRST.  Sitis.  The  sensation  by  which  we  ex- 
perience a desire  to  drink.  It  is  variable  according  to 
individuals,  and  it  is  rarely  uniform  in  the  same  per- 
son. Generally  speaking,  it  consists  of  a feeling  of 
dryness,  of  heat,  and  constriction,  which  reigns  in  the 
back  part  of  the  mouth,  the  pharynx,  oesophagus,  and 
sometimes  the  stomach.  Though  thirst  continue  but 
for  a short  time,  these  parts  swell  and  become  red,  the 
mucous  secretion  ceases  almost  entirely ; that  of  the 
follicles  changes,  becomes  thick  and  tenacious;  the 
flowing  of  the  saliva  diminishes,  and  its  viscosity  is 
sensibly  augmented. 

These  phenomena  are  accompanied  by  a vague  in- 
quietude, by  a general  heat;  the  eyes  become  red,  the 
mind  is  troubled,  the  motion  of  the  blood  is  accelerated, 
the  respiration  becomes  laborious,  the  mouth  is  fre- 
quently opened  wide,  in  order  to  bring  the  external  air 
into  contact  with  the  irritated  parts,  and  thus  to  pro- 
duce a momentary  ease. 

For  the  most  part,  the  inclination  to  drink  is  de- 
veloped, when  by  some  cause,  for  example,  heat  and 
dryness  of  the  atmosphere,  the  body  has  lost  a great 
deal  of  fluid  ; but  it  appears  under  a great  many  difi’er- 
ent  circumstances,  such  as  having  spoken  long,  having 
eaten  certain  sorts  of  food,  or  swallowed  a substance 
which  remains  in  the  oesophagus,  &c.  The  vicious 
habit  of  frequently  drinking,  and  the  desire  of  tasting 
some  liquids,  such  as  brandy,  wine,  &c.,  cause  the 


THR 


Trio 

developement  "of  a feeling  which  has  the  greatest 
analogy  with  thirst. 

There  are  people  who  never  felt  thirst,  who  drink 
from  a sort  of  sympathy,  but  who  could  live  a long 
time  without  thinking  of  it,  or  without  suffering  from 
the  want  of  it ; there  are  other  persons  in  whom  thirst 
is  often  renewed,  and  becomes  so  strong  as  to  make 
them  drink  from  forty  to  sixty  pints  of  liquid  in  twenty 
four  hours;  in  this  respect,  great  individual  differ- 
ences are  remarked. 

Thirst  is  an  internal  sensation,  an  instinctive  feel- 
ing ; it  belongs  essentially  to  the  organization,  and  ad- 
mits of  no  explanation. 

THISTLE.  See  Carduus. 

Thistle,  carline.  See  Carlina  acaulis. 

Thistle , holy.  See  Centaurea  benedicta. 

Thistle , pine.  See  Carlina  gummifera. 

THL A'SPI.  ( Thlaspi , n. ; indeclinable : from  0Aa«, 
to  break ; because  its  seed  appears  as  if  it  were  broken 
or  bruised.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  tire 
Linnaean  system.  Class,  Tetr adynamia ; Order,  Sili- 
culosa. 

2.  The  pharmaceutical  name  of  the  herb  penny-cress. 
Two  species  of  thlaspi  are  directed  in  some  phar- 
macopoeias for  medicinal  use the  Thlaspi  arvense, 
of  Linnaeus,  or  treacle  mustard  ; and  Thlaspi  campes - 
Ire,  of  Linnaeus,  or  mithridate  mustard.  The  seeds 
of  both  have  an  acrid  biting  taste,  approaching  to  that 
of  common  mustard,  with  which  they  agree  nearly  in 
their  pharmaceutic  qualities.  They  have  also  an  un- 
pleasant flavour,  somewhsU  of  the  garlic  or  onion 
kind. 

Thlaspi  arvense.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
treacle  mustard.  See  Thlaspi. 

Thlaspi  campestre.  Th  ■ systematic  name  of  the 
mithridate  mustard.  See  Thlaspi. 

THORACIC.  ( Thoracicus ; from  thorax , the  chest.) 
Belonging  to  the  thorax,  or  chest. 

Thoracic  duct.  Ductus  thoracicus.  Ductus 
Pecquettii.  The  trunk  of  the  absorbents;  of  a serpen- 
tine form,  and  about  the  diameter  of  a crow-quill.  It 
lies  upon  the  dorsal  vertebra,  between  the  aorta  and 
vena  azygos,  and  extends  from  the  posterior  opening 
of  the  diaphragm,  to  the  angle  formed  by  the  union  of 
the  left  subclavian  and  jugular  veins,  into  which  it 
opens  and  evacuates  its  contents.  In  this  course,  the 
thoracic  duct  receives  the  absorbent  vessels  from  al- 
most every  part  of  the  body. 

THORAX.  ( Thorax,  acts,  f.;  from, Sopea),  to  leap: 
because  in  it  the  heart  leaps.)  The  chest.  That  part 
of  the  body  situated  between  the  neck  and  the  abdo- 
men. The  external  parts  of  the  thorax  are,  the  com- 
mon integuments,  the  breasts,  various  muscles,  and 
the  bones  of  the  thorax.  (SeeBone,  and  Respiration.) 
The  parts  within  the  cavity  of  the  thorax  are,  the 
pleura  and  its  productions,  the  lungs,  heart,  thymus 
gland,  cesophagus,  thoracic  duct,  arch  of  the  aorta, 
part  of  the  vena  cava,  the  vena  azygos,  the  eighth  pair 
of  nerves,  and  part  of  the  great,  intercostal  nerve. 

THORINA.  An  earth  discovered  in  1816  by  Ber- 
zelius. He  found  it  in  small  q uantities  in  the  gadolinite 
of  Korarvet,  and  two  new  minerals  which  he  calls  the 
deutofluate  of  cerium,  and  the  double  fluate  of  cerium 
and  yttria.  It  resembles  zirconia. 

To  obtain  it  from  those  minerals  that  contain  prot- 
oxide of  cerium  and  yttria,  we  must  first  separate  the 
oxide  of  iron  by  succinate  of  ammonia.  The  new 
earth,  indeed,  may,  when  alone,  be  precipitated  by  the 
succinates ; but  in  the  analytical  experiments  in  which 
lie  has  obtained  it,  it  precipitated  in  so  small  a quan- 
tity along  with  iron,  that  he  could  not  separate  it  from 
that  oxide.  The  deutoxide  of  cerium  is  then  precipi- 
tated by  the  sulphate  of  potassa ; after  which  the  yttria 
and  the  new  earth  are  precipitated  together  by  caustic 
ammonia.  Dissolve  them  in  muriatic  acid.  Evapo- 
rate the  solution  to  dryness,  and  pour  boiling  water  on 
the  residue,  which  will  dissolve  the  greatest  part  of 
the  yttria;  but  the  undissolved  residue  still  contains  a 
portion  of  it.  Dissolve  it  in  muriatic  or  nitric  acid, 
and  evaporate  it  till  it  becomes  as  exactly  neutral  as 
possible.  Then  pour  water  upon  it,  and  boil  it  for  an 
instant.  The  new  earth  is  precipitated,  and  the  liquid 
contains  disengaged  acid.  By  saturating  this  liquid, 
and  boiling  it  a second  time,  we  obtain  a new  precipi- 
tate of  the  new  earth. 

This  earth,  when  separated  by  the  filter,  has  the  ap- 
pearance of  a gelatinous,  semitransparent  mass.  When 


washed  and  dried,  it  becomes  white,  absorbs  carbonic 
acid,  and  dissolves  with  effervescence  in  acids.  Though 
calcined,  it  retains  its  white  colour;  and  when  the 
heat  to  which  it  has  been  exposed  was  only  moderate,  it 
dissolves  readily  in  muriatic  acid  ; but  if  the  heat  has 
been  violent,  it  will  not  dissolve  till  it  be  digested  in 
strong  muriatic  acid.  This  solution  has  a yellowish 
colour;  but  it  becomes  colourless  when  diluted  with 
water,  as  is  the  case  with  glucina,  yttria,  and  alumina. 
If  it  be  mixed  with  yttria,  it  dissolves  more  readily  after 
having  been  exposed  to  heat.  The  neutral  solutions 
of  this  earth  have  a purely  astringent  taste,  which  is 
neither  sweet,  nor  saline,  nor  bitter,  nor  metallic.  In 
this  property  it  differs  from  all  other  species  of  earths, 
except,  zirconia. 

When  dissolved  in  sulphuric  acid  with  a slight 
excess  of  acid,  and  subjected  to  evaporation,  it  yields 
transparent  crystals,  which  are  not  altered  by  exposure 
to  the  air,  and  which  have  a strong  styptic  taste. 

This  earth  dissolves  very  easily  in  nitric  acid;  but 
after  being  heated  to  redness,  it  does  not  dissolve  in  it 
except  by  long  boiling.  The  solution  does  not  crystal- 
lize, but  forms  A mucilaginous  mass,  which  becomes 
more  liquid  by  exposure  to  the  air,  and  which,  when 
evaporated  by  a moderate  heat,  leaves  a white,  opaque 
mass,  similar  to  enamel,  in  a great  measure  insoluble 
in  water. 

It  dissolves  in  muriatic  acid,  in  the  same  manner  as 
in  nitric  acid.  The  solution  does  not  crystallize.  When 
evaporated  by  a moderate  heat,  it  is  converted  into  a 
syrupy  mass,  which  does  not  deliquesce  in  the  air,  but 
dries,  becomes  white  like  enamel,  and  afterward  dis- 
solves only  in  very  small  quantity  in  water,  leaving  a 
subsalt  undissolved ; so  that  by  spontaneous  evapora- 
tion it  lets  the  portion  of  muriatic  acid  escape  to  which 
it  owed  its  solubility. 

This  earth  combines  with  avidity  with  carbonic, 
acid.  The  precipitates  produced  by  caustic  ammonia, 
or  by  boiling  the  neutral  solutions  of  the  earth  in  acids, 
absorb  carbonic  acid  from  the  air  in  drying.  The  al- 
kaline carbonates  precipitate  the  earth  combined  with 
the  whole  of  their  carbonic  acid. 

The  ferruginous  prussiate  of  potassa  poured  into  a 
solution  of  this  earth,  throws  down  a white  precipi- 
tate, which  is  completely  redissolved  by  muriatic 
acid. 

Caustic  potassa  and  ammonia  have  no  action  on 
this  earth  newly  precipitated,  not  even  at  a boiling 
temperature. 

The  solution  of  carbonate  of  potassa,  or  carbonate 
of  ammonia,  dissolves  a small  quantity  of  it,  which 
precipitates  again  when  the  liquid  is  supersaturated 
with  an  acid,  and  then  neutralized  by  caustic  am- 
monia ; but  this  earth  is  much  less  soluble  in  the  al- 
kaline carbonates  than  any  of  the  earths  formerly 
known  that  dissolve  in  them. 

Thorina  differs  from  the  other  earths  by  the  follow- 
ing properties: — From  alumina,  by  its  insolubility  in 
hydrate  of  potassa ; from  glucina,  by  the  same  property: 
from  yttria,  by  its  purely  astringent  taste,  without  any 
sweetness,  and  by  the  property  which  its  solutions  pos- 
sess of  being  precipitated  by  boiling  when  they  do  not 
contain  too  great  an  excess  of  acid.  It  differs  from  zir- 
conia by  the  following  properties : — I.  After  being  heated 
to  redness,  it  is  still  capable  of  being  dissolved  in  acids 
2 . Sulphate  of  potassa  does  not  precipitate  it  from  its' 
solutions,  while  it  precipitates  zirconia  from  solutions 
containing  even  a considerable  excess  of  acid.  3.  It  is 
precipitated  by  oxalate  of  ammonia,  which  is  not  the 
case  with  zirconia.  4.  Sulphate  of  thorina  crystal- 
lizes readily,  while  sulphate  of  zirconia,  supposing  it 
free  from  alkali,  forms,  when  dried,  a gelatinous,  trans- 
parent mass,  without  any  trace  of  crystallization. 

THORINUM.  The  supposed  metallic  basis  of  tho- 
rina, not  hitherto  extracted. 

THORN.  See  Prunus  spinosa. 

Thorn,  JEgyptian.  See  Acacia  vera. 

THORN-APPLE.  See  Datura  stramonium. 

[TIIOROUGHWORT.  See  Eupatorium  perfolia- 
tum.  A.] 

THROMBOSIS.  ( Thrombosis,  is,  f. ; from  6pop6og.) 
The  same  as  thrombus. 

THRO'MBUS.  ( Thrombus,  i,  m.;  from  3-poeu),  to  di» 
turb.)  A small  tumour  which  sometimes  arises  after 
bleeding,  from  the  blood  escaping  from  the  vein  into 
the  cellular  structure  surrounding  it. 

THRUSH  See  Aphthcc. 


347 


THY 


TIB 


Thry'ptica.  (From  dpvnro),  to  break.)  Medicines 
which  are  said  to  have  the  power  of  destroying  stones 
in  the  bladder. 

THULITE.  A hard,  peach-blossom  coloured  mineral, 
found  at  Souland,  in  Tellemark,  in  Norway. 

THUMERSTONE.  See  Axinite. 

Thu'ris  cortex.  The  cascarilla  and  clutheria 
Darks  were  so  called.  See  Croton  cascarilla. 

THUS.  (From  Sow,  to  sacrifice : so  called  from  its 
great  use  in  sacrifices.)  See  Juniperus  lycia , and 
Pinus  abiee. 

Thus  jud^orum.  See  Thymiama. 

Thus  masculum.  See  Juniperus  lycia. 

THUY'A.  (From  Ovov,  odour:  so  named  from  its 
fragrant  smell.)  Thuja.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Monacia ; Order,  Monadelphia. 

Tiiuva  occidentalis.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
tree  of  life.  Arbor  vita.  Thuya — strobilis  Imvibus  ; 
squamis  obtusis,  of  Linnteus.  The  leaves  and  wood 
were  formerly  in  high  estimation  as  resolvents,  sudo- 
rifics,  and  expectorants,  and  were  given  in  phthisical 
affections,  intermittent  fevers,  and  dropsies. 

Thylaci'tis.  (From  dvia/cog,  a seed-vessel : so 
called  from  its  large  head.)  The  white  garden  poppy. 

THY'MBR A.  (A  name  borrowed  from  Dioscorides, 
whose  real  9up6pa,  however,  is  a species  of  Satureia.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Didynamia ; 
Order,  Gymnospermia. 

2.  See  Satureia  hortensis. 

Thymbra  hispanica.  The  name  given  by  Tourne- 
fort  to  the  common  herb  mastich.  See  Thymus  mas- 
tichina. 

THYME.  See  Thymus. 

Thyme,  lemon.  See  Thymus  serpyllum. 

Thyme , mother  of.  See  Thymus  serpyllum. 

Thymelce'a.  (From  Ovpog,  thyme,  and  e\aia,  an 
olive ; the  first  alluding  to  the  leaf,  and  the  latter  to 
the  shape  and  oiliness  of  the  fruit.)  See  Daphne 
gnidium. 

THYMIA'MA.  (From  dvya,  an  odour:  so  called 
from  its  odoriferous  smell.)  Muskwood.  Thus  judce- 
orum.  A bark  in  small  brownish  gray  pieces,  inter- 
mixed with  bits  of  leaves,  seeming  as  if  the  bark  and 
leaves  had  been  bruised  and  pressed  together ; brought 
from  Syria,  Cilicia,  &.c.  and  supposed  to  be  the  produce 
of  the  liquid  storax-tree.  This  bark  has  an  agreeable 
balsamic  smell,  approaching  to  that  of  liquid  storax,  and 
a sub-acrid  bitterish  taste,  accompanied  with  some 
slight  adstringency. 

Thy'mium.  (From  Ovpog,  thyme ; because,  it  is  of  the 
colour  of  thyme.)  A small  wart  upon  the  skin. 

Thymoxa'lme.  (From  Ovpog,  thyme,  olpg,  acid,  and 
aXf,  salt.)  A composition  of  thyme,  vinegar,  and  salt. 

THY'MUS.  ( Thymus , i , m.  Ano  tov  Svpo),  be- 
cause it  was  used  in  faintings ; or  from  $vpa,  an  odour, 
because  of  its  fragrant  smell.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Didynamia  ; 
Order,  Gymnospermia.  Thyme. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  thyme. 
See  Thymus  vulgaris. 

3.  A small  indolent  carnous  tubercle  like  a wart 
arising  about  the  anus,  or  the  pudenda,  resembling  the 
flowers  of  thyme,  from  whence  it  takes  its  name. 

Thymus  citratus.  See  Thymus  serpyllum. 

Thymus  creticus.  See  Satureia  capitata. 

Thymus  gland.  Qvpog.  A gland  of  considerable 
size  in  the  foetus,  situated  in  the  anterior  duplicature 
or  space  of  the  mediastinum,  under  the  superior  part 
of  tne  sternum.  An  excretory  duct  has  not  yet  been 
detected,  but  lymphatic  vessels  have  been  seen  going 
from  it  to  the  thoracic  duct.  Its  use  is  unknown. 

Thymus  mastichina.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  herb  mastich.  JMarum  vulgare;  Sampsu- 
chus ; Clinopodium  mastichina  gallorum ; Thymbra 
hyspanica;  Jaca  indica.  A low  shrubby  plant,  a native 
of  Spain,  which  is  employed  as  an  errhine.  It  has  a 
strong  agreeable  smell,  like  mastich.  Its  virtues  are 
similar  to  those  of  the  Marum  syriacum,  but  less 
powerful. 

Thymus  serpyllum.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Serpyllum ; Serpillum ; Gilarum  ; Serpyllum  vulgare 
minus.  Wild  or  mother  of  thyme.  Thymus— floribus 
capitatis,  caulibus  repentibus , foliis  planis  obtusis 
basi  ciliatis,  of  Linnaeus.  This  plant  has  the  same 
sensible  qualities  as  those  of  the  garden  thyme,  but  has 
a milder  and  rather  more  grateful  flavour.  Lemon 
thyme,  the  Serpyllum  citratum , is  merely  a variety  of 


this  plant.  It  is  very  pungent,  and  has  a particularly 
grateful  odour,  approaching  to  that  of  lemons. 

Thymus  vulgaris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  thyme.  This  herb,  the  Thymus — erectus  foliis 
revolutis  ovatis,  floribus  verticillulo  spicatis , of  Lin- 
naeus, has  an  agreeable  aromatic  smell,  and  a warm 
pungent  taste.  Its  virtues  are  said  to  be  resolvent,  em 
menagogue,  tonic,  and  stomachic  ; yet  there  is  no  dis- 
ease mentioned  in  which  its  use  is  particularly  recom- 
mended by  any  writer  on  the  materia  medica. 

THYRO.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  be- 
long to  muscles  which  are  attached  to  the  thyroid  car 
tilage ; as, 

Thyro  ARYTiENOtDEUs.  A muscle  situated  about 
the  glottis,  which  pulls  the  arytenoid  cartilage  forward 
nearer  to  the  middle  of  the  thyroid,  and  consequently 
shortens  and  relaxes  the  ligament  of  the  larynx. 

Thyro-hyoideus.  A muscle  situated  between  the 
os  hyoides  and  trunk,  which  pulls  the  os  hyoides  down- 
wards, and  the  thyroid  cartilage  upwards. 

Thyro-pharyngeus.  See  Constrictor  pharyngts 
inferior. 

Thyro-pharyngo-staphilinus.  See  Palato  pha- 

ryngeus. 

Thyro-staphilinu§.  See  Palato  pharyngeus. 

THYROID.  {Thyroideus ; from  Svpcog,  a shield 
andgufof,  resemblance  ; from  its  supposed  resemblanc* 
to  a shield.)  Resembling  a shield. 

Thyroid  cartilage.  Cartilago  thyroidea  ; Carh 
lago  scutiformus.  Scutiform  cartilage.  The  cartilage 
which  is  placed  perpendicular  to  the  cricoid  cartilages 
of  the  larynx,  constituting  the  anterior,  superior,  and 
largest  part  of  the  larynx.  It  is  harder  and  more  pro- 
minent in  men  than  in  women,  in  whom  it  forms  the 
pomum  adami. 

Thyroid  gland.  Glandula  thyroidea.  A large 
gland  situated  upon  the  cricoid  cartilage,  trachea,  and 
horns  of  the  thyroid  cartilage.  It  is  uncertain  wliethei 
it  be  conglobate  or  conglomerate.  Its  excretory  duel 
has  never  been  detected,  and  its  use  is  not  yet  known. 

THYRSUS.  ( Thyrsus,  i,  m. ; a young  sprout.)  In 
botany,  a bunch,  or  dense  and  close  pannicle,  more  oi 
less  of  an  ovate  form.  It  is  oblong  in  Tussilago  hybi . da, 
and  ovale  in  Tussilago  petasites. 

TIBIA.  (Tibia,  the  hautboy  ; qu.  tubia,  from  tuba, 
a tube:  so  called  from  its  pipe-like  shape.)  Facile 
majus  ; Arundo  major;  Fosilus ; and,  from  its  resem- 
blance to  an  old  musical  instrument,  Canna  major ; 
Canna-domestica  cruris.  The  largest  bone  of  the  leg. 
It  is  of  a long,  fliick,  and  triangular  shape,  and  is  situ- 
ated on  the  internal  part  of  the  leg.  Its  upper  extremity 
is  large,  and  flattened  at  its  summit,  where  we  observe 
two  articulating  surfaces,  a little  concave,  and  sepa- 
rated from  each  other  by  an  intermediate  irregular 
protuberance.  Of  these  two  cavities,  the  internal  one 
is  deepest,  and  of  an  oblong  shape,  while  the  external 
one  is  rounded,  and  more  superficial.  Each  of  these, 
in  the  recent  subject,  is  covered  by  a cartilage,  which 
extends  to  the  intermediate  protuberance,  where  it  ter- 
minates. These  two  little  cavities  receive  the  condyles 
of  the  os  femoris,  and  the  eminence  between  them  is 
admitted  into  the  cavity  which  is  seen  between  the  two 
condyles  of  that  bone  ; so  that  this  articulation  affords 
a specimen  of  the  complete  ginglymus.  Behind  the  in  • 
termediate  protuberance,  or  tubercle,  is  a pretty  deep 
depression,  which  serves  for  the  attachment  of  a liga- 
ment, and  likewise  to  separate  the  two  cavities  from 
each  other.  Under  the  edge  of  the  external  cavity  is  a 
circular  flat  surface,  covered  with  cartilage,  which 
serves  for  the  articulation  of  the  fibula ; and  at  the  fore- 
part of  the  bone  is  a considerable  tuberosity  of  an  inch 
and  a half  in  length,  to  which  the  strong  ligament  of 
the  rotula  is  fixed. 

The  body  of  the  tibia  is  smaller  than  its  extremities, 
and,  being  of  a triangular  shape,  affords  three  surfaces. 
Of  these,  the  external  one  is  broad,  and  slightly  hol- 
lowed by  muscles  above  and  below  ; the  internal  sur- 
face is  broad  and  flat,  and  the  posterior  surface  is  nar- 
rower than  the  other  two,  and  nearly  cylindrical.  This 
last  has  a siight  ridge  running  obliquely  across  it,  from 
the  outer  side  of  the  upper  end  of  the  bone  to  about 
one-third  of  its  length  dowinvards.  A little  below  this 
we  observe  a passage  for  the  medullary  vessels,  which 
is  pretty  considerable,  and  slants  obliquely  downwards. 
Of  the  three  angles  which  separate  these  surfaces,  the 
anterior  one,  from  its  sharpness,  is  called  the  spine  or 
shin.  This  ridge  is  not  straight,  but  describes  a figure 


TIL 


TIN 


like  an  Italic  /,  turning  first  inwards,  then  outwards, 
and  lastly  inwards  again.  The  external  angle  is  more 
rounded,  and  serves  lor  the  attachment  of  the  interos- 
seous ligament ; and  the  internal  one  is  more  rounded 
still  by  the  pressure  of  muscles. 

Thfe  tibia  enlarges  again  at  its  lower  extremity,  and 
terminates  in  a pretty  deep  cavity,  by  which  it  is  arti- 
culated with  the  uppermost  bone  of  the  foot.  This 
cavity,  in  the  recent  subject,  is  lined  with  cartilage. 
Its  internal  side  is  formed  into  a considerable  process, 
called  malleolus  interims,  which,  in  its  situation,  resem- 
bles the  styloid  process  of  the  radius.  This  process  is 
broad,  and  of  considerable  thickness,  and  from  its  liga- 
ments are  extended  to  the  foot.  At  its  back  part  we 
find  a groove,  lined  with  a thin  layer  of  cartilage,  in 
which  slide  the  tendons  of  the  flexor  digitorum 
longus,  and  of  the  tibialis  posticus  ; and  a little  behind 
this  is  a smaller  groove,  for  the  tendon  of  the  flexor 
longus  pollicis.  On  the  side  opposite  to  the  malleolus 
internus,  the  cavity  is  interrupted,  and  immediately 
above  it  is  a rough  triangular  depression,  which  is  fur- 
nished with  cartilaye,  and  receives  the  lower  end  of  the 
fibula. 

The  whole  of  this  lower  extremity  of  the  bone  seems 
to  be  turned  somewhat  outwards,  so  that  the  malleolus 
internus  is  situated  more  forwards  than  the  inner  bor- 
der of  the  upper  extremity  of  the  bone. 

In  the  foetus,  both  ends  of  the  tibia  are  cartilaginous, 
and  become  afterward  epiphyses. 

TIBI  AL.  ( Tibialis  ; from  tibia , the  bone  of  the  leg, 
so  called.)  Belonging  to  the  tibia. 

Tibial  artery.  Jlrteriatibialis.  The  two  princi- 
pal branches  of  the  popliteal  artery : the  one  proceeds 
forwards,  and  is  called  the  anterior  libial;  the  other 
backwards,  and  is  called  the  posterior  tibial ; of  which 
he  external  tibial,  thg  fibular,  the  external  and  internal 
Dlantar,  and  the  plantal  arch,  are  branches. 

TIBIALIS.  See  Tibial. 

Tibialis  anticus.  Tibio-sus-metatarsien , of  Du- 
mas. A flexor  muscle  of  the  foot,  situated  on  the  leg, 
which  bends  the  foot  by  drawing  it  upwards,  and  at  the 
same  time  turns  the  toes  inwards. 

Tibialis  gracilis  See  Plantaris. 

Tibialis  posticus.  Tibio-tarsien , of  Dumas.  A 
flexor  muscle  of  the  foot,  situated  on  the  leg,  which  ex- 
tends the  foot,  and  turns  the  toes  inwards. 

TIC  DOULOUREUX.  A painful  affection  of  a 
nerve,  so  called  from  its  sudden  and  momentary  excru- 
ciating stroke.  The  more  appropriate  name  is  neu- 
ralgia. It  mostly  attacks  the  face,  particularly  that 
branch  of  the  fifth  pair,  which  comes  out  of  the  infra- 
orbitary  foramen. 

Ti'glia  grana.  See  Croton  iiglium. 

TILBURY.  A small  town  in  Essex,  celebrated  for 
its  fort.  A mineral  water  is  found  at  West  Tilbury.  It 
is  an  aperient  and  chalybeate  now  seldom  used  medici- 
nally. 

TILE  ORE.  A species  of  octohedral  red  copper  ore. 

TI'LIA.  ( Tilia,  oe , f.;  TV}e\ea,utmus , theelm-tree.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnsean  sys- 
tem. Class,  Polyandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  lime,  or  linden- 
tree.  See  Tilia  europeea. 

Tilia  euroV/ea.  The  systematic  name  of  the  lime- 
tree.  The  flowers  of  this  tree  are  supposed  to  possess 
anodyne  and  antispasmodic  virtues.  They  have  a mo- 
derately strong  smell,  in  which  their  virtue  seems  to 
consist,  and  abound  with  a strong  mucilage.  They  are 
in  high  esteem  in  France.  See  Tilia. 

Tilli  grana.  See  Croton  tiglivm. 

TI'LMUS.  (From  riWw,  to  pluck.)  Floccitatio,  or 
picking  of  bed-clothes,  observable  in  the  last  stages  of 
some  disorders. 

[TILTON,  James,  M.D.  was  born  in  the  county  of 
Kent,  in  the  state  of  Delaware,  in  June,  1745.  His 
father,  dying  when  he  was  very  young,  left  him  to  the 
care  of  his  mother,  with  very  slender  means.  Not- 
withstanding this,  he  found  means  to  study  a profession, 
and  obtained  his  degree  of  doctor  in  medicine  from 
the  University  of  Pennsylvania.  He  then  commenced 
practice  in  his  native  State,  and  was  successful  in 
establishing  himself,  but  the  troubles  of  the  revolution 
soon  commenced,  and  in  1776  he  joined  the  army  of 
the  United  States  as  a surgeon,  and  was  afterward 
promoted  to  the  grade  of  hospital  surgeon.  After  the 
successful  termination  of  the  revolutionary  contest, 
when  Dr.  Tilton  saw  his  country  free  and  independent, 


he  once  more  retired  to  his  native  state,  and  recom* 
menced  the  practice  of  his  profession,  which  he  con- 
tinued for  many  years  with  distinguished  reputation 
and  abilities.  In  1812,  he  had  retired  to  his  country- 
seat  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Wilmington,  when  he 
was  again  called  to  take  an  active  part  in  a new 
contest  with  our  old  enemy.  After  the  declaration  of 
war  against  Great  Britain,  Dr.  Tilton  was  appointed 
Physician  and  Surgeon  General  of  the  United  States 
Army,  and  continued  to  act  in  that  capacity  during  the 
three  years  of  the  war. 

As  a physician  Dr.  Tilton  was  bold  and  decided  ; he 
never  temporized  with  disease.  His  remedies  were 
few  in  number,  but  generally  of  an  active  kind.  He 
died  in  May,  1822,  nearly  77  years  old.  His  publica- 
tions were  few,  but  valuable  and  useful.  His  friend, 
Dr.  McLane,  in  a eulogy  to  his  memory,  gives  the 
following  summary  of  his  character : 

“ In  whatever  view  we  may  consider  the  character 
of  Dr.  Tilton,  we  shall  find  many  traits  to  distinguish 
him  from  other  men.  He  was  in  many  respects  an 
original ; wholly  unlike  most  other  men  in  person, 
countenance,  manners,  speech,  gesture,  and  habits. 
His  height  was  about  six  feet  and  a half,  and  his  struc- 
ture slender.  Whether  he  walked  or  sat  still ; whether 
in  conversation  or  mute ; whether  he  ate,  drank,  or 
smoked ; whether  in  a grave  mood  or  indulging  in  his 
loud  laugh,  all  was  in  a style  peculiar  to  himself,  and 
most  remarkable.  For  honesty  and  frankness  he  was 
proverbial ; in  these  important  points  he  had  few 
equals,  certainly  no  superiors.  His  whole  life  afforded 
a luminous  example  of  the  effects  of  deep-rooted  prin- 
ciples and  moral  rectitude  upon  the  conduct  of  men; 
and  \%e  have  the  fullest  assurance  to  believe  that  he 
has  reached  those  realms  of  peace  and  happiness,  from 
which  he  can  never  be  separated  ; and  has  become  the 
‘just  man  made  perfect.’  "—Tkach-  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

Timac.  The  name  of  a root  imported  from  the  East 
Indies,  which  is  said  to  possess  diuretic  virtues,  and 
therefore  exhibited  in  dropsies.  It  is  not  known  from 
what  plant  it  is  obtained. 

TIN.  Stannum.  Jupiter  of  the  alchemists.  It  has 
been  much  doubted  whether  this  metal  is  found  native. 
In  the  opinion  of  Kirwan,  there  are  sufficient  authori- 
ties to  determine  the  question  in  the  affirmative.  The 
native  oxide  of  tin , or  tin  stone , occurs  both  massive 
and  crystallized.  Its  colour  is  a dark  brown,  sometimes 
yellowish-gray.  When  crystallized,  it  is  somewhat 
transparent.  The  wood  tin  ore  is  a variety  of  the  na- 
tive oxide,  termed  so  from  its  fibrous  texture.  This 
variety  has  hitherto  been  found  only  in  Cornwall.  It 
occurs  in  fragments  which  are  generally  round,  and  its 
colour  is  brown,  sometimes  inclining  to  yellow.  Tin  is 
also  found  mineralized  by  sulphur,  associated  always 
with  a portion  of  copper,  and  often  of  iron.  This  ore 
is  called  tin  pyrites.  Its  colour  is  yellowish-gray.  It 
has  a metallic  lustre,  and  a fibrous  or  lamellated  tex- 
ture ; sometimes  it  exhibits  prismatic  colours.  Tin  is 
comparatively  a rare  metal,  as  it  is  not  found  in  great 
quantity  any  where  but  in  Cornwall  or  Devonshire ; 
though  it  is  likewise  met  with  in  the  mines  of  Bohemia, 
Saxony,  the  island  of  Banca,  the  peninsula  of  Ma- 
lacca, and  in  the  East  Indies. 

Tin  is  a metal  of  a yellowish-white  colour,  consi- 
derably harder  than  lead,  scarcely  at  all  sonorous,  very 
malleable,  though  not  very  tenacious.  Under  the  ham- 
mer it  is  extended  into  leaves,  called  tin-foil,  which  are 
about  one  thousandth  of  an  inch  thick,  and  might  easily 
be  beaten  to  less  than  halt  that  thickness,  if  the  pur- 
poses of  trade  required  it.  Its  specific  gravity  is  7.29. 
It  melts  at  about  the  442°  of  Fahrenheit’s  thermometer ; 
and  by  a continuance  of  the  heat  it  is  slowly  converted 
into  a white  powder  by  oxidation.  Like  lead,  it  is 
brittle  when  heated  almost  to  fusion,  and  exhibits  a 
grained  or  fibrous  texture  if  broken  by  the  blow  of  a 
hammer.  It  may  also  be  granulated  by  agitation  at 
the  time  of  its  transition  ffom  the  fluid  to  the  solid 
state.  The  oxide  of  tin  resists  fusion  more  strongly  than 
that  of  any  other  metal ; from  which  property  it  is 
useful  to  form  an  opaque  white  enamel  when  mixed 
with  pure  glass  in  fusion.  The  brightness  of  its  surface, 
when  scraped,  soon  goes  off  by  exposure  to  the  air;  but 
it  is  not  subject  to  rust  or  corrosion  by  exposure  to  the 
weather. 

To  obtain  pure  tin,  the  metal  should  be  boiled  in  nitric 
acid,  and  the  oxide  which  falls  down  reduced  by  heat 
in  contact  with  charcoal,  in  a covered  crucible. 

349 


TIN 


TIN 


There  are  two  definite  combinations  of  tin  and 
oxygen.  The  first  or  protoxide  is  gray  : the  second  or 
peroxide  is  white.  The  first  is  formed  by  heating  tin  in 
the  air,  or  by  dissolving  tin  in  muriatic  acid,  and  adding 
water  of  potassa  to  the  solution  while  recent,  and 
before  it  has  been  exposed  to  air.  The  precipitate, 
after  being  heated  to  whiteness  to  expel  the  water  of 
the  hydrate,  is  the  pure  protoxide.  It  is  convertible 
into  the  peroxide  by  being  boiled  with  dilute  nitric  acid, 
dried  and  ignited. 

There  are  also  two  chlorides  of  tin.  When  tin  is 
burned  in  chlorine,  a very  volatile  clear  liquor  is  formed, 
a non-conductor  of  electricity,  and  which,  when  mixed 
with  a little  water,  becomes  a solid  crystalline  sub- 
stance, a true  muriate  of  tin,  containing  the  peroxide 
of  the  metal.  This,  which  has  been  called  the  liquor 
of  Libavius,  may  be  also  procured  by  heating  together 
tin-filings  and  corrosive  sublimate,  or  an  amalgam  of 
tin  and  corrosive  sublimate.  The  other  compound  of 
tin  and  chlorine  is  a gray  semitransparent  crystalline 
solid.  It  may  be  procured  by  heating  together  an 
amalgam  of  tin  and  calomel.  It  dissolves  in  water, 
and  forms  a solution,  which  rapidly  absorbs  oxygen 
from  the  air,  with  deposition  of  peroxide  of  tin. 

There  are  two  sulphurets  of  tin.  One  may  be  made 
by  fusing  tin  and  sulphur  together.  It  is  of  a bluish 
colour,  and  lamellated  texture.  It  consists  of  7.35  tin 
-f-  2 sulphur.  The  other  sulphuret,  or  the  bisulphuret, 
is  made  by  heating  together  the  peroxide  of  tin  and 
sulphur.  It  is  of  a beautiful  gold  colour,  and  appears 
in  fine  flakes. 

The  salts  of  tin  are  characterized  by  the  following 
general  properties: — 

1.  Ferro-prussiate  of  potassa  gives  a white  precipi- 
tate. 

2.  Hydrosulphuret  of  potassa,  a brownish  black  with 
the  protoxide ; and  a golden  yellow  with  the  peroxide. 

3.  Galls  do  not  affect  the  solutions  of  these  salts. 

4.  Corrosive  sublimate  occasions  a black  precipitate 
with  the  protoxide  salts  ; a white  with  the  peroxide. 

5.  A plate  of  lead  frequently  throws  down  metallic 
tin,  or  its  oxide,  from  the  saline  solutions. 

6.  Muriate  of  gold  gives,  with  the  protoxide  solutions, 
the  pu'-ple  precipitate  of  Cassius. 

7.  Muriate  of  platinum  occasions  an  orange  preci- 
pitate with  the  protoxide  salts. 

Concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  assisted  by  heat,  dis- 
solves half  its  weight  of  tin,  at  the  same  time  that  sul- 
phurous gas  escapes  in  great  plenty. 

Nitric  acid  and  tin  combine  together  very  rapidly 
without  the  assistance  of  heat. 

The  muriatic  acid  dissolves  tin  very  readily,  at  the 
same  time  that  it  becomes  of  a darker  colour,  and  ceases 
to  emit  fumes. 

Aqua  regia,  consisting  of  two  parts  nitric  and  one 
muriatic  acid,  combines  with  tin  with  effervescence, 
a lid  the  developement  of  much  heat. 

The  acetic  acid  scarcely  acts  upon  tin.  The  opera- 
tion of  other  acids  upon  this  metal  has  been  little  in- 
quired into.  Phosphate,  fluate,  and  borate  of  tin  have 
been  formed  by  precipitating  the  muriate  with*  the  re- 
spective neutral  salts. 

If  the  crystals  of  the  saline  combination  of  copper 
with  the  nitric  acid  be  grossly  powdered,  moistened, 
nd  rolled  up  in  tinfoil,  the  salt  deliquesces,  nitrous 
fumes  are  emitted,  the  mass  becomes  hot,  and  suddenly 
takes  fire.  In  this  experiment,  the  rapid  transition  of 
the  nitric  acid  to  the  tin  is  supposed  to  produce  or  de- 
velope  heat  enough  to  set  fire  to  the  nitric  salts ; but  by 
what  particular  changes  of  capacity,  has  not  been 
shown. 

If  small  pieces  of  phosphorus  be  thrown  on  tin  in 
fusion,  it  will  take  up  from  15  to  20  per  cent.,  and  form 
a silvery  white  phosphuret  of  a foliated  texture,  and 
soft  enough  to  be  cut  with  a knife,  though  but  little 
malleable.  This  phosphuret  may  be  formed  likewise 
by  fusing  tin  filings  with  concrete  phosphoric  acid. 

Tin  unites  with  bismuth  by  fusion,  and  becomes 
harder  and  more  brittle  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of 
that  metal  added.  With  nickel  it  forms  a white  bril- 
liant mass.  It  cannot  easily  be  united  in  the  direct 
way  with  arsenic,  on  account  of  the  volatility  of  this 
metal ; but  by  heating  it  with  the  combination  of  the 
arsenical  acid  and  potassa,  the  salt  is  partly  decom- 
posed; and  the  tin  combining  with  the  acid,  becomes 
converted  into  a brilliant  brittle  compound,  of  a plaited 
texture.  It  has  been  said,  that  all  tin  contains  arsenic; 

350 


and  that  the  crackling  noise  which  is  heard  upon  bend 
ing  pieces  of  tin,  is  produced  by  this  impurity;  but 
from  the  experiment  of  Bayen,  this  appears  not  to  be 
the  fact.  Cobalt  unites  with  tin  by  fusion,  and  forms 
a grained  mixture  of  a colour  slightly  inclining  to  violet 
Zinc  unites  very  well  with  tin,  increasing  its  hardness 
and  diminishing  its  ductility,  in  proportion  as  the  quan- 
tity of  zinc  is  greater. 

This  is  one  of  the  principal  additions  used  in  making 
pewter,  which  consists  for  the  most  part  of  tin. 

Antimony  forms  a very  brittle,  hard  mixture  with  tin, 
Tungsten  fused  with  twice  its  weight  of  tin,  affords  a 
brown  spongy  mass,  which  is  somewhat  ductile. 

The  uses  of  tin  are  very  numerous,  and  so  well 
known,  that  they  scarcely  need  be  pointed  out.  The 
tinning  of  iron  and  copper,  the  silvering  of  looking- 
glasses,  and  the  fabrication  of  a great  variety  of  ves- 
sels and  utensils  for  domestic  and  other  uses,  are  among 
the  advantages  derived  from  this  metal. 

TI  NCA.  (Tinea,  ce,  f.;  quasi  tincia:  so  called,  be 
cause  it  appears  as  if  it  were  dyed.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  fishes.  The  tench. 

Tinca:  os.  The  mouth  of  the  uterus  is  so  called  by 
some  writers  from  its  resemblance  to  a tenche’s  mouth. 

TINCAL.  Crude  borax,  as  it  is  imported  from  the 
East  Indies  in  yellow  greasy  crystals.  See  Borax. 

TINCTO  RIUS.  (From  a'w  o-o,  to  dye.)  An  epithet 
of  a species  of  broom ‘used  by  dyers.  The  genista 
tinctoria  of  Linnams. 

TINCTU'RA.  (From  tingo , to  dye.)  A tincture. 
A solution  of  any  substance  in  spirit  of  wine.  Recti- 
fied spirit  of  wine  is  the  direct  menstruum  of  the  re- 
sins, and  essential  oils  of  vegetables,  and  totally  extracts 
these  active  principles  from  sundry  vegetable  matters, 
which  yield  them  to  water  not  at  all,  or  only  in  part. 
It  dissolves  likewise  the  swee^saccharine  matter  of 
vegetables,  and  generally  those  parts  of  animal  bodies 
in  which  their  peculiar  smell  and  taste  reside. 

The  virtues  of  many  vegetables  are  extracted  almost 
equally  by  water  and  rectified  spirit ; but  in  the  watery 
and  spirituous  tinctures  of  them  there  is  this  differ- 
ence, that  the  active  parts  in  the  watery  extractions 
are  blended  with  a large  proportion  of  inert  gummy 
matter,  on  which  their  solubility  in  this  menstruum  in 
a great  measure  depends,  while  rectified  spirit  extracts 
them  almost  pure  from  gum.  Hence,  when  the  spirit- 
uous tinctures  are  mixed  with  watery  liquors,  a part  of 
what  the  spirit  had  taken  up  from  the  subject  generally 
separates  and  subsides,  on  account  of  its  having  been 
freed  from  that  matter,  which,  being  blended  with  it  in 
the  original  vegetable,  made  it  soluble  in  water.  This, 
however,  is  not  universal,  for  the  active  parts  of  some 
vegetables,  when  extracted  by  rectified  spirits,  are  not 
precipitated  by  water,  being  almost  soluble  in  both 
menstrua. 

Rectified  spirit  may  be  tinged  by  vegetables  of  all 
colours,  except  blue.  The  leaves  of  plants,  in  general, 
will  give  out  little  of  their  natural  colour  to  watery 
liquors,  but  communicate  to  spirit  the  whole  of  their 
green  tincture,  which  for  the  most  part  proves  elegant, 
though  not  very  durable. 

Fixed  alkaline  salts  deepen  the  colour  of  spirituous 
tinctures ; and  hence  they  have  been  supposed  to  pro- 
mote the  dissolving  power  of  the  menstruum,  though 
this  does  not  appear  from  experience.  In  the  trials 
which  have  been  made,  no  more  was  found  to  be  taken 
up  in  the  deep-coloured  tinctures  than  in  the  paler  ones, 
and  often  not  so  much.  If  the  alkali  be  added  after 
the  extraction  of  the  tincture,  it  will  heighten  the  co- 
lour as  much  as  when  mixed  with  the  ingredients  at 
first.  The  addition  of  these  salts  in  making  tinctures 
is  not  only  needless  but  prejudicial,  as  they  generally 
injure  the  flavour  of  aromatics,  and  superadd  a qua- 
lity sometimes  contrary  to  the  intention  of  the  medi- 
cine. 

Volatile  alkaline  salts,  in  many  cases,  promote  the 
action  of  the  spirits.  Acids  generally  weaken  it ; un 
less  when  the  acid  has  been  previously  combined  with 
the  vinous  spirit  into  a compound  of  new  qualities, 
called  dulcified  spirit. 

Tinctura  aloes.  Tincture.of  aloes.  Take  of  the 
extract  of  spike  aloe,  powdered,  half  an  ounce ; ex- 
tract of  liquorice,  an  ounce  and  a half ; water,  a pint ; 
rectified  spirit,  four  fluid  ounces.  Macerate  in  a sand- 
bath  until  the  extracts  are  dissolved,  and  then  strain 
This  preparation  possesses  stomachic  and  purgative 
qualities,  but  should  never  be  given  where  there  is  a 


TIN 


TIN 


tendency  to  hemorrhoids.  In  chlorotic  cases  and  I 
amenorrluEa,  it  is  preferred  to  other  purges.  The  dose 
is  from  half  to  a whole  fluid  ounce. 

Tinctura  aloes  composita.  Compound  tincture 
of  aloes,  formerly  called  Elixir  aloes  ; Elixir  propri- 
etatis.  Take  of  extract  of  spiked  aloe,  powdered 
saffron,  of  each  three  ounces  ; tincture  of  myrrh,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  A more 
stimulating  compound  than  the  former.  It  is  a useful 
application  to  old  indolent  ulcers.  The  dose  is  from 
half  a fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  aloes  vitriolata.  With  the  bitter  in- 
fusion, a drachm  or  two  of  this  elegant  tincture  is  ex- 
tremely serviceable  against  gouty  and  rheumatic  affec- 
tions of  the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  also  in  the 
weaknesses  of  those  organs  which  frequently  attend  old 
age. 

Tinctura  assafcetid®.  Tincture  of  assafcEtida, 
formerly  known  by  the  name  of  tinctura  feetida. 
Take  of  assafoetida,  four  ounces ; rectified  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  Diluted 
with  water,  this  is  mostly  given  in  all  kinds  of  fits,  by 
the  vulgar.  It  is  a useful  preparation  as  an  aniispas- 
modic,  especially  in  conjunction  with  sulphate  of 
zinc.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  aurantii.  Tincture  of  orange-peel, 
formerly  tinctura  corticis  aurantii.  Take  of  fresh 
orange-peel,  three  ounces ; proof  spirit,  two  pints. 
Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  A mild  and 
pleasant  stomachic  bitter. 

Tinctura  benzoini  composita.  Compound  tinc- 
ture of  benzoin,  formerly  known  by  the  names  of 
tinctura  bemoes  composita , and  balsa  mum.  traumati- 
curn.  Take  of  benzoin,  three  ounces ; thorax  balsam, 
strained,  two  ounces;  balsam  of  Tolu,  an  ounce  ; ex- 
tract of  spiked  aloe,  half  an  ounce  ; rectified  spirit, 
two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain. 
This  tincture  is  more  generally  applied  externally  to 
ulcers  and  wounds  than  given  internally,  though  pos- 
sessing expectorant,  antispasmodic,  and  stimulating 
powers.  Against  coughs,  spasmodic  affections  of  the 
stomach  and  bowels,  and  diarrhoea,  produced  by  ul- 
cerations cf  those  parts,  it  is  a very  excellent  medi- 
cine. The  dose,  when  given  internally,  is  from  half  a 
fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  calumb®.  Tincture  of  calumba,  for- 
merly called  tinctura  columbx.  Take  of  calumba- 
root,  sliced,  two  ounces  and  a half;  proof  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  This 
tincture  contains  the  active  part  of  the  root,  and  is 
generally  given  with  the  infusion  of  it,  as  a stomachic 
and  adstringent. 

Tinctura  camphor.®  composita.  Compound 
tincture  of  camphor,  formerly  called  tinctura  opii  cam- 
phorata,  and  elixir  parcgoricum.  Take  of  camphor, 
two  scruples ; opium,  dried  and  powdered,  benzoic 
acid,  of  each  a drachm  ; proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Ma- 
cerate for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The  London  col- 
lege has  changed  the  name  of  this  preparation,  because 
it  was  occasionally  the  source  of  mistakes  under  its 
old  one,  and  tincture  of  opium  was  sometimes  substi- 
tuted for  it.  It  differs  also  from  the  former  preparation 
in  the  omission  of  the  oil  of  aniseed,  which  was  often 
complained  of  as  disagreeable  to  the  palate,  and  to 
which,  as  an  addition,  no  increase  of  power  could  be 
affixed.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  half  a 
fluid  ounce. 

Tinctura  cantharidis.  Tincture  of  blistering  fly. 
Formerly  called  Tinctura  lyttce ; Tinctura  canlhari- 
dum.  Take  of  blistering  flies,  bruised,  three  drachms ; 
proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days, 
and  strain.  In  the  last  edition  of  the  London  Pharma- 
coprcia,  the  colouring  matter  of  the  former  prepara- 
tion is  omitted  as  useless,  and  the  proportion  of  the  fly 
increased.  It  is  a very  acrid,  diuretic,  and  stimulating 
preparation,  which  should  always  be  administered  with 
great  caution  from  its  known  action  on  the  parts  of 
generation.  In  chronic  eruptions  on  the  skin,  and 
dropsical  diseases  of  the  aged,  it  is  often  very  useful 
when  other  medicines  have  been  inert.  The  dose  is 
from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  capsici.  Tincture  of  capsicum.  Take 
of  capsicum- berries,  an  ounce  ; proof  spirit,  two  pints. 
Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain. 

Tinctura  cardamomi.  Tincture  of  cardamom. 
Take  of  cardamom-seeds,  bruised,  three  ounc.ps  ; proof 
spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  ; 


I strain.  A powerful  stimulating  carminative.  In 
spasm  of  the  stomach,  an  ounce,  with  some  other  di- 
luted stimulant,  is  given  with  advantage.  The  dose 
may  vary  according  to  circumstances,  from  half  a 
drachm  to  an  ounce  and  upwards. 

Tinctura  cardamomi  composita.  Compound  tinc- 
ture of  cardamom,  formerly  called  tinctura  stomachica. 
Take  of  cardamom-seeds,  carraway-seeds,  cochineal, 
of  each,  powdered,  two  drachms;  cinnamon-bark, 
bruised,  half  an  ounce;  raisins,  stoned,  four  ounces; 
proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  |for  fourteen  days, 
and  strain.  A useful  and  elegant  carminative  and 
cordial.  The  dose  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  half  a 
fluid  ounce  and  upwards. 

Tinctura  cascarill®.  Tincture  of  cascarilla. 
Take  of  cascarilla-bark,  powdered,  four  ounces ; proof 
spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and 
strain.  A stimulating  aromatic  tonic,  that  may  be  ex- 
hibited in  debility  of  the  bowels  and  stomach,  and  in 
those  cases  of  fever  in  which  the  Peruvian  bark  proves 
purgative.  The  dose  from  half  a drachm  to  two 
drachms. 

Tinctura  castorei.  Tincture  of  castor.  Take 
of  castor,  powdered,  two  ounces  ; rectified  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  seven  days,  and  strain.  A power- 
ful stimulant  and  antispasmodic,  mostly  exhibited  in 
hysterical  affections  in  a dilute  form.  The  dose  is 
vfrom  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  catechu.  Tincture  of  catechu,  for- 
merly known  by  the  name  tinctura  japonica.  Take 
of  extract  of  catechu,  three  ounces;  cinnamon-bark, 
bruised,  two  ounces  ; proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate 
for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  An  aromatic  adstrin- 
gent, mostly  given  in  protracted  diarrhoea.  The  dose 
is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  cinchon®.  Tincture  of  cinchona.  For- 
merly known  by  the  name  of  tinctura  corticis  peruvi- 
ani  simplex.  Take  of  lance-leaved  cinchona-bark, 
powdered,  seven  ounces ; proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Ma- 
cerate for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The  dose  is  from 
a fluid  drachm  to  half  a fluid  ounce.  For  its  virtues, 
see  Cinchona. 

Tinctura  cinchon®  ammoniata.  Ammoniated 
tincture  of  cinchona.  Volatile  tincture  of  bark.  Take 
of  lance-leaved  cinchona-bark,  powdered,  four  ounces; 
aromatic  spirit  of  ammonia,  two  pints  ; macerate  for 
ten  days,  and  strain. 

Tinctura  cinchon®  composita.  Compound  tinc- 
ture of  cinchona.  Take  of  lance-leaved  cinchona- 
bark,  powdered,  two  ounces ; orange  peel,  dried,  an 
ounce  and  a half;  serpentary-root,  bruised,  three 
drachms  ; saffron,  a drachm  ; cochineal,  powdered,  two 
scruples  ; proof  spirit,  twenty  fluid  ounces.  Macerate 
for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The  dose  is  from  one 
fluid  drachm  to  half  a fluid  ounce.  For  its  virtues,  see 
Cinchona. 

Tinctura  cinnamomi.  Tincture  of  cinnamon 
Formerly  called  aqua  cinnamomi  fortis.  Take  of  cin- 
namon-bark, bruised,  three  ounces  ; proof  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The 
dose  is  from  a fluid  drachm  to  three  or  more. 

Tinctura  cinnamomi  composita.  Compound  tinc- 
ture of  cinnamon.  Formerly  callted  tinctura  aromatica. 
Take  of  cinnamon-bark,  bruised,  six  drachms  ; carda- 
mom-seeds, bruised,  three  drachms  ; long  pepper,  pow 
dered,  ginger-root,  sliced,  of  each  two  drachms ; prooi 
spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and 
strain.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two 
or  more. 

Tinctura  digitalis.  Tincture  of  fox-glove.  Take 
of  fox-glove  leaves,  dried,  four  ounces;  proof  spirit, 
two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain 
This  tincture  is  introduced  in  the  London  Pharmaco- 
poeia as  possessing  the  properties  of  the  plant  in  a con 
venient,  uniform,  and  permanent  form ; it  is  a saturated 
tincture,  and  in  the  same  proportions  has  been  long 
used  in  general  practice.  The  dose  is  from  ten  to  forty 
minims.  For  its  virtues,  see  Digitalis. 

Tinctura  ferri  acetatis.  This  preparation  is 
directed  in  the  Dublin  Pharmacopoeia,  with  acetate  of 
potassa,  two  ounces ; sulphate  of  iron,  one  ounce ; and 
reclified  spirit,  two  pints. 

Tinctura  ferri  ammoniati.  Tincture  of  ammo- 
niated iron,  formerly  called  tinctura  ferri  ammoniaca- 
lis ; tinctura  florummarti  a Hum;  tinctura  mortis  myn- 
sichti.  Take  of  ammoniated  iron,  four  ounces;  proof 
; spirit,  a pint.  Digest  and  strain.  This  is  a most 

351 


TIN 


TIN 


excellent  chalybeate  in  all  atonic  affections,  and  may  be 
given  with  cinchona  in  the  cure  of  dropsical  and  other 
cachectic  diseases.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid 
drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  ferri  muriatis.  Tincture  of  muriate 
of  iron  Formerly  called  tinctura  martis  in  spiritu 
salis ; tinctura  martis  cum  spiritu  salts;  and  lately 
known  by  the  name  of  tinctura  ferri  muriati.  Take 
of  subcarbonate  of  iron,  half  a pound ; muriatic  acid,  a 
pint ; rectified  spirit,  three  pints.  Pour  the  acid  upon 
the  subcarbonate  of  iron  in  a glass  vessel,  and  shake  it 
occasionally  for  three  days.  Set  it  by  that  the  ftcces,  if 
there  be  any,  may  subside ; then  pour  off  the  solution, 
and  add  the  spirit.  Cline  strongly  recommends  this  in 
ischuria  and  many  diseases  of  the  kidneys  and  urinary 
passages.  The  dose  is  from  ten  to  twenty  drops.  It  is 
a good  chalybeate,  and  serviceable  against  most  dis- 
eases of  debility  without  fever. 

Tinctura  gentian  a:  composita.  Compound  tinc- 
ture of  gentian.  Formerly  called  tinctura  ainara. 
Take  of  gentian-root,  sliced,  two  ounces ; orange-peel, 
dried,  an  ounce;  cardamom-seeds,  bruised,  half  an 
ounce;  proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen 
days,  with  a gentle  heat,  and  strain.  The  dose  is  from 
one  fluid  drachm  to  two.  For  its  virtues,  see  Gentiana. 

Tinctura  gijaiaci.  Tincture  of  guaiacum.  Take 
of  guaiacum  resin,  powdered,  half  a pound;  rectified 
spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and 
strain.  This  tincture,  which  possesses  all  the  active 
parts  of  this  peculiar  vegetable  matter,  is  now  first 
introduced  into  the  London  Pharmacopoeia.  The  dose 
is  from  one  fluid  drachm  to  two.  For  its  virtues,  see 
Guaiacum. 

Tinctura  guaiaci  ammoniata.  Ammoniated  tinc- 
ture of  guaiacum.  Formerly  called  tinctura  guaiacina 
volatilis.  Take  of  guaiacum  resin,  powdered,  four 
ounces;  aromatic  spirit  of  ammonia,  a pint  and  a half. 
Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The  dose  is 
from  one  fluid  drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  hellebori  nigra.  Tincture  of  black 
hellebore.  Formerly  called  tinctura  mclarnpudii. 
“Take  of  black  hellebore-root,  sliced,  four  ounces; 
proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days, 
and  strain.”  The  dose  is  from  half  to  a whole  fluid 
drachm.  For  its  virtues,  consult  Helleborus  niger. 

Tinctura  humuli.  Tincture  of  hop.  Take  of 
hops,  five  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate 
for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  Various  modifications 
of  the  preparations  of  this  bitter  have  lately  been 
strongly  recommended  by  Freke  (Observations  on  Hu- 
mulus  Lupulus),  and  employed  by  many  practitioners, 
who  believe  that  it  unites  sedative  and  tonic  powers, 
and  thus  forms  a useful  combination.  The  dose  is 
from  half  to  a whole  fluid  drachm.  See  Humulus. 

Tinctura  hyoscyami.  Tincture  of  henbane. 
Take  of  henbane-leaves,  dried,  four  ounces;  proof 
spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and 
strain.  That  the  henbane  itself  is  narcotic  is  abun- 
dantly proved,  that  the  same  power  is  also  found  in  its 
tincture  is  also  certain,  but  to  produce  the  same  effects 
requires  a much  larger  dose.  In  some  of  the  state- 
ments made  to  the  College  of  Physicians  of  London,  a 
different  opinion  has  been  given,  and  twenty-five  drops 
have  been  considered  as  equivalent  to  twenty  of  tinc- 
ture of  opium:  it  does  not  produce  costiveness,  or  the 
subsequent  confusion  of  head  which  follows  the  use  of 
opium,  and  will  therefore  be,  even  if  its  powers  be 
weaker,  of  considerable  use.  The  dose  is  from  ten 
minims  to  one  fluid  drachm. 

Tinctura  jalap.®.  Tincture  of  jalap,  formerly 
called  tinctura  jalapii.  Take  of  jalap- root,  powdered, 
eight  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  fur 
fourteen  days,  with  a gentle  heat,  and  strain.  The 
dose  is  from  one  fluid  drachm  to  half  a fluid  ounce. 
For  its  virtues,  see  Convolvulus  jalap  a. 

Tinctura  kino.  Tincture  of  kino.  Take  of  kino, 
powdered,  three  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Ma- 
cerate- for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  All  the  astrin- 
gency  of  kino  is  included  in  this  preparation.  The 
dose  is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two.  See  Kino. 

Tinctura  lyttje.  See  Tinctura  cantharidis. 

Tinctura  myrrh.®.  Tincture  of  myrrh.  Take  of 
myrrh,  bruised,  four  ounces ; rectified  spirit,  two  pints ; 
water,  a pint.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain. 
The  dose  is  from  half  to  a whole  fluid  drachm.  For  its 
virtues,  sec  Myrrha.  v 

Tinctura  opii.  Tincture  of  opium.  Take  of  hard 
o52 


opium,  powdered,  two  ounces  and  a half;  proof  spirit, 
two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days  and  strain. 
The  dose  is  from  ten  minims,  or  twenty  drops,  to  half  a 
fluid  drachm.  For  its  virtues,  see  Opium. 

Tinctura  rhei.  Tincture  of  rhubarb.  Formerly 
known  by  the  names  of  Tinctura  rhabarbari,  and 
Tinctura  rhabarbari  spirituosa.  Take  ot  rhubarb- 
root  sliced,  two  ounces ; cardamom-seeds,  braised,  half 
an  ounce ; saffron,  two  drachms ; proof  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  with  a gentle  heat, 
and  strain.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid  ounce  to  one 
and  a half.  For  its  virtues,  see  Rheum. 

Tinctura  riiei  composita.  Compound  tincture  di 
rhubarb.  Formerly  called  Tinctura  rhabarbari  com- 
posita. Take  of  rhubarb-root,  sliced,  two  ounces; 
liquorice-root,  bruised,  half  an  ounce;  ginger-root, 
sliced,  saffron,  of  each  two  drachms ; proof  spirit,  a 
pint ; water,  twelve  fluid  ounces.  Macerate  for  four- 
teen days,  with  a gentle  heat,  and  strain.  This  is  a 
mild  stomachic  aperient.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid 
ounce  to  one  and  a half. 

Tinctura  scill.®.  Tincture  of  squill.  Take  oi 
squill-root,  fresh  dried,  four  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The 
•virtues  of  this  squill  (see  Scilla ) reside  in  the  tincture, 
which  is  administered  in  doses  of  from  twenty  drops  to 
a fluid  drachm. 

Tinctura  senn®.  Tincture  of  senna.  Formerly 
called  Elixir  salutis.  Take  of  senna-leaves,  three 
ounces ; carraway-seeds,  bruised,  three  drachms ; car- 
damom-seeds, bruised,  a drachm;  raisins,  stoned,  four 
ounces ; proof  spirit,  two  pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen 
days,  with  a gentle  heat,  and  strain.  A Carminative, 
aperient,  and  purgative,  in  doses  from  two  fluid 
drachms  to  a fluid  ounce.  See  Cassia  senna. 

Tinctura  serpentari®.  Tincture  of  serpentary. 
Formerly  called  Tinctura  serpentaria:  virginianie. 
Take  of  serpentary-root,  three  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  This 
tincture  possesses,  in  addition  to  the  virtues  of  the 
spirit,  those  of  the  serpentaria.  The  dose  is  from  half 
a fluid  drachm  to  two.  See  Aristolochia  serpentaria. 

Tinctura  valerian®.  Tincture  of  valerian.  For- 
merly called  Tinctura  valeriance  simplex.  Take  of 
valerian-root,  four  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two  pints. 
Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  A useful 
antispasmodic  in  conjunction  with  others.  The  dose 
is  from  half  a fluid  drachm  to  two.  See  Valeriana. 

Tinctura  valerian.®  ammoniata.  Ammoniated 
tincture  of  valerian.  Formerly  called  Tinctura  vale 
riance  volatilis.  Take  of  valerian-root,  four  ounces; 
aromatic  spirit  of  ammonia,  two  pints.  Macerate  for 
fourteen  days,  and  strain.  A strong  antispasmodic  and 
stimulating  tincture.  The  dose  is  from  half  a fluid 
drachm  to  two. 

Tinctura  veratri.  A very  active  alterative,  re 
commended  in  the  cure  of  epilepsy  and  cutaneous  erup 
tions.  Its  administration  requires  great  caution ; the 
white  hellebore  being  a powerful  poison. 

Tinctura  zingiberis.  Tincture  of  ginger.  Take 
of  ginger-root,  sliced,  two  ounces;  proof  spirit,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  A sti- 
mulating carminative.  The  dose  is  from  a fluid 
drachm  to  three. 

Tincture.  See  Tinctura. 

Tincture  of  assafmtida.  See  Tinctura  assafeetida. 

Tincture  of  black  hellebore.  See  Tinctura  hellebori 
nign. 

Tincture  of  blistering  fly.  See  Tinctura  lytta 

Tincture  of  calumba.  See  Tinctura  calumbw. 

Tincture  of  capsicum.  See  Tinctura  capsid. 

Tincture  of  cardamom.  See  Tinctura  cardamomi 

Tincture  of  cascarilla.  See  Tinctura  cascarilUe 

Tincture  of  castor.  See  Tinctura  castorei. 

Tincture  of  catechu.  See  Tinctura  catechu. 

Tincture  of  cinchona.  See  Tinctura  cinchona. 

Tincture  of  cinnamon.  See  Tinctura  cinnamomi. 

Tincture  of  fox-glove.  See  Tinctura  digitalis. 

Tincture  of  guaiacum.  See  Tinctura  guaiaci. 

Tincture  of  guaiacum , ammoniated.  See  Tinctura 
guaiaci  ammoniata. 

Tincture  of  ginger.  See  Tinctura  zingiberis. 

Tincture  of  henbane.  See  Tinctura  hyoscyami. 

Tincture  of  hops.  See  Tinctura  humuli. 

Tincture  of  jalap.  See  Tinctura  jalapee. 

Tincture  of  kino.  See  Tinctura  kino. 

Tincture  of  myrrh.  See  Tinctura  myrrha: 


TIT 


TIT 


Tincture  of  opium . See  Tinctura  opii.  I 

Tincture  of  orange-peel.  See  Tinctura  aurantii. 

Tincture  of  rhubarb.  See  Tinctura  rheii 

Tincture  of  senna.  See  Tinctura  sennec. 

Tincture  of  serpentary.  See  Tinctura  serpentarice. 

Tincture  of  squills.  See  Tinctura  scillce. 

Tincture  of  valerian.  See  Tinctura  valeriance. 

Tincture  of  valerian,  ammoniated.  See  Tinctura 
Valeriana  ammoniata. 

Tincture , compound , of  aloes.  See  Tinctura  aloes 
composita. 

Tincture,  compound,  of  benzoin.  See  Tinctura  ben- 
zoini  composita. 

Tincture,  compound , of  camphor.  See  Tinctura 
camphora  composita. 

Tincture,  compound,  of  cardamom.  See  Tinctura 
cardamomi  composita. 

Tincture,  compound,  of  cinchona.  See  Tinctura 
cinchtiia  composita. 

Tincture , compound,  of  cinnamon.  See  Tinctura 
cinnamomi  composita. 

Tincture , compound,  of  gentian.  See  Tinctura  gen- 
tiana  composita, 

Tincture,  compound,  of  rhubarb.  See  Tinctura  rhei 
composita. 

TI'NEA.  {Tinea;  from  teneo,  to  hold.)  Tinea  ca- 
pitis. The  scald  head.  A genus  of  diseases  in  the 
Class  Locales,  and  Order  Dialyses , of  Cullen ; charac- 
terized by  small  ulcers  at  the  root  of  the  hairs  of  the 
head,  which  produce  a friable  white  crush 

Tin-glass.  See  Bismuth. 

TINNI'TUS.  ( Tinnitus , us,  m.;  a ringing.}  A 
ringing  or  tingling  noise. 

Tinnitus  auriu.m.  A noise  like  ringing  or  tingling 
in  the  ears.  A species  of  paracusis.  See  Paracusis. 

TISSUE.  A term  introduced  by  the  French  anato- 
mists to  express  the  textures  which  compose  the  dif- 
ferent organs  of  animals.  These  have  chemical  and 
physical  properties  which  it  is  important  to  study  on 
the  dead  subject  and  in  the  living  animal.  We  find  in 
them  almost  all  the  physical  qualities  which  are  ob- 
served in  inorganic  bodies ; different  degrees  of  con- 
sistence from  extreme  hardness  to  fluidity,  elasticity, 
transparency,  refractiveness,  &c. ; but  we  are  particu- 
larly attracted  by  certain  qualities  which  have  been 
named  the  properties  of  tissue.  These  are  the  exten- 
sibility and  contractility  of  tissue ; the  contractility  par 
racornissement , from  crispation.  Independently  of 
these  physical  qualities,  the  tissues  have  been  studied 
in  respect  of  their  composition,  and  it  has  been  found 
that  some  are  principally  composed  of  gelatine,  others 
of  albumen,  others  of  phosphate  of  lime,  others  of 
fibrine,  and  so  on.  These  various  textures  present 
also,  in  the  living  animal,  certain  phenomena  which 
have  not  failed  to  attract  the  attention  of  physiologists. 

TITANITES.  A name  given  to  certain  ores  of 
titanium  which  contain  that  metal  in  a state  of  oxide. 

TITA'NIUM.  This  is  a lately  discovered  metal.  It 
was  first  noticed  by  Macgregor  as  existing  in  the  state 
of  an  oxide  mixed  with  iron,  manganese,  and  silex,  in 
a grayish-black  sand  found  in  the  vale  of  Menachan,  in 
Cornwall,  and  thence  named  menachanite,  or  oxide  of 
titanium,  combined  with  iron.  It  has  since  been  dis- 
covered by  Klaproth,  in  an  ore  named  titanite,  or  oxide 
of  titanium,  combined  with  lime  and  silex.  This  ore 
is  generally  met  with  crystallized  in  four-sided  prisms, 
not  longer  than  a quarter  of  an  inch.  Its  colour  is  a 
yellowish-red,  or  blackish-brown ; it  is  opaque,  and  of 
an  imperfect  lustre.  It  breaks  with  a foliated,  uneven, 
or  conchoidal  fracture.  It  exists  also  in  an  ore  called 
red  schorl,  of  Hungaiy,  or  red  oxide  of  titanium.  This 
ore,  which  is  found  generally  crystallized  in  rectangu- 
lar prisms,  is  of  a brownish-red  colour,  of  the  specific 
gravity  4.2,  and  its  texture  foliated.  In  all  these  ores 
titanium  exists  in  the  state  of  an  oxide. 

Properties  of  titanium. — Titanium  has  been  only 
obtained  in  very  small  agglutinated  grains.  It  is  of  a 
red-yellow  and  crystalline  texture,  brittle,  and  ex- 
tremely refractory.  When  broken  with  a hammer, 
while  yet  hot  from  its  recent  reduction,  it  shows  a 
change  of  colours  of  purple,  violet,  and  blue.  In  a 
very  intense  heat  it  is  volatilized.  Most  of  the  acids 
have  a striking  action  on  this  metal:  though  nitric 
acid  has  little  effect  upon  it.  It  is  very  oxidable  by 
the  muriatic  acid.  It  is  not  attacked  by  the  alkalies. 
Nitro-muriatic  acid  converts  it  into  a white  powder. 
Sulphuric  acid,  when  boiled  upon  it,  is  partly  decom- 


posed. It  is  one  of  the  most  infusible  metals.  It  does 
not  combine  with  sulphur,  but  it  may  be  united  to  phos- 
phorus. It  does  not  alloy  with  copper,  lead,  or  arse- 
nic, but  combines  with  iron. 

Method  of  obtaining  titanium. — It  is  extremely  diffi- 
cult to  reduce  the  oxide  of  titanium  to  the  metallic 
state.  However,  the  experiments  of  Klaproth,  Ilecht, 
and  Vauquelin  have  proved  its  reducibility.  Accord 
ing  to  the  two  latter,  one  part  of  oxide  of  tetanium  is 
to  be  melted  with  six  of  potassa ; the  mass,  when  cold, 
is  to  be  dissolved  in  water.  A white  precipitate  will 
be  formed  which  is  carbonate  of  titanium.  This  car- 
bonate is  then  made  into  a paste  with  oil,  and  the  mix- 
ture is  put  into  a crucible  filled  with  charcoal  powder 
and  a little  alumine.  The  whole  is  then  exposed  for  a 
few  hours  to  the  action  of  a strong  heat.  The  metal- 
lic titanium  will  be  found  in  the  form  of  a blackish 
puffed- up  substance,  possessing  a metallic  appear- 
ance. 

[A  very  curious  ore  of  titanium,  one  of  the  newly 
discovered  metals,  has  been  found  to  exist  in  New- 
Jersey.  A specimen  of  considerable  size  had  been 
presented,  several  years  ago,  by  Mr.  Alber  to  Dr. 
Mitchill,  as  an  ore  of  zinc.  But  it  not  appearing  to 
him  to  be  an  ore  of  zinc,  and  indeed,  his  mind  remain- 
ing rather  uncertain  as  to  what  it  truly  was,  he  laid  it 
aside  in  his  cabinet,  and  at  length  furnished  Professor 
Bruce  with  a part  of  it.  This  able  mineralogist  has 
not  only  made  it  a subject  of  experiment  himself,  but 
has  taken  the  opinion  of  some  of  his  chemical  corres- 
pondents in  Europe  upon  it;  and  it  is  their  united 
opinion  that  it  is  composed  chiefly  of  the  oxide  of  tita- 
nium, combined  with  the  other  form  of  the  metal, 
which,  from  its  having  been  found  in  the  valley  of 
Menachan,  in  Cornwall,  England,  has  been  called 
Menachanite. 

A further  account  of  this  remarkable  substance  is 
contained  in  a letter,  from  Professor  Woodhouse  to 
Senator  Mitchill. 

“ The  following  experiments  were  performed  upon 
the  mineral  found  in  New-Jersey,  which  I received 
from  you  in  the  year  1805,  which  was  then  supposed, 
by  the  person  who  presented  it  to  you,  to  be  an  ore  of 
zinc,  and  which  Count  Bournon  has  declared  to  be 
composed  of  iron  and  titanium. 

“ The  specific  gravity  of  this  mineral  is  5.28.  When 
viewed,  it  has  the  appearance  of  black  spots,  the  size 
of  duck  shot,  surrounded  by  a red  substance ; and 
streaks  of  a white  powder,  (which  is  lithormarge,)  are 
dispersed  through  it.  Upon  looking  through  a micro- 
scope, a crystal  of  titanium  was  seen  adhering  to  it. 
One  hundred  grains  of  it,  reduced  to  an  impalpable 
powder,  and  exposed  one  hour  to  the  intense  heat  of , 
an  air  furnace,  lost  fifteen  grains  in  weight,  and  from  a 
brown  was  turned  to  a black  colour. 

“ One  hundred  grains  of  it,  submitted  to  heat  in  the 
same  manner  with  charcoal,  produced  a great  number 
of  small  globules  of  pure  iron.  This  metal  can  be 
separated  from  the  powder  by  a magnet. 

“ One  hundred  grains  of  it,  boiled  in  aqua  regia,  was 
totally  soluble  in  this  agent,  which  proves  it  contains 
no  silex. 

“ The  prussiate  of  potash,  added  to  this  solution, 
yielded  a blue  precipitate,  which,  when  dried,  weighed 
three  hundred  grains.  Now,  if  we  divide  this  sum  by 
six,  we  shall  have  the  quantity  of  metallic  iron  in  the 
hundred  grains  of  the  ore,  which  is  fifty. 

“ A portion  of  lime  was  thrown  down  from  a solu- 
tion of  the  mineral  in  aqua  regia,  by  the  oxalate  of 
potash.  Carbonate  of  ammonia,  and  a solution  of 
potash  produced  a copious  white  and  gelatinous  pre  - 
cipitate. 

“ One  hundred  grains  of  it  were  mixed  with  six 
hundred  of  potash,  and  submitted  to  intense  heat  one 
hour,  in  a blacklead  crucible.  The  part  remaining  in 
the  crucible  was  powdered,  boiled  in  water,  and  fil- 
tered. Upon  adding  a small  portion  of  muriatic  acid 
to  the  water,  a white  precipitate  was  thrown  down, 
which  was  supposed  to  be  the  titanium.  Upon  col- 
lecting it,  and  mixing  it  with  a small  portion  of  sper- 
maceti oil  and  charcoal,  it  was  exposed  to  the  heat  of 
a blacksmith’s  forge,  when  nothing  was  obtained  but  a 
shining,  heavy,  black  substance,  of  the  appearance  of 
glass. 

“ When  the  muriatic  acid  was  added  in  excess  to 
the  filtered  water  obtained,  by  boiling  the  residue, 
which  remained  in  the  crucible,  in  water,  no  precipi- 

353 


TOR 


TON 

tate  was  produced,  until  a solution  of  potash  was  added 
to  neutralize  the  acid. 

“ The  solution  of  the  mineral  in  nitric  acid  is  as- 
tringent to  the  taste.  • 

' “ The  ore  appears  to  be  composed  of  iron,  titanium, 
lime,  alumina,  and  no  silictous  earth.” — Med.  Repos. 

From  the  above  it  appears  that  the  ores  of  titanium 
are  of.  very  frequent  occurrence  within  the  United 
States.  The  locality  of  the  specimens  described,  as 
far  as  could  be  ascertained,  tend  to  confirm  the  opinion 
of  Werner,  as  to  titanium  being  one  of  the  oldest  of 
metals.  Should  this  metal  hereafter  be  applied  exten- 
sively to  the  arts,  it  is  presumed  that  the  United  States 
will  be  enabled  to  furnish  any  quantity  required. — 
Min.  Jour.  A.] 

TITHY'MALUS.  (From  r iQog,  a dug,  and  pa\os, 
tender:  so  called  from  its  smooth  leaves  and  milky 
juice.)  Spurge.  Two  plants  are  directed  for  medi- 
cinal purposes  by  this  name.  See  Euphorbia  par  alias, 
and  Esula  minor. 

Tithymalus  cyparissius.  See  Esula  minor. 

Txthymalys  paralios.  See  Euphorbia  par  alias. 

Tithymel.e'a.  S Daphne  gnidium. 

Titi'llicum.  (From  titillo , to  tickle:  so  called 
from  its  being  easily  tickled,)  The  arm- pit. 

TOAD-FLAX.  See  Antirrhinum  linaria. 

TOBACCO.  See  Nicotiana. 

Tobacco , English.  See  Nicotiana  rustica. 

Tobacco , Virginian.  See  Nicotiana. 

TOE.  Digitus  pedis.  The  toes  consist  of  three 
distinct  bones  disposed  in  rows,  called  phalanges,  or 
rank  of  the  toes.  The  great  toe  has  but  two  phalanges ; 
the  others  have  three  ranks  of  bones,  which  have 
nothing  particular,  only  the  joints  are  made  round  and 
free,  formed  by  a round  head  on  one  bone,  and  by  a 
pretty  deep  hollow  for  receiving  it,  in  the  one  above  it. 

Toffania  aqua.  ( Toff  ana , or  Tophania : the  name 
of  an  infamous  woman,  who  resided  at  Palermo, 
and  afterward  at  Naples,  who  sold  this  poison.)  See 
Aquelta. 

Tolu  balsam.  See  Toluifera  balsamum. 

TOLUI'FERA.  (So  called  because  it  produces  the 
balsam  of  Peru.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Decandria ; Order, 
Monogynia. 

Toluifera  balsamum.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  tree  which  affords  the  Tolu  balsam.  Balsamum 
tolutanum.  Balsam  of  Tolu.  It  grows  in  South 
America,  in  the  province  of  Tolu,  behind  Carthagena, 
whence  we  are  supplied  with  the  balsam,  which  is 
brought  to  us  in  little  gourd-shells'.  The  balsam  is 
obtained  by  making  incisions  into  the  bark  of  the  tree, 
and  is  collected  into  spoons,  whicli  is  made  of  black 
wax,  from  which  it  is  poured  into  proper  vessels.  It 
thickens,  and  in  time  becomes  concrete:  it  has  a 
fragrant  colour,  and  a warm,  sweetish  taste.  It  dis- 
solves entirely  in  alkohol,  and  communicates  its  odour 
and  taste  to  water,  by  boiling.  It  contains  acid  of 
benzoin.  This  is  the  mildest  of  all  the  balsams.  It  has» 
been  used  as  an  expectorant ; but  its  powers  are  very 
inconsiderable,  and  it  is  at  present  employed  princi- 
pally on  account  of  its  flavour,  somewhat  resembling 
that  of  lemons.  It  is  directed,  by  the  pharmacopoeias, 
in  the  Syrupus  solutanus,  Tinctura  tolutana,  and 
Syrupus  balsamicus. 

Tolutanum  balsamum.  See  Toluifera  balsamum. 

TOMATUM.  Love  apple.  See  Solanum  lycoper- 
sicum. 

TOMBAC.  A white  alloy  of  copper  with  arsenic. 

Tombei'um.  (From  repvu),  to  cut.)  An  incision- 
knife. 

Tomenti'tia.  (From  tomentum, & flock  of  wool : so 
called  from  its  soft  coat.)  Cotton-weed. 

TOMENTOSUS.  Downy.  Applied  to  stems,  leaves, 
&c.  as  the  stem  of  the  Geranium  rotundifolium. 

TOME'NTUM.  ( Tomentum , i,  n. ; a flock  of  wool.) 
1.  This  term  is  used  in  anatomy  to  the  small  vessels  of 
the  brain,  which  appear  like  wool. 

2.  In  botany,  a species  of  pubescence,  very  soft  to 
the  touch,  of  a white,  or  ferruginous  colour,  giving  the 
surface  a downy  appearance,  and  so  thick  that  they 
cannot  be  seen  separately. 

Tomentum  cerebri.  The  small  vessels  that  pene- 
trate the  cortical  substance  of  the  brain  from  the  pia 
mater,  which,  when  separated  from  the  brain,  and  ad 
hering  to  the  pia  inater,  give  it  a flocky  appearance. 

TONGUE.  Lingua.  A soft,  fleshy  viscus,  very' 
354 


moveable  in  every  direction,  situated  inferiorly  in' the 
cavity  of  the  mouth,  and  constituting  the  organ  of 
taste.  It  is  divided  into  a base,  body,  and  back,  an 
inferior  surface,  and  two  lateral  parts.  It  is  composed 
of  muscular  fibres,  covered  by  a nervous  membrane, 
on  which  are  a great  number  of  nervous  papilla,  par- 
ticularly at  the  apex,  and  lateral  parts,  the  rete  muco- 
sum,  and  epidermis.  The  arteries  of  the  tongue  are 
branches  of  the  ranine  and  labial.  The  veins  empty 
themselves  into  the  great  linguals,  which  proceed  to 
the  external  jugular.  The  nerves  come  from  the 
eighth,  ninth,  and  fifth  pair.  The  use  of  this  organ  is 
for  chewing,  swallowing,  sucking,  and  tasting.  See 
also  Taste. 

Tongue-shaped.  See  Lingulatus. 

TONIC.  ( Tonicus , Tovikos;  from  reivut,  to  pull  or 
draw.)  1.  A rigid  contraction  of  the  muscles,  with- 
out relaxation,  as  in  trismus,  tetanus,  &c.  See  Te- 
tanus. 

2.  (From  rovoio,  to  strengthen.)  Medicines  which 
increase  the  tone  of  the  muscular  fibre,  such  as  vege- 
table bitters;  also  stimulants,  adstringents,  &c. 

TONSIL.  (Tonsillce,  arum,f.)  Amygdala;  Tola; 
Toles ; Tolies.  An  oblong,  suboval  gland,  situated  on 
each  side  of  the  fauces,  and  opening  into  the  cavity  -of 
the  mouth  by  twelve  or  more  large  excretory  ducts. 

TOOTH.  See  Teeth. 

TOOTHACHE.  See  Odontalgia. 

Tooth-shaped.  See  Dentatus. 

TOPAZ.  According  to  Jameson  this  mineral  species 
contains  three  subspecies  common  topaz,  schorlite, 
and  physalite. 

Common  topaz  is  of  a wine-yellow  colour,  in  granu- 
lar crystallized  concretions,  harder  than  emerald.  It 
comes  from  the  Brazils,  Siberia,  Asia  Minor,  and 
Saxony.  It  forms  an  essential  constituent  of  the 
topaz-rock. 

TOPAZOLITE.  A variety  of  precious  garnet  found 
at  Mussa,  in  Piedmont. 

TO  PHUS.  ( Toph , Hebrew.)  A toph.  Epipo- 
roma,  a soft  swelling  on  a bone.)  The  concretion  on 
the  teeth  or  in  the  joints  of  gouty  people.  Also  gravel. 

TOPICAL.  (From  tottos , a place.)  Medicines 
applied  to  a particular  place. 

Topina  ria.  A species  of  tumour  in  the  skin  of  the 
head. 

TO'RCULAR.  (From  torqueo,  to  twist.)  The  tour 
niquet:  a bandage  to  check  hemorrhages  after  wounds 
or  amputations. 

Torcular  herophili.  Leckenon ; Lenos.  The 
press  of  Herophilus.  That  place  where  the  four  si- 
nuses of  the  dura  mater  meet  together,  first  accurately 
described  by  Herophilus,  the  anatomist. 

TORDY'LIUM.  ( Tordylium , ii,  n.  Quasi  tor- 
tilium ; from  torqueo , to  twist:  so  named  from  its  tor- 
tuous branches,  or  from  the  neat  orbicular  figure  of  its 
seed,' which  seem  as  if  artificially  wrought  or  turned.) 
Che  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
TJass,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia 

Tordylium  officinale.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  officinale  seseli  crelicum.  The  seeds  are  said  to  be 
diuretic. 

TORMENTIL.  See  Tormentilla. 

TORMENTI'LLA.  (From  tormentum , pain ; be- 
cause it  was  supposed  to  relieve  pain  in  the  teeth.) 
1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean 
system.  Class,  Icosandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  upright  stepfoil. 
See  Tormentilla  erccta. 

Tormentilla  erecta.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  upright  stepfoil.  Heptaphyllum ; Consolida  ru- 
bra ; Tormentilla. — caule  erectiusculo,  foliis  sessilibus , 
of  Linnaeus.  The  root  is  the  only  part  of  the  plant 
which  is  used  medicinally;  it  has  a strong  styptic 
taste,  but  imparts  no  peculiar  sapid  flavour : it  has 
been  long  held  in  estimation  as  a powerful  adstringent ; 
and,  as  a proof  of  its  efficacy  in  this  way,  it  has  been 
substituted  for  oak  bark  in  the  tanning  of  skins  for 
leather.  Torment il  is  ordered  in  the  pulvis  creta 
compositus,  of  the  London  Pharmacopoeia. 

TO'RMINA.  Severe  pains. 

TO'RPOR.  A numbness,  or  deficient  sensation. 

TORTICO'LLIS.  (From  torqueo , to  twist,  and 
collum , the  neck.)  The  wry  neck. 

TORTULOSUS.  A little  swelling  out.  Applied 
to  the  knotty  pod  of  the  Rhaphanus  sativus. 

Tortu'ra  ossis.  The  locked  jaw. 


TOU 


TOU 


Tota  bona.  See  Chenopodium  bonus  henncus. 

TOUCH.  Tactus.  “ By  touch  we  are  enabled  to 
know  the  properties  of  bodies ; and  as  it  is  less  subject 
to  deception  than  the  other  senses,  enabling  us  in  cer- 
tain cases  to  clear  up  errors  into  which  the  others  have 
let!  us,  it  has  been  considered  the  first  and  the  most  ex- 
cellent of  all  the  senses ; but  several  of  the  advantages 
which  have  been  attributed  to  it  by  physiologists  and 
metaphysicians  should  be  considerably  limited. 

We  ought  to  distinguish  tact  from  touch.  Tact  is, 
with  some  few  exceptions,  generally  diffused  through 
all  our  organs,  and  particularly  over  the  cutaneous  and 
mucous  surfaces.  It  exists  in  all  animals  ; while  touch 
is  exerted  evidently  only  by  parts  that  are’intended  parti- 
cularly for  this  use.  It  does  not  exist  in  all  animals, 
and  it  is  nothing  else  but  tact  united  to  muscular  con- 
tractions directed  by  the  wilL 

In  the  exercise  of  tact,  we  may  be  considered  as 
passive,  while  we  are  essentially  active  in  the  exercise 
of  touch. 

Physical  properties  of  bodies  which  employ  the 
action  of  touoh.  Almost  all  the  physical  properties  of 
bodies  are  susceptible  of  acting  upon  the  organs  of 
touch  ; form,  dimensions,  different  degrees  of  consist- 
ence, weight,  temperature,  locomotion,  vibration,  &c. 
are  all  so  many  circumstances  that  are  exactly  appre- 
ciated by  the  touch. 

The  organs  destined  to  touch  do  not  alone  exercise 
this  function  ; so  that  in  this  respect  the  touch  differs 
much  from  the  other  senses.  As  in  most  cases  it  is  the 
skin  which  receives  the  tactile  impressions  produced  by 
the  bodies  which  surround  us,  it  is  necessary  to  say 
something  of  its  structure. 

The  skin  forms  the  envelope  of  the  body ; it  is  lost 
in  the  mucous  membranes  at  the  entrance  of  all  the 
cavities ; but  it  is  improper  to  say  that  these  membranes 
are  a continuation  of  it. 

The  skin  is  formed  principally  by  the  cutis  vera , a 
fibrous  layer  of  various  thickness,  according  to  the 
part  which  it  covers ; it  adheres  by  a cellular  tissue, 
more  or  less  firm,  at  other  times  by  fibrous  attach- 
ments. The  cutis  is  almost  always  separated  from 
the  subjacent  parts  by  a layer  of  a greater  or  less  thick- 
ness, which  is  of  use  in  the  exercise  of  touch. 

The  external  side  of  the  cutis  vera  is  covered  by  the 
epidermis,  a solid  matter  secreted  by  the  skin.  We 
ought  not  to  consider  the  epidermis  as  a membrane;  it 
is  a homogeneous  layer,  adherent  by  its  internal  face  to 
the  chorion , and  full  of  a great  number  of  holes,  of 
which  the  one  sort  are  for  the  passage  of  the  hair,  and 
the  other  for  that  of  cutaneous  perspiration  ; they 
serve  at  the  same  time  for  the  absorption  winch  takes 
place  by  the  skin.  These  last  are  called  the  pores  of 
the  skin. 

It  is  necessary  to  notice,  with  regard  to  the  epidermis, 
that  it  is  void  of  feeling  ; that  it  possesses  none  of  the 
properties  of  life  ; that  it  is  not  subject  to  putrefaction; 
that  it  wears  and  is  renewed  continually;  that  its 
thickness  augments  or  lessens  as  it  may  be  necessary  : 
it  is  even  said  to  be  proof  to  the  action  of  the  digestive 
organs. 

The  connexion  of  the  epidermis  to  the  cutis  vera  is 
very  close  ; and  yet  it  cannot  be  doubted  that  there  is 
a particular  layer  between  these  two  parts,  in  which 
certain  particular  phenomena  take  place.  The  organi- 
zation of  this  layer  is  yet  little  known.  Malpighi 
believed  it  to  be  formed  ©f  a particular  mucus,  the  ex- 
istence of  which  has  been  long  admitted,  and  which 
bore  the  name  of  the  corpus  mucosum  of  Malpighi. 
Other  authors  have  considered  it,  more  justly,  as  a vas- 
cular net-work.  Gall  makes  it  similar  to  the  gray 
matter  which  is  seen  in  many  parts  of  the  brain. 

Gander,  in  examining  attentively  the  external  sur- 
face of  the  true  skin,  has  noticed  some  small  reddish 
projections,  disposed  in  pairs ; they  are  easily  perceived 
when  the  skin  is  laid  bare  by  a blister.  These  little 
bodies  are  regularly  disposed  upon  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  and  on  the  sole  of  the  foot.  They  are  sensible, 
and  are  reproduced  when  they  have  been  torn  out. 
They  appear  to  be  essentially  vascular.  These  bodies, 
without  being  understood,  have  been  long  called  the 
papilla  of  the  skin.  The  epidermis  is  pierced  by  little 
holes,  opposite  their  tops,  through  which  small  drops 
of  sweat  are  seen  to  issue,  when  the  skin  is  exposed 
to  an  elevated  temperature.  The  skin  contains  a great 
number  of  sebaceous  follicles ; it  receives  a great 
number  of  vessels  and  nerves,  particularly  at  the 


points  where  the  sense  of  touch  is  more  immediately 
exercised.  The  mode  in  which  the  nerves  are  termi- 
nated in  the  skin  is  totally  unknown  ; all  that  has  been 
said  of  the  cutaneous  nervous  papilla;  is  entirely  hypo- 
thetical. 

The  exercise  of  tact  and  of  touch  is  facilitated  by 
the  thinness  of  the  cutis  vera,  by  a gentle  elevation  of 
temperature,  by  an  abundant  cutaneous  perspiration, 
as  well  as  by  a certain  thickness  and  flexibility  of 
the  epidermis;  when  the  contraiy  dispositions  exist, 
the  tact  and  the  touch  are  always  more  or  less  im- 
perfect. 

Mechanism  of  tact. — The  mechanism  of  tact  is  ex- 
tremely simple  ; it  is  sufficient  that  bodies  be  in  contact 
with  the  skin  to  furnish  us  with  data,  more  or  less 
exact,  of  their  tactile  properties.  By  tact  we  judge 
particularly  of  the  temperature.  When  bodies  deprive 
us  of  caloric,  we  call  them  cold  ; when  they  yield  it  to 
us,  we  say  they  are  hot ; and  according  to  the  quantity 
of  caloric  which  they  give  or  take,  we  determine  their 
different  degrees  of  heat  or  cold.  The  notions  that  we 
have  of  temperature  are,  nevertheless,  far  from  being 
exactly  in  relation  to  the  quantity  of  caloric  that  bodies 
yield  to  us,  or  take  from  us  ; we  join  with  it  unawares 
a comparison  with  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere, 
in  such  a manner  that  a body  colder  than  ours,  but 
hotter  than  the  atmosphere,  appears  hot,  though  it 
really  deprive  us  of  caloric  when  we  touch  it.  On  this 
account,  places  which  have  a uniform  temperature, 
such  as  cellars  or  wells,  appear  cold  in  summer,  and 
hot  in  winter.  The  capacity  also  of  bodies  for  caloric 
has  a great  influence  upon  us  with  regard  to  tempe- 
rature ; as  an  example  of  this,  we  have  only  to  notice 
the  great  difference  of  sensation  produced  by  iron  and 
wood,  though  the  temperature  of  both  be  the  same. 

A body  which  is  sufficiently  hot  to  cause  a chemical 
decomposition  of  our  organs  produces  the  sensation  of 
burning.  A body  whose  temperature  is  so  low  as  to 
absorb  quickly  a great  portion  of  the  caloric  of  any 
part,  produces  a sensation  of  the  same  sort  nearly : 
this  may  be  proved  in  touching  frozen  mercury. 

The  bodies  which  have  a chemical  action  upon  the 
epidermis,  those  that  dissolve  it,  as  the  caustic  alka- 
lies, and  concentrated  acids,  produce  an  impression 
which  is  easy  to  be  recognised,  and  by  which  these 
bodies  may  be  known. 

Every  part  of  the  skin  is  not  endowed  with  the 
same  sensibility  ; so  that  the  same  body  applied  to  dif- 
ferent points  of  the  skin  in  succession  will  produce  a 
series  of  different  impressions. 

The  mucous  membranes  possess  great  delicacy  of 
tact.  Every  one  knows  the  great  sensibility  of  the 
lips,  the  tongue,  of  the  conjunctiva,  the  pituitary  mem- 
brane, of  the  mucous  membrane,  of  the  trachea,  of 
the  urethra,  of  the  vagina,  &c.  The  first  contact  of 
bodies,  which  are  not  destined  naturally  to  touch  these 
membranes,  is  painful  at  first,  but  this  soon  wears  off. 

Mechanism,  of  touch. — In  man,  the  hand  is  the  prin- 
cipal organ  of  touch;  all  the  most  suitable  circum- 
stances are  united  in  it.  The  epidermis  is  thin, 
smooth,  flexible ; the  cutaneous  perspiration  abundant, 
as  well  as  the  oily  secretion.  The  vascular  eminences 
are  more  numerous  there  than  any  where  else.  The 
cutis  vera  has  but  little  thickness  ; it  receives  a great 
number  of  vessels  and  nerves  ; it  adheres  to  the  subja- 
cent aponeuroses  by  fibrous  -adhesions  ; and  it  is  sus- 
tained by  a highly  elastic  cellular  tissue.  The  extre- 
mities of  the  fingers  possess  all  these  properties  in  the 
highest  degree : the  motions  of  the  hand  are  very 
numerous,  and  performed  with  facility,  and  it  may  be 
applied  with  ease  to  any  body  of  whatsoever  form. 

As  long  as  the  hand  remains  immoveable  at  the 
surface  of  a body,  it  acts  only  as  an  organ  of  tact . 
To  exercise  touch,  it  must  move,  either  by  passing  over 
the  surface,  to  examine  form,  dimensions,  &c.,  or  to 
press  it  for  the  purpose  of  determining  its  consistence, 
elasticity,  &.c. 

We  use  the  whole  hanato  touch  a body  of  consider- 
able dimensions ; if,  on  the  contrary,  a body  is  very 
small,  we  employ  only  the  points  of  the  fingers.  This 
delicacy  of  touch  in  the  fingers  has  given  man  a great 
advantage  over  the  animals.  His  touch  is  so  delicate, 
that  it  has  been  considered  the  source  of  Iris  intelli- 
gence. 

From  the  highest  antiquity  the  touch  has  been  con- 
sidered of  more  importance  than  any  of  the  other 
senses;  it  has  been  supposed  the  cause  of  human 

255 


TOU 


TRA 


reason.  This  idea  has  continued  to  our  times ; it  has 
been  even  remarkably  extended  in  the  writings  of 
Condillac,  of  Buffon,  and  other  modern  physiologists. 
Buffon,  in  particular,  gave  such  an  importance  to  the 
touch,  that  he  thought  one  man  had  little  more  ability 
than  another,  but  only  in  so  far  as  he  had  been  in  the 
habit  of  making  use  of  his  hands.  He  said  it  would 
be  well  to  allow  children  the  free  use  of  their  hands 
from  the  moment  of  their  birth. 

The  touch  does  not  really  possess  any  prerogative 
over  the  other  senses  ; and  if  in  certain  cases  it  assists 
the  eye  or  the  ear,  it  receives  aid  from  them  in  others, 
and  there  is  no  reason  to  believe  that  it  excites  ideas 
in  the  brain  of  a higher  order  than  those  which  are 
produced  by  the  action  of  the  other  senses. 

Of  internal  sensations. — All  the  organs,  as  well  as 
the  skin,  possess  the  faculty  of  transmitting  impres- 
sions to  the  brain,  when  they  are  touched  by  exterior 
bodies,  or  when  they  are  compressed,  bruised,  &c. 
It  may  -be  said,  that  they  generally  possess  tact. 
There  must  be  an  exception  made  of  the  bones,  the 
tendons,  the  aponeuroses , the  ligaments,  &c. ; which  in 
a healthy  state  are  insensible,  and  may  be  cut,  burned, 
torn,  without  any  thing  being  felt  by  the  brain. 

This  important  fact  was  not  known  to  the  ancients; 
they  considered  all  the  white  parts  as  nervous,  and 
attributed  to  them  all  those  properties  which  we  now 
know  belong  only  to  the  nerves.  These  useful  results, 
which  have  had  a great  influence  upon  the  recent  pro- 
gress of  surgery,  we  owe  to  Haller  and  his  disciples. 

All  the  organs  are  capable  of  transmitting  sponta- 
neously a great  number  of  impressions  to  the  brain 
without  the  intervention  of  any  external  cause.  They 
are  of  three  sorts.  The  first  kind  take  place  when  it 
is  necessary  for  the  organs  to  act ; they  are  called 
wants , instinctive  desires.  Such  are  hunger,  thirst, 
the  necessity  of  making  water,  of  respiration,  the 
venereal  impulse,  &c.  The  second  sort  take  place 
during  the  action  of  the  organs;  they  are  frequently 
obscure,  sometimes  very  violent.  The  impressions 
which  accompany  the  different  excretions,  as  of  the 
semen , the  urine , are  of  this  number. 

Such  are  also  the  impressions  which  inform  us  of 
our  motions,  of  the  periods  of  digestion : — even  thought 
seems  to  belong  to  this  kind  of  impression. 

The  third  kind  of  internal  sensations  are  deve- 
loped when  the  organs  have  acted.  To  this  kind  be- 
longs the  feeling  of  fatigue,  which  is  variable  in  the 
different  sorts  of  functions. 

The  impressions  which  are  felt  in  sickness  ought  to 
be  added  to  these  three  sorts:  these  are  much  more 
numerous  than  the  others.  The  study  of  them  is 
absolutely  necessary  to  the  physician. 

All  those  sensations  which  proceed  from  within,  and 
which  have  no  dependence  upon  the  action  of  exterior 
bodies,  have  been  collectively  denominated  internal 
sensations , ox  feelings." — Magendie' s Physiology. 

TOUCH-ME-NOT.  See  JVoli  me  tangerc. 

TOUCHSTONE.  Lydian  stone.  A variety  of 
flinty  slate. 

TOUCHWOOD.  See  Agaricus. 

TOURMALINE.  Rhomboidal  tourmaline  is  divided 
into  two  subspecies,  schorl  and  tourmaline.  The  latter 
mineral  is  of  a green,  brown,  and  red  colour,  in  pris- 
matic concretions,  rolled  pieces,  but  generally  crystal- 
lized. It  occurs  in  gneiss,  mica  slate,  talc  slate,  &c. 

TOURNEFORT,  Joseph  Pitton  de,  was  born  at 
Anx,  in  Provence,  in  1656.  He  was  destined  for  the 
church,  but  a taste  for  natural  knowledge  led  him,  at 
his  father’s  death,  to  change  for  the  profession  of 
physic.  He  therefore  qualified  himself  thoroughly  in 
anatomy,  chemistry,  and  other  branches  of  medical 
study,  and  likewise  distinguished  himself  as  an  elegant 
writer  and  lecturer;  but  he  displayed  especially  an 
ardent  devotion  to  botany,  which  ever  after  made  the 
chief  object  of  his  life.  His  zeal  in  this  pursuit  led 
him  to  encounter  considerable  danger  in  exploring  the 
Alps,  Pyrenees,  &c.  during  several  seasons,  passing  the 
intermediate  winters  at  Montpellier;  but  he  is  said  to 
have  graduated  at  Orange.  His  merits  as  a botanist, 
soon  became  conspicuous  at  Paris,  and  the  superin- 
tendence of  the  royal  garden  was  resigned  to  him  by 
Fagon.  In  this  school  he  soon  drew  together  a crowd 
of  students;  but  anxious  for  farther  improvements,  he 
travelled  into  the  neighbouring  countries,  and  thus 
greatly  enriched  his  collections.  He  was  admitted  a 
member  of  the  Academy  of  Sciences,  and  of  the  Me- 


dical Faculty  at  Paris;  and  was  likewise  decorated 
with  the  Order  of  St.  Michael.  He  published  about 
the  same  period  several  botanical  works,  of  which  the 
principal  is  entitled,  “ Institutiones  Rei  Herbaria. ” 
In  the  year  1700,  he  set  out,  under  royal  patronage,  on 
a voyage  to  the  Levant,  with  the  view  of  investigating 
the  plants  of  ancient  writers,  and  making  new  disco- 
veries ; and  on  his  return,  after  two  years,  he  wrote  a 
very  interesting  and  valuable  account  of  the  expedition 
in  French,  which  was  not  published,  however,  till  after 
his  death.  This  took  place  in  1708,  in  consequence  of 
a hurt  in  the  breast,  which  he  received  from  a car- 
riage. He  left  his  collection  of  plants  to  the  king,  who 
bestowed  in  return  a pension  of  a thousand  livres  on 
his  nephew.  Besides  the  botanical  works  published 
by  him,  he  is  said  to  have  left. several  others  in  manu 
script.  One  object,  which  had  occupied  much  of  his 
attention,  was  to  determine  the  medical  virtues  of 
plants  by  a chemical  analysis ; but  the  loss  of  these 
labours  is  not  to  be  regretted,  as  those  of  Geoffroy,  on 
the  same  plan,  turned  out  to  be  without  any  solid  ad- 
vantage. The  elegance  and  facility  of  Tournefort’s 
botanical  method  gained  him  many  followers  at  first ; 
but  it  has  since  been  superseded  by  that  of  LinnEeus, 
which  is  much  more  systematic  and  comprehensive. 
Still,  however,  it  must  be  acknowledged,  that  the  ge- 
neric distinctions  established  by  the  former  botanist, 
and  most  accurately  delineated,  have  been  the  principal 
foundation  of  subsequent  improvements. 

TOURNIQUET.  (French ; from  tourner , to  turn.) 
An  instrument  used  for  stopping  the  flow  of  blood  into 
a limb. 

TOXICA'RTA.  {Toxicaria,  <e,  f. ; from  to\ikov,  a 
poison:  so  called  from  its  poisonous  quality.)  The 
name  of  a plant. 

Toxicaria.  macassariensis.  An  Indian  poison 
obtained  from  a tree  hitherto  undescribed  by  any  me- 
dical botanist,  known  by  the  name  of  Boas-upas  : it  is 
a native  of  Southern  Asia.  Concerning  this  plant, 
various  and  almost  incredible  particulars  have  been 
related,  both  in  ancient  and  modern  times;  some 
of  them  true,  others  probably  founded  on  superstition. 
Rumphius  testifies  that  he  had  not  met  with  any  other 
more  dreadful  product  from  any  vegetable.  And  he 
adds,  that  this  poison,  of  which  the  Indians  boast,  was 
much  more  terrible  to  the  Dutch  than  any  warlike  in- 
strument. He  likewise  says,  it  is  his  opinion,  that  it 
is  of  the  same  natural  order,  if  not  of  the  same  genus, 
as  the  cestrum. 

TOXICODE'NDRUM.  (From  to^ikov,  a poison, 
and  SevSpov,  a tree.)  The  poison-tree,  which  is  so 
noxious  that  no  insects  ever  come  near  it.  See  Rhus 
toxiimdcndron. 

TOXICOLOGY.  (Toxicologia ; from  to\ov,  an 
arrow  or  bow ; because  the  darts  of  the  ancients  were 
usually  besmeared  with  some  poisonous  substance; 
and  Xoyoj,  a discourse.)  A dissertation  on  poisons 

See  Poison. 

TO'XICUM.  (From  ro\ov,  an  arrow,  which  was 
sometimes  poisoned.)  A deadly  poison.  See  Poison. 

Toxite'sia.  The  artemisia  or  mugwort. 

TRABE'CULA.  ( Trabecula , a small  beam.)  This 
word  is  mostly  applied  by  anatomists  to  the  small  me- 
dullary fibres  of  the  brain,  which  constitute  the  com- 
missures. 

TRA'CHEA.  (So  called  from  its  roughness ; from 
rpa%v?,  rough.)  The  windpipe.  The  trachea  is  a 
cartilaginous  and  membranous  canal,  through  which 
the  air  passes  into  the  lungs.  Its  upper  part,  which 
is  called  the  larynx,  is  composed  of  five  cartilages. 
The  uppermost  and  smallest  of  these  cartilages  is 
placed  over  the  glottis  or  mouth  of  the  larynx,  and  is 
called  epiglottis,  as  closing  the  passage  to  the  iungs  in 
the  act  of  swallowing.  The  sides  of  the  larynx  are 
composed  of  the  two  arytenoid  cartilages,  which  are 
of  a very  complex  figure,  not  easy  to  be  described. 
The  anterior  and  larger  part  of  the  larynx  is  made  up 
of  two  cartilages,  one  of  which  is  called  thyroides  or 
scutiformis,  from  its  being  shaped  like  a buckler:  and 
the  other  cricoides  or  annularis,  from  its  resembling  a 
ring.  Both  these  cartilages  may  be  felt  immediately 
under  the  skin,  at  the  forepart  of  the  thorax ; and  the 
thyroides,  by  its  convexity,  forms  an  eminence  called 
the  pomum  adami,  which  is  usually  more  considerable 
in  the  male  than  in  the  female  subject. 

All  these  cartilages  are  united  tc  each  other  by  means 
of  very  elastic  ligamentousfib.es;  and  are  enabled  by 


TRA 


TRA 

the*assistance  of  their  several  muscles,  to  dilate  or 
contract  the  passage  of  the  larynx,  and  to  perform  that 
variety  of  motion  which  seems  to  point  out  the  larynx 
as  the  principal  organ  of  the  voice ; for  when  the  air 
passes  through  a wound  in  tne  trachea,  it  produces 
little  or  no  sound. 

These  cartilages  are  moistened  by  a mucus,  which 
seems  to  be  secreted  by  minute  glands  situated  near 
them.  The  upper  part  of  the  trachea,  and  the  oricoid 
and  thyroid  cartilages,  are  in  some  measure  covered 
anteriorly  by  a considerable  body,  which  is  supposed 
to  be  of  a glandular  structure,  and  from  its  situation  is 
called  the  thyroid  gland,  though  its  excretory  duct  has 
not  yet  been  discovered,  or  its  real  use  ascertained. 
The  glottis  is  entirely  covered  by  a very  fine  mem- 
brane, which  is  moistened  by  a constant  supply  of 
watery  fluid.  From  the  larynx  the  canal  begins  to 
take  the  name  of  trachea,  or  aspera  arteria,  and  ex- 
tends from  thence  as  far  down  as  the  fourth  or  fifth 
vertebrae  of  the  back,  where  it  divides  into  two  branches, 
which  are  the  right  and  left  bronchial  tube.  Each  of 
these  bronchia  ramifies  through  the  substance  of  that 
lobe  of  the  lungs,  to  which  it  is  distributed  by  an  infi- 
nite number  of  branches,  which  are  formed  of  car- 
tilages separated  from  each  other  like  those  of  the 
trachea,  by  an  intervening  membranous  and  ligament- 
ary substance.  Each  of  these  cartilages  is  of  an  annu- 
lar figure ; and  as  they  become  gradually  less  and  less 
in  their  diameter,  the  lower  ones  are  in  some  measure 
received  into  those  above  them,  when  the  lungs,  after 
being  inflated,  gradually  collapse  by  the  air  being 
pushed  out  from  them  in  expiration.  As  the  branches 
of  the  bronchia  become  more  minute,  their  cartilages 
become  more  and  more  annular  and  membranous,  till 
at  length  they  become  perfectly  membranous,  and  at 
last  become  invisible.  The  trachea  is  furnished  with 
fleshy  or  muscular  fibres,  some  of  which  pass  through 
its  whole  extent  longitudinally,  while  the  others  are 
carried  round  it  in  a circular  direction,  so  that  by  the 
contraction  or  relaxation  of  these  fibres,  it  is  enabled 
to  shorten  or  lengthen  itself,  and  likewise  to  dilate  or 
• contract  the  diameter  of  its  passage.  The  trachea  and 
its  branches,  in  all  their  ramifications,  are  furnished 
with  a great  number  of  small  glands  which  are  lodged 
in  their  cellular  substance,  and  discharge  a mucous 
fluid  on  the  inner  surface  of  these  tubes. 

The  cartilages  of  the  trachea,  by  keeping  it  constantly 
open,  afford  a free  passage  to  the  air  which  we  are 
obliged  to  be  incessantly  respiring;  and  its  membra- 
nous part,  by  being  capable  of  contraction  or  dilatation, 
enables  us  to  receive  and  expel  the  air  in  a greater  or 
less  Quantity,  and  with  more  or  less  velocity,  as  may 
be  required  in  singing  and  declamation.  This  mem- 
branous structure  of  the  trachea  posteriorly,  seems 
likewise  to  assist  in  the  descent  of  the  food,  by  pre- 
venting that  impediment  to  its  passage  down  the  oeso- 
phagus, which  might  be  expected,  if  the  cartilages  were 
complete  rings.  The  trachea  receives  its  arteries  from 
the  carotid  and  subclavian  arteries,  and  its  veins  pass 
into  the  jugulars.  Its  nerves  arise  from  the  recurrent 
branch  of  the  eighth  pair,  and  from  the  cervical  plexus. 

TRACIIELA'GRA.  ( Trachelagra , a>,  f. ; from 

Tpaxv^os,  the  throat,  and  aypa,  a seizure.)  The  gout 
in  the  neck. 

TRACHE'LIUM.  ( Trachelium , «,  n. ; from  rpa- 
, the  throat : so  called  from  its  efficacy  in  diseases 
of  the  throat.)  The  Campanula  trachelium , of  Lin- 
naeus, or  herb  throat-wort. 

TRACHELO.  (From  rpaxnhos,  the  neck.)  Names 
compounded  of  this  word  belong  to  muscles,  &c.  which 
are  attached  to  the  neck ; as  Trachelo-mastoideus. 

TRACHELOCE'LE.  (From  rpaxcia,  the  wind- 
pipe, and  KtjXrj,  a tumour).  A tumour  upon  the  trachea. 
A bronchocele. 

Trachelo-mastoideus.  A muscle  situated  on  the 
neck,  which  assists  the  complexus,  but  pulls  the  head 
more  to  one  side.  It  is  the  complexvs  minor  scu  mas- 
toideus  lateralis , of  Winslow.  Trachclo-mastoidien,  of 
Dumas.  It  arises  from  the  transverse  processes  of  the 
five  inferior  cervical  vertebrae,  where  it  is  connected 
with  the  transversalis  cervicis,  and  of  the  three  superior 
dorsal,  and  it  is  inserted  into  the  middle  of  the  posterior 
part  of  the  mastoid  process. 

TRACHELO'PHYMA.  (From  rpaxn\os,  the  throat, 
and  (pupa,  a tumour.)  A swelling  of  the  bronchial  gland. 

TRACHE'LOS.  (From  rpaxvs,  rough  ; because  of 
the  rough  cartilages.)  The  wind-pipe.  See  Trachea. 


TRACHEOTOMY.  ( Tracheotomia , ce,  f. ; from 
rpaxcia , the  trachea,  and  repvu),  to  cut.)  See  Bron- 
chotomy. 

TRACHO'MA.  (Trachoma,  atis,  n.;  from  rpaxvs, 
rough.)  An  asperity  in  the  internal  superficies  of  the 
eyelid.  The  effects  are  a violent  ophthalmia,  and  a 
severe  pain,  as  often  as  the  eyelid  moves.  The  species 
are, 

1.  Trachoma  sabulosum , from  sand  falling  between 
the  eye  and  the  eyelid  of  persons  travelling,  blown  by 
a high  wind  ; this  happens  chiefly  in  sabulous  situa- 
tions, and  may  be  prevented  by  spectacles  for  the  pur- 
pose, or  by  guarding  against  the  flights  of  sand  by 
covering  the  eyes. 

2.  Trachoma  carunculosum , which  arises  from  carun- 
cles, or  fleshy  verruca;,  growing  in  the  internal  super- 
ficies of  the  eyelid.  This  species  of  the  trachoma  is 
called  morum  palpebrse  interna;,  because  the  tubercu- 
lous internal  superficies  appears  of  a livid  red  like  a 
mulberry.  Others  call  these  caruncuke  pladorotes. 

3.  Trachoma  herpeticum,  which  are  hard  pustules  in 

the  internal  superficies  of  the  eyelids.  This  is  also 
called  ficosis,  and  palpebra  ficosa,  from  its  resemblance 
to  the  granulated  substances  in  a cut  fig.  With  the 
Greeks,  it  is  denominated  atomablepharon,  or  prop- 
toris.  »•  . . 

TRACHYTE.  A rock  of  igneous  origin,  principally 
composed  of  felspar.  It  has  generally  a porphyritic 
structure. 

TRAGACANTH.  See  Astragalus. 

TRAGACA'NTHA.  ( Tragacantha , ee,  f. ; from 

rpayos,  a goat,  and  axavSa,  a thorn : so  called  from  its 
pods^iesembling  a goat’s  beard.)  See  Astragalus  tra- 
gacantha. 

TRA'GICUS.  A proper  muscle  of  the  ear,  which 
pulls  the  point  of  the  tragus  a little  forward. 

TRA'GIUM.  (From  rpayos,  a goat:  so  named  from 
its  filthy  smell.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants. 
Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  bastard  dittany,  or  Dictamnus  albus. 

TRAGO'CERUS.  (From  rpayos,  a goat,  and  icepas, 
a horn  : so  named  from  the  supposed  resemblance  of 
its  leaves  to  the  horn  of  a goat.)  The  aloe. 

TRAGOPO'GON.  ( Tragopogon , onis,  m. ; from 
rpayos,  a goat,  and  * o> ycov,  a beard : so  called  because 
its  downy  seed,  while  enclosed  in  the  calyx,  resembles 
a goat’s  beard.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnsean  system.  Class,  Syngenesia;  Order,  Po- 
lygamia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  goat’s 
beard. 

Tragopogon  pratknse.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  common  goat’s  beard.  The  young  stems  of  this 
plant  are  eaten  like  asparagus,  and  are  a pleasant  and 
wholesome  food.  The  root  is  also  excellent,  and  was 
formerly  used  medicinally  as  a diuretic. 

TR  AGOPY'RUM.  ( Tragopyrum , i,  n. ; from  rpayos, 
a goat,  and  rrvpov,  wheat : so  named  from  its  beard.) 
Buck-wheat. 

TRAGO'RCHIS.  ( Tragorchis,  is,  m. ; from  rpayos, 
a goat,  and  opxn , a testicle:  so  named  from  the  sup- 
posed resemblance  of  its  roots  to  the  testicles  of  a goat.) 
A species  of  orchis. 

TRAGORI'GANUM.  (Tragoriganum,  i,  n. ' from 
rpayos,  a goat,  and  opiyavov,  marjoram : so  called  be- 
cause goats  are  fond  of  it.)  A species  of  wild  mar- 
joram. 

TRAGOSELI'NUM.  (Tragoselinum,  i,  n. ; from 
rpayos,  a goat,  and  aeXivov,  parsley : named  from  its 
hairy  coat  like  the  beard  of  a goat.)  The  burnet  saxi- 
frage. See  Pimpinella  saxifraga. 

TRA'GUS.  (Tpayos.  Tragus , i,  m. ; a goat : so 
called  from  its  having  numerous  little  hairs,  or  from  its 
being  hairy  like  the  goat.)  1.  In  anatomy.  A small 
cartilaginous  eminence  of  the  auricular  or  external  ear, 
placed  anteriorly,  and  connected  to  the  anterior  extre- 
mity of  the  helix.  It  is  beset  with  numerous  little  hairs, 
defending,  in  some  measure,  the  entrance  of  the  exter- 
nal auditory  passage. 

2.  In  botany.  This  name  has  been  variously  ap- 
plied, by  Dioscorides,  to  meal  or  flour,  and  to  a mari 
time  shrub. 

TRALLIAN.  Alexander,  a learned  and  inge- 
nious physician,  who  was  born  at  Tralles,  in  Lydia, 
and  flourished  at  Rome  under  the  emperor  Justinian, 
about  the  middle  of  the  sixth  century.  Like  Hippo 
crates,  he  travelled  over  various  countries  to  improve 

357 


TRA 


TRA 


his  knowledge.  Besides  improving  upon  many  of  the 
compositions  then  employed,  he  invented  several  others: 
and  particularly  introduced  the  liberal  use  of  the  pre- 
parations of  iron.  He  principally  followed  the  practice 
of  Hippocrates  and  Galen,  but  not  indiscriminately. 
He  appears,  however,  to  have  had  too  great  faith  in 
charms  and  amulets, which  was  the  common  error  of  the 
age  in  which  he  lived. 

TRA'MIS.  Tpapts-  The  line  which  divides  the 
scrotum,  and  runs  on  to  the  anus.  See  Raphe. 

TRANSFUSION.  (Transfusio ; from  transfundo, 
to  pour  from  one  vessel  into  another.)  The  transmis- 
sion of  blood  from  one  living  animal  to  another  by 
means  of  a canula.  “ Harvey  was  thirty  years  before 
he  could  get  his  discovery  admitted,  though  the  most 
evident  proofs  of  it  were  every  where  )>erceptible ; but 
as  soon  as  the  circulation  was  acknowledged,  people’s 
minds  were  seized  with  a sort  of  delirium : it  was 
thought  that  the  means  of  curing  all  diseases  was  found, 
and  even  of  rendering  man  immortal.  The  cause  of 
all  cur  evils  was  attributed  to  the  blood ; in  order  to 
cure  them,  nothing  more  was  necessary  but  to  remove 
the  bad  blood,  and  to  replace  it  by  pure  blood,  drawn 
from  a sound  animal. 

The  first  attempts  were  made  upon  animals,  and  they 
had  complete  success.  A dog  having  lost  a great  part 
of  its  blood,  received,  by  transfusion,  that  of  a sheep, 
and  it  became  well.  Another  dog,  old  and  deaf,  re- 
gained, by  this  means,  the  use  of  hearing,  and  seemed 
to  recover  its  youth.  A horse  of  twenty-six  years  hav- 
ing received  in  his  veins  the  blood  of  four  lambs,  he 
recovered  his  strength. 

Transfusion  was  soon  attempted  upon  man.  JDenys 
and  Emerez,  the  one  a physician,  the  other  a surgeon 
of  Paris,  were  the  first  who  ventured  to  try  it.  They 
introduced  into  the  veins  of  a young  man,  an  idiot,  the 
blood  of  a calf,  in  greater  quantity  than  that  which 
had  been  drawn  from  them,  and  he  appeared  to  recover 
his  reason.  A leprous  person,  and  a quartan  ague, 
were  also  cured  by  this  means ; and  several  other  trans- 
fusions were  made  upon  healthy  persons  without  any 
disagreeable  result. 

However,  some  sad  events  happened,  to  calm  the 
general  enthusiasm  caused  by  these  repeated  successes. 
The  young  idiot  we  mentioned  felt  into  a state  of  mad- 
ness a short  time  after  the  experiment.  He  was  sub- 
mitted a second  time  to  the  transfusion,  and  he  was 
immediately  seized  with  a liccmaturia , and  died  in  a 
state  of  sleepiness  and  torpor.  A young  prince  of  the 
blood  royal  was  also  the  victim  of  it.  The  parliament 
of  Paris  prohibited  transfusion.  A short  time  after, 
G.  Riva,  having,  in  Italy,  performed  the  transfusion 
upon  two  individuals,  who  died  of  it,  the  pope  prohi- 
bited it  also. 

From  this  period,  transfusion  has  been  regarded  as 
useless,  and  even  dangerous.” 

TRANSPARENCY.  Diaphaneity.  A quality  in 
certain  bodies,  by  which  they  give  passage  to  the  rays 
of  light.  It  is  opposed  to  opacity ; hence  Cornea  trans- 
parens,  and  Cornea  opace. 

TRANSPIRATION.  {Transpiratio ; from  trans, 
through,  and  spiro,  to  breathe.)  See  Perspiration. 

TRANSUDATION.  Transudatio.  The  passing 
through  the  cells  or  pores  of  any  thing.  The  term 
should  be  distinguished  from  perspiration,  which  im- 
plies a function,  by  which  the  perspired  fluid  is  secreted 
from  the  blood,  whereas,  by  transudation,  the  blood 
or  other  fluid  merely  passes  or  oozes  through  unaltered. 

TRANSVERSA'LIS.  Transverse. 

Transversalis  abdominis.  A muscle  situated  on 
the  anterior  part  of  the  abdomen : so  named  from  its 
direction.  It  arises  internally  or  posteriorly  from  the 
cartilages  of  the  seven  lower  ribs,  being  there  connected 
with  the  intercostals  and  diaphragm,  also  from  the 
transverse  process  of  the  last  vertebra  of  the  back,  from 
those  of  the  four  upper  vertebra;  of  the  loins,  from  the 
inner  edge  of  the  crista  ilfi,  and  from  part  of  Poupart’s 
ligament,  and  it  is  inserted  into  the  inferior  bone  of  the 
sternum,  and  almost  all  the  length  of  the  linea  alba. 
Its  use  is  to  support  and  compress  the  abdominal 
viscera. 

Transversalis  anticus  primus.  See  Rectus  capi- 
tis lateralis. 

Transversalis  cervicis.  See  Longissimus  dorsi. 

Transversalis  colli.  A muscle,  situated  on  the 
posterior  part  of  the  neck,  which  turns  the  neck  ob- 
liquely backwards,  and  a little  to  one  side. 

358 


Transversalis  dorsi.  See  Multifidus  spina. 

Transversalis  major  colli.  See  Loneissimus 

dorsi. 

Transversalis  pedis.  A muscle  of  the  foot,  which 
it  contracts,  by  bringing  the  great  toe  and  the  two  outer- 
most toes  nearer  each  other. 

Transverse  suture.  Sutura  transversalis.  This 
suture  runs  across  the  face,  and  sinks  down  into  the 
orbits,  joining  the  bones  of  the  skull  to  the  bones  of  the 
face  ; but  with  so  many  irregularities  and  interruptions, 
that  it  can  scarcely  be  recognised  as  a suture. 

Transverso-sfinales.  See  Multifidus  spines. 

Transversus  auris.  A muscle  of  the  external  ear, 
which  draws  the  upper  part  of  the  concha  towards  the 
helix. 

Transversus  perinjei.  ( Musculus  transversus 
perincei.)  A muscle  of  the  organs  of  generation 
which  sustains  and  keeps  the  perinteum  in  its  proper 
place. 

Transversus  perincei  alter.  Prostaticus  infe- 
rior, of  Winslow.  A small  muscle  occasionally  found 
accompanying  the  former. 

TRAP.  This  term  is  derived  from  the  Swedish 
word  trappa,  a stair.  It  is  applied  in  geology  to  rocks 
principally  characterized  by  the  presence  of  horn- 
blende and  black  iron  clay. 

TRAPA.  (A  term  given  by  Linnaeus,  whose  idea  is 
certainly  taken  from  the  warlike  instrument  called  cal- 
trop, the  tribulus  of  the  ancients,  which  consisted  of 
four  iron  radiated  spikes,  so  placed,  that  one  of  them 
must  always  stand  upwards,  in  order  to  wound  the 
feet  of  the  passengers.  Such  is  the  figure  of  the  sin- 
gular fruit  of  this  genus ; hence  named  by  Tournefort, 
trihuloides.  Calcitrapa , an  old  botanical  term  of  si- 
milar meaning  to  tribulus,  is  compounded,  perhaps,  of 
calco,  to  tread  or  kick,  and  rpenu),  to  turn,  because  the 
caltrops  are  continually  kicked  over  if  they  fail  of  their 
intended  mischief:  here  we  have  the  immediate  origin 
of  trapa.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants,  Class, 
Tetrand.ria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Trapa  natans.  The  systematic  name  of  the  plant 
which  affords  the  nux  aquatica.  Tribulus  aquaticus.  , 
Caltrops.  The  fruit  is  of  a quadrangular  and  some- 
what oval  shape,  including  a nut  of  a sweet  farina- 
ceous flavour,  somewhat  like  that  of  the  chesnut, 
which  is  apt  to  constipate  the  bowels,  and  produce  dis- 
ease ; however,  it  is  said  to  be  nutritious  and  demul- 
cent, and  to  be  useful  in  diarrheeas  from  abraded 
bowels,  and  against  calculus.  Likewise  a poultice  of 
these  nuts  is  said  to  be  efficacious  in  resolving  hard  and 
indolent  tumours. 

TRAPE'ZIUM.  (A  four-sided  figure:  so  called 
from  its  shape,)  The  first  bone  of  the  second  ro&  of 
the  carpus. 

TRAPE'ZIUS.  (From  rpaircgios,  four-square:  so 
named  from  its  shape.)  CncuUaris.  A muscle  situ- 
ated immediately  under  the  integuments  of  the  poste- 
rior part  of  the  neck  and  back.  It  arises  by  a thick, 
round,  and  short  tendon,  from  the  lower  part  of  a pro- 
tuberance in  the  middle  of  the  occipital  bone  back- 
wards, and  from  the  rough  line  that  is  extended  from 
thence  towards  the  mastoid  process  of  the  os  temporis, 
and  by  a thin  membranous  tendon,  which  covers  part 
of  the  complexus  and  splenius.  It  then  runs  down- 
wards along  the  nape  of  the  neck,  and  rises  tendinous 
from  the  spinous  processes  of  the  two  lowermost  ver- 
tebrae of  the  neck,  and  from  the  spinous  processes  of 
all  the  vertebra  of  the  back,  being  inseparably  united 
to  its  fellow,  the  whole  length  of  "its  origin,  by  tendi- 
nous fibres,  which,  in  the  nape  of  the  neck,  form  what 
is  called  ligamentum  colli , or  the  cervical  ligament.  It 
is  inserted  fleshy  into  the  broad  and  posterior  half  of 
the  clavicle,  tendinous  and  fleshy  into  one-half  of 
the  acromion,  and  into  almost  all  the  spine  of  the  sca- 
pula. 

This  muscle  serves  to  move  the  scapula  in  different 
directions.  Its  upper  descending  fibres  pull  it  obliquely 
upwards;  its  middle  transverse  ones  pull  it  jlirectly 
backwards  ; its  inferior  fibres,  which  ascend  obliquely 
upwards,  draw  it  obliquely  downwards  and  back- 
wards. 

The  upper  part  of  the  muscle  acts  upon  the  neck 
and  head,  the  latter  of  which  it  draws  backwards,  and 
turns  upon  its  axis.  It  likewise  concurs  with  other 
muscles  in  counteracting  the  flexion  of  the  head  for- 
wards. 

TRAPEZOI'DES  OS.  The  second  bone  of  the 


TR1 


TRI 


second  row  of  the  carpus : so  called  from  its  resemblance 
to  the  trapezium,  or  quadrilateral  geometrical  figure. 

TRAUMATIC.  (From  rpuvpa,  a wound.)  Any 
thing  relating  to  a wound. 

TRAVELLER’S  JOY.  See  Clematis  vitalba. 

TREACLE.  See  Theriaca. 

Treacle , mustard.  See  Thlaspi. 

TREFOIL.  (So  called  because  the  leaf  is  formed 
of  three  leaflets.)  See  Trifolium. 

Trefoil  marsh.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

TREMOLITE.  A subspecies  of  straight  edged 
augite.  There  are  three  kinds,  the  asbestous,  common, 
and  glassy. 

TRE  MOR.  An  involuntary  trembling. 

TREPAN.  Trephine.  An  instrument  used  by  sur- 
geons to  remove  a portion  of  bone  from  the  skull. 

TREPHINE.  See  Trepan. 

TREW,  Christopher  James,  was  born  at  Lauffen, 
in  Franconia,  in  1695;  and  settled  as  a physician  at 
Nuremburg,  where  he  gained  so  much  reputation,  as  to 
be  made  director  of  the  academy  “Naturae  Curioso- 
rum.”  He  also  contributed  much  towards  establishing 
a society  under  the  title  of  “ Commercium  Literarium 
Noricuin,”  for  the  advancement  of  medical  and  natural 
knowledge,  which  published  some  valuable  memoirs. 
To  these  societies  he  communicated  several  papers,  and 
he  also  published  some  splendid  works  in  anatomy  and 
botany.  He  died  in  1769. 

TRIANGULA'RIS.  Trig-onus.  Triangular:  a 
term  very  generally  used  in  the  different  departments 
of  science,  to  parts  of  animals,  vegetables,  minerals,  j 
&c.,  from  their  form.  See  Caulis,  Folium , &c. 

TRI'BULTJS.  (Tpt/?«Aoj;  from  rpi6u>,  to  tear  or 
injure  : an  instrument  of  war  to  be  thrown  in  the  way 
to  annoy  the  enemy’s  horse : hence  the  name  of  an 
herb  from  its  resemblance  to  this  instrument.) 

1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Decan- 
dria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  See  Trapa  natans. 

Tribulus  aquaticus.  See  Trapa  natans. 

TRICA.  ( Trica , ee,  f. ; from  dpi\,  rpi%oj,  a hair: 
because  they  seem  composed  of  a horse  hair  rolled,  or 
partly  folded,  into  a little,  round,  black  head.)  A term 
applied  by  Dr.  Acharius  to  the  black  filaments,  resem- 
bling a curled  horse  hair,  in  the  Oyrophora  and  Urnbi- 
licaria  of  Hoffman. 

TRICAUDA'LIS.  (From  Ires,  three,  and  cauda,  a 
tail.)  A muscle  with  three  tails. 

TRI'CEPS.  (From  tres,  three,  and  caput , a head.) 
Three-headed. 

Triceps  adductor  femoris.  Under  this  appella- 
tion are  comprehended  three  distinct  muscles.  Sec 
Adductor  brevis , longus , and  magnus  femoris. 

Triceps  auris.  See  Retrahentcs  auris.  % 

Triceps  extensor  cubiti.  This  muscle,  which 
occupies  all  the  posterior  part  of  the  os  humeri,  is  de- 
scribed as  two  distinct  muscles  by  Douglas,  and  as 
three  by  Winslow.  The  upper  part  of  its  long  head  is 
covered  by  the  deltoides : the  rest  of  the  muscle  is  situ- 
ated immediately  under  the  integuments. 

It  arises,  as  its  name  indicates,  by  three  heads.  The 
first,  or  long  head,  (the  long  head  of  the  biceps  exter- 
nus,  of  Douglas;  anconeus  major,  of  Winslow,  as  it  is 
called,)  springs,  by  a flat  tendon  of  an  inch  in  breadth, 
from  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  inferior  costa  of  the 
scapula,  near  its  neck,  and  below  the  origin  of  the 
teres  minor.  The  second  head,  (the  short  head  of  the 
biceps  externus,  of  Douglas ; anconeus  externus , of 
Winslow),  arises  by  an  acute,  tendinous,  and  fleshy 
beginning,  from  the  upper  and  outer  part  of  the  os  hu- 
meri, at  the  bottom  of  its  great  tuberosity.  The  third 
head,  ( brachialis  externus  of  Douglas;  anconeus  in- 
ternus,  of  Winslow,)  which  is  the  shortest  of  the 
three,  originates  by  an  acute  fleshy  beginning,  from  the 
back  part  of  the  os  humeri,  behind  the  flat  tendon  of 
the  latissimus  dorsi.  These  three  portions  unite  about 
the  middle  of  the  arm,  so  as  to  form  one  thick  and 
powerful  muscle,  which  adheres  to  the  os  humeri  to 
within  an  inch  of  the  elbow,  where  it  begins  to  form  a 
broad  tendon,  which,  after  adhering  to  the  capsular 
ligament  of  the  elbow,  is  inserted  into  the  upper  and 
outer  part  of  the  olecranon,  and  sends  off  a great  num- 
ber of  fibres,  which  help  to  form,  the  fascia  on  the 
outer  part  of  the  forearm.  The  use  of  this  muscle  is 
to  extend  the  forearm. 

TRICHIA.  (From  Qpi\,  a hair.)  A disease  of  the 
hair.  See  Trichoma. 


TRICHI'ASIS.  (From  Qpi\,  a hair.)  Trichosis. 
1.  A disease  of  the  eye-lashes,  in  which  they  are  turned 
in  towards  the  bulb  of  the  eye. 

2.  A disease  of  the  hair.  See  Trichoma. 

TRICHl'SMUS.  (From  0pt£,  a hair.)  A species  of 
fracture  which  appears  like  a hair,  and  is  almost  im- 
perceptible. 

TRICHO'MA.  (From  rpt%£?,  the  hair.)  The  plaited 
hair.  See  Plica. 

TRICHOMANES.  (From  hair,  and  pavos , 

thin,  lax : so  called  because  it  resembles  fine  hair.)  See 
Asplenium  trichomanes. 

TRICHOSIS.  (Tpixwtj,  pilare  malum;  from  Qpi\, 
a hair.)  Under  this  name  Good  makes  a genus  of  dis- 
ease in  the  Class  Eccritica,  Order  Acrotica,  of.  his 
Nosology.  Morbid  hair.  It  has  eight  species,  viz. 
Trichosis  setosa,  plica , hirsutus,  distrix.  See  Plica. 

TRICHU'RIS.  (P’rom  dpi\,  a hair.)  The  long  hair- 
worm. See  Worms. 

TRICOCCUS.  (From  rpeig , three,  and  kqkkos,  a 
grain.)  Three-seeded. 

Tricocc/E.  The  name  of  an  order  in  Linnreus’s 
Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting  of  those 
which  have  a triangular  capsule  with  three  seeds. 

TRICUSPID.  ( Tricuspis ; from  tres , three,  and 
cusp  is,  a point : so  called  from  their  bqing  three-point 
ed.)  Three-pointed. 

Tricuspid  valve.  The  name  of  the  valve  in  the 
right  ventricle. 

Trifoil,  water.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

TRIFO'LIUM.  (From  tres,  three,  and  folium , a 
leaf:  so  called  because  it  has  three  leaves  on  each 
stalk.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
naean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 
Trefoil. 

Trifolium  acetosum.  The  wood-sorrel  was  so 
called.  See  Oxalis  acetosella. 

Trifolium  aquaticum.  See  Menyanthes  trifo- 
liata. 

Trifolium  arvense.  Hare’s-foot  trefoil. 

Trifolium  aureum.  Herb  trinity;  noble  liver- 
wort. 

Trifolium  caballinum.  Melilotus. 

Trifolium  ciERULEUM.  Sweet  trefoil. 

Trifolium  falcatum.  The  Auricula  inuris.  See 
Hicracium  pilosella. 

Trifolium  fibrinum.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

Trifolium  hepaticum.  See  Anemone  hepatica. 

Trifolium  melilotus  officinalis.  The  syste- 
matic name  of  the  officinal  melilot ; Melilotus;  Lotus 
sylvestris  ; Ser  alula  camp  ana ; Trifolium  caballinum; 
Coroda  regia ; Trifolium  odoratum.  This  plant  has 
been  said  to  be  resolvent,  emollient,  anodyne,  and  to 
participate  of  the  virtues  of  chamomile.  Its  taste  is 
unpleasant,  subacrid,  subsaline,  but  not  bitter ; when 
fresh  it  has  scarcely  any  smell ; in  drying,  it  acquires  a 
pretty  strong  one  of  the  aromatic  kind,  but  not  agree- 
able. The  principal  use  of  melilot  has  been  in  clys» 
ters,  fomentations,  and  other  external  applications. 

Trifolium  odoratum.  See  Trifolium  melilotus 
officinalis. 

Trifolium  paludosum.  See  Menyanthes  trifoliata. 

TRIGE'MINI.  ( Trigeminus,  from  tres,  three,  and 
eminus,  double ; three-fold.)  Nervi  innominati.  The 
fth  pair  of  nerves,  which  arise  from  the  crura  ot 
the  cerebellum,  and  are  divided  within  the  cavity  ot 
the  cranium  into  three  branches,  viz.  the  orbital,  supe- 
rior, and  inferior  maxillary.  The  orbital  branch  is 
divided  into  the  frontal,  lachrymal,  and  nasal  nerves; 
the  superior  maxillary  into  the  spheno-palatine,  poste- 
rior alveolar,  and  infra  orbital  nerves  ; and  the  inferior 
maxillary  into  two  branches,  the  internal  lingual,  and 
one  more  properly  called  the  inferior  maxillary. 

TRIGONE'LLA.  (A  diminutive  of  trigona,  three- 
sided,  alluding  to  its  little  triangular  flower.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class , Diadelphia  ; Order, 
Decandria. 

Trigonella  fcenum  gr;ecum.  The  systematic 
name  of  the  fenugreek.  Fasnum  gr cecum  ; Buceras ; 
JEgoceras.  Trigonella — leguminibus  sessilibus  stric- 
tis  erectiusculis  sub f ale  at  is  acuminatis , caulc  erecto, 
of  Ldnnajus.  A native  of  Montpellier.  The  seeds  are 
brought  to  us  from  the  southern  parts  of  France  and 
Germany;  they  have  a strong  disagreeable  smell,  and 
an  unctuous  farinaceous  taste,  accompanied  with  a 
a slight  bitterness.  They  are  esteemed  as  assisting  the 
formation  of  pus,  in  inflammatory  tumours  ; and  thq 


TRO 

meal,  with  that  intention,  is  made  into  a poultice  with 
milk. 

TRIGONUS.  See  Triangularis. 

TRIHILATjE.  (From  tres,  three,  and  hilum , the 
scar  or  external  mark  on  the  seed.)  The  name  of  a 
class  of  plants  in  Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural 
Method,  consisting  of  plants,  the  seeds  of  which  have 
the  scar  well  marked  ; the  style  has  three  stigmas. 

TRILOBUS.  Three-lobed.  Applied  to  parts  of 
animals  and  plants  which  are  so  shaped. 

TRINERVIS.  Three-nerved.  In  botany,  three- 
ribbed  ; as  applied  to  leaves,  &c. 
k Trinita'tis  herba.  See  Anemone  hepatica. 

TRINITY-HERB.  See  Anemone  hepatica. 

(“  TRIOSTEUM.  The  triostcum  perfoliatum  is  a 
native  plant,  the  root  of  which  is  cathartic  in  the  dose 
of  thirty  or  thirty-five  grains.  It  sometimes  operates 
as  an  emetic  in  the  same  doses.  The  strength  is  some- 
what impaired  by  keeping,  so  that  the  stock  should  be 
renewed  every  year.” — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

TRIPARTITUS.  Tripartite : divided  into  three. 

Tripa'strum  apellidis.  Tripastrum  archimedis. 
A surgical  instrument  for  extending  fractured  limbs ; 
so  named  because  it  resembled  a machine  invented  by 
Apellides  or  Archimedes,  for  the  launching  of  ships, 
and  because  it  \yas  worked  with  three  cords. 

TRIPHANE.  See  Spodumene. 

TR1PHYLLUS.  (From  rpsis,  three,  and  (pvWov , a 
leaf.)  Three-leaved. 

Triplinervis.  Triply- ribbed:  applied  to  a leaf, 
which  has  a pair  of  large  ribs  branching  otf  from  a 
main  one  above  the  base,  which  is  the  case  in  every 
species  of  sunflower,  and  the  Blakea  triplinervis. 

TRIPOLI.  Rottenstone.  A grayish  yellow-coloured 
mineral  used  for  polishing. 

TRIQUE'TRA.  ( Triquetrus ; from  tres,  three.) 
Ossicula  wormiana.  The  triangular-shaped  bones, 
which  are  found  mostly  in  the  course  of  the  lambdoidal 
suture  of  the  skull. 

TRIQUETRUS.  Three-sided.  Applied  to  some 
parts  of  plants;  as  the  stems,  flowerstalk,  leaves, 
seeds,  &c. 

TRI'SMUS.  (From  7pt?w,  to  gnash.)  Locked  jaw. 
Spastic  rigidity  of  the  under  jaw.  Capistrum,  of 
Vogel.  Dr.  Cullen  makes  two  species.  1.  Trismus 
nascentium,  attacking  infants  during  the  first  two 
weeks  from  their  birth.  2.  Trismus  traumaticus, 
attacking  persons  of  all  ages,  and  arising  from  cold  or  a 
wound.  See  Tetanus. 

TRISSA'GO.  (Quasi  tristago  ; from  tristis,  sad: 
because  it  dispels  sadness.)  The  common  germander 
is  sometimes  so  called.  See  Teucrium  chamcedrys. 

Trissago  pallustris.  The  water-germander  was 
so  called.  See  Teucrium  scordium. 

TRnVEO'PHYA.  (From  np'Jaios,  tertian,  and  d>vo), 
importing  a like  nature  or  original.)  Tritceus.  A fever 
much  of  a nature  with  a tertian,  and  taking  its  rise 
from  it.  Some  call  it  a continued  tertian.  It  is  remit- 
tent or  intermittent. 

Trit^ophya  causus.  The  fever  called  causus  by 
Hippocrates. 

TRIT-E'US.  See  Tritceophya. 

TRI'TICUM.  (From  tero , to  thresh  from  the  husk.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Triandria  ; 
Order,  Digynia.  See  Wheat. 

Triticum  repens.  Gramen  caninum;  Gramen 
Dioscoridiq ; Gramen  repens;  Loliaceum  radice  re- 
venue. Dog’s  grass;  Couch  grass.  A very  common 
grass,  the  roots  of  which  are  agreeably  sweet,  and  pos- 
sess aperient  properties.  The  expressed  juice  is 
recommended  to  be  given  largely. 

TRITO'RIUM.  (From  tritus,  beat  small.)  1.  A 
mortar. 

2.  A glass  for  separating  the  oil  from  the  water  in 
distilling. 

TRITURATION.  (Trituratio ; from  tero,  to  rub 
or  grind.)  Trilura;  Tritus.  The  act  of  reducing  a 
solid  body  into  a subtile  powder ; as  woods,  barks,  &c. 
It  is  performed  mostly  by  the  rotary  motion  of  a 
pestle  in  metallic,  glass,  or  Wedgewood  mortars. 

TROCAR.  (Corrupted  from  un  trois  quart,  French, 
a three-quarters ; from  the  three  sides  with  which 
the  point  is  made.)  The  name  of  an  instrument  used 
in  tapping  for  the  dropsy. 

TROCHA'NTER.  (From  rpexto,  to  run : because 
the  muscles  inserted  into  them  perform  the  office  of 
running.)  The  name  of  two  processes  of  the  thigh- 
360 


TRO 

bone,  which  are  distinguished  into  the  greater  and 

less.  See  Femur. 

TROCHI  SCUS.  (Diminutive  of  rpoxos,  a wheel.) 
A troch  or  round  tablet.  Troches  and  lozenges  are 
composed  of  powders  made  up  with  glutinous  sub- 
stances into  little  cakes,  and  afterward  dried.  This 
form  is  principally  used  for  the  more  commodious  exni- 
bition  of  certain  medicines,  by  fitting  them  to  dissolve 
slowly  in  the  mouth,  so  as  to  pass  by  degrees  into  the 
stomach ; and  hence  these  preparations  have  generally 
a considerable  portion  of  sugar  or  other  materials 
grateful  to  the  palate.  Some  powders  have  likewise 
been  reduced  into  troches,  with  a view  to  their  prepara 
tion,  though  possibly  for  no  very  good  reasons:  for  the 
moistening  them,  and  afterward  drying  them  in  the 
air,  must  on  this  account  be  of  greater  injury,  than  any 
advantage  accruing  from  this  form  can  counterbalance. 

General  rules  for  making  troches: 

1.  If  the  mass  proves  so  glutinous  as  to  stick  to  the 
fingers  in  making  up,  the  hands  may  be  anointed 
with  any  sweet  or  aromatic  oil ; or  else  sprinkled  with 
starch,  or  liquorice  powder,  or  with  flour. 

2.  In  order  to  thoroughly  dry  the  troches,  put  them 
on  an  inverted  sieve,  in  a shady,  airy  place,  and  fre- 
quently turn  them. 

3.  Troches  are  to  be  kept  in  glass  vessels,  or  in 
earthen  ones  well  glazed. 

TRO'CHLEA.  (Tpo^Aca,  a pulley ; from  rpex w,  to 
run.)  A kind  of  cartilaginous  pulley,  through  which 
the  tendon  of  one  of  the  muscles  of  the  eye  passes. 

TROCHLEA'RIS.  See  Obliquus  superior  oculi. 

TROCHLEATO'RES.  The  fourth  pair  of  nerves 
are  so  called,  because  they  are  inserted  into  the  mus- 
culus  troclearis  of  the  eye.  See  Pathetici. 

TROCHOI'DES.  (From  rpoxos,  a wheel,  and  cidos, 
resemblnace.)  Axea  commissura.  A species  of  diar- 
throsis, or  moveable  connexion  of  bones,  in  which  one 
bone  rotates  upon  another ; as  the  first  cervical  verte- 
bra upon  the  odontoid  process  of  the  second. 

TRONA.  The  African  name  for  the  native  car- 
bonate of  soda  found  near  Fezzan. 

[“  The  carbonate  of  soda,  strictly  so  called,  is  found 
in  the  province  of  Sukena,  two  days’  journey  from 
Fezzan,  in  Africa.  It  appears  in  crusts,  composed  of 
minute  crystals,  at  the  foot  of  a mountain.  It  is  there 
called  Trona,  and  transported  to  Egypt,  Tripoli,  &c. 
This  variety  is  also  found  near  Buenos  Ayres  in* con- 
siderable quantities,  whence  it  has  been  transported  to 
England.  It  there  exists  in  stratified  masses  from  two 
to  six  inches  thick,  resting  on  clay,  which  is  strongly 
impregnated  with  common  salt.  It  has  a light  yel- 
lowish-gray colour,  a granular  texture,  is  easily  broken, 
and  does  not  effloresce  in  the  air.”—  Cleav.  Min.  A.  1 

TRONCH1N,  Theodore,  was  born  at  Geneva,  in 
1709,  and  went  to  study  under  Boerhaave,  at  Leyden, 
where  he  graduated  in  1730.  He  then  settled  at  Am- 
sterdam, became  a member  of  the  College  of  Phy- 
sicians, and  an  inspector  of  hospitals ; and  distin- 
uished  himself  as  a zealous  promoter  of  inoculation, 
n 1754,  he  returned  to  Geneva,  and  ranked  among  the 
most  eminent  practitioners  in  Europe ; a chair  of  me- 
dicine was  instituted  in  his  favour,  and  the  Society  of 
Pastors  admitted  him  into  their  body.  He  was  em- 
ployed by  the  Duke  of  Orleans,  and  other  persons  of 
rank  at  Paris,  to  inoculate  their  children ; and  per- 
formed the  same  office  for  the  Duke  of  Parma.  In 
17C6,  he  accepted  the  appointment  of  principal  phy- 
sician to  the  Duke  of  Orleans;  though  he  had  pre- 
viously declined  an  invitation  from  the  Empress  of 
Russia.  His  practice  appears  to  have  been  simple  and 
judicious,  and  his  conduct  marked  by  humanity  and 
charity.  He  had  little  time  for  writing  ; but  besides  his 
inaugural  dissertation,  he  published  a treatise  on  the 
Colica  Pictonum,in  1757,  and  contributed  several  arti- 
cles to  the  Encyclopedia,  and  to  the  Memoirs  of  the 
Academy  of  Surgery : and  to  an  edition  of  the  works  of 
Baillou  he  gave  a Preface  on  the  State  of  Medicine. 
He  had  the  honour  of  being  a member  of  the  chief 
medical  and  scientific  societies  in  Europe.  His  death 
happened  in  1781. 

TROPiE'OLUM.  (A  diminutive  of  tropeeum , or 
rpionaiov,  a warlike  trophy.  This  fanciful  but  ele- 
gant name  was  chosen  by  Linnaeus  for  this  singular 
and  striking  genus,  because  he  conceived  the  shield- 
like leaves  and  the  brilliant  flowers,  shaped  like  golden 
helmets,  pierced  through  and  through,  and  stained  with 
blood,  might  well  justify  such  an  allusion.)  The  name 


TRU 


TUB 


©f  a genus  of  plants.  Class,  Octandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

Tropjeolum  majus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Indian  cress.  Nasturtium  indicum ; Acriviola ; Flos 
sanguineus  monardi ; Nasturtium  peruvianum ; Car- 
damindum  minus.  Greater  Indian  cress,  or  Nastur- 
tium. This  plant  is  a native  of  Peru ; it  was  first 
brought  to  France  in  1684,  and  there  called  La  grande 
capucine.  In  its  recent  state  this  plant,  and  more 
especially  its  flowers,  have  a smell  and  taste  resem- 
bling those  of  water-cress ; and  the  leaves,  on  being 
bruised  in  a mortar,  emit  a pungent  odour,  somewhat 
like  that  of  horse-radish.  By  distillation  with  water, 
they  impregnate  the  fluid  in  a considerable  degree  with 
the  smell  and  flavour  of  the  plant.  Hence  the  anti- 
scorbutic character  of  the  nasturtium  seems  to  be  well 
founded, -at  least  as  far  as  we  are  able  to  judge  from  its 
sensible  qualities:  therefore,  in  all  those  cases  where 
the  warm  and  antiscorbutic  vegetables  are  recom- 
mended, this  plant  may  be  occasionally  adopted  as  a 
pleasant  and  effectual  variety.  Patients  to  whom  the 
nauseous  taste  of  scurvy-grass  is  intolerable,  may  find 
a grateful. substitute  in  the  nasturtium.  The  flowers 
are  frequently  .used  in  salads,  and  the  capsules  are  by 
many  highly  esteemed  as  a pickle.  The  flowers,  in  the 
warm  summer  months,  about  the  time  of  sunset,  have 
been  observed  to  emit  sparks  like  those  of  the  electrical 
kind. 

Trophis  americana.  Red  fruited  bucephalon. 
The  fruit  of  the  plant  is  a rough  red  berry,  which  is 
eaten  in  Jamaica,  though  not  very  pleasant. 

TRUFFLE.  See  Lycoperdon  tuber. 

TRUNCATES.  Truncate.  Used  in  botany.  A 
truncate  leaf  is  an  abrupt  one,  which  has  the  extremity 
cut  off,  as  it  were,  by  a transverse  line ; as  in  Lirio- 
dendrum  tulipif era,  and  the  petals  of  Hura  crepitans. 

TRUNCUS.  ( Truncus , i,  m.)  The  trunk. 

I.  In  anatomy , applied  to  the  body  strictly  so  called. 
It  is  divided  into  the  thorax  or  chest,  the  abdomen  or 
belly,  and  the  pelvis. 

II.  In  botany , that  part  of  a plant  which  emerges 
from  the  root,  and  sustains  all  other  parts.  The  genera 
of  trunks  are, 

1.  Truncus : applied  to  trees  and  shrubs,  which  are 
thick  and  woody 

2.  Caulis:  the  stem  of  heros. 

3.  Calmus : the  stem  of  grasses. 

4.  Stipes : the  trunk  of  funguses,  ferns,  and  palms. 

5.  Scapus  : which  is  not  a trunk,  but  a flower-stalk, 
emerging  from  the  root. 

[Truss.  This  is  an  instrument  employed  by  sur- 
geons to  retain  the  intestines  in  their  proper  place, 
when  they  have  been  forced  out  of  their  natural  posi- 
tion, forming  the  disease  which  is  called  a rupture  or 
hernia.  A hernia  is  reducible  or  not.  When  not  re- 
ducible, it  becomes  a strangulated  hernia,  requiring  a 
surgical  operation,  before  the  intestines  can  be  restored 
to  their  proper  position.  When  not  strangulated,  rup- 
tures are  liable  to  become  so  by  accident,  and  hence 
trusses  were  invented  to  keep  the  intestines  in  their 
place,  and  if  possible  to  cure  the  disease,  by  closing  the 
opening  through  which  the  bowels  protruded.  Trusses 
have  heretofore  been  considered  as  a palliative  remedy, 
rather  than  the  means  of  effecting  a radical  cure.  This 
has  arisen  from  the  manner  of  constructing  them ; and 
although  they  sometimes  effected  the  desired  object, 
yet  they  more  generally  failed,  because  the  pads  of  all  the 
trusses  heretofore  applied,  were  made  convex.  The 
intention  of  this  shape  of  the  instrument  was  to  press 
Into  the  opening  through  which  the  gut  descended,  and 
to  keep  it  well  into  its  place ; but  while  it  had  this  ef- 
fect, it  tended  to  keep  the  opening  from  healing,  and 
even  to  enlarge  it.  This  evil  was  not  fully  remedied 
until  Dr.  Amos  G.  Hull,  of  New-York,  turned  his  at- 
tention to  the  subject,  and  by  his  improvements  in  the 
construction  of  trusses,  has  rendered  it  certain  that  all 
recent  ruptures,  and  those  of  children,  may  be  perma- 
nently cured,  and  those  of  old  people  and  of  long  stand- 
ing may,  in  many  cases,  also  be  remedied.  The  pad 
of  Dr.  Hull’s  truss  is  concave , and  not  convex ; and 
hence  the  raised  circular  margin,  by  proper  adaptation, 
presses  upon  the  sides  of  the  hernial  opening,  and  tends 
to  close  the  aperture  and  cure  the  hernia. 

The  following  particulars  of  this  invention,  and  its 
application  to  the  cure  of  hernia,  we  take  from  the 
New-York  Medical  and  Physical  Journal,  vol.  4. 

“ The  qualities  we  have  united  in  the  truss,  are 


| equally  applicable  to  every  species  of  hernia,  and  we 
can  say,  without  the  fear  of  contradiction,  that  the 
proportion  of  cures  it  has  effected  is  altogether  unpa- 
ralleled. It  may,  perhaps,  be  an  interesting  inquiry  to 
some,  how  this  instrument  produces  its  effects : and  we 
think,  after  considering  its  construction,  this  question 
can  be  answered  to  the  satisfaction  of  every  rational 
mind.  It  will  be  observed,  that  this  truss  presents  a 
concave  surface  to  the  rupture  opening.  The  conca- 
vity  of  the  plate  is  occupied  by  an  el.astic  cushion,  the  ' 
resistance  of  which  is  sufficient  to  reduce  the  intruding 
intestine  while  it  is  prevented  escaping  to  any  consider- 
able distance  by  the  pressure  of  the  metallic  plate ; 
which  pressure  being  greatest  at  the  circumference  and 
diminishing  towards  the  centre,  tends  constantly  to  ap- 
proximate the  hernial  parietes,  and  afford  them  rest 
and  mechanical  support.  It  is  therefore  obvious  that 
nothing  is  suffered  to  intervene  between  the  lips  of  the 
opening,  as  is  the  case  when  tlie  intestine  protrudes,  or 
a convex  pad  is  applied,  but  a fair  opportunity  is  pre- 
sented for  the  fibres  to  recover  their  tone,  or  to  heal, 
when  any  laceration  has  been  produced  by  violence 
done  to  the  parts.  It  is  a law  of  the  animal  economy, 
particularly  noticed  by  Dorsey,  that  all  hollow  parts 
of  the  body  have  a tendency  to  adapt  themselves  to 
their  contents. 

“ For  the  cure  of  hernia,  then,  it  is  only  necessary  to 
remove  every  obstacle  which  counteracts  this  tendency 
This  indication  is  certainly  very  far  from  being  an- 
swered by  the  convex  pad,  and  we  think  it  can  only  be 
fulfilled  by  one  which  shall  reduce  the  bowel  without 
dilating  the  ring:  with  this  view,  we  have  applied  the 
concave  pad,  which  has  more  than  answered  our  ex- 
pectations, in  preventing  a descent  of  the  gut,  and  in 
restoring  the  fibres,  which  it  undoubtedly  greatly  facili- 
tates by  its  constant  and  uniform  pressure.  But  without 
investigating  the  modus  operandi , it  is  sufficient  for  the 
patient,  and  for  all  practical  purposes,  for  the  physician 
to  know,  that  with  this  instrument  hernia  may  always 
be  secured.  If  applied  in  cases  of  umbilical  or  conge- 
nital hernia  in  children,  it  will,  in  every  instance,  re- 
move the  necessity  of  an  operation.  In  cases  of  con- 
genital hernia,  it  should  be  applied  before  adhesion 
takes  place,  but  not  until  the  testicle  has  made  its  de- 
scent. If  this  particular  period  should  be  more  care- 
fully observed  by  surgeons,  and  the  application  of  the 
truss  (instead  of  being  abandoned  to  mechanics) 
receive  a greater  share  of  their  attention,  they  might 
be  instrumental  in  obviating  much  of  the  distress  which 
has  been  entailed  upon  the  world. 

“The  distinctive  merits  of  this  truss  Dr.  Hull  sums  up 
under  the  following  heads : — 

“First. — The  concave  internal  surface  of- the  rup- 
ture pad,  from  its  pressure  being  greatest  at  the  circum- 
ference, tends  constantly  to  approximate  the  hernial 
parietes,  affording  them  rest  and  mechanical  support. 

“ Secondly. — The  combined  hinge  and  pivot  mode 
of  connexion  between  the  spring  and  pad,  by  means 
of  a tenon  and  mortice,  so  constructed  as  to  preserve  a 
double  hinge  and  limited  joint,  acting  in  every  direc- 
tion, thereby  securing  the  uniform  pressure  of  the 
spring  on  the  pad,  and  sustaining  the  same  nice  coapta- 
tion of  the  pad  and  rupture  opening,  as  well  under  the 
varied  ordinary  desultory  muscular  actions,  as  when 
the  body  is  in  a recumbent  posture. 

“ Thirdly. — The  graduating  power  and  fixture  of  the 
pad  to  the  spring,  rendering,  as  will  be  readily  per- 
ceived, the  condition  of  the  pad  perfectly  controllable, 
even  to  nameless  minuteness.  Also  resulting  from 
this  mechanism,  is  the  advantage  of  accommodating  a 
large  truss  to  a small  person  ; hence  th o.  facility  of  sup- 
plying, without  disappointment , persons  at  a great 
distance 

“ Fourthly. — The  double  inguinal  truss,  being  simply 
the  addition  of  another  pad,  attached  to  a short  elastic 
metallic  plate : this  plate  with  its  pad  move  on  the  main 
spring  by  the  same  power  of  adjustment  and  fixture 
as  the  first  pad,  the  pressure  of  the  pads  being  gradu- 
ated at  pleasure  by  an  intervening  cork  wedge.”  A.] 

TU'BA.  (From  tubus : any  hollow  vessel.)  1.  A tube. 

2.  In  botany,  the  inferior  part  of  a monopetalous 
corol.  It  is  the  cylindrical  part  which  is  enclosed  in 
the  calyx  of  the  primrose.  See  Corolla. 

Tuba  eustachiana.  Tuba  aristotelica ; Aqueedu- 
cus ; Aquceductus  fallopii  ; Meatus  siccus ; Palaiinus 
ductus  ; Ductus  auris  palat.fnus.  The  auditory  tube 
The  Eustachian  tube,  so  called  because  it  was  first 

361 


TUN 


TUN 


described  by  Eustachius,  arises  in  each  ear  from  the 
anterior  extremity  of  the  tympanum  by  means  of  a 
bony  semi-canal;  runs  forwards  and  inwards,  at  the 
same  time  becoming  gradually  smaller;  and  after  per- 
forating the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  ter- 
minates in  a passage,  partly  cartilaginous  and  partly 
membranous,  narrow  at  the  beginning,  but  becoming 
gradually  larger,  and  ending  in  a pouch  behind  the  soft 
palate.  It  is  through  this  orifice  that  the  pituitary 
membrane  of  the  nose  enters  the  tympanum.  It  is 
always  open,  and  affords  a free  passage  for  the  air  into 
the  tympanum ; hence  persons  hear  better  with  their 
mouth  open. 

Tuba  fallopiana.  The  Fallopian  tube  first  de- 
scribed by  Fallopius.  The  uterine  tube.  A canal 
included  in  two  laminae  of  the  peritonamm,  which 
arises  at  each  side  of  the  fundus  of  the  uterus,  passes 
transversely,  and  ends  with  its  extremity  turned  down- 
wards at  the  ovarium.  Its  use  is  to  grasp  the  ovum, 
and  convey  the  prolific  vapour  to  it,  and  to  conduct  the 
fertilized  ovum  into  the  cavity  of  the  uterus. 

TUBER.  (Tuber,'  eris,  n. ; from  tumeo,  to  swell.) 
An  old  name  for  an  excrescence. 

1.  In  anatomy,  applied  to  some  parts  which  are 
rounded;  as  tuber  annulwre,  &c. 

2.  In  surgery,  a knot  or  swelling  in  any  part. 

3.  In  botany,  applied  to  a kind  of  round  turgid  root, 
as  a turnip ; hence  these  are  called  tuberose  roots. 

4.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaran 
system.  Class,  Cryptogamia , Order,  Fungi. 

Tuber  cibarum.  The  common  trulfle.  See  Lyco- 
perdon  tuber. 

Tubercula  quadrigemina.  Corpora  quadrigemi- 
na;  Eminent! <e  quadrigemince ; Natulce.  Four  white 
oval  tubercles  of  the  brain,  two  of  which  are  situated 
on  each  side  over  the  posterior  orifice  of  the  third  ven- 
tricle and  the  aqueduct  of  Sylvius.  The  ancients  called 
them  nates  and  testes,  from  their  supposed  resemblance. 

TUBERCULUM.  (Tuberculum,  i,  n.  diminutive 
of  tuber.)  A tubercle.  In  anatomy,  applied  to  several 
elevations,  and  in  morbid  anatomy  to  a diseased  struc- 
ture, which  consists  of  a solid  roundish  substance;  as 
tubercles  of  the  lungs,  liver,  &c. 

In  botany,  it  is  applied  to  the  hemispherical  projec- 
tions, as  the  fruit  of  the  Lichen  caninus. 

Tuberculum  annulare.  The  commencement  of 
the  medulla  oblongata. 

Tuberculum  loweri.  An  eminence  in  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart  where  the  two  vena?  cav®  meet:  so 
called  from  Lower,  who  first  described  it. 

TUBEROSUS.  Tuberose,  knobbed : applied  to 
parts  of  plants.  The  root  so  called  is  of  many  kinds. 
The  most  genuine  consists  of  fleshy  knobs,  various  in 
fonn,  connected  by  common  stalks  or  fibres ; as  the  po- 
tato, and  Jerusalem  artichoke. 

TUBULARIS.  Tubular.  In  Good’s  Nosology  used 
to  designate  a species  of  purging,  diao-rhusa  tubularis , 
in  which  membrane-like  tubes' pass  with  the  motions. 

TUBULOSUS.  Tubulose.  A leaf  is  so  called 
which  is  hollow  within,  as  that  of  the  common  onion. 

The  florets  of  a compound  flower  are  called  tubulosi, 
tubular  or  cylindrical,  to  distinguish  them  from  such  as 
are  ligulate,  or  riband-like. 

TU'BULUS.  A small  tube  or  duct. 

Tubuli  lactxferi.  The  ducts  or  tubes  in  the  nip- 
ple, through  which  the  milk  passes. 

TUFT.  See  Capitulum. 

TULP,  Nicholas,  was  the  son  of  an  opulent  mer- 
chant, and  born  at  Amsterdam,  in  1593.  Having 
studied  and  graduated  at  Leyden,  he  settled  in  his 
native  city,  and  rose  to  a high  rank,  not  only  in  his 
profession,  but  also  as  a citizen.  lie  was  made  burgo- 
master in  1652,  and  in  that  station  resisted  the  invasion 
of  Holland  by  Lewis  XIV.  twenty  years  after,  and  thus 
saved  his  country;  on  which  occasion  a medal  was 
struck  to  his  honour.  He  died  in  1674.  His  three 
books  of  Medical  Observations  have  been  several  times 
reprinted,  and  contain  many  valuable  physiological  re- 
marks. He  is  said  to  have  been  among  the  first  who 
observed  the  lacteal  vessels. 

TUMITE.  See  Thummeretone. 

TU'MOUR.  (Tumor;  from  tumeo , to  swell.)  A 
swelling. 

Tumo'res.  Tumours.  An  order  in  the  Class,  Lo- 
cales, of  Cullen’s  Nosology,  comprehending  partial 
swellings  without  inflammation. 

TUNBRIDGE.  Tunbridge  wells  is  a populous  vil- 
362 


lage  in  the  county  of  Kent,  which  contains  many  cha- 
lybeate springs,  all  of  which  resemble  each  other  very 
closely  in  their  chemical  properties.  Two  of  these  are 
chiefly  used,  which  yield  about  a gallon  in  a minute, 
and  therefore  afford  an  abundant  supply  for  the  nume- 
rous invalids  who  yearly  resort  thither.  The  analysis 
of  Tunbridge  spring  proves  it  to  be  a very  pure  water, 
as  to  the  quantity  of  solid  matter;  and  the  saline  con- 
tents (the  iron  excepted)  are  such  as  may  be  found  in 
almost  any  water  that  is  used  as  common  drink.  It  is 
only  as  a chalybeate,  and  in  the  quantity  of  carbonic 
acid,  that  it  differs  from  common  water.  Of  this  acid 
it  contains  one  twenty -second  of  its  bulk.  The  general 
operation  of  this  chalybeate  water  is  to  increase  the 
power  of  the  secretory  system  in  a gradual,  uniform 
manner,  and  to  impart  tone  and  strength  to  all  the 
functions;  hence  it  is  asserted  to  be  of  eminent  service 
in  irregular  digestion,  flatulency,  in -the  incipient  stages 
of  those  chronic  disorders  which  are  attended  with 
great  debility,  in  chlorosis,  and  numerous  other  com- 
plaints incident  to  the  temale  sex.  The  prescribed 
method  of  using  the  Tunbridge  water,  observes  Dr. 
Saunders,  is  judicious.  The  whole  of  the.  quantity 
daily  used,  is  taken  at  about  two  or  three  intervals, 
beginning  at  eight  o’clock  in  the  morning,  and  finishing 
about  noon.  The  dose  at  each  time  varies  from  about 
one  to  three  quarters  of  a pint;  according  to  the  age, 
sex,  and  general  constitution  of  the  patient,  and  espe- 
cially the  duration  of  the  course ; for  it  is  found  that 
these  waters  lose  much  of  their  effect  by  long  habit. 

TUNGSTATE.  Tunstas.  A salt  formed  by  the 
combination  of  the  tungstic  acid,  with  salifiable  bases; 
as  tungstate  of  lime,  &c. 

TUNGSTENUM.  ( Tungsten , Swed.  ponderous 
stone.)  A metal,  never  found  but  in  combination,  and 
by  no  means  common.  The  substance  known  to  mine- 
ralogists, under  the  name  of  tungsten,  was,  after  some 
time,  discovered  to  consist  of  lime,  combined  with  the 
acid  of  this  metal.  This  ore  is  now  called  tungstate  of 
lime , and  is  exceedingly  scarce.  It  has  been  found  in 
Sweden  and  Germany,  both  in  masses  and  crystallized, 
of  a yellowish-white  or  gray  colour.  It  nas  a sparry 
appearance,  is  shining,  of  a lamellated  texture,  and 
semitransparent.  The  same  metallic  acid  is  likewise 
found  united  to  iron  and  manganese ; it  then  forms  the 
ore  called  Wolfram,  or  tungstate  of  iron  and  manga- 
nese. This  ore  occurs  both  massive  and  crystallized, 
and  is  found  in  Cornwall,  Germany,  France,  and  Spain. 
Its  colour  is  brownish-black,  and  its  texture  foliated. 
It  has  a metallic  lustre,  and  a lamellated  texture;  it  is 
brittle  and  very  heavy ; it  is  found  in  solid  masses,  in 
the  state  of  layers  interspersed  with  quartz.  These 
two  substances  are  therefore  ores  of  the  same  metal. 

Properties. — Tungstenum  appears  of  a steel-gray 
colour.  Its  specific  gravity  is  about  17  6.  It  is  one  of 
the  hardest  metals,  but  it  is  exceedingly  brittle ; and  it 
is  said  to  be  almost  as  infusible  as  platina.  Heated  in 
the  air  it  becomes  converted  into  a yellow  pulverulent 
oxide,  which  becomes  blue  by  a strong  heat,  or  when 
exposed  to  light.  Tungstenum  combines  with  phos- 
phorus and  sulphur,  and  with  silver,  copper,  iron,  lead, 
tin,  antimony,  and  bismuth  ; but  it  does  not  unite  with 
gold  and  platina.  It  is  not  attacked  by  sulphuric,  nitric, 
or  muriatic  acids;  nitro-muriatic  acid  acts  upon  it  very 
slightly.  It  is  oxidizable  and  acidifiable  by  the  nitrates 
and  hyperoxymuriates.  It  colours  the  vitrified  earths 
or  the  vitreous  fluxes,  of  a blue  or  brown  colour.  It  is 
not  known  what  its  action  may  be  on  water  and  differ- 
ent oxides.  Its  action  on  the  alkalies  is  likewise  un- 
known. It  is  not  employed  yet,  but  promises  real 
utility,  on  account  of  its  colouring  property,  as  a basis 
for  pigment,  since  the  compounds  it  is  said  to  form  with 
vegetable  colouring  matter,  afford  colours  so  perma- 
nent, as  not  to  be  acted  on  by  the  most  concentrated 
oxyinuriatic  acid,  the  great  enemy  of  vegetable  colours. 

Methods  of  obtaining  tungstenum. — The  method  of 
obtaining  metallic  tungstenum  is  a problem  in  chemistry 
Scheele,  Bergman,  and  Gmelin  did  not  succeed  in  their 
attempts  to  procure  it.  Klaproth  tried  to  reduce  the 
yellow  oxide  of  this  metal  with  a variety  of  combusti- 
ble substances,  but  without  success.  Ruprecht  and 
Tondy  say  they  have  obtained  this  metaHiy  using  com- 
bustible substances  alone:  and  by  a mixture  of  com- 
bustible and  alkaline  matter. 

The  following  process  is  recommended  by  Richter,  an 
ingenious  German  chemist. 

Let  equal  parts  of  tungstic  acid  and  dried  blood  bo 


TUR 


TYM 


exposed  for  some  time  to  a red  heat  in  a crucible ; press 
the  black  powder  which  is  formed  into  another  smaller 
crucible,  and  expose  it  again  to  a violent  heat  in  a 
forge,  for  at  least  half  an  hour.  Tungstenum  will 
then  be  found,  according  to  this  chemist,  in  its  metallic 
state  in  the  crucible.  There  are  two  oxides  of  tung- 
stenuin,  the  brown  and  the  yellow,  or  tungstic  acid. 

TUNGSTIC  ACID  has  been  found  only  in  two  mi- 
nerals; one  of  which,  formerly  called  tungsten,  is  a 
tungstate  of  lime,  and  is  very  rare;  the  other,  more 
common,  is  composed  of  tungstic  acid,  oxide  of  iron, 
and  a little  oxide  of  manganese.  The  acid  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  latter  in  the  following  way  : — The  wol- 
fram cleared  from  its.  silicious  gangue , and  pulverized, 
is  heated  in  a matrass  with  five  or  six  times  its  weight 
of  muriatic  acid  for  half  an  hour.  The  oxides  of  iron 
and  manganese  being  thus  dissolved,  we  obtain  the 
tungstic  acid  under  the  form  of  a yellow  powder.  After 
washing  it  repeatedly  with  water,  it  is  then  digested  in 
an  excess  of  liquid  ammonia,  heated,  which  dissolves 
it  completely.  The  liquor  is  filtered  and  evaporated  to 
dryness  in  a capsule.  The  dry  residue  being  ignited, 
the  ammonia  flies  oft',  and  pure  tungstic  acid  remains. 
If  the  whole  of  the  wolfram  has  not  been  decomposed 
in  this  operation,  it  must  be  subjected  to  the  muriatic 
acid  again. 

It  is  tasteless,  and  does  not  affect  vegetable  colours. 
The  tungstates  of  the  alkalies  and  magnesia  are  soluble 
and  crystallizable,  the  other  earthy  ones  are  insoluble, 
as  well  as  those  of  the  metallic  oxides.  The  acid  is 
composed  of  100  parts  metallic  tungsten,  and  25  or  26.4 
oxygen. 

TUNGSTOUS  ACID.  What  has  been  thus  called 
appears  to  be  an  oxide  of  tungsten. 

Tunic  of  a seed.  See  Arillus. 

TU'NICA.  {A  tuendo  corpore , because  it  defends 
the  body.)  A membrane  or  covering;  as  the  coats  of 
the  eye,  &c. 

Tunica  aciniformis.  The  uvea,  or  posterior  lamella 
of  the  iris. 

Tunica  albuginea  oculi.  See  Adnatq^tunica. 

Tunica  albuginea  testis.  See  Albuginea  testis. 

Tunica  arachnoidea.  See  Arachnoid  membrane. 

Tunica  cellulosa  ruyschil  The  second  coat  of 
the  intestines. 

Tunica  choroidea.  See  Choroid  membrane. 

Tunica  conjunctiva.  See  Conjunctive  membrane- 

Tunica  cornea.  See  Cornea. 

Tunica  filamentosa.  The  false  or  spongy  chorion. 

Tunica  retina.  See  Retina. 

Tunica  vaginalis  testis.  A continuation  of  the 
peritonasum  through  the  inguinal  ring,  which  loosely 
invests  the  testicle  and  spermatic  cord.  See  Testis. 

Tunica  villosa.  The  villous,  or  inner  folding  coat 
of  the  intestines. 

Turbet.h  mineral.  See  Hydrargyrus  vitriolatus. 

Turbeth-root.  See  Convolvulus  turpethum. 

TURBINATE.  (Turbinatus ; from  turbino , to 
sharpen  at  the  top,  shaped  like  a sugar-loaf.)  Shaped 
like  a sugar-loaf. 

Turbinated  bones.  The  superior  spongy  portion 
of  the  ethmoid  bone,  and  the  inferior  spongy  bones,  are 
so  called  by  some  writers.  See  Spovgiosa  ossa. 

TURBIN A'TUM.  The  pineal  gland. 

TURBINATUS.  Turbinate,  or  sugar-loaf  form. 
Applied  to  the  fig,  &c. 

Turbith.  A cathartic  eastern  bark ; a species  of 
cicely. 

TurJceystone.  See  Whctslate. 

TURMERIC.  See  Curcuma. 

TURNHOOF.  A vulgar  name  of  the  ground  ivy. 
See  Glecoma  hederacea. 

TURNIP.  See  Brassica  rap  a. 

Turnip , French.  See  Brassica  rapa. 

TURNSOLE.  See  Hcliotropium. 

TURPENTINE.  Terebintliina.  There  arc  many 
kinds  of  turpentine.  Those  employed  medicinally  are, 

1.  The  Chian  or  Cyprus  turpentine.  See  Pistacia 
terebinthus. 

, 2.  The  common  turpentine.  See  Tercbinthina  com- 
munis. 

3.  The  Venice  turpentine.  See  Pinus  larix. 

All  these  have  been  considered  as  hot,  stimulating 
corroborants  and  detergents;  qualities  which  they  pos- 
sess in  common.  They  stimulate  the  primas  vite,  and 
prove  laxative;  when  carried  into  the  blood-vessels 
they  excite  the  whole  system,  and  thus  prove  service- 


able in  chronic  rheumatism  and  paralysis.  Turpert 
tine  readily  passes  off  by  urine,  which  it  imbues  with 
a peculiar  odour ; also  by  perspiration  and  by  exhala- 
tion  from  the  lungs  ; and  to  these  respective  effects  are 
ascribed  the  virtues  it  possesses  in  gravelly  complaints, 
scurvy,  and  pulmonic  disorders.  Turpentine  is  much 
used  in  gleets,  and  fluor  albus,  and  in  general  with 
much  success.  The  essential  oil,  in  which  the  virtues 
of  turpentine  reside,  is  not  only  preferred  for  external  * 
use,  as  a rubefacient,  but  also  internally  as  a diuretic 
and  styptic ; the  latter  of  which  qualities  it  possesses 
in  a very  high  degree.  Formerly,  turpentine  was  much 
used  as  a digestive  application  to  ulcers,  &c.;  but  in  the 
modern  practice  of  surgery,  it  is  almost  wholly  exploded. 

Turpeth  mineral.  See  Hydrargyrus  vitriolatus . 

TURPE'THUM.  (From  Turpeth,  Indian  turbeth.) 

See  Convolvulus  turpethum.. 

Turpethum  minerals.  See  Hydrargyrus  vitrio- 
latus. 

TURQ.UOIS.  Calaite.  A much-esteemed  orna- 
mental stone  brought  from  Persia,  of  a smalt-blue  and 
apple-green  colour. 

TURU'NDA.  ( A terendo , from  its  being  rolled  up.) 

A tent,  or  suppository. 

TUSSILA'GO.  (Tussilago,  inis,  f. ; from  tussis , 
a cough;  because  it  relieves  coughs.)  I.  The  name  of 
a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system.  Class,  Syn- 
gmesia  ; Order,  Polygamia  superfiua. 

2.  The  pharmaeopoeial  name  of  the  coltsfoot.  See 
Tussilago  farfara. 

Tussilago  farfara.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Bechium;  Bechion ; Calceum  equinum ; Chamceleuce  ; 
Filins  antepatr  cm;  Farfarella ; Farfara;  Tussilago 
vulgaris ; Farfara  bechium ; Ungula  caballina.  Colts- 
foot. Tussilago  farfara — scapo  unifioro  imbricato, 
foliis  subcordatis  angulatis  denticulatis . The  sensi- 
ble qualities  of  this  plant,  are  very  inconsiderable  ; it 
has  a rough  mucilaginous  taste,  but  no  remarkable 
smell.  The  leaves  have  always  been  esteemed  as  pos- 
sessing demulcent  and  pectoral  virtues ; and  henca 
they  have  been  exhibited  in  pulmonary  consumptions, 
coughs,  asthmas,  and  catarrhal  affections.  It  is  used 
as  tea,  or  given  in  the  way  of  infusion  with  liquorice- 
root  or  honey. 

Tussilago  fetasites.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  butter  bur.  Fetasites.  Pestilent-wort.  The  roots 
of  this  plant  are  recommended  as  aperient  and  alexi- 
pharinic,  and  promise,  though  now  forgotten,  to  be  of 
considerable  activity.  They  have  a strong  smell,  and 
a bitterish  acrid  taste,  of  the  aromatic  kind,  but  not 
agreeable. 

TU'SSIS.  A cough,  a sonorous  concussion  of  the 
breast,  produced  by  the  violent,  and  for  the  most  part 
involuntary  motion  of  the  muscles  of  respiration.  It 
is  symptomatic  of  many  diseases. 

Tussis  convulsiva.  See  Pertussis. 

Tussis  exanthematica.  A cough  attendant  on  an 
eruption. 

Tussis  ferina.  See  Pertussis. 

TUTENAG.  1 The  Indian  name  for  zinc. 

2.  A metallic  compound  brought  from  China. 

TU'TIA.  (Persian.)  Pompholyx ; Cadmia.  Tutty. 

A gray  oxide  of  zinc ; it  is  generally  formed  by  fusing 
brass  or  copper,  mixed  with  blende,  when  it  is  incrusted 
in  the  chimneys  of  the  furnace.  Mixed  with  any  com- 
mon cerate,  it  is  applied  to  the  eye,  in  debilitated  states 
of  the  conjunctive  membrane. 

Tutia  preparata.  Prepared  tutty  is  often  put  into 
collyria,  to  which  it  imparts  an  adstringent  virtue. 

TUTTY.  See  Tutia. 

TYLO'SIS.  (From  rvAoj,  a callus.)  Tyloma.  An 
induration  of  the  margin  of  the  eyelids. 

Ty'mpani  membrana.  See  Membrana  tympani. 

TYMPANI'TES.  (From  rvyiravov , a drum:  so 
called  because  the  belly  is  distended  with  wind,  and 
sounds  like  a drum  when  struck.)  Tympany.  Drum- 
belly.  An  elastic  distention  of  the  abdomen,  which 
sounds  like  a drum  when  struck,  with  costiveness  and 
atrophy,  but  no  fluctuation.  Species:  1.  Tympanites 
intestinalis,  a lodgment  of  wind  in  the  intestines, 
known  by  the  discharge  of  wind  giving  relief 

2.  Tympanites  abdominalis,  when  the  wind  is  in  the 
cavity  of  the  abdomen. 

TY'MPANUM.  (Tvpnavov.  A drum.)  The  drum 
or  barrel  of  the  ear.  The  hollow  part  of  the  ear  in 
which  are  lodged  the  bones  of  the  ear.  It  begins  be- 
hind the  membrane  of  the  tympanum,  which  term! 

. 363 


TYP 


TYP 


Rates  the  external  auditory  passage,  and  is  surrounded 
by  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone.  It  termi- 
nates at  the  cochlea  of  the  labyrinth,  and  has  opening 
into  it  four  foramina,  viz.  the  orifices  of  the  Eustachian 
tube  and  mastoid  sinus,  the  fenestra  ovalis,  and  ro- 
tunda. It  contains  the  four  ossicula  auditus. 

TY'PHA.  (From  n0os,  a lake;  because  it  grows 
in  marshy  places.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  The  cat’s  tail. 

Typha  aromatica.  See  Acorus  calamus. 

Typha  latifolia.  The  broad-leaved  cat’s  tail,  or 
bull-rush . The  young  shoots,  cut  before  they  reach  the 
surface  of  the  water,  eat  like  asparagus  when  boiled. 

TYPHOMA'NIA.  (From rv0of , to  burn,  and  pavia, 
delirium.)  A complication  of  phrensy  and  lethargy 
with  fever. 

TY'PHUS.  (From  runoff,  stupor.)  A species  of 
continued  fever,  characterized  by  great  debility,  a ten- 
dency in  the  fluids  to  putrefaction  and  the  ordinary 
symptoms  of  fever.  It  is  to  be  readily  distinguished 
from  the  inflammatory  by  the  smallness  of  the  pulse, 
and  the  sudden  and  great  debility  which  ensues  on  its 
first  attack ; and,  in  its  more  advanced  stage,  by  the  pe- 
techiae,  or  purple  spots,  which  come  out  on  various  parts 
of  the  body,  and  the  foetid  stools  which  are  discharged  ; 
and  it  may  be  distinguished  from  a nervous  fever  by  the 
great  violence  of  all  its  symptoms  on  its  first  coming  on. 

The  nqost  general  cause  that  gives  rise  to  this  disease, 
is  contagion,  applied  either  immediately  from  the  body 
of  a person  labouring  under  it,  or  conveyed  in  clothes, 
or  merchandise,  &c.;  but  it  may  be  occasioned  by  the 
effluvia  arising  from  either  animal  or  vegetable  sub- 
stances in  a decayed  or  putrid  state : and  hence  it  is, 
that  in  low  and  marshy  countries  it  is  apt  to  be  preva- 
lent when  intense  and  sultry  heat  quickly  succeeds  any 
great  inundation.  A want  of  proper  cleanliness  and 
confined  air  are  likewise  causes  of  this  fever  ; hence  it 
prevails  in  hospitals,  jails,  camps,  and  on  board  of 
ships,  especially  when  such  places  are  much  crowded, 
and  the  strictest  attention  is  not  paid  to  a free  ventila- 
tion and  due  cleanliness.  A close  state  of  the  atmos- 
phere, with  damp  weather,  is  likewise  apt  to  give  rise 
to  putrid  fever.  Those  of  lax  fibres,  and  who  have 
been  weakened  by  any  previous  debilitating  cause, 
such  as  poor  diet,  long  fasting,  hard  labour,  continued 
want  of  sleep,  &c.  are  most  liable  to  it. 

On  the  first  coming  on  of  the  disease,  the  person  is 
seized  with  languor,  dejection  of  spirits,  amazing  de- 
pression and  loss  of  muscular  strength,  universal  wea- 
riness and  soreness,  pains  in  the  head,  back,  and  extre- 
mities, and  rigors  ; the  eyes  appear  full,  heavy,  yellow- 
ish, and  often  a little  inflamed  ; the  temporal  arteries 
throb  violently,  the  tongue  is  dry  and  parched,  respira- 
tion is  commonly  laborious,  and  interrupted  with  deep 
sighing ; the  breath  is  hot  and  offensive,  the  urine  is 
crude  and  pale,  the  body  is  costive,  and  the  pulse  is 
usually  quick,  small,  and  hard,  and  now  and  then  flut- 
tering and  unequal.  Sometimes  a great  heat,  load,  and 
pain  are  felt  at  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  and  a vomiting 
of  bilious  matter  ensues. 

As  the  disease  advances,  the  pulse  increases  in 
frequency  (beating  often  from  100  to  130  in  a minute); 
there  is  vast  debility,  a great  heat  and  dryness  in  the 
skin,  oppression  at  the  breast,  with  anxiety,  sighing, 
and  moaning;  the  thirst  is  greatly  increased;  the 
tongue,  mouth,  lips,  and  teeth  are  covered  over  with  a 
brown  or  black  tenacious  fur ; the  speech  is  inarticu- 
late, and  scarcely  intelligible ; the  patient  mutters 
much,  and  delirium  ensues.  The  fever  continuing  to 
increase  still  more  in  violence,  symptoms  of  putrefac- 
tion show  themselves ; the  breath  becomes  highly 
offensive;  the  urine  deposites  a black  and  foetid  sedi- 
ment ; the  stools  are  dark,  offensive,  and  pass  off 
insensibly  ; hamiorrhages  issue  from  the  gums,  nostrils, 
mouth,  and  other  parts  of  the  body;  livid  spots  or 
petechi®  appear  on  its  surface ; the  pulse  intermits  and 
sinks;  the  extremities  grow  cold;  hiccoughs  ensue ; 
and  death  at  last  closes  the  tragic  scene. 

When  this  fever  does  not  terminate  fatally,  it  gene- 
rally begins,  in  cold  climates,  to  diminish  about  the 
commencement  of  the  third  week,  and  goes  off  gradu- 
ally towards  the  end  of  the  fourth,  without  any  very 
evident  crisis ; but  in  warm  climates  it  seldom  con- 
tinues above  a week  or  ten  days,  if  so  long. 

Our  opinion,  as  to  the  event,  is  to  be  formed  by  the 
degree  of  violence  in  the  symptoms,  particularly  after 
pe tech  ire  appear,  although  in  some  instances  recoveries 


have  been  effected  under  the  most  unpromising  appear 
ances.  An  abatement  of  febrile  heat  and  thirst,  a 
gentle  moisture  diffused  equally  over  the  whole  sur 
face  of  the  body,  loose  stools,  turbid  urine,  rising  of 
the  pulse,  and  the  absence  of  delirium  and  stupor, 
may  be  regarded  in  a favourable  light.  On  the  con 
trary,  petechia,  with  dark,  offensive,  and  involuntary 
discharges  by  urine  and  stool,  foetid  sweats,  haemor- 
rhages, and  hiccoughs,  denote  the  almost  certain  dis- 
solution of  the  patient.  • 

The  appearances  usually  perceived  on  dissection,  are 
inflammations  of  the  brain  and  viscera,  but  more  par- 
ticularly of  the  stomach  and  intestines,  which  are  now 
and  then  found  in  a gangrenous  state.  In  the  muscular 
fibres  there  seems  likewise  a strong  tendency  to  gan 
grene. 

In  the  very  early  period  of.  typhus  fever,  it  is  often 
possible,  by  active  treatment,  to  cut  short  the  disease 
at  once;  but  where  it  has  established  itself  more 
firmly,  we  can  only  employ  palliative  measures  to 
diminish  its  violence,  that  it  may  run  safely  through 
its  course.  Among  the  most  likely  meqps  of  accom- 
plishing the  first  object  is  an  emetic  ; where  the  fever 
runs  high,  we  may  give  antimonials  in  divided  doses 
at  short  intervals  till  full  vomiting  is  excited ; or  if 
there  be  less  strength  in  the  system,  ipecacuanha  in  a 
full  dose  at  once.  Attention  should  next  be  paid  to 
clear  out  the  bowels  by  some  sufficiently  active  form 
of  medicine;  and  as  the  disease  proceeds,  we  must 
keep  up  this  function,  and  attempt  to  restore  that  of 
the  skin,  and  the  other  secretions,  as  the  best  means  of 
moderating  the  violence  of  vascular  action.  Some  of 
the  preparations  of  mercury,  or  if  there  be  tolerable 
strength,  those  of  antimony,  assisted  by  the  saline 
compounds,  may  be  employed  for  this  purpose.  The 
general  antiphlogistic  regimen  is  to  be  observed  in  the 
early  part  of  the  disease,  as  explained  under  synocha. 
In  cases  where  the  skin  is  uniformly  very  hot  and  dry, 
the  abstraction  of  caloric  may  be  more  actively  made 
by  means  of  the  cold  affusion,  that  is,  throwing  a 
quantity  of  cold  water  on  the  naked  body  of  the 
patient ; which  measure  has  sometimes  arrested  the 
disease  in  its  first  stage;  and  when  the  power  of  the 
system  is  less,  sponging  the  body  occasionally  with 
cold  water,  medicated,  perhaps,  with  a little  salt  or 
vinegar,  may  be  substituted  as  a milder  proceeding. 
But  where  the  evolution  of  heat  is  even  deficient,  such 
means  would  be  highly  improper  ; and  it  may  be  some- 
times advisable  to  employ  the  tepid  bath,  to  promote 
the  operation  of  the  diaphoretic  medicines.  If  under 
the  use  of  the  measures  already  detailed,  calculated 
to  lessen  the  violence  of  vascular  action,  the  vital 
powers  should  appear  materially  falling  off,  recourse 
must  then  be  had  to  a more  nutritious  diet,  with  a 
moderate  quantity  of  wine,  and  cordial,  or  tonic  medi- 
cines. There  is  generally  an  aversion  from  animal 
food,  whence  the  mucilaginous  vegetable  substances, 
as  arrow-root,  &c.,  rendered  palatable  by  spice,  or  a 
little  wine,  or  sometimes  mixed  with  milk,  may  be 
directed,  as  nourishing  and  easy  of  digestion.  If, 
however,  there  be  no  marked  septic  tendency,  and  the 
patient  cloyed  with  these  articles,  tire  lighter  animal 
preparations,  as  calves-foot  jelly,  veal  broth,  &c.,  may 
be  allowed.  The  extent  to  which  wine  may  be  carried, 
must  depend  on  the  urgency  of  the  case,  and  the 
previous  habits  of  the  individual ; but  it  will  commonly 
not  be  necessary  to  exceed  half  a pint,  or  a pint  at 
most,  in  the  twenty-four  hours  ; and  it  should  be  given 
in  divided  portions,  properly  diluted,  made,  perhaps, 
into  negus,  whey,  &c.,  according  to  the  liking  of  the 
patient.  The  preference  should  always  be  given  to 
that  which  is  of  the  soundest  quality,  if  agreea- 
ble : but  where  wine  cannot  be  afforded,  good  malt 
liquor,  or  mustard  whey,  may  be  substituted.  Some 
moderately  stimulant  medicines,  as  ammonia,  aro- 
matics, serpentaria,  &c.,  may  often  be  used  with 
advantage,  to  assist  in  keeping  up  the  circulation : 
also  those  of  a tonic  quality,  as  calumba,  cusparia, 
cinchona,  &c.,  occasionally  in  their  lighter  forms ; 
but  more  especially  the  acids.  These  are,  in  several 
respects,  useful ; by  promoting  the  secretions  of  the 
prim®  vi®,  &c.,  they  quench  thirst,  remove  irritation, 
and  manifestly  cool  the  body ; and  in  the  worst  forms 
of  typhus,  where  the  putrescent  tendency  appears, 
they  are  particularly  indicated  from  their  antiseptic 
power ; they  are  also  decidedly  tonic,  and  indeed  those 
from  the  mineral  kingdom  powerfully  so.  These  may 


CJLM 


ULM 


be  given  freely  as  medicines,  the  carbonic  acid  also  in 
the  form  of  brisk  fermenting  liquors ; and  the  native 
vegetable  acids,  as  they  exist  in  ripe  fruits,  being 
generally  very  grateful,  may  constitute  a considerable 
part  of  the  diet.  In  the  mean  time,  to  obviate  the 
septic  tendency,  great  attention  should  be  paid  to 
cleanliness  and  ventilation,  and  keeping  the  bowels 
regular  by  mild  aperients,  or  clysters  of  an  emollient 
or  antiseptic  nature : and  where  aphtha?  appear,  acidu- 
lated gargles  should  be  directed.  If  the  disease 
inclines  more  to  the  nervous  form,  with  much  mental 
anxiety,  tremors,  and  other  irregular  affections  of  the 
muscles,  or  organs  of  sense,  the  antispasmodic  medi- 
cines may  be  employed  with  more  advantage,  as  aether, 
camphor,  musk,  &c.,  but  particularly  opium  ; which 
should  be  given  in  a full  dose,  sufficient  to  procure 
sleep,  provided  there  be  no  appearances  of  determina- 
tion of  blood  to  the  head ; and  it  may  be  useful  to  call 
a greater  portion  of  nervous  energy  to  the  lower  ex- 
tremities by  the  pediluvium,  or  other  mode  of  applying 
warmth,  or  occasionally  by  sinapisms,  not  allowing 
these  to  produce  vesication.  But  if  there  should  be 
much  increased  vascular  action  in  the  brain,  more 
active  means  will  be  required,  even  the  local  abstrac- 
tion of  blood,  if  the  strength  will  permit ; and  it  will 


be  always  right  to  have  the  head  shaved,  and  kept 
cool  by  some  evaporating  lotion,  and  a blister  applied 
to  the  back  of  the  neck.  In  like  manner,  other  im- 
portant parts  may  occasionally  require  local  means 
of  relief.  Urgent  vomiting  may,  perhaps,  be  checked 
by  the  effervescing  mixture;  a troublesome  diarrhoea 
by  small  doses  of  opium,  assisted  by  aromatics,  chalk, 
and  other  astringents,  or  sometimes  by  small  doses  of 
ipecacuanha ; profuse  perspirations  by  the  infusum 
rosaj,  a cooling  regimen,  &c. 

Typhus  egyptiacus.  The  plague  of  Egypt. 

Typhus  carcerum.  The  jail-fever. 

Typhus  castrensis.  The  camp-fever. 

Typhus  gravior.  The  most  malignant  species  of 
typhus.  See  Typhus. 

Typhus  icterodes.  Typhus  with  symptoms  of 
jaundice.  See  Typhus. 

Typhus  mitior.  The  low-fever. 

Typhus  nervosus.  The  nervous-fever.  ' 

Typhus  petechialis.  Typhus  with  purple  spots. 

TYRI'ASIS.  Tvpiaans-  A species  of  leprosy  in 
which  the  skin  may  be  easily  withdrawn  from  thd 
flesh. 

TYRO'SIS.  (From  rvpow,  to  coagulate.)  A dis- 
order of  the  stomach  from  milk  curdled  in  it. 


u 


TTLCER.  ( Ulcus , eris,  n. ; from  sAkoj,  a sore.)  A 
purulent  solution  of  continuity  of  the  soft  parts  of 
an  animal  body.  Ulcers  may  arise  from  a variety  of 
causes,  as  all  those  that  produce  inflammation,  from 
wounds,  specific  irritation  of  the  absorbents,  from 
scurvy,  cancer,  the  venereal  or  scrofulous  virus,  &c. 
The  proximate  or  immediate  cause  is  an  increased 
action  of  the  absorbents,  and  a specific  action  of  the 
arteries,  by  which  a fluid  is  separated  from  the  blood 
upon  the  ulcerated  surface.  They  are  variously 
denominated ; the  following  is  the  most  frequent 
division : 

j.  1.  The  simple  ulcer , which  takes  place  generally 
from  a superficial  wound. 

2.  The  sinuous , that  runs  under  the  integuments, 
and  the  orifice  of  which  is  narrow,  but  not  callous. 

3.  The  fistulous  ulcer , or  fistula,  a deep  ulcer  with 
a narrow  and  callous  orifice. 

4.  The  fungous  ulcer , the  surface  of  which  is 
covered  with  fungous  flesh. 

5.  The  gangrenous , which  is  livid,  foetid,  and  gan- 
grenous. 

6.  The  scorbutic , which  depends  on  a scorbutic 
acrimony. 

7.  The  venereal,  arising  from  the  venereal  disease. 

8.  The  cancerous  ulcer,  or  open  cancer.  See  Cancer. 

9.  The  carious  ulcer , depending  upon  a carious  bone. 

10.  The  inveterate  ulcer,  which  is  of  long  continu- 
ance, and  resists  the  ordinary  applications. 

11.  The  scrofulous  ulcer , known  by  its  having 
arisen  from  indolent  tumours,  its  discharging  a viscid, 
glairy  matter,  and  its  indolent  nature. 

Ulcera  serpentia  oris.  See  Jlphtha. 

Ulcerated  sore  throat.  See  Cynanche. 

ULLA.  The  common  diminutive  ulla,  or  ilia , is, 
according  to  Dr.  Good,  most  probably  derived  from  the 
Greek,  v%rj,  ule  or  ile,  materia,  materies,  of  the  matter, 
make,  or  nature  of;  thus,  papula  or  papilla,  of  the 
matter  or  nature  of  pappus ; liipula,  of  the  matter  or 
nature  of  lupus ; pustula,  of  the  matter  or  nature  of 
pus ; and  so  of  many  others. 

ULMA'RIA.  (From  ulmus,  the  elm : so  named  be- 
cause it  has  leaves  like  the  elm.)  See  Spiraia  ulmaria. 

ULM1N.  Dr.  Thomson  has  given  this  temporary 
name  to  a very  singular  substance  lately  examined  by 
Klaproth.  It  differs  essentially  from  every  other  known 
body,  and  must  therefore  constitute  a new  and  peculiar 
vegetable  principle.  It  exuded  spontaneously  from  the 
trunk  of  a species  of  elm,  which  Klaproth  conjectures 
to  be  the  ulmus  nigra , and  was  sent  to  him  from  Pa- 
lermo in  1802. 

i - 1.  In  its  external  characters  it  resembles  gum.  It 
was  solid,  hard,  of  a black  colour,  and  had  considerable 


lustre.  Its  powder  was  brown.  It  dissolved  readily 
in  the  mouth,  and  was  insipid. 

2.  It  dissolved  speedily  in  a small  quantity  of  water. 
The  solution  was  transparent,  of  a blackish-brown 
colour,  and,  even  when  very  much  concentrated  by 
evaporation,  was  not  in  the  least  mucilaginous  or  ropy ; 
nor  did  it  answer  as  a paste.  In  this  respect  ulmin  dif- 
fers essentially  from  gum. 

3.  It  was  completely  insoluble  both  in  alkohol  and 
aether.  When  alkohol  was  poured  into  the  aqueous 
solution,  the  greater  part  of  the  ulmin  precipitated  in 
light  brown  flakes.  The  remainder  was  obtained  by 
evaporation,  and  was  not  sensibly  soluble  in  alkohol. 
The  alkohol  by  this  treatment  acquired  a sharpish  taste. 

4.  When  a few  drops  of  nitric  acid  were  added  to 
the  aqueous  solution,  it  became  gelatinous,  lost  its 
blackish-brown  colour,  and  a light  brown  substance 
precipitated.  The  whole  solution  was  slowly  evapo- 
rated to  dryness,  and  the  reddish-brown  powder  which 
remained  was  treated  with  alkohol.  The  alkohol 
assumed  a golden  yellow  colour ; and,  when  evapo- 
rated, Iqft  a light  brown,  bitter,  and  sharp  resinous 
substance. 

5.  Oxymuriatic  acid  produced  precisely  the  same 
effects  as  nitric.  Thus  it  appears  that  ulmin,  by  the 
addition  of  a little  oxygen,  is  converted  into  a resinous 
substance.  In  this  new  state  it  is  insoluble  in  water. 
This  property  is  very  singular.  Hitherto  the  volatile 
oils  were  the  only  substances  known  to  assume  the 
form  of  resins.  That  a substance  soluble  in  water 
should  assume  the  resinous  form  with  such  facility,  is 
very  remarkable. 

6.  Ulmin  when  burned  emitted  little  smoke  or  flame, 
and  left  a spongy  but  firm  charcoal,  which,  when  burned 
in  the  open  air,  left  only  a little  carbonate  of  potassa  be- 
hind. 

U'LMUS.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the 
Linnacan  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Digynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  cpmmon  elm. 
See  Ulmus  campcstris. 

Ulmus  campestris.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
common  elm.  Ulmus— foliis  duplicalo-serratis , basi 
ineequalibus , of  Linnaeus.  The  inner  tough  bark  of  this 
tree,  which  is  directed  for  use  by  the  pharmacopoeias, 
has  no  remarkable  smell,  but  a bitterish  taste,  and 
abounds  with  a slimy  juice,  which  has  been  recom- 
mended in  nephritic  cases,  and  externally  as  a useful 
application  to  burns.  It  is  also  highly  recommended 
in  some  cutaneous  affections  allied  to  herpes  and  lepra. 
It  is  mostly  exhibited  in  the  form  of  decoction,  by  boil 
ing  four  ounces  in  four  pints  of  water  to  two  pints  ; of 
which  from  four  to  eight  ounces  are  given  two  or  three 
times  a day. 


3C5 


ULN 


P*  Ulmus  fuIjVa.  The  Ulmus  fulva,  or  slippery 
elm,  inhabits  the  northern  and  western  parts  of  the 
United  States,  from  Canada  to  Pennsylvania.  The 
inner  bark  of  this  tree  is  charged  with  a gummy  sub- 
stance in  great  quantity,  so  that  if  a small  piece  is 
chewed  in  the  mouth,  it  almost  instantly  fills  it  with  a 
thick,  viscid  mucilage.  This  bark,  both  in  substance 
and  decoction,  is  a valuable  demulcent  in  dysentery, 
and  in  strangury,  either  produced  by  cantharides  or 
resulting  from  other  causes.  Elm-bark  has  been  used 
as  food,  and  been  found  capable  of  supporting  life  in 
cases  of  emergency.  Externally,  it  is  employed  as  an 
emollient  application,  to  promote  suppuration,  and  to 
answer  the  different  ends  to  which  common  poultices 
are  applicable.  For  this  purpose,  either  the  green  bark 
should  be  bruised,  or  the  dried  bark  cut  into  shreds 
and  boiled.  Internally,  it  proves  most  palatable  in  the 
infusion." — Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

U'LNA.  (From  oikevy,  the  ulna,  or  cubit.)  Cubitus. 
The  larger  bone  of  the  forearm.  It  is  smaller  and 
shorter  than  the  os  humeri,  and  becomes  gradually 
smaller  as  it  descends  to  the  wrist.  We  may  divide  it 
into  its  upper  and  lower  extremities,  and  its  body  or 
middle  part.  At  its  upper  extremity  are  two  considera- 
ble processes,  of  which  the  posterior  one  and  largest  is 
named  olecranon , and  the  smaller  and  interior  one  the 
coronoid  process.  Between  these  two  processes,  the 
extremity  of  the  bone  is  formed  into  a deep  articulating 
cavity,  which,  from  its  semicircular  shape,  is  called 
the  greater  sigmoid  cavity , to  distinguish  it  from  an- 
other, which  has  been  named  the  less  sigmoid  cavity. 
The  olecranon , called  also  the  anconoid  process,  begins 
by  a considerable  tuberosity,  which  is  rough,  and  serves 
for  the  insertion  of  muscles,  and  terminates  in  a kind 
of  hook,  the  concave  surface  of  which  moves  upon  the 
pulley  of  the  os  humeri.  This  process  forms  the  point 
of  the  elbow.  The  coronoid  process  is  sharper  at  its 
extremity  than  the  olecranon,  but  is  much  smaller,  and 
does  not  reach  so  high.  In  bending  the  arm,  it  is  received 
into  the  fossa  at  the  forepart  of  the  pulley.  At  the 
external  side  of  the  coronoid  process  is  the  less  sig- 
moid cavity,  which  is  a small,  semilunar  articulating 
surface,  lined  with  cartilage,  on  which  the  round  head 
of  the  radius  plays.  At  the  forepart  of  the  coronoid 
process  we  observe  a small  tuberosity,  into  which  the 
tendon  of  the  brachialis  internus  is  inserted.  The 
greater  sigmoid  cavity,  the  situation  of  which  we  just 
now  mentioned,  is  divided  into  four  surfaces  by  a pro- 
minent line  which  is  intersected  by  a small  sinuosity 
that  serves  for  the  lodgment  of  mucilaginous  glands. 
The  whole  of  tHis  cavity  is  covered  with  cartilage. 
Tiie  body,  or  middle  part  of  the  ulna,  is  of  a prismatic 
or  triangular  shape,  so  as  to  afford  three  surfaces  and 
as  many  angles.  The  external  and  internal  surfaces 
are  flat  and  broad,  especially  the  external  one,  and  are 
separated  by  a sharp  angle,  which,  from  its  situation, 
may  be  termed  the  internal  angle.  This  internal  angle, 
which  is  turned  towards  the  radius,  serves  for  the 
attachment  of  the  ligament  that  connects  the  two 
bones,  and  which  is  therefore  called  the  interosseous 
ligament.  The  posterior  surface  is  convex,  and  cor- 
responds with  the  olecranon.  The  borders,  or  angles, 
which  separate  it  from  the  other  two  surfaces,  are 
somewhat  rounded.  At  about  a third  of  the  length  Qf 
this  bone  from  the  top,  in  its  forepart,  we  observe  a 
channel  for  the  passage  of  vessels.  The  lower  extre- 
mity is  smaller  as  it  descends,  nearly  cylindrical,  and 
slightly  curved  forwards  and  outwards.  Just  before  it 
terminates,  it  contracts,  so  as  to  form  a neck  to  the 
small  head  with  which  it  ends.  On  the  outside  of  this 
little  head,  answering  to  the  olecranon,  a small  pro- 
cess, called  the  styloid  process,  stands  out,  from  which 
a strong  ligament  is  stretched  to  the  wrist.  The  head 
has  a rounded  articulating  surface,  on  its  internal  side, 
which  is  covered  with  cartilage,  and  received  into  a 
semilunar  cavity  formed  at  the  lower  end  of  the  radius. 
Between  it  and  the  os  cuneiforme,  a moveable  cartilage 
is  interposed,  which  is  continued  from  the  cartilage 
that  covers  the  lower  end  of  the  radius,  and  is  con- 
nected by  ligamentous  fibres  to  the  styloid  process  of 
the  ulna.  The  ulna  is  articulated  above  with  the  lower 
end  of  the  os  humeri.  This  articulation  is  of  the  spe- 
cies called  ginglymus  ; it  is  articulated  also  both  above 
and  below  to  the  radius,  and  to  the  carpus  at  its  lowest 
extremity.  Its  chief  use  seems  to  be  to  support  and 
regulate  the  motions  of  the  radius.  In  children,  both 
extremities  of  this  bone  are  first  cartilaginous,  and  after 
366 


UNG 

ward  epiphyses,  before  they  are  completely  united  to 
the  rest  of  the  bone. 

ULNAR.  ( Ulnaris;  from  ulna,  the  bone  so  named.) 
Belonging  to  the  ulna. 

Ulnar  artery.  See  Cubital  artery. 

Ulnar  nerve.  See  Cubital  nerve. 

Ulna'ris  externus.  See  Extensor  carpi  ulnaris. 

Ulna'ris  internus.  See  Flexor  carpi  ulnaris. 

ULTRAMARINE.  See  Lapis  lazuli. 

UMBELLA.  ( Umbella , ce,  f. ; a little  shade,  or  um- 
brella.) An  umbel;  the  rundle  of  some  authors.  A 
species  of  inflorescence  in  which  several  flower-stalks 
of  rays,  nearly  equal  in  length,  spread  from  one  com- 
mon centre,  their  summits  forming  a level,  convex,  or 
even  globose  surface,  more  rarely  a concave  one. 

From  the  insertion  of  the  umbel,  it  is  distinguished 
into  pedunculate  and  sessile.  The  former  implies  that 
the  rays  or  flower-stalks  come  from  one  ; and  the  latter, 
that  the  rays  or  stalklets  come,  not  from  a common 
peduncle,  but  from  the  stem  or  branch  of  the  plant;  as 
in  Siam  nodiflorum,  and  Prunus  aviam. 

From  the  division  of  the  umbel  it  is  said  to  be  simple, 
when  single-flowered ; as  in  Allium  ursinum : and 
compound , when  each  ray  or  stalk  bears  an  umbellula, 
or  partial  umbel ; as  in  the  Anethum  fceniculum. 

The  umbella  involucrata  is  supplied  with  involucra. 

UMBELLULA.  A partial  or  little  umbel.  See 
Umbella. 

UMBER.  An  ore  of  iron. 

UMBILI'CAL.  (Umbilicalis  ; from  umbilicus,  the 
navel.)  Of  or  belonging  to  the  navel. 

Umbilical  cord.  Funis  umbilicalis ; Funiculus 
umbilicalis.  The  navel-string.  A cord-like  substance 
of  an  intestinal  form,  about  half  a yard  in  length,  that 
proceeds  from  the  navel  of  the  foetus  to  the  centre  of 
the  placenta.  It  is  composed  of  a cutaneous  sheath, 
cellular  substance,  one  umbilical  vein,  and  two  umbili- 
cal arteries  ; the  former  conveys  the  blood  to  the  child 
from  the  placenta,  and  the  latter  return  it  from  the  child 
to  the  placenta. 

Umbilical  hernia.  See  Hernia  umbilicalis. 

Umbilical  region.  Regio  umbilicalis.  The  part 
of  the  abdominal  parietes  about  two  inches  all  round 
the  navel. 

UMBILI'CUS.  The  navel. 

Umbilicus  marinus.  Cotyledon  marina;  Andro 
sace;  Acetabulum  marinum;  Androsace  malthioli ; 
Fungus  petreeus  marinus.  A submarine  production 
found  on  rocks  and  the  shells  of  fishes,  about  the  coast 
of  Montpellier,  &c.  It  is  said  to  be,  in  the  form  of 
powder,  a useful  anthelmintic  and  diuretic. 

UMBO.  (The  top  of  a buckler.)  The  knob  or  more 
prominent  part  in  the  centre  of  the  hat  or  pilus  of  the 
fungus  tribe. 

Unceola  elastica.  This  plant  affords  a juice  which 
becomes  an  elastic  gum.  See  Caoutchouc. 

UNCIFORM.  ( Unciformis ; from  uncus,  a hook, 
and  forma,  a likeness.)  Hook-like:  applied  to  bones,  &c. 

Unciform  bone.  The  last  bone  of  the  second  row 
of  the  carpus  or  wrist  : so  named  from  its  hook-like 
process,  which  projects  towards  the  palm  of  the  hand, 
and  gives  origin  to  the  great  ligament  by  which  the  ten- 
dons of  the  wrist  are  bound  down. 

UNCINATUS.  (From  uncus,  a hook.)  Uncinate 
or  hooked  : applied  to  the  stigma  of  the  Lantana. 

UNDERSTANDING.  Intellectus  See  Ideology. 

UNDULATUS.  Undulated : applied  to  a leaf  when 
the  disk  near  the  margin  is  waved  obtusely  up  and 
down ; as  in  Reseda  lutea. 

Unedo  papyracea.  See  Arbutus  unedo. 

UNGUE'NTUM.  ( Unguentum , i,  n.;  from 
to  anoint.)  An  ointment.  The  usual  consistei 
ointments  is  about  that  of  butter.  The  following  are 
among  the  best  formuke. 

Unguentum  apostolorum.  Dodeca  pharmicum. 
The  apostles’  ointment : so  called  because  it  has  twelve 
ingredients  in  it  exclusive  of  the  oil  and  vinegar.  Not 
used. 

Unguentum  cantiiaridis.  Unguentum  lyttce. 
Ointment  of  the  blistering-fly.  Take  of  the  blistering- 
fly,  rubbed  to  a very  fine  powder,  two  ounces ; distilled 
water,  eight  fluid  ounces ; resin  cerate,  eight  ounces. 
Boil  the  water  with  the  blistering-fly  to  one-half,  and 
strain  ; mix  the  cerate  with  the  liquor,  and  then  let  it 
evaporate  to  the  proper  consistence.  This  is  some 
times  used  to  keep  a blister  open  , but  the  savine  cerate 
is  to  be  preferred. 


ungo, 
ice  of 


UNG 


Unguentum  cetacei.  Ointment  of  spermaceti, 
formerly  called  linimentum  album , and  latterly,  un- 
guentum  spermaceti.  Take  of  spermaceti,  six  drachms ; 
white  wax,  two  drachms ; olive  oil,  three  fluid  ounces. 
Having  melted  them  together  over  a slow  fire,  con- 
stantly stir  the  mixture  until  it  gets  cold.  A simple 
emollient  ointment. 

Unguentum  cicut®.  Hemlock  ointment.  Take 
of  the  fresh  leaves  of  hemlock,  and  prepared  hog’s 
lard,  of  each  four  ounces.  The  hemlock  is  to  be 
bruised  in  a marble  mortar,  after  which  the  lard  is  to 
be  added,  and  the  two  ingredients  thoroughly  incorpo- 
rated by  beating.  They  are  then  to  be  gently  melted 
over  the  fire,  and  after  being  strained  through  a cloth, 
and  tire  fibrous  parts  of  the  hemlock  well  pressed,  the 
ointment  is  to  be  stirred  till  quite  cold.  To  cancerous 
or  scrofulous  sores  this  ointment  may  be  applied  with 
a prospect  of  success. 

Unguentum  klemi  compositum.  Compound  oint- 
ment of  elemi,  formerly  called  linimentum  arccei , and 
unguentum  e gummi  elemi.  Take  of  elemi,  a pound ; 
common  turpentine,  ten  ounces ; prepared  suet,  two 
pounds;  olive  oil,  two  fluid  ounces.  Melt  the  elemi 
with  the  suet,  then  remove  it  from  the  fire,  and  imme- 
diately mix  in  the  turpentine  and  oil,  then  strain  the 
mixture  through  a linen  cloth.  Indolent  ulcers,  chil- 
blains, chronic  ulcers  after  burns,  and  indolent  tumours 
are  often  removed  by  this  ointment. 

Unguentum  hydrargyri  fortius.  Strong  mer- 
curial ointment,  formerly  called  unguentum  caeruleum 
rortius.  Take  of  purified  mercury,  two  pounds ; pre- 
pared lard,  twenty-three  ounces ; prepared  suet,  an 
ounce.  First  rub  the  mercury  with  the  suet  and  a little 
of  the  lard,  until  the  globules  disappear ; then  add  the 
remainder  of  the  lard,  and  mix.  In  very  general  use 
for  mercurial  frictions.  It  may  be  employed  in  almost 
all  cases  where  mercury  is  indicated. 

Unguentum  hydrargyri  mitius.  Mild  mercurial 
ointment,  formerly  called  unguentum  caruleum  mitius. 
Take  of  strong  mercurial  ointment,  a pound  ; pre- 
pared lard,  two  pounds.  Mix.  Weaker  than  the 
former. 

Unguentum  hydrargyri  nitratis.  Unguentum 
hydrargyri  nitrati.  Ointment  of  nitrate  of  mercury. 
Take  of  purified  mercury,  an  ounce  ; nitric  acid,  ele- 
ven fluid  drachms;  prepared  lard,  six  ounces;  olive 
oil,  four  fluid  ounces.  First  dissolve  the  mercury  in 
the  acid,  then,  while  the  liquor  is  hot,  mix  it  with  the 
lard  and  oil  melted  together.  A stimulating  and  deter- 
gent ointment.  Tinea  capitis,  psorophthalmia,  indo- 
lent tumours  on  the  margin  of  the  eyelid,  and  ulcers  in 
the  urethra,  are  cured  by  its  application. 

Unguentum  hydrargyri  nitratis  mitius.  Weak- 
er only  than  the  former. 

Unguentum  hydrargyri  nitrico-oxidi.  Oint- 
ment of  nitric  oxide  of  mercury.  Take  of  nitric  oxide 
of  mercury,  an  ounce;  white  wax,  two  ounces;  pre- 
pared lard,  six  ounces.  Having  melted  together  the 
wax  and  lard,  add  thereto  the  nitric  oxide  of  mercury 
in  very  fine  powder,  and  mix.  A most  excellent  sti- 
mulating and  escharotic  ointment. 

Unguentum  hydrargyri  pr®uii>itati  albi.  Oint- 
ment of  white  precipitate  of  mercury,  formerly  called 
unguentum  d mercurio  prcecipitato  albo , and  latterly 
unguentum  calcis  hydrargyri  albce.  Take  of  white 
precipitate  of  mercury,  a drachm  ; prepared  lard,  an 
ounce  and  a half.  Having  melted  the  lard  over  a slow 
fire,  add  the  precipitated  mercury  and  mix.  A useful 
ointment  to  destroy  vermin  in  the  head,  and  to  assist  in 
the  removal  of  scald  head,  venereal  ulcers  of  children, 
and  cutaneous  eruptions. 

Unguentum  lytt®.  See  Unguentum  cantharidis. 

Unguentum  ophthalmicum.  Ophthalmic  ointment 
of  Janin.  Take  of  prepared  hog’s-lard,  half  an  ounce; 
prepared  tutty,  Armenian  bole,  of  each  two  drachms; 
white  precipitate  one  drachm.  Mix.  This  celebrated 
ointment  may  be  used  for  the  same  diseases  of  the  eye 
and  eyelid  as  the  ung.  hydrarg.  nitratis.  It  must  he  at 
first  weakened  with  about  twice  its  quantity  of  hog’s- 
lard. 

Unguentum  picis  arid/e.  See  Unguentum  resina: 
nigra. 

Unguentum  picis  liquid/e.  Tar  ointment,  for- 
merly called  unguentum  picis ; unguentum  e pice. 
Take  of  tar,  prepared  suet,  of  each  a pound  Melt 
them  together,  and  strain  the  mixture  through  a linen 
cloth.  This  is  applicable  to  cases  of  tinea  capitis,  and 


URA 

some  eruptive  complaints;  also  to  some  kinds  of  Irri- 
table sores. 

Unguentum  resin®  flav®.  Yellow  basilicon  is 
in  general  use  as  a stimulant  and  detersive ; it  is  an 
elegant  and  useful  form  of  applying  the  resin. 

Unguentum  resin®  nigr®.  Unguentum  picis 
aridee.  Pitch  ointment,  formerly  called  unguentum 
busilicum  nigrum , vel  tetrapharmacum.  Take  of  pitch, 
yellow  wax,  yellow  resin,  of  eacii  nine  ounces ; olive 
oil,  a pint.  Melt  them  together,  and  strain  the  mixture 
through  a linen  cloth.  This  is  useful  for  the  same  pur- 
poses as  the  tar  ointment. 

Unguentum  sambuci.  Elder  ointment,  formerly 
called  unguentum  sambucinum.  Take  of  elder  flowers, 
two  pounds;  prepared  lard,  two  pounds.  Boil  the 
elder  flowers  in  the  lard  until  they  become  crisp,  then 
strain  the  ointment  through  a linen  cloth.  A cooling 
and  emollient  preparation. 

Unguentum  sulphuris.  Sulphur  ointment,  for- 
merly called  unguentum  e sulphure.  Take  of  sublimed 
sulphur,  three  ounces ; prepared  lard,  half  a pound. 
Mix.  The  most  effectual  preparation  to  destroy  the 
itch.  It  is  also  serviceable  in  the  cure  of  other  cuta- 
neous eruptions. 

Unguentum  sulphuris  compositum.  Compound 
sulphur  ointment.  Take  of  sublimed  sulphur,  half  a 
pound ; white  hellebore-root,  powdered,  two  ounces ; 
nitrate  of  potassa,  a drachm  ; soft  soap,  half  a pound ; 
prepared  lard,  a pound  and  a half.  Mix.  This  pre- 
paration is  introduced  into  the  last  London  Pharmaco- 
poeia as  a more  efficacious  remedy  for  itch  than  com- 
mon sulphur  ointment.  In  the  army,  where  it  is  gene- 
rally used,  the  sulphur  vivum,  or  native  admixture  of 
sulphur  with  various  heterogeneous  matters,  is  used 
instead  of  sublimed  sulphur. 

Unguentum  veratri.  White  hellebore  ointment, 
formerly  called  unguentum  hellebori  albi.  Take  of 
white  hellebore-root,  powdered,  two  ounces:  prepared 
lard,  eight  ounces:  oil  of  lemons,  twenty  minims. 
Mix. 

Unguentum  zinci.  Zinc  ointment.  Take  of  the 
oxide  of  zinc,  an  ounce;  prepared  lard,  six  ounces. 
Mix.  A very  useful  application  to  chronic  ophthalmia 
and  relaxed  ulcers. 

U NGUIS.  ( Unguis , is , m. ; from  ovv\,  a hook.) 

1.  The  nail.  The  nails  are  horny  lamina?  situated  at 
the  extremities  of  the  fingers  and  toes  ; composed  of 
coagulated  albumen,  and  a little  phosphate  of  lime. 

2.  An  abscess  or  collection  of  pus  between  the  la 
mellie  of  the  cornea  transparens  of  the  eye  ; so  called 
from  its  resemblance  to  the  lunated  portion  of  the  nail 
of  the  finger. 

3.  The  lachrymal  bone  is  named  os  unguis , from  its 
resemblance  to  a nail  of  the  finger. 

4.  In  botany,  or  the  claw  : applied  to  the  thin 

part  of  the  petal  of  a polypetalous  corolla. 

U'ngula  caballina.  See  Tussilago. 

UNIFLORUS.  Bearing  one  flower. 

UNIO.  ( Unio , pi.  uniones ; from  inius,  one:  so 
called  because  there  is  never  more  than  one  found  in 
the  same  shell,  or,  according  to  others,  for  that  many 
being  found  in  one  shell,  not  any  one  of  them  is  like 
the  other.)  The  pearl.  See  Margarita. 

U'RACHUS.  (From  ovpov , urine,  and  £^w,  to  con- 
tain.) Urinaculum.  The  ligamentous  cord  that  arises 
from  the  basis  of  the  urinary  bladder,  along  which  it 
runs,  and  terminates  in  the  umbilical  cord.  In  the 
fnetnses  of  brute  animals,  which  the  ancients  mostly 
dissected,  it  is  a hollow  tube,  and  conveys  the  urine  to 
the  allantoid  membrane. 

Ura'giijm.  (From  ovpayos,  the  hinder  part  of  an 
army.)  The  apex  or  extreme  point  of  the  heart. 

URANGLIMMER.  Green  mica.  Chalcolite.  An 
ore  of  uranium. 

Uranis'cus.  (From  ovpavos.,  the  firmament:  so 
called  from  its  arch.)  The  palate. 

URANITE.  See  Uranium. 

URA'NIUM.  Uranite  This  metal  was  discovered 
by  Klaproth,  in  the  year  1789.  It  exists  combined  with 
sulphur,  and  a portion  of  iron,  lead,  and  silex,  in  the 
mineral  termed  Pcchblcnde , or  oxide  of  uranium. 
Combined  with  carbonic  acid  it  forms  the  chalcolite , 
or  green  mica  : and  mixed  with  oxide  of  iron,  it  con- 
stitutes the  uranitic  ochre.  It  is  always  found  in  the 
state  of  an  oxide  with  a greater  or  smaller  portion  of 
iron,  or  mineralized  with  sulphur  and  copper.  The 
oresof  uranium  are  of  a blackish  colour,  inclining  to  a 

3G7 


URE 


URI 


rfork  iron-gray,  and  of  a moderate  splendour;  they 
are  of  a close  texture,  and  when  broken  present  a 
somewhat  uneven,  and  in  the  smallest  particles  a 
conchoidal  surface.  They  are  found  in  the  mines  of 
Saxony. 

Properties  of  uranium. — Uranium  exhibits  a mass 
of  small  metallic  globules,  agglutinated  together.  Its 
colour  is  a deep  gray  on  the  outside,  in  the  inside  it  is  a 
pale  brown.  It  is  very  porous,  and  is  so  soft,  that  it 
may  be  scraped  with  a knife  It  has  but  little  lustre. 
Its  specific  gravity  is  between  eight  and  nine.  It  is 
more  difficult  to  be  fused  than  even  manganese.  When 
intensely  heated  with  phosphate  of  soda  and  ammonia, 
or  glacial  phosphoric  acid,  it  fuses  with  them  into  a 
grass-green  glass.  With  soda  or  borax  it  melts  only 
into  a gray,  opaque,  scoriaceous  bead.  It  is  soluble  in 
sulphuric,  nitric,  and  muriatic  acids.  It  combines  with 
sulphur  and  phosphorus,  and  alloys  with  mercury.  It 
has  not  yet  been  combined  with  other  combustible 
bodies.  It  decomposes  the  nitric  acid  and  becomes 
converted  into  a yellow  oxide.  The  action  of  uranium 
alone  upon  water,  &c.  is  still  unknown,  probably  on 
account  of  its  extreme  scarcity. 

Method  of  obtaining  uranium. — In  order  to  obtain 
uranium,  the  pechblende  is  first  freed  from  sulphur  by 
heat,  and  cleared  from  the  adhering  impurities  as  care- 
fully as  possible.  It  is  then  digested  in  nitric  acid  ; the 
metallic  matter  that  it  contains  is  thus  completely  dis- 
solved, while  part  of  the  sulphur  remains  undissolved, 
and  part  of  it  is  dissipated  under  the  form  of  sulphu- 
retted hydrogen  gas.  The  solution  is  then  precipitated 
by  a carbonated  alkali.  The  precipitate  has  a lemon- 
yellow  colour  when  it  is  pure.  This  yellow  carbonate 
is  made  into  a paste  with  oil,  and  exposed  to  a violent 
heat,  bedded  in  a crucible  well  lined  with  charcoal. 

Klaproth  obtained  a metallic  globule  28  grains  in 
weight,  by  forming  a ball  of  50  grains  of  the  yellow 
carbonate,  with  a little  wax,  and  by  exposing  this  ball 
in  a crucible  lined  with  charcoal  to  a heat  equal  to 
170°  of  Wedgewood’s  pyrometer.  Richter  obtained  in 
a single  experiment  100  grains  of  this  metal,  which 
seemed  to  be  free  from  all  admixture.  There  are  pro- 
bably two  oxides  of  uranium,  the  protoxide , which  is  a 
grayish  black  ; and  the  peroxide,  which  is  yellow. 

URANOCHRE.  An  ore  of  uranium. 

URATE.  Uras.  A compound  of  uric  or  lithic  acid, 
with  a salifiable  basis. 

URCE'OLA.  (From  urceolus , a small  pitcher:  so 
named  from  its  uses  in  scouring  glazed  vessels.)  The 
herb  feverfew. 

UREA.  A constituent  of  urine.  The  best  process 
for  preparing  it  is  to  evaporate  urine  to  the  consistence 
of  syrup,  taking  care  to  regulate  the  heat  towards  the 
end  of  the  evaporation ; to  add  very  gradually  to  the 
syrup  its  volume  of  nitric  acid  (24°  Baum4)  of  1.20 ; to 
stir  the  mixture,  and  immerse  it  in  a bath  of  iced 
water,  to  harden  the  crystals  of  the  acidulous  nitrate  of 
urea  which  precipitate  ; to  wash  these  crystals  with 
ice-cold  water,  to  drain  them,  and  press  them  between 
the  folds  of  blotting  paper.  When  we  have  thus 
separated  the  adhering  heterogeneous  matters,  we  re- 
dissolve the  crystals  in  water,  and  add  to  them  a suf- 
ficient quantity  of  carbonate  of  potassa,  to  neutralize 
the  nitric  acid.  We  must  then  evaporate  the  new 
liquor,  at  a gentle  heat,  almost  to  dryness,  and  treat 
the  residuum  with  a very  pure  alkohol,  which  dis- 
solves only  the  urea.  On  concentrating  the  alkoholic 
solution,  the  urea  crystallizes. 

The  preceding  is  Thenard’s  process,  which  Dr.  Prout 
has  improved.  He  separates  the  nitrate  of  potassa  by 
crystallization,  makes  the  liquid  urea  into  a paste  with 
animal  charcoal,  digests  this  with  cold  water,  filters, 
concentrates,  then  dissolves  the  new  colourless  urea  in 
alkohol,  and  lastly,  crystallizes. 

Urea  crystallizes  in  four-sided  prisms,  which  are 
transparent  and  colourless,  with  a slight  pearly  lustre. 
It  has  a peculiar,  but  not  urinous  odour ; it  does  not 
affect  litmus  or  turmeric  papers ; it  undergoes  no  change 
from  the  atmosphere,  except  a slight  deliquescence  in 
very  damp  weather.  In  a strong  heat  it  melts,  and  is 
partly  decomposed  and  partly  sublimed  without  change. 
The  spec.  grav.  of  the  crystals  is  about  1.35.  It  is  very 
soluble  in  water.  Alkohol,  at  the  temperature  of  the 
atmosphere,  dissolves  about  20  per  cent. ; and,  when 
boiling,  considerably  more  than  its  own  weight,  from 
which  the  urea  separates,  on  cooling,  in  its  crystalline 
form.  The  fixed  alkalies  and  alkaline  earths  decom- 
368 


pose  it.  It  unites  with  most  of  the  metallic  oxides, 
and  forms  crystalline  compounds  with  the  nitric  and 
oxalic  acids. 

Urea  has  been  recently  analyzed  by  Dr.  Prout  and 
Berard.  The  following  are  its  constituents : — 

per  cent,  per  cent.  per  atom. ; 


Hydrogen 10.80  6.66  2 = 2.5 

Carbon 19.40  19.99  1 = 7.5 

Oxygen 26.40  26.66  1 = 10.0 

Azote 43.40  46.66  1 = 17.5 


100.00  100.00  37.5 


Uric,  orlithic  acid,  is  a substance  quite  distinct  from 
urea  in  its  composition.  This  fact,  according  ’to  Dr. 
Prout,  explains,  why  an  excess  of  urea  generally  ac- 
companies the  phosphoric  diathesis,  and  not  the  lithic. 
He  has  several  times  seen  urea  as  abundant  in  the 
urine  of  a person  where  the  phosphoric  diathesis  pre- 
vailed, as  to  crystallize  spontaneously  on  the  addition 
of  nitric  acid,  without  being  concentrated  by  evapo- 
ration. 

As  urea  and  uric  acid,  says  Berard,  are  the  most 
azotized  of  all  animal  substances,  the  secretion  of 
urine  appears  to  have  for  its  object  the  separation  of 
the  excess  of  azote  from  the  blood,  as  respiration  sepa- 
rates from  it  the  excess  of  carbon. 

URE'DO.  (From  uro,  to  burn.)  An  itching  or 
burning  sensation  of  the  skin, -which  accompanies 
many  diseases.  The  nettle-rash  is  also  so  called. 

URET.  The  compounds  of  simple  inflammable 
bodies  with  each  other,  and  with  metals,  are  commonly 
designated  by  this  word ; as  sulplmret  of  phosphorus, 
carb uret  of  iron,  &c.  The  terms  lisulphuret , bisul- 
phate, &c.  applied  to  compounds,  imply  that  they  con- 
tain twice  the  quantity  of  sulphur,  sulphuric  acid,  &c. 
existing  in  the  respective  sulphuret,  sulphate,  &c. 

URETER.  ( Ureter , eris,  m. ; from  ovpov,  urine.) 
The  membranous  canal  which  conveys  the  urine  front 
the  kidney  to  the  urinary  bladder.  At  its  superior  pari 
it  is  considerably  the  largest,  occupying  the  greatest 
portion  of  the  pelvis  of  the  kidney  ; it  then  contracts 
to  the  size  of  a goose-quill,  and  descends  over  the  psoas 
magnus  muscle  and  large  crural  vessels  into  the 
pelvis,  in  which  it  perforates  the  urinary  bladder  very 
obliquely.  Its  internal  surface  is  lubricated  with  mucus 
to  defend  it  from  the  irritation  of  tire  urine  in  passing. 

URETERI'TIS.  (From  ovprjTrip,  the  ureter.)  An 
inflammation  of  the  ureter. 

URE'THRA.  (From  ovpov,  the  urine:  because  it 
is  the  canal  through  which  the  urine  passes.)  A mem- 
branous canal  running  from"  the  neck  of  the  bladder 
through  the  inferior  part  of  the  penis  to  the  extremity 
of  the  glans  penis,  in  which  it  opens  by  a longitudinal 
orifice,  called  meatus  urinarius.  In  this  course,  it 
first  passes  through  the  prostate  gland,  which  portion 
is  distinguished  by  the  name  of  the  prostatical  ure- 
thra; it  then  becomes  much  dilated,  and  is  known  by 
the  name  of  the  bulbous  part,  in  which  is  situated  a 
cutaneous  eminence  called  the  caput  gallinaginis  or 
verumontanum,  around  which  are  ten  or  twelve  orifices 
of  the  excretory  ducts  of  the  prostate  gland,  and  two 
of  the  spermatic  vessels.  The  remaining  part  of  the 
urethra  contains  a number  of  triangular  mouths,  which 
are  the  lacunce , or  openings  of  the  excretory  ducts  of 
the  mucous  glands  of  the  urethra. 

URETHRI'TIS.  (From  ovprjdpa,  the  urethra.)  An 
inflammation  in  the  urethra.  See  Gonorrhoea. 

Ure'tica.  (From  ovpov,  urine.)  Medicines  which 
promote  a discharge  of  urine. 

U'RIAS.  (From  oop^v,  urine.)  The  urethra. 

URIC  ACID.  See  Lithic  acid. 

URI'NA.  See  Unne. 

Urina'culum.  See  Urachus. 

Uri'n.®  ardor.  See  Dysuria. 

URINA'RIA.  (From  vrina,  urine : so  named  from 
its  diuretic  qualities.)  The  herb  dandelion.  See 
Leontodon  taraxacum. 

URINARY.  ( Urinarius  ; from  urina,  urine.)  Ap- 
pertaining to  urine. 

Urinary  bladder.  Vesica  urinaria.  The  blad- 
der is  a membranous  pouch,  capable  of  dilatation  and 
contraction,  situated  in  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen, 

, immediately  behind  the  symphysis  pubis,  and  opposite 
| to  the  beginning  of  the  rectum.  Its  figure  is  nearly 
that  of  a short  oval.  It  is  broader  on  the  fore  and  ba~k 
t than  on  the  lateral  parts ; rounder  above  than  below. 


URI 


URI 


when  empty;  and  broader  below  than  above,  when 
full.  It  is  divided  into  the  body,  neck,  and  fundus,  or 
upper  part ; the  neck  is  a portion  of  the  lower  part, 
which  is  contracted  by  a sphincter  muscle.  This 
organ  is  made  up  of  several  coats;  the  upper,  pos- 
terior, and  lateral  parts  are  covered  by  a reflection  of 
the  peritoneum,  which  is  connected  by  cellular  sub- 
stance' to  the  muscular  coat.  This  is  composed  of 
several  strata  of  fibres,  the  outermost  of  which  are 
mostly  longitudinal,  the  interior  becoming  gradually 
more  transverse,  connected  together  by  reticular  mem- 
brane. Under  this  is  the  cellular  coat,  which  is  nearly 
of  the  same  structure  with  the  tunica  nervosa  of  the 
stomach.  Winslow  describes  the  internal  or  villous 
coat  as  somewhat  granulated  and  glandular;  but  this 
has  been  disputed  by  subsequent  anatomists.  How- 
ever, a mucous  fluid  is  poured  out  continually  from  it, 
which  defends  it  from  the  acrimony  of  the  urine. 
Sometimes  the  internal  sutface  is  found  very  irregular, 
and  full  of  rugae,  which  appear  to  be  occasioned  merely 
by  the  strong  contraction  of  the  muscular  fibres,  and 
may  be  removed  by  distending  it.  The  sphincter  does 
not  seem  to  be  a distinct  muscle,  but  merely  formed  by 
the  transverse  fibres  being  closely  arranged  about  the 
neck.  The  urine  is  received  from  the  ureters,  which 
enter  the  posterior  part  of  the  bladder  obliquely;  and 
when  a certain  degree  of  distention  has  occurred,  the 
muscular  fibres  are  voluntarily  exerted  to  expel  it. 

URINE.  (t/rmg,  is , f.  Ovpov ; from  opovoo,  to 
rush  out.)  The  saline  liquid,'  secreted  in  the  kidneys, 
and  dropping  dotvn  from  them,  guttatim,  through  the 
ureters,  into  the  cavity  of  the  urinary  bladder.  The 
secretory  organ  is  composed  of  the  arterious  vessels  of 
the  cortical  substance  of  the  kidneys,  from  which  the 
urine  passes  through  the  uriniferous  tubuli  and  renal 
papilla  into  the  renal  pelvis  ; whence  it  flows,  drop  by 
drop,  through  the  ureters,  into  the  cavity  of  the  urinary 
bladder;  where  it  is  detained  some  hours,  and  at 
length,  when  ab undant,  eliminated  through  the  urethra. 

“Few  of  the  apparatus  of  secretion  are  so  compli- 
cated as  that  of  the  urine ; it  is  composed  of  the  two 
kidneys,  of  the  ureters , of  the  bladder,  and  the  urethra ; 
besides,  the  abdominal  muscles  contribute  to  the  action 
of  these  different  parts,  among  which  the  kidneys 
alone  form  urine ; the  others  serve  in  its  transportation 
and  expulsion. 

Situated  in  the  abdomen,  upon  the  sides  of  the  ver- 
tebral column,  before  the  last  false  ribs  and  the  qua- 
dratus  lumborum , the  kidneys  are  of  small  volume 
relatively  to  the  quantity  of  fluid  they  secrete.  They 
are  generally  surrounded  with  a great  deal  of  fat. 
Their  parenchyma  is  composed  of  two  substances ; the 
one  exterior,  vascular,  or  cortical , the  other  tubular , 
disposed  in  a certain  number  of  cones,  the  base  of 
which  corresponds  to  the  surface  of  the  organ,  and 
their  summits  unite  in  the  membranous  cavity  called 
pelvis . its  cones  appear  formed  by'a  great  number  of 
small  hollow  fibres,  which  are  excretory  canals  of  a 
particular  kind,  and  which  are  generally  filled  with 
urine. 

In  respect  of  its  volume,  no  organ  receives  so  much 
blood  as  the  kidney.  The  artery  which  is  directed 
there  is  large,  short,  and  proceeds  immediately  from 
the  aorta ; it  has  easy  communication  with  the  veins 
and  the  tubulous  substance,  as  may  easily  be  ascer- 
tained by  means  of  the  most  coarse  injections,  which, 
being  thrown  into  the  renal  artery,  pass  into  the  veins 
and  into  the  pelvis,  after  having  filled  the  cortical  sub- 
stance. 

The  filaments  of  the  great  sympathetic  alone  are  dis- 
tributed to  the  kidneys.  The  caliccs , pelvis,  and 
ureter  form  together  a canal  which  commences  in  the 
kidneys,  where  it  embraces  the  top  of  the  mamillary 
processes,  and,  placed  at  the  sides  of  the  vertebral  co- 
lumn, it  goes  in  the  bottom  of  the  pelvis  to  the  bladder, 
where  it  terminates.  This  last  organ  is  an  extensible 
and  contractile  sac,  intended  to  hold  the  fluid  secreted 
by  the  kidneys,  and  which  communicates  with  the  ex- 
terior by  a canal  of  considerable  length  in  man,  but 
very  short  in  woman,  called  urethra. 

The  posterior  extremity  of  the  urethra  is,  only  in 
man,  surrounded  by  the  prostate  gland,  which  is  con- 
sidered by  certain  anatomists  as  a collection  of  mucous 
follicles.  Two  small  glands  placed  before  the  anus 
pour  a particular  fluid  into  this  canal.  Two  muscles, 
which  descend  from  the  pubis  towards  the  rectum,  pass 
upon  the  sides  of  the  pari  of  the  bladder  which  ends  in 

H h it 


the  urethra,  approach  one  another  behind,  and  form  a 
small  arc  which  sut  rounds  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  and 
carries  it  more  or  less  upwards. 

If  the  pelvis  is  cut  open  in  a living  animal,  the  urine 
is  seen  to  pass  out  slowly  by  the  sumnfitsof  the  excre- 
tory cones.  This  liquid  is  deposited  in  the  pelvis  of 
the  kidney,  and  then  by  little  and  little  it  enters  into  the 
ureter , through  the  whole  length  of  which  it  passes.  It 
thus  arrives  at  the  bladder,  into  which  it  penetrates  by 
a constant  exudation  or  dribbling. 

A slight  compression  upon  the  uriniferous  cones 
makes  the  urine  pass  out  in  considerable  quantity  : but 
instead  of  being  limpid,  as  when  it  passes  out  naturally, 
it  is  muddy  and  thick.  It  appears  then  to  be  filtered  by 
the  hollow  fibres  of  the  tubular  substance. 

Neither  the  pelvis  nor  the  ureter  being  contractile, 
probably  the  power  which  produces  the  motion  of  the 
urine  is,  on  the  one  hand,  that  by  which  it  is  poured  into 
the  pelvis  ; and  on  the  other,  the  pressure  of  the  ab- 
dominal muscles,  to  which  may  be  added,  when  we 
stand  upright,  the  weight  of  the  liquid. 

Under  the  influence  of  these  causes,  the  urine  passes 
into  the  bladder,  and  slowly  distends  this  organ,  some- 
times to  a considerable  degree;  this  accumulation  being 
permitted  by  the  extensibility  of  different  organs. 

How  does  the  urine  accumulate  in  the  bladder  1 Why 
does  it  not  flow  immediately  by  the  urethra'?  and  why 
does  it  not  flow  back  into  the  ureter  ? The  answer  is 
easy  for  the  ureters.  These  conduits  pass  a considera- 
ble distance  into  the  sides  of  the  bladder.  In  propor- 
tion as  the  urine  distends  this  organ,  it  flattens  the  ure- 
ters, and  shuts  them  so  much  more  firmly  as  it  is  more 
abundant.  This  takes  place  in  the  dead  body  as  well 
as  in  the  living;  also,  a liquid,  or  even  air,  injected 
into  the  bladder,  by  the  urethra,  never  enters  the  ure- 
ters. It  is,  then,  by  a mechanism  analagous  to  that  of 
certain  valves,1  that  the  urine  does  not  return  towards 
the  kidneys. 

It  is  not  so  easy  to  explain  why  the  urine  does  not 
flow  by  the  urethra.  Several  causes  appear  to  contri- 
bute to  this.  The  sides  of  this  canal,  particularly  to- 
wards the  bladder,  have  a continual  tendency  to  con 
tract,  and  to  lessen  the  cavity;  but  this  cause  alone 
would  be  insufficient  to  resist  the  efforts  of  the  urine  to> 
escape,  when  the  bladder  is  full.  In  the  dead  body,  in 
which  the  canal  contracts  nearly  in  the  same  manner, 
it  has  but  a very  weak  resistance,  and  does  not  prevent 
the  passage  of  the  liquid  outwards,  though  the  bladder 
may  be  very  little  compressed. 

The  angle  of  the  bladder  with  the  urethra,  when  it  is 
strongly  distended,  may  also  present  an  obstacle  to  the 
passage  of  the  urine ; but  the  principal  cause,  most 
probably,  is  the  contraction  of  the  elevating  muscles  of 
the  anus,  which,  either  by  the  disposition  to  contrac- 
tion of  the  muscular  fibres,  or  by  their  contraction 
under  the  influence  of  the*  brain,  press  the  urethra 
upwards,  compress  its  sides  with  more  or  less  force 
against  each  other,  and  thus  shut  its  posterior  orifice. 

Excretion  of  urine. — As  soon  as  there  is  a certain 
quantity  of  urine  in  the  bladder,  we  feel  an  inclination 
to  discharge  it.  The  mechanism  of  this  expulsion  de- 
serves particular  attention,  and  has  not  always  been 
well  understood. 

If  the  urine  is  not  always  expelled,  this  ought  not  to 
be  attributed  to  the  want  of  contraction  in  the  bladder, 
for  this  organ  always  tends  to  contract ; but,  by  the  in- 
fluence of  the  causos  that  we  have  noticed,  the  internal 
orifice  of  the  urethra  resists  with  a force  that  the  corn- 
traction  of  the  bladder  cannot  surmount.  The  will 
produces  this  expulsion,  1st,  by  adding  the  contraction 
of  the  abdominal  muscles  to  that  of  the  bladder;  2dly 
by  relaxing  the  levatorcs  ani , which  shut  the  urethra. 
The  resistance  of  this  canal  being  once  overcome,  the 
contraction  of  the  bladder  is  sufficient  for  the  complete 
expulsion  of  the  urine  it  contained;  but  the  action  of 
the  abdominal  muscles  may  be  added,  and  then  the 
urine  passes  out  with  much  greater  force.  VVe  may 
also  stop  the  flowing  of  the  urine  all  at  once,  by  con- 
tracting the  levators  of  the  anus. 

The  contraction  of  the  bladder  is  not  voluntary, 
though  by  acting  on  the  abdominal  muscles,  and  the 
levators  of  the  anus,  we  may  cause  it  to  contract  when 
we  choose. 

The  urine  that  remains  in  the  urethra  after  the  blad- 
der is  empty,  is  expelled  by  the  contraction  of  the  mus- 
cles of  the  perimeum,  and  particularly  by  that  of  the 
acceleratores  urinte. 


URI 


Though  the  quantity  of  urine  is  very  copious,  and 
though  it  contains  several  proximate  principles  which 
are  not  found  in  the  blood,  and  consequently  a chemical 
action  takes  place  in  the  kidneys,  the  secretion  of  the 
urine  is  nevertheless  very  rapid. 

The  physical  properties  of  the  urine  are  subject  to 
great  variations.  If  rhubarb  or  madder  has  been  used, 
it  becomes  of  a deep  yellow,  or  blood  red  ; if  one  has 
breathed  an  air  charged  with  vapours  of  oil  or  turpen- 
tine, or  if  a little  rosin  has  been  swallowed,  it  takes  a 
violet  colour.  The  disagreeable  odour  that  it  takes  by 
the  use  of  asparagus,  is  well  known. 

Its  chemical  composition  is  not  less  variable.  The 
more  use  that  is  made  of  watery  beverages,  the  more 
considerable  the  total  quantity  and  proportion  of  water 
becomes.  If  one  drinks  little,  the  contrary  happens. 

The  uric  acid  becomes  mor.e  abundant  when  the 
regimen  is  very  substantial,  and  the  exercise  trifling. 
This  acid  diminishes,  and  may  even  disappear  alto- 
gether, by  the  constant  and  exclusive  use  of  unazo- 
tized  food,  such  as  sugar,  gum,  butter,  oil,  &c.  Certain 
salts,  carried  into  the  stomach,  even  in  small  quantity, 
are  found  in  a short  time  in  the  urine. 

The  extreme  rapidity  with  which  this  translation 
takes  place,  has  made  it  be  supposed  there  is  a direct 
communication  between  the  stomach  and  the  bladder. 
Even  now  there  are  considerable  numbers  of  partisans 
in  favour  of  this  opinion. 

It  is  not  yet  long  since  a direct  canal  from  the  stomach 
to  the  bladder  was  supposed  to  exist,  but  this  passage 
has  no  existence.  Others  have  supposed,  without 
giving  any  proof,  that  the  passage  took  place  by  the 
cellular  tissue,  by  the  anastomoses  of  the  lymphatic 
vessels,  &c. 

Darwin  having  given  to  a friend  several  grains  of 
nitrate  of  potassa,  in  half  an  hour  he  let  blood  of  him, 
and  collected  his  urine.  The  salt  was  found  in  the 
urine,  but  not  in  the  blood.  Brande  made  similar  ob- 
servations with  prussiate  of  potassa.  He  concluded 
from  it  that  the  circulation  is  not  the  only  means  of 
communication  between  the  stomach  and  the  urinary 
organs,  but  without  giving  any  explanation  of  the  ex- 
isting means.  Sir  Everard  Home  is  also  of  this  opinion. 

I have  made  experiments  in  order  to  clear  up  this 
important  question,  and  I have  found,  1st,  That  when- 
ever prussiate  of  potassa  is  injected  into  the  veins,  or 
absolved  in  the  intestinal  canal,  or  by  a serous  mem- 
brane, it  very  soon  passes  into  the  bladder,  where  it 
is  easily  recognised  among  the  urine.  2dly,  that  if 
^the  quantity  of  prussiate  injected  is  considerable,  the 
tests  can  discover  it  in  the  blood ; but  if  the  quantity 
is  small,  its  presence  cannot  be  recognised  by  the  usual 
means.  3dly,  That  the  same  result  takes  place  by 
mixing  the  prussiate  and  blood  together  in  a vessel. 
4thly,  That  the  same  salt  is  recognised  in  all  propor- 
tions in  the  urine.  It  is  not  extraordinary,  then,  that 
Darwin  and  Brande  did  not  find  in  the  blood  the  sub- 
stance that  they  distinctly  perceived  in  the  urine. 

With  regard  to  the  organs  that  transport  the  liquids 
of  the  stomach  and  intestines  into  the  circulating  sys- 
tem, it  is  evident,  according  to  what  we  have  said,  in 
speaking  of  the  chyliferous  vessels,  and  the  absorption 
of  the  veins,  that  these  liquids  are  directly  absorbed  by 
the  veins,  and  transported  by  them  to  the  liver  and  the 
heart ; so  that  the  direction  which  these  liquids  follow, 
in  order  to  reach  the  veins,  is  much  shorter  than  is  ge- 
nerally admitted,  viz.  by  the  lymphatic  vessels,  the  me- 
senteric glands,  and  the  thoracic  duct.” — Magendie's 
Physiology. 

The  urine  of  a healthy  man  is  divided  in  general 
into, 

1.  Crude,  or  that  which  is  emitted  one  or  two  hours 
after  eating.  This  is  for  the  most  part  aqueous,  and 
often  vitiated  by  some  kinds  of  food. 

2.  Coded , which  is  eliminated  some  hours  after  the 
digestion  of  the  food,  as  that  which  is  emitted  in  the 
morning  after  sleeping.  This  is  generally  in  smaller 
quantity,  thicker,  more  coloured,  more  acrid  than  at 
any  other  time.  Of  such  cocted  urine,  the  colour  is 
usually  citrine,  and  not  unhandsome. 

The  degree  of  heat  agrees  with  that  of  the  blood. 
Hence  in  atmospheric  air  it  is  warmer,  as  is  perceived 
if  the  hand  be  washed  with  urine.  The  specific  gra- 
vity is  greater  than  water,  and  that  emitted  in  the 
morning  is  always  heavier  than  at  any  other  time. 
The  smell  of  fresh  urine  is  not  disagreeable.  The 
taste  is  saltish  and  nauseous.  The  consistence  is  some- 


UJU 

what  thicker  than  water.  The  quantity  depends  on 
that  of  the  liquid  drink,  its  diuretic  nature,  and  the 
temperature  of  the  air. 

Changes  of  urine  in  the  air. — Preserved  in  an  open 
vessel,  it  remains  pellucid  for  some  time,  and  at  length 
there  is  percefved  at  the  bottom  a nubecula , or  little 
cloud,  consolidated  as  it  were  from  the  gluten.  This 
nubecula  increases  by  degrees,  occupies  all  the  urine, 
and  renders  it  opaque.  The  natural  smell  is  changed 
into  a putrid  cadaverous  one ; and  the  surface  is  now 
generally  covered  with  a cuticle , composed  of  very 
minute  crystals.  At  length,  the  urine  regains  its  trans- 
parency, and  the  colour  is  changed  from  a yellow  to  a 
brown ; the  cadaverous  smell  passes  into  an  alkaline; 
and  a brown,  grumous  sediment  falls  to  the  bottom, 
filled  with  white  particles,  deliquescing  in  the  air,  and 
so  conglutinated  as  to  form,  as  ii  were,  little  soft  calculi. 

Thus  two  sediments  are  distinguishable  in  the 
urine ; the  one  white  and  gelatinous,  and  separated  in 
the  beginning ; the  other  brown  and  grumous,  deposited 
by  the  brine  when  putrid. 

Spontaneous  degeneration. — Of  all  the  fluids  of  the 
body,  the  urine  first  putrifies.  In  summer,  alter  a few 
hours  it  becomes  turbid,  and  sordidly  black;  then 
deposites  a copious  sediment,  and  exhales  a fetor  like 
that  of  putrid  cancers,  which  at  length  becomes  cada- 
verous. Putrid  urine  effervesces  wkh  acids,  and,  if 
distilled,  gives  off,  before  water,  a urinous  volatile 
spirit. 

The  properties  of  healthy  urine  are, 

1.  Urine  reddens  paper  stained  with  turnsole  and 
with  the  juice  of  radishes,  and  therefore  contains  an 
acid.  This  acid  has  been  generally  considered  as  the 
phosphoric,  but  Thenard  has  shown  that  in  reality  it  is 
the  acetic. 

2.  If  a solution  of  ammonia  be  poured  into  fresh 
urine,  a w hite  powder  precipitates,  which  has  the  pro- 
perties of  phosphate  of  lime. 

3.  If  the  phosphate  of  lime  precipitated  from  urine 
be  examined,  a little  magnesia  will  be  found  mixed 
with  it.  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin  have  ascertained 
that  this  is  owing  to  a little  phosphate  of  magnesia 
winch  urine  contains,  and  which  is  decomposed  by 
the  alkali  employed  to  precipitate  the  phosphate  of  lime. 

4.  Proust  informs  us  that  carbonic  acid  exists  in 
urine,  and  that  its  separation  occasions  the  froth 
which  appears  during  the  evaporation  of  urine. 

5.  Proust  has  observed,  that  urine  kept  in  new  casks 
deposites  small  crystals,  which  effloresce  in  the  air,  and 
fall  to  powder.  These  crystals  possess  the  properties 
of  the  carbonate  of  lime. 

6.  When  fresh  urine  cools,  it  often  lets  fall  a brick 
coloured  precipitate,  w hich  Scheele  first  ascertained  to 
be  crystals  of  uric  acid.  All  urine  contains  this  acid, 
even  when  no  sensible  precipitate  appears  when  it 
cools. 

7.  During  intermitting  fevers,  and  especially  during 
diseases  of  the  liver,  a copious  sediment  of  a brick-red 
colour  is  deposited  from  urine.  This  sediment  contains 
the  rosacic  acid  of  Proust. 

8.  If  fresh  urine  be  evaporated  to  the  consistence  of 
a syrup,  and  muriatic  acid  be  then  poured  into  it,  a 
precipitate  appears  which  possesses  the  properties  of 
benzoic  acid. 

9.  When  an  infusion  of  tannin  is  dropped  into  urine, 
a white  precipitate  appears,  having  the  properties  of 
the  combination  of  tannin  and  albumen , or  gelatine. 
Their  quantity  in  healthy  urine  is  very  small,  often 
indeed  not  sensible.  Cruickshanks  found  that  the  pre- 
cipitate afforded  by  tannin  in  healthy  urine  amounted 
to  l-240th  part  of  the  weight  of  the  urine. 

10.  If  urine  be  evaporated  by  a slow  fire  to  the  con- 
sistence of  a thick  syrup,  it  assumes  a deep  brown 
colour,  and  exhales  a fietid  ammoniacal  odour.  When 
allowed  to  cool,  it  concretes  into  a mass  of  crystals, 
composed  of  all  the  component  parts  of  urine.  If  four 
times  its  weight  of  alkohol  be  poured  into  this  mass,  at 
intervals,  and  a slight  heat  be  applied,  the  greatest  part 
is  dissolved.  The  alkohol  which  has  acquired  a brown 
colour  is  to  be  decanted  off,  and  distilled  in  a retort  in 
a sand  heat  till  the  mixture  has  boiled  for  some  time, 
and  acquired  the  consistence  of  a syrup.  By  this  time 
the  whole  of  the  alkohol  has  passed  off,  and  the  mat- 
ter, on  cooling,  crystallizes  in  quadrangular  plates, 
wdiich  intersect  each  other.  This  substance  is  urea, 
which  composes  9-20ths  of  the  urine,  provided  the 
watery'  part  be  excluded.  It  is  litis  substance  which 


URI 


UTE 


characterizes  urine,  and  constitutes  it  what  it  is,  and  to 
which  the  greater  part  of  the  very  singular  phenomena 
of  urine  are  to  be  ascribed. 

11.  According  to  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin,  the  colour 
of  urine  depends  upon  the  urea ; the  greater  the  pro- 
portion of  urea  the  deeper  the  colour.  But  Proust  has 
detected  a resinous  matter  in  urine  similar  to  the  resin 
of  bile,  and  to  this  substance  he  ascribes  the  colour  of 
urine. 

12.  If  urine  be  slowly  evaporated  to  the  consistence 
of  a syrup,  a number  of  crystals  make  their  appearance 
on  its  surface;  these  possess  the  properties  of  the  muri- 
ate of  soda. 

13.  The  saline  residuum  which  remains  after  the 
separation  of  urea  from  crystallized  urine  by  means  of 
alkohol,  has  been  long  known  by  the  names  of  fusible 
salt  of  urine,  and  microcosmic  salt.  When  these  salts 
are  examined,  they  are  found  to  have  the  properties  of 
phosphates.  The  rhomboidal  prisms  consist  of  phos- 
phate of  ammonia  united  to  a little  phosphate  of  soda , 
the  rectangular  tables,  on  the  contrary,  are  phosphate 
of  soda  united  to  a small  quantity  of  phosphate  of  am- 
monia ; urine  then  contains  phosphate  of  soda , and 
phosphate  of  ammonia. 

14.  When  urine  is  cautiously  evaporated  a few  cubic 
crystals  are  often  deposited  among  the  other  salts ; 
these  crystals  have  the  properties  of  muriate  of  am- 
monia. 

15.  When  urine  is  boiled  in  a silver  basin,  it 
blackens  the  basin,  and  if  the  quantity  of  urine  be  large, 
small  crusts  of  sulphuret  of  silver  may  be  detached. 
Hence  we  see  that  urine  contains  sulphur. 

Urine  then  contains  the  following  substances : 

1.  Water.  10.  Albumen. 

2.  Acetic  acid.  11.  Urea. 

3.  Phosphate  of  lime.  12.  Resin 

4.  Phosphate  of  magnesia.  13.  Muriate  of  soda. 

5.  Carbonic  acid.  1C  Phosphate  of  soda. 

6.  Carbonate  of  lime.  15.  Phosphate  of  ammonia. 

7.  Uric  acid.  16.  Muriate  of  ammonia. 

8.  Rosacic  acid.  17.  Sulphur. 

9.  Benzoic  acid. 

According  to  Berzelius,  healthy  human  urine  is 
composed  of,  water  933,  urea  30.10,  sulphate  of  potassa 
3.71,  sulphate  of  soda  3.16,  phosphate  of  soda  2.94,  mu- 
riate of  soda  4.45,  phosphate  of  ammonia  1.65,  muriate 
of  ammonia  1.50,  free  acetic  acid,  with  lactate  of  am- 
monia, animal  matter  soluble  in  aikohol,  urea  adhering 
to  the  preceding,  altogether  17.14,  earthy  phosphates 
with  a trace  of  fluate  of  lime  1.0,  uric  acid  1,  mucus  of 
the  bladder  0.32,  silica  0.03,  in  1000.0 

No  liquor  in  the  human  body,  however,  is  so  vari- 
able, in  respect  to  quantity  and  quality , as  the  urine; 
for  it  varies, 

1.  In  respect  to  age:  in  the  foetus  it  is  inodorous, 
insipid,  and  almost  aqueous  ; but  as  the  infant  grows, 
it  becomes  more  acrid  and  foetid ; and  in  old  age  more 
particularly  so. 

2.  In  respect  to  drink  : it  is  secreted  in  greater  quan- 
tity, and  of  a more  pale  colour,  from  cold  and  copious 
draughts.  It  becomes  green  from  an  infusion  of  Chi- 
nese tea.  • 

3.  In  respect  to  food  : from  eating  the  heads  of  aspa- 
ragus, or  olives,  it  contracts  a peculiar  smell ; from  the 
fruit  of  the  opuntia,  it  becomes  red  ; and  from  fasting, 
turbid. 

4.  In  respect  to  medicines:  from  the  exhibition  of 
rhubarb- root,  it  becomes  yellow;  from  cassia-pulp, 
green  ; and  fiom  turpentine  it  acquires  a violet  odour. 

5.  In  respect  to  the  time  of  the  year ; in  the  winter 
the  urine  is  more  copious  and  aqueous;  but  in  the 
summer,  from  the  increased  transpiration,  it  is  more 
sparing,  higher  coloured,  and  so  acrid  that  it  sometimes 
occasions  strangury.  The  climate  induces  the  same 
difference. 

6.  In  respect  of  the  muscular  motion  of  the  body: 
it  is  secreted  more  sparingly,  and  concentrated  by 
motion ; and  is  more  copiously  diluted,  and  rendered 
more  crude  by  rest. 

7.  In  respect  of  the  affections  of  the  mind:  thus 
fright  makes  the  urine  pale. 

Use. — The  urine  is  an  excrementitious  fluid,  like 
lixivium,  by  which  the  human  body  is  notonly  liberated 
from  the  superfluous  water,  but  also  from  the  super- 
fluous salts,  and  animal  earth ; and  is  defended  from 
corruption. 

Lastly,  the  vis  medicatrix  naturtc  sometimes  elimi- 
II  hh 2 


nates  many  morbid  and  acrid  substances  with  the 
urine;  as  may  be  observed  in  fevers,  dropsies,  &c- 

Urine,  retention  of.  A want  of  the  ordinary 
secretion  of  urine.  In  retention  of  urine  there  is  none 
Secreted:  in  a suppression,  the  urine  is  secreted  but 
cannot  be  avoided. 

Urine , suppression  of.  See  Ischuria. 

UROCRI'SIA.  (From  ovpov,  urine,  and  spivco,  to 
judge.  The  judgment  formed  of  diseases  by  the  inspec- 
tion of  urine. 

URORRIIAS'A.  (From  ovpov,  the  urine,  and  pew,  to 
flow.)  A discharge  of  the  urine. 

URGSCO'PIA.  (From  ovpov,  the  urine,  and  oconto, 
to  inspect.)  Inspection  of  urine,  that  a judgment  of 
diseases  may  be  made  from  its  appearance. 

Ursi'na  radix.  The  root  of  the  plant  called  bald- 
money.  See  JEthusa  meum. 

URSINE.  Ursinus.  Of  or  belonging  to  the  bear. 

URSUS.  1.  The  bear. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  animals.  Class,  Mam- 
malia ; Order,  Feres.  It  comprehends  the  several 
kinds  of  bears,  the  badger,  and  racoon. 

URTI'CA.  ( Ab  urendo  ;■  because  it  excites  an  itch- 
ing and  pustules  like  those  produced  by  fire.)  1.  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linniean  system. 
Class,  Moncccia  ; Order,  Tetrandria.  The  nettle. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common  nettle 
See  Urtica  dioica. 

Urtica  dioica.  The  systematic  name  of  the  com 
mon  stinging-nettle.  This  plant  is  well  known,  and 
though  generally  despised  as  a noxious  weed,  has 
been  long  used  for  medical,  culinary,  and  economical 
purposes.  The  young  shoots  in  the  spring  possess  diu- 
retic and  antiscorbutic  properties,  and  are  with  these 
intentions  boiled  and  eaten  instead  of  cabbage  greens, 

Urtica  mortua.  See  Lamium  album . 

Urtica  pilulifera.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
pillbearing  nettle.  Urtica  romana.  The  seed  was 
formerly  given  against  diseases  of  the  chest,  but  is  now 
deservedly  forgotten.  To  raise  an  irritation  in  para- 
lytic limbs,  the  fresh  plant  may  be  employed  as  pro- 
ducing a more  permanent  sting  than  the  common 
nettle. 

Urtica  romana.  See  Urtica  pilulifera. 

Urtica  urens.  The  systematic  name  of  a less 
nettle  than  the  dioica,  and  possessing  similar  virtues. 

URTICA'RIA.  (From  urtica , a nettle.)  Febris 
urticata ; Uredo ; Purpura  urticata ; Scarlatina 
urtica.  The  nettle-rash.  A species  of  exanthematous 
fever,  known  by  pyrexia  and  an  eruption  on  the  skin 
like  that  produced  by  the  sting  of  the  nettle.  The  little 
elevations,  called  the  nettle-rash,  often  appear  instanta- 
neously, especially  if  the  skin  be  rubbed  or  scratched, 
and  seldom  stay  many  hours  in  the  same  place,  and 
sometimes  not  many  minutes.  No  part  of  the  body  is 
exempt  from  them  ; and  where  many  of  them  rise 
together,  and  continue  an  hour  or  two,  the  parts  are 
often  considerably  swelled,  which  particularly  happens 
in  the  arms,  face,  and  hands.  These  eruptions  will 
continue  to  infest  the  skin,  sometimes  in  one  place  and 
sometimes  in  another,  for  one  or  tw  o hours  together, 
two  or  three  times  a day,  or  perhaps  for  the  greatest 
part  of  twenty-four  hours.  In  some  constitutions  they 
last  only  a few  days,  in  others  many  months. 

URTICA'TIO.  (From  urtica , a nettle.)  The 
whipping  a paralytic  or  benumbed  limb  with  nettles, 
in  order  to  restore  its  feeling. 

U'SNEA.  See  Lichen  saxatilis. 

Utera'ria.  (From  uterus,  the  womb.)  Medicines 
appropriated  to  diseases  of  the  womb. 

UTERINE.  Uterinus.  Appertaining  to  the  uterus. 

Uterine  fury.  See  JYymphomania. 

U' TER  US.  Yarepa.  Matrix;  Agcr  natures; 
Hystera  ; Metra  ; Utriculus.  The  womb.  A spongy 
receptacle  resembling  a compressed  pear,  situated  in 
the  cavity  of  the  pelvis,  above  the  vagina,  and  between 
the  urinary  bladder  and  rectum. 

The  form  of  the  uterus  resembles  that  of  ail  oblong 
pear  flattened,  with  the  depressed  sides  placed  towards 
the  ossa  pubis  and  sacrum ; but,  in  the  impregnated 
state,  it  becomes  more  oval,  according  to  the  degree  of 
its  distention.  For  the  convenience  of  description, 
and  for  some  practical  purposes,  the  uterus  is  distin- 
guished into  three  parts.  The  fundus,  the  body,  and 
the  cervix ; the  upper  part  is  called  the  fundus,  the 
lower  the  cervix ; the  space  between  them,  the  extent 
of  which  is  undefined,  the  body.  The  uterus  is  about 


UTE 


UTE 


three  inches  in  length,  about  two  in  breadth  at  the 
fundus,  and  one  at  the  cervix.  Its  thickness  is  dif- 
ferent at  the  fundus  and  cervix,  being  at  the  former 
usually  rather  less  than  half  an  inch,  and  at  the  latter 
somewhat  more ; and  this  thickness  is  preserved 
throughout  pregnancy,  chiefly  by  the  enlargement  of 
the  veins  and  lymphatics ; there  being  a smaller  change 
in  the  size  of  the  arteries.  But  there  is  so  great  a 
variety  in  the  'size  and  dimensions  of  the  uterus  in 
different  women,  independent  of  the  states  of  virginity, 
marriage,  or  pregnancy,  as  to  prevent  any  very  ac- 
curate mensuration.  The  cavity  of  the  uterus  corres- 
ponds wilh  the  external  form  ; that  of  the  cervix  leads 
from  the  os  uteri,  where  it  is  very  small,  in  a straight 
direction,  to  the  fundus,  where  it  is  expanded  into  a 
triangular  form,  with  two  of  the  angles  opposed  to  the 
entrance  into  the  Fallopian  tubes  ; and  at  the  place  of 
junction  between  the  cervix  and  the  body  of  the  uterus, 
the  cavity  is  smaller  than  it  is  in  any  other  part.  There 
is  a swell  or  fulness  of  all  the  parts  towards  the  cavity, 
which  is  sometimes  distinguished  by  a prominent  line 
running  longitudinally  through  its  middle.  The  villous 
coat  of  the  vagina  is  reflected  over  the  os  uteri,  and 
is  continued  into  the  membrane  which  lines  the  cavity 
of  the  uterus.  The  internal  surface  of  the  uterus  is 
corrugated  in  a beautiful  manner,  but  the  rugie,  or 
wrinkles,  which  are  longitudinal,  lessen  as  they  ad- 
vance into  the  uterus,  the  fundus  of  which  is  smooth. 
In  the  intervals  between  the  rugae  are  small  orifices, 
like  those  in  the  vagina,  which  discharge  a mucus, 
serving,  besides  other  purposes,  that  of  closing  the  os 
uteri  very  curiously  and  perfectly  during  pregnancy,  i 
The  substance  of  the  uterus,  which  is  very  firm,  is 
composed  of  arteries,  veins,  lymphatics,  nerves,  and 
muscular  fibres,  curiously  interwoven  and  connected 
together  by  cellular  membrane.  The  muscular  fibres 
are  of  a pale  colour,  and  appear  also  in  their  texture 
somewhat  different  from  muscular  fibres  in  other  parts 
of  the  body.  The  arteries  of  the  uterus  are  the  sper- 
matic and  hypogastric.  The  spermatic  arteries  arise 
from  the  anterior  part  of  the  aorta,  a little  below  the 
emulgents,  and  sometimes  from  the  emulgents.  They 
pass  over  the  psoae  muscles  behind  the  peritonaeum,  enter 
between  the  two  laminae  or  duplicatures  of  the  peri- 
tonaeum which  form  the  broad  ligaments  of  the  uterus, 
and  proceed  to  the  uterus,  near  the  fundus  of  which 
they  insinuate  themselves,  giving  branches  in  their 
passage  to  the  ovaria  and  Fallopian  tubes.  The  hypo- 
gastric arteries  are  on  each  side  a considerable  branch 
of  the  internal  iliacs.  They  pass  to  the  sides  of  the 
body  of  the  uterus,  sending  off  a number  of  smaller 
branches,  which  dip  into  its  substance.  Some  branches 
also  are  reflected  upwards  to  the  fundus  uteri,  which 
anastomose  with  the  spermatic  arteries,  and  others  are 
reflected  downwards,  supplying  the  vagina.  The 
veins  which  reconduct  the  blood  from  the  uterus  are 
very  numerous,  and  their  size  in  the  unimpregnated 
state  is  proportioned  to  that  of  the  arteries ; but  their 
enlargement  during  pregnancy  is  such,  that  the  orifices 
of  some  of  them,  when  divided,  will  admit  even  of 
the  end  of  a small  finger.  The  veins  anastomose  in 
the  manner  of  the  arteries  which  they  accompany  out 
of  the  uterus,  and  then,  having  the  same  names  with 
the  arteries,  spermatic  and  hypogastric,  the  former 
proceeds  to  the  vena  cava  on  the  right  side,  and  on  the 
left  to  the  emulgent  vein  ; and  the  latter  to  the  internal 
iliac. 

From  the  substance  and  surfaces  of  the  uterus  an 
infinite  number  of  lymphatics  arise,  which  follow  th 
course  of  the  hypogastric  and  spermatic  blood-vessels. 
The  first  pass  into  the  gland  of  the  internal  iliac  plexus, 
and  the  other  into  the  glands  which  are  situated  near 
the  origin  of  the  spermatic  arteries.  Of  these  Nuck 
first  gave  a delineation. 

The  uterus  is  supplied  with  nerves  from  the  lower 
mesocolic  plexus,  and  from  two  small  flat  circular  gan- 
glions, which  are  situated  behind  the  rectum.  These 
ganglions  are  joined  by  a number  of  small  branches 
from  the  third  and  fourth  sacral  nerves.  The  ovaria 
derive  their  nerves  from  the  renal  plexus.  By  the 
great  number  of  nerves,  these  parts  are  rendered  very 
irritable,  but  it  is  by  those  branches  which  the  uterus 
receives  from  the  intercostal,  that  the  intimate  consent 
oetween  it  and  various  other  parts  is  chiefly  preserved. 
The  muscular  fibres  of  the  uterus  have  been  described 
in  a very  different  manner  by  anatomists,  some  ^of 
whom  have  asserted  that  its  substance  was  chiefly 


muscular,  with  fibres  running  in  transverse,  orbicular, 
or  reticulated  order,  while  others  have  contended  that 
there  were  no  muscular  fibres  whatever  in  the  uterus. 
In  the  unimpregnated  uterus,  when  boiled  for  the  pur- 
pose of  a more  perfect  examination,  the  former  seems 
to  be  a true  representation  ; and  when  the  uterus  is 
distended  towards  the  latter  part  of  pregnancy,  these 
fibres  are  very  thinly  scattered  ; but  they  may  be  dis- 
covered in  a circular  direction,  at  the  junction  between 
the  body  and  the  cervix  of  the  uterus,  and  surrounding 
the  entrance  of  each  Fallopian  tube  in  a similar  order. 
Yet  it  does  not  seem  reasonable  to  attribute  the  time 
of  labour  to  its  muscular  fibres  only,  if  we  are  to  judge 
of  the  power  of  a muscle  by  the  number  of  fibres  of 
which  it  is  composed,  unless  it  is  presumed  that  those 
of  the  uterus  are  stronger  than  in  common  muscles. 
With  respect  to  the  glands  of  the  uterus,  none  are 
discoverable  dispersed  through  its  substance  upon  the 
inner  surface  of  the  cervix  ; between  the  rugae  there 
are  lacunae  wjiich  secrete  mucus,  and  there  are  small 
follicles  at  the  edge  of  the  os  uteri.  These  last  are 
only  observable  in  a state  of  pregnancy,  when  they  are 
much  enlarged.  From  the  angles  at  tire  fundus  of  the 
uterus,  two  processes  of  an  irregular  round  form  ori- 
ginate, called  from  the  name  of  the  first  describer,  the 
Fallopian  tubes.  They  are  about  three  inches  in 
length,  and,  becoming  smaller  in  their  progress  from 
the  uterus,  have  an  uneven,  fringed  termination,  called 
the  fiinbrite.  The  canal  which  passes  through  these 
tubes  isextremely  small  at  their  origin,  but  it  is  gradually 
enlarged,  and  terminates  with  a patulous  orifice,  the 
diameter  of  which  is  about  one- third  of  an  inch,  sur- 
rounded by  the  fimbria;.  It  is  also  lined  by  a very  fine 
vascular  membrane,  formed  into  serpentine  plica-. 
Through  this  canal  the  communication  between  the 
uterus  and  ovaria  is  preserved.  The  Fallopian  tubes 
are  wrapped  in  duplicatures  of  the  peritonaeum,  which 
are  called  the  broad  ligaments  of  the  uterus ; but  a 
portion  of  their  extremities,  thus  folded,  hang  loose 
on  each  side  of  the  pelvis.  From  each  lateral  angle  of 
the  uterus,  a little  before  and  below  the  Fallopian 
tubes,  the  round  ligaments  arise,  which  are  composed 
of  arteries,  veins,  lymphatics,  nerves,  and  a fibrous 
structure.  These  are  connected  together  by  cellular 
membrane,  and  the  whole  is  much  enlarged  during 
pregnancy.  They  receive  their  outward  covering  from 
the  peritonaeum,  and  pass  out  of  the  pelvis  through  the 
ring  of  the  external  oblique  muscle  to  the  groin, 
where  the  vessels  subdivide  into  small  branches,  and 
terminate  at  the  mons  veneris  and  contiguous  parts. 
From  the  insertion  of  these  ligaments  into  the  groin, 
the  reason  appears  why  that  part  generally  suffers  in 
all  the  diseases  and  affections  of  the  uterus,  and  why 
the  inguinal  glands  are  in  women  so  often  found  in  a 
morbid  or  enlarged  state.  The  duplicatures  of  the 
peritonaeum,  in  which  the  Fallopian  tubes  and  ovaria 
are  involved,  are  called  the  broad  ligaments  of  the 
uterus.  These  prevent  the  entanglement  of  the  pa  is, 
and  are  conductors  of  the  vessels  and  nerves,  as  the 
mesentery  is  of  those  of  the  intestines.  Both  the  round 
and  broad  ligaments  alter  their  position  during  preg- 
nancy, appearing  to  rise  lower  and  more  forward  than 
in  the  unimpregnated  state.  Their  use  is  supposed  to  b.; 
that  of  preventing  the  descent  of  the  uterus,  and  to 
regulate  its  direction  when  it  ascends  into  the  carfty 
of  the  abdomen ; but  whether  they  answer  these  pur 
poses  may  be  much  doubted.  The  use  of  the  womb  is 
for  menstruation,  conception,  nutrition  of  the  foetus, 
and  parturition.  The  uterus  is  liable  to  many  diseases, 

■ the  principal  of  which  are  retroversion  and  its  falling 
down,  hydatids,  dropsy  of  the  uterus,  moles,  polypes, 
ulceration,  cancer,  &c. 

Uterus,  retroversion  of.  By  the  term  retrover- 
sion, such  a change  of  the  position  of  the  uterus  is 
understood,  that  the  fundus  is  turned  backwards  and 
downwards  upon  its  cervix,  between  the  vagina  and 
rectum,  and  the  os  uteri  is  turned  forwards  to  the 
pubis,  and  upwards,  in  proportion  to  the  descent  of  the 
fundus,  so  that  by  an  examination  per  vaginam,  it  can- 
not be  felt,  or  not  without  difficulty,  when  the  uterus 
is  retroverted.  By  the  same  examination  there  may 
also  be  perceived  a large  round  tumour,  occupying  the 
inferior  part  of  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis,  and  pressing 
the  vagina  towards  the  pubes.  By  an  examination 
per  anum , the  same  tumour  may  be  felt,  pressing  the 
rectum  to  the  hollow  of  the  sacrum,  and  if  both  these 
examinations  are  made  at  the  same  time,  we  may 


VAG 


readily  discover  that  the  tumour  is  confined  within  the 
vagina  and  rectum.  Besides  the  knowledge  of  the 
retroversion  which  may  be  gained  by  these  examina- 
tions, it  is  found  to  be  accompanied  with  other  very 
distinguishing  symptoms.  There  is  in  every  case, 
together  with  extreme  pain,  a suppression  of  urine ; 
and  by  the  continuance  of  this  distention  of  the  blad- 
der, the  tumour  formed  by  it  in  the  abdomen  often 
equals  in  size,  and  resembles  in  shape  the  uterus  in 
the  sixth  or  seventh  months  of  pregnancy;  but  it  is 
necessary  to  observe,  that  the  suppression  of  urine  is 
frequently  absolute  only  before  the  retroversion  of  the 
uterus,  or  during  the  time  it  is  retroverted ; for  when 
the  retroversion  is  completed,  there  is  often  a discharge 
of  urine,  so  as  to  prevent  an  increase  of  the  distention 
of  the  bladder,  though  not  in  a sufficient  quantity  to 
remove  it.  There  is  also  an  obstinate  constipation  of 
the  bowels,  produced  by  the  pressure  of  the  retroverted 
uterus  upon  the  rectum,  which  renders  the  injection 
of  a clyster  very  difficult,  or  even  impossible.  But  it 
appears  that  all  the  painful  symptoms  are  chiefly  in 
consequence  of  the  suppression  of  urine;  for  none  of 
those  parts  which  are  apt  to  sympathize  in  affections 
or  diseases  of  the  uterus  are  disturbed  by  its  retrover- 
sion. The  retroversion  of  the  uterus  has  generally 
occurred  about  the  third  month  of  pregnancy,  and 
sometimes  after  delivery  it  may  likewise  happen,  where 
the  uterus  is,  from  any  cause,  enlarged  to  the  size  it 
acquires  about  the  third  month  of  pregnancy,  but  not 
with  such  facility  as  in  the  pregnant  state,  because  the 
enlargement  is  then  chiefly  at  the  fundus.  If  the 
uterus  is  but  little  enlarged,  or  if  it  be  enlarged  beyond 
a certaip  time,  it  cannot  well  be  retroverted  ; for,  in 
the  first  case,  should  the  cause  of  a retroversion  exist, 
the  weight  at  the  fundus  would  be  wanting  to  produce 
it;  and  in  the  latter  the  uterus  would  be  raised  above 
the  projection  of  the  sacrum,  and  supported  by  the 
spine. 

Utrica'ria.  (From  uter,  a bottle : so  called  from 
its  appendages  at  the  end  of  the  leaves  resembling  bot- 


VAG 

ties,  to  contain  water.)  A name  of  the  nepenthes , or 
wonderful  plant. 

UTRI'CULUS.  (Dim.  of  uter,  a bottle  : so  called 
from  its  shape.)  1.  The  womb. 

2.  A little  bladder.  Applied  by  botanists  to  a species 
of  capsule,  which  varies  in  thickness,  never  opens  by 
any  valve,  and  falls  off  with  the  seed.  Sir  J.  Smith 
believes  it  never  contains  more  than  one  seed,  of  which 
it  is  most  commodiously,  in  botanical  language,  called 
an  external  coal,  rather  than  a capsule.  Gartner  ap- 
plies it  to  Chamopodium  and  Clematis  : in  the  tormer 
it  seems  to  be  pellicula  ; in  the  latter,  testa. — Smith. 

U'VA.  ( Uva,  (B,  f. ; Quasi  uvida,  from  its  juice.) 
1.  An  unripe  grape. 

2.  A tumour  on  the  eye  resembling  a grape. 

Uva  gruina.  Crane-berries.  The  berries  of  the 
Oxycoccos  erythrocarpus.  They  are  brought  from  New- 
England,  and  are  reckoned  antiscorbutic. 

Uva  passa  major.  The  raisin.  See  Vitis  vinif era. 

Uva  passa  minor.  The  dried  currant.  See  Vitis 
corinthica. 

Uva  ursi.  Bear’s  whortle-berry.  See  Arbutus  uva 
ursi. 

U'VEA.  (From  uva,  dn  unripe  grape : so  called  be- 
cause, in  beasts,  which  the  ancients  chiefly  dissected, 
it  is  like  an  unripe  grape.)  The  posterior  lamina  of  the 
iris.  See  Choroid  membrane. 

U'VULA,  (Dim.  of  uva , a grape.)  Columella; 
Cion;  Gargareon ; Columna  oris  ; Gurgulio ; Inter- 
septum. The  small  conical  fleshy  substance  hanging 
in  the  middle  of  the  velum  pendulum  palati,  over  the 
root  of  the  tongue.  It  is  composed  of  tha  common 
membrane  of  the  mouth,  and  a small  muscle  resem- 
bling a worm  which  arises  from  the  union  of  the  pala- 
tine bone,  and  descends  to  the  tip  of  the  uvula.  It  was 
called  Palato  staphilinus , by  Douglas,  and  Staphilinus 
epistaphilinus , by  Winslow.  By  its  contraction,  the 
uvula  is  raised  up. 

UVULA'RIA.  (From  uvula;  because  it  cured  dis- 
eases of  the  uvula.)  See  Ruscus  hypoglossum. 


V 


^S/TA'CCA.  The  cow.  See  Milk. 

® VACCA'RIA.  (From  vacca,  a cow ; because  it  is 
coveted  by  cows.)  The  herb  cow’s-basil. 

VACCINATION.  The  insertion  of  the  matter  to 
produce  the  cow-pox.  See  Variola  vaccina. 

VACCINIA.  See  Variola  vaccina. 

VACCI'NIUM.  ( Quasi  baccinium , from  its  berry.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system. 
Class,  Octandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

Vaccinium  myrtillus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  myrtle-berry.  The  berries  which  are  directed  in 
pharmacopoeias  by  the  name  of  baccce  myrtillorum,  are 
the  fruit  of  this  plant.  Prepared  with  vinegar  they 
are  esteemed  as  antiscorbutics,  and  when  dry  possess 
astringent  virtues. 

Vaccinium  oxycoccos.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  cranberry  plant.  Oxycoccos  palustris ; Vaccinia 
palustris;  Vitis  idcea  palustris.  Moor-berry.  Cran- 
berry. These  berries  are  inserted  in  some  pharmaco- 
poeias. They  are  about  the  size  of  our  haws,  and  are 
pleasantly  acid,  and  cooling,  with  which  intention  they 
are  used  medicinally  in  Sweden.  In  this  country  they 
are  mostly  preserved  and  made  into  tarts. 

Vaccinium  vitis  idsa.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  red  whortleberry.  Vitis  idcea.  The  leaves  of  this 
plant,  vaccinium  vitis  idcea , of  Linnasus,  are  so  adstrin- 
gent  as  to  be  used  in  some  places  for  tanning.  They  are 
6aid  to  mitigate  the  pain  attendant  on  calculous  diseases 
when  given  internally  in  the  form  of  decoction.  The 
ripe  berries  abound  with  a grateful  acid  juice;  and  arc 
esteemed  in  Sweden  as  aperient,  antiseptic,  and  refri- 
gerant, and  often  given  in  putrid  diseases. 

VAGI'NA.  Vagina  uteri.  The  canal  which  leads 
from  the  external  orifice  of  the  female  pudendum  to 
the  uterus.  -It  is  somewhat  of  a conical  form,  with  the 
■narrowest  part  downwards,  and  is  described  as  being 
5ve  or  six  inches  in  length,  and  about  two  in  diameter. 
But  it  would  be  more  proper  to  say,  that  it  is  capable 
nf  being  extended  to  those  dimensions ; for  in  its  com- 


mon state,  the  os  uteri  is  seldom  found  to  be  more  than 
three  inches  from  the  external  orifice,  and  the  vagina 
is  contracted  as  well  as  shortened.  The  vagina  is 
composed  of  two  coats,  the  first  or  innermost  of  which 
is  villous,  interspersed  with  many  excretory  ducts,  and 
contracted  into  plicae,  or  small  transverse  folds,  parti- 
cularly at  the  fore  and  back  part,  but,  by  child-bearing, 
these  are  lessened  or  obliterated.  The  second  coat  is 
composed  of  a firm  membrane,  in  which  muscular 
fibres  arc  not  distinctly  observable,  but  which  are  en- 
dowed, to  a certain  degree,  with  contractile  powers 
like  a muscle.  This  is  surrounded  by  cellular  mem- 
brane, which  connects  it  to  the  neighbouring  parts.  A 
portion  of  the  upper  and  posterior  part  of  the  vagina  is 
also  covered  by  the  peritonaeiim.  The  entrance  of  the 
vagina  is  constricted  by  muscular  fibres,  originating 
from  the  rami  of  the  pubis,  which  run  on  each  side  of 
the  pudendum,  surrounding  the  posterior  part,  and 
executing  an  equivalent  office,  though  they  cannot  be 
said  to  form  a true  sphincter. 

The  upper  part  of  the  vagina  is  connected  to  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  os  uteri,  but  not  in  a straight  line, 
so  as  to  render  the  cavity  of  the  uterus  a continuation 
of  that  of  the  vagina.  For  the  latter  stretches  beyond 
the  former,  and,  being  joined  to  the  cervix,  is  reflected 
over  the  os  uteri,  which  by  this  mode  of  union,  is  sus- 
pended with  protuberant  lips  in  the  vagina,  and  per- 
mitted to  change  its  position  in  various  ways  and  direc- 
tions. When,  therefore,  these  parts  are  distended  and 
unfolded  at  the  time  of  labour,  they  are  continued  into 
each  other,  and  there  is  no  part  which  can  be  considered 
as  the  precise  beginning  of  the  uterus  or  termination  of 
the  vagina. 

The  diseases  of  the  vagina  are,  first,  such  an  abbre- 
viation and  contraction  as  render  it  unfit  for  the  uses 
for  which  it  was  designed  : secondly,  a cohesion  of  the 
sides  in  consequence  of  preceding  ulceration  : thirdly, 
cicatrices  after  an  ulceration  of  the  parts ; fourthly,  ex- 
crescences ; fifthly,  fluor  alhus.  This  abbreviation  and 


VAG 


VAL 


contraction  of  the  vagina,  which  usually  accompany 
each  other,  are  produced  by  original  defective  forma- 
tion, and  they  are  seldom  discovered  before  the  time  of 
marriage,  the  consummation  of  which  they  sometimes 
revent.  The  curative  intentions  are  to  relax  the  parts 
y the  use  of  emollient  applications,  and  to  dilate  them 
to  their  proper  size  hy  sponge,  or  other  tents,  or,  which 
are  more  effectual,  by  bougies  gradually  enlarged.  But 
the  circumstances  which  attend  this  disorder,  are  some- 
times such  as  might  lead  us  to  form  an  erroneous  opinion 
of  the  disease.  A case  of  this  kind,  which  was  under 
Dr.  Denman’s  care,  from  the  strangury,  from  the  heat 
of  the  parts,  and  the  profuse  and  inflammatory  dis- 
charge, was  suspected  to  proceed  from  venereal  infec- 
tion ; and  with  that  opinion  the  patient  had  been  put 
upon  a course  of  medicine  composed  of  quicksilver, 
for  several  weeks,  without  relief.  When  she  applied 
to  the  Doctor,  he  prevailed  upon  her  to  submit  to  an 
examination,  and  found  the  vagina  rigid,  so  much  con- 
tracted as  not  to  exceed  half  an  inch  in  diameter,  nor 
more  than  one  inch  arid  a half  in  length.  The  repeated, 
though  fruitless  attempts  which  had  been  made  to  com- 
plete the  act  of  coition,  had  occasioned  a considerable 
inflammation  upon  the  parts,  and  all  the  suspicious 
appearances  before  mentioned.  To  remove  the  inflam- 
mation she  was  bled,  took  some  gentle  purgative  medi- 
cines, used  an  emollient  fomentation,  and  afterward 
some  unctuous  applications  ; she  was  also  advised  to 
live  separate  from  her  husband  for  some  time.  The 
inflammation  being  gone,  tents  of  various  sizes  were 
introduced  into  the  vagina,  by  which  it  was  distended, 
though  not  very  amply.  She  then  returned  to  her  hus- 
band, and  in  a few  months  became  pregnant*  Tier 
labour,  though  slow,  was  not  attended  with  any  extra- 
ordinary difficulty.  She  was  delivered  of  a full-sized 
child,  and  afterward  suffered  no  inconvenience.  An- 
other kind  of  constriction  of  the  external  parts  some- 
times occurs,  and  which  seems  to  be  a mere  spasm. 
By  the  violence  or  long  continuance  of  a labour,  by  the 
morbid  state  of  the  constitution,  or  by  the  negligent  and 
improper  use  of  instruments,  an  inflammation  of  the 
external  parts,  or  vagina,  is  sometimes  produced  in  such 
a degree  as  to  endanger  a mortification.  By  careful 
management  this  consequence  is  usually  prevented  ; 
but  in  some  cases,  when  the  constitution  of  the  patient 
was  prone  to  disease,  the  external  parts  have  sloughed 
away,  and  in  others,  equal  injury  has  been  done  to  the 
vagina.  But  the  effect  of  the  inflammation  is  usually 
confined  to  the  internal  or  villous  coat,  which  is  some- 
times cast  off  wholly  or  partially.  An  ulcerated  sur- 
face being  thus  left,  when  the  disposition  to  heal  has 
taken  place,  cicatrices  have  been  formed  of  different 
kinds,  according  to  the  depth  and  extent  of  the  ulcera- 
tion, and  there  being  no  counteraction  to  the  contrac- 
tile state  of  the  parts,  the  dimensions  of  the  vagina  be- 
come much  reduced,  or,  if  the  ulceration  should  not  be 
healed,  and  the  contractibility  of  the  parts  continue  to 
operate,  the  ulcerated  surfaces,  being  brought  together, 
may  cohere,  and  the  canal  of  the  vagina  be  perfectly 
closed. 

Cicatrices  iri  the  vagina  very  seldom  become  an  im- 
pediment to  the  connexion  between  the  sexes ; when 
they  do,  the  same  kind  of  assistance  is  required  as  was 
recommended  in  the  natural  contraction  or  abbrevia- 
tion of  the  part ; they  always  give  way  to  the  pressure 
of  the  head  of  the  child  in  the  time  of  labour,  though  in 
many  cases  with  great  difficulty.  Sometimes  the 
appearances  may  mislead  the  judgment ; for  the  above 
author  was  called  to  a woman  in  labour,  who  was 
thought  to  have  become  pregnant,  though  the  hymen 
remained  unbroken ; but,  on  making  very  particular 
inquiry,  he  discovered  that  this  was  her  second  labour, 
and  that  the  part,  which,  from  its  form  and  situation 
was  supposed  to  be  the  hymen,  with  a small  aperture, 
was  a cicatrice,  or  unnatural  contraction  of  the  en- 
trance into  the  vagina,  consequent  to  an  ulceration 
of  the  part  after  her  former  labour.  Fungous  ex- 
crescences arising  from  any  part  of  the  vagina  or 
uterus,  have  been  distinguished,  though  not  very  pro- 
perly, by  the  general  term  polypus.  See  Polypus. 

Vagina  of  nerves.  The  outer  covering  of  nerves. 
By  some  it  is  said  to  be  a production  of  the  pia  mater 
only,  and  by  others  of  the  dura  mater,  because  it 
agrees  with  it  in  tenacity,  colour,  and  texture. 

Vagina  of  tendons.  A loose  membranous  sheath, 
formed  by  cellular  membrane,  investing  the  tendons, 
and  containing  an  unctuous  juice,  which  is  secreted  by 


the  vessels  of  its  internal  surface.  Ganglions  ar§ 
nothing  more  than  an  accumulation  of  this  juice. 

VAGINA'LIS  TUNICA.  See  Tunica  vaginalis 

testis. 

VAGINANS.  Sheathing:  applied  to  parts  of  ani- 
mals and  plants,  as  the  tunica  vaginalis  or  testicle  ; to 
leaves  which  sheath  the  stem,  or  each  other,  as  in 
grasses ; and  to  the  leafstalk  of  the  Canna  indica , 
which  surrounds  the  stem  like  a sheath ; hence  pet iolus 
vaginans. 

VAGITUS.  The  cry  of  young  children;  also  the 
distressing  cry  of  persons  under  surgical  operation. 

VA'GUM,  PAR.  See  Par  vagum. 

VALERIAN.  See  Valeriana. 

Valerian , celtic.  See  Valeriana  celtica. 

Valerian,  garden.  See  Valeriana  major , 

Valerian , great.  See  Valeriana  major. 

Valerian , less.  See  Valeriana. 

VALERIA  NA.  (From  Valerius , who  first  par- 
ticularly described  it.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Triandria ; Or- 
der, Monogynia.  Valerian. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  wild  valerian. 
See  Valeriana  officinalis. 

Valeriana  celtica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
JYardus  celtica.  Spica  celtica  dioscoridis.  Celtic 
nard.  The  root  of  this  plant,  a native  of  the  Alps,  has 
been  recommended  as  a stomachic,  carminative,  and 
diuretic.  At  present  it  is  only  used  in  this  country  in 
the  theriaca  and  mithridate,  though  its  sensible  qualities 
promise  somd  considerable  medicinal  powers.  It  has 
a moderately  strong  smell,  and  a warm,  bitterish,  sub- 
acrid  taste. 

Valeriana  locusta.  Album  olus.  Corn"  salad. 
This  is  cultivated  in  our  gardens  for  an  early  salad. 
It  is  a wholesome,  esculent  plant,  generally  aperient 
and  antiscorbutic. 

Valeriana  major.  See  Valeriana  phu. 

Valeriana  minor.  See  Valeriana  officinalis. 

Valeriana  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  Valeriana  minor.  Valeriana  sylvestris ; Leuco 
lachanum.  Officinal  valerian  ; Wild  valerian.  Va- 
leriana—floribus  triandris,  foliis  omnibus  pinnatis,  of 
Linnaeus.  The  root  of  this  plant  has  been  long  extolled 
as  an  efficacious  remedy  in  epilepsy,  which  caused  it 
to  be  exhibited  in  a variety  of  other  complaints  termed 
nervous,  in  which  it  has  been  found  highly  service- 
able. It  is  also  in  very  general  use  as  an  antispas- 
modic,  and  is  exhibited  in  convulsive  hysterical  dis- 
eases. A simple  and  volatile  tincture  are  directed  in 
the  pharmacopoeias. 

Valeriana  phu.  The  systematic  name  of  the  gar- 
den valerian.  Valeriana  major.  The  root  .of  this 
plant  is  said  to  be  efficacious  in  removing  rheumatism, 
especially  sciatica  ; and  also  inveterate  epilepsies. 

Valeriana  sylvestris.  See  Valeriana  officinalis. 

Va'llum.  (From  vallus,  a hedge  stake  : so  called 
from,  the  regular  trench-like  disposition  of  the  hairs.) 
The  eyebrows. 

VALSALVA,  Anton.  Maria,  was  born  at  Imola, 
in  1666,  and  placed  at  a proper  age  under  Malpighi,  at 
Bologna,  where  he  applied  so  closely  as  to  impair  his 
health.  He  took  his  degree  at  the  age  of  twenty-one, 
and  connecting  surgery  with  physic,  acquired  high 
reputation.  He  simplified  the  instruments  in  use, 
banished  the  practice  of  cauterizing  the  arteries  after 
amputation,  and  employed  manual  operations  in  the 
cure  of  deafness.  In  1697,  he  was  chosen  professor  of 
anatomy  in  the  university;  and  under  his  direction 
the  school  acquired  great  celebrity . among  other  dis- 
tinguished pupils  of  his,  Morgagni  must  be  reckoned, 
whose  chief  work,  “De  Sedibus  et  Causis  Morborum,” 
contains  many  dissections  by  Valsalva.  As  he  ad- 
vanced in  life  he  became  corpulent  and  lethargic,  and 
in  1723  was  carried  off  by  an  apoplectic  stroke.  His 
museum  was  bequeathed  to  the  institute  of  Bologna, 
and  his  surgical  instruments  to  the  Hospital  for  In- 
curables. The  principal  of  his  works  is  a treatise,  “De 
Aure  Humana and  after  his  death,  three  of  his  disser- 
tations on  anatomical  subjects  were  printed  by  Morgagni. 

VALVA.  ( Valva ; from  valveo,  to  fold  up.)  A 
thin  and  transparent  membiane  situated  within  cer- 
tain vessels,  as  arteries,  veins,  and  absorbents,  the 
office  of  which  appears  to  be  to  prevent  the  contents 
of  the  vessel  from  flowing  back. 

Valve  of  the  colon.  See  Intestine. 

Valve , semilunar.  See  Semilunar  valves. 


VAR 


VAR 


Valve,  tricuspid.  See  Tricuspid  valves. 

Valve,  triglockin.  See  Tricuspid  valves. 

VA  LVUL  A.  (From  valva,  a valve,  of  which  it  is 
a diminutive.)  A little  valve. 

1.  Applied  to  the  valves  of  the  venal  and  lymphatic 
system  of  animals. 

2.  In  botany,  to  the  parts  or  halves  of  a capsule, 
which  split  open  when  the  seed  is  ripe. 

Valvula  coli.  See  Intestine. 

Valvula  eustachii.  A membranous  semilunar 
valve,  which  separates  the  right  auricle  from  the  in- 
ferior vena  cava,  first  described  by  Eustachius. 

Valvula  mitralis.  See  Mitral  valves. 

Valvula  semilunaris.  See  Semilunar  valves. 

Valvula  triglochinis.  See  Tricuspid  valves. 

Valvula  tulrii.  See  Intestine. 

Valvule  conniventes.  The  semilunar  folds  formed 
of  the  villous  coat  of  the  intestinum  duodenum,  and 
jejunum.  Their  use  appears  to  be  to  increase  the  in- 
ternal surface  of  the  intestines. 

Vanelloic.  See  Epidendrum  vanilla. 

VANILLA.  See  Epidendrum  vanilla. 

VAPORA'RIUM.  (From  vapor , vapour.)  A va- 
pour-bath. 

VAPRECULiE.  The  name  of  an  order  of  plants  in 
Linnaeus’s  Fragments  of  a Natural  Method,  consisting 
of  such  as  are,  and  have  a monophylous  calyx,  like  a 
coloured  corolla. 

Varec.  The  French  name  for  kelp. 

Va'ria.  -(From  varius , changeable.)  The  small- 
pox; also  small  red  pimples  in  the  face. 

VARICE  LLA.  (Dim.  of  varia,  the  small-pox:  so 
called  from  its  being  changeable.)  Variola  lymphatica. 
The  chicken-pox.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class 
Pyrexia:,  and  Order  Exanthemata,  of  Cullen,  known 
by  moderate  synocha,  pimples  bearing  some  resem- 
blance to  the  small-pox,  quickly  forming  pustules, 
which  contain  a fluid  matter,  but  scarcely  purulent, 
and  after  three  or  four  days  from  their  first  appearance, 
desquamate. 

VARICOCE'LE.  (From  varix,  a distended  vein, 
and  KijXrj,  a tumour.)  A swelling  of  the  veins  of  the 
scrotum,  or  spermatic  cord;  hence  it  is  divided  into 
the  scrotal  varicocele,  which  is  known  by  the  appear- 
ance of  livid  and  tumid  veins  on  the  scrotum  ; and 
varicocele  of  the  spermatic  cord,  known  by  feeling 
hard  vermiform  vessels  in  the  course  of  the  spermatic 
cord.  Varicocele  mostly  arises  from  excessive  walk- 
ing, running,  jumping,  wearing  of  trusses,  and  the  like, 
producing  at  first  a slight  uneasiness  in  the  part,  which, 
of not  remedied,  continues  advancing  towards  the  loins. 

VARIEGATUS.  Variegated:  applied  to  an  inter- 
mixture of  colours ; as  in  the  leaves  of  some  plants, 
Mentha  rotundifolia,  &c. 

VARl'OLA.  (From  varius,  changing  colour,  be- 
cause it  disfigures  the  skin.)  The  small  pox.  A genus 
•of  disease  in  the  Class  Pyrexia , and  Order  Exanthe- 
mata, of  Cullen,  distinguished  by  synocha,  eruption  of 
red  pimples  on  the  third  day,  which  on  the  eighth  day 
contain  pus,  and  afterward  drying,  fall  oft’  in  crusts. 

It  is  a disease  of  a very  contagious  nature,  supposed 
to  have  been  introduced  into  Europe  from  Arabia,  and 
in  which  there  arises  a fever,  that  is  succeeded  by  a 
number  of  little  inflammations  in  the  skin,  which 
proceed  to  suppuration,  the  matter  formed  thereby 
being  capable  of  producing  the  disorder  in  another  per- 
son. It  makes  its  attack  on  people  of  all  ages,  but  the 
young  of  both  sexes  are  more  liable  to  it  than  those 
who  are  much  advanced  in  life;  and  it  may  prevail  at 
all  seasons  of  the  year,  but  is  most  prevalent  in  the 
spring  and  summer. 

The  small-pox  is  distinguished  into  the  distinct  and 
confluent,  implying  that  in  the  former  the  eruptions 
are  perfectly  separate  from  each  other,  and  that  in  the 
latter  they  run  much  into  one  another. 

Both  species  are  produced  either  by  breathing  air 
bnpregnated  with  the  effluvia  arisiug  from  the  bodies 
of  those  who  labour  under  the  disease,  or  by  the  intro- 
auction  of  a small  quantity  of  the  variolous  matter 
into  the  habit  of  inoculation  ; and  it  is  probable,  that 
the  difference  of  the  small-pox  is  not  owing  to  any  dif- 
ference in  the  contagion,  but  depends  on  the  state  of 
the  person  to  whom  it  is  applied,  or  on  certain. circum- 
stances concurring  with  the  application  of  it. 

A variety  of  opinions  have  been  entertained  respect- 
ing the  effect  of  the  variolous  infection  on  the  foetus  in 
utcro : a sufficient  number  of  instances,  however,  has 


been  recorded,  to  ascertain  that  the  disease  may  be 
communicated  from  the  mother  to  the  child.  In  some 
cases,  the  body  of  the  child,  at  its  birth,  has  been 
covered  with  pustules,  and  the  nature  of  the  disease 
has  been  most  satisfactorily  ascertained  by  inoculating 
with  matter  taken  from  the  pustules.  In  other  cases, 
there  has  been  no  appearance  of  the  disease  at  the 
birth,  but  an  eruption  and  other  symptoms  of  the  dis- 
ease have  appeared  so  early,  as  to  ascertain  that  the 
infection  must  have  been  received  previously  to  the 
removal  of  the  child  from  the  uterus. 

Four  different  states,  or  stages,  are  to  be  observed  in 
the  small-pox:  first,  the  febrile;  second,  the  eruptive; 
third,  the  maturative;  and  fourth,  that  of  the  declina- 
tion or  scabbing.  When  the  disease  has  arisen  natu- 
rally, and  is  of  the  distinct  kind,  the  eruption  is  com- 
monly preceded  by  a redness  in  the  eyes,  soreness  in 
the  throat,  pains  in  the  head,  back,  and  loins,  weari- 
ness and  faintness,  alternate  fits  of  chilliness  and  heat, 
thirst,  nausea,  inclination  to  vomit,  and  a quick  pulse. 

In  some  instances,  those  symptoms  prevail  in  a high 
degree,  and  in  others  they  are  very  moderate  and  tri- 
fling. In  very  young  children,  startings  and  convul- 
sions are  apt  to  take  place  a short  time  previous  to  the 
appearance  of  the  eruption,  always  giving  great  alarm 
to  those  not  conversant  with  the  frequency  of  the 
occurrence. 

About  the  third  or  fourth  day  from  the  first  seizure, 
the  eruption  shows  itself  in  little  red  spots  on  the  face, 
neck,  and  breast,  and  these  continue  to  increase  in 
number  and  size  for  three  or  four  longer,  at  the  end  of 
which  time  they  are  to  be  observed  dispersed  over 
several  parts  of  the  body. 

If  the  pustules  are  not  very  numerous,  the  febrile 
symptoms  will  generally  go  off  on  the  appearance  of 
the  eruption,  or  then  will  become  very  moderate.  It 
sometimes  happens,  that  a number  of  little  spots  of  an 
erysipelatous  nature  are  interspersed  among  the  pus- 
tules; but  these  generally  go  in  again,  as  soon  as  the 
suppuration  commences,  which  is.  usually  about  the 
fifth  or  sixth  day,  at  which  period,  a small  vesicle,  con- 
taining an  almost  colourless  fluid,  may  be  observed 
upon  the  top  of  each  pimple.  Should  the  pustules  be 
perfectly  distinct  and  separate  from  each  other,  the 
suppuration  will  probably  be  completed  about  the  eighth 
or  ninth  day,  and  they  will  then  be  filled  with  a thick 
yellow  matter;  but  should  they  run  much  into  each 
other,  it  will  not  be  completed  till  some  days  later. 

When  the  pustules  are  very  thick  and  numerous  on 
the  face,  it  is  apt  about  this  time  to  become  much 
swelled,  and  the  eyelids  to  be  closed  up,  previous  to 
which,  there  usually  arises  a hoarseness,  and  difficulty 
of  swallowing,  accompanied  with  a considerable  dis- 
charge of  viscid  saliva.  About  the  eleventh  day,  the 
swelling  of  the  face  usually  subsides,  together  with  the 
affection  of  the  fauces,  and  is  succeeded  by  the  same  in 
the  hands  and  feet,  after  which  the  pustules  break,  and 
discharge  their  contents:  and  then  becoming  diy,  they 
fall  in  crusts,  leaving  the  skin  which  they  covered  of  a 
brown-red  colour,  which  appearance  continues  for 
many  days.  In  those  cases  where  the  pustules  are 
large,  and  are  late  in  becoming  dry  and  falling  off,  they 
are  very  apt  to  leave  pits  behind  them;  but  where  they 
are  small,  suppurate  quickly,  and  are  few  in  number, 
they  neither  leave  any  marks  behind  them,  nor  do  they 
occasion  much  affection  of  the  system. 

In  the  confluent  small  pox,  the  fever  which  precedes 
the  eruption  is  much  more  violent  than  in  the  distinct, 
being  attended  usually  with  great  anxiety,  heat,  thirst, 
nausea,  vomiting,  and  a frequent  and  contracted  pulse, 
and  often  with  coma  or  delirium.  In  infants,  convul- 
sive fits  are  apt  to  occur,  which  either  prove  fatal  before 
any  eruption  appears,  or  they  usher  in  a malignant 
specios  of  the  disease. 

The  eruption  usually  makes  its  appearance  about  the 
third  day,  being  frequently  preceded  or  attended  with 
a rosy  efflorescence,  similar  to  what  takes  place  in  the 
measles;  but  the  fever,  although  it  suffers  some  slight 
remission  on  the  coming  out  of  the  eruption,  does  not 
go  off  as  in  the  distinct  kind ; on  the  contrary,  it  be- 
comes increased  after  the  fifth  or  sixth  day,  and  con- 
tinues considerable  throughout  the  remainder  of  the 
disease. 

As  the  eruption  advances,  the  face,  being  thickly 
, beset  with  pustules,  becomes  very  much  swelled,  the 
eyelids  are  closed  up,  so  as  to  deprive  the  patient  of 
sight,  and  a gentle  salivation  ensues,  which  towards 


VAR 


VAR 


the  eleventh  day,  is  so  viscid  as  to  be  spit  up  with  great 
difficulty.  In  children,  a diarrhoea  usually  attends  this 
stage  of  the  disease  instead  of  a salivation,  which  is  to 
be  met  with  only  in  adults.  The  vesicles  on  the  top  of 
the  pimples  are  to  be  perceived  sooner  in  the  confluent 
small- pox  than  in  the  distinct ; but  they  never  rise  to  an 
eminence  being  usually  flatted  in  ; neither  do  they 
arrive  to  proper  suppuration,  as  the  fluid  contained  in 
them,  instead  of  becoming  yellow,  turns  to  a brown 
colour. 

About  the  tenth  or  eleventh  day,  the  swelling  of  the 
face  usually  subsides,  and  then  the  hands  and  feet 
begin  to  puff  up  and  swell,  and  about  the  same  time 
the  vesicles  break,  and  pour  out  a liquor  that  forms  into 
brown  or  black  crusts,  which,  upon  falling  off,  leave 
deep  pits  behind  them  that  continue  for  life;  and  where 
the  pustules  have  run  much  into  each  other,  they  then 
disfigure  and  scar  the  face  very  considerably. 

Sometimes  it  happenathat  a putrescency  of  the  fluids 
takes  place  at  an  early  period  of  the  disease,  and  shows 
itself  in  livid  spots  interspersed  among  the  pustules,  and 
by  a discharge  of  blood  by  urine,  stool,  and  from  various 
parts  of  the  body. 

In  the  confluent  small-pox,  the  fever  which,  perhaps, 
had  suffered  some  slight  remission  from  the  time  the 
eruption  made  its  appearance  to  that  of  maturation,  is 
often  renewed  with  considerable  violence  at  this  last- 
mentioned  period,  which  is  what  is  called  the  second- 
ary fever,  and  this  is  the  most  dangerous  stage  of  the 
disease.  It  has  been  observed,  even  among  the  vulgar, 
that  the  small-pox  is  apt  to  appear  immediately  before 
or  after  the  prevalence  of  the  measles.  Another  curi- 
ous observation  has  been  made  relating  to  the  symp- 
toms of  these  complaints,  namely,  that  if,  while  a 
patient  labours  under  the  small-pox,  he  is  seized  with 
the  measles,  the  course  of  the  former  is  retarded  till  the 
eruption  of  the  measles  is  finished.  The  measles 
appear,  for  instance,  on  the  second  day  of  the  eruption 
of  small-pox;  the  progress  of  this  ceases,  till  the  mea- 
sles terminate  by  desquamation,  and  then  it  goes  on  in 
the  usual  way.  Several  cases  are,  however,  recorded 
in  the  Medical  and  Physical  Journal,  as  likewise  in  the 
third  volume  of  the  Medical  Commentaries,  in  which 
a concurrence  of  the  small-pox  and  measles  took  place 
without  the  progress  of  the  former  being  retarded.  The 
distinct  small-pox  is  not  attended  with  danger,  except 
when  it  attacks  pregnant  women,  or  approaches  nearly 
in  its  nature  to  that  of  the  confluent ; but  this  last  is 
always  accompanied  with  considerable  risk,  the  degree 
of  which  is  ever  in  proportion  to  the  violence  and  per- 
manence of  the  fever,  the  number  of  pustules  on  the 
face,  and  the  disposition  to  putrescency  which  pre- 
vails. 

When  there  is  a great  tendency  this  way,  the  disease 
usually  proves  fatal  between  the  eighth  and  eleventh 
day,  but,  in  some  cases,  death  is  protracted  to  the  four- 
teenth or  sixteenth.  The  confluent  small-pox,  although 
it  may  not  prove  immediately  mortal,  is  very  apt  to 
induce  various  morbid  affections. 

Both  kinds  of  small  pox  leave  behind  them  a predis- 
position to  inflammatory  complaints,  particularly  to 
opthalmia  and  visceral  inflammations,  but  more  espe- 
cially of  the  thorax ; and  they  not  unfrequently  excite 
scrofula  into  action  which  might  otherwise  have  lain 
dormant  in  the  system. 

The  regular  swelling  of  the  hands  and  feet  upon  that 
of  the  face  subsiding,  and  its  continuance  for  the  due 
time,  may  be  regarded  in  a favourable  light. 

The  dissections  which  have  been  made  of  confluent 
small  pox,  have  never  discovered  any  pustules  inter- 
nally on  the  viscera.  From  them  it  also  appears  that 
variolous  pustules  never  attack  the  cavities  of  the  body, 
except  those  to  which  the  air  has  free  access,  as  the 
nose,  mouth,  trachea,  the  larger  branches  of  the  bron- 
chia, and  the  outermost  part  of  the  meatus  auditorius. 
In  cases  of  prolapsus  ani,  they  likewise  frequently 
attack  that  part  of  the  gut  which  is  exposed  to  the  air. 
They  have  usually  shown  the  same  morbid  appear- 
ances inwardly,  as  are  met  with  in  putrid  fever,  where 
the  disease  has  been  of  the  malignant  kind.  Where 
the  febrile  symptoms  have  run  high,  and  the  head  has 
been  much  affected  with  coma  or  delirium,  the  vessels 
of  the  brain  appear,  on  removing  the  cranium  and 
dura  mater,  more  turgid,  and  filled  with  a darker 
coloured  blood  than  usual,  and  a greater  quantity  of 
serous  fluid  is  found,  particularly  towards  the  base  of 
the  brain.  Under  similar  circumstances,  the  lungs 


have  often  a darker  appearance,  and  their  moisture  ia 
more  copious  than  usual.  When  no  inflammatory 
affection  has  supervened,  they  are  most  usually  sound. 

The  treatment  of  small-pox  will  differ  materially 
according  to  the  species  of  the  disease.  In  the  distinct, 
ushered  in  by  synochal  pyrexia,  it  may  be  occasionally 
proper,  in  persons  of  a middle  age,  good  constitution, 
and  plethoric  habit,  to  begin  by  taking  away  a mode- 
rate quantity  of  blood  ; the  exhibition  of  an  emetic  will 
be  generally  advisable,  provided  there  be  no  material 
tenderness  of  the  stomach ; the  bowels  must  then  be 
cleared,  antimonial  and  other  diaphoretics  employed, 
and  the  antiphlogistic  regimen  strictly  enforced.  It  is 
particularly  useful  in  this  disease  during  the  eruptive 
fever  to  expose  the  patient  freely  to  cold  air,  as  taught 
by  the  celebrated  Sydenham ; and  even  the  cold  affusion 
may  be  proper,  where  there  is  much  heat  and  redness 
of  the  skin,  unless  the  lungs  be  weak.  After  the  erup- 
tion has  come  out,  the  symptoms  are  usually  so  much 
mitigated,  that  little  medical  interference  is  necessary. 
But  the  confluent  small-pox  requires  more  manage- 
ment : after  evacuating  the  primse  vise,  and  employing 
other  means  to  moderate  the  fever  in  the  beginning,  the 
several  remedies  adapted  to  support  the  strength  and 
counteract  the  septic  tendency,  must  be  resorted  to,  as 
the  disease  advances,  such  as  have  been  enumerated 
under  typhus.  The  chief  points  of  difference  are,  that 
bark  may  be  more  freely  given  to  promote  the  process 
of  suppuration,  and  opium  to  relieve  the  irritation  in 
the  skin ; when  the  eruption  has  come  out,  it  will  be 
generally  proper  to  direct  a full  dose  of  this  remedy 
every  night  to  procure  rest,  using  proper  precautions  to 
obviate  its  confining  the  bowels,  or  determining  to  the 
head.  Where  alarming  convulsions  occur  also,  opium 
is  the  medicine  chi  .fly  to  be  relied  upon,  taking  care 
subsequently  to  remove  any  source  of  irritation  from 
the  primai  vise.\  Sometimes  the  tepid-bath  may  be 
useful  under  these  circumstances,  and  favour  the 
appearance  of  the  eruption,  where  the  skin  is  pale  and 
cold,  the  pulse  weak,  &c.  Where  at  a more  advanced 
period  the  pustules  flatten,  and  alarming  symptoms 
follow,  the  most  powerful  cordial  and  antispasmodic 
remedies  must  be  tried,  as  the  confectio  opii,  aether, 
wine,  &c.  For  the  relief  of  the  brain,  or  other  impor- 
tant part,  particularly  affected,  local  means  may  be 
used,  as  in  typhus.  To  prevent  the  eyes  being  injured, 
a cooling  lotion  may  be  applied,  and  blisters  behind  the 
ears,  or  even  leeches  to  the  temples. 

Variola  vaccina.  Vaccinia.  The  cow-pox.  Any 
pustulous  disease  affecting  the  cow,  may  be  called  the 
cow-pox  : whether  it  arises  from  an  over-distention  of 
the  udder,  in  consequence  of  a neglect  in  milking  the 
cow,  or  from  the  sting  of  an  insect,  or  any  other  cawse. 
But  the  species  which  claims  our  particular  attention, 
is  that  which  was  recommended  to  the  world  by  ' Dr. 
Jenner,  in  the  year  1798,  as  a substitute  for  the  small- 
pox. This,  which  originates  from  the  grease  in  the 
horse’s  heel,  is  called  the  genuine  cow-pox ; all  other 
kinds  are  spurious. 

That  the  vaccine  fluid,  fraught  with  such  unspeakable 
benefits  to  mankind,  derives  its  origin  from  this  humble 
source,  however  it  may  mortify  human  pride,  or  me- 
dical vanity,  is  confirmed  by  the  observations  and 
experiments  of  competent  judges.  For  proofs  of  this 
assertion,  the  reader  may  consult  the  works  of  Dr. 
Jenner ; the  Medical  and  Physical  Journal ; and  a 
treatise  on  the  subject  by  Dr.  Loy,  of  which  an  ana- 
lysis is  given  in  the  Annals  of  Medicine  for  the  year 
1801 ; and  Mr.  Ring’s  work  on  this  disease,  which  con- 
tains the  whole  mass  of  evidence  that  has  appeared 
concerning  it. 

The  genuine  cow-pox  appears  on  the  teats  of  the 
cow,  in  the  form  of  vesicles,  of  a blue  colour  approach- 
ing to  livid.  These  vesicles  are  elevated  at  the  mar 
gin,  and  depressed  at  the  centre.  They  a-re  surrounded 
with  inflammation.  The  fluid  they  contain  is  limpid. 
The  animals  are  indisposed;  and  the  secretion  of  milk 
is  lessened.  Solutions  of  the  sulphates  of  zinc  and 
copper  are  a speedy  remedy  for  these  pustules ; other- 
wise they  degenerate  into  ulcers,  which  are  extremely 
troublesome.  It  must,  however,  be  recollected,  that 
much  of  the  obstinacy  attending  these  cases  is  owing 
to  the  friction  of  the  pustules,  in  consequence  of  milk- 
ing. It  is  probable,  that  a solution  of  the  superacetate 
of  lead  would  be  preferable  to  irritating  applications. 

Similar  effects  are  produced  in  the  hands  of  the 
milkers,  attended  .with  febrile  symptoms,  and  some- 


VAR 


VAR 


times  with  tumours  iu  the  axilla.  Other  parts,  where 
the  cuticle  is  abraded,  or  which  are  naturally  destitute 
»f  that  defence,  are  also  liable  to  the  same  affection, 
provided  active  matter  is  applied.  It  even  appears 
that,  in  some  instances,  pustules  have  been  produced 
by  the  application  of  vaccine  virus  to  the  sound  cu- 
ticle. One  case  of  this  kind  may  be  found  in  a letter 
from  Dr.  Fowler,  of  Salisbury,  to  Dr.  Pearson,  pub- 
lished in  the  first  work  of  Dr.  Pearson  on  this  subject. 

The  spurious  cow-pox  is  white  ; and  another  crite- 
rion is,  that  both  in  the  brute  animal  and  in  the  human 
subject,  when  infected  with  the  casual  cow-pox,  the 
sores  occasioned  by  the  genuine  species  are  more  diffi- 
cult to  heal  than  those  which  are  occasioned  by  the 
spurious  kind.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  dis- 
tinguish the  genuine  from  the  spurious  sort,  which  is 
also,  in  some  degree,  infectious ; since  a want  of  such 
discrimination  would  cause  an  idea  of  security  against 
the  small-pox,  which  might  prove  delusive. 

Dr.  Jenner  has  elucidated  one  point  of  the  first  im- 
portance, relative  to  the  genuine  cow-pox  itself.  It 
had  frequently  been  observed,  that  when  this  disorder 
prevailed  in  a farm,  some  qf  the  persons  who  con- 
tracted it  by  milking  were  rendered  insusceptible  of  the 
small-pox,  while  others  continued  liable  to  that  infec- 
tion. This  is  owing  to  the  different  periods  at  which 
the  disease  was  excited  in  the  human  subject;  one 
person,  who  caught  the  disease  while  the  virus  was  in 
an  active  state,  is  rendered  secure  from  variolous  con- 
tagion ; while  another,  who  received  the  infection  of 
the  cow  pox  when  it  had  undergone  a decomposition, 
is  still  susceptible  of  the  small  pox.  This  uncertainty 
of  the  prevention,  the  value  of  which  is  beyond  all 
calculation,  is  probably  the  reason  why  it  was  not 
before  introduced  into  practice. 

From  the  violent  opposition  which  vaccine  inocu- 
lation has  met  with,  in  consequence  of  certain  appa- 
rent failures  in  the  casual  way,  it  may  be  doubted 
whether  the  public  would  ever  have  adopted  the  prac- 
tice, had  not  this  fallacy  been  detected  by  Dr.  Jenn-er. 
To  him  also  we  are  indebted  for  another  discovery  of 
the  first  importance ; namely,  that  the  pustule  excited 
in  the  human  subject  by  vaccine  matter,  yields  a fluid 
of  a similar  nature  with  that  which  was  inserted. 
This  experiment,  so  essential  to  the  general  propaga- 
tion of  the  practice,  and  so  happy  in  its  result,  was 
never  before  .attempted.  It  was  reserved  to  crown  the 
labours  of  Dr.  Jenner. 

A considerable  number  of  instances  are  on  record, 
to  prove  that  farriers  and  others  who  receive  infection 
from  the  heel  of  a horse,  are  either  partly  or  totally 
deprived  of  the  susceptibility  of  the  small  pox.  When 
Dr.  Jenner  first  published  an  account  of  his  discove- 
ries, this  point  was  enveloped  in  some  degree  of  obscu- 
rity. He  then  conceived,  that  the  matter  of  grease 
was  an  imperfect  preservative  against  the  small-pox. 
This  opinion  was  founded  on  the  following  circum- 
stance : It  had  been  remarked,  that  farriers  either 
wholly  escaped  the  small-pox,  or  had  that  distemper 
in  a milder  manner  than  other  people.  This,  however, 
is  easily  reconcileable  to  reason,  if  we  only  suppose, 
that  in  some  cases  the  infection  is  communicated  when 
the  virus  possesses  all  its  prophylactic  virtue ; and  in 
others,  when  its  specific  quality  is  in  some  measure 
lost. 

This  variation  in  the  effects  produced  by  the  virus 
of  the  horse,  inclined  Dr,  Jenner  to  believe  that  it  was 
modified,  and  underwent  some  peculiar  alteration  in 
the  teats  of  the  cow.  He  now  concludes,  that  it  is 
perfect  when  it  excites  the  genuine  disease  in  the  cow ; 
yet  a considerable  advantage  is  derived  from  its  being 
transferred  to  the  latter  animal,  the  nipples  of  which 
furnish  a more  obvious  and  a more  abundant  source 
of  this  inestimable  fluid,  than  its  original  element  the 
horse. 

This  theory,  that  the  preservative  against  variolous 
contagion  is  perfect  when  it  issues  from  the  fountain- 
head, and  comes  immediately  from  the  hands  of  Na- 
ture, is  consonant  with  reason,  and  consistent  with 
analogy.  Thus,  one  obstacle  more  to  the  universal 
adoption  of  the  practice  is  removed. 

Another  point  respecting  vaccine  inoculation,  which 
has  been  much  controverted,  is  the  permanency  of  its 
effect.  Instances  have  been  known  where  persons 
have  escaped  the  small  pox  for  a number  of  years,  and 
yet  have  ultimately  proved  not  insusceptible  of  its  in- 
fection. When  such  persons  had  previously  under-  J 


gone  the  vaccine  disease,  their  apparent  security  was 
erroneously  ascribed  to  that  cause ; but  we  have  not 
even  a shadow  of  proof,  that  the  cow-pox  possesses  in 
the  least  degree  the  property  of  a temporary  prophy- 
lactic, since  it  appears  not  even  to  retard  the  eruption 
of  the  small-pox,  where  previous  infection  has  been 
received. 

By  this  remark,  it  is  not  meant  to  be  asserted,  that 
it  never  supersedes  or  modifies  the  small-pox,  for  we 
have-  great  reason  to  believe  that  such  beneficial  ef- 
fects often  flow  from  vaccination  ; but  where  an  erup- 
tion of  the  small-pox  actually  takes  place  after  vaccine 
inoculation,  the  two  diseases  frequently  co-exist,  with- 
out retarding  each  other  in  the  smallest  degree.  It  is, 
therefore,  contrary  to  all  reason  and  analogy,  to  con- 
sider the  cow-pox  as  a mere  temporary  preservative : 
it  is  nothing  less  than  a perfect  and  permanent  security 
against  that  terrible  disease. 

A number  of  cases  are  recorded  by  Dr.  Jenner,  and 
other  authors,  who  have  written  on  this  subject,  in 
which  persons  who  have  received  the  cow-pox  by 
casual  infection,  twenty,  thirty,  forty,  and  fifty  years 
before,  still  continued  insusceptible  of  variolous  con- 
tagion, in  whatever  form  it  was  applied. 

As  the  cow-pox  destroys  the  susceptibility  of  the 
small-pox,  so  the  small-pox  destroys  that  of  the  cow- 
pox.  To  this  general  rule,  however,  a few  exceptions 
are  said  to  have  occurred.  Certain  it  is,  that  a pustule 
has  now  and  then  been  excited  by  the  insertion  of  vac- 
cine virus,  in  those  who  have  had  the  small-pox,  and 
that  this  pustule  has  bden  known  to  yield  to  the  genu- 
ine virus;  but  it  is  not  equally  certain  that  the  pustule 
has  been  perfect  in  all  respects.  Possibly,  it  may  have 
been  defective  in  point  of  size  or  duration,  in  respect 
to  its  areola,  or  the  limpidity  of  its  contents.  That 
such  a pustule  has,  in  some  instances,  yielded  effectual 
virus,  is  admitted  ; but  this  is  no  more  than  what  has 
often  happened,  in  cases  where  persons  who  have  had 
the  small-pox  are  a second  time  submitted  to  that  infec- 
tion in  the  same  form. 

The  artificial  cow-pox  in  the  human  subject  is  much 
milder  than  the  casual  disease;  and  incomparably 
milder  than  the  small-pox,  even  under  the  form  of 
inoculation.  It  neither  requires  medicine  nor  regimen ; 
it  may  be  practised  at  any  season  of  the  year ; and, 
not  being  infectious  by  effluvia,  one  person  may  be 
inoculated  without  endangering  the  life  of  another. 

This  affection  produces  no  pustulous  eruptions. 
When  such  attend  vaccine  inoculation,  they  are  owing 
to  some  adventitious  cause,  such  as  the  small-pox, 
which  it  is  well  known  may  co-exist  with  the  cow- 
pox.  The  vaccinq  vesicle  is  confined  to  the  parts  where 
matter  is  inserted ; it  is,  therefore,  entirely  a local  and 
an  inoculated  disease.  Nevertheless,  it  is  certain,  that 
eruptions  of  other  kinds,  in  some  instances,  attend 
vaccine  inoculation;  such  as  a nettle-rash,  or  an  erup- 
tion resembling  a tooth-rash,  but  rather  larger  than 
what  is  commonly  called  by  that  name. 

Among  other  singularities  attending  the  cow-pox,  the 
mildness  of  the  disease,  under  the  form  of  inoculation, 
has  been  urged  as  an  argument  against  the  practice, 
the  cause  appearing  to  ordinary  comprehensions,  in- 
adequate to  the  effect.  This,  it  must  be  allowed,  is 
the  best  apology  that  can  be  offered  for  skepticism  on 
that  point;  but  it  will  weigh  but  little  when  put  into 
the  scale  against  actual  observation,  and  incontro- 
vertible fact.  The  efficacy  of  the  cow-pox  as  a safe- 
guard against  the  small-pox,  rests,  perhaps,  on  more 
extensive  evidence,  and  a more  solid  foundation,  than 
any  other  axiom  in  the  whole  circle  of  medical  science. 

That  the  cow-pox  is  not  infectious  by  effluvia,  is 
naturally  concluded  from  its  never  being  communi- 
cated from  one  person  to  another  in  the  dairies;  where 
the  disease  is  casual,  and  appears  under  its  worst  form. 
The  same  inference  may  be  drawn  from  its  never 
spreading  in  a family,  when  only  one  person  is  inocu- 
lated at  a time.  To  confirm  this  proposition  more 
fully,  the  vaccine  pustules  have  been  ruptured,  and 
persons  who  have  never  had  the  disorder  have  been 
suffered  to  inhale  the  effluvia  several  times  a day,  but 
to  no  purpose.  This  is  no  more  than  might  be  ex- 
pected, in  an  affection  where  the  pustulous  appearance 
on  the  surface  of  the  body  is  nearly  local. 

As  to  the  constitutional  indisposition,  it  is  seldom 
considerable,  unless  there  is  a complication  of  this 
with  some  other  distemper;  and  whenever  any  unfa 
vourable  symptoms  appear,  they  may  in  general  be 


VAR 


VAR 


traced  to  some  other  cause.  We  have  indeed  great 
reason  to  believe,  that  no  ill  consequence  ever  arises 
from  the  cow-pox  itself,  unless  from  ignorance  or 
neglect. 

But  notwithstanding  the  symptoms  are  so  mild,  they 
frequently  occur  at  a very  early  period.  A drowsiness, 
which  is  one  of  the  most  common  attendants  of  the 
disease,  is  often  remarked  by  the  parents  themselves, 
within  forty-eight  hours  after  the  matter  is  inserted. 
In  a majority  of  cases,  a slight  increase  of  heat  is  per- 
ceptible, together  with  an  acceleration  of  the  pulse,  and 
other  signs  of  pyrexia  ; but  not  in  such  a degree  as  to 
alarm  the  most  timorous  mother.  Sometimes  the  pa- 
tient is  restless  at  nights ; and  now  and  then  a case  is 
met  with,  in  which  vomiting  occurs,  but  in  many  cases, 
no  constitutional  indisposition  can  be  perceived.  Even 
then,  the  cow-pox  has  never  failed  to  prove  an  effec- 
tual preservative  against  the  small-pox,  provided  the 
pustule  has  been  perfect. 

This  being  the  grand  criterion  of  the  security  of  the 
patient,  too  minute  an  attention  cannot  be  paid  to  its 
rise,  progress,  and  decline.  The  best  mode  of  inocu- 
lating is  by  making  a very  small  oblique  puncture  in 
the  arm,  near  the  insertion  of  the  deltoid  muscle,  with 
the  point  of  a lancet  charged  with  fluid  matter.  In 
order  to  render  infection  more  certain,  the  instrument 
may  be  charged  again,  and  wiped  upon  the  puncture. 

In  places  where  the  patient  is  likely  to  be  exposed  to 
variolous  contagion,  it  is  advisable  to  inoculate  in  more 
places  than  one,  but  unless  there  is  danger  of  catching 
the  small-pox,  it  is  better  not  to  make  more  than  one 
puncture  in  each  arm,  lest  too  much  inflammation 
should  ensue. 

The  vaccine  fluid  may  be  taken  for  inoculation  as 
soon  as  a vesicle  appears ; but  if  the  vesicle  is  punc- 
tured at  a very  early  period,  it  is  more  apt  to  be  injur- 
ed. When  virus  is  wanting  for  inoculating  a consi- 
derable number,  it  is  better  to  let  the  pustule  remain 
untouched,  till  about  the  eighth  day,  by  which  time  it 
has  in  general  acquired  a reasonable  magnitude.  After 
that  day,  if  the  pustule  has  made  the  usual  progress, 
the  matter  begins  to  lose  its  virtue;  but  it  may,  in 
general,  be  used  with  safety,  though  with  less  certainty 
of  producing  infection,  till  the  areola  begins  to  be  ex- 
tensive. 

The  first  sign  of  infection  commonly  appears  on  the 
third  day.  A small  red  spot,  rather  elevated,  may  be 
perceived  at  the  place  where  the  puncture  was  made. 
Sometimes,  however,  the  mark  of  infection  having 
succeeded  is  not  visible  till  a much  later  period.  It 
may  be  retarded,  or  even  entirely  prevented,  by  any 
other  disorder,  such  as  dentition,  or  any  complaint  at- 
tended with  fever,  or  by  extreme  cold.  Another  fre- 
quent cause  of  a slow  progress  in  the  pustule,  or  a total 
failure  of  success,  is  debility.  Sometimes  it  is  impos- 
sible to  discover  any  sign  of  infection  for  above  a fort- 
night. in  this  respect  the  cow-pox  is  subject  to  the 
same  laws,  and  liable  to  the  same  variation,  as  the 
smallpox. 

When  a considerable  inflammation  appears  within 
two  or  three  days  after  inoculation,  there  is  reason  to 
suspect  that  infection  has  not  taken  place  ; and  if  sup- 
puration ensues,  that  suspicion  ought,  in  general,  to 
stand  confirmed.  Now  and  then,  however,  it  happens, 
that  after  the  spurious  pustule,  or  more  properly  speak- 
ing, the  phlegmon,  has  run  its  course,  which  is  within 
a few  days,  a vesicle  begins  to  appear,  bearing  every 
characteristic  of  the  genuine  vaccine  disease,  and 
yielding  a limpid  and  efficient  virus  for  future  inocu- 
lations. In  this  case  the  patient  is  as  perfectly  secured 
from  all  danger  of  the  small-pox,  as  if  no  festering  of 
the  puncture  had  preceded.  The  occurrence  of  such  a 
case,  though  rare,  is  worthy  to  be  recorded ; because 
some  practitioners  have  concluded  a spurious  pustule  to 
be  a certain  proof  of  failure. 

The  areola  commonly  begins  to  be  extensive  on  the 
ninth  day,  and  to  decline  about  the  eleventh  or  twelfth. 
At  this  period  also  the  pustule  begins  to  dry;  the  first 
sign  of  which  is  a brown  spot  in  the  centre.  In  pro- 
portion as  this  increases  the  surrounding  efflorescence 
decreases,  till  at  length  nothing  remains  but  a circular 
scab,  of  a dark-brown  mahogany  colour,  approaching 
to  black.  Sometimes  it  resembles  the  section  of  a 
tamarind-stone ; and  it  often  retains  the  depression  in 
the  centre,  wffiich  characterizes  this  disease  before  ex- 
siccation takes  place. 

Instances  have  been  known,  where  the  vaccine  pus- 


tule, though  regular,  and  perfect  in  all  other  respects, 
has  been  totally  destitute  of  areola;  at  least,  where 
neither  the  medical  practitioner,  on  visiting  the  patient, 
nor  the  attendants,  have  remarked  any  appearance  of 
that  symptom.  In  these  cases,  the  patient  has  proved 
as  insusceptible  of  variolous  infection,  as  if  the  sur- 
rounding efflorescence  had  covered  the  whole  arm.  It 
must,  however,  be  confessed  that  we  have  no  proof  of 
the  non-existence  of  an  areola  in  thes“  cases.  It  might 
have  been  trivial ; it  might  have  been  transient ; yet  it 
might  have  been  effectual.  There  is,  however,  greater 
reason  to  believe,  that  the  surrounding  efflorescence, 
though  usually  a concomitant  circumstance,  is  not  an 
essential  requisite  to  the  vaccine  disease. 

If  by  any  accident  the  vesicle  is  raptured,  suppura- 
tion often  ensues.  In  this  case,  more  attention  than 
ordinary  ought  to  be  paid  to  the  progress,  and  to  all  the 
phenomena  of  the  local  affection  ; both  on  account  of 
the  uncertainty  of  success  in  the  pustule,  as  a pro- 
phylactic, and  the  greater  probability  of  tedious  ulcer- 
ation. 

If  there  is  room  for  the  least  doubt  of  the  sufficiency 
of  the  first  inoculation,  aseconcLought  to  be  performed 
without  delay.  This,  if  unnecessary,  is  seldom  attend- 
ed with  inconvenience,  and  never  with  danger.  Either 
no  effect  is  produced,  or  a slight  festering,  which  termi- 
nates in  a few  days.  An  exception  occurs,  but  rarely, 
where  a spurious,  or  perhaps,  even  a genuine  pustule, 
takes  place,  in  those  persons  who  are  known  to  have 
had  the  cow-pox  or  the  small-pox  already ; but  this 
cannot  be  the  least  cause  of  alarm  to  any  one  who 
knows  the  benign  character  of  the  distemper. 

Various  topical  applications,  both  stimulant  and 
sedative,  have  been  recommended,  in  order  to  allay  the 
violence  of  inflammation.  If  the  operation  for  the  in- 
sertion of  matter  is  not  unnecessarily  severe,  nor  the 
pustule  irritated  by  friction,  or  pressure,  or  other  vio- 
lence, no  such  applications  are  necessary.  Neverthe- 
less, if  either  the  anxiety  ot  the  professional  man,  or 
the  importunity  of  a tender  parent,  should  demand  a 
deviation  from  this  general  rule,  any  of  the  following 
remedies  may  be  had  recourse  to.  The  pustule  may 
be  touched  with  very  diluted  sulphuric  acid ; which 
should  be  permitted  to  remain  on  the  part  half  a mi- 
nute, and  then  be  washed  off  with  a sponge  dipped  in 
cold  water.  This  has  been  ignorantly,  or  artfully, 
called  an  escbarotic;  but  any  one  who  tries  the  appli- 
cation will  soon  discover,  that  its  operation  is  mild  and 
harmless. 

To  avoid  cavil  and  misrepresentation,  it  is  better  to 
apply  a saturnine  lotion  ; compresses,  dipped  in  such  a 
lotion,  may  be  applied  at  any  time  when  inflammation 
runs  high,  and  renewed  as  occasion  requires. 

If  the  pustule  should  chance  to  be  broken,  a drop  of 
the  liquor  plumbi  acetatis,  undiluted,  maybe  applied  as 
an  exsiccant;  but  if  ulceration  threatens  to  become 
obstinate,  or  extensive,  a mild  cataplasm  is  the  best 
resource.  In  case  the  ulceration  is  only  superficial, 
and  not  attended  with  immoderate  inflammation,  a bit 
of  any  adhesive  plaster,  spread  on  linen,  will  prove  the 
most  convenient  dressing,  and  seldom  fail  of  success. 
It  will,  in  general,  be  unnecessary  to  renew  it  oftener 
than  every  other  day. 

These  minute  observations  no  one  will  despise,  un- 
less there  be  any  person  so  ignorant  as  not  to  know  that 
the  care  of  the  arm  is  almost  the  whole  duty  of  the 
medical  practitioner  in  vaccine  inoculation;  and  that 
nothing  disgusts  the  public  so  much  against  the  prac- 
tice, as  a sore  arm,  and  the  ill  consequences  which, 
from  a neglect  of  that  symptom,  too  often  ensue. 

When  fluid  virus  cannot  be  procured,  it  is  necessary 
to  be  cautious  how  it  is  preserved  in  a dry  state.  The 
most  improper  mode  is  that  of  keeping  it  on  a lancet ; 
for  the  metal  quickly  rusts,  and  the  vaccine  matter  be- 
comes decomposed.  This  method,  however,  is  as 
likely  to  succeed  as  any,  when  the  matter  is  not  to  be 
kept  above  two  or  three  days.  If  the  virus  be  taken 
on  glass,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  dilute*  it  much ; 
otherwise  it  will  probably  fail. 

Cotton  thread  is  a very  commodious  vehicle.  If  it  is 
intended  to  be  sent  to  any  considerable  distance,  it  ought 
to  be  repeatedly  dipped  in  the  virus.  No  particular 
caution  is  necessary  with  regard  to  the  exclusion  of 
air  ; nevertheless,  as  it  can  be  done  with  so  little  trou- 
ble, and  is  more  satisfactory  to  those  who  receive  the 
matter,  it  is  better  to  comply  with  the  practice.  On  this 
account,  it  may  be  enclosed  in  a glass  tube,  or  in  4 


VAR 


VAS 


tobacco-pipe  sealed  at  each  end,  or  between  two  square 
bits  of  glass,  which  may,  if  necessary,  be  also  charged 
with  the  matter,  and  wrapped  in  gold-beater’s  skin. 

Nothing  is  more  destructive  to  the  efficacy  of  cow- 
pock  matter  than  heat : on  this  account  it  must  not  be 
dried  near  the  fire,  nor  kept  in  a warm  place.  The 
advantage  of  inserting  it  in  a fluid  state  is  so  great, 
that  it  is  to  be  wished  every  practitioner  would  endea- 
vour to  keep  a constant  supply  for  his  own  use,  by  in- 
oculating his  patients  in  succession,  at  such  periods  as 
are  most  likely  to  answer  that  purpose. 

The  rapidity  with  which  this  practice  now  spreads  in 
various  parts  of  the  globe,  justifies  our  cherishing  a 
hope,  that  it  will  ej-e  long  extinguish  that  most  dreadful 
pestilence,  and  perpetual  bane  of  human  felicity,  the 
small-pox. 

[Dr.  Sylvanus  Fansher,  of  Middletown,  in  Connecti- 
cut, has  devoted  much  time  and  attention  to  vaccina- 
tion ; and,  in  the  following  letter  to  Dr.  Mitchill,  pro- 
poses a method  to  hasten  the  progress  of  the  vaccine 
vesicle. 

“ Middletown , (Conn.)  March , 1828. 

“ Dr.  Mitchill, 

“Sir, — As  you  had  the  honour  of  announcing  the 
happy  tidings  of  the  mild  substitute  for  the  small-pox 
in  America,  and  as  you  once  made  honourable  mention 
of  my  name  relative  to  the  art  of  preserving  the  vaccine 
virus,  I therefore  take  the  liberty  to  trouble  you  with 
the  result  of  a series  of  experiments  to  hasten  the  pro- 
gressive stages  of  the  vaccine  vesicle,  which,  I am  in- 
duced to  believe,  promises  to  the  world  additional  ad- 
vantages from  vaccination. 

“ During  the  earlier  part  of  my  vaccine  practice, 
when  persons  came  to  me,  with  great  concern,  to  know 
whether  it  would  be  too  late  to  vaccinate  a person, 
who  had  been  exposed  to  the  small-pox  a week  or 
more,  and  I have  been  under  the  painful  necessity  of 
expressing  my  fears  that  it  would  be  too  late  ; I have, 
from  past  experience,  often  felt  their  woes , and  sighed 
for  a power  ttfet  seemed  to  be  denied  to  vaccinators  or 
inoculators,  which  was,  to  be  able  to  force  forward  the 
vaccine  process , so  as  to  hasten  the  constitutional  affec- 
tion at  an  earlier  period  than  the  well-known  time  for 
symptoms  in  either  inoculation  or  vaccination. 

“ Having  been  an  eye-witness  of  the  extreme  anguish 
of  two  fine  children  in  1803  and  1804,  who  applied  too 
late  for  vaccination,  I commenced  making  experiments 
to  expedite  vaccination,  by  various  methods  of  insert- 
ing the  virus.  At  length  I found,  that  by  making  broad 
punctures  on  the  body  and  shoulders,  with  active  vac- 
cine virus,  I was  able  to  produce  an  early  pustule,  and 
bring  on  the  symptoms  from  30  to  40  hours  sooner  than 
usual.  And  I am  now  able  to  produce  above  forty  suc- 
cessful experiments  to  accelerate  the  vaccine  process, 
substantiated  by  high  medical  authority.  I write  to 
you,  Sir.  because  your  sagacity  and  discernment  will 
be  the  first  to  discover  the  usefulness  of  tliis  improve- 
ment, and  the  first  to  detect  error. 

“I  have  the  honour  to  be,  &c. 

“ Sylvanus  Fansher.” 

We  may  observe,  from  the  above  letter,  that  Dr.  Fan- 
sher’s  method  of  hastening  the  vaccine  process,  by  in- 
serting the  virus  repeatedly  by  broad  punctures  on  the 
body  and  shoulders,  will  probably  prove  efficacious. 
The  ordinary  mode  of  vaccination  is,  to  introduce  the 
smallest  possible  quantity  of  vaccine  matter  into  the 
puncture;  and  hence  it  frequently  happens,  that  the 
effect  upon  the  constitution  is  so  slight  as  to  be  hardly, 
or  even  not  at  all,  perceptible.  The  consequence  is, 
that  cases  of  varioloid  have  sometimes  occurred  after 
vaccination,  probably  in  cases  in  which  it  had  not  pro- 
duced its  proper  influence  on  the  system,  or  where  that 
influence  was  insufficient.  Dr.  F.’s  method  will,  doubt- 
less, charge  the  system  with  the  genuine  disease,  and 
prevent  the  after  occurrence  of  varioloid,  or  variolus 
(small  pox).  He  thinks,  however,  that  it  will  do  more, 
and  force  the  vaccine  to  outrun  the  small-pox,  where 
exposure  to  infection  has  taken  place.  That  it  may 
do  so,  or  at  least  that  the  effectual  introduction  of  the 
vaccine  may  modify  the  small  pox,  the  following  case, 
which  a medical  friend  has  reported  to  us,  would  seem 
to  prove. 

A child  exposed  to  the  influence  of  the  natural  small- 
pox was  vaccinated,  and  four  days  after,  the  operation 
was  repeated.  On  the  eighth  day  from  the  first  vacci- 
nation no  appearance  was  observed  of  the  progress  of 
the  kine-pock.  Further  vaccination  was  then  con- 


sidered unnecessary  and  too  late , and  the  parents  wet« 
advised  to  have  the  child  inoculated  with  the  small- 
pox,  which  was  preferable  to  having  it  in  the  natural 
way.  Matter  was  taken  from  the  brother,  who  had 
the  small-pox  very  badly  in  the  adjoining  room,  and 
inserted  in  the  arm,  near  where  the  vaccine  matter  had 
been  inserted.  The  pock  rose  on  Ute  arm,  and  to  the 
surprise  of  the  physician,  the  vaccine  vesicle  also  rose, 
and  they  progressed  together,  modifying  each  other. 
The  vaccine  pock  was  smaller  than  usual,  and  went 
through  its  stages  sooner  than  is  common,  though  it 
had  previously  laid  dormant,  and  appeared  to  have 
been  put  into  activity  by  the  small-pox.  The  small- 
pox was  also  modified,  the  pock  were  few,  the  sickness 
trifling,  the  confinement  nothing  ; and  the  child  reco- 
vered before  his  brother,  who  was  first  taken.  A.] 

Va'rius.  (From  varus,  unequal : so  called  from  the 
irregularity  of  ils  shape.)  The  cuboid  bone  was  for- 
merly called  os  varium,  from  its  irregular  shape. 

VA'RIX.  (From  varus,  i.  e.  obtortus.)  A dilata- 
tion of  a vein.  A genus  of  disease  in  the  Class  Lo- 
cales, and  Order  Tumores , of  Cullen  ; known  by  a soft 
tumour  on  a vein  which,  does  not  pulsate.  Varicose 
veins  mostly  become  serpentine,  and  often  form  a 
plexus  of  knots,  especially  in  the  groins  and  scrotum. 

VAROLI,  Costanzo,  was  born  at  Bologna,  in  1542, 
and  became  a professor  of  physic  and  surgery  in  his 
native  city.  At  thirty,  he  was  invited  by  Pope  Gregory 
XIII.  to  settle  at  Rome  as  his  first  physician,  and  pro- 
fessor in  the  College  of  Sapienza.  He  was  advancing 
in  reputation  by  his  anatomical  discoveries,  as  well  as 
in  his  practice,  when  a premature  death  cut  him  off  in 
1573.  He  was  particularly  distinguished  in  the  Ana- 
tomy of  the  Brain,  which  he  described  in  his  Work 
“ De  Nervis  Opticis,  &c. and  among  the  parts  disco- 
vered, or  more  accurately  demonstrated  by  him,  was 
that  formed  by  the  union  of  the  crura  cerebri,  and  cere- 
belli,  which  has  been  since  called  the  Pons  Varolii,  and 
which  gives  origin  to  several  nerves.  After  his  death, 
was  published  “ De  Resolutione  Corporis  Humani,”  an 
anatomical  compendium,  chiefly  according  to  the  an 
cients,  but  with  several  new  observations. 

Va'rus.  See  Jonthus. 

VAS.  ( Vas , vasis,  n.;  from  vasum:  hence  in  the 
plural,  vasa,  orum ; a vescendo,  because  they  con- 
vey drink.)  A vessel:  applied  to  arteries,  veins, 
ducts,  &c. 

Vas  deferens.  A duct  which  arises  from  the  epi- 
didymis, and  passes  through  the  inguinal  ring  in  the 
spermatic  cord  into  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis,  and  termi- 
nates in  the  vesicula  seminalis.  Its  use  is  to  convey 
the  semen  secreted  in  the  testicle,  and  brought  to  it  by 
the  epididymis  into  the  vesicula  seminalis. 

Va'sa  brevia.  The  arteries  which  come  from  the 
spleen,  and  run  along  the  large  arch  of  the  stomach  to 
the  diaphragm. 

Vasa  vorticosa.  The  contorted  vessels  of  the  cho- 
roid membrane  of  the  eye. 

VA'STUS.  (So  called  frofn  its  size.)  A name  given 
only  to  some  muscles. 

Vastus  externus.  A large,  thick,  and  fleshy  mus- 
cle, situated  on  the  outer  side  of  the  thigh : it  arises  by 
a broad  thick  tendon,  from  the  lower  and  anterior  part 
of  the  great  trochanter,  and  upper  part  of  the  linea 
aspera ; it  likewise  adheres  by  fleshy  fibres,  to  the  whole 
outer  edge  of  that  rough  line.  Its  fibres  descend  ob- 
liquely forwards,  and  after  it  has  run  four  or  five  inches 
downwards,  we  find  it  adhering  to  the  anteriof  surface 
and  outer  side  of  the  cruraeus,  with  which  it  continues 
to  be  connected  to  the  lower  part  of  the  thigh,  where 
we  see  it  terminating  in  a broad  tendon,  which  is  in- 
serted into  the  upper  part  of  the  patella  laterally,  and 
it  sends  off  an  aponeurosis  that  adheres  to  the  head  of 
the  tibia,  and  is  continued  down  the  leg. 

Vastus  internus.  This  muscle,  which  is  less  con 
siderable  than  the  vastus  externus,  is  situated  at  the 
inner  side  of  the  thigh,  being  separated  from  the  pre- 
ceding by  the  rectus. 

It  arises  tendinous  and  fleshy  from  between  the  fore 
part  of  the  os  femoris,  and  the  root  of  the  less  tro- 
chanter, below  the  insertion  of  the  psoas  magnus,  and 
the  iliacus  internus  ; and  from  all  the  inner  side  of  the 
linea  aspera.  Like  the  vastus  externus  it  is  connected 
with  tne  cruraeus,  but  it  continues  longer  fleshy  than 
that  muscle.  A little  above  the  knee  we  see  its  outer 
edge  uniting  with  the  inner  edge  of  the  rectus,  after 
which  it  is  inserted  tendinous  into  the  upper  part  and 


VEG 


VEG 


Inner  side  of  the  patella,  sending  off  an  aponeurosis 
Which  adheres  to  the  upper  part  of  the  tibia. 

VEGETABLE.  Vegetabilis.  One  of  the  three  great 
divisions  of  nature.  The  most  obvious  difference  be- 
tween vegetables  and  animals  is,  that  the  latter  are,  in 
general,  capable  of  conveying  themselves  from  place  to 
place;  whereas  vegetables,  being  fixed  in  the  same 
place,  absorb,  by  means  of  their  roots  and  leaves,  such 
support  as  is  within  their  reach. 

The  nutrition  or  support  of  plants  appears  to  require 
water,  earth,  light,  and  air.  There  are  various  experi- 
ments which  have  been  instituted  to  show,  that  water 
is  the  only  aliment  which  the  root  draws  from  the  earth. 
Van  Helmont  planted  a willow,  weighing  fifty  pounds, 
in  a certain  quantity  of  earth  covered  with  sheet-lead  ; 
he  watered  it  for  five  years  with  distilled  water ; and 
at  the  end  of  that  time  the  tree  weighed  one  hundred 
and  sixty-nine  pounds  three  ounces,  and  the  earth  in 
which  it  had  vegetated  was  found  to  have  suffered  a 
loss  of  no  more  than  three  ounces.  Boyle  repeated  the 
same  experiment  upon  a plant,  which  at  the  end  of  two 
years  weighed  fourteen  pounds  more,  without  the  earth 
in  which  it  had  vegetated  having  lost  any  perceptible 
portion  of  its  weight. 

Duhamel  and  Bonnet  supported  plants  with  moss, 
and  fed  them  with  mere  water : they  observed,  that 
the  vegetation  was  of  the  most  vigorous  kind;  and  the 
naturalist  of  Geneva  observes,  that  the  flowers  were 
more  odoriferous,  and  the  fruit  of  a higher  flavour. 
Care  was  taken  to  change  the  supports  before  they 
could  suffer  any  alteration.  Tillet  has  likewise  raised 
plants,  more  especially  of  the  gramineous  kind,  in  a 
similar  manner,  with  this  difference  only,  that  his  sup- 
ports were  pounded  glass,  or  quartz  in  powder.  Hales 
has  observed,  that  a plant,  which  weighed  three  pounds, 
gained  three  ounces  after  a heavy  dew.  Do  we  not 
every  day  observe  hyacinths  and  other  bulbous  plants, 
as  well  as  gramineous  plants,  raised  in  saucers  or  bot- 
tles containing  mere  water  1 And  Braconnot  has  lately 
found  mustard-seed  to  germinate,  grow,  and  produce 
plants,  that  came  to  maturity,  flowered,  and  ripened 
their  seed,  in  litharge,  flowers  of  sulphur,  and  very 
small  unglazed  shot.  The  last  appeared  least  favoura- 
ble to  the  growth  of  the  plants,  apparently  because  their 
roots  could  not  penetrate  between  it  so  easily. 

All  plants  do  not  demand  the  same  quantity  of  water ; 
and  nature  has  varied  the  organs  of  the  several  indi- 
viduals conformably  to  the  necessity  of  their  being  sup- 
plied with  this  food.  Plants  which  transpire  little, 
such  as  the  mosses  and  the  lichens,  have  no  need  of  a 
considerable  quantity  of  this  fluid;  and  accordingly 
they  are  fixed  upon  dry  rocks,  and  have  scarcely  any 
roots ; but  plants  which  require  a larger  quantity,  have 
roots  which  extend  to  a great  distance,  and  absorb 
humidity  throughout  their  whole  surface. 

The  leaves  of  plants  have  likewise  the  property  of 
absorbing  water,  and  of  extracting  from  the  atmosphere 
the  same  principle  which  the  root  draws  from  the 
earth.  But  plants  which  live  in  the  water,  and  as  it 
were  swim  in  the  element  which  serves  them  for  food, 
have  no  need  of  roots;  they  receive  the  fluid  at  all 
their  pores ; and  we  accordingly  find,  that  the  fucus, 
the  ulva,  &c.  have  no  roots  whatever. 

The  dung  which  is  mixed  with  earths,  and  decom- 
posed, not  only  affords  the  alimentary  principles  we 
nave  spoken  of,  but  likewise  favours  the  growth  of  the 
plant  by  that  constant  and  steady  heat  which  its  ul- 
terior decomposition  produces.  Thus  it  is  that  Fa- 
broni  affirms  his  having  observed  the  developement  of 
leaves  and  flowers  in  that  part  of  the  tree  only,  which 
was  in  the  vicinity  of  a heap  of  dung, 
i From  the  preceding  circumstances  it  appears,  that 
the  influence  of  the  earth  in  vegetation  is  almost  totally 
confined  to  the  conveyance  of  water,  and  probably 
the  elastic  products  from  putrefying  substances,  to  the 
plant. 

Vegetables  cannot  live  without  air.  From  the  ex- 
periments of  Priestley,  Ingenhousz,  and  Sennebier,  it 
is  ascertained,  that  piants  absorb  the  azotic  part  of  the 
atmosphere ; and  this  principle  appears  to  be  the  cause 
of  the  fertility  which  arises  from  the  use  of  putrefying 
matters  in  the  form  of  manure.  The  carbonic  acid  is 
likewise  absorbed  by  vegetables,  when  its  quantity  is 
small.  If  in  large  quantity,  it  is  fatal  to  them. 

Chaptal  has  observed,  that  carbonic  acid  predomi- 
nates in  the  fungus,  and  other  subterraneous  plants. 
But,  by  causing  these  vegetables,  together  with  the  j 


body  upon  which  they  were  fixed,  to  pass,  by  imper- 
ceptible gradations,  from  an  almost  absolute  darkness, 
into  the  light,  the  acid  very  nearly  disappeared ; the 
vegetable  fibres  being  proportionally  increased,  at  the 
same  time  that  the  resin  and  colouring  principles  were 
developed,  which  he  ascribes  to  the  oxygen  of  the 
same  acid.  Sennebier  has  observed,  that  the  plants 
which  he  watered  with  water  impregnated  with  car- 
bonic acid,  transpired  an  extraordinary  quantity  of 
oxygen,  which  likewise  indicates  a.  decomposition  of 
the  acid. 

Light  is  almost  absolutely  necessary  to  plants.  In 
the  dark,  they  grow  pale,  languish,  and  die.  The  ten- 
dency of  plants  towards  the  light  is  remarkably  seen  in 
such  vegetation  as  is  effected  in  a chamber  or  place 
where  the  light  is  admitted  on  one  side ; for  the  plant 
never  fails  to  grow  in  that  direction.  Whether  the 
matter  of  light  be  condensed  into  the  substance  of 
plants,  or  whether  it  act  merely  as  a stimulus  or  agent, 
without  which  the  other  requisite  chemical  processes 
cannot  be  effected,  is  uncertain. 

It  is  ascertained,  that  the  processes  in  plants  serve, 
like  those  in  animals,  to  produce  a more  equable 
temperature,  which  is  for  the  most  part  above  that  of 
the  atmosphere.  Dr.  Hunter,  quoted  by  Chaptal,  ob- 
served, by  keeping  a $bermometer  plunged  in  a hole 
made  in  a sound  tree,  that  it  constantly  indicated  a 
temperature  several  degrees  above  that  of  the  atmos- 
phere, when  it  was  below  the  fifty-sixth  division  of 
Fahrenheit;  whereas  the  vegetable  heat,  in  hotter 
weather,  was  always  several  degrees  below  that  of 
the  atmosphere.  The  same  philosopher  has  likewise 
observed,  that  the  sap  which,  out  of  the  tree,  would 
freeze  at  32°,  did  not  freeze  in  the  tree  unless  the  cold 
were  augmented  15°  mpre. 

The  vegetable  heat  may  increase  or  diminish  by 
several  causes,  of  the  nature  of  disease  ; and  it  may 
even  become  perceptible  to  the  touch  in  very  cold 
weather,  according  to  Buffon. 

The  principles  of  which  vegetables  are  composed, 
if  we  pursue  their  analysis  as  far  as  our  means  have 
hitherto  allowed,  are  chiefly  carbon,  hydrogen,  and 
oxygen.  Nitrogen  is  a constituent  principle  of  several, 
but  "for  the  most  part  in  small  quantity.  Potassa, 
soda,  lime,  magnesia,  silex,  alumina,  sulphur,  phos- 
phorus, iron,  manganese,  and  muriatic  acid,  have 
likewise  been  reckoned  in  the  number ; but  some  of 
these  occur  only  occasionally,  and  chiefly  in  very 
small  quantities  ; and  are  scarcely  more  entitled  to  be 
considered  as  belonging  to  them  than  gold,  or  some 
other  substances,  that  have  been  occasionally  pro- 
cured from  their  decomposition. 

The  following  are  the  principal  products  of  vegeta- 
tion : — 

1.  Sugar..  Crystallizes.  Soluble  in  water  and  alko- 
hol.  Taste  sweet.  Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields 
oxalic  acid. 

2.  Sarcocol.  Does  not  crystallize.  Soluble  in  water 
and  alkohol.  Taste  bitter  sweet.  Soluble  in  nitric 
acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

3 . Asp ar agin.  Crystallizes.  Taste  cooling  and  nau- 
seous. Soluble  in  hot  water.  Insoluble  in  alkohol. 
Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  converted  into  bitter  princi- 
ple and  artificial  tannin. 

4.  Gum • Does  not  crystallize.  Taste  insipid.  So- 
luble in  water,  and  forms  mucilage.  Insoluble  in 
alkohol.  Precipitated  by  silicated  potassa.  Solubleir 
nitric  acid,  and  forms  mucous  and  oxalic  acids. 

5.  Ulmin.  Does  not  crystallize.  Taste  insipid 
Soluble  in  water,  and  does  not  form  mucilage.  Pre- 
cipitated by  nitric  and  oxymnriatic  acids  in  the  state 
of  resin.  Insoluble  in  alkohol. 

6.  Inulin  A white  powder.  Insoluble  in  cold 
water.  Soluble  in  boiling  water:  but  precipitates  un- 
altered after  the  solution  cools.  Insoluble  in  alkohol 
Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

7.  Starch.  A white  powder.  Taste  insipid.  Inso 
luble  in  cold  water.  Soluble  in  hot  water;  opaque 
and  glutinous.  Precipitated  by  an  infusion  of  nutitalls ; 
precipitate  redissolved  bv  a heat  of  120°.  Insoluble 
in  alkohol.  Soluble  in  dilute  nitric  acid,  and  precipi- 
tated by  alkohol.  With  nitric  acid  yields  oxalic  acid 
and  a waxy  matter. 

8.  Indigo.  A blue  powder.  Taste  insipid.  Inso- 
luble in  water,  alkohol,  tether.  Soluble  in  sulphuric 
acid.  Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  converted  into  bitter 

i principle  and  artificial  tannin. 


VEI 


VEI 


9.  Oluten.  Forms  a ductile  elastic  mass  with  water. 
Partially  soluble  in  water;  precipitated  by  infusion  of 
nutgalls  and  oxygenized  muriatic  acid.  Soluble  in 
aoetic  acid  and  muriatic  acid.  Insoluble  in  alkohol. 
By  fermentation  becomes  viscid  and  adhesive,  and 
then  assumes  the  properties  of  cheese.  Soluble  in 
nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

10.  Albumen.  Soluble  in  cold  water.  Coagulated 
by  heat,  and  becomes  insoluble.  Insoluble  in  alkohol. 
Precipitated  by  infusion  of.nutgalls.  Soluble  in  nitric 
acid.  Soon  putrefies. 

11.  Fibrin.  Tasteless.  Insoluble  in  water  and 
alkohol  Soluble  in  diluted  alkalies,  and  in  nitric  acid. 
Soon  putrefies. 

12  Gelatin.  Insipid.  Soluble  in  water.  Does  not 
coagulate  when  heated.  Precipitated  by  infusion  of 
galls. 

13.  Bitter  principle.  Colour  yellow  or  brown. 
Taste  bitter.  Equally  soluble  in  water  and  alkohol. 
Soluble  in  nitric  acid.  Precipitated  by  nitrate  of  silver. 

14.  Extractive.  Soluble  in  water  and  alkohol.  In- 
soluble in  aether.  Precipitated  by  oxygenized  muriatic 
acid,  muriate  of  tin,  and  muriate  of  alumina  ; but  not 
by  gelatin.  Dyes  fawn  colour. 

15.  Tannin.  Taste  astringent.  Soluble  in  water 
and  in  alkohol  of  0.810.  Precipitated  by  gelatin,  mu- 
riate of  alumina,  and  muriate  of  tin. 

16.  Fixed  oils.  No  smell.  Insoluble  in  water  and 
alkohol.  Forms  soaps  with  alkalies.  Coagulated  by 
earthy  and  metallic  salts. 

17.  Wax.  Insoluble  in  water.  Soluble  in  alkohol, 
aether,  and  oils.  Forms  soap  with  alkalies.  Fusible. 

18.  Volatile  oil.  Strong  smell.  Insoluble  in  water. 
Soluble  in  alkohol.  Liquid.  Volatile.  Oily.  By 
nitric  acid  inflamed,  ancf  converted  into  resinous  sub- 
stances. 

19.  Camphor.  Strong  odour.  Crystallizes.  Very 
little  soluble  in  water.  Soluble  in  alkohol,  oils,  acids. 
Insoluble  in  alkalies.  Burns  with  a clear  flame,  and 
volatilizes  before  melting. 

20.  Birdlime.  Viscid.  Taste  insipid.  Insoluble  in 
water.  Partially  soluble  in  alkohol.  Very  soluble  in 
tether.  Solution  green. 

21.  Resins.  Solid.  Melt  when  heated.  Insoluble 
in  water.  Soluble  in  alkohol,  tether,  and  alkalies. 
Soluble  in  acetic  acid.  By  nitric  acid  converted  into 
artificial  tannin. 

22.  Ghtai.acum.  Possesses  the  characters  of  resins  ; 
but  dissolves  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid  and 
no  tannin. 

23.  Balsams.  Possess  the  characters  of  the  resins, 
but  have  a strong  smell ; when  heated,  benzoic  acid 
sublimes.  It  sublimes  also  when  they  are  dissolved  in 
sulphuric  acid.  By  nitric  acid  converted  into  artificial 
tannin. 

24.  Caoutchouc.  Very  elastic.  Insoluble  in  water 
and  alkohol.  When  steeped  in  aether,  reduced  to  a 
pulp,  which  adheres  to  ever^  thing.  Fusible  and 
remains  liquid.  Very  combustible. 

i 25.  Gum  resins.  Form  milky  solutions  with  water, 
transparent  with  alkohol.  Soluble  in  alkalies.  With 
nitric  acid  converted  into  tannin.  Strong  smell.  Brit- 
tle, opaque,  infusible. 

26.  Cotton.  Composed  of  fibres.  Tasteless.  Very 
combustible.  Insoluble  in  water,  alkohol,  and  aether. 
Soluble  in  alkalies.  Yields  oxalic  acid  to  nitric  acid. 

“ 27.  Suber.  Burns  bright,  and  swells.  Converted  by 
nitric  acid  into  suberic  acid  and  wax.  Partially  soluble 
in  water  and  alkohol. 

28.  Wood.  Composed  of  fibres.  Tasteless.  Inso- 
luble in  water  and  alkohol.  Soluble  in  weak  alkaline 
lixivium.  Precipitated  by  acids.  Leaves  much  char- 
coal when  distilled  in  a red  heat.  Soluble  in  nitric 
acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

To  the  preceding  we  may  add,  emetin,  fungin, 
hematin,  nicotin,  pollenin ; the  new  vegetable  alkalies, 
aconita,  atropia,  brucia,  cicuta,  datura,  delphia,  hyos- 
ciama,  morphia,  picrotoxia,  strychnia,  veratria;  and 
the  various  vegetable  acids. 

Veil  of  mosses.  See  Colyptra. 

VEIN.  Vena.  A long  membranous  canal,  which 
continually  becomes  wider,  does  not  pulsate,  and 
returns  the  blood  from  the  arteries  to  the  heart.  All 
veins  originate  from  the  extremities  of  arteries  only, 
by  anastomosis,  and  terminate  in  the  auricles  of  the 
heart;  e.  g.  the  venae  cava:  in  the  right,  and  the  pul- 
monary vei  s in  the  left  auricle.  They  are  composed, 


like  arteries,  of  three  tunics,  or  coats,  which  are  much 
more  slender  than  in  the  arteries,  and  are  supplied 
internally  with  semilunar  membranes,  or  folds,  called 
valves.  Their  use  is  to  return  the  blood  to  the  heart. 

The  blood  is  returned  from  every  part  of  the  body, 
except  the  lungs,  into  the  right  auricle,  from  three 
sources: 

1.  The  vena  cava  superior , which  brings  it  from  the 
head,  neck,  thorax,  and  superior  extremities. 

2.  The  vena  cava  inferior , from  the  abdomen  and 
inferior  extremities. 

3.  The  coronary  vein  receives  it  from  the  coronary 
arteries  of  the  heart. 

1.  The  vena  cava  superior.  This  vein  terminates 
in  the  superior  part  of  the  right  auricle,  into  which  it 
evacuates  the  blood,  from  the  right  and  left  subclavian 
vem,  and  the  vena  azygos.  The  right  and  left  sub- 
clavian veins  receive  the  blood  from  the  head  and 
upper  extremities,  in  the  following  manner.  The  veins 
of  the  fingers,  called  digitals , receive  the  blood  from 
the  digital  arteries,  and  empty  it  into, 

The  cephalic  of  the  thumb,  which  runs  on  the  back 
of  the  hand  along  the  thumb,  and  evacuates  itself  into 
the  external  radial. 

The  saloatella,  which  runs  along  the  little  finger, 
unites  with  the  former,  and  empties  its  blood  into  the 
internal  and  external  cubital  veins.  At  the  bend  of 
the  forearm  are  three  veins,  called  the  great  cephalic, 
the  basilic,  and  the  median. 

The  great  cephalic  runs  along  the  superior  part  of  the 
forearm,  and  receives  the  blood  from  the  external  radial. 

The  basilic  ascends  on  the  underside,  and  receives 
the  blood  from  the  external  and  internal  cubital  veins , 
and  some  branches  which  accompany  the  brachial 
artery,  called  venue  satellites. 

The  median  is  situated  in  the  middle  of  the  forearm, 
and  arises  from  the  union  of  several  branches.  These 
three  veins  all  unite  above  the  bend  of  the  arm,  and 
form, 

The  brachial  vein,  which  receives  all  their  blood, 
and  is  continued  into  the  axilla,  where  it  is  called, 

The  axillary  vein.  This  receives  also  the  blood 
from  the  scapula,  and  superior  and  inferior  parts  of 
the  chest,  by  the  superior  and  inferior  thoracic  vein , 
the  vena  muscularis,  and  the  scapularis. 

The  axillary  vein  then  passes  under  the  clavicle, 
where  it  is  called  the  subclavian,  which  unites  with 
the  external  and  internal  jugular  veins,  and  the  verte 
bral  vein  which  brings  the  blood  from  the  verteba! 
sinuses ; it  receives  also  the  blood  from  the  medias- 
tinal, pericardiac,  diaphragmatic,  thymic,  internal 
mammary,  and  laryngeal  veins,  and  then  unites  with 
its  fellow,  to  form  the  vena  cava  superior,  or,  as  it  is 
sometimes  called,  vena  cava  descendens. 

The  blood  from  the  external  and  internal  parts  of 
the  head  and  face  is  returned  in  the  following  manner 
into  the  external  and  internal  jugulars,  which  term! 
nate  in  the  subclavians. 

The  frontal,  angular,  temporal , auricular,  sublin- 
gual, and  'occipital  veins,  receive  the  blood  from  the 
parts  after  which  they  are  named  ; these  all  converge 
to  each  side  of  the  neck,  and  form  a trunk,  called  the 
external  jugular  vein. 

The  blood  from  the  brain,  cerebellum,  medulla  oblon 
gata,  and  membranes  of  these  parts,  is  received  into  the 
lateral  sinuses,  or  vein  of  the  dura  mater,  one  of  which 
empties  its  blood  through  the  foramen  lacerum  in  basi 
cranii  on  each  side  into  the  internal  jugular,  which 
descends  in  the  neck  by  the  carotid  arteries,  receives 
the  blood  front  the  thyroideal  and  internal  maxillary 
veins , and  empties  itself  into  the  subclavians  within 
the  thorax. 

The  vena  azygos  receives  the  blood  from  the  bron- 
chial, superior  oesophageal , vertebral,  and  intercostal 
veins,  and  empties  it  into  the  superior  cava. 

2.  Vena  cava  inferior.  The  vena  cava  inferior  is 
the  trunk  of  all  the  abdominal  veins  and  those  of  the 
lower  extremities,  from  which  parts  the  blood  is 
returned  in  the  following  manner.  The  veins  of  the 
toes,  called  the  digital  veins,  receive  the  blood  from 
the  digital  arteries,  and  form  on  the  back  of  the  foot 
three  branches,  one  on  the  great  toe,  called  the  cephalic . 
another  which  runs  along  the  little  toe,  called  the  vena 
saphena,  and  a third  on  the  back  of  the  foot,  vena 
dorsalis  pedis ; and  those  on  the  sole  of  the  foot 
evacuate  themselves  into  the  plantar  veins. 

| ^.The  three  veins  on  the  upper  part  of  the  foot  coming 


VEN 


VER 


together  above  the  ankle,  form  the  anterior  tibial ; and  1 
the  plantar  veins  with  a branch  from  the  calf  of  the  | 
leg,  called  the  sural  vein,  from  the  posterior  tibial ; | 
a branch  also  ascends  in  the  direction  of  the  fibula, 
called  the  peroneal  vein.  These  three  branches  unite 
before  the  ham,  into  one  branch,  the  subpopliteal  vein , 
which  ascends  through  the  ham,  carrying  all  the  blood 
from  the  foot:  it  then  proceeds  upon  the  anterior  part 
of  the  thigh,  where  it  is  termed  the  crural  or  femoral 
vein , receives  several  muscular  branches,  and  passes 
under  Poupart’s  ligament  into  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis, 
where  it  is  called  the  external  iliac. 

The  arteries  which  are  distributed  about  the  pelvis 
evacuate  their  blood  into  the  external  hemorrhoidal 
veins , the  hypogastric  veins , the  internal  pudendal , the 
vena  magna  ipsius  penis , and  obturatory  veins,  all  of 
which  unite  in  the  pelvis,  and  form  the  internal  iliac 
vein. 

The  external  iliac  vein  receives  the  blood  from  the 
external  pudendal  veins,  and  then  unites  with  the 
internal  iliac  at  the  last  vertebra  of  the  loins ; after 
which  it  forms  with  its  fellow  the  vena  cava  inferior 
or  ascendens,  which  ascends  on  the  right  side  of  the 
spine,  receiving  the  blood  from  the  sacral , lumbar , 
cmulgent,  right  spermatic  veins,  and  the  vena  cava 
hepatica ; and  having  arrived  at  the  diaphragm,  it 
passes  through  the  right  foramen,  and  enters  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart,  into  which  it  evacuates  all  the 
blood  from  the  abdominal  viscera  and  lower  extremities. 

Vena  cava  hepatica.  This  vein  ramifies  in  the  sub- 
stance of  the  liver,  and  brings  the  blood  into  the  vena 
cava  inferior  from  the  branches  of  the  vena  portee,  a 
great  vein  which  carries  the  blood  from  the  abdominal 
viscera  into  the  substance  of  the  liver.  The  trunk  of 
this  vein,  about  the  fissure  of  the  liver  in  which  it  is 
situated,  is  divided  into  the  hepatic  and  abdominal 
portions.  The  abdominal  portion  is  composed  of  the 
splenic,  meseraic,  and  internal  hemorrhoidal  veins. 
These  three  venous  branches  carry  all  the  blood  from 
the  stomach,  spleen,  pancreas,  omentum,  mesentery, 
gall-bladder,  and  the  small  and  large  intestines,  into 
the  sinus  of  the  vena  portae.  The  hepatic  portion  of 
the  vena  portai  enters  the  substance  of  the  livfer, 
divides  into  innumerable  ramifications,  which  secrete 
the  bile,  and  the  superfluous  blood  passes  into  corres- 
ponding branches  of  the  vena  cava  hepatica. 

The  action  of  the  veins.  Veins  do  not  pulsate  ; the 
blood  which  they  receive  from  the  arteries  flows 
through  them  very  slowly,  and  is  conveyed  to  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart,  by  the  contractility  of  their  coats, 
the  pressure  of  the  blood  from  the  arteries,  called  the 
vis  a ter  go,  the  contraction  of  the  muscles,  and  respira- 
tion; and  it  is  prevented  from  going  backward  in  the 
vein  by  the  valves,  of  which  there  are  a great  number. 

Veinless  leaf.  See  Avenius. 

Veiny  leaf.  See  Venosus. 

Vejuca  du  guaco.  A plant  which  has  the  power  of 
curing  and  preventing  the  bite  of  venomous  serpents. 

Velame'ntum  bombycinum.  The  interior  soft 
membrane  of  the  intestines. 

VE'LUM.  A veil. 

Velum  pendulum  palati.  Velum  ; Velum  palati- 
num.  The  soft  palate.  The  soft  part  of  the  palate, 
which  forms  two  arches,  affixed  laterally  to  the  tongue 
and  pharynx. 

Velum  pupilla:.  See  Membrana  pupillaris. 

VENA.  (From  venio,  to  come;  because  the  blood 
comes  through  it.)  A vein.  See  Vein. 

Vena  azygos.  See  Azygos  vena. 

Vena  medinensis.  See  Medinensis  vena. 

Vena  porta:.  ( Vena  porte,  a portando  ; because 
through  it  things  arc  carried.)  Vena  portarum.  The 
great  vein,  situated  at  the  entrance  of  the  liver,  which 
receives  the  blood  from  the  abdominal  viscera,  and 
carries  it  into  the  substance  of  the  liver.  It  is  distin- 
guished into  the  hepatic  and  abdominal  portion  ; the 
former  is  ramified  through  the  substance  of  the  liver, 
and  carries  the  blood  destined  for  the  formation  of  the 
bile,  which  is  returned  by  branches  to  the  trunk  of  the 
vena  cava;  the  latter  is  composed  of  three  branches; 
viz.  the  splenic,  mesenteric,  and  internal  hannorrhoidal 
veins.  See  Vein. 

Vena:  lacteal  The  lacteal  absorbents  were  so 
called.  See  Lacteals. 

VENEREAL.  (Venereus ; from  Venus,  because  it 
belongs  to  acts  of  venery.)  Of  or  belonging  to  the 
sexual  intercourse. 


I V 'e nereal  disease.  See  Gonorrhea  and  St/phihs. 

I VENOSUS.  Veiny.  Applied  by  botanists  to  a leaf 
j which  has  the  vessels,  by  which  it  is  nourished, 
branched,  subdivided,  and  more  or  less  prominent, 
forming  a network  over  either  or  both  its  surfaces ; as 
in  Crataegus,  Pyrolus  terminalis,  &c. 

VE'NTER.  A term  formerly  applied  to  the  larger 
circumscribed  cavities  of  the  body,  as  the  abdomen  and 
thorax. 

VENTRICLE.  (Ventriculus : from  venter.)  A 
term  given  by  anatomists  to  the  cavities  of  the  brain 
and  heart.  See  Cerebrum,  and  Heart. 

Ventri'culus  pulmonaris.  The  right  ventricle  of 
the  heart. 

Ventricdlus  succenturiavus.  That  portion  of 
the  duodenum,  which  is  surrounded  by  the  peritoneum, 
is  sometimes  so  large  as  to  resemble -a  second  stomach, 
and  is  so  called  by  some  writers. 

VENTRILOQUISM.  Gastriloquism.  Engastri- 
mythus.  The  formation  of  the  voice  within  the  mouth 
in  such  a way,  as  to  imitate  other  voices  titan  that 
which  is  natural  to  the  person,  and  so  as  not  to  be  seen 
to  move  the  lips.  Nothing  is  more  easy  to  man  than 
to  imitate  the  different  sounds  he  hears:  this  in  fact  he 
performs  in  many  circumstances.  Many  persons  imi- 
tate perfectly  the  voice  and  pronunciation  of  others ; 
actors,  for  example.  Hunters  imitate  the  different 
cries  of  the  game,  and  thus  succeed  in  decoying  it  into 
their  nets. 

This  faculty  of  imitating  the  different  sounds,  has 
given  rise  to  the  art  called  ventriloquism ; but  the  per- 
sons who  exercise  this  art,  have  no  organization  dif- 
ferent from  that  of  other  men ; they  require  only  to 
have  the  organs  of  voice  and  speech  very  perfect,  in 
order  that  they  may  readily  produce  the  necessary 
sounds. 

The  basis  of  this  art  is  easily  understood.  We  have 
found  by  experience,  instinctively,  that  sounds  are 
changed  by  many  causes:  for  example,  that  they 
become  feeble,  less  distinct,  and  that  their  expression 
changes,  according  as  they  are  more  distant  from  us  ; 
a man  who  is  at  the  bottom  of  a -.veil  wishes  to  speak 
to  persons  who  are  at  the  top;  but  his  voice  will  not 
reach  their  ears  until  it  has  received  certain  modifica- 
tions, which  depend  upon  the  distance  and  the  form  of 
the  tube  through  which  it  passes. 

If  a person  remark  these  modifications  with  care, 
and  endeavour  to  imitate  them,  he  will  produce  acoustic 
illusions,  which  would  be  equally  deceiving  to  the  ear 
as  the  observation  of  objects  through  a magnifying 
glass  is  to  the  eye.  The  error  will  be  complete  if  he 
employ  those  deceptions  which  are  necessary  to  dis- 
tract the  attention. 

These  illusions  will  be  numerous  in  proportion  to 
the  talents  of  the  performer  - but  we  must  not  imagine 
that  a ventriloquist  produces  vocal  sounds,  and  articu- 
lates differently  from  other  people.  His  voice  is  formed 
in  the  ordinary  manner  ; only  he  is  capable  of  modify- 
ing, according  to  his  pleasuje,  the  volume,  the  expres- 
sion, &c.  Of  it ; and  with  regard  to  the  words  that  he 
pronounces  without  moving  his  lips,  he  takes  care  to 
choose  those  into  which  no  labial  consonants  enter, 
otherwise  he  would  be  obliged  to  move  his  lips.  This 
art  is,  in  certain  respects,  for  the  ear  what  painting  is 
for  the  eye. 

VE'NUS.  Copper  was  formerly  so  called  by  the 
chemists. 

VERATRIA.  Veratrine.  A new  vegetable  alkali, 
discovered  lately  by  Pelletier  and  Caventou,  in  the 
veratrum  sabatilla,  or  cevadilla,  the  veratrum  album , 
or  white  hellebore,  and  the  colchicum  autumnale,  or 
meadow  saffron. 

The  seeds  of  cevadilla,  after  being  freed  from  an 
unctuous  and  acrid  matter  by  aether,  were  digested  in 
boiling  alkohol.  As  this  infusion  cooled,  a little  wax 
was  deposited  ; and  the  liquid  being  evaporated  to  an 
extract,  redissolved  in  water,  and  again  concentrated 
by  evaporation,  patted  with  its  colouring  matter. 
Acetate  of  lead  was  now  poured  into  the  solution,  and 
an  abundant  yellow  precipitate  fell,  leaving  the  fluid 
nearly  colourless.  The  excess  of  lead  was  thrown 
down  by  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  and  the  filtered  liquor 
being  concentrated  by  evaporation,  was  treated  with 
magnesia,  and  again  filtered.  The  precipitate,  boiled 
in  alkohol,  gave  a solution,  which,  on  evaporation,  left 
a pulverulent  matter,  extremely  bitter,  and  with  de- 
cidedly alkaline  characters.  It  was  at  first  yellow,  but 


VER 


VER 


by  solution  in  alkohol,  and  precipitation  by  water,  was 
obtained  in  a fine  white  powder. 

^The  precipitate  by  the  acetate  of  lead,  gave,  on  exa- 
mination, gallic  acid ; and  hence  it  is  concluded,  that 
the  new  alkali  existed  in  the  seed  as  a gallate. 

Veratria  was  found  in  the  other  plants  above  men- 
tioned. It  is  white,  pulverulent,  has  no  odour,  but 
excites  violent  sneezing.  It  is  very  acrid,  but  not  bitter. 
It  produced  violent  vomiting  in  very  small  doses,  and, 
according  to  some  experiments,  a few  grains  may  cause 
death.  It  is  very  little  soluble  in  cold  water.  Boiling 
water  dissolves  about  1-  1000th  part,  and  becomes  acrid 
to  the  taste.  It  is  very  soluble  in  alkohol,  and  rather 
less  soluble  in  tether. 

VERATRINE.  See  Veratria. 

VERA'TRUM.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Polygamia ; Order, 
Moncecia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  white  hellebore. 
See  Vcratrum  album. 

Veratrum  album.  Hclleborus  albus  ; Elleborum 
album.  White  hellebore,  or  veratrum.  Veratrum — 
racemo  svpra-dccomposito , corollis  erectis,  of  Linnasus. 
This  plant  is  a native  of  Italy,  Switzerland,  Austria, 
and  Russia.  Every  part  of  the  plant  is  extremely  acrid 
and  poisonous.  The  dried  root  has  no  particular  smell, 
but  a durable,  nauseous,  and  bitter  taste,  burning  the 
mouth  and  fauces:  when  powdered,  and  applied  to 
issues,  or  ulcers,  it  produces  griping  and  purging ; if 
snuffed  up  the  nose,  it  proves  a violent  sternutatory. 
Gesner  made  an  infusion  of  half  an  ounce  of  this  root 
with  two  ounces  of  water;  of  this  he  took  two 
drachms,  which  produced  great  heat  about  the  scapulas 
and  in  the  face  and  head,  as  well  as  the  tongue  and 
throat,  followed  by  singultus,  which  continued  ti[l 
vomiting  was  excited.  Bergius  also  experienced  very 
distressing  symptoms,  upon  tasting  this  infusion.  The 
root,  taken  in  large  doses,  discovers  such  acrimony,  and 
operates  by  the  stomach  and  rectum  with  such  vio- 
lence, that  blood  is  usually  discharged ; it  likewise  acts 
very  powerfully  upon  the  nervous  system,  producing 
great  anxiety,  tremors,  vertigo,  syncope,  aphonia,  inter- 
rupted respiration,  sinking  of  the  pulse,  convulsions, 
spasms,  and  death.  Upon  opening  those  who  have 
died  of  the  effects  of  this  poison,  the  stomach  discovered 
marks  of  inflammation,  with  corrosions  of  its  internal 
coat.  The  ancients  exhibited  this  active  medicine  in 
maniacal  cases,  and  it  is  said  with  success.  The  ex- 
perience of  Greding  is  somewhat  similar : out  of 
twenty-eight  cases,  in  which  he  exhibited  the  bark  of 
the  root  collected  in  the  spring,  five  were  cured.  In 
almost  every  case  that  he  relates,  the  medicine  acted 
more  or  less  upon  all  the  excretions;  vomiting  and 
purging  were  very  generally  produced,  and  the  matter 
thrown  otf  the  stomach  was  constantly  mixed  with 
bile  ; a florid  redness  frequently  appeared  on  the  face, 
and  various  cutaneous  efflorescences  upon  the  body ; 
and,  in  some,  pleuritic  symptoms,  with  fever,  super- 
vened, so  as  to  require  bleeding  ; nor  were  the  more 
alarming  affections  of  spasms  and  convulsions  unfre- 
quent. Critical  evacuations  were  also  very  evident; 
many  sweating  profusely,  in  some  the  urine  was  con- 
siderably increased,  in  others  the  saliva  and  mucous 
discharges:  the  uterine  obstructions,  of  long  duration, 
were  often  removed  by  its  use.  Veratrum  has  likewise 
been  found  useful  in  epilepsy,  and  other  convulsive 
complaints:  but  the  diseases  in  which  its  efficacy 
seems  least  equivocal,  are  those  of  the  skin,  as  itch,  and 
different  prurient  eruptions,  herpes,  morbus  pedieulo- 
sus,  lepra,  scrofula.  &c. ; and  in  many  of  these  it  has 
been  successfully  employed  both  internally  and  exter- 
nally. As  a powerful  stimulant  and  irritating  medi- 
cine, its  use  has  been  resorted  to  in  desperate  cases 
only,  and  even  then  it  ought  first  to  be  exhibited  in  very 
small  doses,  as  a grain,  and  in  a diluted  state,  and  to  be 
gradually  increased,  according  to  the  effects,  which  are 
generally  of  an  alarming  nature.  The  active  ingre- 
dient of  this  plant  is  an  alkali  lately  detected.  See 
Veratria. 

Veratrum  nigrum.  S ve  Helleborus  niger. 

Veratrum  sabadilla.  Cevadilla  hispanorum; 
Sevadilla;  >S abadtlla;  Hordeum  cans ti cum ; Canis  in- 
ter/ect, or.  Indian  caustic  barley.  The  plant  whose 
seeds  are  thus  denominated,  is  a species  of  veratrum  : 
they  are  powerfully  caustic,  and  are  administered  with 
very  great  success  as  a vermifuge.  They  are  also 
diuretic  and  emetic.  The  dose  to  a child,  from  two  to 


four  years  old,  is  two  grains ; from  hence  to  eight* 
five  grains ; from  eight  to  twelve,  ten  grains.  A new 
alkali  has  been  detected  in  the  seeds  of  this  plant.  See 
Veratria. 

[Veratrum  viridk.  See  American  hellebore.  A.) 

VERBA'SCUM.  ( Quasi  barbascum,  from  its  hairy 
coat.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Class,  Pentandria ; Order,  Mono- 
gynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  yellow  and  black 
mullein. 

Verbascum  nigrum.  The  systematic  name  or  the 
black  mullein.  Candela  regia;  Tapsus  barbatus i 
Candelaria ; Lanaria.  The  Verbascum  nigrum , ana 
Verbascum  thapsus  appear  to  be  ordered  indifferently 
by  this  name  in  the  pharmacopoeias.  * The  flowers, 
leaves,  and  roots,  are  used  occasionally  as  mild  ad- 
stringents.  The  leaves  possess  a roughish  taste,  and 
promise  to  be  of  service  in  diarrhoeas  and  other  debili- 
tated states  of  the  intestines. 

Verbascum  thapsus.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  yellow  mullein.  See  Verbascum  nigrum. 

VERBE'NA.  (Quasi  herbena ; a name  of  distinc- 
tion for  all  herbs  used  in  sacred  rites.)  Vervain.  1. 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Dccandria ; Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  vervain.  See 
Verbena  ojjicinalis. 

Verbena  fcbmina.  The  hedge  mustard  is  some- 
times so  called.  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 

Verbena  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
Verbenaca ; Peristerium ; Hierobotane  ; Herb  a sacra. 
Vervain.  This  plant  is  destitute  of  odour,  and  to  the 
taste  manifests  but  a slight  degree  of  bitterness  and  ad- 
stringeucy.  In  former  times  the  verbena  seems  to  have 
been  held  sacred,  ai  d was  employed  in  celebrating  the 
sacrificial  rites;  and  with  a view  to  this,  more  than 
the  natural  power  of  the  plant,  it  was  worn  suspended 
about  the  neck  as  an  amulet.  This  practice,  thus 
founded  on  superstition,  was,  however,  in  process  of 
time,  adopted  in  medicine ; and,  therefore,  to  obtain  its 
virtues  more  effectually,  the  vervain  was  directed  to 
be  bruised  before  it  was  appended  to  the  neck ; and  of 
its  good  effects  thus  used  for  inveterate  headaches, 
Forestus  relates  a remarkable  instance.  In  still  later 
times  it  has  been  employed  in  the  way  of  cataplasm, 
by  which  we  are  told  the  most  severe  and  obstinate 
cases  of  cephalalgia  have  been  cured,  for  which  we 
have  the  authorities  of  Etmuller,  Hartman,  and  more 
especially  De  Hafin.  Notwithstanding  these  testi- 
monies in  favour  of  the  vervain,  it  has  deservedly 
fallen  into  disuse  in  Britain;  nor  lias  the  pamphlet  of 
Mr.  Morley,  written  professedly  to  recommend  its  use 
in  scrofulous  affections,  had  the  effect  of  restoring  its 
medical  character.  This  gentleman  directs  the  root 
of  vervain  to  be  tied  with  a yard  of  white  satin  riband 
round  the  neck,  where  it  is  to  remain  till  the  patient 
recovers.  He  also  has  recourse  to  infusions  and  oint- 
ments prepared  from  the  leaves  of  the  plant,  and 
occasionally  calls  in  aid  ^he  most  active  medicines  of 
the  materia  medica. 

VERDIGRIS.  JErugo.  An  impure  eubacetate  of 
copper.  It  is  prepared  by  stratifying  copper  plates 
with  the  husks  of  grapes,  after  the  expression  of  their 
juice,  and  when  they  have  been  kept  for  some  time 
imperfectly  exposed  to  the  air,  in  an  apartment  warm 
but  not  too  dry,  so  as  to  pass  to  a state  of  fermentation, 
whence  a quantity  of  vinegar  is  formed.  The  copper 
plates  are  placed  in  jars  in  strata,  with  the  husks  thus 
prepared,  which  are  covered.  At  the  end  of  twelve, 
fifteen,  or  twenty  days,  these  are  opened : the  plates 
have  an  efflorescence  on  their  surface  of  a green  colour 
and  silky  lustre:  they  are  repeatedly  moistened  with 
water ; and  at  length  a crust  of  verdigris  is  formed, 
which  is  scraped  off’ by  a knife,  is  put  into  bags,  and 
dried  by  exposure  of  these  to  the  air  arid  sun.  It  is  of 
a green  colour,  with  a slight  tint  of  blue. 

In  this  preparation  'the  copper  is  oxidized,  probably 
by  the  atmospheric  air,  aided  by  the  affinity  of  the 
acetic  acid  ; and  a portion  of  this  acid  remains  in  com- 
bination with  the  oxide,  not  sufficient,  however,  to 
produce  its  saturation.  When  acted  on  by  water,  the 
acid,  with  such  a portion  of  oxide  as  it  can  retain  in 
solution,  are  dissolved,  and  the  remaining  oxide  is  left 
undissolved.  From  this  analysis  of  it  by  the  action  of 
water,  Proust  inferred  that  it  consists  of  43  of  acetate 
of  copper,  27  of  black  oxide  of  copper,  and  30  of  water : 


VER 


VER 


th  s water  not  being  accidental,  but  existing  in  it  in 
intimate  combination. 

Verdigris  is  used  as  a pigment  in  some  of  the  pro- 
cesses of  dying,  and  in  surgery  it  is  externally  applied 
as  a mild  detergent  in  cleansing  foul  ulcers,  or  other 
open  wounds.  On  account  of  its  virulent  properties, 
it  ought  not  to  be  used  as  a medicine  without  profes- 
sional advice;  and  in  case  any  portion  of  this  poison 
be  accidentally  swallowed,  emetics  should  be  first 
given,  and  afterward  cold  water,  gently  alkalized, 
ought  to  be  drunk  in  abundance. 

VERHEYEN,  Philip,  was  born  in  1648  at  Ves- 
bronck,  in  the  county  of  Waes,  and  assumed  the 
clerical  profession;  but  an  inflammation  of  his  leg 
having  rendered  amputation  necessary,  he  was  deter- 
mined afterward  to  study  medicine.  He  accordingly 
graduated  and  settled  at  Louvain,  where  he  was 
nominated  professor  of  anatomy  in  1689,  and  four 
years  after  of  surgery  also.  Ilis  application  was 
indefatigable,  so  that  lie  attained  distinguished  emi- 
nence, and  attached  to  his  school  a great  number  of 
disciples.  His  celebrity  was  principally  the  result  of 
a work,  entitled,  “ Anatomia  Corporis  Humani,”  which 
passed  through  many  editions  and  improvements,  and 
superseded  the  compendium  of  Bartholine.  He  pub- 
lished also  a Compendium  of  Medicine,  a Treatise  on 
Fevers,  &c. 

Verjuice.  An  acid  liquor  prepared  from  grapes  or 
apples,  that  are  unfit  to  be  converted  into  wine  or 
cider.  It  is  also  made  from  crabs.  It  is  principally 
used  in  sauces  and  ragouts,  though  it  sometimes  forms 
an  ingredient  in  medicinal  compounds. 

VERMICULA'RIS.  (From  vermis , a worm.)  Ver- 
micular : shaped  like,  or  having  the  properties  of,  a 
worm.  Applied  very  generally  in  natural  history. 

VERMIFORM.  ( Vermiformis ; from  vermis,  a 
worm,  and  forma,  resemblance.)  Worm-like. 

Vermiform  process.  Protuberantia  vermiformis. 
The  substance  which  unites  the  two  hemispheres  of 
the  cerebellum  like  a ring,  forming  a process.  It  is 
called  vermiform , from  its  resemblance  to  the  contor- 
tions of  worms. 

VERMIFUGE.  (Vermifugus ; from  vermis,  a 

worm,  and/«o-o,  to  drive  away.)  See  Anthelmintic. 
VERMILION.  See  Cinnabar. 

VE'RMIS.  A worm.  See  Worm. 

Vermis  mordicans.  Vermis  repens.  A species  of 
herpetic  eruption  on  the  skin. 

Vermis  terrestris.  See  Earth-worm. 
VERNATIO.  (From  ver,  the  spring.)  This  term 
is  applied,  like  foliatus,  to  the  manner  in  which  the 
leaves  are  folded  or  wrapped  up,  and  expanded  in  the 
spring.  See  Germ. 

VERNEY,  Guichard-Joskph  du,  was  the  son  of  a 
physician  at  Tours,  and  born  in  1648.  After  studying 
at  Avignon,  lie  removed,  at  nineteen,  to  Paris,  where 
he  acquired  high  reputation  as  an  anatomical  lecturer. 
He  was  admitted,  nine  years  after,  into  the  Academy 
of  Sciences,  whose  memoirs  he  enriched  by  his  re- 
searches in  natural  history.  In  1679  he  was  nominated 
professor  of  anatomy  at  the  Royal  Gardens.  His 
work  on  the  Organ  of  Hearing  appeared  about  four 
years  after,  and  was  translated  into  various  languages. 
He  continued  the  pursuit  of  natural  history  with  great 
ardour,  and  even  to  the  detriment  of  his  health,  yet  he 
was  enabled,  by  a good  constitution,  to  reach  his 
eighty-second  year.  He  bequeathed  his  valuable 
anatomical  preparations  to  the  academy.  After  his 
death,  a treatise  on  the  Diseases  of  the  Bones  was  pub- 
lished from  his  manuscripts  ; and  subsequently  various 
other  papers,  under  the  title  of  “CEuvres  Anato- 
mique.” 

VERO'NICA.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Diandria;  Order,  Mono- 
gynia.  Speedwell. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeia!  name  of  the  male  veronica. 
See  Veronica  officinalis. 

Veronica  beccabunga.  Beccabunga ; Anagallis 
cquatica ; leaver  germanicum ; Veronica  aquatica ; j 
Cepxa.  Water-pimpernel  and  brooklime.  The  plant  i 
which  bears  these  names,  is  the  Veronica — racemis 
lateralibus , foliis  ovatis  plants,  caulc  trepente,  of  Lin- 
meus.  It  was  formerly  considered  of  much  use  in 
several  diseases,  and  was  applied  externally  to  wounds 
and  ulcers : but  if  it  have  any  peculiar  efficacy,  it  is  to 
be  derived  from  its  antiscorbutic  virtue.  As  a mild 
refrigerant  juice,  it  is  preferred  where  an  acrimonious  j 


state  of  the  fluids  prevails,  indicated  by  prurient  erup 
tions  upon  the  skin,  or  in  what  has  been  called  the  hot 
scurvy.  To  derive  much  advantage  from  it,  the  juice 
ought  to  be  taken  in  large  quantities,  or  the  fresh  plant 

eaten  as  food. 

Veronica  officinalis.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  plant  which  is  called  in  the  pharmacopoeias  Vero 
nica  mas  ; Thea  germanica ; Betonica  pauli ; Cha 
mcedrys  spuria.  Veronica — spicis  lateralibus  pedun 
culatis  ; foliis  oppositis ; caule  procumbente,  of  Lin- 
nffius,  is  not  unfrequent  on  dry  barren  grounds  and 
heath,  as  that  of  Hampstead,  flowering  in  June  and 
July.  This  plant  was  formerly  used  as  a pectoral 
against  coughs  and  asthmatic  affections,  but  it  is  now 
justly  forgotten. 

[Veronica  virginica.  This  is  a tall  native  plant, 
differing  from  the  rest  of  its  family  in  habit,  and  con- 
sidered by  N uttall  and  some  other  botanists  as  a sepa- 
rate genus.  Its  root  is  very  bitter,  and  somewhat  nau- 
seous. It  sometimes  operates  as  a cathartic,  in  the  dose 
of  a scruple  ; but  in  several  trials  which  I have  made 
with  it,  I have  found  it  uncertain  in  this  respect. 
Big.  Mat.  Med.  A.] 

Verricula'ris  tunica.  The  retina  of  the  eye. 
VERRUCA.  1.  A wart,  or  thickening  and  indu 
ration  of  the  cuticle  which  is  raised  up  in  different 
forms,  mostly  of  the  size  of  a lentil,  or  flat  pea. 

2.  In  botany,  applied  to  a small  round  prominence 
on  the  inferior  surface  of  the  funguses. 

Verruca'ria.  (From  Verruca,  a wart:  because  it 
was  supposed  to  destroy  warts.)  The  Heliotropium 
europeeum,  or  turnsole. 

VERRUCOSUS.  Warty:  applied  to  such  appear- 
ances on  vegetables,  as  on  the  stem  of  the  Euonymus 
verrucosus ; and  to  the  appearance  on  the  gourd-seed 
vessel,  as  in  the  Cucurbita  verrucosa.  See  Pepo. 

VE'RTEBRA.  ( Vertebra , ce,  f. ; from  verto,  to 
turn.)  The  spine  is  a long  bony  column,  which  ex- 
tends from  the  head  to  the  lower  part  of  the  trunk,  and  is 
composed  of  irregular  bones,  which  are  called  vertebrae. 

The  spine  may  be  considered  as  being  composed 
of  two  irregular  pyramids,  which  are  united  to  each 
other  in  that  part  of  the  loins  where  the  last  of  the 
lumbar  vertebrae  is  united  to  the  os  sacrum. 

The  vertebrae,  which  form  the  upper  and  longest 
pyramid,  are  called  true  vertebrae:  and  those  which 
compose  the  lower  pyramid,  or  the  os  sacrum  and 
coccyx,  are  termed  false  vertebrae,  because  they  do  not 
in  every  thing  resemble  the  others,  and  particularly 
because,  in  the  adult  state,  they  become  perfectly  im- 
moveable, while  the  upper  ones  continue  to  be  capable 
of  motion.  For  it  is  upon  the  bones  of  the  spine  that 
the  body  turns,  and  their  name  has  its  derivation  from 
the  Latin  verb  verto , to  turn,  as  observed  above. 

The  true  vertebrae,  from  their  situations  with  respect 
to  the  neck,  back,  and  loins,  are  divided  into  three 
classes,  of  cervical,  dorsal,  and  lumbar  vertebrae.  We 
will  first  consider  the  general  structure  of  all  these,  and 
then  separately  describe  their  different  classes. 

In  each  of  the  vertebra,  as  in  other  bones,  we  may 
remark  the  body  of  the  bone,  its  process  and  cavities. 
The  body  may  be  compared  to  part  of  a cylinder  cut  off 
transversely ; convex  before,  and  concave  behind, 
where  it  makes  part  of  the  cavity  of  the  spine. 

Each  vertebra  has  commonly  seven  processes.  The 
first  of  these  is  the  spinous  process,  which  is  placed  at 
the  back  part  of  the  vertebra,  and  gives  the  name  of 
spine  to  the  whole  of  this  bony  canal.  Two  others  are 
called  transverse  processes,  from  their  situation  with 
respect  to  the  spine,  and  are  placed  on  each  side  of  the 
spinous  process.  The  four  others,  which  are  called 
oblique  processes,  are  much  smaller  than  the  other 
three.  There  are  two  of  these  on  the  upper  and  two 
on  the  lower  part  of  each  vertebra,  rising  from  near  the 
basis  of  the  transverse  processes.  They  are  sometimes 
called  articular  processes,  because  they  are  articulated 
with  each  other;  that  is,  the  two  superior  processes  of 
one  vertebra  are  articulated  with  the  two  inferior  pro- 
cesses of  the  vertebra  above  it ; and  they  are  called 
oblique  processes,  from  their  situation  with  respect  to 
the  processes  with  which  they  are  articulated.  These 
oblique  processes  are  articulated  to  each  other  by  a 
species  of  ginglymus,  and  each  process  is  covered  at  its 
articulation  with  cartilage. 

There  is  in  every  vertebra,  between  its  body  and 
apophyses,  a foramen,  large  enough  to  admit  a finger. 
These  foramina  correspond  with  each  other  through  ail 


VER 


VER 


the  vertebra,  and  form  a long  bony  conduit,  for  the 
lodgment  of  the  spinal  marrow. 

Besides  this  great  hole,  there  are  four  notches  on  each 
side  of  every  vertebrae,  between  the  oblique  processes 
and  the  body  of  the  vertebra.  Two  of  these  notches 
are  at  the  upper,  and  two  at  the  lower  part  of  the  bone. 
Each  of  the  inferior  notches,  meeting  with  one  of  the 
superior  notches  of  the  vertebra  below  it,  forms  a fora- 
men ; while  the  superior  notches  do  the  same  with  the 
inferior  notches  of  the  vertebra  above  it.  These  four 
foramina  form  passages  for  blood-vessels,  and  for  the 
nerves  that  pass  out  of  the  spine. 

The  vertebrae  are  united  together  by  means  of  a sub- 
stance, compressible  like  cork,  which  forms  a kind  of 
partition  between  the  several  vertebrae.  This  interver- 
tebral substance  seems,  in  the  foetus,  to  approach  nearly 
to  the  nature  of  ligaments;  in  the  adult  it  has  a great 
resemblance  to  cartilage.  When  cut  horizontally,  it 
appears  to  consist  of  concentrical  curved  fibres : exter- 
nally, it  is  firmest  and  hardest ; internally,  it  becomes 
thinner  and  softer,  till  at  length,  in  the  centre,  we  find 
it  in  tiie  form  of  a mucous  substance,  which  facilitates 
the  motion  of  the  spine. 

Genga,  an  Italian  anatomist,  long  ago  observed,  that 
the  change  which  takes  place  in  these  intervertebral 
cartilages,  (as  they  are  usually  called.)  in  advanced 
life,  occasions  the  decrease  in  stature,  and  the  stooping 
forwards,  which  are  usually  to  be  observed  in  old  peo- 
ple. The  cartilages  then  become  shrivelled,  and  con- 
sequently lose,  in  a great  measure,  their  elasticity.  But, 
besides  this  gradual  effect  of  old  age,  these  cartilages 
are  subject  to  a temporary  diminution,  from  the  weight 
of  the  body  in  an  erect  posture,  so  that  people  who 
have  been  long  standing,  or  who  have  carried  a con- 
siderable weight,  are  found  to  be  shorter  than  when 
they  have  been  long  in  bed.  Hence  we  are  taller  in  the 
morning  than  at  night.  This  fact,  though  seentingly 
obvious,  was  not  ascertained  till  of  late  years.  The 
difference  in  such  cases  depends  on  the  age  and  size  of 
the  subject;  in  tall,  young  people,  it  will  be  nearly  an 
inch ; but  in  older,  or  shorter  persons,  it  will  be  less 
considerable. 

Besides  the  connexion  of  the  several  vertebra,  by 
means  of  these  cartilages,  there  are  likewise  many 
strong  ligaments,  which  unite  the  bones  of  the  spine 
to  each  other.  Some  of  these  ligaments  are  external, 
and  others  internal.  Among  the  external  ligaments, 
we  observe  one  which  is  common  to  all  the  vertebra, 
extending,  in  a longitudinal  direction,  from  the  forepart 
of  the  body  or  the  second  vertebra  of  the  neck,  over  all 
the  other  vertebra,  and  becoming  broader  as  it  descends 
towards  the  os  sacrum,  where  it  becomes  thinner,  and 
gradually  disappears.  This  external  longitudinal  liga- 
ment, if  we  may  so  call  it,  is  strengthened  by  other 
shorter  ligamentous  fibres,  which  pass  from  one  verte- 
bra to  another,  throughout  the  whole  spine.  The 
internal  ligament,  the  fibres  of  which,  like  the  external 
one,  are  spread  in  a longitudinal  direction,  is  extended 
over  the  back  part  of  the  bodies  of  the  vertebrae,  where 
they  help  to  form  the  cavity  of  the  spine,  and  reaches 
from  the  foramen  of  the  occipital  bone  to  the  os 
6acrum. 

We  may  venture  to  remark,  that  all  the  vertebrae 
diminish  in  density  and  firmness  of  texture,  in  propor- 
tion as  they  increase  in  size,  so  that  the  lower  verte- 
bra, though  larger,  are  not  so  heavy  in  proportion  as 
those  above  them.  In  consequence  of  this  mode  of 
structure,  the  size  of  the  vertebra  is  increased  without 
adding  to  their  weight;  and  this  is  an  object  of  no  little 
importance  in  a part  of  the  body,  which,  besides  flexi- 
bility and  suppleness,  seems  to  require  lightness  as  one 
of  its  essential  properties. 

In  the  foetus,  at  the  ordinary  time  of  birth,  each  ver- 
tebra is  found  to  be  composed  of  three  bony  pieces,  con- 
nected by  cartilages  which  afterward  ossify.  One  of 
these  pieces  is  the  body  of  the  bone ; the  other  two  are 
the  posterior  and  lateral  portions,  which  form  the  fora- 
men for  the  medulla  spinalis.  The  oblique  processes 
are  at  that  time  complete,  and  the  transverse  processes 
beginning  to  be  formed,  but  the  spinous  processes  are 
totally  wanting. 

The  cervical  vertebrae  are  seven  in  number;  their 
bodies  are  smaller  and  of  a firmer  texture  than  the 
other  bones  of  the  spine.  The  transverse  processes  of 
these  vertebra  are  short,  and  forked  for  the  lodgment 
of  muscles;  and,  at  the  bottom  of  each  of  these  pro- 
cesses, there  is  a foramen,  for  the  passage  of  the  cer- 


vical artery  and  vein.  The  spinous  process  of  each  of 
these  vertebra  is  likewise  shorter  than  the  other  verte- 
bra, and  forked  at  its  extremity ; by  which  means  it 
allows  a more  convenient  insertion  to  the  muscles  of 
the  neck.  Their  oblique  processes  are  more  deserving 
of  that  name  than  either  those  of  the  dorsal  or  lumbar 
vertebra.  The  uppermost  of  these  processes  are 
slightly  concave,  and  the  lowermost  slightly  convex. 
This  may  suffice  for  a general  description  of  these  ver- 
tebra ; but  the  first,  second,  and  seventh  deserve  to  be 
spoken  of  more  particularly.  The  first,  which  is  called 
Atlas,  from  its  supporting  the  head,  differs  from  all  the 
other  vertebra  of  the  spine.  It  forms  a kind  of  bony 
ring,  which  may  be  divided  into  its  anterior  and  poste- 
rior arches,  and  its  lateral  portions.  Of  these,  the  an 
lerior  arch  is  the  smallest  and  flattest;  at  the  middle  of 
its  convex  forepart  we  observe  a small  tubercle  which 
is  here  what  the  body  is  in  the  other  vertebra.  To  this 
tubercle  a ligament  is  attached,  which  helps  to 
strengthen  the  articulation  of  the  spine  with  the  os 
occipiiis.  The  back  part  of  this  anterior  portion  is  con- 
cave, and  covered  with  cartilage,  where  it  receives  the 
odontoid  process  of  the  second  vertebra.  The  posterior 
portion  of  the  vertebra,  or,  more  properly  speaking,  the 
posterior  arch,  is  larger  than  the  anterior  one.  Instead 
of  a spinous  process,  we  observe  a rising,  or  tubercle, 
larger  than  that  which  we  have  just  now  described,  on 
the  forepart  of  the  bone.  The  lateral  portions  of  the 
vertebra  project,  so  as  to  form  what  are  calltd  the 
transverse  processes,  one  on  each  side,  which  are 
longer  and  larger  than  the  transverse  processes  of  the 
other  vertebra.  They  terminate  in  a roundish  tuber- 
cle, the  end  of  which  has  a slight  bend  downwards. 
Like  the  other  transverse  processes,  they  are  perforated 
at  their  basis,  for  the  passage  of  the  cervical  artery. 
But,  besides  these  transverse  processes,  we  observe, 
both  on  the  superior  and  inferior  surface  of  these  lateral 
portions  of  the  first  vertebra,  an  articulating  surface, 
covered  with  cartilage,  answering  to  the  oblique  pro 
cesses  in  the  other  vertebra.  The  uppermost  of  these 
are  oblong,  and  slightly  concave,  and  their  external 
edges  rise  somewhat  higher  than  their  internal  brims. 
They  receive  the  condyloid  processes  of  the  osoccipitis, 
with  which  they  are  aiticulated  by  a species  of  gingly 
nrus.  The  lowermost  articulating  surfaces,  or  the  infe  • 
rior  oblique  processes,  as  they  are  called,  are  large, 
concave,  and  circular,  and  are  formed  for  receiving  the 
superior  oblique  processes  of  the  second  vertebra;  so 
that  the  atlas  differs  from  the  rest  of  the  cervical  verte 
bra  in  receiving  the  bones,  with  which  it  is  articulated 
both  above  and  below.  In  the  foetus  we  find  this  ver- 
tebra composed  of  five,  instead  of  three  pieces,  as  in  the 
other  vertebra.  One  of  these  is  the  anterior  arch,  the 
other  four  are  the  posterior  arch  and  the  sides,  each  of 
the  latter  being  composed  of  two  pieces.  The  trans- 
verse process,  on  each  side,  remains  long  in  a state  of 
epiphysis  with  respect  to  the  rest  of  the  bone. 

The  second  vertebra  is  called  dentatus,  from  the 
process  on  the  upper  part  of  its  body,  which  has  been, 
though  perhaps  improperly,  compared  to  a tooth.  This 
process,  which  is  the  most  remarkable  part  of  the  ver- 
tebra, is  of  a cylindrical  shape,  slightly  flattened,  how- 
ever, behind  and  before.  Anteriorly,  it  has  a convex, 
smooth,  articulating  surface,  where  it  is  received  by 
the  atlas,  as  we  observed  in  our  description  of  that  ver- 
tebra. 1 1 is  by  means  of  this  articulation  that  the  rota- 
tory motion  of  the  head  is  performed;  the  articulation 
of  the  os  occipitis  with  the  superior  oblique  processes 
of  the  first  vertebra,  allowing  only  a certain  degree  of 
motion  backwards  and  forwards,  so  that  when  we  turn 
the  face  either  to  the  right  or  left,  the  atlas  moves  upon 
this  odontoid  process  of  the  second  vertebra.  But  as 
the  face  cannot  turn  a quarter  of  a circle,  that  is,  to  the 
shoulder,  upon  this  vertebra  atone,  without  being  liable 
to  injure  the  medulla  spinalis,  we  find  that  all  the  cer- 
vical vertebrae  concur  in  this  rotary  motion,  when  it 
is  in  any  considerable  degree ; and  indeed  we  see  many 
strong  ligamentous  fibres  arising  from  the  sides  of  the 
odontoid  process,  and  passing  over  the  first  vertebra,  to 
the  os  occipitis,  which  not  only  strengthen  the  articu 
lation  of  these  bones  with  each  other,  but  serve  toregu 
late  and  limit  their  motion.  It  is  on  this  account  that 
the  name  of  moderators  has  sometimes  been  given  tc 
these  ligaments.  The  transverse  processes  of  the  ver- 
tebra dentata  are  short,  inclined  downwards,  and  forked 
at  their  extremities.  Its  spinous  process  is  short  am 
thick.  Its  superior  oblique  processes  are  slightly  con 


VER 


VES 


vox,  and  somewhat  larger  than  the  articulating  sur- 
faces of  the  first  vertebra,  by  which  mechanism  the 
motion  of  that  bone  upon  this  second  vertebra  is  per- 
formed with  greater  safety.  Its  inferior  oblique  pro- 
cesses have  nothing  singular  in  their  structure. 

The  seventh  vertebra  of  the  neck  differs  from  the 
rest  chiefly  in  having  its  spino  us  process  of  a greater 
length,  so  that,  upon  this  account,  it  has  been  sometimes 
called  vertebra  prominens. 

The  dorsal  vertebra! , which  are  twelve  in  number, 
are  of  a middle  size,  between  the  cervical  and  lumbar 
vertebra  ; the  upper  ones  gradually  losing  their  resem- 
blance to  those  of  the  neck,  and  the  lower  ones  coming 
nearer  to  those  of  the  loins.  The  bodies  of  these  ver- 
tebrae are  more  flattened  at  their  sides,  more  convex 
before,  and  more  concave  behind,  than  the  other  bones 
of  the  spine.  Their  upper  and  lower  surfaces  are  hori- 
zontal. At  their  sides  we  observe  two  depressions, 
one  at  their  upper,  and  the  other  at  their  lower  edge, 
which,  united  with  similar  depressions  in  the  vertebra 
above  and  below,  form,  articulating  surfaces,  covered 
with  cartilage,  in  which  the  heads  of  the  ribs  are  re- 
ceived. These  depressions,  however,  are  not  exactly 
alike  in  all  the  dorsal  vertebra ; for  we  find  the  head  of 
the  first  rib  articulated  solely  with  the  first  of  these  ver- 
tebra, which  has  therefore  the  whole  of  the  superior 
articulating  surface  within  itself,  independent  of  the 
vertebra  above  it.  We  may  likewise  observe  a simi- 
larity in  this  respect  in  the  eleventh  and  twelfth  of  the 
dorsal  vertebra,  with  which  the  eleventh  and  twelfth 
ribs  are  articulated  separately.  Their  spinous  processes 
are  long,  flattened  at  the  sides,  divided  at  their  upper 
and  back  part  into  two  surfaces  by  a middle  ridge, 
which  is  received  by  a small  groove  in  the  inner  part 
of  the  spinous  process  immediately  above  it,  and  con- 
nected to  it  by  a ligament.  These  spinous  processes 
are  terminated  by  a kind  of  round  tubercle,  which 
slopes  considerably  downwards,  except  in  the  three 
lowermost  vertebrae,  where  they  are  shorter  and  more 
erect.  Their  transverse  processes  are  of  considerable 
length  and  thickness,  and  are  turned  obliquely  back- 
wards. Anteriorly,  they  have  an  articulating  surface, 
for  receiving  the  tuberosity  of  the  ribs,  except  in  the 
eleventh  and  twelfth  of  the  dorsal  vertebra  to  which 
the  ribs  are  articulated  by  their  heads  only.  In  the  last 
of  these  vertebrae  the  transverse  processes  are  very 
short  and  thick,  because  otherwise  they  would  be  apt 
to  strike  against  the  lowermost  ribs,  when  we  bend  the 
body  to  either  side. 

The  lumbar  vertebrae , the  lowest  of  true  ver- 
tebrae, are  five  in  number.  They  are  larger  than  the 
dorsal  vertebra.  Their  bodies  are  extremely  promi- 
nent, and  nearly  of  a circular  form  at  their  forepart ; 
posteriorly  they  are  concave.  Their  intermediate  car- 
tilages are  of  considerable  thickness,  especially  anteri- 
orly, by  which  means  the  curvature  of  the  spine  for- 
wards, towards  the  abdomen,  in  this  part,  is  greatly 
assisted.  Their  spinous  processes  are  short  and  thick, 
of  considerable  breadth,  erect,  and  terminated  by  a 
kind  of  tuberosity.  Their  oblique  processes  are  of 
considerable  thickness ; the  superior  ones  are  concave, 
and  turned  inwards;  the  inferior  ones  convex,  and 
turned  outwards.  Their  transverse  processes  are  thin 
and  long,  except  in  the  first  and  last  vertebra,  where 
they  are  much  shorter,  that  the  lateral  motions  of  the 
trunk  might  not  be  impeded.  The  inferior  surface  of 
all  these  vertebra  is  slightly  oblique,  so  that  the  fore- 
part of  the  body  of  each  is  somewhat  thicker  than  its 
hind-part ; but  this  is  more  particularly  observable  in 
the  lowermost  vertebra,  which  is  connected  with  the 
os  sacrum.  Many  anatomists  describe  the  os  sacrum 
and  the  os  coccygis  when  considering  the  bones  of  the 
spine,  while  others  regard  them  as  belonging  more  pro- 
perly to  the  pelvis.  These  bones  the  reader  may  con- 
sult. It  now  remains  to  notice  the  ttses  of  the  spine. 
We  find  the  spinal  marrow  lodged  in  this  bony  canal, 
secure  from  external  injury.  It  defends  the  thoracic 
and  abdominal  viscera,  and  forms  a pillar  which  sup- 
ports the  head,  and  gives  a general  firmness  to  the 
whole  trunk. 

To  give  it  a firm  basis,  we  find  the  bodies  of  the  ver- 
tebra gradually  increasing  in  breadth  as  they  descend ; 
and  to  fit  it  for  a variety  of  motion,  it  is  composed  of  a 
great  number  of  joints,  with  an  intermediate  elastic 
substance,  so  that  to  great  firmness  there  is  added  a 
perfect  flexibility. 

We  have  already  observed,  that  the  lowermost  and 


largest  vertebra  are  not  so  heavy  in  proportion  as  those 
above  them ; their  bodies  being  more  spongy,  except- 
ing at  their  circumference,  where  they  are  more  imme- 
diately exposed  to  pressure  ; so  that  nature  seems  every 
where  endeavouring  to  relieve  us  of  an  unnecessary 
weight  of  bone.  But  behind,  where  the  spinal  marrow 
is  more  exposed  to  injury,  we  find  the  processes  com- 
posed of  very  hard  bone ; and  the  spinous  processes 
are  in  general  placed  over  each  other  in  a slanting 
direction,  so  that  a pointed  instrument  cannot  easily 
get  between  them,  excepting  in  the  neck,  where  they 
are  almost  perpendicular,  and  leave  a greater  space  be- 
tween them.  Hence,  in  some  countries,  it  is  usual  to 
kill  cattle  by  thrusting  a pointed  instrument  between 
the  occiput  and  the  atlas,  or  between  the  atlas  and  the 
second  vertebra.  Besides  these  uses  of  the  vertebra  in 
defending  the  spinal  marrow,  and  in  articulating  the 
several  vertebrae,  as  is  the  case  with  the  oblique  pro- 
cesses, we  shall  find  that  they  all  serve  to  form  a 
greater  surface  for  the  lodgment  of  muscles,  and  to 
enable  the  latter  to  act  more  powerfully  on  the  trunk, 
by  affording  them  a lever  of  considerable  length. 

In  the  neck,  we  see  the  spine  projecting  somewhat 
forward,  to  support  the  head,  which,  without  this 
assistance,  would  require  a greater  number  of  muscles. 
Through  the  whole  length  of  the  thorax  it  is  carried  in 
a curved  direction  backwards,  and  thus  adds  consider- 
ably to  the  cavity  of  the  chest,  and  consequently  affords 
more  room  to  the  lungs,  heart,  and  large  blood-vessels. 
In  the  loins,  the  spine  again  projects  forwards,  in  a di- 
rection with  the  centre  of  gravity,  by  which  means  the 
body  is  easily  kept  in  an  erect  posture;  for  otherwise 
we  should  be  liable  to  fall  forwards.  But,  at  its  infe- 
rior part,  it  again  recedes  backwards,  and  helps  to  form 
a cavity  called  the  pelvis,  in  which  the  urinary  blad 
der,  intestinum  rectum,  and  other  viscera,  are  placed. 

In  a part  of  the  body  that  is  composed  of  so  great  a 
number  of  bones,  and  constructed  for  such  a variety  of 
morion,  as  the  spine  is,  luxation  is  more  to  be  expected 
than  fracture  ; and  this  is  very  wisely  guarded  against 
in  every  direction,  by  the  many  processes  that  are  to  be 
found  in  each  vertebra,  and  by  the  cartilages,  liga- 
ments, and  other  means  of  connexion,  which  we  have 
described  as  uniting  them  together. 

VERTEBRAL.  Vertebralis.  Appertaining  to  the 
vertebrae,  or  bones  of  the  spine. 

Vertebral  artery.  Arteria  vertebralis.  A 
branch  of  the  subclavian,  proceeding  through  the  ver- 
tebrae to  within  the  cranium,  where,  tvith  its  fellow,  it 
forms  the  basilary  artery,  the  internal  auditory,  and  the 
posterior  artery  of  the  dura  mater. 

VE'RTEX.  ( Vertex , tcis,  m. ; from  verto.)  The 
crown  of  the  head.  The  os  verticis  is  the  parietal 
bone. 

Vkrticalia  ossa.  See  Parietal  bones. 

VERTICALIS.  Vertical.  Perpendicular.  Applied 
to  leaves  which  have  both  sides  at  right  angles  with  the 
horizon ; as  in  Lactuca  scariola. 

VERTICELLUS.  A whorl.  The  name  of  a spe- 
cies of  inflorescence,  in  which  the  flowers  surround  the 
stem  in  a sort  of  ring. 

From  the  insertion  of  the  flowers,  the  vesture , and 
distance  of  the  verticellus,  it  is  called, 

1.  Pedunculatus  ; as  in  Milissa  officinalis. 

2.  Sessilis,  in  Mentha  arvensis. 

3.  Dimidiatus,  going  half  round;  as  in  Ballota  dis 
ticha. 

4.  Nu  dus,  without  floral  or  other  leaf;  as  in  Salvia 

verticellata. 

5.  Bracteatus,  in  Ballota  nigra. 

6.  Distans , in  Salvia  indica. 

7.  Confertus , when  crowded  together. 

Ve'rticis  os.  See  Parietal  bones. 

VERTIGO.  Giddiness. 

VERVAIN.  See  Verbena  officinalis. 

Vervain,  female.  See  Erysimum  alliaria. 

VESA'LIUS,  Andrew,  was  born  at  Brussels  about 

the  year  1514.  After  pursuing  his  studies  at  different 
universities,  and  serving  for  two  years  professionally 
with  the  imperial  army,  he  settled  at  Padua,  and  taught 
anatomy  with  great  applause,  which  he  subsequently 
continued  at  some  other  schools  in  Italy.  In  1544,  he 
became  physician  to  Charles  V.,  and  resided  chiefly  at 
the  imperial  court.  About  twenty  years  after,  in  the 
midst  of  his  professional  career,  an  extraordinary  cir- 
cumstance occurred,  which  was  the  cause  of  his  ruin 
Being  summoned  to  examine  the  body  of  a Spanish 


VIJB 


VIN 


gentleman,  and  having  begun  the  operation  too  preci- 
pitately, the  heart  was  observed  to  palpitate  ; in  conse- 
quence of  which,  he  was  accused  before  the  Inquisi- 
tion : but  the  interposition  of  Philip  II.  procured  him 
to  be  merely  enjoined  to  make  a pilgrimage  to  the  Holy 
Land.  While  at  Jerusalem,  he  was  invited  to  the  ana- 
tomical chair  at  Padua ; but  on  his  return,  the  ship  was 
wrecked  on  the  coast  of  Zante,  where  he  soon  after 
died.  Vesalius  has  been  represented  as  the  first  person 
who  rescued  anatomy  from  the  slavery  imposed  upon 
it  by  deference  to  ancient  opinions,  and  led  the  way  to 
modern  improvements.  His  first  publication  of  note 
was  a set  of  Anatomical  Tables,  which  was  soon  fol- 
lowed by  his  great  work  “ De  Corporis  Hutnani  Fabri- 
ca,”  printed  at  Basil  in  1543,  and  often  since  in  several 
countries.  The  earliest  impressions  of  the  plates  are 
most  valued,  but  the  explanations  were  made  subse- 
quently more  correct.  In  a treatise  “ De  Radicis  Chi- 
me Usu,”  he  severely  criticised  the  errors  of  Galen, 
which  engaged  him  in  a controversy  with  Fallopius. 
His  medical  and  surgical  writings  are  not  held  in  much 
estimation. 

VESA'NLE.  (The  plural  of  vesania;  from  vesa- 
nas , a madman.)  The  fourth  order  in  the  Class  Neu- 
roses, of  Cullen’s  nosological  arrangement;  compre- 
hending diseases  in  which  the  judgment  is  impaired, 
without  either  coma  or  pyrexia. 

VESI'CA.  (Diminutive  of  vas , a vessel.)  A 
bladder. 

Vesica  fellis.  The  gall-bladder.  See  Gall-bladder. 

Vesica  urinaria.  The  arinary  bladder.  See 
Urinary  bladder. 

VESICATORY.  (Vesicatorirts ; from  vesica , a 
bladder  : because  it  raises  a bladder.)  See  Epispastic. 

VESICLE.  ( Vesicula ; a diminutive  of  vesica , a 
bladder.)  An  elevation  of  the  cuticle,  containing  a 
transparent  watery  fluid. 

VESI'CULA.  See  Vesicle. 

Vesicula  fellis.  The  gall-bladder. 

VesiculjE  div.e  BARBARiE.  The  confluent  small- 
pox. 

Vesicul*  gingivarum.  The  thrush. 

Vesicula  pulmonales.  The  air-cells  which  com- 
pose the  greatest  part  of  the  lungs,  and  are  situated  at 
the  termination  of  the  bronchia. 

VEsicuLi®  seminales.  Two  membranous  recep- 
tacles, situated  on  the  back  part  of  the  bladder,  above 
its  neck.  The  excretory  ducts  are  called  ejaculatory 
ducts.  They  proceed  to  the  urethra,  into  which  they 
open  by  a peculiar  orifice  at  the  top  of  the  verumonta- 
num.  They  have  vessels  and  nerves  from  the  neigh- 
bouring parts,  and  are  well  supplied  with  absorbent 
vessels,  which  proceed  to  the  lymphatic  glands  about 
the  loins.  The  use  of  the  vesiculie  seminales  is  to  re- 
ceive the  semen  brought  into  them  by  the  vasa  defe- 
rentia,  to  retain,  somewhat  inspissate,  and  to  excern 
it  sub  coitu  into  the  urethra,  from  whence  it  is  pro- 
pelled into  the  vagina  uteri. 

Vesicular  fever.  See  Pemphigus. 

VESTI'BULUM.  A round  cavity  of  the  internal 
ear,  between  the  cochlea  and  semicircular  canals,  in 
which  are  an  oval  opening  communicating  with  the 
cavity  of  the  tympanum,  and  the  orifices  of  the  semi- 
circular canals.  It  is  within  this  cavity  and  the  semi- 
circular canals,  that  the  new  apparatus  discovered  by 
the  celebrated  neurologist  Scarpa,  lies.  He  has  demon- 
strated membranous  tubes,  collected  loosely  by  cellular 
texture,  within  the  bony  semicircular  canals,  each  of 
which  is  dilated  in  the  cavity  of  the  vestibule  into  an 
ampulla;  it  is  upon  these  ampullae,  which  communi- 
cate by  means  of  an  alveus  communis , that  branches  of 
the  portio  mollis  are  expanded. 

VESUVIAN.  Idocrase  of  Haiiy.  A subspecies  of 
pyramidal  garnet  of  a green  or  brown  colour,  found  in 
great  abundance  in  unaltered  ejected  rocks  in  the  vi- 
cinity of  Vesuvius.  At  Naples  it  is  cut  into  ring  stones. 

Veto'nica  cordi.  See  Betonica. 

VEX1LLUM.  ( Vexillum , t,  n. ; a banner  or  stand- 
ard.) The  standard,  or  large  uppermost  petal  at  the 
back  of  a papilionaceous  flower. 

VIA.  A way  or  passage.  Used  in  anatomy.  See 
Primal  vice. 

VI'BEX.  (V ibex,  ids , plu.  Vibices.)  The  large 
purple  spot  which  appears  under  the  skin  in  certain 
malignant  fevers. 

VIBRI'SSAiJ.  ( Vibrissa ; from  vibro,  to  quaver.) 
Hairs  growing  in  the  nostrils.  See  Capillust. 

1 i i 2 


Viburnum  lantana.  Liburnum.  The  pliant  mea.y 
tree.  The  berries  are  considered  as  adstringent. 

VICHY.  The  name  of  a town  in  France,  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  which  is  a tepid  mineral  spring.  On 
account  of  its  chalybeate  and  alkaline  ingredients,  it  is 
taken  internally,  being  reputed  to  be  of  great  service 
in  bilious  colics,  diarrhoeas,  and  in  disorders  of  the 
stomach,  especially  such  as  arise  from  a relaxed  or  de- 
bilitated state  of  that  organ. 

These  waters  are  likowise  very  useful  when  em- 
ployed as  a tepid-bath,  particularly  in  rheumatism, 
sciatica,  gout,  &c.  By  combining  the  internal  use  with 
the  external  application,  they  have  often  effected  a cure 
where  other  remedies  had  failed  to  afford  relief. 

VI'CIA.  ( Viscia , an  old  Latin  name,  derived  by 
some  etymologists  from  Vincio , to  bind  together,  as  the 
various  species  of  this  genus  twine,  with  their  tendrils, 
round  other  plants.)  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants 
in  the  Linmean  system.  Class,  Diadclphia ; Order, 
Decandria. 

Vicia  faba.  The  systematic  name  of  the  common 
bean-plant.  It  is  a native  of  Egypt.  There  are  many 
varieties.  Beans  are  very  wholesome  and  nutritious 
to  those  whose  stomachs  are  strong,  and  accustomed 
to  the  coarser  modes  of  living.  In  delicate  stomachs 
they  produce  flatulency,  dyspepsia,  cardialgia,  &c.  es- 
pecially when  old.  See  Legumina. 

Victoria' lis  longa.  See  Allium  victorialis. 

VIEUSSENS,  Raymond,  was  born  at  a village  in 
Rovergne,  graduated  at  Montpellier,  and  in  1671  wa3 
chosen  physician  to  the  hospital  of  St.  Eloy.  The  result 
of  his  anatomical  researches  in  this  situation  was  pub- 
lished under  the  title  of  Neurology,  and  gained  him 
great  reputation.  His  name  became  known  at  court, 
and  Mad.  de  Montpensier  made  him  her  physician. 
After  her  death  he  returned  to  Montpellier,  and  di- 
rected his  attention  to  chemistry;  and  having  found  an 
acid  in  the  caput  mortuum  of  the  blood,  he  made  this 
the  groundwork  of  a new  medical  theory.  In  ad- 
vanced life,  his  writings  were  multiplied  without  aug- 
menting his  reputation.  He  died  in  1726. 

VIGILANCE.  Pervigilium.  Vigilance,  when  at- 
tended by  anxiety,  pain  in  the  head,  loss  of  appetite, 
and  diminution  of  strength,  is  by  Sauvages  and  Sasar 
considered  as  a genus  of  disease,  and  is  called  Agrypnia. 

VILLOSUS.  Villous,  shaggy  : applied  in  anatomy 
to  a velvet-like  arrangement  of  fibres  or  vessels,  as  the 
viilous  coat  of  the  intestines : and  in  botany  to  the 
stem  of  the  Cineraria  integrifolia , and  to  other  parts 
of  plants ; as  the  receptacle  of  the  Artemisia  absynthium. 

VILLUS.  A species  of  hairy  pubescens  of  plants, 
consisting  of  soft,  slender,  upright,  short,  and  scarcely 
conspicuous,  and  for  the  most  part  white  hair-like  fila- 
ments. 

VI'NCA.  (From  vincio , to  bind : because  of  its 
usefulness  in  making  bands.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Pentandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Vinca  minor.  The  systematic  name  of  the  less 
periwinkle.  Vinca  pervinca ; Clematis  daphnoides 
major.  It  possesses  bitter  and  adstringent  virtues,  and 
is  said  to  be  efficacious  in  stopping  nasal  luemorrhages 
when  bruised  and  put  into  the  nose.  Boiled,  it  forms  a 
useful  adstringent  gargle  in  common  sore  throat,  and  it 
is  given  by  some  in  phthisical  complaints. 

Vinca  pervinca.  See  Vinca  minor. 

VINCETO'XICUM.  (From  vinco , to  overcome,  and 
toxicum,  poison : so  named  from  its  supposed  virtue  of 
resisting  and  expelling  poison.)  See  Asclepias  vince- 
toxicum. 

VINE.  See  Vitis. 

Vine , white.  See  Bryonia  alba 

Vine,  wild.  See  Bryonia  alba. 

VINEGAR.  See  Acetum. 

Vinegar , aromatic.  See  Acetum  aromaticum 

Vinegar , distilled  See  Acetum. 

Vinegar , spirits  of.  See  Acetum. 

Vinegar  of  squills.  See  Acetum  scillce. 

Vinegar , thieves'.  See  Acetum  aromaticum. 

VI'NUM.  See  Wine. 

Vinum  aloes.  Wine  of  aloes.  Formerly  known 
by  the  names  of  Tinctura  hierce,  and  Tinctura  sacra. 
Take  of  extract  of  spiked  aloe,  eight  ounces ; canella- 
bark,  two  ounces;  wine,  six  pints;  proof  spirits,  two 
pints.  Rub  the  aloes  into  powder  with  white  sand, 
previously  cleansed  from  any  impurities ; rub  the  ca 
nella-bark  also  into  powder ; and  after  having  mixed 


VIO 


VIS 


these  powders  together,  pour  on  the  wine  and  spirit. 
Macerate  for  fourteen  days  occasionally  shaking  the 
mixture,  and  afterward  strain.  A stomachic  purga- 
tive, calculated  for  the  aged  and  phlegmatic,  who  are 
not  troubled  with  the  piles.  The  dose  is  from  a half  to 
a whole  fluid  ounce. 

Vinum  antimonii.  In  small  doses  this  proves  al- 
terative and  diaphoretic,  and  a large  dose  emetic ; in 
which  last  intention  it  is  the  common  emetic  for  chil- 
dren. 

Vinum  antimonii  tartarizati.  See  Antimonium 
tart.arizatum. 

Vinum  ferri.  Wine  of  iron,  formerly  called  Vinum 
chalybeatum.  Take  of  iron  filings,  two  ounces;  wine.  1 
two  pints.  Mix,  and  set  the  mixture  by  for  a month, 
occasionally  shaking  it;  then  filter  it  through  paper. 
For  its  virtues,  see  Ferrum  tartarizatum. 

Vinum  ipecacuanha.  Wine  of  ipecacuanha.  Take 
of  ipecacuanha-root,  bruised,  two  ounces;  wine,  two 
pints.  Macerate  for  fourteen  days,  and  strain.  The 
dose,  when  used  as  an  emetic,  is  from  two  fluid  drachms 
to  half  a fluid  ounce. 

Vinum  opii.  Wine  of  opium,  formerly  known  by 
the  names  of  Laudanum  liquidum  sydcnhami , and 
Tinctura  thebaica.  Take  of  extract  of  opium,  an 
ounce;  cinr.ainon-bark,  bruised,  cloves,  bruised,  of  each 
a drachm ; wine,  a pint.  Macerate  for  eight  days,  and 
strain.  See  Opium. 

Vinum  veratri.  Wine  of  white  hellebore.  Take 
of  white  hellebore-root,  sliced,  eight  ounces ; wine, 
two  pints  and  a half ; macerate  for^ fourteen  days,  and 
strain.  See  Veratrum. 

VI' OLA.  (From  Iov ; because  it  was  first  found  in 
Ionia.)  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Lin- 
nrean  system.  Class,  Syngcnesia  ; Order,  Monogynia. 
The  violet. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  sweet  violet. 
See  Viola  odorata. 

Viola  canina.  The  dog-violet.  The  root  of  this 
plant  possesses  the  power  of  vomiting  and  purging  the 
bowels;  wiih  which  intention  a scrupie  of  the  dried 
root  must  be  exhibited.  It  appears,  though  neglected 
in  this  country,  worthy  the  attention  of  physicians. 

Viola  ipecacuanha.  The  plant  which  was  sup- 
posed to  afiord  the  ipecacuanha  root. 

Viola  lutea.  See  Cheiranthus  chciri. 

Viola  odorata.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
sweet  violet.  Viola — acaulis,  foliis  cordatis , stoloni- 
bus  repentibus , of  Linnasus.  The  recent  flowers  of 
.his  plant  are  received  into  the  catalogues  of  the  ma- 
teria medica.  They  have  an  agreeable  sweet  smell, 
and  a mucilaginous  bitterish  taste.  Their  virtues  are 
purgative  or  laxative,  and  by  some  they  are  said  to 
possess  an  anodyne  and  pectoral  quality.  The  officinal 
preparation  of  this  flower  is  a syrup,  which,  to  young 
children,  answers  the  purpose  of  a purgative;  it  is  also 
of  considerable  utility  in  many  chemical  inquiries,  to 
detect  an  acid  or  an  alkali;  the  former  changing  the 
blue  colour  to  a red,  and  the  latter  to  a green. 

Viola  palustris.  See  Pinguicula. 

[Viola  pedata.  The  violets  are  generally  mucila- 
ginous plants,  and  employed  as  demulcents  in  catarrh 
and  strangury.  Some  of  them  are  allied  to  ipeca- 
cuanha, and  contain  emetin  in  their  substance.  The 
viola  pedata , a native  species  retained  in  the  pharma- 
copoeia, is  considered  a useful  expectorant  and  lubri- 
cating medicine  in  pulmonary  complaints,  and  is  given 
in  syrup  or  decoction.  Big.  Mat.  Mod.  A.] 

Viola  tricolor.  Harts-ease.  Pansies.  This  well- 
known  beautiful  little  plant  grows  in  corn-fields,  waste 
and  cultivated  grounds,  flowering  all  the  summer 
months.  It  varies  much 'by  cultivation;  and  by  the 
vivid  colouring  of  its  flowers  often  becqmes  extremeiy 
beautiful  in  gardens,  where  it  is  distinguislied  by  various 
names.  To  the  taste,  this  plant  in  itsrecent  state  is 
extremely  glutinous,  or  mucilaginous,  accompanied 
with  the  common  herbaceous  flavour  and  roughness. 
By  distillation  with  water,  according  to  Haase,  it  af- 
fords a small  quantity  of  odorous  essential  oil,  of  a 
somewhat  acrid  taste.  The  dried  herb  yields  about 
half  its  weight  of  watery  extract,  the  fresh  plant  about 
one-eighth.  Though  many  of  the  old  writers  on  the 
materia  medica  represent  this  plant  as  a powerful  me- 
dicine in  epilepsy,  asthma,  ulcers,  scabies,  and  cutane- 
ous complaints,  yet  the  viola  tricolor  owes  its  present 
character  as  a medicine  to  the  modern  authorities  of 
Starck,  Metzger,  Haase,  and  others,  especially  as  a 


remedy  for  the  crusta  lactea.  For  this  purpose,  a 
handful  of  the  fresh  herb,  or  half  a drachm  of  it  dried, 
boiled  two  hours  in  milk,  is  to  be  strained  and  taken 
night  and  morning.  Bread,  with  this  decoction,  is  also 
to  be  formed  into  a poultice,  and  applied  to  the  part. 
By  this  treatment,  it  has  been  observed,  that  the 
eruption  during  the  first  eight  days,  increases,  and 
that  the  urine,  when  the  medicine  succeeds,  has  an 
odour  similar  to  that  of  cats ; but  on  continuing  the 
use  of  the  plant  a sufficient  time,  this  smell  goes  off, 
the  scabs  disappear,  and  the  skin  recovers  its  natural 
purity.  Instances  of  the  successful  exhibition  of  this 
medicine,  as  cited  by  these  authors,  are  very  numerous, 
indeed  this  remedy,  under  their  management,  seems 
rarely,  if  ever,  to  have  failed.  It  appears,  however, 
that  Mursinna,  Akermann,  and  Henning  were  less 
fortunate  in  the  employment  of  this  plant : the  last  of 
whom  declares,  that  in  the  different  cutaneous  disor- 
ders in  which  he  used  it,  no  benefit  was  derived. 
Haase,  who  administered  this  species  of  violet  in  va- 
rious forms  and  large  doses,  extended  its  use  to  many 
chronic  disorders ; and  from  the  great  number  of  cases 
in  which  it  proved  successful,  we  are  desirous  of  re- 
commending it  to  a farther  trial  in  this  country. 

It  is  remarkable  that  Bergius  speaks  of  this  plant  as 
a useful  mucilaginous  purgative,  and  takes  no  notice 
of  its  efficacy  in  the  crustea  lactea,  or  in  any  other 
disease. 

VIOLA'RTA.  See  Viola. 

VIOLET.  See  Viola  odorata. 

Violet , dog.  See  Viola  canina. 

VIPER.  See  Vipera. 

VIPER-GRASS.  See  Scorzoner  . 

VIPERA.  ( Quod  vi  pariat : because  it  was 
thought  that  its  young  eat  through  the  mother’s  bowels.) 
The  viper  or  adder.  See  Coluber  berus. 

VIPERA'RIA.  See  Aristolochia  serpentaria. 

VIPERI'JVA.  (From  vipera , a snake  : so  called 
from  the  serpentine  appearance  of  its  roots.)  See 
Aristolochia  serpentaria. 

Viperina  Virginian  a.  See  Aristolochia  serpen- 
taria. 

Vi'rga  aurea.  See  Solidago  virga  aurea. 

Virga'ta  sutur  v.  The  sagittal  suture  of  the  skull 

VIRGIN’S  BOWER.  See  Clematis  recta. 

Virgin's  milk.  A solution  of  gum-benzoin. 

Virgina'le  claustrum.  The  hymen. 

Virginian  snake-root.  See  Aristolochia  virginiana. 

Virginian  tobacco.  See  Nicotiana. 

VI  RUS.  See  Contagion. 

VIS.  Power.  In  physiology,  applied  to  vital  power 
and  its  effects : hence  vis  vit<e,  vis  insita,  vis  irrita- 
bilis,  vis  nervia , &C. 

Vis  conservatrix.  See  Vis  mcdicatrix  nature. 

Vis  elastica.  Elasticity. 

Vis  inertia.  The  propensity  to  rest  inherent  in 
nature,. 

Vis  insita.  This  property  is  defined  by  Haller  to 
be  that  power  by  which  a muscle,  when  wounded, 
touched,  or  irritated,  contracts,  independent  of  the  will 
of  the  animal  that  is  the  object  of  the  experiment,  and 
without  its  feeling  pain.  See  Irritability. 

Vis  medicatrix  nature.  Vis  conservatrix.  A 
term  employed  by  physicians  to  express  that  healing 
power  in  an  animated  body,  by  which,  when  diseased, 
the  body  is  enabled  to  regain  its  healthy  actions. 

Vis  moktua.  That  property  by  which  a muscle, 
after  the  death  of  the  animal,  or  a muscle,  immedi- 
ately after  having  been  cut  out  from  a living  body, 
contracts. 

Vis  nervosa.  This  property  is  considered  by 
Whytt  to  be  another  power  of  the  muscles  by  which 
they  act  when  excited  by  the  nerves. 

Vis  plastica.  That  facility  of  formation  which 
spontaneously  operates  in  animals. 

Vis  a tergo.  Any  impulsive  power. 

Vis  vitje.  The  natural  power  of  the  animal  ma- 
chine in  preserving  life. 

From  the  most  remote  antiquity,  philosophers  were 
persuaded  that  a great  part  of  the  phenomena  peculiar 
to  living  bodies,  did  not  follow  the  same  course,  nor 
obey  the  same  laws,  as  the  phenomena  proper  to  brute 
matter. 

To  these  phenomena  of  living  bodies,  a particular 
cause  has  been  assigned,  which  lias  received  different 
denominations.  Hippocrates  bestows  on  it  the  appel- 
lation of  physis,  or  nature , Aristotle  calls  it  the  moving 


VIS 


VIS 


or  generating  principle;  Kaw  Boerhaave,  the  impe- 
tum  faciens  ; Van  Iielmont,  archcea;  Stahl,  the  svul ; 
others,  the  vis  insita,  vis  vita ?,  vital  force,  &c. 

VISCIDITY.  (Vicidilas ; from  viscus.)  Visco- 
sity : glutinous,  sticky,  like  the  bird-lime. 

VISCIDUS.  Viscid.  1.  Of  the  nature  of  ropy  pulp 
of  the  viscum,  or  missletoe.  In  general  use  to  imply 
viscidity  in  fluids,  &c. 

2.  See  Lentor. 

VI'SCUM.  (Viscum,  i,  n. ; and  Viscus,  i,  m.  De- 
rived from  the  Greek,  t£off,  altered  by  the  iEolians  into 
Pkjko;.)  1.  The  fruit  of  the  misletoe.  See  Viscum 
album. 

2.  The  name  of  a genus  of  parasitical  plants  in 
the  Linnaean  system.  Class  Diaicia;  Order,  Tetran- 
dria. 

Viscum  aleum.  Viscus  guercinus.  Misletoe. 
This  singular  parasitical  plant  most  commonly  grows 
on  apple-trees,  also  on  the  pear,  hawthorn,  service, 
oak,  hazel,  maple,  ash,  lime-tree,  willow,  elm,  horn- 
bean,  &c.  It  is  supposed  to  be  propagated  by  birds, 
especially  by  the  field-fare  and  thrush,  which  feed 
upon  its  berries,  the  seeds  of  which  pass  through  the 
bowels  unchanged ; and  along  with  the  excrement 
adhere  to  the  branches  of  trees  where  they  vegetate. 

The  misletoe  of  the  oak'  has,  from  the  times  of  the 
ancient  Druids,  been  always  preferred  to  that  produced 
on  other  trees-;  but  it  is  now  well  known  that  the  viscus 
quercus  differs  in  no  respect  from  others. 

This  plant  is  the  of  the  Greeks,  and  was  in  former 
times  thought  to  possess  many  medicinal  virtues ; how- 
ever, we  learn  but  little  concerning  its  efficacy  from 
the  ancient  writers. on  the  Materia  Medica,  nor  will  it 
be  deemed  necessary  to  state  the  extraordinary  powers 
ascribed  to  the  misletoe  by  the  crafty  designs  of  Drui- 
dical  knavery.  Both  the  leaves  and  branches  of  the 
plant  have  very  little  smell,  and  a very  weak  taste  of 
the  nauseous  kind.  In  distillation  they  impregnate 
water  with  their  faint  unpleasant  smell,  but  yield  no 
essential  oil.  Extracts  made  from  them  by  water,  are 
bitterish,  roughish,  and  subsaline.  The  spirituous 
extract  of  the  wood  has  the  greatest  austerity,  and  that 
of  the  leaves  the  greatest  bitterness.  The  berries 
abound  with  an  extremely  tenacious  and  most  un- 
grateful sweet  mucilage. 

Theriscws  quercus  obtained  great  reputation  for  the 
cure  of  epilepsy ; and  a case  of  this  disease,  of  a 
woman  of  quality,  in  which  it  proved  remarkably  suc- 
cessful, is  mentioned  by  Boyle.  Some  years  after- 
ward its  use  was  strongly  recommended  in  various 
convulsive  disorders  by  Colhach,  who  has  related 
several  instances  of  its  good  effects.  He  administered 
it  in  substance  In  doses  of  half  a drachm,  or  a 
drachm,  of  the  wood  or  leaves,  or  an  infusion  of  an 
ounce.  This  author  was  followed  by  others,  who  have 
not  only  given  testimony  of  the  efficacy  of  the  misletoe 
in  different  convulsive  affections,  but  also  in  those 
complaints  denominated  nervous,  in  which  it  was  sup- 
posed to  act  in  the  character  of  a tonic.  But  all  that 
has  'been  written  in  favour  of  this  remedy,  which  is 
certainly  well  deserviug  of  notice,  has  not  prevented 
it  from  falling  into  general  neglect ; and  the  colleges 
of  London  and  Edinburgh  have,  perhaps  not  without 
reason,  expunged  it  from  their  catalogues  of  the 
Materia  Medica. 

VESCUS.  ( Viscus , eris,  n. ; plural,  viscera.)  1. 
Any  organ  or  part  which  has  an  appropriate  use,  as 
the  viscera  of  the  abdomen,  &.c. 

2.  (Viscus,  i,  m.)  The  name  of  the  misletoe.  Sec 
Viscum  album. 

VISION.  ( Visus , &s,  m.)  The  function  which 
enables  us  to  perceive  the  magnitude,  figure,  colour, 
distance,  & c.  of  bodies.  The  organs  which  compose 
the  apparatus  of  vision  enter  into  action  under  the 
influence  of  a particular  excitant,  or  stimulus,  called 
light. 

We  perceive  bodies,  we  take  cognizance  of  many 
of  their  properties,  though  they  are  often  at  a great 
distance ; — there  must  then  be  between  them  and  our 
eye  some  intermediate  agent;  this  intermediate  sub- 
stance we  denominate  light.  Light  is  an  excessively 
subtle  fluid,  which  emanates  from  those  bodies  called 
luminous,  as  the  sun,  the  fixed  stars,  bodies  in  a state 
of  ignition,  phosphorescence,  &c.  Light  is  composed 
of  atoms  which  move  with  a prodigious  rapidity,  since 
they  pass  through  about  eighty  thousand  leagues  of 
space  in  a second. 


A series  of  atoms,  or  particles,  which  succeed  each 
other  in  a right  line  without  interruption  are  denomi- 
nated a ray  of  light.  The  atoms  which  compose 
every  ray  of  light  are  separated  by  intervals,  that  are 
considerable  in  proportion  to  their  mass;  which  cir- 
cumstances permit  a considerable  number  of  rays  to 
cross  each  other  in  the  same  point,  without  their  par- 
ticles coining  in  contact. 

The  light  that  proceeds  from  luminous  bodies  forms 
diverging  cones,  which  would  prolong  themselves  in- 
definitely, did  they  meet  with  no  obstacles.  Philoso- 
phers have  from  thence  concluded,  that  the  intensity 
of  light  in  any  place,  is  always  in  an  inverse  ratio  to 
the  square  of  the  distance  of  the  luminous  bodies 
from  which  it  proceeds.  The  cones  that  are  formed 
by  the  light  in  passing  from  luminous  bodies,  are,  in 
general,  called  pencils  of  light,  or  pencils  of  rays,  and 
the  bodies  through  which  the  light  moves  are  designated 
by  the  name  of  media. 

When  light  happens  to  come  in  contact  with  certain 
bodies  that  are  called  opaque,  it  is  repulsed,  and  its 
direction  is  modified  according  to  the  disposition  of 
those  bodies. — The  change  that  light  suffers  in  its 
course  is,  in  this  case,  called  refection.  The  study  of 
reflection  constitutes  that  part  of  physics,  which  is 
named  catoptrics. 

Certain  bodies  allow  the  light  to  pass  through  them ; 
for  instance  glass : they  are  said  to  be  transparent.  In 
passing  through  these  bodies,  light  suffers  a certain 
change  which  is  called  refraction.  As  the  mechanism 
of  vision  rests  entirely  upon  the  principle  of  refrac- 
tion, the  examination  of  these  becomes,  therefore,  a 
matter  of  importance. 

The  point  where  a ray  of  light  enters  into  a medium 
is  called  the  point  of  immersion ; and  that  where  it 
goes  out  is  called  the  point  of  emergence. 

If  the  ray  comes  in  contact  with  a medium  in  a line 
perpendicular  to  its  surface,  the  ray  then  continues  its 
direction  without  any  change ; but  if  its  direction  is 
oblique  to  the  surface  of  the  medium,  the  ray  is  then 
turned  out  of  its  course,  and  appears  broken  at  the 
point  of  immersion. 

The  angle  of  incidence  is  that  which  the  incident 
ray  makes  with  a perpendicular  line  drawn  over  the 
point  of  immersion  upon  the  surface  of  the  medium, 
and  the  angle  of  refraction  is  that  which  the  broken 
ray  makes  with  the  perpendicular. 

If  the  ray  of  light  pass  from  a rare  medium  into  one 
more  dense,  it  inclines  towards  the  perpendicular  at 
the  point  of  contact;  but  it  declines  from  it  if  it  pass 
from  a dense  medium  into  one  that  is  rarer.  The 
same  phenomenon  takes  place,  but  in  a contrary  di- 
rection, when  the  ray  enters  into  the  first  medium; 
this  takes  place  in  such  a manner,  that  if  the  two  sur- 
faces of  the  medium  traversed  by  the  ray  are  parallel 
to  each  other,  the  ray  in  passing  into  the  surrounding 
medium,  will  take  a direction  parallel  to  that  of  the 
incident  ray. 

Bodies  refract  the  light  in  proportion  to  their  den- 
sity and  combustibility.  Thus,  of  two  bodies  of  equal 
density,  one  of  which  being  composed  of  more  com- 
bustible elements  than  the  other,  the  refractive 
power  of  the  first  will  be  greater  than  that  of  the 
second. 

All  transparent  bodies  refract  at  the  same  time  that 
they  reflect  the  light.  On  account  of  this  property 
these  bodies  are  capable  of  being  used  as  a sort  of 
mirror.  When  their  density  is  very  inconsiderable, 
such  as  that  of  the  air,  they  are  not  visible  unless  their 
mass  be  considerable. 

The  form  of  a refractive  body  has  no  influence  upon 
its  refractive  power ; but  it  modifies  the  disposition  of 
the  refracted  rays  in  respect  to  each  other.  In  fact,  the 
perpendiculars  to  the  surfaces  of  the  body,  approiiching 
or  receding  according  to  the  form  of  the  body,  the  re- 
fracting rays  should  at  the  same  time  approach  or 
recede. 

* When,  by  the  effort  of  a refractive  body,  the  rays 
tend  towards  each  other,  the  point  where  they  unite  is 
called  the  focus  of  the  'refractive  body.  Bodies  of  a 
lenticular  form  are  those  which  present  principally  this 
phenomenon. 

A refractive  body,  with  parallel  surfaces,  does  not 
change  the  direction  of  the  rays,  but  it  inclines  them 
towards  its  axis  by  a sort  of  transportation.  A refrac- 
tive body  of  two  convex  sides  does  not  possess  a greater 
refractive  power  than  a body  convex  on  one  side,  and 


VIS 


VIS 


plane  on  the  other ; but  the  point  behind  it  in  which 
the  rays  are  united  is  much  nearer. 

The  discovery  of  the  action  of  refractive  bodies 
upon  light  has  not  been  an  object  of  simple  curiosity ; 
it  has  led  to  the  construction  of  ingenious  instruments, 
by  means  of  which  the  sphere  of  human  vision  has 
been  extended  to  an  extraordinary  degree. 

Apparatus  of  vision. — The  apparatus  of  vision  is 
composed  of  three  distinct  parts. 

The  first  modifies  the  light. 

The  second  receives  the  impression  of  that  fluid. 

The  third  transmits  this  impression  to  the  brain. 

The  apparatus  of  vision  is  of  an  extremely  delicate 
texture,  capable  of  being  deranged  by  the  least  acci- 
dent. Nature  has  also  placed  before  this  apparatus  a 
series  of  organs,  the  use  of  which  is  to  protect  and 
maintain  it  in  those  conditions  necessary  to  the  perfect 
exercise  of  its  functions.  Those  protecting  parts  are 
the  eyebrows,  the  eyelids,  and  the  secreting  and  ex- 
creting apparatus  of  the  tears. 

The  eyebrows,  which  are  peculiar  to  man,  are 
formed, 

1.  By  hair , of  a variable  colour. 

2.  By  the  skin. 

3.  By  sebaceous  follicles  placed  at  the  root  of  every 
hair. 

4.  By  muscles  destined  for  their  various  motions, 
viz.  the  frontal  portion  of  the  occipito-frontalis,  the 
superior  edge  of  the  orbicularis  palpebrarum,  the  su- 
percilium. 

5.  N umerous  vessels. 

6.  Nerves. 

The  eye  is  composed  of  parts  which  have  very  dif- 
ferent uses  in  the  production  of  vision.  They  may  be 
distinguished  into  refractive,  and  non-refractive. 

The  refractive  parts  are : 

A.  The  transparent  cornea , a refractive  body,  con- 
vex and  concave,  which,  in  its  transparency,  its  form, 
and  its  insertion,  pretty  much  resembles  the  glass  that 
is  placed  before  the  face  of  a watch. 

B.  The  aqueous  humour  wtfiich  fills  the  chambers  of 
the  eye ; a liquid  which  is  not  purely  aqueous,  as  its 
name  indicates,  but  is  essentially  composed  of  water, 
and  of  a little  albumen. 

C.  The  crystalline  humour,  which  is  improperly 
compared  to  a lens.  The  comparison  would  be  exact, 
were  it  merely  for  the  form ; but  it  is  defective  in  re- 
gard to  structure.  The  crystalline  is  composed  of  con- 
centric layers,  the  hardness  of  which  increases  from 
the  surface  to  the  centre,  and  which  probably  pos- 
sesses different  refractive  powers.  The  crystalline  is, 
besides,  surrounded  by  a membrane,  which  has  a 
great  effect  upon  vision,  as  experience  teaches  us.  A 
lens  is  homogeneous  in  all  its  parts ; at  its  surface,  as 
in  every  point  of  its  substance;  it  possesses  every 
where  the  same  refractive  power.  However,  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  remark  that  the  curve  of  the  anterior  sur- 
face of  the  crystalline  is  very  far  from  being  similar  to 
that  of  the  posterior  aspect.  This  last  belongs  to  a 
sphere,  of  which  the  diameter  is  much  less  than  that 
of  the  sphere  to  which  the  curve  of  the  anterior  sur- 
face belongs.  Until  now  it  has  been  understood  that 
the  crystalline  was  composed  mostly  of  albumen ; but 
according  to  a new  ana'ysis  of  Berzelius,  it  does  not 
contain  any : it  is  formed  almost  entirely  of  water,  and 
of  a peculiar  matter  that  has  a great  analogy,  in  its 
chemical  properties,  to  the  colouring  matter  of  the 
blood. 

D.  Behind  the  crystalline  is  the  vitreous  humour,  so 
called  because  of  its  resemblance  to  melted  glass. 

Each  of  the  parts  which  we  have  noticed  is  enve- 
loped by  a very  thin  membrane,  which  is  transparent 
'ike  the  part  that  it  covers:  thus,  before  the  cornea  is 
the  conjunctiva;  behind  it  is  the  membrane  of  the 
aqueous  humour,  which  lines  all  the  anterior  chamber 
of  tire  eye;  that  is,  the  anterior  surface  of  the  iris,  and 
the  posterior  surface  of  the  cornea. 

The  crystalline  is  surrounded  by  the  crystalline  cap‘- 
sule,  which  adheres  by  its  circumference  to  the  mem- 
brane that  covers  the  vitreous  humour.  This,  in  pass- 
ing from  the  circumference  of  the  crystalline  upon  the 
anterior  and  posterior  surfaces  of  this  part,  leaves  be- 
tween an  interval  which  has  been  called  the  canal 
gondronni. 

The  vitreous  humour  is  also  surrounded  by  a mem- 
brane called  hyaloid.  This  membrane  does  not  alone 
contain  this  humour,  it  is  sent  down  among  it,  and 


separating,  forms  it  into  cells.  The  details  of  anatomy, 
with  regard  to  the  disposition  of  the  cells,  have  not 
hitherto  added  any  thing  to  what  is  known  of  the  use 
of  the  vitreous  humour. 

The  eye  is  not  only  composed  of  parts  that  are  re- 
fractive, but  it  is  composed  also  of  membranes  which 
have  each#a  particular  use ; these  are : — 

A.  The  sclerotic,  the  exterior  envelope  of  the  eye, 
which  is  a membrane  of  a fibrous  nature ; it  is  thick 
and  resisting,  and  its  use  is  evidently  to  protect  the  in- 
terior parts  of  the  organ ; it  serves  besides  as  a point 
of  insertion  for  many  muscles  that  move  the  eye. 

B.  The  choroid,  a vascular  and  nervous  membrane, 
formed  by  two  distinct  plates ; it  is  impregnated  with 
a dark  matter  which  is  very  important  to  vision. 

C.  The  iris,  which  is  seen  behind  the  transparent 
cornea,  is  differently  coloured  in  different  individuals ; 
it  is  pierced  in  the  centre  by  an  opening  called  the  pupil , 
which  dilates  or  contracts  according  to  certain  circum- 
stances which  we  shall  notice.  The  iris  adheres  out- 
wardly, and  by  its  circumference,  to  the  sclerotic,  by 
a cellular  tissue  of  a particular  nature,  which  is  called 
the  ciliary,  or  iridian  ligament.  There  are,  behind 
the  iris,  a great  number  of  white  lines  arranged  in  the 
manner  of  rays,  which  would  unite  at  the  centre  of 
the  iris,  if  they  were  sufficiently  prolonged : these  are 
the  ciliary  processes. 

Neither  the  use  nor  the  structure  ®f  these  bodies  has 
been  properly  determined : they  are  believed  by  some  to 
be  nervous,  by  others  to  be  muscular,  while  others  think 
them  glandular,  or  vascular.  The  truth  is,  their  real 
structure  is  not  understood. 

The  colour  of  the  iris  depends  on  its  structure, 
which  is  variable,  and  on  that  of  the  dark  layer  of  its 
posterior  surface,  the  colour  of  which  shines  through 
the  iris.  For  instance,  the  tissue  of  the  iris  is  nearly 
white  in  blue  eyes ; in  this  case  the  dark  colour  behind 
appears  almost  alone,  and  determines  the  colour  of  the 
eyes. 

Anatomists  differ  about  the  nature  of  the  tissue  of 
the  iris  : some  think  it  entirely  like  that  of  the  choroid, 
essentially  composed  of  vessels  and  of  nerves ; others 
have  imagined  they  saw  a great  many  muscular1  fibres 
in  it ; others  consider  this  membrane  a tissue  sui  ge- 
neris ; and  others  confound  it  with  the  erectile  struc- 
ture. Edwards  has  shown  that  the  iris  is  formed  by 
four  layers  very  easy  to  be  distinguished,  two  of  which 
are  a continuation  of  the  Iqrninae  of  the  choroid;  u 
third  belongs  to  the  membrane  of  the  aqueous  humour ; 
and  a fourth  forms  the  proper  tissue  of  the  iris. 

Between  the  choroid  and  the  hyaloid  there  exists  a 
membrane  essentially  nervous.  This  membrane,  known 
by  the  name  of  the  retina,  is  almost  transparent ; it 
presents  a slight  opacity,  and  a tint  feebly  inclining  to 
lilac ; it  is  composed  of  the  expansion  of  the  threads 
which  compose  the  optic  nerve.  - . 

The  eye  receives  a great  number  of  vessels,  the 
ciliary  arteries  and  veins , and  many  nerves,  the 
greater  part  of  which  come  from  the  ophthalmic  gan- 
glion. 

The  optic  nerve  preserves  the  communication  be- 
tween the  brain  and  the  eye. 

Mechanism  of  vision. — In  order  the  better  to  explain 
the  action  of  light  in  the  eye,  let  us  suppose  a luminous 
cone  commencing  in  a point  placed  in. the  prolongation 
of  the  anterior-posterior  axis  of  the  eye.  We  see 
that  only  the  light  which  falls  upon  the  cornea  can  be 
useful  for  vision ; that  which  falls  on  the  white  of  the 
eye,  the  eyelids  and  eyelashes,  contributes  nothing ; it 
is  reflected  by  those  parts  differently  according  to  their 
colour.  The  cornea  itself  does  not  receive  the  light  on 
its  whole  extent ; for  it  is  generally  covered  in  part  by 
the  border  of  the  eyelids. 

The  cornea  having  a fine  polish  on  its  surface,  as 
soon  as  the  light  reaches  it,  part  of  it  is  reflected,  which 
contributes  to  form  the  brilliancy  of  the  eye.  The 
same  reflected  light  forms  the  images  which  one  sees 
behind  the  cornea.  In  this  case  the  cornea  acts  as  a 
convex  mirror.  The  form  of  the  cornea  indicates  the 
influence  it  should  have  upon  the  light  which  enters 
the  eye : on  account  of  its  thickness,  it  only  causes 
the  rays  to  converge  a little  towards  the  axis  of  the 
pencil ; in  other  words  it  increases  the  intensity  of  the 
light  which  penetrates  into  the  anterior  chamber. 

The  rays,  in  traversing  the  cornea,  pass  from  a more 
rare  to  a denser  medium ; consequently  they  ought  to 
converge  from  the  perpendicular  towards  the  point  of 


VIS 


VIS 


contact.  If,  on  entering  into  the  anterior  chamber, 
they  passed  out  again,  they  would  diverge  as  much 
From  the  perpendicular  as  they  had  converged  before ; 
and  would,  therefore,  assume  their  former  divergence  ; 
•but  as  they  enter  into  the  aqueous  humour,  which  is  a 
medium  more  refractive  than  air — they  incline  less 
from  the  perpendiculefr,  and  consequently  diverge  less 
than  if  they  had  passed  back  into  the  ajr. 

Of  all  the  light  transmitted  to  the  anterior  chamber, 
only  that  which  passes  the  pupil  can  be  of  use  to  vision  ; 
all  that  which  falls  upon  the  iris  is  reflected,  returns 
through  the  cornea,  and  exhibits  the  colour  of  the  iris. 

In  traversing  the  posterior  chamber  the  light  under- 
goes no  new  modification,  as  it  proceeds  always  in  the 
same  medium  (the  aqueous  humour). 

It  is  in  traversing  the  crystalline  that  light  undergoes 
the  most  important  modification.  Philosophers  com- 
pare the  action  of  this  body  to  that  of  a lens,  the  use  of 
which  would  be  to  assemble  all  the  rays  of  any  cone  of 
light  upon  a certain  point  of  the  retina.  But  as  the 
crystalline  is  very  far  from  being  like  a lens,  we  merely 
mention  this  opinion,  which  is  generally  received,  to 
remark  that  it  merits  a fresh  investigation.  Every 
thing  positive  which  can  be  said  on  the  subject  is,  that 
the  crystalline  ought  to  increase  the  intensity  of  the 
light  which  is  directed  towards  the  bottom  of  the  eye, 
with  an  energy  proportionate  to  the  convexity  of  its 
posterior  surface.  It  may  be  added,  that  the  light 
which  passes  near  the  circumference  of  the  crystalline 
is  probably  reflected  in  a different  manner  from  that 
which  passes  through  the  centre ; and  that  therefore  the 
contraction  and  dilatation  of  the  pupil  ought  to  possess 
an  influence  upon  the  mechanism  of  vision,  which  de- 
serves the  attention  of  philosophers. 

The  whole  of  the  light  which  arrives  at  the  anterior 
surface  of  the  crystalline,  does  not  penetrate  into  the 
vitreous  body  ; it  is  partly  reflected.  One  part  of  this 
reflected  light  traverses  the  aqueous  humour  and  the 
cornea,  and  contributes  to  form  the  brilliancy  of  the 
eye ; another  falls  upon  the  posterior  surface  of  the  iris, 
and  is  absorbed  by  the  dark  matter  found  there. 

It  is  probable  that  something  of  this  sort  happens  at 
every  one  of  the  strata  or  layers  which  forms  the  crys- 
talline. 

The  vitreous  body  possesses  a less  refractive  power 
than  the  crystalline,  consequently  the  rays  of  light 
which,  after  having  passed  the  crystalline,  penetrate 
into  the  vitreous  body,  diverge  from  the  perpendicular 
at  the  point  of  contact.  Its  use  then,  with  regard  to  the 
direction  of  the  rays  in  the  eye,  is  to  increase  their  con- 
vergence. It  might  be  said,  that  in  order  to  produce 
the  same  result,  nature  had  only  to  render  the  crystal- 
line a little  more  refractive ; but  the  vitreous  humour 
has  another  most  essential  use,  which  is,  to  give  a 
larger  extent  to  the  retina,  and  thus  to  increase  the  field 
of  vision. 

What  we  said  about  a cone  of  light,  commencing  in 
a point  placed  in  the  prolongation  of  the  anterio-poste- 
rior  axis  of  the  eye,  must  be  repeated  for  every  lumi- 
nous cone  commencing  in  other  points,  and  directed 
towards  the  eye;  with  this  difference,  that,  in  the  first 
case,  the  light  tends  to  unite  at  the  centre  of  the  retina ; 
while  the  light  of  the  other  cones  tends  to  unite  in  dif- 
ferent points,  according  to  that  form  which  they  com- 
mence. Thus  tjie  luminous  cones  commencing  from 
below,  unite  at  the  upper  part  of  the  retina,  while  those 
that  come  from  above,  unite  at  the  lower  part  of  this 
membrane.  The  other  rays  follow  a direction  analo- 
gous ; so  that  there  will  be  formed  at  the  bottom  of  the 
eye  an  exact  representation  of  every  body  placed  before 
it,  with  this  difference,  that  the  images  will  be  inverted, 
or  in  a position  contrary  to  that  of  the  objects  they 
represent. 

This  result  is  ascertained  by  different  means.  For 
this  purpose,  eyes,  constructed  artificially  of  glass, 
which  represent  the  transparent  cornea,  and  the  crys- 
talline; and  of  water,  which  represents  the  aqueous 
and  vitreous  humours,  have  long  been  employed. 

Motions  of  the  iris. — Some  say  that  the  pupil  varies 
its  dimensions  according  to  the  distance  of  the  object. 
This  fact  has  not  been  sufficiently  demonstrated ; 
hitherto  the  influence  of  the  intensity  of  light  is  the 
only  thing  that  has  been  correctly  observed. 

The  choroid  is  of  use  to  vision,  principally  by  the 
dark  matter  with  which  it  is  impregnated,  and  which 
absorbs  the  light  immediately  after  it  has  traversed  the 
retina.  One  may  consider,  as  a confirmation  of  this 


opinion*  what  happens  to  some  individuals  in  whom 
some  parts  of  this  membrane  become  varicose:  the 
dilated  vessels  throw  off  the  darker  matter  which 
covered  them,  and  every  time  that  the  image  of  the 
object  falls  upon  the  point  of  the  retina  corresponding 
to  these  vessels,  the  object  appears  spotted  with  red. 

The  state  of  vision  in  Albino  men  and  animals,  in 
which  the  choroid  and  the  iris  are  not  coloured  black, 
supports  still  more  this  assertion;  vision  is  extremely 
imperfect  in  them:  during  the  day,  they  can  scarcely 
see  sufficiently  to  go  about.  Mariotte,  Lecat,  and 
others,  have  allowed  to  the  choroid  the  faculty  of  per- 
ceiving light.  This  idea  is  completely  without  proof. 

We  know  very  little,  that  is  certain,  of  the  ciliary 
processes.  They  are  generally  supposed  contractile; 
but  some  think  that  they  are  destined  to  the  motions  of 
the  iris,  while  others  imagine  they  are  intended  to  bring 
forward  the  crystalline. 

The  rays  of  light  have  now  reached  the  retina,  which 
receives  the  impression  of  light  when  it  is  within  cer- 
tain limits  of  intensity.  A very  feeble  light  is  not  felt 
by  the  retina;  too  strong  a light  hurts  it,  and  renders  it 
unfit  for  action. 

When  the  retina  receives  too  strong  a light,  the 
impression  is  called  dazzling ; the  retina  is  then  inca- 
pable for  some  time  of  feeling  the  presence  of  the  light. 
This  happens  when  one  looks  at  the  sun.  After  having 
been  long  in  the  dark,  even  a very  feeble  light  produces 
dazzling. — When  the  light  is  exceedingly  weak,  and 
the  eye  made  to  observe  objects  narrowly,  the  retina 
becomes  fatigued,  there  follows  a painful  feeling  in  the 
orbit,  and  also  in  the  head. 

A light,  of  which  the  intensity  is  not  very  strong,  but 
which  acts  for  a certain  time  upon  a determined  point 
of  the  retina,  renders  it  at.  last  insensible  in  this  point. 
When  we  look  for  some  time  at  a white  spot  upon  a 
black  ground,  and  afterward  carry  the  eye  to  a white 
ground,  we  seem  to  perceive  a black  spot;  this  happens 
because  the  retina  has  become  insensible  in  the  point 
which  was  formerly  fatigued  by  the  white  light.  In 
the  same  manner,  after  the  retina  has  been  some  time 
without  acting  in  one  of  its  points  while  the  others 
have  acted,  the  point  which  has  been  in  repose  be- 
comes of  an  extreme  sensibility,  and  on  this  account 
objects  seem  as  if  they  were  spotted.  In  this  manner 
it  is  explained,  why,  after  having  looked  a long  time  at 
a red  spot,  white  bodies  appear  as  if  spotted  with  green: 
in  this  case,  the  retina  has  become  insensible  to  the  red 
rays,  and  we  know  that  a ray  of  white  light,  from 
which  the  red  is  subtracted,  produces  the  sensation  of 
green. 

The  same  sort  of  phenomena  happens  when  we  have 
looked  long  at  a red  body,  or  one  of  any  other  colour, 
and  afterward  look  at  white,  or  differently  coloured 
bodies.— We  perceive  with  facility  the  direction  of  the 
light  received  by  the  retina.  We  believe  instinctively 
that  light  proceeds  in  a right  line,  and  that  this  line  is 
the  prolongation  of  that  according  to  which  the  light 
penetrated  into  the  cornea.  Therefore,  whenever  the 
light  has  been  modified  in  its  direction,  before  reaching 
the  eye,  the  retina  gives  us  nothing  certain. . Optical 
illusions  proceed  principally  from  this  cause. 

The  retina  can  receive  at  tho  same  time  impressions 
in  every  point  of  its  extent,  but  the  sensations  which 
result  from  them  are  then  incorrect.  It  may  be  affected 
by  the  image  of  one  or  two  objects  only,  though  a much 
greater  number  be  impressed  on  it'  the  vision  is  then 
much  more  defined. 

The  central  part  of  the  membrane  appears  to  possess 
much  more  sensibility  than  the  rest  of  its  extent ; we 
therefore  make  the  image  fall  on  this  part  when  we 
wish  to  examine  an  object  with  attention. 

Does  the  light  act  upon  the  retina  by  simple  contact 
only,  or  must  it  traverse  this  membrane?  The  pre- 
sence of  the  choroid  in  the  eye,  or  rather  the  dark 
matter  which  covers  it,  renders  this  second  opinion  the 
most  probable. 

That  part  of  the  retina  which  corresponds  with  the 
centre  of  the  optic  nerve,  has  been  said  to  be  insensible 
to  the  impression  of  light.  I know  nothing  which  can 
directly  prove  this  assertion. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  optic  nerve  transmits  to 
the  brain,  in  an  instant,  the  impression  that  the  light 
makes  on  the  retina;  but  by  what  mechanism  we  are 
entirely  ignorant.  The  manner  in  which  the  two  optic 
nerves  are  confounded  upon  the  sphenoid  bone , ought, 
doubtless,  to  have  a considerable  influence  upon  tho 


VIS 


VIS 


transmission  of  the  impressions  received  by  the  eyes ; — 
bat  this  is  also  a point  upon  which  it  is  difficult  to  form 
any  probable  conjecture. 

Notwithstanding  what  has  been  said  at  different 
periods,  as  well  as  the  late  efforts  of  Gall,  to  prove  that 
we  see  with  only  one  eye  at  a time,  there  seems  suffi- 
cient proof  not  only  that  the  two  eyes  concur  at  the 
same  time  in  the  production  of  vision,  but  that  it  is 
absolutely  necessary  this  should  be  so,  for  certain  most 
important  operations  of  this  function.  There  are  how 
ever  certain  cases  in  which  it  is  more  convenient  to 
employ  only  one  eye ; for  instance,  when  it  is  necessary 
to  understand  perfectly  the  direction  of  the  light,  or  the 
situation  of  any  body  relative  to  us.  Thus  we  shut 
one  eye  to  take  aim  with  a gun,  or  to  place  a number 
of  bodies  upon  a level  in  a right  line. 

Another  case  in  which  it  is  advantageous  to  employ 
only  one  eye  is,  when  the  two  organs  are  unequal, 
either  in  refractive  power  or  insensibility.  For  the 
same  reason  we  shut  one  eye  when  we  employ  a tele- 
scope. But,  except  in  these  particular  cases,  it  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  to  employ  both  eyes  at  once.  The 
following  experiment  proves  that  both  eyes  see  the 
same  object  at  the  same  time. 

Receive  the  image  of  the  sun  upon  a plane  in  a dark 
chamber;  put  before  your  eyes  too  thick  glasses,  each 
of  which  presents  one  of  the  prismatic  colours.  If 
your  eyes  are  good  and  both  equally  strong,  the  image 
of  the  sun  will  appear  of  a dirty  white,  whatever 
be  the  colour  of  the  glasses  employed.  If  one  of  your 
eyes  is  muf  h stronger  than  the  other,  the  image  of  the 
sun  will  be  seen  of  the  same  colour  as  the  glass  which 
is  before  the  strongest  eye. 

One  object  produces  then  really  two  impressions 
while  the  brain  perceives  only  one.  To  produce  this 
the  motions  of  the  two  eyes  must  be  in  unison.  If, 
after  a disease,  the  movement  of  the  eyes  are  no  longer 
regular,  we  receive  two  impressions  from  the  same 
object,  which  constitutes  strabismus , or  squinting. 
We  may  also,  at  pleasure,  receive  two  impressions 
from  one  body ; for  that  purpose,  it  is  only  necessary  to 
derange  the  harmony  of  the  two  eyes. 

Estimation  of  the  distance  of  objects. — Vision  is  pro- 
duced essentially  by  the  action  of  light  upon  the  retina, 
and  yet  we  always  consider  the  bodies  from  which  light 
proceeds  as  being  the  cause  of  it,  though  they  are  often 
placed  at  a considerable  distance.  This  result  can  be 
produced  only  by  an  intellectual  operation. 

We  judge  differently  of  the  distance  of  bodies 
according  to  the  degree  of  that  distance ; we  judge  cor- 
rectly when  they  are  near  us,  but  it  is  not  the  same 
when  they  are  at  a short  distance ; our  judgment  is  then 
often  incorrect:  but  when  they  are  at  a great  distance, 
we  are  constantly  deceived.  The  united  action  of  the 
two  eyes  is  absolutely  necessary  to  determine  exactly 
the  distance,  as  the  following  experiment  proves. 

Suspend  a ring  by  a thread,  and  fix  a hook  to  the  end 
of  a long  rod,  of  a size  that  will  easily  pass  the  ring ; 
stand  at  a convenient  distance,  and  try  to  introduce  the 
hook : in  using  both  eyes,  you  may  succeed  with  ease  in 
every  attempt  you  make;  but  if  you  shut  one  eye,  and 
then  endeavour  to  pass  the  hook  through,  you  will  not 
succeed  any  longer;  the  hook  will  go  either  too  far  or 
else  not  far  enough,  and  it  will  only  be  after  trying 
repeatedly  that  it  will  be  got  through.  Those  persons 
whose  eyes  are  very  unequal  in  their  power,  are  sure, 
to  fail  in  this  experiment,  even  when  they  use  them 
both. 

When  a person  loses  an  eye  by  accident,  it  is  some- 
times a whole  year  before  he  can  judge  correctly  of  the 
distance  of  a body  placed  near  him.  Those  who  have 
only  one  eye,  determine  distance,  for  the  most  part, 
very  incorrectly.  The  size  of  the  object,  the  intensity 
of  the  light  that  proceeds  from  it,  the  presence  of  inter- 
mediate bodies,  &c.  have  a great  influence  upon  our 
just  estimation  of  distance. 

We  judge  most  correctly  of  objects  that  are  placed 
upon  a level  with  our  bodies.  Thus,  when  we  look 
from  the  top  of  a tower  at  the  objects  below,  they 
appear  much  less  than  they  would  if  they  were  placed 
at  the  same  distance,  on  the  same  plane  with  ourselves. 
Hence  the  necessity  of  giving  a considerable  volume  to 
objects  that  are  intended  to  be  placed  on  the  tops  of 
buildings,  and  which  are  to  be  seen  from  a distance. 
The  smaller  the  dimensions  of  an  object  are,  the  nearer 
it  ought  to  be  to  the  eye,  in  order  to  be  distinctly  seen. 
What  is  called  the  distinct  point  of  view,  is  also  very 


variabse.  A horse  is  seen  very  distinctly  at  six  yards, 
but  a bird  could  not  be  distinctly  seen  at  the  same  dis- 
tance. If  we  wish  to  examine  the  hair  or  the  feathers 
of  those  animals,  the  eye  requires  to  be  much  nearer. 
However,  the  same  object  may  be  seen  distinctly  at  dif-, 
ferent  distances ; for  example,  it  is  quite  the  same  to* 
many  persons  whether  they  plaoe  the  book  that  they 
are  reading  at  one  or  two  feet  of  distance  from  the  eye. 
The  intensity  of  the  light  which  illuminates  an  object, 
has  a considerable  effect  upon  the  distance  at  which  it 
can  be  distinctly  seen.  . 

Estimation  of  the  size  of  bodies. — The  manner  in 
which  we  .arrive  at  a just  determination  of  the  size  of 
bodies,  depends  more  upon  knowledge  and  habit  tnan 
upon  the  action  of  the  apparatus  of  vision.  We  form 
our  judgment  relative  to  the  dimensions  of  bodies,  from 
the  size  of  the  image  which  is  formed  in  the  eye,  from 
the  intensity  of  the  light  which  proceeds  from  the  ob- 
ject, from  the  distance  at  which  we  think  it  is  placed, 
and,  above  all,  from  the  habit  of  seeing  such  objects. 
We  therefore  judge  with  difficulty  of  the  size  of  a body 
that  we  see  for  the  first  time,  when  we  cannot  appre- 
ciate the  distance.  A mountain  which  we  see  ai  a dis- 
tance for  the  first  time,  appears  generally  much  less 
than  it  really  is ; we  think  it  is  near  us’wlienit  is  very 
far  away. 

Beyond  a distance  somewhat  considerable,  we  are  so 
completely  deceived,  that  judgment  is  unable  to  correct 
us.  Objects  appear  to  us  infinitely  less  than  they  really 
are  : as  happens  with  the  celestial  bodies. 

Estimation  of  the  motion  of  bodies. — We  judge  of  the 
motion  of  a body  by  that  of  its  image  upon  the  retina, 
by  the  variations  of  the  size  of  this  image,  or,  which  is 
the  same  thing,  by  the  change  of  the  direction  of  the 
light  which  arrives  at  the  eye. 

In  order  that  we  may  be  able  to  follow  the  motion  of 
a body,  it  ought  not  to  be  displaced  too  rapidly,  for  we 
could  not  then  perceive  it;  this  happens  with  bodies 
projected  by  the  force  of  gunpowder,  particularly  when 
they  pass  near  us.  When  they  move  at  a distance  from 
us,  the  light  comes  from  them  to  the  eye  for  a much 
longer  space  of  time,  because  the  field  of  view  is  much 
greater,  and  we  can  see  them  with  more  facility.  We 
ought  to  be  ourselves  at  rest,  in  order  to  judge  correctly 
of  the  motions  of  bodies.  * 

When  bodies  are  at  a considerable  distance  from  us, 
we  cannot  easily  perceive  their  motions  to  or  from  us. 
In  this  case,  we  judge  of  the  motion  of  the  body,  only 
by  the  variation  of  the  size  of  its  image.  Now  this 
variation  being  infinitely  small,  because  the  body  is  at 
a great  distance,  it  is  very  difficult,  and  frequently 
impossible,  for  us  to  estimate  its  motion.  Generally 
we  perceive  with  great  difficulty,  sometimes  we  cannot 
perceive  at  all,  the  motion  of  a body  which  moves 
extremely  slow ; this  may  be  on  account  of  the  slow- 
ness of  its  own  motion,  as  in  the  case  of  the  hand  of  a 
watch, or  it  may  be  the  result  of  the  slow  motion  of  the 
image,  which  happens  with  the  stars,  and  objects  very 
far  from  us. 

Of  optical  illusions. — After  what  we  have  just  said, 
of  the  manner  in  which  we  estimate  the  distance,  the 
size,  and  the  motion  of  bodies,  we  may  easily  see  that 
we  are  often  deceived  by  sight.  These  deceptions  are 
known  in  Physics,  and  in  Physiology,  by  the  name  of 
optical  illusions.  Generally  we  judge  pretty  well  of 
bodies  placed  near  us;  but  we  are  most  commonly  de- 
ceived with  regard  to  those  that  are  distant.  Those 
illusions  which  happen  to  us  with  regard  to  objects 
that  are  near  us,  are  the  result,  sometimes  of  the 
reflection,  sometimes  of  the  refraction,  of  light  before 
it  reaches  the  eye;  and  sometimes  of  the  law  that  we 
establish  instinctively;  namely,  that  light  proceeds 
always  in  right  lines. 

We  must  refer  to  this  cause  those  illusions  occasioned 
by  mirrors:  objects  are  seen  in  plane  mirrors  at  the 
same  distance  behind  them,  as  the  mirrors  are  distant 
from  the  eye.  To  this  cause  may  be  attributed  also  the 
apparent  increase,  or  diminution  of  bodies  seen  through 
a glass.  If  the  glass  make  the  rays  converge,  the  body 
will  appear  greater;  if  it  cause  them  to  diverge,  the 
body  will  appear  less.  These  glasses  produce  stid 
another  illusion;  objects  appear  surrounded  by  the 
colours  of  the  solar  spectrum,  because  their  surfaces 
not  being  parallel,  they  decompose  light  iu  the  manner 
of  the  prism. 

We  are  constantly  deceived  by  objects  at  a distance, 
in  a manner  that  we  cannot  prevent,  because  those 


VIS 


VIT 


deceptions  result  from  certain  laws  which  govern  the 
animal  economy.  An  object  seems  near  us  in  propor- 
tion as  its  image  occupies  a greater  space  upon  the 
retina ; or  in  proportion  to  the  intensity  of  the  light 
which  proceeds  from  it. 

Of  two  objects  of  a different  volume,  equally  illu- 
minated and  placed  at  the  same  distance,  the  greatest 
will  appear  the  nearest,  should  circumstances  be  such 
as  to  admit  of  the  distance  being  justly  estimated.  Of 
two  objects  of  equal  volume,  placed  at  an  equal  dis- 
tance from  the  eye,  but  unequally  illuminated,  the 
brightest  will  appear  the  nearest ; it  would  be  the  same, 
if  the  objects  were  at  unequal  distances,  as  can  be 
easily  seen  in  looking  at  a string  of  lamps:  if  there 
happen  to  be  one  of  them  brighter  than  the  rest,  it  will 
appear  the  nearest,  while  that  which  is  really  the 
nearest  will  appear  the  farthest,  if  it  is  the  least  bright. 
An  object  seen  without  any  intermedium,  always  ap- 
pears nearer  than  when  there  happens  to  be  between  it 
and  the  eye,  some  body  that  may  have  an  influence 
upon  the  estimation  that  we  make  of  its  distance. 

When  a bright  object  strikes  the  eye,  while  all  the 
objects  around  it  are  obscured,  it  appears  much  nearer 
than  it  really  is;  a light  in  the  night  produces  this 
effect. 

Objects  appear  always  small  in  proportion  as  they 
are  distant ; thus,  the  trees  in  a long  alley,  appear  so 
much  smaller,  and  so  much  nearer  together,  in  propor- 
tion as  they  are  farther  from  us.  It  is  by  observing 
these  illusions,  and  the  laws  of  the  animal  economy, 
upon  which  they  are  founded,  that  art  has  been  en- 
abled to  imitate  them.  The  art  of  painting,  in  certain 
cases,  merely  transfers  to  the  canvass  those  optical 
errors  into  which  we  most  habitually  fall. 

The  construction  of  optical  instruments  is  also 
founded  upon  these  principles : some  of  them  augment 
the  intensity  of  the  light,  which  proceeds  from  the  ob- 
jects observed  ; others  cause  it  to  diverge,  or  converge, 
in  order  to  increase  or  diminish  their  apparent  vo- 
lume, &c. 

By  the  constant  exercise  of  the  sense  of  sight,  we  are 
enabled  to  get  over  many  optical  illusions,  as  will  be 
proved  by  the  curious  history  of  the  blind  youth, 
spoken  of  by  Cheselden.  This  celebrated  surgeon,  by 
a surgical  operation,  generally  said  to  be  that  for  cata- 
ract, but,  more  probably,  it  was  a division  of  the  mem 
brana  papillaris , procured  sight  to  a very  intelligent 
person  who  was  born  blind : and  he  observed  the  man- 
ner in  which  this  sense  was  developed  in  this  young 
man.  “ When  he  saw  the  light  for  the  first  time,  he 
knew  so  little  how  to  judge  of  distances,  that  he  be- 
lieved the  objects  which  he  saw  touched  his  eyes  (and 
this  was  his  expression)  as  the  things  which  he  felt 
touched  his  skin.  The  objects  which  were  most  plea- 
sant to  him  were  those  whose  form  was  regular  and 
smooth,  though  he  had  no  idea  of  their  form,  nor  could 
he  tell  why  they  pleased  him  better  than  the  others. 
During  the  time  of  his  blindness  he  had  such  an  imper- 
fect idea  of  colours,  that  he  was  then  able  to  dis- 
tinguish, by  a very  strong  light,  that  they  had  not  left, 
an  impression  sufficient  by  which  he  could  again 
recognise  them.  Indeed,  when  he  saw  them,  he  said 
the  colours  he  then  saw  were  not  the  same  as  those  he 
had  seen  formerly ; he  did  not  know  the  form  of  any 
object ; nor  could  he  distinguish  one  object  from 
another,  however  different  their  figure  or  size  might  be : 
when  objects  were  shown  to  him  which  he  had  known 
formerly  by  the  touch,  he  looked  at  them  with  atten- 
tion, and  observed  them  carefully  in  order  to  know 
them  again ; but  as  he  had  too  many  objects  to  retain 
at  once,  he  forgot  the  greater  part  of  them,  and  when 
ho  first  learned,  as  he  said,  to  see  and  to  know  objects, 
l»e  forgot  a thousand  for  one  that  he  recollected.  It 
was  two  mouths  before  he  discovered  that  pictures 
represent  solid  bodies;  until  that  time  he  had  con- 
sidered them  as  planes  and  surfaces  differently  coloured, 
and  diversified  by  a variety  of  shades;  but  when  he 
began  to  conceive  that  these  pictures  represented  solid 
bodies,  in  touching  the  canvass  .of  a picture  with  his 
hand  he  expected  to  find  in  reality  something  solid  upon 
it,  and  he  was  much  astonished  when,  upon  touching 
those  parts  which  seemed  round  and  unequal,  he  found 
them  flat,  and  smooth  like  the  rest ; he  asked,  which 
was  the  sense  that  deceived  him, — the  sight  or  the 
touch"?  There  was  shown  to  him  a little  portrait  of  his 
father,  which  was  in  the  case  of  his  mother’s  watch 
he  said,  that  he  knew  very  well  it  was  the  resemblance 


of  his  father ; but  he  asksd,  with  great  astonishment, 
he it  was  possible  for  so  large  a visage  to  be  kept  in 
so  small  a space,  as  that  appeared  to  him  as  impossible 
as  that  t bushel  should  be  contained  in  a pint.  He 
could  not  support  much  light  at  first,  and  every  object 
seemed  very  large  to  him  ; but  after  he  had  seen  larger 
things  he  considered  the  first  smaller  : he  thought  there 
was  nothing  beyond  the  limits  of  his  sight.  The  same 
operation  was  performed  on  the  other  eye  about  a year 
after  the  first,  and  it  succeeded  equally  well.  At  first 
he  saw  objects  with  his  second  eye  much  larger  than 
with  the  other,  but  not  so  large,  however,  as  he  had 
seen  them  with  the  first  eye  ; and  when  he  looked  at 
the  same  object  with  both  eyes  at  once,  he  said  that  it 
appeared  twice  as  large  as  with  the  first  eye;  but  he 
dia  not  see  double,  at  least  it  could  not  be  ascertained 
that  he  saw  objects  double,  after  he  had  got  the  sight 
of  the  second  eye.” 

This  observation  is  not  singular ; there  exists  a num- 
ber of  others,  and  they  have  all  given  results  nearly 
alike.  The  conclusion  that  may  be  drawn  from  it  is, 
that  the  exact  manner  in  which  we  determine  the  dis- 
tance, size,  and  form  of  objects,  is  the  result  of  habit, 
or,  which  is  the  same  thing,  of  the  education  of  the 
sense  of  sight. 

Vision,  defective.  See  Dysopia. 

VI'SUS  See  Vision. 

Visus  defiguratis.  See  Metamorphopsia. 

VITA.  (Vita,  a,i.  \ a vivendo.)  See  Life. 

ViTiE  arbor.  See  Arbor  vita. 

V itje  lignum.  See  Guaiacum. 

Vital  actions.  See  Vital  f unctions. 

Vital  air.  See  Oxygen. 

Vital  force.  See  Vis  vita. 

Vital  f unctions.  See  Function. 

Vital  principle.  See  Life. 

VI  t'A'LBA.  See  Clematis  recta. 

V1TELLUS.  ( Vitellus , i,  m. ; fiom  vita , life;  be 
cause  the  life  of  the  chick  is  in  it.) 

1.  The  yelk  of  an  egg. 

2.  In  botany  applied  by  Gsertner  to  that  part  of  a 
seed  which  is  very  firmly  and  inseparably»connected 
with  the  embryo,  yet  never  rising  out  of  the  integu- 
ments of  the  seed  in  germination,  but  absorbed,  like 
the  albumen,  for  the  nourishment  of  the  embryo.  If 
the  albumen  be  present,  the  vitellus  is  always  situated 
between  it  and  the  embryo,  and  yetis  constantly  distinct 
from  the  former.  It  is  esteemed  by  Gsertner  to  com- 
pose the  bulk  of  the  seed  in  the  fusci,  mosses,  and 
ferns.  In  the  natural  order  of  grasses,  the  vitellus 
forms  a scale  betvven  the  embryo  and  the  albumen. 
Sir  J.  Smith  thinks  the  vitellus  is  nothing  else  than  a 
subterraneous  cotyledon.  See  Albumen. 

VI'TEX.  (From  vieo,  to  bind.)  The  name  of  a 
genus  of  plants  in  the  Linntean  system.  Class,  Didy- 
narnia ; Order,  Arigiospermia. 

Vitkx  agnus  castus.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
Agnus  castus;  Elaagnon.  The  chaste  tree.  * Vitex 
— foliis  digitalis , serratis , Spicis  verticillatis,  of  Lin- 
naeus. The  seeds  are  the  medicinal  part,  which  have, 
when  fresh,  a fragrant  smell,  and  an  acrid  aromatic 
taste.  Formerly  they  were  celebrated  as  anapliro- 
disiacs  ; but  experience  does  not  discover  in  them  any 
degree  of  such  virtue,  and  some  have  described  to  them 
an  opposite  one.  They  are  now  fallen  into  disuse. 

Vi'ti  saltus.  See  Chorea. 

VITILI  GO.  ( Vitiligo , inis , f. ; from  vitio,  to  infect.) 
See  Alphas. 

VI'TIS.  J . The  name  of  a genus  of  plahts  in  the  Lin- 
mean  system.  Class,  Pentandria;  Order,  Monogynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopoeial  name  of  the  grape.  See 
Vitis  vinifera- 

Vitis  alba.  See  Bryonia  alba. 

Vitis  oorinthica.  The  dried  fruit  of  this  tree  is 
the  Uva  passu  minor;  Passa  corinthiaca.  The  vir 
tues  of  the  currant  are  similar  to  those  of  the  raisin. 
See  Vitis  vinifera. 

Vitis  idjea.  See  Vaccinium. 

Vitis  sylvestris.  White  bryony. 

Vitis  vinifera.  The  systematic  name  of  the  grape 
tree.  Vitis — foliis  lobatis  sinuatis  nudis,  of  Linnaeus. 
Vine  leaves  and  the  tendrils  have  an  adstringent  taste, 
and  were  formerly  used  in  diarrhoeas,  hemorrhages, 
and  other  disoiders  requiring  refrigerant  and  styptic 
medicines.  The  juice  or  sap  of  the  vine  called  lachry- 
ma,  has  been  recommended  in  calculous  disorders : and 
it  is  said  to  be  an  excellent  application  to  weak  eyes 


vor 


voi 


and  specks  of  the  cornea.  The  unripe  fruit  has  a 
harsh,  rough,  sour  taste ; its  expressed  juice,  called  ver- 
juice, was  formerly  much  esteemed,  but  is  now  super- 
seded by  the  juice  of  lemons;  for  external  use,  how- 
ever,'particularly  in  bruises  and  pains,  verjuice  is  still 
employed,  and  considered  to  be  a very  useful  applica- 
tion. The  dried  fruit  is  termed  Uva  passa  major. 
Passula  major , the  raisin.  Raisins  are  prepared  by 
immersing  the  fresh  fruit  into  a solution  of  alkaline 
salt  and  soap-ley,  made  boiling  hot,  to  which  is  added 
some  olive  oil,  and  a small  quantity  of  common  salt, 
and  afterward  drying  them  in  the  shadi. . They  are 
used  as  agreeable,  lubricating,  acescent  sweets  in  pec- 
toral decoctions,  and  for  obtunding  the  acrimony  in 
other  medicines,  and  rendering  them  grateful  to  the 
palate  and  stomach.  They  are  directed  in  the  decoc- 
tum  hordei  compositum , tinctura  senna,  and  tinctura 
cardamomi  composita.  See  also  Wine  and  Acetum. 

Vitra'ria.  The  pellijory  of  the  wall. 

VITREOUS.  {Fitreus ; from  vitrum , glass:  so 
named  from  its  transparency.)  Glassy:  applied  to 
parts  of  the  body. 

Vitreous  humour.  Humor  vitreus.  The  pellucid 
body  which  fills  the  whole  bulb  of  the  eye  behind  the 
crystalline  lens.  The  vitreous  substance  is  composed 
of  small  cells  which  communicate  with  each  other,  and 
are  distended  with  a transparent  fluid. 

VITRIOL.  See  Vitriolum.  . 

F itriol , acid  of.  See  Sulphuric  acid. 

Fitriol , blue.  See  Cupri  sulphas. 

Fitriol,  green.  See  Ferri  sulphas. 

Fitriol,  Roman.  See  Cupri  sulphas. 

Fitriol,  sweet,  spirit  of.  See  Spiritus  cetheris  sul- 
phurici. 

Fitriol,  white.  See  Zinci  sulphas. 

Fitriolated  kali.  See  Potassce  sulphas. 

VITRI  OLUM.  (From  vitrum,  glass : so  called 
from  its  likeness  to  glass.  Hollandus  says  this  word 
is  fictitious,  and  composed  from  the  initials  of  the  fol- 
lowing sentence : Fade  in  terram  rimando,  invenies, 
optimum  lapidem  veram  medicinam .)  Calcadinum ; 

Calcatar  ; Calcotar  ; Calcanthos ; Calcanthum ; Cal- 
citea.  Vitriol,  or  sulphate  of  iron.  See  Ferri  sul- 
•phas. 

Vitriolum  album.  See  Zinci  sulphas. 

Vitriolum  c<eruleum.  See  Cupri  sulphas. 

Vitriolum  romanum.  See  Cupri  sulphas. 

Vitriolum  viride.  See  Ferri  sulphas. 

VI'TRUM.  (Fitrum,  i,  n.)  Glass. 

Vitrum  antimonii.  Glass  of  antimony.  Anti- 
mony first  calcined,  then  fused  in  a crucible. 

Vitrum  antimonii  ceratum.  A diaphoretic  com- 
pound exhibited  in  the  cure  of  dysenteries  arising  from 
checked  perspiration. 

Vitrum  hypoclepticum.  A funnel  to  separate  oil 
from  water. 

VIVERRA.  The  nameof  a genus  of  animals  in  the 
Order  Ferce,  of  the  Linmean  classification. 

Viverra  civetta.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
ash-coloured  weazel,  which,  with  the  following  spe- 
cies, affords  the  perfume  called  civet. 

Viverra  zibetha.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
civet-cat.  See  Civetta. 

VIVUM.  A name  variously  applied : to  mercury, 
because  it  moves  about  as  if  it  were  alive ; lienee  ar- 
gentum vivum  : to  lime,  because  when  moisture  is 
added  it  bracks  and  swells,  as  if  alive. 

VOICE.  Fox.  By  voice  we  understand  the  sound 
which  is  produced  in  the  larynx,  at  the  instant  when 
the  air  traverses  this  organ,  either  to  enter  or  go  out  of 
the  trachea. 

In  order  to  understand  the  mechanism  by  which  the 
voice  is  produced  and  modified,  we  must  say  some- 
thing of  the  manner  in  which  sound  is  produced,  in 
which  it  is  propagated  and  modified  in  wind  instru- 
ments, particularly  those  that  have  most  analogy  with 
the  organ  of  voice. 

A wind  instrument  is  generally  formed  of  a tube, 
either  straight  or  bent,  in  which,  by  various  processes, 
the  air  is  made  to  vibrate. 

Wind  instruments  are  of  two  sorts : the  one  sort 
are  called  mouth  instruments,  the  other  sort  reed  instru- 
ments. 

In  the  mouth  instruments  (the  horn,  trumpet,  trom- 
bone, flageolet,  flute,  organ,)  the  column  of  air  con- 
tained in  the  tune  is  the  sonorous  body.  The  air  must 
be  caused  to  vibrate  in  it  in  order  to  produce  sounds. 


For  this  purpose,  the  means  employed  are  variable, 
according  to  the  sort  of  instrument.  The  length,  the 
width,  the  form  of  the  tube,  the  openings  in  its  sides,  or 
its  extremities,  the  power  of  the  vibrations,  and  the 
manner  in  which  they  are  excited,  are  the  causes  of 
the-  various  sounds  of  this  sort  of  instruments.  The 
nature  of  the  matter  which  forms  the  sounds  has  no 
influence  but  upon  the  tone. 

The  reed  instruments  are  the  most  necessary  to  be 
known,  for  the  organ  of  the  voice  is  of  this  kind. 
Their  theory  is,  unfortunately,  much  more  imperfect 
than  that  of  the  other  sort.  In  this  sort  of  instruments, 
(the  clarionet,  hautboy,  bassoon,  voice  organ,  &.c.)  we 
ought  to  distinguish  between  the  reed,  or  anche,  and  the 
body  of  the  tube.  Their  mechanism  is  essentially  dif- 
ferent. 

A reed  is  always  formed  of  one,  and  sometimes  of* 
two,  thin  plates,  susceptible  of  a rapid  motion,  the 
alternate  vibrations  of  which  are  intended  to  intercept 
and  permit,  by  turns,  the  passage  of  a current  of  air. 
For  this  reason,  the  sounds  which  they  produce  do  not 
follow  the  same  laws  as  the  sounds  formed  by  elastic 
plates,  with  one  end  fixed,  and  the  other  free,  which 
produce  sonorous  undulations  in  the  open  air.  In  the 
reed  instruments,  the  reed  alone  produces  and  modifies 
the  sound.  If  the  plate  is  long,  the  motions  are  long, 
slow,  and  consequently  the  sounds  are  grave.  On  the 
contrary,  a short  plate  produces  acute  sounds,  because 
the  alternations  of  transmission  and  interception  of  the 
current  of  air  are  more  rapid. 

When  a number  of  difierent  sounds  are  intended  to 
be  produced  by  a reed,  it  is  necessary  to  vary  the  length 
of  the  plate.  The  bassoon  and  clarionet  players  do 
this  when  they  wish  to  produce  different  sounds  on  the 
same  instrument.  We  add,  as  an  important  circum- 
stance, that  the  greater  or  less  elevation  of  sound  pro- 
duced by  the  instrument,  partly  depends  on  the  elasti- 
city, the  weight,  and  the  form  of  the  little  tongue,  or 
plate,  and  on  the  force  of  the  current  of  air.  If  all 
these  elements  are  not  the  same,  the  length  being  inva- 
riable, the  tone  will  be  different. 

A reed  is  never  employed  alone ; it  is  always  fitted 
to  a tube  through  which  the  wind  passes  that  has  been 
blown  into  the  reed,  and  which  ought,  on  this  account, 
to  be  open  at  the  two  extremities.  The  tube  has  no 
influence  upon  the  tone  of  the  music ; it  acts  only  upon 
the  intensity,  the  timbre,  and  upon  the  power  of  mak- 
ing the  reed  speak. 

Apparatus  of  voice.—  The  larynx  ought  properly 
to  be  considered  as  the  organ  of  voice. 

The  size  of  the  larynx  varies  according  to  age  and 
sex.  It  is  placed  at  the  anterior  part  of  the  neck 
where  a small  projection  is  seen,  between  the  tongue 
and  the  trachea.  It  is  small  in  children  and  women, 
greater  in  young  men,  and  still  larger  in  adult  age. 

The  larynx  not  only  produces  the  voice,  but  it  is  also 
the  agent  of  its  principal  modifications ; on  which  ac 
count,  a perfect  knowledge  of  the  anatomy  of  this 
organ  is  indispensably  necessary  to  a perfect. knowledge 
of  the  mechanism  of  voice.  As  we  cannot  enter  here 
into  all  the  details  of  the  structure  of  the  larynx,  we 
will  only  touch  upon  such  as  are  most  necessary  to  be 
known,  many  of  which  are  not  yet  well  understood. 

Four  cartilages  and  three  fibro-cartilages  enter  into 
the  composition  of  the  larynx,  and  foim  the  skeleton  of 
it.  The  cartilages  are  the  cricoid,  the  thyroid,  and  the 
two  aryteenoid.  The  thyroid  joins  with  the  cricoid  by 
the  extremity  of  its  two  inferior  horns.  In  the  living 
state,  the  thyroid  is  fixed  with  respect  to  the  cricoid, 
which  is  contrary  to  what  is  generally  supposed.  Every 
aryteenoid  cartilage  is  articulated  with  the  cricoid  by 
means  of  a surface,  which  is  oblong,  and  concave  in  a 
transverse  direction.  The  cricoid  presents  a surface 
which  is  similarly  disposed  to  that  of  the  aryteenoid , 
with  this  difference,  that  it  is  convex  in  the  same  direc- 
tion in  which  the  other  is  concave.  Round  the  articu- 
lation there  is  a synovial  capsule,  firm  before  and  be- 
hind, and  moveable  without  and  within.  Before  the 
articulation  is  the  thtfro- aryteenoid  ligament ; behind  is 
a strong  ligamentous  band  that  might  be  called  crico- 
arytecnoid , on  account  of  the  manner  in  which  it  is 
fixed. 

Thus  disposed,  the  articulation  admits  only  of  lateral 
movements  of  the  aryteenoid  upon  the  cricoid  cartilage. 
No  movement  forward  or  backward  can  take  place, 
nor  a certain  movement  up  and  down,  mentioned  in 
anatomical  books,  which  none  of  the  muscles  is  so  dis- 


vox 


ror 


posed  as  !o  produce.  This  articulation  ought  to  be  con- 
sidered as  a simple  lateral  ginglymus.  The  fibro  car- 
tilages of  the  larynx  are  the  epiglottis , and  two  small 
oodies  that  are  found  above  the  top  of  the  arytcenoid 
cartilages,  and  that  have  been  called  by  Santorini, 
capitula  cartilaginum  arytcenoidearum. 

There  are  a great  many  muscles  attached  to  the 
larynx.  These  muscles  are  called  external : they  are 
intended  to  move  the  whole  organ,  either  in  carrying 
it  up  or  down,  backward  or  forward,  <fec.  The  larynx 
has  also  other  muscles,  whose  use  is  to  give  a move- 
ment to  the  different  parts  in  respect  of  each  other. 
These  muscles  have  been  called  internal.  They  are, 

1st,  The  crico-thyroid , the  use  of  which  is  not,  as  has 
hitherto  been  believed,  to  lower  the  thyroid  upon  the 
cricoid  cartilage,  but,  on  the  contrary,  to  raise  the  cri- 
coid towards  the  thyroid  cartilage,  or  in  making  it  pass 
a little  below  its  inferior  edge. 

2d,  The  muscles  crico-arytccnoideus  posterior , and 
the  crico-arytarioideus  lateralis , the  use  of  which  is  to 
draw  outwards  the  arytenoid  cartilages,  in  separating 
them  from  one  another. 

3d,  The  arytcenoid  muscle,  which  draws  the  arytae- 
noid  cartilages  together. 

4th,  The  thyro-arytcenoideus , a knowledge  of  which 
is  more  important  than  that  of  all  the  muscles  of  the 
larynx,  because  its  vibrations  produce  the  vocal  sound. 
This  muscle  forms  the  lips  of  the  glottis , and  the  infe- 
rior, superior,  and  lateral  sides  of  the  ventricles  of  the 
larynx. 

5th,  Lastly,  the  muscles  of  the  epiglottis , which  are 
the  tkyro-epiglottideus,  the  arytceno-epiglottideus,  and 
some  fibres  that  may  be  considered  as  the  vestige  of  the 
glosso-epiglottideus  muscle  that  exists  in  some  animals, 
whose  contraction  has  an  influence  upon  the  position 
of  the  epiglottis. 

The  larynx  is  covered  within  by  a mucous  membrane. 
This  membrane,  in  passing  from  the  epiglottis  to  the 
irytaenoid  and  thyroid  cartilages,  forms  two  folds,  called 
'ateral  ligaments  of  the  epiglottis.  They  concur  in  the 
ormation  of  the  superior  and  inferior  ligaments  of  the 
glottis. 

In  the  substance  of  the  epiglottis,  and  behind  it,  are 
found  a great  number  of  mucous  follicles , and  some 
mucous  glands.  Within  the  mass  of  the  ligaments  of 
the  epiglottis,  there  exists  a collection  of  those  bodies 
that  have  been  very  improperly  called  arytcenoid 
glands. 

Between  the  epiglottis  behind,  and  the  os  hyoides 
and  thyroid  cartilage  before,  there  is  seen  a considera- 
ble quantity  of  the  adipose  cellular  tissue , which  is 
very  clastic,  and  similar  to  that  which  exists  near  cer- 
tain articulations.  There  has  been  no  use  assigned  to 
this  body.  Dr.  Magendie  believes  it  serves  to  facilitate 
the  frequent  movements  of  the  thyroid  cartilage  upon 
the  postei  ior  face  of  the  os  hyoides,  and  to  keep  the 
epiglottis  separated  from  the  upper  part  of  this  bone, 
while,  at  the  same  time,  it  provides  it  with  a very 
elastic  support,  favourable  to  the  action  of  the  fi.br o- 
cartilages  in  the  production  of  the  voice,  or  in  deglu- 
tition. 

The  vessels  of  the  larynx  present  nothing  remarka- 
ble. It  is  not  so  with  the  nerves  of  this  organ.  Their 
distribution  merits  a careful  examination.  There  are 
four  of  these  nerves,  the  superior  laryngeal  and  the 
inferior. 

The  recurrent  nerve  is  distributed  to  the  posterior 
crico- arytenoid,  to  the  lateral  crico-arytenoid,  and 
thyro-arytenoid.  None  of  the  ramifications  of  this 
nerve  go  to  the  arytaenoid,  or  to  the  crico-thyroid,  mus- 
cles. On  the  contrary,  the  superior  nerve  of  the  larynx 
goes  to  the  arytaenoid  muscle,  which  it  provides  with  a 
considerable  branch  ; and  to  the  crico-thyroid,  to  which 
it  gives  a small  filament,  more  remarkable  for  the  dis- 
tance it  proceeds  than  for  its  size.  In  certain  cases  this 
filament  does  not  exist.  The  external  branch  of  the 
nerve  of  the  larynx  is  then  of  a larger  size.  The  re- 
mainder of  the  filaments  of  the  laryngeal  nerves  are 
distributed  to  the  epiglottis,  and  to  the  mucous  mem- 
brane which  covers  the  entrance  of  the  larynx.  This 
part  possesses  an  extraordinary  sensibility. 

The  interval  which  separates  the  thyro-arytenoid 
muscles,  and  the  arytaenoid  cartilages,  is  called  glottis. 
In  the  dead  body,  the  glottis  presents  the  appearance 
of  a longitudinal  slit  of  about  eight  or  ten  lines  long, 
and  two  or  three  wide ; it  is  wider  behind  than  before. 
Here  the  two  sides  meet  at  the  point  of  their  insertion 


into  the  thyroid  cartilage.  The  posterior  extremity  of 
the  glottis  is  formed  by  the  arytcenoid  muscles. 

If  the  arytenoid  cartilages  are  brought  together  so  as 
to  touch  on  their  internal  faces,  the  glottis  is  diminished 
nearly  a third  of  its  length.  It  then  presents  a slit 
which  is  from  five  to  six  lines  long,  and  from  half  a line 
to  a line  long.  The  sides  of  this  slit  are  called  the  lips 
of  the  glottis.  They  present  a sharp  edge  turned  up- 
ward and  inward.  They  are  essentially  formed  by  the 
arytenoid  muscle,  and  by  the  ligament  of  the  same 
name,  which,  as  an  aponeurosis , covers  the  muscle  to 
which  it  adheres  strongly,  and  which,  being  itself 
covered  by  the  mucous  membrane,  forms  the  thinnest 
parts  or  edge  of  the  lip.  These  lips  of  the  glottis  vibrate 
in  the  production  of  the  voice ; they  might  be  called 
th e human  reed.  Above  the  inferoir  ligaments  of  the 
glottis  are  the  ventricles  of  the  larynx,  the  cavity  of 
which  is  larger  than  it  seems  at  first  sight.  The  supe- 
rior, inferior,  and  external  sides  of  it  are  formed  by  the 
thyro-arytenoid  muscle,  turned  upon  itself.  The  ex- 
tremity, or  anterior  side,  is  formed  by  the  thyroid  carti 
lage.  By  means  of  these  ventricles,  the  lips  of  the 
glottis  are  completely  isolated  upon  their  upper  side. 

Above  the  opening  of  the  ventricles  we  see  two  bo- 
dies, which,  in  their  manner  of  being  disposed,  have  a 
great  deal  of  analogy  with  the  vocal  chords,  and  which 
form  a sort  of  second  glottis  above  the  first.  These 
bodies  are  called  the  superior  ligaments  of  the  glottis. 
They  are  formed  by  the  superior  edge  of  tire  thyro  ary 
tenoid  muscle,  a little  adipose  cellular  tissue,  and  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  larynx,  which  covers  them 
before  penetrating  into  the  ventricles.  These  observa- 
tions are  easily  made  upon  the  larynx  of  dead  bodies. 
The  glottis  of  a living  person  has  never  been  examined, 
at  least  there  has  been  nothing  written  on  this  subject ; 
but  when  those  of  animals,  as  of  dogs,  are  examined, 
they  contract  and  enlarge  alternately.  The  arytenoid 
cartilages  are  directed  outwards  when  the  air  pene- 
trates into  the  lungs  ; and  in  the  instant  when  the  air 
passes  out,  they  come  close  together. 

Mechanism  of  the  Production  of  Voice. — If  we  take 
the  t rachea  and  the  larynx  of  an  animal  or  of  a man, 
and  blovy  air  strongly  into  the  trachea,  directing  it  to 
wards  the  larynx,  there  is  no  sound  produced,  but  only 
a slight  noise,  resulting  from  tire  pressure  of  the  ail 
against  the  sides  of  the  larynx.  If,  in  blowing,  we 
bring  together  the  arytaenoid  cartilages,  so  that  they 
may  touch  upon  their  internal  face,  a sound  will  be 
produced,  something  like  the  voice  of  the  animal  to 
which  the  larynx  used  in  the  experiment  belongs. 

The  sound  will  be  dull  or  sharp,  according  as  the  car- 
tilages are  pressed  more  or  less  forcibly  together : its 
intensity  will  be  more  or  less,  according  to  the  intensity 
of  the  air.  It  is  easily  seen,  in  this  experiment,  that 
the  sound  is  produced  by  the  vibrations  of  the  inferior 
ligament  of  the  glottis. 

Both  man  and  the  animals  are  deprived  of  voice  by 
making  an  opening  below  the  larynx.  The  voice  is 
reproduced  if  the  opening  is  closed  mechanically.  Dr. 
Magendie  knows  a person  who  has  been  in  this  situa- 
tion for  four  years.  He  cannot  speak  without  pressing 
a cravat  strongly  against  a fistulous  opening  in  the  la- 
rynx. The  same  thing  takes  place  when  the  larynx  is 
opened  below  the  inferior  ligaments  of  the  glottis. 

But  if  a wound  exists  above  the  glottis,  if  the  epi- 
glottis and  its  muscles  are  affected,  if  the  superior  liga- 
ment of  the  glottis,  even  if  the  superior  aspect  of  the 
arytcenoid  cartilages  are  injured,  the  voice  continues. 

Lastly,  the  glottis  of  an  animal  being  laid  bare  in  the 
instant  that  it  cries,  shows  very  well  that  voice  is  pro- 
duced by  the  vibrations  of  the  vocal  chords,  or  lips  of 
the  glottis.  This  is  enough  to  prove,  beyond  all  doubt, 
that  the  voice  is  formed  in  the  glottis  by  the  motion  of 
its  inferior  ligaments. 

This  fact  being  established,  is  it  possible,  on  physical 
principles,  to  account  for  the  formation  of  the  voice  ? 
The  following  explanation  appears  the  most  probable. 

The  air  being  pressed  from  the  lungs,  proceeds  in  a 
pipe  of  considerable  size.  This  pipe  very  soon  becomes 
contracted,  and  the  air  is  forced  to  pass  through  a nar- 
row slit,  the  two  sides  of  which  are  vibrating  plates, 
which  permit  and  intercept  the  air,  like  the  plates  of 
reeds,  and  which  ought,  in  the  same  manner,  by  these 
alternations,  to  produce  sonorous  undulations  in  the 
transmitted  current  of  air. 

But,  in  blowing  into  the  trachea  of  a dead  body,  why 
does.it  not  Droduce  a sound  like  that  of  the  human 


VOI 


VOI 


voice  ? Why  is  the  palsied  state  of  the  internal  mus- 1 
cles  of  this  organ  followed  by  the  loss  of  the  voice  ? 
Why,  in  a word,  is  an  act  of  the  will  necessary  to  pro-  | 
duce  the  vocal  sound  ? The  answer  to  this  is  not  diffi- 
cult. The  ligaments  of  the  glottis  have  not  the  faculty 
of  vibrating  like  plates  of  reeds,  except  the  thyro-ary- 
tenoid  muscles  are  contracted  ; and,  therefore,  in  every 
case  in  which  the  muscles  are  not  contracted,  the  voice 
will  not  be  produced. 

Experiments  performed  on  animals  are  perfectly  in 
unison  with  this  doctrine.  Divide  the  two  recurrent 
nerves,  and  the  voice  will  cease.  If  only  one  is  cut, 
the  voice  will  be  only  half  lost. 

Dr.  Magendie,  however,  has  seen  a number  of  ani- 
mals, in  which  the  two  recurrent  nerves  had  been  cut, 
cry  very  loud  when  they  suffered  severe  pain.  These 
sounds  were  very  similar  to  the  sounds  that  would  be 
produced  mechanically  with  the  larynx  of  the  animal 
when  dead,  by  blowing  into  the  trachea,  and  bringing 
together  the  arytenoid  cartilages.  This  phenomenon 
is  easily  understood  by  the  distribution  of  the  nerves 
of  the  larynx.  The  recurrents  being  cut,  the  thyro- 
arytenoid muscles  do  not  contract,  and  thence  results 
the  loss  of  voice  ; but  the  arytenoid  muscle,  that  re- 
ceives its  nerves  from  the  superior  laryngeal,  contracts, 
and  brings  together,  in  the  instant  of  a strong  expira- 
tion, the  arytenoid  cartilages,  and  the  slit  of  the  glottis 
becomes  sufficiently  narrow  for  the  air  to  throw  the 
thyro-arytaenoid  muscles,  though  they  are  not  contract- 
ed, into  vibration. 

Intensity  or  volume  of  the  voice.  . The  intensity  of 
the  voice,  like  that  of  all  other  sounds,  depends  upon 
the  extent  of  the  vibrations. 

The  vibrations  of  the  vocal  chords  will  be  in  propor- 
tion to  the  force  with  which  the  air  is  expelled  from 
the  breast ; and  the  longer  the  chords  are,  that  is,  the 
more  voluminous  the  larynx  is,  the  more  considerable 
will  be  the  extent  of  the  vibrations.  A strong  person, 
with  a large  chest,  and  a larynx  of  large  dimensions, 
presents  the  most  advantageous  condition  for  the  in- 
tensity of  the  voice.  If  such  a person  becomes  sick, 
his  voice,  on  account  of  his  weakness,  loses  much  of 
its  intensity,  because  it  is  no  longer  expelled  with  the 
same  force  from  the  chest. 

Children,  women,  and  eunuchs,  whose  larynx  is  pro- 
portionably  less  than  that  of  a man  in  adult  age,  have 
also  much  less  intensity  of  voice. 

In  the  ordinary  production  of  the  voice,  it  results 
from  the  simultaneous  motions  of  the  two  sides  of  the 
glottis.  Were  one  of  these  sides  to  lose  the  faculty  of 
causing  the  air  to  vibrate,  the  voice  would  lose,  neces- 
sarily, half  its  intensity,  the  force  of  expiration  being 
the  same.  This  may  be  proved  in  cutting  one  of  the 
recurrent  nerves  of  a dog,  or  in  paying  attention  to  the 
voice  of  a person  who  has  had  a complete  attack  of 
hemiplegia. 

Tone  of  the  voice. — Every  individual  has  a particu- 
lar tone  of  voice  by  which  he  is  known : there  is  also  a 
particular  tone  which  belongs  to  the  different  sexes  atid 
age.  The  tone  of  the  voice  presents  an  infinite  num- 
ber of  modifications.  Upon  what  circumstances  do 
these  depend  ? This  is  unknown.  The  feminine 
tone,  however,  which  is  found  in  children  and  eunuchs, 
generally  agrees  with  the  state  of  the  cartilages  of  the 
larynx.  On  the  contrary,  the  masculine  tone  which 
women  sometimes  possess,  appears  to  be  connected 
with  the  state  of  these  cartilages,  and  particularly 
with  that  of  the  thyroids.  Tone  is  a modification  of 
sound,  of  which  philosophers  have  by  no  means  given 
an  exact  explanation. 

Of  the  extent  of  the  voice. — The  sounds  which  the 
human  larynx  is  capable  of  producing  are  very  nume- 
rous. Many  celebrated  authors  have  endeavoured  to 
explain  the  manner  of  their  formation ; but  they  have 
rather  given  us  comparisons  than  explanations. 

We  have  examined  the  reed  of  the  organ  of  voice; 
we  shall  now  consider  the  tube  that  the  vocal  sound 
traverses  after  having  been  produced.  In  proceeding 
from  below  upwards,  the  tube  is  composed,  1st,  of  the 
interval  between  the  epiglottis  before,  its  lateral  liga- 
ments upon  the  sides,  and  of  the  posterior  side  of  the 
pharynx;  2dly,  of  the  pharynx  behind,  and  laterally, 
and  of  the  most  posterior  part  of  the  base  of  the  tongue 
before ; 3dly,  sometimes  of  the  mouth,  and  sometimes 
of  the  nasal  cavities;  at  other  times,  of  these  two 
cavities  together. 

This  tube,  capable  of  being  prolonged  or  shortened, 


I of  being  made  wider  or  narrower;  being  susceptible  of 
assuming  an  infinite  variety  of  forms,  ought  to  be  very 
I capable  of  performing  all  the  functions  of  the  body  of 
a reed  instrument ; — that  is,  to  be  capable  of  harmo- 
nizing with  the  larynx,  and  of  thus  favouring  the  pro- 
duction of  the  numerous  tones  of  which  the  voice  is 
susceptible;  of  increasing  the  intensity  of  the  vocal 
sound,  by  taking  a conical  form,  with  the  base  out- 
wards ; of  giving  a roundness  and  agreeableness  to  the 
sound,  by  suitably  exposing  its  exterior  opening,  or  by 
almost  entirely  shutting  it,  &c. 

Until  the  influence  of  the  tube  of  reed  instruments 
has  been  determined  with  precision,  it  is  evident  that 
we  can  form  only  probable  conjectures  respecting  the 
influence  of  the  tube  of  the  organ  of  voice.  In  this 
respect  we  can  make  only  a small  number  of  observa- 
tions, which  relate  particularly  to  the  most  apparent 
phenomena. 

A.  The  larynx  is  raised  in  the  production  of  acute 
sounds ; it  is  lowered,  on  the  contrary,  in  the  formation 
of  those  that  are  grave  ; consequently,  the  vocal  tube 
is  shortened  in  the  first  case,  and  lengthened  in  the 
second. 

We  suppose  that  a short  tube  is  more  favourable  to 
the  transmission  of  acute  sounds,  while  a long  one  is 
more  so  for  those  that  are  grave.  The  tube  changes  its 
length  at  the  same  time  that  it  changes  its  breadth ; 
and  this  is  remarkable,  as  we  have  seen  above  that  the 
breadth  of  the  tube  has  a great  influence  upon  its 
facility  of  transmitting  sounds. 

When  the  larynx  descends,  that  is,  when  the  vocal 
tube  is  prolonged,  the  thyroid  cartilage  descends,  and 
removqg  from  the  os  hyoides  the  whole  height  of  the 
thyro-hyoid  membrane.  By  this  separation  the  gland 
of  the  epiglottis  is  carried  forward,  and  places  itself  in 
the  cavity  of  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  os  hyoides ; 
this  gland  draws  after  it  the  epiglottis:  from  this  re- 
sults a considerable  enlargement  of  the  inferior  part  of 
the  vocal  tube. 

The  contrary  phenomenon  happens  when  the  larynx 
is  raised.  The  thyroid  cartilage  then  rises,  and 
becomes  engaged  behind  the  os  hyoides,  by  displacing 
and  pushing  backward  theepiglottid  gland ; this  pushes 
the  epiglottis,  and  the  vocal  tube  is  much  contracted. 
By  imitating  the  motion  upon  the  dead  body,  we  may 
easily  ascertain  that  the  narrowing  may  proceed  to 
five-sixths  of  the  breadth  of  the  tube.  Now,,  we  adapt 
a large  tube  to  a reed  for  the  purpose  of  producing 
grave  sounds;  on  the  contrary,  it  is  a narrow  tube 
which  is  generally  employed  for  the  purpose  of  trans- 
mitting acute  sounds.  We  can  then,  to  a certain  de- 
gree, account  for  the  utility  of  the  changes  of  breadth 
which  take  place  in  the  inferior  part  of  the  vocal 
tube. 

B.  The  presence  of  the  ventricles  of  the  larynx 
immediately  above  the  inferior  ligaments  of  the  glottis, 
appears  intended  to  isolate*  those  ligaments,  so  that 
they  may  vibrate  freely  in  the  air.  When  foreign 
bodies  enter  the  ventricles,  or  when  a false  membrane, 
or  mucosities  are  formed,  the  voice  is  generally  ex- 
tinguished, or  much  weakened. 

0.  From  its  form,  its  position,  its  elasticity;  from 
the  motions  which  its  muscles  impress  upon  it,  the 
epiglottis  appears  to  belong  essentially  to  the  apparatus 
of  the  voice ; but  what  are  its  uses?  We  have  already 
seen  that  it  contributes  powerfully  to  the  narrowing 
of  the  vocal  tube ; it  may  be  supposed  that  it  has  a 
more  important  function. 

D.  The  vocal  tube  has  visibly  an  influence  upon  the 
intensity  of  the  vpice.  The  most  intense  sounds 
which  the  voice  can  produce,  cause  the  mouth  to  be 
opened  very  wide,  the  tongue  to  be  drawn  a little 
back,  and  the  velum  of  the  palate  raised  into  a hori- 
zontal position,  and  to  become  elastic,  closing  all  com- 
munication with  the  nostrils. 

In  this  case  the  pharynx  and  the  mouth  evidently 
perform  the  office  of  a speaking  trumpet,  that  is  to  say 
they  represent  very  exactly  a tube  with  a reed,  which 
increases  in  wideness  outwards,  the  effect  of  which  is 
to  augment  the  intensity  of  the  sound  produced  by  the 
reed.  If  the  mouth  is  in  part  closed,  the  lips  carried 
forward  and  turned  towards  each  other,  the  sound 
will  acquire  rotundity,  and  an  agreeable  expression; 
but  it  will  lose  part  of  its  intensity : this  result  is  easily 
explained  after  what  we  have  said  of  the  influence  of 
the  form  of  tubes  in  reed  instruments. 

For  the  same  reasons,  whenever  the  vocal  soun# 


VOI 


VOI 


pastes  into  the  nose,  it  will  become  dull,  for  the  form 
of  the  cavities  of  the  nose  is  well  fitted  for  diminishing 
the  intensity  of  sounds.  If  the  mouth  and  nose  are 
shut  at  the  same  time,  no  sound  can  be  produced. 

E.  We  have  seen,  in  considering  the  production  of 
voice,  that  a great  number  of  modifications  relative  to 
expression  arise  from  changes  of  the  thickness,  and  of 
the  elasticity  of  the  lips  of  the  glottis.  The  tube  may 
produce  a number  of  others,  according  to  its  different 
degrees  of  length  or  breadth ; according  to  its  form,  the 
contraction  of  the  pharynx,  the  position  of  the  tongue, 
or  of  the  velum  of  the  palate ; according  as  the  sound 
passes  wholly  or  in  part  through  the  mouth,  or  the  nose, 
or  both  together;  according  to  the  individual  disposition 
of  the  mouth  or  nose ; the  existence  or  non-existence 
of  teeth  ; the  size  of  the  tongue,  &c. ; the  expression 
of  the  voice  is  continually  modified  according  to  all 
these  circumstances.  For  example,  whenever  the 
sound  traverses  the  nasal  cavities,  it  becomes  dis- 
agreeably nasal. 

Those  persons  are  mistaken,  who  think  that  the  in- 
tensity of  vocal  sound  may  be  augmented  by  repercus- 
sion, in  passing  through  the  nasal  cavities  ; these  cavi- 
ties produce  quite  a contrary  effect.  Whenever  the 
voice  is  introduced  into  them,  from  whatever  cause,  it 
becomes  dull. 

F.  Besides  the  numerous  modifications  which  the 
tube  of  the  vocal  organ  causes  in  the  intensity  and  the 
expression  of  the  voice,  in  alternately  permitting  or 
intercepting  its  productions : there  is  another  very  im- 
portant kind  of  modification  produced  by  it.  By 
means  of  this  the  vocal  sound  is  divided  into  very 
small  portions,  each  possessing  a distinct  character, 
because  each  of  them  is  produced  by  a distinct  motion 
of  the  tube.  This  sort  of  influence  of  the  vocal  tube  is 
called  the  faculty  of  articulating , which  presents, 
besides,  an  infinite  variety  of  individual  differences 
suitable  to  the  peculiar  organization  of  the  vocal 
tube. 

We  have  hitherto  treated  of  the  human  voice  in 
a general  manner;  we  now  proceed  to  speak  of  its 
principal  modifications ; namely,  the  cry  or  native 
voice ; the  voice  properly  so  called,  or  acquired  voice ; 
speech,  or  articulate  voice ; singing,  or  appreciable 
voice. 

The  cry , or  native  voice. — The  cry  is  a sound  which 
cannot  be  appreciated ; it  is,  like  all  those  sounds  pro- 
duced by  the  larynx,  susceptible  of  variation  in  tone, 
intensity,  and  expression.  The  cry  is  easily  distin- 
guished from  all  other  vocal  sounds  ; but  as  its  charac- 
ter depends  upon  the  expression,  it  is  impossible  to 
account  physically  for  the  difference  between  it  and 
the  latter.  Whdtever  is  the  condition  of  man,  or 
whatever  his  age,  he  is  capable  of  crying.  The  new- 
born child,  the  idiot,  the  person  deaf  from  birth,  the 
savage,  the  civilized,  the  decrepit  old  man,  all  are 
capable  of  producing  cries.  We  ought,  then,  to  con- 
sider the  cry  as  particularly  attached  to  organization ; 
indeed,  we  may  be  convinced  of  this  in  examining  its 
uses. 

By  the  cry  we  express  vivid  sensations,  whether  they 
proceed  from  without  or  within;  whether  they  are 
agreeable  or  painful . — there  are  cries  of  pleasure  and 
of  pain.  By  the  cry  we  express  our  most  simple  in- 
stinctive wants,  the  natural  passions.  There  is  a cry 
of  fury,  another  of  fear,  &.c. 

The  social  wants  and  passions,  not  being  an  indis- 
pensable consequence  of  organization,  and  the  state  of 
civilization  being  necessary  for  their  developement,  they 
have  no  peculiar  cry.  The  cry  comprehends,  generally, 
the  most  intense  sounds  that  the  organ  of  voice  can 
produce;  its  expression  has  often  something  in  it  which 
offends  the  ear,  and  it  has  a strong  action  upon  those 
who  are  near  it. 

By  means  of  the  cry,  important  relations  are  estab- 
lished among  mankind.  The  cry  of  joy  inclines  to 
joy ; the  cry  of  pain  excites  pity ; the  cry  produced  by 
terror  causes  fear,  even  in  those  at  a distance,  &c. 
This  sort  of  language  is  found  in  most  animals  ; it  is 
almost  the  only  language  whieh  has  been  given  them ; 
the  song  of  birds  ought  to  be  considered  as  a modifica- 
tion of  their  cry. 

Acquired  voice , or  voice  properly  so  called. — In  the 
usual  state  of  man,  that  is,  when  he  lives  in  society, 
and  when  he  is  possessed  of  the  faculty  of  hearing,  he 
knows,  from  earliest  youth,  that  mankind  utter  sounds 
which  are  not  cries  he  very  soon  finds  that  he  can 


produce  the  same  sort  of  sounds  with  his  larynx,  and 
immediately,  what  is  called  acquired  voice,  is  deve- 
loped in  him,  by  the  effect  of  imitation,  and  the  advan- 
tages he  derives  from  it.  A deaf  child  cannot  make 
any  remark  with  regard  to  sound,  and,  therefore,  he 
never  acquires  it.  There  seems  to  be  no  difference 
between  the  voice  and  the  cry,  except  in  intensity  and 
expression,  for  it  is  likewise  formed  of  inappreciable 
sounds,  or  of  sounds  whose  intervals  are  not  exactly 
distinguished  by  the  ear. 

Since  the  voice  is  the  consequence  of  hearing,  and 
of  an  intellectual  process,  it  cannot  be  developed  if 
those  circumstances,  by  which  it  is  produced,  do  not 
exist.  In  fact,  children  born  deaf,  who  have  never  had 
any  idea  of  sound ; idiots,  that  establish  no  relation 
between  the  sounds  which  they  hear,  and  those  which 
their  larynx  can  produce,  have  no  voice,  though  the 
vocal  apparatus  of  both  may  be  fit  to  form  and  modify 
sounds  as  well  as  that  of  individuals  perfectly  formed. 

For  the  same  reason  those  whom  we  improperly 
terra  savages,  because  they  have  been  found  wandering 
in  forests  since  their  infancy,  can  have  no  voice;  the 
understanding  not  being  developed  in  a solitary  state, 
but  only  in  social  life. 

The  expression,  the  intensity,  the  tone  of  the  voice, 
are  susceptible  of  numerous  modifications  on  the  part 
of  the  larynx;  the  vocal  tube  also  exerts  a powerful 
influence  upon  the  voice:  speech  and  singing  are  only 
•modifications  of  the  social  voice. 

Modifications  of  the  voice  by  age. — The  larynx  is  in 
proportion  very  small  in  the  fetus,  and  the  new-born 
infant;  its  small  volume  forms  a contrast  with  that  of 
the  os  hyoides,  with  the  tongue  and  other  organs  of 
deglutition,  which  are  already  much  developed.  Be- 
sides, it  is  round,  and  the  thyroid  cartilage  forms  no 
projection  in  the  neck. 

The  lips  of  the  glottis,  the  ventricles,  the  superior 
ligaments,  are  very  short  in  proportion  to  what  they 
become  afterward  ; for  the  thyroid  cartilage  not  being 
much  developed,  they  consequently  occupy  a small 
space.  The  cartilages  are  flexible,  and  have  not  nearly 
the  solidity  which  they  possess  afterward. 

The  larynx  preserves  these  characters  almost  till 
puberty ; at  this  period  a general  revolution  takes 
place  in  the  economy.  The  developement  of  the  ge 
nital  organs  determines  a sudden  increase  in  the  nutri- 
tion of  many  of  the  organs,  of  which  that  of  the  voice 
is  one. 

Tlie  greatest  activity  of  nutrition  is  first  remarked  in 
the  muscles ; afterward,  but  more  slowly,  it  is  seen  in 
the  cartilages:  the  geneial  form  of  the  larynx  is  then 
modified  ; the  thyroid  cartilage  becomes  developed  in 
its  anterior  part,  it  forms  a projection  in  the  neck,  but 
greater  in  the  male  than  in  the  female.  From  this  cir- 
cumstance results  a considerable  prolongation  of  the 
lips  of  the  glottis,  or  thyro-arytEenoid  muscles ; and 
this  phenomenon  is  much  more  worthy  of  remark  than 
the  general  increase  of  the  glottis  which  happens  at  the 
same  time. 

Though  these  changes  in  the  larynx  are  rapid,  they 
do  not  happen  all  at  once ; sometimes  it  is  six  or  eight 
months  before  they  terminate. 

After  puberty  the  larynx  does  not  suffer  any  other 
remarkable  changes  ; its  volume  and  the  projection  of 
the  thyroid  cartilage  continue  to  increase,  and  become 
more  strongly  marked.  The  cartilages  become  par- 
tially ossified  in  manhood. 

In  old  age  the  ossification  of  the  cartilages  continues, 
and  becomes  almost  complete ; the  epiglottid  gland! 
diminishes  considerably,  and  the  internal  muscles,  but 
those  particularly  that  form  the  lips  of  the  glottis,  dimi- 
nish in  volume,  assume  a colour  less  deep,  and  lose 
their  elasticity  ; in  a word,  they  take  the  same  modifi- 
cations as  the  muscular  system  in  general. 

The  production  of  voice,  as  it  supposes  the  passage 
of  air  to  and  from  the  lungs  to  take  place,  cannot  exist 
in  the  fetus,  plunged  as  it  is  in  the  liquor  amnii;  but 
the  child  is  capable  of  producing  very  acute  sounds  at 
the  instant  of  birth. 

Vagitus  is  the  name  that  is  given  to  this  voice,  or 
cry  of  children,  by  which  they  express  their  wants  and 
feelings.  We  must  recollect  that  this  is  the  object  of 
the  cry. 

Towards  the  end  of  the  first  year,  the  child  begins  to 
form  sounds  that  are  easily  distinguished  from  the  va-- 
gitus.  These  sounds,  at  first  vague  and  irregular,  very 
soon  become  more  distinct  and  connected  ; nurses  then 


VOL 


begin  to  make  them  pronounce  the  most  simple  words, 
and  afterward,  thdse  that  are  more  complicated. 

The  pronunciation  of  children  has  very  little  resem- 
blance to  that  of  adults ; but  there  is  also  a great  dif- 
ference between  them.  In  children,  the  teeth  have  not 
yet  quitted  their  alveoli ; tire  tongue  is  comparatively 
very  large ; when  the  lips  are  closed  they  are  larger 
than  is  necessary  for  covering  anteriorly  the  gums ; the 
nasal  cavities  are  not  much  developed,  &c. 

Children  advance  only  by  degrees,  and  in  proportion 
as  their  organs  of  pronunciation  approach  those  of  the 
adult,  to  articulate  exactly  the  different  combinations 
of  letters.  They  are  not  capable  of  forming  appreci- 
able sounds,  or  of  singing,  until  long  after  they  have 
acquired  the  faculty  of  speech.  This  sort  of  sounds  is 
the  voice  properly  so  called,  or  acquired  : they  could  not 
exist  in  the  child  were  it  deaf.  They  ought  not  to  be 
Considered  as  a modification  of  the  vagitus. 

Until  the  period  of  puberty,  the  larynx  remains  pro- 
portionably  very  small,  as  well  as  the  lips  of  the  glottis  : 
the  voice  is  also  composed  entirely  of  acute  sounds. 
It  is  physically  impossible  that  the  larynx  should  pro- 
duce grave  ones. 

At  puberty,  particularly  in  males,  the  voice  under- 
goes a remarkable  modification : it  acquires  in  a few 
days,  often  all  at  once,  a gravity,  and  a dull  or  deaf  ex- 
pression, that  it  was  far  from  having  before. 

It  sinks  in  general  about  an  octave.  The  voice  of  a 
young  man  is  said  to  moult , according  to  the  common  1 
expression.  In  certain  cases  the  voice  is  almost  en- 
tirely lost  for  some  weeks ; it  frequently  contracts  a 
marked  hoarseness.  Sometimes  it  happens  that  the 
young  man  produces  involuntarily  a very  acute  sound 
when  he  wishes  to  produce  a grave  one ; it  is  then 
scarcely  possible  for  him  to  produce  appreciable  sounds, 
or  to  sing  true. 

This  state  of  things  continues  sometimes  nearly  a 
year,  after  which  the  voice  becomes  more  clear,  and 
remains  so  during  life:  but  some  individuals  lose  en- 
tirely, during  the  moulting  of  the  voice,  the  faculty  of 
singing;  others,  who  having  a fine  extensive  voice 
before  the  moulting , have  afterward  only  a very  ordi- 
nary one. 

The  gravity  that  the  voice  acquires  depends  evidently 
upon  tne  developement  of  the  larynx,  and  particularly 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  lips  of  the  glottis.  As  these 
parts  cannot  stretch  backward,  they  come  forward  : it 
is  also  at  this  time  that  the  larynx  projects  in  the  neck, 
and  the  pomum  adami  appears.  In  the  female,  the 
lips  of  the  glottis  do  not  present  at  puberty  this  increase 
in  breadth  ; the  voice  also  generally  remains  acute. 

The  voice  generally  preserves  the  same  characters 
until  after  adult  age ; at  least  the  modifications  that  it 
undergoes  in  the  interval  are  but  inconsiderable,  and 
affect  principally  the  expression,  and  the  volume.  To- 
wards the  beginning  of  old  age,  the  voice  changes 
anew,  its  expression  alters,  and  its  extent  diminishes: 
singing  is  more  difficult,  the  sounds  become  noisy,  and 
their  production  painful  and  fatiguing.  The  organs  of 
pronunciation  being  changed  by  the  effect  of  age,  the 
teeth  become  shorter,  and  frequently  being  lost,  the 
pronunciation  is  sensibly  changed.  All  these  pheno- 
mena are  more  noted  in  confirmed  old  age.  The  voice 
is  weak,  shaking,  and  broken  ; singing  has  the  same 
characters  which  depend  on  impaired  muscular  con- 
traction. Speech  also  undergoes  remarkable  modifica- 
tions ; the  slowness  of  the  motions  of  the  tongue,  the 
want  of  the  teeth,  the  lips  proportionably  longer,  &c. 
necessarily  influence  the  pronunciation.” — Magendie's 
Physiology. 

VOLATICUS.  {Volaticus;  from  volo,  to  fly.)  Vo- 
latile; that  goeth  or  flieth,  as  it  were,  away  suddenly. 

VOLATILE.  See  Volaticus. 

Volatile  alkali.  See  Ammonia. 

Volatile  caustic , alkali.  See  Ammonia. ' 

VOLATILITY.  The  properties  of  bodies  by  which 
they  are  disposed  to  assume  the  vaporous  or  elastic 
state,  and  quit  the  vessels  in  which  they  are  placed. 

VOLCANITE.  See  Augite. 

Volse'lla.  A probang,  or  instrument  to  remove 
bodies  sticking  in  the  throat. 

VOLUBILIS.  Twining.  Botanists  apply  it  to  stems 
which  twine  round  other  plants  by  their  own  spiral 
form,  either  from  left  to  right,  supposing  the  observer 
in  the  centre  (or,  in  other  words,  according  to  the  ap- 
parent motions  of  the  sun) ; as  in  Tamus  communis , 
and  the  honeysuckle : or  from  right  to  left  contrary  to 


VOM 

the  sun,  as  with  Convolvulus  sccpium , the  French 
bean,  &c. 

VOLVA.  {Volva,  «,  f- ; from  valva.)  The  wrap 
per  or  covering  of  dhe  fungous  tribe,  of  a membranous 
texture,  concealing  their  parts  of  fructification,  and  in 
due  time  bursting  all  round,  forming  a ring  upon  the 
stalk,  as  in  Agaricus  campestris.  Such  is  the  original 
meaning  of  this  term,  as  explained  by  Linnaeus;  but  it 
has  become  more  generally  used  by  Linnaeus  himself 
for  the  fleshy  external  covering  of  some  other  fungi, 
which  is  scarcely  raised  out  of  the  ground,  and  enfolds 
the  whole  plant  when  young.  It  is  simple , double , or 
stellated , very  much  cut;  as  in  Lycopodium  stellatum. 

VO'LVULUS.  (From  volvo,  to  roll  up.)  The  iliac 
passion,  or  inflammation  in  the  bowels,  called  twisting 
of  the  guts.  See  Iliac  passion. 

Volvulus  terrestris.  Small  bind-weed.  The 
Convolvulus  minor. 

VO'MER.  Named  from  its  great  resemblance  to.£ 
ploughshare.  It  is  a slender  thin  bone,  separating  the 
nostrils  from  each  other,  consisting  of  two  plates  much 
compressed  together,  very  dense  and  strong,  yet  so  thin 
as  to  be  transparent ; these  two  plates  seem  at  every 
edge  to  separate  from  each  other,  and  thus  a groove  is 
formed  at  every  side. — 1.  This  groove  on  the  upper 
edge,  or,  as  it  may  be  called,  its  base,  is  wide,  and  re 
ceives  into  it  the  projecting  points  of  the  ethmoid  and 
sphenoid  bones,  and  thus  it  stands  very  firmly  and  se- 
'curely  on  the  skull,  and  capable  of  resisting  blows  of 
considerable  violence. — 2.  The  groove,  upon  the  lower 
part,  is  narrower,  and  receives  the  rising  line  in  the 
middle  of  the  palate  plate,  where  the  bones  join  to  form 
the  palate  suture.  At  the  forepart  it  is  united  by  a 
ragged  surface,  and  by  something  like  a groove,  to  the 
middle  cartilage  of  the  nose,  and  as  the  vomer  receives 
the  other  bones  into  its  grooves,  it  is,  as  it  were,  locked 
in  on  all  sides,  receiving  support  and  strength  from 
each,  but  more  particularly  from  the  thick  and  strong 
membrane  which  covers  the  whole,  and  which  is  so 
continuous  as  to  resemble  a periosteum,  or  rather  a 
continued  ligament,  from  Its  strength ; thus  the  slender 
vomer  possesses  sufficient  strength  to  avert  from  it  all 
those  evils  which  must  inevitably  have  occurred,  had 
it  been  less  wisely  or  less  strongly  constructed. 

VO'MICA.  (From  vomo,  to  spit  up;  because  it 
discharges  a sanies.)  An  abscess  of  the  lungs. 

VOMITING.  Vomitio.  A forcible  ejection  of  food, 
or  any  other  substance  from  the  stomach,  through  the 
oesophagus  and  mouth. 

“ That  internal  sensation  which  announces  the  ne 
cessity  of  vomiting  is  called  nausea;  it  consists  of  a 
general  uneasiness,  with  a feeling  of  dizziness  in  the 
head,  or  in  the  epigastric  region  : the  lower  lip  trem- 
bles, and  the  saliva  flows  in  abundance.  Instantly, 
and  involuntarily,  convulsive  contractions  of  the  ab- 
dominal muscles,  and  at  tire  same  time,  of  the  dia- 
phragm, succeed  to  this  state;  the  first  are  not  very 
intense,  but  those  that  follow  are  more  so;  they  at 
last  become  such,  that  the  matters  contained  in  the 
stomach  surmount  the  resistance  of  the  cardia , and  are 
thus  darted,  as  it  were,  into  the  oesophagus  and  mouth: 
the  same  effect  is  produced  many  times  in  succession  ; 
it  ceases  for'a  time,  and  begins  again  after  some  in- 
terval. 

At  the  instant  that  the  matters  driven  from  the 
stomach  traverse  the  pharynx  and  the  mouth,  the 
glottis  shuts,  the  velum  of  the  palate  rises,  and  becomes 
horizontal,  as  in  deglutition ; nevertheless,  every  time 
that  one  vomits,  a certain  quantity  of  liquid  is  intro- 
duced either  into  the  larynx,  or  the  nasal  canals. 

Vomiting  was  long  believed  to  depend  upon  the 
rapid  convulsive  contraction  of  the  stomach ; but  it 
has  been  shown,  by  a' series  of  experiments,  that,  in 
the  process,  this  viscus  is  nearly  passive  ; and  that  the 
true  agents  of  vomiting  are,  on  the  one  hand,  the  dia- 
phragm, and,  on  the  other,  the  large  abdominal  muscles. 

In  the  ordinary  state,  the  diaphragm  and  the  muscles 
of  the  abdomen  co-operate  in  vomiting;  but  each  of 
them  can,  nevertheless,  produce  it  separately.  Thus, 
an  animal  still  vomits,  though  the  diaphragm  has  been 
rendered  immoveable  by  cutting  the  diaphragmatic 
nerves ; it  vomits  the  same,  though  the  whole  abdo- 
minal muscles  have  been  taken  away  by  the  knife, 
with  the  precaution  of  leaving  the  linea  alba  and  the 
peritonaeum  untouched.” 

Vomiting  of  blood.  See  Hwmatemesis. 
i Vo'mitCs  cruentus.  See  Hcematemesis. 


WAR 


WAT 


Voracitms  appetite.  See  Bulimia. 

Vox  abscissa.  Hoarseness,  and  also  a loss  of  voice. 
Vulga'go.  Tlio  asarabacca  was  so  called.  See 
Asarum. 

VULNERA'RIA.  (From  i minus,  a wound.)  Me- 
dicines which  heal  wounds.  An  herb  named  from  its 
use  in  healing  wounds. 

V ulneraria  aqua.  Arquebusade. 

VU'LNUS.  A wound. 

Vulnus  sclopeticum.  A gun-shot  wound. 


VULP.ENITE.  A mineral  of  a grayish-white  co- 
lour, found  along  with  granular  foliated  limestone,  at 
Vulpino,  in  Italy. 

VU'LVA.  (Quasi  valva,  the  aperture  to  the  womb; 
or  quasi  volva,  because  the  foetus  is  wrapped  up  in  it.) 
The  pudendum  muliebre,  or  parts  of  generation  proper 
to  women  ; also  a foramen  in  the  brain. 

VULVA'RIA.  (From  wtoa,  the  womb ; so  named 
from  its  smell,  or  use  in  disorders  of  the  womb.)  Stink 
ing  orach.  See  Chenopodium  vulvaria. 


w 


■V^ACKE.  A mineral  substance  intermediate  be- 
* v tween  clay  and  basalt. 

WADD.  A name  of  plumbago. 

Wadd,  black.  An  ore  of  manganese : so  called  in 
Derbyshire. 

WAKE  ROBIN.  See  A rum. 

WALL-FLOWER.  See  Cheiranthus  cheiri. 

WALL-PELLITORY.  See  Parietaria. 

WALL- PEPPER.  See  Sedum  acre. 

WALNUT.  S eeJuglans. 

WALTHER,  Augustine  Frederic,  a physician, 
was  appointed,  in  1723,  professor  of  anatomy  and  sur- 
gery at  Leyden.  Several  of  his  dissertations  on  ana- 
tomical subjects  are  commended,  and  have  been  re- 
printed by  Haller.  The  best  of  his  larger  pieces  is 
“De  Lingua.  Humana  Libellus,”  in  quarto.  As  a 
botanist  he  published  a Catalogue  of  the  Plants  in  his 
own  garden,  and  a work  on  the  Structure  of  Plants. 
He  died  about  the  year  1746. 

WALTON.  A town,  near  Tewkesbury  in  Glou- 
cestershire, where  there  is  a mineral  spring,  containing 
a small  portion  of  iron  dissolved  in  fixed  air ; of  ab- 
sorbent earth  combined  with  hepatic  air ; of  vitriolated 
magnesia,  and  muriated  mineral  alkali;  but  the  pro- 
portions of  these  constituent  parts  have  not  been  accu- 
rately ascertained.  Walton  water  is  chiefly  effica- 
cious in  obstructions  and  other  affections  of  the  glands. 

[WARREN,  Dr.  Joseph,  was  born  in  Roxbury, 
near  Boston,  in  1741.  He  was  a distinguished  physician 
and  patriot  of  the  American  Revolution,  and  was  killed 
early  in  the  contest,  at  the  battle  of  Bunker’s  Hill,  June 
17,  1775.  The  following  is  from  Thacber’s  Life  of 
Warren: 

“The  calmness  and  indifference  of  the  veteran  1 in 
clouds  of  dust  and  seas  of  blood,’  can  only  be  acquired 
by  long  acquaintance  with  the  trade  of  death  ; but  the 
heights  of  Charlestown  will  bear  eternal  testimony, 
how  suddenly  in  the  cause  of  freedom  the  peaceful 
citizen  can  become  the  invincible  warrior ; stung  by 
oppression,  he  springs  forward  from  his  tranquil  pur- 
suits, undaunted  by  opposition  and  undismayed  by 
danger,  to  fight  even  to  death  for  the  defence  of  his 
rights.  Parents,  wives,  children,  and  country,  all  the 
hallowed  properties  of  existence,  are  to  him  the  talisman 
that  takes  fear  from  his  heart  and  nerves  his  arm  to 
victory.  In  the  requiem  over  those  who  have  fallen  in 
the  cause  of  their  country,  which  ‘ Time,  with  his  own 
eternal  lips  shall  sing,’  the  praises  of  Warren  shall  be 
distinctly  heard. 

The  blood  of  those  patriots  who  have  fallen  in  de- 
fence of  republics  has  often  ‘cried  from  the  ground,’ 
against  the  ingratitude  of  the  country  for  which  it  was 
shed.  No  monument  was  reared  to  their  fame ; no 
record  of  their  virtues  written  ; no  fostering  hand  ex- 
tended to  their  offspring ; but  they  and  their  deeds  were 
neglected  and  forgotten.  Towards  Warren  there  was 
no  ingratitude,— our  country  is  free  from  this  stain. 
Congress  were  the  guardians  of  his  honours,  and  re- 
membered that  his  children  were  unprotected  orphans. 
Within  a year  after  his  death,  Congress  passed  the  fol- 
lowing resolution : 

‘ That  a monument  be  erected  to  the  memory  of 
General  Warren,  in  the  town  of  Boston,  with  the  fol- 
lowing inscription : — 

1 In  Honour  of  JOSEPH  WARREN,  Major-General 
of  Massachusetts  Bay.  He  devoted  his  life  to  the  liber 
ties  of  his  country;  and  in  bravely  defending  them, 
fell  an  early  victim  in  the  battle  of  bunker  iiill, 


June  17, 1775.  The  Congress  of  the  United  States,  as 
an  acknowledgment  of  his  services  and  distinguished 
merit,  have  erected  this  monument  to  his  memory, ” 

It  was  resolved,  likewise,  ‘ That  the  eldest  son  of 
General  Warren  should  be  educated  from  that  time  at 
the  expense  of  the  United  States.’  On  the  first  of 
July,  1780,  Congress,  recognising  these  former  resolu- 
tions, further  resolved,  ‘ That  it  should  be  recommended 
to  the  executive  of  Massachusetts  Bay,  to  make  provi- 
sion for  the  maintenance  and  education  of  his  three 
younger  children  ; and  that  Congress  would  defray  the 
expense  to  the  amount  of  the  half-pay  of  a major-gene- 
ral ; to  commence  at  the  time  of  his  death,  and  con 
tinue  till  the  youngest  of  the  children  should  be  of  age.’ 
The  part  of  the  resolutions  relafing  to  the  educating  of 
the  children,  was  carried  into  effect  accordingly.  The 
monument  is  not'yet  erected,  but  it  is  not  too  late.  The 
shade  of  Warren  will  not  repine  at  this  neglect,  while 
the  ashes  of  W ashington  repose  without  gravestone  or 
epitaph.”  Thach.  Med.  Biog.  A.] 

WATER.  Aqua.  This  fluid  is  so  well  known,  as 
scarcely  to  require  any  definition. 

It  is  transparent,  without  colour,  smell,  or  taste;  in 
a very  slight  degree  compressible;  when  pure,  not 
liable  to  spontaneous  change ; liquid  in  the  common 
temperature  of  our  atmosphere,  assuming  the  solid 
form  at  32°  Fahrenheit,  and  the  gaseous  at  212°,  but 
returning  unaltered  to  its  liquid  state  on  resuming  any 
degree  of  heat  between  these  points ; capable  of  dis- 
solving a greater  number  of  natural  bodies  than  any 
other  flu.d  whatever,  and  especially  those  known  by 
the  name  of  the  saline  ; performing  the  most  impor- 
tant functions  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms, 
and  entering  largely  into  their  composition  as  a con- 
stituent part. 

“Native  water  is  seldom,  if  ever,  found  perfectly 
pure.  The  waters  that  flow  within  or  upon  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth,  contain  various  earthy,  saline,  me- 
tallic, vegetable,  or  animal  particles,  according  to  the 
substances  over  or  through  which  they  pass.  Rain 
and  snow  waters  are  much  purer  than  these,  although 
they  also  contain  whatever  floats  in  the  air,  or  has 
been  exhaled  along  with  the  watery  vapours. 

The  purity  of  water  may  be  known  by  the  following 
marks  or  properties  of  pure  water : — 

1.  Pure  water  is  lighter  than  water  that  is  not  pure. 

■*.  Pure  water  is  more  fluid  than  water  that  is  not 
pure.  * 

3.  It  has  no  colour,  smell,  or  taste. 

4.  It  wets  more  easily  than  the  waters  containing 
metallic  and  earthy  salts,  called  hard  waters,  and  feels 
softer  when  touched. 

5.  Soap,  or  a solution  of  soap  in  alkohol,  mixes  easily 
and  perfectly  with  it. 

6.  It  is  not  rendered  turbid  by  adding  to  it  a solution 
of  gold  in  aqua  regia,  or  a solution  of  silver,  or  of  lead, 
or  of  mercury,  in  nitric  acid,  or  a solution  of  acetate 
of  lead  in  water. 

Water  was,  till  modern  times,  considered  as  an  ele- 
mentary or  simple  substance. 

Previous  to  the  month  of  October,  1776,  the  cele- 
brated Macquer,  assisted  by  Sigaud  de  la  Fond,  made 
an  experiment  by  burning  hydrogen  gas  in  a bottle, 
without  explosion,  and  holding  a white  china  saucer 
over  the  flame.  His  intention  appears  to  have  been 
that  of  ascertaining  whether  any  fuliginous  smoke  was 
produced,  and  he  observes,  that  the  saucer  remained 
perfectly  clean  and  white,  but  was  moistened  with  per- 


WAT 


WAT 


ceptible  drops  of  a clear  fluid,  resembling  water;  and 
which,  in  fact,  appeared  to  him  and  his  assistant  to  be 
nothing  but  pure  water.  He  does  not  say  whether  any 
test  was  applied  to  ascertain  this  purity,  neither  does 
he  make  any  remark  on  the  fact. 

In  the  month  of  September,  1777,  Bucquet  and  La- 
voisier, not  being  acquainted  with  the  fact  which  is 
incidentally  and  concisely  mentioned  by  Macquer, 
made  an  experiment  to  discover  what  is  produced  by 
the  combustion  of  hydrogen.  They  fired  five  or  six 
pints  of  hydrogen  in  an  open  and  wide-mouthed  bottle, 
and  instantly  poured  two  ounces  of  lime-water  through 
the  flame,  agitating  the  bottle  during  the  time  the  com- 
bustion lasted.  The  result  of  this  experiment  showed, 
that  carbonic  acid  was  not  produced. 

Before  the  month  of  April,  1781,  Mr.  John  Warl- 
tire,  encouraged  by  Dr.  Priestley,  fired  a mixture  of 
common  air  and  hydrogen  gas  in  a close  copper  vessel, 
and  found  its  weight  diminished.  Dr.  Priestley,  like- 
wise, before  the  same  period,  fired  a like  mixture  of 
hydrogen  and  oxygen- gas  in  a closed  glass  vessel,  Mr. 
Warltire  being  present.  The  inside  of  the  vessel, 
though  clean  and  dry  before,  became  dewy,  and  was 
lined  with  a sooty  substance.  These  experiments 
were  afterward  repeated  by  Mr.  Cavendish  and  Dr. 
Priestley;  and  it  w'as  found,  that  the  diminution  of 
w'eight  did  not  take  place,  neither  was  the  sooty  mat- 
ter perceived.  These  circumstances,  therefore,  must 
have  arisen  from  some  imperfection  in  the  apparatus 
or  materials  with  which  the  former  experiments  were 
made. 

It  was  the  summer  of  the  year  1781,  that  Mr.  Henry 
Cavendish  was  busied  in  examining  what  becomes 
of  the  air  lost  by  combustion,  and  made  those  valuable 
experiments  which  were  read  before  the  Royal  Society 
on  the  15th  of  January,  1784.  He  burned  500,000 
grain  measures  of  hydrogen  gas,  with  about  two  and 
a half  times  the  quantity  of  common  air,  and  by 
causing  the  burned  air  to  pass  through  a glass  tube 
eight  feet  in  length,  135  grains  of  pure  water  were 
condensed.  He  also  exploded  a mixture  of  19,500 
grain  measures  of  oxygen  gas,  and  37,000  of  hydrogen, 
in  a close  vessel.  The  condensed  liquor  was  found  to 
contain  a small  portion  of  nitric  acid,  when  the  mix- 
ture of  the  air  was  such,  that  the  burned  air  still  con- 
tained a considerable  portion  of  oxygen.  In  this 
case  it  may  be  presumed,  that  some  of  the  oxygen 
combines  with  a portion  of  nitrogen  present. 

In  the  mean  time,  Lavoisier  continued  his  researches, 
and  during  the  winter  of  1781-1782,  together  with  Gin- 
gembre,  he  filled  a bottle  of  six  pints  with  hydrogen, 
which  being  fired,  and  two  ounces  of  lime-water 
poured  in,  was  instantly  stopped  with  a cork,  through 
which  a flexible  tube  communicating  with  a vessel  of 
oxygen  was  passed.  The  inflammation  ceased,  except 
at  the  orifice  of  the  tube,  through  which  the  oxygen 
was  pressed,  where  a beautiful  flame  appeared.  The 
combustion  continued  a considerable  time,  during 
which  the  lime-water  was  agitated  in  the  bottle. 
Neither  this,  nor  the  same  experiment  repeated  with 
pure  water,  and  with  a weak  solution  of  alkali  instead 
of  lime-water,  afforded  the  information  sought  after, 
for  these  substances  were  not  at  all  altered. 

The  inference  of  Mr.  Warltire,  respecting  the  moist- 
ure on  the  inside  of  the  glass  in  which  Dr.  Priestley 
first  fired  hydrogen  and  common  air,  was,  that  these 
airs,  by  combustion,  deposited  the  moisture  they  con- 
tained. Mr.  Watt,  however,  inferred  from  these 
experiments,  that  water  is  a compound  of  the  burned 
airs,  which  have  given  out  their  latent  heat  by  com- 
bustion ; and  communicated  his  sentiments  to  Dr. 
Priestley  in  a letter  dated  April  26,  1783 

It  does  not  appear,  that  the  composition  of  water 
was  known  or  admitted  in  France,  till  the  summer  of 
1783,  when  Lavoisier  and  De  la  Place,  on  the  24th  of 
June,  repeated  the  experiment  of  burning  hydrogen  and 
oxygen  in  a glass  vessel  over  mercury,  in  a still  greater 
quantity  than  had  been  burned  by  Mr.  Cavendish. 
The  result  was  nearly  five  gross  of  pure  water. 
Monge  made  a similar  experiment  at  Paris  nearly  at 
the  same  time,  or  perhaps  before. 

This  assiduous  and  accurate  philosopher  then  pro- 
ceeded, in  conjunction  with  Meusnier,  to  pass  the 
steam  of  water  through  a red-hot  iron  tube,  and  found 
that  the  iron  wasoxydized,  and  hydrogen  disengaged  ; 
and  the  steam  of  water  being  passed  over  a variety  of 
other  combustible  or  oxidable  substances,  produced 


similar  results,  the  water  disappearing  and  hydrogen 
being  disengaged.  These  capital  experiments  were 
accounted  for  by  Lavoisier,  by  supposing  the  water 
to  be  decomposed  into  its  component  parts,  oxygen  and 
hydrogen,  the  former  of  which  unites  with  the  ignited 
substance,  while  the  latter  is  disengaged. 

The  grand  experiment  of  the  composition  of  water 
by  Fourcroy,  Vauquelin,  and  Seguin,  was  begun  on 
Wednesday,  May  13, 1790,  and  was  finished  on  Friday, 
the  22d  of  the  same  month.  The  combustior:  was 
kept  up  185  hours  with  little  interruption,  during  which 
time  the  machine  was  not  quitted  tor  a moment.  The 
experimenters  alternately  refreshed  themselves  when 
fatigued,  by  lying  for  a few  hours  on  mattresses  in  the 
laboratory. 

To  obtain  the  hydrogen,  1.  Zinc  was  melted  and 
rubbed  into  a powder  in  a very  hot  mortar.  2.  This 
metal  was  dissolved  in  concentrated  sulphuric  acid 
diluted  with  seven  parts  of  water.  The  air  procured 
was  made  to  pass  through  caustic  alkali.  To  obtain 
the  oxygen,  two  pounds  and  a half  of  crystallized 
hyperoxymuriate  of  potassa  were  distilled,  and  the  air 
was  transferred  through  caustic  alkali. 

The  volume  of  hydrogen  employed  was  25963.568 
cubic  inches,  and  the  weight  ivas  1039.358  grains. 

The  volume  of  oxygen  was  12570.942,  and  the  weight 
was  6209.869  grains. 

The  total  weight  of  both  elastic  fluids  was  7249.227. 

The  weight  of  water  obtained  was  7244  grains,  or 
12  ounoes  4 gros  45  grains. 

The  weight  of  water  which  should  have  been  ob- 
tained was  12  ounces  4 gros  49.227  grains. 

The  deficit  was  4.227  grains. 

The  quantity  of  azotic  air  before  the  experiment 
w'as  415.256  cubic  inches,  and  at  the  close  of  it  467. 
The  excess  after  the  experiment  was  consequently 
51.744  cubic  inches.  This  augmentation  is  to  be  attri 
buted,  the  academicians  think,  to  the  small  quantity  of 
atmospheric  air  in  the  cylinders  of  the  gasometers  at 
the  time  the  other  airs  were  introduced.  These  addi- 
tional 51  cubic  inches  could  not  arise  from  the  hydro- 
gen, for  experiment  showed,  that  it  contained  no  azotic 
air.  Some  addition  of  this  last  fluid,  the  experi- 
menters think,  cannot  be  avoided,  on  account  of  the 
construction  of  the  machine. 

The  water  being  examined,  was  found  to  be  as  pure 
as  distilled  water.  Its  specific  gravity  to  distilled  water 
was  as  18671 : 18670. 

The  decomposition  of  water  is  most  elegantly  ef- 
fected by  electricity. 

The  composition  of  water  is  best  demonstrated  by 
exploding  2 volumes  of  hydrogen  and  1 of  oxygen,  in 
the  eudiometer.  They  disappear  totally,  and  pure 
water  results.  A cubic  inch  of  this  liquid,  at  60°, 
W’eighs  252.52  grains,  consisting  of 

28.06  grains  hydrogen,  and 
224.46  oxygen. 

The  bulk  of  the  former  gas  is  1325  cubic  inches. 

That  of  the  latter  is  662 

1987 

Hence  there  is  a condensation  of  nearly. two  thousand 
volumes  into  one;  and  one  volume  of  w'ater  contains 
662  volumes  of  oxygen.  The  prime  equivalent  of 
water  is  1.125  ; composed  of  a prime  of  oxygen  = 1.0  + 
a prime  of  hydrogen  = 0.125  ; or  9 parts  by  weight  of 
water,  consisting  of  8 oxygen  + 1 hydrogen.” 

The  simple  waters  are  the  following  : 

1.  Distilled  icater.  This  is  the  lightest  of  all  others, 
containing  neither  solid  nor  gaseous  substances  in  solu- 
tion, is  perfectly  void  of  taste  and  smell,  colourless 
and  beautifully  transparent,  has  a soft  feel,  and  wets 
the  fingers  more  readily  than  any  other.  It  mixes 
uniformly  with  soap  into  a smooth  opaline  mixture, 
but  may  be  added  to  a solution  of  soap  in  spirit  of 
wine  without  injuring  its  transparency.  The  clearness 
of  distilled  water  is  not  impaired  by  the  most  delicate 
chemical  reagents,  such  as  lime-water,  a solution  of 
barytes  in  any  acid,  nitrated  silver,  or  acid  of  sugar. 
When  evaporated  in  a silver  vessel  it  leaves  no 
residuum  ; if  preserved  from  access  of  foreign  matter 
floating  in  the  air,  it  may  be  kept  for  ages  unaltered  in 
vessels  upon  which  it  has  no  action,  as  it  does  not 
possess  within  itself  the  power  of  decomposition.  As 
it  freezes  exactly  at  32°  of  Fahrenheit,  and  boils  at 
212°  under  the  atmospherical  pressure  of  29.8  inches 


WAT 


WAT 


these  points  are  made  use  of  as  the  standard  ones  for 
thermometrical  division ; and  its  specific  weight  being 
always  the  same  under  the  mean  pressure  and  tempe- 
rature, it  is  employed  for  the  comparative  standard  of 
specific  gravity. 

Pure  distilled  water  can  only  be  procured  from  water 
which  contains  no  volatile  matters  that  will  rise  in  dis- 
tillation, and  continue  still  in  union  with  the  vapour 
when  condensed.  Many  substances  are  volatile  during 
distillation,  but  most  of  the  gases,  such  as  common 
air,  carbonic  acid,  and  the  like,  are  incapable  of 
uniting  with  water  at  a high  temperature : other 
bodies,  however,  such  as  vegetable  essential  oil,  and, 
in  general,  much  of  that  which  gives  the  peculiar 
odour  to  vegetable  and  animal  matter,  will  remain 
in  water  after  distillation.  So  the  steam  of  many 
animal  and  vegetable  decoctions  has  a certain  flavour 
which  distinguishes  it  from  pure  writer;  and  the 
aqueous  exhalation  from  living  bodies,  which  is  a 
kind  of  distillation,  has  a similar  impregnation.  . 

To  obtain  distilled  water  perfectly  pure,  much  stress 
was  laid  by  former  chemists  on  repeating  the  process 
a great  number  of  times;  but  it  was  found  by  Lavoi- 
sier, that  rain  water  once  distilled,  rejecting  the  first 
and  last  products,  was  as  pure  a water  as  could  be 
procured  by  any  subsequent  distillations. 

Distilled  water  appears  to  possess  a higher  power 
than  any  other  as  si  resolvent  of  all  animal  and  vege- 
table matter,  and  these  it  holds  in  solution  as  little  as 
possible  altered  from  the  state  in  which  they  existed 
in  the  body  that  yielded  them.  Hence  the  great  prac- 
tical utility  of  that  kind  of  chemical  analysis  which 
presents  the  proximate  constituent  parts  of  these 
bodies,  and  which  is  effected  particularly  by  the  assist- 
ance of  pure  water.  On  the  other  hand,  a saline, 
earthy,  or  otherwise  impure  water,  will  alter  the 
texture  of  some  of  the  parts,  impair  their  solubility, 
produce  material  changes  on  the  colouring  matter,  and 
become  a less  accurate  analyzer  on  account  of  the 
admixture  of  foreign  contents. 

Distilled  water  is  seldom  employed  to  any  extent  in 
the  preparation  of  food,  or  in  manufactures,  on  account 
of  the  trouble  of  procuring  it  in  large  quantities  ; but 
for  preparing  a great  number  of  medicines,  and  in 
almost  every  one  of  the  nicer  chemical  processes  that 
are  carried  on  in  the  liquid  way,  this  water  is  an  es- 
sential requisite.  The  only  cases  in  which  it  has  been 
used  largely  as  an  article  of  drink,  have  been  in  those 
important  trials  made  of  the  practicability  of  pro- 
curing it  by  condensing  the  steam  of  sea  water  by 
means  of  a simple  apparatus  adapted  to  a ship’s  boiler ; 
and  these  have  fully  shown  the  ease  with  which  a large 
quantity  of  fresh  water,  of  the  purest  kind,  may  be 
had  at  sea,  at  a moderate  expense,  whereby  one  of 
the  most  distressing  of  all  wants  may  be  relieved. 
There  are  one  or  two  circumstances  which  seem  to 
show  that  water,  when  not  already  loaded  with  foreign 
matter,  may  become  a solvent  for  concretions  in 
urinary  passages.  At  least,  we  know  that  very  ma- 
terial advantage  has  been  derived  in  these  cases  from 
very  pure  natural  springs,  and  hence  a course  of  dis- 
tilled water  has  been  recommended  as  a fair  subject 
of  experiment. 

2.  Rain  water , the  next  in  purity  to  distilled  water, 
is  that  which  has  undergone  a natural  distillation  from 
'^e  earth,  and  is  condensed  in  the  form  of  rain.  This 
is  water  so  nearly  approaching  to  absolute  purity  as 
probably  to  be  equal  to  distilled  water  for  every  pur- 
pose except  in  the  nicer  chemical  experiments.  The 
foreign  contents  of  rain  water  appear  to  vary  accord- 
ing to  the  state  of  the  air  through  which  it  falls.  The 
heterogeneous  atmosphere  of  a smoky  town  will  give 
some  impregnation  to  rain  as  it  passes  through,  and 
this,  though  it  may  not  be  at  once  perceptible  on 
chemical  examination,  will  yet  render  it  liable  to  spon- 
taneous change;  and  hence,  rain  water,  if  long  kept, 
especially  in  hot  climates,  acquires  a strong  smell, 
becomes  full  of  animalcula,  and  in  some  degree  putrid. 
According  to  Margraaff,  the  constant  foreign  contents 
of  rain  water  appear  to  be  some  traces  of  the  muriatic 
and  nitric  acids ; but  as  this  water  is  always  very  soft, 
it  is  admirably  adapted  for  dissolving  soap,  or  for  the 
solution  of  alimentary  or  colouring  matter,  and  it  is 
accordingly  used  largely  for  these  purposes.  The  spe- 
cific gravity  of  rain  water  is  so  nearly  the  same  as 
that  of  distilled  water,  that  it  requires  the  most  delicate 
instruments  to  ascertain  the  difference.  Rain,  that 

K k k 


falls  in  towns,  acquires  a small  quantity  of  lime  and 
calcareous  matter  from  the  mortar  and  plaster  of  the 
houses. 

3.  Ice  and  snow  water.  This  equals  rain  water  in 
purity,  and,  when  fresh  melted,  contains  no  air,  which 
is  expelled  during  freezing.  In  cold  climates  and  in 
high  latitudes,  thawed  snow  forms  the  constant  drink 
of  the  inhabitants  during  winter;  and  the  vast  masses 
of  ice  which  float  on  the  polar  saes  afford  an  abundant 
supply  to  the  mariner.  It  is  well  known,  that  in  a 
weak  brine,  exposed  to  a moderate  freezing  cold,  it  is 
only  the  watery  part  that  congeals,  leaving  the  unfrozen 
liquor  proportionably  stronger  of  the  salt.  The  same 
happens  with  a dilute  solution  of  vegetable  acids,  with 
fermented  liquors,  and  the  like ; and  advantage  is  taken 
of  this  property  to  reduce  the  saline  part  to  a more  con- 
centrated form.  Snow  water  has  long  lain  under  the 
imputation  of  occasioning  those  strumous  swellings  in 
the  neck  which  deform  the  inhabitants  of  many  of  the 
Alpine  valleys ; but  this  opinion  is  not  supported  by  any 
well-authenticated,  indisputable  facts,  and  is  rendered 
still  more  improbable,  if  not  entirely  overturned,  by  the 
frequency  of  the  disease  in  Sumatra,  where  ice  and 
snow  are  never  seen,  and  its  being  quite  unknown  in 
Chili  and  in  Thibet,  though  the  rivers  of  these  coun- 
tries are  chiefly  supplied  by  the  melting  of  the  snow, 
with  which  the  mountains  are  covered. 

4.  Spring  water.  Under  this  comprehensive  class 
are  included  all  waters  that  spring  from  some  depth 
beneath  the  soil,  and  are  used  at  the  fountain  head,  or 
at  least  before  they  have  run  any  considerable  distance 
exposed  to  the  air.  It  is  obvious  that  spring  water  will 
be  as  various  in  its  contents  as  the  substances  that  com- 
pose the  soil  through  which  it  flows.  When  the  ingre- 
dients are  not  such  as  to  give  any  peculiar  medical  or 
sensible  properties,  and  the  water  is  used  for  common 
purposes,  it  is  distinguished  as  a hard  or  soft  spring, 
sweet  or  brackish,  clear  or  turbid,  and  the  like.  ’Ordi- 
nary springs  insensibly  pass  into  riiineral  springs,  as 
their  foreign  contents  become  more  notable  and  un 
common ; though  sometimes  waters  have  acquired  great 
medical  reputation  from  mere  purity. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  springs  are  cold ; but  as 
they  take  their  origin  at  some  depth  from  the  surface, 
and  below  the  influence  of  the  external  atmosphere, 
their  temperature  is,  in  general,  pretty  uniform  during 
every  vicissitude  of  season,  and  always  several  degrees 
higher  than  the  freezing  point.  Others,  again,  arise 
constantly  hot,  or  with  a temperature  always  exceeding 
the  summer  heat;  and  the  warmth  possessed  by  the 
water  is  entirely  independent  of  that  of  the  atmosphere, 
and  varies  little,  winter  or  summer. 

One  of  the  principal  inconveniences  in  almost  every 
spring  water,  is  its  hardness,  owing  to  the  presence  of 
earthy  salts,  which,  in  by  far  the  greater  number  of 
cases,  are  only  the  insipid  substances,  chalk,  and  sele- 
nite, which  do  not  impair  the  taste  of  the  water ; while 
the  air  which  it  contains,  and  its  grateful  coolness,  ren- 
der it  a most  agreeable,  and  generally  a perfectly  inno- 
cent drink ; though  sometimes,  in  weak  stomachs,  it  is 
apt  to  occasion  an  uneasy  sense  of  weight  in  that  organ, 
followed  by  a degree  of  dyspepsia.  The  quantity  of 
earthy  salts  varies  considerably;  but,  in  general,  it  ap- 
pears that  the  proportion  of  five  grains  of  these  in  the 
pint  will  constitute  a hard  water,  unfit  for  washing  with 
soap,  and  for  many  other  purposes  of  household  use  oi 
manufactures.  The  water  of  deep  wells  is  always, 
ceteris  paribus,  much  harder  than  that  of  springs  which 
overflow  their  channel;  for  much  agitation  and  ex- 
posure to  air  produce  a gradual  deposition  of  the  calca- 
reous earth ; and  hence  spring  water  often  incrusts  to  a 
considerable  thickness  the  inside  of  any  kind  of  tube 
through  which  it  flows,  as  it  arises  from  the  earth. 
The  specific  gravity  of  these  waters  is  also,  in  general, 
greater  than  that  of  any  other  kind  of  water,  that  of  the 
sea  excepted.  Springs  that  overflow  their  channel,  and 
form  to  themselves  a limited  bed,  pass  insensibly  into 
the  state  of  stream  or  river  water,  and  become  thereby 
altered  in  some  of  their  chemical  properties. 

5.  River  water. — This  is  in  general  much  softer  and 
more  free  from  earthy  salts  than  the  last,  but  contains 
less  air  of  any  kind:  for,  by  the  agitation  of  a long  cur- 
rent, and  in  most  cases  a great  increase  of  temperature, 
it  loses  common  air  and  carbonic  acid,  and,  with  this 
last,  much  of  the  lime  which  it  held  in  solution.  The 
specific  gravity  thereby  becomes  less,  the  taste  not  so 
harsh,  but  less  fresh  arid  agreeable,  and  out  of  a hard 


WAT 


WHE 


spring  is  often  made  a stream  of  sufficient  purity  for 
most  of  the  purposes  where  a soft  water  is  required. 
Some  streams,  however,  that  arise  from  a clean  sili- 
cious  rock,  and  flow  in  a sandy  or  stony  bed,  are  from 
the  outset  remarkably  pure.  Such  are  the  mountain 
lakes  and  rivulets  in  the  rocky  districts  of  Wales,  the 
source  of  the  beautiful  waters  of  the  Dee,  and  number- 
less other  rivers  that  flow  through  the  hollow  of  every 
valley.  Switzerland  has  long  been  celebrated  for  the 
purity  and  excellence  of  its  waters,  which  pour  in  co- 
pious streams  from  the  mountains,  and  give  rise  to 
some  of  the  finest  rivers  in  Europe.  An  excellent 
observer  and  naturalist,  the  illustrious  Haller,  thus 
speaks  of  the  Swiss  waters: — “Vulgaribus  aqujs  Hel- 
vetia super  omnes  fere  Europse  regionesexcellit.  Nus- 
quam  liquidas  illas  aquas  et  crystalli  simillimasse  mihi 
obtulisse  memini  postquam  ex  Helvetia  excessi.  Ex 
scopulis  enim  nostr®  per  puros  silices  percolat®  nulla 
terra  vitiantur.”  Some  of  them  never  freeze  in  the 
severest  winter,  the  cause  of  which  is  probably,  as 
Haller  conjectures,  that  they  spring  at  once  out  of  a 
subterraneous  reservoir  so  deep  as  to  be  out  of  the  reach 
of  frost ; and  during  their  short  course,  when  exposed 
to  day,  they  have  not  time  to  be  cooled  down  from  53°, 
their  original  temperature,  to  below  the  freezing  point. 

Some  river  waters,  however,  that  do  not  take  their 
rise  from  a rocky  soil,  and  are  indeed  at  first  consider- 
ably charged  with  foreign  matter,  dpring  a long  course, 
even  over  a rich  cultivated  plain,  become  remarkably 
pure  as  to  saline  contents,  but  often  fouled  with  mud, 
and  vegetable  or  animal  exuvi®,  which  are  rather  sus- 
pended than  held  in  true  solution.  Such  is  that  of  the 
Thames,  which,  taken  up  at  London  at  low  water,  is  a 
very  soft  and  good  water,  and,  after  rest  and  filtration, 
it  holds  but  a very  small  portion  of  any  thing  that  could 
prove  noxious  or  impede  any  manufacture.  It  is  also 
excellently  fitted  for  sea-store ; but  it  here  undergoes  a 
remarkable  spontaneous  change.  No  water  carried 
to  sea  becomes  putrid  sooner  than  that  of  the  Thames. 
When  a cask  is  opened  after  being  kept  a month  or 
two,  a quantity  of  inflammable  air  escapes,  and  the 
water  is  so  black  and  offensive  as  scarcely  to  be  borne. 
Upon  racking  it  off,  however,  into  large  earthen  vessels 
(oil  jars  are  commonly  used  for  the  purpose),  and  ex- 
posing it  to  the  air,  it  gradually  deposites  a quantity  of 
black  slimy  mud,  becomes  clear  as  crystal,  and  remark- 
ably sweet  and  palatable.  The  Seine  has  as  high  a 
reputation  in  France,  and  appears  from  accurate  expe- 
riments to  be  a river  of  great  purity.  It  might  be  ex- 
pected that  a river  which  has  passed  by  a large  town, 
and  received  all  its  impurities,  and  been  used  by  nume- 
rous dyers,  tanners,  hatters,  and  the  like,  that  crowd  to 
its  batiks  for  the  convenience  of  plenty  of  water,  should 
thereby  acquire  such  a foulness  as  to  be  very  percep- 
tible to  chemical  examination  for  a- considerable  dis- 
tance below  the  town ; but  it  appears,  from  the  most 
accurate  examination,  that  where  the  stream  is  at  ail 
considerable,  these  kinds  of  impurity  have  but  little 
influence  in  permanently  altering  the  quality  of  the 
water,  especially  as  they  are  for  the  most  part  only  sus- 
pended, and  not  truly  dissolved  ; and,  therefore,  mere 
rest,  and  especially  filtration,  will  restore  the  water  to 
its  original  purity.  Probably,  therefore,  the  most  accu- 
rate chemist  would  find  it  difficult  to  distinguish  water 
taken  up  at  London  from  that  procured  at  Hampton 
Court,  after  each  has  been  purified  by  simple  filtration. 

6.  Stagnated  waters.— The  waters  that  present  the 
greatest  impurities  to  the  senses,  are  those  of  stagnant 
pools,  and  low  marshy  countries.  They  are  filled  with 
the  remains  of  animal  and  vegetable  matter  undergoing 
decomposition,  and,  during  that  process,  becoming  in 
part  soluble  in  water,  thereby  affording  a rich  nutri- 
ment to  the  succession  of  living  plants  and  insects 
which  is  supplying  the  place  of  those  that  perish. 
From  the  want  of  sufficient  agitation  in  these  waters, 
vegetation  goes  on  undisturbed,  and  the  surface  be- 
comes covered  with  conferva  and  other  aquatic  plants ; 
and  as  these  standing  waters  are  in  general  shallow, 
they  receive  the  full  influence  of  the  sun,  which  further 
promotes  all  the  changes  that  are  going  on  within 
them.  The  taste  is  generally  vapid,  and  destitute  of 
that  freshness  and  agreeable  coolness  which  distinguish 
spring  water.  However,  it  should  be  remarked,  that 
stagnant  waters  are  generally  soft,  and  many  of  the 
impurities  are  only  suspended,  and  therefore  separable 
by  filtration ; and  perhaps  the  unpalatableness  of  this 
drink  has  caused  if  to  be  in  worse  credit  than  it  de- 


serves, on  the  score  of  salubrity.  The  decidedly  nox- 
ious effects  produced  by  the  air  of  marshes  and  stag 
nant  pools,  have  been  often  supposed  to  extend  to  the 
internal  use  of  these  waters;  and  often,  especially  in 
hot  climates,  a residence  near  these  places  has  been  as 
much  condemned  on  the  one  account  as  on  the  other; 
and,  in  like  manner,  an  improvement  in  health  has  been 
as  much  attributed  to  a change  of  water  as  of  air. 

WATER-BRASH.  See  Pyrosis. 

Water-cress.  See  Sisymbrium  nasturtium. 

Water-dock.  See  Rumex  hydrolap  athum. 

Water-flag , yellow.  ' See  Iris  pseudacorus. 

Water- germander.  See  Teucrium  scordium. 

Water-hemp.  See  Eupatorium. 

Water-lily , white.  See  Nymphcea  alba. 

Water-lily , yellow.  See  Nymphcea  lutea. 

Water-parsnip.  See  Siam  nodiflorum. 

Water-pepper.  See  Polygonum  hydropiper. 

Water- zizania.  See  Zizania  aquatica. 

Waters , mineral.  See  Mineral  waters. 

WAYELITE.  (So  named  after  Dr.  Wavell,  who 
first  discovered  it  at  Barnstable,  in  Devonshire.)  A 
mineral  of  a grayish-white  colour,  composed  of  alu- 
mina, 70 ; lime,  1.4 ; water,  26.2 ; as  hard  as  fluor 
spar. 

WAX.  See  Cera. 

WEDEL,  George  Wolffgang,  was  Dorn  in  1645, 
at  Golzan  in  Lusatia,  and  graduated  at  Jena  in  1667 ; 
where,  after  a temporary  exercise  of  his  profession  at 
Gotha,  he  became  medical  professor ; in  which  station 
he  continued  with  reputation  for  almost  half  a century. 
He  combined  with  his  skill  in  medicine  a considerable 
acquaintance  with  mathematics  and  philology,  as  well 
as  with  the  oriental  and  classical  languages.  He  was 
an  associate  to  the  Academy  Naturae  Curiosoruin,  and 
to  the  Royal  Society  of  Berlin,  physician  to  several 
German  sovereigns,  a count  palatine,  and  an  imperial 
counsellor.  Notwithstanding  these  high  offices  and 
numerous  engagements,  he  was  attentive  to  the  poor, 
and  assiduous  in  his  literary  labours.  He  is  celebrated 
for  his  pharmaceutical  knowledge,  and  his  elegance  of 
prescription,  so  that  many  of  his  compositions  have 
been  adopted  in  dispensatories.  Of  his  works,  besides 
his  academical  dissertations,  the  principal  are  “Opio 
logia;”  “ Pharmacia  in  Artis  formam  redacta ;”  “ De 
Medicamentorum  Facultatibus  ;”  “ De  Morbis  Infan- 
tum and  “ Exercitationes  Medico-Philologicte.” 

WELD.  Woald.  The  Reseda  luteola  of  Linnaeus, 
which  is  used  as  a yellow  dye. 

WEPFER,  John  James,  was  born  in  1620,  at  Schaff- 
hausen,  and  after  visiting  several  universities  m Italy, 
graduated  at  Basil,  and  settled  in  his  native  place.  His 
reputation  was  extensive  there  and  in  Germany,  and 
he  attained,  by  his  dissections  and  experiments,  a high 
rank  among  those  who  have  contributed  to  improve 
medical  science.  In  1658,  he  published  a celebrated 
work,  entitled  “ Observations  Anatomic®, ” &c.,  since 
often  reprinted  with  the  title  of  “ Historia  Apoplecti- 
corum.”  In  an  epistle  “ De  Dubiis  Anatomicis,”  he 
asserted  the  entire  glandular  structure  of  the  liver, 
prior  to  Malpighi.  Another  valuable  work  is  called 
“ Cicut®  Aquatic®  Historia  et  Nox®.”  His  constitu- 
tion was  injured  by  attendance,  at  an  advanced  age,  on 
the  duke  of  Wurtemburg,  and  the  imperial  army  under 
his  command  ; and  he  was  carried  off  by  a dropsy  iu 
1695.  His  papers  were  published  by  two  of  his  grand- 
sons, in  a work  entitled  “ Observationes  Medico-Prac- 
tic®,’’  &c.  To  the  Ephemerides  Natur®  Curiosoruin 
he  made  several  valuable  communications,  being  a 
member  of  that  society. 

WERNERITE.  Foliated  scapolite. 

WHARTON,  Thomas,  was  born  in  Yorkshire  in 
1610,  and  educated  at  Cambridge.  He  afterward  be- 
came a private  tutor  at  Oxford  : but  on  the  commence- 
ment of  the  civil  wars,  he  removed  to  London,  and 
engaged  in  the  practice  of  physic.  On  the  surrender 
of  Oxford  to  the  parliament  in  1646,  he  obtained  a 
doctor’s  degree  there,  became  a member  of  the  College 
of  Physicians  in  London,  and  got  into  considerable 
practice.  In  1652,  he  read  lectures  on  the  glands  before 
the  College;  and  he  afterward  published  a work  on 
that  subject,  entitled  “Adenographia.”  The  descrip- 
tions cannot  be  relied  upon,  being  chiefly  taken  from 
brutes  ; yet  there  are  some  useful  observations  on  the 
diseases  of  those  organs.  His  name  has  been  affixed 
to  the  salivary  ducts  on  the  side  of  the  tongue. 

WHEAT.  Triticum.  The  seeds  of  the  Trilicum 


WtiE 


WHI 


hibemum , and  cestivum,  of  Linnaeus,  are  so  termed.  It 
is  to  these  plants,  therefore,  we  are  indebted  for  our 
bread,  and  the  various  kinds  of  pastry.  Wheat  is  first 
ground  between  mill-stones,  and  then  sifted  to  obtain 
its  farina  or  flour.  The  flour  of  wheat  may  be  sepa- 
rated into  its  three  constituent  parts,  in  the  following 
manner.  The  flour  is  to  be  kneaded  into  a paste  with 
water  in  an  earthen  vessel,  and  the  water  continue 
pouring  upon  it  from  a cock;  this  liquid,  as  it  falls 
upon  the  paste,  takes  up  from  it  a very  fine  white 
powder,  by  means  of  which  it  acquires  the  colour  and 
consistency  of  milk.  This  process  is  to  be  continued 
till  the  water  run  otf  clear,  when  the  flour  will  be  sepa- 
rated into  three  distinct  parts:  1.  A gray  elastic  matter 
that  sticks  to  the  hand,  and  on  account  of  its  properties 
has  gained  the  name  of  the  glutinous,  or  vegeto-animal 
part.  2.  A white  powder  which  falls  to  the  bottom  of 
the  water,  and  is  the  faculum  or  starch.  3.  A matter 
which  remains  dissolved  in  the  water,  and  seems  to  be 
a sort  of  mucilaginous  extract. 

Flour,  from  whatever  species  of  corn  obtained,  is 
likewise  disposed  to  vinous  fermentation,  on  account 
of  its  saccharine  contents.  The  aptitude  for  fermen- 
tation of  t'hese  mealy  seeds  increases  if  they  be  first 
converted  into  malt ; insomuch  as  by  this  process,  the 
gluten  which  forms  the  germ  is  separated,  and  the 
starchy  part  appears  to  be  converted  into  saccharine 
matter.  The  making  of  malt,  for  which  purpose 
barley  and  wheat  are  generally  chosen,  is  as  follows  : 
The  grains  are  put  in  the  malting  tub,  and  immersed 
in  cold  water,  in  a temperate  and  warm  season,  chang- 
ing this  fluid  several  times,  especially  in  hot  weather, 
and  they  are  thus  kept  soaking  till  they  be  sufficiently 
soft  to  the  touch.  Upon  this  they  are  piled  up  in  heaps 
on  a roomy,  clean,  airy  floor,  where,  by  the  heat  spon- 
taneously taking  place,  the  vegetation  begins,  and  the 
grains  germinate.  To  cause  the  germination  to  go  on 
uniformly,  the  heaps  are  frequently  turned.  In  this 
state  the  vegetation  is  suffered  to  continue  till  the 
germs  have  about  two-thirds  or  three-fourths  of  the 
length  of  the  corn.  It  is  carried  too  far  when  the  leafy 
germs  have  begun  to  sprout. 

For  this  reason,  limits  are  set  to  the  germination  by 
drying  the  malt,  which  is  effected  by  transferring  it  to 
the  kiln,  or  by  spreading  it  about  in  spacious  airy  lofts. 
Dried  in  the  last  way,  it  is  called  air-dried  malt ; in  the 
first,  ki  ln-inal  t.  In  drying  this  latter,  care  must  be 
taken  that  it  does  not  receive  a burned  smell,  or  be  in 
part  converted  into  coal. 

From  this  malt,  beer  is  made  by  extraction  with 
water  and  fermentation. 

With  this  view,  a quantity  of  malt  freed  from  its 
germs,  and  sufficient  for  one  intended  brewing,  is 
coarsely  bruised  by  grinding,  and  in  the  mash-tub  first 
well  mixed  with  some  cold,  then  scalded  with  hot 
water,  drawn  upon  it  from  the  boiler.  It  is  afterward 
strongly  and  uniformly  stirred.  When  the  whole  mass 
has  stood  quietly  for  a certain  time,  the  extract,  (mash,) 
or  sweetwort,  is  brought  into  the  boiler,  and  the  malt 
remaining  in  the  tub  is  once  more  extracted  by  infusion 
with  hot  water. 

This  second  extract,  treated  in  like  manner,  is  added 
to  the  first,  and  both  are  boiled  together. 

This  clear  decoction  is  now  drawn  off,  pnd  called 
boiled  wort.  To  make  the  beer  more  fit  for  digestion, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  deprive  it  of  its  too  great  and 
unpleasant  sweetness,  the  wort  is  mixed  with  a decoc- 
tion of  hops,  or  else  these  are  boiled  with  it.  After 
which  it  ought  to  be  quickly  cooled,  to  prevent  its 
transition  into  acetous  fermentation,  which  would 
ensue  if  it  were  kept  too  long  in  a high  temperature. 

On  this  account  the  wort  is  transferred  into  the 
cooler,  where  it  is  exposed  with  a large  surface  to  cold 
air,  and  from  this  to  the  fermenting  tub,  that  by  addi- 
tion of  a sufficient  portion  of  recent  yest  it  may  begin 
to  ferment.  When  this  fermentation  has  proceeded 
to  a due  degree,  and  the  yest  ceases  to  rise,  the  beer  is 
conveyed  into  casks  ‘placed  in  cool  cellars,  where  it 
finishes  its  fermentation,  and  where  it  is  well  kept  and 
preserved,  under  the  name  of  barrelled  beer,  with  the 
precaution  of  filling  up  occasionally  the  vacancy 
caused  in  the  vessels  by  evaporation ; or  the  beer  is  bot- 
tled before  it  has  done  fermenting,  and  the  bottles  are 
stopped  a little  before  the  fermentation  is  completely 
over.  By  so  doing  the  bottled  beer  is  rendered  spark- 
ling. In  this  state  it  frequently  bursts  the  bottles,  by 
the  disengagement  of  the  carbonic  acid  gas  which  it 

K k k 2 


contains,  and  it  strongly  froths,  like  champaign,  when 
brought  into  contact  with  air  on  being  poured  into 
another  vessel. 

Beer  well  prepared  should  be  limpid  and  clear,  pos- 
sess a due  quantity  of  spirit,  and  excite  no  disagree- 
able sweet  taste,  and  contain  no  disengaged  acid.  By 
these  properties  it  is  a species  of  vinous  beverage,  and 
is  distinguished  from  wine  in  the  strict  sense,  and  other 
liquors  of  that  kind,  by  the  much  greater  quantity  of 
mucilaginous  matter  which  it  has  received  by  extrac- 
tion from  the  malted  grains,  but  which  also  makes  it 
more  nourishing.  Brown  beer  derives  its  colour  from 
malt  strongly  roasted  in  the  kiln,  and  its  bitterish  taste 
from  the  hops.  Pale  beer  is  brewed  from  malt  dried 
in  the  air,  or  but  slightly  roasted,  with  but  little  or  no 
hops  at  all.  See  Beer. 

Wheat , buck.  See  Polygonum  fagopyrum. 

Wheal , eastern  buck.  See  Polygonum  divarica- 
tum. 

Wheat , Indian.  See  Zea  mays. 

Wheat,  Turkey.  The  Turkey  wheat  is  a native 
of  America,  where  it  is  much  cultivated,  as  it  is  also  in 
some  parts  of  Europe,  especially  in  Italy  and  Germany. 
There  are  many  varieties,  which  differ  in  the  colour  of 
the  grain,  and  are  frequently  raised  in  our  gardens  by 
way  of  curiosity,  whereby  the  plant  is  well  known.  It 
is  the  chief  bread-corn  in  some  of  the  southern  parts 
of  America,  but  since  the  introduction  of  rice  into 
Carolina,  it  is  but  little  used  in  the  northern  colonies. 
It  makes  a main  part  too  of  the  food  of  the  poor  peo- 
ple in  Italy  and  Germany.  This  is  the  sort  of  wheat 
mentioned  in  the  book  of  Ruth,  where  it  is  said  that 
Boaz  treated  Ruth  with  parched  ears  of  corn  dipped  in 
vinegar.  This  method  of  eating  the  roasted  ears  of 
Turkey  wheat  is  still  practised  in  the  East ; they  gather 
in  the  ears  when  about  half  ripe,  and  having  scorched 
them  to  their  minds,  eat  them  with  as  much  satisfac- 
tion as  we  do  the  best  flour-bread. 

In  several  parts  of  South  America  they  parch  the  ripe 
corn,  never  making  it  into  bread,  but  grinding  it  be- 
tween two  stones,  mix  it  with  water  in  a calabash,  and 
so  eat  it.  The  Indians  make  a sort  of  drink  from  this 
grain,  which  they  call  bid.  This  liquor  is  very  windy 
and  intoxicating,  and  has  nearly  the  taste  of  sour  small 
beer:  but  they  do  not  use  it  in  common,  being  too  lazy 
to  make  it  often,  and  therefore  it  is  chiefly  kept  for  the 
celebration  of  feasts  and  weddings,  at  which  times 
they  mostly  get  intolerably  drunk  with  it.  The  man- 
ner of  making  this  precio'us  beverage,  is  to  steep  a 
parcel  of  corn  in  a vessel  of  water,  till  it  grows  sour, 
then  the  old  women  being  provided  with  calabashes  foi 
the  purpose,  chew  some  grains  of  the  corn  in  their 
mouths,  and  spitting  it  into  the  calabashes,  empty  them, 
spittle  and  all,  into  the  sour  liquor,  having  previously 
drawn  otf  the  latter  into  another  vessel. 

The  cheWed  grain  soon  raises  a fermentation,  and 
when  this  ceases,  the  liquor  is  let  off  from  the  dregs, 
and  set  by  till  wanted.  In  some  of  the  islands  in  the 
South  Sea,  where  each  individual  is  his  own  lawgiver, 
it  is  no  uncommon  thing  for  a near  relation  to  excuse 
a murderer  for  a good  drunken  bout  of  ciri. 

[Turkey  wheat  is  the  Indian  corn  of  America.  It 
makes  a rich,  wholesome,  and  nutritious'  bread-corn, 
and  may  be  cooked  in  a greater  variety  of  ways  than 
any  other  grain.  Dr.  Hooper  is  mistaken  in  supposing 
it  is  but  little  used  in  the  northern  parts  of  the  United 
States  (formerly  colonies).  There  is  not  a farm  or 
plantation  in  any  part  of  the  country  without  a portion 
planted  in  Indian  corn.  A portion  of  Indian  meal 
mixed  with  wheat  or  rye  flour,  improves  the  bread 
made  in  that  way.  .A.] 

WHET-SLATE.  A greenish  gray-coloured  mine- 
ral, used  to  sharpen  ateel  instruments. 

WHEY.  The  fluid  part  of  milk  which  remains  after 
the  curd  has  been  separated.  It  contains  a saccharine 
matter,  some  butter,  and  a small  portion  of  cheese. 

WHISKEY.  A dilute  alkohol  obtained  by  distilling 
malt. 

[Whiskey  is  obtained  in  this  country  from  rye,  Indian 
corn,  potatoes,  Sec.  It  is  a spirit  which,  when  concen- 
trated by  repeated  distillation,  produces  alkohol,  and 
may  be  obtained  from  various  fruits,  roots,  seeds,  Sc c. 
See  Fruits , affording  spirit.  A.] 

WHISPERING.  A lowness  of  speech,  caused  by 
uttering  the  words  so  feebly,  as  not  to  produce  any 
vibration  of  the  larynx. 

White-swelling.  See  Arthropuosis,  and  Hydarthrus 


WIN 


WIN 


WHITES.  See  Leucorrhcea. 

WHITING.  See  Gadus. 

Whortleberry , bears'.  See  Arbutus  uva  ursi. 

Whortleberry , red.  See  Vaccinium  vitis  idee  a. 

WHYTT,  Robert,  was  born  in  1714,  at  Edinburgh, 
where  he  studied  physic,  and  after  visiting  the  medical 
schools  at  London,  Paris,  and  Leyden,  settled  in  the 
exercise  of  his  profession,  became  a fellow,  then  presi- 
dent of  the  college,  and  chairman  of  the  Institutions  of 
Medicine  in  that  university.  As  a medical  practitioner 
and  teacher,  and  also  as  a writer,  he  acquired  deserved 
celebrity.  The  fiist  of  his  publications  was  an  “ Essay 
on  the  Vital  and  other  involuntary  Motions  of  Animals,” 
1751,  in  which  he  opposed  the  Stahiian  Theory,  and 
ascribed  them  to  the  operation  of  stimuli.  Four  years 
after,  his  “Physiological  Essays”  appeared,  in  which 
he  supposes  the  circulation  assisted  by  an  oscillatory 
motion  of  the  minute  vessels,  and  treats  of  sensibility 
and  irritability.  He  also  wrote  on  the  Use  of  Lime- 
water  in  Calculous  Complaints  ; and  on  Nervous  Dis- 
eases ; and  contributed  likewise  some  papers  to  the 
Edinburgh  Essays.  The  Observations  on  Hydrocepha- 
lus, were  published  after  his  death,  which  occurred  in 
1766,  after  labouring  long  under  a complication  of 
chronic  complaints. 

WIDOW- WAIL.  See  Daphne  mezereum. 

Wild  carrot.  See  Daucus  sylvestris. 

Wild  cucumber.  See  Momordica-elaterium. 

[ Wild  hoar  hound.  See  Eupatorium  teucrium. 

Wild  lettuce.  See  Lactuca  virosa.  A.J 

Wildnavew.  See  Brassica  napus. 

WILLIS,  Thomas,  was  born  in  Wiltshire,  about  the 
year  1621,  and  entered  at  Oxford,  with  a view  to  the  cle- 
rical profession ; but  he  afterward  changed  to  physic, 
took  his  bachelor’s  degree  in  1646,  and  commenced 
practice  at  the  university.  He  distinguished  himself 
by  his  steady  attachment  to  the  church  of  England,  and 
also  by  his  love  of  science,  so  that  he  became  one  of  the 
first  members  of  that  philosophical  society  at  Oxford, 
which  laid  the  foundation  of  tiie  Royal  Society  of  Lon- 
don. He  was  ambitious  of  excelling  as  a chemist,  and 
published,  in  1659,  a treatise  on  Fermentation,  and  an- 
other on  Fever,  with  a Dissertation  on  the  Urine.  After 
the  Restoration  he  was  appointed  to  the  Sedleian  pro- 
fessorship of  Natural  Philosophy,  and  received  his  doc- 
tor’s degree.  In  1664,  he  published  his  celebrated  work 
“Cerebri  Anatome,”  with  a description  of  the  nerves; 
which  was  followedj  after  three  years,  by  his  “ Patho- 
logia  Cerebri  et  Nervosi  Generis,”  in  which  he  treats 
of  Convulsive  Diseases,  and  the  Scurvy.  In  the  mean 
time  he  had  settled  in  London,  and  being  nominated  a 
physician  in  ordinary  to  the  king,  was  advancing  to 
the  first  rank  in  practice.  His  next  publication  was  on 
Hysteria  and  Hypochondriasis.  In  1672,  he  produced 
another  work,  “ De  Anima  Brutorum which  he  sup- 
posed like  the  vital  principle  in  man  of  a corporeal  na- 
ture. The  year  following  he  began  to  print  his  “ Phar- 
maceutice  Rationalis,”  which  he  did  not  live  to  com- 
plete, being  carried  off  by  a pleurisy  in  his  fifty-fourth 
year.  His  works  engaged  great  attention  at  first,  and 
are  still  admired,  though  modern  improvements  have 
diminished  their  value.  They  are  written  in  an  ele- 
gant Latin  style. 

WILLOW.  See  Salix. 

Willow , crack.  See  Salis  fragilis. 

Willow , sweet.  See  Myrica  gale. 

Willow , white.  See  Salix  fragilis. 

Willow-herb.  See  Ey  thrum  salicaria. 

Willow-herb , rosebay.  See  Epilobium  angustifo- 
lium. 

Willow-leaved  oak.  See  Quercus  phellos. 

WINE.  Vinum.  “ Chemists  give  the  name  of  wine 
in  general  to  all  liquors  that  have  become  spirituous  by 
fermentation.  Thus  cider,  beer,  hydromel  or  mead, 
and  other  similar  liquors,  are  wines. 

The  principles  and  theory  of  the  fermentation  which 
produces  these  liquors  are  essentially  the  same. 

All  those  nutritive,  vegetable,  and  animal  matters 
which  contain  sugar  ready  formed,  are  susceptible  of 
the  spirituous  fermentation.  Thus  wine  may  be  made 
of  all  the  juices  of  plants,  the  sap  of  trees,  the  infusions 
and  decoctions  of  farinaceous  vegetables,  the  milk  of 
frugiverous  animals;  and,  lastly,  it  may  be  made  of  all 
ripe  succulent  fruits ; but  all  these  substances  are  not 
equally  prouer  to  be  changed  into  a good  and  generous 
wine. 

As  the  production  of  alkohol  is  the  result  of  the  spi-  j 


rituous  fermentation,  that  wine  may  be  considered  as 
essentially  the  best,  which  contains  most  alkohol.  But 
of  all  substances  susceptible  of  the  spirituous  fermenta- 
tion, none  is  capable  of  being  converted  into  so  aood 
wine,  as  the  juice  of  the  grapes  of  France,  or  of  other 
countries  that  are  nearly  in  the  same  latitude,  or  in  the 
same  temperature.  The  grapes  of  hotter  countries,  and 
even  those  of  the  southern  provinces  of  France,  do  in 
deed  furnish  wines  that  have  a more  agreeable,  that  is, 
more  of  a saccharine  taste ; but  these  wines,  though 
they  are  sufficiently  strong,  are  not  so  spirituous  as 
those  of  the  provinces  near  the  middle  of  France  : at 
least  from  these  latter  wines  the  best  vinegar  and 
brandy  are  made.  As  an  example,  therefore,  of  spirit- 
uous fermentation  in  general,  we  shall  describe  the 
method  of  making  wine  from  the  juice  of  the  grapes  of 
France. 

This  juice,  when  newly  expressed,  and  before  it  has 
begun  to  ferment,  is  called  must , and  in  common  lan- 
guage sweet  wine.  It  is  turbid,  has  an  agreeable  and 
very  saccharine  taste.  It  is  very  laxative  ; and  when 
drunk  too  freely,  or  by  persons  disposed  to  diarrhoeas, 
it  is  apt  to  occasion  these  disorders.  Its  consistence  is 
somewhat  less  fluid  than  that  of  water,  and  it  becomes 
almost  of  a pitchy  thickness  when  dried. 

When  the  must  is  pressed  from  the  grapes,  and  but 
into  a proper  vessel  and  place,  with  a temperature  be- 
tween fifty-five  and  sixty  degrees,  veiy  sensible  effects 
are  produced  in  it,  in  a shorter  or  longer  time  accord- 
ing to  the  nature  of  the  liquor,  and  the  exposure  of  the 
place.  It  then  swells,  and  is  so  rarefied,  that  it  fre- 
quently overflows  the  vessel  containing  it,  if  this  be 
nearly  full.  An  intestine  motion  is  excited  among  its 
parts,  accompanied  with  a small  hissing  noise  and  evi- 
dent ebullition.  The  bubbles  rise  to  the  surface,  and 
at  the  same  time  is  disengaged  a quantity  of  carbonic 
acid  of  such  purity,  and  so  subtle  and  dangerous,  that 
it  is  capable  of  killing  instantly  men  and  animals  ex- 
posed to  it  in  a place  where  the  air  is  not  renewed. 
The  skins,  stones,  and  other  grosser  matters  of  the 
grapes,  are  buoyed  up  by  the  particles  of  disengaged  air 
that  adhere  to  their  surface,  are  variously  agitated,  and 
are  raised  in  form  of  a scum,  or  soft  and  spongy'  crust, 
that  covers  the  whole  liquor.  During  the  fermenta 
tion,  this  crust  is  frequently  raised,  and  broken  by  the 
air  disengaged  from  the  liquor  which  forces  its  way 
through  it  ; afterward  the  crust  subsides,  and  becomes 
entire  as  before. 

These  effects  continue  while  the  fermentation  is 
brisk,  and  at  last  gradually  cease:  then  the  crust,  being 
no  longer  supported,  falls  In  pieces  to  the  bottom  of  the 
liquor.  At  this  time,  if  we  would  have  a strong  and 
generous  wine,  all  sensible  fermentation  must  be 
stopped.  This  is  done  by  putting  the  wine  into  close 
vessels,  and  carrying  these  into  a cellar  or  other  cool 
place. 

After  this  first  operation,  an  interval  of  repose  takes 
place,  as  is  indicated  by  the  cessation  of  the  sensible 
eft’ects  of  the  spirituous  fermentation ; and  thus  enables 
us  to  preserve  a liquor  no  less  agreeable  in  its  taste, 
than  useful  for  its  reviving  and  nutritive  qualities,  when 
drunk  moderately. 

If  we  examine  the  wine  produced  by  this  first  fer- 
mentation, we  shall  find,  that  it  differs  entirely  and 
essentially  from  the  juice  of  grapes  before  fermenta- 
tion. Its  sweet  and  saccharine  taste  is  changed  into 
one  that  is  very  different,  though  still  agreeable,  and 
somewhat  spirituous  and  piquant.  It  has  not  the  laxa- 
tive quality  of  must,  but  affects  the  head,  and  occa- 
sions, as  is  well  known,  drunkenness.  Lastly,  if  it  be 
distilled,  it  yields,  instead  of  the  insipid  water  obtained 
from  must  by  distillation  with  the  heat  of  boiling  water, 
a volatile,  spirituous,  and  inflammable  liquor,  called 
spirit  of  wine,  or  alkohol.  This  spirit  is  consequently 
a new  being,  produced  by  the  kind  of  fermentation, 
called  the  vinous  or  spirituous. 

When  any  liquor  undergoes  the  spirituous  fermenta- 
tion, all  its  parts  seem  not  to  ferment  at  the  same  time, 
otherwise  the  fermentation  would  probably  be  very 
quickly  completed,  and  the  appearances  would  be  much 
more  striking  : hence,  in  a liquor  much  disposed  to  fer- 
mentation, this  motion  is  more  quick  and  simultaneous 
than  in  another  liquor  less  disposed.  Experience  has 
shown,  that  a wine,  the  fermentation  of  which  is  very 
slow  and  tedious,  is  never  good  or  very  spirituous;  anil 
therefore,  when  the  weather  is  too  cold,  the  fermenta- 
tion is  usually  accelerated  by  heating  the  place  in  which 


WIN 


WIN 


the  wine  i9  made.  A proposal  has  been  made  by  a person 
very  intelligent  in  economical  affairs,  to  apply  a greater 
than  the  usual  heat  to  accelerate  the  fermentation  of 
the  wine,  in  those  years  in  which  grapes  have  not  been 
sufficiently  ripened,  and  when  the  juice  is  not  suffi- 
ciently disposed  to  fermentation. 

A loo  hasty  and  violent  fermentation  is  perhaps  also 
hurtful,  from  the  dissipation  and  loss  of  some  of  the 
spirit;  but  of  this  we  are  not  certain.  However,  we 
may  distinguish,  in  the  ordinary  method  of  making 
wines  of  grapes,  two  periods  in  the  fermentation,  the 
first  of  which  lasts  during  the  appearance  of  the  sensi- 
ble effects  above  mentioned,  in  which  the  greatest 
number  of  fermentable  particles  ferment.  After  this 
first  effort  of  fermentation,  these  effects  sensibly  dimi- 
nish, and  ought  to  be  stopped,  for  reasons  hereafter  to 
be  mentioned.  The  fermentative  motion  of  the  liquors 
then  ceases.  The  heterogeneous  parts  that  were  sus- 
pended in  the  wines  by  this  motion,  and  render  it 
muddy,  are  separated  and  form  a sediment,  called  the 
lees  ; after  which  the  wine  becomes  clear  ; but  though 
the  operation  is  then  considered  as  finished,  and  the 
fermentation  apparently  ceases,  it  does  not  really  cease ; 
and  it  ought  to  be  continued  in  some  degree,  if  we  would 
have  good  wine. 

In  this  new  wine  a part  of  the  liquor  probably  re- 
mains that  has  not  fermented,  and  which  afterward 
ferments,  but  so  very  slowly,  that  none  of  the  sensible 
effects  produced  in  the  first  fermentation  are  here  per- 
ceived. The  fermentation,  therefore,  still  continues  in 
the  wine,  during  a longer  or  shorter  time,  although  in 
an  imperceptible  manner;  and  this  is  the  second  pe- 
riod of  the  spirituous  fermentation,  which  may  be 
called  the  imperceptible  fermentation.  We  may  easily 
perceive  that  the  effect  of  this  imperceptible  fermenta- 
tion is  the  gradual  increase  of  the  quantity  of  alkohol. 
It  has  also  another  effect  no  less  advantageous,  namely, 
the  separation  of  the  acid  salt  called  tartar  from  the 
wine.  This  matter  is,  therefore,  a second  sediment, 
that  is  formed  in  the  wine,  and  adheres  to  the  sides  of 
the  containing  vessels.  As  the  taste  of  tartar  is  harsh 
and  disagreeable,  it  is  evident  that  the  wine,  which  by 
means  of  the  insensible  fermentation  has  acquired 
more  alkohol,  and  has  disengaged  itself  of  the  greater 
part  of  its  tartar,  ought  to  be  much  better'  and  more 
agreeable ; and  for  this  reason  chiefly  old  wine  is  uni- 
versally preferable  to  new  wine. 

But  insensible^  fermentation  can  only  ripen  and 
meliorate  the  wine,  if  the  sensible  fermentation  have 
regularly  proceeded,  and  been  stopped  in  due  time. 
We  know  certainly  that  if  a sufficient  time  have  not 
been  allowed  for  the  first  period  of  the  fermentation, 
the  unferinented  matter  that  remains,  being  in  too  large 
a quantity,  will  then  ferment  in  the  bottles,  or  close 
vessels,  in  which  the  wine  is  put,  and  will  occasion 
effects  so  much  more  sensible,  as  the  first  fermenta- 
tion shall  have  been  sooner  interrupted : hence  these 
wines  are  always  turbid,  emit  bubbles,  and  sometimes 
break  the  bottles  from  the  large  quantity  of  air  disen- 
gaged during  the  fermentation. 

We  have  an  instance  of  these  effects  in  the  wine  of 
Champaign,  and  in  others  of  the  same  kind.  The 
sensible  fermentation  of  these  wines  is  interrupted,  or 
rather  suppressed,  that  they  may  have  this  stparkling 
quality.  It  is  well  known  that  these  wines  make  the 
corks  fly  out  of  the  bottles ; that  they  sparkle  and  froth 
when  they  are  poured  into  glasses;  and  lastly,  that 
they  have  a taste  much  more  lively  and  more  piquant 
than  wines  that  do  not  sparkle ; but  this  sparkling 
quality,  and  all  the  effects  depending  on  it,  are  only 
caused  by  a considerable  quantity  of  carbonic  acid 
gas,  which  is  disengaged  during  the  confined  fermenta- 
tion that  the  wine  has  undergone  in  close  vessels. 
This  air,  not  having  an  opportunity  of  escaping,  and 
of  being  dissipated  as  fast  as  it  is  disengaged,  and 
being  interposed  between  all  the  parts  of  the  wine, 
combhies  in  some  measure  with  them,  and  adheres  in 
the  same  manner  as  it  does  to  certain  mineral  waters, 
in  which  it  produces  nearly  the  same  effects.  When 
this  air  is  entirely  disengaged  from  these  wines,  they 
no  longer  sparkle,  they  lose  their  piquancy  of  taste, 
become  mild,  and  even  almost  insipid. 

Such  are  the  qualities  that  wine  acquires  in  time, 
when  its  first  fermentation  has  not  continued  suffi- 
ciently long.  These  qualities  are  given  purposely  to 
oertain  kinds  of  wine,  to  indulge  taste  or  caprice ; but 
euch  wines  ard  supposed  to  be  unfit  for  daily  use. 


: Wines  for  daily  use  ought  to  have  undergone  so  com- 
I pletely  the  sensible  fermentation,  that  the  succeeding 
fermentation  shall  be  insensible,  or  at  least  exceedingly 
little  perceived.  Wine,  in  which  the  first  fermenta- 
tion has  been  too  far  advanced,  is  liable  to  worse  in- 
conveniences than  that  in  which  the  first  fermentation 
has  been  too  quickly  suppressed  ; for  every  fermenta- 
ble liquor  is,  from  its  nature,  in  a continual  intestine 
motion,  more  or  less  strong  according  to  circumstances, 
from  the  first  instant  of  the  spirituous  fermentation, 
till  it  is  completely  purified:  hence,  from  the  time  of 
the  completion  of  the  spirituous  fermentation,  or  even 
before,  the  wine  begins  to  undergo  the  acid  or  acetous 
fermentation.  This  acid  fermentation  is  very  slow  and 
insensible,  when  the  wine  is  included  in  very  close 
vessels,  and  in  a cool  place ; but  it  gradually  advances, 
so  that  in  a certain  time  the  wine,  instead  of  being 
improved,  becomes  at  last  sour.  This  evil  cannot  be 
remedied  ; because  the  fermentation  may  advance,  but 
cannot  be  reverted. 

Wine-merchants,  therefore,  when  their  wines  become 
sour,  can  only  conceal  or  absorb  this  acidity  by  certain 
substances,  as  by  alkalies  and  absorbent  earths.  But 
these  substances  give  to  wine  a dark-greenish  colour, 
and  a taste  which,  though  not  acid,  is  somewhat  dis- 
agreeable. Besides,  calcareous  earths  accelerate  con- 
siderably the  total  destruction  and  putrefaction  of  the 
wine.  Oxides  of  lead,  having  the  property  of  forming 
with  the  acid  of  vinegar  a salt  of  an  agreeable  saccha- 
rine taste,  which  does  not  alter  the  colour  of  the  wine, 
and  which  besides  has  the  advantage  of  stopping  fer- 
mentation and  putrefaction,  might  be  very  well  em- 
ployed to  remedy  the  acidity  of  wine,  if  lead  and  all 
its  preparations  were  not  pernicious  to  health,  as  they 
occasion  most  terrible  colics,  and  even  death,  when 
taken  internally.  W e cannot  believe  that  any  wine- 
merchant,  knowing  the  evil  consequences  of  lead, 
should,  for  the  sake  of  gain,  employ  it  for  the  purpose 
mentioned  ; but  if  there  be  any  such  persons,  they  must 
be  considered  as  the  poisoners  and  murderers  of  the 
public.  At  Alic.ant,  where  very  sweet  wines  are  made, 
it  is  the  practice  to  mix  a little  lime  with  the  grapes 
before  they  are  pressed.  This,  however,  can  only  neu- 
tralize the  acid  already  existing  in  the  grape. 

If  wine  contain  litharge,  or  any  other  oxide  of  lead, 
it  may  be  discovered  by  evaporating  some  pints  of  it  to 
dryness,  and  melting  the  residuum  in  a crucible,  at  the 
bottom  of  which  a small  button  of  lead  may  be  found 
after  the  fusion:  but  an  easier  and  more  expeditious 
proof  is  by  pouring  into  the  wine  some  liquid  sulphu- 
ret.  If  the  precipitate  occasioned  by  this  addition  of 
the  sulphuret  be  white,  or  only  coloured  by  the  wine, 
we  may  know  that  no  lead  is  contained  in  it ; but  if 
the  precipitate  be  dark  coloured,  brown,  or  blackish, 
we  may  conclude,  that  it  contains  lead  or  iron. 

The  only  substances'  that  cannot  absorb  or  destroy, 
but  cover  and  render  supportable  the  sharpness  of 
wine,  without  any  inconvenience,  are,  sugar,  honey, 
and  other  saccharine  alimentary  matters ; but  they  can 
succeed  only  when  the  wine  is  very  little  acid,  and 
when  an  exceeding  small  quantity  only  of  these  sub- 
stances is  sufficient  to  produce  the  desired  effect ; other- 
wise the  wine  would  have  a sweetish,  tart,  and  not 
agreeable  taste. 

From  what  is  here  said  concerning  the  acescency  of 
wine,  we  may  conclude  that  when  this  accident  hap- 
pens, it  cannot  by  any  good  method  be  remedied,  and 
that  nothing  remains  to  be  done  with  sour  wine  but  to 
sell  it  to  vinegar-makers,  as  all  honest  wine-mer- 
chants do. 

As  the  must  of  the  grape  contains  a greater  propor- 
tion of  tartar  than  our  currant  or  gooseberry  juices 
do,  Dr.  Ure  has  been  accustomed,  for  many  years,  to 
recommend,  in  his  lectures,  the  addition  of  a small 
portion  of  that  salt  to  our  must,  to  make  it  ferment 
into  a more  genuine  wine.  Dr.  M‘Culloch  has  lately 
prescribed  the  same  addition  in  his  popular  treatise  on 
the  art  of  making  wine. 

The  following  is  Braude’s  valuable  table  of  the  quan- 
tity of  spirit  in  different  kinds  of  wine  :-— 

Proportion  of 
spin  per  cent. 

, . ■tvajeasure. 

1.  Lissa 26.47 

Ditto . 24.35 

Average.  ..  25.41 

2.  Raisin  wine , 26.40 

Ditto „ v 25.77 


WIN 


WIN 


Raisin  wine 23.20 

Average 25.12 

3.  Marsala 26  30 

Ditto 25.05 

Average 25.09 

4.  Madeira 24.42 

Ditto  23.93 

Ditto  (Sircial) 21.40 

Ditto 19.24 

Average 22.27 

5.  Currant  wine 20.55 

6.  Sherry 19.81 

Ditto 19.83 

Ditto 18.79 

Ditto 18.25 

Average 19.17 

7.  Teneriffe 19.79 

S.  Colares 19.75 

9.  Lachryma  Christi 19.70 

10.  Constantia,  white 19.75 

11.  Ditto,  red 18.92 

12.  Lisbon 18.94 

13.  Malaga  (1666) 18.94 

14.  Bucellas 18.49 

15.  Red  Madeira 22.30 

Ditto 18.40 

Average 20.35 

16.  Cape  Muschat 18.25 

17.  Cape  Madeira 22.94 

Ditto 20.50 

Ditto 18.11 

Average 20.51 

18.  Grape  wine 18.11 

19.  Calcavella 19.20 

Ditto 18.10 

Average 18.65 

20.  Vidonia 19.25 

21  Alba  Flora 17.26 

22.  Malaga 17.26 

23.  White  Hermitage 17.43 

24.  Rousillon 19.00 

Ditto 17.26 

Average 18.13 

25.  Claret 17.11 

Ditto 16.32 

Ditto 14.03 

Ditto 12.91 

Average 15.10 

26.  Malmsey  Madeira 16.40 

27.  Lunel 15.52 

28.  Sheraaz 15.52 

29.  Syracuse 15.28 

30.  Sauterne 14.22 

31.  Burgundy 16.60 

Ditto 15.22 

Ditto 14.53 

Ditto 11-95 

Average 14.57 

32.  Hock 14.37 

Ditto 13.00 

Ditto  (old  in  cask) 8.88 

Average 12.08 

33.  Nice 14-63 

34.  Barsac 13-86 

35.  Tent 13-30 

36.  Champaign  (still) 13-80 

Ditto  (sparkling) 12.80 

Ditto  (red) 12.56 

Ditto  (ditto) 11-30 

Average 12.61 

37.  Red  Hermitage 12-32 

38  Yin  de  Grave 13.94 

Ditto 12-80 

Average 13.37 

39.  Frontignac 12.79 

40.  Cote  Rotie 12.32 

41.  Gooseberry  wine 11.84 

42.  Orange  wine — average  of  six  samples 

made  by  a London  manufacturer... . 11.26 

43.  Tokay 9.88 

44.  Elder  wine 9.87 

45.  Cider,  highest  average 9.87 

Ditto,  lowest  ditto • • 5.21 

46.  Perry,  average  of  four  samples 7.26 

47.  Mead 7.32 

48.  Ale  ^Burton) 8.88 


Ditto  (Edinburgh) 6.20 

Ditto  (Dorchester) 5.56 

Average 6.87 

49.  Brown  Stout 6.80 

50.  London  Porter  (average) 4.20 

51.  Ditto  small  beer  (ditto) 1.23 

52.  Brandy 53.39 

53.  Rum 53.68 

54.  Gin 51.60 

55.  Scotch  whiskey 54  32 

56.  Dish  ditto 53.90’' 


The  wines  principally  used  in  medicine  are,  the 
vinum  album  hispanicum,  or  sherry,  vinum  canariumr 
canary  or  sack  wine,  the  vinum  rhenanum , or  Rhenish 
wine,  and  the  vinum  rubrum , or  port  wine.  These 
differ  from  each  other  in  the  proportion  of  their  con- 
stituent principles,  and  particularly  in  that  of  alkohol, 
which  they  contain.  The  qualities  of  wines  depend 
not  only  upon  the  difference  of  the  grapes,  as  contain- 
ing more  or  less  of  saccharine  juice  and  the  acid  mat- 
ter which  accompanies  it,  but  also  upon  circumstances 
attending  the  process  of  fermentation.  New  wines  are 
liable  to  a strong  degree  of  acescency  when  taken  into 
the  stomach,  and  thereby  occasion  much  flatulency 
and  eructations  of  acid  matter ; heartburn  and  violent 
pains  in  the  stomach  from  spasms  are  also  often  pro- 
duced ; and  the  acid  matter,  by  passing  into  the  intes- 
tines and  mixing  with  the  bile,  is  apt  to  occasion  colics 
or  excite  diarrhoeas.  Sweet  wines  are  likewise  more 
disposed  to  become  acescent  in  the  stomach  than 
others ; but  as  the  quantity  of  alkohol  which  they  con- 
tain is  more  considerable  than  appears  sensibly  to  the 
taste,  their  acescency  is  thereby  in  a great  measure 
counteracted.  Red  port,  and  most  of  the  red  wines, 
have  an  adstringent  quality,  by  which  they  strengthen 
the  stomach,  and  prove  useful  in  restraining  immode- 
rate evacuations  ; on  the  contrary,  those  which  are  of 
an  acid  nature,  as  Rhenish,  pass  freely  by  the  kidneys, 
and  gently  loosen  the  belly.  But  this,  and  perhaps  all 
the  thin  or  weak  wines,  though  of  an  agreeable  flavour, 
yet  as  containing  little  alkohol,  are  readily  disposed  to 
become  acid  in  the  stomach,  and  thereby  to  aggravate 
all  arthritic  and  calculous  complaints,  as  well  as  to  pro- 
duce the  effects  of  new  wine.  The  general  effects  of 
wine  are,  to  stimulate  the  stomach,  exhilarate  the  spi- 
rits, warm  the  habit,  quicken  the  circulation,  promote 
perspiration,  and,  in  large  quantities,  to  prove  intoxi- 
cating, and  powerfully  sedative.  In  many  disorders, 
wine  is  universally  admitted  to  be  of  important  service, 
and  especially  in  fevers  of  the  typhus  kind,  or  of  a pu- 
trid tendency  ; in  which  it  is  found  to  raise  the  pulse, 
support  the  strength,  promote  a diaphoresis,  and  to- 
resist  putrefaction;  and  in  many  cases  it  proves  of 
more  immediate  advantage  than  the  Peruvian  bark. 
Delirium,  which  is  the  consequence  of  excessive  irri- 
tability, and  a defective  state  of  nervous  energy,  is 
often  entirely  removed  by  the  free  use  of  wine.  It  is 
also  a well-founded  observation,  that  those  who  indulge 
in  the  use  of  wine  are  less  subject  to  fevers  of  the  ma 
lignant  and  intermittent  kind.  In  the  putrid  sore  throat, 
in  the  small  pox,  when  attended  with  great  debility 
and  symptoms  of  putridity,  in  gangrenes,  and  in  the 
plague,  wine  is  to  be  considered  as  a principal  remedy ; 
and  in  almost  all  cases  of  languor,  and  of  great  pros- 
tration of  strength,  wine  is  experienced  to  be  a more 
grateful  and  efficacious  cordial  than  can  be  furnished 
from  the  whole  class  of  aromatics. 

WING.  See  Ala. 

WINSLOW,  James  Benigntjs,  was  born  in  1669,  in 
the  isle  of  Funen,  and  having  studied  a year  under 
Borrichius,  was  sent  with  a pension  from  the  king  of 
Denmark,  to  seek  improvement  in  the  principal  uni- 
versities of  Europe.  In  1698,  he  became  a pupil  of  the 
celebrated  Duverney,  at  Paris,  where  he  was  induced 
to  abjure  the  Protestant  religion ; and  the  patronage  of 
Bossuet,  who  converted  him,  procured  for  him  the  de- 
gree of  doctor  in  1705.  He  afterward  read  lectures  of 
anatomy  and  surgery  at  the  Royal  Gardens ; and  in 
1743  was  promoted  to  the  professorship  in  that  institu- 
tion. In  the  mean  time,  he  communicated  several 
papers  on  anatomical  and  physiological  subjects  to  the 
Academy  of  Sciences,  by  whom,  as  well  as  by  the 
Royal  Society  of  Berlin,  he  was  admitted  an  associate. 
His  great  work,  mentioned  by  Haller  as  superseding  all 
former  compositions  of  anatomy,  and  entitled  “ Expo- 
sition Anatomique  de  la  Structure  du  Corps  Human), ” 


woo 


WOR 


first  appeared  at  Paris  in  1732, 4to.  It  was  frequently 
reprinted,  and  translated  into  various  languages ; and  is 
still  regarded  as  of  standard  authority.  It  was  intended 
as  a plan  of  a larger  work,  which,  however,  he  did  not 
finish.  He  reached  the  advanced  age  of  ninety-one. 
Winter-bark.  See  Winteranus  cortex. 
Winter-cherry.  See  Physalis  alkekengi. 

WIN TITR A.  (Named  after  Captain  Winter,  who 
brought  the  bark  from  the  straits  of  Magellan  in  1579, 
and  introduced  it  to  the  knowledge  of  physicians  as 
useful  in  scurvy,  &c.) 

Wintera  aromatica.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
winter-bark  tree.  The  bark  is  called  Cortex  wintera- 
nus; Cortex  mag ellanicus ; Cortex  cancllcc  alba: ; and 
the  tree,  Winteranus  spurius ; Canella  cubana  ; Win- 
ter ania  canella , and  Winteria  aromatica — pedunculis 
aggregutis  terminalibus,  pistalis  quatuor , of  Lin- 
naius.  It  is  a native  of  the  West  Indies.  The  bark 
is  brought  into  Europe  in  long  quills,  somewhat 
thicker  than  cinnamon.  Their  taste  is  moderately 
warm,  aromatic,  and  bitterish,  and  of  an  agreeable 
smell  somewhat  resembling  that  of  cloves.  Canella 
alba  has  been  supposed  to  possess  considerable  me- 
dicinal powers  in  the  cure  of  scurvy  and  some  other 
complaints.  It  is  now  merely  considered  as  a useful 
and  cheap  aromatic,  and  is  chiefly  employed  for  the 
purpose  of  correcting  and  rendering  less  disagreeable 
the  more  powerful  and  nauseous  drugs ; with  which 
view  it  is  used  in  the  tinctura  award,  vinum  amarum , 
vinum  rheei,  &c.  of  the  Edinburgh  Pharmacopoeia. 
Winteranus  cortex.  See  Wintera  aromatica. 
Wintera'nus  spurius.  See  Canella  alba. 
[Winter  green  See  Pyrola  umbellata.  A.] 
WISEMAN,  Richard,  was  first  known  as  a sur- 
geon in  the  civil  wars  of  Charles  I.,  and  accompanied 
Prince  Charles,  when  a fugitive,  in  France,  Holland, 
and  Flanders.  He  served  for  three  years  in  the  Spanish 
navy,  and,  returning  with  the  prince  to  Scotland,  was 
made  prisoner  in  the  battle  of  Worcester.  After  his 
liberation  in  1652,  he  settled  in  London.  When 
Charles  II.  was  restored,  he  became  eminent  in  his 
profession,  and  was  made  one  of  the  sergeant-surgeons 
to  the  king.  In  1676,  he  appears,  from  the  preface  te 
his  works,  to  have  been  a sufferer  by  ill  health  for 
twenty  years:  but  the  time  of  his  death  is  not  known. 
The  result  of  his  experience  was  given  in  ‘‘Several 
Surgical  Treatises  on  Tumours,  Ulcers,  Diseases  of 
the  Anus,  Scrofula,  Wounds,  Gunshot  Wounds,  Frac- 
tures and  Luxations,  and  Syphilis.”  He  seems  to  have 
given  a faithful  account  of  more  than  six  hundred 
cases,  recording  his  failures  as  well  as  his  cures.  He 
advocated  the  efficacy  of  the  royal  touch  in  scrofula, 
though  the  fallacy  is  evident  even  from  his  own  nar- 
raiion.  His  writings  have  long  been  regarded  as  stand- 
ard authority. 

WITHERING,  William,  was  born  in  1741,  and 
finished  his  medical  education  at  Edinburgh,  where  he 
took  his  degree  at  twenty-five.  From  Stafford,  where 
he  first  settled  and  married,  he  removed  to  Birming- 
ham, and  speedily  obtained  a very  extensive  practice  by 
his  skill  arid  assiduity,  without  neglecting  his  scientific 
pursuits,  which  were  chiefly  in  botany  and  chemistry, 
lie  was  author  of  several  valuable  publications:  “A 
Botanical  Arrangement  of  British  Plants,”  which  ap- 
peared at  first  in  1776,  in  two  volumes,  8vo.,  but  pro- 
gressively increased  to  four ; a translation  of  Berg- 
man’s “ Sciagraphia  Regni  Mineralis  ;”  and  some  che- 
mical and  mineralogical  papers  contributed  to  the 
Royal  Society,  of  which  he  was  a fellow.  “Account 
of  the  Scarlet  Fever,  &c.;”  “Account  of  the  Fox- 
glove,” with  Practical  Remarks  on  the  Dropsy  and 
other  Diseases,  published  in  1785.  His  lungs  being 
weak,  he  found  it  necessary,  in  the  winter  of  1793,  to 
go  to  Lisbon,  and  afterward  to  relax  from  his  profes- 
sional exertions.  His  death  occurred  in  1799. 
WITHERITE.  See  Heavy-spar. 

WO  AD.  See  Jsatis  tinctoria. 

WOLFRAM.  An  ore  of  tungsten. 

WOLF’S-BANE.  See  Aconitum  napellus. 

WOMB.  See  Uterus. 

Womb,  inflammation  of.  See  Hysteritis. 

Wood-louse.  See  Oniscus  asellus. 

Wood- sorrel.  See  Oxalis  acetosella. 

Wood-sione.  See  Hornstone. 

WOODVILLE,  William,  was  born  at  Cocker- 
mouth  in  1752.  After  serving  a short  apprenticeship 
to  an  apothecary  he  graduated  at  Edinburgh  in  1775. 


Then  passing  some  time  on  the  Continent,  he  settled 
near  his  native  place,  and  practised  there  for  five  or 
six  years.  He  next  came  to  London,  and  was  soon 
appointed  a physician  to  the  Middlesex  Dispensary. 
In  1790,  he  published  the  first  part,  which  was  after- 
ward completed  in  four  quarto  volumes,  of  a highly 
valuable  work,  entitled  “ Medical  Botany.”  The  fol- 
lowing year  lie  was  elected  physician  to  the  Small-pox 
Hospital ; and  in  executing  the  duties  of  that  office  ho 
displayed  the  highest  zeal.  He  gave  a manifest  proof 
of  his  attention  to  the  subject,  by  publishing  in  1796  the 
first  part  of  a “ History  of  the  Small  pox  in  Great  Bri- 
tain, &.c. ;”  but  the  discovery  of  vaccination  superseded 
the  necessity  of  completing  that  work.  Dr.  Woodville 
was  duly  impressed  with  the  importance  of  what  had 
been  announced  by  Dr.  Jenner ; but  feeling  a proper 
degree  of  skepticism  at  first,  he  was  anxious  to  inves- 
tigate the  practice  fully,  before  he  gave  it  his  sanction. 
Unfortunately  he  was  led  into  an  error  at  the  outset, 
by  not  keeping  in  recollection,  that  the  atmosphere  of 
the  hospital  was  loaded  with  variolous  contagion, 
whence  some  unpleasant  results  appeared;  but  this 
being  suggested  to  him,  he  was  induced,  on  more  ma- 
ture consideration,  strenuously  to  advocate  the  prac- 
tice of  vaccination ; and  by  the  excellent  opportunities 
he  enjoyed,  he  contributed  very  materially  to  its  rapid 
success.  He  died  in  1805. 

WOODWARD,  John,  was  born  in  Derbyshire  in 
1664,  and  put  apprentice  to  some  trade  in  London  ; but 
evincing  an  ardour  for  science,  Dr.  Barwick  took  him 
into  his  family,  and  for  four  years  instructed  him  in 
medicine  and  anatomy ; after  which  he  procured  him 
the  medical  professorship  at  Gresham  College  He 
published  about  this  time  an  essay  towards  a Natural 
History  of  the  Earth,  which,  though  executed  without 
sufficient  preparation,  procured  his  election  into  the 
Royal  Society.  In  1695,  he  was  created  M.D.  by 
Archbishop  Tenison,  and  the  year  after  obtained  the 
same  degree  from  Cambridge ; whence  he  was  admitted 
into  the  College  of  Physicians  as  a fellow,  in  1702. 
He  however  pursued  his 'inquiries  into  natural  history 
and  antiquities  for  some  time  with  great  zeal.  In  1718, 
he  published  a work  entitled  “The  State  of  Physic  and 
of  Diseases,”  containing  some  fanciful  theories,  which 
were  ably  confuted  by  Dr.  Freind,  both  ludicrously  and 
seriously.  He  died  at  Gresham  College  in  1727,  be- 
queathing his  personal  property  to  the  University  of 
Cambridge,  for  the  endowment  of  an  annual  lecture- 
ship, on  some  subject  taken  from  his  own  writings. 
Soon  after  his  death,  a catalogue  of  his  fossils  was 
published  in  1737,  his  “ Select  Cases  and  Consultations 
in  Physic,”  containing  some  valuable  observations. 
He  supposed  the  vital  principle  to  reside  not  in  the 
nerves,  but  in  the  blood,  and  other  parts  of  the  body ; 
and  he  made  many  experiments  to  establish  the  vis 
insita  of  muscles. 

Woody  nightshade.  See  Solanum  dulcamara . 

WORL.  See  Verticillus. 

WORM.  Vermis.  There  are  several  kinds  of  ani- 
mals which  infest  the  human  body-  Their  usual  di- 
vision is  into  those  which  inhabit  only  the  intestinal 
canal,  as  the  ascarides,  <fcc.;  and  those  .which  are  found 
in  other  parts,  as  hydatids,  &c.  Such  is  the  nature  and 
office  of  the  human  stomach  and  intestines,  that  in- 
sects and  worms,  or  their  ovula,  may  not  unfrequently 
be  conveyed  into  that  canal  with  those  things  that  are 
continually  taken  as  food;  but  such  insects,  qr  worms, 
do  not  live  long,  and  seldom,  if  ever,  generate  in  a 
situation  so  different  from  their  natural  one.  Besides 
these,  there  are  worms  that  are  never  found  in  any 
other  situation  than  the  human  stomach  or  intestines, 
and  which  there  generate  and  produce  their  species. 
Thus  it  appears  that  the  human  stomach  and  intestines 
are  the  seat  for  animalcula,  which  are  translated  from 
their  natural  situation,  and  also  for  worms  proper  to 
them,  which  live  in  no  other  situation. 

First  Class.  This  contains  those  which  are  gene- 
rated and  nourished  in  the  human  intestinal  canal,  and 
which  there  propagate  their  species. 

Second  Class , comprehends  those  insects  or  worms 
that  accidentally  enter  the  human  primae  vice  ab  extra, 
and  which  never  propagate  their  species  in  that  canal, 
but  are  soon  eliminated  from  the  body.  Such  are  se- 
veral species  of  Scarabasi,  the  Lumbricus  terrestris 
the  Fasciola,  the  Gordius  intestinalis , and  others. 
The  second  class  belongs  to  the  province  of  natural  his- 
tory. The  consideration  of  the  first  class  belongs  to 


XER 


XYL 


the  physician,  which,  from  the  variety  it  a /Fords,  may 
be  divided  into  different  orders,  genera,  and  species. 

Order  I.  Round  worms. 

Genus  I.  Intestinal  ascarides. 

Character •,  Body  round,  head  obtuse,  and  furnished 
with  three  vesicles. 

Species  1.  As  car  is  lumbricoides.  The  long  round 
worm,  or  lumbricoid  ascaris. 

Character . When  full  grown,  a foot  in  length. 

Mouth  triangular. 

2.  Ascaris  vermicular  is.  The  thread  or  maw- 

worm.  9 

Character.  When  full  grown,  half  an  inch  in  length. 
Tail  terminates  in  a fine  point. 

Genus  IT.  Intestinal  trichurides. 

Character.  Body  round,  tail  three  times  the  length 
of  the  body,  head  without  vesicles. 

Species.  Trichuris  vulgaris.  The  trichuris,  or  long 
thread-worm. 

Character.  The  head  furnished  with  a proboscis. 

Order  II.  The  flat  worms. 

Genus  I.  Intestinal  tape-worm. 

Character.  Body  fiat  and  jointed. 

Species  1.  Tcenia  osculis  marginalibus.  The  long 
tape-worm. 

Character.  The  oscula  are  situated  upon  the  margin 
of  the  joints. 

2.  Tcenia  osculis  superjicialibus.  The  broad  tape- 
worm. 

Character.  The  oscula  are  placed  upon  the  flattened 
surface. 

These  worms  were  all  known  to  the  ancients,  the 
trichuris  only  excepted,  and  are  mentioned  in  the 
works  of  Hippocrates,  Galen,  Celsus,  Paulus  iEgineta, 
and  Pliny. 

When  worms  are  generated  in  the  intestines,  they 
often  produce  the  following  symptoms,  viz.  variable 
appetite,  foetid  breath,  acrid  eructations  and  pains  in 
the  stomach,  grinding  of  the  teeth  during  sleep,  picking 
of  the  nose,  paleness  of  the  countenance  ; sometimes 
dizziness,  hardness  and  fulness  of  the  belly;  slimy 
stools,  with  occasional  griping  pains,  more  particularly 
about  the  navel,  heat  and  itching  about  the  anus  ; short 
dry  cough;  emaciation  of  the  body  ; slow  fever,  with 
evening  exacerbations  and  irregular  pulse,  and  some- 
times convulsive  fits. 

fVorm-bark.  See  Geoffrcea  jamaicensis. 

Worm-grass , perennial.  See  Spigelia. 

Worm , Guinea.  See  Dracunculus. 

Worm , ring.  See  Herpes. 

WORMSEED.  See  Artemisia  santonica. 

WORMWOOD.  See  Artemisia  absinthium. 

Wormwood , common.  See  Artemisia  absinthium. 

Wormwood , mountain.  See  Artemisia  glacialis.  — 


Wormwood , Roman.  See  Artemisia  absinthium. 

Wormwood , sea.  See  Artemisia  maritima. 

Wormwood , Tartarian.  See  Artemisia  santonica. 

WORT.  An  infusion  of  malt.  This  has  been  found 
useful  in  the  cure  of  the  scurvy.  Dr.  Macbride,  in  his 
very  ingenious  experimental  essays,  having  laid  down 
as  a principle,  “ that  the  cure  of  the  scurvy  depends  on 
the  fermentative  quality  in  the  remedies  made  use  of,” 
was  led  to  inquire  after  a substance  capable  of  being 
preserved  during  a long  sea-voyage,  and  yet  containing 
materials  by  which  a fermentation  might  occasionally 
be  excited  in  the  bowels.  Such  a one  appeared  to  him 
to  be  found  in  malt,  which  is  well  known  to  be  the 
grain  of  barley,  brought  suddenly  to  a germinating 
state  by  heat  and  moisture,  and  then  dried,  whereby  its 
saccharine  principle  is  developed,  and  rendered  easy  of 
extraction  by  watery  liquors.  The  sweet  infusion  of 
this  he  proposed  to  give  as  a dietic  article  to  scorbutic 
persons,  expecting  that  it  would  ferment  in  their  bowels, 
and  give  out  its  fixed  air,  by  the  antiseptic  powers  of 
which  the  strong  tendency  to  putrefaction  in  this  dis- 
ease might  be  corrected. 

It  was  some  time  before  a fair  trial  of  this  purposed 
remedy  could  be  obtained ; and  different  reports  were 
made  concerning  it.  By  some  cases,  however,  pub- 
lished in  a postscript  of  the  second  edition  of  the  doc- 
tor’s work  in  1767,  it  appears  that  scorbutic  complaints 
of  the  most  dangerous  kind  have  actually  been  cured 
at  sea  by  the  use  of  wort.  Its  general  effects  were  to 
keep  the  patient’s  bowels  open,  and  to  prove  highly  nu- 
tritious and  strengthening.  It  sometimes  purged  too 
much,  but  this  effect  was  easily  obviated  by  the  tinctura 
thebaica.  Other  unquestionable  cases  of  its  success  i n 
this  disease  are  to  be  seen  in  the  London  Medical  Es- 
says and  Inquiries. 

The  use  of  wort  has  hence  been  adopted  in  other 
cases  where  a strong  and  putrid  disposition  in  the  fluids 
appeared  to  prevail,  as  in  cancerous  and  phagedenic 
ulcers ; and  instances  are  published,  in  the  fourth  volume 
of  the  work  above  mentioned,  of  its  remarkable  good 
effects  in  these  cases. 

As  the  efficacy  of  the  malt  infusion  depends  upon  its 
producing  changes  in  the  whole  mass  of  fluids,  it  is 
obvious  that  it  must  be  taken  in  large  quantities  for  a 
considerable  length  of  time,  and  rather  as  an  article  of 
diet  than  medicine.  From  one  to  four  pints  daily  have 
generally  been  directed.  The  proportion  recommended 
in  preparing  it,  is  one  measure  of  ground  malt  to  three 
equal  measures  of  boiling  water.  The  mixture  must 
be  well  stirred,  and  left  to  stand,  covered,  three  or  four 
hours.  It  should  be  made  fresh  every  day. 

WOUNDWORT.  See  Laserpitium  chironium. 

WRAPPER.  See  Valva 

WRIST.  See  Carpus: 


X 


"V-  ala'ppa.  (From  the  province  of  Xalappa,  in  New 
Spain,  whence  it  comes.)  Jalap. 

XA'NTHIUM.  (From  £av0oj,  yellow:  so  named 
because  it  is  said  to  make  the  hair  yellow.)  The 
name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linnaean  system. 
Class,  Moncecia  ; Order,  Pentandria.  The  less  bur- 
dock. 

Xanthium  strumarium.  The  systematic  name  of 
the  less  burdock.  This  herb  of  Linnams  was  once 
esteemed  in  the  cure  of  scrofula,  but,  like  most  other 
remedies  against  this  disease,  proves  ineffectual.  The 
seeds  are  administered  internally  in  some  countries 
against  erysipelas. 

[Xanthoxylum  fraxineum.  See  Prickly-ash.  A.] 

XERA'SIA.  (From  ^po?,  dry.)  An  excessive  te- 
nuity, or  softness  of  the  hairs,  similar  to  down. 


Xerocolly'rium.  (From  ^poj,  dry,  and  mWvpiov, 
a collyrium.)  A dry  collyrium. 

Xeromy'rum.  (From  j^poj,  dry,  and  pvpov , an 
ointment.)  A dry  ointment. 

XEROPHTHA'LMIA.  (S»7pof,  dry,  and  o00aXpta, 
an  inflammation  of  the  eye.)  A dry  inflammation  of 
the  eye  without  discharge. 

Xi'phium.  (From  a sword : so  named  from 
the  sword- like  shape  of  its  leaves.)  Spurgewort. 

XIPHOID.  ( Xiphoides ; from  a sword,  and 

eiSoi,  likeness.)  A term  given  by  anatomists  to  par's 
which  had  some  resemblance  to  an  ancient  sword,  as 
the  xiphoid  cartilage. 

Xiphoid  cartilage.  See  Cartilago  ensiformis. 

Xyloa'loes.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

Xyloba'lsamum.  See  Amyris  gileadensis. 


YTT 


YUC 


Y 


YAM.  See  Dioscorea. 

, YANOLITE.  See  Axinite. 

YARROW.  See  Achillea  millefolium. 

YAWS.  1.  The  African  name  for  raspberry. 

2.  The  name  of  a disease  which  resembles  a rasp- 
berry. See  Frambcesia. 

Yayama.  The  Brazilian  name  of  the  pine-apple. 
YELLOW  EARTH.  An  ochre  yellow-coloured 
mineral,  found  ia  Upper  Lusatia. 

Yellow  fever.  See  Febris  continua. 

Yellow  saunders.  See  Santalvm  album. 

YENITE.  See  Lievrite. 

YEST.  See  Fermentum. 

Yoked  leaf.  See  Conjugatus. 

YOLK.  See  Vitellus. 

Yorkshire  sanicle.  See  Pinguicula. 
Ypsiloglo'ssus.  (From  vipiXoeiSes,  the  ypsiloid 
bone,  and  yAoxnra,  the  tongue.)  A muscle  originating 
in  the  os  hyoides,  and  terminating  in  the  tongue. 

Ypsiloi'des.  (From  v,  the  Greek  letter,  called 
ypsilon,  and  etSos,  a likeness.)  The  os  hyoides:  so 
named  from  its  likeness  to  the  Greek  letter  ypsilon. 

YTTRIA.  This  is  a new  earth  discovered  in  1794, 
by  Professor  Gadolin,  in  a stone  from  Ytterby,  in 
Sweden. 

It  may  be  obtained  most  readily  by  fusing  the  gado- 
linite  with  two  parts  of  caustic  potassa,  washing  the 
mass  with  boiling  water,  and  filtering  the  liquor,  which 
is  of  a fine  green.  This  liquor  is  to  be  evaporated,  till 
no  more  oxide  of  manganese  falls  down  from  it  in  a 
black  powder;  after  which  the  liquid  is  to  be  saturated 
with  nitric  acid.  At  the  same  time  digest  the  sediment 
that  was  not  dissolved,  in  very  dilute  nitric  acid, 
which  will  dissolve  the  earth  with  much  heat,  leaving 
the  silex,  and  the  highly  oxided  iron,  undissolved.  Mix 
the  two  liquors,  evaporate  them  to  dryness,  redissolve 
and  filter,  which  will  separate  any  silex  or  oxide  of 
iron  that  may  have  been  left.  A few  drops  of  a solu- 
tion of  carbonate  of  potassa  will  separate  any  lime 
that  may  be  present,  and  a cautious  addition  of  hydro- 
sulphuret  of  potassa  will  throw  down  the  oxide  of 
manganese  that  may  have  been  left;  but  if  too  much 
be  employed,  it  will  throw  down  the  yttria  likewise. 
Lastly,  the  yttria  is  to  be  precipitated  by  pure  ammo- 
nia, well  washed  and  dried. 

Yttria  is  perfectly  white,  when  not  contaminated 


with  oxide  of  manganese,  from  which  it  is  not  easily 
freed.  Its  specific  gravity  is  4.842.  It  has  neither 
taste  nor  smell.  It  is  infusible  alone  ; but  with  borax 
melts  into  a transparent  glass,  or  opaque  white,  if  the 
borax  were  in  excess.  It  is  insoluble  in  water,  and  in 
caustic  fixed  alkalies  ; but  it  dissolves  in  carbonate  of 
ammonia,  though  it  requires  five  or  six  times  as  much 
as  glucine.  It  is  soluble'  in  most  of  the  acids.  The 
oxalic  acid,  or  oxalate  of  ammonia,  forms  precipitates 
in  its  solutions  perfectly  resembling  the  nnyiate  of 
silver.  Prussiate  of  potassa,  crystallized  and  redis- 
solved in  water,  throws  it  down  in  white  grains ; phos- 
phate of  soda,  in  white  gelatinous  flakes  ; infusion  of 
galls,  in  brown  flocks. 

Some  chemists  are  inclined  to  consider  yttria  rather 
as  a metallic  than  as  an  earthy  substance  : their 
reasons  are,  its  specific  gravity,  its  forming  coloured 
salts,  and  its  property  of  oxygenizing  muriatic  acid 
after  it  has  undergone  a long  calcination. 

When  yttria  is  treated  with  potassium  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  other  earths,  similar  results  are  ob- 
tained ; the  potassium  becomes  potassa,  and  the  earth 
gains  appearances  of  metallization;  so  that  it  is 
scarcely  to  be  doubted,  says  Sir  H.  Davy,  that  yttria 
consists  of  inflammable  matter,  metallic  in  its  nature, 
combined  with  oxygen.  The  salts  of  yttria  have  the 
following  general  characters : — 

1.  Many  of  them  are  insoluble  in  water. 

2.  Precipitates  are  occasioned  in  those  which  dis- 
solve, by  phosphate  of  soda,  carbonate  of  soda,  oxalate 
of  ammonia,  tartrate  of  potassa,  and  ferroprussiate  of' 
potassa. 

3.  If  we  except  the  sweet-tasted  soluble  sulphate  of 
yttria,  the  other  salts  of  this  earth  resemble  those  with 
the  base  of  lime  in  their  solubility. 

YTTRO-CERITE.  A mineral  of  a reddish,  grayish 
white,  and  a violet-blue  colour,  consisting  of  oxide  of 
cerium,  yttria,  lime,  and  fluoric  acid,  found  hitherto  , 
only  at  Finbo,  in  Sweden. 

YTTRO-TANT ALITE.  An  ore  of  tantalum,  from 
which  the  columbic  acid  is  procured. 

YUCCA.  (Yucca,  Yuca,  or  lucca,  of  the  original 
inhabitants  of  America.)  The  name  of  a genus  of 
plants  in  the  Linnaean  system.  Class,  Hexandria ; 
Order,  Monogynia.  * 

Yucca  gloriosa.  See  Adam's  needle. 


z 


ZEA 

a'ccharum.  See  Saccharum. 

ZACCHIA,  Paolo,  an  eminent  physician,  was 
born  at  Rome  in  1585,  and  became  distinguished  by  his 
learning  and  accomplishments,  as  well  as  by  his  pro- 
fessional skill.  He  was  physician  to  Pope  Innocent 
X.,  and  celebrated  among  his  contemporaries  by 
various  publications,  of  which  the  principal  is  entitled, 
“ Quaestiones  Medico-legales,”  and  has  been  often 
reprinted.*  He  was  also  the  author,  in  Italian,  of  two 
esteemed  works,  on  the  Lent  diet,  and  on  hypochon- 
driacal affections.  He  died  in  1659. 

Za'ffran.  (Arabian.)  Saffron. 

ZAFFRE.  Saffre.  The  residuum  of  cobalt  after 
the  sulphur,  arsenic,  and  other  volatile  matters  of  this 
mineral  have  been  expelled  by  calcination. 

Zai'bac.  (Arabian.)  Quicksilver. 

Za'rza.  An  ancient  and  provincial  name  of  the 
sarsaparilla. 

ZE'A.  (Tea,  ce,  f. ; a name  borrowed  from  the 
ancient  Greeks,  whose  geia  appears  to  have  been  some 
kind  of  Triticum  or  Uordeum , agreeing  with  this  genus 
only  as  being  a grain  cultivated  for  the  use  of  man.) 
The  maize. 


ZEO 

Zea  mays.  The  systematic  name  of  the  Indian 
wheat-plant,  the  common  maize,  or  Indian  corn,  a 
native  of  America  and  cultivated  in  Italy  and  several 
parts  of  Europe,  for  its  grain,  which  is  ground  for  the 
same  purposes  as  our  wheat,  to  whicli  it  is  very  little 
inferior. 

ZEDOA'RIA.  1.  The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linmean  system.  Class,  Monandria ; Order,  Mo- 
nogynia. Zedoary. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  a Kcempfera.  See 
Kcempfera  rotunda. 

Zedoaria  longa.  The  long  roots  of  the  Kcempfera 
rotunda , of  Linnaeus. 

Zedoaria  rotunda.  The  round  root  of  the  ze- 
doary plant.  See  Kcempfera  rotunda. 

ZEDOARY.  See  Zedoaria. 

ZEINE.  A yellow  substance,  having  the  appear- 
ance of  wax,  obtained  from  maize  or  Indian  corn. 

ZEOLITE.  The  name  of  a very  extensive  mineral 
genus',  containing  the  following  species: 

1.  Dodecahedral  zeolite,  or  leucite. 

2.  Hcxahedral  zeolite,  or  analcime. 

3.  Rhomboidal  zeolite,  chabasite,  or  chabasie 


4.  Pyramidal  zeolite,  or  cross  stone. 

5.  Diprisinatic  zeolite,  or  laumonite. 

6.  Prismatic  zeolite,  or  mesotype,  divided  into  three 
subspecies  : natrolite ; mealy  zeolite,  of  a white  colour, 
of  various  shades;  and  fibrous  zeolite,  of  which  there 
are  two  kinds. 

a.  The  acicular , or  needle  zeolite , the  mesotype  of 
Haiiy.  This  is  of  a grayish,  yellowish,  or  reddish- 
white  colour.  It  is  found  in  Scotland. 

b.  Common  fibrous  zeolite , of  a white  colour. 

7.  Prismatoidal  zeolite,  or  stilbite,  comprehending, 

a.  Foliated  zeolite,  stilbite  of  Haiiy  of  a white  and 
red  colour,  beautiful  specimens  of  which  are  found  in 
Stirlingshire. 

b.  Radiated  zeolite , of  a yellowish-white,  or  grayish- 
white  colour. 

8.  Axifrangible  zeolite,  or  apophyllite. 

Ze'rna.  An  ulcerated  impetigo. 

ZERO*.  The  commencement  of  a scale  marked  0 : 
thus  we  say,  the  zero  of  Fahrenheit,  which  is  32° 
below  the  melting  point  of  ice ; the  zero  of  the  centi- 
grade scale,  which  coincides  with  the  freezing  of 
water.  The  absolute  zero  is  the  imaginary  point  in 
the  scale  of  temperature,  when  the  whole  heat  is 
exhausted : the  term  of  absolute  cold  or  privation  of 
caloric. 

ZI'BETHUM.  (From  Zobeth,  Arabian.)  Civetta. 
Civet.  A soft,  unctuous,  odoriferous  substance,  about 
the  consistence  of  honey  or  butter,  of  a whitish,  yel- 
lowish, or  brownish  colour,  sometimes  blackish,  con- 
tained in  some  excretory  follicles  near  the  anus  of  the 
Viverra  zibctka,  of  Linnteus.  It  has  a grateful  smell 
when  diluted,  and  an  unctuous  subacrid  taste,  and 
possesses  stimulating,  nervine,  and  antispasmodic 
virtues. 

ZIMMERMAN,  John  George,  was  born  in  1728,  at 
Brug,  in  the  canton  of  Bern,  and  studied  medicine 
under  Haller  at  Gottingen,  where  he  took  his  degree  at 
23.  Having  married  a relation  of  Haller,  at  Bern, 
he  settled  as  a physician  in  hi*s  native  town ; the  re- 
tirement of  which  gave  him  an  opportunity  of  com- 
posing many  pieces  in  prose  and  verse,  and  particularly 
a sketch  of  his  popular  work  “On  Solitude.”  His 
treatise  “ On  the  Experience  of  Medicine,”  appeared 
in  1763,  and  three  years  after,  that  on  dysentery.  In 
1768,  he  accepted  the  post  of  physician  to  the  king  of 
England  for  Hanover,  whither  he  removed.  Here  the 
accumulation  of  business  tended  in  some  measure  to 
allay  the  irritability  of  his  temper  ; and  being  obliged 
about  three  years  after,  to  put  himself  under  the  care 
of  a surgeon  at  Berlin  for  some  local  complaint,  the 
notice  that  was  taken  of  him,  even  by  the  king,  con- 
tributed much  to  improve  his  health  and  spirits,  and 
of  course  his  happiness.  Having  lost  his  first  wife,  he 
formed  a second  matrimonial  connexion  in  1782; 
which  helped  much  to  alleviate  the  afflictions  to  which 
he  was  afterward  exposed.  In  1786  he  was  sent  for  to 
attend  the  great  Frederick  in  his  last  illness : and  he 
published  an  account  of  the  conversations  which  he 
had  with  that  celebrated  prince.  He  was  led,  too,  to 
defend  the  character  of  Frederick  against  the  censures 
of  Count  de  Mirabeau,  which  suffered  him  to  severe 
criticisms.  His  political  and  religious  principles  in- 
duced him  also  to  attack  those  societies  which  paved 
the  way  to  the ’French  revolution;  and  he  advised  the 
Emperor  Leopold  to  suppress  them  by  force ; and 
having  laid  an  unavowed  publication  to  the  charge  of 
a particular  person,  he  subjected  himself  to  a prosecu- 
tion for  a libel.  His  mind  had  arrived  to  such  a state 
of  irritation,  that  the  approaclrof  the  French  towards 
Hanover  almost  subverted  his  reason ; he  abstained 
from  food,  and  died  absolutely  worn  out  in  1795. 

ZIMOME.  See  Gluten , vegetable. 

ZINC.  (Zincum,  a German  word.)  A metal  found 
in  nature  combined  with  oxygen,  carbonic  acid,  and 
sulphuric  acid  ; and  mineralized  by  sulphur.  Native 
oxide  of  zinc  is  commonly  called  calamine.  It  occurs 
in  a loose,  and  in  a compact  form,  amorphous,  of  a 
white,  gray,  yellow,  or  brown  colour,  without  lustre, 
or  transparency.  Combined  with  carbonic  acid,  it  is 
called  vitreous  zinc  ore , or  native  carbonateof  zinc.  It 
is  found  in  solid  masses,  sometimes  in  six-sided  com- 
pressed prisms,  both  ends  being  covered  with  pentagons. 
Its  colour  is  generally  grayish  inclining  to  black.  It  is 
often  transparent.  Sulphate  of  zinc  is  found  efflores- 
cent in  the  form  of  stalactites,  or  in  rhombs.  Sulphu- 
ret  of  zinc , or  blende , is  the  most  abundant  ore.  It  is  1 


found  of  various  colours ; brown,  yellow,  hyacinth, 
black,  &c.,  and  with  various  degrees  of  lustre  and 
transparency.  This  zinc  ore  is  contaminated  with  iron, 
lead,  argillaceous  and  silicious  earths,  fee.  It  occurs 
both  in  amorphous  masses  and  crystallized  in  a diver- 
sity of  polygonal  figures. 

It  is  of  a bluish-white  colour,  somewhat  brighter  than 
lead ; of  considerable  hardness,  and  so  malleable  as 
not  to  be  broken  with  the  hammer,  though  it  cannot  be 
much  extended  in  this  way.  It  is  very  easily  extended 
by  the  rollers  of  the  flatting  mill.  Its  sp.  gr.  is  from 
6.9  to  7.2.  In  a temperature  between  210°  and  300° 
of  F.,  it  has  so  much  ductility  that  it  can  be  drawn 
into  wire,  as  well  as  laminated. 

When  broken  by  bending,  its  texture  appears  as  if 
composed  of  cubical  grains.  On  account  of  its  imper- 
fect malleability,  it  is  difficult  to  reduce  it  into  small 
parts  by  filing  or  hammering;  but  it  may  be  granu- 
lated, like  the  malleable  metals,  by  pouring  it,  when 
fused,  into  cold  water ; or,  if  it  be  heated  nearly  to 
melting,  it  is  then  sufficiently  brittle  to  be  pulverized. 

It  melts  long  before  ignition,  at  about  the  700th  de- 
gree of  Fahrenheit’s  thermometer;  and,  soon  after  it 
becomes  red-hot,  it  burns  with  a dazzling  white  flame, 
of  a bluish  or  yellowish  tinge,  and  is  oxidized  with 
such  rapidity,  that  it  flies  up  in  the  form  of  white 
flowers,  called  the  flowers  of  zinc , or  philosophical 
toool.  These  are  generated  so  plentifully,  that  the  ac- 
cess of  air  is  soon  intercepted  ; and  the  combustion 
ceases,  unless  the  matter  be  stirred,  and  a considerable 
heat  kept  up.  The  white  oxide  of  zinc  is  not  volatile, 
but  is  driven  up  merely  by  the  force  of  the  combustion. 
When  it  is  again  urged  by  a strong  heat,  it  becomes 
converted  into  a clear  yellow  glass.  If  zinc  be  heated 
in  closed  vessels,  it  rises  without  decomposition. 

When  zinc  is  burned  in  chlorine,  a solid  substance 
is  formed  of  a whitish-gray  colour,  and  semitrans- 
parent. This  is  the  only  chloride  of  zinc,  as  there  is 
only  one  oxide  of  the  metal.  It  may  likewise  be  made 
by  heating  together  zinc  filings  and  corrosive  sublimate. 
It  is  as  soft  as  wax,  fuses  at  a temperature  a little 
above  212°,  and  rises  in  the  gaseous  form  at  a heat 
much  below  ignition.  Its  taste  is  intensely  acrid,  and 
it  corrodes  the  skin.  It  acts  upon  water,  and  dissolves 
in  it,  producing  much  heat;  and  its  solution  decom- 
posed, by  an  alkali,  affords  the  white  hydrated  oxide 
of  zinc.  This  chloride  has  been  called  butter  of  zinc , 
and  muriate  of  zinc. 

Blende  is  the  native  sulphuret  of  zinc.  The  two 
bodies  are  difficult  to  combine  artificially.  The  salts 
of  zinc  possess  the  following  general  characters : — 

1.  They  generally  yield  colourless  solutions  with 
water. 

2.  Ferroprussiate  of  potassa,  hydrosulphuret  of  po- 
tassa,  hydriodate  of  potassa,  sulphuretted  hydrogen, 
and  alkalies,  occasion  white  precipitates. 

3.  Infusion  of  gall  produces  no  precipitate. 

The  diluted  sulphuric  acid  dissolves  zinc:  at  the 
same  time  that  the  temperature  of  the  solvent  is  in- 
creased, and  much  hydrogen  escapes,  an  undissolved 
residue  is-left,  which  has  been  supposed  to  consist  of 
plumbago.  Proust,  however,  says,  that  it  is  a mixture 
of  arsenic,  lead,  and  copper.  As  the  combination  of 
the  sulphuric  acid  and  the  oxide  proceeds,  the  tempera- 
ture diminishes,  and  the  sulphate  of  zinc,  which  is 
more  soluble  in  hot  than  cold  water,  begins  to  sepa- 
rate, and  disturb  the  transparency  of  the  fluid.  If 
more  water  be  added,  the  salt  may  be  obtained  in  fine 
prismatic  four-sided  crystals.  The  white  vitriol,  or 
copperas,  usually  sold,  is  crystallized  hastily,  in  the 
same  manner  as  loaf-sugar,  which  on  this  account  it 
resembles  in  appearance ; it  is  slightly  efflorescent. 
The  white  oxide  of  zinc  is  soluble  in  the  sulphuric 
acid,  and  forms  the  same  salt  as  is  afforded  by  zinc 
itself. 

The  hydrogen  gas  that  is  extricated  from  water  by 
the  action  of  sulphuric  acid,  carries  up  with  it  a por 
tion  of  zinc,  which  is  apparently  dissolved  in  it ; but 
this  is  deposited  spontaneously,  at  least  in  part,  if  not 
wholly,  by  standing.  It  burns  with  a brighter  flame 
than  common  hydrogen. 

Sulphate  of  zinc  is  prepared  in  the  large  way  from 
some  varieties  of  the  native  sulphuret.  The  ore  is 
roasted,  wetted  with  water,  and  exposed  to  the  air. 
The  sulphur  attracts  oxygen,  and  is  converted  into  sul- 
phuric acid;  and  the  metal,  being  at  the  same  time 
1 oxidized,  combines  with  the  acid.  After  some  time,  the 


Zl  N 


z.in 


sulphate  is  extracted  by  solution  in  water ; and  the 
solution  being  evaporated  to  dryness,  the  mass  is  run 
into  moulds.  Thus  the  white  vitriol  of  the  shops 
generally  contains  a small  portion  of  iron,  and  some- 
times of  lead. 

Sulphurous  acid  dissolves  zinc,  and  sulphuretted 
hydrogen  is  evolved.  The  solution,  by  exposure  to  the 
air,  deposites  needly  crystals,  which,  according  to 
Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin,  are  sulphuretted  sulphite  of 
zinc.  By  dissolving  oxide  of  zinc  in  sulphurous  acid, 
the  pure  sulphite  is  obtained.  This  is  soluble,  and 
crystallizable. 

Diluted  nitric  acid  combines  rapidly  with  zinc,  and 
produces  much  heat,  at  the  same  time  that  a large 
quantuy  of  nitrous  air  flies  off.  The  solution  is  very 
caustic,  and  affords  crystals  by  evaporation  and  cool- 
ing, which  slightly  detonate  upon  hot  coals,  and  leave 
oxide  of  zinc  behind.  This  salt  is  deliquescent. 

Muriatic  acid  acts  very  strongly  upon  zinc,  and  dis- 
engages much  hydrogen ; the  solution,  when  evapo- 
rated, does  not  afford  crystals,  but  becomes  gelatinous. 
By  a strong  heat  it  is  partly  decomposed,  a portion  of 
the  acid  being  expelled,  and  part  of  the  muriate  sub- 
limes and  condenses  in, a congeries  of  prisms. 

Phosphoric  acid  dissolves  zinc.  The  phosphate  does 
not  crystallize,  but  becomes  gelatinous,  and  may  be 
fused  by  a strong  heat.  The  concrete  phosphoric  acid 
heated  with  zinc  filings  is  decomposed. 

Fluoric  acid  likewise  dissolves  zinc. 

The  boracic  acid  digested  with  zinc  becomes  milky; 
and  if  a solution  of  borax  be  added  to  a solution  of 
muriate  or  nitrate  of  zinc,  an  insoluble  borate  of  zinc 
is  thrown  down. 

A solution  of  carbonic  acid  in  water  dissolves  a small 
quantity  of  zinc,  and  more  readily  its  oxide.  If  the 
solution  be  exposed  to  the  air,  a thin  iridescent  pellicle 
forms  on  its  surface. 

The  acetic  acid  readily  dissolves  zinc,  and  yields  by 
evaporation  crystals  of  acetate  of  zinc,  forming  rhom- 
boidal  or  hexagonal  plates.  These  are  not  altered  by 
exposure  to  the  air,  are  soluble  in  water,  and  burn  with 
a blue  flame. 

The  succinic  acid  dissolves  zinc  with  efferves- 
cence, and  the  solution  yields  long,  slender,  foliated 
crystals. 

Zinc  is  readily  dissolved  in  benzoic  acid , and  the  so- 
lution yields  needle-shaped  crystals,  which  are  soluble 
both  in  water  and  in  alkohol.  Heat  decomposes  them 
by  volatilizing  their  acid. 

The  oxalic  acid  attacks  zinc  with  a violent  efferves- 
cence, and  a white  powder  soon  subsides,  which  is 
oxalate  of  zinc.  If  oxalic  acid  be  dropped  into  a solu- 
tion of  sulphate,  nitrate,  or  muriate  of  zinc,  the  same 
salt  is  precipitated;  it  being  scarcely  soluble  in  water 
unless  an  excess  of  acid  be  present.  It  contains  seventy- 
five  per  cent,  of  metal. 

The  tartaric  acid  likewise  dissolves  zinc  with  effer- 
vescence, and  forms  a salt  difficult  of  solution  in  water. 

The  citric  apid  attacks  zinc  with  effervescence,  and 
small  brilliant  crystals  of  citrate  of  zinc  are  gradually 
deposited,  which  are  insoluble  in  water.  Their  taste 
is  styptic  and  metallic,  and  they  are  composed  of  equal 
parts  of  the  acid  and  of  oxide  of  zinc. 

The  malic  acid  dissolves  zinc,  and  affords  beautiful 
crystals  by  evaporation. 

Lactic  acid  acts  upon  zinc  with  effervescence,  and 
produces  a crystallizable  salt. 

The  metallic  acids  likewise  combine  with  zinc.  If 
arsenic  acid  be  poured  on  it,  an  effervescence  takes 
place,  arsenical  hydrogen  gas  is  emitted,  and  a black 
powder  falls  down,  which  is  arsenic  in  the  metallicstate, 
the  zinc  having  deprived  a portion  of  the  arsenic,  as 
well  as  the  water,  of  its  oxygen.  If  one  [part  of  zinc 
filings,  and  two  parts  of  dry  arsenic  acid  be  distilled  in 
a retort,  a violent  detonation  takes  place  when  the  re- 
tort becomes  red,  occasioned  by  the  sudden  absorption 
of  the  oxygen  of  the  acid  by  the  zinc.  The  arseniate 
of  zinc  may  be  precipitated  by  pouring  arsenic  acid  into 
the  solution  of  acetate  of  zinc,  or  by  mixing  a solution 
of  an  alkaline  arseniate  with  that  of  sulphate  of  zinc. 
It  is  a white  powder,  insoluble  in  water. 

By  a similar  process  zinc  may  be  combined  with  the 
molybdic  acid,  and  with  the  oxide  of  tungsten,  the 
tungstic  acid  of  some,  with  both  of  which  it  forms  a 
white  insoluble  compound ; and  with  the  chromic  acid, 
the  result  of  which  compound  is  equally  insoluble,  but 
of  an  orange-red  colour. 


Zinc  likewise  forms  some  triple  salts.  Thus,  if  the 
white  oxide  of  zinc  be  boiled  in  a solution  of  muriate 
of  ammonia,  a considerable  portion  is  dissolved  ; and 
though  part  of  the  oxide  is  again  deposited  as  the  solu- 
tion cools,  some  of  it  remains  combined  with  the  acid 
and  alkali  in  the  solution,  and  is  not  precipitable  either 
by  pure  alkalies  or  their  carbonates.  This  triple  salt 
does  not  crystallize. 

If  the  acidulous  tartrate  of  potassa  be  boiled  in  water 
with  zinc  filings,  a triple  compound  will  be  formed, 
which  is  very  soluble  in  water,  but  not  easily  crystal- 
lized. This,  like  the  preceding,  cannot  be  precipitated 
from  its  solution  either  by  pure  or  carbonated  alkalies. 

A triple  sulphate  of  zinc  and  iron  may  be  formed  by 
mixing  together  the  sulphates  of  iron  and  of  zinc  dis- 
solved in  water,  or  by  dissolving  iron  and  zinc  in  dilute 
sulphuric  acid.  This  salt  crystallizes  in  rhomboids, 
which  nearly  resemble  the  sulphate  of  zinc  in  figure, 
but  are  of  a pale  green-colour.  In  taste,  and  in  degree 
of  solubility,  it  differs  little  from  the  sulphate  of  zinc. 
It  contains  a much  larger  proportion  of  zinc  than  of 
iron. 

A triple  sulphate  of  zinc  and  cobalt,  as  first  noticed 
by  Link,  may  be  obtained  by  digesting  zaffre  in  a solu- 
tion of  sulphate  of  zinc.  On  evaporation,  large  quad- 
rilateral prisms  are  obtained,  which  effloresce  on  ex- 
posure to  the  air. 

Zinc  is  precipitated  from  acids  by  the  soluble  earths 
and  the  alkalies : the  latter  redissolve  the  precipitate,  if 
they  be  added  in  excess. 

Zinc  decomposes,  or  alters,  the  neutral  sulphates  in 
the  dry  way.  When  fused  with  sulphate  of  potassa, 
it.  converts  that  salt  into  a sulphuret:  the  zinc  at  the 
same  time  being  oxidized,  and  partly  dissolved  in  the 
sulphuret.  When  pulverized  zinc  is  added  to  fused 
nitre,  or  projected  together  with  that  salt  into  a red-hot 
crucible,  a very  violent  detonation  takes  place  ; inso- 
much that  it  is  necessary  for  the  operator  to  be  careful 
in  using  only  small  quantities,  lest  the  burning  matter 
should  be  thrown  about.  The  zinc  is  oxidized,  and 
part  of  the  oxide  combines  with  the  alkali,  with  which 
it  forms  a compound  soluble  in  water. 

Zinc  decomposes  common  salt,  and  also  sal  ammo- 
niac, by  combining  with  the  muriatic  acid.  The  filings 
of  zinc  likewise  decompose  alum,  when  boiled  in  a 
solution  of  that  salt,  probably  by  combining  with  its 
excess  of  acid. 

Zinc  may  be  combined  with  phosphorus,  by  project- 
ing small  pieces  of  phosphorus  on  the  zinc  melted  in  a 
crucible,  the*  zinc  being  covered  with  a little  resin,  to 
prevent  its  oxidation.  Phosphuret  of  zinc  is  white, 
with  a shade  of  bluish-eray,  has  a metallic  lustre,  and 
is  a little  malleable.  When  zinc  and  phosphorus  are 
exposed  to  heat  in  a retort,  a red  sublimate  rises,  and 
likewise  a bluish  sublimate  in  needly  crystals  with  a 
metallic  lustre.  If  zinc  and  phosphoric  acid  be  heated 
together,  with  or  without  a little  charcoal,  needly  crys- 
tals are  sublimed,  of  a silvery-white  colour.  Ali  these, 
according  to  Pelletier,  are  phosphuretted  oxides  of  zinc. 

Most  of  the  metallic  combinations  of  zinc  have  been 
already  treated  of.  It  forms  a brittle  compound  with 
antimony;  and  its  effects  on  manganese,  tungsten,  and 
molybdena,  have  not  yet  been  ascertained. 

Zinc , vitriolated.  See  Zinci  sulphas. 

Zi'nci  acetas.  See  Acetas  zinci. 

Zinci  oxidum.  Zincum  calcinatum.  Oxide  of  zinc.. 
Flowers  of  zinc.  Nihil  album;  Lana philosophorum. 
“ Throw  gradually  little  pieces  of  zinc  into  a large  deep 
crucible  placed  obliquely  and  made  of  a white  heat, 
another  crucible  being  placed  over  it,  so  that  the  zinc 
may  be  exposed  to  the  air,  and  that  it  may  be  frequently 
stirred  with  an  iron  spatula;  take  out  directly  the 
oxide,  which  is  formed  from  time  to  time;  then  pass 
the  white  and  lighter  part  of  it  through  a sieve. 
Lastly,  pour  water  upon  this,  that  a very  fine  powder 
may  be  formed,  in  the  same  manner  as  chalk  is  directed 
to  be  prepared.”  The  properties  of  this  oxide  are 
analogous  to  those  of  the  sulphate,  (except  that  it  is 
hardly  active  enough  to  excite  vomiting,)  if  given  in 
larger  doses:  but  it  is  more  precarious  in  its  effects; 
and  chiefly  used  at  present  as  an  external  astring  nt. 

Zinci  sulphas.  Zincum  vitriolatuw-  Vitriolum 
album.  Sulphate  of  zinc.  White  vitriol.  This  oc- 
curs native,  but  not  sufficiently  pure  for  medical  use. 
It  is  thus  prepared  in  the  pharmacopoeia.  “Take  of 
zinc,  broken  to  little  pieces,  three  ounces;  suljhuric 
acid,  by  weight,  five  ounces-  water,  four  pints.  Mix 


ZIR 


ZOO 


them  In  a glass  vessel,  and  when  the  effervescence  is 
over,  filter  the  solution  through  paper;  then  boil  it 
down,  till  a pellicle  appears,  and  set  it  by  to  crystal- 
lize.” This  preparation  is  given  internally  in  the  dose 
of  from  3j  to  3 ss,  as  a vomit.  In  small  doses  it  cures 
dropsies,  intermitting  headaches,  and  some  nervous 
diseases ; and  is  a powerful  antispasmodie  and  tonic. 
A solution  of  white  vitriol  is  also  used  to  remove  gleets, 
gonorrhoeas,  and  for  cleaning  foul  ulcers,  having  an  as- 
tringent or  stimulant  effect,  according  to  its  strength. 

ZINCUM.  See  Zinc. 

Zincum  calcinatum.  See  Zinci  oxidum. 

Zincum  vit rio latum.  See  Zinci  sulphas. 

Zincum  vitriolatum  purificatum.  See  Zinci 
sulphas. 

Zingi.  An  ancient  nstme  of  the  stellated  aniseed. 
See  Illicium  anisalum. 

ZI'NGIBER.  (Zingiberis,is,  f.  Zingiber,  ems,n. 
Zingiberi;  indec.  ZiyyiSepis,  of  Dioscorides,  a name 
which  the  Greeks  seem  to  have  taken  from  the  Ara- 
bians, when  they  got  the  plant.)  The  name  of  a genus 
of  plants,  according  to  Roscoe.  Class,  Monandria  ; 
Order,  Monogynia. 

Zingiber  album.  Ginger-root  when  deprived  of  its 
radicles  and  sordes. 

Zingiber  commune.  See  Zingiber  officinale. 

Zingiber  nigrum.  The  root  of  the  zingiber  offici- 
nale is  so  called  when  suffered  to  dry  with  its  radicles 
and  the  sordes  which  usually  hang  to  it. 

Zingiber  officinale.  The  systematic  name  of  the 
ginger-plant.  Zingiber  album;  Zingiber  nigrum; 
Zingiber  commune  ; Zinzibcr ; Amo  mum  zingiber , of 
Linnaeus.  The  white  and  black  ginger  are  both  the 
produce  of  the  same  plant,  the  difference  depending 
upon  the  mode  of  preparing  them.  Ginger  is  generally 
considered  as  an  aromatic,  and  less  pungent  and  heat- 
ing to  the  system  than  might  be  expected  from  its 
effects  upon  the  organ  of  taste.  It  is  used  as  an  anti- 
spasmodic  and  carminative.  The  cases  in  which  it  is 
more  immediately  serviceable  are  flatulent  colics,  de- 
bility, and  laxity  of  the  stomach  and  intestines ; and 
in  torpid  and  phlegmatic  constitutions  to  excite  brisker 
vascular  action.  It  is  seldom  given  but  in  combination 
with  other  medicines.  In  the  pharmacopoeias  it  is 
directed  in  the  form  of  a syrup  and  condiment,  and  in 
many  compositions  ordered  as  a subsidiary  ingredient. 

ZINN,  John  Godfrey,  was  born  in  1726,  studied 
under  Haller  at  Gottingen,  and  became  botanical  pro- 
fessor in  that  university.  His  first  experiments  were 
undertaken  to  ascertain  the  sensibility  of  different 
parts  of  the  brain  ; he  then  proceeded  to  the  examina- 
tion of  the  eye,  on  which  he  published  a work  in  much 
estimation.  The  result  of  his  botanical  labours  ap- 
peared in  several  papers,  and  in  a catalogue  of  the 
plants  about  Gottingen,  arranged  according  to  the  plan 
of  his  preceptor.  He  died  prematurely  in  1758.  He 
was  a member  of  several  learned  societies. 

Zi'nziber.  See  .Zingiber. 

ZIRCONIA.  Zircon.  An  earth  discovered  in  the 
year  1793,  by  Klaproth  of  Berlin,  in  the  Zircon  or  Jar- 
gon, a gem  first  brought  from  the  island  of  Ceylon,  but 
also  found  in  France,  Spain,  and  other  parts  of  Eu- 
rope. Its  colour  is  either  gray,  greenish,  yellowish, 
reddish-brown,  or  purple.  It  has  little  lustre,  and  is 
nearly  opaque.  Zircon  is  likewise  found  in  another 
gem  called  the  hyacinth.  This  stone  is  of  a yellowish- 
red  colour,  mixed  with  brown.  It  possesses  lustre  and 
transparency.  To  obtain  it,  the  stone  should  be  cal- 
cined and  thrown  into  cold  water,  to  render  it  friable, 
and  then  powdered  in  an  agate  mortar.  Mix  the 
powder  with  nine  parts  of  pure  potassa,  and  project 
the  mixture  by  spoonfuls  into  a red-hot  crucible,  taking 
care  that  each  portion  is  fused  before  another  is  added. 
Keep  the  whole  in  fusion,  with  an  increased  heat,  for 
an  hour  and  a half.  When  cold,  break  the  crucible, 
separate  its  contents,  powder  and  boil  in  water,  to  dis- 
solve the  alkali.  Wash  the  insoluble  part ; dissolve  in 
muriatic  acid ; heat  the  solution,  that  the  silex  may 
fall  down ; and  precipitate  the  zircon  by  caustic  fixed 
alkali.  Or  the  zircon  may  be  precipitated  by  carbonate 
of  soda,  and  the  carbonic  acid  expelled  by  heat. 

New  process  for  preparing  pure  z irconia. — Powder 
the  zircons  very  fine,  mix  them  with  two  parts  of 
pure  potassa,  and  heat  them  red-hot  in  a silver  cru- 
cible, for  an  hour.  Treat  the  substance  obtained  with 
distilled  water,  pour  it  on  a filter,  and  wash  the  inso- 
luble part  well ; it  will  be  a compound  of  zirconia, 


silex,  potassa,  and  oxide  of  iron.  Dissolve  it  in  mu- 
riatic acid,  and  evaporate  to  dryness,  to  separate  the 
silex.  Rodissolve  the  muriates  of  zirconia  and  iron  in 
water  ; and  to  separate  the  zirconia  which  adheres  to 
the  silex,  wash  it  with  weak  muriatic  acid,  and  add 
this  to  the  solution.  Filter  the  fluid,  and  precipitate 
the  zirconia  and  iron  by  pure  ammonia;  wash  the 
precipitates  well,  and  then  treat  the  hydrates  with 
oxalic  acid,  boiling  them  well  together,  that  the  acid 
may  act  on  the  iron,  retaining  it  in  solution,  while  an 
insoluble  oxalate  of  zirconia  is  formed.  It  is  then  to 
be  filtered,  and  the  oxalate  washed,  until  no  iron  can 
be  detected  in  the  water  that  passes.  The  earthy  oxa- 
late is,  when  dry,  of  an  opaline  colour.  After  being 
well  washed,  it  is  to  be  decomposed  by  heat  in  a pla- 
tinum crhcible. 

Thus  obtained,  the  zirconia  is  perfectly  pure,  but  is 
not  affected  by  acids.  It  must  be  reacted  on  by  po- 
tassa as  before,  and  then  washed  until  the  alkali  is 
removed.  Afterward  dissolve  it  in  muriatic  acid,  and 
precipitate  by  ammonia.  The  hydrate  thrown  down, 
when  well  washed,  is  perfectly  pure,  and  easily  soluble 
in  acids. 

Zircon  is  a fine  white  powder,  without  taste  or 
smell,  but  somewhat  harsh  to  the  touch.  It.  is  inso- 
luble in  water ; yet  if  slowly  dried,  it  coalesces  into 
a semitransparent  yellowish  mass,  like  gum-arabic, 
which  retains  one-third  its  weight  of  water.  It  unites 
with  all  the  acids.  It  is  insoluble  in  pure  alkalies ; but 
the  alkaline  carbonates  dissolve  it.  Heated  with  the 
blowpipe,  it  does  not  melt,  but  emits  a yellowish  phos- 
phoric light.  Heated  in  a crucible  of  charcoal,  bedded 
in  charcoal  powder,  placed  in  a stone  crucible,  and  ex- 
posed to  a good  forge  fire  for  some  hours,  it  undergoes 
a pasty  fusion,  which  unites  its  particles  into  a gray 
opaque  mass,  not  truly  vitreous,  but  more  resembling 
porcelain.  In  this  state  it  is  sufficiently  hard  to  strike 
fire  with  steel,  and  scratch  glass;  and  is  of  the  specific 
gravity  of  4.3. 

There  is  the  same  evidence  for  believing  that  zirco- 
nia is  a compound  of  a metal  and  oxygen,  as  that 
afforded  by  the  action  of  potassium  on  the  other  earths. 
The  alkaline  metal,  when  brought  into  contact  with 
zirconia  ignited  to  whiteness,  is,  for  the  most  part, 
converted  into  potassa,  and  dark  particles,  which, 
when  examined  by  a magnifying  glass,  appear  metallic 
in  some  parts,  of  a chocolate-brown  in  others,  are 
found  diffused  through  the  potassa  and  the  decom- 
pounded earth. 

According  to  Sir  II.  Davy,  4.66  is  the  prime  equiva- 
lent of  zirconium  on  the  oxygen  scale,  and  5.66  that  of 
zirconia. 

ZIZA'NIA.  (An  ancient  r.ame,  fygaviov,  of  the 
Greeks,  synonymous  with  infelix  loliurn,  of  the  Latins.) 
The  name  of  a genus  of  plants  in  the  Linmean  system. 
Class,  Monvecia;  Order,  Hexandria. 

Zizania  aquatica.  The  systematic  name  of  a reed, 
the  grain  of  which  is  much  esteemed  in  Jamaica  and 
Virginia.  The  Indians  are  exceedingly  fond  of  it,  and 
account  it  more  delicious  than  rice. 

[The  zizania  aquatica  is  a native  of  most  of  the 
northern  parts  of  the  United  States,  but  it  has  disap- 
peared in  the  settled  and  cultivated  parts  of  the  coun- 
try. It  is  now  principally  found  on  the  streams  and 
shoal  waters  of  the  north-western  lakes  and  rivers, 
where  it  grows  spontaneously  in  the  water,  like  rice  in 
the  southern  states.  During  seed-time,  the  aborigines 
of  the  country  collect  it  for  food  ; which  they  use  by 
parching  with  fire,  and  then  pounding  with  a stone. 
The  meal  thus  produced  tastes  much  like  parched 
Indian  corn.  The  plant  is  the  Fausse  avoine , or  false 
oats  of  the  French  Canadians.  The  grain  is  black, 
and  from  half  an  inch  to  an  inch  in  length,  with  much 
of  the  appearance,  when  growing,  of  oats  or  rice.  A.] 

Zi  zyphus.  The  jujubes  were  formerly  so  called. 
See  Rhamnus  zizyphus. 

ZOISITE.  A subspecies  of  prismatic  augite,  which 
is  divided  into  two  kinds ; 

1.  Common  zoisite^. of  a yellowish-gray  colour,  found 
in  Corinthia. 

2.  Friable  zoisite , of  a reddish  colour,  which  comes 
also  from  Corinthia. 

ZO'NA.  (From  ^invvvpi,  to  surround.)  The  shin- 
gles. See  Erysipelas. 

ZOOLOGY.  ( Zoologia ; from  $aiov,  an  animal,  and 
Xoyof,  a discourse.)  That  part  of  natural  history  which 
treats  of  animals. 


ZYG 


ZOONIC  ACID.  In  the  liquid  procured  by  distilla- 
tion from  animal  substances,  which  had  been  supposed 
to  qontain  only  carbonate  of  ammonia  and  an  oil.  Ber- 
thoilet  imagined  he  had  discovered  a peculiar  acid,  to 
which  he  gave  the  name  of  zoonic.  Thenard,  how- 
ever, has  demonstrated  that  it  is  merely  acetic  acid 
combined  with  animal  matter. 

ZOONO'MIA.  (From  gcoov,  an  animal,  and  voyog, 
a law.)  The  laws  of  organic  life. 

ZOOPHYTE.  {Zoophyte,  i,  n. ; from  gcoov,  an  ani- 
mal, and  (pvTov , a plant.)  A kind  of  intermediate 
body,  supposed  to  partake  both  of  the  nature  of  an  ani- 
mal and  a vegetable.  In  the  Linnaean  system,  zoophytes 
constitute  an  order  of  the  Class  Vermes. 

ZOOTOMY.  ( Zootomia ; from  gwov,  an  animal,  and 
Tepvo),  to  cut.)  The  dissection  of  animals. 

ZO  STER.  (From  gwvi 'vyi,  to  gird.)  A kind  of  ery- 
sipelas which  goes  round  the  body  like  a girdle. 

Zu'char.  (Arabian.)  Sugar. 

ZUMATE.  A compound  of  the  zumic  acid,  with  a 
salifiable  basis. 

ZUMIC  ACID.  ( Acidum  zumicum , from  lea- 
ven.) An  acid  produced  from  vegetable  substances 
which  nave  undergone  the  acetous  fermentation.  Its 
claim  to  be  considered  as  a distinct  compound  is  doubt- 
ful. See  Nanceic  acid. 

ZUNDERERZ.  Tinder  ore.  An  ore  of  silver. 

ZYGO'MA.  (From  $vyo?,  a yoke  : because  it  trans- 
mits the  tendon  of  the  temporal  muscle  like  a yoke.) 
The  cavity  under  the  zygomatic  process  of  the  tempo- 
ral bone,  and  os  matte. 


zz 

ZYGOMATIC.  (Zygomaticus ; from  zygoma.)  Be* 
longing  to  the  zygoma. 

Zygomatic  process.  An  apophysis  of  the  os  jugale, 
and  another  of  the  temporal  bone,  are  so  called.* 

Zygomatic  suture.  Suturazygomatica.  The  union 
of  the  zygomatic  process  of  the  temporal  bone  to  the 
cheek  bone. 

Zygomaticus  major.  This  muscle  arises  from  the 
cheek  bone  near  the  zygomatic  suture,  taking  a direc- 
tion downwards  and  inwards  to  the  angle  of  the  mouth. 
It  is  a long  slender  muscle,  which  ends  by  mixing  its 
fibres  with  the  orbicularis  oris,  and  the  depressor  of 
the  lip.  _ 

Zvgomaticus  minor.  This  muscle  "rises  a little 
higher  up  than  the  zygomaticus  major,  upon  the  cheek 
bone,  but  nearer  the  nose ; it  is  much  more  slender 
than  that  muscle,  and  is  often  wanting.  It  is  the  zygo- 
matic muscle  that  marks  the  face  with  that  line  which 
extends  from  the  cheek  bone  to  the  corner  of  the  mouth, 
which  is  particularly  distinguishable  in  some  persons. 
The  zygomatic  muscles  pull  the  angles  of  the  mouth 
up  as  in  laughter,  and  from,  in  this  way,  rendering  the 
face  distorted,  it  has  obtained  the  name  of  distortor 
oris.  The  strong  action  of  this  muscle  is  more  parti- 
cularly seen  in  laughter,  rage,  or  grinning. 

Zytho'gala.  Z v6oya\a.  Beer  and  milk,  which 
make  together  what  we  commonly  call  posset-drink ; 
a term  often  to  be  met  with  in  Sydenham. 

ZZ.  The  ancients  signify  Myrrh  by  these  two  let- 
ters, from  ^ yvpvri , a name  for  it  common  among  them. 
They  have  also  been  used  for  Zingiber. 


THE  END 


APPENDIX, 


[THE  following  obsolete  terms  have  been  omitted  in  the  body  of  the  work,  but  to 
preserve  Dr. Hooper’s  Dictionary  perfect,  they  are  inserted  in  the  present  place  and  form.] 


A'abam.  An  obsolete  term  used  by  some  ancient 
alchemists  for  lead. 

A'banet.  (Hebrew.  The  girdle  worn  by  the  Jew- 
ish priests.)  A girdle-like  bandage. 

Aba'rtamen.  Lead 

A'bas.  An  Arabian  term  for  the  scald-head,  and 
also  for  epilepsy. 

Abo'it.  An  Arabic  term  for  white  lead. 

A'bric.  An  Arabic  term  for  sulphur. 

Abstracti'tius.  (From  abstraho , to  draw  away.) 
An  obsolete  term  formerly  applied  to  any  native  spirit, 
not  produced  by  fermentation. 

Aca  ca.  (A KaKOi  ; from  a,  neg.,  and  nano; , bad.) 
Formerly  applied  to  those  diseases,  which  are  rather 
troublesome  than  dangerous. 

Aca'lai.  (Arabian.)  Common  salt. 

Aca'lcum.  Tin. 

Aca'nor.  (Hebrew.)  A furnace. 

Aca'zdir.  Tin. 

A'ccib.  An  obsolete  term  for  lead. 

A'CESIS.  (From  aiceopai,  to  cure.)  1.  A remedy 
or  cure. 

2.  The  herb  water-sage  ; so  called  from  its  supposed 
healing  qualities. 

Ace'storis.  (From  aKcoyai,  to  cure.)  It  strictly 
signifies  a female  physician,  and  is  used  for  a midwife. 

Achma'dium.  Antimony. 

A'CHNE.  An  obsolete  term  applied  to 

1.  Chaff. 

2.  Scum  or  froth  of  the  sea. 

3.  A white  mucus  in  the  fauces,  thrown  up  from  the 
lungs,  like  froth. 

4.  A whitish  mucilage  in  the  eyes  of  those  who  have 
fevers,  according  to  Hippocrates. 

5.  It  signifies  also  lint. 

ACONI'TUM.  (Aconitum,  i,  m.  Of  this  name 
various  derivations  are  given  by  etymologists ; as,  aKovrj , 
a whetstone  or  rock , because  it  is  usually  found  in  bar- 
ren and  rocky  places:  aKoviro;,  a, neg.,  and  kovis , dust; 
because  it  grows  without  earth,  or  on  barren  situations ; 
agreeable  to  Ovid’s  description,  “ Qua?  quia  nascuntur 
dura  vivacia  caute,  Agrestes  aconita  vocant:”  aaovau >, 
to  sharpen  ; because  it  was  used  in  medicine  intended 
to  quicken  the  sight : aianv , any , a dart;  because  they 
poison  darts  therewith  : or,  aKovi^opai,  to  accelerate  ; 
for  it  hastens  death.)  Aconite.  1.  A genus  of  plants  in 
the  Linn;ean  system,  all  the  species  of  which  have  pow- 
ei  ful  effects  on  the  human  .body.  Class,  Polyandria  ; 
Order,  Trigynia. 

2.  The  pharmacopceial  name  of  the  common,  or  blue 
wolf’s-bane.  See  Aconitum  napellies. 

Aco'nium.  A little  mortar. 

ACORI'TES.  (From  aicopov,  galangal.)  Acorites 
vinum.  A wine  mentioned  by  Dioscorides,  made  with 
galangal,  liquorice,  &c.  infused  with  wine. 

Acortinus.  A lupin. 

A'cra.  (An  Arabian  word.)  Acrai. 

1.  Excessive  venereal  appetite. 

2.  The  time  of  menstruation. 

ACTON.  A village  four  miles  from  London,  where 
is  a well  that  affords  a purging  water.  This  is  one  of 
the  strongest  purging  waters  near  London;  and  has 
been  drank  in  the  quantity  of  from  one  to  three  pints  in 
a morning,  against  scorbutic  and  cutaneous  affections. 
This  medical  spring  is  no  longer  resorted  to  by  the 
public. 

Adaices.  Sal-ammoniac. 

Adamitum.  See  Adamita. 

Adari'ges.  An  ainmoniacal  salt. 

A'dec.  Sour  milk,  or  buttermilk. 

Adiathorosus.  A spirit  distilled  from  tartar  Ob- 
solete. 

Adibat.  Mercury. 


I A'dice.  ASiktj.  A nettle. 

Adi'rige.  Ainmoniacal  salt. 

A'doo.  Milk. 

A'dram.  Fossil  salt. 

Aei'gluces.  (From  au,  always,  and  yXvws,  sweet.) 
A sweetish  wine,  or  must. 

AS'ON.  The  spinal  marrow. 

vEONE'SIS.  A washing  or  sprinkling  the  whole  body. 

^Eschromythe'sis.  The  obscene  language  of  the 
delirious. 

yEsECA'vuM.  Brass. 

AEsta'tes.  Freckles  in  the  face;  sunburnings. 

tEtas  crepita.  See  Age. 

.Etas  virilis.  See  Age. 

E'thna.  A chemical  furnace. 

E'thocks.  JEtholices.  Superficial  pustules  in  the 
skin,  raised  by  heat,  as  boils,  fiery  pustules. 

Ethya.  A mortar. 

E'ttioi  phlebes.  Eagle  veins.  The  veins  which 
pass  through  the  temples  to  the  head,  were  so  called 
formerly  by  Rufus  Ephesius. 

Etolium.  See  JEtocion. 

A'ffion.  An  Arabic  name  for  opium. 

A'ffium.  An  Arabic  name  for  opium. 

Agera'tus  lapis.  (Ageralus,  common.)  A stone 
used  by  cobblers 

A GES.  (From  ayys,  wicked : so  called  because  it 
is  generally  the  instrument  of  wicked  acts.)  The  palm 
of  the  hand. 

A'GIS.  The  thigh  or  femur. 

A'gma.  Agme.  A fracture. 

Ago'ce.  1 The  deduction  or  reasoning  upon  dis- 
eases from  their  symptoms  and  appearances. 

2.  The  order,  state,  or  tenour  of  a disease  or  body. 

Ago'stos.  (From  ayw,  to  bring,  or  lead.)  That 
part  of  the  arm  from  the  elbow  to  the  fingers ; also  the 
palm  or  hollow  of  the  hand. 

AGRE'STA.  ( Aypios , wild.)  1.  The  immature 
fruit  of  the  vine. 

2.  Verjuice,  which  is  made  from  the  wild  apple. 

Agre'sten.  Common  tartar. 

AGUIA.  (From  a,  priv.,  and  yviov,  a member.) 
Paralytic  weakness  of  a limb.  Where  the  use  of  the 
members  is  defective  or  lost. 

A'gul.  Alhagi.  An  Arabian  name  for  the  Syrian 
thorn.  The  leaves  are  purgative 

Agyion.  S eeAguia. 

AGY'RTE.  (From  ayvpis , a crowd  of  people,  or 
a mob;  or  from  ayupoo,  to  gather  together.)  It  for- 
merly expressed  certain  strollers,  who  pretended  to 
strange  things  from  supernatural  assistances ; it  was 
afterward  applied  to  all  illiterate  dabblers  in  medicine. 
Now  obsolete. 

Ahaloth.  The  Hebrew  name  of  Lignum  aloes. 
See  Lignum  aloes. 

Ahame'lla.  See  Achmella. 

Aho'vai  tiieveticlush.  A chesnut-like  fruit  of 
Brazil,  of  a poisonous  nature. 

Ahu'sal.  Orpiment. 

Ai'lmad.  Antimony. 

Ai'tmad.  Antimony. 

Ajura'rat.  Lead. 

Ala'bari.  Lead. 

A'lacar.  Sal  ammoniac. 

A'lafi.  Alafor.  Alafort.  Alcaline. 

A'lamad.  Alamed.  Antimony. 

Ala'mbic.  Mercury. 

Alapou'li.  See  Bilimbi. 

Alasalet.  Alaset.  Ammoniacum. 

Alasi.  Alafor.  An  alcaline  salt. 

Ala'strob.  Lead. 

A'latan.  Litharge. 

Alad'rat.  Nitre. 


APPENDIX. 


Albadal.  An  Arabic  name  for  the  sesamoid  bone 
of  the  first  joint  of  the  great  toe. 

Albage  nzi.  Albagiazi.  Arabic  names  for  the  os 
eacrum. 

Alba'ra.  (Chaldean.)  The  white  leprosy. 
Albaras.  1.  Arsenic. 

2.  A white  pustule. 

A'lberas.  (Arabian.)  White  pustules  on  the  face: 
also,  staph isagria,  because  its  juice  was  said  to  remove 
these  pustules.  , 

Ai.be'ston.  Quicklime. 

A'lbetad.  Galbanum. 

A'lbi  sublimati.  Muriated  mercury. 

A'lbimec.  Orpiment.  See  Arsenic. 

A'lbor.  Urine. 

Albo'rea.  Quicksilver. 

A'lbot.  A crucible. 

Albo'tai.  Turpentine. 

A'lbotar.  Turpentine. 

A'lbotat.  White  lead. 

A'lbotim.  Turpentine. 

A'LBOTIS.  A cutaneous  phlegmon  or  boil. 
Albuhar.  White  lead. 

A'lcebar.  See  Lignum  aloes. 

A'lcebris  vivum.  This  signifies,  according  to  Ru- 
landus,  Sulphur  vivum. 

A'lchabric.  Sulphur  vivum. 

A'cchachil.  Rosemary. 

A'lcharith.  Quicksilver. 

A'lchibric.  Sulphur. 

A'lchien.  This  word  occurs  in  theTheatrum  Che- 
micum,  and  seems  to  signify  that  power  in  nature  by 
which  all  corruption  and  generation  are  effected 
Alchimelec.  (Hebrew.)  The  Egyptian  melilot. 
A'LCHLYS.  A speck  on  the  pupil  of  the  eye, 
somewhat  obscuring  vision. 

A'lchute.  The  mulberry. 

A'lcimad.  Antimony. 

A'lcob.  Sa!  ammoniac. 

Alco'calum.  Most  probably  the  Indian  name  of 
the  artichoke. 

A'lcofol.  Antimony. 

A'lcola.  (Hebrew.)  1.  The  thrush. 

2.  Paracelsus  gives  this  name  to  tartar,  or  excrement 
of  urine,  whether  it  appears  as  sand,  mucilage,  &c. 
Alcoli'ta.  Urine. 

Alco'ne.  Brass. 

A'lcor.  ASs  ustum. 

A'lcte.  The  name  of  a plant  mentioned  by  Hip- 
pocrates, supposed  to  be  the  elder. 

Alcu'brith.  Sulphur. 

Aleara.  A cucurbit. 

Ale'eria.  (From  alo , td  nourish.)  An  obsolete 
term  for  that  which  is  nourishing. 

A'lec.  Aleck.  Vitriol. 

Ale'charith.  Mercury. 

Alei'mma.  (From  «Aa0w,  to  anoint.)  Anointment. 
Ale'mzadar.  Sal  ammoniac. 

Ale'mzajiat.  Sal  ammoniac. 

Alfa'cta.  Distillation. 

A'lfadas.  Aljitles.  ' Cerusse. 

Alfa'sra.  Alphesara.  Arabic  terms  for  the  vine. 
Ai.fa'tide.  Sal  ammoniac. 

A'lfol.  Sal  ammoniac. 

A'lfusa.  Tutty. 

A'lgali.  A catheter.  Also  nitre. 

A'lgarah.  See  Ancliilops. 

Alge'ri/E.  Algirie.  Lime. 

A'lgeroth.  See  Algaroth. 

A'lgibic.  Sulphur  vivum. 

Alguada.  A wliite  leprous  eruption. 

Alinde'sis.  (A.\ivdt]<ns ; from  a\ivfiovpai,  to  be 
turned  about.)  A bodily  exercise  which  seems  to  be 
rolling  on  the  ground,  or  rather  in  the  dust,  after  being 
anointed  with  oil.  Hippocrates  says  it  hath  nearly  the 
same  effect  as  wrestling. 

Alip.e'nos.  (From  a,  neg.  ahd  Xnraivio,  to  be  fat.) 
Alipmnum  ; Alipantos.  An  external  remedy,  without 
fat  or  moisture. 

Alipe.  Remedies  for  wounds  in  the  cheek,  to  pre- 
vent inflammation. 

Ai.i'stelis.  (From  aAj,  the  sea.)  Sal  ammoniac. 
Alkafi'al.  Antimony. 

A'lkant.  Quicksilver. 

Alka'nthum.  Arsenic. 

Alkasa.  A crucible. 

Alke'rva.  (Arabian.)  Castor  oil. 


A'lki  plumbi.  Supposed  to  be  the  sugar  or  acetate 
of  lead. 

A'lkosor.  Camphire. 

Alksoal.  A crucible. 

Alkymia.  Powder  of  basilisk. 

A'llabor.  Lead. 

A'llicar.  Vinegar. 

Alli'coa.  Petroleum. 

Alligatu'ra.  A ligature  or  bandage. 

ALLIO'TICUM.  (From  otAAtow,  to  alter,  or  vary.) 
An  alterative  medicine,  consisting  of  various  antiscor- 
butics.— Gnlev. 

ALLO'CHOOS.  (From  aAAof,  another,  and  xcw,  to 
pour.)  Hippocrates  uses  this  word  to  mean  delirious. 

A'lmagra.  Bolum  cuprum.  1.  Red  earth,  or  ochre, 
used  by  the  ancients  as  an  astringent. 

2.  Rulandus  says  it  is  the  same  as  Lotto. 

3.  In  the  Theatnim  Chemicurn,  it  is  a name  for  the 
white  sulphur  of  the  alchemists. 

Almara'nda.  Almakis.  Litharge. 

Alma'rcab.  An  Arabian  word  for  litharge  of  silver. 

Almarca'rida.  Litharge  of  silver. 

Alma'rgen.  Almaragc.  Coral. 

Almarkasi'ta.  Mercury. 

Alma'rtak.  Powder  of  litharge. 

Almata'tica.  Copper. 

Almeaile'tit.  A word  used  by  Avicenna,  to  ex- 
press a preternatural  heat  less  than  that  of  fever  and 
which  may  continue  after  a fever. 

Ai.meca'site.  Almechasite.  Copper. 

Almi'sa.  Musk. 

Almiza'dar.  Sal  ammoniac. 

At.miza'dir.  Verdigris. 

A'lnec.  Tin. 

A'lneric.  Sulphur  vivum. 

A'lohar.  (Arabian.)  Alohoc.  Mercury. 

Alo'mba.  (Arabian.)  Alooe.  Lead. 

Alph  aee'tum  chemicum.  Raymond  Lully  hath  given 
the  world  this  alphabet,  but  to  what  end  is  difficult  to  say: 

A signijicat  Dcum. 

B Mercurium. 

C Salts  petram. 

D Vitriolum. 

E Menstruate. 

F JAtnam  claram. 

G Mercurium  nostrum. 

H Salem  purum 

I Cumpositum  lunce. 

K Conipositum  solis. 

L Terram  compositi  lunce'. 

M Aqua.m  compositi  lunce . 

N JErcm  compositi  lunce. 

O Terram  compositi  solis. 

P Aquam  compositi  solis. 

Q JLrem  compositi  solis. 

R Igncm  compositi  solis. 

S Lapidem  album. 

T Medicinam  corporis  rubei. 

U Calorcm  fumi  secreti. 

X Igncm  siccum  cineris. 

Y Calorcm  balnei. 

Z Separationem  liquorum. 

Z Alembicum  cum  cucurbitd. 

A'lpiianic.  Alphenic.  An  Arabian  word,  signify- 
ing tender,  for  barley-sugar,  or  sugar-candy. 

A'lrachas.  Lead. 

Alra'tica.  An  Arabic  word  used  by  Albucasis,  to 
signify  a partial  or  a total  imperforation  of  the  vagina. 

Alsa'mach.  An  Arabic  name  for  the  great  hole  in 
the  os  petrosum. 

A'ltafor.  Camphire. 

Altha'naca.  Althanaca.  Orpiment. 

Althebe'gium.  An  Arabian  name  for  a sort  of 
swelling,  such  as  is  observed  in  cachectic  and  leuco- 
phlegmatic  habits. 

A j.tihit.  So  Avicenna  calls  the  Lascrpitium  of  the 
ancients. 

A'lud.  Arabian  aloes. 

Alusar.  Manna. 

Ai/ze'mafor.  Cinnabar. 

A'MBE.  (Apfitji  the  edge  of  a rock;  from  apSaivut, 
to  ascend.)  An  old  chirurgical  machine  for  reducing 
dislocations  of  the  shoulder,  and  so  called,  because  its 
extremity  projects  like  the  prominence  of  a rock.  Its 
invention  is  imputed  to  Hippocrates.  The  ambe  is  the 
most  ancient  mechanical  contrivance  for  the  above 
purpose,  but  is  not  usc-d  at  present. 


APPENDIX. 


A mbIla.  (Arabian.)  The  cornered  hazel-nut,  the 
bark  of  which  is  purgative. 

A'mbulo.  (From  ap(3aXXu),  to  cast  forth.)  Flatus 
furiosus.  A periodical  flatulent  disease  caused,  ac- 
cording to  Michaelis,  by  vapours  shooting  through 
various  parts  of  the  body. 

Amy'ctcia.  (From  apvaau),  to  vellicate.)  Medi- 
cines which  stimulate  and  vellicate  the  skin,  according 
to  Caelius  Aurelianus. 

Ajca'tris.  Mercury.  Ruland. 

A'nerio.  Anerit.  Sulphur  vivum. 

Antaris.  Mercury. 

Anti'ades.  (From  av'Jiaa),  to  meet.)  1.  The  ton- 
sils are  so  called  because  they  answer  one  another. 

2.  The  mumps. — Nic  Piso. 

Archima'gia.  (From  ap%?7,  the  chief,  and  magaa, 
the  Arabian  for  meditation.)  Chemistry,  as  being  the 
chief  of  sciences. 

A'rfar.  Arsag.  Arsenic. — Ruland , &c. 

A'ssac.  (Arabian.)  Gum  ammoniacum. 

A'ssala.  The  nutmeg. 

A'ssanus.  The  name  of  an  old  weight,  consisting 
of  two  drachms. 

A'suar.  Indian  myrobalans,  or  purging  nut. 

A'sugar.  Verdigris. 

Asu'oli.  Soot. 

A'tac.  Nitre. 

Ata'xir.  (Arabian.)  1.  A tenesmus. 

2.  A disease  of  the  eyes. 

Ata'xmir.  (Arabian.)  Removal  of  preternatural 
hair  growing  under  the  natural  ones  of  the  eyelids.  . 

A'tebras.  A chemical  subliming  vessel. 

Atiia'nor.  (Arabian.)  A chemical  digesting  furnace. 

Athena.  A plaster  in  much  repute  among  the  an- 
cients. 

Athenato'rium.  A thick  glass  cover  formerly  used 
for  chemical  purposes. 

Athenio'nis  catapotium.  The  name  of  a pill  in 
Celsus’s  writings. 

Atheni'ppon.  Athenippum.  Thenameofacollyrium. 

Atho'nor.  (Arabian.)  A chemical  furnace. 

Ati'ncar.  (Arabian.)  Borax. 

Atrame'ntum  sutorium.  A name  of  green  vitriol. 

Aurus  braziliensis.  An  obsolete  name  of  the 
Calamus  aromaticus. 

AUTOLITHO'TOMUS.  (From  auto?,  himself, 
A i0o?,  a stone,  and  rspvw,  to  cut.)  One  who  cuts  him- 
self for  the  stone. 

Ava'nsis.  Avante.  Indigestion. 

Ba'iac.  White  lead. 

Ba'rac.  (From  borak}  Arabian,  splendid.)  Ba- 
rack panis.  Nitre. 

Ba'ras.  (Arabian.)  In  M.  A.  Severinus,  it  is  sy- 
nonymous with  Alphus,  or  Leuce. 

Bara'thrum.  (Arabian.)  Any  cavity  or  hollow 
place. 

Barba'ria.  Barbaricum.  An  obsolete  term  for- 
merly applied  to  rhubarb. 

Baro'ptis.  A black  stone,  said  to  be  an  antidote  to 
venomous  bites. 

Bauda.  A vessel  for  distillation  was  formerly  so 
called. 

Bau'rach.  (Arab.  Bourach.)  A name  formerly 
applied  to  nitre,  borax,  soda,  and  many  other  salts. 

Bde'llus.  (From  /?5ew,  to  break  wind.)  A dis- 
charge of  wind  by  the  anus. 

Bdely'gmia.  (From  /?<5ew,  to  break  wind.)  Any 
filthy  and  nauseous  odour. 

Bellu'tta  tsjampacam.  (Indian.)  A tree  of  Ma- 
. labar,  to  which  many  virtues  are  attributed. 

Belu'zzar.  Beluzaar.  The  Chaldee  word  for  anti- 
dote. 

Be'nath.  (Arabian.)  Small  pustules  produced  by 
sweatings  in  the  night. 

Bere'drias.  An  ointment. 

Bkrna'rvi.  An  electuary. 

Berrio'nis.  A name  of  black  resin. 

Bery'tion.  (From  Berytius,  its  inventor.)  A col- 
lyrium  described'by  Galen. 

Bes.  An  eight  ounce  measure. 

Besa'char.  A sponge. 

Bes'asa.  Formerly  applied  to  wild  rue. 

Bksease.  An  old  name  for  mace. 

Bese'nna.  (An  Arabian  word.)  Muscarum  fun- 
gus. Probably  a sponge,  which  is  the  nidus  of  eome 
torts  of  flies. 


Bezoas.  An  obsolete  chemical  epithet. 

Bla'nca  mulierum.  White  lead. 

Bo's  a.  An  Egyptian  word  for  an  inebriating  mass, 
made  of  the  meal  of  darnel,  hempseed,  and  water. 

Bo'smoros.  (From  /Somcw,  to  eat,  and  popos,  a part ; 
because  it  is  divided  for  food, by  the  mill.)  Bosporas. 
A species  of  meal.^ 

Bo'thor.  (Arabian.)  Tumours ; pimples  in  the 
face : also  the  small  pox  or  measles. 

Bo'tia.  A name  givtjn  to  scrofula. 

Bo'tin.  A name  for  turpentine. 

Bo'tium.  Boetum.  1.  A bronchocele. 

2.  Indurated  bronchial  glands. 

Botothi'num.  The  most  evident  symptom  of  disease. 

Bo'tus.  Bvtia.  Botus  barbatus.  A cucurbit  of 
ihe  chemists. 

Bra'cium.  Copper.  Verdigris. 

Burac.  (An  Arabian  word.)  Borax,  or  any  kind 
of  salt. 

C,  in  the  chemical  alphabet,  means  nitre. 

Ca'lcaton.  White  arsenic.  Troches  of  arsenic. 
An  obsolete  term. 

Cai.ce'na.  Calcenonius ; Calcetus.  Paracelsus  uses 
these  words  to  express  the  tartarous  matter  in  the  blood  ; 
or  that  the  blood  is  impregnated  with  the  tartarous  prin- 
ciples. 

Calchoi'des.  (From  a chalk  stone,  and 

si5os,  form.)  An  obsolete  name  of  the  cuneiform  bones. 

Calcidi'cium.  The  name  of  a medicine  in  which 
arsenic  is  an  ingredient. 

Calcita'ri.  Alkaline  salt. 

Calcite'a.  Vitriol. 

Calciteo'sa.  Litharge. 

Ca'lcithos.  Verdigris. 

Calcitre'a.  Vitriol. 

Ca'lcotar.  Vitriol. 

Ca'rabe.  See  Capyridion. 

Ca'rabe.  (Persian.)  Amber. 

ChiSbur.  Sulphur. 

Diami'syos.  (From  Sia,  and  piav,  misy.)  A com- 
position in  which  misy  is  an  ingredient. 

Dysra'chitis.  The  name  of  a plaster. 

Ebel.  The  seeds  of  sage,  or  of  juniper. 

Ebe'smecii.  Quicksilver. 

Ebskmech.  Quicksilver. 

Eccatha'rtica.  (From  eiacaOaipu >,  to  purge  out- 
wards.) According  to  Gorraeus,  eccathartics  are  medi- 
cines which  open  the  pores  of  the  skin  ; but  in  general 
they  are  understood  to  be  deobstruent.  Sometimes 
expectorants  are  thus  called,  and  also  purgatives.  An 
obsolete  term. 

Edes.  Amber. 

Ede'ssenum.  An  eye-water  of  tragacanth,  gum- 
arabic,  opium,  &c. 

E'detz.  Amber. 

E'nic.  Edith;  Eder.  Iron. 

E'dra.  A fracture;  also  the  lower  part  of  the 
rectum. 

E'kfides.  Ceruss. 

Ela'nula.  Alum. 

E'la»iuir.  Red  vitriol. 

E'las  maris.  Burnt  lead. 

Ele'rsna.  An  old  term  for  black  lead. 

Ele'smatis.  An  old  term  for  burnt  lead. 

Ens  martis.  An  oxide  of  iron. 

Ens  primum  solare.  Antimony. 

Ens  veneris.  The  muriate  of  copper. 

Fumus  albus.  Mercury. 

Fumus  citrinus.  Sulphur. 

Fumus  duplex.  Sulphur  and  mercury. 

Fumus  rubkns.  Orpimcnt, 

Ge'nipi.  A term  of  barbarous  origin  applied  to  two 
plants. 

Ge'ryon.  Quicksilver. 

Ilei'dos.  In  the  Spagyric  language,  it  is  the  ele- 
mentary air. 

La'rbason.  Antimony. 

Satanus  devorans.  Antimony 

Sathe.  The  penis. 


This  book  is  given  special  protection  for  the  reason 
indicated  below: 


o 

o 


o 

o 

JO 

<v 

u 

G 

4-> 

• rH 

G 


6 5 S 


t n 
u 
<v 
> 
o 
a 

u 

o 

bjo 

.s 

33  C3 

.S  o 

-Q  T! 
— h cs 


G G 

H CJ 


G O 

CJ  <D 
G *G» 
oJ  -O 
o G 


u 

^ m in 


U) 


rH  G 

•&  .2 

G 

G 

• r-H 

2 a 

fcuo  o 

O 

• r-H 

• rH 

G 

.2 

G 

• rH 

rG 

4-J 

rt 

o O 

"U 

G 

4-> 

C/3 

*4-> 

<L> 

rH 

6 
y— H 

G c/3 

O 

O 

*3 

Vh 

o 

< <J 

u 

u 

W 

E 

